 In this video, we'll be going over how to check and fill the VW ATF for 2005-2010 Jetta

 Mk V and 2011-2014 Jetta Mk VI models with a 2.5L 5-cylinder engine, 6-speed, 0-9G,

 Start by placing the vehicle on an automotive lift or jack stands using factory lift points

 As the engine is warming up, plug the Rostec diagnostic software into the OBD2 port and

 Using the Rostec, first select Control Module, then O2 Auto Trans Control Module, then select

 Displaying Group 006 in Field 1 will allow for an accurate ATF temperature reading.

 Using a 5mm Allen, loosen but do not remove the drain plug at this time.

 Locate and have on hand a suitable waste oil drain pan to catch dripping ATF when the plug

 With the vehicle idling and in a level position, allow the transmission fluid temperature to

 Once the fluid has reached the proper temperature range, remove the drain plug.

 If the fluid level is correct, a small amount of transmission fluid should begin to drip

 If a steady stream of fluid runs out of the fill port and the fluid temperature is within

 35 and 45 degrees Celsius, let the excess fluid drain until it drips.

 Make sure the fluid does not exceed 45 degrees Celsius or 113 degrees Fahrenheit.

 If it does, due to fluid expansion, too much fluid may drain out, resulting in an incorrect

 flow level when the fluid is being checked in the proper temperature range of 35 degrees

 If the fluid exceeds 45 degrees Celsius, reinstall the 5mm Allen drain plug, turn off the engine,

 If the transmission is between the proper temperature range, 35 degrees Celsius and

 45 degrees Celsius, or 95 degrees Fahrenheit and 113 degrees Fahrenheit, and you have no

 fluid dripping from the fill port, you will need to add the approved ATF.

 Add the ATF by using Blauparts' handy ATF Pump Fill Kit, part number J91004, which includes

 the drain plug adapter fill tool, and approved Ravenol T4 ATF fluid.

 After achieving proper fluid level, reinstall the 5mm Allen drain plug and torque it to

 Turn the engine off and exit the Rostec diagnostic software and disconnect the OBD2 plug port.

 Reinstall the lower engine splash pan with a T25 Torx, and remove the vehicle from the

 approved automotive lift or jack stands using factory lift points and procedures.

 As the nation's leading independent Audi and VW specialist for over 25 years, Blauparts

 recommends changing your VW automatic transmission fluid every 30 to 60,000 miles to extend the

 All of Blau Audi VW Transmission Fluid Filter Change Kits feature OEM quality German components

 Ravenol transmission fluids contain proprietary additives that offer unique profile characteristics

You set your arrow rest in the center of your burger button hole.

 Get your left and right in reference to where your cams sit in the limbs.

This particular rest is an AMS rest and it actually has a lot of capturing

 capabilities so that you don't have to worry about the arrow falling off when you're drawing.

 Something that's really imperative is you don't shoot a release.

 you get your knock set in the back side, you have this, these big rubber, the name of the

You knock it with the arrow slide stop to the top so that it doesn't hit the rest

 and this safety slide makes sure that the string doesn't get tied up on the bow and

 time you shoot, you don't have to worry about clicking a button.

 Then when you want to reel it in, you just hold the button in, hold this lever in and

 Alright, today I'm going to teach you all how to do the do as I do card trick.

 You just need one deck of cards and beforehand you just need to flip the last card of the

 Next you just hand over half the deck to your opponent or spectator.

 And then next step you just randomly select a card and place it down.

 After you've done that you exchange and then you place his card in your deck and he'll

 And then you split half the deck and place it on top and the other half at the bottom.

 After you've done that you place the entire deck in your opponent's hand and convince

 Today we're going to talk a little bit about honey-billed dehydrated hash browns.

 We've had questions about these, how to reconstitute them, how they work, and their shelf life.

 First, they have a shelf life of 10 years stored in the can, and then up to a year opened.

 The way to reconstitute them is first boil water, place the hash browns in a container,

 and then you cover the hash browns with boiled water, allowing them to soak for 15 minutes,

 So I'm going to take boiling water and carefully pour it in to my pre-measured hash browns.

 I'll just cover them with water so that they don't become oversaturated.

 We're going to allow these to soak for 15 minutes, and then we'll be back and show you how we cook them.

 Okay, we're now ready to cook the hash browns that have been reconstituting.

 and after they've soaked up water, it's approximately four cups now of reconstituted hash browns.

 I stirred them a couple times during the 15 minutes, and then I did drain off the excess water.

 So I've added some red feather butter to the pan already, and I'm going to add some of the hash browns in.

 I'm going to add a little bit of real salt for flavor, and some pepper to taste.

 As you can see, the hash browns are really a nice color, and they've rehydrated well.

 You don't necessarily need butter or oil, but it helps them to brown better and obviously keeps them from sticking.

 So we're going to cook these up, and then once they're done, we'll show the finished product.

 As you can see, the hash browns have cooked up really nicely and browned well.

 They obviously reconstitute well, they cook well, and the flavor is really good as well.

 Hope you've enjoyed this brief presentation on hash brown potatoes.

 Place the multimeter on a chair and set it to read higher than 240 volts.

 You need to use a set of insulated alligator clips on your test probes so you don't have

 to be touching any wires or touching the dryer while you do this live test.

 Connect the test probes to terminals L1 and L2 on the terminal block like this.

 Connect the dryer to the wall outlet and make sure you don't touch the dryer at all.

 Connect the dryer again to the wall outlet and make sure you don't touch the dryer at

 From L1 to N should be about 120 volts and from L2 to N should be about 120 volts.

 If you get the right voltages at the terminal block then the problem is in the dryer.

 If you don't get the right voltages at the terminal block then the problem could be in

 Hi guys, this is a tutorial on how to remove the valves from an Alfa Romeo Boxer engine.

 As far as I know, this procedure is the same for 8 valve engines.

 There you can see the starboard covers, and once you take them off, there's the valve

 Just for reference, here's the port head that I've already taken the valves out of, except

 for the valve guards as you can see, and also cleaned it up as best I can here in the

 So first of all, you take out this tappet cover so you can see what we're dealing with.

 If it's seized up by the oil, just get the magnet onto it and just take them out there.

 I'm just storing all the different parts in a labelled ziplock bag, just for reference.

 So now you can see the valve assembly, with the half cotters in there, and the end of

 So what you'll need, I'm just using workshop tools, I'm not using the valve removal tool

 You'll need that magnet I had, just an extending locating magnet.

 I'm using the same socket I used to remove the spark plugs from this engine.

 And any kind of scrap, just a long bit of metal with a hole in the middle that can fit

 This just happens to be an aluminium piece from my scrap heap, but yeah, any scrap metal

 So first of all what you want to do is put the magnet through here, extend it a bit so

 And then, you can see where the half cotter's split is, so you put the magnet next to one

 Then you're going to have to push down quite hard because there'll be a mechanical seal

 on it, similar to on the tyre rod ends when you take them out because of the half cotter's

 So you shouldn't have removed anything though, the half cotter's are still in there.

 Making sure it's centred there so you don't hurt yourself or anything like that.

 And you'll hear a slight click as the magnet picks up one of the half cotter's.

 I'm not worried too much about dirt or anything, although I've cleaned all the parts down as

 So there you can see one of the half cotter's is still in there.

 Most tutorials will just, they'll probably show you without this bit of metal here, but

 I've found the boxer engine with its twin springs needs a fair bit more force, so I've

 Give it a bit of a wipe so you don't get the place all greasy, oily sort of.

 And the manual will show you how to put all that back together, although it's pretty straightforward,

 After that, just tip the engine up, the head up, and the valve should just push out like that.

 And there you go, except for the valve guard, which I'll take to the shop to get out.

 Hi, I'm Jason Otterly, service consultant here at Cable Dollar Buick GMC in Kenway.

 Today we're going to teach you how to drop the spare tire from under the bed of your 2015 GMC Sierra

 with the help of your GMC certified technician, Matt Baumgartner.

 The first step is locating the spare tire tools located underneath the driver's seat.

 Lift up the driver's seat, you'll see a plastic cap locking in your spare tire tools.

 Remove the cap and the tools will slide out very easily and bring those to the bed of the truck.

 The second step is to remove the lock cylinder on the rear of the bumper to the right of the license plate.

 Place your ignition key into the lock cylinder, turn to the right and simply pull out the lock cylinder.

 Step three, using these three tools, you need to assemble these together like so.

 Once these are assembled, place the big slotting part into the hole all the way to the back.

 As you do this, the spare tire will slowly start to lower and drop down to where you can access the spare tire.

 Once you have the tire completely lowered, make sure you have enough slack in the spare tire cable

 so you can remove the spare tire freely from the hole inside of the tire.

 I'm here today with char-grilled oysters with a Creole remoulade.

 As you can see, it's a little wet today, but that's not a problem because this is a super

 I had this recipe or something quite similar a few years ago at a food conference down

 And they would never do anything to overwhelm or upstage the oyster.

 I want to show you first how to, well, choose oysters and then shuck them.

 When you're grilling oysters, it's good to get the ones that have a deep bottom shell.

 That means that the oyster is sitting down there in a whole bunch of liquid and that

 So to get the oyster open, what you need to do is find the little hole here near the end.

 There's a small opening and you want to take an oyster knife and position it right in that

 And you're going to have to push pretty hard right into the back of the oyster.

 At the same time, kind of twist your wrist back and forth just until you feel something

 And you want to use a towel like this in case you happen to slip.

 And then you just use the oyster knife and your hand if necessary to just pry the top

 Do it delicately so that you don't break the shell because you don't want any bits of shell

 And you want to be careful not to lose any of the liquid that's inside.

 If there is any shell around the edges, you just want to wipe that off.

 And then lay them flat on a platter, again, trying not to lose the liquor.

 You're basically just heating them up to the point where that liquor just starts to

 And it's important, I think, that it's charcoal because it's going to contribute a little

 It's usually about three minutes or so, depending upon the size of the oyster.

 You probably know that the French have had a big influence on New Orleans and Creole

 Remoulade is not actually a very popular sauce in French cuisine these days, but sure is

 So remoulade really refers to a mayonnaise-based dressing that almost always has some mustard

 In this case, because we're talking New Orleans, I've got Creole mustard.

 Some capers, some horseradish, a little bit of lemon, some green onions, some celery,

 It just kind of elevates the oyster, but doesn't overwhelm the oyster.

 You take them much longer than that, they tend to dry out, and they're much better when

 Again, I like to use the bigger oysters for this, and the sweeter oysters.

 I mean, any kind will work, but these big ones are about three inches long.

 And we want to just accentuate the...there's a creaminess about the oyster, which is kind

 And then you're adding also a certain brininess with the salty ingredients, with the Worcestershire,

 and there's obviously a lot of salt in...there's some salt in here.

 So you can really just taste the oyster and a little bit of that sauce.

 And this sauce, by the way, if you have extra, goes great on a sandwich in place of mustard.

 Beforehand, by the way, I did cut underneath the oyster to release it from the shell.

 So here's to New Orleans, one of the great food cities of America.

 Okay YouTube, this is a video response to DioSpeed's How to Clean a Paintbrush Professionally

 previously thought you should probably clean a paintbrush just by rubbing it with water

 and shaking it and beating it and all of those things that prove rather ineffective.

 you can really see the difference, especially up here at the top of the bristles in the

 so well that I wanted to show myself doing it in a video and also show that you don't

I know at least one of these is five or six years old already and

You can see this brush is a little bit dyed from a purple paint that I

 then just brush that with the paint in it for about 15 minutes while I was looking for

And I might not even worry about this paint that's all along there.

 I'm going to be using this brush later today with some more pink and purple paint.

 actually painting a cheap dresser right now to make it match the room.

I sanded the top layer off of the particle board and primed it so

 can actually see the bristles wiggle a little bit like the Nyxor brushes in Dio's video.

 Now, let's try using the same technique on this older brush that hasn't been cleaned

 It's definitely taking the paint off of the bristles, even though it's long since dried

This brush probably hasn't even been used in two or three years.

 Not going to get overly carried away with this, but I wanted to show you how truly effective

 this technique is with a brush that is in really bad shape, such as this one.

 You can actually see the color of the brush starting to come through the white paint already.

 This certainly makes these old cheap brushes a lot more usable, too.

 To some degree, you'll see bristles come out with the brush a little bit.

 not the case with a higher-end brush, but it seems to be with these Tyna Specials here.

 That's okay, because I've used these probably 10 or 15 times a week.

 Hi everybody, this is Wagtail's latest tool, it's called the Wagtail Swoop.

First impressions, looks pretty good, pretty light, flexible, brilliant.

 looks like the blue ribboned, you can see there, with the disc, and got the orange blade,

 and I suggest that two is better than one, we'll just see how that lasts.

 held on with Velcro, as you can see there, onto this aluminium bar that's held on with

 that one rivet there, and of course the pad just goes on like that.

 the right place, up towards the top of the blade there, not too much, you can actually

 adjust it up and down to varying degrees, according to the circumstances that you're

 to be a good place to put the pad, and we'll have a go at a window, shall we?

 the glass like that, it's supposed to be a wash and squeegee all in one go, or you

 can scrub it like I've just done and then squeegee, just like that.

 with your hand, and you don't seem to get any problems with closing out, as long as

 that's what I'm doing now, you perhaps can't see that, but that's come out an absolute

One of the things you ought to watch though if the windows are dirty, is that this

 tool might not quite get into the edges, the top edges there, and perhaps the sides, as

 well as you'd like, so really I'd recommend this for clean shop windows, maintenance cleans,

 Above the flipper, well I don't know, the flipper you can flip in a split second anyway

 when you're used to it, and there's no issues with getting the pad to clean right up into

Having said that, it's not that bad, but if you've been here before,

 don't forget, because about 10-12 years ago, there was a version of this out before, and

 what it was, was like, instead of the pad going on there like that, there was like a

 plastic bit, the pad was on a plastic sort of sleeve and it would slide on, slide into

I quite liked that, but like I say, the reason I stopped using it, well they stopped

 concept, but like I say, sometimes on a dirty window you'll find it difficult to get all

 are issues with this, I've found, and it really isn't going to be easy to use it on a pole.

 One of those reasons is because you're going to be stepped right back from the window,

 so the actual angle is going to be quite acute there, and the pad is not actually in

 but if you do that, get the correct angle, it might not be so bad low down like this

 on a shop window or something, that's fine, but when you're working high, you're going

 to have problems closing out, because with this angle, it stood back fine, but if you

 get this contact in the glass, come down, but right at the bottom, you're not going

 to be able to get, I don't know if you can see that, you're not going to be able to get

 the right angle, you see how high the pole would have to be to close out there.

 demonstrate that again, coming down there, you want to close out there, you won't be

 this, plus if you're trying to do the top edge of a window, let's see if we can see

 this one here, there we go, the top edge, you won't be able to get to it with the pad

 because the blade is already up there, whereas with the flipper of course, it flips over

 and the actual pad is right at the top of the glass there, you see, so that might be

 you can be good in the right hands, it's going to take a lot of practice, but my recommendation

 is maintenance cleans only, shop fronts, insides, that sort of thing, but if you're used to

 the flipper, stick to that because it's better and it's not going to save you any time really

 this at all and I think you'll do a better job with the flipper.

 They're a medium wax potato and a lot better in a soup like that.

 Health Canada recommends both young and old drink at least two glasses a day.

 To this, I'm going to add a little acidity, just a little lemon juice.

 I'm going to add my lemon juice, just to adjust seasoning a little bit.

 Going to heat it through about five minutes and then I'm going to serve.

 We eat with our eyes, so I like a little color and the chives will really bring out the leek flavor too.

 This trick is called Split the Atom and Jack is going to do it with three somersaults.

 There's a number of steps to this trick so we're going to show you what it looks like

 You may want to watch these a few times before attempting the trick.

 Do this by pushing your non throwhand index finger into the string.

 Bring your throwhand down and then hop the yoyo around the index finger of your throwhand.

 Next do an underpass with your throwhand, splitting the yoyo between the two strings,

 After that, it's a simple matter of doing the somersaults by throwing the yoyo over both fingers.

 Next let the string unwind from the index finger of your throwhand and swing the yoyo off the string.

 Bring it back to your hand and you've performed Split the Atom.

And today I'm going to give you another pressure cooker recipe, sort of,

 that a lot of people over my lifetime have told me they don't like.

 believe them because I think people don't like beets because they've only

 and scare them and tell them it's a little rat tail or something.

 Now you don't have to use water when you're actually steaming the beets.

I'll put that on the airtight mode and then I'm gonna set my time.

 taking 45 minutes in the oven, these are just going to take me 15 minutes in this

Then I can get the rest of my ingredients together and I'll show

 knife you can do it like this and then we're gonna slice this up at the end.

 just going to slice this up nicely just like that and set that aside and wait.

 Okay the pressure cooker cooked our beets and the timer went off and I did a

 quick release on that by using the exhaust valve and I let it cool for a

 that strainer in there for now because it's got all that red beet stuff on it.

 But what I'm gonna do is sort of take one out and put it onto a piece of

 dirty with food and I do like the feeling of food but sometimes you know

 everything up into little pieces and yes I did get a little bit of staining on my

 because I don't really want to muddy up the color of the beets.

 juice and the vinegar on while they're still warm because it helps absorb that

 what a nice little appetizer plate or if you want a nice light dinner have a

 Okay and PS don't forget to add that basil or whatever green herb you're

 Hi, in this video I want to show you how to draw an elegant Easter egg step by step.

 how to draw it even, just click here and watch a one minute video.

 will be symmetric, so both sides have the same design, just in opposite directions.

 So start with the leaf in the center and add swirls to both sides.

I really don't have the complete design in mind, so I am building it up as

Now with the space you have left, you can add more swirls and complete the bottom

 Great, now that we are done with the graphic design on the top, we are just going to complete

 curved lines around the design we have completed and fill it in with the rest of the Easter

 We are just adding some swirls and we are going to leave some empty space so that you

 As you see, once we draw the line that we want with pencil, we just go over it with

 our Pilot Pen and then make some areas thicker and color it in.

 little bit like the one we did on the top, just on the opposite direction.

 We again have the leaf design, one in the center and one on each side and then we add

 Now complete the frame around the design we made till our Easter egg outline.

 Now let's go over with our black Pilot Pen again and complete our drawing.

Don't forget to subscribe for more beautiful graphic designs and check

 our website www.OvernightArtist.com for more beautiful designs.

 This is workout B of the November 2007 turbulence training workout, gain muscle and lose fat.

 So standing with dumbbells in both hands and stepping back, drop your knee down and pull yourself up with that front leg.

 So you step back onto the ball of your foot, balance, drop your hips straight down and then you pull yourself up with the front leg.

 So we'll see it from the side, stepping back, balance, down and then this lead leg pulls me back up.

 So you really focus on the glutes and hamstrings of that lead leg, the stationary leg to pull you up rather than to push you back up.

 So you're going to do repetitions for both sides, so do all for one side then switch.

 We're going to do this one with the ab wheel and we're going to do, instead of straight ahead, we're going to do a diagonal.

 I like to do it up on top of a bit of a riser because that helps to allow you to get a little bit more range of motion in the exercise.

 And if you do that for all the repetitions, you're going to feel like your abdominals have been put through a shredder the day after that one.

 So if you're new to training, if you're a beginner, even an intermediate, even an advanced who's never done this exercise before, just maybe only do one or two sets the first time through.

 If you don't have an ab wheel, just do regular stability ball roll outs.

 In the second superset of workout B, we're going to pair a one leg bench squat with a dumbbell Romanian deadlift.

 So the one leg bench squat, you're going to stand on a bench near the end, drop the outside foot off the bench, then lower yourself and come back up.

 So it's tough, a lot of balance, works the quadriceps a little bit more than some of the other single leg exercises.

 And then after you've done that exercise, move to the dumbbell Romanian deadlift.

 Keep your chest up, strong stretch in your hamstrings and glutes and squeeze them to come back up.

 So down and from here, squeeze your glutes and your hamstrings and drive your hips forward.

 And in the last weighted superset of workout B, we're going to use dumbbell swings and dumbbell rear deltoid raises.

 So dumbbell swings, one dumbbell or a kettlebell if you have it in both hands, drop it down and drive up to chest level.

 All the power is coming from your hips and your arms are just there for the ride.

 And then move immediately into the dumbbell rear deltoid raise.

 So bend yourself over as far as you can safely while keeping your back flat.

 And that's it for the weight portion, then you move on to a bodyweight circuit.

 At the end of workout B, you're going to come and do a bodyweight circuit instead of doing interval training.

 So we're going to start with a Y squat, feet about shoulder width apart, hands up in a Y position and just squat down to parallel and back up.

 Keep those shoulder blades together at the back and try and keep your arms up in that position all the time.

 And then you're going to move into a difficult pushup, we're going to use the spider man pushup.

 After you do your first two bodyweight movements, spider man pushup and the Y squat, you're going to move over and do chin-ups at a 3-0-1 pace.

 So lowering for 3 seconds and you're going to do as many as you can in this bodyweight circuit.

 So probably won't be too many because most people have a hard time with them already, plus you'll be tired from the workout and you're going at a slow pace.

 Underhand grip, starting from a dead hang, up and then 1, 2, 3 on the way down.

 But you're doing as many as you can and then you have two more bodyweight exercises to finish this circuit.

 After the chin-ups, you're going to come over and do Bulgarian split squats.

 So that's where we put the one back leg up on the bench, front leg does all the work.

 So all repetitions for one side, then switch to the other and then move in to the final exercise in this circuit which is mountain climbers.

 Keeping your hips down, abs braced and we're going at a controlled pace in this one.

 That's it, you can repeat that circuit up to 3 times, take a minute rest once you've done the mountain climbers.

The grooves in the wedges is what bites the ball and creates the backspin that you see the top professionals using.

 Without the grooves being sharp there is no way that the grooves can bite into the ball.

Stones, sand, compacted earth, shots in the rough all mean that the grooves depreciate in their efficiency.

It's made with a tool steel bit shaped so that it will not infringe the rules of golf.

It will clean, re-cut your grooves, re-define the edges and keep your grooves legal.

 It's made of tool steel which is 61-63 in the Rockwell hardness.

This is an engineering term that determines the hardness of a piece of metal.

This tool steel is used on lathes and milling machines because it's very hard and it will easily cut soft metal like stainless steel and mild steel.

Then by holding the tool at 45 degrees I use a drawing stroke and just gently without much force draw it through the grooves until it starts to clean up and you see the surface edges come cleaner and the bottom become more shiny.

 After 3 or 4 or 5 passes I can put more pressure into the stroke and I can change the angle to a vertical.

This makes sure that I don't infringe the rules and controls the depth of cut which must not exceed 20 thou.

Furthermore this tool will create the grooves width at 35 thou as and when you get the correct depth.

 I proceed through there and once I've got rid of most of the surface shit I put a bit of oil on there.

If you look at a lathe operator and the mechanism of a lathe using this same tool steel what they have is a lubricant that lubricates the material as the tool is cutting it.

Your clubs will stay legal and furthermore what you'll find is that you get all the spin that you want.

 Hi guys, I just shot this hair look and it's just like a loose ponytail with curls.

 And in the video I forgot to get bobby pins from the bathroom so I just have this huge,

 you guys can see, huge clip in my hair holding this hair in place.

 What I would suggest, after you do this tutorial, to wrap this piece of hair around, I would

 secure it with a bobby pin in the back, not this huge, huge clip.

 But this hairstyle is great for semi-formals and stuff like that.

 I wore drop earrings with it too and I thought that looked really pretty.

 But you could just wear this, I'm probably going to the movies tonight, this would look

 Then brush out your hair and just spray your favorite heat protectant in it.

 So I'm holding the barrel downwards and spiraling it towards the floor, away from my face, dropping

 the curl into my hand, letting it cool for a couple seconds, and then repeating.

 So again, barrel down, spiral away from your face, drop, and cool.

 And then it's really important that you don't burn your fingers, so you want to try to keep

 But your curls don't all have to be perfect because they are going to be in a ponytail,

 so don't worry about getting them really close to your roots or anything.

 Just focus more on getting the curl and getting all your hair curled.

 Now I'm going to take Suave Professional's hairspray and just spray it all over my hair

 The next step is taking all your hair to one side of your head and just smoothing out the

 And then you're going to secure it with an elastic the same color as your hair, leaving

 Now taking the small section, this is the fourth step, brushing it out really quick.

 You're just going to twirl it around the elastic so that the elastic doesn't show.

 And I think this gives a really elegant touch to the hair and makes it a lot more dressy.

 Then I'm securing it with a big clip, but remember, don't do that.

 Alright, so these isometric effects and these vectoring effects are very potent, very powerful

 Another one that comes into play in Aikido is most easily demonstrated if, let's have

 a, come on Damon, let's have Damon make a fist and he's going to put it right on my

 chin and he's just going to push me right over, a long pushing drive, very, very simple.

 Now at the same time, I'm just going to come up with my outside hand again, one finger,

 You have this vector, you see the way that his body went off to the side here, let's

 As he's pushing straight down the line of the camera right through me, he'll knock me

 As I push lateral to it, he's actually pushing in a line over that way.

 I'm just putting a little light pressure here, but the line of force turns into a vector

 This is a very useful tool and he can be pushing hard and it slides off, it's very,

 the reason we do it from a fist is it'll slide off your chin easy, so you don't get a lot

 You can actually be push, push, push, push, push so hard that they'll just pop off or

 they'll wind up, you can take your chin away and they'll wind up just be pushing your fingers

 Push right in the line, feel how it, yeah, it just knocks him over, good.

 And watch how he pops, yeah, it'll just, boing, he can't help it.

 You have a strong line of drive, several foot pounds of energy being exerted, you have

 a very subtle pressure working 90 degrees to that line causing the vector and so the

 proprioceptive system in the person delivering the energy can't really respond to the vector

 effectively and it causes them to pop off to the side when you release the pressure.

 These guys are both pulling me, it's two hands, two hands and you say, well, man, what can

 Well, you can't do a whole lot of change in your feet, I mean, I'm just having to stay

 The hips and the knees create a different vector, a different line of force.

 So changing the vectors of the line of force when strong things are acting upon you can

 create torsion and vectors that you can find very valuable, particularly when you're being

 So by working on these vectors and these senses of isometric torsion and working from the

 feeling of the feet all the way through the body that you have a sense of connectivity

 of the entire torso, we tend to be disconnected from our hips down.

 We tend to not get our mind or our awareness down into our lower center of gravity and

 And over time with practice in Aikido, you'll develop a sense of these tensions, this sense

 of hip and knee and ankle and foot and toe and its connectivity isometrically through

 the whole body so that at will you can shift the attention from the outside foot to this

 hand, the inside foot to this hand, a change in the knee to go to this hand, a change in

 the knee to go to this hand, a change in the hip, a change in the hip, small changes

 Your body's starting, yeah, your body has to, isn't that strange?

 They're all pulling in different directions so that I can relax.

 So that's just a little set of examination of ideas combining the isometric tension in

 Combined together, you get a bunch of exercises, drills, demonstrations, what have you, that

 And so it's a poetic image that's evolved in the culture it comes from to describe what

 you feel happening internally rather than some sort of descriptor of an empirical reality.

 Hi my name is Willis and I'm going to show you how to make 3 lego animals.

 I have no idea what this thingy is but it's bent and it has a hole in the top and it has a little thingy in it, I don't know what it's called.

 and I call these things dog ears because they look like dog ears and I use them for my dogs that I make.

 then you just stick, make sure you have the eyes in front and not on the other side or else it will look weird.

 and the dog ears right here to make it look like the wolf has been shot through the ear.

 you can either stick it up like this to make it look like it's happy or down like regularly.

 If you don't have gray pants just use black pants, if you don't have black pants just use gray pants.

 You also need a 2x2 flat piece and another one of those things that are on the other wolf.

 And so, it's similar to the other wolf but it's a little bit different.

 You just place the two pieces on the legs and then you just stick the pieces like this so they won't break easily.

 Stick the green piece right there and then that on top of it on the neck and then just put the green studs for the ears.

 I didn't have time to draw the eyes on the brown piece for the head and plus I could not find a sharpie so.

 and then you just place the little green stud on the bottom and then onto the little thingy and then there's your forest wolf.

 And last but not least, for the prey we're going to make a grey deer.

 and you need four 2x2 pieces that have the same little markings in it as the 4x4.

 and for the legs we take the pieces and use two 2x2 pieces and use two for each of the legs.

 we take one of the 2x2 grey pieces and stick the thingy on there

 And then you just stick two grey 2x2 pieces for the neck and for the tail.

 You use this piece and use the grey 2x2 block thingy for the tail.

 There's a lot of different wood treatments that you can use when you have wood outside.

 You can lacquer it, you can use some linseed oil on it, you can Thomson's it.

 Now I'm going to use an exterior paint that is a little, little foreign to a lot of people.

 What it's going to do is it's going to soak into the wood really, really well and it's

 There's a little funky thing about milk paint that you need to keep in mind.

 It contains lime and that's how they used to make paint in the olden days.

 You want to make sure that your hands are fully covered and that the paint doesn't touch

 I'm mixing this milk paint mixture a little bit looser than the manufacturer's instructions

 What we're going to do is once we slap this on, the wood is going to completely soak the

 milk paint in and it's going to give it really, really good coverage.

 So when the sun hits my raised beds, my black raised beds, and the heat gets absorbed into

 the raised bed, that's going to keep my composting process going in there.

 That's going to heat up and warm up my raised beds and give it a really good fertile environment

 Now one other thing I want you to keep in mind about milk paint and using it outside.

 Now for every other color except for white, what's going to happen is you're going to

 As soon as this dries and the water starts hitting it, it's going to have little flecks

 and they're going to be a little bit lighter black than what's there right now.

 I think that makes it look even more rustic and more beautiful.

 I can see little touch-ups that I still have to go through, which I'm going to pick up

 Ok, I'm going to show you how to play Turn to Stone by Ingrid Michelson.

 It's a pretty simple riff, but she plays it very, very fast, so it takes a while to

 To start out with, you'll play a C below middle C, then a G, then a C, and an E.

 You play that twice, and then C, G, C, F, then C, G, C, E, twice.

 You play that eight times, then back to C, G, C, E. You play that four more times, and

 Then you repeat that over and over for pretty much the whole song.

 There's one part where it goes down and starts on F. This is before it gets quiet.

 You can pretty much figure out the whole song just using that basic riff on those chords

 Hey guys, here I am and I'm going to give you a tutorial with five faced cards.

 And what I'm going to do here is I just want to go passing cards and you're just going to think of one.

 This is a really cool mentalism trick, very simple, and now I'm going to show you how to do it.

 So, we actually... I actually took this card out, which is not your card.

 And then of course if I show you these your card will never be here.

 So imagine, first of all you have to... these cards, I have them to a side.

 And then I just show you these cards and say... show them individually.

 So you go forgetting about one except you get to the one you want.

 Because your short-term memory will make you forget about other ones.

 You forget all the other ones and I say, well think of one and I've already changed the pack.

 And that's the cool... that's how you do this really cool mentalism trick.

 But you can have the other cards in your pocket and pretend you've scratched your back or something.

 Hi guys and welcome back again to the TechTech YouTube channel.

 You've probably recognized this headset from the picture on the box, as it is Razer's

 Razer recently released a new chroma lineup of their more famous gaming peripherals, which

 came in with a little bit of a different design plus the RGB color customization of their

 Under this release, we also have the Kraken series of gaming headsets, and just like the

 Razer Kraken USB model, Razer Kraken 7.1 Chroma supports the virtual surround sound

 which is, as you can notice, pointed out in the name of that product.

 On the front of the box, you can see three main features pointed out, as well as the

 fact that this is a USB-only power headset, and underneath that, a sticker that says Full

 Spectrum Gaming, and by that they probably meant on RGB Lit logo.

 On the left and the right side of the packaging there is some info about the customizable

 color options, 7.1 surround sound and audio calibration, as well as some talk about advantages

 Backside of the box hides a point-by-point explanation of features alongside with a picture

 of the headphones, and a multilingual round-out of those same features in a expanded form.

 On the bottom side of the box you can see technical specifications, system requirements

 and support for various platforms, amongst them being the PlayStation 4 also.

 Although some Razer's previous packaging can be a little bit complicated to disassemble,

 Opening up the front cover you can see the headphones through this window, and on the

 Taking the plastic and bottom front paper cover off, we pulled out the user manual and

 And here are the headphones in this plastic mold, held down by rubber straps, which is

 a nice change in comparison to the rough plastic ones that you usually see.

 At first glance, design-wise Kraken Chroma isn't that much different from other counterparts

 The headphones are covered in black plastic and metal mesh on the sides, while top band

 The customizable side straps are really strong, like the rest of the headphone build, making

 Just like the inner side of the headband, the 2-meter USB connection cable is wrapped

 The ear cups have enough wiggle room for adapting to the shape of your head, while the ear cushions,

 The microphone is hidden in the left ear cup, and it's retractable and very flexible and

 On it you will find a small button with which you can mute the microphone and thus also

 Speaking of LEDs, on both ear cups you can see the Razer logo, which is customizable

 Here you have some level of control in regards of type of lighting effect, and of course

 audio-related features like the 7.1 surround sound calibration wizard and other audio and

 Thank you guys once again for checking out our unboxing, a quick preview of the Razer

 Don't forget to give us a thumbs up if you liked our video, leave a comment if you have

 any questions about the product and of course be sure to subscribe to our TechTik YouTube

 channel for more content like this, or you can check out our other videos from before.

 we're gearing more toward the Chinese martial arts, Iron Feather Kung Fu and Jin Wan Tai

A lot of people look at Tai Chi as something that old people practice in the parks.

 after showing my students the Tai Chi ball or Jin Wan ball, they're really amazed by

 it and asked me to do a short video explaining the origins and a little bit about the Tai

People brought the cannon over to China and of course with the cannon

The Chinese were quick to pick up on the cannonball and realize the

They noticed that this heavy ball was great in their martial arts training.

 back and forth, not only building their hands and their forms, but getting a lot of martial

 I've heard of men from 10 pounds to 30 pounds and even high as 50 pounds.

 the wooden ball came along and people began to practice this wooden ball and slowly picking

 front of you, then it's a tool that no other martial art has ever shown me.

 down and look at the techniques, it's right there in front of our face.

 a chance and let other people out there see that the Tai Chi ball is an invaluable part

Now, to explain some of the two most important aspects of the Tai Chi

 do this, just watch me free practice and see all the techniques come to life just by free

So I'll take a few minutes here just to free practice so that you can see

And then when I go through the movements after I stop, then I'll call

Now, from what I just did, I'm going to demonstrate and go through what I'm actually

Just by moving the ball around, all martial arts techniques fall under this.

If somebody's close to me, I reach around, grab the nose, twist.

 Take their nose, I reach behind their neck, take the nose, push upwards.

 is right there in the palm of our hand if we take the time to figure it out and look

Just by free practice with the ball, there's no technique that we can't do.

 I hope the students in Union and the students in White Sulphur Springs will appreciate this

 and maybe we'll do more videos later on in classes and pick up from here.

 Hello everyone, today I'm going to be showing you how to do an awesome nail tutorial using

 the Maybelline Color Show color in number 320, green with envy.

 I start off by painting all my nails with two coats of this color.

 Then I took a black Miji nail art pen and I'm going to apply a paisley pattern onto

 Then I'm going to make another little tear drop shaped thing in the middle.

 Then I'm going to put little rings around the whole paisley pattern.

 I'm making little loops for decoration around the whole paisley pattern.

 Howdy folks how's it going welcome to my virgin kitchen, right that's my line, today I'm showing

 you how to make homer simpson style donuts, donuts donuts donuts I've never made them

 before as you'll see I make some different kind of shaped ones by accident but it's cool

 I've eaten a lot of them but if I was gonna make them homer simpson I'd have this posted

 in my bedroom as a kid homer simpson with a giant pink donut just like that and that's

 what I'm gonna make and I've made it and they taste amazing if you wanna have a go at making

 this hit pause on the video, now write them all down this is how you do it.

 First up pour your yeast into the warm water give it a little mix and just leave it to

 stir for about 10 minutes until it starts to bubble a little bit, once that's all nice

 and bubbly into a separate bowl combine your milk, sugar, salt, egg, butter, half of your

 flour and that yeast mixture in and mix it well together and keep adding your flour gradually

 until it's all there well combined and then knead it on a board for a good 5 minutes until

 Put the dough into a bowl that's been lubricated a little bit with oil and then put a foil

 lid not a foil lid ideally cling film I don't have any cling film in our house so I like

 to use foil put it into somewhere warm this is my little warm cupboard in there so that's

 Meanwhile make your sexy pink topping by whisking together in a bowl milk, vanilla

 flavouring and icing sugar and add your food colour just a little speck of that gradually

 whisking it together adding more icing sugar and milk if you need to until you get the

 With your dough ready roll it out nice and thin and cut little doughnut shapes don't

 worry if the dough is looking too thin trust me it does rise as you'll see in a minute.

 For the moment cover the doughnuts in a tea towel allowing them to stand while you get

 your oil nice and hot yeah you need to get that oil super hot this thermometer was being

 rubbish it always breaks it cost me like 20 quid I have to keep buying new ones and they

 keep breaking I'm not learning my lesson but anyhow with the spare bit of dough I plonked

 that into it next to it and I could tell it was getting nice and warm.

 Once the oil is ready dip the doughnuts in there I actually used a spatula but you can

 use tongs whatever you want to do and just rotate it until they're nice and golden brown

 either side and then wrap it on some kitchen towel to absorb that excess fat.

 Make sure your doughnuts are super cool before dunking them in your glaze otherwise it will

 all run off so what we do is we triple dunk it ok so grab your doughnut dunk it in lift

 it out let it rest for a little bit to firm up then dunk it again out then dunk again

 and it will give you a lovely pink finish on there before sprinkling on your hundreds

 and thousands aka vermicelli which I've been told is what is actually the real name for

 it sounds like an Italian pasta to be honest vermicelli I put the vermicelli on my doughnut

 sorry that's terrible but that is it once that's all on there it's looking amazing keep

 it away from your local homer and you will love it for life you can gobble them all up

 and homer won't burst through the door and eat them all so if you enjoyed this video

 don't forget to give it a thumbs up thumbs up yeah that's his foot I think subscribe

 share comment and all that stuff really helps my channel grow much much much much appreciated

 but that my friends is how you make why am I wearing this hat I don't know homer simpson

 This is a very special moment for me my first ever homemade doughnuts don't forget you can

 eat the middle bits as well don't let them go to waste and as you can tell it's my first

 time I made one giant one look at that it's a huge one slightly smaller one I'm just gonna

 go for it right now oh my goodness it's like a nightclub of taste in there I've just realised

 my flies are undone on my jeans good job it's from the waist up it tastes amazing homer

 you will be proud doughnuts all done if you make these send me a picture on instagram

 facebook twitter at my virgin kitchen and I'll see you next time.

 Today we're going to make Bagnacauda, which is probably the most traditional dish from

 What's traditional about it is it's got loads of garlic and anchovies in it, red wine and

 I think we're making enough for six people, so it's about 350 milliliters.

 Just going to cut these into smaller cloves really, not chopping them up.

 We're just going to let this boil and reduce for probably about 25-30 minutes.

 The last thing you want to do is burn half a bottle of expensive wine.

 This garlic, because it's been boiled really slowly, it's very soft.

 So just with a potato masher, I'm going to mash it into all this.

 You have to be a little bit careful now with this precious wine.

 They are much nicer if you can buy them whole just in the salt rather than in a jar under

 Anchovies being anchovies are melting really easily and well into the sauce.

 And I'm just going to start to whisk, and it's melting straight away.

 I'm going to put some olive oil, and I'm working fast here because otherwise it will split.

 And I'm going to put slightly less in volume terms of olive oil than I put butter, I think.

 I don't even need to taste it for salt because I know all those anchovies are going to be

 I think the best way to look after it is to leave it somewhere just warm so that you don't

 So I'm going to leave it just there by the side of the cooker while I get my boiled vegetables.

 And the last thing I'm doing is adding this beautiful new Swiss chard.

 And so we have done artichokes, celery, fennel, carrots, and small Swiss chard.

 Give my sauce a little whisk just to make sure, but it seems to have not split yet.

 Just one of the most delicious ways you'll ever eat boiled vegetables.

 With the Bagna Coda I would suggest you a wine from the east side of the Barolo region.

 I will put it on the side of full body because it's still got some tannin come from the grape

 And you pick up some lovely dried fruit a bit, but also some floral notes like roses

 And I think with the Bagna Coda that will match perfectly the dish.

 Again, just this freshness of the wine and this juiciness is very important.

 Basically just score this because you don't want to nick your aluminum housing.

 You got a little notch here that goes into your notch that you hammered.

 So then you just take and put plenty of anti-seize on these threads so they don't bind.

 And then this piece goes to the beveled edge towards the bushing.

 You could actually reuse that if you wanted to, but not that you'd ever want to.

 I just take my Dremel and just kind of buff up any of these little nicks and scratches so you don't cause a spot for it to crack.

 And this is...you just grease inside here with silicone grease so that that will slide in a little easier.

 Now you just raise the diff up far enough to get the back bolt out and then lower it down just enough to get the rear one into position where you can do the same thing to it.

 Today it's time to whip out those old fondue pots because we're making melting pot cheddar

 Now we are going to start by adding our two types of cheeses in one bowl, and then I'm

 Okay, so in our fondue pot, we're going to take about four ounces of beer.

 Now melting pot actually uses Coors Light, so be sure to grab some Coors Light for this.

 To this, I am going to add garlic, a couple tablespoons of garlic because most everything

 Some Worcestershire sauce, and I'm going to add dry mustard to this.

 We're adding this so we can get all the flavor of mustard without all of the liquid.

 I just want to let the garlic cook for a moment or two before I actually add the cheese.

 Okay, so this is cooking up just fine, and now I am adding cheese.

 Now we're just going to stir and let that all get nice and melty.

 So we've just made melting pot's cheddar cheese fondue so you can transform yourself back

 Be sure to subscribe to my YouTube channel so you can see what's cooking next, and while

 Have you ever wondered how your favorite restaurant makes that special dish?

 Well, I put together over 1,500 recipes that taste just like they do in the restaurant.

 Visit CoffeeCat.com and find recipes from the Olive Garden, Outback Steakhouse, the

 Visit CoffeeCat.com and discover recipes such as the Olive Garden Alfredo Sauce, Olive Garden

 So for the restoration to be a bit of a success, the first thing you need to do is give it a really good clean.

 If it's a really dirty bike, make sure you use some degreaser, as long as you wash it off properly afterwards.

 Like you can see, the start to my bike maintenance was giving the house a bit of maintenance as well.

 It's a good idea to get the various kit you'll need in one place.

 The new brake blocks, the new chain, things such as an allen key, the lubricant and a chain tool as well is probably going to come in handy.

 Depending on how well the repair goes, the alcohol might be a good option too.

 In this video I'll be covering the chain maintenance, which is one of the most common.

 And in a later video I'll be mentioning how you can replace the tyres on your bike, which also fade out pretty frequently.

 So the first thing you need to do is check if the chain is worn.

 And if you just drop it into the chain and it falls into place, then it means the chain is worn out.

 Give the chain a spin until you come across a quick release link, if your bike chain has one.

 And before you throw the old chain, you can use it to measure the number of links.

 So that you can match it up with your new chain, just in case the new chain may need shortening down.

 If the new chain does need shortening down, then you'll need to use a chain tool.

 Now I won't go into this too much here, but I have posted up all the information in the iPhone application Bike Doctor.

 Or you should be able to find out quite easily how to use a chain tool to shorten your chain.

 Installing the chain can be one of those things that is a little bit fiddly.

 And then you can just sort of put it over the top jockey wheel.

 As a final check, spin the cranks and chains through the different gears.

 You should now have a chain that's spinning around beautifully.

 And in the next video clip I'll be covering how to do some tuning up of your brakes.

 Now it's easier to paint the engine and engine bay while it's inside, but we're going to

 This will give it good, even coverage, but it will also allow us to get into every nook

 So I'm going to go ahead, and I got this strapped up, but I'm going to grab John, and we're

 So we're going to paint our engine block with VHT's Gloss Yellow Engine Enamel, but before

 we can get started, we need to make sure that our engine block is nice and prepped and ready

 To do that, we're going to want to sand down the areas where there's some light rust and

 make sure that any areas where there's any chipping, we get those nice and smooth to

 Once we have the area properly prepped, we'll go to our VHT Gray Primer Engine Enamel, we'll

 lay that down, and then we'll lay on our Gloss Yellow Engine Enamel.

 So we want to make sure we get rid of the areas with loose rust, and also any areas

 where there's engine enamel placed, we want to make sure we give it a light scuff with

 So a wire brush will also take care of any loose paint that needs to come off.

 So we used our wire brush and our scuff pad and we removed any loose rust and chips of

 We got the surface as smooth as we can, and now we're going to hit it with our prep spray,

 and that'll give it a nice clean surface to put our primer down on.

 To use your prep spray, we want to spray it on liberally, and then we want to go back

 and wipe off the wet surfaces to make sure it's nice and dry to be ready for a fresh

 So since we have some bare metal and some of the paint from the previous projects on

 we're going to go ahead and use our VHD Engine Enamel and a light gray primer.

 This will allow it to give it a nice smooth surface for us to paint over with our yellow.

 For even coverage, you want to make sure you apply it in a sweeping motion, holding it

 And for the nooks and crannies, you don't want to spray it too heavy in there because

 So make sure to still continue that even sweeping motion in an up and down manner to get into

 So our primer's been drying for about an hour now, and it's dry to touch as you can see

 So we're going to go ahead and lay down our color coat, which will be a nice gloss yellow.

 We'll do two light coats followed by a medium coat, and we'll wait 10 minutes in between

 So VHD's Engine Enamel withstands temperatures up to 550 degrees, but it's also great for

 It's also great for customize, restore, and protect your engine block.

 We went through about two and a half cans, and you can see for a yellow and a big block

 engine, it covered pretty well, and I'm pretty happy with the way this yellow looks.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to let this cure overnight, and then I'll start putting

 With the engine out, it's now time to get started on painting our engine bay.

 To do that, we're going to use our roll bar and chassis paint in gloss black, but before

 we can begin any of that, John's going to go through some of the prep work that needs

 Now for its age, this engine bay is actually in pretty good shape, but we've got a little

 bit of rust and some loose paint, so we're going to hit that with a wire brush and knock

 that all down, and then come back with some Dupli-Color cleaning products and get it good

 Now we have some areas where there's a little bit of rust that's left behind.

 We're not going to be able to solve that, but we can stop it from spreading using our

 The other good part about that is that once we spray the rust converter, it'll be a nice

 There's some other areas where there's some bare metal, like here and on the front.

 Our self-etch primer will work great for adhesion to bare metal, and it'll give it a great primed

 You want to apply two to three light coats with no more than two minutes in between.

 Make sure to hold that about eight to ten inches away from the surface when spraying.

 Once it's converted, you'll notice that the surface turns black.

 That means you have a nice primed surface that's ready to be painted for your top coat.

 It'll give it maximum adhesion to allow for a great, smooth looking top coat, and it'll

 Remember, when you apply it, if you apply two light coats, it'll avoid runs and sags,

 but the VHT self-etch will be dry to touch in about ten minutes.

 Any areas where there was bare metal, we used our VHT self-etch primer, and then we've also

 One thing we wanted to note was we taped off the areas where the AC and the cooling are,

 and then also we taped off any areas where we don't want the engine bay to show where

 Now that we're properly prepped and scuffed, we're ready to paint the engine bay with our

 So to apply our roll bar and chassis paint, this is a self-priming formula.

 So you want to apply two to three coats, light coats first, about ten minutes in between

 So I laid down three coats of paint to two light coats, followed by one medium coat,

 and all in all, I went through about two cans of our VHT roll bar and chassis paint.

 Now the gloss black is looking great, but it's also protected from chemicals, rust,

 We're going to let it dry about 24 hours, and then we'll go ahead and work on putting

 So we used our roll bar and chassis paint on our engine bay, but there's plenty of other

 So let us know what you can do on our Facebook page, and stay tuned as we continue to work

 Just have a quick dip into all sorts of colours and you get all these nice variations.

 You can see how it's drying there but I'm going to do it anyway.

 I've just left a tiny little gap just to break up the real trees from the reflection in the water.

 It looks best when the paper is still wet but I'm a bit lost out here without my hair dryer.

 I'd be out here for ages if I was wetting it, drying it, wetting it, waiting for it to dry all the time.

 In fact, if I just get my card, there's a little house over on the horizon.

 I'm going to get the 3 1⁄4 inch flat brush and then just damp it.

 I'm just going to create that house just by taking the paint off.

 Rather than it just looking as if it's just hanging there, just cheat slightly and we'll have some closer trees and stuff in front of it.

 As long as it looks roughly like a reflected church in the water.

 You can see just a very subtle mark there and it just gives that impression.

 There are some more... I didn't really need to clean the brush but it doesn't matter.

 I'm going into the same colours, Raw Sienna, Ultramarine, not too wet.

 Then just using the corner of the hake, starting on the left hand side.

 Obviously the further forward we come in the painting, the stronger the tones.

 I always like to have the strongest tones right in the foreground.

 the block and I'm going to be using some VersaMark ink so I can do the embossing.

I'm actually going to be cutting this out, so it really doesn't matter where it's

The first one I'm using, I think it's from the ink color from last year

 This would be a whole lot easier if you had a sponge dauber, but I don't have any.

 Ball that up and I'm just going to start dabbing it in the center.

It starts to pick up or fill in the areas around that embossing.

 I'm going to start adding that ink around the edges of that Razzleberry color.

 Now to finish off the tips of the flower I'm going to use some So Saffron.

Now I'm going to get the rest of the card ready to put all together.

 and then I'm going to put another piece of card stock over top so that you can't see

 bit of Dimensional Adhesive on the top and bottom of the flower.

I'm going to take some Rich Razzleberry card stock and I'm just going to cut a band

 This is my slim ps3 and I will be showing you how to do the hidden fan thing.

 You can turn on your fan on the inside to blow out all the dust and crap that's inside

 As you plug it back in you want to hold the eject button at the same time that you are

 At the same time you hold the eject button you plug it in and as you can hear the fan

 I will be making a video next showing you how to do it on the old ps3.

 I'm going to draw a little bit of the bridge of the nose inside so I can put the other

 Now the nose is going to come around but at the top of the nose I'm going to put a little

 Now the mouth, I'll poke up right here, put a little grin line, a couple nostrils just

 I'm going to put a couple wrinkles under there and then I'm going to go ahead and pop in

 It doesn't have to connect because that's where I'm going to put the neck.

 So I'm going to come up like this and swoop up to the tail but halfway through I'm going

 So I'm going to put just a ridge of a wing there and then cut in these cool little guys.

 And then I'm going to draw the other wing on the other side almost exactly how I drew

 I'll try to copy the exact same line shape as the one in the front.

 And then with this line I can continue on to the back of the tail like so.

 I'm going to come back to the front and draw the neck going into the chest and then I want

 So I'll come down like so and I know I'm going to want claws so I'm going to draw three claws

 Then I'm going to start drawing the belly and then again I'm going to stop right here

 So I'll draw it exactly how I drew the front pretty much like so and then I'm going to

 Come up and swoop the tail but I'm not going to connect it because this is where I want

 Now I'm going to mirror that leg in the back with another leg and then I'm going to put

 another paw in the back side, a couple of toes and a couple of wrinkles and then I'm

 So with the belly I'm just going to kind of taper off to the tail and I'll add a few lines

 Add a few dots, some spots and then I'm going to make this guy a fire breathing dragon so

 I'm going to add a little bit of fire to his mouth just like so.

 Add some eyebrows so he's happy and there we have it, a fire breathing dragon.

 Hi, I'm Jenny Nichols, Culinary Coordinator at Central Market in Mill Creek.

 Today, we're going to make a beautiful grilled salmon and raspberry vinaigrette salad featuring

 I'm making this vinaigrette with beautiful, fresh local raspberries, but out of season,

 The vinaigrette made with frozen raspberries will keep in your fridge for several days.

 I'm going to take about half of those, put them into the bowl, and just mash them up

 You don't have to puree them, just kind of give them a good smash.

 Next, we're going to add three tablespoons of raspberry vinegar.

 After that, we're going to add one teaspoon of Dijon mustard and then one teaspoon honey.

 All right, now you just have to season it with a little salt and pepper.

 I've got some kosher salt, a little freshly ground black pepper.

 I'm cooking with sockeye salmon today, and I've left the skin on.

 A lot of the fats and essential oils are right underneath the skin.

 So when you cook it with the skin on, you get more flavor and you get a lot more of

 An average sockeye filet is probably going to take somewhere between six and eight minutes

 Then I'm also going to drizzle my salmon lightly with oil and season it with salt and pepper.

 Let it sit for a little while longer, and that'll give you those nice crosshatch patterns.

 I can see that the salmon is cooked about halfway up the side, so I'm just going to

 My salmon is cooked perfectly, so it's time to come out of the pan.

 I'm just going to remove it to a cutting board, let it sit for a couple of minutes while we

 I'm going to add some of the dressing, but not all, and the rest of our beautiful fresh

 I'm going to toss it very gently, season it with salt and pepper, and then we'll put it

 Put the salmon on top of that, and then drizzle your reserved dressing around the plate and

 You can put a few extra reserved raspberries on top just to make it look really pretty.

 Hey guys, it's Amanda with Getting There Green and today we have Randy behind the camera.

 But it is time to plant my sweet potato slips into my straw bales.

 The straw bales have been curing now for a couple of weeks but it should only take about

 10 days to cure them if you follow the instructions that you see in my previous videos.

 But just because of time and stuff, I didn't get them planted after 10 days but it's okay.

 You can have straw bales sitting for a year and then plant them.

 So if you focus down here, there's a straw bale and you need to make a hole in the hay

 It's like a rake handle and you shove it in and then you push it around and make a hole.

 You want to put some compost or some nice nutritious soil down in there.

 If you're wondering why I'm wearing gloves, you don't have to wear gloves for this but

 I kind of recommend it because straw is kind of pokey and scratchy.

 Yes, this is using actual, like, soil or compost but it sure uses a whole lot less than if

 And once the sweet potatoes are ready to harvest, they'll actually come out pretty clean because

 I'll update you when it grows and takes off and looks fantastic.

 Take the two sides of the X, pinch in, and squash down the top.

 Crease it, then take the top of the flap and fold it onto itself.

 You might need to push down a few sides, but this is what you should end up having.

 Flip your paper over, and fold up the side you just made, like so.

 Now take those flaps we created earlier, and stick them under the wings of the top of the tank.

 If you don't like the wings, you can just tuck them away, right between the wheel and the top flap.

 Now we're going to gently pop out the wheels, using your thumb and pushing it outward.

 Now to make the barrel, you're going to need a few extra supplies.

 Take a sticky note, find the sticky side of the sticky note, and roll it up into a tiny little cylinder, I guess.

 You want it to be as small as possible, so that the barrel will fit inside the tank.

 Now if you're using tape, pull out a small side, and tape in the ends.

 Now take your tank, take the barrel, and fit it inside this small gap.

 Push the barrel back as far as possible, so we can even the tank out.

 If you have any questions, please email me at foldmypaper at yahoo.com.

Do you often feel hungry in the morning, somewhere around 10, 11 a.m. ?

 You've had your breakfast and you should be okay until lunchtime, but you can't help yourself.

 candy bar filled with unhealthy fats, refined sugars and other crap, treat yourself to

Simon loves them, especially when he goes out mountain biking with his friends.

 So let's have a look at the ingredients we will be using today.

 To prepare these superfood energy bars, you will need almonds, which have been soaked

 almonds if you don't have a dehydrator at home, but just know that your dough will be

Cashews, pumpkin seeds, which are really high in vitamin E and essential

 will act as a binder, but it's also loaded with healthy fats, so it will nourish your

 brain, which means you will be able to stay focused at work and it will also nourish and

 they will also provide your body with all the glucose it needs to stay energized and

So the only equipment you will need for these energy bars is a food processor,

 fitted with an S-blade and a rubber spatula to scrape down the sides.

 do is combine all of our ingredients into the food processor except for our dates.

 now I'm going to mix these together until they are finely ground and then I'm going

 And I'm only adding these last because they will immediately bind everything together.

 So if you want your pumpkin seeds, your cashews and all your other ingredients to be finely

So now you can turn this fresh dough into small truffles so you always

 have something sweet and healthy in your refrigerator when you get home at night.

 tray like this one, line it with some plastic foil or baking paper and then add your dough

 and put it in the fridge or even in the freezer for about one hour until it gets really firm

If so, please give it a thumbs up and share it on Facebook, Twitter,

So please leave a comment down below or go to julieslifestyle.com and

And if you are looking for even more free recipes to start your raw

 get your personal copy of my free raw recipe e-book called Julie's Top 7 Fast, Easy and

I've got a couple ugly colors that I think will go well with my ugly situation here.

I've got some tips that were told to me and I'm gonna just try to execute this and see if it works.

 And if it doesn't work this time, I'm never ever ever ever doing it again.

It's kind of like my water marble for the first time, Conan for the first time, crap like that.

I'm still not home next to all my nail stuff because I'm in the Navy.

They told me to place the tape and then paint it and then 5 seconds later peel it off.

 And I'm going to do my next color on the tips and the next color is going to be this blue.

 But I'm going to go ahead and do a top coat right now and wait quite a long time until I do the next coat, the next scotch tape.

 I am the most impatient person in the world so I'll probably never do chevrons again.

 It might peel off my yellow because I haven't waited long enough.

Today I'm here with the fabulous and amazing Miss Paola from Fighting Paola.

For those who don't know, I mean I'm sure everyone knows who you are.

It's mainly a head wrap line and it's really a movement to empower women.

 And it's all sorts of women around the world, not just Haitian women.

 I started the head wrap because the head wrap is one of my wardrobe staples and then it just keeps on going.

 So we'll get back to head wraps, but let's first get down to cooking.

 You want to have your fire on medium low because you're not trying to burn your corn.

 So you just want it to cook, but also get that nice char-grilled taste on it.

So basically we're just going to put it flat and we're just going to remove the kernels.

I love seafood, but especially shrimp and lobster and clams and mussels.

 So this in here is equal parts of scallions, garlic, parsley, green pepper, red pepper.

I used to use water, but it doesn't hold as well, especially when you keep it in the refrigerator.

 So you blend all that goodies, all that goodness together, and then you have your foundation for cooking.

 Then you add a little salt, since I knew I was going to make shrimp with it.

 Add a little salt to it, and basically that's our seasoning base.

 If something doesn't have the equal parts scallion, garlic, all of that goodness, like she calls it, it's not good.

 I like arugula because it has a little bit more texture and flavor.

 But to me, protein, whether it's chicken or shrimp, that's how you really bring a salad to life.

 So we're going to go over to the stove and basically make some crish.

 So if you're using a cup of, whether it's lemon, lime, vinegar, balsamic vinegar, anything acidic.

 We're making a honey lime vinaigrette, so we're going to mix in our honey.

 Because if you know arugula has almost a little bit of bitterness to it.

 And the salad is really, like I said, the grill flavor and the impies of the shrimp and the chargrilled taste of the corn.

 Sup guys, this is Xtendy coming to you with another unboxing video.

 We are filming in HD so switch your settings up to 1080p to get a better view at the shoe.

 So you guys seen the match up this Christmas against OKC and the Heat.

 So let's get on with the review starting with the bottom of the Lebron 10.

 So you got your translucent bottom in that Tourmaline colorway.

 You got the X in the back in the red and the Lebron window in a red and a green colorway.

 You got your 360 zoom air visible bag in a Tourmaline colorway and you still got a little

 If you look through the bag you can also notice the zoom air bag in a Tourmaline colorway

 At the top of the midsole you got that University Red colorway with another hue of a darker

 The whole upper of the shoe is made out of that hyperfuse material.

 And you also got these mesh windows over here in a red colorway.

 The inside swoosh comes in the Tourmaline colorway as well as the swoosh on the outside

 And you can also notice the laces come in that Tourmaline colorway as well.

 If you check out the dynamic flywire you can also notice a little hint of red on that Tourmaline

 The Christmas Lebrons come with the darker red mesh tongue followed by that padded tongue

 Finally you got your Lebron James logo on the pull tab in a darker red, red and Tourmaline

 Shoe come with the red lace tips as you can see and with the Lebron James signature in

 And on the inside you got your red lining along the ankle and on the inside of the tongue

 Alright guys so these shoes will be available at Exquisity on December 26th.

 You can contact us at 514-846-8887 for more info on how to purchase these shoes.

 You can also check us out in the downtown area at 1326 Notre Dame West.

 Check us out also in the West Island area at 4870 Rene and Marc Pierre Faux.

 These shoes will be available at both locations and check out our website at www.exquisitylife.com.

 Hi guys, I wanted to show you how to make orange white chocolate chip cookies.

 These are so delicious and they're a little bit different so they're a great cookie to

 add to the mix for the holidays just to try a new cookie recipe and I'm sure you'll love

 You're going to need a cup of butter and you'll want to let that soften.

 You're going to need a half cup of sugar, a half cup of brown sugar, one egg.

 You're going to need two and a quarter cups of all purpose flour.

 You're going to need three quarters of a teaspoon of baking soda, a half teaspoon of salt, and

 I have my one cup of butter, half cup of sugar, and half cup of brown sugar in my mixing bowl.

 I just use the zest and the juice from one large orange and it gives it a really yummy

 And to get the orange zest, I just use a microplane and that way it grates it very finely so you

 To another bowl, I added two and a quarter cups of all purpose flour, three quarters

 You'll want to beat your butter and sugars until it's light and fluffy and then you're

 Once your butter and sugar, orange zest and egg are nice and creamy, you're going to add

 I kind of add a little bit of flour and then a little bit of the orange juice and just

 You'll just drop a rounded tablespoon of the cookie dough about an inch and a half or so

 apart and then you're going to bake them at 350 degrees for 10 to 12 minutes.

 Okay mine took 10 minutes, but every oven is different, but 10 minutes was perfect.

 So they'll start to get a little golden brown around the edges and you're going to want

 to let them sit on the pan for two minutes just to continue baking.

 As you can see they're nice and fat so they don't spread out a lot or anything and I think

 So just let them sit on your pan for two minutes and then remove them to a baking rack.

 Okay you're just going to let your cookies cool for a few minutes before you store them

 They're a great new cookie to try if you're looking for something a little bit different.

 You can definitely make these at any time of the year, but they are a great addition

 So if you have any questions at all feel free to comment below.

 I will add the recipe to the description box so you can find it there.

 A little while ago I was sent a dragon story to illustrate, Dragons Dinner, by Susanna

 And I've never done a dragon story before so I was quite excited by the idea of designing

 The good thing about drawing a dragon of course is because they're mythical, which means they're

 And the dragon in this story, he's a bit rubbish really, he has a bit of a hard time and he

 does a lot of chasing after things but he never actually manages to catch anything.

 So I wanted to make him quite funny rather than quite mean and aggressive looking.

 And I thought it might be quite interesting to show you how I designed the dragon.

 I decided he'd have this very big head, very silly spots, and I gave him quite specifically

 very little wings because I didn't want him to have gorgeous big dragon-y wings because

 the trouble with that is he'd be able to catch stuff and in the story he doesn't actually

 So I gave him these silly little wings so he couldn't fly and I made them quite so batty

 and pointy so they'd look a bit mean and evil even though he's not very effective at being

 So if we want to have a go at drawing a dragon, we need to get ourselves a bit of paper, a

 pencil that's probably not an HB, I quite like a B or a 2B for sketching with because

 it's just that little bit softer and it makes it easier for making quite sort of light sketchy

 And one thing that's worth knowing is sometimes when I watch children drawing, they often

 hold their pencil a little bit too near the end, they hold it like that and what that

 does is it makes you draw really hard on your paper and it's a lot easier if you hold

 it a little bit further back, just like that, and then you've got a little bit more movement

 And if we draw things with light sketchy lines, we don't have to keep rubbing out all the

 Okay, so if I want to start drawing an animal character, what I'd normally do is start with

 big simple shapes to give me an idea of where the head and body are going to go.

 So the dragon has quite a big head, so let's sketch in just a sort of squishy oval shape

 and he's got quite a skinny neck and then his body is actually not that much different

 Doesn't matter if these aren't quite right, I can go back and change them later.

 Now my dragon, I decided to give sort of pointy ears, almost rabbit-y type ears and

 I always give my animals two eyes even though their head might be sort of more sideways

 because it makes it easier to show facial expressions, so there's his eyes and we'll

 imagine him sort of looking at something he might be chasing down there.

 Okay, I'm going to draw over the top of this now and start to bring it to life a bit and

 So there's his ears, that's one ear, give a bit more shape and let's draw in the first

 So if you decide that one ear is bigger than the other, you know, you can just sort of

 You can make evil eyes by first of all making the eyelids go down in the middle like that

 and then of course by giving him evil eyebrows which again should point down in the middle.

 So that gives him a bit of proper shape and I'm going to make this into quite a big evil

 grin up here and then of course I can draw lots of pointy teeth.

 He needs big nostrils so that the smoke can get out because of course dragons breathe

 If I was going to close his mouth I could just draw that line in but if you want to

 open his mouth you just put that line there, put the teeth in and then you just join it

 up at the back there to where the neck is and you've got an open mouth.

 And his back is going to come down there and then where I get to sort of the bottom section

 here I'm just going to turn it into a big long tail and you can wiggle that off wherever

 you like and the other side of his tail gets closer and closer and closer and then ends

 Now my dragon was based on a T-Rex and T-Rexes have quite little front arms don't they?

 One at the front and one at the back and then we can bring his belly down there following

 So let's start them there somewhere in the middle of his belly and put them right down

 here and again like a T-Rex he's going to have feet that bend a bit in the middle there

 Now the other leg, if he's running, needs to come out the back here so we're going to

 start about there and half of it of course is missing because it's behind where his tail

 If you're running you want that back foot to face downwards at the floor.

 Okay, let's get a bit of dust and stuff, make him run a bit faster and maybe some claws.

 And of course his wings, so you can only see one, he's going to be quite small.

 It's almost like drawing a roof shape really and then you just pull the pointy bits in

 And I gave him scales all the way up his nose, so that's sort of like triangular shapes really.

 Sort of bigger as you get towards the middle of his back and then as you go down his tail

 That's quite good because then you haven't got to worry about whether you're doing them big enough

 because it can't be wrong really can it if they're all different shapes and sizes.

 Keeping one's hair healthy is one of the challenges faced by many women.

 We're constantly surrounded by elements that are harmful to our hair, thus it is important

 to treat hair periodically to ensure it remains strong, soft, and shiny.

 Introducing the Inova Professional Hair Smoothing System, the Keratin Smoothing and Repair System.

 Our system utilizes nanomolecular keratin whose particles are so minuscule that millions

 Because the nanokeratin particles are so small, they can be deposited within the damaged hair

 cuticle, coating the hair with keratin that the hair may be lacking or may have lost over

 Coating the hair with keratin in this way creates a thicker outer layer of keratin,

 Shampoo the hair twice with pure keratin clarifying shampoo to remove any residue from hair and

 If you're working with virgin hair, hair that has never gone through any chemical treatment,

 Blow dry the hair without combing or brushing until it is completely dry from roots to ends.

 Shake the bottle of pure keratin ultra hair smoothing treatment well and pour three ounces

 Divide the hair into three or four sections with the sectioning end of the silicone.

 Carefully spread the treatment with the brush end of the silicone, starting close to the

 Spread treatment through hair using the comb side of the silicone for even distribution.

 There is no need to concentrate on straightening the hair at this point, only on drying the

 Divide the hair into three or four sections, further dividing each section into smaller

 Use the Inova Professional Titanium Pro Flat Iron at a temperature of 450 degrees.

 Pass the iron over the full length of the hair, starting close to the scalp or nape

 Flat iron each section until the desired level of shine and smoothness are achieved.

 Inform your clients not to wash treated hair for 72 hours or three days.

 Hair must not be tied back with hair clips or elastics or pushed back with headbands

 If hair becomes wet, dry immediately and pass a hair iron through it.

 For daily care, wash hair using only the Silk Keratin Smooth Protection Shampoo and Smooth

 For treatment maintenance, recommend the Pure Keratin Revitalizing Booster.

 For hair that is frizz-free and fabulous, use Inova Professional and have a good hair

 Hey it's Coffee and Nachos and today we're making an iced coffee.

 For the ingredients you're going to need 2 cups of milk, 2 scoops of vanilla ice cream,

 Now to add the ingredients to the blender, I'm going to add 2 cups of milk,

 and depending on how strong you want your iced chocolate to be,

 Now that all the ingredients are in, we're going to blend it up.

 Now that it's blended up, we're going to add a few ice cubes in the cup.

 And knowing me, I'm going to add a bit of coffee for that coffee kick.

 Comment, turn on notifications, subscribe, and leave a comment.

 If you request anything else or inbox me, like it if you liked it, subscribe for more videos.

 Hi everyone, I'm going to share a really yummy recipe with you today.

 This is something that was served on my stay at Banana Island with the Food and Sport crew

 And it was something that was served to give us a little bit of a break from all the bananas

 And this recipe is super juicy and delicious and very hydrating.

 The ingredients are one Tuscan melon or one cantaloupe and 16 ounces of fresh squeezed

 I was really surprised to learn that citrus and melons were actually a good food combination.

 I am not aware of the exact proportions that they used during my stay on Banana Island.

 But I know it's going to be delicious because it really is a good combination.

 I have a full Tuscan melon that I'm going to put in the blender.

 So I'm just going to blend it on high and get it nice and smooth.

 This makes a really good hydrating breakfast or lunch or a great meal to take on the go.

 Tuscan melons are great because they're a lot sweeter than a cantaloupe.

 Even though the outside sometimes can look like it's not quite ripe, they're actually

 And it's really helpful for learning what foods go well together.

 It's glossy, so anything that you might spill on it is easily cleaned up.

 Beautiful pictures and great charts for what certain foods are, whether they're sweet or

 I just can't recommend this highly enough if you want to have the best guide in terms

 This is available on my website, and I'll put links below if you'd like more information.

 Cantaloupe and the Tuscan melons are really high in thiamine, B6, niacin, magnesium, super

 I know a lot of people think, oh, you can't get your healthy fats from just fruits and

 There are quite a few fruits out there as well as vegetables that have tremendous amounts

 Over the past year I've had a whole lot of requests from you guys for me to start making

 Today's video is just a test for me to get a feel for it, because a lot of you guys don't

 know this, but for the past three weeks I've actually been injured.

 That's also why I haven't been able to upload as many videos as I normally would, but for

 those of you who have been asking what happened, about two minutes after I filmed this hard

 flip, I actually landed a really bad primo off that same block.

 And, yeah, I got some real bad heel bruise and haven't been able to skate since then.

 I can't do any flip tricks or jump around too much yet, because it's still pretty sore.

 This video is mainly about the video I'm bringing you and getting some feedback from you guys.

 So if I do decide to make trick tips in the future, I'll be able to make them more to

 Alright guys, I want to get on my board and I want to get this started.

 Today I'm going to be teaching you a pretty basic trick because a lot of you guys already

 So today I'm going to be teaching you the flat ground 900 frontside kickturn, which

 Because this trick is pretty basic, the only things you're really going to need to know

 are how to hold a manual on flat ground for 5 seconds, and how to do a frontside kickturn

 and have pretty good control with your fakie frontside kickturn, because this trick is

 You don't even have to know how to ollie manual, so it's really good for if you're learning

 When I do this trick I like to do it just standing on the spot at the skatepark.

 You can do it pretty much just at slow rolling pace from the fakie position, otherwise if

 you do it any faster than that you're going to be flinging out and falling over and it's

 I actually learned it in a small garage, which I didn't have much room to roll.

 So you can just start off with a quick 180 and then try to slow it down a bit for the

 manual position so you can get a feel for some of the manual balance.

 You want to move it up to a 360 and then a 540, 720 and then up to the 900.

 You want to keep going up, up and up and up and up until you get to, with around 540 I

 In the turn when you start to get to the higher numbers, like the 540 and the 720, you'll

 realise that most of the balance is in this back pocket of the board, just down here.

 You'll feel comfortable in this position and you'll be able to keep rotating.

 Sometimes when I'm doing these I get a little bit lost as to what number I'm up to.

 To make it a bit easier, I just remembered that the 900 is 2.5 full rotations or just 5 180s.

 So you might want to count that out as you're coming up past each 180.

 What you always want to make sure you're doing is spinning, winding up before you start the rotation.

 So before your front wheel is off the ground, wind back and then you go.

 It helps keep the momentum and you'll be able to keep that rotation going.

 So pretty much your front foot can go wherever you want it to go, whichever feels comfortable for your manuals.

 And the back foot, I usually put it right in this pocket of the board and put my heel straight in here.

 Basically there's not a lot that can go wrong with this trick because it is so basic.

 Alright guys, so that was my first ever attempt at making a trick tip.

 As expected, it rained out that day and both my cameras went flat, the batteries died.

 So I'm out here today to finish off this video, to give you guys something so you know what's up, where I've been and what's coming.

 Let me know what you liked about it, let me know what you didn't like.

 So if I do decide to make more trick tips in the future, I'll be able to make them more to your liking.

 Also make sure you click like on this video if you do want me to make more trick tips in the future.

 So then I'll get a rough idea as to how many of you guys actually want more trick tips.

 As soon as I'll be able to skate properly, I'll be able to teach proper tricks like kickflips and stuff.

 So today's trick was just a joke, kind of just a joke, but yeah, just to give a format of the video.

 So yeah, I did do my first kickflip back from injury while filming this video.

 It hurt a bit to do that, but since then I've been out skating a bit more.

 I filmed an ollie over a bin, so if I can get that footage I'll put that in here too.

 A lot of you guys don't know, but I'm also on Twitter and on Instagram.

 I use that for uploading videos like just random stuff that I've filmed around the house,

 editing tests and also mainly I use it for uploading vlogs to let you guys know what set up I'm rocking or what shoes I've got.

 On request, here is a tutorial on how to tie ayangar madhusar using a sithyaj saree.

 Start with wearing a petticoat or like in this case, knee length shorts and use a string and tie it very tightly around your waist.

 I chose to go with shorts because I found the petticoat a tad bit uncomfortable.

 Starting with the top end of the saree, with the correct side of the saree facing outside, make a tuck right in the center.

 Pick the bottom end of the saree right below where you made the initial tuck and bring it behind you from between your legs to make a tuck in the back.

 Moving back to the front, start tucking the top end of the saree working in counter-clockwise fashion.

 While doing so, bunch up the saree on your left thigh and continue with your tuck.

 Once you reach the tuck that you had made in the back, remove the tuck from its place and hold it tightly in one hand.

 Use your other hand and gather the rest of the saree and bring this tucked in portion from under the saree back to the string and tuck it in.

 Once tucked in, continue tucking the top end of the saree till you reach the right side of your waist.

 Based on my experience, I would suggest that once you make the tuck in the back, that you tie it into a knot with the string.

 This is because every time I try to stretch my legs or adjust the saree, the tuck would keep falling out of its place.

 Tighten the saree around your left thigh by pulling on the lower jeriga of the saree from under the tuck.

 Since I am a heavy set woman, I need to use as much saree as possible to make this style comfortable.

 So if you are a smaller person than me, I don't think that you would need to bunch up the saree as much as I did on my left thigh.

 Moving in counter-clockwise fashion, once you reach your right waist, make a couple of normal pleats and tuck it in.

 Make another set of a couple of pleats and tuck it in at the centre of your waist.

 Once you are done with the tuck, keep your feet apart at shoulder's width.

 While keeping your feet apart, bring the saree around you and drape it over your left shoulder like you would do with a normal 6 yard saree.

 At this point, pull on the top end of your saree as much as you can and pin it in place.

 Trace the end of the saree that has been pinned and pull it tightly while bringing it to the front.

 Fold the pallu in half and make a tuck at the left side of your waist.

 I doubt if you can notice, but my pallu is actually inside out.

 The reason I do this is because this is the only way I can get the saree to be loose around my legs.

 Pull on the end of the saree that hasn't been pinned at the shoulder and adjust in a way that you have more saree around your legs.

 This way, the saree won't go up your legs or restrict your movements.

 In the next section, I will show you what the outcome would be if I choose to wear the pallu the right way.

 Following the same step, fold the pallu in half but now with the correct side of the pallu facing you.

 In this case, in order to make the saree cover and drape all the way to the left of the waist, I need to pull on it real hard.

 And while doing so, you can notice that the saree is now really tight around my legs and the right leg is exposed.

 Again, if you are a smaller person than me, this might actually work out for you.

 If you have any questions, please do let me know in the comments section.

 After a while of walking in this saree, it will tend to go up your right leg and you can adjust it by pulling on it, which is exactly why we tied the knot.

 Because had you not tied the knot and you tried to adjust the saree, the tuck would fall out of its place.

 But I must mention that this style is not very comfortable to wear since the sixyaar is not supposed to be worn as a maddisa, but you could wear it for small functions at home.

 I feel that folks of our generation do not have information readily available on the internet about certain cultural practices and traditions.

 I would hence like to contribute towards documenting informational videos about the same.

 It could be anything ranging from how to cook a food item to how to celebrate a festival.

 Welcome to the latest edition of Encore's Down Home Cooking Show.

 I'm Ishmael Simmons and today what we're going to do is we're going to do a very simple

 So what we're going to do is we're going to start by grabbing our ingredients.

 What we're going to do is grab a stick of butter, our pre-shelled shrimp, let's see

 what else looks good in here, our heavy cream, we've got garlic by our stove already, and

 So what we're going to do is we're going to grab our Miracle Blend Spicy Creole Sauce,

 Now I already have some water boiling and one pan already heating up.

 So I'm just going to touch this with just a tab of olive oil, just so that our shrimp

 So what we're going to do is first because we already have our water boiling and our

 noodles will take the longest to prepare, what we're going to do is we're going to start

 We're going to come back over here to our pot, nice pot of boiling water here.

 We're going to add maybe about a quarter to a half of the amount of fettuccine noodles

 Now some people break their noodles, I know I personally do, other people don't, they

 It all really is your own flavor and your own personal preference for that.

 Now I know some people are probably wondering why didn't I put olive oil in the water.

 Well honestly, olive oil does absolutely nothing for your noodles while it's cooking.

 All it does is, you know, some people say, well doesn't it keep it from sticking or anything

 The olive oil does not actually take effect until after you take it out of your water

 So now that we've got that going, what we're going to do is we're going to start with our

 We're going to take about half a stick of butter, which is a quarter cup, we're going

 And while that's going and melting down, what we're going to do is I already screwed

 Now with your garlic, what you want to do is you want to mince up at least one clove

 Or if you have like a jar of your garlic here, you want to just take like a teaspoon of your

 Now what we're going to do is because I did say I had some pre-shelled shrimp, what we're

 going to do is just touch it with a little bit of the Miracle Blend Spicy Creole Seasoning.

 Now we're going to let this sit to the side for just a moment because you kind of want

 Kind of keep an eye on everything and give it an opportunity to breathe.

 So while our butter is melting here, take a look here at our noodles, which are cooking

 Now what you want to do is with your noodles, you want to let them cook for like maybe seven

 So what we're going to do is, we're going to take one step ahead and we're going to

 Now these are medium sized shrimp, just seasoned quite well with the Creole seasoning.

 Just a little hint of lemon zest on there that was added from last evening.

 Now a lot of people wonder about shrimp and how it is that you prepare them and how do

 Normally with shrimp what you want to do is you want to look for them to turn pink.

 A lot of people say red, but you really want them to be pinkish.

 This usually takes about a minute or two, give or take, your heat levels.

 We already have our butter melted down, which is really good for us.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to take that teaspoon of our garlic.

 Now give it a time to get its aroma together and really just get a nice flavor going in the inside.

 Now also, one key ingredient to an Alfredo sauce is actually Parmesan cheese.

 So, what I've done is I've already pre-measured one cup of Parmesan cheese.

 And this is going to go in our sauce and add a lot of flavor to it.

 I have a 91 Mission BC 3000 we're going to do a timing boat on.

 It's got the quad cams so I'm going to show you guys a trick on how to do that, make it

 First we start taking these covers off, motor mounts, engine belts, easy stuff.

 And once we get all that down we'll show you what's going on inside.

 Now we're just pulling the timing covers off, the timing belts.

 And then there will be one bolt here and two bolts on the top for the alternator, kind

 Get that out of the way, then you can take the rest of your covers off and engine belts

 Okay there's two bolts over here if you can't see them behind the alternator for this engine

 mount and you have to take those two bolts out, they just go straight in like that.

 And then there's three bolts over here, you'll see those, those are out.

 You have to take this idler off to get these covers off, just two bolts, real simple.

 Alright now I'm going to take the balancer bolt out so we can get the balancer off of

 Now you just work it back and forth a little bit and she should come off here in a second

 Okay now we're lowering the car down onto a jack stand, raise the motor up a little

 What you do if you don't have a new tensioner, we have a new one, we're going to replace

 it, but if you're not going to replace it before you pull the tensioner off, before

 you take the belt off, you slide a little pin in there just to keep it from moving out,

 that way your tensioner don't go all the way out because you'll have to have a vice to

 And always put it on top dead center before you pull the timing belt off and check your

 And like I say, if you don't have a new one, you can put a pin in like that, but you really

 Now I'm just going to turn the motor over to a fine top dead center.

 You don't want to go slow, you don't want to break a bolt or anything.

 You just turn your cam until your marks line up, that way you know you're on top dead center,

 you'll have a dot on each one of these cams and you'll have these little marks on the

 And on this one, same thing, you have the two little marks on the inside of the dots.

 The back's a little harder to see, so if you take a light, make it a little easier, you

 And once you put the engine in time, and you know for sure it's in time, this pin and the

 Okay, when you pull your belt off, your cams may turn back and forth either way, but they're

 not going to turn very far, so you just turn them back to where they are.

 Okay, if you're doing the water pump while you're doing the timing belt, make sure to

 I usually take the whole bracket off just to make it easier with more room, it's just

 Okay, so when you take the pump off, you're going to have to take the whole thing out

 because there's a bolt in the back going through the housing, and it keeps that front in line

 So when you do change the water pump, make sure you change this oil ring in the back.

 And nine times out of ten, it will leak if you don't change it.

 You just take a little pick and stick it under there and pop it out.

 So you want to kind of put it back in the same spot just like it was, it was just like

 If you don't have a tool, you can use snap ring pliers or anything like that.

 All you're doing is turning it for the belt to make the belt tension.

 The way you know you got it close is it's going to kind of look like a happy face, straight

 If you've seen some of the other free art lessons, then you understand I'm trying to progress from very, very simple to more complex.

 So if I start out talking about fibula and tibia and so on and so forth, I've lost you.

 So let me start out with reducing the legs to some very simple rectangles.

 If you can begin by visualizing, understanding, visualizing that legs are two sets of rectangles.

 The thing I want to show you, and I've exaggerated here slightly just so that you can catch it.

 The thing that I want you to see is that both our upper leg and our lower leg can be simplified as rectangles slanting in.

 They are out at the top, in at the bottom, and then, this might be a surprise to some of you, the calf, the lower leg, begins again out at the outside, in on the inside.

 Let me finish these legs out a little bit so that you'll actually believe me.

 If you saw me on one of the earlier sessions, you might remember that I said it's often helpful to characterize the joint either as a diamond shape or a sphere, a circle, either one.

 Long curve on the outside of the leg, outside of the thigh, actually double curve on the inside.

 Then the knee, the calf runs straight down parallel to that rectangle.

 Down here, the ankle is especially helpful to characterize as a diamond.

 Long curve, double curve, sides of knee, inside of calf, outside of calf, maybe a line to indicate.

 You could characterize it as an inverted teardrop, and most of the time, if you do that, if you simply then erase the top of the teardrop, that's a pretty good knee.

 Another way to do it is to see the knee as two intersecting, what do we call that?

 A doohickey, that's the technical term for this shape, I think, is a doohickey.

 This will be a person facing to our left, and that means it would pretty much by definition have to be a left leg, wouldn't it?

 We're doing simple, simple things so you can get started right and probably do legs better than you would if I didn't tell you.

 One of the important things to understand is that the front of the knee cap, the knee does not point straight forward.

 If you get that right, you'll get your leg from the side a lot more accurate.

 Now, while I'm on this page, let me go ahead and do a leg from the back very simply, especially to show you that often, not always,

 Then the calf muscle is actually a double dip thing coming down to the Achilles tendon.

 That's a really bad drawing of the leg, but if you follow what I'm describing, you'll get the basic idea.

 When the leg is bent, the top of the thigh is elongated and the inside of the thigh is constricted, so it's more of a steep curve.

 If you haven't seen feet yet, this would be a good time to do that.

 Go get some good books and get more detail about how to do legs.

 Hi guys, it's Chris with the Science Center and I've got a fun combination of science,

 you can make your own with dish soap, water, and a little bit of glycerin, but I like to

 solution into your container and you want to get a pretty thick layer of bubble solution

Next you are going to take your straw and blow bubbles in your solution, kind

 circles and that's because it's really hard for bubbles to form other shapes because they

 want to keep the minimum surface area and that shape just happens to be a circle.

 now drop your food coloring in and it will catch on the edges of your bubble shapes.

 Next take your paper and lay it on top of the bubbles and you should have a print of

So as you can see, bubbles are a great way to combine science, math, and

 How does this instrument make its revolutionary history change in sound?

 My name's Dr Mark Looney, I've got a PhD in guitar acoustics and in the next three minutes

 When I pluck a string, it vibrates and makes a sound by moving from side to side.

 The pitch of that sound depends on how fast it moves, the fundamental frequency.

 When I fret a note, I make the string shorter so the pitch rises.

 When I press down my whammy bar, there's less tension so the pitch drops.

 All of these strings are the same length and the same tension, it's just the lower pitched

 And to get really low notes, they've got to be really thick, which curiously also applies

 But when you pluck a string, it doesn't just move from side to side.

 The rich sound you get comes from other patterns, the harmonics.

 When I rest my finger halfway along the string, so that it vibrates either side of my finger

 If I rest my finger closer to the end of the string, a third of the way along, so that

 it vibrates at three times the fundamental frequency, I hear the harmonic of the second

 If the fundamental's at 100 hertz, the harmonics are at 200, 300, 400, higher and higher, all

 Things sound nice because these regularly spaced harmonics are all happening at once.

 Now on an electric guitar, magnets convert the harmonics into sine wave signals.

 Guitarists in the 1960s tried turning the volume up past the fidelity limits of their

 And those false electronic harmonics got their own false electronic harmonics.

 Today on Stupid Fast RC we take a close look at some grass right before we rip it out of

 Ok so take some Glad Wrap or Cling Wrap depending on what you want to call it where you are.

 Get something super absorbent, a feminine hygiene product is good if you know what that

 main reason for doing this is that some of those little rubber seals that come with the

 cars quite often get damaged and don't work very well after a while.

 in you may actually want to use the nozzle that came with the silicon and not do it the

 that you prepared earlier and just squeeze that lightly on and just let it skin a little

 Glad Wrap will stop the silicon sticking from the top and bottom and so you will be able

 will stay there and anything that goes below will be absorbed by the material that you

 with silicon and so now that should be completely and utterly water tight.

 use that in the lid of the silicon so that it doesn't actually stick to itself.

 time you want to get this lid off it will be really easy to take off.

 Here is a delicious dish to enjoy with all your family and friends.

 Any mushroom will do for this recipe, but of course porcini mushroom, the king of the

 Add a little oil in a small pot, bring it to temperature and then all together add garlic,

 Add salt and pepper, then add porcini mushroom, a drizzle of red wine and allow it to evaporate.

 Now add the berilla boiling sauce and bring to simmer and cook for a couple of minutes.

 When boiling, add salt and then add the pasta and stir, always to make sure the pasta won't

 Strain pasta al dente and make sure to toss it with the sauce for up to one to two minutes.

 Remove from the heat, add a little bit of baked ricotta, stir and finally add some grated

 Make sure to try this meal today, it's an easy way to share the taste of Italy at home.

 Push back the cuticle and remove any excess Trigium from the nail plate.

 Using the 180 side of a Le Chat 100 180 file, gently remove the shine from the nail plate.

 Brush off the excess dust using a sanitizable nylon manicuring brush.

 Spray the nails with the Le Chat Gel Cleanser and wipe the nail plate clean.

 It is very important not to touch the nail plate after this process is complete.

 Wait for the nail to appear chalky white before beginning the base gel.

 Apply a thin coat of Le Chat base gel to 3 quarters of the nail.

 Sprinkle the Le Chat powder gel lightly over the nail, turning the client's finger to achieve full coverage.

 Repeat this process on the remaining 3 fingers, saving the thumbs for last.

 It is very important that you concentrate on the side walls of the nail.

 Place the 4 fingers in the center of the UV light for 10 to 15 seconds.

 Keep the base gel 1 sixteenth of an inch away from the cuticle.

 Sprinkle the powder gel lightly over the nail, turning the client's finger to ensure proper coverage.

 Repeat this process on the remaining 3 nails, saving the thumbs for last.

 Place the 4 fingers in the center of the UV light for 3 minutes.

 Be sure that the cuticle and side walls are tapered and that the nails are even.

 Again, it is very important to make sure the cuticle area is tapered and clean.

 Using a Le Chat white block buffer, smooth the nails and make sure they are even.

 Spray the Le Chat gel cleanser directly on the nail and wipe with lint-free pad.

 This will remove any oil that may have contaminated the nails during the filing and buffing process.

 Begin in the center of the nail and lightly push the gel back into the cuticle area.

 To smooth the nail, please be sure that you brush the gel in a downward stroke.

 Place the four fingers in the center of the UV light for 10 to 15 seconds.

 It is very important to seal every part of the nail with the top gel.

 Place the four fingers in the center of the UV light for two minutes.

 Spray the Le Chat gel cleanser directly on the nails and on the lint-free pad.

 Apply a generous amount of Le Chat scented cuticle conditioning oil.

 Now you and your client can enjoy beautiful, natural Le Chat powder gel nails.

Today I am going to show you how to make Bindanu Shak that is a Gujarati

As per I have taken this half kg of Okra or Bindi which I have chopped

This is 2 table spoon of red coconut, 1 table spoon of coriander

 powder, 1 tea spoon of cumin powder, half tea spoon of garam masala, 2 tea spoon of

 sesame seeds, salt as per taste, 2 tea spoon of grated ginger, 2 green chillies, I am

 going to use a pinch of hing or asafoetida, 1 tea spoon of lemon juice and few coriander

Even you can add a spoon of sugar, lemon juice, coriander leaves.

 Take the vacuum exhaust off and when you reinstall it, always clean it.

 And I like to put a little glue in here or some adhesive so that if it does,

 if water blows out the exhaust, it doesn't actually get into the motor cavity.

 So then turn the machine upside down and remove these four screws and these metal straps.

 When you take your machine apart, it may not have these nylon spacers.

 The factory started doing it on this back machine that had these two nylon spacers.

 I suggest if you don't have those that you go down to the hardware store

 But what happens is the machine is dropped quite frequently as you take it

 over a curve or down the steps and these areas will get some structural fatigue cracks.

 Okay, now you took the strap off, you take a screwdriver, begin to remove the vacuum

 And then to actually remove the vacuum from the housing, it's quite simple.

 You back them off, the motor will come right off and there's a little gasket there.

 You have to be sure to hook your hose on and then set it in place.

 If you have any questions, you can always contact us through our website,

 This pasta is all about zucchini, and we're going to need 1 3 quarter pounds of young zucchini to make it.

 And I say young zucchini for a purpose because the flesh will be firmer,

 it will have less seeds, and therefore it will be less watery, and that's very important.

 And we're going to slice the zucchini in ribbons to mimic the thickness and size of the pappardelle.

 Now slice the zucchini lengthwise, and the first slice I discard because it's all skin.

 Now you want to put a lot of pressure on the peeler so that your slices end up as thick as you can get them.

 Make sure you separate the ribbons when you place them in a bowl.

 Heat a large skillet over medium-high heat, and when the pan is hot, add the olive oil.

 Stir that well so the basil is well coated with the oil, and we're going to saute for about 2 minutes,

 Wilting the basil is going to concentrate its flavor and add so much depth to our sauce.

 As you see, the basil is starting to turn a dark color, so we are ready to proceed.

 Stir that well again, and we're going to saute until the tomatoes soften.

 While you're sauteing the tomatoes, stir occasionally, just so that they cook evenly.

 It's been about 5 minutes, and as you see, the tomatoes have softened.

 But they're still in chunks, and that's exactly the way we want them.

 Stir well, and now turn off the heat and remove the pan from the stove.

 To make this dish truly special, you can make your own pappardelle,

 with either semolina flour or chickpea flour, which is so delicious.

 And if you're going to use store-bought pasta, I recommend an artisanal, handmade egg pappardelle like this one.

 And as soon as the tomatoes sizzle, add the pasta, the reserved pasta water, the zucchini ribbons.

 Just spoon the pasta in bowls, and garnish with the crumbled goat cheese.

 This is going to add a little bit of creaminess, absolutely irresistible.

 And finish with a drizzle of lemon oil or extra virgin olive oil.

 This pasta is very light, but as you saw, we put loads of wonderful ingredients into it,

 Hello everyone, welcome to Christmas Eve, which is the 11th day in the 12 days of demos.

 I decided to do a bubble bar that a lot of people have requested, even though it's not

 It's the last one I have of these and it's probably at the point where I need to use

 So this is the gingerbread house bubble bar, and it looks like a little gingerbread house

 It's a little, well it looks like half of a cinnamon stick to me.

 This is a really spicy scent, kind of like cinnamon and different types of spices.

 It doesn't seem too spicy right now, but I think that's because it's been in lush packaging

 from the Lush UK from last fall, and I haven't put it in the water yet.

 I'm sure it will be pretty spicy once I start putting it in the water and making bubbles

 I'm not the hugest fan of gingerbread house, so if it does seem a little too much for me,

 I might use a little bit of my Santa's sack reusable bubble bar at the end just to kind

 But I'm using it with Setsuma Santa, so hopefully that will help too, because that's kind of

 Anyways, a lot of people do like this that love spicy bath soap, and it didn't come out

 It came out as a retro item online, but I don't think it's available anymore.

 I think it just came out for a month or a few weeks and now it's gone, at least on the

 But hopefully they'll bring it back next Christmas for those of you guys that just love gingerbread

 So I think the thing I love most about it is that it's really cute.

 So what I think I'm going to do is just have it go in the water stream and not worry about

 Once I get it in the water stream, all the way I might change to Jets.

 Okay, I really love the scent of the Santa's Back bubble bar, both the regular one and

 So I'm going to go ahead and put some of this in the bubbles because I just love the scent

 And like I found with my other demo, holding it right under the water height where the

 I'm also switching some around the water because I think I'm going to use my Jets for

 I'm going to hit the Jets just for a minute so I can make sure that reusable bubble bar

 Yeah, just a really bright orange because the gingerbread house, the house part is orange.

 So, anyways, I hope you guys have a wonderful day and have a Merry Christmas Eve.

This is going to be a project of turning a lamp, regular household

 nose pliers, kind of like a spanner wrench or whatever they call them, to get it out

They have a little reflector on there, like this, which I'm not going to use

 just wrap the wire, wrap the solder around the wire, hit it with a little butane torch,

 to use is, these flashlights use three, don't have the body of it no more, flashlights just

 came out of, I should say the LEDs that came out of the flashlight.

 I'm going to use three AA's which is still the same voltage, four and a half volts, but

 battery gets, the more current you can get, the more amps, but I've never had trouble

This way, if I have a power outage, or say I want to come out to the workshop

 real quick, I don't have to turn the power on, it's pretty bright.

I figured out I have enough room to put the switch in here and the battery pack.

This is small wire off an old surround sound stereo, house stereo.

 are one cup five grain cereal, two tablespoons natural honey, one half cup skim milk, a handful

 of raisins, a handful of dried cranberries, a handful of chopped apricots, a handful of almonds,

To begin we'll bring five cups of water to a boil in a saucepan.

 the water comes to a boil we can turn it down to medium heat and then we'll add in our five grain

Five grain cereal is really wonderful because it has oats and rye and wheat and

 triticale and flaxseed and these are all whole grains that are really wonderful and important

 and just stir it around and we'll let it boil for just a second before we turn it down again.

 grains are often called whole grains because they have the three parts of the grain still intact and

 not stripped away and those are where all the nutrients are in the bran and in the endosperm

So this cereal has all of those so it's really full of powerful nutrients

Now that we're up to a boil again I'm just going to turn this down to a simmer and let it

 cook for about 15 minutes or until all of the liquid is absorbed.

 has finished cooking and as you can see it's absorbed all of the liquid.

 I can stir clear to the bottom and clear away a little path of the cereal because it's become

 nice and thick and creamy and that's exactly what we want is to have that space when we stir the

Now we're ready to add our other ingredients and the first thing

 that I'm going to add is two tablespoons of honey but you can add it to your taste it doesn't have

 to be two tablespoons this really gives it a nice nutty taste and just helps it to really

The great thing about having all of the five grains is that we have

 such a contrast in textures in the taste of this dish so it's creamy but you still have a lot of

 the cooking time the cereal also but I like to add them at the last minute so they retain a little bit

 of their firmness and here I have some dried apricots which I'll continue to add right in

 great ingredients in it a lot of vitamins a lot of minerals a lot of fiber.

 Hi everybody, I'm Kimberly Edwards with cookingwithkimberly.com and tonight I'm making steak and baked potatoes

 Even though it's a little cold outside I'm going to brave the elements to get something

 They're fast and easy this way and then what I do is I put them on the grill to get some

 So I'm going to do them in the microwave and if you've never done potatoes in the microwave

 It's the simplest thing on the planet, easy side dish, you don't even have to worry about

 I have like a couple small ones and a big one so I'm going to do them all together for

 So I'm going to use a fork and I'm going to stab it all over, put it on a dinner plate.

 Next what I'm going to do is I am going to, this is kind of messy, use some oil.

 Now you can use olive oil, I'm using canola tonight just because it's easy and that's

 Or you can use peanut, whatever like that, safflower, sunflower, whatever.

 You're going to use, put it on your hands, you're going to just rub it on your potatoes.

 It's a marinating steak and I just did a video for that so make sure you check that out on

 When they bake in the microwave, the liquid on the outside of the potatoes kind of disintegrates

 Now for three potatoes, three normal sized potatoes, I had three of them were kind of

 small and one was big so I'm averaging that they're average three potatoes.

 After ten minutes I'm going to go in there and I'm going to use, you can either use a

 fork or you can use a nice little sharp knife and just go like this into the middle and

 You're going to use just enough aluminum foil to cover each one of the potatoes up when

 You throw them on the barbecue when you put your meat on and stuff.

 If you put them on the barbecue from the beginning and you have to cook them that way, they'll

 take forever, it'll take all day long and you have to put them on way before your meat.

 So bake them this way and then throw them on with your meat, it's already ready and

 You don't need to watch this, I don't think, the microwave for ten minutes.

 We can sit here like this if you want to but it doesn't make sense.

 Follow me on Twitter at CookingWithKimE, go to the Facebook fan page and like it.

 The shows are on YouTube, youtube.com slash CookingWithKimberly.

 If you can not see I wouldn't be all this glammed up for nothing

 Okay so first we are going to be taking the EOS lip balm in Vanilla Mint

 With a Sigma E25 I am going to be taking the color Unconditional

 Today I'm going to show you how to make trail mix stuffed chocolates.

 I've melted some chocolate chips and this time I did it over hot water because I ruined

 a whole batch yesterday by leaving it in the microwave too long and I wound up burning

 I'm going to pour it into this little pitcher just because it will make it easier for me

 Then I'm going to take some trail mix and put it down into the chocolate.

 Cut some of the trail mix up smaller and drop a few pieces on the top.

 If you like this video, please click like, please share it on your social media sites,

 please comment below, and please subscribe if you haven't done so yet.

I have basically took down my quick weave and now I'm about to do a protein treatment that I'm going to do on my hair.

 What I have done is I have actually broken up two eggs and I put it inside of a cup.

 You can go ahead and just scramble it up like you're about to scramble it.

 What I do, my easiest way to do it is I actually get a plate and I just pour the actual stuff inside of it.

 If the plate is not deep enough, just pour a little bit at a time because it's easier when you're able to just stick your fingers in and add it to your hair.

 So what I have done is already placed it on the actual paper plate.

 What I'm going to do now, again I have already washed and conditioned my natural hair.

 I want to let you know the shampoo that I shampooed it with was called Curly Sexy Hair.

It basically makes your hair so soft and manageable and everything.

 So if you do have natural hair, try the shampoo Curly Sexy Hair.

 The shampoo as well as the conditioner, both of them lather up really really well and make your hair look really really good.

 You know natural hair always draws up so it has drawn up so bad.

 You actually, if you want to, you probably could actually put it inside of a spray bottle.

 I've never tried to spray it on but I think it looks like it might be the easiest thing to do.

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to let this sit for about 30 minutes on my hair.

 If I don't get under the hair dryer, what I'm going to do is just put a plastic cap on.

 So make sure you do have a plastic cap handy because you will need that.

 Make sure you really get those edges because I just took down a sew in.

 Sometimes when you had your hair up for a while, braids, anything, it kind of makes your hair...

 You weren't able to take care of it as good as you would if it didn't have all the different braids and stuff in it.

 And once you get finished, what you're going to do is you're going to actually just put on a plastic cap.

 But doing this protein treatment is going to make your hair so, so shiny and so soft.

 So again, that's just me showing you how to do a protein treatment.

 I also have videos on how to basically take down your quick weave or glue bond.

 So I just took the whole day to take down my hair as well as do a protein.

 I hope everybody take care, be blessed, and rate and subscribe.

 This dish, which I call fried ramen, is a variation on the traditional broth and noodles,

 In order to prepare this dish, you're going to need one package of ramen, about three

 tablespoons of vegetable oil, about one teaspoon of cumin powder, one teaspoon of extra hot

 red chili powder, one teaspoon of dried chopped jalapenos, and a pinch of hot curry powder.

 You're also going to need a tablespoon, a teaspoon, a measuring cup, a frying pan, a small saucepan, and a spatula.

 First, we're going to prepare the ramen according to the directions on the package.

 While we're waiting for the water to boil, let's measure out our spices.

 When your water comes to a rolling boil, then it's ready for the noodles.

 Add the ramen to the water and then cook the noodles for as long as the packet says.

 While we're waiting for the noodles to cook, we can start heating up our oil in the frying pan.

 Pour in enough oil just to coat the bottom of the pan and then spread it around so it's evenly distributed.

 Add the packet of spices that came with the ramen to your other bowl of spices.

 When your noodles are done cooking, you need to drain them of the water.

 Hold the lid tightly over the pan and just tip it until all the water has dripped out.

 You know your oil is ready when you can flick water onto it and it evaporates immediately.

 Now add the noodles and then use a spatula to stir them so you can get the spices mixed in evenly.

 If the noodles start to stick to the pan, you can add a little bit more oil.

 the BM2000 motor block and is available in kits containing specific attachments or attachments

 and continuous run button for safe operation and convenience, as well as variable speed

There is a variety of attachments and options that are available

The 16-inch mixer tool attachment is constructed of 1810 stainless

 contains an RPM regulating system that controls the speed of the mixer.

 of product, the Master 2000 DSC always maintains the same RPMs.

Great for high-volume restaurants and difficult textured products.

 The whisk attachment has 10-inch tines made of 1810 stainless steel.

Great for dairy products, eggs, egg whites, meringues, souffles,

 potato ricer allows you to mash up to 50 pounds of potatoes at one time.

 wash with a mild detergent, rinse and wipe with a clean dry cloth.

All of these attachment options will be available in the future.

 Dyna-Turbo offers you the ultimate in flexibility and streamlines your food service operation.

 Hello, this is Bruce with the balloon world.com and today I'm going to make for you a dinosaur.

 Just blown up a little bit, we're going to use it for the teeth.

 And then I'm going to make one more pinch twist a little larger.

 I'm going to make about a 3 inch bubble and about a 1.5 inch bubble.

 And then this goes back in right there between those pinch twists.

 And then duplicate that 3 inch bubble and twist those together.

 And then we're going to take the other balloon and come down about 3 inches.

 If your balloon is really soft, sometimes it's hard to keep the stiffness in the balloon to do the teeth.

 So it's a little bit harder to hold some of these, to make some of these little shapes.

 And then what we're going to do is just stretch them around like this.

 Okay, so you bring those around on the front of his face like that.

 And then tie it in the same place where you tied it in to start with.

 I could probably go back and look, but I should give somebody some credit if I got it from somebody else, but I can't remember who.

 I've done a lot of these before and put them out on a table for people to have along with some other balloons.

Today on Divas Can Cook, we are making these cute little taco bites.

 Okay, first thing we're gonna do is start making our little cute tortilla balls.

And then I stacked up some tortillas and just cut around it just

 them in the microwave if you need to, but these were perfect and flexible and

 crisp up and get all golden on the outside and nice and chewy in the

 And make sure you press the bottom really good because you want them to be nice and

We're gonna bake this for about 10 to 12 minutes just until they become

 put in a ton of taco seasoning, a little bit of water if you need it.

 forget, you guys, you can find this recipe with all the measurements on my blog

And don't even think about going to a store and getting those little scoop

 And today I'm going to show you how to make a deliciously simple dish from our friends

 Now if you know any RVers, you know that we are crazy about our barbecues.

 So even though this recipe calls for being baked in the oven, I'm going to show you how

 Then I'm going to take it outside and we're going to cook it on the grill.

 The first thing we're going to need is a large piece of heavy duty aluminum foil.

 I'm going to spray the foil with just a little bit of canola spray.

 We're going to sprinkle our chicken breast with about one teaspoon of Taco Bell Home

 On top of that we're going to add some Kraft 2% Mexican cheese mix.

 I've just taken them right out of the can and right there on top.

 The last ingredient is our Taco Bell Home Originals thick and chunky salsa.

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to make a foil pouch, leaving enough room

 for some hot air to circulate around the food as it cooks on our grill.

 Just simply pull the ends of the foil up and start to fold them down.

 It's been about 25 minutes and I believe our foil packed taco chicken is done.

 When we take it off of the heat or out of the oven, we want to let our foil pack sit

 You can find this recipe and others from our good friends at Kraft on their website at

 are guava and cheese pastries, also known as pastelitos de guayaba y queso.

 scratch because I didn't want you to see how long it would take and then feel

 because of the way it's packaged, but if you roll it out and pinch it together it

 out just a little bit and then we're ready to place the guava and cheese on

Here I have some guava paste and some cream cheese and that's it.

 household you probably saw a family member walking around with that, just

 brush them with the simple syrup we prepared earlier and then let them sit

 syrup, therefore I don't like to add any sugar to the cream cheese.

Oh and by the way I noticed they sell mango paste as well so there's

 Hey everybody, Dustin Carnes here, Editor-in-Chief for TalkAndroid.com and today we're going

 to be doing a quick unboxing of the Samsung Galaxy Tab 10.1 tablet running on Verizon's

 As a lot of you may know, Verizon's LTE network does use SIM cards, so that'll be a new thing

 And then you've got a quick reference guide as to how to, you know, use the SIM card,

 Go ahead and pop that back in here and we'll get on to what everybody wants to know about,

 So we'll go ahead and pull this out and we'll go over all the other stuff that's in the

 Very first off, we've got our instruction booklet here and it comes with a free $25

 You've got this main piece here, which is still in the packaging.

 Now these pieces actually come together and form one AC adapter.

 So you'll need both of those pieces to be able to charge up your new Samsung Galaxy

 Go ahead and pop this packaging off to the side and get to what everybody really wants

 We'll go ahead and go through the boot up animation here real quick.

 We do have a front facing camera and light sensor up here at the top.

 Up at the top here, we've got our 3.5 millimeter headphone jack and here is our SIM card slot.

 We've got our charging port and what looks to be microphone, noise canceling microphone,

 We've got our power and lock button and over here we've got our volume rocker.

 We do still have the protective film over it so it won't be quite this shiny.

 It does have a nice brushed metal feel to it underneath this plastic mesh here.

 In fact, we'll go ahead and take this off so you can see what we've got going on with

 Kind of helps you, you know, sturdy it, keep it in your hand, not drop it because you definitely

 You've got your Verizon, Samsung, 4G, LTE logos, a rear facing camera and a flash as

 Let's go ahead and pop it over to the front and we'll go through the boot up animation

 I've got to tell you, on first glance, this screen is really nice.

 It's got some really deep dark blacks and lower spectrum colors and some really bright

 whites and kind of these brighter neon flashes that are coming out are very nice.

 Now I will be doing a full review of this device here in the next day or so after I've

 So anyway, this has been the official unboxing from TalkingAndroid.com of the Samsung Galaxy

 We hope you'll tune in and watch our full review here in the next day or so.

 This has been Dustin Carnes, Editor-in-Chief for TalkingAndroid.com.

 100 grams brown sugar or you can use more sugar if you like more sweetness in

 this recipe but because of the sweetness in the dates I thought of adding less

 sugar and I have 125 grams butter, 2 eggs, 1 and 1 1⁄2 cups of self-raising

Instead of using self-raising flour you can use plain flour 1 and 1⁄2

 cups with 1 teaspoon of baking powder and I'm going to use some vanilla 2

 1 cup of water and cook this on low heat till the boiling point.

 will be nicer after so I'm going to leave this to cool about 10 minutes on

 Now the dates are cold enough to handle so I am going to break the eggs and I

 left my oven on 160 centigrade on fan actually I am going to do it on fan bake

 today so if you are not using the fan you can use use 180 centigrades to bake

So whisk the eggs a little bit not much at all not like the other

 cakes you don't need to whisk the eggs a lot so add the eggs into the dates.

 is a really nice cake that we are adding lots of dates in here so add the vanilla

 2 teaspoons or even 1 tablespoon won't be, it doesn't matter so add the

 so you can cook this that depends on from oven to oven the temperature so it

 So I'm going to bake this on 160 centigrade fan bake for 40 minutes.

 baking the date cake and this is how it looks like so I'm going to pass that over to a chopping board.

 This is the date cake that I made and I hope you will enjoy this recipe.

 Cover and cook for 3 minutes or until chicken and shrimps are cooked through.

 Tom Yum noodle soup is best enjoyed with a squirt of lime juice.

 This recipe serves one but it can easily be adapted for multiple servings.

 Hi everyone, today I will show you how to make beef and sea mustard soup called

 The soaked sea mustard will look like this, and it will be about 1 cup now.

 Add the chopped beef, 1 tbsp of soup soy sauce, 1 tsp of sesame oil, and 1 pinch of black pepper in a pan.

 Fry it for about 3 minutes on high or until the beef is completely cooked.

 Once it starts to boil, add 1⁄8 tsp of salt and 1⁄2 tbsp of soup soy sauce.

 Korean people can eat this soup anytime, but it is very popular for special days like birthdays and weaning days.

 This recipe is a beef version of sea mustard soup, but you can use tuna can, clam, mushroom, or make it without any meat instead.

 Hi, my name is Mickey and I'll be making Mickey's dinner rolls with you today.

 The ingredients are today whole wheat flour, wheat flour, salt, butter, sugar, warm water,

 I'm just combining all the flour and water and all the bits and pieces of the dough together

And I'm gonna let it rest a little bit and then I'm gonna call Michaela

 again and now we have folded our dough and we're gonna roll it once again.

Cooking with kids, it's fun but I do have to warn you, it's a big mess.

 lot of butter which in a way it is because we're using a whole stick, one stick of butter for the

But considering how many rolls we'll get out of this, it's gonna be actually okay.

Okay, dough is ready and all I'm gonna do now is cut it in strips.

Anyway, we have our rolls in the oven finally and we're gonna let them cook

 You can visit the link in the description below to view your free PDF copy of this etude,

 In this week's lesson, we'll be looking at an etude that I've written out based on the

 The purpose of this etude is to help us work on our left hand three part shell voicings.

 If you haven't viewed my previous lesson on three part shell voicings, I suggest that

 For suggestions on how to practice this etude, please check out my blog post at tjjazzpiano.blogspot.com.

 Also it's important to note that the left hand voicings written for the PDF file are

 merely suggestions, and I may not play them exactly as written for the following performance.

 I encourage you to try your own voicings, and when you've mastered the etude, try and

 For this recipe you will need about 1 pound of apples, any apples you like, sweet ones or even a Granny Smith will be working here.

 Lemon or lime, I am using lime today, a little bit of ginger, cinnamon, half cup of all-purpose flour and sugar.

 And for the frying I will need some kind of oil, I am using coconut oil, extra virgin organic coconut oil.

My name is Viktoria Pajkin and today I am here with my friends at RecipeVine.com

 who asked me to produce a video on those amazing and beautiful apple fritters loaded with ginger and cinnamon.

 Take your food processor and core the apples and chop them this way that they will fit to the food processor, not more.

 You see it still goes brown because we chopped it, but it won't go as brown as if you would add lime.

 If you like it moderate, like me, I am adding only two tablespoons of sugar in.

 You see, when the bubbles like here start to appear on this side, you can flip it.

 You know, you can't get wrong with apples and cinnamon and ginger.

 Don't forget to subscribe, like my comment, thumbs up me and cheers, Victoria.

 G'day, Mickey from Australia here and also cholesterol and inflammation.

 I just wanted to introduce you to a smoothie you may be interested in.

 It contains one of the most amazing herbs which is turmeric and I thought I'd share

 We've got coconut milk, bananas, mango, coconut oil which is another amazing superfood and

 I'll put a link to that particular page from my website below this link.

 The turmeric, we've got some cinnamon, some chai seeds and some ginger.

 It's best eaten, sorry, drunk on an empty stomach in the morning.

 Turmeric has got some anti-inflammatory properties and it's been linked to some amazing benefits

 The anti-inflammatory is causing a lot of our health at the moment and it's being blamed

 If we can encourage people to take an anti-inflammatory approach to the way that they eat then perhaps

 Just so you know, I actually put the coconut milk in the fridge so it is going to be cold.

 Another handy hint that we've got is we put turmeric in a salt and pepper shaker and we

 just sprinkle a bit of that on our eggs in the morning and throw it in when we're doing

 So about a gram a day of turmeric and you'll be surprised within about three months the

 Hey guys, so today I'm going to be doing my makeup tutorial for practices.

 So I know I sound crazy and I know most people would be like, oh just show up looking like

 whatever, but I actually, like when I go to practice, I actually try to look as cute as

 I use tinted moisturizer, I throw on some eyeliner and some mascara, a little spot concealer

 I use like, where is it, oh it's in the other room, but I use clear mascara just so that

 like if your mascara runs, it's not really going to look like anything, you know.

 And I think your eyeliner would like normally stay, but we just use minimal eyeliner anyways.

 I want to keep this intro short, but I have set a date for the end of the contest and

 But the end of the contest is June 20th, so make sure, I'll try to like put it on another

 Hey guys, so we're just going to jump right into it, but I just want to tell you if I

 look over here, it's just because I kind of have my mirror right there, but I also

 have a mirror right here, so I'll just be checking that way every once in a while and

 also hopefully the lighting is okay, it was like really rainy today.

 But anyways, so I'm going to use my Lancome tinted moisturizer and I'm just really going

 to just apply this with my hands because we want it to just be so, that's even like, that's

 Okay, but I'm just going to kind of work it between my fingers, oh my gosh, that was a

 So now if you can see, I still have some blemishes along the side.

 What I'm actually going to do is I'm going to take this beauty blender sponge and I'm

 going to take my NARS concealer, but since this is really light, I'm going to put a little

 bit of this on the back of my hand, just a little bit, you don't need much at all, like

 I'm going to add a little bit more concealer and I'm just going to place it on the spots

 Now basically with this, I am going to take my NARS concealer again and just put it under

 And so we're still keeping it just super lightweight, super natural.

 And usually I will just throw on a little bit of eyeliner, so we're just going to throw

 And then actually what I'm going to do, so you can see, I'm going to just take my Elf

 And just because we don't really want anything too heavy, I actually...

 What I think is great about this is that if it just starts melting off your face, at least

 I mean, because the eyeliner might, but the mascara is more likely to.

 So hopefully you can see, you can catch my drift, kind of what I was trying to get at

 And today I'm gonna show you how I make my linguine with shrimp and tomatoes.

 I have about 28 ounces, about a can of San Marzano tomatoes, which I crushed up by hand.

 Alright, so now we're gonna put our pasta in the water, salt the water, and then we're gonna make our dish.

 You can get in there and look at that, how the garlic looks nice, it's all browned up nice.

 Put the shrimp in later because you don't want to overcook the shrimp.

 Alright, now I got the tomatoes cooking in here for about a minute now.

 Don't want to put too much salt in there because I'm going to use the pasta water.

 We're gonna add our shrimp now because the pasta is just about ready.

 Because it's gonna cook in the pan with the shrimp and the tomatoes.

 Alright, the shrimp has been in there for about a half a minute.

 I also wore this look on my vlog tv for those of you who were able to join me that night.

 Such a simple look, like I kind of feel stupid for making the video.

 And yeah, it's just a neutral look that you can wear to school or work or I don't know.

 Taking MAC Soft Ochre Paint Pot and I'm going to dab my finger in there.

 Go ahead and apply, I'm applying this starting from the inner corner and blending it outward.

 This is a big equal tools brush and I'm just going to apply that all on the inner part

 of my eye and then I'm going to drag it in towards, probably like two thirds of the way in.

 Using a fluffy brush I'm going to take this color right there, it's like a brown shade.

 And I'm going to apply this into my crease and try to not take it all the way in.

 The color right here, it's the darkest color, it's the liner color.

 The brown shade that I took earlier and I'll just blend it out with that too.

 The next thing I'm going to do is take this medium shadow brush by Saint Kashuk and then

 I'm going to take this top color right there and go ahead and apply that right next to the outer V.

 Base color again and the fluffy brush again and just go ahead and apply that to the brow bone.

 Urban Decay's Lush Lash Mascara and it conditions your lashes and it also helps them grow.

 Just comb the lashes in place because then I look like a bushman.

 And define the tail with a little bit of Makeup Forever's Waterproof Eyebrow Gel.

 A little bit of bronzer with my NYC Smooth Skin Bronzing Face Powder in Sunny.

 I'm going to use my Benefit Hervana Blush with a Sedona Lace angled blush brush.

 I actually always top this lipstick off with NARS' Turkish Delight lip gloss just because they make a perfect pair.

 And it's what I was wearing in my last video, most importantly.

 I know that this palette is really old, but I actually just got it not too long ago.

 I just feel like you really have to pack on the colors to really get a good pigmentation.

 And some of the colors, like this one, they're a little flaky and hard to pick up with the brush.

 So, you have to kind of dig into it, kind of scrape it a little bit, and then put it on.

 Hi Samantha, Hi Michelle, Today we are going to do smokey eyes.

 First we are going to apply the eye primer in a natural tone to hold your eye shadow

 This complements the eye shadow and allows the eye shadow to stay on longer.

 Using a fluff brush, we are going to apply a neutral tone over the entire eye.

 I'm placing a little satin powder under the eyes to catch the eye shadow from falling.

 Now I'm going to apply a rich jewel tone to cover the entire lid.

 Now you are going to use your fluff brush, blend the light into the dark to create a

 Now we are going to accentuate the liner with liquid liner so that the liner can pop some

 I'm filling her brows just to bring the eye shadow out some more and soften the brows.

 I'm going to add a little shimmer onto her cheekbones and we are going to finish off

 You can put two and three coats of mascara for that nice and thick lashes.

 As you can see, if you compare it to a roll of paper towels, it's as long as the roll

 The machine itself, and here you have the little tray for the waste bin and the water

 You only got three buttons, the on-off button, the Nespresso button, and the Lungo button.

 And of course here the handle to insert the capsule into the machine and to close it down.

 When you switch it on, the Pixi blinks, as you can see, which means it's heating up.

 The red light signals that there's not enough water in the tank, and if you have a solid

 Usually it's set to 40 milliliters and 110 milliliters, but you can extend it up to 80

 milliliters, which is about 4 ounces, and 230 milliliters, which is about 8 ounces.

 Actually, I wouldn't suggest the highest amount since the coffee is pretty thin then.

 The easier way to get the right amount of water or liquid in your cup is, if you push

 If you push the button again, you disconnect the brewing function.

 So you can, you know, if you want to have less water, just push it during the brewing.

 If you would like to have more water, just push it again after the brewing has stopped

 and hold it as long pushed as you'd like to have more water in your cup.

 You can have as much water in the cup or liquid or coffee as you'd like to just by using these

 You simply lift up the dripping tray and you put the glass under it.

 If you remove the glass, the dripping tray will fall down automatically.

 I personally suggest to preheat the cups because I'm going to show you why.

 Now this cup is not preheated and the coffee would have a temperature of 70 degrees.

 Now if I do it again with a preheated cup, you will see how much this increases the temperature

 But now of course we're going to make a real Nespresso, not just hot water.

 So you open up the machine, insert the capsule, close it down and simply push the button.

 It's pretty small, it heats up very fast within 20 to 25 seconds, shuts down completely

 So in my eyes it's the best small Nespresso machine you can buy in the market right now.

 Here I am going to use 2 cups of all purpose flour and 5 tbsp of honey and 175 ml that

 is 6 oz of milk and 5 tbsp of oil, any oil you can use it and 1 cup of brown sugar and

 1 cup of cooking oats and 1 cup of finely chopped apricots, this is dried one, instead

 of this you can use raisins also and 2 large eggs and 1 tbsp of baking powder and less

 First we will mix all the dry ingredients that is salt, less than 1 fourth tsp and 1

 tbsp of baking powder and 1 cup of oats and brown sugar and finely chopped apricots.

 Now mix it together first, this is very tasty and healthy cupcake, definitely our kids love

 Then we will do the next part that is we will mix all the liquid ingredients like milk,

 honey, oil, eggs, etc together and then we will add our liquid mixture into our solid

 Take the broken eggs into another mixing bowl, that bowl I am going to add just 175 ml,

 6 oz of milk, this is whole milk I am going to add and 5 tbsp of honey.

 Then I am going to add 5 tbsp of oil, now I am going to beat it everything together,

 I already added oil, egg, milk and honey, beat it well until everything mixed together

 Ok, our liquid mixture is ready, now I am going to add our liquid mixture into this

 Finally our cupcake batter is ready, look how it's thick, this is the consistency only

 Then I am going to just slightly grease the pan, then I am going to place this butter

 flavor spray, then I am going to place the baking cups, now I am going to place a spoon

 full of mixture, spoon full of dough in it, just like 3-4 cup, just see now, now everything

 is ready, just place any cashews or almond or pistachios on the top, I already preheat

 the oven for 375, ok after 20-25 minutes let us see how is our cupcakes.

 Just like this, now I am going to place this cupcake into the cooling rack.

 Finally our homemade honey and oats cupcakes are ready to serve now.

 Send your valuable feedbacks to www.indiafoodrecipes.in, we will meet in another video.

 If I cut up the pepper, because we're having to go so quickly, will you chuck it in.

 Put it straight in darling because it's all plumping everywhere.

 But you know, sometimes if you want to cook nice food, especially in the busy midweek,

 As it happens, the four hours cooking time has left the beef meltingly tender,

 I have no doubt that this is going to be a delicious meal for the family.

 Goes to show, sometimes, even if you have to bend the rules a little,

 Ok, today I'm going to show you how to make a braided friendship bracelet like this one,

 I've just cut 8 slots around the edge here, and I've made a hole in the middle.

 You can use all the same colour, but I'm going to use 7 different colours, just for effect.

 Right, so I've got my 7 pieces of wool, and I'm just going to get the ends together, like this.

 Now all I've done is I've tied a single knot in the end of the wool there, just to bind it all together.

 All I did was I just put a loop around like that and passed the ends through to make a single knot.

 The next thing to do is to pass that knot down through the middle of the card, like so, so that it's stuck through the middle.

 And then put each one of these threads into one of the slots on the card.

 So you end up with a card with 7 pieces of wool and one vacant slot.

 Now the next thing to do is to take the vacant slot and then count 1, 2, 3 pieces round there,

 and take that piece from the third slot and pass it over into the vacant slot.

 So we count 1, 2, 3 round, take the one from there, put it into the vacant slot.

 You'll notice that when I put the wool into the vacant slot, I run my hand down it like that.

 That stops it getting all tangled up together, otherwise it gets all twisted up.

 Just again, all the time, just counting 1, 2, 3, taking that thread over,

 and then doing the same again, 1, 2, 3, taking that thread over, and so on.

 And what I've ended up with is a long piece of nice tight card.

 And what I've ended up with is a long piece of nice tight coloured braid.

 So what I'm going to do now is show you how to finish that off.

 Now what I'll do first is I'll tie a knot there, just right on the end of the braid.

 So I've got the starting knot, I've got the braid, I've got a knot there,

 And you fasten it by passing that knot there through the end there.

 hello and welcome to the brand new cooking show in this show you are going to see some

 In today's episode you are going to see a very special dish which is known as Tumtum

 This recipe is very special for me because it is very well attached with my childhood

 For this you will need 200 gm rice, 100 gm potatoes, 10 curry leaves, 2 tsp mustard seeds,

 1 tsp cumin seeds, 1 tsp chili powder, 1 tsp asafoetida or hing, 2 1 1 tsp salt, 1 tsp

 turmeric powder, 5 tsp oil, 1 tsp coriander powder, some coriander leaves for garnishing

 Oil get heated so I am going to add the mustard seeds and cumin seeds.

 When mustard seeds and cumin seeds started stuttering add the curry leaves and put the

 I am going to add 1 tsp turmeric powder now and remaining I will add later.

 Now let me add the remaining ingredients and spices one by one.

 First of all I am going to add the asafoetida, chili powder, salt, coriander powder and rice.

 But remember that your rice should be well covered with the water.

 Now I am going to cover it for 20 to 25 minutes on a medium low heat.

 So I figured I'd make a tutorial on making a tripod mount for a GoPro.

 I've seen a couple people make them all difficult and tap and dies and all that.

 You just get T-nuts, like a buck, a piece of wood, hard redwood or red oak for two bucks.

 If you wanted to, you could glue it down, make sure it never comes out.

 If you want to see more videos like this, please subscribe to my channel.

 If you're doing high-end stuff, I'd probably use a stronger material.

 But if you just want an easy, cheap camera mount, like $2.50, $3.00, you can make a bunch of them.

 Okay, what we are going to do today is make a flower bow and I've made one already using

 Now you can use eight or you can use, you know, as little as five.

 I like the eight just because it makes the flower look a lot fuller.

 I've chosen valentine colors because that's what we're focusing this on right now is the

 The outer loop of the bow is three inches long so you'll want to get your ribbon.

 And however many petals you're choosing to make, I'm doing, we're going to do eight for

 But you'll need eight pieces of your ribbon, three inches long.

 In the next circle of your petal, you'll want eight pieces about two inches long.

 And for the inner loop of the petal, you'll want to do eight pieces at about an inch and

 We're doing an inch and a quarter because one inch was just a little bit too short.

 It was hard to make a loop so you'll want about an inch and a quarter there.

 You want to be sure that after you cut your ribbon that you do a quick seal of the edges

 Just a quick pass of the lighter will help seal the edges of your ribbon and keep it

 Now after we've done that, we've got eight of each piece of ribbon.

 And now what you're going to do is you're going to use your glue gun and you take your

 And we're going to use, put the glue on the backside of the ribbon, the part that does

 Then you'll fold it over, pinch it together, hold it for a couple seconds.

 And you want to pull off some of the excess glue because it does end up with a lot of

 Now what we will do is we will take our glue gun, a little bit of glue right here.

 We'll take our two inch ribbon, the bad side of the ribbon, backside right there, and you'll

 We'll take our three inch piece of ribbon, backside down, glue that right there, hold

 Okay, we'll let it dry for a few seconds, pull off any excess glue.

 Now, we'll do the same thing for the other seven pieces to make your petals.

 So go ahead and do that and then we'll move on to the next step.

 What you're going to do now is you'll take all of your pieces, put a little bit of glue

 You're just going to continue to do that all the way around until you've got all of your

 Alright, then for your embellishment you can use, I've chosen a little heart here.

 bulb, which is not too bad considering we get a few thousand hours out of every light

Here's my replacement light bulb, I got it in the mail the other day.

 of spending a few hundred dollars like you can for the Sharp brand light bulb, I went

So I'm going to gamble that it works pretty well, I've heard some

 two more retaining screws, both Phillips, one here and one there.

 for a long time because this bulb assembly gets incredibly hot.

 I'm going to get a vacuum and suck some of the dust out of there, maybe a couple more

 going to take it outside, plug it in, mount it back on the ceiling.

Maybe we're breaking in the coating or something off the bulb as

 Hey everyone, so today I'm going to be showing you something a little different than what's normally on my channel.

 So I'm going to show you how to do a hairstyle and it's going to be really fun, so let's get started.

 And a lot of people at school were asking me how I did it and what I used and everything

 So I just wanted to do this video, mainly for my friends at school,

 but if you're watching this right now, if you're just like curious, search up sock bun tutorial.

 But I just wanted to show you guys because I got a lot of compliments saying it is very awesome

 So if you like these kind of videos, thumbs up this video and comment down below

 if you have any more requests for hair tutorials or anything, or any type of videos,

 So I just wanted to do this video mainly for you guys out there at my school and everyone,

 So what you're going to be needing are two hair ties, just two, two hair ties,

 any type of hair ties, doesn't matter, as long as they're not like the little stretchy rubber band ones.

 You're going to need a sock bun, which I got this at Claire's for only $4

 and a lot of people are asking me like how did you do that, did you do it with a sock?

 It's not with a sock, it's with this because I have thinner hair,

 but if you have thicker hair probably a sock would work best or like better,

 like if you didn't want to go out there and spend money, but I have really thin hair.

 I guarantee you can find it at like Target or Walmart or Sally's Beauty Supply

 or any kind of like hair store that you can get like hair products or anything.

 This is called a donut, so if you're looking for it at Claire's just be like I want a donut like sponge,

 So this is like what I use to make my hair so thick and like perfect, I guess you could say perfect.

 You're going to need a brush and sorry it has a little bit of hair in it

 and then you're going to need some hairspray to lock in that tightness.

 Sorry guys, I had to move to where you guys can see me because I'm kind of short, but yeah.

 So yeah, now you're going to take this and slip it on your hair.

 Now what you're going to do is, okay so what you're going to do is you're going to just slide it up to the top

 as much as you can get it until the hair is basically going to start following, I mean falling, falling, sorry.

 Now it's okay if you can still see the sponge or the sock, we can fix that.

 It's going to probably look all messy unless you just did it like perfectly, but yeah.

 So what you're going to do is you're going to pull around to the side.

 And you can easily do this just by pulling it and making it to where you like it.

 This is like, people are just like, how do you do it so perfect?

 And I'm like, I just do it, I don't do it perfect every single time.

 It's always a little bit of a mess up and I always fix it by bobby pinning.

 And you're probably going to need a lot of bobby pins for this because of those little pop outs.

 So if you're going to wear this to school, bring extra bobby pins.

 So like if you're planning on wearing this to school or a banquet or something like that,

 if you want to be formal or whatever, you can definitely, definitely wear this to a banquet.

 And if there's any like flared out hair, you can always bobby pin that as well.

 So that's the finished hairstyle and then what you're going to do is you're just going to hairspray

 using any type of hairspray, whatever kind of hairspray you like.

 I like to use TressMe because I just find it gets like a big bottle and it's only like $2.

 You can get bobby pins at the dollar store, anything at the dollar store.

 So if you really wanted to be like a, kind of like a cheapo, not really a cheapo, like you know,

 like you want to save money, you can definitely go for the cheaper hairstyle and stuff.

 And you can also buy a pack of socks and cut off the toes and then roll it to make the donut

 I'm sorry I've been talking really long, but I'm just going to hairspray the bun just where it locks in place.

 If you're going to school, if you're walking to school or something, then like it just stays in.

 And you can also bobby pin the back if there's any like, if you have like little hang downs or whatever you want to call them.

 So yeah, this is also very great for when you're just not having a very good hair day.

 If your hair is just like very thick, this is probably the best time to do this.

 Get a sock, get the sock, but if you already have the sock, but perfection, that's great.

 It will take a little bit of practice though if you use a sock.

 But I've seen, I've done it before with a sock and I've gotten pretty good I guess you could say.

 My sister does it all the time to her hair, she gets compliments.

 So if you're going to wear this hair at the start of school, definitely comment down below and tell me how it was.

You put it in the microwave for like 10-15 seconds until kind of

 just drizzle a little bit of wasabi in and I sprinkle some salt, a little bit, and some black

And I put some roasted sweet pepper that I got a few days ago when I have salad.

 my sushi bamboo wrapper or you can just roll it with your hand.

 in the fridge for 10-15 minutes to let them sit together and easier to cut.

 top of the shrimp wrap and just gently and tightly wrap around like this.

 Okay, and then I take the bamboo wrapper out and I'm just gonna cut it like this.

Usually, when the guests come over, I eat that so they will not see it.

 Hey guys, so the first thing you want to do is you want to grab your Starbucks coffee

 sleeve and cut it in half on both sides, just on the lines that are there.

 Once you get that done, you're going to want to grab your index cards, grab the coffee

 Then once you get that traced out, you will want to grab your scissors and cut just in

 Once you get that done, you will then want to grab some more index cards and continue

 cutting out your desired amount that you will want for your notebook.

 Once you get that all done and you get all the cards cut out that you want for your notebook,

 then you're going to go ahead and grab your clip and clip it on like I did here.

 Grab your glue and your paintbrush, glue the top side, paint all that glue into the

 Then you will grab a couple more clips and you will clip those down and you will set

 Grab the top and the bottom of the sleeve, grab some more glue and do just like we did

 Paint that on, get it all, get every little piece that you can.

 Then you will want to grab your clips again and you're going to want to clip those on

 I actually realized I needed three clips while it was drying so I grabbed another one as

 Please remember to like and subscribe and visit us at KidPep.com.

I love intense makeup and today I wanna recreate this intense, sexy, Arabic

 on watching and remember, if you click below here, you'll subscribe to my channel which

 is completely free and you'll see my tutorials that are already uploaded, which are more

 than a thousand, and the new tutorials that I upload every Tuesday and every Friday.

 We're gonna start by creating a base for the eyeshadow and apply a gold eyeshadow to open

 up the eye and the tear duct area and a bronze eyeshadow to start creating the depth on the

Now with a brown matte eyeshadow, we're gonna start creating the V effect on

Work this brown really well, blending with a matte beige eyeshadow before

 starting adding the more intense of the eyeshadow, which is gonna be a black matte on the same

 be creating a quite long, thin eyeliner, but for the outer part of this eyeliner, we're

 gonna be blending it out to integrate it to the rest of the eyeshadow with the same black

So now, moving to the face, we're gonna clean up all the possible fall

 stuff and then I'm gonna apply a primer before applying the concealer or the skin tone just

Next is gonna be foundation and afterwards we're gonna be applying

 a concealer in dark and a light to create a highlighting and contouring.

 has a very intense highlighting and contouring, but doing it like this with a foundation or

 concealer, you will have an intense one but very well integrated.

 to give that nice flash to the face and we're gonna move to apply a lipstick.

 for a nude lipstick and then you're gonna be using a concealer to just line the outer part of these

 you can follow me there too and see all the pictures that I upload every single day.

 The socket is a half, yeah the socket is a half, I guess a half inch.

 And you'll be needing this one only from, it's a little tight you know, put it on, get a little more leverage.

 And we have five, we have six quarts that are planned to catch our oil.

 Next step, since we have it right here, we're going to loosen the filter.

 By the way, my grandfather is doing the filming so I do apologize if it's a little shaky.

 And don't make them too tight because we got to open them back again.

 Oh, I forgot that if you get a port of oil you get one of those funnels.

 Have you guys seen the advertisement for Little Caesars Deep Dish Bacon Wrapped Pizza?

 And trying to copy Little Caesars Bacon Wrapped Deep Dish is more technique than it is recipe.

 And their large pie is actually baked in two smaller rectangles so that each epic slice

 So instead of using this 9x12 pan which was my original intention, I opted for two smaller

 6x10 pans and lined them each with parchment paper overhanging the two long sides to help

 And I clipped the paper in place with stationary clips to make sure that it stays put as I

 And before positioning the bacon, I sprayed the parchment with nonstick spray.

 And as I placed four slices of bacon around the edges of each pan, I tried to go for about

 I also made sure to have the leaner side facing up so the side with more fat on the

 Another thing I tried to do was push the bacon into the corners to add a little more slack

 there trying to account for the inevitable bacon shrinkage as it bakes.

 And when I had both pans done, I placed them in the fridge to firm up as I prepped the

 And for that crust, I used one package of Bob's Red Mill gluten free pizza crust mix

 Once the dough is mixed, their instructions tell you to divide the dough in half in the

 bowl, cover it and let it rise for 20 minutes, which I determined to be pointless for my

 So instead I weighed the two halves to get them perfectly equal and pressed the dough

 And they instruct you to use wet hands to keep the dough from sticking to yourself.

 And you've got to make sure that the dough is on top of the bacon at all the edges and

 It's going to take a few minutes to keep working it along to the edges and making sure it covers

 And when I had both pans done, to help level out the dough even more, for each of the pans

 of bacon wrapped dough covered in plastic, I took the opposing pan and pressed down firmly

 Now we'll let the dough rise for one and a half hours to get the most volume as possible

 Now remove the plastic wrap and you can see how much it's risen here.

 And contrary to their instructions again, which tell you to bake this un-topped for

 seven to nine minutes, I added about a half cup or so of sauce to each of the pies.

 Because in my opinion, a deep dish should be crisp on the bottom, but the top should

 remain soft and almost blend right in with the sauce and cheese.

 And I don't see that happening after the recommended initial bake would almost seal the pores on

 And when it comes out of the oven, you could add a bit more sauce if you think the top

 Then I added 8 ounces of shredded mozzarella to each pie, but I only laid down about 6

 Now we'll bake it again for 15 minutes before adding the pepperoni, since we don't want

 And when the pizza's come out of the oven, scatter over the pepperoni and bake for an

 Now let these guys rest in the pan for a couple of minutes, then they'll lift right out of

 And once they've cooled for 5 minutes or so, you can slide them right off the parchment

 Now slice each pizza into 4 epic sized pieces and you're ready to dig in.

 And once you do take a bite of this, you can rest assured that all that Little Caesar's

 The bottom of the pizza was nicely browned and crisp, and the top was dripping with gooey

 But you're probably not going to be able to eat more than one slice of this one.

 So the leftovers can be individually wrapped in plastic, frozen, and then reheated on a

 And if you happen to get bored of eating the leftovers like this, and want to turn it into

 a more upscale brunch, you could always hit it with some crispy kale and a fried egg for

 And if you'd like to print a copy of today's pizza recipe, or read a few more tips, you

 And for brand new recipes every week, don't forget to subscribe!

 Here I have taken about 1 cup of rice and I have washed it and rinsed it well.

 I added about 2 1 1 cups of water, fresh water and now I am going to place this in

 And if you don't have the rice cooker, you can cook it in the pressure cooker also.

 You need to listen the one whistle from the pressure cooker and then you got to lower

 the heat to the lowest possible setting and then cook it for about 10 minutes on the low

 heat and then turn off the heat and we need to spread it on a wide dish.

 Here I have taken tamarind and now I added about 1 cup of water and I am microwaving

 this so that the water gets heated up little bit so that we can extract juice from the

 If you don't have microwave, you can just boil the water on the stove top and then add

 It's nothing but to just simplify the process of extracting the juice from the tamarind.

 Now I am going to rest this for at least 10-15 minutes covered.

 Now I am going to fry this chana dal till I find a light golden brown color.

 We need to continuously stir the chana dal while frying them so that they get roasted

 If you can't fry like this, you can just fry them individually.

 Actually we got to add, fry the red chilli whole, dry red chilli whole but I don't have

 After adding the flakes, you should be very careful so that nothing burns at the bottom.

 Now into this I am going to add coriander seeds, cumin seeds and peppercorns.

 I am going to take them into another bowl and let them rest for about 10 minutes.

 As you see, all the chana dal, urad dal and the masala ingredients, the coriander seeds,

 cumin seeds, everything are dry roasted very well except the chana dal is slightly reddish

 We got to dry roast this like so because we need to powder this into a very fine powder.

 I am going to rest this for about 15 minutes so that we can make fine powder out of it.

 The tamarind has been sitting on the counter for about 15 minutes now.

 Pour all the tamarind juice into the fine mesh and now I am going to press this so that

 Basically what I am doing here is I am trying to take off all the pit and the fibrous part

 out of this tamarind and I just want to collect the tamarind juice that we are going to use

 When I reach this point, I am going to use the spoon and press all the fibrous part so

 So now this is the leftover thing that I got and this is the juice that I have extracted.

 Into this I am going to add mustard seeds, cumin seeds, urad dal, turmeric powder, curry

 Should be very careful while doing this because it's going to splutter.

 And saute this till you hear the popping sound of the mustard seeds and you are looking for

 Now into this I am going to add the slit green chillies and mix this for about 30 seconds.

 I have just dry roasted it and blended it using the coffee blender.

 I am going to let this mixture cool down completely before mixing it with the rice.

 While the mixture is cooling down I am going to spread the rice.

 Now I am going to add this paste little by little and mix this like so.

 I am using my hand to mix this because traditionally it's done like that.

 You can add as much paste as you like depending on how spicy you like it.

 It's very great now but I love anything very spicy so I added some more paste.

 Actually the paste which we prepared can be used for about 1.5-2 cups of rice.

 I am left with this part of the lehenga masala paste and now I am going to use this.

 I will make some plain rice and I am going to mix this with that plain rice and just

 It's going to taste awesome and you can also have it with some yogurt.

 cool full body bodyweight workout routine that you can use if number one

 you are training at home and don't have access to any weights or a gym or number

 two if you're on vacation and can't get to a gym and you want to make sure to

 either burn some calories or preserve your muscle mass then this is something

 only resistance is our body weight we are going to have to slow down the rep

 you're gonna want to explode on the way up and then control the negative so one

 second up one two three four one one two three four again explode up one two

 is hindering your ability to perform enough reps say six to eight then don't

 worry too much about the negative and focus on getting those numbers and then

Alright guys exercise number two now we're gonna focus on the chest

 push-up but it's pretty much up to you what variation of the push-up you want

 the way down three four explosive on the way up one two three four explosive on

 however there are plenty of variations of push-ups that you can use maybe the

 be to throw a backpack on with some weight in it and do the push-ups using

We're gonna do the chin-up because although it does train the back

 significantly it's a great way for us to get our biceps involved with body weight

Alright so we've done the back with the pull-ups we've hit the chest

 you're gonna take an underhand grip about shoulder width apart.

 allow your body to hang completely before you initiate the lift.

 yourself on the way down allow yourself to fully lengthen before you bring

 yourself back up and again three to four seconds on the way down allow yourself

Alright guys so we hit the back we hit the chest we hit the biceps

 if you don't have a bench you could always use a piece of furniture maybe a

 with your feet out in front of you right you don't want to push up with your

 concludes the upper body now we're gonna move into some leg work.

 piece of furniture or equipment you decide to use and one out in front of

Alright you're just going to squat down and then up you want all the weight

 This is going to give you massive quad activation and to be honest with you

 even without any weight or added resistance this is a very challenging

 workout especially once you start getting towards the 8 to 12 rep range.

 Once you're done with one leg you are obviously just going to go and switch it

 the same piece of furniture or equipment I want you to set your upper back on it

 come down at the hips slowly and then press up and I want you to really

 you're gonna realize that after a few reps you're gonna get a nice pump and

 This is a guide on how to use a coffee percolator that you take on camping trips.

 Now you buy one of these things and they don't come with any instructions.

 you need to add at least one cup of water that's going to boil away.

 Plus I like to add a second couple of plastic teaspoons because I like my coffee strong.

 I'm doing this in the evening so I can have fresh coffee in the morning and not have to wait to make it.

 Because if the flames are too high, it starts popping out of this spout and we don't want that.

 Now while it's percolating, we can go ahead and do other things like make breakfast.

 And if it's not enough, obviously, give it a little bit more flame.

 Alright, welcome to my new column called the Howl of the Wicked.

 And in this one I'm going to show you a bunch of ripping fast metal licks and riffs that

 Alright, so the cool thing about this riff that is based off of 8 note triplets, very

 classic heavy metal rhythm, and I'm bouncing off all those hammer-ons and pull-offs off

 At the end of it I tag along two chromatic type licks that's sort of reminiscent of a

 lot of bands like Megadeth when they took old British heavy metal and brought it more

 So the first section of this riff is basically between the frets of 9 and 12.

 It's just very quick, but it's the same little fret combination.

 And I go, I change it right here, it goes between the 5 and 9 fret, and 4 and 7.

 You can really sort of like dig in between those notes with the right hand.

 You want to make sure that those notes pop out in between the notes that you fret.

 Okay, the turnaround of this riff is a chromatic little section.

 You move it up two frets higher and you still start with an open A string.

 But when you play the open E string, you really want to mute that string down.

 See how sort of the left hand opens up when you hit the notes that you fret?

 You could also hear that sometimes I add a quick pull off with my left hand to give the

 So the chromatic part is all alternate picked and I don't use any muting.

 You could see when I get to the note on the 4th string, I accent it so the lick has a

 It's based off of Phrygian Dominant, but I'm throwing in an extra flat 5 in there.

 Alright, so this riff, once again, bounces off in low E. What makes it cool is that I'm

 constantly jumping between this wide intervallic stretches that makes the lick sound wide and

 Make sure you get a nice harmonic at the 3rd string for cool effect.

 The cool thing about it is that I'm basically bouncing off this flat 5, this B flat on the

 6th string, and I'm catching it the same exact note on the 5th string.

 So it's got this, sort of like the same note, but it's got a little bit different of a tonal

 All right, so now we've made it to the bridge section of Carry On My Wayward Son, and it

 We start with an A power chord here, the fifth string open, and then the second fret on the

 Then a power chord off of the sixth string, third fret, three five five.

 And then that same shape down two frets at the first fret on the sixth string.

 And then we have this little bass line that takes us to starting this over, so it's just

 zero open sixth string, first fret, third fret, so one zero three on the sixth string.

 And that is just a D power chord on the second, third, and fourth strings.

 I usually hold that like this, with my second finger at the third string, second fret, and

 then the fourth finger, pinky, at the third fret, second string.

 So that pick across, let's start with picking a downstroke on the fourth, then a downstroke

 on the third, then upstroke on the second, then an upstroke on the third.

 So remember that picking pattern, down down up up, just across three strings.

 Because then we're going to do that power chord shape here at the third fret on the

 Third fret on the fifth, and then five and five on the two middle strings.

 Now we're on the third, fourth, and fifth strings, and we're going to do that same down

 You start doing, you do the first three notes here, just the down down up, act like you're

 still doing that picking pattern, but you stop on the fourth note and do this.

 Which is the exact same bass line that we did on these two strings before.

 You're going to do the exact same thing, zero one three on the fifth, then zero three on

 You're just kind of holding it and just kind of doing random, picking random notes across

 That is a full barre at the third fret, second finger at the fourth fret on the third string,

 and then pinky at the fifth fret on the fourth string, and then third finger at the fifth

 Goes all the way through the chorus, and then back to that second main rhythm with the open

 After this second 14 and 12, we did that riff earlier so we don't have to really cover it.

 Welcome back and we're at part 42 of our B44.2 build and we're gonna go ahead and

 tackle the rear wing and rear wing is is admittedly it's kind of complicated.

 You're gonna need an exacto knife, some Lexan cutting scissors, reamer and some

 sandpaper and essentially what we're gonna do is we're gonna just go ahead

 and cut out parts of this rear wing and you just need to identify just like

 where the trim lines are and admittedly it's it's a little difficult to figure

 out where some of the trim lines are if you've never cut out a rear wing before.

 As usual like with practice you would find that cutting out which trim lines

 is gonna be much easier however cutting on a 3d object in a 3d plane is much

 more difficult than cutting out things on a like a 2d plane like on paper.

 One problem is is just that you can't get your scissors in close enough to cut some

 of the lines so generally what you do is your first few cuts are going to be just

 kind of like this broader stroke so that you could actually get the tool in the

 bodies like and and rear wings I generally just go and I make these

 broader more I would say imperfect type cuts and your scissors would be your

 primary tool and I just want to point out to you that there are two types of

 Lexan scissors there are curved scissors and there are straight scissors.

 making like these more broader cuts you could get a pair of like decent straight

 scissors however when I do some more of these detailed work I like to use the

 curved scissors like to get more of a curving arch and a curving cut in there

 and then if I can't get the cut exactly perfect I would just bring out some

 sandpaper and start sanding everything down until it is more perfect.

 just so that you're aware like when you first start doing this you're not going

 to make like some really great cuts here some of your cuts won't be as

 professional or you would see like uneven lines and don't sweat it

 it's really just one of those things that after you do a few of them you get

I would say that also that if you're if it's getting late and this is

 like the last step for the for the next part of the build maybe just take some

 time get some sleep and and you'd find that you'd be able to get a better cut

 the next day so you also need to be in the correct headspace I would say

 we've got most of it cut out and I'm gonna go ahead and tackle the the other

So once again it's just kind of hard to get the initial cuts in there

 and also you could cut the wing a little higher or you can cut the wing a

 leave more trim on the wing I might it's just an idea to help stabilize the car

 also if you're into like little buggy or chassis design you may also want to get

 like another wing part to to experiment with like different types of wing styles

 indicated trim areas here and just cutting along and just taking my time

 there we are and I'm just kind of stickler for making this perfect so I'm

 gonna speed up this video so that you don't have to like be tormented with me

There were some like like drill markings already in in the in the

 molding and my in my kit it was pretty much perfect it was pretty much lined up

 and we just put in some of these these body clips on here and we'll be all set

 we'll take it out for like a little test drive and check out the right height and

 Griffin Pump and Equipment manufactures a line of pumps for the construction

 it's necessary to make sure that you have a level of water in the balloon.

 trash pump, the way it's designed, it has a fill port on the top section of the

 Prior to starting the unit you have to fill it using a bucket, a hose, or in some

 As you can see, the unit has already been primed so the port can be installed.

 it's not primed, you would remove the gasket, take the bucket, and fill.

 The other features on a self-priming trash pump, typically they can be diesel

 low oil pressure, high temperature, also records the RPM and it's a variable

 speed so you can maintain your pressure or head depending on your pumping

The pump head itself has the features depending on the solid side

 whether it's for pure water or for solids control, typically has a clean

I decided on Ohagi because it seemed like it would be the easiest.

 Then I put them in a pot with some water and I turned on the gas.

 I tipped out the water and put fresh water in the pot and did the same thing.

 a bit of salt and then I crushed the beans with this rice spoon until they became uncooked.

When the rice was cooked I crushed it with a rice spoon then made it into balls.

 used plastic wrap to attach the anko to the outside of the rice.

 Hi everyone, for a delicious and fancy looking party food using sticky rice cakes and bacon,

 Just roll and fry the rice cakes with bacon and then serve this with tasty dipping sauce.

 One is a honey mustard sauce and the other is a sweet and spicy sauce.

 Christmas is coming so this can be a great appetizer for your Christmas party.

 Mix all the ingredients for the honey mustard sauce in a small bowl.

 Add all the ingredients for the sweet and spicy sauce in a small sauce pan.

 Put the sticky rice cakes in boiling water and cook for 2 minutes on high or until soft.

 When the sauce starts to bubble, cook for 1 minute on medium high.

 When the rice cakes are done cooking, rinse the rice cakes in cold water once and then

 Depending on the size of your rice cakes, you may want to divide the bacon strips into

 As long as you can roll the bacon all the way around the rice cake, it is long enough.

 Place a piece of bacon on a plate and put a rice cake at the one end of the bacon.

 This helps the bacon stick to the rice cake to make a better shape and it also makes it

 Fry the rice cakes for about 3 to 5 minutes or until they become golden brown on medium.

 Since the rice cakes are already cooked, just focus on frying the bacon well.

 When one surface is cooked, turn the rice cakes on the other side to finish cooking.

 Depending on your taste, you can just make one sauce if you prefer.

 My husband and I both like to dip and eat the rice cakes in both sauces at the same time.

 In this video I'd like to show you three easy ways of playing the B chord.

 This first B chord shape I'm going to show you is the one that Bruce Springsteen used

 And I'm playing this chord shape by placing my 1st finger at the 2nd fret on the 1st string,

 my 3rd finger at the 4th fret on string 4 and my 4th finger at the 4th fret on string

 I'm leaving the 2nd string open and I'm not playing string 5 or string 6.

 And actually you can play that same chord all the way through that song Born in the

 USA because it only has really one chord in it, all that happens is that the bass note

 This next B chord is very similar to the first chord shape we just learned.

 In fact the only thing different is my 1st finger is being placed at the 2nd fret on

 The 3rd and 4th finger are in exactly the same finger placement as they were for the

 I'm not playing the 1st string or string 6 but I am playing the 2nd string, I'm leaving

 And this chord gives us a nice bass note to add to our chord, it gives us a lot of bottom

 And this is great if you want to have a moving bass note, for example I could take that 1st

 finger off and play an open note, string 5, which would create a B chord with an A bass.

 So here's me playing this new B chord that we've just learned, this new B chord shape

 Now all the B chords that I'm showing you on this video do not contain the 3rd note

 of the chord, but they are a very big powerful sounding chord, all the ones we're learning,

 and they're very very useful, you'll hear them in lots and lots of songs.

 The last chord shape I'm going to show you is exactly the same as the one we've just

 learned, in fact the only thing different is we're playing the 1st string open.

 Now the neat thing is that if you move this shape around, in fact if I take this same

 chord shape and just move that shape up to the 7th fret, I'll be playing an E chord.

 If I go back to my B chord and move it back 2 frets and play the same 5 strings, I'll

 Now the cool thing is that as you know, if you're playing a song in the key of E, you'd

 have an E chord, most likely an A and quite possibly a B. So with this one chord shape

 you could move up and down the strings on the guitar, up and down the neck, and you

 could keep the same fingers all locked in the same shape and play all the chords for

 Hey guys, this is Bharat and welcome to Bharat's Kitchen with Potato Cheese Shots.

 Alright, so I'm gonna begin by chopping my potatoes into 0.5 by 0.5 cm cubes, something

 And we're gonna keep these cubes of potatoes in ice cold water for about 15 minutes, basically

 And after 15 minutes, we're gonna drain the water and to ensure that there is no starchy

 Okay, at this point, I'm gonna take a pan on a low heat and add some unsalted butter.

 Now you cannot use salted butter here as it will quickly drain the moisture in the potatoes.

 But you know that you'll find all the alternatives in the blog post.

 Anyways, we're gonna cook the potatoes until they're just a bit soft.

 So just keep them in the freezer for 10 minutes or just let them cool at room temperature.

 Then we're gonna add some dried parsley, some instant mashed potatoes or potato powder.

 Now this is the key ingredient in the recipe as it will absorb the moisture and keep them

 Then we're gonna add some chili flakes, some onion powder and my best friend, which is

 Now before I go to the next ingredient, I want to tell you that you can ignore this

 Now I'm gonna take some water and add some yeast extract, which is basically a flavor

 Now this stuff is easily available in supermarkets, but if you want alternatives and even if you're

 planning not to use it, then just read the blog post and you'll find answers to all your

 Okay, just mix everything together and here don't behave like your boss.

 I know you all hate that guy, but let the instant mashed potatoes do their job and wait

 Then we're gonna add some milk products, which are some processed cheese, some mozzarella

 Finally just mash everything together and your potato cheese short mix is ready.

 Now to actually combine everything together and have that perfect shape, I'm gonna take

 some cling wrap and add some of the potato cheese mix and roll it into a log.

 Now the process is quite similar to the McVeggie video, you just have to attach an elastic

 Then expand everything towards the corners and make it into a sausage.

 Now to properly combine everything together, you have to do the same process twice.

 At this point, we're gonna chill these potato sausages in a freezer for a minimum of 30

 And in the meanwhile, we're gonna make a batter to coat these shorts.

 So in a bowl, I'm gonna take some all-purpose flour, some corn starch, some yellow corn

 Just whisk everything for 2 minutes, add some oil and whisk again vigorously to incorporate

 Alrighty, now take your potato cheese sausage out and cut it into bite-size bits.

 So quickly, we're gonna dip them in the batter, remove the excess and dunk them in the breadcrumbs.

 Now I'm using my homemade breadcrumbs here and you'll find the link of the recipe in

 And here, the most crucial step is that you need to squeeze the breadcrumbs in the batter.

 Now the breadcrumbs will absorb the moisture and create a firm wall, which will decrease

 Now you can store them in an airtight container for 5 days in a freezer or you can fry them

 at 335 degree Fahrenheit or 170 degree centigrade, which is basically on a medium flame.

 But make sure that you fry them in batches as they are very cold and when you add them

 Now just fry them until they are golden brown or until they look like this.

 You'll find the full list of ingredients and their measurements in the blog post.

 Before we start, make sure to remove the battery and the power adapter.

 Carefully separate the memory retaining clips until the memory lifts up at a 45 degree angle.

 Place the memory stick into the memory slot at a 45 degree angle and press down until

 Place the memory door cover onto the base and press around the edges to make sure it

 All parts discussed in this tutorial can be found at PartsPeople.com

 Your dbrand skin comes with pieces for the front, back, camera, and Moto logo.

 Note that a hair dryer is not required for the back skin, only the front.

 If you purchased a front piece, pause the video now to get a hair dryer.

 If you didn't order anything for the front of your Nexus, click here to skip to instructions for the back skin.

 Note that the bottom left corner of the screen cutout is already folded.

 Once lined up perfectly, apply pressure to the exposed portion.

 Next, turn the phone upside down, remove the 3M paper, and reattach as shown.

You may need to make slight horizontal adjustments to get a perfect alignment.

 Once lined up flawlessly, apply pressure to the exposed portion.

 Slowly heat one of the four edges on the skin, then apply firm pressure to ensure that it stays stuck to the curved edges.

 Make sure to heat and apply pressure until you see that the material has formed around the curved border as shown.

 Once it looks good, repeat the process for the remaining three sides.

 You may now remove the screen cutout entirely by pulling it up from the folded corner.

 Note that there are three different coverage options for the Nexus 6 back piece.

 Click the coverage you purchased to skip ahead to the appropriate section.

 Do not apply any pressure until you're fully satisfied with the positioning.

 If misaligned, firmly hold the device with one hand and pull the skin off quickly with the other.

 You may have to make slight horizontal adjustments to get a perfect fit.

 Once everything is lined up, smooth out the entire back surface.

 Remove the M logo from the 3M paper and reattach it to the back, exposing more than half of the letter.

 Hold the skin as shown and align around the X cutout, ensuring that the microphone hole is also lined up perfectly.

 You will likely have to try this a few times to get a perfect fit.

 When removing the skin to realign, firmly hold the device with one hand and pull the skin off quickly with the other.

 Next, remove the 3M paper, rotate it 90 degrees, and reattach as shown.

 Align the microphone cutout by making slight horizontal adjustments.

 Once the microphone is lined up perfectly with the cutout, apply pressure to the exposed portion.

 You may now remove the 3M paper entirely and smooth out the remainder of the back surface.

 I'm here with a selection of citrus that's in season right now.

 All of these have common traits and one of them is they're just packed with vitamin C.

 The thing about vitamin C that's different than some other vitamins is that your body

 So you need a constant supply of vitamin C and eating citrus, of course, is a wonderful

 A navel orange has 130% of the recommended daily value of vitamin C. Now a caracara,

 150% as well as vitamin A, fiber, and a natural source of lycopene.

 Even more exciting than that as a chef are all the flavors and colors that I get to play

 Now the caracara orange may look like a navel, but when you cut it open, quite different

 It's got almost a pink color to it and the flavor is almost like cranberry and cherry.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make a grilled halibut with sun-kissed caracara orange

 This is actually a really easy recipe because all of the ingredients for the romesco can

 And the other thing is that the sauce can actually be made ahead of time, which helps

 So now we're ready to make our romesco and we've got all of our ingredients pre-measured

 including one caracara orange that's been peeled and cut into pieces.

 And now we're going to add the rest of our ingredients, which are shallot, garlic, walnuts,

 And we're going to add our liquids last, which are sherry vinegar and olive oil.

 Now that our romesco is done, we're going to move on to the rest of our recipe.

 So now we're getting ready to plate up our halibut and we're going to do so using this

 Now the caracara is a pretty orange, but it's even more beautiful segmented.

 So I'm first going to trim off the ends and then I'm slowly going to peel back the sides

 And you want to do so generously because you don't want to leave any of this white pith

 Another thing to remember is that fresh caracaras are available December through April.

 So to our arugula, we're going to add our two segmented caracaras, some red onion, some

 sherry vinegar, some olive oil, some salt and pepper to taste, and then we're going

 It took about ten minutes total, five minutes on each side, very, very simple.

 And then we're going to top our halibut with our romesco sauce.

 So this is our grilled halibut with our sun-kissed caracara and walnut romesco.

 For more healthy and delicious recipes like this, go to sunkissed.com.

 Raise the needle to the highest position and turn the power switch off.

 Attach the dual feed foot and tighten the set screw firmly to secure the foot.

 Swing down the dual feed device and engage it with the dual feed foot.

 To disengage the dual feed device, pull down the dual feed device and swing it to the rear.

 Patterns D1 to D4 and D1S to D3S can be used with the dual feed device.

 If you select D1S, D2S or D3S for sewing fine fabrics, use the dual feed foot for the best sewing results.

 Start the machine and sew at medium speed, letting the fabric feed naturally.

 The machine will not start if the presser foot is up and the LCD screen will show a message to lower the foot.

 If the lower layer puckers, turn the dual feed adjusting dial toward the plus sign.

 If the upper layer puckers, turn the dual feed adjusting dial toward the minus sign.

 The stitch length and width are programmed and optimized for the selected pattern, but you can adjust them to suit your specific sewing needs.

 To alter the stitch length, press the Stitch Length Adjusting Key.

 To alter the stitch width, press the Stitch Width Adjusting Key.

 For straight stitches, you can move the needle drop position by pressing the Stitch Width Adjusting Key.

 The machine will sew a properly sized buttonhole automatically in a single step.

 Place the button on the back of the automatic buttonhole foot and push back the holder to hold the button.

 Attach the buttonhole foot and place the fabric under the foot.

 Lower the presser foot and pull down the buttonhole lever as far as it will go.

 The machine will stop automatically when the buttonhole is complete.

 Hey everyone, it's K-Bun here and this week is tutorial week for the Look Hawaii fondue collab.

 So today I'll be showing you how to make these adorable churro chocolate squishies.

 Here's the pink one and here's the milk one and this is the actual squishy.

 The colors that you need to color the squishy are these colors.

 It is optional if you want to still paint your makeup sponge with white scribbles.

 If there's a moral that I can teach, it's don't ever go after a beach at a beach.

 The tricky part is making the super tiny Japanese writing on the top.

 So to make the packaging for your squishy, I just got this little package that came with the actual candy.

 So I cut a slit through the packaging right here with an exacto knife.

 If you don't have this kind of packaging, you could always improvise.

 So thanks for watching, please comment, like and subscribe and see you next Monday!

 Hey guys, so Easter is around the corner and if you've ever made hard boiled eggs you know

 One is getting the right consistency and the other is making sure that they're easy to

 So today I'm going to show you guys a foolproof method for making the perfect hard boiled

 I'm Meg and I'm passionate about finding ways to make life with kids easier in the kitchen.

 So aside from eggs and water, the only special ingredient you're going to need is a little

 bit of baking soda and that's just to make them easier to peel.

 Put your eggs in a pan and make sure there's enough room so that the eggs can roll around

 Add cold water to the pan so the eggs are at least an inch covered.

 Put your pan on the stove and then bring the water to a rolling boil.

 Set your timer for 12 minutes for large eggs and 14 minutes for extra large eggs.

 When the timer goes off, dump the water out and plunge your eggs into an ice bath.

 So once your eggs have cooled off in the ice bath, you can take them out and store them

 But I'm going to actually show you guys how easy this egg is to peel.

 Make sure that if you guys are using these for Easter egg dying purposes, you get white

 And I'm going to tell you a little bit of a story about how I learned the hard way.

 So first year Avery was celebrating Easter, I was so excited to dye eggs with her and

 I had everything set up, all these different colors, glitter, everything ready to go.

 Hard boiled my eggs, pick up an egg, go to dip it in and I realized I had purchased brown

 And here I was thinking, I was the best mom, they're organic and brown.

 So make sure you guys get white eggs if you're going to do something fancy with them.

 I hope you guys have an awesome Easter and tune in next week for some tasty ideas of

 We're going to continue on to our next boxing lesson where we like to show a little bit

 We have a cover series that we usually use with our mitt system.

 Let's say since me and Nick here are fighting, if I were to throw a right-handed punch, he

 When we do the cover, if Nick turns and looks at the camera right here, he's going to take

 his lead hand and he's going to put his palm right there on his head, making a flat surface.

 This hand right there is going to be squeezing his cheek, and his shoulder is going to be

 When we look at each other like this, if I throw my right hand, he's going to defend.

 Then from here, he can return fire with that hand, or if you wanted to, you could return

 You're literally just putting your arm right in front of the bridge of your nose.

 We don't want Nick to put his elbow up too high like that, because if he gets hit, boom,

 We want it to be a good, strong, flat surface, and we want his shoulders hunched up like

 A good, just start, basic drill is here, boom, he can return fire.

 Some of the important details of this drill are making sure your fighter's breathing,

 He doesn't want to be standing tall like this, because if he gets hit, he's going to get

 We want to make sure his stance is real good, and strong, and solid.

 Here, boom, he's breathing when he gets hit, and he's breathing when he returns.

 Now, our number three cover would be if Nick turns and faces the camera here.

 We've got the cover number one, which would be with the lead hand, boom, cover number

 two, boom, and then we're going to do cover number three, which is going to be a double

 Right there, if he doesn't know which hand to defend with, he can just shoot both of

 Here, turn and face him, so we've got cover number one, return, cover number two, return,

 Okay, so this is just a really good, basic, straight line defense.

 So now if we get into a side cover, if I'm going to swing a hook punch, he's going to

 take his arm, curve it up on the side of his head like he's going to sleep on it, and then

 He's also squeezing his head, squeezing his cheeks, making sure everything's tight, doesn't

 And then from here, hits, boom, and then he can return fire with a cross.

 This would be an opposite return, boom, or he could return with a hook, or he could return

 Here, he can return with a hook, he can return with a cross, just like that.

 What you want to do is just be in tune with your mitt holder and stuff, but usually when

 So if I hit here, hit with the opposite hand, here, boom, hit with the opposite hand, if

 I go straight in, boom, hit with the opposite hand, just like that.

 We've got cover number one, boom, return, cover number two, boom, return, double cover,

 one, two, pop, pop, this side right here, return with a hook, this side, return with

 If I hit here, we're going to return with the uppercut, if I hit right here, return

 So that covers the whole realm of the body shots when it comes to boxing.

 So now what we'll do is we like to do a hit and return, and when we train we'll do like

 So here, cover, cross, boom, if I hit right here, boom, like that, cross, boom, hit with

 That's a good little system to work with to get your boxing skills and your cover system

 And today I'm going to show you how to can chicken soup, beef stew meat, and dehydrating shiitake mushrooms.

 I started out this morning with two packs of chicken thighs that had 12 in each pack.

 I put them in water in my stock pot and started them boiling with lots of pepper and salt.

 About six stalks of celery, one medium onion and one large onion.

 And then I add them to my stock pot, which makes my stock pot almost totally full.

 And there's the chicken that I had to take out of the pot because it did have the bones on it.

 Then I put the chicken back in and I added one and a half cups of barley and a large bag of frozen corn with several different spices.

 I got six packs of shiitake mushrooms at my grocery store for $1.99 a pack, which is really good for shiitake mushrooms.

 So what I did was I cut them up and here's the stems that were left over.

 And I'm freezing these because you can use the stems in vegetable stock, any kind of stock that you want to.

 And I also saved the trays because you can start your plants in them for next spring.

 And after I got everything done, there's my full jar of chicken soup.

 And you can see the corn and the chicken, the carrots in there.

 And after that was done, then you have to take a non-metallic object.

 Once you get out all the air, then you take a wet paper towel, run it around the rim of the jar.

 Then you take your hot seals and your hot lids and your rings and put them on your can.

 And the area that I'm in, you have to have 11 pounds of pressure.

 And then once I got up to the 11 pounds of pressure, then I set my timer for 90 minutes.

 While they were cooking, I had six London broils, big London broils, and a roast in four round steaks that I cut up.

 But I did have a hard time packing these all in to one pint jar.

 I did add smoked paprika and one teaspoon salt into the beef stew meat.

I'm here at my family's cottage which is on a lake and because of

Plus fish is really simple to cook so even those that can't really

So my family went out and caught a bunch of perch for me the other

 he didn't do a great job so I would suggest you do the same thing because unless you're

 a professional fillet you never know what's going to be in there.

You can also choose to bread them before you cook them up if you want with just

So while those are cooking up I'm just going to mix together a simple side here.

 And when you go camping and fishing and things like that you don't often have a lot of refrigeration

 or a lot of kitchen tools so this is a very simple side that uses items that you don't

 of corn and a can of tomatoes mixed with like chilies and some onions.

 you can either buy pepper that's in a jar that's already roasted or you can even choose

 to bring a whole just red pepper with you and roast it over your campfire if you want.

 jalapenos or anything like that it would all be really good in this dish.

 of time so all the flavors can mix together or set together for you.

 have some fish that I cooked up here so I'm just going to pull a couple pieces of that

 This is my YouTube channel and I'm doing how-to videos on every single necktie knot known

 So if that's the kind of thing that you're looking for, then please subscribe.

 Alright, this time I'm going to bring you another Eric Glenney knot.

 I like that he's made it and I'm going to show you how to do it.

 I've got the little end right at my belly button and of course we're going to be tying

 So we're going to take the big end and we're going to cross it over the front.

 So it's quite a bit of a gap between the top of our knot and where the front loop is.

 And from here we take the big end around the back and we're going to start bringing

 So that's why I keep sticking my finger in there to keep, so I have room in there later.

 Now with the big end we're going to tuck it in behind our necktie knot.

 And I'm just only slightly tightening it so it's not a big mess, right?

 Now I'm going to feed this big end down through my loop right here.

 I want to hold on to that loop so it doesn't get ruined as I pull this down.

 Now all I want to do from here is just smooth this out so it looks good.

 Of course you can tighten the big end but it's not really tightening this front loop

 so if you're not happy with how tight this is you're going to have to start over again

 Now to cinch it up to your neck I'm going to hold the inside of this knot and pull on

 Now I can adjust the way I want to have a nice dimple and make that part look nice.

 It looks like you could wear it with a tuxedo or a butterfly color shirt.

 I think it's a pretty cool knot but I'm going to reserve it for something that's a little

 My name is Patrick Novotny, this is my YouTube channel and I'm doing how-to videos on every

 single necktie knot known to man and I'm going to bring them all to you.

 So if that's the kind of thing that you're looking for then please subscribe.

 will be using pre-cooked and pre-colored isomalt sticks in gold metallic from

For painting you will need a brush, vodka, gold highlighter, and a small bowl.

 You will also need a small gum paste tool, an Aqua clip, aluminum foil, and a

 the bubbles settle down a bit before you pour into the silicone mold.

 bubbles have settled down a bit, pour the isomalt into the silicone mold.

I use my gum paste tool to spread the isomalt from the center out

 start at one end and push the hot isomalt from the center out to the edges

 and make sure that the isomalt goes completely to the edge but not over the

You can see here the isomalt is starting to cool and thicken so you will

 need to work relatively quickly spreading the hot isomalt to the edges

When the isomalt has cooled slightly but is still flexible, you can

 that the two tips are touching and then you can hold the silicone mold in place

 cooling down so that you don't have any problems with the warm isomalt pooling

 highlights, you will need to mix this gold highlight powder with a small

 When the gold paint is the consistency of medium thick paint, take and paint the

 have to be too meticulous painting into the tips because those will actually be

So continue this process and make six large loops and one small.

 Once you have made all the bow loops, assemble them together on the silicone

 to use the aluminum foil ring and your hands to shape and hold the loops

 foil as a third hand to hold these loops together and shape until it hardens up.

 When it's hardened up a little bit, pour a little bit more melted isomalt into

 the center of the bow and take the small bow and place it into the center.

 When the isomalt has cooled, you can release the bow from the silicone mat

 and use this beautiful bow decoration in a variety of applications.

 The mission of the Peaceful Kitchen is to promote a healthy plant-based diet.

 In this first series of episodes, I will be demonstrating staple recipe ingredients

 All of the staple ingredients that you will need to convert your favorite recipes into healthy plant-based meals.

 The first recipe will be a tofu-based sour cream, and the second recipe will be a cashew-based sour cream.

 The cashew-based sour cream is a recipe for those who do not include soy products in their daily diet,

 And you need to make sure that you use silken tofu and not the tofu in the carton.

 If you use a firmer-based tofu, your sour cream will be grainy.

 This tofu recipe can be used in any recipe that calls for sour cream.

 If you want to use this in a recipe that is sweet or a dessert recipe,

 like pumpkin bread or some sugar cookie recipes call for sour cream,

 you're going to want to leave out the garlic powder and decrease the salt to about a quarter of a teaspoon.

 For the cashew-based sour cream, I have one cup of water already in the blender.

 I wanted to create more of an evening look with a pop of color using the new

 Amrezy palette, so if you want to see how I created this look, then keep on

To prep my eyes, the first thing I'm going to use is the Bare Minerals

 5-in-1 Advanced Cream Eyeshadow Primer, and this is going to be a base for our

 For a highlight underneath my brows, I'm going to use Vanilla and apply it with a fluffy

 I like to use a peachy base as my transition color, so I'm going to use this color from

 the Guilty Pleasures Duo from Bare Minerals in an angled eyeshadow brush.

 For a little warmth in my crease, I'm going to use this warm brown, which is

 I'm also going to sweep that same color under my lower lash line back and forth

 I'm going to use one of my favorite colors from this palette, and that's Morocco, which

 is a pretty warm reddish brown, and I'm just going to sweep that back and forth in my crease

 I'm going to use Deep Plum on the majority of my lower lid, but I'm just going to keep

 the center of it bare because we are going to add a pop of color later.

 I'm also going to sweep Deep Plum under my lower lash line just to smoke up the look,

 For the pop of color on the center of my lid, I'm going to use the Iridescent Purple, and

 I'm just going to use a flat synthetic eyeshadow brush, and I recommend wetting the brush before

 For a smudgy, smoky look under my lower lashes, I'm going to use LBD with a flat eyeliner brush.

 For a winged liner, I'm going to use the Benefit's They're Real Push-Up Liner, and

 if you want to see how I do a winged look, then you can click the link down below in

 Next, I'm going to use my favorite mascara and put a few coats on my top and bottom lashes,

 I already have all my basics on, so I have my bronzer, foundation, and concealer.

 So, what I'm going to do is contour the hollows of my cheeks, and I'm going to use this trio

 from Sephora, and this is the Big Sculpting Trio in number three, which is in tan, and

 So, I'm going to use the darkest color in this trio to sculpt out my cheeks.

 Next, I'm going to use my other favorite blush at the moment, and this is Tangerine Tease

 So, I thought since it has more of an orangey tone to it, it would go really nicely with

 Of course, for my highlight, I'm going to use my favorite highlighter at the moment,

 and this is more of a bronzy tone, and this is the Extra Dimension Skin Finish in Whisper

 For my lips, I'm going to keep it pretty simple and just stick with the gloss.

 The one I'm going to use is from Gerard Cosmetics, and this is their lip gloss that is amazing.

 They just changed the packaging to a gold packaging, but what my favorite thing about

 So, I'm going to pop this on to stay with the coral theme that's going on, and then

 So, I hope you guys enjoyed my tutorial using the new Amrezy palette, and I'm so glad I

 It was in my huge haul video, so I promised you guys I would do a look using this palette,

 If you want me to do more of a wearable daytime look, please let me know down below, and I'd

 And also, if you liked the gloss that I'm wearing, I have a coupon code for anything

 So, it's listed down below, and you get 25% off, which is awesome.

 So, thank you guys so much for watching, and I'll see you in the next video.

 I'm going to show you how I'm going to color my whipped cream to use it for cake decoration.

 with because you don't want to contaminate your liquid gel or your paste.

 adding colors to icing or whipped cream, let it sit before you use it to maximize the intensity

 want to make a color in your icing it helps to blend the two together a little bit first

 swirls of one color on one side and the other color on the other.

 what I do when I need black is I'll make a small batch of black icing and then just keep

Pull out a teaspoon or so when I need it for accents, writing, whatever.

 any on your fingers because it is really hard to get out of your skin, off your hands, off

Make sure you're wearing your apron, you've got dishcloth around to wipe

There you go, that's how you use colors to color your whipped cream.

 Thanks for watching, we'll see you on the next decorating video.

 So today I'm going to be doing a tutorial for you guys using Naked Cosmetics and they're

 And when I was at Imatte's I actually bought two palettes from Naked Cosmetics.

 I bought the Urban Rustic palette and I bought the Ebony palette.

 And I'm going to be using number 3 and number 2 from the Naked Urban Rustic palette which

 is just a really pretty kind of olive green and a rustic kind of orange color.

 I thought that this look would go perfectly as being described as the hazel eye look because

 not that it's only good for those of you with hazel eyes but because it looks like a hazel

 As you can tell there's like a little bit of the green in there.

 It's got kind of like a goldy tone and then it's got like a brown kind of orange rusty

 look and if you look at my eyes, these are hazel eyes right here, and you look at the

 I can't really keep my eye open for you guys to see it but they're about the same kind

 But it's going to be using Naked Cosmetics because I wanted to use some of my new stuff

 Like I said I'm only using two colors and then a highlight color but you guys can use

 But this is a super long intro so I hope that you guys like this look and I will just let

 So the first thing you want to do is you want to go ahead and apply an eyeshadow base and

 I'm using this shadow base from Naked Cosmetics and it's just a matte base and you're going

 So I'm going to go ahead and take my ELF Eyeshadow C brush which looks like this and I'm going

 to go ahead and go into that really pretty kind of like olive green color.

 You don't even need a lot so you just take a little bit, pack it onto your brush and

 I just love how three dimensional it is because if you can tell in this eye, in my inner corner

 it kind of looks like I have a little bit of like a golden color in there and then towards

 the crease it looks like I have like a really dark green and then on the lid it looks like

 It's just a very, like I said, three dimensional kind of color.

 So just put that on the lid and then turn your brush sideways and just begin to kind

 of do windshield wiping motions to kind of apply some of this color into the crease.

 So just like that and you can see how just by putting one color it already looks like

 It looks like I have like a nice golden color in here and then the green on the lid and

 then right here into the crease it kind of looks like I have darker green.

 So now I'm going to take that same Urban Rustic palette, I'm going to go ahead and take number

 two which is like a really, really, really, really, oh my gosh, gorgeous rustic color.

 It's like a really pretty rusty orange and I'm going to go ahead and put some of that

 onto my blending brush and this is just a blending brush that I got from Imattes last

 year but I bought a whole bunch more of these because I love this blending brush.

 Again, you don't need a lot and you're just going to go ahead and first kind of place

 Just kind of press it in there and then go through with like circular motions and begin

 to kind of blend it into your crease so that it looks like that.

 Then you want to go ahead and kind of clean off your brush or you can get a new brush,

 whatever you want to do and then just kind of blend this into your highlight area.

 Next what I'm going to do is I'm going to go into my little Sally Girl eyeshadow.

 This is in beige and it's just a really pretty matte beige color and this is really good

 for my highlight because it's almost about the same color as my skin tone but it's nice

 and matte since we already have a whole bunch of shimmer going on.

 I'm just going to go ahead and apply that right underneath the brow bone.

 Then I'm going to go ahead and take some more of that rusty kind of like orange color and

 I'm going to put this just right under the eye on your lower lid.

 The next thing I'm going to go ahead and do is just take my blending brush and kind of

 So after you have done all that, you're going to go ahead and just apply some eyeliner.

 What I used was my NYX Super Fat Eye Marker in Carbon Black and it looks like this.

 I can't do this on camera because I really suck at it so you guys just do your eyeliner.

 As you can see I did a pretty thick wing because that's really going to add to the whole effect

 Okay, once you have applied your eyeliner and mascara, you're going to go ahead and

 After you've done that, take a really pretty kind of like purple-y pink lip gloss or lipstick.

 Then when you're finished, this is what the whole thing is going to look like.

 You're going to have a nice pretty kind of pinky pout to go with your hazel-y colored eye.

 I hope it was super easy because it only takes two colors and a few techniques and it's good to go.

 I hope that I can start getting some more tutorials out to you guys

 I will talk to you guys later and I hope you have a fabulous day.

 So we're going to start off by making a wonderful tender broth.

 with some nice tender piece of meat and those bones in the inside.

 You need to make sure that that meat is going to be really, really tender.

 And we're going to stick with it in the pot a little bit of onion.

 And you're just going to bubble this away until the sugar is dissolved

 it's an arts and crafts show from a very long time ago when I was a child.

 We're going to finish them off in the oven at 200 degrees Celsius for about 20 minutes,

 Now, while they're in the oven, we're going to get on with a delicious coleslaw.

 And now, just to bring it together, I'm going to get in there with a bit of mustard.

 This is some vibrant and fresh coleslaw that's going to go incredibly well with those ribs.

 If you want the recipes for these brilliant ribs and the coleslaw,

 If you like lots of delicious barbecue recipes, you can check them out on the channel.

 Take your ring sling, up and over one shoulder, so it's across one shoulder down to the other

 I like to snug it up just a little bit first, so all I have to do is just adjust it to baby.

 If I snug it up to me first and then put baby in, there's not as much fabric to pull through

 So we pick up our baby, and I have the rings a little bit higher up on my shoulder right

 now because as I tighten her up, they will drop down just a little bit.

 I want them in the hollow between my collarbone and just above my breast.

 So, I'm tucking her into the pouch, pulling the fabric between her and me to create a

 And I'm pulling the fabric nice and tight under my armpit, across her body, right to

 Once the fabric is at the rings, I'm going to find the top rail, that's this rail here.

 I'm going to find the corresponding side and start tightening it through the rings.

 And again, if I go thread by thread, just like I did with the woven, I get a nice, tight

 You want to always make sure that baby's sitting in that nice M position.

 It started back in 1988 when my football career ended after 14 year football

 ever since then I've been on a quest and it's evolved as a competitive drug-free

 but everyone wants abs and there's so much misinformation about it out there.

 that I took what natural competitors were doing and I streamlined it and I let

 average people trying to gain muscle, lose fat and get healthy.

 knowledgeable people in the world are at losing fat and gaining muscle naturally by

 You gotta have a nutrition plan that's personalized and it evolves and changes.

 You're gonna get some positive people that help inspire you but you're gonna get a lot of

 every time I bring out a FatLossLifestyle video I'm gonna bring to you

 an exercise of the week and I'm gonna give you a tip in each one of those areas

 every other day or every day, that's not gonna let you see those abs that are already

 You gotta do some ab exercises but the things that's gonna make your abs

 deadlifts and major compound movements where you gotta have good posture and

 It's not the crunches and the sit-ups and the leg lifts that most of us

 I've learned from that process so it's understandable that's where people

 stay sometimes thinking that ab exercise is what's gonna make them happier

 with what I think the number one focal point of everybody is and that's getting

 to figure out your fat and muscle because a lot of people lose muscle

 when they try to get fit because they're just doing too much cardio, they're not eating enough carbs,

 There's a whole list but usually people eat too few calories and exercise too hard.

 Gonna do this by this date so that I can put an emotional reason behind it

 That's the only way you're gonna see consistent progress or not.

 You guys have heard it before but here's one thing out of nutrition.

 Starchy carbs are what makes us fat if we're not exercising or eating too many of them.

 Good quality sources are potatoes, rices and oatmeals and bananas.

 Those are turned into glucose and if you're not burning your muscle engine

 second positive, one second isometric squeeze and a three second negative.

 Announce your intentions to the ones that are closest to you in your life, at home,

 at work, and in your social circles and say I really want to invest in myself.

 I want to become a better person for myself but also our relationship and I'll be a better

 and sprinters have great abs because they're working their abs from side to side.

 Too many people do leg lifts and crunches and your body is so used to that.

 I got a 20 pound dumbbell here and my right hand, my right shoulder blade is

 I'm sorry, I'm gonna punch with my right with the weight in the hand and I'm gonna drive the elbow down

 so I, and then my right shoulder blade comes down to the starting position.

 So I'm driving my left elbow down and the right, the right hand with the

 center down, rest, 10, 15 seconds, catch your breath and do some quick ones with no weights,

 But you only have to do it every other day or get abs done with some

 Learn all the other things in the pillars and that's how you're gonna see

 your ripped abs that you already have underneath your skin and your fat.

 Darren Steen, until next time, you do have the power to change.

 If you haven't signed up for my newsletter for more free information

 and free videos like this, just click the link below, take 10 seconds,

 first name and email address, and it's a no charge, very valuable,

 12-week e-course that's gonna help you start to personalize the five pillars for you.

 I have never waved at you with two hands before, that was awkward.

 A really long time ago, probably like three or four months ago,

 I did like a Lush inspired video where I looked at things that they said that their product did,

 and I made the same thing for a lot less money, and I did a bunch of research and stuff,

 so I decided why not do it again, but choose a different product, and yeah.

 So today I'm going to be showing you guys how you can make their cupcake face mask.

 I believe that face mask is like $7 for like a little tiny jar.

 So I mean, this one in particular isn't as expensive as some of their other ones are.

 I don't know if you guys are under the impression that YouTubers make like a lot of money,

 Honestly, I have tried this mask like once, like a really long time ago,

 I actually think the one I'm making today works a little bit better than that one did.

 I feel like this one is more like calming and like cooling and stuff,

 Okay, so the Lush face mask thing said that it was formulated for people who have like problematic oily skin.

 So it's also supposed to like calm the redness on your face and like cleanse it and stuff.

 So I looked into all of these things and found alternative ingredients that did the same thing,

 If not, you might want to get like one or two things, but I mean it's really, really easy and simple.

 So the first thing we're going to be doing is mixing together two tablespoons of cocoa powder.

 Then you're going to add in one tablespoon of honey and another teaspoon this time of peppermint extract,

 and then you just want to mix this together until it's like fairly evenly combined,

 and then you want to add in yogurt that's not sweetened or flavored or anything.

 but depending on the consistency of your yogurt and what you would like it to turn out like,

 you can use like different amounts if you want it to be thinner or thicker.

 So like if applied to your face, cocoa powder is said to like keep your skin clear and hydrated by this dermatologist that lives in LA.

 so it's not going to like irritate your skin if you know you have like more sensitive skin or anything,

 The honey that we also put in this is to moisturize your face as well as stop scarring or any of the ickies on your face,

 Honey is actually like an antibacterial thing, so it's also going to help clean your face and keep it nice.

 So in yogurt, there's a lot of zinc and lactic acid, which is good for your face apparently,

 and this is said to like tighten your pores, hydrate dry patches, give glowy skin, anti-aging abilities, and heal sunburn as well.

 So peppermint extract actually contains large amounts of menthol, so menthol in it actually produces that cooling sensation.

 So this like cooling sensation as well as its like minty smell is supposed to like be like anti-stress,

 and it could actually like resolve headaches if that's the proper term.

 And menthol is also really good after sun exposure, so especially because it's like summer, you know.

 Not saying I'm going to be outside very often, but in case you are.

 This and high concentrations can actually like irritate your skin.

 If you know you have sensitive skin, you might want to put a little bit less in, but it is like really an optional ingredient.

 This is going to be so diluted in the mask that we're making that it's not going to really cause any irritations or anything.

 You could also like swatch this on your hand or something if you wanted to see how it like reacts with your skin and just be safe.

 Basically to use this, you want to put it on your face and leave it there for like 10 minutes.

 And especially for using so little ingredients, you can get probably like two to four uses out of this.

 I applied this like really heavily as you can see in the video just because it was so inexpensive to make.

 And then when you're all done with it, you want to make sure that you refrigerate this.

 Because I don't really know what happens to yogurt when it's not refrigerated, but I'm not really sure.

 I really like doing these videos where it's like a lot of like learning and stuff because I feel like it's a little bit more than just like the average video.

 And you can at least say that you've been like productive and learned something today.

 All right, today we're going to make the video that I never thought I'd ever make, but we're

 We're going to show everybody how we sand spool valves and 6 liter power stroke injectors

 First thing you'll have, as you can see here, we have a spool valve that we've taken off,

 This other one here, we already started to tear apart a little bit.

 In the end of this, there's just a Torx bit here, 10 mil, and the other end has a really

 So we just use this pair of ice grips and that really small nut and the Torx bit obviously

 And then when you, here this one we already got loosened up, so you can see that you'll

 take that off, there's a nut on the end, the other end has a whole bunch of washers on

 it, you just pull the bolt out and just lay it aside, try not to lose all the little washers,

 All right, next thing you do is pop the spool valves out, make sure you watch the orientation

 of everything, or you pulled the coils off right there, now you can see you just pulled

 If you look at the spool valve, you can't really see it on here very well, but one end

 is longer than the other end, where you have the short part right there, one side's longer

 This has to go back into the actual top of it the same way it came out.

 If you spin this thing around, put it in the wrong way, your truck won't, your injector

 So we take a little brake cleaner, spray a little brake cleaner on there, they get almost

 a build up of like oil residue or whatever, stick it in your hand, sand it a few times,

 flip it around, get the other end, get it all wet, and when you do this, you'll notice

 that the spool, the valve itself will turn from like a yellow colored, and it'll turn

 What there is, is there's just a build up, almost like a waxy build up or something that

 Now we've always told everybody to use 1000 grit sandpaper, but I guess I was wrong, we

 So that's it, you got stiction on your injectors, sand the spool valves.

 This little plastic pail is full of boiling water to sterilize the innards.

 Okay, in order of popularity, galangal, used in a lot of Thai food, the stuff we grow.

 You're probably not going to find it in America anyway, so you won't have to use it.

 We've got jangu leaves, which take away this kind of fishy smell.

 Don't forget about garlic, shallots, lots of hot chilies, however many you want.

 We've got here coriander seeds and black pepper and white pepper and sesame seeds.

 So we're going to chop it up, fry it up, and again, put it in the pan.

 These are going to get individually picked up, picked off, and they're going to be put inside

 with that cooked spice paste inside the cavity of the pig, along with these, those lime leaves.

 So you want to fry that until it's aromatic, like every spice paste.

 And you think about that much meat, you need quite a hefty amount of salt.

 This is a string that is a strip of the cellulose of the trunk of a banana tree.

 Like any time you're doing meat or potatoes, you've got to make the spices just a little bit

 overly salty so that the flavor, when it absorbs into the meat, everything has a really nice,

 Corrugated tin roof, corrugated tin floor on cement, banana stalks, again,

 This is what everybody wants, the crispy, and that's the favorite thing in Asia.

 Hi YouTube today, I'm doing a Rihanna braided hair tutorial as you see on my iPhone

 Separated into the two front sections and now I'm going to start to braid from the top

 And connect to the back and bring it all the way around the back section

 And sometimes you might have to stop for tangles and now I'm starting off on the front

 So I'm all done and now I'm just going to apply the elastic band at the end

 Hey everyone, today I'm going to show you how to scrunch your hair, which looks like this in the end.

 For me, I have pin straight hair, so I like to give it some curl and make it look like I have naturally wavy hair.

I don't like when it looks stringy and hard and just like straight little pieces.

I do, I start it at night after I take a shower and then I finish it in the morning.

 It literally takes no time, a lot quicker than straightening your hair or anything.

 Okay, so I just got out of the shower and this is gonna be the hardest part and it's really not that hard at all.

 First off I use mousse and this is just Tresemme mousse that you can get for like $2.

Sometimes I don't use it, but it usually helps form the curl in my hair.

 So first I'm just going to put mousse in my hair and I do use quite a bit.

 usually use two handfuls about this big and I flip my head upside down

 So again the wax is optional or you could use either wax or mousse.

 I flip my bangs over to the opposite side of what I part them on.

 So I'll just do one and then I'll kind of speed it up because it's all just a plain French braid.

 I'm going to look really silly and it's going to look really messy, but you just want to stay close to your roots.

If you don't know how to French braid you can normally braid your hair

 And now I'm just going to French braid all three other parts of my hair.

 I guess you could leave it like this, but now is the fun part, which is well, that's the fun part too.

 But scrunching and you want to use some kind of scrunch spray and

 And you could use any other but I really like this and it's only like two or three dollars.

 So I just spray it all over my hair and what I do is I push it up like this and just make a fist

 Okay, so now my hair is going to stay all day long and I don't really like when it looks too hard and too crunchy, but it kind of looks texturized now.

 It kind of looks like I just got out of the water at the beach or something.

It starts closer up at my roots and you really just, it's really simple and it's great in the morning.

If you ever see my hair kind of looking like this and you know it wasn't curled with the curling iron, this is how I do it.

 This is the only way I really curl my hair, but every time it can look a little bit different, but generally it looks about the same depending on how you braid your hair.

 Sorry, I'm just going to show you guys a quick look at what this product looks like.

 We'll actually, if you do purchase this product, we'll actually send you a sample video of

 how this product works, okay, and how to put it together and everything.

 They make your sunglasses look a lot more valuable and professional looking.

 So anyhow, I just wanted to give you a little bit of a close-up of what it looks like here.

 Let me show you a quick demonstration of how this product here works.

 If you use the sunglasses that come with the boxes, you can take the boxes, you place them

 You take the sunglasses, you can take several different colors out of each sunglass.

 Now you want to use the same sunglasses from that box and put three sunglasses of different

 colors, if you'd like, all the same style, just right down the rack, okay.

 After they've tried it on, they can just stick it back on the rack, okay.

 You've got three different shelves that you can use here, okay.

 Once you've taken them out, you just put the box back on the rack here, okay.

 It makes it a lot more visible, too, okay, plus a lot more professional looking than

 You can also remove the shelves as well if you find that you don't have these types of

 You can take the extra pieces and just place them in there, okay.

 And you can take an additional sunglass and do all four sunglasses.

 You can pull this box out as well, put another piece down there.

 You can pull that out as well and you can also put another piece here and have four

 You've got three different colors of that particular style displayed here and you've

 got the box sitting right there with additional sunglasses ready to be pulled out as these

 I just wanted to show you a quick sample of a demonstration of how this particular product

 Hey guys, so yeah, um, one of my most highly requested videos is how I style my bangs

 So if you want you could watch that a link will be in the description

 But a lot of people ask me how do you style them and get them to like do this?

 They like flop in their face, and they're just like I can't see so I'm gonna teach you how to make them go like that

 And not be like super stiff, and I could still shake them and everything and they don't like fall on my face, so yeah

 Also, I want to apologize for the terrible terrible lighting because I look at the time and it says

 So there's like no lighting besides the light above me, which is not that good, but

 Whatever, it'll do okay, so the first thing you're gonna want to do is wash your hair, so I'm gonna do that now

I'm using whoa like you guys care, but yeah, I'll show you anyway, okay?

 This is in Spanish, and I can't I don't know what kind of shampoo is it's in Spanish

 Don't know I think it says multivitamins and proteins protects the head

 So I'm gonna use that and I'm gonna wash my hair, and I'm gonna blow-dry it and my hair is naturally curly

 And yeah, this is what it looks like if I were to blow-dry it and not straighten it so now

 I'm gonna straighten it so yeah, so I have my straightener, and it's a way to straight one ooh fancy

 And it's at 420 degrees so yeah, and I think you guys know how to straighten your hair

 Okay, so now my bangs are a hundred percent straight like there's literally no like wavy stuff or anything

 It's all straight, but if I just straighten my hair it would look like this, and this is not attractive

 So now I just plug my blow-dryer back in because now I'm gonna do is I'm gonna take water

 And I'm gonna put it in my hair so it becomes more swoopy, and then I'm gonna blow-dry it, so I'll show you how to do that

 Take some water, and then just put it through your hair, and then just get away like

 But I'm gonna do it again because this time I'm gonna like focus more on like not this side because the side just stays down

 And more of like this part and like figuring out like where is there is there gonna be a part am I just gonna leave it

 You see bangs the thing is they don't turn out the same way every time

 So you're just gonna have to mess with them until you like find a good way like it's annoying

 But the whole thing is I will I get my hair the way I want it the thing is it is not gonna stay like that

 I love it so much, so I'm gonna show you how I use it now so first find out a way that you like it

 And then get it the way I like it cuz like this stuff dries quick if you do it wrong

 And then you spray it like it's gonna stay like that so I put it in my fingers

 And if you have like hair like layers then get like the underneath part too

 And then I go like this and it kind of rounds it you see so it's like less deadness yay

 Use a lot, but this stuff doesn't like really run out that quickly so it's great

 I bring hair stay to school with me a portable one not a vicious a regular one

 So it doesn't get messed up during the day, but you see how like it goes around my eyes

 Yeah, so um I the whole like the whole trick really is a straightening it

 And then wetting it into the place and then blow drying it and then the hairspray

 Because like when you wet hair it becomes swoopy, but don't soak it because then it will get curly

 So you just want to put in your fingers and then style it um I think I made that rule up myself

 So yay for me, but um yeah, I don't know anyone else who does this

 So you guys can get wow these kind of bangs so cuz my hair is not naturally like this.

 Yeah, I hope you guys enjoy it on how I get my hair like this if you have any questions

 Highly highly recommend this book for any and all people who are even the least bit

 interested and have maybe heard about how raw food is helping people heal, is helping

 people increase their energy, positivity, and overall quality of life.

 In her home, she's presenting this recipe to us just to show everyone that hey, it's

 There are many many recipes that take literally but a few minutes to prepare and that are

 She's going to show us how to make, it looks like a sushi alternative with raw nori rolls

 and a lot of other good stuff that she can start telling us about.

 Now for people on a really tight budget that aren't going to go 100% raw, you can get these

 really cheap at an Asian grocery store, but they're not 100% raw.

 These make a great alternative to sandwich because bread is so constipating.

 I found out later, there was a study even that showed that people who eat a lot of bread

 have a higher risk of kidney cancer, which is what she died from.

 First I'm going to chop a little bit of bell pepper, organic bell pepper.

 I make my own sprouts simply because it's cheaper and sprouts are a really inexpensive

 You soak them overnight to eliminate the enzyme inhibitors and then you've got to make sure

 you rinse them a couple of times a day, otherwise they can get mold.

 And believe me, when I first went raw, I got a headache from moldy sprouts.

 And after about three days, you want to keep them in the fridge.

 As the economy gets worse and we're on a tighter budget, we're going to have to make more and

 Sprouts are a very good source of enzymes and all kinds of nutrients.

 When you sprout a seed, the nutrients multiply, I think eight to ten times.

Ann Wigmore, I love to tell this story because when she went to India, she

 took the beggars, I've been to India a couple of times and there was just so much poverty,

 She got the beggars to sprout their grains and their rice and their beans and their lentils.

 The difference in the nutritional amount that they got from the sprouts was enough that

 Sprouts are really awesome and we need to incorporate more of them.

 I eat them every day and I always grow like three varieties at a time.

 The monounsaturated fats in this avocado help reduce belly fat.

 The fourth ingredient I'm going to put is some homemade salad dressing, raw salad dressing,

 which you can easily make with raw apple cider vinegar, extra virgin, preferably raw olive

 oil, nut butters like tahini, raw tahini, and different ingredients.

 Alternatively, however, what really makes a good filling for this is a seed pâté.

 In my book as well as online, you can find lots of recipes for seed pâtés.

 Now I have to tell you, these don't keep very long because the nori roll gets soggy.

 So you don't want to do this, you don't want to make this and then pack it for lunch.

 What you do for a quick lunch is pack the ingredients separately and roll it up right

 And if you can't find the nori rolls, these nori rolls are really high in minerals, if

 you can't find them for some reason, you can get a collard green and do a wrap with the

 Or some other kind of like, some people use cabbage, a cabbage leaf.

 At first I used to make a lot of really fancy raw gourmet recipes, but now I've got it down

 Unfortunately, my dad didn't heed my advice and he died a year ago of colon cancer.

 I said, Dad, you know, this wouldn't have happened if you'd gone raw.

 One thing I've learned too on my raw journey is the importance of minerals.

 So even if you eat 100% raw organic, you're not going to get enough minerals.

 That's why I'm now promoting a company which deals with superfoods, which are very, very

 So later on I'll be telling you a little bit more about this company, but you can see the

 links below if you'd like more information on my book or the company.

 So basically you just prepared a whole raw lunch in about three or four minutes.

 I have to hide this from my husband because if I don't, this will last like two days,

 So I have to hide it from him because this would last me a month easily.

 So people can bring these ingredients to their workplace, they can stay at home and make

 an incredible raw vegetable sushi in like basically ten minutes.

 Yeah, and this also makes a great, if you cut this in half or thirds, it makes a really

 Even if you're not raw, these foods are so delicious and nutritious.

 And I wanted to show you how I give the supplements to Lily, my cat who has stomatitis.

 But I've switched to the big bottle because I went through too much of that

 Just a little FYI what I do and then I give this to Lily twice a day once in the morning once at night

This particular bottle, honey, not so close, this particular bottle is Plak Off for cats

 It's exactly like the regular Plak Off except they've added brewers yeast to make it taste better to cats

 It was sold by a woman in England, and it was something like $12 for the bottle and

 It just doesn't have the brewers yeast to see if Lily was willing to eat this

 So you might try just the regular Plak Off if you don't want to spend the money on the Plak Off for cats

 This is a morning and a night thing and this is night, so I'm going to do both.

 to get Lily and she'll come running in at some point as will some of our other cats I'm sure

 All the other cats like it when Lily comes in because after she finishes they get to, hey hey, up here please, they get to

 I've got my daughter doing the video, so please I hope it's okay.

 Then after I do that I put the lysine in and it comes with a measuring scoop

 If this was morning, I would also be giving her her steroid cream.

 I don't know if you can see this is the amount that she's on now when when she first started she went from

 One number here to the next number and she did that twice a day once in the morning once at night

 To the smaller numbers here from one to the next twice a day now

 Right once a day, so and that's a morning thing and what I would do is just put a little bit on my finger

 With the supplements to Lily and I hope this is helpful to those of you who also want to give your cats

 Hi friends, so today I'm going to be doing a hair tutorial on this soft shoulder length

 It kind of reminds me of Kim Kardashian's shoulder length hair when she kind of like

 So today I am going to be using my Irresistible Me Sapphire 8-in-1 Curler.

 You can create tight, perm-like curls, ringlet curls, spiral curls, ribbon curls, split curls,

 large and bouncy curls, beach or wavy curls, finger-type waves, whole bunch.

 Today for the waves I'm creating, I'm going to be using the 32-millimeter barrel and it

 just clicks into the attachment like so, and I'm going to go ahead and turn it on.

 I really love this hairstyle because it just gives a volume, especially to the sides of

 And I will be doing a lot of hair tutorials with this 8 in 1 curler from Irresistible

 Me, just because there's so many different size wands that I could just do so many different

 So if you guys do decide to pick this wand up, it'll be good for you because I'll be

 showing you a whole bunch of different hairstyles to use with it.

 So I'll leave the link below and I also have a coupon code for you guys.

 They just sent me the wand and they're like, hey, if you like it, use it in a tutorial

 And if you want to give your subscribers a coupon code, here it is.

 All right, I'm going to leave you guys with some weird, awkward faces.

 And everything you want to know, all the info you're going to need is going to be down below

 me at lesson 6, the book that I'm going to be using is the one behind me.

 by myself, especially to go in conjunction with these YouTube videos.

 it with my students at home when I've got a new student in, and it's ideal to take anybody

 from complete beginner to kind of a level 1, grade 1 kind of standard.

 to purchase at this address coming up here, or you can click on a link already in the

This is going to be a bit of a quick one today because it's just the summary before

 we go on to play the music, and you should know the following and be happy before continuing

 on to the playing stage, or you could end up just struggling or playing incorrectly

 I go through with my students at home just to reiterate and make sure that they do understand

Otherwise, it's just, you know, they end up asking so many questions

So, by now you should be able to locate middle C on both the piano

So, everything here is in the previous pages in the book, so you can

But, so you should know where to locate middle C. Remember the two black

So, starting at middle C, C, D, E, F, G, and then we start back at

 the beginning of the alphabet, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, A, B, C, and so on.

 able to play at least a scale of C with either hand separately or together.

 left hand starts on middle C and goes down at the same time the right hand goes up.

So, it means that the notes are to be played with the right hand.

We don't have to worry about the bottom number at this point as it

All the answers and everything that has been explained in more detail in the previous

 Just a quick one, just to go through some of the basics and some of the things we've

 learned just to kind of recap before we do move on to lesson seven where we're going

So, thanks very much for watching and I'll see you all in lesson seven.

 When you hear the term antidepressant, you probably think of medication like Prozac,

 What you may not think of though is the original antidepressant, nutrition.

 You see, depression is linked to an imbalance of brain chemicals called neurotransmitters,

 Well, the foods we eat also affect the levels of these mood-boosting brain chemicals.

 So by choosing foods that elevate our mood, and by avoiding those that worsen it, you

 These essential nutrients play a crucial role in the functioning of the brain chemicals

 In order to get plenty of omega-3 fatty acids in your diet, aim to eat fatty fish such as

 salmon, tuna, herring, and sardines two to three times per week.

 Other foods that are high in omega-3 fatty acids include walnuts, flaxseed, and canola oil.

 Vitamin D works in the same way that many antidepressant medications do, and that's

 In order to get plenty of vitamin D, eat foods such as skim milk, eggs, and fatty fish again,

 Also, the body can make vitamin D through exposure to the ultraviolet rays and sunlight.

 However, if you live at higher latitudes, or if you tend to avoid the sun, make sure

 So aim to eat at least three servings of high folate foods daily.

 Foods that are high in folate include green leafy vegetables like spinach and cabbage,

 also broccoli, avocado, almonds, peanuts, asparagus, green peas, and breakfast cereals

 So remember, by choosing foods that are high in omega-3 fatty acids, vitamin D, and folate,

 your diet can become a lethal weapon in your battle against depression.

 3 tablespoons of mayonnaise, quarter teaspoon of black pepper and salt to taste.

 Now mix all the ingredients with the spoon until it's nicely combined.

 sure your chicken and sweet corn is fully cooled down while making this mixture otherwise

 Next, spoon the chicken and sweet corn mixture on one slice of bread

 and finally your delicious chicken and sweet corn sandwich is ready to enjoy

 Hello everyone, my name is Melanie and I'm from the United States, but I live in Seoul,

 And today I'm going to do a product review on a product called Korean Red Ginseng Extract.

 Now when I first heard the name Panex Korea, nothing came to mind.

 So I talked to the marketing representative and did a little research online and I learned

 that the company, Panex Korea, has been in existence for 12 years now and also it is

 I feel very confident using a product by a company with that kind of reputation.

 So I also learned a little bit about red ginseng when I was doing my research and I

 found out that red ginseng is very good for your health, especially when you take it on

 And basically it's known to prevent cancer and diabetes long term and short term if you

 It's known to boost your immune system, help with exhaustion and fatigue, and also improve

 It's a nice sturdy gold box with a red label on the front and it looks very luxurious.

 When I open up the box, when you see inside, there's a lovely gold silky fabric and inside

 Now I've been using this product for about a week and the taste, a little bitter.

 So when I make this, I do like to mix it with some tea, some sweet tea.

 I prefer hot water because then it really dissolves nicely in the mixture.

 So right now I'm going to make some tea for you and then we're going to try it together

 The consistency or the texture is also similar to a thick soy sauce or maybe even like a

 And then I'm supposed to mix it thoroughly so that it dissolves with the tea and the

 And I think if you drink coffee, maybe the bitter taste you wouldn't even really notice.

 So adding a sweet tea or maybe even some honey would be something that I would recommend.

 And also, you're supposed to drink this one to two times a day for the best results.

 You don't have to drink it that many times but obviously if you really want to see your

 energy improve and see your tiredness dissolve, then this is something you need to kind of

 So I did use this product for about a week as I mentioned before.

 And during this time, I did notice some great benefits that I'd like to share with you now.

 I do some TV shows and I run around Seoul on a regular basis all around town.

 And I did notice this week that I didn't feel as tired as I usually feel.

 And when I went to a couple of my studios later in the week, they actually commented

 that my skin looked great, that I felt I looked more bubbly and I looked more excited than

 And overall, if I had to rate this extract out of five points, I would rate it a four

 The only reason I would not rate it a five is because as I showed you before, it comes

 And if I want to drink this twice a day, it means I can only be at home to have it.

 It's not really easy to take this around with me or put it in my bag because it's so heavy.

 So I don't know if Panax Korea is making or thinking about making some travel size extract

 I would really, really recommend that or enjoy that so I can take it with me when I'm on

 And overall, I would recommend this product to my family and friends back at home.

 I think even my friends in the United States would really love this product.

 My brother especially just graduated from university and he is always looking for the

 So I think I'm actually going to buy some of this product and send it to him as a gift.

 I hope you enjoyed it and I hope you found it helpful as well as informative.

 Now this is not the breakfast I always have, but it is a pretty staple breakfast for me

 For a lot of you guys that do follow me, you know that I'm starting my cutting process

 for my show and just one of the things I've been doing is removing carbohydrates from

 It's what works for my body, so just keep my raw a little bit different, but this has

 But I got about a cup and a half of egg whites, two slices of turkey breast, and now I'm going

 to put one piece of fat free cheese in all its processed glory on there.

 But a lot of people are like, man, why are you having broccoli for breakfast?

 And one thing that's really important when you're in any mode, whether you're trying

 to build muscle, weight loss, whatever, is to make sure that your body has what it needs.

 And it's not just your macros, your carbs, fats, and your proteins.

 It's your micronutrients as well, your vitamins and your minerals.

 And so many people aren't getting an adequate amount of fruits.

 I know a lot of people don't see it ideal to have broccoli for breakfast, but it's a

 And I want to make sure my body has everything that it needs to go through its bodily functions.

 Because if you're lacking in your vitamins and minerals, your body's not going to want

 It's not going to want to build muscle, or even keep the muscle that you've been building

 And then I'll let that broccoli finish, and I'll show you guys the finished product.

 But another thing that I've been doing with my breakfast meals is taking in some glutamine.

 I'm using Xtend here, which I know a lot of you guys have seen before.

 If you're not familiar with glutamine, rather than get too in-depth on that, check out my

 I do have a Glutamine 101 video where I go a little bit more in-depth.

 But I will just put in about a serving of that, and I'll mix that bad boy up.

 But I know a lot of you guys are like, man, look at all his supplements.

 Well, I really honestly don't take too many of those, not all the time.

 But in fact, I actually have the flaxseed with my breakfast, so I guess I do have flaxseed.

 But most of that other stuff is honestly supplements that are given to me that I just kind of put

 Another thing too, which is important, don't cook your eggs too fast.

 Sometimes people cook their eggs way too fast, way too high heat, and you can kill the protein.

 One thing that I do use, guys, which may not make your breath taste the same if you're

 trying to get the ladies, but if you already got a lady and you don't care what your breath

 tastes like, one of my things that I like to add is garlic powder.

 You don't really need a whole lot, but that really flavors it really well.

 All it is, if I look at the ingredients, is just basically minced garlic.

 In fact, I'm going to let that sit for another couple minutes before I say it's done.

 Another thing I kind of add to the mix, which I kind of forgot to mention, is my Cellucor

 This is a fat burner, but what I really like about this product is it is a stimulant-free

 This is something that you guys will see available on the market shortly, so stay tuned for that.

 Now, this is a product I've been taking just for a little while, so I'm not going to give

 I want to be able to actually use the product before I give you a review.

 That's one thing I will tell you guys is I never give a review without using the product

 for at least a long period of time, so you can actually tell if it works or not.

 I mean, Cellucor makes great products, and a lot of you guys have taken the C4 pre-workout

 and know exactly what I'm talking about as far as quality products, but I'm pretty excited

 I really like that stimulant-free factor, so I will take two capsules here with my meal,

 and then I'll probably take one other capsule throughout the day.

 That's really all I take, so I'm pretty excited about that product.

 Like I said, I've been hearing a ton of good stuff, but yeah, that's my breakfast.

 Ok, so the next tip I'm going to show you is how to learn the notes on your bass guitar

 Now open, this is just a B. So as long as you know what your open string is, you'll

 Whereas on all the other ones, or all the other notes, it'll go to a sharp.

 So this is a B, the next fret up would be a C. After that would be a C sharp, and then

 a D, and then a D sharp, and then an E. So that brings us to our next string, which if

 you have a 4 string, would be your lowest string, which is an E. So if that's an E,

 the first fret would be an F. The next would be an F sharp, next would be a G, and then

 Now we go up to our next string, which is an A. First fret would be an A sharp, next

 fret would be a B, next a C, C sharp, and then D. Now we go to our D string.

 Now what I suggest from this video is you write down the first 5 frets of each string

 I've just shown you, then you can find any note on the bass guitar.

 I want to find what the 7th fret of the E string is, for me, I go to the 5th fret, which

 I know is an A, and I go A sharp, and then that's a B. Then the next up would be a C,

 all the notes on your bass from an open string to the 12th fret.

I hope this helps, and please keep watching for my next tip, trick,

 To start, what I've done is in this bowl I have roughly two cups of yogurt.

 Now the yogurt I'm using is homemade so it is a little bit more sour.

 If you buy store-bought yogurt you can just buy any plain yogurt

 What I've done is I grated up about three quarter of a medium-sized cucumber,

 peeled it and grated and I've been just taking handfuls of cucumbers,

 And the reason I say three quarter cucumber is because when you grate it

 and you take out all the water it's going to lose a lot of its body.

 So you may think three quarter sounds like a lot but look what it's turned into.

 So I've got two cups of yogurt in this bowl and I'm gonna just dump in the cucumber

 Mix it gently because I've noticed with the cucumber if you mix it too vigorously

 that's just going to force the cucumber to release more water and you don't want that.

 If you think that the yogurt is too much compared to the cucumber

 you're obviously going to need a little more sugar to counter that sourness.

 If you're using store-bought yogurt you can lessen that a little bit.

 So when you taste it if you think something is missing you can add accordingly.

 Get a mortar and pestle, mash them up and this is what you end up with.

 And I recall that one more thing you do need to add in addition to the mustard seeds

 And you'll notice that the body of the raita is just becoming a bit smoother.

 A lot of people will add maybe a bit of sour cream to make it creamier.

 I'm going to add some grapes again to add some more interesting flavor

 So if you have someone over that can't eat a lot of spicy food,

 What's up guys, I haven't really made a video in a while so I wanted to give you a quick

 dieting tip since I've been dieting for 17 weeks now and I've gotten quite lean.

 I started my contest prep at 167-ish pounds and yesterday morning I was 143 pounds.

 But quick and easy tip, what I like to have for a snack that's protein and moderate carb

 And the ingredients are really, you can add lots of different things that makes this meal

 And 1 cup is 227 grams and the macros are as follows, zero fat, 9 carbs, and 23 protein.

 Put the yogurt on the scale, turn the scale on, it's reading zero.

 You would think that they would be a lot higher, but they're not.

 200 grams of strawberries, if I remember correctly, is around 16 grams of carbs.

 But I'm going to go ahead and put this on the scale, zero it out.

 Now, if you want, you can add vanilla protein to this, like some vanilla casein.

 Another good thing to add, depending on what your carbs and fat content is, is low fat

 It's usually right around 25 grams of carbs and 25 grams of protein and about 3-4 grams

 And seriously, if you want, the other thing you can do is put this in the freezer.

 Take it out about 20-30 minutes and it tastes a lot like frozen yogurt.

 Hi everyone, in this video I'm going to be showing you how to apply the Superstrands

 in straight or curly and we have a range of over 10 different colours.

This hair is 100% human remy hair which can be straightened or curled with heat

 piece, making it the quickest and easiest hair extension to apply, as well as being

 the hair extension that adds the most volume and body to your own hair.

 So as I said before, applying the hair extension is really, really quick and easy.

 need to do first of all is using your index fingers, make a parting either side of your

 head just below your crown and bring your fingers round so that they meet in the middle.

 You then need to take that hair and just clip it above your head out of the way.

 you want more volume, you can part the hair slightly higher up and for less volume you

 just make sure there's enough hair on the top here so that it covers the top of the

 with and then where you've parted your hair, you're just going to be putting in the top

 tease the clips until they're securely in place and then do the same with the clips

If you want to make it more secure, you can use a hair clip and just clip

What you then need to do is just let your hair down to cover the top of

 screw right there on the very left side where my thumb is or blocking is.

 Hey, hey, hey, it's your girl Uniquely Green and it's morning time so good morning to you.

 I just finished working out, it's bright and early and I have to get ready for work.

 What do you do when you didn't do anything to your hair over the weekend for work Monday

 Like I say, I just came from working out this morning and I have to get to work.

 It is an old Bantu knot out style that I have on my head and it looks horrible as you see.

 I probably will wash my hair so I'm going to hop in the shower and come back and show

 you what to do when you're pushed for time and you didn't do anything to your head and

 Okay so my hair is clean, I cold washed, I applied my leave-in conditioner and I applied

 So I usually always apply gel around the edges and a little bit further back.

 I'm just putting enough on my fingertips to slick it back and since it's wet it's easier

 So that's good at least I know I can slick it back there and I probably will apply some

 So now I'm going to take a little bit more than what I was applying around the edges.

 Got a good little bit and I'm just applying it through my head.

 I got my dimming brush and I'm not really just brushing my entire head.

 And of course you see how it kind of helps to find some of the curls a little bit.

 Of course it's white because of the gel but once it dries it will dry clear.

 Let's throw on a headband some kind of hair accessories whatever you have that works.

 So it's kind of like a wash and go on a transition hair kind of.

 It's so hard to get the flower in because it has a pin where you can wear it as a clothing

 I'm just going to put just a little bit more gel on the ends so when they dry they won't

 Alright so this is going to be my wet look for today and hopefully it will only take

 Okay well I'll give you pictures of how it looks when it dries.

 Okay, today I'm going to be remodeling a previously botched MacBook lid that I did.

 I did it some time back and I just didn't like the way the graphic turns out so I'm

 A friend of mine, Jamie Ferrara, printed me up some better graphics.

 Okay, so the first thing you have to do is remove the bezel here.

 If you have any fingernails at all you can pretty much get them under there.

 It smarts a little bit but you can see that it pops off a little bit.

 It's a little bit of sticky on the bottom there holding that stuff in place.

 Set that down and you've got your main LCD panel there to pull off.

 There are 12 screws around the bezel now holding the LCD panel in place.

 Apple recommends taking them off in a particular order and putting them back on in a particular

 One more thing, Apple does recommend putting a towel over the screen so that if your screwdriver

 Pretty much once you get all the screws out, I already pried this out a little bit so I'm

 One thing you want to do and I learned this the hard way the first time, is be very careful

 There's a little bit of a magnet and obviously there's some up here as well.

 This one, I did it last time and a friend of mine that did it did the same thing.

 This magnet fell out and at first if you don't see it come out it's not really intuitive

 Some wet dry, literally 1000 grit sandpaper or whatever from the auto body store or whatever.

 This is an actual, what it will look like when it comes out of here.

 You pretty much have to sand this down but you want to get it polished again when you're

 That's how it will look when it comes out and then this is how it will look when it's

 I'll leave a little bit on the outside so you've got some for the tape to stick to.

 I'll send you all Jamie's email so you can send a request to him to print you up one

 Now you take your backing, diffuser or whatever you want to call it, back.

 You also want to make sure that you don't see the circle in the center there.

 Another thing they recommend there is taking a flashlight and going through making sure

 You can't really see that but let's see if I can turn that around a little bit so you

 As I said, this magnet tends to sneak out on you when you're not looking.

 I'm going to check ... Make sure that everything's in there all right.

 Then basically, once you get that in ... I cleaned this pretty good before I put the

 So now I'm going to go ahead and put the screws back in and then we'll clean it up really

 There's a lot of juice that powers LCDs if you get in there playing around.

 And three, I probably breezed over the most difficult part of this mod with regard to

 It takes a couple hours by the time ... If you do it right, because if you get it glossed

 and polished so it's not all scratched up, it does take a while to get that polished

 Again, use some good automotive wet-dry sandpaper and just a lot of water.

 We are making a dish, oh look at that fly go, called pani popo or pangi popo and it is a Samoan

What we just did was we added in one can of coconut milk and one can of water,

 to a boil and we're gonna add in a little bit of cornstarch to thicken it up just a tiny bit.

 Meanwhile I have in this right here, I just have plain old dinner rolls.

 is made for a 9x13 pan but like I said you know we have a small family, only my mom and my brother

I'll fill it up and save the rest of it and then when all that's gone and

 This was, I bought a bag of 24 rolls for $3.50 so I just went that way.

 just had it thawing and rising in the oven since I got home from the grocery store.

 So we'll bring this to a boil, get ready to add the cornstarch to it.

 at 375 degrees because that's what my dinner rolls say and what we're going to do is, okay,

 going to pour the sauce over it so that it's about, it says anywhere between a half to three-fourths

 the height of the roll and so what I'll do is I'll pour that in and then you put it in and

 you cook it the rest of the way and it'll thicken up a little bit more too and you know be sucked

 to add in this cornstarch and to let it simmer for three minutes.

I don't want it to burn and I'm gonna throw this in since I should

 When dad is sick and tired of cooking and wants to go out to eat

 You take it out of the freezer overnight, let it sit in the refrigerator

 And then take it out for about 2-3 hours and then let it sit out of the refrigerator before you're gonna start using it

 Alright, so we're just taking the dough out, we're gonna flatten it out here

 So after you put it in there you let it stretch out for a minute or two?

 Yeah, I gotta leave it there safe for at least 5 minutes, while I'm doing the stretching then I fix the stuff

 Some other ingredients we're gonna be using today, this is just regular oregano we'll be using

 And then also we have some dried out basil here that we're gonna be mixing in as well

 Alright, we're gonna take the peeled tomatoes and spread them out a little bit over the dough

 For our thin pizza, the one we only used 1 pound for, we're gonna use

 And then for the 2 pound one we're gonna do the sauce, these are just 2 variations you can try

 No salt, no pepper, no putty, because mozzarella has a lot of salt

 Using the peeled tomatoes, it's a more Italian traditional pizza

 Alright, for our thin pie we're gonna add a little more olive oil on top

 If you like a thicker crust, then this is what you're gonna go for, the 2 pounds on it

 Alright, we're not gonna be adding any basil to the Sicilian-style pie

 I gotta put this, not that part, by the time I gotta be this way

 Alright, so we're gonna let it sit out for about a half hour and then we're gonna put it in the oven

 This is the more Italian style and this is the thicker one, the more Sicilian style

 I realized inside here, this hole, I can't focus I'm using my iPad.

 So inside here I took the little key and I kind of moved the little turbine around.

 I want to say for 10 minutes one way and 5 minutes one way and 5 minutes the other way

 Let's see if I can put it back together, connect it to the bike.

 Today we're going to do a song entitled Greater Is Coming by Jacqueline Carr.

 Greater Is Coming is the song and that song is in the key of Bb.

 Alright, so if you've noticed I've given you a few different variations to go from

 Alright, they're at your disposal, you can choose to use whichever one you like.

 One of the variations is simply hitting directly at the Bb and back home to the Eb.

 And that chord is while resting on the Eb, right hand Ab, F. First chord.

 Okay now what we have there is what I normally like to do sometimes is I'll play the B underneath

 My right hand chord, my thumb as you can see is resting on the Ab and the Bb.

 You can either hit them simultaneously or you can sort of roll with it.

 Now basically what we're doing here even in the verse if it had not been for the shaking

 and if it had not been for the beating and all of that you're basically doing the same

 And so what you have now is just different variations to do while the verse is going

 So if you feel that I am doing not good, I should be excused because I am super duper beginner.

 So I am sorry that my instruction, I do not even dare to call it instruction.

 the front are fairly close together, not particularly well suited for a four and a

 half meter kayak and so I decided if I could do something with the removable tow bar attachment

 that allowed the back of the kayak to be supported that would be quite a good thing.

 ute I deliberately ordered one with a removable tow bar so that I could do something like this

 soon but I'll just quickly show all the bits that I had to buy.

The first bit that you're obviously going to need is a bit of 50 millimeter by 50 millimeter

 or two inch by two inch steel that goes inside the removable tow bar bit.

 of probably about 40 millimeter diameter pipe going up there and found another and that's

 fits snugly inside the larger diameter tube and then I've just got some one inch by one inch

This is a fairly DIY loader as long as you can pretty much do the

If you can't do the welding yourself probably do quite a lot of it yourself

 still and then just get someone else to stick them together for you.

 had to buy were two of these spring locking pins and contact me if you want to know where to buy

They were about seven dollars each or something like that and then just a couple

 of bolts and a few nuts to essentially just put some side walls on so that the kayak won't tend

 could if I wanted to use the whole 1.3 meter length of that top bar if I wanted to support

 some bits of wood or something like that if I'm bringing them home on the roof racks.

 The only other thing that I did so I welded them and then I also just had them hot galvanized

 which is pretty much seeing as it's going to be supporting a kayak and also probably going to be

 the little locking pins probably about $20 if you take the locking pins and the bolts and

 everything so all up this is about a hundred dollar project which has turned out fairly well.

 So I'll now quickly show some of the features of this once you put it on the ute.

 Okay now I'll quickly demonstrate how to use this DIY kayak loader or how I think it's going

So obviously the first step is going to be to insert the the bottom part into the

 removable tow bar receptacle and then just use your standard tow bar locking pin to lock it in

You'll notice on the bottom I have a it's about a 17 or an 18 millimeter hole maybe a 16

 in there that basically is in the right position for the for the locking pin.

 that this has two holes two 8 millimeter holes all the way through to suit those locking pins.

 You've got one down the bottom and then another one near the top and I'll quickly demonstrate how

So first step for loading a kayak would be insert that into the tow bar lock it in place

 and then put a locking pin into the lower hole on the on the tube.

The whole structure is usually a bit more rigid when I've got that bottom locking

 of the T in and you'll notice that when that sits down on that locking pin it actually makes

 the top of the T at the same height as the roof racks on the car which is what you want.

 Okay so now you will notice that I've got the T facing to the front and rear of the vehicle

 and what you would now normally do is load the rear of your kayak onto that while the other end

 is sitting on the ground then basically strap the rear of the kayak in so that the kayak won't

 tend to fall off the support and then pick up the front of the kayak and walk around the vehicle

 with the kayak and just put it straight on top of the roof rack and then once you have that face

 parallel with the back of the car then you put the second locking pin in to lock it into place like

Now that structure is is locked in place parallel to the back of the car it looks

 like it's on the lean a little bit but that's just because I haven't got that bottom pin in and it

 shouldn't matter anyway with the little bolts that I've got in there that lock it that will

 prevent the kayak basically from sliding around but you definitely want to strap the back onto

Now the second use for this thing is if you wanted to carry some bits of wood or

 something in the back of the vehicle that stick out over the back but you don't want them to rest

 on your tailgate then I've made this so that you can drop it down and use the the second set of

 holes on the big T to actually lock that in place as well so I'll demonstrate that now.

 So that's that's basically it now of course the the last thing that I won't bother showing is

 that I've made this in such a way that when I'm finished I can pull that out of the tow bar turn

 the top T 90 degrees again from where it is now and the whole thing just fits like that in the

 back of the ute which is on the on the on the rear of the ute which is which is fairly convenient so

 First off, we just want to thank all of our Kickstarter supporters so far.

 And second of all, New Year's approaching, so we just want to take this chance to wish

 And what's around the corner is Chinese New Year, which is my favorite holiday.

 And this year it's going to be super awesome because it's going to be the year of the...

 There are 12 animals, what comes first, what's next, what year is what.

 So I actually came up with a jaunty little poem to help people remember the correct order

 My mom's like the biggest Red Lobster fan, so this is for you, Mom.

 Like many other mnemonic devices, this poem uses the first letter of each word to represent

 All except for the word cheesy, which we will jump into that later.

 And the last line about Red Lobster, actually just flavor text, not really necessary.

 One could actually argue that the cheese biscuits at Red Lobster is probably the best thing

 Anyhow, so cheesy, we're starting out with the year of the rat, rat or mouse.

 Couldn't really use the first letter because there's a lot of repeats with R's, so it gets

 Here we have dipping D for dragon, sauce for snake, hard for horse, and grab for goat.

 M for monkey, roast for rooster, drop for dog, and boil for boar or pig.

 So there's bull and boar, rabbit and rooster, and dragon and dog that share the same first

 The easy way to remember what comes first is the faster of the animal of the pair.

 So the bull, the rabbit, and the dragon, which are faster than their counterparts, actually

 A really simple way to remember what year is what animal is to start out with 1900,

 And you can add 12 and cycle through or work backwards to find out what year is what animal.

 Thanks again to all who have contributed on Kickstarter for Good Job Brain.

Making soy milk at home is very easy and today I'll be comparing three different methods to make it.

 First add the dried soybeans to a container and pick out any black or rotten beans.

 Wash the beans then fill the container with clean water and soak the beans for about eight hours to overnight.

Add soybeans to the pot and add water to fully submerge the beans.

 Cook for six minutes in a pressure cooker or 15 minutes in a regular pot.

 Add the remaining water at the end and strain through a sieve or a large cheesecloth.

 Add the remaining water at the end and strain through a cheesecloth.

Blend the soybeans and then add the beans and remaining water to a pot.

 The Korean soy milk has a darker color, thicker more grainy texture and a stronger bean flavor because the beans were blended more finely after being boiled.

 The Chinese soy milk is much lighter and has a natural sweetness but lacks a bit in flavor.

 The Japanese soy milk is also sweet and light like the Chinese but also has a strong soy flavor.

 Personally I prefer the Japanese method although it can get a bit messy since the ground beans can easily boil over.

Don't forget to subscribe for more videos and follow me on Instagram and Twitter to see my everyday food adventures.

 Riggi Fest champions, there's only been three years of existence, we are the best.

 We do a, it's a Central New York legend around here, Chicken Riggis, and it started in Utica

 from what I understand, but this little restaurant here in Rome has taken over the ranks.

 And I'm going to show you how Teddy's does their Riggis today, and we'll start by, we'll

 Now I like my Riggis a little spicy personally, so I'm going to add some cherry peppers, and

 a little juice from the cherry peppers, gives it some extra flavor.

 One of the things we do with our Riggis that I don't know, I really don't know what most

 other people do, but we use all fresh vegetables and chicken, and all our vegetables are cut

 fresh, and we start with a mixture of mushrooms, onions, olives, and green and red peppers.

 It's important to do a little salt and pepper, a little extra flavor.

 Riggis have become so popular at the restaurant here at Teddy's that we do, you know, we're

 doing anywhere from 90 to 100 orders a night on a Friday or Saturday, and during the week

 And this section gets very busy, and along with the other dishes that we do here, you

 One thing I like to do, in order not to burn a little at the bottom of the pan, is to put

 You don't want them too hard, but you don't want them too soft either.

 As popular as the Riggi is, this year Rachel Ray even mentioned the Riggi Fest on her show,

 and she did her version of chicken Riggis on 30-minute meals, and she's becoming larger

 than life, you know, Rachel Ray, and to get Riggis out there nationally, hey, that's all

 And she's from the Albany area, I think, Lake George area, from what I understand, so yeah,

 And you know, each year the Riggi Fest has gotten bigger and bigger, so I definitely

 We do them with steak as well, and we also do them with sausage.

 And to be perfectly honest with you, the sausage Riggis have now become my favorite.

 The sausage adds such a great flavor to the Riggi and to our sauce.

 We actually even did it with salmon once, and that was sold pretty good.

 After your vegetables are cooked a little bit, I like to add the chicken.

 You're starting to see a little browning on the bottom of the pan.

 That's just from the vegetables and a little bit from the chicken and the heat.

 So once we let this cook a little, the next step I'm going to do is take a little about

 two ounces, two, three ounces of white wine, I'm going to deglaze.

 You let that cook down, and it makes for, adds a little more flavor to the Riggi dish.

 Now with the steak and the sausage, we deglaze with red wine, and the salmon we did with

 But with the chicken, you know, white meat, we're going to go with some white wine.

 Teddy's famous Riggi sauce, which, I can't tell you what's in it.

 I figured I'd do an unboxing because I did not actually see anything about this on YouTube.

 The projector itself is only about the size of my iPhone 5 so it's really cool.

 Basically anything that has an output, a video output, you can use this with.

 It's got to be HDMI but you can buy any kind of converters you need.

 In the box it comes with the MHL cable which is for most Android phones.

 And then it has a, I believe it's like a pouch and a cleaning cloth or something.

 Unfortunately you need the Apple digital adapter which looks to be about $35.

 It's probably out compared to the weight of maybe two or three phones.

 And then the HDMI and MHL is obviously from the Android phones.

 I didn't get a chance to play anything through it so I don't know how it zones.

 It's not going to show anything because I don't have anything to hook up to it right now.

 So when you're not using the projector you can use it to charge your phone still.

 What you do with that is you take your HDMI cable that comes with the projector.

 If you want also you can plug the charger in so you can charge your phone.

 Hello, welcome to the exhibition of the Golf Warms Video Channel.

 Today we're going to be taking a look at soft food, and in particular the mix of Richard and Michael Miller.

 Michael is world famous for his soft food, and that's how the ingredients are covered in.

 Okay Michael, could you talk us through your soft food mix please?

 Probozine, which is probiotic, both versatile agro-products, both very good.

 Thrive, not the thrive in gloss, just the ordinary thrive, very high-yosh content, helps settle the stomach of the birds.

 Herbs, dopsin and horrell, herbs that we grow naturally in the wild.

 Super-vitamin E horse supplement, extra-vitamin E for fertility.

 Clop, all-purpose, curlever oil-powdered supplement, very good product.

 Okay Michael, do you want to just carry on making your mix then and we'll see what happens?

 That is probably the most comprehensive ingredient I've ever seen in a soft food.

 The most, cos at the moment we're breeding all year round this year.

 Added to the mixture are chick crumbs, that they use in the broiler shed for the chickens.

 Added to the mixture are chick crumbs, chick crumbs that they use in the broiler shed for

 No moisture is added to the soft food except for the natural moisture that comes out of

 Hi everyone, remember when I promised you that quick fix video?

 So I just finished doing her color and there is a link to her color video right here if

 But I was blow drying it and I found in the back here a couple little bleeders but honestly

 if there's little bleeders in the back of the hair it's really not that big of a deal

 because unless they're wearing their hair like parted really tight like that, which

 I guess in some braids or something that could happen, then they're not ever going to see

 So that's where a foil was sitting with some blonde in it but then the blonde seeped out

 and actually touched some of the hair that was supposed to stay brown.

 So the roots are brown and then it has this little line of the blonde and then the ends

 So I'm going to show you how to fix this really quick and honestly this is something that

 I would not have fixed in anyone else but I was looking for a reason to make this video

 If this had been up here in her hair, right here by the top of her face or anywhere in

 the part line, it's something that I would definitely fix before I let her leave my salon.

 But since it's back here I probably wouldn't have normally fixed this.

 So I'm going to tell you, if there's something like this up in the front or around the face

 Let's even do this one right here because it's on the top of the head.

 So I'm holding this up and this is probably a level 5 natural, 5N.

 So I'm going to mix up in my Shades EQ a 5N with the Shades EQ processing solution

 You're not coloring in hair, you're just, it's going to be like a Q-tip dab on that

 And you can send them home with it like that and just tell them, say make sure that when

 you get home you spray bottle that little piece out because it needs to process for

 15 minutes or you can do it right when you're blow drying and you notice it, put the little

 blob of the color on and as soon as you're done processing then you can probably just

 take a spray bottle, spray it and wipe it off and it will be fixed.

 So I just use my little, really like a couple drops, you don't need very much.

 Just try to estimate how many, it's 1 to 1, the mixing is 1 to 1 so if you do like

 10 drops of the color, try to match it with 10 drops of the developer, swish it around

 You can mix it with a little Q-tip, I needed a Q-tip but I didn't have one.

 So I'm going to use, we're going to make a Q-tip with a bobby pin and some cotton.

 So you're just going to slide this on and then spin it a little bit until you have a

 Okay so we just made a little Q-tip really quick because I didn't have one so we're going

 Okay so now that we have it mixed up and ready to go, now I'm going to section off this piece

 So you don't want to have the dark spots happening all over your blonde so you're just going

 to be really careful right in here and just kind of dab it on really softly and try to

 keep it away from the scalp so that you can just push it onto that little spot.

 If you see any other little ones, go ahead and just dab them on and anytime you see those

 I'm going to fix this one we originally found on here too because it's pretty obvious.

 It will not be the end of the world if you send them home with it like that even and

 just say when you get home, shower or just spray off this little part.

 You can feel where it is because it's a little bit oily feeling.

 But I would try to rinse it out for them so they don't feel like they're like, oh great.

 Maybe they need to go do carpool and they're like, I can't stay 15 more minutes.

 So there have been times where I've had to send them out with the color on there still

 Just make sure you get a towel when you get home, spray bottle out like this, blot it,

 And I'll show you the end result when that's done processing, but that's it.

 You just mix up the color that is missing, put it on and process.

 Now you can still kind of tell where they are if you push the hair down really tight

 there and there, but it's a lot less noticeable and nobody would ever even know.

 Make sure you subscribe to my videos and share it with your friends and like my Facebook

 Starting with a completely bare face, I'm going to go ahead and apply my lace front

 Now all I'm going to do is glue down the wig with one piece of tape and then glue the sides

 I'm just going to conceal under the eyes and any other areas that might have some hyperpigmentation.

 Now I'm using my Graf Tobian foundation in ginger and I'll go ahead and apply that with

 I will modify it to make it look the way I would like for it to look.

 Now I'm going to take a brush and brush out the front and the tail of my brow just to

 Now I'm going to go ahead and take some brow powder and extend it a little bit more.

 I know it seems like I'm defeating the purpose but I need to go ahead and extend that so

 Now the brows are not exactly like the photo but I'm going to go ahead and get them as

 I'm just blending it down and I'm also going to take my finger and also blend out the concealer.

 Taking some gel liner, I'm going to start creating the shape of my eyeshadow.

 I'm just going to wing out here and then I will apply the eyeliner as a base and start

 Now take a really dark black matte shadow and I'm just going to place it on my eyelid

 After blending, I'm going to go ahead and take a light brown eyeshadow and further blend

 If you notice in the photo, there's like three different shades on the Barbie's eyes and

 I'm also taking a coppery color and I'm going to go ahead and use that as the last color

 Again this is my interpretation and I made it work according to my eye shape and what

 Now I'm taking an elf cleansing wipe and I'm going to just clean up that line just to give

 I'm taking some concealer going underneath my eyes to just kind of clean it up, even

 Using my elf angled contour brush, take some kohl liner, line your waterline.

 Going back into that copper color, I'm just going to take some of that color right underneath

 If you notice in the photo, she does have some of that bronzy copper underneath her

 Just to deepen the color because I don't want it to be too purple.

 Welcome to Log Furniture How To, the most all-inclusive site on the net for log and

 And today we're going to show you how to cut a perfect circle on a bandsaw using a simple

 If you want to see how to glue up this square before we have the circle, click here.

 Alright, so Chris has a sled-like jig that he built specifically for his bandsaw.

 He's got a little glide that fits in the groove and it fits right up to the blade.

 And then he's got a ruler on the top of the sled that lines up with the front of the teeth

 of the blade and has a couple of different holes depending on what size circle he wants

 So to get your circle, you're going to just use a compass and a ruler to figure out the

 And you're going to use the compass to find a good center point.

 You don't necessarily need to draw the circle onto the wood, but it just helps you find

 a good center point to make sure that your cut is going to stay within the boards that

 Then you're going to use that center point and you're going to drill a small hole about

 And this is going to be the bottom of the stool or the bottom of the table or whatever

 Before you set the glue up on the sled, you'll want to cut off some of the excess just to

 So you're going to start off by making a straight cut, sliding the sled into place, into position.

 Chris uses a clamp with another piece of wood inside the groove to make sure that his sled

 If you use a thinner blade, you might have trouble with the thicker pieces of wood trying

 to make a turn like that without the blade kind of going out of control.

 And just very carefully back off the glue up and you complete that cut.

 And it's exactly 11 inches across which is exactly what Chris was going for.

 So if you like this video, click like and be sure to subscribe to our channel.

 The music you heard in this video was performed by Colorado pianist, Lacey Black.

 To find out more about Lacey, you can visit her website at laceyblack.net or find her

 top clockwise fine chopped pudina or mint leaves, garlic pods, red chili powder

 garam masala powder, salt, oil or ghee, chopped green chilies, ginger, chopped

 onions, coriander powder, black pepper powder, cumin powder, curds, turmeric

 chopped green chilies, 2 teaspoon of ginger, a cup of chopped pudina or mint

 step 2 to 1 kg of prawns add a half a teaspoon of turmeric powder, 1 teaspoon

 of coriander powder, half a teaspoon of black pepper powder, half a teaspoon of

 cumin powder, 1 teaspoon of red chili powder, 1 teaspoon of salt, 1 teaspoon of

 step 5 take a vessel add sufficient water add 2 tablespoon of salt

 reduce the flame add soaked rice and cook the rice until 80% done

 step 6 heat a pan add 150 ml or 6 tablespoon of oil, 3 medium-sized chopped

 step 7 add ground paste to the brown onions mix and fry for 5 minutes

 and similarly follow the gravy and rice layers and adding ghee in between

 cover with a lid and dum cook the prawns biryani for about 10 minutes on slow

 flame note place a griddle under the vessel so that the biryani will not

 for more such easy and fast recipes log on to www.rasoismat.com

 and what this is is two gallons, quarter cup salt, quarter cup sugar, and then any kind

 Alright, so this will give me a chance to put them with this kitchen gadget.

 If this were going to be used for a soup or something, I'd peel everything up real nice,

 Alright, now that we've reached a boil, I'll just remove it from the heat.

 And we're going to have to come back in a little while when this has cooled down to

 I had to stuff some sticks in it and then rest these weights on it.

 But anyway, this is like a 23 pound bird though, but a little excessive, but that's

 It's the middle of winter, so don't have to worry about refrigeration tonight.

 Hey everybody, I just wanted to make this quick video about how to remove a heat sink

 Removing a heat sink from really any desktop is pretty much the same process but I thought

 There's usually again the type of screws that are used vary computer to computer, manufacturer

 Then you unhook it, and you can lift that up, and then take out your CPU.

 Okay, now once you get the chip out, you may want to clean the thermal paste off of it.

 So what you can do is I just use a cotton swab and rubbing alcohol.

 Rubbing alcohol is good because even if you drip it on it, it dries fast, so you don't

 Alright, I want to show you how to make what is for me the best pecan pie I've ever had.

 I used to sing in a quartet and we would go around and sing at all these little churches

 Now for you Yankees that doesn't mean we're eating in the dirt.

 I had many a pie of all sorts of different kinds but many a pecan pie and this is the

 I believe it was by a friend of my wife's, old, old lady that, man she could whoop up

 I mean you've got to bake it but you don't have to stand over the stove and stir and

 K-Ro also, if you've read on K-Ro, it is the only, you know when I say light corn syrup,

 But all the other cheaper off-brands, whatever, are going to say high fructose corn syrup.

 I should probably use a mixer, but I got a new whisk and I'll just try it out here.

 Some of you I know got your own pie recipes and maybe you're just looking for a crust

 So I'm going to do the pie crust recipe in a completely different video.

 Okay, as I said before, I may have too much stuff here because that may be a smaller pie

 So I'm going to try to get all the pecans I can in without some of the juice.

 I don't think it'll boil over because I've used this pie pan before, but it has been

 But I poured it all over the floor, but that gum is so good I may lick it off the floor.

 It is going to bake at 325 for 50 to 55 minutes, till the filling is almost firm.

 And we'll pull it out and show it to you, and I might even let you taste it.

 But we'll let that little puppy cool off, and that is just, I may even show you a slice.

 Okay, now we're going to start the process of cutting out all the cavities in the body.

 Basically the pickups and the controls and the holes that we need for the bridge.

 I'm going to use my templates and I've also made a template here for the tremolo pocket

 And I am using a control cavity where you can access the volume pots through the back.

 And then you want to have these pots and your selector switch ready just so you know the

 I'm just going to start with the template, lining it up with the center line on the body.

 And then I'm just going to take a pencil and draw everything in so that I've got some good

 You can see the lines we've made here and even the holes for the pots and selector switch.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to start by drilling just a guide hole that goes all

 You can see I'm using about a half inch or oh, about a 12 millimeter drill bit here.

 And I'm just going to make a hole right in the upper right hand corner.

 So now that we have this location marked here, we can then use it and the tremolo pocket

 Now to do that, we're first going to extend the center line just straight down from the

 And then that will line up with the center line on our template.

 And then we can put the, with the guide hole that we drilled and the center line, now we've

 got the location of the tremolo so that the pocket for the springs is lined up and will

 And then to get the control cavity, I'm also going to do sort of the same thing on the

 And now the size of this hole needs to match the thickness on what we need for the pots

 Just a little bit larger just so that hole will be the finish hole and the pots will

 And again, the first one and the last one, I'm going to drill all the way through the

 And now my guide template has got the two pots marked on it, so I can just line that

 This looks a little large, but remember we have to have room for the selector switch

 All right, now I'm going to finish making the hole for the tremolo.

 And to do this, I'm just going to make sure, I'm just going to make a line straight across

 here just so that as I drill these holes through the body, I know that I'm going to

 So I'm just making a little guideline to know where to line up the drill bit.

 And then I've went ahead and drilled these holes through the body there.

 And then we're going to take our template and we're going to get it in position here.

 And once I've got it lined up again, I'm going to clamp it down to the table.

 And then I'm going to take a Dremel tool with a router base on it and just route out those

 Now you could also do this with a hammer and chisel or just a regular router even.

 And you can see we've got the bridge kind of halfway done there.

 But now I'm going to take a drill and the pickup holes don't go all the way through.

 And I'm going to do the same process where I've drilled some holes through here.

 And then I'm going to take my little router base with the Dremel tool and clean them up

 And I've got the router bit here set at the right depth that I want as well.

 About three quarters of an inch or probably close to 18 millimeters.

 Depends on the thickness of your pickups and how deep you want to have them set in.

 And you can see I'm using the template again as a guide to guide the router around.

 And now I've flipped the body over and I'll just show you on this side that you can use a hammer

 You can also see that you now have access to those wiring holes that we did in the front in the very beginning.

 Started a new challenge and my challenge lately has been to get bumped up.

 My sister just recently got the system and me and her have been doing it together to kind of help motivate each other.

 And what I noticed was when I started losing all this weight on raw foods, it's like, uh oh, I'm kind of scrawny under all that stuff.

 And I've only been doing it for a couple of days now, got to do the third day of it tonight.

 And already I'm noticing a change, so that's getting me really geeked up.

 And speaking of challenges, there's been a lot of talk during this challenge about detoxifying and getting toxins out of our bodies.

 And so, inspired by that, I got a recipe for a detoxifying green smoothie.

 And to start off this bad boy, I'm going to use one of the best natural detoxifiers there is, water.

 And I'm going to use some ice water for this because, you know, cold drinks are naturally a bit more palatable for most people.

 So if you want to throw some ice in there, especially if you're using a high-powered blender,

 this helps keep the blades of your blender while they're going from warming up your drink,

 which could damage the enzymes and do all sorts of other stuff.

 And now, you've always heard the phrase that an apple a day keeps a doctor away.

 And that's really good advice because apples are a really great detoxifier.

 Soluble fiber and pectin helps flush stuff out of your body, including radiation.

 Actually, apples have been shown to actually draw radiation from your body and help you expel it, which is really great.

 And they counteract the effects of smoking because they cleanse your lungs and they actually cleanse the lymphatic system.

 So, we've got some really hardcore detoxifying elements going on there in the apple.

 If we weren't using organic apples, we'd like to really scrub the skin or just go ahead and peel it off

 because a lot of inorganic apples, they use carnauba wax to preserve them during transit.

 And we're all about cleaning out the system, so we want to get that out of there.

 And you might notice that I'm taking out the seeds of the apple.

 I'm doing that because apples' seeds do contain a trace amount of arsenic.

 It's probably nothing that's going to hurt you, but we're all about getting the toxins out.

 And in nature, we probably wouldn't be chewing up the seeds to the point where we'd be releasing those toxins.

 But in a blender like this, you're going to blend those seeds up and anything in them is going to come out.

 And I'm putting two apples in there, and that was about one and a half cups of ice water.

 But like any good smoothie recipe, you always do it to your taste.

 And the more you get your blood flowing and everything moving around,

 the better you're going to flush all the nasty stuff out of your system.

 And also, it really helps improve the flavor of the smoothie because we're going to be adding some greens,

 And dandelions are really awesome for detoxifying because they actually get your bile flowing,

 So the more you get your liver cleaned out, keep that thing running well,

 So getting all the systems good and flushed here with this smoothie.

 And lemon juice, besides being alkalizing and having other cleansing properties,

 the vitamin C in it helps to break down toxins in your bloodstream

 and turn them into a more liquid form so that they're more easily passed throughout your body.

 And to strain my juice, I like using these plastic jar lids that were originally intended for sprouting.

 And from what I've heard recently, sprouting in jars isn't all that hot an idea

 But I've still been getting plenty of use out of these things because I put them on my mason jars

 when I'm soaking things such as sesame seeds, sunflower seeds that are really tiny.

 And by soaking them in there, I can just turn the jar over with the lid on,

 And now that we've got our ingredients all jammed in the blender here,

 I really packed this stuff in here, so do not blame the Vitamix, it is all me.

 Now, you know, just because I'm using the Vitamix here, you could use any style blender, don't worry about it.

 You know, you just might want to cut up your ginger a little smaller and blend it longer.

 In fact, I would have blended this longer, but for the video's sake,

 because we're having some issues with editing, I'm just going to make it a little lumpy,

 You don't have to worry about the flavor, the greens overpowering anything,

 And I just want to say good luck to everybody on your upcoming challenges and rock on.

 This is the kind of thing you would find in inverters, UPS, computer backup systems, that

 I take the wire and then I wind it on to a spare spool, a pulley that I had kicking around.

 I used a piece from your umbrella, your patio umbrella that I broke in half.

 I put it in there and then I made a piece here that I cut out of a hockey puck and it

 I didn't put any crazy glue on it or epoxy, but this is what I ended up with.

 So this didn't really work too well, but back to the drawing board.

 I took a longer lag bolt than this and put it through a piece of wood, cut a little disc,

 And then I did another computer hard drive, put it on like this and a piece of wood or

 So when I took it all apart and it was sitting on here like this, take a twist tie and just

 shimmy that underneath the coil and loop it around and tighten it up.

 So I took a piece of cedar, cut a bunch of discs in it with a two inch hole saw on my

 These were acting as spacers and also they had a good grip on the lag.

 Now this is just a little tiny epoxy that I picked up from the dollar store.

 And I squirted some of this into a bowl, a screw and this handy got it and dabbed it

 So that worked out good and I came up with a pretty decent coil.

 I think it's, you know, for the magnet, I think it's way too big.

 Also the other thing with the mold here, I didn't make a little notch in it to shimmy

 I have to make 12 of these and I think I'll probably go crazy at the end.

 I got a piece of cherry hardwood flooring left over from a home rental.

 I took my magnet and I measured out about how much space it takes up.

 Now I know the magnets are going to be going like north and then they're going to be going

 south and north and south all the way around my blade that I'm using.

 So then what I'm going to do next is I'm going to drill a hole here, drill a hole here, make

 it go through my two pieces and then I'm going to put in a screw in here and here and that's

 To ensure that my coils weren't too thick, because I want narrow like thickness coils,

 For my spacing I took a piece of copper pipe, half inch copper pipe, cut it in half to get

 So there's the magnet, size ratio and the spacing and everything.

 So, next video, hopefully I'll have 12 of these coils finished.

 I'll get the rest of my magnets and then I'll start assembling my rotors and my plates and

 Hi, I'm Jonathan Blue from the Rookie Academy in the Ski and Snowboard Schools of Aspen.

 What I'm here to talk to you about today is developing the ability to turn the legs under

 One of the most difficult and important things for a new instructor to learn how to do is

 to demonstrate the ability to turn by turning their feet and legs.

 Developing the ability to turn the feet and legs is a versatile way to turn the skis in

 Whether it's a bigger turn or a smaller turn, terrain, bumps, crud or ice, by turning the

 legs means turning the big part of the leg or the thigh and everything below it underneath

 It requires keeping a strong core and a slightly flexed stance to give full access to the ability

 First thing we're going to do is we're going to get into an athletic stance.

 As you can see I'm slightly flexed in my ankle, knee and hip joint with my back slightly tilted

 From this slightly flexed athletic stance I'm going to walk my feet to the right and

 As you can see my pants, the red part is moving and the black part, my jacket, is staying

 What I'm feeling as I do this is I'm feeling pivoting right around the arch of my feet,

 a strong core and as I turn my feet and legs I'm feeling a winding up in the hip and core

 and as I release them and go back to neutral I'm feeling an unwinding in the hip and core.

 I'm going to point my skis straight down the hill and turn them back up the hill.

 You'll notice as I'm sliding forward I'm in a slightly flexed athletic stance and you

 can see the red pants turn while the black jacket stays stable.

 As you can see here I'm linking leg turning from one direction to another.

 I'm turning my legs 180 degrees one way and then 180 degrees the other way.

 Continuous flowing motion of the legs under a stable upper body.

 We can see the legs redirecting the ski while the body takes a more direct path down the

 Developing the ability to turn the legs under a stable pelvis and upper body is key to gaining

 control of the rate of turning and the ability to make any size turn you want.

 On behalf of the Rookie Academy we all look forward to training with you in beautiful

 It's basically a tuna salad on either a piece of toast or in my case, I'm going to use Wassa wheat bread or wheat cracker.

And into that bowl, we're putting two cans of tuna that have been drained.

 You may use the kind packed in oil if you want to and even include that oil in your mixture.

 I'm saving the tuna water in case I want to thin down my mixture.

 You're probably familiar with the box that has two envelopes inside like this.

 And you may recognize that the soup mixture has kind of a bouillon mix in it and then it has onions that are dried.

 So we'll put our two teaspoons into our bowl and mix this together.

 And all that's left to do is to put this on something like a toast round or you can put it on a cracker or a chip.

 I've taken my crisp bread and divided each one of those in thirds.

 But what we're going to do is pick up one of those and then an easy way to fill them would be to use this little scoop.

 It doesn't contain much, but if you fill it full and then use the extractor to put that right in the center, you get really a nice look.

 And you can see I've got four on each of my fish dishes and I've put two over here on my pineapple.

 I have a couple over here and I'm going to use my fork and just get some of the actual tuna filling.

 It has the celery and mayonnaise, which you will have quite often in tuna salads.

 And now I'm going to take a bite that goes all the way down and get some of this cracker.

 That just makes you feel like you're getting a more wholesome bite.

 And you feel like you're going to get fuller if you have a lot of this bread, the crisp bread.

 Hey guys, if you want to learn how to make your own concealer, then just keep on watching this DIY.

So if you want to learn how to make this, then just keep on watching.

 First thing you want to do is you want to get your clear container, whatever you want to use to hold it.

 And we're going to be taking our Aveeno or whatever moisturizer you're planning to use.

 And we're going to just pump, like two pumps into this clear container.

 And I've been in need of a new concealer so I'm just trying this out.

 So then afterwards we're going to take our little thing and mix it.

 And then by this time you would be able to tell if you needed some more moisturizer or not.

 And after this is kind of mixed I'm going to be taking my Neutrogena Age Shield Face Block thing.

 And now I'm taking the sunblock and placing a tiny drop in there.

 First thing you want to do is you want to get your clear container or whatever you want to use to hold it.

 I mixed it pretty good but then I added some more Aveeno moisturizer.

 And then I added a little bit more powder because I felt like it was too dark of a shade.

 And then after you keep on mixing it's going to turn into like a really nice shade.

 But just keep on mixing until you don't really see lumps of powder in there.

 Okay so now I fixed it up and I cleaned it up and I tried to smooth it as good as I could.

 And it just looks like this and it's a really really nice skin tone color.

I'm just going to give you guys a swatch and show you guys how good it covers.

 And I'm going to take it on the back of my hand and see if it covers my veins.

 Your concealer is supposed to be a bit lighter than your skin tone so it can brighten up your areas.

 And make sure don't add too much salt because the bacon filling is already salty enough.

 In the tart shell, which is baked for 20 minutes, spread evenly grated cheese.

My Instagram, Vine, and YouTube are all connected to my Twitter.

 And also I post everyday snapshots there too, like what I'm doing, what I'm reading, the weather, what I'm eating.

In this humid weather one of the biggest problems is trying to prevent

 Apply a lightweight oil free sunscreen or high SPF moisturizer.

 Using an oil free primer will not only keep your makeup in place but it will also stop

 the foundation from slipping into any fine lines or any open pores.

 without feeling heavy on the skin, they are also enriched with vitamins and minerals that

 Don't forget to blend down your neck, around your ears and hairline.

 If you need a bit of extra coverage, apply a tiny bit of concealer to your problem area.

 A cream blush will give you a light dewy glow and it will also stay in place a lot longer

 Using a bronzer is optional but it will give you that gorgeous sun kissed glow that we

 This one from Rimmel contains an SPF of 15 and it's also waterproof.

 To fill in your brows lightly, take a brush and sweep the top of the pencil onto the brush.

 This will stop your brows from looking too waxy or too heavy but it will give you just

 also apply quite a small amount on the top lid and blend out with a flat shader brush.

 Blend it upwards in the outer corner for that more depth and definition in the crease.

 Also taking your bronzer and a fluffy brush, blend this back and forth across your crease

 Less is always more when it comes to heat proof makeup but if you want that extra dewy

 Always keep your lips hydrated with a moisturizing lip balm and apply a lip stain of your choice

Refresh your skin throughout the day with a hydrating refreshing

 It keeps makeup in place, hydrates the skin and has a built in temperature control.

 Remember to drink plenty of water, wear SPF and enjoy the sunshine and I will see you

 And I also got some string bean, carrot, mushroom, and basil, fresh one.

 I usually will just tap all the bean together and trim off the top.

 And here, we're just going to angle cut like this, maybe a few sections,

 Some vegetable cooking oil, and I'm going to sweat the shallot for a couple minutes.

 You're going to add in the sausage and ginger and garlic, mint.

 Stir fry for about three minutes, just medium, medium-high heat is okay.

 Now the oil got good flavor with the shallot and sausage, ginger and garlic.

 Beat it like this, and you're just going to pour over top of this vegetable.

 And you don't have to touch anything, let them set for like a few seconds.

 And I don't want to stir the vegetable because now it's nice and pretty.

 So I just kind of like created a few potholes right here to let the egg get down through it at the bottom of the pan.

 We don't want to overheat the vegetable and we'll burn the egg at the bottom.

 Only take about two to three minutes and the egg is almost like 70% set, you see.

 So now's the time I'm going to cut some butter, thinly sliced, like this thin.

 And just put it at the edge of the pan and then it will melt and go down to the pan and give them more flavor.

 At this point I can turn off my heat because I don't want to overcook the egg.

 We're going to put it into the oven, broil for like, you know, maybe a couple of minutes until the cheese melts.

 So I'm going to let that sit for a couple of minutes, cool off a little bit.

 Hey guys, so last week I told you how to spice up your water with fruit ice cubes.

 Now I opened this bag of spinach last week and I feel that if I don't eat it this week it's going to go bad.

 So you're going to take your spinach and you're going to throw it in your blender.

 You're going to put a little bit of water just to moisten it up a little.

 So here is, I'm going to come a little closer to you, our mixture.

 So you're probably thinking, what the heck am I going to do with spinach ice cubes?

 So you're going to take like four or five ice cubes and then of your spinach ice cubes put it in your blender

 and you can add, my favorite recipe is spinach ice cubes, frozen blueberries, frozen banana, blend it up

 Now usually when you do smoothies you need to add ice, but ice just waters down your smoothie.

 So if you have frozen spinach ice cubes and frozen banana and frozen blueberry, all that coldness,

 Please join me and please subscribe and thank you so much for visiting and I will see you Thursday.

 I'm Adam Olson and I'm going to show you how to upgrade the bearings in this

 A lot of those times you're fishing a jerkbait, you're fishing clear water, spooky fish, and

 by upgrading to ceramic bearings you're going to be able to make longer casts and

 there's a retaining spring in there, we're going to hold our thumb over one side

 The tip of the safety ring right underneath the retaining clip, we're going to lift up on it

 It's going to slip right in the middle of that bearing and it'll lift right out.

 we're going to center it on the star drag here and it's just going to

 and that's the only thing that holds this bearing in this particular reel in.

 The large diameter part of this spool tension spring is going to go

 They make a ton of different bearings for a ton of different reels and

 they're a really really good product and I highly highly recommend them.

 Now this is a noodle dish that uses rice stick noodles mixed with just simple vegetables

 Now here I have my made fun noodles and these also come packaged under several different names.

 Sometimes they are called rice sticks and sometimes they are called rice vermicelli.

 And be careful not to get them confused with the mung bean noodles which look very similar in texture.

 Now as you can see when I take my noodles out of the package they are in this kind of like big clump just like that.

 And I'm just going to place them in lukewarm water and I'm just going to let them soak for about 20 minutes.

 And while they are soaking we can go ahead and prepare our other ingredients.

 Now here are my two green onions which I have rinsed under cold water and dried with paper towels.

 And now what I'm going to do is I'm just going to chop off the ends.

 And then I'm just going to chop off some of the dead of the top parts just like that.

 And then once those parts are removed I'm just going to chop these into small pieces.

 And once your green onion is chopped we can go ahead and set it aside.

 Now for our vegetables I'm just going to use a bag of just frozen stir fry vegetables.

 And this brand seems to work pretty good, these bird's eye vegetables.

 Now I'm just going to place my vegetables in a microwave safe bowl.

 And I'm going to microwave them on high for about 5 to 6 minutes or just until they are cooked through.

 And then I'm going to take my sauce and I'm just going to mix it together.

 Here I have the ingredients for my sauce and I'm just going to mix my soy sauce with my chicken broth.

 Once your noodles are done soaking they should have a springy texture to them.

 So just make sure that they have that springy texture to them and then they are done.

 So now we can go ahead and we're just going to drain our noodles in a colander.

 And then we are going to heat our wok on high and then add our oil.

 And it already has the flavors of garlic, onion, and ginger in it.

 So this is the type of oil that we want to use for this dish because that imparts some of the flavor into the noodles.

 So we're just going to measure out 2 tablespoons of this stir fry oil and place it into our wok.

 Okay, once our oil is hot we just want to swirl it around in the pan just to kind of get it to cook.

 Okay, once our oil is hot we just want to swirl it around in the pan just to cook the sides just a little bit.

 And now we just want to kind of mix everything together and just get it all hot.

 Now the best way to do this is just to use a fork and kind of toss the noodles around in your pan.

 You just kind of want to break them up and stir fry them just like this.

 And once you have the vegetables and the noodles fairly mixed together you can go ahead and add your sauce.

 And now using a spatula and a fork you can just toss this mixture together so that the sauce gets into all of the noodles just like this.

 And once everything is thoroughly mixed together you can go ahead and remove it from the heat.

 And once it is done you can go ahead and place it in a bowl to be served.

 Todd just said to me while we're shooting this, that's the best you can do with laying

 And it's because this is most of the time what our bathroom sink looks like, or when

 we travel or we go somewhere, I have this really cool product that I found.

 And so we are going to be carrying this because it makes so much sense.

 What you do is you just take this really cool little thing out of the bag and then you lay

 And it has a little string on it and you just put your things all in it and you put everything

 But the cool part about this is it also has a zippered compartment in here.

 And then you take the string, you see, you take the string and you go ahead and you close

 And what's great about that is that you can go ahead and you string this through and you

 Now I could have put a lot more stuff in there, but that was a lot of stuff.

 And what's so fantastic about this is that you have everything in a neat little pile.

 I'm going to top it just with a nice tossed salad on top of it.

 What I like to do is hit it now with just a little bit of Parmesan.

 Anytime you flip it over, the skillet's going to cool down a little bit.

 A simple tossed salad is nice if you have some field greens or some wild lettuce,

 This is Chaplain's Restaurant, 165 Bank Street in London, Connecticut.

 Hi everyone, it's Allie and today we're going to be talking bangs, also known as a fringe,

 Bangs are great, but they can be really high maintenance, so I'm going to teach you how

 to maintain your own bangs so that you don't have to run to a salon every two weeks for

 Scissors or shears specifically designed for cutting hair, a spray bottle full of water,

 a comb, some clips or bobby pins, they don't have to be sparkly, and some clear tape.

 Don't try to cut bangs into your hair when you're like 20 minutes late for work, and

 don't try to trim the bangs that you have if you've got, you know, 15 minutes before

 Give yourself enough time, because if you feel rushed, you're not going to do a good

 The first thing we're going to do is prep our hair and get our shape right.

 So as you can see, my bangs are triangular, yours don't have to be, they can be whatever

 Grab your clips, and just clip back any little short kind of flyaway bits, anything that

 So if you cut it like that, when it dries, it will end up being way too short.

 Instead, cut your bangs when they're damp, and that's where this little guy comes in

 I have a really easy trick to getting a nice straight line, and that trick, as you might

 Tape off however much you need, a little bit of extra is never going to kill you.

 And put it on with the bottom edge kind of delineating where you're going to cut.

 So this will be your guide, and then you're going to cut underneath.

 I have a little cutting trick as well that you're going to learn.

 The secret to straight bangs is that they're not really straight.

 A line is just sort of two-dimensional, and your face is round.

 I always cut mine slightly shorter at the side, because these bits, for some reason,

 So what I do is I take this, so you can see I've got sort of like a triangle of hair,

 and then with the same back and forth motion, I just cut them a bit.

 You can see that since I've dried my hair, they've come up a little bit more.

 You'll be amazed at how fast you get good at this, so just practice, practice, practice,

 Hi everyone today, I'm going to show you how to make homemade chicken broth now

 This recipe is so easy to make that it practically makes itself.

 it's also so delicious that it's it's way better than anything you can buy at the grocery store and

 Healthier for you as well, and I'll tell you a little bit more about that later

 I mean you'll save a lot of money doing this so I'm rocking Robin

 So let's talk briefly about some of the health benefits of homemade chicken broth as opposed to what you buy at the store

 Okay, so number one is it's very good for it promotes healthy digestion.

 it makes your nails strong because of the gelatin that's in it that you're not going to get from store-bought and

 Also it helps with your joints and your bones because you've got your all those minerals in there

 So those are some of the basic reasons why you would want to eat this and you can also use it

 You know all of your broth in any recipe that calls for chicken broth

 So in rice or soups or whatever you're making so it's great for that

I have the carcass here from one whole chicken now a couple of nights ago

 I made beer canned chicken, and I'll leave a link over here if you want to see that recipe

 I just put mine in a ziploc bag until I'm ready to make my broth

 I want to mention that you could use any bones you want if you wanted to make beef you could use beef bones pork bones

 Even fish all right you'll also need some vinegar, and I'm using apple cider vinegar

 That's going to help draw out all of the minerals and everything out of the bones

 So you need something a little acidic you could even use some lemon juice if you wanted to and then after that

 You can add some vegetables if you have some leftover vegetables like today

 I'm going to use some celery and some onion and that's it and some water of course

 So to make this the easiest recipe on the planet you need to use a crock pot

 So if you don't have one I highly recommend that you get one because it makes life

 And I'll tell you that's a pain because you have to watch it all the time so that the water level doesn't drop

 And you really can't cook it for as long as you need to cook this

 Because you're concerned about leaving it on say when you're sleeping well put it in a crock pot and you forget about it

 So that's exactly what we're gonna do here, so I got my crock pot

 I like to add some fresh parsley, and I didn't do that today place your water into the crock pot whoopsie

 Be careful to keep it in the crock pot not do like what I just did

 Fill it to about an inch below and add a couple of tablespoons of your acidic liquid

 So I'm gonna put two tablespoons of apple cider vinegar in here place the cover on

 Turn your crock pot on to low and let it go for at least 24 hours.

 All right guys the chicken broth has been cooking now for just about 48 hours

 I haven't adjust the heat nothing and that is hands-off as you can get you're gonna want to strain your broth

 Fairly small holes in it so use whatever you like all right, so just strain it out

 strained out you're gonna want to cool it first before you try and refrigerate it or

 So I'm gonna pour out a little bit of this hot broth into a measuring cup so you can see it

 Cooking this for so long, and I'll tell you it's very full-bodied now

 I place it in a little ice bath here to help cool it off quickly

 I'm gonna leave you a couple of links to right over here so that you can

 And you can check that out and use this for that and it'll be really fantastic

 All right, so I'm gonna go ahead and take a little taste of this.

 Now I didn't add any salt to this at all as you remember so you can it's great for anybody who's watching their sodium

 About one cup of broth once we freeze our chicken broth in the ice cube trays

 That when they're frozen then you can pop them out and I pop them into a ziploc bag

 Indefinitely really and like I said 12 to 13 of these makes a cup so you know how much to use

 I hope you enjoyed this video and I certainly hope you'll try making chicken broth from now on or

 Fish bones, whatever you have it is just delicious and just so much healthier for you

 Be sure and subscribe to my channel if you haven't already and you'll get notified of new videos as they come out

 And if you like this video, please share it and give me a thumbs up and of course leave me a comment

 So, when you start out drawing it, you're going to want to, obviously, you're going to make a V, right?

 So, you're going to want to make, it's going to be a block letter, because that's how they do it.

 And you're going to want to make one side higher than the other, kind of off, off side,

 because when you get here, you're going to want to, you're going to want to go like this,

 because this little line right here is going to go over all the other letters, like that.

 So, then, under that, it's already slanted, so it's kind of, like, it's perfect to draw an A.

 So, right there, you're going to draw just an A, like this, like that.

 And then, next, you're basically just spelling out the word Vans.

 It's just, you're just putting the overhang, kind of, with the V over the letters.

 And you're going to draw an N, and then, at the end, you're going to draw an S.

Alright guys, so first I'd like to show you that it's a normal deck, a

 joker on the bottom, two jokers, and then a regular deck of cards.

I'll turn my head away and while I'm turning my head away I'll flip over

Okay, I'll cut the deck and if you've memorized that we're gonna take

 that card and we're just gonna set it right in that gap where I cut it, because

Now that we have the cards we're gonna slide them into the box just like

So now they're in and now all I have to do is put my hand into the deck

So basically how this works is it does involve a gimmick, so if you

And then you use a rubber band, you cut it about less than half and then

 sure you get all those bubbles out with your fingernails or else that elastic is

 bottom of the deck and then you say I have a normal deck, which you really

 don't, a Joker on the bottom, two jokers, I said that again, and you have them pick a card.

You cut the deck, which is putting that elastic card in the middle, and then

 when you say you're inserting their card randomly, you're really putting it in

 firm grip, you just want to put it into the box with firm grip and then just

 slowly release your grip and you can say you're doing a magical gesture or

All you have to do is slowly release your grip and then it just does

 An important part of making any type of woodworking project is preparing a surface for finish.

 A lot of people will reach for a power sander or hand sanding to do this, but the truth

 The only difficulty with a hand plane is learning how to use one and set it up properly.

 As with any hand tool, you're going to want to make sure that the blade is properly prepared.

 In the case of a smoother, you're going to want a slight camber on the blade just to

 So now that you've got your blade prepared, you're going to insert it into the plane and

 just get it in there as straight as you can visually, making sure of course that it's

 And then you're going to put your lever cap on, and again, make sure that it's nice and

 Make sure that the mouth is open, wide open, and now you're going to advance the blade

 out of the body a great amount, probably by about a sixteenth or an eighth of an inch.

 The idea here is that you want to be able to visually see the blade sticking out, and

 you can make a little bit of an adjustment here by seeing which side of the blade is

 In this case, the left-hand side is sticking out further, so you're going to want to move

 Whatever side is highest, that's the side you move the adjuster to.

 Now I prefer to use a small plane adjusting hammer, simply because it's easier to control

 I'm just going to wrap on the side of the adjuster here a little bit, and that's looking

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to back the blade off completely so it's not

 cutting, and we're going to move over to our piece of wood, and we're going to evaluate

 This is also going to allow you to set the projection properly.

 So with the blade not cutting, we're going to start moving the plane back and forth on

 On the other hand, you're going to start to adjust the blade forward until it starts to

 cut, and you're going to observe where that shaving comes out of the mouth.

 So in this case here, you can see that the shaving is coming on the left-hand side of

 the mouth, which means that this side is still protruding a little bit too much.

 So I'm going to take my plane adjusting hammer, and I'm going to just move the knob a little

 I'm going to clear out the shavings and see how we do again here.

 So now we're taking a pretty good wide shaving, and it's coming right out of the center.

 This is a little bit heavy of a shaving, and sometimes that happens when you make the adjustment,

 but we're going to back it off again, now that we've got it set, and go from there.

 At this point, you can close the knob, or pardon me, you can close the mouth with the

 Back the blade off a little bit, and start moving until you get that shaving back again.

 So now we're taking probably less than a thousandth of an inch off, and we can start planing this

 To plane this board, we're simply going to start on the left-hand side and move our way

 across to the right, doing overlapping strokes so that we don't get any ridges in the board.

 So at this point, this has cleaned up all of the machining marks, and this piece is

 Another couple of tips that I find helpful when using a smoothing plane is to always

 have a little bit of paraffin wax, either on your bench or in your apron.

 I apply the wax to the sole of the plane so that it provides a little bit of lubrication.

 Now this isn't going to mess up any of your finishing options or anything like that.

 All it's going to do is allow the plane to glide across the wood a little easier.

 Another great tip is you always get a little bit of streaking on the wood from using a

 And the easiest way to take care of that is to just use the shavings that you generated

 from the hand planing, ball them up, and burnish the surface of the wood with them.

 This will remove the shavings, they have just enough tooth to polish the wood, and you're

 going to get an even glossier surface than just off the plane alone.

 As with any other woodworking tool, setting them up is simply knowing the steps to take

 Now that you've seen how it's done, there's no reason you shouldn't be able to set up

 John Hamm here from Fitness On The Run and today we have a special guest with us in the

 And Melissa and I are going to make a recipe today made out of raw food.

 So Melissa, tell us a little bit of why you like to incorporate raw food into your diet.

 Okay, well I feel that raw food, when it's not cooked above 115 degrees, everything's

 Live enzymes, vitamins, minerals, amino acids, protein, anything you need is in your food.

 So really you don't even need supplements anymore, you're just getting all your nutrients

 So I highly encourage everybody to incorporate as much raw food as they can in their diet

 and you feel great, you have energy and I'm going to show you a recipe today and it's

 Alright, I like that approach too and just focusing on incorporating real whole foods

 I believe that whether you're balancing on your feet on an endo board or balancing your

 diet, I think balance is very important to incorporate a lot of different things.

 We are making sun-dried zucchini pasta and so what we do is the noodles, of course it's

 gluten-free, sugar-free, dairy-free because we're using zucchini noodles and what I'm

 going to do, well what I did already was you just take a potato peeler, take a zucchini,

 cut off the top and you just keep going around and just keep turning and those are your noodles.

 So and then for the sauce, what we have is red onion, basil, these are dates that I chopped

 up, sun-dried tomatoes which you need to let them soak for about 20 minutes and then we

 have some tomatoes, we have oregano, this isn't just an Italian herb spice, sea salt,

 This is everything, this is your sauce right here and we're going to put it in the food

 And I'll put the recipe below guys so you can see exactly how much of everything is

 It's about 3 tablespoons of red onion, you want to dice everything really good first

 These are about 4 big fresh basil leaves, these are 2 dates soaked and pitted and then

 It gives it more of a cooked feeling too with the sun-dried tomatoes.

 This is 1 Roma tomato diced up and then we have our dried oregano, our dry Italian herb,

 our sea salt and you know you can use pine nuts, cashews, I chose the macadamia nuts

 and then with the garlic, you know it just disperses better if you put it in the food

 You don't want to get a big chunk of garlic in your mouth all at once.

 So then what you want to do is you want to pulse it a couple times first.

 You want to be gentle to your machine so do a couple good pulses and then you can let

 So then what you do is just kind of take a little bit down, push it down.

 That's the one thing about raw food is there's a lot of flavor.

 If you think about cooked food, it's beige, it's white, it's dull, there's no color.

 So what you want to do, of course in your own kitchen, you know, your hands are clean

 so you just go in there, go for it, smash it onto your noodles.

 Tell us a little bit about the health benefits of this actual meal.

 Okay, well zucchini is 95% water so it's really a diet food as well.

 So all those free radicals, pollution all day long, all the antioxidants we're getting,

 And we have the fresh basil, antiseptic, antibacterial, what else is in there?

 Alright, well thank you Melissa, and be sure to check out rawfoodstylist.com and we're

 We are at the store because we're buying stuff to make our cupcakes.

 You know I'm gonna take a spoon and just eat some of this right?

 Like if we're making cupcakes so this would spread out on more.

 Like we're making a lot of cookies so we have to give some to one of my sister too.

 I told Chris that all candy corn is, that it isn't sold, is sent back to a central location

 We are back at my house and we have all our ingredients laid out here.

 So we have our devil's food chocolate cake mix for the cupcakes.

 We got our rich and creamy vanilla frosting with the aluminum cup holders, cupcake holders,

 I told you that you're supposed to add the liquid stuff then the powdery stuff.

 Mary here is pouring our cake mix into our little cupcake holders that are metallic silver.

 We're going to put them in the oven because the oven is heated up to 350 which is the

 I'm not very good at icing things, but hopefully Mary's better than I am.

 You bend half a liquorice pot and then you stick it in for its legs.

 So we're going to do it to the rest of them and we'll see you then.

 The fangs kind of fall off a little bit, but you have to work with them.

 So we finally finished our beautiful masterpieces of our spider cupcakes.

 Comment down below any, you know, differences you see in some of these.

 If you make these, post a picture on my Facebook page or a TV one.

Make sure they are at room temperature else they may create lump

 which is bright in color because it makes the muffin more appealing and

 cover with more mixture to fill the cases almost two-third full because

 love this they will become delighted when chunks of yummy chocolate and jam

 Few things are as frustrating as trying to slice with a dull knife.

 Turn a coffee mug upside down and sharpen the blade using the ceramic edge of the mug

 Hold the blade at a slight angle and rotate the knife in tiny circles, moving from the

 If you're heating up last night's leftovers for two, you don't have to choose who gets

 You can use a coffee mug as a platform, and you'll both be eating in no time.

 If you're looking to pump up the volume, placing your phone into an empty mug will amplify

 Crack the egg into a mug of water and watch the magic happen in just one to two minutes.

 Now all you need to do is fill another mug with coffee and breakfast is served.

 Whether your oven is broken or you're just craving a quick treat, coffee mug brownies

 Start by adding your wet ingredients, and a pinch of salt, and whisk well.

 Next, add your dry ingredients, whisking well in between each one.

 Pop it in the microwave for about a minute, and top with ice cream.

 Subscribe to our channel for more, and tell us your favorite hacks in the comments below.

 1 1 3 cup of mayonnaise, any kind of mayonnaise that you prefer, 6 ounce can of white crab that

 has been drained, a cup of shredded Swiss cheese, and 2 scallions that have been sliced.

 next thing we're going to add is our 1 3rd cup of mayonnaise, our crab meat, a cup of Swiss

 So now what I'm going to do is put this in a 350 degree preheated oven for 15 to 20 minutes.

 crab dip appetizer has been in the oven for 20 minutes and now it's done.

 Hi, I'm George Miliotis, Master Sommelier for Seasons 52, and we're here at the newest

 And I have to say, we are excited to be in Plano, and I am most excited to get to introduce

 We have 95 bottles of wine on our list, 63 are available by the glass, covering 23 different

 So if you're interested in trying new wines, fun wines, and even some wines maybe that

 you are familiar and comfortable with, we're a great place to do it.

 We have chefs, great cuisine, a little bit of health consciousness to it, but everything

 We're a fresh grill and wine bar concept, and we're making a nice dish tonight that

 kind of represents the season, gives you a good slice of the taste of what we're doing.

 So the first ingredient on the menu is a little bit of a sweet and sour sauce.

 We're going to use a little bit of a sweet and sour sauce, and we're going to use a little

 bit of a sweet and sour sauce, and we're going to use a little bit of a sweet and sour sauce,

 a little bit of the sweet and sour sauce, and we're going to use a little bit of the

 This is coming from a place called Winchester Farms in North Carolina.

 That way, it gives you kind of a mixed grill, kind of a flavor for what we do.

 Now, the lamb itself has been buried in a mint pesto, and the quail itself is grilled

 A shallot Dijon glaze, and that's going to go all over the top of the meat.

 And then, after the shallot Dijon sauce, there's going to be a balsamic reduction sauce.

 So, you've got two different colors in there, and the very next thing we're going to add

 on is our seasonal plush, and then the final garnish is the Brussels sprouts.

 We pick them right off the stalk, we blanch them, and then we roast them in the wood-burned oven.

 Today's video is how to change the pollen filter in a 2013 Honda Odyssey.

 This is on a EXL but all the other versions of the Honda Odyssey are quite similar.

 Okay, I'm going to show you how to do it and how to save you some money.

 First of all, you need to remove everything off of the glove compartment.

 And once you've done that, you will notice there's a latch on the side over here.

 So move, push up a little bit for this thing, for this glove compartment.

 Then over here, you will notice that, if you can see that, there's actually holders to

 You gotta squeeze the sides over here, the top and this side as well too.

 If you squeeze both sides, the glove compartment should come down.

 So we just squeezed the two sides, as you can see, the glove compartment comes down.

 You see that this end and this end, when you squeeze it, they come out.

 All you need to do is squeeze this end and this end over here at the same time, they're

 Of course, you can buy these filters at your local Honda dealer or other versions of it

 When you put it back in, this is a new one so it's not dirty right now.

 Notice that you have to squeeze the compartment again to put it back in and also to clip this

 This one fell off, that's okay because you just need to put it back over here and squeeze

 Okay, so we just squeezed the ends of the compartment back on its...

 That's how simple and easy to change the palm filter in a 2013 Honda Odyssey.

 So working on the song, little brother is watching, doing the cleaner guitar parts,

 there's little subtle things that happen throughout the song, during the choruses and the intro

 and all the hey, hey, hey, all that stuff, there's a swing feel with the lower strings

 and then the higher ones, so it has a little bit of a boo-ah-ah.

 And then in the verses, first, sort of like what I did in Women Rule the World, just the

 side of the thumb grabbing the harmonics by holding down a note, take your thumb, you

 rest it 12 frets higher or half the length of the string itself from where the string

 And you rest your thumb right over that spot and you pluck with your finger.

 So over here I'm out of frets, so I just sort of assume where 12 frets higher than the 14th

 fret would be, the 26th fret, so you just kind of average it out.

 When you hit this string, it tends to make the fifth ring out, so you may want to just

 And then in the second half of the verse, what I do is it starts to build up and then

 it empties out and it comes down again and during that come down, I just ring out a bunch

 of E and then just on the beat I raise the volume and lower it.

 You pick it with the volume down to get a start on the ring right before.

 So just the little things that you throw into a song just to make it interesting for the

 Just wipe your hand on the strings and then start to empty out.

 It's more, a little more like this and it's hitting these octaves.

 When I hit the highest one, I build up a really heavy vibrato and bring it down.

 It seems like a lot of tracks and a lot of different things going on at once, but actually

 it's all very organized where the rhythm guitarist would be going like this.

 It's more that it's being split up just so you have more control over the different guitar

 I'm Leanne Kessler, Director of the Floral Design Institute, and today I'm here to share

 This week we had gardenias from SMR and Stephan Otis in the Learning Center as we were working

 with our Wedding Floral Specialists, and I thought, what a perfect time.

 I snitched a gardenia and brought it back so I can share with you how to create the

 To get ready for this video, I've already done all the care and handling with this gardenia.

 If you need information on care and handling, refer to our website at Flowerschool.com.

 I filled a bowl with cold water because I don't want my hands to touch the gardenia

 because the heat and the oils from my hands are what will turn it brown.

 So if I keep my hand cold and wet, if I accidentally bump it, the water will work as a buffer so

 So I've got a care and handling completed gardenia and a bowl of cold water, and I'm

 To wire and tape the gardenia, again, get my hands cold and wet, both of them.

 Then, I want to remove the calyx, the bulky portion of the stem, and discard that.

 Then using a 26-gauge wire, I pierce through the stem and bend it straight down.

 Now, the stem is so fleshy that sometimes that can just pull out, so I take a second

 26-gauge, I hold it with one finger, and I clutch above my hand using the wire.

 Then, with my hands still wet, which this is the tricky part, I tape over the wire snugly

 It takes some practice, but once you've done it two or three or a hundred times, it gets

 For the classic gardenia corsage, I chose to leave the backing on.

 It helps to protect the gardenia from my hands while I'm working, but it's not always necessary.

 You can pull that off and do something else to back it and protect, maybe tool, maybe

 A lot of contemporary corsages remove those, but in the classic, I thought it was appropriate

 Right now, it's definite difference between that deep green and the white, so I'm going

 to use the neutral gray of Dusty Miller and just add that in a couple of spots so that

 it adds a little softness, some contrast between the color, a few leaves over there, maybe

 Now, as I work, that's going to add a lot of bulk to the stem, so once I get it started

 taping, I'm going to reach in with my shear and cut those natural stems out, stagger them

 so they don't all end at the same time, and then tape over those ends so it's completely

 I just made a standard florist bow using a number 5 shear, tucking it right underneath,

 At this point, I get my hands wet again, keeping everything wet.

 Now, granted, I'm working underneath, but I just want to make sure I don't actually

 Then I tape down one more time, and again, I can clip out the extra wire, shorten this

 one, then tape all the way to the bottom, making sure I get all the wires and stems

 totally concealed, going over the bottom to make sure no wire pokes out here, and then

 The completed corsage gets a pin, add that to the back, spray it down with the Crowning

 Glory, and yes, I had Crowning Glory on it when I did the Karen Handling, but I do it

 Set that down into the box, and then leave the box open, and let the Crowning Glory dry.

 Once that dries, then you can go ahead and shut the box, set it into your flower cooler,

 and it'll hold overnight without a problem, but if you set it in the box and close it

 Not always, but sometimes they do, so you want to wait until it's dry, then close the

 As gardenias come back in style, you'll want to practice with them, and you'll want to

 Using proper Karen Handling, creating the corsage, and then boxing it, you can easily

 Once you take it out and you wear it, it truly is for the moment.

 It will last through the afternoon, or maybe through the evening, but doubtful if it would

 If you have questions, need more information, of course you can reach us through the website

 In this episode I'm going to be installing the Teraflex JK Strut Kit for the hood.

 The Jeep should have existing holes on each side of the firewall.

 Remove the plastic retainer clips and move the accessories out of the way.

 If existing holes are not available you must drill them yourself.

 The hole must be approximately a half inch down and 2 1 quarter from the front edge.

 Install the ball stud through the hole with the thread facing out.

 Place painters tape on the hood about 20 to 24 inches up from the bottom edge of the

 Using the 22 inch mark place the ball bracket at the line and in about an eighth inch from

 Wrap a piece of tape around the quarter inch drill bit leaving about a quarter inch of

 This will prevent the drill from penetrating too far after the hole has been drilled.

 Install the threaded backing plate into the existing oval hole in the hood and align it

 Using the supplied number 10 bolt and ball mount bracket bolt the backing plate with

 It may be necessary to remove the retainer clip to install the ball joint.

 Hi Youtubes, welcome to a new video and of course before I start I wanted to say happy new year

 I know it's officially not allowed anymore because I think you're only allowed to say it in the first week of January

 but I wanted to say it anyways because due to my medical problems I wasn't able to upload anything in the last couple of weeks

 but right now I'm back and of course I'm going to start with a nail art tutorial that you guys requested

 because I uploaded a picture on my Facebook and Twitter and Instagram and all that stuff

 with a tutorial that I did for the De Boer Milano Beauty Club and it's the firework nail art tutorial

 and I got so many questions if I please please please wanted to do a video tutorial

 so today I'm going to show you how you can create the fireworks on your nails

 Now I'm using number 133 because it's a silver holographic glitter it will look like stars

 When you're done give the polish a little bit of time to dry before starting with the nail art

 I'm using white first because this will make the colors of the firework really pop

 If you apply the color directly on the black polish you will hardly see it

 and if you want you can apply a second layer to make the white fully opaque

 I'm starting with a dark blue and I really like this one because it has micro glitter in it

 As the second color I'm using number 96 and this is a really light blue color

 Because of the bright light on my hands it's hard to see the difference between the colors

 And of course to finish my manicure I'm using the Deborah Milano Speedrite top coat

 So let me know what you think of the result and if you think it's a little bit too hard

 because of course I'm not two weeks too late with new year's eve

 so let's hope my new video will have a much better sound quality and I will see you then

 Hi guys, in this video I want to show you how I do my own nail oil.

Next, hemp seed oil, argan oil, castor oil and essential sweet orange oil.

 I decide to add a few more drops of sweet orange oil because the hemp seed oil has a very strong smell as well as a color.

 It's more dark and greenish but don't worry about the color because it will fade when you rub it into your nails on cuticles.

 You can apply also under your tips, your nails, natural nails, the other hand.

 And this is how I keep my nails longer, stronger, in the shape that I want.

 I would love to know if you have your own natural oil treatment for your nails.

 and really you can incorporate it into any project that you can imagine.

 so you can see the fabric underneath and it's fun because you can do lots of different shapes.

 piece out of my contrasting fabric that's the same size as this piece because what I

 am going to do is I am going to place it underneath right side up, take my main fabric piece and

 them right on top of each other and we are going to baste around the whole perimeter

 of the piece thereby making this one single piece that we are going to be working with.

 Now let's pretend that this is a giant piece and you are making let's say a skirt and this

 is one skirt panel but you only want to applique just a little tiny section and you are thinking

 well why do I need to make a full panel of this giant thing if I actually want to applique

 The problem is that you could just cut a contrasting piece that's big enough to cover the area

 that you want to applique but when you look at the inside of the skirt or whatever your

 project is you are going to have some odd shape fabric on the inside.

 contrasting piece that covers the whole panel, it's going to be nice and seamless on the

 inside because then all the edges are going to be sewn into my normal seams.

 don't care you can also do that or if you add a lining to your skirt it's going to be

 But for now we are just going to do one piece of the main fabric, one piece of the contrasting,

 For the basting stitch you are just doing the longest stitch on your machine.

 have to worry about doing any back stitching, we are just doing this as a temporary stitch

 something that's not going to have a lot of detail to it, that's going to be very easy

Also you don't want something that has a lot of small areas or really narrow

 pieces to it because then it's going to be really hard to have enough fabric to turn

 Once you have your image go ahead and you don't have to use a pattern like me, you could

 are going to go ahead, draw your outline directly on the right side of your fabric.

 We are now going to be cutting into our gray fabric in order to create our window.

 fabric and my back hand I am pulling my contrasting fabric and I am pulling them away from each

Go ahead, grab your scissors and you are going to cut in the middle.

 just cutting my gray fabric, I am trying to make sure that I am not cutting the contrasting

And then you are going to come in here and you are going to cut away most of

 the gray fabric inside your design, but you are not going to cut to the line instead I

 would leave at least a quarter of an inch on the inside of the line.

 want to come through, you are going to take the raw edge and you are going to fold it

 as here and here it may be a little bit difficult to fold it neatly so what you can do is just

 cut a slit which I have done already and that way I am able to fold both sides independently

 Once you finish pinning everything into place and I am pinning through all layers of my

 fabric here, you are then going to take it to your machine and you are going to do a

 and you don't have to sew directly on the fold but you want to sew close enough that

 you are catching the folded fabric that's underneath your fold.

If you want to add a little fun you can do another contrasting thread

Also I would go ahead and remove any fabric markers or chalk that you

 I would probably wait and move them when you are completely done with your project.

 with that you are ready to continue on with the rest of your project.

 New tutorials are released weekly so please subscribe to be notified at the next release.

 Make sure to check out our other videos and visit Professorpincushion.com to view our

 complete library with well over 200 sewing video tutorials including our exclusive premium

Our premium membership is only $5 a month for unlimited access and only available

 Hey guys, so as you're watching this video I'm assuming you've probably had a bad experience

 with the GoPro casing fogging up, or you're just aware of the fact that that can happen.

 Now previously I've always used the GoPro fog inserts to try and prevent the fogging,

 solution and if you follow this tutorial this is the best way I've found to apply it.

 So the items you need are as follows, the GoPro housing, the anti-fog solution, a soft

 So first off you want to make sure that your GoPro housing is totally free of any dust

 Now add a couple of drops of the anti-fog solution into the casing.

 Next you want to swirl the solution around the GoPro housing, making sure you do a decent

 To get rid of any excess solution, grab some paper towel and dab the inside of the casing,

 So next you want to grab your hair dryer and give the inside of the casing a blast.

 This is the best way of drying the anti-fog solution without creating any smears or lines.

 And do that for a couple of minutes until it's totally dry inside.

 OK so now your GoPro housing should have a thin layer of the anti-fog solution on the

 If you take a close look at the lens area, hopefully there'll be no bits of dust or anything

 You may also see a few smears, but as long as they're not too bad, you should be able

 Now, when I take the GoPro to a location, I always pop in some silica gel.

 And then that'll do a job of keeping the inside of the case really dry.

 When I get to my location, I'll take out the silica gel and put the GoPro in as quickly

 as possible, therefore minimising the amount of time that the casing is open for.

 If you found that helpful and would like to see more, please subscribe.

 Hi guys, Kirk here with Kirk Giordano plastering got another shower we're doing today generally

 I'm working outside doing plaster or stucco, but I was on the job site already we're doing a little

 bit of work and fella was showing me what he did and anyway he was telling me I was going to tile

 it and I said well you know you've got your paper real nice you've got some poly can over your

 cracks your paper on here but his party backboard what I informed him was water is going to go

 through the tile it's going to go through the tiles going to get on this here and it's going

 to go through this and this piece of paper that he has here actually should be on this lip here

 there's a lip right here okay this is your typical bathtub it comes up and it has a lip right here so

 what we did was we unscrewed a couple of these sheets already and we're gonna pull this one off

 also and what I did was I have some grace membrane with me once I pull this guy off here we're gonna

 put the grace membrane on top of this lip and go under we're getting rid of these the Hardy backer

 board right now we're gonna put this on first and then we're gonna read paper over this that way when

 the water does go through the tile it lands harmlessly in the tub instead of in back of here

 where it would the way he's got this set up and it'll rot out the studs take about 10 years but

 it will rot out the studs so fortunately we caught this before any damage was done I'm going to show

 you just real quick of what I'm going to do I'm going to go ahead and take a rag I'm going to use

 some thinner or denatured alcohol and clean all this grit off that way this membrane adheres

 thoroughly so when we get to that stage I'll show it show you that all right guys I got my grace

 membrane on here now this is the right way to do it then we're gonna instead of cutting this paper

 right here which I could do and put it over I'm just going to go ahead and put another piece of

 30-pound felt over that that way this lip is protected right here we got see where I can get

 my hand in here I'm going to show you guys something which is pretty important we don't want it just

 like this we want it we want it to go like an L flashing so what I'm gonna do here is I've already

 used some denatured alcohol clean the tub real well so first thing I want to do is stick this

 guy onto the tub and if I if I stick too much that's not a bad deal because we could always

 come back and cut it now I'm getting this L flashing type thing we're right here all right

 now this is pretty important see right here I've got a half-inch gap here and so we don't want to

 just come here and go straight up we want to go into that L flashing or that that nipple here it's

 that's done and I gave myself a little extra right here I can take a knife a utility knife and cut

 that after we put the hardy board back then he's actually going to do the tile work I just again I

 just happen to see this and I thought oh no don't do that before you properly watertight this so my

 next thing is I'm going to go ahead and put another bit of this grace membrane on all the

 corners because corners sometimes have a tendency to leak now we're just going to read paper over

 paper and on top of here now that is watertight it only takes a few minutes to do and again this

 is I just happen to be here so I thought if we point this out all right guys had to stick up a

 little bit more lighting in here hopefully this will show up anyhow we have the grace membrane

 now protecting all these corners there and what we've done is because he's had the action he has

 all this 30-pound felt we are placing another piece it went vertical on his so what I'm doing

 is I'm just going horizontal now so we are taking it here we're going to put the next piece on here

 then we're going to screw that wonder board all the or backer board whatever it's called we're

 going to put that right back on it'll all be watertight then then he can do the tile without

 worry about down the road water coming in here because again it would take about 10 maybe five

 years but eventually it would all rot out anyway that's just how to properly do a bathtub also we

 do a lot of showers we do a lot of interior we mainly specialize on exterior but it's all the

 same there's lips everywhere and you have to adapt for it anyhow my name is Kirk I am with

 Kirk Giordano plastering thank you folks for watching hopefully you guys don't make this

 mistake I've seen it done about 15 times we'll see you guys on the next one

 Hey there, Nick Weiss here and I got a quick lesson on how to strum Somewhere Over the

 It's actually a pretty complex strumming pattern that I didn't play exactly right until a couple

 I listened deeper and I heard exactly what he was doing because I knew I wasn't getting

 The biggest difference between what I'm going to do and what he's going to do is I do not

 own a low G uke, meaning that this G string is normally in a higher octave on most standard

 They're actually pretty good for backing yourself up if you're just going to use the uke and

 So something else on the list, the ever-growing list of things to buy.

 But at any rate, what he does is plucks the G string with his thumb and then up, down,

 A mute can be done by basically just putting your hand on the strings to stop them from

 I actually kind of hit the top of the uke, not too hard or anything, but just to get

 a kind of a percussive sound and you get a kind of a cool almost talking drum sound sometimes.

 If you hit the sound hole in the right area, you can hear this kind of boop.

 I don't know if that's coming through over the mic, but it's kind of a cool effect if

 And for those of you that don't know, the proper place to strum a uke is generally right

 So I started, I'm a guitar player at first, so I thought the place you're supposed to

 strum it was over the sound hole, but that's not the traditional place to strum a uke.

 The toughest thing for me is getting that thumb down and getting my fingers over to

 The A minor chord and the F chord, getting my fingers down to the G string before my

 thumb hits the string, that was kind of different than how I had played it previously, so that

 Check out Nick Way's music for more info on lessons and playing parties and stuff like

 So once your 2 cups of water is boiling, you add your half cup of DME.

 Because then you really mimic the environment that your beer is going to be fermenting in.

 And so right now, before we're going to add the yeast and everything else in here,

 One reason I like to use the wider pot for 2 cups is so that when I cool it down in the fridge,

 But one negative here is that the water escapes faster with more surface area exposed to the air.

 or just start with a little bit more than 2 cups of water and plan for the boil off,

 And let this cool down to at least under 80 degrees or regular pitching temp.

 This is the same yeast from the other video when we washed the yeast.

 To get the rest of the yeast out, I like to add a little bit of the starter liquid.

 And I add all the Trubb too because it's all going to settle out in the yeast cake,

 And instead of an airlock on the starter, we're going to put tinfoil

 The idea of the starter is to get a lot of reproduction and increase your number of yeast cells,

 Hey guys, it's Kara with The Bag Holder as well as Today's Living and I am going to show

 Now let me tell you, you do not have to cook the meat ahead of time.

 You can use fresh vegetables if you want, you know that I'm all about convenience, but

 Now you just saw my crock pot, easily, easily, I have thrown in a pound of hamburger and

 You do not have to cook it if you're going to throw it in your crock pot and you have

 about 6-8 hours to leave it on medium, medium high, and that's exactly what I'm going to

 This has actually a little seasoning, basil, garlic, and oregano.

 Now if you're not going to use, if you want to use fresh tomatoes, then you want to do

 two whole large beefsteak tomatoes, but you want to mash them or slice them.

 Now if you want to make your own sauce, then you want to do two cans of this, one can of

 If you're going to do it simple like me, these are buy one get one free, I'm putting one

 Actually I put you on hold so I can move this so you can see what I'm doing.

 I always open it over whatever I'm going to pour it into because somehow I always seem

 So again I'm just teaching you time management skills to make your life easier and you have

 absolutely no clean up in the kitchen, but you still have good food.

 This is a full tablespoon, yes, that just means you fill it halfway.

 So the ones that you buy in the produce store, exact same thing.

 They have not been canned, they have not been processed, nothing's been on them to keep

 Now we're going to do the same thing, a half a cup of the seasoning blend.

 Now every couple hours or every four hours, you may want to stir it if you happen to be

 Well, as the juice and the meat cooks down, yes it's going to have a little grease in

 You can drain that off easily with a spoon or if you're going to freeze this, which is

 When you put it in the fridge for a couple hours, the grease will automatically come

 You can see I did mix it up about 20 minutes into it and now I'm going to leave it literally

 The frozen veggies that I threw in, the fresh flash frozen veggies, we'll add a little water

 I have this on medium right now and it'll cook for about four to six hours.

 It's been about four and a half hours now and it is fully cooked and delicious.

 This is so thick and see this is a great, this, this sauce is going to make fantastic

 I think that's what I'm going to do is whip up some ziti, add a little ricotta and some

 Visit us on facebook.com slash GL family facebook.com slash bag holder and please, please, please

 Hello and a very warm welcome back to the Simple YouTube channel.

 to be all about our Kinder Skin Plus Perfecting Beauty Balm or BB Cream.

 our BB Cream contain 3 vitamins and 4 skin loving ingredients, it also has an effective

However, there are a couple of ways to help the BB Cream fit more perfectly

For example, I have very fair skin and there are a couple of ways that

 small amount of the product, but I also have a second method that helps the BB Cream work

I like to combine our Beauty Balm with a little bit of our Kinder Skin

I absolutely love the illuminating look that the BB Cream provides

It really helps to moisturise and even out my skin tone and even contains

 Plus Illuminating Radiance Cream, but don't forget if you don't want to mix the two products,

 top tips for making our BB Cream fit perfectly with your skin tone.

 us a comment below, send us a tweet or leave us a message on our Facebook page.

 Today I introduce this great product for you, OBD Car Window Smart Auto Closer Module.

 This product is adopting USA Cambus auto microcomputer chip, specially suitable for traveling clues.

 Use this product when you leave your car, you just close the lock key, 4 windows will be closed automatically.

 4 windows can be opened and closed together, and the original car clip prevention function is not affected.

 Easy install with OBD connector without line connect, and the power consumed is very little.

 When the car power off, put this OBD car smart closer to OBD socket like this.

 After the car power off, press the lock key of the car remote key, 4 windows will be closed automatically.

 After the car power off, press the unlock key of the car remote key last for over 3 seconds, 4 windows will be opened automatically.

 Third, when the car windows open, press the lock key of the car remote key, 4 windows will be closed again.

 with box joints, a very attractive joint, especially if you use contrasting woods.

I also need the accessory mini box joint kit, which will include the stops, the

Next, I take another piece of stock of the same thickness, put it against the

Now I'm going to slide the fingers up against the stops, tighten it down, set

 the stabilizer bar back in place, and I'm ready to do the first routing operation.

 the fingers over, set them against the stops, and remove board number one.

 adjust the fingers and the joint might look something like this.

 size or large box joints, you can use the template that comes with the 24-inch OmniJig

So today I'm going to be showing you one of my favorite snacks ever

 So you can find this at your local grocery store in the organic section and what you're going to need is a

 You could use the omega oil or you can use toasted sesame seed oil, whatever you prefer

 So once the water is now boiling you can turn on your frying pan to about medium-low

 That stays about four minutes and next when your frying pan begins to be a little hot you can put two teaspoons of the oil

 So once the strain you add them into the frying pan and you fry for a couple of minutes

 You take some salt and you take some sesame seeds and you add them in

 If you're in a rush to kill that sweet tooth, this Rocky Road Protein Dip might just do

 Take out a food processor or really colorful blender, then add in 16 ounces or 454 grams

 of drained and rinsed reduced sodium chickpeas, 3 teaspoons or 12 grams of light brown sugar,

 3 tablespoons or 27 grams of coconut flour, 3 scoops or 90 grams of a chocolate protein

 1 1⁄2 teaspoons of vanilla extract, 1⁄4 teaspoon of butter extract, 3 tablespoons

 or 15 grams of cocoa powder, 3 ounces of unsweetened vanilla almond milk, and 2 tablespoons or

 After around 30 seconds, stop, add in 1 ounce or 28 grams of mixed nuts, then pulse it a

 Next, add your dip into a bowl, then eat it with a spoon or some low-fat graham crackers.

 Three substitutes for this recipe, any other white bean or black beans instead of chickpeas,

 oat flour instead of coconut flour, and regular milk or any other milk substitute instead

 As far as the calories go in the whole recipe, there's 1,229, 29 grams of fat, 125 grams

 Now if you portion this out into 10 servings like I do, there are your calories per serving

 A couple quick tips, 1, this will last in the fridge around 5 to 7 days.

 2, you can use it as a topping or even as a sandwich bread, it tastes great with peanut

 And 3, if you put this in the freezer for around 30 to 40 minutes, it'll have a texture

 Other than that, everything in moderation, and of course, stay healthy.

 Today I come to you with my dark summer makeup look that I've been rocking.

 I wore this makeup look in California and you all asked about it.

 Numero uno, let's prime this face because while I was out there I wanted to make sure that I had the most mattified skin

 And next I'm just going to put some balm on my lips because they're always cracked.

 I'm taking my Makeup Forever full coverage concealer in shade 18.

And you know when something works for you, you just kind of don't give it up.

I'm going to put it down in my description box so you girls know because you're always asking about it

 But I love this foundation because it was super light and it has so much coverage.

 I'm taking my Anastasia brow pencil and this is in shade dark brown.

 I've been using my pencil and then to make them a little bit darker,

 I filled them in with my Anastasia Dip Brow Promade in shade dark chocolate.

 But we are going to now take, like I said before, my Anastasia Dip Brow Promade

 As you can see, I'm not even really touching the inner corner of the brow.

 or I guess I'm using the shape of my eyebrow to kind of give it a natural arch.

 I love that this has a concealer brush and the concealer in it in one.

 As you can see, I really don't do much of an investment on my brushes.

 So now I'm using my Cover FX Contour Palette to highlight under my eye

 and I'm taking my G Medium Deep Palette and I'm using number three, which is shade G70.

 And I'm taking my Beauty Blender and I'm just going to apply this lightly on the bottom of my eye.

 So next, I'm taking my Bobbi Brown Contour Stick in shade Chestnut to define my cheekbones.

 And I'm just going to use this on my cheekbones and on my forehead.

I'm just going to take a soft brush and I'm just going to blend that all together.

 And to blend it all out and make your contour not look so dramatic,

 But I always used to use my Maybelline Clear Mascara to set my eyebrows

 I'm taking my Naked Palette from Urban Decay and I'm actually using Half Baked from their eyeshadow collection.

 And now I'm taking my MAC Pro Longwear Powder and this is in shade Dark Deep.

 And then I'm just going to go ahead and apply my Lime Crime Black Velvet Black Lipstick that you guys have been raving about.

 It looks glossy at first, but honey, this gets so matte like there's no tomorrow.

If you do give this look a try, please, please, please tag me at Monica Style Muse on all of my social handles because I would love to see you girls try this.

 It's a little different for the summertime, but I say let's just start over and let's just make the summer ours.

 Who says you can't combine both dark and colors for the summertime?

 Oh my God, I almost forgot to tell you where my accessories and my shirt is from.

My string on my neck was just like an extra string that I had on my shirt and I cut it up and I put it on my neck.

 This is my face and as you can see my skin has discoloration, blemishes, sun freckles,

 In this video I'm going to show you how to conceal to achieve your perfect clear skin.

 I'm going to be using the MAC Studio Finish Concealer with SPF 35 and I have two different

 This concealer is lightweight and very creamy but it's hard at times so you might have to

 warm it up with your fingers like so and I also suggest to use your fingers because

 I'm going to begin with NW20 Studio Finish Concealer and this is a lighter color.

 This is going to be great for your darker circles because you want to brighten those

 I will now apply this to my dark circle areas which is under my eyes and I just pat it on

 like so as you can see and while I'm doing this I'm also blending it out at the same

 This product is very buildable and it's actually a full coverage concealer I would say but

 it is opaque when you apply it on so a little bit goes a long way and if you need more just

 This concealer can also last very long and it is water resistant so when you cry you

 I'm going to now use NC30 Studio Finish Concealer and this color is more true to my foundation

 color and also to my skin tone so I like to use this to cover any of my blemishes or

 I don't use this for any area around my eyes because I feel it's a little bit too dark.

 I'm going to use this product again with my finger and I'm just going to warm it up like

 So just pat it onto the area that you're trying to conceal and what you want to do is you

 want to blend it out too because you don't want it to look too obvious that you're concealing

 something so I'm going to show you in a few seconds how to do it.

 If you find that your fingers are a little bit too fat or too big you can use a small

 little brush like how I'm doing right here to just cover or conceal your little moles

 You might want to also move your face around just to ensure that that concealer is covering

 The best way to ensure that your mole can be concealed or any other area on your face

 You're not going to blend it out at all because when you blend it out you might move some

 No matter what you use it could be a Sigma, it could be a MAC, it could be whatever brush

 you have as long as you can push the foundation into your skin.

 If you don't use foundation and you just want to use something just to hold that concealer

 in place you can use this Makeup Forever HD High Definition Powder.

 It's a clear or translucent powder so it will not affect the color of your concealer.

 Just use any brush that you have and just pat it on to the area like so.

 My other advice for applying foundation is to create all of these amazing crazy faces

 because it will help get every little crack or cranny or wrinkle in your face and it will

 fill it up with some product and it will make your face look flawless like this.

 That's pretty much my secret to getting this clear beautiful skin that you see on my face

 If you're wondering why I don't tell you to apply powder it's because I feel like powder

 The one on the right is the NW20 which is a neutral warm and the one on the left is

 I would suggest the NW20 which is a neutral warm for anyone who has pink undertones, fair

 It's also great if you just have darker circles and you want to lighten them.

 The other one I would suggest is the NC30 which is a neutral cool.

 It's great if you have yellow undertone, medium or tan skin tone, if your veins look green,

 Play it on electric guitar, but I'm going to teach you on acoustic,

 just in case you don't have an electric and it will be easier this way.

 So if you're playing a power chord, it's basically just a bar chord,

 For instance, if you're playing an E bar chord down here at the 7th fret,

 This is when it talks about, I think of you every night and day.

 All right, so the chorus chords are the exact same chords as the verse,

 just so you can try and get the strumming pattern down, all right?

 So, because it's kind of hard for me to explain it, but just watch it, all right?

 All right, so that's how to play all the chords for the verse, chorus, and pre-chorus of

 Watch my lick tutorial to learn how to play the intro lick and the lick that happens on the turns.

 clearing out my phone pictures as I was on the plane and just kind of clearing it out

 and I came across the photo of the recipe and I remembered that I made the salad a couple

 years ago and I really loved it so I recreated the salad a couple weeks ago, I loved it so

 then today I was like I gotta share it with you guys and this one will be your favorite

 if you're like me and you like savory foods and salty foods, this is going to be your

 some cornichons and this is just a variation of a pickled cucumber.

 here, some parsley, we got some green olives, stuffed green olives and some shallots and

 then for the dressing I'm going to be using some extra virgin olive oil.

 calls for red wine vinegar, I don't have any on hand so I'm going to use some white wine

I think either one is fine, just use whatever you have on hand or whatever

And last but not least I'm going to be using some grainy mustard.

 thing I'm going to start with is grab a mixing bowl and a whisk and I'm going to just mix

 I'm going to add the mustard, so I think that's perfect right there.

 going to grab my whisk and start mixing until all the ingredients come together.

So I'm going to start with the potatoes and just transfer them to

 the olives, the cornichons, next I'm going to add the capers and lastly I'm going to

 I prefer to use a wooden spoon and since the potatoes are boiled they're pretty soft so

 and kind of fold the salad together as opposed to just roughly mixing it all in.

 suggest to keep it in the fridge for about half an hour or so to make sure that all the

 ingredients marinate and come together beautifully and once it's done it's ready to serve.

 now I'm just going to give it a little bit of a taste like always.

 I love grainy mustard in salads, it's absolutely yummy and I love olives and I love pickles

 the crunchiness of the pickles and the capers just add a perfect amount of saltiness.

 you saw I didn't even add salt and I love salt and it doesn't need any salt.

 I actually like to do is make an extra batch for dinner and then use it for lunch the next

Just a little tip, you know because we're all pressed for time and I like to do that

And all the links for my social media will be in the bottom bar.

 That means you're going to start with the front foot going back.

 So you have a tendu and you step on it, step on the other foot,

 turn yourself into fifth, look at your balance, demi-plie, change the foot.

 Then you're going to use this shoulder, focus it to the back wall,

 Now use the turning shoulder around, demi-plie, change the foot,

 Now look at yourself in the mirror, look, good, demi-plie, change the foot.

 So we want to make sure that we're really using that plie, that shoulder,

 and now on des dents turns, we want to make sure, turn the arm, take it around.

 And plie glissé, up, get ready, now look at yourself in the mirror,

 and continue, the heel, the heel, good, and progress, pas de bras.

 Alright, now get ready to the left, and now look in the mirror, so you can see the balance.

 Now this has to go there, and you're going to keep your head up,

 you press down here, balancing there, and see, now you start to identify this shoulder.

 So you're reaching from that corner, so you can go to that corner.

 Now left shoulder attitude, now look, left arm, good, now stretch your left shoulder going back.

 Alright, and then, now rest, now get ready, think back from the right side here,

 Heel, right, now the right knee, out, and up, and plie, aha, that's right.

 Just feel like your head stays here, don't let it go to the left.

 That's a little bit more, be careful that you see that you don't put a lot of emphasis on that arm coming up,

 And see that's why before we're doing it, it's this one going back that we want to think about.

 There's your force, and then this is just very relaxed, very relaxed.

 Hi everybody, so I just wanted to do a quick little cooking vlog.

 My first one to kind of see if I like it, if it's something that you guys enjoy seeing

 I just was going to make this recipe and I thought, you know what, I think I'll just

 So the recipe that I'm going to share with you guys is a quick and easy berry cobbler.

 My husband is a huge berry fan and I was just making dinner and I thought I would just see

 For this recipe you will need two tablespoons of butter, softened, one cup of Bisquick

 pancake mix, a half a cup of milk, a half a cup of sugar, and then two cups of berries,

 I mixed one cup of blueberries and one cup of fresh strawberries since these are what

 I've also used raspberries and blackberries and it's always turned out delicious.

 Next you will mix the one cup of Bisquick mix, half a cup of milk, half a cup of sugar,

 Once your batter is complete, you'll take a half a cup of sugar and mix that into your

 Once the berries have been coated in sugar, you're going to pour them into your batter.

 It's really important that you only pour them and don't mix them.

 It doesn't matter that it comes on top looking lumpy like this.

 As the dough rises, it'll kind of naturally mix the berries into the cobbler.

 Once the berries have been poured into the cobbler, you're going to place this in the

 Once it's baked for 40 minutes, you just take it out of the oven and let it cool for 3-5

 And if you want to see more vlogs like this, see you guys later.

 Here at Fast Cash in Pond we do buy gold and I'm going to show you how to tell if it's

 You just run it across the gold and if these look similar with the fake gold you're going

 to stick the magnet to it and the gold is going to stick to it.

 And with the real gold you're going to put the magnet on it and it's not going to pick

 Another way to tell if the gold is fake or real is to look at the markings on the actual

 You'll see it on the clasp or you'll see it on the inside of the ring.

 The last part of the testing to see if it's real or fake is going to be with the gold

 This contains nitric acid so you don't want to touch this or put it in your mouth.

 What you're going to want to look for is bubbling, fizzing smoke.

 So that's how we check to see if your gold is real at Fast Cash and Fun.

 The last step would be with the gold testing acid and the stone.

 You've gone through all these steps and you're still not sure if it's real or not.

 Hey guys, so while I think about it and I'm about to do it, I wanted to bring you guys

 You guys asked me for this like a long time ago and I recorded it but I accidentally deleted

 So for the first thing I'm going to use is Seabreeze for sensitive skin and I put that

 It should look like lightly coated and you're just going to clean your face like so.

 And I also do this after I take all my makeup off with a makeup wipe.

 I go back over it with a, see look at all that dirt, I go back over it with a, um, with

 the Seabreeze and the cotton ball just to get the foundation that I might have forgotten.

 And I also do my neck because I do put foundation on my neck so with all that dirt that I didn't

 It treats and prevents acne and I'm just going to put a little bit of that on my fingers.

 So you want to lightly coat it like a lotion and just rub it in all over your face.

 This is pretty good if you're acne prone after a makeup application and I also do this after

 So this just keeps my face moisturized and I don't normally have acne but if I do this

 helps with it and it pretty much clears it up within 15 minutes so.

 You can use the regular one if you want but I just prefer the sensitive skin one.

 And the Clean and Clear Dual Action Moisturizer which helps treat and prevent acne.

 So that's my skincare routine you guys for morning and after I take my makeup off.

 You can actually use this as a primer before you put your foundation on.

 This also helps with keeping your face moisturized and doesn't give you that oil feel after a

 Gather 800 grams of fresh turmeric and chop it up really finely to increase the surface

 Next add it to a big pot and put double the amount of water in and we're going to put

 Prepare your fabric by adding 1 part salt to 16 parts water into a big pot and submerge

 We're going to boil that for an hour as well to use as a fixative for your dye.

 Next strain out the big pieces for your dye and you're left with just the yellow liquid.

 To make any kind of pattern on your fabric you can use string to tie up knots in different

 What you want is to make sure your string is really tight so that no dye can seep into

 Experiment here with other objects like stones, pencils, whatever you like that's lying around.

 It makes a really interesting pattern and experiment with different folding techniques

 Finally twist your remaining string, whatever you have left, around, fasten it with a knot

 and then submerge into your dye for a good amount of time to make sure that it has a

 Make sure you have your wet cloth and just submerge it into your dye a few times so that

 Make sure you drain it really well because it's going to hang and you don't want any

 Hang your cloth out to dry and when it's done you'll have a beautifully yellow piece of

 Hey, I'm Lori Taylor, Pro-League Makeup Artist here at Smashbox.

 I'm here with Corolla and we're going to show you the steps to achieve the new blue.

 So I'm going to start by using the softest green and I'm going to be using it with our

 The key to this application is to start everything at the lash line and move up towards the brow.

 Next step, I'm going to use the lightest green with a touch of the teal from the I Wish palette

 I'm going to take the teal blue from the Metallic Proof Cream Eyeliner palette.

 And then I'm going to apply the same color at the upper lash line as well.

 So to intensify the color, I'm going to use the indigo blue from the Metallic Proof Cream

 They're going to add definition at the lash line but blend really nicely into all of the

 One of the key secrets when you're applying intense color, you want to have the depth

 of darkness at closest to the lash line and it wants to be a gradual fade up and down.

 So it's almost like you're getting the color all the way around the eye.

 That's why I'm going to use our indigo ink at the top lash line and again, just over

 And the last step, of course, to any eye application, my favorite mascara.

 To balance intense blue-green eyes, I want to go the opposite on my color wheel.

 So I'm going to choose a little bit of peach for the lip and the cheek.

 I love to use my fan brush for my application, keeping it high on the cheekbone.

 So by applying your cheeks high on the cheekbone, you create that lifted and youthful look.

 And for the lips, I'm using a Double Take lip pencil in Gossamer.

 I love a Double Take pencil because it's a lip liner and lipstick in one.

 Starting in the center of the lip, you're going to blend out towards both of the sides.

 niggas like me, you definitely don't wanna be one of them niggas like at 3 a.m.

So last year you really wanna think about what type of oil you're

Might even start with some of that Peter Pan motherfucking peanut

If you got some of that over there, add that to the list and then throw on your

Cause then your mince gonna start cooking itself and working the shit out.

 through asking you questions like why are you cooking it 3am in the morning?

So that means probably all you're looking kind of good for what it is.

 The house and barn, you can see the roof of the barn over there.

 So out in this northwest corner is the most underutilized, undergrazed with the tall grasses.

 So this is where I've got the horses and bulls temporarily, with a temporary electric fence

 And for a water source, for the last four or eight weeks I've been using a temporary

 tank that a neighbor has run a garden hose to, and I fill up with the use of that garden

 But with the four bulls and horses, they've, in the heat of the summer, they've been draining

 that tank and I've had to come out here and fill it twice a day, which is a little problematic

 So I need a little more storage capacity, so I went to the local co-op and they sold

 me an old tractor tire that had the top cut out, and I'm going to install that as a water

 Okay, so the first thing with putting in this tank is I've got another tank that's been

 So what I want to do is put this tank somewhere where it won't bother things because it's

 So first thing we want to do is clean up these grasses some, and then we'll flop the

 tank over here, flop the tire over here, put some dirt in the bottom of it, and then put

 some quick-reet or sack-reet on top of that and then fill it up with water.

 And in the bottom here is our hole, and we got to get that filled in and sealed up so

 Put maybe an inch or two of gravel as a layer there, and then a few bags of sack-reet and

 I'd like to have about three to four inches of depth for my concrete, and I'm going to

 So I want to be sure to get this dirt packed down here enough and not put too much dirt

 If an animal gets in here, it doesn't step through the concrete or crack it.

 So I'm trying to pack this down here a bit, just going around it and trying to knock all

 If you were going to put this in for a permanent tank and you had a good water access, you'd

 want to run your water hose up from the middle there, sticking right out through the middle,

 and then also a drain hose in there that would drain somewhere at least 50 to 60 yards away

 from the tank so you don't have a wet area establishing around the tank.

 And you might even consider putting this tank on a raised area with gravel and maybe even

 But for what I'm doing here with just a temporary hose access, this will work just fine.

 I'll just run the hose over there, and if I need to drain it, I'll set up a siphon system

 And then if I need to move it at a later point, I can come out here with a sledgehammer and

 Alright, I think I got my dirt there prepared like I want it, and there's my first bag of

 Tamped in there a little bit so I can get as much under that bead as possible.

 There's my quick grate all smoothed out on top, up over the top of the bead, and down

 I've got it sitting on the tire part so that as it fills there, hopefully it won't disturb

 Looks like we've got water meeting over here now, so we're off and running.

 It's kind of interesting to think about as this tank is just starting to fill, how tall

 this grass is out here and how underutilized it is and how with just the simple addition

 of a water tank you can draw livestock to an underutilized area away from an overutilized

 If I was to stand here in a few weeks time and take this same video, these grasses would

 Just over here to my right is an area where we've had animals accessing for about 45 days

 and you can see that they've used those grasses pretty heavily.

 Quite a bit of bubbling going on in there as that water finds its way down through.

 Tank's about a quarter full I'd say, over the top of all the concrete and the bead.

 I don't see any water running out below, so we'll keep on filling it here and see how

 We've got a tank that's continuing to fill and all systems look good.

 So after 45 minutes of water running we have pretty much a full tank here and we'll let

 Starting with one tank that had about three quarters of a day capacity for the four bulls

 Ending with two tanks and that tank has about three times the capacity that this one does.

 So we'll hopefully have about two days of water supply here for them between the two.

 What is going on guys, NSZ85 back with another video and today I will be installing the Battle

 This will be going on my B5 Systems SOPMOD stock that I have on my Mega Maw 10.

 As you can see I have done some upgrades and I am going to do some long distance stuff

 and even though the B5 SOPMOD offers a very good cheek weld I do want a little bit of

 So I am going to go over the installation of this and talk about it a little bit and

 Ok so the first thing I have to do is the factory butt pad has to come off.

 Again this is my B5 SOPMOD and there are two tabs, one located here and one located

 I am going to set this down and press in and push down until it just pops out.

 We are going to set that aside and on the rear of the butt pad you see two slots, rectangle

 You can take this side screw out of the sapper, slide this off and then there are also four

 Once you have these tight and you are just going to want to go tight and then just about

 I have a little bit longer torque because of the length of this.

 The rectangles are facing down inside that recess and it is nice and tight.

 We are going to take the rest of our sapper here and you can see the T area.

 Don't screw it in this way because you want this to be recessed the correct way is on

 What I typically do just to make sure that I don't strip threads or anything is I go

 backwards so I turn it counter clockwise until the threads seat.

 This is completely adjustable so the cheek weld can go up or down based on the screw.

 If I wanted my cheek rise to be a little higher I would loosen this up and then you can adjust

 I don't even know why you would want it that high but hey you have the ability to do so.

 I am going to keep mine at the lowest for right now until I get it back on the rifle.

 The last thing to do is put the rubber butt pad back into place but before we do that

 there is a screw here that will be hidden once you get this in place.

 What this is, loosen this up a little bit, this gives you the ability to actually cant

 Maybe you hold your rifle at a different angle or you have body armor you want to compensate

 Your rifle will be level but your butt pad you can have angled.

 Once you put your butt pad on you won't get easy access to that screw.

 So I am just going to put mine level because I am just going to keep mine straight and

 If you need to take this off you have access through these holes on this side.

 You will just need something to get in there to push it together.

 So I am going to go ahead and show what it looks like on the rifle.

 So here is the Battleline Industries Sapper completely installed.

 I am just going to talk about it for a sec here because I am sure you guys are curious.

 You just lift up and it can go to this side or you can lift up and it can go to this side.

 You will notice too that it adds about 2 inches to the length of pull.

 So you can actually have your stock more fully forward than extended rearward.

 The cheek piece at it's lowest, which is what I have right now, it's like half an inch.

 But it really gives you a good range on customizing exactly to where you want your cheek to be.

 The other thing with moving this out of the way, that gives you very quick, easy access

 to in case the optic fails, you whip your optic off, get this out of your way, then

 And because this stays on the stock, you can attach different uppers and just move

 So you can keep this right in line with other red dots and things of that nature.

 I can tell you that the overall weight of this, it is, I mean it's not titanium or anything,

 And I did weigh the two, this does come out lighter than the PRS.

 So with the amount of easily adjustable to slap this to the side, I'd say this has a

 If you have any questions, comments, or concerns, leave them below and I'll get back to you.

 So the way you germinate the mango seed is you have to take it out of the husk first.

 So what I did is I ate the mango of course and then I let the, I took out most of the

 pulp off the husk and I let it sit for a couple days so it's dry and it's not slimy so it's

 easier to handle because you'll have to pry the husk open with a paring knife or a butter

 So luckily this seed here is already splitting or this husk so this should be easy to split

 but normally you would take a knife and pry it open like that but in my case it's already

 Just open it up and you can take the seed out and the seed is a bean shaped seed.

 So I'm going to try to germinate two mango seeds and then you can just kind of peel this off.

 So one of them I already wrapped up in a paper towel and I wrapped it up in a damp paper

 towel, put it in a little ziplock and I placed it in our little grow box so it's nice and

 warm and this one I was thinking of is I'm going to put it just right above some water

 in a little cup or jar and I'm going to put some toothpicks on both sides and it looks

 like there's a little tiny root there already if you can see that so I'm going to just kind

 I did the mango seed germination experiment so it's been about 11 days and I left it in

 that ziplock bag wrapped around with a damp paper towel in our grow box.

 So look, the seed's all green and there's our little root sprouting.

 So I'm going to keep it in my paper towel and ziplock bag for a little, probably a few

 It's a really neat project and it's fun to do together as a family since it's a bigger

 So now the mango, it is a tropical fruit so it's going to need a warmer environment and

 I made the Puget Sound so it's not going to be warm throughout the whole year but I'm

 going to keep it indoors and in the winter I'll make sure that it gets enough light.

 The only thing is, the drawback about climbing the mango tree is there'll be all these big

 red fire ants and you would just get bitten all over the place so you have to really climb

 So anyway, it brings back some great memories of when I was growing up.

 So here is the seed and you can see the root right there and there's a little spout coming

 So I'm going to place it gently down into the soil here and I think I'm just going to

 bury it, the root, and lay the seed just on its side so that way that little growth

 So it's still there and I'm just going to bury this, the rest of the seed in there.

 And I'm using a seedling mix so there's lots of nutrient in this potting medium.

 So I guess I'm just going to bury some of it but not the whole thing.

 And what I'm going to do is I'm going to put a Ziploc over it to keep it extra warm since

 Mike Gross here at RockingGuitarLessons.com and YouTube.com slash RockingGuitarLessons1.

 I remember when this came out back in the day, it was, I don't know, probably 17.

 I've said this on another Metallica lesson, and I forget which one it was, but Metallica

 When you record in the studio, you can take the pitch of something and raise it just a

 They probably did it just to mess with us because they knew we would be talking about

 So, but most people don't know that unless you're a guitar teacher or a guitar player

 that's figured it out and you're tuned up to your tuner and you're like, okay, why does

 First finger, fret two on the A, pinky, fret four on the D, or third finger if you want.

 Go A, D, A, and then lift your pinky off and hit the D string open.

 Okay, and then, and once again, this is the fingering I'm using.

 They probably are too, the same fingering, but you can change it up a little bit.

 Middle finger three E, pinky four D. So we're skipping the A string now, but doing the same

 E, D, E, D. And when you hit the D the second time, you lift your pinky off.

 Open A, fourth fret D. Go A, D, A. Lift your pinky off, open D. So, and then this one,

 Third fret E, fourth fret D. E, D, E. Lift your pinky off and hit the open D.

 If you have any questions, hit me up on this video lesson down here below.

 If you follow it the way I taught it, you can down pick everything, at least on this

 Watch my website, rockandguitarlessons.com coming in June or July of 2012.

 And also, my YouTube channel is youtube.com slash rockandguitarlessons1.

 They're free lessons for you guys to get you inspired and teach you some proper technique

 What is up everybody, you are now watching my very first unboxing video ever.

 And today I'm giving you guys the unboxing of the brand new Adidas Predator LZ's, aka

 As you can see the box is wrapped in this ProDirect soccer plastic bag kind of thing,

 which is actually pretty funny because these boots were actually sent to me by another

 But anyways, let's just move on and finally open this box to see what these bad boys look

 And I just want to say that I have never opened this box before, so I really hope I will find

 Yeah, I forgot to mention that I also got the MyCoach little technology device included

 And you know, before I say anything stupid, I just want to tell you guys that I am super

 excited to finally have these boots because I am a huge Adidas Predator fan.

 I mean, I've been a Predator fan ever since I bought my first pair of the Predator Manias

 And you know, as I said, I've been playing with Predators ever since.

 So here I am, 10 years later, finally holding the new model of the Predator family.

 And you can't really talk about the design if you don't mention these weird looking gummy

 And these so called next generation new technology magic rubber spots will not make you a better

 I mean, I'm sorry to break it down to you like this, but you won't be able to take freaks

 like David Beckham, even though you are wearing the same boots as he does, or even though

 all the Adidas developers say all kinds of beautiful things about these boots and how

 they will give you better overall ball control or make your passes more accurate or give

 As I said already, I'm a huge Predator fan and I think these boots will be amazing.

 But you know, it just makes me laugh every single time when new boots are being put out

 and they are supposed to have this revolutionary new feature that will take your game to the

 I got the firm ground version and I really do hope these will last longer than my football

 boots normally do because I have a really bad habit of using my football boots for only

 2-3 months because I kinda tend to break my studs after just a couple months of use.

 So I really hope Adidas made these more durable than the previous models.

 It's this little technology device you can put in here and it will give you all kinds

 of useful information about your football sessions or games or matches or whatever.

 As I already said, they also included that MyCoach thing with these boots which is pretty

 I'm not actually sure but I think it's some kind of synthetic leather.

 And I'm sorry already if I give you misinformation but I really haven't done any research or

 If you guys never want to see boring videos like this on this channel ever again, just

 But yeah, so these are the new Adidas Predator Lethal Zones and I will definitely make some

 Thank you for watching if you still are watching this video after all these minutes.

 And yeah, these are the brand new Adidas Predator Lethal Zones and I'm out.

 Your pick and pay obviously stops the best and that butcher can't wait to serve you

 Today I'm going to show you how to butterfly a leg of lamb which will guarantee fast and

 Let me get my rolling pin I'm now going to use this to flatten it out

 Beautiful, look how nice and flat it is I'm now going to return it to the dish for

 Zest of one lemon Now for a pinch of salt and a pinch of pepper

 I'm going to give this a quick stir just to mix all my dry ingredients together

 Now I'm going to add it to my leg of lamb I'm going to use the back of a spoon, spread

 Now I'm going to use some cling wrap and then we're going to put it in the fridge

 I'm going to put it on this hot braai It's going to be lekker, man lekker

 The coals are hot and ready The fat needs to be crispy, so we need to

 The meat is on the fire and now I'm going to baste it with a bit of olive oil

 Let's remove it and place it on our board Let this rest for 5-10 minutes

 I can't wait to taste this It's certainly going to impress all of my

 Hey this is Logan at Cali Bros and I'm going to show you our favorite mods for the H107D

 And then just apply a little bit of hot glue to the bottom side of the lens.

 You may have to tilt the bottom part up a little bit to not show any black edges.

 Then apply a little bit on the top and then on the sides as well.

 If you put glue all the way around the edges you'll prevent dirt from getting between the

 Once you've glued the lens on make sure that you don't see any dark edges on the corners

 Go ahead and knead the epoxy for a few minutes to get a consistent color.

 Place the lens on the front and simply wrap it around the edges.

 And be careful you don't get this on any of the lenses because it will ruin the lenses

 It's good to know that you can sand it after it's already hardened so you can get a real

 There's one method with the zip ties that we've shown in a previous video but we've

 had a lot of people request us to show you how to put it on the side.

 Just cut the bottom portion off and then use the same epoxy putty or hot glue and simply

 You'll see the range increase from about 50 yards to 100 yards max depending on where

 you're flying and what type of obstacles are in your way and noise.

 It has been 48 and 55 hours and they still are well they're done they're cooked as much

 as I'm going to I mean they're dehydrated as much as I'm going to dehydrate them but

 this is all that it was two trays and I put them onto one tray and this is all it is and I'm going

 to fill my jar up and put them in the jar and then I'm going to seal them with my vacuum seal

 Okay here's what's in the jar this is all the raisins that I got out of the two trays of grapes

 about a half a quart and I'm going to show you how to seal this with the food saver.

 All right see I have my lid on there and sometimes I have a problem with the lid

 sealing with the food saver so what I'll do is I'll put a lid on upside down.

 Let me get this right here I'll put the lid on upside down and then I'll put my jar sealer

 well I'm telling you I'm having a hard time learning how to do this with camcorder with one hand.

 and here goes my jar sealer I'm going to put my jar sealer on there well maybe

 I'll be right back I cannot okay now I have the jar sealer on there and I'm going to push

 anyway these are sealed and now I'll put the ring on it and I will write on it today's date

 and that it's dehydrated raisins or grapes or whatever you want to say

 it's raisins now it was grapes and this is sealed so this will be good for

 um I haven't decided yet what I'm gonna put them in cinnamon raisin um rolls or

 um what I'm gonna do with it I guess could make rice rolls or something like that

 but here's my food saver and there's my jar sealer and I absolutely love my food saver I got it off of HSN

 and got it on the flex pay I ended up paying $10.99 for it and I'm gonna put it in my food saver

 I got it off of HSN and got it on the flex pay I ended up paying a total of $108 for this

 and it was at Walmart for $1.59 so I really got a good deal on it and it's well worth using

 when you dehydrate things and you want to um seal it and I'm going to use it to seal my beans in

 jars and my rice and pasta and sugar and salt and I'm gonna figure out how to get to store all

 of this stuff so um if you like this video be sure that you um mark it as liked and if you

 like my channel please subscribe to it and this is Debbie thanks bye

 It is one of my most viewed videos and I have a lot of questions about how to play different

 But since you all have a lot of questions I'm going to teach you how to play it.

 Now you start out with, you play the 8th fret on the A string, then the 7th fret on the

 D string, then open fret G, which is held down by the capo, and then the 8th fret on

 And then the last time when you do it, when you're going back down, you play the B open.

 So it goes A, D, G, B, G, D, G, and then lift your 3rd finger up, holding down the B string,

 Second part, it switches to, you play the 8th fret on the D, I mean the E, and then

 the 7th fret on the A, and then open on the D, and then 7 on the G.

 And that part, you play, well what I played, I played 7 on the G, then open, and then 9

 Ok, the next section that I played, I played a C, and then a G, and then a D, and then

 Ok the next section I played was, I think it was a chorus, which is right here.

 Ok, the last section is what I get the most questions about, specifically by a guy named

 You play 12 on the A, 10 on the D, alternate those twice, 12-10-12-10.

 And then you play 10 on the A, 10 on the D, and then 9 on the D, 10 on the D. And

 And then you play 10 on the D, 9 on the D, 12 on the A, and 10 on the A. So that part

 I'll play it with the song, so it'll be all up to speed and all that stuff.

 Hi everyone, so today we'll be making something really easy and require really few ingredients

 But it is really hard to handle properly to achieve the right texture.

 So for the creme brulee filling we first will need three egg yolks and I'm gonna separate the whites from the egg yolks

 After that we will be adding all the sugar into the egg yolks and all the information will be in the bottom bar

 And just pour the heavy cream and milk into a small saucepan and just heat it over medium heat until

 small bubbles around the sides of the pot starts to show up and we can turn off the heat

 And while the heavy cream is heating up we can mix our egg yolk mixture

 It should take about three or four minutes for the egg yolk to turn a pale lemony color and it should be thicker than before

 And we will be adding our mango puree you can add in any type of fruit puree you want

 After that I am going to add in two big tablespoons of mascarpone cheese

 Because I like mascarpone cheese and it goes really well with mangoes

 If you don't want to add mascarpone cheese you can skip this step

 It is totally optional but it will just make the creme brulee much more creamier and smoother

 And people tend to substitute it with condensed milk but I find condensed milk to be too milky and too sweet

 Using mascarpone cheese has the same effect as using condensed milk

 And next we are going to temper our egg yolks just by just adding the hot heavy cream

 And I am just going to run the egg custard through a sieve a couple more times

 And I will equally pour in the egg custard to a couple ramekins

 I was going to do four but one broke so I have to squish everything to three

 And after you are done with that just put it in the refrigerator for about 20 minutes

 And after it has reached room temperature I like to cover it with foil and just bake it in a water bath

 Make sure that the water bath covers about halfway through the ramekins

 And just bake these babies in a 350 oven for about 20 to 25 minutes

 After they are done baking just let them cool down to room temperature

 Or you can totally just put them in a refrigerator and just let them cool down and we will proceed to the next step

 After it is done cooling I put it in a refrigerator and just put it overnight

 I hope you guys enjoyed this really creamy and delicious dessert

 There's a few methods of doing this, but I'll be showing you what I find to be the simplest

So the colors I'm using, my base color is Mint Sorbet by Sally Hansen.

 I'm just using my nail art pen, which comes with a skinny brush inside.

 already painted my nail the base color I want, and now I'm going over it with the black nail

So for this design, you want to keep your lines fairly thin when you first begin,

And this part's a little thin, so I'm going to add a little bit more color.

 I'm going to add a little bit more product to make my border a bit thicker.

 I want to keep my edges a little bit more rounded, I think it better frames the nail.

 Hello this is C-Dub and today I'm going to show you some more preacher chords and the key of E flat

 So instead of just the normal, I'm going to do something a little different

 You can do more notes if you want to add the D flat as well but I'm doing it

 There's a lot of notes in these chords but that's what you got fingers for

 And then the same thing in this hand but I'm also adding the G flat

 So I got the same chord in each hand, I'm adding this G flat up top

 Alright I have A flat in the bass, I got G flat, B flat, C, and F in the left hand

 start a successful hair growth journey using tips that I've used to help me to grow my

Now there has been lots of people asking me questions about how to start so this video

 is for my subscribers that have been asking questions and also for those of you that are

Okay so first things first, you want to start doing your research.

 Research is one of the most important things because before you can get started you need

 for you to find out the kind of hair care methods that actually work.

 watching now, you're watching my videos, I'm talking about hair care tips so that's also

You've also got blogs and articles and hair growth forums are a really really

 good source as well because you've got a group of people that have got a common interest

 all in one place and you can also share information, you can learn from each other, you can also

 grow your hair together and you've got that support to keep you going.

 actually done your research you want to write down the most essential points that you think

 to wash your hair, how often you're going to condition it, the products you're going

 step by step so it'll obviously keep you to continue going along.

 more likely to achieve them because you're pushing yourself, striving to reach those

If you haven't got any goals or any targets it's going to be difficult to reach

 your goal because you don't know where you're going or how you're going to get there.

I took pictures of the front of my hair, the back and the sides.

 With pictures it helps you to know whether your hair is actually growing because you

 giving up thinking your hair is not growing when actually it is.

So your hair products, maybe you want to get a hooded dryer, a bonnet dryer, you

 might want to get large tooth combs, you might need to get bobby pins.

 might use and find out that it's no good for your hair, your hair doesn't like it.

 fine, just keep trying different things until you find what actually works.

 I've tried so many different products, okay, and I like to try different things all the

 I've actually used that's helped me to become successful in my journey.

 you that might be thinking, well where do I start, where do I begin?

 know that I do have my own book which I've written about my hair care journey and how

 in finding out about that, there are other videos on that and I'm also going to put some

 for women that are all growing their hair, trying to strive for longer hair lengths.

It's all in order and there's information on how I wash my hair, how I condition

 it, how I blow dry it, straighten it, step by step guides really.

If you've got any questions, do post them and I will do my best to answer

 Welcome back, today we are going to make Cotoletta alla Milanese.

 To make Cotoletta alla Milanese you need steak, thin veal, I have a sirloin tip size steak.

 Original breadcrumbs, make sure you don't buy those Italian breadcrumbs with a lot of seasoning,

 Okay, so when they are cooked you just put on a plate with some absorbing paper, so you can absorb some of the oil.

 I thought I would dissect the pizza to calculate how many calories are really in this pizza.

 So the calories in a slice of pizza will vary tremendously based on how thick the pizza

So I get the cheese off, I weigh the cheese and it comes to about

 of those internet sites where it says it's 200 or 300 calories per slice.

 quite as much cheese as the other slice but it's a lot thicker.

 Then what I do is I weigh the actual bread part of the pizza and again this is a lot

So total it's about 550 calories for this slice of Sicilian pizza.

 So the bottom line is about 450 to 550 calories for a typical slice of New York City pizza.

 add pepperoni or meat because that will add about another 150 calories to your slice.

 If possible get a whole wheat crust and try to add some vegetables.

 Today we're going to look at Whole Lotta Love by Led Zeppelin, just the intro riff.

 Before we get going, my usual thing, if you like the video, hit the like button, subscribe

 I'll put a load of links in the description if you want to follow me on Facebook and all

 So Whole Lotta Love, the first part is based on an E minor pentatonic scale, and it's...

 We're up at the 5th position, the same position as Black Knight from one of my previous lessons

 What's happening there is that we're sliding into fret 7 of the E string, the 6th string

 E. Then I play 5 on the A, back to the 7 on the E, back to the 5 on the A. And that is

 And then we're into the main kind of chugging rhythm that you hear.

 Now what's happening there is you're holding down the 7th fret on the A, 9th fret on the

 And what you do is you strum down, and then the next three notes are just the top E string

 What I also do is once I've played the chord, I relax my fingers so that you're only left

 So you get the real kind of punctuation between when the chords are being played and when

 Then in bar two, on the second beat, he does his pattern, just two muted, and then he hits

 And then beat three, just hits the chord, and then he plays that pickup that we had

 When he gets into the actual song, he just goes... just stops the chord dead.

 So he'll play through those two bars again, but without the... he'll just go... like that.

 Then after that, it's actually shorter between the times that he plays the... and when he

 So normally, once he's got past that initial intro, he does this.

 Just a single strum on beat three, and then the little kind of pickup pattern at the beginning.

 What you can also do is... on the pickup, he often adds a little bit of vibrato to the

 Hope you have fun with this, guys, and I will see you next time.

 And just some really fun things that you can do by the poolside.

 all you have to do is log on to the More at Midday section of WSMV.com.

 Also, be sure to go to our website to get our new cookbook called

And underpainting just means painting our subject in values of gray.

 and I'll just just to show you we'll paint this lemon in grays.

 meaning lighter values in black and white, and then the glazes will be darker on top.

And then for a background, I'll just put a very dark gray like this.

 and luminosity because a glaze is a pure color when it'll go on top of this.

See the lights coming from the left, so it'll illuminate the form here.

 be light behind that shadow, so let's get a little bit lighter there.

 Rubens would paint directly for the most part and then glaze at the end.

We just work on light and form with the this is the black and white grisaille.

Titian, who was a great Italian painter, Venetian painter, did all his work like

 taking the mystery out of glazing, you'll see how to go from there to there.

I'm starting with green, now I'm going in with a little bit of brown.

 dandelion tutorial and funny enough is it was one of my first tutorials and then I saw

 that it was online and so I thought that it had been by somebody who liked it and who

 when I realized that there's like lots and lots of designs that come out at the same

 time at the same place and it makes you like wonder like we're all, you know, connected.

 is so thin and I'm using my liner brush and I'm just going in and hatching the ends but

So then I take the cross hatches like that and pull them out of the dandelion

 lining brush I am going to add in just reflective areas like that.

 the dimension that I need in order to make these look a little bit more whimsical but

 I'm really only adding maybe one or two pieces of glitter to each thing just so that they

 Okay and here is the end result of the dandelions and they're very, very beautiful and simple

 on Facebook, Robin Moses Nail Art, Pinterest and Instagram and I'll see you back with more.

 Here's me puking like you'll puke after you eat this horrible Japanese Tuffy Play-Doh candy.

 And I'm going to be making some crazy, poppin', cookin' custom candy dough treats.

 And in this package, there's a bunch of different colors that you can mix together and make

 Maybe I will make a cat, because like I said, I'm your favorite YouTube...

 And enjoy the music I'm about to play, which is going to be by a DJ called Sir Giant.

 Awesome guys, look, in this kit you don't even need to mix the dough with water.

 I'm not gonna lie to you, it smells a bit pukey, but Halloween is all about putrid things.

 Putrid peach, ghastly white, stinky strawberry, ghoulish grape, and blacky black.

 I'm mixing pink and yellow together to hopefully get like an orangey color.

 What's kind of gross about this is remember you have to technically eat this stuff,

 I guess if it's your own hands playing with your own food, it's not as gross, right?

 And use the sides of my little tool here to put some vertical lines.

 This kit will clearly appeal to people who love playing with their food.

 For the ghost mouth, I just rolled a tiny bit of this pink into a little tube...

 I made a little tube and then I pulled off two beads and stuck it on.

 Actually you might want to flip it over so that your ears look more attractive.

 As you guys can see, you can pretty much make whatever you want out of the crazy Poppin' Cookin' Candy Play-Doh.

 And it's very time consuming to make, of course, what they have pictured on the box.

 So Hunger Games movie is out today and I thought it would be a perfect time to do it.

 You know the braid worn by Katniss that has been requested so many times.

 And at first I thought it looks a bit complicated because she has sort of a Dutch or reverse

 So I'm going to show you today how to recreate the same hairstyle super fast super easy.

 So for this tutorial you're only going to need a hairbrush and you are going to need

 sort of a you know a little hair elastic in the color of your hair.

 I'm going to turn around so you guys can see what I'm doing in the back.

 Now like always before you start the hairstyle you just want to brush the hair.

 So we're going to start braiding here right at the top of my right side.

 And then it's going to sort of end in a side braid over here on my left side.

 Now the first thing you want to do is just start at the top of your head and you want

 And now the first thing you're going to do is split the section in three.

 I've done a video on that before and I'm going to link it down below.

 If you don't know how to do a reverse braid you can look at that tutorial that I've done

 So the first thing you're going to do is instead of going forward like you normally would with

 And once you've done that what you are going to do and this is really easy is start adding

 Now what I'm going to do is grab that section and braid it under the second middle section.

 Okay just hold that with your left hand then grab your right section add some hair to that

 So you can just watch me but I'll be doing the exact same thing.

 So we just grab a section from the left adding it to the left section braiding it under.

 So this might take you just you know a few tries to get it right and also like give you

 I know I'm not certainly used to braiding in the back of my head so whenever I add a

 section and I braid under you know I just switch my hands so I can give a break to my

 left hand and then I would do the exact same thing you know to the other side.

 So just add a chunk of hair to this section braid under and then give a break to this

 hand then add a chunk of hair braid under and do the same thing.

 Once you're sort of done braiding this whole section you're going to bring you know all

 the hair to the front because we're going to end this in a braid right?

 So you just want to you know grab the sections and you're going to end this with a reverse

 braid so the exact same thing you're braiding under and under the main middle section.

 So again you can watch my tutorial on the reverse braid to get an idea of that.

 It's the same thing like a regular braid but you're going backwards.

 And then once you're at the bottom you just want to secure it with an elastic.

 Once the braid is secured you just want it to appear a little thicker and a little messier

 so what I'm going to start doing is grabbing all sections of the braid and slowly slowly

 If you pull it out too quickly you might just completely ruin the braid especially if you

 have layers little chunks of hair are going to start sticking out.

 So you just want to do it really carefully and slowly and you know if it's a little messy

 that's fine because that's exactly what Katniss has in the movie.

 Enjoy the movie if you're going to watch it and let me know how you like this hairstyle.

 Hey, Shana Kaye, ChallengeJumpRope.com, and I want to share with you a workout that you

 can do anywhere, including your living room, a hotel room, any small space.

 I'm here in my living room, and I have my very favorite piece of equipment.

 This is the only piece of cardio equipment that I use on a regular basis, and it's my

 What I want to share with you is my workout that's going to include high intensity interval

 I'm going to be doing my jump rope, and when you do your jump rope or phantom skip, you

 Now, lucky for me, I'm not super tall, so if you have a high ceiling, you're in luck.

 Or if you're super tall and a low ceiling, this might be something that you have to do

 I'm going to do 30 seconds of jump rope, and then I'm going to go into 30 seconds of a

 To modify that, I'm going to do a regular pushup or an incline pushup.

 Then I'm going to go to 30 second prisoner Bulgarian split squat on one leg.

 This is the longer set because then I do 30 seconds of prisoner Bulgarian split squat

 You can repeat that circuit up to five times for a super fast, high intensity interval,

 fat burning, strength building workout right in your living room.

 If you'd like to know more from me, from Challenge Jump Ropes, click the link below.

 If you like my video, my ideas, give me a thumbs up, give me a comment.

 Hi everyone, it's Allison and today I'm doing a couple of Christmas songs.

 really easy, so if you just started the violin recently you should be able to

 you've been playing for probably a year you should be okay with that.

 edition, just learn it by ear because you already know it right.

I'm gonna play it for you once up to speed and then I'll just show you the

 But if you've only been playing for a few months that's probably enough.

 it's in A major which suits really well if you're playing Suzuki violin and you

 start A string, second finger, which is the high two position if you know about

 that and if not just put your finger on your tape and hopefully it'll match.

 we do short short long short short long short short short short long and then a

 I'm just gonna do that part again because I just played through it and I

We're gonna add the verse and we're gonna do this one in D major.

 gonna start on an open A string and I'm just gonna assume that you can probably

 have tapes in your violin you're probably good just follow the tapes.

 if you don't it's first finger regular, second finger high, and third finger

And you want to stop the bow and cross the strings so you don't get mucky sounds.

 Okay, and if you're having trouble with that dotted rhythm you can always just leave the dotted rhythm out.

Okay, I am going to attempt to do a vloggy tutorial type instructional video

 series here on the big fat crochet rug that I vlogged, I think it was last summer.

 I've had a lot of interest in it and a lot of people have asked for instructions on it

 and I've done a step by step tutorial and then I had one reader say, you know, are you

And I said, you know, I should have thought of that in the first

So, I am going to try this and hopefully it works and I highly recommend the project.

 It's really easy, doesn't take a lot of money or anything and it's fun and it works up quick.

Okay, you will need to start just a pair of scissors and a sheet.

 I am going to use just a regular flat sheet here and you can use anything you want.

 rug that I did, the big one, I used blankets, I used curtains, you know, you can use whatever

The thicker the material, the more cutting you are going to have to do.

Just like when you get to the corner, it's going to be, you know, you

 are going to have to maneuver a little bit when you get to the corner to get it to turn

 actually started this once but I cut my head off so hopefully this is working.

 a few inches in, about, I don't know, three or four inches in because these are thin.

 So, just put a little cut in and this is actually the seam so I got to get a little

Okay, and the other bonus with the regular sheets, if you decide

 to use those, is that you can just rip them and it goes a lot quicker so you just don't

 want to do it while your boyfriend, significant other, roommate, whatever is trying to watch

 And I just rip it all the way to the end but when you get close to the end, slow down and

I've done it a lot of times where I'm just like, whoo, and it goes off the end

 just leave like an inch or so, it doesn't have to be a lot, that's plenty, like that

 with clothes or something, somebody asked me about using clothes too and you can do

 that but it's just going to take a lot more piecing together and we're all about quick

 And then when you get to this point, you're just going to turn it so it's this way now

 a couple inches, two to three to four, whatever is fine, just wing it.

 and then you're just going to rip it this way and then go all the way around.

 just going to keep doing that, back and forth and back and forth until you get all the way

 to the end of your sheet and, well, I guess I'm going to do this in parts, like I said,

 because I don't know how to actually load a video to my blog or like how big of one

 the rest of this is going to be pretty boring, so I'm going to do this up real quick and

 I'm starting with the flip-flop mechanism at the top of the machine.

 The floor slopes down towards either side to help the marbles roll out of it.

 This is the little mechanism that directs alternate marbles in opposite directions.

 Next I need to make that bowl that the marbles swirl around in.

 My blank was a little thicker than I needed to so here I'm cutting the bottom off of it

 Two screws through the support arm and into the bottom of the bowl

 And using those marks as a guide to where to glue the mounting block onto the flip-flop.

 Now with the glue dried I can screw that mounting block onto the little ramp that feeds it.

 Here I'm starting to make the pin board that the marble slumps over.

 Cutting a bevel is always a bit nasty but supporting it like this on the table saw sled

 Now gluing on the template that gives me all the positions for the nail holes.

 Using the template as a guide I'm putting a divot into every nail position on the table saw sled.

 Now making sure that I drill my holes to the right depth but the nails are the right height.

 I screwed the pin board to the ramp that feeds it but I'm also gonna put a block underneath it.

 Now to get the position of that just right I'm just slipping that block in there and then

 And now using that marked outline as a guide to where to glue that block

 It's really important that the marbles hit the center of one of the nails in the middle there.

 recipe, and one of my easiest, which makes it even more awesome.

There are a hundred different ways to make these recipes and that's the best

 appetizer, you can serve it to any party, you can serve it before dinner to your family.

 And dates aren't really as popular, a lot of people haven't had them before, so it's

 a great way to introduce them to your party guests, to your relatives, to your children

 maybe that are a little picky eaters, because stuffed with cream cheese and wrapped in bacon,

We're going to make about 30 today, that's a good size party appetizer.

 The two ways we're going to do it is I'm going to do a sweet and spicy stuffed date.

 going to use maple bacon and we're going to use jalapeno flavored pistachios.

 also seen in the store you could use wasabi flavored smoked almonds, those sound amazing

And wasabi is Japanese horseradish, so it's got that spicy kick to it just like the

 the dates and mix all the ingredients, but you could use softened traditional Philadelphia

And for our second way of making our stuffed dates, we are going

 which I just can't get enough of, and we're going to use, these are dried apricots.

 they're dried, but when I think of dried I think of like crunchy, like dried pineapple

 in the same area of your grocery store as where the raisins and prunes and things like

But these are super soft, super juicy and sweet, and they will be delicious

 cut these apricots in half and then just use our whipped Philadelphia cream cheese, and

 to 375 degrees, and I have a large baking pan that I've just greased.

You still want it to be very pliable so we can wrap it around our dates.

 So I've gone ahead and cooked it halfway so it's not raw, and we are going to use our

 You don't have to cut it in half, but make a slit in the center so that we can stuff

 And I'm going to split this, so I'm going to do about half of that, so two ounces in

 but if you don't want it too spicy, cut it down to one teaspoon.

 Then we're going to take one of our pistachios, our jalapeno pistachio, push it right in the

And so we're going to do all of these, just like half a spoonful of that cream cheese

 we're doing is we're taking a stuffed date and we are using our third piece of bacon,

And you put a toothpick right through the middle, so you're securing both sides

 rest of these, and then just repeat, just like we did with our sweet and spicy dates.

 We're going to wrap them with the bacon, secure with a toothpick, and then we are ready to

 to get nice and crispy, that bacon flavor, that maple bacon to go right into the dates.

 And everything is going to meld together, those flavors, that spiciness, the jalapeno

 and that horseradish with the cream cheese, or the nice sweet apricot with the cream cheese

So you're letting your flavors meld, letting the bacon get a little crispy.

 And then we're going to be ready to take them out and serve them.

 fruit and savory dates, and then we have our sweet and spicy dates.

I was very nervous because I have hypothyroid and it makes my hair very thin, brittle and I was scared that the keratin might ruin it but actually it hasn't.

So she's ready to really go for a longer look and I'm comfortable with it.

In the beginning I didn't want to add too too much hair but now we're going to do some regular extensions here and some smaller extensions up here.

 The thing is I choose the keratin in this case because her hair is fine it tends to be a little more oily.

There are other options out there but I don't think that they're going to stay.

So I think it's best that we work with the keratin and it will last the longest.

The key with this is Jessica's hair is fine so you want to keep them very light and very airy.

And as we go up what's very important to do is have very clean sections.

You can kind of see that this, in this case right here, the follicles are going off to the left.

 So now what I'm doing is I'm taking a section and I'm following the growth pattern of the hair.

 It is, in order to support this hair extension, especially on finer hair, has to be the same width across, no cross over hairs, as it is going down.

 Now what we do is we take this smaller extension that's split in half and some of the keratin is taken off.

 This creates a very custom hair extension set because you don't need the whole head to be done with these little extensions.

 Some people like it, but to me it just doesn't give you enough hair.

 And if you have someone like Jessica who doesn't have a lot of hair, it's best to use some bigger extensions, appropriate sections.

 And people talk about the temperature, the heat of the iron, whether you purge the extension bonds in with ultrasound heat or not, or just regular thermal heat.

 I'm touching this with my fingers, and I can also touch cold fusion with my fingers.

 There's some very small, little tiny extensions in her hair that are virtually undetectable.

 What I like to do, because of her thyroid problem, or he has a little fine around her world, this is her growth pattern.

 And it's great to add some volume to the hair, and especially if you have dark hair and it's a little thinner, what it does is it sort of darkens the scalp a little bit.

 And what we did is we did lots of angles so that it blends nicely.

 One chopped onion, one chopped tomato, ginger and garlic, mint leaves, three cinnamon sticks,

 five to six cloves, one teaspoon of fennel seeds, half a kg of boneless chicken, three

 First I am going to fry fennel seeds, cloves and cinnamon stick.

 And I am going to add one teaspoon of chili powder, one teaspoon of coriander powder and

 Now I am going to add mint leaves, and chili powder, coriander powder, cumin powder.

 You can try this recipe with idli, dosa or any kind of variety rice.

Now this isn't something that we want to use right now, but after a

 few days of culturing just a little more, and after adding some sugar in the form of brown

 rice syrup, this thing will really get a jump start and will start to ferment very well.

 out of it and then we're going to talk about how to manipulate that

 the cage system lesson or any of the other major scale lessons you need to go

 and take a look at those because what I'm going to give you in this lesson

 What we're going to do today, you have each of the notes in there as a scale degree.

 if we're in G, the second note up would be A. We call it the second.

 A major chord, a minor chord, an augmented chord, a diminished chord.

 The third note of the major scale and then the fifth note of the major scale.

 And then we're going to have root, third, fifth in this octave.

 That would actually be the chord shape and it actually has most of the notes that we just

 which is the third note up, G, A, B. And we have D which is the fifth.

 are between the note and the root and we also have the quality.

 In the music, in the notation that is going to accompany this lesson on my blog,

 the second note is called a major second, the third note is called a major third,

 the sixth note is a major sixth, the seventh note is a major seventh, and then we have

 say stuff like that but it doesn't make a lot of sense for what the majority of you guys

 we'll talk about in a little bit, maybe not even in this lesson.

 the third note one half-step, which would make it a minor third.

 and then we've got fifth string, fifth fret for the D or the fifth.

 And just by taking the B and lowering it one fret to make it a minor third,

 If you go back to your open chords, you can actually see, you know,

 you've got a D minor chord, or a D major chord, and then to make it minor,

 and then instead of playing the perfect fifth here on the D, we're playing a D flat,

 We have diminished, which is root, minor third, diminished fifth.

 Hi guys again and welcome to our free belly dance classes online.

 you guys want to know about belly dancing as long as I know how to do it too.

 claim to know everything but I suggest and I'll teach you guys anything I can think of

 or anything you suggest or anything that I have not thought about before.

 So today I want to show you guys a fun little combination that I think we worked a lot with

I've done it as a technique, I've done it as a combination and I've used it a lot

So I want to show it to you but we're going to do just a little Lebanese

Lebanese belly dancers tend to dance a lot with high heels and shorter

 skirts sometimes and so showing off the legs and the heels is really common.

 the little quick kicks are really common and exaggerating the shoes is really common.

 if you're doing Lebanese style or if you're wearing high heels, this might be a pretty

 so that's why you've got to make sure they're not really, really pointy high heels.

 just type three-step turn and you'll find exactly how to do it.

 to the left, go in left, right, left, toe, point the toe at the end.

Now once you feel like you've got this step here, the next thing to do after

 just a simple turn and hold the hand right here as you touch, think about it like your

 heels on, so most of the time you probably won't jump in this move.

 You can also, and I've seen people do this before, it's a little hard, you have to time

So it's just very flirtatious and you could do it lifting the skirt, pants

 and making a whatever to show off the heels or just touch the heels like that.

 of other combinations and technique videos and choreographies that I've recorded in the

So hopefully you guys enjoyed it a while and I will see you next time.

 also to like our Facebook page, it is facebook.com slash bellydancevideoblog.

 Hey guys, so I'm actually going to do this as a voiceover because when I filmed this

 Alright, I first started with the Perfect Eye Base from P2 that I got from a German

 I don't know anywhere else you can find it, but any eye base works just fine.

 This is just to help make your makeup stay and prevent the creasing.

 It's kind of like skin tone color, but a little bit brighter and it cancels out any darkness

 or veining or anything like that and just gives you a nice clean canvas to work with.

 If you're curious, on my nails is the OPI Guta Guta 2 shoes and then I took Jewelry

 So that color is Floof and I'm just taking a big thicker brush and I'm putting that

 Then I'm also going to take it up underneath my brow bone as a highlight.

 And then that is Copperplate from MAC, which has been a go-to color for a while recently.

 And I just pop that right in the crease with a Sigma blending brush.

 This is actually the same look that I had on in my Seven Deadly Sins tag video, which

 And obviously this is the same makeup that I had on in my video that I did right before

 Now I just took a clean blending brush and I'm just blending everything out and softening

 Next I'm going to be picking up Black Track Fluidline from MAC.

 I just left the whole thing in there because I really wanted you guys to see how I line

 my eyes because I get a ton of questions how to do it and requests to do a tutorial.

 I kind of just put the darkest at the ends and then fade it in as I get closer and obviously

 But the brush is great because it's, you could just, like I'm doing right there, just move

 it right back and forth and it's just such a clean line that it makes.

 You can see I'm just kind of being sloppy with it but it's still coming out perfect

 I took Copperplate again and just a little brush from Michael's Craft Store just to kind

 So this mascara is the Sephora Lash Boosting Mascara which I really like.

 I've just been kind of weeding through my sample mascaras before I crack open my new

 That's Charcoal Brown from MAC eyeshadow which I use to fill in my brows with that

 And that's Bobbi Brown's corrector that I love and I'm just using that to kind of brighten

 up inner corner and under eyes and get rid of that redness that you can see around my

 The corrector kind of just neutralizes everything just to look kind of like one tone.

 And then if you really need to go back and conceal like darkness or acne scars, you can

 I like normally like to just talk through the video but like I said my throat was bothering

 me and I didn't want to use my voice so that's why I'm being silent.

 So that's MAC Studio Fix Powder and that is my favorite Sigma brush at the moment for

 It's only available in their Face Extravaganza kit which is crazy priced.

 If they ever sell those individually, I would definitely recommend that brush.

 And I'll list all the products and brushes in the description box like I always do.

 You can obviously use any blush color you want but this has just been the one that I've

 And then I use that same big powder brush to kind of just blend it in with my foundation.

 That's why I didn't use a liquid foundation so it would give me the coverage I needed.

 This is the Modern Mercury highlighter from Estee Lauder that's discontinued.

 They actually came out with something a little bit similar so check out their new collection.

 I think it's maybe exclusive to the UK or Canada but we don't have it in the US.

 And this Smashbox Obloss I just did just for like some gloss obviously.

 I have a whole video on how I've been using that with the sprays.

 I use the Fix Plus but now since I ran out of the Fix Plus I've been using the Scandinavia.

 So I just go over everything that I did and it just really holds your makeup in place all day.

 Hey guys, it's Kasey and this is going to be a quick tip type video for hairstyles for

 lazy days or days that you just don't want to put that much effort into your hair or

 don't want to put heat on it or second or third day hair, any of that sort of stuff

 where you're just like, you know what, I'm tired with my hair and I want to do something

 You could do this on the go, so you're running out of the house, just braid it and put it

 I'm going to just take a little section in the front of my hair and it doesn't have to

 It's about an inch and a half by maybe three quarters of an inch to an inch on going back

 on your hair and you're just going to separate that into three and braid as you would normally

 except for when you get to the bottom of the braid, when you pull new hair to the bottom,

 So you're just going to braid normally and when a new piece is on the bottom, just add

 And you're just going to continue this and then once you get about an inch and a half

 down your hair, then you're just going to braid it as you would normally so that you

 have a section of your hair that will just kind of almost fall out of the braid but still

 So I'm going to braid this down and then once you get to where the kind of top of your neck

 is, you're just going to pull back your hair and pull that up into a ponytail.

 Then you're going to take your hair tie and just secure your hair.

 I have a ton of wispies and so I'm just going to kind of take those down.

 Just kind of loosen it up a little bit to make it look a little bit more messy but still

 And so as you can see, it kind of pulls out of the braid further down and it goes from

 like a really put together style to just kind of that, I just wake up gorgeous, hello flawless,

 So this is kind of the basic of the style and then you can add kind of different looks

 You can do a lot of different things to add to the ponytail just to add a little girly

 look to it and it's really easy to do and it's not that much effort but it still looks

 And so this is the final look, just a super quick and easy, simple hairstyle for lazy

 So I hope you guys like this little quick tip video and I will see you guys later.

 For this we need some red chilli, half teaspoon of cumin seeds, salt as per taste,

 Heat a pan on medium flame and roast red chilli and cumin seeds for two minutes.

 Now you can keep it in air tight container and store it for 15 to 20 days.

 Hi, this is Will Wild and in this week's lesson I'm going to be teaching you how to play a

 if you want to be able to improvise and if you want to start playing fluently and fast.

 So it's one full octave starting on G and finishing on G at the bottom.

 5, draw 4, bend it, blow 4, draw 3, bend half a step, and draw 2.

 be draw 2, bend, draw 3, blow 4, draw 4, bend, draw 4, draw 5, and blow 6.

 then you can practice going up and down the scale, getting it up to speed.

 got the scale down you can start to play around with it and sort of double back on yourself

Now you can't play the bottom two notes to complete the scale because you've

But if you want to keep going down from draw 2, you have to bend draw 2 all the

I'm going to save that for a separate video, which I'll probably do next week.

 back same time next week with another video lesson on blues harmonica player.

 But this I like because it holds up to all the cheese and stuff and the ridges, it clings

 You don't want to use something thin because it has to be strong enough to hold up on the

 So I'm prepping everything first and what I did was I melted a little bit of butter

 and then I just stuck the bread crumbs in here and mixed it up so they're all coated

 And you can use either regular bread crumbs and you both can get these at any grocery

 But what we're going to do is we're going to make a bechamel sauce first and you add

 Incorporate it and then you're going to do this for about two minutes.

 And you can either grate it yourself or you can get it at the supermarket if you don't

 And a lot of times if it's hot enough, you know, after a while when it's almost done,

 like two thirds melting, you can just shut it off and use the heat.

 And it gets all bubbly and the breadcrumbs get all crunchy in the top?

 But then I just really quickly put it under the broiler just to get it all brown.

And today we're back with professional pilot and team pilot Michael

Today Michael's going to be showing us how to do waterfalls and flat spins.

 Michael do you want to tell us a little bit more about what you're going to be teaching

Well today we're going to be discussing the waterfall which is a very simple maneuver.

 All it is really is we're going to hit a lot of down elevator, flop the airplane over,

Alright today we're going to be looking at some flat spins and a waterfall.

 throttle as you're coming in, quick, throw it over the top and then relax the elevator.

 don't let go of the throttle or too much elevator it will keep flipping and that's not an elevator.

 to go over the top, add the throttle and elevator back and make it look real pretty.

 do not have to stop at one waterfall as long as you watch the rudder and the spin you can

 Alright, the next thing we're going to try is an inverted flat spin.

 pull this maneuver off we're going to start by pushing both the sticks together and the

 throttle and after I add the throttle I'm going to flatten out the ailerons.

The quicker you get the sticks to the final position the sooner it

 rudder and add some throttle and turn it into a proper flat spin.

 we're going to do is we're going to go straight up, we're going to flip the airplane and we're

 side and eventually look we can get it dead flat and in this case even climbing.

And in this case we should be able to spin it right to the ground.

 Alright what we're going to do now is put what we've learned into a little routine.

 So we're going to take off, we're going to go straight up and the first thing we're going

 the top, but it's a pretty elegant way of entering a knife edge.

 the plane is spinning perfectly and judging by the amount of power we add we can let it

I'm adding some elevator and I'm going to harrier right down to the

 deck and we're going to fly around a little bit in our harrier configuration.

 the top and we're going to let it come right to the ground and finish our routine.

 aerobatic routine using nothing but the maneuvers we were just taught.

 a lot of comments and people have written to us asking us if we could do a segment on

 you go, that was Michael Wargo, team pilot for Precision Aerobatics, showing us today

 I'm Raymond with 3Dudes Quilting and we're very proud to have our good friend Nedra Sorenson

 with us here today to demonstrate triangles on a roll, the easy, precise way to make half

 Half square triangles are the product that we're most known for when you think of triangles

 We do have a lot of other products that are available, other shapes that you can make,

 but for this tutorial I'm going to show you about how to make half square triangles.

 You can make them from a 1 inch half square triangle clear up to a 6 inch half square

 I like, when I first get my product, I like to take this plastic off with the label and

 That way if I want to remember the instructions or anything about that triangle, all the instructions

 When I cut off the amount that I want, the next thing I like to do after I'm done cutting

 my paper is then I'll take these little inexpensive hair bands that you can get at a dollar store

 and I'll just wrap it around and put it in my drawer and then I'm ready to use them next

 For example, today I'm going to show you the 3 inch half square triangles.

 On the 3 inch roll you can get 600 half square triangles, so you have a lot to use in future

 So each roll gives you a different amount of half square triangles depending on the

 When you first unroll your roll, the instructions are on the paper, which is nice.

 And then you have tutorials like this that will give you more prompts.

 So if you don't remember everything I say, it's ok, you have a lot of references to use.

 So step 1, if you're getting ready to work with triangles on a roll, is you need to determine

 And so you count out, this is a half square triangle right here, you can kind of see it

 The width of the paper, each paper will tell you the size to cut the width of your fabric.

 The length is determined by how many half square triangles you want to use.

 I usually like to put the dark on the bottom and the light on the top.

 And then you'll take your machine, you'll lower your stitch to about a 1.5, normally

 You'll want to just take it down so those stitches are closer together.

 And also it secures that seam so when you're getting ready to tear your paper off it holds

 And then you simply follow the arrows and you stitch on the dotted line like we have

 And then you'll take your rotary cutter and ruler and you'll cut all the way around the

 When you do that, when you're done, you'll have eight half square triangles that look

 When you open them up, you can just press to the dark, trim off those little bunny ears,

 and you have a perfect half square triangle that's ready to go into your projects.

 This is going to be really fun for our customers and your customers.

 And half square triangle papers are available at 3Doot Schools in Phoenix, Arizona.

 Sorrel is one of those refreshing drinks down in the Caribbean.

 Especially around Christmas time when the flowers are in bloom.

 I wasn't able to get the fresh flowers but I did use the dried ones.

 And below you are going to see where you can leave the comments as well as give me the

 So many of you have been asking for the Sorrel recipe so I finally put it together.

 Whenever I hear the word Sorrel for the past couple of years now, I tend to break out

 in a bit of a laugh or a smile simply because there were these guys in a YouTube video singing

 I don't know if you guys remember the video but search on YouTube and you will see what

 I am going to say it is a refreshing drink now that we are getting it in a dried form.

 We will quickly go through the ingredients for making the Sorrel drink.

 In this pot here I have got 9 cups of water which I am going to bring to a boil.

 Growing up on the islands, my dad would always have the Sorrel growing in the garden between

 This recipe I am going to be showing you guys is for dried Sorrel.

 Pretty much something you can source just about anywhere in the world now at your favorite

 West Indian, Caribbean, Asian or even the typical supermarket usually carry them now

 You will find that some recipes may ask you to use more cinnamon as well as more cloves.

 But this is like the starting ground of an excellent Sorrel recipe for you guys.

 Some of you may think that it is quite a bit but trust me this is just the starting ground.

 I am saying 1 cup of sugar simply because you can always add more sugar later on in

 Again it is going to be according to your taste, how much you like your drink sweet.

 So all I am going to do is add all the ingredients that I showed you guys here into the pot.

 The reason why I am adding the sugar now to the pot is because it will dissolve faster

 in the warm water rather than if you were to allow it to cool and then add the sugar

 So I am going to add the sorrel, the ginger, cinnamon, cloves and sugar to the pot.

 You should be getting that sort of smell that scent that should be familiar to you being

 If you haven't experienced sorrel being boiled before, well here you go guys.

 I am going to put it on the corner of the stove and allow that to cool.

 Then we are going to strain it and have some with some crushed ice and stuff like that.

 So after about 4 or 5 hours, what I did was using the strainer here.

 Because remember we had all those dried sorrel in the pot as well as the cloves and the cinnamon

 If you remember we used 9 cups of water so you are getting 9 cups basically of sorrel

 We started off using 1 because this way you can adjust the sugar in your drink.

 In my case I like my drink a little bit sweeter than maybe some other people.

 If you are not going to use this right away you can put it into any sort of bottle or

 This is more popular at Christmas time down on the islands than anything else.

 Remember if you are watching this on YouTube, above me you are going to see the subscribe

 You are going to see the like button somewhere around either the bottom of me or the top

 Depending if you are watching this on YouTube or Facebook or not.

 So I wanted to do something a little bit different and people have emailed me and said that they've

 taken my not fried rice recipe and made a Spanish rice out of it.

 The thing I'm doing different today, I'm just finishing up the cauliflower now, is instead

 of just using the S blade in the food processor, I have in the shredding disc.

 I think the next time I make it I'm going to do it just like I do the not fried rice.

 Okay, so to my half a head of cauliflower we are now going to add, go ahead, half a

 I've got half a cup of defrosted corn, frozen corn that's been defrosted.

 Now when it's time for fresh corn to be in season, that's what I'll use.

 I have two green scallions which I chopped fairly finely and I diced up a tomato.

 Okay, then you better wash your hands because it's going to be spicy.

 Now, the next one is optional, but what Zoe's putting in right now is some diced up jalapeno

 I'm going to give it a toss first and then you can do some mixing.

 So, after I toss this around, we'll take a look at it and see if it needs a little bit

 I didn't want to put too much of the seasoning in to start with.

 Now, just by the color alone, I think I'm going to put in another half a tablespoon

 Well, that's the hemp oil and we already put in half a tablespoon and I'm going to try

 This week I'm watching my oil intake and I'd rather get those good fats from avocados and

 You just dropped like a half a cup of it on the floor and into my shoe.

 And next to the Mexican rice, I have made myself a salad of avocados,

 cilantro, tomatoes with a squeeze of lime and some salt and pepper.

 And if I want a little more spice, I could throw on a few more jalapenos

 I really wish I could just say, cleanup crew, come take care of this.

 This video is going to show you just how easy it is to transplant with GrowDen.

 Here I've got a tray with some lettuce, some peppers and some basil.

 When they are 1 to 2 inches below the cube, then the seedlings are ready.

 If these were my herb seedlings or greens, like my lettuce, and I wanted to grow just a small plant, then I have several options.

 I could plug the plant directly into either a floating system, where the roots are floating in the nutrient solution,

 or I could use an NFT system, which stands for nutrient film technique, because the nutrient solution continually flows over the roots.

 Or I could use an aeroponic system, where the nutrient solution is sprayed onto the root.

 This way the little plant will not detect the difference between the small plug and the block.

 In soil, it's very difficult to avoid transplant shock altogether.

 They are great for smaller plants to medium plants as they grow into maturity

 They are also a good choice if you're transplanting into a pot or into your garden.

 Or you can remove the plastic cover so that only the top is visible.

 Start with an AOK plug seedling and transplant into a wet block.

 Second, as the plant grows into the block, feed it about an EC of 1.5

 Wait for the root to come out of the bigger block, then transplant onto the slab.

 Now I've cut a single cross and watered with the EC 1.5 solution.

 Also make sure that you are cutting along the bottom of the slab.

 Next I'll flip open the flaps and place my rooted tomato plants inside the slab.

 The roots will be nice and tidy inside the slab and not exposed to the elements.

 For transplanting your seedlings, there are two more options I'd like to show you.

 Now our ebb and flow video will show you exactly how to do it step by step.

 Secondly, if you like herbs and lettuce, here's a nifty little idea.

 You can have this tray sitting in your kitchen window or on a shelf with a fluorescent T5 light above.

 How many you put in depends of course on how big the plants will get.

 Have some red lettuce, maybe a basil plant, some thyme, and then a few microgreens for a gourmet selection at your fingertips.

 Thank you for watching and I hope you have found this video to be beneficial to you.

 For additional information on this and other similar topics, please visit www.grodan101.com.

 The video that you have just watched is one of 9 topics in the Grow Smart series.

 Okay, coronoid fossa is this little dent right here where my finger is.

 Hey guys it's Chloe and welcome back to my channel for the last day of the hashtag spring series.

 So now since this is the last spring series video I thought go big or go home.

I have a recipe, some hairstyles, some outfit ideas, just spring

This last video is also a collab with my friend Amy Lauren and on her

 channel she's going to be doing a fall essentials everything fall video because it is fall right now

 go down below and click the link to subscribe to her channel because if you love my channel you

She's very girly, she's super super sweet and I'm obsessed with her channel.

 As well as this being a collab with Amy this is a serious collab with my friend Eden so be sure to

 then I took some pink ribbon and tied it into a bow around a hair tie.

 a ponytail and pulled out some of my baby hairs, loosened the ponytail to create this girly and

 My heels are from Famous Footwear and my dress is from Charlotte Russe.

And also I would say another essential is a really cute spring bag.

 those floral scented body sprays so I have Carried Away and Sweet Pea from Bath & Body Works.

 Now I'm going to show you some of my favorite spring makeup products.

 Naked Flush palette and I'm using this rosy pink blush over here.

 And I also really love the pink toned highlight from that palette as well.

 You have to start all eyeshadow looks by priming your eyes but now I'm going to be taking my Naked 3 palette

 taking my Too Faced Natural Eyes palette and using Silk Teddy all over my eyelids as well.

 And then for my Naked Basics palette I'm taking this highlight shade

 Then of course you have to curl your eyelashes but now I'm applying my Too Faced Better Than

 Sex mascara and I love this because it makes my eyelashes huge.

 And now of course you gotta add some pink lip gloss so I'm taking my NYX

 Butter Gloss and Too Faced Melted Lipstick and mixing them together.

 Last I'm going to teach you how to make this vegan Instagram worthy smoothie bowl.

 gonna need some berries, a banana, and water and you take that and put it in the blender.

 Then you just top it with toppings of your choice so I'm putting raspberries, chia seeds, bananas,

 So my alternator went out and I can tell because I put a brand new battery in.

 can see right here I'm getting a message and the message could be either your

 should see when you start your truck and you give it a little gas that needle

 started going down and down until eventually everything just quit working

 Okay so you're going to take your... you pull up and what it does is it will loosen that belt.

 going to have to do is probably use a socket to loosen that up.

So what you're going to have to do is you're going to have to be hard to hold this.

You just take that screwdriver and pop that out and then the next thing you're going to do we're just going to loosen this guy right there.

 Alright so I sprayed some WD-40 on there so I'm taking this hammer I'm just going to

 Now you'll notice that this one slid in pretty good right here.

 going to do is I'm going to take and I'm going to lightly tap this.

 Alright this is our diagram right here and so what we're going to do is we're

 alternator over to this one and then back underneath the main one and it'll

 pain in the butt and just when I thought I didn't do it right I ended up doing it

 was too close but once I realized that I wasn't too close then that fits the top

Once you get it all kind of buttoned in you just kind of pull that

 towards you and what that's going to do is it's going to allow the belt to fit.

 And this was actually the part right here that I ended up doing last.

We're going to put the battery we're going to hook the battery back up.

 Okay, so the first thing we do to make this tofu marinade is you need a

I pre-chop it, even though this blade will chop everything up pretty

I always pre-chop it just in case so you don't get any clumps in there.

 So we're gonna take our marinade, nice pungent flavors here, and I'm just gonna

 put it in a pan just so that we have a place for our tofu to land and marinade

 for the duration, which is an hour at least or up to overnight if you have the

 we're just gonna place that in the marinade, like I say, for an hour or up

But what I'll do is a half hour into this, I'll take this tofu and

 this sort of two-layered effect like an eclair almost in the marinade.

 to make sure all the flavors evenly distributed in that before you take it

And then we simply, that took maybe 15 seconds or so, another 15

 again to a hotter part of the pan so that you get that nice quick hot sear

 And one of the things you do when you're cooking pasta, I'll move this out of the

 like when you're at the beach and you go under and take in a mouthful.

 And then you just drain them quickly and rinse them with cold water at that point

Okay so now our noodles are cooked and I drained them and rinsed them

 And so we'll just put a little of this in the, we'll just pour this into the

 noodles just to give them a little base flavor so everything gets a little bit

I took some green cabbage and some red cabbage and you just get a nice

 ingredients will start to soften the shredded vegetables and give them a sort

 of a more weeping quality which I personally I like but sometimes people

 want that nice fresh crunch to play a different texture against the tofu and

 We're not looking to fatten anybody, just looking to feed them.

 big slab on top, you just put a nice cut through it from corner to corner and lay

 when they're buying new boots, they're very unsure of how to lace up their new boot.

 we thought, hey, why not make a quick video and demonstrate the two most popular lace

 long as the lace is tucked in nicely, you shouldn't have any issues.

Now when you buy your first pair of boots, nine times out of ten, that's

 it, but depending on what the boot's made out of, and you know, obviously how high the

 ankle support is, it can be quite painful, especially at the top, because you've got

 a lot of pressure on the top part of the boot because it's new, as well as pressure

Very similar, it's obviously the first lace up, so you start from obviously

 eyelet, I'm going to cross over, go straight to the top of the boot, cross over again,

 in the boot, it's going to be a lot quicker and it's going to be a lot more comfortable

That's a really nice feature, it's a really key thing to do, it's a really nice

 Hey everyone, it's SummonerGardener27 and I'm back with another video.

 And this video today is simply about eggshell uses and how you can use them.

 Now, gardening wise at least, there's many other uses for them, but one thing that they

 Calcium is needed in gardens sometimes when you grow a lot of pepper plants in the same

 So what I usually do is go up and harvest these from any breakfast area or you can just

 And what I do is just crush them up in a mason jar and just let them without the lid because

 Now what else is good for is, it's also good for preventing slugs from actually getting

 So if you have a slug infestation here's another great use for eggshells.

 Then what you're going to add, you're going to put it in there.

 I'm only using one hand so I really can't do that because I need both hands.

 And I can probably fill, it is now February, I can probably fill maybe one or two of these.

 In my zone 5 I can maybe fill up to 30 if I really use a lot of eggs.

 And it also saves you money from actually going and buying fertilizer.

 And like I said, the two major problems with these kinds of plants is that they need calcium

 I am going to scan a negative film strip using the Epson Perfection V330 Photo Scanner.

 I am going to scan this negative film strip using the full auto mode on the Epson Perfection

 If you want to see how to scan a photo using the full auto mode, click here or in the link

 If you want to see an unboxing and overview of this scanner, click here or in the link

 I have my Epson Perfection correctly installed and the Epson Scan software is correctly installed

 The Epson Perfection V330 can scan negative film strips and slides.

 If you have the Epson V33, you can only scan photos and documents.

 This is the transparency unit window where the negative film strip will be scanned.

 And wipe down the document table to remove any dust and fingerprints.

 The negative film strip will go here and you can also scan slides four at a time here.

 There's a film strip symbol here and on the back a little knob.

 If you plan to make enlargement prints, then use 600 dpi or higher.

 It's going to take a few minutes to completely scan this negative film strip.

 This is the file where I indicated where I wanted the scanned images to be saved.

 That's how to scan a negative film strip using the Epson Perfection V330 Photo Scanner.

 When you're finished with the film strip holder, you can store it here in the inside

 If you like this video, please give it a thumbs up and please subscribe to this channel.

 There's various ways you can diagnose a head problem, a head gasket.

 This is just going to be a quick one, a very short one that's easy to do.

 And if this test proves bad, then you clearly have a head gasket problem.

 That's where you use a test tube like this, you pour your little blue fluid in here, put

 it in the radiator cap, suck some of the combustion gas up here, and if it turns that fluid green,

 then you have combustion gases in the coolant and you have a head problem.

 Usually you have to get the engine hot, but it is pretty conclusive.

 We want to show you a shortcut when you think you've got a head problem and it saves a whole

 We wanted to do a compression check, so we took all four spark plugs out, used our compression

 Cylinder number four was quite a bit less than cylinder number one, two, and three.

 To do a compression check, you take your spark plug out and you have a tube like this.

 You stick it down the spark plug hole and you screw it down in.

 You put your gauge on top, you run your engine, you can see the compression.

 So to check for a head gasket problem, use the same arrangement, but you just take your

 gauge off, use your shop air connection and you hook it on here, and then you allow air

 You can see we've got the hose already screwed down into the cylinder.

 We're just going to take our air line and hook it on and it's going to put air into

 Now you take your radiator cap off and you can see we're a good two or three inches down

 Now we're going to hook the air back to that line and look at the radiator.

 There's various places a cylinder head can crack, but if it cracks in the head gasket

 area or in the head itself in the coolant passageways and you put air down this tube

 and it comes out the radiator, then basically your diagnostics are done as far as being

 You won't know anything further until you actually take the head off and have it checked.

 So this is just a very quick way and very accurate way to determine that you have a

 The air is going through the coolant passageways and getting into the coolant, so the head's

 What's up everyone, John Rettinger from TechnoBuffalo here with an unboxing for you that I am very

 This is the new Xbox 360 that was announced just a few days ago at E3.

 Bigger hard drive, new design, uses less power, quieter, and it's got wifi and a few other

 So let me go ahead and dig in and show you what this looks like.

 The pricing scheme stays the same as the outgoing Elite model at $299.

 What's inside, sleek new design, connect ready when that comes out.

 You've got now the Zoom, Facebook, Netflix, Twitter, and Last.fm.

 A bit more stuff on the box, showing some Xbox Live and people rocking out to Kinect.

 So this will be the box that's going to be sticking around for probably a while since

 And at the last Xbox Indication they packed these things tight.

 This does have WiFi built in, 802.11n, so if you've got an n router you'll be getting

 very fast internet service and pretty quick data transfer rates.

 I'll make it quick though and we'll see what else we get in the box.

 And definitely stick around to Techno Buffalo and the YouTube channel John 4 Lakers.

 I'll be doing a comparison to the console against the outgoing Xbox 360 model.

 So here is the power brick, which looks to be a little bit smaller.

 Although I will say the Xbox 360 power brick, the outgoing model, and again I'll compare

 So not huge but giant and it's got a new way to connect to the power in the back.

 So in the box we have a headset, same headset we've seen sort of in the past.

 It's got a little microphone built in and it's just a boom type headset.

 We've got a controller which is the same as all the other Xbox controllers but I believe

 Although the new button looks a little bit more chrome-y than the older ones.

 And lastly we have a very odd, it's like a serial connector if you want to connect it

 Old school of course, HDMI is the way that I'm going to be going.

 I probably enjoy this to one time going to see it without fingerprints all over it.

 You've got your two sort of recessed USB ports right there as we saw on the previous model.

 The hard drive is still removable, but it's not sort of the big proprietary-esque hard

 And there is your ethernet and three USB ports, which now are going to be taken up via one

 So even if it breaks, you'll not be getting a red ring of death.

 And as I mentioned, I'll be doing a full comparison with the outgoing model as well.

 Anyway, I'm John Rettinger from TechnoBuffalo and I'll see you in the next video.

Make a nourishing herbal infusion out of what herb are we going to use?

 we're going to put our bowl on the scale and then will you push that button that

 weight of the bowl and now you can start putting nettle in there.

 there and get start getting some nettle in there and I'll tell you when to stop

 get our herb in our bowl and we've got almost an ounce and almost an ounce and

We've got an ounce and now what are we going to do with our ounce of nettle?

 Okay, now that we've weighed out one ounce of our homegrown and cut stinging nettle, we're

 it is important to cut it up but it's it's hard to cut up and note that we

 we say stinging nettle leaf, people think that you don't use the stalk but you can

 see that we have cut up the stalk right along with the stinging nettle leaf.

 you see it's not a volume measurement because if we were to weigh out one

 ounce of this cut and sift stinging nettle, it would be a smaller volume and

 the dried stinging nettle in our jar and I'm going to do that without your help.

Yes, I'm going to back off a little bit because it's boiling water and we want to be

 will often break, what I call catastrophically, that is with boiling

 water and broken glass all over the place and that's not something that any

 hours and at that time we'll strain the nettle out, refrigerate the liquid and

 drink that stinging nettle infusion to give us energy to rebuild the adrenals,

 to rebuild the kidneys, to help prevent and reverse adult onset diabetes, to help

 keep our mood elevated, to make our brains function well and in general to

If you don't know how to make hard boiled eggs, I have a YouTube video that shows you

I prefer to use capers, but if you have your pickles on hand, you may use those

For the beak for the chick, I have cut carrots in half and I've cut them in little

 of the egg and you're going to cut it straight across so it's going to sit up straight for

 way down from the top and you're going to cut horizontally across until you can see

Then you're going to add the yolk over here into your mayonnaise.

 mayonnaise and I've also added my egg whites that I cut off the end.

 to add it to a plastic bag and we're going to pipe it back into the egg white.

 the egg yolk into a plastic bag, you just want to take the corner here of the plastic

 We're going to take the corner here and with a pair of scissors we're going to snip the

 top is a little too heavy, you can go ahead and slice off a little bit of it before adding

You can buy your lettuce shredded or you can go ahead and shred it yourself.

Now on top of this, I'm going to bring back my little chicks and arrange

 Happy Easter to all my subscribers and those of you who are watching this video.

 It is my first one, so if it sucks I really apologize, but come eat some slack.

 You're going to need a black polish, which I'm using American Apparel Hasid.

 What you're going to do first, as you can see I've already painted my nail the base

 So I'm just going to drop a little drop of the Hasid on my palette, which is just an

 And I'm going to start in the middle of the nail and make a cross shape, like a plus sign

 I like to start in the center of my nails, because otherwise I end up with a design that's

 And as you can see, the nail polish is starting to get a little stringy and goopy.

 Nail polish dries within like 20 seconds of being out of the bottle.

 Alright, next we're going to use colored polishes to make the centers.

 I'm using Pure Ice Wild Thing, because it's a killer lime green that is only two bucks,

 I'm not big on pinks, but this one's kind of red because it's like super magenta-y awesomeness.

 Zoya Yummy, because it's awesome, and Zoya is one of my favorite polish brands.

 And if you want to use more colors, feel free, but I think that the less colors, the better.

 So I'm just going to take my dotting tool and just pick where to place the colors randomly.

 And don't worry if you get a little bit on your cuticles, you can always clean it up

 afterwards, that's what I always do, because I'm really messy, actually.

 And then the last color is Wild Thing, because it makes my heart sing.

 All you have to do is put a coat of Sesh Feed on top, and then once that dries, clean up

 the cuticles and put on some cuticle oil and you are ready to rock.

 Hello YouTube, if you haven't already figured it out I'm going to be teaching you how to

 And if you haven't seen my performance of it, go check it out right here and then I'll

 You're going to need a regular deck of playing cards, but remove some cards from it.

 Okay, and they're going to be in black red order, I'll get back to that in a second because

 I usually find spades works best, but choose one of the four suits and remove the two,

 So I've got spades here for the example, but you can really use any one you like.

 And set them up two on top of three on top of four so that when they go on top of the

 That's important because then they'll come out of the right order in the end.

 Now aces wise, as I said, it's a little more complicated than just black red.

 And then obviously, if that's the, if I've got spades as my third, then the clubs is

 going to be on top and either hearts or diamonds will be there.

 They could switch around if I wanted them to, but yeah, okay, we'll just go with that.

 Okay, black red, like if you chose diamonds for whatever reason, then you'd have the diamonds

 So you start off by saying that you have the four aces and here's the first move.

 Easy to remember because you've got four cards over here and a four card break over here.

 So be careful not to do five or three because the trick won't work and you'd be a bit disappointed.

 Now you square up the aces, okay, and grab with your thumb, lift up all those.

 Now this is a little bit of a tricky bit that you want to sort of disguise pretty well.

 Probably the one thing you can do really here is you need to get a break as well.

 You need to get a break on top of the bottom of those eight cards.

 Hold onto the deck and it's going to be in your other hand and this hand will have these

 Then you peel off the top ace and square it onto the bottom like so.

 The second ace, this is where the move comes in where you ditch a couple of aces.

 You pop it on the bottom half out jogged like, or half side jogged like that.

 When you square it up against your thumb you drop what you're holding.

 So you've now just ditched the card that you had the break above as well as those two aces.

 Probably go over that again a bit later because it might need to be done.

 And then with the ace of spades you just do the same move but don't drop it.

 So now all you have left is your last ace which you say you're going to leave on top.

 Three face down, two three four and the ace that you're, you know you're up to the right

 stage at this point if the ace, if the suit that you chose, it's ace is on the bottom.

 So first step you want to do an Elmsley count to show that, so any presentation is fine,

 I'm not going to go into the Elmsley count just find a tutorial, there's good ones out

 Second ace is a bit different so first ace you need an Elmsley count, you're just going

 First ace Elmsley count, the second ace you peel off, peel off, peel off and you hold

 Now to get the third ace to turn what you want, you want your suit to be the only one

 So you move these two cards, so these two cards that you're holding here you've just

 got to move them to the bottom and square the deck up on top of it so it looks like

 You can Elmsley count and hide the ace of diamonds, so your ace left.

 Okay then when you do the final Elmsley count, all the aces have turned over.

 Now you only want to, you want to do that thumbing off move once more holding the two

 cards here, that's your ace and the other ace so it's got that behind it.

 Do a little bit of a bend so that the aces stay together when you drop them and then

 what I usually say and what most people say is you know, now some people think I'm using

 I've got one, two, three, four and you're just revealing, maybe square them up.

 What I did was I just flipped them off like this and then on the last ace you just kind

 I'm going to go over that just once more because it's a bit difficult to catch it first.

 So there's your aces in that order, remember to have your suit in the middle, two, three,

 So get the break under four cards, the top four, square up and steal all four cards but

 Just pass it by, don't look too guilty while you're riffling one.

 Ace of clubs goes under it, I'll assume you're doing the same order as me.

 Then it's a simple matter of ace of spades goes to the bottom, elms leaf for the first

 ace, thumb count for the second, put that to the bottom, two more elms leaf counts,

 So I hope you pretty much got that, I hope you liked that tutorial.

 If you have any questions just put them in the comments or send us an inbox.

 Remember to comment, like and subscribe and I'll see you next time.

 Now that you have a completed slide glove, we're going to show you how to reinforce the

 You'll need scissors and wire, scissors to cut the wire, a bag of rice, Plasti Dip, and

 Now our buddy from South By Slide Pucks explained to us that using rice will make the fingers

 So what you want to do is you want to take rice and pack it as much in there as you can.

 Basically, you want to take some wire, it doesn't matter how long, it doesn't have to

 be wire, it can be shoestring or it can be clothes hanger, whatever.

 Now, take your Plasti Dip, make sure you read the instructions.

 This also creates a good bond between the glove and allows for grabbing to be a little

 bit more precise whenever you need to grab rail for whatever reason.

 And you're going to want to do about two layers to make it extra, you know, dirty.

 And that completes our tutorial on how to reinforce your slide gloves.

 Now, if you have any questions, you can always locate us on the internet.

 In the first working phase the worker takes the single pieces from the box.

 After the first batch the worker takes the pieces again from the table and

 polishing, cleaning and packaging process has to be carried out carefully to avoid

 In the last phase pieces are carefully taken and packed one at a time to be

 has to take and reposition the same piece over and over again on the bench.

 The worker took six hours and 28 seconds for the entire working cycle.

 In this phase the worker does the whole working cycle on each single piece without interruptions.

 In this way the working process is eliminated going from a productive flow

 In this way unnecessary weightings and movements are eliminated.

 The saving doesn't affect the production quality but simply by eliminating waste

 layout the worker takes only five minutes and 28 seconds to polish, clean

 In this video I want to show you how to manually unlock the liftgate or hatch on your Trailblazer

 As you can see here I'm going to be doing it on a Trailblazer SS.

 So you come out and you hit the unlock on the remote and you hear unlock in the back

 of the truck but when you pull the handles you get nothing or when you push the button

 Now I'm going to be doing this on a Trailblazer SS and it has the airbags in the back.

 I did have to let the airbags fill up before I got started on this.

 Alright so now inside the vehicle looking back at the hatch you should notice that towards

 the bottom in the center there's actually a little plug and you can go ahead and pop

 that out with a flat head screwdriver and this is actually a service hole that's going

 to give us access to the levers that we need to manually unlock the liftgate.

 You want to stick your screwdriver to the right of that red bushing and underneath the

 lever and we're going to lift up and it should go up and it should stay in click.

 Now you shouldn't have to use too much force but it should go up and stay up.

 And then after that's done you want to go to this lever right here, stick your screwdriver

 in there and move it off to the right and you should feel another click.

 So again you're going to go off to the left and lift that lever straight up and it should

 go up and stay up and then after that you're going to go straight in and move that lever

 And like I said on the Trailblazer SS it has the airbags in the back and mine was sitting

 for a few days so I guess it was sitting uneven and I actually had to let the airbags fill

 up before it would let the lever on the left go all the way up.

 Alright so now that we've manually unlocked it let's go ahead and try it out.

 So you see the glass opens up with no issues and now let's go ahead and try the liftgate.

 Now you'll notice that there's a little bit of corrosion up underneath there on the lock

 Those are probably the reason why it got stuck in the first place so I would clean them up

 But usually once you unlock it manually it does work correctly after that the way it's

 We have 3.01 centimeters of our magnesium ribbon and we have 15 centimeters of our string.

 We did room temp of water which we got to be 22.8 degrees Celsius and 295.8 Kelvin.

 We are now slowly pouring about 10 milliliters of 3 molar hydrochloric acid into our gas tube.

 We have the tube inclined slightly so that the air will escape from it and we're slowly pouring in water to mix the acid in the water.

 The tube is now completely full of water and we are going to insert the magnesium ribbon about 3 or 4 centimeters into the tube.

 The stopper we inserted forced water and all the air bubbles out of the tube and it held the string in place.

 With only Esa's finger over the hole in the stopper we're going to invert the stopped end of the tube in the beaker of water

 and we're going to clamp the tube in place so that the rubber stopper is slightly above the bottom of the beaker.

 The hydrochloric acid is now moving down to the bottom of the odometer near the magnesium ribbon and bubbles are forming around the ribbon

 which means that the chlorine and the magnesium is reacting with each other.

 This is the hydrogen from the hydrochloric acid going to the top and being released as air bubbles.

 As the volume of hydrogen increases the water is pushed through the stopper at the bottom of the gas tube into the beaker.

 We're tapping the tube to dislodge the bubbles from the side to make our results more accurate.

 Anna East is going to place her finger over the hole in the stopper and remove the tube from the beaker.

 She's then going to lower the tube into the larger container of water and remove her finger.

 We're raising the water in the beaker to match the level of the gas tube.

My name is Teresa and this is yum-yum and this is lollipop of chi yum-yum on Facebook

 We're here today because we've had many requests for our recipe for our

 raw food diet that we feed them and so I'm here to show you all the ingredients and

 Explain to you how to make it and also why we feed them like this

 Nor do I claim to be and I'm not suggesting that anyone have to feed their dogs what I do

 It's just that you've asked for the recipe and I'm here to help share that with you

 It's through many years of experience and I owe all the credit of what I know to my sister Maria

 Through 25 years of experience with animal rescue and hospice care

 All the research during those years have come to find that there are so many ingredients in store-bought dog foods that are very harmful

 To our pets and that can all be researched online if you care to do that

 but it's through all those years of experience that we're able to

 Raw meat diet you have your choice of raw beef chicken even venison is fine here.

 Actually, I make a batch big enough so that I can store it in little containers like this in the freezer

 in this bowl is approximately three pounds of chopped meat raw and

 Broccoli and I actually think there's little peas and carrots in here, too

 We put it in the food processor grind it down till it's really just all

 All the rest of the ingredients which is fruits I choose for fruits

 You can change the fruits up each time you make it in this case.

 Remember pure pumpkin not pumpkin pie fillings gotta say pure pumpkin

 Coffee grinder grind it down and I'll probably use about 3 quarters of a cup in this amount of a mixture

They have to have their calcium best source of calcium to give them eggshells

 Put them in the food in the coffee grinder and so you have a very powdery

 So what you'll do is you'll take your top meat you'll take your vegetable mixture

 your sweet potato and your flax seed put it all in the food processor until it's

 Your vegetable mixture mix it mix it mix it mix it till it's thoroughly mixed then you'll take your containers

 And whatever size, you know, it's good for you to store in your freezer pack it in there

 Then when you just take them out of the freezer as needed take it out.

 Judging how much to feed them it's going to be different than store-bought dog food because store-bought dog food is full of fillers

 You're gonna find yourself having to feed them much less of this

 Until you get the right amount for your dog every dog size and weight is different for my dogs.

 So I feed them three to four times a day, but very small meals this for instance is about two tablespoons

 So in the single portion I add the eggshell the vitamin supplements and the coconut oil

 You have to you have to decide what weight of your dog is going to be good for you

 Like I said, mine are very tiny so they'll get this once or twice a day and the other

 So that's going to be trial and error for you everything at least, you know, what is in your dog food what they're eating very healthy

It doesn't take all that much time and if you make a big batch and store it like I do

 That's maybe you know, once every three or four weeks you have to make it of course again, depending on your size of dog

 So if you want a healthy diet for your dog be healthy happy to uh, give it a try share it with your friends

 And i'm happy to be able to share this with you and good luck trying if you have any questions you can um

 Hey guys, Andy McDermott here with another how-to fitness video.

 It's summertime, if you're anything like me and the family, we spend a lot of time in the pool.

 Here's an idea that you can try, a little bit of a circuit in your swimming pool.

 If it's in the backyard or the gym, this should take you 10-15 minutes.

 I'm going to swim a length, do a movement, swim a length, do another one, so it'll be 4 total in this circuit.

 And I'm actually going to do the first round with you, or demo, and I'll talk you through it.

 Do an upper body exercise, just going to do a pushup with the knee to the outside.

 Now we're going to do another core exercise here, so I'll just do some rowers.

I don't want you to do lunges because the pool deck is slippery.

 If you are a good swimmer, you might have to do two lengths or laps or whatever.

 Howdy folks hows it going welcome to my virgin kitchen it is Barry here now todays recipe

 it is naughty I am not going to lie it is a 5 story high pizza cake yes you heard me

 right a pizza cake so basically today I was planning on doing an apple and blackberry

 pie but in the last week I got absolutely bombarded by you guys of either making a skillet

 cookie or the pizza cake so I put it out onto my poll on my website and the pizza cake won

 by the complete landslide and you know what after making it and tasting it it is actually

 really really good so the recipe I found was not actually my own I will put the link in

 the ingredients right here so hit pause now write down the ingredients and yeah it is

 actually really easy to make some might say it is a pizza cake this is how I did it.

 Start off by getting one of those cake tins with a loose bottom and with your ready made

 pizza dough cut out circular shapes in fact this was the tin I actually used so you want

 to cut that shape out in your pizza dough whack it on a baking tray and bake it for

 around 8 minutes just to firm up do not get it to golden brown or crispy anything like

 that because you do not really want it crispy you want it nice and soft through there oh

 yeah baby so do that to all your bases that is probably the bit out of everything that

 takes the most time with this recipe get about 5 bases there and then you are ready to build

 Then it was just a case of lining the inside of our cake tin with some baking parchment

 and then lining that again with some pizza dough just to form the outside I am doing

 lots of hand motions kind of like an air hostess here here and here or swimming that

 is completely optional hand action is unnecessary but that will form the outside of our pizza

 cake so get your springform base in the bottom of there put your first base down tomato sauce

 mozzarella on top peppers pepperoni but that is of course what I did just keep building

 those layers up until you get to the top but you can put on whatever you want you can do

 a BBQ chicken pizza like a pulled pork duck thing whatever you want to do in fact let

 me know down below exactly what you would do with it all there you want to shove it

 in the oven for a good 25 minutes now for me it did not really burn on the top but if

 it does you can put foil around the crust apparently that is what the instructions said

 so do that if it starts to catch keep your eye on it and after 25 minutes you take it

 And when I first got it out of the outside casing so it was still sat on the base it

 kind of turned into a DJ turntable I am a pizza DJ look work it work it work it ok let

 it cool down a bit pretty cool right so with it slightly cooled down but still warm so

 you want that nice warm pizza vibe freshly baked cut a wedge out of it and you will get

 that amazing 5 layer look on that pizza and it tastes so so good you know what guys it

 is actually super super good cut really thin slices it could be amazing for a birthday

 party so maybe give that a go for that if you do have a go send me a picture at myvirginkitchen

 I really like the whole idea of jumping onto this sort of trend thing as well so if you

 see anything cool that is out there like I want to see Barry try it to see if the

 average Joe or the average Barry can do it let me know and we will jump on it straight

 away so if you enjoyed this video do not forget to give it a thumbs up share subscribe and

 comment all that stuff let me know down below what you want to see next and cheers for all

 the love and helping this channel grow do not know what it is it is really emotional

 take it, use with fufu, plantain fufu, cocoyam fufu, with banku, which is corn dough.

 can even eat it with what we call peste, which is either cooked yam or cooked plantain,

You can eat it with any dish, any variety, and it's very nutritious.

So if you are allergic to nuts, please do not venture to eat that.

 Start by skinning and cleaning your chicken for a healthier option.

 And I'm going to marinate it with ginger, stem ginger, which I have peeled over here.

 Because I'm always very skeptical to make sure that the salt is in.

 This is the first time I'm actually seeing chicken and raw chicken cooked together with

 And in the middle of boiling it, I'll leave this for about 10 minutes, then I add the peanut butter to it.

 So we leave this one to cook for about 45 minutes until the chicken is tender.

 In this segment we will show you how to assemble a linear diffuser boot.

 need a Blue Duct universal linear diffuser adapter, a linear diffuser, as

 optional cable operated damper and this will allow you to easily adjust the air

 caulk gun with the Blue Duct sealant, a drill with a 5 16th inch drive and an

 adjustable clutch set for 30 inch pounds, a circular saw with guide or sawzall

 with a coarse blade, 5 16th inch screws, safety glasses and a utility knife.

 sure to review the CAD drawing for your project to ensure proper system layout

 engineers drawing as a recommendation of the materials needed to complete our

Please consult with the engineer and other trade professionals before

 Mark the sides of the diffuser adapter on the linear diffuser on the side with

 Use a straight edge to draw the inside dimension using a black marker.

 If there is an excessive amount of tailings on any of the ducts or fittings

 Flip the linear diffuser adapter over so that the lip rests on the linear diffuser.

 Now using the template holes as a guide, screw down the adapter.

 bead of the Blue Duct sealant around the lip, then smooth with a rag or your

Next, apply the Blue Duct sealant liberally to the heads of the screws.

 Set the assembly in the trench and determine where the lateral run is going

 duct meets the plenum adapter box on the linear diffuser adapter.

 ground with the inside and outside dimension of the plenum adapter marked

 a time-saver, keep the cut out portion for a template for other connections of

 It may help to mark the diameter of this template with a black marker.

 an excessive amount of tailings on any of the ducts or fittings that have been

 Blue Duct sealant to the linear diffuser adapter face and also to the flange of

 If not, apply an additional bead around the plenum adapter flange.

 Next, liberally apply the Blue Duct sealant to the top of the screw head to

 ensure a proper air seal and smooth it with a rag or your finger.

 It is important to only use the Blue Duct sealant provided by AQC Industries.

 backfill, the minimum burial depth of the Blue Duct is two inches below the

 with a minimum of a three-quarter inch bridge to protect it from any traffic.

 Duct does not require drain tile, pea gravel, or concrete encasement.

 The Blue Duct clamp product labels also feature a QR code that brings you to our

 AQC Industries requires all installing contractors to be properly trained and

In addition to online training, we offer two free training webinars each

 video 2 of the Lighting My Video lessons will cover this part in this video

 last video ended here, pinky moves up to the first string 12th fret

 And then you get a B coloured band, and put it onto the side like that.

 And then you get another B coloured band and put it on facing the other side.

 And then you get one from the middle to the side, so it should be going clockwise.

 And then you make a capping band, so you get it and then you twist it,

 and then you put it on one finger so it looks like you've got two mini bands.

 and then you pull it onto here, so it should look like a teardrop, like that.

 you should just have to pull it more, and it will become a teardrop.

 and then you push back, and then you grab the second bottom band,

 just pull them from underneath, and put them back onto that hook.

 I am going to show you how to make an easy wheat-free, gluten-free cracker that only

 We are going to start with chia seeds, which are one of my favorite foods.

 In Asian medicine, foods that are black in color are a tonic for the kidneys and adrenal

 So, I've soaked about two-thirds of a cup of chia seeds in about a cup and a third of

 Now, I'm going to add another super black food, about two-thirds of a cup of black sesame

 Also, to make these black sesame seeds more digestible, I have soaked them in spring water

 So, we're going to mix these two ingredients together, adding enough water so we get a

 High in protein, one of the best vegetarian sources of protein, next to soybeans, but

 And then we are going to add just a pinch, maybe one-fourth teaspoon of Celtic sea salt.

 So, rather than baking these crackers, if you don't yet have a food dehydrator, a food

 dehydrator is a wonderful way of making food that still has the enzymes intact.

 So, with a food dehydrator, you use time and you do dehydrate the water out.

 A lot of people ask if they could use their oven, but an oven doesn't really have a fan

 So with a dehydrator, you have these wonderful trays, and this is a sheet, a Teflex sheet,

 and that's going to keep the cracker batter from running down through the little cracks.

 So now, we are simply going to spread our mixture onto this Teflex sheet, and we'll

 dehydrate it until the water is halfway removed, then we'll turn it over, remove the Teflex

 Think about this, if I were to plant a raw sunflower seed, it would grow into a 10 foot

 There is my food dehydrator, and I like to dehydrate things at right under 110 degrees.

 The chia crackers are halfway dry, so I'm going to put them onto a tray that does not

 Put it back in the dehydrator just to finish drying for a few more hours.

 When the crackers are totally dry, an easy way to cut them is with some kitchen scissors.

 And now you have a high protein, gluten free, vegan, yeast free, easy to digest cracker.

 They are so vibrant and alive that if you planted this in the garden, the sesame seeds

 This is one of my favorite barbecue categories and there's several ways that you can go about

 What we're going to cook today is what's called the Boston butt.

 This is the top side end of the pork shoulder and it comes with the bone in.

 We normally get them in a cryovac bag from the store so we usually get two of them at

 What we like to do is just to trim a little bit of the fat off, not a lot, but we'll just

 Once we remove that, we want to come over here on the back side and remove a little

 Sometimes right in this area you'll find this gland and if you have the gland in there we

 You can come in here in this area and trim a little of the fat out of this also.

 This helps us to get some of the fat out of the product before we start to cook it.

 Once we remove the excess fat we're now going to inject the pork butts with Butcher's pork

 You can mix this up just as per his instructions with water if you like or lots of times I'll

 Once we get the injection mixed up, we're going to simply inject it into.

 When you inject meat, what you want to do is push the injection needle in and then as

 you're injecting the solution into it, you want to pull the injection needle out as you're

 I like to go at about every inch and just make a pattern in the pork butt.

 And pork will really take a lot of injection and so you can really pump the product up

 It really helps it stay moist as you're cooking and also really adds a tremendous amount of

 Butcher's pork injection has a lot of just pork flavoring in it and so when you get through,

 what you'll have is a pork butt that really has a strong pork flavor to it.

 On pork butts, I like to inject both sides since it's such a bulky piece of meat.

 Like I said, I like to take a pattern of about one inch each, just inject a little bit of

 As you inject it in there, you'll actually see the product swell up as it takes the injection

 We're going to season our pork butts then with Cook Shack's Rib Rub.

 This is a great seasoning for pulled pork because it'll help the sugar in and it'll

 help make a really nice bark on the outside of the pork as it cooks.

 And with pork shoulders, you want to make sure that you get all the sides.

 Once we get them all seasoned, then we're going to put them into the smoker.

 We're going to cook them at 250 degrees for 14 hours and we're going to use two ounces

 Once they get through cooking overnight, then we'll pull them in the morning and have pulled

 14 hours at 250 got us to an internal temperature of 200 degrees, which is what we wanted to

 You can always tell if pulled pork is done by whether or not the bones will pull out

 You can see here that we can just pull right off our bones and they come right out clean.

 You can see that we've got a lot of nice moisture, some good bark on the outside that will give

 You can see that those two about 8 pound butts made a whole sheet pan full of pulled pork.

 For more information about Cook Shack, give us a call at 1-800-423-0698 or visit us on

 So, what I'm going to do is take a mason jar and I'm going to just pour the juice in.

 And I'm probably going to drink it all right now, but if you're going to save some for later,

 I want to show you how to fix the bell sensitivity issue of the Roland CY-15 Ride Cymbal.

 You notice that you are mainly hearing the bow and the edge sound of the cymbal.

 The problem won't be solved by changing the sensitivity setting on the drum module.

 Make sure most of the sticky tape either stays on the rubber or on the white plastic.

 Attach some tape on it and make sure to not overlap the layers.

 Use a circular or anything round kind of form, which has the outside measures of the sensor

 You can try out different kinds of tape or more than one layer.

 We use this layer tape to reduce the distance between rubber and trigger.

 Make sure you start with the pin holes when you assemble the pad.

 The holes of the white plastic and the rubber have to match perfectly, because you cannot

 Don't use a screwdriver for inserting the rubber into the notch.

 You can try out different kinds or more layers of sticky tape, until you get the result you're

 or window cleaner, or yeah, or Windex if you can use, and some tissue paper, toilet paper,

Okay, you don't need your microfiber cloth, but I just take a cloth.

 First you take one tissue paper and put your iPod Touch onto it, okay.

 now you wanna take one more tissue paper and just fold it four times, and fold it half

 smaller, and put some water, no, don't put water first, first you wanna wipe the stains

 wet, let it dry, until the color does not have, or you can just use your microfiber

 your microfiber cloth or any cloth you have, try to wipe it really good until no stains

 part where you wanna use the same tissue, dip it a little bit more and squeeze it.

Okay, try if you have a iPod Touch 4G, try to cover, try to just wipe

 a little bit, just try to dip it onto the camera, do not touch the microphone.

 Today we're going to spend some time learning the overhead squat.

 This is a tool that we use a lot that a lot of people are really intimidated by and there's

 What we're going to do today is we're going to take you guys step by step through a progression

 that we use that has helped a lot of people start to feel the correct position, mainly

 That's really what the kind of important thing to focus on when you're overhead squatting.

 You have weight overhead so how do you hold this weight in a strong supported position?

 What we're going to talk about is how to externally rotate our arm but mainly how to externally

 So for the overhead squat you're going to want to grab a PVC pipe, find a what we call

 I'm going to have you push the PVC out in front of you and like you're trying to bend

 If you can see what's happening as I twist the inside of my elbows start to face up.

 Once you find that position you'll notice that your shoulders are a little bit more

 Now we're going to lift the pipe overhead and try to maintain this position.

 What we're trying to avoid is this kind of misconception that you have to be active and

 You notice when I do that I internally rotate the arm and now the inside of my elbow is

 pointing forward and my shoulders are up and this is much harder to control weight.

 If someone is standing in front of you they should be able to see the inside of your armpits

 So what we're going to do is we're going to take a medicine ball, anything that works

 for you to sit on comfortably and we're going to find the bottom position of our squat.

 Depending on how good your squat mobility is right now you might need to find something

 a little bit higher, something where you can maintain a neutral spine.

 So we're going to take our knees out, chest up, make sure your heels are tight to your butt.

 Once you're sure that that's your squat position take the PVC pipe and run through that same

 Now this is going to be the bottom of your overhead squat so the reason this is kind

 of a cool way to try this is you can actually feel what it's like to be in the bottom position

 You'll notice that from the side that pipe should be over my head, shoulders, hips and

 Now on our way to standing we're going to drive some weight into our heels and you're

 going to try to lean forward as minimally as possible and stand up.

 Don't bother squatting down just yet, sit down again, reset, try again.

 I want you to do this a few times and at the top what I want you to do is check your arm

 If it's not there's a good chance that you are driving your chest forward, losing that

 Or the other way that we see people kind of get around doing this well is they will lean

 Try this a few times, really be hard on yourself about cranking into that bar, making sure

 your arms are in that good position and once you think that you're doing it well enough

 then you can try starting from the bottom, standing and squatting again.

 Bottom position, set, stand up, check the arms, push your hips back, keep your chest

 If at some point you notice you've lost position now you can start to figure out where things

 Real quick, the main thing that really holds people back for their overhead squat isn't

 Once you find that position it's pretty easy to start to maintain.

 Issues that you can get away with when you're doing this unloaded or even with a back squat.

 What will happen if I'm not able to get my shins forward, watch what happens when I push

 Now if you imagine I have a bar overhead, so if you've ever tried overhead squatting

 and you notice you're driving your chest forward and that bar is really unstable, this is probably

 your issue and this is why we suggest trying this bottom up approach.

 Hey ladies and gentlemen, welcome to the iPhone 5 home button repair and replacement guide.

 The iPhone 5 is probably the easiest iPhone yet to repair and the great thing is it still

 First thing you want to do is remove the two screws on the bottom of the iPhone 5.

 And strangely enough the iPhone 5 is similar to the 3G and 3GS.

 You guys will see that in just a second here and I will be using a suction cup to essentially

 Now you want to place that suction cup towards the bottom of the screen right above the

 home button and you want to pry it in the same direction I am prying the screen right

 Don't pull the screen completely off because there are still three cables held in that

 These three cables are held under a little bracket and you will need to remove this bracket

 before disconnecting these three cables with a nylon spudger or pry tool.

 And here's that little bracket right there as you can see there's three screws holding

 Please note if you're not using a screw mat or anything like that to properly sort these

 All the screws from here on out are going to be phillips screws.

 It's really simple so go ahead and remove these three screws right here.

 And once those three are off you can go ahead and remove this little silver bracket from

 With the bracket removed it will now reveal the three flex cables that hold your touchscreen

 You want to just go ahead and use a nylon spudger or a pry tool.

 I don't really ever recommend using metal on side these phones but I use the nylon spudger

 You just want to disconnect the three cables using this pry tool.

 With those three cables removed you have now separated your touchscreen glass digitizer

 The home button repair on the iPhone 5 is significantly easier than the 4 and 4s due

 As you can see I'm just removing these two screws holding this tiny bracket in place.

 This bracket holds a little bit of adhesive which attaches to that flex cable.

 Usually if your iPhone 5 home button is not working it's this flex cable that you want

 So pretty much you're going to just remove this flex cable and then essentially once

 the flex cable is off with that bracket you can just swap that bracket out and put your

 It's just stuck there with a little bit of adhesive so you can essentially just pry that

 flex cable or pull it off of that little bracket without any real damage to the bracket because

 Remove your home button from the inside of the screen and that's it.

 Guys need to buy these parts visit us at www.androidgadgets.com

 This is the piece of equipment I was talking about in the last video that I want to say

 thanks to all my viewers and subscribers for helping me pick this item up.

 This was purchased through some AdSense revenue and what this is is a little portable grill

 It's called the Optimus Hiker Plus Stove and it runs off of liquid gases.

 The fuel that this thing uses is white gas, gasoline, kerosene, diesel, jet fuel and others.

 Boil time as little as 3.5 minutes depending on climate and altitude.

 This thing is a really slick little device from the reviews that I've seen.

 The main reason why we wanted to get this is because with the Coleman two burner stove

 We can get a quick boil, we can take it all the way down to simmer, really low and everything

 Tonight I'm going to show you how this thing operates, how you get it going and just show

 They're having a big hair band street dance type of thing going on down there.

 First, we clean the nozzle and the burner by rubbing it through back and forth like

 There's a magnet down on this end down here that moves side to side and cleans out the

 It recommends that you clear the nozzle and the burner before you use it every time.

 And I poured a little bit of fuel in here, so I'll get this knob attached.

 I'm going to give this thing a pump probably about 20-25 times.

 Alright, I've pumped it about 35 times because I'm not sure how much fuel is in there.

 Next step is I'm going to release a little bit of fuel by turning the knob a little bit.

 It's going to drip down here and go onto this cotton wick down here.

 And then the next step is to light it up and then we'll let it kind of burn down until

 And you need to pre-light it so you can get the wick going so when you open up the valve

 I'll move it around this way, hopefully you guys can still see.

 This is only my second time doing this so hopefully we'll get this lit here.

 It'll get kind of big here and then after it starts petering out again, then I'm going

 Alright, I'm not sure if you guys can see that down there, but can you hear the sound?

 Pretty easy, it looks pretty good so we're going to give it a try and we'll show you

 Alright, I am going to be showing you guys how I'm going to be building my canopy for

 It's actually an oceanic stand and canopy and it's plastic with some kind of stainless

 steel look in front on it which looks really nice but the problem is to get into the fish

 tank since it's so tall and then you add this on top of it, there's no doors.

 You either have to take this off or climb up a huge ladder and that's no fun.

 So what I'm going to be doing is building my own with doors and stuff in the front and

 I just kind of want to give you guys a walk through of what I do here.

 So first thing I did is went and got some supplies and I'm sure I'm going to be needing

 some more as I think of different things to do and how to do them.

 So first thing I did was though, after that I traced, put that upside down and traced

 So the outer line is the actual outside diameter of that and it comes all the way across.

 Then what I did is I measured in an inch and a half and this is going to be my frame that

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to have two of these and there's a second one right

 Anyways, so basically I think I left off around talking about drawing the lines and I had

 I'm going to do two stacks and then I'm going to put some of this stuff over here.

 So this will be one piece and this will probably go on the bottom and it will actually sit

 Then the other piece will go up I think about 10 inches or 12 inches and the light fixture

 That way whenever I put some doors on the front of it I'll be able to get into the tank

 and not have to worry about messing with the lights and stuff because right now it's kind

 I have to take the lights off and then I have to take the canopy off.

 So the only thing I haven't figured out is since it's curved in the front the doors will

 I can make those but I just don't know how to do the hinges because if I put one on this

 side and one over here I have to keep them perpendicular to this line which means they're

 going to spread out and I don't know how well that's going to work.

 Maybe I can sand one of the edges down on the inside to make them fold parallel to each

 But anyways the first one went good so I'm going to probably cut the other one out here

 It looks like it might rain but get that done and then start building the little pieces

 Yeah I'm going to use this 1x3 and just put…let's see I've actually got this all drawn out.

 So yeah there's the piece that I cut and then here is like from the back and my measurements

 are actually off because when I measured it from end to end I put 6.5 and I thought that

 meant 6 feet 6 inches but it actually meant 6 feet 1 half inch so I've got to go back

 But anyways so these little guys right here I'm going to have to add one of those 1x3s

 and they'll kind of go…I'll probably put one in this corner here basically wherever

 So the whole thing will be I think 18 inches tall and so I'll have three doors on the

 Once I get the front actually built it will be a lot easier to see how big the doors will

 look because I'm going to draw it on there with a pencil and make sure everything looks

 good and then I'll actually use that, the piece that I cut out right here.

 So if this is where it says hole, if that's what I cut out I'll actually use that piece

 as the filler and then I'll put some trim around the outside of it just to hide the

 gap and then put me some hinges and a handle and we'll see how it goes.

 Again I still have that little hinge issue that I've got to figure out but I'm sure

 So maybe the curve is not big enough that it will matter if I put one at one end or

 And then the ones that I found at Lowe's today actually are kind of springy so I hope

 that I don't have to use some kind of a gas strut on there but I mean if I do no big

 Here it is, it was like six bucks so we'll see if it can hold the doors up.

 No big deal because I want it whenever you open it up it's just going to pop up and then

 That way you don't have to prop it up with something and if you accidentally knock it

 off it's going to slam and hit you in the fingers or hit you in the head or something

 I'm going to do a little more cutting and figure out what the next step is after that

 I got both of the frame pieces cut for the canopy and so you know human nature, nothing's

 So you can kind of see, well maybe you can't, but one's just a little bit taller than the

 So what I did was I clamped them together flush on the back side.

 What I'm going to do is take my DA sander and go all the way on here, all the way down

 Which will, you know, whenever I put the thin wood around the front, wrap it on the front,

 It'll be flush so I won't have a high spot up here and then in the middle or the bottom

 Plus I'm sure that cutting it with the skill saw I didn't get it exactly smooth so hopefully

 And then I'll cut some of the supports that go in between these two and start screwing

 Aloha, today we're going to be featuring a braised short rib of beef for the Black Rock

 They sit on the bone, but what we did today is we trimmed off the fat.

 Because it's going to be going into a liquid broth, and with some vegetables, it needs

 Okay, so now I'm going to add some carrots, and some celery, some sweet onions.

 What I'm going to do now is it's nice and brown, we'll turn it over, and what we're

 So now what we're going to do is we're going to place this in the oven at 325 degrees for

 Okay, this has been in the oven now for at least two and a half hours and it's really

 So what we're going to do is I'm going to add a little bit of the port wine to the sauce.

 Okay, so we want that to reduce a little bit, come to a nice boil to burn off the alcohol

 When the alcohol flavor burns off, it's going to give a nice, rich sweetness to the sauce.

 Okay, we're going to make the scallion relish right now, which is some green onions with

 And I'm going to add a little bit of olive oil onto the top of this, salt, and some fresh

 And we're going to mix this around and we're going to top our dish with that.

 You notice here it's really brown, really nice, and it's really nice and fork tender.

 We're going to take some of this sauce here, we're going to go ahead and drizzle that right

 And then here we have like a soy ginger glaze, which is like sweet soy sauce with a little

 And then we'll garnish it with that scallion tomato relish that we made.

 You know, the short rib dish is one of our featured dishes, but we also feature a lot

 We've been working with the farmers to grow the crops that we need in our restaurants.

 What we feature here at Sheridan Maui is a Maui Brewing Company Black Rock Lager.

 And I recommend that this beef dish is paired with this specialty beer that we have here

 When you do come to the restaurant, make sure that you do come early.

 We do have a cliff dive ceremony that's been going on for the last 50 years, and that's

 All right, so school let's do this so it starts out with an opening

 All right after that there's six open knees and then I bend again so it would be

 Yeah, so you do that eight times and then it goes into the course which is this is C

 Right a bar for down here, you know or on the E string you do it e

 Then 10th fret of the Eastern that's a D where you can do fifth fret on the a string

 E D and then a CA and then you go back to the riff the so so it would be

 So you do that riff six times and then goes into the second course and that's just the same thing as first

 Right, well then is that the section before the solo just to build up to that so so

 And it goes in so so I'm gonna try the sources you can hear the notes really clear, all right

 And it's from once that shape and then you're gonna set up a whole step.

 All right, and they're gonna go up to the B and E string that same shape

 So after that you're gonna keep your that shape on the 10th fret on a string and then you're gonna go open e

 And they're gonna slide up just half step so indexes and beyond the 9th fret

 Right and that's just that section where it builds up to this so so I'm play it again

 Right and this is solo, but that's gonna be part two this lesson so

 of green beans finely sliced and a teaspoon of mustard seeds, enough salt to

 your taste, onion, chillies this is optional and curry leaves and cinnamon.

 You can use any other herb instead of curry leaves too and little bit of lime

 juice to finish the dish and a teaspoon of curry powder or cumin powder and

 coriander powder and a pinch of turmeric powder just for color and half a cup of

 freshly grated coconut this was frozen so I put that in the microwave and a

 of oil and into that going to add the onions, curry leaves and the chillies

 with the cinnamon and cook this about 1 minute meanwhile into this add the curry

 powder and the turmeric powder with salt so to the beans I added the curry

 powder and the turmeric powder so I'm going to mix that with salt and into

 ready so I'm going to add some lime juice to that to give a little bit extra

 flavor and mix it well and you can serve hot with rice or any other kind of a

So the beans with coconut is ready and I hope you will enjoy this

 water because you can make it with the chia seeds or you can make it without.

We really want to make it so you can have like four or five different drinks in

Remember we showed you before you can make this into a carbonated drink, you can

 make it into like a sweet vitamin C beverage, you can make this into a full complete meal

I drink half of the hibiscus flower and I do half of the blue-green with the chia.

 And now you've got yourself red and burgundy, make this really deep, deep purple.

 you're really wanting to try to see if you can have as many green, blue, indigo and violet

 or the hibiscus flower in the ears, of course not with the chia seeds because the chia seeds

 clean water, then what you're doing is you're starting out with a bad base.

 My pipes are full of old things because the house that actually I'm in currently was built

 cartridge and now we get about a 9.5 base water without doing anything.

It's got the alkalizing cartridge and the fluoride cartridge to be able to take

 you don't know what gua sha is, gua sha is a special technique to open up the pores.

 And all these liquids that we're making here, you can use all these exterior and interior.

 what you can do is you can start out only with one spoon if you'd like.

 just, without me doing anything, you can see it just really is easy.

 So if you don't want to eat the flowers, you don't put the chia seeds in until the flowers

 now to be able to show you because if you try to strain the flowers out now, you'll

So what I do is when I'm done here, I actually like to put it in

 So that's it in a nutshell to make what we make with the chia seeds.

 to get this so it's more of a very fine quality without the flowers in it.

 is you make the same exact solution and you put the chia seeds when you're all finished

If you put them in the microwave, which you shouldn't have one anyways, or if you

 put this in the dishwasher, this will actually lose its curvature to it so you'll destroy

These will last years if you actually don't put it in any type of heat, very hot

 tea, or just let it sit in liquid like sitting in a glass like this full of water.

 You can make it any sweetness you want, but I call it super sweet because any sugar that

And the cleaner you get, you'll see that sugar becomes sweeter and

 liquids, you'll find out that a lot of your sweetnesses and a lot of your flavors and

 things that you previously used to like maybe won't taste as good anymore because when you

 start washing your body out and you really start to hydrate it, what happens is you start

 to get healthy because you're flowing out a lot of the stuff that gets stuck inside.

 sort of like tea to me, like a yerba mate tea with a little bit of sugar.

 this is the best tasting of out of all the blue algaes we've tried.

So be careful when you're buying chia seeds or organic anything.

Okay, so this video is going to show you how I put on my foundation with an

Now I do use liquid foundation, but there are days where, let's say, there's

 a special occasion coming up and there's going to be a ton of pictures being taken, I love

But I got the Dynair one for Christmas and I am in love with it!

 come with an instruction manual when you first get it, so I kind of had to learn through

 to show you what I do to prep my face, what colors I use, how I mix them, and then just

If I remember to put the link, I'll put it up here or in the information box,

So before I actually use my airbrush machine, I'm going to do some concealer

 work, some green concealer work because I have some pimples and I want to cover those

So just go ahead and cover your pimples with a really light coating of the concealer.

 It doesn't have to be super thick because we're going to be blending it out.

 just want to blend out the concealer until it's like a really pale green or just a really

 our foundation, the first thing that you want to do is you want to make sure that there's

 into a paper towel, I'm going to make sure that I get no foundation coming out.

 what I'm going to do is I'm going to mix two colors because there's some that are light

 and then there's some that are dark and I kind of need like a happy medium between the

So I'm going to take Golden Olive and as you can see it's like kind of separated.

Just keep shaking it up because it's a water based foundation so it needs

 and you have no uneven different random colors all over your face.

 onto your paper towel and that's when you know you're good to go.

Now keep in mind that we are going to be adding a few more layers of

So if you're looking at yourself after the first layer and it just

 doesn't look as flawless as you want it to look, don't worry because we are going to

 inches away from my face and I'm pulling back on the lever about 75% of the way.

 don't want to release the lever until you have completed your first all around face

 makeup holding the gun 5-6 inches away from my face and pulling back on the lever about

And again, do not release the lever until you have completed covering

I'm just going over those areas where I put the green concealer and as you

 from my face and I've lightened my pressure on the actual lever.

 it 75% of the way back, I'm holding it maybe about 25% of the way back.

 can do after that is just go over your face and then just blend all those spots out.

 just ensures that you have a much more even coverage of your airbrush foundation and that

 it just doesn't look all nasty and spotty and splotchy or anything like that.

 went over my pimples and redness twice just to have a little bit more of an even coverage

 the makeup to come out, but you want to see the change in your actual face.

 finish it all up, I just go over my face one last time with the last coating of the airbrush

 workbench that's versatile enough to be used in a home workshop as well as on the job site

 The bench size is 18 by 48 and it's constructed entirely of 1 1⁄2 inch balding birch plywood.

 It's a torsion box construction so throughout the bench there's a grid work of pieces that

This top is strong and extremely flat and it will always stay that way.

 The thickness of this bench allows you to use hole fasts that don't work very well on a thin top bench.

 I'll now show you the basic design concept of the bench is that each one of the holes around the

 perimeter allows you to have a vise location every 6 inches around the entire perimeter of the bench.

 So if you take a pipe clamp, a normal pipe clamp like this, you can insert it through the holes,

 put the tail piece on the other end and have a vise location at anywhere around the bench.

 That's to put the pipe clamp wherever it needs to be for maximum...

 Now I'd like to plane the end of this door, something that's in a normal bench not an easy thing to clamp.

 But with our spaced holes we can clamp this on the edge like this and get really good support.

 The optional hole fasts allow you to do hands free sawing, routing or any other operation on top of the bench

Just put that in there and give it a wrap on the back and your board is secured.

 The use of the optional short clamp and vise block allows you to do end planing by inserting this into the end hole here

 Now you can put the hole on the side of the board you want to plane.

 These vise blocks have a rubber O-ring that is adjusted up and down just by a simple twist.

 So put that in there and a little planing here on this nice piece of walnut.

 One of the requirements for doing any kind of planing is to have a very flat and non-sagging surface.

 With the torsion box construction of this bench, this surface will always stay flat and there is no deflection at all.

 We have an optional small drawer that's useful for storing your bench dogs.

 Alright, so this is RoadView91 and in this video I'm going to show you how to take off

 And the lower fairings is right here and I'm going to show you how to take off the side

 So, to go over it, we're going to take off the side cover, the lower fairing so we can

 So now there's an air box so we can get the lower fairing off as well.

 So there's a couple of fasteners that I'll let you know about that you have to remove.

 You're going to need a five, I believe it's a millimeter, five millimeter hex wrench,

 You're also going to need a flat head screwdriver to get out the rubber grommet.

 Alright, so when you have your fairing completely unfastened, you're going to bring this part

 of the fairing up because it's resting on these things right here.

 And you're also going to bring this part of the fairing out this way.

 Cover off and you've got your fairing right here completely disassembled and the fasteners

 It's being rested on the bike and it's being held by, this is the turn signal connection.

 So what you're going to do is you're going to try to break it off.

 And what I'm going to do, there's like a little connection here.

 So what's going to happen is I'm going to try to hold it like this and disconnect it

 Alright, just going to disconnect the piece and I'm going to store my fairing right on

 Anyways, so I'm just showing you that I got the lower fairing off.

 Once you get one side off, like you figure out how to get it off, the next side is going

I'm going to show you how to make a deluxe Jordan Almond Flower wedding favor.

 The supplies you're going to need are some almond holders, five of them,

These are also available in green, but we're going to use white for this example.

These are white pearl roses, but you can use almost anything for the center.

 Just place it in the center and fold the almond holder in half, and you're going to make five.

 Now we're going to hold one almond holder like this, and we're going to just bend it backwards.

 Take a pearl spray and just line it up right next to stem to stem.

 We just twist the stems together, and you can adjust as you go along.

 I'm going to take the rose leaves and I'm going to place them underneath the base of the almonds,

 And then to finish it off we're going to take the floral tape and wrap the entire stem,

 just spinning the flower and wrapping the stem all the way down.

 I'm going to take some satin edge organza and wrap the stem and tie a bow.

 Again, you can find all the supplies that you need, including different colored almond holders

 I'm Tim Landwehr with Tight Lines Fly Fishing Company and we're asked about this knot

 It's a special loop knot that we use and most of our smallmouth guides all use this exact

 It very well may have a name, but the gentleman that showed me it was Rob Fordyce who is a

 tarpon guide and the idea behind it was for attaching a loop to a fly without a lot of

 It's a very fast loop and it's pretty much 100% we've never had any real failures with

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to take the tippet material here and I'm going to

 first create an overhand knot in the tippet material like you see here.

 Then I'm going to take the fly and it doesn't matter if I go above the fly or below the

 And now what I'm going to do is this tag end here, I'm going to wrap around the standing

 Now this knot or this tag end slips through that original loop.

 Now the trick to making this a smaller knot is by pulling both the standing line and the

 Do you see how I cinched it up first before I applied pressure to the loop?

 Now I can apply pressure to the loop, pull it tight once I know that that's the size

 You can see that the tag end faces down so it's not going to catch on weeds and debris

 But it's an incredibly fast knot, more so than any others that I've used and it's incredibly

 And you get such a better movement out of the fly with that loop.

 So from a smallmouth standpoint, every one of our guides uses loops just like this on

We have the special edition of Cooking for People as Lazy as Me!

 Like I think altogether, the stuff to like serve two and a half, maybe three,

 And the best tofu to get is the thick kind, or firm, that's what it's called, firm tofu.

 or else it's just gonna be like a slimy mess and not work very well.

 and it's going to then taste like really good and make this a lot healthier of a meal.

 It's gonna be healthier than anything Vincent's cooked, that's for sure.

 Anyway, just like leave this here for maybe five minutes or so to drain.

 The important bit is to put something on top of it so that it sort of squeezes out the material inside.

 Yeah, because I mean like, if you're thinking that you can just push,

 but that's actually not gonna work because then the tofu will just disintegrate and crumple

 over a period of time it'll slowly squeeze things out and your tofu will stay in one piece.

 Okay, so we're all done with the tofu things now, it's been like five minutes.

 As you can see, we've drained a lot from it and the tofu's now a little bit on the squishy end.

 because I'll probably just go ahead and make the entirety of the yakisoba packet.

 Okay, so now at this point you'll open up your thing of yakisoba,

 I was able to get it back in America at the Japanese specialty shop near my campus.

 and I tend to just make them all at the same time, and then save the rest as leftovers.

 You also get three sauce packets, which you mix together to make the yakisoba sauce.

 If you were making this normally without tofu, you'd just add it straight to the noodles and stuff when you cook it.

 because tofu is pretty bland and disgusting if you don't actually add it to shit.

 And some of it may crumble, and that's okay, because it's still gonna be fine.

 And then the longer you let this marinade, you know, the better off you are.

 In this case, I'll probably, you know, maybe we can leave it for an hour.

 I was listening to Morning Musume, but I guess you can do whatever you want.

 Alright, so I've turned on our grill thing, you'd probably be using a frying pan,

 And I'm just gonna make another huge mess that Vincent will clean up,

 so be gentle with them, or you're just gonna have a bunch of like mushy...

 And then, because normally they'd tell you to add water if you were just making this the normal way,

 but since I've added the same amount of water as was in the directions,

 I'm just gonna go ahead, pour all this goodness, like just on top of this,

 and then you just like cook this until it's all heated through.

 So, it'll probably take something like 5, 8 minutes, something like that.

 So now it's all like sizzling, and you can tell it's pretty clearly done,

 and there's lots of like pretty colors, and it looks so healthy,

 Like you can tell her you made her some like pretentious foodie bullshit from Asia,

 and you win, you'll get laid if you make this dish for your girlfriend.

 So the first thing I'm going to do is I'm going to cut it in half.

 Okay, now what I'm going to do is I'm going to cut equal slices

 and get rid of those and then I'm going to cut through and slice again.

 going to have a watermelon and remember if it's a really big one, cut it from one end to the other

If it's a personal melon like that one, you can cut it on the equator.

 First thing we're going to do is mount our bumper to our mounting brackets.

 Now that we've got our mounting brackets and our bumper assembled, we can put it on the

 Next you need to raise the bumper up and hold it against the floor pan so you can get ready

And before you put any pressure at all on this, if you're doing it

 like me with a jack, you want to look up and under here and make sure you have no wires.

 Once you have all your wires out of the way, go ahead and jack up your bumper until it's

 Now that you've got your bumper up here and secure with the jack so you know it ain't

 going to move, you want to check both sides of your bumper, here and here.

 Once you get one of your hose drips, you're going to want to go ahead and slide your bolt

 if the jack was to fall, the nut and bolt's going to hold it in place.

 Now with all four holes drilled, we can install the rest of the bolts, nuts, and washers.

 Then with a wrench on top, we can take a ratchet and tighten them down.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make a little tuna and cheese nibbly snack, tuna

 The original recipe doesn't say what size can that is so I've gone with 425 grams or

 If it's too much then I can always add a bit more of the other ingredients.

 Fresh is better but if you can only get dried use about a teaspoonful.

 Now take your tuna and add the cream cheese, the chives and garlic salt and the Tabasco

 Now that's all mixed in give it a bit of a taste and if you don't think there's enough

 And then set that in the fridge for about half an hour until it firms up slightly.

 Once your tuna mixture has set a little bit take about half a teaspoon.

 Now if you have fresh chopped chives you can then roll this in the chives.

 Don't be tempted to do it if you only have dried because the texture is horrible.

 And then serve them up with little squares of toast or crackers.

 If you like this video don't forget to subscribe, give it a thumbs up or click on the gingerbread

 And now I want to show you an exciting cocktail called the Lava Flow.

 And we're going to build the drink in a 16-ounce mixing glass, all the way full to the top

 We're going to add an ounce of coconut syrup, a half ounce of orange juice, an ounce of

 This drink is almost identical to a pina colada, only it gets a little bit of strawberry syrup

 And when you pour the drink in there, it's supposed to look like a Lava Flow.

 It's called a rest stroke because you rest on to the next string.

 But it really really gets cool when you get into something like.

 So you want to hit the A string with your top E string on the same time.

 Just subscribe to some of my videos and I'll show you other things I know later.

 We're going to start with our left leg, we're going to step, go down, come up, kick.

 Anytime you're doing side movements, you want to step with your heel, have your foot pointing

 I don't know who made that up or what that is, but it has no place in here.

 Okay, so what we're going to do, step, down, step up, step on the right leg, kick.

 How you want to interpret it, how you want to freak it, is totally up to you.

 So if you want to put a little more hip in it and really round it out, that's fine.

 If you just want to drop it down, you can step and snake it up and kick.

 All right, so what we're going to do is take it down to the left side, we're going to stop,

 and take it down to the right side, and I'm going to try and do something that they don't normally do, a trick.

I don't know if this is going to work very good, but here we go.

 You want to get the o-ring all the way to this edge right here, all the way to the back.

 You want to stretch it over the top here, just like that, around the front.

 But this one we're obviously not going to push it behind the cam, we're just going to go right over the top with it.

 Hold it down with your thumb, over the top, reach back and push it to make sure that it goes back and crosses over the other one.

 Tough to see in the video, that's crappy video, but one wraps around this side by the gap here, but it doesn't hold it open, holds it closed.

 The timing gap, and the other one wraps over the top, so you've got two.

 Hello everyone, I'd like to welcome you to another sculpting demonstration.

 In this project I'm building a lizard and in this particular video I made the mushrooms

 There is a copper wire you'll see here shortly in the time lapse.

 And here's a quick glow in the dark photo for you to hold you over until the final reveal.

 Starting this project off I wanted to build the caps of the mushrooms and I'm using these

 These are made of sculpey original because it's the cheapest and it's just the core so

 That's where I'm going to make the details like the little ruts that are underneath the

 Once I got everything cut and ready I wanted to ensure that these don't break off the caps.

 Because the last time I did mushrooms I was really worried about the mushroom up at the

 By making a little loop at the end it's pretty much there to stay.

 This is to help get the two pieces of clay to bond pretty good.

 Then I rub on some of the clay softener again to make it tacky.

 I rolled out a sheet of this is called Red Hot Red from Sculpey 3.

 Once I got all three ready I basically rolled out a sheet of Glow-in-the-Dark.

 I didn't want these to look perfect because it didn't look perfect in the photo.

 Very careful not to touch the red because I just paint brushed it with that clay softener.

 I also cooked these for 8 minutes before I'm doing this part right here.

 Reason being is because if I was to push these down real hard I would have destroyed them.

 What I did is once I stuck them in there I pulled them back out and put liquid polymer

 It dries translucent so if you get a little bit on there it won't matter.

 Anyhow I hope you enjoyed the sculpting demonstration I put together for you.

 Today, we're going to be taking a look at Glide Gear's 4 foot professional camera slider,

 I'm going to show you what you get with this, how to put it together, and later in the video,

 The first thing you'll notice when you get your slider is that it comes with this great

 Now, in this padded case, you're going to find different pockets that fit each of the

 components separately, so nothing bumps around while it's being transported.

 You have your 4 foot slider rail with the camera carriage already attached.

 You have a 1.25 to 3.8 inch adapter, and then it also has two adjustable feet.

 You'll just need to grab your leg, line it up to the end of the rail, and turn the thumbscrew

 Once you're done there, you're going to repeat the process on the other side.

 One of the first things you're going to notice is just how smooth this slide is, and that's

 You can turn them left or right to move them up or down, so you can accommodate any flat

 Use the thumbscrew in the center to tighten and lock the position of those legs.

 Now, you're going to find three sets of mounting holes, a 1.25 and a 3.8 inch.

 One set is in the center of the rail, and then the other two sets are on either end.

 Keep in mind, this is a longer slider, so I would recommend using those outer mounting

 You have a bubble level in the center of the camera carriage, so you can level out the

 You have a 1.25 inch thread in the center of the camera carriage, or utilize the 3.8

 Lastly, you'll find a thumbscrew that locks the position of the camera carriage so nothing

 I'd recommend this slider for anyone on a budget looking to produce professional looking

 camera slides, and with those adjustable legs, it's perfect for uneven terrain.

 So that concludes our look at GlideGear's DEV470, and as always, thanks for watching.

 Today, we're making an absolute sumptuous soufflé omelet with ramps.

 Ramps are these little wild leeks that grow in the springtime in the woods.

 They love the cool weather, so the season only lasts about one month.

 Now you can slice the stems as well as the leaves in about 1-1.25-inch pieces.

 Heat a large nonstick frying pan over medium-high heat and add the butter.

 You're going to saute this until the ramps wilt and turn a darker shade.

 As you see, the green leaves of the ramps are starting to get darker, so we are done.

 Add the egg whites to the egg yolk mixture and gently fold them in.

 This is going to make such a delicious omelet, all puffed up and light.

 As soon as the mixture becomes a pale yellow like this and you don't see dark yellow streaks, we are done.

 we heat the pan over medium-high heat and add a tablespoon of butter.

 Shake the pan to spread it evenly and reduce heat between medium and medium-high.

 We're going to cook the omelet undisturbed until the eggs begin to set.

 It's been about 3 minutes, and as you see, the eggs on the outside are beginning to set.

 Now, by the way, raviola is incredibly sticky, so when I slice it, I put it on wax paper, as you see here.

 Now you're going to cook the omelet for another 2 to 3 minutes, depending on how you like your omelet.

 If you like it a little runny, then cook it less, and if you like it a little firmer, then cook it a little more.

 So now gently lift it and flip it in half, and slide it onto a platter.

 Anyway, this video is to show you how to use the Prince Boomerang tool on a Speedport Pro

 As you all know, with a drop weight machine, the turntable doesn't have a brake so you

 If not, you could do what other people would do, which is to jam the racket against your

 But if you ask from Prince, they'll just give you one for free.

 You get the arc above the string, so you put the first one in, and then the fat end.

 So you put the boomerang in, feed it in, snap it, turn your ratchet head, pull tension.

 Oh yeah, you have to make sure that you use the proper boomerang tool.

 One is for the O3 Tour and the smaller hold rackets, and one for the bigger rackets.

 The whole thing just slides through, so it doesn't really hold very well.

 If you try to tension it, it might work, but it gets distorted.

 The IAFF-IAFC Fire Service Joint Labor Management Candidate Physical Ability Test consists of

 You must successfully complete all eight events in 10 minutes and 20 seconds or less.

 Failure in one event or a total test time exceeding 10 minutes and 20 seconds will constitute

 Throughout all the events you must wear long pants and proper footwear.

 Throughout the test you will wear a 50-pound vest to simulate the weight of the self-contained

 A hard hat with a chin strap and work gloves will be issued to candidates and must be worn

 An additional 25 pounds of weight simulating a high-rise pack or hose bundle will be added

 This event is designed to simulate the critical tasks of climbing stairs in full protective

 You will be required to wear a total of 75 pounds of weight to simulate the weight of

 the firefighter's clothing, the self-contained breathing apparatus and a high-rise pack or

 Immediately prior to the initiation of the timed candidate physical ability test, you

 will have 20 seconds to warm up on and become familiar with the step mill in a preset rate

 This event is designed to simulate the critical tasks of extending an uncharged hose line

 from the fire apparatus to the fire occupancy and pulling the uncharged hose line around

 You will grasp the hose nozzle attached to 200 feet of 1 3 quarter inch hose.

 You will place a length of the hose line 8 feet or less over your shoulder or across

 You will drag the hose 75 feet to a pre-positioned drum, make a 90 degree turn around the drum

 After you cross the finish line, you will stop within the marked red box, turn to face

 the hose line and drop to at least one knee and then you will pull 50 feet of hose as

 The mark on the hose line must pass the established finish line.

 This event is designed to simulate the critical tasks of removing power tools from a fire

 apparatus, carrying them to an emergency scene and returning them to the fire apparatus.

 You will remove the two saws, one at a time from the cabinet and place them on the ground.

 You will then simultaneously pick up one saw in your left hand and one saw in your right

 hand and carry them while walking 75 feet around a drum and back to the starting point.

 You will then place both saws on the ground, pick up one saw at a time and return each

 This event is designed to simulate the critical tasks of placing a ground ladder at a fire

 You will walk to the end of a 24 foot aluminum extension ladder positioned on the ground,

 the top rung of the unhinged end of the ladder from the ground and walk it up in a hand over

 hand fashion using each rung of the ladder until the ladder rests against the wall.

 After successfully completing the ladder raise, you will proceed immediately to a second pre-positioned

 You will extend the fly section by pulling on the rope halyard hand over hand until it

 hits the stop and then you will lower the fly section hand over hand in a controlled

 fashion and return the ladder to its original starting position.

 This event is designed to simulate the critical tasks of using force to open a locked door

 You will use a 10 pound sledgehammer to strike the measuring device in the target area until

 This event is designed to simulate the critical tasks of searching for a fire victim in limited

 You will crawl on your hands and knees through a tunnel maze that is 64 feet long and approximately

 While in the tunnel, you will navigate around, over and under obstacles.

 In addition, at two locations you will crawl through a narrowed portion where the dimensions

 This event is designed to simulate the critical tasks of removing an injured victim or partner

 You will grasp one or both handles of the shoulder harness attached to a 165 pound mannequin

 Make a 180 degree turn around the drum and continue an additional 35 feet until the entire

 This event is designed to simulate the critical tasks of breaching and pulling down a ceiling

 You will remove the pike pole from the bracket stand within the boundary established by the

 equipment frame and place the tip of the pole on the painted area of the hinged door in

 You will push up fully with the pike pole on the hinged door in the ceiling three times.

 Then you will hook the pike pole to the sealing device and pull down the counterbalance lever

 This concludes a description of all eight events in the IAFF IAFC Joint Labor Management

 You must pace yourself and be prepared to perform all eight events in order with a total

 You're just out really on any lake, but these are just your Lake Erie

 So I don't know what size barrel swivel is just a spare one I have laying around

 Brass snap swivel you can also just use a regular old snap swivel

 And it's a snap swivel so you can change it from like one ounce to a half ounce or 3 8's

 You want for just starting out that I was about how I want it when I'm just starting out just like this you know about

I'm gonna tie some more rigs before I go out next time this summer

 With the 15 pound it makes a little stiffer in the perch don't notice I mean

You're not really doing anything catching really swell to tie one

 And brass snap swivel down there basically just find about where you want your hook pinch it

 Put your line down and get a loop kind of like you're gonna start a palm or not

 Align with the loop that's not gonna slide not gonna come undone not gonna get smaller

 And I'll usually usually if I want really good rig I'll pull it like that and I'll get it bending a little bit

 Another tip if you're in a like a body of water where the perch and the walleye are together

 Instead of using a weight and the brass snaps level just go to a regular snap swivel

 Without the or just not a snap just go to a regular snap without the swivel

 you can probably even tie directly back so you better use a snap and

 And you can put a curly tail grub on the head or a minnow bigger a bigger minnow

 And once you're using you can take one of the hooks off so you have you can leave well.

 And you've got two perch hooks or you can take one of the perch hooks off and you just have one perch hook

 Just so you have the opportunity to both catch a walleye and a perch

 Yeah, I mean if you're out on the air you don't have to worry about sheephead breaking you off.

 That's my perch rig I use comment subscribe like comment what you use for perch rigs.

 Check out the rest of my channel too, but please I need some help getting youtube up.

We want to take and lay out some areas that we don't want to put flooring

 in according to the floor plan and so we're going to show you how we do that

 and then we've got some lumber from the floor that we've torn up here and then

 we have some scraping processes that we're going through showing you here and

 So in order to sharpen the chisel I'm going to take this one edge off on the belt sander.

Still a couple burrs on it so I'm going to take it and file it off on a piece of wood here.

I'm going to take and drag it across the coarse edge of the file.

 So I'm scraping out all that dirt that's fallen down into the cracks.

 It's just a lot easier to get the chisel and then go back and get it with the scraper.

About a 30 second or so I've got that clean and that will be fine.

 And now that I'm sharp, I can wipe it here and there's that edge up.

 So as I'm finishing these up, I'm taking a scraper and scraping the back side here.

 I'm concentrating on the surface that came from that top edge there.

 Already taking the chisel, scraping all the excess here, scraping the sand there.

 Neither did the pipe clamps as far as pulling the floor together.

 The best way to put it together was to wedge the boards in between other boards.

 We had some straight lines that we recorded and then we had to cut them.

 Here we're piecing in the pieces that have to go in on the areas that need to.

 We've got some areas in the back that we have cleaned out and have to be done.

 So, if you want to save $30,000 on a floor and spend about 6 weeks or 3 months or 6 months, you can do it.

 So basically we're trying to change the airbag, side airbag from the passenger, actually the

It was kind of a challenge, you have two kind of slotted pins and then

 here there's some metal kind of straps that you have to push downwards and then the cable

And basically you push down the airbag and the airbag just attaches.

 we tried to, thinking that we needed to remove, you don't have to remove nothing from the

It's just basically removing this plastic piece which actually have some

 can see it's actually removing the lever that makes the seat go forward.

Take that off, take the plastic off and you're going to see that there's a

 the cable through the slotted piece area which is really tiny, really hard to get.

That's the important thing is try to route the cable as you need

 wires behind the mechanism so it will not be in the position that it shouldn't be.

 you push to the back, this piece here hooks to this little slot there, plastic, it's like

Now we're going to, like I mentioned previously, engage the cable

 on those two, on this metal piece here and there's another one over here which you're

 just going to basically put the cable to the back of it and then pull the cable forward.

 You can substitute that for some agave or something like that, it's up to you.

 And obviously some Himalayan rock salt for that salted shot caramel taste.

 work it up to maybe speed eight to ten, and just see how we go.

 What I'll do, I'll put that in the fridge, let that set for about an hour, and then I'll

And then I'll just put a sprinkle of cacao nibs over it to garnish

 In this video I'm going to go over what you'll need in a lash extension kit so you can complete

 a full set of lashes, how to prep your products and tools or how to get them organised and

 Also I'm going to go over who shouldn't have eyelash extensions.

 So what it means in the beauty industry is that you can't have that type of treatment

 So starting off you're going to need some hand guard or sanitiser.

 You should always sanitise your hands before starting with any eye treatment.

 I use silk eye pads and they are like a sticker and you just stick them apart and then what

 I do is I detach them on the back of my hand which as you just saw has already been sanitised.

 So I'm just detaching them because I don't want them to be too sticky under the eyes

 The micro pore tape normally gets cut into four pieces and you pop that over the eye

 pad so that you can get close to the bottom lashes so that they are out of the way completely.

 They come in packets and you open them up and they have plastic on the back that you

 So you could either apply the liquid form by applying a drop to the end of a microfiber

 brush and then sweeping it over the lashes or you could just get a protein pad from a

 Basically they're going to remove any protein that's been left from mascara or oils or oil

 based makeup remover from the lashes because you need to do that in order to get the best

 results and the best longevity out of lash extensions and out of the glue.

 You don't want the fluff to fall off the end when you're using them to remove lashes as

 well because it just gets really annoying when the little fluff comes off.

 You'll also want something that the semi permanent glue will be held in.

 That will either be a ring with a disposable cup that you can put inside it or it will

 I normally wouldn't dispense this much but it did come out fast when I was doing this

 I've gone through a few glues now and the reason why I like this glue is because it

 You don't have to go from one eyelash on one eye and then one eyelash to the other

 eye so left to right, left to right while you're waiting for the glue to actually dry.

 I don't like them for the fact that they're quite fumey and I'm also breathing that in

 You can get sensitive, you can get black, you can get white, you can get really crazy

 You just need to figure out for yourself by using different types of glues which you like

 You're not going to know what's the best until you actually try different sorts.

 You're going to use this to pump air over the lashes when you're finished.

 I cannot recommend enough how much you should use magnifying glasses.

 Your work will be 100 times better if you can see the lashes you're working on magnified.

 If you are using loose lashes, you're going to need a silicone pad dish.

 When you press down on the loose lash, it's going to bounce back up and flick halfway

 across the sponge and it's going to be the most frustrating thing ever.

 I was taught with a sponge when I started training and about half an hour of my training

 I'll show you right now how you just tweak it to its side by pressing on it and then

 You also just spin the silicone pad around so that you can pick up the lash the way that

 you need to so you're not picking it up and dropping it and picking it up.

 You just turn the disc around so you're in the best position to pick up the lash as you

 If you're using individual strip lashes, you can pull off a strip.

 So your lash that you pick up with your fine point tweezers will be dipped into the glue

 in the cup and then you'll see maybe one to three little dots that are on the lash and

 It's a really nice complimentary bonus for the client to give them the mascara brush

 You can still achieve good quality lashes without lash sealant.

 What you need to understand with eyelashes and hair is that they go through growing stages

 But your natural eyelashes take about 8 weeks before they completely fall out.

 So what your client or what you need to understand as somebody getting eyelash extensions is

 that they're applied to baby lashes, to active growing lashes, and to lashes that are on

 If the lash extensions have been put on all lashes, some of those lashes were on the way

 So a full set is going to look really full for a good couple of weeks and then it's going

 In that case, the client's going to feel like they're not as full and they'll never really

 get more than a couple of months before all of their lashes should have gone through the

 A client needs to know what to expect from an eyelash procedure.

 So first off, you need to let them know that their eyes will be closed for approximately

 And maybe even if you're new to doing eyelash extensions, that could be potentially up to

 So if they don't want to do this, then they're not really suitable for that kind of treatment.

 So the client needs to understand that there's semi-permanent glue being used and that if

 they have allergies or they're quite sensitive skin, sensitive eyes, they really want to

 This will mean you'll have to prep one eye and apply one or two eyelashes to the outer

 corners just so that they can go away for 24 to 48 hours and check that that eyelash

 There are many reasons why a client should not have an eyelash extension treatment.

 Click here to go to the video which explains the different reasons and conditions.

 and I am going to fry it until all the moisture in that paste is absorbed

 Hi, welcome to Goody Dude and welcome to a new trick called the crotch-a-dater.

 This is a trick with two hoops, but you've probably more often seen it using one hoop.

 I'll show you with one hoop first and then we'll get into the two hoop business.

 The hoop is going to go in the reverse direction as it's on your right side.

 You're going to hold the hoop and you're going to put your leg in.

 Almost at the same time as you're putting your leg in, you're going to grab your hand with your thumb pointing towards your knee.

 You're going to lift it over your head and then back the same way.

 Grab it with your right hand, left hand, and you're going to, so that you don't have to bend over,

 you're going to give a little jump when you put your leg through.

 If you learn how to do that move first, then all you have to do is add another hoop.

 That doesn't necessarily mean it's going to be easy, because always adding a second hoop is going to be a lot harder than doing it with one hoop.

 In order to do it with two hoops, there are two things to remember.

 One is you really want to have a good grip, and as I call it, the death grip, on both hoops, so that they don't go wonky and flop down like that.

 You don't want them to be end to end, because if they're end to end, they will slide down to side to side, because that's where the hoops want to be on this.

 A good way to practice this and to strengthen your hands is to just hold the hoop with your arms straight out.

 You will see that, after holding it that way for a while, you can feel your muscles, which is a good thing.

 Then you can try moving the hoop with one hand and keeping the hoops from going wonky, from flopping down or going out of plane.

 Try different things, and you'll find that your hands will get stronger.

 The second thing to remember when doing this with two hoops is the fact that when you're doing it, you want to, when you are grabbing the hoop with the second hand,

 you want to make sure that you are putting that second hand as close to the other one as you can get it.

 You don't want to let go of the hoop until that other hand has really grabbed and made the connection.

 If you find that your hoops are going wonky, it means that when you grab it with the other hand, you're not really grabbing close enough and really getting a good connection between the hoops and your hand.

We're just going to hold the two hoops in front of us with your hand palm down.

 You're going to really try to get your whole hand around both hoops.

 The hoops are going to go the reverse direction, just like we did with one hoop.

 You're going to start moving the hoops in the reverse direction.

 When they get under your crotch, you're going to grab with the other hand and keep it going in the opposite direction.

 It's hard to do in slow motion, but you want to keep a really tight hold of the hoops.

 When you want to stop the crotchinator, all you do is just step out of it.

 You're going around and you want to stop there, so you just step out and move the hoop out.

 Let me show you that from a distance in case you can't see the whole thing.

 On the preview of this, you saw one way to use it to incorporate it into your other moves.

If you have any questions or you're having trouble doing it, let me know and I'll try to help you.

 Hey, Jack here with Two Brothers Adventures out on the rim again camping with the kids.

 I'm going to use the square one today to make a Reuben sandwich which is a pastrami, sauerkraut

 I don't have any rye bread so I'm just going to use regular bread but it still comes out

 So I'm putting the buttered bread down, put some pastrami down, put some sauerkraut on

 Okay, I'm going to throw some thousand island dressing on there.

 I'm going to show you how to make a marble cake for this recipe.

 self-raising flour if you are using plain flour add 1 teaspoon of baking powder

 2 tablespoons of cocoa powder if you like you can add several colors in this recipe too.

 I'm going to add the butter and sugar and going to cream it first

 butter and sugar I'm going to add the vanilla into that going to add the

 After mixing the batter looks like this so now you have to take

 Divide that into three equal parts leave one part in the bowl and put two

 Into the other one don't add anything and the one in the mixing bowl

 The mix will get dry so you have to add extra two tablespoons of milk and

 While mixing the cocoa with the other batter just mix the one with the red or the pink

 So I have three different colors one dark brown one pink and one normal

 Mix all together like this not much just to give that marble effect

 So not I'm not going to cut it at this time, and I hope you will enjoy this recipe.

 first thing you do is if you come closer, you have to remove the battery at the bottom

 is no power and then power it on even there is no battery or any power coming in.

And then what I would do, I would put back the charger, which is already

 attached to the power and hook it up to the DC socket and see if it's working without

So I'm going to get a completely other charger which is like this one but different,

 but compatible with my laptop to make sure whether the problem is from the charger or

 to my laptop, again without no battery, and find out if it's working or not.

 the laptop worked with the new charger, without the battery, it means the problem was with

 how to check chargers, it's a very easy way how to check chargers if they work or not.

 you have obviously the red one for the plus, for the positive, and the black one for the

So you're gonna hook this to, and I would get the tip of the charger, but make

 sure that, obviously this is gonna be electric so I have to declare some warning, you know,

 I must see the voltage in there, which would be 19 volts, 15, 20, depends on how... But

 here I'm not seeing any voltage, so that tells me that the charger is no good.

 other charger, which is the one I worked on, I bought new, if I plug it, if I plug the...

 So I'm gonna put, as I said, the black one into there, the red one into inside, show

 the screen as well, and the white one, and see we have 18 volts.

 So now I know that my charger is working, but my laptop is not.

The DC socket, which is a very common problem, where your charger hooks to,

Or, there's a voltage regulator, which is extremely hard to do for

 you as a normal user, which needs an expert to look at and replace, or it could be the

 we'll have to do in this instance, is take the laptop apart, and replace this bit here,

 goal, is when you do these tests, don't bother using the battery, or testing the battery.

Because we want to get the laptop to work just with the charger,

 100% positive that it is the DC socket, is because when I flack the battery back, because

 there's a little bit of charge in that battery, just a little bit, if you come closer, the

 battery alone on the charger, on the laptop, lets me see lights, lets me see power.

 time, people's batteries are always dead, they never charge them.

 far more complicated, and you should take it to an expert, if you don't know how to

So that's how we test out dead laptops, and how we go over doing them.

 Replace that, sometimes that could go on your charger, which is there.

These go very quick, so either the wire, or the fuse, that leads

 and so now we're going to go to the floor and just stretch it out.

 Pull the knees into the chest, but what I'd like you to do is grab behind the knees,

 never grabbing on top of the legs because that causes issue with the knee joint.

 All right, you guys, go ahead and release your right leg down to the floor,

 Now I want you to walk your hands up your leg and pull down, just pull down, stretching.

 Now you can roll up like Kathy and Jeanette, making your stretch even deeper yet.

 If you're there, I want you to go ahead and just start to relax the whole torso into the floor now.

 So basically you're drawing a great big circle with your big toe, just like Lachelle.

 Now rotate the opposite way, really releasing the tension out of the ankle, the shin, and the calf.

 Now you're going to bend that knee and bring it into the chest, stretching.

 Now once again, you are really stretching those heavy duty muscles that you worked.

 Now I want you to know at home, a lot of these people are instructors.

 All right, I want you to begin to release the bent knee down and the opposite leg extends up.

 Did you guys know at home that the ankle is the very first joint to lose mobility?

 I want you to bend the knee and place the ankle above the opposite knee.

 Now I want you to slowly begin to unlock the back knee and unlock

 Exhale, rotate the wrist, lowering them down, and rotate the opposite way.

 1 1 2 cups of oats, 3-4 teaspoons of salt, 3 tablespoons of oil and a wax paper.

 reduce the heat to a very low flame and I am going to close the lid.

 cook in a very very low heat for about 5 minutes so that it can cook well.

 that I can make it into a tennis size ball and then use this to make it into roti.

You can eat this with chutney powder or chutney or sambar or curd or anything.

 Are you looking for a different alternative to traditional mashed potatoes?

 We're going to use millet and cauliflower primarily to produce the same kind of texture

 For this recipe you'll need 1 cup red onion, 2 cups of millet rinsed and drained, 4 cups

 of cauliflower, 1 teaspoon of salt, and 3 1⁄2 cups of vegetable broth.

 If you don't have one you can just use a knife and a cutting board.

 If you're using traditional cookware you may need to add a little bit of water or broth

 Onions are very powerful vegetables because they're part of the allium family.

 This family of vegetables has shown to slow the growth of cancer cells.

 Other vegetables in this family are garlic, scallions, leeks, and chives.

 It has a mild flavor and it's high in protein, fiber, and B vitamins.

 I wish you could smell this millet because it smells delicious.

 Did you know cauliflower is one of the most powerful vegetables you can eat?

 These vegetables have shown to actually arrest the growth of cancer cells.

 So if you're not a big cauliflower fan, maybe broccoli, kale, brussel sprouts, cabbage,

 Next step is to cover, turn the heat down to medium low, and cook for about 25 minutes.

 You may need to add up to a couple of cups of additional water or broth until you get

 When the millet's done, use a potato masher to mash it until it's smooth.

 You can serve mashed grains and cauliflower as a low-fat side dish.

 And so I have two whole chicken legs from Whole Foods, room temperature.

 And like I said, it's very important that they're at room temperature and not straight

 Most of the chicken is not very good quality at most of your local supermarkets.

 And good Whole Foods, if you take a look, the non-organic chickens, the skin is yellow,

 And so I highly recommend the organic chicken just because it tastes much better and it's

 Pretty much you should have Old Bay in your house, in your closet, in your bedroom, whatever.

 So I have coated the chicken with some olive oil and now I'm just going to liberally sprinkle

 And like I said, this is a very good recipe for people who are bachelors, who don't have

 a lot of time, who suck at cooking, who don't know their way around the kitchen, or people

 We'll talk about the cast iron skillet when we get to that point.

 The combo of shallow skillet and deep skillet combo that becomes a lid.

 And then go ahead and with the big skillet, cover it up like that.

 Be careful, whenever you're opening the lid, open away from you.

 So that when there's steam coming off, it doesn't drip all over you.

 And then in the oven for an hour so you can do whatever else you want to do in between time.

 I give myself about an arm's length of string, and this will be the middle of the string I'm going to use.

 Another arm's length, and I'm going to cut this off right here.

 So, I'm going to just slide this underneath the tail of the chicken, right here.

 And then, between the thighs of the chicken, and the strings come this way.

 Now, I'm going to go ahead and turn the bird so you can see it.

 The strings are coming this way, through the thighs, right here.

 Now, this is just like tying your shoes one time, but I'm going to go two times.

 Now, once it's done like this, I just ... let's turn it around.

 Now, it's been turned around, it's gone two times, and then I'm just going to make one more knot here.

 I'm going to cut this extra string off, and I'm going to turn the bird over.

 And sometimes I put all the ingredients into the salad, whether it be the protein, the

 vegetables, the potatoes, and I make one big dish and it's a meal.

 Well, this particular salad doesn't quite have all those ingredients, but it sure does

 On a stove top, I boil my green beans and I want to make them al dente.

 Just cook them for a few minutes till they're soft, not too mushy.

 I'm going to drizzle some olive oil into the pan and a little bit of my onions, my

 And I'm going to get this a little toasty, put a little bit more olive oil in, and turn

 This red cabbage makes the color so beautiful, the purple and the green.

 My croutons, parmesan, slivered almonds and mushrooms and onion and garlic mix.

 I'll put a little bit of the garlic gold lemon vinaigrette on top.

 And you know, sometimes I like to have this, if I have leftover, I'll put it in the fridge

 All I need to do is add in a little bit more fresh spinach and mix it together.

 Might need a little bit more of the lemon vinaigrette, but it tastes heavenly that way.

 Okay, and now I have a pretty plate and I'll put my salad onto the plate.

 If you'd like, you can serve this with a nice piece of grilled salmon or a grilled piece

 For simply delicious recipes and inspirations for joyous living, visit my blog at simplydeliciousliving.tv.

 To make a Carlsberg bottle cup to hold your pens and pencils you will need the following

 An empty Carlsberg bottle, some thick string, a sanding block, a glass cutter, a lighter,

 Using the glass cutter score a circle around the circumference of the bottle.

 Measure a piece of string that's approximately the size of the circumference.

 Holding the bottle over the sink, carefully light the string on fire.

 Once the string has burned for a while, dunk the bottle in ice cold water.

 What's up guys this is Jonny, welcome to my unboxing of the ASUS VX239H monitor.

 So ASUS have used an EGO box here which is made from 80% post consumer materials and

 Along the front of the box here we can see some of the features included with this monitor.

 We have the frameless design, IPS screen which ASUS has called image perfecting screens for

 some reason, LED backlighting, wide viewing angles up to 178 degrees and ASUS' Vivid

 The use of IPS on the front of the box may be quite confusing to some people.

 IPS stands for In-Plane Switching and not image perfecting screens.

 As we take a look around the rest of the box we can see a little ASUS slogan I guess you

 It says Inspiring Innovation Persistent Perfection and of course it tells you about the 3 year

 warranty included with the ASUS monitor which hopefully I won't need but it always gives

 Let's go ahead and unbox this thing and see what we get inside.

 Inside the box we get a block of polystyrene which encases the monitor.

 We also get a small bag with some documentation and on the back of the polystyrene block there

 are cutouts for all the included accessories such as power cables and the stand for the

 Let's go ahead and take a closer look at the accessories that are included with the monitor.

 First up we have the documentation which includes a quick start guide with instructions on how

 The second piece of documentation is a warranty guide which gives information on that 3 year

 Up next we have the 3.5mm auxiliary jack with male connections on each end.

 This allows an audio connection from your PC or laptop to your monitor.

 We also get a VGA cable which I severely hope none of you will have to use but it

 We get a European power cable which will plug into the adapter provided.

 We also get a UK powered power cable included however this is completely useless as the

 3 prong kettle connection at the end does not fit into the included power adapter.

 It's quite small and compact and has a standard DC jack on the end.

 The last thing we get included is the base or stand for the monitor which is a sturdy

 There is one screw which is turnable by hand or it gives you the option to use a flat head

 That's all of the accessories out the way now we can take a closer look at the monitor

 As we take the first half of the polystyrene casing off the monitor we can see it's very

 You'll have no worries about the shipping and protection of the monitor.

 Straight away you get an idea of just how well designed this monitor is.

 It has a matte finish across the frameless panel which is just a single pane of glass.

 As I spin it round here you can see just how slim and elegant the design is being just

 As we turn this round we can see in the bottom there are a number of rubberised pads to stop

 And I just want to show you the very easy installation process.

 So as you can see here the best way to do this is to lay your monitor down flat off

 I put down a cloth to stop the back of the monitor getting scratched as it is very glossy.

 Once you have the monitor flat down on a surface you want to take your sundial base and push

 it into the connection on the end of the stand arm on the back of the monitor.

 Once you have it in place just tighten the screw and that's all there is to it.

 I'm just going to turn the monitor around here to give you a better look at it's design.

 You can see the back is very very glossy and the front obviously has the matte finish which

 Again you can see here just how thin the monitor is with that LED backlighting.

 On the bottom right hand corner of the front of the monitor we get 7 touch sensitive controls.

 We have a dedicated hotkey for the splendid video intelligence technology.

 If we take a closer look at the back of the monitor here you can see the two 1 watt speakers.

 First of all we have the first HDMI port, then another HDMI port, a VGA connection,

 a 3.5mm auxiliary connection, a headphone connection and then your power in connection.

 Here you can see the use of the touch sensitive controls as I turn the monitor on to give

 As I zoom into Luke Skywalker's crotch area you get a real idea of just how small these

 It makes these monitors great for Nvidia Surround or Surround Gaming.

 Or even for those of you who have multi monitor setups and just don't want that ugly bezel

 Some of you may be wondering about the positioning of the monitor.

 The monitor cannot turn however there is a good wee bit of tilt which I have shown in

 So I'll just go over some of the specifications of the monitor.

 IPS stands for in-plane switching and the AH stands for advanced high performance which

 Basically it just offers increased resolution and greater light transmission for lower power

 250 candelas per metre squared of brightness which is just a unit of luminance.

 The IPS panel gives very good viewing angles up to 178 degrees and also provides good colour

 Make sure you're subscribed for the upcoming review of this monitor and if you want to

 see any videos related to this monitor such as gaming performance or whatever you can

 think of please let me know and I'll try and get them done for you.

 But anyway thanks very much for watching and I hope to see you all in the next one.

 Now on this particular lathe, you can adjust the clutch through this small back cover.

 However, on some of our other models, you do have to pull the top cover to get to it.

 You want to put your machine in the second highest RPM possible.

 Once you are in that range, you're going to want to run the machine for about 30 minutes

 This is important because it lets your clutches and brake fully warm up so that you can get

 With your standard 3 jaw chuck on, you want to be able to engage in forward and in reverse

 Keeping these things in spec makes them last a whole lot longer.

 The first thing you're going to want to do is shut down all the power to the machine,

 making sure to follow your company's safety protocol and lockout tagout procedures.

 More than likely, it's going to be your forward clutch that you're going to be adjusting.

 You want to move your shifter handle up and down to watch this collar move back and forth

 This one here is going to be your forward and this is going to be your reverse.

 I went ahead and pulled this out of parts, our parts department for you so you can take

 This right here, this little pin, this is going to be what you're going to be adjusting

 Once you pop it out, that little foot here lets it turn to the side and hold it.

 You can see, once I line it back up, it'll fall back into position.

 Now there's multiple holes around this clutch all the way around that let this pin lock in.

 That way you keep track of how far you've adjusted your clutch.

 Today I'm going to adjust the reverse clutch on this machine because it's a little bit loose.

 You can move your belts in the back of the cabinet to turn your clutches so that you

 I'm just going to take this pin here and work it out until it pops out.

 Put it back into place so that you can keep track of how many notches you've gone.

 The reason you do that is so that you can keep track of how far you've adjusted it.

 Again, just give it a little bit, put the pin back in place, and just ease it around

 Sometimes you may need a little bit more adjustment, but remember, be very easy with it.

 Now on this particular machine, since you're in here, you can adjust the brake.

 The brake is adjusted by these two lock nuts here that back into each other.

 The way you adjust it is just back this outside one off while holding the back one.

 Get it loose, and then just tighten the inside nut in about a half a turn.

 Typically a half a turn will get you about one second off of your braking time.

 Once you're done, button everything back together, and you're good to go.

 you're going to want to put some Loctite or something in there,

 And then you just check to make sure you've still got that movement.

 Now, of course, you realize you've got a little bit of movement,

 so you want to make sure you're not going to get too much movement.

 So you want to make sure you're not going to get too much movement.

 Now, you may have to spread the forks apart a little bit to get it on.

 and you will probably notice you'll probably have to pull the forks apart

 I prefer mine a little bit forward, and that pretty much does it.

 $100 Canadian, plus $25 shipping anywhere in continental North America.

 Ginger, pork belly, fish sauce, water, and a little bit of sugar.

 That's why I'm going to start with maybe as little as possible.

 When my grandmother cooked it, then we put it in the refrigerator.

 If you don't put the sugar, it will be a little bit sort of raw.

 because sometimes sugar gets sticky and then will burn the bottom.

So today I have for you guys a complete college school spirit look

 here which is the more complex, dramatic look and then I do have after I'm done with this

 tutorial, followed right after this one is going to be a more simple look for those that

 My sister runs track for them so I decided to represent Sac State and their colors are

So basically what I did is I put the lighter color in my lid and inner

 have blue and gold, you know gold on your lid, blue on your outer corner.

 to use the lighter color on your inner corner and just smoke it out with the darker color

 I used green, gold and I used a color for the highlight so it's really simple.

 look is obviously more simple than this one and the basis of that look is the eyeliner.

 Okay so the first thing that we're going to do is take a white base and I'm using NYX's

 to take a pointed smudge brush and what I'm going to do is start a line from right under

 my lower lash line and I'm going to trace that line up to create kind of like a cat

 eye line and just continue drawing the outline for the smokey eye.

 for some people if you kind of draw the line and then blend it out which is what I'm going

So I'm drawing that and then I'm going to be filling it in with the green eyeshadow

And then I'm going to take a blending brush and blend out that extremely

And next I'm going to take this posh eyeshadow by Lorac and apply

 that to my brow bone and a little bit into my inner corner just as a highlight.

 I'm going to take MAC's Amber Light eyeshadow and I'm going to apply that with a flat eyeshadow

 brush and I'm also going to apply that to my inner corner and I'm going to apply it

 and I'm using MAC's Molder and I'm going to apply that to my lower lash line and top

And then I'm going to take some black liquid liner and create a nice dramatic wing

 going to take your concealer and you're going to apply that all over your lid just to give

 your finishing powder that you use for your face and you're going to apply that all over

 this light highlight color by Lorac called Posh and apply that to my brow bone just as

Then I'm going to take this really rich chocolate brown color by Estee Lauder

 and I'm going to apply that to my crease with a blending brush and this is just going to

 create a nice subtle smokey effect to give your eye a little bit of depth and dimension

 and I'm going to apply that under my lower lash line and to my waterline.

 not many schools that have purple but this is one of the pencils that I have in that

And we're going to take some black mascara to make your lashes look nice and

 them down below and also tell me your school colors and what school you go to.

 represent your school down below and I'll see you guys next time.

 Hey guys, so today I'm going to show you how to change oil in your car, in this case WRX.

 So the stuff you need is a socket wrench and this is a 17mm bolt.

 And you're going to need an oil pan, a funnel, your oil, this car takes 5 quarts of oil so

 Alright so the first thing you want to do is take off your oil cap and reason one is

 because that's where you're going to be putting the new oil and also it makes the oil come

 Alright so the next thing you want to do is take the drain bolt off, so this is the drain

 So just take your socket wrench, just put it on there and then break it loose.

 Alright so what you want to do now is unscrew the bolt and what I like to do is I like to

 put pressure on the bolt so when it actually comes all the way out I know and then I can

 just pull the bolt away really quick so it minimizes the amount of oil I get on my hands.

 Okay so what a lot of people do is actually change the crush washer.

 Every time you change your oil and what this does is it just makes a seal against your

 But I never do that and I never had a problem with oil leaking so I just reuse the same one.

 Alright so after most of the oil is done going into your oil pan just put your drain bolt

 Alright so the next thing you want to do is take your oil filter off.

 One more tool that I forgot to mention was your, like an oil wrench tool to get the oil

 If all else fails you can shove a screwdriver through your oil filter and get it off that

 So use your wrench, loosen the oil filter until you can do it by hand and then you want

 So once it's loose, loosen the oil filter until oil starts to come out and let it drain

 So let it drain first and once it's done draining then you can actually take the oil filter

 Alright so once it's done dripping just take the oil filter all the way off.

 Be careful because it gets pretty, it's oily, you know it's really oily so it's going to

 And then there's also going to be more oil in the filter so what you want to do is dump

 that into your oil pan and then set your old filter aside somewhere.

 Alright so after you take your filter off make sure you have the rubber piece from the

 old filter, make sure you have that and it's not still stuck in your car because if it

 is it's going to cause a big problem, your oil is going to leak everywhere so make sure

 Alright so next just add a little bit of new oil into your oil filter and make sure you

 drip some on the outside because you want to get oil all around the new oil ring so

 that way when you put it onto the block it creates a nice seal.

 Alright so the next thing you want to do is just put your oil filter back on.

 Alright so once you get it on, when the oil filter is snug make sure you just turn the

 oil filter another quarter turn and that's how tight it should be.

 Alright so the last thing you want to do under the car is just make sure your drain bolt

 The next thing you want to do is take your funnel and add your new oil into the engine.

 If you don't know you can check your owner's manual and it will tell you how much oil your

 So after you're finished put your oil cap back on and then run your car for like 30

 seconds, get the oil to circulate through the engine and then turn your engine off,

 wait another 30 seconds and then make sure that you have the correct amount of oil.

 So first you want to just pull your dipstick out and wipe all the oil off.

 Put it in there, shove it all the way down and then pull it out again and check your

 So you want to look at the two lines and the oil should be right in between there and if

 So you know your oil change was good, wipe it off again and then put your dipstick back

 The oil will help hold the seasonings or rub and help from sticking on the grill.

 Don't be afraid to be liberal, especially on thicker cuts of meat.

 Light your grill and turn it to about a medium to medium-high heat.

 Allow about 15 minutes for the barbecue box to get to temperature.

 This will also allow for the cast iron grill grates to get to that even heat.

 When the temp reads between 500 and 550 degrees, the steaks are ready to go on the grill.

 You might get a little flare up from the oil or fat from the steaks.

 let it go for about 4 minutes on one side, flip it over, and finish it off for about 4 more minutes.

 Once they've reached that temp or time is up, pull the steaks off the grill.

 Once you pull your steaks off the grill, it's important to let them rest.

 Once it's done resting, pull off the cover and it's ready to serve.

 Chocolate garnishes are an easy way to dress up a dessert or plate.

 chocolate runouts, trace a shape onto a piece of parchment paper.

 there are enough overlapping lines to give you decoration stability.

 Once the chocolate has set, use an offset spatula to transfer the garnishes to

To make chocolate leaves, rinse and dry lemon, basil or rose leaves.

 Brush the chocolate over the back of the leaf, being careful to not paint over the

Place on wax paper lined baking sheets and refrigerate until set.

 To make chocolate fans, place mounds of chocolate on a parchment lined baking

 Using a palette knife, swipe the knife through the chocolate to create a fan

Check out our video library for more tips from the Canadian Living Test

 Okay, so today I'm going to be doing my hair and the style I'm looking for is an 80's Madonna

 It's just going to be big, curly, and kind of a simple, just you know, a lot of teasing

 Okay as you can see I already have my hair parted on the side and you want it parted

 right there or you could part it in the middle either way but I prefer to do it on the side.

 When you're going to maintain this and go into sections you're going to want your crown

 Okay, once you have that done just go ahead and take the top part of your hair and brush

 And we want some type of curly effect so just go ahead and get some mousse.

 I'm very picky on products I use in my hair because I don't tend to like the smell all

 too much and you just want to get the mousse all over on your hair.

 It doesn't need to be perfect because Aidy's hair wasn't really perfect.

 And get it like that, just let it fall and then just with one hand pick it up, clamp

 it and then just kind of really messy like just grab all the hair and put it together.

 I'm also going to use for right now just my Herbal Essence Body Envy Volumizing Hairspray.

 Okay once you have this one done, just go ahead and repeat that on the sides and the

 We are making just under 34 litres, we can fill this swimming pool.

 Now to make this you're going to need 5.2 kilos of white sugar, 5 litres of lemon juice,

 9 bottles worth of club soda or soda water and the bottles we use are 1.25 litres.

 Now this swimming pool, I just got it from Kmart, it's a kids waiting pool.

 In terms of whether it's safe to drink out of, I'm going to be drinking out of it so

 But what I did do was once I blew it up I gave it a rinse through with just some water

 and I also took some baking soda and just poured lots of that in, gave it a good scrub

 In terms of these awesome straws, I got these from a $2 shop nearby but I'm going to put

 a link down below and that will link you to Amazon on where you can get them.

 Now because this is such a big swimming pool to fill up and we have to make a sugar water

 So we're going to make it batch by batch and pour it all in together.

 You're going to want this water to heat up just enough until the white sugar dissolves

 Once the sugar is dissolved you can add in the 3.5 cups of lemon juice and 2 liters of

 Now because we've mixed so many batches of this lemonade together, grab a spoon and just

 Now if it's not cold enough for you with your cold tap water going in and your refrigerated

 soda water, you can also toss in really big ice cubes but make sure you've frozen the

 So we're going to grab one of our really big straws or several.

 I've got fillet shoulder of lamb and also I've got here some fondant potatoes.

 got asparagus, cherry tomatoes on the vine or just come off the vine and chantenay carrots

 oil is very pure, it doesn't have any taste to taint the vegetables.

 want to use so that we get the full flavour from the vegetables.

 from raw, I didn't blanch it or anything but the heat from the pan will be enough to

 to, when you're frying tomatoes you should prick the flesh because otherwise they explode

 are boiled ahead of time with sugar and stock to get maximum flavour.

 cooked through and we're just going to reheat them through in the pan as well.

 nice and crisp, everything's still got its colours as you can see here.

The lamb dish that I'm making, it's very simple, it's got kind of classic

It's heated through and your veg is cooked properly and nice and crisp.

This is just to reinforce my pea and mint flavour and also to boost

 the flavour of the vegetables, give it a nice refreshing taste.

So in here, in this little bag I've got a little pea puree which

 I sieved and I added some mint to give it some extra flavour and give it a nice refreshing

 knives which do the job for you so I'm literally using a spatula to do the job.

 cross section here and then I cooked it in stock and butter to give it a really rich

 it so you have to trim it off quite a bit and cook it quite a lot to get it tender.

 And then I'm going to garnish my nice red wine jus which I'm just going to glaze over the top.

 So here you've got a slow roasted fillet shoulder of lamb with pea and mint puree.

 And then you've got sautéed vegetables which are cherry tomatoes, chantenay carrots, asparagus

 Please, if you want to request any dishes, anything in particular or any tutorials,

 Hey guys, so before I get to this video I wanted to let you know really quickly

 know about American Apparel know that their prices are not cheap so I just

 wanted to let you guys know about that before I get to this video.

 it out please let me know what you get below because you guys know I'm on a

 no buy right now I can't buy any clothes but just wanted to put that out there

 and without further ado let's get to the video and I hope you enjoy.

 Hey guys so today I'm revisiting two products from Jane Carter the leave-in

 conditioner and also the nourish and shine and I used these products about a

 year ago for my braid out and I loved it so I'm just gonna be revisiting it now

 to see if I like it still and I'm going to be doing these type of videos all

 month long so hopefully you guys enjoy this and just really quick I want to

 update of products that I used to use so I chose the nourish and shine from her

 Beautiful, Jane Carter, Honey Child I believe, Honey of My Child I never know

 going to be able to receive a product from one of the lines that I absolutely

 love from Curls of Joy so please stay tuned to the end and I hope you enjoy

 Like before I started off with leave-in conditioner but unlike before I started

 And yes we all know that I braid weird I don't know why I do it this way but I do.

 And at the end of the braid I twist my hair instead of braiding it all the way down so that it can have a nice finish and define look.

 This is how much product I use and I wait it five hours before I'm braiding my hair.

 So I was doing this hairstyle for a while and I realized that I was doing it wrong.

 So I was doing this hairstyle for a party I was going to later on that day and unfortunately for me it was raining outside.

 So I really didn't have that much luck this time around when it came to this product.

 Just because my regimen has changed when it comes to where I twist and braid my hair.

 I twist and braid it once and then I hope and pray that it lasts that way for the rest of the week.

 I just don't have time to re-braid and re-twist my hair every night like I used to.

 So unfortunately this product when it comes to a braid out or twist out won't work.

 I was just going to wear a puff but now that my hair is so long puffs don't even look right the way I used to wear them.

I just had a pompadour and I twisted up in the back and had some more up here at the top.

 But that is probably looking real funky so I just kind of pinned it up and I put this little scarf on or whatever and called it a day.

 So yeah I definitely won't be using this product the way I used to.

 So I'll probably use it like that if I have a twist out or something and it's frizzy.

 Now those of you who know about Curl Junkie know that this is an all natural line.

 So I have one of the products that you guys will be able to choose from.

 So I only use this when I need a really intense you know groove therapy type situation with my hair.

 And it's also going to tell you about this really um I don't want to call it a campaign.

 This comes from an incredible book called Simple Weekly Meal Plans and this is volume

 It's a delicious recipe and what's neat about it is it has no oil in it.

 of times everything we have or a lot of dressings have oils and so this really is a good dressing

 Excellent combination of a few ingredients and I'm sure you're going to enjoy this French

 Now what we're going to be doing is putting the ingredients into the personal blender

 and we love the personal blender because it allows us to mix things up real easily and

 is no high fructose corn syrup in here and it's much healthier for you than your typical

 We're also using some low sodium tamari and tamari sauce is basically a form of a soy

 Then we've got two small cloves of garlic that we have chopped up.

 And to get everything off the bottom you might just want to pick it up and shake it a little

 And French dressings are some that are very popular with people.

 Whether they're tomatoes, whether they're carrots, whether they're cucumber.

 Just a very attractive dressing and we think you'll enjoy it quite a bit with your next salad.

 You can take this and put what's left, what you don't use, in a container and put it in

 your salad box and that way it's ready and you have a really good salad dressing there

 So here's another quick simple recipe from this book, Simple Weekly Meal Plans.

 I'm Chris Schwartz and today we're going to build a Dutch tool chest.

 importantly it can hold every tool you need for hand tool woodworking.

 length of the tail, is the most important part of the dovetail layout.

The second pair of dividers is going to be used to split up this one

 giant tail we've created, this condor tail, into as many dovetails as we would

But what you do is you say, okay, I'm going to lay out four dovetails.

 And so I'm going to just sort of guess that this looks like it's about 1 4th of

 far corner away from me because this actually, with this orientation, it

 little trench that is indeed 90 degrees to the face and I can take my square and

 in there with a chisel and we're going to pare away a little bit of the extra

Now what's important to note is that this area that I'm sort of knifing

 in right here, so this area right here where the knife is, that area you can

 pare away without affecting the appearance of the joint on the outside.

 that extra meat and that should give me some relief when the joint goes together

 there and it didn't crumble anymore and we're about halfway in now.

 going to continue and I'm going to put the joint together completely.

 thing to do before we glue up the sides to the bottom is to cut that 30 degree

 angle on the sides so the lid will be slanted instead of square.

 it is I just take a sliding bevel and I've set it to 30 degrees using, you know,

 draw that 30 degree angle from the top corner and then I'm going to carry that

 then I just need to cross cut that off with a little handsaw here, a little

 So with the shelf in place, the next step is to cut the little notches here in the

 front shelf and in the bottom and that will allow the sliding lock to come in

 Hi folks, remember I showed you how to play what I've called box patterns.

 So assuming you can do that already, if you can't go back to the first video, box patterns

 So what we're going to do here is just take in the first two holes.

 So to remind you, you're breathing out on one, sliding up to two, just try that.

 And then you just reverse the breathing, breathe in on two and slide back down to one.

 If you were single tonguing you would be going ta ta ta ta ta ta ta ta ta.

 Or it could be ka, ka ka ka ka, anything you like, sasa, doesn't matter.

 If you double tongued ta ka ta ka you can say it much faster, ta ka ta ka ta ka ta ka

 ta ka ta ka ta ka ta ka ta ka ta ka, than you can if you're single tongued.

 So we're going to try and combine double tonguing and then triple tonguing with movement on the

 This is pretty tricky stuff, so it's something I'm working on myself and you could perhaps

 And then, breathing in, ta ka going down, hole two hole one, breathing in.

 It's quite a simple process isn't it, because you're just moving the harmonica across the

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to do a how-to on applying glitter dust with activator.

 little bottle of activator and a cool little brush to apply it with.

 of the activator in the lid, and then you can just scoop your glitter in there just

 it keeps it there all night so it doesn't fall all over your face.

If it starts to dry out, you can just add another drop of the activator

 the straight glitter onto that and that will help to dry it out and set it as well.

 not to open your eyes until it's completely dry, otherwise it will end up up here.

All right, so I'm just going to leave her eyes closed while it dries, but

I am taking 2 teaspoons of chana dal and 2 teaspoons of urad dal.

 Add 1 teaspoon of mustard seeds, 1 teaspoon of cumin seeds and 2 large green chillies.

 And Gabe's going to teach us about how to do a pre-flight on the helicopter, a start up here.

 Alright, this is the R22 start and run up checklist that we have here at Utah Helicopter.

 Alright, first thing it says for us to do before engine start, we need to check pressure, altitude, and temperature.

 In order to check pressure and altitude, we set the altimeter to 9 or 9 or 2.

 Checking the temperature, master switch on, it says 29 degrees Celsius.

 Flipping the checklist over, we get VNE and manifold pressure limits.

 The cyclic and collective friction off, so I'll hold the checklist for you right here.

 We want to do a control check like this, all the way up and around.

 Around here, roll the throttle off, pedals all the way down, back to neutral position.

 That was the checks right here, cyclic and collective friction, pedals, throttle.

 Pedals are neutral, landing light switch off, governor switch off.

We want to make sure and push these, ensuring that they are all down.

 The primer, it would be right here, we don't have one, but that would need to be down and locked.

 Clutch disengaged, altimeter set, we did that in the beginning.

 Here we would give, if it was cold, we'd give the throttle a few twists.

 We'd give this throttle, or give the key a twist right there to fire it up.

 Take a cleaver and just run it down the ear of corn to get the kernels of corn.

 Another thing about enchiladas is you've got to have corn tortillas.

 The pan seared with some more caramelized red onion, yellow onion.

 Take everything out of the stove and check that you have all the parts.

 Stove body, bayonet pipe, grate, chimney sections, spark arrestor, insulation pipe.

 Place the tray inside the insulation pipe so that the chain sticks out through the topmost line of holes.

 Pour the insulation pipe over the chimney, starting at the top end.

 Join the insulation pipe to the spark arrestor using the long chain.

 Adjust the height of the insulation pipe by attaching the short chain to the long chain.

 Readjust the height of the insulation pipe so that the chimney does not touch the fabric.

 Read important information when making a fire before using the stove.

 We'll have a couple of green vegetables if I have time to get them uploaded.

 I've already taken green beans and they're of this variety here.

 Nothing special, but you'll find them in your grocery store that you can buy by the pound.

 So typically what you're going to do is take a knife and then see if there is a string

 And there will be an end where it was attached to the vine that you want to bring off.

 But you still want to take it off because that's not really pleasant to eat.

 And as you break them, if strings like that come along, you certainly want to take them

 So my point here is that you don't just take a knife and cut them to get this form.

 I've already washed these a few times and I have used a colander to drain them.

 So what we have are just the green beans without any extra water.

 And honestly, this is a very small amount to spend the time with a slow cooker cooking.

 And the reason is that we'll be eating our Thanksgiving early because I'm preparing all

 And then we'll be eating Thanksgiving on Thanksgiving Day at my brother's house.

 But you can double the recipe or you can triple it, whatever you need because a crock pot

 And then you can always come back as they're cooking and check for salt.

 I'm just starting with one half teaspoon, just sprinkling that around over the top.

 And the reason that's so light is that I'm going to be seasoning with ham.

 Now as far as water, when you use a slow cooker like this, you put the lid on and the moisture

 But you need a little bit of water to start with on green beans.

 Now if you decide that you'd like to do yours on the stove instead of in a slow cooker,

 And Cumberland Gap is an area in Kentucky that's not too far from where we live.

 It doesn't matter what the brand is, Hormel or something like that.

 But if you can find some little cubed ham, that's really neat to put in here.

 This is an 8-ounce package, but this would overpower the green beans.

 I'm just going to take what I think is about a third of the package.

 Meaning if I use the whole package, I would probably use 3 pounds of green beans to go

 It will change color as it cooks and it will be the regular look of cooked green beans,

 But I'm going to speed it up a little bit, so we'll go to high.

 And I could plug it in here, but I plan to use the counter later today.

 But for southern green beans, they're going to be almost to the mushy point.

 And at this point, I can just walk away from it and not worry about it until I want to

 On our slow cooker green beans seasoned with ham, it's been six hours that they've been

 And it's sort of maintained that amount of liquid all the way through.

 And you can also tell by the texture, they're ready to come up.

 So what I plan to do is dip them out and put them in this bowl.

 So the next time you see them, they will be ready to serve in this bowl.

 If you're used to northern green beans, you may want to cook them for a less amount of time.

 But we generally cook ours until they are kind of an olive color.

 But they're still a little bit of, they still have a little bit of crispiness, a little bit of crunchiness.

 So I hope you enjoy the slow cooker green beans seasoned with ham.

 There are several different reasons you might want to pop the steering wheel off.

 You might want to take it off to do some work on the steering column,

 you might want to do some alignment, or you may want to get to the

 Now, I know there's lots of different pullers available and everybody says, oh, taking the steering wheel

 I'm going to wedge my knees, my legs against the bottom of the steering wheel here,

 or if we'd backed the nut off too far, we would have buggered the threads on the nut.

When you go to put it back on, put some grease around on the inside,

 test it, and make sure that you're straight going down the road.

 you say, but then when you tighten it up, it turns out that, in fact, it is different.

 Alright, hello, this is Mexican man John and this is an unboxing of the Canon remote switch

 This is like the cheapest of the cheap too, it's like 20 bucks and I know some of them are like 200

 Alright, so I haven't plugged it in right now and you have press it and it will focus

 Obviously and then you push it all the way down and it will take the picture the button has to be pressed down and you

 you can do extremely long exposure pictures, which is really nice and

 And this doesn't have like a timer or anything and it also doesn't

 Really really simple and also it has these little grooves right here so you can wind up the cord really easy.

Be sure to LIKE favorite subscribe and I'll see you next Wednesday

 Ok you're probably wondering what the hell happened to that transmission.

 Secondly, it's a bad thing that that happened to that transmission.

 But the good thing about it is you get to see what happens to transmissions when you

 In this particular situation, I build a lot of nostalgic drag cars.

 I build transmissions for like 33 Willys, 55 Chevy Gases, cars of that nature.

 And this particular car, I think I built the transmission about a little bit over a year

 ago and the car has seen over 100 quarter mile passes, pretty hard passes with a hefty

 Anyway, what happened was the 9 inch Ford rear that was in this car, the pinion blew

 right through the side of the case, locked the rear axle up obviously, twisted the drive

 So what happens is as the drive shaft is spinning, it tries to twist the transmission

 So what I'm going to do is repair this transmission, put a new case on it.

 Surprisingly, the inside of the gearbox was in really good shape.

 But what I decided to do on this video is show you how to disassemble a Muncie gear

 A lot of times people ruin speedometer gears trying to put pullers on them, trying to hit

 So I'm going to show you how I take apart a Muncie gear train in about 8 minutes.

 I'm going to quickly show you how I disassemble a main shaft from Muncie.

 And then what I'm going to do is I'm going to flip this around and try to get this snap

 Now what we'll do is we'll press from the bottom all the way through.

 You see the presser is now making contact with the output shaft and it's pressing actually

 By using the second gear to press against the hub inside here, in other words there's

 a hub, this hub over here, and that hub is pressing against the sleeve that's underneath

 And by the way, I'm using one of these cheap hundred dollar presses I got from a company

 Okay, so now we've dropped down and that means that first gear sleeve is pressed off.

 And see now that the reverse gear rests right up against the speedometer gear.

 So we have this little gap now where it dropped down and the reverse gear is up against the

 And now, put the block in place over here, tighten up the press again, and start pressing

 Now, by doing it this way, you never damage the soft metal of the speedometer gear with

 And when you put it back on, you just heat it back up and shrink it into place.

 So now I'll take that gear off, reverse gear, get it out of the way.

 First gear ring, one-two synchronizer assembly, and second gear.

 It's not got a dent or a ding in it from somebody trying to pull on it or hammer on it.

 Attach just back of the eye, run down a little ways, then trim away the waste.

 The shuck material, some fine silvery Z-lon, just a few strands.

 Then keeping the Z-lon on top, just run the thread to the end of the shank.

 There's a small notch at the top, and I'll keep that on my right side and then tie them

 About twice the amount of the shuck, but I tie it in in the center and then fold back

 I'll line up the tips and then bunch them together to form the wing, which is about

 We now have the two stems and they will be tied down, angled downwards.

 Then, trim them relatively short, keeping the thread out of the way to form legs.

 On top of this come two barbs of lemon wood duck to form some antenna.

 I'm tying it in, taking fairly low on the hurl itself so that the quill is robust enough

 This is Kevin McCain with Kevin McCain Studios and we're going to talk about mixing our earth

 Earth tones and browns are wonderful colors that help unify a painting because they're

 low in intensity and they just help the brighter colors just shine more because they're against

 Anyone who's had like any experience with crayons as a kid knows, well if we just mix

 We're going to try to control it a little bit better than that.

 And so I'm going to use these to help me mix these wonderful browns.

 The easiest way to mix browns is to use complementary colors and by using these primaries that lean

 on either side of the color itself you can more easily get those complementary colors

 Let's go ahead and start out by mixing yellow ochre, that kind of brownish yellows that

 This is going to be my primary color to mix into and I'm going to add to it a little bit

 I might use a little red that's got a little more violet to it.

 The violet is going to knock down the intensity of this yellow.

 Again the violet of the red and the yellow leaning of the green is going to contrast

 And I still need to knock it down a little bit more so I'll use a violet blue.

 I don't want the green blue because I don't want this going too green.

 There we go, that's where we're starting to get that nice color.

 And now we've got this yellow and that's very much an earthy sort of yellow like our yellow

 Now our yellow ochre might actually be a little bit lighter so we could then add just a little

 That would be too much right there but we could add white to it and that's about a yellow

 I can also deepen it and make it more red if I wanted to by adding reds and these different

 What I would start with my red browns is I'd start with a red and I'd grab like this.

 I'll grab both of them just to give myself a little more value because of this dark red.

 It's also violet, yes, it's also orange but this is more of a value thing.

 So I've got my red and now I'm going to add my compliment to it which is green so I'll

 add a little bit of blue but I'm going to grab my more violet blue and my more green

 And mix that together and I actually have so much green into this that it's actually

 If I wanted it to be more of a raw sienna I need to bring some more of the orange family

 As you can see it's also made it more of a neutral sort of greenish brown.

 And then I can just bring in more of the red into it using my cad red light to keep the

 If I needed to go a little deeper red I would then bring in my violet red which will both

 deepen it and introduce a little bit more violet red and a little different value.

 So anytime I want to mix my browns I'm just going to be mixing variations of my um basically

 Green and red, purple and yellow or um red and green, purple and yellow, orange and blue.

 And those are my complementary color mixtures and I will get a brown.

 So if I had an orange and I used blue this is going to give me depending on what the

 Of course the blue that's a very strong blue but that has knocked down my orange and it's

 If I mix a violet and I'm going to put a little bit of white in this because otherwise you

 There's my violet blue and this will give me my little violet color right there.

 And the opposite of violet is yellow and depending on how much yellow I add I can either make

 this you know a um you know it can either be a earthy yellow or more violet.

 If I wanted to make that more violet I'd just grab some more of my blue and my red and I

 And so we've done our um starting with violet, adding yellow, we did our orange and blue.

 Here's my green and I'm going to add my red to my green and again depending on how much

 red I add or how much green it will be either more green or more red depending on how much

 more green there is to red or how much more red there is to green.

 Right now it's still leaning fairly green so I could add more red and make it more of

 So I mean depending on what you add will shift that brown or that earth tones color.

 Orange and blue, yellow and violet, red and green and by varying those mixers you can

 shift your browns either to say with my yellows and violet I could shift more violet or yellow

 So this is how you mix your earth tones using this sort of a palette.

 This has been Kevin McCain with mixing your earth tones from primary colors.

 You can find out about the paintings that I'm doing that I have coming out of my studio.

 eggs, 1 3rd cup of vegetable oil or I'm substituting with canola oil.

 a freshly squeezed lemon, but you can substitute if you have lemon extract on hand, you can

About a teaspoon should do it or more if you like it really lemony.

 with some powdered sugar, confectioners sugar, some places call it icing sugar.

And if you want to make a glaze, you're going to use that and more

Combine your cake mix, your 2 eggs, your oil and your lemon juice and mix

Next you're going to scoop little balls, your desired size, it doesn't

 matter, I'm using a cookie scoop, into powdered sugar and coat them.

 One, put them on your cookie sheet instead of putting them directly on there, put them

 them onto your baking sheet and just put powdered sugar on the top.

 your spoon, it will get out the rust faster without it sticking as much.

 I usually dump several of the little cookie scoops into a bowl and then powder them up

If I was less impatient and had refrigerated this dough, I wouldn't

 Okay, so now you're going to bake these in the oven at 350 for about 8-10 minutes.

So keep that in mind and keep a firm check on them and I'll show you

 Okay, instead of the powdered sugar or on top of it, it doesn't matter, you can make

All you do to make a lemon glaze is you take about 3 quarters of a cup

 lemon juice will make it have more of a lemony complimentary taste to it.

You can see they still, I kind of poked this one, they kind of look

What you want to look for is that the edges have started to turn a little

And I have found that some recipes, like if I ever use a chocolate

 cake mix, to me they don't ever come out quite as tasty as the lemon ones do.

 that to keep them moister, it is good to add a little bit of chocolate syrup or chocolate

 sauce to the actual dough before you scoop them out and it keeps them moist.

My favorite though, out of all the ones I have done, these are my

 Print out your portraits the size of the paper you want to use.

 For the next step, I'm using SpeedBlaw fluorescent block print ink

 When the background is dry, put the background stencil over the top.

First I'm taking a salmon tone concealer to even out all discoloration

 around my eyes, nose, chin, and even some blemishes around my face.

 I'm taking the MAC foundation in NC40 and I'm applying it all over my face to even out

 a primer or base to ensure zero chance of eyeshadow fading away.

 Next I'm taking a silver eyeshadow by Ben Nye in the color Silver and I'm applying it

 corner of the eye and eventually creating a V-like shape in the outer corner and crease.

 Here, I'm continually going back for more eyeshadow to achieve the deepest black possible.

 Don't forget to line those eyes using an angled brush in the same black eyeshadow for the

 Take any blending brush that you can find and simply blend away.

When using liquid liner and you accidentally create a blob, take your

I'm mixing a rose and a hot pink blush to compliment my skin tone.

 Hi, I'm Chef Joy Houston, and today we're going to learn to make the Sun Warrior Power

 Now, as we go through this, I'm going to let you know some substitutions that you can make

 based on seasonality, but I have intentionally chosen spinach, a green that tends to be available

 all year round, and blueberries, frozen blueberries, which again, since they're frozen, tend to

 If you like collard, you like Swiss kale, standard kale, whatever you like, you could

 The spinach is one I love to use because not only does it have an extremely amazing nutritional

 So we get all those nutritional benefits and the fiber, and it's not going to sort of mess

 The blueberries I've gone with because it's very low glycemic, so we get a nice, sweet,

 fruity taste, but it really doesn't have that much sugar for as much flavor as it brings

 Now, for me, I'm not the type to come back and forth and want to be making a whole bunch

 I like to have some juice, some meals, some true food, and then some liquid food.

 So when I make a shake and it's intended to replace the meal, I just go for it.

 I put it all in one, but I'm also a really picky eater, so I'm not going to eat anything

 So we want to get all of our protein powders and our superfoods into this smoothie to make

 The chocolate tastes great too, but vanilla is my favorite, so I'm going to use the vanilla.

 And then I have their activated barley, which is a good source of sustained energy throughout

 You can use a chlorella powder as well, but this to me is a sort of nature's multivitamin.

 I mean, not only is it alkalizing and good for the immunity, but you got your B vitamins

 in there, A, C, E. It's just one of my favorite things to make sure that I get into my diet

 The chlorophyll alone, for the properties of the chlorophyll, it's totally worth making

 Now a lot of what we're going to be consuming in this smoothie is fat soluble.

 So to accomplish that, you can use a flax oil, any kind of oil that you are wanting

 Now you'll notice I put all of the powders in the bottom of the blender.

 I do that intentionally because when you are paying for quality products like the Sun

 Warrior products, you're paying for superfoods in powder form, you don't want to put them

 on the top of your smoothie because when you turn your blender on, they're going to splatter

 up against the side of the blender and you're going to have to scrape and scrape with the

 So I think it is best to put them right in the bottom by the blade so you know that they're

 going to get mixed up with all the yummy things you're putting in your smoothie.

 Really opens up the cells, gets them oxygenated, lets them take up energy easier.

 That's just great in your water when you're working out too if you're not using that product,

 You could just add either water, coconut water, almond milk if you like it creamy.

 I'm not concerned about my sugar intake because everything else in this is so low sugar.

 So what I have here is a mixture of apple juice, organic apple juice, and chia.

 You can go ahead and put one tablespoon of chia in here and that's going to give you

 But I like the taste of my chia once it has puffed up and swelled.

 So I mix mine into a juice like this and we want one cup of liquid here.

 We've got a lovely bunch of fiber, lots of phytonutrients and antioxidants here.

 Okay, once I can see everything is integrated, now I can whip it up on high.

 I'm going to tie this in up near the head and just pull it tight.

 I'm going to run it back a little further than normal under the bend of the hook.

 Now if you want to weight this fly down and really get it down deep and do the Caddis

 crawl as you lift it off the bottom, you can do that by putting some lead under this.

 When you wrap this material, it's important to note I'm just loosely laying this and I'm

 But that stuff is sticky enough that it really lays nicely when you do that.

 Now you'd say, well I need to put a rib on that or make it a little tougher.

 Now you can get the full mask or you can buy and grind it yourself in your coffee grinder

 which is what I like to do because I like a lot of guard hairs in mine.

 And then when you use your Pedigene tool, I like to take just some monofilament and

 I'll lay that on the top here and just push straight down and get it in.

 So now I've got the tool loaded with the material and it's sticking up.

 I'm going to grab it with the clamp here and it comes out and it's holding it.

 And I will trim away the stem and leave this material sticking out and then I'll put it

 And then I will spin my tool and it will make my thorax for this fly.

 So the end result is a very buggy mix of CDC, partridge, and dubbing.

 So what I have here is a thorax of CDC, dubbing, and partridge.

 Now the CDC will have some fibers that kind of stick out and hang back behind.

 And initially CDC is going to float real well and be pretty buoyant.

 But if you take it and just rub it with your fingers in a little water, if you want to

 If you want to run this off of a nymph rig, you're going to get that caddis bubble.

 They create a bubble to emerge and that CDC adds air bubbles into the fly.

 I mean, if you look at this bug in the water, he's got kind of a little black portion up near the head.

 I want them to have kind of a big head and then I put a really glossy finish on them.

 It all catches fish this time of year when those McKenzie caddis start popping.

 you don't actually have to use it to open the car or turn on the ignition.

 keep it in your pocket and it senses that it's there and everything works.

 don't know if you're going to be able to see this very well but there's basically a little

 take this to the dealership and pay an arm and a leg for this service.

 and bought this thing you'd only pay two or three dollars for a battery.

Again this only has to do if you have, applies if you have the comfort access

If you don't your battery should be rechargeable and by putting it into the

 These are the rice that we're going to use in our Magollan beef recipe.

 And it comes in a package like this, and therefore you need to take them out and separate them into small batches so that you can put them in the oil so it puffs up properly.

 Here's two cups of oil that we have been heated separately, and it should be within the temperature that we are going to deep fry with.

 There's a different way that you could test it by using a chopstick.

 If it's fine in the peripheral area of the chopstick, and that will be ready to deep fry.

 Okay, the next thing, if you don't have a pair of chopsticks, you can put a piece of green onion like this and put them in there, and it stays in the top, and it turns, then we're ready to, the temperature is deep fried.

 And the other thing you could use to help us visualize if it's ready or not is put a piece of carrot in there, and a little strip like this, again stays in the top, and then it sizzles as well.

 So our temperature is 375 degrees, or a little bit more, depends how big this bubbling is that you can see.

 And here's the rice sticks, and you put it in, and it should puff up, as you can see that it does.

 So if we were to, as soon as you bring it up, about two seconds each side, you're ready to take it out.

 That's two seconds on one side, thousand one, thousand two, but there we go, and we're done on this batch as well.

 And it cups up, turn it over, thousand one, thousand two, and it's ready.

 So you gotta take it out immediately, otherwise it will turn brown on you, and we don't want that to happen.

 We just want to fry it up, and it should be quite red, quite white in order to use it properly.

 After you have deep-fried your product for the recipe, you should remove the oil from the wok to a metal container,

 But the most important thing to remember, however, is that when you pour the oil from the wok,

 you must wipe the outside of the wok with a paper towel to prevent any oil dripping down into the bottom of the wok,

 Therefore, when you have the oil in the container, you must cool down to room temperature before you filter it out.

 After the oil cooled down to room temperature, we must filter it out and save it in the refrigerator for next cooking.

 And here's a strainer, which is about one 32-inch mash, and we're going to put it on top of here,

 As you can see, we're filtering out the product that we don't want in the oil, okay?

 And of course, put a cover on and then refrigerate it, and it's good for at least two weeks.

 Here are the deep-fried rice sticks that we have fried earlier,

 so we're going to break them down a little bit so that they could kind of hug the plate here

 and also receive our product when we finish cooking and put it on the top.

 Here's the same oil that we used to deep-fry rice sticks, and now it's 275 degrees.

 And we're going to continue frying with our marinated beef, which is right here.

 As you can see, it is quite hot, and again, we do not want to cook the beef completely.

 We just want a quick seal, and therefore, after you see all the color has been changed from the outside,

 which was a reddish, to a kind of grayish color, then we remove it with our strainer.

 All right today, we're gonna go over this common fuel leak on the 7.3 liter Ford Powerstroke

 It's almost always leaks at the water drain valve and I've noticed this happens

 It doesn't matter whenever the temperature change it can go from hot to cold cold to hot

Also a lot of people believe it's because of the ultra low sulfur fuel

 You can even fix it for yourself for about $5 or you can buy the valve from Ford

 We're gonna do is we're gonna start off draining it put a drain pan on a here

 If it's still connected properly you're on the back of the valve

 It's there's a tube that runs on the front of the cylinder head and drops

 It's pretty much the front of your cylinder head right below the AC compressor the drop right down there

 Depending on the year what emissions you have on your truck like a 99 mm

 This nuts a captive nut you shouldn't have to worry about losing it

 Just push it back just take my pry bar here push it back push it down now.

 International dealer part store, whichever you can buy the complete valve assembly

 They give you all new bolts give you the new lever give you a new valve

 But the valves themselves are never bad it's always the seals if you just take these O-rings

 Replace those two O-rings that'll stop 99% of leaks you can also

 This O-ring is not common to leak at least in our area our area.

It's always these two so anyhow you can replace these three O-rings

 Again, put new O-rings in there put your new lever on that's also only fits on one way so you won't get it on

 I'll bring it down and we want to make sure that we have this dimple

 Then just the reverse plug them back in and you're done pretty much.

 Monday I showed you how to make that absolutely divine tiramisu cheesecake and today we're

Now I like to add a little bit at a time until I get the right consistency.

Then we're going to pop it into the fridge for about 20 minutes to

Next into a bowl we're going to add in the cream cheese, the sugar, the sour cream,

 in the oven with the oven turned off with the door ajar for one to two hours then into

To finish off our cheesecake we're going to cover the top with a little

Now for this recipe I'm using a combination of two different Ferrero Rochers.

 Alternating each one I'm then going to place them around the edge.

 Thanks again for joining me, have a fantastic weekend and I'll see you all on Monday.

 This is me in August of 2011, very ill, fresh out of chemotherapy, incurable disease, multiple

 All due to something called juicing, I'm stronger and healthier than I was at 30 years old.

 When I asked doctors on my show, how can vegetable liquids make all this difference, they said

 If I tried to eat this every day, your system couldn't handle it and you wouldn't do it.

 These are the magic ingredients, kale, one grouping, celery, one grouping, one grand green apple,

 Now this is a juicer, it's called a Breville, B as in boy or E-V-I-L-L-E.

 It makes the juice come out in a whole lot more consistent fashion, it's a whole lot faster to do

 And with the kale in particular, this one more than anything holds chemicals and you can't wash it off.

 My wife loves this and my friends that are doing it all say they like it.

 What you do is fill it up to about this line, somewhere in there.

 Because what you want to do if you're lazy like me, instead of doing all this every day,

 You make 7 to 14 bottles like this in one day, put it in the freezer.

 Get up in the morning, run a little tap water, stick it in and you let it thaw out.

 My wife and I have done it, drinking it fresh and drinking it frozen.

 We get the same incredible energy surge and health from frozen or from fresh.

 But I'm here to tell you what happens is, according to all the doctors that I've talked to,

 And without going on a diet, you just don't want to eat very much

 Hi, I'm Courtney with Redmond Pilates Center, Real Pilates, Real Results.

 Last time I took you through an abbreviated warm-up on the reformer.

 Today I'm going to take you through a series of exercises on the short box.

 All of these exercises are very concentrated core strengtheners working the abdominals,

 They are stretching and strengthening the back and working on keeping the spine healthy

 It's opening of the low back and working on articulating the spine.

 I'm going to lift my back as straight and tall as it can be, challenging that lift as

 I hinge back without letting my spine bend or sinking down into my back.

 Side to side is a stretch of the low back and working through the sides, keeping the

 hips planted into the box and then reaching your body as far toward the corners of the

 The twisting is working on whittling the waistline and building a lot of strength and control

 The tree is a stretch of the back side of the body, of the back side of the leg, and

 Keeping the hips square, using the stomach to articulate the spine.

 And getting a good lift and stretch of the low back and the back of the leg.

 Please stick with us for our next installment where we'll go through some exercises on the

 interesting I am adding a special ingredient that I have never used in my

 gonna start with two sticks of room-temperature butter and about three

Oh this is such a good feeling, having this soft dough between my fingers.

 add 1 third cup of extra virgin olive oil and a cup of brown sugar.

 apples only for about five to seven minutes or until they become really nice

We don't want to overcook them because they will be they are going in

 oven after this and they will have a chance to bake once they're in a dough.

 We can just remove the edges and we can use them for the topping.

 and now it's a good time to add about a handful of crema wheat, which is about

 wheat in is that so the crema wheat will suck all the extra juices, all the apple

A little bit of cinnamon and a little bit more of vanilla, maybe about a

 spreading this dough and just putting it over the filling, I'm just gonna make

 the crumbs out of it, which will speed up the time for me because I am in a rush.

 And also what it's gonna do, it's gonna make, it's gonna allow me to use every

 use up all of this dough and kind of make it faster and quicker and much

In order to make this dough crummy I'm just gonna add a little bit

 of more flour and I'm gonna go and grab a little bit of raw sugar.

 very coarse and its coarseness will help me make these crumbs smaller.

Let's just pour these crumbs over our cake and while I'm doing all this

 I preheated oven on 360 but now I'm gonna turn the temperature down to 350 and

 trust me there is nothing chemists can do to recreate the real aroma of cinnamon,

 continue to bake and cook because I just love the good smell of cooking in a home.

 Until next time I hope you too will get busy and start cooking.

 my favorite ways to prepare vegetables and it just really adds a lot of flavor

 fresh avocado, grape tomatoes, and a little bit of a secret balsamic

 dish that you can make for your barbecues instead of a coleslaw or

 So here I have the final product and again this is a great grilled summer

Today I used grilled zucchini, grilled red onion, some fresh mozzarella

 little balls, some grape tomatoes, and a little bit of avocado with some

 suggestions for me to make things healthier let me know and I'll try and

 Turn your special little girl into a princess with these adorable princess

Her imagination will leap and dance in these dreamy reversible capes.

 instructions for the cape, you will receive a multi-sized hood and neckline

 opening, but for the demonstration I will be working in half scale.

 reversible cape, you will be repeating this process for the second fabric.

 we're going to do is align the selvedges and remember I'm working in

I'm also using the yardstick compass, so place the point holder end on

 pivot point and now I'm going to put firm pressure on the lead end and mark a

 half circle all the way around to complete one of the layers of the cape.

 Again, I would repeat this process for the second layer and after completing

 the pivoting and marking, I also will place the hood pattern along the

 aligning the pivot point on the earlier pivot point marking and I'm going to

 the center front and now I need to cut open the center front and give it a nice

So I create the opening for the cape and again I would repeat this

 end of the tie strip and I'm inserting it into the 1 inch bias tape maker.

 going to thread with a needle through the opening of the 1 inch bias tape

 maker until the tip of the fabric comes out and then I will press and I will

 slide the bias tape maker until I have completed pressing the full length of

At the straight end I would sew a small seam and then I would turn my

 tie right side out, inserting all of the raw edges to the interior of the tie and

I'm going to place the tie a half inch down from the center front

 neck edge and pin in place and now I'm ready to construct the hood.

 center back seam of both the main fabric and the reversible fabric on the hood

Turn one hood right side out and insert it into the main hood section

 and what we're going to do is align these raw edges and sew the center front

 earlier marking that I had made and we're going to I'm going to pin baste it

 in place and the center front edge of the hood I'm going to pin a half inch in

 going to align the center back marking of the interior cape to the center back

 hood on the center back and again pin all of the layers together creating a

This sample shows that I have completed sewing the neckline edge

 of course pressing as you go and now we're going to wrap our seam allowance

 to the lining side of the cape and we're going to sew each of the center fronts

 center front turn it right side out and press up a half inch hem on both the

 edge stitch the center front of the cape and your cape is complete.

 shimmery reversible princess cape and get ready to make your little princess

 Hello YouTube, this is MTR Mags here and today we have another guitar tutorial for you.

 We are going to be learning how to play the song from Transformers Arrival to Earth.

 Pretty simple, we're only using the first, second and third string, your E, B and G.

 And then you're going to play first on your second and then you're going to play that

 So basically the first time you play it, you're going to play it in half notes and then you're

 Then you're going to go fourth fret on the second string, third fret on the third string,

 third on the second string, then you're going to play open on the third, third on the third,

 Open on the third, first on the second, third on the first, fourth on the second, first

 on the first, fourth on the second, third on the second, first on the second.

 Then after that, you're basically going to repeat that same thing again, but there's

 So when you start the first time, instead of playing an open G on the half note one,

 And when you get to this point, we're going to change it again.

 Then you're going to play first on the third, and then you're going to play fourth on the

 So just a little bit changes, but you're still repeating the same thing, kind of.

 And the thing they do with this song is they go from here, and they just go up a higher

 So those of you who do not know what a higher octave is, is basically say if you're playing

 So instead of playing here, you're just going to go up to the next highest G, basically.

 So if we're playing all the way up here, you're basically going to be going all the way up

 And be playing the same thing, all on the same notes, just a higher pitch.

 And if y'all would like to learn how to play it on the higher notes up here, which comes

 after this in the actual song, please comment and tell me if you'd like that.

 If you do, then I'll create another tutorial on how to do this as a part two.

 Please like and subscribe, comment, and I will see you next time.

 Today I have another look featuring the brand new Wet n Wild Where's the Party collection.

 So I have some purple and blue in the crease, some white on the inner tear duct, and I have

 If you want to see how I achieve this beautiful makeup tutorial, please stay tuned.

 So the first color I'm going to take out of the Shimmer the Night Away palette is this

 So I'm going to take a large fluffy brush and place it into the crease.

 Now taking the same palette, I'm going to use this beautiful lavender purple above the

 I'm going to place this on one half of the eyelid with a large flat shader brush.

 So now I'm going into Drink It A Glass of Shine which is the dupe for the I Love Matte

 I'm going to take this darker purple and place it next to that lavender purple out of the

 So I'm taking Shimmer the Night Away again and I'm going to take this white which is

 Now I'm going to place it in the inner tear duct where it is clear.

 Taking the same palette, I'm going to use this beautiful pinkish purple above the lavender

 color and I'm going to place it on top of the blue to blend it out and to add some of

 Now for the brow bone highlight, I'm taking Blame It On Midnight and I'm going to place

 Now to that same palette, I'm going to take the blue, the lavender, and the white and

 Now for the lips, I wanted something really soft and just a little tint of color so I'm

 I'm just going to place it all on the lips and blend it together.

 Now for these cheeks, I'm taking this baked blush and this one is made by Black Radiance.

 It is called Toasted Almond and I'm going to place it lightly on the cheeks.

 I didn't want too much color on the cheeks, just a wash of color.

 Just placing it on apples of my cheeks and blending it up towards the temples.

 I hope you like this makeup look and don't forget to check out the other makeup look

 I did Sparkle Till Morning and so now I have Drinking A Glass Of Shine.

 This is the first time I've used it, I'm not sure if it's going to happen.

 This here is a removable bucket that you can use to compost with.

 So I got some refried beans, pinto beans, with a little bit of mold.

 Oh, and there's also, surprise, there it is, tuna casserole are in there.

 And we got an orange peel, which is much more, well not orange peel, banana peel.

 And so right there is the fill line, so I think we're pretty good.

 And then at this point, we throw the lid on, lock it up, push the power button, and

 I'm not sure how long it ran for, because it was pretty much just before bed that I

 Now I did figure out the reason why I had trouble pulling the pail out last night was

 I'm not sure if that's a little bit leftover of the banana there or maybe the seaweed,

 So I did talk to the manufacturer who had actually great customer support.

 We actually exchanged about four emails in about an hour the morning before I ordered

 And he basically said, if you want to use it for outdoor use, to mix it with soil, about

 So it does have an earthy smell, just like compost has an earthy smell.

 And what I plan on doing is I'll do this for a couple more weeks and see what I think about

 The one last thing I wanted to add was you can get this from their website.

 It was about $5.50 on their website and Amazon dropped their price a little bit to $5.11.

 So there was no extra shipping costs and they said it would take 7-10 business days

 Hope you find this useful and feel free to leave any comments or questions you might

 Hi, today I want to talk a little bit about something that some people seem to be a little

 confused on and that's the angle of the hip when you're doing the deadlift.

 A lot of people are putting their hip in the wrong position so it causes the hamstrings

 So if we have my assistant here get into the correct position for the deadlift, he's going

 He's going to bring his shoulder blades together, then he's going to put his shoulder blades

 So this gives him upper back tension and then we have activation of the lats.

 Number two, he's going to have the shoulder slightly in front of the bar.

 And number three, the one that we're going to talk about a lot today, is the angle of

 And if I come back here and I put my fingers right back here in his hamstrings, I can feel

 This is the position in the hip that you need to be in so his hamstrings will fire.

 What we're seeing is we're seeing a lot of people instead are in a lower position.

 Number one is that it's going to take all the tension out of his hamstring.

 What we've got now is that this is very loose because it is not being stretched.

 And then the next thing that's happening is it's going to bring his shoulders behind the

 We're wanting his shoulders to be a little bit in front of the bar.

 So we're going to bring his hips back until he has maximum hamstring activation.

 Now what we're doing here is we're actually stretching the hamstrings.

 We're getting some expansion so that when he does the deadlift, go ahead and deadlift.

 So he's going to stretch those and then he's going to bring them together.

 So the starting position is an expansion and then when he does the deadlift, he's causing

 The problem is if the hips are too low, it's really hard to get any sort of hamstring activation

 What you would have to do is you'd have to push the hip back a lot in the bottom position

 The reason that a lot of people aren't able to do that is they don't have the hip mobility.

 If your hip mobility is not very good, go ahead and get the starting position again.

 Your starting position on this is going to have to be a high hip position.

 If he has bad hip mobility, the hamstrings might fire, come up a little bit, at about

 He probably won't be able to go lower if he doesn't have good hip mobility.

 However, someone who has better hip mobility will be in a lower position.

 They can get lower here, but then they'll still have the hamstring here.

 If you've got good hip mobility, you can get hamstring activation while you're lower.

 But if you don't have good hip mobility, you're going to have to come up.

 Okay, that doesn't mean that there's no such thing as a correct deadlift.

 You have to have hamstring activation here in order to have a correct deadlift.

 If you're not using your hamstrings and you're just using your quads, then you're doing nothing

 If you're just going to do a squat with the barbell, then just put the barbell on your

 There's no point in doing the deadlift if we're not going to use the glutes and the

 Hamstring activation, when he hits that point, then he's ready to deadlift.

 Whip 10 egg yolks with 170g of the sugar on high speed with a whip attachment

 In a separate bowl, whip 7 egg whites on medium speed until soft peaks form.

 Increase the speed and gradually add the remaining 100g of sugar.

 Use cake flour or combine 250g of flour with 1 1⁄2 teaspoons of baking powder.

 Fill with the batter and pipe 7cm lengths on pans lined with parchment paper.

 Visit our website videoculinary.com for a tiramisu cake recipe.

 Hi there, thanks for watching this video on the really popular Gorilla Arrow Pro stand.

 And here it is, when it comes through to your door you'll get it all in one box of all the

 this tripod only weighs 4 kilograms but it is extremely strong.

 So what you do is when you get it out the box you undo the legs so you bring it

 you take it completely out just so you know where the bottom hole is

 because what it has, it actually has pre-drilled holes for the safety

 through the pole but then you make sure the pole then with the pin is resting on

 this part ever fails which it probably won't but if it ever did

 Now this is the part of the bracket that holds the dartboard on.

 So as you can see you've got a hole in there with a pad around it.

 is so that if you were to undo that and when it comes in the box I believe that does

 What that is, if you undid that this part here would move left to right and that's

 as fully as you can and make sure it's nice and straight because if you do want to

 you just move the actual tripod is better but this way it just saves you

 mainly because it's one of the heaviest dartboards we've got and it is actually quite

 So what you've got on the back of this one is this is the other part of the

 So what you do is you measure your dartboard with a line so that this is

 I've put an arrow there just so you know that that is the dead top of the dartboard

 and when you put this bracket on it needs to be that this section here

 as you can see there's a little lug coming out the bottom here with a hole in it

 that that's facing downwards when you actually fix it to the back

 so what it means is once you've got it up on the stand if it's tilting forward

 you can loosen or tighten the screw and say for instance if you did that to the top

 all you need to do is put it up and slide one part into the other

So that then as you can see that just literally just slides in there

 the little lug we spoke about earlier with the hole in it that actually comes

 it comes with a little safety pin in the packaging as well so if you want to

 you can put the safety pin through and that can never be lifted off

 most dartboards are quite heavy so they're probably not going to anyway but it comes with that you'll see in the packaging

 you just clip it onto there and it's just an extra safety precaution

 again if you need to adjust it now you can do it with these here with the allen key

 you can measure from the floor to the bullseye, it has to be 5 foot 8

 and if you find that it isn't it will only probably be very slightly out

 and if you want to adjust it I recommend that you undo the very bottom

 tightener screw on the tripod and then you can move the whole leg assembly

 it will raise it up very slightly and then you tighten it up again.

 easiest way to adjust the height don't adjust the one where you've got the

 going through the holes because once you've got this on it actually is quite

 heavy by that point so you don't want to be messing around with that

 the Arrow Pro by Gorilla, lifetime warranty with it as well how good is that

 and it's the best price it's the best stand on the market for your dartboard

 there it is, any more questions you'll see after the video we've got our technical

 any info you need on the dartboard stand or after you've purchased it if you need any

 So the first thing you're going to want to do is gather your materials and you'll need

 some dyes, a fresh t-shirt, some spoons, and of course some gloves and something to protect

 So the first thing you're going to do is make sure you wash and dry your t-shirt first to

 get any of the manufacturing stuff out of it and then get it all nice and wet.

 You're going to wring out the water but you want to make sure that it's wet all the way

 So this particular shirt I'm going to have kind of the same design on the front and on

 But if you wanted to do something different you could always put some cardboard or some

 plastic or even wax paper in between the layers so that way you could do something different

 So I'm going to start off by putting the spoons down, kind of mimicking that pattern.

 And you can do one layer down like this and then do another layer like this.

 Now if you wanted to you could do a little scavenger hunt around your house and you could

 There are just so many different ways that you could interpret this design.

 So once you have it all ready just the way you like it we're going to go ahead and mist

 So once you've got it as misted as you want now we're going to go back with a second color.

 And this is fun too because it has a dauber that comes in the kit and I'm just going to

 Then I'm going to take the spoons away and put one little dot in each one to kind of

 Again this is just the way I like to do it but you can have fun with it your own way.

 It'd be fun to do different colors for different members of the family or like I said find

 So now the next thing we're going to do is go ahead and mist it with this color fixative

 product and what that'll do is make sure that the dye really soaks in and grabs on and stays

 put so that the next time you wash your t-shirt it's just the way you want it to be.

 Now what we're going to do is go ahead and let this dry and then you're going to wash

 So let's pull this off so we can let it dry and move some things out of the way.

 So now we're going to make one for him with the stars and the bars and really we're going

 This time though we're going to use some plastic knives to create the design.

 Everything is nice and juicy and wet and I'm just going to lay the knives right across.

 Isn't it amazing to think that you have all of these crafting materials and supplies in

 And then let's make some stripes over here across the arm like so.

 Then we're going to go ahead and spray it again with this beautiful luscious red.

 So then over here where the stars would go, I'm going to use this blue again and make

 little dots to kind of get the feeling of the stars and the bars.

 If you wanted, you could even finish it up, let it dry and then maybe add some stars with

 white puffy paint or, well, I wouldn't use sequins if it's for my son, but you could

 All right, let's remove those knives and see how the pattern looks.

 Now let's not forget, we're going to go ahead and do that spray fix so that the die stays

 piece of pepperoni and then you're going to put on some pizza sauce.

And you just want to pinch it so it seals at the top, like that.

 So what you'll want to do is take a sharp knife and you're just going to put a little hole in

 the top and then just twist your knife around to form a little hole.

 your green olive with pimento and just kind of twist it down in.

 you're going to use your pizza sauce and you can use a little bottle.

 Hey my Sweet Vs, it's The Sweetest Vegan here and today's recipe will be Vegan Banana Quesadillas.

 In my last video, the FAQ video, I asked for some suggestions and thank you everybody for commenting.

 He asked me to do something foreign like Mexican desserts or French desserts.

So I pulled up this Mexican dessert and I am going to make it for you.

 I was actually watching a Freddie Wong vlog and they said it was easier to open bananas from the bottom.

You are going to add that 1 banana and 1 1 4 cup of powdered sugar to the mixing bowl

Then you are going to spread that filling on some flour quesadillas and fold them over slightly.

 Wrap them with saran wrap and refrigerate them for about 30 minutes.

 You are about to see my refrigerator is pretty empty, but don't judge me.

 So I think it is hilarious that some people think that I make every recipe perfect.

 This recipe originally called for caramel and I was trying to make it with the sugar and water.

I don't know what happened to this crystallization of the sugar here.

 So after you successfully fail at making caramel, you are going to put about a tablespoon of vegan margarine in a fry pan.

 You are going to fry those quesadillas at 2 minutes per side until they are nice and warm and golden and gooey.

 I used whole soy yogurt over the top of them as well as some sliced bananas.

If anything, if you want to add some orange sauce or just a little bit more color to this plate, you can.

 It has bananas on it and yogurt and it hopefully will be delicious.

 It is sugary but it is kind of like a come home type of yum factor to it.

 But if you don't like bananas, like I don't too much like bananas, don't make this recipe.

 It kind of tastes like how Sonic the restaurant in the United States.

 They used to have these cheesecake bites and it kind of tastes like that filling on the inside.

 Dan, or somebody, can I use a couple people's eyes, stand right over that and tell me when

 So yeah, these stakes are a little, like if we actually had our crap together we could

 So to get our 90 degree good turn here, we're going to use the Pythagorean theorem, 6.8.10,

 Pythagorean theorem, which is, you measure out from the corner, our string lines here,

 measure out 6 feet going this way, from the center, where the strings meet, and you mark

 6 feet on one side, and then you measure out 8 feet in that direction, and then you make

 And then you measure from 6 feet, from the marks, 6 feet and 8 feet, making a triangle,

 So you just basically move one of the string lines in or out, until the distance between

 And then you have a perfectly 90 square turn in your tire wall.

 Basically, from the front edge of our tire work, out to the inside edge of this tire

 We're going to lay out a string line right here, and then we're going to also locate

 So we're going to lay out a string line right here, and then we're going to also locate

 this opening for the front door, because there are no tires right here.

 The reason for that is because the second course has that batter.

 So that first course really marks the inside dimension of the plans you're referencing.

 What I'm going to do, we're going to drive a couple more stakes to extend these lines

 When we pulled 10 feet south of the back tire wall, the stakes he drove in were still inside

 In order to extend the string line outside the building envelope, we can pull a string

 off one of the stakes and pull it beyond the other stake and line it up so it just touches

 Then you can drive another stake outside the building envelope that is lined up with the

 We will do this again to extend the other side of the string line.

 We just need to extend the string line now back this way so we're out of the building

 Okay, now we're all going to trip over the string line all day long.

 The check engine light on this is showing us a lean O2 sensor code.

 Now what I want to do, this is a perfect opportunity to show you a couple of simple tests that

 you can make to determine whether or not you have a problem with the O2 sensor, or if you

 have a problem with some of the ignition systems or fuel systems on this vehicle.

 The first thing I want to do is I want to go ahead and check our fuel injection system.

 The Noid Light is going to plug in the connector on the fuel injector.

 They have different pin configurations, determining what type of vehicle that you're going to

 What I want to do, we want to see which Noid Light terminals are going to match the terminals

 Our next step now is to go ahead and start the engine up and check to make sure the Noid

 That tells me that the power and ground going to the injector is working.

 Something else to notice too, you can see how the engine has kind of a rough idle right

 now because I basically have killed that one cylinder by disconnecting the fuel injector.

 We're going to shut the engine back off and connect this back together.

 We're going to disconnect our Noid Light and plug our connector back in for the fuel injector.

 One of the tests we want to do with the fuel system and fuel injectors, we've already checked

 the circuit to the injector with the Noid Light and we know the circuit is okay.

 It's real easy to do with a mechanic's stethoscope, just a standard mechanic's stethoscope.

 What I mean by that is the fuel injectors are basically a 12-volt solenoid.

 The more ground the computer gives the injector, the farther the injector is going to be open.

 What we want to listen for is an audible click to each one of the injectors while the

 For example, the injector we just tested, if the Noid Light showed the circuit was good

 but yet there was no click from the injector, we know the injector is dead and would need

 Something else we want to do is we want to check all six injectors and listen for the

 If it doesn't, for example, if you have two or three injectors that have more of a dull

 In that case, the repair would be to add fuel injector clearance to the fuel tank and after

 a little bit of drive time, come back and listen to the injectors again and see if the

 So what I want to do now is start the engine back up with a stethoscope.

 I want to go around and listen to all the injectors and see how they sound.

 Now, when you're performing this test, a couple of things to keep in mind.

 One is the engine is running, so make sure you stay away from the belt area and the alternator

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to place the tip of the stethoscope on each one of

 Now some of the injectors are easy to get to and some of them I'll actually have to

 This is just going to vary from vehicle to vehicle, but the main thing is just be conscious

 And what you want to do is place the tip of the stethoscope right on the body of the injector,

 Now the first and second injectors sound exactly the same, or close to it.

 Now this one, it's working, it's operating, but it doesn't have that crisp sound that

 Okay, all six injectors are working properly, except the very last one.

 The next step, really, that I would advise in this case would be to go ahead and put

 the cleaner in the tank, drive it a week or so, and listen to them again to see if that

 Well, on this vehicle, we know that we have one injector that's dirty, and that may be

 So the step now is to go ahead and put the fuel injector cleaner in the fuel tank.

 But we need to know for a fact that we have a problem here, so we want to correct this

 The nice thing is that jobs today don't require a large, expensive assortment.

 In case where a specialty tool is required, be sure to check with AutoZone's Loan-A-Tool

 They have many specialty tools that can help you complete your job a lot quicker and easier.

 The first things you'll need are a socket set and a repair manual for your specific

 You may also need screwdrivers or pliers to remove some components.

 If the engine has been running, components will be extremely hot, so be careful what

 When working around a running engine, it is important to be alert and never wear loose

 clothing or a necktie that can get tangled in belts, pulleys, or the fan.

 If you have to lift the vehicle, never work under it until it has been secured with wheel

 Get the entire DVD for this repair and all other procedures covered in the Complete Car

 Welcome back, today I'm going to show you how to do plain boiled basmati rice.

 You'd think cooking rice would be as easy as pie, but that's not always the case.

 Maybe it's too gungy, maybe it's not as fluffy as you would like it.

 You don't have to buy very expensive, I don't buy the top brands, this is just a supermarket

 brand, I do also use other branded supermarket rice, not just this one.

 So I'm going to use 60 grams of rice per person, which is around a third of a mug.

 So there's the rice inside, I've already measured out 60 grams.

 So put your rice in the water and we want to put that on a low simmer for the suggested

 Now here's my first tip, I would start checking this at around 9 minutes to make sure that

 Put the lid on and turn it on low, just so that it's gently simmering.

 So I've said to cook the rice for 10 to 12 minutes, I'm going to time 9 minutes and when

 the alarm goes, that's when I'm going to start checking the rice.

 So now 9 minutes are up, now it's time to start checking the rice.

 See I've shaved off 2 minutes and it's actually done perfectly.

 So now what we want to do is we want to drain the rice through a sieve.

 You want to rinse off any excess starch by pouring the boiling kettle over the rice in

 I tend to use this method as the rice has released all the starch that it's going to

 Once you're happy that that's drained out, don't leave it in the sieve or leave it in

 What we want to do is make sure we've drained out all the water and we want to dry it out

 So what I do is to dry this out really quickly, put this in a tray.

 The reason we do this is if we leave it in a pot or in the sieve, it's all stacked up

 Obviously usually I'd have a lot more rice than this, this is literally just for one

 person and just leave that for about a minute and let that dry out and you'll find it's

 I've just got this little plastic mould here and I'm going to serve it on a little dish.

 Nice and individual, flakes away nicely, perfect with curry, with chilli, see those nice grains.

 200 grams of soft butter and 200 grams of sugar in a bowl of a stand mixer

 Alternate adding the sifted flour and the egg mixture mixing on low speed just

 refrigerate until chill so that they can be rolled and cut again.

 Celsius for about 10 minutes until they have a light golden edge.

 2 egg whites and a pinch of citric acid in a bowl of a stand mixer fitted with

 towel directly on the surface of the royal icing, cover with plastic wrap and

 Transfer the icing to parchment paper cones or into pastry bags fitted with a

 wet technique, pipe designs while the base layer icing is still wet.

 Let the icing dry and serve these beautiful cookies to your holiday table.

 This is a trim weaver idea, and I'm going to show you how to attach a flower to a nylon

 These work great for infants, you can make them for your own infant, or it's a great

 All you're going to need is a flower, a nylon headband, and an oval felt.

 For this headband, I'm using a 6 inch Flower Head with Gem, a fuchsia nylon headband, and

 For the one that I have already made, this is a 3.5 inch Flower with Sequin Center, and

 So what you're going to do is you're going to take your nylon headband, and you're going

 to take where the two seams intersect, and you're going to fold it hot dog style.

 You'll take your oval felt, and you're going to wrap it around where you just folded your

 Now all you have to do is take your flower, and I'm going to use hot glue to attach my

 Please check out some of our other trim weaver ideas and tutorials.

 Before we do, they gave us some new brackets and I'm going to use their

 and then we're just going to tighten these down onto it so that they'll

 And that'll just make it so when we go ahead and put the toilet down on top of them, they're

 sort of fixed in place and as long as we don't bump them too bad, they'll stay there.

 I would say these with my old kit, I like that because I end up using them at different

Just a little bit of a general way of doing Yang Qing Fu's form in particular.

 Yang Lu Chan's form is generally quicker than Yang Qing Fu's form anyway, unless you're doing it at a very slow pace for specific reasons.

 There are three levels that we do our Tai Chi form, and they're for specific reasons.

 It's the fast pace that's the most difficult, because to do it correctly, it's easy to do it incorrectly.

 And it's quite difficult to do it correctly, simply because there's always the danger of, when you're doing it quickly, to plonk onto your leg, rather than just putting your leg down and then transferring your weight.

 So everything you do when you're doing Yang Qing Fu's form in particular slowly, should apply to doing it quickly.

 So when you're doing Yang Qing Fu's form, you should always be able to touch the heel and pick it back at any time before you transfer the weight to it.

See I've transferred the weight, I can't pick that foot up now without firstly putting back and then sitting up.

So it's easy to do it incorrectly, but much more difficult doing it correctly.

 So I'll just run through the first third of that form, so you can just see the pace that you should be doing it at.

 Because Tai Chi not only gives you aerobic, it also gives you anaerobic.

 And of course you need anaerobic just as much as you need aerobic exercises.

 Anaerobic tends to develop or bring into action your body building hormones, or your body healing hormones, which is what we need to have.

 Aerobics will burn up fat cells as well, but you've got to do aerobics for 20 minutes or more using oxygen in order to get that happening.

 Because in the first instance of exercise your body uses up its stored carbohydrates in your liver, 2000 calories only of which are there.

 Once that's gone, unless you start burning your fat cells, then your body eats itself.

 Many a long distance runner has been ruined for life because their thighs have just died, literally died from lack of carbohydrates.

 So in doing Tai Chi quicker, you're getting that aerobic part, depending on the aerobic part as well as the anaerobic part, because you also do your Tai Chi at a slower pace as well.

 If you do it at three different paces of course you're getting everything worked.

 But sometimes if you've got a blood sugar metabolism problem, then you need to bring your blood sugar level down of course after each meal.

 And so Tai Chi is the ideal way to do it, especially if you do it a little bit quicker.

 Because you're not damaging any of your muscles, you're not damaging anything doing Tai Chi of course, but you're doing it quicker.

 Sorry I'm reverting to Yang Jingfu's Yang Liu Bloody Transform there.

 It always happens at half pace, even when you're doing it at the quicker pace.

 So that's at a much quicker pace, and you can do it even quicker than that if you wish.

 But that's probably taking around about ten minutes to perform.

 And then you combine that with a form that takes you twenty minutes, so you're getting the anaerobic part as well as the aerobic part.

 You can also do that three times at that pace if you wish to get your anaerobic working.

 So the most important thing that you must remember there is up and then placing your weight, up and then placing your weight.

 And also when you're doing the kicks, they're done at a fair, a cracking pace as well.

 There's always the danger of doing that when you're doing them quickly.

 That's incorrect you see, whereas I slowed it down a bit just to show what was happening.

 So you should be able to still hold your balance after the fast kick, and then place it down gently and then change your weight to the other foot.

 Okay, someone just said how to do it in the morning, so the way I do it is, and I've worked out over the years through research,

These are for the BMW F800GS and F650GS twin cylinder motorcycles from 2008

 protection for the side panels for the engine of your motorcycle.

 of an adventure touring bike as these BMWs are, the radiator is located right here, fairly exposed

We've got the hoses here, we've got exhaust down here, lots of vital

So the SW Motec crash bars attach up here at the upper engine mounting location and

 down here beneath the engine, offering lots of protection all in the vital component area.

 you tip over your motorcycle, even if the bars turn to full lock either direction, the motorcycle

 doesn't contact the ground, it's the crash bars and the bar ends that hit the ground.

So our first step is we're going to bolt this crossbar here across

 the front of the engine from side to side, right underneath that radiator, right above our exhaust.

 Got to bolt this straight up to the engine, then each crash bar will attach to it at the front on

And you just get behind here with a flat bladed screwdriver, pop out that cap,

 Then all I have to do is hook this bolt and nut through here, tighten it down as well.

You can see the crash bars come up over the side of the radiator,

 and follow all along the side of our vital components along the side of the engine,

 The first thing I did was I primed the model white and then I began with a very very watered

 One of my favorite things about the Necron Army is the sculpts and how angular and how

 hard the lines are and so I really like to leave most of the areas pretty open and just

 Once that was dry I then took some black paint and I picked out the gun.

 As I finished up the gun, now on my own Necrons I like to glue the green rod in place because

 I'm not really a big fan of how it looks and I like to paint right over it and so I

 Then I also picked out the hose in magic blue and then all of the little grills.

 I also took a little bit of gun metal paint and I hit his little ribbed hose.

 Then I took some electric blue and I used that to accent the grills.

 I do this because I used a little bit of airbrushing to get some OSL on the hose and the tube but

 Then I put a little bit of electric blue in my airbrush and then I use that to give

 And I like to put a little splash on the eyes too just to make sure that he's glowing with

 For this podcast we're going to talk about position number three of the footbar.

 Position number two is directly over the center of the footbar or the center of the carriage.

 With the bar in this position it can be a little tricky to get into.

 First thing Portia's going to do though is change her weight to a blue from a red.

 This series of exercises is going to focus on some arm work and some core work.

 She's going to get in like she's getting into her rocket ship seat.

 Now this is going to look a bit like what we did in position number four, but she's

 So Portia would you just push through and straighten the arms so they can see the difference

 So when she was in position four, unless she's very short or has very short arms, she's going

 So with position three she can now get full arm extension and she can focus now on pushing

 So Portia now when she goes to the full arm position you'll notice that the legs are going

 That's going to, depending on how much strength you've got in your core, this may or may not

 Yeah, Portia's able to keep her back nice and neutral as those legs lower.

 So Portia's going to actually come on in Portia for a second and anchor your forearms on here.

 So this is a way to start developing the stability for all of this work.

 Portia's anchoring through her whole shoulder girdle and she's simply going to take some

 And again she's got the shoulder working and that means that the low back and the abdominals

 To challenge this you could take both legs lower and you want to make sure that low back

 This is all required to be able to do the more advanced work in this position.

 This is nice to do with the breath, inhaling in one direction, exhaling and engaging the

 The nice thing here is the shoulders can stay very anchored and the rotation is all happening

 below the shoulder girdle, getting some nice work through the core and some nice work through

 Now we're going to take this into a more advanced version here.

 Now we're going to add the head lift, which really takes this into very traditional Pilates

 She can do the 100 here, although you can't really pulse the arms, but you can get into

 And once this gets comfortable, you can actually add a little arm jumps with this, working

 through some of that elastic recoil you hear so much about in fascia land these days.

 Again core is working, upper body is working, everything is working together.

 So this series, position three, really just has the stability exercises and then goes

 Today we're going to continue looking at fingerstyle guitar using the song Ode to Joy.

 If my hands look really strange and the perspective seems strange, it's because it is.

 And I'm actually moving my right hand up on the neck just so that you can kind of see

 what both hands are doing, even though I'm mainly concentrating on the left hand today.

 So normally though, where you'd want your hand would be back over here where it would

 So this is just to kind of give you guys a different perspective and to twerk my hand

 So remember the C is going to be here where we've got our third finger on the fifth string

 on the third fret, second finger, second fret, fourth string, first finger, second string,

 It's really important to use that one because we're going to be doing motion based off of that.

 So we're using that as our sort of our base point and then we're going to be moving our

 Sorry about that you guys, for those of you who are not into suffering for your art that

 So the old school G you want to have your, by the way, fingers remember, thumb, slacker,

 first finger, second finger, third finger, fourth finger, slacker, first, second, third,

 Okay, so for the old school G we've got our third finger over on the sixth string on the

 You're going to have your second finger on the fifth string on the second fret.

 Your first finger you want to have kind of hanging around because it's going to be moving

 Your little finger is going to be all the way over on the first string.

 And it's going to be on the same fret on the third fret, directly across from your

 It's going to be moving though, back and forth from there to the second string.

 Okay, so we're going to start first, and we'll take this a little bit at a time, and it'll

 So we're starting out on the C chord, and with our left hand we're going to pluck the

 And then we're going to pluck the fifth string at the same time, which has our third finger

 So you want to start there, and then we're going to alternate back and forth.

 This whole first line that we're playing, your first finger is going to be playing the

 open string on the third string in between the melody line of the song, basically.

 Remember if you need the tab for this, you can message me, send me a message on YouTube,

 Okay, so we've got, plucking those two together first, we've got the third finger on the fifth

 We're using with our left hand, remember with the thumb, the thumb is going to play first,

 Your third finger is going to play the first string, second finger second string, first

 So you want to have them kind of hovering there, resting on there.

 So we pluck, third string, open, first string, open, third string, open.

 Now we're going to move our first finger away from the C chord, we're going to move

 it over to the first string, on the first fret, back to the third string, open.

 Third finger on the third string, I mean the first string, third fret, and then open again

 Plucking both, third string, first string open, third string open, first fret on the

 first string, third string open, third fret on the first string open.

 So remember it's the old school G, and we're going to pluck, start the next part by plucking

 the first string and the sixth string with our third finger and our thumb.

 Then we're moving our first finger over to the first fret on the first string, back to

 the open third string, see it's all smoke and mirror, open first string, open third

 string, and then we're moving our little finger to the second string, right there,

 Okay let me move my hand back down here so you can see what's going on.

 So we're going to go pluck the first and sixth string, open third string, first fret, first

 finger on the first string, open third string, open first string, open third string, moving

 your little finger over to the second string on the third fret, open third string.

 So you notice how it's just like this droney, whiney, annoying little brother or something

 So let me play that line of the song so you can hear what that'll sound like once you

 Let's try that again a little bit slower and you can try that with me.

 So that's the first phrase of the song and then we'll pick up on the next part with the

 Hi you guys, it's Michelle here with another recipe for you guys and it is

 first you need some apple cider of course, some sugar, some flour, as well as

 pumpkin pie spice, baking powder, two eggs, baking soda, oil, buttermilk, and

 to take the apple cider, one cup, and put it onto your stovetop.

 you're gonna do is you're going to boil this and reduce it down to 1 fourth cup.

 take the sugar and also the shortening and put it here in your mixer.

 nice fluffy consistency you are going to want to add the two eggs.

 mix the flour with the pumpkin pie spice, the baking soda, baking powder, and you're

So after you cook the apple cider make sure to cool it off to room

Okay so here I'm mixing that all together and just so you guys know

 I'm not telling you the exact measurements at the moment but all of

 that will be listed down below and I will have a link to the original recipe

 third at a time and it's gonna be pretty sticky and what you want as an end result

 it's still a little sticky so I've added a little bit more here.

 consistency that you want the actual dough to be and then you can put it in

 that it's all mixed and then right after I have that mixed I'm going to heat up

So this is one quart of canola oil and I have made these a couple times

 now and I find that one quart is a lot so you probably don't need that much but

 you're gonna want to take a candy thermometer and make sure that the heat

 refrigerator for a while and I'm going to be using this glass for cutting the

 surface and this you just have to roll it out flatten it and you're gonna want

 to knead it a little bit make sure that it's a good consistency and I'm just

 gonna push that down and then here is my rolling pin I'm gonna put some flour on

 it and as you can see it can kind of get sticky so you can make sure that you use

 roll it out to be about a half an inch thick and obviously you can make it

 thinner or thicker depending on how big you want your donuts to be and then

 after I have it rolled out I'm gonna take the glass and cut out the circles

 and I find this like a perfect size for the donuts and I'm just gonna do that

 and after I do that I'm gonna take out the little stars in the middle and these

 any small cookie cutter and then you can put them on a tray and chill them.

 is a little bit different than the actual recipe but I do a little different

 and then here are the little stars and they are going to be the little donut

So once the temperature is 325 we are going to throw in the donuts and

 usually can put about three or four donuts into the oil and I actually had

 my husband do this because I don't like playing with oil like I just get scared

 of frying things so I'm very grateful that my husband is willing to do it.

 you're going to need like a really nice spoon that has holes in it so as you're

 flipping it and everything the oil is not going to sit there in the spoon so

 get a spoon that has you know holes in it a slotted spoon as they call them.

 you're going to flip them it should take like 90 seconds you want them golden

 brown as you can see here so it goes really really fast and then you're gonna

 want to put it on some paper towels to drain the oil from it so I have that

 here on this side and then as you take it out make sure not to burn yourself

 but you're gonna want to put it on a surface like this so the oil can drain

 and then you're going to put them in the ziploc bags and it says in the recipe to

 shake it I don't want to shake it because I don't want to ruin the donut

 so I just kind of flip it around in the sugar pumpkin pie spice mixture here and

 you can just coat it like that so it's really really fast it doesn't take that

 recipe I hope you guys enjoyed it it's really good with a cup of apple cider or

 hot chocolate let me know down below if you try it out for yourself

 Okay, we're going to incorporate, we're going to squeeze some lemon into the shrimp now.

 I think we're using about roughly, I don't know, about a cup and a half maybe of lemon

 The amount of ceviche we're going to be making, it's going to feed actually more than four

 Okay, the next thing we're going to be using, we're going to be using the Roma tomatoes.

 The reason I'm going to use the Roma is because they don't have too much juice and you don't

 A person handles this kind of chili pepper, they got to watch out they don't touch your eyes.

 If you're a diabetic, this type of food would be very healthy for you and very little to

 Stay tuned for tips and techniques from the nation's top chefs in the Chef's Kitchen.

 by Chef Walter Stade here at City Tavern Restaurant and we are preparing quick and sensational

 very simple especially when you start off with a great product like we do today with

 going with your deli man you can tell him to thickly slice the meats as we're doing

If you ever feel you don't want to have strips, what we call them

 shulian, you want to dice, you want to square, it really makes no difference.

Yeah and we can actually, the other thing is we can if we like to, if we

Well you know what, aesthetically it looks more pleasing on the plate.

 it's Dietz and Watson so it's all natural spices and seasonings.

And it makes everything glisten and I'm sure adds a little bit of a sweetness

 it's not, we're not saying that we make an authentic Asian food.

 we take meat from the deli, have it sliced thickly, make a quick meal for the family

I can't believe how quickly this meal, this dinner came together.

 Hi, I'm Shoshanna and today I'm going to show you a great use for kelp.

 There are so many women with thyroid problems and this is a wonderful herb to take care of a lot of different thyroid problems.

 If you have thyroid problems and you're struggling with low iodine, which a lot of times if you have thyroid problems, that's what it is.

 You might want to do this process two or three times to get a really nice packed capsule.

 Now you'll be able to pop these out and you will have capsules.

 This could be your solution to have energy, to have help, to lose weight, to feel great.

 I know so many women that have had great success with just a little bit of kelp.

 A lot of people say that six capsules a day make a huge difference.

 This video will demonstrate the installation of a single Encore and also

 and items that are required or may be useful for the installation of your door.

 Fine-tooth hacksaw, drill, 5 64th inch drill bit, tape measure, number one

 Phillips screwdriver, masking tape used only for trimming the height of the door.

 Your Oakmont and Encore door packages should include the following parts.

 Handles and handle pins, overhead track, channel clips, track top glide lubricant,

 flathead screws, spare top glide and screw, closure channel, magnetic latch

 opening height is less than 80 inches, it will be necessary to trim the

 your top track and use your door as is without removing any panels.

Using your drill, make a pilot hole through the screw hole nearest the

 center of the track and then insert a track screw in the pilot hole to hold

 attachment pins into one handle and then fit the pins through the door panel

 need your door to open from the left or the right, then slide all the top glides

 onto the track, making sure the anchor panel is on the non-opening side.

 Stack the panels together near the center screw and pivot the top track

 Using the drill, secure the remaining track screws into the top track.

 sure all screws are as straight and tight as possible to ensure smooth

 vertically and press the door anchor channel onto them until it snaps into

 Align the closure channel on the opening side of the door jamb.

Make pilot holes in the screw holes on the channel and then secure the

 Pull the door almost to the closed position, leaving a little room so you

 drill, install the magnetic latch striker plate in the channel.

 Sliced garlic, a teaspoon of butter, a little bit of fresh red pepper,

 Always take the pan off the fire so you don't splatter all over the place.

 Why do you spoon it out instead of just taking the pan and dumping the whole thing on top?

 Go to www.beadaholique.com to purchase beading supplies and to get design ideas!

 Hi this is Julie from Beadaholique.com and today I wanna show you a quick little

 that will allow you to incorporate ball chain into your beading projects

 in a little bit easier way than having to use it where you use the classic

 clasp here which is what you're probably most familiar with with ball chain.

 but it's not so great if you want to attach a different type of clasp

 is the idea of using the ball chain in conjunction with fold over cord ends

 with a loop and then to that loop you can attach a jump ring or another clasp

 what you're going to do is you're gonna lay the ball chain into the little well

 and then you've got the rest of your length of ball chain hanging out of it

 so you can hold it when you use your pliers so it's not falling out of there

 area where you have the well, you have the little piece of wire essentially

 now that ball chain is not going anywhere, it's secure in there.

Then you take the body of the lobster and chop it off into chunks.

 And then you have two tablespoons of slivered ginger, two tablespoons of black beans or you

 can use black bean sauce, two tablespoons of chopped garlic, and then you have two stalks

 the organic chopsticks because it's like you don't need to use like wood or carve down like a tree

 We just got back from a walk and although the weather didn't cooperate, these guys sure

 And when they do well on a walk, we like to reward them with a cookie.

 Let me show you a quick treat that I'm going to make with ingredients that I already have

 Today I'm going to combine it with three other ingredients, cinnamon, olive oil, and oats

 And it's quick and easy to prepare because we do it all inside the food processor.

 And I'm just going to pulse that for a quick minute just so that it gets to kind of a coarse

 Not quite as finely milled as most oat flours would be but it's going to be perfect for

 We're going to combine that with three tablespoons of olive oil and one quarter teaspoon of cinnamon.

 Then we're going to take our ugly black banana and get rid of the skin.

 Now if you have those little strings, don't worry, they're going to get chopped up in

 So I'm just going to kind of chop it up into little pieces to make it easier for the food

 If you notice that it hasn't, it isn't really kind of holding together, you might want to

 It all depends on how ripe your banana is and how large the banana is.

 And I'm just going to pat it out into a little shape here, a little rectangle.

 The olive oil is going to help preserve it and the cinnamon is going to give it an antioxidant

 Now instead of cookie shapes, let's just make it really quick and easy.

 There you go, a quick and easy treat for you to feed your best friend better.

 Vince Del Monte here and I'm going to be taking you through a power core circuit today.

 They're going to be extremely powerful if you do them back to back to back.

 You can do these at the end of any of your weight training days, no matter how your program

 They're really going to focus on engaging the core, not the surface abdominals, the

 transverse, the stuff that's underneath, stuff that people call the core.

 It's the stuff that really keeps your pelvis in alignment, helps prevent lower back problems

 If this is your first time doing this, don't worry too much about the number of sets you

 Then from there we can figure out some reps and sets when this is over.

 Again, focus more on the speed, full range of motion before you start letting your ego

 get to you and you start going heavier and heavier when it's not necessary.

 Get it up here and we're going to do a wood chopper, medicine ball rotation, whatever

 You should feel a nice deep tightening sensation through not just the front of your abdominals

 With those, you want to find your obliques because if you don't, you'll find that other

 Try and find your obliques and lateral abdominal muscles and get them engaged.

 While we're on the theme for lateral flexion, obliques, we'll do another variation.

 If that's too advanced, you can also go down here, work from here.

 Again, first time doing these, don't worry about the number of reps.

 You can even do these at the start of your workout as a warm up if you don't like doing

 You'll notice I'm sweating after just a few minutes of some core exercises.

 We're going to finish off with something that probably doesn't get labeled as a core

 If you're in a room like this, you're going to sit nice and tall.

 Again, you can imagine if these were heavier, you'd have to walk a lot slower.

 You're going to find this works your forearms, your traps, but it really engages your core

 You're not going to feel it in your core like you're doing lots of crunches and your

 You're going to focus on increasing lifting one leg and one arm.

 Try and keep your whole body square, as little movement as possible.

 The modification on those is to go like this and just to lift one at a time.

 Over 30 to 60 seconds of that, your core is going to be really engaged.

 Now that when you go out on the gym floor, if you choose to do these before your weights,

 you're going to be pretty warmed up, your core is going to be firing, you're going to

 have more stability in your hips, and you're going to have a safer workout.

 If you want a complete step-by-step program for building muscle or for losing fat, just

 check out the website address below and you'll be able to find exactly what you're looking for.

 Again, all that information I teach is without drugs, without bogus supplements, and doing

 Hi guys, I'm going to have a go at making another one of those soda can aeroplanes based

Obviously this is not a soda can but it's as close as I've got to one.

 I've even gone as far as sketching out an idea as to how I'm going to mark up the aluminium

 lots of sharp edges here so be careful if you copy what I'm doing.

So, extra bends at the wing tips, a bit of extra weight at the front,

 The reason we do that last is because it will sort of pull out some of this black detail,

 So the only thing I have left to do now is the semi-gloss or flat.

 So I'll get some clear coat on this and you can see what it looks like dull.

 So yeah I'm totally excited about Valentine's Day as you can see.

 I just want to show you how you can use a sharpie throughout all these DIY projects

 And check out my last haul video if you want to know the exact color because I do not know

 And I'm just doing these amazing designs and I totally recommend a store bought stencil

 It just puts me in the mood of Valentine's Day but you can totally use different color

 Okay so if you make any mistakes you can totally use alcohol just to wipe your mistakes away.

 Okay so once you're finished with your designs you can totally apply a top coat just so it

 Okay so I have a beautiful amazing white cup and I love the theme of red and white and

 So I'm starting off with some stencils that I got off of Microsoft Word.

 But I totally recommend store bought stencils for this project as well.

 So you want to make sure your cup is clean just so you won't make any mistakes while

 It's so easy for me to draw hard stuff but it's so hard for me to draw easy things.

 And you can totally personalize this cup the best you can because it's like giving your

 Okay so if you make a lot of mistakes like I do you can totally use alcohol to remove

 And once you're finished with your design you can just pop that into your oven at 175

 It just basically depends on how fast your permanent marker can stick to your cup.

 You can add any candy of your choice but I decided to go with Skittles because I love

 Okay so after you get finished adding your marshmallows you can add your hot chocolate

 I love hot chocolate not just throughout the winter but throughout the entire year.

 I'm going to add a candy cane but it can obviously be the candy of your choice.

 I freaking love this and you can personally give it to your valentine.

 Alright so I'm taking these old pants and I'm cutting parts out onto them.

 It will be pretty cool if you use pins, red pins preferably to put that to your shirt.

 Any kind of shirt because I know it's freezing during February.

 So I showed you how to get amazing fashion nails and a beautiful treat for valentine's

 Hey what's up everybody it's your girl Tonya Lady T and I'm in the kitchen cooking.

 I'm doing a simple country ham and I'm going to glaze it with some honey and some Zatarain's

 Again, my life gets really busy around the holidays and so this is something real quick

 So I've just got a little butter in the pan and this beautiful country ham steak is what

 And just get a good crust on either side and probably 5 to 8 minutes before you get it

 done or it's finished cooking, that's when you're going to add your honey.

 I'm going to put a temp on between 7 and 8 so it can get a good crust on it.

 Okay y'all, I have glazed one side and I'm glazing the other side with honey.

 At this point, you want to make sure that you have your temperature down on low because

 you just want that honey to melt on that ham so it doesn't burn.

 And again, you can do this with macaroni and cheese and like I'm doing it with the regular

So we step one, two, three, one, two, three, one, two, three, one, two, three.

 then he over rotates just a little bit so that his right foot can now step outside partner.

He over rotates on the other side step as well so that his left foot comes

 which gives me time to do a develop A and then he pulls me out of it and we finish.

And we have back, side, together, back, side, together, back, develop A, forward,

 one, two, three, one, two, three, one, kick, two, three, one, two, three.

And we go one, two, three, outside partner, outside partner, he holds and hesitates,

 gives me time to do my develop A, pulls me forward, and we close up.

So he steps forward, now he rotates until he's on my opposite side.

 Hey guys, in this video we are going to take a look at how you can connect an external

 There are two main standards for connecting headsets to smartphones using the 3.5mm 4-pin

 These standards define in which order microphone, ground, audio left and audio right are distributed

 OMTP has ground at the top and then microphone, audio right, audio left down to the tip.

 Companies such as LG, Huawei, Motorola, Nokia, Samsung and Sony Ericsson use this standard

 Microphone, ground, audio right and audio left from top to the tip.

 Apple, Blackberry, AMV, Fritzphone and Sony Xperia use this standard.

 These different pin layouts are the reason why some headsets work with an iPhone but

 If you want to connect an external microphone and earbuds, first find out which standard

 For this purpose I salvaged two 3.5mm 4-pin audio jacks and a 3.5mm 4-pin plug from a

 Now remove the plug's cables insulation, add some solder to the coated wires tips thus

 With the help of a multimeter match the plug's contacts to their wires.

 Connecting a microphone and headphones means connecting the right pins from the jacks to

 This is a standard microphone plug layout and this is a standard headphone plug layout.

 Do the same for the headphone jack with audio left, audio right and ground.

 I sort all wires from the plug to the right connections on the microphone and headphone

 After soldering everything together, insulate everything with tape, hot glue or heat shrink

 You should also mark the microphone jack to avoid mixing it up with the headphone jack.

 And that's how you connect an external microphone and speakers to your smartphone.

 There are more how-tos on the right, projects on the left and to subscribe press the button

 them but once they get going they grow pretty fast and they're going to be

 eight to ten weeks before your last frost and you can see these seeds are

 really tiny and they're actually pelleted so that they're easy to grab

 going to scratch them into the surface and once you have them in there like I

 said just scratch them over cover them just slightly press them into the mix.

 This peat mix is already wet because I watered these and it's actually not a

You don't want these seeds to fall in to loose starting mix and fall

 keep them moist and they will germinate in about seven to fourteen days.

 took nearly ten days and when they germinate the plants are really really

 tiny but once they get going you can see they do they do really well.

 they get to about this size they're ready to go into the transplant cups.

 like to use the styrofoam cups and you can see the roots are coming out.

 going to do nothing more than drop your peat pellet right on top of the

 And then all you do is press the edges, press the pellet down, give it a tap and

For a dollar thirty-four and about three bucks for this peat pellet tray

 you can grow 12 different varieties of mint or get 12 plants into your garden.

 One quick tip is when you put this into your garden I recommend putting it into

 a container about this wide, maybe about that deep, because mint will grow like

 roots so you'll get a nice mint crop but it won't spread all over your garden or

 www.therustedgarden.blogspot.com and also check out my YouTube videos.

 So instead of doing eggs and oil, you're starting with mayonnaise already done.

 To that, you will add, don't go ew, don't go it, because you really won't taste it,

 Then, you will add, you can add fresh garlic if you want, I happen to be lazy, fresh garlic

 Don't know if anybody else actually makes Worcestershire sauce, but, and you're looking

 Now you're going to take a little bit of real lemon, and again, if you're not lazy, get

 Now, I'm not sure what you call this thing, but I think it's a hand beater.

 What you're going to do, and this is where it gets tricky, because you want to thin it

 You don't want it too creamy, so you're going to add some oil, and you could probably buy

 Again, you could go and get real Parmesan cheese and actually grate it up.

 And here again, you're going to go to taste, but there's no such thing as too much Parmesan

 And in the worst possible case, if you have added too much oil, keep adding mayonnaise

 And, before you think you're done, you find a willing participant.

 Talking about what we're preparing for our munchies during game time.

 This being Thanksgiving, it's like the second biggest day of football.

 The first thing you want to do is remove the seeds from the jalapenos.

 Once you do that, you don't want to get this stuff underneath your fingernails.

 Then you slap them together, smooth them over, and you wrap them in bacon.

 In this case, we're doing a little reduced-calorie turkey bacon,

 Once that's done, I put them over here, getting ready for broiling.

 Broil them for a couple minutes until the bacon crisps up and the jalapeno inside cooks.

 The nice thing about a jalapeno is that once it's cooked, it actually loses a lot of its spiciness.

 By taking out the seeds from the pulp, it doesn't make it as bad.

 I've got this reduced down so that it's about four inches from the broiler.

 Next time you see me, you'll see me taking these things out, and we'll be enjoying some armadillo eggs.

 You notice how the turkey bacon crisps up real nice, browns around the jalapenos.

 Hi Internet, this is another one for the Cobb cooking system or the Cobb

 sort of little slices of garlic and what I'm going to do is I'm going to stud the

 the garlic into the pork and put it under the skin and into the little

 crevices and things and then I'm going to put some olive oil over it and a bit

 of salt and rub it round with the salt and the olive oil and then I'm going to

 leave it overnight and we're going to put it on the Cobb barbecue and see what

I've not tried this before so I don't know what it's going to be like so

 your guesses are good as mine really and we'll just see what happens.

 are then so like I said I've put all the garlic cloves sort of under the skin and

 in the little nooks and crannies in in the recesses of the of the pork and I've

 seasoned it with salt and pepper and rubbed it with olive oil and now I'm

 going to cover it up in the silver foil and then I'm going to pop it in the fridge

So I'm going to pop that in the fridge overnight and hopefully in

 the morning that will come out smelling really really garlicky and really nice

 and then I'm going to pop it on the Cobb barbecue and see what it comes out like.

 As I say, never done this before so it's all a bit of a learning curve for me so

 I just hope it's going to have a lovely crispy skin, some nice crackling and the

 beech, I think they're beech, what they're called, beechwood smoking chips on the barbecue as

 well so it's going to be sort of smoked, smoked pork with garlic.

 what I'll call it, yes smoked pork with garlic, sounds good that.

 and somebody gave me the tip of standing the briquettes on end so that's what I've

 fire grate there because I think that gets it going quicker and we're going to

 water and by the time the barbecue is ready they'll be ready to

 to to get nice and hot and for the flames to die down and then we'll be

 trivet ready to go on the coals and I've drained these wood chips.

 makes it nice and steamy and keeps the the meat nice and moist.

 these Cobb barbecues can be placed on a table so that's not hot at all under

 there so you can it's quite safe to put it on the table but obviously not inside.

 barbecue and you want one I'll put a description in, I'll put a link in the

 description under the video so just click on that and you can get one.

 Right then it's been on for about an hour now so sort of time for the grand

 We've also put some pork stuffing balls there so that looks, er, sage and onion

 carved up really nice and the taste, I've just had a little taste of it, the taste is

 I'd like to do my super easy duck breast a la range, an alternative to goose or turkey.

 Right so first thing, the duck breast, I'm just going to score it very lightly, don't

 Quite often the cooking starts and the pan isn't hot enough so I've got some plain flour

 The skin will go quite crispy, cook the way I'm going to do it but seasoned with some

 there we go, sizzle sizzle sizzle but if I was to cook them on that heat for 12 minutes

 they'd be burnt and smoking and horrible so now I want to turn it right down almost

I want about four big strips of peel, you don't want the pit for it's unpleasant

 cooking everything else can be got ready so really all in all from beginning to end

 this isn't going to take you much longer than 20 minutes if that actually.

 rind into a small pan just about cover it with water, bring it to the boil.

 the duck breast will arch up in the pan a bit and kink and it'll stop them cooking evenly

 so what you can just do is take a little side plate put it on top and that little bit of

 something says for 12 minutes or I say for 12 minutes it doesn't mean that that's right

 one man's oven is another man's incinerator so keep an eye on your food.

 come up to the boil, cut the oranges in half, I want the juice of two.

 pits in there you're having a lovely time eating your duck a la range and then you have

 to fiddle around to get the pit out of your mouth you don't want that so do it through

 see it's been on there quite a while but it's still very uncooked the duck, that skin is

Right that's gone in there so I'm going to put a bit of the honey in now

 the duck is so we don't have so much reducing to do at the end we're doing a little bit

So in here we've got honey, we've got orange rind, we've got some red wine,

 probably about half a glass and then just squeeze the ginger juice in.

 minutes they're quite dark and crispy on the low heat this is the point where I'm going

You can see there look, tack tack tack tack you can hear that it's

I think one of the great joys of duck is it's fatty skin, that crunchy fatty.

 so about 4 minutes I want in now and we're really very nearly ready to finish.

 to take a little bit of watercress, any watercress will do but if you can pick it wild and give

 minutes on one side I've turned them over 3-4 depending on the size you have to judge

 it but there's a slight kind of softness in the middle but a kind of lovely firmness too.

 They're ready so out they come and it's very important to rest meat it's gone like that

 we reduce our orange sauce, now that's going very quickly so be careful not to boil it

 keeping all the flavours and the little bit of the flour that might be in the bottom of

 the pan will also slightly thicken the gravy too so everything is being kept based around

 probably to a little more than 2 tablespoons it wants to be nice and rich and I'm going

 with the cold butter I've tipped the duck juices back into the sauce that have come

 be much easier to cut through the skin and I like it quite thick I don't want too thin

 of chunks it's nice and pink inside but not raw which is essential you want that pinkness

 Hi guys, Jessica from 10 Minute Solution here, and today I'd like to tell you about my absolute

 Because it not only works your entire lower body, but it also engages your back and your

 So make sure you start with your feet about hip distance apart, and when you begin to

 squat, think of sitting back into your hips, bending at the knees, making sure your knees

 As you stand out of your squat, really think about bracing your abdominals in nice and

 If you squat barefoot, you're going to be working even more through your feet.

 Now you can also make your squat even more difficult by taking your hands behind your

 head as you do it, or progressing it all the way into a one-legged squat to get an even

 And when you're squatting on a WeBalance board, you're also working a lot more of the muscles

 Now, balance is something that we gradually lose as we get older, so practicing some balance

 Now improving your balance can be as simple as just standing on one leg.

 So here's a few pointers to get you started with your balance training.

 Practice standing on one leg, and then try it with your eyes closed.

 You can progress your simple exercises like squats and lunges, moving from a squat to

 a one-legged squat, or lunging and then lunging into a one-legged stance.

 Or you can use your WeBalance board to do your exercises to engage those balancing muscles

 a little bit more and really work through your ankles and your feet.

 Try those tips out, and you'll be on your way to a better balancing body.

 For those of you out there that like to use your Wii for your workouts, now you can get

 Be sure to check it out wherever video games are sold, or visit Activision.com for more

 Hi, I'm Melissa, the editor for Celebrations.com, and today in the office we're making a really

 To make these decorations, you'll need a party hat, some stickers, we're using stars and

 circles, a glittered star embellishment, a paintbrush, green paint, and a glue gun.

 Oh, and don't forget your paper, you want to keep it mess free.

 And we're painting ours green because we're going to be making a Christmas tree out of

 And so, go ahead and layer on that paint, and work your way around the entire thing,

 And so you know, you're probably going to need a few coats of paint to completely cover

 So now I have one that I actually painted earlier, I'm going to show you now, see it

 And I'm using some gold stars to kind of mimic the twinkle lights on a Christmas tree, and

 some circle stickers to imitate the ornaments you'd find there too.

 You can totally decorate your tree however you'd like, maybe use a little bit of yarn

 It's a great way to use up some odds and ends you have left over in your craft bin.

 Okay, so now obviously you want to go around the entire party hat with these stickers or

 But once you have this done, like I have over here, see, pretty right?

 You want to take your glittered star embellishment and put a little bit of glue on the back of

 And this is certainly a craft you can do with the kids, but make sure you use the glue gun.

 And this is really, really versatile like I mentioned, so you can make a Santa hat or

 They're really, really fun to put together with the kids, and they work so well with

 You can pile them up on your table for a centerpiece, or even write somebody's name on it and make

 it a place card holder, or just let the kids wear them at the Christmas party.

 Anyway, head on over to Celebrations.com for the complete list of supplies and directions.

 Hey guys, it's Jennifer and today I have my second video in my back to school series and today we're going to be making these DIY

 Like these so if you guys would like to know how to make these then keep on watching

 Some scrapbook paper, so I have a floral one, a green polka dot one, a pink plaid one and then another pink plaid one

 And then I have this pink floral design that I use for the second notebook

 Well I'm starting with the light blue and then I'm just painting it wherever I want on the notebook

 Next I am taking my purple color and then also placing it wherever I want to

 Just trying to fill up the whole notebook and it's okay if it's not that precise because we're going to cover it up with black anyways later

 Then I'm doing the same thing but then with my yellow color and I'll be using all the colors of the rainbow

 So I won't be seeing which color I'm using, you can just watch and see

 And looking back on it now, I probably should have used a color scheme

 So matching colors like all blues or blue and greens and something like that

 Because the colors of the rainbow can look pretty messy like I did

 So if you're going to try this out, I suggest you use a color scheme

 And sometimes I found it easier if I just put the paint directly onto the notebook

 Because I ran out really fast and the color just seems to turn out bolder

 So now I am just creating a polka dot effect with these sticky ring thingies

 So I am just placing them all over the notebook and putting them on different colors so different colors will show

 And then I'm using small ones and big ones to have small polka dots and big polka dots

 And then next I'm taking my black paint and painting it all over the notebook

 All over, all, like even the polka dots so that when we peel them off it will reveal our colorful, colorful, colorful polka dot design

 I just let the paint dry overnight and now in the morning I'm just peeling off the reinforcement rings

 So of course you don't need to let it dry for that long, it's just easier for me to let it dry overnight

 So for the second notebook I am using this floral scrapbook paper

 And then I'm tracing out the outline of the book along with the ring holes onto the scrapbook paper

 And then I'm taking my scissors and then cutting along the line to give us the shape of the notebook

 I'm using my hole puncher and then punching out the holes of the paper

 And then I'm taking my glue stick and gluing that sheet of paper onto the notebook

 So for the third notebook I'm just taking my magazine and then cutting out images that I want to stick onto my notebook

 You can also print out some images on the internet or that you have on your computer

 And then after that you can lay them out onto the notebook and see how you like it

 Today we're going to be showing you how to put together a pedalboard.

 so they can just plug in and play basically a whole bunch of great pedals.

 I'm going to show you how to wire it up, both with power and with audio.

 And show you how simple it is actually to put one of these things together.

 Here's my Pro 14, and these are the pedals that I'm going to be using.

 First thing to do is lay it out on the floor the way that you're going to be using it.

 So to do that properly, you want to work out which loops the pedals are going in.

 Now I'm going to cheat a little bit, because I've got this bridge.

 who does loads of cases for us, and they make these Pro 14 bridges.

 And basically, this will sit at the back of the Pro 14, like this.

 OK, now it gives me a level above that I can get to for the pedals that I need to get my foot on,

 but it also gives me this level below, so it tucks these effects out of the way.

 So when I just want to get to their buttons, that's what I need to get to.

 OK, so after moving some of the pedals around, I've finally got my board into a position

 where everything is nice and close to the loops that I want them to go into.

 Now when it comes to the actual board, I mean it can be as simple as,

 I've just gone down to the local hardware store and just asked them if they had any ply off cuts.

 They cut this for me at exactly the right size and cost me two quid.

 So in that scenario, all I would do is transfer everything over to the board.

 You need to remember when you're cutting the length of the board,

 a lot of the pedals you use a DC input, so you need to leave enough distance at the back of the board

 then all I need to do is paint that plywood, screw down the bridge,

 I've actually got a flight case made for this, so let's have a quick look at that.

 The plywood boards are fantastic, they're really easy to put together.

 You know, paint them black, put a couple of handles on the side and you're good to go.

 Obviously you can't put anything on top of them because the pedals are all exposed.

 and when you get to the gig you take the lid off and you're ready to go.

 We have our bridge with our pedals on, and that's going to go at the back.

 It slots down here, and then we're going to arrange all of our pedals.

 So let's get them all in there, and then we'll start wiring up.

 Hi, I'm Bob Lang, Executive Editor of Popular Woodworking Magazine.

 be making a green and green style finger joint for a drawer that I'm working on for a project

 of the features of this joint make it impossible to use a standard finger joint jig to cut

 is with this jig, which is just two pieces of wood screwed and glued together in an L-shape

I'm going to be working on the drawer sides first, so I've taken the

 thickness of the front plus an eighth of an inch, and that's where I mark this line.

 I just set this up against the blade and adjusted the height so the top of the teeth

Now I cross-hatch the areas where I'm going to be removing material.

 the cut, I simply adjust back and forth until the pencil line is right on the edge of the

 So after I've got the edge cuts made, I can just waste away the material in between.

 I've got both of the sides stuck together with a piece of double-sided tape, and I cut

 Now to transfer the fingers' locations to the front, I'm just going to lay that piece

 on there, mark the positions with my pencil, and then I'll mark the areas to be removed

 while I'm looking at the sides so I don't remove the wrong pieces.

 I set my adjustable square to the thickness of the side, and I'll use that to transfer

 cut on the proper side of the kerf, and clamp my piece in place.

I spent a couple minutes cleaning up the bottoms of the fingers' openings with

 This is very, very similar to a standing press, which you can find on my site.

 And all that we're doing differently is that we're getting a little bit of a drive from our hips

 So what that's going to do is allow us to lift a little bit more weight overhead than with a regular strict press.

 All that we're doing is a slight dip with our legs and then a drive up.

 On that drive up, your hips are popping up, and that's what's giving us our power.

 and then I'll also show you from the side so you can see my hips driving up.

 Get those weights up to the rack position just like in the press.

 At the top of that drive, that is what initiates my weight coming up overhead.

 So at the top of my legs straightening, that's when my arms start to drive up.

 We also have to remember, just like in a press, that we have to get our head out of the way,

 and the drive is also going to help us to get that weight overhead a little bit better.

 What I have in the rack is positioned just two inches underneath the top of my shoulder

 For our final recipe today we're going to make Better Than Tuna.

 This also utilizes Rhonda's no oil dressing and it has a half a teaspoon of kelp which

 And I've already chopped up some fine parsley, about a half a cup.

 And with that I've got about two stalks of celery, one ripe tomato diced fairly fine,

 one ripe bell pepper also chopped fine, and finally about a half a cup of diced red onion.

 This recipe also calls for a tablespoon of Bragg's liquid aminos, but we're going to

 And then I'm going to go ahead and add in our kelp and the Rhonda's no oil dressing.

 Now we want to mix this thoroughly so that it's well combined with all the other ingredients.

 And it's okay after you've mixed it to let it stand for a little bit to let all those

 Okay, well if you'd like you can place it on just a bed of lettuce and eat it as a salad

 alone or you can place it on some whole grain bread and enjoy it as part of your 15% cooked

 And we also have a whole cabbage leaf here and you stuff that in there, roll up the leaf

 And I hope you've seen how Rhonda's no oil dressing and the vegetable soup stock play

 a key role in many of the recipes in the Recipes for Life book.

 Thanks for being with us today and we look forward to seeing you again on the next How

 Hey everybody, it's Susanna from Papercraft Planet and I wanted to give you a quick tutorial

 It's great for masculine cards but it's also really handy around the holidays.

 Take a plain piece of paper and some silver or gold embossing powder and make your paper

 It die cuts, it's flexible, it's very inexpensive, you can embed your stamps in it and the possibilities

 Okay, the first thing we're going to do is break out our Versamark.

 So I've cut a die cut and I am using a memory box die called Cityscape Nightline.

 I'm just completely covering it in Versamark and then I'm going to move it into my powder

 pal and I'm going to cover it with some Ranger Tinsel Silver embossing powder.

 But the reality is any color embossing powder will give you a very similar effect and white

 over and over again ends up giving you kind of a porcelain look.

 You want to heat this until your powder completely melts and looks glossy.

 It's kind of like watching magic happen when all of a sudden you see that sandy gray powder

 become gray and metallic and take on that shine and that glitz.

 You'll know that it's completely embossed because your paper will start to warp.

 You can put it under a heavy book to flatten it out or just put a significant amount of

 There are some really fast crafters out there who can do this and then promptly take the

 warm paper and put it back into the embossing powder and then reheat it.

 They work quickly enough where the embossing powder will stick.

 So I'm just going to use the VersaMark over and over again and let it cool in between

 I'll just take my powder tinsel and put it right back in the jar and do this over and

 Unfortunately I work during the day so my chance to do stuff like this is generally

 On our weekends we're doing family stuff so it's dark in here and I'm working by the

 Already you can see and I'm sorry I asked Santa Claus to bring me a better video camera

 so hopefully we'll get some more crisp close up sharp videos in the hopefully near future.

 That additional layer of embossing powder has added shine but it's also started to smooth

 out and really take on an almost sheet metal appearance which I really like for the cityscape

 I've done three coats of Versamark and then the tinsel embossing powder and I'm getting

 I've pulled out the sentiment that I want to deboss into the warm embossing mixture

 I picked black because it shows up a little bit better against silver.

 Take it from me and personal experience you need this to be very wet ink and I happen

 to have a StazOn reinker so I re-inked mine right before this project.

 So it's a very wet pad and I have it sitting there ready so that as soon as my powder is

 melted I can go ahead and take my stamp and press it firmly into place.

 So I'm trying to concentrate my heat a little bit extra where I want my sentiment to go

 Try not to wiggle back and forth and then you're just going to lift straight up and

 Again, I'm sorry this is really difficult to see on camera but I'm going to show you

 Hey guys, it's Olga here and today I'm going to show you a recipe for strawberry chia jam.

 I have nothing else to say about it except for all of you must give it a try.

 I'm personally a big fan of jams but I try to stay away from store bought jams just because

 they're full of preservatives and chemicals, all these artificial colors and flavors that

 And then there are recipes for jams that take you hours and hours to make.

 This strawberry jam takes you about 5 minutes to make and it will take you to strawberry

 For a strawberry chia jam we will need the following ingredients.

 Strawberries, try to get organic if you can, chia seeds, freshly squeezed lemon juice and

 It has 5 times more calcium than milk so it helps to make your bones and your teeth stronger.

 Chia also helps to maintain your energy and your overall well-being throughout the day.

 The first thing I'm going to do is show you one of my favorite kitchen tricks.

 Grab your strawberry, place the straw at the bottom and push it up.

 By the way, you can try this recipe with any berry of your choice.

 Next we're going to place the strawberries in a food processor.

 Then we're going to add the rest of the ingredients to the strawberry puree and mix it up.

 Place your jam in a jar with a tight lid and refrigerate for about an hour.

 During that time the chia seeds will expand up to 3 times their original size.

 You can serve it with pancakes, make peanut butter jelly sandwiches with it.

 I personally love just hamming it with my tea or a gluten free cracker.

 I hope you enjoyed this video and if so, please don't forget to give it a thumbs up.

 It would really help me out and subscribe to my channel down below for more healthy

 You can find a printable version of this recipe on my website at fablunch.com.

 The link for it will also be in the description box down below so you can print out the recipe

 and take it with you to your kitchen and you don't need to bring your laptop or your phone

 with you because those things can get very dirty when you're cooking.

 If you try making this jam, please let me know how you liked it.

 But if you try making a different variation like using raspberries, blueberries or blackberries,

 let me know because I haven't tried all the variations myself yet so it would be nice

 I hope all of you guys are doing well, staying warm and healthy.

 Nearly everyone in America has had this dish either at a diner or a friend's house.

 The dish I'm talking about is meatloaf, and I know, I know it's commonplace,

 So today is National Inventors Day and our sponsor is BlackSocks.com.

 Now, BlackSocks have a really interesting business model and an interesting invention.

 similar to a subscription, the type of subscription you get to, let's say, a magazine.

 But instead of getting Sports Illustrated delivered to your door,

 you're getting something actually much more practical, underwear.

 Go online at BlackSocks.com, opt in, and then once a month you'll get a clean set of underwear or socks,

 and no longer will your undergarments become ratty and tattered and old.

 Meatloaf is a dish that primarily is made up of, you guessed it, ground meat.

 That meat is often beef, but it can be things like veal, pork, human, venison, chicken.

 similar to the way you have a loaf of bread, and it's baked in the oven.

 It dates back to Europe, where in the 5th century, the Romans were making a similar dish.

 The modern version of meatloaf that you know and love comes closest to the classic dish,

 And the recipe for the common meatloaf dates back to the 19th century.

 You see, during the Industrial Revolution, meat was able to be produced and ground

 And in the Great Depression, people didn't have a lot of dollars in their pockets,

 But they still had this meat obsession, and they had to come up with a way to stretch their meat.

 Good fillers, like vegetables, grains, bread, eggs, and spices.

 And so, with all of those ingredients added, we had the birth of the modern meatloaf.

 The meatloaf is typically eaten with some type of sauce or relish.

 I know a lot of people create a brown mushroom gravy for their meatloaf,

 one cup of chopped bell peppers, I'm using a mix of red, yellow, and orange,

 one cup of breadcrumbs, one egg, pepper, salt, a palmful of paprika, and a palmful of chili.

 While it's in the oven, you're going to mix together one half a cup of ketchup,

 one quarter of a cup of Worcestershire, a little bit of liquid smoke,

 a little bit of soy sauce, and about three tablespoons of molasses.

 Let the meatloaf cook for another 30 to 45 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 160 degrees.

 It pairs really well with egg noodles or you can make my celery root puree, which will go with it beautifully.

 Tune in tomorrow for another WTF, and if you're watching this on iTunes or YouTube, rate it and leave a positive comment.

 Okay, so we start with a smooth ponytail and for this bun we have a side part.

 You can't disguise that later, so you need to start with a solid ponytail.

 and cover up the donut by twisting the hair around, but you want the hair bun to

 look natural, so it's going to end up being a bit squished and that's good.

 that hair, so you're going to grab this hair and cover that up.

Tuck that in and then you can pin to make the shape even better.

 And what makes it a nice bun is that there's nothing sticking around there.

 It's fairly flat and you can add any kind of hair piece and the hair piece

 Alright YouTube, this is what happens when your idler control valve sucks.

 Hi, I'm Kat and this tutorial is how to do a full mercury glass finish using Krylon Looking

 This bottle I actually had to have a local hardware store order because nobody carries

 I looked everywhere in California, I guess it's just really hard to find.

 They ordered it, they only have these small little spray cans available, not really sure

 You'll need some kind of a glass surface you can spray on the opposite side of because

 whatever side you want your finish on, you're going to spray on the opposite side of the

 You'll also need a spray bottle with just plain filtered water or if you don't have

 a spray bottle available, you can dip your fingers into the water and just kind of flick

 it on the surface instead of doing the spray thing that I'll show you how to do in the

 It's mirrored but it's kind of funky because it has that mottled finish inside.

 Now this, it's not quite like the sepia tone that most actual mercury glass is, but I just,

 So I did that lamp and then I did a couple of little candle holders that I have back

 there on my dresser and I did actually go outside and try and light this on fire to

 make sure it wasn't flammable and it didn't catch fire so it should be safe for any of

 The first thing you're going to need to do is shake your spray paint for two minutes

 Now I've already done this and you will need to reshake it before you choose.

 So on this lamp I did have a different type of paint in it initially and I used turpentine

 to get it out so it's kind of got some funky stuff going on but that's the best I can do.

 So first you're going to spray a little bit of the spray paint into your glass container.

 And since it is in an enclosed space it is going to pull up a little bit in there so

 Now the water is what's going to give it the mercury glass effect.

 So this has been sitting here for about ten minutes and you can see you're starting to

 Now this effect would work a lot better if you had a flat surface that you could just

 But because this is in a round object it pulls up and there isn't a lot of air flow in there

 Now if you are doing this on a lamp yourself then you want to make sure that you put some

 masking tape over the electrical components which I've already done ahead of time.

 Hey everybody, this is Paula from cropnotesandcrafts.blogspot.com and I wanted to give you a little 411 on

 A couple of videos back I explained how I created the Victorian Lady Tag, which I had

 I had a couple of questions on several of the websites that I posted that video on,

 You will want to first get a shallow container that can take hot liquids, and this is just

 Take about a cup and a half, two cups of water, put that in your dish, it needs to be a fairly

 shallow dish, and a dish where your tags will fit in there nicely.

 And then take, I use about ten tea bags for a cup and a half to two cups of water.

 And it's just plain tea, in fact I like to use the very strong teas and dark teas, because

 you don't have to use quite as many tea bags with that, like the Irish breakfast tea, things

 But anyway, whatever tea, put about ten tea bags and let that steep.

 And when you take your tea bags out of your water, go ahead and squeeze the tea bag to

 get all of the liquid out of it, because you'll get some darker liquids coming out that way.

 Discard your tea bags, and you can wait for your water to cool down, and just take your

 Now you can tea dye all sorts of things, years and years ago I tea dyed some socks for my

 daughter for Easter because I couldn't find off-white socks, so I just took a pair of

 So you take your tag and let that sit for about 15 minutes, that's what I usually do.

 Now you can use all different sorts of papers and things, and if you have fragile paper

 that you want to tea dye, or something that's fairly thin, be careful, you don't want to

 leave it in too long because that paper could fall apart, so you may have to experiment.

 But these manila tags are very thick and heavy, and I've actually left them in, I've actually

 So these are some that were left in overnight, now the bad thing about it is the tags stayed

 in one piece, these are still damp, but I lost the reinforcement so I have to actually

 But these are really dark, once you leave them overnight, here's one that's dried, that

 And this one I thought was really cool because this was actually the top tag, there were

 several, this is actually the one on the top, so I got this neat little tea stain, I like

 But if you leave them in for about 15 minutes, you'll get a much lighter product that looks

 And I just have several heavy duty paper towels, and I'm going to put those on, absorb the

 Now if you really wanted to get through this process in a hurry, you could whip out your

 ironing board and take your damp tags, place them between several sheets of paper toweling

 Now this is just a plain tea dye tag here, but you can do different things.

 You can take your tag and crumple it up and then place it in the tea dye, and you can

 So if you want a really aged, old look, that's one thing you can do.

 And the other thing I did, instead of leaving these plain, once I took them out of my tea,

 So I'm going to take these tags and I think I'll sprinkle a little coffee on one of them

 I haven't tried it with regular coffee, but I'm sure it would do the same thing, you just

 And if your tags, if you did this immediately when you took them out of your tea, you would

 get more of a staining because your tags are going to be wetter.

 So I'm going to actually pat this a little bit because these are drying fairly well.

 And then once this is dry, I'll go ahead and brush the excess granules off and I'll have

 You can make your tea as strong or as weak as you like it and just go to town and start

 I think I've answered the questions that I had gotten about that, so if I missed something,

 please let me know and I will either probably go back and answer that wherever you leave

 your comment or try and get in contact with you to answer those questions.

 In today's video we are going to be looking at this wisteria here and we're going to be

 It's growing on our trellis that we've made and it's just looking fabulous this time of

 So I just wanted to bring you in, give you a little close look at this, show you a seed

 pod and then show you how to plant up some of this for yourself.

 These plants are definitely, they're fast growers but they're slow growers.

 This bush is probably 15 years old from seed and I'm going to show you what the seed looks

 like and just give you a few tips to plant one yourself and then you can have these sprouting

 Lots of trailing flowers, hundreds or thousands of individual flowers on here, thousands of

 These guys can grow really really fast when they get to this size.

 So you've got to make sure there's a nice open area, not next to your house that these

 Last year it had flowers but probably only about 20% of the amount that is on this year.

 I would assume on an older plant they would become much bigger as well.

 And anyways, let me just grab the tri-pod and we will plant these seeds together.

 Okay, so let's open this guy up and see how many seeds are actually in here.

 And being it's a juvenile plant, it's probably only going to have the one seed in the bottom.

 I don't know if that's normal or not, but on the other ones that this plant produced,

 So the Mysteria seeds are quite big, quite flat, and quite smooth.

 So what you do for these guys is if you order them off eBay or something like that, or even

 So what I would recommend doing is just putting them in a glass of water, like this, just

 I think you could use pretty much anything that's well draining, Miracle-Gro or anything

 I'm going to make a little divot in there, about a half an inch down or a centimeter

 And the remaining water I might as well put this one in there to soak for 24 hours as

 So I'm going to throw this in the greenhouse in a nice warm sunny spot.

 And if you want to see if this sprouts with me, make sure you subscribe to my channel.

 And I will frequently give updates on this and all my other plants down in my greenhouse

 And if you want to see more videos like this, make sure you subscribe to my channel.

 Now I actually discovered this very easy, cheesy gluten-free bread a few weeks ago on

 a channel that I've been subscribed to for quite a while called Hatched by Two Chicks.

 And the tutorial was so easy and had so few ingredients that this recipe went straight

 Now to start out, preheat the oven to 375 degrees and line a baking sheet or two with

 Now to make the dough, we'll need one pound of tapioca flour, one tablespoon of baking

 powder, four tablespoons of butter, two eggs at room temperature, and if you forgot to

 take your eggs out of the refrigerator like your absent-minded host here, don't panic,

 you can always plunk them into a bowl of warm water for a few minutes to take the chill

 You'll also need 8 ounces of sharp cheddar or whatever other cheese you like.

 I used Cabot's Seriously Sharp Cheddar, like the original video, and the instructions said

 to crumble the cheese, but I grated mine just to be sure it would get evenly distributed

 The original video used almond milk, but I used regular milk which worked out fine.

 After weighing out the tapioca flour, I stirred in the baking powder just to give it a head

 Now using the dough hook attachment of your stand mixer, mix the cheese with the tapioca

 flour, baking powder, butter, and eggs to get the mixture somewhat combined.

 Now you'll want to add enough milk to form a dough that's not really going to ever develop

 into one large ball, but it will develop a play-dough-like consistency that'll be easy

 When I formed mine into balls, I figured I could divide the weight of the entire batch

 of dough by 20 and make 20 equally sized balls to fit on one baking sheet.

 Once you've rolled all the dough into balls, you can bake them for 20 minutes like the

 original recipe states, or if your rolls are slightly larger like mine are here today,

 I baked mine for 25 minutes, and you'll know they're done when they're puffed up and have

 The best way I can describe this one is sort of like a cheesy cracker meets a dense buttery

 They're really great with lighter meals like a bowl of soup, but the leftovers were even

 better the next day when I sliced them in half, added some meat and cheese, and toasted

 I can definitely see why these were being made for a party in the original video.

 And if you want to print a copy of today's recipe, you can always visit my blog in the

 My personal favorite band ever was Modest Mouths, their early music.

It was kind of like what was possible after Nirvana and sort of taking that energy into a new space.

 One of my favorite songs from their earlier albums was Custom Concern.

 So what you want to do is, yikes, you get both hands in frame, so you're going to go like this, middle finger on 3, it's going to be the first part is based on a C chord.

So real quick, it's kind of helpful to know what the chords are.

 So the chords are going to be, basically the first chord is C, then A minor, G, and F. That's basically what the chords are for this song.

 But they do some nice little sort of melodic Modest Mouths style stuff with these chords.

So you're going to have 3, 3, 0, on the G string, then you're going to hammer on 0, 2.

 Yep, the next part is based on A minor, but they're just doing the bass of it.

 So it's A note and C. I used to play it like this, but either way it works, I do A down here.

 I used to do a slide right there, but he doesn't have it in the tab.

But whatever, you could do it exactly like the tab, or the way I would do it is A, A, C, C.

 So what you do is you put middle finger here on 3, first finger on 2, and then you hammer on pull off on the 3rd fret.

You could do exactly like the tab, or you can slide that 0 note.

 Modest Mouths is weird because they would do a major scale and they would make it sound really depressing.

Again, they're just climbing up scales, but somehow they made it sound really cool.

 If anyone has any more requests for Modest Mouths songs, let me know.

 can of condensed milk and make sure that this is covered with water all the time.

 have to add water about every 20 minutes and for this recipe it did take about two hours to get

 our ingredients we do have one and a half cup of flour, 1 teaspoon baking powder, 5 eggs and 3

 and for our three milks we have regular milk I'm using 1% and I have evaporated milk and

You do want to sift this just because you do want your sponge cake to be nice and soft and

You might have a little problem seeing the eggs here but I am adding it one at a

So after you've added all your five eggs we'll add our vanilla and after that we're gonna

So make sure that your mixer is on slow or you're gonna have a big mess.

So every now and then you might have to scrape the side of the bowl making

 So let's pour our batter into a 9 by 13 grease pan and this will be going to the oven at 350

 you can no longer feel the resistance of the condensed milk and everything is blended together.

 And this may seem to be a lot of milk when the first time you pour it on top of your cake but

 You might have to add more holes in your cake to expedite the absorption of the liquid.

When you can no longer see any liquid on top of your cake, you'll be ready to

 taken the dulce de leche out of the stove and when you first open it, it may seem to be a little

Just kind of beat it a little bit and stir it a little bit and it should smooth out.

Refrigerate your cake overnight and it's best served when it's cold.

 Alright, today I have finally, finally done my video on how I do my brows.

 I've actually done a few different brow tutorials on my channel, but I don't like any of them anymore.

 Now I use aqua brow, I do not use a pencil, and the way that I apply my brows has changed as well.

 Every single thing that I've used on my face, including all my makeup, all my hair, etc.

 is all in the description box down below, it's all linked so that you can find it nice and easily.

 This one here is from Sigma, it is very, very fine, but it's also quite sturdy,

 so it means that you can really draw in your brows where you want them.

 The second one I like is this here, this is from Bdellium Tools.

 This one is even smaller than the Sigma one, but it's not sturdy either.

 It's very kind of floppy, but I like that to draw in individual hair,

 If you forget, don't worry, I'm going to link them in the description box down below for you.

 This colour will be perfect if you have light brown hair to medium brown hair to dark blonde hair.

 Over the top of that, to set it in place, I use the Gera Cosmetics Brow Bar to go.

 Right now, let me zoom you in so you can actually see what I'm doing.

 What I do first of all, actually, is I get a little spoolie and I comb all my brow hairs...

 On my hand, I use my hand as a palette or on my leg or whatever's handy.

 I always take a small amount because if you put too much on your hands,

 there is no possible way of getting what you didn't use back into this tube.

 So take out what you need as you need it, so you don't waste it.

 and I go a little bit underneath and a little bit above where my natural eyebrows are.

 you'll see that I leave it nice and sparse so it looks more lifelike.

 so just watch and that'll make more sense than me gathering on and trying to explain it.

 I was angling my brush flat like this and drawing in little hairs.

 You want to mimic the natural hairs that you do have in the angle that they grow.

 and so the hairs that I draw in are going to match the hairs that are naturally there.

 So I've got underneath my brow done and the tail of my brow done.

 Now I'm going to keep it nice and light the further I get into the inner corner of the brow.

 In this brow bar to go, you do have a little waxy section here.

 I'm using this middle powder here because it's a little bit more ashy

 and I'm just going to flick these little hairs in anywhere that the aqua brow missed.

 I'm not going to do anything else to it because that's when you start getting into like yuck territory.

 But what I am going to do, and this is completely optional, I don't do this every day.

 In fact, I only really do this if I'm going out somewhere or I can actually be bothered.

 But anyway, what I'm going to do is take a little bit of my foundation

 because I'm going to be using this as a base for my foundation.

 I'm just going to take a little bit of my foundation and I'm just going to apply it on my face.

 But anyway, what I'm going to do is take a little bit of my foundation.

 You can use concealer, you can use foundation, it doesn't matter.

 So it just neatens it up a little bit, makes it look a little bit more polished.

 This is also a good trick if you have gone a little bit out of the lines like you've made a little boo-boo.

 This can act as your eraser so it can make everything nice and precise again.

 So I'm going to go ahead and do my other brow now so I don't look like such a weirdo.

 I do hope that you enjoyed that and that it was somewhat helpful.

 Come and follow me on Twitter and Instagram and say hi over there.

 Today we're going to take a look at the interval referred to as a second.

 And in order to learn these intervals, we're going to use three steps.

 First, we're going to find an oral reference, which is a popular song or a common sound

 that you are familiar with already that has the interval in it that you can refer to.

 Second, we're going to find where this interval lies on the fretboard,

 the shape of it, how it looks, so that you can play it on the guitar.

 And third, we're going to sing the intervals and using this exercise,

 Now, for an oral reference for each one of these, I'm going to start with major seconds going up.

 So a good oral reference for major seconds going up is the major scale.

 but it's just something that a lot of people know the sound of.

 If you just sing the first two notes of that, la, la, that's a major second.

 I go, la, la, la, la, la, la, la, la, la, la, la, la, la, la, la, la.

 If I want to find a major second from this note, it's la, la, la, la, la, la, la, la, la, la.

 So I'm using the major scale as my reference point to find what that major second is going to sound like.

 For major seconds going down, I like to use ACDC's Back in Black.

 Now, for minor second, this is a very popular one to do the Jaws theme.

 Now, minor second going down, I like to use Fur Elise by Beethoven.

 On the fretboard, there are three ways to play each type of second.

 The first way is if you stay on one string, the seconds will always be three frets apart.

 If you do two adjacent strings, any string except for the G and B string is going to be like this.

 So low E, for example, low E seventh fret here with my pinky, and then A string fourth fret with my index.

 So for example, ring finger fifth fret G string, index finger third fret B string.

 On the same string, they're just the frets right next to each other.

 On adjacent strings, they're going to be, rather than four frets apart, they'll be five.

 And then if you're on the G string and the B string, once again, it's going to be different.

 So you can see, for example, on the seventh fret G string, index on the fourth fret B string.

 Now, it's great to improvise and compose using each of the intervals we're going to go over in this series.

 Once you look at them on the fretboard, just to get it more in your head, more in your ear.

 So even though it's involving singing rather than the guitar, it's going to help you a lot.

 For this third step, we're going to take what we learned in the first two steps and use it to do this exercise.

 So I recorded a little play along track that you can download in the description below the video.

 Basically what it is, is it's a piano going up a major second, down a minor second, then up a major second, down a minor second, up a major second, and so on for a whole octave.

 And what you should do is you should sing along with this, try to match the pitches, and in your mind, visualize the fretboard.

 Visualize what these whole steps and half steps look like, and then start to use your aural references to sing up a whole step, down a half step, without this track.

 Just the process of that will be helpful, so I'm not going to tab that out.

 Then put the guitar down and sing along with this track while visualizing what you played on the guitar.

 And then, after you've felt more comfortable with singing with this track, you turn the track off and you sing it without the track, this time using your aural references.

It's going to be very helpful, I think, for getting seconds better ingrained in your system.

 And what happens is, when it's really in your ear and you can sing this sort of thing unaccompanied, then you'll start hearing melodies in a deeper way.

 And we're going to do this for every interval, and you'll start to see what I mean.

Okay, first thing we're going to do is we're going to remove the caliper from

 a 16mm, we're just going to remove that so we can get the caliper off the car.

I just want to point out the reason we're doing this from down on the ground

 is because we have a diamond plate bed on the back of this thing and we don't want to

Normally I would leave this hanging by a piece of wire such as this

 to leave it hanging from here but in this case we're just going to sit it on top of

Alright, next thing we're going to do is we're going to take off the mounting

 Now the rotor itself, you can see this thing is stuck on there, it isn't coming off.

 alternative you have is you can take a hammer and you can beat the bay like that to try

 to get it out but anybody who's done this before knows these are a real pain in the

Make sure the bracket right here where the mounting nut connects

 onto, I'll do this a little bit, let me catch it on here and I'll show you.

 Now what you need to do is you hold this bolt inside here with a wrench and you tighten

 thing pops off it's going to come flying off of you so if you want to put a nut on there

 And then what you just do is you just tighten them up a little bit each time.

 Anybody who's done this before knows that you can really beat the heck out of this thing

It could be one of the hardest parts of the job but if you do it

 like this it takes a little bit of time but it actually works really well.

 If Pete's having to try to heat this thing up with a torch or beat the heck out of it

 with a hammer or a sledgehammer or whatever you have it just takes a little bit of time

 As you can see by these bolts I've had these for a long time and they seem to work really

 What happens, I'm sure you guys all know it, is the face of this gets rusted onto here

It's perfect for heavier stems and vines and loose scrolls and even borders.

 It can be worked easily on curved and wavy lines, but it doesn't take tight curves well.

 We're starting on the top left, and we're going to move over to the right, and we're going to go down a ways.

 And take the needle to the back of the fabric, pull the thread through.

 And then we're going to come out again on the left, directly opposite of where we went down.

 And now we're going to work back to the right, about half the distance between the beginning and the end of the first stitch.

 Taking the needle to the back and pulling through, and to the left again half the distance.

 We're going to take this down on the right, a little bit below the last stitch, but we want to keep these stitches parallel all the way down the column.

 But now we can go through the same holes as the previous stitches.

 So we're going up on the right in the same hole, back on the left.

 And using the sewing method we can kind of scoop the fabric a little bit.

And you'll notice that we're keeping the needle horizontal as we work down the column.

 So back up on the right, scoop the fabric, and out on the left.

 You can see that with the sewing method the stitch works up pretty fast.

 And then moving up to the right, we're going to go back out on the left.

 It looks best with a twisted non-divisible thread like pearl cotton because you can really see the basket weave.

 With stranded cotton it's a lot smoother, the finishes, and you can't see the basket weave as clearly.

 And to keep this level at the very end, we want to keep those stitches level, we're going to end on the upstroke.

 So you want to go up on the right, take the thread to the back, and that is the basket stitch.

 For more information about the basket stitch, please visit Needle & Thread.

 I'm your host Sarah Wilson and this first episode is being brought to you by Knit Circus

 Today I'm sewing yarnslyde in my studio in Kansas City, Kansas and I'm going to be chatting

 As you turn it over you can tell that you are not getting any sort of a visible cast

 If you wanted to make it more stretchy, you could just insert a piece of elastic thread

 through that little tube in the cast on there and tie it off and then it would be really

 The cast on is great for any kind of item that you're going to start with one by one

 It's great for sleeve cuffs, mitten cuffs, hat brims, absolutely anything that's going

 to start with a one by one ribbing can benefit from this cast on and it just looks really

 It's basically just a variation on the long tail cast on that I'm going to show you today.

 So all you're going to need to start is your needles that you swatched with and matched

 For this cast on you're going to want a tail as long as the edge you are casting on.

 So if you are casting on a 6 inch tail you're going to want 6 inches of yarn plus whatever

 So we'll say another 6 inches for weaving in, that would be 12 inches total for your

 It doesn't really matter which way you put it on the needle, if the tail is in the front

 or the tail is in the back, whichever side is in the front you're going to want that

 In this case I have put the tail over the front of the needle and it is on the right.

 Go ahead and put your hands into the yarn as though you were doing the regular long

 Right side of the diamond is around my index finger and I'm holding the two tails together

 For the first stitch I would go ahead and put my index finger on that loop that's on

 So what we're going to do, we're just going to be rotating between palm up behind the

 So I've just rotated that diamond counterclockwise and it is now behind the needle.

 I'm going to take the tip of my needle and I'm going to come up through the diamond from

 I'm going to take my palm and rotate it clockwise towards me so that it's going to be palm up

 So now I'm going to take the tip of the needle and I'm going to go into the diamond from

 So now I'm going to rotate counterclockwise again, palm up behind the needle.

 I'm going to go into that stitch from the bottom up, rotate again, go into the stitch

 from the top down, rotate, go into the stitch from the bottom up, rotate, into the stitch

 Now that's just going to be repeated across the row for as many stitches as you need to

 It looks like it's basically just a loop of yarn over the needles.

 Now you can see the purl stitches do have that purl bump across the bottom of them.

 That's how you'll be able to tell the purl stitches from the knit stitches.

 Now I'm going to flip this around and you can see it from the back side.

 You can see it looks exactly the same from the back side except in this case the first

 stitch on the needle is a purl because a knit stitch looks like a purl from the wrong side.

 So then these are the knit stitches here and then these are the purl stitches.

 Now if we look at it from the front again, you can already see that this cast on is reversible

 Now this variation on the tubular cast on is great because it does not require set up rows.

 You can immediately go from this cast on into your knitting, into your 1x1 rib.

 You're just going to take care when you are aligning the stitches that the bottom edge

 where this line is here is going to be on the bottom so it doesn't get twisted around.

 It's easy to twist this cast on in the round but it can be done.

 Just take extra care to make sure that all of those stitches with the purl bumps here

 and this line across the bottom are aligned on the bottom of your needle when you are

 The other great thing about this variation, you can see it on the needle right now, all

 You do not have to knit certain stitches through the back loops.

 You can immediately just begin knitting and purling as you regularly would.

 You've just learned how to do a variation of the tubular cast on that's great for all

 I'm the Sexy Knitter reminding you that being sexy is all about being confident.

 For tips and tricks on how to boost your confidence, visit me on the web at www.sexyknitter.com.

 You can also friend me on Twitter and Ravelry as the Sexy Knitter.

 Hello everyone and welcome to my very late first tutorial for 2014.

 are going to be doing this tan look and it is from her January 2014 CC

Now I'm sure you can already tell but I have already applied my base

 So to start off with the eyes we're going to go ahead and do eyeshadow and all of the

 eyeshadows today will be coming from BH Cosmetics 120 color palette and this is

 fluffy brush we're just going to apply that all over the eyelid.

 is very opaque so it might take a few coats of this color but just keep on

 applying it and blending until you get a nice coverage of it on your eyelid.

 Once you've got a good wash of the sort of creamsicle orange color we're going

 to go ahead and go in with a, it kind of reminds me of an actual like edible

 here and I'm going to apply this basically to two-thirds of my eye not in

 the very inner corner because when looking at Taeyeon's color it sort of

 corner and then it's going to get slightly darker as we get to the outer

So just keep on applying it and make sure to blend we don't want any

 harsh lines we want a good transition from the lighter color to the slightly

 straight and your eyes are open that is the area of the eyelid you see the most

 I'm looking straight forward I have actually quite a bit of eyelid showing

 Once we are done with our second orange color we're going to move on with our

 pencil brush which is just a really tapered and dense brush we're going to

 go ahead and apply this color to our outer corner and also slightly in the

Now this color seemed to be the most prominent in Taeyeon's eye look so I

 think I went a little bit heavy on the color but if you're a little bit scared

 it's okay to go a bit lighter and also once you've felt that you've blended it

 in enough and got enough of that color we're going to go ahead and use the same

 color that's left on the brush and just blend that into the under eye area about

 sure there are no harsh lines because that's just not going to look very pretty.

 And so like I just said go ahead and take the leftover color and apply it to

 After applying to the outer third of your bottom lash line we're actually also

 going to apply to the inner third and so when you're done you should have a small

 that to the middle area and this effect actually makes your eye look a bit

 liner and I think it does the same enlarging effect as if you would just

 going with a black gel liner and a liner brush and I'm just going to line my top

 which I'm going to try to mimic but since my eye shape is different than hers it

 eyeliner works for your eye shape and just kind of going with that

 because the real focus of this is the orange eyeshadow and getting that sort of

 So once finished your eyeliner should look something similar to this and what

 I'm going to actually do is taking the eyeliner brush I was just using I'm

 going to wipe off a little bit of the excess just onto a piece of paper towel

 whatever you have lying around really and I'm going to slightly apply this to

 my lower lash line really going really lightly on the middle section but this

 is just going to add even more definition to your bottom lashes and it

 gives that widening effect more with also the bit of light glitter that we

 can use whatever mascara you like you can use false lashes if you'd like to

 it's really whatever your preference is doesn't really matter that much.

 that your eye makeup is done so we're going to move on to the rest of our face.

 First off I'm going to do my brows real quick and today I'm using this Benefit

 Gimme Brow which is this really nice brow gel I really like it it's very

 subtle and it just keeps your brows in place and just looks really nice.

 once we are done with our brows we are now going to move on to a little bit of

 blush and I just have this really nice bright sort of it has a bit of an

 orange tint to it and so I thought it would look really cute so I'm mostly

 applying this to the upper part of my cheeks because it looks like tan had

 more color there and I'm also just going in with a little bit of a little bit of

 a contouring powder just to give my face a bit more definition.

 part of this look is the lips which personally was kind of the highlight for

 me so I'm first going to go in with this Etude House lip concealer because it's

 going to be a gradient lip as per usual it seems like so I'm just applying a bit

 today is this Etude Colourpop and it is in the color Sunny Pop pretty fitting

 right you know sunny and so I'm just applying this to the inner part of my

 lip obviously trying to do a gradient thing with it and then I'm just taking

 my finger and blending it out because we want to try to not get any harsh lines

 finished look it is a beautiful orange color that will be great for the

 upcoming spring season or even those of you who I know are on the east coast of

 the US and pretty much dying in the snow I'm sorry wear this bright look to

 such a long time I'm so sorry but anyway if you'd like to see more tutorials from

 Soshi Styling make sure you subscribe to this channel also if you have any

 requests for any looks there is a link down below that you can fill out and I

 can go ahead and take a look and see if I can do it for you all thank you so

 Hey everyone so today I'm going to show you how you can sew beads onto your shirt.

 So yeah, okay so first you'll need some beads and what I'm using is glass beads and yeah

 and then you'll need a sewing needle and you'll need some thread and I'm using white because

 it matches my shirt and then yeah you'll need a shirt and I'm using this one because it

 I got this like a few years ago at Old Navy's and you can get these at like craft stores

 I guess or any store that sells shirts I guess or you can use the ones you don't want

 to wear anymore just to test it out I guess because that's what I'm doing.

 Okay and I actually don't know how to sew I only know how to do this because I just

 learned yesterday and yeah my sister taught me because she knows how to sew.

 So yeah okay so first you take um okay so first what you do is you take your needle

 and then wait first you take your thread and then you cut it to the length you want it

 to and it has to double the length you want it to because you're going to fold in half.

 So once you fold it in half you tie a few knots so you'll know it's like secure and

 stuff and a few knots yeah you should tie a few knots and you have to thread on the

 needle first and then you tie the knots and then once you got that done you take your

 needle you poke it under your you go under your shirt and you poke it from under where

 you want to place your bead and then once you got that it should have it should look

 like this and then now when you're adding on your bead you just pick one bead you want

 I'm going to use this bead and you just thread it through the needle.

 Now once I've thread it through you pull so yeah there you have the bead and then you

 So there you have your bead and yeah it's pretty simple and you just keep doing that

 all over again to get to sew on another bead and this is very easy and I'm just putting

 So I've thread it on and then I just pull and then I just poke through.

 So there I have these beads and I hope this helped you so yeah thank you so much for watching

 okay go all right those of you don't know my Chromebook messed up it wasn't

 this piece as most people broadcast to fix it was the wire the wire was chewed

 up so what I did strip the wires this wire is the ground the wire that goes

 around the white that's the ground that's the positive the ground is always

 your negative so what I did plug this up plug in your cord that goes into it

 before you put any power into your adapter your AC DC adapter you'll put

 like so then afterwards you know bend it if you want to do whatever there's that

 now you see these two wires are not connected now I'll connect my adapter to

 port now if you keep a close eye on there no not the cord to that little

 hole you will see a light when they connect connect disconnect connect on

 connect disconnect okay now if you look at the wire all I'm doing is connecting

 these two wires the two positive wires connect that and while these are

 connected the light will come on so you are going to disconnect it once you see

 that this is working disconnect twist these two wires that are disconnected

 from each other twist them together we don't want nobody you know killing

 themselves by putting amps into their body so wires are twisted turn best way

 you can get it now you see normally you would put a cap a wire cap on the end of

 both of these well we don't have that so we will eventually get electric tape and

 connected but there's holding both cords are both ends twisting it now

 after this is done I will reconnect my my cord into the adapter so these are

 connected and now you can see the laptop is charging not really you don't really

 need to buy a new laptop all you really got to do is just rewire it to where it

 will work so it's pretty much it my name is Anthony Tyler is the one recording it

 So one of my favorite summer styles would definitely have to be box braids.

 I've had them in for about two months, so excuse the new growth and really dry edges.

 But I really wanted to do this video regardless, so I hope you enjoy either way.

 You're just going to do like a French braid on the front of your head, and then take all

 So you get this really cute side pony, but it's not flat because you have the braid at

 In this next look, we're going to be twisting, taking up the hair on our edges and twisting

 And then I'm going to grab the right part as well and just tie them together in the

 I'm going to start out by making a big braid on the front right side of my head.

 I'm then going to grab all the hair from the top of my head and arrange it with the braid

 This is a braid look that definitely gives you both length and volume, which is why I

 You're basically going to take two bunches of hair from the front of your head and you're

 And then you're going to put them both in the back and secure them with a hair tie.

 This time we're going to be making a little side part with the hair and then we're going

 to just take some hair from both sides of the top section and secure them in the back.

 A slight modification of the previous style, we're going to leave the part as it is and

 This is the look that I just wear when I go out and when I want to make a statement.

 You're going to take a bunch of hair from the front of your head and make a big braid.

 This braid is going to be relatively bigger than the one that we did in look 1.

 After braiding the braid, we're going to just wrap it around on the top of our head and

 After you have this beautiful braided ball on top of your head, you could actually leave

 So I just go ahead and do that, create a high ponytail in the back of my head.

 For this last look, we're once again going to create a side part and we're going to twist

 This is going to create a big elevation on our edges and we're just going to secure it

 Tell me in the comment box below which look you thought was your favorite.

 All right now we could go through each and every one of these things, but I want to make absolutely sure that

 Everybody's understanding and everybody's clear on the process here because you can do this with any chord change it really doesn't matter

 Skip down to my to my g13 which is last bar of the third line of the PDF

 I'm just dropping my third finger so you can see the voice and ordinarily it would be up here ready to go

 If I move it up one more, I'm gonna wind up getting tendinitis, so I won't do that

 Some kind of a 913, but we don't really know what 913 because there's no third

 We don't know if it's minor major or what so and it's a little tricky to grab

I got I have a major seven chord not good in our two five one setting

 Not good enough to five one sitting but very good in terms of a voice in major seven

 Okay, I move it up one more 16 minor move it up one more now that's an interesting sound yeah

 So today I will be showing you how to grow your nails longer and faster and so they won't

 So first we are going to use, first we are going to use petroleum jelly and um it helps

 So just apply it like this and I'm sorry I don't have a nice bathroom.

 So you just apply it like this and then do this like every other day or so.

 And um yes I'm still going to make it from the last tutorial because I'm just filming

 Uh probably like um um tomorrow or I don't know I'm just making videos.

 Today we're going to practice some pedal steel country licks over the blues form, the 12

 So we're in the key of A, and be sure to click the link below so you can get the tab and

 But we're starting here with our third finger on the 12th fret of the second string.

 We're going to bend that note up a whole step, and then you can put your pinky on the 12th

 And then when we go to the 4 chord, we're going to use this shape.

 So we're going to do 10th fret, 10th fret, and then the 9th fret is going to bend up

 And then back to A. The E chord now is going to be 12, 12, 11, bending up a whole step.

 So let me just pull up this backing track here, and we're going to play it together

 So that's using all the different shapes there, and just following the chords of the blues.

 So be sure to click the link below so you can get the tab, and we'll see you in the

 We start with an instant flower and we make sure we've got this diamond shape facing us.

 I'm going to sneak my finger inside the flap, just like that, and I push the flap down.

 There's a little flap here and we just fold that flap up, just like that.

 And I flip my flower and I do the same thing on the other side.

 I fold this side of the diamond shape over and the petal pops up and I stick my finger

 Just go over those folds, just like that, and then I push this flap up.

 It's important to push this flap up because that's what creates the very flat petals that

 From the center fold, I'm just folding over all the layers to reveal this next petal.

 And I stick my finger inside that petal and again I flatten the smiley face and run my

 And I flip my model and I book fold again all these layers, book folding those over,

 stick my finger inside the petal and flatten the smiley face and fold the little flap up,

 And the last step is just to separate the petals into a plus sign so I've got an even

 All I'm looking for is this little flap should be in each section of the flower, just like

 Hi, I'll be teaching you how to play like mostly the trumpet like the solo part in

 search for it I don't find any like good results so then I decided to make like a

 I'm not like a hundred percent sure it's right but I'm kind of sure it's right so

 right it starts off with the like arpeggios but then like a lot of other

 tutorials will teach about them so I'll just like teach it again.

 arpeggios but your right hand starts playing the melody with the arpeggios.

 while your left hand is playing the arpeggios your right hand will be playing

 So you just basically five notes F like F E D G and like a lower A. So you start

 So be careful on the last two notes the notes are held a bit longer because

 right after you play them you start playing those trumpet solo part I think

 I'm not a hundred percent sure about all the notes but I'm pretty sure that most

So then like the rest you could probably figure out by yourself but like

 the trumpet parts what I think stumps a lot of people because like when I

 search on Google I see lots of like people on Yahoo asking like how to play

 Hey guys, Chef Jason Hill here and today we're going to be making a delicious

 related to the tomato and they are also known as Mexican green tomatoes.

 you peel back the papery husk you can see there's dirt in there so we always

 want to rinse that off and it has a little sticky texture to it so I just

 over to a sheet pan because I'm going to put this into a 425 degree oven for

 of garlic, we're going to do one whole onion and three serrano chili peppers.

 They're pretty spicy so if you want to add more and want more spice go for it.

 Cut the tops off there and I'm just going to cut my onion in half and I just

 like to drizzle everything with a little bit of canola oil and then a

 Alright it's been just over 20 minutes and everything seems to be nice and

 add everything into the food processor and I have about a cup of chicken stock

 on the side that we're going to use if we need to thin it out and you don't

I'm also going to add about a cup of roasted green chilies and the reason

 I didn't roast these with the rest of the vegetables is because you have to

 we're just going to adjust the seasoning and I'm going to pour about a half a cup

 like I said you can always add more peppers but that's pretty daring.

 such a great versatile sauce that goes well with a lot of Mexican dishes.

 John Paul here, and I'm going to teach you how to do battle ropes today.

 What they work is your core, your biceps, your triceps, your shoulders, your back, your

 whole upper body, also your glutes and your hamstrings, but it also gets your heart rate

 This is a great alternative to doing all those leg exercises to get your heart rate up and

 We're going to do one exercise for 30 seconds, and then we're going to rest for 30 seconds.

 You're going to wrap the rope around a tree or a post, and you're going to grab the rope

 Then you're going to make sure they're even and walk forward so you have a little slack

 We're going to do that for 30 seconds, and then you're going to rest for 30 seconds.

 We're going to do one at a time back and forth like this, making sure your core is engaged,

 The third one we're going to do is we're going to go side to side, and you really need to

 I know some of you cheap bastards out there are thinking you can go to Home Depot and

 My suggestion is you click on the link below and get one there.

 We're going to put the Smart Stain, which is a dioxide mixed with our water-based protective

 This is ferric nitrate, actually it's called my Victorian Brown.

 It's ferric nitrate with a nickel dioxide in it, so it kind of gives you this marbleized

 The yellow will kind of make it look like an oil rubbed bronze with some painting in

 Now, not only have you got a tint on here, but you've also got a seal coat.

 So now you're sealing the metal as well as putting a tint on it.

 I could add more brown or I could add another color, black, if I wanted to.

 What you want to do, first off, you want to position your fingers like so.

 Put your middle finger right here, the tail of the board, and your index finger right around here.

 Put your middle finger right around here, and your middle finger right around here, or at these bolt areas.

 And then once you do that, you pop down on the tail, and you push forward, all in one smooth motion, like so.

 It might take a while to get the hang of it at first, but a good practice is to practice it on your leg, to get down...

 Like, to get the motion down, to know how it feels and everything.

 Many mornings that I get up early before I work to exercise on my elliptical

 did notice that the brightness was just okay and I wanted something that's going

 to really give off some great brightness and be effective and I don't have to

 And in doing and reading reviews of a product, I decided to go with the

 and then also show you this in action later when it gets dark out.

 headlight, the handlebar bracket, USB cable, and there's an optional

It does state that for your initial charging you want to charge it

So the next is I'm going to go ahead and charge it and I will then do a

One of the other features that I wanted to make sure to also mention is

 it does have a quick release so you don't have to unscrew this every time

 handlebar is a little thinner, it does have again the two extra plastic pieces

 to add thickness, the wrap around, and then also the rubber piece.

 going to do is go outside, try it out, and we'll see how well it works.

 Okay so I'm outside now and I'm going to go ahead and turn it on.

 notice right away, the light illuminates on the button that you press.

 One of the things is it does give you flexibility so depending how you put

 this on your bike, you can put it on vertically or horizontally.

 got it low, we've got steady light with flash, just flash, medium, and then we also

 ride it towards the camera so you can actually see the different settings of

 and then I'll put on the different light options and then I'll ride towards the

 this light really can get and this is in the flashy mode and you could see the

 light last night and riding today I'm very pleased with my purchase.

 difference going from the previous headlight to this new CycleLight Metro

Really really happy and it's exceeded my expectations and perhaps it

 have any comments questions please let me know and be safe on the road out

 Now, Mike's watching his bread, but in this, you gotta make a sandwich.

 It's a simple artichoke, pickle, and cheese sandwich with mayo and mustard.

 For more sandwich recipes, anything killer, anything about life, visit livelife365.com.

 now we're going to set the crossbow upon high power this is how you do it

 put the booby between your legs like that and tighten up to high power

 Hey guys, I'm Nina and I'm Randa and today we're here with Rip Esselstyn!

 For those of you who don't know who Rip is, he is a triathlete and best-selling vegan author of Engine 2 Diet.

 He got a bunch of firefighters healthy and well, got all their cholesterol lowered.

 So for those of you who say vegans don't have muscles, look at this guy.

 So you just had a killer workout so I bet you're really hungry.

 I know you travel a lot so we want to know what's easy for kids out there and what you recommend.

 If you have access to the Big Bowl, it's my favorite thing in the whole wide world.

 Before I had this commercialized product, I would just buy the individual ingredients and put them up on the note.

 It's not like you don't cut into a mango and then you have half of it that's rotting.

 Since I don't have a knife around, I'm just going to take the spoon.

 Actually, get me a knife because there's another little trick I want to show.

 Instead of using cow's milk, obviously we're not a fan of cow's milk.

 Thank you for teaching our viewers how to make an amazing breakfast.

 You can expect more delicious, amazing, man-tastic, woman-tastic, stick to your rib, amazing recipes.

 You can click his face right now or the link is in the description below.

 Lie on your back with your head resting on the floor and your arms relaxed by your sides.

 Tuck your chin toward your chest until you feel a gentle stretch in the back of your

 Lie on a foam roller positioned at your mid-back with your hands behind your head.

 Walk your feet to move the foam roller up your back, making sure you don't roll past

 With your legs straight, lay your arms flat against the wall behind you so that your arms

 Keeping your neck muscles relaxed, slide your arms up the wall.

 Keeping your neck muscles relaxed, slide your arms up the wall while straightening

 With a slight bend in your knees, engage your glutes and lean forward, reaching your

 With your back flat, come back to the starting position while keeping weight on your heels.

 Move your arms slowly up and down the sides of your body as you focus on breathing deeply.

 Anchor an exercise band of waist height and wrap it around your hip bones.

 Stand up straight, doing a slight pelvic thrust at the end of the motion.

 With your feet shoulder width apart and your knees slightly bent, push your hips behind

 While keeping your lower back flat and still, slowly raise your arms above your head.

 Hold that position for a breath, then release your arms so they're slightly behind your

 Breathe in and pull your arms back so that your arms and head make the shape of a W.

 Hold for 2 seconds, breathe out, and return to the start position.

 Stand with your feet shoulder width apart, toes pointing slightly out.

 Squat down as low as you can, making sure to keep your lower back flat.

 After a long grey winter your patio may be in need of some attention.

 Wet weather and the lack of sun can create a breeding ground for algae, lichen and moss.

 Apart from ruining the look of your paving or decking it can also create a slip hazard,

 so it's a good idea to remove it before you bring out the garden furniture and barbecue for those summer days and nights.

 First of all clear the space completely, removing all furniture, containers and ornaments.

 In the past you'd have to attack the surface with a scrubbing brush,

 but now the job has been made so much easier with pressure washers.

 Pressure washers consist of a pump which blasts water through a narrow nozzle to create a very powerful spray.

 Like lawnmowers they can be powered by electric or petrol motors.

 where another key factor in determining how powerful the washer will be is the size of the motor, measured in watts.

 The higher the wattage of the motor the more powerful it will be.

 A light pressure washer, 100 bars, would be good for cleaning garden furniture, barbecues and bikes.

 A medium pressure washer, up to 110 bars, can be used for cleaning your car and most paving and decking.

 A high pressure washer, up to 130 bars, is the ideal choice for cleaning brickwork, decking and patios.

 There are also specially formulated detergents which can be used with pressure washers for a number of different jobs,

 You should also wear safety goggles as the high pressure spray can throw up debris at high speed.

 And as ever with any exterior electrical appliance, make sure you use an RCD adapter.

 Make sure water is flowing freely before turning on the washer.

 Slowly move the wand across the surface and watch the grounding dirt and algae disappear.

 Take care with plants as the detergent and high pressure spray can damage them.

 Pressure washers use water more efficiently than a normal garden hose

 and some top of the range models can even take water from a water butt.

 There are some accessories available to help make the job even easier,

 including this cleaning head which can be used on horizontal and vertical surfaces.

 Hey Chiggies, ok today we are doing Foyle's Tissue Mini, I really hope you like it, it's

 So to start off with I've got two black nails using Kushio's 2AM in Hollywood and the two

 middle nails are China Glaze I'd Melt For You and then we're going to be placing some

 So while we're waiting for the Sesh feet to dry I want to show you the really beautiful

 beautiful foil I bought from the nail shop Australia, oh my gosh it just reminded me

 I also bought their nail foil glue, yes you do need a specific nail foil glue and their

 If you want to do nail foils you have to buy the right tools, you just have to.

 You can buy all of this nail foil stuff on eBay, all you need to do is type in nail foil

 and it will come up with the glue and even some kits where you get lots of different

 Now I'll be applying the foil to just the two middle nails today and that's why I painted

 the silver just in case but I don't think this actual foil is transparent in any way.

 So you're going to paint a very thin coat of the nail foil glue, it doesn't work with

 any other glue, I mean you could try but as far as I know it doesn't.

 This glue doesn't actually dry, it stays tacky but you must wait a minimum of 4 minutes

 So moving on to the actual foil, you want to cut a piece off, you don't have to cut

 And remember don't do anything with that hand that has the glue on it, don't run your fingers

 through your hair, don't pat your cat or anything like that because as I said it stays

 So place your foil after you've waited a minimum of 4 minutes onto your nail and then just

 rub it, rub, rub, rub, rub with anything you can find, I mean rub with your finger, rub

 with a cuticle pusher, rub with a cotton swab, rub with anything you can and then once you've

 done all that you can just peel it off and there it is on your nail.

 And then moving onto the middle nail, repeat exactly the same process.

 It is so important that you wait that amount of time at minimum, you can wait 7 minutes

 Just remember to get into all of those little corners and if you happen to have gotten any

 glue or anything like that on your actual skin it's really easy to take care of with

 Now once you've done that you can move onto a top coat, you have to use a specifically

 designed or at least a very slow drying top coat before adding any other kind of top coat.

 Now I do this, then let that completely dry which takes a little while and then add Sesh

 But I would never put Sesh feet directly on a foil because it will literally ruin it and

 Now the next step is to paint the buildings for the city skyline, I'm using my matte black

 acrylic craft paint and my fine detail brush from the Stylish Nail Art Shop.

 And you can do any kind of buildings, big ones, tall ones, short ones, skinny ones,

 fat ones, ones with lots of windows, ones with no windows, it's up to you.

 But obviously you need windows really so you can see the foil in the background otherwise

 Ok so any height of building but you want to have a couple of windows in your building

 so that you can see through to the foil because that's what makes it look like the lights

 Now next to make it look like it's night time I'm going to fill in all of the edges around

 the buildings and so basically covering all that beautiful foil but there's you know I

 Now once you've done all of that you can go ahead and seal it all in with a good quality

 I will then be coming back in with a matte top coat but as I've mentioned on numerous

 occasions you should never put matte top coat over acrylic craft paint because it will smudge

 I would thank you for subscribing and thanks for that delicious thumbs up.

 Now, the next thing we're going to do is we're going to do a cartoon dog.

 Okay, now with your cartoon dog, we all know dogs come in all different shapes and sizes,

 so I'm going to start off with the dog's head, okay, and I'm going to play around him kind

 of airy, I'm going to give him a big ear like that to begin with.

 Now, I'm going to cross over here, and his head is kind of circular, and we're going

 Now we're going to stick the nose up here on top like that, okay.

 Now I'm going to plot in the eyes as well, so like that, and like that, just do a dot

 And my dog here, he has his tongue hanging out as well, he's thirsty.

 Okay, now we're going to do the neck of the dog then, and we'll stretch it down a bit,

 And if you want to, when you do your collars, you could even put your dog's name on the

 And now we're going to do the shoulders, and the shoulders can be a little high up, and

 stretch him down, and he's kind of, our dog is going to be kind of sitting, so do a line

 Now we're going to do the opposite side now, where the other foot is as well.

 But first, we're going to just do a little guideline, just down for the body, like so,

 and I'm going to stretch it out at the back here as well, and this is where of course

 the hind legs of the dog can sit as well, like that, and we'll join that line up with

 And then his foot, can go out here, like that, okay, and then, time for a tail, we'll

 Now, so we're going to do the leg in at the back here as well, so we're going to push

 this down, like that, and then it's going to come back up here like that.

 Now I like to do kind of his body as well, so I'm going to just add a line in here, just

 So, his, and the final leg, we're going to put it over on this side, and this leg will

 be kind of stretching out, like that, and you can do his paw, kind of going up, like

 that, kind of stretch it, and we can do kind of a few little paws on it like that as well,

 So just when you're tidying up, you might just finish up the shoulder there, you can

 play around with it, if you want to put spots on your dog, you could do that as well.

 As you might notice as well, I'm using a very thick marker, it's a lot harder to use, so

 What I recommend is to use a pencil, maybe to begin with, when you're doing it, and you

 can draw it lightly, and you can always go back over it if you do make any mistakes.

 I was saying you could put your name on the dog's collar, but I'm just going to do a

 So there you have it, that's just a cartoon dog, simple cartoon dog, and give it a try,

 Okay, got it done with the filling, now we're going to do the meringue.

 One area where people have a problem with this is you've got to make sure there's no

 The bowl's not wet, your egg whites are room temperature, and your beaters are clean and

 Okay, we're going to pour the egg whites in, and that's all we're going to do right now.

 This is going to make a lot of noise, so I'm going to explain to you what we're doing here,

 and I'm going to turn it on and stop every couple of minutes here.

 We're going to whip this, we want to lose the yellowish look, tint to these eggs, until

 they start getting white and a little bit fluffy, but we don't want to go too far with

 At that point we'll stop, we'll start sprinkling our cream of tartar, and then we'll add our

 Let me stop and just mention to you about this cream of tartar.

 A lot of people say, well I don't use it because I don't know what it is, and I don't want

 Cream of tartar is a natural chemical, and it's used to firm up your egg whites, it's

 also used in other cookies like snickerdoodles, 7-Minute Icing.

 Very important to hold that meringue, so grab yourself a store, it's not expensive, and

 Okay, I've lost the yellow tint off the egg whites, so in goes the cream of tartar, and

 what I'm going to do is slowly just shake a little bit of sugar in there.

 I shouldn't say the word hard, we want a firm peak and a soft peak.

 I'll show you what the soft peak looks like, and I'll show you when we get to the firm

 You mix it too much, it will actually break on you and it looks like water coming out

 Okay we're at a soft peak right now, see how those peaks just bent down?

 Some recipes call for that, but that's all we need today in our meringue.

 When I'm doing this, with the rest of it I can actually hear it get to the point of

 I can't go here because the speed is pretty loud, so I'll be in the unit shop right now.

 Alright, I'm going to take this, bring it to the pie, put it on top, see you in just

 Okay, we're going to put the meringue on here, make sure you get it all out of the bowl,

 Some people take their fingers and make a design and kind of let it swirl off the fingers

 Bring it all the way to the edge where you don't see any filling, because we are going

 A little bit more than a couple, probably about five to seven minutes, you want to keep

 Okay, now we take a spatula and just touch it, get those nice little pretty peaks.

 Real pretty, you can be real fancy, you can swirl it, whatever way you want to do it.

 Here we got a nice beautiful lemon meringue pie, ground off nice peaks on the top.

 Let this cool in the refrigerator overnight or several hours for the filling to firm up.

 Watch the video a couple of times, remember some of the tips, and you can get a pie that

 are taller than what the gauge is, but the width of your stitches are the right

 well, if I go with a bigger hook, my width is going to get wider too.

 website that called it this is, but they call it the golden loop.

 you just pull that first loop up just a little more to make your stitch slightly

 And this goes for single crochet, half double, and double crochets.

 quote came from, I will put a link to it on the annotations here.

 just a little bit more, it'll make your stitches slightly taller.

 But you also want to make sure, if you're going to keep it the same width, you want

 So you pull that up a little taller, but at the same time you're keeping this the same size.

 Hi you guys so today we're making meaty with sausage and ground beef and this will be the best eating you'll ever

So these are all the things you need all your kitchen tools and ingredients

 I'm boiling my water and I have like oil in there in the water because I don't want my noodles to stick

 I was making two separate pans one for my mom and one for me because she doesn't eat pork

 Just want a little bit of water because I don't want my Italian sausage to stick to the pan

 Stick to the pan when I slice them in half because as you can see in the middle

It was hard for me to flip it over because I had my camera in my other hand

 Now this is the time where I put my seasoning after like it's almost done

 I put my seasoning, I put my garlic powder, my onion powder and my seasoning salt

 But it makes tomato pasta so much better like who doesn't like sugar in a tomato pasta

So don't forget the sugar you have to taste it because you don't want to have boring

 Yes, combine all the goodness of the meats and cheeses and all my goodness

 I didn't realize after I did my first day of noodles that I had to put my sausage in

 but then it really doesn't matter though because once I put my sausage and you have to combine all the

 Fillets together so it's not like, you know, the layers are just going to separate.

 Then you repeat the layers and you place it in the oven at 350 degree oven

 And like 20 minutes of homework with this you see this goodness, oh it's super good

 Probably like that much and I was full for like the rest of the day and I hope you guys liked the video

 I think that these knee push-ups are more exercise for my shoulders, just to try and

 I think it's harder for me to maintain balance than it is to maintain balance while I'm doing

 Normally, if you don't have to work so much on your balance, trying to maintain your balance,

 If I wanted to increase the difficulty a little bit, I would bring my hands closer

 If I brought my hands closer in, then I would get more tricep workout whenever I'm doing

 If you can see a little bit, I'm kind of trying to maintain balance, but it was really, really

 Another thing that's really helpful is to have a wall behind you so that your feet stop

 I didn't have a wall behind me where my feet are, so I had to make sure that I got on my

 Here I have the wall behind me, so it kind of stops my feet from sliding backwards.

 But if you don't have the wall behind you, then it's a lot harder to push up the initial

 But once you're there, then it's almost like the knees are a natural stopper.

 So if you're going down to do a push-up, like right now, I'm going to do a push-up.

 Most of the time, your knees don't go sliding out from underneath you, so you don't fall

 Another thing that I'm doing here is I'm putting my hands in fists.

 My wrists are just tore up pretty bad from about 10 years or 15 years of doing exercises.

 You need your tomato paste and your lily butter if you have it.

 Okay what you do you put your oil and then you put 2 teaspoons of salt.

 I'm going to add a little bit I think that's 1 teaspoon of lily butter.

 Okay what you're going to do if you really do the white masonry water so you're going

 So time to time you put a little bit of juice on the top of the meat.

 What I'm going to do right now I'm going to finish put my rest of my cups of my water.

 If you want you can add half of let me see you can add 1 third of water or leave it cook

 If you have a hot sauce or hot pepper so it's the time for you to add it right now.

 If you follow the directions and then you cook it very good at the beginning the next

 Alright, so today I'm just going to show you how to open up a sealed 608 bearing.

 This is an ABEC, I don't know, wait no it doesn't even say ABEC, Speed Demon 7, I guess

 But what you'll need is a sort of small thick tool like this, just this sunglass screwdriver,

 it's a flathead, don't use something like a razor blade to pry it open because you'll

 So just try to find something kind of strong, this small, that can wedge in between the

 Then what you want to do is sort of apply a little bit of pressure.

 So you just sort of want to put the screwdriver in between the shield and the race.

 What you do, you get it in between and then you get it under the shield.

 And luckily, if you can see, this doesn't have a metal cage, these 7 Series Speed Demons

 And then to put it back on, say after you've cleaned it, you just take the seal, you press

 It's always going to leave a little crease right there because you stretched the metal.

 Pop it back in, make sure all these little clamps reconnect, and pop back in there.

 I live in a very rural area and lots of times when I go into my grocery store looking for

 Sometimes they're just hard as golf balls and other times they're soft as mush and it's

 What I do is when avocados go on sale for 99 cents I go in and I buy as many good looking

 Now I bought these a couple of days ago and they were not quite ripe but that didn't bother

 I just bring them home and I very carefully watch them for when they ripen.

 An avocado is ripe or perfect for guacamole when it yields to gentle pressure from your

 We would never eat five at one time and of course they've all ripened together so I'm

 One time when I was walking by the freezer section in my grocery store I saw frozen guacamole

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to cut these avocados open and I'm going to scoop out the

 meat with a spoon and put it in my mixer and then I'm going to beat them with this beater

 I'm going to beat them up and I'm going to put in a little bit of ascorbic acid.

 Usually I just use ascorbic acid that I buy in a bag from the Amish at a local Amish store.

 But I don't have any of that today and how perfect it's got an avocado on the front of

 This is fruit fresh and it is dextrose which is a little bit of sugar.

 Ascorbic acid, citric acid and a couple other agents to keep it from caking.

 To these five avocados I'm probably going to only put about a fourth of a teaspoon of

 this ascorbic acid and then I'm going to show you what I do to it.

 Ok sometimes with avocados doing your best to select the perfect ones sometimes it works

 Here's one that was over ripe even though it felt fine on the outside it was over ripe

 I'll try to salvage this taking the dark spots out and we'll eat it tonight but I will not

 These are perfect and four out of five were perfect and look just like this.

 And you know it when you taste it because it just tastes a little old.

 I'm going to scrape down the sides and I'm going to bag this into two maybe three bags.

 And no kidding start to finish this might have taken me three minutes.

 A couple of months ago I made a video where I took some avocado out of the freezer because

 So I'm going to tack that on to the end here and show you what it looks like when it comes

 This is just avocado and so if you want to make guacamole out of it you add everything

 And it's just perfect to have in January or February when you can't find a good avocado

 and you want to make homemade burritos with your homemade tortillas and can't find an

 avocado you just go pull it out of your freezer and there you have it.

 Usually what I do is I take a big freezer zip lock bag like this and I mark it avocados

 and the date I processed it and then I can slip the individual bags in here.

 I can get up to ten of them in here and this is how I store it in the freezer.

 You can see what a beautiful green it is just exactly like it was freshly mashed.

 If I think about it the night before that's perfect because then I can just cover it with

 plastic wrap and let it defrost in the freezer overnight and it's ready for dinner the following

 I didn't happen to do that today so I'm just going to let it thaw on the counter and it

 will be ready for this evening to put on tacos or on nachos or just to dip as an appetizer.

 Of course it's frozen solid but you can see the beautiful color.

 Cover it with a little plastic wrap and we'll have fresh, identical to fresh guacamole this

 Tomatoes, onions, lemon juice, salt and pepper, whatever you want.

 Hello there, thank you for tuning in to the Burnout Lane and today we're going to do an

 First thing you're going to need are 6 quarts of oil, I'm running full synthetic 5W-30,

 a funnel, a 13mm socket and ratchet, an oil filter, a set of ramps, and some paper towels

 Alright so now first thing we're going to do is remove the drain bolt and the oil filter.

 And I forgot to mention you should probably have an oil drain pan and some gloves would

 Alright just loosen it up and do the last couple of turns by hand.

 Alright now just let it drain for about 8 minutes or so and it should be fine.

 Okay so now what you're going to want to do is clean the area where the oil filter was.

 And then we're going to be ready to put the new oil filter back in.

 Now just get a little dab of the fresh oil and put it around the gasket of the oil filter.

 Now you may see that this K&N oil filter comes with a nut to tighten it up or loosen it.

 Now I forgot to mention there's this washer that goes in between the drain plug and the oil pan.

 It is recommended that you change this washer every time you do an oil change.

 My car does have the C51 package so it does require 6 quarts of oil.

If you enjoyed the video please subscribe and hit that like button.

Mirepoix is just your basic trinity of vegetables of onions, celery and

And they don't have to be the perfect right out of the bag stuff.

 it too fine because they may burn in the pan in a hot roasting oven and cause your gravy

So here we have the burg rubbing it down with a little olive oil canola blend.

 you were sitting around in a salt and apple cider bath for 12 to 14 hours.

 have the basic seasoning which is salt, pepper and granulated garlic.

 like celery, onions and carrots in there as well if you'd like.

You can also add chicken broth, white wine, water, anything to keep

 the vegetables from burning and add a little moisture to the pan.

We make a little piece of foil triangle shaped and spray it with some Pam spray coating

 sear the skin and hold the juices into the bird as much as possible.

 we want to turn the temperature down to 300 degrees and we're going to pour a little chicken

It works great in a home oven but sometimes it's a little difficult in a confection

 hour and a half, maybe two hours, until the internal temperature of 165 to 170.

 to take our drippings and our roasted mirapod vegetables and we're going to throw them in

 a little stock pot and we're going to add some other fresh ingredients to this pot.

We're going to add a little more liquid so we can have enough gravy for the

We're using water here but you could use water and chicken base or nice fresh chicken

 to bring this to a boil and then we're going to let it simmer for about 10 to 15 minutes.

When your stock is boiling we're going to add the roux to the pot and

 with the chicken stock or more roux and the flavoring with more salt and pepper if we

We're going to strain this and we're going to save it for tomorrow.

 to seeing you tomorrow when we teach you how to finish this gravy and to carve the turkey.

 Welcome to Alpha Direct International, home of the EasyClick system.

 The EasyClick system is a new way to connect a battery without the need for any wrenches.

 Just slide them over the post, and by just flipping it, the EasyClick connector will

 To unclamp them, just flip your EasyClick connector, and your battery will be disconnected.

 Just pull the tab, remove the covers, get your black power booster cable, place them

 Just pull your boot covers, just lift the EasyClick connector, see the tab, slide them

 over, you hear the click sound, press down, and your battery is still connected.

 Slide them back in, snap it, place them over the battery post, connect it.

 This time I'll show you how to prepare the delicious Cauliflower Cappuccino with the oysters.

 In case you don't have, you take the fresh onions and some small chives for decoration.

 When the butter is dissolved, you put immediately the fresh onions.

 But of course I take a lot of care to don't get the shell with me.

 We're going to make a cocktail, which is the painkiller, a great tiki drink.

 I call it a dessert drink because it's nice and sweet, but they call it a painkiller for

 So we've got something non-alcoholic to drink between drinks, and then we've got a nice

 You need pineapple for the garnish on this drink, but you could also juice it.

 If you don't want to juice it, go ahead and get canned pineapple juice.

 Pusser's is the traditional rum that you want to use with the painkiller.

 It's got a nice sweetness to it, and it doesn't have as many of the preservatives some of

 And then you need mint and pineapple for the pineapple mint water, and then just a pitcher

 So starting with the pineapple, you want to go ahead and lay it down on a cutting board.

 And again, use a cutting board that you do not use for onions and vegetables.

 And a ripe pineapple has still got green and yellow different colorations here.

 And it's not really going to get any sweeter, but it is going to get mushy.

 So here's where I tell you not to waste the top of the pineapple.

 Just put the whole thing down on a platter, arrange fresh fruit or something else around it.

 You can use a single spear as a garnish on a cocktail by skewering that through another

 After you've cut the top off, take the spines and leam over there, cut the bottom off as well.

 Now you've got a pineapple that sits flat on both sides, which is kind of convenient.

 So you need chunks for the pineapple mint water, but you also need the wedges for the

 Make them nice and thick, about a half inch to three-quarter inch thick.

 Real simple, just right in the middle, go about halfway through and make a mark there.

 And that's what goes on to the rim of your drink and makes it really easy.

 And then for the pineapple mint water, you just want to take the outside off the pineapple,

 And then I pull this apart, and then right down the center is that bit of core that I

 And now I can pretty much do anything I want with the rest of this.

 Or just put these chunks directly into the pineapple mint water that we're about to make.

 So you've got your pieces for your garnish, and you've got your pieces for your mint water.

 You can keep it in a pot, bring it in in the winter when it's too cold outside, put it

 Go ahead and cut off about two to three inch pieces of mint, and you're going to want a

 When you cut your mint, to make sure that it grows correctly, you want to take a look

 at it, and you'll notice that there are two little leaves here that are starting to pop

 And if you cut it just above those two little leaves, your mint will then grow and sprout

 up further from there, instead of getting those long trailers that grow off into your

 And then you have a nice tight mint bush like this, instead of one that's kind of sprawled

 Once you take that handful of mint that you've cut fresh, you're going to just kind of ball

 You don't want to tear the leaves, you just want to bruise them.

 We've already got the pineapple chunks in a pitcher of water, and then we're just going

 And then all you have to do is put this in the refrigerator, make sure that it chills.

 Now before you serve it, you can give it another stir, get everything mixed around.

 And you can, if you want to, you can remove the mint, maybe leave just a few pieces in,

 But sometimes the mint will turn brown after it's in there for a little while.

 So I like to take it out and just add a few fresh leaves, and then I've got pineapple mint water.

 We've got everything measured out here in a shaker that's nice and filled with ice.

 That does take a little bit to pour in there, but you want to make sure that you get it all.

 And you're going to pour this unstrained right into your chicken nuggets.

 And then we're going to go ahead and take that pineapple that we already have there.

 I remembered to put the pineapple spheres in there as an extra garnish.

 You can take something like pineapple mint water and actually add a splash of it to a drink like this,

 which is a bit sweeter, a bit thicker with the coconut cream and such.

 And some people like that, and that actually just complements the flavor.

 So two simple things here that we did in the Zen Tiki Lounge Test Kitchen.

 I hope that you'll subscribe to our channel on YouTube so that you can get all of our videos.

 You can subscribe to the podcast that we do each week on iTunes or the RSS feed of your choice.

 Just look here on the screen and you'll see all the ways that you can get a hold of us.

 An approved waste oil drain pan, a filter wrench, a combination wrench or socket set,

 If the engine is cold, it helps if you run it for about five minutes to warm the oil

 After all the oil is drained out, start the drain plug back in by hand, then use your

 If you don't have a gasket on your drain plug, or if you have one that's damaged or corroding,

 The oil filter is located right above the oil pan in the engine compartment.

 Make sure your oil drain pan is positioned below to catch the oil that will run out.

 We recommend using an oil filter wrench to remove the oil filter because it will give

 Rub a little fresh oil around the top of the new filter, then screw your new filter in

 so that the gasket contacts the base, and give it one full turn.

 Remove the oil cap and put it someplace safe so that you don't lose it.

 Refer to your owner's manual and it will tell you just how much and what type of oil to

 Go ahead and start the car and run it until the oil light goes off.

 When it does, turn the car off and it's time to check your oil.

 Pull the dipstick out, wipe the oil off, reinsert it, pull it back out, and read your oil level.

 Obviously, the dream of any bartender is to be able to immortalize yourself with a great

 drink in a hundred years' time, and somebody will still talk about it.

 And I truly believe maybe I have done that with my breakfast martini.

 Obviously, because she sees me first thing in the morning, and every morning she always

 But one day, obviously I must have looked worse than ever, she said, you must have breakfast.

 And that's when I start to bite into this toast with marmalade on top, and I start to

 And the more I was biting into this toast with marmalade, the more I was starting to

 And that's when I come up with the idea of the breakfast martini.

 First thing, nice, light, shredded marmalade, orange marmalade.

 Remember, whenever you make a drink, always use cheap ingredients first.

 15 ml of fresh lemon juice, which gives the citrus aspect about the drink.

 15 ml of Cointreau, which gives the orangey, sweety flavor about the drink.

 And then, obviously, great spirits like the Tancritane, which is all citrus flavor, botanical,

 Now, we're going to mix it a little bit to allow the marmalade to mix well in the drinks

 You shake a little longer than normal with this one, obviously because you want to allow

 We don't want to have any wax or any other flavor than the orange.

 The great thing about this drink, you've got to remember, the naturally spicy citrus flavor

 of the gin, which is Tanqueray 10, which is combined with the sweetness of the Control,

 then the citrus aspect of the fresh lemon juice, and the secret ingredient is obviously

 the marmalade, which gives you the aftertaste, the linger taste of the bitter taste of the

 All we have to do is hook it up to the adapter here on top of the mowing deck and it just

 Now all we have to do is lower the mower deck to the ground because you want a good seal.

 And then we'll turn it on and the water will spray underneath and start to soak all the

 We're going to let that go for a minute before starting up the mower and letting the blades

 Ok, it's run for about 90 seconds or almost 2 minutes so I'm going to go start the mower.

 And you can see that green foam in the front that was agitated when we started the mower blades.

 I'm going to let it rinse for another minute and then I'm going to back it off to show

 series I'm actually going to show you this really healthy and super easy soup.

 is about this soup not only it's healthy but it's actually very very delicious.

 wash it you will see all the bubbles and the white texture that comes out of it.

 just two of us what I do is I make it up till here but when you wash it the grains, the

 to need for one cup of lentils, red lentils, you're going to need one and a half cup of

 liters to begin with and then afterwards I'm going to add more water because I don't like

 when my soup is thick and the lentils they're actually going to become thicker as they boil.

 I pre-boiled already my water so I'm going to add a little bit more heat to it.

 drain, well not drain but gather up all the fluffiness that you will get on top.

 need to take off that foam and just clean it up and that's it really.

 to do it is have a bowl of water, just raw water since you're going to put all that foam

So there's something to clean your drainer, not to make it dirty.

So you're going to add lots of salt because the grains they take a lot of salt

And while this one is getting foamed up I'm actually going to prepare my tomato

So for this one all you really have to do, just put the volume down a little bit

And you're going to clean it up like this, just collect the foam slowly

 amount of salt I actually put in here is a lot in comparison with other foods but it's

So I'm going to start frying my tomato paste and it will be ready

 on the lentils then just collect it off and add some paprika for the coloring and for

And while it gets boiled make sure to cover it halfway so it gets the

And it's recommended to actually, I would recommend you to have some boiled water

If you did then give me a thumbs up and subscribe to my channel.

 I'll show you how to use the whole chicken, because the whole chicken is less expensive.

 Some people like the fat, but you know, supposedly not as healthy.

 I usually get a cheap salt, clean the chicken with it, and then you just like...

 Then you just rub the chicken all around, you know, like underneath.

 Just make sure underneath, like see, this one, still unfinished feather and stuff.

 I'm not too worried about the inside right now, because I'm going to split it open.

 And then you cut, not exactly half, but you want to cut the backbone out.

 And I turn it upside down, and then I press the breastbone, then it'll be flat.

 But you always have to clean it when you buy it from the supermarket?

 Well, some people just get it from the butcher and then put it in the pan.

 Let it cook for a little bit because you want the sweetness of the tequila.

 This is Adam today, we're going to be talking about alternating crashes or really alternating

 Surfaces I'm going to show two and then three over any beat and it really takes it home

 That's okay, I guess it works for a chorus, but you can go you can bring it even more

 To the top if you were to double up your right hand and then I'm going to do that and then switch and use

 So that takes it way over the top as opposed to just you know this

 So what I actually did is one and two and that's what my hands doing one and two and

 I'm going to use this ride as my third and get a cycle of three going so I'll start and just bring it all together

 Hey, I'm Coach Kozak from Hasbun, here today to bring you another free professional workout

 When I'm all done demonstrating the workout, make sure you click the link in the video

 It'll shoot you over to Hasbun's website where we have the workout instructions.

 The barbell preacher curl is one of the best isolation exercises for your biceps.

 The first thing that you're going to want to do is make sure that your seat is adjusted

 The taller you are, the lower you're going to want the seat, and vice versa.

 You're going to want to position the seat so that when you get up, put your chest on

 You can go ahead and rest your entire upper arm, your elbows, onto the pad.

 I'm going to go ahead and grab the bar with my hands, shoulder width apart.

 What I want you to do is try your best to keep your shoulders back during this exercise,

 When you lean forward like so, it makes it easier, but it also allows you to use your

 Instead, we're going to lean back, keeping good posture with my elbows and my upper arms

 We're going to come all the way up and all the way down in a nice, full range of motion.

 If you can't go all the way down when you're doing these, well, that means you're probably

 You can perform this exercise either seated like I'm going to demonstrate, or you can

 Usually, I prefer to do this exercise seated just because it allows me to really focus

 on isolating my triceps and not getting any other body parts involved.

 I'm going to use what looks like a diamond grip at the bottom or base of the dumbbell.

 Now, if I'm using a much heavier weight, the technique to get it up overhead, you don't

 Now, once I have it in the starting position, I'm going to try my best to get my elbows

 But instead, as the dumbbell is lowering, I'm keeping my elbows in.

 We're going to go all the way up, all the way down, dropping the dumbbell behind my

 The reverse dumbbell curl is a great movement not only for your biceps but for your forearms

 So starting with just two dumbbells, we're going to have our palms facing down, our elbows

 Keeping my wrists straight, I'm going to curl up and control the movement all the way down.

 Don't just let the dumbbells flop down but instead control that eccentric part of the

 Another thing to focus on is keeping your wrists straight and not letting your wrists

 So keeping those elbows in, all the way up, all the way down, controlling both aspects.

 A unilateral reverse grip triceps push down is a great movement not only to isolate the

 inside of your triceps but also to make sure that both arms are getting developed equally

 We're going to start with a cable machine with the handle up nice and high.

 We're going to grab the cable handle with the reverse grip, palms facing us.

 If your cable machine happens to have a handle, feel free to take advantage of it.

 Tuck this elbow in nice and tight to your body and while pressing down make sure to

 I don't want a slinky wrist on the way down but instead keep that wrist locked in.

 Squeeze the inside of your triceps at the bottom of the movement.

 Nice full range of motion all the way up, all the way down, only bending our elbow joint

 This one is great for not only your biceps but your forearms as well.

 Two dumbbells with your palms facing one another, good posture.

 Nice full range of motion that sits both the long and short heads of the bicep.

 A dumbbell tricep extension can be done on a flat bench and it's a great movement to

 We're going to slowly in a controlled fashion only bend at the elbows.

 At the bottom of the movement our elbows should be pointed straight up at the ceiling.

 So what I don't want to happen is on the way down for you to lose that angle and for your

 I really want to isolate your elbow joint and your tricep muscles, the back of your arms.

 It will shoot you over to Hasfit's website where we have the workout instructions.

 If you enjoyed this workout, make sure you check out Hasfit's website where we have hundreds of additional free workouts.

 We have your free meal plans to lose or gain weight as well as our complete 30 to 90 day fitness programs.

 And while you're at it, stop by our store, pick up a poster or a t-shirt.

 I'm Coach Kozak from Hasfit and I'll see you at your next workout.

 We're going to add it to this BMW R1200GS, but the windshield is just slightly too low

 Let's take a quick look at what's included in our package, and let's get it installed

 So, included in our box here, we have the X-Screen additional windshield.

 We have our mounting template, that's basically a decal we're going to stick on top of our

 Some MRA information, this is some install instructions, our Bolt hardware, and this

 is the rest of the mounting hardware, which is our adjustment arms.

 Let's take a quick look at getting this template on our factory windshield.

 It gives us instructions for how far down from the top, where the Bolt holes are going

 to drill, and a measurement on each side, so we can make sure that it's centered on

 I'm going to peel off the backing quick, and we're just going to take a look and see how

 We're just right at the edge of our windshield, so we have our holes where we're going to

 I take a brand new drill bit, which is nice and clean for when it comes time to drilling.

 But first, I'm going to assemble our X-Screen, just to make sure it's going to line up on

 I'm just going to make sure, before I drill holes in my windscreen here, that everything's

 So, I'm going to go ahead and drill these holes out on this template now.

 I do recommend you can use a center punch on these to drill these out.

 But if you're really careful, you can do it no problem as well.

 So, we'll remove our decal from across the front of our windscreen here.

 These metal plugs here, we're going to stick one on each side here on the bottom of our windscreen.

 Now, remember we haven't tightened down these bolts at all, so we can still flex and move everything.

 So, now that we have our X-screen installed, if these tabs are vertical and these are down,

 If you give these each a quarter of a turn so these are flat, and this is flat, you're in adjustment mode.

 So, if we're in bad weather, rainy, it's really cold, we can move it up.

 We have a screen that's about five inches, six inches taller than our factory shield.

 If you're doing an off-road section or it's warm weather and you want some air flow through your helmet, tilt.

 It gives us many, many positions of adjustment in this windscreen.

 Anywhere between about an inch higher than factory and about five or six inches taller than factory.

 Thanks for checking out our video on the MRA X-Screen that we installed here on this BMW R1200GS.

 So your B string is no longer a B, it is the same pitch as your G.

 It's the easiest way to sort of imitate the tuning they do, which is they tune their guitar

 They go E, E, and then B, B, B, B. Alright, but if you don't want to completely restring

 your guitar and tune it that way, the easiest way to do it is just to drop the B string

 So whatever note you play on the G string, the 7th fret for example, on the same fret

 of the B string, which is now a G, it's going to double that note.

 Alright, it's the same riff throughout the verse when they're singing in the pre-chorus.

 And it's all basically the same up until the second pre-chorus.

 And that part, again, it's not exactly the record because they've got their strings tuned quite differently.

 And you're going to kind of have to flatten your 2nd finger so that it hits the 13th frets.

 Right, but it sort of imitates what they do without again having to retune all your strings.

 Okay everyone I don't know if you remember the front of the airplane here

 on this DLE 20 on the front here I made a couple of like circular lead weights

 tied and I velcroed weight on that side and I did also the same thing over here

 but you used to have to use too many of them sometimes you have to put some one

 on top of the other on top of the other and it's just not a not the best way to

Today what we're gonna do is we're gonna build a jig to custom make our lead

 weight the size that we want so that way we can put it up there and it could just

 be one piece instead of several sticking together and it's a more of a

 Okay guys so what we're gonna do is make a jig here today to make our own custom

 we have our lead here that the last attempt was failed we had a little hole

 in the wood here that dripped through onto the table this wood does not have

We're gonna basically nail down wood here that's going to form the shape

 So it's gonna bubble up it's really hot but the the wood absorbs the heat once

 it gets once it solidifies we can bring it outside and spray it down with the

 Okay guys we have it outside we're just gonna put some water on it cool it down.

 There's our custom piece of lead here let's knock it out on the ground.

 Alright guys what we did now is we just drilled a couple holes into this lead

 block basically this is what's going to hold the zip ties and affix it to the

 Okay so the new lead weight is connected to the airplane and secure let me show

 you how I did it I took the two holes that we drilled and I put zip ties to

 them and zip tied it right to the side of the motor mount here I also took a

 zip tie and went around the hole outside too just as a precaution as an extra

 the cowling on the top without any problems and it puts all the weight in

So I'm really happy with the way this turned out today and I hope you

 If you haven't ever heard of them before, I would definitely check them out.

 They have the most beautiful pigments as well as this other brand that I've been using,

 So if you want to see how to create this eye and this little nude lippy, just keep on watching.

 And then I'm just placing underneath the brow bone this yellow diamond color by Painted Earth.

 And here I'm picking up, this is the eye shimmer in Berry Bronze, also by Painted Earth.

 And I'm placing that right in the inner corner and then right at the tail of your eye.

 Just kind of make this sort of like half moon shape and then fade it out very gently.

 Now here I'm taking this brown color from this little Wet n Wild quad.

 And I'm doing that same step, running it underneath the lash line.

 And here I'm just going to almost meet up in between that little crescent moon shadow

 And then just kind of blend everything back and forth with that.

 Here I'm picking up the color Famous and this is by Peaches Makeup.

 This is Milani lip liner in Spice, one of my favorite nude lip liners.

 I don't thank you guys enough for all the beautiful, lovely comments you guys leave

 When I'm planning a road trip, I usually think of two things first.

 We've come up with some snack ideas to pack ahead of time to keep you and your family satisfied

 Just make sure that they have at least 3 grams of fiber and 5 grams of protein.

 Homemade trail mix with nuts, dried fruit, and a touch of chocolate if you want a treat.

 Make your life a little easier and prepare the fruit ahead of time

 Look for crackers made with whole wheat flour or you can make your own.

 It will keep you hydrated and help you resist tempting sugary beverages while on the road.

 One way to keep your road trip fun and stress free is to bring along snack sized cups and a sharpie.

 You can write each person's name on the cups to encourage your kids to reuse them.

 A centrally located trash bag is another way to prevent stress.

 One way to ensure your family is eating wholesome ingredients is to make your own snacks.

 These blueberry crumble bars have hidden spinach in them for a boost of protein and fiber.

 Combine your dry ingredients, pure vanilla extract, and mix well.

 Be sure to press it firmly into the pan using a fork or your hand.

 Sprinkle the remaining oat mixture into the pan and lightly press down.

 Make sure you check out our previous videos in our Summer Road Trip series.

 Okay, next we're going to show you how to perform a foot facial or a foot scrub.

 But what we're going to do is have our client just lying on the table.

 In a minute I'll show you a cheaper way that you can do this without that expense.

 So when you put water in here, it's going to stay warm with the heater on.

 Some foot baths don't have heaters and the water becomes real cold for your client so

 they don't want to stick their feet in there for more than 10 minutes after the water cools.

 So what you want to do is fill up the bath with nice warm water, have your client dip

 Especially in the summer months we always like to have our feet in sandals and run around

 So tea tree is a real good oil to use that cleans up the nails.

 So you add a couple drops, just about two drops into the water.

 You don't want to apply it right on the feet so it hits the tissue directly.

 As we turn the bubbles on it will soothe the whole room and she'll be able to smell that.

 So you can have her keep her feet in there for at least 10 minutes or until she's feeling

 I also have put an eye pillow on our volunteer for today just to help her feel more relaxed

 You want to also make sure that her back is comfortable since her feet, her knees are

 You want to make sure her lower back feels comfortable as well.

 Now let me just show you the other example while she's enjoying her foot spa.

 What we can also do is take and use a regular dish container for your dishes.

 You can fill this with some nice warm water and you can have your client either lying

 on the table or you can actually have your client sitting in a chair.

 You can take a handful of marbles and place them in the foot bath.

 What we're going to do with these is the client is going to be able to run their feet and

 What they're going to do is they're going to have their toes in here and they're going

 to be able to move their toes over those marbles which will put pressure on the bottoms of

 One of the most important things that I think all bartenders, either professional or home,

 We're doing a set of episodes where we're showing people how they might be able to improve

 their skills at bartending or understand better the basics, techniques, recipes, and

 In this episode, I'm going to talk about the foundational recipes.

 Now, things like the Manhattan, the Daiquiri, the Old Fashioned, the Sazerac, the Margarita,

 even things like the Mai Tai and the Bloody Mary can be thought of as being these classic

 By understanding the classic recipes, knowing how to make great classic recipes, and understanding

 why the different parts of those recipes work properly will allow you to understand the

 mechanics of building a cocktail that will allow you to create your own recipes.

 I've met bartenders, professional and amateur, that try making their own recipes and they

 They're making basically all of the mistakes that bartenders were making hundreds of years

 Stand on the shoulders of the bartenders that have come before you, understanding their

 recipes and then you can be capable of starting to make your own recipes.

 Let's take a look at a recipe that I created based upon a foundational recipe.

 Some people actually make it with slightly more gin in order to add that robustness in

 If you're using a softer gin, you're going to need to use more gin in it.

 Part of that is adjusting the recipes to use the ingredients you have on hand that you're

 I enjoyed finding those weird products in the liquor store that hadn't been around for

 Campari was fairly common, but its kind of cousin product, Chinar, was very uncommon.

 If you find Campari too strong, Chinar is going to be a little bit softer for you.

 I also was enjoying Acavit, which Acavit is a gin sort of product.

 Rather than being juniper forward, it's usually caraway forward.

 At the time when I was first learning cocktails, Angostura bitters were about the only bitters

 Another company came out with peach bitters, which hadn't been around for an awful long

 As a matter of fact, I like making Negronis with Acavit instead of gin.

 I think the caraway works better with Campari sometimes than the juniper does.

 If you think about artichokes when you're trying it neat, you can kind of taste that

 In place of the sweet vermouth that a Negroni is going to have, I'm going to use a sherry.

 This is kind of a drier, woodier sort of flavor to it that I think works really well here.

 Pay attention when you're using a dasher to see how much comes out and get comfortable

 If you don't see quite enough, make sure you just get a little bit more in there.

 At the Pego Club in New York, they were making my drink and they decided to use their house

 We basically now have a drink that is based upon the Negroni, but it's using all different

 You kind of understand it's got the same foundation quality that the Negroni is going to have.

 It's just going to be slightly different because it's using slightly different products.

 Even from the standpoint of stirring this drink rather than shaking, that also is being

 By understanding why the Manhattan is stirred rather than shaken, you're going to understand

 A drink I was able to create by understanding the foundational recipes.

 It's my secret to making great cocktails and it can be yours too.

 Hi, this is Robin Moses and I'm here with Bipolar Girl and we are going to do an azoteur

 I'm pushing down and going across and then pushing down and going across.

 Then on the other side with just brush strokes I'm going to go in like that.

 But I'm keeping my brush horizontal and it's more about technique.

 And I'm going around like that and making like a really cool print.

 I saw this print in a W magazine on somebody's purse or something and I drew it on the plane.

 There was a dude watching while I was drawing on the plane too.

 Actually I don't know if I even want to make this announcement because it's way way premature

 See I have it on my finger right now and I'm and I'm not like I can't believe how good

 it stays on but I've only done acrylic so long so I'm learning.

 So so we're trying it on Bipolar Girl because Bipolar Girl takes picking to a new level

 and it's just it's a it's a it's just like this thing that I just have to know you know.

 Okay so that is basically what I'm doing and it's not really an animal print.

 Okay and here is the end result and I think they're just darling.

 They look a little bit more like animal print on the on the pink ones huh?

 So keep your eye out and if you try them show me at my fan page.

 If you watch all the time hello and I love you guys and I will see you back with more.

 Hey everyone, so today I'm going to be showing you how to make one of these adorable little

 Sanex cats out of polymer clay and there's even a little tail on the back.

 So the materials you'll need are here and first I'm going to take the middle size black ball of

 clay and roll it into a cylinder and then for the head it's just a slight oval shape.

 And attach that to the body and if you're using Sculpey 3 I recommend using some TLS

 to attach the two and then I'm going to be making the ears just by making little triangles

 by patting down each side of the circle until there are three sides.

 and make sure you do attach them securely because you don't want them to fall off.

 Then we are going to be making the little paws so first roll out some

 And you're going to be using this technique for the feet too so it looks like your cat

 and they do kind of look like they're sticking out a lot right now but we'll fix that in a minute

 by flattening down the top parts of the legs and then take your finger and pat it down again.

 So those are the legs or the four legs and now we're going to be doing the back legs

 and do the exact same thing just make sure the legs are a bit thicker and I guess stubbier and shorter.

 And do make sure the seam between the two colors is like rolled out a lot or else the

 And then roll out some black clay and a small snake and that's going to be the tail and the

 set that aside and then roll out a piece of red clay and a thin snake and we're going to be making the collar now.

 So cut off a little portion and then wrap it around your cat's neck.

 And of course you're going to have to cut off the extra unless you cut it

 exactly to the correct length you need which is pretty difficult.

 nose with a small black portion of clay and if you're going to make the eyes out of clay you can

 do that now and place them on but I found that painting them makes a better result.

 And then you're going to need to grab an eye pin and you're going to dip that in some TLS or liquid

 Fimo and just go ahead and smear that along the armhole of your cat and then you're going to

 and place that into the head of the cat and make sure your eye pin's long enough to go through the

 body too and then you're going to want to bake this for about 20 minutes for about at about

 275 degrees and then take some acrylic paint and a dotting tool and paint on the eyes

 and then take some black paint and the same dotting tool and make the middle of the eyes

 sculpey gloss glaze and there is your little cat so thanks for watching everyone please rate

 comment and subscribe and request more tutorials down below I'd be happy to do them

 What's up everybody this is Morten Farrisrand from MortensLessons.com and today we are going

 Before we start I just want to say that there is nothing wrong with the box.

 The way that I am going to teach you today to play it more diagonally is going to do

 You probably will start to phrase a lot of stuff better by doing it this way.

 One more thing that I want to say about the pentatonic scale is that it's a great frame

 If you think about it, the E minor pentatonic scale is really an E minor 7 arpeggio with

 If you take away this one, the A, you get an E minor 7 arpeggio.

 If you take it the other way, you can add two notes to the pentatonic scale and you

 The pentatonic scale is kind of the missing link, or not the missing but the link between

 So if you know that really well, and the way that I am going to teach you now is going

 to make it much more available to extend it either to the arpeggios or to the scales or

 First of all, if you think about the pentatonic scale, it has five notes.

 It covers two octaves and beyond and you can't really visually see that this is five different

 And then it starts again with the octave, but it looks completely different.

 So the way that I want to teach you this now is to play it like this.

 So when I continue, this pattern is going to repeat and look exactly the same on the

 If you look at a piano, if you look at the black keys, there are five black keys.

 And what happens more than that it's easy in that way is that since you have three notes

 on one string and then two, you're going to start to phrase differently.

 You have this opportunity to slide between the second and the third if you just do a

 There are some nuances there that are really important to kind of make your playing come

 And I'll just play a little bit with this and I'll show you how it sounds.

 One more thing, you know the chromatic stuff that I played right there.

 And this is another topic again, but if you want to kind of make the E minor a little

 See it's so much easier to kind of have control over the pentatonic stuff.

 You've probably been taught that you have different positions that you need to learn.

 Which is well and good, but this that I have taught you today is more about seamlessly

 And if you look at your favorite players, most of them are playing like that.

 But the thing is to seamlessly kind of just flow across the neck.

 So I paid some attention to it and I'll do several videos, definitely in the course section

 Maybe you could start on a G here, on the major, the relative major.

 You probably will see stuff happening to your playing by doing it this way.

 but we do get to make a White Christmas so let me share with you

 Now you know something's going to taste fantastic when you just look at the

 I've got about a pound, 500 grams of white melting chocolate here

 got a cup of desiccated or dried coconut, I've got a cup and a half of

 Rice Krispies or Rice Ball Balls, got about a hundred grams, three and a half ounces of

 Glace cherries and I want those green ones in there as well as the red ones

 I've got one teaspoon of mixed spice and I've got half a teaspoon extra there

Now what we have to do is put this bowl of chocolate over a simmering pot

 this over the stove you could do it in the microwave though if you prefer

 Now my white chocolate has melted there beautifully and I've put it onto a

 then I've got that three and a half ounces or a hundred grams of Glace cherries

 I've got a baking tin here it's 20 centimeters square that's about eight

 and I've just put some baking paper in there we want to pour this in there now

 level this out and we want to take this time just to compact it down

 fairly flat and then we're just going to set this aside in the cool area probably

 and cut these up into blocks now they really don't want to be too big they're

 now if you kept a little bit of the white chocolate back you can just drizzle it

 and there they are there's my Australian White Christmas I'd love to share these

 so a Merry Christmas to you all I'm going to try one of these now

 the spices a little bit of macadamia nut in there that's fantastic please

 share the love give this one the thumbs up have a great time over the Christmas

 Christmas been a lot of fun I'll leave some other links to some videos there

 Okay you guys, so my wig from Ozo Wigs came in this lovely reusable box in this bag.

 It also comes with a comb, a wig cap, a thank you card, and some free gifts.

 The wig came parted on the left side in this perfect bob pattern that you see here.

 It has a glue-less lace cap which comes with three combs, adjustable straps, as well as

 Now I recommend you wash the wig before wearing it even though it does require a little more

 I think they did rinse out all of the excess color which is good because after you wash

 You'll see that after I rinse the conditioner out the water runs clear.

 I'm changing the parts so I used some water and blow dried the hair into place.

 Here you see I'm testing the back of the wig to see what looks best on me.

 I tried bumping the hair a little more but I didn't like it so I straightened it back

 You can definitely layer the hair more which is probably what I'll do after I get tired

 So this is optional but you can apply concealer or powder to the part to make it appear natural.

 I'm actually satisfied with how the part comes because it looks okay in person with no hair

 Here on I'm just playing around with the wig so you guys can see a few things you can do

 So overall I'm pleased with this wig because it can be worn in so many ways like I showed

 Also it has a 150% density so you have a lot of hair to work with.

 Just be careful with heat because super high temperatures can fade color more quickly.

 So yeah I will put all of Ozowigs information in the description.

 We're going to braid the front section so we can hold the back one.

 wrapping underneath and around the back of strand three and hold it in front of the face.

 We're going to add a very little thin piece of hair and we will have four strands.

We take strand three over two, now strand one over three and again

 back of strand one, hold strand one in front of the face and put together strands four

 cross it over strand two, strand one over strand three and wrapping underneath and around

 one in front of the face and put together strands four and two.

 When you finish, put together all the strands and hold them all with an elastic band.

 and use hairspray to control the baby hairs and we're finished.

Give us a like and don't forget you can find us on Facebook, Instagram,

 subscribe to our channel and please leave your comments down below.

 Hello there, this is T-Mac, Wild 4 The Outdoors, and if you couldn't tell today, we're going

 I wanted to do this video last year, but I just didn't get the cucumbers that I wanted,

 And I've got a simple, simple, simple pickle recipe here that you're going to love.

 I've been handing it out to people this year, and they've really enjoyed it, so now I'm

 First of all, what you're going to need is a garden growing cucumbers.

 And first thing you do, you know, you get your jars, sterilize them.

 This works for cucumbers, this works for pickles, this works for peppers.

 And then, after you've got everything cut up, your jars sterilized, you just want to

 Your brine is going to be this liquid right here that everything is floating around in.

 And for every 2 cups of liquid, 1 cup vinegar, 1 cup water, you add 1 teaspoon of canning

 So if you put 4 cups of vinegar, and I don't care what kind of vinegar you use, I use mix

 You make as much as you want, or as little as you want, as you need it.

 And of course your peppers, I cut them just like any other pepper.

 Now after you stuff your jars, you add your seasonings right to the top of the vegetables.

 And these, I've used a garlic clove, some celery seeds, some mustard seeds, dill seed,

 You don't want to put the seeds and the dill weed and all that in the bottom.

 Because then when you stuff your jars, it pins it to the bottom and it doesn't circulate

 You could add red pepper flakes, you could add peppercorn, whatever you want.

 So anyway, this is what it comes, I process my pints for 5 minutes, quarts for 10 minutes.

 And that's another thing, when you put these on your counter to cool, you want to spread

 You don't want them too close because then they won't cool as fast.

 And something like this, these pickled spears here, I went ahead and put some, I had some

 So I've got, you know, you've got all that stuff kind of floating around in there looking

 So you can either process them and put them in your cabinet, or you can put them right

 I've got 3 cans in my icebox, 4 cans inside my icebox right now.

 Just throw them in there and the longer they sit in there the better they get.

 Now I know the 50-50 ratio as far as water and vinegar is kind of strong for some people.

 But I like mine, and everybody else seems to like it too, the real vinegar like pickle.

 Anyway, hey, if you like this video, be sure you like us on Facebook, share us with your

 friends, sub us here on YouTube, and we'll keep bringing this stuff to you.

 And I'll tell you what, ain't nothing better than making your own food and putting some

 So this winter I'm going to be eating fresh pickles right out of the, almost like they're

 We are going to be needing 1 1⁄2 cup all-purpose flour, 1⁄2 teaspoon baking powder, and that's

 my baking powder, 1⁄2 cup water, you may need more water later on, 1⁄4 cup sugar,

 1 ripe banana, cardamom powder, 1⁄2 teaspoon, and some raisins.

 Okay, we are ready to mix your flour, sugar, raisins, and your powder, cardamom, and your

 We have flour in here, baking powder, sugar, banana, powder cardamom, and raisins.

 Now we are ready to fry our gulagulas, so we need 2 cups of vegetable oil.

 We drop gulagulas in hot oil in round shape, shaped like a ball, small ball.

 We are going to wait until it turns golden brown before we take it out.

 Okay, my gulagula is coming out really good, nice and round and golden brown.

 I'm going to show you how to take out the glove box if you want to run the cable into

 You can manage to run the cable through it without having to take it out, but I'll show

 you guys so you don't have to basically go through that headache.

 Basically what you're going to really need is an 8mm socket and a panel popper tool.

 There's a little hole actually made just for removal down here.

 Just get your, this is actually a bone tool, just take it out real nice and easy.

 You can use a screwdriver, but I recommend not so you don't have to scratch anything

 All this does, you know, slide this back in and you'll be fine with that.

 Basically you can use, what I'm using right now is a drill with a screwdriver on the end,

 I recommend if you are going to use a drill though, I always recommend this with any interior

 The clutch, if you don't have the clutch, it's going to actually, what it'll do is it

 has the tendency to actually possibly strip the screw in the hole.

 Put the clutch in the softest setting so that you don't run the risk of doing that.

 You're going to have three 8mm bolts on the top here behind the trim piece, and then two

 more underneath that in the actual glove box compartment itself.

 I recommend leaving this last one in the middle just to hold up the whole glove box so as

 you're taking out the bottom one because we don't need this whole thing to basically come

 There's actually two more 8mm bolts behind here in this top deck compartment.

 They're pretty much in plain view so I don't think you're going to really miss them.

 If anything, have a buddy help you out or just hold it with your knee.

 The clips are a little tough to get to with your fingers so if anything just use your

 panel popper tool or screw driver and just release the clips like so.

 Now we're going to go to where you're going to punch the hole and where you're going to

 You're going to see a couple of them actually inside the glove box.

 This actually, usually stock would be filled up with a small piece and cut on the side.

 You'll see these two little pieces on the back that basically you can cut or just punch

 You have that one right here and also there's actually another one down here.

 I actually recommend if anything, easiest spot is up here because at least you can leave

 the iPod on this little deck and have it not sliding around or anything in there when you're driving.

 Obviously you can only put it in since the interface cable to the iPod itself is very thick.

 Basically, from here all you have to do is basically reinstall it.

 Make sure they're nice and tight so you don't have any rattles.

 I just came here to show you guys how easy it is to run this cable.

 You can run it through the cable here, but I actually would recommend

 Run it behind there just in case you don't have any possible issues with the cable pinching in there

 First thing we have is Easy Mac, milk, some cooked ham, eggs, cheese, butter, and a little

 The first step to start off this process is to use a saucer, boil the water, and basically

 If you're under 14 or what not, I recommend you get adult supervision to help you go along

 If something goes down, I don't want people to be blaming me, oh Chosen did this, Chosen

 Usually when something happens, people always try to blame things on me.

 After 5 minutes being boiled in the macaroni in the saucer, you gotta make sure the macaroni

 It's the Asian one, we get this at the supermarket for like probably 2 bucks or something.

 And after you put the little butter here, we put the macaroni in the frying pan.

 Usually when I cook a lot of stuff like eggs, steak or something, I always put a little

 This right here is a 6 pack mac and cheese that I bought earlier from the store.

 The reason I put the milk is to make the sauce and the cheese itself a little bit more creamier

 So it just basically enhances the whole smell, the taste, the look and everything about the mac and cheese.

 The reason I use eggs is it adds a lot of texture to it and taste within the mac and cheese.

 Alright, so after you put your eggs in, you stir it like you would scramble eggs,

 mix them with the macaroni, the cheese sauce and milk for like 3 to 5 minutes on medium high heat.

 I wish YouTube can use other sensors but you can only see it visually.

 Once you're done with that, the next step we need to do is to add the ham.

 Alright, now once you're done cutting the ham up, it's time to add it up with the mac and the saucepan.

 The process to making mac and cheese is always to mix and stir, mix and stir.

 You can use asparagus, you know, just a little bit here and there.

 I like my mac and cheese to have a little bit peppery taste to it, so I'm gonna add a little bit more pepper than salt.

 You don't want to have your mac and cheese too salty, because it's gonna involve, it's gonna mess up the mix.

 Kind of like when you mix a song, you don't want to put too much reverb, you know.

 You put too much reverb, it's gonna start sounding like a... I'm not gonna say it.

 So once we're done spreading out the mac and cheese with the ham, mixed with our salt, pepper, and eggs, it's time to put it in the oven.

 So once the mac and cheese is in the oven, on boil, for like five minutes.

 The next five minutes, the final step, is to add the cheese, the extra cheese.

 Like I said, be careful when you take this out again, because this can be really extremely hot.

 The last piece of thing I would like to plug in is my album, Chosen Now or Never.

You can get it at my YouTube channel, which is youtube.com slash chosensmusic.

Thanks for everybody that's giving me props, subscribing, commenting on the videos and tours.

 Hey guys, welcome back to my channel and today I'm going to show you how to make

 for 2-3 times with cold water and I highly recommend you to use basmati rice to make

Next add 2 and 1 half cup of cold water in the pot and then add 1 cup

 Next place the pot into the rice cooker, cover it and press the switch

It will take around 30 minutes or more to fully cook the rice so

 please make sure to stir the rice in between so the butter and peas are evenly coated.

 And finally your delicious butter and peas steamed rice is ready to enjoy.

 But he did a fakie backflip on a Pulaski Parkledge and that's where I learned it.

 Usually I put my foot a little bit under the bolts, maybe like two inches under the bolts.

 Usually on the tip of the tail because that's where your tail is actually gonna hit.

 It's usually pretty safe to stay almost a full board length away.

 So even if you're coming at an angle you're probably gonna stay a good board length away.

 And when I shifty it in it feels like I'm getting closer to the rail.

 So I shifty it in just a little bit and then since my tail's up I'm kind of shiftying it with my back leg.

 But make sure to use both your legs when you whip it back in because if you try to just direct something with one foot it usually ends up bad.

 If you direct it with both feet it's easier on your body and it'll put it in correctly.

 So you'll pop, shifty, shifty back in, lean back just a little bit.

 And then kind of use your peripheral vision to see where the end's gonna come.

 And then once you start getting near the end you can start turning out.

 Landing on your board will always be a better option than bailing.

 So at least you have some chance of landing it and your trucks will take a lot of the impact rather than your ankles taking it on the ground and your knees taking it.

 And you'll try to land with your feet on the bolts or wherever they go with your head in between them.

I mean, you're not going to use this in the house and stuff because

And I've lost a few back lights as well which I'm going to unbox a new one just

 And basically this is a little rubbery plasticy bit and it folds round, goes onto the handlebars

 to be the most sturdiest mount for it but you can purchase an additional mount for 25

 quid which I'm not really happy with because to be honest, the light itself is worth 120

 be over £100 for a light and they supply a cheap little bike mount which is not really

 as you can see, hold on I'll get better contrast to get this out of the way.

 and also it's got an indicator of how much battery power is in it and stuff.

It's not fully charged yet but I'll just go ahead and stick the batteries

I've got a window at the side open and I've got a light up above

 the modes as well to a lower mode and then I can... And then, I'll try and get the battery

So guys, thanks for watching this video and stay tuned to the channel.

 Most people that come to eat in this restaurant, when we serve fried okra, say,

 And we say, because it makes such a difference when the okra's fresh.

 So what you're looking for here when you go to cut, this is an ideal bite size.

 So you want a sharp knife, you want to kind of line up your tips,

 because although you can eat this, and if we were pickling these okra,

 I would eat these, the tops, when you fry them, they get kind of tough.

 And fried okra is all about texture, so you don't want to include something

 So again, this is what we do, is you kind of line up the tips here,

 We use for breading our okra, we bread our catfish, we bread our grit cakes in it.

 One cup of cornmeal, and then cornflour, which is essentially the same thing,

 So cornmeal and cornflour, one cup of each, and then we put two tablespoons,

 almost level, of Creole seasoning, which is salt, pepper, paprika, cayenne,

 We use it for a rounder flavor of the breader, but it's not salty.

 So if you're breading catfish in this, and as you'll see with the okra,

 we'll dredge it in this, and then we'll dust it with a little bit of salt

 when it comes out of the fryer for that hotter salt flavor on your tongue.

 And the cool little trick we figured out is that if you take a half a pound of okra

 and you put it in these little full-tops plastic bags, it's really easy to fry.

 So we take a one-ounce ladle, and we put our favorite buttermilk in there.

 So one of the reasons you don't want extra buttermilk is because it's going to make glue

 So you just want enough to coat, and then what I'll do here is I've got a strainer,

 a sifter, whatever we call it these days, that's full of my cornmeal breader,

 And I'll dip it again, you know, get it all covered, see how everything's covered,

 We'll garnish with a little bit of voodoo sauce, and that's our fried okra.

 Hello there, I'm RobertDrawn1221 and I'm going to show you how to lube yourself a Rubik's

 It just makes it a lot easier to put it all back together after you pop it off.

 Okay, now the first thing we need to do is to get the Rubik's cube, turn it 45 degrees.

 Sometimes it will go flying in the air as long as you get it backwards.

 Alright, now, after you have this done, kind of put it to the side if you want, like I will.

 Now what you need, a spoon is the best if you're going to put it in the ziplock.

 So what you want to do is, you take this, scoop it out, put it into a ziplock.

 Okay, close up the bag, or just make a little crack in the top so that air can get through.

 Now, squirt it on one side, turn it, squirt it, turn it, until you get back to the original side.

 And then take your tubes and put them back on in the correct order.

 Now, this is, if you don't have a solved Rubik's Cube, um, that you're doing this with,

 I would, before you do this, I would definitely, um, advise you to write down where the colors are.

 Because if you, uh, have a solved Rubik's Cube, it's pretty obvious if you have it right or wrong.

 Okay, so, if you're, when you're putting back the middle piece in there, make sure it's at a 45 degree slant.

 Um, it's easiest to put the top in, click, or you'll feel where the top hits the edge.

 Um, and, oh, remember you have the yellow side that we did first?

 Rubik's Cube, or how you, sorry, how you lubricate a Rubik's Cube.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make that yummy strawberry filling that was featured

 To make this you will need fresh chopped strawberries, lemon juice, water, cornstarch, salt, vanilla

 On a low to medium flame, add strawberries, water, and lemon juice to saucepan.

 Yes guys, if you like this video, please share and give it a thumbs up to let me know.

 And do remember, the full recipe can be found on my website, loveforhaitianfood.com.

 Let this cool for a bit, then add it to a mason jar and refrigerate.

 Full recipe can be found at our website, loveforhaitianfood.com.

 Subscribe to our channel and click here to watch our previous video.

 really easy to make but I'm not using the traditional method which I was used

To this ground chicken I'm going to add panko breadcrumbs, tamarind paste.

 oregano and to this I'm going to add a wedge of light cream cheese.

I'm going to add a teaspoon of chili pepper and I think I'm gonna

 meat chicken balls and then I'm going to freeze the rest of them so I can just

 kosher salt, quarter teaspoon of turmeric powder, half a teaspoon of chili pepper,

Last step, I'm going to gently place the meatballs and I fried them for

 five minutes in the same spicy mixture, spices and I'm going to add a green

 Hey guys, it's Jordan and today I'm going to do another video on my back to school series

 and you guys have requested a lot of duct tape things, so I'm going to show you how

 to make this cute little pencil pouch with duct tape and it has just a cool little tumbler

 picture on the back and it's velcro like this and I also have made this one and then I've

 complicated but these ones are so so easy and pretty much everyone has duct tape in

 you'll need some duct tape and I think it works best with two colors, some clear packaging

 tape, some sharp scissors, some stick on velcro squares, and optional but very helpful

 would be an exacto knife and also optional but helpful would be a cutting board and this

 one is actually my mom's from the kitchen but once I started using it with duct tape

 the inside of your pouch and laying it straight down onto your cutting board or whatever you're

 using and make sure it's a little over one foot and just continue doing this and I ended

 really comes in handy if you're using it and my cutting board had ridges of where 12 inches

 was and so it kind of helped me out to cut a straight line but if you need to you can

 as straight as you can and making sure to leave about an inch on either side and then

 that's sticking out over the edge and fold it over the other duct tape and try to make

 it as straight as you can without any wrinkles and do the same thing to the other side.

 flip it over and trim off all the sticky duct tape sticking over the edge.

 a strip of my white duct tape and you can either rip or cut it in half.

 going to take one of them and stick it on the shorter side on that duct tape rectangle

 we made and flip it over and fold it over on the back so it looks like that and do the

 you want your pouch to be folded and make sure there's a little bit extra off to the

 side and you can just kind of play with this to however you like it.

 why I have duct tape on my fingers, because I cut myself with scissors, yeah right, smart.

 Then I'm just taking another strip of my white duct tape and cutting that in half.

 either cut or rip it and I'm just going to be using that to tape the sides together on

 the duct tape pouch and just stick them like this and do the same thing to the other side

 this and now it's time to bring in the velcro and I'm just using two pieces but you can

 use however many you want and I'm just sticking them down where I want them and then I'm taking

 the other piece of velcro and sticking it right on top and this will just help with

 the placement of the velcro and then when you put the flap on top the velcro sticks

 to it and it's in the perfect position and when you take it off it is perfect.

 your basic pencil pouch is done and it looks so cool but now it's time to make it look

 so I'm going to show you two separate ways that you can make hearts using duct tape and

 the first way uses an exacto knife and basically just carve it out using the exacto knife which

 is a little bit tricky and when you take it off it just looks like this but if you don't

 have an exacto knife you can do the second way which is basically just taking a piece

 of duct tape and folding it in half, sticky side out and then just cut out a half heart

 shape and basically it's pretty easy except that sometimes the duct tape sticks to the

 as it is which is super cute or you can even add a little bit more which is what I'm going

 to show you how to do but it may not fit everyone's style so you definitely don't have to do this

 actually don't have a tumblr but I'm on my friend's tumblr and her name is simply jane

 with two a's and she posts some pretty cool pictures so that's where I got all the pictures

 I'm just sizing it to make it fit the pouch and then I'm just printing it.

 out the picture and making sure to leave a little border on the edge.

 your clear packaging tape and stick it straight down onto the picture and try to do it as

 I'm just taking my duct tape and measuring it so that it fits and I'm ripping it into

 four separate pieces and then I'm just going to be sticking them down onto the edges of

 the picture to make a little border and it doesn't have to look great right now because

 next we're just going to trim it and just trim off all the extra duct tape pieces that

 are sticking out over the edge and once that's done you can just stick it down right on the

 back of your pencil pouch where you want it to be and once it's all stuck your pencil

And I wanted to do this DIY today because it has so many different variations

 that you can do to make it personalized for yourself and so here I'm just going to be

 with duct tape using an X-Acto knife and I had a picture of some streets on the back

 and it just is bright pink and black and I thought that was cute and here's another one

 that I've done and I just, I actually printed out Jordan and used the same method that we

 used on the back to label it right there and this one I actually did make a little bit

 bigger and I used three velcros instead of just two and on the back I just found a cool

 tutorial and these are the finished products and I hope you guys like them.

 for holding pencils and you can make them as big or as small as you want.

 on the sides and hole punch them so they can go into your binder and so it can be like

 a little pencil pouch in your binder which would be so cute and they just like work so

So I hope you guys like this back to school tutorial and give this a thumbs up

 if you like, if you want more back to school tutorials and yeah.

 We are going onto the right hand side over there in the corner and the water is just

 So this is the main area of Pebbly Beach where I'm gathering some pebbles and hopefully a

 So these are shells that I've collected from the weekend and a lot of them are broken like

 Got a lot of fragments and people tend to ignore them or walk past them and not pick

 them up because they're already broken up but I like collecting all of them because

 And all I've done is washed them and also soaked them in bleach and water for a couple

 So this one is the best one that I've got which looks like everything is still intact.

 And this one is, so there's some degradation going on in there but still it still looks

 And others, the bottom's already gone and also the surface of the top, see all those

 So I still gather them, even this one so you can see just bits and pieces.

 So that's the back of it and this one is the back of it that's been polished.

 And I actually left a lot of the orange one in there because it's starting to get really

 And then as they weather, of course they turn to that lighter colour.

 So something like this, when you grind it off or I grinded it off and it came out looking

 And then the neck edge, once it's grinded off fully, just the difference, just shows

 And also this one's got these like little bumps on top which look like little pearls.

 And different shells, even this one, they all got a naka on them or they have that pearlescent

 So those ones as well, they might look green on the outside but inside when you turn it

 I've got other bits and pieces like this one and this one I think are fragments as well

 And this one doesn't have naka in them or doesn't have the pearling effect but I still

 So I can make unique pieces of jewellery and incorporate some of the gemstones that we

 That piece there came from also this one, that one and that one came from an abalone.

 And these are broken pieces and I still gather them or keep them because I'm only after that

 So you've got the holes already done and that's where I glued all those pearls there.

 So even this one was just a broken piece like this as well, similar to this but this one

 If I just grind this a little bit or scrub it with a brush then I can actually put a

 Maybe put one of these pearls that are actually cut in half so you can see that's actually

 Therefore I've got two which I can use for this big piece here.

 This is actually a freshwater clam and glue that onto that just randomly.

 So and this is what I do to the pearls that I gather and also this one.

 And I've drilled a hole on one side here to feed the wire through and also a hole at the

 And I actually drilled a hole through that and then also the bail.

 And they come up beautiful as well so I still have to make something out of that or probably

 It's really an inexpensive way of having materials to use for creating beautiful unique

I don't typically cook on Friday, but Paladin Prepper didn't end up his week so well.

 Yesterday morning on the way to work, he struck a deer and kind of, well, really banged up the front end of his car.

 This afternoon he was in the adjuster's office to try to figure out what it was going to take to fix it, so I thought I'd fix him some comfort food when he came home today.

I'm starting off with a little half pint of my homemade pizza sauce in the bottom of this dish.

 I sprinkled a little red pepper flake in it and a little garlic powder, and that's all I added.

 I did, on the outside of this dish, I did grease it just a little bit because I was a little concerned about having a big mess to clean up and that the eggs might stick.

 I just used a little bit of the bacon drippings to grease the outside.

See how when I put the spoon in there, I can kind of move the sauce and scoot the egg at the same time, so I made room for two more.

When Chef John did it, he put two in little individual serving dishes, but I don't want to have to clean up that many dishes, so I put them all in there.

I think the point of this is to just kind of soften the acidity of the tomatoes.

A lot of times when you go to an Italian restaurant, they'll put a little cream in the red sauce and kind of make a rosé sauce.

In fact, all of this can be a food storage meal because I've got my own home-canned.

Here I'm just sprinkling a little bit of salt on, and I'm also going to put on just a little bit of fresh cracked pepper on the top.

When Chef John did it, I thought it'd be easy to replicate, and I like the idea of not having to stand over the stove and cook all those eggs individually.

I posted another video today where I showed you how I store my Parmesan cheese in vacuum-sealed food-saver bags.

Probably fresh Parmesan cheese would be better on it, but I rotate my food storage, so that's what we use.

Now what I'm going to do is I'm just going to drizzle ever so slightly a little bit of olive oil on there.

You could put a little bit of fresh Italian herbs in there if you had them.

I've got some basil out in the yard, but I just didn't feel like going out to get it.

 Just a tiny touch of olive oil, and that's going to go into the oven and bake at 350 degrees.

I'm also cooking some bacon, and when that comes out of the pan, I've got some cold leftover baked potatoes that I'm going to slice with some onions and make some potatoes and onions in there.

I've also toasted some English muffins, and I'll show you what it looks like.

 Here it is, fresh out of the oven, and the eggs stayed put, and the sauce bubbled up around the edges, and it just came out to look to me just like Chef John's did.

So I'm going to serve Paladin Prepper the first one here, and hope he likes it and that it is comfort food to him.

I think the cream kind of fooled me into thinking maybe the whites weren't done, and I probably could have taken it out a little bit earlier, but I think it was pretty good.

 Yep, it came out really good, and even little Prepper A ate two of them.

 I will be showing you how I make my catfish along with my delicious sauce.

 Alright, babe, so I'm gonna tell you what to pour in and I'll just tell you when to stop.

 One fourth teaspoon of cayenne pepper if you don't like spicy food skip this step

 Cajun seasoning you can find this at any grocery store and to add half a teaspoon of salt and this is all to taste

 And go ahead and crush some pepper and this is to taste as well.

 Alright now we're going to whisk all of these ingredients together

 Personal cooking class with Denise couldn't ask for a better better teacher than Janice makeup

 All right, so we set the mixture aside and Lee is going to cut the catfish

 Family my wife is laughing at me cutting the catfish and I'm really trying to cut the catfish and she took the knife for me

 So go ahead and grab the fish babe and just yeah, not one by one is not necessary

 you want to go ahead and leave this marinating for at least one hour covered with saran wrap and

 We're taking equal parts of flour and cornmeal and this doesn't have to be a perfect measurement.

 I like to use both a combination of flour and cornmeal because it creates a nice texture

 I'm gonna season it and again, this is to taste but I'll be using some Cajun seasoning and

 Now just go ahead and mix this up and this is gonna be what you're gonna be putting your fish in once it's done marinating

 Next we're gonna go ahead and use 1 4th teaspoon of salt and also a half a teaspoon of Cajun seasoning

 I like using sea salt then you just want to combine all of this together with a little whisk

 Now this is how the sauce should look maybe a little bit pink or if you like

 I will be using my emerald fryer, but if you don't have one, that's okay

 The oil to like about an inch and make sure that you're talking that your

 I like mine to slow cook and take its time while our oil is heating up

 Just grab a bigger chunk here go ahead and just put it right into

 You want to go ahead and put them in here for about eight minutes or until they start floating if they begin floating

 The catfish just finished frying up for about eight to nine minutes just slowly

So I'm just gonna let them drain the excess oil and then we're gonna go ahead and serve them

 Alright everybody, so this concludes our catfish dinner recipe with the sauce included this sauce is to die for

 Look at how delicious the inside of this fish looks just very very juicy not dry at all.

 I'm always you cook this time when my wife is cooking and I'm assisting

 Please remember to subscribe and click like and I also have my other channels Janice makeup and Janice in Espanol.

 Welcome back to another video of Josh does things with his hands.

 But basically this guy at this bakery, it's a really nice bakery,

 he figured out that if you take a croissant and you take a donut

 They're the same thing, but they're like the munchkins from Dunkin' Donuts.

 So all you need to do is buy some store-bought or make-your-own puff pastry.

 because what we're actually gonna be doing is we're gonna be rolling it in layers,

 and creating those layers with the butter is gonna make it all fluffy.

 And this is kind of a cool trick, because you want the butter ultimately to be really cold

 I didn't want to use flour because flour can be a pain in my bunghole.

 And if you don't have a rolling pin, just use whatever you have.

 I haven't used it to drink, but it's actually been a pretty good roller.

 Once I feel good about the amount of times I've played at this thing.

 And all I do at this point is I put this in the freezer or fridge.

 Fridge for 15-20 minutes, because you want the butter to be really cold.

 If you want to speed it up, just throw it in the freezer for like 10 minutes.

 but glazing is a really amazing thing that's even easier than frosting.

 All you do is take some powdered sugar and any kind of liquid you want.

 So what you do is you just add that to some powdered sugar and just keep whisking.

 I put it in the fridge just for a couple hours, and it thickened up.

 And this stuff on top of my little crunch gummy guys is going to be amazing.

 All right, folks, we are back with this glorious, glorious pastry.

 All we have to do is take something and cut out little donut holes.

 I'm going to do one big one just to make a little bit more of a cronut type deal.

 With frying, it's like cut it up however you want, throw it in, enjoy.

 because you want these things to cook all the way through and not brown too much.

 If it starts to fry up nice and good, you know your oil is ready to go.

 When you first see these guys and you're getting ready to fry them,

 See, you never know what's going to happen when you're cooking.

 but then it turned to the point where I really just didn't care to eat out that much.

 But a lot of times I hear about things, and I'm like, man, I want to try that.

 Maybe you can't afford to get it, or maybe it's only in one area.

 But you can get inspiration, you pull inspiration, and you try new things.

 I mean, a fried donut croissant, of course you're not going to screw it up,

 You can donate and get all kinds of cool things, like a little mini Brothers Green cookbook.

 And since so many of you have been asking about how to make your own gluten-free, all-purpose

 Before you had to cut gluten out of your life, you probably never dreamed of making your

 You just took that giant bag of white flour and put it into our kitchen and that was it.

 Well, it's either, depends on how you look at it, either our lives are more complicated

 But it's much more interesting to me to make my own flour mix and put what I want in there

 Now there are some great gluten-free flour mixes on the market and certainly if you're

 But if you're like me and you want to play with the flavors and the protein content of

 The other great thing is even though this is empty right now, eventually you can fill

 Four different flours, six different flours, we'll talk about that too.

 And when you have done this and shaken it all up, you just have flour.

 You have flour in your kitchen again and you don't have to think about it.

 So Danny and I have been fiddling with different flour mixes for years.

 But for the last couple of years, we've been using a flour mix for our all-purpose flour,

 If you really want to look at the protein versus starch content of wheat, it's similar

 We could fiddle even more and do 38% and make it simple on ourselves because it's pretty

 So 40% whole grains, such as sorghum or millet, 60% starches like potato starch, arrowroot,

 The great thing about making your own flour mix is that you can get something like this,

 a big plastic container, and fill it up all the way to the top.

 And psychologically, once you have mixed all these up and put them in there and shaken

 You don't think anymore that there are four flours in here or six or eight.

 The other great thing about making your own flour mix is that you can choose the flours

 Some of you might be allergic to rice or not like the taste of tapioca flour.

 And if you know what are whole grain flours and what are starches, then you can just make

 But for now, I'm going to show you the flours we're going to use today.

 Today we're going to make a flour mix with millet, sorghum, potato starch, and sweet

 It's slightly, the texture is a little bit like whole wheat pastry flour, which is part

 of the reason it feels familiar in the mouthfeel of the final baked good.

 You can use a spoon, but it's your own kitchen, so for gosh sakes, you can use your own hands.

 It has a really neutral taste, maybe slightly a little bit like corn, but it also makes

 a great crumb when you have breads, muffins, quick breads, and you want that lovely airy

 Since this is all based on 1000 grams of flour total, you'll do 200 grams of sorghum and

 So again, think about 1000 grams of total flour mix, and we've added 400 grams of whole

 In this case, we're going to start with potato starch, 300 grams of it.

 It is the lovely stuff, the white stuff that comes out of the potatoes when you cook them.

 A little, it doesn't really taste like potatoes, which also makes it good because you don't

 At the end, if you're like me, you'll be covered in flour as will the table.

 And we're actually going to do videos on each of these flours so you can hear a little bit

 But sweet rice flour is great in a flour mix because the rice itself is so starchy that

 When you combine it with other flours and a bake good, it almost starts to bind the

 When I'm doing any kind of all-purpose flour mix, this is the one flour I make sure that

 If you can see right now, you'll see that there are very different colors within.

 You want to make sure that your lid's on tight because I've done that before.

 Just stir it, whisk it, shake it, however it works for you, and make all one color.

 Now, what I would do if I were filling this is I would multiply it times five.

 So it would be 1,000 grams of whole grain flour, of millet flour, excuse me, or 1,000

 Just think 1,000 grams, you need 200 grams of each whole grain flour, or 400 grams of

 All you have to do is think 40% whole grain, 60% starches, put it in the container, mix

 Okay, today I'm going to show you a tutorial about how to play Paradise Lost by Hollywood

 Because I've had so many comments about how they couldn't find another video, so I'll

 Take your right hand, put your thumb on D, right here, and put your pinky on A. And just

 Alright, what you're going to do, you're going to play A first, and then you're going to

 So it goes, then you're going to play A sharp, then D after that.

 So, first, A, D, D, A sharp, D, D. Then, you go to G, D, D. Then back to A, D, D. And then

 we have F, D, D, E, D, D. So, this is what it should sound like.

 Alright, then, with your left hand, you're going to take one thumb, and this is kind

 Then you're going to slide your fingers down to C, and then change it up to A sharps, and

 And there is one reason they are so popular, because you get to carry this thing around filled with lots of healthy ingredients.

 It means that you can carry around a healthy salad on the go, ready to eat when you need it.

 So, I'm gonna start off by adding some chickpeas into a roasting tin.

 And then just get your hands in there and give it all a good shake.

 This goes into the oven at 200 degrees Celsius for about 25 minutes or just until those chickpeas have crisped up.

 Get in there with your halloumi slices and just work your way around.

 I'm gonna make my salad dressing in a jar and a great way of making a very simple salad dressing is just this.

 Three tablespoons to our one tablespoon of white wine vinegar of olive oil going in.

 So, I'm just gonna crush this with the back of a knife and then we're gonna grate it in.

And by emulsifying I mean bringing all those ingredients into one solid dressing which looks gorgeous.

 Now, I've just torn the leaves off the stalks and that really is a good way to do it.

 Now, I've just torn the leaves off the stalks and that really is the best way to use it.

 And not only will it kind of soften down your leaf but you're infusing it with that great salad dressing as well.

We've got an avocado, we've got some carrot and we've got some mixed seeds.

 So, first up for the avocado, take a sharp knife, slice around the stone in the center and then just twist it apart like this.

 Now, if you've never seen one of these, it's not just any old peeler.

They're gonna give you these wonderful strands, these thin little strands of carrot.

These fantastic little strips and it's these which are gonna add great crunch in this salad.

 We've got avocado and we've got carrot and the missing ingredient is cooking over here.

Stick it on the boil until it's nice and tender and you should be left with something like this.

 So, we're gonna start off by building our jar salad with a bit of quinoa in the base.

 And the last thing I need to add is that fantastic halloumi cheese.

 I'm not gonna dive in and taste it because I'm gonna save it for later when I go off for my lunch.

 Now, if you want this recipe, it's in the link below over on my website.

 Make sure to give me a big like if you wanna see more healthy recipes.

And of course, subscribe and check out our wonderful healthy playlist.

 Let's see if I got my big front mount intercooler in here and everything else and goodies.

 As I'll show you here in a sec, all these pipes are coated in black.

 The only thing not coated in black, as you will see, I got the blue couplers to match

 My car is blue, in case you haven't seen or watched part of some of my videos.

 Couldn't find them selling it with the coated pipes, but there was...

 I got this off of a kid that bought an STI that had the same kit.

 I only run Mobile One 5W30, but this is not what you're thinking it is.

 I'm pretty sure, I think it's 12 or 13 inches tall by 3.5 inches thick.

 Boy Chris here in the kitchen doing a little curry something look what we have going on here

 Curry chicken with eggplant and potatoes in a coconut sauce pretty much bacon and aloo with chicken boy

 Maybe if I just move this over a little bit more you might be able to see a little bit better

 But remember we're gonna be adding other ingredients in there where salt will be necessary

 I know we're making a curry and some of you to be going like what kind of madness Chris doing ketchup

 That little bit of acid in that tomato ketchup there is gonna bring out a lot of that brilliant flavors that we want

 If you have shadow benny if you have any sort of herbs you like using fresh

 Give that a good mix and these are chicken thighs with the bones still in there for this dish

 I find the chicken thighs were great chicken legs white meat so so

 Just reduce your heat to low because we just want to sweat that down.

We just want to release those flavors from that garlic and the onion

 And this is a lovely Madras blend out of the Caribbean I love using my Caribbean curry powder

 This may seem a little bit different than the way your mommy or granny or auntie or whoever else taught you how to make curry

But don't tell them I say that now because when all they're collecting all their hard-cuff, I'm not around

 Just gonna really cook this down because you want to get that raw curry taste out

 Because we're gonna be adding that seasoned chicken to the pot now

 We want to sear it and get all that color that's on the bottom there all those flavors your kitchen should be smelling wicked already

 Marinating in the fridge to bring it out about 15 minutes before just to bring it up to room temperature

 You want to sort of deglaze the pan with this chicken just to pick up all those lovely flavors on the bottom of the pan

 After you sear it on both sides you want to put that lid on there and turn the heat down

 To go with the chicken that we've got currying down there, I've got here some potato that I peeled and I cubed up

 Maybe about 3 quarter of an inch to about an inch piece pieces and over here

 Didn't even peel it or anything because I want the texture from that skin and everything else

 You will need to drain it just before you add it so it most of that moisture comes out of it

 So those are the other two ingredients we're gonna be using eggplant, potato

 Now you will notice it's gonna be a lot of natural juices that chicken would have sprung

 to burn off that liquid to really infuse that chicken with that lovely curry sauce and

 Right away at this point is where I'm gonna add my peppers and I've got here four bird's eye or bird peppers

 With all that liquid burnt off you're gonna start seeing like oil

 That we started off with between the pieces of chicken here and this is one we're gonna go in with that chopped up potato

 It may be it may seem a lot for the pot at first, but the eggplant will

 Lose its texture and its shape them as soon as it starts cooking.

 I gave it a good stir just to make sure everything is incorporated in there.

 In the same bowl that I had the chicken marinating in there's a lot of good stuff inside there.

 All you're gonna do now stir that mix it around and bring it up to a boil

 So I'm gonna do is sort of pat down because you want that potato and the eggplant and the chicken

 I'm gonna turn my heat down to low and let that go for about 20 minutes

 So what we need to do now and it's gonna be a lot of liquid there

 The potato should be nice and tender at this point the eggplant

 Notice what I said when I said everything's gonna just simmer down

 But look at that all we're gonna do now because there's too much liquid in here

 We're gonna turn up the heat to like a medium-high and burn off most of that liquid

 The kitchen is smelling lovely and we've got a nice thick gravy going on in the bottom there as well

 Mmm, boy, you're really going overboard today with this recipe.

 Check out CaribbeanPot.com for this and over 300 other Caribbean style recipes

 Hey, it's Coach K again, and so far we've mastered the technique of accents and how the four basic strokes come into play.

 We've isolated our hands, we've mastered the technique, and began alternating our strokes.

 So we're going to start with a pattern that's used by percussionists all around the world, whether they're a snare drummer in a drum corps

 or a percussionist in a philharmonic, and it's called the 4-2-1 pattern.

 And basically what it is is you have a set of four sixteenth notes.

 then you move it over to the second sixteenth note when you play it again,

 then you move it over to the third sixteenth note, and then the last sixteenth note.

 is because you play the pattern four times, and then you play the pattern two times, and then you play the pattern one time.

 you're gonna play it four times, and then you're going to move over to the second one.

And the 2's would be the same thing, except because it's half as long

 as the 4's, we're going to repeat it to create the four measures like the 4's did.

You play one count of everything and repeat it four times to equal the four measures.

 Now with this video, you should have received the 16th note with one accent grid exercise.

 Go ahead and get that out if you haven't already before you go on with the video.

 Now if you're watching this video and you don't have the exercise, it means that I let this video leak one day,

So this video lesson is actually a part of my at-home study course for percussionists

And if you want to access more videos and hundreds of exercises,

 everything you need to know is in the information below this video.

 So the way I would practice this 16th note accent pattern would be on my pad in a quiet place with no distractions,

 and either my metronome or the backtracks that you received with this program.

 I would also count the downbeats, because not only is this a good dexterity exercise,

 which means that you get your hands both working, but it's also a great timing exercise.

 So let's try playing this one all the way through together, counting and really focusing on getting those full extensions with the downbeats.

 So let's try playing this one all the way through together, counting and really focusing on getting those full extensions with the accents,

 and keeping those taps and upstrokes nice and low and nice and loose.

 You want to make sure that when you're practicing, you're practicing in a mirror.

 And like I've said before, playing in the bathroom is a great place because usually your counter is about hip height,

 which is perfect to put your pad on, because that's where your pad should be.

 but you're playing straight up and down like we've talked about in past videos.

 So I would strongly suggest playing in a mirror, whether it's in the bathroom or on your bed,

 and maybe you've got a mirror on the wall or your closet is a mirror.

 You definitely want to be practicing this where in a place where you can see it.

 And like I said before, it's really important to know where the downbeat is when we're playing this,

 because it's really about locking in that time just as much as it is working on the dexterity of getting both hands to be able to work.

 And I mean, it's not natural to be speaking and moving like this.

 You know, it probably won't be easy at first, but just take it slow and chunk it down if you need to.

 Just do one grouping at a time, and you're going to be in really good shape if you can discipline yourself to actually count those downbeats while you play it.

 Now, a fun variation of this exercise that will really get your brain moving is instead of moving the accent from one E and a,

 you can play it backwards and start on the a to the an to the e to the downbeat.

I mean, you've got four notes to work with, so you're not limited to just one accent.

 And I've written all of these down for you so that they can be in your worksheets and you can really go to town on this exercise.

 And in your worksheets, you'll also see an exercise that I use with my drum set students.

 You'll see that we keep the standard 2-4 pattern with the hi-hat and the snare, but we move the bass drum where the accents were in the exercise we just did,

 starting on the one, moving over to the E, moving over to the an and to the a.

 I couldn't exactly haul my entire drum set into this studio, so I recorded it on my iPhone, just so that you can kind of get a taste of it, what it's going to sound like.

 By following these simple patterns, you can create some amazing dexterity between your hands and your feet.

 And in two weeks, we're going to be working on diddles and drags, and we're going to use the same 4-2-1 pattern to create an awesome grid

 that's going to open up a whole new world for you to create hybrid rudiments.

 So you want to be practicing this 16th note accent pattern until your hands blister.

 Make sure you use good technique, and then I'm going to see you next week for our lesson on double strokes.

 We are back in the kitchen and today I have a special recipe for you guys.

 This one is called the Dynamic Before Bed Nighttime Protein Shake.

 And this one is a really awesome protein shake to have right before you go to bed.

 And before I show you guys how to exactly make it and what's in it, I just want to

 It doesn't have to necessarily be a shake, but some sort of food before you go to bed.

 Number one, you go to bed, you sleep for six to eight hours, your body is fasted in the

 morning and we really emphasize that it's good to get something in your body in the

 middle of the night to keep your body anabolic, aka muscle building, so you don't have to

 wake up and just be like, oh my god, I'm so hungry, this and that.

 So number two, I know you have a lot of people and a lot of different information on the

 internet saying, oh carbs are bad at night, you can't eat before bed, you'll wake up fat,

 Your metabolism is constantly burning in the middle of the night when you're sleeping,

 So if you have the right kind of sources of carbs, protein and fats before bed, nothing's

 So my next point, actually you know what, let's just get into making the protein shake.

 Then instead of water, I'm going to use some almond milk and try that out, see how that

 This is a great source of antioxidants and we know what antioxidants do, they fight free

 So the difference between whey and casein is pretty much casein is a slower digesting

 protein and that's why you're going to want to have it before bed, okay?

 So it digests really slow in your system while you're asleep as opposed to whey protein which

 So we're going to use that and we're going to see how that turns out.

 And I'm just measuring these out accordingly to my macronutrients.

 So I mean I'm not saying to follow exactly what I'm doing with the measuring cups, but

 Alright, I don't know, you guys tell me, does that look good or what?

 So I'll be having that tonight probably around like midnight, one o'clock and just go from

 You guys might want to try like some strawberries, regular milk instead.

 You know just kind of mix it up and you know try different recipes, you know whatever works

 So main point is you know don't be afraid to eat at night, okay?

 Welcome to the Poor Man's Gourmet Kitchen, where we share gourmet recipes at a low budget wonder.

 Like any pasta recipe, we're going to start out with some boiling water, add some seasoning,

 If this takes the longest, we'll just let it sit and do its thing.

 Now here in another hot pan, we'll add our olive oil and some red onion shallots.

 Now we're going to add our main ingredient, the Bloody Mary mix.

 Now that will reduce a little bit, but we're going to add our tomatoes.

 Now if you don't already know how to cook shrimp, or these jumbos, just spread them out evenly.

 Now we'll add our butter, let that melt down in there, and add some garlic.

If you'd like a little bit of salt, that's alright too, but that's really all you need.

 You can add olive oil to this too right now if you'd like some more.

 Once it's fully incorporated, we're going to go back to the stove real quick.

 And just stir, toss, until it gets a little bit of that golden brown.

 And as much as I can, get all the good spread right over the top.

 And we'll just go all the way around the outside of the linguine.

 Bloody Mary linguine, right here in the Poor Man's Gourmet Kitchen.

 I'm just going to pour it over these little pieces of sugary bread.

 And I suppose that's what's so comforting about food and in life.

 In this video, I'm going to show you my new favourite salad topping.

 I'm using some fresh tofu as it really does taste the best but you can use medium to firm

 and any sweet light syrup that you like including agave, some watered down brown rice syrup

 Now use a clean, lint free towel to press out any excess water.

 Toss the slices into the marinade and make sure all the sides get some.

 Heat a half tablespoon of light tasting oil in a pan on high heat.

 by sprinkling a little bit of spice mix into the pan and see if it sizzles.

 the heat down to medium and let it cook for 30 seconds or more.

As you can see, I left mine a little bit too long but that's ok with me.

 cook on the other side for about a minute or until they're as brown as you'd like.

 Today I'm having a big salad for lunch and this is the perfect topping.

And don't forget to subscribe for more easy vegan recipes every Friday and

 Today's recipe is a vegetarian dish and it is popular in both cultures, in Afghan and Indian culture.

 So the best way to cook this first of all is that you need to deep fry this.

 Otherwise your dish is going to get really slimy if you don't deep fry it.

 So I have the garam masala here, cumin seeds, coriander powder, salt, turmeric powder and crushed chili flakes.

 And I have some oil here to fry the okra, bamiya or bindi, whatever you want to call it.

 You can fry this just so you get rid of all the sliminess and the skin of this will be thinner than it is right now.

 So now you can go ahead off your stove and take this off and put it aside.

 At this time I have my heat on medium and I have a little bit of oil here.

 And you are going to go ahead and start with 1 teaspoon of cumin seeds here.

 You don't want to burn them too much or change their color to a darker brown.

 So you are going to go ahead and add the next teaspoon of ginger garlic paste.

 The garlic and ginger garlic paste has been cooking for about 20 seconds.

 At this time you are going to go ahead and add the sliced tomatoes here.

 Some people like it a bit oily because the skin is really thick.

 Like I said it needs more oil but if you don't need to that's fine.

 If you want you can cover this but you have to check it every 2 minutes.

 That's how you can tell it's ready so we can go ahead and serve this.

It's a modern classic first created using Bombay in the 1980s by

 acidity I'm going to need a little sugar syrup, about three or four teaspoons.

 is right the taste will be sherbet like but it will still be a little sour.

 ice now and finish with a drizzle of creme de mure, a liqueur made from blackberries.

 If you watch I love the way that this will marble gently through the cocktail.

 brings a berry sweetness to the overall drink, it brings some colour, flavour and balance.

 And the cassia and coriander botanicals found in Bombay Sapphire will also add a wonderful

 Alright, my name is Ron Ford from Unstoppables and I want to show you

 elements that remind me of Detroit when it comes to dance especially.

 Detroit has been through a lot, is going through a lot, and will continue to go

 And I decided to go outside because it's a gorgeous day but there's lots of noise around

Okay, then we have a left arm, left foot, right arm, right foot.

From here it's right hand on the chest, left hand up high to God Almighty.

 Instead of going around in a circle like this, she goes all the way around on four count.

 I thought I'd show you how to play Like I Mean It on the guitar.

 I got some requests on Facebook and our email so I thought why not.

 So if you're rocking from the lowest to the highest string it's D G C F A D.

 Hi, I'm Jamie Geller from joyofkosher.com and we are making classic potato latkes.

 Okay, so you want to put a peeled potato in a bowl of ice water.

 Okay, and the reason why we're putting them in a bowl of cold water is because like the

 moment that you start to peel the potatoes, they start to oxidize and will turn brown.

 So the bowl of cold ice water will slow down that process and give you a chance to peel

 Okay, so I always peel onto a paper towel because easy clean up.

 The potatoes brown really quickly so we want to make sure that we have the eggs to go right

 Actually now, even before I shred my potatoes, I'm going to heat my oil over the stove top

 so again I can move really quickly once I have my latkes ready.

 Okay, so I'm putting down this big mama pan because I'm making a lot of latkes.

 Putting it on low and adding just about an inch, canola oil to go about an inch high.

 In our house, my hubby likes the shoestring potatoes so I use this side of the box grater.

 My grandfather always made it on this side of the box grater, like a really, almost like

 So again, if you're using a food processor or a box grater, just use whatever blade you

 About two teaspoons of kosher salt and a little bit of coarse ground black pepper.

 Okay, so now I'm going to mix this up with my hand and these are your potato latkes.

 We're going to take about a third of a cup, a third measuring cup, and use that to measure

 Okay, so if your medium potatoes were a little bit on the small side, you don't want things

 to be a little too watery, so I just add a little bit of matzo meal and that will bring

 Now you want to grab a third of a cup, measuring cup, and that's going to be about the size

 So the oil is now shimmering and you can feel it for about six inches off of the oil.

 So scoop about a quarter to a third cup of the latke mixture and use the back to flatten

 Leaving room around the edges makes them nice and crispy and then they'll be buttery soft

 The crispy edges means just leave some room, have a little patience, don't overcrowd the

 So make sure you have a cookie sheet lined with paper towels ready so you can start to

 It's been about three to four minutes on each side and we're going to drain them on our

 Rainy and there was a little bit of an ice storm last night, nothing too serious or whatever,

 but it's just kind of nasty to be outside so I've got plenty to do inside.

 I found hamburger meat on sale about a week ago and I bought quite a bit extra, put it

 And rather than just let it sit in the freezer and get freezer burnt, I've decided I'm going

 And I've seen some videos, Bear Prepper especially, where she canned up her hamburger and I'm

 So the first step, and I hope I do this right, I really don't hope I screw this up Bear.

 But anyway, the first step that I think she did is to brown the hamburger meat.

 So we're going to brown them up and then once we have it browned, oh look, new coffee maker,

 Once I brown it, then I'm going to let the grease drain off for the tallow and, or the

 So once I get to where I'm going to load up the jars, then I'll get back with you then.

 Ok guys, I got my hamburger browned up and now I'm just putting it with the funnel here,

 And I can everything in quart jars because we've got six people that eat, so it's just

 easier for me to put everything into a quart jar than it is into a bunch of little pint

 I figured this stuff here that I'm putting in jars is going to be used for spaghetti

 and manwiches and made rights and if we're going to make lasagna we're going to put meat

 But I don't know, like I say this is my first time doing this, so I don't know if I need

 But from what I understand, it's no different once you get it in your jar, it's no different

 than canning any other meat, which is doing it at 10 pounds of pressure for 90 minutes

 And I don't know, like I say, I'm not sure about how much to fill the jars up or I hope

 I'm putting it into the jars and I'm going to, you know, I got my lids soaking.

 All y'all that was out there saying that I need to soak my lids, I've got them soaking

 And I'll do that from now on just because I think you guys are right, it's better safe

 than sorry, especially when it comes to canning something like hamburger, which you know can

 go very wrong if you don't do it correctly, if you don't get it cooked all the way.

 So, okay, we're going to put the lids on and then I'm going to pop it into my canner,

 my pressure canner at 10 pounds of pressure for 90 minutes and we'll catch back up with

 As you can see, they're still bubbling and it looks like you can really stuff those jars

 So I think next time we can hamburger, what I have learned this time is that you can really

 pack that cooked hamburger meat, really pack it down into the jar.

 I wasn't sure, like I said it's the first time I did it, so I can hear them popping,

 I can hear them sealing and in a few months we'll get one of these out and make some spaghetti

 or some sloppy joe or some lasagna or pizza or anything that we would normally use ground

 And I will let you know how it all keeps but it looks to me like it's going to work out

 So now I know that the next time I catch cheap hamburger on sale I can cook it and can it

 So I'm going to try to get rid of some of that extra space that I got in there.

 So there you go guys, my first attempt at canning meat, hopefully it all works out,

 So thanks for watching, any suggestions or questions or comments feel free.

 Asalaamu Alaikum and welcome to Titli's Busy Kitchen with me Titli Nihaan.

 With all this chicken I've been eating in the past few days, I feel like I'm trapped in

 But tonight, I'm gonna make a bit of freedom from this phantasmagorical nightmare by making Chicken Kiev.

 The first thing I need for Chicken Kiev is some garlic and herb butter.

 I've got 4 tablespoons or about 50 g of soft butter in this bowl.

 I'm gonna pop these into the freezer for about half an hour to firm up.

 The first thing I'm gonna do is, one at a time, beat these thin.

I'm just trying to beat this to about a quarter of an inch thick.

 Once your sticks of butter have become really quite hard, you can wrap them up in the chicken.

 where the piece of butter is completely wrapped inside the chicken.

 Once they're nicely coated, pop them in the fridge for half an hour.

 Once the chicken's chilled, you can either deep-fry these in oil for 15 minutes or...

 and pop them into an oven at 190 degrees Celsius for about 30 minutes.

 About half an hour later, the kitchen is filled with an amazing smell.

 By baking the chicken Kiev, I'd hoped that I would create a portal in my kitchen

 Join me next time in Titli's Busy Kitchen with me Titli Nihaan.

 A viewer asked me about how to remove screws where the head is all buggered up and you

 Before I do though, let me just talk about how to avoid the problem very briefly.

 There's two things I see that homeowners do where you have a greater chance of buggering

 This particular one is a number two and that's the most common.

 If you're using one that's too small, you have a better chance of stripping out the

 Make sure you're filling the whole head with the screwdriver and that will give you a better

 The other issue I see is that homeowners tend to use improper technique.

 When you're unscrewing a screw, it may sound counterintuitive, but you actually need to

 That's something I see is a common mistake where people just try to let the screwdriver

 You need to push down enough so that you're not going to strip this out, especially with

 In other words, the whole point of this original design was that once the screw reached a certain

 When you're removing a screw, you're still going to be pushing down quite firmly into

 Now, let me get into a couple tricks about how to remove a head once or a screw once

 Before this demonstration, I'm actually going to screw up these heads.

 So now there's no way this screwdriver is going to do anything.

 So that's usually what you see is you've cammed out, you've buggered up the head, now what

 Well, number one, often times there's paint in the head of the screw and that's a problem.

 And the threads of the screw tend to grip pretty tenaciously to the wood once it's been

 So you can help break that bond and make it easier to get the screw out, as well as crack

 off any paint, by putting the screwdriver in the slot and giving the screwdriver head

 That will help break the bond between the wood and the metal threads of the screw and

 Well, if the screw is proud of the wood, in this case it is, in this case it is, in this

 case it isn't, one option I see often is trying to use vice grips or sometimes just pliers.

 You can grip the pliers on there tight and then take the screw out that way.

 That's okay, but depending on the type of screw that you're using, if it's steel, like

 this one's steel, it's pretty hard metal and you might get away with it.

 If it's brass or stainless steel, something like that, when you're using the vice grips

 they tend to slip off because the metal is so soft that you actually just tear the metal

 So vice grips are okay to use in some circumstances if the screw is already proud and if it's

 a hard metal that you can grip pretty easily, then yes, vice grips are okay and you can

 But if you have a softer metal like this, that's not going to work or probably won't

 The next trick, number three I guess we're on, is to cut a slot in the screw itself.

 So what we can do is kind of turn it into a homemade slotted screw.

 Now this is only going to work if the screw is proud of the surface.

 And once I have enough of the slot out I can use a slotted screwdriver.

 Alright so you cut your own slot and then you can get the screw out.

 Now that's great if you have screws that are proud of the surface.

 This one though is still buried in the wood and obviously I can't use a hacksaw because

 When the screw is flush with the surface the best trick really is to use a Dremel tool.

 And this is a power tool that has a grinding wheel on it really.

 And that allows me to get close to the surface without screwing up the wood.

 And actually in my demonstration here the grinding wheel is a little big for this purpose.

 So that way, now again I'm using my trick of pressing down while I'm unscrewing.

 And even if I get it proud of the surface that gives me more options.

 So those are a few tricks for getting screws out once you've buggered up the heads.

 You know I would usually start with making sure you have the right screwdriver head size.

 I'd use the hammer trick to wrap it first, get rid of all the paint.

 Sometimes I'll use a pick like this to scratch out the paint out of the head.

 Use every trick you can before you get to grinding your own slot.

 And just keep in mind that the type of screw can make a difference.

 If it's brass or stainless steel or bronze, those are soft metals and you can cut a slot very easily.

 If it's steel you can still do it but it's a little bit harder.

 You're never going to get a slot cut in that because it's a very brittle metal.

 So those are some tricks to get a wood screw out once it's been buggered up on the head.

 windy conditions, this will make the solvent evaporate too quickly and can

 in the ratio of two volumes of base to one volume of curing agent, so measure

 out appropriate volumes by pouring them into a separate container.

 thoroughly together and then leave for 20 minutes to allow bubbles to disperse.

 Make sure you have some Interluxe brushing reducer 2333N in hand in case

 the mix needs to be thinned slightly and for cleaning up spills.

 Interluxe brushing thinner 2333N to the paint if the ambient temperature is

 you applied the undercoat or primer, but choose a smaller section so that the

 works particularly well when two painters work side by side, one with a

 by brush only, application involves three simple steps to get the best possible

Step one, brush apply in diagonal strokes from the left and right.

 the surface with light brush strokes vertically down from the top and upwards

 to overcoat, remove any imperfections like sags or dirt using 320 to 400 grit

Then lightly sand the entire surface with the 400 grit sandpaper.

 Remove all traces of dust with a solvent wipe down of Interluxe brushing reducer

Apply the second and final coat in exactly the same way as the first.

 The application is now complete and there are just a couple of things you

 finish, remove the masking tape with care so as not to pull off paint accidentally.

 Put back the deck hardware through hole fittings and any vinyl lettering that

 Alright, this is my first piano tutorial for Let It Be by The Beatles.

 So as you guys probably know if you've ever heard the song, it's pretty much the same

 So it goes C, E, G, and then you switch these two fingers, shift to the left, so B, D, G.

 Then you shift everything to the right, C, E, A. And then you shift this, just this finger,

 Also I apologize for my terrible piano quality, it's super old.

 So now I will show you the right hand, I mean, sorry, the left hand that goes with it.

 When I find myself in times of trouble, know that Mary comes to me, speaking words of wisdom,

 And then when you get to the chorus, let it be, you start up here at A.

 Hi, I'm Shannon from HouseImprovements.com and again I just want to show you a quick

 One is where there's an actual igniter built right into the gas valve itself and the other

 one is where you need to use an actual like a barbecue lighter to light it.

 And we've got a newer water heater and it's got this Pezzo, I think they call it a Pezzo

 or ignition switch or whatever they've got built right in here.

 So we're going to take off this cover and you're going to have a little viewing glass

 down here, usually on the newer styles, where you could, once you look back in there and

 If you've been having trouble with your water heater, it's blowing out or whatever, you

 might want to check that your thermocouple is working properly and I do have a video

 And if not and you want to relight the water heater, I would recommend that you leave,

 like turn off your valve here from the on, wherever the on position is, past the pilot

 So that's turning off the gas coming into the valve and let it sit for about five minutes

 Just make sure any excess gas that was inside the chamber is dissipated and isn't going

 So then when you're ready to light, you've got the valve in the off position, you're

 going to lower your heat rate down to low, basically as low as it'll go.

 Then what you want to do is we're going to turn this knob, you can see on this one there's

 an arrow at the top and you want to turn it over so it's pointing towards the pilot

 And then when it's in that position, it'll actually, the knob will push down.

 So once you push that down, we're going to push the igniter button and we should get

 So here I go with this, I'm in the pilot position, I'm ready to push it down and I'm ready to

 Okay, so once it's lit down there, you want to keep pushing this knob down for usually

 Once 30 seconds has gone by, then you'll just release this knob so it pops back up and then

 If you let go of that and it doesn't pop back up, then just turn everything to off, wait

 Okay, so we've got it to the on position and we know it's burning down below.

 Now you just want to turn your water heater to whatever heat setting that you wanted and

 Just recheck it in a couple minutes to make sure it stayed burning.

 Now we're going to show you the other, a little bit older style.

 Okay, so here we are at a little bit different style where we've got to actually use like

 This would be the same whether it's a natural gas or propane water heater.

 Put that over to the side and it's got this other door down here.

 So you can see back in there where it should light and everything.

 So the process is really the same as far as the switch up here is and waiting for a

 Hopefully you're going to be able to see what I'm kind of doing.

 So we'll do our best here to get this in pretty tight quarters.

 I'm going to actually light the lighter before I push the pilot down.

 So I went right over where the thermocouple and should be a small line, the pilot line

 And then once 30 seconds is up, I can release it, turn it to the on position, and then I

 can dial up my temperature, which we turned down, just like so.

 And actually, if I turn this up, you can see there, completely ignites and is ready to go.

 Now, preferably, we'd have all the doors closed and everything, but that was just to

 Okay, so I'm just going to turn that back down to the temperature we usually would have.

 And that's really what you need to know on the two different styles.

 The main thing is you're not going to be able to do it with a cigarette lighter.

 You're going to need something longer that you can reach right in there with, so you

 And I'm just going to get out of this corner, and we'll do a bit of a wrap up, and that'll

 Okay, so that should show you really how to light the two different styles of gas or propane

 Really, that's the basics on either style, so it shouldn't be anything too different

 Hopefully, it helped you out on figuring out what you had to do with yours.

 If you liked what you've seen, we'd love it if you'd subscribe to our channel.

 And on the channel, we've got tons of other videos, so go check them all out, including

 And also, we've got the website at house-improvements.com, and there you'll find articles on different

 subjects as well, and the forum as well, which is kind of our main thing over there.

This was designed by Tutorials by Leah on Instagram and she also has a YouTube

 make sure to check out her account, give her a follow for me and also I guess just make

I'm only going to use one hook today because I feel like I could do it a lot easier with

And I'm going to be using black for the white in this bracelet and gold

 I'm actually going to start with my white bands here and I'm just going to put a simple

Then grab another black band and pull through that cap band onto your

 the first three loops and pull it off of your hook so you only have one loop on and

And then now that you have your two loops and then your cap band

 and then this loop and then this loop is off here, you're going to want to pull this

 And now you're going to want to take two more of your black bands, taking one of them, pulling

 it through the first, skipping the second, and pulling it through the third loop.

 then we're going to take our other black band, put it on, and I'm going to pull it

 off of my hook and holding on to them tightly, getting a gold mint band, putting it on my

 hook, oops, capping it so that I have a cap band, and then I put back that first loop

 Leah sent me, she did this a different way, but I feel like this is the easiest way for

So if you have a different way that's easy for you, just go ahead and do

You know, I am doing it the way I feel is easiest and if you like this way too, then

So if you did not flip your bands around like I did, I just didn't

 flip my bands around, this band should be in front here, crossed over.

 black, pull it through the first one, skip the second one, pull it through the third

Then take your other black band, pull through all four, and then putting it

 show you how to put the gold mint on one more time and do the blacks one more time and then

 are on, and see this one popped back over, you don't want that.

 And so once you've finished this, I'm going to just do the black bands one more time and

So pulling it through the first one, skipping the second, I turn

 my hook and grab it, and then have it pulled through the third one.

 I missed my hook completely, and pull it through all four, and then back through the first

 you can either just attach a clip to here or take another black band, pull this through

 all four of these bands, put it on your hook, and then you'll attach your clip to here and

I'll have tutorials by Leah's Instagram and YouTube name in the description

 There are ways to encourage your horse to start looking for you.

 And there are methods that you can use to encourage your horse to start looking for

 Your horse volunteers to join you and participate in activities.

 I assure you it's a whole lot more fun when everybody volunteers rather than needs to

 It's quite common for people to come directly head on to their horses and put the halter

 But there's a way that you can do it where you're more inviting your horse to come with

 Both of them can seem a little confusing, a little pile of stuff if you're not familiar.

 You've got your rectangular shapes or maybe a trapezoid if you want to be mathematical

 And you've also got your circle and the horse's nose goes through the circle.

 Horses don't really like things hitting and touching their face.

 So you want to keep that open so that things aren't whacking them in the head while you're

 You put this down beneath your horse's jaw until they volunteer and drop their nose in.

 So here I'm standing a little distance away from Whimsy and I'm asking her to come up.

 She shakes her head and says no, she'd rather do what Extra's doing.

 I like to stand at a distance from my horse so they choose to come.

 Retreating is really critical with horses because it shows that when they're not interested

 I stand the same way the horse is facing, open the halter up, and then she nods down

 If you stand the same way your horse is facing, not only is it more comfortable for your horse

 because you're not pushing something up at their face, but you're also safer because

 if they raise their head, you're not going to get a busted nose out of the deal.

 You can always subscribe to my YouTube or you can go check out my website, www.heathernelsonlibertytraining.com.

 First thing I found with this Panasonic is that normal screwdrivers don't work.

 In fact you don't need a Torx bit, you need a tamper proof Torx bit.

 There are three or four of these Torx bit screws around the side of the machine.

 The problem is, and I'll get as close as I can, the tamper proof Torx bit is a normal

 Torx hole, a six sided hole, but there's a little metal plug that comes up through

 So when you try to put the screwdriver into it, the Torx bit driver hits the plug and

 So you need to buy, and I bought the day before, a set of Bosch Torx bit tamper proof bit heads,

 And the drive itself, the tip itself, you can't really see it, I'll try to hold it

 Yeah, you can see the shadow, there's a little black hole in the middle, so there's a hole

 in the middle of this thing, so the hole fits over the little stud that comes up through

 So basically, to do this repair, you'll need the Torx tamper proof Torx bit tip, you'll

 need the bit driver I guess, and you'll need a Phillips star shaped screwdriver.

 So what I'll do is just open up the screws, so there's one here, there's one here, one

 here, and then another one there, and I've already done that, so I've opened those up,

 and then there's a couple other screws that are really easy to see, so there's like, you

 know, one here, one here, there's one here, and then down here as well.

 So just, and those are the Phillips heads, so just take them all off, and then pull the

 Just a quick note on these Torx tamper proof bit heads, I found one at a local home improvement

 shop, just look on a company's website first and make sure they've got them, and I'd actually

 call ahead because these are quite, they're very low volume, so chances are the company

 Alright, so I've taken all the screws out, just pop the cover off, and it slides into

 Lay it aside, and then you can kind of see from the inside, that's where all the, the

 bottom there, that's where the parts are, so you don't need to go any further than here,

 the fuse is going to be visible, and I'll just flip this machine around so we can see

 This is the back of the microwave, actually it's the top, so in here, right there, that's

 the fuse, so that cylindrical thing, it's a 20 amp, I think it's called a CES6 fuse,

 20 amp, very important, don't buy 10 amp, 15 amp, you can buy them, they're typically

 automotive fuses, but you need a 20 amp because if you buy one with a lower rating, chances

 are that this microwave is going to blow the fuse over and over again, get a 20, it's

 To buy that fuse, you'll have to go, probably, there's the replacement that I bought, right

 here, that's what it looks like, I went to an appliance repair store, and they had them

 in stock, this was about 8 or 9 dollars, you can possibly find them at stereo stores, you'll

 find them at automotive stores, but chances are they're not going to be high enough amp

 rating, they'll probably be 15 amp at the max, whereas the appliance stores definitely

 will have the 20, so call around beforehand, google, look them up online, and you'll be

 So I'm just going to pop the fuse out, there's no, it's just in there with a couple of springs,

 just pops out like so, and it's dark, it's not because it's blowing, that's just the

 way that manufacturer paints their fuses, I bought this new one, I'll just pop that

 back in, it just, real easy, just pops in, that's it, that's the fix.

 Now what I'll do is just put the cover back on, and hopefully it's going to work.

 Okay let's see if this works, I've got it almost plugged in, I'm just going to give

 it a little extra push, and let's see, if this lights up then it works.

 And I was going to say before, one thing about the tamper proof screws, they put that on

 there because they just don't want people who don't know what they're doing fooling

 around, because it is an electrical device, so, you know, just be careful.

 Obviously unplug it first, and you know, just don't, I would not touch any of the wires

 I've heard mixed reviews about the Brewers Choice beer kits, so I decided it was time

 The Brewers Choice Dry Ingredient Kits could be seen as a step between beer kits and extract

 brewing, where hops and grains are included without the need for a boiler.

 boiling the hops for an hour in a boiler, they come sealed in infusion bags for steeping,

 or a pan, and get covered with a kettle full of boiling water and left to steep for 20

 is repeated twice more, so our hops have effectively been in more boiling water for an hour.

 Next, the bag of dried extract from the kit is added to the fermenter.

 a light malt extract, as I am using here, which will give a full malty flavour to the

 beer, or an extra light malt extract for a paler finish and less malty, or even brewing

 the sugar for an even lighter finish, leaving the hop as the more prominent flavour.

 we stir to dissolve the dry ingredients, and make up to the final volume of water,

 with a lager yeast, that ideally works between 12 and 15 degrees C, so I make sure that the

 liquid in the fermenter is within that range, before pitching in the hydrated yeast.

 the yeast is still hydrating, I stir the liquid quite forcibly to incorporate air into it,

 is nicely aerated, in goes the yeast, and the beer is left like any other brew, to ferment

Possibly some of the other Brewer's Choice beer kits may be different.

 As I've said before, I've heard mixed reviews, but as far as I'm concerned, that was a great

It's possible that some of the things people don't like about it is that,

 for the price of it, you still then have to add more sugar or malt extract to it.

 the flexibility of it, that you could add malt extract or sugar, depending on the end

But all that aside, I think the most important thing is the quality

 longer in the fridge, the chill haze would drop even further, and then it would be absolutely

 Today we're going to do a simple little exercise that will help break your own speed barrier

 that you may have in playing scales across guitar, single notes or whatever.

 It actually is great for any technique, but we're just going to concentrate on scales

 Just so we can get every finger involved and kind of make everything just kind of the same

 So what the thing with speed bursts is, it's a great tool if you kind of have a limit to

 So your speed maybe tops out at certain beats per minute and you can't get it over that.

 Well, the key to really getting the top of speed that your body can do is to be as relaxed

 They help you train your hand to play fast and play fast relaxed.

 So obviously speed isn't everything, but that is everything we're going to be talking

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to start and stop on each beat.

 So I'm going to basically play a note, four notes, and then I'm going to end on the next

 So what we do here is you pause on that note for one to two beats, trying to keep your

 So as you're doing that, you jump right back into playing a quick burst of notes again.

 And it's that relaxation of your hand in between picking the notes is what you want to memorize

 So when you're actually picking the notes, you want to maintain that level of relaxation.

 And as you get better at it, you'll be able to do longer bursts of notes.

 So we're starting here with basically four, and then that fifth note is just the first

 Alright so obviously you can take that all the way down and all the way up.

 Now as you get better at this, you might want to not only have less of a time that you're

 Alright you can see on that first note of the new beat that I stop on, I usually accent

 It really kind of just, you know, gets that note solidified in your picking hand.

 Now as you get better at that, you start to ramp up how many notes you play.

 Now, whatever your speed limit is, this is where you can really start pushing it.

 When you just kind of basically train your hand to just kind of push the limits of your

 So obviously the next step would be to add four more notes to the sequence.

 So you'd go across, picking across three full strings, and then that last note.

 Alright so as you get up to like, you can pick across three strings or more, you can

 So I'll just go up to like 125, and then go back to just one string.

 Alright so you're constantly going to want to push the speed up.

 So you go back, when you raise the speed up, you have to go back to a shorter speed burst.

 Alright so obviously you can take this to, you know, really high levels.

 I mean, depending on, there's people out there that can do this at 200 some beats a minute.

 Alright so, and you just keep going up, and you can find where your limits are at.

 So obviously you'll really feel your limit when you have to go all the way across the

 Alright so, you kind of find your limit, and then start pushing it every day.

 Short burst, then double that burst, then add another string, and you'll notice that

 your hand will start to slowly be relaxed, and everything will become more precise.

 Alright, be sure you concentrate on that relaxation, that is the most important part of all of

 A relaxed hand is a fast hand, and you'll also last longer, you won't tire out and everything.

 what I did in this cake and remember I'm adding food color to it but it's not a must, it's

 just a matter of if you want that kind of look of strawberries into it.

If you don't have this type of baking spray, you can use some shortening

 at room temperature and you can mix them at medium to high speed.

 and a half cups of sugar for this recipe but right now you're only gonna use two cups of

What I do is I put the sugar with the butter and I let my mixer run

 and while that happens I start sifting my flour and that way my butter gets really fluffy.

 use just a simple sifter and a spoon and that's all I do for this.

 go for fresh, make sure they are in season since they are the sweetest at that stage.

 fresh, I have found out that cooking the strawberries down will give the cake a more vibrant

 with this method too but for this video I'm gonna be using sliced strawberries from the frozen

Once defrosted, you want to take the sliced strawberries and some of the liquid and

 take the whole strawberries that are from the frozen section, smash them and add them to the

Make sure to add one and one quarter cups of strawberries to the cake.

You want to add small portions at a time and you want to make sure that your

 want a more red tone to the mix, add one teaspoon of red food coloring.

For this one I use pureed strawberries but you can use mashed strawberries too if you want

 strawberries or sliced strawberries in my cake is because I usually stack my cakes and I need

Put this mixture to the side and get a clean grease-free bowl and place your

Using the whisk attachment, mix your egg whites until you get stiff peaks but not

Add the half a cup of sugar you saved earlier and mix until you get nice stiff peaks.

The cake usually detaches from the pan once it's done so just look

Take the cakes out of the oven and let them cool for around 10 minutes.

 Then you want to flip them onto some plastic wrap and seal them well and place them in the

I prefer leaving it overnight in the fridge so the flavors settle down.

 This is a four row repeat worked on a multiple of five plus one.

 You will need to know how to knit, knit in the stitch below, purl, yarn over, slip slip

 The yarn that I'm using is Malambrigo worsted and I'm using size 8 needle one.

 You purl the first stitch and then you're going to knit into the stitch below.

 Look at the next stitch on your left needle and you want to look right here, right below

 You knit, and then purl one, yarn over, slip slip knit, and that's your repeat.

 Purl one, yarn over, slip slip knit, and you should have one stitch left after your

 For row three, you start by purling your first stitch and we're going to knit into the stitch

 So the repeat is purl one, knit into the stitch below, purl one, knit two together, and yarn over.

 You should have one stitch left after your last repeat, so you just knit.

 And I did want to mention that when I started this, I knit a row before I started the stitch

 pattern, that way I was able to do my knit into the stitch below on row one of the pattern.

 Hey guys, today I'm going to be showing you how to make homemade meat samosas.

 So what you'll be needing is 1 kilogram of lean minced meat, 1 cup of green onions chopped,

 1 cup of yellow onions chopped, 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, some salt to taste, 1 quarter

 cup of oil and we will need more oil for frying later, 1 cup of chopped coriander, 1 tablespoon

 of garam masala, 1 tablespoon of mixed ginger garlic paste, 1 tablespoon of crushed red

 chilies and you'll also be needing any samosa pastry which you can get at any grocery store.

 You'll also be needing some flour, I'm using chickpea flour and you'll be needing it to

 Once you see the meat starting to change color, we're going to add the salt, the garam masala,

 So once the water has all dried out, we're going to add the green coriander, the yellow

 And once it's cooled off, we're going to start filling up the pastry.

 So now my mom is going to be showing you how to wrap up the samosas.

 The paste should be nice and thick to hold the pastry together.

 Make sure to have a damp cloth over the samosas so that it doesn't dry out.

 Then we're going to fold it over to match the other sides equally.

 Then you're going to pick it up and hold it as if you're holding it as a cup.

 Now we're going to continue folding as we match the sides together.

 Now we're going to add the paste on the last edge as if you're gluing it together so that

 So first you're going to want to put your stove on medium and let it heat well.

 Then we're going to take the samosas and we're going to put them in halfway and then we're

 And we're going to let them fry until they turn golden brown on each side.

 Please leave a comment if you tried it out and if you liked it.

 Today I am going to give you some great tips for shooting outdoors.

 The GH4 camera comes with a kit lens which is a 12-35 lens equal to a 24-70 of a full

 This is a very optimal lens for doing landscape and everyday work.

 But when you are shooting outdoor, the light comes to the sun and that is not under your

 The reason why everybody wants to shoot early in the morning is because the sun is very

 But if you can shoot only from 6 to 8 in the morning, then there is no point in buying

 The sun is not going to be giving you mild amount of light every time.

 When it comes out of the clouds, it is going to just beat it through and the aperture will

 So there has to be an effective way to bring down the amount of light reaching the sensor.

 So the variable ND filter will cut light from one stop to eight stops.

 So you just need to screw it in front of the camera and you can cut light up to eight stops.

 Before we go into shooting, I would like to come back on the three very important aspects

 to control exposure in outdoor situation, which would be ISO, it will be aperture and

 As far as shutter speed is concerned, for optimal motion blur, we need to set it at

 When it is aperture, the lowest aperture is always preferred, which will be f 2.8 for

 And when it comes to ISO, you set it to 200, which is the lowest ISO possible.

 So how do you control the exposure when all these three things are static?

 Now I have my subject sitting in front of me in outdoor situation.

 I am not able to see anything because it is overexposed obviously.

 So I am going to now the aperture is 2.8 and the shutter speed is 50.

 I am going to increase the aperture to see how much aperture I have to optimally set

 f 11 seems to be a decent aperture to get a good exposure on the subject's face.

 But f 11 is going to have all the background behind him all in focus, which I do not want.

 I want to have a aperture of 2.8 and still get the optimal exposure.

 The aperture is still at 2.8 but I am able to cut light effectively to get a proper exposure.

 I just record this scene and you can see that you have an optimal depth of field of 2.8.

 Still you are able to cut the light using the variable ND filter.

 Okay guys, you saw how to use the variable ND filter in the field.

 This is available from a list of companies like Koya and Marumi and a lot of even Tiffen.

 The best you could buy is the best result for you because the filter or any glass in

 So this is a great tool that every cinematographer and photographer should possess.

 So that's really going to design the feet to be really fast and also get that knee up

 Now that's really kind of a number one kick, which is a front leg kick.

 So right here what we're going to do, same thing, we're going to adjust, bring the knee

 Now we're going to bring the leg around, hold it, kick and re-chamber.

 Switch feet up, bring the knee around, hold it, kick, re-chamber, and down.

 So right here what I'm going to do is I'm going to switch my feet up, come on my knee

 So that's going to help you get a little bit more balance and also set the guy up for

 Next what we're going to do is go ahead, I'm going to do it with a partner so you can kind

 of interrelate on how you can do the round kick and the drills with a partner.

 All right, so go ahead and disconnect your bands, hook them on one side, and you'll notice

 Now I'm going to start out with that number one round kick, which is really speed.

 What you want to do is you want your feet real light, same thing right here.

 Just mainly it's the number one, where it's just popping that leg, and it's a lot faster

 because now your muscles are already used to something pulling down, so when you're

 That knee is coming up, we're going to switch the knee up, boom.

 When you do that number two, you can actually fake the guy out.

 So from right here, I'm coming here, I can bring that knee low.

 For a low round kick, when I bring that knee low from here, he looks at it, he sees it,

 So it's the same thing from right here, I bring it up low, boom, and bring it up high.

 What those bands are going to do is help you get that knee up even faster, and you can

 So it's really going to develop those muscles and make your kicks a lot faster.

 Hi, I'm Chef Scott here at the Harris Teeter kitchen and today I'm going to show you a

 We're taking a tilapia boneless skinless fillet that we got from the Harris Teeter Fisherman's

 We're going to flour and dust to ensure some yummy succulent flavors staying inside of

 Throw a piece of butter into our pan that we've already got preheated.

 You'll just want to get a little bit of color on one side of the fish before we turn it.

 Okay, we're going to put just a little bit of granulated garlic.

 And if it's popping up in the air like it is right now, that's telling you it's about

 You can variate this dish with different vegetables or different herbs or seasonings, different

 I'm going to turn this one more time since it's kind of a thick piece.

 Supremely tender with the incredible aroma of hoisin, soy, garlic and ginger, these ribs

 Have your butcher cut a 1kg rack of ribs into 3 strips of short ribs.

 Place the ribs in a pan, cover with water and bring this to a boil.

 Lower the heat to a simmer and continue to simmer for 20 minutes.

 While the ribs simmer, add the hoisin sauce, light soy sauce, rice wine, sugar, tomato

 sauce, chopped garlic and chopped ginger to a jug and stir this until the sugar is totally

 Place them in a roasting pan and pour the marinade over the ribs.

 Place the pan in your refrigerator and allow the ribs to marinate for a minimum of 4 hours,

 To cook the ribs, heat your oven to 180 degrees Celsius or 350 Fahrenheit.

 Remove the pan from the oven and stir the ribs around the pan to recoat everything with

 Remove the pan from the oven, transfer the ribs to platters and serve immediately.

 This recipe is available in full printable format on our website whats4chow.com.

 Thanks for joining us today, please subscribe to our channel and we'll see you again tomorrow.

 Because most people have purchased the large and the small hand, you'll now have two spool

 And now we're going to make an extraordinary bow using both of them.

 Yes, this bow will have five different ribbons, but don't worry, the hand will be holding

 Pick up your ribbon, pinch a half inch from the bottom or from the end, put half of the

 wire, wrap about three times, ending with that little crossover at the back, just as

 Approach the hand, coming around from the left, go around, center finger, cup ribbon

 around base finger, the little top piece of wire, wrap around very tightly, right on top

 This is securing the ribbon to the hand and just getting that little piece of wire out

 Now wrap the bottom piece of wire around the little nail just two times.

 Now the ribbon is secured to the hand and the first loop is made and we're ready to

 This is the bottom edge of the ribbon now and it's very important to twist, putting

 Pull ribbon off of forefinger and go around, finger one right, pull down snugly.

 Now as you can see, this little half twist is beginning to form, but don't worry about

 If we use the bottoms up movement every time, bottom edge of ribbon, twist, bring the bottom

 edge up, roll off of forefinger, put over, finger one left, pull down snugly and as you

 No more ribbon in your feet, no more ribbon rolling around all over the floors.

 Now bottoms up, bottom edge of ribbon, twist, bottoms up, bring it up, roll off of forefinger,

 pull down snugly and now you see that little half twist beginning, but we're going to get

 Bottoms up, bottom edge, twist, roll ribbon off of forefinger, your ribbon from hand to

 To finish off your bow, you'll want your tails facing upward at the end.

 Now unwrap top wire, pull it down, unwrap wire off of nail and wire off your bow.

 Now I've tied the bow to the package and I'm beginning to fluff.

 As you can see I am separating the ribbon to form a very pretty pattern.

 I'm making sure it's all perfect and I've created a beautiful bow.

 Now as you can see, anyone can make a bow like a pro, every time with the hand.

 Go to www.beadaholique.com for all of your beading supply needs!

 Today we're making a great little appetizer for your next cocktail party.

 Plus you can make them in advance so you're not pulling your hair out at the last minute.

 And I can guarantee your guests are going to go crazy for these.

 And I like to start out with the dipping sauce to give it time to chill and allow the flavors

 Now to make the sauce, all you have to do is stir together about a half cup of mayonnaise,

 one tablespoon of sambal sauce, and that's an Asian chili sauce with a little garlic

 in it, one tablespoon of relish, a half teaspoon of Old Bay seasoning or some other seafood

 Give it a good stir and when you have it pretty well combined, pop it in the fridge to chill.

 Now for the crab balls, preheat the oven to 400 degrees and line a baking sheet with parchment

 Now in a large bowl, whisk together one egg, two tablespoons of mayonnaise, about a teaspoon

 of mustard, a tablespoon of Worcestershire sauce, one tablespoon of sambal if you want

 it a little spicy, a half teaspoon of Old Bay, two tablespoons of heavy cream, and some

 Now when you have all the ingredients mixed well, stir in one cup of fresh gluten-free

 bread crumbs, and I wouldn't use dried bread crumbs for this because I think it would ruin

 And you can make your own fresh bread crumbs by blitzing a few slices of gluten-free bread

 I usually do the crust and the middles in separate batches, and I use the light bread

 Now stir in one pound of lump crab meat, and if you're really short on cash, you can use

 Now stir all the ingredients together until you have a homogenous mixture that holds together

 Then you can portion it out into balls that are about an inch or an inch and a half in

 Then place them onto the prepared baking sheet, and I like to add a small piece of butter

 on top of each one to help with the browning, and because everything tastes better when

 Now bake them for 12 to 15 minutes, and when you take them out of the oven, let them rest

 for 5 minutes or so, because you want to make sure they hold together well.

 And I like to sprinkle on some cayenne pepper, or maralde bay, or paprika, just to give them

 Then serve them with the dipping sauce you made earlier, and some lemon wedges.

 These might be little bites, but I assure you they're going to go over really big at

 We celebrate the traditional Italian feast of the seven fishes, which usually turns into

 I hope you all have a happy holiday, and if you'd like to print a copy of today's recipe,

 And for brand new recipes every week, don't forget to subscribe.

 Kejri is a breakfast dish and it's a combination of basmati rice, smoked fish, this is kahawai,

 We're going to add in some chorizo and some spinach just to give it a nice twist.

 So you don't want to end up with one of those in your throat so just pull those out.

 So the first thing we're going to do is warm the fish through with some melted butter.

 I'm using unsalted butter, you can add your salt in later, this way it's not going to

 Smoked fish is rubbed with salt and brown sugar when it's smoked, so rather than using

 the butter for salt we're just using it for that nice creamy smooth taste.

 I'm going to leave that on a low heat to warm up while I cook off some chorizo.

 Okay so this is my chorizo, this is a cured sausage with smoked paprika and chilli.

 It's a pork sausage and it's already preserved, you can eat it as it is, look it's pretty hard.

 I'm going to cook it separately from the fish, just purely because the oils in it are going

 to leach out that red colour and I don't want them to colour all the rice and the fish.

 So I'm going to cook it in a separate pan, let the oils come out there and then add the

 This is a beautiful chorizo, it's got a good amount of fat in it, real peppercorns and

 These are already cooked so all we really want to do is warm them up.

 Give a little bit of colour, like a little bit more of a golden colour to the edges.

 It's a bit hard to see on this as they're red but that cooking flavour, caramelising

 the sugars in them, it's just going to make it a lot more tasty than it was before.

 I'm going to tilt my pan away so that the oil runs to one side and I can get the chorizo

 So it's the oil that's going to discolour the rest of this dish.

 These are hard boiled and this is part of the traditional recipe.

 It's a pretty hoary looking lemon but this is off our lemon tree outside so that's the

 You squeeze it over your hand, you're going to get a nice, nice, nice, nice, nice, nice

 I'm going to take a little bit of the lemon juice and I'm going to squeeze it over my

 If you squeeze it over your hand you're going to get the pips in your hand rather than the

 Today I wanted to show you how to create this adorable Father's Day gift and this is going

 So if you want to know how to make one of these then just keep watching!

 So the first thing I want to make is the box and for that I'm going to be recycling an

 old shoe box and you can see this one is very battered but it really doesn't matter because

 I'll be using a marker pen and also a pencil, a ruler, a hot glue gun.

 I'll also be using some masking tape and some double sided tape.

 And to cover the box I'm going to be using some fancy wrapping paper and these ones are

 So the first thing you want to do is you want to find the center point on the side of your

 box and I'm using my ruler and I'm just going to make a little mark on the halfway point

 and I'll do that on top and bottom of the box and then I'll just draw a line.

 Then on the bottom of the box I'm going to make a little tick mark about an inch away

 from that line on both sides and then I'm going to turn the box around and I'm going

 to make a little tick mark three inches away from that line on both sides.

 Once I've done that I'm going to go ahead and link those two tick marks and I'm going

 to do that on both sides and this is just going to serve as a guide for me later.

 Once I've done that I'm going to go ahead and draw a straight line on the back of the

 I'm just linking the center points together here and this is going to also serve as a

 So now I'm just going to go ahead and cut out that center section.

 So I'm just cutting on the diagonal lines and then just cutting off that piece and I'll

 And now you can see how that line on the back is going to serve me as a guide.

 I'm just going to draw that line in the center of the box and then I'm going to take the

 back of the pin and I'm just going to crease on that line and that's just going to help

 And as you can see the box is starting to form and we're going to need some panels for

 the side and for that I'm going to be using the top of the box or the lid of the box.

 I'm going to measure the right size and I'm going to cut out those pieces from the lid

 and you can see here I've already cut that out and then I'm adhering this with the masking

 tape and I ended up going a little bit masking tape crazy here so I added quite a lot because

 I don't want the box to fall apart and I ended up reinforcing the inside as well.

 Once you've done that cut out another piece which is going to be your handle.

 So cut a piece of the right size to fit on the top of the box and then fold that in half.

 I ended up sketching the handle here with this kind of wavy line and once I cut it out

 I actually changed my mind and then I just cut that into a straight line and I took the

 piece that I cut out from the handle to cut out that intersection as well and now before

 I adhere the handle to the box I need to glue the box together so I'm just adding some hot

 glue all over the back of the box and then I'm going to press that together and I'm not

 worrying too much about the corners because I can go ahead and add some glue all the way

 around so that the box is really well stuck together and once that's done I can go ahead

 and adhere my handle in place and I used hot glue gun for that as well but I decided to

 add some masking tape to reinforce that and make sure that that doesn't break apart and

 the box is pretty much complete now and all I need to do is cover that up with the paper

 and I'm not going to bore you guys and let you watch me wrap this box but what I did

 was I covered this box in sections so you can see here I've cut out smaller pieces and

 covered section by section and once I finish doing that the box is completely covered and

 you want I just decided to add some snacks and some drinks and I've even added a small

 little gift you can put some newspapers in there or a magazine or anything really I just

 think this is a really fun gift for all of your dad's favorites so then next thing you

 need to do is remember to add a tag to this and then your basket is complete now you can

 give it to your dad and I'm sure he's going to love enjoying all of those goodies so once

 your dad has enjoyed his drinks and his snacks he can then go ahead and use his basket as

 a toolbox so this box can fit a lot of tools in there and it's also very handy because

 remember we created that handle so it can be taken anywhere he wants and just remember

 to have fun creating this for that special someone in your life thanks for watching I'll

 catch you guys next time bye I hope you liked this video if you did please don't forget to

 subscribe to my channel so that you can receive updates when I post new videos and also if you

 could take a minute to click the like button that would really help this channel and show

 So firstly we want to start with a small pea-sized piece of fondant.

 Just roll it into a nice little ball, put a little bit of your dust puff down.

 Just want to roll it out so it's nice and flat, not too flat because you want it to

 And then what we want to do is roll it up in one continuous motion and we've just made

 So now we're going to pop that on our plastic sheet and we get another pea-sized piece of

 So we're going to flatten it slightly with the rolling pin and we're going to attach

 it to the rose bud and we're going to do this in the seam, just slightly above the

 And again you're just going to overlap the last petal and just fix it with your fingers

 And then you can leave it like that if you like but I like to do one or two more.

 But for a small flower, a small rose, you just want to do a few petals.

 So I'm just going to place the last petal just on the seam of the last two and I'm just

 So you've now got your rose all done but it's got this ugly underneath so what we do is

 we just pinch it, remove that bottom and then it can sit here to dry.

 It's summer so I'm really bringing out all the colorful bold looks that I have for you guys.

 So if you want to see how I got this look then keep on watching.

 the palette I've been using recently for this look and it's the, this palette is the 15 Pro Pen Palette

 But I still use their products because you know, it's makeup and they're very good quality.

 And if you guys are wondering, this is the I05 Palette from Cupquake Cutie Cosmetics and it looks like this.

 And if you, again, if you want to see how I got this look then keep on watching.

 Alright, so first thing we're going to take an eyeshadow base and this is a Cupquake Cutie Cosmetics Eyeshadow Base.

 Okay, next step we're going to do is take our blending brush or whatever blending brush you guys have.

 And I'm using my 205 brush from BH Cosmetics, from Coastal Scents.

 But I'm taking that 205 brush and I'm taking this, take a light purple color and I'm going to apply that on the crease.

 I'm taking this purple right below that purple and applying this, and applying that with my 205 brush again.

 And I'm going to apply that on the crease and I'm going to intensify that color on the outer V area.

 Now I'm going to take a blending brush and this one is from BH Cosmetics.

 Now I'm going to take my highlight color and this one is from Coastal Scents Hot Pots and the color is in M10.

 But I'm taking this color and with this small eyeshadow brush and applying that as a highlight.

 And I'm going to apply that on the lid area but I'm not going to apply it all the way in.

 I'm going to leave like a third of the eye area bare so I can apply a champagne color like this one.

 I'm going to apply that with the same brush and apply that on the inner corners of my eye.

 Alright, now I'm taking the same minty green and applying that on the lower lash line.

 All we have to do is apply our eyeliner and mascara and false lashes and I'll be right back to show you guys the finished look.

 Alright, so I applied my false lashes, my mascara and that's all I did.

If you guys are wondering why I do not apply blushes on my face recently in my videos, I'm going through a crisis.

 My face is like becoming really dry and it has like dry patches and stuff that I never had before and it's making me really upset because I never had dry patches on my face.

 So I'm trying to avoid applying too much product on my face to avoid it from looking all cakey and you know, you don't want to look all cakey.

 So anyways, that's why and I do not have any lipstick because I'm not going anywhere.

So if you like this tutorial, make sure to comment down below, subscribe and like this video.

 Inside the box is where we put our bows and our pieces of wood.

 They're in the steamer for roughly an hour to the inch of thickness.

 So the small bows that we're using here would be roughly about 30 minutes inside the steamer

 before they are brought out and bent around the mold to give them the shape of a snowshoe.

 You want to concentrate the steam right where the most critical bend is in the snowshoe.

 So these bows inside the box will be roughly about there where the steam enters.

 That way I'll have all the steam right at the very tip of the snowshoe where it needs

 We'll stay in there for roughly half an hour and then we'll bring them out and we have

 These are in the steamer for roughly half an hour and we have about two minutes to get

 them in the mold, which doesn't sound like a lot of time but it normally gives you all

 See that one wants to spring up and this one, see how this one's laying?

 Okay, what I've got here is some rawhide and I'm going to put this rawhide on two broom

 handles and then I'm going to twist it and stretch it and freeze it, thaw it out and

 What I'm going to try to do is work a lot of the stretch into this rawhide because it's

 So I'll take this, twist it up, take it out and I'll bury it in the snow overnight.

 I'll probably freeze it and I'll bring it back in in the morning, thaw it out, restretch

 it, do that a couple times and then I'll work it into the snowshoes, weave it into the snowshoes.

 Here's the rawhide that was outside in the snowbank and froze for a day or so.

 I'm thawing it out and then I'll twist it back on these handles and possibly freeze

 I'm about to start filling the snowshoe with the rawhide I've been working with over the

 There's the fragrance of July roadkill but nevertheless it's done.

 It will dry and open up more as that rawhide shrinks when it dries and then we'll take

 all my concealer, foundation, bronzer, this good stuff and that good stuff on and I have

 crease and just really load it up and you can even take what's left over and put it

 systems, with figuring it out and jazz so I just, I'm just putting a timer on my videos

I'm putting a timer on my videos now and hoping for the best and

 I do have an Instagram account called Glitter In My Veins with the three Y's that I link

 pictures of the tutorials I do so if you have Instagram you can go on there and follow

I'm going to go ahead and use my brow bone color Wet n Wild Brulee just on a flat

 eyeshadow brush and go ahead and put that into your highlight or under your brow or

 the Naked Palette again and I'm going to go ahead in with Dark Horse and this angled

 bit and I just want to concentrate Dark Horse as you can see on the side, just on like that

 just want to add a little bit of something-something right there I guess you could say.

 fast forward thingy that some videos do I would, but like I said I'm not savvy in that

I got it a little heavy so I'll just go back in with the eyeshadow

 going in with Sidecar from the Naked Palette on that flat eyeshadow brush I used for Naked

 and just go ahead and low that up because you want a lot of this color.

 pretty shimmering-ness and go ahead and just put that all over your eyelid.

 even blend that into your inner corner area so it's sparkly if you like.

 Dark Horse that we used in that outer 1 3rd, and go ahead and apply that underneath your

Then take Whiskey from Urban Decay, their 24-7 eye pencil, and pop that

And once you have that, I'm not going to be doing a tight line color

 because I kind of want to just keep this real airy and pretty and girly and... well, I guess

And on this eye, I just did a super, super thin line of eye... or it's thin for

 my Revlon Grow Luscious, probably my favorite drugstore mascara ever, and apply it to my

 what I'm doing in this video because I know I normally tutorial on this eye and not this

 Something that maybe Louis would wear if he was, you know, in the band as a girl or, you

 Today I'm going to do a how to play video for Milk Thistle by Conroe Burston and Mystic

 So to play Milk Thistle you're going to need a capo on the 4th fret.

 And then during the first verse you play that two times, but I think that's the only time

 And then for the next part of the song, it would be like the, uh, I'm not pretending

 And right here, he does a hammer on from the 2nd fret on the A string to the 3rd.

 And I'm not sure what this chord is called, but 2nd fret on the A string, 1st fret on

 It's a C. And then, um, also don't know what this chord is called, but just a 2nd fret

 I'll take you through measuring up the sheets, how to fit them,

 I don't think it would get any softer than this at room temperature.

 That's all you want, it's not going to melt like butter or anything.

 Just kind of mix it up and then we're going to put it in this pan.

 This is pretty good bakeware that we're just going to, and usually, you know how I put

 I'm not going to spray it this time because there should be enough of grease in the cookie

 And usually I use foil and I did that earlier so I could get it out of the pan and I just,

 it was a little bit harder to spread out with the foil in the pan.

 So I thought, well, this is kind of a safe time, I won't use the foil.

 And of course now with this bakeware, we're going to use a what kind of knife?

 Thank you, a plastic knife on that so we don't cut into our good bakeware and then not have

 I found when I was doing it with the foil, it was a little bit harder to tell if I was

 But then by the time I was cutting the cookies when they were done, it was fine.

 Because with the foil, all I really wanted to do was have it come out of the pan so I

 I've never had trouble with stuff sticking to foil other than cheese and I don't know

 And I found that we're going to use an egg white and just a little bit of water to kind

 This is just so you have something for the almonds and the sugar to stick to.

 So you just want to have it kind of frothy like that and we're just going to brush it

 The group that we usually have on Monday canceled last week so it was kind of like, ooh, okay.

 So I had time to get stuff together and I'm going on vacation for a few days.

 Here's our cup of almonds and I've just sliced out almonds from the produce department.

 And then here's a quarter cup of sugar we're going to sprinkle on here, spray.

 And these are not, you know, the cookie dough is sweet but these aren't overly sweet.

 So, you know, you can have it, I think these make like a good little breakfast sort of

 This, we're using almonds because it's sort of traditional, like I said, to the Scandinavian countries.

 But if you wanted to use walnuts or pecans, is that what you were thinking?

 I think with the pecans I might want to toast them a little bit.

 Not too much because you're putting it in the oven so they're going to get that added toasting.

 So you don't really want to toast them too much, just a little bit.

 And when I cut them, I cut them in, well I cut them smaller, but you can cut them in 6 by 4 in here.

 The yellow that's working perfect is Fimo, and it's transparent yellow.

 And then I'm using sweet potato orange, so it doesn't work quite as well.

 I don't like it as much, but it's what I had for orange, so I'm going with it.

 So you take yellow, and you're going to make the yellow pretty thick.

 And if you do that for a while, you'll eventually end up with something like this.

 And when mine got too long, I just took my slicer and cut it in half.

 Because I'm making these 1-12 size for, like, a little bit smaller than a Barbie.

 Because if they're too tiny, you're just not going to be able to deal with them very well.

 And then throw all those on your glass baking pan whenever you're done.

 And he's built perfectly for the sport except he's played basketball his entire life or

 other sports that wouldn't support him in becoming a really good rower.

 So he's got all these other guys on the team that have been rowing for quite some time

 Now he's excited because his coach says he's a perfect build, but he's got a problem.

 So the very first thing is that training in the gym is meant to support your sport, not

 A lot of people think that, you know, sport-specific training means you get ready for your sport

 What I'm offering you is that you've got to row to become a better rower, but you're going

 to supplement with two different ideas and two different exercises that I'll offer you

 right now that are going to contribute to your ability to become a better rower.

 So you're going to have to do powerful exercises or use a parameter that contributes to power.

 You're going to have to be strong because strength is the foundation of power.

 And then the third is endurance because I know you're going to be going for long distances.

 We're not going to worry about endurance in the gym because that's where you're going

 But you need to build the power and you need to build the strength in two different ways.

 Power and strength is what you're going to need, but you're also going to need to break

 So the best exercises for developing your rowing capacity and everything in life is

 So if you want the most specific exercise for your rowing, it's going to be deadlifting,

 That means watch my deadlift tutorial video, learn how to get your core engaged, learn

 how to become flexible enough to approach the bar and build your deadlift.

 You're going to want to build your deadlift for strength, structural strength, and also

 So as you grow in your ability to deadlift, you know, spend the first few weeks just trying

 to learn the deadlift and add more weight to the deadlift with good form.

 You're going to want to then add speed deadlifts or if you can have somebody teach you, power

 cleans because a speed deadlift is going to contribute to your power or if you do a power

 Especially if you're coming off the ground, it's a fast deadlift.

 The next one you're going to want to use is a bit more functional.

 You're probably going to want to use a bar, but I'm not going to change this now.

 The bar would be here, which is probably a little bit more analogous to what you're going

 But you want to get down here just like you're on a roller, sink, and bring it up.

 That's more analogous to what you're going to see when you're preparing for your sport.

 You've got to get stronger and you've got to increase your functional capacity.

 Hey, what's up guys, welcome back to Vin's Cookbook, my name is Aleef.

 In the previous video, we made some classic potted plant milk tea.

 In this video, we're making some potted plant matcha milk tea since St.

 The first part contains the ingredients for the iced matcha milk tea, and the second part contains the ingredients for the topping.

 Since we're using matcha today, the ideal temperature should be about 175 degrees Fahrenheit or about 79 degrees Celsius.

 The right temperature will bring out the sweetness and the nutrients of the matcha.

 And overboiling the water will get rid of the oxygen and flatten the taste.

 Today we're using vanilla syrup because we love our matcha with some vanilla.

 We have a video on how to make that and we'll put a link in the description box below.

 You're going to want to gently smash them into finer pieces in a Ziploc bag.

 You don't need to remove the cream filling because it'll help the crumbs stick together better.

 This is totally optional but if you sprinkle a tiny bit onto the Oreo crumbs,

 the taste of your pot of plant milk tea will be much more interesting.

 You could use sprigs of mint but today we're going to be using something that looks like a shamrock for St.

 Use a frother or a whisk and blend everything together until there's no lumps.

 Once everything is well blended, add in your syrup and mix well.

 And second, it'll help improve the texture by making it frothy and foamy.

 In a glass, add in your ice and pour in the milk tea, about 2 thirds full.

 And then you can add in the whipped cream and the Oreo and the plant and now you're done.

 Be sure to share a photo of what you've made with us on Facebook, Instagram or Twitter with the hashtag

 Please like, subscribe and see you on Facebook, Instagram and Twitter.

 Don't forget to send us your homework and the hashtag Bin's Cookbook.

 If you want to make a video like this or use other drinks, don't forget to send us a photo.

 If you like this video, please like, subscribe, follow me on my Facebook, Instagram, Twitter and Google Plus

 And since my dad is asleep, I thought I'd sneak in here and film one for him.

 So I took a class called Prep Cooking, and I have the recipe right here.

 Let's go over some of the ingredients, but first I have to turn on the hot water to get

 The ingredients are parmesan cheese, Romano cheese, butter, salt, heavy whipping cream,

 Because we're going to use this, and the recipes are always down below, like my dad

 Okay, well first thing we're going to do is get the cream and butter to a simmer.

 While you're waiting for the butter and the cream to simmer, put the macaroni in the hot

 Now that the cream and the butter are simmering, put in the salt.

 Now that the fettuccine is done cooking, we're going to put it in the cream.

 And for a little flavor, we're going to put in the black pepper.

 But since I was doing cooking classes and they're all over, that, oh crap.

 I just had a couple of bags of pinto beans, I threw them in and pre-soaked them, and so

 all of the leftover pinto beans, I rinsed off all of that extra soaking water, because

 4 quarts of liquid, but the actual jars have to be able to fit in there comfortably with

So, I put my beans in there, I then filled up the pot with water

 most pressure cookers will have a mark inside the pot that shows halfway and 2 thirds.

 you're cooking beans, you don't want to go above that halfway mark.

 beans will tend to splatter and foam, and so you don't want the beans to splatter and

 foam up into these openings on the lid, which will plug up the lid.

Another way you can reduce the foaming is add just a little bit of butter.

 So I put in, oh, about a half a teaspoon of butter into that, and it just makes the little

 above the beans, and then if I had had an onion, I would have put an onion in there,

 too far out just to run to the store for one onion, and so I went ahead and took about

 the dried minced onions, and so that's what I put in there instead.

 to bring it up to pressure and let it cook for about 14 minutes.

Then I'll let it reduce pressure, and I'll have supper ready to go.

 some cornbread or maybe a side salad or something like that to go with it.

 to do with beans that you have when you're pressure canning them and you make too many,

 Hey, I've got your Valentine's Day dessert covered for you because if you know how to

 make a basic egg custard, a sweetened egg custard, you can make creme brulee or you

 So I'm going to add the sugar to the egg yolks and start whisking.

 So if you haven't worked out this week, you can consider this your burning of calories.

 Because once this about doubles in size, we're going to take it over to the double boiler

 This is an arm moving process because what I really don't want is scrambled eggs.

 Remember, proteins coagulate at 165 degrees, including egg protein.

 You can very easily go from a nice smooth custard to scrambled eggs in no time.

 Get yourself a nice dry towel or something to hold the side of the bowl because it will

 Again, and another important thing, there's just a little bit of water in the bottom of

 You never want to let the water touch the bottom of your bowl when you're doing a double

 It's the steam that is going to create the heat, not the direct touching of the water.

 And I want to keep this moving so that I heat it consistently and incorporate air and don't

 In a minute or two, you're going to see how much thicker it gets.

 As I continue to whisk, I'm going to add a quarter cup of Marsala wine to that to give

 Whisk, whisk, whisk, whisk, whisk, keep whisking, whisk, whisk.

 Incorporating air and the heat to the egg protein is in essence leavening this like

 After whisking my freaking arm off, I see that it's no longer thickening.

 But anyway, now what I'm going to do is take little ramekins and go ahead and fill each

 It is going to go in the oven and get baked for 5-10 minutes or so at about 350-375 degrees.

 And actually, some of it, this is a hot pan, but some of it can be put in the custard cups

 and actually just chilled and that custard will set and come together.

 It's another example of some of the things that eggs can do for you.

 And especially in the Italian custard, Zabaglione is one of the best.

 Sometimes I put Godiva chocolate liqueur in it and that's really good.

 Hi there, I have the most beautiful fruit salad recipe to show you.

 So if you need to bring a dish to pass, maybe do a luncheon or brunch, this is absolutely perfect.

 Or if you're having brunch, this is really going to wow everybody.

 If you go to Aprons and Things and click on that, I've got a source to where you can get these.

 But these just really look great for desserts and layered salads like this fruit salad.

 So go out and get a pretty clear glass bowl, and let's get to it.

 So I went to the grocery store, and I picked out a bunch of different, very, very pretty, different colored fruit.

 So I got some strawberries, some cantaloupes, some pineapple, honeydew.

 And usually I'd use blueberries, but the blackberries look better.

 So you just want to get a whole bunch of different fruit that, you know, you want different colors.

 So I sliced up my strawberries, and then I picked up containers of pre-diced, you know, pineapple and melon.

 And we're just going to dump them all in here, but we don't want to mix this together.

 Next, I've got, I'm just going to use my spatula just to get that fruit down there a little bit.

 Pineapple, that yellow and orange I thought would look really pretty together.

 You know, all that brunch food really needs something nice and light.

 And my last layer are going to be my blackberries, which I happen to love, or blueberries.

 So you can just cover it with plastic wrap and keep it in your fridge until you're ready for brunch.

 But we're going to put a wonderful lime whipped cream on top just to really dress things up.

 Sure, you can go ahead and make your homemade whipped cream yourself.

 But we're going to jazz it up just a little bit with a little bit of lime zest.

 And, again, I've got a source for that under Aprons and Things where you can get a Microplane.

 We're going to put a cloud of this lime whipped cream right on top.

 And then you can garnish it with some fresh mint or, in this case, because we've got the lime in here anyway.

 I thought it'd be nice to just do a little bit of fresh lime on top.

 Like most H-E-Bs across Texas, a fresh produce section greets you as you walk in.

 But the H-E-B Plus in San Juan also has a tortillaria, Mi Tienda.

 One of six throughout the company, Mi Tienda offers corn and flour tortillas and masa people use to make tamales.

 Department manager Oscar Sanchez gives an explanation on how fresh tortillas are made every day at H-E-B.

 The 180 pounds of corn are put into three bins for an hour and a half.

 Once the bin is full with water, it passes through the compressor and into a machine that will wash the corn.

 The grounded product is put into the machine to create the masa maria, which is what tortillas are made with.

 In this process, there are three cutouts the machine has, one for masa tortillas, one for flour, and the other for tortilla chips.

 you can find all sorts of videos from gardening organically and saving money to cooking with

Now we're going to be using Nuremberg bratwurst which is traditional

 to go with it but you can use any sausage really, it doesn't matter.

 on them and this is now when you're going to start working on the potatoes.

 on how many people like frying potatoes, I've used maybe two pounds or a kilogram of potatoes

 for four and these are some old potatoes that need to be used first.

 out the bad bits and just chop them up nicely, I'll show you a bit later on and then we're

Just put them in a separate container now and leave it in a warm place.

 like this but we're just using this because it's using up old potatoes and if you don't

 use these up, you're just wasting money and wasting food so we don't like that to happen.

 cook and not be as nicely fried but it's to your own preference.

 water and just let them boil for about 10-12 minutes and then take them off after that.

 Now, whilst our spuds are cooking, we're just going to get these sausages and these are

 going to go on the grill at medium heat for about 7 minutes and then we're just going

Let's get the sausages and we're going to cut these up into thirds.

 Continue flipping them around like that so they look all nice on both sides, nice and

 golden which is what I think everyone wants to see in a fried potato.

 to add a bit of seasoning, so a bit of salt and also a bit of pepper.

 Here they are looking really nice and we need to now put them into a separate dish before

 our sausages and then obviously we want our onions, nicely coloured, it's the way you

Mix it together and then just leave it in a warm place until you're going to serve.

 And just before serving, that is when we're going to get our eggs ready to be nicely cooked.

 And just do however many you would like to do and to fry them how much you want to do.

 Now what I would do is just flip them over just to make sure that the yolk is cooked

Right, so here we have it and you can also have it just as a main

 Next, you want to part the hair in the middle and try to have it as even as possible.

 Again, you want the braid as tight as possible and braid all the way to the end.

 you want to spray them a little more with the spray just to have a nice shine to them.

 Now you want to twist them on either side, just so it's overlapping each other, and pull them to the back.

 Now, as you're doing this, make sure you mold it to the shape that you want.

 Next, I take a hair tie, I usually use black, and tie the tails.

 Excuse the back of my hair, I've had these braids in for two months now, so they're kind of old.

 I took this bottle that I filled with water and sprayed my edges down a little.

 Just some moisture, I add a little moisture to them a little bit.

 and with a toothbrush, take a little and brush down my edges, slicking them down.

 Now I take some Aussie Freeze Spray, and spray it down a little bit, so that they stay.

 Mine are really long, you don't have to do this, but because mine are long, I do this so that they stay all day, and you don't do that crawling thing.

Today we're going to talk about the five stroke roll using the traditional grip.

 As I mentioned in my previous videos, it's very important to start off finding the balance point.

You want to position that across the web of your palm right here,

 once again favoring the angle of the left stick as the stick is placed on top of the hand

 then the left stick being on top of the hand is going to have a slightly more angle to it.

 So you want to accommodate that angle with the surface that you're playing, in this case the pad.

 So that's why you see these pictures of some of the old jazz drummers having the angled snare drum.

 Make sure that the stick is parallel to the surface to get the greatest amount of free rebounding strokes.

 Now what I'm trying to do is find the angle of the pad that marries the stick.

 You can see it wants to come down hill, so if I bring the pad around, I'm looking for a position of the stick

 and the pad to where when I drop the stick, it's pretty much like a ball would bounce straight up and down

 So what I do at this point is that I bring my ring finger underneath, extend my middle finger,

 I can curve the index finger around and place the thumb on the side.

 Now this is with my hand in more of a closed position at this point in time.

 But when I'm starting the roll, I'm playing very slowly, so I'm going to be using a lot more wrist

 So this is going to start out nice and slow with that kind of movement.

 Now if I want it to be soft to loud, then I have to start with lower strokes to produce a softer volume level.

 Now with the five-stroke roll, it's a mixture of double strokes and singles,

 as well as right-hand lead to left-hand lead, and as well as soft to loud.

 So there are three things with this rudiment that make it a little bit more challenging than any of the other rudiments.

 So we're going to start off with double, double, single, double, double, single.

 So you can see I'm using a whipping type of stroke movement to produce the loud notes.

 I'm a firm believer in using a tap stroke type of movement for soft volume, where I use just my wrists.

 And if I want more volume, then I reach up and use a wrist-arm combination movement.

 This is a whip stroke, which produces naturally more sound and more volume,

 There's nothing wrong with that, but you can hear the difference is a little bit more of an attack,

 Part of it is that holding the stick, loosen up to where you get that tone, versus like that.

 Now, I've talked a little bit about the double stroke roll in some of my previous videos,

 especially I did the match grip one, and then recently did the double stroke roll with the traditional grip.

 So there's more detailed information on how you're going to manipulate the fingers to help control and increase the speed of the double.

 So whatever you do with the double stroke roll, in the double stroke roll itself,

 you're going to use the same methods with the double stroke roll that's contained within the five stroke.

 Now, I like to think of the five stroke as really three strokes in five notes.

 So if you think of playing triplets with perhaps an accent on the last note of the triplet,

 That's one way of playing it, and that's the way I like to play it.

 That's kind of more of an even rhythm versus the odd or triplet rhythm.

 So experiment with pulling one hand out so you can learn what each hand is doing separate from just putting the whole thing together.

 And if you work on each hand individually, slow, fast, to slow,

 with these movements to produce the dynamic contrast in a very natural way, getting a good sound,

 and then you put the two hands together, there'll be a greater intelligence with how this whole thing is supposed to sound

 Hello this is HowToBob and today we're going to change the brakes on a 2002

 going to put a little dab on the back of the pads and I'm going to smear that

 around with my finger just get an even coat and the reason I do this first is

 so that gives it a minute to dry while I disassemble the brakes and this will

 thing I'm going to do is take a flat blade screwdriver and put it between the

 brake pad and the disc and gently pull the caliper apart just working it ever

 so slowly so that I can get the new pads in there once I get the old pads

 going to take off is the pad pin cap simply unscrew that and all that is is a

 and you can see now that I've got the pad pin loose the back brake pad just

 fell right out so we can go ahead and loosen it the rest of the way and pull

 it out and it should be very easy to reach in and grab the other pad and pull

Okay now what I'm going to do is take the whole caliper assembly

 and slide it forward that way I can take the outside pad put it right up against

 notch where the pad slides into you want to make sure that you get that right in

 place then I'll push the caliper back in to hold it while I get the pad pin

 and slide it in just to hold the outer pad you want to put it in just a little

 assembly all the way to the inside that way I can get the inside brake pad in

 there and I'll do the same thing put the brake pad right up against the disc brake

 and slide it up into position and this is going to be a little more difficult

 because you can't see the little notch where the brake pad lines up but once

 you get it into position you'll be able to take the pad pin and push it all the

 tighten it up I'm going to put a little bit of Loctite on and then I can go

 ahead and grab my five millimeter Allen wrench and tighten it the rest of the way.

 I've got that tightened up all that's left to do is put the pad pin cap back

 on and tighten that with the flat blade screwdriver and that's how you change

 celebrate Kwanzaa, Hanukkah, Christmas, it's important to find a cookie that

 fits any of these occasions and I'm trying to figure out what to make.

 I wanted a little bit of inspiration this holiday season so I invited Tori

 Avey who is the Shake Set in the kitchen to come over and show me how to make her

 down through the generations and my great-aunt kind of made them famous in

 this is just a stick of butter and you're just gonna melt that.

 that we've got this all melted, we're gonna throw in some unsweetened cocoa

 That looks really good and my daughter is like a glutton for chocolate.

 And this is, I've been trying to figure out what kind of like holiday

 cookie even to give teachers and this feels like a good one to give.

 together and then you let it kind of cool down and it's a very easy one to

Yeah, because I feel like even when I'm making holiday cookies, I've got

 the oven's going and I'm sweating and you know and I'm like having to wait 12

 that she would make for Christmas Eve every year when I was growing up and now

 I celebrate Hanukkah so we actually make it for Hanukkah in our family.

You know, I'm always trying to find recipes that I feel like really, you

 love that there aren't that many ingredients and I basically have all of

Yeah, exactly and you're just gonna coat that until it's all mixed in.

 Oh my god and this is actually a great point like if you have your kids like

 you can do all the boiling and then get them to dump in these ingredients and

 fun is that they can actually shape the cookies and it's kind of like

 it's really it's well I caught someone's called a cookie scooper

 sometimes an ice cream but I guess it's probably better known as.

Alright, so then we're just gonna take, can you use small ones, big ones, does it really matter?

Okay, alright so should we make, I guess because they're just sitting it's not even

Yes, they just need to dry and they get pretty sticky so I like to put them on a

 layer of parchment just to keep them separate from the cookie sheet.

And I love the fact that, hi, I made some earlier because we saw the recipe and I was like, nice, well we need to make these now.

They're dry, they're not dry, they're moist but they're easy, they hold together and they taste like that.

If you want someone to really like you, this is what you make for them.

For more fast, fresh and easy recipes like this and more, check out Weedlicious.com and TheShiksa.com.

 Today we're changing camshaft position sensors on my 2006 Nissan Murano.

 I had it replaced once before, so I'm going to give you a walkthrough of how to do it.

 Okay so here's the car, and this is a V6 car, V6 engine excuse me.

 So it has two camshafts, therefore two camshaft position sensors.

 And then this might be a little tough to see because it gets kind of deep in there, but

 The other one I just showed you just a moment ago was the rear.

 What's going to happen here is this green tab actually has to be pushed straight down

 Push it down until it clicks and that actually releases the pressure on the plug and you

 So now for the front sensor, it's just a matter of pulling off this bolt here, pulling the

 sensor straight out, reinstalling the new sensor, reattaching your bolt.

 In order to access the rear sensor, I'm going to go ahead and take off this air plenum here,

 this hole from back here all the way forward probably to this clamp.

 The rear one is a little harder to get at but it's not that bad.

 I've already pressed that clip straight in to release the tension that it's holding on

 the sensor and then all I need to do now is just use a gentle twist of a flat blade

 As you can see, the sensor is very similar and again, you just have this single bolt.

 That single bolt there will be the one you have to remove and that sensor pulls straight

 Plenty of clearance in the rear sensor to pull that bolt out without any problem.

 On the front sensor, I've opted to use a quarter inch universal joint and a shallow

 Just because the water inlet here is so close, it's a little tough to get something else

 I think if you watch this far and you can handle the disassembly, the reassembly is

 I just want to show you a little bit more about how these plugs work.

 What we did here as I showed you is there's a plastic section on the bottom of this plug

 Now what's going to happen when the plug gets put back on is the sensor is going to push

 This one here, I'm going to have to spray a little bit of just a small amount of grease

 When I was pushing it back on the old sensor, it wasn't clicking every time.

 But you want to watch for that click because that's what's going to hold the plug in nice

 What I'll probably do here when I reassemble is I'll probably give this a slight push in

 For instance, right now, there's a little bit of spring pressure there.

 You're going to be pretty satisfied and click when you plug it back in.

 Basically, I was able to purchase these sensors more than two years ago at a national auto

 I'm not going to share the name, but I was able to get them with a limited lifetime warranty.

 So after more than two years ago, I was able to go back, swap these back out again.

 When I purchased them, they were approximately $60 or $70 each and got them with a lifetime

 That's what I would recommend because the vehicle was six years old when I replaced

 them the first time and it only took a little more than another two years after that for

 So if you're going to buy these sensors, I would recommend buying them from one of the

 But that's the way I chose to do it and it worked pretty good for me.

 Today we're going to be doing a manicure that's going to be the same on all of the nails,

 What I have on the nails right now is two coats of this color from Color Club.

 This isn't going to look totally neon by the time this whole thing is done, so hang tight.

 What we're going to do next is create kind of a gradient, I guess, more just sponged

 I have a little piece of a cosmetic sponge and because my nails are small I'm actually

 going to sponge it on using just this tiny little surface here.

 And then I'm just going to start by dabbing at the very tip, okay, and then I'm going

 to work my way up so that it fades slightly as you work your way up.

 I don't want to go up the entire nail because I want there to be a nice pink base, okay.

 And then for any amount of color that you don't, if you go too far with the black, then

 you can go back in with a different part of the surface and put more of the pink on there

 So let me go ahead and do the gradient on all of these nails and I'll come back for

 Okay, so now that I have got the faded thing going on here, and I've also done it on my

 other nails, this hand is actually shorter so you can kind of see how it looks on even

 How high up or how perfect the line is is really not important because we're going to

 What we're going to be using is this large XL plate from Cheeky and this is plate A and

 I'm going to be using, let me flip this over, I'm going to be using this design here

 with these sort of wavy lines and I'm going to be stamping that using this white polish

 Okay, so here they are all stamped and I've cleaned up around the cuticles so you get

 a better idea of what they look like and this is why you can see the fading doesn't really

 matter of how perfect it is because it really is covered up quite a bit from the wavy lines.

 So we're going to do another step and I'm going to be adding a layer of polish over

 This is called Chunky Holo Candy and it's a holographic glitter in a jelly base polish

 so it's going to be really sheer and I'm just going to put one moderate layer over the entire

 nail and what's going to happen is it's going to change that white line to looking pink.

 Plus it will add a little bit of sparkle which of course is fun.

 I'm only going to do one layer of that because I don't want to completely muddy the whole

 And you want to brush gently because you don't want to smear your stamped images.

 By the time you are done cleaning up around the cuticles, this has had a minute to dry

 Then I will follow that up with a layer of top coat and then I will come back and show

 Okay, so here they are all complete with top coat and everything.

 show you a quick and easy way to create a fun and sparkly night sky.

 off with two cured coats of CND Shellac in Peacock Plume and I'm going to use

 more than one style or size of additive you want to start with the largest piece

 use a dry gel brush and simply press it into the additive and then press it onto

After I've pressed a few all over the nail they're sticking into the

 then across the nail to make sure all the pieces are firmly laid into the top

Next I'm going to use the medium size which is Midnight Revelry.

 Midnight Revelry looks like a beautiful night sky and then our White Out stars.

 Because the Midnight Revelry and the White Out are both larger pieces they

Clean all of your margins and we're ready to pick up the Hummingbird.

 Dry brush your gel brush out on your table towel to get as much of the

 over the nail and it will deposit itself in the tiny little gaps left

 of shimmer as well as adding a little bit of color as a true night sky a lot

 coat to your design and you have a beautiful night sky that was quick and

 Now that is an alcoholic beverage and I can't give you any substitution for the ingredients

 It's going to have amaretto and it's going to have brandy and it's going to have ice

 cream and I chose it because it's summertime and people like drinks that have some coolness

 Now I've had this recipe a long, long time and I got on the internet just to check and

 see if this is the way everybody's making it or what because I don't do that much bartending.

 But I found out that amaretto breeze can be made of many different things.

 In fact, I did find it with amaretto and rum sometimes, amaretto and vodka sometimes, and

 sometimes instead of ice cream I found pineapple juice and that would be nice and cooling and

 Some had cream cheese and I may be mentioning some things that you're familiar with in an

 amaretto breeze but some people put fruits from blackberries to kiwi.

 It seems like anything goes for amaretto breeze on the internet as long as it has amaretto

 So I'm going to give you my recipe because it's just so simple and it is a nice cooling

 It's one pint and I've let it sit out for probably 20 minutes or so just so I'd be able

 So one pint and Rick picked this up and it's called double vanilla.

 So I didn't go for really expensive brands or anything like that.

 If it says amaretto on the bottle, it was fine for me and we've had these, you can see,

 So now we put our lid on and we want this to be something of the nature of a smoothie

 or maybe thicker than that, more like a milkshake since it has the ice cream in it.

 But it's going to have this nice flavor so you'll maybe recognize it as an amaretto breeze.

 I think I'll just pulse this and watch it and see what we come up with.

 So I have my favorite Maker's Mark glass out and we're just going to let this go in there.

 You can see what the consistency is and it just makes one fairly large glass so you can

 And you can use a smoothie straw or you could use an ice teaspoon, something like that,

 to dip down and get anything that might still be solid but I think we can drink it like this.

 I don't drink much alcohol but I do like the flavor of amaretto and brandy, which I'm just

 Well, he's been very patient over all these years that I have stood here and made fun

 So I apologize and I want to express my gratitude to all he's done for Betty's Kitchen and thanks

 On this video we're going to be rocking out some pulled pork BBQ mac and cheese.

 So to get started with our mac and cheese here we're going to go ahead and make our

 What we're going to do is cook these down until they're nice and translucent.

 So our onions are translucent I'm going to go ahead and sprinkle in some flour.

 I'm going to go ahead and let this thicken up and start to get nice and thick and bubbly.

 At this point I'm going to go ahead and hit it with just a little bit of salt and pepper.

 What I've got here is some sharp cheddar and I've got some Monterey Jack.

 Alright so to our mixture I'm going to go ahead and add some Burgatoni.

 Alright for our topping here what I've got is some panko breadcrumbs, some pepper jack

 I've got the Traeger heated up to 325 with some mesquite wood in there.

 I'll give this about 35-40 minutes until it's nice and bubbly and golden brown.

 And uh, I know I said I was only going to do one more unboxing for February, but now

 Disney DVD, Disney Big Hero 6, Disney Fast Play, with a little Baymax.

 The DVD includes bonus extras of Feast, a 3-actical short, Big Animator 6, the characters

 behind the characters, meet the artists who bring the movie's colorful, quirky team to life.

 Inside we get a Disney Movie Award code thing to unlock it and redeem it.

 As you know, or maybe you don't know, I use henna to color my hair.

 Whenever you're buying henna, you want to make sure you get 100% pure henna.

 That information will be at the bottom of this particular video.

 You can use the other brands, but I just like using the pure lemon juice.

 For my hair, I have medium length hair when it is straightened.

 I just want to take a minute to show you how to drain the oil out of your pump.

 This is with the cat company and when you have a pump like this they recommend that

 And that was recommended by the cat pump specialist that I spoke with.

 If you're using an alternative you're going to want to change it every 300 hours.

 What you're going to be using is a ISO 68 30 weight non-detergent pump oil.

 Cat pump sells that but if you're going to use an alternative make sure it fits those

 You just want to make sure you have something to drain it into.

 But cat makes an attachment that you can screw into the bottom of your pump and it's an oil

 If you don't have a cat pump I'm sure that you can call that company and get it from

 And if you have a different pump make sure that you check with their specifications as

 far as what kind of oil to use and how often you should change your oil.

 But with the cat pump what you do is there should be a nut right under there.

 And then I tip my pressure washer a little bit to make sure that all the oil is out.

 And also there is a, underneath this if I was to unscrew it again, there is an o-ring

 If there's any oil leaking then you can just change that o-ring and it should stop the

 Alright, now that you've got that good and snug you're going to want to undo the top.

 Check with your company, with your specific pump company to make sure of how much oil

 You just take this, put yourself a little thing there and then you just take and pour

 Fill it up to where the requirement is and then make sure all your seals are good.

 As you can see there, if all that's good just screw this back in and you're ready to go.

 Hi, I'm going to show you how to set the correction factor for the Pro Euler electronic

 Well, this procedure is needed for all bike with electronic speedometers.

 I'm going to start with aligning the valve with some recognizable position.

 And it shows you the correction factor error, which means it is not set yet.

 First I'm going to enter the program mode by pushing these two buttons simultaneously.

 I'm going to check if it's in Hall Effect mode, which is Electronic Speedo, and re-entering

 I'm scrolling through the menu until I reach OT, which is the signal counter.

 With 10 rotations of the wheel, it means the correction factor is 10, which is close to

 I'm pushing these two buttons to store it as correction factor.

 I'm returning to the menu, scrolling down to saving, entering the saving mode, holding

 If I'm entering the programming mode, this is where the correction factor is stored.

 I use a muddler, but you can use anything possibly to crush the watermelon and turn

 Try to fill your shaker or anything you shake it with as much as you can.

 To your glass, any kind of glass, highball, raw glass, with ice, as much as you can.

 As far as I'm concerned, every day in a camper van should be an adventure.

 So today I'm going to try and make an adventure out of doing something really boring, shopping

 So what we're going to do is cook something and get the ingredients for something that's

 free, is easy to make, hard to spoil and it requires very little washing up, which as

 This very simple recipe needs just a few things that you should have in your store cupboard.

 Ginger, chilli, garlic, a few fresh herbs and some coconut milk and a bucket.

 God what an amazing day and it's just a fantastic day to come down here and do some mussel picking.

 We've picked a beach that's really clean, it's far away from rivers and estuaries and

 we've got a low spring tide so we'll be able to get to the biggest and juiciest mussels

 and to be honest it's my favourite foraging food, absolutely wonderful.

 So what we're looking for are the juiciest, plumpest mussels that are as close to the

 low tide mark as possible without seaweed or barnacles or anything on them because that

 I have to say this is one of my favourite activities, it's something we do as a family

 I've been collecting mussels from this beach for about nearly 15 years and I've not killed

 You don't have to dive to the supermarket to get it, you don't have to worry about where

 it comes from, you know that the sea here is as clean as it's possible to get and it's

 I've de-bearded all the mussels, put them in a bucket with some fresh water and a little

 What the vinegar does is it helps the mussels to spit out all the grit and sand and stuff

 We've got chilli, garlic, ginger, spring onions, loads and loads of coriander, a little bit

 You'll notice that we've got basil, I'm going to use basil today as well as the coriander.

 It's not in the campervan cookbook recipe but it just adds a little extra herby something

 Anyone could make it, not many people could screw it up, although we'll give it a good

 So what I'm going to do is just put the ginger and the chillies, beautiful posh shop coconut

 So only about half an hour ago they were on the rocks having a lovely afternoon in the

 Along comes a bloke and his cameraman, pulls them from the very rock they were living on,

 Look at that beautiful, plump, English mussels, fresh from the sea.

 The pot I'm going to use is a readily available pot from Radio Shack.

 It's going to have to be modified in order to go into the case, but they do work rather well.

 And I've already unsoldered the old jittery pot, the original one from Atari.

 On the Player 2 potentiometer, the yellow wire again is the 5 volt supply.

 And then the purple wire is the signal wire going back to the Atari.

 You'll notice the threaded area on the old pot is much larger than on the new pot.

 So in order for this new pot to work, we have to compensate for that.

 Line up the top of the threads of the new pot with the top of the shaft of the old pot.

 And then you're going to want to mark with a felt tip pen on this shaft at the top of the threads of the old pot.

 Here the top of the shaft has been marked, so I'm going to cut out my half moon.

 When using the Dremel tool, be sure you have a heat sink on it to prevent damage to the pot.

 Here's the new pot soldered into the harness, ready to reassemble.

 Sometimes it can be really useful to mount a hand drill horizontally to use it as a grinder, lathe, disc sander or whatever.

 In this video I want to show you how to make a fixture that allows you that.

 First you wanna measure the diameter of your hand drills mounting collar.

 Then take a piece of some sort of plywood and draw a matching circle on it.

 Because I do not have a matching drill bit I remove the material using a jig saw and then file the hole to its correct dimensions.

 It would have been a lot smarter to actually drill the holes before separating the parts.

 This drill is a especially crappy one and it does not want to stay in the locked on position.

Today we're going to do an upgrade or a swap out for a hard drive

 on one of the older PS3s and this is basically what the hard drive looks like.

It's the type of hard drive that you put in laptops and this is a 2.5

The one that we're going to be putting in today is a 250 gig and this will work on

 the 250 gig and then above that is the speed, the revolutions per minute of the drive itself.

 That's how fast you get that thing spinning in there when it's trying to read the data.

This is going to be right underneath the warranty sticker, which you

 don't want to remove and to do this, you do not need to remove.

 where you pop in your screwdriver and this little flap comes right out, nice and easy.

 And then inside of there, you're going to find the hard drive casing itself.

 actually deal with the hard drive right away, you're dealing with this casing, which has

So we take our Phillips and we put in this little blue screw and you

If you're doing this with 60 gig or 20, it's going to look a little different.

 This side will open the same and you'll have that little blue screw, but you will not have

 about here, the 60, the 20, it will slide, it unlocks, it slides over and then you pull

And when you put the new one in, you push it in and slide it over and it locks

This one is much simpler, it just slides straight in and you'll feel it once

Okay, so now that we got that out, turn our attention to the hard drive

 casing and it's going to have four silver screws that are on the sides.

 two on the left side, two on the right side and then this is going to be the front.

 one out, slip this one in, put those four screws back in place and then we'll be ready

 about when you're doing this is hopefully you're doing it before you have a whole bunch

 of data on your hard drive because unless you have a spare PS3 to swap data on or you

 have an external hard drive to remove your data to or a really sizable USB, it's going

 to be very difficult to get this data off of there before you move it because once you

So several things you're going to want to do before you remove this, you

 want to make sure all your trophies are updated from this hard drive, you want to make sure

 that you've gotten off any, if you have the PSN network, the PS Plus, then you can move

 the unmovable game saves to that, for example, Mass Effect 2, Assassin's Creed, some of those

 saves you cannot move to a USB stick or an external hard drive.

 get the new hard drive in and format it and load it up, then you can unload them back

 out the old one, put in the new one, line it up the same exact way so the back faces

 the back where you pull it out, the front should have these nice little connectors in

 the front and you should be able to read it holding it like that.

 holes and just start putting the screws back in, the little silver ones, you should have

 Okay, so music that you can recopy from someplace else is no big deal.

 install data that you have to do, so you have to re-install that because that's all stored

Once you get this in there and fire up, it's going to recognize that

 that hard drive is gone and you're going to have to format this one and then it'll let

 you get started rebuilding, reconnecting to the network, plugging in your information,

If you try to take your other hard drive and put it into another

 PS3, it will format it before you can use it, so all that information will be lost,

 it's back in there, it's secure, do the opposite of what we did earlier.

Screw that little screw back in, you don't want to make it too tight,

You plug her back up, start her up, and like I said, it'll ask for

 any questions, message me, you can email me at ben at prayercanhelp.com or you can

 look me up on the PlayStation Network once you get back online.

 So just like before I'm going to flip it upside down, get one of these, actually, yeah, just

 OK, so a bearing in the back, bearing in the front, drive shaft, slide it through, little

 Slide the drive shafts together, insert the pivot ball, start screwing it in.

 And just like with the front, cycle back and forth until it's been screwed in all the way.

 And now we can flip it upside down and install the rear skid plate.

 And just like with the front, it has these neat little grooves that hold the bars into

 Now that that's taken care of, it's time to flip it back over and work on the push rods.

 So the push rod itself gets fed through the arm and to the base down here and is held

 And then the top of it gets held into the rocker with another screw.

 And now we can go ahead and attach this to the shock using yet one more screw.

 The wing mount is held together with two screws, both located on the left side.

 Once that's together, it attaches to the back of the body mount with four screws needed.

 With all four screws in, there's one little thing I should tell you about.

 The rear bumper goes right here, but like I mentioned with the front bumper, I am not

 going to buy it because I think it would just be a waste of money.

 So I'm just going to get the RPM rear bumper once Jester is put together.

 In order to install this, I have to slide this plate into that groove.

 And as you can see, it has these extra little caps on the side that keeps the pins for the

 Now like with the front, there's three screws that go on the top.

 Alright, with that done, now we can go ahead and install the tie rods.

 And then a screw goes through the rear body mount, through the tie rod and into the differential

 The other side goes straight to the axle carrier and is held in place with one screw.

 I'm just going to be installing the Philips Crystal Vision Ultra and the Ninja 300.

 Alright, so the first thing you want to do is you want to kind of go in here and you

 So I'm going to take that out and then while you remove it, there's going to be a plug.

 So you remove that, there's a wire, this wire right here, goes through the rubber and plugs

 So you want to take off this rubber and then you'll, or plugs into the bulb and you just

 So you can see there's a little plug right there and the bulb is right there.

 So I'm just going to put my hand there and check this out, check this out.

 My hands are numb so I don't know if I'm being burned right now.

 As a precaution, just in case you don't know this, you actually don't want to touch the

 from your skin will actually cause excess heat and blah blah blah.

 Alright so as a note, see how there's not a complete circle up on the top?

 So now we're just going to move that clip, put the rubber thing, well plug it back in,

 put the rubber thing on, and then we will do the exact same for the high beams.

 Alright so the verdict, well let's just, alright so this, kind of that yellowish looking light

 So the light over here was the color of the stock bulbs and that's pretty, I mean it's

 But I'm going to go hop on, go for a ride, and you guys can compare the video clips from

 Today I'm going to show you how to build strength in your wrists using weights and I'm going

 to teach you how to do the exercise properly so you build the strength so that it affects

 So you'll gain strength on your bench, on your chest press, on your bicep curls, your

 To begin with, there are a lot of mistakes people do when they're doing wrist curls.

 So the focus here is going to be on lifting a weight and gradually increasing your strength

 You're going to limit your range of motion a little and you're going to focus on the

 And you're also not going to do too many sets because too many sets is just, it's only going

 And like I said, there's all those wires, tendons, ligaments, they're going to be burnt

 So you will notice a burning out on your wrists the following day or a couple of days later

 when you're doing chest because you need all those wires to be at full strength when you're

 Lift heavy, keep it short, keep it high intensity and cut it there.

 First and foremost, when you're doing wrists, obviously it's very important to warm up.

 So basically the warm up is, it's not too complicated, it's just you're lifting a weight

 that you can easily handle and you're going to be doing the same motion as the final movement

 So you're just going to pick it up, pick up a weight and just practicing the exercise

 until your wrists are all warm and you can do this two, three, four times before your

 You can do a little bit of range, you know, if you really want to with the lighter weight

 but as I said, on the final delivery we're going to be cutting the range.

 Now I'm going to show you a kind of a fast track way to gain wrist strength.

 A lot of people make the mistake in the gym of using a full range of motion when they're

 doing wrist workouts and what they're actually doing is they're limiting how much they can

 The wrist, like I said before, has a lot of wires and there's a lot of ligaments and tendons

 So if you're going to be doing a full range of motion, you're going to be putting a lot

 What I suggest is you cut the range just a little bit and focus more on the weight and

 So what we're going to do is instead of doing a full range coming all the way down to there,

 we're going to drop to where your arm is half, is hanging evenly off the bench and we're

 So we're not going to be putting strain by coming all the way down.

 So try and hold the dumbbell in the middle of the dumbbell and throw it down.

 If you're doing more than six, then you can up the weight and you're going to build that

 You don't want to do too many reps because too many reps is going to burn your wrists

 I notice a lot of people in the gym, when they're doing wrist curls, they use a barbell

 with two hands to wrist curl and they'll be doing full range and they'll be doing all

 I don't recommend doing a barbell wrist curl with both arms just because it's not as concentrated.

 You can really pile on the weight as I demonstrated before with one dumbbell onto each wrist at

 You want to keep it short and heavy and that way you'll gain that strength.

 Another thing you can do just as a finisher with the wrists is grab one of these.

 It's basically just a grip crusher and all you do is you grab it and it can help increase

 Wrist, forearm and grip, they're all linked to how much power you gain in your grip control

 You can get heavier ones which are harder to crush but just for warm up purposes these

 Even when I'm doing a chest day I'll grab one of these and I'll just warm up my hands

 because my hands are going to give me that strength to hold the bar which is what I want

 Hi everybody, so in my quest to find the ultimate garlic I have like now maybe 20 garlic presses

 and today I'm going to review the quick and easy Zyliss garlic press and I gotta tell

 you something there's nothing quick or easy with this garlic press.

 The only problem is that, not only problem, but one problem is that these knobs just don't

 Another big issue, very big issue, is that the screen is not flush so it's very hard

 Alright, so now that you've seen the device up close, let me do a demonstration.

 And by the way, just for comparison, these are the different holes in the three Suzie's

 And this one is just the regular classic Suzie, which I do not recommend.

 So I'm going to put two cloves just so there's enough meat there to press out.

 I'm not sure if you can notice, but look how much gap there is right there.

 The problem is that the garlic also presses from the outside and just goes outside.

 So in this case it kind of did get aligned, but in all of my tests it didn't.

 So let's see how much of garlic there is inside here that did not get processed.

 You know, I'm not going to even attempt to do it with the wrapper on or the skin on because

 If you enjoyed this video, please, please thumb up, subscribe, and I'll catch you in

 Jigsaws are a great tool to have around your house because they're great for cutting arcs.

 Hi, I'm Mark Donovan from HomeEditionPlus.com and today I'm going to give you a few tips

 There are basically two types of jigsaws that you can choose from.

They're excellent for portability and getting into tight corners

 utipically more power, anywhere from 3 to 6 amps and can do a larger project and can

 One of the most important factors you want to look for when selecting a jigsaw is the

 the cut and as a result we get a finer and cleaner and more controlled cut.

 In addition, some models have an orbital cut where the blade goes not only up and down

 but side to side and that allows for a faster but more rougher cut.

 Another important feature to look for is an adjustable sole or foot plate on the jigsaw.

 This allows you to be able to cut 0 to 45 degree angle cuts with the saw.

 Another key feature to look for is a quick release capability of the blade itself.

 This particular older model requires an allen wrench and it's time consuming to loosen up

 So look for the ones that have a quick release capability that will speed up the job when

 Another key feature to look for is a stabilizer for the blade itself.

 Also some of the newer models actually have fan or vacuums on the front of the saw so that

 it blows away or sucks away any of the sawdust in front of the saw so you can maintain a

 There are many different types of jigsaw blades to choose from but the first thing you need

 What we see here are a couple of different variations of wood blades with coarse number

 of teeth per inch and then a more finer amount for a cleaner cut.

We also have multi-purpose blades that can cut wood or metal and then

 we've got some specialty blades that are used for knife edge type cuts or actually

 When using a jigsaw it's always important to let the saw actually do the work.

 you're cutting through the wood or material, let the blade do the work and don't try to

 push too hard otherwise you're just going to wind up breaking the bit.

 So those are some basic tips on using jigsaws and what to look for when buying one.

 If you have other home improvement questions, visit us at HomeEditionPlus.com today.

Gemma's Art Needlework and www.babecrafts.com are happy to present How to Crochet Buttons

 In this video I will be showing you a creative way to use your mixed button stash that may

 be low to find a sift through but just doesn't have 5 or 6 lookalikes.

 So we will be making crocheted coverings to fit around any button using simple crochet

 stitches which is different from the typical crochet button that is filled with crochet

 The result will be an intricate and detailed crocheted closure that can be sewn to crocheted,

 knitted or sewn garments and objects, all with a minimum amount of supplies.

 For this project you will need 1 round button in any size or material, crochet thread in

 size 20, steel crochet hook in size 10, tapestry needle, and sewing needle and thread.

 I like to use small thread and hook to give the appearance of fabric, but really you can

 To make the magic loop, take the yarn tail and lay it over your index finger and wrap

 Slide the crochet hook under the 2 loops and grab and pull the strand over your index finger

 Now slide the loops off your finger while holding onto your chain 1.

 With that done, you will now close the magic loop by first pulling on one of the loops.

 One will make the yarn tail shorter while the other will make the second loop smaller.

 A round made up of 10 single crochet that has no hole in the center.

 Which is a common problem when starting rounds without a magic loop.

 You may want to add a stitch marker like a safety pin to the beginning stitch.

 Repeat button edge round until you are half way to the center of the button back.

 Remove the button and using your tapestry needle weave in the center yarn tail.

 Repeat decrease round until you are about 2 rounds away from center.

 Tie off and using tapestry needle weave thread through remaining stitches of last round made

 by going from front to back of first stitch and back to front of next stitch.

 With sewing thread go up and down through button holes so covering will not shift.

 You can sew the button on like a shank button or if your button has holes sew through the

 Welcome back to another in-home diagnostic video brought to you by appliancevideo.com.

 All right, so we used the multimeter to check the continuity, flathead screwdriver there

 to get the terminals off of the switches, the 516 step driver to remove the switch,

 and I used my AC, my outlet voltage tester just to verify we have proper electricity

 So what we're going to do just to verify the complaint, just turn it on.

 All right, so the next thing I'm going to do, the easiest thing for me is I'm going

 I'm going to remove the plug, plug it in, and if the two orange lights here light up,

 I'm just going to take my voltage tester here, insert it, and we have the two on the

 right that are illuminating, which if we look at the key on here, it shows that at the very

 And now I can see our lid switch, which is located right in the center down here.

 Now visibly, just by looking, it appears that maybe our fuse is bad.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm just going to disconnect the wire, and I'm just going

 And I'm going to then put the, at each end of the fuse, no continuity at all.

 All right, so we're going to go ahead and replace our lid switch.

 Now here we have one 516th screw that we're going to be able to then remove the whole

 Now this here, in order to remove it, we have to tilt it up and untuck it because it has

 So when our lid opens and closes, it will go front and backwards.

 Those are the two switches that have to be actuated by that little lever that's connected

 So when we position our new switch, we're going to have to open and close the lid and

 make sure we hear each switch click to know that we have it in the right position or else

 I'm not going to hook up the wires until I know that I have the switch properly installed.

 And we can hear the two clicks that know that at least the lever is in between the two switches.

 Now I'm going to pull it up into the area that I think it's going to need to go.

 While I'm holding the switch, if I let go, you'll see the switch will go backwards.

 So I'm going to hold it into the position that I think it should be in.

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to close the control panel so that way I can open and

 And then that way I can listen to make sure it engages both switches like it should.

 Alright, so I'm going to go ahead and just put the control panel in position here.

 Not going to fasten it down because I need to open it up to connect our wiring.

 So obviously we can tell that I guessed right as far as the position.

 Alright, so I'm going to get all my wiring here that I had pushed to the side.

 And I'm just going to start with whatever is easiest for me as far as what I remembered.

 I used my camera on my phone and I took a picture so that way I couldn't get any of

 And that way at least I have a reference for where everything is going to go.

 Alright, so we're going to go ahead and close our control panel up.

 And I'm going to secure it with the two screws I removed earlier.

 And I'm going to go ahead and just pull up the knob and turn it on.

 Then we'll put it in the spin cycle and verify that the unit will spin and drain out.

 Thank you for watching another quality in-home diagnostic video

 You know, I love pretty much anything buffalo chicken flavored.

 So these crunchy buffalo chicken cups are a great appetizer for any game day get together.

 Now notice I put my finger on the blade post like that because I don't want to get any

 Now what I'm going to do is put this into the wells of the deluxe mini muffin pan.

 I'm going to take the mini tart shaper and press these down a little bit.

 I'm going to put these in a 375 degree oven for about eight to ten minutes until they

 I'm just going to put the rest of our cheese here into the batter bowl.

 Now I'm going to need about a cup of finely diced cooked chicken.

 Now I'm going to thinly slice some green onions and get about a tablespoon of the tops and

 I like to leave the ends on there to kind of hold on to them so I can cut all the way

 So what we're going to do is add two tablespoons of sour cream and two tablespoons of hot cayenne

 So this is what you would typically use to make buffalo chicken wings.

 So generally on these bottles, if you see instructions for making buffalo chicken wings,

 Now I'm going to heat this in the microwave for like 30 or 60 seconds because I like the

 It's very important to let these rest for three to four minutes because everything gets

 Now that they've released, what I like to do is just kind of turn the pan a little to

 We're just going to take about a tablespoon and help it right on top.

Then you're going to place the dough in a bowl, spray a little cooking

 oil on the top, and cover with saran wrap for an hour and a half.

 risen, you are going to remove the saran wrap and you are going to beat down your dough.

 of your oil by putting a little piece of dough in it and seeing how quickly it browns if

Now take a pinch of dough and you're going to form little round saucers.

 to the oil, and you're going to cook them for about two to three minutes on each side.

 your piece of fried dough pizza bottom and add some pizza sauce.

 visit www.tracywilliams.com or follow me on Twitter and Pinterest.

 Yes, I am an Academy Director for a hairdressing academy in Costa Mesa for Tony and Guy.

 And we have an avant-garde competition so the students can use whatever is in their imagination

 and create big hair or different kinds of shapes in the hair, creative hair.

 And then they get to compete with their looks that they finish.

 And you actually specialize in avant-garde, editorial, and fantasy hair.

 You know what, I think that getting a little bit outside the box, outside of what we normally do day-to-day in the salon,

 So we're going to take a look at the process that went into making the birdhouse nest that is my hair,

 and that is making me a rebel for the cause that is fighting for the revolution.

 And then we're going to come back and ask Rachel some questions.

 Step 4, continue with your pivoting sections, working all the way around the head shape,

 The goal here is to have a circular section with the hair wrapped around the head as flat as possible.

 Okay, so for those people at home who want to take, you know, hair is untamed,

 and they want to tame it, and they want to do avant-garde hair in their second month,

 How can they apply to Tony and Guy and, you know, become hair artists like you?

 We have academies all over the country, so I'm sure everyone will be able to find one, you know, close by.

 We've had a lot of fun here at Tony and Guy, and it just makes me feel so fancy.

 Hi, I'm Karina from LatestHairStyles.com and today I'm here to show you three different

 So if you're curious on how I style my hair in three different ways, go ahead and stay

 Start with your hair in a high ponytail centered in the top of your head.

 Braid your hair donut down and around the ponytail and then bring your hair forward

 Then take another hair elastic, wrap it over the hair donut, and then create a simple three

 stand braid wrapping around the outside of the bun to cover the ponytail that we put

 Once all the hair has been pinned into place, go ahead and smooth everything down with hair

 To begin this look, we're going to use the hair donut in a way that's a little bit unusual.

 So separate your hair in the crown of your head, place your donut, in this case I'm using

 Take a small section of hair and wrap it over the donut and secure it just underneath with

 I place one bobby pin in on either side to make sure that it's secure.

 You want to make sure the sections that are closest to the hair donut are the strongest

 Then pull the top of your hair back into a bouffant style, kind of like a half up style.

 This might be easier if you have thicker hair or thinner hair, you might find that you need

 Then take the bottom section and twist it up towards the top section.

 Once they meet, twist it all the way to the end and then begin to form a bun.

 It's very free form, it doesn't have to be perfect, this can be either messier or neater,

 Then bobby pin the bun, again to whatever tightness or looseness that you desire.

 Position your bangs or fringe however you like them to lay and then set with hairspray.

 I like to spray it and then use my hand to follow it to smooth my hair into place.

 To achieve this style, again we're going to be using the hair donut or sock in a way that's

 So I've sectioned off the top of my, the front of my hair and I'm just eyeballing it depending

 on how much I want to leave forward and where I want most of my volume.

 I'm taking a section and again clipping it over the hair donut or the sock into place,

 and then putting a bobby pin in on either side to keep it secure.

 Again, in the sections closest to the hair donut or sock, make sure that you are doing

 Make sure you're backcombing on the sides, just make sure you're getting the whole top.

 Looks a little crazy here, but I assure you it will look good in the end.

 Smooth out your backcombing so that you don't have any lumps or bumps.

 Pull the rest of your hair into a ponytail, a nice sleek, smooth ponytail, making sure

 In these tutorials I have been using a white sock so you can easily see where I'm placing

 it since I have dark hair, but in real life I would use a sock or a hair donut that's

 Adjust your backcombing in volume so that it's flattering to your face and so that it's

 In the back, take your ponytail, gather the ends together, and then wrap them up kind

 And then bobby pin the ends of your hair to the ponytail elastic.

 Again, I'm putting bobby pins in on either side to keep the loop very secure and polished.

 If you have thinner hair, you might only need to use one bobby pin.

 Then, pull either side of the ponytail like you're going to tighten it, except don't pull

 Make sure that the hair is staying looped and then bobby pin the sides, kind of flaring

 If you have any pieces that have come loose during this process, I just hairspray them

 I don't want to create any ripples in the hair by placing bobby pins in.

 Hi, I'm Colleen Towner with Waking Up Vegan and today I'm going to show you how to make

 But with an active family of six, I've got way too much laundry to do.

 And with the amount of money we spend on clothing, bedding, towels and sport uniforms, I take

 I've been using Tide for years, but with the arrival of our high efficiency front loaders,

 we need the low sud variety and that's getting more and more expensive.

 But I'm willing to pay for the brand that works because I need my clothes to last as

 We took our kids to Florida for spring break and I met another mom on the beach who makes

 She was so cool and I thought she was normal until she handed me a little baggie full of

 But I used the detergent that night and I was shocked at how well it worked.

 She told me to only use one tablespoon per load and that baggie lasted me over a month.

 Once it was gone though, I'm not the type of person to make my own laundry detergent,

 So when you do the math, a full scoop will run you 50 cents a load and that's a lot of

 In 15 minutes of my time, I'm also reducing cardboard packaging, plastic, and reducing

 Most recipes I've seen call for ivory soap, which is only 50 cents for three bars.

 But ivory soap contains palm oil and palm oil is being produced at the expense of our

 I'm not casting a yes vote with my purchase, no matter how cheap it is.

 It's about a dollar a bar and it's as good or better than commercial stain removers.

 But it's a little harsh, so if you have babies or people with sensitive skin, Castile is

 So I keep both on hand because if I have a really tough stain, I use the Fell's Nectar.

 So buy seven bars of soap and you won't have to do this again for a long time.

 You might even buy some baggies and give the gift that keeps on giving.

 Put a cup of the Borax, the washing agent, and your bar of soap into a high-speed blender

 Put the lid on and process it until you're happy with the consistency.

 If you'd like to see more of my do-it-yourself ideas or read my vegan and gluten-free recipes,

 This is a recipe for a potato and leek soup that I made last week.

 recipe online and the original is linked below the video, but this version

 salt according to your taste, black pepper for garnish, and sour cream also

 cups of water for boiling the potatoes, the leftover potato stock, a nonstick

 for cooking the leeks, a blender, and a larger pot for preparing the soup.

 the potatoes in large cubes and boil them with a teaspoon of salt until

I like to use this time to chop up my leeks and smash and chop the

Next, heat up the olive oil in a nonstick and add the bay leaf, garlic, and

Give the leeks a stir and add a little salt plus the rosemary and

Keep stirring to combine the dry herbs, then cover the leeks and allow

 The leeks will now have reduced in quantity and you should be sure to

 quantity of salt according to your taste and give everything a final mix.

 your soup by stirring in some sour cream and sprinkling some black pepper.

 enjoyed mine with a side of garlic toast, but you could add croutons on top if you

 The recipe that I found was really simple, so I added the dry herbs that I

 you could use milk or cream in addition to the potato stock or even instead of

 Hi, in this video I will show you how to do the long tail cast on.

 For an easy teaching and learning I will use yarn 6 and needles size 15.

 You can take the measurements with a knitting gauge if you have one.

 With your right hand take the loop, now turn around, place your thumb and index finger,

 then take the working yarn with your fingers and pass it through the loop.

 This is the working yarn and this is the tail yarn, it is closer to you.

 Put the thumb and index finger between the tail yarn and the working yarn.

 Now with the ring and pinky finger you are going to hold the rest of the yarn.

 Now with the needle go under the front first tail yarn, then go over the working yarn.

 Bring the working yarn back to the second tail yarn and first tail yarn.

 With your thumb finger tie the stitch by pulling the tail yarn.

 Under the tail yarn, over, bring the loop between the tail yarn, let go the tail yarn

 Under the tail yarn, over the working yarn, bring the loop between the tail yarn, let

 In my next video how to knit a stitch I will show you how to hide the rest of the tail

 Just doing a quick side by side with the Apple Cinema Display and iMac.

 So I will probably actually put the Apple Cinema Display back on the mounting arm for

 That way I can get it nice and lined up without too much issue and it will also make my desk

 But this is actually just going to be a quick video of how to go through doing that.

 Hey guys, to take the Apple Cinema Display off the mounting arm, first thing you need

 Now there's a little give way right here where you slide the card in.

 Now Apple actually gives you the Torx screw you need to take them out and I'm just going

 Run the cable back through it because this cable to my knowledge doesn't come out.

 And one thing with this one you actually need to make sure you do tighten it down reasonably

 well because there are two side slots here and here that you have to fit two other screws

 And if this thing isn't tightened down pretty well you will not be able to line it up properly.

 Just put them in finger tight to start just so you know you can get both of them in there

 And these are actually a hex head so you actually do have a separate, a different screwdriver

 But like I was saying the main thing is just to make sure you have this well enough you

 can eyeball like just if you think you're getting it too tight just eyeball it and see

 There actually is a nice little soft plastic rubber type thing that sits between this and

 I've actually already had it assembled for a while and the biggest thing is just to make

 Because the last thing you want to do is get this all mounted then have to take it

 But once you get this on it's just four screws that you actually just finger tighten.

 Alright guys the arm is on and so now I'm just going to walk...

 Well, first make sure you put back in the power adapter if you did choose to take it

 I always take it out just so it's one less cable in the way when pulling off the mount,

 But once you have all the cables in hand and the monitor in hand just pick it up and if

 you do have the Ergotron it actually just sits on there really simple.

 You just have to get it lined up and it slides right down in place like so.

 Nope, maybe just 180 because it goes all the way up and stops pretty close to facing you.

 It has about a 12 inch up and down raise and you can also adjust the height on the

 But that's just a quick demonstration as to how to mount the Apple Cinema Display and

 Hi, I'm Karla and today we are going to learn the quickest and the easiest way to prepare

Many Filipinos are already experts in preparing quinoa but for those in the urban

In the absence of tuba, you may use lime soda like 7-up or Sprite as an alternative

 You can either use natural flavor or super hot depending on your taste.

 No need to add tabon-tabon for quinilo mix already has it as its main ingredient.

 You may garnish it with lime, green onions or tomatoes depending on your preference.

 I've already taught you how to do enchiladas sauce but this one is a little bit different.

 And we're going to use this to do another video to make garnaches and gachos.

 Remember to go check out my video on enchiladas sauce because today the sauce on the menu

 So I have my sauce pan, I put my tomato sauce in it already, I used any old brand, whatever

 is on sale for tomato sauce and my El Pato because I like the heat from it.

 I have it in a 2 quart pot and I'm going to add salt and pepper to it after I get it on

 And we're just going to stir this on low to make it simmer until the onions are cooked.

 And now we're going to stir this slowly on medium to low heat until the onions are soft.

 And so that's one of the menus that I'm going to teach you because you can also go check

 out my video for refried beans because refried beans and garnaches sauce is all a part of

 The onions are still not soft enough yet to my liking and it's popping too much.

 So what I do is add a little bit of water in there so that we can give it time for the

 So just a little bit of water, we'll stir it again and I think maybe in a couple more

 We can put this on a lot of stuff but in my, check out my video for gachos and for garnaches

 And I do the sauces as individual videos because I want you to be able to just go back and

 look at it real quick to make it because we can use these sauces on different things not

 just on the meal like for garnaches or gelatos and so on and so on.

 So that's why I do them individually so you can go back if I come with a recipe that I'm

 going to make up in the future for instance I'll say go back and look at my video for

 blah blah blah sauce and then you'll be able to go make that one and then we'll make new

 things as we go along because even though this is a lot about Belizean food because

 that's most of the food that I know how to make, this show is called the Bear Pantry

 Show for a reason because we're going to be doing other foods in the future to where we

 can build on things that we already made because who says we have to define ourselves inside

 Anyways, thank you for watching, thank you for subscribing and until I see you again

Today we're making a spiked lemonade with one of my favorite Tennessee whiskeys.

 This cocktail is named the Lynchburg Lemonade after Jack Daniels, whose home is Lynchburg, Tennessee.

 Now there's a number of recipes out there, but I'm going to show you the one that I like best.

 I've seen a number of recipes on a number of drink shows using triple sec and Sprite in addition to sometimes bottled simple sour.

 Test Lynchburg Lemonade recipe with JD triple sec, Sprite, simple sour.

 It's not natural, it doesn't taste like lemonade, and in my opinion it just tastes like sugary garbage.

 This tastes like Spike Lemonade, whereas those other recipes kind of taste like super sweet lemonade.

 Whereas those other recipes kind of taste like super sweet crap.

 Be sure to follow us on Facebook, Twitter, Pinterest, and Instagram.

 And please remember to always drink responsibly because everybody likes to make friends.

 for that strawberries, 1 teaspoon of facial cream, any one you use.

 all of you use something, you buy some some cream from store too.

 this cup just pressing it like that because you cannot do it in a blender

 because it has knife which is from metal or iron and when anything metal

 touches the strawberries is just destroy the vitamin C which strawberry

So all that we need for that add teaspoon of honey and here teaspoon

 just do it like that faster and easier and facial cream I'm gonna use this

 spoon 1 teaspoon of facial cream I'm gonna add there and just mix everything

 you see I'm mixing it with metal not metallic spoon sometimes I forget just

 mix everything and apply it on your skin for 15 minutes and then just wash it

 with warm water and then wash it with cool water never forget to wash it with

 cool water because strawberry also can be used as a scrub strawberry by itself

 can be used as a scrub and strawberry moisturizes nourishes the skin and also

 it's suitable for all type of skin and for aging skin too so wash it with cool

 water help to close the pores and I forgot to say something this strawberry

 will prevent and will help you to prevent acne and pimples I'm sure

 everybody knows about honey and facial cream everyone uses for himself

 I'm sure they choose already one and always stuck to this cream so you can just

 add it to the strawberry thank you for watching this video and watch my other

 I'm Toby Walker and in this set of lessons I'm going to show you how to take these, well,

 robotic, boring sometimes, scales and really spice them up and turn them into some beautiful,

 interesting improvisational solos and don't let the idea of improvising scare you.

 And for the E chord we're going to do this for, let's try four measures of just a shuffle

 Now what I'm doing here is, let me describe what I'm doing for them.

 I'm really just kind of playing on the sixth and fifth string here and I'm just strumming

 down on those two and using my first finger on the B note and then coming in on the C

 From here into that D shape, into the C shape, into the A shape and then I'm going to come

 She told me about Popin' Cookin' and I think we're going to try it out.

 I don't think that you do so we're going to try to figure it out and see if we can make

 We're also going to do another box of Popin' Cookin' over on Jen's channel so make sure

 Well it's just like you cook it in the oven, there's plastic in it.

 Well I don't have high hopes after the video we just did for us.

 A lot of sachets that look like they come in packets of noodles.

 So, yeah, let's mix them up and then put them in the microwave and bring it out or something?

 This is definitely strawberry and I don't know if we need to cook it.

 I think you need a wedding cake decorator to be able to do this one.

 To be fair, you're actually, like this diagram, you're doing the exact same thing.

 Make sure you go over to Jen's channel and watch our challenge over there where we tasted,

 Howdy, this is Daniel with Raws and Regs and welcome to another tie-dye tutorial.

 In this video I'm going to dye this with no rubber bands and I'm folding it in

This is a 100% cotton soda ash shirt and I am folding it in half first and

 then I'm just gonna roll it up and I'm starting from the top and I'm working my

 way down and now I'm just going to knot it up and so here is our our finished

 refrigerator tray on top of a plastic tub and I have for the most part orange,

 it right here in the center if you will of this fold that's not supposed to have

 the non rubber banded folded shirt and I'm just kind of putting yellow right

 in the center of it right here and I'm just using the rest of my yellow

 basically then I'll be alright so there's all the yellow now I'm going to

 be adding orange and I'm not I'm pretty sure that I will have some yellow on

 this shirt at the end of this dyeing session I don't think that putting the

 yellow on there was in vain or anything it's surprising how much dye you can put

 over another color and still have that initial color show through so I'm going

 to turn it over and I'm just putting some orange on this side of the folded

 non rubber banded shirt that looks good to me now I have some red and I'm gonna

 be putting that on top of the orange and I'll put some black on top of that

 so I'm not going to put as much red as I did orange on the shirt let's get on

 that side now turn it over and put red all over the design on this side even on

 top of the yellow now I have some black I'll be putting black on top of

 everything and I'm just gonna be putting a little bit of black I don't think that

 it's gonna do too much to the design since the design is so thick it will

 just kind of show up on a couple little areas of the the shirt when it's all

 washed out but it's okay it'll give it a nice effect I'll give it more more

 layering and I'm having a little bit of issues getting the dye out but as long as

 I'm squeezing it and shaking it it seems to be correcting itself and coming

 out for a little bit and I'll have to do it again but this is looking pretty good

 here is our folded and dyed non rubber band shirt I'm going to put it in a

 plastic bag and I'll sit for 24 hours and I'll wash it out so thanks for

 Hello, it's Artglasion Commander again and today I'm going to be showing you me as a

 Sith Lord, Darth Christofori, Purple Lightsaber, Booyah, and how to upgrade your R2D2 units.

 As you may have noticed, or not, the old R2D2 units have just a circle of emptiness in the

 Now if you have a cross, you want to take a piece like this, has a stud on the end,

 cut it right about there, so that it gives a little bit of the cross piece, but still

 Alright, now I'm going to show the rest on this because I don't want to cut my Legos.

 You'll need this piece, actually two of it, and two of this, one of these, and one of

 So you put this piece in there, add this, then otherwise it's saying like that and you

 So you want to have its legs bent precisely and it has a third leg now.

 Now for the jetpack thingamajiggy, take this piece and put it on the side.

 Well actually you should put the fire on first, this little orange piece.

 Then you strap it, well not strap it, put it like that and do it symmetrically.

 So like I said, you just have to cut it right about there and it should do.

 I guess it's easier for me to do the inside first and then worry about the

 tried this tool yet, I'm just going to try and shave away this part of the

 anything else, I don't like to turn too fast when it's a new tool because

 you know, I don't want to ruin the bowl after all that work I did.

 And I have the tail stock secured just in case it should let go.

 if you go too aggressive that's where things can happen and you just

 ruin the whole bowl and fly right off the lathe and ruin all that work that you did.

 I'm just going to put a new edge on this tool here and then I'll continue.

 the tailstock away and just do light cuts to get that out of there.

 because I'm always scared that if I should go through the bottom

 Then I'd have to look at a way of patching it, which I'd really rather not do.

 on the bottom and see how much room I have to play with in here before I go from the outer edge

 That's why I always wear my goggles or my face shield because I'm doing a video

 today I'm using goggles so you can hear me talk, but they're shatterproof

 shut the camera off and do a quick measurement and put everything back.

 I came to the conclusion I have at least an inch on the bottom.

 But I still won't be taking off too much because I'm always afraid

 that I'll start getting carried away and next thing you know you've got a hole in the middle.

 All I'm going for for a bottom is just a little bit of a bevel.

 But not the red bean you are familiar with, like Mexican red beans.

 So if you have been to a Korean restaurant, you probably have tried their red bean rice.

 And if you have not yet, today I'm going to show you how to make it.

 It just makes the rice a little bit nutty flavor, but also adds some more protein to your rice.

 First we want to cook the red mung beans, because it takes a little longer to cook it.

 If you have a rice cooker, I'm sure that makes your life a lot easier.

 So like I said, first we're going to add my red mung beans in the pan.

 But like I said, generally speaking, 20 minutes should be good.

 So I turn on the heat, let it boil, and when we come back, we're going to add rice.

 Now the red beans have been boiled for about 20 minutes or 25 minutes.

 I rinse my rice, but it's up to you whether you want to rinse your rice or not.

 And then we're going to turn it down and let it simmer for another 10 minutes.

 So then you can just put it in a bowl and serve with your favorite stir fry.

 Every time I come to visit my family in Ang Thong, I like to meet with Uncle, who is a

 Cooked over hot coal, I just love to watch them pop and crackle while the colours of

 The heat on these grills is so intense, it's amazing how fast they cook.

 A couple of minutes on that side, we've turned them over, and they're beautiful.

 The way the colours change from that vibrant blue to this lovely gold orange, it's a lovely

 Lung's just told me that in a minute he's going to make a Nam Jim dressing, which is

 Amazing to think that you can have two of these fat prawns for just 50 baht.

 So Uncle has brought out the ingredients to make this dressing.

 We've got some coriander, some salt and some sugar, some fresh lime juice and a mixture

 When you're making your own Nam Jim, leave the skin on the garlic.

 Then Lung adds some lime juice or lemon juice would work perfectly well, and then some sugar

 If you don't have white sugar, palm sugar or even brown sugar would work just as well.

 Lung likes to add a little bit of salt and water to his recipe.

 However, you can leave both of these ingredients out and the Nam Jim will taste just as good.

 Give it a little bit of a stir and bring all of the flavours together well and allow that

 There's nothing better than fresh grilled seafood with a Nam Jim sauce.

 Get it right into the Nam Jim dressing and really let the flavours get in there.

 Grilled river prawns at the seafood market right here in Ang Thong.

 Ok, so first of all, I already primed my eyelids with an eyeshadow primer.

 First of all, I'm going to use a cream colored eyeshadow for a base.

 It's completely matte, which is exactly what Marilyn looks to be wearing in the picture

 So with this, you're just going to apply it pretty liberally on the whole eyelid.

 And I'm going to take my brush, which needs to be clean, so hold on.

 Ok, so with my MAC 219 brush, I'm going to pick up that dark brown.

 So just when you open your eyes, you want to see that little bit of darkness there.

 And just bring it right up to the lash line on the outer part there.

 Ok, so I'm going to take my brush and I'm going to take a little bit of the dark brown.

 You just want to kind of brush your brows, make sure they're all nice.

 And I'm going to pick up Mac, or sorry, Milani Riched Chocolate.

 At the end of this video I'll show you pictures of my sister where she has black eyeliner and then she has red on the lips.

 And you can make it thicker or thinner, whatever you want to do.

 So it's just nice and thick, but it's brown so it's going to be a little more natural looking than black.

 My favorite for the retro look are Ardell, just the regular ones in 125.

 I told you already that I'll show at the end, but she's wearing these lashes and they look awesome.

 Don't really feel like putting on false lashes for that, so I'll skip them.

 Focusing mainly on the top, you want to put just a little bit on the bottom, like right...

 Okay, so I'll do that real fast and then show you the cheeks and lips.

 Okay, so the eyes are finished now, and for the cheeks I'm going to use a kind of plum blush.

 So with this we're going to put it, of course, under the cheekbone.

 You can use something a little more neutral, with more like brown undertones to it, you know,

 Okay, so now for lips I'm going to use a pretty cool toned lip liner.

 You can go for something lighter, or obviously you can go for a bright red,

 I don't know if the picture maybe is, like the color is off or something,

 So hopefully you guys like this tutorial, and keep watching for more coming up soon.

 It's right here on her face, and it's real small, right about here or so.

 I would recommend using maybe like Revlon Colorstay eyeliner for that,

 In this tutorial we're going to take a look at the multi-strand version of the Matthew

 I've already demonstrated the two-stranded version and this one can be used for any number

 The Matthew Walker knot is a very handy knot because you can use it to finish various braids

 The most important part of the knot is to tighten it up properly, not to tie it.

 This is the one-color version of the Matthew Walker knot and as you can see the cords are

 To tie this knot we're going to take any number of cords, line them one next to the other

 and then wrap our first cord around all the other cords and then through the loop it made

 We're going to take the second cord, feed it through the loop of the first cord and

 The third cord goes through the loop of the first cord and then back into itself.

 You have to make sure that your cords are lined up one next to the other at the bottom

 The fourth cord, in my case the last one, again goes through the loop of the first cord

 then back into itself and at this point the knot is tied and the important process of

 We start off by slowly pulling on each cord to remove some slack and line up our cords.

 You don't want to tighten it too much, this is not something you want to rush.

 And once you have them about this tightened, meaning that they are still quite loose, we're

 going to adjust the cords on the left to the cords on the right by simply taking the first

 We're then going to take the next cord on the left and again place it to the right.

 And we keep doing this until all the cords line up one next to the other and then we're

 going to slowly pull on each to remove the remaining slack out of the knot.

 This is something that at least I had to practice for a few times before it became intuitive

 so don't give up after your first try and you're going to get this knot done.

 So guys, thanks for joining me in this tutorial, see you next time.

So there's another video of me out there playing the song called

 Two Hornpipes from Pirates of the Caribbean and if you recall it's from

 the scene where I believe Johnny Depp goes to Tortuga to try to recruit men

 got a really nice message from a soldier who was deployed and he said that he

 wanted to learn something upbeat to practice and so I thought this would be

 What we're going to do is we're going to break it up into little tiny sections

 it for you once and then you're gonna play it together with me.

 And then the next part is F sharp E F sharp D G. It sounds like this.

 the next line goes F sharp E F sharp D G F sharp G E. It sounds like this.

 Great now we're going to go back to the beginning and we're going to put those two lines together.

 And if you recall it's exactly like this first line that you learned.

 The last part of this section I'll play it for you once and then we can go over it.

 So F sharp A D F sharp E D C sharp E D. And this part goes up into the higher octave so just be aware of that.

 throughout the piece but I like to add a trill at the end of this section.

 two horn pipes song and what you're going to do is you're going to want to repeat it but

 first of all we're going to put it all together now nice and slow and see what it sounds like.

 Hey guys, Josh Minks here, Southern Clean Pressure Watch, Kansas City, Missouri.

 Don't mind the mess, I just got done wiring all this up here and I haven't even put it

 Basically what I want to talk about is the soft wash kit that we got from carwash.com.

 Trey and Michael sent it to us to do some testing and so far so good.

 When you purchase one of these, purchase the kit, you're going to get pretty much all the

 Clamps, hoses, suction line to pull out of your tank, you'll get the pump.

 The only thing that I had to buy to make it work was a battery, inline fuse, and the on

 Just a few seconds, I'm going to show you some of the distance.

 I'm just going to show you the distance on how high they shoot on a two story home.

 If you were cleaning roofs from the ground or anything to that effect, maybe you're soft

 I haven't actually measured it out, but it's all bunched up over there.

 You'll also get this gun along with all the fittings you need to hook up the tips and

 I believe you get a zero degree, you'll get a 15, and a 25 and a 35 possibly.

 I know I just have the zero degree with me right now on the gun.

 Alright, basically if this was a one story home right here, a little bit of two stories,

 That gutter line, I can hit the back side of the house up here.

 I would probably say this thing shoots about 30 foot in the air.

 I mean it's definitely hitting the top of my house there and up and over the little

 Like I said, I'll be actually doing a roof cleaning, a little practice roof cleaning

 I've got to get the fill of this and get the flow down so I'm not doing too much over spray.

 As I know, all you roof washers that are walking the roofs are definitely probably using safety

 Let's say you come and safety harness stops, but you need to get, let's say down there.

 Four and a half pads away, standing over here at the beginning of this one.

 I guess if I stretch my hand out further, I can probably get the rest of it too.

 Pretty much four to five pad lengths, about four foot, three and a half to four foot long.

 Like I said, I'm still doing some more testing, but for the most part, works out really well

 I'll definitely have some more videos later on showing some roof washing with it.

 On September 21st, 2015, McDonald's and Burger King will come together for one day to create the McWhopper.

 So the McWhopper is basically a publicity stunt to create an awareness that peace can exist between a clown and a king.

 I still think that there's gonna be some female activists wondering why Wendy was left out of the picture.

 So the McWhopper will basically be the top half of a Big Mac stacked on top of a Whopper.

 And a big thanks to my buddy Adrian for letting me know about this thing at 9 in the morning.

 For this recipe, you're going to need to slice up some tomatoes, pickles, onions, grab some nice leafy lettuce,

 A big bun for the Whopper and a regular sized one for a Big Mac.

 And don't forget to follow me on Periscope and be a part of watching...

 For the special sauce, we kinda cheated and just used ketchup and Thousand Island,

 but we have like an old-ass video you can watch with a spot-on recipe,

 so I'll put a link here in the description, annotation, card, whatever.

 And if you want those awesome McDonald's onions, simply get some dehydrated minced onions and then just soak them in water.

 Split it up unevenly so you can press out your big boy Whopper and fun-sized Big Mac patty.

 Poke some holes into it like White Castle does to prevent these thin burgers from curling up,

 and then season both with some seasoned salt and seasoned meat tenderizer.

 and once it's hot, grill your flame-broiled Whopper patty inside.

 And guys, we made the mistake of using an actual flame for our flame broil.

 And for our Big Mac patty, we're going to do this on the stove top,

 Don't forget to toast your buns, and let's get ready to build this thing with some epic background music.

 Bottom bun, flame-broiled patty, pickles, ketchup, white onion, too many tomatoes, little buns, special sauce,

 We forgot the pickles and dehydrated minced onions because we were so excited about how this looked.

 It's the easiest way for you to show your support, and it means a lot.

 And one of the things you guys don't know, I'm, like, kind of doing, like, a vegetarian challenge.

 And, again, what's a challenge without actually challenging yourself?

 You just said so many nice things, and then you said Lady Gaga?

 She will be trying the burger that she worked so hard to make while I sat there and watched.

 It tastes really good, I like having both sauces on there, because I'm a sauce boss.

 It's easy to bite through the top, and it's a little bit more crunchy on the bottom.

 It's like Sunday morning routine, we wake up at 9.30, and we just lay in bed.

 Honestly, if I wasn't dating Julia right now, Primrose, give me a call.

 Alright guys, thanks for coming along on another episode of Healthy Junk Food.

 If you're new to our channel, make sure to hit the subscribe button.

 And the notification icon next to it if you're on a mobile device.

 And make sure you check out the JB Talk channel, all of our social media links.

 Periscope, Instagram, because you get to see all the crazy stuff we do behind the scenes.

 There are four main types of mortar joints that vary in depth, width, angle, and texture.

 It is especially important to test for adhesion wherever film bridges mortar joints.

 You'll notice that the techniques for panel seam overlap are different

 Note the consistent speed the applicator is using with the heat gun and tools

 and how the film conforms to the texture of the application surface.

 In this example, the mortar joint is concave and not too deep, so the film adheres well

 without going back over it with 3M's textured surface applicator,

 Using the heat gun and an appropriate tool, apply the film to the open edge.

 Always roll completely past the open edge for the best adhesion.

 After applying the film, use a sharp razor and a safety holder to smoothly cut the film away

 from the mortar joint, leaving a margin of film extending about 1-8th of an inch beyond the block.

 Use the razor blade to cut off any tabs of film that may occur at the corners of the blocks.

 Reheat the film along the edges where the film was cut and removed to conform

 The film we are showing you today is designed specifically for textured walls,

 but don't let a doorway or a window become a barrier to a huge graphic.

 3M has many films that can be used along with the textured film to cover these additional spaces.

 Please contact your 3M sales representative for more information.

 The following examples illustrate good and bad application techniques.

 3M's textured surface applicator is designed to cover the edges of the block and inside corners.

 The film we are showing you today is designed specifically for textured walls.

 The technique we are showing you is for removing 3M Scotch-Cal brand graphic film for textured surfaces.

 Using an air release tool, pick at the corner of the film to release it from the block.

 To use heat, direct low temperature heat gun to the corner of the film.

 Do not apply heat to the adhesive side of the film, which actually makes removal more difficult.

 Be aware that removing the film may pull away loose mortar or paint as well.

 Using the heat gun may actually increase the amount of paint that is damaged or removed.

 Let's summarize what we've learned so that your next application is successful.

 Remember, however, that excess heat blisters and burns the film.

 Remember to always set your perimeter edge, top and bottom first, then the sides.

 Keep the heat gun about 1 inch from the film and immediately in front of the application tool.

 And then apply the new panel by starting just before the seam and working toward the outer edge.

 When applying film to glaze block, always use the standard applicator squeegee to apply the film.

 Ensure good adhesion of all the edges by reheating the film and finishing with 3M's textured surface applicator, TSA-2.

 For mosaic applications, cut the film in the mortar joints and remove the excess film.

 You can visit us at www.3mgraphics.com to get the product bulletins for films designed specifically for applications to textured surfaces and for instruction bulletin 5.37.

 This instruction bulletin provides comprehensive information on various wall surfaces and techniques for successfully applying film to both smooth and textured walls.

 Please contact us if you have questions or need further information about the 3M products shown in this presentation.

 hello everyone welcome back to my channel today video is going to be a

 chicken curry recipe this one is requested by one of my viewers so let's

 get started and the ingredients are fresh chicken chopped coriander chopped

 chili chopped tomato chopped onion garlic ginger tonya and jeera paste

 cloves and cardamom, cinnamon stick, I don't know the actual English name and

 meat masala salt to taste, coriander jeera powder, red chili powder and black

 after your will get heated add some fenugreek seeds I forgot to tell fenugreek

 I personally recommend not to cover the chicken if stirring between it and just

 keep frying the onion until the onion and the chicken gets brown in color or

 cloves and cardamom and some turmeric powder, half of spoon of turmeric powder is ok

 now our chicken is fully golden in color now we are going to add cinnamon stick, meat masala,

 salt to taste, ginger, garlic and coriander jeera paste and some black pepper powder

 after covering you can serve your kauri terik with rice or anything you like

 hope you guys like my video and recipe thank you for watching and see you soon

 With just three basic tools and in six simple steps, you can enjoy better tasting tap water

 The three tools you need are an adjustable wrench, scissors, and pliers.

 The six simple installation steps are, one, unpacking and inspection.

 Use an existing hole or drill a new hole in the lip of your sink or countertop.

 Slide the gasket washer and nut over the tubing and hand tighten the nut.

 Disconnect cold water supply line riser from the shutoff valve.

 Tape the quarter inch male threaded adapter and connect it to the half inch or three-eighths

 Insert the red tube from the Zuvo beverage faucet into the quarter inch adapter.

 To shorten the red tubing more, release it from the adapter by applying pressure and

 depressing the end of the white adapter using the spanner wrench.

 Leave enough tubing length so that the Zuvo system can be removed from under the counter

 Connect the white tubing from the faucet to the white tubing attached to the Zuvo unit.

 Open the cold water shutoff valve and verify there's no water leaking.

 Fix the position of the Zuvo beverage faucet by tightening the hex nut.

 Plug the Zuvo water filtration system into an unswitched electrical outlet.

 Before drinking the water or using it for cooking, allow water to flow through the Zuvo

 Congratulations, your installation is complete and you can start enjoying better tasting

 and we're going to go over to the bench, and I'll show you how all this stuff comes apart.

 sometimes you've got to use all kinds of tricks to get that apart.

 come back and clean the housing, and then we'll put it all back

 Again, we're not going to change the O-rings, because we've just

 We want to make sure that the oil pump fits in the oil pump housing with no

 When this sticks down, obviously then there's no pressure that can be

 Of course, when it sticks down, then there's no possibility that the

 So it's a little bit larger than the other one, but it is possible to

 Anyway, so I'm going to use my compressed air and clean this stuff off

 Cleanliness is next to godliness, and we'll put him back together here just

 So what we've done here, we've got everything all set to go to reinstall.

 And now we're going to go back over underneath the car with our air blaster

 and our carburetor cleaner and really clean out the passageways in the

 If I was going to show you how long this took, we'd be here watching me

 use carburetor cleaner and air for about five minutes because I'm really

 I just want to show you, we're going to spray up inside all the passageways

 and then use our compressed air and go up in here and blow this thing out

 until it's really, really, really clean, especially at the very top of the oil

 pressure relief valve, which is where our problem lies because this thing cannot

 So that's where that three-quarter inch nut went up inside there.

 I'm going to spend some time making sure that that's all nice and clean.

 And as soon as I'm done, we'll come back, we'll quick assemble the thing back up.

 So you've got the oil pressure relief valve assembled carefully and correctly.

 Only appropriate that we should have the Beatles playing in the background,

 All right, now the next thing we're going to get is the solenoid.

 Today we are going to make a Cinderella dress pull apart cupcake cake.

 Now we're going to do this from the 2015 Cinderella movie instead of the Disney cartoon.

 The Disney cartoon would have taken two different shades of icing and the dress is styled a

 little bit differently, so if you see the dress and you're like, that doesn't really

 look like Cinderella, well I'm not doing it from the cartoon, I'm doing it from the movie.

 So what you're going to need for this cake, if you design it like I did, I used about

 I know that sounds like a lot, but you can arrange it the way you want to arrange it.

 You could probably cut it down to maybe 30 something cupcakes if you really wanted to.

 I wanted kind of a full dress, so I added a lot of cupcakes to it.

 But you can tweak it to the way you want to make it or how little or how many cupcakes

 So the first thing you're going to need are cupcakes, of course.

 I've also got various sizes of piping bags and I actually just took whatever size cake

 decorating tips I could find in the biggest size, not the small ones, they're like the

 So I've got a round one, a flat one, and then the 1M size tip that looks like a little open

 And I used royal blue because if I use light blue, it's going to be a little too pale.

 I wanted it to still have a little royal blue tint, but I wanted it to be really light also.

 Start out small and you can always add more if you need to make it darker.

 Once you reach your desired shade of blue, I've got three big bags here and I'm going

 And I've got a flat tip, well it's kind of flat, but it's got a little bit of curve to

 You could use a flat tip if you wanted, but this is the only size I had that was the next

 You don't need very much for the flat tip, so I'm going to put less in that bag and less

 And I'm going to put the most in the bag with the 1M open star tip because we're going to

 When you've got all your icing in your bags, you can start with the flat tip or whichever

 Now in the 2015 Cinderella movie, the top of her dress kind of hangs off her shoulders

 and it's kind of lacy and goes off to the side, so I'm going to do the top part of the

 cupcake cake in this icing with the flat tip and I'm going to make it come off to the side

 and I'm just going to make different lines kind of swooping over each side.

 It doesn't have to be perfect because we're going to decorate it a little bit afterwards

 Now I'm going to take my big round tip and I'm going to outline the middle section of

 the dress and the bottom kind of comes in a V shape, so I'm going to go ahead and outline

 And it looks kind of rough right now, you can kind of see all the little gaps and lines

 And you're going to smooth everything out as smooth as you can in the middle part right

 there because the middle section of her dress is smooth and it goes straight up and down.

 Now I know the cake is still looking a little bit unfinished and rough, but don't worry

 So now take your 1M decorating tip in your bag with your big amount of icing in it and

 you're going to go up and down on the bottom part of her dress because the bottom part

 of her dress kind of has that pleated texture to it, so that's what the 1M tip is going

 to give the bottom of the dress to make it seem like it's pleated.

 So just go ahead and go up and down all over the bottom of the dress.

 Now I used all my icing in the bag and I colored another batch, but I made it just a tiny tad

 And I put it in the bag with the 1M tip and I'm just going to put maybe three or four

 lines in the middle of her dress there and give it sort of a little darker texture in

 And then I'm going to take it and outline the V shape at the bottom of the dress with

 little stars, so just start, press the tip down almost to the icing on the cake and then

 pull it up slightly and make little stars and that's going to separate the bottom from

 the midsection and it's also going to even up the lines there and make it look a little

 Now take your light blue and white candy melts and melt them in the microwave in 30 second

 intervals and stir in between until they've come completely melted.

 Now I've got two small piping bags and I'm going to go ahead and put the candy melts

 I'm going to start with the blue, so I'm just going to pour them in there and then cut a

 And what I've got here is a piece of cardboard that's got a little crease in it and if you

 don't have a piece that's already got a crease in it, you can just make one yourself.

 I've got a piece of wax paper on it so the candy melt doesn't stick to it.

 So what I'm going to do is pipe out the shape of a butterfly, half on each side of the crease

 that I made and then once you get the butterfly shape, then go ahead and crease the cardboard

 What you want to do is put it in the refrigerator and kind of prop it up and then the candy

 melts will take maybe five or ten minutes in the fridge and they're going to harden

 What we're going to do in the meantime while they're in the refrigerator, I've got some

 white sprinkles and I'm just going to sprinkle them all over the dress because the dress

 kind of looks plain and her dress is really sparkly and pretty so the white sprinkles

 So I'm going to put it all over the top, the midsection and the bottom.

 And at the end of the video, you probably can't see it right now, but at the end of

 the video I'll go and give you a little bit of a closer look so you can see how shiny

 Now that your butterflies are done, you can see that they've all settled and that they've

 set completely so we're going to carefully pull off the wax paper from the back and they

 just come right off and you can see they've held their shape, they look really good.

 So I'm going to go ahead and place them on the top part of the dress, the shoulder and

 And that's where the butterflies in the movie are on her dress at.

 I've got some big and small blue bead type sprinkles and I've got some of them and I'm

 going to put them on top of the dress where you can see it added a little bit more texture

 and a little bit more embellishment to the dress and I think that looked really good.

 So if you have some blue sprinkles or some beads or pearl sprinkles, go ahead and put

 You can see the bottom, the midsection and the top all have those sugar sprinkles on

 And this is what the whole complete cake looks like and I hope you guys enjoyed this video.

 If you don't want to do Cinderella, they're really easy to make.

 You could do the little rose swirls all over all the cupcakes and just make the same design

 I hope you guys enjoyed the video and if you did, please give it a thumbs up and I'd love

 for you to subscribe to my channel if you haven't already done so.

 It is a sweet which is very much liked by everybody which ever eats it.

 In the half a liter of whipped cream we put two deciliters of full milk.

 Always a pleasure to have you guys here in the kitchen with me.

In the description below, I'm gonna list out all the ingredients you'll need for making this entire dish

 Also, you can check out Caribbean Pot.com for this recipe in detail

 You want to put some plastic wrap over the bowl and let it sit for about well to rest for about 15 minutes or so

 And that's to put the Pulauri after they're done frying to take up some of that excess oil

 We've got the batter which has rested now for about 15-20 minutes or so 15 minutes would be ideal

 We've got a little bowl here with a little bit of vegetable oil and my mom

 Will be using that to coat her fingers when she's grabbing little

 Well, maybe about a tablespoon or so maybe less of this dough before going into the hot oil

 So we've got the first batch frying in that oil there and all my mom is doing is rubbing coating her fingers with that vegetable oil

 Go ahead, and then she's gonna scoop out maybe about a teaspoon full so and just rub it

 Into a ball well shape it into a ball and in goes into that hot oil

 As they fry I think there's one thing I should mention to you guys

 The batter is not your typical Pulauri batter because we didn't put any flour to make it a bit more airy

 It took anywhere from six to seven minutes to cook in that hot oil there

 We just have them in the on the paper towel now just to soak up any extra oil now

 So we're just gonna set this aside while we make the sauce for this curry.

 All my mom is doing is pouring water in there to make a sort of a slurry

 With that that's gonna be the base for the sauce for this curry.

 So it's a cup and a half here cup and a half of water with that one cup of the ground split peas

 And it's nice and smooth now no lumps and that there's gonna be the base for the sauce.

 We've got about a tablespoon of vegetable oil heating up in a pan here

 We've got some water with curry powder Madras curry powder as well as what we call sofran

We're gonna need some salt as well as some roasted jeera, which is pretty much

In that hot oil we had the sliced onion and the sliced very thin

 All we're gonna do now is turn the heat down to low and let that cook for about three minutes or so to get that

There's about three cloves of garlic in there as well as the roasted cumin or what we call

 Well, I keep calling it slurry, but the mixture with the water and the ground split peas

 I'm gonna turn up the heat now just to bring that back up to a boil

 If you notice that it goes too thick what you need to do is add some more water.

 Half cup between half and three quarter of a cup and we're gonna work that in and bring it up to a boil before we add

We ended up having to add an additional two cups of water in there

 After you add the Polori or what they typically call the boulders

 Mix that really well turn off your stove and you're good to go.

I'm sure there is a version of this of some how or the other in India

 It's always a pleasure to have you guys here in the kitchen with me

 Remember to subscribe to the channel so you can get all the latest videos as soon as they go live

 And it starts with a piece of paper, 9 x 12, nothing special, any kind of paper will do.

 And then what you do is you fold it in thirds, just like that, press down, and it will look like this.

 And you'll see why in a moment, because we're going to draw some faces now.

 Now, I've drawn these lines because what I want to do is I want to have the eyes in the top part

 and the nose in the second part and the mouth in the bottom, just like that.

 And continue that line all the way down and come up and put the ear in, just like that.

 And we'll cut them right in half like that so she can be either sleepy, she could be pondering.

 And when she's asked who does her hair, she says, my cartoonist.

 All right, now on this side here, we're going to draw the third character.

 All right, let's give him an oval and wacky, zany-looking, dazed eyes.

 All right, now you can add as much detail as you like when you have more time.

 And then what you do is using those pencil lines as guidelines, get a scissors,

 Now, for the sake of time, I've got one all finished up with color and everything,

 and all the pencil lines are erased and everything, and it will look just like this.

 Now, what I've also done on another piece of paper is I've done the same thing,

 And the reason why is because I'm going to lay this one right in the center like that.

 Now, by swinging these barn door type flaps over, look at this.

 Now, the more sheets of paper here, that's what she looks like.

 The more sheets of paper that you use, the crazier the combinations

We're going to make coconut butter or cocoa butter and all we need is our

 desiccated coconut or if you can buy coconut flakes then that would be also a good choice

For the equipment, the only thing that we need is our handy dandy food processor.

 It would be good if you have this kind like the food processor as one of your basic equipments

 at home when it comes to your kitchen because it's just multi-purpose.

 a lot of things especially like you know making homemade stuff and for my recipe well it's just

I'm going to use three cups of desiccated coconut and then the rest will be

Not magic tricks but the magic of the effect of the food processor on our coconut flakes or

 we can continue without timing it so we know what to expect and we could check regularly.

 time for most cocoa butter or coconut butter recipes and after like five minutes we're going to stop

So then we're going to turn our food processor off and we're going to open it to see

 that's the consistency you'll get after five minutes and if you notice there's like an

 accumulation on the sides so what we're going to do which is like one of the purpose why we need

 to have the timer and we need to stop is to make sure that we scrape down the sides and put it in

 the middle with the others so that we could have an even processing and it would be mixed very well.

You can use it as a spread, you can eat it on its own because it's so

 tasty and you could use it on toast or for me I have tried using this on my smoothies.

It's very it thickens the smoothies and it has like a certain texture as well and of course

Anywho we'll continue and of course you know what's going to happen next.

 scrape down the sides you'll see again the texture the consistency.

 expect when you're going to try this at home and another few minutes later we're going to stop

I actually just it's so tempted to just get like a spoon and eat them

 the 15 minutes have passed I extended it to another 5 to 10 minutes to come up with the best

 it's very very good for your health, very healthy, it's very nutritious.

 First thing you do is just peel back the serial number sticker.

 And kind of take your thumbs with your hand underneath the unit.

 You might need to use a screwdriver that's a little bit bigger.

 The people leading the Vermont Bioenergy Initiative are forging the connection between diversified

 These farmers, scientists, and entrepreneurs are at the forefront of a local production

 for local use movement, and they are proving that local food systems and clean energy production

 We started a biofuels business seven years ago now, growing oil crops and turning them

 We designed a few features into the structure to make our biodiesel operation a little more

 Some of the things we incorporated into this building are some solar heating.

 We put a lot of glass on the south side of the building to take advantage of solar gain.

 We installed some hot water solar for some of our process heating needs to reduce some

 Biodiesel-reacting equipment is all homemade, but it's made out of stainless steel.

 It's a pressure-rated tank, meaning it'll hold vacuum or pressure.

 It also has a water jacket in it, and we can circulate the hot water from our solar system

 around the tank to heat the oil up to processing temp, which is around 130 degrees.

 It's a 1500-liter tank, and everything is calibrated in liters.

 To load this tank, we draw a vacuum down on it and just open a valve, and it sucks the

 That gives us a recipe of how much lye and alcohol to add to the batch to produce the

 I add at least a milliliter at a time when they look for a reaction and when it changes

 It means that we're going to add two and a half grams of lye per liter of oil.

 Because after you do two or three, you're like, what was the first one?

 Usually the volume of alcohol is about 20% of the batch of oil.

 And then we draw the alcohol in by simply putting a hose into our barrel of methanol

 Once the alcohol is loaded, then we put in the lye, which is either potassium or sodium

 So we're drawing alcohol off the side, through the pump, back in the top into a venturi nozzle.

 And what that does is it mixes all that lye up that was laying on the bottom of the tank.

 And then the second five minutes, we mix for 10 minutes, I'll open the bottom of the valve.

 So at this point, we would probably want to check the temperature of the oil, make sure

 It's real important that the oil be at the right temperature for reacting.

 So now we're taking it out of the alcohol mix tank, the epoxide mix, and adding it into

 When the oil-alcohol mix goes through that pump, it gets churned together and quite a

 And then also inside the tank, there's a nozzle that creates a lot of mixing action within

 Let's always pull a sample just to make sure before we take it out of the reactor and put

 it into the settling that we've got a reaction that looks in the parameters of normal.

 So at this point, if it didn't look normal, then maybe we could go back to titration or

 see, maybe test for contaminants or water or something before we finish with it.

 So instead of sending the fuel back into the tank, we're going to send it over into the

 cone tank, make sure all valves are closed and the tank's vented.

 So once the fuel is reacted, we then put it, transfer it into the cone tank.

 And the cone tank is to help facilitate the separation of the glycerin.

 And this is just a one liter example of what's going on in the tanks.

 But once that reaction occurs, you'll get a, the glycerin will participate out to the

 Once the fuel is reacted, we're going to pump it through these two ion exchange columns.

 So meaning the fuel comes through this variable speed pump, flows up through that material,

 And the fuel is pumped down through and from there returns back into this tank.

 We can watch and monitor the pressure building and the filtering of tanks.

 And then from there we can meter the fuel into a customer's tank.

 all right we're doing hurt by Christina Aguilera and here's the opening piano

 all right hello I'm Shawn Sheik welcome to my easy piano lessons this is part

 one parts two and three and four for a limited time only or for free if you do

 a Google search for web piano teacher then a new word fans you'll click on the

 first link and that'll be my fan page on Facebook and this the parts two three

 four however many it takes me to make will be on there for free just go ahead

 and do that if they're not on there if you look at this video later and I've

 already it's been some time and they're taking off they'll only be on my website

 and web piano teacher calm okay so if I take them off that's it but for right

 now when I'm making this video if it's a recent video to you then you can do a

 Google search for web piano teacher new word fans web panel teacher fans and

 you'll click on the first link and you'll find the video there let's go

 ahead do this part one here we're going to do a left hand and then we'll have a

 B above that for the second left hand note we're going to stay on that B for a

 while okay on the right hand we're going to have a G up here okay and then we're

 going to play that G and the E together right here play it together and then the

 left hand is going to come in between see that left hand note in between and

 then the right hand is going to come right and then left right left right

 left and it's a straight eight notes so it goes together left right left right

 left right left okay don't play the left hand too loudly we want the right hand to

 be louder so we bring out that melody in the top okay and here we go with the

 second box here we have F sharp on the right hand here's the here's an F sharp

 then we're going to go down to D sharp then we're going to do it again F sharp

 D sharp okay on the left hand we're going to have D sharp right here right

 above middle C up to B there okay it's going to go together left right left

 right left right left together left right left right left right left okay

 now you can hold the pedal for this whole first box and then change your

 pedal and hold it for the whole second box we put the pedal down the damper

 pedal the sustain pedal that keeps the note going change pedal now what I have

 up here is box one because we're going to repeat box one so go back to box one

 right here and play it again and stop right there now we're going to do this

 box here and that'll be all this part one and have a on the top and then G and

 then F sharp and then G left hand is not going to have a C all right and you're

 going to go up to a G after that C G and then another G and then another G and

 then one G at the end so we play together left together left right and

 then right and then left okay so there's kind of a space there you go

 together left together left right right left so there's you hold that out just a

 okay now let's play it all together again and remember if you're looking at

 this video recently when I'm when I've just put it up you can find the other

 parts for free if you do a Google search or any kind of a search for web piano

 teacher fans the first link that comes up will be my fan page on Facebook and

 you can find the videos okay and again if they're not there and you can't find

 them I've taken them off the videos been up too long and they're only on

 piano teacher comm for members but go ahead and check that here we go let's

 go all the way through okay so there's your part one hope you enjoy it

 In today's video, I'm going to show you these little beauties right here.

 And I was introduced to these by Laurel Beard and when I saw them, I just went wild.

 And one of the things that I loved about them is they are different than anything I have

 They create really cool water colored looks, but in a very different way.

 And the first thing I'm going to do is do the technique where you just spray down your

 And this is what hooked me on this stuff and why I had to buy it right away.

 And if you are on Instagram or Facebook with me, you did see a video on this, but watch

 As I was talking, a lot of this water kind of pooled to the side.

 So let me get it back up on the cardstock and then look at that.

 That's another thing that I really love about this is how vibrant the color is.

 A lot of watercolors and inks, you can't quite get colors that vibrant and that dark.

 You can move the color around, get some drips and fun interest going on this piece of watercolored

 If you have color on your mat and you have white spots, you can just turn it over and

 If you want colors moving more, you can add more water or maybe it's too dark for you.

 If you turn it over and heat it on the other side, it will help flatten it out.

 We don't want this to go to waste, so I'm going to add some more water here.

 I'm going to grab another piece of watercolored cardstock and pick up that color.

 Again, same as the other one, you can dip, dry, dab, and just play until you get a really

 Then there are tons of different things you can do with the background.

 I'm going to show you different ways to use these background pieces.

 A lot of people say to me in my videos, how do you not get your fingers inky?

 I'm just going to play with this for a minute, and then I'll show you the results in a second.

 You can also do some emboss resist if you laid down and did your stamping and embossing

 I will be doing some of these techniques and making these into cards.

 I'm just going to squeeze it out and get some of that pigment on there.

 When I spray this down, we are going to get tons of color here.

 This is orange, but look, there's some green and blue in there.

 You could just leave it like this and let it dry, or you can go to town and just start

 Push the color and the water around to achieve whatever kind of look you're looking for.

 If you're worried about the buckling, because you'll see when it buckles sometimes, the

 water goes in places that maybe I don't want it to, you could put some adhesive on the

 back or you could even use painter's tape to tape down the outside.

 If I did painter's tape around the edge, I would try to make it an equal increment all

 the way around, maybe a quarter inch or a half inch in, and then just have the edges

 I may throw up a couple samples with these technique pieces here.

 Stay tuned to my channel because I will be doing more videos with this Color Burst awesomeness.

 Be sure to subscribe to my channel and give me a thumbs up if you love inky fingers and

 What we're going to do is we're going to leave this ink lines up and we're going to go ahead

 and go to our paint and create a new layer and call this base paint.

 And once we've done that we can go ahead and just start painting away basically.

 All we need to do is grab a decent sized brush, something like that will do.

 And I'm going to start with the body color which is in here, here on the arms, and then

 And I'm going to make him be a kind of a blue bird for Twitter like the original use was

 So let's go ahead and we can, we got to actually take this white layer here and drag it beneath

 And alrighty, we're going to go ahead and up that hardness all the way, make that a

 And we're just doing the base coat for right now which is just the primary colors.

 So you don't have to worry about any highlights or anything yet.

 So if you need to zoom in on this so you can get right along the edge that's perfectly

 And again, don't worry about using any other highlighting colors right now.

 It's a pretty simple process, just takes a little time, that's all.

 And you can of course decide on the colors that you want to use for your character.

 And you can separate the colors in different layers if you'd like for, so you can change

 But I already know what I want so I'm not going to worry about doing that.

Well, myself, normally you would think, you know, blokes ironing shirts, rubbish and all the rest of it.

 And it's one of those things, here I am, I'm a working man, got to learn to iron my own shirts, it's a world of equality now.

I was taught by my mother years and years ago to do this and what a great thing she taught me and served me out to do.

 But it's a heck of a lot easier than things and you can always be going to work with nice crisp shirts, don't pay loads for laundry.

 One of the great things about being a Zip-Lo is you can buy a fantastic gadget like I've got here.

 I've bought a kind of top of the range power steam iron here and these really kick ass basically when it comes to ironing and save you loads and loads of time for better results.

 The reason being is that inside the body of this machine they generate tonnes and tonnes of steam so that when you go for it, it looks like this.

Oh, apart from this, one of the great things to always do as a bloke is usually get the extension cable out, get in the back garden if you want, if it's a nice day.

 I usually get the extension out and plant myself in front of the TV so I can watch some TV while I'm doing it.

 Or even better still, get yourself a beer and then you can drink some beer while you're doing it.

First thing to do with your shirt, here's my shirt, it's already been washed, already been ironed, is you need to check at what temperature you need to do the actual ironing at.

 With inside one of the sleeves, there's usually one of these white labels just here and if you check the white label there's a little symbol on it that actually looks like an iron.

 It's got a number of dots on it, one dot, two dots, three dots.

 The more dots there are, the hotter the iron are and you need to adjust that on your steam iron to your temperature that you're going to do.

 Usually, the more pure cotton your shirt is, the hotter the iron needs to be.

 A pure cotton shirt is usually three spots, one that's part synthetic like this shirt is, is usually two spots.

 If you're doing silk or woolen like that, that's usually a lower temperature, nice cool iron as well.

 Okay, so you've adjusted that on your iron, you've set your iron to steam mode, however you do it, whether you need to add water to it itself or water to your power steam iron as is in my case.

 So, the trick with this shirt, as my mother taught it, is there's basically seven pieces of cloth that make a shirt.

 And the trick is to lay each one of those pieces of cloth flat against the ironing board and then simply press the iron across that clean surface.

 So, usually I start with the outer edge of the shirt, that's the shirt with the buttons on it here.

 They're made out of a piece of cloth, each piece of cloth will be flat.

 So, laying this on, and this is where this end of your iron that's shaped in this way as a point comes in handy.

 So, laying this across the ironing board, tuck that in right, it's that shape for a reason, it gets that shape so it lies flat against the cloth.

 With this you need to be, in my particular case, a steam iron, pressing the button to release the steam to come out on it.

 The other one, sometimes you squirt the water out of your iron and then pass the over which generates the steam and gives you a nice coolant.

 So, working backwards and forwards, you should be able to hear the steam coming out of my iron as you do this, and round all the buttons.

 Isn't this exciting guys, didn't you think this would be so wonderfully dull?

 You probably should be watching Top Gear or something like that, or some other programme with attractive chicks in it, instead of ironing your shirt.

 Rotating the shirt round, that's the back piece of the shirt, the bit that's the whole back of your shirt to here.

 Just keep rotating that round as you work your way round the shirt.

 As I say, keeping each bit flat against the ironing board here.

 Then you get to the limit of that, and usually I find there's always just a narrow strip to do that's up to the shirt, to the armpit.

 Then you rotate round and you're on the left hand side of the shirt, laying a little bit of pressure with the iron.

 That's most of your shirt ironed, there in one go, in those three vertical pieces there, the sides and the two backs.

 The next one I always do, a bit of tension on the shirt, and lie the arm flat.

 The trick here is to get it to scoop up a little bit, so the sides scoop up in this way.

 Then with a good steam iron like this, you only have to do one strike back and forth, but don't push all the way up to the edge, because you'll get a crease down the centre of your arm and that's not what you want.

 Then you can turn to the cuff, and in a rotating motion push the cuff against the board like that.

 Again, a little bit of tension, pull that tension so you can get it flat, lay it across the board like that, smooth through the hand, again a little bit of tension, curving up so you don't create a crease.

At the back of the shirt here is what's called the yoke, but who cares what it's called, it's that funny bit, the shoulder bit of the cloth.

 The trick here is to gather the shirt up, as I'm gathering it like this, to try and lay that bit flat against the board.

Take the collar and have it open to start off with, and give that one right run over, then fold it over, and then the last press.

 For God's sake, whatever you do, put it back on a hanger, and then because you've done a steam iron, it's steaming away as it is now.

 Let it steam by and hang for a couple of minutes to dry it off before you stick it into your wardrobe.

 This episode of Addicted to Salsa is brought to you by Gabbalini Dance Shoes.

 Except of course, before she finishes turning, I also finish turning and face in the same

 Now for a windmill, if you've never done a windmill before, it's really very similar

 So if this is 12 o'clock and this is 6 o'clock, the lady's going to be turning clockwise.

 So it's very similar to this move if we go back on one two three, five six seven.

 So when you do a fundamental move like a crossbar lead with an outside turn in a different fashion,

 for example in windmill form where her arm is more straight, you have to realize that

 And the lead here is that you want to provide that type of rotation.

 She's going to be rotating so that she gets the lead that she wants to do a crossbar lead

 From here, since in the video it might not be so noticeable, I'm not just raising the

 hand up, I'm actually moving it clockwise out to first provide that lead and gain momentum.

 The second part of the windmill, I keep the hand straight, but it just goes straight down

 So really the first one is the key lead and key move so that ladies maintain the same

 movement, crossbar lead with an outside turn while you change the style of it.

 We do one, two, three, five, six, seven, and you are going to end up doing an open

 So now with real counts and real momentum, we do one, two, three, five, six, seven, one,

 Now regular Copa, I'd go back on one, two, three, and use something with the hips.

 Now because this move is a little bit more complex and we're tying it to a crossbar lead

 180, we're actually going to move the control point from the hips, if I'm using too much

 Instead of stopping the lady on her hips, we're going to be using her shoulders because

 So as she goes back on one, two, three, we're going to use both of our hands to stop her,

 you know, kind of on the shoulder blades, and spin her like a top so she can turn as

 So maybe from a different angle, we'll just try it from here so you can kind of see and

 So as you can see, I use both of my hands, one to stop her, one to control the frame,

 and then from here I use both of my hands, more this one than the left one, but two points

 So going back to this position, again we're going to do the open break, one, two, three

 As she's finishing seven, we're just going to go in for a cross body with turn.

 So as you see her back from that turn, you're going to now again use your right hand to

 provide force so you can come in and do that cross body lead 180.

 So from here, just to review cross body lead 180, we're from here, we do seven, one, two,

 three to open up and then launch her for her styling, whatever she wants to do.

 So from the very beginning, here we go, one, two, three, five, six, seven, one, two, three,

 five, six, seven, one, two, three, five, six, seven, one, two, three, five, six, seven.

 Ladies, it's time to break down all of the styling for the entire windmill combination.

 So we're going to start with our left hand styled out here with our wrists nice and flexed

 Here's our prep for a right turn, so we bring our arm in on five, six, seven.

 Here the guy is starting to lead us through the windmill combination, so we realize that

 We don't want it to get tangled up, so we're going to keep it planted right here on our

 For this part, our arms are up above our head and it's important to keep our abs nice and

 engaged and tight because we're going to go into this spin that he's leading us with our

 So we want our bodies to all move together instead of being a little bit floppier.

 On this part, you have the option of bringing your arm down there for additional styling.

 Now, ladies also have an additional styling depending on guys what you do.

 Now, if you come out of that cross body 180 and you provide enough force to launch them

 out of that 180, they're able to use that momentum and add more styling.

 If we're here, imagine I'm doing the 180 and we end up here and I'm going to provide him

 For this kick to break it down, you're going to put your toe against the ground, creating

 Guys, whenever you launch them and you think they're actually going to do some type of

 styling like that, make sure that when they do that move, you provide stability with your

 So tonight I decided to do two different Valentine's Day looks for you guys.

 I decided to do a pink lip and somewhat of a like a deep red look.

 I have a red look already up but I wanted to do something with a smoky eye so I decided

 to incorporate that smoky eye into these two lip colors because you basically can do both

 It's sort of a neutral smoky eye and then I actually found a way to kind of brighten

 It doesn't have to be just for Valentine's Day but I figured why not?

 We're you know heading into that holiday tomorrow so I figured this would be the perfect time

 to just get up one more tutorial for those of you who have like date night, tomorrow night.

 You can just basically throw this look together last minute like I did.

 So if you guys want to see how I got both these looks, please keep watching.

 I'm just going to start out by priming my eye with my concealer and then I'm going to

 I'm going to start with the color Gangsta which is like a bronze color.

 Then I'm going to go in with the color Charming which is a dark brown and I'm just going to

 So as you can see here I'm just blending out that dark brown color.

 I'm taking my Iman Cosmetics blending brush and I'm just going to blend out any harsh

 lines and that is why I put the lighter color first to serve as a transition color.

 Now I'm going in with my Inglot Paint Pot which I absolutely love and I think it's number

 I'll link them below which I will all the products in this video.

 So I skipped over the whole foundation routine just so the video couldn't be super long.

 I'm actually going in with my Milani baked bronzer which I'll link below as well and I'm

 These can be purchased at Walgreens and they're very affordable.

 For mascara, I just used my L'Oreal Telescopic to blend my lashes in with my regular lashes.

 Then I'm just going to line my eyes with the same paint pot and I'm just using a pencil

 Then I'm going to use this Night Malt Lip Liner and my Milani lipstick in the color

 Carboné Blend which I already showed you guys in another video but I love this red

 So here I'm just taking the color Dainty and I'm going to use that as a pop of color in

 I'm lining my lips with the color Tawny which is the same color of my lips.

 Then I'm going to go in with the pink color Candy Yum Yum from MAC.

 Then I'm just going over it with a lighter pink YSL color in the color Y2HN00.

 Lo siguiente que quieres hacer es tomar tu servo de espalda y conectarlo directamente a tu canal de recibidor.

 Esto puede ser un trabajo complicado, ten cuidado de no mover las pinzas de tu recibidor.

 Una vez hecho eso, ahora tienes que encender tu helicóptero, asegurándote de que el motor se mantenga en marcha, o que tu ESC esté desbloqueado.

 Ahora puedes cambiar eficientemente la posición de tu servo de espalda.

 Esta manera es la mejor que he encontrado, porque cuando está conectado al giro, el movimiento más pequeño del helicóptero está intentando contraerlo, y de esta manera nunca obtienes un efecto centrado en tu servo.

 Así que si lo haces, es rápido y fácil, y como puedes ver, mi servo está bien centrado.

 Para empezar la parte 2, tienes que encender tu helicóptero y conectar el giro de espalda a la parte superior del recibidor.

 En este punto, no conectes tu servo de espalda, dejalo desbloqueado.

 Lo que vamos a hacer ahora es programar el giro para tu servo de espalda.

 En este giro, el plug rojo es el canal de ganancia, así que es muy fácil de identificar.

 Tienes que elegir el tipo de servo de espalda que vas a usar para que el giro funcione mejor.

 Así que lo que tienes que hacer ahora es, como dije antes, asegurarte de que solo el giro está conectado al recibidor, y el servo de espalda está desbloqueado.

 Ahora, cambia tu transmisor, pon en el modo de frenado, y apaga el servo de espalda.

 Lo que hice allí fue que flickeé mi interruptor de sensibilidad de giro, arriba y abajo, tres veces rápidamente.

 Puedes elegir, dependiendo de tu servo de espalda, hay 5 diferentes modos,

 Me recomiendo ver en Google exactamente el ritmo de Hertz de tu servo para que lo veas.

 En mi servo, estoy usando el Hitec Metal Gear HSG5084 Digital Servo.

 Así que, cuando llegue, el giro estará en modo de frenado y brillará 5 veces.

 Ahora, para el paso 3, vamos a poner el giro en modo de frenado o de reverso.

 Conecta los cables, para que el verde se vaya al azul, dependiendo de tu servo,

 Ahora, tienes que conectar tu helicóptero, y usando el mismo método que antes,

 necesitas conectar tu helicóptero, y mientras el giro brilla rápido azul,

 tienes que poner el rodillo de derecha o de izquierda en tu helicóptero,

 Ok, una vez que hayas hecho eso con tu transmisora, el giro debería estar abierto así.

 Ahora, deja ir tu rodillo de helicóptero, y déjalo en el centro.

 Las luces blancas y rojas indican que el giro está en modo normal.

 En mi espada está bien, el modo normal está funcionando bien, está en la dirección correcta,

 Ahora lo que tienes que hacer es ajustar tus puntos de final alto y bajo para tu servo.

 Es difícil de ver, pero estoy moviendo el rodillo y está reduciendo los puntos de final.

 Así que quieres que tus puntos de final te den el máximo de viaje en tu transmisora sin que el giro se empuje en el rodillo.

 Hey, Hey, Chef Kendra here and today we're making fried peach pies.

 We're going to start off by draining 1 28 ounce can of peaches.

 Put on the lid and cook it for about 35 minutes until the peaches are soft.

 Once it's done, remove the top, pour into a bowl and let it cool down for about a half

 Lay them out and put an equal amount of filling over the 6 halves.

 Each one can take about 3 tablespoons of filling without going overboard.

 Try and keep the filling in the middle of the wrappers going for a 1 fourth inch border.

 These fried pies are in the style of the old school McDonald's apple pies, which I

 Working with one pie at a time, dip your fingers in the water and go around and rub off the

 Then lay a wrapper on top to seal the perimeter of the pie well.

 Now take a fork and crimp around the edges to further seal the edges.

 What I remember most about McDonald's apple pies was their crispy coating with the bubbles

 No matter how many I ate I never failed to burn my mouth on the first bite.

 Anyway guys, line a baking sheet with parchment paper and put the pies on the baking sheet

 Fry these boys at 350 degrees flipping back and forth until they're golden brown.

 Hey guys, another video here and today I'll be showing you how to do an anti-gravity,

 What it is, to make it simple, it's sort of like a neosonic, a fingerless neosonic, see

 I didn't use my finger here, I just threw it up, but palm down.

 So you don't need to know any other trick, you don't need to know neosonic basically

 to do this, so you can go ahead and just learn it on your own just by looking at this.

 So to start off you want to grab the pen here at the end, like this, then turn it palm down,

 So then after that, the technique to getting it to do the motion where it goes around your

 finger like this, is you keep your hand like this, bring it up, turn your hand to the direction

 that will allow the part that's away from you or whatever, or the part that, I guess

 So if you're right handed, you want to turn your hand left so that the end part can go

 around your finger like that, if you're left handed, you want to turn your hand right so

 Of course I'm right handed so bear with me if you're left handed.

 So I'm going to lift it up and then I'm going to turn my hand sort of right and sort of

 loosen here, you don't want to loosen it to where it goes like this because then it just

 So I'm going to do it and I'm going to turn my hand slightly left, but I'm not going to

 So you go up and you turn your hand left, like shift it this way.

 That's what it does, see it goes somewhat around my finger like that.

 Now in the trick the anti-gravity, you catch it, of course I dropped it there but you catch

 And to do that, once you master the technique of getting it to do that, the technique to

 getting it to get caught like this, you need to let it do the motion, you know how you

 turn your hand left and then you need to literally turn your hand straight again.

 It's pretty much just sort of pivoting your hand to make it spin and then you're just

 So it's a little hard to explain, you need to do it, you need to actually try the motion

 So it will go around here, like that and then you turn your hand and pretty much just

 I'm going to try to give you guys an undershot, so I'll flip that in right now, just what

 You saw that the pen went around like this and kind of in slow-mo probably sort of my

 hand moving sort of like this and then back again, maybe a little pivot.

 So start off by doing the rising motion, the pivot, so pivot so that it can go around

 All this whole pivot is just to generate that force to make it go around.

 And then when it gets to about right here, you pretty much move your hand back into that

 Just look at the slow-mo a few times, this is what I would suggest.

 And yeah, so like this, do the direction to make it go around your finger, so in this

 case pivot your hand sort of this way and then go back into that position like that.

 It's not seen much because there's not that much attention for some reason.

 It can be compared to sort of like a finger around palm down, but of course that trick's

Today I'm making taro bubble tea because taro bubble tea is awesome.

 So now, for every five parts boiling water, you add one part taro balls.

 The lid goes on, temperature goes to low because it'll keep on boiling with the lid on, even at low.

 Okay, so they've finished cooking, and now they've turned into weird, slimy, black balls.

 So I've left them to sit for 30 minutes, after boiling for 30 minutes.

 So now for part two, I will be making the taro drink part of a taro bubble tea.

 2% milk, add taro powder, add a sugar per serving, add ice, and blend.

So I'm doing the Poppin' Cookin' and I decided to talk in this one because I am doing it with my friend and she's right here.

I am going to edit this so it's not so long but she's gonna be following what I'm doing.

 And if you hear anything in the background, that's the Olympics because they are on the TV and they are awesome.

 So I'm just gonna push this out of the way because the first step is to cut this in half and then make them into circles.

 I keep smelling bananas and I keep thinking that it's this, but it's the actual bananas.

 Oh, by the way guys, if you're watching this, type in banana in the comment section because my camera is actually being held up by an iPod to film this.

 I was like, are you trying to trick your subscribers there because I see an iPod.

 They don't even bother to decorate it and make it look all pretty.

 I don't know if they're too small or not, but I think they look lovely and I think they will work.

 The next thing you're supposed to do is to put a few of these in there.

 And we're going to make, flatten it so it sticks to the other side.

 And then we're going to make the folds so it looks like the dumpling.

 And we're gonna get our bowl thing and we're gonna cut our bowl out of here.

 I think to the line, there's a line right here if you can see it.

 It even has a little cup of ramen here, so it's hard to mistake this for anything else.

 So you're gonna cut this open and you're gonna put the powder in there.

 Now you have this and you need to take your pick, the toothpick that they gave you, and get that out.

 So you're gonna take this piece here and pop it through the other end like this.

 I know we've seen some videos where nobody puts any of these on, but I think they'd be cool on there.

 And this container seems to be entirely pointless, by the way, guys.

 As with any repair, be sure to unplug the appliance before beginning.

 Support the motor as you pull out the bolts and remove the old motor from the

 making sure the right mounting bolt is aligned with the guide mark.

 Replace the rear panel by inserting the tabs into the slots in the cabinet frame.

 You're now ready to plug the power cord back in and confirm that the washer

 At the end of the previous video we had slip stitch to join these last two crocodile shells.

 aside and right behind we're going to slip stitch in the V stitch that we skipped in the previous

Then we're going to chain three and double crochet in that same stitch.

 And then make a V stitch in the center of the next crocodile shell.

 And then move the stitches aside and make a V stitch in that skipped V stitch from the previous

 And slip stitch to join in the second chain of that first chain three.

 In this row if we start working in this V stitch we'll be directly in line with where we should be

So we're going to chain two and make three more double crochets in the side of this V stitch.

 Chain one and turn and make four double crochets in the opposite side of the V stitch.

 And you can see that we're lining up in between the previous shells.

 Skip the next V stitch, make a crocodile shell in the next V stitch.

 Chain one, turn, make four double crochets in the opposite side of the V stitch.

 And we're going to begin our V stitch row for the next row of crocodile stitch.

 I'm going to show you how to do a very quick and easy dessert recipe today

 and I have one chocolate Swiss roll or whatever we call jam roll or jelly roll

 this is actually shop bought and it is really easy and quick to assemble

 everything and I have some dry sweet sherry and I'm going to use a little bit

You can use any kind of an alcohol for this recipe or even apple

 glass bowl or any other kind of a bowl and put glad wrap or any other kind of a

 plastic wrap around and then slowly put this onto the plastic wrap and place all

 you have gaps around cut the Swiss roll in half and then put them around and use

 chocolate Swiss roll then add some sherry and soak the Swiss roll with the

 layer of Swiss roll to cover the top like this and put this in the freezer

 until it it's solid to take it out and cut it and this will be a very nice

 it's frosted already so you have to leave a little bit of maybe a minute and

 rub it around then it becomes the ice melts and you can take it out.

 show you how it looks like and make sure you keep it three four hours before you

 Welcome to OntarioBear.ca where tonight I am making bear spray, a cover spray to cover

 So I'll start with my bear bait mix because I think that's the most important, having

 I have a deep fryer that I use for french fries and chicken wings and all that good

 And once it's fully dark and getting ready to change the oil, I save it for the bears

 I had half a jar and I put it in the microwave for one minute and drizzled it into my mixture.

 So that's just corn, deep fryer oil, and a whole bunch of peanut butter.

 This has just been simmering in water for half an hour and I just gotta let it cool

 It's just pine needles, a little bit of corn, maybe a handful or two of corn, and just one

 So it's actually, I don't know, it's not appetizing but it's definitely a natural flavor or natural

 So all that together hopefully will improve my chances for bear season.

 It's October 12th so yeah, I haven't seen many bears in September or October so I'm

 hoping the end of the second half of the season things pick up.

 I don't want to give any excuses but I need to spend more time in the stand, I need to

 bait more, get more scent out there, and now there was activity on the land next door

 There's a lot of chainsaw work and that may be keeping the bears away but that should

 I'm going to get this corn out there, spray this peanut butter scent everywhere, and keep

 Thank you very much from OntarioBear.ca, check out our hunting and fishing forum, Ontario's

 best hunting and fishing forum, and we look forward to your hunting and fishing reports.

 you know, everybody can see what I got because some people might be into

 and Game of Thrones is getting ready to come out with some too.

 Ok, so today I'm just going to show you quickly if any of you out there that make your own

 bait or you want a cheaper alternative to find some ingredients and bits and pieces

 and if anyone's missed it in the magazine because I wrote about it in there.

 This is just an easy way to make your own greenlit mussel powder.

 So basically what they've done, I've put them on a baking tray, left them in the oven

 Come back to them and you'll find that they're quite tough, they're quite hard.

 Now the thing is all you've done there is you've taken the moisture out of the mussel

 itself so you've just taken all the water basically out of the mussel and now you're

 Now once you've done that you'll find that the powder is actually quite coarse.

 So you can see bits in there and you can actually hear it, the actual mussels, bits of mussel

 So it's quite hard to get it down to a complete powder but that in a bait, rolled in a bait,

 Gives the bait a completely different texture, you know, something that usually is put in

 as a powder form so it's quite fine so you get the taste of it but then you don't actually

 But what you can do from there is get yourself a sieve like so, put it in the bowl, put your

 And all you're doing there is just separating all the larger pieces from the powder itself,

 And as you can see I've only done it for a little while but you've ended up with a really

 fine powder now which you can put into baits easily, you know, not a problem.

 And that is pure, you know, you can't get much better than that.

 So do yourself a favour, go down to your local Tesco store or your local store and buy yourself

 You get quite a lot of powder actually from a kilo box of greenlit mussel.

 Hey everyone, it's Sabrina and today I'm going to be doing a Sutton from The Lion Game or

 And I decided to do this tutorial because a lot of you guys say I look like her, which

 I am looking at her right now and I don't think I look at her like at all, but that's

 And she's very pretty so I decided to just film this tutorial today and yeah, let's go

 Just wanted to let you guys know, I do not watch The Lion Game.

 My sister is obsessed with that show and she says that it's an amazing show so maybe

 First I'm going to prime my eyelid with the Eye Prep Lid Primer and this is from Sally's

 I like this primer for this tutorial because it gives out a brown tint, which is the eye

 So I'm going to go ahead and just apply this all over the base and into my crease.

 Now the look that she has is usually a nice little fall, autumn-y look, which I think

 So I'm going to go ahead and take the Naked Palette, and you guys know I use this a lot.

 I'm going to be using Buck and I'm just going to be applying this color onto the base of

 Now for the crease, taking the BH Cosmetics 88 Palette, I'm going to be applying this brown

 It's a nice little sparkly brown on my crease brush and there's not that much left because

 She kind of has an orange eye shadow, has an orange tint to it.

 So I'm going to be using Smog right here and just be applying this and kind of blending

 Now we're going to go ahead and take Elf's Liquid Eyeliner and line her eyes.

 And I'm going to go ahead and just apply some, just curl my lashes.

 Okay, now for cheeks I'm going to be using this Aziza Palette and I'm going to be using

 this nice bronze blush on my cheeks because she has this bronze look going on.

 I'm going to go ahead and just apply this onto the apples of my cheeks.

 Now as for lips, she just has a nice little soft nude pink lip.

 So I'm going to be taking 10 Beauty's Pinky Lip Gloss and just dab my finger and apply

 Thank you so much for watching and I guess I'll see you guys soon.

 Let me know what other videos you'd like to see in the down bar below.

 To be honest with you today, we're going to start with the main course and then we'll

 For the very simple reason that I'm actually stimulated by this dish and I can't wait to

 It's a new one I created just about 15 minutes ago, believe it or not.

 This is a crispy fried fish with garlic, ginger, fish sauce and brown sugar.

 We have three large tomatoes, five cloves of garlic like this, chopped.

 Two small chilies or just sufficiently whatever you need for your eating pleasure, your peppery

 Then we're going to do about 60 grams of sugar and four tablespoons of this delicious fish

 So what we do, we just let this simmer until it forms a nice thick sauce.

 We're going to heat the oil in there and just put that fish in there for five minutes.

 Always keep things clean, always keep things fresh, always keep things healthy.

 Beautiful tomatoes simmering in sugar, fish sauce, garlic, onion, water.

 And this beautiful chauf in this nice, clear, crisp frying oil from Armanti.

 Okay, the reason why we put it in a little bit of tissue is just to absorb the oil.

 Just spring onion, some little bit of spring onion to go on it.

 Enjoy it with some nice white rice or some nice boiled rice on the side.

 Well, you know, I've just put a nice squeeze of fresh lime on here.

 Today we're going to be making various size gift bags using the Tagged Bags, Boxes and More cartridges

 and this again is cut using the Tagged Bags, Boxes and More cartridge

 which allows you to put either a hole in the bag or a slanted oval to slide ribbon through.

 You can see here where it allows you to thread some smaller thin cord through your bag and your tag to hold onto the bag.

 So first thing you want to do with your 12x12 mat is select real dial size

 and I found that you can get two bags cut out of 12x12 piece of paper size 5 1⁄2 inches.

 Then you select the hole option and you select your tag and you can go ahead and cut.

 So now that you have your gift bag cut, the Cricut Expression leaves these little tick marks in the paper

 So after it's cut, you go ahead and score it where it's going to be folded and you can embellish it and decorate it.

 I used a stamp using VersaMark ink, leaving a little watermark on it.

 And then you go ahead and you fold it together and you tape it.

 And I found that using this terrifically tacky tape made by ProvoCraft works great with gift bags

 So after you tape your bag together, I cut out a tag using the tag bag boxes and more cartridge

 And again, I selected the hole option and I cut a 2-inch tag and then I ran it through the Cuddle Bug to emboss it

 and I fixed a little daisy on here, one and one-quarter inch daisy cut from the Walk in My Garden cartridge found on page 82

 and I attached that with a brad and put some cord and attached it to my gift bag

 and put a little goody inside of that bag for my friends and put some ribbon on it to decorate it.

 And that one, like I said, was made using the 12 by 24 mat and I found that by using this mat,

 the largest gift bag that you can make is 11-and-a-half inches wide.

 Now this one, I didn't use the hole option because I found that this little mark that the Cricut makes

 is nice to run ribbon through to hold your tag holder on there.

 So once you have that image cut out, again, you go ahead and take it and follow those tick marks and score your bag

 and again, I stamped it using Versamark ink and cut out many daisies using the Walk in My Garden cartridge

 and the daisies found on page 82 and then I attached all those with various color brads

 and once you have your bag decorated the way you like, you go ahead and assemble that together.

 Again, I recommend using that Terrifically Tacky Tape by ProvoCraft.

 And once you have it fixed together, I made a tag using the Tag, Bags, Boxes, and More cartridge again

 and this one can be found on page 112 in the manual and again, that Cricut expression makes little tick marks for your score lines

 so you go ahead and score it and I stamped this using the Versamark ink and attached a larger daisy from Walk in My Garden, page 82

 and affixed that down there with a brad and then you go ahead and assemble your tag

 and like I said, this one was made without the hole option so it was nice to run a piece of ribbon through to attach it to the bag

 and I put a little gift card in there and this I stamped with an image and put another little daisy on it

 and put a little stamped image on the inside of there for my friends and family.

 So you can have fun with your bags and again, they make several different sizes ranging from 11 1⁄2 inches, 5 1⁄2 inches, or even smaller

 If you have any further questions or you want more complete instructions written out, please feel free to go to my website at cupcakescreations.blogspot.com

 and I'll post all the written instructions there and I'll also have my video on my website.

 you're just going to want to brush out all your hair and then you're going to do a French

 braid on the side of your head that has like more hair of your part.

You pick up hair from that section, you add it to the piece, one

 of the three pieces that you're holding for your braid, and then you braid it in.

 how to do that, but it's actually pretty simple and after you practice it a while, it helps.

Now I just finished off the braid and I put a hair tie on it just

And my camera died and I didn't realize it, but it's just across her

 I had one little short piece left, or skinny piece I mean, and I just braided it all together.

 Because that piece is smaller, it creates a really cool twisted look.

 easy and quick and I really like it and it comes out pretty cool.

And these are really simple and if you want I can do some hair tutorials on

 can leave them below, even if it's not a hair tutorial, I don't mind.

 this friend and her name is Margo and she just put up her first video and I love her

 Hey everyone, in this video I'm going to show you how to make some ninja charms out of polymer clay.

 My initial idea was for these ninjas to be Valentine's Day ninjas, but you can put anything in their hands that you want.

 To make these charms, you'll need some polymer clay, which is an oven-baked clay.

 For a ninja like this one, you'll need a large piece for the body, a slightly smaller piece for the head,

 two pieces for the arms, a piece smaller than that for the little tie on the head,

 and then two very tiny, tiny pieces for the eyes, unless you want to paint those on after you bake.

 You'll also need a tiny piece of peach or flesh-colored clay, and then colors of whatever you want him to hold.

 To do this, push your finger right into the middle of that clay, and start forming a leg on either side.

 So, you should get a shape that looks kind of like a bubble letter A without the hole taken out of the middle.

 Next, take the piece for the head and roll it out into a 3D oval shape.

 Put either your fingernail or a tool and make a little dent in the top, the middle of the top part of it.

 I'm going to destroy this, and we're going to turn it into a rose.

 For a very basic rose, I just used four flattened pieces of clay.

 With the green, you're just going to roll out a very thin stem.

 You can also add a little tiny leaf and little green lines to the part where the flower buds.

 Once your arms are shaped well, you're going to take that thinner part and attach it near the shoulder.

 Then bring the thicker part around to look like it's holding the flower.

 Even if your ninja's not holding a flower, you're going to shape the arms like this to make it look like it's holding whatever you made.

 I flattened the face part into an elongated oval slash rectangle.

 I folded that piece in half and attached it on the side of the head.

 If you want to make this into a charm, go ahead and add an eye pin before you bake.

 For a chibi ninja, just roll out the body and make it slightly thinner on the top than it is on the bottom.

 The final steps on this guy were to add the face, eyes, and little tie on the side.

 I already showed you that in the previous ninja, so I just decided to go ahead and do it off camera.

 Anyway, if you make your own polymer clay ninja, then let me know and show me a picture.

 You can post it on my Facebook fan page, my Instagram, or send it to my Twitter.

 I have pink, green, yellow, and broken blue because there was only one blue and it was broken.

 Stay tuned for more polymer clay tutorials and other craft tutorials on this SoCraftastic channel.

 Okay, what we're going to start out with here are some biscuits.

 cooking methods in this little cooker, and this is one of them.

Now this does run off 12 volts, so you just plug it into the cigarette lighter.

 going to plug it in and then set my timer for about 25 minutes.

When I did the last batch and put them on for 30 minutes, they were

But when I started these, the biscuits were much colder than when I did my very

So I guess the colder they are, the longer they're going to need to cook.

So it took 30 minutes to get to this stage of brownness, then I flipped them over.

 Now I'm going to close the lid and cook them for another 10 minutes.

I got this, I rolled another tube, so I don't need this one anymore.

 Um, but you want it to fit nice and tight, which this doesn't, but that's my fault.

 And then, you wanna like, just like cut to the end of this one.

 And then, you wanna tape this top one and bottom one right here.

 You wanna cut it so it's like, I don't know, a centimeter behind the top one.

 Uh, you probably want it a little bit wider than that, so like that.

 That can be used for the clip, magazine, whatever you wanna call it.

 So, then you want the handle sort of like on an angle like that.

 So, you take your thing, and I'm doing it your way, so like cut it like that.

 Your scissors would be on the other side, like that, but you don't want this.

 And I'm not gonna tape it all the way, because that'll take forever.

 And you just wanna like, take some tape this way, that way, go over it a lot.

 Actually, before I put the handle on, but it's easy now, because you can just snip that off.

 Hey guys, it's Olga here and for today's lunch I'm going to show you how to make the most

 Personally, I don't buy veggie burgers from a store because if you look at the ingredients

 For the longest time I've been looking for the perfect veggie burger recipe because a

 And you know, unfortunately, my tummy does not digest beans that well.

 So when I came up with this recipe I was extremely excited because it tasted delicious,

 it was free of chemicals or artificial flavors and all that yucky stuff that we don't want

 The link for my recipe of how to prepare millet will be at the end of this video and also

 We'll also need carrots, red onion, garlic, zucchinis, parsley, spinach, millet flour

 For seasoning we're going to use chili pepper, cayenne pepper, cumin, sea salt and black

 Heat about a teaspoon of coconut oil in a large pan over medium heat and add your chopped

 Add the chopped vegetables to the pan and cook everything for another 5-7 minutes.

 To form the burgers I like using this half a cup measuring cup.

 Most of the time I eat these burgers with a large bowl of salad and a creamy dressing.

 Here I'm using my avocado chipotle dressing and some ham seeds.

 Or you could also get some gluten free buns and make yourself a tall yummy burger.

 If you're looking forward to trying this veggie burger don't forget to give this video a thumbs

 up and subscribe to my channel down below for more healthy lunch and snack ideas.

 I've picked all the winners for my giveaway and I've contacted them.

 So the winner for the YouTube giveaway who's going to receive a food processor is Lauren

 Lauren I sent you a message on YouTube so please check your YouTube inbox and reply

 Or you can just email me at Olga at Fablunch.com so I can send you the food processor.

Okay, you're probably wondering why it says part 1 in the title.

 Well, believe it or not, I have a few ways of highlighting and contouring my face and this is one of them.

 Or should I say the easiest one for me and hopefully for you too.

 So basically this routine is with my face done up, meaning I already have my eyeshadow, brows, foundation, etc.

 So this will actually be effortless since we're mainly using powders.

 Apply concealer of your choice where you want to highlight your face.

 So for me it would be under my eyes, cupid's bow, chin, nose, and between my brows.

I picked a light loose powder because I really want my eyes to pop.

 If you want more of a natural look, I would go for a translucent powder.

 So I'm just going to apply the loose powder where I apply the concealer.

 I like doing this because it pretty much highlights it very well.

 And it helps your concealer not to crease, especially if you're oily like me.

 So get your favorite bronzer and basically I'm just going to use my ID to contour my cheeks.

 I normally don't do this but when I want more of a defined look, then I do so.

 So angle it diagonal from the top of your ear and just stop halfway.

 And I really love, love contouring because it changes the shape of your face and defines it.

 So here I'm just applying just a little bit more on the cheek area.

 As you can see, I have a small nose or should I say I need a bridge.

 So I use the same bronzer and I just make two lines starting from the tip of my nose

 And I just blend, blend, blend till I get the shape that I want.

 You want to blend it well because this will remove any harsh line that you made from contouring it.

If you want to intensify the highlighted areas, then I would use NARS Albatross.

 And this has a lot of shimmer so I would apply it very gently and a little goes a long way.

 And oops, I kind of forgot but if you want to seal everything in, then I would use a translucent powder.

 Hi girls, so obviously I'm going to be Barbie in this tutorial.

 And of course the first thing that I'm going to do is apply foundation all over my face.

 I'm just using L'Oreal's True Match in W4 using a foundation brush.

 And again just putting the foundation all over my face with the brush.

 Next I'm going to conceal under my eyes using Hard Candy's, nobody's perfect, oh no not

 And this stuff seriously is so thick and covers so much so that's why I chose this.

 Okay now we're going to set everything with a powder and I'm just using Rimmel's Stay

 Now I'm going to prime my eyes using a NYX Jumbo Pencil in Milk and I chose this because

 of the white it makes bright colors pop and also the colors stick to it so awesomely.

 So if you've never used that pencil before you should absolutely get it.

 Next I'm just going to use this Maybelline Duo and I'm going to use the darker color

 that's in it and just define the outer corner of my eye and I'm just using my finger.

 And this part does not have to be perfect at all because my entire lid space is going

 So yeah just blending that out with my fingers and now I'm taking that lighter color in that

 same duo and putting that lighter color all over my lid and I'll probably blend it upwards

 Okay next I'm using this Petal Pusher Palette and using those two colors labeled or that

 I squared off for you and putting it on the rest of my lid just blending out all the colors

 And then I'm using those two top brighter colors and putting it on my lid also just

 I just wanted whenever in person whenever you looked at my eye it looked like there

 was so many different dimensions of purple and I love that so much.

 And now I'm using a pink because you can't be Barbie without pink.

 So taking that bright pink color and just sticking it under my brow bone.

 Did that just to see while I was doing it I wanted to make sure that it sparkled.

 And then applying that same pink color from the Elf Palette on the outer corner just so

 Okay and now I'm going to start doing the blue in the inner corner of my eye and I'm

 just applying it in the inner corner blending it upwards into the pink and the purple.

 And of course I'm putting it also on my waterline and then I'm going to take some more

 And now I'm taking that dark crease color just to define the outer corner of my eye

 And again just deepening the outer corner with that dark purple from the Wet n Wild

 And then I'm taking those two colors right there that I just showed you and blending

 And now I'm taking that darker color on the right side of the palette and I'm just going

 And now like I said before just smudging some more of that purple and pink on the bottom

 And the reason why I'm extending it out so far is because I'm going to put bottom lashes

 And I'm using All Maves Black Liquid Liner and I'm doing like a super wing because my

 eyes are really small and close together so if I made the wing less dramatic then it would

 And then I just use a bottom, one top lash and just cut it in half for my bottom lashes.

 And clean up the white from the glue and clean up, make that line look crisp with some liquid

 And then of course use the jumbo pencil and milk for the bottom, that way your eyes look

 And then of course I'm lining the bottom of them to mesh more with the top.

 And now I added just a little bit more pink and touching up the blue.

 Now for the cheeks, for the cheeks of course I used Elf's Pink Passion.

 And I rubbed a little bit of the MAC MSF in the semi-precious line in rose quartz I think

 And then I'm just using the NYC bronzer all over my cheeks just to contour because it's

 And then also contouring my nose just to make my nose look slimmer.

 And now I wanted a base for my lips that way it was, my lips are so pigmented as you guys

 And it's a purple color, I'm sorry I don't know the name of it, but I will have it in

 And just line your lips however you want, you know I'm just lining them like normal.

 And then I'm going to use Double Up on the lipstick, the Victoria's Secret Pulse lipstick.

 It's like a really bright pink and then NYX's Harmonica which is like the perfect Barbie

 And then I'm following it with the Victoria's Secret Pulse lipstick that I actually got

 Just rubbing that and it came out too shiny so you'll see me dab in a second.

 And I got this wig from Walmart for like five dollars and it is not a good wig at all but

 of course I had to do something to it, I couldn't just leave it down so I decided to put pigtails

 This is the finished look guys, I hope you guys enjoyed this tutorial and you guys have

 Hi everybody, my name is magician Dave J. Castle, president of LearnMagicTricks.org.

 Today I'm going to show you the performance and the explanation on how to do the Crazy

 This is an illusion where you take two rubber bands, place one just like so, place the other

 Now there would be no way for me to pull one rubber band through the other because that

 But, since I'm a magician, I can melt one rubber band through the other just like so.

 Now I'm going to do the explanation on how to do the Crazy Man's Handcuffs.

 This is a magic trick that's been done by famous magicians such as David Copperfield

 And all you do is you take on your left hand, put one around your thumb and your first finger.

 And with your other hand, you put one around your first finger, drop it through here, and

 then also bring your thumb through here so you get in this position.

 You take your middle finger and touch the rubber band right there.

 And what's happening is when you pull this rubber band back, you put your middle finger

 Once you're in this position, the middle finger holds that tight.

 Now this first finger comes under the one by your thumb and inside.

 At this point, you quickly move towards the rubber band and then you pull them apart.

 So once again, all the moves happen on this hand, not this hand.

 So once again, when you start this magic effect, you pull it like this to show that if you

 Once you're in this position, you go to step two, which is you take and release your first

 Your first finger comes up and under the rubber band next to your thumb.

 And then at this point, you let go of the one between your first finger and your middle

 So watch this video several times with some rubber bands and try it in front of a mirror

 Once you feel comfortable with the move, it will be very easy and you won't even have

 You show that if you're going to pull this through here, it would be impossible because

 I hope you enjoyed the crazy man's handcuffs rubber band trick.

 Once again, my name is David Castle, president of LearnMagicTricks.org, the hottest magic

 Today we're going to show you how to put on some tri-bars on your bike.

 You've got the two tri-bars right here and your four spacers that go right here on either side of your handlebar clamps.

 You've got a torque rating if you have carbon fiber handlebars, which is highly recommended you follow these new perimeters.

 You want to go right in between your handlebar grip tape or grip tape, whatever you want to call it.

 We didn't cut back the grip tape on this bike, but you can if you want to if you want more width to space out your arms or your position.

 Instead of pinching one more than the other on the bottom and the top like I'm doing right now, try and get them nice and even.

 Okay, now that it's on, you can choose to limit where you want the tri-bars to be.

 And with these ones, the TBO1s, you can actually adjust the pitch of the bar by unscrewing this top bolt right here.

 You can pivot it, you can drop it, or you can slide it forward and backward.

 Be sure to follow these measurement limits right here, the limit screws, or the limit measurements.

 So you don't go too far out and drop off the front of the bike, that would be bad.

 But you've got a lot of play, a lot of area to expand and decrease all of in here.

 You've got two setting screws, one for more forward design and one to be pushed back a little bit more.

 And this one's going to be a 4mm bolt, allen key metric as well.

 And as well, up here on the top of the platform, you can go left or right.

 Once you have it where you want it, your setting, get your elbow pad, kind of curve it a little bit, stick it in, just like a sticker.

 Don't forget to wrap your front and route any cables or any shifters if you want to.

The other day I was at my favorite store, TJ Maxx, and I was walking around the little cosmetics area, and they had something that I thought was amazing.

They had a Cynthia Rowley Precision Blending Sponge, so in other words a beauty blender.

So I thought I'd pick it up, and it was only $6, which I thought was an awesome idea.

 The ones at Sephora are about $30 or $40, so I thought $6, you can't go wrong with that.

 The way it works is, if you look at it now, it's originally about half that size, and what you do is you run it under water, and you squeeze it a few times while you're running it, and then when you're all done you turn the water off and you just squeeze it out.

 Then you put it in a towel and you squeeze it in there to get all the excess water out, and it gets that big.

 And then to wash this, you actually just use water on it, and you put a little bit of gentle soap, like hand soap, and then just kind of go like that to wash it.

 So it's really simple to wash, and I think it's pretty simple to use.

So I thought that I would kind of do a review on it and show you how to use it at the same time.

 What I'm going to be using is my BB cream and my little Roli under-eye darkness eyeball thingy, and I'm going to be using that to kind of show you how it works.

 Okay, so if you look, it's kind of like this little marshmallow shape, and then there's the bigger side and the pointier side.

 And the bigger side is what you use for bigger spots, and the smaller side you use for smaller.

 So I'm going to use the smaller first, and I'm going to start it off with my concealer.

 And then I kind of want it to dry a little bit because I don't want to just be smudging it around.

 So you get the tip, and what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to bounce it around like that.

 You don't want to smudge it, you're going to want to bounce it off of your skin like that.

 Okay, and I think it's kind of funny, like the way you bounce it, especially when I do it this way, I feel like it's something like jumping on my skin, on my face.

 I kind of imagine, I don't know, this is really random, but I kind of imagine there's a Teletubby on there and it's just like bump, bump, bump, bump, bump, bump.

 So, I like it, it kind of entertains me while I'm putting my makeup on.

 Okay, now I'm going to go to the larger areas, and what I've seen some people do is they put it on their hand and put it on their hand and do that,

 but I actually just put it directly on the sponge, that seems a lot more intelligent to me.

 So I just do it like that, and I only do a little bit at a time, like, I don't want it to fall like that.

 And you're just going to want to, I just kind of like play some parts around, and it's going to be the same thing when you're just going to want to bounce it off of your skin.

 I like the idea of keeping it, like the sponge being wet, because it feels kind of like it's like moisturizing my face while I'm putting it on, while I'm putting this on at the same time, which is really nice.

 And then I kind of, like some people might not want to do this, but I kind of try and bounce it around on my hairline, like once there, if you see, I mean there's product on there, but it's not like setting on the top,

 so I bounce it around when there's not too much, just to get like, so there's no like harsh lines around the scalp.

 And a lot of product goes a long way, like I don't know, you saw I just had a little bit, and I've covered all that area.

 The nose, like a lot of, it says to use the side one like that, but I just kind of use the big side anyways.

 It's really nice, like I was saying, it feels like it's moisturizing, and I feel like this like goes in a lot better than the other products.

 It goes in a lot better than using my hands, because that's what I use, because when I use, like most people use brushes, but whenever I use brushes, it looks like weird and streaky,

 and it looks like I've like painted on my face, like I've literally painted on my face.

And I also, I do the same thing when there's nothing on it really, where I bring it up on my ear like that, just so there's not like a weird line.

 And I also make sure that I get it on my neck, because this BB cream is starting to get tanner than me, which is a little unfortunate.

 Doing this is actually what I've been doing every single day now, instead of like, or every day that I use BB cream at least, instead of using my fingers.

Like I'll use it sometimes a little bit for the concealer if I feel like it's not really getting in very well, but usually I just use this.

I don't know if you guys can really see too much of a difference, but I honestly can.

 Like I was saying, with my fingers, when I put on my fingers, then I have to do that, then I have to wash off my fingers, where this, like it's easy to rinse it off real quickly.

 And now I'm gonna use my Ulta in light medium, pressed powder, pressed powder, and I'm gonna use that as like my setting powder.

 And I was actually reading the back of this, and it's the back of the box, like this is the box it comes in, and it actually says you can use dry things on there, like you can use the pressed powder, but I haven't actually tried that, and I don't think I would like it.

 I mean I might like it, but I feel like putting, using something dry to put on something dry, and using something wet to put on something wet makes sense.

 I, for a while there, I was using, when I was using my BB cream, I wouldn't put a setting powder on it, and then now that I do, like I feel kind of stupid for not ever doing it, because it just looks so much better.

 And then for my blush, I'm going to use my Warm Soul blush by MAC.

Also, if you like my eye makeup, I actually did a tutorial for that already, and I'll link it somewhere around here, and then you can go and watch it if you would like to.

 I personally definitely recommend buying one of these, and right now I've been seeing them a lot at TJ Maxx.

 I've been seeing like the Cynthia Rowley one, and I saw some other like random brands, but I keep seeing them for like $5-$7 at TJ Maxx, and I have heard that the Sephora one works a lot better, but with this being $6 and that one being $30, I cannot see spending five times more.

 It would really have to do something incredibly amazing for me to want to buy it, and I just, I couldn't see it being too, like so like necessary.

 Thank you guys all very much for watching my review, and if you want to make sure you never miss one, make sure you subscribe if you haven't already.

 Stay tuned for my next video, and until then, I'll see you all soon.

 Something you probably never thought you could eat, but you can.

 Okay, now that we've remembered to turn off the electric fence, let's step into our pumpkin patch here and pick up some flowers.

 We're also going to be picking a few of the smaller, more tender leaves.

 I'm also told that picking these flowers will help the plants produce more fruit, more pumpkins.

 Okay, we've rinsed the flowers in cold water, and now we're going to start preparing them to cook up.

 First thing you're going to want to do is around the base of the flower, take off these little spiny things right here.

 Then we're gently going to pop top the flower off at the base of the stem.

 Open the flower up gently, and also pluck out this little pile of looking whatever it is in the middle.

I don't know why you're not allowed to eat these, they just say you shouldn't.

 Now we could just eat the flower parts, and that would make things a lot simpler.

 And the leaves, well we all know how good green leafy things are for you.

 You just have to kind of catch the leaf right at the base here, and pull it.

 You can see it pulls off all the little spines off the back of the leaf, like that.

 Then we're going to rinse it under water, and give it a little rub like that under water to tender it up a little bit.

 And that's going to go in with the rest of what you're cooking.

 With the stems, from where the base of the flower is, catch the edges,

 And that will get rid of all the little spinies that are on there,

 and leave you just a nice tender middle part, like that, which should snap up for eating.

 Peeling these stems and leaves to go with the dish might seem a bit tedious,

 Once you finish stripping it, just start at the top, snapping off little morsels,

 until it gets down to where it starts to be a little bit more tender.

 Until it gets down to where it starts to be a little bit stringy.

 You see it starts to get tough, get rid of that part, it's not too tender.

 You could probably use butter, which would make it really nice and rich,

 So just let this saute down until these are all kind of wilted and tender,

 As you can see, it cooks down quite a bit, something like spinach does.

 So if you're serving more than just yourself, you're going to want to pick quite a bit more.

First I'm going to just demonstrate holding the hoop firmly against

 your back using your forearms to hold the hoop flat in front of you.

 left to right to see what it feels like firm against your back.

 a firm, powerful toss, and then pushing and rocking forward and back.

And you're walking in the flow or the direction that the hoop is flowing.

If your hoop's going to spin to the left, your left foot is forward

 and you're going to spin on your left toe at the same time as spinning the hoop in the

 spin on the toe that's forward in the same direction as the flow of the hoop.

 once you find what I call the sweet spot, which is where you get your biggest bang for

 your push, pushing into the hoop when it lands on your belly gives you way more control.

 What is going on man it's your crazy one eight seven zero with the unboxing of the new Samsung

So I did go with the 16 gigabyte black and it's also the AT&T version.

 you back about 200 bucks on a two-year contract or 750 if you want to buy it on a non-contract.

 So here we have the box which looks like a pretty cool wooden box.

 on the front and towards the back you also have a quick rundown of the specs and features which I

 start guide just in case this is your first phone and you really don't know how to set it up or

This little paper here will let you know and put you up on game on how to set everything up.

 Next we have the S4 itself which I will save for last and digging a little deeper in the box we

First we have a pretty long micro USB cable, a Samsung power adapter which

 is used to charge the phone and we also get some Samsung headphones which look like they have a

 and last but not least we also have the battery which is a 2600 milliamp.

 Galaxy S4 there is a protector on the back side that gives you instruction on how to remove the

 back cover and another protector on the screen that tells you don't text and drive which I still see

So the S4 is rocking a 5 inch 1920 by 1080 HD Super AMOLED display.

 top you'll find a headphone jack to the right hand side you have the sleep and wake button,

 volume rockers on the other side and towards the bottom you have the micro USB port which is used

 and there's also the built-in LED flash and I really like this back cover it sort of has like

As far as OS it's running Android 4.2.2 Jelly Bean and under the hood the S4

 S4 throughout the week so please make sure to be on the lookout.

 follow me on twitter MrCrazy1870 and I'll catch you guys later.

 Hello, it's me Gemma and I'm going to show you my recipe for chocolate buttercream

 which is so simple and yummy and easy you're just gonna be making it all the

 and I have got here 300 grams of softened butter, make sure it's nice and

 squishy first, and 540 grams of sifted icing sugar, about four tablespoons of

 milk and also I have melted some lovely dark chocolate, there's 180 grams in

 by putting my butter in straight in the bowl like that so that's 300 grams and

 I'm just gonna pop that on at quite a high speed so medium to high I'd say for

 It's been going for about five minutes now and it's turned all pale and white

 and fluffy and so this is at the perfect stage to add the sugar which I've

 already sifted and I'm gonna add half of this first and then give it a bit of a

So shovel it in, making a mess, and then turn it on and start on a very low

 speed like so and then when it all comes together turn up the speed to a

 So that has had about three minutes and so I'm going to shove all the rest of my sugar in because it's all

 And do exactly the same thing again so start slow, speed it up and let it go for

 Okay so it's time to put the milk in so I'm just gonna keep it on a really low

 speed and just put in four tablespoons of milk and then just turn it up and let

 So it's now time to put the chocolate in so just pop it down to a minimum speed

 Make sure it's still runny but not hot in any way because you don't want it to

 low to medium speed and let it do its thing for about two minutes.

So once it's all mixed through you do want to give it a bit of a scrape with

 a spatula because there will be some bits so get your spatula in there and just

 give it a really good scrape around just to get all those bits in there.

 Right and then just give it one last little blast and then it's ready to eat.

 Okay it's ready and it is smelling and looking amazing and definitely tasting

 amazing and I'm gonna pop mine on a chocolate cupcake and I'm just gonna

 grab a bit on my spoonula and blob it about and if you want to see another way

 of icing a cake and click on the link now for a video about piping buttercream.

 ball thingies and my favorite way of decorating with these is long distance

 So there it is that's my recipe for really easy delicious chocolate butter

 cream and if you like this video then don't forget to click like and if you

 want to see me do more long-distance decorating then don't forget to comment

 in the comments box below and also don't forget to subscribe if you haven't

 If you want to subscribe to my channel then click subscribe now.

I'm going to show you how to get your pole set up and get your hook on and everything.

 So the first step, as you can see I have this string here, that's going to be my starting out.

 Before you can put it through the holes on your pole, you need to put it underneath this black metal bar here.

 So I've done that, otherwise if you don't do that it will not be able to reel in.

 Now your next step is going to be to put it through all the holes on the pole.

 I'm going to do that now and then I will show you guys what to do next.

 So after you get it through the holes on the pole, you're going to take the very end of your string and a swivel,

What the swivel does is, as you can see right here, it's like a little clip.

 It unclips and allows you to attach a lot of different things like lures and hooks.

 If you were to just tie the hook to the end here, all you could use was a hook and you'd have to cut the line.

 So swivels allow you to attach multiple different things like lures and different bait.

See here how it has one hole right there and one hole at the very top.

 You want to put it through the one at the very top right there.

 So you're going to put it through and once you get it there, you're going to pull two ends together like this.

 So you can see I have one there and you're going to twist this four times, or at least three times.

I'm going to have to back it up because I need a little bit more line here.

 You're going to take this end and you're going to slide it right through there just like that.

 You're going to tie it and it will go zip right there onto there.

 Now, some hooks will just be a plain hook and some hooks will have these.

 These are really easy and all you need to do is undo the swivel.

 Now, if you have weights, weights that have like a hole on one end, you can also put those on the swivel.

 You're going to take it, alright, and you're going to clip it onto the end.

 And that's pretty much just the basic thing for attaching all different types of bait.

 It's the same exact thing, except you don't have to go through the beginning process of putting it underneath the reel and all that stuff.

 I'll be doing more videos on fishing and just on outdoors and a whole bunch of things.

 And right there, it will talk about what my channel, or what our channel is about.

 Hey guys, so today I'll be showing you how to make mango fruit roll-ups.

 The only ingredient you will need is four to five ripe champagne mangoes.

 I also used a blender, but I recommend using a food processor since you won't be making a giant smoothie or anything like that.

 Pour the puree onto the tray and spread evenly, about an eighth of an inch thick.

 You might want to bake closer to three hours though, since my batch was a little too crispy.

 Once it's done, place a second sheet of parchment paper on the top, press down,

 it's because I forgot to do it, and it actually made cutting pretty difficult.

I hope you did a better job than I did, and thank you for watching.

 Being very honest at the beginning, cheap braces do not exist at all.

 So, you have to understand that orthodontic work is very expensive

 and it doesn't let the orthodontist, you know, reduce the cost of the treatment.

 Ask for some discount or to convert the payment into installments.

 Bear in mind that the discount plans are not the insurance plans.

 Discount plans allow you to save significant amounts when you go to purchase braces,

 but the savings depend on the selected type of plan as well as your braces.

 Three, ask your orthodontist if it may work out a payment schedule to get your dental braces.

 Four, you must try visiting a few orthodontists and find out who is charging the least

 because there is a possibility that some are charging higher than others.

 Five, you might find some orthodontic training school where the students experience to design and manufacture braces.

 So, you can request them to provide you those braces for a reasonable price.

 Six, American Dental Association offers to get treatments from public clinics.

 These clinics are administered by the students at the institutes

 and the students are professional dentists completing their specialization in orthodontics.

 Seven, you may try finding some public clinics which are promoted by other dental associations or boards

 Eight, treatment from these public clinics are very low cost and even sometimes free of charge.

 Nine, you might get facility of dental care credit for which you will be allowed to pay in installments.

 And ten, you can try finding some orthodontic clinics in your area that offer discounts at rates.

 The disclaimer at the end of the video, which is this video, is for general information purposes only.

 We will not be held liable for any reliance on the content and we do not endorse the content.

 We make no representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, about the completeness,

 accuracy, reliability, suitability, or availability of the content.

 It's really very easy to make just a few ingredients you require and your fruity will be ready

 You're gonna love it more than the normal fruity because it's very natural and there is nothing artificial in it

 one small size raw mango or kairi and one small size alfanzo mango

 Keep your alfanzo mango and your raw mango add about 1 and 1 half glass of water

 Keep it on high flame till then on the side you are going to take about remaining two glasses of water

 So now let's remove the raw mango and alfanzo mango and you can see they are completely boiled

 And you can just use the same water in which we have boiled the alfanzo mango and raw mango.

 Okay, so we have got all the pulp so next add in your pulp water into the sugar water

 So next we are gonna grind it or blend it until everything is blended and nicely combined

 So you can see it has got a beautiful color now we are gonna strain it

 So your fruity is ready now keep it in the fridge and serve it chilled

 And you can see it has got a natural beautiful color and that natural essence and flavor and it tastes exactly like fruity

 And trust me, it tastes better than fruity got that natural taste

 And really easy to make just few ingredients and your fruity is ready as I said before

 No artificial coloring or flavors can be served as a nice summer cooler and really quick

 For this tutorial you will need a pair of knitting needles and a ball of yarn.

 Special thanks to our sponsor Imperial Yarn for providing today's yarn.

 Today we are using their native twist line in the color Tufted Primrose.

 Twist knitting is a method for working all of your stitches on the right side of your

 So rather than turning your work around to purl, you can actually create your wrong side

 Now if that sounds a little bit confusing, don't worry, we'll make it all make sense

 Now what it is not is unknitting, which a lot of people think of as tinking, which is

 And that would be like this, so you insert your needle and you're undoing the stitches.

 So to backwards knit, when you get to the end of your right side row, you've done all

 We're going to for step one, take our main needle, which is now our working needle, but

 We're going to insert it into this first stitch that's on what is now our main needle in our

 Now for step two, we're going to take our working yarn and we're going to wrap it over

 All right, that's going to twist the stitch over the top and back around.

 Now for step three, we're going to pull this stitch towards you and through the stitch

 You can tighten that down a little bit to make sure your tension is even.

 And then for step four, we'll let that stitch drop off of our needle and down.

 We're going to insert our working needle into the next stitch through the back loop, come

 over the top of the needle with our working yarn, pull the yarn towards us through the

 And we can see now we're creating knit stitches that are made backwards.

 All right, and you can just continue doing this until you reach the end of the row.

 And it'll keep you from ever having, whoops, I just slipped that off.

 It'll keep you from ever having to purl again unless, of course, your pattern calls for

 We're going to do the very last stitch by knitting it backwards.

 And then all you do is start knitting the other direction like you would normally.

 Now I should clarify and say that this technique is going to work most effectively when you're

 It's not going to work so well when you're doing other types of stitch patterns because

 you would still have to create a purl stitch if you had a pattern that required you to

 So use this mostly when you're knitting stockinette fabric flat.

 So it could become helpful if you're making carpet and sweater.

 So sweet though, you make it on Sunday, you put it in the freezer bag.

 Hola, I'm Daisy Martinez and we're wrapping things up for spring with some delicious lamb.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make a boneless rolled leg of lamb and I am going

 I know lamb and rosemary is a common combination but so is lamb and mint.

 I'm not going to do mint today but I am going to use an herb that has mint notes in it and

 You can see that pretty leaf and epazote is a combination of mint and cilantro.

 And I have about one large tablespoon because the taste is rather strong.

 And what we're going to do is we're going to rub this all over the inside of the cut

 I'm going to place this rack in a preheated 375 degree oven for about 20 minutes a pound.

 So between 15 and 20 minutes a pound it should be 140, 150 degrees for medium rare.

 It's taken my roast about an hour and 45 minutes to register between 140 and 150, about 145.

 And I've let the roast sit for 15 minutes just to let the juices redistribute.

 And now we're going to slice our beautiful boneless leg of lamb.

 I made some boursin cheese scented mashed potatoes with chives and herbs and it just

 And the taco goes off with some very simply roasted brussel sprouts with just a little

 Hi everybody, this is Diana from Sweet y Salado and today we're going to make Alfajores, which

 In this video, I'm going to show you the recipe that I use at home to make them.

 As always, the link for this recipe is going to be available at the end of the video and

 This recipe is part of a holiday dessert collaboration that I'm doing with two Colombian

 channels which are La Cacerola de Silvana and Clau Melocotón and they're going to show

 So if you want to check them out, I'm going to leave you the links for those videos at

 To make these Alfajores, we're going to add some all-purpose flour to a large bowl.

 We're going to whisk all of this really well and then we're going to set it aside.

 Then we're going to add unsalted room temperature butter to a large mixing bowl.

 And now we're going to beat this really well at low speed until it's light and fluffy.

 Now we're going to start adding all of our dry ingredients very slowly.

 And at the end, we're going to end up with a crumbly, sandy texture.

 This is completely normal, but make sure that it's actually workable.

 Then we're going to divide our dough in half and we're going to place each half over plastic

 We cover it really well with the plastic wrap and then we're going to store it in the fridge

 After about one hour, we're going to take it out of the fridge and place it over a floured

 We're also going to flour a rolling pin and then we're going to roll it out until it's

 And because this is made with cornstarch, it's actually going to be a little bit dry

 and it's going to crack a little bit, but you can go ahead and mend it with your hands.

 Then using a 2 inch cookie cutter, we're going to cut out our cookies.

 This is about 5 centimeters and if you don't have a cookie cutter, you can use a lid or

 And also remember that because these are sandwiches, you need to cut them out in pairs.

 Then with a spatula, we're going to carefully lift them off and place them on a cookie sheet

 that's been covered with parchment paper or a silicone baking mat.

 And then we're going to keep doing this until we run out of dough.

 Then we're going to bake them at 350 degrees for about 10 to 13 minutes or until the underside

 We're going to let them rest for about 1 minute on the cookie sheet and then we're going to

 The filling for these alfajores is arequipe or dulce de leche, which nowadays you can

 find at many different grocery stores, but if you want to learn how to make it at home,

 all you have to do is click on it right now and it'll take you to the video where I show

 We're also going to decorate them with some shredded coconut, but if you don't want to

 use coconut, you can just cover them with a little bit of powdered sugar.

 We're going to place the arequipe on the underside of half of all the cookies.

 And with the help of two spoons, we're going to place about one teaspoon on each one.

 Then we place the other half of the cookies on top of the arequipe, with the underside

 Then we cover the edges of each cookie sandwich with the coconut.

 And like I said, you don't have to decorate these cookies with shredded coconut, because

 what you can do is just decorate them with a little bit of powdered sugar.

 And remember that if you want to check out more holiday dessert videos, you can click

 on the images right now and they will take you to the videos that are part of this collaboration.

 If you enjoyed this video and this recipe, please give it a thumbs up, share it with

 This is Ty with GreenRegimen.com and this is week three of our intermediate smoothie

 To stay consistent with our green smoothie meal replacements, this smoothie is called

 And you know, as of today, I say we might as well retire the old adage, an apple a day

 keeps the doctor away and replace it with a smoothie a day keeps the doctor away.

 And cantaloupe, as you remember, is high in vitamin C and vitamin A. And the apple is

 So we're not using ice today because we're using frozen fruit, specifically frozen mango.

 So high in vitamin A, high in vitamin B, and it's great for our skin.

 Now celery has a very high water content, which keeps our bodies hydrated, as well as

 But for this recipe, we're only going to use half the celery stalk.

 Now rainbow chard is high in vitamins K, A, and C, but we really love our leafy greens

 because they're full of vital nutrients, which are natural health boosters.

 So I blended this for about 30 seconds, but depending on what type of blender you have,

 you might want to blend it for closer to a minute just to make sure that that celery

 Alrighty guys, so I've just minced up all my meat there, over there in the mincer.

You're telling me you're going to do pasta plus your Bolognese sauce,

 Alrighty, so now we've got the lid from our camp oven, we've got the product called the

 Windbreaker from Southern Metal Spinners, and it's sitting on our burner.

 And we're going to spread out my onions and garlic and my bacon pieces.

So now I've got about 500 grams of mince here that we minced up before.

 So Mick, what sort of herbs are you using at the moment for this sauce?

 Now, with cooking pasta, do you still need to put some salt into it, don't you?

 is that there is a trivet on the bottom that separates the burner from the bottom of the camp oven.

 We did have to remove that, just so that the water boiled, because it's direct heat now.

 Our pasta, our sauce is ready to go, we're going to plate it up.

 So this is a way we do a one pot pasta in our camp oven, on the camp oven mate.

 square looking stitch that works well in circles and on wavy lines, on straight

You can change the look of the stitch by changing the distance between

 Today I'm going to demonstrate working between two parallel lines, working from

 and angling it to the lower line inside the loop of my working thread, over the

 but before I pull it all the way I'll insert my needle in the top line where I

So again angle down to the baseline, over the working thread, put

 needle in place than pull the stitch too tight and have to straighten it out.

 angling down to the baseline over the working thread, putting the needle in

 the same thing and you'll tighten up the stitch around the needle there, but

 then you need to take your needle out, don't pull it through, and anchor the

For more tips and techniques on hand embroidery stop by and visit me at

 Now because I'm following a recipe that a friend sent me, I am not going to do my regular

 Okay, for this recipe you're going to need a heavy saucepan with a good tight fitting

 The lid that comes with this pot has a vent hole in it and I don't want a vent hole.

 You're going to need a quarter cup of lard, two cups of flour sifted, half a teaspoon

 I have a cup of unpacked brown sugar, seven to eight tablespoons of cold water, cinnamon.

 Okay, so here's our flour and I'm not going to do my butter pastry because like I said

 this is somebody else's recipe and I'm not going to mess with it.

 I don't know folks, I get in trouble when I follow instructions.

 I tell you folks, it was minus 32 a week ago and now all the snow is melting and it's foggy

 Okay, so we're going to start by just trickling a little bit of cold water and mixing this

 Now I'm just going to set this aside and let it rest for a minute and get my apples ready.

 Now, if you ever use one of these contraptions, this is something I learned in the bakery.

 Don't put your apple on the prongs of a peeler, blossom side down.

 And I'm just going to cut through these so that I have slices of apple.

 I'm going to do one more apple and leave the other one for Papa's lunch tomorrow.

 Because I have a feeling the apple pot pie won't make it to his lunch.

 I've got to take all these peels and put them in the pig pot for tomorrow.

 And I'll clean up and we'll start with the pastry and the layering.

 We're going to take part of our pastry and we're going to roll it out.

 Part of this flour is whole wheat, so I don't know if it's going to work as good.

 Now, I just want to make sure the bottom is really well covered only because it is the bottom.

 And we're just going to sprinkle a generous amount of the sugar.

 And then we're going to repeat the process with the squares of pastry.

 Well, I must have done something right because I had the exact amount.

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to dot the bottom of our square with the sugar.

 What we're going to do is we're going to dot the top with butter.

 I'll meet you at the stove, but I've got to clean up and get supper set.

 And we're supposed to take one cup of boiling water or half fill the saucepan.

 And as soon as this comes to a boil, we turn it down to minimum.

 Hi, I'm Denise Jardine and welcome to the Dairy-Free Gluten-Free Kitchen.

 One of the most important things that you can have in the Dairy-Free Gluten-Free Kitchen

 So I was a little bit of a mad scientist in putting it together.

 I basically worked with a bunch of different blends of flours in countless combinations

 What we're going to have is a brown rice flour, which adds a lot of stability to whatever

 To that, we're going to add both potato starch, not to be confused with potato flour, and

 And then we're going to add a protein structure, which is our sorghum flour.

 Both of the potato starch and tapioca flour add lightness to whatever you're making, whereas

 So all of these are really important to use in combination when you're making a gluten-free

 So what you'll notice is one of the things that I don't use in my mix is xanthan gum

 And the reason for that is I like to be able to have a baseline mix that you can simply

 take and dredge a piece of chicken in or use it for baked goods or cookies or cakes or

 So the xanthan gum and bar gum are added ingredients in my book.

 So each recipe is a little bit different and the gums are tailored to the specific needs

 So we've got, in place of the sorghum flour, if you don't tolerate that, you can use any

 So for an example, amaranth, quinoa, garbanzo bean, millet, almond are all great protein

 So for now, what we're going to do is we're going to get started with our mix.

 And with that, we're going to also have our brown rice flour and sorghum flour.

 This recipe can be found in the Dairy-Free Gluten-Free Kitchen.

 Yes, hello, this is Martin Young of Sitting Spiritually and I'm about to show you some

 maintenance work we would suggest you might want to undertake on your swing seat.

 We're at the award-winning Ford Abbey Gardens in Dorset and we're by their great red pagoda

 which now has a matching Harmony two-seater swirl-back swing seat in it.

 The reason this pagoda is here is because of, you can just see in the centre of the

 lake there, the spout to what will be, when it comes on, it may come on while this video

 is on, a 165 foot high fountain which sometimes gets carried by the wind and Alice came up

 with a wonderful idea of using these four pillars and putting the roof of a pagoda which

 And I'm going to just quickly show you, if you can just bear with me to watch, quickly

 show you some maintenance work you might want to do on your swing seat to take advantage

 of this dry spell we've had because the moisture content of the timber will be as low now as

 I'll pass the camera to Siobhan and I'll just show you exactly what we want to do.

 So we start with the tools we need, either a rubber mallet if you've got one or a substantial

 hammer and a block of wood, two 17mm spanners and a 13mm socket set.

 OK, so what we're going to do first is to use the morse's taper here and tap down the

 beam so we put on a block of wood, give it a tap and then the same the other end, block

 Now I change over to 17mm spanners, locking the back with one and using the other and

 this is only a few weeks ago we delivered this seat but you can see there's still slack

 That's one end, doing the same, locking the back and some slack there again, taking that

 These long eye bolts, very important, using again a spanner or a screwdriver to stop them

 turning and you can see we're getting movement there with them.

 Depending on the age of your seat you'll be quite pleasantly surprised how much you

 So you've done the beam, you've done the two eye bolts on the frame, we now turn our attentions

 There are four shorter eye bolts, we're going to lock one with the spanner here, give it

 a tap, one, two, three, you can see that tightens up, you've got one, two, three, four

 Turning your attention to the 13mm, what we're going to do, if you bring the camera right

 around here Siobhan, so they can see, come round the back here so they can see, look

 there are ten of these, five each side and if you watch carefully, look, one, two, even

 after a few weeks there's a little bit of slack there to take up.

 Same there, same there, so you've got five each end, two there, making twelve in total

 Well worth spending five or ten minutes to tighten up this seat, taking advantage of

 the weather, I'm now going to take advantage of this seat and have a sit, which I hope

 So it's Martin Young of Sitting Spiritually, Port Abbey, Dorset, Thursday 8th July and

 Let's talk about something that makes my friend nervous, and that's tearing paper.

 You could take a hold of your paper, put the ruler down, and just tear.

 I'm going to do this slow so we can kind of get, you'll get an edge, but do you see if

 I just wiggle the paper a little bit, how I get more of a decorative edge?

 If you're not sure about how much of a curve you want, how about using a pencil?

 If I say that I want this now to look like this, I tear it towards me and as careful

 And then, if you put this near the edge, it'll be less wasteful.

 Now I'm going to say that I'm a little better if I stand up, but just try this.

 And if you have a little extra there, just go ahead and rip that off.

 If I just show you, on the back of this, we can put a photo here, we can do some journaling.

 Just put down for a nice, fun, little decorative piece to this page.

 And then, if you want to use it for some matting, look at all the layers here.

 Actually, this fits in with even the title of this, Tear It Up.

 When attaching bare metal bead to a drywall corner, the fasteners used to hold it in place

 Now if that wood framing shrinks, warps or swells, the fasteners pull and stress the

 On the other hand, SheRock® Paper Face Metal Corner Bead is much more forgiving.

 Since it's not attached to the framing, that minor movement of the structure simply has

 In this demo, I'll show you how it works and how to install it.

 Whether you're using the manual hand tool method or the faster hopper and roller installation,

 And while you can do a good job installing bead with your hands, I like to use a roller.

 Now if you're a pro and have a lot of corners to install, you want to look at using a hopper

 Like I said, most pros are going to go with the faster hopper method, but I'm going to

 start with the manual method because it gives you a good look at why sheetrock paper face

 It's important to leave a quarter to a half inch gap at the floor.

 Use all purpose joint compound and completely cover the corner.

 Now I could use my hands to press the bead to the corner and embed it with a knife, but

 The natural properties of the joint compound make it shrink into the wall.

 One of the great things about sheetrock paper face metal beads is that for most jobs, you

 Finally, I'll feather out the joint compound from the nose of the trim.

 If you've got a lot of corners to install, you're going to want to use a hopper because

 I usually put it right on top of the bucket to catch the drips.

 Run the paper face metal bead through the hopper for an even, consistent coated joint

 Use the roller to press the bead into position and make sure it's squared up.

 If you look closely at all sheetrock paper face metal beads, you'll notice some important

 USG's distinctive green nose coating resists scuffing or fuzzing from taping knives and

 The pin perforations on the paper allow for excellent adhesion to the corner.

 USG offers a wide range of paper face metal beads for a wide range of corner applications.

 Our B1 Super Wide 90 degree outside corner is one of our most popular corner bead profiles.

 We offer a wide variety of bullnose corners that provide a simple way to differentiate

 This B2 corner has a single 90 degree solid metal corner for sharp, straight inside corners.

 The B2 Flex uses two strips of metal to adjust to any inside angle.

 The B1 Beaded Flex has two strips of 7-8 inch wide metal and rope in the center to give

 You've seen how easy it is to install a paper face bead, but what really counts is long

 I know when I install sheetrock paper face metal corner bead, that corner will never

 In fact, USG paper face metal corner bead performs so well, USG offers a lifetime, no

 You can learn a lot more about sheetrock paper face metal corner beads by visiting

 Again, that's just a name we made up because we didn't know what else to call it.

 So if it doesn't have a comb, how do you attach it to your head?

 We provide you with a hat pin and we'll show you how to put that on.

 The veil is draped over the head and if you have a headpiece you would drape the

 Then you take the hat pin and you just weave it in and out between the hair and

 Now during the ceremony when the veil is pulled back over the bride's head like

 Now after the ceremony all you have to do is remove the pin and the whole veil

 veil, take a piece of string or in this case we've used ribbon and cut it to the

 the front, drape it over your head, let it fall in the back and you'll see about

 Now remember to take into account your hairstyle or any headpiece that you

 Here we have an example of two drop veils, one with a cut edge and one with a

 You can see how the cut edge veil really blends in with the gown.

 The cut edge drop veil is the sheerest veil that we have available.

The great thing about a drop veil is that you can control that how much of

 the veil you want in the front and how much you want in the back.

 If you need a longer blusher you just pull it forward and likewise if it's too

I've got something here that I'd like to show the world on YouTube.

 Basically the other day I was mucking around with Billy Jean by Michael Jackson.

 wanted to learn it and I thought it would be cool if I could teach this kid how to do

 I'm going to zoom in and show the two parts separately, the chords and the bass and then

 The chords, we've got an F sharp minor and that is a F minor 11 I believe.

 right across we should get the 4th fret down the 4th string as well with the 3rd.

 And that there is basically an F sharp minor 7 in that interval there from the 4th string.

 Now the reason I'm using my 3rd finger, you'll see in a sec, the bass line goes...

 So that's everything put together and now you're probably thinking, what does the right

 Okay, so basically all I'm doing is using these 3 fingers on the bottom 3 strings or

 wise, these are your top strings but a lot of people physically look at these as your

 So I'm basically just plucking those 3 strings with my 1st, 2nd and 3rd finger and I'm letting

 Okay, so for those people that are happy with that so far, the next part, we'll swing back

We're now playing a B minor and it's pretty much the same pattern, moved

 And it's the same rhythm with the chords so the right hand is doing the same thing, it's

 just a little easier with the left hand because we're not really moving around as much.

 And with the right hand, I like to move the pick up string now and sit on the 3rd.

 I'm still doing the bass line with the pick and my 2 fingers here are taking care of the

Now there is more to the song but I only really worked out the first couple

You can't do a lot in a half hour lesson with the students so I thought

 try and impress everybody and if that doesn't work, you're just going to have to use your

 Today I'm going to be doing an autumn beauty look so let's go ahead and get started.

 Unfortunately I did lose some footage on some products but I will tell you what I'm using

 So first things first, I just highlighted underneath my brow bone with Blanc Type from

 After that I just used Creme Brulee eyeshadow for my transitioning shade from Makeup Geek.

 And after I used the Creme Brulee I went ahead and I used the color Rule from MAC which is

 a beautiful coral-y orange tone just to kind of settle it out on top of the Creme Brulee.

 There's going to be a lot of blending and a lot of crease color action going on here.

 And after I went ahead and I added the Rule I went with MAC's color in Red Brick and I

 It's going to add a beautiful gradient effect so it's kind of like that ombre effect going

 So just make sure to add that into the fold of your crease with a 224 blending brush.

 It's just a little bit more tighter so it focuses perfectly right into the crease.

 And after I went ahead and I added that I went back in with Coco Bear from Makeup Geek.

 And I am just, like I said, it's going to be a nice ombre gradient effect so I'm just

 building up the color and it's going to kind of reflect into the colors of the leaves when

 So I just went back with the E40 blending brush and blended that color through so there

 And after I did that I went ahead with Makeup Geek's color in Fittin and that is just a

 And then of course I'm going to go back and blend that out with my blending brush once

 And after I did that I went back with an ELF brush and I just used the sketch from MAC right

 on the corner so it's the only place that I left it just to deepen up the look and really

 really pick up that nice plum look that I want to add right into the corner of my eyes.

 I usually go for more of a brighter color but I kind of want to just keep this more

 neutral and I just pack this on with a Sigma shading brush right onto my lid and just pack

 pack pack because we have enough fallout going on already so I just want that color to pop.

 And then into the inner part of my tear ducts I used beige from the Lorac Pro 2 palette.

 It's just a really beautiful highlighting color and I went ahead and I blended that

 out with a crown brush just right into the inner corner of my eye.

 And then I went back with actually beige again and just added that right on top of the Creme

 Now I'm just going to go ahead and line out my eyeliner with my NYX liquid liner.

 I just love it because it's just so easy for me to apply on my liner this way and yeah,

 And then after I did that I'm going to clean up all that fallout and I'm just using my

 Pond's wipes right underneath my eyes and now I'm going to highlight.

 There's going to be a lot of highlighting and contour going on so I'm just using my

 NYX concealer, HD concealer in the color called Beige and I'm just going to use this

 right onto under my eyes, on my nose, and everywhere else in my face as you can see.

 But we're going to go ahead and blend that out so I'm just using it with my MAC Beauty

 And I'm just going to go ahead and clean up all the edges that I couldn't get with the

 sponge and after that I'm going to use the banana powder in the Anastasia palette and

 just go ahead and set everything down because we don't want any creasing.

 I'm not sure exactly which one I used but I will leave a link down below.

 It's the darkest shade in the palette and I just contoured with that color all over my

 I look pretty great girl but don't worry we're going to blend this out so it's going to be

 And I just ended up using the Luminoso blush from Milani right onto the apples of my cheeks.

 And just applying on some mascara, the Telescopic as per uuuge.

 And after applying on mascara I went in with Strip Down Pencil.

 Just a very subtle neutral lip and I filled it in three thirds of the way on my lip on

 And these are Risqué from Coco Wishes so those are my lashes there.

 Please thumbs up if you guys did enjoy this video and subscribe if you haven't.

 Hi, my name's Russell and I'm the owner of Riverside Garden Centre.

 in a lovely May bank holiday, pouring with rain, windy, but that's not going to stop

 I've been very lucky, my wife has already made this ingredient up.

 plenty of onions, a lot of spices, so this makes it very easy for me.

 never have been, never will be, but I can make burgers with these new Weber Burger Press.

 I simply pushed it down like this and out comes the perfect burger.

 We've now made the burgers and all we've got to do is place them on this lovely little

 These lamb burgers in about 5 minutes will be absolutely perfect.

 burgers on for about 4-5 minutes, so it's time to change it to the other side.

 as a rough guide you need roughly 5 minutes each side and that will give you a perfectly

 These burgers have now been on for just over 10 minutes and yep, they are definitely done.

 We've had a fantastic day here doing the demonstrations on all the Weber BBQs.

 One of the biggest questions we get asked, why would you buy a Weber over any other BBQ

Because it's a product which is going to last and it will be there for years to

It's not something which rusts out in a couple of years, not something you have

Buy Weber, you buy quality and order from us today and receive it tomorrow.

 A very special taste of today with the Middle Eastern flair, the new book, Persian Food

 from the Non-Persian Bride has been out for a few months now and the author and chef,

 It really is a wonderful book and it's a little bit different, which is a nice thing for you.

 So tell us first what you have here and as we're making it, I'll ask you about the book.

 The camera operators are a little bit distracted, unfortunately, but we'll make it through the

 I thought it was like something super special, but it's just a cool little device.

 This is spinach with yogurt and it's absolutely delicious, healthy, and amazing for the summertime.

 Now this is something that's particular to Persian food, right?

 This looks like ginger when it's raw, but actually it helps with inflammation and is

 I extracted all my mother-in-laws wisdom and I put it in that book.

 I was going to say, that puts you in very good stead with your husband's family.

 The thing is in the book, when you look through a beautifully published cookbook like this

 and everything, obviously all the photos are taken for it to look perfect.

 Sometimes it's a little bit difficult to think, oh, how am I ever going to make something

 But this is all designed for people to be able to make themselves, right?

 This is like a poem to being a good daughter-in-law, which is really difficult these times.

 And nowadays you can find luscious, amazing, thick Greek yogurts.

 So wait, so over, so if you have five kids, you've learned these recipes over a fairly

 And so what does your Persian mother-in-law think about your Persian cooking?

 You know, and I do make also Venezuelan food, which is where I'm from.

 I'm going to have to eat this, but I'm going to eat it right after I say the name of the

 Hello everyone, I found the idea for these little hot dog puppy buns on Pinterest and

 The one I'm using on your screen is the one I've used for the panda bread as well as the

 That's one cup of milk and one egg yolk that I whisked together, then I heat it in the

 Then I add two and a half tablespoons of white granulated sugar, three quarters of a tablespoon

 of salt, and an envelope of active dry yeast, instant active dry yeast, which is about two

 and a quarter teaspoons, and one and a half tablespoons of butter.

 Stir that until it's all combined and then you're going to add three cups of flour, a

 little bit at a time, starting off with let's say about a half a cup and continue to add

 flour and stir until the dough starts to chase your spoon around the bowl.

 When you get to that point, tip the dough out onto the counter, add some more flour

 Continue to add flour and continue to knead about five or ten minutes.

 You may or may not use up all the flour that you've measured out, you may not use up all

 You'll get to the point where it won't be sticky anymore and it'll become smooth and

 When you reach to that point, you know that you're done and you're just going to cover

 Once the dough has rested, you're going to cut it into portions.

 Now one of these recipe, dough recipes, will make about ten buns, at about the right size.

 I ended up with nine for some reason, I guess just the way that I cut it, but I think the

 ideal would be about ten, but the portion size is really completely up to you of course.

 So once you've cut up the dough into little individual portions, take each dough ball

 and roll it between your hands and place it on a greased cookie sheet or one that's been

 Now the recipe that I was following says at this point you should cover these little dough

 balls with some lightly dampened paper towels and then let it rest again, but I found the

 dampened paper towels stuck like crazy to the little dough balls when I tried to remove

 them, so what I would suggest is use some plastic wrap, spray the plastic wrap with

 a little bit of cooking spray and use that to cover the dough balls.

 When you let them rest, the gluten develops in the dough and it just makes it a lot easier

 You'll notice right away that the dough feels a little less elastic and a little bit softer.

 Form the little dough balls into a nice oval shape and then take a sharp knife and make

 two cuts on each end, just like that, and those will be the puppy ears.

 Lift them up a little bit, then take them and put them back on the cookie sheet.

 Now you're going to cover these once again with some greased plastic wrap and you're

 going to put them in a warm place and let them rise until they are doubled in size.

 What I do is I put mine in my oven and I just put the oven light on and it makes for a nice

 Then for the eyes and nose, use some black beans out of a can and just press them into

 Then you're going to bake these at 375 degrees for about 15 to 20 minutes until they are

 Now I noticed when I took these out that the beans seemed to have cracked and the coating

 So what I did is I just kind of pried them out with a knife and I added some fresh canned

 If you don't want to use beans, you could also use raisins for this.

 And once they're cooled completely, you can cut them in half and either make just plain

 sandwiches with them or you could use them as hot dog buns as well.

 When I make these again, what I'm going to do is use a different recipe.

 This bread recipe is great for sliced bread, but not so great for hot dog buns.

 I like hot dog buns that are a lot fluffier and a lot softer, so I might try a different

 But otherwise, they turned out great and I was really happy with them.

 Hi guys, it's Angela Kim from the SquishyMonster.com and today I'm showing you my recipe for yummy

 To begin, I'm cracking in a room temperature egg and to that I want to splash in some heavy

 And then a little sprinkle of salt to offset all that natural sweetness that we're going

 But before that I've got a little sprinkling of some pumpkin spice.

 And that I make homemade and that will be provided below as well.

 And then I'm going to use the zest of an orange but this is completely optional.

 I just blended everything together and just whipped it up with just a whisk.

 And I'm just zesting in my orange and you don't have to do this.

 This is optional but I really feel that it brightens everything up and perks up all those

 And you don't have to do the pumpkin spice either but I love all those pungent aromatic

 And you can just use freshly grated nutmeg or cinnamon if you'd like if you don't want

 Already the custard base smells really lovely and I'm just using my bread from my fluffy

 You just have to make sure that your bread slices are stale so it really absorbs everything

 and keeps its shape while it's cooking because I've got my pan preheating and it's going

 So after they soak on each side for about a few minutes I'm just going to flip them

 It smells really delicious and I can smell the spices from my french toast that are sitting

 And I just love these pudgy eggy slices that are just waiting to be pressed into this butter.

 I can't seem to find my spatula so I'm using a rice paddle so it's functional here as well.

 And the orange zest not only perfumes your french toast but it provides a nice little

 It's soft and pudgy and it's soaked up all those multi-dimensional layers of flavor.

 There's that vanilla that blooms, that citrus that kind of brightens and complements everything,

 that salt that kind of offsets and balances everything out, and then there's that nice

 I so hope you guys give this a try for your next breakfast, brunch, or dessert.

 I hope you guys have a great weekend and this is Angela Kim from thesmushymoms.com and I'll

 This one is crisp romaine lettuce, roasted white chicken meat, creamy Caesar dressing,

 But like always, even though the expiration date may not be up, always look around and

 Now by the time you get them home and you eat it, if you wait a couple days, they may

 So just like with all these salads, which is one of the things I really like about them,

 they're so convenient for lunch to take with you, especially to work, is take the lid off

 and they come with, everything's in this nice convenient little tray for you to put

 Always feel the bottom to make sure there's no lettuce stuck on the bottom.

 So when I pull these out, you always see me, I'll rub my hand on here just to make sure

 And you can see it makes a full bowl of lettuce once you get it out.

 And you know, people love, prefer romaine lettuce over iceberg lettuce.

 I mean, it's good for a Caesar, but for a regular salad, I don't know why a person would

 Um, but we were listening to a person on the radio the other day and they said they do

 But there's probably more flavor in this romaine lettuce, but...

 I like the Caesar salad because there's lots of chicken in there and it has a really good,

 And then, just like always, with all these, just work the dressing in a little bit.

 It's not going to saturate every single piece, but it'll cover each piece enough to where

 And, um, like I said, I've gotten to where I used to, uh, years ago, I had to have like

 I really have, uh, when we went on our diet and lost, um, the weight we lost, which I

 And, uh, I got used to eating salads with not a ton of dressing on them, a measured

 You can just, if you get the flavor, um, that's all you really need.

 Okay, now that all my cheese and chicken is at the bottom, I'm going to have to kind of

 The cheese, um, if you had a Caesar salad, a chicken Caesar salad, this is a really good

 Now, it doesn't have croutons in it, like you would get in a restaurant.

 Uh, but it has a, the Parmesan cheese has a really good flavor to it.

 You can taste the chicken in there, but it's not like, wow, that's a lot of chicken.

 It's a ranch, it's almost tastes like a ranch based dressing, but it has that Caesar flavor

 And, uh, like I've said about all the other salads that I review, um, these are a really

 Um, the only thing you don't get is whatever kind, if you want a, a fruit or a dessert

 of some kind, get you a handful of grapes, a fruit cup, um, you know, a Jell-O cup, whatever

 And, uh, it rounds out a really, really nice lunch and it's really filling.

 Hi everyone, I'm Julie with Sephora Pro, and today I'm going to walk you through step-by-step

 Now before we get started, I've already prepped my face with some primer, foundation, and

 concealer so that we can really focus on those key essential products.

 Now the first thing we're going to do is create a sun-kissed glow with a shimmer bronzer.

 And I'm actually using a slanted contour brush so that I can still get the hollows

 And whatever is left of my product, I'm actually going to apply to the outer parts of my face

 So now I'm using a cream-to-powder blush to create that natural glow.

 Now I'm going to concentrate most of the product at the highest point of your cheeks to create

 This particular primer actually has a yellow base, so it's going to help to really correct

 any color on the eyes as well as help the makeup stay on a lot longer.

 And I'm using my fingers to help melt the product into the skin.

 Next I'm going to use a crease brush to apply a bit of a neutral shadow to create dimension.

 And I'm going to start at the lash line, and I'm going to blend up and out.

 Now I'm using a bit of a deeper neutral shadow because I have a bit more of a flat set eyes,

 And now I'm using a small shadow brush and applying a gold shimmer to the center of the

 Okay, the next thing we're going to do is define the eyes with a matte brown liner.

 Now I'm actually going to use a compact mirror so that I can look closely into the eye area

 So with your liner slanted, you're going to start by drawing little dots at the lash line,

 So now that I've defined my eyes with the liner, I'm going to then finish the look with

 The mascara I'm using today is a volume and lengthening mascara, and I'm going to use

 the tip of it and start wiggling it at the base to create volume.

 So now I'm going to use a brush horizontally, and I'm going to create length and also separation.

 What I'm using is a dual color eyebrow powder, and I'm going to use the lightest shade and

 And now I'm using the darkest shade of the eyebrow powder and fill in any little holes

 What I'm using is a tinted pink lip gloss and applying it to the center of the lips

 And now what we're going to do is set the face with a little bit of powder.

 What I'm using is a velour puff, and I'm setting by rocking and rolling and pressing

 in to the center of the face, the outer part of the forehead, and then the center of the

 Now we're going to complete the look with a spritz of fragrance.

 Now that I've showed you a few of the steps in creating an everyday look, I hope you're

 able to pick up a few of these steps and add it into your daily routine.

 For more information on how to create a natural full brow look, visit my website at www.beadaholique.com

 LED Glow strives to provide outstanding technical support and our support team is here to help

 you with any installation questions that you may have regarding this LED tailgate light

 This video provides step-by-step installation instructions for LED Glow's LED tailgate light

 The first step in the installation of this LED tailgate light bar is to remove the tailgate

 This process will vary from truck to truck, so please consult your repair manual for specific

 After your tailgate has been removed, align the tailgate light bar with the bed of your

 Use the supplied 3M tape to mount the light bar to your truck bed.

 Prior to mounting the light bar, clean the areas where the 3M tape will be in contact

 It is a good idea to pre-drill the mounting holes for easier installation.

 Now that the light bar is being held in place with the 3M tape, it is now time to permanently

 Powering this light bar is as easy as connecting the flat four-pin wire harness to the existing

 If you do not have an existing flat four-pin connector, you are going to have to use the

 supplied extension harness to hardwire the light bar to your existing power wires.

 And now you can turn the vehicle on to ensure your light bar is functioning properly.

 The last step in this installation is to reinstall your tailgate back onto your truck.

 Alright, so it has been absolutely ages since I made a fireworks video, but it's getting

 close to 4th of July, so I decided today that I would show you guys how to make these very

 I'm probably pronouncing that terribly, but basically they're a really easy to make triangle

 So what you're going to need for this project is Visco fuse, a piece of paper, a little

 bit of masking tape, a mortar and pestle, aluminum powder, sulfur, and potassium nitrate.

 Now this is going to be used to make flash powder, but you could also use piccolo peat

 Now if you already know how to do this, or you're using piccolo peat powder or something

 similar, I'm going to put an annotation in the video so you can skip this part of the

 So the first thing you want to do is mix your potassium nitrate and sulfur.

 So I'm going to measure out 5 parts potassium nitrate and 3 parts sulfur into our mortar

 Now you may notice that my potassium nitrate is a dark gray instead of a pure white like

 And that's just because I ball milled my potassium nitrate to make it finer, and I

 was previously ball milling gunpowder, so it just has the darker color of the charcoal.

 This isn't particularly flammable right now because it's missing the aluminum powder,

 And we want to mix this up first because once the aluminum is added it can get quite volatile,

 so we just want to make sure that there's minimal tooling and mixing that we have to

 Now we're going to add the aluminum and our flash powder will be done.

 Alright so I've just added 2 parts of aluminum to this mixture, and we're just going to mix

 Now you want to be careful when you add the aluminum not to really bump this mixture too

 much because it can be shock sensitive because aluminum is a metal powder.

 And we're just going to want to mix this up, being careful not to jar it.

 And you don't really want to keep this stuff around too long once you've made it, so you

 As you can see this didn't take very long, and this is about done right here.

 Now it's time to move on to actually making the firecracker itself.

 So now what you're going to want to do is make a paper strip with your printer paper.

 You're going to want to make it the long way, and you're going to want to make it 1 1⁄2

 As you can see I've got two 1 1⁄2 inch pieces and one 2 inch piece.

 So we're going to take the 2 inch piece, and now what you're going to want to do is just

 make paper triangles, or excuse me, fold it into a paper triangle.

 So as you can see the first fold goes like this, and then from here you want to fold

 it up, and just fold it all the way up until you reach the end, and it will resemble a

 And you want to be sure when you're doing this that you fold your corners fairly tight.

 So now we're going to load up our powder, and then tape it and put a fuse in, and our

 So unroll your strip of paper until you have a few folds left towards the bottom here.

 If we open this up you can see there's a little pocket in there, which is where we're

 So what we're going to do is we're going to get a little bit of our flash powder.

 I'm just going to use this spoon, and just put it in the paper fold we've made.

 Now I've gone ahead and cut a fuse for our firecracker, and it's important to note that

 You don't want to use scissors when you're cutting fuse because the scissors can spark,

 So now we simply take our fuse, put it in our pocket of flash powder, and I made this

 You may notice that your folds might not line up exactly, that's just fine.

 Do though try to keep it tight just to keep everything in place.

 So now what we're just going to want to do is tape up the spare edges, and then maybe

 add a little bit of tape to reinforce the other edges just so the bang's a little bit

 So we take our piece of tape, and then tape up the last edge that we just folded.

 Then we're also going to take two more pieces of tape and put them on either open edge.

 Now the open edges here are these ones right here, sorry not this one, just this one.

 So we're going to take a piece of tape, and we're just going to bend it around here and

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to show you how to make these adorable chocolate cigars that

 The two main things you'll need to make chocolate cigars are some bread sticks, these have sesame

 seeds but you can also buy the plain ones, you need some chocolate chips and any kind

 I've chosen some caramel bits, some crushed peanuts, some crushed candy canes, some coconut

 The first thing you'll need to do is put all your chocolate chips into a microwave safe

 If you can't set your microwave to 50% then I suggest that you put it on defrost.

 Once your chocolate has been melted then you need to spread it on your bread stick about

 Once you've finished spreading your chocolate around the bread stick then you can add your

 I've seen sites where they customize their chocolate and they've added bacon bits to

 Then just set it on a platter with wax paper or parchment paper and put it in the refrigerator

 Once your chocolate cigars are ready an example of how you can serve them is on a platter

 You can also put these cigars into these cellophane bags, give them as gifts or sell them at fundraisers.

 Another thing you can do is give them for Father's Day and you can make your own cigar

 If you want to learn how to make your own box I'll link you to a tutorial that I've

 done on Valentine's Day gift boxes and you can just decorate it the way you'd like.

 In this cigar box if you open it I've put some aluminum foil but you can put wax paper

 As you can see I've made some tags that say Happy Father's Day, number one dad, the best

 If you'd like to have these tags I've made some that I'll post on my Facebook page.

 I hope you like this idea and you'll have as much fun as I did making these.

 This was actually my students Father's Day present this year and they really enjoyed

 It was really easy and it wasn't as messy as I thought it would be.

 Everybody had fun and they're actually looking forward to giving these to their father.

 Send me pictures of your own versions of chocolate cigars and if you've customized them in a

 special way or a different way, if you have new ideas to decorate them, new ingredients

 I have been doing a lot of Christmas recipes, but Hanukkah is coming up too.

 After you have them all grated, it will be best if you use the colander to sink your potatoes in,

 because I am a little broke, so I just have to put them in a bowl.

 Then pour off and squeeze out all the excess liquid that you can without making mashed potatoes.

 You want to mix until it is well combined, because you want to make sure all those ingredients get well incorporated

 Then place a large skillet over medium high heat and put a little bit of oil in it.

 Once that has reached medium high heat, you are going to put your potato batter into the pan.

 Take them about pancake size and flatten them out a little bit so that they fry evenly.

 Do about 5 minutes on the first side, then flip them over and do about 3-4 minutes on the second side.

 My first batch didn't come out as brown on the first side, but the second side looks glorious.

 Once your vegan latkes are done frying, place them on an oven safe plate and put them in the oven so they can remain warm

 You can serve these with apple sauce or vegan sour cream and they will taste delicious and so good.

 Today on Top Time, I will be telling you guys about my favorite nun exercise.

 I don't really like to exercise, but I don't like to be sanitary either.

 One of the favorite things I like to do to get my nun exercise on is take me and the dog to the trash can to throw out the trash.

 I use the small grocery bags for trash, so I have to do this quite often.

 Instead of just driving the trash and dumping it on my way out of my living arrangement,

 I walk it over, me and the dog, and it takes like 10-20 minutes.

 So if you can find ways to incorporate extra physical activity into your day, you can do stuff like that.

 If this is your first time seeing me, click the subscribe button.

 And if you missed my other winter holiday recipes, click here and I will put the playlist.

 With use of this how to make a curry, that's why I am going to show you today.

 One cup of meal maker, I already soaked in water like this 15 minutes before.

 After that I am going to add, after 50 seconds, this chopped onion pieces.

 Some people they don't like chicken or mutton but they want those taste.

 Instead of this, you can, this chicken masala you can prepare this meal maker.

 You can see this meal maker curry also same taste like chicken curry.

 Suppose you don't have chicken masala, you can add one tsp of chilli powder, one tsp of

 coriander powder and half tsp of cumin powder and half tsp of black pepper powder.

 For this mixture I took half cup of grated coconut and 7 cashew nuts.

 After that once they are getting boiled then we will add our soaked meal maker.

 I am going to garnish this meal maker with chopped coriander leaves.

 You can serve this curry with chapati, biryani, fried rice, idli also.

 Hi, my name is Mike and today we're going to show you how to get into your stuck or

 This is in the vertical position so you know that the valet section is unlocked but it

 What you want to do is take a little screwdriver, get a tiny one, and then gently push things

 Now from the inside you can see, so there's the catch right there and you can see that

 putting your screwdriver right in that little hole will activate the lock.

 So pushing, pulling down on the lever, so pulling the screwdriver up pushes down on

 The proper, oh I re-locked it, proper spot for the screwdriver is right about there on

 You undo the screws like I've just done and the whole lock assembly comes off.

 So that little square section right there, so that little square section right there

 You put it in the top of the square and as you do that, there we go, and as you do that

 you can see by pushing down on that lever there is, on the back side, moving that lever

 And what's happened is that the little plastic bit right there has, looks like it's broken off.

 So by activating that there, doesn't pull that metal bar down anymore.

 So put your screwdriver in and it gets it just enough that you can get your lock box open.

 Now some people have talked about drilling a little hole in that piece of plastic there,

 putting a nail or something in so that when you do open it, it would move it.

 I might try something like that or I might just bungee cord the thing shut.

 Alright, hopefully that at least gets you into your locked glove box.

 So we just basically add the radishes, tomato, a little bit of salt, and then we mix it all

 You can always add salt at the table, but you cannot take it out of the dish.

 Hey, it's Jason Robel from the J-Wro Show, hanging out here with the Sun

 Warrior Tribe and bringing you guys another easy and delicious vegan recipe

 Today I've got something a little bit on the fancy side for you, for me and Sean

 Connery, and I'm going to be doing a fruit that some of you may never have

 This is known as a pitaya, aka, in my preference, the dragon fruit.

 It's got these really cool, amazing spines, this beautiful pinkish-red color.

 And when you cut it open, it has this awesome texture and seeds in there, much

 So the dragon fruit, aka the pitaya, is high in vitamin C and antioxidants,

 which can be great for the skin and also healthy for your heart.

 And today we're going to be doing it and making a fancy dragon fruit soda,

 Now kefir originated hundreds, maybe even thousands of years ago, depending

 on what you believe, by fermenting grains and turning it into a probiotic

 Well, instead of using dairy, we have now coconut kefir on the market,

 and I may do a video later on showing you guys how to make this from scratch.

 But in this case, we've got about a heaping half cup of diced dragon fruit.

 Now next up, for a tangy undertone, we've got two teaspoons of freshly squeezed

 Now to bump up the immunity aspects and to give this a nice, fresh zing,

 For as awesome as dragon fruit looks, it's kind of on the muted side, let's say,

 So I want to bump up the sweetness with a little bit of liquid stevia,

 which is a zero glycemic sweetener, and go ahead and add about five drops

 Now a little pinch of highly mineralized Himalayan crystal salt is just

 If you have champagne glasses, right, like a nice fluted thing,

 In this case, I just have some nice little cocktail glasses here.

 So if you guys dug my dragon fruit soda recipe, give this video a thumbs up

 What's your favorite all-time exotic fruit that you've tried or want to try?

 So guys, this is Jason Robel, rocking out here with the Sun Warrior Tribe,

 bringing you delicious vegan recipes and vibrant living tips for your mouth

 And be sure to subscribe here to Sun Warrior's channel for awesome workout

 tips, healthy living regimens from me and the other Sun Warrior Ambassadors.

 And of course, subscribe to my YouTube channel, The J-Wro Show, for the best

 So the funny thing about explaining dragon fruit, especially to kids, like I

 want to host a children's TV show someday, is like, okay kids, do you know

 And then all of a sudden there's going to be a field trip to Mexico hunting

 In today's lesson I'm going to continue with the theme of learn how to play, how to read

 We're going to look at a very simple fingering exercise and how to read the notes that are

 And let's break that down by looking at the notes and finding out how to play them.

 And underneath the notes you can see that I've written the position for the fingers

 And each one of these notes corresponds with a string and a fingering position.

 So if we look at this note here we can see that it corresponds with a 3.

 Very simple but a great way to not only learn to play the violin but also to start to learn

 Well that was the end of lesson 23 and thank you very much for joining me and I hope that

 Today we're going to show you just how to make a mylar bag whatever size you want it.

 For demonstration, I'm using a gallon size mylar bag and it's a 7 mil.

 This works on the 3.5, the 4.5, 5 mil, any of the weights of bag.

 This is really handy when you've got a 5 gallon bag and you want to cut it down into

 It can save you some money on your mylar bag cost if you're wanting to pack in a 1 gallon

 size or if you want to take a 1 gallon down to little pieces to pack individual meals

 So first thing you do is get some scissors and then cut it where you want to cut it.

 Once you have it cut, you're going to need an ironing board and an iron.

 Sometimes if your edges aren't exactly even, you can have some of the plasticky stuff from

 So I prefer to just use a separate iron for my clothes and well, like I hardly ever use

 But I have a separate iron for my clothes and this is the iron for projects.

 Now this is an auto steam iron so I had to empty all the water out of it so that it would

 To seal the edge, all you need to do is just run your iron up along the edge.

 Now I've also put a cover on my ironing board because I don't want any of the nappiness.

 You know if that plastic leaks out the edge, I don't want that on my ironing board either.

 You can use them to store batteries or food or anything that you want to stick in mylar

 Once your stuff is in there you can seal the top with your clothing iron as well the same

 And we'll go over other ways to seal your mylar bags in another video.

 Hey loves I created this really easy look for you using the Too Faced the Belle carousel set.

 All right, so coffee in a kitten mug, you know that I have to do that

 You know what so I'm gonna begin by moisturizing my under eyes.

 Nice how to pick up a new brow is I will repurchase the thing over and over and over again

 This is in the shade taupe and I'm just going to line my brows fill them in a little bit.

 It's nice kind of cream matte shade and I'm going to apply that to my brow bone

 This is gonna be our transition shade and just use a fluffy brush and blend that all around

You can't mess this up because it is our transition shade and it's not too dark

 So it's buff it all around in your crease from inner corner to outer corner

 And then I just buffed out once again with my Sigma a 40 going in with the chocolate.

 We're gonna use this to deepen up our crease using a smaller fluffy brush.

 There isn't really any other deep matte brown shade in this set and that's what I wanted and you can totally use your bronzer as

 Now we're gonna go in with boxes and bows and tap that onto our lid this shade is so beautiful

 And then this step is optional if you have some fix plus or any setting spray just spritz your brush

We're gonna use the shade at nude beach and tap that right to the center of our lid

 You can always just tap it with your finger or skip this step all together totally up to you

 It just helps enhance the gold in the shadow and it's really pretty

 And a fluffy brush just barely tapping it into the shadow and making sure I tap off any excess

 It's gonna tap that onto the outer corner of my doesn't want of tapping

 So I'm just gonna tap it and deposit as much of the color as I can right in that outer corner

 Now I'm going back in with my Sigma 840 my super fluffy blending brush and kind of blending that all together

 But now I use my similar cash or blush brush and this one is really nice

 Creamy rating concealer in Chantilly and conceal underneath my eyes and down my nose and anywhere else that might need it

 Just gonna tap that out and smooth that out with my finger and then soak up any excess with my Sigma f86

 Cosmetics celebration foundation illumination and fair just using a BH cosmetics powder brush and tapping that all over my face

 Just blend it back and forth back and forth underneath my lower lash line

 If you make sure to tap off your brush and then go back and forth back and forth back and forth

 Now we're gonna line our eyes the winged liner is totally optional up to you

This one is easy for me because I've been wearing winged liner for many many years

 Now we're gonna go in with the Too Faced better than sex mascara, this is the mascara that comes in the kit

 Use whatever mascara you'd like or use this one you can also stop here, but you know after this

 I'm gonna have to apply some false lashes because that's how I do

 And this tiny little brush from Real Techniques and just tap that on our inner corners you can also use your pinky

 I just turn it the long way and carve out my cheekbone and then turn it the opposite way and blend it out

 Now and I've blended it down my neckline as well in the jawline

I'm just applying that to the tops of my cheekbones a little bit down my nose and on my chin

 Here's my kitten Anastasia making an appearance actually showing her face well, of course, we show her face she's so cute

 This was a request and I've had many requests to do a tutorial from this palette from the set

What other holiday palettes would you like to see looks from I would love to know down below

 If you guys ever recreate any of my looks, please tag me on Facebook Twitter or Instagram.

 Anyway, let's be friends and you guys are so amazing and I appreciate everything

 okay hi YouTube that is panelist in this time cameras on all right so this is a

 three-beat and it is a pretty excellent piece because we're gonna learn a couple

 things first of all we're gonna study our ostinato in our ostinato is that

 you know because I'm pointing right at it a repeated musical pattern so here's

 your ostinato all that left hand all the way through by the way this is the first

 thing I'm gonna ask you when I see you at lessons and I know the answer it's

 the same thing the left hand pretty much does the same pattern okay we have two

 intervals of fifth and octave so get used to the octave feel that's what this

 chapter is on really make sure you stretch make sure you get those notes

 the piece I think is about a little character in our notes so we have some

 certain touches that we're gonna look for so the first touch this is your

 we're dropping in a little bit we're dropping in to get the three slurred, two slurred notes

 feel free to pause the video on my beautiful face and practice that

 so right hand is long, long, short, short, short, long, short, short, short

 yep make sure those are your two little warm-ups so you can get that really good

 we get on to a B section later on that has pretty much easy techniques

 we're gonna concentrate in the A section on phrases of eight bars

 we're gonna bring it from measure three to about measure eleven

 and then I'm sure you'll figure out where the third phrase is from there

 if you haven't watched any of my videos I think you'll know that

 just remember at the end of the phrase we're gonna switch to our dominant

 very important to remember that section is a transition to get to something bigger

 I didn't even realize that but that is the three things we were concentrating on

 This is Mark Bell from SuperTraining.TV, Super Training Gym, the strongest gym in the West.

 We have special footage today for the Power Project of Stan the Rhino Effort.

 The Rhino has got a much wider stance than normal, which leads to a much wider grip than

 normal, which sometimes makes it a little more comfortable to generate some force and

 get that weight moving off the floor, but often times makes the lockout a little bit

 harder due to the fact that kind of increasing the range of motion at which you have to raise

 the bar because you're kind of squatting the weight up a little bit more.

 My boy is getting ready to compete at Super Training Gym, March 24th, coming up.

 Let's just let this one play through and I'll go back and analyze it afterwards.

 One thing I'm seeing here is something we always try to teach here at the Power Project.

 He'll go down as one of the all-time great power lifters and he will do so due to his

 Just to kind of hyper-analyze what he's doing here, I'm not going to tell you that he's

 wrong because a lot of the things he does ends up being great, ends up working out really

 I'm just going to point out a couple of things that I think would help.

 So I like to see people kind of straighten their legs out a little bit more and push

 To me that just helps kind of generate a little bit more tightness and it also helps

 to be a nice reminder, an active reminder of keeping as much shit behind the barbell

 He's a little forward-ish on his knees and he's got a good chunk of his body weight,

 and I'm totally guilty of this myself, a good chunk of his body weight in front of that

 The weight does slow down a little bit, but it's just an outstanding blast off the ground

 One thing you've got to be careful of when you're big and jacked like this guy is, talk

 But something to keep in mind here is that when you're real wide like this and you have

 huge arms, Stan has huge forearms, you can't really tell in this video, but this little

 muscle right here, I don't even know what the hell you'd call it, just hanging off the

 You've got to be careful that your arms and legs aren't in the way of each other.

 So even though this stance looks a little more comfortable for him, it's taking some

 pressure off his lower back, it's taking some pressure off those hamstrings which he's

 He might have to just take the stance in a tiny bit more or work out something so his

 He's going to have to pass those knees through his arms and get them slightly in front of

 This thing right here is probably the equivalent, let me circle it, probably the equivalent

 It's always good to watch Stan do things his way and still nail some huge weights.

 So he does drop his hips down, but he's got the arms bent quite a bit here.

 If he's armed or tight, he's not going to be able to drop his hips down as well.

 So he's dropping his hips down, gets a little slack through the arms.

 He's going to give a good tug on there like he does every night, tugging.

 So he gets a nice pop off the floor, but as I said, a little bit of a tradeoff where

 that midpoint and slash lockout is going to be somewhat compromised.

 So pretty much if he can just push those hips back further before he squats down, I think

 Earlier, we were at the market and one of the kitchen essentials that we said to buy

 So I'm going to show you a way to even impart more flavor into this thing by making a simple,

 simple marinade with a lot of the pantry essentials that we said to get and keep around to have.

 And when you marinate something, you don't have to cut it too fine because you're just

 trying to impart the flavor into the meat, not necessarily cook the ingredients.

 We're just going to take a few chops to the garlic, throw that in there.

 Just squeeze two of these limes and just take a fork, poke it in, and twist.

 You know, we have the citrus in there, but again, the vinegar is just going to help tenderize

 That's just going to help the cooking process when you actually cook the meat.

 You can add a pretty generous heaping little finger full of salt and a little bit of pepper.

 And you know, when it looks fresh like that, usually it's going to taste fresh.

 And you don't have to do that, but what it does is it creates one flat piece of chicken.

 It's going to cook a lot quicker because it's thinner now and it's going to cook evenly.

 One cut to the other side and then just cut straight down, right away from the bone.

 It's got more surface area now, which means more marinade is going to impart into your

 Don't let it sit too long because there's vinegar and lime juice in there, so it will

 Since I already added a good amount of oil into this marinade, I'm not going to add any

 Just sort of, if you can see this, just sort of let all the excess vinegar and excess oil

 We're starting to brown, but we need about double that amount of brownness, so let it

 I would say one more minute on that side, and then we'll be able to flip.

 So what I'm going to do right here is I'm actually just going to cover it real quick,

 and that's going to sort of create some convection heat, almost like you're cooking it in an

 And that's just going to ensure that your chicken cooks through.

 At this point when you're close to being finished, or you think you're finished, just give your

 If it feels firm, but still slightly juicy, you're probably finished.

 If you push it and there's too much give, you can push your finger into it, it's going

 That's how you turn cheap meat into something very, very special.

 So I'm coming today with a new nail design that I hope you guys like or get a little

 I decided to do a black widow on a red nail and I have to give you guys this little story.

 One time I was underneath a tree and a black widow actually fell out of the tree and fell

 I have all this hair so I flicked it and then when I looked down and it kind of stayed

 Anyway, while I'm working on this design I'm reliving this entire experience.

 So I had to stop a few times because I was getting the heebie jeebies.

 If you have a creepy spider moment be sure and comment below and tell me about it.

 Once you've got all your nails painted red, we're going to put the black widow on.

 Thin out your nail art brush as much as possible and make one long line this way and another

 If you like to think in shapes, kind of think of like a really weird looking L.

 Okay, so once your white has dried, take your red and just kind of dot it on all the white part.

 Hey ladies, this is Cass from CassandraBakai.com and I'm teaming up with my friend Sasha of

 AfroNicoliU to bring to you an awesome little recipe that I came up with and it's called

 Now what I'm going to do is in this pot I'm going to put one ounce of almond oil.

One ounce of the cocoa butter and half a tablespoon of the Amla powder.

 but don't heat it up so that it's completely like just burning.

Now I'm going to apply the hot oil treatment to my hair and before I

 going to just take some of the oil, dip it with your fingers and spread it along your

 It's not messy so it's best to do it in your bathroom where it's easier for you to clean

So now that I'm done applying the oil, getting it saturated throughout my hair, I'm

 going to cover my hair with a plastic cap and leave it on for about an hour or so and

 Got some bread crumbs here, Hidden Valley Ranch, cornbread, green beans, and boneless

 Because I don't want to do muffins, I'm gonna actually do a cornbread loaf.

 This is what I'll use basically to coat the pork so that the breadcrumbs will actually

 So on this plate I will put in some breadcrumbs, enough to cover.

 So I want to make sure that I can coat it on both sides for both of them because I have

 And now I add a little bit of garlic salt because on here I add a little bit of black

 And now the last and final thing, the Hill & Valley Ranch salad seasoning and salad dressing

 But let me go ahead and give you a little recap of what I've done.

 So now that that's done, it's going to do 12 minutes on each side.

 Since I'm only cooking a small thing of green beans here, just a little small pan.

 Main entree is going to be boneless thick cut pork chops, coated green beans, and cornbread

 Here are the pork chops, the cornbread, and look at the green beans.

 Just to give you an idea of the juice that was maintained into the chops.

 I'm about to eat because it's getting cold and this is good and it's smelling.

 Hi, this is Craig from IrrigationRepair.com and today we're going to repair a weeping

 A weeping valve is one that leaks a lot but is not failed in the complete open position

 You may have to turn it off at the meter if you don't know where your backflow is.

 Now when I take this valve apart, it's quite possible that there will be a lot of water

 coming out so I've dug a deeper hole so that when I take it apart, if water starts flowing

 out quickly, we need to be able to scoop that water out of there with either a hand pump

 or a plastic cup or something like that because we don't want to get any rocks and dirt into

 Now I'm using my drill to take it apart and what we're going to do is we're going to replace

 The body is just the bottom part that holds all these other parts together and we're going

 Now in order to repair a valve in this way, you have to have the exact same model and

 brand of the valve that's in the ground so it all fits together.

 So this is a Hunter SRV valve and I'm going to take it apart and I'm going to replace

 the bonnet, the diaphragm, the solenoid, the spring, all that is contained there in my

 hand and I'm going to place it on there gently at first and move it around so I can determine

 if I can turn these screws in a little bit with my hand which will do two things.

 It tells me that it's in the right place and it also tells me that it's lined up correctly.

 So I'm not going to screw it in all the way with my drill because it is a plastic valve

 and we could easily crack it if we crank that drill all the way down.

 So now I'm going to take a screwdriver and I'm going to tighten the valve down the same

 We're going to go opposite from each other so that it seats correctly and we won't have

 Now the next thing I need to do is I need to connect the wires back up.

 Even though the solenoid on the old valve was good, I'm going to replace it anyways

 because if I'm going through this much trouble, let's just go ahead and replace the solenoid.

 So as I put these wires together, I'm going to use a direct burial splice which is a silicone

 Don't use just a regular wire nut or even worse, electrical tape because that will not

 keep moisture away from the wires which could cause them to corrode.

 But then we're going to fill in the hole and I'm going to set the valve box in such

 a way that I can pull these wires out of the valve box in case I ever need to check this

 Let's say the valve is not working and I don't know if it's a solenoid or a broken wire.

 I need to be able to do that without digging up the entire valve because it will drive

 you crazy if you have to dig up a valve just to check the wires.

 So as you can see, the wires are easily accessible without having to dig up the valve.

 And after I fill in the rest of the dirt and put in the grass back in there, I'm going

 And when I do that, I'm going to do it very slowly because the pipes are full of air because

 And if we turned it on right away, we would have a great rush of water that could possibly

 So I'm going to take this and turn it on about one third of the way.

 The valves are very close to the backflow so I can hear when the water stops moving

 And then I can take it and turn it all the way on and we're done.

 If you'd like to learn more about how to make a lot of money fixing sprinklers or save a

 lot of money repairing your own sprinklers, please visit my website, irrigationrepair.com.

 And coming very soon is irrigationtv.com which will cover everything about irrigation

 So hello and welcome to the very first episode of Bitchin' in the Kitchen.

 I'm Naomi Shimada and I've been lucky enough to be joined by the top three bitches in the

 So up first we have Little Miss Butterwood Melt-in-her-Mouth Digital Sound Girl DJ B-Traits.

 We have Marawa the Amazing who tours the world spinning her hoops and blogging her meals.

 And finally we have Lady Samantha Lim, lead singer and crowd pleaser of the Teenagers

 Her favorite food is macaroni and cheese, which is what we're going to make today.

 So today we're going to make Sam's favorite, golden grilled mac and cheese.

 So when you've had a long day and you feel like you need a hug from the inside, this

 So to make our glorious feast today we'll be using one pack of elbow macaroni, about

 And I'm not usually, actually I've never wanted to use processed cheese, but in this case

 So I usually use two tablespoons to give it a real kick, but you can just do one.

 So cook these little half smiles for about three minutes, just follow the instructions

 Don't overcook them, because otherwise it just won't be the same, it'll be all like

 Then we might not use all this cheese, but we'll use quite a lot of it.

 So just, yeah, this looks gross, but I promise it'll taste good.

 When it's all bubbly, take about half of each lot of cheese, because the rest we'll put

 I'm one of those people that when I cook, I don't necessarily just follow all the instructions.

 I'm using rock salt just because I just prefer to use it, but any salt will do.

 So cute little Miss Brie here in her Mickey Mouse vintage chef's hat has greased up our

 I did have to go to my random corner shop, but usually, they're easy to find.

 So we'll leave that to cook in the oven at 175 degrees for about 25 minutes.

 So our golden grills macaroni and cheese, you can serve it at the side or have it all

 Now, we're going to do our buns of steel, and you'll need one long style knot head to

 You'll start by taking your hair into a pony at the base of your neck.

 Wrap it here at the crisscross, and give it a good strong twist.

 Then I'm going to take the long knot head and wrap the knot head around her hair, not

 I've wrapped it and spiraled all the way down the ponytail and left myself at least

 It's really important to have this so that we can secure the bun later.

 So now we're going to take it, and we're going to bring it right up into a nice spiraled

 Okay, now I've left myself that tail, which is really important now because now we can

 stitch it right into the hair, pull it, and you're going to hook it back on itself in

 This bun is really great, and now because the bun is malleable, because it's wire, you

 can bend it right in shape, great for the gym, and you have a nice secure buns of steel.

 What I do is I take my hair into a basic pony by taking one end of the knot head, wrapping

 Then I'll wrap it down my ponytail, spiraling the knot head around my hair, not the hair

 I'm leaving myself at least two inches at the end so that I can take the bun, spiral

 it up around into a circle, taking the end and stitching it right into my head, and locking

 I'm going to tuck my ends, and now because it's malleable, I'm just going to mold it

 For more ideas or to see the latest trends, visit knotheads.com.

 Hey Midwest sports fans, this is Pete from Crunch Time Coaching with your Tuesday tip of the week.

Well, I'm really going to help you on your one-handed backhand if

 news for you around the country too to where, hey, the bad weather's leaving us.

 I notice when I teach them a one-handed backhand, when they start learning that one-handed backhand

 and they start to get the right grip and the right setup, they tend to hit a lot of balls

 that one-handed backhand, you know, in the beginning, they can start to set up nice.

 I'm making sure the top hand is staying up more like an opposite-handed forehand at the throat.

Now if I just stay up here and I go to hit, well I'm going to hit that ball

 kind of think of your tummy and your hands, your whole body, kind of like wheels on the bus going

 though this is a great exercise for a two-hander, I think it's also a really good exercise for a

 one-hander to just start, you can probably get closer, just start hitting forehands with your

 wouldn't try and get into a super long rally from the baseline.

 I'm making sure that this up here is really dictating the movement.

 They are a bit long, so I just tape them onto my skates and everything's fine past that.

They're getting pretty worn down and stuff, so I thought it would be a good idea before they break to replace them.

 So the first thing you're going to want to do is obviously, you're just going to want to remove the toe ties.

I just cut them off because I don't have use for the string any other way.

I already removed my other pad's lace because it broke right at the end of the season.

 So the second thing you're going to want to do is feed your new lace through the holes in your pad.

 And one thing to look out for is you definitely want both strings to be an even length.

All you do is you drop the pad on the ground and you pull up the laces to see how long they are.

 So the next thing you're going to want to do is tie a knot in the lace.

 So for myself personally I like to use my thumb knuckle as a marker.

I just use the top of the knuckle as where I want the knot to be.

I would say if you want looser pads you're going to make it bigger.

 Don't make it too small though because that could damage your ankles pretty badly.

 And it's just a simple double knot at whatever length you choose.

 Finally you're going to want to put the lace through your pads.

 All you do is take your two laces and put them through the holes.

 If I had shorter laces such as on my old pads I would just go through the two.

 And once again I would say if you're more of a butterfly goalie I'd go through two.

 And now you're just going to want to, after lacing them through every single hole,

 So what I'll generally do is I don't have any sock tape around but I'll just take some form of tape,

 whether it be sock or stick, and I drag my sock over top and tuck my laces into it.

 And then I just put tape around to hold the laces in and that way I don't find myself tripping or cutting any laces

 On a separate note, I'm going to add that my pads are for sale currently.

 In case any of you didn't know, they're Vaughn V4 7450 Senior 32 Plus 1s.

 Cleaned them after every, like disinfected them after every practice and game.

 Small amount of wear along the wear lines of the pad on the side.

 And other than puck marks, these pads are in near perfect condition.

 If anybody can give me an offer around there, it'd be greatly appreciated.

 Any of you guys out there who aren't completely certain on how to tie them, hopefully this helped you out.

 So please remember to drop a like if you enjoyed it or it helped.

 And leave me some feedback too if you want in the comments section.

 So a really easy idea for a light lunch or an easy supper is an omelette.

 I'm going to take you through making a really simple herb omelette.

 Now I've got a little piece of shell in there and a good tip is to actually use one piece

 of the egg shell and that will make it much easier to fish it out instead of just kind

 Now I'm just going to whip that up lightly just to really break up those yolks.

 So onto a medium heat and into that I'm actually cooking it with butter.

 And once they're foaming you know that it's warm enough to start cooking the egg.

 What you do is just stir that around so you're actually breaking it up again.

 So you can see it's starting to cook but before it's cooked all the way through just go into

 So around the outside of the pan just rolling that omelette back towards yourself.

 You don't want it sort of rubbery and cooked all the way through.

 I've used chives and parsley but you can use whatever you want.

Now discard the base and stalk and chop them into 1 or 2 inch pieces.

Starting from the left you will need some raw peanuts, ½ tsp of cumin seeds

 and ½ tsp of mustard seeds, pinch of asafoetida or hing, 5-6 cloves of garlic, some curry

 1 onion finely chopped, red chilli powder 1 tsp, coriander powder 1 tsp, amchur powder

 ¾ tsp, turmeric powder ½ tsp, 1 tsp full of goda masala, oil 2 tbsp and salt to taste.

It has turned soft and some of the pieces have started to brown.

Once heated add mustard seeds, cumin seeds, curry leaves, pinch of asafoetida or

The tip is first fry bhindi in enough oil and cook without covering

 more such recipes please subscribe to my channel and visit spicyaroma.com.

Any of you that have ever had pork rinds, usually you buy them at a roadside

 stand, you buy them in a supermarket, they could have been sitting there for a week to

 you'd like to eat, you put them on a paper plate, kind of spread them out a little bit.

 Once you've done that, we simply take them and we put them in the microwave.

We have found that if your microwave is older than about 10 years

 old, they don't do as well in those, but you can, they do very well in the newer microwaves.

 You can also bake them in the oven at 350 for about 10 minutes and they'll also pop

So if you take a look at the pork rinds now, it's on high so that you want it on the

 in the oil and the grease, it's lower cholesterol, lower fat, and lower calories.

 thing that we're finding that is also very nice is they haven't been sitting around for

We put a zip lock on the top of the bag that allows you to zip up the remaining

 pork skins that you didn't cook and you can stick those in your pantry and they'll stay

 long because you will be constantly eating these things because they are very, very good.

 So we've now been almost coming up now on two minutes and you can kind of see that they're

And the red part basically is kind of more like a crackling where you'll

 have a little bit of a crunch as opposed to just the skin itself.

 You'll want these to cool for about 30 to 45 seconds and then they will get the crunch,

 online or you can shoot me an email and let me know what you thought.

 slow cooker base to cook a juicy chicken with pan roasted vegetables and sweet garlic cloves

While that is heating, let's season the three and a half to four pound

Before we put the chicken in, let's make sure it's hot enough by putting

 some water droplets in the pan to make sure they dance around like this.

 and hot, so go ahead and place the chicken breast side down in the hot dry pot.

 about eight minutes or until the skin is nicely browned and the poultry comes away from the

 one half onion chopped, two chopped carrots, two chopped parsnips, and one rib of chopped

Continue adding eight whole peeled garlic cloves, one teaspoon chopped fresh

Add a third cup of water, and let it simmer for about five minutes or until

Stir to combine while scraping up all the browned bits on the bottom

 and cook over medium heat about five minutes or until steam just begins to escape from

 you want it to cook throughout the day or increase the setting for a faster cooking

The chicken will be done when the juices run clear and the vegetables are tender.

 the chicken and serve with the pan juices and roasted vegetables from the pot.

Check out more of our cooking videos and view our complete recipes online

Anyway, what third first thing you want to do is get you some Italian sausage

 If you can't find some ground I used I use the links and just take that

 The skin off of you know what I mean do that to all of them the whole pound put them in your

 Italian breadcrumbs make sure it's Italian and then I want to add

 And now we want to get in here with our fingers and our I put gloves on when I do this

 Want you to kind of flatten it down where it can be covered with plastic, you know to me, but oh, wait a minute

 We done forgot to put in one of the most important components of this thing, all right

 Anyway, so I give up on having clean hands went on there with my fingers

 Just did a real quick mix got to make sure all that pepper is well distributed within the meat.

 so then I'll come out here with the plastic wrap like I was telling you earlier and

 You know marinate into the meat and when you do it's time to make some baseballs.

 Anyway, what you want to do is you want to get your mixture and you want to spray a little canola oil

 Like I did on my pan my baking sheet here and I'm gonna make me some baseballs.

 Not quite baseball size, but pert near you know what I'm saying?

 That's what my mixture made two pounds of meat made eight nice meatballs

 And then I want you to put them babies in a three hundred and fifty-five degree oven for an hour

 After one hour take them out and I'm showing you here that I tested mine

 That's right about where you need them when they come out of the oven after that one hour if you know what I mean

I want you to transfer them into a nice heavy skillet and pour in your favorite

 Line them up real properly in there where they'll cook evenly and maybe get a little sauce on

 You know me and my OCD I got a line them up perfectly looks like every time and then come in with a nice lid

 You can take them like another maybe 45 minutes if you want to on a fast simmer to make sure they're nice and done

 Good chef would have moved that piece of spaghetti that fell over all my veggies

 And another good chef probably would have made that spaghetti flat where these meatballs don't want to roll all over the place

All I'm gonna do is eat it and it's gonna be all mixed up and I get it in there

 Anyway, so I'm on a coder here with a little parmesan origiano cheese.

 Baby if you don't like parmesan origiano don't add it and then I'm gonna come in here at my fork folks

Don't let nobody tell you that we don't use lights because we do you know what I mean?

 Folks if you like spaghetti and meatballs, I know you're gonna love this.

 I really sorry about the wind again like in the other video but I can't do anything about

So I've come back from a really interesting camping trip which I really enjoyed and I

 these are pretty delicate so maybe just want to chop it off like that.

 going to collect loads of those, maybe leave the bottom set of leaves if you want to but

 I'm going to collect about 8 of those and I'll come back right to you on that one.

 cut back and go as organic as possible but I still have this whole thing of hormone rooting

I know you can get organic ones now so as soon as I finish that I'll change straight

Now I've been reading because usually I just do it straight into water and

 them in the water as they can lose their, they can just wilt basically because of lack

Now what you want to do is, this is an empty bottle and I've cut it, now you

 want to get a pencil and you're just going to get a little bit, something like that of

 is a solution for two things, two bottles for holding the herbs.

 to top it up with a bit of water but you're going to leave that in a warm space and in

 a few days you might see that the rooting hormone pad likes to drop down so you just

 swirl it up a bit or stir it and in a few days you should see that you should get some

 roots also, maybe make the solution a bit lighter but remember, get organic hormone

 I hope this helped on a quick and easy way of getting your herb cuttings to root and

 I'll see you again soon with the next video, well the video I'm just about to make, it

 might not be put up next but the video I'm about to make is how to easily grow mint from

 Right, from the match fishing scene in the carp world, the last couple of years everybody

 has been wrapping their lines up to mark accuracy and ease of lobbing leads everywhere.

 come out of our own type and developed lots of little reasons, lots of little things built

 the lead is, which is where incidentally I want my leads to be, behind the feature

 or on the feature, but not guessing depths and going a little bit too far and all that.

So now when we use these there's no repeatedly casting and these also

 come into it when you couldn't walk up and down the bank during a carp fishing match

 marking your distance again and obviously, there you go, so we've put swan necks on

You're going to wrap yourself round 10, 20 times, whatever the distance

 of years and you're walking up and down and braid in the wind, all types of weather's

 the same position as you are when you're wrapping it round to start with and you reel it in

 last but not least on these, safety in mind, we've also got a bit of string going across

 nip out in the night, you're not going to fall over it because we've put detachable

 clips on the end so if you do get your foot caught in it, it will pop off.

 Now they call this a fish and veggie grill, but today we're actually going to cook on

 It's not exactly fish and veggies, but it sure tastes really good.

 It's flat and it's got like two bent up handles here on the side.

 It's a non-stick surface and it fits perfect in my large big green egg.

 Now this bacon's already been smoked, and this actually we made.

 If you want to see how to make bacon, just check out my video, Making Bacon.

 Anyway we're going to make some breakfast, so I'm going to put some on here and get it

 I'm going to put it indirect at about, I don't know, 375 or so.

 I'll show you what it looks like, and that's the fish and veggie grill.

 And you can watch the videos and learn how to do it yourself too.

 We're going to cook this indirect for a while, get it nice and crispy.

 And some of it's got a little toasty on the ends, but hey, you get the picture.

 So what we've got is we've got a drum beat known as a bossa nova.

 And this is something I've never covered before in my video drum lessons.

 It's an old-fashioned style of drum beat, but you still hear it in modern contexts.

 It's hard to explain exactly what it is because there are lots of variations.

 But it's usually played over two bars, and we're playing every third note

 with the cross stick or snare drum, whatever we're playing the bossa nova part on.

 where the notes get separated by four notes rather than just three.

 So it resolves itself back to the beginning of the two-bar pattern.

 So the first two bars we're playing the cross stick on one, the and of two, four.

 Between four and two in the first and second bar, that's the bit where the gap is extended.

 We're going one, two, three, one, two, three, one, two, three, four.

 So with the right hand and the cross stick together we get this.

 One and two and three and four and one and two and three and four and

 one and two and three and four and one and two and three and four and.

 And what John does and what a lot of drummers do when they play the bossa nova is they play a bass drum pattern on beats one and three only.

 Sometimes they also add a hi-hat foot stepping on beats two and four in between the bass drums.

 But let me just show you what John plays and then we can perhaps extend it or talk about some other ways that we can play it.

 Sometimes, well, the only cross stick that falls with the bass drum is beat one of bar one.

 All the others kind of fall in between, just before or just after it.

 One and two and three and four and one and two and three and four and one and two and three and four and one and two and three and four and.

 And that bass drum gives it a really nice solid foundation and you can hear the magic of the bossa nova cross stick pattern

 moving across the bar against the bass drum making it sound interesting and quirky and bossa nova-y.

 Final thing, more advanced version of the way this is played usually,

 is we play like a bossa nova bass drum pattern, foot pattern, samba pattern, sorry not bossa nova,

 So you've got this extra bass drum note on and of two and the and of four.

 One, two and three, four and one, with a hi-hat on just two and four.

 One and two and three, four and one and two and three, four and one and two and three, four and one and two and three and four.

 And that drag, the two little quick left hand notes have got to be as close to the right hand as possible.

 And you naturally want to play the stick down low so you can get the right hand to play the stick down low.

 It doesn't have to be too clean, it's not particularly clean the way John plays it,

 it's a cross between a buzz roll and a drag roll because that's his era, I'm sure he was used to playing a lot of buzz stuff.

 But you want to get it to be roughly two notes and leading into the right hand.

 So that's the drum fill there which gets used a lot in the song.

 They probably all recorded their parts at the same time so if one musician made a mistake they'd all have to do their parts again because they're all playing at the same time.

 And there's a section later in the song which I'll mention later on which sounds really sloppy.

 He's trying to play 16th notes and he just comes in a little bit late and he plays something that fits just.

 He's supposed to be playing 16th notes, I can sort of hear what he's supposed to be playing but it's a little bit sloppy.

 Basically I reckon he heard it, he knew he made a mistake but the rest of the band said that was a good take, the vocals were really good so we're not going to go back and redo it.

 Sorry John you're going to have to stick with that for the rest of your life.

 So here we have the Stuart McDonald clamping setup, and I love it and I really use it to

 When I laminated the fretboard onto the neck block, the neck block is a big square piece

 But then, when I come along and I cut out this arc and I shape it and remove material,

 Anytime you change a parallel surface, concave or convex, it has an effect on the fretboard.

 So now, after I've done all this shaping, and especially as I've shaped the neck into

 There's going to be a little hump here, there's a little dip here, a little dip there.

 So I want to bring that back to true flatness before I fret it, because ultimately, I want

 The fret's absolutely flat, so that when you do the setup, the strings can come as close

 These things that look like it's a steam-operated machine, it's really...

 All those are doing is, as I set everything up, it tells me that I've stayed at true flatness.

 And I have a machined ruler that costs about $100, and it is absolutely dead flat, straight,

 I have a thing to check in, and I go back and forth and really look and see if I see

 I mean, it's microscopic, but if it's there, you want to fix it.

 So what I do, I take some chalk, and I go across the fretboard and make marks.

 I take another beam that's been machined to really true flatness, and you can stick an

 And I'm going to go back and forth very gingerly, and what obviously you're going to try to

 And if a chalk mark is still there, that means it's a low point, and you have to keep sanding.

 This is pretty fine sandpaper, so I'm not taking off very much material at all.

 Also, I can see a little shiny spot here on the wood and up here.

 And as I'm sanding, I'm keeping the sanding bar aligned with the way the fretboard widens

 Now, what I've found is that you don't have to do this because you can take it all out

 You can compensate the frets, but my philosophy is if you've got 360 steps on a base and you

 do every one of them right, then everything after that point is easier.

 If step number 210 is not quite there, you can bet from 211 to maybe all the way up to

 I'm like, every single thing, I'm focused on trying to do it until it's perfect at every stage.

 You don't want to take off very much material at all at this point.

 You want to just be taking the barest bit that you can to get it perfectly true.

 So now that I've done that, we'll go put some frets in and I'll show you what's involved

 We're going to start this beautiful raspberry smokey look with a little bit of any eye

 In my case I'm going to be using the Too Faced Eyeshadow Insurance Primer because this is

 So the first eyeshadow that we're going to be using is going to be like a pale kind of

 I'm going to be using Dazzle Light from MAC but I just want to say that you don't have

 As you can see I'm applying this light color below the brow because this is going to help

 Now I'm going to be mixing two eyeshadows, Queen and Glamour Check, because that's going

 And because I'm using Glamour Check that is like a reddish brown, it's going to warm the

 As you can see I'm applying these eyeshadows from the outer corner of my eyes and I'm trying

 to put it as well on the socket area, the socket bone, just like that because that's

 going to give me some depth on that area and it's going to look really smoky, really

 Alrighty, so next we're going to get a tiny bit more of the Glamour Check eyeshadow from

 Unfortunately, it's a limited edition, but if you go to the CCOs you can get it.

 So as you can see I applied this on a diagonal pattern on the outer corner of my eyes and

 This time I'm using a big, round blending brush just to blend all the edges of the eyeshadows

 because I don't want to have dark lines between the two colors that I'm using.

 Now we're going to go back and we're going to grab the Alice in Wonderland palette from

 Urban Decay and we're going to grab this very beautiful light color that is called Drink

 Now as you can see I'm applying this only on the inner third of my eyelid and I'm blending

 it onto the center of my eyelid just like that because this is going to give me more

 As you can see I decided to go with liquid liner because it's very easy and simple for

 But if you feel more comfortable using gel liner or even a pencil just do whatever is

 As you can see I'm thickening the lining at the outer corner and I'm just going to do

 a little, a very, very small tail at the outer corner just to enhance the shape of my eyes.

 We're going to go back again with the Glamour Check eyeshadow or any reddish brown that

 you have available and this time we're going to apply it on the bottom of the eye exactly

 below the lash line just to have some color on that area to make the look very smoky,

 You can use like a deep burgundy color or even a deep brown or even black.

 Now we're going to line the inner rims of the eye because this is going to emphasize

 the eye shape and it's going to give us very sexy, sultry eyes.

 This step is very, very important and we're going to apply two or three coats of mascara.

 I'm using this Voluminous mascara because I love it and because I'm not going to be

 wearing falsies I think this mascara is going to help my lashes to get really nice.

 After applying your foundations and your powders, concealers and all of that I think

 it's good if you use like a coral color blush and I decided to go with the Benefit Coralista.

 Now I'm going to give some shimmer on my cheekbones and I'm going to do that applying a little

 This is a shimmery something... shimmery product and I'm going to apply it on the highest points

 of my cheekbones just to have some light and to look really dewy.

 Now I'm going to finish the makeup with some lip gloss and basically that's it.

 So, today, I'm gonna cook one of my favorite meals on it for you.

 Alright, I'm going to be showing you how to play Superstition by Stevie Wonder.

 Alright, after that, you're going to hit the same string, but on your 5th fret.

 So then you're going to put your pinky finger two strings up on the 7th fret.

 Then what you're going to do is you're going to take your pointer finger, you're going

 If any of you don't know what hammering on is, really, you're just taking your different

 finger, same string, and you're going to put it on a different fret above it.

 You're going to start, not with your low E, you're not going to start with the open E,

 And then you're just going to go through the course again, just without the low E.

 So you're going to go, you're just going to start going right over.

 And now you're going to do the same, what you did to that, to the string above.

 So that was my cover for the intro to Superstition by Stevie Wonder.

 It's Juan here, rolling out with some videos for you guys to get a workout without a gym.

 I got a lot of emails about that and the thing is sometimes you guys don't have a gym to

 workout at so I'm rolling out with these videos hopefully to give you guys some ideas to try

 to get a workout in with limited equipment and kind of like things around the house.

 But this first one is just going to be good old-fashioned push-ups and I'm going to just

 If you read the top 10 right side of the page, I'll explain each one so that we can get right

 And just for all you guys, let you guys know I am down to about 184, 185 for my 202.

 Hey, wish me luck and as always, train natural, train drug-free and you know, you can do it too.

 But hey, push-ups, great way to hit chest, triceps, middle of the shoulders and you know,

 So I hope you guys enjoyed that and we're gonna get to more videos.

 And as you can see, it's gonna be me and I'm actually gonna have Chris also shoot a couple of these videos.

 There you have it, Cheeky Richo's sous vide Asian chicken legs.

 The first thing we're going to do is make our marinade for our chicken legs.

 We've got some very very finely sliced garlic and we're going to add that to our kecap manis

 We've got some very very finely sliced and peeled ginger that's going in too.

 I'm just going to mix that all around and leave it for a couple of minutes for those

 Now we've got some chicken legs here and I've got some kitchen cheese.

 So we don't want to be adding this fat to our sous vide mixture.

 I quite like the taste of the skin so that's staying but the fat can go.

 It's not as healthy as if you remove all of the skin but the flavour is in the skin as

 Now we're just going to roll down the top of our bag to keep it completely dry.

 If this gets wet then you aren't going to be able to seal it adequately because there

 So just fold down the edges like so and pop our chicken legs into our bag.

 Now we get our marinade and we pour it in on top of our chicken legs.

 And without wetting the top of our bag we just massage that all around so that it's

 Pop it into the vacuum sealer, into the vacuum channel and close the lid.

 Select moist food and separate these pieces a bit so that they're going to be flatter.

 That will draw the air out of that bag and seal it for hours to be.

 We'll allow the moisture to travel around and we're going to put that for two hours

 at 82 degrees in the sous vide machine completely covered and come back to some beautiful moist

 To hold them under we're going to pop in our wire rack which will hold them down and ensure

 Okay, our sous vide Asian chicken legs have been cooking for two hours in the sous vide.

 We are going to take the juice out and put it into the wok and reduce it with some Asian

 Okay, we've just put the juice out of our chicken legs into a wok on a fairly high heat

 and added the stems of our Asian greens which have been washed and just cut into chunks.

 Once they have softened sufficiently we are going to send in the leaves and just toss

 You don't need any extra oil or anything in this wok because the juices from the chicken

 Now you see how the color has really been taken on by the chicken legs of the sauce.

 We're just going to heat that through, toss it through and it will be ready to serve.

 Our sauce has reduced, our vegetables are cooked and our chicken has reheated.

 And then we just top it with our sauce which has reduced, the green vegetables.

 And there you have it, Cheeky Richer's Sous Vide Asian Chicken Legs with Asian Greens.

 If you'd like to see more interesting recipes and ideas, just check out the Cheeky Richer channel.

 We have so much more to show you and we are uploading lots of videos every week.

 Sly comes frozen which is great because it can be cooked frozen.

 I'm saying half about on all of these because it really is to taste and how you like it.

 Some of the other variations you can do with this instead of the salsa and taco seasoning

 you can do soy sauce and ginger and garlic or Italian seasoning with mayonnaise or mustard

 I'm going to save a little bit of this and put it on again as it cooks.

 Now that the swai is in the oven, while that is cooking, I'm going to grate some cheddar

 Jack cheese, jack with jalapeno is really good with this style.

 But right now we don't have any so I'm just going to go with the cheddar cheese.

 And we're going to put a little sprinkle of that on it just before it's done.

 Okay I have a few more minutes until this is done but I'm going to take it out of the

 What we're going to do is just a few more minutes for this to be done.

 I'm going to sprinkle that on top and stick that back in the oven for about 3 to 4 more

 Hey guys, if you're looking to do what I've done and remove the chip from your Mercedes-Benz

 casing in order to put on a new Mercedes-Benz casing like this one that I've ordered from

I've seen people destroy their entire key fob trying to get this chip out.

 taking it apart myself, I kind of figured out a really quick and easy way to do it without

 damaging your keys, your key fob, or most importantly, the chip in here.

 to do is, here let me start by reinserting it into the slide here.

 So if you notice that kind of clicked into place, you can hear it.

And that clicking sound was made by the white part there, that white acrylic piece.

 which I've kind of bent in a hook shape with a bit of an angle.

And that's just so that when I slip it in there, when I slip it underneath

 that white piece there, which is what I'm going to do, I can hook it on from there and slip it

And just be sure to be very careful when you're sliding that in.

 Once you've made that space in there, you can slide the paper clip as I have just now.

Now what's happened is that hook part, because it was at an angle,

Nice and safe way to pull your key fob chip out without damaging the key fob or the chip.

 Now the reason I removed this one is not because I have another casing, but it was giving me some trouble not really locking the car from a distance.

 Actually I'll show you how to remove the key fob to start off with there as well.

It helps to slip your nail underneath right when you're pressing that.

This video will be step one in building your own IBC tote rainwater harvesting system.

 Craigslist and there was maybe 10 or 15 people selling them anywhere from $70 to $125.

 was a food grade tote that either had like a soap or a cooking oil in it.

After wrapping the tank in plastic you'll only have two options.

 will be to cut the plastic and slide the metal bar back through the plastic arch or to not

 and just hit the wood chisel against that plastic arch and it cut it right off.

 and then tumbled the tank end over end through the yard until I felt like they were clean

 soap in your water especially if you'll be using this for your garden or for drinking

Now that your tank is clean it's time to wrap the tank in black plastic.

 wrapping the tank in black plastic to prevent sunlight from entering.

 the tank it will grow algae and then you'll have algae all in your water and your water

 duct tape, a box blade, a piece of cardboard, and your black plastic.

Once you get your plastic rolled out you'll want to place the cardboard at

Underneath the plastic you'll be making a cut at the 14 foot mark and that

 cardboard is going to be there in case you have it on dirt or concrete.

 of your tank on the ground but before you do so you'll need to remove your lid.

 removing the lid because we're going to cut the hole for the lid later and this is going

Now basically all we're going to do is wrap this thing like a huge

 to make a small cut to allow the valve to fit through the plastic.

 your plastic and on the tank there's a noticeable seam line that match up very well.

I'm a horrible gift wrapper and I'm not so good at wrapping tanks either

 enter everything should hold pretty well no matter what it looks like.

 Slide the tank in the cage a little bit and then push both of them upright.

 to give the tank a little pull, a little push maybe to push it back down in the cage but

I start from the inside of the lid and then I'll stretch the plastic over the lid

 This video demonstrates how to solve the problem of an overflowing brine tank on your AquaSmart

 Tighten the connection between the control valve and the vessel.

 Open the top of the brine tank, hold on to the vessel and twist the control head tight

 This is Dimitri, I'm going to show you guys very quickly how to paint your rifle.

 We have a new stencil that has now hit the market and we posted a picture of one of the

 As you guys were requesting instructions or a tutorial on how to do it, I get some

 of this tape for painting and I basically seal off all the optics and all the lenses.

 I don't run a rear cap so that's taped off, my rear backup sights are taped off.

 I've sacrificed a hanger and hopefully my wife doesn't see this.

 The reason I do that is it allows me to paint all the way around it.

 So we've taped up, we've degreased and now what I'm going to do is start the first layer.

 If you're doing this in your garage, please make sure you have a lot of ventilation.

 I like to start at the top and I shake it and again I'm just doing a very light layer.

 I've gone all the way around, got all the nicks and crannies and so on.

 The first coat has dried and as you see I've added cardboard and kind of isolated the area

 Make sure you shake your can and make sure you spray it beforehand and get some of it

 Now the way I'm going to apply it is I'm going to sit a little further back and do it.

 On this particular pattern I'm going to end up doing about 50% of this.

 Ok so we're at the 50-50 point meaning there's 50% tan, 50% of this dark gray.

 As you see the pattern there it's starting to match it pretty well.

 There's one more color we're missing and we're going to add that which is the mid-gray.

 On this particular pattern you have what they call desert sand, urban gray, and then foliage

 So take some paint thinner or brake cleaner and just go over it.

 Ok you guys so now I'm going to add the third color and what I've done here is I've exposed

 half of the tan and half of the dark gray because I don't want to eat too much of the

 You might want to let it sit for a second before you pull it off the weapon and let

 And we'll cut back in when the whole rifle has been painted with the third color.

 Ok guys so here we are we're all done I added the third layer to it.

 It looks just like the pattern it's pretty much disappeared into it.

 If I get further back you really start to notice how well it blends in.

 I hope you guys enjoyed the video if you have any questions feel free to email us at info

 This happens to be a 2004 model, and we have a check engine light on today, so we have

 We have a P3081 code, so we're going to have to look into that and see what that's all

 Now that particular code is a manufacturer specific code, and you can see right here

 Let's look at the freeze frame data, see if we can see something there.

 The vehicle of the car was at 39 miles an hour, and the engine speed was at 2200, but

 look at the temperature of the coolant temp sensor at 40 degrees.

 What we'll do is we'll check the wires, we'll check the connector.

 First thing we need to do is to take off this plastic cover on the engine.

 Then we have to take out the dipstick, and right here on the corners we want to grab

 Next we want the engine to be cold, and we want to remove the cap to the pressure tank

 here and put it right back on, just to relieve any pressure that might be in the system.

 First thing we need to do is to remove the electrical connector and examine it, make

 Now to remove the connector, we're going to take a small screwdriver, and what we're going

 to do is we're going to push up on this little piece right in the back of the connector.

 I know it's very difficult to see, but there is a little square area in the connector,

 and you'll lift up on it, hear that little click, and then that will remove the connector.

 The contacts look good, and what we'll do is we'll look in at the pins.

 Next thing we're going to do is we're going to clean all that down there, the dirt that

 So we'll put the O-ring on the sensor, and we'll take a little petroleum jelly, put that

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to pry out the clip, and we're going to remove

 Alright, now we can put the electrical connection back in place.

 So now all we have to do is put our cover back in place, take the scan tool, clear that

 check engine light, take it for a ride, and hopefully our P3081 trouble code doesn't come

 So that's all there is to changing an engine coolant temp sensor on your Volkswagen Jetta.

 Do you want to improve or renovate your home or protect your property from the weather?

 With the wall-perfect W867E from Wagner, you can manage this in the twinkling of an eye.

 The W867E is a real all-rounder because interior walls can be sprayed with emulsion paints

 Putting the W867E into operation is amazingly easy because all the parts are stored in its

 If necessary, dilute the paint, line up the riser tube, screw on the reservoir and simply

 Before starting, a short trial spray onto the enclosed test poster is recommended.

 The paint jet is variable and can be set horizontal, vertical or with pinpoint accuracy depending

 The paint flow rate and also the air feed can be conveniently adjusted on the multifunction

 Whether you are spraying walls or ceilings, this can be done right away without the inconvenience

 For this, the spraying attachment is simply replaced and then you can continue immediately

 The air tunnel around the paint jet guarantees a clean, perfect paint application.

 You can improve your walls for instance using the stencil technique and give free reign

 There are two different spray attachments in the practical W867E case.

 When working with interior wall paints, you use the large white spray attachment.

 The W867E also scores outdoors with an absolutely uniform paint application giving perfect coverage

 Especially on large surfaces, you will never again want to use a paintbrush or roller.

 With the wall perfect W867E, your objects will gleam with a new brilliance.

 The final cleaning is easy and quickly dealt with and the unit is immediately ready for

 Wall perfect W867E, the all-rounder for all projects around your house, indoors as well

 For interior wall paints, lacquers and much more, the versatile W867 paint spraying system

 A variety of spraying attachments are available as accessories for the W867E.

 Very easy to switch from one to the other thanks to the click and paint system.

 With the perfect spray 1400 spraying attachment, large areas can be coated quickly and efficiently.

 The small quantity spraying attachment is especially suitable for intricate detail work

 The radiator detail spraying attachment is ideal for precision coating of even hard to

 The brilliant spray attachment is ideal for demanding jobs and high quality surface finishings.

 Wall perfect W867E, the right solution for all paint applications.

 They're not hard to make, but they're going to have some unusual names.

 We've got the capo at the first fret, and the guitar is tuned to standard E, A, D, G,

 We've got our ring finger on the third fret on the B string, and this is being counted

 Now this is the actual chord name, and we're going to make that by going to this fret,

 That might take a little work for beginners, but we can do this.

 Coming from the A string all the way down, holding everything down.

 I'm going to take my first finger and put it on the A string at the second fret, and

 Now the reason why we're using these two fingers is we're preparing to do the next

 And the next chord is B minor 11, which we're going to get by just simply putting this finger

 And then the middle finger goes to the A string at the third fret, and the first finger,

 We're going to simply make the G slash B by just leaving these fingers where they are,

 removing the middle finger, and then putting the first finger on the A string at the second

 And that's our G slash B, and we're going to strum that from the A string.

 We're going to omit the E string, because if we play the low E, we've got an E minor

 Hey guys, I was prepping for my butternut squash soup and I started cutting into this guy and I thought I gotta show my viewers

 You can buy this already cut up and peeled you'll pay a little bit more

 Once you get the bottom cut off then you got to scrape out the insides

 Because they're real tough and they're these are really hard to deal with I used to have to do cases of these when I worked

 But if you're just doing a soup at home and you got a couple of them

 You've got to go like this and try and work your knife and it's a little more complicated

 These win every time so you definitely need a sharp knife and some patience

 But if you know how to make a good soup of these the end result is worth it

 What I do is I just cut them up into chunks and I roast these before I puree them for the soup

 Make it a little thicker, then just spoon it into the dish, right?

 If you guys want the exact colors I'm using in this tutorial, don't forget to check the

 information box below the video for all of the list of materials.

 I've put it on its side and I'm stippling on sort of a silvery gray onto the corner

 And for the third color I'm using a teal and I'm going to put that kind of right in the

 Next you're grabbing a white striper polish and I'm putting one curved stripe along the

 Next you're going to do the exact same thing except you're going to start from the opposite

 corner of your nail and you're going to go right by your cuticle.

 And you're going to do the same thing doing a second curve right below that one.

 And next you're going to do is either grab a dotting tool or a spotter brush.

 Using a white polish again, I'm just going to create a row of dots right above that curved

 And once you've got that, don't forget to wait for this to dry and apply a layer of

 When they leak, they usually show water someplace around the bearing assembly in this area where the bearing assembly comes up to the pump casing.

People want to buy a gasket for that that's actually a weep hole allowing the water to evacuate.

 Okay, to take this pump apart and most pumps, there are some bolts holding the bearing assembly into the casing.

There is an impeller attached to the shaft of the bearing assembly that is inside this casing.

I'll show you what the seal kit looks like and how to change that.

 And also how to tell you if you need to get more parts than just that.

 Okay, we have pulled the bearing assembly out of the casing and pulled the motor off.

 When this seal, and this is the seal kit right here, when it leaks, it lets water come out of these weep holes.

 This is positioned like this with the weep holes down, oil cap up.

 If it's leaking more than just a drip, drip, drip, it has probably pushed oil back into the bearing assembly and the bearings are starting to wear.

 So, when you're at this point, push the shaft back and forth, up and down.

 It's going to have a little 4 to 1⁄2 play, but it should have no side-to-side play.

 There's a stationary seat and some rubber that holds it together.

 And there's a look inside there what that's supposed to look like.

 Yours will be a little dirtier if it's been in use, but there is a receiver.

 A little bit of lubricant, non-oil lubricant, maybe some soap or something.

 This stationary seat, excuse me, the rotating head, goes on with the carbon side down.

 Hopefully you can see this with a little bit of a ring, a raised place, that receives the spring.

 And if you leave the centering washer on one that has a receiver, it will over-compress the seal kit and break it.

 This one here, as you can see, is flat and requires that centering washer to control where the spring is.

 This one has the centering device built right into the impeller.

 This is the side of the bearing assembly that goes to the motor.

 Anytime you change the bearing assembly, it's a wear item, so I'd recommend changing it.

 When you put the bearing assembly in, if it's got an oil cap, that means it requires oil.

 So read the manufacturer's instructions on how much oil and how often to oil something like this.

 Welcome to the Specialty Products Company installation and adjustment procedures for the EZ-CAM XR camber adjusting bolts.

 This video will outline the procedure using a camber reference gauge with the tire and wheel removed.

 Please follow common safety precautions when installing this product.

 After determining the amount of camber change needed, remove the alignment equipment along with the tire and wheel assembly.

 The EZ-CAM XR bolts are designed to work on struts without elongated bolt holes.

 Select the proper size EZ-CAM XR cam bolt from the vehicle application chart.

 Before installing, make sure the flanged washer is installed on the head of the bolt with the handle of the washer towards the head.

 Work the bolt and washer into place, making sure the small inner tab on the washer is recessed inside the hole.

 The bolt and washer should sit flush against the strut with the handle pointing towards the tire if adjusting for positive camber.

 Mount the 8113 camber reference gauge or equivalent on the wheel and adjust to zero.

 Now loosen the bottom bolt, taking care not to disturb the camber gauge.

 Adjust camber by turning the head of the bolt, making sure the washer does not move.

 If negative camber is desired, install EZ-CAM XR cam bolt so the handle is pointing to the inside of the vehicle.

 Adjust camber to the desired change as read on the camber reference gauge.

 Tighten and torque both strut mounting bolts to specifications.

 Reinstall wheel, mount alignment equipment and recompensate if necessary.

 If fine tuning is necessary, the EZ-CAM XR cam bolt can be adjusted under the vehicle.

 For more assistance, visit Dell.com or the Support Team at Dell.com.

 I just came back from Mexico and I have a wonderful recipe for you

 Tres Leches means 3 milk because we are going to make it with regular milk,

 This one is a little thicker and we are going to flavor it with orange zest and vanilla.

 Vanilla extract, but you could use almond extract, whatever extract you like.

 As you know, whenever you are making a dessert, anything sweet,

 If you don't have evaporated milk, you can use regular milk instead.

We are going to blend all these things together and it's going to be ready.

 Now that we blended all the ingredients, you have to do 2 things.

 First, get some water boiling because we are going to bake the flan in a water bath.

 As you can see, all the sugar is melting into this beautiful brownish liquid.

 If you keep the caramel in the hot pan, it may burn because it continues cooking.

 Place the baking pan in the oven without the water, then pour the water.

 You want to put enough boiling water until it reaches half of the height of the baking pan that contains the flan.

 Bake the flan for 1 hour or 1 hour and 10 minutes depending on your oven.

 Let the flan cool down on the counter for 1 hour before putting it in the fridge for at least 4 hours.

 I know it's really hard for you because you want to eat it right now, but you can't.

 You have to put it in the fridge for 4 hours before we can take it out of the mold.

 take a sharp knife and cut the edges of the flan to make sure that it does not stick to the pan.

 Place a plate on top of the pan, flip the flan, and give it a shake.

 Look at this beautiful surface with the caramel, the sauce around.

 Check out my Facebook page to see all of your comments or questions.

 Hey Adrenaline Junkies, we're here today, we're going to do another under 5 minute workout

 I got about 4 or 5 feet of room, you can do this set 3 times, today I'm going to go over

 So we're going to start with a side sprint shuffle, so you're just going from side to

 I'm just going a couple little steps, I'm touching the ground on both sides, my abs

 Okay, you're going to go 30 seconds, moving your feet fast, alright?

 I'm getting my legs wide for this, you're going to squat down, you're going to touch

 and you're going to power jump, squat, power jump, touch, notice I'm staying low when I

 touch the center and I power there, touch, power squat, touch, you're going to go 30

 Either way, a couple more, good, you can hold that last one a little bit, burn it out, 3,

 So for these, you're going to jump up, you're going to come down, pop your legs out together,

 Modified version, you can jump, bring it down, step out, push up, you can always drop your

 So when I try to fall right in, I'm going to push up, you can, bring it up, make sure

 Alright, after the burpees, we're going to start push up, okay?

 So what I do for these, your feet are together, your arms are spread, okay?

 You're going to get down, you're going to push up and you're going to power.

 If you want to get really crazy, push up, bring it out, push up, bring it out, push

 For beginners, drop your knees, same thing, push, stall, push up, stall.

 Okay, by stalling, I'm not just working my arms, I'm burning, I'm powering down, okay?

 So remember when you're doing these, notice my back's very straight, okay?

 I'm not sinking in like this, I'm not really high, especially when you're doing that jump

 You can really, really, really hurt your tailbone and back, okay?

 If you're not comfortable doing that first, use your knees, but same thing, keep that

 So see how my back's nice and straight throughout the whole thing, okay?

 Alright, our next move, our last move for today's workout is a plank drop.

 So what we do for these, you're going to plank, shoulders over elbows, you're dropping your

 Keep your head facing down so your neck is straight with your vertebrae and you're just

 Ladies, this is a great, great exercise for your bra line area, okay?

 My core stays where it's at, just sinking and rounding my shoulder blades, okay?

 All those exercises, 30 seconds on, 10 seconds off and then go right into the next one.

 So we have 5 exercises, you go through each one in a row, then do the set again.

 Take a break, do some stretches, grab some water and then do the set over, okay?

 You can probably get done that workout in under 20 minutes for sure.

 Okay, if you're fine, you know you can add your cardio into it.

 Like I've said before, jump on your treadmill, jump off, do a set.

 Get back on the treadmill, either walking, running, get off, do a set.

 Alright, mix it into your workout at the gym, whatever you want.

 If you have any comments or questions at all, please leave them on the site.

 Turkey is a traditional Thanksgiving meat or meal and this year we decided we were going

 We have guests coming over, family coming over and so I have elk roast here from an

 We're using a crock pot today and you can probably do this in a roaster in your oven

 But crock pot is just the way that we've been using the last several times that we've cooked

 You can do this with moose, you can do it with caribou, white tail deer, just about

 Again we have several hours before anybody is going to be here.

 And again, not a lot of measuring going on here but I'm going to put a couple tablespoons

 And what's going to happen is as the elk starts to cook it's going to create a lot of its

 Lots of this stuff will cook out and it will create good flavor.

 Guests won't be getting over here for another seven hours or so.

 My roast actually isn't even 100% thawed yet so I'm going to start this on low.

 If you were in a hurry and your roast was completely thawed you could start this on

 Now I've really had to do very little to the elk over the last couple hours.

 As the vegetables start to cook down I take extra carrots, potatoes, and onions.

 And then put them in there as well to keep adding more vegetables to the base.

 I find it just helps out with the overall flavor, the creamy texture of the gravy.

 But I just find for some reason when I'm making alpros that salt just really seems to bring out the flavor of the meat.

 Assalaamu Alaikum and welcome to Titli's Busy Kitchen with me Titli Nihaan.

 Now some of you will have seen the title of this video and thought,

 You see, bread and butter pudding is as familiar to us Brits as pumpkin pie is to Americans.

 For this gloriously British pudding, I've got 10 slices of white stale bread.

 It's important that it's stale otherwise your pudding will end up too soggy.

 there's a quarter of a teaspoon of cinnamon and a quarter of a teaspoon of nutmeg

 You can leave them on if you wish but it's just my personal preference.

 Sprinkle on half the sultanas or currants or raisins or whatever you're using.

 Once the milk gets to a temperature where you can just about put your finger in it,

 and then we're going to bake this at 180 degrees Celsius for about 35 minutes.

 Serve in slices either on its own or with a little bit of cream.

 When we Brits make a pudding, we don't need Jello or a pie crust

 Hi, I'm Casey Singlestead here at Lits and Motors just one mile down the road from the

 Today we're in a 24G floor plan which is a part of the View Profile or Navion IQ lineup.

 As you can see we're back in the bedroom and just going to give you a quick shot at the

 whole process of pushing out this rear slide room and what this rear bed looks like both

 As you can see currently the slide room is in so you do have a tiered mattress here where

 one portion just sits directly on top of the other as you travel down the road.

 So this is what the bedroom area would look like as you travel.

 And so now we're going to go ahead and push that slide room out and move that bed down.

 It's always good to either have your engine running or be plugged in and then your master

 Alright once the slide room is out it's simply a matter of sliding the top portion of the

 As you can see each side of the mattress also has these nice little handles that are sewn

 in so that way it makes it a lot easier to pull it back up on the mattress when it's

 And so then as you can see this will just slide back into place giving you a little

 But essentially that's how the rear bed works in the 24G which is a part of the View Profile

 Okay, what you have here are three chicken strips, breast strips, some teriyaki sauce,

 a Fizgiz device for, let's see, it's for injecting CO2 under pressure into a bottle.

 So I'm going to show you how to carbonate, or excuse me, I'm going to show you how to

 infuse some Kikoman teriyaki sauce into a chicken strip in about, oh I don't know, 30

 You would use something like a 3 liter bottle, but I'm just going to do one to let you see.

 And to get it in the mouth of the bottle I'm going to actually make the chicken strip just

 It doesn't fit as easily into a 16 ounce bottle as it would into the mouth of a 3 liter bottle.

 So, I'm going to start out by first pouring some teriyaki sauce into the bottle.

 The amount that you might add to just flavor it up if you were eating it on your plate.

 And now I'm going to drop a chicken strip, maybe two if they're not too difficult to

 And like I say, these would go easier if they were 3 liter bottles with bigger mouths.

 The bottle is getting hard as a rock while it's being pressurized with CO2 to 55 to 60

 What you're seeing here is just about all of the marinade has disappeared from the bottle

 Let me reorient the camera so that you can see it a little better.

 And believe me, that's about as thoroughly as you're going to want to get your teriyaki

 Hey y'all, doing something a little different today, well I guess halfway different, different

 in the fact that it's the Knoxville Chili Company and we're making chili so we've done

 But, as you may, well some of you may or may not know, my girlfriend, she's a vegetarian

 so with all the stuff that I cook, yeah I know that's crazy isn't it, but with all the

 stuff that I cook, the first question out of her mouth all the time is, is it vegetarian,

 Well 99.9, well 100% of the time it's no, it's not, it's going to have meat somewhere,

 But, it's, you know, it's winter time, I hate to see the girl go without some chili so today

 what I'm going to attempt to do is make vegetarian chili and I'll have her go through all the

 ingredients here, make sure that we're alright on everything and this is truly going to be

 I read the labels but then again I don't know everything so some of these, some of these

 words they use turn out to be an animal byproduct and we don't want to use any of that in it.

 So anyways, that's what we're going to do today, it's not going to have any meat in

 it but I'm going to use three different kinds of beans, kidney beans, well kidney beans,

 pinto beans and black beans, of course any time we get a chance to use some Rotel, we

 I'm lazy, I don't want to cut up garlic so I just got some minced garlic, container of

 Peppers, we're going to use a orange pepper, red pepper, orange pepper, green pepper and

 And I'm going to use some fire roasted, hunts, diced tomatoes with garlic and because it

 is meatless, I'm going to put as many peppers in it as I can and I bought this bag of mini

 sweet peppers so I don't know that I'm going to use them all, probably will.

 And I suggested maybe we use portobello mushroom, you know, something to put something in there

 that would give it a little substances like meat but for whatever reason she didn't want

 that so I'm going to do my best but any time you leave the meat out, that's never a good

 So anyway, stick around, let me get some things rearranged and we'll get this thing kicking.

 Alright, what I did, that's the onions, what I did is I cut everything kind of chunky,

 big so that, you know, because there's no meat in it so something in there again to

 But this is green pepper, the orange red pepper and the yellow pepper.

 It's one of each except for the yellow pepper, it's about three quarters of it.

 I got the eye in the stove here on medium high and what I want to do first is I want

 The tomatoes are already cooked, the beans if you cook them too long they'll get soft.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to let this simmer for a while, just the vegetables

 and the V8 juice and one pack of chili mix and I'm using McCormick.

 So McCormick, it's been around forever but for whatever reason I don't remember trying

 So when we get ready to do something else to this I'll bring it back.

 Alright, I let those vegetables simmer for probably 45 minutes or so.

 They're getting pretty tender so now we want to add some of the other ingredients to it.

 So I'm going to put the Rotel tomatoes in there in a fire roasted dice and I'm putting

 I got the beans over here draining so let me let this simmer for just a few minutes,

 simmer down so we've got some room to add those beans to it and we're pretty close to

 It's about right, you know, it's just one of them judgment deals.

 I think the vegetables have gotten tender enough, pretty soon they're going to cook

 up to where you won't even know they're there but we don't want that.

 What I'm going to do now though, just finish this up, I'm going to put the other package

 I think you would, I think you'd walk up to this chili and you might not even know it

 And I think there's room enough to put this last can of Rotel tomatoes in.

 Alright now all we're going to do is just let it simmer for about another twenty minutes

 Well there you go, I'll let it, chili's better if you let it sit in the refrigerator overnight,

 I say I'm excited, it doesn't have meat in it so I'm a little concerned about trying

 Take it from me, if you watch my videos you know I'm all about beef and pork and sausage

 I wouldn't care to eat that vegetarian, I'll just be honest with you.

 So if you're looking to cut back, you know, and you're looking for something that's vegetarian,

 trust me when I tell you, make some chili like that, that worked out really well.

 I mean it tastes good, I'm not just bragging, you know me, I'm not bragging.

 So anyways, give it a shot, something healthy on the Knoxville Chili Company, never thought

 Okay, so the guitar is made up of six strings, the sixth string being the thickest and the

 So the notes of the open strings are E, A, D, G, E, E. Again, that's E, A, D, G, E, E.

 So to tune the guitar, what you want to do is you want to turn your tuner either left

 All right guys, so there it is, a lesson on how to tune your guitar.

 Make sure you tune up every time you play to keep your ear nice and sharp.

 I'll see you back here at AngeloDiStefano.com for your next lesson.

 tactile properties of material, specifically the aluminum derailleur hanger.

 We have a very cold morning here in the middle of Minnesota in the middle of January.

 This hanger that we have, we are now at a negative 4.3 degrees.

 and then re-bend to straighten it, and repeat again and again and again,

 It is quite surprising how many bends and re-bends you can get out of a hanger before you have failure,

 but we're going to try and quantify that at this cold temperature.

 Then we will repeat at a room temperature to see is there any real difference,

 To simulate the crash, we're going to try and repeat the bend each time.

 which is about 64 millimeters, that's 2 1⁄2 inches, out and then back in.

 It is extreme, but this is not unknown to have a hanger bend that much.

 In today's video I'm going to show you how to make this quick and easy Christmas card.

 First thing you're going to need is a scrap of Whisper White cardstock.

 I've inked it up in Basic Black Classic Ink and punched it onto my Whisper White cardstock.

 You now want to grab some Old Olive Classic Ink and a wedge of stamping sponge.

 You want to sponge just around the edge of this greeting piece.

 As you can see, I'm holding my greeting piece in my left hand and with my right hand I'm gently dabbing my sponge on top of my ink pad.

 Then holding it straight up and down, I'm slowly and gently dragging it along the edge of my cardstock.

 I'm doing this slowly and carefully because I want to try to keep the Old Olive in between the edge of the image piece and the black line inside.

 It almost looks as though it was matted onto a piece of Old Olive cardstock.

 Next thing I'm going to do is grab this label that was punched out of Stampin' Up!

 I want to place some snail adhesive on the back and center and stick it to my label.

 Next thing I want to do is grab my foam mat and paper piercing tool and punch three holes fairly close together.

 I'm going to insert one brad into each hole and then open up the prongs on the back.

 As you can see, by keeping the holes fairly close together, the brads look a lot more clustered as though they were berries.

As you can see, the prongs will overlap somewhat, although you can twist them around so they're not all one on top of the other.

I used a 1 inch circle punch and I also used my small oval punch.

 I'm going to show you with a 1 inch circle punch, but the gist is the same.

 I have no training in drawing and I'm not a particularly good artist.

 I'm now going to grab a pair of tweezers and I'm going to take my 1 inch circle punch again.

 What I'm going to do is slide this circle into my punch and then use my hand-drawn lines as a guide.

 This is a very fun and easy way of creating your own holly leaves.

 You are going to want to use tweezers for this, however, because I did find that it's so small it's virtually impossible to hold it.

 Once you have your holly leaf punched, you're now ready to sponge it.

 I've got a piece of designer paper from the Merry Moments designer paper collection.

 First I'm going to grab a piece of my Real Red Polka Dot Girl Green ribbon.

 As you can see I've put a little bit of snail on either side of the designer paper piece.

 You may find it helpful to align your card front with the lines on your grid paper.

 I just find visually that helps me do a better job of centering my DP.

 Next you're going to grab your label and place a Stampin' Dimensional at the top and a Stampin' Dimensional at the bottom.

 The last thing you need to do is to put a piece of Stampin' Dimensional on the back of your holly leaves.

 That's the one I had prepped for the video but it's not sponged yet.

 Using a piece of Stampin' Dimensional I'm going to stick it onto my card.

 Then I'm going to do the same for the one I punched out of the oval.

 You can see here that when you create a holly leaf out of the oval you end up with one that's a little bit longer.

 I hope you enjoyed this tutorial and I look forward to stamping with you again.

 So this is actually just a regular grape juice that you can purchase.

 This is annatto seeds that have been cooked in oil for not very long, for probably about an hour.

 This is turmeric, just a powdered turmeric that you could get at any spice area.

 This is onion that was cooked down, specifically onion skin of a yellow onion that was cooked down

 to reduce into this sort of brown liquid, gives you a nice brown color.

 Here we have red cabbage and again I just cooked it down a little bit, drained off the juice

 and was able to get actually three different colors from red cabbage.

 So this is the straight red cabbage without anything done to it as it would come off the cabbage.

 and if you add a little bit of baking soda you can get a nice greenish blue color.

 And over here we have beets and I did the same thing as I did for the red cabbage.

 I chopped them up, cooked them down for about an hour and I have a beautiful red color.

 And I tried to band it with a rubber band to see what kind of design I could get.

 You can do wax like crayons as well and you can maybe get some little designs there.

 The annatto, since it's cooked in oil, you just need to kind of wipe that off a little bit

 Thing to note when you're working with the natural colors for Easter eggs,

 the color you see in the container is not the color you're going to get.

 It's a very faint color, but actually as it sits you'll get different tones of pinks and blue

 These are actually, after they dry, you get a lot of the cool textures that come off in the natural colors.

 Since I'll be showing you the full face tutorial, first thing will be this Urban Decay Prep

 spray, my Too Faced Hangover Primer and then Benefit's Porefessional to make a very smooth

Just to even up my skin tone I'll apply Estee Lauder Double Wear

 Light Foundation which is beyond amazing, seriously it's becoming my new favorite.

 After that I'll highlight my under eye area with MAC's Pro Longwear Concealer in NC15

 and I know that this is a lot for some of you but I like the way this brightens up my

 step further today and give myself a cream highlighting contour and for that purpose

 I used Anastasia Beverly Hills Cream Contour Kit in Light and I'm going to make a separate

I'll use this cream as a base and I'll use the same concealer to

 Now before you freak out, I know that this looks orange at this very moment because I'm

 pale as a ghost but we'll make it work and blend seamlessly in a few seconds.

 To set my highlight, as always I use Laura Mercier Secret Brightening Powder and it works

 the best when you dip your damp sponge in it and press it into the skin.

 else, mattify my face and blend it all together I'll use my cocoa powder from Too Faced and

 just sweep it on in a circular motion and then dust off my under eye brightening powder.

 And then to intensify my contour I use Kat Von D Shade Light Palette and I mix these

 I'll quickly fill my brows with Brow Wiz from Anastasia and set them with Mac Waterproof

 As always, my eyeshadow base is Soft Ochre Paint Pot by Mac and Meat Matte Nude by The

 and that goes right into the crease with my fluffy blending brush and also along the lower

Then I mix these lighter and darker grey colors and just deepen my crease.

 After that I took this whitest white matte eyeshadow and applied it all over my lid making

 Now, first I'll do my regular black wing and I'm just keeping it very very thin because

This is a bit tricky so you really have to take your time and draw

 and started from the inner corner and then continued to the outer and finally connected

I'll apply a coat of my Roller Lash Mascara from Benefit and pop

 on my iconic lashes from House of Lashes and use tweezers to stick them together with my

 To finish off my eyes I'll put some Milk Jumbo Eye Pencil from NYX into my waterline

 And then to add some glow I'll use Opal from Becca and it's so so gorgeous like I can't

 For my lips I mixed Anastasia's Liquid Lipsticks in Pure Hollywood and Electric Coral to get

 subscribe, hit the thumbs up if you liked the video and follow me on Instagram for some

On the show today, we are taking on the week's five-minute food challenge.

 We are going to transform our Thanksgiving leftovers into a five-minute dish.

 Our first step is to take some of our leftover turkey and this we just cut it off as this

 entire breast off of the turkey and now we're just going to slice it.

 So now we're going to take our turkey and we're just going to put a good amount of turkey on here.

 Make sure it fits and then we're going to put some Swiss cheese

 So we're going to take our egg and milk mixture and we're going to dump the sandwich in and this can get a

 I'm going to dump the sandwich in here and we're going to put the sandwich on our

 And we're just going to let it cook till it's done on each side nice and brown and we will have a nice delicious sandwich.

 Okay, the sandwich is nice and toasty and where it's time to take it off the pan.

And we're just going to take an offset bread knife and we're going to give it a little cut.

 Monte Cristo is served with jam and with the cranberry sauce it mimics a traditional Monte Crisco.

 If you like this recipe, please subscribe below and log on to my website at

 I don't think nachos are worth eating unless they take three hours to make.

 Now if you want to thicken this up more and make it look more like nacho cheese,

 But we're just going all natural and not caring about the texture right now

 Not too much because you don't want to have lots of stuff all over the place.

 I mean it doesn't taste like your typical yellow fake cheese sauce.

 And it doesn't involve artificially inseminating a cow and taking a baby cow away from a mother cow.

 I feel like every layer of nacho that we eat, I'm getting to know you a little better.

 I'm just getting closer to your heart and finding that it's drenched in vegan cheese.

 Hey guys, we are kind of running out of ideas of what stuff to make.

 We're not running out of ideas, we just want you guys to participate.

 If you non-vegans want to see something done vegan, let us know.

 If you vegans have awesome recipes that you want to share, please let us know because we would love to make them.

 Once we get a blowtorch, we'll totally make that vegan creme brulee.

 Hello, my name is Stephen Boone and I would like to share with you this little video I

 The curved bottom plane starts just like the flat bottom plane and we get to this point

 I use a 12 inch sanding disc to help mark out a curve on the bottom of the plane just

 I take it to my drum sander and start curving the bottom of the plane and I do a lot of

 this by eye so you can see here what the curved bottom plane looks like after my first attempt.

 I've made a curved bottom jig to help me smooth out all the imperfections that you

 And I move the bottom of the plane back and forth on this smoothly trying to shape everything

 Back to the drum sander for some more refinement of the bottom of the plane as well as the

 Back as you can see to the smoothing of the bottom of the plane and I go back and forth

 Here I'm adjusting the opening for the mouth of the plane so that the iron can protrude

 And an additional way to do that is with a file so I recommend that if you're going to

 You can see in this shot that I still have a little bit of work to do.

 So I'm going to come back to the chisel again and continue the process of carefully opening

 Now that the blade is ready to make a test cut I put everything together just like on

 I removed everything and I'm beginning to do the tapering of the sides.

 Even with the curved bottom plane it's nice to get kind of close to the soundboard sometimes.

 So now you can see with the drum sander and that flat sanding area I was able to put a

 If you look very carefully you'll notice the iron is protruding and it's a little bit higher

 So I go back to my curved jig and while this is exaggerated what I do is sand with a little

 After I've done that the blade has fit well and I'm making shavings the way I like them.

 You can see a modification I made to the wedge on the mini plane I usually use.

 I've set up a little brace here and as with the guitar I would go ahead and start with

 the chisel but one of the things about chiseling down a brace is sometimes the chisel will

 slip off and imagine if that was the top of your guitar on the inside you have a problem.

 So I use the flat bottom mini plane to help ramp the brace down but at some point I won't

 be able to use the flat bottom plane anymore because the front of the plane will pull the

 I can put a gentle slope into this brace and feather it right down even with the surface

 Now if the curve of the brace needs to be altered if you want to have something more

 curvy then what you would do is you could take this plane and modify it by just pulling

 away material where you see the pencil here and you could also pull away material in the

 If you do modify your plane what you don't want to do is to mess around too much with

 the area just in front of the blade and as the pencil will show in a moment just behind

 Try to stay away from these areas because you don't want to mess with the opening of

 Now sometimes you might want to make the blade stick out a little bit further.

 My normal position is trying to hold it straight up and down as curved so it's a little tricky.

 But if you want the blade to stick out a little bit more you could either tilt the plane forward

 Of course this is all very exaggerated but you could adjust the depth that way.

 Here we have it the curved bottom mini plane and it's a real useful companion to the flat

 bottom mini plane and it helps get into spaces where the flat bottom one won't.

 So hey I really appreciate you watching the video and until next time thanks for looking.

 Hey, it's Katie Kimball from Kitchen Stewardship here, and I am doing a tortilla making race

 I'm going to test the timing and the ease and the output of three different ways of

 The old-fashioned rolling pin way, the electric tortilla press, and the heavy cast iron tortilla

 This is really kind of more for corn tortillas, but it works for small whole wheat tortillas.

 It's soaked overnight, and then I didn't get to it, so it was in the fridge for another

 night, but it's been back on the counter and back to room temperature for at least three

 So what I'm going to do is just go through the motion, and you can check out the website

 to see how long each one took and just kind of the wrap-up of how it all turned out.

 I also made them in three different ways, with coconut oil, lard, and palm shortening.

 So I'll talk a little bit on the blog about what I thought about those different ways.

 I put it on, smash it, and I roll from the inside out as fast as I can.

 Coconut oil is a little bit softer, so it does spread a little further, and it's a little

 The palm shortening is kind of in the middle as far as workability.

 And I'm just always starting from the middle, going back and forth, trying to get a circle.

 It's set on just about dead center, medium heat, on very standard burners, not power burners at all.

 One tip of the trade you want to do if you're using kind of a cutting board that would slide around

 is to put your washcloth or any kind of towel underneath the cutting board.

 This electric griddle has been heating up for a while, so it's really super duper hot.

 Okay, I'm going to let that cook for a couple seconds or minutes.

 In this episode, I'm going to show you how to play the Harita Grid Snare Drum exercise.

 If you want free Snare Drum sheet music for this Snare Drum exercise, simply head over

 to SnareDrumTV.com, register as a free member and as a free member in the members area,

 you get access to all the sheet music from every single Snare Drum TV episode.

 If you haven't done that yet, pause this video right now, go do that really quick and

 It builds off the concept from two previous episodes and those episodes are episode 18

 where we talked about the 4-2-1 formula and episode 35 where you learned the Shifting

 So if you haven't checked out those two episodes yet, I highly suggest you go watch those and

 learn those concepts and exercises first because it will make learning this exercise a lot

 If you have watched those episodes already, let's go ahead and get into this.

 So this is the Harita Grid and we're going to be plugging in three groupings or three

 The first grouping is where we start the Harita on the downbeat.

 The second grouping is where we start the Harita on the second partial of the beat.

 And in the third grouping, we start the Harita on the third partial of the beat, which sounds

 So those are the three groupings that we're going to be plugging into the 4-2-1 formula.

 Now in the first section of the Harita Grid, the four section, we're going to play four

 So I'm going to go ahead and play that entire section for you so you get an idea as to what

 In the two section, we're going to play two beats of each of those groupings and then

 And finally, in the one section, we're going to play one beat of each of the groupings

 So, that's each one of the sections broken down and played individually.

 Now, I'm going to go ahead and put them all together and play the entire Harita Grid Stereo

 If you have this worked up already to 85 beats per minute, feel free to grab your pad and

 If not, learn it slow, work it up, make sure it's all consistent and everything, and gradually

 And once you get it up to 85 beats per minute, come back to this video and play along.

 It's a little bit of a brain teaser in terms of which hand you start the Harita on and

 But, go get the stereo drum sheet music for this and take your time learning it.

 It's a lot of fun to play and it's really, really good for your hands.

 So, if you enjoyed this video, please go share it with a drummer friend of yours.

 Tweet it on Twitter, share it on Facebook, share it on Google+, whatever you're on.

 I would really appreciate it if you help spread the word of Stereo Drum TV.

 And, if you have any questions or you like this exercise or whatever, just want to say

 So, that's it for this episode and as always, I will see you next time on Stereo Drum TV.

 Hey, Mike Foster here and today I'm going to show you how to eat kohlrabi.

 Kohlrabi is from the cabbage family and it's a gorgeous, delicious, tasty vegetable that's

 Let's cut this baby in half while I talk about all the ways you can prepare it.

 You can even shred it and make fritters like I did with my zucchini fritters on one of

 When I went to college in North Philadelphia, there were lunch trucks all over the campus

 I mean, basically, it's about taking an ingredient, putting your heart and soul into it, and making

 What I'll do is just take my boning knife and kind of spread this out and then feel

 Once you break that seal there, you just finish it the rest of the way with your knife like

 If you look at it on the bottom, it actually says right there, hey, it's a chicken fryer.

 So when you put your oil in there, you don't have to worry about it kind of bubbling over.

 You know, if you have one of those deep fryers, you can use it.

 I like to use a cast iron pan because this is the traditional way to fry chicken.

 I actually got a bunch of my cast iron pans from my grandmother, actually handed down

 This is one I just found and I like it because it's got the high sides.

 And the reason I do that is kind of some of the moisture drains out of it.

 You don't want it all, all that moisture in the chicken because that'll basically, can

 So there's another thing I do after I put the salt and pepper on.

 I like to do this the night before and let it sit so that way that hot sauce soaks in.

 Okay, here's some chicken that I actually already did yesterday.

 It's already seasoned with salt and pepper in the hot sauce and it sat, drained a little

 That's probably the most important thing when you're frying chicken.

 You want to make sure that your oil is about, I like it about 360.

 You can season all the chicken and you don't have to worry about cleaning up.

 That's about another teaspoon of salt and another teaspoon of black pepper.

 Now what I like to do when I fry chicken is fry all the same pieces together.

 You have to pay attention to it and what it takes to get your oil to about 360.

 These are pretty big thighs, so I'm only going to fry two thighs at a time because you don't

 One of the things I'll do too, because sometimes if there's some moisture in there, I'll get

 A thigh that size is going to take about five minutes, six minutes per side.

 One of the things I'll also do is have an oven on about 275 because as this chicken

 comes out, I like to put it in the oven and basically kind of just let it rest.

 When you cook turkey or you cook a big roast beef or a big pork roast, you like to let

 So what I can do now while that's frying, let's put some legs in here.

 You know, this is exciting realizing, hey, look, man, I'm making food that's going to

 Next I'm going to show you how to make collard greens with ham hocks and beans.

 This week I went to a friend's house and I had the simplest meal.

 She used a head of cabbage and noodles, some butter, some garlic, salt and pepper and it

 So I'm going to show you how to make what they call cabbage and noodles.

 Now what my friend did, she just took some old, you know how you have those leftover

 She just took some leftover lasagna noodles, broke them up, put them in a pan.

 Just broken up noodles, what was left, you know, bottom of the bag.

 Alright, I'm going to put about one stick of butter in that whole shebang.

 I wish I would have known about this dish when I was raising my kids.

 And then what I'm going to serve this with, because my meat didn't defrost.

 Look at those nice big pieces of chuck roast that I had canned.

 But I'm not going to let it because I want to serve it in chunks.

 And then on the side of that dish we'll have our Kluski noodles.

 You know I'm not even sure how to serve this because when I was by my friend's house and

 she made this we were just so hungry that's what we ate was the noodles and the cabbage.

 My hard ass head of cabbage from the garden which they did not grow very big.

 all right now I got the spring starter put in place a little difficult with the

 dipstick there in a way had to tie up a fuel line in order to get those bolts I

 do have a spacer in place as you can see it is on green at this time let me go

 get a deckhand come down and give me a hand here I'm gonna give the video to

 Buffalo here and he's gonna I'm gonna talk you through it okay I'm gonna go

 get the handle, of course I don't have it attached, push my trimer button you can go ahead and stand back

 okay I got you, one two three four five six get a little tough seven eight nine

 Buffalo come over here and show me the red it's indicating red that means it's ready to

 start all right okay we'll go ahead and stand back there Buffalo what I'm gonna

 do is start the engine okay emergency start is set I have the hydraulic

 starter tied up to keep it out of way of things being as it is a cold morning I

 am going to give it a little shot of ether to help it out open up that rack

 let's just see what we can do here all right go try number one that was it

 that's your accumulator that's I'm done all right we could clearly see well I

 don't usually give up that easy so I'm gonna try it one more time that's all we

 got out of 12 cranks on that let me crank it up one time for you Mike all right reset

 all right there we go the red dot again it's ready to go red yep I'm ready to start

 as we can see it only had a little bit of jump we're going to try this again in colder

 weather but that's what we got well stop it I'm gonna try to couple more times let you know how I

 To play this riff on six string guitar you'll need to tune B E A D G B

 The riff starts with an octave shape on the 7th and 9th frets of the E and D strings

 Slide the shape down the neck and then hit the two lowest open strings with two palm muted downstrokes

 Next move the octave shape down a string and slide back up from 2nd up to 7th fret

 Now re-pick that octave shape, move down a fret and then back up

 Next play three palm muted downstrokes on the open B and E strings

 Then play an octave shape on frets 8 and 10 on the E and D strings

 Hold the octave shape and gradually press down on your whammy bar

 The next lick starts with a first finger bar on the D and G strings at the 9th fret

 Next play frets 11 and 12 on the A string and then play 9th fret on the D string

 Now move to the G string and slide up to 15th fret with 3rd finger

 For the next section, start with two palm mutes on the bottom two strings

 Then slide from 6th fret to 7th and back to 6th using an octave shape on the E and D strings

 Then on the bottom two strings play frets 7 and 9, 2 and 4 and then this shape on frets 6 and 5

 Then use your first finger to bar the 2nd fret on the bottom two strings

 The riff finishes with these two octave shapes sliding from 4th up to 5th fret

 I was just looking at the principle for this workout, which you can get at the link below.

 So you want to start with your legs wide apart, wider than shoulder length apart, neutral

 knees that aren't locked, and you want to push your weights up, starting from shoulder

 So your arms are going to be wide at the top, bring them down, and then straight out at

 You don't want to lock your elbows at the top or the bottom, and you want to exhale

 It's a compound exercise that's working both your back and your biceps, a little bit of

 So you want to sit in a split stance with one foot in front of the other with neutral

 knees that aren't locked, and you want to keep your palms in close to your body and

 facing your body and pull the weights up, keeping your elbows in tight to your body

 and straight up, as if you're kind of crouching down to pull your pants up.

 At the top of the exercise, you want to squeeze the weights, or you want to squeeze your arms

 and lower the weights back down in a really controlled motion, and you want to exhale

 So you want to stand with your feet wider than shoulder width apart and just push the

 weights upward, palms facing away from you with the weights at your shoulders, pushing

 them all the way up, completely extended overhead, but you don't want to lock your elbows.

 And if you want to kind of make it into a little game, you can kind of tap them together

 And I'm just looking to make sure I'm in the shot, but I wanted you to see the exercise

 When you're pulling the weights back down, so you're pushing the weights up and pulling

 When you pull them down, you want to exhale, but when you pull them down, you want to squeeze

 I took a little bit of a break just so I could see what I was going to do next.

 But yeah, you just want to push the weights up, squeeze the weights back down, so you're

 going to be working on the way up and on the way back using a lot of muscles in your upper

 The compound exercise is burning a lot of calories, which is what we want for that particular

 So you want to do a normal bicep curl, only you want to stop halfway up.

 I wanted to make sure I was in the shot and that you could see the angle that I was lifting

 You want to exhale on the way up, stop in the basement and lower all the way back down

 Once you've done seven bicep curl, half bicep curls on the way down, then you want to bring

 the weight all the way up to your shoulders and stop halfway down.

 So now I'm doing the upper part of my bicep curl, keeping the weight in the top portion

 So instead of doing the lower half, now we're doing the upper half.

 And then you're going to do seven full bicep curls, bringing the weight all the way up

 to your shoulder and then touching the bottom or the weights to your legs.

 My elbows are also in tight to my side, controlling the motion all together.

 You want to make sure that you're using all of the muscles in your biceps.

 And I was just, I don't know what I'm doing now, but I'm looking at the camera to make

 But you want to make sure that you bring the weight straight up with your palms facing

 So this time, instead of your palms facing up, your palms are facing into your body and

 you're lifting the weight from the bottom all the way up to your shoulder and lowering

 You can do both arms at a time or you can alternate them and switch sides the way I

 So you kind of want to get in a similar stance to the pull your pants up, only you want your

 feet shoulder width apart and you want to bend over with a slight neutral arch in your

 back, popping your butt out a little bit and keeping your head and chest elevated.

 But you want to bend over slightly from the waist with neutral knees and you want to squeeze

 your shoulder blades together as you lift your elbows up and bring them back down.

 So you want to lift your elbows so they're a little bit higher than your shoulder if

 So squeezing your elbows together and bringing the weight back down, exhaling on the way

 up, inhaling on the way down, facing the floor and then lift your legs and arms at the same

 You want to lift your upper body and your lower body about six to nine inches off of

 But you want to make sure that you look down the entire time because looking up can really

 So this is targeting the lower back and it's also engaging the back of the legs, the hamstrings

 holidays and have it sitting around when all the kids and grandkids come over.

 you need to get started is sugar, vanilla, corn syrup, butter, popcorn kernels, pecans,

And what we're going to do first is we are going to have a quick and easy way

And put it in the microwave until it stops popping every two to three seconds.

 first to kind of filter out any seeds that maybe didn't get popped.

And this is the part that you have to be very careful about because this

 we get it coated good, then we'll spread it out on the parchment paper to dry.

 When this has cooled, you can break it up into pieces and store it in an airtight container.

 So remember, play that slowly first, practice your chord changes

 And then you should be able to speed it up and play along with the song in no time

 So without further ado, here are some quick and easy DIYs that you can do for all your

And no, loves does not mean they have to be someone of the opposite

 First DIY is some sweet treats by taking muffins and jazzing them up.

 chocolate chip mix and you just add water and make it a muffin mix as usual.

 And at the dollar store I got these adorable heart shaped silicone pans.

 cute and then you can get these wrapper cupcake cups that have little heart toothpicks in

 After your cupcakes are done I just like to cut off the top to give it more of a planar

 going to do is take the heart shaped toothpicks and just poke them into these muffins.

They are so cute and they have ones that are pink tinted, which I love.

 in your little glass and then just add a tiny votive candle and voila!

 You can liven up these jars by putting one of these ribbons on it and then putting the

 ribbon, you can take some curling ribbon and tie it around the mouth of the jar.

 can curl it different ways, like here we are just tying it around and then curling

Or else you can curl all of it all together and then tie that in a

And I thought the good morning beautiful, good morning handsome was

And then you can write things like 10 reasons why I love you and

 like me who loves to drink coffee or tea in the morning, it is just a nice reminder to

And all you do is you make your favorite pancake mix and you put it in a ketchup bottle.

 Turn on the stove and you can just do any kind of cool design that you like.

 And when you're done you can just sprinkle some powdered sugar and there you go.

So you can add like pink or red food coloring to make your pancake a different color.

We didn't have a sift so that's why the powdered sugar looks kind of weird.

 Thank you all so much for watching and don't forget to thumbs up and subscribe if you like this video.

 Hello, in this exercise we're going to learn the role that your bobbin case plays in the

 So in this exercise, the first thing we need to do is get your bobbin case out of your

 machine and we're going to tighten it far beyond what it should be just for this exercise.

 So take your screwdriver and tighten the larger of the two screws and do three or four turns,

 The point where it just hangs in the air even if you wiggle it or whatever, it just hangs

 And now we're going to go ahead and tighten up or loosen up the top tension.

 So go ahead and turn these knobs to the left about three or four turns each.

 Now I want you to go ahead and move the machine over and sew on it so that we can see the

 Okay, now we can see here on this example that I'm showing you that the bobbin case

 thread or the bobbin thread has pulled to the bottom very tightly and of course your

 So now on the next part of the exercise we're going to begin to tighten our top tension

 So I want you to tighten both knobs a couple of times and then sew with that.

 But you're going to notice as you tighten the top thread with this bobbin case as tight

 Here I'm showing you the four examples of the different sewing that I did.

 In each case the bobbin case was tight like it's been, but I continued to tighten the

 top tension progressively more and more until almost the breaking point of the thread.

 As you can see here in each of the examples the bottom side of the tension changed very

 This shows you that the bobbin case tension needs to be adjusted first because it can

 have all control over the quality of the stitch no matter how tight your top tension

 Okay, now you can see how much of an impact that that bobbin case has on your tension

 and how important it is to have good bobbin case tension and much looser than a lot of

 So in order to set that correctly, let's come back over and loosen your bobbin case.

 Now if you don't have a tension gauge you can still gauge a pretty good tension.

 What you want to be able to do is when you pull your thread up off the bobbin case, you

 want to stand your bobbin case up but not be able to actually lift the bobbin case out

 If you do have a tow attention gauge then go ahead and set it to the correct number.

 With your top tension gauges, or with your top tension devices, you want to tighten these

 so that they're flush on the ends with the shafts, the threaded shafts that they're around.

 It might even be helpful to do this exercise with different types of threads so that you

 can see the strength and impact that that has on those threads.

I have added a few new features to make my videos an interactive experience.

 So today we're going to go ahead and we're going to do the unboxing of Gundam The End.

 So let's go ahead and get started in taking a look at this box.

 So this kit is extremely articulate in terms of all the different pieces and variations that you can do with this model.

 This model does have a limited transforming and a few kind of effect attack parts which you'll see.

 As you can see here, this is pretty much one of the ways that you can pose Gundam The End by making the wings on the back.

 In addition, he has extendable hands that you can see here and then he also has a special attack feature with this little guy.

 This is the total team Celestial which has both the Gundam The End, the Gundam Fortent and also the Transient Gundam.

 Here's the artwork of the box and you can see it's number 36 in the series of the HD Build Fighters.

 You get to see the front and the back with his wings slash capes closed.

 And then it gives you a synopsis of the actual Gundam The End from the anime story.

 And it gives you a little thing about the Build Fighters Tri Series.

 And now this Gundam The End is actually 2,200 yen so it's about 400 yen more than most of the other kits.

 Let's go ahead, open this up and take a look to see what's inside.

 Alright, let's go ahead and take all the runners out and see what we got.

 Alright, so we have four bags full of runners so we'll have to go ahead and open those up.

 And wow, as you can see there is a very large sticker set with this thing.

 That's one of the largest ticker sets that have come in Build Fighters HD line.

 And you can see the actual anime version of him from the series.

 This is the back of the manual so you can also see a few of the transformations that he can go through.

 As you can see here, there is no cape that comes with this set.

 I will probably personally make a little cape myself so I can make it look like the animated version.

 Again, this is the different poses that you can do with Gundam The End.

 And then his hands, the big hands, are somewhat poseable along with the wings in the back.

 Okay, so looking at the manual, you get an idea of how many runners there are.

 And as you can see, again, this is a standardized manual with regards to the HG Build Fighters line.

 So again, you start out with your body, your head, your shoulders, your arms, both of the legs.

 And then usually the weaponry which is a little bit different for this set.

 Third and fourth page of the manual, very particular to Gundam The End.

 As you can see, he has these foldable wings that plug on and they actually fold in the front.

 And then he also has the hands which are part of his weapon set.

 And then in addition, you have the weapon that comes out of his chest as well.

 Okay, now this last two panels right here basically shows you how to take the wings and extend them out in the back from the front.

 So we might as well start with the sticker sheet while we're at it.

 This is the sticker sheet and you can see that there are a lot of stickers.

 Okay, so as you can see on this, these are primarily all outer armor pieces.

 Now the G-Runner is basically the arm extensions with the hand for the Gundam The End.

 So you have the foot, the cuff on the leg, and then you also have part of the...

 And this is the piece that will be the connection for the legs and the armor.

 And then you also have connections for what looks like the shoulders and the legs.

 So, as you can see, here's his head, the back of his head, his chest, and his arms.

 And then these pieces here are for the weapons inside his hands.

 Here are some pieces for the head pieces, which are the side of the heads.

 And you also have part of the leg as well, as well as part of the helmet.

 Now, some of the other pieces on here as well that you're going to realize are the pieces for the feet as well.

 Okay, so this piece, as you can see here, is identical to the other D piece.

 And again, you have the attack pieces on the top, which are these.

 Okay, I don't know why they did it upside down like that, but it will be easier to show it to you like this.

 If you were to purchase Gundam The End and open the box and all the bags,

 this would be the entire kit laid out for you with all of the runners.

 They've done a really wonderful job on coloring all of the various runners.

 If you like this video, please subscribe, leave me some comments, and also give me a thumbs up.

 This is a nice sort of standard mahogany dining room side chair.

 And what's happened is that the backsplat has become delaminated.

 It's made up of five pieces, a core and two pieces of veneer on each side.

 There's parts of the underlayment missing and there's also parts that are broken all

 I think the best thing to do is to, rather than spend a lot of time trying to repair

 So I'm going to take a heat gun and try to heat up these joints enough so that I can

 So now I've cut a piece of 3-8ths Baltic birch plywood that will be the core.

 And I've cut some pieces of plywood and MDF to use as cauls for the glue-up.

 Mahogany veneered plywood ready to trace out the old one on here.

 I'm going to stain the inside of my cutouts here, the plywood part, with some mahogany

 Then I'm going to sand the outside so any stain that gets on the outside I'll be able

 Now I'm going to sand both faces to get off any stain that dripped on those faces.

 But first, I need to tape off where the glue joints are so I don't get any finish on them.

 I'm going to tone it a little bit with some medium brown walnut toner to bring it into

 Before I sand for the final, I've mixed some powdered stain in some shellac.

 And I'm just going to put a little color on the inside of my scroll work here where

 Before I go any further and put the final coat on this, I want to make sure it fits.

 This chair also had a lot of scuff marks and a few ragged edges here.

 I'm just going to go over those areas with a little bit of 220 sandpaper.

 And now I'm just going to pad a little dye stain over these elements of the chair.

 Alright, now I'm ready to spray a final coat of satin lacquer just on this upper part.

 Okay, it looks like our final coat of lacquer went down pretty well.

 This is the one that's deteriorated so badly that we decided it would be best off just

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to show you how to make a triangle shaped rice ball that's

 It's very easy to make and it's very convenient to bring for lunches or for snacks when you're

 So I'm going to show you how to make two types of filling today.

 Stir to combine with a spatula until everything is completely dissolved.

 Pouring it on top of the rice paddle first will ensure that it's evenly distributed.

 Be careful not to mix with too much pressure to avoid mushy rice.

 You can get the pork fluff at any Chinese grocery store very easily.

 Combine the tuna with mayonnaise, toasted sesame seed, chopped green onion, hot pepper

 Mix the ingredients well using a metal spoon until everything is evenly combined.

 Choose your choice of filling and cover the bottom layer of rice.

 Bring the bottom part of the seaweed to the top and fold the corners underneath the rice

 Bring the two corners to the center and place a sticker to hold it in place.

 This is a requested recipe and I cannot wait to make it for you.

 The ingredients you'll need for this recipe are coconut oil, sea salt, coconut flour,

 dark chocolate, stevia extract, two eggs, baking powder, butter, and vanilla extract.

 around because with these cookies you do not have a crazy sugar high and kids running circles around

 mixing bowl and my electric hand mixer but you can use whatever you want.

 so that you can cream it together with your fourth cup of coconut oil which is also at room temperature.

If you didn't use salted butter here is where you would put 1 fourth teaspoon of salt

Using really good free-range organic eggs will give it extra flavor.

 So once we have all of our liquidy ingredients mixed we can add our third of a cup of coconut

I know it doesn't sound like a lot of flour but this stuff is dense.

 Side note, Trader Joe's just started selling coconut flour and I could not be more excited

If you guys have went out and tried to buy coconut flour say at Whole Foods you might

 It probably looked super liquidy before you added your flour but look at that change.

Okay so once you have everything mixed you will realize you have a beautiful

I searched high and low for chocolate chips that were this dark but I could not find them.

Alright so we only need half of this bar because this stuff is dark and it is

Once you have half your bar out put it on a cutting board and we're just gonna cut

I recommend cutting them pretty fine because the chocolate is so dark.

But if you do happen to find some really dark chocolate chips let me know in

 the comments below what kind you found and where you found them because I would love some of those.

 So once you have your chocolate all chopped up it goes right into your mixture and we're just

 just have a nordic ware knockoff silpat or some type of parchment paper.

 one of those little mini ice cream scoop or like melon ballers with the scoops you can use those but

So I'm going to throw them into the oven for about 12 minutes and then check on

They might need to go for 15 depending on the size of your cookies and how they turned out.

 They're a little sweet but the chocolate just evens them out because it's so dark.

 will be listed in the description box below so if you want to go check any of those out you know

 and he hasn't left my side since he got here so he'll probably be running around a little bit.

 So I'm just going to be using a regular old mixing bowl and my hand electric mixer.

 Well I'm going to do a video here of a chord progression in a key of E major and using

 I did one before but this one has a couple different chord fingerings.

 So what I'm doing there is I'm just playing an E power chord on the 7th fret.

 Now for the next chord, the B, which I looked it up, is B add 11 slash E.

 Now I go to C sharp minor, the pinky goes back down on the 3rd string, 9th fret.

 And my second finger goes to the 6th string, 6th string, 9th fret.

 Then I take my 3rd and 4th finger, guide it down to the 2nd fret for an A sus 2.

 Pinky off, second finger goes down, pinky back on, second finger over here.

 And the other way is just keeping this shape of a power chord shape.

 It almost reminds me of Red Hot Chili Peppers under the bridge, this progression.

 That's it, make sure it's pushed through and then just lift it up.

 What I'm going to do now is I'm going to show you how to fillet a flounder.

 Now if anyone else out there has got a better method, please let me know.

 If anyone else out there has got a better method, please let me know.

 I've been filleting a few of these little buggers and this is the easiest way I've come up with.

 And it's still a little bit fiddly, but it seems to do the job.

 So we're going to fillet them and then we're going to crumb them and batter them.

 What I've done, when we got in last night, I cut the head off and took the guts out and then put it in the fridge.

 So once we're ready to fillet, we want to put a cut down either side of the backbone there.

 and then we slide the knife along the backbone and just slice it right off, all the way down.

 Put that knife right on that backbone there and then slice down and right off.

 Before we take that right fillet off, we want to flip it over and do the same on the other side.

 So once again, just put a slice down one side of the backbone, slice down the other side of the backbone,

 and then slide that knife along the backbone and slide it right off.

 If anyone else out there would like to sponsor me, or would like a review of a product,

 or you can contact me on Facebook, or you can bowl around for a cup of tea.

 Ross, just see how the hokotika, just ask at the shop for Josh,

 Not too sure where that one's going to be, but it'll be something to do with stuff.

 Introducing the Master Range of Handheld Mixers by Dynamic International.

 The Master Range of Handheld Mixers is the most diversified in the food service industry.

 This series of handheld mixers is based on the BM2000 motor block and is available in kits containing specific attachments or attachments sold individually, depending on your needs.

 The Master Range comes with a safety switch and continuous run button for safe operation and convenience, as well as variable speed as a standard feature.

 There is a variety of attachments and options that are available within the Master line.

 The 16-inch mixer tool attachment is constructed of 1810 stainless steel and has a titanium-plated cutter blade.

 The mixing tool allows you to mix, blend, puree and emulsify all soups, sauces and gravies.

 The Master 2000 DSC, which is our latest technology, contains an RPM regulating system that controls the speed of the mixer.

 Whether in or out of product, the Master 2000 DSC always maintains the same RPMs.

 Great for high volume restaurants and difficult textured products.

 Great for dairy products, eggs, egg whites, meringues, souffles, creams, fish, pancake batters and mayonnaise.

 The potato ricer allows you to mash up to 50 pounds of potatoes at one time.

 The Dynaturbo mixer tool is for emulsifying sorbet, ice cream and gelato.

 Just take it to the sink, spray, wash with a mild detergent, rinse and wipe with a clean dry cloth.

 Wipe the motor block with a damp cloth and remember never to immerse in water.

 The Dynaturbo mixer tool is for emulsifying ice cream, sorbet and gelato.

 All of these attachment options offer you the ultimate in flexibility and streamlines your food service operation.

 Also available as part of the Master range is the often imitated but never duplicated MX91 and MX2000,

 And finally, the diversity, flexibility and above all, quality of the Master range

 are brought to you by the food service experts at Dynamic International.

 I don't have a strap wrench so I used a piece of a strap wrapped around the flywheel and

 And then I used my crescent wrench on this nut here to bust it loose.

 I had to get bolts and washers from the hardware store that were 3-8s.

 Hello everybody, so today's recipe is one that I've been wanting to do for a very long

 time on my channel because it's delicious and it's very classically British.

 You're going to need an orange, a lemon, currants, milk, sugar, self-raising flour and if you

 don't have suet, so normally we'd use suet, but instead I'm using a bit of Crisco and

 My currants have been soaking in some hot water for about 10 minutes.

 I'm going to leave those to one side and that helps them get really nice and juicy.

 For the next part of the recipe, all it is, it's really simple, we're going to add all

 the ingredients into a big bowl and basically mix everything together.

 First up, my flour is going in and I will put all the quantities up on my website for

 Obviously if you had suet you could just stir it in, it would be easier.

 I'm going to zest in about a teaspoon's worth of the lemon and orange.

 So you want to just stir this together, not hard, just lightly, until it basically forms

 I've got two there just to make sure it's strong enough for the steaming process.

 And we're going to plop the doughy mixture along the baking paper.

 Some people do, obviously you can make this in a pudding basin as well.

 So I'm just going to mold it into a bit more of like a Swiss roll shape.

 And basically I'm going to leave, I'm not going to wrap this too tightly because you

 need to leave a bit of a gap of paper so that when it does start to rise it has room.

 So I'm just going to fold, do a fold, and just leave it like that.

 So now we're just going to tie the two ends kind of tightly together.

 So if you have some string or even these cool little like wire tie things you could use.

 If you don't have a steamer at home, not to worry, just get yourself a large saucepan.

 And I'm going to put water around, just not all the way, so you don't want it to go above the cake tin.

 I'm placing the pudding, make sure that top bit's folded, placing that on top of the baking tin.

 Now I'm going to pop some tin foil on top, so it basically keeps all the steam and the heat in there.

 So once it's tightly secured, then you can leave this on a very gentle simmer for about an hour until it's cooked all the way through.

 And so once it is cooked, you can just take it out and put it on a plate and then serve it straight up.

 So I told you it was easy to make, and now I get to have a try.

 I hope you are going to try this, and then leave me your comments if you do.

 Don't forget to hit subscribe and check in again for Brit Week for another dessert.

 warn you, because when this came in the mail I thought, what is wrong with this?

 So if you are familiar with those this will be old news to you, but this is how you do

 off the card at the perfect 3x3 size I'm going to put some adhesive just on one edge.

 come in here and I line it up with the inside of the card and then I can put this down perfectly.

You end up putting the labels on yourself so you can see through.

I'm going to be using it with a little bit of Chestnut Rhone ink.

 I'm going to cut this at the very end because the satin ribbon tends to fray a little bit

 little postage stamp punches on the card, but I'm going to start with the one that's

 I'm going to put this little heart on with a stamp dimensional.

Okay, so I started the second card exactly as I started the first card.

 I punched the edge with the Pinking Hearts edge punch, but instead of putting the red

 pattern paper down I'm using like a pale pink polka dot pattern paper.

 that down and adhering it the same exact way as the first card.

 ribbon onto the card exactly how I did the first time around as well.

 Okay, on this last card I have this kind of word art that I've cut out with my silhouettes.

 I cut some out with my Cricut and if you've been following my blog you saw my comparison

 Now a lot of times when you put out either sugar water like we have here, or actually

 it's sugar syrup would be the technical term, but anytime you put out something that you

 want bees to go to quickly, time is of the essence when you're trying to get your bees

 So what I like to use, and what a lot of people like to use, is lemongrass oil.

 It's just, where did we get this, Cindy, was it from Whole Foods?

 And basically what I like to do here, I have some comb here that I've extracted from a

 So what we like to do is feed them that comb because there's already beeswax on it plus

 honey so they have a food source plus actual stuff that they can use as foundation.

 So what we like to do is just take a couple drops, you know, five, six drops over the

 entire thing and the bees pick up on that scent and they instantly fly all over this

 And another way to actually deter bees if you have them in your house or if you're doing

 a cutout basically where you're trying to get bees out of some place, like this is how

 So don't use almond oil on this but instead use lemongrass and you're going to attract

 That is that very quick MI short on the attractant power of lemongrass oil.

 Hopefully you all enjoyed and until next episode, this is MI Gardener reminding you to grow

 This is a light weight, compact, all in one option that is perfect for backpacking.

 The Soloist comes with a 1.1 liter hard anodized aluminum pot, light weight, but also very

 There is a Teflon with radiance coating on the inside of the pot which gives it excellent

 Also makes for an even, quick heating surface and gives it nonstick performance as well.

 On the outside of the pot there is an integrated handle which allows you to handle the pot

 taking it on and off the stove without worrying about burning your hands or coming into contact

 A simple pinch of the handle allows it to fold closed over the top of the pot.

 You can see a pour through feature at one end of the lid and there is actually small

 holes here that allow it to function as a strainer on the other side.

 When you close the handle over the top it can actually nest the entire system as one

 The Soloist also includes a 12 ounce polypropylene mug or bowl depending on how you want to

 There is an integrated koozie over top of the mug that allows you to handle it even

 There are some marked graduations inside the mug slash bowl which also allows you to use

 GSI Outdoors includes a lightweight, collapsible, multi use utensil.

 A spork here functions obviously both as a spoon or a fork and collapses down small.

 Soloist comes with an integrated stuff sack, draw string closure on the top there.

 Interesting feature on the inside, there is a welded design that actually allows this

 to hold water so it can function as a very lightweight back country sink.

 So you can actually clean the contents of the system inside this storage sack and it

 GSI Outdoors includes a small storage bag for a back packing style stove.

 That is sold separately as would fuel canister for any stove that you are using.

 But all of this can fit together, drop inside the pot, put the lid on top, close the handle

 and drop everything into that one single compact unit inside the storage sack making

 This is how you take off the radio for the X5 2002 that's the E53 model.

 And it's a little weird because this turns on and off while you're doing this, but whatever.

 This is a very small turn, it's only a quarter of a turn and I'll show you why later.

I hope you had a great Halloween and if you went trick-or-treating, save your wrappers because we can turn them into purses.

 This DIY does take a lot of time and patience to make and just to show you how to make this, I'm going to demonstrate the steps on a separate model.

These are ones that I've made in the past out of newspapers and magazines and Tootsie Pop wrappers.

 You will need a number of candy wrappers depending on how large the purse will be, sheets of newspaper, clear tape, some felt, a zipper, thin string, a large needle, a small needle, and some thread, and a pair of scissors.

 Start by cutting the newspapers into about 4 1⁄4 by 5 1⁄2 inch rectangles.

 Take a piece of tape and a candy wrapper and mount that onto the center of a piece of newspaper.

 Next is folding, so take a rectangle and fold it in half lengthwise with the wrapper on the outside.

 Take one half and fold that into the crease and then take the other half and fold that into the crease as well.

 Now you're left with a smaller V and repeat this process with the rest of the candy wrappers.

 The next step is to link all of the wrappers together, so take one wrapper and insert its flaps through the holes of another.

 Continue to link the wrappers until you have the desired length.

 To join the ends of the links, take out two flaps on the last link and fold it inward through the link on the other end.

 Putting all the links together is the trickiest part since there is no exact way to do it.

 Have one end of the string tied to the large needle and the other end tied to one link inside the circle on the bottom row.

 The trick is to find a path through the links to get on the opposite side from where you began sewing.

 You don't have to be neat on the inside since it will be covered up later on.

 Once you've made it through to the opposite side from where you started, pull the needle through the fronts of the links.

 Neatness does count on the front so once again find a path through the links and guide the needle until it ends up on the opposite side.

 So the sewing pattern is to start on the inside, find a path through the links on the inside,

 end up on the opposite side, sew through the fronts of the links, and continue until you've made it around the entire circle.

 Here's a tip, if you think you're running out of string, end on the inside of the circle, tie it off, re-thread the needle, and start again on the first step of the sewing process.

 Essentially the sewing pattern is the same when you add on another line of wrappers.

 Of course yours will look much better than this since you'll take your time, but now on to sewing the bottom.

 Start by tying the string to one link and move from side to side sewing through the inside holes of the links.

 The pattern for sewing the bottom is making X's or zigzags through the inside holes of the links.

 The yarn was still visible but with thin string the bottom comes out much cleaner as it did on my Tootsie Pop clutch.

 For this size purse I'm using a 7.25 by 6.25 inch piece of felt and folding that in half.

 To get an idea of how large the fabric should be, lay it on top of the purse and cut it down to a size where you can see all sides of the purse.

 The zipper is going to be sewn on first to the longest open side of the felt.

 Take the small needle and thread and sew the point on the zipper where it will be cut down to match the length of the felt.

 Stuff the pouch inside, take the small needle and thread and tie it to the inside of one link.

If you enjoyed this DIY please subscribe and I will see you soon.

 Instead of just putting money in a cart, why not do something a little fun and crafty?

 Make sure the money is taped together so that none will be forgotten in the roll.

 Yup, you can make an origami little shirt out of a one dollar bill.

 In the comment box below, add some other ways to craft money or tell a fun way that you've

 Okay, on a previous video we went ahead and showed you how to remove the trunk lock actuator.

 Now we're going to go ahead and show you how to replace or remove the backup lights.

 If you're looking, if you're just watching this video for the first time, you should

 go back to the original video, which is where we show you how to remove the pins.

 So you can go ahead and pull this cover down and get access to the back of the trunk.

 So anyhow, these are the backup lights right here, one of the covers.

 So if your backup light bulb goes out, this is what you're going to need to do in order

 Obviously, we're looking at the passenger side, and what you do is you go ahead and

 locate this pin here, and what you do is you push the pin towards you, and then you

 Okay, as you can see, that's the backup light, and that's how you will replace the bulb.

 Pull it out, put a new bulb, stick this cover back, and you're set.

 Pull it towards you, wiggle it a little, and then it should come off.

 Now if you want to take it a step further, let's say someone actually went ahead and

 broke this light here or your other passenger light, in order to replace the broken cover,

 again, you would need to follow all these steps to remove the cover.

 You need to remove this cover here as well, and then you actually gotta...

 What you gotta do is you gotta go ahead and loosen it up, and then you can go ahead and

 Okay, the tool that I'm gonna use for this one is again, a small ratchet extension and

 If it's far enough, you can go ahead and loosen it up, and then let me show you here.

 Once it's loose, you can actually go ahead and just press it with your finger.

 Once you push it out here, what you need to do is you need to come here on the side of

 the backup light and somehow push this out, because the light's also latching onto these

 Okay, so you gotta figure out a way where when you push it, when you push this up...

 And then obviously, you just gotta go ahead and take it out and replace it.

 If somebody went ahead and scratched it, broke it, or if you wanna go ahead and upgrade from

 the amber to the clear covers, then you would definitely do that.

 Pretty much this latch right here is the one holding the whole assembly to the frame of

 Okay, make sure it fits properly, and then you go ahead and tie in that 10 millimeter

 If you're looking for this particular item, or if you're looking for both covers, check

 out our eBay store, and we should have this item there as well.

 So anyhow, that's how you do it, and if you wanna do the passenger side, you do the same

 Loosen it just enough where you can go ahead and push the cover.

 Loosen this right here, and then what you do is you stick your finger and you press

 Just kinda figure out how to push this to the side, and it should come off.

 Of course, you need to replace it if you're gonna change your bulb as well.

 If you have any questions, comments, concerns, please let us know.

 Any feedback would be greatly appreciated, and be sure to subscribe for future videos.

 first of all turn on the machine wait until the cart moves until you hear then

 simply turn up this so the machine is going to stop turn it off remove it from

 the AC power and then the cart is going to be loose you can just move it and

 then you have to remove five screws this is the first one this is the second one

 there's a third one inside here in the end here you can see there's a small one

 there the fourth one is inside here and the fifth one is the black one here that

 holds the dampers then after you take this you can remove the black part now

 that you have removed it now you have removed the screws you can just take off

 the black part and now you can see the dampers below just put it here to make

 it easier now that you have removed the dampers you can see the print head here

 so you can take three screws off this is the first one there's a second one up in

 the left and there's a third one up on the right you're going to need a smaller

 screwdriver to do these ones now that when you finish the third screwdriver

 so you can take it off and it's important that when you do that you

 remove both the flat cables the one on the right and the one on the left and

 now to clean the back part of the head is interesting to take a regular cup

 where you could fit it where you could fit the print head so you fill it up with the

 cleaning liquid and it simply place the print head on it so it can stay on a

 now it's important to leave it on the liquid for about 10 minutes before you

 do the next part so then after you leave it for 10 minutes you just put a syringe

 on it and you pump up the ink so you're taking liquid from here up to the print

 head to the syringe so you pull out for the first time and then after you do

 that with all the colors then you can do the opposite so you can put some

 cleaning liquid on the syringe and pump ink in the print head down

 but it's important to first flush out and then you can flush in with the cleaning liquid

 I just wanted to share a recipe with you today that's great if you have some sickies in the

 It's also a wonderful remedy if you have sore muscles from working out.

 Now I should mention that if you're taking any kind of medication at all, check with

 your doctor because some natural remedies do interfere with western medicine.

 Outside of that, I'm going to show you a recipe for ginger tea today.

 It's quick, it's simple, it's easy, and it's fantastic during the winter months.

 I usually measure ginger by the knuckles, so this would be two knuckles worth of ginger.

 And I just peel it with a potato peeler, and then I'm just going to roughly chop it.

 And what I like to do is I take the handle of the knife afterwards and I just crush it

 up a little because that releases a lot of the juices in the ginger.

 The idea is to boil this until it gets to the flavor that you like.

 So if you like a really strong tea, you could use a little more water, say, like I said,

 And basically you're just going to boil it and taste it on occasion.

 But when it gets to the strength that you like, turn it off, take the ginger out of

 I'm talking about dates, dried figs, dried apricots, dried prunes, and so many other types

 You can have Moroccan chicken tagine with dried caramelized apricots or yam

 Or in cookies or sometimes just simply serve them with nuts like almonds and walnuts and figs

 Let's open it and make one of my favorite cakes that I created myself

 Make some black tea or any type of tea with a tea bag and hot water

 Chop some walnuts, they are best friends with figs and taste wonderful together

 We have ground cinnamon, ground ginger, ground cloves, and a little bit of ground nutmeg

 In another large bowl, place the softened butter and the white sugar

 First, butter the pan, then place the parchment paper, then butter the paper

 Pour the cake batter into the pan and smooth the top with a spatula

 Bake in a preheated oven to 360 F, 180 C for around 45 minutes or until done

 To check if the cake is ready, gently touch the center of the cake

 Flip the baking pan, gently remove the parchment paper from the top of the cake

 Not only this cake smells like heaven, but it tastes like it too!

 Please like my video and go to the kitchen right now to make this cake!

Eyeliner is a beautiful cosmetic that helps to contour the eyes to create a variety of illusions.

 This tutorial will help you to achieve different eyeliner styles in an easier way.

 I always prefer sponge tip or felt tip which makes liner easier regardless of experience.

 I am starting from my inner lid and I am padding and pulling the liner.

 Cat liner style start from the half of your eyes and start from the inner corner of your eyes.

 And by padding and pulling the liner just apply it in a normal way.

 Now from the tip of your eye to the place where the eyebrow ends just mark a small dot and draw the line.

 Now drag the line till the place where you have started the initial liner and then coat it with the eyeliner.

This is quite the same as a cat liner but you have to start from the inner lid.

 First apply the liner from the inner lid in the basic liner style.

 Then again do the same way and measure from the inner lid and to the tip of the eyebrows.

 Now again bring the same way as you did in the cat liner style and butt to the tip till the middle of the eyes and then fill it.

Start with the basic liner style and also fill in your under eyes.

 Now from the under eye area I am doing the same way as I did in the upper eye area.

 As usual start with the basic liner method and also fill the under eyes.

If you have not done properly you can again fill it up and give a clear layer.

 Start again with the basic liner method and make a curve just like that.

So again start with the basic liner style and mark two lines on the top and bottom.

 So again start with the basic liner style and from the inner lid just bring a line to the nose tip.

 Now I am doing the second line and connecting it with the lower water line.

 And filling the lower water line with the same eyeliner and connecting it with the outer end.

 Reverse lining method is that you have to start from the lower water line to the upper end.

 If you wish you can go for one or if you wish you can go for another one.

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to show you how to make some very special Easter eggs.

 What's special about these eggs is when you crack them open, there is cake inside.

 Take the egg and on the large side of the egg, the bigger end, poke a hole into the

 And then just widen the hole until you get a hole that is approximately half an inch

 And then rinse it under some cold water to make sure that you get all of the residue

 Now for the leftover egg bits, one of them you're going to put aside for the recipe and

 the other ones you're going to cover and refrigerate and use in other recipes or for breakfast.

 Then take the coloured empty egg shells and place them on some paper toweling to let them

 Quarter teaspoon of baking powder, eighth of a teaspoon of baking soda and a pinch of

 In another bowl, place half a cup of sugar, one quarter cup of butter at room temperature.

 I'm adding half a teaspoon of lemon extract, but you could use vanilla extract or any other

 I added the flour in a little bit at a time until it was all combined.

 And the sour cream you can't really taste in the final result, however it does help

 Now divide the batter up into however number of colours you want to make.

 You don't have to dye the batter, you can just use it white just the way it is.

 I'm using some of those neon food colours I used in the cupcake popper video I had made

 I actually bought these piping bags on eBay for a really good price, so shop around for

 And so placing the batter in the piping bag and just cutting a little hole in the end.

 Now to make sure the cake doesn't stick to the eggshell when it's baking, I'm spraying

 a little bit of cooking spray into the egg, making sure the entire surface on the inside

 You could even pour in a little bit of vegetable oil and just swirl it around until the interior

 And then simply place it on some paper toweling to let any excess drip out.

 To bake the eggs, you're going to place them in a little nest of aluminum foil in a muffin

 The aluminum foil will keep the egg upright during the baking process.

 And the trick is, I guess, to trial and error to decide how full to make these.

 Mine overflowed, which apparently does happen according to the website where I found this,

 I put a little bit of colour in each, and I filled them to what looked to me to be about

 There they are, baked 350 degrees for 23 minutes, and when you insert a toothpick in the centre,

 And as you can see, they did overflow, but that's not a huge problem, and I'll show you

 Once they've cooled down a bit, you're going to take each egg, take it out of the aluminum

 And for the rest of it that's stuck to the egg, just take a butter knife, in this case

 I'm just using a steak knife, and just scrape off the excess cake.

 Comes off fairly easily, and then using a damp cloth, just wipe it down to get rid of

 There is a hole in the bottom, but when you stand these up, you won't see them, and I'll

 And to reveal them, you just crack it like you would a hard boiled egg, and then just

 I was quite impressed that the shell actually comes off quite easily and doesn't really

 And each one will be different of course, so it's kind of a little surprise each time.

 And it really does look like an Easter egg when it comes out of the shell as well.

 Now to show you the inside, I'm going to slice the egg in half.

 I'm going to go lengthways, and I'll show you one later in the photos where I cut it

 As you can see, when they're placed in a little basket, you can't really see the hole in the

 I think this would make a nice addition to an Easter basket instead of the traditional

 So you're not getting the right amount of grinds coming out into your porta filter.

 Well, here's a few tips that you're going to want to keep in mind when you're using this machine,

 So when you pull it out of the box, it's going to come with its factory settings.

 And what this means is that you're going to use your dual wall filters.

 Now these dual wall filters have a bunch of holes on the inside,

 you're going to go to the machine and select your filter size to double shot.

 Now that light will be illuminated there, indicating that it's a dual shot.

 Make sure that your grind dial is within the range of the dual wall setting.

 And then all you need to do is simply depress the porta filter,

 and it will dispense the right amount of grinds into the porta filter.

 So there's a little bit of space between the grinds and the top of the filter.

 It's got just as many holes as the inside as it does on the outside.

 And again, if you picture it like a clock, you've got this between three and four o'clock.

 What that does is it should adjust the machine to give you the right amount of grinds.

 Now it will depend over time based on the type of beans you're using

 And again, once you're done dispensing the grinds into the Porta filter,

 About 8-9 months ago I got this RIDGID R4331 13 inch thickness planer and I've been using

 This unit has a 3 knife cutting head and luckily the blades in here are reversible.

 All I really have to do right now is go into this, turn the knives around and I'll have

 It's really simple and it's good to know in case you lose your manual or you're just not

 Before you do this, make sure your unit is unplugged of course.

 Second of all, on the side of the unit here RIDGID has the allen wrench required and necessary

 If you don't have this, if you lose it or what not, it's a 4mm wrench.

 This is a nice little wrench because it's got some magnets on it and I'll show you why

 Let's turn this unit around, we'll come in close and I'll show you how to do this.

 This is the dust collection shroud which goes into the chute which goes into your dust collection

 Before we do this, we want to make sure our blade, our cutter head height is set at 1

 What you need to do is take your wrench and take off these allen screws, bolts that are

 This is a nice opportunity to clean out, clean this out, check to see if there's anything

 I like to think of this maintenance as an opportunity and not a chore.

 You'll see right here there's a little fan, little propeller, I don't know what you call,

 What you need to do is make sure your cutter head is locked into a position.

 If it's not, and you can spin, rotate this propeller, these fan blades, until this locks.

 After you have all six of these out, this is where this little wrench comes in handy.

 You can see by this, in case you get confused and forget, this sharp edge right here is

 What this does is it lines up with the pins when you install it.

 If you start seeing some gouges in your wood when it's coming through, that usually means

 What you can do to get rid of that temporarily is you can open this up, slide one of your

 What that will do is it will take the little gouges in your knives and not line them up.

 You can get a little more life out of these just by moving these one way or another.

 Once you have the knife out, what I like to do is take yourself a sharpie marker.

 In case you forget if you've changed the blades or which one you're going to move, a couple

 I'm going to orient it, now that I've got to flip it, I'm going to orient this blade

 When it comes time if I want to move it, I know it's oriented this way so I want to move

 This does a couple things besides telling you what blade it is, what direction it is,

 Now that it's marked up, I know that I've already reversed these blades so I can't have

 So that's a little tip for you whether you want to use it or not.

 Now it's flipped, take your magnet, put it back in there and line it up with those pins.

 Here I want to orient it this way so I'll slide it that way, hold it down.

 That way you know your blade is all lined up, same distance cutting head with the other

 Alright, now that you've replaced one of your knives, spun it around or replaced it, it's

 So press that, use these fan blades to go ahead and rotate to the next cutter head.

 Use the same technique with this one and when you're done with that one, rotate to

 The older unit I believe has two cutter heads, so there's only two knives.

 So after you've replaced all that, it's as simple as putting this shroud back on and

 So I'm not going to do that right now, but put these screws back in and you're all set

 One thing I want to say is this whole process is written out in the manual very clearly,

 but I'm more of a visual person, that's why I wanted to make this video for other people

 Hopefully this helps you out and if you've got a different model, the process should

 This is how the R4331 blade change is done, so hopefully this helps and until next time,

 Hi, my name is Tommy Owen, Head Instructor here at Lion Guard Muay Thai in Dublin.

 This is going to be the tutorial on countering punches with knees for the Warrior Collective.

 So as Connie throws this jab towards my head, with my right hand, I'm going to parry the

 Now, I'm going to switch my stance at the same time, my left hand is going to come out,

 grab the back of his neck so I can pull him into this left knee.

 So again, the jab comes, I parry, at the same time I switch, grab the back of his neck,

 One more time, parry, switch, get a control of his neck, pull him into the knee, nice

 So from this side, as the jab comes with my right hand I parry, as I switch my stance

 my hand will come out and get control of the back of his neck, drive that left knee to

 So the next one will be off the right cross, so as the cross comes this time I'll use my

 left hand to parry, right hand will come out to the back of his neck, and again I get

 control of the neck and I pull his body towards that right knee.

 So again, left hand to parry, right hand comes out to control the neck, right knee to the

 So on from the other side, I'm going to parry with my left, right hand out to the back of

 So third one will be off the left hook, so it's a bit different this time.

 As the left hook comes I'm keeping my guard nice and tight, with my right hand I'm going

 to try and get control of his bicep, my left hand is going to come out and again get control

 So as the hook comes in, bicep with the right hand, left hand on his neck.

 I need to make sure that my chin is not high when I'm doing this, keep my chin tucked in

 So as the hook comes, bicep, back of the neck, switch knee to the body.

 From the other side, so when that was my chin, it's tucked in behind my shoulder when I reach

 I don't have my chin up high because if the hook sneaks through, he's going to knock me

 So same principle applies, except this time it's with the opposite.

 So my left hand will get control of his bicep, my right hand will get control of the back

 So as the hook comes, left hand on his bicep, right hand on the back of the neck, and switch

 Thanks for watching this tutorial on countering punches with knees.

 For more information on myself and my gym, please visit www.lineheartmuaythai.com.

 For more videos and tutorials, please visit The Warrior Collective.

 Hi, I'm Sarah Price, LeBron Independent Consultant, and today I want to show you how to get that

 I've got some dark circles under my eyes, I'm shiny, I've got some pink on my cheeks.

 So this video is also kind of a foundation 101, so I'm going to show you how to set the

 foundation for your face so that you're ready for the rest of your glamour products.

 So I start with my sponge tip concealer wand, I use light amber.

 And this is great for getting dark circles from under your eyes.

 So I usually look like I'm face painting and put it on the main areas that I'm going to

 And on these areas of my face, it's fine for me to use whatever, my pointer finger, whatever

 But once we get up to this delicate eye area, that's going to change.

 So once we get up here, you always want to use your ring finger because you naturally

 So since this is very delicate skin, you want to just lightly pat it in.

 Okay, now that we've gotten those specific areas, I come in with my dual action foundation.

 So I've got my sponge, just get some on there and go ahead and rub it all over.

 Since I have oily skin, you can see that it's immediately blotting up a lot of that oil,

 You want to remember to also get along this chin line because you don't want to have a

 line going along your jaw line where you stopped applying your makeup.

 So you always want to make sure that you get under your jaw line as well.

 And now, since I already have our luminous body bronzing lotion on my arms, chest and

 legs, I'm going to finish the look and I'm going to use this as my bronzer.

 And as I showed you on my makeup tutorial before, I like to apply from my cheeks up

 Now when you apply this to the rest of your body, you want to wait five minutes before

 This isn't a self-tanner, but you want to make sure that you're not going to affect

 I'm going to put just a little bit on the very top of my forehead to give me that sun-kissed

 I don't want to add any to my nose because I don't want my nose to look oily.

 Okay, we're going to let this sit for just a second before I finish it with our translucent

 It uses tapioca starch and there is no color pigments in this powder.

 So this just kind of finishes your face, gives you that nice dewy, just perfect finish.

 So that's that extra Le Bry added benefit to their beauty products.

 I like to tap it out on the lid and then just brush this all over my face.

 And you can even see that pop of illuminating glow on my cheeks.

 Now I would still probably add a little bit of bronzer when I apply my makeup because

 But I do really like how if I was going for a really natural look, I could just do this,

 apply some mascara, maybe a light nude lip gloss, and I'd be ready to go.

 Please, if there's anything you want to know about, go on my Facebook page or comment on

 Let me know what you want to see because I want to hear from you.

 Today's special ingredient is a whole rabbit, but we're going to cook half of it.

 Alright, so we're going to use 5 cloves of garlic and 5 slices of ginger, some celery,

 red potatoes, mushrooms, I believe these are white, some of these smaller tomatoes, 2 medium

 And we're going to cook this in the crock pot you see back here.

 In addition, we're going to use chicken broth or stock I made the other day with my chicken

 So let me wash, cut these up, and prepare it before I put it in the crock pot.

 Seems like this might be more than what I can fit in the crock pot, so I'm going to

 revise it to half an onion, 2 tomatoes, 2 branches from the celery stalk, 3 of the mushrooms,

 I'm going to throw in my 7 pieces of chopped up rabbit, cut up rabbit, and some salt, some

 sesame oil, some crushed red pepper, and I'm going to throw in my assortment of vegetable

 So once again that's mushrooms, tomatoes, baby carrots, celery, onions, yellow onions.

 Alright now, add a little bit more oil, not too much, some more crushed red pepper, some

 It's cooking at low right, low temperature, and it's going to take about 6 hours.

 We'll come back, maybe 3 hours to see how it is, how it turns out.

 The potato is probably still too hard for it, but it looks like everything else is pretty

 So we still have about 3 hours more to cook, so we'll come back and do a plating and taste

 Maybe I should have cooked this a little bit longer, like for 8 hours.

 I could use a little bit more salt, and maybe a little longer cooking for the harder vegetables to become softer.

 Hi everybody, it's Sheila from happiness series.com and as you can tell I'm doing this myself

The reason we wanted to do this is we were getting a lot of questions

 about our kale smoothie and how to do it so I thought it just as easy to show you how

And we have three segments today, the kale smoothie, a mango smoothie and a

 vegetable medley that you will not believe and it's power packed with vitamins and minerals.

 in because it takes the bitterness out of the kale, that kale sometimes can be a little

 bitter so if it's hard for you to drink the kale smoothie, add some chard, it will really

Don't be afraid to mix up what you like in this, make this your own.

 A few things I do is I will add the tops of carrots, the green parts of the carrot and

 dandelion greens and I'll just put different little things in to get a more variety of

So as far as the mint goes, I like a lot of mint so I will do anywhere from three

 First I start with the basil and this is really good for digestion and it adds a nice little

 add my oranges which I usually eat one while I'm making this so there's three quarters

Now I use a Vitamix which is very powerful so you don't need as much water but whatever

 the kale and this is part of our Power Pack segment on vegetables.

Now if you don't have a very powerful blender break it up really

And what I do even in this blender that's powerful I still only start with maybe

 half of it and I add just a little bit more water, maybe a third of a cup.

 thing about this Vitamix is it has a plunger that will not get stuck on the blades.

The reason I invested in this is because I use this two to three times

And then I don't want to miss one little part of this kale or chard.

And then it's just so easy to digest because it's already blended

 most important parts of making the kale smoothie taste good and that is ice because if it is

 You have one of my favorite situations going on here, the chai concentrate.

 Cool, and what does it have in it aside from the chai concentrate?

 We're going to start by shaking all the ingredients together and then we're going to pour them

 And so I have a little bit of ice in here so it chills while I shake it.

 You could do regular or vanilla, but I wanted some extra flavor in this.

 So in addition to the vanilla soy milk, I'm going to do a quarter ounce of vanilla syrup.

 instrument cluster it's out it was held by the two hex bolts on the top and two

 seven millimeters bolts right here basically it has only one electric

 connector which is back here now I'm already on the way back you can see this

 is the connector the one only one for the class I will put the steering wheel

 in the lowest position I will go and carefully try to clear the dashboard

 clear the steering wheel the time to hook up that electric connector on the

 holding that steering wheel in the very lowest position using my knee also I was

 able without damaging anything slide that instrument cluster inside hey I was

 just too optimistic and positive about the brain of the designers you see this

 this part cannot go inside because I cannot go down here I will break this

 lever so despite a clearing the steering wheel that was fantastic you

 actually have to remove entire dashboard to slide this inside no kidding really

 quickly took the official manual and yes on the chapter eight six three four

 says right here remove the IP upper trim bed to squeeze it in without removing

 and lifting entire dashboard I had to remove that side pillar because there is

 one bolt right here for the dashboard then there is this one right here and I

 release this one that gave me another clearance for lifting the dashboard up I

 was able to clear the steering wheel and everything and put it inside so that's a

 kind of shortcut but unfortunately the design is really really stupid okay

 Just to give you an overall look before you see how I did it in time lapse.

 I started to do the fins by putting a bead of just a piece of square polymer clay out of the extruder.

 It was a lot of guess work so I figured I didn't want to include it in my video.

 But I slowed this part down so I could show you how I'm wrapping these.

 Then after I started detailing it I was like wow yeah I really like this.

 And because it came out of a tool and I didn't make these by hand.

 All these pieces should be pretty close to being exactly half inch pieces.

 This is very very important if you want to make scales that are very uniform.

 And to condition these clays I just roll them into a ball until they're really smooth.

 When you put these on, these scales, you want to push it to it and then drag the small part of the tear drop up.

 And when you push them together you want to make sure there's no gap in between.

 The less you have gaps in between the easier it is for the next row to go on.

 But I just make sure I'm all the way to the bottom starting on the first row.

 I made me a story board on my self centering roller using tape and clay.

 I just put my first row on and I'm actually spacing these apart by exactly a half an inch.

 So what I just did is I cut half an inch off of the story board.

 And that's going to show me where my mark is going to go for the next row.

 Being uniform and using measurements like this will make it look very very consistent.

 And when I put the scales on you want to press them on like I did on the first row.

 And you want to push them down to where they just barely cover that hole.

 And then you just keep repeating the process again and again until you get all the way to the top.

 I've actually filmed the whole process of all the scales on one side of this dragon which is pretty cool.

 Like as far as how much clay I'm using and how far I'm spacing them apart.

 That way you can just cut off the sections that are not so common.

 You could actually remove certain amounts of clay using that method.

 Just instead of cutting half inch long pieces do minus 1 eighth or 30 second even.

 Like I want to show you how I made the frog to the contest I'm doing right now.

 Since I don't want to eat the mealworms live, what I'm going to do is you take out your

 mealworms in a container like this and you want to sift through all the...

 Now all the bigger pieces of oats, they're going in the bottom, exposing the mealworms

 They are sensitive to light and there's a lot of light here because of the camera.

 I'm just going to put it in here and we can sift through the rest later.

 I feel sick and I don't know if I want to go through with this, but I made a promise

 I'm going to eat the rest of it because I don't want to waste them, you know?

 If you pick a bouquet of these things, I don't think your better half is going to be real

 It's going to be fried cauliflower and the batter is out of Parmesan cheese.

 I've clipped off the green leaves that come on the bottom of any cauliflower.

 We're going to submerge it and she's going to boil for about 20 minutes.

 We've split the florets up and we've sprinkled a little bit of kosher salt on the outside

 And then we're going to take it and you put it through a strainer and shake it.

 As you slowly shake or stir the water, the lukewarm water, we try to get it all incorporated

 Because you certainly don't want lumps of flour in your fried cauliflower.

 The next is just to add the cheese, which is 1-3 cup of Parmesan cheese that's freshly

 This cheese works well because it doesn't get all gooey when it gets hot.

 And then we have an egg that we've put into another separate bowl and we've whipped it

 Consistency of pretty close to maybe a pancake batter or a little thinner.

 So we add that and we are ready to start frying up some cauliflower.

 Into a pan we put enough vegetable oil to cover maybe, I don't know, about a third of

 And a way to test it to make sure it's ready, I have it on medium high.

 You don't want to get it too hot, but certainly you want to get it hot enough to fry.

 The best way to test it is to drop some of the batter in and it'll immediately come up

 All you need is take your cauliflower flourette, dip it into this delicious batter.

 So all we're really doing is warming it through again and making sure that the batter itself

 It's been about maybe three or four minutes and now we're going to start turning them.

 I'm using a slotted spoon because these cauliflower are cooked.

 A lot of people will try to drain fried foods by putting it directly on a paper towel.

 And if we were sitting it directly on a paper towel, guess what that cauliflower would be

 And while that's going on, I'm going to go ahead and sprinkle some flour on the side.

 And while that is dripping away, I'm going to go ahead and sprinkle some flour on the

 And we're going to maybe get some comments from some people eating here in just a little

 I finished up thin layers of cauliflower and you can still see all that sort of lean meat

 If you want to use dry mushrooms, make sure that you soak them in water for 30 minutes before you slice them.

 Now that you gathered all the ingredients, here's the procedures you need to follow.

 However, if you were using fresh mushroom, you would add it in after the zucchini.

 But since this is dried mushroom, we are going to add it in after the pork.

 Alrighty guys, now that the ingredients in the pot are simmering, I thought I would give you a cooking tip.

 As you are cooking this recipe, ensure that the stove top is on medium heat.

 My Facebook address is www.facebook.com forward slash onthefireTV.

 This recipe also goes good with white rice or any other Korean dish.

 Hey guys, today I'm going to be showing you how to make your homemade hockey shooting target.

 Don't get those cheesy nets, so make sure it's thick and heavy duty.

 I would use these and try to get the color white, because this looks better.

 And you're going to need a, what is it called, like a lace, like a hockey lace.

 Now as you guys probably first noticed, how there's all rainbow zip ties going around.

 It was for the easy goal net, I just didn't use it, so I took it out and made my own.

 So I tied it, and I'll show you how to do all this stuff later.

 So here, see I had the white lace, and that you should get, like the white.

 I took the black lace or hockey, like shoelace, whatever you got.

 And what you're going to do is just wrap it around the whole net.

 Kind of looks like a hockey target, like a decent size in any corner you want.

 If you guys can see, it's two zip ties holding that to the top of the net.

 So what you want to do is get your black lace, tie it in a knot up here.

 But if you guys want me to do it, just send me a comment below, and I'll do it.

 But I'm not going to cut it, because I might use this for something else.

 And then what you're going to want to do is put it right behind the lace or whatever you have.

 I, and oh yeah, and this is a string that I attached the black one to.

 Except, if you guys can see right here, I attached the net with the zip ties.

 So what you want to do is take the zip tie and go through one square of the net.

 So, through one box and it's attaching to the string or rope or hockey lace or whatever you got.

 And then, you just want to, I can't really do it, but you just want to wrap it around and lock it in.

 It's not that hard, so go like that and then this thing locks it in for you.

 And the one thing that's bad about these, the pockets aren't really deep that I made.

 And these are like big nets I cut off, so cut off pretty big nets.

 I left a little portion of it open for you guys so I could do it, like zip tie, but my hands can't reach.

 So, what's over here, like under here, how I attached the net to this little loop right there,

 Because the medium zip ties, they can't fit around the whole bar, like the whole cross bar or post.

 Now, I'm just going to be showing you guys how it works with pucks.

 So, this pocket, hold on, let me just move this out of the way.

 Okay, it can hold maybe like four pucks without them coming out.

 then send me a message below and I'll make a new video and more detailed like step by step.

 On my next video, I'm just going to be taking some shots, my hardest.

 Okay guys this is probably my biggest craving, my biggest coping mechanism, my

 buns using from raw pollution an onion bread and I've cut them into perfect

Next time I'm going to do sesame seeds on the top to make it a sesame

 is made out of the patties are made out of a heap of nuts and stuff and

 mean a triangle, a square mold to make a square slice so it's round, circle but I

So just like a Big Mac and the Mac sauce was the most complicated.

 make that you need to make raw ketchup, raw mayonnaise, you need to do a sweet

 pickle relish that takes a while to do as you need to do a dill pickle relish

 some salt, some sugar, I used xylitol and a bit of coconut sugar.

 replacing it all with the raw ingredients and also some I think a

 ingredients for a Big Mac are really cheap, really simple, not much nutrition

 sauce I need because there's four different types of sauces that goes into

 proportions to get it right, but I swear to God that tastes so similar to

 again because I do like to have better ingredients than just that simple

 So overnight the McDonald's sauce I will be making exactly the same for many

 desperados that have gone raw food will come and make this one.

 Today we're going to make a James Bond favorite, the old-fashioned.

 For this drink you're going to need a rocks glass, a measuring cup,

 a mixing glass, and optionally a cutting board and a small knife.

 This cocktail is commonly made with a sugar cube and a splash of water.

 Bond prefers his old-fashioned with bourbon, but you can also make this one with rye.

 The type of bourbon is dealer's choice, so feel free to use your favorite bottle.

 However, Bond always preferred strong drinks, so you want to use a bourbon that's at least

 One thing that they didn't really focus on in the movies was that Bond is a big whiskey drinker.

 He drank more bourbon than he did martinis or vodka or gin or anything else.

 James Bond fell in love with bourbon whiskey in particular early on in the books.

 He drank several different brands of bourbon, but in the second Bond book,

 Live and Let Die, he calls for his old-fashioned to be made with old granddad.

 So a bottle of bonded old granddad has become my go-to bourbon for Bond cocktails.

 Hit it with two or three dashes of aromatic bitters, depending on how spicy you like it.

 You just want to combine the ingredients and cool them down a little bit.

 Then strain it into your rocks glass over a large chunk of ice.

 Cut a fat slice of orange peel, being careful not to cut into the white pith.

 And because this is a Bond drink, we're going to clean up the edges.

 Hello everybody, it's Matthew, and today I'm going to be opening my Speed Stacks Package

 I ordered 12 green cups, 2 cup keepers, and an additional red cup, and a timer, and the

 mat, and I don't think it's all in here because this is not very big at all.

 So I don't know if it's all in here, but I'm just going to open it anyway.

 Oh, and I also got a gear bag, I think, which is what I'm seeing.

 My additional red cup because this is my set that I already have, and, oh crap, where's

 This one has a marking on it and it just really annoys me, so I'm going to probably get rid

 So one cup gear bag cup keeper, and this is what I really wanted, my, it's a timer, but

 It goes to a thousandth of a second instead of a hundredth, so wait.

 And this is, a lot of people complain that it's really small, it doesn't seem that small

 So that's everything, I'll be right back and I'm going to try my first times with my new

 I don't know if this is good, but 388, 3822, which is pretty good.

 So, four, I don't know if you can see that, four, five, six, zero.

 Alright, so, I like the timer, I like the mount, and I like these cups.

 Hey guys, today I'm going to show you how to make my Choc Banana Protein Shake.

 So first off we start off with about a quarter cup of LSA straight into the blender.

 Along with that we've got about a tablespoon of chia seeds, a teaspoon of cinnamon which

 We've also got about one scoop of protein powder, chocolate flavour.

 You can go vanilla if you want, so you can make it your own vanilla banana protein shake

 Obviously the banana itself is really high in carbohydrates but it's lovely, it's great

 If you are trying to lose weight I recommend probably going half but today we're going

 So I'm using almond milk purely because dairy has a lot of acidity and you don't actually

 So today I'm going with almond milk but if you want go for the dairy option as well.

 So it's high in fibre, you've got the cheese seeds for that along with the LSA which is

 The banana obviously you need in short but it's fantastic in the sense it's got a lot

 We've been called out by a friend of ours today to put a coat hook or a coat rack onto

 a wall in the office, but the wall's a plasterboard wall so it needs some special fixings.

 A lot of DIYers say to us, I've put some wall plugs into plasterboard and the screws keep

 What's the best thing to use for connecting or fixing to plasterboard?

 Using that combined with the screws that come with it, it enables a very strong fix

 They bite into the board and can also be used in plasterboard that's got insulation at the

 A little earlier on I put that on the wall and marked the three screw holes.

 Now I'll demonstrate how this Fischer plasterboard fixing works.

 We buy them in the box because it's a lot cheaper to buy a box full.

 If you've just moved into a place that has a lot of hollow plasterboard walls, it's a

 You get the box full of 100 fixings and 100 screws to go with it.

 You simply put the Fischer fixing onto your drill and then you treat the fixing just like

 Whatever you're fixing simply screws into the Fischer fixing just like a wall plug.

 So we're going to put three of those in and then we're going to fix the coat hook up to

 That is about as fixed as firmly to this plasterboard as it would be with raw plugs and screws onto

 We've used them for a number of years at DIY Doctor and prior to doing it at DIY Doctor

 Made by Fischer, available through Screwfix and we can't recommend them highly enough.

 Today I'm going to show you one of my new favorite salty snacks.

 They are a Japanese sweet pepper that you kind of flash fry on a skillet or you can

 grill them and serve them topped with lots of salt and lemon juice.

 I actually discovered these when I was in Mexico, well, Disney World's version of Mexico,

 at a little restaurant where they served them kind of blistered and a little bit grilled

 They were so, so good that when I got back to New York I was like, what are these amazing

 After doing a little bit of Googling, I realized they were shishito peppers, which are, like

 I still don't know why they were serving them at the Mexican restaurant.

 They might be Mexican also, but we can, you know, we're just going to, whatever, just

 The thing about these peppers are that they're mostly sweet, but every so often you get one

 You do get a little bit of a surprise every now and then, but it's not unbearably so.

 It's not like habaneros or anything crazy like that, not even like jalapenos.

 When you put the salt and the lemon juice on them, they're not too bad.

 Apparently they call them shishito peppers because shishi, I think, means lion in Japanese.

 They say the head of one of these looks a little bit like a lion.

 If you look at it closely, long enough, I think you do kind of see it.

 It has little eyes and a little bit of a little snout there, so it's kind of cute.

 You want to take a little paring knife and you just want to get at the very tip, I guess

 right where the little lion's mouth, and you just want to cut a little slit so it opens up.

 This is going to keep them from bursting when you get them in that hot oil in that hot pan,

 I'm going to get some olive oil, and I just want enough oil to cover the bottom of the pan.

 It's already nice and hot because I got my pan hot before I added the oil.

 I'm just going to leave them there for about three, four, maybe five minutes maximum.

 Once they're just a little bit charred, they're basically ready to go.

 and then we are going to have ourselves a delicious salty snack.

 I'm going to take them off the heat because they're so thin-skinned that the hot oil cooks them right away.

 You see how they have just that little bit of that blister right on the sides there?

 They don't need to be cooked all evenly because what I really like about them is that they have that kind of,

 I'm just going to get these all on my plate to watch out because that oil can splatter a little bit.

 I like to serve these with, you really want to put a lot of nice kind of coarse salt over them.

 If you've got like a Maldon sea salt or some kind of really nice flaky Hawaiian, pink Himalayan salt or something like that,

 This is definitely the place to use whatever fancy salt you got in that Christmas basket three years ago.

 Go for it because this is really a place where you're displaying,

 you want that delicious salty flavor with the little bite of the peppers.

 And then you also want to serve them with a lemon wedge or two on the side.

 And then I just kind of let people squeeze that citrus right over it.

 We're going to show you how to optimize the tone of your guitar right out of the box.

 You notice when you bought your guitar, there's a piece of foam underneath the bridge.

 We're going to show you how to remove that and get your intonation set right where it

 All you need for this is a string winder and you're ready to go.

 First thing we're going to do, we're going to loosen the strings.

 What you're going to do is just carefully lift up underneath the strings, slide your

 bridge out, the foam piece should come right off, and you just carefully slide the bridge

 You'll want to line up your bridge so the strings are in the middle of the pole pieces.

 Once you have it strung back up, you're going to go ahead and tune it to pitch.

 Now we're going to go ahead and check to make sure your intonation is right.

 The factory has set the saddles at the beginning so you shouldn't have to make any adjustments there.

 All we have to do is slide the bridge backwards or forwards just a little bit to get the intonation

 To do this, we're going to go ahead and start with the high E string and we're going to

 go ahead and pluck the string, harmonic at the 12th fret, lightly press down at the 12th

 The string is sharp, we're going to have to bring the bridge towards the Bigsby.

 The string is flat, we're going to have to take it towards the pickup.

 We're just going to grab it at the base of the bridge right by the thumb wheels and go

 Now we're going to go ahead and do the same thing for the low E string.

 This one's just a little bit flat, so this one's going to go forward, so I'm going to

 grab the base of the treble side and just move the bass side just a touch.

 Now we're going to go ahead and tune the rest of the guitar up.

 Fall is fantastic here on this beautiful Trinity morning where we're going to be cooking up

 Here through November and early December, fruit will keep coming onto these trees.

 So I'm going to have some semi-dwarf Fiji apples featured in today's recipe for Outdoor

 For today's recipe for the baked apples, I'm going to pick out five to six of these apples.

 I'm also going to use a half a cup of raisins, but you could substitute chopped dates.

 I'm going to use some butter, ground cinnamon, nutmeg, brown sugar.

 I'm going to core the apples and I'm going to peel them down at the top, just maybe a

 At that point, I'll fill the centers with the raisins or dates.

 Now I'm going to take and combine the brown sugar, the water, and the butter, boiling

 water, along with the cinnamon and nutmeg, and I'll be pouring it over.

 I'm using a 3-inch Wapak today, which holds a little over a cupful of my ingredients that

 Once I get these ingredients in there, the butter should melt and I'll be pouring that

 If you wanted to, you can put some clothes around the tops for decorative.

 I stuck one apple in the middle just to hold the place so when I go to move this Dutch

 Since I'm cooking out in the apple orchard today, my setup for my cooking is going to

 I'll use a screen on top and then I'm going to put the Dutch oven directly on top of the

 screen with the coals underneath and cook it on low, between 250 to 300 degrees, for

 Our recipe started with apples like this and it's finishing off with apples looking

 For Joanne and Noni at Granada, it's time to tell Brenda to activate that smell-o-vision.

 The one on the right is so tender I pulled it apart and I'll be ready to taste it.

 It's a beautiful morning here and outdoor cast iron cooking, another good recipe to

 The number one portion of trail maintenance is getting water off of the trail.

 The first step is of course finding a rock, which is behind Jeremy the Mighty Bear.

 What you do with that rock is we're going to put it in the hole that we've dug for it,

 which isn't deep enough yet, and then we're going to hope that when the water hits this

 water bar, it's going to come off the side and get off of the trail.

 We want to leave the back slope high, and we want to take this, the critical edge, quotations,

 Once we get it in there, we're going to do a little something we've come to call cementing

 We take rocks, we put them in around it, we get our, we tamp them, tamp them in so that

 It has to pass the kick test, which is actually, it's pretty scientific.

 You get the rock in, two thirds of the way, and then you kick it as hard as you can.

 But if it doesn't move, that means it's in there solid, it's going to last for a while.

 We need the water bars on this trail to be particularly strong, because if they're not,

 the first dirt biker that comes here and hits it, first of all, he's going to knock it out.

 He's going down getting hurt, and it's just bad news, because we need this thing to last,

 and we're not up here every other day trying to fix our own water bars.

 Most of everybody gives Jerobo a dime, everybody's away from him while he's digging.

 He's got plenty of room, he's got his PPE on, some people might call it a helmet.

 Raise it across his body, instead of in between his legs or towards him,

 Hi, my name is Katie Jackson and I'm here at Studio Blue Dance Center in Ashburn, Virginia.

 Make sure our knee is nice and straight all the way through our toe.

 It's going to come out to the side, bring it in, come back down.

 As my leg goes out to the side, I rise up on my left leg in what we call releve,

 We pull all the way up through our thigh so it's nice and straight.

 It is definitely easier to do them faster because you have the momentum.

 Make sure your legs are nice and straight, your abs are nice and tight,

 Make sure you pull up through your spine as if somebody's pulling you up

 through your head, and it'll keep your spine nice and elongated,

 So as we spot, make sure you look at something straight in front of you,

 keep looking, looking until you can't look anymore, and then whip your head.

 or for how-to videos on almost any other topic, visit monkeyseed.com.

We're gonna blend this so the cashew nuts can break because you don't want to have like the full thick on cashew nuts in the Kheer.

 Cashew nuts are very easy to break in the blenders because they're off, like they're very, very soft.

So you can pretty much get a very quick consistency, like powder consistency.

 This is gonna be awfully hard for us to pronounce because we usually call this Lajjai.

So this right here, I guess in English it's called green cardamom.

 And this is what you would put in like, you know, your teas, your green teas for good scents.

 You want to take at least like four or five and then you want to open them.

You want to crack them open and then throw them in there for better scent and for a bit of a better flavor.

She's just pretty much taken all the seeds out of it and she's just gonna throw it in there.

It has no other flavors because I know some people like vanilla.

There's all different kind of ways to actually make this rice pudding or kheer.

 We right now are just making very plain, simple cashew nuts, rice, milk, green cardamoms and sugar.

And the reason why, you know, I'm saying that you could put cinnamon in it is if you're trying to make this for Thanksgiving and you want something different for your family, it'll be a good treat.

 And it's definitely gonna make it festive, like you know, perfect for Thanksgiving, perfect for the winter.

 If you just want to, you know, cuddle in front of the fire with a loved one or something, it'll be amazing with cinnamon.

 If you can take a big spatula, try to like, you know, have, try to take the spoon or a spatula and like as you're mixing it, like as you're mixing it, like press against the walls of the pot like this.

 Try to catch the rice to like go behind the spoon so you can break the rice as much as possible.

 Try to break it as much as you can because you really want to have like really like small pieces, like small grams of rice.

 So this right here is just plain domino sugar and you can put sugar as much as you like depending on how sweet you want it or how unsweetened you want it.

 You don't even have to put sugar in it if you don't want to but it just, you know, tastes better, obviously.

 So if you want to have like the regular, you know, sweetened kheer, this right here, you know, I'm pretty sure you guys have these in your drawers, your spoon drawers.

 Pick up a regular metal spoon, throw in three like full spoons.

 So as you can see, the consistency of the rice pudding is thick now.

 Okay, so this is the finished result of the kheer and it's like super yummy.

 Hi, Bill Oganiski here and I wanted to share with you something that some people might

 think is kind of simplistic, but I've come to realize that a lot of people don't know

 And Joan and I talked about this and she disagreed with me, but I thought, hey, maybe I'll help

 And this is the Saturday morning diet and I wanted to share with you, I had shown you

 one video on hyacinth tea and what hyacinth tea does, hibiscus tea rather, hibiscus tea

 And it's a wonderful thing, it has a nice ruby taste to it and I have this after every

 Even now that I'm having my one pound salad every day, I still have my hibiscus tea because

 They have these thimbles, I don't know if you can see it there adequately, but what

 it does, it comes in a metal pack, you open it up, you put your tea in here and let me

 tell you, I use a minimal amount of tea, let me get a spoon and I'll show you what

 About a third of a teaspoon or perhaps a half a teaspoon of tea goes in the thimble, that

 and turn, you put the metal cap on it, you put it on, it has a clip to put on the side

 of the cup and then what I do is I have a half a teaspoon of cinnamon.

 I made a beautiful video on the many benefits of cinnamon, but one of the many benefits

 And if you have some cinnamon in the morning with your oatmeal and then you have some cinnamon

 after dinner in the evening, you're getting a whole teaspoon of cinnamon during the course

 The other thing I want to show you, if you had to make tea for a few people, you could

 make it in a larger tea maker, a spitzer, and it comes this size.

 The other one that we have is this fancy one that comes with a slip on where you put

 the tea in here and it snaps the cover and you put that in and it makes the tea.

 The other thing about tea is that, let me get some hot water here, that people think

 that you should just put it in, and there you go, a nice hot cup of tea.

 Now I don't like to put milk in my tea, I like to have the taste of the tea and a lot

 of people think that you should just leave it there and sit there, but that's really

 What you do is you take it and you dunk it and that releases the flavor and the color

 of the tea into the water much more rapidly and you also get a much stronger taste of

 So there you go, it's turning bright red and that's one of the nice things about hibiscus

 On our website you can buy Amazon products right through jonebarth.com and we have coconut

 oil, we have all kinds of supplements, but one of the things you can do is you can order

 Do you know that one little packet with about 20 tea bags is about $7-$8?

 Then I got a whole pound and would you believe using a half a teaspoon a day, I've had this

 almost two months and look I still got the, oh, pretty much, almost half as much as I

 So that's one way to save quite a bit of money and improve your health is by buying tea in

 bulk in loose nut bags and using a tea spencer and you can have a really nice cup of tea.

 So I hope you learned something, don't forget we have our ebooks available, please rate,

 comment, subscribe and please share us with everybody you know, don't keep us a secret,

 tell everybody what great information Bill and Joan Loganiske are sharing with you on

 See you on the next video and again, pass the word, see ya, bye bye.

 Please rate, comment and share this important information with everyone on your email list.

 Get your free protein meal replacement recipe by subscribing to our blog at joanbars dot

 Order our weight loss ebook at saturdaydiet dot com at the special price of only $27 to

 I went to the Beautylish event, I got this Wella Brilliance Find a Normal Treatment

 I've been sticking my hair in a bun and on my days off I just hate it when it just looks

 So this hair top knot is awesome for it because you can just rock it all day.

 Although I get a major headache when I have my hair up in a bun too long.

 But you're just going to get your hand like this and I run it through my roots really

 really well and then at the ends because this is where my hair feels like hay.

 Now that we have that all in, for all you mommies out there who I know probably have

 I use this to condition my hair and it feels so soft after I've left my hair in with this

 It's kids, it's Suave Kids detangling spray but it makes my hair feel so soft.

 And since this is going to be nice and slick and stick together, I just take it and I start

 And the more I twist it, then this part starts to curl on its own.

 And the older that I get, I'm learning that simplicity is just, it makes life so much

 And then this side could be pinned down because that is kind of bugging me.

 But the more imperfect that it is, the better because it looks like you didn't try so hard.

 And it's cool because when you have a jelly type stuff in your hair, it makes the slicking

 I don't have greasy lids, but this eyeshadow, it's Venetian Metal X Cream Shadow.

 I just didn't want to walk out of the house without anything on my lids.

 Rebel is my all-time favorite, one of my all-time favorites from MAC.

 I like my face to be very matte when it's going to be clean, when a clean look, especially

 But for the cheeks, I definitely go for something a little bit more dewy and glowy.

 And we just take a little bit of this, this is pink, and put it in the apples of my cheeks.

 I like a little bit of a sun-kissed look because I do lose a lot of color during the

 So, if you're going to do that, or if you have a five head, we want to put some bronzer

 If you like to do more of your eyes and you actually do take time, you have an extra 15

 When I first put them on, they're actually really white, so what I do is after I pop

 these on, I put a little bit of black shadow along the lash line and kind of brush it forward

 I do not suggest putting mascara on lashes whatsoever, but these brown lashes I kind

 Leave comments and definitely give thumbs up to the video and thank you so much for

 Of course, check out my daily vlogs, Beats of It Up Z, and my blog, www.wisstwiz2.com.

You said pretend like you're bleeding but it doesn't look like blood at

 going to do is sift out all the seeds and all the chunks and put it in that bowl that

 overnight and it has this gel inside that freezes and then it has this mixer attachment

 that just blends it all together and slowly makes it colder and colder until it turns

 you put it in this jar and then you put that in the freezer and you got ice cream.

 have a KitchenAid and buy one of these fancy gel bowls that freeze.

 that you can put these in a normal container bowl and put it in the freezer and then maybe

 such thing as sherbert and I think there's such thing as sherbet.

 It's probably like a French like sherbet but we Americans say sherbet.

 that's something my brother always loved getting and I hated it.

 We're going to be using a pre-made base from BrambleBerry.com for the shampoo, and then

 I'm going to be showing you how to make from scratch hair conditioner.

 The shampoo portion of this project is so easy, you're going to flip.

 You're going to be using a pre-made shampoo base from BrambleBerry.com.

 And in fact, in department stores, you can pay up to $12 just for four to six ounces

 of shampoo, whereas this is a very economical, easy way for you to customize and make a great

 First step is to pour 10 ounces of the shampoo into a mixing bowl or a mixing container.

 And if you want to use more, you can always double or triple this recipe.

 In this case, I'm making a delicious personalized essential oil blend using rosemary essential

 oil, peppermint essential oil, and Tahitian vanilla, just one part of each.

 Add 1 4th ounce of this custom essential oil and fragrance oil blend to your soap and stir

 Stir gently though, because you don't want to stir in too many bubbles.

 If you want to personalize your essential oil or fragrance oil blend, you totally can.

 In fact, BrambleBerry.com has an essential oil and a fragrance oil calculator, so you

 can go there, just put in the product that you're making, put in the essential oil or

 fragrance oil you're using, click calculate, and it'll tell you exactly what the safe amounts

 The reason I chose rosemary essential oil for this blend is because it adds to shine

 and sheen for your hair, and it supposedly cuts down on oiliness.

 Rosemary on its own is a little bit sharp though, so that's why I added the Tahitian

 It really cuts down on that sharpness and adds to the sweet notes in the blend.

 Now that our essential oil and fragrance oil is all stirred in, it's time to pour.

 Now, if you're looking for a more advanced do-it-yourself shampoo project, BrambleBerry.com

 does have an advanced Soap Queen TV episode that you can buy that shows you how to make

 There's also a companion e-book on how to make liquid soap from scratch.

 In fact, if you want to make lotions from scratch, BrambleBerry.com also has a premium

 It's actually like lotion, just a rinse-off lotion for your hair.

 One thing that's really important to do, and this is a non-negotiable, is that you need

 to rinse every single piece of equipment you'll be using for this recipe with bleach water,

 a 5% bleach water solution to ensure that everything is fully sterilized before you

 A lot of times I'll work in ounces, but this recipe is so precise that I'm working in grams.

 The reason I'm using distilled water for this project is because tap water can have a lot

 It's important to be safe and make sure that your conditioner doesn't grow mold or have

 You want to make sure that you're on a stove top so you can keep the temperature even for

 Now that I've got my water heating on medium, it's time to measure out the other ingredients.

 Into the container goes 2 grams of liquid silk, 22 grams of liquid glycerin, 35 grams

 of BTMS 50, 13 grams of jojoba oil, 6 grams of sweet almond oil, and 12 grams of DL panthenol.

 Take all these ingredients over to your heating water and just pour them in.

 You'll need to wait at least 3 to 5 minutes for them to start melting.

 While they're melting, let's talk about some of the ingredients in this hair conditioning

 BTMS 50, or benotraminium methyl sulfate, is our emulsifier for this conditioning recipe.

 It's a conditioning emulsifier that mixes water and oil together.

 It's super moisturizing for your hair shaft, it helps improve hair structure, and it adds

 Now it's time to check and see how our hair conditioner is doing.

 While this is cooking, try to keep it right around 160 degrees.

 This will make it a lot easier when it's time to add our fragrance oils and our preservative.

 It's very important that we never, ever add our preservative, Optifine, above 175 degrees.

 This is because heat breaks down the preservative action, which means mold, bacteria contamination,

 Preservatives are always necessary when making lotions or hair conditioners.

 If you'd like more information about how to use preservatives, SoapQueen.com has some

 great articles on important use of preservatives, or you can always get that premium lotion

 Now if you use a whisk, you have to use a lot of elbow grease, so I like to use a stick

 But if you don't have one handy, just keep whisking until you can't possibly think you

 And we're adding an equal amount of our Fragrance Oil Essential Oil Blend.

 Remember, that blend was one part Tahitian Vanilla, one part Rosemary Essential Oil,

 With a steady hand, just pour your warm conditioner into your bottle.

 Because we love our Soap Queen TV fans so much, we've created these awesome customizable labels

 Once they're printed, cut these out with a paper trimmer or scissors.

 Then customize your labels by handwriting in whatever particular fragrance or essential

 It's gonna take me a little getting used to and you getting used to it, too, boy

 This is the Cajun stuff bell pepper dish gonna put some shrimp and ground meat in there and other veggies

 We're gonna fix that but we're gonna put some real cheese in there and some real broccoli, too

 And I'm sure the broccoli whatever's in here little bitty pieces is freeze-dried and we don't want none of that garbage

 So I'm gonna go ahead and do that and then I'm gonna milk the cob by scraping down it and getting the milk out the remaining

 This could be for the stub bell peppers over here, I'm gonna add some shrimp to that and just a little bit just pay attention

 I salt and peppered it and been whacking at it like you see me doing now.

 All right, into the sausage I got a little handful of garlic I'm gonna chunk in there

It's not really an egg shape because we have these indentations,

 and that's because he's going to have a skinny face, but he's going to have cheekbones there.

 We're going to also cut down here because he's an older guy, and that means his forehead

 is going to be smaller than a younger character, but proportionally speaking.

 that means that we're going to bring the eyes up high because the older the character, the

 give him eye bags because he's been working very late every night trying to cook some

The devilish ears off to the side, and they are devilish because according

 to legend, and truly according to the Mallory book, Merlin is half human, half devil.

I'm going to cut this off on top, but I'll leave a little bit there

 They provide a chance for the whole crew to get involved and are often a place where you'll swap stories and local knowledge with other boaters.

 Locks do come in different shapes and sizes, but the principle of using them is pretty much the same.

 A lock is simply a chamber with gates to contain the water at either end.

 The flow of water in and out of the lock is controlled by sluices called paddles which are operated using a windlass.

 The paddles at the top of the lock are used to let water in and those at the bottom to let water out, thus raising or lowering your boat.

 Stop the boat well before the lock, hold the boat with ropes and put one or more crew members ashore to get the lock ready.

This makes it easier for one person to hold the boat steady, but the centre line should never be used for mooring up.

 The golden rule at locks is to take your time and do things methodically.

 Remember that some of the lock mechanisms can be stiff and heavy to operate.

 Consider getting your fittest or strongest crew members to do the hard work.

 It's important that the steerer stays at the tiller at all times with the engine running so the boat is always under control.

 Children love to get involved and help out at locks, it's all part of the adventure.

 But locks are deep with strong water flows, so be particularly vigilant and make sure they're always fully supervised.

 For younger children in particular, the paddle gear is often at head height, so keep them well clear, as spinning or flying windlass can cause a lot of damage.

 It's important that crew operating paddles stay by their paddle mechanism until the lock is empty or full and they remain in contact with the skipper in case of emergency.

 Keep an eye on the boat at all times and if anything goes wrong, close all paddles quickly and sort out the problem.

 Some locks have anti-vandal devices which you release with a handcuff key.

 Locks aren't operated on a first-come, first-served basis, but on whether the lock can be used by another boat without wasting water.

 For example, if you're going downhill and come to a lock that's empty, always check to see if another boat is approaching from below the lock.

 You would have had to fill the lock anyway, so you might as well do it with a boat in it.

 Of course, if there isn't another boat coming, you don't need to wait for one to arrive.

 It's a case of using a little courtesy and common sense to save water.

 If there isn't another boat coming, make sure the gates and paddles at the far end of the lock are closed before lifting the paddles at the end nearest the boat to fill the lock.

 Make sure the windlass is a snug fit on the spindle by using the correct hole.

 When the lock is full, push the gate open, steer the boat into the lock and make sure the top paddles are fully closed.

Letting them drop can cause them to break and put the lock out of action.

 The steerer needs to keep an eye on the back of the boat to make sure it's always clear of the top gate sill.

 If necessary, briefly engage forward gear to keep the boat away.

 Make sure the front is clear of the bottom gate and that the boat is floating freely.

 As the lock empties, you'll find that the bottom gates will open quite easily once the water levels are equalised.

 Trying to force them before they're ready is a total waste of effort.

 Close all paddles and, unless another boat is approaching, close the gates.

 Collect your crew, unless there's another lock close by, in which case it's easier for them to stay off the boat and walk ahead to get the next lock ready.

If the lock is full, make sure another boat isn't approaching, then empty it and steer the boat in.

 On most canals, you won't experience strong currents, but on some, water flows round the locks quite fast.

 If you see water movement, steer into the flow as it will push the front of the boat away, then back as it passes.

 Close the bottom gates and make sure the paddles are fully down.

 It's a good idea to initially lift the first paddle just halfway, to avoid a great insurge of water that can throw the boat backwards and forwards, making it difficult to control.

 If the lock is fitted with paddles in the top gate, don't open them until they're underwater.

 Opening them too early can cause water to swamp the front of the boat.

 Again, open them slowly and keep a watchful eye on the boat at all times.

Check that the paddles are all down and close the gates after the boat, unless another boat is waiting to use the lock.

 Sometimes you'll come across two or more locks joined together in what is known as a staircase, where the top gate of one lock is the bottom gate of the next.

If you're going uphill, the bottom lock should be empty with the upper ones all full.

 You use the water from the upper locks to fill the lower ones in turn, raising you up the flight.

 When going downhill, the top lock should be full with the lower ones empty.

 With staircase locks, it's important to check that another boat hasn't started in the opposite direction before you enter the first lock.

 The general rule is one boat up, one boat down, unless local notices tell you otherwise.

 Broad locks, that is ones which are wider than your boat, need a little extra care.

 Try to share with another boat whenever possible to save water and always use the front and back ropes to steady the boat in the lock.

 When you're using the lock alone and going uphill, always slowly open the top ground paddle, that's the one on the lock side, rather than the one in the gate, on the same side as the boat first.

 This way, the flow of water into the lock will help to keep the boat against the lock wall, making it easier to control.

 When the lock is part full, you can open the paddles on the opposite side as well.

 Hello everybody this is Abraham of Noshark Computer Services and today I'd like to show

 That's this particular machine and it is a little tricky on how to get it opened up.

 I do have it open so I'm not going to be prying anything off but I want to show you where

 So first thing you do is you turn it upside down, pull the battery out and remove one

 After that you have to use some kind of pry tool and get between the keyboard and the

 And as you pry it little by little, you're going to have to pry it all around, this piece

 After this piece comes out, you get the access to the hard drive and then you pull the keyboard

 out and then take the screws all around the perimeter and there is a couple on the bottom.

 So once the screws are taken, well you're going to have to take this off too, that's

 But the bottom only has two or four screws, two on here, two on here, oh and four under

 So a total of two, four, plus four, eight screws that need to be taken from the bottom.

 After you have it separated, this part will actually have the motherboard connected to

 So it's actually connected like in the middle on this computer.

 I found it a bit tricky to get this thing apart, but it's not apparent right away that

 Normally it would take out just the keyboard and then it starts falling apart.

 This whole piece will hold the key to all the screws that's under it.

 One of the most popular alternators in the world and actually a very good little alternator.

 This was first used in about 1971 on Corvettes and really came into full use by 1972.

 And the 10SI from all the others can be told because the 10SI is going to have all these

 The next one after this, the 12SI had great big windows in here.

 The 10SI will have these 3 slots and these 5 holes in here like this.

 So we're just going to quick go together and put this brush holder.

 So first you get your brush holder and you've got your springs of course.

 And you want to make sure you get the proper brush into the proper slot.

 And then you take your little metal wire and you push that on top of that brush.

 Then you take your second brush spring and you push that down in.

 You always got to make sure that you get it into the right direction.

 You don't want to get these upside down because this can be put in either way.

 So you've got to make sure that wire stays down towards the bottom.

 And then you can put your wire clip through and shove it through.

 Then now all these Tennessee brush holders have to have this little clip that goes on

 So you've got to make sure that your brush holder has this middle clip.

 And here's the last little detail on loading up these brushes that a lot of people don't

 Once you get your brush holder loaded, these little wires that come in, first you want

 Make sure you've got the wire in towards the proper way so that most of the brush sticks

 And also you've got to make sure that these wires are not pushed forward.

 As your rotor spins around real close to this, as your brushes wear down and come out, that

 The slip rings will cut that wire off and your alternator will quit.

 So you've got to always make sure that you push that wire back, that it's back on both

 And then you're all set to load this into your alternator and away you go.

 I just wanted to show you these two beautiful ribeyes that I got at Staple Street Meat Market,

 I'm going to let them sit out now and I'm going to do some reverse searing on them.

 So we're going to put it on these beautiful, beautiful ribeyes we've got here.

 Okay folks, what we're fixing to do is the ending of the reverse sear.

 These two steaks were cooked in the oven until the internal temperature was 125 degrees.

 And now we're bringing them in here on this cast iron skillet on the induction cooktop.

 Can you hear the sizzling of the ribeyes on the really hot plate?

 I don't know what kind of grill marks we're looking at, but it's more or less cosmetic.

 I'm going to let this video go straight through because I can't splice it together.

 If you don't have an induction cooktop yet, you might want to invest in one.

 Although they have a fan in the bottom and it seems to irritate some people.

 But if it doesn't have a fan, it's going to burn up, just to let you know.

 I think these are going to come out pretty doggone good, folks.

 Right at the end, I put a little bit of this while they were still in the oven, okay?

 That side looks like it's a grill mark, so we're going to put him over there.

 Remember, if you live on Corpus Christi, get your meat on the south side at Staple Street Meat Market.

 I'm going to make another video when I cut into them to show you guys the internal color and the internal moisture capacity of the steaks, okay?

 Go check out Cooking with Serpensapo YouTube channel too if you get a chance.

 Okay, I'm not sure how good this is going to go, but I'm going to try to get it out of the light.

 And today we're going to do another milkshake and today's milkshake is Skittles.

 We bought them because they're cheaper and it doesn't matter anyway because we're just

 Weirdly, I don't know why it looks like skittles, to be honest.

 And just to make it even better, we can add a few big skittles on top of it, yeah?

 My favourite, well, another one, what we're probably going to be doing next week is Reese's.

 Or maybe if we do some classical ones, like banana or vanilla at some point.

 So after the problems with the blender, it's actually worked out really well.

 Oh, actually, there's an extra part to this video, and that'll come on just after this.

 Right, okay, I know you've probably seen this a lot of times, but I'm actually going to spray in the mouth.

 Tip your head right back really far, and then just spray a big blob in your mouth.

 This one was actually difficult to get from where I purchased it

 Hi this is Megan with Beadaholique.com and today I'm going to show you

 of a bracelet that Kat did for our free projects on our website

 here's a bracelet that I did that uses one drop and you can see with the

 a few different colors of beads here just to show a little more clearly the

 when you're doing even count peyote you need to make sure that you add an even

 when you're doing even count two drop peyote you need to make sure that your

 we're going to just like with regular flat even count peyote stitch we're just

 go ahead and pick up the beads for our first stitch and our third row but

 every time you're going to pick up two beads and then instead of skipping over

 than the regular peyote and it's also going to change the appearance

 and if you are going to be doing like a pattern or an image in your peyote

 and again if you use beads that don't have such a high contrast

 Today I'm gonna show you how to make the colored sugars that you use to put on cookies and

 You get like a little like this container of all different things that this was like seven dollars

 But even just the individual sugars, I think they're like three dollars a pop

 You can make your own colored sugars in all different kind of colors for different projects

 Especially during Christmas and Easter and you know months holidays when you do

 But I'm gonna start with a third cup of sugar and I'm gonna take some green gel food coloring

 Now depending on how much you use how little you use will you know

 Even if you just like wipe it on to the side of the bag right there see that

 I'm just gonna clean that off now take off as much as the air as you can and

 Go and I'll just work the sugar into the coloring and the reason you want to use gel coloring is because the

 Watery one will make the sugar clumpy you can use it, but it makes the sugar a little clumpy

 You don't want to have that so just keep working it and working it it takes about a good few minutes to get this

 You'll get it all worked in just make sure you don't have any dark specks in there

 Just keep working it look at look at that nice green for Christmas cookies

 And you can use any type of sugars even the raw sugar comes out nice you can use fine sugar

 There you go look at that you have beautiful colored sugar that you can use for your cookies cupcakes

 Isn't that great and easy and you can make all kinds of colors these gels come in all kind of all kinds of colors

 Do you realize how much sugar I can make for this cost me two dollars and I think 50 cents

 But I also use it for frostings all other things you can use the gel

 Coloring for so there you go you see I make three different colors so far

 And I hope you try this it's a great little project and great to have all different colored sugars or salts around the house

 Okay, I think you brought me the wrong tart because some of it's missing.

 But I'm not going to feel better with a quarter of my tart missing.

 This is not effective on this during this time of the month if I don't have a whole

 That means that I am going to have to go into that kitchen and go in the stove and turn

 I am going to show you how to make the most decadent, delicious, out of this world chocolate

 All you need is four ounces of Philadelphia cream cheese that you have brought to room

 temperature and just put it into a saucepan and kind of let it melt in there.

 Take your whisk and just kind of break it up even though we already cut it up.

 And then you want to take three quarters of a cup of heavy cream that you're just going

 And then here's the magic ingredient, one of the magic ingredients aside from the Philadelphia

 It totally brings out the flavor of the chocolate and just gives it that nice, delicious mocha

 I'm going to put in three quarters of a tablespoon of instant espresso powder and just mix it

 Bring that to just under a boil and then we're going to pour it over our chocolate chips.

 The bubbles are coming up around the edges but the whole thing's not boiling yet and

 We're going to come over here and I'm going to pour it into a bowl of semi-sweet chocolate

 Just dump a whole bag in there and just pour it over there and let it be for about five

 That's going to melt the chocolate chips and when that's done, we're going to stir it up

 And it just so happens that some nice little elves already made my pie shell for me.

 You can certainly make it yourself but this was in the grocery store and it was calling

 But just so it doesn't scream, I didn't make this pie shell myself, I'm going to take this

 This has been sitting here for five minutes and the heavy cream and the cream cheese just

 So all you do is just stir it up, whisk it up with a whisk and you're making a nice ganache

 Mix it up until it's nice and smooth and there's no more lumps in it.

 And then all you do is pour it in and you have an instant delicious dessert.

 However, we still need to let it set up so we're going to put it in the freezer for about

 Normally you could make this a couple days in advance and just put it in the refrigerator

 to let it set but since we have to have this done in under an hour, we are going to put

 You don't need to cut it into 8 pieces because it's so rich and it's so evil and it's so

 There is nothing wrong with eating it right here on this cutting board.

 I should probably just rename it to like medicine pie or something.

 I'm Leslie Greene, the hungry housewife here in Tampa, Florida.

 There's nothing better than a good dip and that's where Velveeta comes in.

 Today I'm going to bring you a Velveeta dip with chorizo and beer.

 It's really simple to make, very budget friendly and very tasty.

 First we're going to take our chorizo and we're going to start frying it.

 You just need about a fourth of a pound of chorizo for the dip.

 So you're just going to squeeze some out and we're going to start frying that.

 Now while we get this going and everything, we are going to cut up our Velveeta.

 Alright so we're going to use some Velveeta here and we need about 16 ounces.

 So we're going to cut this up in cubes to melt, to make sure it melts a little bit better.

 When we're doing all this, just make sure to keep an eye on your chorizo because it

 will only need, the chorizo only needs to cook about 5 minutes.

 And if you can't find beef chorizo, pork chorizo is okay, but beef is probably better for this

 And then we're going to start microwaving this while our chorizo is cooking.

 I'm going to put it on for, I'm just going to do 3 minutes to get it started and I'll

 Okay, so we're going to cook the chorizo for about 5 minutes like I said before.

 We, this is something that we use for breakfast all the time, but it's really going to be

 While that's draining a little bit, I'm going to come over here and check our cheese and beer.

 Alright, we just need the cheese to be melted and we'll put it all together.

 This might be really good on a chili dog or something like that.

 you just need to chop up some green onions like I did right here ahead of time

 A dynamic climbing warm up you can perform in less than 10 minutes.

 Flag, reach one arm up in the air as the opposite leg reaches to form a straight line.

 Reverse outside flag, reach one arm in the air as the same side leg reaches to your opposite

 Spider man, place your elbows on the inside of your knee and press outwards as you rotate

 To increase the stretch, rotate your torso side to side while leveraging from your knees.

 Perform a drop knee by dropping your knee down, reaching the same side hand overhead.

 Lunge one leg out, bend the knee and rotate the opposite arm across your body as your

 Lunge out as you reach that arm across your body, the opposite arm goes overhead.

 High step, pull one knee up into your chest as far as you can and let it down.

 Pull the opposite knee up as much as you can deep into your chest.

 Bring your arms up into the air, open your palms and pull down.

 Prayer pose at your chest, arms up into the air, open the palms and pull down.

 Begin with your arm open away from your body, bring it all the way back and cross your body

 Bring arms overhead, tap your shoulder blades, feeling a stretch in your triceps.

 Bring the arms back down to feel a stretch in the biceps and the wrists.

 Up overhead, tapping the shoulder blades and then reach down to feel a stretch in the biceps.

 Alternate between flexing the elbow and wrist and extending the elbow and wrist.

 Perform in sequences such as the maneuvers on your climbing route or project.

 If you're statically stretching your fingers, you're doing a lot of harm.

 Glide in this manner and ensure safe pulleys and excellent climbing.

 Hey guys, this is Chris and I'm going to be showing you guys how to make a LEGO Lifeboat.

 Then, get these boat thingies and put the 2x6 plate on the bottom.

 Now, what you're going to do, I made a bandaid, papered it, and added it.

 Okay, and you guys can subscribe me, I think in the top or the bottom.

 We start off with the first, then second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth,

 So this is how we write them using numbers and this is how we write them using words.

 Let's just look at these animals here and we're going to put the ordinal numbers on

 If we start here, we would go first, second, third, fourth, fifth.

 Get permanent marker off of Lego figures and plastic and just like regular building blocks and stuff

 Just take your dark colored expo marker color all over the permanent marker

 I think that you can just go ahead and put it in water, and it should wash right off

Just do that and you'll never have to worry about permanent marker on Legos again and

 Please comment like and subscribe and don't forget to favorite.

 So I've opened this thing up and taken a look at it and found the problem to be this piece of material

 So we're going to open this up and get the fuser part out that we need to get.

 So the easy way to pull that out is to just go on this side, give it a little stretch.

 And now we're going to remove this piece just by, it's got a compression clamp.

 So I'm just going to give it a little squeeze off to the side on one side.

 To make this a little easier, I'm going to remove this piece here.

 Okay, in order to remove this piece, we need to remove this screw right there.

 Then we will need to unplug this wire and pull the wire out of this routing right here.

 This plate is not connected to this wire, but the wire does feed through a slot up here.

 And we need to take out these wires that are also clipping it there.

 So we're just going to angle those a little bit and the piece comes right on off.

 So I've still got one more screw I've got to take out right there.

 The only thing that's still going to give us a little bit of trouble is these yellow wires are stuck in a clip over here in the corner.

 Probably need a little tool there to pop that open and get those wires out.

 Now the fuser has different parts in it that might need to be replaced sometimes.

 So in order to get in here, first I'm going to remove this screw.

 So the piece that I'm replacing is going to be this piece right here.

 So the piece that I'm replacing is going to be this piece right here inside this fuser.

 So I'll dig down a little deeper and see if I can get that part number.

 So once you get that up there, it tilts back and it actually hooks down.

 These are all pieces I've pulled out of the inside of this print device.

 Your first assembly will be the strong back using the short bolts provided.

 and we'll begin with a stretcher support bracket as shown here.

Lift the arm, bring the stretcher into place, fit the dowel into

 the hole provided, and fasten with the long bolt and barrel nut, but leave the connection

 indicates that that's the front stretcher, so it should be assembled at the front as shown.

 Doing the same thing on the other side, lift the arm, place the stretcher into position,

 joints should be left open and loose, about a quarter inch all around all four joints.

 As you can see here, the arms and the stretchers are assembled.

 Okay, you're looking at the snapper, and this is how things should look.

 into position, fitting the rollers over the head of the snapper like that.

The rollers fit over the head of the snapper, and the upper roller will

 will give you some resistance as you bring the seat deck over it.

Use the pouch under the seat deck to store your assembly instructions

 Today we're going to do an install video for the side skirt extensions for the Fiat Abarth.

 So far we've test fitted these on the Abarth only, so we're not 100% sure if this installation

 We will have a video up for that if they are different soon enough.

 If you look underneath the side skirt on the inside, see these little screws here?

 Basically you're removing the first four on the rear of the car.

 Then the side skirt extension is going to come pre-drilled with spacers and new hardware.

 It's as simple as replacing the hardware that was already there with the spacers.

 Then in the back, there is going to be a bracket that attaches to the back of the side skirt

 This is just a prototype, so this bracket is not exactly what you guys are going to

 They're going to be a little bit different, a little bit more robust with an L bracket

 It'll attach up here to your side skirt with a self-tapping screw.

 Then in the bottom, with a little bolt with a nylock nut, as well as rubber washers on

 the bolt itself just to eliminate any vibration that might happen against the metal to the

 That way you don't get any cracking or any damage done to the carbon fiber itself.

 We're not going to put it on 100% just because it's on the lift right now, so it's a little

 As you can see, it is going to have a cutout for giving you access to your jacking point,

 It's just a matter of putting the two bolts here, the self-tapper over here with the bracket,

 Just go ahead and get those tight, and that's all there really is to it.

 If you guys have any questions or concerns, feel free to give us a call at 562-906-0080

 Ladies and gentlemen, boys and girls, it's your old pal Chuck and I am back with another

 review, taking a look at the final wave of Transformers Age of Extinction power battlers.

 Now this is interesting that this is the third Galvatron figure in the Age of Extinction

 I mean, I don't know if Stinger really counts or because he was made by the humans and then

 in lockdown he's like this independent agent, but I mean, that's open for debate.

 So yeah, so as you can see, Galvatron has a very nice robot mode.

 In fact, I think this is the most articulated power battler we've had thus far.

 Unfortunately, that's a transformation joint and there's a slot here and a tab here that

 And what that gimmick is, is that a cannon comes spinning out of its chest.

 Make sure you grab this section where my fingers are and you will pull it back and it will

 Be very careful because the flap here that becomes the front of the cab in truck mode,

 There's a great, this is basically a great shade of gunmetal gray with little black accents

 And of course, you do have that great visage of Galvatron right there.

 Next step, what you want to do is bring this flap over and around, just like so.

 There's a tab right here and a slot right there that you want to have it kind of fastened

 into and you do have to play with it a little to get it to work.

 Next, what you want to do is go ahead and bring the arms down and then flip around these

 And in doing so, you want to bend the arms ever so slightly, bring them up like this.

 Go ahead and then proceed to tab the forearms together, like so.

 There's a tab on each side here, as well as two slots here and two tabs on the forearm,

 Usually you have to fiddle around because things don't line up properly.

 Next what you want to do is fold the lower legs back, unhooking them from the knees.

 If you don't already have that done due to having a knee bend, rotate it all the way

 And next what you want to do is take these little bits that were heel spurs and slide

 them up into position on both sides, locking the legs in place.

 And if it looks like it's a tight fit, it is a tight fit, but it does give you a very

 Just imagine this with a new head in red and blue for like a Classics Optimus Prime,

 I think that would work great, but I doubt that's going to be used.

 When I reviewed the one-step changer of Galvatron, I said that was the best one-step changer

 It's really close, but that Wave 1 Hound was really fun with that quick-draw gimmick.

 I will say, I think I like this version of Galvatron a little bit more over the one-step

 changer, and I think it might even be just a little bit better than the Voyager, because

 you have more of a movie-accurate color scheme and it's like a lot less kibble on the back.

 In a lot of photos, they've been showing it with like a whole bunch more hanging off the

 The kind that you have to press down and hurt your fingers and you can't make them and you

You can use four finger chords for vamping, but you don't have to

A matter of fact, you're not supposed to press them down and they're made with three pieces.

 And that makes the other, well you can see one makes the G chord and one makes the D chord.

 So anyway, when you pop those on to the other two strings, you get this.

 If you want to chase everybody away out of a jam, you can use this kind of rhythm.

 Hi Navy, I'm playing Sweet Hour of Prayer, page 142, and showing a difference between

 So with the piano you can play the first phrase of the song like this with a sustain pedal.

 The thumb takes over and the third finger takes over the pinky.

 The thumb, the third finger of my pinky, see, takes over for the third finger.

 So there's this movement, always the sliding of a finger taking over for another finger.

 I have to move my hand position so I have to move the thumb and the third finger to

 take the place of the third and the pinky finger where they land so that I'm ready to

So Noah over here, who is my faithful assistant, is fairly good about this.

Make sure you always have an exit that you can get to without going through the

So another thing that sometimes helps is to have a little motivation for the horse to come

This is a Nature Valley Oats and Honey Granola Bar and Noah is crazy about them.

 because it makes the horse actually, it gives him an incentive, it rewards him.

Now one thing to keep in mind with treats is that if there are multiple

 horses in the paddock, so if you've got two or three or five horses out there, if you bring a

So you'll need to be careful that you don't just get mobbed by a

 up to him I would want to make sure I walked all the way around until I could approach him from

And this is because if you remember horses have a blind spot directly behind them.

 So if you walk up to a horse and he doesn't see you coming you might surprise him and that will

And he might accidentally kick you or run away from you because he didn't know

So once you have approached the horse from the front it's often best to actually

So once your horse has come up to you like this, so let's see if I can get him to

Now you'll notice if Noah gets too close I ask him to back away.

And you should always make sure to protect your space when you're working with a

 so the next thing I do is I unbuckle the halter and I just do that by holding the buckle and

Then I take the rope off his neck and what I do is I take all of the extra rope and I put it in my left hand.

 And when I put it in my left hand you'll notice I haven't looped it because if I do and he were to

So now that I've got Noah I place my right hand right below his lead holding onto the lead

 be done by pushing the horse away from you because it's safer to push a horse away from you than to

Now when a horse walks his head should be at your shoulder and this is

If you're here you put yourself in a little bit of danger because

 he's got such a big body and if he steps sideways he'll run into you.

 with his head which is much better than him whacking me with his you know thousand pound body.

 So I'm going to walk around and just kind of show you what it looks like to lead a horse.

 And you'll notice that Noah's leaning his head right on my shoulder.

If a horse continues to walk when you stop you can give a sharp little tap

 and all you do so my hands right below on the lead is I just tug backwards towards his chest

Then I tell him good boy and if I need him to take another step I tug

If he says no you just keep tugging and there he backs up and I tell him good boy.

 I'm here at Tweaseldown and me and Lulu are heading out on cross-country shortly.

 Lulu's all tacked up and I need to get myself ready and I've put on my air vest already

 so I've got my static body protector and I'm going to layer on top my Hit Air Vest.

 So basically the Hit Air Vest is a nice lightweight gilet and I will wear it over the top of this

 and hook myself up to the saddle and if I was unlucky enough to fall off this lanyard

 will pull out and that's what's going to trigger the inflation.

 And when it does inflate all of these poppers are going to come unpopped and this is all

 going to come unpopped so we'll have two airbags down the back, one across the lower

 back, we've got two down each side of the ribcage, down the front of the chest and a

 So inside the air jacket I've got some adjustable straps and these allow the air jacket to extend

 out so if I was wearing lots of clothes in the winter time then I could stretch it right

 out or in the summer time I can tighten it right up and have it nice and snug over my

 body and luckily this jacket inflates outwards so you don't need to worry about the crushing

 So just tighten myself up a little tiny bit more than that, hook myself in.

 Now I have here the lanyard and what happens with this is before I get on Lulu I'm going

 to unplug it and I've got it here like this and I'm going to attach it to the saddle.

 So I take my lanyard and here before I've got on I've got a saddle strap attached to

 the saddle and the saddle strap goes through the stirrup bars and then you put your stirrup

 leathers back on top and you just leave this strap on at all times.

 Now before I go cross country I'm going to take my lanyard, I'm going to loop it through

 this hole here like this and then back through itself and then pull it nice and tight so

 Right so we're all ready, we're all tacked up and good to go, I just need to make sure

 before I get on that I have my saddle strap attached to the saddle and also my lanyard

 Ok and I'm going to take my lanyard and plug myself in like so and I'm good to go.

 Hey guys, it's Ai and today I'm going to be making lipsticks out of crayons and if you

 So the first thing that you will need is a pan, duh some crayons obviously because I'm

 making crayon lipsticks, coconut oil because that moisturizes your lips, a knife or anything

 to stir it up with, some little bowls and I just got these from Walmart, these little

 tin foil bendy ones so I can mix the mixture in and then you're going to need some containers

 So the first thing that you're going to do is pour some water in, so about an inch or

 so so your little mixing bowls can fit in and then you're going to put your heat to

 medium, so I'm going to put mine to 6, that's medium and then you're going to get your container

 and open up your crayons, so obviously I'm going to be using this neon pink kind

 okay then you're going to have a smooth clear and then you are going to take your coconut oil

 moisturizing feeling and it depends how much you're making so I'm going to add about

 okay now you're going to take your coconut oil put it in the water and let it sit there and melt

 and then it depends how much you're making like I said before so I'm going to take a

 little bit of the crayon but I want to make this pretty bright pink

 you make sure it's completely melted I tested this yesterday with the color black but I didn't

 really want to use that but I just tested it and it worked really well but I added too much of the

 crayon so I just add a little bit because if you add the whole crayon if you obviously have a big

 container then that means you have to put like the whole crayon but since I don't

 okay once you're melted this is melted you it's going to look like this but make

 so I'm going to let it melt a little bit more okay let me pour it in carefully

 okay that's a bit hard there we go and then just put it in the fridge

 to about five six minutes um and I might make another one after this is done

 while you're waiting you can color but I have a coloring book so I'm just gonna wait

 so yeah guys this is the finished product um I only made four um so yeah and the first color

 that I made was this vibrant sheer pink and my not vibrant but it looks neon pink but it's actually

 very sheer um then this tealish turquoise one um then this very dark blue one and then this

 little lavender kind of color and then last night I made this black one and black might seem like

 not a good color to wear on your lips but I just made this to test it out and I really like it

 the first color that we have is this purple one um it's kind of like a bright bright violet purple

 and then we have this dark blue and then this teal color that's kind of very very bright teal

 and then we have this neon pink one which is kind of like candy I don't know if you don't know what

 it is that's a lipstick on mac and then we have this black lipstick black crayon lipstick that I

 made yesterday just tested out how it looks and excuse my nails I just it's from the crayon lipstick

 black one that I made yesterday but I couldn't get it off I was rubbing so yeah this is the

 finished product all of these and I really like these colors they're very vibrant yeah and I just

 had this really cute bow that it's like I just found but you don't need to do this is optional

 All tuna comes with this tuna paper, it helps keep the skin nice.

 Alright, we're just going to break this down to a few different cuts I'll show you.

 You know other restaurants will leave that on to save money, we like to cut it off because

 And now when you've got this, this is a nice, right here, going all the way down, that's

 I just want to do a quick second about why I have this and why I'm unboxing this.

 Apple wired keyboard, the one I actually unboxed on this channel, the same channel here.

I really love the keyboard, but for some reason, I just didn't really like

So after I guess having it for a year or so, I just decided I can't take it anymore.

 Windows keyboard, if I use a Dell, a Logitech, a Microsoft keyboard, my accuracy was fine.

 I switched over to the Apple keyboard, for some reason, my accuracy went shot all the way down.

 Maybe because I learned traditionally how to type on a Dell keyboard.

It's actually meant to go hand in hand with the MX Revolution mouse.

Now, this picture right here is actually the charging base because it's a rechargeable

It comes with a base, Bluetooth, so there's no need for a dongle.

 The only thing I'm really losing with the Apple keyboard is the USB ports inside, but that's not

 really a problem because my hub can fit anything and this won't take up the USB port.

 keyboard, the charging base, AC cord, software, and a cleaning cloth.

I actually purchased this, well actually, this keyboard I've actually been always dreaming to get

 retails MSRP and at the Apple store for $180, which is a little bit out of my budget.

 And what's also cool about this keyboard is it actually has a little touchpad here and has a

 I'm not trying to look up the price for you guys on Amazon because that's where I usually use this

It says it's pre-order, but I know this keyboard's been out for a while,

 right now because I was actually sitting outside my house for a little bit.

 There's actually some plastic on it, but I'll remove that later.

 And once again, we have that very classy Design to Move You pamphlet,

 You get the Logitech Control Center, which allows you to customize your keys.

That's my only one concern, but I'm glad I don't have to keep using AA's.

I actually have a problem with my MX Revolution charger where it's kind of

 and you just kind of, I wish my desk had enough room to show this, but kind of just slip it in,

So that's pretty much it, I believe, for all the goodies that come with

Any questions, concerns, suggestions, leave a comment below or send me

 so if you guys want an email instead, just email themacintosh1 at gmail.com.

 Now this is going to be our first dessert and for our first dessert

 Afro-Brazilian stroke Portuguese dessert but also it's so easy, so easy, I'm not

 To make King Gin you need seven egg yolks, 230 grams of sugar, 100 grams of fresh grated coconut, 40 milliliters of milk, a squeeze of lime and some natural yellow food colouring.

We want to make sure that no skins or shell bits get into the mixture.

 Chuck the sugar into the yolks but not actually chuck it, pour it in.

 Grated coconut and the milk, a squeeze of lime and the natural yellow food colouring.

 Now we're going to spoon the King Gin mixture into the ramekins.

 Get a grown-up to pour some hot water into the tray with the ramekins.

 Put them in the oven on a high temperature until the tops are nice and golden.

 The King Gins have been in the fridge a couple of hours now and I'm all ready for bed.

 I'm just going to cut around it, turn it upside down on a plate and shake it until it comes out.

 For detailed recipes and a guide on where to find Brazilian food and drink ingredients, visit www.ukabrazuca.com

 Imagine having a beautiful green maintenance free lawn all year round.

 It comes in six versatile varieties to suit any space, any design and any need.

 Forget about watering, about harmful pesticides, about hard to grow places like slopes, around

 Made in Australia, EnviroGrass is drought proof, pest proof, shade proof, dog proof

 Sketch an outline of the area you want to lay and then measure it up with a tape measure.

 Make a note of the measurements on your sketch and pop into your local Amber store.

 They'll help you to work out your minimum EnviroGrass requirements.

 If you've got an existing lawn, simply remove all the grass and the root zone with a turf

 Prepare larger areas by removing surface tree roots and building debris by using a

 All new or existing synthetic lawns need a treated timber, brick or concrete edge to

 The natural earth should finish at a depth below the edge detail, allowing for synthetic

 Now it's time to compact the subgrade surface with a vibrating compactor or whacker plate.

 On smaller existing areas you can use a steel or water drum roller.

 Remember with EnviroGrass not only do you save water but you can collect it by installing

 Prepare the base with a layer of road base or 5 mil crusher dust to a depth of at least

 Rake it even and water it down then compact it with a compactor or a roller.

 Another great thing about EnviroGrass is that you can now have lush, green grass where

 It's a single colour, medium pile lawn for moderate traffic areas.

 Kaikuyu, also medium pile, is used for moderate traffic areas and comes in dual colour.

 Fescue is a long pile, dual colour lawn with different blade widths to imitate nature.

 If you're after a medium pile, dual colour lawn suitable for high traffic areas, you

 Cooch is a rich, long, premium quality, dual colour pile perfect for heavy traffic.

 With three colour blades and made from triple mix yarn for maximum durability, this deluxe

 The complete EnviroGrass range comes with perforation holes, punched and heat sealed

 during manufacture to provide natural drainage through to the sub-base material.

 Just like real grass, now you're ready to lay your new EnviroGrass lawn.

 Lay out the first roll and trim the coloured edge, the selvedge, with a sharp knife.

 Note, the coloured selvedge is only there to help identify the roll out direction of

 Keep the colour stitch on the same side throughout the project.

 Lay the EnviroGrass out, making sure to overlap the timber or concrete edging so you can trim

 Make sure there are no wrinkles or creases and keep going repeating the process.

 Fold the edges of each join back about 300mm and put seaming tape between each roll.

 Using a 3mm notched trowel, apply a thin coat of adhesive, approximately 300mm wide on the

 When the adhesive becomes tacky, put the edge of the first roll down and then the second

 roll edge, making sure they are lined up and butt onto each other with no gaps.

 Remember to roll the grass out in the same direction wherever possible for the best,

 For timber edges, you can fix it with steel staples to the timber.

 You can use 150mm irrigation pins, decking pins or sleeper nails around the perimeter

 For areas that are sloped or uneven, place the anchors on a 900mm grid.

 Now for the final stage, applying the infill, which works to weigh the grass down and helps

 Infill is made from sand and is easily spread with a fertiliser spreader or a small hopper

 Deck the infill around with a soft bristled broom against the natural direction of the

 So there you have it, a lush lawn you'll never have to water or mow that will look and feel

 So how do you get a fantastic maintenance free lawn that gives you masses of spare time

 Go to www.plastics-car.com for all of your plastic and garden supplies needs!

 To get started, you'll need 2 heaped tablespoons of low-fat, plain Greek-style yogurt, sea

 salt and cracked pepper, 2 small handfuls of mint, 2 pinches of ground cumin, 3 quarters

 of a cup of quinoa, 1 bunch of broccolini, ends trimmed and cut into 3 centimeter lengths.

 1 bunch of asparagus, ends trimmed and cut into 3 centimeter lengths, 1 bulb of baby

 fennel, 1 tablespoon of salted baby capers, rinsed and roughly chopped, 1 small handful

 of dill, finely grated zest and juice of 1 lemon and some extra virgin olive oil for

 Finely chop half the mint, add to the yogurt, sprinkle with a pinch of cumin, a pinch of

 Once you're finished, pop some plastic wrap over the top and put it in the fridge until

 We're going to bring it up to a boil and let it simmer for 15 minutes.

 Plunge the broccolini and the asparagus into the salted boiling water for 1 minute.

 And after 1 minute, drain and refresh under cold running water.

 Strain it from the water and pop it in this bowl and now we're going to put it in the

 To the cooled quinoa, add the broccolini and the asparagus, fennel, capers, some roughly

 chopped dill, the zest of 1 lemon, along with the juice, a pinch of cumin, the beautiful

 fennel fronds, tear in the remaining mint, season with salt, some cracked pepper and

 You can use tongs to mix it together but I prefer to use my hands.

 So this is a super easy salad recipe from my new book, The Chef Gets Healthy.

 Let me know what you think in the comments section and don't forget to hit subscribe.

 For this tutorial you'll need a pair of knitting needles and a ball of yarn.

 Today we are using their Northampton yarn from their Valley Yarns line in the color

 Knit, Purl, Yarn Over, Yarn Over Needle, Slip Stitch, Knit Two Together, Pass Slip Stitch

 This stitch is worked over 7 stitches on a background of reverse stockinette stitch.

 Purl 1, Yarn Over Needle, Slip 1, Knit 1, Pass the Slip Stitch Over, Knit 1, Knit 2

 Yarn Forward, Round the Needle, so all the way around, and Purl 1.

 Purl 1, Knit 1, Yarn Over, Slip 1, Knit 2 together, Pass the Slip Stitch Over, Yarn

Later when you are able to curve the ball it will be easier to curve and shot strong.

 This mistake was that I hit the ball too strong with this part.

 scientists are pretty sure they've discovered how the ancients lit fires.

 Alright, I'm going to let that burn a little bit because it's pine.

 And when it burns down a little bit, I'm going to throw some oak on it.

 It's only been going for about a minute and a half, maybe two minutes.

 But I just wanted to get the bacon on there and get the pan warmed up.

 I'm going to cook a minute and then throw some oak in there so it will last a little longer.

 Just thought I'd give you a close up of that good bacon cooking action.

 Maybe I should have some Barry White music playing in the background.

 Okay, I like to cook my bacon just to the point where the pig stops squealing.

 I'm really afraid to let go of that pan while I'm doing anything to it.

 I'm wearing a glove so just in case this goes I can grab that pan.

 it with a lid on it standing upright and what you end up with is a cylindrical

The ingredients are scrolling as I speak and in the recipe box below so

 right down, dissolve our brown sugar and add our dates and they're going to get

 here we're just going to chop that quite finely and use the whole pieces of the

 got pecans here we're just going to give them a really rough chop.

 to have some texture in this so don't get too serious with this.

 distribute it fairly well between the pieces of cake when they're sliced.

 That's come to a boil and our sugar has dissolved so it's now in with our

 pinch anything up to a teaspoon of cinnamon depending on your taste.

 after about five minutes this is what you should have it's really quite syrupy

 now and set it to one side to cool a little while we grease our tin because

 this properly and that is to use your fingers and just rub the butter, warm

 attention and you can feel with your fingers if you've missed anywhere.

It's great using a wok because it's just like a giant mixing bowl.

 can have trouble flicking it out the sides and you can have a really good go

 ice this, it's typically served either warm or cold with butter spread on it.

 It's a very old-fashioned recipe, my nanny used to make it for me.

 a 170 degrees Celsius oven and you can't test it when it's cooked because

Give it a bit of a tap down, clean off the edge so that it doesn't

 a few minutes and then we just push it out and slice it up and have it with our

 more interesting recipes and ideas just check out our Cheeky Richo channel and

 don't forget to please subscribe and do come back and visit us again soon.

 have so much more to show you and we're uploading lots of videos every week.

Tongue is believed to be one of the strongest muscles in animal body.

So, if the water is starting to boil, we need to put our tongue.

Because, you know, there is a lot of pressure and it's very dangerous.

 Alright everybody, just got finished cleaning up some cast iron.

 Wanted to, while I've got the gloves on, wanted to come out and degrease some of the traps,

 I've got some Duke 1 3 quarter right here and then I've got some Bridger number 3's

 So, just going to do it the same way that I did the cast iron, just spray it with the

 So, that's all I do is just put this in a plastic trash bag, a big, it's like a 30 gallon

 You don't have to be real particular because the oven cleaner kind of foams up and expands.

 So I'll spray in there the best that I can, wrap it up tight and probably spray it off

 So, these things come to the house with a protective coating grease on it and you won't

 Taking the car washes before, use the grease remover, degreaser and wash my truck in the

 I did that with all of these, I just didn't get the rusting that I'm needing.

 And then when I'm done, I'll pull the garden hose out and just rinse them off.

 I can do the garden hose, I'm just going to fill this bucket with warm water, rinse them

 I know I could dip them in vinegar and they would rust a lot quicker.

 And that will probably boil them in what I've got left over in the back.

 And before I check that I thought I'd give you just one close up.

 a bit of turmeric powder, some baking powder or soda, a little bit of ghee and water and

 I'll first combine all the dry ingredients well, just with a spoon.

 that you need to achieve is a thick batter, more like a pancake batter.

So once the batter is well combined, notice that it should be of dropping and pouring

 and allow it to rest for about 24 hours at least so the batter ferments and also develops

 the light sour taste that you get in the Jalebis when you have it outside.

 pre-made the batter that is kept and you will notice that the batter has risen and has got

 a light yellow color because of the turmeric and it's nice and fluffy.

So our next step is to go and fry the Jalebis in batter and also

Once the sugar and water is well dissolved, we need to simmer the sugar

 when it gets soaked, but also adds delicious, rich flavor and taste.

 one string consistency when you touch the syrup and it feels a little sticky, but it

 to keep the sugar syrup on low, very low heat to the side and start frying the Jalebis in

So now I have been preheating my oil for about 10 minutes now and it's warm

And to make the Jalebis, you can either use a ziploc bag or a piping

Most street vendors use a kind of a jug which has a hole down and then they

 go around, but we are at home and we don't have those fancy things.

I'm going to fill in the bag with the fermented batter, the Jalebi

So once you have the batter, cut the tip of the bag or the ziploc bag that you're

 if you've made the hole a little too big, then you'll have a thicker Jalebi.

 made the hole a little thin, then you'll have a thinner Jalebi.

 making the spiral onto the hot oil is a technique that you will learn with practice.

 come in the first instance, it didn't come in the 10th instance for me and over time

 the Jalebi right now as I'm doing, then well that shows that I haven't, it takes time to

 shape but don't worry about shapes when you make homemade Jalebis, even if it comes out

 of shape, the taste of this Jalebi is just as delicious as the ones that you get in the

So go ahead, fry the Jalebis on low to medium heat until it becomes crisp

 and lightly browned and once it is crisp and lightly browned, we will put it into the sugar

 the sugar syrup and allow them to soak in the sugar syrup for about a couple of minutes.

 Turn the Jalebis over, flip them over in the sugar syrup so both sides get coated evenly

Once the Jalebis have soaked well, the Jalebis will be ready to be served

 to give this recipe a try in your kitchen and when you do, don't forget to give your

 I'm from Steinbach, Manitoba and today we're making some peanut butter and chocolate cream

 To start out with, we have one cup of melted semi-sweet chocolate.

 We also have four ounces of softened cream cheese, two tablespoons of sugar, quarter

 cup of peanut butter, we have some vanilla, and I have my whipping cream keeping cool

 To start with, we're going to make little chocolate cups that are going to hold our

 And to do this, we're going to take some of our melted semi-sweet chocolate and just put

 Once you have your chocolate spread in there, you can place your cupcake liner in a mini

 It's going to help it to keep its shape as it cools and solidifies.

 Alright, now that we have our chocolate cups made, the cupcake liner is all filled with

 chocolate, we're going to pop this in the freezer for ten minutes and that will set

 The rest of this chocolate that's left in here, we're going to take it and put it on

 We're going to spread it really thin and make some chocolate curls out of it to top our

 Spread this out nice and thin and even using an offset spatula.

 We'll draw some lines in here for how big we want our curls to be.

 Now we'll set this aside until the chocolate is no longer shiny.

 Once it gets dull on top, we will use our spatula and we'll make little chocolate curls.

 While our chocolate is setting up in the muffin cups, we're going to take and whip half a cup

 I'm going to do this on my own, but once it gets just about set, I'm going to add the

 We're not going to sweeten it because there's going to be sugar and peanut butter mixed

 with our cream cheese and we're going to be mixing our whipped cream with our cream cheese.

 About half a cup of whipping cream makes about one cup of whipped cream.

 What we're going to do is take four ounces of cream cheese that's been softened.

 We're going to add two tablespoons of sugar and a quarter cup of smooth peanut butter.

 And we're going to get up the mixer again and we're just going to mix this all until

 So now I have my peanut butter cream cheese mixture nice and smooth.

 We're going to add half of it first just to lighten it up so we don't accidentally take

 Now we have a nice light peanut butter cream cheese and whipped cream mix here that we're

 And that's how we're going to be putting our filling into our chocolate cupcake liners.

 I'm going to put this in the fridge until I'm ready to use it just to make sure that

 all of my chocolate is set and that it won't melt quite as easily in my hands.

 After about 15 minutes in the freezer, I'm going to take them out of the freezer one

 time just so that they still stay cool in there while I work with them.

 That's where we're going to be piping our peanut butter filling into.

 I'm just going to put that in a bag just so it's easier to get the filling in.

 And then I'm going to take my chocolate cupcake liner and I'm going to pipe it into my cupcake liner.

 I'm going to put my peanut butter, cream cheese, whipped cream mixture in there.

 I'm going to pipe these little chocolate cups full and then top them to make them look like cupcakes.

 Pick out a few of your favorite chocolate curls and just stick them in there.

 There you have it, our chocolate and peanut butter cheesecake no-bake cupcakes.

 They are delicious, they are cute, and they are fully edible and ready in one hour.

 Hello everyone and the first thing you want to do when starting any kind of meal or cooking or whatever

 So here are the ingredients that you will need and materials materials are two forks a knife and a cutting board and a plate obviously

 Eggs two eggs two to three depending on how much you want and ham for the exact measurement

 You're gonna want to have um for each for every two eggs you want

 You want so just keep that same ratio if you have two eggs you want to have two slices of ham

 Okay, so you're gonna start by taking one slice of ham another two slices.

 Never try to cut this up with your hand and just put them on the pan

 Once you cut it up like this, you can just do it with your hand.

 Usually when you're cooking eggs, you put a piece of butter on there

 And you're gonna take your ham from your cut board and just ease it on there

 It's gonna look freaking horrible now but it's gonna taste yummy later

 You can add butter before you put the eggs in but I guarantee you

 The eggs are gonna stick to the pan anyway so there's really no use

 Once they're fluffy you can basically take them out at this state

In this video I want to show you one of probably the most used herbs of all, which is the basil herb.

 So firstly, the packaging itself, it comes in this paper grease proof bag.

 And then inside of that you get a zip lock waterproof bag containing the seeds.

 Looking at the packaging then, it has two useful bits here on it.

 Firstly, at the very bottom is a web link to the sowing instructions and aftercare of the product.

 At the bottom it has the sowing instructions link, which will link you to the website and will explain the whole process from sowing seeds to aftercare.

 And at the top corner here is a scannable barcode which allows you to, with an iPhone, scan the barcode and log directly onto the website,

 providing all the information you need on how to grow and care for your basil plants.

 So we will start that process today in explaining how exactly to sow the seeds.

 So basil seeds are best started off in seed trays like this here and will then be transplanted on.

 So we have here a seed tray which we already have half sown with another crop and we're just going to sow these remaining 12 cells here with basil.

 Now the thing about basil is it can be a difficult plant to grow but it really is good in that it has a fair amount of uses in terms of using it in soups

 and you can put it in a lot of different dishes, you can make pesto out of it.

 So it's probably one of the most used herbs of all and a lot of people like to keep them indoors in their kitchen.

 So starting off the process, what we would do then is we would just open up our packet here and just take a look at the seeds themselves.

 So that's the seeds there, ok so they're small enough and again without being too precise we're just going to fill, maybe put three in each of these trays.

 What we have in this soil mix is one part compost or potting compost and one part perlite and that's the ideal mix for the likes of basil providing nutrients for about 6-8 weeks and sufficient water and drainage over that time.

 So I have in my fingers here about 4 seeds so I'm just going to try and scatter roughly 3 perlite here and then continue on filling all the trays here.

 I don't know if you can see them going in because they're quite small.

 Ok, so that's in and then the next thing you want to do is just give it a very light covering of compost again.

 So we have here, this is our compost mix and you can see it's got small little bits of organic material in it which is just something that will over the course of time break down and bulge up the compost really.

 So it's useful but again if you have a potting compost which is just 100% compost that would be more suited to growing seeds.

 Again after you've added a small fine layer of compost to the surface you just want to press it in lightly because seeds require a little bit of contact, a good contact between the seed itself and the compost.

 So we have here a pressure sprayer which is quite useful for watering your compost.

 It doesn't pour out so fast that it's going to wash all your seeds away but it gives a nice spread on the water forcing a good bit of water out at one time.

 So really the key then is to keep your seeds moist and also if you are going to do this then notice that the outside trays are always the ones that get the least amount of water so try and pay extra attention to watering them.

 It gets a good soaking in and again compost requires a good soaking the first time you water it.

 It could dry out quite fast depending on the temperatures inside so you want to keep an eye on it, check it twice a week, see if it needs an extra bit of water.

 Again whenever you are doing anything like this it's always useful to label up what you've done.

 So I'll just quickly write down basil and then the date that we sowed.

 And then we'll just place it this side of our seed tray so we know this side is basil and this side is asparagus.

 Again getting a propagation lid which we have here, this one fits perfectly over the 24c seed tray.

 And the idea of the propagation lid is to, you know when sunlight hits it, it will keep the heat in, heating up the air and more importantly heating up the soil below which will speed up germination.

 After that allow the seedlings to grow up maybe just to half the height of this seed tray.

 You'll then want to transplant your seedlings onward into what we have here is 9cm pots.

 The reason for that is after 6 weeks the seedlings will need fresh compost with more nutrients in it.

 Otherwise they'll stunt and they won't grow as quickly as you would have liked.

 So as I said 4-6 weeks after germination transplant into your 9cm pots.

 And then once your seedlings have reached about 10-15cm in height, transplant them again into this 1-2 litre pot like this.

 And effectively that's the size of pot that you'll keep your basil in.

 Keep it in a window inside in a bright location and you should be able to harvest your crop within a year.

 But again if you're going to harvest your basil always try to give it enough time to develop a good root system and enough foliage before you start picking away at the crop.

 So in about 6-8 weeks time we'll be back here transplanting them on into the pots.

 This puree can go for anything that calls for canned pumpkin in your recipe.

 I have made tons and tons of pumpkin dishes and I just use the pumpkin I have around.

 Or you can use butternut squash or all kinds of different pumpkins and squashes.

 I put foil on it because it's going to make it easier to clean later.

 Let this cool first so you don't burn yourself because what you need to do is peel the skin

 The car pumpkins on your doorstep make darn good pies so don't let them go to waste.

 This pumpkin looks like it's going to be enough for about three pies so I'm going to save

 So after it cooks, you're going to see a lot of water come out and that's good.

 If you have some spots of your pumpkin that aren't as tender, like right here, for some

 You can do it with a masher if that's what you have, but it goes faster for me in the

 The tip is if you do this when the pumpkin is really hot, you're able to get a really

 I've done it with cold pumpkin leftover and it's just not the same.

 I just feel so good about making porch pumpkin pie because I don't have to waste my pumpkin

 So for that 5 pound pumpkin, you get 3 1⁄2 cups of pumpkin puree.

 You know, subscribe to my channel, let's keep cooking together.

 you put something down so when you drop a screw it won't bounce off.

 everything is unplugged and loosen up all the screws on the bottoms of this bottom plate right

And if you do this whole bottom landing gear will come right out.

 the bearings but the whole thing will just pull right up out of there and we're going to change

So while I do all that I'm going to go ahead and stop the camera.

 to keep little magnets around and I just kind of stick all my screws to the magnets.

 But I'm going to go ahead and remove all of these and see how this

 side this one this one and this one and then we'll take the whole bottom of the landing gear off.

 and as you see the landing gear comes right off the whole entire thing.

 You have to be careful because you have that one wire that goes to the main board.

 You do got a lot of wires here so I guess I should take the landing gear off.

I don't know if you can see that very good but we're going to take that screw

 going to loosen all these bolts here on the top and spread this and so this comes out of here.

 We'll take the screw off the bottom and the whole assembly will pull out.

 take all these things off but this isn't my helicopter and it's got some modifications

 the way up on the bottom of the gear and so I can pull the head out.

 this top of the helicopter and I'm going to grab it by here on this plate and just kind of wiggle it

 It takes a little working if you don't want to take the whole thing apart.

If you look in the bottom of the helicopter there's a small bearing right

 problems were that happened with this helicopter here is that when these little

 uh arms come off here this is my friend's helicopter he put them back on in the wrong place.

 When he put them back on in the wrong place it just kind of ate the whole thing up.

 So I'm going to wait to put these on there because it all has to be set up

It was a heck of an adventure so just make sure when you ever do this because nobody

 The long ones go to the farthest post away from the screw on these.

 problems with this helicopter and then here on the swass plate it has two long ones and two short

You have to make sure that you put them on the long ones because the short ones will not fly

I don't know what they're there for but there it is all back together.

 when you put it do it uh look it tighten all your screws make sure everything's tightened up.

 noticed inside that the power wire was going against the gear on the motor so I moved that.

 Hey guys, today is the night of Thanksgiving in United States and we're

 going to prepare or make the baked salmon, one of my favorites.

Salmon fish, cheese, mayo, black pepper, garlic powder, butter, and

We're going to use this butter to put on the tray so the salmon won't stick when we cook it.

 We're going to combine the cheese, mayo, and squeeze some lemon.

 And then we're going to add some garlic powder and black pepper.

 This will be the bottom or the bottom of the salmon that we're going to bake.

 And then we're going to cut the salmon so it will fit on the tray.

 And then we're going to cut the salmon so it will fit on the aluminum tray.

 And then, same ingredients, mix the cheese, mayo, lemon, garlic powder, and black pepper.

 We're not going to put the tray in the oven unless we reach the temperature of 450 degrees.

 And then, after another probably 30 minutes, the baking is done.

 Hi guys welcome to my channel so today I'm gonna show you how to cook momo

 which is also known as dumpling this dish is very popular in my country Nepal

 and this is my favorite dish it's so yummy and I'm very sure that you guys

 will definitely love this recipe if you want to learn how to cook this then

 please keep on watching so here are the ingredients you will need to make momo

 okay let's start with our filling all we have to do is put all the ingredients in

 okay let's fold our momo now I have already uploaded a video on how to fold the momo in

 different ways if you guys are interested I will put the link in this video for you

 now place the momo in a steamer rack like so and close the lid and let it cook for 15 to 20

 minutes after 20 minutes immediately take off the momo from the steamer and enjoy it with hot

 and spicy chutney which goes well with this momo I have uploaded a video for that recipe

 definitely go ahead and check that out and enjoy your momo have a good day and see you guys soon

 Hi, this is Chef Rok from RokkoRecipes.com and today we're going to be making stir fried Asian noodles.

 Mostly I make this recipe or fried rice recipe when I make Asian food.

 This recipe is so easy and you can make it in any time if you don't have time, because you can make it in under 15 minutes.

 Did you know you can also check this recipe and other YouTube recipes on your iPad?

 Well sure, I made an iPad app just for that and it's called Rokko, the only YouTube cookbook app out there.

 For example, if you want to find YouTube recipes based on diet you run, just select diet section and preferred diet.

 Rokko will then automatically find YouTube recipes which you can prepare for your diet.

 You can search between low calorie, low fat or even egg or dairy free diet and even more, the choice is yours.

 By the way, you can also check the handy list of ingredients for YouTube recipes in Rokko app, so you don't need to browse the video for them.

 three tablespoons of cooking oil, three third teaspoons of turmeric,

 two tablespoons of sesame oil, one tablespoon of rice wine vinegar,

 one tablespoon of chili sauce and half a cup of water for softening the noodles.

 Put them in cold or lukewarm water for about 40 minutes or until they soften.

 These noodles were soaking for 40 minutes and you can clearly see the difference.

 Before you start with Asian wok dishes, heat your wok or pan extremely,

 because immediately when you put something in the pan, it will cool a bit.

 And if you don't heat it up enough, the ingredients will start to cook and not fry.

 So first add in the cooking oil and when it's hot enough, add in cubed chicken breast.

 Mix everything thoroughly for about a minute and then add around half a cup of water.

 Soy and oyster sauce are very salty, so there's no need to add in more salt,

 but if you want, you can add it when frying the meat and veggies.

 We also need to spice up the dish with some chili sauce, so add in about one tablespoon of chili sauce.

 You could also use spring onions, it would be maybe even better,

 Fry for just one more minute so the eggs get cooked and, well, you're done.

 They still need to have that crunch to them, so work fast and you'll get the right results.

 If you like my videos, don't forget to subscribe and check out Roko iPad app in iTunes App Store.

 glycerin, jojoba oil, coconut oil, castor oil, cocoa butter, sweet almond oil, aloe

 vera gel, any essential oil and I have lemon and any type of leave-in conditioner or you

 essential oils, I'm just kind of basing it off just looking at it.

 And then I'm just gonna use a little bit of my keratin and green tea reconstructor.

 And then I'm just gonna use just a little bit of my leave-in conditioner.

 So I just finished blending it and it's a very light like a mousse.

 Angel Baby and it's pretty easy all the keys that you'll be using is it's C it's A minor D minor

 and G so we see it's on the first fret second string second fret fourth string and right here

 and just this one just lower on your second fret on the third string and then lower the

 first one to the second to the second I mean let me get it first one first fret first string

 second finger on your third string on the second fret and then your third finger on the second

 string on the third fret and then lastly it's G first finger on the second fret fifth string

 this one on third string sixth string this one on the first one so it goes I'll play it really

 fast and then I'll show you guys there's two ways or there's a lot of ways everybody plays it there's

 two ways I play it like this and then other people play it like slowly different it's like

 and if you have a pick it sounds a little bit different I'll show you guys also

 so on your first string I'll put the camera a little back for you guys to watch

 so you can see how I get it right here and how I play it right here I mostly like it more with

 the finger just like so I'm going to C first and go like people sometimes to play like just

 from the right here the string go I don't like it I rather just play it a little faster and

 It looks like a simple shot, but it's actually a pretty tough shot to do.

 Load completely, you need a complete turn, you need to weight your back foot.

 You're going to transfer all of that into the ball because you have to swing the racket

 You have to overcome the speed of the ball and the spin from your opponent.

 Imagine someone trying to push you over and you bend your knees.

 You need a complete turn in your shoulders, compression, weight in your back foot.

 Hips and shoulders are in line and I bend my knees to stabilize my body.

 As you move into the ball, swing through the racket, accelerate your racket through the

 Unload, my knees are no longer bent, I have weight on the front foot.

 Key is to accelerate your racket head in a controlled swing as you transfer power to

 Today I'm gonna show you how to make your own homemade baby food.

 Chopped carrot, chopped potato, green beans, 100 grams chicken, and I'll be needing a 1

I actually had, um, I tend to, you know, of course, like most of us, we get

 a lot of the times if it's a charity event, a lot of times I'll charge a very, very low

 discount, kind of cover my supplies, my time, my gas, and that.

 I usually do for a charity auction is I pass out certificates for a balloon delivery.

 really do the birthday party thing because my schedule is so busy.

 get a certificate and, you know, call you and go, alright, we need you now.

 just basically hand out a gift certificate for a balloon delivery.

One of them I had a few weeks ago was a boy who wanted trucks and

So flower basket I didn't think was going to work so well for a three, four

 year old boy who's into dump trucks, doesn't want a basket of flowers.

And then I actually came up with a pickup truck that could be used for line

 got to kind of show you the very, very simple pickup truck, which also could be used as

 what we're going to do is I blow up a balloon, about four fingers uninflated, four, five,

So basically I take the first bubble, I twist off about a fourth

 finger bubble, pull that over, give that a little squeeze, take that, wrap that around

 I actually tend to really, really over squeeze it, get a lot of the air out and then do the

 So now I have an ear twist and then I basically the teddy bear head, the side of the teddy

 bear head, an ear, the top of the teddy bear, another ear, and the side of the teddy bear

So very similar to like, almost like a dog with a snout could be used for.

 And then what I do on the rest of the one is I kind of size it up and I just do another

 All right, I got to find my soft one, make sure that's on the bottom.

 I used to use the B bodies, the black B bodies for the tires, but it looks better with the

So you take that one, you want two of those, because of course you need four tires.

 also noticed that it's really nice to do is take a B body, blow it up about almost the same amount,

 bring that to the other side, pull it, and then wrap that around.

 that just gives you the effect of, it actually looks like a bed of a truck.

 work because it's only one 260, two five inch rounds, a B body if you want to, and a face if

 took a 160 and went around here to make it a little bit higher and that became my dump truck.

 With little boutiques popping up everywhere nowadays, it's hard not to be tempted to buy

 Unfortunately, looks like I have reached my shopping budget this week.

 So let's take the inspiration and head back to the house for a DIY project.

 Living on the beach, I have always been drawn to flowy dresses and anything comfortable.

 Free People is one of my favorite brands, so let's see if we can recreate one of their

 This is a skirt I haven't worn in a long time, so let's transform it to a Free People inspired

 I have already pulled the skirt on above my chest and put pins where I want to create

 Next thing you want to do is spin it around and cut out our neckline.

 Let's fold the skirt in half and proceed to cut out our armholes.

 Our final step is to turn the dress inside out and sew the shoulders closed.

 Until next time, stay fashion fabulous exclusively at Runway Denmaiwe.

 Simple and easy installation by OneTouch Conjugation Design and ABF Function.

 This is a new bracket for WV-CW500 and WV-NW500 camera series designed for simple and easy

 This is a comparison of an installation time between Panasonic's WV-NW502 and a conventional

 In this video, I'm going to try to explain to you about the differences between the American

 The dances are the same, waltz, tango, foxtrot, Viennese waltz, and a quick step.

 In the International style of dancing, once we make our dance position, we're going to

 There may be times where we're both stepping forward, what we call this promenade dance

 position, or times even when we're both stepping backwards, we call this fall away dance position,

 or just a regular closed dance position as we were to begin with.

 If I were dancing the waltz for the entire song, every step I take is going to be in

 one of these holds where I'm touching the lady with my left hand as well as my right

 Both of her hands are staying in contact with partner, as well as light body contact.

 In the American style of dancing, our dance position is free to be however we want it

 We will have all the ones that we had in International style, promenade, the fall away, our closed

 There are others as well, but right now we'll just focus on these.

 We have the freedom to say, do underarm turns, where I can turn the lady this way, we've

 There's turns that might spin us around and put us into a position where we're side by

 We might move all the way around, open up, and not even be touching each other at all.

 This is all brought about by some of the controversy from Dancing with the Stars, where I think

 it was week six, in week six, Rick did a tango and Kurt did a tango.

 Kurt was supposed to be dancing the International style tango, so he should have remained in

 this position from the time the song began to the time it finished.

 There is a third form of tango, which is the Argentine tango, which is even more different

 because we're going to dance in a position very closed and close like this.

 They all still have the same ideas of being very dramatic, passionate dances, but very

 For all the International ballroom dances, we will always remain in this dance position.

 If we open up and do something like this, we're no longer dancing the same or the correct

 For the American style of dancing, we have the freedom to do steps where we might turn

 around or open up like this and come back into dance position together.

 I hope this answers your question about the differences in the American style of dancing

 Thanks for visiting LearnToDance.com and I hope you're having a good time learning how

 And tonight we're going to have chicken roe tail casserole and it's a very simple casserole

 There's not a lot of ingredients and it's very delicious to make.

 Okay guys, so this is what you'll need is some grilled chicken breast or some grilled

 One can of roe tail, you'll need some spaghetti pasta, sorry my son's getting in the cabinet.

 One block of Velveeta cheese and you'll need a 9 by 13 casserole dish.

 Okay, so what you need to do is boil your chicken until it is done and then cook your

 Okay, so what I'm going to do now while my chicken is cooking and my noodles are cooking,

 I'm going to go ahead and cube the Velveeta cheese and I'm going to use the whole block.

 It makes it really cheesy and at first when it comes out of the oven it seems like it's

 way too much but when it cools down it thickens up a little bit and it makes it really yummy.

 So that's what we're going to do until the chicken gets done and then we'll show you

 Okay guys, so what I've done is after the noodles got done I drained the noodles and

 then when the chicken got done I did drain the chicken and let it sit over to the side

 So then I put the whole box in there and boiled it of the noodles and I did not need that

 So I put the spaghetti noodles at the bottom and then I chopped up the Velveeta cheese

 Went ahead and put that into the dish and then the can of Rotel and then when the chicken

 And what you're going to do is mix all this together real well and then put it in a preheated

 You do not have to cover it and bake it until it's nice and bubbly.

 You want to mix it up where the Rotel and cheese and chicken is all in through the noodles

 And I just kind of spread it out just a little bit and this is what it looks like.

 So now I'm going to stick it in the oven for maybe about 15 minutes depending on how fast

 Just the main point of baking it is just to get the cheese real well melted in with the

 Today I'm going to show you three exercises primarily for the left hand that were inspired

 by the book Pumping Nylon that will make a great addition to your daily warm up and your

 The first variation I came up with is based on the left hand finger walking.

 The main difference here is that instead of staying on one fret, we're actually going

 to zigzag between two different frets with each individual finger all the way up the

 Whenever you're practicing hammer-ons and pull-offs, it's a good idea to practice in

 So this is a three note pattern based on the D major scale that takes place entirely on

 It's a fixed finger exercise where you plant one finger on the G string and you play it

 chromatically with the other three fingers through all the strings.

 When you're planting the middle and ring finger, things can get pretty tricky.

 Hey what's going on guys C Coronado here and we're going to do our next video.

 Just basically we're going to cut the potatoes, we're going to add a little salt, a little

 pepper, garlic powder, paprika, put a little oil on it and then throw it in the oven.

 So first we're going to start with setting the temperature on the oven to 450 degrees.

 Once your potatoes are peeled we are going to cut them into just a smaller strip.

 You want them kind of uniform just so that they cook evenly and you don't have to worry

 Once all your potatoes are cut you can throw them right into a bowl and we're going to

 And then we're going to add in our salt, some pepper, garlic powder, paprika, paprika,

 Once they're all on the sheet pans and in one layer, you can throw them right into the

 You can set the timer for 20 minutes and occasionally take a look at them and toss them around a

 Alright so the 20 minutes is up so I'm just going to check real quick.

 They look okay but they're not crispy enough so I'm going to throw them back in for probably

 They're going to be still a little bit mushy but they're cooked fully through so we're

 In this framing tutorial, we're going to go over how to hinge mount your photo.

 To do this, you'll need your photo, a mat, some acid free tape, and of course a frame

 When you're opening the wrapper for the mat, you want to be careful not to have the adhesive

 I prefer to open the wrapper and stick the adhesive side to the table.

 That ensures that the adhesive won't damage the mat while you're pulling it out of the

 The mat should slightly overlap the edges so that the image doesn't fall through the

 Get a piece of tape that's about one third to one half the width of your photo.

 Stick it to the top of your photo so that half of the tape's adhesive is on the photo

 Once you've positioned it correctly, you can set the mat onto the exposed tape and press

 Press down firmly so that the tape sticks to the back of the mat.

 That will cause your photo to become wavy over time due to expansion and contraction.

 Okay guys, so today I'm going to be doing a Valentine's Day inspired look.

 I did a collab along with my girl Morgan over at the channel Butter Ripple.

 Today we're doing a Valentine's Day makeup and I am so excited.

 So to get started I'm going to prime my eye and then go in the crease of my eye with my

 I actually like to use bronzer because it just creates a really nice crease for me.

 And then I like to go in with the color Gangsta from the Too Faced Pretty Rebel palette.

 And then on the outer corners I'm going to go in with the color Charming from the Too

 And I'm just going to put that in the outer corners and the inner corners of my eye.

 Blend it out and this just creates a nice soft smoky eye for Valentine's Day.

 So here I'm actually lining my eye with my Milani liquid liner.

 I love that it's so affordable and you can just get it at any Walgreens.

 I'm actually just taking a Sigma fluff brush or a blending brush.

 I wasn't going to add this in the video because I've done it so many times.

 But I just wanted to give you guys an idea of what I do to highlight and contour.

 If you don't already know there's tons of videos on it from my channel.

 Here I'm actually using my beauty blender and I'm just going to blend out all of this

 concealer and we're just going to make it look like it's not even there basically.

 It's just going to create a nice little highlight and we're going to get rid of those really

 I set my concealer with my Ben Nye banana powder and then I'm just creating dark and

 I'm just going to blend all of this out because I'm looking a little pasty because of the

 Then underneath my eye I'm creating a underneath smokey eye and I'm still using that same Too

 I'm actually using the color Charming and I'm just going to create the triangle and

 that like cut crease look with my, it's like a brush that's a pen looking brush.

 And then right here I'm using my Mac pencil liner and I believe it's in the color charcoal

 I don't have everything in front of me but I will list it all down below when I can.

 Also I'm using my L'Oreal telescopic mascara for underneath my eyes on my lower lash line

 because it really grabs those lashes because I don't really have very long lashes.

 So I just went in with some blush and that is also by Mac but it is discontinued so I

 So I'm going to line my lips with Mac strip down pencil which I love and this just gives

 me a nude look anytime I use like a pink lipstick which this one is also by Wet n Wild.

 I don't know the exact name but again I'll list all that stuff down below when I get

 I'm just going to wrap my hair around the barrel, hold it tight for about 20 seconds

 And I'm actually using some Garnier texture tea spray here and this just kind of gives

 And then I'm just going to repeat this process all throughout my hair.

 I do have a coupon code for the Irresistible Me interchangeable wand that I will list down

 below for you guys so you can get a nice little gift or not gift but discount with

 I think it's Irresistible Ashley but I will definitely post it down below.

 It's like my first interchangeable wand ever and I'm so satisfied with it.

 So yeah guys I'm going to finish up my hair and let you guys watch the rest of this video.

 Cause if they get close, we're close, they might learn something.

 This is the final look and I'm loving the nice fun beautiful loose curls for Valentine's

 Please make sure you guys subscribe to my channel and check out my girl Morgan's channel.

 Serve with fresh spring mix, persimmon, pomegranate seeds, almonds, and parmesan.

 Serve with honey, argan oil, and a special recipe for sweet vinaigrette.

 The colors, texture, and flavors of this salad will be a great addition to your holiday menu.

 This is the hachia persimmon and it's from the astringent family.

 Which means if you eat it when it's not ripe, it's going to make your mouth feel really weird.

 So before eating it, it has to be really ripe and it has a jelly-like texture.

 This is the fuyu persimmon and it's from the non-astringent family.

 Argan oil is a unique Moroccan oil made from the kernels of the argan tree.

 And don't forget to check out my website, cookingwithalia.com for more recipes.

 Pour the vinaigrette in a jar, cover it, and place it in the fridge for half an hour before mixing it with the salad.

 By letting the vinaigrette rest, we are going to have more flavors and aromas in our sauce.

 Using the slicing side of a grater, thinly slice the persimmon.

 Hi there, so in this video I'm going to just quickly show you how to make kiss the girl

 If you've watched my other video, you can see how I got my Ariel hair looking the way

 What you're going to do is just take a small section from each side, starting with this

 one, and I'm just kind of lightly brushing, combing that out with my fingers, and then

 Now one thing you might want to do is actually tease it a little bit and that will get you

 So you see I'm going to take this section of hair, and I'm looking for a comb or a brush,

 I'm just going to backcomb it a little bit and that will get you a little teased volume,

 Once you've got it to where you want it to be, you're going to pin it to the center back

 of your hair, and I use a crossed shape, so I'll take one bobby pin, and then you see

 you want to get not only the hair you're pinning back there, but also go all the way down to

 Then I'm going to take a second bobby pin and just cross over that, and it just creates

 So then you're going to do the same thing on the other side, get a small section of

 hair, and on this side you want to be careful and you're going to go over the section of

 Well you can use the same section that you used for your bangs, but you'll get a better

 So again you're just going to lightly drape, and since that has enough volume I don't think

 Just again, take a bobby pin, slide under for hold, get a second bobby pin and create

 You can use barrettes or kind of the bendy clips if you like those, but I really like

 bobby pins, they're a bit more subtle and they'll hold in place for a lot longer.

 So then when you get your second bobby pin just slide it again, make a nice cross shape,

 and I give it a little tug just to make sure it's nice and secure.

 And so now you have the base of her hair done, but there's one thing you need to complete

 You want to get a nice big blue bow, and I'm looking now for a long bobby pin, so you got

 And what you're going to do is you're going to slide the bobby pin so that it actually

 goes through your bow, and you see I'm trying to show you what I'll be doing in the back

 So you want to put it into place, and you're not capturing only the hair and the bobby

 I'm using actually a really long bobby pin for this bow, it's about three inches long,

 So it's just a nice simple little adjustment to your Ariel hair to create the Kiss the

 Once we get that bobby pin in place, straighten my bow, and you're ready to go.

 Please let me know in the comment sections if there are any other heroin hairstyles you

 Hey guys, this is Lorenzo from Board Riders Review and today we're going to repair a

 Shuboo which is an inflatable paddle board that I've got from BoardWorx.

 And I happened to get it flat out in the water as I was getting out but I didn't know it

 So if I would have known it was flat out in the water I could have found a leak pretty

 A technique you can use at home for finding a flat is just put some air into it.

 So once you have some air in the board you get your solution of soapy water and a sponge

 preferably and you start rubbing along where you think it might be and you just start looking

 I've got a little bit of rubbing alcohol here just to make sure it's pretty clean.

 When you get your Shuboo inside the backpack or in the box you get a container like this

 So you just simply open it up, pull out the valve wrench to clear the valve.

 And since I already knew how big my cut was I pre-cut my piece with enough coverage on

 either side of the hole or the crack to make sure I get some good coverage on it.

 And what I did, I want to get enough coverage just the way my patches are made.

 I just went ahead and cut a tip of it off and it's going to butt up against this yellow.

 So what I wanted to do is once I get the glue on there, I don't want to spread the glue

 So I'll glue this area right here and I'll glue the back of the patch and I'll let it

 sit for ten minutes, five to ten minutes and then come back and stick it on.

 Okay so here goes the glue and the patches have a rough side and a smooth side.

 I'm going to follow my pencil outline that I made as best I can without making too much

 Okay and according to the instructions I've got to let it sit for five to ten minutes.

 Alright so I've let it sit for six minutes and I'm going to put the patch right over

 Okay and then I've got to work the air out so I'm going to start from one side to the

 I happen to have a little rock that I can probably squeeze most of the air out with

 Just try to get out any air bubbles that may be problematic later.

 And I'm going to let it sit overnight and then pump it up probably to three quarters

 I'm going to show you how I hooked a GPS up on my 2009 Suzuki DR650 to operate when I

 When I turn the key on, you'll notice that the GPS will turn on.

 If I turn the key off, you'll see that the power will stop and it will shut itself down.

 Now, the way I did it, over here on the side, on both sides of the headlight, there are

 screws where you can remove the little fairing that goes around the headlight.

 What I did was I went to Walmart and purchased an auxiliary cigarette lighter, basically.

 Those two wires, inside here, there was a spot to hook them in.

 If you look, I'll shine the camera down in here and let you see, there's a little black

 I had to buy a crimper to crimp the little ends on the wire because the wire was about

 To plug them in right there, tuck all the wires back in, put your fairing back in place,

 and the power switch then works when you turn the light off and on.

 Also, with my GPS, I purchased this mounting bracket on eBay and it was inexpensive.

 When I plug the GPS in to the socket, I just have to tuck the wire back out of the way.

 If I wanted to, I could trim it down and splice it, but I really don't feel like doing that

 You could also use this outlet for, I'm sure, recharging a cell phone or anything else that

 If you plug something in that drew a lot of electricity, you might blow a fuse somewhere,

 The whole thing cost me, the bracket for the GPS was about five dollars.

 I used some angle iron from the hardware store and some bolts and just bolted it right there.

 Nice easy job and it's a whole lot better than having a hot wire going to your battery

Poon, I've got to avoid the sugar and keep everything low sodium as

 If you want to cut off excess fat and all that, by all means you can do it.

 It's got a bit on top that I could remove if I like, but I'm not too worried about that.

 We're going to use a couple of dashes of Worcestershire sauce, about three cloves or three teaspoons

 All that's going in this slow cooker is the roast itself with these ingredients.

 Potatoes are still out, but you can have pumpkin, you can have turnips, and you can have carrots.

 So I'm going to chunk those up and throw them in the oven about an hour before my roast

 I'm going to leave this, the fat is a very thin layer actually, and it wouldn't be easy

 I'll wash my hands and then we'll get on with putting the other ingredients in.

 And normally you'd use about a teaspoon of salt per pound of meat.

 But because I'm trying to keep it reduced sodium, you could use say a heaping tablespoon

 I'm going to probably only put two or three teaspoons of the light salt just to help reduce

 While I've got that teaspoon out, I'm going to whisk in about three cloves of garlic or

 Next I'm going to take just a couple of good dashes of Worcestershire.

 And if you're not worried about sugar, feel free to use regular.

 Okay, so I've got just under an hour to go before my roast is done, so I'm going to put

 I'll start by peeling them and chopping them into bite-sized chunks.

 So I've got the turnips and carrots peeled and rinsed, and now I'm going to go on to

 Now this is just a piece of Kent pumpkin because that is allowed in Phase 2 of Dr.

 a butternut squash or pumpkin isn't, and potatoes aren't, so this is what I'm going to use.

 I'm just going to clean out the seed area a bit and then peel the shell off and chop

 I've got that cleaned out, and I find a spoon, just the edge of a spoon, helps you scrape

 So I've preheated my oven to about 350 Fahrenheit or 180 Celsius, and I've got the vegetables

 I will say that the pumpkin is a little bit slippery and hard to hang on to.

 I actually found it easier to cut the piece in half lengthwise to complete the peeling,

 And if you still have any little stringy bits in the inside, that's all right.

 So now I'm going to cut it into chunks, maybe an inch-sized chunks.

 On your pumpkin, you'll probably find you have to, after you chop the first one, you'll

 want to go back on a second time so that they're about that size.

 Okay, so with the turnips all I've done is just gone straight down the middle and laid

 And cut across once, and just cut it into two or three chunks the other direction.

 And with the carrot, depending on the size of the slices, I'm just slicing them like

 that, and then going back and halving or quartering them to pan.

 Because they're a bit denser and might take a little longer to cook, quartering is probably

 Okay, so I've just thrown all the chopped vegetables together in this large roasting pan.

 What we're going to do is about a tablespoon or two of olive oil.

 I'm going to use my low-sodium salt substitute, some fresh cracked black pepper.

 I just happen to have some margarine, thyme, and rosemary on hand.

 Then you want to take a spoon and just stir that up to sort of mix everything well.

 Now I'm guessing these are going to take 20 to 30 minutes in the oven, but keep an eye on them.

 You can cover it with foil if you like, say for the first 10-15 minutes, and then take it out for the last.

 So it's been 20 minutes, I'm just going to pull them out, give them a stir, check on them, see if they need any longer.

 But I'm happy with that, they're certainly tender enough that you can poke with a fork.

 Okay, so that's been 7 hours, I'm going to turn our quick pot off.

 Some of it's still there, but it's fairly easy to pull that off.

 Before we take it out and shred the meat, if you're interested in removing it.

 I'm just going to do my best to lift this meat up out of here and put it in the casserole dish for now.

 Don't want it to fall apart too early, until I get it in there.

 And I'm just going to put a little bit of the broth over the top.

 Ok, what we're going to do here today is unclog a bathtub drain.

 Some stoppers you just want to turn to your left until it unthreads and just remove it.

 So what you want to do first is take off your cap, put your stopper down here, get

 Ok, and once that comes all the way loose go ahead and discard the stopper.

 Generally what you're going to find in here is hair, sometimes hair ties, maybe a razor

 It looks like what we've got in here is just your standard thing, just some hair.

 Ok once you've removed everything you can see go ahead and give it a test.

 Ok as long as it flows down really easy, you make that gargling sound that it's draining

 Then go ahead and just replace your stopper and you're back to a perfectly functioning

 Hi guys, Hilary here and today I'm going to be sharing two sweet treat recipes.

 These recipes are vegan, so they're completely egg free, dairy free, there's no refined sugars

 But they are totally delicious and can totally replace your evening dessert or afternoon

 Okay, so for this first sweet treat, this is basically a vegan almond joy is what I

 So we're going to just take, these are Halawi dates, you can also use Medjool dates.

 These have a pit in them, so you need to cut it and then take out the pit.

 So when you open up, there is a little bit of a pit inside or a seed, I guess, however

 So basically it creates this little shell, you don't want to cut it all the way through,

 And then we're going to take unsweetened flaked coconut, you could use sweetened if you want,

 So we're going to use the unsweetened, it's still very sweet and delicious, it just doesn't

 So you're just going to fill it up like that and then take a little almond and stick it

 Like I said, they make like these cute little boats and you can, if you have little chocolate

 chips, you could stick them in there to really give the full almond joy effect.

 I don't have any chocolate chips right now and you know, they taste just as delicious

 My husband is shaking his head yes, because he can vouch for how delicious they are and

 Okay, so the second healthy sweet treat we're going to be making today is banana ice cream,

 which I know you guys have probably seen so many times, but this is a chocolate banana

 ice cream with a strawberry date topping and it's going to be super delicious.

 So we're going to start out by making the strawberry date topping and all you need is

 I have three to four, this was four dates and I soaked them overnight, which is why

 If your dates are just regularly soft right out of the package, you could just put them

 Then I have just a little bit of water if I need it to just help things along.

 So in our food processor, you could use a mini food processor, you could use a Nutribullet,

 So I'm going to put my strawberries in and my dates and then I'm just going to add, I

 don't know, a little bit of water just so I feel like, you know, everything's going

 to get moving and then we're going to put the top on and blend it up.

 I let it, I don't know, go for maybe like 30 seconds or 45 seconds.

 So you can see it's kind of the consistency of like a sorbet, like kind of thick.

 So I'm just going to take it out and spoon it into my bowl and then we're just going

 All right, so I'm just going to go pop this in the freezer while I make the banana ice

 I'm going to rinse out my food processor so it's clean and ready to go when I put the

 Okay, so to make the banana ice cream, this is a very simple recipe.

 It's, you know, you can kind of use measurements, but really it's, you know, kind of whatever

 But I'm going to be using about three and a half ripe bananas that are frozen.

 You could freeze them just during the day like we did in the morning.

 It doesn't have to be overnight, but you probably need, I don't know, I'd say a good four or

 And then I'm going to add in just a little bit of unsweetened almond milk.

 You could totally use regular cow's milk if you want to do that.

 Of course, that would make it not vegan anymore, but you could totally do that.

 And we're just going to, as I'm pulsing it, add a little bit more and then, you know,

 And I'm going to use about a tablespoon of this to make my chocolate ice cream.

 So when you do this, sometimes just the bottom is blending and the top bananas are still

 So we're just going to open it up and then I'm going to mix it up with my spatula.

 If you want to take a peek at it, it is super creamy and delicious, just like regular ice cream.

 It's totally edible as is, but since I want this to kind of be like ice cream, you know,

 I'm going to put in a tablespoon of maple syrup because this is a, you know, a good

 This, again, is totally not necessary, but who doesn't love maple syrup?

 So, I'm going to pop the lid on again and then it will be all done.

 That little, little bit of sweetness from the maple syrup is perfect.

 So I'm going to go ahead and plate this up and show you how it looks with the strawberry

 I just put the ice cream with a little bit of the strawberry sauce and some flaked coconut

 And now I'm going to go ahead and take a bite and we'll see how it all is together.

 And today is actually Valentine's Day, so this is going to be our Valentine's Day dessert

 So I hope you guys enjoyed seeing these sweet treat recipes that are completely delicious

 But thanks so much for watching guys and I'll be talking to you soon.

 For grease or oil-based stains that cannot be removed with a water-based product, use

 This innovative product dissolves oils and grease and draws the oil or grease into a

 Since the degreaser is an aerosol-based product, be sure that the room is well-ventilated.

 If the stain is in a concentrated spot, cover the area that doesn't need to be treated.

 You can do this by cutting a hole in a sheet of paper and laying it on the top of the leather.

 Shake the can prior to use and spray at approximately 10 to 12 inches at an angle, making sure that

 a droplet does not fall off of the tip and onto the leather as that may cause a ring.

 The degreaser goes onto the leather as a liquid and turns into a powder.

 The longer you leave the powder on the surface of the leather, the more effective it is at

 It's been an hour now and you can see that the degreaser has turned into a powder.

 To remove the powder, you can use an upholstery attachment on a vacuum or the soft cleaner

 As you can see, there's still a small amount of the oil left in the leather.

 Now we will remove the second application of degreaser from the surface of the leather.

 We'll use a soft cleaner, foam it up, and remove the degreaser.

 Now we will dry the area and apply protection cream on inulin leathers and eco-protector

 These durable inserts are made of high quality zoet foam that is non-toxic, chemical resistant

 and has zero moisture retention, which is also used in medical applications and in some

 As you can see, we have several different packages to choose from.

 Our packages range to fit the needs of the breeder, the veterinarian and also for individual

 Our individual kit contains a five week supply of ten ear inserts, a bottle of skin adhesive,

 five adhesive removal wipes, five ear preps and an instruction sheet.

 We're getting ready to get started, but first you're going to need an ink pen, a pair of

 Next, with your ear prep from your kit, clean your dog's ear thoroughly, like so.

 Then with one of your ear inserts, trim it into the shape of a V, like this.

 With your trimmed insert, place it back into your dog's ear and with your insert and your

 Now that your pet's ears are thoroughly cleaned and your inserts are trimmed, we're ready

 One thin layer of our skin adhesive on the inside of your pet's ear.

 The inserts will remain in your pet's ear for approximately 7 to 10 days, at which time

 Afterscores, probably the most complicated part of this whole clock is adding penalties.

So you enter the penalties on the side that the penalty came against.

If at this point you needed to change the penalty time, you just go press whatever

So if you say it's run time and so it's a three minute penalty, there's

Five minute penalty, there's a five minute penalty, you hit enter.

 notice up on the board that the home team now has won five minute penalties.

 this point, once the clock starts running, the penalties will start running down and

 kill, so you stop the clock because they had a goal, you enter, add the guest score, it's

 what happens is the home team is really having a problem today and they commit another penalty.

 This time it's player four and he commits a two minute penalty.

 down a ways and at this, if you have to, at some points you might have to just change

 the time from because somebody, you know, the person forgot to turn it on, they forgot

 to stop it, or it was whistle blower, referee might come up and tell you, all right, you

 need to, there actually should be instead of 11 minutes, 26 seconds on, you need to

 11 minutes and 11 seconds and at this point, when you hit enter, it asks you, it automatically

 and it would automatically subtract however many you took away from the clock, from the

Now at this point, some of the penalties run off and the home team gets another one.

 This is a player penalty, another two, this time it's number 26, enter, and he's on there

 and it's two minutes, we just hit enter again, so now there's two penalties on the board,

 team was shorthanded, the away team gets one of their penalties, the home team, the penalty

Now in all cases, when a penalty comes off the clock, it's not the

 order in which they are called, it is the amount of time left on the penalty.

 this case, the first penalty was the shortest one, so that's the one that will come off.

 So since you have multiple penalties on the board, you don't want to just go clear all

 penalties, you want to find the one with the shortest time and delete that one.

 case, you push the delete penalty button and it shows you the amount of time left on them.

 With the arrows here, you can scroll up and down and see all the penalties that are there.

 So in this case, we have two penalties, number two, player number 26 and player number four.

 Player number four's penalty is the shortest, so that's a minute 31, so I'll delete that

In this case, you hit yes, enter, that penalty is gone, now we only have the

Now, if at this point, some more time runs off and the home team gets

 another penalty, you go to enter this penalty, player penalty, number 12, it's two minutes,

 there's now once again two penalties on the board, but the shortest time penalty, if you

 look at them, is not penalty one, but penalty two, a minute 42.

 if you have more than one penalty on there, to delete the penalty with the shortest amount

That way you don't have to be going back and figuring out how much is

 left and entering things back on because you deleted the wrong one.

In the case of multiple, more than two penalties, as those penalties,

 they're clicking down and now I end up, play stops, and we get another penalty, this time

There's three penalties, only two on the board because that's all the scoreboard

 fits, but there's actually three penalties being tracked at this point.

 only two penalties are ever counted unless it's a misconduct penalty.

 at these, interrogate these penalties in the game clock, you'll find something very interesting.

 two of them can actually be applied because there's only two men down at any given time.

 penalty rolls off, the two minute will immediately appear on the board and it will start counting

So don't be surprised when they come and say, hey, why is that penalty so

It's because it doesn't start counting until there's room to serve.

 goes for a player that has a two minute penalty and a misconduct.

 not begin until the two minute penalty ends, either by time expiring or by the other team

So you always set a minimum of your misconduct and however long your other

 To begin, get your Torx T6 screwdriver and your flat head screwdriver.

 First you will notice a ribbon cable that connects from the Logic Board to the hard drive.

 You will also notice two connections that is connected to the ribbon cable on top of the hard drive.

 and remove the two Torx T6 screws and the bar alongside the hard drive.

 Once the bar is removed, lift the hard drive up and out to remove.

 To start off this first day of school makeup look, I'm going to take a white velvet eyeshadow

 And for those of you who don't know, a velvet eyeshadow is not sparkly, but it's also not

 And I really love it for everyday looks because it's not going to be too glittery, but it's

 Now through my crease, I'm running a pretty natural brown color all through my crease.

 This is going to add just a really natural shadow to your crease.

 So I'm going to take this really pretty brown, peachy, glittery color and I'm going to run

 it mostly through my outer corner, but I'm going to take it about halfway across my lid

 So I'm taking a dark brown color and concentrating it right in the outer corner.

 You're just trying to add a little bit more dimension over there without going overboard.

 Speaking of not going overboard, I'm just going to take that brown matte color that

 we used originally and this is going to add a really natural line to your eyes without

 But as for liner, I'm just going to take this black gel liner and push it into my lash line.

 Now the reason for doing this is because it's just going to thicken up that lash line, but

 it's not going to look like you have this super harsh, huge line on your eyes.

 Of course, if you like that with your everyday looks, go for it.

 And lastly for the eyes, I'm just going to take a matte white color along my brow bone

 and also in my inner corner to help me look a little bit more awake.

 Now if you're like me and your skin tone can be described as vampire and you haven't been

 out in the sun a single day this summer, try applying your bronzer to your cheekbones.

 You're basically going to go from your ear directly to the apples of your cheeks.

 And this is going to make it look just like you spent every day at the beach and make

 To add to that beachy glow, you're going to take a pinky orange blush and run that right

 in the same area, but concentrate it more towards the back of your face.

 And we can't forget highlighter, so I'm just going to take a little bit and run it along

 the tops of my cheekbones, down the bridge of my nose, and I'm also going to take just

 Now on the first day of school, let's skip the bold lip because the last thing you need

 to worry about is having to touch it up or having lipstick on your teeth.

 The first day of school is stressful enough, so we're going to stick with something a little

 Something like this is great because it won't fade all chunky, it won't get on your lips,

 I think it's great to keep things really light and natural and glowy for your first few days,

 and then you can try something like my brown smokey eye, which will be uploaded to my channel

 Thank you guys so much for watching, and I will see you on Monday.

 Hi, today I want to show you how to do a double-sided print and cut with Silhouette Studio.

 So the first thing we want to do is have everything symmetrical on the front of our card.

 and I'm going to make sure that it's centered on the front of the card.

 A trick that I use, because you can't center on the front of the card once you've welded it together,

 is I just draw a dummy rectangle that's the exact same width as the card and lined up with it.

 I go to the Align window, and click Align Center, and I make sure they're aligned.

 And you want to make sure that the bottom rectangle isn't what moves when things are aligned when you do this.

 This one step here is the secret to successful double-sided print and cut.

 Now we want to save that, which will be the outside of our card.

 And then we want to do a Save As, so that we get an exact duplicate for the inside of our card.

 And get rid of our circle, but before we do that, we will use it to determine where to place our owl.

 So when we have that how we want it, we'll move that and then the inside of our card is ready, almost.

 We can turn off the registration marks because we will only be printing this side.

 And when we print it, we want to note which side comes out of the printer first.

 Because if the owl comes out of the printer last, as we expect,

 then she is going to go into the printer first when we print the second side.

 That's a little tip to make sure you get the front and back aligned properly.

 And I'm going to print this again with the owl or whatever came out last going in first with the blank side up.

 Once I've printed that on both sides, then I'm going to load it onto my mat and do a print and cut.

 I'm going to show you a simpler example of a token that you want to use to fill the page.

 All we have to do is drag one to the page after we've designed it, select it, go to the replicate window, and click on fill page.

 And so what Studio does something interesting here that I discovered.

 Not only does it fill the page, but it's already centers this whole group on the page.

 This circle here was the same design, same size, just without the text.

 I can put it anywhere on the page, click fill page, and now I've got an exact copy.

 And if I go back and open the front side, you'll be able to see that these are exact front and back duplicates of each other.

 So it's really easy if you use the replicate command because that does the centering for you.

 You are in the studio of Perpetual Mojo and we're talking about Thanksgiving!

 I love it when everybody comes over and there's the parade on and maybe some football and

 And all kinds of things are happening and I'm so grateful that I'm close to my family

 I'm making a kind of a banner thing that will go above our table and it says gratitude.

 And I took the paper off and I stuck the cardboard onto the back of my lovely paper.

 So now I'm going to cut it around it where it's glued right now.

 And there's kind of a fun little element right here where the top of the G is a little bit

 And I just want to take it right up to the fold but not cut it out of the fold.

 And the next thing I did was I used my Crop-It aisle to cut two small holes.

 And then I went around every letter, all the edges, with some gold glitter glue.

 And I put just a half inch in between the letters and then I used twice that for the

 And then I took my little round nose pliers and I, while these were still lined up, I

 just made a couple of loops every so often so that it was kind of spread out evenly.

 And then when the letters were all dry I used my Crop-It aisle.

 So now that I have my grommets in place I'm going to cut two six inch strands of 24 gauge

 I'm doing some fun little curly cues with them so you can have more or less and it won't

 And it is not going to be anywhere near perfect but that's okay with me.

 Now that I have both of the wires in place I'm going to put some lovely beads on.

 Now bring your wire up close to where your bead is and hold it in place with your finger

 I am so grateful to have my family close and my friends and I love being part of this craft

 Hey guys, um, I'm super sorry about the crappy quality I'm just saying in the beginning.

 I'm super sorry about the crappy quality but YouTube won't let me upload unless I go straight

 So, I was watching Secret Life of a Bionerds video on how to make, oh, a swimsuit out of

 And then I looked at her hair and I was like, oh my gosh, that's so cool.

 So that's what I'm gonna show you how to do and yeah, let's go.

 So with a brush, I'm just gonna brush out like all my hair so that it's not knotty cause

 Brush this part backwards, but not all of it cause there are a couple pieces that you

 Cause I... it just looks better when all you do is the layers, in my opinion.

 So I'm just gonna move that to the side to keep it out of my way.

 And using a hair clip such as this one, I'm going to spin around and twist it up.

 And finally, just to give it a little bit more tease-y, layer-y sections, I'm gonna

 For this dish we need some sole fillets, we have yellow fin sole here frozen, 6 spring

 onions, 1 lime, black olives, pitted, without stone and sliced, fresh thyme, some capers,

 I have these beautiful 7 ripe tomatoes, I'm gonna chop them and we're gonna use them for

 I really like the green part of the onions for the color and for the taste.

 I'm pouring some olive oil in the oven dish, just a little bit.

 We just assemble this dish with all the ingredients and then we put it in the oven and it's ready.

 You won't see the fish anymore but that's ok, it will cook nicely underneath these moist

 Just a couple of twigs, you don't need a lot, there's already lots of flavors in this dish,

 I like to exaggerate with olive oil, it's great and it's healthy.

 It now goes in the oven at 180 degrees centigrade for about 10 to 12 minutes.

 We're serving our beautiful sole fillets with some lime juice and a fresh salad with rucola,

 If you want to get healthy, you do not, I repeat, not have to give up sweets.

 We're going to do a vanilla cream sauce that's just in a blender.

 Well, we've been talking a lot, or you've been talking a lot about New Year's resolutions,

 But dieting always sets up a deprivation pattern psychologically.

 And so this is a very decadent dessert that you can make, and it's very good for you.

 I heard that if you live the vegan lifestyle, there's no way in the world you can't lose weight.

 Well, you're going to start out with raw walnuts, and you just want to make sure they're raw,

 because then they're not, when you roast a walnut, that actually turns it rancid.

 Well, you said too, as soon as you cook things, you start losing enzymes.

 Yes, exactly, and the enzymes help break down the food, and that just goes through you faster.

 And the food is, like you see, even the slices I put, they look really small,

 but that's all you need because they're so rich and so dense, just a little goes a long way.

 Okay, well, what I'm going to do is I'm just going to pulse it for a moment

 because it's going to break down a lot easier when you pulse it.

 All right, now what we're going to do is we're going to use dates as a way of putting all this together.

 Now, I cut these up to make it easier so that it will go faster.

 The wonderful thing about raw desserts is they don't have toxic sweeteners in them, they don't have gluten,

 and the dates, these are usually the kind that you will find in the store.

 Yeah, Medjool, and you just open it up and take out the pit, obviously.

 Now, I'm using a brand that you would find at a health food store,

 Yes, as long as it's unsweetened and you want a very high cacao level, 70 and over.

 And then as a way to get this all to mix in, you're going to use, this is coconut oil.

 Coconut oil is very high in lauric acid, which is great for your immune system,

 and it works against inflammation because inflammation is the basis of a lot of disease.

 and here in Tampa in the summer it will turn very liquidy, and it's fine.

 And then whenever you're making anything with chocolate, you just put a little bit of salt in it, too,

 And if you can get an alcohol-free vanilla, of course, then that's a lot healthier for you.

 The good thing about dates and this, it doesn't spike your blood sugar the same way,

 You just don't want to get the ones that are mixed with maple flavoring.

 This is just made with cashews and water and vanilla and a little bit of that coconut oil.

 And then I will also put on, if you'd like, all right, we'll put some vanilla cream sauce.

 And how about, would you like a couple raspberries on there, too?

 You can go to our website, daytimeonline.tv, and link up with Linda.

 So yeah, what you are going to need for this is a flat head screwdriver or a small phillips

 And the rebuild kit and something clean like a sheet of paper or a towel to put the carb

 First take off this cover and this cover and this cover and lay out all your pieces.

 If you don't remember, if you think you are not going to remember which way your carb

 goes back together, where the diaphragm goes and everything, the best idea is to do one

 First you might want to open up the rebuild kit and just lay out the parts.

 What you are going to want to do is remove the screen right here.

 And after that just spray everything down with carb cleaner and clean it off.

 After getting it sprayed down with carburetor cleaner, let it sit for a little bit just

 After letting this soak in a little bit, you can remove the needle right here.

 My kit came with a new one so I'm going to remove it and replace it.

 And try to put the needle in there with that piece and at the same time, after you get

 that in, try and hold it down with your finger and put the screw back in.

 If you have one of these tools, you can measure the height of it to make sure it's correct.

 And pretty much just get some type of screwdriver and work it in there and get it out the way

 If you don't have one, just use something that looks like it or an ordinary screwdriver.

 And then take this little piece, this little black piece, and it goes right on top of the

 Now if your primer bolt is still good, put that right on there.

 And after that is on, go to this side, put this piece back in how it was.

 While you're doing this, just take your old parts and set them aside.

 Now all that's left to do is put it back on the unit it came off of, which in this

 So yeah, to put it back on, all you need to do is take the air cleaner off.

 And check out my other videos for more repair videos and just other good stuff.

 Any video requests, just put them in the comments and I'll try to get to that.

 Assalamu Alaikum and welcome to Titli's Busy Kitchen with me Titli Nihaan.

 So there I am in Cyprus in a Chinese restaurant wearing Sawa Kameez

 and I'm exchanging the old word of Urdu with Tariq who's the Punjabi owner

 but among them was a vegetable curry and it reminded me how much fun you can have

 A couple of green chillies, an onion, a turnip, a couple of carrots and half a cup of peas.

 Here I've got something the French call coulis which is really pureed tomatoes.

 and then I've got a mixture of spices here, the details of which appear now.

 The first thing I have to do is peel the potatoes, carrots, turnip and onion.

 I've peeled and chopped the potatoes, the turnip and the carrots

 Now what I'm gonna do is blanch these in boiling salted water for just 5 minutes.

 When 5 minutes is up, I'll just drain them and put them to one side.

 In the pan, I've got a couple of tablespoons of oil or you can use ghee

 While we're waiting for the onions, we'll make a little paste out of our spices.

 If it sticks to the bottom of the pan, just scrape it off with your spatula.

 The pulped tomato, the passata or coulis or whatever you want to call it.

 For the last 5 minutes of cooking, add in the chillies which I've chopped

 After 15 minutes, check your vegetables and see if they're cooked.

 You can either serve it as a main course with rice or naan or roti

 I promised Tariq I would give him some free advertising on my next video.

So today I have another makeup tutorial and this is my go-to makeup look that I've been loving these days.

 And Song Hye-kyo from The Winter That Blows, she also wore a lot of grey eyeshadows.

 So I've already applied my Shu Uemura foundation all over my face.

 Using my Bobbi Brown concealer stick, I'm going to cover up my dark circles.

 Next, using my Bare Minerals Original Foundation in Fair, it's a loose powder.

 I'm going to prime my eyes using the Urban Decay Primer Potion.

 And just using my fingers, I'm just going to apply this over my lids.

 And it's a gorgeous frosty beige color to blend out the harsh lines.

 I'm going to combine two shadows, the Scene and the Night Divine.

 Moving on to the cheeks, I'm going to apply my current favorite blush.

 And then last, for the lipstick, I'm using my Revlon Sweet Tart.

 Today's recipe is Afghan cuisine, that is Bulani, made from the leek.

 Leek is a vegetable green and bulani is basically a stuffed dough that has leek in it and you

 So let's take a look at the recipe for bulani, let's go to the ingredients.

 People use potatoes to make bulani, green onions, they also use squash to make the bulani.

 This is a very good flour, if you can find in a store, please buy this one for the bulani.

 Yeast is really good to have in the bulani because it's a heavy dough and this will help

 We also need some oil for the making of the dough and a separate oil for the frying.

 If you don't want to use crushed chili, you can substitute it for chili powder and you

 I'm gonna add half a teaspoon of yeast and let this sit for about 4 minutes.

 After adding 1 cup of water, I'm gonna add my second cup of water.

 Once it gets to this point, after adding 2 cups of water, now you're gonna mix this with

 Once you get a chance to mix this 3-4 times with your hands, if it's too sticky, add a

 Now you're gonna take about 2 tablespoons of oil to your hands and mix them again.

 You want to make sure that you open the neek slice by slice and wash the inside because

 Once you get to this point, you're gonna slice them once or twice and then you're gonna start

 Once you slice them, you're gonna cut them from the middle so it gets to this size and

 Once you finish chopping the neek, you're gonna add a little bit of salt, so less than

 If you add too much salt, this is gonna separate water, so don't add that much.

 So I'm just gonna take a little bit of flour and take some dough here.

 When you get to this size, you don't want to make it too skinny because it's gonna be

 At this point if you need to add a bit more salt, go ahead and add a pinch of salt.

 I like to add a little bit more spice to it because I like mine spicy.

 And then you're gonna bring this top over and then just tap around it.

 Once your oil is a little bit hot enough, you're gonna go ahead and add the boulogne

 So I'm gonna go to the old way that we used to use spoon and fork to check and flip the

 I don't want to cook mine too much so I'm gonna keep flipping it every 2 minutes.

 Once they're nice and brown or golden, you're gonna remove this from the oil and it'll be

 Hi, I'm Allie with the Potomac Bead Company and I'm going to show you some Rivoli bezels

 These are Precioso Rivolis in a 14mm and they do have, the Rivolis do not have a hole, they

 And what this bezel is, it's a nice little fit for the Rivoli, it sits right inside.

 To glue the Rivoli in place, what I'm going to be using is, and that's the back of it,

 E6000 glue I have found is a great glue in order to bond, because you're basically bonding

 the foil, the silver foil on the back, to the silver metal in the dish.

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to squeeze out some of my E6000 and I'm almost going

 to use the toothpick here, if you can see, to bring that down into the little bezel set.

 The excess then, what I'll do is I'll just kind of take off, because I don't want it

 I'm just going to take that excess off and I put it right back in the tube.

 If you need to, you can use little pliers that you can push it in.

 The E6000, and if there's any on the sides, you just want to make sure to pull that out

 right away because it will glue and kind of stay there rock solid.

 Again, you can flip your toothpick over and use the other side need be.

 What it says usually is that it will harden in two to ten minutes.

 You want to allow it to really hold fast dry for about two hours.

 I usually say let it sit the longer the better to make sure, especially if you're using a

 Let it sit for at least about four to eight hours until you wear it or until you're ready

 Again, that's on the really conservative side, but better to be a little bit more prepared

 First thing you need to do when setting up a pirate ship from a floating moonwalk, you're

 going to get one tarp and you just need to unroll that and unfold it.

 It's going to be a little bit bigger than the actual moonwalk, but it will give you

 If you don't nail it down, it may just swirl around in the wind.

 Make sure you get the nails all the way in the ground just to avoid an injury or kids

 Now in unrolling the moonwalk, you're going to want to make sure that it's at the back

 The entrance is going to be on the right of which others have it.

 Before you turn it on, you're going to want to make sure that all the flaps are closed.

 Usually there are two on each side for big pieces such as the pirate ship.

 Just look around and make sure that all of them are closed otherwise it will prevent

 But if you see after three or four minutes that it's not up by the way you put it,

 you're going to want to go and check the tube and make sure it's completely dry before

 Just go and make sure that all the eggs are still inside the blower properly.

 Now you're going to take the hook safe, which the pirate ship needs to pull.

 And the corners are going to be the ones that have feathers, the moon feathers.

 You're going to take your hook, put it through the loop, and make sure that all corners are

 I bet you're wondering, what in the hell does Zoe have in this bag that could last him for a week or a day?

 I'm telling you, when you hungry, bitch, anything will mix and make a good meal.

 Go to Kroger, because if you have a Kroger Plus card, you know, they knock off some things in the garage.

 I bought a Kroger brand, because you know the Kroger brand good, but...

 Alright, so as you can see, we have moved over to the kitchen area away from the table.

 You type your number in, knock off a dollar or two, you're good.

 They had the original, the real pepperoni, but again, $20 is all we had.

 So as you can see, we have the Prego pizza sauce, Italian blend.

 Some of you sugar foods, like, you know, glitter, paradise, guys.

 September 10, 2015, January, March, April, May, June, July, August, September.

 Okay, so what you do now is you want to cook between 350 to 400.

 Some of y'all may not have no handle, but see I got a little money.

 the Mexican beaches when you can basically bring them straight to your

 eat all summer long and we're making this recipe super simple by adding just

 mixture that we're creating marinate in the shrimp for about 30 minutes and

 which is acidic, you don't want to let the shrimp marinate in this mixture for

 just zesting and juicing one whole lime, adding 1 teaspoon of ground cumin, and

 1 1⁄2 teaspoon of chili powder for some extra flavor, salt and pepper, 1

 tablespoon of olive oil to add some richness to our shrimp because the shrimp

 basically don't have any fat in them, and lastly 1 tablespoon of honey.

 honey is just going to add a little bit of sweetness to help balance out those

 then I'm going to pop it in the fridge for 30 minutes and while that's

 marinating just going to get started on my chipotle cream sauce.

 fresh recipe we want to make sure it's not too heavy so we're actually going to

 use 1⁄3 cup of Greek style nonfat yogurt and just 2 tablespoons of

 chipotle chilies in adobo sauce and you can add as many seeds as you want if you

 and remove the seeds before adding it into our mayonnaise there.

 cilantro, some red cabbage which I'm slicing, avocado which I'm also just

You can add whatever toppings your family likes these are just some of

 been about 30 minutes now so I'm preheating my pan over medium-high heat

 with a tablespoon of olive oil and just adding my shrimp and shrimp cooks really

 quickly so you don't want to walk away while shrimp is cooking because it only

 before it's finished cooking because it will continue to cook even off the heat.

 So now that my shrimp is all cooked I can get started assembling my tacos.

 just going to start with some shrimp, dollop some of that chipotle cream over it and

 then get going with some of my toppings, my avocado, my cabbage, my cilantro and a

 subscribes to my email so make sure you get subscribed and you can get all my

Leave me a comment below and I'll catch you next time with another

 Bonjour à tous, je m'appelle Nilsor et bienvenue dans le dragon cook tavern

 Dans cette vidéo, je vais vous proposer des recettes pour amener des nourritures et des bières de jeux vidéo en réalité

 Aujourd'hui, nous allons faire des poulets de perroquet de Pillars of Eternity

 avec les potatoes étant la dernière, pour qu'ils ne deviennent pas noirs

 Préparez le brot végétal en en pourrant 500ml ou 2 cuillères d'eau chaude sur le brot

 Si vous avez aimé cette vidéo, partagez, commentez et abonnez-vous

 I'll be demonstrating how you can create nail designs using the Conad stamping kit.

 And Conad allows you to create elaborate and very detailed designs using only 4 things.

 So in order to create this nail design, I'll be showing you the items that I've used.

 I browsed through the Conad image plate book and I wanted to use my image plate number

 Now this book has a variety of designs that you can choose from to mimic, but I decided

 And I used a Conad nail polish, a dark purple and a light purple one.

 Now you'll want to use the Conad polishes because they're high viscosity so they come

 out more vibrantly than if you were to use just regular nail polish that just comes out

 First I'm using a Conad scraping tool and most importantly the Conad stamping tool.

 Now it's made out of rubberized silicone so it's able to pick up the images with ease.

 Conad is very easy to use and all it really takes is your creative imagination.

 That is virtually endless so please enjoy yourselves and just have fun!

 After letting your polish dry, take your Conad image plate and use your Conad nail polish.

 Then scrape off that polish from the image using your scraping tool.

 Now pick up that image using your stamping kit or stamping tool and the design should

 After cleaning the polish off from the plate using an acetone or nail polish remover, use

 Pick that image with a stamping tool and press it against your nails.

 For the next set of design I used Conad's dark purple nail polish and this is the color

 So take your image plate and use another set of design, whatever you choose.

 Press against the image plate and the image should come out just like that.

 Now you have to make sure that the design is absolutely positively dry because if you

 top it off with your top coat and it's not dry, it's just going to smear everywhere.

 This is just a really dewy foundation, great for dry skin and you can also just put some translucent powder

 to mattify it if you don't want the dewy look but I love looking dewy so...

 Next, I'm just applying my CoverGirl ReadySet Gorgeous Concealer.

 This is a really light coverage concealer, nothing too heavy so it's really great for everyday

 And then whatever's left over, I'm just going to apply it on the high points of my face.

 Now for brows, I'm going to keep it really natural but I'm just going to clean my brows up a bit.

 I'm combing it upwards and then I'm going to take my Brow Wiz and just elongate my brow

 and then I'm just going to clean it up with some concealer but the very light concealer and

 I'm applying that all over my lid and then I'm just going to blend that away with a buffing brush,

 in the inner corners and apply the highlight color in my highlight.

 just dark brown color and apply that on the outer corners of my lid just to darken up the eye a bit

 thing going on so I was just going for like her signature kind of look.

 take the same color, the brown color, and I'm going to apply that on my lower lash line, smoke it out a bit

 and then I'm going to take that same bronze color again and put that in the other half of my eyes

I'm going to apply that on my lid but I'm not going to do like a

 and it's just easy to do and then I'm just going to apply that on my waterline as well.

 I'm just going to have mascara so I want it to be nice and curly.

 this is just a close-up so it is nice but it's nothing like too different.

She usually has a lot of blush on so I put a bit more than usual and then I also have

 the sample size of the Chocolate Soleil bronzer from Too Faced as well and I'm just going to

Nothing, no drastic contour just to you know bronze my face up or

 So for the lips which is the main part, I'm taking this Maybelline lip liner

 little bit, not too much and then I'm taking my Brow Wiz and I'm just going to make an indent in

 the middle of my top lip and then on the sides as you see right there because she has like a dip

 in her lip and this is just to create that shape that she has and then I'm going to apply

 lip liner and I'm going to over line just the top, just the top.

 I'm just fixing my hair here and she usually has it on the side so I'm doing that and she has bangs

 so I was just sort of creating faux bangs and clipping it with a bobby pin since my

 So this is yeah I was trying to do the sultry look like hers but it wasn't working.

 Okay so the other lip option, the cheaper alternative is to line again with the Maybelline

I did exactly what I did before and this is Wet n Wild Spiked with Rum and I'm going

I'm doing exactly what I did with Lolita and the Maybelline lip liner,

The only thing is Wet n Wild isn't like a true true matte so I'm just going to blot it with

 a tissue and then I'm just going to apply translucent powder over it just to mattify

On the left is Lolita, on the right is Wet n Wild and I honestly guys I prefer the Wet n Wild.

 Hey guys and welcome to another what I ate Wednesday after like a month of no what I ate Wednesdays

 things just got kind of crazy with the daily vlogs and then we were in Barcelona hence the kind of sunburned face and

 I made those before we went on holiday and she saw them in the fridge and that was all she could talk about so

 She probably she's only had a couple so maybe she'll have something else

 So I'll probably give her some of my smoothie, but yeah, Leah's having her usual banana porridge

 Okay, so anyways on to what I'm having in the mornings I tend to

 Yeah, then I'll get to showing you guys what I'm going to eat for actual breakfast

 Fresh ones that I peeled we've got frozen strawberries a lot of frozen strawberries a banana and a big bunch of parsley

 To make it easier to blend there we go and it's not even green it's kind of like a dark pink

 I am having a bear laugh which in English I believe is wild garlic

 It's like a very long kind of thick grassy looking I guess herb.

 I don't really know what you would call it, but it's wild garlic

 It has a very garlicky taste because it is garlic, but it's not so strong so basically

 Peeled chopped and boiled a whole bunch of potatoes, and now I'm laying them out on a tray

 Then I'm just gonna pop them in the very high heat oven and watch for them to get crispy look at those golden brown

 Taters I decided to serve them with half an avocado a big spinach salad with romaine and tomatoes and then

 I'm suddenly hungry, and I am having a midnight snack in the first time in ages

 That's usually the cause why I get hungry for something either fatty or sweet in the evening is because I didn't eat enough

 I mean this isn't super unhealthy or anything, but you know eating at 1130 is not such a good idea

 But yeah, just rice crackers with peanut butter Olivia's very unhappy right now and a banana.

 Alright, we're sitting up here on this hilltop and we're kind of overlooking this watering

 they see something and maybe they want to take a picture of it and show their buddies

This particular one that we're going to show you here is one that Vortex

And we've kind of designed it around hunters so it's real easy to use.

 doesn't interfere with the use of the scope so that you're not constantly juggling things

 around to try and use the scope as a spotting scope and then use it to take pictures with.

 they're out hunting because they don't want to carry a lot of weight.

 that you see there's a couple of knobs here that you can turn and this moves this ring

 so that it centers it perfectly around the lens of your camera.

 this is that it's pretty small and unobtrusive so you can leave it on your camera.

 and snap a picture if you've got something far away that you want to take a picture of.

 you can just leave it on and it doesn't add a lot of bulk or weight so you can just leave

 it on there the whole time and it makes it real easy for attaching a camera to.

 first thing you want to do is this is the Skyline spotting scope and we're just going

It's just a threaded eye piece so you just unscrew this and remove

 scope adapter and this thread just threads right here onto the spotting scope.

Once you've got this T-ring threaded on, simply just put the eye

 and it shouldn't cause you any problems in your pack or anything like that.

 Now that we've got this camera adapter on the scope, you're all set up and ready to

 interfere with any function of the camera or the scope so you get it set up beforehand

 with this digital adapter here, you just, this ring right here, just slip fit right

 into the adapter and then you just tighten that set screw down.

 Flip your camera on, snap your picture, then you just unscrew that and pull it right back

 Okay, I'm going to show you how to get a seal back to your tire and wheel after you've had

 There's no inner tube in this tire and this came off of a manure spreader at the farm

 Okay, what I did was I took a strap with a winch and I'm going to tighten the middle

 until it pushes the outer edges of the tire tight against the wheel to create the best

 And I'm going to go around and check it with my finger and kind of see.

 You don't have to go too tight, just enough to get that pressure because you don't want

 You can also see the little air bubbles that came up from the rim of the tire.

 And I'm going to take the strap off because you don't want it pressing against the strap.

 And I'm using a pancake style air compressor, it goes up to 140 PSI and I just have this

 Once you get the seal back off the pressure because you don't want to blow the tire.

 Make sure it's clean around the rim, between the tire and the rim before you do it so you

 And no special tools required, just stuff you find around the house.

 This way you don't have to take it to an auto body shop and have them charge you $35-$40

 Hey, this is Jill from Simple Daily Recipes getting ready to make up some meatballs for

 Except, I'm not going to use meat, I'm going to use brown lentils.

 And I'll just be honest with you, I have never made this before.

 I have been reading recipes on how to make meatballs using beans and a variety of legumes

 And, uh, well anyways, I'm going to go and just, you know, just do it and just figure

 I don't have a recipe, but I have plenty of experience with making the meatless, meatloaf

 And I'm going to take my experience from that recipe and I'm going to create my own meatball

 So, uh, let's come with me, come watch and we'll see how this turns out.

 Okay, to that chopped onion I added about two teaspoons of Mexican oregano.

 And I'm just going to add things that make me think of ground beef.

 I made up the lentils last night and then I just stuck them in the fridge.

 Alright, now I'm going to get my immersion blender and I want to, I'm going to kind of

 turn half of these lentils into a paste to get them really thick and sticky.

 And if I need to, I'm going to add some flour to make it all hold together so that they'll

 Alright, I don't want to do them all because I want that, I want the, I need the texture

 of the lentils to come through because that's what makes it taste, that's what makes these

 When I make the meatless, meatloaf muffins with lentils, I don't, I just leave the lentils

 They cook down more in the oven and somehow they just, some of them just magically disappear.

 But the rest of them stay whole and they really add to the texture that give you the idea

 So here I just, I want to keep some of them in there so we can have that chew.

 But I'm hoping that by blending the lentils too that I can cut down on how much flour

 So that's pretty thick, but I'm going to add a little flour to make it thicker.

 So let's start with, and I'm using buckwheat flour because it has a darker flavor and it

 I think I'm going to shoot for like a cookie dough texture, you know, so it'll hold together.

 Alright now I want to get a, I greased a cookie sheet and I'm going to use my little

 I've got the oven set for 375 and I'm going to try baking these for about 10 minutes,

 see what they look like, and then go in 5 minute increments until they get nice and

 Okay, these little lentil meatloaf muffins, oh, I left the glasses on, oops, these lentil

 meatloaf muffins look like they're going to, what did I just call them?

 They're not hard, I can still smoosh on them, but I bet they'll work.

 Alright let me let them cool and we'll see what they taste like.

 Sorry, yeah, I know I always look at me because I'm so cute, but that shit's really looking

 Herbs have been used since the beginning of time for their culinary, medicinal and even

 If you're looking to add life and flavor to your cooking, consider buying a bunch or two

 Today we're putting these to work in a roasted pork tenderloin with a mustard and herb crust.

 To start with our pork tenderloin, we're going to sear our pork first to give it a nice bit

 It's going to develop that nice caramel color underneath, which is what we want.

 And again, let it sit so it develops that beautiful caramelization.

 Once your pork is seared on all sides, it's now time to cook it in the oven.

 So I'm going to put this in a 400 degree oven until an instant read thermometer registers

 I love working with fresh herbs because they add so much flavor to dishes all the way around.

 Now I usually take my herbs home, ones like parsley, and I like to think of them like

 So when I get them home, I simply snip off the bottom of the stems with a pair of scissors

 Then I can just set them out on my countertop and they'll last for about seven days.

 I want to make sure I change the water once every couple of days and these will be beautiful.

 You can store them in the refrigerator if you want to, but I think they look so nice,

 Now if you can't find flat leaf parsley in the store, curly parsley is fine.

 So actually what I did here is I wrapped up my herbs into a tight little bundle.

 And then I'm going to take my knife and just cut across these herbs.

 And notice how I'm not pushing down, I'm actually pushing across as I cut.

 That's going to give a cleaner cut and it won't bruise your herbs.

 And then once you've made a pass through, then you can go through and cut to make them finer.

 When I lift this up, there's very little herb juice left on my cutting board.

 That means I've done a good job chopping those herbs and not smashing them.

 Now I'm going to add this to a plate and then into it goes my fresh chopped tarragon.

 A little bit of fresh thyme, some panko breadcrumbs, just sprinkle that in.

 Now you can do this in the food processor if you want to and make a very finely ground breadcrumb.

 Garlic goes into our breadcrumbs and then using our fingers, we just mix this together.

 And this is going to make a really flavorful crust for our pork tenderloin.

 It's really important, once your pork comes out of the oven, let it rest for 10 minutes.

 And what that does is it allows all the juices to redistribute in the meat so that your pork

 Now I've let this rest, so now I'm just going to take it and I'm going to brush it with

 You don't want too much, but you want a nice even coating so that when you dip this into

 This is a fabulous dish to serve for guests or maybe a romantic meal for two.

 And now carefully take your pork and press it in to that herb breadcrumb coating.

 Now, if I had put this whole mixture, the herb breadcrumb mixture, into the food processor,

 That goes on a nice baking sheet with rimmed sides and a cooling rack.

 Because what we're going to do is we're going to roast this in the oven under the broiler

 It has this nice crisp crust, and that's due to the cooling rack.

 I do is I replace string by string, each string one by one, but today just for the visual

 purposes so it's more clear, I've loosened some of the strings so that you can see more

 folding the end of the string underneath and then pulling it over and then creating this

 put it, fold it underneath again, like so, underneath the loop once more.

 you're going to put it through the hole of the bridge here, like so.

The end loops underneath the part that you poked in there and you bring it around and

But for the other strings like these ones here, for these you probably need

 to pull the end underneath again and inside of it and pull it again.

So now you have the end of the string that you want to tie to a peg.

So we're going to make it shorter just so that there's less string

 being attached to the peg because it just gets in the way and it becomes too bulky.

 about seven inches from the peg that you want to attach it to down here.

Now what we're going to do is we're going to attach it to the peg.

 need to find the hole and you just slip it through the hole there.

 to where it's supposed to go and then you can continue tightening it.

 is putting too much pressure on this right side of the wood here because it's going to become very

The pressure is going to increase as you tighten it and then it's going to be very tight

 may need to loosen this and move over the string a bit and find what works best.

So this is demonstrating putting it into a peg and winding it up.

 you one way that you can increase or decrease the action of your oud just by fiddling with the knot

Now the action is the distance between the string and the fingerboard.

 you can pull up the string while it's a bit loose to pull up the knot here, making it a bit higher

 down the string while it's still a bit loose and then you tighten it, then you can bring the string

 a bit more of a buzzier sound perhaps, but when the action is a bit higher, it creates a bit more

Depending on your oud and your taste, you can change it to whichever way you like.

 Hey everybody, it's Rosie and I would like to welcome you to my kitchen!

 In this video, I want to share a nice little Halloween recipe that is very easy on the

 thing we're going to do, I got some cherry gelatin and I am going to pour

 in some hot water and then I'm going to use my whisk to mix everything around in

 you want to keep in mind, once you start mixing the cream cheese, do not expect

 some lumps, you just don't want there to be humongous lumps, if you get what I'm

So as you see, those little lumps that are there, those are actually fine.

 They're going to look better once the mold is set, so don't mind those, but I

 get my mold and I got my mold from Jell-O's website when they were giving

 And once we take it out of the refrigerator, of course, you want to

And I'm going to put it on a little serving tray that I got from the

And then I'm going to cut a little couple slithers in the gelatin

And I'm going to stick in some gummy worms just for our finished

 Today we are going to show you how to change the door shelf retainer bar on your refrigerator.

 It's a really easy job and you may not require any tools if it's the same length as your

 If it isn't, you may need a small soft based hammer, a hack saw, a file and a utility knife.

 Now to do this repair, we'll start by opening the door of the shelf bar that we are going

 to replace and then we'll remove one of the end caps and they have two little locking

 The easiest way is to pull down on it enough to compress the bottom one and tilt it out

 If it's really snug, you can tap it down with a soft based hammer.

 Once you've disengaged the top, lift up on the bottom and pull it out of the opening

 At this point, you can slide the retaining bar out of the other shelf bracket and if

 yours is the same length as the part that was sent to you, you simply need to insert

 it into the existing shelf bar end cap and slide the end cap on your new shelf retaining

 If it is a different length, we'll need to take it to a suitable work surface so we

 Now that we have the retainer bar on a suitable work surface, we'll take the old one and

 Make sure it's perfectly flat on it into the proper length and then with a good sharp

 This will ensure that we get a nice straight cut with a hacksaw.

 Now that we've got the face of it marked properly, we'll lay it upside down and again

 we'll take the old shelf retaining bar and we'll mark the length on the backside particularly

 Now we'll make sure that our work surface is not going to mar the face of that retaining

 Now that we've got a nice soft surface under the face of that retaining bar, we'll begin

 our cut and again we'll just concentrate on the edges first and cut from the backside.

 You may find that you'll need to cut each edge individually or your saw blade will bind

 Once we've gotten through both edges and right down to the blade is just touching the

 back of that shelf bar, we can flip that over and then if we've made a strong enough cut

 Now with our cuts complete on both edges, we can flip that over and as long as we've

 got a good deep score mark on the face of it, we just tilt back and forth until it snaps

 Then with our flat file, we'll take the burrs off those edges and make sure we square everything

 Now with our new shelf rail cut to length and our end cap in place, we'll start by

 We'll line up the backside of that end cap with the opening in the door liner and then

 So once you learn how to make a savory version of a cream puff,

 This recipe has crisp bacon, green onions, and weird cheese in it.

 so there's no need to really dice the bacon any smaller than this.

 But it helps to keep the bacon from sticking, so that's why we do that.

 And we're going to cook the bacon until it gets nice and crispy,

 and then we'll pull it out of the pan, leaving the fat in the pan,

 I'm going to take all of that fat and put it in a measuring cup.

 If there is not 4 ounces of bacon fat, we're going to add butter to this to make the cup.

 To make our choux pastry dough, which is what this dough is actually called,

 I'm going to add a little bit of salt to that, a teaspoon of salt.

 A little bit of fresh cracked pepper, about a teaspoon of cracked black pepper.

 You see there's a film that's just starting to form on the bottom of it.

 I like to crack them into a bowl versus cracking them into the pastry dough,

 Then we're going to start adding our eggs to our pastry dough, one at a time.

 As you add your last egg, it gets a little more challenging to get that egg to mix in.

 We call it a pastry scoop, but it's really an ice cream scoop that's very small.

 all those delicious bits of scallion and bacon would get stuck in your pastry tip.

 I think the scoops are a lot easier, especially for this recipe.

 Our oven is preheated to 400 degrees, and this is a convection.

 If you don't have a convection oven, you might want to use 425.

 ingredients or maybe it just tastes a little better because you made it

 skilled culinary assistant also known as my son Charlie, right?

 to cook with and we're making ice cream with the Chef and Sweet Spot.

We're gonna mix the ingredients together and can you show me what we're gonna use?

Do you want me to study the bowl for you honey since you are kind of

 that the Chef and Sweet Spot is in your freezer for 24 hours before you use it.

 We like to just keep it in the freezer all the time though, right?

A little more stir and then what we'll do is we'll add the other

 for like five to ten minutes and you don't want it to get icy or get crystals

We just want it really chilled when we pour it into the bowl, okay?

So we have our chilled ice cream mixture and our sweet spot base from the

Now all I need you to do, hun, is take a half cup and pour it onto the

 this is the time where you can actually start to add anything you want to mix

 cup serving, Charlie, which I love because that's actually a really perfect

 kind of make it look more like an actual scoop of ice cream, hun.

So Charlie, when we're done eating our ice cream, do you remember

 With beach season right around the corner, many of us are beginning to think about swimsuit season

 Well, today we're going to give you three options that are yoga-inspired exercises

 The first exercise we're going to walk you through today is called chair pose or utkatasana in yoga,

 So as you notice, she's beginning in a standing position with her abdominal muscles engaged

Now, we will show a modification for this posture in just a little bit.

 Now, to begin to move into the pose, she'll begin with a hip hinge,

 pushing her hips back slightly with the weight in the heels, and bend into her knees.

 Now, I'll have her hold here for just a moment, and notice that she has a natural curvature in her back,

 If when you perform this exercise you find that you have excessive arching in the back,

 and scoop your tailbone under just slightly, or what we call a pelvic tilt.

 Now, from here, Michelle will begin to raise her arms up alongside her ears,

 palms facing one another, and she'll keep the shoulders down and relax.

 Now, notice she's breathing throughout this posture, which is an extremely important element of yoga.

 Well, as you see, it's providing great strength in the lower body.

 She's engaging her gluteal muscles and also her quadriceps and hamstrings.

 One option for modifying this posture is to move the feet to hip bone distance apart,

 From there, she'll then lower into the position, and as an option to modify her arms,

 she'll raise them up to shoulder height with the palms facing one another.

 The next exercise we're going to show you is a high lunge variation.

 The next exercise we're going to show you is a high lunge variation,

 Now, you'll notice Michelle is beginning in a downward-facing dog position.

 For more information about this posture, you can visit our exercise library.

 To move into the high lunge variation, Michelle will start by stepping her left foot up between the hands,

 As she bends into the left knee, she'll raise her upper body up

 and allow the arms to extend alongside the ears, once again, palms facing one another.

 Now, notice here as she lunges into this left leg, the knee is stacked over the ankle,

 Coming to the backside of the body, we find here that her back right leg is straight and strong,

 so if you move into this posture and find that you're excessively arching the back,

 Going to the upper body, we see that the arms are extended upwards,

 One option for modification is to utilize blocks and downward-facing dogs to alleviate any tension on the wrists.

 Michelle will then move into that high lunge variation by stepping the foot up between the hands,

 The other modification is she can release the back knee and shin,

 and flip to the top of that right foot for more stability in the posture.

 She'll then release the hands off of the blocks and come upright,

 The last exercise we're going to walk you through is Warrior II,

 and she'll begin to initiate this movement by taking a large step out,

 Now from here, she'll begin to raise the arms up to shoulder height,

 From there, she'll begin to then turn her back foot in just slightly,

 and position her front foot out at a 90-degree angle with the toes towards the front of the mat.

 coming to a lunge position, at which point the knee will stack over the ankle,

 the knee will draw out slightly towards the little toe of the front foot.

 Coming to the torso, the shoulders should stay stacked over the hips,

 and the outer edge of that foot is rooted down firmly into the mat.

 Now from here, Michelle can remain here with the head facing out forward.

 If she has any issues with the neck, that's a modification option.

 Remember, these exercises should be incorporated as part of a well-rounded fitness routine.

 So if you're looking for exercise tips or other suggestions for getting in shape for the summer,

 or check out our summer series at youtube.com slash ace fitness.

A full photo step by step tutorial on the card is available on my blog.

 First of all I have some die cut leaves and I'm taking my Chameleon Olive pen.

 I'm taking the blender barrel and using the brush tip end of the pen, I gently place the blender barrel over the pen and I leave it for a count of about 10 seconds.

 Once this is done I remove the barrel and start colouring from the top part of the leaf down towards the bottom.

 This will give me a graduated shading over the existing colour and add dimension to the leaves.

 I then take a foam pad and use a leaf shape embossing tool and just gently shape each leaf.

 As you can see here this is the finished leaves with all the dimension added from embossing.

 Next I take Memento Tuxedo Black ink and the Luminous stamp and stamp onto card.

 I take the Red Orange Chameleon pen and again I'm going to use the brush tip end and I'm going to place the blender barrel over the tip of the pen.

 Once the time is up I begin to blend from the outside of the pen towards the middle and as you can see the pen automatically gets darker as I go along the petal.

 Again repeat the process for each of the petals and you can see that it automatically shades it as I go along.

 Once I have completed all the petals it doesn't matter that I've gone outside the lines.

 I'm then going to add a little bit more detail from the centre with the brush tip just flicking it out.

 I then take the blender pen and just remove some of the colour from the stems of the stamen.

 This will allow me to get a more accurate colour for the green.

 Next I take the Chameleon Olive pen and using the bullet tip end on this occasion I colour in each stamen.

 Next I take the Sienna Chameleon pen and colour in the tops of the stamen where the seed pollen is.

 Once I have done this I then cut out the flower and repeat the process a second time.

 Glue each part together after shaping with an embossing tool and I've added a little bit of green to the flower.

 For further instructions please visit my website at www.bakewithbjorn.com

 For more inspiration please visit my blog at www.candronicucardcraft.blogspot.co.uk

 Today I wanted to show you how easy it is to refill your Lysol No Touch Soap Dispenser.

 I refilled it once already so I wanted to show you how easy it is to do it.

 Here's the actual container itself and then we have a funnel for easy pouring and then

 the soap you want to use and then of course a butter knife to prop the lid off.

 Okay, so I'm just going to set my camera down over here so you guys can see me in action.

 Okay so basically what you have to do is you have to take the butter knife and take this

 And what you're supposed to do is put the butter knife underneath the cap just like

 And then you've just got to position it to the middle and then you've just got to put

 So next step is to put the funnel in there, grab your soap and pour.

 So if you get tired of doing that you can always just do it the old fashioned way where

 It's usually faster but if you don't want it to spill anywhere it's also a good thing

 Okay, now that that's done what you've got to do is you've got to pop the lid back on.

 You put it on, snap it until you hear the snap, you go like that.

 You pop it into the dispenser and you lock it until you hear the lock.

 I brought the towel here so I can show you that yes it does indeed work.

 Right here there should be an on button and then it will blink red for a few seconds just

 Keep in mind you can also use water if you don't want to use oil.

 We're going to program 50 minutes in because at the halfway point,

 put some lovely vegetables around it, give it another 50 minutes,

 So what I do, my tip is I take the meat that I get home from the

 the plastic to lift up and then you simply open it and pull your

 I'm not going to put any oil on this side because it's nice and

 add cauliflower, 1 teaspoon of red chili powder, 1 teaspoon of coriander powder, 1 teaspoon

 of garam masala powder, 1 pinch of turmeric powder, 1 teaspoon of ginger garlic paste

Mix well and cook this in low flame till the cauliflower becomes

Meanwhile, heat 1 tablespoon of butter and 1 tablespoon of oil in a pan.

 1 teaspoon of cumin seeds, 1 teaspoon of cumin powder, 1 teaspoon of cumin seeds, 1 teaspoon

 2 teaspoon of ginger garlic paste, 1 and half teaspoon of red chili powder, 1 teaspoon

 So the first thing we're going to do is take a proportion of the flour, mix it with the

 water, the yeast and the yogurt and make what's called a sponge or a flying starter or commonly

 Now we've mixed a proportion of the flour, yogurt, water and yeast together, we're going

 to leave this in a warm place just to allow it to ferment slightly, probably raise about

 This is a brown bread recipe which we call multi-seed, there's two extra ingredients

 in here which just add a lovely sweetness to the bread which are roasted pumpkin and

 Now as you can see we've done the sponge, poolish or flying starter, this is ready to

 put into the bread now and then the finishing of the seeds and the salt.

 The salt and the seeds go in at the end for the last two minutes of mixing.

 This is a traditional mixing machine which we're making bread on, it has a hook attachment,

 there are three attachments for this machine, a paddle, a whisk and a hook.

 The paddle is for pastry, the whisk is for whisking and the dough hook is for obviously

 The machine's on a slow speed at the moment, you don't want to generate too much heat into

 the dough mix because it'll start to overproof before it comes out of the bowl.

 So I'm going to leave this on the machine now for about six to seven minutes, I'm going

 to feel the dough to see whether it's right, then we'll add the seeds and then the salt.

 Now the brown bread's been on the machine for about eight to nine minutes, the seeds

 I'm going to cover this with a damp cloth and leave it to ferment up to about two thirds

 This is called bulk fermentation which is the first stage of the fermentation process.

 Now the brown bread's bulk fermented, I'm going to take it out of the bowl and knock

 If the air's not expelled fully it will rise unevenly on second proof or first proofing.

 At this point you can bulk ferment again but because we did the flying sponge, for me this

 So now if you want loaves, cut the loaves and scale it into rolls.

 The loaves between 500 and 550, for the rolls 30 grams to 50 grams depending on what size

 Roll in what we call a slipper shape and it's almost rolling it in on itself, creating a

 As you can see, turn it over and the join on the two sides, just pinch, pinch the edges.

 That can be left out with a damp cloth or some cling film over the top just to proof

 in the kitchen or it can be put into the prover between 32 and 34 degrees.

 Once it's risen by two, which is double this size, bake in a hot oven at 250 degrees for

 Now the bread's been in the prover, it's ready to bake, just before it goes into the oven,

 This is going to help develop a nice crispy crust, not too much, just enough to wet the

 This is the point where you can perhaps put more poppy seeds on or a different seed.

 This is the most important part about the shape of the bread and also when it's baking

 in the oven, if you cut too deep, all the gas will escape and the bread will collapse.

 This gives it a nice presentation but also adds texture because once it starts to open

 up and proof, that's going to be baked a little bit harder, a little bit crisper.

 When this goes into the oven, I'm going to put some water in there.

 What that will do is it will create a huge amount of steam but in a hot oven.

 That gives big lift, helps create a better crust on the outside.

 This prevents the base from steaming, leaving a nice crusty base.

 Hey I'm Chris and this is how you make a wooden tech deck slash fingerboard.

 What you want to do is you want to start off by getting three pieces of wood.

 These are extremely thin pieces of wood and they can only be bought at certain stores

 But she got birch wood that is extremely thin like this one right here.

 And this one is just a little bit thicker, not much but enough to make a difference.

 I'm not going to glue this together because in some of the other steps I'll show you why

 So what you're going to do is just take your wood glue, put out a piece of paper, or what

 You don't want too much because when you clamp it down it's going to expand and it will go

 Then you just put that on, stick it down a little bit, do the same thing, just put that

 And then what you're going to do is you're going to take a clamp and I like to do this

 And the reason it looks like that is because I can't take off the back part of the truck.

 Once you take both of those off, lay it like that on the board or that.

 Then what you're going to do is you're just going to take a clamp, let me find my clamp

 And then you're going to have to take the board and the piece of wood and clamp it like

 And other than the wood and clamps and wood glue, you're going to need just the tech deck

 And then you're going to need either a dremel tool or a drill with a 1 16th of an inch and

 The 1 16th is going to be for the actual hole in the tech deck like that right there.

 And I will show you the rest of it in a different step because I've got to wait a while for

 But the other day I went ahead and just did the process of taking off the thing.

 This is kind of what your deck is going to look like when you're done except I'll show

 On part 2 I will show you how to drill the holes and cut out the tech deck and everything

 Alright, we're here once again with Scott making one of his Body by V by Salas drinks

 There is a little bit left over so we're going to go a little bit more than the 8.

 The Starbucks Vanilla which is a little bit more than 1 tablespoon.

 Um, no because you know it's not good for you so it tastes way better, yeah?

 Hey, I'm making a quick video on how to make a really awesome drink called kvass.

 So I went ahead and took a one quart mason jar and I sliced about half of an apple really

 thin, just washed the apple, and sliced it up real thin and threw it in there with the

 And I threw a few frozen raspberries, blackberries, some cranberries, a few chunks of mango, just

 I just like things fruity so I kind of filled the jar quite a bit.

 And then what you do is you take your dripped yogurt, I do this every time I drip yogurt,

 If you have an allergy to whey you don't want to make this drink.

 So I poured out a half a cup of the whey and I poured that in here.

 And then I'm going to go ahead and fill the rest of that bottle with some filtered water,

 And you can just set this somewhere warm for two days, but I like to put mine in the yogurt

 But I just throw it on my yogurt maker, it doesn't really matter if the lid's on, it's

 I just throw that in the yogurt maker and if you're doing a half gallon jar then use

 And if you're doing a quart then you just use a half a cup of whey and then fill the

 And if you add a little tiny bit of honey after it's fermented it's really good.

 And if you want to make it into a fizzy drink you can, after it goes for two days, you can

 And set it out on the counter for another day or two and it will get fizzy.

 And I'm not sure how long it lasts in the fridge because ours has usually gone in a

 Hey Pilates enthusiasts, my name is Emmy Cole of Pilates Expanded, and today I'll be doing

 some exercises on the Cadillac with the push-through bar to stretch out.

 Everyone's probably familiar with the straight arm push-through, rounding back and using

 the abdominals to press through for the stretch through the hamstrings and back.

 But what you may not have done before is adjust the leg position to get a different stretch.

 So we're going to do a diamond position with the legs, still rounding back with straight

 arms, using the abs to press through, and you'll feel more of a stretch through the

 And then we'll take the legs to each side of the machine, again doing the straight arm

 push-through, and this time, as you reach forward, you'll feel more of a stretch through

 Bringing the legs back up for single arm, we're going to reach all the way back, opening

 up for the stretch, and then as we reach through, flip the hand, grab the crossbar, and press

 Single arm, bend to reach over for the stretch, and then for a little extra stretch, the hand

 moves back and we reach both arms through, dropping the chest down and opening the shoulders.

 Next, I'm going to turn backwards, and again, a straight arm push-through here, opening

 And then I'm going to scoot inside, lying down for monkey stretch.

 I'll place the toes on the bar, and as I press the legs straight, the torso will naturally

 round up, stretching the back of the legs as well as your back.

 And then I'm going to take both the hands and feet wide on the bar, and again, pressing

 Finally, I'm going to sit up at the very end of the machine for the roll back.

 So I'm going to pull the abs in tight, rounding all the way back, the arms stay straight,

 the bar will finish right above the hips as I extend down for the full stretch here, and

 then engaging the abdominals to round all the way forward, back inside to the start

 So once you've finished a really challenging workout on the Cadillac, don't forget to do

 For these and more great exercises, please visit www.PilatesExpanded.com.

 Today we're going to show you how to change the water filter housing on your refrigerator,

 All we're going to need is a putty knife, a 5-16th nut driver, and a quarter inch nut

 Now, before we begin this repair, there's a pretty good chance that you'll need to get

 to the back of the refrigerator and access the inlet fill valve to gain a little extra

 We'll have to pull the refrigerator forward enough, turn off the inlet water supply, and

 To do this repair, we'll first of all need to remove the grill cover across the bottom

 Just open up the doors, take a putty knife, just go down in behind that grill, and just

 I'll show you the arrowhead connectors on the back of that grill that fit into the spring

 Now with the grill removed, we can next just pull that filter out of the housing.

 Next, just depress the filter lock, pull that straight out and set it aside.

 Just pull that housing forward enough and a little bit to the left so that we can release

 The hook on that strap just fits through a hole on the side of that housing.

 If need be, you may have to remove the back panel and disconnect tubing from the back

 of the valve or lengthen up the inlet tubing from their supply.

 If we need to access the back or the water valve is we'll need to remove this back cover.

 Remove the screws across the bottom, one against the condenser fan motor bracket.

 That will give you access to the valve that we can pull that forward and disconnect the

 We also may want to loosen this screw for the inlet to the housing.

 That will give us a little extra tubing to work with and these two quarter inch screws

 Of course, if we're attempting this repair, we'll also want to make sure that we have

 Just pull that valve out through the back just enough that we can access the inlet to

 Then we're going to depress that little collar and then pull the tubing out.

 Next, we're just going to depress that collar on the top of that fitting and we'll press

 it right up against the housing and then pull the tubing away from the housing.

 Do the same for the opposite one and then discard the old housing.

 Next, we're going to retrieve the tubing, pull that forward and we'll fully insert it

 You need to get a good grip on that tubing, press it all the way in and then pull back

 Next, we'll slide that housing back into position making sure that we don't kink that tubing.

 You may need to go to the back of the refrigerator to pull any excess out of the way.

 Before we attach it, we'll drop that retaining strap into the hole on the side, press it

 back into position and then install the 516 screw, tighten those securely.

 Next, we'll reinstall the filter keeping the closed side of that cap in the up position.

 Then we'll also need to remove the cap on the reject button off of the old housing.

 With a putty knife, we're just going to loosen that up and that slot, pop that off.

 Then we'll slide it onto the new housing and fully insert that filter until it pops out.

 Now, with the housing and filter completely installed, we'll next go to the back of the

 refrigerator and if you've removed any tubing from the fill valve, we'll need to reconnect

 Since we removed the inlet tubing to the valve, when we were changing that filter housing,

 We're just going to make sure that we have it fully inserted into that valve, pull back

 on it to lock it in position and tuck the tubing carefully inside the compartment, making

 Then reinstall the two machine screws that hold that bracket to the side of the cabinet.

 We can also pull the inlet to that filter housing, line that up, reattach the screw

 to the back of the cabinet and just check and make sure that we have no kinks in that

 Then we can turn the water supply back on and check for any leaks, particularly where

 That is easier if we open the doors fully and line up those arrowhead connectors.

 We suggest that you run the water through the dispenser for a couple of moments just

 to clear any air that may have gotten into the lines and then your repair is complete.

Because of its light and simple base, I'm going to dress it up and give it some

 sparkle by adding strawberries and champagne for a festive occasion like New Year's.

 of champagne, sparkling wine or if you want the non-alcoholic version you can use sparkling

I'll let it sit to fully hydrate the gelatin while I work on my milk.

 which is basically half cream, half milk, you can use whole milk, coconut milk, or sometimes

 of vanilla extract and heat it up on medium heat just until the sugar dissolves.

 milk should be just warm to the touch and I don't even want it to steam.

 it off the heat and then I'll add about a cup of the milk into my gelatin and champagne

Using a spatula, I'll stir until the gelatin is completely dissolved.

 don't mix it completely I run the risk of having lumps or the panna cotta won't thicken

I'll pour the rest of the milk into the bowl and I'll give it another gentle

 New Years, I'm using these gold rimmed champagne coupe glasses that'll add extra fancy flair.

 I'm pouring my mixture into the glasses and then I'll let it sit in the fridge for 2 hours.

 and while that's chilling, I'll make my strawberries and champagne compote.

 taking 2 cups of strawberries that I've stemmed and quartered, ¼ cup of champagne,

 you can use sparkling wine or again if you want to make it non-alcoholic, you can use

 sparkling cider, ¼ cup of sugar, and adding it all to a medium saucepan.

 over medium heat and I'll cook it until the sugar dissolves and then the mixture starts

I'll leave it on for about 5 minutes, then I'll turn off the heat

Now that my panna cotta has set, I'll top each one with a spoonful of

 And today will be another tutorial on the Source SDK Hammer Map Making Program.

 But today's thing will be on the carve tool and not disk carve tool so just watch closely

 Anyway, go to your texture filter, get your texture and just make a wall.

 But today we're going to be making doors and windows a really really easy way.

 You have your block here, go to your block tool again and make your grid size 32.

 And now for a doorway, a good doorway size is 3 blocks up and 2 across.

 And what we're going to want to do, we're going to want to make a block that is thicker

 than this wall so that way when we carve the thing it will go right through the wall

 Anyway, so make your block 3 up, 2 wide, that's a great door size.

 Now what you're going to want to do with that block selected, you're going to want to hold

 control shift and C. And then you'll see it turn white over here and bam you have a doorway.

 Now if you do it the other way, if you hold this one and hold control shift and C and

 you move that doorway, there's going to be a block like the doorway right there in front

 So it's the same exact process with making windows but a little different.

 So just same block, make it thicker than the wall, make it stick out on both sides as you

 And then drag it all the way over here, hold control shift and C and it carves it.

 If you would like to see more from Opti on Source SDK map making, sometimes I do advanced

 things, just comment, rate and subscribe to my right over here.

 And if you would like to see some of the maps that I've made, I'll put a link to FPSbanana

 We're going to start making some amazing delicious chicken moulin.

 We're going to add our tomatillos, cilantro, some thyme, some jalapenos, parsley, morjum,

 After we've cut and cubed our chicken, you're going to put chicken stock in your crock pot.

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to season our chicken.

 A little bit of S and a little bit of P. Kind of shake it around a little bit.

 They actually smell a little different and they actually taste very different.

 We're going to add all of these amazing flavors into a food processor.

 And then once you get that smooth consistency, then you can add in your jalapenos and you

 can add your cilantro and your parsley following along with your ground cumin.

 And you can throw in just a little chili powder if you want a little bit more heat.

 So I'm going to throw them into our mixture with the tomatillos.

 I'd say about three to four tablespoons of dried parsley and about half a cup to a quarter

 Next ingredient that we're going to be adding here is our cilantro and you want about a

 All right, so now that we've got our sauce pretty blended, add our two teaspoons of mortum

 You really want a slightly smooth but yet chunky kind of texture.

 Okay, our chicken has been marinating in this amazing bunch of spices, thyme, chicken stock

 So I'm going to pull this out and then we're going to make our sauce, wrap it up in a delicious

 We take our mixture now that our chicken is finished and we're just going to pour it directly

 into a pot and turn on medium heat and actually I'm going to add in chicken just to kind of

 Okay, so now that our sauce and our chicken have been fully incorporated together, you're

 going to take either a flour tortilla or a corn tortilla, a little bit of our mixture,

 Hey everybody, it's Ashley from Ashley's Green Life, and today's green tip is a healthier

 So, as you might have seen in my previous video about how to make gluten-free vegan

 chocolate chip cookies, we love to put frosting on our cookies.

 I also love to use frosting for other things like cupcakes for my girl's birthday parties,

 and I was always looking for something that was a little bit healthier than traditional

 frosting that's usually loaded with powdered sugar and butter and artificial food colorings.

 So in combination with some natural food colorings that I've posted about in this video, I came

 up with this frosting that has organic shortening and my favorite sugar alternative, Lakanto,

 So it doesn't raise your blood sugar, and it has zero calories.

 So those are some of the ingredients I will use to make my frosting today, so let's get

 The ingredients you're going to need are 1 1⁄2 cup of shortening.

 0 grams of trans fat, and it is from sustainably sourced palm oil.

 It's in a granulated form, but I'm going to show you how to turn it into a powdered form

 You'll also need 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract, 1⁄2 teaspoon of almond extract, and a little

 If you're using the Lakanto sweetener or any type of granulated sweetener, you're going

 So this will help us turn basically the granulated sugar sweetener into a powder, which makes

 it to where it's much easier to blend together for the frosting.

 So the first step is to add 1⁄4 cup of Lakanto sweetener to the coffee grinder, and you just

 put the lid on it like this, and then you kind of press that button, and it basically

 just spins it around, grinds it up really quickly into really small pieces, and into

 You can see a little, that's about what it looks like when it's done.

 Then I will take 1⁄2 cup of the shortening, add it to a bowl, followed by the 1⁄4 cup

 of the powder Lakanto sweetener, 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract, and 1⁄2 teaspoon of

 It seems weird, but it actually helps it taste a little bit better.

 And then I use a little wooden spoon here and just kind of stir it all together.

 You could definitely put it in a stand mixer or a handheld mixer.

 It takes a little bit longer, but it's one less thing for me to have to clean up, it

 It'll get nice and smooth and creamy, and it'll look about like this whenever it's done.

 So feel free to do a little taste test just to see if it tastes good or if you need to

 I then take that and transfer it into a little container so I can use it throughout the week

 Another option you could use instead of the Spectrum shortening is to use this brand new

 It's made out of red palm oil and coconut oil, so that's just another option that you

 The mix is just about the same as the other frosting batch does.

 It seems to be a tiny bit thicker if you ask me, but if you're looking for another alternative,

 Since this one turns out usually a little bit yellow like that, I sometimes add a little

 So this one is going to make it a little bit more pink, which is a favorite color in our house.

 Again, you could also use a mixer to mix all this together a little easier, or you could

 So sometimes we put this frosting on chocolate chip cookies, as you see from this video here.

 And we also use it for cupcakes and any other little treats that we just want a little frosting on.

 If you've ever tried a frosting that is maybe gluten free or vegan and a little bit healthier,

 feel free to share your ingredients below or the link to that recipe.

 And if you happen to make this frosting recipe, be sure to tag me on Instagram at Ashley's

 Green Life, and I look forward to seeing you guys for the next green tip.

 With the holidays coming around, it's the perfect time to make it.

 Instead of going to the store to buy it, we're going to make our own.

 A half cup of cane sugar, a teaspoon of vanilla extract, two tablespoons of butter, one tablespoon

 of dark agave, one and a half cups of whole milk, and we're going to use a pint sized

 If you put cold milk into a hot pan, you're going to scorch it.

 So now that our butter is melted, we'll go ahead and add our sugar, our vanilla, and

 We're going to keep stirring these until it's completely dissolved, and then we'll turn

 Everything's completely dissolved, so we'll go ahead and turn the heat up incrementally

 We turned it up one notch, and we're going to try and bring it up to a foam, and then

 So while we're letting this reduce in volume, we're stirring it every 45 seconds to a minute.

 What I mean is you can make double, triple, quadruple the amount.

 I usually freeze them in pint-sized jars, 12-ounce jars, and I pull it out when I need

 Usually when you're making a recipe, it calls for 10 to 12 ounces of sweetened condensed

 So you can see we've gotten this up to a simmer now, and it should really start to smell pretty

 It's starting to froth now, but what we really want to get it to is the foam stage, and then

 So now we've hit our final stage where the milk has foamed and is starting to really

 We're going to keep this going basically until we reduce to about 10 to 12 ounces in volume.

 So as you're keeping it at a low simmer, about the second notch in, reducing the volume,

 just make sure you keep stirring it so that it sticks to the bottom of the pan.

 When you get to about 10 to 12 fluid ounces, we'll go ahead and turn off the heat.

 To give you an idea, if you're looking for 12 ounces, which is a cup and a half, a little

 So when you're working with the pint mason jars, you can freeze pint and basically anything

 You don't want to fill it higher than that if you're going to freeze it, because when

 So we'll go ahead and pour our condensed milk into this mason jar.

 As long as you're below the fill line and above 10 ounces, you should be alright.

 Reason I use mason jars is because I can make two, three, four batches at a time.

 Hi my name is Laura and I'm gonna teach you how to cook healthy.

 So if you have high cholesterol, high sugar levels, if you are trying to lose weight or

 you are just a mom desperate to try to make your children to eat fruits and vegetables

 well you are in the right channel so please subscribe to my YouTube channel because I'm

 The good thing about the tuna salad is that it's a fast recipe and very complete.

 You can add vegetables, you can add some protein and some carbs and the good thing about this

 is that I'm sure that you mostly have everything at home to cook this.

 So I'm just gonna put it to boil for about 2 minutes just in plain water.

 And while that is ready what do you think about beginning with our mix?

 Just remember always to buy the tuna salad that is in water because that's gonna help

 We are gonna give it the flavor with other things that have less calories.

 I have some jalapeno juice over here and I'm also gonna add 1 spoon.

 I let the vegetables boil for about 3 minutes and then I rinse them with really cold water

 And I also have some red onion that I cut in little little squares.

 If you like this recipe, please give us a thumb up and subscribe to my YouTube channel.

 Always remember to add as many colors in your meals as you can.

 Remember that the colors in the vegetables, in the fruits, they have different...

 It means that it has different vitamins that are good for your body.

 I have some lettuce, cut it really really tiny and I'm gonna add some oregano on top.

 Oregano is gonna give you a different flavor that nobody's gonna know what it is but everybody's

 I'm gonna fill up this container with the tuna salad because we are not over yet.

 Just make sure that everything has tuna inside so we don't get holes.

 Let's add a slice of avocado, a slice of jalapeno and just a little red onion so it

 You have a healthy meal with a Mexican taste for a different tuna salad.

 Please leave your comments, subscribe to my channel, visit my other recipes because I

 have some amazing chilaquiles and also a zucchini chicken soup that you won't forget.

 So please subscribe to my channel, like me, look for me on Facebook at Eat Healthy with

 Laura and also if you make this recipe, take a picture and hashtag us on Instagram as

 Obviously, I'm going to be showing you a very quick and easy video, just showing you 3 easy

 The first one is pretty standard and that's naturally to wear a light colored lipstick.

 Obviously, we know it's the holidays, so a lot of people want to do a lot of reds and

 berry mixed colors, which are fine, but for more of a fuller effect of a lip, those colors

 tend to shrink the lips a little more, versus the nudes, which don't.

 So the lipstick I'm going to be using is by NYX and it is in the color Cream and it's

 Now if you have pigmented lips, kind of like mine, mine are a little bit pigmented, first

 thing that you would want to do, because mine are a little more pigmented than normal,

 the first thing you're going to want to do is just take a concealer, anything that's

 So I'm going to be using, you can't even tell, but it's by Sheer Cover, their concealer,

 You just gently want to pat it over your lips and then you want to apply your lipstick over

 And when you do this, it's just going to give your lipstick it's really true pop of color.

 Also before you apply concealer, make sure your lips are moisturized, because concealer

 can emphasize the dryness of your lips, so just make sure your lips are moisturized.

 So I'm just going to take a little bit like this, and you're just going to, I have a mirror

 And you're going to take the NYX lipstick and you're going to apply that.

 And then I also just take with my ring finger and I also blend it in, because with the warmth

 Step 2, that was step 1, concealer, your new lipstick and your concealer.

 If you want fuller looking lips, lip gloss is basically the number 1 easiest way to achieve

 And especially if you have one with plumping properties, that's also a good thing to do.

 But what I'm going to be using is NYX Mega Lip Gloss in the color Natural.

 Okay, and then once that is applied, you can pretty much see the difference in how the

 And it just makes my lips kind of look automatically a little more fuller.

 Okay, and then step 3, and it's probably the most unique tip, but it's the one that I've

 The most unique tip is you're going to be taking a white eyeliner, and this is also

 You're going to take this pencil, but if you do have a darker skin tone, I would recommend

 Basically you're going to take this liner and I'm just going to warm it up on the back

 So you're basically going to take this liner and you're just going to outline the outside

 of your lips, but don't do your whole lip because then it's just going to look really

 So you're just going to start with the cupid's bow and you're going to go just slightly over

 And this just naturally just highlights that area, but trust me it does make a difference.

 You're going to do the same underneath, just right in the middle and you're going to also

 And then once that is done, you're done with the white eyeliner pencil.

 And basically what that just does, the natural highlighting around the lips, it just kind

 of makes them pop out so it's more kind of like 3D, but not really.

 It's just a really great trick just to do, just to throw that in to make your lips look

 And one thing you do want to avoid is, I mean people used to do it back then, like in the

 90s, where they would use a lip liner and they would draw their liner slightly outside

 It just makes you look like you put your lip liner in the wrong place.

 So yeah, I hope you guys enjoyed this little mini tutorial and I will talk to you guys

 I guess that's why I was never a puppeteer, but aren't these adorable?

 These are simply made out of inexpensive craft felt and they are bat napkin rings.

 Obviously, black craft felt, a little teeny tiny bit of white, of course for the eyes and the fangs.

 All the little scraps over here are important because they become the stuffing inside the bat body.

 Now, the first thing that I do is I take my bat body and I hand stitch it.

 Really, I did all of this without the sewing machine, just with a needle and thread.

 I hand stitched almost all the way around and I left a little opening along the side

 where I stuffed in, you know, I took my felt that were the scraps and just cut little tiny pieces and things

 And then just finish off your stitching, tie it with a knot and you have your little bat body.

 Next step is to take your pipe cleaner and you want to attach the pipe cleaner

 and you can bend it as you go and I hand sewed this as well, all along the back of the bat wing, along the top edge.

 And the cool part about that, obviously, is that you can really bend his wings around,

 You could put them close together, you know, how they kind of cover their eyes and everything

 And then once that's together, you take your bat body and you stitch him, of course, onto the nice side.

 I just stitched him right along the very top edge because when I come with my ring here,

 which is simply this long band, fold it over so that it has a little bit of weight to it,

 stitched on the three sides down the long edge and up this side,

 I got the wings, I got the body and then that makes it nice and sturdy.

 This isn't coming off and it helps hold the bat body onto the wings as well.

 Once you have that together, you cut out your little tiny triangles for the eyes,

 little longer triangles for the fangs, and I just used a little bit of craft glue to glue those on.

 It took me a couple of hours, you know, because it takes a little time to do it,

 but watch some TV, watch some crazy scary Halloween show or something like that

 while you're putting them together and start thinking about the ones we're going to make for Thanksgiving.

 I'm going to show you how to crochet these handbag handles right on the top of the bag.

 Okay, so I'm going to show you how to make these different bag handles on the Mimi bag.

 The first thing I did was I found the center stitch on each side of my bag and I marked

 I'm just going to continue to single crochet around until I get to here and then I'm going

 And when you reach this chain, don't work into that stitch, just start working directly

 And I had 36 chain stitches, so I'm going to single crochet 36 times in this long chain.

 When I get to the opposite handle, I'm going to do the same thing, work around, and then

 Okay, I've worked all the way around and I'm back to my first handle.

 So I'm just going to tuck this one behind so that you can see better what I'm doing.

 So I have single crocheted right up to the bag handle where it starts.

 And now I'm just going to make one single crochet in each stitch all the way around

 And I'm going to work all the way around this handle, all the way around, around the other

 handle, and then I'm going to slip stitch to join and fasten off.

 If you wanted a wider bag handle, you could just do one more row.

 Okay, I have done my other, my additional row of single crochets all around the bag,

 and I've reached back to where I began, slip stitched to join, and now I'm going to fasten

 You have these nice long handles that can either be worn on the shoulder or just carried

 Hi, I'm John Harrington and we're going to break out and break down the wide variety

 Next, we're going to show you one of the equipment kits we use when we're traveling

 Each kit is different and serves a very specific purpose, so let's take a look.

 This is our audio kit and when we're gathering audio for our video or sound to go with slides,

 we need to make sure we have the right microphones, whether it's a wired, handheld, wireless,

 wireless lavalier, whatever we need, we need to make sure that it's in here.

 It's a small pack, it's a small Tamrat case, so let's have a look at what's in the audio

 This is a cover that allows us to use the wireless microphone and attach it to our belt.

 What's really nice is you can plug direct in with two quarter inch microphone jacks.

 You can also use the T-microphone and the microphone jack to capture wild sound.

 What's really great though is it captures to a CF card, so you don't have to worry about

 Just like photos, just like files, you put the card in the card reader and drag the file

 When you're out and about, it's important that you have a windscreen on, otherwise you'll

 The Sennheiser adapter allows you to make this microphone wireless as opposed to hard

 When we're doing a report for someone in particular, it's real easy to slip on what's called a

 mic flag with a windscreen, wireless, and report just like that.

 We were doing something for another broadcast network or someone else, this mic flag is

 In addition, we have straight XLR to quarter inch so that we could plug straight into the

 M-Audio and go straight into an XLR mult box or other industry standard XLR jack.

 In the front here, there's a whole collection of audio patch cords.

 Again, the quarter inch with the quarter inch adapter to the smaller plug.

 Also, on the outside, in case we need to have a microphone up at a podium, this is

 actually an adapter so that we can connect the mic to a podium and screw into a mic holder.

 First we are going to do is get rid of the inner section, this one.

This is where your blade is mounting on later on in this tutorial.

 Now I am going to drill a small hole right here, about 1 or 2 millimeters.

The small one is to attach the spring to and the other one is to attach it to the slider.

 Now I am going to attach one end of the spring to this hole and the other end to this one.

 Now I am going to drill a hole right here in the corner for a nut and a bolt.

 You also need to drill another hole at the side, about here, for another spring.

 I am going to cut out a little bit of this section so the locking mechanism will fit in there.

 Now if you press this one, it will unlock and it will slide out.

 One end of the string is attached to the ring and the other end to this mechanism we made earlier.

 I am going to drill another hole in the side for another locking mechanism.

 I have created this little piece and it is going right here on the side.

 Now I can't drill any holes in the side because the balls are sliding right here.

 Now when the blade is sliding out, it will lock in here so it won't go back.

 If you want to go back, you can pull this and it is unlocked and you can slide the blade back in.

 I have made eight brackets and I am going to solder them to the side.

 Now you can put some belts through it and attach it to your arm.

 Graco Nautilus is a group 1-2-3 car seat, suitable for children weighing between 9 and

 3-in-1 as your child grows, and also as a whole family solution for your second car,

 Nautilus has reinforced steel, energy absorbing foam, EPS, and reinforced side impact protection

 by the padding, and the five height positions that enable the seat to grow with the child.

 and in all cases, as from 18 kilos, you have to use the car seat without the harness.

For children, you can use the same configuration and only need to adjust the

In order to provide more comfort for your child, you can recline

Nautilus also has some extra features that other similar seats don't have.

 The storage compartment where the child can place his toys, the armrests and the cup holders

Greco Nautilus 3-in-1 is a very adaptable car seat that can be used

 Okay, we're doing a 2001 Civic here today and redoing some door panels that the fabric

 I've got one done and I'm just going to show you if anyone needs to know how to take off

 Pry off this part with a flat screwdriver, gently pry it apart, and then pull out.

 And you'll see the two screws under here that hold, sorry, the two screws, there's one in

 You need a small screwdriver, there's a flat, little flat black cover in here.

 Take a small screwdriver and from the top pop out this little cover.

 I'll show you what the inner, the door panel, that's the old one, this door.

 That one doesn't look that bad but this is what the door panels, the other ones look

 like, that passenger side front one's pretty good compared to the rest.

 And this is what they're looking like done with a black velour.

 It's like a simulated suede, type of micro suede, something like that, I don't know what

 You can probably do it with it on the door, you'll have to take the armrest off but actually

 no you can't because you have to take the door panel off to pull the armrest off so

 forget it, you have to pull the door panel off if you're going to recover your door centers

 Okay, taking all the door screws off, the two on the door handle, or sorry the door

 I've stuck this clip back on, this is the clip that holds it, retains it in place.

 When these are on, like this, I'm just going to gently place it on.

 Anyway, take a rag, I'm going to try and hold this like this, and you'll just run it back

 I'm not going to be able to do this now because I'm doing it with one hand.

 So run it between the handle and the round trim piece on the back, and it will grab onto

 You can try reaching under there with a screwdriver through that little hole in the back of the

 And now all we have to do is pull the door panel off after we unhook the door handle.

 This pushes, it's holding the little rod that actuates the door opener.

 So you're going to push this, again, trying to do this one-handed.

 And then you just lift up on the handle, and this whole thing pulls out.

 And when you put it back on, you'll simply slip the rod back in the hole, and then push

 this back around, and it clips over top of the rod again to retain it.

 So anyway, you're going to have to take this door handle off again, and then it's basically

 grab the door bottoms and pull out, and all the snap fit fittings will pop off.

 So anyway, we had to continue working, and this is what the black insert looks like now.

 There's still a tiny little bit of adhesive in there in some spots we've got to get out,

 Hello ladies and gentlemen, Lopti here and I actually just got some green face

 paint in the mail and I've never dealt with green before so I thought it'd be

 actual Elphaba costume and I don't have the actual outfit or the right hat but

 I'm gonna make something work and just see if I like it, show you guys how the

 just pull my hair back so that it's not hanging in my face while I'm painting

 and I've noticed that her hair actually kind of gets pulled over her ears so

 And that's my cat knocking at the door in case you're wondering.

 As I've explained in many videos before I get all of my makeup from Mehron.

 They're amazing, they have the best face paint in my opinion and this is from the

 green before so this could be interesting and we'll just see how it goes.

 Oh and these sponges are just generic sponges you can get them anywhere I just

This can be rather messy you definitely don't want to see my sink

 So when I'm doing body paint I always start off with just a base coat that

 covers everything and then kind of dab it on after that to fill in any points

 that are thin just to cover up and you can do that as much as you need or as

So here I am green and obviously if I was going to do the full costume

 I'd make sure that every little detail was covered in but since I'm just doing

 than the rest of her so I'm just going to use a brush get a little black on it

 Once you buy always use with makeup for your lower lid don't use eyeliner just

 right hat I really want to get a nice pointy witch hat but for the time being

 So I hope you have enjoyed this mini wicked tutorial feel free to leave

 comments below and if you do like it let me know I may be purchasing that pointy

 hat and who knows maybe I'll make a final tutorial when I actually decide

 enjoy being blue but you know whatever I hope you enjoyed please let me know

Today I'm going to show you how to make salmon and shrimp in pineapple

Here I have my shrimp already seasoned with some 1 teaspoon of garlic powder,

 1 teaspoon of salt, 1 teaspoon of paprika, 1 teaspoon of black pepper, a little bit of

Now I'm going to pour some olive oil, 1 tablespoon of olive oil in my

 I have already seasoned the shrimp with the same seasoning I used for the salmon.

Here I have 1 can of pineapple juice or you can use 1 cup of pineapple juice.

 I'm going to give this a little stir, the shrimp a little stir.

We are going to come back in 5 minutes and show you the final product.

 It's been 5 minutes and the salmon and shrimp and coconut pineapple is done.

 We are going to serve salmon and coconut with some rice, basmati rice and vegetables.

This set with its three interchangeable blades is simple to use.

 Using the finest blade, you are able to cut 3 mm wide strips of courgettes, carrots or all sorts of firm vegetable types.

 This is essential for courgette spaghetti or dishes cooked in a wok.

 The small knurled screw on the side allows you to change the knife blade quickly and easily.

 The second type of blade cuts 6 mm wide slices which are ideal for preparing soups, vegetables and salads.

 The third knife blade cuts even slices of equal thickness suitable for frying or roasting.

 The finest blade supplied with the Julienne set is used for dishes made in a wok and allows the strips to be cut perfectly and quickly.

 The slightly wider vegetable strips are ideal for salads or raw vegetable dishes.

 The easily interchangeable blades used in the Julienne set allow you to use a great deal of imagination when preparing fruit and vegetables for a plate, a buffet or even an attractive dessert.

 Oh my gosh you guys I have a new addiction and thank God it is healthy.

 get into the pomegranate because it can be a little tricky to get access to

 half an inch or so just until you can get a good view of the sections of the

So I'm going to cut off just a little bit more and use a plastic

 cutting board because the juice will stain a wooden cutting board.

 the inside of the pomegranate you can see all those yummy yummy juicy seeds in

 cutting this pomegranate I want to show you just how much juice one little seed

It is so juicy which is why when you're cutting the pomegranate you

 want to make sure you use a plastic cutting board and not a wooden one

 because it will stain your cutting board, it will stain your clothes, stain your countertops.

 They can be very very messy but I'm going to show you a technique that's

 to score the pomegranate down the sides of each little section just like that

 Yummy yummy seeds but the seeds are hard to get to so I'm going to show you a

 bowl of water and then you want to hold the pomegranate over the water in the

 water whatever and then just slowly break it apart be very gentle and as you

 break it apart the seeds will fall to the bottom and that white membrane will

 or red that means you are being too rough and you are breaking the seeds and

 going to discuss several useful techniques for using a ruler-based safety compass.

 As you can see there is a wide variety of ruler-based safety compasses,

 the tip of a writing utensil at various points along a ruler and a pivot wheel at one end.

 The compasses that allow for a continuum either use a small dial or friction to hold the slide

For slides with dials, the dial should be loosened before moving it along the continuum

Otherwise, it's fairly easy to damage or destroy the dial and slide.

 For slides that only use friction, the student should be careful not to twist the compass or

For our purposes, I will use this friction compass for my demonstrations.

 Because the student journal is difficult to keep completely flat, teachers may make

 photocopies of the page or have the students cut the page out of the consumable book.

 using a ruler-based safety compass, it is important to have a level surface with no

 obstructions, so remove all impeding objects from your work area.

 it's easiest to start with a clearly marked point, also called a center point, then place the center

 of the wheel, which I call the pivot point, as accurately on the center point as possible.

 Often, it is difficult to hold the paper down while holding the pivot point at the same time.

 I have found that it is easier to create an arc by using one finger to hold the pivot point and

 still holding the pivot point with my finger, then rotate the paper half of a turn.

 holding the paper in place with my palm, I finish drawing the circle.

 is to create and strike an arc using the circle and the pivot point.

 circle and strike an arc that starts on the circle and ends on another point on the circle.

 I've created my first interior arc with the same radius of the circle.

 step 2, but this time I will place the pivot point on the intersection of the first arc in the circle.

 I will repeat this process four more times until the design is complete.

 As the final step, I will erase the original circle to reveal the geometric design.

 Move the compass's slide well beyond the line segment's midpoint.

Being careful not to move the slide, strike arcs from the opposite

In addition to bisecting the original line segment, this new line segment

 Now, we are going to use a compass to create an equilateral triangle with all three sides

Move the slide until the point on the slide is on the other endpoint.

It is important to remember not to change the compass's slide position.

 The point of intersection of the two arcs is equidistant from both this endpoint and this

By connecting this new point to both endpoints, I've created an equilateral triangle

Now, I will strike an arc that intersects both sides of the angle.

 reposition the pivot point on this intersection of the angle and the arc.

 available in Talent Development's Geometry Foundation's workbooks.

 the time to view this video, and we welcome you to view other instructional videos in Talent

 The bachelor loves a juicy burger, but he also loves sushi, Thai food, Spanish tapas,

 So, today we're going to make balsamic chicken, and I'm going to show you how to make a gourmet

 You know, I love this balsamic chicken, because chicken sometimes, let's face it, it can be

 boring, but the balsamic reduction will really wake up the chicken.

 The mushrooms are going to cook down, so they don't have to be perfect.

 At this point, I'm not going to add salt, because salt will remove the moisture in the

 I want the mushrooms to be crispy and caramelized on the outside.

 It's really amazing how garlic can just transform any dish, especially cooked garlic and olive

 The whole kitchen has this amazing aroma of garlic and mushrooms.

 Okay, in our food processor, just blend a couple tablespoons of olive oil, your parsley.

 So we're going to spoon that neon green, beautiful, fresh parsley olive oil sauce on our plate,

 This balsamic reduction is so concentrated that you really just need a few dots on the

 And what I like to do, what I like to do now is just add a little bit of fresh lemon.

 Crispy outside, moist and delicious inside, and the parsley olive oil cuts through the

 We're going to play the chorus riff two times before the vocals start with a little slight

 Here's what the first riff that sets up the chorus sounds like.

 So what I'm doing is I'm playing a G chord, just focusing mostly on the bottom of the

 So if I hit some of the top strings, that'll sound alright, but the bulk of the action

 So we're playing G to a C chord, root note on the A string, third fret, up to an E minor

 And then on this very first time only, there seems to be a C chord coming back to the G.

 I'm not sure why they did it on this one time only, but that's what I'm hearing on the CD.

 And then we start all over, with the exception being we're not going to go back to that C

 So instead of playing the C, I real quickly just strike the open strings in order to get

 So on the CD, you can hear an F sharp note on the second fret of the E string coming

 Okay, so we have two rounds of that to set up the chorus, and then we continue this for

 three more rounds during the chorus while the vocals are happening.

 So the very fourth round of the chorus, once the vocals have started, sound like this.

 That E flat chord just being played where the root note is on the sixth fret of the

 Okay, so let's go back and review everything that I've just talked about for the chorus.

 We'll play the two rounds to set up the vocal line, then we have three rounds, and on the

 So now at the end of the chorus, there's going to be a tag, and the tag sounds like

 That's an E minor with the note D added, third fret of the B string.

 Now I'm going to move my fourth finger down a fret, so now it's an A chord.

 Play the G again to a D chord, but we're going to have F sharp in the bass, and I'm going

 to use my thumb to play the F sharp in the bass, which is found on the second fret of

 Now an E minor 7 chord I'm going to form this way, which is the root note E is now played

 So I have that root note here, open G, third fret of the B string, and then we can also

 Okay so let me go back now and play that entire tag at the end of the chorus.

 We've done the main riff, we've done the pre-chorus and the chorus.

 Now after the first chorus we're going to go back into a verse, repeat the pre-chorus,

 repeat the chorus, and then coming out of that chorus the tag is going to be slightly

 Back to the same riff with the A, with the sus 4, the A, the sus 2.

 But now I go into a B power chord, an A power chord, G, D over F sharp, A sus, remember

 Now I'm just going to play the A by barring with my first finger and then add the sus

 And then we lift off that sus so we're just playing a regular A chord.

 In addition to the studies on the healthy benefits of eating chocolate,

 Anybody that enjoys making chocolate can go to their local candy store,

 but most importantly is the fact that it brings you back to your childhood.

 You know, remember when mom used to make the peanut butter and jelly?

 Now, to get really fancy, I want to put a little artistry to the chocolate,

 and by doing this, I just take a little bit of cocoa butter and color.

 And you're able to spray then a little bit of coloring into each one of the cavities.

 Put a little bit of red, a little bit of yellow, and we got some color.

 We scrape the mold, place it down, and the end result then is a shell.

 And in this case, we're blending the peanut butter and the milk chocolate.

 So you could do a homemade jam if you wanted to get really fancy.

 Okay, the next thing we're going to do is we're going to clip off the end of the bag

 and just basically take the shell, and we're going to put a little bit of jam,

 And I have some of the peanut butter and mixture already in a pastry bag.

 In other words, we're going to put a little bit more chocolate to seal the candy.

 We're going to be back with more of our chocolate peanut butter sandwich

 And there's a couple of other funky little arpeggio shapes for sweeping practice.

 What I'm doing there is I'm using a couple of four-string patterns that I like to do

 because they sound a little bit more interesting than the more typical three-string shapes.

 So what I'm doing is a couple of major arpeggios and then a minor one

 So we're doing a C major which is pulling off from the 15th to the 1st.

 And then I'm going to the minor inversion which is this shape here.

 We're going to do, what is it, 19th to the 15th on the 1st string.

 So again, keep the speed where you can hear every note like that

 And there's one more that I was doing as well, mixing the last two patterns up.

She saw the wereplatypus cupcake I had to make and I'm pretty sure she did

 well, it's kind of gross to have your hair loose when you're around food.

 on top of another cupcake and then hopefully carve something that remotely resembles a

 Um, spreading frosting on cake that's, like, got the crumbly section exposed.

But I'm going to just try to get a layer on there and then hope that I

 Okay, so right now I have a lopsided yellow lump with chocolate cake crumbs peeking through

 And there you have pretty much the biggest example of Shannon shame I've ever given you

I'm pretty sure even a kindergartner could do better than this and I'm really thinking

 that the writing thing needs to work out for me because I definitely don't have a future

 What up y'all, it's XCity coming to you with another unboxing video.

 We got the Air Jordan 29 blackout in the official colorway of black, white, and black.

 We got the Legend blue joints in the back that we did a review on as well.

 I mean, it was necessary for the 29s to come back in the all black colorway.

 It even kind of looks like a different shoe altogether, seeing kind of like a tonal colorway

 The Air Jordan 29 features the newest technology from Jordan brand, which is the Flightweb

 upper, which is tailored to fit every player and also uses a technology in the past that

 they introduced on the 2028, which is the Flightplate and other shoes as well.

 You also have at the bottom of the shoe, the exposed zoom on the forefoot, which is

 actually really great and a lot of players are enjoying that as well.

 You got the all black bottom, white jump band on the front, exposed zoom air on the forefoot,

 and you also have that bridge that connects the heel to the forefoot.

 A lot of people were actually talking about how they disliked the feel of when they landed

 This time they've answered a lot of people's reviews and a lot of people's comments on

 The midsole, all black, features that new and improved cement print that you see on

 the box of the Air Jordan 29 and you have that Flightplate branding as well right there.

 The entire upper part of the shoe is made out of a mesh material in that Flightweb design

 So the Flightweb layer on the upper is actually fabricated or made in Italy and like I talked

 about the 29s earlier, there's different thread counts in specific areas that need

 So with that technology they allowed to make a shoe that fit like it was custom made for

 So in comparison to the Legend Blue, you still have all these patterns on the shoe, on the

 blackout pair but it's just a tonal colorway so it kind of looks like it's just one entire

 You have the white Jumpman right there, 23 in the back, Jordan on the right pair.

 New and improved dynamic flywire on the eyelids, the shoes come with your circular laces and

 you also have the embroidery of the Jumpman, the top right there in white, finished with

 For more information on how to purchase these shoes, you can contact us at 514-846-8887.

 You can also contact us in the West Island area at 514-626-4434.

 Brassard location at 450-443-8887 and our newest location in Laval at 450-681-8777.

 Today we're going to show you how to install the Chevy Equinox GMC Terrain Ionic Brackets.

 There's a piece of plastic trim that runs along the bottom of the rocker panel.

 So what we're going to do is we're just going to grab it and pull it to the side.

 I'm going to slide a washer over top of there and a serrated flange nut.

 All we're going to do with this serrated flange nut is put it on a little bit.

 We want it to be able to wiggle around a little bit so the bracket can hang down in place.

 Also for the first bracket, we've got two different size support plates.

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to take our clamp assembly and it's going

 We've got a 9-16 head bolt that's going to tighten right down into that.

 We're going to push it up on our support plate while we do that.

 Once we get that in place, we're going to tighten that down with a 3-8.

 Now that it's tightened down just a little bit, we're going to go ahead and slide the

 We're going to attach a washer and another serrated flange nut.

 And here, we're just going to get the serrated flange nut started on the threads to where

 All right, now we're going back to the second location for a bracket.

 So the smallest bolt plate, we're going to set the bolt plate right in place.

 And we're going to install this one just like we did the first one where it's not all the

 For the rear bracket, we're going to use the shortest bracket and the longest bolt plate.

 We're going to set the board in place on top of the brackets and line the bolts up to where

 Next, we're going to loosely install our serrated flange nuts onto the bolts coming out of the

 We don't want to tighten them down all the way at this time because we still want to

 What we want to do is at the same time as we tighten the hardware, we want to make sure

 we're lining up the board to the body of the vehicle and do any minor adjustments after that.

 Now once we've made sure all our hardware is tightened, we want to go back and tighten

 up our 9-16ths hardware for our clamp setup and also tighten down our lock nut, which

 four chicken thighs, one small carrot, half of an onion, two cloves of garlic, I

 have some green chillies this is optional you can omit this, then two inch

 white part of leek, salt and a cup of fresh breadcrumbs, one egg, pepper and

 to a long, you have to when you buy a chicken thigh it's not this long

 so what you have to do is take the chicken thigh and take a fillet knife or

 any other kind of a knife and run the knife through the meat and make it

 longer and even this side run the knife through and take the flesh to the other

 filleting the chicken take all the ingredients and put them into a large

 bit of oil or even a little bit of water or another egg into the mix and

 this is how it looks like after and take the chopping board again and spread the

 chicken thigh on the board and take a spoonful of mix and put it inside or

 even the middle of the chicken thigh and slowly roll it over like this and

 this is how it looks like after so if you are using the one with the skin on

 it's really nice but because of the the oil I didn't use the skin so if you are

 using the skin put the finger underneath the skin and put a little

 bit of butter under the skin and bake it or you can spray very well and bake this

 really nice and golden brown you can serve this with a little bit of salad

 If you're anything like me, then the mere mention of the word stew can bring back memories of your mother's stew.

 It's a light kind of lamb stew that you can eat any time of the year.

 For my Lancashire Hot Pot, I've got 900 g of lamb cut into cubes or you could use lamb chops if you want.

 I've heated 3 tablespoons of oil or you could use butter in a pan and I'm gonna start by browning the meat.

 Fry the onions for about 5 to 10 minutes until they start to go brown.

 Once the onions start to brown at the edges, turn the heat right down and add in the flour.

 To construct the hot pot, take yourself a nice large casserole dish

 Then finally, cover the top of the hot pot with the remaining slices of potato.

 Now pop on the lid and cook this in an oven at 170 degrees Celsius for about 2 hours.

 Now pop it back in the oven for about 30 minutes, uncovered, to brown the potatoes.

 In my humble opinion, one of the best ways to serve Lancashire Hot Pot

 is inside a giant Yorkshire pudding, thereby reigniting the War of the Roses

 Don't forget to subscribe to my YouTube channel for more delicious recipes.

 Hi, it's Joan Diamond, and this is the second video on how to play the Wild Hunt, because

 So the tuning for the song is, again, it's in C, F, C, F, C, F. You tune these four strings

 So C, E goes down to C, G goes down to F, D goes down to C, G goes up to F, I mean down

 And then these two down here, these two go up, and you know, they might break, but probably

 B goes up to C, a half step up, and E goes up to F, a half step up.

 The opening chord is fifth fret, sixth string, so I'll just do 5, 5, X, 5, 4.

 Next chord is a finger on the second fret, fifth string, and a pinky on the fourth fret,

 Then the next chord is a middle finger, sixth fret, sixth string, skip a string, and then

 Then the next thing he bars, the second fret, three strings, 5, 4, 3, and then he puts a

 And basically the chord, it's just a ring finger on the fifth fret, fourth string, and

 And he goes back to this chord, and then he does that part just during the intro, kind

 So it's on the fourth and third strings, you start seventh and fifth fret, fifth and fourth

 He starts with this chord, just a simplified thing that I showed you before.

 So then the second part is a middle finger up on the fourth fret, fourth string.

 And this chord is a finger, a pinky on the fifth fret, fifth string.

 He just takes two fingers on the sixth string and the fourth string.

 It's just getting familiar with the chord shapes and everything.

 I got the blues before sunrise, now tears are standing in my eyes.

 Let's take a look at the chords we're going to use in Blues Before Sunrise on E.

 You'll see my right hand first in close up with the tablature, and then my left with

 When you hit the bass strings in this section, hit two together and down straight away.

 Today I'm going to be showing you a trick called the Sonic, which is one of the fundamentals

 A Sonic consists of the pen or pencil being placed between two fingers, in this case the

 middle finger and the ring finger, and spinning behind another finger to land in the finger

 Now the Sonic can be done palm up or palm down, it's just the same.

 For starters, take your pen or pencil and find its center, which I know is the eye on

 my insert, and then place it just slightly below the two fingers that you want to start

 And have the back of the pen lying on the thumb flap, or the webbing of your thumb and

 What you want to do now is you want to apply pressure on the webbing of your thumb by pressing

 down with your middle finger and kind of pushing up with your ring finger.

 And what that will do, that will build pressure, and so when you release the thumb, it will

 Kind of like the first half of the charge motion, but the part about the Sonic is that

 So what you want to do, when you swing from here to here, you actually want to try to

 bend your middle finger down and then close the index finger and the ring finger together

 And then the momentum from the swing will give it the force to swing around like that.

 And the catch is just from, when it goes like this, you want to move your thumb down so

 A lot of people when they're doing the Sonic, they do one thing wrong and then it makes

 Now there's actually another trick called the Neo Sonic, but I'll be giving a tutorial

 Right now you just want to learn how to apply pressure, which I thought was the easy part,

 Which would be to release the pressure, have it swing forward, and then have it spin around

 in that small section behind your middle finger and pivot between the ring finger and the

 A lot of people have a problem with the grip on this too, I guess that's just with any

 So what I actually do when my hands aren't grippy or they're slippy, I just take a wash

 towel of some sort, I wet it and wring it out, and then I just take my spinning hand,

 which is my right hand, and just clasp in on it for about 10 seconds or so.

 And then so there's some moisture in my skin and it gets grippy again.

 The Sonic can be done with just about any two fingers, it can be done with the ring

 There's nothing really more that I can tell you about this besides it takes practice,

 and just make sure that when you are doing the trick, you're applying just the right

 amount of pressure so that it can still pivot, it still has the force to go around and not

 just fall down, or that you apply too much and that it just flies off.

 So it takes not that long to get the force right, but that's just one of the things people

 have trouble with, and also the actual swing behind the middle finger part.

 Which if you close in with your pointer and ring, it shouldn't have room for the pen to

 And the momentum from the swing doesn't allow it to go either way.

 We're going to be unboxing the brand new state of the art HS20 camera.

 Now Billy's going to be unboxing this camera from this white box.

 So in order for us to have these videos ready for you the day this camera is announced,

 Of course, when you go buy one of these in a store, it's going to be a much prettier

 And just as a warning, not all the accessories that sometimes we don't get right from the

 We first got the owner's manual and also the software CD that's inside the camera.

 The camera does have a mini HDMI port so you can buy an optional HDMI cable for high

 Because the camera runs on AA batteries, it includes four alkaline AA batteries.

 We highly recommend to buy rechargeable AA batteries like nickel manned hydride batteries

 You can also use lithium one time use AA batteries and they give you about 700 shots per charge.

 They're a luxury but they're nice if you're going on a long trip.

 It uses a CMOS EXR sensor now as opposed to just a CMOS sensor.

 I noticed there's a few extra pins on the hot shoe there too, Billy.

 And what that means now is that you can use, with the optional flash that we offer with

 the camera, the ability to take simple external flash without having to manually control the

 So it comes with two optional flashes that we're going to try to offer you.

 One that's a very basic flash and of course one that's a little bit more advanced that

 So we have a 2000 Subaru Outback Legacy 2.5 and we're going to get in here.

 And what we're going to do is we're going to change out these gaskets around here.

 You can see there's a lot of oil leaking around the gaskets, like especially around the spark

 So what we're going to do is we're going to go in here and we're going to take off the

 I kind of cleaned them up last night but taking it for a quick drive allowed for a lot of

 Got one down here in the middle, one up here, one here, one down there, and we've actually

 Okay, now to get to the other side, which is down in there, we have to remove the washer

 Okay, now that we've got all of those off, we can just pull this housing right off.

 I've got an oil drip pan underneath to catch all the extra drippings.

 You can see down in there, that's what it's going to look like when you get it off.

 Okay, now what we're going to do is I waited to remove the spark plugs just because I didn't

 Even though the spark plugs might not be in the worst of condition, they've been having

 Make sure it's in there good and snug and tight and nice and even so that when you go

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to show you how to make a granola bar.

 I featured it in my polymer clay doll food video and it's highly requested so I'm going

 First you'll want to start off with some ecru clay or tan clay.

 To start off you're just going to roll a ball of ecru clay and then just sort of start pressing

 Then just sort of press down the ends so it looks kind of like a granola bar.

 You can also use a poly blade to make it sharper but I kind of like the roundness of the edges.

 You don't need too many of these but you can make as many as you want.

 Take your X-Acto knife or needle tool and start placing the black specks, I'll call

 You don't have to put it on the bottom unless you really want to.

 So then do the same thing that you did with the black with the ecru clay and you're just

 going to make it as ragged and granola textured as possible and chop it up.

 It sort of helps if you go into swishing like back and forth motion with the poly blade.

 You're going to need a lot of this so just do as much as you can.

 Next take a needle tool or your X-Acto knife and start placing the granola chunks onto

 So there's your finished granola bar and bake at 275 for 15 minutes or 275 degrees.

 could also use Creamy Caramel, more mustard, or maybe even close to cocoa.

I haven't played with that one yet, but any of those more subtle of the

 bone folder or an empty ink pen, you could use either of those.

If you don't have a heat tool, you're not going to be able to do

Just gonna smear it on there until the whole thing's good and covered.

Then what I do to get the excess off is just kind of tap or flick the back

 Now, while this is wet, this is where I'm gonna use my tweezers.

 and I'll probably block this out so you guys don't have to listen to it, but you're gonna

 heat the whole surface of your card until it's completely done.

Okay, and once you've used your heat tool to emboss this, it's gonna be really shiny.

 It's gonna be hot for just a couple seconds, but then you'll be able to touch it right away.

So you get this really cool, I hope it shows up, really cool, shiny alligator skin

You're gonna take your ink and your sponge and just go ahead in a circular motion.

 And you can experiment with the other colors and see which one you like.

 that's gonna show up, but it just got rid of the white lines and made it look a little bit more

Now, I'm gonna take your scallop punch, turn it over so you can see where

 you're punching, and we're gonna take bite marks out of it, just like the gator himself bit it.

 And I'm gonna do three because it's always a better number than two.

Then I'm going to finish up my project and you finish up your project.

 My name is Aida and today I'm going to be showing you how to make tostones rellenos

 We're going to be using today about one pound of medium shrimp that I have already cleaned,

 deveined, shelled and I just sprinkled a little bit of adobo on it.

 Of course we're going to be using two green plantains or platanos verdes, a few sprigs

 This is where I'm going to cook the, it's a mix of tomato sauce and onions and sofrito.

 This is where I'm going to cook the shrimp in and we're going to need canola oil, salt

 I cut them in about almost a two inch length and I had them soaking in salted water for

 So I just drained the water and now I have this pot here with oil.

 It's at medium high heat and I want the whole plantain to cook.

 So we're going to cook it for five to seven minutes, making sure that they don't brown.

 They're bubbling a lot because they have water on them, but you don't want them to turn dark.

 That's what we want because we're going to smush them and we're going to fry them again.

 So I'm going to take these out and then we're going to smush them.

 See it's not, it's very heavy and he told me a little trick to put this plastic so then

 You're going to press down and here you have the little cups of the tostones.

 And the easiest thing to do is you just lift it and here you have it.

 So we're going, I'm going to smush all of them and now we're going to start with the

 Okay so I just put about a tablespoon of oil on the bottom of the pan and I'm going to

 And let me know if you want to know how to make this sauce here.

 So I'm going to put in about, I'm making such a mess, about three tablespoons of the mojo

 So we're just going to cook this for a couple of minutes and we'll set it to the side off

 Okay so now the shrimp are done and now I'm ready to re-fry the tostones relleno.

 So now, this is why I decided to fry them in a sauce pot because this way they're not

 Instead of going through all the trouble, it's easier to fry them just like this.

 So now we're just going to fry them until they're nice and golden brown and we will

 All you do is, as soon as the tostones are out, you sprinkle it with a little salt, then

 You serve it with a simple lettuce and tomato salad because you have your starch with the

 plantain, the protein and the veggies with a nice beautiful fresh salad.

 And after this, there's going to be a little box that says subscribe.

 Dangerous enemy of Batman and world's prettiest supervillain is the look we are trying to

So starting off by priming the face to allow the makeup to last longer and controlling

 the oil and shine to create a smooth surface for the foundation which you will apply all

 over your face using your fingers to get the most flawless look.

 take over Gotham, Ivy still doesn't have any dark circles so you're gonna want to take a full

 foundation to give you more coverage and apply this up your neck and onto your face.

 step to this villainous look is taking a green shadow, mine's in the shade exotic green, and

 harsh and then you want to blend it out with a angled brush and some lighter green shade.

 look even more fierce apply it underneath your chin and onto your neck.

 hypnotizing eyes, you're gonna start off with an eyeshadow base and this is in white pearl.

 on liner in tropical green and applying it in an upside down U shape to your crease.

 a dark green shadow and then take your finger and wipe along the edges of your eyes.

Using a black pencil liner, apply it to your waterline and then into your inner corners

 of your lower lash line and then take a light green shade and put it on the inner corners of

There you have it for the eyes, just curl your lashes and apply a mascara on the top

Then I mix a dark brown and a black shadow from the Wicked Dreams palette and framed

 my face by applying it to my eyebrows and this really darkens up the look and makes your eyes

Poison Ivy's lips are laced with venom so line your lips with a black color and

 this is the most important part of the look because the lips are her secret weapon.

 kills her enemies with a deadly kiss usually after professing false love or affection for

Take a cream shadow and fill in the middle of your lips and I use the shade hunter

 green one and ran it down my forehead, down my nose and onto my cupid's bow.

 green and contour the sides of your nose starting from where your eyebrow is and then downwards to

Then take the same green cream shadow and starting at your mouth go upwards

 and create vines because Poison Ivy can control plants with her mind and keep going upwards until

 you're going to start and wing it out and then create vines going upwards onto your forehead

 and then connect the two together and make them really just kind of simple right now and get the

Next bring the Ivy down your neck onto your chest and bring it up higher to

 your shoulders where it will fade backwards and so it gives a really cool effect where it's like

Then on your other shoulder bring the Ivy forwards from the back and bring it onto

Then apply NYX's Roll-On Shimmer in Olive to different spots that have the little

 leaves because this will add more sparkle and shine and just add it to any areas that you feel

To make this Poison Ivy stand out more outline all around the design and you could use

Next make the leaves more intricate by adding the liquid crystal

 liner into the leaves and this adds the little veins that leaves have and it's like glitter and

The very last step I promise is the fake lashes and these falsies are called Star and

Just put them on with some glue and then touch up any eyeshadow or

 liner that you have to and these make a big difference trust me.

 crazy jungle like hair the night before you want to apply Healthy Sexy Hair Beach Spray on wet hair

Then you are going to braid up your hair into six braids and when you

 wake up in the morning you're gonna have some gigantic hair on your head.

 clip it back from the sides so I did it twice on each side and it just creates a really nice look

 and it makes it so you can show off all the beautiful intricate makeup that you did.

 take some artificial plants and place it over the bobby pins or any areas that you like and this will

 make you look like a jungle goddess or a villain that's gonna take over Gotham and eventually the

Lock in your hair with some big sexy hair, spray and play harder and BAM!

 Don't forget citizens of Gotham be careful of anyone whose name begins with poison.

 I think they made the right decision on who to send home for the first episode.

 So I just got off the treadmill and yes, it's that time of the day again.

 Alright, well we're going to have some vegetarian meatloaf because I didn't become vegetarian

 So first I guess I'm going to get started by cooking the carrots in the microwave.

 I'm going to stick this on the KitchenAid and start that mixing in just a second after

 It's a little bit more work than mixing some chopped meat with some breadcrumbs and egg,

 I'll just mix those up until, not until they're like a powder, just until they're like chopped.

 After I get all the separate things together, it should go pretty quickly.

 In just a minute I'm going to add the chopped up nuts and the onion and garlic and seasoning

 And then I think there's only one more ingredient after that and that's the breadcrumbs.

 So we're going to get that all mixed up in the pan, top it with the ketchup, and stick

 It doesn't smell like meatloaf yet because it hasn't cooked yet.

 The thing that used to turn me off about meatloaf was actually putting my hands in and mixing

 the meat with my hands and it was ice cold and slimy and greasy and bleh.

 Well, I mean, I guess you could do that with meat too and you wouldn't have to touch it.

 But I'm going to put that all in the pan and cover it with the tomato.

 We're having it with some scallop slash, what do they call those?

 So Mark is kind enough to step up to the plate and give it a tasty taste.

 They recommended all cashews, but I didn't have enough cashews to put in.

 This is just like the cook-off in Parks and Rec when Ron Swanson makes the beef burger

 I just got out of the shower after I just got off the treadmill.

 Hey, did you two call each other because you're both wearing Paul Frank T-shirts?

 Actually, yeah, I wore this because I saw she was wearing it, no lie.

 Hi everyone, my name is Victoria Pakin from EasyRecipesWithATwist.com.

 And today I'm here with my friends at RecipeLion.com who asked me to produce a video on those beautiful

 For this recipe you will need about 15 to 16 mushrooms, olive oil, salt, pepper, cayenne

 pepper, breadcrumbs, lemon, juice and zest of the lemon, baby dill, parmigiano-reggiano,

 Ok, now, after it has been blitzed, take your mushrooms and take the leg out and make

 the place, make room for stuffing inside and blitz it together.

 Ok, take your stems, legs with the herbs and the garlic, transfer to a bowl and now mix

 in all the rest of the ingredients, like breadcrumbs goes in, parmigiano-reggiano,

 all of it goes in, thyme leaves, just take the thyme leaves, oops, oops and oops, take

 About half of lemon juice goes in, a little bit less than half of lemon.

 But in this recipe I made sure that there will be no water at all.

 And today's lick of the week is going to be using fretted notes with harmonics.

 But combining these two sounds, you can create almost like a harp-like effect on the guitar.

 And this lesson is going to use some chords that use harmonics inside the chord, or on

 And it's also going to use some just fitting almost bass lines that can imply chord progressions

 We're going to start here at the 8th fret on the 6th string, 1st finger.

 Then we're going to have our pinky get a stretch up here and lightly lay your pinky across

 the 12th fret so you can get the 12th harmonic across the 4th, 3rd, 2nd, and 1st string.

 I play the 12th fret now, not a harmonic, on the 4th string and slide it down to the

 Alright, and then we come down to the same shape that we did at the 8th fret, but now

 So the stretching is going to be pretty large here, but it's a good stretch workout.

 And then we're going to have the harmonics again here at the 7th fret, but you only have

 So you pick that, then the harmonic of the 7th on the 4th, 3rd, 2nd, then back down to

 Now, while I'm doing all this, I'm trying to keep these two notes on the bottom still

 So we can jump up here, play our 3rd finger at the 7th fret while you're hitting those

 7th fret, finger it on the 5th string, then the harmonic at the 5th fret on the 2nd string,

 then the 3rd string, 5th fret, and then your pinky at the 7th fret on the 3rd string.

 Once again, try to let all those notes ring together as much as possible.

 Obviously, the two that are on the same string can't, but everything else can.

 This time I'm doing the 7th fret harmonic across the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th strings.

 We have the 10th fret here on the A string, and then the same note basically on the G

 Then we finish it with 3 harmonics while these two notes ring underneath.

 We have the harmonic at the 12th fret on the B, then the D, and then the high E.

 Alright, so this is just to inspire you to come up with some of your own kind of harmonic

 We have the chords obviously, but you can just find an interesting, any kind of a bass

 You know, just kind of mixing it up, adding some harmonics on top of simple bass lines

 Please give me some more lesson ideas at the forum, GuitarLessons365.com.

 Why don't we go ahead and get something to eat out and make something to eat for myself.

 As you see, there are seven shrimp scampis, or seven pieces of shrimp on this plate from

 I'm going to put them here in the microwave for about three and a half minutes and then

 They're quite tasty, particularly when I mix them up with something.

 Now while my shrimp scampi cook, I'm going to go ahead and get some drumsticks.

 There's actually chocolate and vanilla, regular vanilla in here.

 I usually, when I get ice cream, I usually go to UADF or Flubs or something.

 Yeah, you see how the sauce has come from cooking it for three and a half minutes.

 For shrimp scampi, good topping is actually cottage cheese in my opinion.

 Absolutely the best kind of cottage cheese there is is Kraft cottage cheese.

 But yeah, I gotta be going here and I'll go ahead and check back with you and I'll be

 Um, we just put the batteries in the back so we should be all set.

 If the washer does not spin, then it is clogged up and I need to reposition the clothes if it doesn't spin.

 So, I'm going to hold the washer up so I can easily put these in here.

 So, the reason why I don't put soap or detergent in there and I just put water in there is because it can get all jammed up inside the drawer.

And, don't worry about the leaking again because it happens a lot.

 It helps drain the water out, and it might break it on spin because it might go too fast.

 And, in the back, I've got a speaker right here for washer sound effects.

 And then, that hole is where you can put a hand crank in, and it spins the drum.

 Whether it's a hackamore, a bozel, what type of bit it is, headstall, bridle, whatever

 you want to call it, there's different ways to put these things on a horse.

 One of the things that causes a horse to have what is called a quote unquote hard mouth

 is when someone really pushes and forces things in a horse's mouth.

 So what we're going to do now is have someone come in and she's going to put things on her

 So what she's doing is, notice what she did with the halter folks.

 She didn't take it off, she unsnapped it so there's still some type of control gain here

 A lot of people will step on the lead rope just to have something so the horse can't

 She's actually got her horse trained to dip its head to make it easier to put things in.

 You want to be gentle because a lot of horses don't like their ears messed with.

 This horse is obviously used to this, but she's still being gentle.

 Then once it is, she's going to put the halter back on the horse.

 We've made videos about how having a halter on a horse is important.

 It doesn't affect your apparatus that you have for control of this horse.

 You can see what a nice fit this is, how good this is, and how easy it was to do this.

 Now she's making sure that she's getting it over the brow band, that her bit, everything

 The horse is comfortable with it because everything is a proper fit.

 Sometimes some people will take this lead rope and they'll just put it back like this

 They would make a single loop around the horse, bring it up a little bit, and then they would

 go ahead and just tie it here, let it droop and hang a little bit.

 There's a lot of things you can do with this, but one thing you don't want to do is unsnap

 Hi everybody, this is Daniel Walters from Winding Woods Ranch here in Commerce, Georgia.

 And I wanted to talk to you a little bit about your training tools and what you're going

 A couple of the options that I use would be either a harness, a one-piece harness like

 The problem with harnesses, most harnesses, is they have a lot of hardware and the birds

 This actually has a leash that's attached to the harness that goes on the bird and it's

 made of shock cord so it's actually very forgiving and will give.

 The other option we have would be anklets, which are made out of leather.

 And they also have an area that's cut out, you can see around the leg.

 So once they're on, they're very flexible and very soft on the leg.

 And this will actually get a lot longer and be really, really gentle on their legs.

 Or you can put a clip on it like I did here when we put the birds out to just sit.

 These straps are long enough that the clip stays away from them so they don't sit and

 And this little piece on the end is where you clip your straps.

 So I want to show you very quickly how you would actually use the anklets and put them

 In the beginning, you may put these on and leave them on so the birds can get used to

 Because in the beginning, they may pick at them because it's something new.

 Now, when we send our babies out, we put these on ahead of time so they're used to it and

 But you'll take the anklet and you'll actually put it around the leg, feed it through the

 Once you pull it through, there's a slit where it'll stop, just like that, and then put them

 And eventually, you can take these off and not have to leave them on all the time.

 There's a piece of leather and a knot that stop it from going any farther so you can't

 In the beginning, when you first put these on, the birds may play with them.

 I think it just creates problems because they continue to do it because they're able to.

 I'm going to pull this through here and put a little knot right here at the top.

 So there's no way they can move it in or out in the beginning when you're first using these.

 And you may leave these on in the cage for a few days to get them used to it so they're

 As long as there's not a hole or something where this can get hung up, it's fairly safe.

 But generally, I will take everything off once they're actually trained.

 Now as far as hooking it to the actual leash, what you will do is you will take both of

 And that's how we hook our leash to our straps from our anklet.

 To take it off, you can either unclip each one one at a time with the clip like that

 Or you can just simply push the ends, one end and then the other end, and push it through.

 And you can see the length here works really well so it's away from the bird.

 I like to set the birds out and get them used to just sitting still.

 In the beginning, you want to start these sessions very, very slow and short because

 you want to end on a good note and you don't want them to get frustrated and keep jumping

 One more thing I want to address really quickly is how to actually hold the bird.

 And I'll see if I can't get this done very quickly and show you.

 As you can see, that's pretty normal as far as when you first start working with these

 What I wanted to show you is that once you get a hold of him, see the straps?

 You want it so he has enough room to stand but that it's very, very short.

 And a lot of times I'll even put my foot right here and put my finger over the foot.

 I want them to get used to this and get very comfortable with my finger on the foot.

 By keeping these straps really short, if he flutters like he did a minute ago, tries to

 I feel like if they get a ways away from you each time they get nervous like that and use

 I hope this was helpful for the customers that have ordered the products that they're

 And if you have any other questions, feel free to go to my website at www.danielwalthers.com.

 In this Cala al Fresco recipe we will be grilling pepper crusted maple glazed salmon steaks.

 Firstly for the marinade, measure out 3 quarters of a cup of maple syrup.

 Prepare two salmon steaks by removing the skin, although we bought ours ready skinned.

 Now place a quarter of a cup of black peppercorns into a strong plastic bag

 and using a rolling pin or wooden mallet, crack the peppercorns.

 Remove the salmon from the marinade and spray each side with vegetable oil.

 Pour the cracked peppercorns onto a small plate and use them to coat the top side of the salmon steaks.

 Grill the steaks on a high heat for about 3 minutes, pepper side up.

 During the grilling process, keep an eye on the side of the salmon steak.

 When the whole side has turned a pale pink, the salmon should be moist and perfectly cooked.

 For this one we're going to use a 9 by 13 pan, which I have right here, which I covered

 I think the hardest part about this is getting all the ice cream sandwiches open.

 And we're going to pour that on top of the ice cream sandwiches and stick that in the

 Kind of a shame to, like I said, too bad there's not 13 in here.

 Now, we're going to stick that in there because I'm going to make a topping for that one.

 But at the top is going to be powdered sugar, some heavy cream and some sour cream.

 And I put our mixer back here tonight because it's going to take a while to beat up.

 A cup of sour cream and three quarters of a cup of powdered sugar.

 And that we're going to, you only need to put your ice cream sandwiches with the sherbet on top.

 And it's probably better if it's just softened rather than really melted.

 And then when this gets to soft peaks, you're going to keep that sherbet in the refrigerator or in the freezer until it freezes.

 And then you're going to pour that on the top and you've got a wonderful dessert.

 And like I said, you wouldn't have to be as careful when this is a little bit, you want to take it out of the freezer when it's just stiff enough that you can put something on the top.

 You're going to need to take it out about 10 to 15 minutes earlier than when you need it just to make it a little bit easier to cut.

 And I thought some, we can't get over that red, white, and blue theme that we had a couple weeks ago.

 So I thought it would be really pretty with some blueberries on top.

 Hi guys, today we're going to be showing you how to make shaljong goshd, which in English is meat and turnip curry.

 Not everyone likes this dish, but it's very good for your health.

 But a few years ago, she went to a friend's house and she really liked the way they had cooked it.

 What we're going to need is just over half a kilo of goat meat, one medium and one small onion,

 half a garlic, one inch of ginger, two turnips, one teaspoon of salt, one teaspoon of chili,

 one teaspoon of dried coriander powder, half a teaspoon of turmeric and half a teaspoon of cumin seed,

 Of course, you can use lamb meat or beef, whichever one you like, but we just have a preference for goat.

 Then we will add one cup of water, the spices, salt, the chili, coriander, turmeric and cumin seed.

 Then we're going to add the chopped onion, the ginger and the garlic and the tomato.

 We'll put everything together and then pressure it for approximately one to one and a half minute.

 Then we're going to cut it into pieces and then we'll cut the chili lengthwise because it looks prettier when it's in the dish.

 After the one and a half minute, you should just turn the heat off and let the pressure come down itself.

 Once that's done, you open the pressure cooker and you'll notice that the meat isn't fully tender yet.

 This is because we want to pressure it again after the turnip has been added.

 Once the lid is off, we're going to cook it on high heat until all the water has dried.

 Once that happens, we can add the oil and we'll keep cooking that.

 Once you notice that the oil has started to separate from the curry, we can add the turnip, the coriander and the green chili.

 We're going to add half a cup of water or even three quarters is a lot of water for this dish at this stage.

 Again, this will just be for one and a half minute because we don't want to overcook the meat or overcook the turnip.

 While that's getting done, we've started making the roti because the food will be done in no time and turnip curry goes really well with freshly cooked roti.

 Once the one and a half minute of pressuring is over, then we can open the lid and you'll see that the meat is done.

 We'll keep cooking that until we notice that the curry becomes a little bit thicker and the turnip starts dissolving into the curry.

 Alright, we're going to talk about efficiency and this here is one of my test cells.

 I will be showing an example of how much electrolyte we add in order to get this cell to perform

 Alright so here in Hawaii we use distilled water, Manahuni, shameless plug for them.

 And so what I'm going to do is I'm just going to add some to this cell.

 As you can see that's just plain distilled water in the cell and pretty much everyone

 knows there's not going to be any production to speak of when we hook this up.

 So what I have up here is the gauge and it's drawing like almost zero amps and I don't

 So we're going to add a quarter teaspoon of baking soda and see what happens.

 Okay I zoomed in a little bit and as you can see I have my trusty measuring spoons.

 I'm just going to take some baking soda which I have here in the jar, level that off and

 I'm going to just drop that little bit in there and see what happens to our production.

 As you can see instantly from the edges it's starting to bubble already and the cloudiness

 is mixing and actually we still have some chunks of baking soda in the bottom but it

 And as you can see right here from the amp meter it looks like it's moved to about five

 We're looking at it at an angle so it doesn't look like it but straight on it does.

 Okay and that's the production of this cell with 12 volts about five amps and only a quarter

 About a little over half maybe two thirds before you can start seeing clearly.

 Okay, a couple of things I want to go over before I actually start.

 Right here are two low spots and we want to take these low spots into consideration.

 Basically what I'm going to do is I'm going to use this area to pretty much even out,

 level out, whatever you want to call it, this area to the point to where it can be as close

 Okay, right here what you see me doing is using the number one and one half numbered

 guard with the adjustable clippers fully extended and I'm basically just trying to get this

 The red line is basically showing at which point I will start to pull out and that is

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to use the very tips of the number two guard to start

 And then as we complete the second part of the push up and pull out technique, I'm going

 And this is basically allowing me to get full range of the entire guard.

 Now the red line you see here is basically at which point when the very bottom of the

 guard gets to this point I want to start my pull out technique.

 As I demonstrate the push up and pull out technique, I also want to bring to your attention

 that I have the number two guard on, adjustable blade fully extended and I have the guard

 Okay what I've done here is I've put this particular clip into slow motion.

 Reason being is because I want to see, oh I'm sorry, I want you to see exactly what

 I'm doing with the number two guard with the bottom blade fully extended.

 I'm basically just picking through the hair and as I pick through it I make a real quick

 What this is doing is it's starting to blend the lighter hair with the more darker color

 This is the clip you've just seen played in slow motion and now it's being played back

 Right here I want to use the very tips of the number two guard to work along this area

 And basically what I want to do is if you notice where the hair is lighter and then

 the hair is darker at, right here in that middle part is where I want to focus at.

 We're going to use the number two guard with the adjustable blades fully extended and what

 we want to do is we want to just pretty much work through this area.

 If you notice I'm not trying to cut too much hair, I'm just pretty much teasing this area

 What I'm going to start doing here in a second is start to twist and turn the clippers to

 allow myself to be able to get to the areas where I can't get with the clippers firmly

 Right here in a second you'll see me use the very corner of the guard to pretty much get

 in that area where you see I'm working at to try to bring the taper out best I can.

 If you notice where the hair right here is definitely two toned, we're going to come

 Alright, basically what I want to do here is I want to start with the number one and

 one half number guard in a downward motion with the adjustable blade fully extended.

 And the area we want to focus on is right here where you see the red line.

 I've been saying on a few of my videos that I'm going to show you how to fix bent swords and knives for your action figures.

 And I just haven't found a moment to do it, but I'm finally deciding to do it now.

 Because I just bought this Marvel Legends Series 2 Drax figure, and one of his knives is seriously bent.

 I'm also going to be fixing this scabbard or sheath of Cobra Commanders that I got a few weeks ago.

 First thing you're going to need is a pot of boiling water, a bowl full of ice cold water.

 If you just fill a bowl full of water and then drop a few ice cubes in there, my ice has melted already.

 I do have tweezers, but I'm deciding to use these tongs because they're made of wood and they transfer less heat.

 Anyway, you need to bring the water to a... not really a boil, just right below a boil.

 If it's really hot and a rolling boil, you run the risk of maybe damaging your paint or if the plastic hits the bottom of the metal, it might melt a bit.

 Alright, so you need to take your knife or whatever it is, your sword, gun, whatever, and just drop it in there.

 If your water's not that hot, you need to submerge it for a while, but if it's very hot like mine, right below a boil, you should be able to drop it in and take it right out almost immediately.

 It's going to make this plastic really soft, and then we're going to reshape it with our fingers and drop it in the cold water.

 And you'll see it start to go back to its proper shape when you put it in that hot water because the plastic has sort of like a plastic memory, if you will.

 So anyway, just grab it and straighten it to where you would like it, and just drop it in that cold water, holding it in the position you want, you know, so keep it kind of tight.

 And really, after a few seconds, it should be pretty hard again, pretty stiff.

 But if you want to do it properly, leave it in that cold water for a while, and then even after that, drop it in and leave it in the freezer.

 Not in the water, take the plastic out and put it in the freezer by itself, and let it stay like that for a few hours or preferably overnight.

 I'm just going to let that sit in there for a while, and I'm going to move on to the scabbard.

 Anyway, so I'm just going to drop this in there with my tongs, let it sit for a minute.

 This is slightly thicker plastic, so I'm going to let it sit in there for a little while longer.

 But with this, since it has this piece that goes around the chest, that goes around the body, you really don't want to reshape this, or at least I don't, because this one's in a good position.

 So when you dunk it in there, just try to dunk in the part that you want to reshape.

 But this one was in the package real screwed up for quite a while, so I'm going to let that sit in there for a little while more.

 It's going to be pretty hot when you bring it out, too, so just be careful of that.

 It needs to be very soft and flimsy when you take it out of the water.

 Alright, so I'm going to grab it, put it into the shape, the proper shape that I want it.

 You might have to bend it a little bit if it's really, really bent.

 Drop it in there, holding it again, always holding it in the shape you want.

 When you're holding something like this, since it's a scabbard, and you're going to be putting a sword in there, it's a little bit hollow,

 because if you twist it, then it's going to harden twisted, and you're not going to be able to fit your sword in there.

 Okay, we got 2 cups of sharp cheddar, shredded, finely shredded.

 And then we got the Mexican blend, Monterey Jack, cheddar, and cream cheese.

 We got, that's called a pint of whipping cream, which is 2 cups.

 Okay, after I spread the breadcrumbs and crushed cornflakes on top,

 Lit is unborn, they're made, and they're made just like anything else through hard work.

 A few points that we're going to cover is your feet, what your feet do, the bounce to pocket speed,

 so how fast that ball is dribbled and then pulled to your shooting pocket,

 your hips again, your release, how to stop your momentum from going left to right,

 and the direction that you want to be going when you shoot the ball.

 So a couple things, when you're going right, anytime you're dribbling the ball right and you're going to pull up,

 So if I'm dribbling right, my left foot goes down, and again, it's just the pivot to get square,

 The left-right, the one-two step is very much a rhythm thing, and we want to keep that, we want to stress that.

 Now if I'm going left, my inside foot again is my right foot, I'm going to plant it, pick the ball up, pivot,

 This is how fast the ball dribbles and then is pulled to your shooting pocket.

 So when I dribble the ball, and I'm going to pick it up, so if I'm going right, I'm going to dribble it,

 When I dribble it, I'm going to pick it up, and I'm going to pull it as quick as I can to my shooting pocket.

 And then on the dribble, your hips got to be flexed, your knees got to be slightly bent.

 This is going to help with the rhythm of the shot, how quickly you get the shot off.

 So as I dribble, once the ball hits the floor, that's when my hips are going to drop and my knees are going to bend.

 As I pick it up, I'm ripping the ball to my shooting pocket, so I dribble, I'm bent, I pick it up, I pull, I'm pivoted,

 It's just the preparatory work to get into your shot that is very important when we're talking about shooting off the dribble.

As I dribble, I'm bent, I pick it up, I'm pulling it across my body,

Once I'm square, I'm just straight up and down, same shot every time.

Even if you're going more straight, and you're not necessarily going left to right,

 but I'm going more straight at my defender, if I'm dribbling with my right hand, my left foot's going down,

So I'm pivoting, I'm pulling my back foot through, I'm sat down, and I'm extended.

 If I'm dribbling with my left hand, I'm on my right foot, my right foot goes down, pulling it to my shooting pocket,

Something you want to get out of, or you don't want to do, is you don't want that little shuffle at the end.

So if I'm going right, and if at all possible, I can take one dribble, one step, and pull out of that.

Hips down, knees slightly bent, ball to my shooting pocket as fast as I can get it there.

 Your game will expand, you can shoot off the dribble, and you become a more effective player.

 I'm Brian Johnson, and in this episode of Better Cocktails at Home,

 Some people use bourbon, but bourbon has got to be a higher-proof bourbon,

 You know, again, you can obviously alter the ratios as you like.

 The older the Manhattan recipes, probably the more vermouth they have in them

 because it comes through, especially when you use it in this ratio.

 Most top load washer repairs will require some disassembly of the

 To access control board components, simply remove the screws at the rear of

 Now insert a putty knife under the main top to release the two spring clips.

 Use a flathead screwdriver to help release the tabs to remove the tub cover.

 Use the half-inch socket to remove the trunnion block mounting bolts

 When the repair is complete, reposition the outer tub on the drive tube

 Reposition the capacitor and motor shield and reinstall the screws to secure.

 with the catches on the outer tub and snap the tub cover into place.

 plug the power cord back in and confirm that the appliance is functioning properly.

I'm going to be doing a blue and green tutorial today using the 88 matte palette.

 Then applying this light color all the way up to my brow as well.

 I'm also going to use this same green for my lower lash line, but I'm using a green liner first to make it a little more vibrant.

 Then applying this turquoise shade to the outer half of my crease.

 Just blending really lightly so that it's still noticeably two separate colors.

This pencil ended up being more of a purpley blue than I wanted, so I went over it with a turquoise eyeshadow that I just used to blend.

 To finish I lined my waterline and I kept the liner on my upper lash line a little thinner than the blue so that the blue still peeks out from underneath the black.

On my lips I'm wearing Chanel Rouge Coco Shine number 46 and L'Oreal True Match blush in Barely Blushing on my cheeks.

 Hey, Greg James here from Greg James Fishing World and I'm at this beautiful beach in South

 I'm here hiding in my secret spot away from the maddening crowd as the old story goes

 and I'm about to show you a unique trick on how to clean octopus.

 and I've got a piece of octopus tentacle, a fairly large one, and it's covered in gritty sand.

 this is a way to clean octopus when you catch it and clean the skin off.

 show you how to pickle it with some spicy pickles and a few other things as well.

And what you do is you grab some really, the sand's a little wet but it'll do

 for the purpose, some really dry sand and the idea is to use the abrasiveness of the sand to take the

So here we go, we're taking the tentacles and the suckers and all that off

As I work, plenty of sand and you're probably going, Gregory how am I

 thick textured skin, using the sand as the abrasive substance to clean it all down.

 stripping the octopus down, the long tentacle, as you can see there, little bits of skin coming off

 tentacle gets to the narrow end, add a little bit more sand, just take your time pulling that skin

It gets a bit narrow, nice little piece came off there and it might break so you've got to be a

This is a way that I actually clean the octopus that I used to catch in the cray pots

 because they'd come in there looking for a free feed and believe me as rock lobster fishermen

 know an ockey in your pot's not a good thing because the crays never win.

And we're done, in that short moment we've got this rather sandy looking

 delight of octopus tentacle and all the gunk, all the skin and all the little suckers are now just a

We'll clean them up later, I won't leave them lying around and what we've got

 here is a clean, look how white that flesh is underneath, octopus tentacle.

 these up now and I'll show you just how white and beautiful they are then we'll prepare them and

 jar them in some pickled vinegar and a few other tricks I've got up my sleeve.

 Just coming down here onto the beach, low tide, a few people out on their kayaks, we've got an

 intertidal reef right along this part of the coast, the speck shelter, I love it.

 call me the corny point lifesaver when I was a little tacker, I'm not a little tacker anymore

 as you can all see but I still love the ocean and all the things that are in it and still okay to go fishing.

 And there we have it, it's not bush tucker but it is, it's sort of marine bush tucker.

 show you very simply how to prepare this for a pickling episode.

 a couple of things to add, ingredients to add to it so get yourself a sharp knife, this is actually

 a Japanese chef's knife, very thin heel, that's the difference between that and the European model

 and you don't have to cook it, this is raw and you cut it, look at that, beautifully cut that

 piece off just to trim it up and that's the tentacle there and we're going to slice this up

The big trick is to cut it thinly, it's less is more if you know what

So what I'm going to do is cut this just a few pieces to show you how to do it, watch the

 fingers, make sure there's five there when you start and five when you end and then very carefully

 with a really sharp knife start cutting pieces of your octopus, look at that, nice and tight,

 nice and sharp I should say and there you can see little pieces like that, all useful, not too thick

 and it doesn't have any of the suckers or the skin on it which does make it quite tough.

 Like I said it's not everybody's cup of tea so to speak but it's a delicious way to prepare this

 octopus for a seafood snack at Christmas or New Year, people can't have enough of it, you can

 skewer it, put it on toothpicks, just more and more and more people are just grabbing it and eating it

 that's about two-thirds vinegar, I'm going to put one-third salt water, so now it's just a matter of

 adding the thinly sliced octopus to your jar of salt water and vinegar.

 use salt water, salted water is okay but if you can get water from the sea it's a lot better.

 So you basically just pack this stuff in and it'll sit in the vinegar, you can really pack it in

 there, not not solidly so but you could put a whole one of those tentacles would be great for that jar

 and then I've just got a little bit of bottled seawater here, you just top it up, get rid of any

 oxygen that's in the jar and eventually that octopus will sink as it soaks in the juices and

The reason I dilute it is some people, it upsets their breathing to have

 the vinegar too strong and it can mask the subtle flavours of the octopus.

 get yourself a pickled gherkin and slice just a couple of pieces, maybe I'll do three or four,

 of really thin gherkin slices, fresh gherkin, straight into the mix and over a period,

 this will store for six months but over a period of about three or four days, the enzymes in the

 gherkin will actually interact with the octopus and soften it beautifully.

 like this, if you did this trick with fish flesh, the fish flesh will eventually break down and

 dissolve, you need the strong octopus flesh to make this worthwhile and then as my parking piece

 out of my own garden, I've dried these over the last six months or so, I've brought along two little

 rocket chilies, these are just ones I've grown in the garden, I call them rockets, so they're

 subtropical chilies but they grow in a subterranean climate, a couple little chilies,

 you could break them up if you want, the heat's in the seeds as we all know, I just drop them in,

 they will also soak up the water over the next few weeks, I'd leave this for at least a week

 in the fridge, got to refrigerate it, must keep it cool and away from the heat and the direct

 sunlight, put your cap on, nice and tight, you don't need a vacuum sealer, you don't have to

 do anything else but basically what you've got is pickled octopus, two-thirds, one-third water,

 a couple pieces of chili just to give it a spicy flavour and then two or three pieces of sliced

 gherkin to break down the enzymes in the octopus meat, it's a ripper meal, hope you enjoy it, tight lines.

 this trick is you want to have whatever you're grinding on waxed properly.

 on the ledge, you would want this outside of the box right here to be waxed because

 when you're in a crook position, the nose will be sliding against the box.

Alright, now for foot placement, what I do, I place my front foot right behind

 you want to be kind of parallel to the ledge but at a slight angle.

Make sure you aim the end of the truck right here when you're grinding.

 mistakes when you're in the grind is whenever you get to the end, you want to do a slip

 getting towards the end, you want to get a slight nudge like that.

 pop it off like that but what to do to help it from getting off like that is just to get

Just remember to be kind of parallel, slight angle, pop, aim the end of the truck

 right here, kind of have your heel like that so that way you can grind smoothly and then

 Hey guys, I wanted to thank you for all the wonderful feedback you've been giving me.

 Last week someone requested a salad dressing recipe, so I'm going to be making two today.

 I'm going to make a very simple one and I'm going to make a sort of more gourmet one.

 I have 50 mangoes in the other room ripening up, so today we're going to be making two

 If you take a look down here, you can see I have some salads prepped ahead of time.

 For the mango salad dressing, you will need one cup of mango, three or four dates, and

 For the mango Thai salad dressing, you will need one cup of mango, three to four dates,

 one fourth cup of scallion, one eighth cup of cashew, one quarter size medallion of ginger,

 I'm going to add probably about a fourth cup of water right now.

 If you have really juicy mango, you don't need to add really that much water at all.

 This is just a perfect example of what you can do with dates and one fruit.

 If you learn a good base for your salad dressing, you can pretty much get creative and make

 We're not going to wash out the blender since we basically have very similar ingredients

 And then we're going to make the dressing for our gourmet salad.

 We're going to go ahead and throw in our mango and then cashew and scallions.

 So I added the ginger to this and now I'm calling it mango Thai dressing.

 So if you guys are watching this on Arnold's channel, Arnold's Way, then I would like to

 let you know that this is actually going to be my last video that I will be posting on

 So if you haven't already subscribed to my channel and started watching my videos on

 And if you're interested in more salad dressings, you can check out my book on my website, meganelizabeth.com.

 And this is a dish that I recently saw my mom make and I thought I'd just make it for

 everyone else out there who likes seafood and you know, something pretty healthy.

 And what I'm going to do is cook salmon and some stir fry vegetables and serve it with

 I got this from Costco and if you have fresh salmon that's probably even better.

 They're little citrus mini oranges and if you don't have any of these you can just use

 a lemon or a lime to add a little bit of citrus acid into the dish.

 We have some minced garlic, some stir fried vegetables and also if you don't have this

 as well you can just cut up some snow peas and yellow, red, orange, bell peppers, mushrooms,

 baby carrots, and baby corn and throw them all together and you'll have yourself stir

 You're also going to need some onion and to cook you're going to need a saute pan to cook

 For the interest of time I went ahead and prepped all the ingredients.

 Okay so far we have about one teaspoon of garlic sauteing in the oil.

 And you're going to cook this until the onions and the garlic are lightly browned.

 This is a pretty good dish to also maybe add tomatoes if you have any.

 This is actually still going to taste pretty interesting and delicious.

 And you want to go ahead and cut them into four pieces if you want.

 And the amount of citrus that I'm using is equivalent to about half a lemon.

 Okay once you have the lemon juice in there you want to go ahead and put in the stir fried vegetables.

 And you're going to put in three tablespoons worth of soy sauce.

 Okay you're going to keep on cooking everything until it's you know until the vegetables are tender and the fish is fully cooked.

 And we're going to go ahead and plate everything in just a second.

 And you can always pair this up with a nice salad or brown rice.

 So you can feed the entire family or a group of friends with this simple meal.

 I hope you enjoyed my cooking demo and I'll see you around for the next dish.

 here in Intramuros and it is situated right behind Manila Cathedral.

 and makeup station of the Vera Studios here in Intramuros and as you can see behind me we have

 the perfect setting for makeup artists and even people who want to get their makeup done.

 you are a makeup artist or a hair stylist you can most definitely rent out this beautiful Vera Studios

 here in Intramuros and get to use the hair and makeup station for your trial makeup for your

 client and even use the photo booth area because they have a studio right here.

So today I have a get pretty with me video for everyone and this is going to be a

So if I am doing a get ready with me video she's going to make a

Now to see the entire list of makeup products that I used on my face today,

 step is always using primer and for today I have the Makeup Academy Undress Your Skin Flawless Skin Primer.

 For today's foundation I'm using the Essence Stay All Day 16 Hour Long-Lasting Foundation

And as always I'm using the Makeup by Tony H04 Foundation Brush.

 Next I'm using a buffing brush just to get that seamless finish.

Powder or even the powder brush and here I have the Makeup by Tony H10 Powder Brush.

I have here the Makeup Academy Pro Brow Ultimate Eyebrow Kit and together

 with that I am using the Makeup by Tony H11 Angled Eyeliner Brush.

 For my eye today I'm using the It's Judy Time Palette and I just have here an eyeshadow brush

I'm gonna apply this creamy eyeshadow color all over my lid area.

 Next I have the Makeup by Tony H07 Tapered Blending Brush and I'm just going to take

 this soft brown color from the It's Judy Time Palette and apply it on my crease area.

 I'm taking the shimmery purple color and apply it on my crease area as well.

 Next we're going to add this beautiful gold color on the center lids.

 I'm gonna go back to the soft brown color and apply it on my lower lash line.

 For today's eyeliner I'm using the Essence 2-in-1 Eyeliner Pen so you may choose which

So we have the thin side which looks something like this and we also have

 The only problem with the Essence Eyeliner Pen is that the formulation is too dry so we're gonna

 Now it's time to add on mascara and for today's mascara I have the Rimmel Lovin' Scandal Eye.

 For today's blush I'm using the RIVCO Shine Blusher and this is in the shade of Shine Milky Pink.

 Okay so that shade doesn't look that flattering on my skin tone so I'm gonna use

 a blush with a warmer tone and I have here the Enhanced Cosmetics and as always I'm choosing

 Decay Naked Blush Palette and I'm just gonna take the matte brown color right here.

 For today's lip color I'm using the Revlon Color Burst Lacquer Bomb in the shade of Provocateur.

 Now we're all done with the makeup now we proceed to the hair and this is a newly washed hair and

 I'm not gonna do anything fancy so I'm just gonna do a little bit of a natural look.

 And this is a newly washed hair and I'm not gonna do anything fancy so I'm just gonna apply

 Then after this I'm just gonna blow dry my hair a little bit and style it.

 I have here my trusty Vidal Sassoon Blow Dryer and I love it because it has hot and cold settings.

 please don't forget to check out Charmaine's video which is a Get Unready With Me video

 and that's just basically an entire reverse of what I did on this video today.

 Hey everyone, in today's video we're going to be making these really colorful Funfetti

 They have a nice moist texture on the inside and I love the sprinkles.

 So you're going to start off with half a cup of softened unsalted butter.

 Once it's nice and creamy like this, you're going to add half a cup of sugar plus two

 I'm adding mine one at a time and make sure to mix in between each addition.

 It works best if the eggs aren't room temperature, then they will mix very nicely into the butter

 So here goes the second egg along with half a teaspoon of vanilla extract.

 Now for the dry ingredients, you're going to add one cup of all purpose flour, half

 a teaspoon of salt, one and a half teaspoons of baking powder, and a quarter teaspoon of

 Now just use your mixer to just mix everything together until it's well combined.

 Once it looks something like this, you're going to add two tablespoons of sprinkles.

 I'm using these round confetti sprinkles, but you can pretty much use any sprinkles

 I just think that these confetti sprinkles are the best for these confetti cupcakes.

 I'm going to use a spatula to mix everything together because I don't want to use the mixer

 since it'll break up the sprinkles and make them bleed into the batter.

 So just fold that in carefully along with two tablespoons of milk.

 Now just mix it together until the batter has absorbed all the milk.

 Now you're going to fill your cupcake liners about two thirds of the way full with this

 Today I'm using these blue cupcake liners, but of course you can use any cupcake liners

 Now you're going to bake these at 340 degrees Fahrenheit or 170 degrees Celsius for about

 So today I made a Swiss meringue buttercream for these cupcakes, but you can use any type

 So I just tinted it pink and placed it into a pastry bag with a Wilton 1M star tip.

 Once your cupcakes are completely cooled, just use your frosting and just decorate it

 I'm just doing a simple swirl by starting on the outside and building my way to the

 You can also use an offset spatula or a butter knife to just simply pop the frosting on top.

 Now you're going to use those same sprinkles from earlier and you're going to sprinkle

 You could even dip the cupcakes in the sprinkles if that's what you prefer.

 So that's it for these really easy and really cute funfetti cupcakes.

 They're really bright and summery and they have a moist texture on the inside.

 I hope you guys can give them a try and I'll see you next time.

 Hello everybody, today I'm going to do a nail tutorial on how to have Gucci nails.

 First, I always begin by applying two coats of nail straightener onto my nail.

 This makes your nail very flexible and strong and protects it from breaking and from allowing

 I've been wanting to do this for a while and I thought that I would go ahead and do it

 So what you guys will need is a bright red, okay, closest to the Gucci red as possible.

 The Gucci green on here is a little bit darker but because I have the black underneath, it

 This one's by NYX and a good top coat as well as super glue to apply the red Swarovski crystals.

 So first I like to begin with running a red stripe down the nail.

 It doesn't have to be completely perfect because you're going to go back with the other colors,

 And also don't worry about the paint on the outside because that can be cleaned up with

 The next step, I will be taking my black polish and filling in the other areas that aren't

 If your black is as transparent as mine, you're definitely going to want to go ahead and give

 So I go ahead and squeeze a little bit of glue down, take my toothpick and begin by

 dabbing toothpick in the super glue, picking it up and applying the jewel right on top.

 And after you put on your Swarovski crystals, go ahead and give a nice coat of clear.

 This is a tutorial on how to build a self-watering container for planting.

 I prefer the smaller ones as the larger ones get a little harder to handle.

 On the inside, what I did is, this is real simple, you build a support out of whatever

 You just push across these pieces like so, cut them, little notches on them, put them

 And then a piece of, this happens to be a piece of, I think it's one inch nylon rope.

 It dangles down inside the reservoir on both sides, making the wick wet constantly.

 Your soil medium then goes in over the top of this and you have a self-watering container.

 I use inch and a quarter PVC that you can buy at Home Depot as the filler spout.

 I like that particular size because the hose will fit inside of it.

 And also, one of the critical things is if this is going to be the side that your filler

 is on, you want to make sure that your overflow is drilled on the same side just to make it

 For single plants, what I like to do is I like to take the lids, which normally are

 otherwise discarded, and I paint them white and then cut for a single plant.

 I cut a little hole and create this so that you can take it off and on, but what it does

 is it helps reflect light back up into the plant and it also keeps the soil hydrated

 Total cost of this project is probably around $8 per container.

 In fact, I found these containers, you can buy them at Walmart for about five bucks.

 And so these can be built, you know, I've built several of them here.

 You can do it, you know, under lights indoors or you can put it outside.

 And I think that's the major benefit of it is that it's portable and it's containable.

 It's super easy to make, it's delicious and I think you guys are going to love this.

 Do not mix it with a spoon, just twirl the pan around like this and this should take

 about 10 minutes if you cook it over high heat, do not walk away from it, it can burn

 So the minute it turns into a nice golden color, you want to remove it from the heat

 You can use a pie dish, you can use ramekins, I'm using a bundt pan.

 Excuse the scratches on my bundt pan, just pretend you don't see them, I've had this

 I sprinkled some shredded coconut over the caramel and then I set this aside.

 Now I have many videos of flan, alright just two, three with this one, but I always use

 I think it's the best electrical device to use when making flan.

 I used 5 eggs, evaporated milk, coconut milk, condensed milk, vanilla extract, and some

 Give everything a mix until it's nice and smooth and then we're going to pour this in

 Now I've had some people ask me in my other flan videos if they could replace the condensed

 I feel like condensed milk is mandatory in flan and if you ever tasted condensed milk

 Now what I did was I placed the bundt pan in a baking sheet with high sides and I poured

 We're going to bake this in a preheated oven at 350 degrees for about an hour and 20 minutes.

 Then once it comes out of the oven, you want to let it cool completely and then place it

 Once it comes out of the fridge, you're going to take a knife and run it along the sides

 Place a platter, I used a cake stand, place it over the bundt pan and then flip it over.

 Now I did not add any alcohol to this flan, but you can certainly add a shot or two of

 And I make flan every single year for Thanksgiving and Christmas.

 I think it's perfect because you're so busy making turkey or roasted pork and a bunch

 of side dishes, so opening a few cans, pouring them into your blender and then forgetting

 Hope you enjoyed this video and thank you all so much for watching.

 Hi guys, tonight we're going to make a recipe called pumpkin delight.

 One of the girls, one of my office mates gave me the recipe, said it's really good and we're

 This is a stoneware baking pan, metal pan, whatever you have and then grease it.

 I took one cup of the boxed cake mix out which is going to be for the topping.

 I'm going to use one egg and then I'm going to use a half a cup of butter, melted butter.

 And this is going to be the crust that's going to go on the bottom of the pan.

 And then we're going to use pumpkin, it's going to be the filling with some spices and

 And you're going to spread that on the bottom of your 9 by 13 pan.

 So it's not going to be a very thick crust, it'll probably be a pretty thin crust.

 So what I did was I just used a little icing spreader and spread it on the bottom of the

 The filling is very simple, it's just a can of pumpkin, a big can, a large can of pumpkin.

 We're just going to mix those together and I'm going to use a whisk to mix them because

 And then we're just going to make the crust that's going to go on the top.

 So for the crust it's going to be one cup of the cake mix that we took off in the beginning.

 Okay, you're going to use a half cup of sugar, a quarter cup of flour, a teaspoon of cinnamon,

 So what we're going to do is we're going to make like a crumbly crust out of this.

 You could use two knives, two forks, you could do whatever you want.

 But I'm just going to use a pastry blender because it's easier to do.

 So all you're doing is you're just making like a crumb topping.

 And what we're going to do is we're just going to put it over the top of the cake.

 Okay, but just, and if you want to make your own cake mix, go for it.

 Okay, and just using a food chopper or you could use a knife, whichever,

 We're going to stick it in the oven at 350 for 50 to 60 minutes.

 As with any cake, you're going to just stick a toothpick in and if it comes out clean, it's done.

 Let it cool for about 45 minutes because the pumpkin is so hot that it would just be way too mushy.

 So what I'm going to do is use these three pads of stick-em notes

 I know these things are square because if I hold them like this,

 so it's not going to stick together because I'm holding the sticky side.

 So it kind of makes a little bowl-ish thing because it folds in two directions.

 So now what I'm going to do is I'm going to take the sticky side

 So I take the corners now, and now I crease this so it's diagonal.

 So I've got one fold this way, and so now I'm going to fold it in the other diagonal,

 And so what we're going to end up with is kind of this nice little cross here.

 So now what I need you to do is I need you to make another one of the same color.

 and so what I want you to do is I want you to stick the tight corner

 Okay, and then what we're going to do is we're going to stick a third color,

 And then finally we're going to wrap it around so this one fits in to here.

 Okay, and so what's going to happen is they're going to stick nicely together

 Okay, and now I'm just going to slowly start introducing the other shapes.

 And so what I'd like to be able to do, since I have three colors,

 Okay, and so that means I'm going to stick this orange one opposite the other orange one.

 We've got the shapes here, here, but then we need the final one.

 And this is always the tricky one, and it feels like you need another hand to have it work.

 But essentially now, we've got to stick it inside the pink ones

 and on these orange ones, so it will all be nicely fitting together.

 And so a little bit of massaging is required to get this thing to just slide in.

 Okay, so I'll just unpeel this pink one a little, because I think it's stuck,

 And so what you'll notice is you'll have essentially a square of one color,

 a square of another color, and then a square of the third color.

 and they're already square, and so otherwise, you have to be a little bit more careful.

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to be demonstrating this eraser kit which was provided from CoolPencilCase.com

 and you're going to make these really cool erasers that can actually interchange as eraser rings.

 And this is actually really cool because it is my first kit, there was a lot of experimentation.

 They also sent me this magic spell book which I've been eyeing for a really, really long time

 So thank you so much Camille and CoolPencilCase.com for sending this to me.

 One lucky winner will receive it and the winner will be chosen by CoolPencilCase.com

 so the information will be down below in the description box and at the end of the video.

 So the information is in Japanese, so I did have a friend of mine translate this for me.

 So the entire kit consists of this box which you will be using in the microwave,

 an instruction booklet which has pictures so you can follow it,

 and it also shows you how to make the particular erasers themselves.

 It comes with a mold, the erasers, and three rings that you can interchange between the erasers.

 So first I wiped down the mold with some water and I realized I didn't use enough.

 And obviously before actually putting it into the mold you have to condition your eraser clay.

 It's actually pretty hard, but once you start conditioning it, it becomes kind of like polymer clay.

 So for my first attempt, I actually just put the clay right into the mold and I cut it off with a blade.

 Now I found that this was very difficult to remove from the mold.

 So as you can see here, I'm trying to take it out with another piece of eraser clay.

 And then I tried to push it out and eventually it did come out,

 but it came out a little deformed, like there was some dents in there.

 So when that happened, I just used my dotting tool to kind of fix up the edges

 So I tried to match it based on what it looked like on the box.

 And I put in the pink on the side, put in some white eraser clay in the middle,

 Again, since this was my first time doing this, I didn't do this perfectly.

 so I used my dotting tool again to blend it in with the bottom.

 And you want to add enough water so that it kind of pushes upwards

 and pretty much lubricates the mold so that you can push out the erasers easier.

 And this is pretty much what it looked like the next few times.

 And I wanted to try to make a lot more eraser variations for you guys

 I'm not really sure why, but that's what the instructions said.

 and if you're a parent, if you wanted to do this with your kids.

 Now, 3 hours after cooling, I'm going to show you how I erase this again.

 So I actually definitely recommend that you wait at least a full 24 hours before using it.

 And all the information for the giveaway is on the screen as well as down below.

 Today in Ideal Cooking in Carla's Kitchen we're going to make some crispy sweet potato

 One of the things, I love sweet potato fries, but I really want them to be a little crispier

 so I've gone to a couple blog sites and I'll post them in there who I went to to get some

 Now, as always, I changed the recipe because I want to make them a little healthier.

 So what I did is cut the sweet potatoes up like fries and I left the peels on.

 But anyway, I decided to try this recipe only use, instead of white flour, I used quinoa

 You can spice them up with a lot of different spices that you prefer, but I'm serving them

 to my grandkids tonight so I don't want to put too many spices in.

 So it's used with Greek yogurt, a little hot sauce and some Worcestershire sauce.

 What I'm going to do is bring the camera up over here so you can kind of see what I do.

 What I've got here is egg whites and I used this Kirkland's Real Egg Whites.

 They must put food coloring in it because it's got a little yellow color to it.

 Okay, so I've dried off the sweet potatoes because what I typically did when I used to

 do French fries, when I used to make French fries is I'd cut up, you know how you had

 to cut up fries and they would turn so you had to put them in ice cold water and then

 So what you want to do is coat it really good with the egg yolk and then get it all over it.

 And I try to keep my hands from getting too much on them so they don't pull it off,

 you know, with your egg yolk fingers, you pull off the next ones.

 So like I said, this is just quinoa flour, parmesan cheese, and a little salt and pepper.

 You can add your own seasonings, whatever you like to your sweet potato fries and that's it.

 Then we're going to just drizzle a little olive oil on it and I'll just show you right here.

 I'm just going to take really quickly and drizzle the olive oil on there.

 Get them coated good so that they do a little bit of frying so they're nice and brown.

 We're going to bake them in an oven 425 and then I'll come back and show you the finished product.

 Today we're going to prepare a stuffed brie with dry fruit compote and some crispy flatbread.

 We need the balsamic reduction, some dry fruit compote that you can easily find in the store, in a gourmet store, for example,

 or you can use some fig compote or quince compote that you can replace with that.

 I like to do my fruit compote myself, so I use it and do it myself.

I do the flatbread myself, but again, you can find it in other stores,

 like the pita bread or the tortillas that you cut and then you let them puff up in the oven.

 And then, of course, you have to use the brie, the brie from Ile-de-France, which is nice and creamy, and it comes like that.

 To check the brie, it has to be very white and silky, so it looks very nice.

 The rind has to be white and not brown, and that's how it looks.

Normally, you can find them also, the brie, you can find them smaller or like that, or bigger in the market.

 So you take a wet cloth, take your knife so it slides, and then you go right through it.

 Make sure when you do the brie that you need to have it firm, so you need to keep it in the fridge until it's finished, until you start the recipe.

 It's coming out a little, so you take some more, just a little, and you add it and push it in.

 So you let it refrigerate for a little while, and then you cut it.

 But for you at home, you better do it and refrigerate it, because sometimes it takes a little while.

So I'm going to cut it like that, nice and firm, and shaped the proper way.

 So now I have three big slices, and now we're going to do the presentation.

 And then you're going to put the cheese a little bit everywhere.

 Hi, I'm Elaine Welteroth with Glamour Magazine, and I'm here today with the amazing makeup

 artist Greg Brockington, who's going to show us how to work the biggest makeup trend for

 You want your lips to be as smooth as possible to lay a foundation for that perfect red lip

 The next step is to put a base on your lip so that your red lip will last during the

 Now that I've primed your lips with foundation, I'm going to start the red liner.

 I feel like it's so hard for women to find that perfect shade of red.

 I think the trick is really just to play around with a ton of reds and find which one you

 True reds, I always find, work on most people, and I'm going to actually use a true red on

 I'm just going to edge your lip, really subtle it with little strokes.

 I'm going to start in the center, and with a lip brush, work it out to the edge.

 I like an edge that's softened as opposed to a really hard edge.

 I think it's younger and it's fresher, and it's less intimidating for most people.

 You just keep layering it in until you find the consistency and the richness of the color

 Now that you've got this perfect red lip that you can wear during the day, and now you're

 going to go out at night, add a little bit of gloss, and it will take it to the next

 I can't wait to go out tonight, ladies, and I hope now that I've found my perfect shade,

And today we're going to be making Gourgere, which is basically a French cheese

You're going to need a half a cup of milk and a half a cup of water.

One cup of flour, five eggs, a stick of butter, some salt, and about

 a cup and a half of grated Gourgere or Emmentaler or you could use cheddar.

 then add about, I don't know, half a teaspoon of salt, quarter teaspoon to half a teaspoon

I'm going to crack my eggs directly into the pan, one at a time.

Again, it looks like it's not going to come together, but you just have

You want to totally incorporate each egg before adding the next.

 Grating the Gruyere, I'm going to add this cheese into the choux pastry, which is what

 this basically is, a choux pastry with the addition of Gruyere.

 and this is just for appearance and presentation more than anything.

 straight into a 370 degree oven, but you could also put them from here straight into a freezer

 Hey everyone, so today I'm going to show you this really easy DIY, definitely for beginner

 It's really cute, and I'm going to have a fashion with Ashlyn of her modeling it soon,

 so I'll put the link on the screen when it comes, and so this is what you're going to

 I just picked this polka dot because it's really fun for summer and it's really cute.

 You're also going to need scissors, some fun rick racks, trimmings, ribbons, buttons,

 just tons of fun little things to put and decorate your bag with, along with some thread,

 and you're also going to need a sewing machine to sew, along with a hot glue gun and some

 You can also hand sew, but it's easier to sew with a sewing machine.

 The lengths and stuff will also be in the down bar below, but as you can see, I'm just

 cutting it with fabric scissors, and make sure you cut two pieces so that you know you

 have two sides, and then you're just going to put the two more colorful sides, the less

 dull sides, together so that the duller sides are showing on the outside, because you don't

 want the seams to show, so this is how you make it look cleaner and things, so you're

 just going to put those two sides together, the two sides that you want to show, and then

 you're just going to pin down, very easy, very simple, pin the sides, and then we'll

 You want to keep, of course, the top open so that it's a bag and not just a square of

 So you can hand sew it if you want, just do regular stitches if you're hand sewing, but

 I do think it's a lot easier to sew with a sewing machine, and so just be really careful,

 make sure to have a pin around because accidents can happen on a sewing machine.

 So while our hot glue gun is heating up, I'm going to show you how to get the corners out,

 so after we're done sewing it, you're going to turn it back around, so not inside out,

 so here I'm just showing you here, so that the pretty sides show, and as you can see

 in the little corners, they're like flat, I don't know how to explain it, but as you

 can see, all you need to do is take a pin or sharp object and stick it into the corner

 of the bag and sort of just pull it out so that you get a nice square, so your bag isn't

 like a different shape other than a square, so here I'll go up close for you, you're just

 going to stick the sharp object or pin in there, and sort of just pull out the corner

 So for the straps, I'm actually using brick rack, or it's sort of like a ribbon, but you

 can use that same fabric, you can use a different coordinating fabric, you can use whatever.

 The length I did was actually 10 to 11 inches, because I wanted it to be able to really hang

 from her shoulder, so that's what I used, you can make it longer or shorter, however

 you want, and then also hem the top of the bag, I'm just hot gluing it as hemming it

 because I didn't want to sew it, but this would probably actually be easier to do at

 the beginning, but just hem the top, and then hot glue, or you can sew, I like hot gluing

 though, sew the strap into the inside of the bag so you don't see the ends of the strap.

 So here we go, here's the finished product, I actually added some brick rack to the bottom

 too, just to give it a little bit more beachy feel, I think it's really cute, and I just

 Here's the inside, all nice and hemmed, and make sure not to burn yourself with the hot

 Also if you want to make it more like a bag-ish, where it can open and close, you can take

 some velcro and just put it on the inside of the bag, you can put a button on the outside,

 and that's all that jazz, just jazz it up with as many little knick knacks and things

 Make sure to check out our other doll DIY videos here, and go to Sew Crafty 101 on YouTube

 Hi, I'm Joelle from Joelle Skin Care and today we're going to talk about two

 salad but no we're making beauty treatments and one of the first

 treatments I want to show you is our vinegar and oatmeal scrub and this is a

 facial scrub that you can use and I recommend using a facial scrub maybe

 once or twice a week but it's very easy to make and you just need a few

 it comes already refined for you and I have some sea salt here and some sweet

 with a glass bowl and one tablespoon of oatmeal and we're going to do one

 tablespoon of sea salt, one teaspoon of sweet almond oil and one teaspoon of

 pungent smell but once you apply this the scrub and also remove it with water

 alpha hydroxy acids in it that also act as an exfoliator and the sweet almond

 oil works great for combination to oily skin so you're also getting some

 hydration in the scrub but you can also use an avocado oil in place of the sweet

 ingredients you would first cleanse your skin with a mild cleanser.

 also add this scrub to the cleanser to make your facial scrub as well or you

 can just add water to it after you've cleansed your skin and I would recommend

 starting with the decollete area then go to the neck and then the entire face but

 adventurous you can even apply this scrub with a nice facial applicator

 yogurt and lemon juice mask that is great if you have oily skin, combination

 oatmeal and then you're going to do a tablespoon of yogurt and then we're

 going to do let's do two teaspoons of olive oil here and for a finishing touch

 skin too so not only will this mask help to draw out any impurities but it's also

 can apply it immediately after you've done the exfoliating scrub.

 apply the scrub first, leave it on about five minutes, you can rinse it off with

 warm water and then apply this mask and once again if you're feeling

 adventurous you can use an applicator brush for this as well and I will leave

 this on for about 10 to 15 minutes and then you can also rinse this with warm

Now if you're the type of person that really doesn't like making recipes

 in the kitchen that's okay because I also have products that are also natural

 and in place of the exfoliating scrub you can use my Skin Radiant Exfoliating

 Powder and you can also add this to your cleanser or you can just add water to it

 and this is a bamboo powder and a zucchini rice scrub and you can find that

 on my website under joelleskincare.com and we also have a Skin Radiant

 Revitalizing Mask and this is an aloe vera and clay mask that can also be used

 for blackheads, combination skin or oily skin through the summer months as well.

 Thank you and if you have any questions about my recipes or my products you can

 In this video I will show you how to build this really neat looking indirect LED lighting system.

 It consists mostly of boards and other simple components, which you can all gather very quickly and easily.

 First of all, let's take a look at the fundaments of the build.

 This 18mm thick and 120cm by 40cm long wood panel and those smaller wood laths with these measurements.

 We started by ripping off the plastic foil of our wood panel and all of this without too much rage,

 because this stuff was wrapped up twice, which made total sense.

 Then we marked a couple of spots 8cm from the edge of the board and

 connected them afterwards to form a square, which we can use in a second to position our laths.

 Now it's time to position them and got our wood screws with a maximum length of 50cm,

 afterwards measured the gap between those to make one more smaller lath with the jigsaw.

 Again, we used the same screws to secure it and the initial prototype is done.

 We bought those plastic anchors with metal hooks and used a bit of precision measuring to find two ideal spots for them.

 And after a bit of drilling action, which only creates two shallow holes this time, we can move on to the fun part, the LEDs.

 For that, we drew another square around our laths with a distance of 3cm.

 We used wire cutters to create four strips for the longer lath sides,

 because we actually built two of those lighting panels, so four strips, and used the already existing

 sticky tape of the LED strip and some hot glue to secure it firmly to our panel.

 Afterwards, we also cut this smaller piece of LED strip, which goes along the smaller lath.

 We used the cutter to remove the silicon at the solar pads and used a bit of wire and solder to connect plus to plus and

The really awesome thing is that this kit came with an RF remote,

 which is way better than an infrared remote and brings in a couple of lighting modes.

 Time to make the front look awesome with this wallpaper, which looks like crocodile leather, and some spray glue.

 Firstly, we laid the wallpaper on top, cut it to a nice length, and applied a generous amount of glue onto the surface of our panel.

 Then we slowly lowered the paper onto it and pressed it in place to remove all the air bubbles.

 trimmed off the excess paper with a cutter, and secured it again with spray glue and a lot of staples.

 drill the holes, and insert the plastic anchors with hooks to secure the panels in a minute.

 Then we did a bit of wire management on the back side of the panels to secure the receiver, power supply, and

 connectors, which connect the plus and minus terminals of both panels together.

 As you can see, this month they have a cute little Easter pattern on it.

 I think that's adorable, even though Easter is over and I just got it in the mail yesterday.

 And as always, you're gonna see the contents before me since I'm opening it on camera.

 And then of course we have a card on top and it looks like Grays is starting to do Roths

 I'm guessing it's some sort of powder or cubes that come in your box that you can then mix

 And so it looks like we have a Super Force Fruits, Pro-Bean, Honey Dribbled Cashews,

 So I'm gonna start opening them up and see what they taste like.

 First is the Super Force Fruits container which contains blueberries, lingonberries

 which I'm not familiar with, soft apple pieces, and cherry raisins.

 I'm not sure if you can see but I grabbed one of each so I can get the full combined

 I love dried fruits and I love that flavor combination, specifically the cherries.

 It does have 9 grams of plant-based protein per serving and it has edamame, chili-bored

 I'm not sure what the difference is between red-skinned peanuts and regular peanuts.

 Alright, I'm not sure if you can see that but this is what they look like.

 This one, I'm assuming, is that second one, the chili-bored beans.

 Overall, not my favorite but definitely a good source of protein and a good little protein

 The next one is the Honey Drizzled Cashews which is the one I was looking forward to

 These are definitely my favorite so far but we still have one left.

 The last is the Fruit and Seed Flapjack and I don't remember if I mentioned this in my

 last graze video because I know there was one video that I filmed that didn't go up

 So because of my lipstick, I'm just gonna take a piece off and taste that.

 It's got almost like a honey taste to it along with the fruits and seeds.

 Not like a chewy bar, almost like softer than those but like in a good way.

 Of the snacks, this was the only one that I didn't like and I honestly felt like this

 one was good but I could get basically the same thing by going to my local bulk food

 Eat probably a little bit too much to be healthy but they're just so good.

 These two however are absolutely divine and I know Graze recently introduced a bigger

 family size pack where you get five larger bags of different snacks.

 I'm definitely going to look into that one because I am trying some really great snacks

 that I'd love to get bigger bags of and not just one single serving.

 If you've tried Graze, let me know what you think in the comments down below and if there's

 another snack subscription service that you like, also let me know about in the comments.

 If you're interested in trying Graze and getting your first and fifth boxes free, there's a

 Give this video a thumbs up if you liked it and subscribe for more awesome videos.

 Links in the bottom bar below and I'll see you beauties next time.

 Alright guys, I've been searching the internet for a fix for my loud overflow and flushing

 sound and there's many different ways but I came up with an easy one since I like doing

 What you have to do down here is you just have to get your drain pipe and put it in

 Now we have the overflow back here which is, sounds like a little stream now.

 I kind of filed it out on each side just to give it enough breathing room.

 So as you can hear, that's the sound that's left now without the flushing from the drain.

 I just drop it right in over my connector and I just kind of push it down a little bit.

 Once again, just put the drain pipe in, the water in the sump and that's just a 90 degree elbow.

 I know you can make your other silencer type equipment but I guess this was the easiest for me and the quickest.

 All right, what I'm going to do is a build on this Chase lounge chair.

What I did was build a frame that fit inside the outside of the chair.

 a quarter inch gap on this frame all the way around so it would have room to move.

But let's say I built this thing and like I said, it was fairly complicated.

 what, I don't know, 20, probably 24 feet of deck board, two eight foot, two by fours,

 quarters, because that was about the longest piece I could get out of the scrap block.

 it's good and square, 24 inches, so it doesn't cause you any problems later on.

And I ran this down to where it hit right here on the back brace.

 this tractor is it runs for a while, then it won't run good, you let it sit for a while,

 one there, one here, and one over here, and there'll be a few more on the other side.

 When you remove this bolt here, this little clip here for the fuel line will come off.

 This bolt here holds the dipstick tube, so just leave the tube there.

 the shroud, I'm going to remove the two bolts here holding the ignition module.

And here's the new ignition module, it's part number 12, space 584, space

Now what I'm going to take off the old one is the little grommet over here for the

 the ignition module on the engine, always put this side here facing up.

 it easier to show you the installation, I removed the tractor hood.

 to simply reinsert the new ignition module on top of the studs.

 between the ignition module and the flywheel but this works all the time.

 module will be stuck to the magnets a bit because it's lined up on the flywheel.

 there should be a nice gap between the ignition module and the flywheel.

If your ignition module is rubbing on the flywheel magnets then you're going to

I'm also going to line up the grommet over here that goes inside

I'm not going to fully tighten them up yet I'm going to make sure

As I mentioned earlier there's usually a bolt over here but it is

 And when you're done make sure the grommet for the spark plug wire is in position like

So it's that easy to replace the ignition module on your Kohler Command engine.

 If you get different symptoms where your engine runs good for a while when it's cold and then

 doesn't run good after it's ran for a few minutes then it's probably the ignition module

 Before starting the flush and fill process, it's important to check the specific cooling

 system capacity, maintenance and change intervals, antifreeze water ratio, and cooling system

 To avoid personal injury while performing maintenance on your vehicle, following proper

 You should never handle or inspect antifreeze coolant on a hot engine.

 To flush and fill your cooling system, you will need Prestone antifreeze coolant, Prestone

 5050 pre-mixed antifreeze coolant, Prestone Flush Plus cleaner, a garden hose, funnel,

 two gallon bucket, distilled water, and a clean dry cloth or rag.

 Next, locate and carefully remove the cooling system fill cap on your vehicle.

 The fill cap may be located on the radiator, engine, pressure tank, or one of the hoses.

 Consult the manufacturer directions for further information if necessary.

 Locate and open the cooling system drain valve so it can be emptied.

 If you make contact with the antifreeze coolant, rinse exposed skin with soap and water.

 Once emptied, close the drain valve and put the used antifreeze coolant into sealed containers.

 To avoid accidents, never use old beverage or common household containers to store waste.

 Disposal of used antifreeze coolant must be done properly and never drained into storm

 Check local disposal laws and regulations for more information.

 In many areas, special reclamation centers are set up for collection.

 While you locate a center in your area, store containers in a secure location away from

 To do this, simply fill the system with the cleaner and water to the correct level according

 to the manufacturer's directions and replace the cooling system cap.

 Start the engine with the heater on high until the operating temperature gauge reads

 Once the engine is completely cool, carefully remove the cooling system cap and drain the

 Be sure to close the cooling system drain valve once completed.

 Now it's time to fill the system with water to the correct level according to the manufacturer's

 Start the engine and run until normal operating temperature is achieved and an additional

 To ensure the flushing process is completed properly, it's recommended to repeat step

 If the cooling system has a recovery bottle, be sure to empty and rinse with water.

 To fill the cooling system with new antifreeze coolant, it's important to determine the system

 capacity and calculate how much Prestone concentrate antifreeze coolant to install.

 Unless your manual says otherwise, the traditional ratio of antifreeze coolant to water is 50-50.

 Fill the system halfway with antifreeze coolant, add distilled water and replace the cooling

 If your system has a recovery bottle, don't forget to refill to the proper level with

 Run the engine for 10 minutes after reaching normal operating temperature and inspect the

 It's important to check the cooling system level and top off with Prestone 50-50 premix

 After two days of driving, check the concentration with Prestone antifreeze coolant tester and

 To maintain maximum engine protection, it's recommended to flush and fill your cooling

 system every five years or refer to your owner's manual for more information.

 This look was inspired by Sailor Neptune, Soldier of the Deep Sea.

 I'm using this by MAC, it's their Electric Cool eyeshadow, and apply this all over your

 Now we're going to take the same shade of teal from my Urban Decay 25th Anniversary

 palette and brush this on top of the cream eyeshadow to help set it and also make the

 For the outer crease, I'm going to take this midnight colour from my Cinderella palette

 and then put it on my outer crease and then blend it out really well.

 To help blend out the edges, I'm taking a yellowish peach colour just to help buff out

 So today I chose a really dark blue eyeliner with a hint of shimmer in it and I'm going

 Once I'm finished, I'm going to go back into that teal blue shade that we first used, that

 eyeshadow, and just put it into the inner corners to help make the look more seamless.

 And now for the cheeks, I chose a really light pink blush and I'm just going to buff it over

 Before I apply my lipstick, I'm going to apply a lip balm and this is the EOS Blueberry Lip

 And then now I'm going to choose a really natural, almost skin-tony peach pink shade

 I hope you guys enjoyed this video and make sure to check out all my other Sailor Scout

 So all my product listings as well as additional photos will be available on my website.

 So thanks so much for watching and I'll see you guys next week.

 Now I have finished, as you can see, going around the whole loom with the adjustable

 cast on and now we need to trim the extra length to about the same as we left before.

 So that's about 6 or 7 inches or so and trim it and we just leave those there like that

 Okay, then the next thing we do, we should have already taken apart our scrubbie.

 So it's just in one long length of this netting, which actually my other scrubbie, it was two

 So however yours is, just take it apart so you just have it in a single layer and it's

 usually a tube, a netted tube, but we'll just leave it all together the way they had it

 Okay, so for the first step, what we're going to do is take just a little bit, like toward

 the center of the loom here, and I'm going to wrap it around this first peg and knit off.

 And you want to, this is why we wanted to do the cast on loose, so that you can get

 Okay, so then, and for this project, I like to hold the loom like this.

 Let me just, okay, so what we're going to do is hold our thumb like this to make a loop

 inside the loom, which would be comparable to just a little bit more than halfway across

 And when you're holding that, then you're going to wrap it around the next peg, just

 So it's fastened in there, but now we have a loop hanging toward the middle of our loom,

 Get your loop, wrap it around, sorry, it's a little tricky to show on film.

 Okay, wrap it around, hold it in place there, and then those loops get knit off over everything,

 Wrapping, kind of pinching it in place, and you turn, and knit off.

 I hope I'm getting that on there okay, so you can see what I'm doing.

 So just continue across all of the pegs in that way until they've all been knit off.

 If you have extra remaining from your knitting, keep going and start the new row here where

 Now we're going to work on the alternating push kick drill, a great exercise.

 You're going to be called to do this a lot in the MMA quick start program.

 It's great for conditioning and also you get to practice a very important fundamental kicking

 So put your feet side by side, toes open slightly, hands up, protect your face, chin down, elbows

 You're going to bend your knees and get your butt back a little bit.

 Now the most important part with this kick, the most important detail is to bring your

 Knee comes up as high as possible and then you thrust your leg forward.

 So I'm going to do my left leg first, here, boom, back down, same position.

 When you're done kicking it has to be right there, ready to go.

 So I'm going to kick with my right leg, hands up, thrust, back down, same position.

 You notice I'm not leaning forward with my kick so that I fall.

 I control my balance, control my legs, lift and kick, back down side by side.

 Now, to get a little bit more power, as you extend your kick you can get a little bit

 One more detail I'm going to add to it as you progress is you keep your hand up,

 And this one can reach out beside you for balance down this way.

 It's going to help you speed up the technique, give you a little bit more balance,

 So hands up, you're going to bring your left leg up, your right hand is going to stay up,

 Make sure you get good at that one because we use it a lot in the MMA quick start program.

 I usually take a paper towel with some Crisco, rub it all in there everywhere.

 And then get some flour, sprinkle it, and shake it real good so that it's everywhere.

 It's got to be soft or you'll have a bad time trying to blend it.

 three sticks of butter with three cups of sugar that I've got right here.

 I like to mix it from low to medium because if you keep doing it at medium that's a waste

 You don't have to because it's delicious even without the nuts.

 Now that will stay in there for an hour in my 350 preheated oven.

 Put this piece of aluminum foil right on top and put it back in for 20 more minutes.

 I put that on because I don't want it to get too brown on the top.

 Now I'm going to take it out and give it the toothpick test to be sure it's done.

 Most people wait about 10 minutes before they take it out of the pan but I find that I have

 So I just go around the edges with the knife and kind of loosen up the cake.

 Take a towel because you've got to hold it while you're flipping it over.

 Then you take it like this and you flip it over again and there it is.

 Once it's cooled transfer it to a plastic container with a top and it will stay fresh

 Hi guys, today I'm going to show you how to make a football charm.

 Before I show you, I just want to say, this is like a double version.

 But if you don't want to make this one, and you want to make this one, that's cool too.

 But just whenever I put two rubber bands on my loom, just put one.

 If you're making a double one, which I am, put two rubber bands down.

 Then you're going to take two black rubber bands and put them in the middle.

 And now you're going to take two more caramel, put them on the sides.

 And we're going to make a capping band, which is when you put two rubber bands on your finger,

 wrap them around, make a figure eight, and wrap it around itself.

 And you're going to put the capping band right onto this last peg.

 You're going to go in, grab the first two, and then you're going to grab the first bands,

 the first two bands that you see, or if you're making a single one,

 then you're going to grab the first band that you see and put it to the side.

 So you're going to go in, grab the top one, and put it to the other side.

 Then you're going to go in and grab the bottom one and put it forward.

 So you're going to go in, grab the top ones, which should be white if you follow the directions carefully,

 And then do the same thing onto the side and put it to the middle.

 So you're going to go into this side, go up, other side, go up,

 Now you're just going to go up and set up, and you're just going to hook the sides.

 It should only be a, for both of the bracelets, for both of the charms,

 it should only be a single rubber band, and then you're just going to put it forward.

 You should, you should take the second one, take it off your hook,

 and then just take it and take the first one and pull it tight, as tight as you can go.

 Don't you just love it when you're sitting in your PJs ready to binge watch your favorite show and the doorbell rings?

 If you have PETA and store-bought hummus, this is what you can do.

 Put it on your baking sheet and you're gonna bake it for eight to ten minutes until it's crispy and away you go

 We're gonna add three tablespoons of melted butter one tablespoon of ground cumin one tablespoon of fresh lime juice

 one teaspoon of salt and a quarter cup of chopped flat leaf parsley

 You're gonna toss that together and then you have your gourmet popcorn

 We're gonna make really quick quesadillas we had leftover chicken from last night

We're gonna let it brown on one side flip it over and let it brown on the other you're done

 There's nothing like a tray of hot nuts for your friends we've roasted them in the oven at 325 for 10 minutes

 Now we're gonna add one tablespoon of olive oil one tablespoon of honey black pepper cayenne pepper

 We're gonna toss this all together get your hands in there in the oven at

 325 for five minutes more until they just brown and are crunchy

 We're going to add a quarter of a cup of olive oil a pinch of crushed red pepper flakes

 If you like what you see press like subscribe to our channel for more fun cooking tips and tricks

 Today we're filming for the Warrior Collective and we're going to be doing head movement

 Now this is one of those areas where you want to be able to move your head because

 obviously you can't use your hands to defend yourself, you can't always cover up like this

 At the same time of doing that, you don't want to be dropping your head low like you

 So first we'll go through a couple of the don'ts, the things you don't want to do.

 Now obviously in boxing you've got things like your bomb weave and whatever, don't do

 But if I'm slipping or if I'm rolling I kind of want to avoid being in this little area

 Being in this area right here puts me right in line for those knees and for those kicks.

 If you look at my posture as well, my posture I definitely want to be able to kick, I definitely

 From here I can definitely receive an awful lot of strikes and I may be able to move but

 I learnt one, I'm not going to lie, I learnt the hard way in one of my fights before.

 I thought boxing head movement would be a good idea and I got kneed in the face a few

 times so I definitely recommend not dropping too low for sure on that one.

 So that's kind of like the don'ts when it comes to head movement.

 The kind of do's with it is yes you can move your head, you can slip, you can bomb weave

 or you can roll or whatever but you kind of want to keep it all fairly upright.

 You can jerk and you can move and you can shoulder jerk and drop but you don't move

 The best way that my coach taught me, my coach Tom Barlow, he basically said you've got a

 All you want to do is keep your head out of the centre of those cross hairs and that's

 So you don't need to move any more than that and that should stop my head from dropping

 if I've got cross hairs on me constantly, dropping any lower than what I already am

 So I want to stay out of going too low for the knees and for the kicks because that's

 So the first thing that we can kind of do is you've got your basic slip.

 I'm going to treat you like you guys already know it so we're just going to slip right

 You should know that but the secret skill is with this one is to be able to punch at

 But for the first drill Gary's just going to throw slow jab and slow cross I'm just

 Now the skillful drill with this one again is obviously we'll go one for one for like

 30 seconds or so until both of us get nice and used to it and then after that we're going

 So as that punch comes out I take my head just off line right here.

 Now ideally in an ideal world we both get this right for drill sake.

 The punch should brush past my ear fairly closely, just go over my shoulder.

 You start nice and slow and you build up the speed depending on your skill level and how

 So we start with our jab, super slow motion and we both end up slipping.

 We go with our jab, slip, cross, slip, jab, slip, cross, slip and so on from there.

 So that's a great basic way to sort of get used to throwing punches.

 Now this is really really important when you're in your combinations and when you're just

 If I keep my head directly where it is and I throw a punch, my chin is kind of a little

 bit more up and I throw that punch from there and obviously it means that during mid combination

 So if I can avoid that scenario, if I can avoid getting hit in the head as I'm trying

 to do my attacking part, that's always going to be very very useful.

 The second one you're going to do is your head movement while you kick.

 This is also something fairly important because you can still get your strikes kind of, you

 So for example if I'm throwing a kick and Gary throws his cross at the same time directly

 towards my face and I don't move, throw it right at my head, as I throw the kick one

 more time, it kind of takes a little bit of the sting out of it.

 So one more time as I throw that kick, right towards my face, at the same time, same time,

 I throw my cross, anything off my right side I slip my head slightly to the left.

 So I'm going to slip my head slightly out on the left on that leg kick.

 And this just takes, hold that cross up, super slow motion, my head is just off that centre

 I'm just on the outside, I'm looking round towards Gary's ear, looking round towards

 Don't, don't drop real low because you don't want to get kneed in the head.

 Next one, so from here, all you're going to be doing is moving your head in kind of this

 Like you've got a sniper with their crosshairs on you and you're constantly, you're just

 trying to move and you don't want to get shot, you don't want to get dinged.

 Okay, so the next part is then you're going to punch, move your head at the same time.

 Super slow punch drill, punch and move, slip and, cool, nice, and then have a punch, good,

 and punch, and punch, and so on until you get nice and used to that.

 And then your next variation of that is obviously at the same time, Gary's going to throw that

 cross as I throw my kick, as I throw my kick, boom, right towards my head, boom, I don't

 want to get hit, so then I'm going to slip off line, and then I don't get hit.

 And the same thing applies for your left hand side again, as you throw your kick, you

 want to make sure you're out of line for that punch, so you take that head just off your

 This has been a video for the Warrior Collective, thank you very much, my name's Lewis Aitken,

 for more information, visit the Warrior Collective or visit martialarts.co.uk, thank you.

 While you can get away for a long time by wrapping your hand around the piece once it

 is turned round and holding the tool down on the rest with your thumb, at some point

 We can now bring our tool rest up in the center where the steady rest will bear and kind of

 So our next job is to actually move this at the tailstock end over like that.

 And you sort of just keep guessing at this until you get it to run pretty accurately.

 But we're doing much better now and we can hope to bring it round at this point and then

 So now that we have this running pretty much on center, we're going to take a nice sharp

 And again, if you take a heavy one, the wood will ride up over the bevel and take a big

 I've got it round enough that I'll actually reach in here, making sure I don't pinch myself

 If you have a lot of trouble with the wood buckling, a final great tool that will get

 us through this problem pretty handily is a nice big round-nose scraper like this with

 So we now simply bring our roller skate wheels into action here.

 This came with wing nuts and I brazed these strips of metal on here to get a lot more

 Now that we have our steady rest gripping the piece on center, it is time to move the

 I can judge exact diameters pretty well by just peeling with my hands.

 Final finish is best done with a skew and I still use the technique of wrapping my hand

 But our steady rest is making this so solid that I'm getting great performance out of

 As I come up to a shoulder or the tailstock, I use this cross hands technique.

 And I'll get absolutely the best chatter-free cut with a skew by not cutting with about

 half the cutting edge in this area towards the heel, but actually sliding up into where

 And this will leave a beautiful chatter-free finish and you can cut right up to a shoulder.

 Okay, it's now time to loosen up our steady rest and just move it a few inches away from

 where we were originally grabbing it here so that we can clean that area up.

 You often get a little gouge where you originally brought this around under the steady rest.

 A little bit of hand sanding is always necessary in this kind of work to get everything really

 And when you have to turn something long and skinny like a flagpole, a steady rest is the

 Yesterday we discussed how difficult the mother-daughter relationship can be and today we're continuing that conversation.

 As you know, communication is the key to fostering self-esteem, confidence and trust in our daughters.

 But as they grow, it can be particularly difficult to get them, well, to open up.

 So, author Erica Katz has created Bonding Over Beauty and she joins us today with details on how a little pampering can go a long way,

You say beauty is really a great way for moms and daughters to bond.

 And when your daughter's a tween, I think it's really important that you talk to her, but you want to do some fun things with her.

 Everybody loves beauty and it's a way that you guys can relate to each other where you can start conversations when you're doing something.

 And then when their guard is down, you know, really get to the heart of the matter.

 Add a little of your favorite powdered drink mix to it like that.

 Mix it up really, really well and then you're going to pour it into a lip gloss container.

 So, while you're making this, you can talk about what kind of things?

 Because maybe there's a girl that's not being nice to her in school, but I find when you do something, it's easier to talk to her.

 And you're just going to add a little bit of heavy cream to it.

 And put it in a little beautiful container that you can get at a five and dime store.

 And then you're sitting there in a towel with a little mask and then you have conversations about sometimes your insecurities and how you're insecure and maybe their insecurities, right?

 Well, a lot of times girls have issues, whether it's with their weight, with their skin, their hair.

 But sometimes mom makes that an issue for the little girl, too.

 Yes, we have to be very careful about that because when we see our little girls and they're so cute and they have little round cheeks, that doesn't mean they're fat.

 And so you really want to tell her how pretty she is and how much fun you're having being with her.

 And this is the whole reason why we're doing this because it's about bonding over beauty, starting that conversation.

 So when you're ready to get started, take your shoes and socks off.

 So thinking about articulating all the way through the foot here.

 From here, I want you to take ankle circles with one of the feet.

 So what we're going to do is scrunch the foot forward and then place it back.

 I don't feel it as much with both, so I tend to do one at a time.

 Repeat the exercise video as many times as you need to for strong feet.

Today I am recreating Matthew Williamson's boho Brick Girl hair and this

 we've got the waves, we've got some textured volume on the top and it's just a really nice

 Wave Memorizer to prep my hair and this will just ensure that whatever you do to your hair next,

 so we're going to wave it, will stay in place and memorise its shape.

 So I'm just finger combing that through the hair and today I'm actually using a straightener to

I just feel that the waves achieved with a straightener just look so much

 more natural and very laid back and chilled boho vibes which was basically Matthew Williamson's

So I'm just starting halfway down, there's no point really in doing it from the top,

 boho wavy look and next up I'm going to spray the Tony and Guy dry shampoo through the crown.

 This is just going to add volume and shake it through the waves once you've added it to the crown.

 And once that is done I'm just going to take a small section from each side and twist the

 look better with one of those plasticky tiny ones but I've just got a thin elastic today

 and I'm just using the dry shampoo a bit more just misting it on to finish.

So this is my take on the boho Brit girl hairstyle as seen in the Matthew

 Williamson Autumn Into Fifteen show as seen on the beautiful models.

 all things hair, I've very much loved it and I hope to see you soon.

 So I thought I'd shoot a quick video of how to make the tzatziki sauce.

 And what I have here are two pickling cucumbers or kirbys as they're also known.

 I prefer to use pickling cucumbers for this or pretty much anything that calls for cucumbers.

 And then what I've done is I've cut this one into quarters and then I'm just going to take

 So I'm going to go ahead and finish up these two cucumbers and then I'll show you what

 I'm going to add a teaspoon of kosher salt right to the cucumbers.

 And what I'm going to do with this is I'm going to let the salt in the cucumbers sit

 Because what I'm wanting this to do is I'm wanting the salt to pull out a lot of the

 And then all of the moisture will collect in the middle and then I'll push it back and

 So I'm just going to move the cucumbers off to the back and just pour this excess liquid out.

 Like I said, you could use a strainer but it's just one more thing to clean.

 The heroes that I'm making with this have garlic in them as well.

 It's shaped like a bar of soap and it's made of stainless steel.

 What it does is stainless steel will get rid of the odor of garlic and onions off of your hands.

 So you just run this under water with your hands like you would be washing soap.

 It takes the odor so you don't have the odor of the onions or the garlic on your hands.

 Then wash them to get rid of the odor of the garlic and the onions.

 If you can't find a Greek-style and you have to use a regular plain yogurt,

 you might want to strain it because it does have a lot of liquid to it.

 If you do use regular yogurt, you might want to add a couple squeezes of lemon juice

 It's already smelling really good with the garlic and the cucumber.

 Then I'm just going to refrigerate this until we're ready to eat later.

 Or you could add mint, some fresh mint, but I'm not a big mint fan.

 I'm going to marinate these chicken cutlets in fresh lime, shallots, garlic, cilantro,

 I'm going to place all of this in the Cuisinart with the oil and salt and pepper and run it

 Cover it into a little dish, cover it up, wrap it up, and look at it tomorrow.

 I'm also going to add some of my lovely Sriracha hot chili sauce.

 Then I'll flip them over, wrap them up with some Saran Wrap, and come back in the morning

 So anyway, the marinade I left in the refrigerator for a day and a half.

 And we do nothing except just take the chicken with whatever marinade is on there,

 But we're going to quicken the cooking by covering it, keeping the heat in.

 And now to finish it off, we are going to lower the flame and let the chicken finish cooking.

 While we still have a couple of minutes left, you check the chicken.

 If you press down on the chicken like this and the chicken is very, very firm, hard, you know it's done.

 And you don't want to wait for the chicken to start cracking and you know you overcooked it.

 And we're going to have enough here to put somewhat of a sauce, all the ground up goodies that are in there.

 Firm, done, and just to prove it, I'm going to take one of them, cut it in the middle, and show you.

 And you can also add some chopped parsley on top, even though there's cilantro in there if you want, and maybe some scallions.

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to show you how to create a really wearable brown smokey eye

 You can always add more dark eyeliner and a thick lash if you'd like to make this more

 I think this is just light enough to make it alright for a daytime look.

 So please give me a thumbs up and comment below and let me know what you think.

 So going all over the lid I'm going to take Charcoal Brown by MAC and this is on a MAC

 Once I feel like all of that powder is now into the skin I'm just going to take the top

 I'm now taking that same colour on a small round brush and I'm just going to sweep this

 This is just going to give us a really smokey look to the eye which is still wearable for

 I'm now taking a Daniel Sandler blending brush and Satin Taupe by MAC here.

 And using the same method as before I'm going to apply this just into the crease area here

 I'm now going back to that small round brush and just taking Smut by MAC and this is just

 I'm just taking this from the edge of the lash line and just tapping that in on its way.

 Now using a 224 I'm just going to buff all over the lid just to make sure that there

 is no loose powder left and this will just help you minimise any fallout that you get

 Then finally for the shadow I'm just taking Nylon by MAC which is just going to give us

 If this is already dark enough for you then you can skip this step.

 But I'm going to go ahead and line the waterline in a Collection 2000 black eyeliner.

 If you'd like this to go darker again then I would use a liquid liner for the top of

 the lash line but I'm going to try and keep this quite simple looking.

 So I'm going to take the same eyeliner and just go onto the outer corner of the eye with

 So just pushing that pencil into the lash line and creating a gentle flick up towards

 And finally for the eyes I'm taking the They're Real by Benefit mascara in black and I'm just

 I think I might start wearing this look a little bit more often.

 But yes, I hope you enjoyed that and I'll speak to you all soon.

 Hi, today I'm preparing comfort dessert, a easy creamy rice pudding.

 What I do when I'm preparing anything with milk or cream, I run some cold running water

 in my saucepan, drain it, just that little bit of water that remains is going to help

 when I'm cooking the milk, you won't get that little crust at the bottom that's so difficult

 So, fast, fast, fast, we have here some milk, and a list of ingredients could be found at

 Rice, you need to use short grain Italian rice, I'm using Arborio, very, very important.

 The inside of the rice is opaque, the outside is translucent, and as it's cooking, it'll

 release some starch, it'll be very creamy, so this is very important.

 Sugar, some cinnamon, I'm using ground, but if you have on hand at home some really nice

 cinnamon stick, break it in half and one little piece will be enough, you have a choice here.

 I'm going to give this a little stir, on medium heat, I'm going to let it simmer gently, so

 And when it comes to a simmer, I'm going to put the cover on and let it cook 20 minutes.

 It has had time to cook for 20 minutes on a low simmer, I stirred gently a few times,

 I'm using raisins, but you could use apricots, currants, wild blueberries, anything you want.

 Time for flavoring, you always add the vanilla at the end, you don't want to lose that nice

 Now we have two versions, either hot or cold, so let me try this.

 Hi, today I'm going to show you how to make some easy stir-fried green beans.

 The first thing you want to do is just put your wok on the stove and add some olive oil

 Once the oil is nice and hot, then we can add our string beans.

 And we're just going to toss that around until they are lightly coated with the oil.

 And next we're going to add a little bit of sugar, just about half a teaspoon of organic

 sugar and about two teaspoons of low-sodium soy sauce and a third cup of water.

 And we're just going to give everything a toss, mix everything around.

 And then we're going to cover everything and let the green beans steam, cook for about

 And then after five minutes, you'll see that they're nice and green and tender, but there's

 It goes with just about anything and if you can find trimmed string beans, then really

 For the complete recipe, please visit my website, Jeanette'sHealthyLiving.com and don't forget

 Today's tutorial is all about how to achieve the Japanese Garu makeup and it's inspired

 It's probably one of my most requested looks but it's not too difficult to achieve.

 All about lashes, there's not much eyeshadow used in her eyes, just a little bit of bronze,

 I've already prepped my face with concealer, BB cream and powder.

 Tsubasa's eyebrows are actually bleached to a point that you can barely see them.

 Now I don't have an eyebrow pencil for blonde hair so I'm just using a really light brown

 Now Tsubasa's hair is actually almost like a platinum colour but this is the only wig

 Now using some of my face powder I'm just going to tone my eyebrows down and soften

 Choosing a metallic bronze copper colour, I'm just going to apply all over my eyelid.

 So while I will look neutral enough on the eyes, it will still sparkle and shimmer.

 I am using a cream shadow as you can see but feel free to use your ordinary powder eyeshadow.

 So with that metallic coppery bronze colour, you want to continue this by applying it on

 So you can use any neutral darker colour to apply on your crease.

 I'm just using the Max Factor Smoky Eyes so this means I don't need to blend with a brush.

 You can see that even though I'm not using an eyeshadow brush, it still blends seamlessly.

 I really should have been wearing my green circle lenses but I forgot.

 With a shimmery white or nude eye pencil, I'm just going to run it all over my lower

 Now with a very dark black eyeliner, I'm just going to line my upper lash line.

 So I like to start in the middle of my eyes and then eventually move in the inner corners

 You want the eyeliner to be thicker as it reaches the outer edges and very winged out.

 Now I recommend something with lots of gaps in between for that Japanese look.

 Of course, applying lower lashes and again, you want the ones with lots of gaps in between.

 And I use eye tape on my eyelids just to create the bigger eyelid.

 Now taking a matte bronzing colour, I'm going to contour my nose by starting in the sides

 Build the colour slowly to avoid your nose looking dirty and use your fingers to blend

 Now with the same powder, with a bulking brush, apply it to your temples and around your cheeks

 And now with a matte pink blush, apply it right on the centre of your cheeks.

 Next, using some concealer, I'm going to apply it on my lips just to tone down the

 If you want, you can take your black eyeliner and apply it in an outer V shape like so,

 This will give an illusion of really wide, really long almond eyes.

 Now I dust face powder on my face just to modify any signs of shine.

 It's kind of freaky but also at the same time amazing what makeup and also a wig could do

 While it's not something that I could wear on an everyday basis, I do respect the girls

 I think if you switch the false lashes to mascara, this look could actually be pretty

 Anyway, someone showed me this and I thought I'll share with you guys.

 For some reason, this blonde wig reminds me of myself as a character from my Obviosity

Greg Marshall here and I'm going to break down a song real quick

 Start a fire, burn away the frost, hold your fire in your heart.

F, A and C but I also add that G in there and on the left hand you are playing F and C.

You are now playing G, A, B and D in your right hand and you are playing G and D in your left hand.

And those two chords are played for that first part of the song.

Burn away, F, the drums, that is G. Hold your fire, that is F of God.

And going through, going from the first part to the second part, I add more feeling by just tapping.

I just start bringing it up and pounding it so it gives more of an intent worship part.

Reside in my heart is a C chord, C, E, G. I also add that D in there over C in your bass.

 Hey guys, Brad Daddy's Jeff Creston here with your Muay Thai tip of the week.

 Often times we use the lead leg because it has the furthest reach.

 By the way, incidentally, beginners, the teeth is one of the best weapons to use defensively.

 If he's a puncher or a brawler and he just wants to come at me, I can just use my back

 When it comes to the back leg, I can use my back leg to stop him.

 If I am here I am going to teep, he might parry it, scoop it away, do any one of the

 But when I am here and I can't reach him he is not worried about it.

 I am going to be about six inches further than I would normally be.

 You know, somebody who does this very well in MMA, Gina Carano, if you ever watch one

 of her fights, watch her do this, it lands almost every time, because the last person

 I am going to ask the cameraman to put the lens towards my legs.

 So, when I teach people this, sometimes they will start way too far away, like three feet.

 It's another special tactic that I think will work very well for you sparring and ultimately

 Inside you'll find a template, and that's the diameter of the hole that you'll be drilling.

 We've already drilled the hole in this one previously, and what we've got is a hole saw.

 And basically find your mark, drill up, make sure you're not going to hit any joists, and

 make sure you're landing in between the wooden joists in the ceiling.

 On the inside of our can light, this is called the remodel can, and there's going to be little

 These will be pushed out, and when they're up inside the attic, they're going to hold

 In this box you'll find all the wires that you'll need to connect.

 You're going to have a hot, you're going to have a neutral, and a ground, which is

 Right here they're twisted together, I'm going to untwist them.

 Alright, so we used our strippers, we cut our Romex, which is this yellow wire coming

 You're going to strip about a quarter inch, or three-eighths of an inch off of each end.

 The white is the neutral, that's what the electricity falls, or goes back to the panel

 on, and the hot is where the electricity comes into the can light.

 It's basically to safeguard the wire from any abrasions or sharp objects inside the

 And generally you want to strip about six inches of Romex to go inside the box, just

 It's going to make sure that there's a good connection, and the connections won't loosen

 You can't generally twist them so well, but we'll do our best on these.

 This fixture is going to be a little bit different than most, but the wiring is going to be about

 the same, and the functions and how they make up are about pretty much universal.

 And in a remodel can, we're just going to simply push the can up.

 And now here's where the black clips that I mentioned beforehand come into play.

 They simply just push toward the outside of the can light, and right now they're going

 So now we're going to take the socket from the top of the can light, bring it down, and

 then we're going to get the housing trim, and the two connect in the end.

 We're going to take the V-clips, insert them into their housing inside the can light, and

 And we screw the light bulb up, twist in your bulb, and now we're ready for light.

I did it slightly different just with the glitter, used different colors.

 kind of fun and colorful, and I was really in the mood just to really play out my eyes.

 Before we get into the tutorial, I would really, really appreciate it if you guys subscribe

So I have already started by applying my base makeup and my eyebrows.

 today, I used my Napoleon Pettis Sheer Genius Liquid Foundation in the shade Light Look 2.

 And then I went over the top with a little bit of Arbonne's Mineral Powder, which is

 in the shade Taupe, with a tiny, tiny little bit of the Face of Australia HG Brow Definition

 So I'm going to start by taking Anastasia Billi... a nude eyeshadow, which is what's

 going to apply this above my crease, pretty much in a straight kind of line.

 Now I'm going to go in with a little bit of this caramel shade, and just lightly trace

 Now I'm going to use my Napoleon Perdis China Doll Gel Liner in the shade Equinox.

 Take some of the color, damp it a little bit, like you use a setting spray if you have one,

 or use... I've got some of this Liquisette by Ben Nye, so that will be fine.

 Or you could just, you know, spit on it, or just, you know, dip your brush into a little

 I'm just going to go in with a tiny bit of the powder, just dry powder,

 left that waterline free, we're going to line this on that part.

 So now I'm just taking a little bit of an iridescent blue shadow.

I have no idea what color shade it is, but it's just like a pale blue.

 Then what I'm going to do just with a teeny tiny little bit of glitter, which I'm using

 Alright, now I'm just going to apply a little bit of vanilla onto my brow bone,

 the highlight, and then I can just blend any colors a little bit further.

 So unfortunately, my camera died and I didn't get to record this last bit.

I used the Adele Wispy Lashes and then I went in with lots and lots of

 a Australis Mascara, which was in the shade Electric Blue, just to really make my eyes pop.

 Here are six fundamentals of leg movement to develop in elementary school runners.

 Then check out the activity segments in A Running Start for ideas on how to introduce these fundamentals to your runners.

 The goal is for kids to explore these running movements, increase their body awareness, and to begin to develop an understanding and capacity for efficient movement.

 Encourage your team to avoid pounding or plodding, which are both often seen among elementary schoolers.

 Plodding wastes too much energy and is tough on the body, causing kids to tire out quickly.

 These are flaws you can sometimes diagnose by listening to foot strike.

 Instead, runners should be light on their feet, almost springy, and as quiet as possible.

 The next essential of leg movement, and a closely related one, is to land on the midfoot, or on the balls of the feet.

 Many runners land either flat-footed, which contributes to plodding, or on their heels.

 Notice that this adjustment to running way up on the tiptoes is different from running on the balls of the feet.

 Practicing quick feet and having the feet pop off the ground teaches the body to use its energy most efficiently, while promoting speed and coordination.

 The fourth essential is to land with the foot and knee pointed in the direction that the body is traveling.

 This promotes stability and ensures that all the runner's energy works toward propelling the body where it wants to go.

 When the feet or knees point inward, or outward, this steers some of the energy in the wrong direction.

 Fifth, encourage your kids to lift their knees when running, bringing them up in front of the body.

 They should avoid the shuffling that results from running with relatively straight legs and insufficient knee lift, as shown here.

 And finally, have kids use a stride length that feels natural and comfortable.

 Ideally, a runner's foot should land directly beneath the body, or as close to it as possible.

 You may occasionally see extreme overstriding, in which the foot lands well in front of the body.

 The effect sometimes resembles leaping, and the runner often lands inefficiently on the heels.

 The other extreme, understriding, is where runners take very short, choppy steps.

 Remember that it can be a lot of fun to learn how to move skillfully.

 Have your team explore the leg movements of the running stride, using fun challenges to introduce the elements presented here.

Here are some reminders, and be sure to check out our other Form 101 segments.

 Fourth, encourage your kids to lift their knees when running, bringing them up in front of the body.

 Alright guys, I'm going to show you how to throw a very cheap meal together tonight.

 I'm probably not even going to cook half of this, so I'll say a dollar.

 So we're going to make rice-a-roni, onion rings, and a hot ham and cheese sandwich with

 Of course, if you know rice-a-roni, all you've got to do is brown it.

 I know this don't look great to a lot of you extravagant cookers out there, but some of

 Alright, now I'm going to turn it down to between medium and low.

 In about 20 minutes that'll be done, and I'll get back with you.

 Next, I'm going to put the ... Let's move this pan out of the way somewhere.

 I'm going to put the pot with the oil in it, and crank him up on high just for a few minutes.

 Okay guys, the oil's getting hot enough now, so I'm starting to put in some onion rings.

 I'm not going to cook very many because I've got all that rice cooked over there.

 When they get done, they'll float to the top and they'll be good and crispy brown.

 We've only got about five or six in there, so it won't take very long.

 Scribble on a bowl with a pair of towels and just drain the oil off of them.

 The next step is just get your ham, whatever kind of ham you like.

 In the meantime, while it's frying, I've got me some toast in the toaster.

 You just want to arrange all your little pieces into a thick little patty here.

 I'm going to use the big cover off the rice just because it's handy.

 If you're like me, you'd rather spend money on guns and ammo besides eating.

 Before you use silk cord in a project you do need to stretch it

 project might lose its tension and lose its shape as the cord stretches

 It also will help get the kinks out of the cord if you're going to use it in a

 The way that the Griffin silk comes is with this little built in needle.

 just to give it a good solid weight but anything that you have that you think

 that won't be what you want to use later when you're done with it.

 whatever you're using to weigh it down doesn't touch the floor.

 gradually pull the wet silk and as it dries it will get nice and stretched out.

 So when you come back to your silk string in the morning after it's hung

 that you leave yourself enough room for it to stretch and still not be touching

 Next you're going to add in a cup and a quarter of unsweetened cocoa.

 Two teaspoons of baking soda, just to give it the old Lifteroony.

 And we're just going to mix this together until everything is well combined.

 And you might want to use a big bowl just so everything mixes really easily.

 Okay and now what we're going to do is add in the wet ingredients, starting with a cup

 And we're going to beat this over medium speed just until everything is well combined.

 And if you don't have a mixer, you can use a whisk and do this.

 So what you're going to do now is reduce your speed to medium and add in gradually a cup

 We're going to continue beating this for about a minute and a half and this is going

 After that we're going to grab three nine inch baking pans, spray them with some baking

 And we're going to bake this into a 350 degree oven for about 30 to 35 minutes, just so an

 While the cake is baking, don't forget to click that subscribe button because you want

 Also while the cake is baking, this is the perfect time to take a bar of semi-sweet chocolate,

 take a good sharp knife and start shaving it down until you get somewhere in the neighborhood

 You can use a peeler if you want, whatever you feel comfortable with.

 Look at that, your hands are going to be a little bit filthy, but that's okay.

 After about 35 minutes the cakes are nicely done, so what we're going to do is flip them

 And voila, it's moist, sweet, you could even eat this on its own.

 So what I've done here is flipped this over once again and if it's a little bit too bulky

 So at this point in time we're going to take 400 milliliters of whipping cream, and the

 tip is this should be nicely chilled and your bowl should be chilled as well.

 You can slip the bowl in the freezer for about 10 or 15 minutes.

 Then you're going to take your electric mixer and mix this until you get stiff peaks.

 If you want it a little sweeter you can add a couple of tablespoons of sugar.

 So what you want is some nice stiff peaks, something like this.

 Alright what we're going to do is spread the whipping cream onto the first layer of cake

 Now what we're going to do is add about a third of a layer of canned cherries.

 The whipping cream and the cherries, you get the drill, you can do this for all layers.

 After we have all the layers we're going to cover this completely with whipping cream.

 I'm not really a cake decorator but you can be as creative as you want.

 Then you're just going to kind of grab up your shredded chocolate and just kind of paste

 What I usually do is pipe up some swirls of whipping cream over the top just to make it

 Believe me guys, this is rich, decadent, a great hit at any occasion.

 Head on over to CookandShare.com for this recipe and many more great recipes.

 Don't forget to click that subscribe button and like our videos.

 Hi everyone, so today we're going to look at how to do a freshwater water change.

 It's very simple to do and it's very important to do at least once a month a 25% water change

 So I've got a small tank here, this is just a 3 gallon tank, but I'm going to be showing

 If you're doing a larger tank, say like I'm doing a 50 gallon or something, a big 5 gallon

 Because like on a 50 gallon, 5 gallons would be 10% of the water, that's a pretty good

 So if you get one of these big tubs, or it's more like a jug, you can empty out 5 gallons

 of water into it, empty it out, refill it, and then put it back in.

 So I'm going to be doing this which is a smaller thing because I'm just doing a small tank.

 So I've got a tubing here, I've got this neat pump on the end, when I pump it, it starts

 And then here, when I start pumping this, it's just going to start to siphon.

 So now I'm just going to put this on the ground, and I'm going to unplug it.

 When the water level, the lower I have it, the quicker it goes.

 When the water level gets as low as you want it to be, you stop, I'm going to let it take

 I want to do about, I don't know, I'm getting to about 25%, 30%, 40% at least water change

 Now I've got to go get a little bit more water to completely fill it up, but as you see,

 So you just empty out as much water as you want and then refill it.

 If you're doing a bigger tank with these big jugs, the easiest way I find to fill them

 Go and put it in the bathtub or the shower head if it'll fit inside here, and that'll

 I've had people ask how to do water changes for turtles and other things.

 If you get one of these cool suction things that starts it, that's great, but otherwise

 And then you just need a jug or something that you can collect the water in and then

 Hey everybody, this is going to be a video on how to straighten your hair, whether it's

 I'm going to show you guys how to straighten your hair using only a straightener and nothing

 If you want to straighten your hair and have it last for days, then it depends on the kind

 It doesn't matter what blow dryer you use, what brush you use, it's all about the straightener.

 So I'm going to tell you guys a little bit about the product features that you definitely

 You definitely want it to have an anti-slip edge, which means that the edges are going

 to be smooth and round on the straightener, so that way your hair isn't going to get caught

 It's definitely great when you're in the rush in the morning to just straighten your hair

 within five minutes and not have to wait for the straightener to heat up.

 Another great feature to a straightener that you want is adjustable temperature.

 If you don't have adjustable temperature, then you might not be able to get the desired

 A high temperature such as 320 to 392 degrees Fahrenheit is going to straighten your hair

 Don't worry about it being damaging because you need to look for a straightener that has

 If you have ceramic plates, it's going to be smooth, even heating as it glides down

 Another thing, if you use a heat protectant like this one, it's the Qi Silken Fusion,

 I'm going to make your search a whole lot easier for a really good straightener.

 I'm going to show you guys one of my favorite straighteners to use.

 This is the Sebastian Professional Straightener and you can get it at BeautyChoice.com.

 The first thing you're going to want to do is just brush it out with your fingers or

 You're just going to take a 1-1.5 section of hair with the straightener on it and just

 You don't want to go too fast because then it's not going to straighten all the way and

 you don't want to go too slow because then you're going to be ruining your hair.

 Take all the hair from the side and the face and you're just going to do a zigzag.

 Make sure that your hair is smoothed out before you start teasing.

 Hold it really tight and then just start building the tease in the root.

 If you want to make the tease more dramatic, you can hairspray it first and then tease

 You need a good straightener and you need a good heat protectant.

 You can get both of these from BeautyChoice.com and I have a special code for you guys for

 In this video I'm going to be showing you how to make a really simple, kind of cool

 You need a GoPro camera, the handlebar mount, a carabiner for climbing, this is a climbing

 You don't need a frame, I just have it on my camera right now so that's what I'm using,

 and so what this mount does is it basically mounts the camera onto the carabiner and then

 it allows you to basically just hang this carabiner off anything you can possibly find

 on a ceiling or anywhere like that and then angle the camera to basically any angle you

 want from the bottom of the carabiner and shoot either sideways or straight down so

 If you want to just use it hanging on a tree, that would work totally fine too.

 So lots of different flexibility, you can hang it off ropes and tons of different things

 so it adds a ton of flexibility to your camera and the setup time for it is almost instantaneous

 So to make this mount we're going to take our carabiner and our tape and we're going

 If you started off with the right amount or with a big carabiner it may not be necessary

 The reason I'm wrapping tape around it is I need a section of the carabiner to be big

 enough for the roll bar mount to get grip on so that's what we're adding the tape for.

 Once you think you've got enough you can take the tape off and then you can get your handlebar

 mount, slide it onto the carabiner just like so over top of your tape, get the bolt back

 You'll want to tighten down both sides of the handlebar mount just like so.

 Now we can go ahead and just slap our camera onto the handlebar mount just like so and

 Alright so now we've got our GoPro mounted onto our carabiner and we're just simply going

 to clip it onto whatever we want to clip it onto and then it'll just hang there.

 Now it's not super sturdy so whatever you're clipping it to is moving a lot.

 You're probably going to get some shake in your video but for the most part if it's just

 say like a wire that goes somewhere or it's something that's hanging over a track you're

 shooting onto it's a pretty simple secure mount and it really doesn't take anything

 You just want to handle a Mark I carabiner and then your camera's on it.

 The really cool thing with this mount, I'm just going to turn it sideways here so you

 guys can see, is that the camera can actually be folded right up and it'll face and it'll

 So it doesn't, it can shoot basically aerials straight down or it can shoot any other direction.

 If you want to flip it around you can just flip the carabiner around and if you want

 to shoot the same way as whatever you're clipping onto you could simply put an extender

 But I thought it was pretty cool that it could shoot straight down.

 So guys, thanks for watching this other GoPro tips and tricks video.

 You've enjoyed it, make sure you subscribe and check out my channel for lots more videos.

 Hi, welcome to the Eurofit Direct video on how to fit a kitchen hinge.

 We'll be looking at the measuring, the fitting, safety aspects and the tools required for

 First thing we need to do when fitting a hinge is to get the door prepped, which involves

 cutting what is called the cup hole and the pilot holes for the hinge arm.

 We measure from the top of the door, 75mm down and 21mm across.

 We're using a special drill bit called a hinge hole cutter, which has got a little guide

 there, straight into the middle, drill down 11mm, which is roughly the depth of the actual

 Now we need to ensure that this is on a 90 degree, which we can do using a set square

 Once we have this here, we can mark the two holes here and then just use a small drill

 And then we literally are just screwing the hinge arm in place as so.

 Now that we have the hinge arm in place, we need to have a look at the mounting plate.

 The mounting plate connects onto the side of the carcass and the arm goes onto it.

 So what we're going to do here is just loosely connect the plate onto the arm.

 What we've done here is taken a measurement from the edge of the carcass, 37mm back in.

 So we hold this up like this, offer it in, get the door to the height that you want it,

 and see where the plate fixes, and then just mark the two holes there.

 Once we've done this, and I've already pre-done it, we can drill out where the hinge plate

 Sometimes on the larger doors, it's useful to have somebody to help you.

 But luckily this is a smaller door, so I'm able to do it on my own.

 It's always best not to over-tighten to start with, as you may need to adjust.

 Now you can see just at the top here, it's a little bit high here, I'm not pushing in.

 There's various adjustments which you can make, which will bring the door in, move it

 So you're going to do one, two, and now try to go exactly what you did,

 She'll make sure she's not sitting on her heel and turns in slightly.

 She pushes her left hip strongly forward as she ronds to the back.

 Look how she bounces and goes from foot to foot, covering space.

 She looks out to the audience so that she can step out for the chasse pas de bourrée.

 Her eyes follow her hands and foot as she prepares and steps out to first arabesque.

 She pushes down, and as she changes feet, she looks out to the audience.

 I've drilled a hole in this block of wood, insert my screw down into it, tighten it up.

 Now we're going to get our hacksaw and we're going to cut that head off of it.

 Don't get in no hurry or nothing, just take it nice and easy and let the saw do the cutting.

 After that, loosen her up, pull out your little stud, and there you got it.

 It's hard to see, but I've laid out the lines for the bolt pattern.

 Drill the holes in here right quick with a number 29 drill bit.

 When we're going in on this radius, we want to hold that thing straight on there.

 If you don't, your little stud will look either this way or this direction.

 And here's one that you could also use the sugar cookie mix with and then just the snickerdoodles

 And we're going to again cream our butter and because of what we're doing we've got

 Move our flour out of the way because I've already measured out our three cups of flour.

 This is our cinnamon and sugar which we're going to roll it in and our vanilla.

 Now I use this recipe all the time and I don't remember ever putting this in ahead of time

 I like to keep scraping down the sides and also if you have a KitchenAid there's that

 Now I think in the directions I put, beat in as much flour as you can stirring in the

 If you see or you start to hear your mixer, and I think this is basically for the hand

 mixers, when it was starting to, you know, not really moving and you certainly don't

 Some of the bigger ones like this, you don't have that much of a problem.

 At least not with this recipe, but you certainly don't want to blow out your mixer.

 And this is going to be the same thing that we did with the lime cookies, except we're

 Except what makes them snickerdoodles is to take your cinnamon sugar and mix it up.

 And I always use a paper plate, but I didn't have a chance to go down there and get the

 And then again, if you find it's too soft and you can't work with it, then just put

 And we're just going to roll them, put them on our little tray.

 I always feel like I'm wasting your time when I'm standing here doing this.

 When you move these from your workstation to the oven, you have to be very careful and

 Otherwise, if you whip them real fast, you'll be baking one giant cookie.

 And I am using a metal spatula on this pan, which you know I don't like.

 main, say if I have my reel, I'll put the first 75 yards of some cheaper line

 and then I'll do a blood knot and put my nice expensive monofilament on the last

 gonna do is cause these two pieces of line to act as one piece and there's

 about eight inches going each way and you're gonna wrap it around

 And then this first one, you're gonna come back to see this is where we stop

 We got the loops down here over here on the side and a loop through.

 gonna hold it with this hand and you're gonna take the pink and you're gonna

 where put the yellow line through and we're gonna put this pink one going back

 we're gonna slowly, and you got to do this slowly, you slowly begin to cinch up

 have a super small, as far as in diameter, knot and it's a very strong

Like I said I don't tie that on my main line usually except for when I'm

You only have to replace the last 75 yards and you can make your fishing

 Let me make you a creamy Thai soup today in our biochef blender.

 Now it has a dough hook, which is one of the reasons why I got it.

 You know, I'm going to have to go get a tripod here in a second.

 I've used the big models in all the restaurants I've worked at.

 So I've taken six cups of flour, and I'm going to open two packages of yeast here.

 I'm going to dump those into one and a half cups of warm water.

 And we're going to add about a teaspoon of sugar to get the yeast started here.

 And we're going to let that proof for just about two or three minutes.

 I'm not going to let it rise up, because we're going to make this,

 And I want to stir that so that that sugar and all that is all combined there.

 Okay, so it's only been about a minute or so, and it's still incorporating all that mixture.

 Okay, I'm pouring the flour with the flour mixture in the food processor.

 After you take the dough out of the food processor, you should let it rest for about a half hour.

 Okay, I'm going to use a poster note, a pattern for my canola show.

 If you don't have one, you could always cut one out with a piece of paper.

 If you marry the musician, you'll have the trumpet in his hand.

 Okay, it only takes about a minute or a minute and a half to cook a canoli.

 Okay, they'll be ready to fill in with ice cream or ricotta, whatever you like.

 As an alternative to deep frying your canoli, you can put it in the oven at 500 degrees

 Okay, it's been seven minutes already and I'm going to check it.

 Okay, I'm going to have to put this in the refrigerator now because I don't want it to

 Now, if you can't find these canoli sticks, what I do is I go to the hardware store and

 And by the way, the diameter is 1 inch and that's perfect for making these canolis.

 And today I'd like to show you how to make some survival jerky.

 And the difference between survival jerky and regular jerky is what you're going to

 do is you're going to cook the meat as you marinate it in salt.

 And I know a lot of you are saying, well why would you want to do that?

 Well, the reason you would want to cook your meat and salt it to preserve it, but mainly

 to cook it and to heat it up past 158 degrees is to kill the parasites in it.

 And namely, one of the nasty parasites out there is trichinosis.

 And getting trichinosis in a bad economy and you can't get a doctor and you can't get the

 necessary thiobenzidol to cure yourself is going to be very bad and unpleasant for you

 Well, hey, if you've got enough jars and you've got enough lids and you're prepped and you

 But if you're a prepper, you should have an alternative way to preserve meat.

 10% is going to preserve the meat and keep most bacteria away from it and should last

 And boiling it in that water is going to kill any parasites in it because I'm going to get

 And if you run across an economic downturn, you might run into something like wild boar.

 You've all heard that if you uncook pork, you can get parasites and stuff like that.

 But not just that, if you, I mean any predator, coyote, fox, mountain lion, anything like

 If you use traditional jerky methods and use a Nesco dehydrator, you can get parasites.

 Also if you cook it in the microwave or some smokehouses, just smoking the meat sometimes

 And if you salt the meat, I don't care how much salt you put in it, it won't kill some

 So I've got just my smoker here and what I've got is some homemade charcoal in there

 I'm actually not going to be using that because I had a mosquito fly in there and I cleaned

 it out and then I had some gnats fly in there so I didn't have a lid for that one.

 And what I'm going to shoot for, that's about say a gallon of water.

 You want to put about a pound of salt in there and that will give me almost 12%.

 Now for those of you who don't have any salt, you could use sea water.

 Sea water is about 3.5% salinity or 3.2 depending on where you're at in the world.

 If you were to take 3 gallons of filtered sea water, make sure it's clean, and you boiled

 it down to 1 gallon, then it would give you the proper salinity and you could get by without

 So I'm going to put some of this in there and then I'll throw the meat in and I'll get

 Some people say that you should do it for about a minute, minute and a half.

 I'm going to do it for five minutes and that way I'm going to be insured that I killed

 everything in there and that preservative is going to get in the meat.

 Alright, it's been about five minutes, so I'm going to get some of this stuff out of

 I've already got this fire going right here and I'm just going to use this to smoke it.

 I tried a piece of this after it's cooked and it's a little salty, but not too bad.

 Okay guys, it's been a little while out here and the stuff, well, it's almost done.

 Y'all know you can tell when jerky's done when you can break it open like that and it

 But guys, don't think that you won't see anything from the zoo.

 If the crap were to ever hit the fan and people were to get hungry, they would go raid the

 zoo and you would see exotic meats like zebra, lion, hyena, whatever they got.

 Okay, I just wanted to show y'all the finished product here and it turned out pretty nice.

 My opinion is that it's a little dry, but the purpose of it is to use for seasoning

 So if you boil this in a pot of vegetables or whatever, it will season it up very nicely.

 I think I would add a little pepper to it to give it a little spice.

 Well, that's better than I would have thought, especially hearing that from you.

 Hi there, Lindsay here, the Frugal Crafter, with a clever storage tip for you today.

 And Paper Mart actually supplies the baker's twine that I'm using here in my storage bag.

 So what you need is a cosmetics bag, and then I'm going to show you how to make this cute

 little storage container that you can easily feed your twine up from.

 Alright I've got my supplies here at my craft table, and what I want to show you here is

 And you can purchase it at www.papermart.com because it's like five bucks a spool cheaper

 So what you want to do is remove the labels from your twine, and then you just want to

 pull the end string loose, it's pretty easy, it's just kind of secured in there.

 we'll begin to make our little storage box, because we don't want to get our strings and

 twines all tangled up and then have to cut some off and waste it.

 240 yards on one of these spools, you still don't want to waste it because it's so pretty.

It's got a zipper top, but it's just basically a soft clear plastic makeup bag.

 And then what I'm going to do is use my cropped dial or any heavy duty hole punch, and I'm

 easy to punch your things like plastic and tin cans, and just about anything you can

 imagine, thin wood, Formica, whatever you can think of pretty much.

 And also if you're doing bookmaking and you need to go through a bunch of sheets of cardstock

 one and a long reach one, and I find that I use this 90% of the time.

 you're trying to figure out, save yourself some money, buy the smaller one, it's so much

Then you want to put your twine into the bag, and you want to feed the ends

 for yarn, other types of twine, ribbon, you could punch holes all through this thing,

 especially if you had the long reach paper punch, and then you could just throw in your

 Baker's twine is really fun to tie up packages of homemade goodies for Christmas, it's fun

 to use on crafts, I'm going to have a lot of ideas in upcoming videos on how you can

 use this baker's twine because it's really a versatile staple and it's become so trendy

 lately that once you get used to using it, you're going to be going through a lot of

 it, so I really encourage you to buy the larger spools and save yourself some money in the

If you're going to use this technique for yarn, you want to make sure that you get

 the end of the spool, the end of the yarn that comes from the center of the spool, just

 because then your yarn balls won't be getting tangled up in there.

 since it's so tightly wound on the cones, they're not going to tangle up, it's going

 so loose, if you want to do this sort of storage technique, you want to make sure you're pulling

 the way that looks, it makes you want to walk around and hold it like a fancy pocketbook,

 At Paper Mart you can also get jute and sisal and cotton twines, you can find a huge variety

 of things at Paper Mart for your packaging needs, and it's so nice when you can buy it

Today's project was brought to you by Paper Mart, you can check them out

 online at www.papermart.com, where we make you look even better.

 There's one 10mm head bolt on the driver's side that holds on the fan shroud assembly.

 There's a little tab you lift up on it and just pull the connector out.

 Now upon assembly, I would put some Loctite on the nut that holds the fan on.

 And then it's just a matter of reassembling the same way you took everything apart.

 which has a plastic piece on top to stop you from burning yourself

 because when you do steam or you run hot water through this steam hot water nozzle

 and it's something that your children don't want them to get near it

 If you want froth just put it below the surface of the milk and heat

 As a guide have it half way between the bottom of the jug and the top of your milk

 Fill the bottom of the jug to the temperature that you would like

 and we should have a cloth somewhere that we can wipe the steam nozzle down

 www.espressoitalia.com.au or toll free 24 and number 1300 660 976

 The first thing you should do when setting up your aquarium is make sure

 include a thermometer, heater, air stone, live or artificial plants, decorative

 items for the floor of your aquarium, and cleaning accessories.

 the aquarium on the stand you selected or other sturdy surface.

 Arrange and secure your plants and decorations before filling the aquarium

 Next, add SafeStart to prevent new tank syndrome and make it safe for your

This allows you to add your fish immediately rather than waiting two

You can also add SafeStart after a water change, when adding new fish, or

 suction to the back wall of the tank and can be hidden with a plan or two.

 arrive home with your new fish, float the transport bag into your aquarium

 the bag to slowly match the water in the aquarium and helps your goldfish adjust.

 While the bag is floating, add Tetra SafeStart to your aquarium.

 always a good idea whenever you introduce new fish to the water.

 quickly conditions the water and minimizes new tank syndrome for your

 pouring the bag of transport water and your goldfish over a net into a bucket

Most goldfish won't eat until they're comfortable and acclimated

 goldfish in a tank may hide behind plants, rocks, or decorations.

Overfeeding creates excess waste and decaying food which can contaminate

 appropriate for a mature tank but not when starting up a brand new tank.

 goldfish and aquarium setup will thrive with just a few minutes of attention

Check that water is circulating properly through the filter and that

 Tetra's easy strips to test the water pH and levels of ammonia and nitrite in

If you discover problems with water chemistry, a 25% water change will

 Regular water changes, about twice each month, are the single most effective way

 the water, use a gravel vacuum to remove some of the excess gunky stuff from the

 aquarium once every month will also help keep your setup and your goldfish

 Open a new cartridge, rinse it off, and insert into the filter.

 change your cartridge, it's a good idea to do a 50% water change.

Visit our website and Facebook page for more tips, advice, and information.

 We just happen to have an orthodontist appointment after school and it takes a while to get there

 So this is a nice easy meal and I'm going to make homemade enchilada sauce which is

 First you're just going to cook your ground beef and I put about half of a chopped onion

 So you're just going to brown it and then drain it and add your taco seasoning.

 I am going to use some homemade taco seasoning but you could just add a packet.

 I'll include the link to the taco seasoning that I use in the description box.

 Ok, so I have my ground beef and I drained it and put the taco seasoning in.

 And if you do use the recipe that I use, I used about a quarter of a cup of the taco

 I did want to flavor the meat but I didn't want it to be too overly strong.

 So I am just going to start my enchilada sauce and I am cooking my rice on the side.

 And I'm also going to preheat my oven to 350 so I can just stick my tortillas in there

 just for a minute to get them soft so that I can easily make the enchiladas.

 I have a quarter of a cup of oil heating up in my pan and then I'm going to whisk in two

 tablespoons of all purpose flour and two tablespoons of chili powder.

 Ok, so you're going to just whisk that and cook it just until it starts to get brown.

 I had exactly one and a half cups of chicken broth left in my carton which was awesome.

 And you're going to need a half teaspoon of ground cumin, a half teaspoon of garlic powder,

 It is from Recipe Girl and I followed her recipe exactly and it's perfect.

 I almost always change up recipes but hers was perfect just the way it is.

 So you're just going to whisk that and let it simmer over medium heat for 10 minutes

 Okay, I have everything ready to assemble the enchiladas and it will be very easy.

 I just have my 13 by 9 pan and I sprayed it really well with olive oil spray so that nothing sticks.

 And I usually just put a little bit of the enchilada sauce in the bottom.

 And if you have to eat gluten free, this is really easy to make gluten free.

 I have some separate enchilada sauce that I had left over that I made gluten free.

 But I'll just do that separately and I'll show you how to make them with the regular ingredients.

 So I put my tortillas in the oven just for a couple minutes so that they're nice and soft and easy to fold.

 I put, I'm sure you know the drill, but just put a good amount of beef.

 Okay, so I have all of my enchiladas rolled up in the pan and put together nice and tight.

 And then you're just going to pour some of your enchilada sauce right over top.

 So you could use half of it for the enchilada soup and half for this.

 So then you're just going to put it in the oven at 350 degrees.

 And just wait until they're cooked nice and soft and the cheese is melted.

 This is what your enchiladas will look like when you take them out of the oven.

 Mine took 15 minutes and the cheese was melted and everything else was hot.

 So only about 15 minutes in the oven and we are just serving our enchiladas with rice.

 Hi, this is Victor from GlowSticking.com and this is a tutorial on weaves and smoothing

 out transitions between weaves and thus creating a good visual effect and shine.

 First thing you need to know, so I keep planes straight and it looks like one of my LEDs

 So like I was saying, keeping your plane straight so that you have circles facing the audience.

 You don't want to be looking like this because that's not as visually appealing.

 So first you want to do this, and that not only being in front but on either side of

 A way to be able to work on that without hurting yourself is using one hand, one stick, one

 And while you're doing that, go everywhere so that when you're trying to do it with two,

 you have that muscle memory to know that you can keep your planes pretty and visually appealing.

 And definitely experiment as much as possible because the more your hands know, the more

 And overall you want, if you're dominant with your right, practice with your left.

 And if it looks good, then you have a better chance that you'll do it better and it'll

 After all of that, you want to slowly try it with two hands, two strings.

 So slowly experimenting, maybe going from here, instead of going into the fountain weave,

 And easier for it, and then it's easier for you to express any sort of thing you want to go for.

 If you're trying to maybe go from behind the back to a windmill, and you end up hitting

 your head or doing something like that, take it slow, one hand at a time.

 So maybe start one hand, and then getting that to go over your head.

 I try to put both hands in front of my face, and of course they crossed.

 Maybe right hand in front of my head, left hand behind my head.

 To review, what you want is to be able to keep the plane straight.

 And also exaggerating the transitions that you're having difficulty with.

 This video is going to be all about actually painting the bike after you've already gotten

 If you haven't seen part 1, click on this annotation because you need to watch that

 In this video, I'm going to go over how to actually finish your paint job.

 Primer, 1000 grit sandpaper, the color of your choice, clear coat, gray scotch brite,

 tack rags and clean shop rags or towels, and wax and grease remover.

 Now in this video, my dad's going to be using a spray gun to spray it, but all the techniques

 and all the preparation is the same if you use a rattle can at home.

 And one important note, you want to buy all the same brand of primer, color, and clear

 Your first step after you've already prepped your bike is you want to apply the primer.

 You want to make sure to spread light, even coats along your frame.

 It's a lot better to do light, even coats than one heavy, wet one where you have the

 You want to allow your primer to dry completely and you want to check the back of your primer

 You want to take your 1000 grit sandpaper next after the primer's dry and go over the

 Next you're going to add one final coat of primer and you're ready for paint.

 After the primer's dry, you want to get your paint and you want to spray it just like you

 Light, even coats throughout the frame doing multiple coats instead of one heavy one.

 It's better to take your time now and do light coats instead of heavy ones because

 After you've covered the frame completely, you want to let it dry.

 Now this is the time if you want to apply any decals or custom stickers onto your bike.

 Having decals or stickers under the clear coat is going to keep them looking better

 If you want custom decals in the OC area, there's an email in the description below

 After applying your decals, you want to use your same techniques to apply your clear coat.

 You want to let it completely dry, at least overnight before you reassemble it because

 Now your bike's all painted and now it's time to put it back together and ride it.

 What you're going to need is two 9-inch round vanilla cakes, a large piece of cardboard covered in tinfoil, some vanilla frosting

 some colorful jelly beans, some sweetened coconut flakes, some mini marshmallows, three egg-shaped chocolates and some food markers

 So I'm tracing around the outside edge of the cake with some wax paper and a marker to get the perfect round shape that I need

 I've made sure to adjust it to exactly where I want it to make the ears and the tie look great

 And that has helped me so that I can find the middle of the cake and match up the ears on the other side

 And now I'm just moving my cakes around to make sure that they're in the right place that I want them to be and now

 you'll notice that the cake fits perfectly in with the tie and that's exactly how I want it

 Now you could take your ears and just place them on the very top and now you have your full bunny shape

 Now I'm just going to put my frosting all over the entire cake tops and sides

 Now I'm going to take my shredded coconut and put it on the face and ears to give it that fuzzy look

 For the tie, we're not going to put any coconut on and now I'm just going to cover the entire tie in whatever design of

 Now I've taken a little bit of the frosting and filled a baggie with it

 And I'm just going to cut off the end and now I'm just going to draw on my face

 I'm putting a pink egg-shaped chocolate for the nose and two blue ones for the eyes

 Now I'm going to put some frosting over the top of my coconut and fill in the ears with pink jelly beans

 I let my mouth and whiskers set for a little while so that it would harden so that I could draw on the mouth and the whiskers

 Now I'm cutting one mini marshmallow in half and we're going to use that for the teeth

 In today's lesson we're going to learn Sweet Home Alabama by Leonard Skinner and that's

 Before you get started, take a moment to download our chord chart, there's a link to that in

 That'll help you follow along with this lesson and the original recording.

 So I'm going to show you a little rhythmic shot that we can put into the chorus of this

 song that'll help bring out, I don't know, it sounds really cool.

 But what we're going to do instead is we're going to play the D chord the same way, the

 And then we're going to go up on the C chord and then back to D. So I'll show you that

 So what we're going to do is we're going to go ahead, and since it's so thick, we're going

 to go ahead and cut it lengthwise and then we're going to start cutting it into bite

 As you can notice the grain is going this way so obviously we want to cut against the

 Alright, now we're going to go ahead and start slicing this up into bite sized pieces and

 This will help give you bigger pieces and the pieces will be more tender too.

 We're going to continue and go ahead and cut up the other half.

 Alright, now we're going to go ahead and get our marinade ready for our top round meat.

 Just get your hands in there and get it well incorporated with the meat.

 And we're going to pop this in the refrigerator for about an hour and let it marinate.

 Alright, we're going to go ahead and make our sauce for our pepper steak.

 Alright, our meat's been marinating in the fridge for about an hour.

 Now I've gone ahead and blotted this dry with some paper towels.

 Alright, after about 30 seconds the water's come back up to a boil.

 And we're going to go ahead and add a couple tablespoons of vegetable oil in here.

 Alright, we're going to go ahead and add in one large yellow onion.

 Alright, now we're going to go ahead and add our sauce in after about two minutes of stir-frying.

 Thank you guys very much for watching and we'll see you next time.

 Hey, this is Michael, and here's a little tutorial on how I did the

 Okay, well you probably saw that, but still I'm just going to tell you what it is

 And, well, I don't really have a stand to hold it so you can see everything

 And at the same time already have your right hand over here to do this

 Once it finishes, and while you're doing that you can move your left hand up another octave

 Oh yeah, and in the beginning when I did the first time of doing this

 Hey, this is David from the Shepherd School and what we're going to do today is we're

 Now that's kind of silly, however I found out that people of a certain age don't know

 Okay, while we're waiting on our wheat to boil so we can pop it, let's go ahead and

 In the big pot, you want to use a big pot because you'd be surprised how just a little

 So right now we're just heating it up and I like to do it, you know, just put a little

 Once it gets to that point, I will just take one kernel or two kernels, just a couple,

 and I'll throw them in the oil just to see if they're hot enough to pop.

 Okay, so I'm going to caution you about putting too many kernels in there.

 Just like microwave popcorn, when it starts to slow down, you want to take it off the

 I like melting a little bit of butter, melting a little bit of honey, or heating up a little

 bit of honey until it's thin, mix together and pour that over there.

 Also I like just putting pepper, just a little bit of salt and a little bit of pepper.

 Lot quicker, really it takes about the same amount of time as microwaving it and it's

 Then we just keep it in these Tupperware for what we're going to use and then we just pile

 our bag up the rest because we don't need enough popcorn to go through a 25 pound bag.

 Popcorn is also used for, you make good cornmeal with it and a whole bunch of other stuff.

 Hi, so today I'm going to show you how to make a fast charge USB cable.

 This is perfect when you're using an AC wall adapter or perhaps a car USB charger

 where the phone isn't recognizing it as being capable of pushing out a lot of power

 and it puts it as USB instead of AC and you get a very low charging current.

 You buy one which says 2 amp or 3 amp and you plug in your Android device

 If you look at the USB cable, regular micro USB cable, you'll see that there's four pins.

 Now if you short out the middle two data pins together, when you plug it in,

 it will basically know that it's connected to a higher current charger or an AC charger

 So what I'm going to do is basically just use this aluminium foil.

 It's a tape foil, but you could just use a regular kitchen aluminium foil and then a piece of tape.

 And I want to cut this to the width of just the middle two pins inside there.

 So I'm just measuring now to check if this is going to fit okay.

 I think I'm going to cut it a little bit shorter or a little bit not so wide.

 And I'm going to place it inside carefully just to cover the two middle data pins.

 So if you look inside the cable now, you'll see that the tape covers the middle two pins.

 I'm not sure how well you'll be able to see that on the camera.

 That's good for any kind of AC adapter that it's not recognising as an AC adapter.

 Pretty much every car charger I've bought, when I plug in my Android phone,

 So just modify a cable like this and it's going to charge much quicker.

 The only thing to remember is that because you've shorted out the two data lines,

 So you can't transfer files on or off using this cable anymore.

 just to make sure that the port can actually handle more than that.

 And it will give you a warning on the computer saying that a device connected tried to draw too much power.

 As-salamu alaykum and welcome to Titli's Busy Kitchen with me Titli Nihaan.

 Today I'm gonna cook a dish that can be found right across Eastern Europe and the Middle East.

 For my Stuffed Vine Leaves, I'm obviously gonna need some vine leaves.

 They were packed in salt water so I'll need to treat them before I use them.

 2 tablespoons of freshly chopped parsley and a tablespoon of freshly chopped mint.

 I've got a bowl full of water here and I'm just gonna let the vine leaves soak in here

 Then add in the onions and sauté them gently for about 5 minutes.

 Eventually, you'll end up with a plate of stuffed vine leaves ready for cooking.

 I've cleaned up my pan and I'm going to range the stuffed vine leaves seam-side down in the pan.

 This is just to keep the vine leaves in place and stop them moving around and splitting.

 put it on the lid and simmer this very gently for about an hour.

 but to be quite honest, the taste difference between those recipes and this recipe

 For yellow rice you need rice, mushrooms, garlic, onions, and a few spices, salt, turmeric,

 We have mushrooms in a can so we need to drain the liquid from the mushrooms.

 Now the package directions for the rice calls for 1 3 quarter cup of water.

 I've got almost 1 3rd cup there so we're going to measure up to 3 3 quarter cups of water.

 When that comes to a boil, what you want to do is turn it down to a simmer.

 What you want to do now is let your yellow rice sit for 10 minutes.

 After 10 minutes, then your yellow rice will be ready to serve.

 I like to use an ice cream scooper because I find it serves a generous portion.

Today I'm going to show you how to make one of my favorite and also my signature dish

To make the triple spicy chicken you will need one large piece of a chicken breast

 jalapeno pepper and you can adjust the amount of pepper based on your own taste

 We're done cutting the chicken breast and this is what it should look like.

 Next we're going to give the chicken breast a really nice massage

 By adding the cornstarch can really make the chicken breast meat become really tender and juicy

 Put the chicken breast aside let it marinate for at least 30 minutes to achieve the best result marinate overnight

 Take out the chicken breast, take out the chicken using a stringer

 Put in the chili pepper first and quickly stir-fry for about 10 seconds

 Welcome to this video in which I'm going to be talking about a pretty simple concept,

 And we're going to talk about it within the confines of serve technique here.

 And the concept we're going to talk about is really how to think about being fluid and

 And I'm going to demonstrate that on the serve in just a second.

 Where I first heard this concept was listening to a golf podcast.

 I was working hard to get better, and I was doing the whole online instruction thing just

 And during an interview, I heard the interviewer ask a top-level instructor, what's the number

 Recreational golfers, your typical club golfers, try too much to hit the ball.

 Instead of focusing on making a good quality swing, and just simply allowing the ball to

 Now, hopefully that makes sense to you right away, but if it doesn't, it's huge.

 The reason why this is a really important concept to understand is that it's very much

 human nature when we are holding something that's going to collide with something else,

 Whenever there's going to be a collision of some kind, it's human nature to want to brace

 And that goes for tennis players, it goes for golfers, it goes for when you see you're

 But when you're tight and collision occurs is when things are going to be least efficient.

 And when the racket head slows down, you get less results, less power, less spin, less

 Being tight at contact is super common on ground strokes, on serves, on volleys, on

 And if you could just learn to be completely smooth and relaxed at contact, you would get

 So a simple way to practice that is simply to, and you can do this by yourself, just

 come up to the baseline, work through a couple of shadow swings on your serve.

 Just really smooth and fluid and focus on gripping the racket as loosely as possible.

 Or to quote one of my favorite tennis movies, there is no spoon.

 Just as if it wasn't there and you're just trying to recreate good technique.

 Subscribe to my channel here on YouTube so that you can get the next series of instructional

 The first thing we want to do is to check the propellers for any damage.

 Scratched or damaged propellers may be out of balance and your Phantom 3 Standard may

 Also put a propeller with a silver indicator on the motor with the silver thread in it.

 So put a propeller with a black indicator onto the motor with the black threading.

 Spin the propeller in a counterclockwise direction and tighten by hand to secure.

 Motor 3, the rear left motor, spins in a counterclockwise direction.

 So put a propeller with a silver indicator onto the motor with the silver threading.

 For safety reasons, it is very important that you do not install a black indicated propeller

 Also, as the installation is in the opposite direction, it means that the propeller will

 The direction you should spin each motor to tighten or to remove is indicated by the lock

 Before you fly the Phantom 3 Standard outside for the very first time or when flying in

 a new location, please make sure that you calibrate the compass.

 Please choose an open area to carry out the following procedures to calibrate the compass.

 Today I want to share a nice very interesting recipe for all of you.

 We just need the big eggplant that is the brinjal and you can just take one egg or two

 eggs and some cheese, some pepper powder and some bread crumbs to coat it.

 So we are going to make a toast out of this eggplant not with the bread.

 So what you can do is first you know just cut the, if you want you can peel the skin

 also but I prefer not to peel the skin just you know directly with the skin.

 Now we are going to cut it into one inch thickness and then we are going to cut it again in the

 middle just while cutting just turn it just very carefully see keep the edge attached

 So don't cut it too much just like this that's it and in this we are going to stuff our cheese

 So this is done and now take the cheese and so dear friends if you want you can just you

 know add some paneer to this cheese and stuff or you know whichever you know potato anything

 whichever you want you can just add it into this and stuff it in between or if you want

 you can just add some spices also but today I am not going to add any spices so here what

 I am going to first stuff the cheese and just press it and keep aside.

 Repeat the same with the other also just stuff nice cheese and press it and keep aside.

 So here this is ready so you know whenever you are making your eggplant you know eggplant

 will change its color so just if you want you can do it immediately or if you want you

 So now in a bowl we are going to add just beat one egg and seasoning some pepper powder

 because we didn't add any spices so you can just add some pepper powder, salt, paprika

 anything whichever you want you can just add spices into it and some salt also because

 we didn't add any salt very little salt and beat it and this mixture is ready and to coat

 this we are using bread crumbs so here is the bread crumbs you can just put it in a

 plate also and now take your stuffed eggplant and just dip it in the egg mixture and in

 the bread crumbs just with the help of spoon or anything you can just coat it nicely that's

 it and remove whatever the excess bread crumbs and just place it in a plate.

 Now this we are going to shallow fry it so here hence this the stuffed eggplant is all

 ready and I have coated in the egg then in the bread crumbs my bread crumbs are little

 bit you know rough but you can just finely grind your bread crumbs and now we are going

 to add some oil and this we are going to cook it on both the sides till you get a nice golden

 in color just cook it on a very slow flame because the eggplant also needs to cook so

 it should become little bit soft so little bit very slow flame or either you can grill

 also take a grill and you can just you know grill it on top of it also so we are going

 to cook it on the other side also friends you can just turn it to the other side see

 nice golden in color but just cook it in a very very slow flame and you can see we

 have added very less oil and we are getting an excellent snack so friends after slow cooking

 you can see cheese is melting here and it's coming out isn't it very very yummy I love

 it I am just waiting to have it now just remove it from the pan and this you can enjoy hot

 hot see cheese is coming out I am excited see eggplant has also cooked perfectly it's

 nice and soft this is so so yummy now I want to eat the entire eggplant this is mind blowing

 you all will love it like anything so dear friends if you want you can stuff you know

 whichever ingredients you want you can stuff it but cheese you all know cheese is wonderful

 and cheese everybody likes cheese so you can just stuff with cheese and enjoy this so see

 you in another session with some more recipes with nice interesting and excited recipes.

Today I'm going to be sharing with you for holiday baking, Christmas tree shortbread cookies.

 And I'm super excited because I joined the Kin Community Ultimate Cookie Collab.

 And here are some of my favorites from What's Gobby Cooking, Cook with April, and Gemma's Bigger Bolder Baking.

 In a large bowl, add 2 sticks of salted softened butter, 1 cup of powdered sugar, and make sure you sift it.

 And then you're going to take your handheld mixer and mix it until everything is light and fluffy.

 Next, add 2 1⁄4 teaspoons of vanilla extract and continue mixing.

 And guys, to get the complete recipe, head over to SimplyBakings.com.

 Once you mix everything very well, you're going to add 2 cups of all-purpose flour.

 First, you're going to add 1 cup and then mix and then add the rest of the all-purpose flour.

 And then I divided the dough in half and put half of the dough into this pan by pressing it in with my fingers.

 Then I took a fork and I generously poked the cookie doughs in both pans.

 I allowed the cookies to sit for about 2 minutes before transferring it over and putting it on wax paper.

 Remove the parchment paper and then take a knife and you're going to slice it.

 So I took my green candy melts and melted at 15-second increments.

 Put it in a small bottle or you can use a Ziploc bag and snip it at the end.

 And then I took my candy melt and then I drizzled it all over the cookies, just like so.

 And then I took some Christmas sprinkles and I sprinkled it on top of the cookies.

It was soft and chewy and the chocolate just gave it a right sweetness to the cookie.

If you do recreate the cookies, please send me a picture of them.

 If you guys have seen my recent ad on YouTube, it was my Monster Graphic Xbox Custom Paint

 What you'll need is a little cheap CD case, get the top, nice plastic, or a table stick,

 Just as long as you can get each part of the rip on each part of the tape.

 So catch their overlapping just as long as you can get the stripes on them.

 Now make sure it's all flat, got your logo, print off from Google, put it right on the

 A piece of tape, tape it on one side, don't cover up the graphic though.

 You don't need to use masking tape to hold it down, you can just use regular scotch tape,

 Next what you're going to need is a knife, a little razor blade knife, whatever you got

 Once you have the first version of the spider walk down, we want to make it a little bit

 Eventually, in the third lesson, you're going to learn how to do this without even using

 Whenever you're on a 1, you're going to hit that note and hammer-on the 3.

 It's going to move up all the way to 12th fret, just like the first version did.

 When you get this up to speed, it sounds the exact same as the first version.

 You're just using your right hand half as much, concentrating more on the muscles in

 In this version, it's easier just to go down strokes the entire time.

 When you get the ascending version down or up the neck, you want to try going with pull-offs

 You're going to come up here, and you're going to have to have, since you're pulling off

 a note to another note, you're going to have to have it already set up.

 If you're going to pull-off 4 to 2, you already have to have 2 down.

 Not a lot of brush strokes, not a lot of texture when I first start out.

 I'm going to mix a green, a sap green, I'll desaturate it with some purple, I'll lighten

 it and I'll add a little orange to warm it up because it's going to be in the sun.

 At this point I'm going to start painting some of the mid-ground elements.

 The color I'm using is a sap green and I desaturate it to darken it with some diox

 When you're painting sometimes, just use a reference, something will happen where it

 What I'm doing here is accentuating a couple of tree shapes that were back there in a darker

 value of that mountain range so that they're just there in the mist.

 I'm painting in those shapes and just accentuating what already happened as an accident.

 Here I'm going to paint a small section that's way off in the distance.

 I know in my reference the time of the year is late spring and the mountain in the background

 I'm mixing a cobalt blue and a little bit of diox purple and I'm going to desaturate

 I'm going to get just the right value to lay in all the deeper shadows in this little mountain

 Every artist likes little surprises that happen so before I seal that I want to put down a

 After the binder varnish is dry I brush on the matte medium and I dry that with a hair

 Into a bowl add in both the wholemeal and the plain self raising flour, the sugar, the

 Into a small jug or bowl add in the melted butter, the eggs, the milk and give it all

Form a well into our dry ingredients and simply pour in the wet ones.

 Then all you need to do is spoon in that mixture into your muffin tray.

 Then we pop them into our preheated oven for about 30 minutes or so.

 Ok while they are in the oven I have just a bit of a tip for you.

 the end of the cooking time with your skewer, make sure there is no muffin mixture on that

Now make sure you join me on Friday because I have another great berry recipe for you.

 about today's video because we're going to be making one of my favorite recipes, potato

And if you're anything like me, then you love anything that can be done with a

Now, I'm really, really fond of this recipe in particular because it's low in fat

 and sodium, high in fiber, and only has 134 calories per serving.

 learn how to make one of my all-time favorite recipes, then stay tuned.

 For this recipe, you're going to need at least one large to medium-sized potato, olive oil

 it in half, cut each half in half, and there you have four pieces.

You're going to make sure that they're clean, all rinsed off before you get started.

 You're going to go ahead and take your olive oil or your canola oil or your sunflower oil,

I'm going to take my chopped and, sorry, my crushed red peppers and sprinkle

Now, as far as the measurements for your spices, you can use one-fourth a

 then you're going to go in and just mix them very nicely to make sure you have all of your

 do is you're going to cook each side for 20 to 25 minutes, flip them, and then cook

 the pan is you're going to coat your pan with a little bit of nonstick.

 size of your potatoes, to make sure that they don't overcook or undercook.

 are in the oven cooking and filling the house with such a nice aroma, I thought that I'd

 with a little less seasoning, you can definitely go ahead and add some sour cream and some

 fries with a hamburger or a turkey burger, or any kind of sandwich.

 have them along the side of a nice piece of steak or a nice chop of your choice.

 really cool exotic way, then definitely tell me because I'm always looking forward to new

If you have any questions or comments, definitely leave them below.

 thank you so much for watching, commenting, reading and subscribing.

 For the crust you'll need one and a half cups of graham cracker crumbs 1 3rd cup white sugar

 For the pecan filling you'll need 1 cup brown sugar 1 quarter cup cornstarch

 1 and 1⁄4 cups water 2 egg yolks pinch of salt 1 and 1⁄2 tablespoons butter 1 teaspoon vanilla

 1 and 1⁄2 cups pecan halves and for the pumpkin cheesecake filling you'll need 8 ounces of cream cheese

 1 cup canned pumpkin 1 1⁄2 cup white sugar 8 ounces of whipped cream and 1 1⁄2 teaspoon of pumpkin spice

 Combine all the crust ingredients in a large bowl and mix until well combined

 Spread the mixture into a 9 inch pie or springform pan and press until firm

 Add the brown sugar, cornstarch and butter to a medium saucepan over medium heat.

 Whisk the eggs, water, salt together and then add that to the mixture along with the pecans.

 When the mixture thickens remove it from heat and add the vanilla.

 Pour the mixture into the pie pan filling about halfway and then chill for 30 minutes.

 Now in a large mixing bowl combine the cream cheese, pumpkin, sugar and spice and mix until well blended.

 Now scoop the mixture into the pie pan filling all the way to the top. Spread it evenly and chill for about 3 hours.

 But today I am super excited because we are kick-starting our back-to-school series, and it's called

 I'm going to be showing you what eight life hacks for back-to-school that you need to know if you're excited for this series

 If you're like me, and you have a really hard time waking up in the morning

 I recommend downloading the sleep cycle app from the App Store onto your phone

 And it'll track your sleep movements so that it'll wake you up when you're most awake if that made any sense

 But there are a bunch of them in the App Store for free, so I definitely recommend it trying it out

 To prevent 10 outfit changes in the morning and wasting 30 minutes that could have been spent sleeping

 Sometimes I even plan out a week's worth of outfits on Sunday, so it saves me a ton of time in the morning

 I learned this trick when I was in middle school when my friend showed it to me

 And it is using simple Wikipedia instead of the regular Wikipedia because the simple one will give you a

 Duh, but it's really helpful if you're just trying to understand the general concept

 If you have a quiz or a test coming up and you're studying with flashcards

 I recommend studying at least three days before your exam and the night before your exam

 I recommend studying before you go to sleep because it will help you retain the information better

 If you and a friend are taking the same class you should study together because maybe one of you picked up

 different things from a lecture so you could teach it to each other and

 When you get your schedule for your classes on the first day of school

 Everyone's using them, but on the second day everyone already knows where to go

 Well, if that's you, just take a picture of your schedule and set it as the lock screen of your phone

 A good tip to stay organized throughout the year is to color code based on your classes

 So all your folders and notebooks for math could be blue and English could be green

 You could easily do this by just coloring a small corner on the top of your notebook

 all you do is download them and you follow the instructions in the app and it's a

 And if you're new to this channel, be sure to subscribe Nian Rouge 73 and I'll see you guys later.

 So we are going to make a beautiful serum using all those beautiful ingredients that go into cosmeceutical products.

 Or you could go, yes, you could buy the aloe gel or go to the website and it will direct you to where you get these wonderful ingredients.

 And so I've actually used a little bit more because serums, this is a serum, and the beauty of serums is that they are used, or you can layer them for a start.

 You put the serum underneath your night cream and underneath your day cream.

 What serums do is that they transport all the ingredients or your vitamins and minerals, anything that it has in it, it transports into the skin better than a face cream.

 It goes from a really clear consistency to like a milky consistency.

 Now, with the olive leaf extract, this is going to add the benefit of your antioxidants.

 They not only feed the skin, but remember if you put a really good antioxidant on your skin today, five days down the track, it's still working.

 It works 25% better applied topically than it does taken internally.

 So, the more antioxidants you have in your product, the better.

 Now, the pumpkin is going to help transport, even when you eat pumpkin,

 it helps to transport all the other vitamins from your other vegetables

 into the digestive system and that's exactly what it's doing for the skin.

 You use it underneath your day cream, underneath your night cream.

 It would be very, very good for an eye gel if you don't want something

 But normally serums, they don't sell much more than about 20 to 25 ml

 So you're going to fill up the container with that, aren't you?

 Now you can buy these at chemists, pharmacies, or it's a horse needle.

 and you'll find where you get some of these beautiful packaging.

 It's a fast way of cooking thin uniform pieces of beef in an open skillet or wok.

 To begin, start with tender beef cuts such as sirloin, tenderloin tips, or beef for stir

 Some less tender cuts such as flank, top round, and round tip, when cut into thin strips can

 To cut your own strips, partially freeze beef first for about 30 minutes.

 Prepare and assemble other ingredients for stir frying such as vegetables before starting.

 Preheat a heavy nonstick skillet until hot, about five minutes.

 Stir fry vegetables over medium high heat, continuously turning with a scoop, lift, and

 Next, add beef to the skillet in one half pound batches, again over medium high heat,

 Stir frying is quick, so a few seconds can be the difference between just right and overdone.

 Here's one idea, Asian beef and broccoli, shown three ways, over rice, with noodles,

 Alright, so this is part 3 of my collaboration series with my girl Chanel here on YouTube.

 If you haven't seen the first two, the first one I did a look called Sandy Beaches and

 I did a look that was inspired by the purple and orange iris and she did a look that was

 So if you haven't seen those, I will put the link down in the description box where you

 But this look that we're going to be doing this time is going to be inspired by tropical

 And the tropical bird that I chose is the parrot as you can tell.

 It's red and blue on the bottom and yellow in the inner tear duct and I used NBI Cosmetics.

 I used all thickness by NBI Cosmetics, just a couple of other ones.

 The look that Chanel is going to be doing, her look is going to be based off the peacock

 and I just really can't wait to see hers because I know it's just going to be bomb like all

 So yeah, if you want to see how I did this look, then of course keep watching and at

 the end of the video be sure to go check out Chanel's video and I will definitely put the

 Alright y'all, so I already primed my eyes using Benefit Stay Don't Stray.

 Next I'm going in with a red base and the base that I'm using is my NYX Jumbo Pencil

 I'm just applying that all over my lid up to my crease and then I'm going to blend that

 Next I'm taking Pumpkin by NBI Cosmetics and it's just this really deep orange color and

 I'm just taking my fluffer brush and the brush that I'm using is from Coastal Scents.

 It's the Blending Pro Fluff Brush and I'm just applying this color into my crease.

 This one is Neon Red from NBI Cosmetics and as you can see the way it's coming off camera

 I'm just using a regular eyeshadow brush and I'm applying that color all over my lid from

 my inner corner all the way to my outer corner up to my crease.

 Okay here what I'm doing is I'm just using the same eyeshadow brush and I'm just going

 Then I'm going to take that same brush that I used to put the crease color in and I'm

 This is kind of like a low shimmer yellow and I'm using a small angled brush and I'm

 just applying that color right up to the highest point of my eyebrow and then I just kind of

 I just used that and went right over the Soft Yellow just to tone it down just a little

 This is Carbon from MAC and I'm just using a small tapered blending brush and I'm applying

 that color into the outer corner of my eye just to give my eye a little more definition.

 Okay here I'm just taking that fluffy brush and I'm just using that just to buff out that

 Okay now I'm taking Chrome Yellow from MAC and it's just a matte yellow eyeshadow.

 I'm using a small detail brush and I'm applying that color into my inner corner.

 Now using that same brush I'm going in with Canary from NBI Cosmetics and I'm just applying

 that right over the Chrome Yellow just to give it a little more shimmer.

 This one is Neon Dark Blue and I'm just using a really really small brush and I'm applying

 that right over the blue liner that we just put on the lower lash line and that's really

 I really hope y'all enjoyed this makeup tutorial and don't forget to go check out Chanel's video.

 So thank y'all for watching and I'll see y'all in my next video.

 For this drink you're going to need a rocks glass, a measuring cup, a bar spoon, a hawthorn strainer,

This drink uses rye, mescal, benedictine, and chicory vanilla bitters.

 The Southland got its start from a contest held by Greenbar Collective in 2014.

 They wanted to create LA's signature cocktail, an answer to New York's Manhattan.

 As soon as it becomes available I suggest snagging a bottle, but for this drink use your

 favorite rye, keeping in mind that it'll benefit from a higher proof whiskey.

 on the mescal too, but I love the Delmaguet Vita for this drink.

There are some mescals with very little smokiness, and even some that are sin humo,

 done right when it's done with Drunken Crane's Chicory Vanilla Bitters, but if you can't get

 your hands on those amazing bitters, you should sub in a different vanilla bitters.

 including standards and not-so-standards, but they didn't work because they changed the drink

If you absolutely must, just leave them out, but it's worth trying to get some.

 They really make a difference, and round off the hard edges of the drink.

Add ice, and stir to chill this one down and give it a little dilution.

 contents of your mixing glass over a large ice cube in your rocks glass.

Be sure to subscribe, and check us out on Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram.

 So I am here to show you guys two ways on how to do a ballerina bun.

 Recently I've been watching this series called Breaking Point and I absolutely love the way

 Especially dancing on those pointed ballet shoes, I just really give them props for doing

 So because of the show I'm going to show you two ways on doing a ballerina bun.

 Alright, I'm going to split this into two and then tie this into a knot like so.

 Alright the second way of doing a ballerina bun is the most common way and all you have

 to do is just pull your hair into a high ponytail like I have here.

 And then what I'm going to do is just spray my ponytail here so that there's some texture

 And then also I'm going to take each section and then lightly tease it.

 Grab this whole section here and then just wrap it around the base and pin it into place.

 If you have any questions, feel free to comment below or tweet me at LaBelleMile31.

 It is Michael from Lean Body Lifestyle and today what I'm going to do is show you guys

 Now obviously remember you can customize it, you can add peppers, mushrooms, onions, whatever

 Now if you've watched my videos lately, you've noticed I've been using a lot of whole wheat

 I've done a lot of good videos with them I think and what I'm going to do today is actually

 Now before I started filming this video, what I did was I brushed a little bit of olive

 So now for the sauce, what we're going to use today is a little all natural tomato paste

 Now you can buy this canned or you can make it yourself and blend up tomatoes, but it's

 really just easier to buy it canned considering the only thing in it is tomato pulp.

 Now what we're going to do is take a couple tablespoons of the tomato pulp, remember however

 much you want because I don't know how much sauce you like, so I'm just going to do however

 So now that I added the sauce and spread it around, I'm going to sprinkle a little bit

 And both of these spices really just give it a nice flavor and it's just kind of personal

 And now that we have the seasonings and the sauce and the olive oil all onto the pita

 Now this is completely optional, whatever you want to add, feel free to add it.

 But today what I have here is a little bit of steamed spinach, so I'm going to add that

 And then for the cheese, feel free to use whatever kind of cheese you want, but today

 So now this pizza is ready to go into the oven and today what I'm going to do is bake

 it on 400 degrees for around 10 minutes or just until the cheese melts.

 Alright, so here we are, 10 minutes later and as you guys can see the pizza is completely

 If you did enjoy the video, please leave a thumbs up because it helps me out a lot.

 And if you liked the video, check out my blog down below for more recipes like this one.

 watching my channel, you know that I hate to use anything artificial.

 like it, and I think you're going to convince people who are non-vegan to enjoy it.

 for the cream, we're going to use almond milk, we're going to use tofu, cornstarch, a little

 bit of sugar, candied orange peel, a little bit of vanilla, and a little bit of water

 caramelized the sugar, and I like it a little bit dark, it's up to you, you can make it

Then you take the cup and just roll it, trying to cover it, and then you

You can use orange marmalade if you can't find candied orange peel.

 to do, I'll do it to you too, to show you how to make it, because it adds such a nice

So we have cornstarch, 3 tablespoons, we have almond milk, we use about 3 cups.

So we have the candied orange peel, put them first because they're

 milk, tofu, and candied orange peel, a little bit of sugar, and you puree them.

Christmas, we'll go back again and you can have it as your vegan eggnog.

 Then also we did, we caramelized sugar and put it in the cups ready for our creme caramel.

 way we'll make the caramelized sugar melt again and you have a nice caramel sauce when

 Cool them overnight and then what you do, you take it, just insert the knife around

Anyway, after about one minute it will come down and we're going to have

If you get that degree that means it's perfect, you did a good job.

Vegan creme caramel with nothing preservative, nothing artificial.

 And if you don't know what power chords are, then go ahead and go watch it, because this song is just three power chords.

 Before I start, I know I have a Twitter account and a Facebook page.

 So you can like my Facebook page and or follow me on Twitter for updates.

 Any questions, I will try to answer them as quickly as possible.

 Or you can play a power chord up here, 13th fret on the E string.

 So you can use distortion or you can use chorus effect with distortion.

 And then there's a next section where I just continue to play the A power chord.

 What I'm doing there is I am putting pressure on the frets where I make that power chord.

 Hi, I'm Justin Peay and in my first video blog here, I'm going to show you how to do

 Now in the past year, one of my fitness goals was to put on about 20 pounds of muscle to

 And along the way, I brought my arms from about 13 and a half inches to 15 and a quarter

 inches using pull-ups and using this pull-up in particular that I'm about to show you.

 Now I like this pull-up so much for a few reasons that I'm going to explain right now.

 The most obvious reason is that this pull-up uses a lot of forearm and grip strength than

 any of the other varieties of pull-ups because you have to grip this towel.

 Now the second reason I like it so much is that I feel it gives a more complete bicep

 Now everybody knows that your arm, excuse me, your bicep flexes your arm at the elbow

 But what a lot of people don't realize is that it also supplements your forearm.

 See how my bicep becomes that much bigger when I supplement my forearm.

 Now with a regular pull-up, because the bar can't move, you don't get that supplementation

 action of the forearm from the bicep when you're doing the regular pull-ups or the chin-ups.

 But since the towel can flex, you can incorporate that movement.

 Now the third reason I love this pull-up so much is that you can't use momentum like

 Like for example, you can't kick your body up to try to get yourself up over the bar

 because you're going to swing, you're going to back and forth, side to side, and you'll

 Another reason I like this one so much, and you may not notice this on the bar, is that

 you're probably going to be more apt, you'll realize this, to pull with one arm more than

 In my case, I'm left-handed, I noticed I pulled more with my left hand.

 And what happens is when you do this pull-up, you twist in mid-air.

 And those are the reasons why I love this pull-up and why I feel it's such an important

 Now I want your hands facing a little bit away from you of a comfortable distance.

 Now as you come up, you're going to supplement your wrist as you get to the very top.

 Bring your fist right up to your chest so you get a good action.

 I just got done doing 90 pull-ups, so I'm a little drained, so feel pardoned me.

 Now, one thing I'm finding a lot that I see a lot is that a lot of people are advocating

 doing pull-ups and chin-ups, dropping the thumb out of the grip in order to do these.

 The reason why is that you use less of your forearm strength so you can do more pull-ups.

 I personally don't like doing that because if your grip is holding you back on your pull-ups,

 that means you need to strengthen yourself, not try to work around it.

 You probably don't want to try this one until you're comfortably doing pull-ups with your

 Now for the setup on this, all I did was I just put a hook right through the beam in

 So if you want to do this kind of setup, just make sure you have a stud finder so you can

 If you don't want to do this or you can't, if you have a roof with exposed roof rafters,

 If your wife won't let you use the towel because she's afraid of you getting it dirty, you

 A piece like that would probably cost you $5 at any chain or rigging store.

 You could even use a fire hose, a two and a half inch fire hose.

 If you go to your local fire department, they probably have a bunch of junk hose.

 Tell them you want a four-foot section, they'd probably be more than happy to give it to

 If you can do about 15 of those constantly without any hitch, move on to this one, give

 I'd like to thank my wife for the camera work and I'll see you next time.

 It's going to be like making a tiny pastry bag out of parchment paper.

I'm going to bring this one around here and grab it with my fingers.

 reaches the line that's inside from that other part of the cornet.

 drops of a few different colors of food coloring into the milk.

 Wipe off the excess on the side of the cup so you have just a little bit.

 soon as you touch the q-tip to the milk it will create intense and beautiful

If you enjoyed this video you can always click the like button and if

 you'd like to see more videos like this please subscribe to my channel.

 also check out my website for non-video content like articles I've written.

 links to my Facebook, Tumblr, and Twitter pages in the about section of this video.

 Then we're going to blanch the broccoli for maybe three to four minutes in the wok.

 And next, we're just going to add in the broccoli that's been washed.

 And let them cook and steam for three to four minutes until the vegetables are tender.

 So if you want to have more tender on the 芥兰, you just cook a little longer.

 Now we're going to make a simple oyster sauce with ginger and garlic.

 Now you're just going to pour your beautiful sauce on the top of the Chinese broccoli.

 You want to make sure they look about the same before you put it on.

 You want to hand tighten it first so you don't strip the nut from the screw.

 Hey guys, it's Tampa Tech and I'm going to show you how to wall mount a TV on the wall

 Now I got this broken TV I fixed for free and the person did not have the stand for

 If I wanted to take it off the wall and put it on a TV stand, a table top TV stand, I

 I'm going to show you how to put it all together and everything else in this video.

 There's also a reference guide and see if this will work on your TV.

 It's very nice looking and should look good in your family room.

 You're going to get the metal plate and the cover and the back bracket.

 And you want to get the screws that have the allen key hole in it.

 And it comes with the allen key so you don't have to worry about that.

 Now that you have that, then you want to put the wall mount on the stand.

 So you want to make sure that you've got the right screw for your TV.

 So let's go ahead and put it in the screw hole on the back of your TV.

 And then if you want to lock it in, you can lock it in right here.

 Now in my next video, I'm going to show you how to wall mount it on the wall.

 Today I'm going to be making a simple stir fry that combines chicken and vegetables in

 So, during this video, I've tried to reduce that accent just by using some techniques

 So, let's go ahead and get started on our chicken and vegetables in a white sauce.

 Once all of the fat is removed, I'm just going to cut it into one inch pieces.

 Once all of the chicken is cut, sprinkle with just an eighth a teaspoon of garlic salt

 For this stir fry, I'm going to use a 12 ounce bag of frozen vegetables.

 In my next video, I will use all fresh vegetables in the stir fry just to show the difference

 between the time that it takes to cook the vegetables and the time that it takes to cook

 Now, for these vegetables, we just want to place them into the microwave for about five

 Now, I'm just going to mix together all of our ingredients for the sauce.

 Now, some people don't use soy sauce in their white sauce, but I enjoy it because it gives

 So, you just want to go ahead and mix all of these ingredients up together.

 To thicken our sauce, I'm just going to use two teaspoons of cornstarch mixed with just

 I'm going to add the chicken, the vegetables, and the vegetables.

 Once the chicken has browned, add in the vegetables and the sauce.

 Alright everyone, so to see exactly what ingredients I'm using for this recipe, please open the

 description box down below as everything will be posted in there.

 To start off, we're going to go ahead and take string pastas or angel pa- no, they're

 not angel, I don't know what you call these, but you're going to take some pasta and we're

 going to go ahead and literally split them in half, like crack them in half, that's what

 Put it in water for at least 15-20 minutes until they get very soft and flexible.

 Once you've got that down, go ahead and add 2 tablespoons of salt in it.

 Once the pasta has lost its stiffness, you want to go ahead and add the broccoli in there

 and you also want to leave this in there for at least 5-10 minutes, you don't want

 We're literally only going to use the broccoli just to kind of slightly drain it.

 We want it to be crunchy because we are going to be adding this and putting it into the

 Go ahead and take as much butter as you need, so you can literally add a tablespoon, teaspoon,

 You can even add just oil, but I decided to use butter because it tastes much better with

 Then I've added in 5 cloves of minced garlic and I've added in 2 chicken breasts.

 Once the breast has started to cook, you want to go ahead and add 1 and a half cup of milk

 You want the chicken breast to soak up all the milk, you don't want any milk left in

 Add 1 tablespoon of salt and also 1 tablespoon of black pepper.

 You want to go ahead and mix everything and you want to add in your alfredo sauce.

 I'm using a garlic alfredo sauce, you can literally use the classic one as well, but

 we are real big fans of garlic, so we're going to add this in it just to make it very, very

 Now if you're not a fan of the alfredo sauce, you can literally just add in a little bit,

 I've added in the whole bottle because we want it to be very, very creamy.

 And then we're going to go ahead and drain the pasta and mix that in with the chicken

 alfredo and then we're going to pop it right into the oven after we've distributed it right

 After you've mixed in the pasta and the alfredo chicken, we're going to go ahead and put some

 mozzarella cheese right on top of it and then we're going to mix that in and then we're

 going to transfer this into a bigger tray and pop it in the oven.

 And the reason why I'm using an oven is because I want the cheese and the creaminess to be

 completely creamy and I want the cheese to be very, very melted and I want the broccoli

 This here is optional, you can add mild cheddar right on top of it for a little bit of crispiness,

 but if you don't like that, you don't have to add it, you can leave it as is.

 And this is the final result, I hope that you like it and so does Ami and don't forget

 to subscribe to my Ami's channel as well if you want to see any more cooking videos and

 Okay, now before we move on to the top, I want to take, clean up the back just a

So we're going to bend the customer's head down, and we're just going to

 What this does, the sculpting technique is it gradually tapers it closer as we

 get towards the hairline, and then we get towards the hairline, we can just clean

 it up a little bit without leaving a really straight, distinct line.

 And cook this ginger garlic paste with the onion for another couple of minutes.

 But you can always put raw lamb and potatoes in the curry and then you will have to boil

 But because we have already boiled this process will be faster for us.

 And once it comes to boil, this aloo lamb curry can be enjoyed with chapatis or rice.

 The price includes free shipping to any capital city in Australia.

 I have everything on the table now and I'll show you how to put the training wheels on.

 Hi and welcome to cooking with karma now sometimes you just feel like some yummy old comfort food and today's recipe is just that

 Today I'm going to show you how to make a good old-fashioned cheeseburger, but of course I have my own little twist to it

 Then with clean hands, we're going to mix it all together till it comes together into one big ball

 To make our patties we're going to take two parts of our mixture flatten one down

 And then just simply take off any excess with your fingers until you get the desired shape just like this

 So now we're just going to simply cook these up for about seven to eight minutes either side

 Obviously depending on how well you like it cooked and how thick you've made your patty

 Then when that's almost done, we'll place our slice of cheese on top

 Obviously guys if you don't want to put tomato on it even lettuce or onion

 But I have to tell you that meat patty with the cheese in the middle

 Every time you bite into it, it is a mouthful of cheesy gooey goodness.

 So I really hope you give that one a go and I'll see you next time.

 In this video you will learn how to easily diagnose a problem with your electric hot

 As you can see I have both covers removed, the upper and the lower.

 The upper and lower both consist of a thermostat right above each element.

 Now there's the upper element, just above that you'll see the thermostat dial.

 The first thing we're going to want to do is make sure you have 240 volts entering the

 If you don't, then the rest of this testing is going to be a waste.

 So you're going to go to the top of your water heater, which is right there.

 The first thing you want to do is remove the cover and expose the power wires entering

 You're going to take your probe and you're going to reach them into the wire nuts.

 I'm going to take one probe, shove it into one of the wire nuts, take a touch or two

 So at least you know you have full 240, 250 volts entering the hot water heater.

 So the first thing you want to do is you want to turn off the power at the main breaker

 So just go over to your breaker, usually a double 30 or a double 20, shut it down and

 confirm that it is off by going to the two wire nuts on top of the water heater first.

 Now once you turn off the circuit breaker you want to take your digital multimeter on

 the same 250 volt setting or higher and then you're going to want to take each probe, you're

 going to touch one to that screw and one to that screw to verify the power is off.

 The next step is to make sure that this reset switch is not faulty and you're going to want

 to test and how the switch works, current flows in on one leg at this screw and one

 When the switch is working properly the power will flow from this screw down to that one

 So what we're going to do now, I'm going to have this held up with some tape so I can

 Make sure your digital multimeter is set to a low ohms range and we're going to watch

 to make sure that the needle swings to the right when I go between the top right screw

 That'll verify that the circuit is closed allowing current to flow past the reset switch

 So I'm going to touch one there and one there and you should see the meter move and it just

 So you know current is flowing through the reset so you can rule out the reset.

 Once you've established that the high temperature reset switch is not faulty, the next step

 You have a 120 volt leg feeding through the high temperature reset into the thermostat.

 Now to test the thermostat you're going to want to rotate the temperature to the highest

 You can see the meter swing indicating current is flowing into the heating element allowing

 Now you're going to rotate the temperature back to the coolest setting and make sure

 The next step is to check the heating element to make sure that's working properly.

 Now that the wires have been removed from the screw terminals you're going to set your

 For this test ideally you should use a digital multimeter on the lowest range.

 If it comes out zero that means it's short which you don't want and if it comes out very

 So as you can see there's continuity between this terminal and that terminal indicating

 is a very low resistance reading indicating there's a very low resistance between this

 The next test is going to be set this to the highest range you have.

 If this moves when you go from the steel tank to one of these terminals that would indicate

 a severely corroded heating element and what's happening is the current is flowing outside

 of the heating element into the water and grounding on the tank and that's not good.

 After the testing procedure is complete on the upper portion of the water heater you're

 When the thermostat triggers it allows current to flow across the terminals into the heating

 element and this is the return leg heading back so you get your full 240.

 You're going to turn the dial all the way counterclockwise and check for the continuity

 and then turn it clockwise fully and make sure you get no continuity.

 So one direction continuity and the other direction no continuity.

 After these tests are completed you should know exactly what the problem is with your

 Hi, I'm Jody Davis and I'm here at Spring International Quilt Market in Minneapolis,

 Minnesota and I'm here with Keri Carr from Newly Stitches who has developed a product

 Well, you know, I was at a retreat and I just wanted to be sewing and didn't want to be

 drawing the lines and I thought there has to be a better way to come up with this.

 And what the Clearly Perfect angle is made out of is just a vinyl material that stays

 There's not any taping, you don't have any residue, you don't have any markings.

 Your fabric doesn't catch on anything and most people just leave it in place once they

 get it down because you can use it for different techniques and even just the quarter inch

 But first let me point out some of the features so you can understand it.

 There are quarter inch seam guides on each side of center and there's also these dotted

 And I'm a recycled home ec teacher so I figure that eventually people can use that for their

 And if you're sitting at the machine, Jodi, your needle will be right here.

 So we'll take our fabric squares, right sides together, and we place one point at the needle

 And the trick with this is just to watch the point as you're sewing and not your needle.

 So you just start stitching, again watching that, and you just stitch straight up and

 through and you'll have sewn straight across without drawing a line.

 So this is the technique where you would trim that to a quarter inch, press it, and you

 Now it's been around for a couple years and so I'm learning some tips and tricks.

 And we're going to use that five-eighths inch seam guide, move your square over and put

 Again, your needle is right here and you have your second stitching line, you cut a part

 You now have the one for your pattern and then you would have a second smaller one for

 And there's actually three for one because here's another idea that you can use with

 And if you extend your fabric a little bit on both sides, you create these inverted points

 and now there's no more guessing or you don't have to draw a line again when you're joining

 Because you can see the beginning and the end of where your line needs to be.

 You put one point at your needle, make sure this inverted point is on the center, and

 A lot of us designers are telling you to draw a line and you stitch a quarter inch on each

 With the Clearly Perfect Angle, what I've done is I've color coded this so it's easy

 So now we're going to use these grayed bands and we're going to take our fabric squares

 and we place one edge along the outside edge of the angled gray band and the bottom point

 And again you watch the point as you're stitching, your needle is here.

 And when you're done you have stitched a quarter inch from that point.

 You simply turn it around, do it again, line up on the outside of the gray band, outside

 of the gray band, you stitch your second line and then you would cut apart between the two

 Simply match the quarter inch and the five-eighth inch seam guides on the Clearly Perfect Angles

 Customize it to your machine by using a seam ripper to remove the vinyl around the feed dogs.

 It is very convenient to leave the CPA in place for all your sewing needs.

 Accessing your bobbin or moving the table is easy by rolling the vinyl out of the way.

 As long as it is left in place on one side it will effortlessly and accurately go right

 Or just slide the table out from under the needle for easy transporting.

 What we're going to be talking about today is we're going to be giving you a simple instructional

 video on how to put together the Louisiana guard dog for the back of the truck.

 This is the model that has the slackinator in it, so if you have one without the slackinator

 then it will be basically the same instructions, you'll just be able to ignore that part.

 But the first thing that you're going to do is you're going to take the base piece that

 we have and the angle piece and you're going to slide the base inside the angle.

 You want the angle piece to be facing out and you want the cap that's on the base to

 And also the base here is going to have three holes and you want those holes to be facing

 up and we may have to adjust it to face them down depending on your vehicle but we'll start

 Then you're going to take the, you're going to put the bolts in the two holes on the side

 and two holes on the bottom and you're going to tighten those not enough where it will

 still slide but just where they're in there and you'll have them.

 Because we're going to have to make some adjustments on those later.

 Then you're going to take the large rectangular piece and you're going to slide it in the end

 of the base and you're going to line it up with these last two holes right here.

 And then you're going to take the small set screw and you're going to screw it in that

 You don't want to screw it tight but you just want to screw it in until it won't let you

 Alright then you're going to take the slip handle, you may have two different sizes of

 bolts for your slip handles and if you do just make sure you use the shorter one.

 You're going to take the slip handle, the spacer, and then the washer and then you're

 going to screw it in to the last hole that you have here on top.

 Then you're going to come back to the set screw and you're going to loosen it to about

 an eighth to a quarter of an inch just where it's sticking up really well there.

 And you're going to loosen this back and what this does is it's going to let that go flat

 Alright then you're going to take the small square block that we have and you're going

 to put it in the end and you're going to take the long set screw and you're going to screw

 And you're not going to have to screw it far but if you can look at it whenever you have

 And what you want to do is you want to kind of play with this, adjust it up and down just

 to where it will fit inside the receiver of your truck to where it's not so tight that

 it's hard to get in and out but tight enough to where it just takes away some of that play.

 And if for some reason you have trouble getting this to work fine you don't have to use it.

 This part of the slackenator still worked fine without it but that's just an additional

 thing that takes that last little bit of slack that we can't get out with just this piece.

 Okay so we're going to go over here and we're going to put it in the receiver.

 Again we may have to adjust this a few times back and forth to get the tightness that we

 So once you get that there you're going to go ahead and stick it in.

 You're going to stick your safety clevis in with the safety pin.

 And you can tighten it as much as you really want to but you can see like right now there's

 Without it and whenever it's time to take it off you'll just loosen this but without

 So that really takes up a lot of the slack inside your receiver.

 And so once you get to this point you're ready to put the full wheel in the back of your

 Alright so you got the full wheel in the truck and you got it kind of lined up and what you

 want to do with this bottom piece is you want to make sure that you have at least an inch

 This could be right here or it could be kind of at this angle but you just want about an

 You can have it out farther if you want it but at least an inch of space from it.

 And what you're going to do is you're going to take the coupler head that we have and

 the upright arm and you're going to slide the coupler head onto the upright arm.

 And you're going to make it so where the coupler head is facing down and these holes that are

 on the side that they'll be facing horizontally not up and down.

 And then you're going to take the bolt and you're going to tighten it into the end of

 the coupler head tight enough so whenever you stand it up it doesn't slide down.

 You're going to just drop it onto the coupler head and lock it in.

 And then you're going to take this and you're going to loosen this part right here.

 And you're going to slide it up so where that hole on the bottom right here is just outside

 And then once you have that set you can go ahead and tighten this piece.

 Whenever you have it where you want it you're going to tighten these four bolts on the bottom

 And the only thing you'll have left to do is tighten this slip panel and you're ready

 And you'll be able to put locks here on your coupler head and on your receiver.

 What that would do is that would completely lock up this hole where someone can't see it.

 Hello everyone, so today I'm going to show you all how to make French onion soup.

 You can do it in the crock pot or you can do it just on the stove top in a pot.

 So if you're going to cook the French onion soup in the crock pot,

 I just recommend that you brown it, brown the onions in a pan on the stove

 So the recipe that I'm following today, I have not made this recipe before,

 In here, this recipe calls for thyme, but I don't have thyme, so I'm just using parsley.

 1 1⁄4 teaspoon of whatever spice, thyme, parsley, basil, whatever you like.

 So instead of opening up a whole other can and only using three ounces,

 I'm going to use some chicken stock that I already have in the refrigerator

 because I always have chicken stock or vegetable stock in the refrigerator.

 They have organic chicken stock at my Costco, which is so nice.

 Okay, so I'm almost done chopping my onions, and I'm using this Genius,

 And here are my onions, if you're curious as what they kind of turn out to be.

 So you throw your onions in and kind of break them up if you can.

 I also forgot to add that you are going to want to add your spices at this time.

 So I'm just going to scrape the bottom of this because it has tons of flavor.

 So what you are going to want to do now is throw in your two tablespoons of flour.

 So you're going to want to let this cook out for a few minutes.

 And while you are doing that, you can pour your, if you have a little bit of water,

 if you are, so while that is cooking, if you are going to put yours in a crock pot,

 And I'm going to estimate, see, I don't have a three ounce mark,

 And I'll probably give it a different flavor, but you know what?

 Everything is in the crock pot now, and it looks mighty delicious.

 To finish the French onion soup off, you want to stick it in like an oven safe ramekin or dish,

 It's my dairy-free day, so I'm just going to do the bread and not the cheese.

 And you're going to want to pop that in the oven, like on broil or whatever,

 You can also, if you don't have bread lying around or stale bread,

 So I'm just going to add a big hunk of bread and let it soak because that's...

 Today I'm gonna make a runny runny healthy vegetable dish and I'm gonna

 make it with the chanko nabe style chicken because I have ground chicken

 making the sauce which is two tablespoons of apple cider vinegar

 because I don't have sake so I don't know if that'll taste good or not but

And I don't have the chicken stock granules so I'm gonna use actual

 Now over here to make the chanko nabe style chicken I have maybe a hundred and

 fifty grams of ground chicken and I have again one tablespoon of apple cider

 vinegar because I don't have sake and one teaspoon of soy sauce.

 Now for the vegetable part of this dish I have a little bit of garlic, a little

I have two bell peppers and I have half of an onion and three leaves

So all that will go together to make the vegetable part of the dish.

 I don't want to cook it, I don't want it to get brown or anything because then

 After the chicken has started to get kind of white, kind of maybe even a

 I think the onions are getting closer to translucent so I'm gonna add the cabbage.

 Let that cook a little bit, just for a minute, and then I'll add the sauce.

 passion and being in retail I just thought we could combine it and combine

 So I do like a medium high heat and we're just going to set them on the grate.

 Is there a... Just put them in there and then we're going to put the sauce on.

 What we're going to do, we're going to finish them up to serve.

 You just go out, walk out in the mud, reach down, grab the oyster out,

 Now, did you come up with these on your own or you kind of mixed up their recipes?

 Have you had your own restaurants and stuff or you do mostly do

He's worked under people that are now very famous chefs that are.

 Lisa, thank you so much for stopping our roadside stand on that really cold day.

 Thanks for letting us go to Long Island Sound and appreciate you giving us a tour

 Today we have Stan McClain, President of FilmTools, going over some of the most popular configurations

 Well here on this side cart we have virtually all of the teeny weeny grip gear.

 We have three different size cups and it's the 6 inch cup, the 4.5 inch cup, and the

 It's an oval cup for use in areas that you just don't have enough room to use either

 Okay, so first we're going to use one of these FilmTools couplers.

 It's a 3H double-sided coupler and it's 9-16th, it's going to need a 9-16th end wrench to

 And the jam nut just spins on there like that and goes on here.

 And using your 9-16th end wrench again, you just tighten that down so it's perfectly tight.

 And then we use these cool acorn nuts to put on top so when we're building these up all

 And as you're working on cars, every once in a while you're going to see a rod's going

 And if you put the acorn nuts on the end, you won't run into any problems of pieces

 So we're going to build up all of our cups to look the same way before we go back to

 A cool item you might need once in a while is to be able to put a camera or an extension

 So this right angle by Bogan, Bogan Manfrotto, is a good little piece to have.

 Sometimes you're going to want to use a cheese plate for the mount, so we're going to use

 When you're making these mounts, it's really difficult to get them perfectly level, but

 Then by using this Manfrotto leveling piece, then you're able to fine tune your head to

 exactly level, then lock it off, and then place your camera on top of the slider.

 One thing we've also done here is taking these Olicart D-rings, because once we get this

 mounted on the car, we're going to take a couple safety straps and put them around from

 There's Olicart pieces in here, 3-8-16 flatheads that are 82 degrees countersunk.

 Here's some of the other items that are involved with the Tiniwini Grip Gear.

 A lot of times, the stainless steel tubes will be better for the job than the threaded

 Let's take two of these rods, put a jam nut on the end of each one.

 A film tools connector, put that on about halfway there and turn the other one in.

 By putting one of these together, you now have a 48-inch long rod.

 The beauty about the 3-8-16 system that we've invented here is that 3-8-16 is three times

 the strength of a 3-8-16 rod that has a 1-4-20 spud coming out of the end and you're attaching

 Hence you're going to want to use the heavy duty film tools brand.

 Sometimes as you're building your kit, it might be like a side rig kit.

 You need to raise your camera up a little bit higher than you're able to with everything

 This riser is just like the big risers, the Mitchell risers that you see on the big sets.

 It's just scaled down for the smaller tripods and for smaller rigs.

 We sell these risers in 4-inch and 8-inch or a kit where you get a 4 and an 8 and you

 The teeny-weeny grip heads, this is what keeps it all together.

 It's two pieces with a very firm vice grip in here that holds two of the 3-inch rods

 You can also buy these 3-inch couplers to use in place of these.

 They're like $1.10 or so a piece, whereas these are a little bit more expensive because

 They're a lower profile and they're 9-16ths in diameter, versus this is 5-8ths in diameter.

 Remember, if you use these, you need to have a 5-8ths end wrench with you.

 These were made back when there used to be rain gutters on cars above the windows.

 I'm not sure exactly what year they stopped those, but the name of them is still the same.

 These are attached to underneath the wheel wells for a ratchet strap.

 Besides ratchet straps, you can use motorcycle straps as well with the cam buckles.

 Or you can put them on the side of the doors, underneath the door.

 Be very careful, though, that you make sure you have enough clearance that when you shut

 These will help you with the straps and the gutter hooks and the D-rings that are on here.

 In China, green soybean is also eaten as vegetable and used in many traditional cuisines.

 With little care in a small space, you can grow fresh, healthy and super productive green soybean in your garden.

 My kids call it magic bean and would eat every single bean from the dish.

 In Florida, soybean is one of the few vegetables that grow well in hot summer.

 You can sow soybean in your garden directly, but soybean is easy to get rotten in dense and wet soil.

Two weeks later, it will grow about three leaves and should get transplanted as soon as possible.

 Keeping soybean seedlings in seed starter too long will inhibit its growth.

Even you transplant the yellow seedling in soil, they still won't grow well.

 Spread a handful of 10-10-10 in organic fertilizer and mix with the topsoil.

 Temperature lower than 50 degree, soybean seeds will not sprout.

 Depending on varieties, soybean growing cycle can vary from 60 to 100 days.

 Early matured varieties are more suitable for backyard growing.

 Plant soybean seedlings about half foot apart in either single row or twin rows.

 In two to three weeks, it will start to bear flowers which can be white, yellow or purple.

 In the next three weeks, soybean will grow fast and flower at the same time.

 Under the leaves, you will notice that few young pods are growing.

 At temperature lower than 60 degree, soybean will not flower and fruit well.

 At the end of flowering stage, crowded soybean pods are stacked around the stem.

 Soybean will stop growing leaves and flowers and focus its nutrients on developing the bean seeds.

 Soybean roots contain nitrogen-fixing bacteria and will produce nitrogen nutrients to support its growth.

 At the end of flowering stage, I use 10-10 inorganic fertilizer to help soybean to grow better quality beans.

 Spread the fertilizer next to soybean roots and gently mix with the topsoil.

 In the next 4-5 weeks, soybean pods will slowly grow thicker and at the end round.

 You can boil the whole pods or remove the shell and cook the green soybeans.

 To collect soybean seeds, leave the soybean plant in your garden until the whole plant dies and the pods turn brown.

 New soybean seeds have very high germination rate while seeds older than 2 weeks will be more likely to germinate.

If you like my channel, please subscribe and come back for more Asian vegetables.

 Hi, I'm Tinny from Mini Bowl Design and I'm going to do a quick Tinny's Kitchen cooking

 segment here where we're going to bang out Lipton's Rice Side Sesame Chicken Meal.

 I was going to have it for supper so I thought I'd do it on camera.

 I've got my new Coolfly stove going here with a pot stand and a Heine 24 ounce pot with

 We'll bring it to a boil and then we'll turn the camera back on.

 Now it says on the directions to dump this package in and stir it and let it simmer for

 I'm just going to try to do this without spilling any this time.

 While I was waiting, I took a packet of Spam, a three ounce packet of Spam and cubed it

 I don't want to put it in there for the whole time but towards the end, last minute or so,

 So I'm going to turn this stove back to a simmer and then we'll turn the camera off

 and when it gets to seven minutes is up, we'll see what we got.

 Now in order to get this to simmer the way I wanted it to, I had to pull one wick down

 in the holder so it wouldn't light and pull the other one right down flush and just run

 I think that this is going to be hot enough to warm the Spam without even putting it in

 there because to be perfectly honest, I don't really have room for it anyway.

 And if you want to carry the three ounce Spam packet with it, really not a bad meal.

 Okay, the first thing I want to do is identify where the concave on the ski is.

 I like to use these gooseneck lamps at the end of my tuning table because then I can

 When I read this face, I find that it's concave in this section here.

 Almost all new skis are concave in the shovel section, in the forward part of the ski.

 It's really rare that you don't find one that isn't concave in here.

 The rest of the ski might be alright, but there's always going to be some concave spot

 What I like to do is I like to take just a felt tip marker and mark the section that's

 And then what I do is I use our greenstone and I wrap the end with blue painter's tape.

 The reason for this is these concave sections can frequently have hardened edges from the

 So this greenstone with the blue painter's tape puts a slight bevel on the stone.

 I put a cut about, usually about two wraps, put a slight bevel on the stone so that it

 I just come down the ski a couple of times, going from the tip to tail direction, and

 Now using the file base flattener, backhand on the big hump, fronthand on the little hump,

 smaller hump, this is a two-hand tool so you have real control over it while you're

 Now always tip to tail direction, never use it in anything but tip to tail direction.

 So when you come down like this and you're catching the edge and you want to do an overlapping

 stroke, keep the fronthand on the ski, keep the front of it on the ski, and roll it back

 just barely raising the back side, then do another forward stroke.

 Some people like a single pass like this, some people like overlapping passes like this.

 It's easy to do like this, and you can hear, I'm sure you can hear how this file is hitting

 So as you're using it, and you'll start hearing hitting those edges start to reduce, it's

 really important, this file collects base and metal very, very quickly.

 You've got to brush it out, this file comes with a tool, you've got to brush it out constantly

 because when those file teeth get clogged, they won't cut anymore.

 And it really doesn't take very long on a lot of skis, I'm already starting to remove

 all the concave on this ski, and it really picks up trash fast.

 This is a true bar tool, you've got to use it with your true bar constantly, constantly

 This tool can fool you, you'll watch it like your 16 year old daughter.

 I can see that this ski is getting, that concave is starting to already be removed, and the

 file is telling me also that it's not getting much in the way of metal edges anymore.

 So that was a pretty easy, that ski wasn't real concave, so that was pretty easy to do.

 When you see a spark coming off a stone grinder, it is in some degree hardening an edge, it's

 None of our tools will harden edges, our files won't, our stones won't, nothing we make will

 It'll remove hardness on ski edges, but will not harden ski edges.

 We simply won't participate in that nightmare of hardening ski edges.

 Now I said that this is not a stand alone tool, it's meant to be used in conjunction

 And the reason why is because this is how you really get the base flat.

 This file is to correct what's bad on the base, but to get it flat and get good finish

 You also want to blend this, so if you're doing very, I didn't do a lot of work here,

 but if you're doing a lot of work, you want to be blending your ski base with the rest

 But what happens is that when you take off the concave section, what you'll still have,

 The edges will be getting consistent, but you'll have some inconsistencies in these

 And that's what the stone blade does, is it takes those inconsistencies and makes them

 consistent, makes them flat, and the stone blade also cleans up the mess that the teeth

 These two tools make a great tag team, both for flattening concave bases, and they make

 a great tag team also when you're doing base repair and you want to remove excess P-Tex.

 I'm probably going to do a video showing you how to do that on doing a major course shot

 You really can get control of your ski tuning, even over the nightmares you are delivered,

 Making a different batch, so I'll just tell you what the regular batch is for 12 2 cups of flour

 Baking powder 1 half a teaspoon of salt 2 teaspoons of sugar and a teaspoon of cream of tartar

 There are some countries that don't have shortening and when I googled it

 It said lard and someone acted as if they were freaking out like oh lord

 That's not something that you would ever want to add so I have no clue because I don't know what lard is I?

 But you have to remember that those have different properties, and you know it probably will not end up tasting

 So you're gonna add in a half a cup of vegetable shortening, and you're gonna work it in with your hands

 Existence here and so I'm gonna have to let you go while I do that so that I don't touch the camera with

 Now we're gonna turn it out onto a slightly floured surface and knead it

 Alrighty so it's all kneaded out, and we're gonna make these the dough into balls placing them

 Okay, I melted a quarter cup of butter and we're gonna brush each one of these

 And then we're gonna go put it in that oven for 10 to 12 minutes

 And it's okay that there's leftover butter because we're gonna use that again once it gets out of the oven

 Okay, so meanwhile you put the rest of the butter in a pan and you add three 1 3rd cup of honey

 All righty so once it comes to a boil then you just put it on the side when the biscuits are done

 Make sure that each one of this one of these is just smothered in the butter and honey

 Biscuits, but I really somehow doubt that this is anything like them.

 With honey butter over it, so it's good nice and fluffy fluffy biscuits lovely

 Hello everyone, it's Chris Samba and today I'm going to show you guys a trick you can

 And ok, I'm going to show you guys what will happen if you don't use the paper.

 This right here, this is what's going to happen if you don't use the paper.

 Your drawings will be like this and you do not want this to happen to your drawings.

 Ok, so to make the paper, all you need is a tape and a piece of paper.

 And then stick the tape on a piece of paper and put your hand on it, your palm.

 Now you're ready to draw, you're ready to keep your drawings clean.

 Hey everybody, I wanted to make a quick video about the workouts that you're going to be

 And pretty much if you get really good at these or build up your stamina, physically

 If you're struggling, you know doing 20-30 of what I'm about to show you, then you're

 So pretty much, you're mountain climbers, you're going to be doing this.

 You're going to start standing, you're going to come down, that's going to be 1.

 And you're going to go to a pushup position, that's going to be 2.

 You're also going to have to hold it in a pushup position, like this.

 You're going to have to be able to hold it like this for a long time.

 For some, I think that works like your hip flexors and your butt.

 But yeah, mountain climbers, eight counts, pushups, those things I just showed you.

 Pretty much a lot of your core and your upper body with your pushups.

 So if you can work, if you can get your stamina really good on those mountain climbers, especially

 eight counts, pushups, your sit ups and your core, you're going to be working those out

 Those are the main things they're going to have you do when you get beat or IT, intensive

 So when they give you your IT, when your division messes up or screws up on something, they're

 And they're going to make all you guys do, all that stuff I just showed you for like

 Hello, I'm Rory from eSpares, and in this video I'm going to show you how to replace

 The pump is situated at the bottom of the washing machine and is used to pump water

 your pump if the drum of your washing machine isn't being drained of water during a wash

 There are a couple of things to check before you replace the pump.

 drain hose hasn't become blocked, and the second is that the fluff filter, which is

 and models of washing machine and can be really handy if you don't have the genuine replacement

And there's also the genuine replacement pump, which is made specifically

 for your model of washing machine, and is the one I'm going to use in this video because

 it's always recommended that you use genuine spare parts where possible.

Always make sure that your washing machine is unplugged before you get going.

 a drain hose here, or if your washing machine doesn't have a hose like that, you can use

Either way, be prepared to have a lot of water coming out of the machine.

 Now what I'm going to need to do is I'm going to need to remove the top panel of the machine

 as well as the back panel, and then I'm going to tilt the washing machine onto its side.

 To remove the panels, I'm going to use a Torx head screwdriver.

 Now it's important to remember that the drum is suspended inside the washing machine, so

 before tilting it onto its side, get a piece of cardboard or something similar and just

 wedge it between the drum and the side of the machine so that when you tilt it onto

 its side, the drum isn't touching the side of the machine and it's not damaging any internal

Also, if you're finding the machine too heavy, then do get a friend to help you

 And now to remove the old pump, I just need to turn it anti-clockwise and pull away.

This clip is in the way of the pump so I can't turn it with this clip

 Now with the clip moved further down the hose, I can now turn the pump anti-clockwise and

 Now I've put the pump in, I'm just going to put the clip back where it was and just pop

 So there's my new pump in place, now I just need to put everything back together.

 And that my friends is how easy it is to replace a pump on a washing machine.

 makes and models of washing machine are available on the eSpares website, as well as universal

 Hello my darlings, it's Micaela and today we are going to show you the perfect pickup.

 Okay, so we have talked about spasms in the past and often when this happens it tends to be around the lower back.

 And so generally it is when they have reached too far, leaned down, bent down to pick something up that in the past wasn't an issue but at this point it was.

 So that's a little issue in and of itself but what we are going to do today is basically show you how to use your body better

 so that you are not potentially compromising it when you are picking up any given thing whether it's light or whether it's heavy, okay.

 So we are going to use the premise of an exercise called a deadlift.

 A lot of people are familiar with the squat which uses the front of their thighs, their quads but we are going to do a deadlift which utilizes the back of your thighs and your glutes, your butt.

 Back of your thighs are your hamstrings and your butt are your glutes, okay.

 I've got a little sporty spice action going on here today, pre-gym.

 So basically what we are going to think about doing is so instead of when we pick something up coming from here and having all this potential compromising of our lower back happening,

 what we are going to do, what a deadlift makes us do is we are going to think about sticking our butt out, basically tipping our pelvis and having our hips go back.

 So we are going to stick our butt out and we are going to stick our hips back, okay.

 You can see there's a little flexion in my lower back which is what I want because that protects it, okay.

 And then I'm going to think about keeping my chest up, my eyes forward and then I'm going to come down to whatever degree I need to.

 Maybe I'm going to drop my butt a little bit but I'm not going to round my back, okay.

 So I'm thinking about sticking my butt out, sticking my hips back, feeling a stretch up the back of my legs and then I'm coming down to whatever degree I need to and then I'm coming up utilizing these guys in the back, utilizing my butt, alright.

 The thing that is so wonderful about deadlifts or about any exercise that strengthens the muscles on the back of your body is it gets you upright.

 If you have more flexion on the back of your body, it brings your body up.

 It brings your body back and the thing that's so wonderful is that, so like we talked about last week,

 in terms of using your skeleton to support you to distribute load which basically takes stress off any given point.

 So the more, the stronger we are in the back of our body, the more tone, the more contraction there is in the back of our body, we get joints stacked over each other which takes stress off of any given point.

 Plus we just reduce the risk of injury or pain because typically where pain shows up is the back, alright.

 The biggest, a great cue is to think about sticking your butt out and then moving in a way that makes the back of your thighs, your hamstrings stretch.

 So if you can feel sensation in your hamstrings, in the back of your thighs, chances are you will be taking it out of your lower back, alright.

 Hello, this will be a mini clarinet lesson and like we'll be learning like the notes on the clarinet

 Welcome to my kitchen where actual food is never made, but you can find me whipping up

 Today, I'm going to teach you how to make a cucumber face mask.

 Two cucumbers, make sure they're chilled, so keep them in the fridge.

 Next, you put your grater over the bowl, and you only want to use the small grating.

 If you want, once your mask is complete, you can strain a little bit of the juice and

 This cucumber mask is one of my favorites because cucumber has so many beneficial skin

 It gets rid of dark circles, as we all know, putting the cucumber on your eye.

 The juice can be used as a toner and make your skin glow overall.

 But most importantly, this mask is super, super soothing and refreshing.

 And when you take it off, your skin will be glowing like a little baby.

 Once you're finished grating the two cucumbers, you should have a mushy consistency.

 And you'll want to put it into the fridge for about 20 to 30 minutes to make sure it's

 really, really cold because that's how you get the soothing and refreshing effects.

 You just put your hands right in it and you put it on your face.

 Alright, once again, I am at the end of the row, ending on a back loop, regular half double

 However, since I want to stagger the beads, I did every ten, so on this row I'll start

 So, one, two, three, four, slide a bead over, half double crochet, and this one's a front

 You'll do, for my particular scarf, I did the base row, beaded row, plain row, beaded

 I did ten on the fourth row, which is the second beaded row, I did five, and then ten.

 And then on the sixth row, which is the third beaded row, I did ten again.

 All together, there are one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, eleven

 It's not quite necessarily a skinny scarf, but it's not one that you're going to wrap

 This was just to show you how I made that really pretty textured stitch using beads

 Again, you can get the entire pattern written out on my blog, ggcrochet.blogspot.com.

 Hi there my lovelies, I'm Cassandra from Love Bites and today I'm going to be teaching you

 Okay so now we're going to slice our potatoes into thin slices.

 I'm cutting it today with a knife because for some reason when I was looking through

 my kitchen this morning I could not for the life of me find it so I'm using a knife.

 You don't want to go too too thin on your slices but I would say like about as thick

 I've drained them from the water and I'm just going to use the potato slices and fill the

 And then you're going to sprinkle a little bit of parmesan cheese.

 You're almost making like a potato lasagna is the best way I can describe it.

 Then you're going to take some salt, sprinkle a little bit on top, some pepper.

 I know it seems odd but it really brings it an interesting flavor.

 Then you're going to take some heavy cream and give it a light pour over your potatoes.

 And then you're going to do another layer and just keep going with it.

 So my sister taught me this dish and she actually learned from her father's side of her family

 So her family taught her and she taught me and now I'm going to teach you.

 I've kind of stole it from my sister at this point but she lets me.

 And we're just going to keep going with this until you reach the top.

 Just let it cool a little bit before you cut into it and serve it.

 I hope you enjoyed this recipe and it inspires you to try it for yourself and hopefully it

 inspires you also to subscribe because now I have savory and sweet recipes.

 Hello everyone this is Marsha and I'm back and as promised today I'm doing the Rihanna.

 So I am going to go ahead and apply her on and this is the Outre brand and I have her

 Look I normally already have them on but today I'm going to show y'all from the beginning

 I'm going to go ahead and take out the hair I'm going to be using.

 Okay so now we're just going to brush the part down that we left out.

 I'm just going to pull those as close as possible just to make them fit a little tighter.

 And without her that hair is so funny because you can see this one does have like my hint

 But the Yasmin yesterday in the number two it was more of a darker color.

 Okay so once you have it secure look at the curls they're so pretty.

 So I've already greased my hair and everything because as I stated I just washed my hair

 It's already curly and really I'm just going to finger comb it because I don't want to

 But it's cute and I may place like some Apogee styling mousse just on my edges a little.

 But right now I really don't need anything quick that I can see of.

 So hope you guys enjoyed Rihanna and you guys have a wonderful day and see you guys later.

 Hi guys, welcome back to Bhanjagar and today we will be making tomato achar and for that

 we would need 3 chopped tomatoes and here I have spices and everything so let's go with

 This one is 1 fourth teaspoon of turmeric powder, 1 teaspoon of cumin seeds, 1 teaspoon

 of mustard seeds, 1 fourth teaspoon of mustard oil and 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, 3 chopped

 green chilies, 3 fourth teaspoon of red chili peppers and 1 teaspoon of salt and then at

 least 7 to 8 cloves of garlic and this one is the canola oil which is like 1 tablespoon.

 In order to make achar now first thing we need to do is heat the pan and then we are

 going to add oil and here I used canola oil so after that I'm gonna put cumin seeds and

 Ok now since our mustard seeds start popping and we can see our cumin seeds is also little

 So you can add tomatoes according to your taste and also it's the same with the chili.

 If you like spicy you can add some more, if you don't like you don't have to add it at

 Ok now you can see the tomato is cooked so now I'm gonna turn off the heat and put this

 Alright guys now I have put cooked tomatoes and everything in the blender.

 Now I'm gonna add mustard oil which is like 1 fourth teaspoon and then 1 tablespoon of

 Alright now that everything is blended all I'm gonna do is pour this back in a bowl so

 down at a slight angle and curve that around and curve that around and then two little

 curves there and right on the corner part here bring a curve down there and a curve

Now what you need to do here is to draw a curve that comes around like that and here

You can put some shading in just kind of like that, little marks.

 then come all the way around up to this corner bit and then just hook it in slightly.

 bring it down there all the way around and then just kind of hook it around the corner

 bit and maybe bring it out a little bit and then from right down here follow this line

 corner and then again bring this up around here and just flick it around.

 there and flick and then you want to keep flicking some shading in there like that and

 line up there and also you can maybe put a bit of shading in those kind of hollows.

 it's dry and to put it on the table I'm going to put some shading like this and under there

 and you're going to want some around there like that and that will stop about there and

And then all you need to do is colour it in and if it's going to

 be a Christmas bow you probably want a nice red and I'm using Copic markers here and you

 get this nice brush effect so you can flick those colours in like that.

 a little bit of white in the middle of it and here flick this all the way down and flick

 back up to it and that will give you that kind of shiny ribbon look.

 darker red you can always add an extra bit and colour in those areas underneath.

 spirit go and learn how to draw a candy cane with a bow on it or just try the mystery drawing.

 Check out my other channels and in the meantime keep drawing, drawing, drawing, practice,

 The Easy Walk Harness is designed to gently discourage your dog from pulling while walking on a leash.

 There is very little acclimation time or special techniques required.

 Traditional harnesses actually encourage dogs to pull harder because of the opposition reflex.

 That's the reflex that causes sled dogs to pull against pressure.

 The Easy Walk Harness' unique front chest leash attachment stops pulling by steering your dog to the side and redirecting his attention towards you.

 To determine the correct size for your dog, you will need to take a girth measurement.

 Measure all the way around the dog, just behind the front legs.

 The top strap, shoulder strap, fits across the dog's shoulders and back.

 The belly strap, bottom, fits beneath the dog, just behind the front legs and is a contrasting color.

 The chest strap has a martingale loop and fits across the chest in front.

 The martingale loop is a loop of material in the middle of the chest strap that allows some movement back and forth as the dog walks.

 This helps keep the chest strap from twisting and provides more comfort for the dog.

 The dogs can feel the shifting and often respond to it before the leash becomes tight when trying to pull.

 Each strap is adjustable to get the best fit and both the top and bottom straps have quick-snap buckles to make it easy to get on and off the dog.

 You will be fitting and adjusting the straps separately in this order.

 This will be the foundation of the fit and provides a secure base.

 You must properly fit these straps before making any adjustments to the chest strap.

 Having someone help you by giving the dog some tasty treats while you're fitting the harness will make it easier and a great experience for your dog.

 Unsnap the buckle on the belly strap, which is a contrasting color.

 If your dog is uncomfortable with the harness going over his head, place the chest strap against the dog's chest and snap the buckle of the shoulder strap together over his back.

 The O-rings on each side should fit above and behind the dog's leg.

 Place your fingers in the O-rings and position the rings above and behind the leg on each side.

 You will be able to determine if and how much you need to adjust the strap.

 To adjust the strap, take the harness off of your dog and use the metal adjuster to make the strap longer or shorter.

 You will know the fit of the strap is correct when, as the strap is lying across the dog's back, the O-rings remain in the correct position on each side of the dog.

 To complete the girth fit, bring the belly strap around to determine how much adjustment you need to make on the belly strap.

 You may want to remove the harness from the dog while making the adjustment.

 Once the belly strap is adjusted and connected by the quick snap, the straps should form a vertical line.

 You should only be able to get one or two fingers between the dog and the harness.

 Check that the harness doesn't rotate by trying to move it against the fur.

 This snug fit is very important because these two straps combined create the foundation that keeps the harness in place.

 The chest strap should fit horizontally and not droop down or too easily ride up close to the dog's neck.

 It will be much easier to make this adjustment if you remove the harness from the dog.

 You will want to adjust the sides evenly so the martingale remains in the center.

 For example, if you estimated you needed to adjust the chest strap by 1 inch, you will adjust each slide on the strap by half an inch.

 Once you have your adjustments complete, do a final check on the fit.

 You should have a mostly vertical fit here with the o-rings above and behind the front legs.

 The chest strap fits horizontally and is snug without pulling the girth straps forward.

 Dogs may tense up while being fit the first time, so check the fit after a few minutes and readjust if necessary.

 Now you're ready to attach the leash to the D-ring on the martingale loop in the front.

 Although the harness may have an immediate impact on your dog's pulling habits and it may be more manageable to walk him, he may still pull somewhat while wearing it.

 The harness is designed for you to be able to redirect your dog from pulling and help achieve a loose leash walk.

 To achieve the best results, hold the leash so that your dog has enough length to walk by your side but not enough to forge ahead.

 As soon as you feel tension on the leash, redirect your dog back to a position beside you by gently pulling the leash to the side.

 You may also change direction or circle to get him back in position.

 When he returns to this position, reward him with a tasty treat and praise.

 You may find yourself redirecting and rewarding him quite a bit in the beginning, but with some patience, practice and consistency, he will quickly learn walking beside you is worthwhile.

If the chest strap is slipping or the straps are chafing the armpit area, you may need to adjust the fit.

 The chest strap is probably adjusted too tightly and is pulling the girth straps forward.

 A loose girth and an over-adjusted chest strap can cause the girth strap to slip into the armpit and cause chafing.

The chest strap should gently lay over the dog's front but not be over-tightened.

 Excess pulling can also contribute to chafing in a dog's armpits.

 Ensure that you are using proper leash techniques to redirect your dog so that they do not pull forward on a walk.

 If the chest strap is fully extended and it is still pulling the girth straps into the armpits, the harness might be too small.

 Consult the sizing chart to make sure you have the right fit for your dog.

 With the Easy Walk Harness, you now have a gentle, effective way to enjoy walks with your dog.

 I'm doing a video for a user that needs some help with doing a J-Curl.

 What I learned is to make it easier, you try to get it up here as close as possible.

 But, you probably need that so you can have the J-Curl the way I had in the video.

 You would just try to get it as close to your scalp as possible.

 A few weeks ago I made a very exclusive and delicious recipe for my friends of Nielsen Massey.

 So the first step is to put the butter into our mixer and we're going to add to it some golden caster sugar.

 We want the mixture to be lovely and fluffy and very creamy before we start to add our other ingredients.

 I'm going to sift in some plain flour and I've got as well some baking powder.

It doesn't matter even if your recipe doesn't mention it, always sift your dry ingredients.

 That will get rid of any little lumps of hard flour which you don't want to find into your cake.

 I'm just going to combine it very quickly until we've got a lovely sticky dough.

 So I've got some little rings here, been slightly greased and I'm just going to put the mixture inside roughly half a centimetre deep.

 This needs to rest in the fridge for at least 30 minutes and that's going to be ready to cook for 30 minutes in a preheated oven at 180.

 So now we're going to make the first step of our creme shibu-st.

 I'm going to bake it in some hot milk on a stove until it's nice and thick.

 Later on when it's cooled down I'm going to add some special ingredients to it.

 Right, so my creme patissiere is now completely cooled down and I'm just going to smooth it up with some very soft unsalted butter.

 Right, so my butter now is all incorporated to my creme patissiere and now let's bring some flavour to it.

 Right, so all our butter now is incorporated and the cream is lovely and smooth and glossy.

 The only thing we need to do now is to make an Italian meringue which we're going to fold into this custard.

 Basically water and sugar take it together to the heat and that's the recipe for a classic Italian meringue.

 There we go, lovely and fluffy, very smooth and this is cooked as well.

 Here we are, this is smooth, it's perfect, ready to build our dessert.

 Here I've got some mango cut in small cubes and I've just in a skillet caramelised them with some golden custard sugar.

 And just to bring a little bit more freshness to it I'm just going to chop some fresh mint.

 Let's get the rest of our ingredients and let's put that dessert together.

 So we've got our creme chiboust and here we've got our breton biscuit.

 I know it's a bit extraordinary but trust me that heat is going to come through with the sweetness of the mango, it's going to work perfectly.

 So I'm folding that into our creme chiboust and now using a palette knife I'm just going to smooth it up on top of the mango.

 Just to bring some extra flavour again and a little bit of crunch on the top, using a kitchen blowtorch I'm just going to caramelise the top.

 Just move it around slowly across your creams and that's going to give you a lovely colour and at the same time it's going to bring some flavour as well because all the sugar inside is going to start caramelising.

 So now I'm ready for the big reveal and this is ready to serve.

 If you don't impress your friend with that I don't know what to say.

 Leave some comments below, let me know what you like, what you think about it and of course don't forget to subscribe because my subscribers are better bakers.

I prefer the craft type because it doesn't immediately bond skin

 To start you'll need to print off the name you want on your necklace.

 Make your letters twice the size you want your necklace to be because the plastic will

 Once your name is printed, add glue dots directly on top of the text.

But if your name doesn't have evenly spaced holes like this, you'll

 need to use a hole punch to make some in the first and last letter.

 This helps prevent the word from curling on top of itself as it melts.

My names took about 8 minutes, but it's a good idea to stay close to your

Keep baking and the plastic will soften a bit and begin to uncurl.

 the name, bend the cardboard behind it instead of trying to pull the word off.

 holes and behind the letters or you can add jump rings to the necklace.

 Absolutely loved Frozen so my next Disney feature is Olaf from Frozen so

 So jumping right in grab a piece of clay and you want to make his head.

 the bottom is the skinniest and the top is going to be the widest portion.

 So for this part you can pretty much use your nail or you can use a tool but you

 Once you're satisfied with his smile go ahead and grab a small piece of clay and

 So after you're done with his chompers go ahead and create the eyes.

 Hey everyone, it's Rochelle here and this is the makeup look I'm doing for you guys

 So this look is inspired by Nicki Minaj's latest video, Pound the Alarm.

 So I saw the video a few days ago and I love the whole carnival feel in the costumes and

 Now if you'd like to see how I achieve this look, keep on watching.

 I start off by applying my Urban Decay Primer Potion and this will prevent my eyeshadow

 from creasing up and this will give the eyeshadow something to stick to as well.

 And I'm going to apply this in the crease using a 224 blending brush.

 And I'm going to grab my eyeshadow from my Naked Palette and I'm using the same brush

 So you want to make sure you clean off your brush before you apply the second eyeshadow.

 So I'm just going to apply that in the crease as well and I'm just mixing the two eyeshadows

 So I'm going to place this on the highest point of my brow bone using that same fluffy

 I'm also going to place that same rice paper in the inner corner of my eye.

 Now I'm going to go into my Naked 2 Palette and I'm going to grab the eyeshadow booty

 Okay so I'm just going to reapply that crease shadow just to deepen up the crease just a

 Okay so for my liner I'm going to apply L'Oreal Blackest Black 24 hour liner.

 So I'm going to apply these dramatic thick lashes and these are lashes number 120 by

 Okay so now that the eyes are complete what I'm going to go ahead and do now is start

 To set my concealer I'm using a translucent powder by Covergirl.

 Now for the rest of my face to set my foundation I'm using MAC Mineralize Loose Powder in the

 For my contour I'm using a foundation powder that is two shades darker than my skin tone.

 And I'm going to apply this on the apples of my cheeks in a circle motion.

 So I'm going to go back into that foundation powder that's two shades darker.

 Just to slim it down a bit because Nicki Minaj had her nose contoured.

 So for my lips I'm going to apply a lip pencil first which is a pink lip pencil.

 So just to get the right shade pink lipstick that I want I'm going to apply a lip pencil first.

 So thank you guys for watching and I'll see you guys in the next video.

 Also got a natto oil, steeped it in there, gives it that color.

 We're going to just steep them together to infuse the garlic, the natto, and the ancho pepper.

 Take it off the heat, and you'll let it rest for 45 minutes to infuse.

 In culinary school, they wouldn't pass you if you didn't get the oyster.

 And for the breasts, we're going to just go right down the keel bone, right down the center.

 We're going to season the chicken on both sides with just salt.

 A lot of Philippine cooking is thought about the day before, and they're preparing it for the next day.

 You're going to let this marinate for two hours or preferably overnight.

 For the pickled slaw, you're going to do a mixture of daikon radish as well as carrots and julienne of cucumber.

 Put it into a colander, season with salt, and let it sit for 20 minutes.

 While they're cooking on the grill, you want to baste them with the reserve marinade.

 And we'll turn them over again, and we'll actually baste the other side.

 At this point, we're going to try and squeeze out the excess moisture.

The freshness of it, the freshness of the dish go together so well.

 The slaw is lively and refreshing, and the chicken is just very flavorful and rich.

It's nice having the heat of the chicken, and you're also having the cool slaw,

 and it's just a refreshing on your palate with the Sauvignon Blanc.

 A great part of what goes into the Sauvignon Blanc comes from our own ranch,

 So they don't produce a whole lot anymore, but they do give it a lot of great concentration and intensity.

 but it also has a little bit of richness with the semillon being in it.

 And together, the blend just marries very well, exactly like your dish.

 I mean, all the ingredients go together to make a perfect blend.

 Hi all folks, so today I'm going to show you how to make Pollack Roe Soup, which is basically

 So first we'll need some Pollack Roe eggs, which is this stuff right here.

 And also you can cut up some Korean peppers, but I didn't have any so I used jalapeno,

 So what you want to do is put about 3-5 cups and boil with some seaweed or kelp.

 And then you don't actually eat the kelp, I mean you can if you want to, but you can

 Actually I can take it out a little bit later to add more flavor.

 And next we'll put in some, to add some flavor we'll put in some of the radish that we cut

 And lastly let's put some of this mushrooms in there to add flavor.

 The radish has to cook for a little bit and also infuse with the soup.

 So we'll be back after boiling it, if it starts boiling in about 5 minutes.

 And now I can take the kelp out, the seaweed, and throw that away.

 We don't need it, or you can eat it, wrap it with rice, but once you boil it, it doesn't

 And you can taste one of your radish, see if it's done, I already did it, and it tastes

 And then what you want to do is actually put the heat down to very low.

 And then we'll put the rest of the stuff, because we don't want to have a high temperature

 and it'll ruin, it won't ruin it, but the eggs will be really hard.

 The way we do it is, we put the eggs in, and then just put it on, well not too low, let

 And then give it another five minutes and your soup should be done.

 Hi all folks, it's on medium heat after about two, three minutes.

 I kind of improvised because a lot of the ingredients I don't have.

 Back in 2002, I took my grandfather's recipe that he had developed way back, I think sometime

 in the 50s, and I kind of redeveloped it and I opened it up to the public.

 My customers were starting to complain about the shipping costs.

 I didn't want to give up my recipe, I didn't want to settle for charging my customers all

 But let me just go back a second and just talk to you about, do you know how sometimes

 you open up your refrigerator and you get this bottled sauce that's sitting all the

 way in the back of the fridge, and you look at that, all the bacteria around the rim,

 well no longer, you don't have to worry about that anymore because the sauce mix takes care

 You can make as much as you want, as little as you want, when you want.

 First of all, all we're going to do is we're going to take one half a cup of regular ketchup,

 And finally, believe it or not, just one tablespoon of the Hermit's BBQ mix.

 Now let me tell you, if you've never had fresh BBQ sauce, there is nothing like it.

 Most people bring it out of their fridge, and it always bothered me.

 You know, you spend all that time out in your backyard, on your campsite, you're making

 You spend all this time making this beautiful meal, and then you take cold sauce that tastes

 like glue, it comes out, it has bacteria all over it, you pour that on your hot food, it

 You see how it's all starting to get thick, and it is nice and hot.

 Now, all we're going to do is we're going to take it to the plate.

 We've got some beautiful steak sliders, and again, once you have fresh food, why not have

I like to use organic yellow cornmeal that's fine to medium grind.

 A fourth cup sorghum flour, two tablespoons flaxseed meal or you can grind whole seeds

Half tablespoon baking powder, that's the same as one and a half

 warm water, two tablespoons oil like sunflower, grapeseed, coconut or olive oil, two tablespoons

 coconut sugar or you can use maple syrup and two teaspoons vinegar, white or apple cider

So for tools you're going to need a medium sized pan that's greased.

 I'm going to use a greased cast iron pan, a large mixing bowl, a whisk and a spoon.

 We have the oven preheating to 400 degrees and we're going to start off with the dry

First dump in your cornmeal, then your sorghum flour, your flaxseed meal,

 the water, and the oil, coconut sugar and vinegar and stir those until they're just

 the cornbread is done baking you can go ahead and let it cool off.

 I'm going to show you a way that I like to eat my cornbread if I'm not eating it with

 together some spicy brown mustard with hot sauce and lemon juice.

The cornbread has cooled off now and I'm just going to make a little sandwich.

 Take about a quarter of the pan, put some of that mustard on one side, and the black

Put some of the carrot strips on there, put on the onion, and then

 really like to eat cornbread for breakfast or really any time of the day, like with jelly,

 Being in college and having expensive taste is definitely not a good combination.

 I always find myself lusting over everything in the Urban Outfitters home decor section.

 So today I'm going to show you guys how I made these Urban Outfitters inspired DIYs.

 For the first DIY I'm going to show you guys how I made this twine glow in the dark lantern.

 You'll be needing a ball, some twine, some glue, some sponges, a light source, I'm using

 You're going to want to begin by grabbing your ball and drawing two circles.

 Then you're going to want to grab your glue and your sponge and coat the entire ball with

 There's no particular way to do this, just make sure the entire ball is wrapped with

 So you should have a smaller circle like this at the top and a larger one like this towards

 In the following morning I'm going to poke a few holes at the top and bottom of the ball

 Once the ball has deflated you should be able to easily take out whatever is left of the

 Then using some twine and hot glue I'm going to hot glue a piece of the twine inside the

 Just to secure the twine and the ball I added some hot glue at the top.

 I'm going to grab my portable candle and place it inside of my lantern and there you have

 For DIY number two I'm going to show you guys how to make this geometric hanging piece.

 You'll need some wooden rods, some moss, paint, a paintbrush, ruler, a hand held saw, a hot

 Now grabbing my ruler I'm going to measure each of those three wooden rods at seven inches

 Then I'm going to grab six more wooden rods and measure those at four inches.

 And I highly recommend asking a friend or parent to help you cut if you have no experience

 So you're going to want to grab your three four inch pieces and glue them together like

 Then you're going to grab your three seven inch pieces and glue them together like a

 Then you're going to grab your other three four inch pieces and glue them to the bottom

So just to make it a little bit more vibrant I'm adding another coat.

 And I'm grabbing my moss and placing a little bit of hot glue at the bottom and just piling

 Then I'm going to grab my twine and double it up and tie it to the top of my geometric

 For DIY number three I'm going to show you guys how I made this ombre watercolor world

So you'll be needing some watercolors, cardstock paper, a frame, and a stencil.

 I began by going onto Google and looking for a world map and I printed it off and cut it

Then I prepped my watercolors and I grabbed my cardstock paper and I taped

 So I went for a red orange yellow look so I began by painting the bottom one third red

 with my orange towards the middle and I'm going to blend it in.

So now I'm going to take off the tape and I'm left with something

 After my painting has dried I'm going to grab my frame and take off the backing and place

 Hello YouTube, this is my first video and today I will be showing you how to build a

 First, take a 1x1 round brick, then put a 1x1 brick with 2 holes on top.

 Then, get a 1x1 brick with a stud and put a 1x1 brick without a stud.

 Then, for the arms, get a 2x2 gray piece, then put one of these pieces on.

 Ok, now we have these two pieces and just put them on the sides like this.

 Some people call them German pancakes, some people call them Dutch babies.

 They're freaking good and I'm making one on a big red egg this morning.

 All right, so one of the really nice things about this recipe is it's just so basic.

 Now if you have those gigantic eggs, I'd probably go with three, four eggs here.

 We have one half cup of heavy whipping cream, one half cup of all-purpose flour, four tablespoons

 When we're done, we're going to hit it with some powdered sugar and some fresh squeezed

 All right, so I have here my old faithful 10-inch cast iron skillet.

 What I'm going to do is just put that butter, again this is four tablespoons of butter in

 Now, I've already got my big green egg preheated to 425 degrees.

 I would suggest that you, if you're going to be using a barbecue, get it preheated before

 What I'm going to do now is get this on the stove top on a medium heat and I just want

 While the butter is melting, what I'm going to do is combine the eggs.

 We're going to whisk this up really good, really get some air in here.

 All right, now I like to do this all at the pit here, just kind of a timing thing.

 I've got the pan with the melted butter, you know, fully coating the bottom.

 Wait until you see what this thing looks like if you've never had one before.

 I've had them where they've been relatively flat in the bottom and just up like a tower

 You want to try to serve these as soon as possible while they're nice and hot.

 Personally, I dig on having a little bit of maple syrup that I just kind of dip.

 Hit it with a little bit more powdered sugar, a couple of lemon wedges to give it a little

 It's got a little bit more of an eggy flavor than like a traditional American pancake.

 But, man, like I said, I personally like to dip them in a little maple syrup.

 So now brush your hair on the side, put in the curler like I do and make sure you don't burn yourself.

 Now grab the same front and brush all together to one big curl.

 Use hairspray and take your hair sausage and roll your hair to your forehead.

 And take any kind of hair bound out to get the final pin-up touch.

 Today we are going to combine two of my favorite foods, brownies and bacon.

 The first thing that you want to do is grab a tablespoon of butter, put it in your dish.

 I'm going to make mine in a ramekin so that I can scoop up lots of bread, but you can

 So I'm going to melt this in the microwave for about 20 seconds.

 So now our butter is melted and we're going to add our wet ingredients, which include

 a tablespoon of water, two tablespoons of oil, whatever kind of oil you prefer, just

 So we're going to start with a quarter cup of flour, three tablespoons of sugar, two

 tablespoons of cocoa powder, just a pinch of salt, and an eighth of a teaspoon of baking

 I'm pretty good at eyeballing this, so I'm just going to eyeball it.

 So once you have that all mixed together, pour it back into your serving dish.

 You can microwave your own bacon and crumble it up, but why not just use pre-made bacon

 I'm going to start with a minute and then check it, because remember, all of our microwaves

 So we're going to put this in for a minute and see how it does.

 Thanks for joining me on Jamie's Lazy Late Night Cooking Corner and making bacon brownies.

 Hi, I'm Beth Summers from the Wilton Test Kitchen, here today to show you how to properly

 Most cupcake projects or recipes will call for you to fill your pan two-thirds full with

 And it's important to do that so that each cupcake bakes evenly and also so that your

 As you can see, scoop-its come in three sizes so that no matter if you're making a mini

 cupcake, a standard, or the jumbo, you have a proper two-thirds fill every time.

 And I have my baking can prepared with my baking cups, my muffin pan.

 I'm just going to scoop the batter here so that I know that it's full and just put it

 And that is a sneak peek of the batter tip, which will be available in April 2013.

 And what you do with the batter tip is you get a disposable decorating bag.

 I have a 16-inch here because it's a little bit easier to use a larger bag with this because

 And you just open it up and you're going to cut a hole in the bag and drop the first

 piece down inside, making sure that the hole that you've cut is large enough for the ring

 And then you just simply twist the other half on the outside of the bag to connect them.

 Now I'm going to use a pint glass here, a tall glass, to support my bag while I fill

 And I'm just going to pour my cake batter into my bag with the tip, filling it about

 And then you just squeeze, apply pressure for the batter to come out.

 And as you can see, after I release the pressure on the bag, there is no dripping, so it's

 And this is also a great way to fill your baking cups for cupcakes.

 So both of these are ideal for getting your perfect two-thirds fill every time.

 So I don't know if when you cut into it it might be pink but you can kind of see if you

 So that was the full 25 minutes but I've got a fan oven so I actually put it on 170.

 So I've just put them face down on a plate, I don't actually have a cooling rack.

 So what I'm actually going to do now is whilst it's still warm we're going to make the heart

 Ok you want a plain piece of acryl, your cake tin, draw around it with a nice sharp

 Right, cut around it, cut as neatly as you actually can, you'll see why in a minute.

 Don't use grease proof paper, it will work against you, it will roll up, it's too flimsy,

 So just use standard piece of A4 paper, don't listen to what anybody else says.

 So you've got your circle, fold it in half, and then take a ruler and let me just see

 You wouldn't believe the setup I've got here for my camera, you would seriously laugh.

 Yes, right, ok, so you take a ruler, now you want a 45 degree angle from the tip here.

 So you've got, like that, and then same thing at the top, parallel, same angle, about 2cm

 Cut, cut, open it up, and you're saying, that's not a heart shape, what the hell!

 All you need to do is trim off the edges, make sure you keep it folded in half for doing this

 Trim, and you may just end up changing that angle very slightly.

 And here's one I made earlier which I'm going to use because that was kind of rushed, but that's how you do it.

 So you can see, if I place it on my cake, that's what's going to happen.

 Right, what you need to do is make sure you put your cake on top of each other.

 Because you want the same heart shapes, obviously, top and bottom.

 Best thing to do is make sure you line up the bottom point there, just in case the top goes wrong, you want your point at the bottom.

 It's better to do this when it's still warm because your cake is softer and it won't crack.

 You can just see there the cake is slightly pink inside, so that did kind of work.

 You're going to get a lot of cake waste this way, but believe me, I won't waste it.

 This is basically what I showed you on the piece of paper and you're thinking, what does that have to do with anything?

 It's a bit more tricky this time because you're going to have to just make the edges even.

 And remember, when you've got your icing on, you're not going to take these edges anyway.

 Obviously, because I need to do the icing, I'm going to put the buttercream and the jam in the middle.

 And we'll come back and show you how to do that for stage three.

 Hi, welcome to Gershwin Woodcraft and today we're going to do something a little different.

 We are going to take a standard propane tank and turn it into what they call a tank drum.

 I saw these all over the place on YouTube but nobody actually explained how to make

 one until I found somebody who actually figured out all the plans, which I downloaded and

 So if you want them, send me an email and I'll send you the PDF which, as you can see

 So let's just go really quickly step by step through how I made it.

 The first step is to get yourself a brand new, never used, empty propane tank from your

 I had to sit there with a hammer and go like this repeatedly and smash it until I cracked

 Now if you want to get close up right here, there are going to be three or four weld points

 and that's where you have to just take a vice grip, get it in place right there and just

 Hit it a few times with a hammer and you will eventually snap it.

 Once you have the seat removed, you can now take your plans and transfer them onto the

 So I eventually decided to just go with a Dremel with those little ceramic bits.

 It was a lot less noisy and ultimately it gave me a much cleaner cut.

 The most important part of your tank drum is going to be the tuning.

 The basic idea is that the longer the tongue is, the lower the note.

 Therefore, you want to start with each note high and tune it down.

 A trick to playing it was described as to touch it as if you're touching a hot iron.

 Don't forget to check out Gershwin Woodcraft and I'll see you next time.

 The TriScribe is a very useful tool when it comes to laying out borders for your chip

 carving and it's also useful by allowing you to use your ruler as a compass if you need

 The TriScribe comes with two separate units and two trammel points.

 So it holds a trammel point and then also the hole right here is where you can slide

 I'm going to start by showing you how this is very handy for laying out borders around

 Take your TriScribe and slide it on the bar of a TriSquare like I have here, a combination

 Insert your pencil into the holder and slide it down so it is just a little bit below the

 Now let's say I want to draw a border around this practice board that I have here.

 All I have to make are the marks on one edge of my board for the border.

 So I'll make one mark here, one here, one here and let's add an outside line outside

 Now I'm set to use the TriScribe to quickly and easily transfer, make these lines around

 Slide the blade of your combination square until it lines up with one of the points and

 So very quickly there I've put four lines evenly around the outside of my board.

 Open up your combination square and now line it up with your next mark.

 Make sure that it lines up just where you want it and we're all set to go.

 Just turning your board and sliding your tri-square combination square right along

 Now before the tri-scribe it was a matter of measuring from each side on your board

 using your T-square and making all those marks precisely and evenly so you get an equal spacing

 Now by using this tri-scribe we've taken out all those steps, all those different measuring

 steps by only having to measure once and then that measurement stays the same for all

 And just as quick as that there you have it and I've outlined a border all the way around

 So that's using the tri-scribe with a combination square and a pencil.

 I'm also going to show you how you can use this tri-scribe as a compass.

 I'm going to take off the angled head that goes on my combination square and I'm going

 to slide part of the tri-scribe onto my ruler, tighten up the knurled knob that's up on top

 and now all I need to do is adjust this trammel point so that it will form a point for my

 compass and now I can set this distance to whatever distance I want with my pencil, slide

 it in, slide it out, set my point and now I'm all set to draw that arc.

 I can adjust my trammel point to whatever distance I'd like to set it at the radius

 So there's the tri-scribe, a useful tool for layout and your chip carving and also

 You'll find this in the MyChipCarving store along with other layout tools for your chip carving.

 I've gotten some requests to do an update on the freeze dried yogurt and we'll put a

 link up there, basically the video of me making my homemade yogurt.

 In that video we did an experiment where we were using pomegranate thrive freeze dried

 The results weren't that great and I attributed it just to being older.

 The vanilla is what I went with so it's got a little bit less flavoring.

 It matches the vanilla that I normally do in my yogurt every day.

 And again I'm probably using about a half a cup of the actual kernels of the freeze

 And last time it was just kind of a weird sort of gloop consistency and I didn't really

 So again if you can keep this going, you know, before you get down to your last, I usually

 So if you saved, you know, maybe just a half cup to a cup of the last batch and then just

 For whatever reason you use it all up, well then just reach for the Thrive and you're

 I've been asked by an artist friend if I would draw a mannequin.

 We're going to come up in a curve, and we're going to come back down in a curve.

 A little curved line, and then the other ear, we're coming up in a curve, and we're coming

 Now we're seeing the back of this mannequin, and it's turning its head towards us.

 Now we're going to come out to a point, come back down, and follow the curve that far.

 Then we're going to do these big anime eyes, large arches, and then a less curved line,

 The pupil is more like a line than a circle, and the circle of reflection.

 The other eye, we're seeing it partially, so we'll be just doing the pupil right there

 Okay, now the mouth, we're just going to make a small curved mouth.

 It looks like the mannequin has eyebrows, so we'll make those lines there, and then

 And then this Pokemon is known for fire, so I'm coming out in loops.

 We'll do the same thing with the other ear, a wing shape, and then back to the head.

 Okay, the Fennekin is like a fox, so it's got facial hair, so we'll do what looks like

 an angel wing, and then we'll bring this line here underneath it and follow that curve.

 Okay, now we're looking at Fennekin from behind, and the face is turned towards us.

 So I've got the top to a vitamin bottle, and I'm going to trace around it about two-thirds

 From here, I'm bringing that circle out to a point, and then I'm going to make one, two,

 The body, we're just coming down with a straight line under the mouth all the way to the ground,

 and then a slight curve and back up, and from under the chin, a curved line coming

 Now we'll just put a straight line here that the Fennekin is sitting on.

 Now we'll start coloring, and we'll be using yellow, orange, and red.

 Now I'm going to color the body yellow, except for around the mouth.

 Now a cool thing about Fennekin is the eyes are orangish red, and so is the tip of the

 We're going to start with the red, and we're going to just do the area closest to the head.

 Finally, I will take the orange and color the rest of the area inside the ear, not this

 white part here, but this fur or flame, or I'm not exactly sure what it is.

 Okay, I understand that there are some new generation Pokemon, so I'm bringing myself

 and if it's the champion and that guy will went to Canada to join the Beyblade

 Blader will get this Fariaris DD which is red version and the Blader

 join the competition will get this Fariaris face which is purple special

 edition and this purple red unicorn is from the lucky draw in the competition

 and this Black Bane Pegasus 125 SF which is blue winged version in Japan which is

 which is follow the BB 120 the ultimate beta stadium but in Hong Kong you need

 And if you like this unboxing video, please like it and comment.

 Hey y'all, today I want to show you how I got my most defined twist out ever.

 Instead of starting on wet hair, I actually started off on dry hair.

 The only tools that I'm going to use for this twist out are water and a creamy moisturizer

 I've already thoroughly finger detangled my hair, so I'm just going to go ahead and start

 Before I start twisting, I'm going to moisturize my hair with a bit of water and then I'm going

 The moisturizer that I'm using is actually a mix of Shea Moisture Curl Enhancing Smoothie

 I like to use two strand flat twists for my twist outs because I find that it gives a

 complete, full, even coverage of definition all the way from root to tip.

 I'm going to continue the process of finger parting, moisturizing, sealing, and twisting

 One thing that I always do when I twist or braid out is section a section off in the

 This keeps me from having that annoying center part when I take my twist out.

 Before going to bed, I pull each twist down individually to ensure that I get as much

 This was my first time doing my twist out from dry hair and I have to say that I'm actually

 I didn't have to sleep on a wet head and my hair is completely bone dry.

 Another advantage of using two strand flat twists to do a twist out is that I don't have

 My hair is already pretty much in the sections that it needs to be in upon taking down the

 So all I have to do is kind of cover up the parting and go about my business.

 I am actually surprised that my hair twisted on dry hair resulted in a much more defined

 Hi there, my battery is running out so this is how to draw a padlock.

 You've got to draw a square, you're going to need to do it in perspective.

 And then we want to have little curves in the corners of the padlock.

 I'm going to draw up and up and up and around and flip that there.

 And then I'm going to come from behind there and that will just give it a 3D-ish-ness.

 I'm going to have some kind of a logo and we'll call it a Loco brand.

 A bit of shading there just to make it look a bit metallic maybe.

 And I think we can maybe put a bit more in there just to make this look a bit more shiny.

 And then some shading around the back just to kind of put it on the table.

 If you like that, keep coming back to Draw Stuff Real Easy on YouTube.

 Eid Al-Adha is where Muslims sacrifice a sheep to commemorate the story of Abraham

 and many people and families and friends get together and cook multiple lamb dishes

 So the first day they do skewers and then the next day they do tagines and so forth

 but we're going to cook the meat and top it with fried almonds and boiled eggs

 and here we have pepper, salt, turmeric, and a large pinch of saffron

 The tagine is ready and now I'm going to show you how to serve it

 they have this crunchiness that pairs up so well with the soft bread

 All the ingredients are in the about section underneath the video

 Ok, I'm going to teach you how to make an origami flapping bird.

 If you have a collared sheet of square origami paper, then you want to flip it over to the

 Then you want to take that out and make a rectangle on the other side.

 Ok, then you want to take it all out and just hold it like that.

 You just push these edges in and squash it down to make this diamond shape.

 Then what you want to do after you've done that is you want to take one of these and

 Ok, now what you want to do whenever you finish that, I'll show you, it should look like this.

 So what you're going to do is you're going to fold them over this line, over these, and

 You're going to go over them, over the other side too, to make a really good crease.

 So now what you have to do is you have to take out these two flaps like this, and then

 Just put this down, put this down, and now it should lay down flat.

 So you take these out, fold this up to this line, something like this, and collapse it

 Ok, now what you want to do is you want to find the side that has these little flaps

 So have a little triangle right here and just fold it around that.

 Then you want to take them out and then open up one of the sides like this.

 Then you'll see a little upside down V. You want to just push this up like that and fold

 So you open it, find the upside down V, push it up to the V, and then collapse it.

 So you can tell that it's starting to look like a bird kind of like a swan.

 Ok, for the wings you're going to fold at an angle starting at this point.

 So you're going to fold it like this so that there's a little space from the wing to the neck.

 Ok, and now for the head you want to take this side where the wings are kind of pointing at.

 Take it out and make it straight until it's straight like this.

 And to make it fly, what you do to make it flap, you just take right here, its tail,

I'm going to make for you my favorite flaxseed hair lotion milk stuff

I'm not actually going to use this one today but you should because it's just good

 Now the flaxseeds have been cooking on the stove for about 10 minutes until they're all

And it's two cups of water to a quarter of a cup of flaxseeds but that

 was a double recipe so some goes back on the stove for a project I have going later.

 So now I'm just going to strain this using the produce strainer that I got from the produce

The destruction you hear of my kitchen is me looking for the tongs to squeeze the

 So since the liquid is so hot this is the ideal time to add any butters.

 which is relatively soft but this would be great with shea butter or mango or cocoa butter.

 Because the liquid is warm it'll save you the step of having to pre-melt those.

 I know that bottle's old and it's mostly empty but I'm not throwing it away until nothing comes out.

 are three teaspoons per tablespoon so two tablespoons six teaspoons.

Oh I can't remember what it's called but you can just break up your butters a little bit

 You just want those to sort of combine and emulsify and stabilize a little bit.

 They won't separate later on if you mix them together really well at this point.

 You know stick blenders in this process of them being phony and white and looking like I put

 aloe in them or looking like I put vanilla in them like just a tinge brown remind me of something

 being room temperature cooled it down a bit before I added the more volatile ingredients.

If you don't want to use the vodka you can still make the same thing but you'll have to keep it in the fridge.

 It's nice and thick and clingy and goopy and sticky and weird and wonderful.

It's been texturized for the last five years so right now I have

 the same amount of new growth as I do texturize about four and a half and four and a half inches.

 I'm planning the big chop at the end of the year but this works on my relaxed hair and it works

 I'm using a mason jar because every time I buy anything that comes in a glass jar I consider it

 Still haven't come up with a name but you want to find something that perhaps squirts or maybe a

 plastic container so that you can dispense it into your hand instead of sticking your hand into it.

 Hi, I'm Amy from Mod Podge Rocks, a crafting blog all about using Mod Podge.

 And I'm going to show you how to make the base of this decorative frame.

What I'm going to do is show you how to get a finished base like

 start with a water basin, a brayer, and I've got my Mod Podge brand brayer, actual Mod

 in your Mod Podge projects, I don't mind them, I actually kind of like them.

And you want to make sure that your paper fits your frame exactly

 because I've Mod Podge things down before that didn't fit and it was horrible.

 your frame from your paper, turn your paper over to the back side, take your brush, dip

 and I'm going kind of crazy, I'm not even pouring my Mod Podge in something else.

 spread your Mod Podge in a medium layer over the back of the paper.

 you can seal it to the finished project, and then you can use it like a varnish and

 Mod Podge is also completely water-based and non-toxic so you can use it with kids and

I'm taking the Mod Podge over to my frame and I'm going to add a layer

Now my first Mod Podge project was wrinkled and horrible and I wanted to

 and a frame is a great way to do that, you will love Mod Podge and you will be like me,

You know, it dries quickly actually so you want to kind of work quickly

So run it over the paper and you might see some Mod Podge squish

So see I'm running it over and over and I see a little corner coming

It actually darkens the paper a little bit and it goes on very opaque but it dries

You want to coat your entire project and get that good and covered.

 you've done the smoothing right and you've waited for the 15 to 20 minutes, you're not

 cat down here that I painted and I actually stenciled number 31 for Halloween.

If you want to spend less time cooking and more time eating, this

 small onion, olive oil, minced garlic, ground chicken or any ground meat of

 your choice, fish sauce, oyster sauce, black pepper, water, cornstarch, rice flour,

 spoon to break the meat into small pieces and combine everything together.

We're only partially cooking the meat and this should take less than

 minute it should start developing some lumps indicating that it's starting to

From here it's going to start thickening very very quickly so keep

When the dough becomes creamy turn off the heat but continue stirring.

 we put the bowl inside the steamer, cover the lid and allow it to steam for 20

And 20 minutes later our delicious steamed minced meat rice cake

 We're at the Great Food Exposition at River City Casino and we're looking at crab legs now.

 It's one of our favorite Friday night specials that our guests come in for.

 And I'm going to show you the quick and easy way to do these, okay?

 If you crack it at the knuckle, you can pull that in right out.

 These are crackers that we have here that a lot of other places also have.

 And you just want to squeeze slightly just enough to crack the shell

 And you're going to run it right up in there to finish separating the shell.

 Crack the joint, and you can actually pull out some of the meat with it sometimes.

 But I've got a lot of guests who come through, and they bring in their own scissors.

 And that way you can get in here and get the whole piece of meat right out of here.

 I'd like to thank everybody for all their comments on Facebook and stuff.

 I use these powders quite frequently, so I did notice some differences between the Cassia

The other thing I noticed was that the Cassia had a very distinctive

Fortunately the smell did not linger on my hair after rinsing off the

The third thing that I noticed about the Cassia is that after I rinsed it out my

 Ayurvedic powders, depending on the combination that I use, when I rinse out those powders

 and put all the product on my hair that I use for my twist outs my hair felt soft.

 only did my hair feel soft, it was so shiny I could not stop looking at my hair and I

 definitely something that I will keep as part of my hair regimen using it once a month.

 this steak at the farmer's market and it was so much better than the stuff I

 into strips first and from there I'm gonna cut them into small sections,

 distributed and what that's gonna do is give you that crisp coating so that

 I'm gonna add some extra oil and I want to use some brown sugar.

 gonna do is let that sit in the wok for a few minutes and it's going to simmer

 put some oil in the wok and let that get nice and hot and add your meat.

 gonna only have it in there for a few minutes but you're gonna get it brown.

 You're gonna get that crispy coating that we want and you're gonna put it

 and strong and delicious and it's really gonna give it some flavor.

 asked my family, of course they were all raving about it, and I put a camera in

 Hi, my name is Claire, welcome to the wonderful world of cake lace.

 In this tutorial I am going to teach you how to make 3D cake lace butterflies.

 The first thing we are going to do is we are going to use the gold premix.

 I am just going to stir it for a little bit, if it has been sitting in the pot for a while

 Now I am going to add it onto the mat and I am going to use the spreading knife and

 work it into all of the butterflies, making sure I eliminate any air bubbles.

 Once I have eliminated all the air bubbles I am going to use the spreading knife and

 Now I can place it into a preheated oven at 70 degrees for about 10 minutes.

 I am going to put 4 tablespoons of part A into a mixer with 50ml of water and mix with

 Once I have done that I am going to add part B which is the gel which keeps your cake lace

 If you are not going to use it straight away you can store it in an airtight container

 Place 1 teaspoon of white cake lace and 2 teaspoons of pearl together in a bowl and

 We use the white cake lace just to add a little bit of flexibility so the butterflies don't break.

 I now have the cooled butterfly mat, I am now going to add the mix we have just made,

 making sure that again I work into all the corners and eliminate any air bubbles and

 Then I am going to pop back into the oven at again 70 centigrade for about another 10

 In order to create our 3D butterflies we are going to use 70cm of kitchen foil.

 Fold over several times till we have about 5-6cm then we open back out to create a triangle.

 Remove the cooled butterflies from the mat and place onto the triangle.

 Remove and cool the butterflies, they are now ready to place onto your cake with royal

 To make white butterflies 3D use the mix of 1 teaspoon of white cake lace and 2 teaspoons

 of pearl mix into the butterfly mat first and then cook as before.

 Then add a second coat of pearl cake mix and follow the instructions from earlier to

 Thank you for watching this tutorial, I hope it inspires you to have a go.

 Please follow me on Facebook for new ideas and updates on our cake lace range.

 option and it can either form part of your midday snack or you can have it as a complete

Start with a teaspoon of the Knorr vinegar with paprika seasoning, the olive oil, just

 Next we're going to add some cumin seeds, about half a teaspoon of cumin seeds.

 I like to do with this is I like to just crush it a little bit so it gets a little bruised

 This is about 400 grams, a can of chickpeas, available everywhere.

 I've never worked out before, how do I get started, what's a good routine, what exercises

 So what I've done for you is I've put together a beginner's bodybuilding routine.

 So how it would work is this, Monday you would do routine one, Tuesday take the day off,

 let your body rest and recover, Wednesday come in and do routine two, Thursday day off,

 rest and recover, Friday start with routine one again and proceed in that fashion.

 What I also want you to do is aim for eight reps on each of those four reps for each exercise.

 So when you can get all four sets with eight reps, bump the weight up.

 Since you're a beginner, the weight should start to go up pretty quickly.

 Your body's going to at first be awkward doing the motions perhaps, but once it learns

 You know, you might be shaky at first for example, but once your nervous system learns

 the movements that you're doing, and once it gets more efficient at firing your muscles,

 you're going to be able to just, all that shakiness is going to go away and you'll start

 So I suggest, like I said, when you get to eight reps on all four of your sets, bump

 As you can see, I've listed the exercises that I would like you to perform.

 Notice that my back is staying straight at about a 45 degree angle.

 And my elbows are going back towards my hip, focusing on my lats.

 These are great for your hamstrings, for your glutes, and of course your lower back.

 If you're more flexible, you can do stiff leg deadlifts and they'll work the same muscles.

 You want to retract your shoulder blades, kind of like squeezing your shoulder blades

 together to really push it forward and push through your chest.

 As you can see, you're also going to work your arms, shoulders to a degree also.

 And bodyweight exercises are great for activating lots of muscle fibers.

 I know a lot of you guys always want to work abs, so I threw in an ab exercise at the end.

 Countless sit-ups and countless crunches will not build great abs.

 As you see, you have a wide stance and you grip the bar in between your legs.

 This variation will work your hamstrings, your glutes, your hips more than your lower

 So if you're tall like myself, I'm 6'1", this might be an easier form of the deadlift to

 As you see, my feet are about shoulder width apart and I'm gripping the bar outside of

 Notice my back still does stay straight, but it will put more stress on your lower back.

 Still hitting the glutes, still hitting the hamstrings, but just with a little extra stress

 You want to get a full range of motion on these because the bottom of the range of motion

 actually works your delts more, the top, you'll hit more triceps.

 This is another great leg exercise for just overall leg development.

 Again, you want to keep your weight when you're pushing back up in the lunge, keep it on the

 Same thing when you're doing squats, guys, through the heel of your foot.

 Really activates all the muscles in the back and you can really use a lot of weight.

 Like I said, body weight movements activate a greater degree of muscle fibers because

 If you didn't want to do weighted crunches, guys, and you want to do a little bit more

 These compound movements you're going to be doing as a beginner should provide all the

 arm muscle stimulation that you need to get some growth in your initial stages.

I have about three cups of spinach and about two cups of cherry tomatoes split

And I'm using linguine today but actually you can serve it over rice, wild

 I have here a pot of boiling water, salted boiling water and I'll just add on the linguine

 to the pasta and let it cook for about 8 to 10 minutes al dente while I'm preparing the

So while my pasta is cooking I'm going to heat up a frying pan with about

 2 to 3 tablespoons of olive oil and I would put it on medium to high heat and I'm going

I'm going to add on about an eighth of a teaspoon of crushed red pepper,

I'm going to add on a little bit more olive oil here, just a little bit more.

 And again, you don't want to let it brown, you do just very, very quickly in here.

 going to add on about 3 quarters of a cup white wine and let it simmer for a second.

 first as you would like and I like to give it a little spin here, just for about 30 seconds

 or so, just so the pasta wouldn't stick and just cook through the sauce nicely.

 Hi guys, today I'm going to show you how I did Giger's tribute chest piece.

 I did it with gelatin which is cheap, easy to use and you can even reuse it.

 The first thing I did was take putty or playdough putty and I started to shape it like a worm,

 I placed it on a flat surface and I started to shape that worm-like piece.

 The last part of the piece was very, very small and then the head part was very thick

 After the putty was smoothened out, I took a mini Kemper sculpting tool to start doing

 The tools I'm using are mini ribbon sculpting tools from Kemper and I'm using different

 I used the mini first and then I used a bigger one on the center and finished with the mini

 After all the shapes are done, I'm just scraping out some of the edges because I really do

 I know a lot of FX people are going to kill me, but I smoothen it out as much as I can.

 I know this will stop it from the plaster from adhering to the putty.

 Now I'm using a brush to get into all the crevices and all the parts of the shape that

 I'm just going to tap or make some movements so all the bubbles will go out and so the

 I'm just using the brush to keep it simple and I'm just adding different coats.

 Add them before the plaster dries and afterwards you can remove the wall we built.

 As you can see, since I applied the spray, the cooking spray, everything just went out

 After the mold is clean, I mix two parts gelatin, two parts glycerin and one part water.

 I mix this up and put it in the microwave so it was hot and then I poured it into the

 Since I was going to apply this on my chest and I had a flat part, I just used a flat

 After it had cooled down and dried or hardened, I applied some powder.

 This you could use any kind of powder, face powder, foot powder, whatever and just remove

 You can clean this out and remove some of the edges just by tearing it.

 I will be uploading how I did the head piece after this one so stay tuned.

 We're going to do a dance right now called Whiskey Well, which goes to a Max Stilwell

 And it's a fun song, great tune, and we're going to do a dance to it right now.

 So I'm going to turn around, we're going to show you how this dance goes.

 We're going to start with a shuffle side rock step going to our right wall.

 So leading with the right foot step, side together, side, and then rock back on the

 To finish this eight count, I want to step side together and then shuffle side.

 So we're going to go five together, six, and then shuffle seven and eight.

 Five, six, shuffle side, rock with the right, one and two, rock three, side together, five,

 We're going to do a rocking chair, rocking back on the right, one, replace the weight

 forward, two, rock forward on the right, three, replace the weight back, four.

 So the first wall we go by, we're going to look at it, five, and say, okay, we'll be

 right back, we're going to turn another full turn, six, shuffle seven and eight, and we

 All right, so let's put that eight count, let's do that eight count again.

 The rocking chair first, rocking back on the right, one, replace, two, rock forward, three,

 From here we've got an easy eight count, just going to cross rock, shuffle side, cross rock,

 Cross your left foot over and rock one, replace, two, side shuffle, three and four, cross rock,

 five, six, side shuffle, seven and eight, and the weights on the right.

 Let's put those three eight counts together before we give you the final eight count.

 Remember, we start with the right, shuffle side, rock, side together, shuffle side, five,

 six, ready to the right, shuffle one and two, rock three, side together, five, then

 shuffle, now the rocking chair, rock one, two, rock forward, three, turn in a quarter,

 five, six, shuffle, seven, cross rock, shuffle, one, two, three and four, again, five, six,

 So the last eight count, we're going to touch that left toe forward, one, side two, quickly

 switch and touch the right toe, side three, touch forward, four, then we're going to touch

 straight back on five, unwind a half turn, await that right foot, six, stop your left

 foot for seven, clap, eight, ready with the right foot, starting the dance over again,

 All right, let's try that eight count facing this wall, the last eight count.

 So we're touching our left toe forward on one, side two, and touch side three, forward

 four, straight back, five, half turn, six, stop, seven, clap, eight, you'd stop the dance

 So let's put all four eight counts together from the beginning, shuffle side, rock five,

 six, ready to the right, one and two, rock three, side together, five, six, shuffle seven

 and rocking chair, one, two, three, full in a quarter, five, six, shuffle, seven, cross

 rock, shuffles, one, two, shuffle, three and four, five, six, seven, toe touches, forward,

 side and side, forward, back turn a half, stop and clap, and we begin one and two, rock

 Right now we're going to start doing our dinner for today and also I have the whole entire

 I have it packed with all of the baked items I have to fix start for Christmas.

 We have four days before Christmas but I'm starting early not just for my family but

 I'm starting early because Nene has some little gift bags that she wants to give out and we're

 going to put gifts in it and also we have these nice boxes that I bought from CVS.

 If you look on the CVS in Walgreens Hall and we're going to put homemade cookies in those.

 So I'm going to show you how to make several different cookies so hopefully you find that

 helpful and hopefully it's in time enough so that you can fix them for the holidays as well.

 Right now, as of right now, we're going to fix some honey mustard barbecue buffalo wings

 and we're going to fix some other things with it but I'm going to show you how you actually

 These wings are not the type of wings that you want to use flour with because when you

 go into restaurants or you order out, this is how they actually fix them.

 If you want to know how they fix wings when you order them from your local sub shop or

 Making sure all of the liquid and moisture is out of the wings.

 And we're going to start with our seasonings and start layering those.

 You're simply going to toss this around to make sure the seasoning is coating all of

 As you can see, I didn't use any salt and that's because this Memphis barbecue seasoning

 It's somewhat of a seasoned salt but not as much as potent as far as with the salt.

 You're going to take your tongs and then, like I said, just lightly toss those, making

 Before I started this video and as we were talking, I have the oil cooking and heating

 And like I said in all my videos when I fry chicken, you want to make sure that when your

 chicken is dropped in, it bubbles up because that's the temperature without using a thermometer

 If you throw your chicken in before it's to a certain temperature, it's going to make

 You can also tell besides dropping the chicken in, it has some bubbles floating around in

 And once it comes to the temperature that you need it, you're going to just drop your

 And the reason for that is because we don't want to make it into a fried chicken per se

 And then we're going to toss it in our sauce and then add our sauce and some little bit

 But again, then you're going to be creating a fried chicken crust.

 And that's why when you buy buffalo wings, whether it's in a store already done, like

 Tyson or whatever, or if you get it from a sub shop, it doesn't have a whole bunch of

 And this is also giving it some opportunity while the heat, the grease is coming to a

 boil, it's also giving an opportunity for those seasonings to marinate into this chicken.

 And your chicken should look like this once it's covered on both sides.

 By using the tongues, ladies, you don't have very minimum contact with the chicken, which

 Once you throw the wings into the grease, you want to wash this so that when you get

 the done wings out, you're not transferring any bacteria from it being, you know, raw

 You're going to fry it till it gets a golden brown, and I will show you how to toss it

 So that's one egg and one egg yolk, preferably at room temperature.

 And then we're going to need about a tablespoon of Dijon style mustard.

 Then we're going to take one and a half tablespoons of lemon juice.

 we're going to add a tablespoon or a tablespoon and a half of whey.

 You add this and your mayonnaise will last for two or three months instead of two or three weeks.

 We're going to add some salt probably at the end to taste, a pinch or two.

 I started off with a third of a cup of canola oil, just for fun.

 Okay, so we've measured out one whole cup of lipids or oils, a mixture we have today.

 And what we're going to do is mix up what we've already got in the blender for about 30 seconds.

 And this little thing here, which comes with the blender, it's got a little hole in the end.

It's actually designed for dripping oil in because you want to make an emulsion.

 Now, the only question remains is how I'm going to get it into this bottle.

 So what I'll do is I'm going to spoon it into a jar and just cover that jar, a cupboard jar, and leave it for about 8 hours.

But if you haven't put whey in, then just put it in a jar and put it straight in the refrigerator.

 Hello again YouTubers, welcome to another Beyblade unboxing video brought to you by

 I of course am, me in all three of eBay and YouTube, and owner of ToyGameEmporium.com.

 It includes everything you need to battle, a Super Vortex Beystadium, two exclusive Beyblade

 Metal Fusion tops, two Ripcord launchers, 24 Terminator grids and official rulebook,

 and two collector cards with codes inside so you can battle online at BeybladeBattles.com.

 So I know I can't like zoom out far enough or get far enough away to have it all in view,

 but when showing the actual Beyblades and stuff we'll have it be easier to see.

 You can visit my hub page and squadoo lens about Beyblade Metal Fusion.

 And if you're looking to buy any Beyblades you can check my eBay store, my Amazon store,

 So links for those can also be found for some of them in the description box below and other

 First we'll show you the stadium here, which I think I used in a recent video actually.

 Constantly balance up and hit eye or face for use with Beyblade tops only.

 So apparently they don't want you using battle strikers or any other sort of tops in these.

 It's got no knockout zones or anything then, so it's a little bit smaller than some of

 I haven't done any battle videos lately because what I would like to do is get one of the

 Japanese stadiums, the clear one probably, and use those for future battle videos.

 Once I do that I may actually start doing daily videos, either unboxing a single Beyblade

 So if you want to see a lot of Beyblade battles, make sure to subscribe and give this video

 And here are two tops, the Storm Pegasus and Lightning El Drago.

 So they're the same as the regular tops, only they have different colors.

 And from what I've seen in some other people's reviews, the paint on these chip a lot more

 So after just one or two battles, they'll have a lot of visible wear.

 So I'm not going to actually demonstrate how these ones battle, but in the future I'll

 probably unbox the regular ones of each of these and do battle videos with those.

 So I think that the only place you can get this stuff is in these Super Vortex Battle

 I've got 24 pages here of tournament sheets, so they're all the same.

 So you don't need official pads like this to keep track of such a bracket, but if you

 want to be official or whatever you want to say, I guess you need these.

 I've opened literally at least two dozen of these stadiums already, just selling the single

 And then we've got the rulebook, which I'm not going to go over in depth, but that's

 We've got the two cards, which have the codes on the other side.

 And then each of these just shows the assembly instructions for each individual bay.

 Base bolt, energy ray, infusion wheel, spin track, performance tip.

 So unless you want to take it apart, which I'm sure many do in mix and match parts, you

 don't need the assembly instructions necessarily because it's already put together.

 And then on the back it shows you how to launch, let it rip, and some battle tips and triple

 And obviously the El Drago one's the same, only it shows the different pieces in that,

 And it also comes with the two launchers and ripcords, of course.

 Kind of hard to get them straightened out, but you have to use them a little bit.

 So sometimes just to kind of straighten it out a little bit, you just kind of want to

 feed it in and out of the launcher a few times to start getting it straightened out a bit.

 And it's not going to do a whole ton right away, but it starts to straighten out a little

 bit so you don't have such an abrupt turn right there and have it get snagged or something.

 This one actually, as you put the ripcord in the other way, with the teeth down, so

 you can see the El Drago teeth up and the Storm Pegasus teeth down.

 El Drago has the opposite rotation, of course, as if nothing else many of you probably know

 They're still going to, unless you use hot and cold water or something like that, they're

 going to have at least some sort of curve to them, probably forever.

 But anywho, I don't know if it matters which tool goes with which, but when I sell these,

 I always include the red one with El Drago and the green one with Storm Pegasus.

 Figures match the colors on those and I don't want it to be Christmas-y.

 So maybe I should start mixing them up when I sell them and ship them, but that's how

 I've never even tried to take any of these out of here, but not too hard.

 Hi, my name is Tommy and we're going to talk about doing diatonic arpeggios up and down

 So what I like to do instead of just playing the scale up and down, which is important,

 it's nice to do the scale and arpeggios, which means that you're starting with one chord,

 Also we'll get into doing a little bit of crosshatching with those arpeggios, which

 means that we're going to go up one chord and then down the other.

 The first exercise is G major, A minor, B minor, C major, D major, E minor, F sharp

 So it's good to know what the chord is that you're playing rather than just learning the

 And this is all based on the harmonized major scale, which is G, A minor, B minor, C major,

 Now I like to add slides and slurs and things like that to make it a little more interesting.

 And then when you actually do it in a solo, you're not going to go right down the scale.

 Prepare your taste buds for the most delicious salmon patty you'll ever make.

 It's an easy recipe you can enjoy for breakfast, lunch, or dinner.

 First, to a blender, let's add in chunks of raw boneless salmon, wheat breadcrumbs, garlic, some smoked paprika,

 squeeze a little bit of lemon juice, and a pinch or two of sea salt and pepper.

 Dump the contents into a bowl and toss in some chopped green onions and chopped jalapenos for a little kick.

 Once the patties are formed, I recommend placing them in the fridge or freezer for about 20 minutes so they can harden up just a bit.

 Toss the salmon patties in a nonstick skillet on medium-high heat with a little bit of coconut oil.

 We're going to cook on both sides for five minutes until the outside is brown and the edges are crispy.

 And just that easy, you have a delicious salmon patty that you can enjoy for any meal.

 So, to sprouted wheat buns, we're going to add Dijon, goat cheese, lettuce, tomato, some red onion, fresh lemon juice,

 a pinch of sea salt and pepper, and our beautiful salmon patty.

 Check out fitmencook.com to get the full recipe or you can download the Fit Men Cook app for more easy, healthy and tasty recipes.

 So the reason why I had to learn how to do this was because when we were in the military

 overseas, a lot of times we would run out of ingredients and I had to improvise.

 I think the simplest thing is to put your one cup of sugar in your food processor, warm

 up your molasses just a little bit, and then when the food processor is going, you'll pour

 So for light brown sugar, it's one and a half teaspoons of molasses to one cup of sugar.

 For a dark brown sugar, you'll use a quarter of a cup molasses to one cup of granulated

 So this is the light brown sugar, which was one and a half teaspoons of molasses and one

 It's not going to mix up perfectly the same as you would get it in the package, honestly

 just because they have a whole process they go through, but this will give you the exact

 But what I'm going to do is I'm going to turn this into a dark brown sugar really quick

 So this is the dark brown sugar, which is a quarter cup of molasses, just plain old molasses.

 I warmed it up just a touch and I poured it into the top of my processor.

 So this is the dark brown sugar, and the one thing to remember, it's a little bit more

 golden or amber than your store bought processed brown sugar because there's a whole different

 process they go through and they have a little bit more in the ingredients than just brown

 But it's going to still give you that same rich flavor that brown sugar adds and what

 So this is the end product of the brown sugar, homemade brown sugar.

I feel my whole body is all, the throat, it's all cleaned up and opened up,

 that freshness and opened up the nasal, the nasal and everything.

 particularly with this, because we're going to need quite a bit

 If you're not familiar with tahini, which I'm sure a lot of you are,

 And then we're going to put about a tablespoon and a half of white onions.

 And then we're going to do probably about two cloves of garlic.

 Culinary Healing, 5-Minute Recipes for Health, Happiness, and Beauty,

 This is a recipe I got from an old friend on a BBQ forum, Brian Stevens.

 It's the chicken you smell when you're going down the highway and you see the roadside

 chicken stands and the chicken just smells fantastic as you're driving by and it's very

 Now the original recipe on this one also calls for celery salt and it calls for white pepper.

 Alright after whizzing our marinade in our little NutriBullet, we're going to go ahead

 We're going to go ahead and put these into a plastic container.

 Alright we have all our chicken in there so now we're going to go ahead and pour in our

 So we're going to let this marinate for a couple of hours and we're going to shake it

 Alright our chicken has been soaking for about two, two and a half hours.

 We're going to start it over direct coals and this is one of those dishes you're going

 So we're going to go ahead and start this off skin side down real quick.

 You see all that steam coming off there, that's what's giving the chicken all its flavor.

 Once we put the lid on it's going to steam all that flavor inside the chicken.

 Alright here's where we start adding the layers and layers of flavor on this chicken.

 We're going to go ahead and start basting this directly over the coals.

 This is going to produce a lot of steam and a lot of smoke from the oil and the vinegar

 The more you do this the more flavor you're going to have in your chicken.

 Alright we're back at the chicken and we're going to go ahead and baste it one more time

 Yes this process gets a little redundant on this but it's well well worth it.

 Alright that's about all the basting that's needed so we're going to go ahead and put

 The chicken's probably got about another 5, 6, 7 minutes to go until it's thoroughly cooked

 Let's go ahead and get this plattered up and we'll be right back.

 Let's go ahead and give this a bite and see how it turned out here.

 Hey y'all, I was asked to make a video showing how to make some venison jerky.

 Just get your flavorings in there and your marinades and you can put it straight onto

 First thing to do is just simply to get all your meat laid out.

 I kind of covered that hole when I first started up a little bit just to warm that up quicker.

 You can see how some of that still looks wet and some is starting to dry.

 I'm just going to flip everything over and condense it if we can.

 Rotate your trays from bottom to top so everything dries evenly in there.

 It'll really start picking up pace when the moisture gets off of all that.

 If you just go one to the top and one to the bottom, then you're always going to have the

 This stuff's cut a little bit too thick for what I really should have done.

 Rotate them from the inside of the tray to the outside of the tray too if you can because

 What I'm going to start doing now is just pushing all the pieces closer together and

 Alright folks, it's been two hours since the last time I checked it.

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to go through and squeeze the pieces.

 You want to keep on cooking it until it's hard when you pinch it.

 I'm going to rip off the cooked piece and put the uncooked back.

 Five minutes, this seven hours worth of work is going to be gone.

 You dry it too hard to begin with, when you take it out, you let it sit on the plate.

 At this point folks, if you want it too soft, you might as well just pull it all off.

 He's going to try the jerky out and let you all know how it is.

 You know, soy sauce and Italian dressing, I mean, whatever you want to do.

 But I found that with Bill's Spice, with that seasoning sauce in it,

 that it just, the flavor lasts in your mouth long, long after you finish that piece of jerky.

 We've been watching a movie for about two hours, I ate two pieces through that.

of the World and today I'm going to be showing you how to remove

 you've probably noticed that the paintwork is a little bit sloppy and it doesn't really

Now when you do this, be very careful because you don't want to remove the paint

 from other parts of the figures because then you'll have to paint it on again and you could

So if you follow this and it doesn't work for you and you end up ruining

 they've kind of messed up the paintwork is on this Bernadette figure.

 see by her eye there's like an extra eyelash on her right eye and also on her skirt which

 be using a normal pair of tweezers and you have to be really careful when you do this.

 Just take them and just gently rub onto the paint and it will scratch it off.

 Now as you're doing this, just swipe it away and you've got to be really careful that you're

 not digging at it because the paint is on in layers so only try to scrape the first

 layer of paint which would be the black which has gone wrong in this case.

 too hard you could end up scraping off some of this skin coloured paint that's underneath

 it will take quite a bit of time depending on how bad the defect is.

 clear on the camera for some reason, but there is a black, white and grey splodge and you

 just repeat the same steps with them and then eventually it will go the same with her

Now sometimes when you buy a pop you might notice that the paint is actually scratched

 specks of white where they've not really painted it on properly and the only way to really

 but I would strongly suggest putting some sort of varnish over the top of it so it doesn't

The same sort of thing has happened on the hairband of one of her bunches and

 did then give it a thumbs up and please subscribe if you haven't already.

 for videos so if you have one then please just pop it in the comments below and I'll

 G'day guys, Greg's Kitchen time once again and today I thought I'd show you how to make

 one of the world's most popular sandwiches, the BLT, Bacon, Lettuce and Tomato.

 Now these require hardly any ingredients yet you're getting maximum flavour from a sandwich

 Okay so for a BLT all you're going to need is some B for Bacon, L for Lettuce, this one's

 an iceberg one, oh and look mine came with a free moth, a tomato, aka Tomato, yeah USA!

 Some good quality mayonnaise, now you want to use the whole egg mayonnaise ones, not

 Okay well out of all this the bacon is the one that takes the longest to cook so I'm

 just going to cut this in half because the bacon here in Australia is humongous and what

 Medium heat, I'm going to put some olive oil onto there and start cooking this bacon so

 So while that bacon's cooking I'm just going to slice my tomato up into slices that you

 Now Mr Moth I'm sorry but we're not eating you today so I'm just going to take some of

 this moth ridden worm eaten lettuce and I'm going to give it a wash first because it is

 Right now that's done, if you want you can tear it into smaller pieces or you can slice

 Who's got time for that because now I've got to just throw this in the toaster and get

 You do actually want it that golden-y colour, that's the best way to have it, nice and crisp.

 Okay well now that toast is done what I'm going to do is add some of the mayonnaise,

 I'm going to throw it on both sides because I like mayonnaise and I'm not using butter

 today, yes I know, write that down in the comments where's the butter like you always

 Now most people will say, make sure that you drain all the fat off, but I'm not, oh, that's

 But as I was saying, I'm not like most people, so leave the fat on I say.

 So, it's called a bacon, lettuce and tomato, so that's the order that I'm going to put

 If sensational was a word, I'd use that to describe how good this tastes.

 Oh man, that tastes absolutely sensational, it's just, oh, so Moorish, you really do have

 Rightio guys, well, thanks for watching, remember to thumb this video up, or down if you thought

 Thanks for watching, and I'll see you next time right here, on Greg's Kitchen!

 Yeah, this is Greg's Kitchen, where the BLT tastes absolutely amazing, you really do have

 Okay, so this is the fabric that we'll be using on our slipcover.

 Now, because we're slipcovering a Haida bed, it's a little bit trickier.

 We have to be able to remove the unit so that you can sleep on the bed,

 Now, if you're wondering how we remove the bed without touching the slipcover,

 Okay, so this is the deck area, and what we've done is we've sewn a zipper around the inside perimeter.

 And we merely pull this flap back, and that exposes our bed unit,

 The person outside of the ball signals to the actor inside that the middle ball is in position.

 You can also see a little shadow where there's a magnet that the coal attaches to.

 Then pull down the neck and the trap door on the top of the head.

 There are two shiny black plastic eyes that go on either side of the carrot with the magnets.

 There is also a Velcro strap inside to help hold the arms in place.

 The scarf has two magnets on the bottom of the scarf on the knot.

 Those are attached to magnets to the right of the center on the snowman.

 Then as you work your way around you can put Velcro in the back.

 The hat then slides in and sits on the top to the back of the snowman's head.

 By putting their hands inside there is a pocket so the top lip can go inside the bottom lip.

 You can place the index and middle finger into one side of the mouth.

 To move you want to walk with your hips or your body pressed against the ledge of the bottom and middle ball.

 What I'm going to talk about today is just really basically looking at setting up the

 kit and making sure that you are comfortable with your instrument when you set up behind

 And one of the first things to make sure of is that when you sit down, you're not actually

 And it's also important to make sure that your posture is good.

 The second thing then is also determining where the pedals are.

 And I think it's important to make sure that the pedals are not too far away from you and

 This helps with your control of the pedals and also it helps with your balance.

 I think then the third important thing is making sure that you're happy with the height

 And because I play traditional grip, my snare drum is usually a little higher on this side

 So what I like to do is to make sure that I've got the height of the snare drum correct

 is to play a, say, foot pattern and then play a paradiddle or some sort of accented exercise

 My knees are not getting in the way of my hands as my feet are moving upwards and my

 The next thing is obviously making sure that you can hit the drums without having to reach

 Apart from the fact that some people are setting up their drums too far away, I think a lot

 So one of the things to keep in mind is making sure that you don't have to reach too far

 to hit anything and also make sure that you are not too compact.

 So here's an example of the sort of thing that I would practice here.

 It's just moving around the drum set at slow tempo, try to be as relaxed as possible.

 Obviously the next part of that is making sure that you can play time comfortably as

 So, you know, right hand for a right handed drummer, right hand on the hi-hat, left hand

 I always talk to students about imagining that they're sitting in the driver's seat

 of a car and making sure that you don't have to reach too far for the gear stick or the

 You know, you need to be as comfortable as possible so that there's nothing getting in

 It's back to school time and in the interest of making the most of your cramped space,

 I'm going to show you how to cook eggs without using a conventional stove, oven, or microwave.

 We're going to be using an As Seen on TV product called the Roli Egg Master.

 Based on my experience in my own kitchen, I think Roli left out random stove explosions

 You will need two eggs, some nonstick cooking spray, and the Roli.

 It'll take the Roli about two minutes to warm up after you plug it in.

 And while you're waiting, you can spray in some nonstick cooking spray.

 Alternatively, you can drop in one egg and then some fillings like some bacon bits or

 ham or diced onions, whatever you want to put in your tubular omelet.

 Roli includes five wooden skewers you can use to make some sort of egg on a stick concoction,

 As far as taste goes, we've got eggs in the microwave, Roli, a little rubbery, and then

 I may be a 34-year-old technology blogger, but that doesn't mean that I don't enjoy a

 Honestly, not the best tasting eggs in the history of eggs, but far easier than making

 them in the microwave if you don't have a stove and easy cleanup.

 Perfect for a dorm room or a room in a house you share with 17 other college students and

 you don't want to interact with any of them because you've just had enough.

 You want to go home to Minneapolis where your family is and you have a car and your

 girlfriend is still in high school and you just want to get away from it all.

 And right now we're ready to do the final solder on a few of our wire connections here.

 The wire's been twisted together kind of in a small quarter of an inch area, maybe close

 Once that cools, as you can see we have a really good connection there, cools down right

 So what you got now is you want to solder them together, all of your connections, because

 what ends up happening is if you just butt connect things and use the little clips you

 get in some of the other kits, you know, you got a chance of wires loosening up or

 What we're going to do now is slide the heat shrink tube up, and we've already assembled

 Keeps the wires from shorting out now against each other on the other connections.

 And you can too, which we haven't done here, it's nice to maybe sometimes stagger your

 connections, but these connections are so small and so petite that really you don't

 But we're going to do the same procedure from this procedure on the other end, which will

 So this can be hooked back into your wiring harness of your bike.

 So one thing you might be able to try and do, we have a nice industrial type heat gun.

 You might be able to try a home hair dryer, which it might get hot enough.

 I've never done it, but I think it could work for your heat shrink.

 And another thing you can use too is a lighter, a regular Bic lighter, and just keeping it

 I've heard of guys using the other little butt connectors and they just have problems

 so showing you how to use your thumb and fingers and how to add in some of the percussive taps.

 Left hand we're just going to do a few open chords, we'll show you those as we're going

But let's start by showing you how to use the thumb and the fingers on the right

The thumb will generally play the E, A and the D strings, the low strings.

 the fingers, we're going to use three fingers, the index, middle and ring finger, your first,

The index finger generally plays the G string, middle finger generally

 plays the B string and the ring finger will play the top E string.

 of variation in that, so do think of that just as a guide, but there will be times when

 to just pluck the bottom string and then I'm going to play two fingers together.

 to use my index and middle on the G and the B string and they're going to pluck together.

 So it's a bit like a pinch or like a pluck, just as they pull the strings up a bit.

 and just one finger and get used to a rhythm that way or you could even use all three fingers.

 down for this first rhythm because we're just playing the open strings around the fingering,

 but we'll keep the E minor fingers down for a moment because we're going to embellish

 on E minor, you'll get one and two and three and four and change to G, one, two, three,

So that's your first exercise to get used to using the right hand, just keeping

 E minor chord again, thumb, two fingers and then the thumb hits the A string and then

 the two open chords again, starting on E minor and then to G, you'd get a rhythm that would

 start one and two and three and four and then to G, one and two, three, four.

 sound or just to fill out the chord a bit more, try using all three fingers on the right

 chord, I'm going to start on the E string, alternate to the A string and then even the

 if I'm playing E minor chords, I can keep that variation with the thumb moving across

 to any of the A chords, either open A or open A minor, my thumb has to start on the A string.

 It's always good to start with your root notes, which is the first note of the chord, lowest

So for the A one, you can actually move down through the strings

You get A and then to the D string, back to the A and hit a low E will fit with

If I'm doing a C chord, you can move through the A and the D strings.

 I thought of doing another baking recipe that you can try during the weekend or even this

 For this recipe I am using, for the chicken mix I am using some chicken thighs diced,

 one stock cube and one large onion and I am going to fry that and then I have half a cup

 of milk with quarter a cup of plain flour that's for the chicken filling.

 Then I have 375 grams of bread flour with one egg, 215 ml of water, 6 grams of yeast

 and 15 grams of sugar, 40 grams of butter that is for the dough.

 So to start this recipe add the flour into the mixing bowl and then break the egg and

 Now into the flour and egg mix I am going to add the sugar and the yeast and going to

 mix this while adding the warm water and after several minutes I am going to add the salt

 and then I am going to knead this continuously about 5 minutes and going to add the butter

 While kneading the dough I am going to do the chicken, for that I am adding 1 tablespoon

 of margarine and into that going to add the onion, you can add oil instead of margarine.

 Into the onion going to add the salt and pepper and continue cooking 2 minutes.

 When the onions are tender going to add the chicken and the stock cube and continue cooking

 When the dough is ready put that into a greased bowl and leave in a warm place until double

 So I cooked the chicken about 20 minutes and it is almost ready.

 So what I am going to do is going to add the flour and cook that with the flour adding

 You can reduce the milk or add extra milk too and cook that about another 2-3 minutes

 When you add the flour make sure you add little by little to make it thicker, don't add the

 So I am going to leave this to cool down until the dough is ready.

 When the dough is double in size put some flour onto the bench top and punch the dough

 This dough is a bit sticky dough so always make sure that you flour the hands.

 After flour the dough and punch it down and cut that into equal parts or equal size portions.

 After that make balls out from the dough and leave it again covered on the bench top about

 After the dough has rested while take the balls out and flatten it or you can use a

 rolling pin or flatten it using your palm and then take a spoon full of the chicken

 mix and put it into the middle and then slowly secure the edges like this and press it down.

 Leave it on the bench top, use your palm and roll it nicely and then leave them on baking

 The chicken rolls are ready to go to the oven so I am going to brush the tops with

 milk and eggs and this goes to the oven 180 about 20 to 30 minutes.

 The chicken and onion rolls are ready and it's really nice and soft and moist and you

 can put them in the freezer without a problem for several weeks or even 1 to 2 months and

 I cut one to show you how it looks like and hope you will enjoy this.

 Ladies, do you have those days when you're on your own and you feel that the only thing that will really satisfy you is a good muffin?

 For my basic muffin mix, I've got 2 eggs, 125 g or half a cup of butter,

 2 cups of flour, 1 cup of sugar, half a cup of milk, 2 teaspoons of baking powder

 Once you've got your basic muffin mix, you can add what you like.

 and into the right half, I'm gonna add 125 g of blueberries to make blueberry muffins

 and in the left one, I'm gonna add 200 g of chocolate chips to make chocolate chip muffins

 Finally, I'm gonna add in half a teaspoon of vanilla essence into each half.

 I've lightly greased a muffin tin and I'm gonna put some blobs of mixture into each little hole.

 For this week at least, I know I can have a good muffin any time I need one.

Click on the thumbnail to the left or click on the subscribe button to the right.

 My portion of a little a little portion of a movie called eternal youth.

 I also want to update you and my book that I'm so proud of my wonderful book now

 If you have a local bookstore you like to shop at go in there and ask them for it

 So you can support your local bookstore and if you want an autographed copy and the necklace

 so you can look over there and also the recipe for today will be there and

 And I'm getting great response from everybody on my Facebook page and all kinds of accolades about the recipes and I know it just makes me

 One other thing though if you ever bought anything on Amazon before you can go on and review my book

 You just sign in and then it allows you to go there and review the book

 So today I'm actually going to make something from the book and it was Mike's request because he says it's summertime and it's hot everywhere

 And he thought a nice cool drink would be great and there's a drink several drinks.

 Mocktails so today I'm making a macarita, you know the margarita and

 It's very simple and it's really quite delicious and you can use any kind of fruit you want

Also, I don't know if you've received the book if you've taken a look

 I have asked I asked ten chefs who I love to give me a little recipe

 For the drink section for the smoothie section and in here you'll find one from Sarma who owns the pure food and wine in New York

 Edo wonderful Edo from a lock cafe if you're raw or vegan you've heard of that place

 International chef Matthew Kenny of 105 degrees and of course his own fame Sherry Soria from the Living Light Institute

 My daughter Mia because she's one of my favorite chefs raw chef Dan who's from quintessence in New York really delicious restaurant and

 They gave me a recipe too, so there's ten chef recipes in here that I think are quite delicious

 But today I'm gonna make this margarita and I'm gonna have to turn my blender on here

 So you can use papaya you can use mango or you can use pineapple anything any kind of margarita that you used to like

 I'm gonna put in a cup of pineapple because I think that's about the right amount and I've got a quarter of a lime here

 We're not looking for a full drink because we're gonna add some things to it

 I have one orange that Mike picked off the tree for me just a few minutes ago

 Maybe but anyway you take your I usually do it with the fruit inside of it

 But I'm just gonna show you a little bit you just and I think I have this on my site this little zester

 There's different kinds of zesters, but I like this it's like a baby grater

 This is like what I use for like Parmesan cheese or something when I used to eat that many years ago

 So we're just gonna put a little bit in just a little bit of the zest

 It really makes it nice gives it a really nice flavor and one little squirt depending on your sweetness

 I'm just gonna do one little squirt depending what you like agave or any sweetener you like and then we're gonna put in some ice

 We want to make a slush this is my least favorite part having to turn this

 I'm gonna add a little more ice because I like this a little thick slush

 Perfect to me you can do it more you can leave a little ice in there, which I like okay now

 Margarita my macarita glass, and I'm gonna put just I'm gonna do a little half thing of

 Himalayan salt on here, so I've got a lime and then I have a little glass with some salt

 I'm just gonna touch the end so it gets a little bit of the salt on here

 But it gives you a little bit of taste see that how pretty that is

 And you can make your own and I might give you a recipe for that shortly when Mia comes

 We might put a batch up, and I'll let you see it if we have time to do that

 But anyway you can buy this at any health food store, and you can get it online

 And it's so good for you, and it's easy to drink the whole bottle

 But you should just drink a little at a time for your stomach, but it's so delicious

 I use it in a lot of my margaritas because it's got a little fermenting makes a little bit of alcoholic taste to it

 And I'm going to use any kind of sparkling mineral water that you like

 Am going to actually taste this one because I love this so much

 That's really delicious, then you can put a little garnish in which I always love this has got

 Pineapple and lime a little garnish you can float flowers in here

 And I think I'm going to do just a little touch more of this because this will look nice it floats on top a little bit

 So I want you all to take really good care of yourself, and if you can just replace one meal

 That's not so healthy for you with a meal that is healthy for you

 I use this in a shot glass all the time when people come in the house and give them a little shot of this and

They think it's a great drink and I don't know maybe I've talked myself into it

 But every time I have a little of this I think I'm a little tipsy, but it might be a little tipsy anyway

 Well, that's a great summer drink, and there's several more in the book that you're going to love

 But this one's a really nice party drink to make and it's very festive

 It's a great gift for people, and I'm very happy to have it out and have such good response, and I love you all so much

 Oh one more thing if you want to subscribe to the YouTube the YouTube channel

 That has all my videos on it you can go there and subscribe Mike puts everything up for me

 And so you can subscribe to it that means I think you get noticed notified when this yeah

 You'll get notified when there's a new video on there, so maybe you'd like to do that alright.

 The next step in the process is to join the exterior mitered rails, there are three of

 Now normally when we do a miter joint with dull max, dull max is configured perpendicular

 to the miter and therefore the dulls are perpendicular to the face, so when you fit it together it

 Now we can't do that in this particular case simply because when we join dull max we have

 to keep the dull which will go into the miter in the same axis as these three dulls.

 Now I've found a simple way to get around that problem, first of all we place our workpieces

 together, we want to reference this transverse piece so we reference from the rear face,

 we put the check marks on the two edges, the two faces and X's on the surfaces to be

 Now we then drill these three holes, either I've used the extended distance gauge or you

 Now after you've drilled them we now put, we dry fit the transverse miter joint, now

 note that you have to leave, this is 3 eighths of an inch wide so we have to leave a 3 eighths

 of an inch extension to allow for the miter which I've marked here as you can see.

 Now once that's on we know we're referenced here but this cannot be changed now and we

 now fit dull max, once again referencing from the top, we fit dull max firmly against this

 face here, this is now our reference face and we clamp and in this particular case I've

 drilled in number 2 guides which goes in through and beyond the diagonal here, in this case

 we have to drill into this surface about 2 inches to go beyond the diagonal.

 That's complete and also what we can do at this stage is we now know for sure our reference

 mark here, put a fine line on this edge in here where it meets the edge of the table

 I've used 3 quarter inch dulls here, or inch and a half dulls, penetrating 3 quarter, but

 Now what we do with the longitudinal panel, this is very similar, we have to allow again,

 this is 3 inches wide so we have to allow a 3 inch extension on each end of the rail

 Now I've used the dull max in its maximum position to reference these, there's 2, 4,

 6, 8, 10 along the front and then we'll dry fit it, now we only want to dry fit it with

 some dulls, not all dulls because we'll have trouble getting it adrift.

 Now in this particular case as you can recall we referenced from the edge of the table top

 here, now all we have to do in this case is once again reference from the top, secure

 it flush with this edge here, and then number 2 again and we drill in a bit further this

 time we have to drill in 2 and 3 quarter inches into this longitudinal part to get

 Now when you've finished you'll have a section rather than this diagonal section shown here,

 you'll have a section which is like that, so when the miters are cut the joint will

 Once again before we begin the miter we put a very fine line on the edge here to signify

 Hey everybody, today I'm gonna show you how to make some roasted red potatoes.

 So what I got here is a casserole dish and I hadn't counted them but I think that's about

 So the first thing I do is add me about three or four tablespoons of olive oil, okay, and

 And we're gonna get in here now with our spatula and we're gonna try to get a little bit of

 That does two things, stops the stickin' so bad, you know what I'm sayin'?

 I took them out and I'm stirrin' them again and I'm gonna put them in again at 400 degrees

 Now time's up, that's a full 70, seven zero minutes of cooking time.

 I just didn't have anything green and I wanted some, you know what I'm sayin'?

 This is an awesome side dish, as I'm sure you know, because anyone that's had wonderful

 new potatoes or red potatoes as they call them here in Texas will know that they're

 And when you come in, make you some of these red potatoes, okay?

 Hey guys it's Simon here from OneTechStore and in this video I'm gonna show you a quick

 The 640 XL is the latest addition to the low to mid range section from Microsoft and it's

 a very huge device but it's a nice phone so far and yeah let's have a look at the packaging

 So first of all the packaging it's a typical Microsoft packaging here actually we have

 a device at the front with the clock saying 640 for the device number.

 At the top of the packaging we have the name once again Lumia 640 XL and what we have

 What else can we see here in the packaging we can also see which color we are getting

 In our case it's black and once again the name of the device Microsoft Lumia 640 XL.

 At the back we can have a look at what is included in the packaging of course it's the

 phone the external battery the wall charger and the quick guide what we also have included

 Colors are white black orange and cyan in these colors it will be available it will

 be only available in a matte finish while the 640 comes in a glossy finish.

 What else can we see here on the left hand side it's the operating system Windows Phone

 the Microsoft Lumia 640 XL will be shipped with Windows Phone 8.1 including Lumia Denim

 It also comes with a Qualcomm Snapdragon 400 processor which is a quad core processor and

 1.2 GHz and it comes with a 13 megapixel card size camera and yeah we can also see that

 here on the back and the quick QR code which lets you do the Microsoft page.

 So let's open the packaging here first we can see is the huge Microsoft Lumia 640 XL

 it has a 5.7 inch screen and compared to my Lumia 6 930 which I'm used to in daily use

 I've never used a phablet so far or yeah bigger smartphone than 5 inches and yeah we will

 What we can see here at the back it's the matte finish we can have a look at the Microsoft

 logo it's one of the first devices to get a Microsoft logo it also has a TICE branding

 That's for the camera the camera the 13 megapixel car TICE camera with a single LED flash like

 you can see here and you can also have a look at the speaker here.

 What we have here is a small camera hump but it's yeah if you lie it on the ground without

 the case or anything it's a bit disturbing but if you put on the case on the device you

 At the bottom we have the micro USB charging port on the right left hand side here we have

 the power button and the volume control and on the top we have the headphone jacket on

 the right side we don't have anything it's just a matte finish.

 So let's have a look at inside of the device it's pretty easy to remove the back inside

 we can see that there's one place for a micro SD card and you can also insert a micro SIM

 The device will also come in a dual SIM version and as a LTE version the one which I have

 You can also have another look here at the camera which is really standing out a bit

 I'm not sure about this but this might be some contacts for wireless charging covers

 but I'm not sure I will include this in the description of the video.

 It's still in the packaging here it's the it's a 3000 mAh battery it's fairly enough

 according to Microsoft it should be enough to have 24 hours of talking time in 3G and

 We will see if this really happens or if the battery doesn't last that long.

 Also on the battery here we have a Microsoft branding so everything really everything here

 It's Microsoft branding on the startup instead of the Nokia branding here.

 While this boots up the device we will have a look what else is included.

 Yeah it's the typical quick guide to get started with your new Windows Phone.

 So what else are we getting here is just a normal wall charger unfortunately there's

 no micro USB cable here but once again here's a Microsoft branding.

 Yeah let's put that away and as we can see there are no physical buttons included on

 the phone at the bottom here but we have some virtual buttons here and thanks to some

 nice features which Microsoft has included for the virtual buttons these are pretty nice

 What I will show you now is just a quick look at the one feature of the GDR2 update.

 If you go to settings these are now separated in some sections where you are quicker to

 Yeah that's just one feature of the GDR2 update and of course I've more detailed look at the

 In our hands-on video this was just a quick unboxing and yeah stay tuned for more videos

 about the 640 XL and let me know your questions in comments below if you want anything to

 be included in the video and subscribe to our channel if you liked our video.

 Today's tutorial is going to be a look using Urban Decay's Vice Pellet No. 2.

 It is with an added touch of color at the lower lash line and I hope you guys will like

 Going in with MAC's 239 brush, I'm going to start off with Strike.

 To place Strike onto my eyelid, patting motion, and I'm going to let the brush hit the inner

 corner of my eye, as always going a little bit above the crease.

 Place this right at the center of Strike and just combine these two eyeshadows and patting

 And I'm going to take it to close to the outer corner of the eye.

 Very softly blend right above these eyeshadows and taking it right to the inner corner because

 And I'm going to take it to close to the outer corner of my eye.

 Now I'm going to take a clean blending brush and I'm just going to blend very lightly any

 I'm now going to use one of my favorite highlighting shades and this is from Inglot No. 395.

 And I'm always bringing it down just a little to make sure everything is well blended together.

 For the lower lash line I'm going to use this BH Cosmetics angled eyeshadow brush and use

 Taking Madness I'm going to connect it from the outer corner of the eye and take it all

 After I've completed applying Madness to the lower lash line I'm now going to use Sedona

 By patting Betrayal at the inner corner and just lightly running it all the way to the

 Just a very small amount and you can go underneath that Madness edge.

 At this point now that your eye looks like this I'm now going to use Jordana's 12 Hour

 Made to Last and I'm going to run this very lightly in my lower waterline.

 I'm now going to use NYX's Crystal Silk liner in Aqua and use a fine tipped point eyeshadow

 Taking that Crystal liner I'm just going to pat on a small amount.

 And I did apply this to the back of my hand that way I can get some with the brush.

 Now at this point I'm going to complete my eyebrow, do my eyeliner, mascara, lashes and

 The contouring that I have for today's tutorial is by City Color Cosmetics and it is their

 It comes with two matte shades of a bronzer and a contour shade and it also has a beautiful

 My voice sounds a little bit raspy because I'm catching a little bit of a cold.

 This is what I have on right now and the payoff on this is so amazing.

 I do have a coupon code for you guys and it will be in the description box.

 I do want to give a special thank you to Sweet Little Things USA.

 She gifted me this necklace and didn't ask for me to give her a plug in on her store

 She has a lot of gorgeous accessories so definitely check her out.

 Everything else that I have on for this tutorial or all the products I used will be in the

This is Julie with Beadaholique.com and this video is a combination of a show and

 tell video for these really fun large size ImpressArt metal stamps.

 delicate necklace using silver filled stamping blanks and a silver filled necklace chain that's

I'm going to start by showing you the different stamps available and then I'm

So you'll notice that these are six millimeter and seven millimeter in

 size and their actual size is this little inset photo right here.

So we've got a hand outline, a foot outline, equality sign, male symbol,

 female symbol, a sprinkle pattern, pistol, rectangle, light bulb, horizontal lines and

 diagonal lines, pretty paisley design, the Zuni bear, Indian head, vertical lines, circle, a fancy

 and wording, cocoa pelly, the arrowhead, crossed arrows, thunderbird, cactus, triangle, a stick bride

 have all been six millimeter, girl profile, a boy profile, brick pattern, Greek key, recycle sign

 and the infinity symbol and the final one is the fancy ampersand which is what I'm going to use

So these are very nice heavy duty stamps and you'll see that it's got a nice

 design which you can see right here and I'll show you right now how to use them.

 a four millimeter 22 gauge open jump ring, it too is silver filled and a 16 inch delicate silver

 either a paintbrush for the patina or you know if you just have a scrap piece of wire that will do

 and it's not a bad idea to have a wet paper towel around as well.

 A glove when you're using the patina, a metal bench block and a brass hammer.

I'm going to clear some of these things away just so I have a little bit better reach.

 and then I'm going to need to pull this closer to me so I can look over the top to make sure I have

So you'll note you're going to want your hole up at the top facing away from

 you and then the lettering is going to be facing towards you so that your stamp is upright in the

 correct position and what you want to do is you want to center this on your stamp at least for

So what's nice is it's a round base so I'm going to line it up with the

 top to make sure I am centered and then I'm going to give it a nice whack with the hammer.

 to try to do it in one whack and like I mentioned I do need to pull this towards me so that I can

 if I move it towards the light you'll be able to see a little bit better

 take your paper towel and I'm going to tear off a little corner

 if you have a post it or scrap piece of paper you'll want to use that to put your patina on but

 I'm just going to now go ahead and rub the dry paper towel over it

 also note that the cover here shows that this fancy ampersand has that nice outline to it

 which is what you see here whereas some of these have more of a solid pattern to them

 pay attention to what type of design it is because that's what you're going to be getting

 I love that outline but if you want the solid pick out a stamp that has more of a solid line work to it

 if you're not familiar with how to do that, you just grip it from either side and the actual opening of the jump ring is up top there

 you can do the same project with all different shaped stamping blanks as well as

You can do brass, you can do sterling, you can do a bunch of different things

 but just like that we created a really pretty and very delicate easy to make necklace

 you can find all these different stamps as well as the supplies to do a project with them at Beadaholique.com

 as well as a variety of 6 inch to 18 inch diameters to choose from

 making our columns the perfect solution to your decorating dreams.

 While You Were Out, using our wall panels, columns, and decorative pieces to

 easily enhance your home renovation project for either interior

They can withstand extreme temperatures without rotting, chipping,

 When you purchase from us, you are ordering directly from the manufacturer,

 eliminating marked up cost from dealers and without all the long turnaround times.

 Other than the beautiful look, the best part is how lightweight they are,

 and this is actually the first time I've ever installed a column.

 You want to shim out the pole with wood to make sure the column wraps tightly

 the shaft is by stacking the cap and base on top of each other.

 Then measure the distance from the stacked pieces to the top of the ceiling.

 the column with a pen, then with a handsaw, carefully cut the shaft.

 If you have high ceilings or a multiple-story exterior, keep in mind the

 base and using a jigsaw, carefully cut out following your markings.

 countersink the screws about every 10 to 12 inches up each seam of the column.

 Be sure to check to see if the column is level before securing to floor or ceiling.

 Slide your cap onto the shaft, screwing it into the ceiling and the shaft into

Using our sand finish magic grout, cover all the screw heads running

 Stack the caps and bases and measure the remaining space to the ceiling.

Then use the hand saw with the tape as your guide and look how easy

 stack your shaft and cap just to make sure the measurements are correct.

 Line up all the seams and hold tight while you countersink screws into the shaft to

Grout the cap and base seam to the floor and ceiling along with a

 against a wall, you're in luck because it's one of the easiest installation

 while you countersink screws into the shaft to the base and cap.

 make sure the column is straight before screwing into ceiling or floor.

 installing over tile or concrete, be sure to pre-drill holes and use tapcon screws.

 the floor and ceiling along with a place where the caps and bases meet.

 Bifo Columns photo gallery to help you with a variety of interior and exterior

 questions, our professionally trained sales team is only a phone call away.

 and then make sure that the wing of your VTool is down flat on the diamond.

 Otherwise every time you pick your tool up and take a look to see how the grind is coming,

 After you get both wings ground, I've still got a little shiny spot on this one.

 you've got to get rid of from where your fresh grind is to the inside of the cutting edge.

 That's the problem where people have all their trouble with sharpening VTools.

 You don't want to go too far on this or you get through to the inside and you'll have a little

 By having the single shaft you have a little bit of a platform on the machine

 Hi guys, today I'm showing you how to make my version of turkey salad and this is great for all your Thanksgiving leftovers.

I did a few extras so I have some for the next morning just to eat hard boiled.

 So you want to hard boil them on a low boil for about 10 minutes and then I'm just chopping up one stalk of celery and I'm cutting it into fourths.

 And then I'm going to start to dice it and you can tell I am not the next master chef because I'm really slow at doing this.

I'm going to try to start doing more cooking videos if you guys like them because I'm going to be moving out soon and I want to try to experiment with new meals and share them with you all.

 So this one's pretty simple but maybe I'll do some fun ones that you probably didn't think of somewhere down the line.

 Then I'm just going to shred up some turkey with my hands or you could cut it if you want.

 Unless you're eating this yourself then that's up to you if you want to wash your hands or not.

 But then I'm just dicing this hard boiled egg with this egg chopper.

My grandma said I probably could have used more but she likes a lot of mayonnaise so it really just depends how healthy you want to be.

So definitely try it out if you haven't tried it like this before.

 I get a lot of emails about right hand and left hand positioning and strap height and

 So in this tutorial I just wanted to talk about strap height for beginners out there

 so they know how high to have, or how low, how high to have their strap.

 Because when you watch a lot of pop bands and stuff like that, they don't always go

 I think from what I've been seeing lately on TV, the cooler that you are, the lower

 So I just want to get rid of all myths and tell you the exact height you should have

 Because basically if you have it really low, you're going to get really abnormal bends

 And if you're playing for hours with your wrist like that, it ain't good.

 So with strap height, I really like for me, and I recommend it for everybody to be honest

 as well, is when you practice, sit down with your legs, they're at right angles.

 I know you can't see my feet now but I'm sitting on a little drum stool and my two

 thighs are just sticking straight out in front of me and my legs are going down like

 So I'm sitting in a nice comfortable position and my back as well is really nice and straight.

 So it's almost taking the weight of the base if my knee wasn't there.

 And the gag is that when I stand up, this base will stay the same height.

 So this is it on my knee right now with my legs straight out in front of me at right

 The first great thing is that you're not going to end up with RSI because of playing in weird

 And the second great thing is that when you're sitting at home and practising, practising

 your licks and your tricks and your whatever, when you get out on a gig or you're playing

 with friends or something like that, your base is in the same position as when you're

 So your body's not having to get used to playing with two different positions.

 It's really important that you keep it consistent and don't give yourself injuries by trying

 Anyway, if you haven't checked my bass lesson website out, it's scottsbasslessons.com.

 There is tonnes of tutorials on there taking you through everything from really beginner

 type things to super advanced, tying your brain in knots type of things.

Today we're going to be making homemade honey sweetened ice cream

 So what you're going to need is two cups heavy whipping cream, one cup of milk, two teaspoons

 vanilla, half a cup of honey and an ice cream maker and this ice cream maker has a bowl that is frozen

 You get the part of the ice cream maker that I've just put in the freezer, make sure it stays in the freezer until the very last second

So I'm putting the ice cream maker all together and it's so easy

If you want it to be harder, you put it in the freezer for about an hour or two

 That's awesome because it's got honey instead of sugar, so it's good for you

 So I'm scooping it out and I'm gonna put it in the freezer right now.

 But if you don't like the strongest of the honey flavor, then just add whatever toppings you want

 which is chocolate flavored, I couldn't even taste the honey like at all and it tasted exactly like store-bought chocolate ice cream

If you want to make this recipe with regular sugar, you don't have honey

Just like that, if you can tell it's already been gotten into because it's that good

 So this part right here is where you want to add your favorite ingredients

 You can add crushed up Reese's or Butterfingers, any kind of candy bar.

 Have fun, make your own flavors and you guys are gonna love this sugar-free ice cream recipe.

Also you can watch my latest video over here or watch The Beach House

 which is our daily vlogging channel over here or you can follow me on Facebook, Twitter, Instagram or Google Plus

 Instead of doing meat today, I'm going to show you some of my favorite barbecue sides.

 I know we've all had grandmas does it in the oven, it's like a big casserole.

 I'm kind of taking my spin on it and doing it outside on the smoker.

 We're going to get some good wood going, get some smoke on the top of that mac and cheese.

 So let's talk about how we're going to assemble this mac and cheese.

 And I just buy a box of noodles, cook them right according to the package directions.

 I don't want to overcook these noodles because we want them to still have some texture.

 And so I've already put the cheese sauce together, but what I have, we start with the roux.

 A couple tablespoons of flour, some butter, need a little fat in there to make that roux

 And right at the end, when the cheese sauce has come together, I add a couple tablespoons

 So you can use whatever kind you like, but I really like that little vinegar essence

 And it's got a little bit of garlic flavor in it too, which is going to make that cheese

 And I like my macaroni and cheese extra creamy, so I use that whole recipe for that 12 ounce

 It adds extra creaminess, adds that zip that a good macaroni and cheese should have.

 When that cheese sauce is hot, those noodles can really soak in some of that flavor.

 Now as we're mixing it, I want to just get my seasonings going.

 It just needs a touch, just to give that macaroni and cheese some flavor.

 Now it's time to get it in your container you're going to cook it in.

 You can use a casserole dish, but since we're going out on the smoker, I'm going to use

 We're just going to spoon the, it's greased a little, got it really good and seasoned.

 If you've got a little extra left over, that will make a mini one.

 I've got some panko breadcrumbs, but I took one package of thin sliced bacon and browned

 It still has some bacon texture, but it really pulls in that bacon grease, that fat.

 Instead of adding butter to these pankos, we can just mix that bacon mixture back with

 It's going to provide us a crunch, give us that great bacon flavor, and it's going to

 sort of absorb in some of that smoke that we have when we put this out on the grill.

 Anytime you add bacon to something, it's going to be good, and especially mac and cheese.

 All right, I know this mac and cheese looks ready to eat just like this, and it's hard.

 Push back a little because we've got to let it cook for about an hour.

 Whatever you're cooking on, just make sure you hold that temp at 350.

 I know that mac and cheese looked a little runny, but it's supposed to be like that because

 Those noodles are going to swell a little more, and they're going to soak up all that flavor.

 In one hour, we're going to have an awesome smoked mac and cheese barbecue side.

 All right, so I've got my pellet grill fired up, setting on 350 degrees.

 Got some of those pecan pellets in there, generating a nice smoke.

 Like I said, it's going to take about an hour, so we're not really going to have to mess

 Okay, the mac and cheese has been on for about an hour, and I had to get a little sneak peek

 Want to see how the cheese is kind of browned around the edges and made that crust?

 We're going to take it inside, and you don't want to taste this right now.

 So we're going to get it inside, let it hang out a little bit, then we'll plate this up

 That's a side that everybody will remember at your next barbecue.

 Just to talk about what we did a little bit, you know, we took some basic elbow macaroni

 noodles, made us a cheese sauce with that extra sharp cheddar cheese and a little Monterey

 Jack, mixed in some mayo and some sour cream just to add some richness to it and hit it

 with some hot sauce too, and that cheese sauce to balance it out, add just a bit of

 For seasonings, we went simple with AP, the salt and pepper and the garlic.

 And we kicked it up one more level by adding that bacon to our panko mixture to make this

 crust and we threw it out on the pit for one hour at 350 with some pecan smoke.

 So now let's get some out on a plate and see what we're working with.

 And it was real runny and creamy, but now look how thick it's set up.

 A lot of that moisture has been absorbed by those macaroni noodles and you get that crunchiness

 Hey don't forget about the sides when you're out there cooking barbecue man.

 You'll never cook it in the oven again and your wife will love you for it.

 Okay, so here we've got our new axle bearing puller set and here is our new axle bearing

 So we want to have a look and find one that's got the right circumference for this bearing.

 And that one looks a little big, but this one looks probably like it's the right one.

 It's rated as a 1 inch to 1 7 8 inch and it certainly covers the inside of the bearing

 So that's probably going to be the one that will fit nicely through the axle and give

 So we're going to take that and we're going to attach that to our slide hammer, which

 should give us the pulling power to hammer that old bearing out.

 Okay, it's time to take our old bearing seal and axle bearings out.

 Okay, we've got our bearing puller, which we're going to slide into the axle.

 And then once it's inside, it straightens out and seats itself against the back of the

 And then all we do is we tighten up this nut, which pushes up against...

 It's got a big washer that pushes up and I guess just protects the old bearing.

 This nut just basically is going to just keep everything nice and solid while we're hammering.

 And so when the slide hammer's going in, it stops your slide hammer from sliding in.

 It keeps everything as one solid piece together while we're hammering.

 The hammering is an outside motion, so we just slide the hammer in and pull back.

 So just give things a good little wipe down on the inside of the axle and she'll be ready

 There doesn't seem to be an orientation for the outside of this bearing other than there

 is lettering on the bearing, which on the old bearings the lettering was facing out

 So I'm going to keep that orientation the same, but I don't see any difference in terms

 of a seal that's different on one side of this bearing or the other.

 So I'm just going to keep the orientation with the lettering facing to the outside of

 And that should make sure everything goes back in the way the old ones came out.

 Now I don't know that there's any rule that you can't use your bearing puller as a bearing

 So I've put the new bearing on the bearing puller on my slide hammer.

 That's got a nice washer that's the same circumference as the outer portion of the

 So as I tap it in with the hammer, that should provide nice even force.

 We could have preloaded it with grease but it would have been muckier when I was installing

 And that's going to help to keep it nicely lubed up until the gear oil pretty much takes

 The new gear oil will largely do the job but we want to have that lubed up so when it first

 Kind of find a place where it wants to kind of sit to start and then you can use a block

 And the block of wood gives a nice even pressure all the way across the surface of the seal.

 And just until it's flush with the end of the axle and she's good to go.

 You're seeing the inside of this garnet yam, which is very orange.

 Orange signifies beta carotene, vitamin A. This potato has got tons

 And the hana sweet potato actually has a really lovely nutty flavor.

 is that as you chop, you're releasing all these wonderful aromas.

 I'm going to turn down the heat and let it simmer for about four hours.

 And at that time, it's going to become a really lovely concentrated broth.

 You can go take a nap, read a book, and let the aroma of this broth

 whether you're dealing with cancer, a sluggish thyroid, or whatever,

 maybe you just want a calming elixir before you go to bed at night.

 I'm actually at Boston University Strength and Conditioning today.

 We're about 5 minutes away from doing some squats and deadlifts ourselves.

 But today I want to talk about a little bit of squatting technique and what we mean by

 So some of you might remember a couple weeks ago where I discussed the importance of the

 I kind of want to elaborate on that a little bit today, but more specifically I want to

 What I mean by getting tight is stability and getting rid of leaks in the body as far

 I discussed it a little bit a couple weeks ago where we want to pull down on that bar,

 but there's two things that, there's kind of like two avenues I like to take with this

 So I like to tell guys once they get set up and they pull down on the bar, to get their

 big air at once, unrack, take two steps back, and get that air again.

 So they do it twice so they maintain that tightness that we're talking about.

 I know a lot of people like to debate whether we want thumbs over the bar or thumbs under.

 That way we're not, that way it prevents people from trying to lift up on the bar.

 But we're pulling down and we're keeping that tightness, maintaining that brace.

 And when we get to the bottom, another mistake that I see a lot of people make, especially

 with box squats, is they squat all the way down, and one, they might rock off, which

 Or number two, they might just get down there and just relax and then they're prone to buckling

 So what I like to say is you want to maintain that stiffness and tightness on the box too.

 So rather than rocking off the box, you want to sit back, maintain that stiffness, pause,

 I mean, if you're someone who's squatting 500, 600, 700 pounds and have programmed yourself

 to stay out of those last two to three degrees of inflection, great.

 So again, you want to squat down, maintain that stiffness, and come back up.

 Once in the beginning, get your air before you unrack, get your air after you unrack

 the weight, take two sets back, and again, maintain that tightness when you get to the

 So use those two tips today and hopefully you'll see some market improvement in your

 The UPS guy just came about 5 minutes ago, dropped this off, so yeah, I'm very excited and let's get unboxed going.

 So the first thing I noticed was this box is way thinner than any previous Surface boxes, Surface RT or Surface Pro.

 So, yeah, somehow they shrunk it down in size, which is a good thing.

 To open, just like before, you pull off this tab and the whole thing slides out.

 Oh, okay, so yeah, they got it down thinner because they got rid of the flap that you had to open from this side previously.

This is no longer a Wacom pen, it's now an N-Trig, which requires a battery that, yes, you get underneath here.

 This charger is 36 watts instead of 48 watts, so it's 75% of the power of the previous charger.

 This tip is specifically designed for Surface Pro 3 and not compatible with any previous Surfaces.

 And on the bottom here, there are two more button batteries, probably for the Bluetooth.

 Put the pen aside, and now let's have a look at the main device.

 So just like before, take it out by opening the little flap and taking the wrap off.

 Of course, we got the newly redesigned kickstand that opens all the way up to this ridiculous angle.

 You guys can also see that in my full review that's coming up in a couple of days.

 And now, last, let's have a look at the Surface Pro type cover.

 Oh, so you can just lift the whole thing up and the cover will come out.

 Okay, so the cover, you just glue it, I guess, onto the back side of your type cover.

 Probably not on this side because it has a Surface logo on there.

 And it's going to hold your powerful pen inside so you don't lose it.

 Hi there, in this video I'm going to show you three different types of flowers that

 card and the yellow has been made from ordinary cream card, but this time I'm going to show

 shows you don't need a specialist tool, you don't need a cameo, you don't need any specialist

 bent into shape with the tool, they don't need to be precise, in fact I quite like that

So with the cream card, there's my tool ready to go, I'll just give it a little wipe

 out because it's had ink on it, and all we need to do is spritz them with the water,

 not too much, put them with the underside like that, this is the top part here, and

 because there's water on there, twist, and you've got another one made.

Now for the mulberry colour, mulberry paper ones, same rule applies, we're

 just cutting two petal shapes, and we'll cut two at the same time just to speed things up for you.

 So it's a rough petal shape, and so obviously the size of the petals just determine the size of the

Spritz them, put them into the tool, so there's the hollow part,

 there's the bulbous part, hold the petal roughly in the centre, give it a little twist, look at

And they'll dry exactly like that, with the mulberry paper they actually

Now I've actually painted this with an orange watercolour paint, and I've also put glossy

 accents over the top of them as well, just so they're different.

 any of the techniques that you already know, I think they'd go into the melt pot as well,

 anything that you, any techniques that you particularly are keen on, then give it a go.

 if you've got watercolour pencils you can do exactly the same thing, and just dab them with

When you put them in the tool that actually spreads the paint about, so you don't

 put it in the centre and give it a little press down and a twist.

 about a bit, put that in the tool, press down and give it a twist.

 lines that you get, quite nice, and it gives it a nice effect and they dry quite well too.

 those one to one side, clean the tool because if we use plain cardstock the next time then it might

 leave a residue of paint on there which wouldn't be very useful.

 to do is then get a circle of card and start using our petals and working our way around,

 just as we would if we were doing this ordinarily, if we'd cut out some petals and work.

 on how many petals you put down depends on how big the flower is going to be, and also obviously

 the size of the petal will determine how broad the flower will be.

 so I'll just put that one there, push my glue stick in, another one there, let's get that a little bit better.

 centre, with the other ones, let me show you this one, I did a centre but I'm not going to do it

 with this one, I'm just going to put a gem in the middle and leave it at that.

OK, and then these are the petals ready to go for the watercolour card.

 to be making a milk and honey panna cotta with vanilla blackberries.

This is one of those desserts that everybody loves and it's really

 So the first thing you want to do is measure out one cup of whole milk and mix it in with

 so we're just going to let that sit and let the gelatin soften up a little bit and in

 the meantime we're going to head back to the stove and heat up our half and half and

In a medium saucepan over low to medium heat, you want to heat up one

 add half a cup of sugar, one tablespoon of pure vanilla extract, one teaspoon of ground

 mixture from earlier and stir this until the gelatin is dissolved.

 I'm going to do is simply ladle it into some mixing jars and some ramekins.

 Alright, so I'm just going to place these guys in the fridge and let them set for about

 The next thing you want to do is add about two rough tablespoons of brown sugar, one

 Now all I want to do is leave it in the microwave for about 30 seconds.

 I'm just going to give these guys one last toss and our vanilla blackberries are done.

 I'm going to place these guys in the fridge as well and I'll see you guys back here when

 So my milk and honey panna cotta has been in the refrigerator for about four and a half

If you have any questions or comments, please feel free to email me.

 I'm Ronnie Wu and I'll see you next time on The Delicious Cook.

 Hello, Billy Ashbaugh here with DrummerConnection.com bringing you another drum lesson and today

 few brush gigs actually, but I have had a little bit of a time in the past to spend

 I've experimented with it again, some in the past, but for some reason when I do the brush

We're going to break down each hand and we're going to check out the movement

 and then we'll put them together and we'll work on some accents with this.

 start out this you have to picture your drum head, your snare head, as a clock and at the

 top you've got 12 o'clock and at the bottom you've got 6 o'clock.

 I start at the bottom and I sweep around to the left, the edge of the rim, up to the top

 to 12 and then back around the right side, just in a circular motion so that the left

 to say, okay, once you get the sweeping motion down, remember it's very important to be aware

 of where your brush is, at what point, you know, against the time, that whatever tempo

 you're playing, you know, where you're sweeping on the head because the left hand now is going

 to accent beats 2 and 4 which is going to be 12 o'clock, the very top of the head.

 you'll notice when I show you the accent that I, for me personally, I don't lift my left

 hand off and then come down on the drum, I just sort of flick the wrist and push the

 the right hand is going to do is go up to 12 o'clock and just slide down the center

So, we got the sweeping going and you'll notice that between the right hand

 coming down and the left hand sweeping, there's a constant swirl motion going.

Okay, now let's get the right hand and some of this accent that we're doing.

 We're going to keep 2 and 4 still nice and strong with the left hand and we're going

You can also mess with catching the last accent of beat 1 or 3 with the right

 Like I said, it's just a simple little pattern that was shown to me.

 out there and videos, a lot of YouTube stuff, some great brush players out there.

 once you sort of get up and running in this, please check that out.

 gigs I ever did years and years ago and it was only because the stage was too small when

 all I had for the whole gig and my brushes and it was the coolest thing ever.

 Join me for another round of 10-minute kitchen wonders here on Quickfire, your step-by-step

 So, just sit back, relax, and I'll be back in 10 minutes or less.

 Okay, so to everyone watching, set your timers and I'll start cooking.

 Let me just get our fresh tuna steak fillet and the rest of our ingredients.

 So, our friends or our guests have a problem because they're always out and when they go

 So, this one is a very good recipe and it's what you call ginger orange tuna in a flash.

 It's better to use freshly squeezed juice because it's concentrated and it has a stronger

 So, instead of that, it's better to dilute it with water so that the taste of the orange

 So, this one is more on the Asian side because we're going to use ginger also.

 So, this one is also for flavor and of course for the texture because you can see that there

 So, let's just get around two tablespoons of our orange marmalade.

 I'll heat up my griddle already so that it's ready for grilling our tuna later.

 It's better to peel your ginger and put it in a zip lock or any other plastic and then

 you place it in the freezer so that it's easier to grate and you also retain more of the flavor

 Of course, aside from flavoring, ginger also removes the fishy smell from our seafood.

 We can just coarsely chop it because later on, we won't be adding it to the dish when

 We have our ginger and of course, let's not forget our Ajinomoto Umami Super Seasoning.

 But don't worry because MSG actually has a very subtle taste which will just blend with

 For example, if you taste seafood or cheese, it's like you'll taste it.

 Just a little bit because we don't want our tuna steaks to stick to our griddle.

 So, this one, you just have to place it in a hot pan and wait for a couple of minutes

 And I'm sure if you try this at home, it's a different combination of flavors so you'll

 If you're just here and you can smell this, I'm sure you won't be able to resist this

 Let's pour the rest of the marinade over our steaks to flavor it some more.

 The flavor of the tuna along with the ginger and the sweet and sour orange.

 Who would think that you can make this kind of dish in less than 10 minutes?

 So, let's brush the rest of the marinade here into our tuna steaks.

 So, of course, we're almost done but to let our guests know that we have orange in our

 This is a dish that Karl and I like to eat when we're working out.

 Because before, when we fish, we usually eat it with soy sauce.

 Freshly squeezed orange juice and I've placed a little bit of orange marmalade and a little

 The combination of sweetness and sourness of the fish and the orange.

 And of course, thank you, Vika Cookware, Princess Appliances, Royal Dalton, Elba Cookers,

 Savers Appliance Depot, and Cathy Binag of Benefit Style Salon.

 Join me again next time, only here on Quickfire, your 10-minute kitchen warnings.

 just beat the egg in there and then fill it up to one cup measure.

 During the summer, we regularly ponder about whether or not hot dishes are appropriate,

 and are always wondering what we can prepare to stay cool, yet enjoy our meals as much

 This recipe is one of our favourites for such occasions, as it's easy to prepare and can

 The ingredient list for this salad is in the description down below.

 The first thing to do to prepare this dish is to cut the cherry tomatoes in half.

 We recommend not skipping this step or the condiment could end up excessively watery

 However, be sure to keep hold of the removed parts as they might be needed later on, who

 Make sure to keep a bowl out to place all the chopped ingredients in.

 Simply cut them into quarters and move on to the next ingredient, which is basil.

 Pile the leaves on top of each other and slice them finely, or chop them if you prefer.

 Next, finely slice the garlic and then press it with the flat of the knife, pulling it

 This technique unleashes the flavour of the garlic, which allows us all to be more efficient

 Once that's done, we'll need to prepare the pasta condiment by adding some vinegar,

 Now give the ingredients a good stir to complete the condiment.

 If the mixture is looking a little dry, you can now add some of the reserved tomato seeds

 Now transfer the pasta into a bowl, add the condiment to it and mix well to combine and

 And there you have it, another dish to add to your repertoire under the category Quick

 We think this pasta looks rather appetizing and hope you enjoy eating it as much as we

 Let us know if you enjoyed the recipe and if you did like it, please leave us a thumbs

 Hey everyone, today we're going to be talking about using our rotisserie and our Summit 470 and also how to get more flavor out of a prime rib.

 For grill setup we want all the burners on high for about 10 to 15 minutes.

From there we're going to turn the outside burners to low and we're going to turn the middle burners off.

 We're going to be using indirect heat and temperatures somewhere around 300 to 325.

 You'll turn the IR burner off and you'll finish it up with indirect heat.

 We've got our prime rib and our ingredients that are really going to enhance the flavor.

 We're going to score the outside of this roast and we're going to insert fresh garlic which will give it some amazing flavor.

 From there we're going to use a nice light coating of olive oil which is going to help the rest of the ingredients adhere to it.

 We have salt, pepper, and some fresh herbs that are really going to help with that crust and really set this roast off.

 You want to make sure you do this because it's going to help with it rotating evenly on the rotisserie motor.

 Now keep in mind we do not want to tighten down the forks completely because we might have to adjust the roast when it gets on the grill.

 Now for grilling your prime rib, it's going to take about 15 to 17 minutes per pound.

 Just make sure you're only using that IR burner for the first 10 to 15 minutes.

 And that's another reason why I love using the Summit rotisserie burner because it really helps caramelize the outside of the food we have on our grill.

 And we've also given you some great ideas on how to enhance and get more flavor out of the things we're putting on our barbecues.

 And I hope the next time you're thinking about something to do on your grill, you're able to utilize that rotisserie and get the same great results that you see here.

 Hello there, this is T-Mac and today I'm going to show you one of my favorite meals.

 It was too many mosquitoes down there at camp so I went ahead and brought camp up here.

 All these ingredients cook pretty fast so it ain't going to take long.

 What I got here is just bell peppers and onions already pre-sliced and in the freezer.

 I get them, slice them up, put them in the freezer and save them until they're gone.

 These are just chopped up mushrooms with some of them left whole.

 They're just regular old string peas but I pick them early so they're nice and tender

 This is backstrap and what I've got in here is my seasonings, minced garlic and olive

 My onion salt, seasoned salt, garlic salt, plus the minced garlic, pepper, whatever you

 Since we're using backstrap it ain't going to take that long to fry up.

 You don't want that stuff, you don't want to get your meat too overdone.

 I'm going to stoke this fire up a little bit and I'll get back with you.

 Alright, so our meat's just about done and we've got a lot of liquid in there because

 And then I'm just going to add instant brown rice right in there on top of that.

 That's going to take about five or ten minutes to soak up all that rice.

 If you want to speed this up even more, heat the rice up and have it cooked already.

 Have it already made and in the ice box, that way all you have to do is throw it in there,

 This right here, venison, white-tailed deer, is some of the best eating there is in this country.

 You can take this and feed this to anybody, even if they say they don't like deer meat.

 Almost 90 minutes of fun trapping action in the foothills of the Ozarks.

 For tons more videos, go to our YouTube channel, Wild For The Outdoors.

 You can also see them at www.wildfortheoutdoors.com and visit our online forum.

 And don't forget to go to Facebook, like us, share us with your friends, and hey, remember, it's your God-given duty to manage this land.

Today what we're going to look at is how to have the correct swing

 path to the ball to get an effective slice working its way towards our target.

 Again, I think we want to keep our standards relatively low, you guys, when

 we first start working on a slice because inevitably we're going to see a

 even after today's video feeling like you should go out and be making every

 guys go out and you hit your flat serve, you're tossing the ball up and you're

 taking a really direct line from behind your body forward to the ball.

 hit slice, I'm initially moving my arm farther to the right side of my body to

 balance out for the fact that the spin on the ball is going to move it to the

Just to give you an example, if I toss the ball directly forward and I

 took a very straightforward swing path and then tried to hit a slice serve,

 So to balance out for the fact that the ball is moving to the left, we're

 going to produce a swing path that moves more out to the right and then makes its

But watch the around motion going out to my right, really exaggerating

 that feeling of stretching to my right and then following through back around

And I'm combining that swing path with the idea of spin that we were

 doesn't necessarily have to be as high as we're going to eventually get to.

 can practice this slice serve with a little bit of a lower toss.

 start to combine that feeling of the slice serve with a little more of a

 you know normally when I serve and when you guys serve, we have this visual that

 this idea down of swinging more from right to left, I think you guys will find

 that it's helpful to visualize the ball almost maybe going into this alley on

If I have that idea that I'm trying to work the ball this direction,

 it's going to promote a swing that makes its way, way out here to the right.

 start to play around with where you visualize the ball starting.

 see, if I'm really focused out here, get that toss out to the right and then

 impart some spin, I started it there and it made its way all the way across the

 right, get the swing path moving more to the right to make contact, and then start

 bringing it a little more kind of exaggeratedly around your body on the

 below this video, and if you happen to be watching on YouTube, please subscribe to

 you for joining me with this cute little project that I've got coming up.

 one and a half by one and a half inches or four by four centimetres.

 piece measures four and a half by seven and a half inches which is twelve by twenty centimetres.

 top, you score it at one and a half, three, four and a half and six inches which is four,

 actually completely remove that outside square and the one that's parallel to it.

And then you come round to the opposite end and we're going to just

It kind of goes a bit like that which is essentially what it does do because the box is

That section, oopsie daisy, is going to come around, fold over, pinch.

 because that's going to come round and you line up the loose edge with the folded edge.

 and you get this nice shape which will actually naturally form when you put one of our

Clothes pins, clothes pegs, doesn't matter, they're the same thing.

 One of those on there and then I'm just going to put a little tiny bit of DSP on to finish.

 I've already pre-cut them and it's in a pretty perfect pack measuring one and a quarter inches,

 and I didn't put these on first because this is a different closure to normal

 and it would have just been too complicated to explain where to put it.

 And sometimes it is easier to put your patterns and your papers on after you've closed

 So, oh that was, oh I'm so sorry, oh that was a bit off camera.

 Get the end of your paper piercer, squish in the middle, turn one of them upside down because we're

 going to pick that up with a glue dot and put it inside the other but offset over the other.

 Basic black candy dot because it's a black dot in the centre of that flower.

I've got my linen thread here as well and it's got two little kinks in it

 so if you take the back of your scissors or a bone folder and just gently pull that through.

 So I'm going to take a couple of glue dots up here for me to stick the linen thread to.

 And then I'm going to take my little pin and I'm going to put that in the middle of the flower.

 And again, I know that was probably too much but you know, that's okay.

 There we go, another glue dot on the back of this little flower.

 Then I painted him dry brushed with a couple layers of Dark Angels Green.

 And then I painted him with a nice thin layer of Dark Angels Green.

 Then I dry brushed him with a very very very light layer of Snot Green.

 Because I just, you know, I have to tell myself I'm only painting tabletop.

 Because I'll sit here and do details and highlights until I'm blue in the face.

 So if you're painting dark angels and you want to get them done quick,

 Hey guys, RangerMan96 here with my first ever video toy review.

 Off for today we have the High Octane Micro Megazords from Power Rangers RTM.

 It hasn't premiered yet so I don't even know who the pilots are going to be.

 I'll be doing each microzord individually and I'll move on to the Megazord transformation sequence.

 It could go up like that and it has wings on it so it would launch up and the wings would pop out and it would fly.

 It has nice details in the back like the giant air vent right there.

 I forgot to mention the Eagle Rider is between an eagle and a sports car.

 For the Eagle Rider, the Bear Crawler, take this, put it on right there.

 This back part is usually on the back, but it can be used as a shield, which you put in the hand.

 Each of the Micromanic Zords came with a bonus sword, but I lost that.

 Alright, what I got here is the edapukon or Botswana bird trap, whatever you want to call

And usually what you do with this is you get this basic frame, you get the bottom frame,

 and then you put layer after layer after layer of sticks on top until it forms a pyramid.

 But I had extra chicken wire just laying around, and so I took and just made a bird cage out

 what I'm going to show you how to do is how to set this because a lot of times it's really

 Okay, so now you most likely have your spot that you're going to put it.

 is you're going to take these two sticks, the trigger sticks, and put them to the back

 and you're going to want your trigger stick so it rocks inward, so that you have pressure

 you're going to take your other stick that holds it all up, and now your trap is set.

 Now what you're going to do is you're going to put your bait in the back here, and if

 You go corner, corner, find where they meet in the middle, and then you're going to put

Now when you do this, you want to make sure that this doesn't line

And then you should have yourself whatever you're trying to catch,

 I wanted to go over a few tips that are going to help you with your midsection.

 Along with these tips, I'm going to show you four exercises in rotation that we're going

 to do four rounds of 20 reps on that are really going to help you.

 Now, the tips are, it's not always just working the rectus abdominis.

 It's not always just sit-ups that are going to give you a trim midsection.

 We have to suck our tummy in while we work on those different muscle groups.

 The different muscle groups I want you to concentrate on, yes, rectus abdominis, the

 crunch, but also these rotation type muscles, our obliques, our intercostals.

 So I'm going to go through a little ditty, a rotation of four exercises that are going

 to help you out with all those things and hopefully trim your waistline.

 Still up to you for diet and conditioning, but this is really going to help you tone

 Not a traditional mountain climber, even though we're starting off in plank.

 You'll notice when you do that, you're going to feel it in your oblique and your serratus.

 I'm going to crunch up and pass, pass, back down, up, pass, pass.

 Now I have to try to pass the ball the other way for the next 10.

 Okay, so that rotation helps engage our obliques, but we're still working that rectus abdominis

 and the whole time working your transverse abdominals by sucking in.

 I prefer to cross my leg, keep this knee out, and roll up this way.

 What we were doing was using the tightness from this hip, the tightness from that piriformis muscle

 We're doing ball circles similar to the pass, but we're going to come up and go around and back down.

 You want to take about 30 seconds or so to stretch out those hip flexors, and that's perfectly fine.

 FitFluential Moves will help you reach your goals, and more importantly, they'll help you stay on track.

 Just follow FitFluential on YouTube, Facebook, and Twitter, and be sure to follow us,

 Steve and Bonnie Feaster, on Facebook and Twitter or your favorite social media outlet.

 To make sapa sui, the first thing you need is some bean vermicelli or lia lia or saifun.

 These are the rest of the ingredients which you can find on my blog at panipopos.blogspot.com.

 First off, you just chop up your onion and finely chop your garlic and then crush your

 You can use whatever you've got on hand, even one of those fancy garlic crushers.

 Heat some oil in a pot and quickly saute those root vegetables that you just prepared.

 If you can get the flavouring of your meat right, it will carry throughout the whole

 To this we're going to add stock and a bit of soy sauce and then some water until the

 And then you just pop the lid on your pot and let that simmer until the meat is done.

 So put your lia lia in the bowl and cover it with hot water just to soften the noodles.

 By the time your meat is cooked, this is what your lia lia will look like.

 Now some people like to snip their lia lia into smaller pieces.

 You don't have to do this, but my mum used to always do it, so I do it too.

 So cut that up and then add that to your meat, which I hope you've tasted by now.

 I'm using frozen, but you can use any kind of vegetable you like.

 It looks really soupy, but by the time you're done, the lia lia would have soaked up all

 Supper soy tastes really good on the day that it's made, but it tastes just as good

 So you can enjoy this hot or you can eat it cold in a supper soy sandwich.

 Just butter two slices of bread and put some supper soy in there.

 Good morning, today we're going to teach you how to make a crab omelette.

 Hi, look, we've had a lot of requests as to what to make for a nice healthy breakfast.

 And then we just give it a quick little stir to make sure that it's mixed well.

 The oats are now cooked but we just need to let them sit for about three minutes.

 We've got some extras to add on to our oats for a bit of extra flavor.

 We've tried some blueberries today but you can choose any type of berry.

 They're very yummy, low calorie and delicious to put onto your oats.

 And we've also got some LSA which is actually linseeds, sunflower seeds and ground almonds,

 So here we have our oats that's been sitting for three minutes.

 I'm going to grab some yum honey from our friends who have a beehive.

 So as I said before, we've chosen blueberries if we were to have fruit.

 Strawberries are really fantastic, low-cal and delicious with your oats.

 Now in a couple of weeks' time, about three weeks' time, our website will be online.

 And Con and I will be presenting exercise videos, motivational videos, and more recipe

I am a senior at Bristol County Agricultural High School and I'm majoring in agriculture.

 Today I'm going to show you how to properly put together a bomb sheltered portal ledge by Mediolas.

 Before we start assembling this portal ledge, I need to share a few safety precautions with you.

 First, these gear loops right here are not rated for life support.

 The climber, while resting in the portal ledge, should be tied into another point that is life supported in the tree.

 You should not use any utility that requires an open flame to function.

 I have a climbing line to be used as a tie-in point for this tree.

 You would attach the portal ledge to the loop with a carabiner and then you would pull the bag off.

 Next, you need to take the spreader bar out from your portal ledge.

 Next, you need to spread these two bars apart, but you want to keep the spreader bar as level as possible to try to get it on the other side.

 Make sure that all your poles are lined up so that you will not struggle when you're putting the end poles in.

 If you have a string hanging out like this one, you need to make sure you tuck it in before trying to get it into the slot because it will not fit otherwise.

 Finally, you need to unslack the risers so that your portal ledge is laying straight.

 Do this for all four corners until the portal ledge is sitting level.

 You want the inside to be a little bit higher than the outside so it is more comfortable when you rest in the portal ledge.

 But, before you go and have fun in the trees, we need to show you how to disassemble this portal ledge.

 You're going to follow the steps that you just took in the opposite order.

 First, before you disassemble, you need to make sure you slack the risers.

 To make sure this portal ledge is in a bundle so you can easily get it back into the bag,

 take the spreader bar and the two end bars and tuck them into the pouches you kind of made with the risers.

 Now, you're going to adjust these risers so that they're laying level with the middle piece.

 Next, you're going to take the bag and starting from this end and going to this end, you're going to put it inside the bag.

 Your loop will be on top next time so that you can clip it right into your tag end point and start from the same point you left at.

 This will make it easier to uninstall next time you take it out of the bag.

 Thank you for watching my instructional video and I hope you found it a good help.

 I'm going to show you how to remove a modesty panel from a corset and then bone it and then

 So first of all, let's take a look at how this modesty panel is sewn on this modesty panel is just one layer

 Doesn't look very good and it's kind of frustrating to keep tucking it and pulling it while I'm trying to lace it up

 When you look here and how the modesty panel was sewn together.

 This modesty panel was sewn on after the rest of the corset was completed.

 That will be fairly easy to pick out because it was sewn on after the rest of the corset was completed

 So you can see I would just have to take out that line of stitching right there

 However, there are some courses out there that have modesty panels that are sewn right into the other seams of the corset

 So there is really no way to pick out the seam of this modesty panel without somehow compromising the strength of the corset

 So in this situation, I would not recommend removing the modesty panel or if it really is

 Annoying you you would really have to cut it out instead of picking it out

 Go underneath this stitch and then there's a tiny little blade in there that actually cuts the thread

 So you're going to be using something like this to pull out the stitches of the modesty panel away from the corset

 So here is the corset now without the modesty panel and you can see that if you do it very carefully

 Any signs that the modesty panel was there before now if you are

 Taking modesty panels off of something like vinyl or leather that doesn't have a sort of self-healing fabric

 Then there will be slight pin pricks left over and here is the previous modesty panel

 That is now loose and I'm going to give this a quick iron and I'm going to use this as the fashion fabric

 The fashion fabric that I'm going to be using for my modesty panel and I just laid this over some coutil

 Traced out the same size and shape and cut out one shape of that

 In the coutil I also did that with twill and I fused it to the underside of this fashion fabric

 So I just use whatever material I had on hand just some some scrap material

 Not necessarily the modesty panel doesn't receive any real stress or strain from stretching

 But it does need to have a dense enough weave and a tight enough weave that the boning will not poke through

 You can use coutil you can use twill you can use cotton ticking

 You can use basically any material that is going to be tight enough that the bones are not going to poke through and that it's not

 Really stretchy like has a spandex material or anything like that

 You'll see that the pink is on the inside and the green is on the outside here

 Pin three sides and leave the last side open then stitch those three sides pivoting at the corners

 Trim the seam allowances to get rid of the bulk then turn the pocket right side out so that the pink is now on the

 Outside use a pencil or something pointy to push out the corners neatly then iron it flat

 So this spiral steel boning that I'm going to be using in this modesty panel is 1 quarter inch wide

 So I made my boning channels by sewing next to the seam here and I made these boning channels

 Three eighths of an inch wide just so it's a slightly larger than the boning so that the boning can slip through quite easily

 I'm only going to be putting four bones in this modesty panel one on each edge.

 I'm going to measure the length of the boning that needs to be here and it needs to be four and one quarter inches

 And now I'm going to place it into the modesty panel right along the edge there

 And once it's in there you want to take a zipper foot and stitch it in place so that it can't slip out

 Then just slide them into the long boning channels that you had made before

 Inserting the length wide bones stitch them in place so that can't slide out run a stitch along the width

 Place your last short bone in and use a zipper foot to stitch beside it to secure it in

 I chose to fold over the open edge and top stitch a tiny bit away from the edge to close it

 But you can slip stitch it closed by hand or you can add binding to each end to match the rest of your corset

 So what I have here is a corset laid out flat and I'm going to take my new stiffened modesty panel

 Slide it underneath the laces just like I did with the last modesty panel tutorial

 And I'm going to mark the areas where I want it to float so a good place to put it is

 Where two crosses appear in the laces, so here's one area where it crosses and

 Here I'm taking up the lacing and then relacing it with the modesty panel

 In one of the under X's near the top thread the laces through the top grommets you made then continue to lace the corset normally

 Remember to suspend the panel such that it will be between your skin and the laces

 When you get to an under X close to the bottom of the modesty panel thread it through the bottom grommets before finishing off the lacing

 And here you can see it suspended in the laces, so here's how it looks from the outside

 Here's a lacing example first showing the modesty panel before modification

 notice how I had to talk it to the side and it kept bunching as I tightened my corset and

 Now showing it after modification how the panel stays nice and flat and centered while I'm lacing up the corset

 So I hope you enjoyed this tutorial and please feel free to leave questions or comments below

Today on the show I am going to teach you a really simple and easy way to make

 So basically we are just going to dump everything into a large pot.

And one cup of the vegetable broth I am going to put into the marinara jar.

And then the other cup I am just going to pour it in like it is.

Now I have this packet of chili powder, chili sauce stuff that my grandmother had in the cabinet.

 It did have a couple of chemicals, but basically it had all the things in it that I had seen other people put in their chili recipes.

 Which are chili powder, chili peppers, cumin, onion, sugar, garlic, and other people put other things like cocoa powder.

 So you can really be adventurous with lime or whatever else you want to put into it.

 We are going to bring it up to a boil and then let it simmer for about 30 minutes.

 And you are going to come back to stir it occasionally because you don't want the beans to settle at the bottom and burn all up.

I am going to serve this over rice, you can serve it over corn bread, or whatever you have that you like to traditionally serve your chili with.

And if you just have to have that ground beef, turkey, whatever thing going on, you can get some tofu crumbles,

 or some other faux ground beef, some tempeh or something like that.

I didn't think it was necessary and I still don't think it was necessary.

And also if you want to add in extra salt, I can taste where somebody who wasn't used to abstaining from salt,

 like I don't sprinkle extra salt or use a lot of salt, they probably would think it needed some more salt.

 So if you are used to that, you may want to add in some more salt.

 Video responses are always welcome and I will see you all tomorrow.

 Now we're going to go over the fine points of the bottoms up clean.

 So a couple things that are important, our hands in the corner, that's going to help

 On the backswing, everything is exactly the same, hands still turned in 45 degrees.

 As it's coming up, boom, I need to really lock down that armpit just as if I'm crushing

 What that does is fire up all the muscles in your lat, and it really helps things stabilize.

 The only difference between the bottoms up clean and the normal clean is the rack position.

 Now I've seen people, believe it or not, when that kettlebell is coming up here and they're

 really concentrating on holding it up and the kettlebell starts moving towards your

 face, it's like losing their grip, they'll actually watch it come right in and they'll

 catch it, that kettlebell, right in the face, right in the grill.

 Now if any time, let me just say this, you think it doesn't need to be said, but it does,

 is that if you're in this position and this kettlebell starts moving towards your face,

 So if it comes up, boom, lock it down, and you don't have to catch it in the face.

 So another thing that's helpful in the trajectory is this, is when you get your backswing, let

 your grip loosen up a little bit, let the kettlebell stay in your fingertips just about,

 So when you're on the top position, just lock everything down, keep your butts tight, armpit,

 It's a great conditioner for your form, for keeping a straight wrist, really helps you

 Hey guys, my name is Paulo and I'd like to show you how I cook my oatmeal every morning for breakfast.

 Basically, I start out with a half a cup of water and I add it to a medium-sized pan

 Just make sure that the water is over the oatmeal and it's nice and stirred in.

 After a minute and a half, as you can see, that foam is coming up quite high.

 I stir it in a little bit and kind of let it settle a little bit and then I wait for about

So I start stirring it in and what the point that I'm doing here is just

 trying to make it where all that water evaporates out of the oatmeal and it makes it a more of a

 make the mistake of taking the oatmeal out about this point and you actually need it to cook for a

So we're about three and a half minutes and now another minute and a half of us

So we'll probably do about four and a half minutes from the time the water is

As you can see, I'm having a little bit of trouble because I'm using the camera on one hand and

 get that water to evaporate and leave it a more of a drier texture rather than the softer

 texture that a lot of people, or most people, are used to it at least.

 and then I added some blueberries and a glass of water and that's it.

 The first step to our venison pumpkin chili is the venison and I have already browned

I just added a few spices, a little bit of seasoned salt, garlic, and

Okay, and before we add in the spices, I'm going to add in a little bit of

Now when you go to buy canned pumpkin, you don't want the pumpkin pie filling.

If you want it a little hotter, you can always add cayenne or crushed red

This chili, I plan on entering into the DNR chili cook-off this coming week.

As you can see, we have eight contenders, the venison pumpkin chili

 Over there, just write the number of your favorite and stick it in.

 Hey guys, since I've had quite a few questions about it, in this video I'll show you how

 to make one of the units for the origami placemat, as well as how to interlock them together.

 Now just to clarify, this isn't my design, it's from a book which I showcased in a previous

 video, but I figured that making a video tutorial would be easier to explain things.

 So let's get your square piece of paper, and first thing you have to do is, if you hold

 the piece of paper properly, fold it diagonally across, turn it over and fold the other way

 Now without turning it over, you have to fold horizontally and vertically.

 It's important to make sure you get your creases accurate, otherwise the final step will be

 So you get your usual four lines there, now without moving the paper too much, you have

 So say if I fold this one, then I turn it 180 degrees and fold the other side to the

 So now you get a rectangle, now what you need to do is, without unfolding, fold to the centre

 I believe this type of fold is called the pattern fold, so it's quite commonly used

 So the next step is to make a diagonal fold along this point of reference here.

 Now to do that, you have to fold it over like that, so essentially what you're doing

 So if you do that and press down on the inside, do exactly the same on the other side.

 So we want the fold across here, which means you take this point to here.

 And this is what we have now, so now we put your thumb on the top point there and press

 Careful with the diagonal folds on the inside, but it shouldn't be too difficult.

 So now this is what we have, now the next step is to take one of the corners and fold

 Then what you should do is, if you put your thumb inside here and do a squash fold, you

 now get this square here, so do exactly the same thing for each of the other points.

 So now, if I just pick up the other piece here, I think you can pretty much see how

 So on each square, let's take the point and fold it up to the top like that.

 Now you take one of the flaps and fold it over, now fold the point inwards to the middle.

 And that's one of the petals there, so now we just have to repeat that for all the other

 You'll notice in this particular video I'm holding it quite close to the camera, so I'm

 You'd probably get better folds if you were to do it against the table.

 I'll also be coming back home from uni this week, so that means I've got more time to

 make things, but unfortunately not the time for videos, because my workspace is not that

 If you've noticed from my very first video, the viewing angle isn't that great, so the

 So now, if I just get one of the pre-made pieces, and I'll show you how to interlock

 Now let's say we'll have this on top, so let's take one of the petals there and fold it up

 And now what you have to do is slide it into the middle of the two points there.

 Now this isn't a true modular origami in a sense, so it's best to glue down your flaps,

 But this is all you need to do, just use more squares if you want a bigger placemat.

 You just get a pot of boiling water going, and then you're ready to just drop in your

 I don't know if you can see it with all the boiling water steam.

 But once it's ready, like I said, about two or three minutes, it will sort of float up

 And you know a good two or three minutes, you know it's ready to bring out.

 You can use a slotted spoon but you get these at the Chinatown store and it's great for

 All right, I'm going to keep the water boiling because now I'm going to make my noodles.

 Again, I just bought some Hong Kong style egg noodles at the Chinatown stores.

 Because really what I want to do is I want to cook it in the broth that I have for my soup.

 Okay, I have my broth boiling so I throw in the noodles that I had just rinsed a little

 And then I'm just going to cook this for about two, three minutes.

 Again, like I said, because it's fresh I don't have to really worry about cooking it too

 I'm just kind of shaking it loose so that I don't get a lot of clumping.

 So here's some choy sum, which is sort of like the Chinese broccoli I guess.

 I'm going to add it in at the same time so that it will cook and kind of wilt down.

 And then once it's ready, we're going to be ready to put it in a bowl, add the wontons,

 Okay, so here we have our steaming bowl of Hong Kong noodles with some greens.

 All we have to do, oops, is finish it off with adding back the wonton that we had cooked

 I like to sort of hide some underneath too so that it's not like you eat it all, the

 To finish it off, I like to drizzle a little bit of sesame oil again.

 Even for the fragrance, because it's such a nice fragrance, but just a little bit.

 And then garnish with a little bit more green onions, and then we're ready to eat.

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to be making one of my favorite childhood dishes, and it's

 called wonton mien, and that's the dumplings that is really common in a lot of Chinese

 My mom always made it as she taught us how to fold the wontons early on when we were

 It takes a lot of putting it together, so that's why you get the whole family involved.

 So what we're going to do first is create the filling that's going to be made into the

 So you start off with the ground pork, and I have here about...

 Hi everyone, today we're going to be making one of my favorite childhood dishes, and that's

 I don't know if you can see it, so it sinks to the bottom, and like I said, once it's

 It's nice to have this little strainer to sort of fetch it out when you're ready, so

 I really like where there's oranges and lemons and limes in it.

 And then I've got to ride on again because there's always something we don't have.

 My husband and I, Brandon and I, both turned a year older during this time.

 You can find recipes for both along with the video on the site.

 Now the sweet pastry crust does need to be fully baked and once that's done and let it

 cool to room temperature, what I like to do is just put one half cup, which is about 50

 Now if this had been in the fridge for a few days, then just give it a quick stir.

 Now if you don't want to make your own, you can just buy this and just use a jar instead.

 But the flavor of homemade is really so much better and since it's easy to make, you might

 Now you could just serve it like this, but what I'm going to do is do a whipped cream

 So to do that, take one cup, that's 240 milliliters of cold heavy cream.

 And what I like to do before I whip the cream is just pop your bowl and your beaters in

 the freezer for about 15-30 minutes and that way your cream will really beat a lot easier.

 And then I'm going to add about between one and two tablespoons of granulated white sugar.

 Now while you could just spread the cream on top of the lemon curd, what I like to do

 If you didn't have one of these pastry bag, piping bags, you could just use a plastic bag.

 When you do this, just make sure you squeeze the cream down to the end and then get all

 And you can just cover and store this in the refrigerator for a few days and just try to

So today's back to school tutorial is a little bit different than any back to school or beginner look that I've ever done.

 I normally do like a really nude lip, but for this fall I was kind of feeling a little bit of a brighter lip with more neutral matte doll eye kind of eyes.

 She always has really matte colors on her eyes with more of like a polished kind of just finished not overdone look on her cheeks and her lips.

This is a matte paint pot and it's my favorite one of the moment.

 And I'm going to put this all over my eyes as a base with my ring finger.

 Then taking my MAC 239 brush, I'm going to combine two colors on the lid.

 I'm going to start off with the color Motif, which is a really pretty kind of peachy pink color.

This is a really natural color that kind of naturally brightens your eyes and makes you look a little bit more youthful and awake,

 which is good for early mornings when you're rushing off to school.

 And then just to calm the color down a little bit because it's a little bit too peach for the look that I'm going for,

 I'm going to put a little bit of Rice Paper, which is just a little bit more of a yellow.

 And it's going to calm down the peachy pink colors that I just put on.

 And these two colors together make a beautiful brightening lid color.

 So even if you have a darker skin tone, these colors are going to be gorgeous on you.

 Then I'm going to take my MAC 224 brush and a little bit of this new color I picked up called Moleskine.

 If you have the color Wedge, that is very similar to this Moleskine color and that would be a good dupe.

 And I'm just going to put this really lightly all over my crease.

 This is a great blending color and it's going to kind of give me a little bit of depth in the crease without putting a really dark color

 because this is supposed to be a very natural kind of polished look.

 And since we're doing a darker color on the lips than I normally do, we want the eyes to be really natural for this look.

 This is going to give me the least amount of control and make the strokes really, really feather light.

 I'm also going to take a tiny bit on the side of my brush and I'm just going to lightly dust this all over my lid.

 We want this to be really well blended and really natural looking.

 I just used two separate brushes because I was doing my eyes separately and I didn't want to mix the colors.

It's very similar to Espresso, which I use in a lot of tutorials.

 But this one has a little bit more of a warm kind of chocolate brown, red brown undertone to it that I think just kind of warms up your eyes further.

 I picked all matte colors for this look because Blair Waldorf from Gossip Girl always has like a really polished matte finish to her eye.

 Even though that doesn't look like a tiny bit, that looks kind of like a lot.

 And I'm going to dab it on a Kleenex just to kind of get the excess color off.

 And then I'm going to put this right on the outer edge of my eyes.

This color is really dark and will get kind of everywhere if you're not really careful with it.

 So again, holding my brush really far back, that's going to give me the lightest strokes.

 And I'm just going to kind of put this right on that outer corner, making a little V shape.

 So I'm kind of going down towards the corner of my eye and then up towards the crease.

 So I'm going to use it under my brow as a highlight, but also to kind of blend out all of these colors that you put on the lid.

 One thing about Blair is that she doesn't wear a noticeable eyeliner.

 So instead of wearing a liner, I'm just going to kind of darken my lash line by using a little bit more of Brown Down.

 And using my 219 pencil brush, I'm just going to dab a tiny bit on my brush and tap off any extra.

 And then I'm just going to kind of rub this very, very lightly right on the base of my lash line.

 And that's going to darken up the lash line and make my lashes look fuller when I put my mascara on.

 But it's going to look like I don't have any liner on at all, which is the look that she always has going on.

 So just very, very lightly right at the base, I'm putting a tiny bit of this Brown Down color.

 But I think it does open up your eyes further, especially when you have the white on your waterline.

 So I'm going to coat the bottom and the top sides and then pop them back up before it dries.

 Did you guys know spider lashes are supposed to be really in for fall?

 They were all over the runway shows back in February for the fall.

 And just kind of like spidery, like spacey lashes are like really in right now for beauty trends.

 If you guys are wondering, I'm wearing Purple Majesty nail polish by MAC.

 Okay, for blush, I'm going to pick just a really warm plum color.

 Now, you can't get this one anymore, but I actually bought a blush at MAC yesterday.

 Sir might be a little bit lighter, but they're the same kind of tone.

 So if you want a blush color like this, Sir would be a good pick.

 And I'm just going to kind of pop this on the tops of my cheeks.

 And my lighting is uneven right now because I'm filming during the day.

 Because Blair always has this really dark pink, almost red looking kind of stain to her lips.

 So I'm actually going to use a lip color that I've had for a while.

 And you can apply this with a brush, but I'm actually just going to apply it straight out of the tube.

 And I'm just going to pop a little bit of this over this lipstick.

 And that gives you a look that's a little bit different than what I normally do.

 Welcome to another movement in the series of Tai Chi Chui Joy Through Movement.

 And again, I want to emphasize that the goal here is gentle, nice, easy exercise.

Stand up for a minute, move along with me, don't strain yourself.

 When I first started doing Tai Chi Chui, I had a resting heart rate of 125 beats per minute.

After about six months of doing Tai Chi Chui, my heart rate had come down to 80.

 We're going to hold a ball, pretend to hold a ball just like we did in Bird Flaps at Swings.

 So, we move forward, hands dip down, we move back, hands come up over the top.

 Next side, left foot out, toes off the ground, holding that ball.

 I want to mention again the thing about my left hand, the fluttering that it does.

 That's a side effect that can happen sometimes with Tai Chi Chui.

 I'm going to violate a rule here, the rule of not saying what it is.

 For an inside out turning, strips are temporarily glued together.

 Then the strips are split apart, rotated 180 degrees, and glued together again.

 For this project, I cut the apricot into 1 1⁸ inch square strips about 8 inches long.

 I numbered each strip and marked the inner corner with an arrow.

 Then I put just a little bead of glue along the short outer end edges, clamped up the

 Therefore there is a risk of the glue failing and the block flying apart.

 For safety sake, I made sure the excess metal strip trailed behind the rotation so that

 Since the wood block is square, I figured the band clamp would dig into the edges and

 On Baltic birch plywood, I cut a circle the size of the corners of my blank.

 Then I cut along marks for the sides of my blank to form little wood arcs.

 I slipped these arc pieces under the band clamp and tightened the clamp.

 With so much metal rotating at high speed, I did not want my hands to hit the metal.

 As an extra measure of protection, I wrapped the band clamp with strapping tape, the kind

 I did not want to use duct tape because duct tape can tear easily.

 With all that done, it was time to first cut a dovetail tenon then reverse the block and

 I remounted the band clamp with the wood strips and the fiber tape on the other end making

 sure the excess band from the clamp trails behind the rotation.

 With all the extra hardware, it's worth checking clearance multiple times.

 For me in this project, the challenge was to visualize the inside out part of the turning.

 Trying to think inside out, I traced from the corner of the block and it was way off.

 It would have been better to align the pattern to the middle glue joint of the block but

 He recommends a 40 degree angle for the bevel and a 45 degree angle for the top of the wings.

 I did not use my mineral oil and beeswax mixture for fear that it might interfere with gluing

 I had to be careful hand sanding this piece between the sharp corners and the band clamp

 I tried to always keep my hands where if I touched the wood, the wood would knock me

 With the inside turning completed, it was time to turn it inside out.

 I split the strips, clamped it blank to a table saw sled, then carefully sawed a shallow

 I turned them 180 degrees and glued them together again with white glue.

 If any of the white glue did squeeze out, the glue would not be as obvious as it would

 After letting the glue cure overnight, it was time to turn the outside.

 Again, I first cut a dovetail tenon for the headstock end, then flipped the blank end

 And forgetting my pattern, I tried for a fairly consistent thickness on the strips of wood

 When sanding, I didn't have the risk of hitting the band clamp anymore.

 But in their place were the knife edges of the slats forming the bell.

 I made sure to keep my hands clear so these sharp edge knives would not come at me.

 After sanding through 220 grit, it was time to add a couple of burned highlights.

 I used a pointed scraper to make a shallow groove at the bottom of the bell, then wired

 At the top, I used a skew to make a groove and a piece of formica to burn it in.

 Before drilling the top of the bell for the clapper and the hanger, I used a skew chisel

 Sanded the knife edges of the sides of the bell just a little bit to take the sharp edge

 With the top and the sides sanded, it was time for the shellac again.

 Nearly done, I reduced the bottom spigot but did not dare cut it off with the lathe running.

 A donut shaped diamond chuck from a previous project was almost the right size to hold

 With a paper towel for padding, I sanded and finished the bottom.

 Then to secure the clapper and the hanger with a little CA glue and voila, one Christmas

 I'll have to work on my pattern to get both the inside and outside right.

 If there's another project you'd like to see, please let me know.

 As you can see here I have a sea bass which I'm going to steam and then I'm going to be

 cooking the roast lamb with the roast potatoes around it which are going to be lovely and

But first of all let's go and have a look at the oven itself and see what

So we come in here, obviously we have the cavity, we have three shelf positions

 in the jug and this pushes home like that and then when we turn the oven on the water

 going to do is just use the pure steam and that is going to create steam in the oven.

 But before I do that I just want to talk a little bit about the controls.

 here the steam settings to start with and we have varying degrees of steam going into

I'm going to be using 100% today and then when I come on to do the lamb I'm

 has come up on the timer but I think it's going to take 25 and I'm going to press the

I have no fat in here, no oils so I've got it completely pure as it were.

 The vegetables will retain their colour, their vitamins, their minerals and this is a lifestyle

 meat and at the end we're going to get a really great Sunday roast.

 say is we're also only going to take just over the hour to cook this.

We don't want any meat juices or any juices going into the reservoir otherwise

 my roast at 160 in all of the Neff products and I'm going to turn the time to about an

 enter the reservoir and will start to steam and the oven will turn on as well.

 put a little oil on the potatoes today but I don't always put oil on.

 for a really healthy finish they will still go golden brown without the oil but a little

 If you need any further information please do not hesitate to call in to the Two Guys

 showroom in Basingstoke where the staff will be happy to help you.

I've been sick for the past week and actually lost my voice at one point

 So it's just now coming back, but um, you know, just just let it happen

 Today's video is going to be a holiday inspired makeup look and wear for Christmas or Christmas Eve or whatever you're doing and excuse my cat

 A lot of you have also been asking if I'm gonna film a lot over winter break and I'm definitely gonna try to do

 More than one video a week over break just because I have so much free time

 And hopefully I'm going to be doing a 10,000 subscriber giveaway so

 Subscribe, let's get on to the video and I will talk to you guys later

 All right, so to start I'm taking this L'Oreal Paris Magic Skin Beautifier BB Cream and just spreading that evenly on my face

 Next I'm taking my Maybelline Instant Age Rewind Dark Spot Concealer and just putting this under my eyes and on any problem areas

 Now I'm just gonna set that face makeup with the Rimmel London Stay Matte Powder

 Contouring and highlighting I'm taking my Narcissist palette from NARS and taking the bronze color and just

 Taking the blush from this palette I'm just putting this on the apples of my cheeks and then working it upward

 Last I'm just taking the lightest color in this palette with a stippling brush and clean that on top of where I would put my

 From my Naked 3 palette I just took the color dust and put that all over my eyelid

 And now I'm just taking the color trick with a dome brush and then working that into the outer corner of my eye and blending

 Then I took the color strange and just used this as a highlight on my brow bone and a little in the inner corner

 I also applied some liquid eyeliner, but I suck at doing that on camera

 So there's what it looks like and then after that I just took my Tarte eyelash curler and curled my eyelashes

 Which is thick and defined from Buxom and I just put that on my lashes

 Took this bite lip crayon, and I don't know what color this actually is

 It's just a really pretty like nudish pink color and applied that and then I applied a beauty rush lip gloss

 Hey guys, this is Will Billy Toothless McGee with NextLevelGuitar.com

 Dude, this is seriously a lot of fun and I'll take a lot of those ideas and just kind of work them over.

 Especially if you've got a drummer in your midst, this is a lot of fun.

 Hey, before I forget, if you want a free video lesson and a free e-book, click on this box right here.

 We at Next Level Guitar will send you all the above and you can get down at whatever time you like.

 First finger is going to jump up on the 2nd fret of the G string.

 This is a lot of fun when you're first starting to play in a band.

 Until then, this has been Will Billy, 2-Fist McGee with NextLevelGuitar.com.

 Because you have over 1000 different examples of all kinds of music.

 Everything from, I just grab a guitar and I don't even know what the strings are.

 To the guy is like, he's seriously always trying to push himself and challenge himself with something new.

 Today we're going to show you how to install one of our level lock shades with the security

 Before we begin, I'd like to show you the hardware that you're going to need to complete

 The first thing here, since we're going to be doing an outside mount on this window,

 these are called our L-Mullions, and these have the track pre-mounted on them, and we'll

 also have the holes drilled, pre-drilled for the bracket plates.

 This is going to be an example of one of our bracket plates designed for our angled security

 The next piece of hardware is going to be the actual shade itself.

 The next piece of hardware is going to be our security box back, and we use this when

 there's a depth of more than four inches to prohibit any access from behind to the shade

 And the final piece of hardware is going to be our angled security box.

 The next step in the installation is going to be to mount the L-Mullion onto the wall.

 It's important to make sure that this inside edge lines up with the edge of the window

 Now in this particular example, we're using the L-Mullions because you don't have enough

 clear depth here to mount the security box fully inside of the opening.

 So what the L-Mullions are going to do is it allows us to bring the shade and the security

 box out far enough that we can mount the box and it'll be flush with this wall.

 The next step in the installation is going to be to mount the security box back with

 And to do that, we're going to use these 10 by 32 by 3 16th inch screws.

 And these will mount directly through the holes on the bracket plates into the holes

 It's important to make sure that the angle on the M-Mullion here and the angle on the

 When those are even and flush together, all the other spacing will line up correctly.

 Now that we have the slider bracket plate attached to the M-Mullion here, we're going

 It'll slide over to give you room to put this bracket plate in between the M-Mullion and

 Now that we have our L-Mullions mounted to the wall, our bracket plates and security

 box back mounted to the L-Mullions, it's time to install the shade itself.

 Now one thing to keep in mind is make sure that your hands are clean before you handle

 And the first step to putting this in is going to be unroll it all the way.

 At this point, there are a couple different ways that we can proceed.

 As you can see here, I have the drive pin facing down with the shade rolling out the

 And what we can do is fit this drive pin directly into the slot.

 Now that the drive pin is in place, we slide the extender over into here.

 Another option, rather than having the tension pin facing down, is to roll the shade over

 Fit the drive pin into the slot and slide the extender over into the hole.

 With the roller tube fully extended, make sure that there's nothing sticking out past

 The easiest way to do that is just slide it in, make sure everything is flush so we have

 With the roller tube in place, the next step is going to be adjust the shade to make sure

 The easiest way to do that is just grab it and pull it from side to side.

 Now that the roller tube is in place in between the brackets, the next step will be to remove

 Now that the tension pin is removed, the next step will be to place the keeper screw here

 It's important to make sure that you put it in the flat part beneath the roller tube so

 I'm going to screw this directly into the flat part of the extending piece.

 Now that the roller tube is in place and working, the next step will be to adjust the end tips

 so that it fits in the track, it's centered in between the track.

 In order to do this, you're going to need to pinch the finger clips together, make sure

 that they are centered, and then you can adjust the threaded end tips either in or out.

 A good rule of thumb is to put the inside edge of the end tip will line up with the

 inside edge of the track when the finger clips are pinched together.

 Now that the end tips are adjusted properly, the next step will be to place them into the

 Now that the shade is installed and operational, the next step will be to install our angle

 To put this on, this bottom lip right here is going to fit up to the bottom lip on our

 It's going to fit over here like this and you'll notice that the angles will match up

 Once the security box is in place, we will attach it using the number 8 by 1 half self

 Those are going to mount through, there's three holes on the angle security box, two

 Now that the security box has been mounted to the bracket plates, the next step will

 be to mount this top lip back against the wall so that there will be no access to the

 Now that the security box is installed, all you're going to have to do is make sure you

 wipe everything down, check that the shade is working properly, and then clean up any

 Each level lock with the angle security box should take you about between 15 to 20 minutes

 per shade depending on what kind of material you're mounting into.

 So assume for your timing purposes that you can get between 3 and 4 shades completely

 Melt some butter in a pan and you want to pour the melted butter over the walnuts.

 has thickened, you want to add the butter coated walnuts and let it sit in the sauce

 You want to make sure that you separate the walnuts while cooling them down.

 be afraid to get dirty and use your hands to mix so the shrimp is coated evenly with

When you're done cooking, place your shrimp on a paper towel to drain out

 Add curry powder, cinnamon stick, curry leaves and carapinchia.

 Okay, now we're back and I'm going to show you how to do the rice.

After I drain this and look for water, I'll go over this and let

 you that you should not use a lot of oil because if you use a lot of oil, the lettuce will

 the joy that you're going to have while you put the bite in your mouth.

At this point, if you like, you can also add a little bit of saffron.

And when I'm doing rice with the lettuce at the bottom, I let my rice to cook

 a little bit more than normal because I don't want to put the rice on a high heat.

 Okay, now I'm going to turn this down to low and just let it cook.

I had four, two and a half cup of walnut, half a cup of pomegranate

 And I had four pieces of chicken, skin side down, fried it in onion.

 you how I add this, because I've already cooked the Fesenjoon that we're going to serve.

This is a wonderful tutorial on how to create different types of chords.

 Once you know the principles of how to take a simple C major chord, which is C, E, and

 G, and make it into a minor C minor chord, you simply take the middle note and lower

 it a half step or to the next black key down, and then you have a C minor chord.

 important about this is if you're writing music and you want to create happy and sad

 chord qualities, C major is a happy sound, but lower the middle note of any major chord

 a half step, and you have a C minor sound, or a sad sound, sad or mysterious.

 can take this a step further and take a minor chord and take the top note and lower it a

 a seventh chord is going back to the major, C major, C, E, G, and add a minor third on

 top of that, which is one, two, three half steps up from the G. So if you have a C major

 chord, and you want to make a C major seventh, you go count up one, two, three half steps

 and take the fifth note and go up a half step to raise it to G sharp.

 for a minor chord, take the minor chord and lower the fifth a half step to create a diminished

To create a seventh chord, go back to the major and go up a minor third or three

 this is major, D major, to create the minor you lower the third a half step for D minor.

 To make it diminished, you take the fifth note and go down a half step for D minor diminished.

 To create a seventh chord, go back to the major, D, F sharp, A, and add a minor third

 chord on any note by making sure that the distance between the first and the second

 note is one, two, three, four half steps, and the distance between the third and the

 top, or four half steps from the first note to the second and then three half steps to

E major, E flat, G, B flat, then you lower the middle note to G flat, and then

 back to the E flat major and add the minor third on top for E flat major seventh.

 twelve minors, twelve diminished, and twelve augmented, and twelve seventh chords attached

 I like to start with folding at the top to bottom root, so I'm going to do that first.

 And the proper way to fold a piece of paper in half, there is a correct way, line up the

 You get less error when it's all added up if you do it that way.

 Again, I'm lining up the corners, nailing the center, and sweeping to the outside.

 I want you to notice that I'm opening it up, but I'm leaving it as a mountain this time.

 I'm just going to fold that so you can kind of see that other crease there.

 So the next couple of creases are going to run from this corner up to this corner, and

 So we're starting to narrow it, and we're going right across here.

 Now we're going to do the other side from right there to right there.

 Now for a check on accuracy, you can see that if your layers are overlapping right there

 So I'm going to rotate this so that the top of the plane is sticking up now.

 I'm going to take this point and right here where the creases meet, we're going to go

 I'm going to push in just a little bit here for the next couple of moves.

 We're just going to fold this creased edge right down to the center crease.

 Now as you do that, you're going to want to hang on to this flap here and make sure it

 If you start to fold it over, you can see that that flap, it wants to move on you.

 Again, you have to control that center point as you make the crease.

 If you take care to control the layers underneath as you go along, you have better results.

 I'll push in even a little bit further to show you that we're going to flip that guy

 It's a bit like the Nakamura lock, like the plane design that comes with your Power Up

 It's going to hold the plane in half when we fold the plane in half.

 We're going to follow that crease that we made right down the center of the plane.

 But this plane is much easier to learn how to control the Power Up 3.0.

 Now the fuselage is going to be about twice as tall as this little tab here.

 So if you can picture that little triangle about twice as tall.

 We're just going to fold right down the body of the plane here.

 Now this plane was adapted from the Buzzard in my first book, The Gliding Flight.

 And what I did is add that little locking fold and I'm also adding winglets.

 And they weren't really required for the Buzzard, but they are for this plane.

 Now winglets will add some structural integrity down the length of the wing.

 They also add a feature that's called effective dihedral angle.

 Now dihedral angle, that's positive dihedral angle with the wing swept upward like that

 This adds more effective dihedral while keeping the wings flatter and giving you more flight

 So that just means when the plane rocks to one side, you get a little added moment of

 And this will help stiffen the wing as you're learning how to fly and make the plane more

 The best powered paper airplane contraption out there on the market.

 And after you have a little fun flying this plane, I hope you come by my Kickstarter campaign

 our Saturday workout, trying to do some routines and strength training.

 just focus on freestyling, so we're doing a lot of reps, repping out until we can't

So today we started with a warm-up routine I like to do, which is a muscle-up

 Another muscle-up, four bar dips, then I hang for four seconds, six, eight, and I go

 And then after that we did a muscle-up, straight bar dip, pull-up pyramid, which consists of

 two muscle-ups, two straight bar dips, two pull-ups, and then we go four, six, eight, and ten.

 After that we did a pull-up push-up pyramid, two to ten and back.

 We did a hanging routine, which consists of a five-second hang at the bottom, a ten-second

 hang at the top of your head, fifteen seconds above the bar, ten at the top of the head,

We did a full dip pyramid, two to ten and back, and the goal today

 was to try to get as far through the pyramid as you can without coming off the bar and touching

 And then Moises and Hov put together a nice little routine that consisted of leg flutters

 in pyramids, it keeps it interesting and fresh, and it allows me to try to move through

 routines quicker instead of just doing standard sets of ten and twelve with a couple minutes

 do another dip and push-up pyramid and probably call it a day because we're all really hungry

 and we want to go get some food, and hopefully our wives have some food for us.

 Today I'm going to show you guys how to install a bar light that I'm using to make a vanity

 This is what we're going to do to plug in the bar light since I'm not, you know, an

 Which these are about 5 bucks at Home Depot or you can go to the dollar store and get

 I just bought mine at Home Depot just to get it out of the way.

 Instead of plugging the bath bar in on and off all the time, I bought one of these just

 so, you know, I could have the option to just turn it on and off whenever I want.

 Now this black thing at the end, obviously I don't know what that is.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to grab the scissors and I'm going to actually just

 Now inside there are also, I'm not sure if you can see, copper wires in there as well.

 So what we're going to do is, and you need to be really careful with this to make sure

 Now you've got to do this part really carefully and make sure not to cut the wires, the copper

 So I'm going to take my scissors and I'm going to just like gently cut the plastic and I'm

 It'd probably be easier because with the scissors, like I said, you might just cut the whole

 So once you get the plastic off, you're going to pull it completely off.

 So now you're going to go back to your bar light and here where you have the white and

 the black, you're going to hook each one of these to each one of these.

 Another way to do that is you're actually going to have to twist it.

 So you're going to put these two together and you're going to just twist it.

 Twist the wires pretty much just around each other and make sure they're in there pretty

 You can also do it with pliers if you prefer, if you don't want to use your hands.

 So what you can do is, this actually comes with these tops, the bar comes with them.

 So you're going to just put them right over the wires so they just never touch each other

 Now it's a little bulky, but if you prefer you can also get black electrical tape and

 Now as far as light bulbs, you have a ton of different choices on what kind of light

 Also make sure that while you're doing all this, nothing's plugged in.

 And if it's for a vanity mirror set, you do want to use daylight bulbs because it's a

 Or especially if you're shooting videos like I am right now, you want it to be a lot brighter.

 It's a little bright, but I'm not sure if you can see it very well.

 And today we're going to be doing an unboxing of a Canon EF 7200 F2.8 lens that we just

 This lens we actually bought at Amazon.com and actually got here pretty quick.

 Part of the Prime membership, so it got here actually in two days, so which is nice and

 And this lens, I was actually hoping to get it like next year or late next year just because

 of the cost, but I was able to splurge a little bit and the wife gave me the go ahead, so

 Yeah, and like everyone said it's a really nice quality and it is.

 This was expensive enough and there was no way I could justify getting the IS version

 Okay, and this lens itself is actually pretty heavy and they said the IS version is even

 heavier so, yeah, this should be more than enough lens and for the type of shooting that

 I'll be doing, I'll probably be doing more outdoor sports type so, hopefully, IS, not

 So, hopefully, I'll get a chance to throw it in the 5D Mark II soon and I'll hopefully

 be able to give a review, see how I like it and see if it works for me not having IS.

 So, I guess this is probably one of the last of the lenses I'll get because it probably

 have pretty much covered, what's that, the range that I need to cover.

I just wanted to make a quick guide on how to get your PS3 controller

So I recently did this because I picked up the game Speedrunners,

 which is a lot easier to play with a controller than a keyboard.

 this linked, but these are the two things that you need first of all.

 Let's see, so once you have both of these things installed, make sure you open up your

This is where it gets a little bit tricky, but you go to your driver manager.

Okay, so once you go to your driver manager, so I believe in here

Go to your Better DS3, and then you should see the DualShock 3 right in this little

So as you can see, I have the cross set to Z, circle to X, space bar for the speed

 boosting, and then on the D-pad you have all the arrows set up.

 Hey, it's Jake Mace here with another lesson on how to use Tai Chi to improve your golf

 There's the mental focus, there's the physical body being conditioned and improved in terms

 Okay, the human body can go, you know, weeks without food, days without water, but only

 So, we're going to try to use that to our advantage on the golf course.

 What I want you to try is first, on all of our videos, we're going to have an exercise,

 I want you to have your legs in a rooted position, shoulder width apart, kind of like

 I want you to take your shoulders, roll them back and drop them down.

 Now, the goal is going to be to breathe in your nose for five seconds continuously.

 Fill your lungs up, and then once the five seconds goes past, exhale for five seconds

 Now, take your hands and touch your belly button and then go two inches below it.

 We want to talk about the ability to breathe low into the stomach.

 You want to breathe deep because you want to keep a center of gravity.

 The minute you start breathing high, your weight's going to be too high, your breath

 I've even heard Nick Faldo talk about this a lot, the ability to breathe low into the

 And Tai Chi has been using this kind of breathing called Dan Tian breathing for over a thousand

 So at first, I want you to touch that region right now, right about where your waistband

 I want you to breathe in for five seconds and push those hands out with your stomach

 So I'm trying to breathe in as deeply as I can without the chest moving at all.

 I want you to try this about two hours before your round takes place.

 You're going to get up from your chair at your work, home, wherever you are, and do

 Then I want you to keep the same stance and incorporate the arms rising as you breathe

 This is the most classical of all Tai Chi moves called Chi Si or rising and sinking.

 So breathing in, kind of like we're swimming in water, slow, smooth, transitioning from

 Keep your shoulders dropped and especially on the exhale, feel like a wave of relaxation

 is overtaking every muscle fiber and every cell in the body, permeating deep into the

 So this relaxed feeling takes away any kind of negativity or stress in your entire body.

 Feel like you're cracking the ground beneath you with such powerful rooting.

 We can use this breath when we're in the car driving to the round.

 And especially we're going to use this breath during our pre-shot routine and during our

 We're going to show you how to do that right now by going to the course, practice the breathing

 I'll see you out there in about a couple seconds to use this for our full shot.

 So now that we've practiced the breathing of Tai Chi, let's use that breathing and use

 that focus that the breathing gives us to improve our driver swing and bring it into

 So the number one thing I want you to worry about is don't ever let the breathing and

 the meditation slow your play down so much that your playing partners hate your guts.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to stand behind the ball.

 But this time when I visualize the shot, I'm going to take a deep breath to my Dan Tian

 See the beauty part about the meditation that we get when we do Tai Chi and how we apply

 It's all on the inside making you feel amazing and they have no idea what you're doing differently.

 So when I'm visualizing my shot, I'm going to breathe in to my Dan Tian, breathe out

 and then go for the ball and keep that image of what I want the ball to do in my head.

 But once I address my shot, I'm going to breathe in as I position my feet, breathe out as I

 I'm going to take a look at my target, breathe in, bring it back and rehearse the path.

 And then what's going to happen is the nervousness of your shot and of your round goes away.

 The focus your mind can get is amazing and hopefully your shots will go longer and straighter

 So practice your meditation at home, practice it in the car, practice it at your office

 So what I'm going to do today, just cook a little simple dinner.

 Still got some of the bone in, in the front, small piece of the bone.

 Been raining today and everything, so I'd rather just cook a little something on the

 Blacken it up with some olive oil and this tango spice, Cajun rub.

 You know, got hold of some good jumbo shrimp down here, so get those together and get cracking.

 I just do mine on one side, then once I get it in the pan, I do the other side to make

 I got some butter, melted butter, about two tablespoons over here.

 Just some, that parquet squeezable butter, about two tablespoons.

 About a tablespoon of Worcestershire sauce, teaspoon of minced garlic, half a teaspoon

 So it should work pretty well on this blackened ribeye that I have.

 My skittle is already coming up to temp, starting to smoke a little bit.

 So I'm going to get that, throw this on, and then I'll get back at you midway through the

 I got to keep it on because I don't want my house to get smoked up real bad.

 So I'm going to roll it right along, get my steak bottom up to medium, and be ready to

 I also am going to do a stuffed baked potato with it, a loaded baked potato, whatever you

 What I did, I just put a little steak weight on top of it so it can go ahead and cook a

 little bit faster so I don't have to call the fire department out here.

 So I was able to do it in the house and be kind of successful, but it did smoke it up

 So I suggest that people that don't want a little smoke in your house, don't do this

 That steak sauce that I made blends right in with the blackened steak.

 Not even able to finish this whole thing, so eat some of it this evening.

 And today I want to show you all how I do my own bantu knot outs.

 What it is, is a natural hairstyle that if you coil your hair a certain way, it allows

 you to form natural, bouncy, full curls without using heat at all.

 The thing I like the most about this hairstyle is that it doesn't matter whether you have

 short hair, long hair, thick, thin, if you are fully natural or just now decided to transition

 There really is no wrong way to do this style, so please feel free to make any adjustments.

 For me, this is my interpretation of bantu knots, so grab your tools, grab your products,

 I allowed my hair to air dry about halfway so that I can reduce some of the shrinkage.

 Now I'm using my wide tooth comb to part my hair off in small sections.

 I like to use small sections because my hair is long and if the sections are too large

 and I use too much hair in my bantu knots, my curls won't be as defined as I would like.

 Now you can grab a dime size of your favorite curl defining moisturizer.

 I always twist my hair going away from my face simply because that's the direction I

 Don't worry about twisting too close to the scalp because as we start to create our bantu

 knot, it will get tighter and tighter and you don't want it to be uncomfortable.

 Now you can start to wrap your hair around and around until you form your knot.

 If you need to, you can secure the ends of your hair to the base of your bantu knot with

 This will keep it from unraveling as you carry on about your day or as you sleep at night.

 Take a dime size of your favorite moisturizing curling cream and apply it from your base

 to your ends, focusing on the ends because that's the driest part of the hair.

 Now you can start to twist your hair in the direction you want the curls to go.

 So I'm twisting counterclockwise and then I'll start to coil the hair counterclockwise.

 Make sure to twist all the way down to the ends so that the curl goes all the way to

 I'm done twisting all my hair so now it's time to add a little bit of oil to the scalp.

 I prefer to use Simplicity hair oil blend but you can use a light oil like grapeseed

 Now that we're done, the only thing that's left to do is to allow your hair to dry.

 I allowed my hair to air dry overnight so now it's time to untwist these bantu knots.

 I like to rub a little oil all over my hands so that as I'm untwisting my hair I'm actually

 When unraveling your hair, make sure to twist in the opposite direction that you twisted

 Be gentle when you're unraveling your coils just to make sure that we're not putting strain

 When separating your coils, make sure to start at the roots and work your way down to the

 I prefer just a little bit more volume so I'm going to take my afro pick and go in the

 Use your fingers to separate the curls and fluff them out until you're happy with the

 Make sure to subscribe to this YouTube channel as well as follow me on social media.

 Hi, I've been asked to do a brief instructional video on the solo for Day Tripper by The Beatles.

 I'll show you how I play it, which may or may not be altogether accurate, but I think

 So anyway, I'm going to be showing you on this 1966 Epiphone Casino single pickup, which

 Anyway, to get started here, I start at the second fret, and the Day Tripper solo starts

 out with the typical Day Tripper riff, but it's an octave higher.

 But here's how I play it, and I'm going to play it through once, and then I'll break

 So that is A string, second fret, open D string, hammer-on D string, first fret, D string,

 fourth fret, G string, fourth fret, G string, second fret, back to the D string, fourth

 fret, B string, second, D string, fourth, G string, second, G string, fourth.

 Now, the second part of the solo starts right at this point, but I switch to my middle finger

 So again, we're here at the third fret with the G string, middle finger, slide up to the

 And then you come in here behind with your index finger on the B string, third fret.

 Then you come in with your ring finger on the B string, fifth fret, and bend.

 Then come in behind with your pinky and catch the E string, fifth fret, unbend.

 Then you come up here to the eleventh fret, you can see that, to the twelfth, that's E

 So again, here at the eleventh to the twelfth, and then here at the eleventh and twelfth

 the water just hits each little hill and valley and spins it like crazy

 here's just a quick close-up of the stand so you can see it how I bent it together

 that's just a two inch bolt and then you just drop it right in there like that

 so we just need to cut out the bottom now of the three liter bottle.

 put the one liter bottle like bottom to bottom there and cut carefully with a very sharp knife

 this is from a three liter bottle but I don't see any reason why you couldn't make one out

 I'm sure if you hook a motor up to that the right way you can definitely get some electricity out of that

 My fuel gauge light went out, but might as well replace them all.

 Some of them will be a Phillips, but on mine they're a T20 Torx.

 You're going to have to pull on that plastic trim around the cluster panel.

 So the best way to do it, and the fastest, would be to take a credit card or debit card

 or something, stick it up in there, and kind of pull down on the...

 Then you just kind of wiggle it out, pull it out, and try not to scratch the glass.

 How you do that is there is a little tab at the back of the connector that you'll feel

 you have to push in, and then this white part here, you have to slide it out.

 Be careful not to break this clip because then the harness won't be secure inside the

 There's a little clip on the back and then this little tab, same thing.

 And then there's another connector on the other side that's the same way.

 But what I'm going to do, I'm trying to do it with my hands, I can't really.

 But I just push this one in with my finger in the back here, and then I take a little

 screwdriver and I push this tab back just far enough so that it's over the lock.

 And then I take my finger out of there and then I just kind of push it back the rest

 You'll probably want to replace, well obviously the burnt one, but replace all three green

 ones as well as the two white ones and your turn signals as well.

 And that will pretty much take care of all the lights that usually go out.

 Hi, I'm David from Grill Pro Australia and I'm here with Rob Green from Smokingpit.com

 in Tacoma, Washington in the US and we've got a Yoda Wichita offset smoker here and

 I'm going to show you how to correctly fire it up and we're going to put the correct amount

 Okay, here we've got the Wicked Good lump charcoal and we've placed that in the fire

 As you can see it doesn't require a lot to efficiently run the Yoda Wichita.

 We're going to have the main door open as well in the cooking chamber and the damper

 Okay, what we've got here is a wee burner that we're going to be using to light the

 Okay, what we're going to do, we're going to get all the lump charcoal lit and then

 once it's all effectively lit we're going to keep the door open until it gets a nice

 Once we have the lump charcoal lit, as you can see, we're going to close the door here

 leaving the damper wide open just until the charcoal ashes over.

 Okay, once the lump charcoal has ashed over nicely we can start adding the wood.

 We're putting some hickory on here, although in our case we'll be using red gum or something

 like that and what we'll do now is just leave the door open until the wood catches nicely.

 So when the wood's nicely alight like this we're going to close the door, we're going

 to leave the damper open fully and when the pit reaches around 200 degrees we'll then

 We're now at 156 degrees Fahrenheit which is around 88, 89 degrees Celsius and we're

 Okay we're now at 223 Fahrenheit and what we're going to do, we're going to close the

 damper down about halfway just to slow it down a bit, regulate our temperature.

 Okay we're now at 235 degrees Fahrenheit which is around 112 Celsius and we've just moved

 the damper back a little bit and just to regulate the flow of air and you can see over here

 that we're producing a nice blue smoke, it's not too white so it's going well.

 Okay I'll just come around here and no point firing this up without putting some nice meat

 So we've got our beef roast that we've just put in here and we've solid injected it with

 Okay we're going to cook the beef in here until we get the internal temperature of the

 Well the meat's reached 140 degrees on the inside which is 60 degrees Celsius.

 Okay we've rested now for about 20 minutes so let's unwrap this and take a look.

 You can just start to see what we injected into the meat, the solid injection that we did.

 So we've cut it up here and as you can see this is the solid injection that we put in earlier.

 So we've shown you how to correctly fire up a Wichita and then cook some great food on it.

 Hello YouTube, today I am going to be rebuilding a brake caliper.

 So the next thing you've got to do is take some kind of a tool, and there's a flat o-ring

 I bought a new, I call this a flat o-ring, just because that's what a buddy of mine calls

 The next thing you've got to do, I've already got my brake home set up.

 I'm just giving it a light honing in here to clean up the surface a little bit.

 As you can see, all the oil has flowed out of there, but that's okay.

 If you've got any kind of corrosion or anything, get everything nice and smooth.

 Now, this piston is in great shape, but if you've got any kind of one tiny little pit mark right there, I'm not going to worry about that too much.

 But if you've got any kind of a ridge built up or any kind of little pitting on this piston, just take you some light sandpaper and clean that pitting off if there is any.

 But it was stuck in the bore when I went to do my brake job, so I decided to hone it out just a little bit and make everything free up, free up everything so it'll move again.

 Next thing to do, I will clean this up with some kind of brake cleaner, some kind of evaporative cleaner.

 And once that's all done, I will have part two and I will show you how to put this thing back together.

 Thanks for watching, and I hope you like these videos and subscribe.

 What's going on everybody, Zachary with the Speed Bag Skunk here.

 Coming to you today with a little bit of a reminder of speed bags and the sizes that

 We're going to look at this right here is an extra extra small speed bag skunk special.

 This right here is going to be your larger bag for beginners, I suggest the bigger one.

 For kids, I don't suggest the bigger one, it's a little bit harder for them to control.

 That's going to be like something to our size, adult size, be about a medium.

 So they're going to look at a small, not an extra extra small, but a small bag the same

 We're setting the bags up, we always want the bottom of the bag level to the bottom

 Now the medium bag for me is going to drop a little bit lower than my chin, which is

 As long as my head can fit underneath the platform here, it's going to be fine.

 But when you put the extra small bag on here, it's going to be a little bit above my chin,

 which is still fine, you know, again, this is what I'm looking at here.

 And this is going to be a little bit more for, you know, of course, trying to get the

 Not necessarily that it goes faster, but it's just a smaller target to be able to

 As far as speed bag platforms go, I definitely suggest an Everlast adjustable speed bag platform.

 But I definitely see that sometimes there's a lot of shaking on the platform.

 You need to make sure that you stabilize that with either another board that is going

 to go up into your stud inside here, because you're already into two studs in the wall

 So to stabilize it, you can always find a stud right here or stabilize that really good

 Or the easier way, which would be sandbags or weights or something that's not going to

 And I decided that I was trying to get a squeak, so I got some JB Weld and JB Welded where

 it actually does not adjust now, because the adjustment, I guess, was making a squeaky

 It's going to take away a lot of your speed and a lot of your rebound, so that's why you

 As far as your swivel goes, a ball hook swivel, S-hook swivel, metal or plastic.

 You can pretty much do whatever move you possibly need to with that swivel.

 The other swivels are good for a basic rebound, not this, because the swivel is going to more

 So once you do try and you start to change directions, it's going to be a little bit

 more difficult for you to be able to do it at your top potential speed.

 So ball hook swivel, sturdy platform, and you'll be ready to start up for the next video,

 which is going to be starting out, where we're all going to be starting out.

 So keep watching and make sure you tell everybody to subscribe to Speed Bag Scum and keep on

 We're about to make some awesomeness using the awesome products from Onnit.

 Let me tell you a little bit about why I like to do a vinaigrette.

 Two, when you go buy something in the store, read the ingredients list.

 See all the different things that are making it shelf stable and keeping it there for, I don't know.

 And the other thing is, it's a little bit more time and cost efficient.

 So you say, how does it save me time to make my own vinaigrette?

 You should be getting a lot of greens, a lot of raw vegetables.

 No matter what type of diet you're doing, you need those things to push everything else out of your body.

 If you're not getting those things out of your body, you have problems.

 Go spend money on a good salad dressing and see what it's going to cost you.

 And what I'm looking for is about a 2 to 1 or even 3 to 1, depending on my taste preference, ratio of oil to vinegar.

 I've got a nice balsamic de moderna, which is the traditional place of making balsamic vinegar.

 We're going to think that it's sweet, but really to bring out the sweetness of the blackberries,

 But to bring out the sweetness, we really need to add some honey.

 And it's just cool to be able to use all these great products and make something so awesome.

 I'm going to use 2 of their little included wooden spoons of salt.

 So I'm going to add just a splash of water and then I'll adjust the consistencies after I blanch it.

 That means one single consistency throughout the whole dressing.

 I'm not really looking to get any textures out of my salad dressing.

 I'm going to add a little bit of water just to thin it out a little bit.

 And this has been Chef Kaz coming to you with on it awesome products from the future.

 Hey, this is G-Man, and I'm going to show you how to make a really, really, really good

 Okay, so what you're going to need, you're going to need a gasher and an energy ring.

 You can use any face bolt, but I'm going to use bull, but for no reason, just because

 And a storm pegasus spin track, and a storm capricorn performance tip.

 So what you're going to do, you're going to take, you are going to take this.

 So you're going to take that, put it in there, so it's nice and secure.

 See these little things right here, you're going to, and those holes right there on the

 Then you are going to take this storm fusion wheel, put it in until it makes that clicking

 Then you're going to take this spin track, storm pegasus spin track, put it right there,

 and you got to make sure these triangle parts are like where these triangle parts are, right

 Then you're going to take the storm capricorn performance tip, put it on, it can be loose

 Do it until it clicks, and if it doesn't click, just do it a lot.

 Probably not going to be able to keep up with it, but here we go.

 And so that's how you make a really, really, really good attack type.

 See you later and the next video I'm going to make is probably a good stamina type.

 Hey guys, we're going to do one more tune from the Neil Young Living With War album

 I thought I'd make it a quick one since I've got to get back to work, and actually earn

 C, G, F, and you add the G with your pinky on the third fret of the E string.

 But I guess I'll never know the truth If you were really all alone

 Very simple too, just had to get a quickie in there before I headed out.

 Hello, welcome to the next episode of Ori Flame Nail Care Academy.

 This is one of those situations in which it's good to have strong and healthy nails because

 you simply cannot afford to have splitting or peeling nails when you need to look perfect.

 Moreover, while traveling you don't always have enough time to do a full manicure.

 It's just more convenient to take good care of your nails on a daily basis so that you

 That's basically why today I'm giving you tips on how to keep your nails healthy and

 Harsh detergents dry and weaken our nails and we don't want that.

 Well, actually maybe they're not so fancy and they don't look great with my outfit but

 I always use these gloves when I do my housework and please do the same.

 I know that in our daily rush we forget about things which are really little but so important.

 Each night before going to bed I apply a thick layer of hand cream on my hands and sleep

 Thanks to that in the morning the skin on my hands is soft, velvety and simply looks

 And right now I will teach you how to do manicure without harming your nails.

 As you can see I have a nail file and nail buffer set and I will teach you how to buff

 Remember to file your nails with smooth moves in one direction only.

 Shining not only improves the look of your nails but it also stimulates the blood circulation

 in the nail bed which makes the nails grow healthier and stronger.

 Still, keep in mind that you should buff your nails only once a month.

 Before you start painting your nails with your favorite color you should first apply

 I am using Oriflame Nail Shield which contains calcium and vitamin E and strengthens the

 Today I am just applying it as a nail nourisher and won't be covering it with a color polish

 as I just want to protect my nails and give them a natural look.

 It works equally well and protects your nails from becoming discolored.

 As you can see the tips that I gave you are really easy to follow and the end result is

 Next time we will talk about how to stimulate nail growth and give your nails some extra

 I am saying goodbye for now and I need to hurry up or I will miss my plane.

I'm Brie, also known as the Betty Rocker, and you're watching the

I am so excited to make you these delicious chocolate gluten-free

I have not actually tried this recipe before quite like this, so I'm

 hoping that it's going to come out as perfectly as I imagine it will.

 as a pancake recipe, but I used applesauce instead of banana, which I actually happen

Now, banana, of course, is going to be a little bit sweeter than plain

 unsweetened applesauce, so you could use either or in this recipe.

 grain-free, dairy-free, and we're going to be using a little bit of egg white protein

 powder today, just a little bit of coconut flour, some cacao, raw cacao, vanilla, one

 you've got a bowl and a few measuring spoons, we can go ahead and put this together.

 the banana definitely made it a little bit sweeter, and I actually really like that because

 I put a little unsweetened coconut milk on top with some raw cacao nibs and some fresh

So it really just makes all the flavors really pop, the chocolate and the

I feel like I'm eating dessert, but all of these ingredients are really good for me,

 like this recipe in this video, be sure to click subscribe and head on over to thebettyrocker.com

 where I've got so many more delicious recipes, awesome workouts you can do absolutely anywhere,

 and all the information you need for creating a healthy lifestyle of awesome.

 Alright, now that you've got the grip tape tutor, it's time to learn how to properly

 Because, take it from me, that is the most important aspect of the tape.

 What you're going to need is the tape itself, you're going to need a deck, this is titled

 You're going to need something to cut the edges, and you're going to need a file so

 Now, as I said before, the most important part is the alignment.

 But before you align it, it's also extremely important to know which is the front and back

 So as you can tell, the back of the deck is a little bit smaller than the front.

 So look at the board, determine which is the bigger, that's the front.

 And what you're going to do is make sure that the grip tape tutor logo is in the front.

 The back foot is right here, the letters is the back, that's for back foot.

 But before we get into applying it, I'm going to teach you a little bit about the product.

 It is a flip trick foot placement guideline that teaches you the foundational flip tricks.

 Now you put the ball of your foot on and in between the lines that have the same letter,

 So I'd be placing that on and in between the letter and line of choice, depending on which

 Number one thing you want to look at when applying it are these two pop shuvit, stands

 You want to get them right behind the front, but yet back, screw holes.

 And you go like this with your fingers, make sure they're right about there, and you know,

 From there, you look at the front and the back, and you want to line the middle of this

 with the middle of the front, and the middle of the back with the middle of the back.

 And the other trick to it is that you want to have a little bit of the back peeled off

 from the get-go, because it's going to want to worm around, and you want to try to prevent

 So once you get the alignment, which I'm going to try to do here real quick, real quick is

 Because you got to get middle with the middle in all ways, shapes, and forms.

 So place a hand down on it so it doesn't move, pull it back, rip some of the tape.

 Screw holes, pop shove it, symbol means 180, pop shove it does a 180 by the way.

 So roll it on, you don't want any air holes, it's very important.

 And as you can see at the edge, I am dead center in the middle of the tail, right there.

 So now that you've got it back, you're good, you've aligned it.

 Same technique, you want to roll it and press it so you avoid getting any air bubbles.

 But you know, if it's your first time applying grip tape and you get an air bubble, it's

 So curl the edges, make sure you're stuck on the edges real quick.

 Now this is when you're going to want to grab your razor or any very sharp object that's

 So in order to do this, you want to get it about a 45 degree angle underneath, about

 Once again, while I'm doing this, let me just tell you a little bit more about the website.

 Organized it to let the people who are not very familiar with skating in general know

 We have the intermediate tricks, we have the advanced tricks, a separate page for grinds,

 That's where you're going to find a lot of tricks that you don't see many people doing.

 Those are the ones that you're going to learn, show all your friends, and they're going to

 And that would be really, really happy that you did it and want to learn it themselves.

 I use this because it allows me to poke the hole once I file it down.

 When I say poke the hole, I mean the holes for your trucks so you know where they are.

 You get this and what you want to do, same thing, you file the edges.

 You want to grind the grip into the board, as I said, for longevity.

 Hello everybody, welcome back for another episode here at T-Roy Cooks.

 know if you're not familiar with dump cake it basically is where you take all

 the ingredients and dump them into a pan, pop it in the oven, and it turns out

So it's hard to mess it up, but I was inspired to do this by a recent

 video from one of my fellow youtubers, a good friend of mine, John Setzler.

 to have the Man Cave Meals channel and now he's doing the Kamado Joe channel.

 I'll put a link to the Kamado Joe channel down below so you can go check him

 I'll use the minis because they melt a little bit easier than the larger ones.

 And you're gonna need about a stick to a stick and a half of butter.

 If you want you can do this to kind of get the amaretto down on the bottom a

Pop that in the oven and we're gonna go—I got the oven preheated for 350

We'll pop that in the oven and just let her bake until she's done.

 I'll show you here shortly what it looks like and how it tastes.

 Yeah, I got that melted chocolate in there and the cake on top and then you got the pineapple

 But first, I'm gonna top it with a little bit of whipped cream real quick here.

 Hope y'all sub if you're not already a sub and hope you share the video for me.

 When you do, be sure and tell all your friends, T-Roy cooks responsibly.

 Hi, today I'm going to show you how to grow kale using a container.

 So over here we have our little container, we have our pot, and as you can see it's already

 We actually mixed soil that's already in our garden with Miracle-Gro Garden Soil for the

 Over here we have our lovely watering can, and here we have our Burpee Kale Dwarf Blue

 So as you can see, it's rich in vitamins, it's tasty, it requires full sun, and it takes

 Okay, so now that we have all our ingredients for a great kale garden, we have our container

 with soil, we have our kale seeds, and we have our watering can, let's get to work.

 So here are the kale seeds, I'm going to plant them, and I'm going to lightly cover the seeds

 with about a quarter inch of soil, so that should take care of it.

 Now for planting, what I've done is made small holes in the soil, and I'm just going to put

 a seed in there, and I'm going to lightly cover that with soil.

 Okay, so with a couple of seeds that kind of fell out of the hole, I've gone back and

 Now I'm going to be careful with this, I'm going to try to water lightly.

 Yeah, that's good, I'm going to try to get this side as light as possible.

 Alright, so we've successfully planted the kale seeds and we've watered them.

 Okay, so according to Burpee, plants will start emerging in 10 to 21 days.

 So let's hope that in 10 to 21 days, they'll start seeing plants and I'll show you the progress.

 Please subscribe to this channel and head over to tomatogrowsandqueens.com for more blog posts about gardening.

 And I usually have this health complex thing going on when I make a lot of decorated cakes and cookies and things.

 So I decided I could make like whole fruit tarts and not feel guilty about all the sugar.

 Today we are going to make a Mike Wazowski tart from Munsters Inc.

 And then we are going to add 1 cup of old fashioned oats to a food processor.

 Next I am going to add in four pitted dates for some sweetness.

 And you can find all the ingredients and the full recipe in the description below.

 Then we are going to add in 1 quarter teaspoon of cinnamon and coconut oil.

 And then we are going to add in one whole cup old fashioned oats.

 I am going to use the same as the off button, but just tap the pulse button.

 If you just have a pie pan, that is fine too, but spread out your oatmeal mixture.

 I didn't know how thin this mixture could actually go, but I actually had enough to move it up onto the sides,

 While that is baking, we are going to go ahead and make our avocado banana filling.

 To our food processor, we are going to add in the meat of two avocados, as well as one whole banana.

 Once that is all pureed together, we are going to add in a 1 1 half cup almond milk,

 Once your green monster puree is done pureeing, you can add it to the tart crust.

 Now I am going to peel and slice four kiwi, as well as peel and slice a half of a banana.

 Layer your kiwi slices very close together in a spiral pattern around your tart.

 Keep doing that all the way around the outside, then the inside, and kind of pat it down so it is level.

 Now layer a few slices of your banana right near the upper half of Mike Wazowski's head, or the top half of your kiwi tart

 Layer on one slice of kiwi to form his green iris, and then I want to dot on just a couple of raisins to make his pupil.

 Now we are close to the end, but we still have to create his mouth.

 I am going to quarter a few slices of banana, that means cut them in four.

 Choose an area south of his eyeball where you think his mouth may be, and layer on the little triangular shaped teeth.

 He usually has more teeth across the top row than the bottom row, so keep that in mind.

 And to make it look like he has an open mouth, I put more raisins in between the teeth.

 I really hope this gave you some ideas for what to do with all your summer kiwis.

 Mine were extra large, I guess because they are in season or something.

 And I hope this gave you some ideas for what to do with avocados in desserts.

 If you really loved me and the tart, subscribe, like the video, and I will see you tomorrow.

 Our last dish of the night is going to be our dessert, which is our grilled pineapple with rum sauce.

 So with the pineapple you can use either fresh, which is what we used today, or canned pineapple.

 peel, cut off, and de-core the pineapple into four individual sizes.

 So what we're gonna do now is we're gonna put them in a saute pan with a little bit of butter,

 get them a little hot, get them a little grilled, and then we're gonna add our butter rum sauce

 You want to make sure to flip each piece of pineapple to evenly coat each side with butter and the cinnamon and sugar mix.

We're gonna let the pineapple kind of simmer away and cook for a little bit

 so it absorbs the flavor of the butter as well as the cinnamon sugar.

 So we're gonna take it out and then we're gonna finish our butter rum sauce.

 Kind of loosen all the yummy little tasty bits that are at the bottom of the pan.

 We're only going for the flavor because obviously the alcohol cooks out of any dish that you use when you're cooking.

 Adding vanilla ice cream is a perfect way to top off this dish.

 The cool creaminess of the ice cream combined with the warm tangy flavor of the pineapple is just a winning combination.

 Pour the butter rum sauce liberally over the ice cream and the pineapple.

 So this is a really, really simple dessert that you can make whenever you want.

 It's really easy for college students and it's really convenient because it's just five simple ingredients.

 And then if you want to add some ice cream, it just adds the entire dish.

 Not like that, now bring your head into this and turn your head like that.

 You can tuck your knee at this point because you don't have anything to drag your knee

 Rather than come in like this like you're doing, bring your body weight in like this

 You notice how now, let go of your bars, stay leaned over and let go of your bars.

 You notice how you're able to hold all your weight just by your thigh?

 The only thing I see with you right now is you're not looking into the turn.

 Bring your head in and look into the turn where you want to go.

 Your lower body's what's holding you on the bike and your upper body's what's controlling

 So basically when you're doing that you're just kind of like this.

 So basically when you're doing that you're just kind of pushing into the park just a

 It just gets yourself in a tucked position and just try and ride it without ever coming

 Even though you're going to be going slow, act like you're kind of racing it.

 Hi, I'm Margaret and I am a raw food chef and today I am going to make a

 Alkaline kind of a Mexican spicy soup a little bit and I've made other

So I am gonna get started in my Blendtec blender and you don't have to

 have a Blendtec blender, you don't have to have a high-speed blender but it is

If you can save up the money and get a high-speed blender you will be

 Try to get organic, non-GMO and I have about 3 quarters of a red bell pepper

 and here is about a quarter of a cup of cilantro and I washed that also.

 before I took about a quarter of a cup of some sun-dried tomatoes that I've had

 soaking so they'll blend up very nicely and the sun-dried tomatoes those you can

 just take and slice in the summertime when you can get a lot of tomatoes.

 them, put them in your dehydrator and then wait until they're nice and dry and

 make sure when you're checking them that they're completely dry.

 jars and all winter or until the next season you'll have your own sun-dried

 tomatoes and you can season them with Italian seasoning and different things

 oil is very nice for alkaline also and then I have some spices about a quarter

 of a teaspoon of paprika, about a quarter of a teaspoon of chili powder

 getting some Mexican flair there and a half a teaspoon of and I use Himalayan

 That's another nice one and I didn't have a jalapeno so I'm I kind of wanted

 a little bit more spice so I'm adding a little bit about a quarter of a teaspoon

 that's what I do a lot of times when I'm cooking and something quick.

 making this in the blender and it you know I could add maybe about two inches

 of salt and I think I want to put a little bit more chili powder in there.

 can make this kind of Italian and do just Italian seasonings, onion powder,

 garlic powder and I'm going to add a little bit more cumin to this.

 And I have another clean spoon sitting here so I will try it again.

 one person so this is nice if you're just making this real quick or maybe it

 makes two servings to where you can save one for later or have someone else eat

 just going to put all of mine in my bowl and I'm just gonna then I'm going to

I also because cucumbers are so high alkaline I want to get as many

And then my favorite I have some avocado that I have diced up put on top.

 You can also even put some little chopped up tomatoes or some red bell

 am I am gonna take a little bit more lime because I like that lime taste and

 to have a wall to hold on to or like a chair or like a valley bar.

And you're just going to grasp it like this at near their ankle.

 going to push down on you and you're going to push up on them so that it creates like pressure I guess.

 You hold them for eight counts and then you'll release and they'll bring it a little higher.

And for the eight counts that we're talking about it's like one Mississippi

So your supporting leg, so if you want to do your left splits then

 splits you'll have your right foot down and bring your left leg up.

 you're going to bring your right leg a little away from the wall just to start.

 left leg up against the wall, put your hands down and scoot your right leg or supporting leg

 and then you're going to extend your back leg and shift your weight into the middle.

And then on the other side you would have your left leg straight,

 splits, you're going to have your right leg forward and left splits left leg forward.

 you'll have your back leg bent and your front leg straight and you're just going to put your hands

 leg, you just bend your right leg, straighten your left leg, hands on the floor, and pluck.

 to push up your body and kind of like invert your legs in and like shift all the weight to the front

 this is the over splits and it's quite advanced so you should have your splits before trying it.

 for over splits you want to have something to support your front leg so you can like stretch

 and then you can also do it on your back leg but when you do your back leg you have to make sure

And again you can have someone push onto your hip so you can get down.

 or if it's not challenging enough you can find something higher.

 on the pillows you don't want to bend your leg because you're not getting any stretch.

 challenging you can find something lower or if it's not challenging enough you can find something

So we hope you like this video and we hope that it helped you a lot on your flexibility.

 do the stretches every day but don't do too much because then you'll just hurt yourself.

 Hi, welcome once again to Greg's Kitchen, where the food is finger lickin'.

 If you're looking for a chicken recipe, this is the one for you.

 So come on, let's go and see the ingredients and I'll show you how to make it.

 Okay, well this is for a serving of four people, so what we're going to need is

 And of course some salt and pepper, if that's what your taste buds desire.

 Now we're going to add this chicken and fry it until it's cooked through.

 Once the chicken's cooked, we're going to remove it, but leave the juices behind.

 Now we're going to add the shallots and heat those gently, until they're nice and soft.

 Once that stock has reduced by about half, I'm going to turn down the heat to a simmer.

 I'm going to return the chicken, add the sour cream, and I'm going to mix this all through.

 Now we just simmer that until the cream has thickened slightly.

 Alright, well when that's done, all you have to do now is serve it up with either some rice or maybe some pasta.

 Well I've got to tell you, that dish tasted absolutely amazing.

 Hi, I'm Dave Hanson, the inventor of Stuff's Ultimate Stuffed Burger System.

 With Stuff's you can create the perfect stuffed burger in three easy steps.

 Right now we're getting ready to create some perfect stuffs for you.

 Put a ball of meat in there, put it in the bottom, shut it, turn it, press down a few

 We're going to do some bacon, how much I can get in there, and some cheddar.

 All we do is flatten the top out to fill this whole shape right here.

 Oh, got some green olives and some white cheese there with garlic in them.

 And here you go, our Mushroom and Swiss has come off the grill.

 I'm JM and I'm going to show you how to smoke beef jerky just like this on your Mack

 The first thing you want to do when you're making beef jerky on your Mack Grills 2 Star

 General is make sure you've got the right pellets that you want inside the hopper.

 We're going to switch out these hickory pellets for Mack Grills Hazelnut Blend in literally

 Simply unscrew it, set your bucket underneath, and watch how simple this is.

 The configuration you want inside your 2 Star General is quite simple.

 Here's what brand new flame zone covers look like when you get them out of the box.

 This is a perforated sheet of stainless steel that is very heavy duty that allows for the

 flame to go up through it when you're grilling over a high heat.

 However, we're using smoke so we're going to cover those with the flame zone covers.

 Because there's so much beef jerky being smoked today, we're going to use the full upper grill

 It's the exact dimensions of what the bottom grill grids inside the main chamber are.

 It literally doubles the space you can add meat to inside your grill.

 There's also a half upper grill grid if you don't want the full upper, you don't have

 When I open this lid, you're going to see a well seasoned Mac 2 Star General.

 A lot of smoke, a lot of action has seen this, a lot of burgers and ribs have come

 So the two different cuts of meat that are going on your 2 Star General today are quarter

 These have been marinating overnight in the fridge and the ingredient list that I chose

 to use was a soy sauce base with some dried basil, crushed garlic, dried rosemary, a little

 If you ever want that bite, just toss it in there and you see there's a lot of meat to

 Making beef jerky on your grill is not as difficult as it sounds.

 Do you see how it literally doubles the grilling surface of your 2 Star General?

 Four and a half hours from when we first put the strips of meat on the grill, we've

 Your 2 Star General is so forgiving even a beginner cook can get it right the first time.

 If you're wondering how many pellets are consumed in four and a half hours during a smoking

 In case you're wondering what the underside of these cuts of steak look like, here's a

 is to detail the back finger twist, a way to rollfection your way for Victory

Alright, so I've got my brush, some bobby pins, bobby pins, my really bad

 English accent, and first thing we're going to do is section off that hair

Alright, so we're gonna brush that and then we're gonna start that

 Now you're just going to keep rolling until you get to your scalp.

 you're going to take your finger, your pointer finger, the nice one, you're going

 like that just to give it a little bit more stability before I twist.

 bobby pin, you're going to place it inside the victory roll right up at the top.

 just going to put another one in real quick just because that felt kind of weird.

Sometimes they may look a little funky or sometimes they may be close to

 roll-fection when you get there, but don't worry if it looks a little funky.

 little bit of a contortionist act and bring this hand around the side of my

Now I just do this to kind of, before I put that bottom, bottom, bottom

 bobby pin in, just to kind of pet it a little bit, catch up anything that might

 gazillion bobby pins to get that very solid feeling with your victory roll.

 good grip on it and you should be able to wear this pretty much all day without

 things you want to do as well is you want to use two of a vintage hairstyling

 put it on my fingers just because a little bit sometimes can go a long way.

 It all depends on the type of pomade you use because some of it can sometimes

 weigh down the hair, some of it will really, really separate and it'll just

 of roll it on that victory roll because that will help with some of these the crazy

 thing you want to do is you want to get your hairspray and you want to spray this like

 you were born it like you were living in the 80s and you're trying to get that

 want to spray that really good because this should stay whether you go out

 Now, I set the camera up, I thought it was running, and it did run for a couple of seconds,

 and then the battery died, so you're missing a little bit of the beginning of this.

 A cup of butter at room temperature, 2 thirds of a cup of sugar,

 1 large egg, plus 1 egg yolk, and 1 tablespoon of finely grated lemon zest.

 And then you just blend that together until it's nice and fluffy.

 And then you're going to add 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract, and then continue to blend.

 Polenta, which is made from the cornmeal, is a staple in northern Italy.

 Well, we don't have Italian markets or very many specialty food stores here,

 And you stir that together with a little bit of salt, half a teaspoon of salt.

 Then you're going to blend in the dry ingredients into the wet mixture,

 And you can easily mix the dry ingredients in with a hand mixer.

 Scrape the sides of the bowl and form the dough into a ball shape in the center.

 Then you're going to take the dough and you're going to put it into an icing bag or a pastry bag.

 And then you're going to squeeze it out into little S-shapes that are about 3 inches long and 1 inch wide.

 The Ziploc bag method I use in other videos is not going to work here.

 The batter is very thick and the bag would burst if you tried to squeeze it that hard

 because you do have to squeeze quite hard to get them to come out the way they are.

 And they spread very little, so you can crowd them fairly well on the cookie sheet.

 It should be on a greased cookie sheet, one lined with parchment paper or with a silicone mat.

 You're going to pop them into the freezer for 30 minutes until they're well chilled and firm.

 And then you're going to put them in the oven at 350°F for about 15-18 minutes until the edges get brown.

 Alternatively, you could also make little balls of dough and maybe squish them down with a fork.

 Because you'll see once this is done that they actually retain the shape that you piped them into.

 This is a very nice, tender cookie with a little bit of a crunch because of the cornmeal in it.

 Let me tell you the kids absolutely love these little edible sparklers.

 enough room here at the end of the Twizzler to go ahead and stick it on the

 want to make sure that you leave at least a fourth attached into the end of

As you can see the end of the marshmallows here will sometimes slide

 going to give a little drizzle of white chocolate on the marshmallows.

 see you just can kind of keep turning your marshmallows to get the chocolate

Then I'm going to go over here and I'm getting my red, white, and blue

 and create these fun food memories with them because they will treasure this

 sprinklers left and we can go over here and we'll just pour them right back into

 can see and then I'm just going to add it right here on the end.

 going to add them in right here so I won't have a hard time as you can see.

 It's still kind of in the process of being set up so nothing pretty, but it works very

 As you can see I've got PVC tubes running down each row and then just every few inches

 along the way, I don't know if you can see it on the camera, but there's little holes

 So about every 6-8 inches, whatever, wherever it needed to be I drilled a little hole.

 Then it goes down each row and there's just a plug at the end and they all come out of

 But here what we have is we just have a series of elbows, whatever worked for the level.

 I haven't got any water in the rain barrel so I can't really show you how it works, but

 as I did with setting up the rain barrels by the house, I used another sheet.

 And then when I dump in the water, it filters out all this crap here that I don't want.

 So all I did was cut the bottom off a barrel so it's wide open here.

 Just turn that on, leave it run for 20 minutes, half an hour, whatever.

 I just gotta fill this barrel up once every 3-4 days, turn it on, turn it off.

 Makes it a lot easier than having to set up a sprinkler and all that crap.

 I tend to do this just to save some money, save some trips to the store.

 Just put a hose in the end that fit there water tight, zip tie the end, a dozen leaks.

 Then if you have some holes that are too big, you can always just take a rubber band, tie

 it around, and then you can wiggle it back and forth to make the hole bigger, smaller,

 And I'm also gonna get some more PVC because I got all my corn coming up over there, some

 So I just made this one tall enough that the water doesn't come out the end when it gets

 full and then later on I can just pop a new piece on here, a piece of cake.

 Hi everyone welcome to my channel today I am going to show how to do legumes.

 It is requested by one of my subscribers so far that's what you need.

 When you finish cutting the skin from it the first thing you do is put it in the water.

 Ok guys again when you finish cutting you are going to see some on the top here.

 You use your knife to take it off and then you take the one that is on the middle.

 Ok guys when you are using this one right there it is not working good for eggplant.

 So I am using my knife right now because when we leave it it is not cleaning up the

 So when you are done what you are going to do with the eggplant is you cut it in circles.

 Make sure on the bowl you put the vegetable you are going to put your vegetable have water

 When she is finished she put it on cold water to stop the cooking process.

 That's right, and City Line's Tracy Moore is here with us today.

 So let's get started and find out the three great recipes that we will be making that you can freeze ahead.

 I'm going to get my mixing bowl here and you've got a little mixing bowl right there.

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to mix this all together.

And I'm just going to mix this all together to make sure it's well blended.

 Okay, so it's all combined and now what we want to do is we're going to form about 24 meatballs with this.

 And what I like to do is get yourself a nice little ball and then just turn it in a circle.

 Just turn it like this in a circle and you're going to kind of form, it's going to compact everything together.

 So those are going to cook in the oven at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 20 minutes.

 This smell reminds me, my mom used to have a lot of cocktail parties and make meatballs all the time.

 And it smells like my old house on Caroline Street in this kitchen.

 I'm going to get my pot going and we're going to get the sauce.

 Can you grab me a little spoon just to make sure I get all this out of here?

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm just going to heat this up to medium high heat for about three to four minutes.

 Or like you said before, you can make a meatball sub with these.

 And what we're going to do is we're going to save half the meatballs.

 Because I've already taken the other 12 meatballs and put them in the freezer for later.

 That nice, thick, creamy sauce is going to coat all of our meatballs.

 And don't be mad because I just never come to work and I just go out and do other stuff.

 Yeah, but this time around, it was really fun because I learned about sous vide.

 And this is a different method of cooking that requires a little heat, a little vacuum,

 you the basics of how to do this move and then I'm going to give you the tips because

 going to move my camera down a bit so you can see what I'm doing here.

 to start off doing this is you're going to put your right foot underneath it if you hoop

If you hoop to the right you're going to put your left foot underneath it.

 So if I hoop to the left I'm going to put my right foot underneath it.

 well most of the time people tend to start with their hoop behind them like this and

 try and start it from here but I find that if I start it out to the side I can get more

 you're going to do is with your free foot, the one that's not underneath the hoop, you're

 going to put it out in front and you're going to shove your hoop back so it'll go around

 and you kick it around, once it's about there, you're going to put your foot in and it will

 continue to rotate around until it's on top of both of your feet.

 going to take the foot that you shoved the hoop with and you're going to get it up underneath

 that once it gets here where it's on both of your feet is that you pull straight up.

 of people will have the problem of they will either try and kick it out or they will try and

 pull it to the side while they do it and all that does is just hit you.

 foot that you're scooping with is going to be as close to your leg as possible so it gets nice and

 you a ton because if you're not doing that then you're not going to do it right and it's going to

 because while you're learning this it's going to be painful like some hoop tricks are.

 especially is going to be real painful on your ankles and it's going to be frustrating.

 just going to be not getting it but if you can get it once, if you can get it once you will be able

 I can shoot it up to my knees but I prefer my waist simply because it's harder to get it up

I've seen people shoot it up to their chest so whatever works for you.

 something else while learning this trick is you can get some pain with different tricks but this

So a few tips on helping that are take breaks often and some people just fight through

Other people need to take breaks, leave it for a few days, come back and

And there are a whole bunch of tips and tricks like I am wearing a

 rolled up handkerchief around my ankle to give it some more padding.

 girls, will get flat-soled boots that come up mid-calf or to their knees which gives them

So you have something like Uggs or whatever then that will help a lot.

 get some cush and I've actually had people tell me that they bought these shoes just to learn this

 I am going to use spaghetti sauce, part skin mozzarella, and lavash bread.

 This I like because there are only, I don't know if you can see, 50 calories per half

 Ok so what I have done is I have put the bread in one cookie sheet.

 And the way we are going to do it, we are going to do the whole bread, but I am going

 Or if you want the whole pizza to be mushroom, go ahead and do it.

 And the half that I am going to have right now, which is the mushroom one, I cut it in

 Which I am going to eat this two and I am going to give this slice to Andrea, my daughter.

 Hey everybody, this is Jason Robelle from the J-Wro Show, rocking out here

 with the Sun Warrior Tribe, bringing you guys another delicious and vibrant

 Today I'm going to be doing a simple recipe for a hibiscus energy tea.

 So I'm going to show you guys how to do this simply and quickly, and we're

 going to have a whole bunch to serve to your friends and guests at a party.

 You know, summertime's coming up in, well, maybe not a few months, four or

 But by that time, it's going to be hot, and you're going to be ready for

 We have four cups here on the stovetop of filtered water, and to that, I want

 to add some fresh herbs and spices, starting with some fresh chopped ginger

 Next up, I want to add a few stars of star anise here, just a small handful.

 Now normally, you would use allspice berries in this recipe for that authentic

 Jamaican-style flavor, but since I couldn't find any allspice berries, you

 can substitute juniper berries, maybe about two teaspoons should do here.

 Then I'm going to be adding some whole cloves, one teaspoon worth.

 I'm going to add probably three to four of these tea bags of hibiscus.

 Now at this point, what you want to do is bring this up to a low rolling boil

 over a low heat, and cover it for 20 minutes to steep all those flavors

 What I want you to do now is go ahead and take your hibiscus energy concentrate

 here, and over a medium mixing bowl that can take some heat, and just pour

 through the fine mesh strainer to catch all of these lovely bits here.

 What I have set aside here is I've got four cups of room temperature filtered

 As I mentioned before, this hibiscus out of the boiling pot is actually a

 I'm actually going to go ahead and add my lime juice to my room temperature

 In addition to that, I want to add a shot of Sun Warrior's Liquid Light

 magnesium, silica, selenium, zinc, and a whole host of other essential trace

 concentrate in the bowl with my room temperature water very gradually here.

 Your liquid stevia, honestly, it's a matter of taste, maybe a half of a dropper.

 This hibiscus energy tea is going to put some pep in your step.

 This is Jason Andrew Wobell rocking out here with the Sun Warrior Tribe,

 bringing you guys delicious, vibrant vegan recipes and healthy living tips.

 You'll get weekly recipes with not only amazing vegan superfoods, but also

 Follow me on the J-Wro Show here on YouTube for weekly recipes, and of

 course all the social media networks to keep up with our exploits.

 Guys, I'm going to kick back and enjoy this on a nice 70 degree day here in LA.

 I hope you guys dig the recipe, and I will see you very, very soon.

 Now, the thing about that Jamaican restaurant that I went to where I first

 When you walk into a restaurant and you see how happy everyone is behind the

 Hi, I'm Bridget Palmer and I'll be bringing you fresh ideas to create quick and easy meals for kids that are great value.

 I'm using butternut pumpkin, but you'll also need select salt-reduced chicken or vegetable stock, Greek style yogurt, sourdough,

Click here for the full recipe and add all the ingredients to your trolley when you shop online.

 This pumpkin soup is served with cheese toasties, which absolutely seals the deal for me.

 So start by adding a tablespoon of olive oil to a saucepan over medium heat.

 Partially cover with a lid and cook for about 15 minutes or until the pumpkin's soft.

 My soup's been simmering away for 15 to 20 minutes now and the pumpkin's all lovely and soft.

 I'm going to turn off the heat and let this stand for another 10 minutes.

 So spread the bread with the butter all the way to the edges so it gets all crispy and golden.

One cup of shredded mozzarella and then 30 grams of finely grated parmesan.

 Now to make this recipe even easier, you can buy your ingredients online and have them home-delivered.

Be nice and generous because this cheese is going to melt and go all oozy and gooey.

These get cooked in a nonstick fry pan over medium heat for about three to four minutes or until they're

 Okay, so now just cook this side for another three to four minutes or until they're crispy and golden.

 While they're finishing cooking, I'm going to blitz our pumpkin soup.

And to finish this off, a spoonful of Greek yogurt and a sprinkling of toasted almonds.

 Your family will love this easy pumpkin soup with cheese toasties.

 Now if you like that, all ingredients can be purchased at your local Woolies and online by clicking here.

 And I looked and I looked and I looked and I sifted through 20 pounds of pellets and I didn't find it and

 See there's a hole right there and that has to line up with this hole inside of the casing

 Got the shaft in the motor now, I need to feed the screw through

 All right underneath I'm using a 7 64th Allen wrench to hold that screw

 While over the top I'm using a 5 16th driver to drive the nut in

 And a pair of screws on the opposite side that need that hold this into place

 But we're rotating I've got it turned up to high so that's probably about right

 Metal bar those pieces are falling on is the hot finger and that is heating up.

 It goes in the first heat shield it's notched in the front and the back so it fits in the right spot

 And here comes in the grill complete with the ribs I was cooking

 Trigger went out on me when I went to start this back on smoke during my second rip video

 So I'm delayed a little bit, but at least we got it figured out

 And then a little further down, they have the nearly two inch thick.

 And I think that's the one I'm going to get despite the fact that it's a little pricier

 I've got my styrofoam laid out on some protective newspaper and I'm going to lay out my pattern.

 And I'm going to bring it all the way down to the edge of the styrofoam and use some

 So I'm all done with my pattern tracing, it's time to remove that.

 And as you can see, I've got my bunny all traced out onto the styrofoam.

 And now I'm going to use my spatula knife, which is kind of a dull frosting knife.

 Very thin, goes through the styrofoam quite easily as you can see.

 I'm going to use that to make several cuts and to trim out my bunny and get rid of the

 Don't forget your safety goggle before you start cutting or painting.

 Now your yard bunny is going to have some rough edges as you can see.

 That's very easily fixed by taking a piece of styrofoam that you cut away and using it

 So you just need a really light touch to create this nice smooth edge.

 The next step is going to be to put the pattern back on so I can mark his face.

 I've laid out my newspaper with my bunny on top and I'm going to use Design Master paint

 That doesn't look too bad so as soon as it's dry I'll flip it over and get the other side.

 I'm going to cut it in half and insert it into the bottom of the bunny and that way

 I'm going to insert the stick and it's nice if you can cut the end of the stick at a slant.

 This is a nutmeg brown color and I have a paintbrush and I'm ready to go.

 And I'm just filling in the eye and then I'm going to move on to the nose.

 If you want to add an extra layer of fun, just use some spray adhesive all over the

 bunny and then add a little bit of stardust glitter which is nothing more than iridescent

 Another touch you can add is to take a springy ribbon into a bow.

 Because we gave him some nice little stick legs, he's very simple and easy to put into

 But I would recommend that you put your hand around the sticks to place him in the ground.

 So in 30 minutes you're going to have this really cute bunny to place in your yard for

 So enjoy the creativity and Happy Easter from the Seasonal Home.

 And by the way, if you think one bunny looks cute, wait until you see several of them together.

 Initially, I started out with a one six foot strand of this lead.

 I twisted it in my drill to give it a drill bit look and effect.

 So you figure a six foot length, once you twist it into a drill bit looking configuration,

 But I'm going to straighten it out so that they marry up really well.

 The camera looks kind of splotchy and blurry because the detail is not as good as a high

 So seven foods to help stimulate your brain to make you kick the absolute **** out of your exams.

 allowing you to focus for longer and just keep you steady so that you can absolutely kick the **** out of your exams.

 In terms of whole grains, it's all about complex carbohydrates, which is brain stuff.

 And don't be afraid of pimping your porridge up with granola or compote or any kind of ideas just to make it more delicious to you.

 We've got a great recipe here for paella using whole grains, short grain, brown rice or a burrito one, which is great as well.

Your body does not make them so you need to get them for your diet.

 Excellent sources are walnuts, which we're going to make a trail mix and show you shortly using them.

 In a clinical trial involving 100 boys, they found out that the boys that had lower levels of omega-3 fatty acids

 were more behavioral and just struggled studying, whereas the boys with a normal level kicked ****.

You just add it to cereal, add it to porridge, add it into soups, anything to thicken it.

 But amazing for brain function and for circulation, helping your blood flow beautifully to pump your brain.

 which has been proven to really help your cognitive function and to slow down memory loss.

That's a great trail mix to take out on hikes or walks or just to sit at home and eat in front of the telly, whatever.

 Point number four, eat chickpeas, also known as garbanzo beans.

 The highest source of magnesium you're going to get outside of kelp or leafy greens.

 Magnesium helps with the transmissions of messages in between your neurons, transmitting optimum brain muscles.

 Also really good for blood flow to keep your brain just fresh, ready to kick.

Put it in your toast, put it in your bread, eat it off a spoon, eat it off your finger.

 Add chickpeas to a salad or here's two recipes that we've cooked with lots of chickpeas in it.

 You'll see there's a nice tagine and also there is sweet potato falafel cakes up here, sweet potato falafel nuggets.

Avocados, wonderful source of protein, saturated fat, great for blood flow and really good for helping lower blood pressure.

 Great to put with your hummus for your brain function on top of toast or make a hummus and guacamole sandwich.

 So it grows in the soil, part of the ginger family, loads with antioxidants.

 Most people only see it as the dried turmeric which is the yellow one that you'll get in curries.

 Loads of antioxidants, amazing for brain function, blood flow, cardiac, cardiovascular function.

If you can be lucky enough to get the fresh one, chop it up with ginger and make a simple tea with it.

 You can put it in vegetable juice when you're making your veggie juice.

 It's not as readily available so you will have to seek it out into high, decent veg shops or that type of thing.

 As everyone knows, or most people know, blueberries are loaded with antioxidants.

 Great for bringing down oxidative stress which can be linked to causing dementia.

 Studies in rats have found that, I know we're not rats, I do know that.

 But studies in rats have found that when they fed blueberries to older rats, they started performing much more like younger rats.

 Eat blueberries, get them into your porridge, into salads, on your pancakes, anything like that.

 If you're doing exams, do try to incorporate these into your diet.

 Please give us a thumbs up to anyone who's doing exams out there.

 And if you're not doing exams and just want to improve your brain function,

 This podcast is produced by the Harwood Productions Podcast Network.

 To learn more about the network and to find more of our shows, visit us online at www.harwoodpodcast.com.

 This is a podcast to learn more about the network and to find more of our shows, visit

 It's a podcast to learn more about the network and to find more of our shows, visit us online

 Now I'm going to go ahead and put the carrots and the celery and the onion in the bay right

 in the pot and give it a nice little stir so that little bit of olive oil starts to

 Then I'm going to get some ground thyme and I'm going to put about a quarter of a teaspoon

 Then it's time to get two cups of split peas and these are the dried split peas and I'm

 Then I'm going to add eight cups of water and I'm just going to put it all in there

 All we have to do now is start to bring it up to a boil and the way I accomplish that

 is I go ahead and pop the heat on high and it will only take just maybe three or four

 minutes it will start to bubble then I put the lid on and I turn the heat down to low

 Then every thirty minutes or so you're going to want to take the lid off and give it a

 You're going to find that as the peas cook and break down it gets very thick towards

 the bottom of the pot so we want to just keep that stirring so the liquid and the thick

 Now you can absolutely serve this soup as is and it's fantastic but in my house we have

 some leftover ham every now and then and what I like to do is kind of cut some pieces off

 Now if you didn't have any leftover ham you could certainly get some at the deli at the

 store and just kind of slice it into some julienne pieces and that would work fine too.

 And then just at the end of the hour and a half I just go ahead and you can put however

 much you like in but I just go ahead and add it right to the soup and I give it a stir

 and I let it just kind of hang out in there for oh about ten minutes or so and it's just

 this beautiful green pea soup and see really the only vegetable you see now is the carrot,

 the peas and the onions and the celery have just practically dissolved.

 Well you know it's funny a long time ago they used to have you cook the peas in advance

 and then after you'd add the vegetables and liquid and cooked it then you would puree

 it and it was such a hassle but this soup just cooks beautifully on its own.

 Well if you'd like to make this split pea soup just go to our website and visit the

 soups on show notes I'll have the recipe there for you and of course if you have any

 or getting your fingers behind the glass and pulling it off carefully.

 Push down on the two lugs which are shown and then pull the cap away from the main housing.

 as there's no positive or negative but one is longer than the other.

 Now be careful to push the glass on but only using the centre of the glass and

Again really easy to break the mirror here so just go carefully.

 Hi, this is Celine from Soapistar and I'm going to be cutting my new soap which is Jasmine

 Okay, so we're going to use the cutter, same as we used last time.

 And I realised last time I didn't talk about the fragrance at all.

 So this fragrance is Jasmine and Green Tea and it's a blend of two fragrance oils.

 As before I'm going to cut this at an angle, or sorry, not at an angle, straight.

 But I'm going to cut it sideways because I just find it better because when you have

 a pattern top like this, it just keeps the definition of the lines better and the wires

 But you're going to hear the nice Japanese twanging guitar string sound again.

 And the Green Tea is a very citrusy, sort of calming fragrance and I thought together

 Lately I seem to be getting those a little bit more because I'm whisking, or stick blending

 It's beautiful, it's very perfumed but with the citrus from the green tea

 it gives a really nice citrusy fragrance that cuts through that too florally fragrance.

 Which is fine if you like florals but I'm not an enormous fan of them.

 But before you cringe, I can tell you they are so delicious and they're really quick to make.

 Shall we go into the kitchen and I'll show you how to make them?

 So we're going to put a little bit of olive oil to give it some flavour.

 Alright, now we're going to put on a little bit of the tomato paste.

 It's particularly good for prostate health for all the men watching out there.

 I know a lot of people really hate sardines, but they are so cheap.

 Because they're such a small fish, they don't contain a lot of PCBs and mercury like other big fish do.

 But you know, fish is such an important part of your diet because it's one of the best ways to get omega-3s.

 Now it's really important to buy organic spinach rather than conventional.

 You'll notice the salt isn't the white stuff you may have in your cupboard.

 This is a Himalayan salt, a rock salt, which is pink in colour.

 So if you've got the white stuff sitting in your kitchen cupboard, ditch it because that's not real salt.

 So then we're going to put them in the grill for about 10 to 15 minutes.

 Hello everyone, my name is Freddy and welcome to another Hats Fit workout of the day.

 Today we're going to go ahead and do a total body surfing workout.

 Every single one of these movements places a strong emphasis on your core.

 A strong core is very crucial if you want to be a good surfer because it's going to

 The first exercise I'm going to demonstrate is called the squat thrust.

 This actually simulates the surfing pop-up when you pop up on the board.

 You're going to start, you're going to crouch down, put your hands out in front of you on

 the floor, you're going to kick your legs out behind you, you're going to bring your

 It's going to be one, two, three, four, one, two, three, and four.

 The next movement I'm going to simulate is actually going to work on your shoulder flexibility

 What you're going to do is start with a light dumbbell in your right arm.

 You're going to go ahead and bring this dumbbell back behind you, up, and over in front of

 Go ahead and do 20 to 25 repetitions on one arm, and then you're going to reverse hands

 Next movement I'm going to demonstrate is called a split squat with a dumbbell curl

 It works on your strength, your balance, and your coordination.

 Make sure your front and your back leg are in a 90 degree angle.

 Now you're out here, instead of stepping back into place as you do with a lunge, you're

 going to go ahead and come back up and straighten your front leg and your back leg at the same

 Down, and push up off your front leg, and straighten both legs.

 On this movement, of course, we're going to add in a curl and a press.

 You're going to come down, and as you're coming up, you're going to curl and press straight

 The last movement we're going to do is going to be a stability ball push up.

 What you're going to do is just go ahead and get a stability ball.

 Go ahead and put your hands out on the floor in front of you in a push up position.

 Make sure your chin's almost touching the floor, and you're going to press straight up.

 Make sure you go ahead and go to Facebook, to our fan page, and like us.

 Go to www.hasfit.com for our workout instructions, and enjoy the waves.

 The poles are colour coded to match the corresponding pole sleeve entry points.

 Open out the fly sheet and position it in the required direction.

 Insert the poles through the pole sleeves on the outside of the fly sheet,

 making sure that the colour coded poles and the pole lengths match.

 Loosen the tension straps and locate the end of each long diagonal pole at the front of the tent

 it's advisable to have assistance to hold these poles upright when forming the dome.

 Push the grey bedroom pole into an arch and locate it into the pin systems.

 Clip all the fly sheet pole clips to the inserted poles and tighten the tension straps.

 Start pegging out the tent at the front corners using steel V-pegs.

 The pegs should be positioned at a 45 degree angle to ensure maximum grip.

 Pull the tent backwards until taut and peg out the rear corners with V-pegs.

 Ensure that the sides and rear of the tent form straight lines and the ground sheet is flat and wrinkle free.

 Adjust and re-peg any corners where the ground sheet has creased.

 Peg out any remaining poles and pegging points using steel V-pegs

 through the plastic D-rings and pin pegs at the base of the poles.

 The ground sheet can be pegged out at the doors with a pin peg through the corner elastics.

 ensuring that the guy line fabric attachment points are evenly tensioned.

 Insert the porch brow pole and put its ends into the eyelets on the dome pole sleeve.

 The fillet at the end of the brow pole should be pegged towards the front corners of the tent.

 Suspend the inner by attaching the clips on the inner tent to the rings on the inside of the fly sheet.

 Using the red webbing strap, connect the black tensioning strap to the roof of the tent.

 Finally, connect the parts of the pelmet using the Velcro tabs.

 Follow USN's three-step body makeover to help you lose weight with USN Diet Fuel, Fedricut XD and CLA.

 If you're attempting to lose weight but your spouse is a fussy eater bored with salads, don't despair.

 One of our summer body makeover challenge finalists found a tasty solution.

 We know this is going to put a lot of strain on all of those self-confessed junk food addicts like Jen.

 Jen, I know that the body and lifestyle makeover challenge has been going incredibly well for you because I can see the results.

 I've tried to adjust my previous junk food addiction to my new lifestyle.

 I've tried to be more creative with food, try to enjoy it more.

 My husband's doing the challenge with me so he doesn't want to eat the same thing every day.

 I've been as creative as possible and that's why I'm going to show you how to make what we are today so that you can see that healthy eating is not boring.

 Of course you were a massive junk food addict but you have found a secret weapon.

 We got to taste your healthy pizza which blew our minds, it was fantastic.

 Looking at the ingredients, I'm guessing you have found a way around the burger.

 The first ingredient we've got is the main ingredient which is the leanest possible mints.

 Then we've also got some chopped chillies, some chopped coriander, some parsley, an egg white, some garlic, some onions, black pepper.

 And then to serve we're going to use big braai portobello mushrooms, some whole grain mustard, tomato and rocket.

 Gentlemen combines all the ingredients to make homemade patties.

 As an alternative, you may use lean chicken mints and season it to taste using fresh herbs rather than salt.

 I think this is the joy of living in South Africa, certainly living in the Cape, is we get access to these wonderful ingredients.

 I know both you and Ash, your husband, are very comfortable in the kitchen.

My husband Ash loves cooking and because he's doing the challenge with me, we're eating exactly the same.

 And of course you've roped them all into the challenge with you, including your dog, Fetty.

 And then I decided when I did the challenge that he was also going to go on a little bit of a weight loss lifestyle change.

 I'm going to get the fire going so we can cook this guy, not the dog.

 Heat a little olive oil in a frying pan and also fry the mushrooms or preheat the oven to 180 degrees Celsius and bake for 20 minutes.

 Now if you would like this ingredients list, as simple as the ingredients are, sent directly to your phone,

 That's BURGER to 33728 and we will have you well on your way to making your own big fat skinny burger.

 Now, Jenna, of course, part of the battle is kind of re-educating yourself in terms of the nutrition, yes,

 but it's also the supplementation and how to make sure that that is complementing your diet.

 It's a great way to make sure that you're getting the most out of your food.

It assists in toning your body and then it also utilises the fat breakdown and then gives you more energy.

 I always take my CLA's directly after I eat any meal because you can feel it definitely works.

 The supplements are just there to assist you in the whole process.

 Make sure the patties are nicely browned and cooked right through.

 Add a dollop of mustard if you prefer and garnish with a slice of tomato, some fresh rocket and black pepper.

 And it makes it a lot easier getting five meals in a day when you're loving your food.

 But that's where preparation time has to be taken into account.

 Yes, I tend to find that eating five meals a day does generally keep me fuller for longer.

 But then I substitute the mid-morning and mid-afternoon with the 100% whey protein plus.

 For more inspiration, visit Expresso's website and also download free eating plans from usn.co.za.

 Follow USN's three-step body makeover to help you lose weight with USN Diet Fuel, FEDRICUT XD and CLA.

 In this house a furnace is installed but as you can see there is no vent pipe going up

 This creates a dangerous condition because it allows carbon monoxide to enter into the

 So my project today is to cut a hole in the roof and install a roof vent flashing and

 The first thing I need to do is figure out where I need to cut the hole in the roof.

 So I follow the line straight up from the outlet of the furnace.

 I can follow it up and luckily enough there is a sheetrock tape line that just about lines

 So I can see the vent needs to come out just below the peak of the roof.

 And if we go the other way it looks like it needs to come out just the left side of that

 So once I'm on the roof I can cut my hole just below the peak of the roof and just the

 Now up on the roof I've located where I need to put my hole and I've set the roof jack

 Before we're done I need to make this shingle overlap it as well so that the water from

 the rain will flow down and not get up underneath here and possibly cause a leak.

 So if I have this shingle overlapping the flashing that should provide a watertight

 So there's my hole and as you can see it lines up with the outlet of the furnace.

 Back down in the garage I wanted to make sure that my pipe would fit through the hole.

 Now I need to trim away some shingles and make it so that this flashing can go underneath

 I try to push it up and it looks like there's a nail that needs to be removed, which there

 So now there aren't any further obstructions and this flashing should be able to slide

 I just noticed because of the way this falls there's a space right here between the flashing

 and the roof so I think I will trim this shingle so that it will come up over as well.

 That way the flashing will sit flush against this, or sit flat against this row of shingles.

 So I cut away this piece and there is one nail that I need to remove here and then I

 The next thing I will do is I will use a couple of roofing nails underneath here to hold it

 I'd rather not nail anywhere where it's exposed just for the possibility of water leaking

 Now my nails are installed and the installation of the flashing is complete.

Today's recipe is getting out just a little bit later than I had intended.

 I wanted to get this out at the beginning of December, but due to some technical issues

You know one batch of this stuff will make about 90 of these little cookies.

 Now the recipe calls for a quarter cup of honey and a half cup of molasses.

 If you don't have molasses, don't like molasses, don't want to use molasses, you can use corn syrup.

 If you have molasses and not honey, you can use corn syrup in place of the honey.

There's not a heavy molasses flavor in this, but it does add some nice flavor to it.

 But we are gonna heat this until the butter is melted and we can

As you're mixing you're seeing it, you know, it didn't want to go at first,

In here I already have three quarters of a cup of sugar and a half cup of brown sugar.

 I put a little flour in and then I put my spice in and I put a little more flour in to kind of help mix it in.

 The rest of the spice is a teaspoon each of allspice, nutmeg, clove, ginger, and pepper.

 It really does kind of need, because you get the little lumps, especially with spices, especially if you grind your own.

 And if you have fresh ground black pepper that adds such a better flavor to this.

 Now the idea is to just kind of get all the dry ingredients pre-blended.

 After stirring for a minute, you know, you kind of realize that that sugar on the bottom isn't gonna come up.

 Just want to kind of sift through and pull that sugar up so that everything gets integrated in a little bit better.

 Now one of the main reasons you want that to cool is because you don't want to scramble your eggs.

You're gonna start stirring it and it's just not gonna want to come together.

 And you're gonna think oh my god, there's just not nearly enough moisture in this.

 In the end, it will be a very stiff and it will be a somewhat crumbly dough and that's fine.

 Now you keep mixing it till you get to about this stage and I always just give up right about here.

 Yeah, you can see it'll it's dough, but it's not quite a solid piece.

 So when you press it down it likes to hold together, but if you just stir it around on its own, it's all crumbly.

 So once you get it all together, get it packed down, make sure you've gotten all the dry ingredients mixed in pretty good.

It's not like the cookie police are gonna show up and yell at you.

 Just line these about, oh, I don't know, half inch, three quarters of an inch apart on the

 horrible at eyeball measuring things and telling you what the measurement is.

 Now in my oven, these cook for 14 minutes, seven turn, seven again.

Let them cool for at least two hours minimum and then toss them in

 powdered sugar, confectioner's sugar, whatever you want to call it.

 Now really and truly, these are best left for a minimum of 24 hours before eating.

 Two to three days is actually even better if you can stay out of them.

I throw in the powdered sugar, toss them all up, and then I put them in a

 I leave the lid kind of off, a little kitty corner, just in case any more moisture is in there coming out.

 You know, every day or two I give them another toss, make sure everything is good and coated, and then eat, give them away.

 If there's anything you'd like to see, please leave me something in the comments.

 This super future grain is truly packed with all essential amino acids.

 It's going to give you the most nutritional bang for your buck.

 We supply this quinoa from Fried Foods and I hope you start using it more because your family deserves its nutrition.

 I've found the easiest way to use quinoa, if you want to cook it, is to rinse it first.

 Quinoa is very soft and very unique in flavor, but it's really not too strong.

 It takes a great deal to many flavors such as bacon, vegetables, and other things to really jazz it up.

 One thing I want to show you, last month's tip was about powders.

 There's a lot of pastas made from ground quinoa and other things.

 Whether it's in a flour grinder or whether it's just in your blender,

 If you just substitute a little bit of that in your cookies or your baked goods,

 After you've rinsed your quinoa for cooking, you cook it for about 20 minutes at a simmer.

 If you're cooking a lot of quinoa, you maybe want to increase that.

 If you want to cool this for a salad, run it under cold water and get it cold.

 Okay, so I'm going to show you guys how to dye your Barbie's hair.

 I cut my Barbie's hair and, you know, I do it with food coloring because I think it's easier.

 So what you're going to need are gloves because you don't want to stain your fingers.

 I would also suggest putting a paper towel down if you don't want to, you know, stain your counters.

 So the first thing you're going to do is put on the gloves because, you know, if you stain your fingers, it's going to be a mess.

 I am going to use blue food coloring and you want to take your...

 You want to take it and choose the length of hair that you want to dye your hair, Barbie's hair with.

 Then you can, like, put some drops on it, take it, and just rub your fingers through the hair.

 So normally, I'm just testing this out to see, like, what would happen if I dyed my hair with food coloring.

 Because, you know, I'm just making a test to make sure I'm not going to make a fool of myself.

 Okay, I'm just warning you guys, you've got to be careful not to get it on your Barbie's head-based chest areas.

 If you have, like, a dismembered glove or something like I have, I would suggest holding the Barbie with it if you're going to do different types of hair.

 Okay, so now that you have this, you can see, like, how good the Barbie's hair is turning out.

 So, I think it's just because it's becoming so good, I think I might want to try another color.

 It's just, you have to make sure it's important for you to, like, stretch it around or stuff, otherwise, you know, it's just going to sit there like a blob.

 I'm going to keep washing my Barbie's hair to see if, like, how well it turns out.

 I'm not sure how this will work on, you know, lighter, darker colored hairs, because, you know, most Barbies are blonde.

 Um, yeah, so, I'm not sure how well this is going to work on darker hair Barbies.

 Not sure how this is going to work, because, just, you know, just testing it on a cheap little Barbie.

 I'm going to post a video on this to see how well it turns out in a couple weeks, you know.

 Um, I would suggest doing this to a dry Barbie's hair, because last time I did it to a wet Barbie's hair in another video that I deleted.

 Um, didn't work out really well, so, you know, dry Barbie hair, gloves though.

 Um, so, you know, that's how you dye your Barbie's hair with Kool-Aid.

 It also works on people with other color hairs, like, you know, well not other color hairs, but like real people.

 So, you just rub it in for your regular hair, like, um, yeah, see, that's what I did.

 Um, if I ever do this to myself, I think I'm going to wear, like, all rotty clothes.

 If you want to try it, you can just leave the questions and reviews, and you'll see if this will actually work.

 Am going to make a passion fruit cake today for this I am using fresh passion fruit pulp

 Passion fruit, but instead of using milk, I am going to use the passion fruit

 So if you like more sweetness, please feel free to add a little bit more sugar

 Yummy cake that if you can try with fresh fresh passion fruit then using the canned one

 Now I'm going to add passion fruit little by little into the mix

 You put a skewer inside and see whether it's baked because it's full of

 Finished making my passion fruit cake and it looks really yummy

 I'm going to leave this to cool and I'll cut and show you how it looks like

 Son and daughter eagerly waiting to eat a piece of the passion fruit cake.

 This is the passion fruit cake that I made so hope you will enjoy this recipe.

 soap makers are also goat farmers and soap is just one of the products they

 Milk is then heated slowly under medium heat until it reaches approximately 65

Give it a stir and allow it to continue to heat until it reaches 88

 Once at temperature I add 1 quarter of a runnet tablet that has been mixed with

 off the heat, cover the pot and allow it to sit undisturbed for 20 minutes.

 milk has now turned into curds, the solids and whey, the liquid.

 In cheese making the curds are drained and used for the cheese.

 usually discarded but today we are going to use it in our soap.

 Use your favorite cold process soap recipe and mix the lye with only half of

 Then we add the whey and continue to bring the soap to a full trace.

 Once the color is fully incorporated it is time to mold the soap.

 I want to grab like this and get an inside hook and then slide it here, watch your head

 and then of course from right here you're going to kneel and do your, you know, all

 Another straight arm technique is coming up, pushing the back of the shoulder, I'm pulling

 on the wrist to straighten the arm, moving in, preferably, if I can get over here that's

 If I can trip both arms, or both legs, awesome, that may or may not happen though, but that's

 an outside shoulder drive, so we're here and again this is for a straight arm, so if I

 can pull back, I can slide here, whatever, if I get just to this point here and I'm going

 to push, and if I have to, you don't have to put your palm on it necessarily, you can

 put your cutting blade arm into it, just like that, and then I'm going to kneel here,

 You're going to adapt, I want to bridge the gap any way I can, any way I can, even if

 The other one is on the inside of the arm, so that is, this is more of an imbalancing

 move, but it's kind of sliding, slide the elbows on the inside of the bicep or the fully

 elbow, preferably up here, and all I'm doing is this, going really easy.

 The whole idea is to pass the arm inside somehow, what I'm trying to do is I'm trying

 to shove this elbow up here, to where it's almost horizontal, sliding this in here, like

 that, like this, should be cutting the bicep off, and we're going to spin this way, that's

 all it is, nothing fancy, so we're tied up like this, and then all I'm going to do is

 I'm going to get this hand over any way I can, I don't care where your arm is going

 at this point, but I want that elbow, I want to control this elbow, here like this, this

 Push pull, hooking, hooking, elbow against the elbow, underneath the elbow, and I'm stepping,

 Straighten out in any way I possibly can, if I have to step out, cool, that's no big

 deal, but what I want to do ultimately is to get this kind of reaction, it doesn't matter

 which arm, as long as I can get that arm straight, see right here, the second I take this off

 I'm risking you doing something over here, but if I can get this, that's what I want,

This is Selby and I'm going to show you how I curl my hair using the Hot

 hair needs to be completely dry, which you can sleep on it, it doesn't have to be perfectly

I just kind of washed my hair this morning, let it air dry, went

Second thing you're going to need is some sort of a comb or a hairbrush,

You want to make sure that your hair is really nicely combed out before

The tool I'm going to be using today is the Hot Tools tapered wand.

 like this one because it has adjustable heat setting on it, so my hair's not the thickest

 hair so I usually go somewhere close to the max, but not quite max temp.

 it with a little bit of hairspray first, combing it through just on my ends.

 to go section this about halfway down my hair, leave a pretty big section below.

 use a hair tie, an alligator clip, whatever works best for you.

 end, and as you twist your hair you want it to go towards the smaller tapered end.

Another important part is you just slide it out, hold it, hold it, and then

You can play with the sectioning to get a different type of look.

 they fall they really frame the face and don't close the face in.

 I'm going to pull it back up over the curling iron and curl it away from my face.

Now right now you'll notice these curls are pretty tight ringlet-y.

 sure you get a nice mist of hairspray before you touch anything.

 fingers and I flip my head upside down and just take my fingers and break up these curls.

 Find your part again and use your hands to get them into the shape that you want.

 I'm using the tips of my fingers as my eyes in place of using a mirror.

 This will make it easy for me to grasp as I'm doing the cornrow.

 Now I'm going to take one piece, the second piece and the third.

 I'm going to take the first piece and take it under the middle piece and grab the left

I'm going to take my little fingers and push the hair up so that I can grab it

And then I take my fingers and I check to make sure that there's no loose hairs out.

Just waiting for the sun to go down to get a little cooler before we go out to the beach.

 And then I put some rubber bands on the tip because my hair has been freshly cut.

 baby broccoli, has a milder and sweeter taste than broccoli and features thin, tender stalks

 a coulis when you actually use only the product by itself, pretty much.

 a couple of ingredients, such as a tiny bit of shallots, leek and garlic to enhance the

 In a hot frying pan, add olive oil and sauté leek, shallot along with one crushed garlic

 clove and herbs, then reduce heat to low and let cook slowly for about 8 minutes without

 broccolini for about 6 minutes or until tender but still al dente.

And transfer cooked broccolini to a blender and add the leek mixture along with

 parsley leaves, nutmeg and 3 cups of this hot and flavorful broccolini stalk.

 soup is delicious and healthy as is but a little something such as a dollop of whipped cream,

 mascarpone or sour cream with some toasted pine nuts won't hurt.

 topped with a spoon of melting brie or camembert cheese, toasted hazelnuts, lime zest, fleur de sel

Please subscribe, like me on Facebook and follow me on Twitter, Instagram and

 Hello everyone, today I'm going to show you how to make pork roast.

 Alright, so the first thing that I'm going to do is to prepare the apple and the garlic.

 I have like one apple, this is a very small roast, so you can use more apple if you have a bigger pork roast.

 You can vary the amount that you're using to make this because it really depends on how much meat you have.

 So I will still have a list of ingredients with amounts on this site, but that's really just a reference.

 Whatever goes into your oven is the best, otherwise you can just use any pan or pot that you have and then transfer everything into a baking dish afterwards.

 Make sure to sear the meat on each side to make sure to lock in all the delicious juices.

 And when that is done, just put that aside on a plate and we're going to cook the apple for a while and then add the garlic at the end.

 We're going to mash it also with a fork to make it like a smooth sauce that we're going to spread over our pork roast.

 To the apple and garlic I'm adding just a tiny pinch of nutmeg and also a little bit of rosemary.

 This is very good with mashed potatoes or rice or any kind of vegetables.

 Then with the leftovers you can make sandwiches and soups and all sorts of stuff like that.

 Also leave me a comment down below telling me if you like this recipe or if you would like to request another recipe for future episodes.

 Alright, so we're here in Allendale, New Jersey and we have a 0405 Explorer that has rear

 You put it to the floor, cables seem to work, but the brakes never actuate and actually

 What's common on these for the pads themselves, right here, the rust underneath here to build

 They fall off, of course there's this much more clearance in there now and of course

 Now these ones, I have to pull them off to inspect that first thing and the shoes on

 So there's a lot of meat left to them and they're not lifting at all from rust and

 So what I found is that the adjustment down below, the adjuster right here is all rusted

 up and it appears the last owner, what they did is they brought it all the way in so they

 can get the rotors off and they changed the rotors and pads and they left it that way

 These ones are all seized up so what we're going to do is we're going to put on the new

 They're right there, you see them right there, the star adjuster and these are all brand

 new so we can easily adjust it and use this tool to measure the inside of the rotor hat

 Now you can see right here how far off we are so we're definitely pretty far off on

 the adjustment and at that point the parking brake's just not going to hold.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to clean up the inside up here so it has some

 actual meat to it and then we're going to adjust it out as far as we can so that when

 it first hits that parking brake it's going to grab and it's going to hold for them and

 that way it'll work and that's all we have to do on this for the parking brake so it's

 We have our new adjuster on there, now I need to adjust the pads, the shoes out on here

 So what we're going to do is we're going to measure the inside of the hat here with this

 We're going to measure it, okay we're nice and tight and then you take it up to here

 So then you go down here and you adjust and you keep checking and that makes it a lot

 easier to use this instead of putting this on there and guessing all the time.

 So what I need to do now, since we have a new adjuster on there, is start adjusting

 it out and make it nice and tight so it actually works for them.

 And this one, you know, it's pretty far off like I said, so it's going to take quite a

 Just keep checking it and we're going to make it extra tight on there because we're

 going to sand down the inside of the hat of the rotor here because there's a lot of rust

 and corrosion and that's going to bring our diameter there a little bit bigger in the

 So let's get it closed for now, clean it, and then recheck on there.

 Hello, my name is Anthony Parecco and I'm an estimator here at Portland Bolt Manufacturing

 What you are looking at is a 7-8 by 26 inch long square head machine bolt which is a common

 style of pole line fastener made here at our facility in Portland, Oregon.

 As you can see this machine bolt has a standard thread length of 6 inches, an added semi-cone

 Square head machine bolts that we manufacture for the pole line industry are used to fasten

 For this particular job approximately 500 of these machine bolts were made.

 Portland Bolt manufactures square head machine bolts for pole line applications throughout

 the country and we perform all the manufacturing processes right here at our 85,000 square

 Now we'll take you through a step by step look at the various processes involved in

 The square head machine bolts for this order are manufactured from A36 mild steel round

 bar which we receive in 20 foot lengths from a steel mill in McMinnville, Oregon.

 After the steel is removed from the racks, the first step in the manufacturing process

 This is done on one of our shears which chops the steel like a guillotine.

 Once the material is cut to length, we will put a semi-cone point on the end prior to

 The purpose of the semi-cone point is to provide ease of installation into the wooden member

 without the threaded end of the bolt getting snagged on the wood.

 The semi-cone point is added to, not included in, the length of the bolt.

 Once the cut to length round bar is pointed, they move on to threading.

 There are two methods used to thread bolts, roll threading and cut threading.

 Roll threading is an extrusion process in which pitch diameter steel round bar is forced

 between two dies to form the threaded portion of the bolt instead of being removed as in

 Because of the size and quantity of pull line fasteners typically required at a time, roll

 threading is a preferred method due to the efficient nature of the process.

 The next step in manufacturing a square head machine bolt is to hot forge the head of the

 An induction heating coil heats the end of the round bar to approximately 2000 degrees

 The square head is then forged onto the heated end of the bar including the grade symbol

 and manufacturer's marking which is stamped directly onto the head of the bolt.

 Now that the bolts are made, the final step is to galvanize them in our hot dip galvanizing

 Before the bolters are dipped in the zinc however, they must be prepped so that the

 The pickling process involves submerging the bolts in caustic soda, rinsing and then submerging

 This process removes any scale and prepares the surface of the steel to accept the zinc.

 Bolts are then placed in our hot dip galvanizing tank which is filled with 840 degree molten

 After the bolts are removed from the zinc, they are spun in a high speed centrifuge system

 to spin any excess zinc from the threads so that they easily accept a nut.

 The bolts are then cooled in quench tanks and inspected to ensure that the zinc has

 After the bolts have been inspected, a square nut is assembled to each bolt.

 This is a common procedure with pull line fasteners as a means of keeping all associated

 Finally, the bolts are put in boxes, palletized and marked clearly with the destination, contents

 The order is then put on a truck on the day we promised to ship and sent to its final

 For more information about square head machine bolts, other pull line hardware or Portland

 You can also find more information pertaining specifically to pull line fasteners at www.pulllinefasteners.com.

 Hey guys, it's Megan and as I promised I am going to do a hair tutorial today.

 So you'll need a brush, one big hair tie and two little hair ties.

 And then you'll need leave in conditioner and wave shaping cream is optional.

 So you'll want to, oh and I took a shower before this so you can take a shower before

 And then grab your leave in conditioner and my leave in conditioner is by frizz.

 Make sure you get it all the way from where it's down to the ends.

 And it's wave shaping curl defying no frizz styling treatment for thick to coarse hair.

 A little bit less than what you put from the leave in conditioner.

 And then just glide that through your hair just like the conditioner.

 And then you will want to get your big, your big ponytail thing and just put your hair

 It doesn't matter if it's sloppy or not, just put it into a ponytail.

 And then I'm going to turn around and show you what to do with the ponytail.

 And if you feel like you want another thing to secure it you can also, and this is why

 you have another one, if you feel like you need to secure it more just put another one

 And then if you want your bangs to be curly you can grab your bangs and twist them.

 But I'm not going to twist my bangs because they're naturally curly when they dry.

 So you're going to want to leave this in for about two hours, two to four hours.

 And I'll make a video in about two hours letting you know how this looks.

 I don't know how you guys resolve problems in the playground, but in my days, what we

 From who gets to start on a game of marbles, skipping rope, or even using the soccer net.

 And so in honor of being back in school, this week's tutorial is also a collaboration with

 This week you guys will learn how to make rock, paper, scissor magnets for your lockers.

 And this week's collaboration is with my friend Amy from Little Surprises YT.

 She made this really awesome pen pencil, which is kind of troll-y because she knows that

 Gray, white, rounded and pointy tools, a cutter, a magnetic strip, that can also be a sticker

 at the back, rubbing alcohol and a q-tip to clean up your piece in case you get fingerprints

 or too many dust particles, orange, black and pink acrylic paint.

 Take your white clay and flatten it out, about this thickness should do, and cut it into

 Now take your pointy tool and make three holes where the holes would be for an actual sheet

 Take your rubbing alcohol and q-tip and clean it up in case you got too many dirt specks

 Now for the scissors, you're going to take your gray clay and make a chubby, long carrot

 Take a large rounded tool and poke a hole on the biggest part of that carrot.

 Now you're going to take one of the sides and put it on top of the other one so that

 Now take your rubbing alcohol and q-tip again and clean it up in case you got too many fingerprints

 All you have to do is take a ball of gray clay, lightly push the ends with your fingers,

 Before we paint the faces on, we're going to color the scissors.

 So take whichever color you like and then do only the top half.

 All you have to do is take your black paint, make two little eyes and the mouth.

 Once you're done making the faces, take your pink and make two little chubby cheeks.

 For the paper, feel free to take your black paint again and make some squiggly lines so

 Now take your magnetic strip, cut it into slices and stick them behind each piece.

 If you're a little worried, feel free to put a little glue right in the back just for extra

 If you want, feel free to add that blue line on the left hand side of the paper to make

 Now don't forget to check out Amy's video and her channel and subscribe while you're

 If you have suggestions for future geeky tutorials, leave them in the comment section below and

 don't forget to add me on Facebook, Twitter, DeviantArt and Tumblr.

Here's a gift idea you can do for a large group of friends considering

 design your own mug so you can personalize them according to each person you give it

Now take your candy canes and open it up, break them into little

I just grabbed a crab hammer thing that I found in my kitchen to crush them into little

And once the candy cane pieces are all crushed up, go ahead and pour them into

For this next part you're going to want to make sure you have clean hands

 since we'll be touching the marshmallows, especially if you're planning on giving these

Grab your marshmallows and with your lollipop sticks, insert them in

 boiling as you see here, turn the heat to medium low and place a microwave safe bowl

 chips until they all melt and become more of a liquid substance.

Now carefully bring your bowl of chocolate to your marshmallows.

 And when you're done with the rest, place them in the fridge for about 5 minutes just

Wrap the marshmallows in silo bags or what I did was I got a ziplock baggie

 and cut the top off where the ziplock is and tied them with red and green balloon string.

 are super cute and affordable gifts to give to your family and friends.

 the marshmallow in your cup of hot chocolate, once it melts it really makes the hot chocolate

 cane covered marshmallows because it adds that peppermint taste to that chocolate and

Don't forget to subscribe and stay tuned for more gift idea videos.

 But when you come to put one in the middle, what you would do is, if you're building your

 blocks along, you'll see that that block's going to take it to there and you'll bed that

 You can always spread the pairs around from side to side of the wall for more stability.

 You should have a pair around approximately every 6 to 8 blocks.

 Ideally you should stagger the pairs from one side of the wall to the other.

 You can see that the best way to do it is to put the pair on either end on the far side

 of the wall so that way the pair won't interfere with you putting up your line and running

 Then all the other pairs that go in between the two ends of the wall, you stagger them

 I'm going to put this block on, allowing for a mortar joint there.

 You can use either your boat level or your big level, you're just checking the first

 The reason I'm moving it out so that I can get the bottom out is because the top half

 It's a bit of messing around to get these pairs right but again, the bit of time you

 spend to start getting them right, the easier it is to build it when you're going up through

 So what will happen then is you're building along, you're going to have to build it along

 and as you're building along on this course here, this second course,

 you get this far and then you just throw your pair into the wall.

 I've seen lots of examples of these pairs where they're built and what people do is

 you'll build along, they'll cut a half block when you get to this point here, ok, and then

 And what's happening then is this wall here is totally independent from the pair.

 The pair is just on its own, so it's not given any support to it.

 This is the correct way of doing it so at least the wall is tied into the pair.

 So to create the pair, you have one on its edge, up against the face of the wall and

 What happens if you were running this in on the wall, ok, you'd have your line set up

 If you put the next block on top of that one straight away, it could interfere with the

 So your best bet is to put just the bottom one on it, run the other blocks along it and

 then when you have them done, you just drop your line and just try to put the block on

 You don't have to build a pair into the middle of it, not in the way you were doing.

 If you ever come to a case like that, you're going to be doing the job like that because

 it's very seldom you're going to get someone to ask you to build a wall probably about

 So if you're doing anything a bit longer, that's how you tie the pairs in a bit.

 Hey YouTube, Earl339 here and I'm going to do an unboxing of the package I got from LLLReptile.

 This isn't any animals, this is just supplies for my beer dragon that I'm going to get.

 And then this controls when it turns on and when it turns off, when the lights turn on and off.

 Here is calcium with D3, herb multivitamins, and then calcium without D3.

 Here's the ExoTerra Solar Glow 125 watt heat lamp and UVB and UVA lamp.

 Ooh, here is the extra, extra, extra large putt for him from my Rita Dragon.

 And then this is a corner extra large water bowl for his water.

 Here's the ExoTerra 125 watt solar glow, daytime UVA and UVB light bulb.

 Here's the ExoTerra controller for time, so when the lights turn on and off.

 And it's not infrared because if you get infrared it can blind your animals and it's kind of hard on them.

 And it can burn them sometimes, so infrared is not usually good.

 It's more of like a centered beam of light and it will heat up this area that it's on a lot more than it will heat up anything else.

Rate, comment, like and subscribe and I'll see you guys in my next video.

 Alright, so what we got here is the manuals, the breakdown sheet, and the reel.

 Now this is the same form factor as the Karado, the new Karado and the new Sitica.

 It will take a little bit of time to get used to these knobs, the way they're angled.

 Say if you're looking for the Karado and you don't have enough,

 or you're looking for the Sitica and you don't have enough, this is a good choice.

 It's the same exact reel, it's just a minor feature that it doesn't have like the Karado and the Sitica.

 It's got 6.5 to 1 gear ratio, 6 stainless steel ball bearings shielded with 1 roller bearing.

 Now when you hear roller bearing in these, it means the bearing that's right here.

 Like if you see any of the Boker bearings videos that I do, when I take these out, these are regular sealed bearings.

 It's for the shaft, so it actually has a one-way bearing in it too, which they call the super stopper.

 So this has got the 1-8 turn key spool to open it up here, that's this.

 They got the Shimano variable braking system, the VBS, which is that.

 And I don't know if the newer Canons, like a newer box that you might get right now, has extra tabs in it, but I know that these ones don't.

 We got precision aluminum low mass spool right there, so it's a very light spool.

 These don't change temperature, so if it's hot out, these are still going to feel the same.

 So if it's got ice on it, it's going to go away in a couple seconds.

 And now the line capacity, let's see, we got 8 pound at 180 yards, 10 pounds at 155 yards, 15 pounds at 110 yards.

 Now if you put PowerPro braid on there, this is what they're going to say here.

 This is 30 pound, you can put 190 yards, 50 pound, 120 yards, 65, 80, 80 yards.

 If you're looking to get a cheap reel under $100, this is $89.99.

 You might be able to find a cheaper somewhere else, online or maybe at a store that's got a promotional deal.

 Now just because it's a 6.5 to 1 doesn't mean you can't go frogging with this and you can't go flipping and pitching with this, because you can.

 Now the gear ratio might not be there, like you might have to work a little bit harder to get that lure back faster.

 I usually run my line a little high, I run it up past the groove a little bit.

 Because usually when you cut your line off and you put a new frog on and you put a new jig on, you keep taking chunks of line off.

 And after you do that a couple times, the line will be where it's got to be.

 Hey, what's up guys, Oli here with a new video and today we're taking a look at the new Powerbeats

 So this is the newest edition of the Powerbeats lineup and they're actually wireless.

 They're going to be competing with the Jaybirds and all other sport wireless headphones.

 So I picked these up at Target for $199.99 and I'm really excited to check them out guys.

 As you can see the box is definitely different from what we're used to here.

 So as you can see in the front we actually have a transparent cover to see the actual

 On the side you do get a picture of them, performance, power, freedom.

 On the right hand side of course you have Lebron James talking about them and in the

 So they are sweat proof, they are Bluetooth, they do have the inline remote mic so you

 All that fun guys, everything you expect from a wireless headphone.

 If you look at the Bluebirds, Jaybirds or the Bluebirds X I think they're about $179.

 So only about $20 more than I want to say the leading competitor in sports wireless

 So let's go ahead and take a look and see if they're actually any good.

 Now like I said the box is very different so there's a tab here you can actually just

 So okay guys so after further inspection they just pull a little harder and the top

 does come off after you give it a nice little tug as you can see.

 So here as you can see it says charge me up before you turn me on, quick charge, 15 minutes

 So if you're in a rush, your headphones are dying, 15 minutes will give you an hour of

 playback which means 30 minutes should give you 2 hours which should get you through most

 Let's go ahead and remove this little tab here and the headphones come off.

 Before we get to these let's go ahead and see what else is in the box.

 As you can see we do have a carrying case and in here, let's make sure we empty out

 So as you can see Powerbeats Wireless 2, tells you how to turn them on, how to pair, all

 Inside the box itself we are going to get a micro USB cable, a very short micro USB

 Now one thing to note guys, on the original Powerbeats I could not find a single one that

 It's actually pretty cool, flat, hard shell kind of like the Beats Studios but of course

 And that should be it before, or it should be it so I can get the headphones themselves.

 Alrighty guys, in typical Beats fashion these are the black ones with the red flat cable.

 As you can see you do have the mic with the volume controls and microphone.

 You also do have this wire management tool to make the cable shorter or longer so you

 Looking to the actual headphones themselves as you can see, camera focus, it does say

 The fit and finish, the matte, overall I mean again it's just my first impressions but I'm

 So below this one right here you'll see that the actual micro USB port is located at and

 it's hard to do in camera but this should just open up like so to actually charge the

 So that should be it guys, there shouldn't be any other surprises here on the headphones.

 I'm going to try them out as you can see again they are wireless so definitely excited

 to use these at the gym and not actually have a cable dangling.

 So guys I'll have a video on my first impressions up soon as well as fit and finish and a review

 I get asked no matter where I'm teaching catering classes is how to set up a buffet.

 the tips that really makes entertaining easier is dividing up the work.

 everything the day of your party, of course you're going to be exhausted by the time your

 guests arrive, you'll have one glass of wine and wish they'd leave and you'd like to take

So one of the things you can do a day, if not two days in advance of your guests

 you're concerned about serving pieces, start a collection of everything in one color.

 all fly together, they'll look beautiful, nobody will hold it against you.

And I've got a Post-it that says salad, so I put the serving tongs out.

 separate little tag for each guest so they'll look for their silverware and feel special.

 up is their silverware as they go off to their seated area to sit.

 these tips and more are in my book, Do It For Less Parties, and we're very excited because

 I'm relaunching this book in an e-book or digital form and it will also be available

 Hey guys, so I'm going to try this real quick thing that YouTube has that I'll upload directly

 from my studio to you, no editing, one take, let's see how this goes.

 So I'm the June guest over at Gossamer Blue and one of the things they sent me that I've

 So first thing I did was just look up on YouTube what are Pan Pastels, what do they do?

 Basically they're just creamy chalks and the kit came with this green chalk and the

 cool thing about these is they are stackable so you can actually stack them one on top

 of the other and I've also got this pink one which you can see I broke a little bit.

 Now what makes these chalks a little bit different is they have, they're a little softer, a little

 more kind of have a creamy feel to them, they kind of remind me of this powder foundation

 These to me are most similar to what I do with Perfect Pearls powders in that you need

 I mean I could rub this on here on this blue paper and it might show up a little bit, but

 what it's really going to make it show is if you stamp something and I'm using the Versamark

 ink pad and we'll talk about that in one second, that came with the kit.

 Okay but you're going to stamp something and then I like to take a brush, this is what

 I use for my Perfect Pearls and I found it worked pretty good with the Pan Pastels too,

 and I like to just tap, okay I'm not scrubbing, I just like to tap the powder on here and

 I didn't really learn, I mean I didn't go and do a bunch of tutorials or anything, I'm

 just kind of going off my experience and what I've done with other mediums and comparatively

 So for this I'm just tapping on here, tap tap tap, tap tap tap, and then once I've got

 the whole image, and the tapping is just because I don't want to scrub yet, I don't want to

 smear any of that ink around if there's a lot of wet ink, and the tapping just gets

 Now once I've got it tapped I'm going to take the same brush, although I could go back and

 get a clean brush, and I'm just going to kind of scrub one way and then the other, you could

 I'm liking paintbrushes but I'm seeing that sponges are really commonly used with this

 I think also, well let's see what happens if I squirt it, you can see it shows up on

 dark cardstock which I think is really cool, let's see what happens if I squirt it with

 Okay that's kind of interesting, so if I squirt it with a bit of water here, it's not

 coming off of the stamped image, but it is coming off all around the stamped image.

 So maybe if you wanted to do something like this but you didn't want, excuse me one second

 here let me go grab a paper towel, okay there we go, maybe if you didn't want the white

 I have heard if you really want to set this you're going to need to do something like

 a Krylon fixative or I don't know I think hairspray would work or something like that

 to really set the chalkiness because it is a chalk essentially.

 I kind of like what that does if I squirt it with water, I'm loving that it doesn't

 Okay so cool that it works on dark paper, that you can mix and match them, I think there's

 And the other thing I want to show you is what is a Versamark pad?

 A Versamark pad is a watermark stamp pad and you could use it with a stamp like I just

 did here with something like PanPastels or Perfect Pearls powders or embossing powders,

 You could also just use it straight onto a paper to create a pattern and the watermark

 part is that when you use it it will just stamp, and I just did a really poor job so

 Once it's dry it's just going to stay a dark blue color, it's going to stay a slightly

 So it does work best on subtle patterns or on cardstocks and I think it can be a really

 Alright that's it from me for right now on PanPastels and Versamarks from the June Gossamer

 This was my first Google record thingy-ma-bobber that like I said before it's going straight

 from my phone to YouTube, excuse me, not Google thing, YouTube thing.

 If you have any questions be sure to ask me over on my blog and I'll be back with a new

 It's fine just keep going all right very similar to the way we were doing it before we're starting with

 The good thing we use the big slow cooker because none of this would have fit otherwise

 So we're just gonna take that in there half the fun mix it up looks good already

 Pre-packaged breakfast sausage this has sage in it just brown it

 Unfortunately you didn't see the part where the cat was snacking on it

 Whisked with a cup of milk and that is going to cover the whole shebang

 So that goes there, and then I'm gonna put in about a teaspoons worth

 This is supposed to be a butcher's rub, but it's got a lot of pepper

 Shallots and salt so I figured that would go good with eggs, so I'm gonna go with a

 Heavy teaspoon it would go well go good go good it am being much good

 And then we'll come back and we'll see how it's see how it's going.

 That's what we got we drained off some of the liquid because there was a lot of veggies in there, but as you can see

 To see if it's finished so the potatoes are usually the giveaway

 And they're done the potatoes are nice and squishy, so let's just take a big old forkful here

 I don't understand why you feel the need to do that cuz look that's why look at that look at it.

 It's really good just like that it is just like that it is that good

 Really I guess the only reason you would do this is if you really I don't know just wanted to set it and forget it

 Versus baking it in the oven in half the time, so I'm not sure that this is actually useful

 But it is a crock pot recipe, and I know you all love the crock pot recipes

 Could probably benefit from a little hot sauce you could probably throw some salsa in there

 Just something to kick it up a little bit, but otherwise as far as crock

 yeah here's the middle product of what you're going to come up with this is it

 sizzling away whistling away yeah the coca-cola yeah that's coke okay yeah

 it's reducing it's reducing it's reducing it's doing its thing now we're

 you look cool and yeah oh yeah and in the cupboard Oh all the soy sauce one

 quarter of cup soy sauce 3 quarter cup of the clock a nice big cup nice big

 cock the threat and then oh yes just a puppy dog then we have a

 tablespoon brown sugar yes and then we have a tablespoon of the mustard and

 then we mix it all up and that's my puppy dog and then this is what we get

 when we add to the chicken yep so we'll show you at the end what happens

 Hey I'm Bella with Locks and Locks of Hairstyles and I have a double bohemian twist with a bow for you guys today so keep watching!

 Let's take a little section of hair on the top, we'll work our way back sideways, divide it into two strands and then cross it over itself twice.

 This will be the start of our bohemian twist that we're going to do waterfall style.

 So grab a section of hair and add it to the top strand, but the bottom strand you don't add to it, you drop that piece and grab a little piece that was behind it.

 Then add that into your bohemian twist by just crossing it over the top strand.

 So let me show you again, add a section of hair to the top, the bottom one grab a piece underneath it, and then drop the strand you were holding,

 Now add a little section of hair to the top, reach a strand from underneath or right behind the one you were holding, drop the one you were holding, and then cross those two strands over each other.

 Keep following the shape of your head all the way around over to the other side.

 Same technique, and then put it in an elastic and just let it sit there while we do the second part.

 So you'll have these strands hanging down, we're still going to do a bohemian twist but this time it's not waterfall.

 We will just cross them over each other twice, and then the strands that you had hanging down from your waterfall, pick up, and that is your new section that you're adding to your top strand.

 But your bottom strand, don't add anything to it, just twist it.

 So grab the next section that was hanging down from your first bohemian twist, it was waterfall, don't add any to the bottom, and then just cross them over each other.

 Grab the next strand that was hanging down, add it to the top section, cross them over.

 Keep working around and notice how I was closer together up by your face, and then I get further apart as you come down and work your way around the back.

 Put that one in an elastic also, and then I have some texturizing wax or pomade with a little bit of water on my fingers.

 I'm going to smear it on these strands hanging down so that the bow looks a little more sleek and has less flyaways.

 Then hold them together, make sure you brush out underneath because it's hard to do once you have your bow in.

 And then I like to bobby pin down this lower one just so that it holds still while I tie the bow.

 Then I take my two strands and I skip the original part like you would tie a shoe, I don't wrap it over each other, I just start with the one rabbit ear and wrap it around, send it through the hole, and pull it out.

 And you don't have to do it very tightly, just hold it while it's still kind of loose and pull on your strands until you have even ears of the bow.

 I know that doesn't even look good, but don't worry, hold the knot, brush it out, and we will fix it up.

 Take a bobby pin and hold your two tails so that it won't pull out.

 Then take the center chunk to the bow, roll it up over itself, and hold it in with a bobby pin.

 Then take your sides, fan it out with your fingers until you have a really pretty ear on that bow, hold it down while you slip a bobby pin in to hold it into the shape.

 Then take the other side and do the same thing, fan it out, put a bobby pin in it,

 and then I get out my hairspray and give the bow a couple of squirts, and then I can actually piece out with my fingers these strands so that the bow fans out really nicely and looks really pretty.

 Sorry I've been away, yeah, yeah, yeah, got it, got it, got it.

 But I wanted to come to you to do a quick review on some hair that I was sent by fingercomber.com.

 I was sent their Havana Twist hair and I did some Havana Twist, Marley Twist, whatever

 you want to call them and I just wanted to do a review on their hair.

 They sent me four packs of hair and they come in a bundle like this.

 The type of hair that I was sent was the Onyx hair and I think this runs about $12.99 a

 And at first I had did my hair and I used some Cancalon and that was a fail, an epic

 Like I said, I was sent four packs and for this whole head of hair, I only used one and

 At first I didn't think that I was going to like this hair but you know what, this hair

 I mean, I only used one and a half packs so I still have another two whole packs plus

 A lot of people have been asking me to do another kind of tutorial.

 I'm just going to take this one down to show you how I installed this hair to my head.

 So what I do is, this is two sections of the hair and I made it long.

 You take the hair, put it on top of your hair and you twist both of these sections in the

 And when you're going down, you want to still twist the hair in the same direction.

 Now if you do it the other way, you want to switch what I said and do it in the opposite

 So, and then you just want to keep twisting the hair as you're going down.

 When I buy some hair, I will purchase this hair because the free dress equal is $4.99

 Thank you guys so much for watching my videos and tuning into my channel.

 Make sure you subscribe because I'm almost at 1k subscribers and when I get there, I'm

 So tell everybody you know I'm going to do a huge giveaway when I reach 1k.

 Today on How to Make Anything I will be teaching you how to make a jumping frog.

 A square will not work because you will not have any back feet if you do it that way.

 First step, take one corner, fold it over until it meets the other end, and then crease.

 Next step, take the other corner, fold it over to the other side, and crease again.

 Take your X, you need to bring in these two sides so you have a triangle shape.

 Take one corner of your triangle shape, bring it up until it meets with the top corner.

 And then the last step is to make the back legs, the jumping mechanism.

 This has been How to Make a Jumping Frog on HowToMakeAnything.com.

 Hey guys, this is Chris from Lid Critics and today I got my package in the mail from ebay.

 an unboxing and I ordered a beanie too but it didn't come so I'll do that in another

 And this is iron on patch so I don't know how long it's going to take to crack.

Leave a like for the Penguins and their 10 game winning streak because they're boss.

 Hello, I'm Paul Dyaczuk, founder of Elastic Steel, method of athletic conditioning.

 Last time I talked about martial arts, core conditioning and back pain.

 So I didn't say that legs throws were dangerous as some people might have thought.

 All I said that they could be dangerous if the abdominals are fatigued.

 So a quick point about that, if your back is flat and you move just your legs, you articulate

 only from your hips, your abdominal muscles, rectus abdominis and obliques are used to

 If you see a student that opens up the back, obviously what you need to do is to get the

 But at the same time, have your students here, have them move the legs down as much as they

 The second you feel, or you see, or they feel, or they see that the back is coming up, have

 Even before, you would start bringing the legs lower and lower, so you can bring them

 But today I'm going to answer a question about how to combine the work of your pelvis and

 And also I know that this question comes up often during seminars and even when people

 You can practice the kicks and kicks are going to get you better.

 But if you use a massage, if you use a flexibility exercise, if you use a specific strengthening

 exercise, it's safer and you're going to get the results faster.

 You should practice the kicks, but you should prepare before you practice the kicks.

 And number two, after you practice your kicks, you should perform certain exercises at the

 end of the session that will improve your kicks later on as time goes by and they're

 When you throw a kick, let's talk about the front kick for example.

 The pelvis articulates, the hip joint either is fixed, but very often actually does the

 The tension is built and then the tension is released through the movement of your hip

 So if you do that, first before you can learn that you do a posterior pelvic tilt and you

 extend the hip, you have to learn how to do a posterior pelvic tilt and actually not move

 There's a tendency to flex the hip as you do that, but ideally you would actually extend

 Before you can do that, of course, I'm not even going to show you that today.

 I'm just going to show you an exercise which teaches you how to stabilize your hip joint

 Once you can do that, you can begin to move the pelvis and actually move your hip joint

 If you don't have the flexibility to do that, you bend the knee a little bit.

 I prefer that you lift it to 90 degrees and most people can do this.

 You would extend the leg to here or to here or to here or whatever flexibility allows

 From here, we're going to articulate the pelvis so the use of the core muscles, but we're

 Later on, I'm going to show you some exercises which do the opposite of that.

 And it's a very small movement, but when you saw that kick, this right here is enough to

 Once again, you will learn how to move the pelvis and at the same time, your hip joint

 will actually extend instead of flexing and building up the energy.

 And once you get better at it, do not do it before you kick in the same session.

 It doesn't just depend on that, it depends on a lot of different flexibilities, stability,

 Hi, I'm Kat, and this video is the first in my series of 12 days of Christmas DIYs.

 In this video, I show you how to make these two sugar body scrubs.

 This one is peppermint sugar scrub, and this one is vanilla sugar scrub.

 For this, you'll need a mixing bowl, something to mix with, containers to put your finished

 scrubs in, regular sugar, washed raw sugar, vanilla extract, some type of oil.

 I'm using extra light olive oil so that it doesn't smell quite as strong.

 Peppermint extract or pure essential oil, and some tags and various strings and decorations

 First, you're going to take some of your regular white sugar, probably about two cups.

 Then you're going to take your oil and add just enough until it reaches the texture that

 And then when you've gotten your scrub to a texture you're happy with, add roughly 10

 And once that is thoroughly combined, transfer it to your container.

 And finish that off by decorating your containers however you like.

 Next, you'll want to thoroughly clean your bowl and get started on your next scent.

 And once you like the texture, add about a tablespoon of vanilla extract.

 Hey YouTube, I'm going to be showing you how to play Elgie by As I Lay Down.

 I'm opening up iTunes right now to show you the part I'm going to teach you, which is basically the intro.

The only thing you have to really know is pull-offs and hammer-ons and stuff like that.

 You want to start off with your index on the fifth fret, and you want to start at the eighth with your pinky.

 So, you really go 8, 7, 5 in kind of a quick pull-off situation.

 And then you just jump down, starting at the G, then you go down to the high C.

 And then once you have that part done, you might want to start at a slow speed like...

 It can take a little while to learn, but if you're a beginner out there, it'd be a little difficult.

 You have to make sure you hit that string or it won't sound right.

 And then that's part of learning, so I'll upload that as soon as I know how to do it.

 Not really a tutorial, but just what I kind of do on a summer day

 And like a typical look that could work really well for you guys

 And I wanted to show you, it's really glowy, it's really nice for the summer like I said

 I actually have a really good excuse, I mean it's not an excuse but a really good reason

 And then I did my exams, so that obviously took up a lot of time

 And then right when my exams were over I went to Switzerland for a little bit more than a week

 So if you're not, I'll put it right here, it's underscoreheyitsalex underscore xo

 You can follow me and kind of know what I'm up to a little bit more than with my videos

 So anyways, if you want to see a kind of really natural makeup look for summer

 I'm going to start off with a clean and clear blemish removal cream

 And I'm going to put that just on the areas that I've been kind of breaking out

 Then I'm going to be taking my Ultra Sheer Neutrogena sunscreen

 And you're going to want to protect your skin with sunscreen all the time when you're going outside

 Then I'm going to be putting my Maybelline Instant Pore Eraser Primer on my face

 Before I put any makeup on to make sure that my makeup stays on my face

 And doesn't slide off if I sweat during the day since it's going to be probably very hot

 And putting concealer under my eyes and highlighting a little bit under my eyebrows and stuff

 And then with a damp sponge I'm just going to start blending that in

 And I'm just going to swipe that all over my face to make sure that the product that you put on your face is matte

 And then using the Naked Basics Palette, I take the brown color and just fill in the sparse areas of my eyebrows

 And then I go through with the spoolie one more time just to make sure that the color doesn't look too awkward in certain areas

 And I'm also putting this color onto my eyelids to kind of like match the color throughout my face

 Now I'm using this Essence Primer which is super shimmery and beautiful

 And I'm using it as a highlight and I'm putting that onto the top portions of my face

 You can already see on camera like how much more glowy and lively I look

 And you can put that, the leftover that you have onto your eyelids and on your eyebrow bone and any higher points of your face

 I'm just going to use this eyeliner from L'Oreal and make a simple cat eye with a little bit of a wing

 And I'm going to put a couple coats on my top and bottom lashes

 I'm going to be taking the Makeup Forever eyeshadow stick in a really nice champagne-y color

 And then from the Naked Basics palette I'm taking the lightest shimmery shade and putting that into my inner tear ducts

 Which also allows your eyes to look a lot wider and more awake for the summertime

 And you can go for a nice pink pop of color but I decided to do something more neutral

I'm Promise and today I'm here to show you guys a really quick eye makeup tutorial

 went shopping at Super Target and my husband was like, hey there's some good makeup deal

So I ran over there and I checked it out and it was like $3, $5 for a whole

 reviews on ELF's makeup and good reviews, bad reviews, so I had to check it out for

Like if you check this out, like the black one, it's really shimmery and the

 not like but I think they do pretty good for how much they sell it for.

 have probably bought one, then this is the eye makeup look that I created using this

 So my first eyeshadow color is going to be this purple right here.

Now I'm going to be using the black eyeshadow, the shimmery black eyeshadow.

And make sure you smoothen out the edges so it doesn't have any harsh edges.

 So now take the same purple eyeshadow on a smaller brush and apply it right on the

 take the white right here and just apply that in the inner corners of your eyes.

And now after applying the white in the inner corner, use the same white for

 the lash line and just connect with the black from the lower lash line like this.

 Here we are on the eve of Hurricane Sandy and Kenzie is joining me for a bit

I'm very excited to share this Sally Hansen has just introduced a

 new line or they are introducing right now at Walmart a new line of gel

 manicures that you can do yourself at home which I think is really cool.

 actually tested one nail already I'm not sure if you can tell here this is what

 this has a few more ingredients you would dry all your nails at once but

 manicure it even comes with a very small LED light you can dry I guess you know

 seconds you can hold it but we're not gonna plug it in now it's an LED light

 um you get your strips there is gonna be multiple colors available I'm doing it

 with the shall we dance color I love this it's kind of that light natural

 color that reminds you of a French manicure so let me show you how you

 actually do a nail and just how easy it is it's it's pretty incredible I've

 never done these before I have a lot of friends that have done them you're gonna

 peel off the strips you're gonna find there's different size strips so the

 bigger one would obviously be for the thumb tiny one was what I used for my

 pinky so let's peel this away here all right here we go so we've got this strip

 here I'm gonna put it on my nail you push the cuticle back with some of the

 tools they give you first and I want to line it up and then you're gonna use

 this little thing to smooth it and if you mess up and you don't get just the

 right size you know you can there's many in there you can try on the packet you

 really want to smooth it down I'm trying to do this quicker than usual so I might

 make a few mistakes here doing a manicure with the camera with us okay so

 you're gonna want to like work it around your nail and then essentially you're

 gonna like kind of tear this off it's really quite easy to do once you start

 working it in and then what you do is you file off the excess strips so I'm

 gonna press this down a little more so you see I just ripped that off really

 easy very quick you're gonna do this with each nail like smooth it down and

 then they give you a nail file to use is the light pink side to file it I'm gonna

 kind of file away whatever's excess left so I have a bit excess on this one side

 here I'm gonna need to file that off before I set it to cure here and then

 you can even rip it away too so it's filed does it look smooth kids what do

 you think how's it look it looks like nail polish right pretty cool they give

 you a topcoat shake this up press this down for a nice smooth look let me press

 it one more time looks like my edge is up doesn't it and I don't want any edges

 sticking up that would not look pretty smooth it down so this tool really works

 good this smoothing so let me shake it again shake shake shake shake we're

 almost done here you can see just how easy this is for $13 compared to going

 to the salon I mean how easy is that look at my nice smooth top coat super

 quick and easy and then they even have an alarm here so Ken's give me that

 we're gonna plug this in you want to see it now don't put your finger in there

 because it's an LED light oh whoa okay and now it even knows when 30 seconds

 is gonna go up so I'm gonna put this under here it's plugged in we've

 started it it's gonna go off in 30 seconds and then you're done so this is

 great so really innovative gel manicures are all the rage and of course you know

 they're very popular in bold colors I even saw a silver out that would be

 really fun for the holidays but this is just a very nice light natural look that

 I'm doing right here but amazing that you can do this at home and these are

 meant to last for up to two weeks I guess maybe later we've got some

 hurricane time here before we lose power we may have more time but your nails

 look very nice right now in purple Kenzie did her own look the light went

 off so there you go and now this is dry and they've even got some cleansing

 cloths that you can do to make sure there's no debris or anything left and

 then you just wipe with the cleansing cloth but I'm gonna save that till I

 finish the rest of my manicure so here we go I'm gonna unplug this now but you

 see it did turn off for you this is Sally Hansen insta gel strips for $13.97

 available at Walmart and then here is the full manicure kit here but you can

 very cute the mini isn't it and look how quick and easy that is you can put all

 the strips on at once then paint them all at once and then dry so simple easy

 really affordable beauty product that you can do at home which I love right so

 time for some more nails I think I'm gonna be already and if you want to just

 get a close-up of my nails you can see I mean here's my regular nails but you can

 just see how that looks like a nice manicure there and again these are light

 colors so you're not gonna notice that the way you would a bold color but I

 love the natural look and the shine that you get and I love the feel of a gel

 Hi, this is Kim from Made by Mommy and today I'm going to teach you how to make my pear

 I've already posted a video showing how to make this charm without a loom.

 To make the pear charm you will need one brown rubber band or black for the stem and 15 rubber

 Start with your single brown rubber band on the side where the arrow is and bring that

 Then take two rubber bands at a time for the next position and two again for the next.

 Once you've placed your single brown and your two pairs of green bands, you're going to

 take two green rubber bands and leave them loose on the next peg.

 Then come back to this peg with two bands and another two bands from here to the center

 Slide those down and add a single green band wrapped around this peg three times.

 And we're ready to take out our hook, reaching back with the cap band to catch the two rubber

 bands that are on top that go up to the right, coming back in to get the two that go to the

 Now you want to reposition these two bands onto the center peg.

 Then we're going to be ready to use these loose bands that are at the bottom.

 And now you can bring the two from the right side onto that same peg as well.

 The order that these go on gives the pair its distinct shape in the end.

 We're going to go way down to the bottom to catch the two bands that go forward.

 And now your charm will stay together and it's ready to come off of the loom.

 And if you're planning to use this as a charm on a charm bracelet, then leave this loop

 But if you want to hide that loop, put your hook back through the top two bands, catch

 And you'll probably need to repeat that twice to make it disappear completely.

 If you did, check out all of the other fruit and other food charms that are posted on my

 Thank you so much for watching and I look forward to looming with you again soon.

You have lettuce, you have the magic cards that's half the lettuce, magic salad.

 While on the internet with my friends, we watched Mega64's video of Magic the

 Gathering, and here on Concoctions we'd like to respond in our own special way.

 spineless thug and fracture our loyalty, I've decided to do it.

 filled with terror, I know I'm a man and I know this because of the rampant

 some grizzly bears in there, a giant spider, and a crabapple cohort for some

 or it could give a feeling of a festering goblin in your gullet.

Well most certainly my ass will look like the seething song and I'll

 So this has been Ryan Pancake Hack in response to Mega64's video where we make the Magic

 Ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha ha

After the holidays we are always stuck with that turkey, the remnants of a

 a good turkey soup, we have to make a stock with all the bones and everything else that

 to take a look at making the perfect turkey stock for making the most delicious turkey

 is very simple and pretty much using ingredients that you would have in your fridge.

 rather than buying those sodium loaded turkey stock in the grocery store, I am going to

Below is where you are going to leave me your questions and comments.

 of Food FAQs, we are going to look at making the most perfect turkey stock.

Now for making the turkey stock, you are definitely going to need a huge pot.

 to do is make sure all that stuffing is out before we get to this step.

 The remnants of the turkey with bits of meat and stuff like that still on it.

 need to go overboard in your chopping or your dicing or anything like that.

 large carrot here that I am going to give it a rough chop as well.

 So I am probably going to add anywhere from a half a teaspoon to a teaspoon of salt.

 again I am trying to keep this a bit healthy so I am going to cut back on the amount of

 a rough chop and then we are going to get to the actual putting together of this stock

So with my burner now on at a medium high temperature, I am just adding

 the thyme in there, the bay leaf, the peppercorns and everything else that was given a rough

You want to make sure it is nice and covered with the water so when

 it starts boiling and we reduce it to a simmer everything is going to marry and become that

 before if your turkey still has any sort of stuffing in it you may want to remove that

 are going to allow everything to release it's flavors and to marry into one lovely turkey

I am just going to quickly show you guys what I have set up here.

 going to do after the hour and a half is using my strainer I am going to strain the liquid.

 Because you don't want to get all the pieces of meat or anything else that is left back

 do is strain that stock into these containers, label them that it's turkey stock so I don't

 the turkey stock today I mean to say you won't necessarily need these containers.

 didn't go to the grocery store and buy those packaged sodium laden stuff.

Below is where you are going to leave me your questions or comments.

 And basically anything you want me to touch on in the Food FAQ series.

 Ok everyone, so this is for which is in the kitchen video and an altered oatmeal dog shampoo.

 So first what I've done is grounded one cup of oatmeal and this is the oatmeal that I'm

 I got from a guy who already did it and I'll link his information below.

 thing that you want is one cup of baking soda and this is also from the dollar store.

 Alright and then the next thing that you'll need is, you can use olive oil or almond oil

 or any kind of oil that's safe for your dogs but today I'll be using almond oil and I got

So the oatmeal is good for deep cleansing and you know good for the dog

 into this or actually replacing, usually you would put one or two cups of water depending

 just put it in there and pop it in the boiling water with the tansy herb in there and wait

 till it cools completely down and then I'll strain it and bottle it up.

So all you need is, well I'm just going to pour this all in there

 and then start mixing it and see if that's the consistency that we need.

 pets you're always worried about bugs and stuff like that, especially if they live inside

 you spoil your dogs and they tend to go on your couches and stuff or even sleep with

Basically, you know, the consistency of shampoo should be shampoo.

 So I'm going to do this, hopefully it's not too loud for you guys.

 So since I added more, I'm just going to add more of each little thing and then that

 just for extra for my dog's skin because they'll have really dry skin because of winter time

 I added three more teaspoons of the olive oil and another cup of the baking soda.

 you how to install Goodridge brake lines on Tucker Rocky television.

 a Goodridge Harley-Davidson Econoline brake line kit on a Sportster.

 clear coated stainless steel braided hose with chrome fittings.

 removed the existing brake line and we have cleaned the master cylinder.

 is a stainless steel braided line and it is a little bit rigid.

However, you're going to get a lot higher pressure and a lot more

 powerful stopping power out of a stainless steel braided brake line.

 holders when installing a new brake line, which Daniel is doing now.

 the brake line more effectively so you don't have any rubbing or chafing on the brake line

Next step is installing the banjo on the caliper with two fresh crest

 sure you don't cross any threads and that the brake line is taking a natural bend all

 once we are satisfied with the fit of the brake line and the routing, including the

 We recommend you start at the lower end, usually about 12 to 14 pounds, and then pressure test

 at the proper torque rating, which he is going to set, which is the next step in the process.

 You can hear by the clicks that he has got that done successfully.

 his torque setting and he is torquing down the banjo bolt going into the master cylinder.

 this point we will be adding a tie wrap to the handlebars so it follows the stock routing.

 The next step will be to bleed the system and the bike will be ready to ride.

 key, one of the main keys to bringing the pressure down to the master cylinder.

 other key being making sure you have a great brake line like a Goodrich that will eliminate

 the brake system to bleed the system, which is pulling the actual fluid through the master

 cylinder, through the brake lines, down into the calipers, which is also known as bleeding

He's attaching that to the zerk fitting on there and pulling the

 brake fluid through as he loosens up the zerk fitting, also known as a brake bleeder valve.

 During this operation it is important to make sure that there is always brake fluid in the

 master cylinder so it will stay pressurized and it doesn't run too low or else you will

Watch the actual bottle as it fills up to make sure there is no air

 the brake lever to make sure it is firm and that will complete your application.

 Today I will show you around my commercial kitchen that we built from scratch.

 We have about 440 square feet and we're going to start with a general tour and get into

 We've got a stove with also an oven underneath and a commercial vent hood on top.

 We have a three compartment sink as well as some storage for dishes, display cakes

 We have a ductless air conditioning system above that for extra air.

 Off a little bit more, we have an area where we keep some miscellaneous fondant, things

 in the drawers, and then we have our photo station where we pull paper down, take pictures

 So this is the first half of the wall, first half of the kitchen I should say.

 On the other half we have our cooling rack that of course moves.

 We built a little box here so we could store things on top of it.

 Then we have a display area and a column we use in bridal shows.

 Then we have of course another shelf for some aprons and paint and such.

 Then we have our commercial refrigerator with my lovely entertainment on top.

 Over here on this wall we used to have a vegetable sink that was required by the health department

 but we don't have to have that anymore because we go through the department of agriculture.

 So that pretty much takes up that area there and gave us room for another shelf.

 So next we are going to take you to another view and you will see this from the other

 We have moved the camera to about where I was standing in the first part.

 We are going to show you a couple more things that are necessary for our commercial kitchen

 So to the left of me or to the left of you we have our bathroom.

 Over here we have got a door to the outside and then we have got a pantry.

 The pantry is jam packed full of stuff and we are going to go over that in detail in

 But basically we just have food, fixtures, cake boards, spices, cake boxes, pretty much

 The only thing you didn't see is next to you is a closet for the water heater.

 Other than that you have seen a basic view of everything we have got.

 I hope that kind of shows you our setup and we will go into more detail in the future

 Today a friend of mine is working on an AC unit and something interesting happened.

 So this is a control board in the AC unit and as you can see this part is burned out

 So this portion of the board controls the fan and I believe this is a relay right here

 and even this part portion of it starts to melt, the relay starts to melt.

 So anyway the fan doesn't work and it needs a new controller board.

 What is interesting is that if you look at the schematic this board you can see there

 is the flame, I mean there is the igniter right there but there is no flame sensor.

 In fact if you trace, if I look at the pin layout, where are the pin layout, anyway if

 I look at the pin layout where the flame sensor is supposed to be it's empty.

 That pin is not there anymore and I will show you a little bit closer in a second.

 So we are going to replace it with the new board right here and on top of that we have

 So here is the parts for the flame sensor, of course you can see here is the flame sensor,

 here is the bracket, your wires and a little bit of more knick knacks to secure it in.

 So here is the furnace and we are going to install the bracket on the side.

 Luckily there are already two holes drilled right here and everything fits well or else

 After we have the bracket in we are going to put in the flame sensor.

 So as you can see the flame sensor, the tip is facing the flame down there and now we

 So now we are going to connect it to pin 7 which is the top right corner.

 Now we are going to stick it back down in that hole right there.

 Ok so now we have the top one done, now we are going to connect the bottom one, same

 Alright, last step, now we are going to attach the orange wire to pin number 7 that goes

 So now according to the circuit board, the controller board back then.

 So we are plugging that transformer wire to the 24VAC connector right there.

 Next wire to connect is our neutral and there's the neutral bank right there.

 Alright, so the last thing to do is just connect the thermostat wires back to the controller

 The best thing is to always take a photo for this before you take it apart because even

 though there are standards on what color wire should go to which terminal, but apparently

 So we turn on the thermostat inside, trying this for the first time.

 Ok guys, so today I'm going to show you how to make my Nana's scotch-a-roos.

 You're going to need a 16 ounce bag of milk chocolate chips, and a 16 ounce bag of butter

 scratch chips, some peanut butter, some caro syrup, some butter or margarine, sugar, or

 Alright, you're going to want to set your stove on a medium heat, and in that you're

 going to want to put a cup of sugar and a cup of the caro, I believe it is, syrup.

 Now you're going to want to stir the sugar and the syrup together, and you're going to

 Ok, once you've got that to a boil, you want to remove it from the heat and add in a cup

 Ok, in your 9x13 pan, you want to butter it, and put in your peanut butter, rice crispy

 Once you've got it in your pan, you want to press it down flat.

 Ok, so once you've got it patted down like that, you want to let it cool.

 Ok, so it's been about, I don't know, I want to say 15-20 minutes, and my mixture here

 So in a pan, I put some water, and I'm going to get it to a boil.

 We're going to first do the chocolate, and you're going to just stir that up until it

 Ok, so once you've got the chocolate melted down somewhat, you want to add in your butterscotch

 Ok, so once you've got it all melted, you're going to want to take and spoon it over your

 And then you're going to want to spread it out and let it chill.

 It took probably about a half an hour for the chocolate to cool.

 To prepare Paneer Tikka, we need yellow bell pepper, red bell pepper, onions cut like this, green bell pepper and tomatoes deseeded.

 We have to marinate all these things for about 1-2 hours and then we will grill it.

 You can also keep these skewers on tawa with a little bit of oil.

 Now of the many injuries that you as a tennis player may sustain, here are the 3 most common

 by over usage, like the repeated contraction of the forearm muscles that you use to straighten

 Another way this injury can be generated is from improper technique.

 By basically not knowing what you are doing out there, you can put too much unnecessary

 And if you don't find a way to fix it right away and you continuously stress those ligaments,

 And that's going to have you sidelined and out of commission for a long time.

 after you've overloaded the rotator cuff, when the muscle is contracting.

 And it's usually caused during the follow through phase of the serve.

 The main symptom to know if you're experiencing a tennis shoulder injury is pain when the

 ball makes contact with your racket during your serving motion.

 Well because it doesn't need to be built up over time for it to happen.

 Ankle injuries are caused by sudden sideway movements you make, such as pivoting while

 Now these injuries, though common, are really awful and can slow down your progress a great

 So, how can you decrease the chance of it happening to you in one of your matches or

 Yes, stretching, though often times overlooked by the club player, is one of the best ways

 Here are a few tennis stretches you should use before every match you play.

 Well, first off, for tennis elbow, we have the TES or Tennis Elbow Stretch.

 Now the way you execute this stretch is first you extend your right arm out in front of

 you, with the fingers, this is important, pointing down and your palm facing you.

 Then what you want to do is pull your fingers on the right hand down and inwards towards

 This will help stretch and loosen those tendons and ligaments surrounding the elbow.

 Next we have the Cross Shoulder Stretch for the tennis shoulder injury.

 First you want to raise the arm of the shoulder you intend to stretch, so that it's parallel

 And stabilize the side of your shoulder and shoulder blade against a hard surface.

 That will keep the shoulder blade from moving or sliding forward when you begin the stretch.

 If the shoulder is moving, you'll be losing a lot of the benefit.

 Next reach across your body and position your arm in front of your chest, leaving about

 With the other hand, you'll want to lock onto the outside of the elbow of the right hand

 and pull your arm to the opposite side of the shoulder and inward towards your body.

 The arm that's being stretched should be right at or slightly above your pectoral muscles.

 And after you've done it for a while, after you've gotten more comfortable, feel free

 to extend that to 30 seconds for a stretch that's even more intense.

 Now just a word of caution, if you start to feel a strong pain or pinching sensation in

 You don't want to hurt yourself when you're trying to help yourself.

 Now the stretch to prevent the final injury, the awful ankle injury.

 What you want to do with this one is start out by sitting in a chair or on the bench

 But at the same time, keep in mind that you don't want tension in your body either, especially

 So simply relax your back against the back of the chair, but make sure you're upright.

 Then what you want to do is you want to angle your feet so that the top of them are facing

 You want to imagine that you're pushing the top of your feet through the hard court, grass

 This is going to create an incredible stretch across the top of your ankles.

 Now of course doing them both simultaneously can help you loosen up in less time.

 By doing this stretch, you can achieve some incredible results like increased muscle control,

 If you do this correctly, you're going to be able to pivot and change direction while

 going at high speeds while at the same time minimizing the risk of injury.

 Now listen, these are just three of the many stretching techniques out there for tennis

 But try these out to start and you should have a much healthier time as you're kicking

 And be sure to leave any comments or questions that you have about this tip down below in

 Ok and go ahead and visit www.TennisMyCamp.com for more tennis tips, lessons and strategies.

 And I have a lot of friends that will eat a seared rare tuna but won't eat raw tuna.

 I've got some yellowtail here and I want you to think about this yellowtail that's going

 to be seared on the outside two different ways in a grill pan and a grill box and it's

 And for those of you that will eat the seared rare ahi tuna, keep in mind that you're also

 Sushi academies that I've worked with over the years recommend that you freeze your fish

 Some fish are more prone to parasitic worms but this is no time to talk about that.

 This started with a 25 to 30 pound fish from Cattley and Offshore Products.

 Me and the other guys have actually been kind of gnawing away at it during the day because

 If you're not a big fan of wasabi, if you just use it a little bit, use it sparingly

 And if it looks like I'm in a hurry, I am because I don't want to burn the fish.

 And what's cool about these nice sweet peaches on the grill is it might take some of the

 heat off those who don't really like really hot, spicy wasabi fish.

 You know, the people that you can't see in this shot, those folks that are about to eat

 These peaches are going to take a few more minutes while they're doing their thing.

 I'm going to slice these up and I'll slice up the yellowtail and then of course serve

 In the last video I was talking about the kickstarter project and doing a small scale

 sculpture of the blade car and I want to do like a kind of artistic version of the car

 in small scale and here's where I had some pictures of the scale that I want to go with

 and I want to use this to kind of overlay on some clay and what I've done in my little

 oven is I took a whole bunch of clay of the industrial design clay stuff that I have been

 using and I put it into a pan and I made a little temporary pan and I basically melted

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to use this as a big solid block to sculpt with and

 So I have like this that I'll overlay on top and I'll try to use this as a guide to help

 me sculpt out of this big chunk of clay and get an accurate representation of the car

 onto this and then I'll have this molded and duplicated so in kind of a resin bronze

 So I don't know it's kind of all new to me so I may not fully know exactly what I'm talking

 about because I'm not really a sculptor at all even though I've sculpted this whole thing.

 This is kind of new somewhat to me and I haven't really sculpted small little figures

 or cars or anything at this level so this will be an interesting project and I think

 would be good for you guys to kind of follow the progress and everything.

 So what I've got to do now is I've got to take this out of the container and then I

 have to make a stand for it to sit on and then I'll have some nails sticking up or screws

 to hold this block in place so that I can work on the piece and carve it without it

 So I will show that as I make it and keep you updated on this as I go.

 So what I usually do is I heat this up and in a pan, mainly that little pan here and

 So I carve it and it comes up into these little shavings and I want to reuse it so you can't

 It's real brittle and you really need to melt it back together so what I do is I melt it

 in a pan and then I pour it out on this piece of paper and I spread it to where it's about

 a quarter inch thick or so and this gets rid of all the air bubbles for the most part and

 it allows me to break off chunks and then I can just heat these up with my heat gun

 and apply it onto whatever I need to sculpt with and that just helps me.

 That's how I've been doing the door panel and things because this stuff you really have

 What I'll do next is make the stand for the sculpture piece and then I'll start sculpting

 Alright guys, I just got through making the stand for the big chunk of clay that I'm going

 So this is on a big piece of, what is that, 3 quarter inch MDF and that's just a 2 by

 4 and then there's a little plate of a quarter inch MDF underneath and then I have two screws

 that stick up and are basically holding this down and it has a little bit of wiggly wobbly

 to it so I may have to put another brace on it if it gets too much but I think it's going

 And I had to shave some of the stuff off, apparently some of the foil, like I laid this

 into a pan that I kind of made and then I put foil in it so it wouldn't leak out of

 that pan and then one of the folds of the foil got stuck in between some of the clay

 so I had clay over here and a piece of foil and then clay so I had to just chop all that

 off so it's a little shorter than what I knew it was going to be because the pan was 10

 inches and my model is 10 inches so I knew I was going to have to expand it.

 But basically this will go there and I'll have to add probably, you know, I don't know,

 it's pretty close to the size but I'll probably have to build it up just about a half inch

 on the ends and maybe a little bit on top just to shave it back down to get the right

 But so far things are going to work out okay and, you know, from all my YouTubing of other

 people that actually are good at sculpting, this is kind of what a lot of them do is they

 put it on a big base to sculpt on so it can get underneath and around the edges and all

 So I'm going to do the same with this and this model is going to be, like I said, an

 artistic piece so I'm thinking about doing a shape of the car but I'm not going to have

 That's going to be like the kind of artistic streamline sculpture piece and so I want to

 have it and then I'll have it on a piece where it's kind of zooming, you know, like on a

 That's all new ideas at the moment so I'm sure it will change a hundred times as I go

 Anyway, just wanted to show you where I was at at this first stage before I start actually

 Alright, so that's the end of this video and I'll see you guys on the next one.

 The amounts of the ingredients that you're going to need for this recipe will be listed

 in the information box below or you can get them off my website.

 you'll need an 8 ounce box of cream cheese and I'm using the lower fat or the Neufchatel

You'll need vanilla, brown sugar, toffee bits, and powdered sugar.

 my cream cheese in my mixing bowl and what we do to make this is just put all of our

 ingredients in the bowl together and then use the mixer to mix it up.

 brown sugar, the powdered sugar, the vanilla, and the toffee bits.

 do is put it in a serving bowl and show you what it looks like served.

 and some Gala apples, but you can serve it with whatever apples that you like the best.

 ok this is going to be the tutorial that's going to show you how to make these

 bundles and the yarn itself comes like this, there's lace on the bottom

 but I'm gonna go ahead and use 6.5 just because I like to have a little bit more

 there's two stitches here and then there's two stitches here I'm gonna

 I usually keep this on the table beside me or the couch beside me and then I just

 as I need it, I don't just throw it on the ground usually and just let it come

 crazy so these are already in line so if you keep them that way it's going to be a

 remember these last two are double so you want to go under both

 and I mean only on the ends, in the center stitches I always go

 you don't want to do that, you actually want to do the opposite, you want to just

 just, I don't have a picture better because I can't really show you on screen

 hold it up in the air and then it'll just untwist itself naturally

 of ruffles, so you just want to go ahead and continue to do that

 I go through, I use every other stitch so I need at least three

 first loop and I do the same for this one, leaving one loop there

 sometimes if it's too long you'll need to cut it, one way to tell is lay it down

 thank you so much for watching this tutorial if you liked it please don't

 and please don't forget to subscribe thanks so much for watching

 And I think this is a good one if you've got, like I said, the rotisserie chicken or if

 you're cooking extra chicken breast with your dinner for the next day, this is a good way

 Whenever you get, you never see when you buy a pack of chicken, they have the right amount

 So when you have to buy two packages or you only need two chicken breasts and you have

 four, cook them all and use the leftover for things like this, things like this.

 I don't know if you would want to put chicken in there, but any kind of salad-y thing that

 There is our celery, because when you have buffalo chicken, you have to have celery.

 And I just like to chop this up a little bit, just to make it a little bit easier to handle

 Otherwise you have to sort of place it carefully so it rolls up nice.

 I think there's a little piece of lettuce in the wing sauce, but that's alright.

 This is a fast recipe, not a whole lot of prepping involved in this.

 If you've got the chicken ready, just put the wing sauce on there, dice up some celery.

 I think our tortillas are going to be a little bit uncooperative.

 It's just a matter of, you know, if you want it authentic or not.

 You know, I think when you start getting it, if you were making it on your own, you'd want to have a lot of blue cheese in there.

 You could shred your own, but I think it's much easier to buy it.

 And then we're going to put a little bit of our blue cheese on here.

 This is EricaDance38 and today I'm doing a tutorial on this watermelon charm.

 I'd like to thank Made by Mommy because I'm using the taco design and changing it a little

 So first you get a single green or whatever colour you want the base to be.

 Then you get two bands now and go diagonally up across the columns.

 So now you get double reds and here you bring it up five times.

 Now you get another two greens and do them diagonal onto the red.

 You get a single green and on this last peg wrap it around three times.

 If you wanted to do seeds in your watermelon, in a few of these reds, it depends how many

 seeds you want, you could do one red and one black like that and do them in different

 Just thought I'd let you know but I'm doing a seedless watermelon.

 And now you don't need to place any more bands, it's time for the hooking.

 So you get your hook, get in from the capping bands and get the two greens that go up to

 Then you get in there and get the two greens so you go up diagonally.

 Now you've done that, you go back here and hook across these two.

 Now you've done that, you just need to hook this one which creates the charm strap.

 So you get another colour that you want your charm strap to be.

 Get in all of those bands and get your hook, get the green band and pull it through.

 Then put them both on your loom hook and get the top, pull the bottom over the top

 Now this is how I would suggest pulling it off but you can do it anyway.

 Get off the bottom three and then you continue the greens, go along the greens.

 Now you get the bottoms and now you have a good thing to hold on to.

 wondering if we could really make a car for Little's Pet Shops out of a juice

So today we are going to be showing you how to make an LPS car out of

 you're gonna if you don't want to drink this juice box you can like make someone

 out of your juice boxes or like if you're using one and now on to the next

So just take your scissors and put them in the hole that your straw was in

 duct tape or colored paper and don't if you want you can cover the inside if you

 So the next step is to just take your scissors, take your car and just cut out

 If there are any like extra pieces of cardboard like right there you can just cut that off.

 Take your seat, glue it or you can just put another piece of duct tape on like the bottom.

 If you want you can add the wheels, the steering wheel, the I don't know I don't really know much

 Hello everyone, in this video I'm going to show you how I achieved this look using Real

 I'm going to take the buffing brush with small circular motions, very gently I'm going

 I recommend using this buffing brush for liquid foundations, however, you can certainly use

 So keep buffing the foundation into the skin and don't forget to bring it down the neck.

 You can get this airbrush finish and you can see that right here when I start applying

 So wipe off the excess product from the brush just like so and then clean the self-standing

 Moving on to the concealer routine, here I have this side of my face not concealed and

 Let's take some concealer and apply it under my under eye area.

 I usually like to brighten the whole center of my face so I use the concealer under my

 Just tap on the product until it looks completely blended just like so.

 All the brushes here have their names on them which is for quick reference, amazing, super

 I wouldn't apply any foundation with it because it's too small but the brush is definitely

 Here you can see the concealed under eye area I have just finished.

 And now moving to the lips, I like to conceal here any discoloration I have.

 This also helps my lipstick to look brightened and stay on longer.

 Take a little amount from this and you can use either one of these two brushes but I

 Take some, a very little amount, dab the product off and pat onto the center of the face just

 The powder brush is great for loose or pressed powder even with mineral foundation which

 But here I'm taking the L'Oreal Hydra Perfect Loose Powder in Medium and I'm going to apply

 The same techniques, take some product, tap off the excess and apply.

 It is sold separately just like their blush brush you'll see in a minute.

 You can see that it gives you a smooth, high definition look which everybody likes.

 I forgot to mention that these brushes are designed by the pro makeup artist Samantha

 Let's take this bronzer in Light and it's a matte bronzer which blends beautifully.

 Take some product on the tip of the brush, tap off the excess, make the fishy face to

 see exactly where you put the bronzer, right under the cheekbone and apply it with some

 This brush delicately applies bronzer or highlighter to contour or to create sheer, soft, focused

 So now you can see I'm done with the contouring on my cheeks and let's move on to the rest

 I'm going to take some more product and contour my nose very, very lightly.

 You can also do this for better precision, hold the brush sideways.

 Once again take some bronzer and tap off the excess and apply it on the temples of the

 Now we're done with the contouring and we're going to move on to the blush.

 You can use it to contour as well or to set your face with powder.

 So just take some blush, dab on some product, tap off the excess and just for quick reference

 here is your contour, above it is your blush and anything from here up is where your highlighter

 So apply the blush using big circular motions and that's it guys.

 Here I have one pound of bread flour, 2 teaspoons of kosher salt, 1 1⁄2

 actually any time you are mixing flour with liquid, you in essence are kneading

As you mix, you'll notice this dough coming together more and more.

 If this is too difficult for you to do for two minutes, you can do it for one

 it, let it rest for about an hour, and then put it in the refrigerator overnight.

 going to stir this down, and then we're going to let it rest for 15 minutes.

 kind of pizza or bread dough, for that matter, is this final shaping before the

 bring the edges to the center, kind of as if I'm stretching over something.

 should feel this start to tighten up and become smoother as I do that.

 this a few times until you feel that if you do it any more, the dough is going to

And now I'm going to cover it with plastic and let it rest and rise

I'm going to put quite a bit of flour on it because as I said before, this dough is

 up like this, you can just stretch it down and just kind of pull and stretch if you need to.

 don't want to make it bigger than my peel or it'll be too big for my stone.

 little bit to get it to release, and then just pull the peel out.

My dough is a little stickier because it's been sitting for a while,

 so I'm going to make sure that I cover it well with flour so that I'll be able to stretch it out.

Now I'm just going to gradually stretch this into a rectangular shape.

 I can finish stretching it when it's on the sheet pan too, so it's not a problem.

Now this pizza I'm going to do a little different than the other

Slide it right onto my cutting board, and here's our fried salami tomato sauce

 I'm working on some Mother's Day cupcake boxes that I'm giving to my friends and to my mother-in-law.

 My mom isn't getting one because she lives far away, so I'm sending her one virtually

 Anyway, I thought I would film the different cupcakes I'm making just so you could see

 It's probably nothing new and you've probably seen them before, but I thought why not just

 You start off in the middle of the cupcake and squeeze and then you just go around in

 The first one came out a little bit wonky at the end, so let's try it again.

 The next one I'm going to make is kind of like a rosette, a bunch of little rosettes.

 I'm going to start off by making a little rosette in the center.

 Then I turn the cupcake and I just go and make little rosettes all around the cupcake.

 If you get a peak like that, you can take your finger and just push it down a little

 Then I like to add an extra one on top just for an extra little dimension.

 The last one I'm making is kind of just like a pretty frilly flower, almost pansy-like.

 For the last cupcake, I'm going to make kind of like a frilly pansy-like flower.

 I'm just going to make like petals by making an up and down motion.

 Then for extra dimension, I'm going to be putting about 4 petals on top of those.

 To make it really nice and pretty, I'm taking some large sugar pearls that I found at a

 And there we go, there you have a pretty little flower cupcake.

 So the great thing about this is it's dairy free, it's gluten free, and it is refined sugar free.

 It also takes about half an hour to make and it has about 6 ingredients.

 First step, we've got tin foil and we're just going to line our...

 So just make sure you want the kind of nice ribbed edges, so this is worth taking a couple of minutes and getting to the detail.

 Okay, so we've done it up the sides, we've put our chocolate up the sides and we've got our base done.

 I'm just going to put it in the fridge for 20 minutes until it goes nice and hard.

 The almond kind of lightens it and fluffens up the peanut butter.

 Yeah, fluffifies it and then obviously the maple syrup gives it a lovely kind of maple-y sweetness.

 My hands are washed and sterilised so just in case you're concerned.

 If you can, maple syrup really adds that lovely kind of maple undertone.

 It'll kind of come together beautifully to form a maple-y, almond-y, PB, delicious dough ball.

 Okay, so we've taken this out of the fridge now, she's ready to go.

 I'm taking the base of my pie dish and I'm going to take my mango peanut butter inside filling.

 Okay, so now that that's done perfectly and seamlessly, it's time to top it all off with some of our luxurious dark chocolate.

 The main reason for that is that when you go to cut hard chocolate and your knife isn't hot, it won't cut through it.

 So the coconut oil just gives it a little more give and it won't fall apart.

 Okay, so now that I've got my beautiful chocolate layer on it, I'm just going to try and get a really nice smooth edge with the back of a knife.

 It's probably about nearly a kilo and a half of peanut butter cup loveliness here now.

 And because Zoe can fly, now when she can't, when she's not as mobile, once I clip her

 So what I do, each wing has to go through one of these and then you close it on the

 So what I do is I kind of just pull one wing through and then tell her what a good girl

 And then you kind of just grab the other side and as you do you just pull the other wing

 The lanyard, which is this so that you can hold on to her when you go outside and she

 You put it on the bottom of the closure and then you close it up like this.

 So you hold on to this when you go outside and your bird has this on the flight suit.

 And then in the front and if she poops it goes down in this pad.

 Sometimes she doesn't really like it when I put it on and she gets a little busy with

 But soon she forgets she has it on and she doesn't even notice it.

 These little pads go inside so that when they poop the poop kind of sticks to the pad.

 Put the pad there and then turn it back so that the pad's inside there.

 I kind of pull this one and I put my fingers through the hole where the wing's going to

 Because they're not used to having it on and it feels kind of funny.

 But once they've had it on a few minutes they forget they have it on and they start moving

 And the company that makes these flight suits, they suggest, I think, not leaving these on

 And whenever a bird is wearing a flight suit you really should supervise.

 For the pirouette optimization direction, basically what we're doing here

 the helicopter, or meaning the swashplate, level while it's rotating.

 By default it starts at red and this is how you want to set it.

 When you go into this setting, the swashplate is going to move into some sort of

Not in relation to the helicopter frame or anything, but globally.

 So what you want to do is find one of the directions that keeps the swashplate

 kept its heading globally, regardless of the position of the helicopter

 Or when you're in forward flight, the B-Stacks will know that you're at this

 Hey guys, OGenelle here and today I'm pretty much trying to salvage this 8 day wash and

 Today I'm heading to picnic and I have no idea what to do with my hair so I decided

 to do something really quick and simple to keep my hair out of my face.

 This way I can prance around and not be hot and sweaty and still be cute.

 And I'm going to start by separating my hair into three segments.

 I'm going to pull the front towards me and put it over my shoulder and I'm going to pull

 the back separate and then I'm going to pull the other side towards me, keep it over my

 Then at this point what I'm going to do is take this scrunchie, which I almost forgot

 These Sam, what's it called, goodies, ouchless scrunchies, which I love.

 They're like this ruggly thing and they don't really snag or anything.

 I kind of like them a lot so I'm going to use that one to hold my hair back.

 And then what I'm going to do is take my Curly Hair Refresher Spray.

 And I'm pretty much going to use this to spray my hair and try to help rejuvenate the curls,

 I'm literally going to start at the very top, close to my scalp, and I'm just going to twist flat inward,

 I take my handy dandy super jumbo bobby pin and I'm going to pin it in.

 The way I'm doing it is I'm actually coming from the inside out.

 I'm pushing the pin inside of the twist, catching it on top, holding all the hair in place,

 and then pushing it through underneath so that the bobby pin is not visible.

 And then I'm going to go over to the other side and repeat the same process,

 twisting my hair flat to my head in an inward motion while grabbing all my hair,

 Same thing, I'm catching all of the twist in the pin and I'm pushing it underneath the hair.

 Same thing, grabbing all the hair and then pushing the bobby pin underneath this way that you can't see the bobby pin.

 And then from here I'm just going to take my hair out of the hair tie and set it all free.

 And then I'm going to grab my refresher spray and just kind of make sure that I mist all of my hair

 so that they can all kind of catch a little life back since they've been all dry and smushed up for the past like eight days.

 Denim shirt, some shorts for a pop of color, nothing too difficult.

Today I am going to do just a quick tip for you using a Mac palette

 and I want to show you how to pop out the insert so you can fit more pans in the actual palette.

 Right now I just have an empty Mac blush palette that I did have blush in, but I took everything out so I could show you

So I'm going to show you how to take out this palette and this will work for blush palettes

 and eyeshadow palettes, they ultimately once you pop them out they're the same thing.

 or you don't have a blush palette, don't worry because once you pop this out you can fit the same amount in it.

 So the first thing you're going to need is just this little tool, I mean you don't need this tool, but you just need something

 that's kind of thin and flat that will get under the palette so you can pop it out.

 what I do is I take this and I put it, I kind of work it in between the actual pan itself and the little insert, see how it's starting to lift?

 So what I do is I just kind of work it across, kind of gently because I don't want to break it, but as you'll hear it start to pop

 and I just go around to the other side which I just work that as well.

 So I just work this side to pop it and I didn't want that to happen, but here's your insert and here's your empty palette

 and what you can do, because this is magnetic, so you can put your eyeshadows and your blushes, you can even put them together

 but this is great for your everyday, if you want to consolidate, have a lot of blushes and eyeshadow

 you can just put them all in this palette like this so you don't have to worry about running out of room or buying a bunch of these

 because if you take this out, I think you can, with the blushes, it fits six with the insert, I think you can fit eight comfortably without this

 and then the eyeshadows, I know it holds 15, without it I can fit 24, I think, if I really move them around

 but this is great and this is a quick tip, like I said, if you don't have the blush palette and you want to use it for eyeshadow

If you have the blush palette but you want to use it for eyeshadow, you can do the same thing

 because this is the same thing, the only thing that differs are the inserts

 and if you're traveling and you don't want your shadows or your blushes to slide around and break, this is still intact

 so you can just put it right back in, which, all my hard work putting it back in, and it just snaps right back into place very easily

 it would if I wasn't on camera, but it would fall, it would just snap right back

 there you go, so that is my little quick tip of the day with MAC palettes

 so please, if you have any questions, post them below, if you want to see what they look like, you know, filled

 anyway, that's all for today, so please keep watching and make sure you subscribe, thanks and have a great day

 What you need to repair this is an O-ring that's the correct size.

 If you're not sure what your size is, they've got these kits here.

 They have several different sizes and you can match it up for your faucet.

 If you don't use this, then your O-ring might get pinched and not move around properly because

 If you're using a pair of channel locks on these, you might want to wrap a couple pieces

 With this plumber's grease, you want to wear gloves when you use this stuff.

 This stuff is kind of stinky and it's designed to not come off with water so easily.

 So when you're using it, you'll want to make sure to wear gloves.

 And then that way you don't get that stuff on your hands because you really can't wash

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to apply my faucet grease around to the metal itself.

 I should have probably wore two gloves, but now I'm probably going to get this stuff on

 Anyway, once you've got that done, then what you're going to want to do is apply kind of

 a liberal amount of the faucet grease to the outside of the O-ring.

 Then go ahead and insert your finished piece back into your hole.

 We're going to try that on the bottom one and see if that inserts properly.

 And then we're just going to go ahead and gently tighten this part down.

 Like I said, it is a little bit better to use some tape around the jaws to avoid marking

 And then I'm just going to move the neck around a little bit to work the grease in all the

 And we'll go ahead and turn this on to make sure we have no leaks.

 And then I'm going to feel down below the faucet itself to make sure that we have no

 And when we're all set there, that's how to replace your faucet neck on a V-step.

 Hey everybody, I'm back to do another tutorial and this is on a birthday look for you to

 wear to your birthday if you want to wear something a little bit more dramatic, a little

 And this is just an option, you could do different colors if you want.

 I just picked this because as you guys know my birthday is tomorrow and I had to film

 You know, before my birthday I wanted to try out something new.

 And this is the look that I'm going to be wearing to my birthday dinner tomorrow and

 I'm wearing this green dress that has a bunch of different colors which I'm sure will be

 posted on my blog later or I'll make some sort of vlog about it.

 I also have another birthday dinner on Sunday with my family and I'm wearing a black and

 I'm not wearing this to my birthday but I thought I'd put something dressy for you guys

 Definitely heavier than the majority of the makeup looks I've done but of course for your

 birthday you want to look the best, you want to have the most unique makeup, and you want

 If you're interested in seeing how I did this look, stay tuned.

 I primed my eyes with Too Faced Shadow Insurance and I'm taking a vanilla color and applying

 I'm applying some on a napkin and taking a flat shader brush and applying the shadow

 Next I'm taking a forest green eyeshadow and another flat shader brush and applying this

 Next I'm taking a pointed crease brush in two different purples, which I'm just mixing

 I'm applying this right above the greens, right above my crease using a windshield wiper

 Just pack it on and make sure the purple really pops and stands out.

 Next taking a pencil brush, I'm taking a black shimmery color, which can be easily

 duped, there are plenty of black shimmery colors similar, and applying this onto my

 outer corner and just drawing a V from my crease onto my lash line and blending it out.

 If you lost any of the green, make sure you reapply it on the inner one half of the lid

 Take any shimmery gold color you have and pack it onto your inner tear duct.

 Next I'm taking a liquid liner, this is the felt tip liner, and applying it with small

 strokes from the inner tear duct all the way to my outer corner.

 For the lower lash line, I'm just using a cream gel liner, which is the black one, and

 I'm setting it with a black shadow, just smudging and setting it to keep it lasting longer.

 I also applied false lashes, just trimmed off the excess pieces, applied some eyelash

 glue, waited a few seconds, and applied it as close to my lashes as possible.

 After letting them dry, curl your real ones and your fake ones together, and apply a little

 Next I'm taking a bronzing powder, which is two shades darker than my skin tone, and applying

 it into the hollows of my cheeks for a contour to slim down my cheeks.

 Next I'm taking a peachy brown matte blush, and I'm applying it with an angled brush on

 I also took a shimmery highlight powder and applied it down the bridge of my nose and

 For the lips, I applied a peachy nude lipstick, and I topped it off with a nude lip gloss.

 So today I'm going to teach you how to make these little bottles that, and inside it looks

 you can't see it but the cloud inside is actually very light blue and the water around it is

Eyeshadows, they have to have a really strong colour and they have

 pokey tool so you can actually get your cotton wool into your glass bottles.

 two, all you do is swap out the glitter eyeshadow for food colouring and regular glitter.

 you're going to do the version two, you're going to have to do somewhere where you can

 get very messy because we all know what food colouring does, it stains everything.

 The first thing you will want to do is take the cork off your bottle.

 put it through the cork and then on top you'd want to create a little loop and then attach

 a jump ring or something at the top so that you can actually thread a cord through it

How much you use really just depends on the size of your bottles and really

 the overall look that you want to give your little galaxy in your bottle.

Now the more you tease it out the better because it gives the illusion

 you have at hand, basically just put a little bit of your eyeshadow into the bottle.

 see that when you start adding the water to your bottles a little bit of glitter can go

I haven't quite done that but all you do now is you just stick the cork on and give

 that it doesn't look too much like a galaxy right now so in that case you'll want to see more of the

 and just keep adding water and rinsing some of the glitter out until you can see more of the

But this leaves a really cool sort of... it's like something you've maybe seen

 like a snow globe or something because you can see the water moving about yet it moves very slowly

 because of the cotton wool and you can add different colour glitters and it'll create

But I'll show you what it looks like if I rinse some of the glitter out.

 And you'll see I've done the green one as well and that's what they look like when you remove

 glitter in it as you can see there and really it's just a case about experimenting with colours

 is exactly the same, tease a piece of cotton, put it in the bottle, but instead of putting the

 glitter in you're gonna put one drop of food colouring or instead of food colouring you can

That's what I like to use, I find it works a lot better than food colouring.

 And then just put a drop in, fill it up with water, shake it and then put just a little bit of normal

 So you see I've got my cotton wool in here and I'm just gonna put a drop, that's all you need, of ink into the

So now it's gone 100% blue, tip all this water back out and fill it up until

 I find that once you let the everything, sort of all the liquid settle after a while, they look much better.

 So have fun making your little, oops, don't focus this, your little galaxies in a bottle.

 Whichever way you do it, yep, just have fun making a mess basically.

Leather and faux leather cushions tend to hold air depending on the construction.

 So when you sit on the cushion it kind of bubbles up around you if you know what I mean.

 To solve this problem we're going to install these brass air vents.

 Without the vents that would stay there, but with the vents it allows the air to escape.

 If you listen maybe you'll be able to hear it sucking that air back in through the vents.

 We have the ventilator itself, the face, and we have the collar which we use

 To install an air vent you'll need a hole punch, a set of dies, and a hammer.

 Our first step would be to mark the location of our hole in the zipper boxing on our cushion.

 What I will do is take my die cutter and cut a hole there for the vent.

 I'm going to take the male portion of my ventilator here, my vent, and I'm going to stick the flange through

 So you can see the flange on the inside and we have the finished piece on the outside.

 Now we'll take the female portion of our die and set it down on this block and I'll

 I'll take the other half of my die set and place it on top of what we have here

 And if you use Facebook, you can join us there and share pictures of your projects.

 First, I will show you how to play it an easy way with capo at fret 2.

 And then I will show you how to play it without a capo, which will be a tad harder.

 And there is a link provided in the video and in the description.

 So we're going to just strum that chord once during the beginning of the song like this.

 And then as the song picks up, we'll strum it, straight ahead strumming like this.

 And you can play these two strumming patterns throughout the song.

 Now if you want to do a B minor 7 form, instead of the B minor 11, you can do it this way.

 You have to barre, however, and it makes it a little bit harder.

 So now let's remove the capo and we'll do the no capo counterparts to these chords.

 The first chord is G flat minor 7, which can be played this way.

 Hi, I'm Chef Tony Matassa with BBQGuys.com, a ShoppersChoice.com site.

 In this video, we're taking a closer look at answers to several different questions

 Often grillers find that their hamburgers come out rubbery or with a dry texture.

 There is, of course, the tennis ball patty that swells in the center.

 And my favorite, I want a well-done hamburger, but I don't want it to be too dry.

 When blending ground beef and seasonings, don't overwork and smash the meat.

 When forming patties, steer clear of over-patting or tightly compressing.

 To properly form patties, lightly press down only a couple of times.

 With our patties formed, we're ready to cover the tennis ball phenomenon.

 To prevent this, simply place an indention in the center of each patty with your thumb.

 While cooking, the center will rise to meet the rest of your burger, instead of going

 When considering how to make hamburgers with more flavor, a good rule of thumb is to start

 If instead you use generic 80-20 ground beef, this could be cut from anywhere on the cow,

 blended together at the same lean-to-fat ratio, which can cause major inconsistencies in flavor.

 Now how do we grill a well-done hamburger without having it come out as dry as shoe

 The best way I know how is to place a small hole through the center of the burger, which

 will help to cook the inside before completely drying out the outside of the hamburger.

 I hope that you'll give these tips a shot the next time you grill burgers and comment

 I'm Chef Tony Matassa and remember, at BBQGuys.com we smoke the competition!

 From Manhasset to Montauk, we have traveled our communities to bring you the following

 We manufacture and wholesale a large variety of gourmet fresh pasta products and specialty

 You know, we're 20 minutes to Manhattan and maybe half an hour to the end of the island.

 You know, the amount of business that's available on Long Island and New York, we kind of have

 We were just making the Jolie Ravioli with broccoli and white cheddar.

 We take the fresh broccoli, we saute it in extra virgin oil and garlic, then we mix it

 Then it goes back out to the machine and it goes through the process of making the ravioli.

 There's a kneading process and this is called laminating the dough.

 We just believe we achieve superior quality with the laminating process.

 These hooks that hold the rolls of dough in place so they can be fed through the machine

 On top of the machine, there's a vat that holds the filling, that presses the filling

 Over here is where the finished product comes out of the machine.

 There's a forming roller that presses the two different doughs together and it captures

 And then our machine operator will make sure each different shape falls out onto the belt

 correctly and there's no imperfections in the different shapes.

 We have a teddy bear, a car, a rocket ship, a dinosaur, a star, and a heart.

 It's packed loose and we don't want the shapes to be touching each other or laying on top

 of each other during the freezing process, otherwise they might stick together.

 Next step is we do about a minute or two of drying to take a little moisture away and

 They can be packed anywhere from 45 minutes to an hour from now.

 It's a resealable bag, so we have to heat seal it and put it through the machine.

 When it gets to the other side after heat sealing, it'll go on the roller there.

 They'll take it off of that and pack it into the cases and that's how we'll ship it out.

 Sporadically throughout the day, we cook all the different ravioli products and pasta products

 that we make to ensure that they're getting a proper seal and the machines are adjusted

 We always pay strict attention to the thickness of the dough and the quality of the seal on

 all the products we're sending out because when you boil them, if they don't have a proper

 seal, they will open and explode and we would have unhappy consumers.

 You would get the water boiling to a rapid boil, put the ravioli in there, stir it a

 couple of times, and then turn the water down to a slow simmer.

 Whenever you're cooking ravioli, you want to avoid boiling too violently because they

 do have filling inside that gets heated up when the pasta is boiled and you want to avoid

 The seam is this border that surrounds the filling and it's very important to have it

 closed properly and not to get cheese trapped in the middle of the two pieces of dough that

 We try to have it a very defined shape where it's clear where the dough starts and finishes

 This is cases of our Jolie ravioli cheese ravioli product after they've been processed

 It's approximately 60 to 80 cases on this U-boat which is going to go in the freezer

 Well this is actually where we store the finished product to be prepared to put on a pallet

 to be shipped out to California, to Midwest, to our backyard in New York City.

 Hi, this is Blake with LawnEQ.com and I had a customer come in yesterday and brought me

 Something's flipped up from underneath and got behind the belt and threw it off.

 And when you tip the plow mowers back, you always want to tip them back on the handle.

 You turn it this side, the oil is going to run into the air cleaner.

 The proper way to do it is in a void on the back of the handle.

 And just tip it straight back like this and lay it on your dog's floor and look at it.

 Now if you come underneath here, look, this one's awfully dirty.

 But you can check to see if this belt right here is on the pulley.

 And you'll have to remove this back cover to check the back pulley on the transmission.

 You lift it up and you can see that this pulley, the belt is not on the pulley.

 So you'll need to take this cover off, which I have partially already did.

 So you take two pliers underneath here and clamp it and pull it out.

 You've got three screws here that hold this cover plate on the transmission.

 And I have sometimes, after you remove these front two, you can loosen the back and kind of squeeze that belt back on.

 Once you get the belt back on the pulley, you go ahead and put your two back screws back in and reassemble it.

 If you have any questions, give us a call at LonnieQ.com or Barnes Equipment.

 In today's lesson we're going to learn Baby Love by The Supremes and that's on the album

 Before we get started, take a minute to look in the description, there's a link to our

 chord chart for this song there that'll help you follow along with this lesson and the

 To play this song, we're going to need to use the following chords.

 We're going to play 4 downstrokes per chord except at the end on F, Em, D, and G.

 Alright now let's try that strumming pattern out over the chord progression.

 Chef Buck here and today we're going to cook us up a little bit of okra.

 Just going to throw it in a skillet with a little bit of tomato gravy.

 Now we're going to use fresh okra for this recipe because frozen okra, you know, it sucks.

 When you buy it, try to get pieces that are one inch or two inches long.

 You don't want super duper long pieces because they get a little bit tough.

 Now I'm cleaning up the stems a little bit but it shouldn't need a lot of that.

 And when you're trimming, don't cut into the pod because you know you'll let out that goo.

 Grab you a large onion or medium sized onion, depending on how much you like onion.

 Throw your onions in there and we'll give them a minute's head start.

 You want them to get nice and soft and start throwing out that onion flavor.

 Add a tablespoon of coriander powder and a teaspoon of chili powder.

 So mix those flavors well and then I'm going to put in one cup of tomato puree.

 Now I like using tomato puree because it turns this into almost like a tomato gravy.

 Now you can use a couple of fresh tomatoes if you want to but it's not going to be nearly

 You know, it's going to be a lot thinner but it won't be as sweet either.

 So if you don't like it sweet, you might want to go for the fresh tomatoes.

 And when you buy this okra, you know, cook it that day or the next day.

 Don't wait a long time because okra won't stay fresh for very long in your refrigerator.

 Now okra's got a semi-well-deserved reputation for being kind of slimy, which it can be,

 And we're going to add a tablespoon of vinegar and that will also keep down on the sliminess.

 And it's not going to get slimy anyway because we're not cutting into the pods, you know.

 A lot of times people will slice up the pods, you know, and use it as a thickener and stews

 But if you cook it whole in the pod and, you know, cook it fast in a skillet like we're

 It's not a very wet dish so, you know, you shouldn't have to cook it too long to get

 You know, the pods should still have a little bit of a crunch to them.

 I often find I have to add a little more salt to this, you know, so check it for salt.

I'm just going to show you just a little quick just a little quickie video

 hopefully hopefully I can keep it short anyway I wanted to show just a quick easy way that you can

 make your own mittens very simply on your own home sewing machine it doesn't take very long

 I'll show you exactly how to do it and what I'm using is we're using quite a bit of fleece and

 stuff these days and I we've got some scrap stuff laying around so probably make some mittens out

 of them and let's show you how to do that very quickly all right so what I'm going to do is just

 trace a pattern on to this is an old shipping envelope I just cut it and turn it inside out

 and what I did is just lay my I just laid my hand on there and I just traced around it and then then

 you just take kind of clean up the edges and then you just take like right here and add about a half

 inch all the way around and I'd add like about three-quarter inches of this side just just to

 give you a little extra slack there so and make sure you get when you mark it make sure you draw

 your lines all the way down to where the where your thumb comes together here because that tends

 to want to creep up on you and you got kind of a short thumb so you want to make sure that you get

 all the way down there and once you have your pattern it's pretty simple to go from there

 okay so that one was cut with white side up now we've got to cut one the opposite way so that we

 have a inside and outside so we can just go like that we want to depends on how economizing you

 want to be on your fabric make sure right here in the thumb you make sure you mark right in the

 right into the bottom of that thing it's like I say it wants to creep out on you usually so there

 you go right there so now we can just go ahead and start cutting them all right so let's go ahead

 and cut this I just want to kind of get that big chunk out of here and what I'm going to do

 just going to go down in here and just separate those two and now you just want to stay a little

 bit to the outside of the line because this stuff's going to creep up on you a little bit

 I don't know it always wants to be smaller on no matter what I do make sure you take that right

 into the bottom of that V right there so you don't otherwise you're going to shorten up your thumb

 and you just kind of go around the thumb like this and going out like that so there's one of them

 let's go ahead and do this other one just follow that right up there you can do this

 with scissors too I'm just I'm left-handed and I don't know how to work scissors so I use the I

 use the rotary cutter most of the time now we just now we're into here all that on down trim

 that even there we go right now we have these you can do either way I want to put the dark as the

 outside of my mitten I could do I could do the light side either it doesn't doesn't really matter

 you want the this is a little more like like this side here of this particular fabrics a little more

 like sheep's wool and I want to have that on the inside but you could do it like that but the bottom

 line is what you want to do is whatever you want the outside of your mitten to be those two sides

 go together so since I want the brown on the outside I'm going to sew them up with the brown

 facing each other because we're going to sew it up and then turn them inside out well actually

 this is inside out we're going to turn them right side up all right now we're ready to rock and

 roll here turn the machine on all right so I want to start I like starting at the apex of the thumb

 and working my way around you can do whatever you want okay if you can see right here the foot to

 my machine there's two sides of the foot and I I just want to run the outside edge of that foot

 I'm going to follow that fabric around like that so that's that's how far in I'm going to sew there's

 my needle right there so I'm going in about a quarter little little more than a quarter of an

 inch or so from the edge when we start off we want to back tack a little bit and especially I

 want to right here at the thumb because the thumb gets a lot of pressure a lot of pressure it seems

 and then as you come up on the end right here I like to do a pretty good bar tack there and

 I'm going to do a shove under there and I'm going to start again right at that apex of my thumb

 and we're just going to go to town here this little deal my little back tack

 put this thing around that's why I'm the prototyper I know how to do this good

 we leave the we leave the quality sewing up to the professionals

 so you get all done you just take your take your snips here and

 all right now we're ready to turn this thing right side up so just start like a pair of socks

 there I go right there there's my there's my mittens didn't take but 10 minutes to make them

 pair of mittens they made in about 10 minutes you can do the same little bit of fleece I use

 Maldon Mills 300 which is a heavy winter weight fleece and these things are just toasty warm so

 Perry Peacock here from wilderness elevation hope you have a great day want to give a try

 on making some of these things they're easy to do give it a shot have a great day

 Okay, the first modification we're going to do is drill our second gear ply and our third

 In this application they wanted it drilled to 3-16ths of an inch in both of these holes.

 So this is, as you can see, second gear ply is this hole here and third gear ply is this

 Now if you want to go for all out racing you can go ahead and drill it to 3-16ths of an

 For instance, if you're going for the street strip application, you don't want it shifting

 So for instance, you can go to 125 on the second gear and 140 on the third gear or if

 it was a tow vehicle, go 90 thou here and then go up to 110 here.

 Soften the shifts up a little bit so they're not as neck breaking as in a race transmission.

 Okay, the next modification we want to do is this piston is usually in here and there's

 a spring underneath of it and there's a c-clip that holds the assembly in there.

 Then you'll be able to, once you get the piston down low enough, you'll be able to take the

 Go ahead and throw the spring away and then go ahead and put your piston back in with

 So at that point, you can go ahead and put your c-clip in here.

 So I went and purchased a 5-16ths set screw, drilled the hole and tapped it.

 So basically you're going to go ahead and drill that out and tap it with that new set

 You have to be sure that when you tap that 5-16ths and get that set screw in there, I

 would put some thread locker on it and make sure that it's below this surface here and

 not protruding up high enough that it's going to not allow the valve body to seal.

 And what this is going to do is it's going to firm up your 2-3 shift.

 The next modification we want to do is we're going to pull out the 1-2 shift valve, which

 We're going to pull out the aluminum housing and the 1-2 shift valve.

 All it is is this goes in the valve body this way and there's a pin that goes through and

 And if you just put some pressure on it and then push that pin out, the whole assembly

 And then what we want to do is you see this land here on the 1-2 shift valve.

 And then on each side of the valve here, if you can see, this would normally be circular.

 We're going to deburr all that because this valve has to make sure that it moves freely

 Then we're going to go ahead and there's an exhaust valve in this right here, which I've

 And then if you deburr that and just take it out a little bit more with your drill bit,

 And at that point you can take one of the check balls, which came out of your valve

 And we're going to go ahead and take that and drive this check ball into here and block

 At that point what that's going to do is you can have manual low with that up to any RPM.

 Now what you have to be careful of is you can also downshift into first gear at any

 There's no application of the band because we've taken the spring out of the accumulator

 There's no brake that the band is going to apply, which it normally would.

 So you have to be careful of the RPM that you're doing, that you're shifting down in

 because you could do engine damage if you say went from third gear to first gear and

 you're, say you're revving at 4,000 RPM and all of a sudden you pulled it into first gear.

 My son Stevie is my helper in the home kitchen and we want to show you how to make something

 These are vanilla beans that he's showing you and the simple product of it is just simply

 So I got to choose a spice of my choice, like one ounce to four ounces of whatever spice

 So if you take a vanilla bean like this, all you're going to do, there's different ways

 We are going to start off by just cutting them in half because you're going to see in

 We're going to put split vanilla beans in the bottles that we're going to give out as

 Would it make a difference if you cut them in half and put them into slices?

 Well, some people say that if you want more flavor, you're going to take it like this,

 Anyways, you're going to cut down and open up the vanilla bean.

 And inside you're going to see the vanilla seeds, which are in the inside.

 Okay, now some people would go ahead and do that because it may give it more flavor.

 We're just splitting these in half because when we bottle them, I'm going to split the

 vanilla beans in half and put them into the individual bottles to give out as gifts.

 So, anyways, we're just simply going to take the bottle and we are now just going to put

 So we're just going to stick in the vanilla beans into this bottle.

 And then we will come back to you when this is done as we're putting it into our gift bottles.

 The reason for leaving in the seeds is they contain a large amount of essential and natural

 The best place to keep this bottle is going to be in a cool, dry place, preferably a closet

 in the back of the house where it's always nice, dark, and cool.

 Tonight I'm going to show you how to make crispy chow mein noodles.

 Did you ever go to a restaurant and have that really nice kind of crispy chow mein and get

 home and then you boil yours and you just wonder how they did it and yours just never

 turns out the same and you stir fry it and it sticks to the pan and it's soggy?

 Well there's a very simple trick to it and I'm going to show you how to do it tonight.

 So first you're going to start off with some dried chow mein noodles.

 Now one thing you should know is that these generally come in either different sized bags

 The long packs are 100 grams and the short packs like if they're little squares are 50

 Now one good rule of thumb to remember is if you're making a nice platter of chow mein,

 I was mistaken, they look like the long ones from the outside but they're actually the

 Now the package directions on these always say usually cook for two to three minutes.

 This is important if you want your chow mein to come out right so I will set my timer actually

 As you can see the water is looking pretty starchy so I'm going to get these off and

 So let these cool off and assuming you are making a chow mein, the time it's going to

 take for these to cool down you can do the rest of your prep, chop your vegetables and

 You don't need to use as much oil to prevent it from sticking and you can cook it on a

 So what I'm going to do is just get visually one or two tablespoons of oil.

 What you want to do is kind of even out the amount of chow mein that you've got.

 Now I've got oval plates so I'm going to cheat a little and kind of shape it here.

 What you want to do is you want to have it the same shape as your serving dish.

 And let that cook on the other side for about two minutes this time.

 So I just slide that down and there is your serving plate just waiting for your stir fry

 I will be showing some chow meins and stir fries further down the road.

 If you don't like it this crispy, some people just love it like this in their other restaurants,

 If you want it less crispy, all you have to do is decrease the cooking time on each

 However, if you're going to serve it like this, when you put the stir fry sauce on this,

 it will sink through the noodles and it will wet it up in the middle so it still is nice

 and chewy but soft to eat at the same time and the edges will remain crispy and crunchy

 My name is Adam with OrlandoDrummer.com and today we have a really, really simple lesson

 Now these eight notes I got from David Garibaldi in a drum solo of his that I watched recently,

 but the orchestration or where I'm playing it on the kit is something that I came up

 So before we talk about where this is going to go, let's learn the pattern itself.

 Now we're going to play it two times to give us a full bar of 16th notes.

 You could play it four times to give yourself a whole bar of 32nd notes if you wanted to,

 The pattern is right, left, left, kick, left, right, left, left.

 So we have a grouping of three notes, right, left, left, a single kick drum, and then a

 So for accents, we're going to be accenting only three notes in this entire eight note

 The very first note, that right that falls in the beginning of that three grouping in

 the front, and then the first two notes of the paradiddle get accented left, right.

 So if we were to sing this one out, we would have right, left, left, kick, left, right,

 So if you guys have seen my other videos, you know that I like to cover the linear pattern

 So at three different speeds, we're going to go through that linear pattern.

 We're going to include the accents, and we're just going to get used to how this pattern

 Once we can sail through the pattern, it doesn't really matter where it goes.

 So let's play this pattern through three speeds until we get used to it.

 If that linear pattern is feeling good, let's walk really, really quickly through the orchestration.

 The only thing we're going to be moving is that first right hand.

 The left hands are going to stay on the snare drum as ghost notes.

 Now we have our kick drum to complete beat one, and in beat two, we have our left hand

 We're going to play that paradiddle as an accented left hand on the snare drum, an accented

 right hand on a closed hi-hat, followed by two left hands that are played still as ghost

 Now, in beat three, we have the same pattern, right, left, left, kick, but we're going to

 So that right hand that opens up beat three, that's going to be played as an accented note

 We're going to have our two left hands ghost noted on the snare drum, followed by a kick.

 And in beat four, we're doing something a little bit interesting.

 We're taking that left hand on the downbeat of four, that's going to be played as a closed

 hi-hat, followed by an accented right hand on the snare, and then two ghost notes played

 Let's try this just like before, three different speeds, and then we'll crank it up.

 I really had a blast taking a Garibaldi pattern and doing my own thing with it.

 If you guys like the music that's in the intro and the outro of this video, that is my band

 We're based here out of Orlando, Florida, and we actually just released an EP on July

 So if you guys want to hear some of the licks and gospel chops and some of the fills and

 things that I teach here on YouTube, if you want to hear that in context, grab a copy

 And you guys know you can always contact me through orlandodrummer.com.

 properly and I wasn't quite satisfied with the video so I thought this year I

 probably about a head and a half of cabbage and all I've done is I've washed

 it, taken the rough outside leaves off and then I've quartered it and taken out

And we're just going to blanch these for three minutes and then we're

 three minutes and I'm going to get Wolfie to come over and give me a hand

Okay folks we're a little bit crowded here but we have our blanched

 cabbage it's been blanched for three minutes and it's still nice and hot.

 cabbage water that Wolfie strained for me and we have our pressure canner going.

 Now some of my jars you'll see have labels on them that's just because

 they're old labels and I usually just put a new label right over top.

 market because last year I put the tent over my cabbage and I then sprayed it

 with a solution of soap water like dish soap water and jalapeno pureed jalapeno

This year the heads are small because of the drought and they've

 water from the kettle but I like the fact that any vitamins that have been

 transferred to the water from the blanching process are already in the

Okay always always always debubble and I mean really I mean last

 year I didn't debubble properly and because this is leafy air gets trapped

So always always always work really really hard stir that cabbage

 jar and we have our lids that have been parboiled and soaking in hot water.

 fingertip tight means is that as tight as you can do it with your fingers not

 I'm on my second to last jar and we're gonna I'm gonna fill you in.

Now I have washed rinsed and baked my jars in the oven at 200 degrees

 for a minimum of 15 minutes and then I turned it down to about 150 to 175.

 I'm gonna fill this up to half an inch below with water and I put in a half a

 teaspoon of salt and I'm going to take my wooden spoon and I am just going to

 pound the heck out of this just to make sure there are no air bubbles.

 cabbage they're a little more tricky and that's why they're not recommended in

 any books because they're afraid people are going to make a mistake in the

 process and they're gonna blame the the company that made the book.

 gonna have one more to do and out of three heads of cabbage I do believe I'm

 gonna get 10-11 jars and we are going to process this in the pressure canner for

 and when this vents a steady stream of steam, solid, nice and highly pressurized

 been venting a steady stream of steam for 10 minutes and we are going to put

 our weight on at 10 pounds pressure and when it comes to a vigorous rocking

 motion we will turn it down until it rocks gently and once it's rocking at

 the proper pressure then we will say we will time this for 55 minutes.

 liter jars here of cabbage and if you notice it is almost of a golden color

 rather than green and I do believe that's because I use the water that I

 blanch the cabbage in but it doesn't matter it tastes delicious.

 my home canned cabbage and out of the three heads I got these 7-1 liter jars

 and I have four more in the canner and that's out of three heads of cabbage so

 that's not bad and at a dollar a head for the cabbage that is a

 Let's go ahead and get ourselves a half a can of a juice concentrate.

 Now you've got measurements up along the side of the container.

 One of the toughest things for a blender to do is blend up ice, is it not?

 Now take your tamper and simply push it all right into the blade.

 Disperses the ice into the moisture, causing it to thicken up and freeze.

 Now the first thing that we have to understand... are we running yet?

 The first thing that we have to get about one hand circling is the principle of the two man saw.

 And that is that the distance between Eric and me has to stay constant.

 This one hand circling is probably primarily the way to begin training the two man saw.

 But the two man saw principle follows all the way through and is one of the most profound lessons in the push hands repertoire.

 Because everything has to do with you manipulating that space between you.

 Now this particular lesson now, this exercise I mean, starts to become a little bit more fun.

 We're still keeping the two man saw, but sometimes we'll mix it up a little bit.

We get to do stuff messing with the two man saw in the one hand circling.

 And again, that's something that we will do all the way through everything in push hands.

 Now you come over, take it a little bit further now to the point where we can change the hand.

 So I get over here, I might bring it around so I can try to get more.

 And you have to be willing to lose, you have to be willing to go into the back leg.

 Okay, now the next stage of this is putting the other hand on the elbow.

 It's more concerned with me finding where he is so I can get a push on him.

 Now this follows, again, what follows with this is a principle that I called way back.

 To weigh this person back to find out where his resistances are.

 As you can see there is no way that a pinball is going to fit into that hole.

 This wooden cube right here is about 2 1⁄2 inches all the way around.

 And here is the size of a pinball, or at least the pinball that I'm going to be using.

 I'm going to use poplar for mine, but I bet pine would work just as well.

 If you can't find anything like this, try checking on the bottom of pallets.

 Originally I wanted to use a 9 ball instead of a pinball, but I couldn't find a piece big enough for it.

 Now I want to get the insides nice and smooth with a drum sander.

 This side got a little messed up, but that's because I should probably have been using a Forstner bit.

 The prototype had a chamfer on it, but on this one I'm going to put a round over.

 I want this to look a little more round than it is, so I changed the 1⁄4 inch round over bit to a 3⁸ round over bit.

 That'll keep this piece from getting sucked in towards the router bit.

 At this point you're probably just annoyed and you want to know the secret, but I'm not going to tell you until tomorrow.

 It's been 24 hours and I replaced the water that was in there with hot water, just in preparation for putting the bearing in.

 And it's been fizzing like Alka-Seltzer for the last 10 minutes.

 So I'm going to give it another half hour just to finish whatever it's doing.

 So I'm going to coat the pinball with mineral oil to help it on its way and to keep it from rusting while it's drying out over the next couple days.

 I also made this PVC sleeve that will help push the pinball in.

 To minimize the chance of splitting the piece while I'm pressing it in, I'm going to be pressing it in through the end grain.

 Consider by way of analogy that our block of wood isn't all that different in structure from a bundle of drinking water.

 In fact, when you look at wood under a microscope, it looks very much like this.

 Then you can imagine that our pinball passes through the end grain of the wood with a lot better, a lot easier than it would by being pressed directly through the center.

 Likewise, driving a chisel through the grain is going to be a lot easier this way, or through the top of the end grain itself, than it would be to try to drive the chisel straight through.

 This analogy also lets us understand why a cross-grain cut is so much harder to make than a rip cut.

 Now I'm going to let it soak for about 10 minutes just to help repair the pinball.

 I'm going to let it soak for about 10 minutes just to help repair the pinball.

 I don't want to dry it out too fast over the next couple days or else I run the risk of splitting it.

 After about 3 or 4 days when it's completely dry, I'll probably use mineral oil to treat the wood and then give it a nice sanding and then finish it with shellac.

 If you bring out the grain with a nice finish, then it's really apparent that there are no seams in the wood.

 Hey guys, today I'm going to be doing a review of the LACME 925 Kohl Ultimate and I'm also

I did mention this in my first video when I did the green smokey eye look and I

 was raving about this product and finally got down to doing a review on it.

 show you quickly how easy it is to glide on and how black the product actually is.

 months ago when I was in a departmental store buying shampoo and as usual I glanced through

 the makeup counters and I thought okay I need a product which is really good for bridal

As long as you have a good base it will last you the entire day.

 And it comes with a cute little sharpener on one side which is very convenient and with

 tested and it also is good for sensitive skin so you don't have to worry about any of that.

 eye kohl, I've prepped my eyes using under eye cream which serves as a great moisturiser

 on top of my under eye cream, it's going to smear all over my face and I don't want

 prevent it from smudging, one of the tips is to apply loose powder below your eyelids

 and on top of your eyelids in case you're applying eye makeup on top.

 are from tropical climates, you will tend to sweat around your eyes because you have

 certain oil glands and you'll see certain crease lines formed after a certain point

So again, you should apply loose powder and pressed powder just to combat any

 it as an eyeliner on top of our eyelids and then we'll apply it as an eye kohl.

 somewhat blunt because you don't want to poke your eyes too much, okay?

Remember, there shouldn't be a gap between your lash line and your eyeliner

Okay, the Q-tip has, this is an earbud, it has a bit of makeup remover

 if there's extras right here, you can take this Q-tip because it has makeup remover and

 you can remove the extras to kind of get the perfect shape that you want.

You need to smudge it immediately because this will tend to dry up.

Right now I'm not going to make it too smoky but if you keep smudging it,

I think the smudge look gives a very nice soft feel and it looks very

After you smudge it, you can also make it slightly blacker by applying a bit

 my lashes because this is a day look and I don't want voluminous lashes.

 to worry about it bleeding or smearing all over your face as long as you have this with

 Whether it's in a rainstorm, lounging at the pool, or even in the restroom, there are times

 I'm Sharon Vaknin from CNET.com, here with some tips on how to save a cell phone.

 Once you realize your phone got wet, it may be your instinct to hit the power button.

 Your device will quickly short circuit and you've earned yourself a paperweight.

 Though it's true your device will dry out, you'll likely burn it in the process.

 Instead, the first thing you'll want to do is take out all removable parts, like a battery,

 Then, you'll want to try to extract all of the remaining water.

 Simply take your phone, including all the parts you've removed, and put them in a bag of uncooked rice.

 Let it sit for 24 to 72 hours, depending on your anxiety levels.

 A lesser known way to dry your device is by using silica packets.

 They're those pouches of beads that come in most devices, purses, and of course, man purses, or murses.

 With this method, just take a Ziploc bag, fill it with silica packets, and drop in your gadget.

 Like rice, silica absorbs moisture, and your device should be liquid-free in one to three days.

 Realistically, most of us don't have a sash of silica packets, but have no fear.

 Order them quickly and keep a supply around for future water accidents.

 Now, these methods can work wonders, but if you want a more dedicated solution, try the Beastie Bag.

 At first, we thought it looked like a gimmick, so we tested it with an MP3 player we dropped in water.

 The airtight pouch is filled with moisture-absorbing beads, so it acts a lot like rice or silica.

 Just pop your phone and its parts into the bag, wait 24 to 72 hours, and all the water will be extracted.

 At $20, it's not the cheapest solution, but it definitely beats buying a replacement phone.

 Regardless of the method you choose, once you've waited the requisite 24 to 72 hours,

 just remove all the parts from the bag, put your gadget back together, and hit the power button.

 And these methods should work for many of your devices, from phones to MP3 players and even digital cameras.

 manufacturers still have sneaky ways of telling if a device has been drenched.

 Chances are you've voided your warranty, but at least your phone works again.

 And just a side note, if you find yourself soaking your phone or MP3 player over and over again,

 For CNET.com, I'm Sharon Vaknin, and I'll see you on the next How To.

 You know, there are many more than five reasons why you might want to watch Top 5.

 You can get a load of the best gadgets out there, the most popular ones, the worst downloads, top TV robots,

 Show your pride this 4th of July with our Jell-O Patriotic Mini Fruit Tarts.

 Now, I've got my oven preheated to 450 degrees, so let's get started.

 First I'm going to spray this 24 mini muffin cup pan with a little non-stick spray.

 And now, I've got this package of two refrigerated, ready-to-use pie crusts.

 I'm going to go ahead and cut it into 24 wedges, so each crust is cut into 12.

 I'm going to just quarter the first one, and then cut each quarter into 3 wedges.

 Now take the wide end, and go ahead and put that right down into the bottom of your pan.

 Now take the tail, and what you're going to do is tuck it just a little bit, and press

 And then, very neatly, just wrap those corners down, and press until you've got one nice,

 Now I'm just going to bake these in the preheated oven until they're nice and golden brown,

 First, one cup of milk, and one package of Jell-O vanilla flavor instant pudding.

 Now I'm going to fold in half a cup of thawed Cool Whip whipped topping.

 Now this is going to be your piping bag, so squeeze all the air out, seal it up, and keep

 it in your refrigerator until the tart shells are nice and cool.

 When your tart shells come out of the oven, let them cool slightly in the pan, then remove

 Just snip that right off, and now this will serve as a piping bag.

 So guys on this episode I'm going to teach you how to make the Jason Voorhees sack mask.

 So what you're going to need is 4 pieces of paper towels, kind of like the regular one, scissors, and some tape.

 Now, first thing you want to do is put this around your face and get a piece of like um, um, oh I forgot to, they need a marker too.

 First it has a design like this, turn it on this side where there's blue dots and stuff.

 Now with the marker, I'm going to leave it open for it to be easier.

 Okay, so now with the tape, and when you put it around your head, tape it to the back.

 So she had to quit school and go to work to help support the family.

 And it took a lot of courage to keep the child and raise it on her own.

 We're building on these kind of R&B, bluesy, boogie-woogie kind of patterns, starting off

 Charlie Ryan gets a little fancier with the flat third in here going...

 I'm gonna play it through really slowly and just talk about the chromaticism as it's going

 on and then we'll look at it a little more and then I'll give it one fast shot at the

 So we've got the flat third, now the flat third again, chromatically up to A.

 So this one, you could still use the first finger barred at the second fret.

 Ring finger's gonna handle the fourth fret and we're gonna play...

 Instead of taking the third finger, bringing it over to the D string, just roll it.

 Hey guys, Natalie Peterson here, personal trainer here at Fitness Quest 10 in San Diego,

 California as well as yoga coach for our athletes here at the facility.

 the Iowa Hawkeyes at University of Iowa and she's here today to go through our mat series

As you're training Katie in the off season and pre-season, a lot of lifting,

 mat is take you through some gentle yoga poses, ones that will really open up the hips and

You may have seen in the other video we had a standing series for the hips

This one's going to be a little less demanding on balance and strength, especially

 if you've already done a leg workout that day and you just need something a little bit

 lay down, I want you to try to just allow your shoulders to open and relax, especially

Then what I'd like you to do is bring your feet up about underneath

 the knees and then widen them a little bit wider than your yoga mat, so even wider, that's

From here what we're going to do, Katie, is just some windshield wipers.

 going to do is just start to drop both knees to the right, that's it, and then both knees

You're going to feel a stretch through maybe both hips, potentially

 you to do now, and if you're following along with this video or trying this out, spend

 Katie, the next time your legs are over to the right, let's leave them there.

 like you to do, leave this left leg where it is, take that right leg, pick it up, ankle

Instead of forcing it, just let the weight of that right leg take

 do from here, take that left arm up above your head, just on the mat, and real nice

 like you to do on your next inhale is leave your feet exactly as they are positioned on

 right foot and just drop it down on the ground and move that knee with you.

 Without pushing too hard, just using your own range of motion, move that knee towards

 with her hand or if you have someone assisting you, gently press on this knee.

 have you do though is show you one more stretch here in the supine position before I have

 on how tight your internal and external rotators of your hips are.

 we have worked on that right side already, let's take that right knee and have you start

Depending on the flexibility of your hips, it may be really uncomfortable

 to stay in this position, it really helps to give yourself a prop because then your

 muscles are just able to relax in this position and that's what we're going for.

 you need, feeling all these muscles of the upper back relaxing.

 with you assisting in this stretch, they can just give you a nice gentle rock back and

 Okay, so today I'm going to be doing an unboxing of the Bowers & Wilkins P5 headphones.

 Now, cross-the-side here, it says Concert For One, their slogan I guess.

 Basically the reason I went with these was because the beats by Dr.

 The accessories weren't that amazing, and I just thought that Bowers & Wilkins could

 It's very clear, crisp, a bit of bass, but it's made for more, I guess, vocally refined

 Not that I listen to, I do listen to rap, but rap would be very clear on this, even

 though it doesn't have much bass, because Bowers & Wilkins in general, actually no,

 This is their competition to it, and to be honest, if you don't listen to rap, I wouldn't

 Across the bottom here, you just have all the different pitches of it, listen for longer,

 Now this doesn't have the white noise that you hear, and it doesn't require batteries,

 By the way, just one thing to mention, is that Bowers & Wilkins used real sheepskin

 Now when I do a review of these, I will be comparing them to the beats by Dr.

 You can remove this, and you can actually remove the cord, so that if anything ever

 Now in between here, you have memory foam to make sure that it's of the maximum comfort

 This is all metal going up as well, through the headband here, so it's not going to snap

 Now I was very impressed, I watched DRB UK's video, and I'll link to that in the description

 He was impressed with the case, rather than the plastic case you get with the beats by

 You got another cord here, and you're going to put your headphones in.

 It has the cool Bowers & Wilkins logo on it, and it's stitched really nice.

 I will be doing a review, so it'll probably take about a week of me listening to these

 to see whether they are really good, if they compare to the beats by Dr.

 OK, so you've got your front to back bars on the roof of the car.

 Then when you're going on holiday and you want to put a roof box or your skis, you need to fit your crossbars.

 They come with keys, which I showed you at the start of the first video.

 Right, so in order to fit these on the car you need to pull those to the unlock position and then you can pull on the key and open that.

 Now what these actually do, I'll show you, is as you move that in and out, it locks that cam.

 And then as you look to it sideways you'll see that cam bites in and I'll show you on the roof where that clamps.

 And then what you've got to do is you've got to slide this little insert out here like so.

 And then what you've got here, you've got this little Phillips head screw here, and what you've got is this now slide.

 So what you need to do is get both of the bars in that same state, both ends, sorry.

 I think you can only take the key out of them in the locked position, so careful, we'll come to that later.

 Slide out the little fillet, both fillets are the same on both sides.

 Right, so when we've got both ends loose, like so, we're now ready to go and fit it on the roof.

 But what you'll notice in the middle of the roof is you've got these two little indents here.

 Now these two indents aren't locking positions and they're opposite.

 If you look here you've got a wider, this is the one where you've got the wider.

 So you need to insert them here in the middle of the roof, so on here it's just above the rear door.

 So we've inserted the front bar in this middle position and then we've slid it along here and then we've locked it into position, OK?

 So Tom's got the, there we go, Tom's got the, so if you position one side in first.

 Tom's got that and drop that down and what you're looking at doing is positioning it so that it pops in.

 If we slide it back a bit Tom, so it is a bit easier if two of you are on this one.

 And what we're heading for, if we just wait a minute Tom, is we're heading for this little cut out here, OK?

 And this is where when we fold this clamp down, that will actually come down and the lock-in tab comes in and engages in this slot here.

 OK, and what you, now there shouldn't be any resistance to this cam going in.

 If you've got a resistance to this cam going in, it will break and you won't have it at the right position.

 OK, and it is a little bit tricky actually because you can't actually see through the clamp where it is.

 So you just need to move it about a bit until you find the position.

 So when we've got this in position, this flap will go in with no resistance, OK?

 So, OK, so now we've got this in position, what you need to do is make sure that this bar is equally spaced.

 If you look at the other side and just check they're roughly the same, it actually doesn't matter too much.

 OK, and when you're happy with that, using the Phillips screwdriver, just screw that down and that fixes the width in that gap.

 Now if you do move these forward and back again, it is advisable to loosen that screw a bit, just so that as you move them backwards and forwards.

 OK, and then finally you need to close the cam, turn the key, OK, and then take that out.

 I'll drive it outside and do a little video so you can see how it looks on the car.

 You get an extra little bit of curvature on the roof with those bars there.

 A big departure from their songs from a couple of years earlier.

 Earlier they had stuff like, You Really Got Me, All Day and All the Night.

 And this is cool, jazzy, clever lyrics, and a great chord progression.

 And that's how a lot of Ray Davies' tunes have very, very innovative chord progressions.

 So what we're going to be doing in this lesson, though, is really just working on the chords.

 Most of them are fairly normal, but we're trying to incorporate a lot of the bass line

 So we're going to be doing this with your fingers, using your thumb, hitting generally

 And it's mostly this descending line over chords in the key of D minor.

 So most of the chords are pretty easy to play, but we'll talk about them and then we'll take

 This originally came out in 1966 on their album Face to Face, but it is now easier to

 find on The Singles Collection, which has a lot of their early stuff up to Lola.

 So I kind of recommend that you check that out, unless you are up to adding all 75 or

 But without rambling off too much about that, let's start talking about some of the things

 Most of the chords are pretty straightforward in here, but with the addition of bass notes,

 We're going to start with the D minor chord, and because of the next thing that happens,

 we want to play our D minor, although I like this D minor for many reasons, with your first,

 First finger on F, second finger on the A, and your fourth finger on the D. And then

 So right now, I'll just be pinching them with a bass note and the top three strings so you

 So in the beginning, we've got D minor, then we add C in the bass.

 The right hand is going to be doing a combination of hitting bass notes with your thumb, and

 it's going to be playing notes on the fourth, fifth, or sixth strings, depending on what's

 And then these three fingers are just going to be plucking the top three strings, or sometimes

 So in the introduction, this is where we want to hear just these pinches.

 Well, take out the chart that has chords at the top, words at the bottom, and let's talk

 So across the first line there, we see D minor, then a C in parentheses, a B in parentheses,

 So the parentheses mean just a bass note for whatever chord we're already on.

 So that introduction, as we talked about in the right and left hand close-ups, is going

 to be D minor, and for now let's just pinch them twice, so two beats.

 Pinching the top three strings with your three fingers, and the bass note with your thumb.

 But some of these changes are hard to make at any speed, and consistently.

 And, just going to run straight through the whole chart one time.

 You're riding on your bike and most of what you see in your rear view mirror is your shoulders.

 It would be great if you could move the mirrors out just a little bit so you're not doing

 Well, the Wonderleash Mirror Extender allows you to do just that.

 And now take the mirror base, screw that in into the extender, tighten it up.

 Snug that down, find your position where you want it, then tighten it and reinstall

 And now what you've done is you've moved your mirror out by about an inch and a half and

 So the mirrors are up and out, your rear view vision vastly improved.

 Hi, this is Ranjeet and in this video we're going to do the unboxing for this wireless

 900 and why I'm unboxing this charger is because compared to other wireless chargers

 So this is the box for this Nokia DT 900 and officially it's compatible with Nokia

 base Lumia phones like the Nokia 920, 1020 because they have built-in support for wireless charging

 That's the Qi standard and as you can see it supports the Qi standard.

 Let me talk it has it is just a pad and you place your phone over here if your phone supports

 What do you say wireless charging and let me break these seals.

 The interesting thing is that I got a very good deal on this and the interesting thing was that it's also

 compatible with many of the Android phones and for example, it's I heard that

 What do you say the the Nexus 5 which also supports the wireless?

 And before that let me show you the pricing info and this is the interesting part and as you can see

 The price quoted here is rupees three thousand nine hundred and ninety nine and I checked some sites for example flipkart

 Four hundred to five hundred on flipkart, but I purchased this specific unit from eBay India and I got it just for around

 This charging plate how you disconnected and place your phone over here on the plate and it should start charging

 It's in various languages, let me keep that to the side and what is this this also

 And we also have a power brick the power brick is huge, oh it's in white color and

 As you can see I got the yellow color we have to split in various colors for example in black

 white pink and this is the yellow and this is the plate and you just connect this here and

 I'll be soon testing this with the Nexus 5 because the Nexus 5 does support

 Wireless charging and I'll test this one with this D900 and I'll let you know guys how it works

 So that's it for now for this quick unboxing of this Nokia wireless charger.

 Hi, I'm Kristen and on today's episode of Cooking with Mickey, we are going to be making

 Now this recipe comes from Chef Mickey's Restaurant over at the Contemporary Resort.

 Now you're going to start off with your oven being preheated to 375 degrees.

 Now you're going to put your pizza crust, you want a 12 inch pre-cooked pizza crust

 Now you can use a whole wheat, white, thin and crispy, whatever your liking is.

 And you're going to go ahead and put that on your baking sheet.

 And then in a medium mixing bowl, we're going to combine half a cup of shredded mozzarella

 cheese, half a cup of provolone, and one cup of shredded cheddar cheese.

 But if you do do the pre-shredded, a benefit to that is this is something that you can

 You know, you don't have to worry about the grater being sharp, the kids can get involved.

 Now it calls for one fourth teaspoon of salt, or you can do that to taste, and pepper.

 I mean there's not much ingredients, it doesn't take much time.

 So like I said before, it is a great recipe to do with your children.

 Now we're going to go ahead and add our egg mixture in with our cheese.

 And once we get this all mixed, we're going to quickly add this onto our pizza shell to

 I don't know how many of you have been to Chef Mickey's before, but we did go for their

 We saw Mickey and Minnie, Donald, Pluto, Goofy, all dressed up as if they're ready

 You know Mickey, he's got to come out and make sure, being the chef and all, that his

 We did ours at 7 o'clock in the morning and found it to be a great way to start the day.

 You know, you go and you park over at the ticket transportation system, take the monorail

 over to the contemporary, and then from there when you're done with breakfast, you take

 We're going to put it in the oven, which has already been preheated to 375, and it's going

 to cook for 10 to 12 minutes or until the cheese is slightly melted and you have a nice

 Now that our pizza is ready, we're going to go ahead and take this out of the oven.

 You can see a little bit of browning on it, but that's how you know it's done.

 Now I'm going to let this cool for just a couple of minutes, just so it's cool enough

 for me to cut into it, because you do want to serve it hot, but you don't want to burn

 I used to have one and it got dull, and so I got rid of it and still haven't replaced it.

 Chop it up and sprinkle it on top, and then you get your whole bacon and eggs with toast

 Click on the SR Fun Spot and right there you'll find Cooking with Mickey, and you can view

 Now also, don't forget to check out our message boards, because over there we have a new forum

 called Disney Recipes, and there you can find all of your favorites from school bread to

 Until next time, I'm Kristen, this is Mickey, and we'll see you real soon.

 I'm going to show you the secrets of the best way to go about changing those chords for

 The D chord to the A7, back to the D, and then from the D to the G and back to the D

 Now, first of all, the problem that people have with the D chord is that when they go

 to put it down, they put the strong fingers first, 1 and 2, and while they're doing that,

 the third finger tenses and goes backward behind the second finger.

 And then they get these down, and then they struggle to get that one forward, which always

 What you want to do is practice a little exercise where you place 1 and 2 together, and while

 2 is bending to go into its place, you actually stick 3 out like this.

 Now, you have to go extremely slowly and keep your shoulder relaxed because your shoulder

 You're going to go step by step like that to push the third finger in front of the second

 When you go to the A7, you don't do what we call, in guitar principles, dive-bombing.

 You pick up 1 and 2, and you keep the 3 down, and you keep your arm nice and relaxed, and

 then you put that 2 behind the 3, and then you put the 1 there.

 Now, you practice that very slowly, over and over, and what happens is you'll be able to

 When you go back to the D, place the 2 first and then move those over, which you can do

 Again, avoiding dive-bombing, avoiding picking up everything and moving like this, although

 you can practice that, and eventually you'll be able to do that easily, but especially

 in the beginning, it's a real good idea to hold 1 down while you place the 2, and it's

 I'm bringing 3 back at the same time that I'm reaching the 2 forward.

 If you practice that very slowly, then you'll find that that's easy to do, after you develop

 Now, what I would do is, when I get the 2 down, then I would lift the 1.

 So there's those changes, and I'm doing them the way I showed you with the leading...

 Now, if you want to get more insight into all the secrets of building a very, very solid

 technique on guitar, then I recommend 2 books that I have written that are unlike any other

 The Principles of Correct Practice for Guitar, which gives you all the secrets of mastering

 the guitar, or just playing it really well, or being as good as you're able to be.

 There's special exercises for developing the fingers, how to practice to get results

 The other one is the Pathbook, which actually goes into quite a bit of detail about how

 Your first chord change is a method of changing all chords that's extremely effective, very

 But in much greater detail, there's also a complete course on rhythm, so you really understand

 all that, what you hear about quarter notes, half notes, whole notes, sixteenth notes,

 how to count them, how to understand rhythms, which is really necessary for good strumming.

 Okay, well thank you very much, and I hope to see you again soon.

 Hey everyone, this is going to be a video about how I clean my brushes.

 cleaning, what we're going to use is, you can either use the MAC brush cleaning

 solution or what I'm going to use is this homemade solution that you can find

 on YouTube on Encore's channel and I will put the link in the slide bar for

So what you, after you've gone ahead and made up your solution, you can take

 your spray here and just to start with I'm going to grab just my flat shadow

So I'm just going to spray it on the brush there and then take my nice

 and then I mean you can always spray it again and do some more just until it

 need to deep clean is you can use baby shampoo and just you know put it in your

 hand, work it into the bristles and then run it under the tap until it runs clean.

 I don't really need to deep clean right now so I'm going to go ahead and just do

 pack of a bunch of them and I know the yellow ones are just for my brushes and

 then the white ones are for washing your face and then just sort of that way.

 And then we have brown ones for in the shower just to sort of keep them

 separate so everything stays nice and sanitary for when you're cleaning your

Okay and then just make sure that you just sort of shape it back into

 standing up because then you'll get splitting in your handle and your

 Okay just enough so that when you swipe it again it's clean and then you know

 just going to leave them all flat to dry like that and they're nice and sanitized

 make sure that they're nice and and fully dried and thanks so much for

 In this video, I'll be showing you how to remove the rear brakes on a 1990 Nissan Pathfinder.

 For those of you who don't know how, I have a disc brake setup in the rear.

 What you will need in order to remove the caliper there is a 3-8ths ratchet, a 17mm,

 So next, what we want to do in order to remove the caliper is we want to remove this bolt

 Now that you've got these two bolts off, you want to remove the caliper.

 Then it's off and from there you can just set it right back there in the back.

 Now if you need to remove the rotor as well, what you would need to do if yours doesn't

 want to come off, like mine doesn't really want to, see these little holes here?

 What you want to do is put bolts in there if you have a bolt puller set and just start

 What that does is it pushes off and helps release the stuck on rotor.

 Now you want to make sure that your parking brake is not on as well or else that will

 So now, as you can tell, I put some bolts in to help remove it.

 What you want to do in order to remove it is tighten these on there.

 I'm using a 13mm and so depending on what bolt you put in there to help remove these,

 As you can start to see, it will start to slightly pop off a bit.

 Ok, so from here, once you feel it kind of getting loose, you might have to shake with

 Next, all you need to do is you can just unscrew both these out and now you can get to your

 Now with the e-brake setup, it works just like a drum brake setup.

 So basically, why I made this video was to basically check for proper operation on my

 I noticed that it hasn't been working lately and so what I've done is I went and replaced

 At first I noticed this one would not even move, which I'm about to show you what I mean

 What happens is that this little disc plate here kind of just moves out just like a drum.

 So as you can see now, it has expanded a bit more and then when you pull on that e-brake,

 what it does is it pushes out against the inside of here causing your e-brake.

 Upon further inspection on this side, I noticed I only have one spring there and the one that's

 Upon looking for it, it's kind of hard to see but it's just chilling down in there.

 Now if you're wondering what I'm talking about, it's these two springs here.

 So let's see what happens when I dig out that spring and get it set back on there and I

 I will show you how to put that back on here in a few minutes, a few seconds when I get

 Alright, well after a minute of tinkering with it, I did manage to get it straight again.

 Not perfect but good enough for the application of what we need today.

 So today I'm going to be doing a highly requested Starbucks drink video and that's going to be the Starbucks vanilla bean frappuccino.

 So I searched high and low for a good vanilla bean powder that is very similar to Starbucks because Starbucks does not sell their powder.

 So we're going to be using vanilla bean and if you want to see what the inside looks like,

 it's got little, um, let's see if I can do this without spilling it,

 So, we're going to do heaping, which means, you know, all the way.

 So if you guys are interested in getting this vanilla bean beverage mix powder,

 all you have to do is look in the description box below and I will have a link to where you can purchase this.

 Alright, you're going to want to blend it until you can't hear anymore of the ice chunks.

 And depending on what blender you guys are using, it takes anywhere from 30 seconds to maybe sometimes a full minute.

 Oh, anything that I mention in this video, if you guys are interested in knowing where I purchased it,

 please check down in the description box below and I will make sure to have a link for everything that I mention in this video

 And there you have it, your vanilla bean Starbucks Frappuccino.

 If you guys have any other questions, comments, or concerns, leave them down below.

 And like I said, if you guys want to know where I got any of these products, check the description box down below

 and I'll make sure to add a link for everything so you guys can purchase this stuff too.

So today I'm going to be doing a really highly requested, really, really, really, really, that's so weird.

 If I can make this vanilla, vanilla, if I could be making, if I could, oh my god.

 I'm Chris Bober here, welcome back to my recreational real estate blog.

 And this episode we're going to do outdoor wild game cooking with Chris Bober in the

 As you saw from my blog last week, Austin and I went out and we got a deer.

 And the best part about getting a deer, not only the thrill of the hunt, but also having

 The first thing I did is we cut the meat up into little strips, about a quarter inch thick.

 It's just soy sauce, Worcestershire, some onion salt, garlic salt, salt and pepper.

 You want to have a drip tray underneath because this stuff, as it cooks off very slow, it'll

 drip and if you don't put something down there, you're going to have an angry wife.

 Not trying to cook this jerky, you're trying to dry it out, trying to dehydrate it.

 I like to leave a wooden spoon or a fork or something like that in the oven just to keep

 it cracked just a little bit because you want the moisture to be able to escape.

 You remember I had them hanging and what I've done now is I've taken them and they stopped

 I've taken them and I've laid them sideways because they were starting to dry out a little

 If you lay them out a little more horizontal right there, they're going to dry out, dehydrate

 Nice and simple and it's a heck of a lot cheaper than buying it by the bag.

 You can save yourself some money and enjoy a nice, healthy and delicious snack.

 I'll see you next time and always remember when you're thinking about recreational real

 estate in Nebraska, Iowa, Kansas and Missouri, think of Chris Bulber at Premier Outdoor Properties.

 In this video I will show you how to make your own nail dangles.

 All you need for this is a bead or a crystal, a head pin with a flat back, one or two round

 With round nose pliers start bending the head pin around it to make a loop.

 When you reach the other side, bend the head pin around the base of the loop till you reach

 With a cutter cut off the extra which I'll use later to make an o-ring.

 The end of which you cut off the extra is sticking out a bit so I bend it further.

 With the wire you just cut off you are going to make the o-ring.

 The o-ring shouldn't be too big, it has to fit into the hole in the nail and should go

 The thickness of the round nose plier is how big the o-ring is going to be.

 Where the wire overlaps the beginning, that's where you're going to cut off the extra.

 You should always drill a hole in the nail from the bottom up so you won't slip and

 I always start with a small drill and go back with a bigger one.

 The bigger drill I made myself out of an old cuticle pusher and a drill bit from my dad's garage.

 Put the crystal on and put the ring through the hole in the nail.

 Put the ring through the hole, grab the bottom of the piercing with pliers and move your

 Put the pliers between your thumb and index finger and hold on tight.

 Nail piercing only goes through the free edge and not the nail bed.

 It is semi-permanent, meaning the hole remains there until it grows out and you decide to

 It's completely painless and you don't need any special treatment to take care of it.

 If placed in a proper spot it does not weaken the structure of your nail.

 I hope you liked this video and if you decide to try it yourself, please feel free to share

 Bigquick Jiu Jitsu Network, checking out a Russian 2 on 1 Thai, something I've been doing

 What we're going to do, I just want you to know that this is just going to be a style

 of 2 on 1 and I do it for Jiu Jitsu purposes, not MMA, not so much self defense because

 I mean if you're really good at 2 on 1 I suppose you can smash a takedown from here but he

 So there's also different styles, when you snap to this 2 on 1 I can do the grip style

 where I'm gripping into my armpits here and I'm pushing his head, I'm getting outside

 of his leg but basically what I'm getting out on the arm is I'm pulling.

 You also have an outside type grip to where you're pulling this way, okay, so you're over

 the top and under a little bit of a combination here and then you have when you start to incorporate

 So what I have is thumb here and then I'm able to grab with my thumb.

 Now if you know the principles of Jiu Jitsu with the grips, or not just Jiu Jitsu, the

 If I want to arm drag him I'm not going to grab with the thumb, I'm going to pull with

 To get control and outward movement I want my thumb, right, and if I wanted to pop a

 You know, if I wanted to stick it in this way, out that way, it doesn't matter which

 way so the thumb is used more for controlling and the monkey grip is used more for pulling.

 So there's pulling techniques here and gripping his body and driving with your head and the

 reason I have to drive so hard into him is because he can pull away real easy, okay,

 This style, which I use that a lot though, that's one of my go-to's, this style is more

 So now I'm directionally pushing away from him so I've got this arm hanging down and

 I've always got the ability to try and grab his single legs and double legs but what we're

 I'm going to break it down to you a few different ways, okay, so look at my grip.

 I snap, I raise the shoulder, doing the I don't know motion and I snap it off and grab

 him with the thumb, I rotate and I grab that thumb, get dominant head position in his ear,

 I don't want to be having my leg in front or anything like that so I'm here.

 Now I'd like to rotate outside of him, watch this, I'll do it super slow.

 I'm going to rotate his arm outside of him so it forces him to roll over with that shoulder

 I'm going to show you how to attack a Kimura by shoving that wrist behind his back in a

 So then I can also sometimes run into a little bit of a hip placement right here when I start

 This benefits me though, you'll see that when I come down and my hand goes on his hip, he

 can't post and I can actually just power roll him over and I now have a good lifting base

 on his hips because his hands stuck to his hip like that, okay.

 Now I want you to see, and you can move that camera however you want, I'm going to get

 this arm out and then I'm going to start to shove it up towards his back like this, okay.

 So as I come up, I'm on top and I want to get his arm on the mat.

 Now my body placement, I'm trying to pin his shoulder right here, not shove my face into

 Sometimes you can pin the guy like that but if I get his shoulder, if I'm here, now sit

 up Joseph, now it's stuck and I can move his arm and get the tap.

 I'm not on my knees, because I'm under pressure, I'm on my toes but I'm not doing it like this,

 So you notice I moved down from here up to his shoulder and I got my shoulder, look at

 Let's talk about a couple more options real quick from right here.

 When I get this position, I'm trying to come up and put his hand down on the ground.

 If he ever grabs his hands together, his neck is, I'd say holding on with my right hand,

 notice that, his neck is totally wide open for a north-south choke.

 Immediately I tuck my head, walk backwards, start pushing his arm away and I'll get that

 Hi, I'm Ron Collins and this is actually the Creative Festival.

 you some of my posh seam finish and the first one is the Hong Kong seam finish.

 What it is, is you take a bias strip of fabric about an inch and a half to two

 inches wide and you're going to sew it to the right side of the fabric.

 can do a Hong Kong seam finish at 3 eighths of an inch, you can do it at 5

 I'm doing this at about 3 eighths of an inch and once you get that done, I'm just

 going to trim away a few threads here and I'm just going to get rid of this

 this is great for, is for garments that are unlined or seam finishes that are to

That's it there, sewn right sides to right sides and then press to

 2.2 to 2.5 and I find the best fabric to do the Hong Kong seam finishes is

 or stripes because if you have a large print it's just not going to show up.

 here or a raw edge because this is bias cut and that won't fray on you.

From here you would simply do some sort of seam finish to this edge

 whether it's running it through the serger or doing a zigzag stitch.

 You press the seam to one side and along the edge of the fabric you're

 edge stitching is usually the heavier the fabric the longer the stitch.

 there and the top stitching is going to be 3⁄8 of an inch away from it.

 What this does it gives you that nice flat fake flat felt seam is what it is.

 That's what we have there is that fake flat felt seam and that's what I used in

 is you sew the seam, press the seam allowance open and flat and you just sew

 There's my seam and what I've done here is I've just layered the facing over top

 of the lining and I zigzag that down just to conceal the raw edge.

 going to take my flat braid and I'm going to put it right over the zigzag

 want you to see where I'm sewing this so I'm using contrasting thread.

 One great thing about this braid it can go around corners, it can go around curves

 Hong Kong, the fake flat felt and this really posh inside seam.

 Alex has created different duct tape kits with lots of fun fashion projects, including

 all ducted out, duct tape tote, duct tape bangles, and duct tape fashion.

 It is super sticky material, so using it takes a little practice.

 You will soon discover your own tricks for transforming tape into different fashion creations.

 First, tear a length off, then rip it quickly down the middle lengthwise.

 Bows are simple to make and look good on rings, bags, and headbands.

 Remember not to leave any sticky edges when making hair accessories.

 If you want a different size bow, bigger or smaller, you can adjust this length.

 Now tear off a piece from a narrow band of tape and have it ready.

 To find out more or for purchasing information, please visit AlexToys.com.

 Hey everyone, this is Crypto Knight and today we're going to be looking at the limited edition

 First off, before we jump into it, I got a little thing to say about unboxing videos.

 Like seriously, it's like porn for geeks, except for it's weird and gross and I don't

 Like I was watching these videos and they actually showed somebody cutting into some

 I'm here to talk to you about new PSP, why it's better than the old one, and that's that.

 First off, as you can tell by this picture, it's super red and has cradles on the back.

 The wifi button on the old one is here, on the new one, it's right here.

 It came with a free download card for the game Syphon Filter, Combat Ops.

 The following contents of this video may not be suitable for vegetarians.

 So that the juice from the tomato will mix with all the other ingredients.

 And you probably need, like if it is a big lemon, you need only half.

 And remove all the seeds before you put it into that mixture which I showed you already.

 I'm going to practice some log splitting with an axe and a wedge.

 Just to give you an idea of the size of the log, it's a spruce log.

 I was taught to do this by putting a split on an angle right on the end.

 It's all over the place here, but I can see a crack starting there.

 Not gradual enough, so I'm going to stick with my other wedge here.

 This is a piece of white spruce and hardwood white birch wedges.

 You can see how this one's more gradual and this one dug in a lot better.

 The small one was easier to make, faster to make, and it penetrated in pretty good.

In this video I'm going to show you guys how to make bread pudding.

 You know, I'm not going to lie, I wasn't a bread pudding fan up until about sometime

I just realized that we weren't sometimes finishing the whole loaf and it

 would go stale and we would end up throwing it away in the garbage and after a while I

 watching and I'll show you guys how to make a very delicious bread pudding using croissants.

 I have here my cubed stale croissants and I'm putting this aside while I work on my

 in a pinch of salt and some vanilla extract as well and that's it.

 nice and smooth and then once I'm done with that I go ahead and just pour it over my stale

 milk and also to the milk I'm adding some vanilla bean paste and just mix to combine.

 If you don't have vanilla bean paste, you can use vanilla extract as well.

 to take some of that milk mixture, it's going to be hot, mix it in with some corn starch,

You want to let your sauce thicken up a little bit, maybe 5-7 minutes

Once it gets nice and thick, you want to go ahead and turn it off and add in your

 cubed butter and just, you should be using a wire whisk to begin with, I'm sorry I just

So yeah, now I'm using my wire whisk and just whisk it all in until it's nice and

 sugar and then I'm going to take my trusty culinary torch and just caramelize them until

 obviously go ahead and flip over the banana slices and torch the other side as well.

 everything's done, I'm just plating everything, putting it all together, I put some vanilla

 sauce on the bottom, topped it with a slice of bread pudding and then on top of that we're

 going to add some freshly whipped cream, you can use ice cream if you want instead and

 top it off with my caramelized bananas and then even more sauce because you can never

 I'm going to first go through it in C, and I'm also going to talk about how we can transpose

 It's important to stop on that second string as that's the melody note.

 In between these, I'm going to be muting with the palm of my right hand.

 Now the second string open, now third string over that F chord.

 Now we go to an F minor, which is kind of a borrowed minor four chord.

 I'm taking off my second finger, putting my first finger down on the third string, first

 It's basically taking the same shape and now moving it into our cage shapes.

 Now kind of like our F chord, the fourth chord of our D is going to be right there underneath

 My third finger is going to go one string below where my pinky was.

 Like on this F, how it was open here instead of an F chord or like a F shape.

 Today we are going to replace the rear bumper light of an Audi 2007 Q7.

 All you need is a small screwdriver and a long Phillips screwdriver.

 The first thing you notice is that there is an access panel right here.

 design looks like and I will be showing it to you on my left hand.

 The items I used are the base coat, white nail polish, light and dark blue nail polish,

 nail sponge so I tried to find other items such as cotton pads or cotton balls and tissue

 papers to do this ombre effect but I think with the sponge it becomes easier to do this

I have tried to use other sponges like the kitchen sponge or sponge that comes

 with new bags and they just did not work because the holes were too big.

 Now we have to apply the nail polish onto the sponge so we are able to dab it onto the

 to mix and blend the colours so that the gradient effect would be more gradual.

It does make your hand messy but that's alright, you can use nail

 I repeat the process of applying and mixing the nail polish onto the sponge and dab it

Repeat the same steps for the other nails to achieve the same results.

You will realise that they are really messy so you may use the cotton

 pads or cotton balls and q-tips to remove any excess nail polish.

 After my nails have dried, I applied glitter nail polish as a top coat.

Feel free to leave any comments below and I will talk to you all soon.

I come to you as an automobile enthusiast that has maintained, serviced, and repaired my own vehicles in excess of 30 years.

 I currently drive a car with over 230,000 miles on it and I once had a car that had over 400,000 miles on it and ran very well.

 While you're watching the video, please watch a step or two ahead.

 Sometime the current step is better explained in the next step or two.

 I'm going to do a quick oil change on a Nissan Versa 2008 model.

 Here's all the tools and equipment I used to do the oil change on this Nissan Versa.

 I got a needle nose pliers and regular pliers to help get the crush washer off of the oil pan bolt.

Also help with clips on the splash pan and that oil crush washer.

 First thing I do is start drive the car, warm it up a little bit, then I put it up on ramps.

 I normally check the oil before I change it so I can see if it was low.

 It's always good to know if a car is low on oil before you change it.

 Looks like it's a half quart low, but I'll see how much comes out of the drain.

 I leave the dipstick out a little bit and I open up the oil fill cap so it drains good.

 Okay, when you come under the car, just barely to the passenger side, you see the oil pan.

 Then you see the oil pan bolt on the back of the oil pan, which is good.

 Because when the car is on ramps, it's normally leaned up a little bit.

 And if you're on the back of the oil pan, you'll normally get all the oil.

 But if the oil bolt is on the side or something, you may leave a little oil in there.

 Okay, I'm draining the oil into an oil drain pan so I can recycle it.

 Just forward of the oil pan, up in the motor, you'll see the oil filter.

 I'm going to try to get the filter without taking off the splash pan.

 So I may have to take off the splash pan, which consists of four 10 millimeter bolts and a couple of push clips.

 Because of the type of oil filter wrench I decided to use, I had to lower the front of the splash pan.

 So I just removed those four bolts so I can pull it down a little bit and get at the oil filter.

 Okay, I'm going to go ahead and take the oil filter out of the box.

 If the seal is not lubricated, I'm going to go ahead and lube it.

 But I've noticed lately a lot of times these seals are already lubricated.

 I can't really prime it and fill it up with oil because it's a side mount and all the oil will spill out when I try to put it on.

 So I'm going to put a little bit of oil in there and I'm going to lubricate the seal.

 Then I'm going to get the old crush washer off of here somehow.

 These crush washers are really small and kind of flimsy with these cars.

 But you always want to put a new crush washer on there so you're not dripping oil.

 I've got the date, the mileage, and the type of oil which is full synthetic 5W-30.

 Getting this little crush washer off has turned into a little job.

 I had to put the socket on there, batter up the tip of it, then put pliers on there and ratchet the crush washer off.

 So that's probably going to be the toughest part of the job, getting rid of the crush washer.

 Next thing you want to do is wipe clean your oil filter maintenance surface.

 Now that I've got that cleaned and wiped off, I'm going to screw the oil filter on the front of it.

 I didn't need the oil filter wrench to get it another three-quarters of a turn.

 Okay, I went on ahead and put the four bolts across the splash pan.

 And I put in the bolt on the back of the oil pan and torqued it down to 14 foot-pounds.

 I don't know the proper torque value of it, but with that flimsy crush washer, I didn't want to make it too tight.

 And it says it takes 4.2 or 4 quarts and one-eighth of a quart when you change the filter.

 So I'm going to go ahead and add 4 quarts, start the car, warm it up, then check the level.

 Okay, I'm going to go ahead and add 4 quarts, start the car, warm it up, then check the level.

 And I'm going to go ahead and add 4 quarts, start the car, warm it up, then check the level.

 If you feel that this information was beneficial, please like it and share it with your social media friends.

 You can also subscribe to my channel so that you can get notifications of future videos that I post.

 You can leave questions here, and I'll try to respond to them as quick as possible.

 Hello and welcome, this video is to show how to change RAM in your M15x.

 First to start, all you need is of course the computer, some mini set, preferably a

 precision set with the plus bit, or I believe it's called phillips, and of course RAM.

 not going to actually be installing new RAM as I bought 4GB from Alienware, I'll just

 this side, would be preferable and that way you don't actually scratch the finish of your

First thing we do is we turn the computer over and we remove the battery.

 bit, it's size 1 is preferred, it's of course the phillips, the plus head there.

 Now when you pull up the cover it's going to stick on this edge.

 it's not sticking anywhere else on the cover because that could mean that you've missed

Since I have every edge up except for this one, you can just pull it that way

There are little tabs along this edge, I don't know if you can see

 here for the memory, you just want to pull it back on up both sides, it pops right up,

 You can easily just make sure you line up the keyhole, slide in your new memory, and

When you're done, replace the cover, put it back on, and you're done.

 Replace the cover, attach your screws, and you should be ready to go.

 Hi everybody, it's Cara and I decided to set up my first fountain pen and I thought I would

 go ahead and do a quick video on that in case you are brand new to fountain pens like I

If you've used a fountain pen before this is going to be a very basic, very beginner

 video, so you probably are not going to be interested in watching because all I'm going

 pen in just a little bit of detail in case you guys are interested.

 I got this at the Goulet Pen Company, which is an online store.

 which is mainly called that because of the pattern right there in the middle band.

 pen body itself, the material of the pen body is silver matte brass.

It is a snap cap, which basically just means it pops on and off like that.

I don't have a ton to compare it to, but I like the way it feels

When you first go to use an ink cartridge on this particular pen and you unscrew

I wanted to try out a few different things so I did go ahead and

 not sure what this is, it's something else, but it feels like plastic.

 to Pilot so you can't use other ink cartridges in this particular pen.

 kind for this or use a converter that's made for the pen and use bottled ink.

 I don't know if we're going to be able to see that, but inside here there is a little

 point that should hopefully, you can see I put in the bigger end, pop open this ink cartridge.

I'm going to squeeze it a couple times to start the ink flowing.

 you put the ink cartridge in your Pilot Metropolitan and my first fountain pen is ready to go.

 the collard greens to get done and the rice, you know, turn the thing up on the rice.

 what we're going to do is we're going to take these cold Pepsis.

 salt in there, you just put the fat back in there and give it that extra flavor.

 Today I've put together this flawless face tutorial with my new Luminous airbrush system.

 Now when Luminous offered to send me the airbrush system for review, I was more than happy to

 oblige considering I personally, I love airbrush systems, but I feel like it's one of those

 things that to the person who's not the professional makeup artist, it's sort of like a real luxury.

 Like when you get married or you do a red carpet event, airbrush makeup is the makeup

 Well, achieving airbrush makeup is actually quite easy to do and Luminous makes it even

 It gives you your foundation, your blush, your bronzer, your primer, your moisturizer,

 And even better than that, included are instructions on the bottle telling you what the quantity

 Now of course, included also is an instructional DVD telling you how to do it so that you're,

 you know, you're not going to get this big blob on the side of your face.

 But really, getting started is as easy as opening up your box, unwrapping the packaging,

 inserting the power cord, plugging it into your wall, and pressing the on button.

 So if you'd like to see how I created this flawless face look using my Luminous airbrush

 And hey, just a quick note, if you guys wouldn't mind, I love all the feedback.

 Positive, negative, whichever one you want to give, leave me a comment right down here.

 I love the feedback because it really helps me know how to continue producing videos that

 Starting with Boost It Instant Complexion Enhancer, you're going to take several drops

 of this and apply it and put it into the cup of your airbrush wand.

 Following that, we're going to use a primer, use four to six drops and apply that to your

 I'm using shade 2 and as you can see on the bottle, it says use four to eight drops.

 Now I'm a full coverage kind of girl, so of course I went for the eight drops.

 Bring the wand up close to these spots to spot treat, rocking the application lever.

 Now we're going to use the Brightening Glow product and this is our highlight, so we're

 going to apply that to the top of our cheekbones, we're going to apply that to our brow bone

 Put it in the cup and apply to the center of my cheeks, blending in a circular motion

 Now I'm going to apply my bronzer all up into my hairline because that's one of my favorite

 And then I'm going to bring it down just under my cheekbone and blend up into your hairline

 We're going to do some color in some eyebrows, we're going to apply some eyeliner.

 I'm using the Makeup Forever Aqua Eyes Black and I'm just applying that just to make it

 Finish off with your mascara, apply it to your lashes and your flawless face look will

 So if you want to get a flawless face like this, try the Luminous Airbrush Foundation.

 The recipe which I am going to make is Aval Unda Rice Flakes Laddu.

 is Aval that is brown flat beaten rice 1 cup, coconut grated 1 cup, sugar 4 tbsp and 2 cardamom.

 First we will roast the Aval in low flame for 2-3 minutes till the rice flakes get crispy.

 Once it is cooled down we will grind the roasted Aval into a fine powder.

 Now I am roasting the rice flakes and once it is crispy we will powder it as well as

 you mix everything and when you make the dough sometimes it is little bit difficult to make

 So in measure eight, the very first note is the beginning of the melody, the A on the

 Well, you have two open strings at the end of measure seven, and you're going to use

 In other words, the first finger at the fifth fret, but you're going to be landing the third

 So when you play the open B or the open A, it's your choice, either one, you're going

 to lift the first and second fingers and shift your hand up the neck so that you're ready

 to land the third finger squarely on the A, fourth string, seventh fret.

 Notice, I don't just lift and then nonchalantly, you know, move the hand up.

 As you lift, you shift up the neck, move the hand, the arm up the neck.

 Or you can wait till the very last note of the measure, the open A.

 So a way to practice that is, of course, over and over again, do it slowly at first.

 Notice even here, I'm practicing the move from measure seven to eight.

 And this third finger, you can't be sloppy because we're going to be playing

 So if your finger lands like this off the tip and you can't, you'll mute the

 Hey everybody, today I'm gonna show you how to make some old-timey chicken and

 cup of chicken breast for about 30-40 minutes in a boiling pot of water.

 that's not just water now, you want 32 ounces of stock and 6 cups of water.

 Okay, now when your chicken's all cool and you get it all cleaned, I want you to

 first thing you do is you put 2 cups of flour and 1 quarter cup or more you'll

Okay, just so you'll know, we're just keeping an eye on me here and you'll

 in there and a quarter teaspoon of salt and a teaspoon of baking powder.

 had to add a quarter cup of flour to hers to get to be a stiff consistency

Okay, alright, now just keep adding flour until it gets to a thick

 consistency that you can ball up and chunk on a board to knead it a little

 like that, come in with your rolling pin and roll them babies out real nice and

 flat just like that, about 1 eighth of an inch thick and then cut them into

 what they look like and then you want to take them to your pot that's been

 cooking with all the veggies and stuff in it and now we're gonna drop them in.

 Once you get to all of them in there that you want in, get a knife full pot.

 you'll notice that you have chicken and dumplings except your soup is a little

Okay, so what we want to do, we're gonna take a ladle of soup and put it

 into a cup with a quarter cup of all-purpose flour in it and stir it

 all in there, get your spoon or spatula or whisk like she uses and whisk it all

 stuff will be down at the bottom, all the salts and peppers and everything.

Then all you do is just bowl it up and boy I tell you what, with

 this ice and cold weather on the ground in Texas for a week, I don't know if you've

 noticed or not, but I've been making lots of stuff that's good for the cold weather

 and this chicken and dumplings folks, it will hit the spot for you, I guarantee

Now I've jabbered a lot during this because it was a lot to put.

 a 10 or 15 minute video and I knocked her down to about 4 minutes and some odd

So be sure to read below and get to all the ingredients and I hope you

 Now, I took this video because most of the videos I saw seemed a little confusing.

 So, I've got this to the point where you can take a quick look.

 And got in here, took this bracket off down here, holding the hoses on, and popped the hoses loose.

 Okay, inside here, I'm going to reconstruct some of what I did here.

 I don't think I needed to do that, so I possibly wasted my time on that.

 They did a marvelous job of using a lot of different size metric screws, fasteners.

 Then I got in here and took off this cover on the side, like so.

 Today we're going to make a stained glass art out of dried flowers and leaves.

 And the things that you will need to make this is some crayons, shavings, any color

 of your choice, wax paper, two pieces of wax paper or one folded in half, some popsicle

 sticks to make the frame, or you can use a construction paper that you can glue around

 the border if you want to make a bigger frame or bigger picture, you can do that as well,

 So I'm going to show you the step-by-step process and the things that you'll need, especially

 So I've got my flowers and leaves laid out on this wax paper, and this wax paper measures

 the same length as a popsicle stick, about the same length, lengthwise and widthwise.

 Now what I found about drying your leaves and flowers in the book, you want to probably

 put a couple layers of the paper in between, that way it will still, these were pretty

 full of water still, the flowers, so you can partially dry them before putting them in

 So anyway, next step is, so you've got your flowers onto your wax paper, and I just cut

 Now you're going to sprinkle your crayon shavings anywhere you want.

 This will help with adhering both sides of the wax paper as it melts when you iron it.

 I'm just going to get some on the edge too, and you can even add some glitter on this.

 That should be, that looks like it's pretty good, maybe more on the edge.

 That way you don't have to use glue to attach the two pages together.

 So the crayon should be melting, so you're just going to press it down until the crayon

 So we made many of these as gifts for grandparents, a couple for me.

 So we just used tacky glue to glue the popsicle sticks for the frames.

 BertaStyle at SCAT89 where you can check out some of my projects like my

 was taught by my mom and my grandma when I was really young and I currently work

 in a shop that does alterations and also custom dressmaking and I really love it

Today I'm going to be showing you how to make the BertaStyle Charlie bag

 and I've already cut the pieces out with the free pattern that I downloaded from

The first step that we're going to do is serge the short ends of

I'm serging this today but you could also do this with a zigzag stitch.

 So once you've got the two edges serged, you can fold the short notches in

 first and then you can fold it at the longer notch and then we are going to

 serge the side seams and we're serging these at 5 8ths of an inch.

 got that done you can set that aside for a minute because the next step we're

 going to do is serge around the edges of the bag and you can see I've already

 black thread today because I think you'll be able to see it and also

 these together the right way and if you need to do so you can pin.

 the pieces out flat again because the next step is to serge the side seams

When you're doing this you're going to want to put the pouch into

 one of the side seams between the two notches and you're wanting to make sure

 that the pouch end goes into the side seam not the part that has the folded

 pocket because otherwise you won't be able to get into it to fold your bag up.

 And this is another place where you could pin if you wanted to but I'm not

 step is the bottom edge and to do the bottom edge you're just going to fold

 the sides in to the notch and then serge the bottom at 5 8ths of an inch.

 you've done that you've got your cute little shopper bag that you can take

 with you to the gym, to the mall, to the store and you can fold it up and put it

One of my favorite summer food is Hoeddeokbap, which is spicy Korean sashimi salad rice.

 It's delicious, light and healthy, and the spicy vinegary dressing whets the appetite.

 I'm going to start with the chojang, the spicy garlicky vinegary slightly sweet dressing.

 In a small bowl, add the gochujang, oligo-dang, vinegar, and the minced garlic and stir until combined and set aside.

 Now over a heated pan, toast the nori for a few seconds until it changes to either fluorescent green or reddish in color.

 Next, prepare the perilla leaves by cutting off the stem, roll it vertically, and chiffonade horizontally.

All you need to do is cut into the same bite-size pieces and keep it cold until ready to use.

 Typically, Hoeddeokbap has three different colored fish of tuna, salmon, and a white fish, usually isumidae.

 But in this video, I'm adding a fourth fish of white tuna, just because it looked fresh and delicious at the market.

 Remember this is your food, therefore you can add, subtract, substitute anything you want.

 To serve in a large bowl, add a bed of hot rice, spring mix, perilla leaves, assortment of fish, fuku jin-zuke, radish sprouts, miso-go, and top with nori strips.

 Right before eating, drizzle on the chojang and a healthy stream of sesame oil and mix gently.

 throwing in some M&Ms instead because they're that good and I want you to make

 you just know I had to Google the name of that because how else would I know

 extract, lift up that motor boat, motorhead, pour in the dry ingredients

 chocolate chips I still pour in while it mixes because that doesn't really make a

By the way, don't you love how you don't have to roll out chocolate chip

 could use M&Ms instead of chocolate chips even though they're chocolate chip

I'm just excited, I missed you all so much, took a little vacation

 parchment paper and the reason why it looks greasy, it's because I sprayed the

 baking sheets with some cooking spray so the parchment paper could stick and not

You want to form the cookies with a mini ice cream scoop or a spoon

 or your fingers, use whatever you want, and then we're going to bake these in a

 the ingredients to make this at home, hopefully you do too, and these are my

 probably going to get a thumbs down just for that statement, but seriously these

Hope you enjoyed this video and thank you all so much for watching!

 Thought I'd teach you one of my favorite, all time favorite Travis Tritt songs

 Remember to check out countrysongteacher.com slash playlist and I'll have your

 I recommend doing those exercises even within the chords without even playing a song.

 Because the more you can learn to move within those chords, again I realize if you're just starting out it's more advanced.

But getting those two sounds with one note really made a big difference in my playing and helped me a lot.

And it's time to go out and spread the good news of Jesus Christ.

 We're going to go to about a third of the way up the hook shank.

 We're going to come back forward here and leave the thread right where we left off.

 I try to brush back each successive wrap so that it lays against the previous one.

 Now what we're going to do is take our foam, which is this Rightway Sports.

 We're just going to take one piece of this and what we need to do is fold it over.

 What I want to do is get a piece about equal to where I've tied off my thread.

 You can either just poke the hole right through or I like to just make an indentation and

 then use my sharp scissors to create the little hole that it goes through.

 Now that I've got my hole poked in the foam, I want to leave a little bit more room on

 I'll go ahead and slip that over the eye of the hook and then flip it upside down.

 What I'll do is I'll just simply fold this all the way back against the whole body and

 Okay, now that I've got my wraps in there, I'm going to go ahead and add a little bit

 Now technically you probably don't need a strike indicator, but this is a little bit

 I'm going to use some white poly yarn, just a little tuft of that.

 So I'm just going to take two of these centipede legs and what I usually do is I'm going to

 put those in on the one side with one relatively loose wrap and then grab the one set and push

 Okay, once we've got that in there, kind of push everything back and then I'm just going

 So right now it's obviously a lot longer on both the top and the bottom.

 And I want the length of the body to be about even with the back of the bend of the hook

 You can, probably doesn't matter, but sometimes I like to give it a little bit of a point

 Then on the bottom I'm just going to snip that relatively close to where it's tied in

 sure on the weekends or especially when family and friends are over.

 some halal chicken sausage here and onions, tomato, potato, green onions.

 going to go ahead with the potatoes and I have my heat on medium.

 go ahead with a little bit of salt here, some chili flakes, turmeric, some garam masala

 put about two tablespoons of water in this but make sure the lid is covered.

 fry the halal chicken hot dogs or excuse me sausage you can call it.

 going to go ahead let this get good fried and I'll show you how.

 this the whole time because they pop so you want to have a stir.

 to cover the top and you can see that it's nice and crispy here.

 now with the garlic and green chilies that I have been stirring it.

 breakfast is being ready to be served and you can go ahead serve this with a

 toast bread, your Afghan bread, pita, whatever bread you like to.

 Hi, I'm Chef Tim Love and I'm here today with Beth from RollMommy.com and we're here to

 cook one of my favorite recipes and also one of the most popular recipes.

 I know you're a little bit nervous about the kitchen sometimes, but I've got a great recipe

 I mean, food for me and cooking any food is a challenge, but chicken usually is my dish

 So, this dish is great because not only is it easy and simple, but it's quick.

 Now, we're going to take the mayonnaise mixture and just spread it on top of the chicken,

 So, we're going to spread this on here like you're doing and then we're going to cover

 Now, what this does is, now the cheese and the mayonnaise kind of keep the chicken nice

 and moist, but we all know we kind of like that crunch on the outside, a little texture,

 I'm going to take this and put it into the oven at 425 for about 20 minutes.

 And so, just so your kids are okay, you want to make sure, if you want to, you take a thermometer

 This beautiful Parmesan crusty chicken that you made, obviously.

 Hi, I'm Tyler Florence with some new ideas for your salad and also some news about your

 Now, you may know that salads can be nutritious, but what happens when you add the dressing?

 The nutritious oils in Wishbone can help the body better absorb vitamins A and E. So let

 me show you a main course salad that you're absolutely going to love.

 A grilled Italian chicken salad with crispy romaine spears and roasted red peppers.

 Now, when it comes to adding great flavor to grilled chicken, there's nothing better

 We're going to add about a cup of dressing, and then you just want to take the dressing

 and just really kind of smash around with the chicken to make sure it's completely covered.

 And this is a really great way to add some flavor right now if you have to get this on

 This is going to be really good in about an hour, and you can leave this marinade up to

 So while that's marinating, let's talk about a really good tip to keep your chicken from

 And that's just taking a clean paper towel with a little bit of extra virgin olive oil.

 We've also got some beautiful red peppers, which is loaded with lots of vitamins.

 We're just going to add these right alongside our chicken and let these just start to roast

 I'm also going to take some lemons and I'm going to grill these as well.

 This is going to be a nice little pop flavor-wise on the chicken as soon as it's finished.

 And this will probably take 12 minutes, six minutes on one side, six minutes on the other,

 You can find this prepackaged in bags at the grocery store, so it couldn't be easier.

 It needs to be really clean and also it needs to be really dry.

 And that way the dressing itself has an easier time to cling on to the lettuce.

 So we took our romaine spears and we cleaned them in a nice big sink full of cold water.

 You want to make sure they're really dry because you want them coated with all that really

 Now let's get our chicken off the grill because when it's finished, you definitely want to

 make sure you let it rest for probably a minute or two before you slice it.

 And we've got these beautiful grilled lemons and the sweet roast red peppers.

 Now let's talk about a garnish that we're going to use on top of our salad.

 And just kind of pulse it down until the breadcrumbs are bright green.

 Really vibrant, bright green breadcrumbs loaded with the flavor of fresh parsley and garlic.

 So we're going to take our breadcrumbs, put them in a nice smooth layer, and then we're

 going to pop these into the oven and just kind of let them toast seven to eight minutes

 Alright, so we've got our grilled chicken, our roasted red peppers, and our grilled lemon.

 And what we're going to do is just kind of slice these guys on the bias, which means

 You get a little more presentation out of it and it also shortens the muscle fiber,

 Now we're going to go ahead and start to put our salad together.

 And then we have our beautiful sweet roasted peppers, which have tons of flavor.

 And then we've got this gorgeous toasted parsley garlic breadcrumbs over top of the whole thing.

 I've got some parsley leaves, you know, because it really kind of makes sense with the breadcrumbs.

 And also we've got some basil buds, some small little basil leaves.

 And then we're going to take our grilled lemon and just kind of squeeze it right over top

 And you get some great ingredients, grilled chicken marinated in wishbone Italian dressing.

 The oils in wishbone dressing help the body better absorb vitamins A and E from your salad.

 And you can check out this recipe and also get lots of great tips and lots of great recipes

 Well hi guys this is Rick, I hope everyone's having a great day.

 Now there's two things you can do with dandelions, well there's probably a lot more that you

 can do with dandelions, but the two things I'm interested in is tea, you can make tea

 with dandelions and you can also make wine which is the one I'm going for.

 made some last year and she used a whole carrier bag for one gallon and it was very very very

 about three carrier bags and I'm going to use that for five gallons.

 Now my sister is a bit of an expert at this, she's been doing it for quite a while now

 I'm a complete novice at picking dandelions so she's going to give me the benefit of her

 Ok, find yourself a nice little patch where you can just bend down and you can pick as

 many as you possibly can in the shorter space of bending down so they're all close to you.

 You can clear the patch up really quickly just using your two fingers, you can see there,

 get rid of that one, discard that and just grab as many as you can in that radius.

 So, there you go, that's how you do it and apologies for the creaky farty noises that

 I'm just saying it's so nice being outdoors in this beautiful clear sky.

 at these dandelions, I know they're a weed but they're actually a very pretty flower

 It's so cool that nature provides abundant bounty for us if we just know where to look

 and it's an art that we've very seriously lost in the last sort of, well, 100 years

 about getting back to nature and sort of doing your own food from nature's larder.

And yeah, you have to, well, apparently the tradition dictates that you

 window maximum either side and then that's it, they're gone for the rest of the year.

 So if you want your dandelion wine or your dandelion tea, this is the time to do it.

But we've got that many and hopefully that will do for probably about

You have to take every single one of the heads and slice off the

You just have to keep doing that until you reach the water level

 gallons and once I reach the three gallon mark I need to just put the bucket away and

 So here we are 24 hours later and all I need to do now is get rid of the petals and just

All I do is pour it through a sieve and a muslin cloth into a fermenting

 Now once all the liquid's been poured off you just need to again add some water to the

While you're waiting for the kettle to boil you just open a couple of packets

 it into a saucepan, keep the heat on, add the sugar and you just basically dissolve

 it into the mixture and that sugar will become the food for the yeast.

 consume the sugar and obviously the by-product will be alcohol.

 Then all you need to do is put a cap onto the barrel, add a bubbler cap and you're

 alcohol process to take place so the sugar will be consumed by the yeast and when that's

 off and letting it stand for a while and hopefully by about Christmas time I should have some

 Well that's the theory anyway, let's just see what happens and hopefully I'll do a

I've got a fun and simple project using your Dremel Trio and some scrap Luan.

 The Dremel Trio cuts through the Luan quickly and easily and in no time at all you'll have your very own chalkboard speech bubble to add fun and flair to your next party.

I have my scrap Luan here, Dremel Trio, something round to curve your corners, always think safety, mask, safety glasses, ear protection.

 I have my Luan here, it's around the corners, it's very simple.

Use something round like a can of paint or in my case a roll of tape.

 Gives you a nice cut line right there and a nice curve, a nice rounded curve.

 If not, you can probably find a recipe for that in Betty's Kitchen.

 But we're going to make it waffled because I have my waffle iron out.

 I have a very inexpensive waffle iron and I have been heating it so it's nice and hot.

 You shouldn't get two pieces of French bread that are an inch thick because it won't work

 This is actually a little bit frozen because I had it in the freezer.

 But that's the way I like to use it when I'm spreading something like butter on it.

 So this is going on the bottom and we turn the buttered side down.

 For this application, I think yellow American cheese will be great.

 So if you can get a size that is about right for your bread, you don't want it to overhang,

 And then when you put the second piece of bread on, you put the unbuttered side down,

 line it up, and then you have the buttered side up, which will touch the waffle iron.

 This is not a panini and it's not something that you want squeezed to death.

 So we're going to watch it and just occasionally take a peek and then we'll come back when

 After two minutes, I lifted the lid and I could see that this was nice and waffly looking.

 And the cheese is running out, so you don't want a lot of burnt cheese.

 This is just a really quick and easy lunch that you can make for your kids.

 I wouldn't overdo it on the butter and the cheese and all of that, but occasionally just

 I haven't looked up anybody's recipe because I didn't want any preconceived notions about

 I just wanted to make what I thought would be a proper waffled grilled cheese.

 And I'm cutting it down the center here, hoping that I can show you a little more.

 I think actually if I had gone on the diagonal, I would have been better.

 If you want more cheese, you could put more in, but I think this is the appropriate amount

 So this is hot, but I'm going to take that crusty piece at the end.

 I really like the yellow American cheese in here, but if you don't have access to that,

 A cheese that will melt inside two pieces of bread that are buttered, and it'll be fine.

 Welcome to USA Fire and Rescue's video recipes where we feature favorite

It combines vegetables, spices, and red wine to make a delicious

 In a large heavy saucepan, heat one tablespoon of vegetable oil over medium heat.

 Then add one and a half cups of sliced onions, two garlic cloves minced,

 into one inch chunks, one one-pound can of tomatoes undrained and chopped coarsely,

 two cups of cooked kidney beans, one eight-ounce can of tomato sauce,

 And even if you're not a vegetarian, you're going to love this.

 your pores or make your pores look like they're smaller or just hide them altogether.

 me when it comes to pores I know a thing or two because personally I have humongous pores.

 I know you guys can see them because I get a lot of comments like, oh my god your pores

 large pores especially around my cheeks, like the apples of my cheeks and my nostrils.

 I do also have incredibly oily skin and I think those two go hand in hand.

 comes to pores is that there is no way that you can get rid of pores altogether.

 you can actually do in order to shrink them physically or anything like that.

 that's what I've always been told at makeup college and work and all that jazz and I tend

 smaller by making sure they're clean and that there's no sebum or goo or gunk or anything

 your pores are clogged with dirt and debris and things like that, that's when you start

 I just want to show you how you can minimise the look of your pores with your foundation.

 So I just want to give you a little bit of background information before I get into the

 tutorial so that you actually know what I'm doing and you don't freak out.

 basically what you need to do when you're applying your foundation is make sure you

 are all the rage at the moment because primers apparently fill in your pores and they make

It's going inside your pores, it's filling that pore up so that way when your

 foundation goes over the top it feels very smooth and it looks smooth.

 do need to fill in the pore because otherwise if the pore is not filled in it's going to

If the pore is filled in with your foundation and that foundation

 is on the rest of your face, it's all going to look like one smooth skin.

So although we are putting makeup into the pores, it is not going to

 clog the pores as long as you remove it when you're removing your makeup.

 me on to the last thing I'm going to tell you before I get into it and that is you need

 to help you unclog the pores and get everything out of the pores.

 I found because I have very temperamental skin but that brush is very gentle and it

 into the tutorial and show you how you can minimise the look of your pores with foundation.

 By the way, I'm about to do a really really big close up so prepare yourself.

 Okay so the first thing you want to do is moisturise your skin because we do not want

What I'm using at the moment is the Huda Beauty Micro Serum from Chanel.

 bit of that all over my face and that's just going to make sure I don't have any flaky

 first point you need to know is that if you apply your foundation normally all over the

 skin, what it's going to do is it's just going to sit on top of the pore.

 going to fill the pore in and the pore is going to leave a big gap in your foundation.

 It's just going to look like a big gaping hole, depending on the size of your pores

So I'm going to show you the difference on the two sides of my face first of all so

 the Chanel Perfection Lumiere Velvet Foundation and the colour I wear is tan beige.

 just going to apply my foundation normally on the side of my face.

 to use it to disguise pores is because it is very dense, it's very sturdy and it doesn't

 actually going to get into the pores and coat the pores with the foundation which sounds

 at a time and I very gently, in circular movements, work it into the pores.

 Now we need to smooth down the rest of the skin around the pores.

 the sponge it will sheer out your foundation and I like a full coverage foundation so I'm

Okay so what I do is I get a clean finger, I get a little bit of

 gently pat that foundation into your skin so do not rub your skin, simply very gently

 pat it on and you'll see that kind of smooths everything out and you won't be able to as

 Okay so here you can see that this side of my face the pores are still enlarged, they

 hopefully see that they look a little bit minimised, they're not as obvious as what

 want my pores to look as big as they do naturally because like I said I have ginormous pores

 brush, my moisturiser will be in the description box down below for you guys.

 this video helpful please give me a thumbs up, subscribe to my channel if you want to

Most of my kitchen videos are only about 5 minutes long because I like to show

 you how to make healthy, low-fat menu items that are fast and easy.

 You can even make your own chips by baking these corn tortillas in the oven.

 dish that I usually use has something else in it in the refrigerator.

 to put a layer on the bottom of the dish that's not very thick.

 that come in these jars at the grocery store are very high fat.

First of all, when we eat it, we don't fill a crock pot full of it and eat

What I do for this brand, for example, this is the Walmart brand,

 a third of it and fill the jar with water, the rest of the way with water, and shake

 by a third and the fat down by a third just by doing that, by thinning it out.

 way, if we pour it over chips or if we dip chips in it, it's a lot thinner and we're

 If you like a spicier bean dip, you can buy the Fritos brand bean dip.

 just a little bit of fat, not very much, one gram of fat per serving.

What I don't have today, because I use them and I haven't bought any more,

 I'm not a real big fan of shredded lettuce, but it makes it pretty and you're getting

In fact, I bought five bags of this today when I was at the grocery

 store because they had it on sale for $1.99 and that's a good price for this cheese.

Zero fat, of course, and in a quarter cup serving, I probably put maybe

 cheese, you're getting nine grams of protein plus your dairy, your calcium.

 We just finished our cooking video a few minutes ago for the chicken chili, and so I have my

 going to say I used them all up, but if I had some sliced black olives in a little can,

 and taken it to a party before several times, and every time I do, it's gone in no time.

 I'm not a raw onion fan, but my husband would love it if I would do that.

 but remember, it does have fat, and so you would have to count that in your fat for the

Well, I hope you enjoyed this recipe today, and I guarantee if you make this, your

And it's low fat, healthy, and it will keep in the refrigerator for a

They're coming out of these little drawers here because of all the mud and the

A little over half an inch so the corn can come out in more than one.

If you're standing up just about anywhere you're sitting or standing,

 And then we're going to head into the News 9 kitchen to whip up some Vietnamese spring rolls.

 Well, Una Williams joins us from Royal Temptations and we are making some gluten-free spring rolls.

 And there's a lot of talk these days about going gluten-free for some folks.

 Well, they're actually naturally gluten-free, which is wonderful because far too much gluten-free

As I said to you, my son's gluten intolerant now, so I've been adapting all

Did a presentation last week and the amount of people wanting it was crazy.

And you can see they look like white plastic and the markings are

 from sort of the rice flour mixture poured onto it and left to dry.

And then when I'm doing this one, the traditional one is like shrimp

 and the rice noodles and cilantro or spicy basil and then a sauce that's a sugar syrup with fish

 whatever vegetables you want to put in it, all finely shredded.

 looking like either angel hair or linguine, and they're only like five minutes cooking.

 And I've mixed it with some melted peanut butter and salsa to give it a bit more flavor

 I'm going to put some cilantro just around here just to give us some color.

 normally it would be lovely and straight, but it's gone cold on us.

And for those that are gluten-free, I've donated a four-course gluten-free

 dinner party or cooking class for six people to New Hampshire Public Television, which should be

 Today we are cooking with Susan Holt from Culinary in downtown DC.

 I'm one of the two owners of Culinary and we do all sorts of fun recreational classes.

 We do wine tastings, nice pills, sauce classes, pastry classes.

 Today we're making a great summer dessert, a raspberry almond tart.

 It's terrific because you don't have to roll out the dough in the heat of the summer and

 it takes advantage of all the great fresh fruit that I will be using.

 I'm going to take a little bit of the dough and I'm going to roll it out.

 Now Susan, a lot of times people think that tortes look very complex.

 We have half a cup of granulated sugar, one and a quarter cups all-purpose flour, a pinch

 of sea salt, a little natural vanilla, a couple of ounces of ground almonds, and of course

 It's a two-part dessert, so the first thing we'll need for the tart shell is a bowl.

 And then for the custard that we'll pour on top of the tart after the tart is done, we

 need another bowl to mix one egg, a bit of honey, a bit of flour, and some heavy cream.

 Also we have a nine or ten inch fluted tart ring with a removable bottom.

 It's just that this crust is a little soft, so it's a little short, meaning it's delicate.

 The great thing about this recipe is it takes advantage of a lot of food chemistry.

 And you don't have to roll out the dough because you melt the butter.

 The butter is about 80% butterfat and it balances milk solids and water.

 Since the water is out, it's going to bond with the sugar, which means when we bake it,

 Have you ever done a crust and you get a bubble and you put a filling in and it punctures

 Now that we've melted the butter and the water's come out, it bonds with the sugar, it's not

 I think a lot of people are very intimidated by crusts, you know, because your mom made

 pie crusts, your mom made, you know, and now it's like, I can't do that.

 As long as you understand the principles underlying it, it's completely fine.

 It's a detail, but if you've got the salt in the butter, it bonds with the water, the

 aforementioned butter, water in the butter, and it doesn't do what it should do baking

 We make our own vanilla here with leftover vanilla beans for the pods and the strip.

 So what we're going to do is we'll press it into the tart shell.

 As opposed to using your fingers because then you get little fingerprints.

 I don't mind the ski slope when it's like an Oreo cookie crust.

 I use parchment just because it means if there's any spillage, you're not cleaning it up.

 So we're going to blind bake this crust, which means we pre-bake it just until it's set and golden because the filling doesn't cook very long.

 You want it to be so it won't absorb the liquids of what you're cooking.

 And also with this one, it wouldn't bake in the time it's going to take to bake the custard.

 So you're going to have to start with the crust because the crust takes longer.

 And this is going to look, when you take it out of the blind baking, what's it going to look like?

 And when we come back, we're going to assemble this raspberry almond tart.

 To watch the other segments in this video series or for how-to videos on almost any other topic, visit monkeysseed.com.

 And we're going to make sure that you know your body type and how to dress it to its

 Now put away your hyperventilation bag because these are just measurements that tell us the

 It doesn't tell us how smart, how kind, or how important we are.

 So we're just going to take these unimpassioned numbers and lead to total fashion empowerment.

 To get started, we're going to need some soft measuring tape and you'll need to disrobe

 You might want to enlist a friend of an intimate nature, either a sister or a mother, a boyfriend

 But we need to make sure that we get accurate measurements, so have on a properly fitting

 We're going to take the tape across the fullest part of the bust, wrap it around, and write

 Every time we take a measurement, we want to make sure that the measure tape is parallel

 So if you're writing up or writing down anywhere, you're going to get an inaccurate measurement.

 Next, somewhere in the vicinity of your navel, you're going to have a waist measurement.

 Now our dress form doesn't have a navel, but I can see the natural curvature of her torso

 And we want to make sure the measure tape is taut, but not too tight.

 You should be able to fit a small finger in there and get that measurement.

 If you're having a difficult time finding your own waist measurement, because we want

 to make sure we get that spot on, even a quarter inch above or below is actually going

 You can wiggle back and forth as you slide your hands down your torso, and your hands

 should eventually settle into the narrowest part of your waist.

 Finally, we're going to get our hip measurement, and we need to encompass the largest part

 And we're going to write down that final measurement, and after we've got all three of those, we

 We're going to take that bust measurement you wrote down and divide it by your waist

 Then, we're going to take your hip measurement and divide it by the waist measurement as

 We could stop there, but because everybody doesn't fit into a stereotypical categorical

 We like to have two pieces of information to confirm or deny our hypotheses.

 So we're going to take our waist measurement and divide it by our bust, and take our waist

 So now you should have four ratios or numbers that you have written down in addition to

 Going through our body types, let's start at the top with an upper figure.

 If you feel like you're curvier on the top, and you have a really hard time wearing button

 up blouses, they're always gaping, it seems like they've got opposed magnets on those

 buttons, then this is something you're going to want to pay attention to.

 First of all, when you look at your ratios on your bust to waist measurement, it's going

 You're also going to show that your waist is 75% or less than your bust.

 And if both of the numbers don't support your hypotheses, but you have the experience and

 Some of the example body types that we could look to are Jessica Simpson and Audreya Partridge

 And if you've ever had the experience of buying a pair of pants where it fits across the hip

 and the seat, but it's totally gaping around the waist, this might be your section.

 Now we're going to see on the hip to waist measurement, it's going to be 1.25 or greater.

 Some of the examples of celebrities that we could see this in are Michelle Obama and Jennifer

 Now if you have the characteristics of both the upper figure and the lower figure, then

 You're going to see no more than around a two inch difference between your bust and

 And you're going to at least have a nine inch difference between either of those measurements

 Some example celebrities that have the hourglass aesthetic would be Christina Hendricks and

 Our final two body types actually share a lot of similarities and ratios, but look completely

 Now both of these body types, you're going to note that there isn't as much differentiation

 So the bust to waist measurement is going to be no more than 120%.

 And the waist to bust measurement is going to be greater than 80%.

 What you're seeing here is just you don't have that naturally dent into the waist.

 With a linear figure, it's going to look very lean, angular, and somewhat boyish.

 With a middle figure, it's going to look soft, more rounded, a little more curvaceous.

 And some of the examples of a middle figure in our celebrity crowd would be Kelly Clarkson

 So find your measurements, calculate your ratios, and if you're struggling with the

 math at all, look in the description for a link to some helpful tools.

 Then once you know your body type diagnosis, watch the rest of the series to figure out

 Just me again, getting ready to do, well, show you how this transgear works.

 I took the strap off, comes with a strap, I don't know if I've showed you guys this

 The strap just hooks through here, goes around, hooks through there, and securely closes everything

 So I started off by taking the strap off, and excuse the videoing, I'm trying something

 Hopefully I got it lined up, I'm using a different kind of mount and I got it hanging

 First you got the frying pan, it's a protective piece of plastic, can be used as a cutting

 I wouldn't cut on it too heavy, I also know a bunch of people that have taken those foldable

 cutting boards, cut a circle out and they use that to protect their frying pan.

 You got two pots, and then this is your lower shield and your upper shield.

 There's also a handle, I got the handle somewhere else right now.

 I just picked up an aluminum water bottle from the dollar store, paid a buck for it.

 Now, if you're gonna use the frying pan, you leave the three tabs out.

 There's a video that I just found on YouTube of a guy using this in like 30 mile an hour

 It's a relatively safe stove so you can kind of move it around.

 Trangia recommends you point that into the wind when you're using the stove to increase

 I haven't really used it outside yet so I can't tell you one way or the other.

 Because while that's going on, I'm gonna show you what I do to get this ready.

 Blueberry and Jamaican Me Crazy are probably the two most favorites.

 I would have ground it a little bit bigger, but it seems to work okay.

 I just take a metal chopstick, or a stick, or a long spoon or something.

 It didn't take long to get the stove going, started or anything.

 Out of all the stoves I've used, I think it's probably my favorite.

 I don't mind carrying a little bit of weight if it's only for a couple days.

 You can already see the steam starting to form up over the water.

 In the meantime, while I'm waiting for that, I'll record another video for you.

 Front hairline to nape and apex to the back of the ear on both sides.

 Starting at the nape, take a horizontal subsection 1 fourth to a half an inch depending on the density of the hair.

 Position your fingers and shears parallel to the horizontal subsection and cut a straight line across.

 Continue working upward using horizontal subsections until you reach your ear to ear section line.

 Beginning on the left side, take a horizontal subsection and part off a portion from the back area to be your guide.

 With your fingers and shears parallel to the horizontal subsection, cut the hair straight across, connecting the line to the back.

 Continue working up the left side with horizontal partings until all the hair has been cut to match the guide.

 Be sure to not over direct the hair and to cut off only minimal amounts.

 Welcome to ET's Dinan channel and today I have a very very special guest here with me.

 Tell me Gem what are you going to share with our audience today?

 If we have special occasions or birthday parties we always make this food.

 Like healthy Indian food, so really healthy with all these vegetables.

 Sometimes they mix it with potato and other things but this one is 100% with potato.

 So I just have a few but you can put whatever vegetables you really want.

 And this is sesame oil, soy sauce, and some roasted sesame seeds.

 So water is boiling and in this we are going to go ahead and add these glass noodles.

 So you want to cook the noodle in the boiling water for about 10 minutes.

 So you can test it with some chopsticks or a fork to see how soft it is.

 So while the noodle is boiling, we are going to prep the rest of the ingredients.

 And we are going to put some carrots first because they cook longer than other ingredients.

 After it cooks a little bit, I like to put a little bit of soy sauce to give a little taste.

 So now the carrots have been cooking for 3-4 minutes and it's half cooked.

 So now the carrots are pretty well cooked and I can actually smell the nice soy sauce flavor that's coming out of them.

 So now we are going to go ahead and add some other ingredients in here.

 And I like to add spinach kind of later because they cook very fast.

 It's been about 8 minutes and I can see that the noodle is almost cooked.

 And I'm not sure if you can see from the video but there's a little bit of white spots in it.

 So we'll just leave it for a couple more minutes until those spots go away.

 Because they are quite chewy noodles and you want to cook them enough so that it's not too chewy and it's easy to chew.

 And usually these are not the type of noodles that get too soft and mushy.

 And if you want to make it prettier, you can actually separate the yolk and the egg white.

 So in the same pan in which we had cooked our vegetables, you have added the egg, right?

 When you are cooking, you will notice that a lot of the dishes have lots of colors in it.

 Opposed to how it was kind of grayish white-ish at the beginning before we cooked it.

 And once we're done, we're going to add some sesame oil for more flavor.

 Sesame oil, I find when you cook it, the taste kind of goes away.

 But if you pour it on top of the food after the cooking is done,

 And I usually also like to put some red or green peppers as well.

 And let me know if you would like to see glimpses of some other cuisines on my channel.

 Besides the glow in green smoothie, this is the most important recipe of the whole beauty

 I believe it's really important to have a food based source of probiotics rather than

 Now probiotics are the friendly flora, the healthy bacteria in your system.

 A healthy body should have 85% good bacteria, 15% bad bacteria.

 What this good bacteria does is it helps to increase your immunity, it optimizes digestion,

 it helps you synthesize and absorb nutrients better in your digestive system.

 When our digestive system is really cleansed, then our skin actually looks better.

 Now what happens is living in this polluted world that we live in or having not such a

 great diet, having a lot of antibiotics, there's pollution in the water supply, in preservatives

 By having these foods which contain all those good, such as this, all the good bacteria,

 all the enzymes, what it starts to do is fortify our immune system, it starts to optimize our

 digestion, it helps us synthesize our vitamins better in our intestinal tract.

 The better the digestion and the cleaner our system, the better our skin looks.

 I've already started to make one of the jars here, which is basically, earlier I wet chopped

 some of the cabbage in the Vitamix and I've started to pack it into the jars, which we'll

 What we're going to put in here is some filtered or spring water.

 You definitely don't want to use tap water for this process because tap water can contain,

 again, heavy metals like chlorine, which will inhibit the growth of the friendly bacteria.

 Then you're going to add some ginger root, which you don't have to chop that much because

 You can get really creative as well if you like caraway seeds or other flavorings.

 High quality sea salt has trace minerals in it and it adds some flavor to your salad.

 Instead, you could also use unpasteurized miso, which will have the same flavor and

 As you can see, that just took a couple seconds to mix in the Vitamix.

 Now, before, I actually wet chopped all this cabbage already and I already started packing

 I want to point out that it's really important that everything that touches the salad, from

 the bowl to the jar, should be sterilized beforehand, including your Vitamix tamper,

 That's really important so that it keeps only the good bacteria from proliferating in your

 You're just going to keep packing it in there, a little bit at a time.

 Then you're going to take your tamper, which is actually the perfect shape, this nice flat

 Don't be afraid to use your muscle, because you really want to compress all the air out.

 When I say that word, people usually think of the soggy, boiled mixture you get at hot

 Fermented vegetable mixes have been used for centuries around the world, China, Japan,

 Because they're now so lacking in our diet, I believe that's one of the reasons that people's

 health is deteriorating so quickly, and people are aging so quickly.

 It's so important to balance the bacteria in your body, which 80% of your immunity is

 This is supporting that directly and benefiting your entire body.

 The next thing we're going to do now is pour in the brine we just made.

 You're going to use the amount to just about the top of the cabbage mixture.

 Before I chopped the cabbage, I set aside some couple whole leaves, which look like

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to roll them really tightly into logs.

 We stopped about two inches from the top with our cabbage and brine mixture.

 The reason we stopped from the top is because as this starts to ferment, it's going to actually

 The cabbage leaves are perfect because as the mixture expands, the cabbage leaves get

 Everything underneath the brine is protected in that anaerobic environment.

 The leaves on the top, you may see sometimes in some of your mixture some black spots that

 It's fine because we're just going to throw the leaves out anyway.

 There's many different ways to ferment, but this is the one that I found is the easiest

 Ideally around 70 degrees if there's a spot in your basement or in your kitchen that's

 If you live in a really cold place, you can actually put a towel around it.

 If you live in a really hot place, maybe ready in as little as three days.

 What you want to do, what I suggest doing, is putting a piece of masking tape on the

 There's no confusion and you know exactly how long you've been fermenting.

 You can tell that it's working because you'll see little bubbles start to form.

 That means the probiotics, which are naturally on the cabbage already, they're starting to

 When you open up your jar and you throw out the leaves and you taste it, it should taste

 This is one of the most important foods for your health and for your beauty.

 What we're going to do today is we're going to change the serpentine belt, tensioner and

 One of the special tools required for this is a serpentine belt tool.

 It ends like a 3-inch drive ratchet but it has very low clearance.

 One of the things we're going to take off, we'll use the tensioner here to loosen the

 belt and the tensioner is fastened with one bolt here and I'll show you the locating dial

 Here you swing the tensioner away from the belt, slide the belt off a pulley that's easy

 When you get your new part and your old part, you always want to compare.

 Compare the overall size, make sure it's the same and this locating dial right here.

 This locating dial holds the tensioner in position so you can activate the spring in

 Also look at the number of grooves on the pulley to make sure that's the same.

 Since both are new and old part of the same, we're going to go ahead and install the new

 Right here in this alternator bracket, there's a little hole for the dial on the back of

 Just make sure you align that when you install the new tensioner.

 For this illustration, I removed the idler pulley just so you can see better.

 To take the engine mount bracket off, we've got to support the engine with a jack.

 I've got a jack with a two by four wood block on it supporting the engine.

 So we're going to take the cruise module off and take the upper engine mount bracket

 We'll get this belt off and compare the two, make sure that they're the same.

 Now we're going to compare the new and old belt, make sure we have the right part before

 On a lot of belts, right on the back side of the belt is the size of the belt.

 Or you can always get a friend and measure the length of the two belts and make sure

 I'm going to get this cruise module out of my way so I'll unplug you.

 Right on this cover that goes over the water pump shows the routing of the belt.

 Plus you can see what you're doing and the cover's not in the way.

 Once you get the belt on, you want to make sure it's on all the pulleys down in here.

 Make sure all the ribs are lined up on the pulleys, nothing's twisted anywhere.

 Only thing we have left is the belt guard which is secured with one bolt.

 And some of the things will be in slightly different positions.

 Just be real careful with the dowel on the back of the tensioner when you install it.

 Keep watching our videos and like our Facebook fan page, search Fix It With Fred.

 I catch a lot of walleyes on jigs and I catch a lot of walleyes on big jigs.

 thing to remember though that walleyes inhale their prey so when they come up

 to a jig they go to suck that jig and they don't hit it like other predators

 and in turn is a lot of times they may not be able to displace enough water to

 pull that jig through the water but if you've got a stinger hook on that jig

 also going to show you how I incorporate a stinger hook into that hair jig that

 things that my dad always used to say is hurry up son we're not building cabinets

 so you know what lop on a bunch of thread there I leave that hang I'm gonna

 usually trim everything for last and now I'm ready to put on my stinger hook.

 is the time that most people put on bucktail or fantasy fur but what we're

 stinger hook I use Berkley 10 pound XT and some people use clear some people

 use green I prefer to use green and what I'm gonna do is I'm just gonna take that

 Berkley XT 10 pound test and I'm just gonna lop off a chunk of it and then tie

 knots I prefer to use a clint an improved clinch knot because I feel that

 that way it's a lot faster to tie and again when I'm tying jigs speed and

 efficiency I want to tie as many as possible as quickly as possible and

 that's why I use certain knots in the instances that I do but to use a tie an

 improved clinch knot you just do seven wraps and then you take that knot line

 and you go through the hole that you created and then you go back

 with a little bit of saliva and then I've already got that jig tied up and

 in most instances I can tie that small enough to where I don't have to trim off

 that tag end but again in this instance when I'm done tying the jig then I'm

 want to do is you're gonna want to place a knot about three inches above

 that stinger hook and we're not talking about any fancy knot here we're just

 talking about a simple granny knot to where oftentimes I'll just make one or

 two little granny knots there was a single for emphasis I'll do another

 granny knot so now I've got that knot right there that knot is actually gonna

 stop that line from going back through there in case you get a big fish that

 thousand dollars was on the line and it's never let me down but what I'm

 gonna want to do is once I place that upon there and I'm gonna put it about an

 eighth to a quarter of an inch past my collar of my looping I'm gonna make

 about 15 to 20 loops there then I'm gonna grab that line and fold that knot

 back past that thread and then I'm gonna make another 15 or 20 loops there

 want to be cautious now is the time where you can hit that with some super

 glue or some head cement but what I'll do now is I'll just leave that just like

 that in fact you could even if you want to throw in a couple simple little

 granny knots you can do that too and what I just simply do is just take that

 and just throw in a couple little safety knots in order to clamp that down on

 If your lips are really dry, and you're about to go out on the town with some friends or whatever

 And you want to apply some lipstick and your lips are just a little bit too flaky

 So yeah, because it is quite noticeable if your lips are dry and you put on a lipstick most lipsticks will accentuate any kind of

 Dry flakiness you have going on or they'll like sink into the cracks

 and yeah can cause quite a bit of a mess and can make your lips even drier in fact, so

 Tips I do in order to smooth down my lips to make sure that lipstick

 Also, you may be wondering why the camera is kind of shaking around a little bit, and it's because I'm using my iPhone

 So I thought I'd make it a little bit more easy to maneuver rather than carrying around like a big chunky computer

 So yeah, and I have to learn not to look at the main screen in the middle, but at you so

 But I like to use store-bought ones if I'm in a rush and don't really have time to

 Make up my own lip scrub so these can be quite handy and plus it smells delicious, but yeah

 I'm going to show you how I make my homemade lip scrub when I have the time to do so so I

 Have made up my lip scrub now, so I'll put all the instructions and ingredients and things like that

 Lip scrub that's a I guess it's a plus and a downside in situations like this because it tastes really good as well

 It doesn't matter if you get a little bit in your mouth, but animals apparently will also be wanting some but no down anyway

 So I'm going to apply it to my lips now and show you what I do now

 Messy and dark and not really aesthetically pleasing so I'm going to attempt to do it out here

 He's joined me don't think you're going to get any of this buddy

 Went for a little bit longer, and then I didn't really think this part through

 But then you just wash it off with some water so be right back all right you guys so once you've rinsed all

 That off your lips the next step is to add a lip balm and at the moment

 So yep, just apply that whatever lip balm you have that's deep moisturizing onto your lips

 So yep, you just apply that as per usual and yeah, that's all really they're the two steps I do

 Yeah, get rid of all the dry skin on my lips to make my lipstick go on yeah a whole lot better

 So I'll post all of the instructions and ingredients and things like that below

 I think maybe up to a week that is all for now, so I will see you all later.

 Hi, I'm Jamie Geller and it's a Hanukkah special show for you today.

 A wonderful menu and you get to enjoy it with me and my family.

 I know wherever he is, he's looking down on me and he's saying,

 And we're going to top them with my addition, my crispy red and white fried onions.

 This is the quintessential Hanukkah dish, potato latkes, also known as potato pancakes,

 This is your traditional potato latke and you could really end it here.

 But I want to do something a little different and a little special.

 Now you're going to take one of your potato latkes as the base.

 And this way you have a really elegant dressed up latke for the adults.

 The classic one for the kids and for the adults, they're going to want those too.

 And it was super simple and super easy because you know I'm all about quick and kosher.

 Hi everyone, it's me Nikki here with a pineapple salsa pork chop recipe that is so simple to

 Okay, in a bowl, you want to add your pineapple chunks, your red onion, along with your green

 And then you want to just simply give that a nice little toss to just mix all of that

 You then just going to add in about half of your salt along with half of your pepper.

 And you're going to save the rest of your salt and pepper for your pork chops.

 You then simply add in both tablespoons of your honey and you're going to blend that

 From that point, you want to take the rest of your salt and pepper and you want to season

 I like minimal seasoning when I use this recipe on my pork chops because there's so much flavor

 in the pineapple sauce so you don't need a lot on your pork chops.

 And then you're going to drizzle that flour over the pork chops to simply coat it.

 You put the oil in your frying pan and then you're just going to cook the pork chops about

 3 to 4 minutes on each side until they're nice and brown and done in the center.

 I then like my pork chops to rest a minute on the plate before I add the salsa for about

 And then I add the salsa on top and you have a delicious springtime meal.

 It's a great way to spice up those pork chops and it gives a lot of flavor.

 You know I love having mine with a sweet potato and some corn and it makes for a delicious

 If you go to my website at homewithnicki.com, I have the recipe card there for you, easy

 Together, we're The Chef and the Dietitian, and we make healthy taste delicious.

 Okay, I know we did some episodes, Battles of the Green Smoothies, a long couple years

 ago, and I don't know who won, but this is my new favorite smoothie.

 I don't have them every day, but when I do, this is my go-to smoothie.

 I make my husband the muesli every morning, and then he has like the Hobbit's second breakfast,

 And one day, I was out of town traveling, I got home, there was spinach, we had spinach

 or kale, but there was nothing that usually goes in a smoothie.

 There was no almond milk, there was nothing to make almond milk for, there was no berries,

 All my best recipes have been mistakes, or not mistakes, just like the dehydrated muesli,

 So what I did have in the house was some unsweetened apple juice, and that's the beginning of the

 I had that, so instead of almond milk, I didn't want to make a smoothie with water, I used

 So we had four ounces, and we made that just now from an apple.

 You can't do this unless you have a high-powered blender, but we made our own apple juice.

 Yeah, and actually, if I buy the organic spinach at Costco, where it's 16 ounces, I'll put

 Ok, so all I have in the house, I always have frozen bananas but fruitwise, usually he likes

 But what you can use is you can buy pears in glass jars or even in cans that are either

 So you know, I'm putting in, because two of us are drinking this, I'm putting in four.

 Now this is totally optional but I love mint and I know you do too.

 So I'm putting in a little bit of fresh mint, a frozen banana, and some ice.

 The reason I'm putting ice in, two cups of ice, is because I like it really thick so

 that it's almost like eating ice cream instead of drinking smoothie.

 And this is why Vitamix is so much better than a regular blender because it just makes

 Now I've got to be honest, I would like this a little bit thicker.

 I would probably put one more cup of ice in but that's just my taste.

 So I would put in at least one more cup of ice so that it's just really ice cream.

 APB I call it, apple, pear, banana, but also in cop shows they always say, put on an APB.

 Well this is so good you're going to have to put on an APB to get this recipe.

 Thanks so much for watching another episode of The Chef and the Dietitian.

 And remember, if you want healthy in your kitchen, ask the chef and the dietitian.

Today I'm going to be talking you through the differences between these

 brush mostly for very light foundations, so foundations that I want a very sheer finish

Things like BB creams and tinted moisturisers are utterly brilliant for this.

 will give you a really nice light coverage and where you need extra coverage, you just

 stipple, which means you push the product onto the skin like that.

 like a compact foundation, the buffing brush is really brilliant for that.

 foundation in circular motions really into the skin, so if you're using a powder foundation

 or a cream to powder, this is a great brush to have in your makeup bag.

 brush is going to give you a little bit more coverage, so I tend to use this when I want

 my expert face brush, I'm just going to start and work this foundation just in circular

 motions from the centre of the face outwards towards the jaw, where we're just going to

You can see very little foundation is required to get a really good

So absolutely essential for those that want a medium coverage or a slightly

The Real Techniques brushes are also multi-purpose, so I'm now going to

 use a bronzer and my buffing brush and I'm going to work that just across the cheekbone.

 Again, circular motions, and we're buffing that in so we don't get tonnes of product

 brush because this brush, if I push it on top, it won't disturb anything underneath.

 So I'm going to use my highlighter blush here, this is a very shimmery blush, and I'm just

 going to take from the product onto my brush and then I'm going to push this just over

 And those are my top tips on using these three brushes together to create a flawless

 The lick we're checking out today I call the Rock Sliding Octaves.

 Very versatile and cool lick, you can use it all over the place.

 OK, as the name of this lick suggests, we're using an octave shape.

 We start with our first finger in the 5th fret of the thinner string.

 And we have our little finger in the 8th fret of the thinner string.

 well what I'm going to show you is using the A minor pentatonic.

 But a really good thing is just to get used to the pattern first.

 And you can do that by just using the octave shape between the C and the D.

 So you play the lower, higher, lower, slide, high, low, slide, high.

 When I'm putting the little finger down, my first finger is just lifting up,

 not like lifting off the guitar, and not even leaving the string in fact.

 So you really hear the clarity and the distinction between the octaves there.

 Now the actual lick that I've showed you here is using the A minor pentatonic scale.

 is just to think about your first finger and let your little finger kind of find its own way.

 Remember it's on the thinnest string, kind of three frets higher.

 So the notes of the A minor pentatonic scale on the third string starting on here on the C,

 using our kind of shifting octaves and using this kind of the triplet pattern.

 One, triplet, two, triplet, three, triplet, four, triplet, one, triplet.

 And you can really, you can slide from any one that you like to where as long as they're notes

 so when I describe the fret numbers and I'm assuming the little finger, OK?

 You can finish on whatever note you like or with a bend or whatever.

 But that pattern is really interesting and kind of cool I think because you're starting on one note,

 You can really do however you like, you know, there's no set pattern,

 And practice it until you've got it so it's nice and smooth and flowing.

 my eyes are now looking here, right, before my hands even move.

 which means that I'd be using a down pick on the thicker string,

 I hope you have fun playing about with this sliding octave lick.

 Hi guys, so today what we're gonna be doing is we're gonna be taking my old homemade table saw

 So I really can't wait to do this because I really need to do it because after I add the extension

 After building the router table, it just hasn't been as accurate and to be honest I haven't been entirely happy with it

 Now what we're gonna start doing is we're gonna start basing everything off one square edge.

So what I'm gonna do, I'm gonna get my measuring tape and measure from it

 Make sure it's tight up against the edge and then just run a line across it and I have this

So when I'm cutting I won't go through my floor because that would be bad

 So this may be a bit hard for you to visualize but basically you have to think of this the underside of the saw

 So one one main thing is you want your saw to be near kind of the back like around this area

 You don't want to be in the middle because then you won't have much in feed room

 You can always build an extension or use something else even an iron on board if you need to

 important it's not extremely important because you're gonna be referencing your miter saws and

 Your fence the blade once we have it mounted, but I like to try and keep it parallel with this edge

 So I'm gonna get my measuring tape measure from here to here and here to here and make sure it's parallel

 And then I'm just gonna use my pencil and draw around the whole thing

 And then we're gonna use the router to make a notch to fit this

 so guys, here's the square bit that we're gonna be taking out with the router and one thing I forgot to mention is and

 The distance between here and here and why it's so much shorter than here

 You don't need much whereas this side you do because that's where the fence

 Is going to be so you want to be have to move it backwards and forwards really easily

 So, um, yeah, let's just get into this and by the way guys the depth I'm going down with the router is however the thickness of

 Your whatever this is called is on your circular saw so guys as you can see here

 Just use all the appropriate safety equipment because it's very important, especially on working with MDF

So definitely wear a respirator and as you can see here for fence

 Cuz I need like three straight lines and then I just can do the rest free time and one more straight line at the end

 So as you can see, here's our little pocket that we do with the router now tip

 Just once and this direction once using the fence and I just go free hand

 For a rest away working back and then at the end go straight again

 As you can see if I pull the play guard back it fits really nice.

 So what I'm gonna do now is I have some old holes drilled in this before

 So I'm gonna screw it to this and then I'm also gonna put some piece of wood going across

 So as you can see I'm now in the saw and what I'm now doing is lowering the blade

 Into the wood and I have the wood ways quite highly off the ground because obviously I don't want to cut into my floor

But just be careful and trying to keep your hands away from the blade and

 Especially be careful where your hand is on holding the blade guard because it is quite intimidating

 This way it's handy to have two things at the same level in your workshop, so I'm just holding it across here.

 I'm not using the saw so we're gonna do now is I'm just marking a bigger slot so I can call my jig

 So we're gonna unmount the saw and then we're gonna cut with the jig saw

 So now what happens is this pops up but when we have the zero clearance inserts that won't happen

 now I used to on my first table saw actually have the blade guard like this and

 What happened is is I I taught like my whole mindset was this would be like a blade guard

 but the problem with this whole system is one sometimes it's actually quite hard to get this lift up and

 There's a lot of pressure so you have to push down and it might be different for other table saws

 Blade what's called the blade guard has a very strong spring and it just wants to lift your wood up

 So if you look at it very closely when I do this here I can get

 See how my piece of wood starts to lift up like that because it doesn't want to go down

 So if you were thinking all that might be a good solution don't do it because it doesn't actually help at all

 We're gonna cut the slot for the zero clearance inserts in a second

 but when you're cutting the miter slots all you do is you get a level and you make sure it is

 Completely up against your blade now you want to try and stop any of the teeth from hitting this but luckily my teeth are actually

 Flush with the blade this might be a bit harder if you don't have a blade like this

 router across and that's the miter slots cut you just do it from both sides and

 But you have to remember the distance between the router and that so it'll be down here.

 Using the same technique as the way we did the underneath I just used my

 Square level sorry to make just a kind of square a rectangle to go around this rectangle and

 It's not the best job to be honest with you, but it'll hold a piece

 I'm a table saw really awkwardly balance actually here, but that wraps up this week's video guys so next week

 Making some zero clearance inserts and in the week after building the cabinet to go around it if you haven't already please subscribe

 Leave some comments down below telling what you think and any suggestions you might have

 So I'm just gonna put some paste wax on this nail just so that way it's nice and smooth

 And I'll see you guys later, so remember a clean shop is a safe shop.

 I don't want to fully cook them, they'll finish cooking as they bake.

 While the shells are cooking, I'm going to get our 3 cheese filling ready.

 I'm going to combine 2 large eggs, dried oregano, dried parsley.

 A little kosher salt, black pepper, ricotta cheese, parmesan cheese, and finally mozzarella

 Also by partially cooking them, it leaves them a little bit firmer and easier to stuff.

 Now I'm going to stuff each shell with a heaping tablespoon of the 3 cheese filling.

 And now in a 9x13 casserole dish, I'm going to add 1 cup of my favorite spaghetti sauce.

 You can use regular spaghetti sauce, tomato sauce, or meat sauce, whatever you like.

 And now I'm going to lay out all of the stuffed shells on top of the spaghetti sauce.

 Once all of the shells are laid out, I'm going to add some more spaghetti sauce to the top.

 And now I'm going to cover the dish with aluminum foil and these go into a 350 degree oven for

 After 30 minutes in a 350 degree oven, remove the aluminum foil and add a light layer of

 And then it goes back into a 350 degree oven for about 10 minutes until the cheese is nice

 And you should let this cool for about 10 minutes before serving, but we couldn't wait.

 And that's all there is to making 3 cheese stuffed jumbo shells.

 If this looks like something you'd like to try at home, please give me a thumbs up.

 See on the two other ones, there is how to make the medium one.

 Well, we call it hot dog, but the other way to make the medium one, you'll see, is to make the hamburger.

 I'll show you the other way, but right now, we're making a huge spinner.

 And then the next part is, well, you have to tear it into two pieces right there.

 Dad, if you see this, I want to say hi and thank you for the new camera that you got me for my birthday.

 And then what you do is, you flip it over and do the same thing.

 You can do the same, but if it's hard for you to try to make something different like mine.

 It should look like this a little on the bottom, but you have to squish it together and make it.

 But on the small one, well on the medium one, you can flip it over and when it does that you can spin it.

 Except the huge one and the small one, when you try to do it, it spins there and flips back over to the other side just like that.

 Today I'm doing curry goat the famous curry goat meat from Jamaica.

 bowl I've got three pounds of goat meat cut in nice cubes which is done at the

 West Indian store where I get it but of late I've seen it in some of the

In the bowl I've got three pounds of goat meat and I seasoned this

 up overnight so that it can marinate and absorb all the seasoning and I've got I

 added two teaspoons of salt one teaspoon of black pepper three to four tablespoon

 of curry powder one large onion sliced and one scotch bonnet the famous scotch

 bonnet pepper sliced because you got to have curry goat is supposed to be peppery.

 In the saucepan here I've got four tablespoon of cooking oil heating and

 bonnet pepper some people put the whole thing in I prefer to put it later with

 another small medium onion and or some scallion or green onion so I'm gonna add

 I've added all the goat meat to the saucepan and I'm gonna brown it a little bit.

 You just say we are browning it so it's just a little sizzling.

 Now I think the meat is brown enough I'm gonna add two cups of hot water.

 I keep checking occasionally if that water is absorbed then I'll add some more until it's halfway through cooking which I'll check with a fork.

 I have the curry goat cooking for just under an hour say 50-55 minutes so it's ready for the onion and all the other stuff.

 The onion and the thyme which you could put in from the beginning but I'll just not put it in.

 I put the onions in and it's got the Scotch bonnet pepper and the thyme.

 I'm gonna add another two cups of hot water and that should take it to the end.

 Cutting each one probably cut in three because you don't want it mushed up in it.

 At this point I'm removing the Scotch bonnet pepper because it's hot enough, peppery enough for me.

 Curry powder varies so much in quality and taste so depending on what you're using you use it to taste.

 I started with four tablespoons of curry powder when I didn't leave the meat to marinate but I think I need some more.

 I guess it's anywhere between five and six depending on the curry powder.

 Now I'm gonna leave it to simmer on minimum until the meat is really tender.

 If needs be, if the juice dries out then you just add a little more hot water to bring it back up.

 Now I'm gonna leave it to simmer on minimum until the meat is really tender and falling off the bones.

 Hey friends, this is the Missy Movie from our half-acre homestead and today we're going to make homemade

 Now I've had several people ask me to do this video, so I'm just going to go ahead

 Shrink wrap you want enough on either side that it's going to be able to wrap the brick

 One packet of Knox gelatin and one cup of boiling water now, they'll oh and you're going to need a blender

 Okay, this is a really quick recipe, but you got to have your stuff all together

 We go this is so easy, it's almost foolproof we're going to take

 I'm going to put it on great and I'm going to add the cup of boiling water

 You want to make sure this is thoroughly mixed and that your cheese is melted

 Into our two pans now if you want you can go ahead and you can add some

 Spices you can add some garlic some pepper flakes if you want it more of like a pepper jack

 Overnight and hopefully tomorrow we're gonna have two lovely bricks of Velveeta cheese.

 bricks of Velveeta while I rested the one inside the other so that one got pushed down a bit, but

 Promise daddy if this worked I'd make him grill cheeses from it this morning

 now mine has a few larger pieces of cheese in it only because my

 I promised daddy grilled cheese and grilled cheese is what he's gonna get.

 This is the miss of Opie from our half acre homestead saying if you're missing cheese slices on your burgers and on your grilled cheeses

 Hi everybody, today I'm going to show how to remove the panel for a Hyundai

 I've been trying to change the stereo in here and there's just no information.

 the first thing we got to look at is right here on the grill here you notice

 how the top and the bottom there's actually a pin just on the inside here

 top one should all pop out and there's one on the bottom here as well right

 is that if you ever have problems removing these things a pair of needle

 thing unit down because sometimes it's very hard especially something like me

 pliers and push that down and you have something you can actually hold on to

 somewhere because the last thing you want to do is have a screw loose.

 is actually a perfect opportunity to go back here and just wipe away all the

 I'm going to wipe it clean though because it has gotten really dirty.

 Eating sticky rice cakes on New Year's is a tradition in China.

 as Nian Gao in Chinese, which literally translates to year cake.

 a heck of a lot of manual labor to make, but this is my version, which is simple and requires

Okay, so I'm a few days late for New Year's Day, but I'd say better

Glutinous rice flour, or sweet rice flour, otherwise also known as

 milk, canola oil, brown sugar, salt, vanilla, baking powder, eggs, and sesame seeds.

 exact measurements, please see my blog linked in the description box below.

 have a little bit more on the tradition and the making of traditional sticky rice cakes.

 that I'll add the coconut milk, and the evaporated milk, and the canola oil.

Before adding the vanilla, baking powder, having a little bit of trouble

Give it a good shake to get rid of the air bubbles, and top with sesame seeds.

 Finally, stick in the oven and bake at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for 30 to 35 minutes.

 took 30 minutes, and you'll know when it's done when you stick a toothpick into its center

 small because the dessert is quite rich, but you can cut it to whatever size you want.

For more information on this food tradition and the full list of

 measurements for the ingredients, please see my food blog which is linked in the description

 The easiest way to drill this fender for these screws here is to put this bracket on the

 this one and this one at the same time, it'll probably twist and you'll never get them lined

So like I say, drill it, put the screw in and then drill this hole.

And then once you've got those holes drilled, then just go ahead

 I want you to take the screws out of the ends of the struts, take these screws out, and

 put the silicone sealant on this bracket like this using the silicone.

 do this after paint because if you get any silicone on the outside of your fender, the

The reason we do this is because we want this to stay in here if

 then later on when you take the fender on and off, this will stay in there.

 Like in Silat, we see everything that the opponent puts out as a target.

 Of course you can hammer fist it, you can step in and elbow and come up and elbow and

 Okay the ankle and the knee or even the thigh and come up over the top.

 What I mean by that is when it comes to just cutting and get rid of that power that's coming

 So if I stand here on the end of that kick I'm going to fucking wear it.

 So what I do is I just sneak in there and I attack that other knee.

 But the most important thing is I get away from the power of that kick and that means

 In Silat, you know like the Lian Pariton guys, they'll do something like this.

 People have been asking me what about leg locks and that sort of thing.

 I'll show you two that I kind of like that are really easy and I'll show in the beginning.

 Okay so what I'm going to do here is I'm going to come in like this.

 I'm going to do a very basic sweep which pretty much every martial art does.

 Okay so when he's here and he goes to kick me, I'm going to pass.

 I'm going to catch this, knee him in the groin, sweep like that and take him down.

 Okay now here what I'm going to do is I can sit, because of my size, I can sit my leg on,

 This one, I'm going to sink my knee into the back of his quad there, or hamstring.

 Okay you're not only going for pressure point, I'm manipulating the knee right through to

 So I'm going to step in, hip, form, like that, give him a good smack in the face, knee, and

 Okay so this one is going to go here like that, trying to be cool and kind about it.

 So if I was doing it on this leg, it would be here and here, just like that.

 Now in a street fight scenario, fucking whatever, this is martial arts alright.

 I mean you could just step in and mash his head and that you could use on the street.

 This is more your MMA sort of stuff and people have been asking me about that sort of thing

 Alright, next drill I'm going to show you, we're actually going to do a transition.

 So I've passed, I step off the line and I just smash right through.

 What I'm going to do is knee him of course and sweep like this.

 Okay, what I can do here is just stomp that knee just like before.

 And I'm using this end of the knee there and bang like this or whatever I want.

 This has happened to me without a box before without a groin guard and I nearly passed out

 One variation I'm going to show you right now, I'm going to come through to here.

 So I get nice and low, I go for like a figure four style look like that.

 I usually need to pin that but I'm just going to pin the shorts for now.

 So I'm here, I push my hips forward, I lean back and I reef up along that cart.

 And I'm pinning that obviously but now I'm just bending it kind of.

 You know, if he's going to kick me that's obviously why I've got that pin.

 And also to Synergy Fight Gear in America, in Baltimore actually.

 Phil Whitelock, Whitlock I think, no, I'm sure I can't remember.

 One of our guys from World Combat USA in Baltimore and he's head of Complete Jiu Jitsu.

 And actually he's got his own fight band called Synergy Fight Gear and that's where this shirt's from.

 So if you want to check those out online, synergyfightgear.com.

 Today we're here to show you how to put together the proven winners combination Bermuda Skies,

 which includes Laguna Sky Blue Lavealia, Supertunia Bermuda Beach, and Superbell's Yellow Chiffon.

 How do you ensure that your Bermuda Skies container is as vigorous and healthy as the

 Just like with any recipe, you start with the right ingredients.

 In container gardening, that means the right container, the right soil and fertilizer,

 It should be at least 12 to 14 inches across the top to accommodate six plants.

 If there is no drainage hole, you can drill one in the container yourself.

 And if you are reusing a container from last year, remove any soil and clean the container

 Next, fill your container about three quarters of the way with fresh potting soil and mix

 As you select the proven winners plants for your container, look at the plant tags for

 important information on the growth habit and light requirements of each plant.

 Choose varieties that need the same amount of sun and that have equal vigor.

 Otherwise, your container will likely become dominated by one variety.

 Once you have the right ingredients for your container, how do you plant them to ensure

 Each proven winners variety should be equally distributed around the container.

 When all the plants are in place, the empty space between them should be filled in with

 In fact, it's best to leave the top inch or so of the container free of soil.

 After planting, be sure to water your container thoroughly until water drains from the hole

 With a little time, sun, and water-soluble fertilizer, you will have a healthy, vibrant,

 proven winners combination that you can be proud you designed and planted yourself.

 Now I'm taking my Wet n Wild Vanity palette and I'm using this soft brown color and it's

 Next in the same Vanity palette I'm taking this shimmery brown color and that's going

 I'm taking a matte black color and I'm placing it above the top lash line and kind of in

 This part does not have to be perfect because we're going to be blending this out.

 Off camera I applied MAC's Smolder Kohl pencil and I placed this on my waterline and then

 I applied black shadow on top of that and then I smudged out the black shadow below

 So taking my stiffer blending brush and I'm just going to blend out everything up here

 And if you find that while you blend the black sort of disappears you can always apply

 So to clean up a little bit I'm taking a q-tip with some makeup remover on it and I'm going

 For my highlight I'm going back in the Vanity Palette from Wet n Wild and taking this color

 Now I'm going to apply my mascara, L'Oreal Luminous Million Lashes.

 It barely looked like Sarah had anything on her cheeks so I'm just going to contour lightly

 The contouring and bronzing and blushing crap duo crap thing crap thing.

 Going to use my favorite blush of the moment, MAC's Stunner Blush.

 Now I'm going to use my favorite cover girl lipstick of the moment, Penelope Pink from

 This week's chapter was inspired by one of my favourite singers, Sophie Ellis Baxter

 Since we're using glitter for this look, let's go straight to the eyes.

 Now take a medium green shadow and pat it all over the cream base.

 Neaten the edges around your crease and then bring the colour down to your lower lash line.

 Take a darker green shadow and apply to the outer corner of your eyes, just to give the

 Also don't forget to pull this colour down to your lower lash line as well.

 Take a shimmery white highlighter to highlight your brow bone and the inner corner of your eye.

 Now take a glitter primer and gently pat all over your entire lid.

 Take some of the glitter to a brush and gently pat over the primer.

 Now curl your lashes and apply your favourite black mascara on both your top and your bottom lashes.

 To finish the eyes, line your waterline with a black eyeliner pencil.

 Once you've brushed away all the glitter fallout, start by contouring your face with a bronzer.

 Then take a cream pink blush and using clean fingers, apply to the apples of your cheeks

 Line your lips with a lip pencil and fill in with a red lipstick and shape with a lip brush.

 It has a bit of an extra edge and isn't something I've personally seen much out.

 And today we are making baked potatoes inside of our solar cooker.

 So what you do is you take your potatoes just like you would if you went in a normal oven.

 And what the foil will do is actually hold the heat close to the potato once we get some heat in here.

 It will hold the heat close to the potato once it's inside of the solar cooker here.

 Try and get them wrapped relatively completely, but if you miss a couple of clots it's probably okay.

 Push it down into the bowl to make sure that the air space underneath the bowl keeps the upper bowl warm.

 Alright, so we're using the method of putting the pot inside of the bowl and then putting that whole thing inside of the bag.

 The temperature that it's showing, and I don't know if this is showing up on the camera or not.

 The temperature that it's showing inside of the bag is 180 degrees.

That's what our potatoes are currently baking at is 180 degrees.

 So it will take longer than if you had them in a conventional oven.

 And we are slowly losing our sun behind our neighbor's house here.

 Even the potatoes are still showing up as being at 180 degrees.

 And so they've been in there now for I think about four hours, four and a half hours.

 And we're just going to let them sit in there for a little bit longer because we're not ready to eat yet.

 At least that potato is still pretty hot, about 125 even after sitting in the shade for...

 If we can bake potatoes in the sun after leaving them in the sun for about four hours.

 This video is on the galloping triplets variation of Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.

 You're going to take a bow about the same size as you did with your down, little, up, little, 4 or 5 inch bow.

 It's similar in a lot of ways to your down, little, up, little, down, down, up, down, down.

 then use a metronome and put it on so that it accents the first of each group of three.

 Start at the balance point, T-bows, forte freeway, wait for horizontal motion, and then...

 One of the common problems with this variation is that students, because it's a lighter, glidier sort of sound,

 If you see any of that going on where you come at the wrong angle, it's just because that tip has gotten heavy.

 You haven't used quite enough weight or enough control to keep it straight.

 Keep a straight EWP, air out your elbows, keep this nice and light and glidy.

 One of the favorites of most of my students, because they get tired of this heavy, scrubby bow stroke.

 Hey, it's Ackerman, and I'm going to show you how to play 1979 by Smashing Pumpkins.

 It's pretty easy, just a couple of chords and some strumming, and there's only three

 different sections to the song, really, so it's pretty quick to get under your belt.

 One thing to note is that Smashing Pumpkins actually tunes down a half-step to E-flat

 a little weird, and you might want to tune each string down a half-step than you normally

But again, for this, we'll just stay in the key of E, and I'll show you how to

I'll just play the first part a couple times through first, and then

 So, how we play this is with a couple of basic forms and a riff.

 just an octave, which is played by putting your first finger on the sixth fret of the

 fifth string, and your pinky an octave higher on the eighth fret of the third string.

So, I'm muting the first string, and I'm muting the second string.

 through, you're only hearing these three notes, because my first finger is muting this fourth

 string just by laying over it gently, and the same thing with the top two strings.

 again, even though I'm playing through all the notes, you're only hearing those three,

 because I'm only pressing down on those two frets and letting the low string ring out.

 So, that's the first chord, an E flat, or technically a D, if you're playing to the

 So, now your first finger's on the seventh fret, and your pinky's on the ninth.

 open fifth is ringing every time we strike the notes, and you're only playing the fourth

 with our third finger on the sixth fret of the fourth string, and bending it up toward,

 well, I guess technically down toward your feet on a quick bend.

 your finger just on the sixth fret, and you bend it up a whole step, so it makes this

 note, actually, or a half step, I'm sorry, so it makes this note.

 fret, back up to the fourth, sixth, way up to the ninth, and that's that phrase right

 there, so... So that, like I said, persists through pretty much the whole song.

 that three times, and at the end of the third time, is it three or four?

And at the end of that first progression, it ends on an E minor 7, which

 is played with your third finger on the ninth fret of the fifth string, first finger on

 the seventh fret of the fourth, and your pinky on the ninth fret of the third.

 which, if you don't know, is your first finger barring all the strings of the seventh fret,

 your pinky on the ninth fret of the fifth string, I'm sorry, third finger on the ninth

 on the seventh, your third finger's on the ninth fret of the fifth, your pinky is on

 the ninth fret of the fourth, and your second finger is up on the eighth fret of the third.

 This video will provide an overview of the installation procedure for the BlackVue

The front camera will be mounted to the vehicle's windshield near the rearview

Before mounting, this area should be fully cleaned of any dirt or debris.

 and cleaning product to make certain the area is clean and dry.

 for mounting the front camera so that the camera lens is directly in the center of the windshield.

 When you are certain of the positioning, remove the red backing sheet from the double-sided tape

 on the camera mount and securely press the camera in position against the windshield.

 allows the camera to be removed from the mount, which remains attached to the windshield,

Replacing the camera is simply a matter of snapping it back in place.

 The rear camera will be mounted at the top middle portion of the rear window of the vehicle.

 Therefore, this area also needs to be fully cleaned of dirt or debris.

 of the positioning, remove the rear camera's clear protective film.

 from the double-sided tape on the camera mount and securely press the camera in position against

Important note, be sure that the logo is upright to ensure that the camera is right-side

Stretch out the power cord cable and plug it into the DC-in power socket on the front camera.

 To neatly secure the cord, first attach one of the self-adhesive cable clips to the very top

 into the crevice all vehicles have between the windshield and the headliner.

 self-adhesive cable clips as necessary to neatly secure the cord.

 Stretch out the rear camera connection cable and plug it into the V-in rear camera connection port

 self-adhesive cable clips to the very top of the windshield so there will be a nice tight connection.

 cable toward the rear camera by pressing it into the crevice along the top of the windshield and

 then begin working the cable along the side and toward the back of the vehicle using additional

Insert the free end of the connection cable into the V-out port on the rear

This has been an overview of the BlackVue 650 Wi-Fi 2-channel dashcam installation.

 Over here our corned beef has been cooking for about 8-9 hours now and that's what it looks like.

 As football fans, the grand final of the A-League's just gone into extra time

 and Brisbane's up 2-1 so that gives you a date when we're filming.

 Okay, butter's done and onions are done so that's a quarter of a cup of plain flour.

 The amount of milk we're going to make in this sauce will be 600ml in total.

 Put it in for 2 minutes and then we'll stop it and give it a stir.

 Okay, that's 2 minutes with the sauce so give it a nice old stir through.

 You just want to make sure there's no flour or anything sitting on the bottom.

 I've merely just pointed out that when you're microwaving you've got to keep a close eye on it so it doesn't overflow.

 Again, I've never made this, Merrilee makes it absolutely beautifully.

You could put little baby shrimp on top of each one if you had little baby shrimp,

 You could put some more mushroom or, this is why I was mincing the carrot earlier, you could make them a little prettier by putting a little...

I just read a recipe, it's a shocking one, that says it uses the egg white to make the mixture,

 And it makes like a fake roe, which is really what the carrot represents, is fake fish roe.

 Yes, that's specifically what makes them xiaomai, is that they're open.

 Because sometimes the ones at the store are not, you know, like the mass-produced ones.

 But the Japanese adopted the Cantonese sound because that's what we hear in Chinatown for the most part,

 It has a tier that goes here and then another one that goes above it, which I didn't bring.

 I like to use the bamboo better because, since it's a little bit porous,

 But they will stick, so you can oil this, but then it's a pain to take care of it.

 I think I bought them online, or you can just take a piece of parchment paper and poke some holes out.

 And you'll see in a second why it's called make and sell, so we'll put a few there.

 I could, but it would tend to stick, so you'd have to oil the tray, and then you'd have to clean the tray.

 And you can go almost as high as you want with these, meaning you can build as many layers, up to four or five.

 If you go really high, you'd have to switch halfway through the cooking to get it even.

 Gosh, you know what I have that didn't sell after the point of a tent sale, but Breville makes this three-layer steamer, electric steamer.

 It's about the right amount for this thing, but I don't want this much.

 And you could spread it out, you could leave it in a bowl, it doesn't really matter.

 What you really want to do is you want to kind of fold it up all wrong, and push it in and make little pleats.

 And if it was a packed one, which I'm not making today, I would take the knife and I'll show you.

 But they're so large, the skin's so big, if I fill it and do all this, it'll be kind of too much.

 I don't know whether we were going to put it if they wanted to pour some over that or no.

 You know, when you buy the Japanese version, it's the one that has to be.

 Hey what's up everybody I'm gonna show you guys how to play a song Lion Heart

 Graves by Dave Matthews and it goes like this I'll just show you the four parts

 and then on the same two strings the 3rd string and the bass string

 Hi, so the first thing you're going to do to make your Glinda cupcake is take a

 toothbrush or sandpaper and begin to texture the top of your cupcake.

 this yellow color and then I'll finish it off with a little bit of brown to

 it flat, and then what you'll want to do is take your blade and what you see that

 I'm doing here is basically cutting a inverted silhouette of a V or the

 adjacent to that and cut a V shape so you make sure that the points are

So there's the V and then now there's the A, the silhouette of the A,

 and then I'm going to cut the V again making sure that the points meet.

 then the outside silhouette of A. Again, you're going to repeat this for the

 entire strip of your clay until you think you have enough to make your crown.

 Once you've done that, what you'll want to do is now you'll cut the triangles

 where the points met, I just cut the ends off I guess or the tops.

 doing now is cutting it in half and then layering one part of the crown on top of

And then you'll take a flat edge tool and make sure it isn't sharp

 make sure you make those indents on the band of the crown as well.

 shaped cookie cutter or a flower shaped cookie cutter, I'm just going to cut out

 going to take my blade and actually cut it in half because I only need half

 want to do is take bacon bond or TLS and place it in the middle of the crown.

 and that little hole I made is just a marker for myself to know where to put

And then you just want to shape it using your finger but be gentle

 whipped cream because you want it to look nice and neat as well.

 wondering what tip I use, this is a Wilton metal tip and it's a star tip in

 this more because it dries shiny and it has a little bit of flexibility to it.

 And mine doesn't necessarily yellow although I've heard that it does.

 this is after obviously you've baked you want to put the whipped cream on.

 Then you will place the gem onto the crown as you can see in the top there.

 sticker recollections to the left cupcake there and then just some beads

 I'm Anthony Stevenson here at Johnny's Selected Seeds using a broad fork to aerate the soil.

 And Anthony, as you're getting closer to me, tell me a little bit about this great tool.

 This particular model that I'm using right now is our standard 520 model, named for its

 We have a 415 broad fork, which has four tines over a 15-inch base, and the 727 has seven

 Well tell me about how it was developed and what it's best used for.

 The broad forks were of European design, and they were redeveloped by Elliot Coleman for

 The advantage to the broad fork is that it's used to aerate soil without damaging the soil

 The ecology of the soil stays intact and the microorganisms are not disturbed.

 So what about all those weed seeds that are stuck underneath there?

 That's a huge advantage because one of the mistakes I've made in the past is turning

 too much soil over and bringing the seeds up and really replanting them.

 We do have a fourth size that's used to harvest root vegetables.

 Basically, the action is the same as the broad forks that I was just showing you.

 But this time, when you get the potatoes out of the ground, you shift the fork back and

 So Dave, this is easier and faster to harvest root vegetables than a traditional fork.

 Yeah, they're a great set of broad forks, and we could practice on the other ones as

 Then you rock it back to about a 30-degree angle until you see the soil just start to

 You pull it back toward yourself about six to eight inches, step on it again, and repeat.

 some chicken breasts, a couple eggs, and we've got some sticks for poking.

 my first ever sort of video where I'm going to be customising something with my new sewing

So as you can see I've got a pair of leather trousers here and this is what

 machine and this is what they look like before I had done anything to them, so slimmed them

As you can see there's a bit of room at the bottom which is what I

 wanted to change and I wanted to make it a little bit tighter around the bottom area.

 So what you're going to be doing next is you're going to be pinning the part you want

 to cut off, so the bit you want to slim down, you're going to be pinning along there as

You can obviously adjust this to how much you want it slimmed down

 enough and now what I'm doing is I'm literally following that line that I've created with

 sides together and what you'll be able to do after that is then cut off the excess because

 you've then made a new stitch and that will be the new end of the material.

 to mention what you're going to be doing is you're going to be doing this inside out

 inside out, make sure they fit and then you can either use chalk or whatever.

 I'm doing here is I'm actually showing you that you need to curve it slightly.

 do this, it's better if you do it on a diagonal to make it less obvious when you've finished

 the stitching and stuff because people won't be able to notice that you've actually adjusted

 I'm just finishing that off now and so after that what you want to do is you want to use

So as you can see there I'm using a backstitch to secure it in so that

 material off and it looks a bit weird there but it looks fine when I try them on.

 adjust that as I said before and as you can see there that's the backstitch that I did

This is what they look like inside out when I cut the excess material

As you can see I've gone for quite a skinny fit to the leg and a slightly wider

 sort of area from the knee above and that side is what it looks like without the material

What I'm now doing is I'm cutting off the excess from the other side, so the

 other leg that I hadn't done already and as you can see right there I've started to cut

 that and you want to leave about maybe about a centimetre on the side of the stitch just

 to do to adjust trousers, especially leather trousers, they look awesome and so here's

 a couple more shots of just the different angles and I've put together a little outfit

 pretty much over now, I hope you've enjoyed this, if you've got any constructive, constructive

 that's the word, criticism for me then make sure you leave a comment and tell me what

 you want me to do differently next time to make it clearer or if you just want to say

 Today I'm going to show you how to kind of do, I guess you'd call it a Victorian

 You're going to need to really let these curlers sit on a while too.

 want to do smaller pieces because these are going to be serious ringlet curls.

 ready to go when you're ready to take down your curlers for any curls that did

I'm using about that much per... Oh, there's makeup on my fingers.

 to see if it had actually done the kind of curl I wanted it to do because this kind of

 hairstyle that I'm doing really needs the curls to be very, very curly and uniform.

I'm not happy with it, but I'm going to pretty well leave it like that.

 Do you remember how I told you to have a hot curling iron ready?

 This, I warn you, is going to make you look like a little girl.

 there, this is actually a very cute hairstyle to send your girls to school in for picture day.

 Hi this is Alex also known as AlexK78A and I'm going to show you how to play I'm Yours by Jason Mraz.

 The first thing that you need to play I'm Yours by Jason Mraz is you need this kick bow.

 You put your middle finger on the sixth string and then you put your index finger on the fourth string on the second fret.

 You're going to put your index finger on the third string on the second fret.

 And then you put your middle finger on the first string on the second fret.

 And then you put your ring finger on the second string on the third fret.

 And then you're going to put, this is actually part of the easiest chord you could also play.

 You're going to put your index finger on the fifth string on the second fret.

 And then you put your middle finger on the fourth string on the second fret.

 You're going to put your ring finger on the fifth string on the third fret.

 And then you're going to put your middle finger on the fourth string on the second fret.

 And then you put your index finger on the second string on the first fret.

 And this is Alex, also known as HouseK7AA, and this is I'm Yours.

 One side's like a sort of wee, crookedy bit, and the other side's a sort of circly bit.

 And then, take one of these bits with the hole through the middle.

 The ingredients we're going to use, we have the chicken fillet sliced and the vegetables

 we're going to use, we have the bamboo shoot sliced, spring beans and the diced mixed peppers.

 Two types of the Thai aubergine, it's aubergine round and aubergine piece here.

 The seasoning we use, fish sauce and palm sugar, chili, pepper lime leaves, silpah

 The base of that we have vegetable oil and the red curry paste.

 We're going to start with the vegetable oil and then red curry paste here.

 Until you get the right taste and then you start to add chicken.

 Hello, my name is Kerry and a week or so ago when I was moving this freezer into the basement,

 as I released it off the hand truck, it broke the ceiling light.

 So today I'm finally getting around to replacing the ceiling light.

 Towards the center of the base there are two screws that go through the base and up into

 The holes that these screws go through are keyhole shaped, so if I pivot the base to

 Two of these wire nuts connect the house wiring to the light and before you undo these wire

 nuts, make sure that your light switches off and that you have the power turned off

 The new light has a mounting strap which I'm going to use, that's why I'm removing these

 Then I will take a screw in each of the slots and attach the mounting strap to the outlet box.

 Once I get the two screws tightened in the mounting strap, the next step will be to take

 the mounting screws for the light and screw them into the mounting strap.

 And I don't want to thread these in very far, just enough that they stay in place.

 Next I will take the ground wire, I've bent a hook in the end of the ground wire and I'm

 The next step is to take the wire nuts and attach the house wiring to the wiring on the

 And here make sure that you get white to white and black to black.

 Once I have the wiring connected, I will push the wire nuts and the extra length of wiring

 The next step is to push the mounting screws that are in the outlet box through the large

 Then once that is done, pivot the base so that the mounting screws are in the small

 Once that is done, all I need to do is tighten the mounting screws.

 And once I get the mounting screws tight, the base is in place and ready for the light

 OK, light bulb is in, let's turn the circuit breaker on and turn on the light switch and

 On the side of the light base, there are three screws that hold the shade in place.

 And before I put the shade up into the base, I want to loosen these screws to make sure

 So with the three screws loosened, I will put the shade in place, hold it, and finger

 If you would like to see more of my videos, please visit my YouTube channel, IceKeeper1.

Shook it up and just wet sections and put my hair in braid the other day.

 Um and I've been walking around with the braids in my hair for probably three days now.

All right so instead of using coconut oil this time I used Quench Curls

 doing your braids don't borrow pieces of hair from each section.

 is when you're doing your braid out or your twist outs let your hair dry entirely.

 hair at night and then take it down the next morning especially if you spray it because

And like I said I have so much definition because my hair was totally dry and

 had been in those braids and had the time to set for probably three or four days.

 any braid out or twist out the next thing you do is coat your hands with something nice and oily

 I like this better than the um can you see all that yeah I like this better than the twist out

And this is actually the first time that I have done a braid out on my hair.

Done a braid out on my hair since I shaved the sides that the sides are shaved

 wouldn't have enough body to cover the shaved sides when I wore them down.

 what the heck do I know because apparently I just have like ridiculous amount of hair.

 me out on glamazini.com and I will see you guys in the next video.

 Hey everyone Rushnee from glamazini.com here with another hair.

 Um you guys remember the last video I had a I think I had a braid out or whatever and what I

 Okay, I'm just going to make, I'm just making myself a strawberry smoothie milkshake-y type

 I've just washed up a bowl of strawberries and I've got two of those Actimel probiotic

 drinks, which I'm going to put in there just for the probiotic benefits.

 And then I've also got some milk, which I've already measured up in the jug right here.

 If it's actually not very sweet and has that sort of sour taste, then I'm going to add

 And I've also got sugar, so that's what I'm going to be putting in there.

 The Actimel is actually the one that does not contain artificial sweeteners because

 Not the strawberries are quite sweet actually, so I don't know, I might not need to put any

 I've just sprinkled a few strawberries at the front there just to make it look nice.

 Today I will show you a simple technique, which is texture on canvases.

 You might have noticed in my previous videos, but I always work over textures.

 A roller, a brush, a spatula to mix the mass, and acrylic mass.

 Most times people use a brush for textures, since the bristles can create a texture effect.

 I spread the mass, and after I create the effect I want with the roller.

 It's very similar to the effect achieved with the brush, but it's much quicker to apply.

 After drying and sanding, I apply a hand of paint over the top, for waterproofing.

 Because if you apply oil paint over the mass, just the mass is too porous, it will suck

 After done, apply the water-based white varnish, and it's ready to start work on it.

 If you enjoyed, hit that thumbs up, and share this video with your friends.

 Hi this is Robin Moses and I'm gonna do a 4th of July kind of maybe not maybe

 swirl and I'm using Physicians Formula and they gave me the whole line of

 their polish and I think they're really super cool and they pop together so if

 you're using them you can put them all in your purse you know and like I'm I'm

 gonna give these to evil client to take to take to her pedicures to do her toes

 to match and so we are gonna start out let me just joint them first and open

 them all up so they're all open I have red white and blue of course and I have

 a franken polish of love letters I'm sorry that I don't have a love letters

 that's pure my love letters are impure oh my gosh I gotta keep these simple

 okay so I'm gonna go in with white on one and what I love is that Physicians

 Formula contacted me and said you know would you like to try our polish and I

 said sure and they sent them all to me with no strings attached nothing no

 problems no nothing they just sent me a bunch of polish I thought that was

 really nice so thank you Physicians Formula now with a few dots of red I'm

 gonna go in boop boop boop and today is a really weird day on humid days and on

 really hot days it's hard to swirl and so we'll see what's going down

 okay now basically I have some extra nails polish piled up on this of course

 so I'm going to take my finger wrap it around the nail pull and all that extra

 is excess polish that takes the nail longer to dry but if I pull off the

 extra it makes the polish flat and it dries as fast as regular nail polish

 this is very hard for somebody to understand that's not doing this all the

 time but there's areas of this nail that have hardly any polish on it at all

 because I've only gone over such a small amount of polish so it doesn't it

 doesn't build up like you think it's actually very thin right here is so thin

 that I have to go back over with the white and touch in so that it covers it

 all because it's almost bare nail so I wanted I wanted to make that very

 poignant it's it's it's not it doesn't take forever to dry so here we go now

 this white is some it's not really like stark it's kind of a soft white

 that could be good yeah totally sometimes it's too stark right that's

 what I like is the really stark one like wet and wild is the most stark but then

 I go over the top with love letters to soften it but that's okay

 then I put okay so you see that I'm pulling off the excess okay now I'm not

 even paying attention that I'm doing it and I keep pulling pulling see and now I

 have such a small amount of polish on the nail that it is gonna dry really

 fast okay now I'm gonna go with maybe blue let's go blue let's see how this

 do do do do do do do okay that's nice and thick and wet paint just tons of it

 to that's about two solid coats now I'm going in with the red now the soft white

 is gonna lose its color here so you got to be sure that you get as good as you

 can see how it's losing color that's because it's not a stark white

 that can be a good thing isn't that pretty they look like little ghosts but

 does it look really fourth of July ish kind of sort of maybe a little bit

 three different using basically the same colors three different looks three

 different nails BAM isn't that cool so um if I was going to do anything with

 these nails I would go over them with maybe a top of Northern Lights glitter

 but I'm just gonna top coat and show you the end result right and now here we

 have the colors that are finished let me scroll down it's hard for her to stay

 still sorry here let me hold her still because she has to have her fingers up

 at a weird angle for you guys to get the right color so anyways there they are I

 hope you guys like them I upload every Monday Wednesday and Friday so if you

 like them check me out share my videos everywhere you can and I'll see you back

 We are going to transform the regular gel into glitter gel and we are going to improvise

 Some people in the video make from flat silk, but you have to cook very much, it's so much

 Some people use the gel, the gelatin, and this is a very bad idea because the texture

 First you use the regular gel you put in your face, like this, and after you are going to

 And for the idea number two, this aloe vera is amazing for the hair because this is natural,

 And you put here, like this, and for this kind of gel we are going to use this glitter

 You put here and after you mix, mix, mix, mix, your mix and you put in your hair, like this.

 If you see the aloe and the regular gel is kind of the same texture and you put in your hair and that's it.

 This is amazing for gift to the child, little girls, and for our girls too when we have

 If you want to see more of this, please subscribe, share, like, wherever you want.

 Congratulations on the purchase of your Royal Sovereign Cold Laminator.

 Following are step-by-step instructions to get you started, how to load the laminator

 Orient the roll of laminating film so that the film is coming off the bottom of the roll

 Take the roll feed shaft and slide it into the laminating roll.

 You must remove the safety devices from the machine to allow easy access for loading the film.

 Make sure your roll of laminating film is centered on the laminator.

 Bring the laminating film underneath the large chrome idle bar and pull out approximately

 It's also a good idea to make sure you've got at least one full revolution of release liner

 around the take-up core to prevent it accidentally slipping off

 Take this backing paper and attach it to the exposed laminating film.

 Make certain that you are on the upper roller above the center nip point of the laminating

 Replace the feed cable, the finger guard and the release liner.

 We're going to use what's called a leader board to get the film loaded through the laminator.

 and should have at least one straight machine cut leading edge.

 Make sure the laminating rollers are in the fully open position.

 With the rollers open, take the straight leading edge of your leader board

 Close the rollers now until you feel pressure which will vary depending on the thickness

 With the leader board now in place, we're going to run the laminator

 Once the leader board clears the front rollers, close the rollers to the full laminating position.

 Once the leader board clears the rear cut line at the rear of the laminator,

 Visually inspect the film to make sure that it's flat and wrinkle-free on the rollers.

 taut, flat leading edge by applying outward pressure with both hands.

 Keep repeating this process until all of your graphics are done.

 Slide this slip sheet underneath the trailing edge of your final graphic.

 will allow you to have your graphic exit the rear of the laminator

 while still providing protection from the adhesive hitting the bottom roller.

 We hope that this brief instruction will help get you started quickly.

 Hi, my name is Kim McCosker from 4 Ingredients and welcome to Cooking With Kim where we save

 you time and money in the kitchen because everything we make is made with just 4 or

 fewer ingredients including these divine little chocolate mousse patty cakes.

 Now I just took a block, a 250 gram block of chocolate and melted it in a clean dry

 So it probably took about, I don't know, a minute to get this consistency.

 One, two, my little 3 year old will be devastated, he's not here to crack the eggs, it's his

 And then a quarter cup of self-raising flour or if you are or have a gluten intolerance,

 And then evenly distribute the mixture across each of the patty papers.

 I think I may have overfilled in my enthusiasm to make beautiful, big, lovely chocolate mousse

 I think I may have overfilled these just a little bit too much.

 But all I'm going to do with my chocolate mousse patty cakes is let them cool down and

 then I'm going to top them with my delectable whipped cream cheese frosting.

 So if you have enjoyed this recipe and want to know how to make more just like it, perhaps

 maybe not quite as oddly shaped but nonetheless delicious, then please join our ever growing

 My name is Kim MacOscar and creations just like this that perhaps you will never see

 Hey kids today, we're making a really fast very easy Spanish rice dish

 It's YouTube's best for creative things it's cooking and crafting

 Vegetable oil I actually use canola oil and I am going to be adding in one cup of uncooked

 well as one medium onion that has been chopped or the equivalent of about a half a cup of

 Starting to become a little tender so at this point I'm going to add in the rest of my ingredients

 Suggests that you never go above and truly you never really have to go above medium

 I'm gonna reduce the heat and I'm gonna cover and simmer it for 30 minutes

 And then I'm gonna start working on our dinner, which I will upload as a separate

 Ok, this is the first installment of my super awesome kitchen stuff.

 I will show you those videos, kitchen stuff, I guess, like recipes, special shakes and

 You need peanut butter, natural, banana, almond milk, unsweetened, whey, oatmeal or whole

 Because many people open them with their stem, I do like monkeys.

 The oat, this is one third of a cup, it's 20 grams, and there's in that 4 grams of

 And in there, there is 566 calories, 55 grams of protein, 46 of carbs, 18 of good fats,

 And if you want no sugar, just remove the banana, there's also 6 grams of fiber.

 Hello guys, we are getting ready to cook in the back of the van here.

 Kind of like a mini tailgating, but we're going to cook up some hot dogs

 Alright guys, hot dogs are done a little bit before macaroni and cheese.

 So we're going to eat our dinner here, get our macaroni and cheese as soon as it's done.

 Making espresso is an art and there are some subtle factors that make all the

 difference between a good espresso and a not so good extraction.

 run through some helpful tips that will help you master extracting with your

 filter, you'll see multiple holes on the inner wall and then if you turn it over

 it actually increases pressure inside the brew head and that increased back pressure

 is going to get more extraction of the natural oils from the espresso and you're

 going to get more crema on your espresso and that's the sign of a good espresso.

 Much like an ice cream scoop that you have to submerge in water after each use,

 it's a really good idea to get in the habit of cleaning your dual wall filter

 So I'm going to run through some helpful tips of looking after your dual wall

 So what that's going to do inside the filter, it'll trap the water and it won't

 then water's just going to flush straight through the brew head and it's going to be

 granular consistency, which will stay in your fingers but it's still going to have

 is wet and soppy, but this is completely normal and as a result of the dual wall

 filter because there hasn't been enough time for the water to drip through the

So it's a really good habit to get into to actually clean your filter

 it down with a damp cloth and then just put it on like you'd normally do if

 having problems that it's still blocked, just use your handy cleaning tool and

 just prick that exit hole like so to get rid of any blockages in the filter.

 scoop size and the tamping pressure will all make that beautiful crema on

 Alright, in this video I'm going to talk about my absolute favorite card production.

 It's called the Hot Shot Cut, and here's what it would look like.

 So let's say I wanted to find my favorite card in the deck, the Ace of Spades.

 I can give the cards a quick shuffle, and whenever I want the card, all I have to do

 is give the deck a cut right about here, and that card will just shoot right out.

 Alright, so the card that's being shot out of the deck is actually the bottom card.

 To do this, you first need to learn how to do a one-handed cut.

 There's a few options here, but I'll show you the one that I use, the one that I feel

 And to do it, you're just going to hold the deck in this position right here.

 So that's your first finger on the left side of the deck, middle finger on the right side.

 You're contacting the deck at about the first joint of each of those fingers, and you're

 But as you practice more and more, you'll become comfortable with this.

 What I would recommend is to get the cards in this position, and then just watch a TV

 show or do whatever, and slowly you'll be accustomed to this grip, and it won't be a

 So once you're comfortable with this, the next step is you're going to curl your middle

 finger in just a little bit, and that's going to cause the cards to revolve clockwise a

 Then you're going to come over with your middle finger, and you're going to contact the upper

 And then you're going to kind of pull those cards away, separating it from the rest of

 The upper half is going to revolve around your first finger, and you're going to continue

 At this point, I pull up with my middle and ring finger just slightly, and I tuck my first

 My pinky hair is supporting the back edge of these cards so that they don't fall.

 Once you're able to do that, we can move on to the actual shooting of the card.

 As you're closing the two packets, you actually keep your first finger in there.

 And what you're doing is, keep in mind that this is the bottom card of the deck now.

 So you're going to push that card out, you're going to out jog it, and then I'm kind of

 moving my first finger to the right, and I'm making that card perpendicular to the

 So to shoot the card out, I'm clamping down with my thumb on top of the deck, and then

 I move my middle finger to the top right corner of this card right here.

 And here's what happens, I'm pulling up with my middle finger on that card, creating tension

 You'll notice it flexing, so I'm building up a lot of energy in this card.

 And you're going to have to experiment with the placements of your fingers there, and

 I'm kind of limited by the range of my camera here, so I can't really do a complete shot,

 Alright, so one other note is that as you practice this, you'll realize that you really

 do have a lot of control over the direction that this card is shot, and the distance.

 You can really shoot from one end of your body to the other, and very comfortably catch

 And the way that I would use this, you know this is so good that I would sometimes use

 So I have a card selected, I have it controlled to the bottom of the deck, and then what I

 would do is I would use the, what's this called, bottom retention overhand shuffle.

 Basically it keeps the bottom card on the bottom while you do a shuffle.

 So you can check the tutorial out for that, I'll put a link up.

 And I would go to the specter, I'd say, you tell me when to stop shuffling.

 I have a feeling that it's about 23 cards down from the top of the deck.

 I cut 23 cards right there, shoot the card out, and I would catch it in the opposite

 Or you can use it in the context of a larger trick, maybe a 4-H production, whatever it

 This is our first episode or installation of our cocktail series.

 We're going to do some cocktails made with Hudson whiskey and other Tuttletown products.

 We both work here at Tuttletown and neither of us are bartenders but enjoy very much drinking

 I can only give you a regular Manhattan today because I didn't bring my drive or booth.

 But that's a good point to say that the perfect Manhattan originated supposedly in the Manhattan

 For a big political event for Tilden she commissioned the Manhattan Club to create a cocktail and

 So I'm going to start off by frosting our Manhattan glass or our martini glass.

 Since we don't have plumbing here in our tasting room I would normally maybe top this off with

 We're going to use our corn whiskey as opposed to a traditional Manhattan with just rye whiskey.

 So if you do two parts to one part whiskey to vermouth which is how I like it.

 I usually do two parts either corn whiskey and one part vermouth or one part corn and

 And now I'm going to take one ounce of Carpano Antica sweet vermouth.

 Top that off into the glass of ice and I'm just going to give myself a little bit more

 I'm still practicing my one hand stir but usually I'll use two hands.

 For a cocktail, it's traditionally stirred as opposed to shaken.

 If you started adding sweeteners or juices, you would shake it to blend those up nicely.

 So now I'll take the ice that we were chilling with, that Kathy's glass with.

 sure if you go to an auto parts store you do not buy the super strong or the

 If you use higher, the bolts will bind so tightly that you'll probably damage all

 the less strong you need your Loctite to be for it to have the same

So, you have your screw on the end of your driver, and you bring

 drivers for things like this, because they have a tendency to roll off the end of a

Good rule of thumb is, whatever you can do with your thumb and forefinger,

 that side in, we come back to the other side, and pull out this screw.

 that we put in before, without the Loctite, just to help it locate, so we can

It has color-coded wires, which match up to the color-coded wires

 on the speed controller, and if you do use Align components, if you match the colors

 up with the speed controller and the motor, I've never had a problem of where

 Now, when you get your first new motor, you've got this pinion on it, which that

 motor, you want a little bit of the shaft sticking through over the top of the

 What you have to do, when you mount it up and you have your main gear in, is slide

 your pinion up and down, so that your main gear intermeshes on this nice flat

 than the top of the main gear, and you do not want the bottom of the main gear

 coming past the straight sides down the bottom of the pinion, and they flare out.

So, you put your, put your little grub screw and your threadlocker, and do it up

 stuff, and I put on really strong Loctite onto there as well, to sort of glue the

 under severe pitch pumping, they do spin, which is a very bad thing, because you

 lose a lot of power, and you can start to plow into the ground.

If you need that height, that will help so you don't roll to the left.

 Get the back of the right thigh out because it likes to tuck under.

 On the exhalation, move the front of the right thigh to the back of the right thigh and bring the leg closer with the arms straight though.

 Hi guys, welcome to my channel and today's recipe is hot and spicy chatpate which is

 There are many different types of chatpate but today I am gonna show you how to make

 Ok first of all take a large bowl and then break your wayway noodles into small pieces

 Inside the package there is masala powder, chilli powder and oil but today we are going

 to use just the masala powder because later I am gonna use my own chilli powder and oil.

 Next add all the remaining ingredients in the bowl and mix it nicely with a big spoon.

 Once the mixture is nicely combined, taste it and add salt or lemon if needed.

 Please give it a try and thumbs up this video if you like this recipe and please click the

 Dear Titli, I'm a fan of Bolton Wondrous Football Club and I need cheering up desperately.

 I've put the apples in a large pan together with a tablespoon of water.

 I'll put the lid on, turn it on to a low heat and cook gently for 10 minutes.

 While we're waiting for the apples, we'll sieve the two lots of flour together into a bowl.

 and mix it all with your hands to the consistency of breadcrumbs.

 This is ready to go into the oven at 180 degrees Celsius for around 35 to 40 minutes

 I do hope you get better soon so you can come and cook that for me for once.

 Hi, I'm Suzanne McNeil with Design Originals, and today I want to show you one of my favorite

 I have traced the outline of several little angels on this piece of paper.

 And now I have my 01 micron pen, and I'm just going to start drawing on this.

 If you won't tell anyone, I'll show you I made a little mistake up here.

 As long as I make a match, no one will, except you, will ever know that I did that.

 And then I'm going to do a zigzag in amongst those parallel lines.

 So now I'm going to stop working with my Micron and I'm going to add some color.

 So I can either use watercolor pencils or I can use just a little small set of watercolors.

 So I'm going to just dip my brush in a little bit of water and color her dress.

 Yellow is really a nice color to start with because yellow will actually blend with other

 And since it's lightest, it will be overpowered by anything you paint on top of it.

 So all I have to do is bring my green in on top of the yellow and it will, the yellow

 So you would just continue working on her if you wanted to use your watercolor pencils.

 And then a little bit of water with my brush and it'll pull the watercolor pencil out just

 You could leave your little angels attached or you could cut them apart and cut inside

 Here's a whole line of girls that I've painted with the watercolor.

 They're little button faces and I thought they really added a nice look.

 So all these little paper dolls are in this book, Zentangle 10, Ideas for Cutouts and

 There are the patterns, the simple instructions for basics in tangle.

 Lots of fun projects, little windmills, little birds, lots of new tangles.

 Let's just say that you looked at that tangle and thought, oh, I really like that, but I

 So the simple step out show you how easy it is to do that tangle and even a variation

 Necklaces, cards, stars, oh, there's just so much in this book.

 So if you learn one new tangle a day at the end of the year, you'll know all 300 or 400

 Hey guys, this is Reethus here and I recently completed a C-CAM Platinum Dealer training

 Now for those of you that didn't see my prior video, this is a BioQ 29 gallon tank.

 This is the back of the tank and where the filtration is located.

 What I've done to get to this point is remove the tray that's located here, the BioBalls

 that were located here in the bottom tray and threw them all away.

 This way you don't have to buy the reusable filter cartridges that they have.

 I like using reticulated foam like in the old school NanoCubes that they used to manufacture.

 As I showed in my first video, these simply just fit into place.

 So for the 14 I use one sponge and for the 29 I like to use two sponges.

 So what we talked about last time was using this compartment here for either a bag of

 Next I went to my C-Chem training and I learned about this product called Matrix.

 If you have more than 50 gallons an hour of flow you want to use the Matrix and not the

 The Denitrate product is the same bio media as this except the larger size of the Matrix

 enables it to denitrify in water that's moving faster than 50 gallons an hour.

 So I've got one liter of Matrix media in a pura nylon media bag.

 I've already got it in the bag like so and you can drop this in place where the bio balls

 I like keeping this media in a bag so I can remove it and clean back there.

 So now what I like to do is I like to use a combination of Matrix carbon which is a

 Round chemical filtration does a much better job than pellets or the chips because the

 round chemical filtration whether it's purogen which is round or Matrix which is round the

 spheres give you much better hydrodynamics meaning the water can channel through the

 filter media much more efficiently than if it's compacted pellets or compacted chips.

 So I'm just going to take the purogen out just for video sake and remove this sponge

 We've got our Matrix bio media which is a denitrification media and then if you see

 the chemical filtration is the exact right size for what fits in this slot right here.

 The next thing I'm going to do on a later video is talk about investment protection.

 And a lot of you guys will spend 60 or 80 dollars a fish but people won't get a UV sterilizer.

 So this is a BioQube UV sterilizer that fits on this pump tube right here which I'm going

 I leave it unplugged and if I have a problem with fish or ick then I'll plug it in temporarily

 But this will be the investment protection video which I will do next.

 Thanks so much for watching the BioQube simple filter modification update.

 Okay, so now we're going to make the lasagna and stick in the oven so I've got all my ingredients the vegetables

 Got the bolognese here, and I've got about 500 grams of mozzarella

 And just with the mozzarella just chop it into nice slices like so

 What you need to do is you need to start the first layer should be the bolognese

 And then we go with the lasagna sheets again another lasagna sheet

 And just maybe a little bit of bolognese this time not too much because we want to also add

 You won't have to go through that whole rigmarole of making the sheets again

 You just have to pop them out of the freezer defrost them properly

 So yeah, I've added lots and lots of cheese on top of this but I think lots of cheese on lasagna is lovely

 He's been quite good actually up until this very last moment, so that's fine

 Once it's preheated just stick the lasagna in the oven and it should take about 30 to 40 minutes

 I just need to keep checking on it just to make sure it's nice and brown on top and then it's bubbling and once it's

So I'm just gonna open up the oven and yet it's all nice and brown

 Now that YouTube is allowing me to upload 1 gigabyte files, I've been able to slow down

 just a little bit and I'm going back and revisiting some of my earlier videos.

 Dixie Chicks intro for There's Your Trouble is a very, very valuable lesson for beginners

We have multiple string groups, we have multiple string bends, we have a very

 large interval to jump which requires pick blocking in order to execute smoothly and

 then we have a neat little single note line that utilizes the top strings, the staggered

 strings and then we have another pick block requirement to get back down to position 5

The beauty of this song is that all of this is played over the band

My B pedal is down to begin or now you can pick it or your choice.

 Pick block again, move back down to 5 with the A and B pedals down, strike 4 and 5 with

 10 or open D. We're going to strike 5 and use the A and the D pedal.

 the pedals, 1, 4, 5 with the thumb and then the A and B pedals.

 in a resolved into D. We'll strike 6, excuse me, we'll have our thumb up against 6 and

 we'll pull 4 and 5 with our picks, raise the A pedal, strike 6, 4 and 5 and then 6 again.

 I make these videos to help people, so if this video doesn't help you, let me know

 going to show you how to repair or replace a broken zipper pull.

 this big sports jacket type zipper for this video because it's very common.

 a zipper with a locking mechanism, you may need to move the slide forward a

 little to get the locking mechanism out of the way so you can get the

 The crown on this type of zipper is almost impossible to remove without

 doing serious damage to the slide, so replacing the pull with one just like

 They do sell a few pull repair kits, but they may not work on all zippers.

 find a reasonable replacement for a pull, so you may have to replace the slide and

 really well for a zipper pull, let me know and I'll put it in the information

 Hello everybody, I'm going to be showing you guys a healthy, nice pineapple smoothie, which

So what you're going to need is a blender, some of this pineapple,

 well any kind of pineapple, I use this kind of pineapple, and you're going to take one

 of those things and you're going to cut one of them into about inch sized pieces.

 you go, you have about one, two, three, four, five, six of those.

 to need one fourth of a teaspoon vanilla, one third of a cup milk, and one tablespoon

Okay, so first goes in, and the good thing about this though is that, well it's one serving,

 the good thing about this is that it all mixes at the same time.

 agave in there, one third, and then one fourth of a teaspoon vanilla.

And then I have these ones that are shaped like pineapples, and I put about four

Okay, looks like there's a tiny bit of ice, but that should be alright.

 that is about one small serving, and it's nice and healthy, good breakfast smoothie

 Hi and welcome back and today I'm going to do a sock bun tutorial and this is for Sarah

 Rocks1 and she requested this and so first I'm going to show you how to make a sock bun.

 Okay, so what you're going to do is take some socks that you have and you can make them

 I probably actually only need one, but if you want a thicker bun, then just put one

 So what you're going to do is from the side that has the texturing on it that would be

 up around your ankle, start on that side and then put your thumbs right inside there and

 One, two and then just make sure it's stretched out and then you just keep turning it in.

 And your hair is going to go around this, so unless you're really concerned about perfect

 So then you just wrap this around the edge and there you have it.

 Alright, so then what you want to do, my hair is just nice and rough today, but you just

 pull your hair back into a high pony or wherever you want the bun.

 Get your sock, put it on, you pull it all the way, tuck it in, tuck this one in, tuck

 And this is like a really big one because my hair is really big.

 But basically I don't even really need to do any bobby pins or anything.

 So if you want to start with a tighter ponytail, then that's good.

 And just a really high, pretty, I actually feel kind of like Belle.

 And so I hope that helps Sarah Oxlund and I look forward to seeing you guys in the next video.

 okay next phrase next phrase we are going to have third finger and fourth

 finger on third fret of third string and second string the typical thing we do

 so we're gonna come in on one and this part is played by eighth notes and it's

 not gonna be that hard to play eighth notes as far as technique goes but still

 it's pretty much syncopated so you're gonna have to be careful were you gonna

 be exiting and executing some of the notes because they're pretty syncopated

 okay first we're gonna get third finger and fourth finger on third fret of third

 string and second string typical stuff we do right and we're gonna play using

 pulgaz meaning thumb right we're gonna play from fourth string open

 and the important thing is we're gonna play from fourth string to second string

 you don't want to go you don't want to play all the way including open E string

 you want to stop on the second string okay and we're coming in on one and one

 and okay all right so so we're gonna play this and then come on to third fret

 okay twice almost the same thing the second time instead of playing high E string we're gonna

 play E string right here if you want to add the golpe you can go ahead or you can do without

 and then you can pull off and play third fret and then strum from fourth string

 so this note finishes on nine and a half and then we're gonna right after that we're gonna go ahead and bar third fret of top string and fifth string with the middle finger

 you're gonna have to stick out your middle finger a little bit so that we

 can get the second fret of fourth string as well get this chord and then we're

 gonna strum from the top string with a golpe on ten and a half right ten and

 on the 11 and we're gonna lightly play upstroke and then golpe on 12

 As you may know from using traditional CAD software, making an object with an overhanging roof can be quite difficult and time consuming.

 Start with a fresh screen, and draw a house much as you have before.

 Start with a rectangle, push-pull, and draw a line across the top center.

 Select a line, then use the move command, click the end line of the point, and move it straight up, making sure you're in the blue direction.

 Now, use the push-pull tool, and click on either roof panel, and move it out.

 Click a distance to set, and then type in what you want, say 6 inches.

 The program will remember the command, and move it the exact same distance.

 Now, split the roof segment so that we have two distinct pieces, the base piece and the roof piece, much as if you were building a real birdhouse.

 Now, we want to make the top a little bit smoother, but that will only work if our sides are exactly 90 degrees.

 For now, we'll just leave it at that, and create an overhanging roof on the side of, say, 8 inches.

Save it as something you will remember, such as BPL4 overhang roof.

Move on to the next one, and we'll find out how to make a miter joint on the top, and add other detail to the drawing.

On this episode we're taking some cultured milk product, that's right,

 For my cheesewurst, I'm using some of my favorite cheeses, like some goat cheese here, and some

 For my cheesewurst, I'm doing some gruyere, some smoky gouda, and some cheddar cheese.

 Yeah, I mean, mine was kind of puking a little bit, and yours looks like you might have done it a little bit.

 Yeah, it must just be all the solids in the cheese that have really condensed, because it's thick and chewy,

 I don't know if you've ever, you know, like when you make a cheeseburger,

 the cheese that runs off and hits the pan, that gets kind of that crust on it.

 It's like, not the crusty part, but the part that hasn't quite got the crust on it.

 Yeah, it's really weird how like the... it's like it got chewy, rubbery kind of.

 But it's also kind of a little bit lacking in flavor, I would say.

 Out of sausages we've made, it's surprisingly sausage-like, I would have to say.

 Yeah, I was expecting much worse than this, so I'm calling that successful.

 My brain doesn't want to process the whole fact that that actually worked.

 In the following few minutes I'm going to show you a few ways to learn to hit a drop shot.

 Prepare with the racket higher than your contact with the ball.

 Pretty much I want to stop right after I make contact with the ball.

 slide your hands down all the way towards the bottom of the grip.

 and practice what we talked about in the beginning, the disguise.

 Okay, so we have a cantaloupe, apricot kernel oil, and coconut milk.

 Because this cantaloupe looks different than other cantaloupes I usually see.

 So we took a cantaloupe and we took the rind off, obviously, and then we blended it.

 Yeah, and after, with leftovers, you could probably do a blended drink or a smoothie.

 And then you're going to add the two and a half tablespoons of coconut milk, which

 How long does this, does this set or is it like, is it just kind of a softness?

 you an invention of mine, which is a variation on the Yael wrap, which is a

 gorgeous, elegant, single scarf wrap that Yael came up with, and we posted a video

 about using a second scarf is that it highlights the details of the Yael wrap

 style, which include this, like, sweep and a twist, and you'll see that having

 another color underneath makes that twist much more featured, and that's kind

 to use a two-in-one for one of your scarves, because since you're working

 you're going to tuck it up and over your bun, and get rid of the ends, either

 underneath or into itself on the side, whatever is more comfortable for you.

 something like a Shinylicious, which is what this is, or you could use a Soft

 Pashmina, a Solid Pashmina, a Lakeshore Bliss, lots of different things.

 this is where the technique starts to resemble the original Yael video, you'll

So, um, this one you want to wrap on an angle, and the point of the ankle I'm

 the side, but just for now we'll do it in the middle, because it's easier.

 the same side as the first scarf, and you can do that just by tucking it over and

 Okay, so now I successively have one on one side, and one on the other.

 where the technique starts to look a little bit more like the original Yael

What you're going to do first is to take the first scarf that you put on, in

 my case this green one, and you're going to echo this same line here with it.

Make a nice, uh, neat edge at the front here, and this is gonna come up.

 It's going to meet that same point in the middle of your forehead, or off to

 And again, this is another point in time where you can change the look of the wrap.

 If you start twisting earlier, closer to the top of your head, it'll look

 different than if you start twisting later, when it's already halfway down

 in over on the side here, into one of the other layers that's already there.

 the easiest way to tuck it, is into a pre-existing place, rather than

And then just find any stray ends that got away from you, and find a place to put them.

 And in this video, I'm going to take you through the process of inspecting the wear points

 in these driveshafts, as well as where the different components are located.

 You've heard me mention in previous videos the term engineering predictability.

 You can expect what I discuss here to cover most driveshafts from the mid-60s right up

 Let's start by talking about each one of the significant wear points on a Mercedes driveshaft

 These units are mounted on both the front and the rear end of the driveshaft.

 And they are designed to soften vibrations between the transmission and the driveshaft

 These are probably the most common wear item on the driveshaft assembly.

 They should be inspected and replaced if they show any cracking.

 You cannot believe how many reports I've had of significant failure, even transmission

 The driveshaft is made up of two sections, a short front section and a long rear section.

 And between the two sections is what we call the center bearing carrier.

 But the center bearing carrier is made up of a rubber mount that has a certain amount

 And inside this rubber mount is a bearing that supports the center of the driveshaft.

 You'll find this rubber mount often is cracked or torn around the edges.

 But it's easy to get under the car and inspect for tears in the rubber mount.

 The only way you can really inspect the bearing is to remove the driveshaft and check it for

 With the driveshaft drop down or on the workbench, you can grab a hold of this center bearing

 Note here this bearing feels tight and you may be fooled that it's okay.

 But you really need to spin it and listen for noise inside the bearing.

 That's a good sign that bearing is all dried out and it will need to be replaced.

 This is the last thing that wears out on these driveshafts and is generally only a problem

 You can take a hold of both ends of the driveshaft and move them to feel for any notchiness and

 also rotate back and forth to see if you can detect any play in the bearings inside the

 If you feel any play, you're going to have to replace the universal joint.

 I mentioned earlier in the video that these two sections of the driveshaft can be separated.

 And any time you remove the driveshaft and start working on it, you do have to be careful.

 These driveshaft assemblies are dynamically balanced together at the factory.

 In fact, if you look closely here, you can see a balanced weight on the short section

 and if I rotate this section, you can see a balanced weight here.

 So it's very important that the front section always go on the same position or you will

 have an out of balance condition and the vibration will be significant when you drive the car.

 Let me explain what I do to prevent an out of balance condition on the driveshaft.

 Even before I start removing it from the car, I'm going to mark it so just in case I drop

 The best way I found to mark the driveshaft is to first clean off the excess dirt and

 use masking tape and run a straight piece of masking tape down along the long section

 Once I have the tape in place, I'll go ahead and tear it at the center bearing carrier.

 You can see here that I've got tape remaining on the long and short sections.

 If I reinstall it and I'm only off one tooth, it's very obvious by looking at the tape that

 Now I'm going to rotate it one tooth, push it on, there you can see the tape is lined

 I know you're going to have to get under your own car to inspect your driveshaft components.

 I did this on the workbench to make it easy for me and for you to see what's going on.

 Changing the flex discs, that can be done leaving the driveshaft in the car, but there

 We do provide a driveshaft replacement kit complete with instructions on our website.

 The center bearing carrier and bearing itself is difficult to replace.

 That will mean you'll need to take the whole driveshaft out, get it on a workbench, and

 use a couple special tools that I include in my driveline center bearing replacement

 Hi, I'm Chad Grant, Executive Chef at a Parateef restaurant and bar in Woodbury.

 Middle of the winter, especially us Midwestern Northland people,

 But we can always preserve a little bit of flavor with a real simple technique

 And this is as simple as it gets for making tomato sauces at home

 You don't want to go too much, but you do want to season pretty aggressively.

 and not quite as much with the pepper, but you want them to be seasoned.

 So you go over the top and just season the open side with salt and pepper.

 it's okay to use an extra virgin olive oil, one of the better, more expensive ones.

 In an ingredient like this where we're really going to taste the tomato

 and the olive oil flavor, it's okay to use the more expensive stuff, the extra virgin.

 And just not too much because some of it goes off of the tomato,

 From there, you're going to go into a 350-degree oven for about 20 minutes,

 And from here, you can throw these right in your blender after this and just puree them.

 And if you throw that in the blender and puree it, you have yourself a tomato sauce,

 which can be used for any purposes that tomato sauce is used for,

 If you don't want to puree them, you can just rough chop over them,

 But this is a way to bring out a lot of tomato flavor from tomatoes

 Today's recipe is Indian cuisine, the very popular tandoori chicken.

 Today I'm going to show you the easiest step to make your own tandoori chicken.

 At the same time, you need plain yogurt, some ginger garlic paste.

 The spices here are garam masala, turmeric powder, salt, black pepper, red chili powder.

If you want to use your own spices that you like, you can go ahead with that as well.

 So first what you're going to do with the chicken is that you're going to make a few slices.

Because we're going to stuff a little bit of the spices in here.

 On this other small bowl here, I have squished about two lime juice with the spoon.

So half a teaspoon of salt, half a teaspoon of red chili powder.

 Next, once you mix everything of the first marination spice, you're going to take a little bit and just add where you made the cuts on the meat.

 In another bowl like this or a pot, what you're going to do is I squish the half of lime into this.

You don't want to use the liquidy part because this is going to give a lot of water while you're cooking this.

 I added about four tablespoons of yogurt, the hard side of it, not the liquidy part.

 Next, we're going to add two tablespoons of ginger garlic paste.

So I'm using half of a teaspoon of black pepper and one teaspoon of garam masala.

Salt I'm going to add a little bit because I already had on the first marination too.

 Once you mix all the spices together, I'm going to add a pinch of food coloring, the red coloring.

 And if you don't want to use all the spices in the beginning that I showed you, you're more than welcome to use ready-made tandoori chicken spices or masala.

 It's time to mix the first marinated chicken here, all of them.

 Once you mix everything for marination, you're going to add about two tablespoons of oil and mix it again.

 So in one of the baking dishes here, I have placed a foil here.

 You don't need to have any oil in this because you already mixed it with the chicken.

 So I'm going to place the tandoori chicken into oven at 450F right now.

 So I just want to show you guys some parts that you can see the spices are getting into water.

 So I saved the remaining of my sauce here, the marination of chicken tandoori.

 I'm just going to go ahead and cover the parts that you can see the skin.

 And then you can let this get to cook again for another half an hour until all this water gets absorbed as you can see here.

 So I have flipped this one more time to the back side to spread some more remaining of the sauce within the half an hour of the cooking time.

 Sometimes when we go riding we find little uphills, maybe in the dunes if we go into

 the Kalahari area, or maybe if we get the opportunity to ride in the Swakopmund area,

 And what is key again with the sand is to choose your line and also to choose the day

 Normally what you find with sand is that before 9 o'clock in the mornings and after 5 o'clock

 So if you have to ride sand and you want to have fun, make sure you choose the right time

 Choose the right line and make sure that you stay loose on the bike, you focus on where

 And the key important safety aspect is once you go up, you need to know what waits for

 Specifically with sand, sand dunes, you sometimes find that the approach is nice and easy, but

 on the other side, if you don't go and have a look or you don't know by somebody else

 that's told you what's happening there, you might find that you get into a ditch or you

 In some cases you don't have the run up that you want, so you need to make sure you choose

 the right line, you apply the right amount of power, you body position your ski and if

 you have to dab, you need to dab, but make sure you get right to the top.

 The other option is that you can start from the beginning where you have a proper run

 With a proper run up, it's easier to plan because what you want to do is to have the

 As you get to the top and you make the corner, you apply the basic techniques of the weight

 on the outside, outside elbow up and as you go down, you move your weight backwards and

 a good application of the back and front brake and rear brake helps you to get down while

 Once you get to the top and you have to turn on the other side, again, we look to the left,

 elbow up on the outside, weight on the outside, we get the weight on the outside by bending

 As we go down, weight on the outside and get your bum to the back so your weight can go

 One of America's favorite comfort foods, potato soup, is served everywhere from steakhouses to country diners.

 Hi, I'm Chef Jason Hill, and today we're making a creamy potato soup recipe that's dressed up with smoked Gouda cheese.

 First take one edge off, turn it over, take the next edge off, turn it over,

 Two carrots that I've diced, two celery stalks, and one small diced onion.

 Now that I've prepped all of my ingredients for this soup, I turn my stock pot on medium high.

 I'm going to melt the butter down, and we're going to add the celery, onion, and carrot.

 Now that the butter's melted, I'm going to add the onion, carrot, and celery,

 and we're going to cook this down until the onions are translucent.

 After three minutes of stirring this mix, let's add our potatoes,

 we're going to stir in the roux one tablespoon at a time to get it to thicken.

 You want to whisk that as soon as you drop it in to avoid any lumps.

 Okay, you can see the consistency there that it's thickened up.

 a steakhouse secret to that velvety texture is processed cheese, such as Velveeta.

 Now we're going to slowly stir in the cheese, melt it down, and we'll be ready to eat.

 My last step before enjoying this wonderful soup is to hit it with some fresh cracked pepper.

 OK, I'm just going to demonstrate how to put the R100RS screen on using some of these little

 They're an interference fit, so you've got to push them in, you've got to get the right

 In about a hundred, at least a hundred thousand Ks of riding this bike, or bikes like it,

 They're sturdy, they're cheap, they're reproducible, they're reusable, they do the job.

 just about three cups of diced onions, and five cloves of minced garlic.

 the flavor of this chili from the chocolate to the beer and the coffee.

 Here's one cup of strongly brewed coffee and 12 ounces of beer.

 Wendy's on Guam in Egania and they had some really good chili so chili and a

 In goes a tablespoon of unsweetened cocoa powder, 1 quarter cup of light

 brown sugar, 3 quarters of a tablespoon of ground cumin, 1 and 1 half teaspoons

 of ground coriander, 2 teaspoons of dried oregano, 4 tablespoons of ground chili

 tomato saucy as most chilies and that's because it's got some unique ingredients.

 Today I'm going to be showing you how to replace your LCD digitizer on your Galaxy S6 Edge.

 After it is powered off, you're going to need a heat gun or a hair dryer.

 Once the back glass is hot, what you're going to do is get a suction cup.

 I'm slowly going to put a guitar pick and slowly start to slide it across.

 The easiest way to get the side bezel off, put your thumb at the white sticker.

 You're slowly going to pull the bezel back with your index finger.

 I'm going to remove the battery, LCD, and the front-facing camera.

 There's going to be one flex cable for the charging port onto the back right here.

 Instead of getting only the LCD, I would get the whole assembly because it makes the job

 I'm going to place the motherboard down, making sure all the flex cables are on top.

 After it is placed down, I'm going to connect the bottom flex cable, LCD flex cable, earpiece

 When you connect the flex cables, you should feel like a little snap.

 After connecting the connectors, I'm going to get the back bezel.

 The best way is to place your phone in from the bottom, make sure your charging port goes

 That's how you change your Krag Digitizer LCD on your Galaxy S6 or Galaxy S6 Edge.

 If this video has helped you, don't forget to hit the like and subscribe button.

 This video goes out to my little brothers who asked me to do ... Well, they asked for

 They are automatically going to reach for the takeout menu or go through the drive-thru

 It's really, really easy to have some things on hand to make that are very healthy, minimal

 number of ingredients because I like minimal ingredients, only the ones you put in the

 These are some things you can get and have in your pantry or in your freezer.

 Just make sure that whatever brand you get, ideally get organic.

 What you do is you put your beans in the pot and then you need some source of protein.

 In this case, there's a rotisserie chicken that we've been hacking at.

 For my little source of protein, I've got some chicken that I just diced up.

 Save this and use it tomorrow for some kind of lunch concoction or just keep it in the

 If you don't have chicken around, good old canned tuna in the beans.

 Or you can get the canned chicken just to have on hand in case of an emergency.

 If you haven't had a chance to get to the grocery store, you've got some form of lean

 Then, you can go to town with other vegetables, what we like to call weeds, whether you're

 Then you add in your freebies, what I like to call freebies, all your salsas.

 If you have some jalapenos, some of those jar jalapenos, chop those up and stick them

 If dairy is a good thing for you, I just adore a little feta cheese on it.

 This whole thing, the way I've cooked it right here, is about 500 calories.

 This is easily a couple of helpings for a big guy who's going to want to feel like he

 While you're cooking through, you're enjoying your glass of wine, because men get two glasses

 Most guys are going to do a 2,000 calorie a day diet to lose weight.

 It's not Chef Chang's House of Pain, which is full of chemicals.

 Now I'm going to go cook this, because it's going to be delicious.

 If you have a garden or you go to the farmers market, lettuces and other leafy greens are

 So we want to get all the dirt off and we do that by filling a basin or a tub full of

 You really don't want to do this in your sink because your sink could have some bacteria

 So we're going to dump our greens in the basin and swish them around quite a bit.

 You might want to trim some of the ends off as you go, pulling out any discolored leaves,

 leaves that have some insect damage on them, you want to get those out of there as well.

 Move them in that water to loosen any particles of dirt that are in between the leaves.

 You're going to do this until your water is clear and you can see my water is very dark.

 Plain water will clean your fruits and vegetables to a safe level.

 When you pour the water out of your basin after your final rinse, you shouldn't feel

 You shouldn't wash your fruits or vegetables until you're ready to eat them.

 If you would like to wash your lettuce a few hours ahead and store it, put it loosely in

 Put a paper towel in so it can absorb some of the moisture and then place this in the

 Today I'm going to show you how to make Boston Market Creamed Spinach.

 I like to use a white onion because I think they're a little bit more milder and sweeter.

 We're also going to use a rue, so we're going to need butter, flour, and a little bit of

 We're going to use a little bit of sour cream for some richness.

 As you can see, we don't have very many ingredients in here at all.

 So the first thing we need to do is we need to go ahead and take a little bit of our butter

 And then we're going to saute our two tablespoons of onions until they're nice and translucent.

 Our onions are nice and fragrant now, so that's another way you know they're fully

 I went ahead and added a couple of tablespoons more of butter to make our rue.

 We're going to let that melt and we're going to go ahead and add in our flour.

 And when it gets all nice and melted, we're going to cook it for about another minute

 or so, so that the flour cooks fully and it doesn't leave you with a raw flavor.

 Okay, so our mixture has cooked for just about a minute, so it's just perfect right now.

 We're going to stir this until it gets nice and thick and then we're going to add in a

 So while this is going on, you may need to turn up your heat just a little bit.

 Sometimes I find if I turn up my heat, it'll thicken up just a little bit more quickly.

 And when it becomes nice and smooth, go ahead and add in the remaining amount of your milk.

 Okay, so while the rue is making, go ahead and add some salt and pepper.

 All right, so when your sauce comes together nice and thick, we're going to go ahead and

 We're going to stir it in and then we'll add in our sour cream.

 We'll let it heat through and we'll be ready to serve this one up.

 Be sure to subscribe to this YouTube channel so you can see what's cooking next.

 And drop me a comment down below of what recipe you'd like to see.

 If you are traveling a lot for work or for pleasure, it's not that hard actually to eat

 It's really light, it doesn't take a lot of space and it's extremely easy to operate.

 When I go to a hotel, I just take it with me and today I'm cooking the Bila's Broth

 I'm going to show you how easy it is to stay healthy on the road.

 All you have to do is fill it with water and the manual contains approximate cooking

 times and also on the back here it's telling you how many minutes you have to set it up

 That's one of the ingredients of the Bila's Broth, so that's what I set it for.

 One trick is over here, there's a water level gauge, minimum, maximum.

 One trick that I learned is that the water that's left after you finished cooking, it

 So do not add too much water, just enough to cover that minimum thing.

 And you can get this at any big grocery store, even Walmart on the road.

 And lots of fiber, which is really good for digestion, as you know.

 Well, probably that's a bit too much, but these are beans, which are rich in good natural

 So your weight goes back to normal, you know, if you still remember what normal is.

 Because I'm sorry to say, but I see a lot of truckers on the road that are really overweight,

 so maybe this might help some people, you know, to start feeling slightly better about

 And I do the same thing using my handy knife that I bought at Walmart for seven bucks.

 This is Henry Beeler, the famous doctor who refused to prescribe drugs to his patients

 He was recommending, like, zucchini was his favorite ingredient for vegetable steamed

 Just this on top so that it adds some, you know, some taste to it.

 The best part is that you don't have to stir anything or turn it over.

 And I can use either this one, but I bought a special, you know, bowl here.

 Oh, I even have stuff left over so I can come back and reuse my bowl.

 The famous Beeless broth cooked in a Black & Decker Handy Steamer.

 We've got the headlight out now, so basically you've got several bulbs in here.

 This is your main beam, this is your dip beam, this is your indicator.

 Now both bulbs in here are H7 bulbs, and basically they're retained within this rear cover here.

 Now to get this rear cover off you've got to just gently pry the release stick out of the way.

 Careful not to break that because that's quite fragile and it can be a bit awkward.

 Then you've got these two little clips here and if you push them down, that then releases this back cover.

 You've got these two little prongs on the bottom of the cover that locate into these two little grooves here.

 You release the top clips and then it just flips out of the way.

 They're both the same, so this one here is the main beam, this one's the dip beam.

 If you just push this little clip up at the bottom, you can remove that and that will remove the connector.

 If you look on you'll see that at the top you've got the bigger tab and then you've got the tab at the top.

 When you're handling a headlight bulb, don't touch the glass because the oils and dirt on your finger can go onto the glass.

 We're going to upgrade these on our car to the Osram Nightbreaker Plus, which are road legal bulbs, but they're much higher power.

 There's two little slots here that need to run on these two guides here.

 That makes sure you line it all up, get it all square and then push that in place.

 It's as easy as that, it's the same process and they're both halogen H7 bulbs.

 Mother's Day is fast approaching and I am running out of time to make a bunch of cards

 I kind of had the idea in the back of my head, inspired from one of the little outfits my

 So I grabbed some purple Doodlebug cardstock which has some texture to it and used my little

 Then I'm inking up this butterfly stamp from the Paper Smooches Pretty Mama stamp set.

 I'm inking it up with MFT Sweet Tooth pigment ink, but any white pigment ink would work.

 I'm stamping it onto the cardstock just randomly, stamping it off here and there so it's not

 Then getting all of this out of the way so I can add some white embossing powder.

 I got this container at Michaels, it's actually meant for photos.

 The container itself isn't good, it just doesn't seal properly, so I have embossing powder

 I still have it all over me, I haven't had time to clean it up.

 I used a cable clip to keep the spoon up, but even then the spoon gets covered in embossing

 I think it's just way easier to open the container, dump it over a coffee filter like I usually

 do and funnel it back into the little container that it comes with.

 It might work better in better containers and better scoops, but I'm just not a fan.

 I find it's way faster and simpler to use the coffee filters like I always do.

 Once I did all that and heated it up, no matter what, even using the powder tool, there's

 Here I just grabbed my Swiffer cloth that I've had on my desk for weeks now and folded

 over to make sure I didn't have any shimmer over there, and just wiped off any of the

 Like I said, when you're embossing over textured cardstock, it's really hard to not get little

 If it was a lot of speckles here and there, I wouldn't go with it.

 I grabbed a strip of orange textured cardstock and inked up the Mom stamp from the same set

 She actually has a pair of coral coloured pants that went with her little purple shirt,

 but I didn't have a coral shade of cardstock and I wanted to keep the same types of cardstock

 So I just went with orange, because orange and purple go together quite well.

 It's an unexpected colour combo, especially for a Mother's Day card, but I thought it

 So I embossed the sentiment and then I just used my scissors to trim it down and then

 cut a little notch in the middle just to have a spot to eyeball so I can cut a little flag

 I was kind of thinking this would be a good card to make if you're like me and totally

 forget that Mother's Day is coming and you don't have time and you want to make this

 So yeah, someone is sitting on my lap again, and she's getting a little tired of me doing

 So anyway, I also cut down a piece of the white sprinkles vellum and I cut it to 4 1⁄4

 and 5 1⁄2 inches, so it's a full card front size, and then just adhered the purple cardstock

 to that and then grabbed my little scoring board there so I can score my heavyweight

 And then once I'm done that, I'm going to adhere the card front, and I put the adhesive

 behind the purple cardstock so I don't adhere all the way to the edge because with vellum

 it's really hard to get away with not seeing the adhesive, so you always want to try and

 So once I've got the adhesive on, I'm going to adhere that to my card, and then to finish

 it off I'm just going to ink up that butterfly again with a couple of Memento inks, which

 I used Grape Jelly and Tangelo Memento inks, which match the cardstock quite well.

 So just inked up the stamp and stamped it full strength and then I'd stamp it off here

 and there so I've got a couple shades of purple and then orange.

 So as always, there will be a link below to my blog post and links to all the supplies

 Thank you guys so much for watching and I will see you all in the next video.

 Ok guys, so I went ahead and I colored in the tongue with my highlighter.

 And then I went in and I took my handy dandy black sharpie and I outlined the teeth, the

 So just go ahead and outline the collar if you haven't already done that, the tie, and

 So what I did is I took a light rosy pink Crayola and I'm going to just outline this

 Ok so just go ahead and do that pink, then color these in and go ahead and highlight

 And once you've colored in the black, done this, highlighted that, colored in the tie,

 colored that, and highlighted the teeth black, you go ahead and start my favorite part which

 And to color in Spongebob, you gotta have a yellow, this is my yellow that I'm going

 And if I just make a mark on him, you'll see that it's a very bright yellow.

 See, I just colored in a little bit before to show you how bright it's going to be.

 So when you go ahead, don't color where the squiggly line is, stop there, ok?

 So just go ahead and outline the tie, the collar, color that in, and the teeth, and

 Now that you have colored the yellow, you can see that it's slowly coming along, ok?

 You're going to outline this black, remember stop, and then continue out through here.

 So let me get my brown, my Crayola, my brown clay pencil, and I'm just going to slowly

 So we're going to stop at that line, but I'm just going to color that little piece to show

 And you're going to outline this, you're going to line, this line is going to be black.

 Once you're going to do that brown, see how his mouth in the poster is brown, like this

 So it's not going to be the same brown, it's going to be like a mahogany or a lighter brown,

 Ok, so you're just going to color that, see it's kind of like a mahogany, and that's a brown.

 So just go ahead and color those two, and then I'll continue with the rest.

 Now that you have colored the mouth mahogany and the bottom brown, you have your Spongebob.

 So now we have two identical Spongebob's mirroring each other with that poster.

 So you did a great job, thanks for watching, comment, rate, and subscribe.

 Yo, what up guys, Jacob here, and I'm just going to bring you a little quick video on

 This right here is a veiled chameleon, about 6-7 months old right now, and his name is

 And if you'd like to know why his name is Papa Gert, go ahead and comment that below.

 Now, to start off, this video is going to be about how and what to feed your chameleon.

 To start off, as a little baby, I like to feed mine just crickets or mealworms.

 Preferably crickets because mealworms don't really give them the better diet.

 I'll show you some videos of him eating some mango in a second and show you how to feed

 Yo, so basically how you feed a chameleon a mango or any other fruit is you take the

 fruit and kind of rub it against his lips like I just did, and he'll start opening his

 Once he starts opening his mouth, you kind of shove the fruit in a little bit, and there

 Now, you can also feed your chameleon crickets, which is pretty much all I really feed mine

 What I put on my crickets is a calcium powder, which pretty much just gives him more calcium,

 I'll show you a video a few ways on how to feed your chameleon the crickets and how to

 Okay, so the way I like to feed my chameleon his crickets for the most part is with a coffee

 Basically what I do is, one second, coffee cup, and big cage full of crickets.

 I like to get the bigger cage because it obviously holds more crickets, and I don't have to pay

 Basically how I feed my chameleon is I take the cup and I put some calcium down on the

 I don't know if you can see the calcium down there, but there's a whole bunch of calcium

 So when I go to feed the chameleon, I take the black tube, wiggle it around, and then

 I usually put it in a spot in his cage that he likes to be around, but it's not in his

 So he'll go in his nice spot, he'll look down, and he'll see this cup and there's crickets

 My chameleon will usually come over and eat from the cup and just eat them there.

 If any crickets ever get out of the cup, it's not that big of a deal.

 I also like to feed mine by hand, which you really have to get your chameleon comfortable

 It's just something to, if you're new with chameleons, when you first get your chameleon,

 I really stress to hold him a lot and try hand feeding him every once in a while until

 eventually he just catches on that you're a safe person and you're not a predator.

 Okay, so if I'm going to feed my chameleon by hand, usually I start out with the cup

 and there's crickets inside this cup with the powder already over them.

 Now I'm going to reach inside and grab the cricket, kind of get the calcium all over

 them by shaking the cup and then I'll hold it in my finger, kind of by the butt, and

 barely holding it so that when he sticks his tongue out to get it, it doesn't attach to

 Just get him by the butt like that, maybe by a couple of the legs and he already sees

 He has one infected eye, that's the one you're looking at right now, so you can't really

 The powder sometimes clogs it, like, I don't really know how to explain it, but their tongue

 slips right by it a few times, so it might take them a few tries to get it.

 My chameleon actually takes a while because his infected eye, can't really see the chameleon,

 or the, sorry, the cricket, so he keeps on trying to find it and make sure he has a good

 And you'll have some powder on your hands, but it's not that big of a deal.

 So the reason why I obviously don't feed him, hand feed him too much is obviously because

 It's just easier for him to eat them out of the cage or out of the cup.

 So that's all for today's video, and go ahead and subscribe for Papa Gert, and again if

 you want to know why I named him Papa Gert, go ahead and comment that.

 All you're getting is some chameleon tips, I'm getting some snakes soon, so I'll have

 some snake tips, I'll be getting some leopard geckos, some crested geckos, I'm getting a

 whole bunch of different things, and I already know about a whole bunch of them, so if you

 do have a question, go ahead and email me down below in the description.

 If I don't know the answer, I'll look it up and I'll find all the stuff you need to know

 And definitely subscribe to my channel because I'll be posting a lot about snakes, lizards,

Anybody that's eaten pork chops will tell you, that's pretty good.

 Let me bring you over here and show you how we spice up a pork chop for frying.

 If it's going to be meat and I fry it, I'm going to put some Italian seasoning on it, some onion powder, some garlic powder, a little salt and a little pepper.

 Now, pork is already, this is a pepper, pork is pretty salty all by itself.

Now we'll roll them in some flour and put them in our oil and it'll be wonderful.

You can see that I put as much oil, about the same thickness as your pork chop.

Not so they're covered, but just so it's right to the top of them when you put them in.

 We'll put them in there and flip them over a couple times and they'll be done.

 Remember, a couple drops of water when the oil is cold and as it heats up, it'll crackle and pop.

When it stops crackling and popping, then I know it's hot and ready to go.

It stopped crackling and popping, then we know we're ready to start frying.

 Because usually when you're burning something, you hear something.

After I spiced it up, we just lay it down in our oil just like that.

 Alright, I always keep my oil on high whenever I'm heating it up.

And then after I start frying, I turn it back just one notch to medium high.

But as long as my oil is frying and looking like it's bubbling up, then it's fine.

 Now if you want to deep fry these, you can deep fry these the same way.

 And flip them around a couple times and whenever they're floating, they're done.

 Remember when you're in between batches of frying, you take out your first batch, put it on a paper towel.

 Because you just took the heat out of the pan with those pork chops.

 Just until it gets back to temperature before you put your next batch in.

 If you don't put your next batch in and the oil is not ready to fry, you want to look at the temperature.

 You'd be amazed at how much that temperature drops when you take out that first batch.

 Alright, there we have some lima beans in the rice to go along with our fried pork chops.

 Maybe a little cornbread on the side, it's all nicely blackened.

 The next step for making our tamales is we're going to go ahead and make the chili paste

 and what I've got here, now these are hatched chilies, you can use any of the dried chilies

 to do is you're going to cut the stem off and then rinse these and take out the seeds

 and go ahead and put them in water and you just take it and cut it like so, open it

 for about 20 minutes and as you can see they're very, very soft.

So what we're going to do is we're going to actually be putting these

 in a blender and we're going to set them aside and we're going to continue to cook

We have our chili peppers in the blender, we're going to go ahead and

 add our minced garlic, our salt, our crushed oregano and then half of the water or the

 liquid that we cooked our chili pods in, about that much and then we're going to blend

Alright, you heat your oil up and what we're doing is we're actually going to be

 browning the flour so you just kind of mix it in, so you want to get the lumps out.

 we've added our sauce back into the browned flour and then you just want to stir it and

 to 3 minutes and that will get all that flour in there and you don't want to stop stirring

 if it's not hot enough for you in flavor, because remember you're mixing it with meat

 and the masa, you can go ahead and add cayenne pepper to taste.

Once it has a little after taste or after kick, then stop because it'll grow.

 Believe me, it's going to refrigerate overnight with the meat so the flavor will intensify

Alright, now I'm going to go ahead and mix the meat in it and we're going

 Today I'm going to be showing you how I created this look using some new products that I am

 just in love with and some old products that I've been using for a while.

 I'm going to prime my eyelid with the HD Elf Concealer in the color Fair to mute my eyelid

 Now that I'm finished with that, I'm going to start with my eyeshadow.

 Now these colors that I'm going to put on my lid have no name and the palette that I

 But I got it on ebay, I got 88 colors in the palette and it was $10 so I will link down

 So I'm sorry in advance that I don't have a specific name for these colors but I will

 So next I'm going to just finish off this look with some eyeliner and I got this eyeliner

 It's from Ruby Kisses and it's like $2 so it's really good eyeliner actually, I really

 Moving on to my brows, I'm using this control freak from NYX to shape them and then I'm

 going to use my Anastasia brow tool and the beauty bakery brownie dip to shape them and

 Then I'm going to take my HD elf concealer and highlight under and over my brow.

 Moving on to my foundation, I'm going to be using this cover FX natural finish oil free

 foundation in the color G60 and then use my infallible pro matte foundation in the color

 I really like the finish of both of these products, as you guys know I use my infallible

 a lot and I haven't actually got any Tarte foundation in a minute so I wanted to try

 I'm like just head over heels for it so yeah I really really like it.

 So now that I'm done blending that, I'm going to use my cover FX highlight and contour palette

 in the color medium deep and using the color number 4 to contour my cheekbones, my forehead,

 So another new product that I got is this Age Renewal dark spot eraser or dark circle

 It's from Maybelline and you can get it at Walmart, Target, wherever your local drugstore is.

 I saw a couple other people using it and I wanted to try it and I'm glad I did because

 So next I'm going to set my highlight and use the color banana from the NYX highlight

 and contour palette and highlight under my eyes, do a little bit of reverse contouring

 as they call it and highlight the under parts of my contour and just make everything look

 nice and clean and precise girl because you gotta look cute or whatever.

 I'm done blending that, I'm going to take my illuminating powder from cover FX in the

 color G60 and just go over my highlight and my contour just to make everything look more

 Moving on to my highlight, I'm going to highlight my temples, my cheekbones, my nose and my

 cupid's bow with the ultra poro mania from NYX in the color mink and I love this stuff,

 it's so awesome and it's really really good and cheap so you gotta check that out too.

 Switching back into my palette, I'm going to be using this sparkly orange color just

 Along with that I'm going to use that cranberry color that I used before and then I'm going

 to highlight with the color mink that I used for my highlight and my tear duct and then

 I'm going to use a black eyeliner pencil for my waterline as well.

 Moving on to my lips, I'm going to use this lip liner from Jordana in the color baby berry

 and baby berry and outline my lips with it and then I'm going to be using the color sin

 I really love this color though because it's so pigmented and it just reminds me of cranberries.

 Almost forgot to finish off my look with mascara but that is the finished look!

 Please don't forget to give it a thumbs up and I will see you guys next time!

 Always begin by applying an eyeshadow primer to the eyes to ensure that the eyeshadow will

 I'm first going to pick up this beautiful color called Riviera which is a beautiful

 first going to spray my brush with a mixing medium or water, going in with this color

 called Jardine which is a gorgeous peachy coralie color and packing this onto the outer

To define the crease, I'm going to go in with this stunning coppery

 color called Khan and I'm going to use windshield wiper motions to apply this color.

 lose a little bit of the coralie peachy shade so I'm just going to pack a little bit more

 Soleil which has undertones of purple, I'm just going to define my crease a little bit

 more and also the outer V. This will give the look a little bit more dimension.

 shadow to highlight the brow bone and then once again blending everything together.

 this next step is optional but I'm going to intensify the colors to my liking.

 on a little bit more Jardine onto the outer 1 third of the eye, picked up a little bit

 more of Khan to my crease and then applying a little bit more of Soleil to my crease to

 define it and also the outer V. And then once again blending everything together.

 in again with the shadow Soleil and I'm just going to use a pencil brush and sweep this

 for the eyes I'll be lining them with this Inglot Jaw Liner which is seriously super

 pigmented and I'll just be winging out the ends just a little bit.

To highlight the inner tear ducts and bring in some light I'll be using Saint

 Tropez and then lining my bottom waterline with a brown pencil.

For the face I first primed it with the Too Faced Primed and Poreless

For the foundation I mixed my Kat Von D with the Dior Cosmetics BB Illumination

 Plus which gives the skin such a beautiful glow and here I'm using a dampened sponge.

 Now I'm just going to go back with the pencil brush and some of the brown shadow since I

 For some color to the cheeks I'll be going in with a Mauve Pink Blush which has some

 shimmer and as my highlighter I'll be using the MAC Extra Dimension Skin Finish.

 Melted Coral Lippie which is seriously so beautiful I will be doing a full review on

 Today's video will showcase the installation of VoloLites onto your motorcycle.

 Your license plate will slide left to right under the enclosed circuit boards,

 along the top guide rails until it hits the guide stop on the right.

 You can loosen the bottom screws holding the circuit board covers if you need extra space.

 Be sure to check with local laws before altering your plate size.

 place the front cover over the plate and secure with the four screws on the back.

 Secure your VoloLites with license plate onto motorcycle's license plate bracket.

 Your VoloLites runs on the 12 volt DC power that illuminates your license plate.

 Disconnect this power from the bulb and separate the positive from negative leads from each other

 Using the included quick connectors, connect the black VoloLites wire to the black wire from your motorcycle.

 VoloLites will begin a short flash sequence to let you know it is operating properly.

 After the flash sequence, find a smooth level driveway where you can lean the motorcycle

 because the accelerometer needs to set itself relative to gravity.

 We included a new Nudonium magnet with the product to operate the magnetic switch.

 There's no moving parts and it allowed us to ensure a watertight seal around the electronics for increased durability.

 Pass the magnet included with VoloLites over the bottom brake lens of the front brake.

 Pass the magnet included with VoloLites over the bottom brake lens of the product

 while keeping the motorcycle in the upright position until you see it flash.

 Once you do, take the magnet away while keeping the motorcycle in the upright position.

 You will see two more flashes letting you know the product has been calibrated.

 One of our Kickstarter backers recommended we have a mode to allow early brake indication

 You'll remember in default operation there is alternating flash for normal braking

 In stealth mode, your VoloLite still acts as an early indication for engine braking and downshifting

 With the power on, hold the magnet in position at the bottom left corner

 We hope you enjoyed our video on the installation and calibration of VoloLites.

 Today's hair idea was inspired by Lord of the Rings and that very famous Arwen braid.

 So I think the story is that Liv Tyler had her hair in this fabulous multi-stranded braid

 The only thing that we're really working off of are these two kind of blurry images that

 are on Google and I feel like they've inspired lots of braiders online to sort of recreate

 So today I decided I was going to put forth my own version of this braid and hopefully

 I've started with the center parting and I'm going to section out some hair for lace braids

 Most of this hairstyle is just a regular sort of three-stranded braid but I am going

 to do a French braid for a portion of it and for these braids in the front I'm creating

 lace braids and if you're not familiar with those techniques I'll have my braid dictionary

 I think I also want to mention that this parting kind of extends from the top of my head to

 When you get to this point on the head where you're kind of by your ear you're still going

 And you can see that I'm trying to keep my hand balanced here because eventually these

 So here I've taken my loose hair and I've divided it in half and now I'm going to part

 Now with this section of hair I'm going to create another parting.

 I'm going to do a headband parting at the top of my headband parting out of my way.

 And I've got this panel, these two panels in the back I made another section and with

 these two I'm just going to make two simple three strand braids.

 I'm not going to French braid or anything like that I'm just going to gather into a

 With this last section of hair I'm going to draw it all back and smooth it into a ponytail

 And with the ponytail that you made from the top section you're going to split that in

 I've pinned the two lace braids kind of across each other and what I'm going to do is take

 this side, take one of the braids from the ponytail and one of the braids from the middle

 section and this braid here and I'm going to braid that into a three strand.

 I'm going to use this piece from the lace braid, one from the ponytail and one from

 the middle section to make another three strand braid on this side.

 Take these two guys, I'm going to criss cross them and stick a pin in and now I have four

 strands left so I'm just going to create a four strand braid with what's left over.

 I'll have some links to different videos that cover this braid in the underbar below.

 I'll also have links to my braid dictionary in case you're not familiar with lace braiding

 My friends at AllFreeCrochet.com asked me to show you how to make a holiday wreath for

 If you don't know how to crochet around objects like rings, you might want to review my tutorial

 For this part, I'm going to use Red Heart acrylic yarn because it's got body to it.

 You want something a little stiffer so it holds its shape well.

 This happens to be a gold ring, but you're not going to see it after the yarn is on it,

 I'm going to go through the center, pull up one loop, and then do a single crochet.

 Then I'm going to go around the entire ring with single crochet to make a foundation row

 When you get to the end, make sure all of your single crochets are facing outwards.

 You're going to go back into that very first stitch, pull one stitch through.

 Now the next row is going to be double crochet, so go ahead and chain two.

 And double crochet is where you yarn over once, put it over the hook once, go into the

 next single crochet, pull through two, and then pull through two.

 Okay, then you're going to do that in every single crochet over once.

 Go through a single crochet, pull through the first two, pull through the second two.

 Now if it starts to curl up on you, you're going to do an increase by doing two double

 So I guess that's going to be about every six or seven stitches you're going to have

 I finished my double crochet round, and now just like with the single crochet, you want

 to make sure all of your stitches are going outwards and not twisted.

 Then we're going to do what's called triple crochet or treble crochet.

 It's not that hard of a stitch, and it's a nice tall stitch, so we'll finally have it

 Okay, go ahead and finish off your, that's your double crochet start and end, so go ahead

 That will be our first treble crochet, so you get one for nothing there.

 We're going to go grab the thread, go through two, grab the yarn, go through two, grab

 Grab one, go through, grab through two, go through two, go through two.

 When you get to the end of the triple crochet row, you're going to join with a slip stitch

 Now if you want to, if you like the way that looks, you can end it right there, but I'm

 going to go ahead and do another ruffle around the top, but a decorative ruffle to mine.

 The way I'm going to do that is I'm going to do chain three, and then I'm going to do

 And just keep chaining three around, and I'm just going to make these little picots around

 Now I want you to think of this as your foundation wreath, and I'll talk about ways to decorate

 So that's a good foundation, and I picked this up at one of those dollar stores.

 I thought, you know what, that's going to look pretty cool hanging on my wreath there.

 Just to give you some ideas, you could also put candy canes, or little Christmas packages,

 or if you do bread dough, or gingerbread dough ornaments, you could put those on there.

 Well, I hope you have fun making your wreath, and happy holidays.

 If you've never had bangs before or you don't like the look of your current bangs, you can

 Let's take a look at a couple different kinds and the way that they're applied.

 To change up Nirvana's current style of short bangs, we're simply going to push them over

 We're going to use a little bit of hairspray to hold them in place.

 This is a piece that has all of the hair going towards the front.

 It has two snap clips and we're simply going to put it towards the back, slide them in

 It's that simple and she now has longer, swoop bangs that frame in her face.

 These bangs are easy to blend and easy to wear and easy to style.

 Since they're human hair, they can also be curled and smoothed in to any natural hairline.

 This piece is called a masterpiece and it has hair that goes towards the front as well

 To change Nirvana's current look, we're simply going to push the hair over to the side.

 Since this piece has three clips, one in the back and two in the front, we're going to

 Pulling her bangs back, we're going to snap the front clip underneath and then we're going

 Make sure that you don't push the clips towards the center as you snap them in, otherwise

 By using any of the premade fringe sets, it's easy and quick to change up your front hairline,

 It's so easy to create delicious meals with cool, creamy Philadelphia.

 Our mouth-watering recipes make quick, simple dishes with a tasty twist.

 This is a shellfish recipe that I grew up with, mussels arrabbiata.

 Today I'm adding a little twist, Philadelphia with chives, into the sauce.

 I've got some mussels here and I've got a hot pan to throw my mussels in.

 And all you need to do with these is cook them for about four or five minutes

 OK, I've got some basil here that's going to go into my tomato sauce,

 Don't chop it too much because the blade tends to bland the flavour.

 and just put a couple of tablespoons into this wonderful arrabbiata sauce.

 That chives with Philadelphia just needs to sort of marry a little bit

 And that is your cozze mussels arrabbiata with Philadelphia with chives

 Hi, I'm Ted from Everything Attachments and we're here today with a new product.

 A lot of the customers on Tractor By Ned have really been asking for a single lid grapple.

 We've always had our Wicked grapple with the two lids and it's done amazingly well.

 We've lightened it up to make it where the smaller compact tractors, even any tractor,

 just simply gets more lifting capacity as you make it lighter but stronger.

 I'll go over everything with the single lid that we've changed that's different than the

 double lid and try to give you, you know, there are a lot of things that a single lid

 grapple works at least as good as a double lid and it's definitely going to be cheaper.

 We've still left it to where we don't have big gussets on the front of our teeth here.

 A lot of the grapples start with a big Y piece here and that is one good way of keeping it

 The other way is these side plates and the metal that we're using, this is a grade 80 steel.

 It's super hard, that way we just put as little bend as we can so the compact tractors can

 actually rake through the ground, get the small roots out and things like that.

 We've left the really sharp teeth on it where you can pull and keep your debris inside.

 Along with the single lid, we've changed the cylinder which would have been two to one

 of course and it's a two and a half inch bore instead of a two inch bore which is going

 to give you a considerable amount more of push with the same amount of pressure.

 We've also changed the geometry just a little bit to actually give it more down pressure

 because you're using one cylinder for about the same amount of actual front spacing but

 So with the bigger bore and the extra stroke on the cylinder, the other's a four inch stroke,

 this is a five inch stroke, we're able to raise the height, change the geometry a little

 bit and give you the same amount of clamping force with one lid as two lids.

 We've also changed the opening on this is an extra six inches over the dual lid and

 we're able to do that because of the extra stroke on the cylinder.

 The metal that we were using for the Wicked grapple and just trying to keep the weight

 absolutely as low as we could had a five sixteenths thickness on the main time.

 But that particular thickness in a hard metal was hard to get all the time.

 So what we did was, because we have to use what's called a P&O which is oiled and pickled

 So what we did was we went to our common thickness which is three eighths.

 So it did add about 15 pounds back to the grapple and we've still taken more than that

 So the thickness has increased a little bit, the strength will be just a little bit more,

 we haven't really bent one yet but things have changed just a little bit there just

 On the single lid, it's got one pin that goes through the whole piece here giving you a

 If you've got a tractor that doesn't have your hook up directly behind the cylinder

 like most would with your hydraulic kit, if you've got a Kubota factory mount and

 it's way up on the arm, we need to know that so we can make you the proper length hoses

 With these unhooked I couldn't lift the lid and that's not a bad way of storing them with

 It shouldn't be on a super small tractor and every tractor that this goes on should have

 a standard universal quick attach that is available for that tractor.

 That's the only way we're going to build it except for the John Deere hitch which would

 That's what helps get our geometry right to give you the extra pressure.

 We've increased the thickness a little bit since we're going to have more pressure on

 one cylinder, we've increased the thicknesses here a little bit, put the braces on it.

 We've added another gusset here to keep this good and strong and rigid.

 Everything else about it is pretty much like our Wicked Root grapple always was.

 It'll save you some money and for a lot of what most people do, a single lid works great.

 This is the 66 inch and the only difference between the couple of the models is the width

 The 54 and 60 use one width of lid and the 66 and 72 use another width of lid.

 We hope that you'll make all your purchases and everything attachments.

 If you've got any problems on how you're going to hook up your hydraulics, we're ready to

 you my green fresh recipe today because a lot of people are asking me how do I

 find energy to train the way I'm training, how do I find energy to deal

 with my family and to you know just deal with my kids and I have three of those.

 So it's it's not an easy task unless you supercharge your body with great

 nutrients, with great nutrition plan and one of the recipes I follow regularly is

So we're gonna juice two cucumbers, three green apples, three limes

 This will just shoot, this will just shoot vitamins straight to my bloodstream.

 Yes, pulp is healthy but it's pretty much impossible to eat that much fiber, that

 morning and then I make my smoothie where I have a lot of fiber, a lot of

 So this drink is full of vitamin C, great anti-inflammatory ingredient, ginger.

 why I call it green fresh because all the ingredients are green and it smells

 first thing in the morning after I drink a lot of water because if you're familiar

 with my 7-day detox program I recommend to have water very first thing in the

 morning right after you wake up and then green juice and the rest of my great

 right after I make it and I seal it, put it in the refrigerator and have the rest

 and anti-inflammatory vitamins, minerals straight into my bloodstream.

 give me great energy, it'll boost me with great energy and I'll be ready to start

 my day and chase my kids around the house and work and train and all that.

So if you like this recipes, if you try it out and you like it, you might

 like my 7-day detox program because it's filled with great recipes, nice snacks,

 know if you like it and click at the link below if you would like to try my

 Okay, so we've talked about the fundamentals of deep frying, and now we're going to show

 you how to make perfectly crispy fantabulous French fries, just like I do in my restaurant.

 First thing you know about the potato that we're choosing here, these are russets.

 And the reason we choose these potatoes is because of their starch content.

 They have a higher starch content than say like a Yukon Gold or like a Red Bliss.

 We don't want waxy potatoes because they'll just kind of stay waxy.

 Okay, now that we have the perfect potato, now I'm going to show you how to make the

 It's a three-step process that I use in my restaurant, and I think a lot of chefs use

 This potato, you know, if you want to, you can take the skin off, but I think that's

 If you see like right here, there's a little like dark mark, that's okay.

 We don't like that end right there, so I'm just going to slice it off.

 And what happens to potatoes when you cut them, much like apples, is they oxidize.

 The water also, as you can tell right away, when I move this around, it starts to get

 In this episode we are going to make lemon tart, torta al limone.

 Many times I heard people saying, oh this cake is too sweet, or oh there is too much

 Well, unless you can't because of medical reasons, you should be eating your cake rich.

 And you should be eating the cake like an exciting child would eat it.

 So this is a very very very nice and rich cake full of passion.

 So to make the base we need 250 grams of flour, plain flour, 100 grams of sugar, 3 happy eggs,

 and 100 grams of butter, make sure it's not too hard, and 2 lemons.

 And one of the most important ingredients is the vanillin, vanillina, that you can find

 Place the flour and butter in a big salad bowl and mix it well with your hands until

 Now mix them very well with your hands until you get a sort of crumble.

 If you're using vanilla essence instead of vanillin, add a coffee spoon of it on the

 We're going to put the dough on the chopping board and make a nice ball.

 Massage the dough as much as possible and you will get the dough right.

 Now we're going to put it in the cling wrap and put it in the fridge for about one hour.

 You could make the dough more flat before placing it in the fridge, so it's actually

 So to make the cream, we need to get 350 grams of sugar, three eggs, 200 grams of butter

 You need to make sure you follow my instructions because cakes, it's very important that you

 For any other recipe that you make, any other cakes that you make, you need to follow the

 So we're going to cut the lemon in half and we want to get 75 ml of juice.

 Then mix the eggs well with sugar, lemon juice, then turn the stove on a medium heat.

 I like to use this tray because you can actually take this part out.

 You could melt the butter in a microwave for about 30 seconds and then spread it on the

 The way this is, the cake is not going to get stuck in the tray.

 With a fork, make deep holes on the base and on the edges and place it in the oven

 Wait about 10 minutes for the base to get cold and then we can put the cream inside.

 Now turn off the oven and put the tart back in the oven for about 20 minutes.

 The lemon cream should now be a little bit harder on top, so place it in the fridge once

 Well, let's say you have to go to someone else for dinner tonight and you don't know

 Well, this is easy, it's delicious, and everyone is going to love it.

 The lemon tart is now ready to be enjoyed, so let's try a little bit.

 Hi, Christine here with another very quick and simple card I made using my Cricut.

 Today I used Holiday Cakes cartridge although I don't have a Cricut cake, all

 of their cartridges fit in the Cricut expression and believe it or not they

 have some excellent images especially the phrases are excellent on all of the

 cake cartridges as well as the themes that they have and I just love this

 little license plate number one dad in the world appropriate for a Father's Day

 cut in half at 5 1⁄2 inches folded in half to get a standard A2 card.

 Then I'm just taking a standard black cardstock it is cut at 4 inches by 5 1⁄4

 through my cuddle bug using Swiss dots and before I put it down I found this

 really cute black and white ribbon and I'm just going to add a little bit of

 adhesive on both sides of the ribbon and I'm going to move the card out of the way

 for a second and I'm just going to put it maybe a third down down on the

 towards the bottom of the paper just like so make sure it's straight and all

 I'm going to do is take more adhesive and add it directly in the center of the

 cartridge and all I did was I did the base in white at 2 inches and then in

 black and it says number one dad in the world and I cut that out as well at 2

 inches and all I did was glue it together and then I did a little bit of

 doodling all around the number one dad and in the stars and all I'm going to

 do is take some foam tape and add it right directly on the cardstock just

 backing and I'm going to add it right in the center just like so.

 add some gems and believe it or not I got this really really good deal in a

 and I got them in almost every single color imaginable so I was very very

So all I'm going to do is take some of the black ones and add it right

 strings or the line but I'm going to use them as individual pieces and I just

 I did add using the white ones right in the holes of the license plate and then I took a tiny piece more of the ribbon and I'm going to add a little bit of adhesive right in the center of it just like so.

 All I'm going to do is fold it over so that it has a little bit of each sticking out and I'm just going to cut on an angle just each piece just like so.

 So it's cut on an angle and all I'm going to do is take a little bit of adhesive and add it to the ribbon just like so.

Now I'm not going to do this on camera but I doodled all the way around the edge of the card just to give it a little bit of extra bling.

 I'm taking some memento black tuxedo, I'm taking a happy father's day stamp from Stampin' Up!, you can add anything you like and I'm just adding it directly on the green just like so.

This was very quick and simple and I think any dad would like it.

 I don't know if you guys can see, we have some intermittent cloud cover.

 are kind of, you know, the sun's high in the sky, I've taken the, what do you call them,

 right now hovering at 2, whoa, 325 with, like I said before, intermittent cloud cover.

But I will tell you, you do need mitts to reach down in that puppy, because

 slow cooker is on steroids, I would say this thing is much hotter than a slow cooker.

 I'm just anxious to see how the bread does, because that's my biggest thing of wanting

I have adjusted this probably every 20 minutes to try to completely face

 because if this works, it makes my already cheap bread cheaper.

 the loaf of bread so you don't drop it off the side of the deck, and open the door all

 Take a look at the Sun Oven if you're looking for an alternate way to cook.

 Hi guys, I'm Daisy Dennis and today I'm going to show you guys how to make healthful smoothies

 remains clear, how I stay fit, and makeup is only a temporary solution.

 skip breakfast, by the time lunch rolls around, you're famished and you're willing to devour

 the farm, they give the cows hormones and sometimes antibiotics because they like to

 stick together and they get sicker that way and we don't want hormones and steroids.

 probably somebody around the house is going to want some because they're really good and

The reason why I put granola in here is because it's still my breakfast but I want

 because dates are high in sugar but you want to get the pitted ones.

 hair grow and it's tasteless and you just want to put a tablespoon of this in.

 have extra time on your hands like I do, you will go to Starbucks and get yourself an espresso

 coffee, there's nothing better than to replace it with a smoothie.

 of looks like a diarrhea poopish color is because it helps constipation.

 constipated or you're not regular, this is going to change your life.

 to vary and you don't want to have this smoothie every day and burn yourself out and get tired

 to use frozen fruit instead of fruit that's displayed out in the markets for you, even

 is better for you is because back in the orchard and the farm, when the fruit is ripe, they

 take that fruit and they can't put it in the truck and display it for you.

Okay, so I have berries, raspberries, blueberries with antioxidants

 it's tasteless and it's good for you, for your skin and your hair and your nails and

So you could put granola or oatmeal in either one of those smoothies.

 to have these smoothies in the morning, especially if you're not a breakfast person or you're

 the fruits and the nutrients and all this energy and feeling positive and happy, you're

 going to want to be more cautious of what you eat for the rest of the day.

 of people, I don't know where you guys work, but I'm an on-the-set makeup artist and we

 have like these cute catering guys that come around and they have like these chocolates

It's just that women get to use cover-up and men don't really get that opportunity

 okay so hey guys this is going to be an updated eyebrow tutorial so I've already

 filled in one of my eyebrows and I'm just going to show you how I filled in the other

 one it's very simple now what I'm using is the Anastasia brow wiz eyebrow pencil

 my shade is in ebony which I believe is the darkest shade so first I'm just

 going to comb through my brows using the eyebrow wand that comes attached to the

 pencil and this is my natural eyebrow with no product or anything so I'm just

 going to go in with the pencil now am I the only one that lifts up their eyebrow

 when they're filling it in I don't know I just feel like you get a more precise

 arch or something so I'm gonna do is lightly fill in my eyebrow and what I

 love about this pencil is that it really looks like just regular brow hairs like

 it doesn't look harsh no matter how hard you do it which is what I really

 like the downfall to the pencil is it only last you for like a month and the

 pencil is like $21 but other than that I love it it's amazing so as you can see

 my eyebrows looking pretty nice now if you feel like you've messed up anything

 just clean it up with your finger or if you're one of those concealer people you

 can just conceal it like you can finish you can do your eyebrow and then at the end

 clean it up with me I just I just use my finger so next I'm going in with the

 Anastasia brow powder duo this is in ebony as well there's light shade and

 dark shade I'm gonna go in with the lighter shade and this is to fill in the

 inner part of my eyebrow so I go in the opposite direction that my hair grows

 so you just want to keep checking to make sure your eyebrow looks how you

 want it to look and to make sure it looks at least a little bit identical to

 the other brow because you know eyebrows are sisters they're not twins

 so they're not going to look exactly like and if your eyebrows do kudos to

 you because I could never ever ever ever get mine to look exactly the same but

 now I'm going in with the darker shade and I'm just filling in my tail you know

 just to make it a little bit darker so again check in them to make sure they

 both look the same but not the same because they're not gonna look the same

 but at least you know close enough that I won't look crazy when I go out so

 still brushing and you now I'm just gonna go back in with the powder and

 touch up in the areas that I feel may just need to be touched up you can skip

 this step if your eyebrows are already perfect the next step is to just brush

 through them again and like I said if you're done at this point you would

 clean up your eyebrows if you use concealer and if you're like me just use

 your finger because I don't know I'm not really into the concealer brows anymore

 I just like a more natural bushy kind of look so this is how to my brows now it's

 nothing fancy at all it's just really quick and simple like this only takes me

 literally like three to four minutes so I hope this was helpful and I'll see you

 Hi everyone, it's Kate from CardsOnTheFly.blogspot.com and I'm so happy to be back with you after

 So anyway, tonight I wanted to share with you the long awaited and promised tutorial

 First I thought I'd show you the two cards that I made using pinwheels and you can see

 One has a more juvenile bright color palette and the other one has a more adult or sophisticated

 I just wanted you to see how versatile pinwheels can be on your cards.

 So tonight I'm going to show you three techniques for making pinwheels and the first one is

 The first one you want to have just four rectangles and those you can cut by taking a piece of

 a square piece of paper and let's just pretend that this one is.

 What you would do with your square is fold it corner to corner and then cut along your

 These triangles were cut from a square that was an inch and a half by an inch and a half.

 So after you cut out your triangles you want to stack them up and basically fan them out

 I adhered them to a background circle to have something to put them on and then next I would

 Another option you have is to make another layer on top of your pinwheel with four more

 This would give you a double layer pinwheel and then I would put another circle on top

 So this is roughly what it would look like, a double layer pinwheel.

 Next I'll show you a pinwheel that you need four triangles for.

 For your circle I found the center by folding in half and then in half the opposite way.

 You want to take each one of your triangles, again these were cut from a 2 by 2 square

 You want to take each one of your triangles, hold the long edge toward you, take the right

 You'll take each one of these triangles and where the two corners met that you just folded,

 that is what you're going to put toward the center of your circle.

 Next take your next one and again where the two corners met that you folded together,

 that's going to go toward the center of your circle and the long edge of your triangle

 Again, my corners that met go in the center and the long edge goes right against what

 This goes in the center and the long edge goes against the one I just put down.

 To finish it off I would glue a circle in the center and that will finish it off.

 This one I like because it's a little more realistic and a little fancier than the last

 In this square we're going to find the center by folding corner to corner and then corner

 I could get out my bone folder to make this much neater, but for the sake of time we'll

 Again I'm using my fancy hole punching technique here with my piece of styrofoam.

 I punch a hole in the center and then I'm going to take my scissors and cut down each

 Next I'm going to punch a hole or pierce a hole into the top left hand corner of each

 You don't want to go too far to the corner, you want to come in a little bit and punch

 I like to snip off the corners of these triangles where I just punched the holes.

 What we're going to do is take a simple office supply brad and put it through one of the

 Then I'll take the next triangle's hole and slip that through the end of the brad.

 Then I'll take the next triangle's hole and slip that through the brad.

 Then we'll take the brad and try very carefully to stick it through that center hole we made.

 This is the one that's on this more sophisticated color palette card.

 I have already put Neutrogena moisturizer and I will be applying Maybelline 24 hour

 I will be doing a smokey eye because I always put something on my eyes that I don't like

 So I just put something that is a little bit darker than me just so that I have some sort

 Now I'm going to be applying liquid illuminator in the color green and I will be applying

 this on the centers of my eyes just to give some sort of a hint of color, a little shine

 in order for me to not look washed out when having minimal makeup especially during the

 So I do tend to use some sort of highlighter just to kind of highlight my eyes and then

 So I go again to crease my eye and this is basically how it's turning out.

 I go again with the color green by NYX the illuminator and I put that on the top of my

 I like to just use liquid a lot during the summer since I have a tendency for shadows

 And then I go back again to just make sure that the crease is there and present.

 Now I'm going to go in with my handy dandy Maybelline eye studio in the color blackest

 It's kind of my signature look and sometimes I don't but for the sake of this video I'm

 just going to do it just because I was going to the mall that day anyways.

 So I am just going to be somewhat putting a wing on my eye and this is just somewhat

 I do tend to curl my lashes during the summer especially because I do not ever wear false

 I just wear them for the videos just so that the eyeshadow looks a little bit more vibrant

 but I do use a lot a lot of mascara and in this video I'm using the L'Oreal voluminous

 I am in the hunt for more new mascaras so I am going to be trying some new ones just

 Again I'm going to go in with the color dark brown and I'm using this just for my eyebrows

 I just fill them in a little bit less and I always put some sort of a white liner.

 I just use any pop of color during the summer just because I have minimal makeup on my face

 You guys can put whatever color you would like and the lashes that I will be wearing

 I just use them for my videos just so that I have something on my eyes.

 You guys know if you guys have been following me that I used to never ever wear foundation.

 I was used to just wearing either like a little bit of powder or some tint moisturizer or

 As you guys know I just recently started using foundation and I mean I can always just go

 Maybelline 24 hour stay is what I'm using for my concealer and to brighten the bottoms

 I love to brighten the bottoms of my eyes just because I have a problem with dark circles.

 I feel like that is the major problem with myself that I have to deal with.

 So that's what I'm doing and I'm going to be mixing everything together with a beauty blender.

 I'm usually a translucent but this one was around and I've been really liking this matte

 I am breaking out a little bit on my forehead and we all know why, you know, during the

 Now I'm going to go in and curl my fake lashes and put some mascara just to blend everything

 But now to quickly move on, we will be using the H Cosmetics blush palette.

 I've had this palette for a while so I'm using the pinkest on my cheeks and this is just

 And then I'm going to bronze it up with the darkest color in that palette.

 And this is just going to help me with a little bit of contour during the summer.

 I really like a pink cheek just because I want to look very vibrant.

 It's the same color that I was bronzing with and I am doing, I'm kind of shaping my nose

 just a little bit just because I don't know you guys, I've been going crazy and just I

 But I go in and just mix everything together, my entire face just so that there's no harsh

 I am using the color pinky rose and this is a lip liner by NYX.

 I'm going to be filling everything completely together and then we're going to be applying

 Now we're going to use the color hot pink rose and the numbered version is called 571A.

 This is a really similar look to the candy yum yum, just in a shimmery look in case you

 Thumbs up if you guys enjoyed this tutorial and if you guys want more summer easy looks.

 Thank you guys so much for watching and do not forget to go and click to see another

 Today we will be showing you how to make spanakopita, a traditional Greek pie

 And now I'm gonna show you how to put together the spanakopita.

 After we have all the ingredients ready from all of our previous steps,

 we're pretty much now just gonna mix everything together and roll it up in

 the phyllo dough, brush it with a little clarified butter, and then chill them down,

 So here's the original one pound of spinach that we blanched and

 Then here's the leeks, we have one large leek, sautéed up with really barely

 Some, about two tablespoons of parsley, two tablespoons of chopped dill.

 which we get our feta cheese at Zaitinia imported from Greece, it's called the doni.

 Top notch, nice, creamy, a little bit of saltiness, and we're gonna put that in.

 Now it looks like a lot of cheese, it looks like almost equal parts of the spinach,

 We're gonna mix all this up, throw in an egg in here, mix everything up so

 it's all combined, some of the feta cheese is gonna get emulsified in and melted down.

 And you see all your nice spinach with leeks and scallions and dill and

 So now we have our filo dough, I'm sorry, our spanakopita filling.

 Make sure we have a pastry brush, you can use something like this.

 We originally cut it up into strips, and now we're gonna open those strips up.

 And basically what I'm gonna do is I'm just gonna get my clarified butter,

 I just wanna put enough just to coat it, keep it nice and moist, so

 Now basically the recipe calls for basically about a tablespoon of filling.

 You wanna kinda put it away about a half an inch away from the bottom.

 So you could buy little scoopers, you could do it with a spoon,

 I kinda just get a little bit, some of these a little bit different shapes,

 some of them a little bit narrow, some of them a little bigger.

 And then basically we wanna get, push it down so we have a triangle.

 And we're just gonna continue to fold this over, just like the flag.

 And then once we get towards the end, I'm gonna hit it one more time with a little

 more clarified butter, kinda right on top of the pie, all the way up to the top.

 And we're gonna fold it over so it seals nice and tightly, right over.

 Once they're done, you kinda just wanna put it on a tray that has a little bit

 And what I do is I tend to just brush a little bit of clarified butter right on

 top of it, so it kinda seals it, gives it a nice little butter.

 We're gonna cook them in the oven at 350 degrees for six minutes.

 Once we have gotten that far with the phyllo dough, this is your final product.

 And I sometimes tend to brush a little bit also, just to shine it up for

 the customer, or also for the friends that you have coming over, or the family.

 Just brush it with a little clarified butter, gives it a little flavor,

 And then basically, we're just gonna take one of these nice spanakopitas, and

 We have the spinach and feta cheese spanakopitas that are rolled in

 the country phyllo, and that's how you make spanakopita, traditional Greek pie.

 So this is everything you're going to need to make my delicious smoothies.

 They have little tiny holes so the ice cubes are very small and they can grind up super

 A paring knife, your blender, I choose the magic bullet, and some orange juice.

 And then also after everything you need your favorite cup to drink out of.

 So these are the steps on what you need first of all for your smoothies.

 First of all what we're going to do is we're going to cut our banana.

 So after you've cut up all your fruit and all of your bananas and you have your ice

 out, the next we're going to do is we're going to pour the juice into the blender.

 Next what we're going to do is we're going to put from the hardest material, or the softest

 So I want my ice and my frozen berries to be the closest to the blades on my blender.

 Now what I can kind of tell by looking at this, that the liquid there's not very much

 So what you're going to notice on here is that the juice is about 3 fourths full and

 Next I'm going to take my magic bullet and this is what the top looks like.

 So after I'm done blending what I'm going to do is I'm going to look at the consistency.

 I hope these showed you all the tricks that you need to know how to make these smoothies.

 And if you have any questions make sure to write me or write a comment on here.

 And make sure to email me if it's a personal question about weight loss.

 I feel free to talk about that kind of stuff because I'm not ashamed.

 I gained a lot of weight at the end of my pregnancy and now I'm almost back down to

 I was able to button up my size 4 jeans so that was a huge deal since when I gave birth

 So don't give yourself a hard time if you gain weight at the end.

 It's only been 3 and a half months and I've gotten off almost all the weight.

 Make sure to subscribe to my videos and add me on Twitter or follow me on Twitter.

 It's snowing outside so I'm going to enjoy my smoothie in my nice warm house.

 This is a video of me, which is Celine, from Soaprstar, cutting my laundry day soap that

 It's got loads of wires in it, hence it's called a wire cutter.

 Mostly because the freezer paper is just a little bit too long for me and the greaseproof

 Because it's got a nice textured top, I want to keep that as nicely textured as possible

 This will give me 10 bars and 2 small sample size bars that I cut up into little tiny samples

 Lots of people just use these and sell these but I give it as freebies because I'm really

 Part of my excitement of seeing this is because I never really know what I'm going to see

 I don't know why it does like a Japanese guitar sound but it means it's cut so that's fine

 It's quite thin at the top and I just gently trim the rougher edges.

 Sometimes it's just because the stick blender you're using can create bubbles.

 So you can see just that take up the nearest or the merest bit of the soap and smooth it

 There's again a few more bubbles so we'll just wipe those across and do the trimming

 Try and smooth off any of the cut edges that you can because they have a tendency to peek

 So they've been in the fridge for 24 hours and left out of the mould for 24 hours.

 Some people like to bevel these and I suppose it's a very minimal form of beveling really.

 Now you can see you can get bigger air holes like this because as you'll see from the other

 videos quite a thick mix and when it gets to the top like that sometimes to bang it

 down you're banging too much of the pattern out and I don't want to do that.

 Because whilst they're hard enough to cut they can still be a bit soft obviously until

 I wanted to do a little demonstration about spinning silk off of hankies.

 You just, you've got the stack here, you just separate the top stack, the top hankie off

 You can separate them in the middle and pull them out and draft them out.

 So all I'm going to do, these are silk threads that were laid out and dried individually

 You can see I've got just a few threads coming out and it's going to start pulling.

 And I'm just going to get some twist into it so that when I lay this piece over the

 Now silk threads are quite long, so sometimes you have to draft them with your hand way

 And all I'm doing is I'm pulling a little bit of it out at a time as I'm going.

 As we get going into the hanky, it will pull out a little bit differently.

 And I'll get a little bit of texture in there from the noils that are in the silk preparation.

 Kind of medium fine to very fine, depending on how it's coming out.

 I haven't decided quite what I'm going to do with this finished singles.

 It'll hold right in, but it'll give you a little bit of texture as you're spinning.

 No matter what way you spin a silk hanky, you're going to get those noils.

 And I can kind of regulate how much gets pulled into it by what I catch with my left fingers

 And even though silk is a long staple, my experience is that it still needs quite a

 bit of twist in it for the singles, for it to hold together properly when you ply it

 This was beautifully dyed silk hankies that I got several years ago at Stitches.

 And see I'm just, I'm going to pull my hand closer to the orifice so I can show you.

 I'm just pulling, I've got my hand probably 12 to 18 inches behind my front hand, which

 And I'm just pulling it out a little bit at a time and letting the twist go in and letting

 And I've just got my, my right hand is right at the very end, so I'm kind of spinning from

 And the fibers are so long, they hold together with my hands that far apart.

 But if you try to get your hands too close together with silk, you're going to end up

 with horrible clumps and trying to draft it out and too much of the fiber being held between

 And it's just, it gets frustrating and it hurts your hands too.

 So just make sure that you keep your back hand quite a bit back.

 Now I've got more than I want there, so I'm just going to move my hand until I can draft

 it out, until it's in a usable, like in the diameter that I want for this particular yarn.

 The lovely thing about silk, apart from the color and the sheen and the feel and all of

 that, is that it's so light, so lightweight, that you might buy, I think this package that

 I've got was 2.3, 2.3 ounces I think, and it's just, it's a ton of fiber.

 And I will probably end up getting, I don't know, probably 500 or 600 yards of 2-ply yarn

 See, there's a bit that I'm just going to kind of pinch it in, just a little bit of

 So you can see, from start to finish, that's how you spin a hanky of silk.

 And some people find this method easier than poking your finger through the middle and

 drafting out ahead of time, it can be, that method can be a little bit messier, but this

I teach the trumpet at Lawrence Conservatory at Lawrence University

And that's certainly part of what we'll talk about today, but not all of

 being able to reach all the notes from one embouchure position, one basic setting, and

 learning how to create a variety of sounds without a tremendous amount of external motion.

 When we first learn how to play the trumpet, we don't have any muscle strength.

 how perfectly we form our embouchure, if we have a trumpet teacher there from day one

 and he says do this, that, and the other thing, we still don't have any muscle structure to

 that means is to play lower notes, we're going to open our mouth a lot, we're going

 to drop our jaw, which is something obviously you would have to do on a lower breast instrument.

 how to play when we're first starting out in fifth grade, sixth grade.

 get better, we want to employ better means, more economical means of getting around the

We want to develop an economy of technique that doesn't involve opening and

 closing our mouths and smashing, because it does create a variety of sound effects.

 low notes sound like low notes, the high notes sound like high notes, strained and so forth,

 it's difficult to get from one register to the other smoothly when we play that way.

 So we start this re-education of the embouchure with note bendings, and I think a lot of people

 have done note bends without really exploring everything about them, why we could do them.

 But essentially what happens when we bend a note is the lips inside the mouthpiece are

 going to open up, in most cases unroll slightly, especially the bottom lip starts to fold.

 a mirror, you shouldn't see a lot of external motion, you shouldn't see the face muscles

 relax to bend the note, you shouldn't see the jaw drop, you'll see maybe a little bit

 of flexing or positioning going on, but for the most part there's not much to see, the

 Then what I like to do is apply the note bending technique to the way we actually play the

 trumpet so it's not just an exercise we do and wonder why we did it.

 series of exercises that explore how far you need to bend a note in order to minimize the

 G down to low C, we can drop our jaw to hit those notes or we can bend the G as far as

You'll bend it to the E and as you try to bend it further the C will interrupt

 what you're doing and that's the least amount of motion necessary to get to low C. You might

 have to bend just a little bit more to get that low C to sound exactly the way you want

 our way up the overtone series, we're not going to be able to bend as far.

You'll have to bend your lip out just a little bit more to get the

 That's the least amount of motion physically from our jaw or from pressure and is doing as much as

 I'm teaching out of Special Studies for Trumpet and you can find it at johndanieltrumpet.com.

 Hello it's Sasa and today we're going to be making this awesome nacho dish.

 So it's inspired by one of my favorite vegetarian restaurants, it's called Lola Rosa.

 So they cook it on a piece of wood and there's like nacho chips, beans, green peppers and

 So I decided to make it at home because why not, I can make huge batches.

 So it's actually really easy, it's super healthy and let's have some fun.

 Okay so you're going to need green onions, a lime, tomato, green pepper, avocado, black

 beans, you can either use the cooked, you can cook it from yourself, I have a video,

 I'll put a link here, a video of how to make no farting beans or you can use ones from

 cans, salsa, some shredded cheese, fresh cilantro and you need to get some tortilla

 So these ones are stone ground, whole grain, corn, gluten free, whatever.

 So you can use any ones you want, these ones are unsalted, I prefer the unsalted because

 then you can control how much salt they add because I find the tostitos especially, they're

 So these ones are really good, I've tried them before, they're awesome and they're also

 It's an Asian thing to have kitchen scissors to cut for food, they're extremely useful,

 like you know the pizza cutters to cut the pizza, you go back and forth, back and forth,

 same asay, like trying to like hack saw the thing and it never cuts and you always have

 a little bit of the crust and you're ripping it apart so then all of your toppings fall

 off and it just screws over your pizza and you get really upset.

 We actually use scissors in my family to cut the pizza, so you have the pizza and you just

 You can get the really strong scissors for cutting lobsters, those ones are the best

 So for the green onions, it's easiest to get a pair of scissors, so make sure you go out

 and buy a pair of lobster scissors and then you can just easily cut the green onions.

 So you want to dice up the green pepper in these small little bits.

 It's hard to find because this curved part is kind of annoying so I kind of chop the

 Okay, and then here you just slice long strips and then afterwards you make little chops.

 You want to slice your lime in half because we're just going to squirt this over the top

 Avocado, you just slice it in half, then you have the big seed and then you can just slice

 For the tomatoes, try not to get so much liquid because it's going to get really soggy.

 You can add some more chips, you can add some more cheese, you can add whatever you want.

 Now we're going to place it in the oven but it's not baking, it's on grill.

 Okay, when you're putting the nachos into grill in the oven, it's important to like,

 normally when you grill because it's quite high heat, you don't want to have the top

 And also I kind of leave it semi-open so that you can watch it because it won't take very

 So that you can see because if the chips go black it's going to really screw up everything,

 So now we're just going to finish it off with some of the green onions.

 And if you want, at this point you can also add extra cheese on top.

 And for the lime, we're just going to squirt a bit of lime over top.

 You don't have to stick with the same ingredients that I chose.

 I'll have my blog, I'll have the recipe so it's really easy to print it out.

 Hi there, welcome to Hugh's Nursery and today I'm going to be showing you how to make a

 beetroot and sour cream salad, which is such a nice salad and what's good about beetroot

 sized beetroots, grating them up, also grating up two dessert apples and putting some cream

 in and whipping cream and it's so tasty you've got to try it out.

 well and I've just thought of a new system that you might be interested in.

 have too many of some type of vegetable, you might want to know some good recipes to help

Now I'm going to be putting a list down below of vegetables that

 I have that you can request a cooking video that you'd like about a certain vegetable

 from beetroot, carrots, potatoes, parsnips and stuff and then I'll make a video on it

 so harvesting beetroot is very easy, you're just going to grab it, go underneath, grab

Ok so next we're just going to cut them from the top here, like that.

 the two dessert apples and now we're just going to go along carefully grating them.

 Now that's all peeled, I didn't want to show much more peeling because it'll be painful

 to watch and I've got lots of cuts and scratches everywhere but apart from that it's fine.

 romantic meal or a special person to do it the night before because when you try and

 wash your hands it won't go away and it'll probably turn them off so yeah just a note.

 Now you've got to be careful when doing this because beetroot is quite slippery but we're

 seen this probably before on my smoothie video, making strawberry and banana smoothie.

So you need 225ml of this and luckily this cup is just the right amount.

 Now I will scrape off that bit of yogurt but I'll just show you here.

 I'm using a wooden spoon but... So fill it up to 225ml and then apply it like a dollop.

 yogurt put some salt and some pepper in just to add some seasoning and also some lemon

Now once you've finished mixing it all in it's going to be almost ready.

 you need to do is to put it in a fridge for about half an hour so it cools down and then

 and I hope you enjoyed this video and I'll see you again soon with another one.

 expensive to call in an appliance repair place to do this for you.

There are screws holding the control panel in on the left side and the right side.

They are a little bit of a pain in the rear end, but push down and pull up

 If I tilt my washer forward, you can plainly see that the pump is leaking.

 you use channel locks or pliers to pull the spring clips off the hoses, water is going

Pull the pump off the motor shaft and inspect the shaft for any wear and tear.

 a bit to make it such that the new pump, which you see here, which cost me about $50 online,

 in the front, and here's the larger tab in the back, right next to that feather that's

 in the cabinet, and you want to line up the notches with those tabs.

 Push it down into the cabinet, and you'll need to tighten it using the two screws that

 time to turn the water back on—turn the hot water on and then the cold water—and

 the rinse cycle to fill up the washer and let it go to the spin cycle to see how the

 yourself hundreds of dollars by learning how to do appliance repair, especially when it

 tips, please add them to the comments because I don't have all the answers, and I'm

 already done so, you can click on the Subscribe button over on YouTube to view every single

I hope you have a great day, and I'll see you in the next video.

 Hi, I'm Allison of HealthNutNation.com, your certified nutritional consultant.

 Our list of ingredients include the meat of a young raw coconut.

 Alternately, you can buy shredded young coconut in the freezer section at your local Asian

 It is frozen in the water of the coconut, so you'll be using that as well.

 You can alternately use just plain filtered water or kefir water.

 For the exact measurements, please click on the link below and it will take you to the

 Alternately, you can use a regular blender or an immersion blender and quite possibly

 So I'm going to add the shredded young coconut that was frozen to my Vitamix.

 I had to let it defrost in a little bowl because otherwise it just gets all over the fridge

 And I'm also going to use the young coconut that I had in my colander here that I rinsed.

 I'm going to add about a quarter teaspoon of my probiotics to the blender.

 And then last but not least, I'm going to add a little bit of coconut water.

 Not too much, I don't want it to be soupy and I can always add more.

 Now the probiotics are going to do their magic overnight and it will thicken up and you'll

 Now I've chosen a mason jar today because I want to have plenty of room for this yogurt

 It is a probiotic, very high in probiotics and it will grow exponentially overnight.

 So any jar that you choose, you only want to fill to about three quarters full and if

 My raw coconut yogurt is in my mason jar and ready to go in a nice warm place overnight.

 Now I put this plastic lid on and I screw it on just a little bit tight.

 And then I place it in a bowl because every single time I have made this yogurt, it overflows

 The reason I keep it in my oven is because I live in a cool place.

 So what I do is I turn on the oven light and that keeps it at about a 90 degree temperature,

 which is what I want my yogurt to be at so that it will grow and turn into a nice thick

 Now I'm going to put this in the oven and I'm going to show you one that I made yesterday.

 I did open it up earlier and it had already overflown so it's not going to so much this

 So I want you to have a close up look at these humongous bubbles.

 You can see that the probiotics have done their work and they have turned this into

 a lovely, rich probiotic yogurt that is so healthy and delicious that you are going to

 Now I just stir this and that kind of helps some of those bubbles go down.

 It is the consistency of yogurt and it is also extremely high in probiotics just like

 Sweeten it with a little stevia or fruit, whatever floats your boat.

 This is completely paleo, 4-hour body, vegan and vegetarian friendly.

 For more tips, tricks and other recipes, please subscribe to my channel and check out my other

 It's simply a plastic straight edge with a ruler incorporated so they can draw parallel

 You can draw all the window lines in, brickwork lines, very easily by just rolling the ruler.

 I'm going to draw these extremely dark so that you can see them.

 You could actually measure these lines and multiply them or double them or whatever to

 Of course, all the incidental details like the verge line, you can just parallel on with

 So you can draw all the details in by just using the parallel ruler to draw parallel

 It's a very heavy sketch this but I'm doing it so you can see it on the video.

 So then you can use the parallel ruler again and draw in the roof line.

 I won't go any further with this but maybe I'll put the window in just to show you.

 I'll just show you whilst we're at it how to use the ruling pen to put on masking fluid.

 It's a little bit more fluid than the Winsor & Newton masking fluid which you can get.

 Now to put masking fluid on you just simply dip your pen into the masking fluid and take off the fluid on the edge.

 And then by rotating the screw you can get a different thickness of line.

 So if you wanted to mask off a large area you would just do an area here.

 Use it on its edge and you can then create large areas of masking fluid.

 And of course when you're finished just swivel the nib and clean it off.

 This is Scott Tuzin on MetabolicMasterpiece.com here to share a variation of the Romanian

 I learned this a couple of years ago when I was training with Tom Venuto and this is

 I feel way more focus in the glutes and the hamstrings and less involvement, basically

 Maybe it's the path of resistance, maybe it's the angle of the platform that has your toes

 I mean, you could mimic that by putting your toes under some weight plates or a 2x4 or

 something along that lines but this is just a much more comfortable method.

 So if you have this apparatus in your gym and you find that performing the Romanian

 Deadlift you feel more tension in your lower back, more fatigue in your lower back than

 you do in your hamstrings, I highly recommend you give this a try.

 So there's something about this path of resistance that really allows me to hinge those hips

 So right out of the hole, I am squeezing my glutes, contracting my hamstrings and thrusting

 If you've tried this before, please share your experience with us.

 Morning everyone my name's Nikki I'm blogging about my life using Juice Plus

 with clean eating so what I've got here for you today is actually like what it

 looks like what I'm doing because apparently I've been just filming myself

 so here we go try and do it one-handed a little bit hard oh there we go

 so I've already just taken my capsules so we've got berries vegetables and

 fruits all these three have 26 essence of fruit and veggie you've got you

 complete shake I'm having the vanilla that has 17 of your fruit and veggie

 okay I'm gonna do today sweet cherries the mango and my vanilla organic rice

 milk and with a touch of cinnamon so I'm gonna basically just get a handful of

 the cherries my blender is a Kenwood blender and it was just 29 pounds so I use it

 every day twice three times a day mango literally chuck it in you've got like a

 maximum frozen fruit thing on here and see I use that as your guideline okay

 I'm now gonna add in my milk just so the powder doesn't stick to the bottom

 so I just literally guess really and but you are meant to have 250 mils of your

 milk alternative okay now I'm gonna get half a scoop okay ignore the line I'm

 using half a scoop then about half the half pop that in and now I'm just gonna

 do my sprinkle of the cinnamon just because it apparently it's meant to be

 really good for metabolism but I just think it sweetens it I like the flavor

 of it but you don't have to put the cinnamon in that's just I tend to put it

 in every morning or every shake to be fair I'm just gonna make sure I've got

 that on because we don't want leakage okay I'm gonna flip it over as you can

 see the cherries are at the top oh there you go just bash it get them off the

 bottom it's really hard to do normally I do this with two hands but yeah it's

 so currently I have my hair a mess my face is a mess and so I'm not gonna star in

 there you can see it's nice literally take it out again with one hand it's

 really hard to do this is my pointly just to make that point okay there we go

 hold on bad camera skills again I need to get a camera right as you can see

 it's all blended really thick as well so as you can see that it's gonna be

 really filling a lot of people are surprised at how filling these shakes

 are but they are and there's no chemicals no nothing GMO it's all just

 natural and with the soy protein so yeah no more bloating full gonna have my snack

 after my PT session to be honest I'm gonna take one of the new complete bars

 see ya so I might have that actually take that in my gym it's so handy and

 again it's meal replacement and it's got all the nuts in that so tasty me my

 mother love it at the moment and but yes so that is it for today I'm gonna enjoy

 my shake put my frozen fruit away and uh yeah thanks very much for watching

What you start out with is a piece of cardstock or piece of pattern paper.

 used my Mind's Eye Penny Lane paper and Unity's Gratitude Equals Joy stamps.

To give it a little bit more depth, I stamped them with Peeled Paint.

 lined up my stamp and stamped the image with the darker ink on my Imagine sheet.

 overlay it where I want the lighter image to be and line up my Stamp-A-Magic.

I lay the cardstock on a piece of cardstock that I'll tape on later.

 next row, instead of starting with a 1-inch piece, we're cutting it 1-1-1.

 and then cut it down to what you need later on so you don't have too little cardstock

 So you might not be able to reach your hands to the floor once you start locking your knees.

 eventually you'll feel those muscles starting to sort of warm up a little bit.

 And notice when you roll up, now those muscles get a little release,

Or do they still feel kind of tight and actually maybe even a little fatigued?

 And so now you have a good understanding of why I was never going to achieve flexibility

 release your calves, release your buttocks, release your low back, release your shoulders,

 what if you really have a sense of releasing these inside thigh muscles and this belly muscle

 and you should literally feel your hip bones touching the tops of your thighs.

 In a very short amount of time, you just learned how to bend down and feel pretty darn flexible.

 So stretching already contracted muscles and not understanding how our structure, our bones,

 are designed to allow us to be flexible in movement is not ever going to achieve what we're looking for in life,

 Hi everyone, I'm Noreen and welcome to my kitchen and another recipe for our 4th of July week of videos today

 I'm going to share a delicious raspberry lemonade that you can share with your guests and make for your celebration or anytime

 This is cool and refreshing and it uses fruits of the season and we're going to use a little bit of a cheat

 So this is really simple and it takes ingredients you might have on hand

 With a half one and a half cups of sugar and one and a half cups of water and I stuck it in the microwave

 For five minutes and you see a little floaty in there, but you'll understand in a minute

 boil raspberries and sugar and water or you can just get your homemade raspberry jam out of the refrigerator or you can use a good

 I just emptied a jar and my simple syrup is still a little bit warm and that's how I want it because

 If you want you can use a whisk and I think I will grab a whisk

 Now basically what you have is a raspberry simple syrup now you can also use raspberry Torani here instead

 But the raspberry jam is more intense and it's a hundred percent fruit because I made the jam so I know that

 And we're going to cool this down now I have about a cup of freshly squeezed organic lemon juice

I mean you can but it's not going to be as superior of a quality of a lemonade so a

 Cup of lemon juice, and then I also have two organic lemons that I scrubbed and sliced and this is the one place

 Where I will insist that you buy the organic version of the fruit now a lot of other things you can make your choice

 I don't care, but when it comes to lemons especially if you're going to put them in your drink or limes

 You need to wash them you need to get organic versions because they don't have any

 They're much nicer to you than the conventionally grown versions, so

 So we've got our raspberry simple syrup here our lemon juice and and now I'm going to add some water I

 Lemonade is really a personal preference thing so you want to make sure that it's sweet enough and tart enough

 I'm going to go get some ice, and I'm going to fix up my pitcher and I'll be right back

 I went ahead and I decanted it into the pitcher with some ice some of those sliced lemons and

 I'm going to add a little bit of ice to it, and I'm going to add a little bit of water

 And then I'm going to add some more ice and then I'm going to add some more lemons and about a cup of fresh raspberries

 So I'm just going to hold the ice back because I already have ice

 Beautiful refreshing raspberry lemonade for your fourth of July.

 I hope that you love it, and I hope you have a great Independence Day until next time.

I hope you like what you watch today, and I hope that you try it

 if you like what you saw please consider hitting the thumbs up button and give me a positive rating and

 Also, make sure that you hit the subscribe button if you're already not a subscriber

 Everyone, we're back in the craft room today and we have another resin craft and it's another

 I'm going to color it with some black and this is black sequin.

 I want it to be pretty solid so I'll see how this goes and then I may have to add a little

 What I have here is I'm working on parchment paper with an egg ring and I have hot glue

 And this is to ensure that I can remove it all from the parchment paper because resin

 doesn't stick to parchment paper and hot glue doesn't stick to parchment paper and the resin

 and hot glue won't permanently stick to the silicone ring so everything will be removed

 Now I do have a cork on the bottom of this one and what I'm wanting to do, I tinted this

 black because I want it to have a darker background to make some of the nail polish stick out.

 What I'm going to do is pour it into my mold and let it disperse itself.

 Now that it's all spread out I'm going to let it sit and cure for about 12 hours before

 The resin painted with the acrylic paint has set and it's nice and hard.

 And what I'm going to do is use some shiny sparkly nail polishes.

 I have this red which shows up really cool on here so I thought I would do maybe a little

 I'm going to do what I normally do and this has a lot of glitter sparkle in it and I'm

 just going to try and experiment with a bunch of different things and just see how it turns

 I finished with the red and the green and I'm going to start putting on some glittery

 When I have that one on there I'm going to probably sprinkle a little bit of this iridescent

 I've layered a bunch of nail polish and glitter and added a bunch of stuff and now I'm going

 We'll let that sit for 12 hours and then we'll unmold it and check it out.

 I'm going to remove the hot glue and then I'm going to remove the silicone egg ring.

 I will need to file the edges down just a little bit and I'll dab it with a little bit

 of clear nail polish if it looks a little rough and that will bring the shine right

 So things needed are measuring tape, lighter, scissors, non-roll elastic, glue gun,

 the headband will be and then after that I cut four inches of elastic.

 four inches from my headband measurement and cut that amount of ribbon.

 to use a lighter to get rid of frayed edges but it works great.

 the elastic on the back end of the ribbon to glue with my glue gun.

 it in the center and then folding the sides for a very secured headband.

 do that side you're just going to do the other side the exact same way.

 It's going to take about two hours to make total from beginning to end.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to take these three ingredients.

 I'm going to stir it up and leave them there until the very end.

 Let me show you how to do this first before we start cooking the rice.

 Alright, now I don't know if many of you know how to crack eggs.

 Now when you get down to the bottom one, I just kind of take my knuckle and tap it.

 What I want you to do is, I want you to mix that all up right there.

 And then once again, before you put this in the rice pudding mixture, you're going

 This recipe is going to require you to constantly check it and stir it.

 When this gets thick, we're going to throw the next ingredient in.

 If anything sticks during this entire process, leave it on the bottom.

 Once again, if anything sticks, leave it on the bottom until the end.

 You can now see that almost all the water has gone out of this rice.

 You're going to take those six cups of milk and add that in there.

 The milk should be at room temperature, but if it's cold, it's going to take a little

 And as you mix it up and that sugar melts into the mixture, you're going to see it kind

 As you can see, it's looking really thick, really creamy, and really shiny.

 When you think it's done, you're probably going to be about five more minutes away.

 Now to top it off, take your cinnamon, lightly sprinkle the surface.

 You can stick that in the refrigerator, depending on how you like it.

 You want it really cold, leave it in there for about 15-20 minutes.

 And the good news is, I just scraped some right off of the pot.

 And in celebration, I'm going to go to Walmart right now and pick up my Miracle Knives.

 Today I am going to show you how I am going to do my 29th updo of my 30 day 30 updo challenge.

 I just knew that I wanted to have a sort of flat twist kind of look.

 Ok, and then I am going to undo this second twist that I have made.

 Ok, I think I am going to try and do a sort of twist with my hair.

 Ok, if you see anything sort of like starting to come undone, just pin it in place.

 But I just want to jazz it up a little bit because I have got to date.

 We're going to do this in two parts, and we're going to do the second part of the flip turn

 So the first thing Kyle's going to do is he's going to go down, and he's going to push off

 on his back, because every flip turn is done pushing off on your back.

 So he's going to go down, get his feet on the wall, bring his hands up close to his

 He holds a good streamline with his head back, and now he's going to come up.

 He's going to get into a sitting position with his feet placed on the wall, hands up

 We're going to see him rotate over onto his side, and he's going to hold it there.

 The third step is going from our back to our side to our front.

 You go down, sitting position, feet placed on the wall, hands up close to the body.

 He goes to his side, and now he goes to his front, and he's ready to swim.

 He's going to come off and do this all continuously as opposed to distinct steps.

 He's going to go down in the sitting position, feet placed on the wall, hands up, streamline,

 and rotates right over in one continuous motion and starts to swim.

 All right, we're going to go to the first part of the flip turn now.

 The first thing Kyle's going to do is two somersaults in a row.

 One of the big problems with the somersault is that people come out of their somersault

 Doing two in a row will get the feel of staying in the somersault the whole time.

 He's going to do that somersault and just place his feet on the wall just like they

 Now Kyle's going to swim in and set his feet, putting his feet just where they were from

 He uses that hand to flip, sets his feet, and he's ready to go.

 The last thing Kyle's going to do, he's going to swim in, do his turn, push off, and start

 He's on his back, onto his side, rolls over to his front, and he starts to swim.

 One of the major mistakes that people make when doing the flip turn is flailing their

 Kyle's going to demonstrate what not to do during that flip turn right here.

 He's just going to do a flip, and you're going to see his arms flailing out of his side to

 You need to use your core muscles plus that last stroke to come in.

 He's going to put the kickboards at his side and put his hands on top so that he cannot

 move them, and then he's going to flip his body using his core muscles only.

 He uses his core muscles to flip straight over, and his hands never move.

 As he does that, his hands are ready to get right into a streamlined position and push

 I discovered hot food in my early 20s when I was on a surf trip to Barbados and they

 had the Scotch bonnet pepper down there and they made hot sauce that we ended up, I started

 eating it and I couldn't stop and it's a mustard based hot sauce that we later used at the

 For the first time in video history, today I'm going to prepare the world famous Inner

 This is a hot sauce inspired by a yellow mustard Scotch bonnet pepper sauce that I had while

 I was in Barbados many moons ago and this is a sauce that is part of the world famous

 My favorite pepper, the Scotch bonnet pepper, different from the habanero, approximately

 2 cups of Scotch bonnet peppers, de-stemmed, 1 ripe mango, that's about a cup I'd say,

 This is what gives the sauce its kind of unique character, 2 thirds of a cup of yellow mustard,

 1 third cup fresh OJ, 1 third cup brown sugar, we're building a kind of sweet and hot combination,

 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon ground coriander, 1 teaspoon ground curry, 1 teaspoon

 So we're gonna grind it up here and have a nice bright yellow hot sauce.

 We used to make and bottle this and sell it at the restaurant but there you have it.

 That keeps in the refrigerator for about 2-3 weeks and it's great on anything, steaks,

 chops, fish, people like it on eggs and warn your roommates if it's in the refrigerator.

 So I had a 1 gig DDR2 stick of RAM left over from an upgrade, from a 4 gig upgrade.

 I've got another one of those somewhere, I had two 1 gigs, but couldn't find it right

 So right here we've got two 256's and we'll just pull one of them out.

 I don't know what this, this laptop probably maxes out at 2 gig.

 I've got a Elm 1210 Dell XPS Elm 1210 and it's, if I remember right, one slot is underneath

 Let's see, memory, 1.2, or 1,270 megabytes, so 1.27 gigabytes of memory.

 Hi, this is KKlemonKate and today we're going to make a chocolate chip cookie in a mug.

 This is perfect for those lazy days when you just want a quick treat.

 You will need flour, sugar, brown sugar, vanilla extract, butter, salt, chocolate chips, and

 First, microwave your butter until it is melted, but don't boil it.

 Now add your brown sugar, your white sugar, salt, a few drops of vanilla extract, and

 And there you go, your quick and easy chocolate chip cookie in a mug.

 and solid areas, some of it is solid, and then continue dotting

 of the flowers are balanced with the soft areas of the table and the

We're no longer in the church, but we're outside and we're about to barbecue and grill.

 And the most important step in barbecuing and grilling is getting your grill hot.

 Some cats might not know how to get their grill hot in a proper way, so I'm going to teach them.

 If you know how to use one of those fancy charcoal stoker, looks like a big beer can that you put charcoals in to get hot.

 And if you notice, you got a grill, I don't know if you can see that or not, but you got a grate on the bottom.

 So you take your grill plate off and you got this empty spot right here.

 First thing you want to do is fill that up with some newspaper.

 I'm going to take the paper and I'm going to loosely kind of pack it in the box.

 You don't want to pack it too tough because if you pack it too tough, when the paper starts to burn, it needs that air, it needs that oxygen in order to start that big fire.

 Now when you got it loosely packed in there, I put like four sheets maybe.

 You take your little small grill plate cover and you put that right on top.

 I'm going to pull the little pieces up a little bit like that so I have something to kind of ignite it with.

 Now after that, I'm going to take my charcoal and I'm going to dump it in the box.

 I'm going to take my gloves so I don't have to keep washing my hands constantly.

 And I'm going to make like a pyramid out of it because the pyramid will hold the heat the best.

 That way these charcoals are going to burn evenly and you get the fire rising up.

 Instead of having everything spread out, imagine if you were to build a fire or something like that, you just kept packing the logs on top of each other.

 I'm going to take my charcoals in my hand and I'm going to kind of pack them.

 It's not going to be a perfect pyramid, but you kind of just want to pile it.

 You kind of pull all your loose ones around to the side so it's not all spread out all over the place willy nilly like.

 Now that I got that, I'm going to take a stick lighter and I'm going to go in there and I'm going to light my paper on fire.

 This method right here is different because I'm not using lighter fluid on this really.

 Some people say lighter fluid imparts that lighter fluid taste to their meats and things like that, the chemical taste.

 It's going to burn those bottom coals and those bottom coals, once they get lit, they're going to hit the middle coals and that's going to hit the hot coals.

 We have to let this fire burn for about maybe 10 minutes or so like that.

 And when this fire gets really hot and the coals are hot, you'll see that the coals start to get white.

 And when we come back, we'll show you that the coals are nice and white and we'll spread them evenly.

 And you can see that fire catching with no problem and I didn't use any lighter fluid or anything like that.

 Alright, now the coals have been sitting in the fire for about 15 minutes or so like that.

 And if you get a shot, you can see, you want at least three quarters of the coals to be about white like it is right here.

 We got enough paper and you got everything burning right and proper white.

 Before we take our grill, we take our sticks, our poker sticks.

 And we're going to move these coals and spread them out a little bit.

 What this is doing is distributing the heat now to an even surface.

 I said it before, imagine trying to light this, you had nothing for the fire to build on.

 Be sure you have a nice sturdy stick or even metal or something.

 Don't get a little flimsy hanger or something, a little bowl of cardboard or something like that because that's going to burn up on you.

 Alright, when that gets hot, we're going to take our grill top.

 Now, the top of the grill, we're going to put this on top of here.

 We're not just going to throw the meat on top because the grates need to get hot so your meat gets hot.

 And two, all the oils and burnable food, you got to let that get hot too so you can wipe it off so you can have a nice clean grill surface to work on.

 That will give you nice clean grill marks and that will just ensure that your food is nice and sanitary.

 If you just think about it, when you grill food, your barbecue food, you might have made a couple of weeks or maybe a month or maybe more until you grill again.

 So it's very important to let that grate get hot so it can burn off any of the dirt and any of the other crap that's collected on there since you last grilled.

 Let that sit for about five minutes and then you're ready to grill.

 Hey everybody, this is Dave from Cook and Share and today we're making up this Italian

 It's simple, delicious, I know you're going to love it, so let's get started.

 I'm going to get started here by grating up a small carrot and this is about half a cup.

 Once you do that, what you need to do is add a couple of cans of diced tomatoes to a blender,

 Of course, if you have a food processor, you can use it as well.

 And what this does is purees them up a little bit and makes it nice and smooth.

 Now that it's blended, I'm going to transfer it into a pot, followed by a small finely

 chopped onion, three to four cloves of finely chopped garlic, and this really depends on

 Add in the grated carrot, a teaspoon of dried basil, half a teaspoon of thyme, half a teaspoon

 of oregano, a quarter teaspoon of sage, and these basically make up an Italian spice.

 To finish the spicing off, I'm going to add in half a teaspoon of salt.

 Now I don't do this, but if you want to sweeten it up a little bit, you can add one or two

 A tablespoon of tomato paste, just to kind of thicken things up.

 After a boil, what you need to do is reduce the heat to low and allow it to simmer for

 While the sauce is simmering, remember to click to subscribe and never miss a video.

 In the meantime, what you should be doing is adding your pasta to a pot of boiling salted

 This is somewhere in the neighborhood of 9 or 10 minutes, but your package will tell

 After about 40 minutes, our sauce has thickened up nicely, so it's just about done and it

 And this sauce is spiced perfectly, according to my liking anyway, but you can adjust it

 So we're just going to spoon some of the sauce over our cooked pasta and you're ready to

 This sauce is so delicious and easy to make and sometimes what I do is I cheat a little

 It's also very versatile because you can serve it up with so many different types of pasta

 Head on over to Cook and Share for more details on this recipe and many more recipes.

 And don't forget to click that subscribe button and like our videos.

 I'm Chef Billy Parisi, and our new fix goes to about 50 people in different places.

 We're going to dedicate a few episodes to potatoes and side dishes.

 It has nothing to do with the fact that we didn't bake them right the first time.

 Okay, everybody, the first thing we need to do is bake our potatoes.

 So what we're going to do is roll them in olive oil, get some salt on them, and then

 we're going in the oven, 350 degrees for about an hour to an hour and 20 minutes.

 Once the potatoes are in the oven, this gives us a ton of time to get ready to prepare the

 First, we're going to cook off some bacon, cut up some scallions.

 We're going to add in tons of great stuff to these twice-baked potatoes.

 Now all's we're going to do is cut them in half, take all those goodness in the inside

 Next, we're going to incorporate all those fattening flavors that makes these so awesome.

 Dear Lord, there's just so much flavor inside of these twice-baked potatoes.

 Hi everybody, I'm Kimberly Turner from CookingWithKimberly.com and tonight I'm going to show you a ridiculously

 So first things first, you can either use these corn on the cob, you can put them in

 individually wrapped in foil, or you can do it the way I'm doing it.

 Now I'm only doing two tonight, I'm actually going to break this one in half.

 And I'm going to use a bread pan because it's going to fit them perfectly.

 So the first thing I'm going to do is just grease up this pan a little bit.

 And what I'm going to do is just use my little handy dandy brush.

 If you don't have one of these silicone basting brushes, you're missing out, they're the bomb.

 Make sure you go to my store, shop.cookingwithkimberly.com and grab you some.

 Okay, now I'm also going to grease up my corn just with a little bit of olive oil.

 Now if you want to, you can use butter, you don't have to, you can use olive oil.

 So I'm just going to put it on my hands because that's the easiest way to do it.

 Okay, now I've already freshly cracked some pepper because we're having a gorgeous side

 So make sure you check out that recipe for how to make a garden salad.

 They have a beautiful pyramidal type shape and you can squish them between your fingers.

 Now if there's any other seasonings that you guys prefer to eat on there, by all means,

 So I'm just going to cover this up with some foil and this is going to take about 30 minutes

 We're having that garden salad alongside some gorgeous Napa Jacks oven roasted chicken drumsticks.

 We're 30 minutes into my drummies and that's going to take another 30 minutes.

 It starts off being somewhat more mellow yellow and a little bit more opaque looking, I guess.

 Napa Jacks has this really great chipotle and honey rub and I know that you're supposed

 to use it on meat and things, but it is fantastic on corn, on the cob particularly.

 I'm going to cover this up for everyone else so it stays nice and warm.

 In fact, I haven't been able to eat my corn on the cob without it lately.

 There's not many things I like better than corn on the cob in the summer.

 If you want to keep those, the husks on, you can peel them back.

 Let that hang outside of the plate or the baking dish that you're roasting them in.

 Then you can use that as a handle for when you're eating it, right?

 Alright, follow me on Twitter at CookingWithKimE, like the fan page at Facebook.com slash CookingWithKimberly.

 My shows are on iFood.tv slash CookingWithKimberly and YouTube.com slash CookingWithKimberly.

 Okay, so this lick we're doing a bend on the 12th fret of the 2nd string

 And then we're muting that note and playing the note with the little finger

 So that way you can see that we can make the lick work for the A,

 because hopefully you're learning the notes on the fingerboard,

 Hey what's up it's Mony and this is my entry to the competition.

 So as you guys can see I made a salamichew yuen and these are the ingredients you guys are going to need.

 So this is galangia, usually I have it pre-chopped but I just kept it in the freezer right now.

 So basically boil a big pot of water and just throw, that's usually good enough but I'm just going to put a little extra.

 So with salamichew yuen you can pretty much put whatever vegetables you like in there but the staples for salamichew yuen are tomatoes and pineapples.

 One was from my mom and the other way was through a cookbook and I sort of infused both styles a little bit.

 Along with just like throwing some stuff in that I thought would make it taste better.

 So again basically right now we have boiling the water and then throw in I guess a couple slices of galangal right away.

 Because I'm putting garlic and then I'm going to saute the chicken.

 Just so it infuses the flavor of the garlic and is a little bit cooked.

 I'm not going to use all of it because I'm saving some of it for the end.

 Just give it some, whatever you just want to brown it a little.

 Okay so I'm just going to go ahead, see it's not cooked all the way through.

 So I just have oyster sauce, pepper, cayenne pepper, black pepper, oyster sauce.

 So once the chicken is done cooking you're going to add a grip of fish sauce.

 This is going to sound really bad but I totally forgot whether or not you're supposed to add sugar.

 So now that you've done all that, just go ahead and throw in all of your vegetables and stuff.

 Basically just bring it to a boil until the zucchini is cooked.

 And whether it's too sour, too sweet, too whatever, add more fish sauce, add more sugar, add more tamarind.

 So fry up some more oil, put this in there, and then at the end put the oil with the garlic.

 My grandma used to say, salamat chui yuon, or salamat chui mana, and I added some cilantro at the end.

I just wanted to give a quick note that me and my cousin were starting a YouTube collaborative channel where there's going to be a theme.

 It's going to be a lot of fun and it's a good way to get you started on YouTube.

 So if you're interested in auditioning for our collaboration, check out the link right here and also in the down bar.

 My name is Tom Crandall from InTheTrendNow.com and what I have here is called the Omega VRT

 And some people have asked, you know, how hard is it to clean up after you've juiced?

 So I have my juice in here and I have what's left over from the carrots and stuff like

 So today what I did was I juiced cucumber, carrots, kale and some pear and then just

 So basically I just start the water, sort of rinse it off a little bit, if there's any

 And then this top part, you can see there's some food in there.

 So again, just a simple rinse and that pretty much takes care of that.

 Now sometimes what's useful is, I'll just put this back on, is to actually run the water

 So typically what I'll do is I'll put my juice in a cup, put this back on and then

 And then what I'll do is I'll just run water through the machine.

 What this does is it's just an easy way to clean the machine a little bit more prior

 So I'm going to turn it and take this off and it's pretty clean.

 Then the next thing is this filter and if I just take this off first, there's not a

 lot of food on here, just on the little fins, the little wipers.

 And as you can see, the auger here has got a bunch of food particles.

 So, again, I'm going to try to do a quick rinse and that should get rid of most of it.

 They have a tool, it looks like a toothbrush, and a screwdriver.

 And again, the filter's got a bunch of food particles inside there.

 So this is where you're actually going to use the brush the most.

 So then what I do is I'll typically use the toothbrush part right along here on the filter itself

 to try to get rid of, like, I don't know if you can see this, but there's a bunch of carrots

 And that's going to allow you to send water through this angle.

 And so what I'm going to do is, again, I'm going to use the screwdriver end

 And then the last part, typically, here's all the excess stuff, the skin and stuff like that.

 And you can also check out my website or my Twitter feed or my Facebook

 Hi guys, today I'm going to show you how to make an organic moisturizer for your skin.

 Making your own moisturizer saves you money and lets you control the ingredients that

 So we just need two ingredients, organic coconut oil and beeswax.

 We're going to take the coconut oil and beeswax and melt it together over a double boiler.

 I have a pot of simmering water and I'll just put a bowl over it.

 The beeswax takes much longer to melt than the coconut oil, so you could break up the

 Scoop the mixture into a container and store it in the fridge if your house is really warm.

 The moisturizer is a little bit greasier than what you would buy at the store.

 So you have to wait a few minutes for your skin to really absorb the moisturizer.

 This is always a dry spot on my hand and the lotion is doing a really good job of moisturizing

 I'm going to use this lotion on my daughter's hand because I'm not worried about any chemicals

 I'm going to let this harden up in the fridge a little bit more and whip it so it's nice

 This used to be a pear and ginger jam and I love to reuse glass bottles.

 After a few minutes of whipping, the mixture is creamy and fluffy.

 If it starts to get really hot in your house, you could refrigerate the moisturizer.

 If it gets too hot and your lotion starts to melt, you can always cool it and re-whip

 I hope you'll try this really easy way to make your own lotion at home.

 It's organic, it only has two ingredients and it has absolutely no chemicals or anything

 Hi, I'm Natalie from the Missouri Star Quilt Company, and today we're going to show you

 come with a little rubber thing and a pusher, and you can buy refills, and they come in

We have all kinds of sizes, and there's lots of fun things you can do

 First, I'm just going to show you on the back of this kit, there's a guideline.

 you fold this cardboard piece in half, and you cut your circle out, which we've done,

 your fabric around your button, and then you stick this whole thing inside here, press

 it down nice and tight, and then you set this piece on top of it with the little knobby

That's what you will use for your button back and sew on to your project.

 stick that in there, and you push your pusher down, and it pops right in, and then when

 you pull this out, you have a covered button, and they're perfect every time.

One of the things that I do is I take the little metal piece that's right

 nose pliers here, and usually if you just squeeze it, they'll pop right out.

 like to use a piece of pipe cleaner because it has this soft thing on it.

 fuzz and it doesn't grab the kids' hair and rip it out when you take their clippies out.

 So I just cut a little piece, usually a couple of inches long, and these holes are actually

 not quite big enough to put the pipe cleaner through, so I take my little cutting board

 and my hammer and a nail and enlarge the hole so that I can stick the pipe cleaner through

 then what I do is you put it up through the bottom and then you attach your little ponytail

 you have the concave side up because that's going to be the back of your ponytail.

 pull that nice and tight and twist it around and then cut off the little excess pieces

 of your pipe cleaner so that it can lay flat inside the button.

Because ponytail clips take a beating when they're in and out of kids' hair, I'm

 or anything that's nice and secure so that they don't come apart while your kids are

 have an adorable little ponytail holder that looks cute in kids' hair and grown-ups, I

 Hi guys, this is Diana from Sweetie Salado and in this video I'm going to show you how

 To make pan de bonos, I always use a food processor, but you can also mix them by hand.

 And in the food processor, we're going to add some cassava flour, some pre-cooked cornmeal,

 this is the kind that we use to make the arepas, baking powder, sugar, and salt.

 We're going to cover the food processor and pulse a few times to mix all of these ingredients.

 the queso costeño that is used to make the pan de bonos in Colombia.

 We're going to mix all of this and then we're going to add some milk.

 We're going to add it little by little until our dough is nice and smooth.

 Once the dough is ready, we're just going to let it rest for about 10 minutes.

 about the size of a golf ball, and then we're just going to roll it and make a string.

 And to make the round pan de bonos, we're just going to make a ball the size of a golf ball, and that's all.

 We're going to place our pan de bonos on a cookie sheet that has been lined with parchment paper,

 and then we're going to bake them at 425 degrees for about 20 to 25 minutes.

 Please don't forget to subscribe to this channel, and if you want to see the entire recipe,

 If you want to watch more videos, you can click on the video that's playing right now,

 Thanks everybody for watching, and I hope to see you next time.

 And it was brought to the New World by the colonizers to Brazil and Indonesia by the Portuguese and to the Hispanic America by Christopher Columbus.

 Nowadays we have different types of fillings you can put in empanadas.

 I mean, I'm going to do today chorizo and poblano peppers and cheese.

 I mean, there's indefinite amounts of fillings you can put in this dish.

 And you can buy them in any supermarket in the frozen aisle section.

 Like I said, one with chorizo, poblano peppers and chihuahua cheese.

I prefer to do it on bake because it's a little more healthy for you.

 You want to put a little egg wash around the edge so when you seal them, they don't open up when they're baking.

 Before you bake them, you want to put some egg wash on top so they become nice and golden brown when they bake.

 And like I said before, you can use any type of filling you would like for your empanadas.

 We're going to bake this at 375 degrees for about 30 to 35 minutes.

 Our stuffing is already pre-cooked, so it doesn't have to cook.

 Like I said, for about half an hour to 35 minutes at 375 degrees.

 In this lesson we're going to show you how to create this nice eyebrow dormer.

 Done a little bit of setup and I'm going to show you that here.

 If you go to the level 2, which is where the roof is, we've got this roof which is at a

 I've got some reference planes, 8 foot, and you can see these reference planes here that

 If you go to view range, you'll see that on this level 2, I've changed my view range to

 Also on the south elevation, I've got a reference plane up top here at about 7 feet.

 I'm going to start by just clicking on this in place family, delete that, grab this little

 So we'll start by saying on the home tab, we say component, in place family, model in

 Inside of here, it's critical that we say it is a roof category.

 So it talks to this roof and the other walls as far as attachments and stuff go.

 It's going to ask us for a name and inside of here, we're just going to call this eyebrow.

 Now we're in the in place family editor and I'm going to create this with a blend.

 If you click on here and you go to blend and hover, you'll get an extended tip here on

 Now the first thing I have to do, and I'm doing this from my level 2, is go back to

 home because there's no way of setting the work plane on the tab that I'm in.

 I have to go back to home and say set my work plane and I'm going to say pick a plane and

 It's important we pick the front face of where that kind of fascia board is.

 So I'm going to hover over here and you have to be careful because if you pick the sloping

 You don't want the grid line either, although you could use the grid line.

 I'm going to hover over here and I'm going to tab and then you'll see down here.

 And then tab and then pick and it will automatically bump you in and force you to pick an elevation.

 If you don't get this option, then you've picked the wrong plane.

 So now I'm in the front view and I can start to model in that front part of the eyebrow.

 I'm going to hover over here, snap to that point, snap to this point, go up and say eight

 Now I've also noticed that it's easier and it works better if this is created in halves,

 And then it's going to snap to that tangent point, escape, escape.

 Back to home, reference plane, pick on here, drag this, escape, escape.

 Now I can be sure that when I drag this guy back, it's going to snap exactly to the right

 So now I'm going to grab these guys and I'm going to mirror them.

 So I'm going to pick them all, going to go back to here first and then say mirror and

 I'm going to use the axis mirror and pick and mirror that over to there.

 Now I'm going to take all of these guys and I'm going to move them up.

 I can do a measurement and I can measure from here to here and it's 11 and a quarter inches.

 And then I'm going to hover and get this guy right, pick, pick, pick, pick.

 And now I'm just going to draw separate lines from here to here, escape from here to here,

 Now I'm ready to model the back plane or I should say the top profile.

 Now it's important now the steps that I do, you follow these critically.

 I'm going to say edit the top to start with, boom, closes off the front part of the profile

 and now I'm going to edit the top, but I need to go here to level two view.

 And I'm going to say pick a plane, hit okay, pick this back reference plane.

 And it's going to ask me again to switch to a perpendicular view, south elevation.

 We're doing a little bit of back and forth between home and here.

 So I'm going to say use the pick option so I get the same radius and just pick this guy.

 Now I can take this guy and I can just say, you know, move from here up to there.

 Now I can say offset, the same 11 and a quarter, pick, escape, escape on the keyboard.

 Pick a point, okay, and go from there to there, escape, escape.

 Okay, you can click the modify tool here as well instead of hitting escape, escape.

 Now I'm going to grab these guys and same tool, mirror axis, pick on here.

 If I go to my 3D view, and you should do this, you'll notice that this guy's being created

 back there and this guy's being created up here because they're on their correct reference

 Okay, back to my self elevation and I can say, okay, finish the blend, right, and then

 Checking out, and there's the first part of my eyebrow done, but I've noticed from

 experience that this height wasn't enough and it doesn't get pushed back far enough.

 Watch, if you go to your east elevation, you'll see that, and I'm going to pick on this skylight

 You'll notice that it didn't quite reach far enough back here because it was touching on

 You can work out this geometry yourself, but I'm going to click on this guy because it's

 Back to my 3D view and we've got the first part of our eyebrow dormer created.

 And we'll come back in our next part two of our eyebrow dormer lesson and we'll create

 the opening in the roof and we'll also use some line work to create some of these extra

 lines and we might have to do a little bit of tweaking with that to finish it up and

 So the first thing we've done is to locate the bow section of the cover.

 Now the bow section of the cover on the underside has a couple of labels sewn in.

 The first label indicates that this is the bow, because you're going to need to identify

 That will have the part number of the cover, the description of it, and the date of manufacture.

 So now you're ready to stretch this cover out and get ready to put it on the boat.

 And what we're going to do is we're going to roll this thing with the top side up and

 And we've hooked the bow portion of the cover over the very front of the boat.

 When you get to the points of the windshield, or any other sharp area perhaps, you want

 to be a little bit careful as you pull the cover over that, that you don't catch on it

 So as you're doing this, you want to be careful and cognizant of all of those potential areas.

 In the shock cord, this is 316 shock cord that's sewn into the hem.

 You're going to pull this and tighten that fabric up tight against the hull of your boat

 You're simply going to tug on this until you get the right amount of tension around the

 To secure the cover onto the boat to your trailer, we've included these quick-on tie-down

 buckles and eight, eight-foot long pieces of web strap webbing.

 Now what you want to do, find a convenient spot on the trailer, wrap the webbing around

 it, get both ends of the end of the webbing, take the buckles, you're going to loop it

 up through because these are adjustable, and back down through the buckle.

 Okay, before we finish putting the cover on the boat, I wanted to install the three-piece

 So telescope it out, tighten it down with the thumb screws, and typically in a bow rider,

 you're going to want to put the support pole in the cockpit area somewhere behind the windshield

 One thing you want to remember too is if you have a lot of extra strap in certain areas

 around the boat on these tie-downs, feel free to cut these off, but flame the edges so that

 Today I'm going to be showing you a petroleum-based fire starter with petroleum jelly and cotton

 It lights easy and it burns for a long time and you're going to want to use a cheap pie

 You're going to want to put it on a low heat because all you want to do is melt it.

 And if y'all are wondering what that noise is, that is Nanny's cat.

 And you're just going to want to watch it until it melts down and turns into a liquid.

 As soon as it's turned into a liquid, you're going to want to pour it into your cotton

 You kind of have to fluff up the cotton balls a little bit to light it.

 You should have plenty of time to get your kindling around that and get it burning.

 You actually had enough time to go get kindling, come back and put it on this fire and it's

 I'm surprised how well it's doing in this really strong wind and drizzle.

 Our Fritos might have burned longer, but this burned a lot stronger.

 It burned for about six minutes in the wind and the rain and it's a good thing to pack

 version, so if you would like to get more advanced training or learn any other

 song you always wanted to learn how to play on the piano, guitar, violin or sing,

 I put the stickers for those who are still in the process of learning your

 notes, so you can learn this tune fairly fast and play it for your children right

Okay, we're gonna put our thumb of the left hand on middle C and then we

 put thumb of the right hand on D and then place each finger on the following

Okay, we're gonna start very slowly and once you feel comfortable with the

 yeah guys I thought I'd do a little video on a tooltube I made about six

 months ago, eight months ago for my DR650 it was a simple relatively cheap tooltube

 so the bits you'll need will be the connector bit that will fit over the

 90mm pipe with a screw end cap screw thread on the end you'll need a screw

 end cap which will go on there you'll need a standard end cap which will go on this end

 and you'll need a washer rubber washer which will fit within the end cap

 keep it nice and watertight you need some straps there are two different types

 there may be another one but this one's good for say attaching it to a Wolfman

 rack or something like that this one is what I use to attach it to like a piece

 of aluminium which I've attached to the bike which you saw at the start

 I found this bit of foam within the plumbing section I don't know what you call it but I

 use this to go in the end of the pipe to minimize damage done by the tools jarring

 up on down on the end cap it's not very thick plastic so I figured this will at least give this a bit more life

 and I think that's about it in terms of what you need you'll need glue you can use the plumbing

 the plumbing glue or you can use an epoxy an epoxy like this will do just the two two tubes

 that cure you mix them together that'll be fine that's what I used for this video I won't chop

 the pipe mainly because I will be using it again and I don't want to drop it down to a size that

 it's my last little bit and I don't have to go buy another piece because I'm cheap so I think we'll just put this together now

 take the pipe at the correct length get the connector piece with the thread on it you apply

 some glue on the outside here on the inside here attach it like this much easier to do when there's

 no paint on it so do the paint afterwards then you have the end cap with the you don't have to do that

 but just put the rubber seal within the end cap and then the so the foam will go in here

 slide in there epoxy the inside of here for the plumbing stuff glue and then it's done screw on the end cap

 two connector types this one goes over like so and attaches to a bar on the bike like that

 actually used a little bit of aluminium like this that kind of seemed okay it's holding up it's been

 on there for eight months and I haven't had a problem with it yet so I've had this on the bike

 for eight months now with the tools in it I carry the tools everywhere on it basically all the tools

 I need to do most pretty much all the bolts on that I could find on the outside of the bike

 you have to start pulling the engine apart and then you've got serious problems and you can't carry enough tools for that

 but for taking wheels off adjusting handlebars adjusting mirrors brakes chain anything like that

 I've got all the tools on the bike that I can do all that with so they fit all within this little

 this tool tube I've got I've had it on the bike for eight months it's watertight I haven't had any water get in there yet

 and I ride it every day in rain hail or shine it seems to be holding up well I've painted it black

 and every now and again I have to kind of just touch up the black hope you like it please subscribe

 Hello everyone, here is yet another video using my stamping Bella flower garden stamp,

 So I'm using my Versamark clear sticky ink to ink up the stamp, and then I have my Artist

 I've done a review video on them and then I did a full watercolor video using this stamp

 This time, after stamping the Versamark or inking up the stamp with Versamark, I'm going

 The Artist Loft ones are actually really good for this technique because they're kind of

 more chalky than traditional watercolors and I find it just kind of works to hold the

 I don't know, I haven't tried it with other watercolors to see how this effect would be,

 So all I've done after inking up the stamp with Versamark is I've loaded my brush with

 water and kind of pinched off the excess so it's not dripping wet, but still quite wet.

 Then I'm just picking up the color and dabbing it onto the stamp.

 You can mix colors, use just a single color, but all you're doing is picking the color

 up directly onto the brush, loading it really well with color, and then dabbing it on the

 You don't have to be really quick with this because I'm going to show you in a minute

 So I'm just picking it up and like always, I always start with the blooms, it's just

 I always like to do the actual flower first, the petals and everything else.

 So I'm just starting at the top and working my way down to get all the flowers covered.

 Not being super particular, but avoiding the stems and the leaves.

 And I decided to experiment a little bit and add even more color.

 And if you feel like you've added too much, you can just take a piece of paper towel,

 I kind of picked up a little bit so it wasn't a big blob of color, but I really deepened

 And then clean off your brush really, really well, get it wet again, but not completely

 That's a nice thing with this versus using markers, because you don't have to worry about

 So once I've got the whole image colored, I'm going to lay down a towel, I highly recommend

 Lay down a towel to protect your work surface, or you could lay the towel on the floor if

 And then I've just got a misting bottle full of water and I misted it about six-ish times.

 This is something you need to experiment with to see what works for you, how many mists

 You can use watercolor paper, that'll give a really nice effect.

 I wanted to experiment and see how this would look on just regular cardstock, so I've got

 Since it's a line image and I'm not adding any extra water, like I'm not going to fill

 But I had two pieces cut out here and was able to stamp the image twice, once after

 the other without remisting or adding any color, and you get two really nice images.

 And that's the cool thing about this technique, is every time you stamp it, it's going to

 And the more times you stamp it, it's going to get lighter and lighter.

 After I stamped it the two times on the front of the card, I grabbed the image again, I

 haven't added any extra watercolor, and then I misted the stamp about 2-3 more times, and

 then I'm flipping both of the cards over so that I have the inside facing me, and I'm

 You can see every time you stamp it, you're getting it lighter.

 Really fun, and like I said, you can just experiment with this.

 Experiment with the colors, how much color you add, how many times you mist it, what

 types of cardstock you use, there's so many possibilities with this.

 So once I've got the inside stamped, I'm going to dry it all again, and then once I've got

 it completely dry, I'm going to add my sentiments, which again, I'm using my Great Greetings

 stamp set because there's still more sentiments in that set that I haven't used in this whole

 little mini-series of this particular image and these sentiment stamps.

 So I inked up the Friends sentiment stamp from the set with Hero Arts Block Ink, and

 using my stamp positioner again, I'm going to get it lined up on the card here, and I

 always use my grid mat to help line everything up, because the more straight lines I have,

 the easier it is to line things up and eyeball it and get it where I want it.

 So using my stamp positioner, I'm going to get that stamped right onto the card front,

 and then I'm going to flip it over again so I have the inside facing me, and using the

 little Companion stamp, I'm going to use my stamp positioner again to get that lined up.

 I especially like the stamp positioner for really thin sentiment stamps like this that

 It's a real hit and a miss whether or not I get those ones straight.

 So get that lined up and stamp it, and then I'm going to do the exact same thing with

 the other card, but I'm just going to use a couple of different sentiments.

 This was one of the fastest little card sets I think I've ever made.

 I had timed myself once I had filmed this entire video, I've edited out bits and pieces

 It took only about 10 minutes to cover the stamp with colour, spray it, stamp it onto

 I thought I would try while they still had that stamp out and there was still a little

 bit of colour left on it, I wasn't sure if this would work, but I pulled out the towel

 again and spritzed the stamp with water just another couple times.

 I grabbed a couple of white envelopes from my stash and just stamped it onto both the

 Out of that one application of watercolour I got about 6 impressions.

 It's fun, I highly recommend trying it just to experiment with.

 As always there will be a link below the video to my blog post with more info and all the

 I'll also link directly below the video to the supplies as well.

 Thank you guys so much for watching and make sure to thumbs up if you enjoyed my video

 and subscribe if you haven't, and I will see you guys in the next one.

 Okay, we're going to start with the truss rod and it's going to be important that you

 Now, the reason why there's a truss rod on a guitar to begin with is because you have

 The result is that you have a bowing created up towards the strings as a result of that

 A certain amount of bowing is actually very desirable to have smooth playability over

 But if you have too much bowing, for example, you may find that the action is impossibly

 If you don't have enough bowing, then you may find there's some weird artifacts like

 So that bowing, which is referred to as relief, is controllable by a metal rod inside the

 Now on one end of the truss rod is a nut that by tightening it, it actually reduces the

 If you loosen the nut, then it will actually increase the bowing.

 Well, there's a specification for that and we'll cover that in just a second.

 But basically you measure it by laying a straight edge along the entire length of the

 neck and at the midway point you measure that gap from the bowing.

 Now you can use a nice metal straight edge that's cut to the length of the neck, but

 you really don't have to because you already happen to have six very good straight edges

 So therefore the process instead just becomes simply fretting at the first and last fret

 Now in order to do that, you would need three hands or a helper and that's why we're using

 And the capo should sit on top of the fret rather than behind it, the way you might normally

 And then the process therefore becomes using the appropriate thickness gauge, holding down

 Now if you find that you're pushing the string up, that means you don't have enough gap or

 a relief and therefore you actually need to loosen the truss rod nut to increase bowing.

 If on the other hand you still have remaining gap when the thickness gauge is slid in there,

 that means you have too much relief and you'll want to tighten the truss rod slightly.

 Now as far as the net goes, the general specification is to use a ten thousandths of an inch thickness

 And we're going to measure as I said at the eighth fret, so the process simply becomes

 holding down the other fret at the pick guard and then carefully sliding the thickness gauge

 And you're going to want to observe to see if there's sufficient gap.

 In this case I have a little excess gap, meaning I have a little too much relief.

 And any of these adjustments, but especially the truss rod, only make small adjustments

 I happen to know that this neck requires a four millimeter allen key.

 You're going to want to make sure that it's fully seated so that you're grabbing the whole nut.

 Ideally you would give the neck five to ten or more minutes to settle.

 Just because it's made of wood it's going to resist those changes that you've just done

 We don't really have the luxury of the time right now, so we're going to check it again.

 Don't have to have perfect performance style tuning, but have it close enough so the string

 Now normally you'd just move to action, but there's a one-time adjustment or check really

 And that is just take a look at your nut to make sure the clearance is good there.

 But there's a slot for each string and the depth of that slot is very important.

 Now on more expensive guitars, chances are it's going to come from the factory with the

 But maybe on an entry-level guitar like this, it might not be just right and you can otherwise

 Everything seems fine, but you still get some weird artifacts like buzzing.

 And taking a look at the nut might reveal that there's something wrong.

 So again, as a one-time check, it's just useful to get out the thickness gauge again.

 And take a look at the first fret just by sliding the gauge in and having a quick look.

 And the next step we're going to do is go to the action in the next part.

 Today we're going to be working on a 1997 S10 with slight front end damage.

 The bumper, the grille, and the fender are damaged, but their core support is in perfect

 So we're going to start with the fender, and the next two videos will have the grille and

 To gain more room to work on the fender, we're going to loosen the plastic lug nut caps.

 To remove the outer fender, you have to remove the inner fender.

 To remove that, you have to loosen all the bolts holding it in place.

 Once all the bolts are removed, you can take off the inner fender.

 Remove your washer bottle by loosening the bolt fastened to the fender.

 Once the bottle is removed, you can remove the inner fender bolt.

 The ABS brake system is fastened to the inner and outer fender.

 We already removed the inner fender bolts when we took off the inner fender.

 To keep it from the weight of it hanging on the brake lines, we're going to wrap it with this piece of wire.

 Remove the plastic nuts and detach the junction box off the fender.

 Now that the covers are removed, we can access the rear fender bolts.

 Put your new fender on the box it came on and take all your plastic clips and retainers off your old fender and put them on the new fender.

 Once you've switched your accessories from the old fender to the new one, you can put your new fender on the truck.

 Put all your accessories back on the inner fender and put your inner fender back on.

 Make sure you visit our online store to see the inventory of tools.

 If you come back to your car and you see this sticker, this is not good news.

 If you have three or more outstanding with the city of New York, you're going to get

 This is a unique one because what you do is you, if you see that on your car, do not attempt

 What you're going to do is pull one of these stickers off right here and call the 800 number.

 Now if you're thinking about cutting this off yourself, you probably could do it, but

 eventually it's going to catch up to you and they're probably going to charge you $500

 for destroying the boot after you finally get pushed into a settlement.

 You're going to call this 800 number and they're going to ask you for a credit card, your credit

 Once you complete the payment, they're going to give you a code number which we're going

 We got to do it pretty quickly, so they gave me a code of 833-53-POUND.

 Now, you can either bring this to the nearest scrap yard and get $5 of scrap metal, but

 This weighs about 14 pounds and when you're on the phone, they're going to ask you if

 you want to drop it off or if you want an officer to meet you, which will probably take

 I elected to drop it off because I wanted to get this done quickly.

 They're going to make sure that you're capable of taking this off and lifting it because

 They'll give you the procedure that I just showed you, the code, and then they'll instruct

 you to put this in your trunk or the back of your hatch, not the back seat.

 the record, you need to get a capo and you put the capo on the fourth fret.

 The D, the G, and the B. We're going to do all down strokes, straight eighth notes.

We're going to play D chord, then we're going to strum down, down, up, down, up, down, up.

To go to the A chord, we're going to just take our middle finger off and slide our third finger over to the second fret of the B string.

 Then our second finger is going to go on the second fret of the D string.

 Down, down, up, down, up, down, up, down, up, down, up, down, up, down, up.

 Then we go to the G. First finger stays, second finger goes to the third fret of the low E string.

 You're going to play all down strokes now and you're going to accent.

 You're going to go 1 and 2 and 3 and 4 and to accent, you play the notes a little louder.

 On the down beats, the 1, the 2, and the 3 and 4 are going to be a little louder.

 When you're playing the notes on the and of the 1, the 2, and the 3 and the 4, you're not going to strum all the strings.

 Then we go into the chorus, which has the exact same chords as the verse.

 The same strum pattern as the pre-chorus, accenting the down beats.

 Then it's going to kick back to the transitionary D section, where you just strum straight eighth notes.

 You can refer to the PDF for further details on how to arrange each one of those sections.

But if you don't like the wired controller or if you want an external

 micro switch then Fugetti Automations has this new kit that you can buy.

And then the other end plugs into the actuator where the old controller

Now note this only works for the up position not the down position.

 whatever it is you're attaching to this, let's say it's a TV or something, then you'll already

 you may want to adjust and that's what the micro switch is for.

 or your cabinet or whatever it is you're making to the position you want.

 the TV to stop here and I'd screw it into place in the cabinet.

 Ok guys so here's the next basic Clash of Clans creative project I've put together for

 If you're planning on doing a Cosyplay costume of a Clash of Clans Wizard you're going to

 Yeah it's really simple to make and the things you're going to need is the template itself

 So just roughly go around so you leave a bit of white on the edge.

 Now the next stage is to glue all the parts together like that.

 You may want to wait for it to dry and then cut into the flames itself to give it a bit more shape.

 Best option is to let it dry before you do that cut because it will slip.

 So yeah good luck and thumbs up would be awesome if you liked the video.

 A very simple Middle Eastern soup that shouldn't take very long to make.

 Walter, would you begin by rough chopping two cloves of garlic.

 I'll get you a bowl and then we're going to rough chop one onion and a couple carrots.

 The reason rough is good is because, you know, we're going to be using a lot of onions.

 Doing this around medium heat under here, and we're going to put a little olive oil

 And then I'm going to put in rough chopped garlic, onion and carrots.

 Once those are sauteed up, I'm going to drop in the lentils and about three cups of stock.

 The main ingredient in making a good episode of Cassidon's Toy Kitchen.

 Make sure you don't make it yourself or it turns out kind of shitty.

 Okay, we added the lentils and we're adding two cups of chicken stock here.

 But all together we're going to add four cups of chicken stock.

 Stir that up and we'll bring that sucker to a boil and then simmer it for 30 minutes.

 It's going to be somewhat of a liquidy soup, so we're going to add stock as needed to this.

 We're going to serve it with lemon slices and a little bit of Brayden's fingers.

 Hey everybody, thanks for coming back for video two of Your Girl Be Cute and today we're

 All these women who want the illusion of fuller, bigger, more sensual, sexy, mmm, mmm, mmm.

 I just happen to be blessed by Jesus and I just got every single bit of lip that's been

 I feel like it's some kind of discrimination that there are no tutorials on how to make

 So here I am and I'm gonna tell you how to make your lips smaller.

 I'm using whatever this is cause I don't, I don't fucking care.

 We want to kind of look like Slender Man when we're done, okay, right?

 What we're gonna do is we're gonna take our brush, whatever this brush is for.

 We're gonna take this brush and we're gonna take this light powder stuff

 Now that it looks like we turned tricks on the corner for cash, or not,

 Make sure you choose the color that you like for your new lips.

 You have to make sure that it's a great color and it's very pigmented

 because right now you need to make sure that people don't focus on the fact that you look weird as fuck.

 You want to start on the inside of your mouth because that's still the inside of your mouth.

 Lining your lips brings definition to them and it'll make you look less fucking crazy.

 You probably think I look pretty ridiculous, but I promise you, I'm not done yet.

 Now the contouring is gonna be underneath our lips because we want it to look like we have the shadow of our natural lips still.

 So we're gonna take this motherfucking brush again and we're gonna take a darker foundation powder

 Take your foundation, your light foundation, and you're gonna want to make a V on top of your lip.

 If you want to, you can add lip gloss, but I don't because it'll just mess your shit up.

 So now whenever you take pictures with people, you don't have to feel awkward that you're that weird chick with the huge lips in the picture.

 I had a lot of fun filming it because real life is just, it's a struggle to have these big ass lips all day, every day.

 I can't get rid of them, but regardless, if you guys liked the video, please subscribe.

 It's like two fucking vagina lips staring at you because it's friggin' pink.

 of spaghetti that goes around everything on the front of the engine.

But when you start to see little cracks in the belt, much like you see

 there, is, go in, you'll notice that that is, will work with a 3-8ths ratchet.

 you need a 3-8ths ratchet to get that sucker loose, you just put the head of the ratchet

 Once you've found the tensioner, you're going to get up in there and knock that sucker loose.

So now you've got the belt loose off of one of those, you just take it

 There's two things that are going to help you get the belt back on.

 diagram similar to this one that shows you the routing of the belt.

 this little arrow, represents the tensioner with AC, without AC.

So logically speaking, as you're wrapping this thing around all the accessories that

 are on here, make sure the grooves are on the grooved pulleys and smooth is on the smooth

Take both of your belts, stretch them out, thumb to thumb, like this, and make sure

 Now that you've got it this far, start threading it down there.

 A lot of being a mechanic is contorting yourself in unnatural positions.

If I remember my diagram right, sorry if I'm nudging you around a little bit.

 It's going to be extremely hard to show you exactly what's happening here, but I'm going

Now that I've got it basically on, I'm going to pull that tensioner as far as you

 sure that the belt is relatively all the way on because you don't want to start it up and

 Sometimes you have to get low on the ground and get dirty to get it done.

When you're doing stuff like this, look around for a better solution.

 lesson we're going to take the same approach from last time and shift it to the left.

 going to take each system one by one and play it between our left hand and left foot.

 also going to play all the remaining systems on top of it between our right hand and right

Since these exercises between both sides of our body are kind of difficult we're going

 hand and left foot while playing alternate sticking between right hand and right foot.

 For the rest of our exercises I picked paradiddles between my left hand and left foot while playing

 Alright now we're going to put our sugar, about three-fourths a cup of sugar.

 you heard earlier I broke my candy thermometer just a little while ago.

 of water and it'll form a real kind of hard ball and we'll be alright.

And you can do this green, you know, lime for Christmas, and red,

 Always have corn syrup on hand, because it just uses a little bit of corn syrup.

 You'll use it, just a little bit of it out, but this is a great way to use your corn syrup.

Okay, I'm going to set that one back in the oven while I'm stirring this one up.

 we had the dessert where you put the Snickers bars and the pudding and apples and Cool Whip in it.

 We're going to wait five minutes and turn it and cook it for five more.

 really there's not a difference in it, and it doesn't affect the taste at all, I don't think.

 Hey guys, so today I'm going to be doing this glittery cut crease tutorial for you

 This is going to be a great look for like a holiday party where you may be going out and you want to look a little

 Glitzy, but still neutral and if you were also wondering how I do a cut crease, this is definitely the video for you

 Products, I'll probably do two more and yeah, but I wanted to do a neutrally look first

 It's still a little more intense and great for a party because you have the intense cut crease as well as the glittery

 Please don't forget to go check out my Instagram page and follow me on Instagram where you will be able to see kind of

 The first when I first do a video I will usually post up little sneak peeks

 Videos that are coming up as well as other things that I'm doing.

 I will also be showing you two different lip looks with this more neutral as well as a red lip option

 Thank you for subscribing and all your support and if you want to see how I did this then please keep on watching

 $1 crease brush and we're just going to start by putting that in our crease and

 You next want to go into ground brown with a very very very tiny

 Angled brush mine is from Michaels craft store and we're just gonna start creating our crease

 Go more towards the upper part of my eyebrow in the inside as opposed to dipping down

 Then I am just taking more of the ground brown on a pencil brush from Sedona lace and just starting to blend that out

 And I'm gonna go in with ground brown mixed in with kid eye shadow and use both of them to really blend that out

 To make sure that it's very soft and you just want to keep doing this until it is as soft and blended as you feel

 Is necessary and I'm also gonna sort of pull that out a little bit on the end

 I'm then again gonna go in with typographic on the same little angled brush and put that just in the outer half of the crease

 And then you can go back in with a pencil brush to blend that in and that's just gonna even further make this a really precise

 so you don't always concealer brush and I'm just gonna pat that all over the lid area up to the line that we created and

 Then after that I'm dipping into max 3d gold glitter which has come out with the new

 Pigment sets for this holiday season so you can go get those if you're not in your post or and I'm just gonna press that

 I'm making sure it's really concentrated on the eyelid as well as right up to that line

 and then with any excess after I've really pressed that on you want to press it into the inner corner and

 my lash line going pretty thin on the inner corner and then pulling that out in a really long wing and

 Just take your time with this because it is a little bit harder to do winged eyeliner when you're going over top of glitter

 So you're gonna have to make a couple passes to make it really black and I am making this liner really intense and long

 And just filling that in like I said, but not making it too thin

 so after that I am putting that gel liner also on my waterline all the way across from the inner corner to the outer corner and

 then I'm gonna go back and what type of graphic and that same angle brush just to deepen up the crease and

 Further make it nice and precise and make sure no glitter is kind of going over top of it on the outer corner

 And then finally I smudged ground brown under my entire lower lash line

 after that I went in with my Demi wispies from salon perfect and

 L'Oreal telescopic extensions mascara and here are the finished eyes

 Next for the face I use my mineralized skin finish in dark to do a subtle contour and I also use my

 Estee Lauder heat wave highlighter for a highlight all across my cheekbones and down the center of my face

 Which is a really pretty dark pink color and I just apply that on my cheeks

 And then after that I'm doing the first lip look so I'm first taking half-and-half lipstick from Mac

 And I'm not using liner with this and then I just applied flair for finery on top

 Just to lighten it up a little bit and that is what it looks like with the first lip look so it makes it a

 Lot more natural and easy to wear with the being paired with a nude lip

 I am then going to show you a red lip so this is cherry lip liner from Mac and

 Again, we're gonna go in and fill our entire lips in with this color

 Making sure to line it this time with a lip liner makes it a lot more precise

 and then of course filling them in to make sure the lipstick lasts all night long and

 Then after that the lipstick we're gonna use is Viva Glam 4 which is a really beautiful sheer ready

 With golden kind of shimmer to it, so I just applied that on top

 They both look really great either way, so thank you so much for your support and your comments, and I will see you next time

 double-sided tape from 3M which is rated for 100 below zero to 300 degrees.

 it is that in the kit comes the alcohol wipes and you'll wipe down the ceiling.

 screwdriver and you place it right into the center of the screw up just to make

And what's really important is over here on your left hand, you'll feel the

This is the one accessory that you'll buy for your Jeep that you'll appreciate

Chef Gary Mastropolo, the man who always puts me to work, is back to show us how it's done.

 And what I'm going to have you do is coat that sheet with the pastry brush and some oil right there.

 You're not going to make me flip dough again like you did last time?

You could roll it out if you want at home, but we do it a little different at Marco Polo.

 All right, so then you're going to... The oils, this is coated with the oil.

And we're going to stretch this out so that it's a little bit wider than the tray.

 No, but you can come down, if somebody mentions your name today,

Now, the next thing I'm going to do is have you grab that cheese,

 and you're going to sprinkle a coating right across the top of this.

 Even if I was doing awful, I have a feeling you'd tell me I was doing great.

And then we'll do salt, a little salt, a little bit of pepper to taste.

 Okay, and what we're doing is we're going to bake it off here for five to seven minutes,

 is when we take it out, we're going to just melt the mozzarella on top and it'll be ready to serve.

 So you don't have to put it back in the oven, it'll be that hot that the mozzarella...

So we go back into the magic oven and what comes out is a beautiful...

 Mention Sonia and get a complimentary 21-ounce dough with any purchase today at Marco Polo.

And if you want the recipe for grandma's focaccia pizza from Marco Polo,

 Okay, in the shop I'm going to put the bolts into all my link bars.

 I bought a 4 inch 9 16ths bolt because that's what goes through here.

 These link ends came with the bushings and with the sleeve that goes into them.

 Your suspension is very important to keep the right bolts on there.

 Otherwise they can wear down and they'll break and then you're, yeah, in a ditch somewhere.

 So the way this works out, turn it sideways, there's, what I left enough room for was,

 it's another half an inch longer because when we put the link tabs on, got to make the link

 So there has to be at least a half an inch and you have to be able to get that bolt on

 And you want to get a bolt four inches long with these, this is two inches, so you want

 four inches long and then you want a flat washer, flat washer, lock washer and then

 Alright so what I did was I measured back here, three inches, straight across and then

 Then I measured two inches across at the top and I drew my lines straight down.

 I found something that was two inches and I laid it up there and it matches at the top.

 Now this edge right there, what I did was I found a bottle that was the same size around

 They'll be pretty much the same way like this, just they won't have this cut out at

 So I need 12 straight ones and then a bunch of, and then four curved ones.

 I'm doing all my primary cuts first, straight down, straight up.

 And then I'll go back in and I'll grind that down, smooth them out, make them all look

 I've already gone through two cutting wheels and I'm on my third one and I'll be able to

 Make sure that when you're using it, just kind of let it fall on it.

 It's also easier on the brushes in your angle grinder and it's easier on the cutting tool

 To make that round cut easier, do that and then come in at an angle like this.

 And that way it comes out like that and you can finish it off with your table grinder

 If not, they make a grinding wheel for these like I did on my last one.

 And then like I always do, take and strap that to your sawhorse and then you can hold

 Make sure you wear gloves and you can hold those by hand and you can grind them out smooth.

 Well my grinder in there, it doesn't have the proper wheels so I had to bring them out

 And then I'll take them and I'll round them off on the ends with this.

 I've got it set up on the edge of my truck and I'll get it grinded down.

 So the reason there's no holes in them, I checked the local stores around here and 916th

 That should be here in the next three or four days so I'll just drill those out next weekend.

 You don't want to let your bit get over hot and so you just make your way through the

 I'll drill 16 holes next weekend and I'll start getting this mocked up.

 The reason these ones are as long as they are is because I want them completely adjustable.

 So all these will be getting cut at a certain point once I figure out exactly where they're

 I think next week it's going to be mounting all the link bars as best I can and start

 Today I'm going to show you one of my favorite unorthodox tools in the kitchen

I probably burned a little extra there just making sure that I'm thorough.

 I just don't think it's right to serve tomatoes cold or any other way with the

 Now once we've got it up, bring it under here under some water and the skin just wipes right off.

 This really comes in useful when you have scars on your homegrown fruit like this here.

 Especially if you're putting it up at this time of the year when it gets quite windy.

 The nice thing about this method is if you have fruit that's really getting ripe and has some soft spots on it,

 you can clean away all of the fruit and all of the soft spots and still save the majority of the fruit before it's opened up.

 And today we're going to put some of them up because we're just getting too many ripe.

 I don't know about you, but I really like Benedictine, and so I like to find drinks

 And I really like gin too, but there's a lot of drinks that use gin, so it's not that

 This drink is going to be similar to a martini, a standard dry martini using Dry Vermouth,

 except the Benedictine is going to add a slightly different character to it.

 Benedictine has a lot of herbs in it, and a little bit of sweetness is going to bring

 It's got a lot of different flavors in it, herbs and botanicals that are taking and blending

 Both the Vermouth and the Benedictine also have a lot of herbs in them, and so together

 they're just kind of forming all these different flavors that you can almost pick out each

 one individually, and that they're combining together at the same time.

 Today's recipe, what you're looking at in front of you here, Cassava Dumplings.

 Basically, cassava, flour, a pinch of baking powder, some salt and water.

 I have it here with some salt-fish buljowl, which can also be found on the website CaribbeanPot.com.

 But today we're going to focus on the dumplings here, on the bottom of the salt-fish buljowl.

 Remember guys, if you're watching this on YouTube, feel free to leave me a comment below.

 As well as, I'd really appreciate it if you guys were to subscribe to the channel, as well as share the video with your friends.

 I'm not sure if you can use frozen cassava for this, but I'm certain you can use cassava flour if you can find it.

 The only difference is, with the cassava flour, it will have a different texture than with the actual grated fresh cassava.

 What you see in front of you here now, I've got 1 cup of the grated cassava, which is on the bottom.

 This is how we're going to go about doing the dough for the cassava dumplings.

 I really can't comment and tell you how much water you're going to need.

 Because again, I can't tell how moist your cassava is going to be.

 I know I need to add water, so I'm going to start adding water 1 tablespoon at a time.

 I'm guessing I'll need about 1-2 tablespoons of water in this to make the firm dough that I'm looking for.

 After I've worked in the flour, grated cassava, as well as the pinch off baking powder.

 I ended up using anywhere from 4-5 tablespoons of cool water in making this dough.

 So I was a bit wrong, I was a bit off in the earlier clip that I took.

 What I'm going to do now is get some plastic wrap, cover this bowl and allow it to rest.

 Then we're going to work the dough a little bit more into forming the dumplings that we're going to be boiling.

 In the meanwhile, I have here about 7 cups of water coming to a boil.

 Once it comes to a boil, I'm going to put about a tablespoon of salt in there.

 I'm just going to cut this up into 8 pieces and then I'm going to show you guys how to form it into the actual dumplings.

 The ones I'm going to show you, if I recall correctly, I think they're called Sailors.

 As soon as the water comes to a boil, we're going to add them to there and let them cook for about 5-10 minutes or so.

 Until they start floating, that's an indication as to know that they're done cooking.

 I've divided the main dough ball, as I mentioned before, into 8 somewhat similar in size pieces.

 These are the ones we're going to be using to make the dumplings.

 I'm going to get 8 dumplings from these and I'll show you now how to form it into the Sailor dumplings.

 All you do is grab one of them, give it a roll, and then using both hands and your fingers, gently squeeze on it, forming.

 Some people tend to call this cattle tongue or cow tongue because of the shape of it.

 After we've formed them all, what we're going to do now is, the water is boiling over here.

 So pretty much I'm going to make the rest of them, add them to the pot.

 I think it's going to cook for 5 to 10 minutes or so and it's going to float and it's going to be all done.

 As you can see, they're all floating at the top now, which is a clear indication that they're all done cooking.

 It took maybe about 4 to 5 minutes for them to cook thoroughly through here.

 I said another name for this dumpling is, some people call it Sailors.

 I'm guessing it's because it floats and it can sail away on you.

 I'm going to be having these dumplings with some Salt Fish Buljol that I made earlier.

 On the website CaribbeanPot.com, you'll surely find that Salt Fish Buljol recipe on there as well.

 Basically, it's salted cod fish with onions, peppers and tomato.

 Together with this Salt Fish Buljol, I'll be having the Cassava dumplings.

 You can certainly eat it very basic with just some olive oil on there or some salted butter.

 You can re-fry it up with some onions, garlic, peppers and stuff like that.

 I'm going to be having mine with the Salt Fish Buljol I showed you guys earlier.

 Alright, I'm going to start off by making the filling for the pancakes and there are

 Anyway, I'm also doing the quarter recipe so I won't give you the ingredients or the

 I've gone ahead and melted my butter and I'm going to add in my powdered sugar and I found

 this filling to be rather runny so I'm going to make this first and then while I'm making

 the pancakes and so on I can put this in the freezer to set up just a little bit.

 So I've got my sugar in there, now I'm just going to add my cinnamon, not that much cinnamon.

 Add my cinnamon like that and then just stir this around to combine them.

 Make sure everything, all the sugar and cinnamon is dissolved as best as you can get it and

 then the recipe says to use a piping bag, I'm not going to use a piping bag for this,

 Quick little tip for you, if you put the bag into a one cup measuring cup, glass, fold

 the top down, it holds the bag for you and then you can just go ahead and pour this in

 and then I'm going to put this into the freezer while we are making the pancakes.

 Alright I've got my cinnamon filling chilling in the freezer and in my mixing bowl here

 I've already got my flour, I'm going to add in the baking powder and salt and I'm just

 going to give this a quick little mix here, don't have to be real precise.

 To this I'm going to add my milk and vegetable oil and also an egg and I will just give this

 a quick little mix, you don't want to over mix this batter, it's just like making regular

 pancakes, you can use really any pancake mix that you like if that's what you prefer but

 But anyway don't over mix it, leave a little bit of lump there, that's perfectly fine and

 actually what you want so make sure you get up all the ingredients off the bottom of the

 Alright I've got my griddle set up on my stove, the heat is on low and I've been having this

 warm up for a while now, I put it on to preheat before I even started making the pancake mix.

 The recipe says to use an electric griddle set at 325, I don't have one so anyway I've

 lightly sprayed this with non-stick spray and I'm going to take a third of a cup measuring

 cup, pour out my batter like so, spread it out just a little bit and then my filling

 that I have here, I'm just going to snip off the very end of the bag here, I don't want

 And then while your pancake is cooking you're just going to swirl this filling on top of

 Once you start to get bubbles in your pancake like that and they start to pop it's usually

 So I'm just going to go ahead and flip that and you'll see how light the pancake is, that's

 And after this is cooked for about 15 to 20 seconds you want to go ahead and flip it back

 And then go ahead and continue making the rest of your pancakes.

 Spread it out just a little bit, take your filling and swirl it around.

 And this filling actually melts when you flip the pancake over and it makes the little grooves

 Alright, now that my pancakes are cooked I'm going to go ahead and make the frosting.

 I've just got some powdered sugar here and some softened butter.

 It's 7 o'clock on a Saturday morning, I'm not going to the grocery store to get cream

 I'm just going to put a little bit of milk in there and I'm just going to stir this up

 And you just want it to come together nice and smooth until it's a drizzling consistency.

 If it's too thick for you just add a little bit more milk for you or to it.

 Then I'm just going to take my plate of cinnamon roll pancakes here that smells so delicious

 Thank you April so much for posting this recipe to my Facebook.

 drink that when you look at the ingredients on paper, makes no sense at all, but when

 you put them together in a glass in the right way, makes perfect sense.

 lemon juice, some simple syrup, some heavy cream, a few dashes of orange flower water,

 half an ounce of fresh lemon juice, a half an ounce of lime juice, three quarters of

 an ounce of simple syrup, and half an ounce of heavy cream, a few dashes of orange flower

You want to go sparingly on this because too much of it will cause your drink to taste

Add the egg white, crack the egg, separating the yolk from the white.

 have all that, we're going to give it a dry shake, which just means we're going to shake

This drink, in order to get that light airiness, requires a lot of shaking.

Strain all of that into a chilled Collins glass, and then pour a little

 will pick up any residual egg white that's in the tin and give the drink a frothier head.

 Pouring that slowly on top of the cocktail that you just put into the chilled Collins

 Hi, this is an exercise I've written called Blue, inspired by a melody from a Blue Man

 group song, which I'm going to play on my left hand and kind of solo around that.

 I kind of broke the flow of the ostinato, or that melody that was going on towards the

 end, but this will give you kind of some ideas for where you can take a four measure phrase

 like this, based off of that rhythm, bouncing back and forth between two toms.

 You've got two feet and your most proficient limb, your right hand, that you can do potentially,

 really, whatever you want to do on top of that ostinato or any other.

 Hi everybody, it's Miles from Miles Ahead again and today we're going to talk about

This is the head joint of a flute and up on this end of the head

 rod and the tuning rod should have a little mark on it that will help you gauge where

 will be a player or your students, if you're a teacher, while they're sitting there, they

 may just inadvertently start turning the cap on the end of the head crown, on the end of

 the cork will keep moving and sooner or later the flute is going to play poorly because

 a cork is very old, pretty soon the cork will become loose in the head joint.

 the head crown cork may just fall out of the flute all together.

Now the head crown cork should be very tight when it's in the head joint.

 Not overly tight, but I should not be able to pull it out like this.

 minutes before your concert and your first flute player comes to you and says, Mr.

 the gauge on it and line it back up in the middle of the blowhole on the head joint.

 Hi, I'm Amy from Mod Podge Rocks, a blog about crafting with Mod Podge.

 to address one of the most common problems that people write me about when they're Mod

They get horrible wrinkles and bubbles in their paper and they're thinking, what

 I'm going to show you what you can do to avoid the wrinkles and the bubbles.

 out my finished plaque right here, I'm ready to do a project, but I want to show you how

 I got to this step which is completely flat paper Mod Podge to a wood surface.

 coat a plaque with whatever color you'd like, you cut your paper to fit, and then there's

Don't do this inside because you're going to choke everybody out,

 but what you want to do is spray the front of the paper, the back of the paper, and then

 take water in just any kind of a spray bottle, take the back of your paper, base up, and

 actually blot it because you don't want it soaking wet, just a little bit damp.

 Mod Podging just to get it going, and I dip it straight into the jar because I'm crazy

 Mod Podge dries quickly, and if you feel uncomfortable doing the entire plaque at once,

 work one end, push the paper down, and then work the other end, but I'm just going to

 bit more Mod Podge, actually a medium layer over on the side here, and you just keep adding.

 You might feel like you're putting too much on, and I'm a messy crafter, so you get to

You might feel like you're putting too much on, but the good news is that if

You'll be taking your brayer, rolling out as many of those wrinkles as you

The top seems wrinkly, and that's okay because actually as the paper dries, the wrinkles

 will dissipate and go away, so you're not going to have that problem as long as you

 make sure to brayer the plaque completely, and to get all the paper smoothed down.

 if you see any edges where it's coming up, like right over here, you just tuck some Mod

 Podge underneath with your brush, grab your brayer, smooth it down, and then wipe away

For project ideas, visit Mod Podge Rocks at modpodgerocks.blogspot.com.

 Howdy folks how is it going welcome to my virgin kitchen it is Barry here with Boston

 Today I am making some jagermeister chocolate truffles, obviously I need to wash my hands

 first but check them out they are looking gorgeous, they are super easy to make, I was

 sent this recipe and you can tweak it you do not have to use jagermeister you can use

 any alcohol you want or even keep them non alcoholic you are going to love this.

 Ok pause the video now, write all these ingredients down, yeah baby.

 My random shoutout for this video goes to Paul at pmduk69 I just tweeted out that I

 was making these jagermeister truffles and he replied just remember not to drink the

 So some of you guys that have been here in the past quite a lot you will know that I

 have done quite a bit with jagermeister and we do get on quite well, some quite funny

 videos you may have missed out but anyhow the ingredients we have here are a knob of

 butter, this is a mixture of dark and milk chocolate but you could use just dark if you

 want it a bit more rich, some whipping cream here aka double cream here in the UK and of

 Now the first step guys we are going to pour our cream into the bowl above the water that

 I am bringing up to that slow simmer, now you do not have to do it like this you can

 actually pour the cream straight into the pan and warm it through but I am just going

 to find it a bit easier doing it this way when we add our chocolate into the milk.

 If there is any cream left over you can do it like this, you do not have to do that.

 Might as well make sure all the cream is in there, a spatula is also very important in

 Alright I can just hear the water in the pan is beginning to simmer which is going to warm

 up our cream so we want to get our cream not piping hot ok so we can stick our finger in

 it for a couple of seconds and then we will add our chocolate and butter into this party.

 Keep going, keep going, keep going, keep going, keep going, keep going, keep going,

 keep going, keep going, keep going, keep going, keep going, keep going, keep going, keep going.

 Alright we are now at the stage where our cream is getting nice and hot so what I am

 going to do is grab my chocolate which I have put into a bowl for convenience so I can tip

 it in a bit easier and just add it straight into that cream and let that residual heat

 in there, keep it moving around, melt the chocolate and cream all together.

 Oh my goodness I am absolutely loving this texture and you know what I was saying earlier

 about the spatula I just love how you can just swipe and take stuff away from the side

 of the bowl so it is now ready for our knob of butter which is right here, our knob of

 Butter, oh chap, there we go, our butter is sat straight in there and of course our jagermeister

 so around 2 shots of the alcohol of your choice so if I am using jagermeister, yep that is

 Ok so this gets it a nice little spank you can definitely taste it but feel free to ramp

 it up if you need to so I am just going to stir this through now get it all nice and

 incorporated oh my goodness ok then folks it is looking good the jagermeister and the

 butter has fully combined in there so I am taking it off of the heat away from that water

 and I am going to let that cool down for 5 minutes and then I have some good news and

 Alright then folks so here is the bad news, well basically you have to leave it for quite

 a while now and also you have to play around with clingfilm and if you are anything like

 me you get it all over the place so basically you need to line your bowl you need to push

 it right in to the mixture ok and get it nice and sealed with clingfilm and you have to

 put it in the fridge for 5 hours at an absolute minimum but I recommend putting it in overnight.

 Alright so that is going in my fridge for ideally overnight as I say but luckily for

 you guys guess what I did last night, yes that is right I already made some so this is some

 refrigerated truffle mixture ready to go after about 5 hours you could touch it it

 is still quite soft and tacky but leave it overnight and it is super firm which will

 Ok then folks so the final stretch peeling off our clingfilm from our firm but fair it

 is almost like a brick truffle mixture right there but it is very important to keep your

 hands cold during this step what you will also need is some cocoa powder so a nice little

 bowl to roll it in and a board to place it on so all I am going to do is grab a teaspoon

 and scoop some of the mixture out so about a teaspoon full here we go like that see that

 I just want to eat that right now but instead with cold hands I am going to take that bowl

 roll it up so as we roll it up our hands get warm and the heat is going to make it melt

 With your bowl all done you roll it in the cocoa powder push it all around there use

 another spoon if you like get it all nice and coated oh yeah baby and then just sit

 it on your board so I am going to repeat that step lots of times and that is it.

 After a good old session of rolling I have done at least 20 here I think it is about

 22 or 23 like that and I still have a good amount of the mixture left I am thinking just

 for me on my own that is quite enough so I think it is only fair that it is time to taste

 them they have held their shape and obviously adding that cocoa powder on it really finishes

 it off and makes it look quite sophisticated even though it is loaded with jagermeister

 Oh my gosh I am in jagermeister heaven I do not recommend that you wash it down with some

 jagermeister there is just enough of a spank in there of the jagermeister if you want it

 stronger feel free to ramp it up and let me know how you get on but it is just enough

 I really hope you give this recipe a go if you do send me a picture at my virgin kitchen

 I love to see all of your recipe attempts and if there is anything you want to see me

 Enjoy the video guys check out my last video if you have not already I love you so much

 Looking at a new vise today, and a vise that I'll bet you you've never seen anything that

 You know, Thompson's been making vises for a long, long time, and most of the traveling

 vises and some of the old came out with some of the first cam type vises that there are,

 But I think they made the decision that they were going to go ahead and come up with something

 All these different machine holes in here are really designed to actually hold different

 The one accessory that I do have here is the bobbin cradle that you can move out of the

 way when you're not using it, obviously, like all of them, and you can rest your bobbin

 For those of you that have not used a rotary vise before, I guess I'd highly recommend

 I just recently have been spending more and more time working with rotaries, and even

 though you don't really use the rotary function of it per se on a lot of flies, it does give

 you an opportunity to look at different perspectives of the fly as you're tying it to help it balance

 When you do have the opportunity to wrap chenille or something like that, this gives

 you the opportunity just to very, very simply and easily wrap the chenille on a fly, something

 And then you can come back here, tighten that down, a couple of half hitches here to

 If you were going to...as I'm tying this fly, as I'm looking at it, if I wanted to check

 out different aspects of it, or say I was going to be a bonefish fly, I shouldn't say

 a bonefish fly, say I was going to be doing a clouser or something like that, I can tip

 it up, tie on the bottom part, and then tip it back down again and finish it off.

 You regulate how easy it is to rotate with this thumb screw right here.

 You can keep these rotators pretty loose because they hold their position very well.

 You put the hook on here with this little T-bar attachment that tightens up the vise

 and you manage the gap on your jaws with these two screws right here.

 You can just pull it out of the case, and by the way, I was pretty surprised when I

 All you have to do, there's two hex head set screws in the bottom.

 When you go tying someplace with some of your buddies in the fishing club or whatever and

 you pull this baby out, they're going to go, oh my God, what is that?

 And you can also take a look at some of the accessories that come with this vise that

 you just kind of plug into the hole here, much like this one is here.

 They just have a thing that just fits right in there and it works out really good.

 I think when you see one, you'll agree that it's never been a vise that looks quite like

 As you can tell, one of my eyes is a model lid and the other one is a double eyelid.

 So I'm going to be using these double eyelid tape which I bought from Daiso.

 Window the tape with tweezers to prevent oil marks from your finger.

 So place the tape right over your crease to create a deeper and bigger crease.

 Next, using a liquid liner, create a thick line overlapping the tape.

 Hello, it's me Gemma and I am about to cook something really tasty and summery and fresh.

 The first thing you're going to need is 185 grams of self-raising flour.

 Next I've got 150 grams of pistachio nuts which I basically bashed up with a rolling

 The next thing you're going to need is probably the best bit I'd say which is ground cardamom.

 And inside, if you bash them with a pestle and mortar, inside you'll see these little

 And what you want to do is bash them up and get those seeds out and then in your pestle

 and mortar just grind it up until it's really nice and fine like that.

 Start on a low speed and increase to a medium speed and you need to beat that together for

 Right, so once that's had a minute, turn it off and then I've got 125 grams of plain yogurt.

 You can also bake this in an 8 inch round springform or just regular cake tin.

 So then we just need to bake it at 170 degrees C for about an hour or until a skewer which

 Right, so the cake's had an hour in the oven and I'm just going to take it out and check

 it with a skewer and if the skewer comes out clean then it's ready.

 Doesn't need any more cooking so just leave it to one side to cool down a bit and we're

 I'm going to make some delicious lime syrup to pour all over the top.

 You just need 125 grams of caster sugar and pop it in a little saucepan like so.

 And then you need to have the juice of two limes but first I'm going to zest one and

 So just use a microplane like this, a nice fine one or just a grater, a fine grater is

 Right, so that's all ready for later and then just the juice of two limes, just cut them

 Right, and then just finish that off with 75 millilitres of water and then it's ready

 Right, so you need to just put it on a low heat, well medium low and then bring it to

 the boil, stirring occasionally and we're just going to make a syrup so we're not going

 So this will take about four minutes, stirring every now and then and then it will be syrupy

 Right, so once it's had a couple of minutes on the boil, get that lovely zest that you

 took off your lime and pop it in and then cook for a further couple of minutes.

 Oh, it's already, the zest is starting to make this really fragrant.

 Right, so that's had five minutes boiling and it's gone really nice and syrupy, it hasn't

 So we're going to take it off the heat and put it on a heat proof mat.

 So I've got a handful of pistachio nuts, I'd say maybe 80 grams and I'm just going to roughly

 Right, so my cake's still warm but it's cool enough to handle so I'm just going to turn

 That's going to help all the syrup absorb into the cake and then just pour it all over.

 We're going to sprinkle the pistachios on and it's going to all stick to it and it's

 So just leave that to cool completely and then it's time to eat it.

 Well I hope you enjoyed that, thank you very much for watching and this recipe happens

 to be one of the recipes in my book which is coming out in June so if you'd like to

 And if you haven't subscribed to my channel already then you should definitely do that

 because there's loads more yummy things to bake so do that by clicking on this link and

 I think I better eat some of this cake now because it's kind of winking at me.

 The Blade II is a low profile wall furniture unit perfect for mounting under a TV or as

 It provides hassle free cable and component management and is easy to install in just

 First, fold down the support shelves from the wall plate and secure them using the provided

 Then, being careful not to over tighten, screw the cover clips into the back of the cover

 Next, choose the location where you want to mount your wall furniture and use a stud finder

 Use the wall plate as a template, make sure it's level and mark your pilot holes.

 The unit can be mounted using single or double stud installation.

 Install the glass shelves on the support shelves, being careful not to over tighten.

 Partially install the wall frame cover, then route your component wires and snap the cover

 With its thin profile and sleek design, the Blade II is the perfect complement to LED,

 It has a low 1.2 inch mounting profile, cable management and is simple to install with a

 It can be mounted under a flat panel or as a stand alone unit and multiple units can

 The Blade II also comes with a complete hardware kit and a 5 year warranty.

 Plus it can be mounted to a single or double stud and is paintable to match any wall color,

 The only thing that takes time in this is cutting all the vegetables.

 What we have here are fresh mushrooms, and we have sun-dried tomatoes, which have been

 pre-soaked, not pre-soaked, steamed and not soaked, so the steaming allows you to keep

 And we have in there julienne of carrots, tomato, mushrooms, garlic, basil, salt and

 We will start cooking this, and then you will cook your pasta separate.

 And we have heavy cream and white wine, and this will be a delicious topping for any type

 So we will set the flame on high, and you can get a good look at the vegetables, the

 There you have the onions julienne, those little fancy tomatoes.

 Take each one and slice it lengthwise, about five or six slices out of each, it cooks faster.

 And carrots, nice and thin, and all of these items will cook at about the same amount of

 The garlic is in there, all the seasonings, the olive oil, the only thing that's not in

 And the sun-dried tomatoes, since they are very soft now because they were steamed already,

 I will be stirring this, and once all the vegetables are tender, at that point I will

 be adding the white wine, wait a minute, and then I will add the heavy cream.

 And then just keep it off to the side, and cook your favorite pasta.

 You strain your pasta, don't ever wash your pasta after you cook it.

 Strain it, put it into your platter, put the sauce on top, toss a little, serve your cheese

 Keep the flame at its highest point, you don't have to worry too much about anything burning

 in here, because we have two items which give off a lot of moisture.

 So it will take a long time before you really get any color on anything, and we're not looking

 Now if I had some green peppers, I would put that in there also for color, but it just

 Now this dish I'm putting together because I found a few ingredients in the refrigerator,

 and I wanted to use them before they spoiled, and that was the mushroom, the heavy cream,

 I would use fresh basil, but I didn't have any today, so we're using the dry basil, but

 And if I were using the fresh, I would put at least a third of a cup of nice, fine julienne

 At this point the vegetables are coming along very nicely, they're getting tender, and as

 you see there's not much moisture left in the pan, so at this point, let's add the white

 wine, and let that reduce, and let the flavors get in there nicely.

 I don't like to be cheap when it comes to whatever we're mixing with the pasta.

 I used olive oil in this, but if you wanted to, you could use butter.

 I just try to stay away from that type of fat, if you know what I mean.

 All the ingredients will be either at the beginning or the end of the video, printed

 out on the video, so you have no questions about how much of anything to use.

 We'll shut it off, leave it right in here, and then later on, if you cook the pasta,

 drain it, and then don't wash it off, put it into your pasta bowl, put this on top,

 See how easy it is when you use a skillet like this instead of a tall pot?

 A little salt in the water, taste the water, it should be slightly salty, and you'll have

Today I'm going to show you how to make the perfect holiday travel

 For this project, we're going to be using the holiday candle fragrance from BrambleBerry.com

 fragrances are approved for use in candles, so make sure to check with your vendor to

 that come with lids for this project, though you can use any container when you're using

There are many different waxes you can choose when you're making your

It has a lower melt point, making it ideal for using with container

 until you find the perfect one that you like, but for this project, I'm going to make it

 you use, and it depends on the diameter of the candle you're pouring.

 you're using a vegetable-based wax that you want to stick with a cotton core lined wick,

I like to use a slightly larger wick than I need to when I'm making

 container candles because I like my wax pool to go all the way to the edges of the container.

 For this particular holiday candle tin project, we're going to be using two of Bramble Berry's

 you want to use a wax chip or if you want to use a liquid color.

 Before starting this project, put two metal spoons in the freezer.

You don't want the wax to get above 200 degrees, so that's why I say

 the melting process, you'll want to stir often, making sure that not one single spot in the

 boiler is anything like mine, the handle gets really hot, so make sure to have a hot

Boy, cinnamon stick would really blend nicely with a vanilla-based fragrance too.

 at the bottom of the wick, causing a minor flare-up when you light your candle.

 of it into this heat-safe container and then put the rest of the wax back into the double

Using pencils or anything you can find that has a flat surface, center

Make sure that the wick is in the middle of the candle or else your burn

 enthusiasm for this project and don't move these candles for 30 minutes.

 have solidified enough that they won't shimmer and shake and cause an uneven surface if you

 Okay we're going to make a ceviche here today and we have a really great ceviche recipe

 We've got some Key West pink shrimp and we've got some bay scallops and all these wonderful

 And this is a ceviche style of preparing seafood is a way that they used to preserve

 fish down in South America because they didn't have refrigeration hundreds of years ago.

 So this is what they would do with the fish when they caught it because they didn't have

 And then what we have here to cook it with is we have another local ingredient which

 And what will happen is the acid, the citric acid, will start to cook the seafood and actually

 It'll start turning that color that it looks like it's actually boiled.

 Okay, we have some fried plantains that we're going to eat with our ceviche.

 Let me put a little floater on there to make this a real party.

 All right, we're going to feel really good when we're fishing tomorrow.

You can't really see the stamping on it yet, but once I add my ink here you'll

I've cut that panel up into these three rectangles and I'm going

 color here and you can see that the image immediately pops through.

I also wanted to mention that I used the white chalk ink to stamp my background

You can also use a white pigment ink, but the only thing I would suggest for that

You can use either ink, I just make sure that the ink is dry if you use the pigment

 can also use a white ink pad to do the same technique, but these daubers work perfect

I'm going to put some foam adhesive on the back of each of these before I start

Here I've decided that I wanted to do a little bit of embellishing

Once you get the ink flowing out of it, it's really smooth and you can

 see there it creates a little bit of shine and it almost looks like it was clear embossed.

 one down the center and one across the bottom where I'm going to line up these 3 panels.

 By taking that extra step and drawing some guidelines it can really make a difference

 when you're dealing with a clean and simple design to have all your elements perfectly

 straight and centered and spaced evenly apart like on this design here.

Here I'm removing the backing from the last panel here and lining

I thought the card needed a few more embellishments on it so I'm going

 the places that I want to, the way that I adhere sequins is I use my tweezers to pick

I've never had any fall off, even if you try to tug at them a little bit you

 touch to the card I'm going to use my corner chopper and I'm going to use the 1.5 inch

It's a pretty subtle look, but I think it adds some fun interest

 snare so much in there and it might sound cool to throw in just two toms.

 What that does is it allows the snare to really stand out at the end of line 1.

 use for the last measure, I do a right handed flam which is when your right stick is higher.

 first ending, it's the measure with the bracket above it that says number 1.

And then you go back to the previous repeat sign with the dots on the right, which

 first ending, you've already played the first ending and the second ending.

 at tempo with the first ending, second ending, and third ending.

 the vocal mic so you can hear the sounds of the new Audix microphones.

 The next line, line number 5, is actually a whole line or a build into the chorus.

Now obviously he's playing it at faster tempos and you'll have to work

And then you're going to see a first ending that has a 1, a 2, and

And that means you're going to use that first ending three times before you go on

You'll see that first ending has accents on the snare drum the same place as

 hit the and a starting with the right on the snare and then left.

 e and a. It's kind of strange because you're switching the toms in a syncopate.

 and now I'll play that last line including the fill at tempo so you can get an idea what

 Hello, welcome to another episode of Hey What's That Fat Guy Cookin'

 Yes, got it from Betty Crocker, and I'm, because I don't know how to make cookies.

 We're gonna use about 36, makes about 3 dozen, so 36 of these Hershey Kisses.

 I'm not gonna use sugar, you're supposed to roll these in sugar, but not me.

 You roll them, bake them, pull them out after about 8 to 10 minutes.

 And then you stick a Hershey Kiss on the top of it, and it should look like this.

 I don't know if mine are gonna look like that, but we're gonna see.

 Anyway, so what you do is you get it, and you make an inch and a quarter balls.

 So, I think what I'm gonna do is get a spoon, and just kinda cut a tablespoon size out.

 Just do them, and then you throw them on there, and then bam, we're almost done.

 So, what I'm gonna do is put them on this baking sheet, and then just throw them suckers right on there.

 I'll shape them first, and then I'm gonna put them on there, and then we'll bake them for 8 to 10 minutes.

 Some balls are bigger than others, but you know what fellas, don't worry if your balls are either big, too big, or too small.

 You know fellas, sometimes when you make these, your balls may either be too big or too small.

 So you get the ball, and just, I'm gonna do it with sugar anyway.

 I said I wasn't, but just roll them in the sugar, and then they look like this.

 Then you place them on a cookie sheet about 2 inches apart, like so.

 Put one, and then you put the next one, you know, about right there.

 Okay, and after you take them out of the oven, they're really hot, so use something to take them out, not your fingers.

 Then you just stick these Hershey's Kisses into the cookie, like so.

 Then you put the cookies in there, or the things in the cookies.

 And I just wanted to let the world wide web know that I, in fact, love Canada.

 But, the Erin Ryan on YouTube made me aware that Canada has something that the US doesn't have.

 So, since we can't get it here in the United States, I thought I'd give it a shot.

 I don't really know how to use this thing, so this could be interesting.

 So, yeah, I have no idea what I'm doing other than that I need to mix stuff together here.

 I don't know if I should be breaking these apart, but we'll see what happens.

 Alright, since my blender is starting to leak, I think that's good enough.

 I think I might have put a little too much milk in for doing it manually, but...

I taste the chocolate and the cream and the ice cream all together.

Just keep subscribing and leaving lots of comments, and I'll see you again tomorrow.

 But what I do is I just make one stroke on each side, just like that.

 Got to be careful of course that you don't let it slip and slice into your fingers.

 But then I go ahead and use a wet stone, something like a bench stone.

 And then after I use the file to get any nicks or maybe if the edge is rounded over, then

 And I'll just sharpen it very similar to the way I would a knife, except you got to...

 And if you don't have pretty good control over it, you might want to consider maybe

 But I just do like that and I'll take it and wipe the edge off.

 And I'll check it with my fingernail and make sure I don't have like a burr or something.

 But it'll be... start getting pretty sharp there after a while.

 I've heard of people getting them razor sharp, but I like them not razor sharp, but pretty

 And I might tell you a little bit about my hatchet, seeing as how y'all might be wondering.

 The back part, the hammer head, it was a big round head and it made the balance wrong.

 So I had a friend of mine torch that off and I ground it down flat.

 And then I ground a new angle on the blade and tapered it down real good so I just had

 Anyways, it's nothing special, but I figured I'd show y'all how I do it.

 Well today I thought I'd show you how to make something really simple and sweet and delicious

 that's full of sugar and will get you running around the backyard because you're so hyper

 Righty-o, well enough of me standing here, let's start cooking!

 So for this delicious recipe all you'll need is some bread, a banana, some marshmallows,

 some Nutella, some sugar of your choice and of course some butter.

 Right, well of course the first thing we need to do is put some butter on your bread.

 You know how healthy butter is for you, so add as much as you like.

 Now turn that upside down and it's time to put the Nutella on here.

 We then add the marshmallows and to make this sandwich healthier than it already is, I'm

 So over to the frying pan here which I put on a low to medium heat.

 Just have a look how good that would be if it would come off my thing.

 Now this will be super hot so you'll want to let it cool down before you tuck on in.

 Right well I'm sitting here waiting for that thing to cool down and I can't wait any longer

 Well that sugar has crystallised on the outside of this sandwich which makes it nigh on impossible

 Right well there's that marshmallow banana Nutella toasted sandwich covered in sugar

 Anyway guys, make sure you do give it a go, let me know what yours tastes like, make sure

 Thumb this video up or down if you are deaf, dumb and blind and you can't see how good

 Rightio guys, well thanks again for watching and I'll see you next time right here on Greg's

 Where the marshmallow banana and Nutella with lots of butter and sugar on top.

 It's Jake here and I'm here today to try my hand at some hard apple cider.

 I've got a container with my airlock and my bung soaking in the star sand.

 I'm going to go ahead and start sanitizing the inside of this jug well.

 And what I'm going to do is I'm going to just start to reduce the heat.

 Now I just happen to have some of this dextrose here, so I'm going to stir that in.

 I just happen to have some dextrose lying around, so I've decided to use that.

 Alright, so what I'm going to do now is add my water and my sugar.

 Basically two cups of sugar that I added to about a cup and a half of water.

 And I boiled it for about five minutes or a little longer to invert the sugars.

 I wasn't going to use a full pack for a gallon, but it all settles out anyways.

 The first thing we're going to do is go ahead and apply Urban Decay's Primer Potion all

 over the lid from the base of the lash line all the way up to the brow.

 Next I'm grabbing the Dior Palette in 409 and it's a five color palette in Tropical

 I'm going to start with the lightest green color and go from the underneath of my brow

 Next I'm grabbing Sephora's Cream Liner and this is in Grass is Greener.

 It's actually called Sephora's Smoky Cream Eyeliner to be specific.

 The whole idea is I'm using this as a tacky base for the shadow that I'm going to be applying

 Next I'm grabbing that really pretty green color from the palette.

 I'm using a flatter brush when I do this because I'm going to be using patting motions versus

 I'm patting this color onto my lid and I'll be blending it out again using a matte fluffier

 After I do a little blending I'm going to grab the really, not much darker but a little

 bit darker brown color from the Dior Palette and I'm applying it using a stiffer, denser

 brush in the outer corner of the lid and blending it upwards into the crease kind of in a sideways

 To avoid any harsh lines, the next thing I'm going to do is grab a matte light brown color

 and this is by Tarte's Neutral Eye Palette and I'm using a brush to go ahead and blend

 Next step is to line the eyes and I'm using Elmei's Crayon Contour Eyeliner and this is

 in brown and I really like this eyeliner because of its longevity.

 Next I'm fixing problem areas with Graf Tobian's Color Correcting Palette.

 I'm going to mix a couple colors, the peach one mainly as well as the green one and I'm

 going to be applying this onto my lower under eye area where there's some discoloration

 and I'm using a brush by Sephora and it's in the number 57 and it kind of gives airbrushed

 results when I use it in a tapping motion and then light, light wiping and circular

 I'm also covering areas that might be problematic underneath my eyes and red areas as well.

 Next it's Dior's Air Flash Foundation and I'm spraying this onto a stipple brush and

 using circular motions to go ahead and apply it all over my face.

 I'm making sure to blend it into my neck as well, that way your skin matches.

 Now I'm going to switch to a smaller foundation brush, again re-spraying just a little bit

 In fact I'm going to switch to a smaller brush to really get close to where I want

 Using another stipple brush I'm dipping it into some loose powder and this happens to

 be by Dior and I'm putting the powder all over my face, just a really, really light

 Next I'm using that same eyeliner by Albae and I'm applying it on the bottom of my lash

 line and I'm going to be blending it and smudging it out so it doesn't have to be perfect.

 I'm taking that brown color again and I'm going to be applying it over the liner.

 This helps it last longer and also provides a little smoked out look that's not too harsh.

 This is the MAC's Brow Set in Beguile and I'm applying it on my eyebrows, just a really

 This is the Dior palette and this one is in the 30 range of colors and there's the area

 When you smile from your cheekbone to your ear, drop it down a little bit and that's

 The whole idea with bronzing or contouring I should say is that you really want to avoid

 any harsh lines but you do want to emphasize your natural bone structure that you've got.

 Applying a little bit to the hairline as well as in the temple region.

 This is a MAC's Peachy Keen and I'm applying it to the apples of my cheek.

 I'm not starting directly at the apple though because you don't want it to be too intense

 and you don't really know how much product is on your brush so you can always add more.

 I find this does a really nice job for a pretty affordable cost.

 Next I'm lining my lips and this is in a neutral colored lip liner.

 I would go darker than your natural lip color because I'm going to be applying a pink shade.

 The pink shade is by MAC and it's in Viva Glam and I'm just applying lipstick I guess

 You can even amp it up a little bit more in the crease if you want to go darker.

 After you put the nail polish, you can put your hand inside and it will dry your nail polish.

 Please don't forget to share and subscribe for more upcoming videos.

 Hey YouTube it's me your girl Shaniqua and today's video is on how to create your own

 I have here a Blackberry and I decided to go ahead and created my own custom jewel case

 I actually went out and I purchased this pink part and so then I also purchased the jewels

 I figured hey instead of going out and paying $75 to get to have a jewel case done I could

 just go ahead and do it myself and it looks and it's custom made.

 I picked all the jewels and you know it kind of looks cool actually.

 So if you want to see how I created this or how I went about doing this stay tuned for

 The next thing I want to do is take my quick hold glue craft glue and I'm going to spread

 it all over the back of my phone and what I'm going to do then is sprinkle the glitter

 The reason why you want to put the glitter down first is because the glitter helps to

 cover any parts that you can't cover with the little you know with the marbles or with

 the what is it the jewels any parts you can't cover with the jewels the glitter will cover

 and it will give it that gleamy iridescent type you know glittery look.

 So I'm going to spread the glue and I'm going to put the glitter down and let that dry first.

 Ok so now I am lining up the jewels on how I want it to be and from doing it in the past

 what I've come to realize is I want the same jewel going all the way around the perimeter.

 So I've lined it up and so now what I'm going to do is take these move these jewels out

 and put the glue around the perimeter of where I want it to go and then come back and re-stick

 Now that I've put them all on there I'm just going to go ahead and let them dry.

 Ok so now I have picked all the jewels that I want out of the jewels that I have there.

 I picked all the ones that I wanted and I've placed it where I want it to be placed so

 I'm just going to take the glue and put a little bit of glue underneath each one of

 Ok so now I'm going to take the little jewels that I have and I'm going to fill in all the

 So I'm going to go through and spread the glue down and stick them in there and I'm

 going to use this to pick them up and stick them down because my hand will get a little

 Philip Sedley Killingsley and Louise Margaret Grace McLaren married this morning in Lime Bay.

 And while they're enjoying champagne with a few close family and friends,

 just up the road we're working flat out to make sure their first meal together as man and wife will be a feast to remember.

 We've ransacked the river cottage garden for potatoes, beans, beetroot, fennel and salads

 and scoured the fields for wild mushrooms and plundered the local car park for cherry plum wine.

 and there's an army of veg marching through the kitchen to feed our 70 guests.

 The starter is a gazpacho, a classic tangy, tomatoey, garlicy, bready, cucumbery, oniony soup

 and it's going to be served chilled, it's going to be the first thing they get when they sit down

 It's about the most exciting soup there is really, it's so full of flavours.

 Just grate a couple of garlic cloves into a bowl of torn up bread, add a little water, mix well and soak for a few minutes.

 Then whizz up the garlicky soaked bread in batches with skinned tomatoes, cucumber, peppers and onions

 and then build up the texture with more roughly chopped tomato flesh.

 And that's really good, it's got a lovely tomatoey freshness but it just needs something, a little extra oomph to sharpen it up

 and I'm going to use some apple balsamic vinegar which is heady stuff.

 It's going to be a really fresh, exhilarating start to the wedding feast,

 even more so when it's had a couple of hours to chill right down for maximum refreshment.

 The plan is to keep the food coming from the moment everybody sits down.

 First up is a tasty trio of baba ganoush, carrot and beetroot hummus served with spicy pistachio dukkah.

 The great advantage of removing the tyrannical slab of meat from the table is that you can give yourself a nice little treat.

 The great advantage of removing the tyrannical slab of meat from the table is that you can give equal weight to so many different dishes

 The gazpacho is lovely and cold, really refreshing but still absolutely packed with all that tomato and pepper flavour.

 So I'm just getting a final sprinkling of cool cucumber for a bit of crunch, a little bit of basil for aromatic

And as a thank you to everyone for sticking with me, I've put up a couple of

And just click on the button on the navigation bar on the left that says Digital

They're free for you to download and use in your craft projects.

 one of these digital stamps in the Cereal Box Canvas project, so it's free to download

 but just let me know if you need any help using them and I'll do my best.

 out by measuring and marking two dots where I'll punch the holes so I can string a piece

 an inch and a half or so from the edge and a few inches down from the top of the box.

 Just make sure when you twist the wires together to form the loop that it's not too long that

 tape around the ends of the wires to hold them in place and also so I don't poke myself

 and the bottom of the box in masking tape because this helps to disguise the fact that

 it's a cereal box by covering up some of the details of the original construction of

You could also cover the front of the box in masking tape and this would help

 to prevent the color of the design on the cover of the box from bleeding through into

Next I painted the whole box brown and the dark color of the brown really

 it brown first it would be really hard to cover up all those contrasting colors.

 I used white acrylic gesso and I covered the whole box again and this final step is what

 really a personal preference whether you want to entirely cover up the brown or not.

 Another option is to paint the canvas black and on this canvas I did cover

 the entire front of the box in the masking tape and you can see the texture that the

Or you can even turn the whole box inside out and glue it back together.

 Hey guys, here we have the Samsung Omnia W, that's the wonder phone from Samsung which

 The model version is GTI 8350 and the product comes in a package with one main mobile phone

 set, one battery, travel adapter, studio headset, one data cable and a pouch.

 Apart from that, if you check out the features listed here, it says that the phone offers

 you high data browsing speed, super AMOLED screen and the camera is of 5 megapixel with

 LED flash with the Windows Phone 7.5 features and the Windows Marketplace.

 The phone also comes with 8 GB of internal storage and apart from that the battery is

 So here is the Windows Phone which we would review in a next video.

 Apart from that, here is the data cable, the connectivity charger, the headsets, pretty

 In the next video, we would be doing a detailed review of this phone and also compare it with

 similar phones like the Nokia Lumia 800 phone which is the Windows Phone 7 based mobile

 Hey guys, it's Rhian, and today I'm going to be showing you my go-to natural look.

 The first thing I'm going to do is take MAC's Paint Pot in Painterly and apply this to my

 I'm just going to take a flat shader brush and using padding and circular motions, I'm

 Then taking Buck, which is just a few shades darker than that, I'm going to apply this

 I just want to create a little bit of dimension with this shadow on my eyes.

 Be sure to use all matte colors for the most natural look possible.

 That's what I really like and I've gotten a lot of compliments on this look.

 Then taking a brown eyeliner, I'm using the Clinique Cream Shaper for Eyes in Chocolate

 And then I'm going to use my finger to smudge it out so that way the line won't be too harsh

 Again, that's just really what this whole look is based around.

 Then taking a black eyeliner, I'm using the Graf Black Liner from MAC.

 I really like the way this makes my eyes look and it's just a really great way to make your

 The mascara I'm using lately is the Chanel Imitable Intense Mascara.

 I'm not really sure how I feel about it yet, so I'm still testing it out.

 Then taking my Smashbox Brow Tech, I'm going to fill in my brows.

 Of course you can do whatever it is that you naturally or normally do to fill in your brows.

 The next thing I'm going to take is my Laguna Bronzer and I'm going to start this in the

 And then I'm going to progress into a large 3B because I really like the bronze look,

 I'm just going to apply this to my cheeks to give myself sort of a natural looking flush.

 And then taking Tender Heart by Clinique Lipstick, I'm going to apply that to my lips.

 Of course you can use any lip and cheek combination you want to because it's such a natural look.

 I hope you guys enjoyed this video and I'll talk to you next time.

 What I'm going to share with you today is the trend set look for summer, which is a

 collection of blues and bronzes, beautiful to update in your makeup wardrobe.

 I've already prepared the skin using our Dream Skin and our Glow Maximizer, mixed them together

 I'm then going to follow with my Airflash foundation, which is part of our Backstage

 Now this will mattify the lid and act as a perfect base for your eyeshadow.

 The next thing I'm going to apply is the Five Colour in the Sun Deck, using the Shimmer

 Tones here, placing it over the eyelid to create just a very soft, iridescent look.

 To follow on from the eyeshadow, I'm now going to apply our Backstage Lash Maximizer,

 just in the roots of the lash, just to condition and to really pump up the lashes when we apply

 I'm using the black and I'm just pushing this into the roots of the lash and lifting, just

 So now I'm going to apply the new Shimmer Powder, just taking it over the eyelid, down

 So now onto the lips, which I've prepared using our Lip Maximizer and our Universal

 Contour to create the perfect base for our lipstick, which today I'm using Rouge Dior

 To finish the look, I'm going to be using Dior Addict Fluid Stick in Wonderland and

 I'm just going to take the applicator and lightly smooth it in the centre part of the

 And I'm going to take my ring finger and lightly pat around the edge, just to diffuse the line,

 Okay, so this weekend, for my birthday and Memorial Day, and the Indianapolis 500,

 Coca-Cola 600, and all the rest of the great activities that are going on this weekend,

 we're going to break in the new egg, or my new egg, the green egg, outside.

 I'm going to hit the other side of these steaks, and we'll get them out to the grill.

 See, I'm going to just kind of wad that up in a nice little ball.

I'm going to give it the old college 45 degree turn, get some good grill marks on it,

 and then when I flip it over, I'm going to move it off to the cool side of the grill,

 what we're going to do, we're going to get some tin foil on these guys.

 for probably about six minutes, and then I moved them off to the cool spot, let them kind of roast,

 to continue cooking, so let's get these guys under some wraps, and we will taste this in just a bit.

Well, I'm trying to get this bone in a place where it's not going to stab one of us.

And really, the sooner I finish this video, the sooner I get to finish this

You know, they have their own sales department, so I'm not worried about that.

 Welcome back once again to howtocookthatfood.com if you haven't already click that button and

 On the menu today we're going to make a fantastic cauliflower curry or gobi masala however you

 In here I've got some oil, I'm using a sunflower oil which is heating up nicely.

 We're going to start off by dropping in some whole garam masala.

 I've got there cumin seeds, mustard seeds, a few cloves, just a couple, some cardamom

 As the oil heats they will pop and crackle and they'll infuse this oil beautifully.

 And as that happens, which is about right now, we're going to add some onions.

 As always I'm using a red onion, you can use white if you want, I just prefer red, I find

 I'm also now going to add some garlic ginger paste which is a 50-50 mix of garlic and ginger,

 Very simply, we're going to cook these onions for about three to four minutes.

 As you can see the onions have changed colour somewhat and are softening nicely.

 Of course you could always use your favourite curry powder mix if you want.

 We may have to add some water, depending on how juicy these tomatoes are.

 The reason I don't want to put it in now is that if I cook it too much it will just disintegrate.

 Then we can add the cauliflower in, mix it, lid on, steam it away and it'll be beautiful.

 We've got the start of the beginning of a lovely, lovely masala here.

 I am going to add a little splash of water, just a bit of cold water.

 That's like 400ml or I think that equates to 13.5 fluid ounces.

 Now, no curry would be complete without some fresh green curry.

 Bring that to the boil, let it boil up and then simmer it just for about two to three minutes.

 I'm going to finish this off now with some fresh coriander or cilantro.

 And this really, really, I find to be a beautiful, beautiful vegetarian

 about the slide positions of the trombone and the notes that go along

 and that was in the first position which is when the slide is all the way in

 that's first position and then the next position I want to talk

 about is the third position and the third position is going to be when this

 brace, the second brace is equal with the bell that's third position.

 position is when the outer slide this piece is equal with the bell so three is

 when where you hold it is equal with the bell four is when the outer edge of the

 slide here is equal with the bell and then the next position I want to talk

Six is all the way out with your arm just simply extended okay just

 extend your arm as far as it will go without overly straining and stretching

 and turning your head because you don't want to create tension there so it's

 just simply all the way out here just naturally as far as your arm will go.

 may be that you may play that note out of tune slightly because your arm is

 not long enough but don't worry about that right now because it'll grow and

 are five and two and we don't play those notes too rarely but when we do simply

 five is between six and four so this is four six is all the way out five is just

 when this brace is equal to bell that's three and one is all the way in and two

 is it's half it's halfway between one and three but it's a little bit closer

 to one than three okay so now we're going to talk about the notes that we

 go to C sixth position all the way out comfortably it's C. Next I'm going to go

 Then I'm going to come into third position and play E flat and then I'm

 Okay so those are our first five notes B flat in first position C in sixth, D in fourth, E

 Hey guys, today I'm going to be teaching you how to dye your scooter wheels.

 So first you need to have your wheels and if you have bearings in them I suggest you

 And then what you need to do is grab your wheels and just put them in like that.

 And then get your tool thing, knife, whatever, and just move them around so they're not touching

 Okay, and then what you want to do is you just want to leave the wheels in there for

 about, I don't know, an hour so the whole wheel can actually turn to the color that

 So I'll come back in an hour and I'll show you what they look like.

 Okay guys, so it's been an hour so I'm just going to take the wheels out.

 Okay, and then I'm just going to move over so you can see me washing it.

 And then just turn it off and then I'll just get something to dry it.

 Just get a tea towel, handy towel, whatever you want to call it.

 So once that's done, you just want to take the plastics off the wheels.

 Okay guys, what I suggest you do is actually just take the bearings out because to...

 I didn't actually put the tape over the bearings well enough so they've actually gone black.

 Which could ruin the bearings but I actually don't really care.

 So yeah guys, thanks for watching and please subscribe and check out our website.

 Our editor Nick has done a good job on our website so yeah, check that out.

 The movement is a new and it has a very simian like movement to it.

 That's different from the ape step that you've seen in Prasara body flow.

 There are some unique aspects of this flow that I've put together for you.

 You can use it as a dynamic warm up, an athletic warm up, especially for the ventral and dorsal

 strength of being able to move through the full anterior chain and being able to develop

 decelerating strength to brace using core activation so that you stop on a dime and

 This will allow you to learn how to pull with the arms so that you're pulling down

 to the core while packing the shoulders into the closed pack position.

 So when you see the repetition, you can do this as a single exercise that's cyclical.

 You can do it for repetition on distance, for speed, for weight with a weight vest.

 When you first see people do it, you'll see them do a Bronco and I'll show you the difference

 between the Bronco, which is back and forth, and the Kong, which is diving out, gripping

 the ground before your legs hit, pulling down with the hands to place your feet flat foot.

 You want to stay off of ball of foot and get to flat foot or mid foot balance for the next

 propulsion because you go from flat foot to ball of foot, you launch, dive out, hit with

 the hands and before your feet touch, you pull down with the hands so that the core

 kicks in before your feet touch, then flat foot balance and you begin the next repetition.

 So I'll give you a repetition cycle of going through one lap of the Kong and then we'll

 Now I'm going to do it again and I'm going to show you what not to do and what your first

 tendency will be to do is to keep the elbows out and to stay on ball of foot rocking back

 Now try it again and look at the technique of landing, pulling with the arms, landing

 Fingers out, land palms pulling, knees to chest, land flat foot.

 Now going through the full flow that I've created is rather unique because of the intelligent

 When you go through the Kong flow or the Chim flow, the focus is the anterior chain, being

 But because of all of that forward hip flexion, because of pitching the hips forward and not

 having full hip extension, it needs to be balanced out with a functional opposite.

 Programmed into the Chim flow is a hip extension coming into the worm.

 In order to stick it in Crow, you're really going to have to practice and I would suggest

 Keep your chin tucked down so that if you do hit, you'll at least hit with the top of

 Land with the middle of your head rather than compressing your spine.

 We can work on the Crow pose later and that'll take some time for you to be able to develop

 The best technique that you can use is to exhale and contract your core as tightly as

 possible, keeping the elbows in so that you can land with your thighs on the outsides

 If you can't lock the elbows, then work on pressing until you can lock the elbows.

 If you can't do the worm, just press your legs straight back into a plank or push-up

 But if you can work on the worm, you need to because it's for full hip extension.

 Drive your knees toward the sky, your hips down, hips down so that you can get that round

 You'll tadpole out of it, knees come to the side, heels rotate down so that you come back

 Once you're in it, you'll hit two more chimps, chimp forward, chimp forward, Crow.

 In the second level, as soon as you come out of the tadpole, you'll fall back, sliding

 Go to do a shoulder roll over one shoulder, not over your head.

 Get full hip extension so that you roll down the chest to the hips, to the thighs, and

 You can start with just rolling over, pushing into an upward facing dog, and doing a tadpole

 I'll give you the full technique and then practice the Kong, practice the chimp.

 I'll give you level one first, then we'll do level two, and I'll give you some regressions

 Greetings everyone again, this is Art as part two of the installation of the

 I've done that's probably overkill was install some painters tape over the

 openings just to make sure that I do not get anything in the holes, any of the

 solution in the places where you don't want to and this is going to help

 solution bottle and spraying my fingers with it so now we've got some wet

 move the phone out of the way at this point and I'm going to do this here so

 wet fingers I'm going to peel off the screen protector from the backing very

 to move the phone here and I'm going to basically take the screen protector and

 and as I move it across I can see that I might have to move it just a little bit

So I'm going to again just move this over and it falls right there.

 Okay so what that does is makes this so that there are very, very few, if any,

 And I can also adjust, oops, I can adjust the screen protector there as need be by

 sort of moving it along a little bit so it's exactly lined up in the right spot.

 Okay so now I'm going to take the squeegee and if I've got any remaining

 bubbles, which I don't really see any, I'm going to try to squeegee those guys off.

 lens cloth and I'm going to use it to mop up any remaining solution off the

So that should kind of help keep the solution from getting places

You can tell it's a little wet but other than that it looks nice

So this is how we installed it and I'm going to let it dry for the

 evening and tomorrow morning we will take a look at it and should be

 nice and dry and we should be able to plug the phone in and try it.

 the installation of the Skinomi TechSkin screen protector onto a Samsung

 Get the tire at an old junkyard, or tire rim at an old junkyard.

 Real simple, I got it clamped here because when I turn it, I don't want the thing slipping

 So first thing you do, I notice this thing here, this will keep the tire from spinning.

 Now the bead's broke already, so I'm just going to spray this around.

 This stuff I've got is just a generic mix stuff I got at one of the online tire places.

 And then to protect my tire tool, I got one of these guys right here.

 The whole purpose of these wooden blocks is I want to get as much relief on the bead of

 Because when I put the demount tip in here, I want there to be as much relief on the tire

 So I'm going to take three of these things and put them around.

 Some tires you need to have this to be able to insert inside the bead of the tire to pull

 it out to put the demount tip in depending on how tight they are on the rim.

 So what I'm going to do first of all, I'm going to push this down, try to get as much

 You want to be able to lift the tire up a little farther because you don't want to turn

 the tool over with it deep down inside the rim because what will happen is you'll put

 a lot of pressure right here and end up bending your tool or damaging your tire.

 Now I've got it up pretty good so I'm just going to turn it up like that.

 Now if you've used tire irons you know that right now you'd still be cursing trying to

 Sometimes you can just pull these things right off without lubing them.

 Because I want to make sure I clean the bead of my tire on both sides of the rim thoroughly.

 All I'm going to do is just scrub this and then wipe it off with a clean cloth.

 I'm going to put it on pause for right now while I get this done.

 Hi you guys this is Casper7545 and today I'm gonna be showing you how to make the I don't

 know I think this is like the second hero brain totem I don't know and like first what

 you need these are the pieces that you need I'm showing you it your blah blah blah blah

 blah blah blah and if you have this kind of piece or just use whatever kind of piece you

 have life-size Minecraft you can make that so let's get started first you need to make

 you know you need to make the hero brain totem which is like put this piece here like you

 can make it you can make it all with these kind of pieces like this kind of pieces and

 like you just put it like that over I don't know if you guys can see because I'm holding

 the camera I'm standing up here so just put it like all over like this like it's gold

 blocks that you like get this kind of great piece into the soul and the grass is covering

 your copper stone and that's like that and you put the torches and show you how to make

 it make it hold like this this is hard like crazy crazy oh whatever I'll just hold it

 so you just put whatever kind of pieces you have like if you like have like these kind

 of smooth pieces because I like I like use these piece so if you like have like four

 of these kind of pieces like these smooth ones without these things you could do that

 so put that here like whatever like kind of here put the brown on on but this here get

 the fire and put it on here so guys is how you make the hero brain totem show you around

I'm Barbara and I'm going to show you how to rock the waist hooping today.

 Okay, so the first thing you need to know is you need to have a hoop that is easy to work with.

 You want to go for a hoop, especially when you're starting out, that's in between your navel and this nipple area.

They think that hooping is about going in a circular motion, but it's not.

 Then you take your hoop, you want to put one foot in front of the other, twist, and swing it.

 You just have to know, you have to sense where the hoop's going to be and where you need to meet it.

 If you're hooping to the left, you want to probably have your left foot forward.

 Hey everyone, so today I'm going to show you guys how to make a doll selfie pole.

 So taking a skewer shish kabob stick, measuring it to your doll's hand, you're going to want

 to cut a portion, and that's going to be the length of our selfie pole.

 And the length of mine is about 4.5 inches, but then again that varies to the size of

 Now taking a skinny stick and some flat toothpicks, and I'm just cutting those to the length I

 And then I'm taking my skinny stick and I'm just going to be cutting that.

 And then taking your skewer, you're going to want to glue that towards the end of your

 And now taking your toothpicks, you're going to want to add them to the two sides of the

 And then taking a longer toothpick, we're going to be gluing that to the back.

 And now to paint it, I'm going to be using some blue paint for the bottom of the skinny

 stick and that back piece, and then I'm going to be painting everything else black.

 And to make the doll phone, you could use any doll phone you have, but I just printed

 This is optional, but I'm choosing to glue my phone inside, but then again you could

 You can now take your doll selfies anywhere and it'll look really cool.

 So if you guys like this video, give it a thumbs up and if you have any requests or

 questions just comment down below and I will talk to you guys in my next video.

 generally I just drink espresso, no milk, but my wife she prefers a cafe latte

 sometimes cappuccino and that means I have to froth the milk and I have two

 different types of frothers the tall which I like and wide body they both

 hold the same amount of milk but I like the action I get in the tall but most

 people say the wide body is easier to get the microphone that you're striving

 to get when you make your latte and cappuccino and that makes it somewhat

 creamier and tastier so see which one works for you wide or tall and the best

 temperature and I have this little binder clip because I haven't found the

 real type of clip that works on the frothing cup to hold the thermometer the

 thermometer will give you a clue where you're headed when you're frothing

 degrees the optimum temperature for the milk when you're frothing here's the

 wand that I use in the espresso machine ideally when you froth the best thing to

 do is to have the frothing tip as I move over here am I in camera since I'm

 the only person here one man show I'll do it from this side just in case I'm

 off camera over there let the wand go about a half inch below the surface of

 the milk and try and create a whirlpool effect and that will keep the milk

 evenly heated throughout the cup and if you let the wand rest on the side it'll

 give you more control and hold it steady in that area of the half inch below the

 surface and then you can go towards the bottom if you wanted to heat and you

 weren't sure that the all 12 ounces in this cup or hot or not you never know

 and I don't know if I mentioned this is a 12 ounce and so is the wide body 12

 ounce frothing cups this will give you an idea because my friends they don't

 really care for a coffee they like sometimes they like their milk with a

 coffee flavor so you never know what to do so here we go and this is all

 simulation just so the thing to keep in mind is wine resting along the side the

 tip half inch or so below the surface don't allow the tip to reach the bottom

 get that loud screeching noise you'll know for sure I've gone too deep or too

 close to the side is not a good thing either because you'll get larger bubbles

 and that's not microphone those are just big bubbles and microphone is what we're

 striving for then you can start when you get really creative doing latte art that

 would really impress your significant other girlfriend or wife even your

 neighbor so keep in mind 150 to 160 degrees no hotter once you go over 160

 you'll have scalded milk bad tasting so talk to you later and think about

 Hi, I'm Davina with Forkandplate.com and today we're going to show you how to make a lobster

 Now one of the most important things when you are making a lobster roll is the bun.

 We like to use a hot dog bun and this is actually a brioche and it's a buttery, delicious bun.

 So the first thing you want to do is you want to toast this bun or grill it.

 We're going to take some melted butter and we're just going to put it on our bun here.

 And then we're going to put this on our pan here and we're going to toast all the sides

 As you're toasting your bun you want to make sure the inside is steamed.

 Okay so once you've toasted your bun and you've made sure the inside is steamed all the way

 We actually like the knuckle meat because it has a lot of flavor.

 Some people only prefer the tail or the claws but we use all of it.

 So what we're going to do here is we're going to add some diced celery.

 Now we don't like to, I mean everybody has a different way that they do their lobster

 We don't like to use a lot of mayonnaise because we want the lobster to be the star of the

 We're just going to mix this around and then we're going to add it to our bun.

 We've definitely filled our bun a lot, that's why it's overflowing.

 Someone asked me to make a video showing them how to remove a brake disc from a motorcycle.

 And I'm going to be using that to demonstrate how to remove this brake disc and then how to reinstall it.

 Hopefully you know how to remove the wheel because I didn't film that.

 If you've made a request for a video, I always try and do them but I don't always have the equipment.

 The brake disc is attached to the wheel hub using these 9 bolts here.

 Each of these bolts uses a 6mm hex bit socket to remove them or install them.

 The tools I'm going to be using is this 3 inch Craftsman ratchet,

 To tighten them down I'm going to be using a Craftsman torque wrench.

 I'm going to be using the foot pounds, 20 foot pounds to tighten them.

 You want to apply a non-permanent thread locker to each bolt so I'm going to be using the blue Loctite or blue Permatex here.

 And then just to speed up removing the bolts I'm going to be using this Bosch impact driver.

 So to remove the disc just take your socket and your ratchet and remove each of these bolts.

 And then just take your socket and your ratchet and remove each of these bolts.

 And then once you have all the bolts removed you can remove the brake disc.

 Before you go ahead and reinstall either your old brake disc or a new one make sure that the hub is clean.

 And it's also real important to clean off the threads on the bolt, make sure that they're clean.

 And then take your brake disc, there's going to be a marking on it with the thickness of the disc,

 This should be facing out so make sure that that's facing out when you reinstall the disc.

 Next you're going to want to take one of your bolts, take your thread locker, apply thread locker to the bolt.

 Alright so now I've reinstalled all the bolts, I've got them hand tightened, I've put Loctite on the bolts, I've cleaned everything.

 I've got the thickness markings on the disc facing outward so now I'm ready to tighten everything down.

 When I tighten the bolts down on this disc I want to do it in steps.

 I'm going to do it in two steps and I'm going to be using a cross pattern to tighten the bolts down just so I get everything evenly tightened.

 So first step I'm going to be using a ratchet and socket and then the last step I'll be using the torque wrench.

 I've got the torque wrench calibrated to, it's set to 20 foot pounds.

 So I'm going to do the same thing, the cross pattern, and I'm going to tighten each bolt to 20 foot pounds.

 You can take your torque wrench again and hit each bolt just to make sure that they're all tightened.

 I don't always like to do that because you can over tighten a bolt but when you're dealing with this many bolts and you're doing it in that cross pattern it can get confusing and sometimes you can miss a bolt.

 So it's better to make sure that they're all tightened than to leave one loose.

 The next thing I'm going to do is cover up the wheel hub just so no brake fluid gets into the bearings.

 And I'm going to spray around the disc just to clean up any grease or dirt that I may have gotten on the disc by working with it.

 And that is how you remove and install a brake disc on a 2009 Kawasaki KLR650.

 If you've got any questions leave them in the comments section and I'll do my best to answer them.

 Facemilling is the process of machining a flat surface on a workpiece.

 A cutter is mounted to a facemill holder, which consists of an arbor, two drive keys,

 A facemill with positive axial rake reduces cutting forces and vibration.

 The milling head should be positioned close to the workpiece to minimize quill extension and maximize rigidity.

 Locking the gibs on the Y and Z axes will further improve rigidity.

 Steel and brass materials can be cut dry, while aluminum, stainless steel, and titanium should be cut with an appropriate lubricant or coolant.

 The FM45 indexable facemill shown here is manufactured by Glaser Machine Tools and uses square inserts tilted at 45 degrees.

 Each insert has four cutting edges and can be rotated 90 degrees to expose a fresh cutting edge.

 WD-40 serves as an excellent lubricant for cutting aluminum on a conventional machine, preventing soft aluminum chips from welding to the cutting edges.

 However, proper ventilation is required due to the smoke it creates.

 Aluminum is being faced without lubrication in this demonstration, but coolant is recommended in a production environment.

 A finishing pass is performed with the material being fed at the same rate, but with the cutter spinning at a higher speed at a shallower depth of cut.

 Regular inserts, such as those used on this FM90 facemill, have two cutting edges instead of four, but are capable of milling shoulders and slots.

 This is Jamie and your backcountry cooking with Mountain State Overland.

 We've got spinach, mozzarella cheese, some pepperoni, a little pizza sauce, and some banana peppers.

 If you guys have never heard of a scuttle, it's basically a South African cooking contraption.

 It's been flattened and kind of concave so that it holds everything in the center and the burner heats it up.

 It does a really nice job of staying hot in the center and cooler around the edges so you can kind of work that way.

 I'm going to let these heat up and get a little hotter so they can melt the pizza toppings as we put them on there.

 If not, make it a little better and try it again, potentially, depending on how big of a disaster it is.

 There's not anything I can do about that, but I'm hoping by constantly spinning them and then tenting them, we will have a key set up.

 I'll tell you what, the day that somebody complains about you making them food, I think you just tell them to get out.

 I mean, from start to finish, probably 30 minutes, I would say.

 We first have here a half a cup of butter or margarine softened.

 Um, but anyway, she wanted me to run out and get her some today

 and have this tingly weird sweet flavor that goes down the back of my throat.

 Now we're going to add 2 eggs and a teaspoon of almond extract.

 We're going to switch out bowls and we are going to put in this one here.

 And then, once that's nicely blended, we will go ahead and we will add it to the butter mixture very slowly.

 It said that it was supposed to mix until it was smooth, but this is basically what I got.

 And what we're going to do now with floured hands is we are going to divide this in half and shape them into long rectangles.

 And we're going to put them... I'm going to use my Silpat, but I'm going to put them onto an ungreased large cookie sheet.

 Okay, I'm not sure that I'm going to be able to get this 11 inches long, but that looks like about 2 inches wide.

 And I guess, maybe if I don't make them as tall, maybe I can get it, huh?

 Alright, we are going to put this into the 350 degree oven for 30 minutes or until the logs are set.

It's on a cookie rack and they're going to sit out for 15 minutes.

 So, after that, we'll come back and we're going to cut it up with a serrated knife.

 Okay, so now what we're going to do is we are going to slice into this.

 We're going to slice in diagonally and with your serrated knife, you're going to use a sawing technique and you're going to cut them every half, about a half an inch.

 Okay, so it says to dump the ends and then place them back on the cookie sheet with the cut side up.

 It does seem like it's overly dry, so, you know, it does have a little bit of fallout.

 Maybe it shouldn't have been cooked as long, is my point of view.

 Anyway, you place them all and they can be fairly close and what we're going to do is we're going to put them back into the oven, the 350 oven.

 We're going to let it cook for 8 minutes on one side, turn them over and cook them for another 8 minutes.

 So, I'm going to go ahead and complete doing this and then we'll toss it into the oven.

 Alrighty, so the first 8 minutes is over and I'm flipping them over and they'll go back in for 8 more minutes and then they're complete.

 I will include the instructions on how to make that and put it in the description box, but Mother doesn't want that on hers.

We're just going to let them cool off and then I'm going to put them away.

 So water, but only enough water to make to a thick dough is what you want.

 So I put a blob of grout on and I just spread it around a little so it thickens up.

 Then I use my squeegee and just run my squeegee over the top and it wipes all the grout into the gaps.

 It's going to be tough not to do all of it because it dries and then you've got to get the next bit.

 You can leave it for a little while to dry but you can tell because it's starting to dry on top.

 The grout itself is still soft but the idea is to use a wet sponge.

 You'll see when I push down the water will come out and just lightly rub over the top

 So you run through, you can see the water is coming out and it's wetting the grout and

 The tile itself is still soft but the idea is to use, you can see they've all cleaned

 Hey there everybody, it's spring and I'm going to show you what I do to my bananas.

 So the first thing we're going to do is we're going to break all this mulch away.

 All these little banana pups are sprouting up so we need to get the mulch out of the

 And one of the things I already did to these is I cut away all the dead parts.

 And we're just going to make a nice little bed for the bananas.

 So now that I've broke away all the mulch, I'm going to put down some fertilizer.

 And now that we've put our fertilizer and compost down, we're just going to rake the

 One thing I've noticed with every time I uncover these is I've found a whole bunch of worms.

 I've just dug away the mulch, put down compost, and then I sprinkled some 10-10-10 fertilizer on it.

 And you can see all the little banana leaves I put in here last winter when I was overwintering them.

 And we'll look for our dowel pin marking on these front bearings

 I'm going to be demonstrating how you can make a quick, no-sew superhero cape for your

 I would recommend keeping it one-sided, so if it has something on the back, you may want

 Step one, with my scissors, I'm going to take and cut off the sleeves.

 Now with the scissors, the sharper they are, the easier it will be to cut through, but

 This particular t-shirt does not have seams down the side, so I'm just going to kind of

 And I'm going to repeat and do the same thing on the other side.

 Now I'm going to turn the t-shirt towards me, and right now it is in almost two pieces,

 Now in order to keep it a cape, I'm going to cut along the fold at the top, or the seam,

 I want to keep this elastic part of the neck, and that's the part that will go around the

 Now if you wanted, you could add in Velcro or make it ties simply by cutting this and

 I am just going to take this piece off, and we are left with the basic part of our cape.

 So I'm going to go from the bottom and simply cut a diagonal line all the way up to the

 And once again, the whole idea is we're doing this quick, no need to measure out your line.

 And once again, I just quickly am cutting to the outside of the neck hole.

 outside the bowl for the camera but when you do it really you want to be inside a

 bowl maybe even in your sink because they do make a mess and you lose some of

Get us another wedge and again just open it up and you peel those

 nutrients that you get from some of your regular foods or what a lot of us eat

Now those seeds actually have like a nucleus that's almost like a

The food of the gods, you know, I'm more interested in the food of

 But if you like things that are texturally interesting and you want to

 break from your bananas and pomegranates are on sale, go ahead and give them a go.

 going to need a few ingredients and this is one of my favorite dishes as well because

And you will find this at so many Japanese fast food restaurants, Yoshinoya

So I put dashi powder, chicken broth or water, whichever you have, soy sauce,

 Next, the first thing is to put everything in the pot, including the dashi powder, sugar, soy sauce,

I will boil it for about 3-4 minutes and then I will take it out.

So it doesn't really look cool with it, so I'm just going to take it out after a few minutes.

 And I don't usually put alcohol in my food, so usually a Japanese recipe, they usually put mirin or

 for a couple of minutes until the beef is cooked and it's completely done now.

 steamed rice in my bowl and I also will just put my beef on top of it.

So you're only going to need to cook for a few minutes, that's all.

 And I will put so many sauce on the bottom as well, it's so delicious.

 And you will sprinkle with some green onions and benishoga, which is pickled ginger, and you are set and it's done.

 And you also can put some chili powder, Japanese chili powder is so delicious.

 Please like, subscribe, follow me on my Facebook, Instagram, Twitter and Google Plus and stay tuned for the new video every week.

Please like, subscribe, follow me on my Facebook, Instagram, Twitter and Google Plus.

And if you have a chance, you can make a video of me, please post it on Facebook.

 First, make sure you have covered the technique for the one hip circle.

 Find the one hip circle segment and take time to practice this move.

 Briefly, reminding you of the main elements of this trajectory.

 You are pivoting on one foot, pushing off the floor with the other foot to turn around.

 To push, you need to shift a bit of weight onto the leg that pushes off the floor.

 Meanwhile, performing a typical one hip circle, you keep all your weight on the supporting

 So we need to modify our one hip circle and combine the lifting of the hip and the twist

 And you can add an arm frame or an arm trajectory to this move to make it your own.

 A bit clumsy, but a few weeks or months down the road it's like breathing to you.

 Just stay with me and other instructors and know that you'll be there in no time.

 In fact, class master hoods can be worn on the belt with a diagonal slash representative

 So my belt actually has a red slash on it, which means that I am a master healer.

 So a lot of people don't know that, but it is in the rule book.

 So we're going to start out with the far one on the left, and we're going to go over,

 You pull this one all the way through, and just kind of let it hang off to the side.

 Now we'll come to the next one, and we're going to go over, under, over, under, over,

 Now, the one that we did the last time, I'm going to kind of snug that tight and hang it down.

 We'll do this a couple more times so you guys can kind of see how the pattern emerges.

 So we're going to come through here, pull it all the way through,

 You can see the maroon is starting to appear on the other side of the belt.

 I like to hook it on my toe because it just makes it easier for tension purposes.

 and it will continue to do so and eventually look like a candy cane.

 It only takes a few ingredients, a few tools, and I'll show you everything you need.

 For this project you will need a spoon, a container, a candle, something to light it

 with, and just FYI, if you are not an adult, make sure that you have adult supervision

 An old lipstick and a moisturizer, preferably a facial moisturizer.

 Okay, so now I've just taken my lipstick and I've put it on my spoon.

 Now I'm just going to set it over the open flame so that it begins to melt.

 So I'm not quite touching the flame, I'm just kind of setting it over it so that the heat

 Okay so as you can see, I accidentally dripped a drop into the candle.

 So now that it's completely melted, I'm just going to pour it into a little bowl.

 So now you want to work quite fast with this because it does solidify again very fast.

 So now I'm going to add some moisturizer into it and just start mixing.

 So as you can see, it's gotten a little bit chunky again, so all I did was scoop it back

 Now as it heats up, just because my spoon wasn't quite big enough, I'm just going to

 We just made enough to cover the bottom of this container and there is a reason for that.

 This is about the amount that you'll need for your entire cheek.

 And when you spread this out on the back of your hand, when you blend it, it blends so

 beautifully and a little bit goes a long way if you can see that.

 Now I actually got the inspiration for this from my grandmother because she told me that

 in years past before they had blush, women would actually take their lipstick, a little

 bit on their finger and right onto the cheeks to give them that rosy glow.

 So I took inspiration from that to come up with this particular recipe for a cream blush

 We hope that you find this short video both helpful and informative.

 Every home decorator will be aware of the frustrating dilemma of what to do when it

 Removing a plumbed-in radiator can be a very messy and time-consuming job, that is, until

 Thanks to the Radmate isolation valve, all the problems and frustrations of removing

 When fitted with the Radmate, a radiator can be removed in seconds, losing only a few drops

 Ideal not only for decorating, tiling and removal of a leaking or damaged radiator,

 Perfect for asthma sufferers and where cleanliness is a priority.

 Operating the Radmate is simple and can even be done with the heating still switched on.

 First, close down the manual control valve, turning it clockwise until tight.

 Remove the plastic cap from the lock shield valve and turn the spindle clockwise, using

 Next, release the two child tamper-proof grub screws half a turn, using an Allen key.

 Then separate the Radmate by twisting the specially knurled flange section anti-clockwise

 When you need to replace the radiator, re-hang the radiator on the wall brackets, making

 Then, holding the knurled flange of the Radmate, push it down and twist it clockwise over the

 All that is left to do now is to open both the manual and lock shield valves, which allows

 With massive savings in both time and money, why not make the Radmate your mate?

And what we are using today is going to be a beet, a large beet,

 that I just take a peel or two, just peel it, you know, I cut the bottom off just barely,

And I don't know how much spinach is here, but it's half this bucket,

I always like, I just fill the Vitamix up with spinach, I don't really

 I put the beets on top to add a little bit of weight to it, so it kind of helps me out

 as many as we possibly can, because, especially with colon cancer, colon cancer is the number

 3 most diagnosed disease in the United States, so of course we are going to want to prevent

Now the purpose of that is to carry out the toxins from your body.

 toxins like little weights that just collect inside of your body that your cells are making

So what you want to do is of course you want to move the lymph with

 the fruits and then you want to cleanse the blood system with the herbs like the spinach

 is very very similar to human blood and it allows it to move freely within the blood

 stream and pick up the toxins and bring them out as well as increasing your blood flow

I'm going to go ahead and post a video too in the description that you

Something else I would have added to the juice would have been alfalfa

 sprouts maybe, maybe some wheat grass or some other type of sprout as well.

 That's as close as you can get to the living food unless you are lucky enough to have a

 But for all intents and purposes of this video, to look as a civilized human being, I'm going

 I just want to quickly demonstrate a couple different techniques for using the fire steel.

 There's basically a full strike method which will eventually wear down the center of your

 And then there's another method which is somewhat of a finesse method which will wear down the

 For the finesse method, you're going to want a knife with a very flat, sharp back on it.

 And another good knife for the finesse method or for striking a fire steel in general is

 the Swiss Army Knife saw blade because it also has a very sharp, square-edged back.

 And you'll just get better sparks in general if you have a nice square back.

 You can use the tip of your blade because that's nice and sharp and you can finesse

 The only thing is, if you have a mish metal, the softer type of fire steel, it's kind of

 hard to finesse it because with the softer mish metal, like this Coglens I got, you have

 That's why I kind of prefer the harder ferrocerium rod because you can go slow and still get

 But with the softer mish metal, you try to go slow and it just doesn't happen.

 But if you have a regular ferrocerium rod, I'll use the Swiss Army knife this time just

 I like using both methods depending on the material I'm striking.

 If I have a stubborn tinder, birch bark is not a stubborn tinder.

 But while it's generally not a stubborn tinder, it's being a little stubborn today from what

 You can use, if you're having a little hard time with it, you can use this method where

 you place the steel hard onto a hard surface and get a full strike.

 But you end up wearing down the center of your steel and you leave the end of it untouched

 Because the idea with this method is to not squish your tinder.

 So when you strike using this method, generally I like to have my knife at an angle so when

 I can take a small piece of tinder and see I'm not hitting the tinder and squishing it.

 But if your steel starts getting really worn down in the middle like this one is and you

 have some good tinder like fatwood, cotton balls, or birch bark, you can use the finesse

 The finesse method which more or less works the tip of the fire steel like that.

 Or the full stroke method which gives you a nice big blaze but tends to put more wear

 Just make sure you have a knife with a nice square back for the finesse method or use

 SK Woodsman has a YouTube channel that shows what I call the finesse method where you just

 And IA Woodsman has a video or two that shows the full stroke method.

 Well, first thing we want to do, we have some salad croutons here and they're all natural

 The main thing is to get a consistent topping, like all the same size anyway.

 Then what we've done is we've gotten a pot of water to a boil here.

 It flavors the pasta, it makes the water boil faster and it helps the pasta cook more thoroughly.

 While that cooks, we're going to bring two cups of milk to just over a simmer.

 I start the heat out on medium here and then I kind of turn it down because you don't want

 While that simmers, we've got our pasta going, we've got our milk simmering.

 We have two tablespoons of warm water and two tablespoons of cornstarch.

 You've just got to make really sure that you whisk this together very well because you

 Okay, so now this is nice and thick and we just want to turn the heat off.

 And just stir it up a little bit and you can go ahead and add the cheese.

 If you're watching your calories or your fat, you can always use the Cabot 50% reduced fat

 You can also add for a little extra tang, about a teaspoon of Dijon mustard.

 You can also just put in, at this point, just about anything you want.

 Just go ahead and get plenty of the broccoli and everything else on there.

 I just like to cover the top pretty well, nice and smooth here.

 For these and other macaroni and cheese recipes, visit us at CabbageCheese.coop.

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to show you how to do these simple dog nails.

 Using white polish or white acrylic paint, use a small brush and paint a circle and then

 If you have any problems with the white running into the black, touch it up with the brush

 Using a small brush, use brown paint to paint on the shape of the dog's face.

 Paint a small triangle in black and then once you've done that on all the nails, go

 back and paint a small line and then a semi-circle for the mouth.

 Using a smaller dotting tool, paint the inside of the eye using black polish.

 When the design is dry, finish off with a top coat and don't forget to wrap the tips

 Quick video, make it fun, make it interesting, and hopefully you can learn something between

 First off, you're playing outfield, church league, right field.

 Ball's popped up, I stand there like this, get underneath it, put my glove up like this,

 Reason being, I miss the ball, it hits me in the nose if I'm looking up, blood everywhere,

 If you don't catch it, the ball's going to more likely fall in front of you, you pick

 Ball's smashed to the shortstop or second basement, first or third, depending on where

 But a lot of guys want to square up, it bounces up, can knock out a tooth.

 Knowing later on after the turning, you're going to Hooters, you're going to try to mack

 on a waitress, you don't want to go in there and look like a four year old who just lost

 The ball's hit, you run up to it, you smack your glove in the dirt, hopefully the ball

 It rolls into the mousehole, more times out of ten it's going to bounce out, you can pick

 Second of all, if he has on two knee braces, you might be able to one hop and get him.

 I'm just saying, it'll be a close play, but you might be able to get him.

 Picture's throwing little knuckle balls, you're doing this fake stuff, all that stuff, I got

 I never get to catch because I'm not that good, but I'll get to catch her someday.

 I just stand behind the umpire, the guy swings, I try it up in front.

 If I can get my bat, what I like to do is get up there, I bob like this.

 A lot of times I just stand there and let the ball hit behind the point and all my guys

 People make fun of me because I play softball and that's all I talk about.

 Alright, another thing I like to do, the ball comes, I kind of just twist my whole body

 I hope you learned something between the lines, between the chalk, because that's what I'm

 To all my new subscribers, if you subscribe, next week, next Wednesday, I'm going to put

 You can find them on eBay or you can look me up at Keelani816 at Yahoo.com and we can

 Hi, we want to give you some basic rules to the road for hustle.

 These are all the basic concepts and will be augmented in future videos.

 So for the leaders, you've got back breaks, you've also got side breaks, and you've also

 So you've got back breaks, you have side breaks, and you have front breaks.

 When you do your back break leader or any break step, your left arm should be giving.

 It should go and one, two, three, and one, two, three, and one, two, three, and one,

 That's going to be because the follower is doing a back break all the time.

 And even if I were to side break and one, two, or front break and one, her right hip

 So even when we're in close position later on and I have to do a side break, I'm still

 The whole point of a back break is so that we walk forward on our next step.

 The whole point of a side break is so we cross the side of our next step.

 The whole point of a front break is that we go back on the next step.

 The idea behind the break step is that wherever the break is, the next step is the opposite direction.

 So on a side break in a cross body, we're going to take that left leg and cut it on

 On a back break like for a wheel and one, we'll walk forward, two.

 On a more sophisticated step like a Las Vegas where we have a front break, we front break

 Followers, we also have some basic rules for the road in hustle.

 Unlike the leaders, we only have back breaks for the majority of the dance.

 And as Eric mentioned, your right hip will be going back somewhat to create the nice torque

 Now because we don't have the other break steps to worry about, we have turns as followers

 And turns to your right are always going to happen by count three.

 Now if we wanted to turn to the right, we would have to complete our turn by count three.

 Now I'm going to do it from the side so that you can see that I turn and then step.

 So to start off this video, I'm going to be showing you guys this DIY face mask.

 So you're going to need some extra virgin organic olive oil, some lime.

 So after that you're just going to mix them and you're going to squeeze some lime into

 the bowl and what the lime does is that it brightens up your face and it just makes it

 And the sugar acts as an exfoliator so you're left with very radiant and soft skin.

 So to wash my face, I'm just going to be using my beauty good spin for perfect skin brush

 They have a specific facial brush and a specific body brush and the facial brush is so soft.

 Soft enough that I can scrub my lips and exfoliate them which is what I really love.

 After exfoliating, I'm going to be washing off my face with some warm water.

 Then I'm going to be taking this cream cleanser by Shea Moisture and just scrubbing my face

 to get off some of the oil from the spin brush and to also take any excess oil off of my

 face because I don't want my face looking shinier than it already is because my skin

 So I'm just going to be taking that and just scrubbing my face.

 Courtesy of beauty goods, I have a discount code that you guys can use to get 70% off

 and $30 off free shipping for US customers and the code is called liaspin.

 All the information will be in the below bar as well as the page link.

 So you guys should really buy this product because it just works so well for your skin

 I hope you guys enjoyed and please give it a thumbs up if you did and I'll see you in

So today I thought I would make a tutorial on this Rilakkuma loaf of bread

 because it was so requested and instead of making a jumbo version, I thought I would make a mini version

 So the first thing I'm going to do is cut the shape into a Rilakkuma loaf

 So here is how the shape turned out and it's not the best but it'll have to do

 so now you're just going to paint the front and the back a light yellow color

 After you've painted both sides, you're just going to go ahead and paint the crust

 So after you have finished painting the chocolate, it should look something like this

 and I hope you guys enjoyed watching and I will see you guys later, bye!

 So you've got to put his hands up, don't worry about putting the fence up, you put your hands

 up, because it looks like he's going to have a fight, you do the same, it's a bit too late

 So from this position you've got a couple of techniques you can do.

 Normally this is the most effective technique from this position, so I dive in here, straight

 into his head, elbow crosses up from this position, put the hodge choke on, from there,

 That technique, it's not a control and strength technique, that's one where you basically

 So don't expect to stand there and say, well I'll stay still because he's fucking up.

 So from this position I put my hands up, I'm in the same stance that he's in, so not so

 important, orthodox stance, left foot forward, left hand forward.

 I'm protecting my jawline, keeping my chin tucked in, shoulders shrugged.

 So from this position I'll lead with my head, I'll look down at the floor.

 So I'm not going to go straight in this way, I'm going to attack his face from the top

 This hand goes through here, grabs the back of his tricep, on the inside.

 Some people have a loose, high guard, some people have an open guard, an open hand, the

 Bear in mind, the guy's going to move back, he's not just going to stand still.

 The reason I've got the back of his tricep is to stop him from throwing this punch.

 From this position, I come over the top, remove his tricep elbow, so I'm holding his wrist

 As I do that, I'm lifting my armpit, my shoulder, and I'm protecting this side of my face.

 This arm smashes him in the side of the head, I pull his head down.

 As I turn my body this way, I cut across his jawline with my wrist, the bony part of my wrist.

 From this position, I put this hand on his shoulder, this one on my own wrist here.

 This is called the Koache choke, or Stuart calls it the Koache choke.

 It's a bit of a mixture, but it's fucking painful to put it that way.

 Look where you're going, but in reality, keep your chin tucked right in.

 What you don't want to do is dive in when he tucks his chin in.

 The difference between this and the guillotine choke is his head is not underneath my armpit.

 And it puts instant pressure on the windpipe and the soft tissue on the neck.

 When you get to here, as long as you're clear of the mouth, you can hold onto your own hand or you can hold onto his chin.

 As long as his head doesn't move and you're both facing that way, that's it.

 If he's underneath the armpit and I try and do this, he can turn his head and make it easier for himself.

 He can start grabbing my hands and going for the groin and stuff like that.

 From here, smash his head with the forearm, the blade of the forearm.

 If you're like this and you're off, it means you're going to start leaning back.

 Okay, so hey guys, I am going to do apple crisp in the crock pot.

 And this is just how I do it because I don't have one of those core things, which I kind of want to get one.

 But I'm just going to peel it like this and then I'll come back to you when I have all of these peeled.

 So I peeled my apples and what I'm going to do is I'm just going to slice mine.

 Okay, so what we're going to do is since our apples are in the crock pot, we're just going to take our regular sugar

And then I'm taking some cinnamon and we're just going to sprinkle that on there as well.

 Okay, and then with the flour we're going to use our brown sugar.

 Our butter and I'm going to cut it in small pieces and add in our mixture.

 Okay, so here is our apple cinnamon and sugar and here is our oatmeal mixture.

 I'm going to put a little bit more cinnamon on top of mine and we're going to cover with a lid and we're going to cook this for about three hours.

 Okay, so mine has been cooking for about three hours and this is what it looks like.

 This is what it looks like and yeah, it's actually really good.

 I sprinkled a little bit more brown sugar on top of mine and then I mixed it back in because I needed a little bit more sweet.

It's super easy and if you guys have any questions or anything, definitely just ask.

 Hey guys, it's Connan and welcome to an episode of Cooking With Connan.

 It has been a very, very long time since I filmed one of these and, um,

 To the melted butter, you want to start adding your wet ingredients.

 Also, just quite obviously, this recipe has no eggs, so you won't die of salmonella poisoning.

 Once you've done that, you can mixy mixy mixy mixy, and it looks like poopy poopy poopy poopy.

 I think that the person who made this recipe was probably just...

 Next you're gonna get a plate, and we're going to go to the microwave to microwave this all up.

 You're going to want to make this cookie in a way so that the edges are a little bit thinner than the center.

 Because, uh, if you know how a microwave works, it cooks from the middle, and then outwards.

 After that you're going to do the same thing, but for 20 seconds.

 And for the last time you're going to do 70% power, but for 10 seconds.

 So I don't think my cookie's done yet, so I'm gonna do it for another 10 seconds.

 And if the edges look like they're cooked, they're definitely going to look like they are cooked.

 It's really hot, so I'm eating it with a spoon, because that's what the cool kids do.

 But I decided that I felt like I kind of needed to make a video

This short tutorial is all about my eyebrow routine and the products that I'm

Use short flicks of your brush starting with the inner corner working your way towards

 brush for more detailed work that needs to be blended or you need to exaggerate just

The last step is to highlight the arch and give the defined brow a more

 the hairline across and brush down any excess product and blend.

 the top of the brow but this time you're going to be blending up and outward instead of down.

 Meat sauce to me was generally meat like ground beef with tomato sauce around it.

 It was very sauce heavy and so my world was kind of rocked when I discovered true

 Bolognese by a chef in New York City, a friend of mine a long while ago.

 They are one of my favorite candy manufacturers and are from my neighborhood in New York City.

 You can check them out online at littlebitsweets.com and be sure to check out all of their products.

 I think that their salted caramel is some of the best I've ever had.

 It's kind of in the northern part of Italy sandwiched between Florence, Venice and Milan.

 And it is the birthplace of such culinary greats as Mortadella and Parmigiano-Reggiano.

 As I said, the Bolognese that you'll find in America often resembles nothing of the classic Bolognese.

 And some people argue that the classic Bolognese doesn't actually resemble the original Bolognese made a long time ago.

 You see, around the 5th century we have the first recorded evidence of Bolognese existing.

 There's a problem here because at that time tomatoes were not in Italy.

 Tomatoes didn't make their way to Italy until around the 16th century.

 Around the 16th century is kind of when the more classic Bolognese came about.

 And then modern variations, at least here in the United States, have this really imbalanced proportion of tomato and tomato sauce to meat.

 Traditionally Bolognese sugo, or sauce, is a very meat-focused condiment for the pasta.

 You'll often see beef, veal, pork and sometimes something like pancetta.

 Some people obviously will be shaking and turning in their graves right now and saying, no it must be red.

 Some people just put in a little bit of tomato paste to just kind of make the flavor a little bit more round and luscious.

 Bolognese is one of those dishes where you put two grandmothers in a room and they'll fight each other to death

 because everybody has their own way of making Bolognese and everybody's way is correct.

 If you want to go totally traditional you would use tagliatelle.

 That is because spaghetti was from southern Italy and it wasn't around during that time when they were making Bolognese.

 However, I don't believe that that's the best option because I think that there are many better things in the grocery stores today,

 talking about dry pastas, that can better hold on to the meaty sauce and get that meat all up in the nooks and crannies of the pasta.

 Which is why I always go for a pasta with a hole in the center of it and kind of a rough edge.

 So today we're going to make Bolognese the way that I make Bolognese,

 which is a combination of a lot of recipes that I've learned over time.

 In a heavy bottom pan put a few glugs of olive oil, a small diced up onion,

 You're not going to caramelize it because you don't want all that sweetness.

 You just want to let it soften, so use a low flame and when it starts to become transparent that's time to kill the heat.

 Now add a pound of ground beef, a pound of pork and a pound of veal.

 And cook while stirring until they're gray, but actually don't brown them.

 Now I know a lot of people are going to give me slack about this because when you brown something you caramelize it and it adds a lot of flavor.

 However, I believe that once you sear the meat you're preventing a lot of moisture from going into it.

 And the milk as well as the tomato juices and the wine do a lot to kind of make a luscious flavor that I don't think that you get if you sear the meat.

or San Marzano tomatoes, it just means that they're certified and they're actually from Italy.

 Make sure your hands are clean and then go through each tomato removing any hard stem bits and crushing the tomatoes with your hands.

 By this time your meat should be gray and you're going to add a cup of your favorite white wine.

 Bring this to a simmer and let the majority of the liquid evaporate about 15 to 20 minutes.

 Once most of the wine has cooked off add one cup of whole milk and keep cooking until that has evaporated.

 There should be some milk solids floating around in the mixture.

 Now add your can of crushed San Marzano tomatoes along with any juices that you might have collected from the can and give it a stir.

 And if you're starting to see a lot of rapid bubbling and simmering you might want to put a frying pan below it to help diffuse the heat a little bit more.

 At the end of three hours your sauce is going to be luscious and thick and it is the perfect accompaniment for any type of pasta.

 Though I think, as I said, round noodles with holes are the best.

 Be sure to make pasta, season it with salt before you add it, add it while it's al dente.

 Don't rinse your pasta off and toss it in the pot before you serve it.

 I think that you're going to find that it's a lot different from what you might have grown up with unless you grew up in Bologna.

 If you want you can try and use all beef but I really recommend the trifecta of meats because you get a good amount of fat from the pork and you get a much springier, supple texture from the veal.

 Tune in tomorrow for another What's This Food and be sure to check out our sponsor, LittleBitSweets.com.

 Hey guys, today I'm going to be giving you the recipe for a single banana muffin.

 When I think about making muffins or cupcakes, it's kind of a little daunting

 because you have to make a whole bunch and the batch sometimes seems never-ending.

 I just got done watching Despicable Me 2 and the minions love bananas.

 You're going to need 3 tablespoons of flour, 1 1 6th tablespoon of salt,

 1 tablespoon of vegan butter or you can use regular butter or applesauce,

 Pour the batter into a greased muffin pan and then cook for 10 to 14 minutes.

 I filled the empty muffin holes with a little bit of water so it doesn't burn the pan.

 When the time is up, go ahead and use a toothpick to test if it's completely done.

 We've already had game over once, but we're in the second world.

 Hey folks, today we're going to talk about some more advanced techniques.

 Two calls that we'll discuss today are clucks and purrs and tree calls.

 But these are two calls that I promise you will put more turkeys in the back of your truck.

 The clucks and purrs and the tree call that we're going to do today will be done on a purr pot.

 Often times you'll see people either using a single piece of slate or what they call a tree talker.

 You might like hickory, you might like sassafras, you might like cedar, you might like plexiglass.

 The way that I hold the striker is I pinch the striker with my first two fingers.

 And you're not really going to hold the striker with a lot of pressure.

 You're going to hold the call with your left hand and you're going to kind of form a,

 A lot of times when you're hunting, if you put your knee together,

 it creates kind of a reverb, I guess you'd call it, and it makes the call too loud.

 But the way that I like to do it is I put the call on my right leg,

 If you start in the middle, it's going to be a dead sound, not very realistic.

 But if you're holding the striker too tight, it's almost going to sound like a woodpecker pecking on a tree.

 And that's what most people get when they're trying to cluck and purr.

 But remember, pinch your striker halfway, fairly loose, the next finger behind it.

 But now probably the best call in the woods, at least in my mind, is a tree call.

 I kill a lot of turkeys in the morning times just with nothing but clucks and tree calls.

 And a proper way to hold a striker for a tree call, or at least my way, is you pinch with your thumb and your bird finger.

 And then the forefinger on your hand, you slide it behind the striker.

 If you'll take these two calls that we've talked about today, the clucks and purrs and tree calls, I promise you, you'll put more turkeys in the back of your truck.

 use any of the Base Weight cardstocks by Gina K Designs, you do have to score it

 scoring blade or if you want to use one of my favorite scoring tools.

And I like to just run my scoring tool down it two or three times.

 you've actually made an indentation there and you've stretched the fibers so

 piece of my black Onyx Base Weight cardstock and one of the pattern papers

Now to get all of the cut pieces, all of the measurements of the

 cut pieces that I'm using in today's card project, just look below the screen

 and you'll see all the pieces and all of the measurements that you'll cut them to.

 I'm going to put some tape on the back of my pattern piece of paper and then

 I'm going to go ahead and affix that to my black Onyx cardstock just like that.

 Now I'm going to add a little bit of ribbon and I've used the black Onyx

So I'm just going to cut that just a little bit over the size of the

 card like that and then I'm going to line it up to where I want it and I'm

 going to flip it over and add a little bit of my tape just like that on the

Now I'm going to cut one more piece of gingham just like that to make

I'm going to lay my piece of cardstock where I'm going to pierce

 my holes and these are the piercing templates from Gina K Designs but you

 black onyx brads that came in my kit right in there just like that.

 Now I'm going to attach this whole thing onto my base and what that does is

 all the yucky stuff on the back you're not going to be able to see through

 because it's all going to be taped right down onto there and when you open it up

 around the ribbon and right around where the brads are like that.

 then I'm going to go ahead and position that onto my card just like that.

 going to take the flower that used the thumping technique and I'm going to add

 have enough thank-you cards and I'm going to use some Memento Tuxedo Black

I'm going to go ahead and ink up my stamp and then stamp my thank you right

 Now I'm going to go ahead and tape this onto a piece of black base weight

 like that and then go ahead and tape it right onto my card front.

 Hey guys, welcome to Fix It Samo channel, today it's all about seeing is believing.

 What I'm going to do is a nice trick that you can have a bet with anybody and tell them

 you know I can bet anything that I would put this stick through that balloon.

 Well, shish kebab balloon, you see you can have fun with your kids but now I'm going

 So you see now I got my balloon and I'm going to show you how we're going to do it.

 I'm going to just bring, that's my secret, regular soap for the dishes and I put my barbecue

 stick, I dip it inside and I look for the middle of the balloon right here, it has to

 So that was the trick, it's very easy and simple, it's a nice one actually and as I

 told you before, it's amazing just to do that trick with your kids, it's a very nice one.

 So thanks for watching, don't forget to subscribe under Fix It Samo, one word and we'll see

 For this demonstration, I'm going to be using Arches 140-pound cold-pressed paper.

 This is going to be similar to the value grid that we created when we did washes.

 The only difference, instead of a grid, I'm going to create a landscape.

 And instead of adding more water, I'm going to add more pigment.

 By creating mountains, it's a fun way to visually understand how this technique works.

 Now that I've created my line drawing, I can go in with my bamboo hake brush and cover

 the entire surface with clean water and get ready to create my first wash.

 Now that I have my clean water wash on my paper, I can mix my colors on my palette.

 I'm going to use ultramarine blue and a little purple matter, then apply it to the paper.

 To give the look a distance, I'm going to keep the darker color on the top of the page,

 I'm going to be using the same color combination throughout this exercise, only adding more

 As I showed you, when I create washes, I constantly keep my paper moving to keep the pigment smooth

 As you can see, the colors will always dry lighter, so it's all right to add a richer

 When the paper is completely dry, I can then start to add the distance.

 If there are any hard edges, I can use a clean brush to smooth them out.

 Then after each layer is dry, I'm gradually going to build up the color density into the

 And using one value shade darker, I can go in and add the second layer of mountains.

 As you can see, I have a little bit of pigment on my brush, so all I have to do is use a

 Now I'm going to add a little more pigment to my color mixture and add it to my mountains.

 By adding a richer color, you're beginning to see the gradual buildup of distance.

 Again, using a clean brush, I'm going to go in and soften out my edges and wash it all

 While it's still damp, I can go in with a finer brush and add some details to give the

 This is starting to give you a really good idea of how the richer, darker colors are

 So this is going to give you a really good idea of how I create distance in my landscapes.

 Now I'm going to add a richer pigment to the next mountain range.

 I'm going over the entire area and washing down into the foreground.

 Notice how similar this is to the value grid I created when I showed you washes, but this

 Now that this is dry, you're actually able to really get a good visual idea of how it

 Even doing this simple exercise gives me the feeling of being in the mountains.

 Now for this final layer, in the foreground, I'm going to use the darkest color.

 To help my pigments move, I'm going to lift my paper up so they can blend easily.

 Now here's the final product and you can see how it all works together.

 But basically what Banh Cuon is, is it's like a rice, a fermented rice batter that is steamed

 It's filled with a mixture of pork and little shrimp, and then just a few light seasonings,

 and wrapped up like a roll, and then served with a side of blanched bean sprouts and sliced

 And then I also got something called Banh Beo from Thit, which is, I think it's like,

 it's pretty similar, but it's either like round rice cakes topped with pork and shrimp,

 and I'm not sure what that orange stuff is, it might be like shrimp, ground shrimp or

 But anyways, the first step to eating this, oh and I forgot, the Banh Cuon is also served

 The first step is to take some of the juice, and this is like a sweet fish sauce.

 Oh man, it has a little bit of a fish sauce smell, but it smells sour and sweet at the

 So this is the first step, is to put some into a bowl, and then depending on your spice

 So I think I'm gonna just try to pick up a whole one, if I can.

 Okay, and then I will chase it down with some of the lettuce afterwards.

 I think I could take a little bit of black pepper, and it's salty, and then those little

 That crunch, and that beautiful oniony flavor, and that sauce is just magnificent.

 I'm not sure if you're supposed to one bite this, or if you're supposed to nibble on it, but...

 I'm gonna try this one first, and maybe give it a dip in the chili.

 I can use it to scoop up all that pork that fell out on my first bite.

 I think, oh yeah, I think it will be best just to eat it with a spoon, actually.

 But instead, this time it's on a rice cake instead of wrapped into noodles.

 I'm not sure if the coconut is in the little pancake, or if that orange stuff is the coconut.

 No, I think this style of a pancake, maybe it's rice, it's like a rice batter, but mixed

 with coconut milk, so it has a really strong, a great coconut milk flavor.

 Also, the bánh bèo was also very good, but I think I enjoyed the bánh cuốn better.

 Those are extremely tasty, make a wonderful light meal, or a snack.

 Definitely recommend this restaurant if you would like to try bánh cuốn when you're

 You know, when you go to the food store, a lot of times you'll see packs of herbs or

 But not only that, when you take them home and put them in the refrigerator, they may

 One of the things that you can do right in your own backyard, you don't even need a garden,

 you can even live in an apartment, you can grow your own herbs.

 Now if you do have a garden, some herbs you can just put in your garden, let them grow

 naturally, just like this bronze fennel here, which just slowly reseeds itself through the

 Bronze fennel I really like because it's got that sweet, licorice type flavor.

 So when you use that in certain salad dressings and things, it gives you that sweetness that

 You know, there's so many herbs that you can choose from in a garden, but I like a couple

 that I think are pretty much the mainstays that you should really focus on.

 Rosemary is good to use, especially for fish and meats and even lamb.

 And there's quite a few different varieties of rosemary, I pretty much like the upright type.

 Then we have tarragon, which also has sort of that sweet flavor.

 Oregano, and you want to make sure you really try to get the true oregano that has that

 Cilantro, now personally cilantro tastes like soap to me, but a lot of people love cilantro.

 And in fact, you can even have it for two years in your garden.

 It's both the curly type and then there's also the broad leaf type that looks just like

 Basil, you know, you really can't get away from growing herbs and not growing your basil.

 And there's different varieties of basil, some have spicy flavors, some have sweet flavors.

 One of the things though you do need to remember is you need to be sure that your container

 Because what you'll find if you overwater your herbs, they tend to decline and they

 won't produce a lot of new growth that you can use in your cooking.

 Here we have the prostrate rosemary, here we have thyme, basil, dill, and parsley all

 And the great thing about container gardening with herbs is you can bring this container

 indoors during the winter months and enjoy fresh herbs all winter long.

 When you trim your herbs, you want to try to get the fresh new growth.

 It's real important that you try to bypass some of the older growth that might look yellow

 or it becomes a little harder and tougher and it's really not as edible.

 Little bit of rosemary, little bit of tarragon, little bit of thyme, little bit of basil,

 oregano, just a sprig or two of each, little bit of parsley, little bit of fennel.

 And I just rinse off the foliage and I just take this little handful of herbs and I put

 And then on top of it I pour my favorite salad dressing which just might be oil and vinegar.

 Just blend it for a couple seconds and you can pour it over your salad and there's nothing

 If you'd like more garden tips, use the internet to click on the In the Garden website at www.inthegardenradio.com.

 The splatter, or splat for short, is an advanced technique for wide gaps or very

 beginning a backflip, but the rear wheel hits the object first and prevents the backflip.

 the front wheel of the bike is forced down, it provides a lot of momentum, so the splat is also

 an excellent way of building up momentum if there is slippery terrain, a steep climb, a wide gap,

When beginning, choose a small obstacle or ledge and use a rock as a

 kicker so that you can move it around to get the desired distance.

 and should try and grab a safe part of the bike if it looks as though you are going to fall backwards.

 The kicker is actually a mound or a rock that will help launch the bike into the splatter.

 will usually be located at about the same distance from the obstacle as the actual

 engine will respond properly, and particularly to make sure a two-stroke isn't clogged.

 smaller bikes such as this 125, the faster spinning flywheel also stores energy which

The timing is difficult, but extra energy can be stored in the compressed suspension by a

The suspension should be springing back up just as you launch the bike off the kicker.

 good dose of throttle, or ideally dropping the clutch at the same moment and pulling on the bars,

 you can keep the throttle on to provide momentum as you scale the obstacle.

 comfortable with leaning back to allow your rear wheel to touch first.

 develop this by going past the balance point when learning to cover the rear brake.

 attempt bigger obstacles, there will naturally be times where you just simply don't quite make it.

Just make sure you jump off the bike, try and keep your body straight

 possible, usually the safest thing is immediately turn the bike on to full lock,

 lay the bike down on the slab or the rock ledge, and make sure you aren't on the bike.

Make sure the bike is doing the splatter, not your body against that rock ledge.

 Hi friends, today I'm going to make Dal Fry or lentils in a spicy tadka.

 in water for about an hour and to cook this recipe I'm going to add my water

 and lentils in pressure cooker and usually it's 1 cup lentils and 4 cups

Alright and I'm going to add 1 clove of garlic and a small piece of

 been 10 to 15 minutes and as you can see my dal soup or my dal is ready.

 and as you can see the ginger and garlic piece that I had added in is like nice

 the turmeric previously in the dal or in our lentil so we won't add too much.

 here that I'm gonna add in 2-3 minutes once my onions are golden brown.

 Looks like my onions are turning golden brown so I'm going to add chopped

 And we'll let our tomatoes get really really tender before we'll proceed.

 Looks like our tadka is almost ready and I'm just going to add a pinch of garam

 pressure cooker like the one I have here you can also make this dish in a slow

 Never, ever, ever put on your makeup without priming your skin.

 Makeup, eye shadow for example, adheres better to makeup than it does to skin.

 If you don't blend, then it looks like separate city states and annexed from the union.

 But when you apply it and then you blend it, it looks like a liquid.

 If you don't blend it and you apply it, and then you blend it afterwards, then you have

 a certain seamlessness that happens and it looks like one color bleading into another

 Now, we're going to do a black liner, really, really thin black line right on the lash line.

 And what I'm doing that for is to add dimension to the look because, again, the closer to

 the lash line, you want it to be dark, and then you want to fan it out and gradually

 Because this is a very smoky, sexy eye, we're applying the liner on the inside bottom as

 Okay, now I'm going again with the purple, making what I did at the top.

 And what I'm going to do is, I'm going to take a thin liner, and I'm going to apply

 Like I want people to be mesmerized when you draw into your eye, and when there are several

 different colors playing together and just running amok in the eye.

 So now, I take a little makeup remover and clean up the under eye.

 Because sometimes I see that women use it and they go, rah, rah, rah.

 And what they're doing is creating a line that's contrary of the hair follicles, and

 So you look a little ridiculous now, but after I blend it, everything will look perfectly fine.

 You want the concealer to at least be two shades lighter than your skin.

 Is that it brings out the natural bone structure of the person.

 Particularly for film, or if you're going out for a big evening, you might want to do this, but not for an everyday kind of a thing.

 So I'm giving you that super pale Brigitte Bardot, like 1960s, pale, gone away lip.

 It's completely finished, but not as much product as with somebody else's who'd have used it.

 Today we'll be making a typical South Indian dish, Mutton Chukka.

 Chukka is a generic term for anything dry, so basically we're making a dry mutton dish.

 1 pound of mutton, 1 teaspoon of black pepper, 3 quarters teaspoon of turmeric powder, 1 teaspoon or to taste red chili powder, 2 teaspoons of each ginger and garlic paste or minced, and salt to taste.

 2 large onions, finely chopped, 1 large tomato, finely diced, 4 cloves of garlic, thinly sliced.

 1 teaspoon of fennel seeds, 4 inches of cinnamon sticks, couple of cloves, and a couple of bay leaves.

 And lastly, for garnishing, we'll need a couple of curry leaves and some cilantro.

 So to marinate I'm going to add salt, black pepper, red chili powder, turmeric powder, and ginger garlic.

 So if you can, try to let it sit overnight, but if you can't, a couple hours would be fine too.

 Just don't use a pressure cooker, cook it directly, and use the same ingredients.

 We'll need 1 cup of water, 1 cup of sugar, 1 cup of oil, and 1 cup of water.

 In a pan of hot oil, add cinnamon sticks, fennel seeds, cloves, and bay leaves.

 After you let the spices heat up a little, add thinly sliced garlic.

 Stir this for a little while, until the garlic turns a bit brown.

 But don't forget, we already have a lot of salt in the mutton, so don't add too much.

Remember to keep this on a low flame the entire time, since it's really easy to burn it.

 As you can see, all the water has evaporated, and my mutton is really dry.

 If yours still has some water in it, just let it sit for a while until all of it has evaporated.

 So now, my onion masala is really dry, and the tomato is well cooked.

 Mix this on a low flame for about 10 minutes, until the mutton has really mixed with the masala.

 Just saying, this and vegetable biryani is the best combination on the planet.

 So, my next video is going to be showing you my favorite veggie biryani recipe.

 So don't forget to like, comment, and subscribe, and thank you for watching.

 Just turn my pot on now, just get a wee bit of heat into it and then I'm going to caramelise

 So in your mirepoix you've got your shallot, your carrot, your celery and your leek and

 then you've got your bouquet garni here which is just your parsley, the thyme, the garlic,

 If you cut it too large, you're not going to get the flavour out of it.

 I usually cook this off for about an hour and a half so you get the maximum flavour

 out of it but no longer where it starts crumbling, disintegrating into your stock which is going

 It's just caramelised off in the pan in as little oil as possible.

 This one I'm going to add a peanut marr, not too heavy red because I want a light elise

 hue, I don't want it too strong and flavoured over part of the lamb.

 And near the end I'm just going to add a little bit of mint to it.

 We'll just do a wee bit of salt and pepper and that'll be it ready to go.

 But the whole process will probably take round about three hours from start to finish.

 And the key thing is the vegetables don't stay in the whole time and once again it's

 To get all the impurities out so you're left with a good silky, clear, shiny jus.

 So the pan's good and hot, maybe a wee bit too hot but we're fine at the moment.

 Everything's going in, all your vegetables, your peppercorns, we're all going in there.

 And this is what it's all about, this is what it's all about for me.

 From start to finish, cooking at home, I mean I know chefs make it difficult but it's the

 So we're just probably going to do this for about 15 minutes to get a good caramelisation,

 I'm just going to add in the parsley, bay leaf, peppercorns are in there, garlic, a

 So we're all in, everything's in there now, everything's in there cooking.

 In the pot, I'm going to sweat it down, caramelise it off, add the red wine, reduce that down

 You can use this here for so much and freeze it, use it at home.

 Use this probably once a month and this will be your base stock and use it for lamb.

 Why not, the whole bottle, let's get the whole bottle in there.

 All the flavour in there, so you get the red wine, you get your mirepoix in there, a beautiful

 bit of thyme, everything's in there looking really, really good.

 So the mirepoix's been coloured off, I've now added the red wine and I'm going to reduce

 Reduce it by about half and so you're really intensifying the flavour of the red wine but

 And then I'll just add my lamb stock into it and reduce it down.

 The red wine has just reduced down by half now, I'm just going to add my stock straight

 into it and this is the point now where it starts getting interesting.

 You know a lot of people think what's the difference between a stock and a jus, it's

 And now I'm going to cook this out with the vegetables for about an hour and a half.

 Once again, don't boil it, just a nice simmer, a nice gentle simmer.

 So it's just going to come up to the heat now, simmer it off and we're going to cook

 it for an hour and a half, then pass it off and then reduce it right down.

 Let me take a pass it off and when I say pass off, the terminology that I should be really

 These have now been cooking for about an hour and a half and we've got all the flavour out,

 we're just going to strain it off and now reduce the stock down.

 So there you are, there's your stock and we're just going to let this juice down nice and

 gently for possibly for about another hour and a half to two hours.

 Once again, just give it another wee skim, we take all the impurities out again which

 is key and then it's looking great, looking really, really good.

 So now the jus has now been on for approximately two and a half, nearly two and a half hours.

 I'm just going to in the process of now seasoning it, put a little bit of Maldon salt, seasoning

 it, done, a little bit of pepper, done and we're just going to let it infuse.

 It's going a wee bit too rapid there, just bring it down a wee bit more, a gentle simmer

 should I say and we'll finish it off with a little bit of mint and you're made at home.

 The same thing with this here, you can do with beef stock, you can do with chicken stock,

 Make the stock the same way as previous and then if you're going to make a jus exactly

 the same way as that there but just change your stock so if it's a chicken stock, a beef

 After this here, you can just freeze it down, use it at home later on, whenever, Sunday

 lunch or whatever, a nice roe, a leg of lamb, just take your jus out of the freezer and

 A good, clean, homemade red wine jus and out of no packets, fresh is best.

 So to make a Dutch Baby you're going to need vanilla, milk, little zest of orange, eggs,

 butter, salt, sugar, flour, and some icing sugar to top it off.

 Alright, so this is exciting because we've made our own vanilla.

 Before we mix the two ingredients together, we're going to put our cast iron frying pan

 Also I'm really sick for Gobi because last week he had a, got a prolapsed hemipenes or

 Basically it means, well, I don't know what happened but his reproductive organs managed

 And so today we're actually going to go take the stitch out and hopefully he's okay.

 You want to put it in a black bag because if you put it down the drain it'll clog it.

 I gotta wash it out and then I'll show you me putting the substrate.

 You could also use paper towels but they do like burrowing so I suggest using this.

 It works really good and it's like dirt except for it's like all clean and no pests and stuff.

 Also just thought I'd show you my Zoo Med shirt I got for Christmas.

 You want about anywhere from a half an inch to an inch depending on how much they burrow.

 I kind of them in between because my frog does not burrow because it's pretty comfortable

 You're gonna need to make it really wet though so I got a spray bottle.

 The thing with this is if you want to, if you just spritz it down like this, the humidity

 So what you have to do is you have to get it really wet on top and then it'll make you

 It's really nice to have one of those automatic ones, zoomed in ones type of things, an extra

 So we got it pretty wet throughout so I made a little hole for the water dish.

 I'm gonna bury it in there so it's nice and tight so he doesn't hurt himself on it or

 It's a little less stringy than the other kind and the other kind is just, they don't

 If you want to put in a little coconut hide or something that could work too.

 And this is a frog so they do have sensitive skin so you will want to use the ReptiSafe

 You don't want too deep of a water dish because they are not good swimmers so they can drown

 You basically just want it damp to the touch but not waterlogged.

 But I like to put the humidity in there anyway just so I can tell if it needs more.

 If it drops below around 60 then you'll probably want to get more but usually if it's 70 and

 They eat about the babies you want to feed like every other day.

 You will need some sort of heat source because they like staying anywhere from 75 to 85ish.

 So I just took out one of the parts of the rack and keep him about half on the heat cable.

 Ok, so today we're going to look at some very basic fingerstyle patterns.

 When we talk about fingerstyle playing, we mean we're using the thumb and the fingers

 to pluck the strings as opposed to a pick or a plectrum, depending on what you want

 So the first pattern that I would say is worth learning is to just play thumb, 1, 2, 3.

 You can take open strings and just play the low E string, then the G string, B string

 You don't need to actually get your fingers in underneath the strings or anything, you

 just need to let them brush over the top enough to get a nice sounding note to come

 If you look on DaveMarks.com you should be able to find a PDF that accompanies this lesson

 and it has a nice 3 chord progression we can use to work on this thumb 1, 2, 3 pattern.

 The chord progression goes from E minor 7 to G and then to C major add 9.

 And basically the idea behind this is that we play a bass note, then the top 3 strings

 and there I'm fretting an open string, then the 3rd fret and the 3rd fret.

 And each time we play our bass note, then those top 3 notes, a different bass note,

 then the top 3 notes, and then a different bass note again, and the top 3 notes.

 So throughout this chord progression, my 3rd and 4th fingers are always staying in

 But the technique wise isn't too hard for me to play with the left hand.

 The important thing is I'm always using that combination, thumb and then fingers 1, 2 and 3.

 I'm Thomas and I want to show you how to play the song Amazing Love.

 It's a great song because we can do it in the key of D and use that chord D, the G,

 and the A. We're going to use an A sus, just a small variation on the A major chord.

 Beautiful song done simple or with some more advanced components.

 I'm going to play for you the verse and the chorus and then talk about the best way to

 So those are the two main components of the song, the verse and the chorus.

 There's also a bridge that we'll talk about that's really simple.

 So let's go right into what's the best way to play the song, what's the strumming pattern,

 That's our D. We're going to now for the G, leave finger three right here, and add our

 And take finger two, and put it on the third string, second fret, right next to finger

 That's the A sus, or A suspended chord that we're going to use.

 The last one, it goes from the A sus to G to the A sus, and then ends on D.

 What's going on there is basically I'm playing one measure of D, one measure of G, one measure

 Now for the chorus, what I do is play two measures of that D when I end the verse.

 So it would be one, two, three, four, one, two, three, four, and then right into the

 So now I was just doing a simple down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down.

 The chorus is the same progression except the strumming pattern makes this work out

 So basically, first the strumming pattern I'll show you is down, up, down, up, down,

 And the fourth time you're going to end with a measure of, a progression of basically the

 So you go back to the G, and you do the same as the verse strumming pattern.

 So for the bridge, all we're doing is basically just hanging on to the D, and then switching

 A lot of people just hang on the D chord, or whatever the root chord of the song is.

 So some people would just stay on D the whole time and just, you know, just kind of slowly

 But I use the D and the G, so the one of the four chords of this song.

 You can go to the chorus strumming pattern and sing over top of that.

 You just want to make sure that your dynamics, the song has that build up so when you get

 You keep that finger three there the whole time on the second string for each of these

 It allows for minimal movement, which is great for singing and playing.

 It is toasted in Rome near Piazza Navona in the center of Rome.

 It is a product that we sell and we are very proud to import this coffee and sell it in America.

 you put the water, there is a little valve, you put the water up to the valve, tap water is fine.

 You screw it back on, you saw that in the filter, I didn't push, I didn't press the filter, I

 put it up and then you put it on the stove and you wait until the coffee,

 Now the coffee is made, it was beautiful, the aroma filled the whole house and

 we have here Andrea from Sant'Eustachio Coffee who flew in from Rome just an hour ago and

 professionals of the coffee you're not to put sugar, but I don't like, I like sweet

 I'm going to show you how to make a rocket, like a backyard rocket, you can pretty much do at home.

 Well firstly you need a cork, a drink bottle, not too big, this is just a 600ml bottle,

 bicarb soda, vinegar, we're using white vinegar so, yeah, and your launch pad which I'll tell you how to make in a second.

 Well firstly, what you need to do is you need to get your white vinegar and then pour it into your bottle,

 only pour it up to about an inch maybe, 5cm, 3cm high, because you have too much rock on it, so,

 and then you put the lid back on, we don't need the vinegar anymore, so bye to it.

 Now here comes the car, who cares, and then what you do is you get your bicarb soda and then you pour it into the middle of it,

 not too much, if you don't have enough it won't launch but if you have too much it makes it awesome.

 So, that's enough there for us, ok, and then you make sure you get in the middle as close as possible,

 and what you do is you fold it in half and then roll it up like that, and you just twist it like so, make sure nothing comes out,

 put that in there and just squeeze it together so nothing comes out.

 Ok, so you put this in your bottle, I'm not going to do that just yet.

 Ok, how to make your launch pad, what you do is you get your cup, you get a plastic cup, doesn't matter what it is,

 you trim the top off, then you get a plastic container like a tuck away container, and you fill this up with water, see,

 and then you tape it down so it won't fall over or anything like that.

 Ok, and then what you do is you get your bicarb soda, you put this in, like that, see how mine fits,

 and then what you do is you put your launch pad in your launching area, as we did it before, before you walk back.

 Ok, you get your vinegar, you get your bicarb soda and vinegar in your bottle, and you put this in, like so.

 Ok, you might have a tall bit and a short bit, but I prefer to put the tall bit in, and then you have a little bit sticking out,

 you stick your cork in, but then this little bit here will slide down but hopefully won't fall,

 because if it does fall you make a bomb, that wouldn't be good.

 Ok, now we walk back over, see the paper's stuck there, ok, what you do is this cork will end up in here when we flip it over,

Ok, ready, stand back, it's got to be, when you fly these rockets kids,

 at least a 5 metre radius away from the launch pad, ok, I know it doesn't seem that bad but it is really powerful.

 Yeah, and the downside is if it doesn't launch, it's still got tremendous power in it, so it doesn't walk forward like a human.

 Now I'll turn, and the bomb went over here, and look at that, there's smoke and everything.

 Well, I'm just going to show you how to make a rocket, like, yeah, with this.

 And some vinegar, doesn't matter if it's just white vinegar, well that's what we used.

 And the launch pad is basically a plastic cup, with the top cut off, so we've cut it off here.

 And then we've taped it down to the sides, as you might be able to see.

 Okay, and then, what you first will do, is you pour vinegar into the bottle.

 Hey everybody, this is Anthony Stouffer from CVSnacks.com, here with another preview video

 from my upcoming True Fire course called 50 Slow Blues Licks You Must Know.

 You can find all of these preview videos on the True Fire blog, and I hope that if you

 like what you see, you'll check out the course when it comes out.

 Now one of the things that I'm passionate about and that I talk a lot about in the course

 is knowing when to play a lick in the context of a 12-bar progression.

 Now the nice thing about this lick from Stevie Ray Vaughan is that you can use it at almost

 any place in the 12-bar progression because it works just as well over the 1, the 4, or

 In this example, we're going to be using the song style of Tin Pan Alley as a template,

 Now in the lick that I'm showing here, I demonstrate it over the 5 chord, so this would happen

 So to find out where to play it, you just find the roots of the 4 and the 5 chord along

 the low E string, and we're going to be playing the lick up here.

 Now the technique you're going to be using is you're going to be kind of pinching with

 your thumb, playing the low note, and your index finger playing the high note.

 And you're going to be playing the high E string at the 14th fret as kind of a droning

 You can either use your thumb and your index finger, or you can use your pick and your

 I tend to do it with my fingers because I feel like I can feel the notes a little bit

 So what you're going to be doing, I'm going to show you the notes that you're going to

 play with your thumb on the D and the G string, and then we'll add in the high E string later.

 So you're going to go from 16 on the D string up to 14 on the G string, up to 16, and then

 All of a sudden you start to sound a little bit sophisticated there.

 Now you're going to go, you're going to leave out the high E string now, you're going to

 go from 14 on the G string down to 16 on the D string, and then you're going to go hammer-on.

 You're going to bar 14 of the D and the G string, and hammer-on to 16 of the D string.

 Now you're going to go from 14, down 14 on the D string, 16, 15, 14 on the A string.

 Now I mentioned that you could use this lick over the I chord, the IV chord, or the V chord,

 and basically what you would do is make sure that you're at a part of the progression where

 Well, in the last four bars of the song, you typically go from the V chord to the IV chord

 We could just shift that down two frets, and then back down to the I chord for bar number 11.

 Now you typically would want to mix it up a little bit, and I have some other licks

 in the course that you can kind of use kind of the same way, but they're a little bit

 So you wouldn't want to just play a whole solo just doing that lick, but if you're playing

 a song in the style of Tin Pan Alley, Minor Blues, and you want to throw that in there,

 you don't really have to worry about where you are as long as you find the right chord

 If you have any questions about the course, you can find me on the True Fire forums, or

 you can come over to stevesnacks.com, send me an email, and I'll try and answer as many

 If you like slow blues, I hope you'll check out the course when it comes out, and thanks

 Alright buff dudes and hot chicks, it's time to get into workout A where we're going to build a really tight butt.

 So our first superset is going to be legs and abs, and then we're going to do some more legs and then some more abs.

 So we're going to start with an exercise called walking lunges.

 So instead of just doing the lunges in place, you're going to walk forward with each step.

 So standing, holding the dumbbells, feet about shoulder width apart, step forward, down, into the lunge, then drive up to the start position, step forward to the next one.

 Once you've done that one, you're going to do a stability ball pike.

 Now this is very similar to an exercise that we've been doing a lot of, the jackknives.

 The pike is a little bit more advanced, and for people that have very little flexibility in your hamstrings, you're not going to be able to pike up very much.

 But for people that do yoga and that type of activity, you'll be able to pike up much higher than I am able to do.

 But either way you can do it, you're going to get a contraction in your abdominals.

 The key is, keep your back as flat as possible and not rounding forward.

 So you're going to get into that plank position here, and then you're going to roll that ball up.

 So stretching the hamstrings, contraction in the abs, and back out.

 Your hamstring flexibility will improve, and your balance in the exercise.

 But all along, you should be able to get a good contraction in your abdominals.

 If that's too hard for you, balance-wise, you can just do a regular stability ball jackknife in that place.

 Now once you've gone through the first superset, the first time you go through the program only do it once.

 But once you're ready to go full on in the program, you can go through that superset up to three times.

 Then you'll move on to the next superset, which is going to be Bulgarian split squats and one leg stability ball leg curls.

 So Bulgarian split squats, a classic one here where we put our foot up on the bench behind us.

 We get all set up, and we're just going to drop our hips straight down and back up.

 So that back leg, hip flexor is getting stretched, and quadriceps, the rectus femoris is getting stretched.

 So you're going to feel a strong stretch down the back leg in this area.

 And the lead leg, the glutes, hamstrings, and quadriceps will be doing all the work to get you back up there.

 So do all repetitions for one side, switch over to the other, and then move into the stability ball one leg curl.

 So lie down on your back, and then you're going to bridge your hips up, one leg up in the air.

 Again, the first time you do this workout, just do it once, and work your way up to three supersets for that superset B.

 Workout A, superset number three, we're going to get into the back leg curl.

 Workout A, superset number three, we're going to get into a dumbbell calf raise, and then three more ab exercises to finish off workout A.

 So just on any type of step, we're going to do single leg calf raise, holding a dumbbell if you need to, in the same arm that you're doing the calf raise on.

 So start in the up position, drop your heel down off the step, squeeze that calf to come back up.

 One other thing to note, this third superset is optional, so you don't have to do it.

 One, if you're pressed for time, or two, if you don't want to work on your calves, you don't have to do this one.

 Alright, so after you've done the calf raise, you're going to go immediately to a plank with your elbows on the ball.

 This is a very tough plank compared to the regular one, and if you put your elbows out in front, it makes it even harder.

 So putting the elbows out in front of the body, hard plank exercise, but you have to make sure that you hold your body in a straight line.

 So breathing normal there, make sure that you don't have any uncomfortableness in the lower back, make sure that you do have your proper posture, and you feel good doing that one.

 Alright, once you're done that superset, we're going to go into one more superset for the abs to finish off workout A.

 So we're in that upright position, and we're going to roll out slow, one, two, three, and then contract slow, one, two, to come back up.

 And that stretch is going to be something that can lead to quite a bit of muscle soreness.

 Again, first time through the workout, just do each superset one time.

 Now you're going to pair that exercise with one of my other favorite abdominal exercises, which is the cross body mountain climber.

 So in that regular pushup position, body in a straight line, and drive your knee up to your opposite elbow.

 You're going to finish off workout A with 10 minutes of interval training.

 You can do kettlebell swings, you can do bodyweight squats, running in place, you can do jumping jacks, or you can use one of the cardio machines.

 But those are a whole bunch of options you can do at home with little to no equipment.

 So that's how we're going to do interval training in this program.

 You're going to see the very short interval training workouts, and also using as little equipment as possible.

 In fact, this program isn't something you need to go to the gym to do.

 If you need to do a bit of warm up and cool down, please do that.

 And hope that you're loving the turbulence training for buff dudes and hot chicks.

 Okay, today we're continuing our work on the Entertainer and we are at the third part of

 If you've been following along with my other tutorials, you have hopefully just learned

 You want to hear the next part, which is what we're going to be working on today, and it

 So I'll play the very end of that last part just so you can hear how it comes in.

 So what you'll hopefully have noticed by now is that the ends of each of these parts have

 They have these little parts which let the listener anticipate what's going to come next

 and sort of be right along with them as they move into the part.

 So the part that we're learning today, coming right out of that second part, you'll notice

 the first half of that part is exactly like the first half of the part that I taught you

 So you've got this little lead in, and then you've got like this C chord that you're bouncing

 with your left hand while your right hand plays E and C, and bounces between these Es

 Now the part that's different, the part that we need to learn today really, sounds like

 And I'm going to, I'll play it up here but I'll show it to you down here.

 So even at the end of this part that we're learning there's this, like a lead in to the

 So that part we really need to learn, that we really need to focus on for this part.

 In the right hand, what I'm doing is just probably off camera, is, I'll try to get my

 So what we've got going on there is, it's kind of like an A minor, but it's missing

 So your right thumb will play an A, with your two play a C, and with your pinky play

 Now your two finger, for the next couple chords is going to stay right where it is on that

 C. And you're going to move your outside fingers, your thumb and your pinky, down to G and then

 As soon as you hit that third one, you're not going to be using this middle part anymore.

 And as soon as you hit that third one, you're sort of lifting this finger out of here and

 And the octaves are going to go G flats, A, C, E, D, C, A, D. I don't know how much of

 I'm going to write it up above here, the pattern of the octaves.

 My knuckles are hitting some of the notes here, but hopefully you can see what's going on there.

 So meanwhile, your left hand is doing something a little bit different as well.

 So as you're coming down here with this first part, these first three notes, you're going

 So when you play the first two chords in your right hand, you're holding E flats.

 And when you play that third chord, the G flats and the C, then you're playing Ds in

 And your right hand, remember, is going to start bouncing up here.

 And while it does that, your left hand is going to do sort of a stride thing again.

 And because my hands are too close, normally you want to play this two octaves apart, but

 just so you can see it on the camera, I'm going to show it to you in...

 Well, I already showed you the right hand, so I'm going to actually get the right hand

 And then you come up here and you play a D7, so D, F sharp, A and C.

 And then what you're going to do is basically play that chord twice, but you're bouncing

 And then the second time through, you're going to play just the root and then complete the

 And then you're going to end by playing a G and a B with your left hand, right as you

 And then to end this sequence, you're going to jump down that little lead into the next

 When you hit that B, you're going to start with your right hand.

 Alright so that's the part that you really need to work on for today.

 I'm going to show you the best I can and then it's going to be on you to go practice, alright?

 Hopefully I'll let you leave that as the cliffhanger so you'll go and actually practice.

 Don't forget to rate, comment, and subscribe, and I'll see you next time.

 Hey everybody, I'm about to make one of my favorite snacks called monkey bars.

 I measure it sometimes, sometimes I'm just going to throw it together.

 Put a little bit of those in, depends on how much you like of everything.

 Generally about, I throw about two tablespoons of each in, but throw more in if you really

 And then Life's Basic, it's super tasty, it's vanilla plant based protein.

 And for just pure strength, I like the warrior food a lot, and I'll put in a couple scoops

 But if I'm making a big batch, which I'm doing today, I'm going to put two in.

 Then to get a little bit more flavor in it, I like to put in the Source of Life.

 Source of Life is just a super good green powder that's a good mix, plant protein powder.

 I'm going to add water to it in just a minute, but I just like to mush everything up first.

 And the cool thing is you don't have to have the bananas super fine mushed up because it's

 If you want to get stevia, which I love, get the pure stevia extract and you're barely

 going to want to put any of this stuff in because it's so potent.

 So, if I'm going to measure it out, it's going to be the smallest one of these spoons.

 And obviously, when you're measuring this, you don't want it to be too wet, you don't

 want it to be too dry, so you might have to fine tune it just a little bit to get the

 Actually, the two cups of water is looking pretty good right now.

 And now all I'm going to do is spread it out in a pan like this.

 I'm sort of crazy about stuff like that, so I try and scrape it all out.

 Put it in the fridge, and then once you put it in the fridge, let it cool for about a

 And then what you're going to do is you're going to take PB2, mix it with some water,

 make it into about a cup worth, and you're going to spread it over the top, slice them

 up into about ten pieces, and it's going to come out to about 150 calories per serving,

 and about 25 to 30 grams of protein, about 30 grams of carbs, and about 5 grams of fat.

 It's a really awesome, healthy, quick snack, and as you can see, it didn't take much time

 Hi, I'm Cindy Harris and we love making this show available to you free of charge.

 If you'd like to help us keep it that way, make a contribution to our karma jar.

 She's a viewer that lives in France asking if I had a recipe that I could share.

 Well, I thought it was a great opportunity to talk about the differences between muffins and cupcakes.

 Here in the States, cupcakes are super sweet and have a lot of frosting on them

 Where muffins are something we would have in the morning or as a snack with a glass of milk or a cup of coffee

 get your smartphone and scan the QR code here on the screen and the recipe will pop right up.

 To start, I have a 12-cup muffin pan and I have some of these really cute little paper liners

 And then with my baking spray, I'm going to spritz just the top.

 Now in just a minute, I'm going to be going over to the stove to get my chocolate mixture starting to melt.

 But I wanted to show you the ingredients that I'm going to be using.

 and a quarter of a cup of butter that I've taken out of the refrigerator.

 And I'm going to cut it into some smaller cubes because I find that that melts a lot quicker.

 And then in my small saucepan, I'll take all these ingredients over to the stove.

 Then I'm going to turn the heat down to medium, add my chocolate and my butter,

 Now the chocolate will melt pretty quickly, so I'm just waiting for the butter.

 And once that melts, I'm going to take it off the heat to cool.

 Now while the chocolate's cooling, I'm going to measure out my flour.

 And then I'll take my small whisk, and I'll whisk all that together.

 I'm using a canola oil, but you could use a vegetable oil or a corn oil if you'd like.

 Now I'm using a nonfat sour cream, but you can use whatever you like.

 I'm using a 1% milk today, but you can use whatever you have on hand.

 Now if you wanted to at this point, you could also add three quarters of a cup of chopped walnuts

 I'm just going to leave them plain today, just a plain chocolate.

 But I think sometimes it's nice if you want to add a little bit of extra protein to a muffin.

 Now as I mix this together, you can see that it's very kind of dry looking,

 Now at this point, it's important that we really stir this well.

 so we shouldn't see any swirls of chocolate or pockets of flour, anything like that.

 Now I'm going to take my large cookie scoop and put one scoop of batter into each cup,

 That's why it's important that we spritz our muffin pan with that baking spray.

 That way, should the muffins bake over the top, it won't be a problem for them to release from the pan.

 Now after you fill the wells, if there are any dribbles of batter,

 Now before I pop these in the oven, I wanted to show you one more variation.

 and if you want, you can take and sprinkle a few of them right on the tops of the muffins.

 And then you could also take and do a little sprinkle of some walnuts on top if you'd like.

 Now I've preheated the oven to 400 degrees, and these are going to bake for about 20 minutes,

 but you will want to test them with a toothpick inserted in the center to make sure that they're baked through.

 Now I'm going to let these sit here on a cooling rack for about 10 minutes,

 and now I'm going to pop them out and let them cool the rest of the way on the rack.

 Well, I wanted to show you the muffins with the walnuts and the chocolate chips on top.

 They look fantastic, and then look at how nice and high these other ones get.

 You'll notice that it doesn't catch a lot of the muffin on the liner, which I really like.

 And if you did want to add just a little bit more sweet to it, try it with a little bit of the chocolate chips on top.

 That'll give you that extra burst of sweetness if you feel you need it.

 just go to our website and go to the Nothing But Muffins show page, and I'll have the recipe there for you.

 If you do make them, don't forget to send me a photo so I can send you the muffin badge.

 I give them a lot of heads-up of things that I'm doing and what's going on, so join us there.

 And as always, if you have any questions or ideas for me, please send me an email.

What I'm going to do today is just give you a real simple, quick, easy primer

Now for as many bassists as there are out there, there's that many methods

So this, I'm just going to quickly show you the way that I've learned

 to do that and go, that sounds pretty impressive, but it's just a bunch of fluff.

But to get you up and running, the action that we're doing, we're going to start

 what you're doing, like when you're swinging a bat or a golf club, something like that.

 Sometimes there aren't obvious muscles that you might think you're using, but if you're

 swinging properly, if you're doing it properly, you are using them.

To isolate it down to your wrist, or especially to your thumb, it's just

 have my thumb kind of almost parallel to the string, but not quite.

 My hand is just like this, and there's, you can see the side of my thumb, knuckle, hitting

If you want more of an old school 70's, you know, Graham Central

 more accurate, a bit more modern tone, definitely hit over the fingerboard.

 hand back so that my hand comes off the strings and doesn't just mute the string like that.

 is a familiar area of just making some noise and being able to get your thumb right on

 with it, stay loose, and again we're going to be coming from up here in the shoulder

So now instead of coming up like this, I'm really hitting my bass.

You know, like my thumb is loose and my wrist is loose and they're all moving.

 But the primary motion, the driver behind this technique, isn't those joints.

Over the fingerboard, nice and loose, using the side of our thumb,

 than just learning it for one riff and only being able to play that one riff as this technique,

What that does is that it brings control into the new technique that you're

So instead of just being able to play one riff in that position, this way

 you can play through everything because you're comfortable with crossing strings, as well

 thing to do is try doing a slap and a pop on the same note as you're running your scales.

 This will give you a lot more control over the dynamics of each.

 want is you don't want a pop that's huge and a slap sound that's... So, you know, I mean

 I'm really excited about this new line of product that we have.

 It's basically just a tulle fabric and this goes along with weddings and birthdays and

 frilly things a lot, but I really just want to kind of show you the difference of what

 it would be for you to present to a customer a cake box that's wrapped in a bow as opposed

 And it seems like a basic simple thing, but really when you're kind of at that level where

 you're charging a premium price, you really want to present your product in a premium

 This is basically a 25 yard roll, so it's going to go a long way.

 We used about two yards on this box, so it's about 30 cents worth of fabric that you're

 putting on here and it, I think, really just takes it up a notch as far as your presentation.

 So I want to help you just be able to calculate at home how much you're going to need to cut

 So basically what you want to do is add the 14 for the top plus another 14 for the bottom.

 That's a 28 and then you're going to add 6 inches for each side, so that's another 12,

 So basically what I'm going to do, I know this table is 7 feet long, so I'm just going

 And a little extra, you know, doesn't hurt just if you want to have tails or something,

 So what I'm going to basically do is find the center, okay, and then I'm going to set

 So instead of having a long length here and a big loop, I'm going to do a little compact

 And I think it makes a really great presentation just to give away, kind of constitutes like

 Today we're going to spice things up with a Chipotle Elk Burger.

 Put some oil on the 36 inch Blackstone Griddle Cooking Station.

 Quarter pound elk patties and we're going to rub those with JB's Fat Boy Cow Grill

 And this is the secret ingredient, JB's Fat Boy Chipotle BBQ Sauce.

 I'm here to show you the proper procedure for valve stem replacement on our VDO TPMS

 This aluminum clamp-in stem comes on the Continental TG1C sensor family.

 This includes both our OEM replacement sensors and our ReadySensor multi-application TPMS

 These sensors use a pivoting valve stem to make on-wheel installation easier and to accommodate

 It's important to know how to install them correctly to avoid damaging the stem or sensor.

 Every time you perform tire service on a TPMS equipped wheel, the TPMS sensor service kit

 parts must be replaced because these parts are designed for one-time use only.

 The kit usually consists of a hex nut, seal washer, seal, valve core, and cap, but this

 TPMS sensors only need to be replaced if damaged or if the battery is worn out and the durable

 Whenever you're performing TPMS service, start by checking your safety equipment.

 Use protective eyewear, footwear, and gloves when working around shop equipment and tires.

 Be sure the parking brake is engaged, the transmission is in parker neutral, and that

 When performing TPMS service, always remove the tire completely from the wheel.

 This helps prevent damage to an existing or new TPMS sensor and reduces the potential

 To remove the sensor from the wheel, hold the sensor body while using a socket wrench

 to remove the hex nut from the valve stem, then slide the sensor out of the wheel.

 Remove the seal and seal washer from the stem by hand or with an approved removal tool.

 This stem uses a two-piece seal and washer, while others use a one-piece seal.

 When you're servicing a two-piece design, take note of how the seal seats inside the

 washer and how the washer is oriented to the sensor for later reference.

 If the sensor is still electronically operational, next visually inspect the sensor and stem

 If only the stem is damaged on this style sensor, it can be replaced separately.

 For stem replacement, first be sure the seal and seal washer are removed.

 Tilt the stem down toward the sensor's silicone potting underside.

 This frees the stem from the sensor body's metal retaining bracket.

 Next, slide the stem up through the metal retaining bracket at a steep angle.

 If you free the stem from the bracket and push it out at the correct angle, it will

 Install the stem by sliding it downward through the metal retaining bracket and then clicking

 Now the only other piece you'll need to remove is the valve core and cap, unless they were

 Use a valve core removal tool to take out the old core and replace it with the new valve

 Install the washer and seal in the same orientation as the originals.

 On this two-piece design, the thicker side of the rubber seal seats inside the metal

 washer and the angle cut in the washer faces toward the underside of the sensor for maximum

 The one-piece design is a bit simpler because there is no angle cut and the rubber seal

 Torque the hex nut to 71 inch pounds and you're ready to remount the tire, air up the tire

 to placard pressure, reinstall the wheel on the vehicle, and perform the TPMS vehicle

 You can learn more about the complete VDO TPMS replacement parts program, including

 the game-changing VDO ReadySensor, and the latest application coverage at ReadySensor.com.

 It means that the maturation process of the cheese has been stopped.

 Now we're going to reserve this wax paper for the preparation that follows.

 and then we'll come back and show you how it all comes together.

 Nadia, designer of Curves Complete is joining me today and we are making some lamb.

 We're going to make a delicious lamb today with this nice cherry sauce to it.

 So I'll just get a little bit of butter going in this pan right now.

 So number one, when you're doing a diet or doing a lot of exercise, butter, the red lights

 And then we will coat our lamb chops in a little bit of flour, salt and pepper.

 And yeah, the Curve's Complete Plan has a lot of variety on it as I think you've seen.

 The website has tons of recipes to choose from and you get a plan for the week that

 has all of your three meals and two snacks on it, even a grocery list.

 So there's just no guesswork involved and a lot of great choices for people to make.

 Sometimes you get all stuck up in the usual cooking that you do, you know, spaghetti bolognese

 Like you know, it's nice to know you can go somewhere and choose a variety and not just

 It doesn't feel like you're dieting, which I think is really important.

 The website has a lot of different recipes that you can choose from to make it exciting

 We're just going to cook our lamb here a couple minutes on each side and then we'll do our

 And the most important, I hate when lambs overcook so make sure it's nice and pink inside.

 Let this kind of brown up a bit and then we'll add the cherries and their juices to this.

 And so I'll just cover that just to make sure we keep the lamb nice and warm but again,

 we don't want it to overcook so we just let a little bit of air go through there.

 So once that's rested, it's going to be nice and sweet and juicy.

 Once they kind of get a little bit of caramel on them, we'll add the cherries and their

 A lot of times you can't find cherries year round so frozen is more widely available.

 Just heat them up a little bit and you can mash them with the back of your fork like

 When you freeze fruit, nutrients are locked in so it's just as nutritious, you know, as

 Okay, so we get a little bit of caramelization on that and then we'll add the cherries.

 That'll just reduce down a little bit and then we'll be ready to top it.

 This is just, you know, potatoes plain while we're dieting, not real rich with anything

 but we do have a lot of, we have some butter in here and the good lamb flavoring so it's

 Do a portion of that and we'll also add some asparagus to the plate.

 All right, and then if you want to put the lamb on the plate, I will top it with this

 beautiful cherry sauce and this is a great dish, like you said, for entertaining and

 You know, it looks complicated and fancy but it's a simple dish to create that will really

 Absolutely and those flavors, the balance with the sweet and sort of sour cherry with

 And look, if you can't get lamb cuts because sometimes they can be a little bit expensive,

 Andrew is just about to go on and play Strauss 2 in front of a thousand people and he isn't

 This goes way back to the first day that you pick up your horn and these are the things

 Number one, make sure the mouthpiece is placed below the bottom lip line.

 Number two, make sure that there's two-thirds upper and one-third lower lip in the mouthpiece.

 Mastering all of these techniques gives you access to all of the extreme abilities on

 To leave any one of them out severely limits your potential to thrive in severe performance

 Let's go into these five must-have concepts in a little more depth.

 It is crucial to place the mouthpiece below the bottom lip pink line.

 If you place the mouthpiece in the pink, you will be squeezing when you play.

 By placing it below the bottom lip line, you then can pull the center of the lips open

 while you play and also your chin and jaw can then be connected to the mouthpiece.

 It's fairly common that most horn players play with two-thirds upper, one-third lower,

 By having more upper lip in the mouthpiece, you ensure that you have a richer, darker

 The more bottom lip you have in the mouthpiece, the harder, brighter sound you have.

 Two-thirds upper, one-third lower is a perfect mix for horn players.

 It is crucial that your chin muscle is flexed to have control over your bottom lip.

 When you flex your chin muscle, your jaw is then connected to your bottom lip.

 This can allow you to pull the center of the embouchure open for a warmer, darker sound.

 Too much pressure on the top lip will give you a stifled, pinched sound.

 By angling the mouthpiece downwards, you let the top lip buzz freely.

We cannot wait to see what she's created this season and more importantly what

 has designed the look for Tressa May and later in the Tressa May booth, Jeannie's going to

 Smith and then I started liking the different girls' hair lengths.

 kind of fake fringe, cutting it like Patti Smith would really uneven.

I cannot wait to see the clothes now, how they complement Tressa May's look.

So much so that I am now going to go and get the exact look from Jeannie in

 So what we're first going to do is really get that mattified undone texture by using

 to layer in the Maxi Volume Root Lifting Cream over the sea salt spray for added definition.

So once that's done, take your flat iron and you're just going to flick

 When we play with piano, we basically stay with the Pythagorean intonation.

 In some cases, when the piano chords include the same long notes as the violin,

 we have to adjust our intonation to the tempered tuning of the piano.

 for the first ten bars we can afford to play Pythagorean intonation,

 since the piano is never holding a long note together with the violin.

 Now you had to adjust the half note B flat and the half note F natural

 okay so we've given the primer some time to dry out here and I sanded this down once again

 and again I vacuumed this edge here because the dust will fall here so I'm going to be applying

 the first coat of the top coat here and this is a water-based latex paint and so I'm just

 going to put this here now here we are painting on top of the prime surface so the paint is just

 going to sit on the surface here and it's a lot easier to paint on a prime surface because

 because you can move the paint around more whereas if it's on prime then the paint is

 going to get absorbed into the substrate or the paint will sometimes get absorbed into the

 previous coating like if it was a flat finish so so it just when you paint on top of a prime

 surface you use less paint too and it dries more to a uniform sheen because it all dries at the

 same time so and this is a this is a semi-gloss sheen here so the sheen will be able to show so

 it's very important that you always feather it off by going back into what you did here so I'm

 going to go back into it here now normally here I would use my my left hand to cut this in but I

 can't so I'm just going to work it like this here okay so it's all on now I'm going to feather off

 so what I'm going to do is I'm just going to work my way down the stairs here and and again you want

 to start at the top of the stairs here and just work your way down so so so that way you won't

 hit anything your feet won't hit anything so we're just going to let let this dry out here

 and I'm going to do one more coat and then the the S-Series will be complete so thank you for for

 So I've applied olive oil to it so that when I put my dough down to make my pizza it doesn't stick.

 What we'll do is we'll bake it until the bottom of the pizza is cooked.

 Then we'll take it out of the oven and then I'll start with the toppings and so on and so forth and start making the pizza.

 Yes, you could do better, you could do healthier, but it's okay.

 So anyway, put this thing in the oven and cook it for a little bit.

 While that pizza crust is cooking, I'm going to cook this chicken, which is going to be my meat for my pizza.

 Okay, we'll cook the chicken and we'll cut it up and that'll be the meat on top of the crust.

 Okay, we've taken the pizza out of the oven so the bottom of the pizza has been cooked.

 What we're going to do now is put on pesto, which is made of basil, olive oil, and garlic.

 So what we're going to do next is we're going to put marinara sauce on it and apply it generously all over the pizza.

 So this is really a healthy pizza except for the fact that we used the Pillsbury dough.

 The pesto is from, it's called Fresh Lemony Pesto and this is from Whole Foods.

 So the next step, we're going to put on our meat, vegetables, and cheese.

 These are Whole Foods mushrooms so they were raised in condos and they're very happy.

 Pesto, marinara, all kinds of veggies with grilled chicken topped off with spinach.

 Hi, I'm here with Billy Sook San, Choon Tin Chattop, who is one of the chefs at Dok Cheng's

 So we're taking the traditional Thai soup and infusing that into a risotto.

 Bring it to boil, simmer for five minutes until the flavor, aromatic, everything comes.

 You see the Thais do this with whole watermelons, with turnips, with you name it, carrots, cucumber.

 Okay, so now you're going to strain the coconut milk just to get the…

 So a European mixture with a little bit of an Asian touch as well.

 When the risotto almost cook, add the zucchini inside the risotto.

 When you put the parmesan cheese, you have to turn the fire off.

 This is a popular dish in the restaurant from what you're saying.

 A modern fusion dish made here by Billy at Dok Chen's at the Raffles Hotel in Singapore.

 Modern fusion cooking of Thai and Italian classics married together.

 I'm Spicy Steve on the Asian Culinary Trail at Dok Chen's in the Raffles Hotel in Singapore.

 email from a gentleman in England asking me to prepare a recipe for a nice springtime soup,

 something that uses some of the fresh produce that we get here in early spring.

 I want to share that with you guys, but also want to have just a little bit of kind of culinary

 in a romantic way for me is the story of one of the greatest maritime disasters,

 I felt like I wanted to sort of use that story as the basis for the soup that I wanted to show you.

 technical advances they made within shipbuilding, the culinary operation on the ship was just

 inspired by Auguste Escoffier, who was sort of the person we know today as the founder of modern

And of the day, everything was sort of fashionable that came from France or from Paris,

 and not only the fashions that we wear, but also the food that we ate.

 menu on the Titanic, especially in the first-class dining room and actually above that in the

 Alicante restaurant, which was the pinnacle of dining of the time, were definitely Escoffier-inspired

And in the restaurant, which is the pinnacle, it was actually above just the first-class dining

 room, that's where you got the best food of the time, prepared with the best ingredients,

 today, is the spring pea soup, using the freshest spring peas and other great ingredients.

So spring pea soup, it's really delicious, and it uses just a minimal amount

 of ingredients to make a delicious first course or soup course for your dinner party or for your

And the ingredients that you'll need for this particular recipe are very simple, and that's

Cut it open, slice it, then run it under cold running water inside of a sieve to make sure you

 get all of that grit removed, because there's nothing that's really going to ruin your soup

 more than having a little piece of sand or dirt in the final product, which you don't want.

 two tablespoons of fresh parsley, Italian parsley, or a shervil if you have that fresh in your garden,

 I'm actually using just spring greens for this, but you could use just sliced up romaine

You're also going to need two cups of fresh spring peas, little green

 sweet peas, or you could substitute two cups of frozen peas if that's what you have on hand,

 chicken stock here, but by all means if you need to go to the supermarket and buy chicken stock or

 vegetable stock and make this completely vegetarian, by all means do.

 is to heat your saucepan over a medium-high heat and add your butter, and we're going to let that

 melt, and as soon as it does we'll start to add the rest of the ingredients.

 finished melting nicely, which is exactly what we need to happen.

 and I'm going to reduce the heat just to a medium to a medium-high.

 for about five minutes until they become translucent, but not brown.

 going to add our little pinch of sugar, a healthy pinch of salt, depending on how salty your chicken

 stock is, and please taste that before you start this recipe, because if your chicken stock is too

 those little black specks in your final product, then use white pepper.

 these leeks, as I said, for about five minutes over medium heat, getting them nicely cooked down, but

The leeks have sauteed nicely, they're sweated for about five minutes, and they're looking

 really nice, delicate, and become quite limp, and that's just what we want.

 add my lettuce, the parsley or chervil, whichever you decided to use, and our two cups of peas.

 Just give that a nice stir around so everything gets just a little bit of that heat on it.

 What we need to do now is to put the lid on, keep the heat over medium-high, and let this

 heat for about five minutes, until the peas become nicely tender, then we'll continue.

 been five minutes, and the peas have gotten nicely tender, which is just what we want.

 what we need to do is add the remaining chicken stock, all to our pot.

 let all of that chicken stock heat up nicely, almost to a boil.

 it, and you don't want to cook these peas too long, because you want to keep them that really

 need to do now is either transfer this in batches into a food processor or blender, and puree until

Or if you have one of these handy gadgets, an immersion blender, they work

 leaves still remaining a little bit whole in there, that's just fine, because what we need to do now

 is put another pot over our heat, with a very fine mesh strainer or sieve.

 we'll pour the soup to catch any large bits of the seeds of the peas, and the lettuce that didn't

 have these little espresso cups or something small to serve it in, it's really nice.

 them on a tray and pass them to your guests during the cocktail hour.

 might have been what the Edwardians were eating for dinner in 1912, but it's also exactly what

 you'll get at some of the finest restaurants that we have today.

And as always, please feel free to email me, as my friend now in England has,

 Hi, here's the last set for our video and I'm going to be teaching you this pattern.

 I've already done a lot of tutorials on how to do zebra patterns but what I want to show

 you is similar but I'm trying to make it a little more creative.

 So, using a white base, I'm going to apply purple instead of black.

 And same as the ones that I've shown you before in my composition tutorial about drawing tiger

 skins or leopard skins, what you want to do is go at a diagonal and try not to make everything

 So what you want to do is just fill up your brush as if you're drawing a dot but really

 Try to only let the paint touch the nail and just drag it through like that.

 What you want to do is you want to keep going and you can connect it and just drag it through

 And by lifting your brush up, you can create a lighter line like the one below in comparison

 Just try to do short lines and long lines and darker lines and lighter lines like that.

 If you decided to just do your zebra pattern the original way with black and white and

 And because I'm dragging all the time and lifting my brush up here and there, you can

 see there's thicker lines and thinner lines and it looks more random and it looks more

 But if you want to try something more different and crazier, what I did here is I've mixed

 And at the end, you'll have two crazy looking zebra patterns like that.

 You can also make a composition just like this, black and white with the nail of the

 I made it way back on my first or second or third video and I thought I've redone it so

 I'm just using this one because I can make 70-80 ounces in this thing.

 Like I've also said in a previous video, you can add your wheatgrass now, your photonutrients,

 Look at, pull up banana, pull up spinach, look at the amino acid.

 Spinach may not have the protein that kale has or the vitamin K, but the amino acids

 So water, bananas, if you use lukewarm water, you can throw some coconut oil, maybe one

 tablespoon in there to give you your vitamin D. Or like I said the other day, go sit in

 One thing I've found about the Ninja is you want to make darn sure that little thing goes

 Because if it's off center, it's going to tear everything up and you're going to ruin

 So you've got to be careful of that if you're going to use the Ninja.

 It's going to be two to three cups depending on how you like yours.

 Like I said, it doesn't have the amino acids that spinach has, but it does have more protein

 Now here's where it's different from the first video that I did it.

 So I've got my apple and cucumber juice and you add that to it.

 And I'm making such a big one because I juice for my parents and for me.

 And she's with, her doctor is somebody you just can't call and get a hold of.

 So we don't know about her weight yet because she hasn't weighed in.

 So you put your apple, you put your cucumber juice in and blend again.

 Now I know some people are going to say, but that's not juice Steve.

 So, and I've lost 63 pounds in 60 days and this is one of my main drinks.

 I don't throw anything away as far as fruits and vegetables go.

 Everything out of the back of my tank, on my juicers, all go right in the compost pile.

 Another thing I've been doing differently is, hey, I tuck in my shirts now.

 I'm also wearing a belt that I haven't worn in five years either.

 Like I've said before, you can make this in the morning, take it to work, put it in the fridge, shake it up at lunch, have that as your lunch.

 Now, I have a few peach recipes for you in Betty's Kitchen like

 also some salads that have fresh peaches, and also some desserts.

 So some of you might have lots of peaches that you're trying to use up.

 It's basically a standard pound cake, but it's going to have a couple of special additions to make it a peach pound cake.

 Now we'll beat in six eggs, one at a time, and just beat until the yolk disappears.

 Now I'm going to mix up my liquids because I will have flour to go in with the liquids.

 Here's the bottle I used, and I'm using 1⁄4 cup, which I've measured in this little glass.

You may use vanilla or almond or a mixture of vanilla and almond.

 I'm just going to stir this together and this will be our liquid part.

 So it's not the kind of cake batter that would be light and airy and fluffy

 Then I'll come back and put a little milk in and mix that and continue to alternate, ending with the flour.

 So somewhere around two cups, you can do two cups to three cups.

 And you do need a large bowl for this because you can see it's almost coming up to the top.

 But I'm just going to fold these in and then I'll show you the pan is going in.

 but I would still like to either spray it with cooking oil spray or

 what I've done here is butter it all the way around the sides and the tube and

And then I put flour over it and then shake it around and then I let the excess flour

 So now I'll mix this and place it in the pan and then I'll give you an oven instructions.

 another pan for it or you could break it up into two pans if you wanted to.

 325 degrees for an hour and a half probably or maybe an hour and 35 minutes.

 But I have my trusty cake tester and I will be starting probably after 45 minutes or so

 testing this and if it comes out clean, then I'll know that my cake is done.

 Here is our peach pound cake straight from the oven and it did take one hour and 30 minutes.

 You do have to have a long pick here and just pick a point that is as deep as any and

 Actually, when I checked it the first time at 45 minutes, it was beginning to brown.

 So what I decided to do was to tint it a little bit and I just took a piece of

 sit on top and for the next 30 minutes, I let it go like that and then for the last 10 minutes or so, I

 What we need to do at this point is let it cool in the pan for about 10 to 15 minutes and then we'll let it

 I removed the cake from the pan by turning the pan upside down after I'd gone around the edges with a knife and

 So I inverted it using a plate and turned it over onto this nice cake stand.

 My next upload is going to be a glaze for this cake and it's going to be peach glaze.

 I apologize, but I'm not going to take a bite of this yet because it will be having a glaze on it

 and I think it would look much nicer if it was all the way over it instead of with a piece missing.

 if you wait a little bit longer, you'll see it with a glaze on top and you'll see it cut and tested.

 Hey, this is Robert with Clean Pool and Spa and in this video I'm going to show you a

 really cool product if you have a lot of debris that falls into your pool.

 So this is a Blue Devil Leaf Bagger as you can see right there.

 This goes by many different names, leaf bagger, leaf catcher, but it's basically the same

 The leaves, you put this in your pool and through a force under here the leaves go right

 Now this doesn't really work with dirt and things like that, but it's really good for

 And swing over here, as you can see this pool has a huge tree right over it and in the fall

 In fact, you can see here there's lots of them in the pool right now.

 This one, you can flip it over, has these ports right here and what you do is you hook

 it up to your garden hose right there and water flows through these ports and sprays

 When I have my pool out in Arizona I really, really like this, especially for the homes

 So I'm going to go ahead and put it in the, well actually here.

 Again you hook it up to your garden hose right here and hook it up to your telescopic pole.

 This is kind of an older model, but some of them now are battery operated.

 This one again has the port, but some have the propeller in there, the blades that push

 One of the drawbacks of this one is it does use water as opposed to the battery operated

 So here I have it in the water and the hose is on and what you do is you just go around

 like this and it picks up a lot of that larger debris that could be in the pool.

 Let's come over here and as you watch it this line of leaves is going to just disappear.

 I'm doing this with one hand so it cut me a little bit of slack, but as you can see

 it does a really excellent job at picking up a lot of the larger leaves, grass clippings,

 You work it the same way as you do a vacuum, just go back and forth and you can see the

 I've got 10 minutes of my time and you can see the pool bottom is pretty much cleaned

 The finish isn't all that great, but hey at least there's no dirt and debris.

 Now for vacuuming this would have gone right into the skimmer and into right over there

 The great thing about these leaf baggers is that this is a good stop gap to keep any debris

 So if you're one of those pool owners who have large trees in your yard, lots of debris

 on the bottom of the pool, I really highly recommend you get one of these.

 Again this one uses a hose, you can get the battery operated one.

 So check out the description box below, link to my website cleanpoolinspa.com.

 Lots of great information over there, like, subscribe and comment here.

 To replace the float assembly you will need to uninstall the dishwasher first.

 Note the location of the wires, then untwist the wire nuts to disconnect the wires.

 Use a flat head screwdriver to help remove the strain relief nut.

 Next, disconnect the drain hose from the sink drain or garbage disposer.

 Open the dishwasher door and remove the mounting bracket screws.

 To move the dishwasher you may need to adjust the legs to lower the appliance.

 You can adjust the rear leveling legs by turning the shaft assembly screws at the front.

 Now, to avoid damage, very carefully pull the dishwasher away from the cabinet.

 Now, use pliers to rotate the water inlet cover counterclockwise to remove.

 Close the door and carefully tip the dishwasher back so its rear panel rests on a blanket or towel.

 Use pliers to release the clamp securing the overflow hose to the sump.

 Use a flat head screwdriver to help disconnect the switch wire harnesses.

 Depress the tab and slide the old float assembly to the side to remove it from the water inlet.

 Install the new float assembly by sliding it onto the water inlet and snapping it into place.

 Reattach the overflow hose to the sump and secure it with the clamp.

 You're now ready to return the dishwasher to its upright position.

 Fully position the water inlet and secure it by replacing the cover.

 Make sure the end of the drain hose is accessible through the cabinet wall.

 Lift the right side of the dishwasher up and support it with a wood block or a comparable sturdy object.

 Guide the electrical supply line under the appliance so its wires are accessible through the hole in the junction box.

 Now remove the support and gently slide the dishwasher back into the cabinet.

 Replace the screws to secure the mounting brackets to the cabinet or countertop.

 Feed the drain hose through the cabinet and connect it to the sink drain or disposer.

 Fully position the wire strain relief in the junction box and secure the strain relief nut.

 You're now ready to turn the water supply back on, as well as the power, and confirm that the dishwasher is functioning properly.

 Hi guys, Drew James here from LearnGuitarInLondon.com playing a little short riff, There She Goes

 We're using all fingers and even though it's quite simple, or it sounds simple, there's

 So a good little warm up if you like to do riffs as your warm ups rather than scales.

 You put your middle and third finger, second and third finger, or middle and ring finger,

 And you're putting those on the third fret on the B and the E string.

 And the beginning of the riff, with your plectrum, you're playing the bottom string, so holding

 And we'll talk about the picking pattern in a minute, so the alternate picking.

 And then the next one is the string above also holding down that three, OK, on your

 Then, little finger, this is where it kind of gets a bit of a stretch, a little bit more

 We're stretching the little finger out whilst holding the shape down to the fifth fret on

 Then we put our index finger down on the second fret on the E string and lift up our third

 This note here, by the way, this second fret, this D that we're holding down, sorry, third

 fret on the, on our middle finger, is what we call a pedal note in a riff.

 So we're going to play the bottom string, zero, return to the third fret on the B string,

 And at the ending, you're just going to skip with your plectrum and hit the G string open

 But what's important when we repeat the riff is we don't do the three on the thinnest string twice.

 Oh, by the way, if you do want to get the tab to this, just this little bit at the beginning,

 All you've got to do is just sign up to my newsletter that I send out once a month

 as well as there's tons of other videos and tabs and advice on there as well.

 So we're going up-down-up-down-up-down-up-down-up-down-up-down-up-down-up.

 OK, so make sure with your plectrum you're just doing those motions.

 Cool, so that's like a little warm-up, little finger workout there.

 Alright, this is Big Coyote, part A. I'll play it one time through.

 And the form of this tune is AABB, but for the sake of the lesson I'm just going to play

 We're going to play an open D string to the F sharp on the second string, to an open fifth

 string, back to the F sharp on the second string, open fifth string, and then we're

 going to come up here and do nine, ten, eleven on the respectively the first, second, and

 Alright so just practice that little formation here, this nine, tenth, and eleventh fret

 You can even roll through it a little bit just to get your fingers used to it.

 One, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, eleven, twelve.

 Once you've got your bag halfway sealed, go ahead and set that to the side.

 Remember to try to aim for about six inches for your rice to the top of the bag.

 So same principle as before, I'm going to go at least above the rips so that way I can

 actually access this later on without any type of knife or scissors.

 So let's start working backwards so you guys can see a little better.

 Then after that, you just do a little check to make sure everything is good.

 Something along there where you can stick an oxygen absorber in.

 Then you can also test the side of it to make sure it's really in there tight.

 If it feels like it's just not together tight enough, just go ahead and put the iron back

 Once you've made sure everything is tight, after the other ones have cooled off some,

 All right, now that we have our bag sealed up about halfway, what we're going to do is

 The key here is to limit as least amount of time as possible that the other oxygen absorbers

 What you want to do is you want to take one of your Mylar bags and you're going to lay

 You're going to aim for about an inch above the bag of the oxygen absorber.

 Once you have that bag cut open, this is going to be your reasonable bag for your oxygen absorbers.

 Then you just want to go ahead and make sure that bag actually fits inside the bag you cut.

 Our main job right now is to reseal these oxygen absorbers as quick as we can.

 You just want to get as close as you can without getting on top of the oxygen absorbers.

 This way, you're just going to go ahead and go back and forth a couple of times so you can absolutely be sure

 that there is going to be no oxygen penetrating inside this Mylar bag.

 because it's probably not an offer you're going to use them all in one sitting.

 Alright, now this one I'm going to flip over too just for double added security.

 We should now be able to reuse these oxygen absorbers whenever we need them.

 Now, make sure that you go ahead and write all there with duct tape saying that this is oxygen absorbers.

 It's useful for grouper, for snapper, for trigger fish, for a lot of your bottom feeding

 Start off with a doubled over piece of your line and make a surgeon's loop knot.

 That's a loop, then an overhand turn to form the first overhand knot, and a second overhand

 Again, with mono you would want to moisten this a little bit and pull it tight.

 And then about a foot up the line, do another surgeon's loop knot.

 The loop, one overhand turn, a second overhand turn, forming a loop that will now stand away

 On the higher of the two loops, run your hook, pinch the loop down pretty tight, and run

 Pinch your loop together, run the bank sinker through the loop, and then pull the bank sinker

 This is great for snapper, for grouper, for trigger fish, for a lot of those bottom feeders

 that you want to get the hook down deep and stay close to the bottom.

 Another side benefit of the dropper loop rig is it's easy to remove the bank sinker

 from the bottom loop whenever you're moving from point A to point B. This prevents the

 bank sinker from either banging against the side of your rod, or worse, hitting someone

 Nuts and Bolts Pro Tips have been brought to you by Carabell Charters.

 Onshore, nearshore, and offshore fishing charters from Carabell, Florida.

 Hi, this is Bobbi Thompson with Crochet Guru and today I'm going to show you how to crochet

 When crocheting a popcorn stitch, the first thing you want to do is yarn over the hook

 Now yarn over the hook again and pull the yarn through the stitch.

 Yarn over the hook and pull the yarn through only 2 loops on your hook.

 Then yarn over the hook and then pull the yarn through the last 2 loops on your hook.

 So basically we just made a double crochet and we are now going to do 4 more double crochets

 So yarn over the hook and insert the hook into the same stitch.

 Then yarn over the hook again and pull the yarn through the last 2 loops on your hook.

 Ok so create this stitch, the double crochet, 3 more times and remember to place these stitches

 Ok, now that you've placed 5 double crochets into the same stitch, remove your hook from

 Now insert your hook from front to back through the top of the first stitch made.

 Now the popcorn stitch doesn't have to be made with 5 stitches, you can use as many

 Now 5 stitches seem to be standard, but if you're following a pattern it may call for

 Thank you so much for watching this video, if you got something out of it I'm hoping

 actually going to make this a low-fat version to get healthy for the new year.

 You can get this in the grocery store and I like to use this to cover my Thanksgiving

 or a whole container, which is 750 grams of low-fat natural yogurt.

 that you get a natural yogurt that doesn't have any gelatin in it because it won't drain

So I'm just ladling in all the yogurt right on top of the cheese cloth.

 going to happen is as you let it sit overnight in the refrigerator, all the liquid is going

So that's all you really have to do is just add the yogurt and I'm going

 to cover it with some plastic wrap also, then it won't get a skin on top.

 sauce, I'm going to show you a really great pavlova recipe using it.

 to cover this up, put it in the fridge overnight and I'll show you the result.

 you can see that probably a good two cups of liquid under there.

 stir that up, the yogurt cheese, sugar, lemon juice and lemon rind.

 If I just patch over that, chances are the patch isn't going to last very long, huh?

 Because it will be like putting a little band-aid over the elephant in the room.

 Somebody was just doing a cursory patch here, and that's all they were doing, huh?

 Now see, if I keep gouging this out, I could take it out much further.

 I just want to go back to where the sheetrock mud, the existing mud over the corner bead

 I could gouge all this out all the way along this wall, all the way up and down if I wanted

 Okay, so now I can just take this and kind of taper back the top bit of the mud, right?

 And I just want to be careful because I don't want to gouge up this corner.

 That's where you're supposed to put your mud, fill it up with your mud.

 You're not supposed to go over that edge because if you do, then you've got actual sheetrock

 You want to get it flush with there, and then when you sand it, you want to nicely sand

 it off, you know, when you finish your patch so that everything on that corner is just

 It looks like that was actually the paint over the sheetrock mud.

 So whoever did this originally probably should have done a little bit better job just around

 It might take slightly different application for here as opposed to there.

 OK, Duncan, capo 1 and we're going to play E minor and try to do a little bit of the

 of those things, maybe a lute or something, maybe little instruments playing in the back

 you're trying to do it all on your own so let's see what we can come up with.

 That's where you're mostly concerned with is that, is the E minor bits because that's

 for the beginning of your choruses of your songs or your verses.

 E string, the A string, I don't want to labour on this but E string, the A string, then high

 is a G note, this is F sharp, this is F, then that will be the E string, alright?

You go into the D, E minor, couple in the next room, bound to win a prize D,

 So, we'll look at the verse and see if we can follow along with it, if that's alright?

 Couple in the next room, D win a prize, and then G, F sharp, A, and D. C, B, and G, C, B, and G, C, B, and G, here's my D, here's my E minor.

 My father was an E minor, was a D, D, G, F sharp, A, D. C, B, and G, C, B, and G, C, B, and G, D, sweet E minor.

 Then there's a solo, and I hope you can whistle at the same time, because it's pretty cool those flips I picked up

 on there, like, C, C, G, G, C, and G, C, C, G, E minor, D, and E minor.

 So, every verse is a sign, it's really not too difficult, just try to get that, you know, just so you can get the signature of the song going.

 Today I'm going to show a version of that that's just like a takeaway version but a

 A lot of it is down to the spices that you use and the way you use them.

 Now I'm going to try and break it down so there's not as many spices.

 So I'm going to try and make it really, really simple, just garam masala, curry powder.

 Okay, well what we're going to do is we're going to make the backbone of the curry.

 I'm going to show you how to make an Indian onion puree, which means finely slice some

 We're going to add some oil to it and a little pinch of garam masala and we're going to put

 Just let it cook down, it's own juices, all the water will come out of those onions, the

 sugar will come out of the onions and what we're going to do after that is we're going

 Now I'm going to show you a really good way of doing pilau rice.

 I've got all that lovely flavour from those onions we cooked earlier in.

 The secret of getting a really good rice is you add your water and you get it so it's

 Once that water level drops down, stick a lid on it, take it off the heat and leave

 We've already got enough heat in there so that's going to continue cooking and all that

 rice is going to absorb all those flavours and I promise you it will be cooked.

 After that what we're going to do is we're going to get our marinade of our chicken on

 So what we're going to do is we're going to use some of these onions, garlic and ginger.

 We're going to put this in with our chicken and we're going to stir it through.

 If you've got a little bit of smoked paprika, add a little bit of smoked paprika at this

 You want that sort of tandoor flavour that they have at the Indian takeaway.

 Obviously nobody's got a tandoori oven at home so this is the best way of doing it.

 We're going to seal that off, get that all browned up and covered.

 So we've got our chicken cooked, we've now got our rice steaming away quite nicely, we're

 Same pan that we've cooked our chicken in, we're going to make our curry in by adding

 We're going to add our onion puree to that and we're going to add some garam masala to

 A tin of chopped tomatoes, we're going to add some chopped fresh tomatoes which is what's

 going to give it the sort of sweet and sourness that you get from a tikka masala.

 I actually think it's the best garam masala there is from a supermarket simply because

 of the fact that if you have a look through it you can see the grains of where it's been

 toasted, you can see the actual individual spices that's in there, there's cardamom

 in there, there's bay leaf in there, there's fenugreek in there, all the sort of flavours

 So we're going to add a little bit of garam masala at the end, finish it off with a few

 Check the seasoning, a bit of salt, maybe a little bit of lemon juice at the end if

 So we're just going to leave this to simmer now for about five minutes to do it.

 Hi everyone, so I'm going to show you guys how I apply the Cherry Lola treatment.

 want to make sure that you have a towel on yourself and also a towel on the

 hands for this so take off any jewelry that you might be wearing, earrings,

 Hey everyone, so I'm back and my hair is drenched in this stuff.

It definitely does not smell good but my hair is like drenched to the max.

 doing this because your hair gets kind of clamped together and if you use a

I'm going to let it sit, rinse it out and come back and show you

Today I have 10 here, but just so you know you could do that many.

 it's a leg and wing rack from Bayou Classic and this rack actually will hold either 12 legs or 12 wings.

 Like I said, I've got 10 today, but you could do 12 to 15 with this recipe.

 Now all you need for this recipe is a fourth of a teaspoon of cayenne pepper,

 We're going to blend that together and that's going to go on the chicken.

 and preferably chilled, which is why I have mine sitting in an ice bath.

 1 fourth of a cup or 2 ounces of any kind of bourbon you would like, preferably a good one.

 An eighth of a cup or one ounce of Grand Marnier or you could use a different orange liqueur,

 but the others taste pretty close when you put them in a sauce like this.

 Okay, as I was saying, the first thing you need to do is assemble the fourth of a teaspoon of cayenne pepper,

 And what you'll do with this is you're going to rub this underneath the skin on the, on your chicken legs

 What I'm talking about, you see on a leg like this how the skin will actually,

 I'm hoping you can see this, how the skin will move and you can kind of pull it down

 Well, first you'll season it up and then you'll pull it back up.

 You want to make sure that you have your grill preheated for about a direct medium-high heat.

 And as soon as I finish doing all these, since they, I want them to sit at room temp for about a half an hour.

 To begin your sauce, go ahead and get your pot either on the stove if you're at your house

 or if you're out wherever, camping, tailgating, wherever you might have your grill.

 It should be about five or six minutes before you add the rest of the ingredients.

 Once the onions are ready, everything else goes in except for the bourbon and the Grand Marnier.

 You'll cook all of this after you incorporate it all for about 15 minutes.

 Like I said, we'll let it cook for about 15 minutes or so just to kind of,

 it's going to reduce a little bit and everything will kind of cook together.

 Now that the sauce has reduced a little bit and it's bubbling nicely,

 Unless you're trying to flambe yourself, you want to be very gentle with this part of it.

 You only want to heat it for a few minutes just to kind of heat everything up a little bit.

 You only want to heat it for a few minutes just to kind of heat everything through and meld it all together.

 Once your sauce is just heated through, you want to take it off the fire.

 Once all of your chicken legs are properly loaded onto the chicken leg holder

 all you have to do is stick it on there like that and let them go.

 We're going to let them cook for about 25 minutes and then take them off.

 We'll baste them with the sauce and put them back on for 3-5 minutes, depending on the grill of course,

 Then you take them out and they go to the table and you have more fresh sauce that you can apply to them at the table that's not caramelized on there.

 After about 25 minutes, your legs should be ready to come off of the grill.

 They look kind of plain Jane now, that's just because there's nothing on the outside.

 You need to have, you don't have to, but you need a nice sized basting brush.

 The silicone ones are best for when you're going to do some sort of a sticky, any kind of a glaze, something kind of sticky,

 so that you don't end up with a bunch of hairs all over your food.

 But like I said, you don't have to have it, it's just not really big on having hair in my food.

 By the way, you need to reserve about a cup of your sauce for doing the glaze on all the legs.

 And once you get them all coated, they'll go back on the grill for about 3-4 minutes,

 just enough to glaze this up with all the sugar and stuff in it, the molasses,

 Bourbon gives it the flavor and the molasses and the sugar, and it gives it that good caramelization.

 Once you have them all coated, if you have any left, I guess it depends on how brave you are,

 but I don't like to waste any of my sauce, I want it all on there.

 Grand Marnier, bourbon, and molasses make an excellent glaze for chicken.

 I hope you enjoyed watching today, I know I enjoyed having you.

 I hope that if you're looking for a grill dome, or a cooking accessory that you'll give us a shot at,

 video for anybody who owns a Nissan Versa that has a sunroof and is

 experiencing any moisture problems inside the vehicle and that could be

 wet floors, condensation on the inside of the window, in colder climates frost on

 it was a sunroof and it wasn't leaking it was doing the opposite.

 moisture it falls into this little tray and it goes up two drain tubes on either

 side of the front of the car and there's two on the rear of the car.

 because of the angle of the sunroof the moisture tends to go to the front tubes.

 They do all the work and you can see the drainage hole right where my pencil is

 moisture or water is standing in these in this drain trough and evaporating

 tubes is to pour a little bit of water into the drain or into the drip tray and

 when I close this sunroof that moisture is exposed to the interior of the car

 and that will evaporate especially if it gets warm and all your upholstery

 carpeting anything in your vehicle that's absorbent will absorb that

 this test and these front two tubes are clogged you know where it's coming from

I'd urge you if it's cars under warranty to take it to the dealership.

 Okay so to check the drain tubes in my case they're kinked or blocked at the

 would not advise you to blow air through them because if it's clogged at the

 where the tubes are clogged I'm down on the passenger side of the vehicle the

 passengers front door and you need to remove this piece of trim and you can do

 that just by prying it up pulling it up and you'll hear the little tabs click

 there's three of them and then pull forward pull forward on this piece here

 cables around harnesses around to be able to see anything but right in the

 inside the body here you can see the drain tube you should be able to see it

 there kinked in half and that's the reason you see it kinked there that's

 the reason we're not getting any water draining out of the front tube and

 just outside the warranty period but Nissan came to the plate and repaired it

What I was going to do is attempt to repair myself and this would be

 simulating the drain tube going out of the vehicle underneath the trim we

 have been kinked a little further down the way so anyways in my case I was just

 going to simply cut the tubing above the kink and remove it and come back in with

 a another elbow with a piece of 3-eighths tubing and attach that to the the nipple

 there and then attach the piece of drain hose that I cut like that.

 course you'd want to get them on really tight and that's what I was going to use

 only a suggestion I haven't tried this but if you find yourself down the road a

 Nissan has repaired my vehicle and my drain tube so we're going to perform

 that same test again for some water in here and look how quickly that water

 test here we've test for drainage and it is draining well so we'll put a little

 bit more water in here and we want to ensure that it's draining out of the

 out of here it may be just the drain tube we were talking about behind the

 trim may be disconnected it could have been frozen and cracked or it's blocked

 out of the top tube or out of the top drain it may be draining inside the

 mention that make sure it's draining out of the bottom of the vehicle.

 just to conclude this is my Versa and that was my problem with moisture water

 draining make sure that the water is coming out behind each of the

 front wheels on each side and if they are draining and the water is not coming

 out there it may be draining inside your vehicle the tube may be have become

 couple Versa's dry free of moisture and more importantly mold and mildew.

 Today we're going to be changing your CrucialVacuum.com roller on the Upright DC-17 Dyson vacuum cleaner.

 You definitely want to make sure that your vacuum cleaner is turned off and unplugged.

 And the great thing about even this box, you can put it to good use.

 So you take your quarter, which I happen to have, and you want to unscrew these three

 Now chances are if you're changing your actual brush roller, you may need to change your

 So now the easiest way to remove the brush roller is to just wedge both of your fingers

 You want to make sure that the belt has been removed from that centerpiece.

 And once you get to that end right here, just slide that belt right around, and you've removed

 And the same way that we slid it off, we're going to slide it back on.

 And at the same time, moving the belt right over to the grooved section.

 What you want to do is make sure that these end pieces are flat on top.

 And once it's snapped in, make sure brush roller, everything is fine.

 You've just changed your CrucialVacuum.com brush roller on the Upright DC-17 vacuum cleaner.

 This time we're making a spinach artichoke dip with the tofu and tofu fries.

 So this dip tastes even better than the full fat unhealthy ingredient version.

 The reason I really love this version is because it includes silken tofu.

 It just lightens everything up, but you can't taste the tofu at all.

 I did use real parmesan cheese in mine, but you're welcome to use soy cheese.

 And the mayonnaise that I used was light vegan mayonnaise, but you can use any type of mayonnaise

 We had spinach and we have artichoke in there, but it is just absolutely beautiful, very,

 This is perfect for a party, especially since the holidays are coming up and you can serve

 These are actually made out of firm tofu and look how, they're just so fun to eat.

 Well, they give a browning them like this gives it a nice nutty flavor, but they will

 pretty much take on the flavor of whatever you're using as a dip.

 So for example, if you've got this spinach and artichoke dip, these will go perfect with

 Oil the bottom of the pan, lay out your fries and then oil the fries on top.

 Put them in your broiler seven minutes, flip them and another seven to 10 minutes.

 This is frozen spinach that I've defrosted and a very important step.

 You have to use your hands to squeeze all of the water out, all of it.

 To a food processor, I'm adding a half cup of silken tofu, mayonnaise, light mayonnaise,

 Parmesan cheese, lots of garlic and I'm squeezing in a very juicy half lemon, about a tablespoon

 Okay, time now to add your dry spinach that you've squeezed out and some dill.

 I'm using fresh dill from the garden, pulse just a few times until it's nice and chopped

 up and now I'm adding in the artichoke hearts and I'm only going to pulse a couple times

 because I kind of want the artichoke hearts to be a little chunky.

 Serve this dip with your tofu fries and whatever vegetables you like.

 For the full recipe including all the measurements and if you have any questions at all, head

 My cookbook Steamy Kitchen's Healthy Asian Favorites is available at all bookstores including

 So here we have the glove compartment and what we're gonna need to do is remove these

 And we have some screws hidden under there and then we're gonna have to take them out

 Now I recommend using one of these as this will save you a lot of time.

 Now what I found easier before removing all this stuff is to take the bottom screw out,

 I don't know if it can be seen, it's over here, so basically that's where the filter

 Alright, now we have to remove this panel, take this bit out, that stops the door from

 Just twist them and it comes out, then it can be pulled forward.

 We need to remove that bit of metal so we can get the filter out.

 Alright, now the only thing standing in our way is the cover for the filter cage, which

 So, as you can see there is one screw there and one at the top.

 Alright, new filter, make sure the air flow is going in the car, yeah.

 Alright, now once the air filter is in, put the cover back, three bolts, then put this

 Replace the fuse box, replace the glove compartment and that's it.

I'll show you each part and record them part 1 part 2 and part 3

 Part 1 is the main part of the song which starts with 7 all of this by the way is played on the D string

 That is played 12 times then skipping out probably we go straight to C which goes nice on the Eastern

 Do as many do as many as you feel on those two bits then it goes back onto part a which is 7

 And then to part B, which is similar as part 1 but a little bit different

 It's massive left basically I'll put it all in this description bar with the tab as well

I found that it's a nice little easy thing and the finish will just do the first two minutes

 Then that repeats again basically that's most of the song enjoy

 In 1913, Rufus Jordan platted what was then called the town of Long Beach from a house

 The buttonwood trees that we're sitting under today that sit on beautiful Sarasota Bay are

 We have people that walk in from our neighborhood, bike in from the surrounding areas, canoe

 in, kayak in, boat in, paddle board in, and believe it or not, we even get a seaplane

 It's about a great, friendly, courteous staff that looks forward to serving you.

 It's about our kitchen crew that loves to make great seafood, produced locally, great

 local ingredients, to make sure that your experience here is a memorable one.

 Some of the specialties of the house here that you don't want to miss are Chef George's

 take on tater tots, his red curry sea bass, his scallops rumaki, and always the fresh

 Here at Mar Vista, we're proud to be partners in The Originals.

 The Originals is a group that works for independent restaurants like ours.

 We don't have the advertising horsepower that the major chains have, but they don't have

 Welcome to my kitchen today, and we're going to make Budweiser and Old Bay shrimp.

 First thing you want to do is you want to get your pan about a medium hot.

 And then what we're going to do is we're going to add our Budweiser beer.

 We'll give that a little stir, just to get everything going together.

 When you have this boil ready, we're going to add our gulf shrimp.

 Hey guys, so today I'm going to be showing you how to make these super cute little flower

 I'm going to be showing you how to make this color combination in particular.

 So you'll start by taking your black rubber bands and putting them in a hexagon shape

 So with your pink, you're going to start from the bottom like this.

 Okay, so now that you have it like that, we're going to put on our last layer, which

 The green will go right how the black did, but it'll go on top of the pink.

 My hands are like really dry, so ignore my disgusting dry winter weather hands.

 And you're going to reach your hook into there and take the, and as you can see, I'm going

 So now, as you can see, we have quite a few layers on the side.

 But what we're actually going to do is we're going to reach down to the second to last

 And then you're going to reach down, grab the very last black band, the very last one,

 Took me so long to find something to hold this, to hold the camera.

 And then just to make sure, you might want to check the sides to make sure you grab the

 And now you're ready to finish it off by reaching inside of the top one, going out, and grabbing

 So then after you slip knot it, you put that aside and lift it off of the loom.

 So then when you have your charm, you take that, stretch it out a little bit, spread out all the petals,

 So as you see, they're super easy, unless of course you have an odd camera and it's hard to see,

 and you keep messing up, but for the most part, they're extremely easy, they're super fun to make,

 and they look really cute on backpacks or keychains or bracelets or anything.

 Okay, so thank you for watching, and comment, rate, and subscribe.

 Alright YouTubers, this is old army guy here, one old army guy I should say.

 I saw a video this morning on YouTube about spam and apparently the kid, and I'm going

 to say kid, didn't like it, has never had it before, didn't know really, I guess from

 the sound of it in this two minute video, they didn't know what he was doing with it.

 But what I've got here is your normal can of spam, I've eaten it before via the MRE

 What I'm going to show you here is I've got two eggs, a can of spam, some potatoes, a

 hot frying pan, and I'm just going to make a quick and easy nutritious breakfast using

 I mean what's the point of having all this survival food if we don't know how to cook

 I mean yes, it will keep you alive, but I think you need to have a few skills before

 we go out and get it before it actually hits the fan and we know what we're doing.

 So I'm going to take a little break here, get it all on the frying pan and show you

 Okay what I've done here is I've got two ham slices, spam slices I guess I should say,

 Well I'm going to get the potatoes straight into the frying pan here.

 Now I am using an old cast iron frying pan here and I do say old, this was my great grandmothers.

 Now I know everybody out there knows how to cook, but the question is are you going to

 be able to cook when you don't have gas on your stove or if you don't have the means

 The nice thing about a cast iron frying pan is I can take it and I can put it out on my

 It's one of the reasons why I really wanted this and I kind of fought with my mother to

 But being that she is a single elderly woman now she doesn't really use it anymore and

 But just to be able to practice cooking with it and know how it heats I think makes a world

 So I'm going to brown these up and turn the heat up a little bit here and get these going.

 It looks like a meal you probably get in a truck stop somewhere.

 You got your fried potatoes that were just left over from the night before.

 Now I also realize that in a hit the fan scenario if you don't have your own chickens you might

 My plan and it is a plan right now is that the next house we will have chickens and our

 I don't have any chickens so I am forced to buy store bought eggs.

 So I'm familiar with the process of what needs to be done there.

 So I'm going to go ahead and take a piece here of the Spam and try that.

 It's got, still a little salty which makes sense but it's good.

 And I can see in a pinch putting that in with some beans or some rice, frying it up and

 Maybe I'll do that on my next adventure instead of using venison.

 If you don't know how to prepare it in the sense of what you've got in your food store,

 don't know how to cook it up, how to eat it, what to do with it, doesn't do you any good.

 Welcome to the EasyRoughEstimator.com How to Make a Project Drawing.

 area and you want to take it wall by wall and get a linear footage of each wall, so

 and you want to use a, this is an architectural ruler, you don't have to use this, you can

 just use a regular ruler, but it gives you the different scales on here, so that may

And then you can see we've laid this drawing out and we've given it two

So there's a profile with this angle, with all the measurements that lay out with

 concern, 22 feet 6 inches, the I-beam, 10 feet, 11 feet, all these measurements that

 this area here, entertainment area, 30 feet, 9 feet 6 inches, 4 feet, so on.

 and on this side from this angle, it makes the drawing confusing.

 way around the outside of the drawing, so this is our project area and we've defined

And then what we've done is we've gone in and also kind of defined some inner

 is 140 square feet, this area here is 26 square feet, this area here is 159.5 square feet,

 what we are going to do is use slash marks and we're going to do slash marks as like

This is the wall that we are going to reframe, so we're going to take this wall

 out and then we would be able to measure the wall from this end to this end, which is 9

 would get your square footage of wall that would come out, that would be demoed out.

 Any other things that we would demo, let's say we would strip some wall board off the

 used a marker so it shows up a little better so you can see it.

 details but you can use different colors that help show up and define areas a little better.

 So there's our, we're going to strip the wall from this mark to the corner, from that corner

 too, whenever you take wall board off, you want to put wall board back on.

 you and you can measure that and get your square footage of what's coming off and then

 second drawing is going to be what's going to go back in place.

 the existing basement, that's what I'm going to do on my demo, all the things that are

And then this is my new drawing or my new plan of what is actually going to

Now I went ahead and drew, it's up to you, but I drew some furniture things in

 here to kind of give an idea of placement and what areas are going to be used as the

 locate these stack drains and so you know how far it's going to be so you can calculate

 my drain line is going to tie back into this stack drain right there.

 the linear distance from the sink to the stack drain for my entry in the plumbing section.

 And again, I've defined, you know, here's a step up, here's a little note here, I went

 ahead and calculated this out, there's 60 square feet of ceramic tile that's going to

We've also got a measurement on the counter, there's some definitions of

 in what's going back in and get a linear footage and that's fine.

 you're putting up a new framed wall, which this is what this is going to be, we tore

 the other wall out, we reframed a new wall and this wall is going to go in and I like

 to again color those new walls in with, this is a doorway, you can leave that open and

 you're going to put a new wall board in, you can highlight that as well.

 corner, this is going to be new wall board that's going in, whether it's drywall or plaster

 board or again, according to what project, what relates to your project, that's what

And so when you highlight it with the red, that helps define it a little

 better and you don't tend to forget it that that is a new area that we're adding in with

And so these are some tips that should help you, again, to define the different areas

 with your project and this is what you're going to need to do for your project.

 EasyRoughEstimator.com and this is how you would make a project drawing.

 You will need baking soda, citric acid, choice of oil, fragrance oil, salt, oats, water, mould for your bath bombs, a bowl and soluble dye.

 Begin by putting your baking soda and citric acid into your bowl.

Mix together really well until you get a smooth consistency throughout the entire mixture.

Oats are really good for dry patches, itchy patches and also help to soothe skin.

Salt prevents breakouts and cleans out the dirt from your pores.

Add your oils and water to the mixture making sure you mix fast and blending them together properly.

Make sure you don't add too much, you don't want to stain your skin.

 Once your mixture is together, with your bowl mould, pack each side making sure you over fill it a little so when you press the two sides together they stick.

 It takes a little practice to get a feel for how much filling you need so don't get discouraged if your first couple fall apart.

 You don't need to leave them in the mould for very long and in fact can tap them out as soon as you have filled them.

Muffin tins, ice cube trays, candy moulds, anything you like, whatever makes you happy.

 Once you have made your bath bombs and they are completely dry, store them in a dry place or in a container or bag.

Because we used oil and water and no preservatives, you want to use them within about 6 months.

 When you are ready to use one, just drop it into your warm bath and relax and enjoy.

 If you have any leftover mixture which isn't enough to make a bath bomb, just add in more sea salt till the mixture is really dry and greeny.

 I have put my bath bombs into a glass bowl lined with tissue paper.

 This is Bear Naked Ladies with Pinch Me, per request of Honda Raider 519.

 Middle finger 1B and then open E, hammer onto the first fret on the E.

 Back to hammer, pick that again and then upstroke on the B string.

 He does variations, sometimes he'll hit two strings in it, sometimes he'll hit one.

 It's kind of the vibe of it, this is one of the ways he's doing it.

 Hit that first fret after you do the 1B twice and slide up to the third fret.

 And then go second fret A, palm mute, pick it twice and hammer onto the third fret.

 And then palm mute the open D and you're going to go downstroke.

 Pick the D again on the second fret, no palm mute and hammer onto the third fret.

 And then hit the open E and hammer onto the second fret on the E with your first finger.

 D G D say that fast, D G D. And then repeat that minus the hammer on.

 And then move over to 1E, 1B, similar to that first chord we did.

 After you do that hammer, you can also hit the D and then go B G D G.

 Once you do that, you get the benefit because you can send me your favorite songs.

 Take this stuff in small bite-sized pieces, man, and build off of it.

 If you want to personalize your lessons, which is really the best route to go, my Skype name

 If you want to donate to this channel, my PayPal email is tbxpunk at aol.com.

 Hopefully it will allow me this year to be able to leave one of my music stores that

 amateurs don't get close enough and their subject is too small in the photograph.

 you show somebody a photograph and you have to say, see, look at what I was shooting over

 In this particular case, I had very little leeway in where I could stand and how I could

 to the edges of the frame as felt comfortable in that particular photograph.

So I'm carefully adding in some tree trunks, which I think go well in this

 talk more about this when we talk about the rule of thirds, but amateurs almost always

 getting that subject out of the frame is a very, very good, useful tip.

 a little bit more freedom of where to put that subject more off to the side.

 add a little element of mystery, and that is always a good thing to have.

 Clean, not a lot of clutter in the photograph is something that I personally very prize

There's a bit of a visual puzzle going on out there, and my goal going

 out there is to make sense of this visual puzzle, to find an element that makes sense

 is very, very challenging, but it will make for very good pictures.

 Hi everybody, in this video I want to show you other masks which you can make from milk,

 This is 100% pure, natural pure honey and I'm just using the normal milk as just I bought

 So, what we need to do, I prepared here mashed, this is half of banana because my hair are

 not very long and this is enough for my hair and if you have very long hair just make one

 banana and you don't have to use a lot of milk because by the time while you apply this

 mask on your hair it's going to be flicking on your face and everywhere.

 So, just take half of this cup as you see approximately and just add it in your banana

 and what you need to do next, add 2 tablespoons of honey, this pure honey, 1 and 2.

 As I told you before in other videos, milk nourishes the hair and milk by itself can,

 you can use milk by itself as a conditioner but here I'm showing you the mask.

 Just mix everything and rub into the root of your hair and all the way to the end, to

 Rub it very good because as you see it's liquid, thick liquid and you need to rub your head

 Rub your head with a plastic bag and on the top of the plastic bag you need to rub the

 towel because it's going to keep licking even under the plastic bag and the towel will

 absorb any drops of the mask goes to your face so your face can stay clean and you can

 So, about all the milk, how it works, I was talking about other videos and I will tell

 Again, this nourishes the hair and renew the damaged hair, gives them softness and silkiness

 and if you use milk by itself it's just going to work for you as a conditioner.

 The honey are very good for the hair, nourishes the hair too, make them soft and everything

 Banana is a natural product, it's just natural fruit and no one of these ingredients will

 hurt you, they are risk free and you just can try it and it will be still easy to comb

 your hair and they will have more volume and will be silky, soft and very beautiful and

 Pete Campbell has a reputation for being a bit of a devil, so we named this scrumptious

 And in this particular episode, she got to sit at a dinner table with the one and only

 So our recipe that we're going to be doing is devil on horseback.

 As you can see, we have three ingredients plus a maple syrup for a finishing touch.

 Turkey bacon, if you want to cut down on some of the fat, and since we like to do things

 All we're going to do is take half of a date, stuff it with some goat cheese.

 So did you feel like you were really in the 60s when you were on set?

 So first we're going to cook them at 400 degrees for about 15 minutes.

 Then we're going to take them out, put a little maple syrup on them, drizzle them, stick them

 And in the effort of saving time, we're going to put them in the oven.

 And then we're going to take them out and we're going to put them in the oven for about

 And in the effort of saving time, we have some that are almost ready.

 We will stick these under the broiler for just a few minutes till they get nice and bubbly

 And then we're going to take them out and we're going to take them out of the oven for

 So, as a first time Cinnamon and Spice guest, what do you think?

Then over here I have a can of little fat black bean refried beans

And what we are going to do is we are going to mix in what is the equivalent

Meanwhile if you have a tortilla maker go ahead and make your tortillas.

I like my taco shells to be crunchy so I heat them up in the oven.

Ok so I have everything spread out so what I am going to do is grab

Mother doesn't like spicy so if you guys can't handle spicy to me it is

 Hi, I'm Christine Pacheco, Online Food Editor with Canadian Living Magazine.

 Today I wanted to show you some of my personal tricks for holiday gift giving.

 Every year people look for unique ideas to be giving gifts at holiday times.

 You can give a gift card or a ball of wine, but they're really generic.

 If you give something that's homemade, I think it's a really personal and thoughtful way of giving gifts at holiday time.

 These are some really simple ideas that I'd love to share with you today.

 A gift from your kitchen doesn't have to contain elaborate or costly ingredients.

 You want to give something that's original and the recipient maybe wouldn't already have in their pantry or on their shelf.

 This year I'm making gifts with things that I already have in the kitchen or in the fridge.

 The first thing I want to show you is a decadent peanut caramel sauce.

 This is great to pour over ice cream, on top of a cake, or to use as a dipping sauce.

 What you'll need is 1 cup of granulated sugar, 3 tablespoons of water, a couple of drops of lemon juice,

 1 cup of whipping cream, 1 third cup of smooth peanut butter, and 1 teaspoon of vanilla.

 To make the caramel sauce, you want to combine the sugar, the water, and a couple of drops of lemon juice in a medium sized pot.

 Bring the sauce to a boil, swirling the pan every once in a while.

 You'll boil this for about 5 to 7 minutes until the sauce turns a nice deep golden brown.

 Put the sauce back on to a low heat and stir the caramel until it dissolves into the sauce.

 Now you're going to add a third of a cup of peanut butter and a bit of vanilla.

 For my peanut caramel sauce, I love saving old jam jars because they're such pretty little shapes.

 Another great thing that you can find is little boxes and tins and jars at a dollar store.

 Take some fabric or paper, using a bowl that's a few inches larger around than the lid as a guide.

 I've also prepared peanut butter truffles for this year's gift giving.

 Milk chocolate, whipping cream, smooth peanut butter, vanilla and honey roasted peanuts.

 Cut out a piece of wax paper the same size as the tin and place it on top.

 I love to make biscotti and this recipe is particularly delicious.

 My coffee loving friends love to get it as a gift and I always make extra for my holiday cookie platter.

 You can see that I've used take-out containers to package the biscotti.

 Şimdi size 3 parmak Alize Big Bang Yarn'a 3 parmak kullanarak teknikini göstereceğim.

 Bu için bir not yapıyorum ve parmaklarımın üzerine yarın koyuyorum.

 Ve iki parmak kullanarak diğer 3 parmaklara parmakları göstereceğim.

 İlk parmakı ilmek olmadan alıyorum ve yarını en yakın şekilde tutmaya çalışıyorum.

 Projeyi bitirirken, bu parmakları bir an önce takmak gibi bir an önce kesiyoruz.

 Alize Kağan Tüy Yarnı'nda aynı tekniği kullanarak bu parmakları yaptık.

 I'm here today to bring you another one of my Wow That's Cool videos.

 This is going, it's not going to be actually making a card this time.

 Thinlits, whether you're using the Butterflies or the Hello's or whatever.

 But if you're watching this video, you probably fall in one of two categories.

 Either you've been hesitant to buy these because you can see how many holes there are and you're

 afraid you don't want to be sitting there having to pick each of these out all the time.

 Or you've purchased them and you're just not, you haven't used them and every time

 you make a card you're putting it aside because you don't know what to do with them yet.

 So you put off making the card until you have time to figure out how to use the Thinlit

 I'm hoping that this video will clear up a lot of questions that you have using the product.

 Because I have just, I have got so many emails lately on this, questions with this and I

 decided to make a video because it's probably easier than constantly answering emails.

 But anyways, this card, these two cards that I'm going to show you right now are made with

 And I'm going to show you how to work these so that they come out so easy.

 So we're going to need our Big Shot and we're going to need some everyday wax paper.

 Okay, so we're going to need some everyday plain old Reynolds wax paper or any other

 And you're going to rip off a piece that is large enough to cover your frame with, your

 I have to keep this zoomed out so you can see the whole Big Shot for right now and then

 Don't mind my cutting pads because they are a mess because I use them so much.

 You take a piece of scrap and then you're going to take your wax paper and lay it on

 And then you're going to lay your Framelit down so that the cutting edge is downward.

 Now what I have found works for me is doing four shots through this.

 So you're going to come through once, come back twice, then three, and then four.

 Once you remove it, then I use my piercing tool just to get things started.

 Okay, I have temporarily moved my Big Shot and zoomed in so you can see this.

 Now a lot of this is just going to pop out so easily already because of the wax paper.

 You can see the wax paper on the top of this still, but if you take your piercing tool,

 some of this, if you just tap on this, this whole thing, most of these will fall out of

 Okay, then you do have that thin piece of wax paper that once you pick at it, the whole

 wax paper is going to come off and your butterfly might be left with one little thing or something

 Here's the bigger butterfly from that set and here's what this looks like when it's...

 What I did on my card here was put another butterfly in there with twine.

 All the little pieces are a little messy, but let me get everything set up for the hello

 Okay, I have a piece of scrap and I'm going to once again set down the paper with the

 wax paper on top, put my little thinlit on there, and then put the other cutting pad

 I'm going to stop the camera just to get rid of this big shot again.

 Take your little piercing tool and just poke a couple of little holes and the whole thing

 Now there's a little thing of wax paper in there that you want to remove and just toss,

 Let me see if I can put this on the back of something just so you can see it better.

 So there's no reason now that you have to fear about buying these or using them if you've

 The butterfly also comes with one other one in it too and it's just a solid one.

 It doesn't really have a lot of detail to it, but these two elegant ones you're going

 So I hope this has been helpful and that you will not fear using these little finlits.

 If you've enjoyed this video, I would appreciate if you have two seconds if you could give

So a couple of techniques that I'm using here, one is the pick pick

 technique, one with the right hand is a hybrid picking technique where I hold the pick between

 my thumb and my index finger leaving my middle and ring finger free to pluck higher strings.

 So one of the first things you want to get comfortable with is just doing that.

 would actually put my pick on the third string which is being held again by my thumb and

 index finger and these other two fingers are going to play the top B and E strings open.

 bit closer, you know close up shot of that a little bit later on.

Third string, second string, first string with your thumb and index,

 doing is I'm playing this in the key of A flat so I'm actually at the fourth fret in

 fourth position and I'm playing sort of like it's pretty much the top of an A flat major

 an A flat major or even like an A7 chord, A flat 7 chord this would work over, a dominant

So I'm playing that and I'm doing this chromatic walk up where I'm actually playing

 chromatic line and this is where the hybrid picking comes in, really into the play.

 I get to the seventh fret, then I'm going to be sliding from the seventh to the eighth

 line and I do that sort of arpeggiated hybrid picking part of the lick.

 So the second part of the lick, I'm going to be playing that four times.

 doing the ascending chromatic part, I'm barring the fourth fret the whole time.

And that might be something where you want to just create a separate exercise

Then that hybrid picking part of the lick, I'm going to play that four

 Hello everyone and welcome to part 2 of making the Yorksboro Bullpup Slingshot Crossbow.

 So this is where we left off last time with all of the pieces cut out and ready to glue

 So before I glue it together I need to cut out the covers for the trigger mechanism.

 So now the point in these bits which I've just cut out is that they'll be screwed in

 by screws here, here and here and then you can take them out and then you can like, if

 the trigger mechanism ever breaks you can fix it from there and you can do the same

 So now I'm going to start gluing all the bits together and what I'm going to do first is

 So I'm going to be using epoxy resin to glue this together because it's the strongest glue

 Right, so here I'm just starting to mix up some of the glue and I need to apply it on

 Also I don't want any of the corners to not have any glue on so that they're easy to pull

 I'm starting to get a little bit low on glue here but I just had enough.

 Now I've got to line it up and lining it up is the hardest bit because you want it

 And eventually once I get it lined up I put it in the G clamp and also put some more grips

 Right, so the glue's just finished drying and I've glued these two bits on successfully

 and it's pretty solid so now it's time to add on the third bit.

 Right, so all three pieces have been glued together so now it's time to file it.

 So for the filing I'm going to be using a metal working file because if I was using

 a rasp then it would probably just chip the plywood and pull off little bits.

 It takes quite a long time to file this because the foregrip and everything wasn't lined up

 Eventually I move on to filing the second finger groove and then I stop recording for

 So now I've done all of the finger grooves so now I'm just filing the top of the foregrip.

 And here I'm just filing the handle bit where you're actually going to be holding it with

 And they're the main bits that you need to focus on rounding, the other bits you just

 Now I just move on to some sandpaper just so that it's a little bit smoother and a little

 And again I'm using sandpaper around the file for the back bit here.

 It's really important that you don't push too hard when using the file or the sandpaper

 otherwise you'll chip layers off the plywood and that's really bad.

 So I've just finished shaping it here and it all feels really really nice to hold and

 Please comment, rate and subscribe and also if you have any ideas for a future project

 that I could possibly make just post a comment below or send me a message.

 Hi, I'm Molly Feller, the Dining Diva, and I've got a fantastic product for you

 good way to use them up and make something delicious for your friends.

 just tear them up, put them into the buttered casserole dish, and you know

 kind of tear them coarsely because you want that really nice texture on top

And then, the only thing remaining, we're going to drizzle it with

 fabulous, fabulous, delicious dessert that you're going to have for your family and

 want these products and need to find a retailer close to you, go to

 Now what I've already done is cut it into bite sized pieces for our fried cauliflower

 and what we're going to do is put it in salted boiling water for five minutes.

 And then we're going to drain it and we're going to pour ice water over the top of it

 Okay our cauliflower is cooled off so now we're going to get ready for dipping.

 What I've got over here is some whole buttermilk, dip it like that, roll it in our seasoned

 flour which I've seasoned with my old stand by's, salt, pepper, garlic powder, onion powder

 Then we're going to roll it back over in the egg and then we're going to put it on our

 Okay, I'm going to try that, do this again until we got it all rolled up.

 Okay we've got our cauliflower all battered and our grease is hot enough so I'm going

 Our fried cauliflower is done and if you'd like to make some kind of a dipping sauce

 First, you let the dentist take impressions of your upper and lower teeth.

 After you load the first tray, you take it and put it into your mouth.

 Once the tray is loaded, I take the tray and I place it into my mouth.

 I will brush my teeth, rinse my mouth, and that's it for the day.

 I can speak, I can talk to people, I can sip water through a straw if I want.

 The material that I am using on myself is a 22% carbamide peroxide solution.

 You then rinse your mouth, brush your teeth, and you're all done.

 And in particular the saw is the striker of choice on a Leatherman.

 So it strikes better than a... I never thought of doing alcohol with that.

 I can boil a pot of water like this kettle on an ounce of alcohol.

 Yeah, we don't have a lot of comforts out here at the off-grid project.

 Actually, they use blue tarps under the bushes in Central Park.

 But the homeless people don't like you checking out their set-up.

He was like down the street by the parking lot behind the dumpster.

I thought his beard was a hiker beard, but it was a homeless beard.

 My buddy thinks it's hilarious that I use this for half the Appalachian Trail as my cook pot.

 Boil enough water to do some instant cooking in a freezer bag or whatever.

 If you can get some corn and make some grain alcohol then you have fuel.

 I mean, it's tricky, but at least you don't have to do some horrible stretch.

 It is Michael from Lean Body Lifestyle and today what I'm going to show you guys how

 to do is kind of make another convenient snack and today we're going to make hummus.

 You can put it on bread, you can put it on a sandwich, you can put it on crackers and

 it's basically just going to be another one of those convenient snacks while you're busy.

 You can make this and this is basically, once you make it, it'll just be pick up and eat.

 So what we're going to do is start out with a cup and a half of chickpeas and add that

 into a food processor and if you don't have a food processor, a blender would work just

 So either one works but I'm just going to use a food processor today and a cup and a

 And now you're going to add one tablespoon of olive oil and now that we have the olive

 oil in the blender, what we're going to do is add two tablespoons of lemon juice and

 now what I'm going to do today is actually add three different spices into this and keep

 in mind that all of these spices that I have here, you can use whatever kind of spice you

 like but today what I'm going to do is add a little bit of smoked paprika.

 I'm going to add a little bit of crushed red pepper and then I'm going to finish it off

 All the ingredients are blended up and now to store it, what I'm going to do is just

 put it in a little container like this that has a lid and that right there is your final

 product and now with this you can basically just put the lid on it and store it in the

 refrigerator and whenever you're in a hurry, this is right there ready to eat and it's

 probably going to be good for about a week in the refrigerator so that's good.

 Now I'm going to show you guys one example of a way to use the hummus.

 There's a ton of different ways but what I like to do is actually just take a little

 It's basically just a cracker and you just spread a little bit of the hummus right on

 top and you're going to get something kind of like this and it's as easy as that.

 Much healthier than going out and getting a bag of chips or another quick snack.

 Just pre-make it and chances are if you're trying to lose weight, trying to get in better

 If you did, please leave a thumbs up because that helps me out a lot and if you're interested

I'm a makeup artist and I'm going to be talking to you about makeup and skincare.

 The main focus of this look is having a flawless, glowy complexion.

 Before you begin any makeup ritual, the first thing you want to do is cleanse your face.

 I used Pond's Gold Radiance Cleansing Mousse to clean my model's face before we're going to apply the makeup.

 The first thing we're going to do when applying this evening look is apply an eye cream.

 I'm going to apply the Pond's Gold Radiance Eye Cream on her eye first.

 The area around the eye is the thinnest skin on the whole body, so you want to first begin by applying a good eye cream.

 And what I like about this cream is that it has actual gold particles inside it, which help to illuminate the skin.

 Especially under foundation and especially for an evening look, it looks really, really good.

 I'm going to now apply the foundation on top of her Gold Radiance Day Cream.

 When you're applying the foundation, you want to start kind of in the center of the face and blend outwards.

 For evening foundation, you don't want to blend the foundation too much.

 What I'm going to do next is I'm going to use a sponge and I'm going to just blend out the foundation.

 I'm going to apply concealer with my index finger, starting from the inner corner of the eye and blending it out.

 Usually the inner corner of the eye is darker than the outer corner, so you want to focus the concealer more on the inner corner.

 Usually people miss this area when they're applying their makeup and it actually makes a really big difference.

 It's very important you set your foundation after you apply it.

 I'm going to pat on the T-zone, where the skin generally gets oily.

 What we're going to do next is we're going to put a little bit of color on her eyebrow.

 And then I'm going to use a pencil, which is the same color as her eyebrow, not darker or lighter.

 So right above the cheekbones, I'm going to apply an illuminator.

 A contour is applied basically where the skin is and where the lips meet.

 And about an inch and a half, I'm going to apply the contouring powder.

 Whenever you apply powder on the face, you want to make sure that you use it on the flat side of the brush.

 You can even apply the contour along your jawbone if you need it.

 I'm also going to apply a little bit of a contour along the sides of her nose.

 Beginning where the eye crease is, going down, so it's kind of like an L.

 If it's too dark, it's going to end up looking very obvious on the face.

 So I'm going to use something that will give her a little bit of a flush to the cheek.

 In a circular motion, I'm going to begin on the apples of the cheek and take it upwards.

 Once most of the color is applied on the face, I'm going to make a C shape.

 So that there's not only just color on her cheek, but on the rest of the face it's balanced.

 I'm going to now apply an eye primer on her eye using my finger.

 It's important to apply an eye primer before you apply eyeshadow.

 And I'm applying it from the base of the eye all the way up underneath the eyebrow.

 Lastly, I'm going to apply a powder with a little bit of shine.

 Right underneath the eyebrow to lift the brow and give it shine.

 When you get to the end of the eye, you want to lift it out a little bit to give it a winged look.

 And I'm going to apply a little bit of mascara on the lower lash line.

 The first thing we're going to do is we're going to apply lip liner.

 And then I'm going to make a line on both sides of the lip and underneath.

 And then I'm going to fill in the whole lip with my lip liner to help the lipstick last longer.

 Lastly, I'm going to use a nice bold red matte lipstick and apply it on top of the lip liner.

 I'm going to always begin by applying my lipstick at the center of the lip and then blending it out towards the lip line.

 That way you get the most color right in the center and you can just blend it out.

 If you want to give the lips a little bit more of a glamorous look, you can apply a little bit of lip gloss just on the center.

 Today on Pro Tips we're going to be talking about straps and installation of straps, how

 you should use them, different ways that we mount the strap buttons here at the factory,

 Most of our guitars today that have a cutaway have a strap button installed on the treble

 Now before I even go any further with kinds of straps and all of that, this is the position

 that we mount all of our strap buttons direct from the factory.

 I've also seen them aftermarket drilled directly into the heel.

 We recommend having your strap buttons installed here on the middle of the heel.

 Anywhere else, such as the heel cap, on the sides or on the back, can cause other areas

 of stress to the guitar and it could end up cracking the instrument.

 Those types of cracks, those types of damages would not be covered under the warranty, so

 we recommend again taking your stuff to a Martin licensed warranty center and having

 them professionally install a strap button if the guitar doesn't already come with it.

 Now again, these may be a little bit tight right out of the factory, especially a leather

 strap like this, so you may want to work it a little bit to stretch that hole so it's

 On our PA series guitars, we have the F1 Fishman Aura system installed.

 You'll notice that it has the battery box down here and we've actually installed another

 This is a OMC 16GTE, again with a strap button installed in the neck.

 So for installing the strap on this one, I'm going to do the same thing.

 Now you notice on the bottom of this guitar, we have more of a traditional end jack.

 The end jack has an end cap over top of it, which is designed to accept the strap.

 So again, with this one, all you have to do is slip it over like that and you're ready

 Now these traditionally do not have a strap button installed in the heel.

 All of our straps come with this little shoelace tied to the top of them.

 And the reason that's there is for when you don't have a strap button like on this guitar.

 So what you want to do with this is you take it into the string and you slide it underneath

 Single knot, double knot, sailor knot, bow tie, whatever you like.

 Another option if you don't want to use a string, and the perfect alternative for drilling

 your neck, is using this little leather strap, which installs on the headstock underneath

 So to install this, again, we're going to start from the treble side, slide it underneath

 Now once you have that installed, to put the strap on, all you have to do is take the

 strap, slide it over the button, make sure it's locked in, and you're ready to go.

 Now you'll notice on the back of this guitar, again, this guitar doesn't have electronics

 They're not glued in, they're not screwed in, they're also not hammered in.

 So to install the strap, again, once that's in place and tight, you just slide the strap

 With any product, I always recommend that you try to limit the prolonged extended contact

 So I would recommend when you're storing your guitar to not have the strap lay across the

 top in the case or across the back in the case, as the dyes in the strap can bleed into

 Again, depending on the kinds of strap that you have, the materials could actually end

 So when you're not using this, I recommend not storing the guitar with this on here.

 Now you notice on the back of this guitar, there's no electronics.

 So you need to keep that in mind when you're installing the strap.

 Over time, as with any strap button, sometimes they can actually, a regular strap button

 So again, I recommend that you check it before you install the strap because damage that

 happens if the strap button falls out during a show, those types of damages, again, aren't

 And the only problem is I have my violin here, but my bow is being borrowed by a student.

 And then I'm going to play one more section for you, and it's measure 33 to 41.

 And by the way, you can go back in the video, of course, and play those sections over and over again with me if you want to.

 That's measure 33 to 41, and that's what I would start looking at next.

Starting off with a large bowl and one cup of white granulated sugar.

 Add to that one cup of corn syrup, and of course you can use light or dark.

 Around here the golden corn syrup is cheaper, so that's what I'm using.

 Add to that 1 1 3 cups of creamy peanut butter, but of course you can use the crunchy peanut butter as well.

 Stir it together, then put it in the microwave and cook it on high for 2 minutes.

 Now if you'd like you can put this in a pot and you can cook it on the stove on medium low until everything is nicely melted together.

 Here it is out of the microwave after 2 minutes, and you can see how much more liquid it is.

 As you're stirring you shouldn't feel very much granulated sugar left.

 You might feel a little bit of grit in the bottom with your spoon, but most of it should be dissolved.

 Once you get to that consistency, add in 4 1 quarter cups of rice crispy cereal.

 Then add in about a half cup or a good sized handful of semi-sweet chocolate chips.

 Stir those around and of course they're going to melt because this is hot.

 Stir them until they're pretty much melted and the colour of the mixture changes to a chocolate colour.

 You can add in some chopped up peanut butter cups, about 6 of them, or you could use these miniature Reese's peanut butter cups.

 I put a few in right away, stirred it around gently, and those will start to melt right away.

 Then I scooped out with a cookie scoop and put them on a cookie sheet covered with a silicone mat.

 Now if you want to try to get whole ones in the mixture that you can see, I put one of those peanut butter cups in this scoop,

 then scooped up a portion, and as you can see, what you end up with is a peanut butter cup kind of sticking out.

 So each of the little mounds of rice crispy treat has a little visible peanut butter cup.

 There are others in there, they just melted and you can't see them, but you can most certainly taste them.

 I brought them to work and they disappeared in probably record time,

 and people came back later in the day wondering where the rest of them went because they wanted more.

 They taste just like a Reese's peanut butter cup with a little bit of crunch in them.

 Now for those of you that have been watching me for a while, you know that I have quite a few rice crispy based treats on my channel.

 Everything from Oreo cookies and cream rice crispy treats to watermelon look-alike treats,

 and I even have ones called tiger bars that have butterscotch in them.

 I put them all in a playlist, so if you want to see this playlist, click on your screen or see the link in the description box.

 I have a bunch of old audio cassettes which I never use anymore.

 And there's some recordings of things that I made when I was a kid.

 I was thinking of making those into mp3 files and then just getting rid of the tape cassettes.

 Because I don't really need to keep all these tape cassettes anymore.

 It looks to me like it's just a cheap Walkman type tape cassette player that has a USB port.

 So my ultimate goal is to not need any of my tape cassettes anymore.

 I actually do have Windows on a small partition just so I can play games.

 The HairMax Laser Comb is a patented, clinically proven, low level laser phototherapy medical

 The HairMax provides a safe and effective therapy you can use in the comfort and convenience

 The cordless HairMax Lux 9 and Professional 12 models are battery powered, allowing freedom

 To charge your HairMax Lux 9 or Pro 12, connect the power cord to the charging cradle and

 The charging cradle indicator will light up red during the charging.

 Within 2-3 hours, the charging cradle indicator will turn green, which means that the device

 You can also charge the HairMax by inserting the power cord directly into the device and

 The power button indicator on the HairMax will light up yellow during charging.

 When fully charged, the battery indicator light will turn green.

 To turn on the HairMax Lux 9 and Pro 12 models, press and hold the power button for 2-3 seconds.

 The laser button indicator will light up red, which means the laser is functioning.

 Place the HairMax flat on your scalp, making sure that both rows of teeth are touching

 The patented teeth mechanism parts the hair to ensure unobstructed delivery of the laser

 Advance a half inch every 4 seconds without lifting the device off your head.

 The HairMax Lux 9 and Pro 12 models have an audible beep function, which lets you know

 Move the HairMax slowly from the front of the scalp to the back of the head and then

 This time, starting at one side of the head and then combing through to the other side.

 Repeat these steps within the recommended 10 to 15 minutes of treatment, three times

 If you have long hair, use an ordinary comb or your fingers to lift the hair out of the

 way to allow the HairMax to deliver the laser energy to the scalp.

 When you are finished with your treatment, press and hold the power button down for 2

 Place the HairMax back into the charging cradle for easy storage.

 If the battery starts to lose power, the battery symbol within the information display will

 begin to flash and the battery indicator light on the HairMax will begin flashing red.

 If this should happen during your treatment, simply insert the power cord into the HairMax,

 plug it into an electrical wall outlet and continue with your treatment.

 When used as directed, most will start to see the benefits in as little as 12 weeks.

 Benefits can include hair growth, a decrease in shedding, and hair that is healthier, thicker

 Remember, the key to seeing the best results is to use the HairMax consistently 3 times

 To keep the laser window clean, make sure the device is unplugged and turned off.

 You can remove any hairs or dust from the HairMax teeth with a slightly moistened towel.

 For a more thorough cleaning, gently pull out the teeth from the center and wash using

 Dry completely and replace by inserting the top of the teeth first and then press the

 bottom of the teeth with your thumb until they click into place.

 Hello, this is John Kohler with discountjuicers.com and today I'll be giving you a demonstration

 If you want to zoom in here on the juicer here, I'm going to talk to you about that.

 It has a nice removable cover so it doesn't get dusty when it's sitting on your counter

 Large size for oranges and the smaller size for things like lemons and limes.

 So when it's clicked up, all the juice will stay in the reservoir until you put your cup

 And then you'll click that down and all of the juice will flow out for you.

 I'll use it here in just a second and I'll show you how easy it is to use.

 So the things that you can juice with the Citrus Star juicer are things from oranges,

 I prefer tangerine juice over orange juice because tangerines are only in season usually

 During the winter time, that's when I really do a lot of tangerines.

 And other times of the year, we always have the Valencia oranges.

 Now if you cut open a blood orange, it's nice and purple on the inside.

 So I usually do like one blood orange to a whole bunch of regular oranges.

 The blood oranges aren't necessarily as sweet as the regular oranges, but they're really

 So we're just going to pre-cut a couple of the Valencia oranges here in half.

 Now if you put this lever right here up, it'll hold all the juice inside of the machine.

 So you can see it got the orange really, really dry on the inside.

 Oranges and other citrus fruits are high in vitamin C. So they're really good.

 One of my favorite recipes to make actually with orange juice is a dressing.

 You can make a fresh salad dressing at home with just two ingredients.

 So all I do is I'll take some fresh orange juice, like I just made right here, and put

 And just blend up the orange juice with the nuts in a high-power blender such as a Vitamix

 Basically, I don't know, the macadamia nuts get pulverized into a cream and it's just

 Be sure to visit discountjuicers.com slash YouTube for some special promotional offers.

Today I'm going to be showing you how to make vegan cheesecake pops

 And yes, you did just see me try to find the pockets on my pants, and I couldn't and I failed miserably!

 So today I'm going to be showing you how to make vegan cheesecake pops.

 DIY Pinterest you wish you had this maybe you already have this

 I'm not going to bother to look little egg carton that we are going to be putting as a mold

For this recipe, I was trying to think of what cream cheese substitute

 Should I use and I really didn't have to think very long or very hard because tofutti was clearly the answer

 No gluten all delicious, so this is going to be the cream cheese substitute for our vegan cream cheese cheesecake pops

 You will be needing tofutti better than cream cheese cream cheese

 2 3rds of a cup of vegan cane sugar and then for taste and decoration pretzel sticks

 Combine all of your ingredients in your food processor or blender

 You're looking for a consistency close to this now once I was done blending it up

 I found that it wasn't quite thick enough as I wanted it to be so I added some xanthan gum

 And I also added a little bit of coconut butter because both of those things

 Especially combined are going to help to make it a little bit thicker now

 How are we going to eat these little suckers don't we want something to be able to hold on to them with well you would be

They're good for having little mini sword fights and for using as the holders for our cheesecake pops

 So you just sprinkle Graham crackers in the middle of each one of your little egg holes that are now cheesecake holes

 Cheesecake mixture and drop little tiny bombs of happiness into each one of your cheesecake holders

 You should then put Graham crackers on top and chocolate on top

 Then you start putting too many chocolate chips on top, but then you realize how silly that sounds too many chocolate chips

 I think these are really fun because sometimes you don't want to eat a whole slice of cheesecake

 This is encouraging portion control, and it's really fun for kids

 So this would be great for a kid's birthday party or this would even be great for like a summer party something

 That's just cool and refreshing that you can bring and it's a fun little twist on a classic cake pop

 It tastes like cheesecake the lemon gives it that tart little zing that cheesecake has I am really not wishing that I was eating

 It's absolutely delicious, and you get a little fun pretzel stick to munch on as well

 And if you want to check out more tofutti products you can go over to their website at tofutti.com

 Also like me on Facebook follow me on Twitter and Instagram and for more recipes and reviews you can check out my official website

Oh, yeah, but hey what's better than dancing with one tofutti pop two tofutti pops

 I'm going to show you guys how to make my red velvet protein pudding.

 Take out a blender and the first ingredient you're going to add into it is a fourth a cup or two ounces of

 You could use regular milk or another milk substitute such as almond rice or soy milk

 Another thing I should mention is if you don't have a good mini blender

 I do post a link in the description below to the exact one that I'm using

 It's only around $30 shift and a great investment for your kitchen

 Next we're going to add in two tablespoons or 24 grams of chia seeds

 Chia seeds are a great source of fiber with 5 grams for every 60 calories

 Cocoa powder is also a great source of fiber with 2 grams for every 10 calories

 2 thirds a serving which is around 29 grams of a red velvet cake mix and

 One container which is 5.3 ounces or 150 grams of a fat-free vanilla Greek yogurt

 Now you're just gonna blend everything together for a couple minutes

 Once you're done blending it put it in the fridge for around 20 to 30 minutes so it can thicken up a bit more and

 As far as the calories go in the whole recipe there's 510 10 grams of fat

 So basically if you put it in the fridge for a bit and let it thicken up

 It tastes like I would imagine a red velvet soft-serve ice cream would taste like

 So I'm gonna go ahead and put this in the fridge for a bit and let it thicken up

 I'm gonna go ahead and put this in the fridge for a bit and let it thicken up

 Absolutely delicious something I like to recommend every now and then is if you don't have a good kitchen scale

 The one I'm using only costs around $20 a ship does grams and ounces and will last you forever

 So there are two things off about this video and the first two people to guess what they are in the comments below

 Please go ahead and give me a thumbs up it motivates me to keep making these if you haven't already subscribed and you'd like to

 You can click right there on the screen coming out by subscribing

 I'll get an email every week telling you I upload a new video comments or suggestions go down below

 Hello everyone, my name is Glenda Sparling with Sure-Fit Designs and today

 I'm going to start a short mini series on looking at how our shoulder lines

 square shoulder, a slope shoulder or some of you might have a forward thrusting

Obviously this isn't going to occur with everybody but the first thing

 me give you a visual we're going to use Miss Molly Mannequin here and take a

 the earlobe or just behind the earlobe a line would come down being the top of

 line should sit and the front of the garment should lay nice and smooth.

 square shouldered person your shoulder bone is going to raise up higher than

And the best way for me to show you this is to actually tuck a shoulder

 pad in here like this and then I'll just reposition this bodice.

 when you have a square shoulder and you can see how much higher that is than

 this side, you get drag lines that go from center front up to the shoulder

Now we need to smooth that shoulder line out for you and here's a very very

 easy way to test how much you need to change the shoulder slope on your

 finger there that indicates to you what you need to raise or how much you need

Up here on the wall I have the Sure-Fit Designs Master Pattern and when

 you will have drawn out your body blueprint for your unique body shape and

 first line that you do draw but it becomes your stitching line.

 cut it out and sew it together you need to add seam allowances.

 very easily with the Designing Stylus and that becomes your dotted line on the

 demonstration I don't want to get you confused with having a lot of different

 lines there so I'm going to use just one solid blue line going around to show you

 going to do is measure up a half an inch, make a little dot and then I'm going to

 connect that new shoulder point to the neck point in that fashion.

 have raised the shoulder point up a half an inch I also need to raise up the

But you must raise up your underarm the same amount and the reason

 that you want to do that is so that when you set your sleeve in place you don't

 I'm going to talk to you for a minute or two about one of the most basic but important

 components of the drinks we mix here at Little Branch, and that is fresh squeezed juice.

 It's very easy to go out to the store and buy the juices if you're making some drinks

 at home for some friends or a party, but for the extra few minutes it takes you to juice

 Using some fresh lime or lemon, orange or grapefruit, or depending on your local market,

 we use a farmer's market apple cider, we don't even have to juice ourselves, we just

 You can use any of these things to definitely improve the content of your cocktail.

 I was kind of popularized by Dale DeGroff at the Rainbow Room, and then really took

 off with the cocktail renaissance and my mentor Sasha Petraski at Milk and Honey, and then

 The reason it's so important to use freshly squeezed juice is for flavor, essentially.

 You can argue against the preservatives and additives and whatnot, what you can't argue

 against is the fact that this juice tomorrow will taste like old juice.

 We all know what that tastes like because it comes out of the plastic lemon you buy

 The difference between this and that is it's fresh squeezed and has no additives and preservatives,

 And it will still taste fresh for four, six, eight, ten hours, so you can squeeze it all

 In fact, taste tests have shown that it's generally more appreciated four hours after

 I would recommend using some kind of press rather than your rotary juice squeezer because

 the press also releases some of the essential oils from the skin in the fruit, which I think

 make a really important component to the flavor of your drinks.

This here clip, take it off the back first, tip it forward, comes right

Now you want to take this fuel line and pull it towards the back.

 that goes forward like that because that goes inside the fitting and what it does is it

 stops the fuel line from going anywhere because it hits the little ridge on the inside of

 The red carpet and runways often dictate our beauty trends and something that's huge at

 So I'm Cherie from Rescue TV and today I've got Michael Brown who is a makeup expert and

 you are going to show me how to use them and the different ways that they come.

 I mean lashes like you said, huge trend at the moment, you know from different styles

 of lashes and I think you know once again if you have that false lash effect, you know

 that kind of fluttery lash, it's very feminine, very sexy and almost you don't need any other

 eye shadow because the lashes are bolder, they're bigger and plus the eye looks more

 So it's quite an easy look but it's the application of the actual false lash.

 Well we have different types of lashes from the traditional strip lashes which you can

 You can get half size, you can get full feathers now but obviously for a more daily wear, it's

 Now these are great, you know like over the years I've used them a lot for bridal or for

 just really simple flicks on the edge which means it kind of fills the lashes in the little

 gaps you may have between them which is great for like one or two or you can do a full strip

 But it's quite easy because you just dip the little end, the little bubble of them

 So if you're starting out, maybe going with the single lashes is your best bet to begin

 The flares are great because as long as that glue is on the little bubble where the hairs

 join, it's just basically sticking them right where the edge of your skin and lash join.

 So it's quite simple to do and whether you want one or two as a simple flick or a full

 Now there's many different glues and most lashes when you buy the lash has glue with

 But one of my favorite brands is Duo because I know it's never going to come off.

 Nothing more tackier than seeing a girl out on a Saturday night and the lashes flicking

 So tiny bit of glue just on the palm and tweezers are great because they're easy to remove them

 But there are brands like Shu Uemura for example that actually has a lash applicator which

 So I can actually dip the end of that into the glue and then use that part of it to run

 So I'm just going to use these half strips rather than a full strip for you.

 So for example, if I get the lash and if I just run that glue on the very tip, don't

 want to heavily apply too much glue because the more glue there, the longer it takes to

 And then with the other side, this applicator is actually curved the same shape as your

 Now with the edge of your eyelashes, that's where you want the lash strip to finish.

 Now the glue might be visible for you and you're thinking, oh that big white strip.

 You can buy some other brands that actually do come invisible anyway.

 Already you're opening your eyes and the difference is quite amazing.

 So you should be able to see much more fullness and a slight elongation and wing with that

 eye compared to Cherie's normal eyelashes that she has every day.

 So sometimes if you haven't got it perfectly onto the lid of the eye, sometimes you can

 Plus it also just gives that fullness I guess to the lash and that classic Audrey Hepburn

 So with a liquid, there's different styles from the pen, even to the pot, which of course

 you have to use with a little brush, which is quite easy as well.

 So adding the winged eyeliner, should we be doing it when we're wearing eyeshadow as well

 You can still do the liquid liner before you apply the false lash, just to get that line.

 And sometimes it's easier for a guide, so when the lashes go on, you can see the line.

 I mean, today you're wearing a very simple beige on the lid and the lash is giving that

 And my finishing touch will be the eyeliner, just to get that solid and fullness again

 So if you close for me, there's no right or wrong whether you start inner first or outer

 first, as long as you feel comfortable with it and obviously your own hand, whether you're

 But for me, I like to start on the inner corner and very gently, it's almost like joining

 So if there's any little dots or there's anything there, you won't be able to see the join basically.

 And then I like to go this way, just to get the tick happening and right under the lash.

 Now the thicker you do that, the more the brush is on diagonal, so you get a bit more

 And that means now, the lashes actually have a bit more of a base, plus the fullness of

 Amazing and I'm definitely going to wear this one, practice at home with false eyelashes,

It's a green juice that will help you to melt fat, lose weight, and

 your lymphatic system all cleaned out, and it is going to provide nutrients,

 I'm going to make a breakfast juice, I'm going to make a lunchtime juice and I'm going to make a juice for the evening.

 So I'm going to go ahead and make the first juice which is apple and orange.

Fresh, citrusy and really good in the morning as well to wake you up.

So I'm going to be snacking on that while I make the rest of them.

 Next up is the big lunchtime juice and I like a green juice at this time.

 It's amazing kale which has protein, calcium, amino acids, phytonutrients.

 I have some of that today and I really like the aniseed flavour of fennel.

 Also I'm trying to keep a balance between the alkaline, which are the vegetables, and the acid.

 Which I struggle with a bit because I've got a sweet tooth and I find it hard to drink the pure vegetable juices.

 But using the watermelon, which is kind of fruit and vegetable in my opinion, kind of gives me that balance.

 But it's more than palatable and that will keep me going throughout the day.

 But you have a blender, blend your fruits and vegetables to a pulp and then put them in a piece of muslin or a nut milk bag and squeeze the juice out.

 And for the evening I'm going to have watermelon and mint juice.

 And mint, even though it's a stimulant, it's a herb so it's healing and also for the evening time it's relaxing.

 I wish you could smell the smelling here, it's just amazing, it's just fresh and healthy smelling.

 I got inspired to make this watermelon juice watching The Nut Six, watching her video.

 I'm going to try and get these three amazing bottles of watermelon juice.

 I've got my apple and orange juice for breakfast with extra for brunch.

 If you can tell me how much juice I've got, that's 650ml, that's 350ml, there's about 500ml there and that much and that much.

 If you can sort of work out how much juice that is for the day.

 And you'll also need to be drinking lots of water to keep hydrated and herbal tea if you like that to keep warm.

 Any questions, leave them in the comments and I will endeavour to answer them.

 in Brazil with Skull Cerveza and I have a couple more shows left, but I want to teach

 chord is a G and I guess off the top, the riff on this song is like a... I don't know

 how I would explain that, but it starts right here in this chord, this note.

 to the C, it's the same riff again, to the G. And then when it changes to the chorus

 it goes to an E, to an F, to the G. And that's like the whole song, so we'll try it.

 What you know about love, you said I'd never be, you said you were my girlfriend, some

 girl you turned out to be, well I guess you know about leaving, loving and leaving me.

 Well you left me for no reason, but you left me for a reason, you said you'd never be,

 can stumble, but you can't drown in your sorrow, cause you might be found, you might be found

 C to G in the riff right here, and then E, F to G for the choruses.

 at one of the shows, and maybe in the water too, the waves have been great in Brazil.

 And the Thermador professional gas cooktop with 18,000 BTUs in every one of the star

 Now obviously 18,000 BTUs is going to help you bring water to a boil in a nanosecond.

 But what about when you want to melt just a little bit of butter in a tiny little pan?

 These burners have such great control, you'll never burn even the smallest pan.

 Now there's some tips that are really important to take into account when you cook with this

 So my rule of thumb is when I'm ready to start cooking, I heat my pans on moderate heat.

 I add my oil, maybe a little bit of butter, and then I gently layer the food in.

 Now when you have a recipe that asks you to brown the chicken breasts, it's really important

 to let the pan just be at a moderate temperature because you don't want black chicken breasts

 and you don't want a lot of debris that sticks to the bottom of the pan.

 Now many people prefer to cook fish in a nonstick pan because they're afraid the fish is so

 By heating the pan over moderate heat, I was able to get a fabulous sear on the fish and

 One of my favorite demonstrations to do on the Thermador Professional Cooktop is to cook

 one cup of rice on an 18,000 BTU burner and show my clients how we have absolutely no

 The key is once you've added the rice to the boiling water, set the burner to simmer.

 And after about 15 minutes, you're going to see a fair bit of steam come out of the pot

 and then you're going to reduce the temperature down to the lowest extra low setting.

 When you set it on the lowest setting, the burner will be on for 7 seconds, it will turn

 Not only will it finish cooking the rice to perfection, I can actually hold foods on extra

 When you remove the fire from underneath the pan, you don't evaporate the liquids.

 The sequential burner is just keeping the cast iron components hot enough to keep the

 When cooking with high heat burners, I'm more comfortable using silicone handled utensils.

 That way I don't have to worry about the wood or metal getting too hot if it's accidentally

 I also like to use pans that have a silicone grip so I don't have to pick up old pans with

 By following these tips when using Thermador's powerful star-shaped burners, cooking will

 You can use green grapes but it looks prettier with the purple.

 When you get a crack you put your finger in and pull the shell apart.

Today is February 10th and it's almost Valentine's Day so I thought it would be the perfect time to make a Valentine date night sort of makeup look.

 I want this look to be a little bit more dramatic than anything you would wear on an everyday basis

 but at the same time not too much because you really don't want to scare your Valentine's date off.

I do have an image in my head of like how I sort of want it to look

 because the name is just perfect for Valentine's Day and I'm sorry if the lighting keeps changing again.

 Today I am using one studio light and one window and I feel like the light has already changed a lot

 on so I put my foundation, concealer, powder and also my eyebrows on to save a little bit of time.

 I pulled my blinder down to sort of cover some of the window but hopefully this will make it look a

 To make sure that your eyeshadow won't move at any unexpected time during your date

 the palette and I'm just going to apply that all over my lid going all the way up to the brow.

 Next I'm taking this sort of camel color and I'm just going to add that in the crease as a

Next I'm taking this dark brown color and the purple color which are both

 matte and I'm just going to start applying that in the crease as well focusing on the outer part

Just taking the brown color this time I am just going to dot that in the outer

 Then I'm going to take this really shimmery bronze color and I'm just going to pat that all over my

We obviously need some pink in this look since it's Valentine's Day and all so I'm just

 for our lid and I'm applying that in my inner corner and I'm also blending that into the lid

 the outer corner as well to add some further depth and I'm also pulling that down to the lower lash

 doing is I'm taking a pencil eyeliner and I am starting to create a wing and then later on I'm

 just going to blend away with a dense brush and I'm just going to do this for a while because it

 takes a long time when you want to make a smoky eyeliner because you really have to blend a lot

 and then fill it in a little bit more and then blend some more and then I actually added some

 on my lower lash line as well to make this look a little bit more dramatic.

 Now I am adding a really light concealer to sharpen up the look to make it look more clean

 and also to just remove any fallout and make myself look a little bit less tired.

 the concealer with my Rimmel Stay Matte powder before I am going to bronze my face and I'm using

 my NYC Sunny Bronzer with a big fluffy brush and I'm just applying that in my or under my cheekbones

 and all over my face to give myself a little bit of color and then it is time for blush and I love

This is the limited edition NARS blush that is called Boys Don't Cry.

 scary in the pan but it is so gorgeous if you use a light hand.

 bottom lash mascara to my bottom lashes while my eyelash glue is drying up on my eyelashes and I

 decided to use my Demi Wispy eyelashes today because I think they're perfect for this look.

 They are not too overly dramatic but they still give your eyelashes an extra oomph.

 and I am blending them in with my Real Natural lashes with a mascara from the body shop and then

 I am taking this lipstick from Bare Minerals and I like all the products in the down bar but I think

 this color is perfect for this look as well because it ties everything together very nicely.

 too much but it still makes your lips look a little bit better and more romantic if you will.

 would turn out because it didn't turn out quite as I had imagined in my head but I still definitely

 think it turned out to be a great Valentine's date makeup look.

 had a Valentine's date but I don't so I will probably just have like a cozy night in like a

 girls night with my friends but if I were to go on a date I would definitely wear something like this.

 I really hope you guys got some inspiration if you are going on a Valentine's date or even if

 you're just going to like dinner with your friends or something like that.

 not too much but really beautiful colored lips and I definitely like how this turned out.

 guys like it too then please give me a big thumbs up so I know or just leave me any feedback in the

Also don't forget to subscribe if you haven't already for more videos on my

 channel and I hope you'll have an amazing Valentine's day with your loved ones, your friends,

I really hope you will have a great day and celebrate the day of

 Usually when I make almond milk, I add considerably more water.

 So usually, when I'm doing almond milk to drink, I'd have the almonds there and water

 But I'm going to cut that in half and just do about 12 ounces of water.

 This is an ice cream base, so I'm giving it quite a bit of sweetening.

 I'm going to take a shortcut and just press the whole juice button.

 Now that I have my condensed almond milk made, I only need 8 ounces for the ice cream.

 I'm using a quarter cup of instant coffee and sugar or Stevia, agave nectar, whatever

 I'm going to be putting this in the freezer for about 2-3 hours and serving it up after

 two cups of self-raising flour, 55 grams of cold butter, a teaspoon of baking powder,

 half a teaspoon of salt, a quarter pint of milk, one egg and then some dried mixed fruit

The first thing you want to do is you want to heat your oven to guess

 mark 6 or 205 degrees Celsius or 400 degrees Fahrenheit and then you want to grease and

 flour a baking dish but I have one of these which is a reusable non-stick mat so I'm just

 going to place this down, it's a lot easier but if you don't have one of these then a

Once you've done that you want to add your butter to the mixture

 and this is 55 grams of butter, the butter has to be cold so I'm just going to cube it

 add your baking powder, one teaspoon of baking powder and then half a teaspoon of salt and

 sure that all the butter is completely combined until the flour resembles fine breadcrumbs.

 Try and be as quick as you can with this because you don't want the flour to go warm with the

Once it resembles fine breadcrumbs you want to add your milk so using a butter

 knife just make a well in the middle and then pour in enough milk.

 dough, so until you get a pliable dough just keep stirring the milk.

 forgot the fruit then so you can add your fruit in at this point as well.

 you just want to move it out of the way and get a bit of flour.

You don't want to be touching the dough too much because you don't want

So as you can see I'm just kind of making it, bringing it all together.

Now don't be tempted to keep rolling it and rolling it because otherwise

 a rolling pin and just roll it out until it gets to about 2cm thick.

 to move this over to my dish here and just set it there for now.

 get a cracker egg and a bit of milk like that and just give that a little stir.

 Now these are ready to go into the oven so you want to put them in the oven for about

 Hi, I'm Suzanne McNeil with Design Originals and today I'm here with Anna Bomdach and she

 So my technique is based on creating color and shape with layers and cuts.

 The trick is to not stay limited to this range but to really use the color and the shape

 The trick is to not stay limited to this range but to really use the color and the

 If I'm not totally pleased with it, I want one more petal over here, for example.

 And so instantly, if I get my registration right, I line up my corners.

 And I'm just going to follow the line of the silhouette to determine my interior shape.

 It's a little bit like cutting snowflakes when you were a child.

 And the good news is that when I'm done with this, I will also have an additional star.

 So if you're really careful, you can save your shapes and add them to the design somehow.

 But I'm just going to put that down to show you how the layers get built.

 And again, if you get the registration right, I use my bonisher here.

 This is actually a printing baron, which is used for linoleum block printing, but I find it works very well here.

 So you're building shapes by subtracting them from paper and saving.

 But here you'll see that by cutting out, you create further shapes, such as this here where I made this stationary folio.

 But each time you cut out a shape, you've created a new stencil for further patterning.

 So this is a sampling of some of the projects that you could expect to do in this book, Simply Paper Cutting.

 That includes a hanging wine tag, gift tag, a gift card presentation folder, a half of a cake skirt, which you can wrap around the base of a cake stand, place cards with designs on them.

 And there are all samples of how to create these from total scratch in this book, including patterns, step-by-step photography, and very detailed instructions.

 And in the very front of the book, for those who are intimidated by the thought of using a craft knife, is every technique, very simplified practice, hands-on, so that you can learn every basic cut, which results in even the most complex cuts.

 Hey everyone, it's Erro from Home Sweet Apartment and today I'm going to give you a little tutorial

 So without further ado, I'm going to throw my hair up into a very sexy bun and we're

 Alright, so as some of you know and some of you may not know, I'm actually a big fan of

 I kind of got back into reading with the Divergent series after nursing school and everything

 I had no time in nursing school to read books for enjoyment and then even after I did another

 course on like neonatal resuscitation, so I just had no time to read things for pleasure.

 And then I discovered the Divergent series and I absolutely fell in love with it.

 So I got these really cool tattoos from online and I thought it was a really cool Divergent

 tattoo and I wanted to do some research and figure out how I could make a temporary tattoo

 So I looked it up and there are several ways to do it and I'm going to show you guys the

 most popular method and I'll show you what the results are to see if this actually does

 So without further ado, we're going to get a little Divergent up in here and we're going

 So obviously follow the directions of the temporary tattoo that you'll be using.

 So first what you're going to do is wipe the area with rubbing alcohol and allow it to

 So I'm going to put this on my left collarbone and I've got some rubbing alcohol.

 So I just showered, as you can see with my glorious wet hair and my pajamas that I'm

 And so I'm clean and I don't put any lotion on or anything like that after I shower.

 And then you want to go ahead and use the rubbing alcohol and we're going to let it

 So first thing I did was pick a spot that won't get too heavily used, like your hands

 So I picked a good spot, I used the rubbing alcohol, my skin was clear of lotions and

 Now I'm pressing down the tattoo when I remove the protective layer and now I'm just using

 Now the other method is you can do the baby powder and then do hairspray, which I was

 tempted to do, but I thought I would try the liquid bandage and we'll see how it works.

 So anyways, this is just a quick little tutorial of how this temporary tattoo can last a little

 bit longer and I'll let you guys know if it's successful or not.

 So yeah, I'll probably make a little separate update about how this works and how long it

 So today I'm going to be breaking down how to perform a muscle up.

 And now for a normal pull up we tend to position ourselves right underneath the bar as shown.

 But for a muscle up we take about a foot step back until our arms are about in 45 degree

 So now I'm going to step forward and show you guys how a standard pull up is performed.

 So you pull yourself up until your arms are bent at about 90 degree angle and only your

 So for muscle up training you pull yourself up even higher than that so that the bar reaches

 eye to eye with your chest and preferably with the bottom of your chest.

 So after you've gotten comfortable with those types of pull ups it's time to learn the driving

 And what I'm doing here is demonstrating how momentum carries your body when grabbing the

 So that's just a natural swing that occurs because of the shifting weight.

 So it's precisely at this point where you want to pull yourself up as hard as you can

 Just like we said, stepping a foot behind the bar and this is directly underneath the

 Now I spoke of kicking your legs up and it's sort of like an ab crunch that you do.

 So you're doing this motion, just kicking up with both knees but as fast as you can

 So you guys can give this a try if you like and let me know how it feels.

 So here at the top we have the elements of the pull up that we discussed and as well

 It really helps the channel get noticed and I'll see you guys in the next video.

 Hi guys how's it going welcome to my virgin kitchen now some of you guys are likely to

 have kids and if you don't have a kid that doesn't matter you still know what a kid is

 right so that's all good so we've got some staying over for tea tonight well in fact

 two of them the other two live with us unfortunately nothing really we can do about that and one

 thing they always crave when they stay over for tea is a happy meal from mcdonalds they

 always seem to go for the chicken nugget ones and to be fair to mcdonalds a couple of years

 ago chicken nuggets didn't really contain that much chicken and they've got a lot better

 in recent times but i'm gonna make my own homemade one today the only thing i can't

 really give them is a toy so i'll just give them a jaeger bomb something like that so

 we're gonna do some cornflake chicken nuggets a wicked healthy strawberry milkshake and

 some sweet potato chips well maybe some chuck some normal ones in there as well but they'll

 be baked and they'll be gorgeous yummy easy quick fun tasty and all that stuff and the

 kids hopefully they're gonna like it let's go so i forgot to tell you the ingredients

 i'm getting ahead of myself hit pause now and write them all down if you want to make

 this which we really hope you will get your kids involved in all that stuff i've got 400

 grams of strawberries which i've snipped off the green stalky bit there i've been a bit

 lazy i could have just pulled it off but i cut it and added the little bits myself good

 strawberries i've got a banana here which there's no skin on that right there you've

 seen me do the whole banana phone thing before but yeah it's like a banana phone that's been

 shaved kind of like the new slimmer version i don't know and this is one litre of semi

 skimmed milk so that's all good one litre of semi skimmed milk you could use full fat

 milk if you want but you'd add more fat content why would you want to do that or you could

 go for the old skimmed milk or the zero fat milk they call it now completely up to you

 or if you've got a cow in your garden just straight out the udder straight out the udder

 into the blender so that that blender right there is where all the ingredients are going

 right now alright so there is my blender and i've got my banana cut it into four slices

 i don't know why because the blender should hack through that really that is your sole

 purpose in life blender chop things up but i'm helping it so anyhow let's get the strawberries

 in there as well yep just finishing loading those up now and last but not least we just

 pour our milk i'm doing that a lot aren't i i'm doing that a lot sorry get our milk

 straight onto that so in here is just over a litre of milk probably stop about there

 that'll do wow you see that sort of bobbed up then looking good i've got a little bit

 of milk left for myself all we've got to do now get the lid on whizz away right then folks

 i'll put you back there because this is a bit of a temperamental blender when i whizz

 it up like that it could spray i kind of wanted to say a different word then but i'm not even

 going to go that way but it could just coat you in it ok not good here we go oh my goodness

 that is looking pink it's thick it's pinker than a very pink blimongi candy floss thing

Alright just want to show you how thick that milkshake is the banana has really done

 that to be honest and i've spilled it a little bit don't worry let's just have a quick cheeky

 taste of that and make sure it's ok for the kids oh yeah i'm liking that fresh feels good

 you can add sugar and naughty stuff like that if you wanted to get your kids to try that

 fridge it was challenged so what i did was finish off the milk in the carton and filled

 it up with our new milkshake kind of cool huh so we're gonna whack that in the fridge

 now it fits and it's gonna be super chilled ready for the kids.

 chicken nuggets i've got some chicken breasts here that are just in little funky cubes gonna

 baptise it in some eggs this is egg white and yolk that's been beaten together little

 egg wash there's three eggs i used there if you're interested and then we just roll it

 straight into the cornflake mixture like so so it should all hug it like so and you can

 double dunk it if you wanted to completely up to you and boom straight on a tray like

 so and there are our cornflake nuggets so i'm gonna do that to all our chicken it's

 cornflake chicken nuggets all done looking darn good they smell like cornflakes though

 to be fair at the minute but they're gonna go in the fridge and i'm gonna work on my

 chips before we whack it all in the oven and then the kids arrive.

 are the potatoes i'm using for our chips basically we've got a sweet potato it's gonna be a nice

 orangey colour and your classic normal potato for standard chips really it's just what would

 be kind of cool like cheap laughs and all that stuff for the kids so yeah all i'm gonna

 do is give them a wash skin them and then cut them into chip shapes and i've got about

 three of each so ooh my voice is going bleh i've got three of each so i've got a bit of

 and white theme kind of like a traffic cone if you're here in the uk and you know what

 that is our traffic cones are generally orange and white that's the only thing i can think

 of right now so all i'm gonna do is chuck them into the mixing bowl like so add a teeny

 bit of olive oil and just a smidgen of ground black pepper not too much because i've got

 to remember they're kids and they're gonna be like what have you done so i don't want

 in there i've got to say i pat dried the white potatoes just to get some of that starch off

 all good i'm just gonna put on about a tablespoon and a half of olive oil and then grind on

 about a teaspoon only of black pepper just like that obviously if your kids have got

 a much better tolerance for it go to town on it i certainly would and then just grab

 a little spatula or wooden spoon or get your hands in there if you want and just coat it

 all around get it all nice and covered in the oil and yeah some of them try and escape

 done they're just laying in that tray waiting to be baked so to speak so we'll preheat our

 oven any minute now and i've got two of the kids with us now hello little chloe say hello

 so anyhow two out of the four are here let's put them in the oven.

 oven is preheated to the temperature just down the bottom there chicken nuggets going

 first they go in for 45 minutes in total about half an hour the chips will take and they'll

 go on the top shelf so we'll get the majority of the heat so let's close it up 45 minutes

 nuggets half an hour chips flip them over halfway through and we'll be all together.

 Right guys it's been 45 minutes and it's time to get a gastropub feel so rather than a happy

 meal bag and stuff i've got a chopping board for the kids to have it on cool huh?

 gonna get their milkshake in a glass like that chicken nuggets like so wow they smell

 amazing and just finish off by putting a couple of those multicoloured chips just there maybe

 a little pot of ketchup would go a miss there amazingly good hopefully the kids will like

Right then folks i've been talking about kids being here the whole video and they do

 exist honest here they are we've got jack alright gangnam style jack we've got ben who's

 putting his hands in the milkshake crazy kid chloe hello little chloe and phoebe alright

 yeah you alright so can i tell you a secret those chicken nuggets they have got cornflakes

 on them jack do they taste good amazing do you like them what are you thinking ben like

 them you like them that's good yeah cool chloe you just wanna eat and smile all good so just

 a bit of fun guys ultimately if i can make that absolutely anyone in the world can have

 a go for yourself let me know how you get on and i'll see you again next time i guess

 bye say bye gangnam style bye then i don't know what that means bye.

 the video guys really hope you enjoyed it if you did give it a thumbs up and subscribe

 please that would be for the kids it would make them happy and smile and stuff they really

 enjoyed the food too which is ultimately what it was all about over there on the right hand

 side is the last video i made eggs benedict which my friends is stonkingly easy and i

 stonkingly stonkingly good give it a go and i'll see you again soon bye bye

 Today we'll be making Yorkshire Puddings, a golden, crispy, perfect accompaniment to

 Start off by preheating your oven to about 200 degrees Celsius, and placing a couple

 of teaspoons of oil into the bottom of each well in a muffin pan.

 If using the recipe I mentioned already, with two eggs, then it'll make about 8 puddings,

 Place the tray into the oven, and allow it to heat up, and then whisk the eggs and milk

 Add in the flour bit by bit, continuing to whisk well, and then set aside.

 Once the oil has been in the hot oven for about 20 minutes, take out the pan, and spoon

 out batter into each muffin well, filling it about one third of the way up.

 Allow to bake for about 20 to 25 minutes, until well risen and golden brown.

 You should try to coincide the finishing of the cooking of the puddings with the finishing

 of the rest of your dinner, because these will not reheat very well at all.

 Serve up hot and crisp from the oven, with your choice of meat, vegetables and gravy,

 I hope you've enjoyed watching this video today, and I hope it's helpful to you.

 If it is, please feel free to leave a comment and subscribe to my YouTube channel.

 Today we're going to be making a quick and healthy breakfast frittata.

 This super simple breakfast dish has become a staple for me over the past few months.

 First, we'll turn the broiler on in our oven and move the rack to the second highest position.

 Today we're going to be using curry powder, spinach, onion, turkey kolbasa, corn, whole

 You can use pretty much whatever you want, feel free to experiment.

 You want to use a high quality non-stick pan and be sure to get it to medium high heat

 Now I'll just give this a quick mix before we toss in our corn.

 We'll cook this for a good two to three minutes before we add our spinach.

 I'm just going to cover this for about a minute just to wilt the spinach.

 I usually eyeball it here, but that's about a cup, maybe a cup and a half of egg whites.

 Now what we need to do is give this a good initial stir just to spread the ingredients

 So I usually let it cook for about 20 seconds and scrape around the edges.

 We'll do this for about two minutes until it looks like it's about 75% cooked.

 Now we'll pop this in the broiler for about three to five minutes.

 So we're just going to slide this out of the pan, try not to break it, and we're going

 I'm going to portion mine out to four quarters and throw them in the fridge to have for breakfast

 Remember, if you're putting these in the fridge, make sure to keep the lid off until they're

 A quick and easy breakfast frittata, high in protein, low in fat, some greens and some

 Don't forget to subscribe to our channel for more videos coming soon.

 Harvest stuffing bread combines the warm hearty taste of stuffing with the terrific flavor

 This is a batter bread, so your electric mixer will do the work.

 In a large bowl, combine two cups of all-purpose flour, one tablespoon of sugar, one envelope

 of undissolved Fleischmann's rapid rise yeast, two tablespoons of instant minced onions,

 one tablespoon of parsley flakes, one and a half teaspoons of poultry seasoning, and

 Now heat one and one-fourth cup of water and one tablespoon of butter or margarine until

 Now turn the batter into a greased one and one-half quart casserole dish.

 Cover the casserole dish and let it rise in a warm, draft-free place until it doubles

 To promote rising, place it over a bowl of boiling water and cover it with a towel.

 When the dough is ready, brush one beaten egg on the top of the loaf.

 Now we'll sprinkle it with one teaspoon of minced onions and a half teaspoon of whole

 If you're using a glass casserole dish, as I am, you'll want to bake it at 350 degrees.

 Once it's done baking, cool the bread for 10 minutes in the casserole dish.

 The savory flavors of Harvest Stuffing Bread will instantly remind you of a crisp fall

 Use it for turkey sandwiches and you'll have a hearty meal that's delicious any time of

 Hey guys, this is Kat from 3 Kids and Us blog and I'm in my kitchen with the Tassimo Specialty

 Over here I have all the tea discs on this nice little carousel so I can store them easily.

 Now there's a lot of different beverages you can make with this.

It's really, really dark and it's rich compared to the Keurig which is a powder.

 start with the espresso and it goes face down so that it can read this barcode and it dispenses

 can see it has an LCD screen over here and it tells you exactly what you need to do.

 dispensed right now and on the screen it is starting to rise and it should be done here

There's a button right here you can add more water as long as you need to

 to make it a weaker coffee or you can leave it as is and keep it at the recommended strength.

 Hi, my name is Julie and today we're going to talk about how to measure yourself.

 Now, to keep in mind when you're measuring, you're looking for three basic measurements.

 Before we get started, it's important to talk about what undergarments you're wearing when you measure.

 Again, we're looking for the most accurate and close to the skin measurement as possible.

 First, if you do have a bra and underwear, go ahead and just leave that on with your measurement.

 If you're having someone else measure you, it might be helpful to wear a spaghetti strap or a thin layer shirt and leggings like I am.

 But again, keep in mind we want the closest measurement to the skin.

 Take your small tape measure here and you want to open it up and make sure that you start on the one.

 If you start on the opposite end, you're going to get wrong measurements and that will cause problems in the future.

 So be sure that you start with the number one on your tape measure.

 What we're going to do is you're going to take the tape measure and you're going to pull it around the fullest part of your bust,

 keeping in mind that you want the back of the tape measure to be perfectly straight.

 Now if you are wearing a heavily padded bra, it is important if that's not what you're going to wear in your gown,

 to go ahead and change to a bra similar to what you would wear for your undergarment under your gown.

 If you don't have a garment to change to, you can just pull the tape a little bit tighter, again, to get that closest measurement to your actual size.

 Okay, once you've got the bust measurement down, we're going to move on to your waist measurement.

 For some of you, it will be very easy to find where your waist measurement is.

 So what we're going to do is you're going to take your hands and just follow the curve of your body.

 Generally, it will be under your ribcage and above your belly button.

 So go ahead and just move your fingers along the curve of your body until you find the smallest part.

 Be sure you're starting with the one and pull your tape measure down nice and tight around your waist.

 Now if you are measuring yourself with a t-shirt like I am, you're going to want to pull a little tighter.

 Again, we're looking for that accurate, close-to-body measurement.

 Now it's important when you're measuring yourself not to suck in.

 You want to be sure that you're comfortable, especially for a bridal or a bridesmaid's dress.

 So you want to make sure that you're getting the closest fit, but also a fit that you'll feel comfortable in all day.

 So when you pull it around your waist, be sure that you feel comfortable breathing at that measurement,

 Once you've gotten your waist measurement, we're going to move on to the hip.

 Go ahead and down the curvature of your body until you get to the fullest part of your hip.

 Take the measurement again, starting at the one, and pull it around the curve of your hip.

 Now sometimes the hip measurement is tricky and difficult to find.

 So if you need to do a few different measurements, kind of move it up and down your hip until you find the fullest part.

 If you are measuring over jeans, I would recommend to go ahead and change out of your jeans into leggings

 Jeans are thicker, and they could throw off your measurements by an inch or so,

 If you have no other choice and you are measuring over jeans, you want to pull the tape measure a little bit tighter.

 Once you have all of your three measurements, now we're going to begin to look at the size chart

 Quinoa is often thought of as a savory food, but this breakfast porridge is going to change

 It's flavored with bananas, sweetened with chewy dates, it's one of my favorite cereals.

 For this recipe, you're going to need quinoa, water, milk of your choice, sliced or chopped

 nuts, bananas, cardamom pods or cardamom powder, dates, and salt.

 It's better to use cardamom powder, but nothing quite matches freshly ground spices.

 Bring your quinoa up to a boil, and then immediately cut the flame.

 You want a nice slow simmer, and you'll simmer it for about 15 minutes.

 Once you've dished up your porridge, you can finish it off with a little bit of almond

 milk, some sliced almonds or chopped nuts, and a few slices of banana.

 It's high in manganese, magnesium, folate, omega-3 fatty acids, has an anti-inflammatory

 All right, ladies and gentlemen, boys and girls across the country, we're going to go

 We're here with Superior Cuts and Styles Sub-Regional in Central Texas, and I caught this one lately

 It's a hot towel steamer, and as you can see, it comes complete with your tongs to handle

 This is a fresh pack of facial towels, hand towel steamer with tongs.

 We're going to go ahead and see this little device in action and see how it's going to

 What we're going to do today is work with a towel warmer that's designed for barbers.

 Of course, water, the base unit of the product, and this is the actual item that holds your

 They're actually tongs to handle your towels once they're hot so that you don't burn or

 Like I mentioned earlier, if you live in an area that happens to have lime deposits or

 calcium deposits in the water, you don't want that in your device.

 Here's one thing you can add to your device since we are creating steam.

 You don't need a whole bunch because you don't want to cause any damage to your device.

 And for the skin and face, I like to use a little tea tree, just a couple drops.

 Now we've added our essential oils to our water that we're going to use in our device.

 You're going to observe here in the device that there are fill lines.

 You have your minimum fill line, your mediocre fill line, and you have your maximum fill

 I'm just going to pour that right into the device until I reach that fill.

 Now another positive that this is going to do to your shop or your working environment

 is now that you have those aromas going, they're going to steam and it's going to create an

 That's just something I do for my clients to give them that extra ah.

 Next we're going to use the towels that they sent us, brand new white towels.

 And what I'm going to do to help get the process going, I'm going to go ahead and wet these

 Here's our essential oils to our water that we're going to use in our device.

 Now you're going to observe here in the device that there are fill lines.

 Now another positive this is going to do to your shop or your working environment is now

 that you have those aromas going, they're going to steam and it's going to create an

 What I'm going to do to help get the process going, I'm going to go ahead and wet these

 Begin our timer, which recommended time is anywhere between 30 to 45 minutes.

 You can max your time to an hour, but it's going to take at least a good 10 to 15 minutes

 You don't want it to fry you, but you do want it to make you feel good.

 So I went ahead and put the coconut water, coconut meat in the blender.

 Now depending on what consistency you want, if you want it to be a little thicker, just

 You know, because I have some, I'll just go ahead and use some of my extra coconut meat

 And I usually do like 60-40, 60% coconut meat and 40% the almond.

 Just because it comes out a little creamier, a little richer that way.

 So you tell me if you can tell a distinction between the one we just blended up.

 Even though the friendly bacteria, life biotic is in there, but after about 5 or 6 hours,

 So if you have an Excalibur or a Sedona dehydrator, you can put this in the bottom tray, you know,

 the very bottom of the deal, and set it for 80-85 and go for about 4 or 5 hours and then

 It may be cultured by then because it's a little more controlled environment.

 This has been sitting, because it's winter, there isn't any time of the year so it's a

 little cooler, so this one took more like 10 hours to culturize this one.

 Now when you go to put this on a room temperature basis, all you do is just go like this, you

 use a loose lid, just a loose lid like that, so it can do its thing, and then about 5 or

 6 hours later, check it out, and if it has a little distinction, a little bite to it,

 Then put it in the refrigerator, and then after that you can use it to make different

 It was requested that I recreate this style after I wore it in the Curlbox announcement

 I started off with freshly washed and deep conditioned hair that was air dried.

 I'm going to make a bantu knot with the amount of hair in each twist.

 I spray my hair with a bit of water first before applying the product.

 After the products are raked through thoroughly, I begin to twist my hair.

 With every twist of my hair, I place the hair underneath the last twist so the bantu knot

 Instead of making this big section one bantu knot, I'm going to split it in half and make

 Bigger bantu knots make bigger, looser curls, while smaller ones make tighter curls.

 Since I need length for this style, most of the bantu knots will be big, while only a

 Making bantu knots this way will also help secure it without the need of bobby pins.

 This small section will make two bantu knots because they're going to be in the back of

 my head where I need tighter curls to help fill in the gaps that are going to be made

 So now I'm finished and it took about a half an hour to do all the bantu knots.

 So now my hair is fully dry and you can tell which bantu knots are smaller than the others.

 I put olive oil on my fingertips to help prevent frizz when I'm twisting my hair.

 Now that my hair has enough body, it's time to shape the style.

 I simply push my hair to the opposite side with my hand, spray some water, and brush

 Make sure not to brush your curls, just the hair you want to smooth over.

 I'm going to use Original Moxie's Oasis Gel to my sides to help it stay into place, but

 I always start from the front, then the back, and then I get the side.

 Since this is a curly look, you don't have to worry about the bobby pins sticking out

 Since I just took the knots out, my curls are pretty tight and are not falling like

 So I forgot to mention that I never tie my hair when I wear this style.

 So after I take all the bobby pins out, you can kind of see that my hair is now stretched

 I can wear it in the style that I intended to wear it in the first place.

 I'm just going to touch up the sides by spraying a little water and brushing it into place.

 And on top, I'm going to use my favorite all-time product, Original Moxie's Hair Blend to make

 As always, thanks for watching and I hope you and your family have a lovely holiday

 If you'd like to keep in touch with me in between videos, you can follow me on Twitter,

 Today I'm going to show you how to make non-yeast sandwich bread from scratch.

 What you're going to need to begin with is three cups of all-purpose flour.

 And of course you're going to need a bowl, a big bowl, a whisk, and a spoon to stir with.

 The next thing that we're going to need is one tablespoon of baking powder.

 And I said baking powder and I grabbed the baking soda, so let's... I've got to use my brain.

 And then two cups, and you can use either regular milk or buttermilk.

 And now I'm going to whisk all of this together until it's very well incorporated.

 Now, if it's a little bit too wet for a bread dough consistency, you can add a little bit more flour, which I've done before.

 I've got a friend of mine who said somebody called her and has a bunch of fresh wheat and didn't know what to do with it.

 So I guess they're going to bring me a bunch of fresh wheat out of the garden.

 And I'll probably make a video soon to show you guys what to do with that, how to thrash it and grind it up and make flour out of regular wheat.

 And now we're going to take just a regular bread loaf, like so, and I'm going to spray it with Pam.

 What's really nice about no-yeast bread, number one, you are able to cleanse your body from the buildup of candida.

 So you've got to clean your system out of the gluten if you eat this for seven days out of the month.

 So we're going to put that in a 325 degree oven, which I've already preheated.

 It will actually rise up to here, so it will look like a beautiful loaf when it's done.

 Hi Beauties, this is Samantha from Instant Beauty Hair Extensions.

 I just got a blunt haircut and I thought it would be a great opportunity to show you how

 Even if you don't have a blunt haircut, these are still really great tips that I'm about

 to share with you on how to blend in your hair extensions so that they look very natural

 So there's a significant difference in length between my haircut and the extensions.

 No matter what type of extension you are applying, whether it's a clip in highlight or a one

 piece extension or a full set like how I'm wearing today, you want to make sure that

 You want to hide the clips underneath your own hair so that you have a flawless finish.

 I have applied most of the full set, but I'll show you on the last piece.

 You want to make sure that you comb out your extension and open the clips.

 Now that your extensions are in, you might find that you can still see your hair a little

 Straighten it, curl it, but the important thing is when you are using your hot styling

 tool, like a flat iron for example, you want to make sure that you are blending it in the

 You want to pick up your hair and the extensions and style them together.

 This way they flow in the same direction and they will blend together.

 You won't be able to tell where your hair ends and the extension starts.

 So I've straightened this side and as you can see it is blended in perfectly.

 So again, you want to make sure that you are grabbing your own hair and the extensions

 So I just did one or two pieces to show you guys what the curl looks like.

 But as a final step, you want to make sure you are using a smoothing gloss.

 If you have any questions about which brand is best, you can send us a message and we

 But all you need is just a small drop and this really makes sure that you have a flawless

 But you can apply these techniques with any type of hot styling tool like a curling iron

 You just need to remember to grab your hair and the extensions together in one piece as

 This way they will flow in the same direction and you will be blended perfectly.

 If you have any questions, you can leave us a comment down below.

 Hi, my name is Alan, I'm at Firewater Bars in Miami and I'm going to show you how to

 We're going to add our two lime wedges, squeeze them into the glass, then we're going to add

 our two spoonfuls of sugar, and then we're going to put in about eight to ten mint leaves.

 After that, we're going to add or muddle all of our ingredients together, extracting all

 the juices out of the mint, getting all the juice out of the lime and mixing it with the

 We're going to add our mango nectar, about a good splash worth.

 Then we're going to pour all the ingredients into our eight-ounce tin shaker.

 Now, we're not going to shake too hard because we don't want the mint to get real small so

 that it gets stuck in your straw and it just diminishes the enjoyment of the actual mojito.

 If you'd like any more information or if you'd like to know about any of our bars or special

 Yo what's up YouTube this is Kevlarambo56 and I'm here to show you how to bar race your shoes so it looks like this.

 The trick to this is that you have to start behind the top so you don't show your work in front of it.

 But first step, I like to start one loop in front because my shoes are screwed up.

 You want to start from the opposite side, like an opposite, like one lace to the left.

 So I'm going to take my right lace, bring it all the way around to the left.

 Alright, then once you do that, just stick it right through the hole, point towards it.

 Then, just simply grab your left lace, stick it underneath your tongue.

 Same process, now this, you can start left or right, but I like to go in order and just keep going right.

 And you can just do on this side, because you're not doing it over and over, but you're going to have to skip a loop.

 So if this is going to here, you're going to have to go one above it.

 You just want it to keep it, tie it in the back of the tongue, do whatever you want with it.

 welcome back to another session with your VahChef at Vahrehvah.com.

 salsa is nothing but a simple dipping so if you go to any vegetarians house

 they make various kinds of fresh chutneys which is nothing but similar to

 today we're going to use our Indian favorite mangoes to make this salsa

 we're going to have it with papad or any of the tortilla chips also you can find

 you don't want nice crispy edges you want little bit pounded but still some crunchiness

 some chopped green chillies if you want it little bit milder you can add little less of

 just little bit that few of them crush and release their juices

 nice green chillies and red onion awesome flavor from coriander and chillies

 with any of the crispy snacks we serve we're going to put a small sprig of

 you can serve this kind of summer salsa with not only with any kind of papads

 and the freshness of mango if you're a regular viewer of vahrehvah.com

 I know you're a fantastic cook already and people will look forward for a great meal

 to look forward to a fantastic meal you're going to cook but do not forget

 so please post your recipes and cooking tips so others can benefit

 with this salsa you can also add pinch of sugar to give little more

 This is Syed Yasser and once again I welcome you to Hyderabadwala.com.

 Today I am going to show you how to make Hyderabadi Dahi Ki Kadi for 6-8 servings.

 For Bhajiyas, we have the batter which we kept aside for 15 minutes.

 Mix and spread these Bhajiyas into a frying pan when oil is hot.

 Add these Bhajiyas to the cooked gram flour and curd paste or dahi.

 Enjoy with dry Bhajiyas and Hyderabadi Talaahua Gosht, Fried Mutton.

 Thank you for watching this video and please do not forget to subscribe to our YouTube channel

 The Logan Foamworks Hole Drill features three different drill sizes that can be used.

 To install a drill, insert it from the bottom of the tool up and twist to lock it in place.

 Use the Foamworks channel rail or a ruler to determine the center of the hole to be

 one hand and with the other, twist the knob until the drill cuts its way through the foamboard

 and push the button on the top to expel the excess foamboard from the drill.

 to replace the protective plastic caps when not using the drills.

 Hey everyone, this is Alex or PolymomoT and today I have a tutorial showing you how to make this holiday

 customizable Baymax and this Baymax is holding an egg for Easter and

 This is also in collaboration with Allie from Chubby Chipmunk Crafts

 And she made this adorable chip slash Dale on top of an Easter egg

 So I hope you check out her tutorial which link will be in the description box below

 So we're gonna start out with the Baymax head and you just take a piece of white clay

 Then we're gonna stick an eye pin in and I put on some Fimo deco gel and I put it on the head and I

 Leave a little bit sticking out so we can attach to the body as well

 Then for the body you just want to roll a piece of white clay into a teardrop shape and flatten it out

 Then you want to add some deco gel to the end of the eye pin and just attach it to the head

 And then you want to add some white clay to the end of the eye pin and just attach it to the head

 For the arms take some balls of white clay and then just roll it on one side so it becomes these nice teardrop shaped

 Then you want to blend that onto the body one going downwards and one going upwards

 For the legs you just want to roll out a thick snake and then cut it out to equal pieces and those will be the legs

 clay to make a snake and then that'll be the line between the eyes and

 Then you just fill in the sockets with two pieces of black clay

 And then I flatten a piece of silver clay and then that'll be like the

 chest pocket where the chips go in and I just use my blade to make a line in the middle and

 I rolled a piece of clay into an egg shape and I just attach it to the arm

So then I just made it a little bit smaller and then rolled another egg

 Baymax holding Easter egg and the great thing about this tutorial is that you can customize it holding any item you want and

 if you want to change it for the holidays, you can make a heart for Valentine's Day or

 Hope you guys enjoyed this tutorial and don't forget to check out Ali's tutorial which link will be in the description box below

 Well I hate to be the bearer of bad news but your guitar does not play in tune.

 Your guitar is an imperfect instrument when it comes to tuning.

 However there are a couple of things you can do as a builder and as a player to help your

 One is called compensation and is usually done while the guitar is being built.

 The other is called intonation and can be done after the guitar is built.

 I highly recommend that you do some research on these subjects so that you know more about

 Today I am going to talk about the subject of intonation and show you how to adjust the

 Now recently I had what is known as a harp guitar come into my shop for some repair work.

 This particular harp guitar is based on a Brazilian instrument called a viola caipira.

 This particular harp guitar has 30 strings so if you are going to learn about intonation

 So like I said guitars do not play in tune but we are going to try and make this guitar

 And the way we are going to do that is by adjusting the intonation if necessary.

 This particular guitar, the 10 main strings or the 5 double choruses are tuned to a D.

 So once you know that the guitar is in tune, for each string you want to play the harmonic

 So I am going to start by placing my finger and playing the harmonic.

 It is not fretted, it is just touched and plucked and then remove the finger.

 So as I play the harmonic my tuner should tell me if it is in tune or not.

 The next step to check the intonation is to actually depress on the string at the 12th

 So now I am going to play the fretted note and pluck the string.

 As I play the fretted note I want to see the exact same note on my tuner.

 Now there are several ways to check intonation with your tuners.

 You can use strobe tuners, get real fancy if you want to, drive yourself crazy in a

 I just use this little tuner that clips on my peg head there and it tells me real quick

 if the note that I hear when I play the harmonic is the same pitch as the note that is the

 Now let's talk about what to do if they were not the same note.

 If I played the harmonic and then the fretted note went sharp of the harmonic pitch then

 And if it is sharp you want to bring the brake angle on the saddle back just a skosh and

 that will adjust it so that the note, the fretted note goes a little flat and should

 My tuner says that they are exactly the same pitch so no adjustment needed.

 So for the string that was going sharp on the fretted note, which was this one right

 here, what I'm going to do is come in and move the string out of the way and file the

 So I've done the first four strings, the double chords which are in unison here and

 So what I've just shown you is a very simplistic way of adjusting intonation.

 It's much more in depth than what I'm able to present here in this small video.

 So here's another quick little tip when you're adjusting the intonation.

 The human ear will pick up a sharp much quicker than it picks up a flat.

 So if by chance you happen to set everything up just a skosh on the flat side, as you play

 up the neck of the guitar bending the strings, stretching them, it should come right in to

 Now, there's a faster, easier way to get better fitting, better looking miter joints for all

 The MiterMate miter saw from Craftsman provides an exclusive angle transfer system, utilizing

 the included angle finder to measure both walls at the same time and transfer the measurements

 directly to the MiterMate for quick and accurate cutting every time.

 No extra measuring, no math, no miscuts, and no wasted materials.

 When it's time to make a corner cut, just remove the angle finder, unlock the knob,

 Press the aluminum paddles against the corner to match both wall angles at the same time.

 The innovative transfer system allows for the placement of the angle finder into the

 Unlock the two sides of the V-fence and rotate them to meet the paddles on the angle finder.

 Once the left and right fences are set, lock them into place and remove the angle finder.

 The saw is now set to make miter cuts for both sides of the corner.

 The MiterMate angle finder mounts conveniently onto the switch handle for quick and easy

 One trip up the ladder is all you need to get the correct corner measurements.

 You can make all of the standard miter, bevel, and compound cuts required for professional

 trim work, as well as sawing studs, rails, posts, and regular lumber.

 No need for other miter saws, the Craftsman MiterMate does it all.

 No two corners are exactly the same, and trim boards are too expensive to waste.

 Measure once and cut with confidence with a MiterMate miter saw from Craftsman.

 tablespoon of black pepper powder, whole black pepper, cumin powder, mustard seeds, two tablespoons

 of salt, one tablespoon of chili, two tablespoons of paprika and one tablespoon of black seed,

 So now we have the neckline here, you can see the facing edge, the facing neckline,

 the actual neckline of the garment, our back neck and our other necklines over here with the facing.

 So now we're going to sew in the collar and we've already got the collar prepared.

 So before remember the interfacing goes on top and this edge here which we prepared

 goes on on top when we're sewing and what we need to do we have a notch here

 about the facing just at the moment, what we're doing is sewing the actual collar in position.

 So by lining the edge of the collar up with that notch we can start sewing.

 Now we'll just start sewing and then you can see now this it does get a little bit tricky because

 we need the collar, sorry the shoulder notch to line up with the actual shoulder and this

 the neckline is slightly on the bias so make sure that you don't pull that because you'll stretch

 there if you need to just make sure that your neck edge and the raw edge of the the collar are

 matched up together making sure that you don't you're not creating any pleats and I'll show you

 over top of this edge here what we're doing is we're going from the double layer of the collar

 to the single layer of the under collar and you can do a little back tack there if you want to

 and then we're just going to swing that around and at this stage we can

 pull the top collar out of the way because we're just sewing the the under collar onto the neckline.

 shoulder notch here and as we come to the other shoulder notch put your top collar back in place

 and you can lift your foot up so that it's tucked so this edge is tucked under the foot

 now get started and make sure that you you match up this the notch with the edge of the collar

 and so you don't do something like this because it means that this extension will be out of whack

 with the other collar with the other side of the garment so match that up there and like and put a

 pin in there if you need to and then work your way towards that point and like I said the under the

 neckline will be slightly stretchy because it's on the bias so just be careful that you don't

 stretch that under collar and then back tack at the front there and if I fold that over now I can

 check to see that there's no tucks in my neckline and on the other side no tucks in my neckline so

 I've matched it up at the center front match the notches there match the notches at the shoulder

 match the shoulder seams with the notch on that side and then match the notch at the center front

 For this tutorial you will need a set of knitting needles and a ball of yarn.

 Let's say you had a 2x2 rib where it was knit, knit, purl, purl.

 Then you would knit the second stitch and purl the stitches that were purled.

 You're going to be knitting or purling based on what stitches done the row before.

 Then you'll do that until you have 1 stitch left on your needle.

 When you have 1 stitch left on your needle, you're going to want to break or cut your

 And then you're just going to pull that stitch right through the hole and tighten it down.

 Here's an example of binding off in pattern on a 1x1 rib stitch swatch.

 Hey guys, I know you're probably wondering why I look like a hot mess today, but I'm

 Alright, I don't even know how this happens when I sleep, but it seems to only happen

 So I'm going to teach you five tricks that I do to have myself back to normal and feeling

 For your face you're going to need some uncoated aspirin and some honey in a plate.

 And for your eyes, you're going to need tea bags or you can use a cucumber or a red potato

 Alright, the first thing you're going to want to do is start drinking some water.

 This is going to take down the puffiness in your skin and start detoxing your body very

 Okay, now you need to take your olive oil and pour it in a bowl.

 Now make sure you don't put it on too high because you don't want to burn your scalp.

 Okay, what you're going to need is some olive oil and this olive oil is going to start soaking

 So olive oil, a shower cap because you don't want to get it all over the place, and a towel

 So you're going to put this towel around your back and start adding the olive oil.

 Okay, then you're going to take your hair and roll it up around and you're going to

 Now we're going to let this sit for 15 minutes but while it's sitting let's start doing some

 Okay now you're going to take two tea bags or two spoons and you're going to put them

 Make sure that you wet the tea bags first and set them on a plate.

 We're going to put these in there for a few minutes so they can start getting cold so

 Okay as our tea bags are sitting in the freezer we are going to start making our honey and

 You're going to take four aspirin and set them in the middle of your plate and put a

 few drops, you're going to remember less is more in this case, a few drops right on your

 plate and these aspirin are going to dissolve very quickly so that you can make a paste.

 Once they're already dissolved you're going to add two drops of honey straight to this

 Then you're going to mix it up with your finger and start applying it to your face.

 Alright guys I just put on my honey and aspirin mask as you can see.

 Yes I look a little crazy and I know that but it's going to start clearing up my skin

 While I did that I took my tea bags out of the freezer and they're really cold right

 I'm going to go ahead and place these on my eyes but before I do that I'm going to show

 you one trick that I do that's going to help bring energy to your whole body really quick.

 Hey guys, alright I know I look crazy but trust me you're going to start looking better

 You're going to leave the olive oil in your hair for about 15 minutes and the mask on

 So while you're doing that this is a great exercise to help regain energy and build strength

 We're going to go ahead and sit at a 90 degree angle with our legs up pointing in the air

 and then we're going to put our tea bags right on our eyes to start taking away that puffiness.

 You're going to stay in this position for about 10 minutes and it's equivalent to about

 Now I'm going to go take a shower and get all this cleaned up and I'll see you back

 I'm back and honestly I feel great and I have a lot more energy.

 My hair was so much easier to do which is amazing for me because I have super dry hair.

 My skin is a lot softer and the puffiness around my eyes has gone down.

 Please let me know by leaving your comments below and make sure you check out the rest

 It's summertime, summertime, sum-sum, summertime, summertime....

 This native of India contains high amounts of the antioxidant vitamins A, C and E.

 It's one of the best sources of omega-3 fatty acids, which can help lower blood pressure.

 This succulent green resembles a reclining jade plant with much thinner stems.

 It's used by people all over the world, yet many Americans think of it as a pesky weed.

 One reason gardeners get so frustrated with purslane is that it's truly a never-say-die plant.

 When pulled up, it can reroot and produce 190,000 seeds per plant.

 Now the time has come to appreciate this persistent survivor and see what it has to offer.

 Crush the stems and apply the juice for skin inflammations, burns and bruises.

 Be sure to thoroughly rinse all parts since they grow so close to the ground.

 Cooked purslane is mucilaginous, which makes it an ideal soup thickener.

 Its reddish stems, yellow flowers and tiny black seeds can also be added.

 Purslane slaw is a simple and colorful way to incorporate purslane into your diet.

 If black dots appear in this, it's just some of the seeds that escaped from the pods.

 Then cover this mixture with a marinated dressing of two tablespoons brown sugar,

 Summer time, summer time, summer time, summer time, summer time, summer time!

 Today we're going to take a look at drawing feet and feet are one of those things that

 people think is just incredibly hard to draw and sometimes I'll see students hide the feet,

 you know, they'll put grass blades over the top of the feet or, you know, they'll do anything

 You break any object down into shapes and draw the shapes and then everything else just

 So I'm going to draw three different feet here and the first foot I'm drawing here,

 you might have started at, you might have seen, I started with a kind of a wedge shape

 And then all I did after that was draw a shape to indicate where the toes were going to be

 And then after that you can draw your contour lines and remember the contour lines are the

 outlines and then I indicate a little bit of a light source here and now I'm going to

 draw some of the value or some of the shadowed areas to indicate more of the form of the

 I have to do is think about the shapes and of course these are, the feet I'm going to

 There's no shoes involved in here but shoes on the feet are just easier because then you

 don't have to worry about toes and heel and that kind of stuff.

 So just adding a little bit of value here after I've drawn the shapes and drawn the

 Okay so now we're going to do another one from a different angle and again I'm going

 So it's a little fatter at one end, it's a little skinnier on the other end and this

 And then I just drew a shape to indicate each one of the toes and now here I'm putting

 Now after I've done that I've done all the hard work and really there's no hard work

 And now right now what I'm doing is just indicating at the bottom of the foot where the value

 I'm going to go ahead and throw a little bit of an ankle in there so you can understand

 the way the foot is a little bit more and indicate a light source.

 And then on the bottom part of the foot in this case it's going to be really dark because

 Now where the arch of the foot comes up it's going to be a little bit lighter.

 That's why I've got that little hook shape right there because it's going to be lighter

 All you have to do is pay attention to the shapes that are there.

 Now you know unlike other parts of the body like arm or leg a foot is generally always

 You don't really have a lot of flexibility in how far you can bend a foot.

 And you can see here while I'm adding the value that the definition of the form of the

 Give a little bit of value on the back end of the foot, back end of the heel just to

 give it a little bit more of a feeling of being curved and being round.

 And it's a little bit more modified because this time the foot is going to be pointing

 The shape of the foot obviously is an organic shape but if you put a couple of geometric

 shapes together like squares and triangles it makes drawing the foot a little bit easier.

 And then after we've got the shapes defined we can go back and do those contour lines.

 And then add a little bit of value to define the form of the foot a little bit more.

 If I was doing a finished drawing I would spend a little bit more time with this.

 But really the only time I would invest in it is in creating that value.

 Making a smooth value and adding the details like the toenails and maybe the little cracks

 The basic principles that you need to understand when you're drawing feet.

 I think the problem comes in when people try to draw feet is they just don't look at

 So they make assumptions about feet and think that they're hard to draw and they're really

 When you're drawing the feet just think about that wedge shape.

 Think about where your heel is going to be and where your toes are going to be.

 This has been another video tutorial brought to you by the virtualinstructor.com.

 purple because it's my favorite color, but you can use whatever color you like.

A light brown eyeshadow, a slightly darker brown eyeshadow, a gold

 shimmer, a black mascara, a liquid eyeliner, I'm using my cake eyeliner today, a purple

 eyeshadow or the color choice that you have chosen, and a nude lip gloss.

 Firstly, taking your medium eyeshadow brush and your light brown eyeshadow, apply that

 Next, taking a smaller eyeshadow brush and your darker brown color, apply that in a C

 Next, using a medium eyeshadow brush, apply the gold shimmer to the center of the eye

 eyeliner, apply a very thin line of eyeliner to the top lash line, ending in a thin flick.

 At this point, apply your black mascara to the top lashes only.

 Taking your dark brown eyeshadow on your small eyeshadow brush once again, apply that underneath

 and a small flat eyeshadow brush, apply that color from the lower inner corner of the eye

 The last step for the eyes is to apply your black mascara to the lower lashes as well.

 Once you've finished the eyes, take your nude lip gloss and apply it to the lips for a fresh,

 I hope that you enjoyed today's tutorial and if you would like to see more videos, please

 Hey guys, it's Joe here, and today I'm bringing you something quite different.

 As you can see, it has 1GB of DDR3 memory, so that's quite nice.

 I wouldn't use these, I'd download the latest ones, because they're more up to date.

 This has a few things if you want to know how to install the graphics card.

 If you're building a computer, you should really know how to install the graphics card.

 I think it's a registration card or something like that, I don't really know.

 So as you can see, the VGA will just detach so you can put it into a smaller case.

 So thank you very much for watching me unbox the XFX Radeon HD 5450.

 Today I want to share with you my best discovery when I was doing the raw vegan diet.

 I did it for 17 days and I don't think I would have lasted that long if I hadn't discovered

 Okay, so the kind of vegetables you use does make a difference and these that I am going

 to show you today are the best, the most delicious combinations.

 You can use Roma tomatoes or the big round tomatoes, but tomatoes are one of the big

 I have broccoli and I don't like eating broccoli raw, but this actually makes it really, really

 For some reason, radishes with the leaves, they just come out absolutely delicious.

 And then I have some raw walnuts that have been soaked in a little water just to make

 And we have a lemon that I'm going to chop and squeeze into it.

 And then we're going to add extra virgin olive oil and some balsamic vinegar.

 Okay, so I'm going to start chopping them up and show you how this all works.

 It's really whatever you find that is fresh and ready at your disposal.

 My husband's probably going to yell at me because I'm not using the right knife technique

 You want to make the mushrooms about this size because you want them to soak in the

 And if you don't cut them up into the small pieces, then you don't achieve that taste.

 Just chop up the stems at the end and then chop them into small pieces.

 Okay, and with the onion, I really make them small individual pieces so they soak really,

 Like you can make it the evening before and have it for lunch even, the next day.

 Of course, it has a thousand calories, but it's really healthy and good for you.

 If you think you need more, because it really needs to soak, depending on how much you make.

 And this is for the spices and for the olive oil and the lemon juice and the balsamic vinegar

 You can even in the morning shake it again, because everything has to get pretty wet.

 You put this in the fridge and the next morning it's soaked, delicious, and everything just

 And this is completely raw, completely vegan, healthy, delicious, and I still eat it.

 Add 1 small onion chopped up, 3 cinnamon sticks, 3 elaichi pods, 3 anisters, 2 bay leaves and

 Add 1 teaspoon of coriander powder and 1 teaspoon of jeera powder.

 Then you add 3 potatoes cut up into cubes, 1 cup water, 1 cup peas and mix well.

 Then you leave your curry to cook for plus minus 20 to 25 minutes until your potatoes

 And this is our curry which has been cooked for 25 minutes and is now ready to be served

 Hi everyone, I got engaged recently and had an engagement party and everything, so filmed

 a get ready with me video, which kind of turned into a makeup tutorial, and I really wanted

 So I started by priming my eyes as always, so that the eyeshadow stays on longer and

 I then started by highlighting my brow bone, which didn't show up too well on the camera.

 Next I'm using a brown eyeshadow to the crease of my eyelid, this will act as a nice

 transition from the black we're going to use next, and just to help and blend everything

 I'm using that same brush to blend some black shimmery eyeshadow on the outer corners

 of my eyelid, as you can see, and I keep reapplying until I'm happy with the intensity.

 I'm then picking up an even darker black eyeshadow and applying it to the outer corner,

 It's quite a repetitive process, you have to keep reapplying to build up the colour

 And I lift my eyelid to blend, as I have quite hooded eyes, and this makes it easier.

 Also you can see what a huge difference that brown eyeshadow made, the one that we applied

 I'm making the outer corners even darker, and then taking that black colour down to

 Now I'm using my favourite eyeshadow ever, it's called Space Cowboy and it's by Urban

 It's a glittery eyeshadow but not overpowering, it kind of gives a wet appearance, and I really

 I'm applying it to the inner and middle part of my lid, with a flat shader brush.

 I always use a gel eyeliner for my top lid, and a pencil liner for my bottom waterline.

 I use a smaller mascara for my bottom lashes, as I always tend to make a mess.

 I've used an eyebrow shadow to fill in my brows, quite natural looking.

 And for the foundation I'm using the middle colour from Cinema Secrets Kit No. 3.

 Now I'm using the lightest colour in that palette, with a smaller brush, to highlight

 under my eyes, bridge of the nose, chin, forehead and top of the lip.

 Okay there's my little sister putting on lipstick in the background.

 Anyway back to the highlighting, you wouldn't believe the number of interruptions I had

 Now I'm using the darkest shade in that palette to contour my cheekbones and jawline.

 I also took some of that colour and blended it into my hairline.

 I'm using a dark shade of MAC Studio Fix to go over the contours, and I'm doing this

 I'm using Ben Nye's Banana Powder to set and go over the areas that I highlighted earlier.

 I'm using a peachy pink blush just above the contour to add colour to my cheeks.

 And then using a highlighter to highlight the high points of my cheekbones and bridge

 I know it was quite a bit of a long process but I think it came out quite nicely.

 My hair was done by Shumaila's Hair and Beauty which is in London.

 Obviously so was my makeup because I'm their makeup artist and it's my family's salon.

 We went for an updo with quite a bit of volume as my dress was quite big itself.

 I think my hair's too dark to see any details of the hairstyle but I'll try to post a picture

 We had the celebration in our garden with a marquee and seating arrangement done by

 a company whose name I don't really know but I'll try to find out and leave it in the description

 If you want the letter notes for that, you can go to letternoteplayer.com.

 All we're going to play is we're going to play the B flat and the F, and the D flat

 Now your melody is B flat, and we'll have a little introduction.

 Then we go right into the melody, the main melody, and go slowly with this.

 And then I don't have this in the letter notes, but I'd go ahead and put a tag on there.

 Hi today I'm going to show you a mushroom recipe that is chili mushroom

 it's dry it yummy it delicious it's a good patty recipe so before starting

 let's quickly look into the ingredients for preparing this yummy recipe we'll

 need 5 teaspoon of corn flour 5 teaspoon of refined flour 3 teaspoon of rice

 flour salt to taste sweet chili sauce olive oil for preparing the mushroom

 gravy 1 teaspoon of honey ground black pepper 2 teaspoon of red chili sauce 5

 to 6 cloves of chopped garlic 1 medium sized onion finely chopped spring onion

 2 to 3 chopped green chilies here I am using 200 grams of mushroom what I have

 done I have washed the mushroom in cold water then immediately I have dried it

 using a paper towel little bit careful while you are cleaning the mushroom

 after cleaning it in cold water immediately you can dry it using a paper

 towel or you can use a clean cloth because mushroom has the tendency to

 absorb the cold water immediately after cleaning separate this part from the

 mushroom don't throw it you can use this part in different recipe or with

 the onion you can fry it and serve this with roti or paratha like this clean all

 this mushroom let's start our process now I'll prepare batter for frying the

 mushroom put little bit of salt on it add salt according to your taste add the

 the oil will give the crispiness then add water make a thick batter now the

 for frying we need some vegetable oil already I have heated some oil in my

 fry the mushroom till the color changes into light brown and keep it aside like

 this we'll fry all the mushroom in two batches now I'll prepare gravy for the

 chilli mushroom I have already heated a skillet in my workstation add 1 teaspoon

 of oil here I'm using olive oil you can use any vegetable oil of your choice oil

 has become hot add chopped garlic, green chilli, onion give it a nice mix cook it

 for 2 to 3 minutes add salt according to your taste so that the onion will cook fast

 don't over cook the onion so that the color will be changed into brown

 now you are almost done before switching off the stove put some spring onion over it

 chilli mushroom is ready now serve this with any fried rice of your choice

 please provide your valuable comments if you like my video then give one thumbs up

 do try it in home and don't forget to subscribe bye bye and take care

 Hello, I've now had my Aristo stand for a couple of weeks so I thought it would be a

 You take the side support and you slide the bolt through the hole, sorry that way, and

 then you slide onto the bolt the support arm through the pre-cut hole.

 You then place a washer on the end of the bolt and that's all secured in place by this

 And now that's together there's no need for you to actually take this apart again.

 The side support is secured onto the base through sliding the metal plate into that

 If you line it up and put your thumb on top it holds it into position and that makes it

 The gap here is determined by what size frame you're going to use.

 You can go to a very small frame or you can go to quite a substantial frame.

 I'm going to put it in this position today and I'm just going to secure this by tightening

 You just put this at the right angle so it's comfortable for you and then you can sew away

 You don't get numb legs or there's no real weight on top of your legs so you can spend

 If you want to access the back of your work you just flip it over.

 And this is one of the really lovely things about the Needle Knead products that you don't

 I've stitched in a lot of places with this over the last few weeks.

 I've taken a blanket out and sat on the grass in the sunshine and stitched with it.

 I've stitched at the kitchen table and it's worked really well in all those positions.

 If you want to collapse it down for storage or transportation it's just very, very easy.

 You can easily pop it into a bag or into the drawer or a cupboard and then when you get

 where you're going or you want to reuse it, it just takes seconds to assemble it.

 I'm sure that my frames, my floor stand and the lap stand are going to become heirlooms.

 They are all taking on a beautiful patina as I'm using them from the oils in my hands.

 I get a lot of joy and pleasure out of using them and I'm sure that you will too.

 If you have any questions, you can email me at nicola.parkman at gmail.com.

 I promised you to add a variation of our flowers in the snow crochet motif and

 here it is it's a five-point star and it's worked similar to the flowers in

 you start with a magic ring with four single crochets so the fifth

 stitch is the slip stitch at the end to close the round so magic ring with four

 and one slip stitch into the first single crochet to close the round and

 pull the starting thread to form the ring to tighten the ring slip stitch

 ok round two starts with three turning chains and a puff stitch with three

 yarn overs chain three and into every other stitch a puff stitch with four

 yarn overs so yarn over pull through the yarn pull it to the heights of the

 turning chains yarn over pull through the yarn yarn over pull through the yarn

 four times another one and now crochet all the loops on the hook and chain

 three repeat this throughout the rounds one puff stitch into every stitch and

 the round ends with one slip stitch into the tip of the first puff stitch now I

 change color it looks very beautiful like a snow flower if you like a

 Christmas rose if you use white yarn now but for the video I take blue yarn so

 for you to better see what I'm doing and you start with a slip stitch into the

 first chain and three turning chains and two double crochets in the previous

 version we did clustered double crochets so here we just make simple double

 crochets chain three and another three double crochets into the same chain

 so in every chain you work three double crochets chain three and three double

 crochets and you continue like that into the next chain again three double

 after this round you already have a pentagon a small motif which you could

 use as a gift hanger but we want to make a star out of it so we continue

 round ends as usual with one slip stitch into the top most turning chain from the

 beginning so here we have our little pentagon motif which is nice enough to

 use it as a little decoration so but we continue with round 1 2 3 4 and you

 start with one slip stitch and one slip stitch into one of the double crochets

 and one slip stitch into the chain because we want to start in this chain

 now three turning chains and same as before plus two double crochets chain

 now one slip stitch in between those three and three double crochets of the

 previous round so in between those three and three double crochets one slip

 stitch and chain one stop once chain one and into the next chain again three

 double crochets plus chain three plus three double crochets and again after it

 again one slip stitch in between those three and three double crochets of the

 previous round plus chain one and the next group of double crochets and the

 round ends slip stitch chain one and slip stitch into the top most turning

 chain this makes up for a cute flower already but we want to start so there's

 one more round of single crochets where we will form the tips so one turning

 chain as we're continuing with single crochets and one single crochet and

 another single crochet and into the chain at the tip two single crochets

 plus chain three plus two single crochets and then again three single

 crochets the slope down one slip stitch around the same slip stitch of the

 previous round plus chain one and three single crochets up the slope and into

 the tip again two single crochets plus chain three plus two single crochets

 and one slip stitch exactly around the slip stitch of the previous round chain

 and the round ends with one slip stitch into the first turning chain that's it

 a cute little star very quick to work to finish and it reminds me of a Christmas

 rose and so if you make those petals with white and the corner with a yellowish

 I'm going to have a little demo today on how to install these black gold or gold-plated

 There's nothing wrong with it, but I'm just going to put in this gold-plated for the demonstration.

 All right, the first thing we're going to do, this is an extra step.

 You don't have to do this, but I'm going to put a spring in the back of the pad.

 Then you take your little wire cutter and you cut it off about 3-16ths of an inch long.

 Now I'm going to take some pieces of glue and drop them in the cup.

 I'm going to put in four pieces and distribute them around the outside edge.

 If you try to use shellac, when the cup flexes, the shellac will crack, shear off, and the pad will fall out of the cup.

 The gold pads are flat, so you need a flat tone hole to get a perfect seal.

 Start with a black Sharpie felt pen and draw over the tone hole rim to make it black.

 That way, when you grind off the black, you know you've got a flat tone hole.

 When I heat this cup up, the spring's going to want to push that pad right out of the cup.

 Okay, you can see the pad's starting to push itself out of the cup.

 Now, I'm going to bottom it out and then just back it off a little bit and hold it there for it to cool.

 It's already leveled itself out because that spring automatically leveled the pad against the tone hole.

 Sometimes you might have to tweak the cup a little bit from side to side.

 Now, you can see we've got a little bit of light showing in the front.

 You just want a tiny bit in the front that shuts off really easy with a light bit of finger pressure.

 Now, these pads are going to last many times longer than leather pads.

 That's everything you need for a perfect gold pad installation.

 You can grind your own if you happen to have some beautiful cinnamon bark,

 or you can just use one and a half teaspoons of cinnamon from the space market.

 Stir this up and add about a quarter of a teaspoon of fine salt.

 Room temperature with a soft pastry brush all over the surface.

 Trying to get it into a little bit of flour so that it doesn't stick.

 This dough will sit in a warm place until it's doubled in size.

 Pinch the little loose end if you think it's going to have any chance to unfurl.

 Alright, to bend these pieces to the correct shape I'm going to use this toaster oven.

 First thing I'm going to do is make the chin rest because it's the hardest piece to make.

 I'm just going to stick it down here right above the burner until it gets soft enough to bend.

 As you can see it's starting to take the natural curve of the pipe.

 And then once it's warm I'm going to take it out and bend it like this.

 Just put it above the burner until you can get a nice arc shape in it.

 It just follows the natural curve of the pipe so you have to be very careful with this one.

 And then I just take it out and bend it to the desirable shape.

 Now to bend the fingerboard you just stick it in there on some cardboard like that.

 And it should follow the natural curve of the pipe as it bends.

I would suggest that you don't try this at home unless you know what you're doing.

 Unfortunately it's not going to cooperate today so we're going to have to bend it this way.

 I'm just going to hold it in there until it gets soft enough to bend.

 Once it gets soft enough to bend I'm going to take it over here and lay it on this piece of pipe.

 I'm going to take it over here and lay it on this piece of pipe.

 And then once it's soft I take it over here, stick it on the board about a quarter inch, and just bend it up.

 Then I just added two lengths of pipe to the tee and then put caps on them.

 You can bend these pieces of pipe or do whatever you want with them.

 The first thing I'm going to do is put the finishing touches on the chin rest.

 The first thing I'm going to do is remove all the sharp edges with this file.

 Now that the chin rest is done I'm going to show you how to make the fingerboard.

 Now the next thing you want to do is get the fingerboard to fit flush on here like this.

 That may mean that you have to grind this a little bit right here.

 And then you want to take some purple primer and stick it on it in the appropriate areas like this.

 Put a little bit of primer on here just where the fingerboard is going to touch it.

 You want to be careful so that none of this is visible when the instrument is finished.

 Make sure it's lined up because if it's not lined up when it's dried it's ruined.

 Once the glue has taken hold then you want to take a couple little cheap paint brushes.

 So that way it really sticks good and there's no way it can ever come apart.

 As you can see that is much higher than where the bridge is going to go.

 I did that on purpose because what's going to happen is the strings are going to pull this

 So when the strings are at the correct tension this will be pulled down to the correct level.

 and how to put all this stuff on and finish the instrument completely.

 Hi again, it's Margaret and I have a delicious recipe for you today.

 This is one of my favorite new salad dressings and there's no artificial

 preservatives or anything because you make the salad dressing and it's made out of delicious all-natural

 fruits and vegetables that blend together to just make the most delicious

 It's embarrassing how much I eat it and I like to serve it in a bowl of greens and then sometimes I like to take

 spiralized zucchini and I thought well if I like it on top of greens and I like it on top of

 spiralized zucchini, what if I just put them both together and have it all together?

 So I did and I love that too because the zucchini is so it gives it just a great

 You do not have to spiralize it, but there's something kind of fun

I can link it below or you can just look back in my past videos.

 But this is just good and it's healthy and it's nutritious and you know what's in there.

 don't know if Dan does or not, but I think I got this one on eBay so you can get them anywhere.

 I do chop my noodles just before I put them on the plate because otherwise you've got

 a really long noodle dangling from your mouth and that's just not the cutest way to have lunch.

Make my spiralized zucchini, chop it up, and then I just put it right on

 top of my salad because again, it's two different textures and flavors and it's just delicious.

 It's just part of the zucchini and it's the way that it has to do it in order to

 You can do it with an emulsion blender because I tried that the other day and it worked just fine.

 Then I, like I said in other videos, if you can figure out a way to put turmeric in something, put it in there.

 It doesn't have that strong of a flavor and it's very, very, very good for you.

 Lately, I've been buying jalapenos and they have not been even hot at all.

 And because I like it spicy and that's a lot of tomatoes and mangoes.

Today, I'm kind of in a basil mode because I have this beautiful

 But because I'm doing it in the Vitamix, I wanted to put a little liquid in there.

 You could do lemon or lime juice and you don't have to do it at all.

But this is a dish that if you try it, I promise you'll love it.

 I hope you give this a try and I hope that you realize that the things you buy in the grocery store are not

So this has no preservatives and this is nothing but goodness for your body.

 I hope that you subscribe to my channel and let me know if you have any great salad dressing ideas because I love to try

 And if you have any other requests or any other videos, again, thanks for watching and remember life's full of choices.

 Okay, so the simplest way to solve a Rubik's Cube is to by first remove a cube.

 Now to do this you will need a pen, a fork, or you can just use your finger.

 Twist the cube 45 degrees and then lodge the pen or whatever you're using under the middle cube, push up, and take it out.

 Okay, so the next thing that you need to do is make a cross with all of your cubes.

 Now what I mean by making a cross is taking all of your middle cubes on one side, not any of the corners, and making a cross.

 Your next step is to flip your cube over and then put all of your corner pieces in.

 To put your corner pieces in, simply have the green side face down, put the corner piece just above these two middle pieces, and let it slide down.

 Okay, once you have put in all of your corner pieces, it's time to move on to the second layer by putting in the two sided pieces.

 Now you're only going to do three because the last one, well, it's just a lot easier to get in at the very end.

 Okay, so to get your third layer, look for the cube that you didn't put in on the second layer and make that face away from you.

 Now put that corner piece in and surround that corner piece with the corresponding cubes.

 Now to get these in, you need to twist the cube 45 degrees and put in your cube.

 Now, rotate your cube so that the two pieces that haven't been put in are facing up.

 Put them in, or the corner piece in, twist it 45 degrees, and put your final and last piece in.

 Hi, my name is Dale Turner, and I teach a variety of acoustic and electric rhythm guitar

 And that passage you just heard me picking through is an acoustic strumming figure with

 a melody line in the middle, reminiscent of John Lennon's playing in Norwegian Wood.

 This is actually happening all around an open D chord, and if you fret a D chord conventionally,

 And John Lennon's taken advantage of that by using it to fret other notes on the third

 But what I'd like to start off with is his classic finger style pattern that ends up

 being the foundation for three Beatles classics, namely Julia, another one called Dear Prudence,

 I'm going to be cooking up some Rissles today, now Rissles are so easy to put together and

 Now I've already done a few other videos for variations on Rissles, now this particular

 one uses beef mince and we're going to flavour it up with cumin and coriander, I really love

 Now if you haven't got beef mince, you've got lamb mince, go and use that, it works

 equally well, but let's go through the ingredients and get on with the cooking.

 First of all I've got homemade breadcrumbs, I've got 40 grams of that, one small egg,

 250 grams of beef mince, but you can use lamb mince or any mince you like.

 Then I've got my onions, now with the onion I've actually used half an onion and I've

 actually put it in my processor to really blend it down really nice and fine.

 One garlic clove, again I've sort of crushed that through a machine and then I've got

 Now with this one I'm actually going to use half a teaspoon of ground coriander and half

 So let's get it all in the mix, mix it all up, fry it up, it'll be delicious.

 First of all, I mean it doesn't matter what order you do it in, but I've got my breadcrumbs,

 got my egg, now I'm going to put my garlic in there, crushed up garlic, put that in there.

 Fresh parsley gives it a lovely flavour and then I've got my onion.

 Now same as before, I'm just going to try and get as much juice, liquid out as possible.

 Give that a squeeze, use both hands, otherwise it gets really runny, so give that a squeeze

 and get it all out, put that in, there's a little bit more in there, that'll do.

 I'm going to add a little bit of salt and pepper to that, I'm going to add the pepper.

 Do these sort of things to taste obviously you know and a bit of salt, maybe a little

 Now I've got my ground cumin and ground coriander, I've got half a teaspoon of each, so put those

 I'm just going to grab that and just sort of mix it up, get it nicely mixed.

 Oh these smell good, I can smell the cumin and the coriander, lovely.

 Now I'm going to get a plate now, just get a plate and try and make them up roughly into

 about 8 balls and you know if you can try and make them a similar sort of size.

 Now this time I actually got 7 rather than 8 but it doesn't matter, let's go over to

 the hob and put them in a bit of seasoned flour, fry them up, be delicious.

 So again switch the heat on and say put it on about a medium heat, let the oil warm up.

 I think the oil is just about heated up, now I'm going to choose the largest ones first,

 I'm using them in whole grain flour, any flour, mix them up, use the biggest ones first, get

 them cooking and really just do that with all the rest, get them all mixed up in that flour,

 When you start cooking them up you'll smell the spices so it's a good time to open your

 door and let the people know that you're cooking some delicious food.

 Now again I would say 6 or 7 minutes somewhere around about depending on how thick you made

 If you're not sure, you know when you think they're cooked, take one out, chop it in half

 and make sure it's not pink in the middle because the thing about mince, you need to

 You know move them around, get them all nice and brown, serve them up, be delicious.

 So really we've just about been cooking these for 6 or 7 minutes, flip them over and I'm

 Beautiful, they smell really delicious at the moment so there you go, all ready to go,

 Right let's put them on the plate, look at those, don't they look delicious.

 Well I lost one of those, it's on the floor but I'm not going to pick that up.

 What I will do is, I'm just going to wipe the plate, get rid of the evidence.

 Got to get some new plates, that one's got a chip but never mind.

 Now remember this has got cumin, coriander and let's have a look.

 Now again, when you're cooking your meatballs, make sure they're cooked in the middle, you

 can always sort of open it up like I have and make sure it's not pink.

 I love it, I really like this one, beautiful, that is really tasty.

 I'm going to serve that up to the guests and see what they think.

 Now just before I go, don't forget I've got another few videos with different variations

 We have an early model Chevrolet small block V8, and we're going to go through the steps

 Before performing a cooling system repair, it's recommended to flush the cooling system

 With the cooling system flushed and completely drained, we'll disconnect the negative battery

 Before starting your repair, you always want to be sure you're working with a cool engine.

 Remove the alternator from its brackets and set it to the side.

 Your application may have more accessory drive items that you'll have to remove to gain access

 Make sure it does not have any excessive play or wobble that would create a water pump failure.

 Be sure and capture any residual coolant that may be behind the water pump.

 You'll be required to remove the pulley studs and install them into the new pump.

 If using a silicone-based type sealant, only lightly apply it to the gasket surface areas,

 Your application may have a heater hose or a pipe plug installed into the back of the

 You'll have to remove this from the old pump and install on the new.

 With the pump bolted into position, install the lower radiator hose.

 Any debris that is caught between the pulley and the flange of the water pump can cause

 We will finish tightening them after installing the drive belt.

 Refill the cooling system with coolant and distilled water to manufacturer specifications.

 A faulty pressure cap can lead to an inefficient cooling system.

 If you do not have access to a pressure tester, these are available at your local parts store.

 Allow the engine to reach operating temperature and check for leaks.

 Once you have built it up to 4 rows, squeeze it into a cup shape.

 on the 3rd row, you're going to remove the middle piece and replace it with black.

 Then next to the white bits in the vest, go to the green pieces on the sides.

 and then go down in a line, and that's where you insert the feet.

 So then all you need to do is just glue in some black bead eyes,

 Welcome to Snack Tub Korea, where every Monday, we review Korean snacks.

 And today, I'm going to close my eyes and pick two random snacks.

 And the term Monaca, I've never heard of it, but in English, they translate it as jam

 They come in individual packages, and they're kind of smashed because they've been in the

 This is his leg, and he's like jumping and something like that.

 From an adult's perspective who loves bland food, three out of five K-pop stars.

 Binch is a biscuit and chocolate snack, and on the back, we've got the nutrition facts.

 I guess each cracker has a different design, and the back is just a biscuit.

 Once you open it and you have it in your hand, you got to eat it because it's going to melt

 There's no place where your fingers are not going to touch a piece of chocolate.

 It tastes like Pepero, but instead of a stick, it's in the form of a round cookie.

 I want to open all the packets because I'm curious what other designs are on the chocolate.

 When would you eat the Binch, and when would you eat the Pepero?

 And if you like the thrill, the suspense, on knowing what design is on your chocolate,

 You can't go wrong with chocolate and biscuit, and Binch has got the perfect amount of chocolate

 Let's sprinkle on some cinnamon and place some leaves of cilantro.

 It's hot tempered because of the ginger and the cayenne pepper.

 I gotta say, this is one of the best concoctions I've ever come up with.

 It's got cinnamon, holiday warm sweetness, the chocolate sweetness, the guilty sweet,

 and the ginger and the cayenne pepper bring it just enough spice.

 I wish my hand could jump out of your laptop or computer, whatever you're watching me on,

 Today we're gonna specifically focus on how Korean singles in Korea.

 I'm going to be converting this natural gas grill over to charcoal.

 And we were actually going to throw this away, but I decided to convert it over because I

 You need a pair of pliers, and that's to pull the pin on the burner itself.

 We paid close to $800 for this grill, and we bought another one.

 That's pretty much all you do to clean the junk out of the bottom.

 I just went ahead and prepared some charcoal, a little couple pieces of wood.

 As you can see, I put this in here to catch all the junk and the droppings at the very,

 But I'm going to reuse it because it seems to be in pretty good condition.

 Just make sure that the air vents are still in so it will breathe.

 You need it to breathe or else the fire is not going to stay lit.

 You can put charcoal on here and put one on one side and another on the other.

 I don't like using lighter fluid but I will use a little bit if I have to.

 Instead of going out and buying another smoker or grill, I just recycled this one.

 Oh my gosh, you have not lived until you've had authentic Hawaiian chicken.

 Hi, I'm Chef Jason Hill and I'm on the North Shore of Oahu at one of the famous roadside

 Huli Huli, which means turn turn, refers to flipping the chicken on the grill.

 It was invented in 1955 by Ernest Morgado, who decided to grill his famous teriyaki chicken

 Okay, to make this Hawaiian barbecue chicken, prepare the barbecue chicken marinade the

 I've tried this as a barbecue rotisserie chicken, but to be honest, I prefer the results when

 This recipe for barbecue chicken calls for quarter cup of hoisin sauce, quarter cup of

 brown sugar, quarter cup of ketchup, quarter cup of Hawaiian honey or regular honey, quarter

 cup of concentrated frozen pineapple juice, two tablespoons of sesame oil, and two teaspoons

 of garlic shallot puree or three cloves of mashed garlic, and one tablespoon of grated

 Make sure you pound out the brown sugar clumps and the pineapple, frozen pineapple concentrate.

 For this Asian influence marinade, if you want to make it spicy, you can always add

 Okay, I've placed my eight cut up pieces of chicken into a bag.

 Now you're going to pour all the marinade over the chicken and get every last drop.

 Just seal up your bag, try to get as much air out as possible and work the marinade

 You may want to pull this out of the fridge every hour or so if you can and just kind

 You don't have to marinate this overnight in the refrigerator, but I highly recommend

 Alright, I'm just going to put this in the refrigerator and we're going to be ready to

 Alright now that the chicken's been marinating overnight, it's time to hit the grill.

 And after we get some nice turns on these and mark them, we're going to move them over

 to the right burner on low and I've got my smoker box going and we're going to let them

 Alright after a couple of minutes on high, we're going to turn, turn, hooli, hooli the

 Alright now after we've turned it two times on the skin side, we're going to turn it over.

 After we sear the chicken on both sides for about five minutes each, it's time to move

 We're going to close the lid and we're going to let the smoker box take over.

 I've got a video on this and I've got the kiawe wood in there which is also known as

 Don't forget your larger pieces of chicken are going to take longer so you're actually

 Before taking your chicken off the grill, make sure the internal temperature reaches

 Okay after about 35 minutes over here on the low side, we're past our 165 degree mark.

 If you want to bring a taste of Hawaiian barbecue to your own backyard, give this recipe a try.

 Today on Doodle Draw Art I'm going to show you how to make an easy Mother's Day card.

 So what you can do is to start off with a regular piece of paper and fold it in half.

 And what we're going to do is we're going to write a special message for Mom and we're going

 right here in the middle and for this M we're going to angle outward.

So these M's are leaning in a little bit and now we're just going to put the O

 to write on here we're going to write turn this card upside down.

 So now when you turn the card upside down it's going to say wow.

 So now when we open the card we should probably write upside down.

So I'm going to use my sharpie to outline this and I'll do it in time lapse.

 all right so you can also decorate this with flowers or hearts whatever you like.

 flowers are the best choice because when you turn the card upside down the flowers will be

 All right so be sure to comment rate and subscribe and maybe in the comments below

 you could say what special things you're going to do to celebrate Mother's Day.

 So in this video I'm going to show you how I did crochet braids for my friend.

 I actually started this hairstyle on myself about 3 weeks ago and it just didn't turn

 But I just wanted the curls because the curls are the icing on the cake and you can't have

 It was okay but I wasn't 100% happy with it and I can't share something that I'm not

 So I'm going to show you how I prepared the hair and installed it on her head.

 If you want your hair to be not too full as hers was then you can use less hair if

 The only thing that I didn't like was preparing the hair itself.

 If you'd like to see how I did this hairstyle then please keep watching.

 You will need Mali braiding hair, scissors to cut your hair with, a Denman brush, a large

 I did 6 braids in the middle which are connected in the center to create one braid at the back.

 And I just braided all the way down to the back and then I braided all the braids together

 I'm cutting about 3 inches of hair at the bottom because I didn't want to cut it in

 And then using my Denman brush I'm just brushing the hair through cutting away all the fly

 Now taking the curling rod I'm going to wrap the hair around the curling rod and as I'm

 doing so I am also twisting because that's what's going to give the hair a nice curl.

 I'm making sure I wrap the hair around the rod tight and as close together as possible

 until all the hair is finished and then I close the curling rod to secure the hair.

 I used two different size rods to see which curl comes out better so I used the medium

 Now I'm just taking both of them and dipping them in hot boiling water and I let them sit

 So the hair is still wet and I'm just removing it from the rod and this is the curl pattern

 And now I'm removing the hair from the small curling rod and this is the curl pattern I

 got from the small curling rod which I prefer a lot more than the medium curling rod.

 Now to see if the curl, if the hair has been curled properly, I'm just stretching the hair

 to see if the curl reverts back and it does revert back as you can see so it's very good.

 And if you want to separate your hair, do that before the hair is dry to minimize freeze.

 To install the hair, I'm taking the latch hook and sliding it under the braid, attaching

 Once I've done that, I'm going to create a loop and bring the end of the hair through

 the loop, twist it and bring it through again and then tighten it.

 So this is the technique I'm using for the rest of the hair except for the middle part

 For the invisible part, I'm going to take the latch hook, insert it under the braid,

 attach the hair extension and slide it under the braid, bringing it to the other side.

 Creating a loop, I'm going to take only one piece of hair this time, bring it through

 the loop, twist it, bring it through the loop again and then tighten it so that the knot

 So as you can see, there's no knots visible on the middle part.

 It looks as if the hair is coming out of our scalp so that's what I was aiming for.

 Now I'm repeating the same technique on the other side of the middle part.

 Don't forget to subscribe, comment and share and I'll see you in my next video.

 Chef Chas Fabel here at Stew Leonard's R&D Kitchen, and this time of year, which is January, it's National Soup Month,

 we're going to make some hearty soups that are going to warm you up and keep you nice and cozy throughout the cold weather.

 The first soup we're going to make is a chicken chili, and it's an award-winning soup.

 So we're going to start off with a little bit of olive oil, 2 tablespoons in a hot pan.

 I'm just going to let the flavor start to come out of the onion, let it sweat a little bit.

 Just a touch of sugar, because we have a little bit of tomato product, so this will help cut down on the acidity.

 And I have a little cilantro, but I'm going to reserve that for the end.

 And they smoke it and we make a little puree out of it, and it really has great flavor.

 And it's really going to bring this chili to a new level with that spice.

 All right, at this time you can see I have all my herbs, my onions in.

 And again, like any poultry, you just want to make sure you fully cook it.

 This is going to simmer on the stove for a while, so as long as you brown the meat now,

 All right, so I'm going to take my chicken, and I'm going to put it on the stove.

 I'm going to put it on the stove for about five minutes, and then I'm going to take my chicken,

 and it should be in good shape later on when you go to serve it.

 As soon as this starts taking on some color, I'm going to add one bell pepper, green,

 One of the things that's going to help this cook is when I add the stock.

 This is one cup of chicken stock, and as I pour this in, it's going to help really break down that chicken meat

 Typically, this will take about another four or five minutes, and then what we do is add our tomato product.

 and again, we added a little sugar before because there's a lot of acid in the tomato.

 At this point, I want to add the beans, and for this chili, we're going to add three different beans.

 This is a great northern bean or a white bean, 15 ounces again, and a black bean.

 This is actually a lower-fat version of your traditional chili,

 and the beans really give it a lot of protein without adding the fat or cholesterol.

 This time of year, I'm using frozen, but if you're making this during the summer, by all means, use fresh.

 This is a fresh sea salt, a little bit of cracked black pepper,

 and at the very end, this is fresh cilantro, which I've chopped up,

 At this point, I'm going to lower the heat, and we're going to let this simmer for probably about 20 minutes,

 ensuring everything's cooked inside and all the flavors have come together.

 I do have a little bit prepared already, and one of the things I like to do is serve it in a bread bowl.

 By all means, you can just put this in a regular bowl and serve it with nachos,

 You can cool it down and make a nice seven-layer dip with it as well.

 And if you really want to make it a more satisfying meal, just add a little bit of cheddar cheese,

 a dollop of sour cream or two, and a little bit more cilantro on top.

 And there you have it, Stu Leonard's Chicken Chili from the award-winning cookbook.

 He's had a bunch of different people work on it and apparently it hasn't really come out.

 But as a reminder, we've done a few different videos about working on leather.

 The first stage is hitting it with a little bit of plastic cleaner.

 We'll go to step two and we'll go to step three as to how this is coming out.

 And you say to yourself, oh okay, I got some dirt out but oh man, it didn't come out.

 I like to put it right on the spot because this particular spot I have a tendency of rubbing the cleaner in.

 So this is step two saying okay, so the first step didn't come out.

 And I don't know if you can notice but a little suds coming out.

 So step two I go, ah, you know what, it's not really coming out.

 I like to use it nice and light and easy because this is an older car.

 Well, you know what, I'll grab it right now so you can see a little bit and then put it back.

 That's a, that's a, I don't know, paint stain or something from years ago.

 And the owner told me that he's had two different people work on this trying to get this out.

 Now, I don't know if you can see this, hopefully the camera's straight.

 I'm not pushing too much because you can go through the leather.

 And then of course afterwards I'm going to leather condition it.

 The owner's going to freak out because he's had this thing for years and years and years.

 So, anyways, I've done this a few different times for you guys.

 And then lastly, if it's not coming out and I don't really like to use it all the time, is this brush.

 Just like you do the outside of a car where you do the least amount of abrasive possible.

 And then I go to the pad if that's the last case to get it out.

 But a lot of times the first step and the second step are all you need.

 Does your semi yearn for eggs that are perfectly yellow and rectangular?

 This week on Cook Like a Yuki, the almost perfect semi breakfast.

 Clean the kombu kelp with a wet paper towel, then place in a pot.

 Strain the liquid to remove lines of the paper towel to get clear soup.

 Stir the miso paste through a sieve that's sitting in the dashi stock.

 Place the cute tofu in a bowl, then pour the hot miso soup on top and garnish with

 To make cute sausage patties, I used an onigiri mold lined with plastic wrap.

 Just press your favorite ground sausage into the mold, release, and then fry.

 Lightly beat the eggs in a bowl, then add the soy sauce and mirin.

 Then oil the fry pan with a paper towel coated with cooking oil.

 You may want to test the pan to make sure it's hot enough to cook.

 Pour a third of the egg mixture into the pan and spread out completely.

 Then loosen the eggs along the sides of the pan and roll the egg as best you can toward

 Slide the egg back toward one end of the opposite end of the pan and oil the free space in the

 Lift the rolled up egg so that it can go underneath and cook for about another minute or so.

 Flip the egg out onto a plate and while it's still hot, use a paper towel to shape the

 Next, you want to cut the egg into about quarter to half inch slices.

 To make it especially cute, you can also cut the ends of the egg slices to make little

 In the meantime, pork tanjiro soup suitable for bribing any seme.

One of the reasons we're going to dry age this, we'll take this USDA choice beef and turn it into the most tender, delectable, beefy tasting steaks you can imagine.

 One of the reasons why a lot of the top chop houses are serving dry aged beef.

Basically what's happening is the enzymes in the beef are going in there and tenderizing it, making the flavors a lot more concentrated.

We are going to be using the Umai dry steak bag here, which is a system that allows us to do this at home.

 We don't need the big special coolers and the humidifier controlled environment and everything.

 Basically it forms a membrane on the meat that allows all the gases and oxygen to leave, but it doesn't let anything penetrate.

What I'm going to do is grab that rim that I folded down and pull this up.

What you want to do is make sure that you get that whole cut off to the corner, into the lower corner of this bag.

 Because I folded it back so much, I didn't end up with any juices or anything up here.

But had any of the juices got on that part of the bag, you want to make sure you wipe it down.

It's just basically a strip of fibers that allows your vacuum sealer to suck the air out of the bag.

You want to make sure that it's making contact with the heat bar as well as going into the vacuum chamber.

As this thing's running, what I'm going to be doing is massaging the air out of the bag.

What I'm going to do is back this up and just give it one more seal for safety's sake.

 Alright, so I'm going to observe this bag for a few minutes before I put it in the fridge just to make sure there's no leaks, it's not compromised in any way.

 Then I'm going to place it in my refrigerator and we're going to go for 28 days with this particular piece of meat.

 Alright guys, 28 days have passed and this is what we're left with.

 What I've done is I've taken a big piece of meat that I paid a little over $8 a pound for and I increased the value of this significantly.

 Alright, so as you can see from that dry-age process, we're left with an almost waxy kind of a bark on this meat.

I am going to save those scraps, however, for making a sausage or something.

 We can do a little cleaning up here and there on the individual steaks as we get this cut.

 And again, I paid a little over $8 a pound, which isn't real cheap,

 And it is just going to be way more tender and just have a very intense flavor.

 The link will be attached probably at the end, but also check the description box below.

 Once I got it vacuum sealed in the fridge, it just took care of itself.

 To get the right flick in the prawn, you use a nice stiff graphite rod.

 We're in the middle of September, the water temperature is nice and high.

 Because we're fishing a bit shallow, we'll take one of the leads out.

 We're going to let the current roll the lure down deep into the snag.

 Once it hits the bottom, we'll give it a couple of little flicks.

 Rice, it's one of the world's most important and most versatile of foods.

 And one of the great culinary marriages is that of rice and the chicken.

 It's a splendid combination of carbohydrate and protein, which can't help itself from tasting superb,

 That consists of sautéing quite a large quantity of thin onion slices in a combination of oil and a tiny amount of butter,

 Now I pour in some chicken stock, just to cover and then a little more.

 On goes the lid, down goes the heat, and it's just allowed to simmer at that wonderful bloop-bloop rate that I like so much.

I buy skinned, boned thigh, and about 500 grams would be enough for four people in this pilau.

 Once cut, I get a very clean plastic bag and put in some spices.

 Five spice, of course, that fabulous combination of star anise, cinnamon, clove, Sichuan pepper, and fennel.

 And I just gently saute them in a little oil, some sesame oil and perhaps a peanut oil or an olive oil, one that's low in saturated fat.

 Give them four minutes, and when they're cooked, I remove them and toast some nuts.

 Pecan nuts are fine, or of course we could use the macadamia nut, the Australian nut, or a combination of the two.

 Don't forget that nuts are high in fat, good fats, but nevertheless high in fat.

It's now just a matter of combining all the ingredients, the rice, the chicken, the nuts, currants, corn, and it's almost ready to serve.

 They just have to be quickly browned, and I choose to do this in a non-stick pan.

 I like to accompany the chicken pilau with a cucumber and tomato salad.

 And I think that a glass of an Australian Riesling would be absolutely perfect.

 Hi guys, this is JessicaD1987 and today I'm going to show you guys how to make a really

 If you hear noise in the background, my children are up in their playroom as well as Baby Justice

 So in this pot here, I'm going to turn it on medium heat and I'm going to add in, I'm

 going to have the ingredients listed in the description box as well as the directions

 to complete this, but really quickly, I'm going to add in 2 cups of ketchup or you can

 So so far we've added 2 cups of ketchup or tomato sauce, whichever you have, 2 thirds

 of a cup of plain tap water, and now I'm going to add in my spices and I'll have it listed

 I'm going to add in 5 tablespoons of light brown sugar or dark if you have it.

 And if you hear baby Justice cry, once again, she just got surgery yesterday on her fingers,

 And then when it's done, you can store it in the refrigerator for up to 1 month.

 You can use it in your homemade baked bean recipe, which I will try to post a video showing that recipe in the future.

 It has no preservatives, no high fructose corn syrup, so it's healthier and cheaper for your family for you to make it at home.

 And if you do, please request, do a video response or leave me a comment and let me know how you guys liked it.

 My name is Jay and welcome to this edition of Sleight of Hand 101.

 Today we're going to be working on a beginner based flourish, something you can nail down

 It's called the card spring and I think you guys will really enjoy it.

 By the end of this video you will be able to perform a card spring.

 Now as I previously mentioned, the card spring is a beginner based flourish.

 Now this flourish is very visual and works really well to your spectators or if you

 It's very cliche in magician's routines and even people that are not doing sleight of

 hand magic and they have a deck of cards doing some gimmicked card trick, they always like

 It's really great to throw in after a flourish or after a trick if you're transitioning or

 if you're just shuffling the deck and you want to move right into a card spring.

 It's something that you should definitely put in your arsenal especially when you're

 Some people like to do a technique by bending the cards straight up like this.

 I like to do the technique by using the corners of the deck to spring the cards.

 I hold the deck in my left hand so the card spring is going to happen in my right hand

 So to start out you want to take your middle finger, your pointer finger, and your ring

 finger and you want to position those on the top of the deck like so.

 So that's going to be right smack dab on the top right corner of the deck.

 So if you're holding the deck you want to go to the top right corner, okay, or if you're

 holding the deck this way you want to go top left corner, you know, whichever way you're

 So you could technically do it like this, but you do want supporting fingers.

 It just keeps the cards together and it creates less of a mess basically.

 So your middle finger is here, your pointer finger is supporting right next to your middle

 finger on the left side or the right side depending on your hand.

 And you're creating not necessarily because this is not a square, you're not creating

 a completely diagonal bend, but you are creating somewhat of a diagonal bend in the cards like

 Now the point is, what you want to do, and I would do this before you actually start

 it, is I would hold the deck with your other hand and use your thumb to riffle because

 that's what you're doing is you're using your thumb to riffle off the cards.

 Your middle finger, your pointer finger, and your ring finger are just there for the bend

 And what you're doing in this situation is literally just applying so much pressure that

 That's the one problem with doing a card spring is your cards will bend.

 But if you bend them back every time, you do something like this, go into your next

 So we're in our position, middle finger, pointer finger, ring finger, thumb on the back, okay,

 Well, I would not suggest doing it from a great distance at the beginning, especially

 I would go like this, something very simple where you can just riffle the cards in there.

 So don't get confused and try and use your middle finger to press that way.

 So you're in this position, like I said, hold the cards close to your hand like this.

 Definitely don't do it from a distance, not until you're at least decent at doing it and

 But I do promise you will most likely drop the cards and that's fine.

 It takes a little bit of practice, but you can master this one pretty quickly.

 It's going to be a little strenuous on this part of your thumb.

 Can't really show you, but this part here and then the pad down here, it's going to

 Another way to do it is when you're pressing with your thumb, almost do one of these where

 Now I've got a hitchhiker's thumb, so it looks really like fluid that way.

 But what you want to do here, press and then as you're pressing, start moving your thumb

 So you're applying the pressure, the pressure, the pressure, the pressure.

 And once you get kind of down in this area, you're not even using the tip of your thumb

 So it goes from applying the pressure, you're basically and literally using your top part

 Now, when you can do this, okay, that's when you know, maybe, maybe not, you might be ready

 And people think it's very cliche for a magician to do a card spring.

 So it's great to have in your arsenal, especially after a trick or after a flourish.

 If you're having trouble, make sure you go back and watch the video over again.

 It might take me a day or two, but I will definitely reply and I'll definitely help

 And if you like this video, make sure you hit that like button.

 Make sure you guys check out the description box before you go so you can check out my

 If you're interested in learning a little bit more about my life or what's going on

 with these videos, because I know it's been a while since I've posted, check out the Facebook

 It's hard to answer those questions when all of it's on my Facebook page, all of it's on

 We are on day 7 of the HealthKids Make Incredible Juicing Guide, and today we're going to

 Now kids, in my honest opinion, of all the things that have ever been put into a bottle

 and mass produced for people to drink, V8 is probably as good as it gets as far as your

 So today we're going to pay homage to this great drink by making our own homemade version

 And of course it's raw, vegan, lots of really different nutritious ingredients, and it's

 So to get started, what we need is a large tomato cut into 4 pieces, 2 carrots, 2 pieces

 of celery, 1 half bunch of spinach, and half a bunch of parsley.

 So to get started, we're going to take our tomatoes and put them into the juicer and

 Alright, so now we have our juice done, all that mixed in there.

 So I'm going to start mixing this up just to make sure it's nice and blended.

 Now one thing you'll notice is that I started with the carrots and tomatoes, did the greens

 in the middle, and then followed it up with the beet and celery.

 If you're juicing something, and you have a mixture of hard and soft ingredients, it's

 good to use the soft ingredients in the middle because soft ingredients don't juice as well,

 and you want to juice something hard afterwards just to make sure you get the extra missing

 juice that you didn't get the first time to make sure it all comes out.

 So now that I have this all mixed up, I'm going to pour it into my glass here.

 Definitely has a deep reddish vegetable color, which of course means it's going to be very,

 Now in order to add a little bit of extra spice or pizzazz, I think you have 2 good

 You can either add some salt, it'll taste more like regular V8 that way because of course

 My favorite is to add some hot sauce, which I'm just going to do here.

 So now that I have that added in, I'm just going to take a sip and enjoy.

 But somebody knew that I would have a hard time playing it that way, so they fixed it

 But you're supposed to put your left hand on top because later on this right hand has

 If you don't, believe me, you're not going to be able to play this well.

 When you use your right hand, you put it between the thumb and the end of the bell.

 Now I always have the beginning players to hold their fingers out like that.

 Because if they have their fingers in here, they're going to tend to do this.

 In order to blow it, you have to place your bottom lip on that bottom edge, top lip on

 You want to hold it so that your elbows are right at your side.

 Now you don't want your horn all the way up to your chest, nor do you want it out like

 If you have it down at the side correctly and your shoulder's right, it'll be about

 So that's your, put it on your chin like that and then come up.

 Now, after you've learned that, then what you want to do is be able to breathe into

 Now once you've learned how to breathe into it, learned how to hold it, and learned a

 little bit about the mechanics of it, then I suppose you're going to want to try to

 Well, you learned how to tongue it, you learned how to breathe into it, you learned how to

 If you put this finger in this thumb here, by the way, that is B. And so you play B.

 So if you can put one more finger down, you got A, and one more finger down, you got G.

 Play it at parties, impress your friends, and be able to keep yourself out of trouble

 I'm going to start this off with some olive oil and some butter.

 I'm just going to cook this over medium heat until it gets soft.

 As I was frying them, I would take some of this stuff out so it wouldn't burn.

 As soon as I smooth this out, which will happen, I'll put the rest of the broth in.

 I'm going to add some salt because the beef broth that I bought did not have any salt in it.

 I'm going to let this cook for about five minutes just to thicken up a little bit.

 I'm going to turn it down so it doesn't boil and it just gently bubbles.

 I'm going to go ahead and put some sour cream in here, about maybe three tablespoons.

 Analytical balances are sophisticated measuring devices and must be used and cared for as

 Balances are placed in a permanent location on a firm surface where they will not be disturbed

 Devices must be cleaned at all times, and spills must be cleaned immediately.

 Balances are checked either daily or weekly with a calibration weight according to specific

 Weighing by addition or weighing by addition with tare is a weighing method in which the

 empty receiving vessel is tared or put to zero mass on the balance and a bulk sample

 Press the tare bar and wait until a stable zero reading is obtained.

 Without touching with bare hands and using finger cots or lint-free tissue, place a clean,

 dry weighing bottle or other suitable weighing container on the analytical balance.

 Replace the weighing container and contents on the balance pan.

 Close the compartment door and allow the balance to equilibrate.

 The mass indicated on the balance readout is the actual mass added.

 Once all of the required samples are obtained, ensure the balance is clean and turned off.

 Weighing by difference with tare is a method used when several duplicate masses of a material

 Determine an amount of material that is slightly greater than the mass of sample required.

 The sample should be placed into a clean, dry weighing bottle with lid.

 Prior to use, ensure that the analytical balance is both clean and level.

 Without touching the bottle with your fingers, place the weighing bottle on the analytical

 Remove some sample with a spatula and transfer to a receiving vessel.

 Return the weighing bottle to the balance pan and allow the balance to equilibrate.

 The negative value indicated on the balance readout is the actual mass placed into the

 Today in this episode we are making up another simple yet delicious dish, Lemon Chicken with

 It's nicely spiced, tangy, great served up with some steamed rice.

 Now I'm going to add in the onions, followed by the ginger, the garlic.

 And I'm going to stir and saute these, I'd say just about for two minutes, just until

 And I'm going to stir and saute this just until it's tender crisp.

 Okay, now that the asparagus is tender crisp, and you can just about tell because it's going

 Okay, in the same pan, and you don't want to wash this or wipe this because you've got

 And I'm just going to fry this until it's cooked through and golden brown.

 Now the chicken is about half cooked and just beginning to turn brown.

 I'm going to stir and saute this for, oh I'd say, an additional four minutes.

 After about eight minutes, and our chicken is nicely brown, I'm going to set this aside

 Alright, using the same pan once again, I'm going to add in the chicken stock.

 And I'll just give this a stir until everything is nicely coated with the sauce.

 And this is just two tablespoons of cornstarch diluted in two tablespoons of water.

 Now the sauce has thickened and reached a really nice consistency, you're ready to serve.

It's nicely spiced and has a really good tang to it just because of the lemon.

 And there you have it, our lemon chicken and asparagus stir fry.

 Well, Thanksgiving is on the 14th of October so I'm going to make my pies.

 I have a quarter cup of my dehydrated squash and one tablespoon of my pumpkin pie spice.

 Now if you don't have dehydrated squash or pumpkin, go ahead and use one cup of pureed

 Okay, first and foremost, we need to rehydrate our squash and our pumpkin pie.

 60% of the pureed pumpkin that you buy in the store is actually squash.

 Now I've actually put my spices right in with my dehydrated pumpkin and I'm just going to

 And while that does that, I'm going to get our pie shells over here.

 And I'm just going to put that on there and we're going to get that whipping.

 I'm just going to dump it in there because it's going right in the oven.

 Okay here's our pie shells and I'm only doing one, but I'm also doing a little deep dish

 one for Papa because if you think I'm going to get away with making a pie without giving

 Now I took a little bit of extra pastry and I took a cookie cutter and I cut out a big

 And when these pies are half cooked, I'm going to drop these on top.

 You don't put them on when it's liquidy because they'll just sink.

 Now remember folks, this stuff swells, so don't overfill your pie shell.

 Now this does one deep dish pie, or obviously one regular pie and one little pie.

 So these are going into a 425 degree oven for 15 minutes and then we are going to turn

 I went ahead and I put my little pastry on top, halfway through the baking process.

 And there is Papa's little hunk of pumpkin pie as he likes to call them.

 We'll be back when this cools down and after dinner and Papa has a taste of his pumpkin pie.

Wolfie from our half acre homestead saying Papa waits all year for his

 Hello, today I'll show you what to do with the excess of marrows that you've got in the garden, or courgettes,

 You just can't eat them all at the same time, you can't freeze them, so you've got a limited option of preserving them.

 Those yellow ones I think are more tender, but we always plant two because they look good together.

 When they are big like this, they are still edible, they are still tender.

 You can see that when I put my nail there, the skin is still nice and soft.

 But the seeds inside are quite hard, so you can't use them for bottling.

 So you can cut it in half, remove the seeds and then chop the rest.

 Basically, you need some onions, garlic, this is celery leaves, it's optional.

 And as I said, you can slice them, you can chop them like this,

 I sterilize mine in the oven, because it's much easier and I'm lazy.

 So you just wash them, put them in the oven, temperature about 150 degrees centigrade,

 Basically, it's water, vinegar, sugar, a pinch of salt and some herbs.

 Sometimes I also add red peppers and then the jars look really nice.

 Don't leave a lot of space, because it's a waste of jar, really.

 Up to here, because you have to add the liquid, so you need some space for that.

 So you don't need a lot of liquid, because there's not a lot of space left.

 You can check, put it upside down, check if it's leaking or not.

 Now all you have to do is put it in the oven to stir well, to pasteurize it.

 Leave it in the oven temperature about 120 degrees for 20 minutes, half an hour.

 Here we bottled courgettes with red peppers, cauliflower, some peas, garlic.

 You can also put a teaspoon of oil or a tablespoon of oil on top.

 Maybe you'll produce something nice and original that you'll want to share.

 I really, really like you and I just really hope you feel the same way about me.

 So, I'm going to first use some primer just so I know my foundation is going to stay on very well throughout the night or wherever I'm going with the costume.

 And after that I'm going to use my Garnier Fructis Eye Roller to make sure that I have no visible dark circles and blend that in.

 Next, I'm going to contour my face with Hoola by Benefit and I'm also going to be blending that in because I don't want the lines too harsh.

 So, before the eyeshadow, I am going to be priming my eyes and then I'm going to be using Drink Me, Eat Me by Urban Decay.

 This is the Alice in Wonderland palette and I'm applying it on my lower lash line and my eyelids and my inner corners.

 Next, I'm grabbing these two very light purples and applying that on the crease.

 It kind of comes out a little pinkish, but that's kind of what I was going for.

 Now, for more shimmer, I am going to be applying some of this sparkling shadow just on my lid and I also wet the brush just a little bit.

 And after I did my eyebrows like I usually do, I applied some mascara and then my false lashes.

 These lashes are really long and kind of have that flirty look, so I really like them.

 Now, I'm applying some White Rabbit from my Urban Decay palette on my lower lash line.

 And I'm applying a lot of blush because I just want to look so pretty and pink on my cheeks.

 So, now I'm applying some Mary Lou Manizer and this is a highlighter by The Balm as well.

This is by Makeup Forever and I was going to wear red, but then I decided I just wanted to stick with the pink.

 So, I applied this and then I went in the middle of my lips with some lip gloss just so I could add a little bit of sparkle.

 So, then I decided I needed a little more sparkle on my face, so I added some of that white loose powder just on the top part of my cheeks.

 And right here, I'm applying some of my favorite pearl earrings.

 I didn't use the original tank that the costume came with because it was a little too tight.

 Or, if you are like me and like to feel comfortable on Halloween, you will definitely pick the flats.

 Maintaining your MSR stove ensures safe and efficient performance.

 Two types of maintenance kits are available for each model of MSR liquid fuel stove.

 The annual maintenance kit includes tools and parts needed to perform basic maintenance on your stove and pump.

 The expedition service kit includes everything you will need for comprehensive maintenance and repair.

 To perform all the maintenance described in this video, you will need the Whisperlite Expedition Service Kit.

 After several months of frequent use, deposits may have built up in the fuel line and be clogging the jet.

 If your stove's performance is compromised, first try and clear the jet by using the stove's built-in shaker needle.

 If the stove still performs poorly, it may be necessary to conduct a comprehensive cleaning of the fuel line and jet.

 If this does not improve performance, then perform maintenance on the pump.

 Close the control valve on the pump to turn off the stove and wait 5 minutes for it to cool down.

 Disconnect the stove's fuel line from the pump and shake the stove up and down.

 Over time, these deposits can build up to the point where they cannot be cleared by the shaker needle.

 In these cases, the stove may require more extensive cleaning of the jet and fuel line.

 If you have the Whisperlite International, unscrew the priming cup and remove the wick.

 Slide out the fuel line generator loop, then replace the priming cup to keep the pot supports in place.

 Using the jet and cable tool, unscrew the stove's jet and shaker needle.

 Manually clear the jet using the jet cleaning wire or the needle on the shaker.

 The hole in your stove's jet is very small, but can be seen when held up to a light.

 If the jet has a blockage that you cannot clear, then replace it with a new one from the Expedition Service Kit, making sure it is the same jet type.

 Two of these jets are specific to the Whisperlite International and have a letter code stamped on the head of the jet, indicating which fuels they can be used with.

 All three jets are provided in the Whisperlite Expedition Service Kit.

 Slide the cable tool over the tip of the fuel line cable and grab the cable by tilting the tool at an angle, then pull it out.

 The cable may need to be loosened with a common lubricant such as WD-40 or pump cup oil.

 Using 5 inch strokes, move the cable back and forth about 20 times to remove any deposits in the line.

 Reattach the fuel line to the pump and secure it with the latch.

 Making sure there are no ignition sources or flames nearby, open the valve and flush 3-4 tablespoons of fuel through the stove and into a container.

 Always operate the fuel bottle with the valve handle facing up.

 Replace the cable into the fuel line until it is almost completely inserted.

 To do this, place the shaker needle inside the jet before screwing it in.

 Remove the priming cup and slide the fuel line generator loop back into position.

 If using the Whisperlite International, be sure to replace the wick before securely fastening the priming cup.

 If the stove is still not running at full capacity, then repeat the cleaning process.

 Regular stove maintenance ensures that your stove performs well for years to come.

 It is recommended that you perform this maintenance check before taking the Whisperlite on expeditions or long trips.

 I'm going to make some cheese dip today and I'm going to use some parsley and garlic and

 this is leftover mozzarella, leftover cheddar, and leftover Swiss.

 And like if you were using something super hard like a hard parmesan, you would want

 And I'm going to continue, I'm going to mince this up, I'm going to put this through a garlic

 And here's the parsley and I forgot to tell you, you need 3 tablespoons of butter that's

 I don't think that's a pound so I have 4 ounces of goat cheese.

 I think I have more than a pound so I'm going to add a little bit more wine.

 And since I have some pimentos that are in a jar here, I'm going to just add some.

 Hello everyone, for those of you that have seen my teddy bear pop video, this part will be familiar because it is the same recipe, because I made both of these on the same day.

 So for those of you that haven't seen it though, this is a basic peanut butter cookie recipe.

 That's one cup of butter, one cup of white sugar, and one cup of brown sugar that you are going to cream together.

 Blend that until it's nice and creamy, then add in one and a half teaspoons of baking soda, and a half a teaspoon of salt.

 Then add in two and a half cups of all purpose flour, and blend that until you get a nice, creamy, smooth dough.

 This will be very soft and very sticky, so you'll need to put it in the refrigerator and allow it to chill for about an hour or so.

 Then you're going to make little ball shapes, approximately an inch and a half in diameter or so, but the size is completely up to you.

 And then I formed them into a bear paw shape, which is basically kind of like an egg shape.

 And at one end I used a wooden spoon just to make little toe shapes.

 These cookies spread quite a bit, so make sure you leave a couple of inches between each one.

 Then bake them at 375 degrees for 10-12 minutes until the bottoms and the edges are light brown.

 Allow them to cool on the cookie sheet for 5 minutes or so, then transfer to a wire rack to cool completely.

 Now you can dunk these into some chocolate or some candy melts.

 I'm using semi-sweet chocolate chips that I melted in the microwave.

 You can add a little bit of shortening to the chocolate if it is too thick.

 So dip the cookies, allow the excess to drip off, and then place them on a cookie sheet that's been covered with a silicone mat or some waxed paper.

 Now while that chocolate is still liquid, it hasn't set, you're going to press in the bear claws, which are cashews.

 These can be stored at room temperature in a covered container, but if you live in a very warm climate or making these in the summer,

 I suggest you leave them in the refrigerator so that you don't get chocolate all over your fingers when you're eating them.

 As you can probably tell, the indentations I made with the wooden spoon to make the little toe shapes didn't really show after they were baked because the cookies spread quite a bit.

 So either leave that out completely or make them a lot deeper when you are forming your cookies.

 And of course you don't have to use a peanut butter cookie, you can use any cookie recipe for this, but peanut butter and chocolate go so well together.

 These bear paw cookies will be great paired with teddy bear cookie pops.

 You can make one recipe of peanut butter cookie dough, and then make a little bit of each.

 If you want to see this teddy bear cookie pop tutorial, go ahead and click right on your screen or see the link in the about section below.

 Okay y'all so I already primed my eyes with my Urban Decay Primer Potion and then I put

 The red base I'm using is by NYX and it's the NYX Jumbo Pencil in Cherry and it's the

 And now what I'm about to do is take a red eyeshadow and the eyeshadow I'm using is by

 I'm just going to take this eyeshadow brush and I'm going to apply that all over my lid.

 Okay so I got that all over my lid and now I'm just taking a blending brush and I just

 I'm going to take a dark burgundy color and this is by Coastal Scents Hot Pot.

 I don't remember the name but this is the number right here on the back.

 I'm going to use this rounded pencil brush or rounded crease brush I guess you can call

 I'm just taking this and I'm going to go in with a reddish brown, a matte reddish brown

 I'm really not sure but that's the number right there on the back M24.

 It's smaller than the first one so I'm taking this small tapered blending brush and I'm

 I normally use a matte one but this time I'm going into this shimmery black one in my Petal

 I don't use this for my crease at all so I'm kind of liking this brush to use as a highlight

 Now for my inner corner I'm going into beige and this is by Envy Eye Cosmetics too.

 This is the color that I'm putting on my inner corner and I'm taking a small detail

 Now I'm about to go with that burgundy again that we put in the outer corner.

 I'm going in with the same Coastal Scents Hot Pot and I'm just going to apply that all

 Put on my lashes and the lashes that I'm using is by Cherry Blossom.

 I'm just going to do that and then I'll be back to show you the finished look.

 OK, basically two halves of that riff, part two of the Cemetery Gate guitar lesson.

 Now, what you do with that last sentence that we've done is you basically just do it with a load of pinch harmonics.

 So, bring the pick right into your fingers and the harmonics coming from your thumb.

 And if we put that together we've got the first half of the riff.

We'll put the two halves together one time but we'll do it slow.

 Basically, he plays that riff however many times and the last time he just cuts the end note off it or the end two notes.

 Remember there's the first video for that as well, part one, which is all the intro.

 Hey guys, in this video I'm going to be showing you how to make some really cute rings.

 They have a flat surface on the top where I can glue things onto.

 And they have adjustable backs so I can put them on any finger.

 And they have these little holes on the sides where you can attach things.

 Now for things that you can glue onto your rings, you can use anything that you want

 as long as it can be attached to the flat surface or onto those little holes I showed

 I don't even know what this is, but I could put that on if I wanted to.

 I broke an old ring and so I could fix my ring by attaching it to one of these rings.

 These ones were actually mine and I broke one of them so I could make the other one

 If you lost one of your earrings, you can make the other one into a ring.

 There's such a variety of Squinkies, you should check those out.

 Like I said, you can use anything that you want to make these rings.

 If you haven't already figured it out, all you have to do to make your rings is take

 the ring and take your decoration and glue it on with a glue gun.

 Now if you are using an earring, you need to make sure that you break the back off first.

 Most earrings' backs will break if you just wiggle them back and forth, which you can

 But if you find that it's too hard to do by hand, you can take a wire cutter and cut

 After that, you're just going to take your glue gun, put a little bit of glue onto your

 If you have any questions, please put them in the comments below.

I'm Ian from Hayes Kitchen and today I'm going to show you how to do a super easy, really fragrant Thai chicken broth.

 The beauty of this, I'm going to make this completely gluten free so if you're celiac this is absolutely ideal for you.

 I've been to Rasta, I've got loads of different ingredients here.

Now a lot of people ask me whereabouts I get my freeform or my gluten free or my specialist products.

 So for the ingredients we have got some coconut milk, we've got some root ginger, we've got some garlic, we've got some mixed chilli peppers.

 We've got some sunflower oil, some monster and sugar snap peas which we're going to chop up.

 We've got some baby sweet corn, we've got straight to wok, easy going Amoy noodles.

 Some fresh coriander, some Kalo, gluten free vegetarian stock cubes.

 We've got some ground cumin powder, we've got some fish sauce, fresh chicken breast which I've got some organic ones here today and that's it.

 And into there we're going to add about two tablespoons of your sunflower oil.

 You want to dice your chicken breasts and add two of your chicken breasts straight to the hot pan.

 As that starts to just brown off slightly, I'm going to add one clove of garlic.

 You can leave the seeds in there as well if you want to, that's just going to give it a lovely little bit of heat through the broth itself.

 You're going to be cooking that for about three to four minutes and then you're going to add just a small amount of grated ginger.

You can see the chicken there has just started to brown off nicely.

 As the chicken slightly browns, you can go straight in with your ground coriander.

 That's going to give it that lovely fragrant sort of taste, almost like a sweetness going through it.

 As that starts to stick to the meat, which it will do because obviously some of that fat's released from the chicken,

 That's going to give that that really, really salty sort of taste as it goes through.

 And it's really, really important because this is so important in any Thai dish.

You're going to grate pretty much the whole of the lime over the top.

 And once you've grated the lime, knock off everything from the grater and get as much of that in there as possible.

 And all you do is cut your lime in half and just squeeze that through your hands,

 So you've got the salt from the fish sauce and you've got that lovely citrus flavour coming in from the limes as well.

You can see there that's been steaming away and the actual liquid itself has reduced down plenty.

 So now that's started to reduce, I can just go in with literally our baby corns.

 And what I want to do, I'm just going to cut them in half and add.

 Now bear in mind, these will only take about 2-3 minutes to cook through.

 You want these almost al dente so they've got a decent crisp to it.

 And I'm going to literally just take off a little bit of the coriander and just chop that through like that.

 I'm going to keep some of that back because you want to add that up to when we want to serve the dish up itself.

 And with your serving spoon, just take some of the broth and put that into your serving bowl.

 You've got all those different flavours and textures going through this dish as well.

 So you've got the texture of the monge too, you've got the crunch of the sweet corn,

 Now that sauce itself is going to have a little bit of a fiery hit kick to it as well,

 Generally what I try and do is just take a little bit of ginger,

 I'm going to go in with a small piece of lime, give that a slight squeeze over the top.

 That doesn't give it that citrus sort of taste when you first bite into it.

 And just a tiny little bit, just to serve, with your fresh chilli as well.

 And again, with our coriander, all we're going to do is just sprinkle that just lightly.

 So there we go, our gluten free, super easy, fresh Thai chicken broth.

 This is a fantastic channel, it's aimed for you mums out there.

 There's things about makeup, there's things about food, there's things about fashion.

 A mini video presenting how to create the opening for the ponytail hat.

 I have a small sample right here that has 32 stitches and I am going to demonstrate

 on these 32 stitches how I created the opening for that ponytail hole.

 I am at the point where it says next round bind off 5 stitches.

 Then you are going to move the second stitch over to the first.

 Now the next set of instructions says from this moment on you are going to be knitting

 So we are going to knit from the sixth peg over to the last peg.

 Next set of instructions says to knit from the last peg over to peg 6.

 So I am going to knit from this peg all the way around again knitting as a row not in

 That's our last row that we need to do to create that ponytail hole opening.

 So at this point we are going to place stitches back on those first 5 pegs that we bound off

 Once I get to the first 5 pegs that have the e-wraps on them, I treat them just as regular

 For my sample I am going to knit a few rows and rounds and then I am going to gather it

 I am going to just bind off with a gather removal method and then I am going to show

 Simply gather removal method, simple, you already know how to do it.

 Again, this was just a sample made with 32 stitches so it is not an actual hat.

 I am just going to finish this off and then I will show you the keyhole opening.

 If you would like this area to look a little bit more finished you can also crochet, single

 Considering that the ponytail will go through there and no one will see around it.

 Hello, this is Robin and we are back with...well, not one of my regulars, but one of my regulars.

So I am doing a slanted French, or I call them diagonal Frenches,

 but for the magazine tutorial I did, it's called slanted French.

What you do is take your brush, go all the way around, down the side,

 the pink, I mean, I'm sorry, I moved the pink and the yellow and made an orange in the middle.

 Now because they're so translucent, I'm going to add like a little tiny bit of white to

 add a little tiny bit to the orange and make it a little bit more opaque, like that.

 then I'm going to add a little bit more to the yellow and then make that opaque.

 since I know this yellow will show up good, like this, like this, and that.

 going to make the brightness of the other colors stand out, okay?

 colors in various forms and various places, I am going to add in palm trees.

 Well, because I wanted to show you guys how to do a diagonal French.

 you probably won't see a lot of it, but I wanted to show you guys how to do it.

 that and I'm going to keep going with a bunch of different colors and just use whatever

 it's all starting to turn to like this little rainbow of tropical-ness?

 Anyways, I'm going to probably add a little bit of glitter and meet you back.

 to take this, just kind of go over and touch in over the top of each one and then take

 colors on the Diagonal French, or they call the Slanted French in the Nails Magazine.

 So I'm going to get you in different colors and you can see how groovy these are.

 are like really cool because they match with everything and they're neon, but they're also

 get a good picture of these for my blog so that you can see these really well and I will

 Page and I should have my form up pretty soon, so you can show me there.

 Hi, I'm Ann from the Chocolate Bells and today I want to show you how to make these cute

 I have some pink gum paste, already made pink here and I've kneaded it out a little bit.

 I'm not going to make a very big piece because I don't need a heck of a lot of this.

 We never want to leave that out because it's going to start to set up right away.

 What I do is I start over here at the armpit and I'm going to cut a little bit on an angle

 This one here I let it sit out on a piece of parchment paper for about 24 hours.

 In this little squeeze bottle I have some melted white chocolate.

 I'm going to take and right around the neckline over here I'm going to squeeze a little bit

 If I really want to be fussy I could hand put them on but I like the irregular shape

 I'm going to take and stick another one over here because that looked a little empty there.

 Then I take one, two, three little beads and over here I take and put one, oops it

 Now I have my cupcake over here and I have a pastry bag that already has some pink icing

 In the center here I'm going to start and the tip is laying flat and I'm going to be

 squeezing and ruffling, jiggle, jiggle, jiggle in and out all the way around.

 If you keep the bag twisted nice and tight the icing comes out very easily.

 You're going to start to jiggle, jiggle, jiggle all the way around just like so.

 Over here I have some disco dust and I only use a very tiny bit of the disco dust.

 Then I sprinkle a little bit, just a smidgen on there just to give it a little glitz.

 And then we take our finished piece, which is this one that is dry, and you just take

 that and you place it down into the cupcake and you push it all the way down just like

 It's a salsa made between three peppers, yellow pepper, red pepper, and green pepper.

 It's very easy to cook, and it's delicious, and you can eat it with some chips if you

 I made it out of a smart water bottle because I wanted something big, I guess.

 So all I did was I cut off the top and then I cut a circle about the same size as the

 And a paper towel roll right there and taped the crap out of it because I don't want any

 It doesn't really work down here unless you have a screwdriver or something, but I just

 You gotta get your hairspray, a ping pong ball, and a lighter or else they don't work.

Pepper, duct tape, hairspray, scissors, I don't have them right now, and a lighter.

 What you do is you cut the top off, cut a hole right in the middle of the bottle, you

 duct tape the lid to the hole that you made, take your paper towel roll, that's also a

 necessity, and then you tape it right on the top, right where you cut the hole.

 So make sure the specifications are about as round as your toilet paper roll or else

 And then I also put a toothpick right in the middle so the ball doesn't go into the bottle.

 Screw the cap, spray in the hairspray, screw your cap on, and light it.

 I put the lid, the top, right in this area, in the middle of both of them.

 And then I just got a toilet paper roll, two of them, and duct tape right on the top.

 than other than just, you know, lettuce and tomatoes and some dressing thrown in.

 you make any of these salads at home, the wholesome ones, they're just fabulous.

 for lunches, great for picnics, or just anytime you're in the mood for a little snack.

 And the best part is, even though it's a salad, it's lentil based, so there's some heaviness

 to do with this is we're going to boil it in eight cups of water.

 boil it for just 15 or 20 minutes until the lentils are very tender, but not mushy, because

 going to be adding in with the lentils is we've got about five large mashed garlic cloves

And we're going to be just adding that to the lentils and the water.

 So once the lentils are in, we're going to reduce our flame to a medium low and let it

And to test it out, just take a couple of lentils out like this and just try one.

What we're going to now do is we're going to put it in the fridge or the freezer

 So while Anuja is chopping the basil, we also have some extra virgin olive oil.

 We've got some crushed red peppers, chili flakes for the brave at heart or the ones

 or some more kalamata olives and you can skip this step if feta cheese is not available.

 And once it's mixed and everything is coated through, it's ready to enjoy.

 So one of the things we wanted to mention is we've used the brown lentils.

 And this is fabulous with some pita bread if you have it or pita chips.

And just chill it, keep it in the refrigerator, chill it and have

So enjoy your Greek lentil salad and join us again on another episode

 Today I am going to show you how to cook a quick lunch called Dandan noodles.

 Cook in the boiling salted water according to the package instruction and drain and keep

 Other ingredients we also need is 6 spring onions chopped, 3 crushed garlic cloves and

 And you also need 2 tbsp of sesame paste, 2 tsp of red wine vinegar, some chili oil

 First of all, blank 4 tbsp of water with the sesame paste and place in a pan along with

 ginger, garlic, 2 tsp of red wine vinegar and 1 tbsp of soy sauce.

 Beware of it doesn't stick on the bottom of the pan so stir it constantly or frequently.

 Meanwhile boil the chicken stock in another pan and bring to boil.

 Divide the sauce into 4 portions and divide the noodles into 4 portions and then pour

 If you don't like very spicy just add a little bit according to your own taste.

 today what we're going to do is make an egg white breakfast sandwich.

 to make from start to finish so it's nice and quick and convenient for the mornings.

Now the first thing that we're going to do is take two slices of

Now that our bread is toasted we'll set that to the side for right now

This is actually made with olive oil so you could substitute that if

We'll spray some of that on our pan that's at a medium heat right now and then I

 always take a napkin and kind of wipe away the excess cooking spray.

 is take a half a cup of liquid egg whites and pour those on the stove and start to scramble them.

 So I'm sure you guys saw at home how quickly these egg whites cook.

 can add any seasonings that you would like and today we're going to add some tomato basil garlic.

 It's just personal preference but really add whatever you want.

 a bit of spice we're going to add some hot sauce and we'll mix the seasonings and the hot sauce in

Our final ingredient will be two tablespoons of low-fat shredded mozzarella

You can use any other kind of cheese that you would like or you could completely leave this

So we're going to sprinkle this right on top and then we're going to let the heat of the stove

Now that our mozzarella cheese is fully melted what we're going to do is take

Now obviously we have our egg whites with the cheese the seasonings and

 the hot sauce and all you have to do is put the other piece of bread on top you have a great

And that's pretty much going to lead us to the end of this video so I

 hope you guys enjoyed and as always I wanted to give a big thank you to those that remember to

 click on the like button and share these videos how you guys do.

 if you want to stop by Facebook or follow me on Twitter links are down below in the description.

 So now we're going to custom fit a Marathon Magic pack to Mark, so if you'd like to put

 What we need to check is that the hip belt is at the right height.

 And on this pack, the hip belt is comprised of the front balance pouches, if you'd just

 Now the bottom strap needs to be going around the hip bone, but it shouldn't be so low that

 So we need to lift both the balance pouches on the front and the pack at the back.

 So if you lift those up, and we'll tighten the shoulder straps on both sides, which lifts

 And now we need to tighten these straps on the side, the hip belt straps, by pulling

 Now, lift your leg up and see if you've got that leg clearance.

 So when we do up the hip belt straps, the frame will automatically mold to your back

 The bottom part of the frame is flexible, so we don't actually have to custom bend the

 You can see that it's a close fit all the way down the back due to the auto-molding

 Now we need to check that the shoulder straps are at the right height, and the shoulder

 straps should pass over the middle of the shoulders, approximately halfway between the

 And now you can see that the shoulder straps actually come out in a V shape.

 Now if this back length was too short, if the V was lower, then these shoulder straps

 Now if the shoulder straps are too wide on the shoulders, we need to lengthen the back

 length by raising the attachment point of the shoulder straps to the back panel.

 And now I'm going to show you how to adjust the back length, and we need to take the pack

 And now to adjust the back length, we have to lift the back panel.

 And you can see that there's a stainless steel clip, and this is clipped into a series of

 So if you want to shorten the back length, you unclip the stainless steel clip, insert

 it in a lower slot, and reclip it together, and that shortens your back length.

 If you need to increase the back length, what you do is you'd reclip the stainless steel

 So now we've put the pack back on, and we've lengthened the shoulder straps slightly so

 I've got something here, something there, and something here, and something there, and

 I've got to make it all come together at the same time, and I love it.

 A herb-encrusted baby back rib on the rotisserie on the stomach.

 Season it with a curry and ginger-based rub, and then grill that, and it will be an incredibly

 succulent piece of chicken that will last you for more than just a meal today.

 Next we're going to do apples that are stuffed with sage, sausage, and topped with maple

 You take a banana, you cut a slit in it, you stuff it full of marshmallows, chocolate,

 and then also some nuts, and then you grill it on the grill indirect.

 You can serve it up with ice cream, or you can just simply scoop out that wonderful chocolatey

 That was the year the Performer came out with a gas start for the charcoal.

 I loved the Performer, but I also wanted the added benefit of a larger grill that

 This had quality, it had heart in it, and most importantly, it was mine.

 You can tell that a lot of thought and effort went into making this grill.

 Well then I also liked having more charcoal room, so when the 26-inch kettle came out,

 Of course, along the lines, I want some small applications, so the Smokey Joe was the perfect

 To go outside, pull the cover off, know I'm going to fire it up for dinner, it's one of

 those inside joys I always get, and Weber makes my life a lot easier when it comes to

 Even when I've called customer service for kind of a crazy question, they've treated

 So not only do I have a great product, I know if I've got a question or a problem,

 There's no doubt that when I'm outside grilling on my Weber, I'm in my happy place.

 I've got a Weber Performer, a Weber Smokey Joe, a 26-inch Weber kettle, and a Weber Summit

 Hey everyone, it's Presley.com here with my mom and today we are going to be making some

 Would you like to explain why we are making the magnesium spray?

 She used to and it helps her with detox and gets some magnesium in her.

 By accident we found, because we couldn't find Epsom salts, we couldn't find the Epsom

 For Presley, this actually makes her feel a lot better so we think she is probably fairly

 So I just saw a post the other day about making a magnesium oil spray.

 So you can spray it throughout the day to keep your magnesium levels up.

 So you need magnesium flakes, distilled water, and a frying pan.

 The first step is to take one cup of distilled water and boil it in the frying pan.

 Okay, so now we are going to put a cup of the magnesium flakes and stir it until it

 Okay, now we are going to remove this from the heat and let it cool down.

 Now my mom is going to pour the magnesium flakes into the spray bottle, which smells

 In this video I'm going to show you how to remove the bottom base on an Inspiron 15 7537.

 If you're looking for parts for this laptop, go to our website and use this 5% discount

 Using a flathead screwdriver, carefully push the keyboard locking tabs in to loosen the

 Carefully turn the keyboard over and unplug the keyboard cable.

 If you enjoyed this tutorial, go ahead and like the video and subscribe to our YouTube

 Visit PartsPeople.com where we have hundreds of tutorials and hundreds of thousands of

 Good morning, this morning I am going to be showing you how to make Fet Cook Irish style.

 For this you will need some self raising flour, 8 ounces or 227 grams of flour.

 We can zero our scales now and we have castor sugar which we add to the flour is 58 grams or 2 ounces.

 We then get a spoon and mix those dry ingredients through together.

 We then combine these ingredients together with our hand mixer which I have prepared.

 Once your mix is beaten well and should have this consistency I am going to take it and

 This is our mix it has been in the fridge for approximately 30 minutes and you can see

 how it has thickened and some of the air bubbles have come to the top and that is the way you

 I am using approximately a litre of rapeseed oil in a 28 cm pan.

 I like to use oil rather than lard and I use rapeseed oil because it does heat to a hotter

 It's entirely up to you but you don't want the oil to be too hot otherwise your fette

 Now I am going to start to cook the fette cook and our mix as you can see is nice and

 spongy and firm and when you are putting it into the pan I pour it away from myself and

 just let it fall off the spoon slowly and drag it along in the oil.

 You will get different shapes and sizes with them and my nieces and nephews actually quite

 like that because they like me to try and make shapes with them which is not the real

 They have cooked at the moment for about 30 seconds, 45 seconds and as you can see they

 The bubbles are starting to appear and to burst on the top and you would like this to

 happen as much as possible still watching the bottom to make sure they are not burning.

 When all the bubbles have burst on top it usually means that the cooking has taken place

 right the way through the fette cook and you can then turn it over and be sure that it's

 So we just watch them here and I know it is a very slow process but it's better than being

 To check if they are ready we take a clean knife, a sharp knife and stick it through

 the centre when you pull it out it should be clean that will just ensure that they are

 As you can see the knife is clean in all of these so they are ready to come out of our

 They are now going to be drained and enjoyed with some jam and butter.

 I'm just going to cut this one open so that you can see how it looks on the inside and

 We of course had to taste some along the way so if you are counting from where you are

 If you like Reese's peanut buttercups, you are going to like this pie.

 In fact, I would go down, if I were you, to your doctor's office and get a prescription

 I mean, get you a prescription for insulin, because you may need it.

 Now, you can go down and buy a hot dog, you can go down and buy whatever.

 Now, I have found in making the first one, I mean, they shrunk my Oreo.

 It's thinner, ain't got as much squishy, squishy in the middle.

 So, what we are going to do, throw them up here in the grinder upper.

 I used a food processor the first time, and I threw all the cookies in there at once.

 I used 25, and since the Oreos have been shrunk, I'm using 30 this time because it

 It's got all sorts of grinder upper things in there, and we're going to see.

 Okay, here is the ground up Oreos, and I have drizzled in, and I do mean drizzle, half a

 We're going to put it in the pie pan, and I will show you the finished product.

 You know, don't make fun of me because I said drizzle or something like that.

 Some of you all get some negative comments from some people that just really, just, I'm

 We had a nice little exchange until she questioned my heritage and the color of my neck, and

 We're going to put it in the oven at 350 for about 5 to 7 minutes.

 Alright, we're going to put it in there for 7 minutes and I'll be doing some other stuff.

 We've got about a cup, and I didn't measure, but about a cup of peanut butter.

 It is a 8 ounce package of cream cheese and a 8 ounce Cool Whip.

 I mean, if you've done gone this far, if you've gone this far, why go light with us

 So, one and a quarter cup of powdered sugar, that, Cool Whip, and we're going to mix her

 I forgot to mention that that is an 8 ounce package of Cool Whip.

 The first time I did it, I got the larger one and it was whiter than this, creamier,

 But whichever way you like it or you can use, get the big one, use most of it and then put

 I wish you was here because if you was, I'd let you lick the bowl.

 Put it in the refrigerator, let it chill and, you know, the pie crust maybe could have been

 Put it in the refrigerator, let it chill and get ready to knock the socks off everybody

 Bonus, bonus, and I'm not going to charge you anything else for this, and I don't need

 If I eat peanut butter, typically it is surrounded by chocolate and a butter cup.

 The recipe says a cup of peanut butter, a cup of sugar, and one egg makes peanut butter

 We have found that that is a little too sweet, even for me, and I am a sweet-a-holic.

 So either increase your peanut butter a little bit, maybe use a cup and a half of peanut

 But let's say a cup of peanut butter and three quarters of a cup of sugar and one egg.

 Mainly because I like to eat, but also because I love to sit down around the dinner table with my husband and four kids and have a great family time.

 So I have found a way at my house to simplify supper and I want to help you do the same.

 This is from my website, simplifysupper.com, where you'll find all kinds of healthy, simple, family friendly recipes.

 I have baked that until it's al dente, drizzled a little olive oil over it so it won't stick together.

 And then I have one jar, this is the 8 ounce size of my favorite marinara sauce.

 So you've got a red and a white sauce, which I would not have thought to put together, but once I tried it, I was in love.

 You want to keep it kind of light, and then that way when it melts, it will just be delicious, nice and creamy.

 If you want to brown up some ground beef and put it in there, whatever blows your skirt up.

It's also really good alongside some meat, like a good roast in the crock pot.

 I'm going to take my 13x9 casserole dish, spray it with a little olive oil.

 Just so that that doesn't stick to the bottom while it's baking.

 The last step is to top this with some either shredded or grated parmesan cheese.

 When that melts on top, it's going to make a nice golden crust.

 Just long enough to let all of the cheese melt, let the noodles get nice and warm again.

 Once it's done, I like to serve it alongside some crusty brown bread and a simple green salad.

 That's all it takes to serve up a simple, healthy, very budget-friendly recipe for your family.

 You can find this and other great recipes on SimplifySupper.com.

 and cooking system I came up with from watching YouTube videos.

 piece of heavy-duty fencing mesh that I've cut out with wire cutters.

 with the machete and I'm camped next to this creek slash swamp.

What's happened now is the grill is starting to sag a bit in the middle.

 There's my makeshift tripod out of tree branches which I've used to make this video.

 Always make sure that the tent you're in is suitable for the conditions because it's raining out there.

 Just down here at the bottom of the tent, or the bottom of the opening, I have my green tea which I just cooked before it started raining.

 Alright, so I'm going to be doing some work on the SCX10 today.

 We've got the new Cherokee blacked out body and we're going to be finishing the look with

 First we're going to take off, I'm just going to do the rear axles, it's going to be easier

 So now we're going to do the lower link, it's going to remove or release us from the lower

 You guys won't have to deal with that but this is my custom GoPro mount.

 Pull off the axle and we're ready to start taking out the lockouts.

 So we're going to open it up, we have the housing, a bunch of hardware and the aluminum

 Alright, so we're going to clean off the bearings, get a ton of grease, try to pack it in as

 If you guys have seen any of my videos, this SCX10 likes to swim.

 So two lower housing screws and then we're going to add some thread lock.

 Whenever we're going metal to metal, we want to make sure to get thread lock.

 So for the upper half, we're going to use the three link mount, more thread lock and

 So we've got the hexes on, drive pins and we're ready to reinstall.

 So the same screw we took off for the three link and now the lower mount, shock in first,

 Alright, so finally with the drive shaft, thread lock, grub screw and now we are ready

 Alright, so install the retainer, track and retainer on the other side and here's the

 Well worth, I'm not sure, I think it was $60 for this set on eBay.

 It is an ice cream recipe that bodybuilders can use or just anybody who wants to be in

 It is fat free and it is very high in protein and we are going to put a little blueberries

 You need a food processor and you need an ice cream maker for my recipe.

 I am sure there are other ways of doing it but this is how I am going to do it.

 You need two cups of fat free milk and you can either use an organic fat free milk or

 There are soy haters out there and I understand but whatever you choose.

 So you just pour in your two cups of fat free milk and you are going to get a probably higher

 My absolute favorite is the peanut butter chocolate but I have strawberry today.

 You are going to put two cups of fat free milk to three scoops of the protein powder.

 Then you are going to toss in, you do not have to add fruit but I just like to because

 you can add a nice little crunch to it and a little extra flavor.

 You could add strawberries, you could add bananas, whatever you want.

 This type of ice cream maker, you actually freeze the bowl and so there is liquid inside

 So you just stick that on there and you are going to put your little mixer thing in there.

 Slide the top on and then when you turn it on, you are going to be pouring the mixture

 in slowly and then you are going to let that mix for about 20 minutes and between 20 and

 So I am going to do that and then we will come back and show you what it looks like

 Okay, so it has been about 20 minutes, about 25 actually and so now I am going to show

 So you just take off the cover and kind of pull out your mixer thing and you can see

 So like I said, the longer you go, the harder it gets so just whatever you prefer and you

 can see the blueberries are mixed in and in fact it looks more like a blueberry ice cream

 It has got no added sugar, it is high in protein and it is zero fat.

 Hi, I'm Phil McKnight, Breville's Coffee Guru, and today I'd like to introduce you to our

 At the heart of this machine is the stainless steel conical burr grinder that's built right

 It also has dose control, which allows you to dose the same amount of coffee into the

 Having the grinder built in unlocks one of the secrets to making great espresso, and

 So on the left-hand side of the machine, we have a grind size adjustment dial.

 This allows you to fine-tune the rate of extraction of your espresso.

 Also in the machine, we've included a lot of features and functions and technology that

 we developed in our BS900 dual boiler espresso machine, and they include low-pressure pre-infusion

 PID temperature control is really important because that controls water temperature that's

 delivered to the ground coffee, and that's the secret to getting maximum flavor.

 These allow you to extract 30 mils and 60 mils of espresso, but we also have a program

 function which allows you to customize these volumes so you get exactly the right flavor

 If you aim to hit the same mark on the gauge every time you extract espresso, you'll know

 The dedicated water spout is really convenient because it allows you to preheat cups, and

 it also allows you to fill a cup two-thirds full of hot water so you can make a long black.

 We also have a large water tank which is removable at the rear.

 It has a carbon resin integrated filter, so that helps reduce scale buildup to keep your

 So another really cool feature that we've built into this machine is the ability to

 Because it's critical to get the best flavor out of the coffee by delivering water at exactly

 So you can adjust the water temperature plus or minus 2 degrees C in 1 degree C increments.

 Another convenient feature is we have a removable hopper in our grinder.

 All you do is just turn the dial, shuts off the bean flow, so you can lift the hopper

 up, then you can store your beans conveniently in an airtight or vacuum sealed container.

 That way you'll keep your beans fresh, and that's one of the keys to making great tasting

 We're just going to insert our portafilter directly into our grind cradle, and just bump

 So you can see here we're grinding right before we extract, and that's one of the secrets

 to making great tasting espresso, is grinding really, really fresh.

 We've got our dose adjustment dial set here so that we should get the right amount of

 One of the really, really important things to making great espresso.

 So we carefully remove our portafilter from the grinder cradle.

 You can see here we've got what looks like a lot of coffee, but that's how freshly roasted,

 All we need to do is distribute, collapse, and then using our integrated tamper, tamp

 And you can see there we've got the right dose because we've just got our top of our

 Just replace our tamper, wipe the top of the basket, insert into the group head, and brew

 So right now we've got the machine is just in its low pressure pre-infusion zone, and

 now we have full pump pressure, and we've got nice, really dark, viscous flows of espresso,

 So now we're just going to switch to steam, and this is where a large capacity thermocoil

 comes into action because we have a really quick transition to steam, only around 30

 We have our jug filled up to the V, full of really fresh, nice, cold milk.

 We're just going to pause our steam, insert into the jug, and restart our steam.

 So what we're doing here now is we're just texturing and stretching our milk, and what

 we're looking for is we're looking for some really, really small microphone bubbles, and

 the texture of our milk when we're finished should be really, really glassy.

 Now I'm just using my hand to judge the temperature of the milk.

 When it's up to temperature, it's just a little bit too hot to touch, which it is right now,

 so I'm just going to turn the steam dial to standby, drop the jug down, use a wet cloth

 to wipe the steam wand, and then we're just going to purge the steam wand.

 We're just going to grab our espresso, swirl to break the surface tension of the espresso,

 So there we have a coffee made on our Barista Express, just like you get in your local cafe.

 But 10 seconds before we get started, I made this video to help you.

 It's a great help if you subscribe, like, and or leave a comment down below.

 Today I'm going to show you how to remove and replace your third brake light in your 96 through 2000 Honda Civic.

 Okay guys, and now as you can see, I'm already in the middle of another project here as well.

 The first thing you need to do to get this third brake light is we're not going to go from the inside,

 So once we've got the trunk popped here, we're going to reach right back here and grab that third brake light.

 Okay guys, so now we're in here in the back of the trunk and you can see it right here.

 And all you got to do like any other light bulb is just grab a hold of it and twist like so.

 Most bulbs just kind of pull out, but this one's got a little more heftier system to it.

 So I'm going to go ahead and put it back in and you'll hear it click in there.

 So once you got your new bulb in there, you're just going to go ahead and stick it back in there how it came out.

 And if you can see, you'll see the hole in there and you'll be able to see it for yourself better.

 So make sure this big piece goes in back there where the big piece place is.

 Just get your new bulb in there, stick, twist, and you're good to go.

 Don't forget to subscribe, like, and or leave a comment or question down below.

 Hi there everybody, this is Kelly Ghetto Finger with Always Stampin' Videos.

 on the inside and before we get started, I want to show you also a cute little mini album

 in a bag that I created and I'm trying to decide if I need to make a video for this.

 So if you will visit my blog at alwaysstampin.blogspot.com and leave me a comment and just let me know

 and let me know if you think I should make a video on how to create this mini album in

 many of you may be familiar with, but it's how to get the heart that I think is the key,

Now that you've folded it in half both ways, you're going to fold

These two pieces here that we folded corner to corner, those are actually going

 to fold in and lay the card stock flat so that it's a perfect square.

 so that you don't cut yourself, right on top of the perfectly squared card we just created

 so that the opening of the card is at the top of the heart, we're going to trace around

 your card is done, but let me just show you a little tip on how to put the ribbon in.

 With the ribbon you're just going to add a little bit of adhesive.

 there over that adhesive and you'll use the large sleek heart to cut out one heart and

That will close up and this will tie shut to create your explosion

 If you'd never seen the two, you would never know the difference.

 Farms at our state farmers market and these were grown by Clayton Farms and they are the colossal

 They probably won't keep because they are raw peanuts maybe a week out here in the garage, but I'll end up cooking them all and

 So again, here's the bottom of my pressure cooker and I've got it about 3 fourths full

 and we're gonna go in the house now, and I'm going to show you how I fix these

 All right, the first thing I'm going to do is wash these peanuts and then I'm gonna pick some of these long

 We're gonna put in a little less than a fourth of a cup of just regular salt

 Now when they get to the bottom of the pressure cooker, they're gonna be a little bit hard

 And I'm gonna cook them in the pressure cooker for about an hour and 15 minutes now

 If they're not done when I check them or they're not salty enough.

 And by the way, I got this pressure cooker several years ago and

 It's called sensor to at Kohl's and the reason I got it is because it's stainless steel

 Anyway, I'm gonna put my little regulator on and I'm gonna put it on see if you can see that on

 Just for the steam and once the steam starts coming out of it, you know at a pretty steady pace

 The peanuts are done they cooked in the pressure cooker for about an hour and 20 minutes on low

 Now I've already tasted of one of them and they're definitely not salty enough

 So I'm gonna put about this much more salt in them that's about

 Stir it around a little bit and just let it sit here for maybe 30 more minutes

 I have in my hands here a chrome plated bulb planter that is available on the Gardenshop.ie

 So basically it is a fairly simple design, you have a handle here and you have the bulb

 The basic action of it is this, we can see with the bulb planter in general it is a conical

 shape, it is narrower at the very bottom than it is at the top.

 If I press in on this handle here it will actually open up and this is what lets us

 push it into the ground, hold soil and then by pushing this action we can drop the soil

 The purpose of this of course is in the bulb planting season, mainly between October and

 December you may want to plant bulbs in your garden and this is quite a neat way of doing

 So you can just see on the very top of it here a pile of serrations like this and that

 helps you actually with the cutting action and to be able to work it down into the ground.

 So I'm just going to do a demonstration here of how I would use it.

 So the first step is to come along here and actually just put it over the soil like this.

 What I'm doing here is I'm going to apply pressure downwards and turn it over and back.

 So you can see here I work my way down into the soil like this, ok, and at that point

 there I turn it around and I can actually, now we don't want to push it down any further

 than we need to ok, so basically I've left myself and I've made a hole here.

 I can actually look at that hole and I can know it's quite a bit deeper than I need it

 to be because when we're planting, if I was taking this as an example of a bulb I'm going

 to plant in, basically you want the bulb to be planted, the hole to be about twice the

 So if I come along here and I drop this, just backfill this with a little bit of soil and

 I'll drop it in with the roots of the bulb at the bottom and the top part pointing upwards

 so when it does come into season that will push directly up rather than having to do

 And what we can do then is we can simply move the bulb back, the planter back into position,

 Ok, now as you can see here this type of soil here is quite easy to work with ok.

 Now if you're working on a lawn or something like this, we did a number of tests with this

 earlier and in general we'll say I find bulb planters definitely struggle with lawns and

 This one actually is quite good because of the design on the base and also the fact that

 So the one problem you can encounter of course is if you're drilling down and you hit a stone

 or something like that, it's obviously not going to go through it ok.

 So you know, but still in all of the various different type of bulb planters I've looked

 at this is probably one of the better designs and it's available as part of a wide range

 Right, in this video I'm going to be polishing the scratch out of this watch that I bought

 In the kit you get a piece of abrasive cloth like this 400 grit.

 You can use it manually by hand or use a little bit of water, it's much easier.

 What I prefer to do is actually get something round, draw around it and make a disc similar

 If you get the disc, fold it in half, mark it, fold it in half and mark it.

 It gives you the centre to make a small hole and then I attach it to my Dremel.

 I use a spare disc out of the kit as a backing disc and that speeds up the job much quicker.

 But as I say, you can use it by hand if you haven't got the Dremel or you prefer to do

 Right, as I said, we're going to get a scratch out of this Seconda watch that I got from

 Now it's got some very light scratches on it, but to make the challenge even more, I'm

 going to put a deep scratch into it using this diamond tip off a Dremel.

 I'm going to turn on my machine, it will be very noisy so you won't be able to hear me.

 But I'm going to use a disc that I cut out earlier just to get this scratch out.

 I want a little bit of water just to stop it over heating and lubricate the disc.

 And then simply in case, obviously if you've got a scratch near to the, I'll turn that

 Obviously if you've got a scratch that's near to the metal part of the watch, I would mask

 Right, as you can see, I have now taken out the scratch using my Dremel and the abrasive

 But as you can see from the time, it has only taken me minutes.

 Quite literally, once again it's going to get noisy, but quite literally we just dab

 As you can see, there's an improvement already, most of the blurring is gone.

 I'll continue now, just for another few seconds with the coarse, then I'll move on to the

 I'm going to turn you off now, turn back on when we get to the polishing stage.

 Obviously you don't just want to watch me whizzing around here.

 Right, as you can see, I've used the other grades and it is now ready for the final polish.

 The chip has gone, the scratch has gone, it looks pretty good as it is, but really just

 a quick zap with a final polish will give that extra gloss and luster.

 There are a few nicks down here but I didn't do this area, I just concentrated on the centre

 And by the time you can see it's taken me less than a quarter of an hour for the whole

 Thank you very much for looking and don't forget, IPD glass polishing on eBay for the

 I'm Leanne Kessler, Director of the Floral Design Institute, here to share with you the

 Yes, just in time for prom season, just in time for the wedding season.

 I'll share with you the tricks to creating the easiest wrist corsage ever.

 It needs to be an open rose or a lily or a cymbidium is perfect, but a single large perfect

 When I was first taught to be a florist, years and years and years ago, we did quite a few

 cymbidiums and the rule was that you always match the ribbon to the throat.

 So I have the cymbidium orchid, two types of ribbon, number nine sheer, a little bit

 of hypericum berries in the same coordinating colors, and then the magic Oasis Floral Adhesive

 No wires, no bracelet, just a little glue, your favorite flower, and some ribbon.

 And in doing this, you want to think about which ribbon will be used to tie onto the

 So I pull off a length, more than I'm going to need, but let's say maybe 30 inches or

 So three of the darker loops, two of the lighter, and then the tails.

 One last step is to go back with that first piece and just tie it all together.

 And then really pull it tight and knot it again because you don't want those loops to

 When we're finished, this just ties right onto the wrist like so.

 I find it easiest to go back and dovetail my ends right now before I put the flowers

 So I just fold the ribbon in half and cut it in the V so it looks a little more polished.

 Get rid of those ends out of my way and then just lay it flat out on the table.

 You don't want to jump the gun too quickly or it'll slime all over.

 I can even go back and add a little bit of glue onto my berries so that they're ready.

 I think back to all those years in the flower shop where we'd be up until midnight, one

 o'clock, two in the morning, making prom corsages, wiring and taping until we literally had blisters

 For more creative inspiration, check out our website, Flowerschool.com.

 There's quite a few more segments on wrist corsages if you want some more ideas to make

 Hello, this is Gavin Gere here and I'm just going to give you a quick tour of my latest

 sewing machine setup where we've got a 48 inch wide table, top surface, and then we've

 got the sewing machine head which you can actually rock backwards to access the components

It's got a V-belt drive system, a bobbin winder, a triple thread tree on this particular

 you'll see that the two feet actually alternate and this means that there's always a presser

 foot in contact with the material clamping it even while it's being fed.

 fed, it's also got a needle feed action which means the needle is pierced down through the

Now we can go through many, many layers of material here and still be able

 the forward reverse action of the machine, we have this stitch length lever here.

 if I pull this all the way up, the machine will stitch in reverse.

 as I'm sewing, I can rock this lever here with my knee and that causes the presser feet

So if I want to raise the feet and then pivot, I can do that while the

 well as a servo motor drive which is a DC motor with a speed control.

 arrangement, the motor actually drives this large pulley here and then a smaller pulley

 torque of the motor and cuts the top speed down to a third of its normal speed.

 drive, this particular servo motor also has a speed switch where I can adjust the top

 speed of the machine, the speed at which it will go if you press the pedal all the way

So if we turn the machine off, you'll see that it also turns off and

So this 545 is a very nice large bobbin high lift machine for industrial

The addition of the servo motor and the reduction drive makes this machine

 or when you're precisely maneuvering the needle for sewing applications such as holsters,

 It's really simple to do and I think it's a quick, simple and stunning look.

 You could dress it up, dress it down and it really keeps the hair out of your face.

 So this is going to be step one on how to create a rope braid so that way when I do

 I'm using these clear hair rubber bands that you guys can't see in my hand.

 So I'm using my Halo Couture extensions to make my hair a little bit fuller but if you

 Or if you just want to use your own hair, that's absolutely fine too.

 So the first thing you're going to do is you're going to spray your hair with some product

 So I'm using the L'Oreal, this is a silk and gloss dual oil care.

 I'm just going to shake this up and spray a little bit on my hair.

 The next thing I'm going to do is I'm going to bring all of my hair to one side.

 I'm going to use my clear rubber bands, the same ones that I always use.

 I'm going to leave it on, grab a piece of hair, and I'm going to wrap it around the elastic.

 And then right when it's almost at the end, I'm going to tuck it through the loop underneath

 The next thing you're going to do is you're going to split your hair into two even sections.

 The next step is you're going to move both of these clockwise like this.

 The next thing is you're going to twist it in counterclockwise.

 So when you start to do this and it starts to blend together, then that's the wrong direction.

 So what you're going to do is you're going to hold onto one, switch it like this.

 It looks easy at first, but it does get a little challenging if your hair starts to unravel.

 And if you have short hair like this, you just want to tuck them inside.

 And if you're like me going into the colder weather, you might have a beanie to put that on.

 But I think it's simple, fashionable, and I absolutely love it.

 And in the comments below, let me know what hairstyle you're looking forward to doing next.

 and welcome back to another great episode of Rehana's Cuisines.

 cheese sandwich that my daughter Sakina who is 15 almost 16 always makes for my

 daughter Sumaya who is eight and a half years old and she can have this for

 sandwich so we decided we were gonna do a little tutorial and show you Sumaya's

 eggs here and that's our salt and I'm gonna move this so you guys can see.

 so she sprinkled some salt and she's gonna put some pepper in there.

 and she's just gonna beat the eggs and we're gonna be also using sliced cheese.

 So basically you want to beat that really well and then what we're gonna do

 is she's gonna take some olive oil and just sprinkle a little bit of olive oil

 Okay you don't you don't want to rush the egg just let it take its time but

 you're gonna know when it's time when it's good enough to flip.

Okay so she's gonna flip it once more just to make sure that the bottom

 and have her take a bite so she can tell us exactly how she liked the egg.

 So today she decided she did not want any bread so let's go ahead let's see.

 a video of 3 different drum beats, each played at a couple of different tempos.

 is that you guys, the viewers, you can leave a comment and let me know which beat you'd

 like a more detailed lesson on, so it gives you a little bit more control about the direction

And so what we cover in a 3 Beat Thursday may become the tutorial of the next

 I just love the kind of groove that you get with these half-time shuffles.

Now it'd be cool if you left a comment in the comment section below about which beat you'd like a more detailed lesson on.

It might just be based on your personal preference, or you might think one's better than the other.

 But what happens is, I'll pick one, and that could be in Tutorial Tuesday next week.

Don't forget to rate the video, leave a comment, and if you'd like to see more videos like this in the future, you can subscribe to my channel, and especially if you want to see Tutorial Tuesday next week.

 I know in my house, my family tends to go through phases where they eat a lot of bread

 And the problem is, I wind up with lots of bread that they don't want to eat.

 Today I'm going to give you three things that you can do with leftover bread so you're not

 Another thing you can do is you can cut your bread into slices, cut it in about quarters,

 And the third thing you can do with leftover bread is you can make French toast.

 And so I've got a cup of milk, one egg, about a quarter of a teaspoon of salt.

 You don't want a ton of it, but you do want enough to actually add to the flavors.

 And I like to do it in a 9 by 13 pan because it makes soaking the bread a little bit easier

 I'm going to let it soak for probably two or three minutes a side.

 So this is what the French toast looks like after two minutes a side of soaking.

 I highly recommend using a knife and a fork, but Maddie prefers her fingers.

 Don't forget to tune in next week where I'm going to show you how to make jerk chicken.

 Good evening ladies and gentlemen and welcome on Cook Along with Knoll tonight.

 My name is Luigi and obviously Luigi is an Italian name so as such I'm going to show

 you how to make from a real Italian, a real Italian sauce for your pasta tonight.

 Ideally it's like this, the one you have here, head on, tail on.

 It's a little bit more work but they're much more tasty than the peeled, partly already

 blanched because these are raw and you can really smell the seed, that's how you can

 So I normally, because I hate the fiddling and I really enjoy my food, I rather remove

 I do not discard them because I'm still putting at least the head, I put the head in the sauce

 With a small knife like this one, you just cut slightly on top and then just push the

 But also leave the shrimps whole and when you buy expensive shrimp, that's how you want

 It's just about the amount I need and because I'm a garlic lover, I'm going to put another

 So you see here when the shrimps start to get nice and red on one side, you may want

 What I'm going to put in now is the head of the shrimps because as I said, most of the

 taste is in there and then what we're going to do, we're just going to squash them a little

 Of course you can use the head for garnishing on the plate, they look good.

 I can put myself on a pause a little bit while you're catching up with me.

 What I like is because the picture here looks like me when I had hair.

 You see the smell, the caramelization of the shrimps and the sauce.

 And again with a wooden spoon, we're just going to squeeze a little bit the heads.

 That will be a really nice and rich taste of the shrimps coming through.

 Now if you just roll it slightly like this, the chopping technique is something people

 Because if you put expensive parsley in your dish, you want people to see and to taste it.

 And don't worry if I look at the camera chopping at the same time, I can't do that.

 We're just going to sprinkle on top and mix it with the wooden spoon.

 And this will be ready for serving, but we need to think that we need to toss this with

 Or if you have your pasta cooking by the side, just one or two ladles, small ladles, this

 size, of pasta sauce so that the water is thin enough to welcome the pasta.

 With a bit of courage and a bit of skill, you're able to do this.

 It also impresses your friends and guests and relatives if you can do this.

 You want to put the spaghetti in the bottom, and you want to put the shrimps on top.

 Basically spaghetti with shrimps and fresh tomato with a little bit of Knorr.

 Hello, my name is Laura and I'm gonna teach you how to cook healthy.

 If you have high cholesterol, if you have high sugar levels, if you are on a diet or

 you're a mother trying to make your children to eat vegetables and fruits, well, you're

 And I'm gonna teach you how to make this beautiful dessert and I mean beautiful in taste and

 This is a very simple and tasty recipe that can be done by kids and children.

 So if it is Mother's Day and you are looking what to give to your mother, this is a great

 And well, I have here some yogurt and remember that all the ingredients are at the end of

 I bought some vanilla yogurt and if you are a diabetic, you can use the one that is already,

 And before I mix all this, I have here grenadine or yellow with no flavor and we know we need

 So let's add half of a cup of water and let's mix it well so you can make it soft.

 I'm just going to let it stand for about five minutes and then we're going to put it to

 boil for a little while just so we make sure that everything comes together.

 And in the meantime, we can mix our ricotta cheese with my vanilla.

 I added half of a cup of water to my gelatin or my yellow with no flavor and we need to

 We're going to put it to boil and we are going to add this mix just to make sure that it

 I'm going to put it in low heat and I'm going to add the yellow with no flavor.

 And I'm going to make sure that it dissolves very well in this hot water.

 I'm going to add a little of our mix over here just to make sure that everything gets

 Mix it well again and taste just to make sure if it doesn't need any more sugar.

 I'm going to use one of these that I used just for the oven for the middle of actually,

 Just make sure that you are using canola or vegetable oil because the olive oil has

 And the next step we're going to add some strawberries, but the strawberries have to

 Don't cut them because at the time that you cut the yellow, you can see the whole strawberry

 So I just cut off the tail and I'm going to put them standing over here.

 The next step is just to cut the strawberries that are for the jelly that goes on top of

 You can actually use a strawberry jelly that is already done, but if you make it, it's

 I'm going to add half of a lime to the strawberries to make the jelly and one quarter of sugar.

 I'm going to use sugar substitute and this is one quarter of a cup.

 Then we turn it, while it's boiling, we turn it to low heat and we're going to leave it

 Please subscribe to my channel, like me and share this in your social media.

 I left my jelly in the pan for about 30 minutes in low heat and after that I let it cool down

 It was in the fridge for about two hours and now I'm just, I'm just cutting the edges with

 It's just so tasty, just the flavor of the yogurt with the strawberries.

 And just use your imagination to see how you want it to look like.

 And this is how my jelly looks like the inside and let me tell you how it tastes.

 And I hope you like it so please subscribe right here to my YouTube channel.

The amounts of the ingredients that you're going to need to make this recipe

 will be found in the information box below or you can find it on the website.

 are, you'll need some penne pasta and this is whole grain but you can use whatever kind

 in oil, they're just the ones that you find in the packages in the produce department.

 You'll need some carnation milk and this is the low fat 2% one.

 garlic powder, black pepper and optionally you'll need some crushed red pepper flakes

 I brought some water to a boil and put salt in it and now I'm going to add my pasta and

 cook it according to the package directions and it said about 10 minutes.

 of the cooking time I'm going to add my sun-dried tomatoes and they will cook for about 2 minutes

 and cooked them and now I've drained it and it's sitting over here and it's going to wait

So my pan here is over medium heat and I'm going to add my carnation evaporated

 my pasta and sun-dried tomatoes and put them in the pot with the sauce.

 now what I'm going to do is take it and put it in a serving bowl.

 the serving bowl and now I'm going to serve some in just an individual serving bowl.

 So this fudge is probably one of the simplest recipes you can make.

I personally love salted caramel, so today we're gonna make salted caramel fudge.

 but make sure that the water is not touching the bottom of the bowl.

 Once the mixture is completely melted and mixed together, add it to your pan that's lined with either parchment or wax paper.

 Put your fudge in the refrigerator for about an hour until it's completely cooled.

 just click on my mini caramel and chocolate covered apples video, and I'll teach you how to do it.

 Once your fudge is cooled, spray the sides with baking spray and then just add your caramel.

 Then you're gonna want to add it to your refrigerator again until it's completely set.

 Now you can cut your fudge however you like, maybe in bite-sized squares or bars.

 just love this recipe because it's just so quick and delicious.

 Give it a sprinkle with finishing salt if you have it to give it a little extra touch.

 I just love this recipe because it's just so quick and delicious.

 And if I ever need a last-minute dessert, if I'm running out to a party or an event,

 So I'm going to show you on a cake pan how you could put all the borders on a cake with

 I'm using my favorite, which is a number 124, but you really could use any size of rose

 So I'm aiming the thick part of my rose tip toward myself and the thin part out toward

 Now I've got the thin part of my rose tip down and the thick part up, and I'm basically

 I think you could probably do a whole wedding cake with nothing but one tip.

 If you had to choose, the rose tip is probably your most versatile.

 You guys need to send me in your pictures of how you did a wedding cake with just a

 So now I'm going to show you how you can make a spray of flowers and use some foliage,

 Next, I'm going to show you two real quick flowers that you can do with a rose tip.

 Of course, you can do millions of flowers with a rose tip, but this is a sweet pea.

 Then I'm going to show you a basic five petal, which could be almost any flower in any color.

 Of course, this is not a tutorial on how to do this particular flower.

 I'm just showing you what you can do with a rose tip and what you can do fast.

 So I hope that was fun for you to see a few of the things that you can do with a rose

 Hey everybody, I'm Zach with iGeekTV and we're going to jump right into removing the keyboard

 First thing you want to do is remove your battery, which I've already done.

 Second thing is have a Phillips head screwdriver and some sort of knife or flat head screwdriver

 Now I've already removed the three screws located just behind the hinges.

 That will allow you to remove the plastic pieces, which will let you access your keyboard.

 Once you remove the screws, open your lid, take your knife and pop open the plastic.

 Alright, those two screws will allow you to remove your keyboard.

 Did you ever think you could quilt a large quilt with your embroidery machine?

 Filled with your machine and Monster Snap Hoop, it's a trio of perfection.

 The Shorty holds the weight of the quilt, while Monster Snap Hoop creates the tension

 I have it set up right now for like a lap or a crib size quilt, but it can go all the

 Now I'm going to reattach the leader fabric on the Velcro all the way across the rail.

 At this time I'll loosen the top roller bar and roll the fabric, oh not so much, but just

 I'm going to remove the Monster top frame so that I can reposition the fabric and I'll

 get my template in place and that's going to be positioned right on that center line.

 If you're getting some slack on the bottom rail, release both handles and unroll that

 Remember, the Shorty is holding the weight of the quilt, so you don't want to create

 I'm going to reposition that quilt, get the frame back in position, and then I'll move

 I'm going to continue all the way across this row and down the quilt back and forth from

 the center to the side, the side to the center, all the way to the bottom of the quilt.

 If you get a chance to go on YouTube, type in ukulele tutorials in the search.

 Three small, 3-5 minute lessons that you can play over and over again.

 It gives you a little more incentive on learning the song and actually singing along with it.

 So that when your friends say, hey play something for me, you don't have to go...

 The one you're holding right now is the smallest, called the standard soprano.

 The frets are a little bigger, so your fingers are for adult fingers.

 Now the baritone is generally tuned to the bottom four strings of the guitar.

 If you put the capo on the fifth fret of the guitar and play the bottom four strings...

 You can have ukulele with four strings, six strings, eight strings, and ten strings configurations.

Меня зовут Роберт, и сегодня у меня есть фьюзенлик, который я сделал немного назад.

 Я покажу вам клосс-аппорт левой и правой руки, потому что это все хайбрид-пики,

 Мы будем разбираться в небольшие части и работать на небольшие части раз в раз.

 Первая часть, которую мы будем работать на, это небольшой лик, который пройдет через открытые стринги.

 Hi, my name is Rosemary and today we're going to be doing the Natural Tech treatment that's

 So first you need to wet the hair and then you put the shampoo.

 And then you apply it again for a second time, massage it in again, leave it in for a couple

 After shampooing you apply a small amount of the Vitamin Activist gel and you spread

 If you were to have longer hair you distribute with the comb along the ends and you do not

 The last part of the Natural Tech treatment is Energy Activist Stimulating Fluid with

 This one you just apply one drop to the affected area and in this case we're applying one to

 each side of the receding hairline and you massage it in until it's completely absorbed.

 Once shampoo is applied, let it sit for a little, then you apply the cream and condition

 And how soon after starting the process did you notice regrowth?

 I've been using it for three months now and I've already started to get results.

 I would say within another three or four months I would probably say I'll have a whole side

Today we're gonna talk about We Can't Stop, so let's get started.

 our 2nd finger on the 4th string, 2nd fret, 3rd finger on the 5th string, 3rd fret.

 your 2nd finger on the 5th string, 2nd fret, 3rd finger 4th string, 2nd fret, and you play

 2nd fret, 3rd finger on the 5th string, 2nd fret, and you play 5 of them, do not play

Now, take your 2nd finger on the 3rd string, 2nd fret, 3rd finger on

 the 5th string, 3rd fret, and take your pinky on the 4th string, 3rd fret, and you play

 the intro, I would obviously do, I would consider doing just, you know, downs per chord, for

 And that's pretty much the whole song, you know, you keep repeating those chords over

Now, what I would do is, you know, if you're at the beginning stage

 where you really can't strum right now, what I would consider doing is do 4 strums, 4 down

 down, down, go to A minor, down, down, down, down, down, down, you get the point.

 Now, something else you might want to consider if you're just now starting to work on your

 strum patterns would be, well, a real strum pattern, so let me throw this one at you.

 Down, down, up, up, down, down, down, down, down, up, up, down, down, A minor, down, down,

 up, up, down, down, and then F, down, down, up, up, down, down, again.

 Hello, this is David with Piano Club House and today I would like to show you how to

 This song is played in the key of C major and then there is a key change and we go to

 We start always with the left hand and then the right hand, then left hand, right hand.

 So the first chord is C major, showing the bass, we start with C, then it's the chord

 So C, right hand, G, right hand, C, right hand, G, right hand, C, right hand.

 Then we go to C sharp and also this C goes to C sharp and then G.

 So, the left hand is D, D again, the right hand is F sharp, A, D.

 Left hand, right hand, and then F sharp on the left hand, right hand.

 And then we go to G, G, G, just on the right hand, let's play this.

 So, the first chord on the right hand goes with G, G on the left.

 So, let me just play it one more time, this first part of the verse.

 And then, we go to the last part that looks really similar to the verse.

 Today I'm showing you this fabulous 40's, 50's burlesque style hairdo.

 She's a pin up girl clothing model, a burlesque performer and models for actually a few other

 I really enjoy being her friend on Facebook because she always gives all kinds of cool

 But she's a gorgeous girl and she has this gorgeous platinum blonde hair.

 I don't know if you're a fan of pin up girl clothing if you're on their Facebook, but

 you probably saw the photograph that Laura Burns did featuring La Chalita as Jane Mansfield

 So this look is based off of La Chalita, it's not that hairstyle, but it is a picture on

 It is a total updo and it's very classy and dressy and elegant.

 So if you have a special event to go to, this would be a great hairstyle to wear there.

 So I'm going to go ahead and get started on this tutorial and I'll see you next time!

 So what you're going to do is first off you're going to save some of your hair aside to use

 Next what you're going to do is we're going to create the curls that are going to go on

 So get some hair here, a section of hair, and we're just going to create a curl going

 We want it kind of leaning to the side so that way it doesn't look like you have a single

 If you have a little thing like I have sticking down, just stick a pin in it.

 So grab another section of hair and we're going to do the same thing and just roll it

 So what we're going to do now is we're going to take this side and we're going to curl

 You know the lighting isn't as good in here so I'm trying to get this as close as possible

 Now, going from there, we're just going to take the curls and make some rolls coming

 Give it a little twist and push it back up to where we want it.

 Just kind of pull it out until it's a height that you are comfortable with.

 We're going to put a pin in it on the side right here to hold that like that.

 So now we're left with this and what we're going to do with this is just give it a nice

 And of course we need a flower just like Miss Chalita who always has a flower in her hair

 Go ahead and take your flower and just stick it in the side where that pin curl is.

 So that's all you see there is your nice, beautiful, big, burlesque flower.

 Today we're going to do a quick video featuring the RENTUOLIO Rocky grinder.

 Sometimes, if you take apart your grinder to clean, you take off that hopper,

 So we're going to do a little video to give you a few pointers on how to put it back together again.

 It's going to apply to both the doser and the doserless models.

 Both of them have the same hopper mechanism, so it won't affect it.

 Then, you want to take the lid off and acquire a pretty decent-sized flathead

 There's three screws located basically right in the finger guard.

 Sometimes, beans will get jammed in there, so just break them through or vacuum them out a little bit.

 ways to know that your grinder is uncalibrated is when you reassemble the grinder

 and then slowly work your way down to zero, and you'll hear the noise change.

 So if you don't get that near or around zero, you need to recalibrate it.

 So, once those three screws are off, you can just remove the finger guard by itself,

 this part is a little bit more of the, I guess, the careful part you should be,

 So, only do this if you're trained or if you feel very comfortable doing this.

 you want to turn it off, and that's pretty much your zero point.

 The reason why we're doing that is because if we look at the bottom side of the bean hopper,

 So, we want to basically line up the zero in the front position of the grinder.

 So that way, when you rotate it to zero, the burrs will touch, everything's calibrated.

 and it should start grinding, or the burr should start touching at or around zero.

 the stickers are put on afterwards to get a true, proper calibration.

 But, you know, over time and over use, that will slightly change.

 grind it with no beans, just to make sure that it is still hitting,

 Back it off a little bit, turn the grinder on, and then just grind towards zero.

 The only issue is that the stableness to be rotated and properly put in,

 It might not be in the same condition it was when it first came in from the factory.

 If at this point, you grind your coffee and you're not getting a fine enough grind,

 once you have a proper calibration on your unit and there's no defective components,

 So, take a look at our next video, and it goes over how to clean

 But thanks for checking out our video, and stay tuned for our next one.

 leopard print or any animal print for that matter and this is one of my

 put a link on the side over there in case you guys are interested in zebra

But I hope you guys enjoy this and here is the tutorial for my leopard

So the first thing I'm gonna apply is a top coat and this is Tough

 Cookie by Orly and not only is this a top coat but it's a nail strengthener as

And then after that I'm going to apply another nail polish by Orly and

 the name of this is called Glitz and I got both of these at Sally Beauty

Now the Glitz is kind of like a goldish color but you can use any kind

 from the Style Warrior collection so it's a little bit more golden but it

 doesn't have to be exact just something that's kind of like a tannish color.

 then for the brown like in these little spots right here I'm gonna be using

So I already let my nails dry for about three minutes and then now I'm

 going to take my Unplugged nail polish from China Glaze and I'm just gonna make

 a bunch of random little shapes kind of like how it is here how they're not like

 perfect circles or not really anything in particular they're just kind of like

 bigger than others some of them are smaller just really really random.

 I'm gonna apply a black nail polish and I'm gonna be using a nail art brush and

 just make sure that it's like just really really thin tipped it doesn't

 have to be anything fancy even if you have like an old eyeliner brush that

 black lines they don't cover the darker spot completely they're just kind of

 like a C shape sort of thing or maybe go almost all the way around like this one

 and just kind of make the line kind of bumpy and rigid and just kind of make it

 just make it as random as possible I think the more random the better so just

 And as I'm laying my brush down I'm kind of squishing it in and then lifting up

 on it a little bit more and then just kind of squiggling it so here I go

 squishing it in and then just kind of easing up on my brush a little bit more

 and then same with this just squishing it kind of easing it up just making it

 sort of design but if you want to do something a little bit different you can

 add some colors to it and I did that to my right hand now on this finger I used

 Peppermint Patty by MAC and that's this color right here this came out with the

 Sugar Sweet Collection and that's what I used all over the nail and then for the

 little spots I used let's see what is this Caribbean Frost and this is from

 Wet n Wild and then of course I just went back to the black lining and then

 for this finger I used Dreamy Poppy this is also by Wet n Wild and I use that all

 over the fingernail and then the little spots I used a China Glaze Spontaneous

 and then for this nail I used Bright Celtic Sun by China Glaze all over the

 nail this is like a bright highlighter kind of yellow and then for the little

 spots I used Irish Green by Sinful Colors and I got this from Walgreens and

 then for this nail I used That Away from China Glaze and then for the little

 spots I used Mine's Eye from Orly and then for my thumbnail I used a Nail

 Polish from Selly Girl and this is called Surf's Up and I use that all over

 the nail and then for the little leopard spots I used Dark Blue by LA Colors so I

 hope this kind of gives you some options if you want to use the original tan and

 brown sort of print or the colorful sort of print and those are my nails so

 now the top coat that I recommend is Sesh Beat you can find this at Selly

 Beauty Supply or any nail supply store I think but I think I paid around four

 dollars for this and it is awesome because it dries your nails like super

 super quickly I say like within I don't know between five and ten minutes you

 can like start touching your nails so it's just a very good very high quality

 top coat so I definitely recommend that I hope you guys enjoyed this and if you

 guys do the colorful sort of leopard nails I want to see it so post your

 video responses if you do decide to give it a try or even if you just want to do

 the original kind of brown and black and kind of goldish sort of a leopard and

 again you don't have to use gold any kind of tan will do other than that I

 But, um, I've changed it and created my own version using this, uh, Texas, old school Texas funk blues kind of thing.

 Anyway, I'm Red, and I'm here today to help you take a look at this song.

 The cool thing about this song is that I'm doing my own version.

 So, not only, um, can you learn a song here, but you can also learn a style, a funk style, that's, you know, the old school, I call it old school Texas funk.

 But, it's a very cool, danceable groove, and, uh, you know, you can find other songs to apply the words to if you want, or create your own.

 Um, it's, I'm using this C7 chord shape, and I'm moving it up and down the fretboard.

 And I'm also doing the bass line with it, which makes this a great song, or a great, uh, pattern to use, um, if you're playing solo because you're covering the bass.

 Sometimes I do this, I just rock back and forth between the root and the five.

 So, um, you're covering the bass, and that's a cool thing to do in some cases.

 You know, in a lot of cases, you don't want to get in the bass player's way.

 But if the bass player is working the same groove with you, um, it shouldn't be a problem.

 Now, I'm not going to bother using the background track for the rhythm part of this lesson.

 We're, like I said, we're using a C7 shape, we're moving it up and down the fretboard.

 And you can put that bass line in, or you can just rock back and forth.

 Or you could just strum the chords without a bass line if you'd rather leave it to the bass player.

 So, um, not a lot of work to do to throw another tune in your bag, for sure.

 So, you know, you do want to follow the chord patterns when you're, uh, you want to follow the changes when you're soloing.

 Um, that helps to give a little more, um, dynamic to your melody, for sure.

 And, uh, some major and minor pentatonics blended, you know, basically with some additional tones.

 Um, just because a note's not in the scale doesn't mean it's not a usable note.

 Okay so I added the powder that comes with this to inside this.

 And then now all you gotta do is you only keep that half way so it can stay closed after microwaving.

 It actually looks really good compared to what I thought it might turn out to be.

 It would have definitely got a ten if the noodles were more tender.

 If you want a quick, filling snack that you can microwave up to about four minutes.

 I'll probably pick up another flavor pretty soon and review it for you guys.

 I'm more of a Maruchan guy, but my mom actually picked this up and it was just randomly in my cabinet.

 I'm Glyn Pennell, I'm the chef, owner, washer-upper, sweep in the street.

 I'm going to be cooking carpaccio beef, it's going to have crispy corned beef, brussola,

 also it's going to have slow cooked peaches, peach tureen, with swiss chard and pepper

 This is the single mussel, we're going to roll it in cinnamon, which just brings out,

 it's not a massive flavour because it's just on the outside, but it brings out the beefiness

 Even for dinner at Pennell's or lunch, when you get a typical Glyn Pennell's style of

 I'm not trying to shock or anything, it's just what I like to eat and what I think people

 We're also going to make a peach tureen, so with this we're going to put peach puree,

 I'm going to use it with swiss chard and pepper, some sherry vinegar, a little bit of sugar

 Basically we want it to a nice consistency level, so we'll pull the cling film to the

 edge, find out the depth of the tray, so Frappe's going to put that in the fridge and that's

 The peaches are basically going to be cooked sous vide, so all the flavour stays in the

 bag and they're going to be cooked with basil, a little bit of salt and some stock syrup.

 So basically we've got the peach leather, which is the peaches, plums, we use plums

 because of the pectin in them, so you get quite an elastic setting agent.

 We dust that with some pepper, dry it out for a day, day and a half in the dehydrator.

 I've been doing this since the age of 14 every night after school, and I can't remember the

 So basically single mussel, it's got the cinnamon on the outside.

 We used to be a local restaurant, now we are a national restaurant, which I'm really, really

 chuffed to say that because it's taken a fair bit of time to get that sort of recognition.

 We're going to roll it and basically just want to try and get it nice and firm, so when

 A little problem with the temperature in the kitchen, I looked into getting a cooling system

 and all the rest of it, and it was, I met a guy from Electrolux and he sort of put me

 onto these EcoTops, so we've had induction and then EcoTops fitted, and also we've had

 The cooking's even more precise and the temperature in the kitchen is a lot more pleasant to working.

 So in here we've got the flank, which has been salted for three days in a brine, then

 it's with the fat on it, the few spices, and then this has basically been cooked really

 The fat here, when it's cooked we're going to scrape off and pass through a fine sieve

 and keep to one side, and all the meat we're going to shred down, let it relax, shred it

 down and then emulsify the fat back into the beef, which then is corned beef.

 So another element to the dish, which brings another salt element to balance the peach

 So we're going to do our peach terrine, which is set with the swiss ginger pepper.

 So we're going to do, we'll dice the peach, the peach terrine, and then we'll dice the

 corned beef cubes, and what we've got here, which sounds ridiculous, but it just makes

 such a massive difference, is basically oxo cube, which has been crushed down, a little

 bit of seasoning, and sometimes any of the trimmings from the beef, we'll blend that

 up and put that over with the oxo powder as well, and basically we're going to roll those

 in, so we dust it and it eventually looks like an oxo cube, and then we've got the peaches,

 they're not local peaches obviously, there's not many peach trees in Birmingham.

 The foraging in Birmingham is dog shit and criswrappers isn't it?

 We're just going to season the brisola up, basic vinaigrette, a little bit of ginger,

 and now we're ready to dress, we're going to go onto the plate.

 So then, season it, and then you can start assembling the dish.

 So in the dish, you've got a couple of peach, some of the oxo, our corned beef oxo cubes,

 So, we've got the brisola, two or three pieces of that, a couple of bits of the crispy just

 See the way we dress the dish like this, you almost have to eat it for the customer.

 So here we have it, it's carpaccio beef with peach, spice and pepper, and crispy corned beef.

 This is Paul, this is Dave, and we've got Tom, also known as Frappe.

 We've got Luke who's been with me now for five or six months, and then we've got P2 who's been with me for two years and a bit.

 It's important for us to put dishes on a plate and to try them and dive in.

 I don't tend to cook for them too much because they get too used to it.

 All the joking and laughing, playing around, is my sense of humour.

 But I'm a serious chef and a serious businessman, people will see my personality come through on the food.

 We're going to grab some dumbbells and we're going to start with chest press dumbbells,

 So again, you want to make sure you do the warm up as recommended in the guide.

 Do some light stretch and start with some dumbbell press at a light weight just to get

 Then again, this is going to be a little different than you're used to before with dumbbell press.

 We're not going to get all the way back a good stretch and we're not going to use the

 So make sure you keep your arms tight inside and push up and emphasize the squeeze at the

 So I'm going to do a couple and you can see what I mean, alright?

 So come back, elbows tight, squeeze up, down, squeeze up, down, squeeze, down, squeeze,

 Now again, you really want to emphasize keeping those elbows tight in.

 So drop the sets down like that, up the weight and after that we're going to move on to some

 So next up for chest, we're going to do around the world flies.

 Now this one's really good because it's not just going to target the upper, lower, middle

 What is really going to do is kind of stretch it all out and use those fibers you really

 So again, start by setting the bench at about a 45 degree angle.

 Grab a light, you're a little bit lighter than normal because again, you're going to

 You're going to start light, go 12 sets, 10, or sorry, 12 reps, then about 10, then 60.

 So again, grab a light weight, come back, right in front of you and stretch all the

 Again, really focus on the breathing there because that's what's going to give you a

 You're doing three sets of this, 12, 10, and then about six to eight reps, all right?

 As soon as you've done this, I'll see you on the next exercise.

 What you want to do is grab the cables here and make sure it's set about a little bit

 lower than shoulder width or so that this is exactly parallel to your elbow, right?

 So grab both of them, stand in the middle here, and again, keep your elbows tucked to

 So start, you're going to squeeze your chest together and bring those up slightly, down,

 open up, again, keeping your elbows to your side, squeezing in and down, down, breathe

 And again, so do this movement with really isolating your chest, not opening up using

 Don't forget to finish up with some cardio and stretching to really polish off your body.

 And again, I'll see you tomorrow, which we've got some back in store for another wicked

 Hi, I'm John Nielsen with AAA and today we're talking about buying and maintaining your

 In this segment, we're going to talk specifically about changing a flat tire.

 Now this may seem a little bit contrived and that's because it is.

 We brought my car into the shop because this is a safe environment and will allow me to

 At the roadside, you'll want to make sure that you're in a safe position, that traffic

 can see you, that you're well away from the flow of traffic, and that you're on a solid

 Jacking up a car on a soft surface, sand, dirt, anything like that can allow the car

 to actually fall off of the jack and can result in severe personal injury.

 So if you cannot get safely off of the road, if there's high traffic, if you're in an area

 that you don't feel is stable, the ground's not hard, now's not the time to try to change

 Similarly, if you feel uncomfortable with any of the steps we're about to go through,

 Now assuming that we're as far off the road as we can, that we've placed a triangle, if

 we have one in the trunk of our car to alert traffic there's a breakdown ahead, we have

 set the emergency brake, we've set our emergency flashers, we're going to talk about actually

 The first thing we want to do is pull the owner's manual out of the glove box.

 It'll also highlight any safety features we need to know about.

 The owner's manual tells us to put a wheel chock behind the wheel.

 Now this is usually not included with the vehicle, so it's something you're going to

 have to purchase and keep in the trunk before you find yourself at the roadside.

 Once we understand what needs to be done in the car, we're going to go to the back of

 the car, to the trunk or the hatch, and actually remove the spare tire, the jack, and if there's

 locks on the wheels themselves, the key for that should be in the trunk or would be in

 We're going to get all that together and come on back to the front of the car.

 We're going to loosen the lug nuts and then we'll place the jack under the vehicle where

 You'll jack up the vehicle to get it far enough off the ground to allow you to remove the

 You'll remove the lug nuts by hand, then you'll remove your tire and set it at the roadside.

 Next what I'll do is take my rag and wipe down the threads and the backing plate on

 You install your spare tire, install the lug nuts finger tight, you would lower the

 jack and then tighten your lug nuts in a pattern indicated in your owner's manual.

 Failure to properly torque and install the lug nuts can cause the wheel or the brakes

 Now a couple of things you noticed, I had a set of gloves with me and a rag and also

 This is something I keep in the trunk just in case I end up at the roadside.

 It's a great thing for you to keep in and maybe a towel or sheet or a blanket to kneel

 on at the roadside or even to put your spare tire in when you're done.

 These are little tips that will pay off if you ever need to get it done.

 The final step in our procedure is to go visit our tire dealer, have our tire repaired or

 I hope that you have a better understanding of what's involved in buying a tire and selecting

 the right tire for what you do and also how to change your tire at the roadside and additional

 I'm going to show you today how to make some delicious chocolate hazelnut raspberry tarts.

 They are a terrific holiday dessert or a little thing to pass around at your holiday party.

 I start with a stick of room temperature butter and then a quarter cup of brown sugar, firmly

 And I'm going to turn on my mixer and mix it for about two minutes.

 Now these I've already pre-ground in the food processor so that they have sort of a nice

 I'm going to cover it with some plastic wrap and let it chill for about 30 minutes.

 Okay now to make the tart shells, you take your dough, it's already chilled, you roll

 it into a little ball and you press it into your mini muffin pan.

 And then you just use your thumb and you make a little well which you're going to put the

 It's much faster if you do the same thing, always do the same thing.

 To make the ganache, pour the chocolate chips into a heat safe mixing bowl.

 In a heavy sauce pan, heat the cream over medium high heat until it just begins to simmer.

 Remove the cream from the heat immediately and pour it over the chocolate chips.

 Okay so the shells are now baked and out of the oven and I'm going to show you how to

 Now to get them out of the pan, you just give them a little twist and then you sort of gently

 And if you've sprayed your pan ahead of time, you won't have any trouble doing that.

 So first I spoon, I've heated up a little bit of seedless raspberry preserves in the

 And then I take my chocolate ganache which I have put into this zip top bag.

 I'm going to cut a tiny hole in the bottom and then I can use it just like a pastry bag.

 So then I take a raspberry, I put it right on top and then I can dust that with powdered

 For this recipe and other delicious holiday recipes, you can go to yankeemagazine.com.

 Hey YouTubers, this is a short quick tutorial on how to whistle.

 First of all, I want to give credit to a former co-worker who showed me how to whistle.

 The only way I was able to learn is by watching him and seeing what was going on inside his

 Here it goes, you want to put your lips firmly over your teeth like this, and not like grandma.

 Excuse me for my acne and saliva, bad timing to be doing this video.

 You want to put your lips over your teeth like this, and your tongue should be placed

 And you want to leave a little gap between your teeth and tongue like that.

 And you put it all together, make sure your lips are sealed around your tongue like this.

 And you blow down the center of your tongue, and then the air should travel downward into

 There's other types of how to whistle, and there's a finger blowing, you blow over your

 tongue, and it should look like this, and you want to curl it over your tongue.

 There's another one where it doesn't require your upper lip, and no fingers, and it should

 So to play the call part, you do an open E string, going to D to E on the A string.

 Seven fret, hammer on to the eighth fret, pull off to the seventh fret, pull off to

 Then you do that on the seventh fret to the fifth fret, D string.

 The notes are G, A, B flat, B, D, E flat, E. So you play a 16 note on top, one E and

 Then you go to the tail, which is a D to E on the A string, fifth fret, seventh fret,

 So it goes on a power chord on the G. Third fret, sixth string.

 Make sure you pick the guitar that talks to your soul, talks to yourself.

 I like humbuckers because it's noise cancelling and makes you sound really clean.

 And I am really at home with this guitar, so my best tip is to make sure you find a

 Okay, so now I've taught you how to play this song, I challenge you to prove to me that

 Remember, you'll be erasing these lines after, so keep it light.

 His nose is about the same level which his eyes are, like right under them.

 And then make the lines you want to keep darker, and erasing the lighter ones later.

 He has these cheeks that sort of stand out from his face that go right under the eye and go down.

 And then you want to go onto his tail, which is like a lightning bolt shape.

 And now that we're done with our darker outline, we might as well erase...

 Okay, today we're going to make a video on powder coating projectile bullets.

 Different ways that I do it and I'm going to try to get the whole thing on video here.

 First thing you're going to need is something to hold your bullets.

 of size of my oven with some legs on it and just out of wood and aluminum foil over the top of it

I'm going to go ahead and get these on to bake while I'm shooting this video.

 If I can with one hand, this may be a hard video to do with one hand.

I made this little thing out of wood and it's just got a grounding strip

 across the top, screws run through it and that holds your 22 bullets for my 22 Hornet.

 Hollow point bullets, I just drove a whole bunch of nails through a piece of one of them

 the ground on the back side left enough that I could clamp on the side and they just sit on there

 That way you don't get the nose with those with them stuck through the pegboard, but you'll still

 get enough of them that you should have this whole surface here just a little bit on

 be a problem with slow moving lead bullets that's only moving about 2,000 feet per second.

 One thing you want to do before you put them in there is I just put a little bit of

 lacquer thinner in the bucket and put them just dump them in swish them around put on gloves pull

 them directly out of that vat of this and put them straight onto the pan.

 oils off your fingers or anything like that off of the bullets.

 15 minutes or so you bring them out on your tray you get your ground

 you get your powder coater step on your little pedal that you have for ground make sure green

 then you go put them back in the oven that's all there is to it.

 has a little silver tip the bases are done fantastically so now we're going to do

 the tops we're going to get rid of the silver tips take us another piece of

 pegboard drill the holes out to a 30 caliber and stick them in there they're pretty

 stable on there stick them back in the oven shoot them again when you're done

 this is the kind of bullet you're going to get is a solid coated it's got a hard coat on the

 outside of it and to me it is the next best thing to jacketed bullets they shoot accurately

 I have personally pushed the 22s at 2600 feet per second with zero leading in the barrel

 or whatever 22 horn it is at its max velocity it's about 26 25 2600 and to me

 it's a lot of work to get it going but it's as far far better than just a regular lube

 First part is 2nd string, 5th fret, to the 3rd string, 5th fret, back to the 2nd string.

 Then I do Am7, 2nd finger is on the 6th string, 5th fret, 3rd finger is on the 4th, 3rd and

 I just move it up a whole step to the 7th fret, 5th fret to 7th.

 And then I go to the 4th string, 7th fret and I do a little bar on the 4th and 5th.

 So I go to the 4th string, 7th fret, then the 5th string, 7th fret, back to the Am7,

 the Bm7, then I go to the 2nd string, 5th fret, my 1st finger, to the 3rd string, 5th

 Then I do an Em7, so my index finger is barring, I don't do the whole over like that, I'm just

 Then my 2nd finger is on the 8th fret, 2nd string, and I pluck the 5th, the 3rd, the

 Then I go to the 4th string, 7th fret, to the 3rd string, 5th fret, back to the 4th

 Then back to the 3rd string, 5th fret, down to the 3rd string, to the 4th fret.

 Then it goes to Bm11, and that's my 2nd finger is on the 6th string, 7th fret, my 3rd finger

 is on the 4th string, 7th fret, my pinky is on the 3rd string, 7th fret, and my index

 And all these chords, I'm plucking them when I name off where my fingers are at.

 I'm using my thumb, index, middle, ring, just to get those, I'm not just going...I'm just

 Okay, back to the Bm11, to E7 sharp 9, and that is my 2nd finger is on the 5th string,

 7th fret, my 1st finger is on the 4th string, 6th fret, my 3rd finger is on the 3rd string,

 And it goes, and after that it goes to Am7, to D9, and that is my 2nd finger is on the

 5th string, 5th fret, my 1st finger is on the 4th string, 4th fret, and my 3rd finger

 It's the 5th string, 7th fret, 4th string, 5th fret, back to the 5th string, 7th fret.

 Then the 4th string, 5th fret, 4th string, 7th fret, 3rd string, 5th fret.

 Then I go up to the 3rd string, 8th fret, to the 7th on the 3rd string.

 And then I do a hammer-on pull-off on the 3rd string, 5th fret, and I hammer-on pull-off

 To make the cauliflower sabji, we will need cauliflower florets, cumin seeds, grated ginger,

 grated or pureed tomatoes, turmeric powder, garam masala powder and salt.

 the oil gets heated up, we will add in the cumin seeds and allow it to crackle as it

 gives a delicious nutty flavor to the vegetable when it gets roasted well.

 To make a wet, wet-ish, more curry like vegetable, you need to add in a little more water and

 to low and simmer the vegetable for about 10-15 minutes until the cauliflower is cooked

 I ensured that there was enough water, just enough to steam the cauliflower and did an

Now I am going to stir in the chopped coriander leaves and our quick

 Hey guys, today we're making seared tuna steak with Asian scented vegetables.

 Ok, first we want to start off by adding a little bit of kosher salt or sea salt and

 I prefer to use this because I believe it gives it a bolder flavor.

 And drizzle a bit of sesame oil on top, spread it across with the back of your tongs or

 Alright now you want to run your tuna just for a bit so you get a nice golden crust on

 And then once you flip it over, we'll take a quick zoom in here and see what's happening.

 Ok, you want to let it go for about no more than 45 seconds on each side because of the

 And then we want to cut the asparagus right in the middle, just in half and add it to

 Alright you want to make sure that when you're cleaning up Brussels sprouts, what you want

 to do basically is cut the ends off and get rid of the pieces that you're not going to

 And we're going to cut our Brussels sprout lengthwise here so we can make nice thin slices.

 So nice thin julienne is what you would call it or nice thin slices.

 Ok we'll add that to the bowl with the asparagus and set aside.

 Alright now you want to cut the tops and the bottoms off your sweet peppers ok.

 And then give it a nice julienne or thin slice as not to waste it.

 And then you want to make a nice slit down the side of the pepper, turn it sideways and

 just roll it with your knife so that way you can get the seeds right out and you have

 Do it again quickly, slit down the side, cut it out on the side, roll it, cut it out, there

 Now you could stack all your peppers at once just for time sake and then give it a quick

 So mix it all up, the asparagus, what I added in here was dark mushroom soy, salt, pepper

 On medium high heat you want to start sautéing all of your vegetables.

 Just give it a quick toss around and you're going to add about a half a cup of water ok

 just to help those vegetables get a nice delicate texture and cook it down.

 Alright I'll be adding some cherry tomatoes to the dish just to give it some nice acidity.

 Now here I'm using a trio of tomatoes but you could use Roma, beefsteak, whatever your

 Now I'll be marinating the tomatoes with a little bit of sesame oil, lemon juice, cracked

 Thinly slice your tuna on I would say a 45 degree angle so you get nice beautiful slices.

 Just for decoration purposes you could add whatever you prefer.

 Ok so we're just going to add our tuna and our sautéed asian scented vegetables.

 Now I kept everything high on the plate just for presentation purposes.

 And I added a few tomatoes on the back of the plate just for contrast.

 And if you take a look at this 360 here you can see why I did it the way I did it.

 But I think this is a dish that many people would agree looks quite good.

 So please subscribe, like, share and make a request for a video that you'd like to see.

 RAM stands for Random Access Memory, and it's called memory because it's what

 Unlike the hard drive, which stores everything on an ongoing basis,

 your files and anything you want to keep for a long time, RAM is short term.

 It's not going to store anything that you're working on right now.

 It's important to have good RAM, and a lot of RAM potentially for your system,

 If you're building a more modest system and you have a lower end motherboard and processor,

 This is an older form of RAM, reasonably new in the grand scheme of things,

 Newer systems, especially more high performing ones, use new DDR3.

 RAM also comes in a few different speeds to match the CPU and the rest of your system.

 So you want to make sure that your motherboard and your CPU are matched with the RAM.

 So make sure to go to the specs on your system, find out what type of RAM it will take,

 Now this is important because you typically want to match pairs

 you'll probably want to separate it into one and three, or two and four.

 This allows you to get maximum performance out of your RAM when it's in pairs.

 Now for this system we've chosen Kingston Value RAM, DDR3 in this case, at 1066 MHz.

 In this case we don't need that much for this particular system and the CPU we've gotten.

 The Value RAM is a little more cost effective than some of the higher performance alternatives out there

 unless you're really going into something that's hugely high performance.

 which has fins for heat dissipation and gives you a little bit of a boost.

 To install the RAM on the system, first we're going to push back the little tabs

 And then we're going to look at, internally we've got a notch on the RAM

 and we've got a little bump inside the slot, so we want to make sure that they're matched up.

 If you put them in the opposite direction and they don't match up,

 So, first of all, match those two directions and then push it into the slot, like so.

 Now we've got it lined up, and to get it in we just push firmly, but carefully.

 And typically, if you do that, the tabs on either end will snap into place on the outside of the RAM.

 So again, instead of doing a blue slot now, we're going to put it into the black slot,

 that is the second black slot in here, just to make sure they're matched.

 Now we have two slots left that we can put other RAM into if we want to update the system.

 In this case, we've got 4GB in here in a matched pair of 2GB and 2GB.

 But go higher if you can, because you want to be able to grow down the road

 if you want to update your operating system to something that requires more resources

 It's always good to have the option to build up if you want to down the road.

 And don't forget to check out the show notes at Butterscotch.com,

You know, the neat thing about this is anything you feel like, whatever

 you've got in your fridge, you can make absolutely delicious juice.

 gonna put the pineapple chunks right through like that, a little bit at a time

 everything from hard roots like carrots all the way down to soft roots like

 to put too much ginger, but it's really, really good for indigestion and for

Yeah, well, we're gonna taste this in just a second, but first we want the

 women, and I'm concerned about my kids getting their proper nutrition every day,

 Make certain to use the correct tubing cutter to cut CTEK tubing.

 Other cutters or knives may cause the tubing to deform, therefore causing a leak.

 When cutting CTEK tubing, make certain that you're making a clean, straight cut.

 Rough and angled cuts can create a burr on the tubing causing a potential leak.

 Prior to installation, wipe off any contamination on the outside of the tubing.

 Visually inspect the outside of the tubing, checking for any cuts, scrapes or

 If tubing is damaged, simply cut away the damaged area until a clean surface is

Because CTEK fittings use an O-ring to make the seal, it is essential

 fitting by using outside insertion depth guides molded on the outside of all CTEK

Hold the fitting collet in flush to the end of the fitting prior to

Push the tubing completely into the fitting until the insertion depth

 After 10 or more connections, the end of the tubing must be cut off due to tubing

 feel the cone seal compress as you tighten the fitting into place.

 nut approximately 20 inch pounds to create a zero leak connection.

 threads on CTEK fittings are national pipe thread NPT and do require pipe

 outside diameter is required, an external elbow clip or inline elbow must be used.

 If the bend radius is less than eight times, the tubing may kink or collapse.

 Then the damaged section of tubing must be cut away and repaired.

 ties or clamps, it's imperative not to over tighten them for it will crush the

It is recommended to use a grommet when routing tubing through all

Tubing needs to be supported with pipe clamps, cable ties or clamps a

 clips and covers are offered as an accessory and are not mandatory.

 testing of the system after installation is required for a valid warranty.

 required that a minimum pressure of 40 pounds per square inch be used with a

 media of potable water, compressed air or an approved antifreeze.

 As-salamu alaykum sisters, so today I'm going to show you guys how to make this absolutely delicious

 cookie kombas, so if you don't know how I made it then stay tuned

 So before we get stuck in I'm just gonna go over the ingredients so for this recipe

 So milk chocolate and white chocolate and I've broken up into little pieces

 And you can get like really cheap one doesn't have to be expensive some chocolate chips

 Caster sugar as in quarter cup each don't need too much sugar because we're using a lot of chocolate

 so you don't want to make it too sweet a small can of condensed milk and

 Unsalted butter and you have to make sure it's at room temperature

 The first thing we're going to do is cream our butter and the sugar together

 Whisk your contents so that it's nice and smooth and you should get a texture like this when you're no more or less done

 Even when you're making sweet dishes you should add salt because it just brings out the flavor of all the ingredients

 So just mix it into the flour and now add the flour to your butter and sugar

 So it should look really crumbly at first, but then it should look a bit more smoother as you mix it in together

 So I'm using a round baking tin, but you can use a square one as well

 I use a lot more baking paper than I have because it just makes it easier taking out your

 Finished crumb bars when you've taken out of the oven so make sure you grease your paper

 Now that you've greased your baking tray put in your mixture into the tin

 But only use say about three quarter of the mixture don't use all of it because you'll need the rest for the topping

 Now I'm going to put in the oven say about a gas mark for it's going to be the base of our crumb bars

 And we want to bake it for about 12 minutes, which should give the base a head start while we are waiting

 we're just gonna melt our chocolate so put the chocolate in a heatproof bowl and

 Simply put the chocolate in boiling hot water and stir it when the chocolate has started to melt now add the melted chocolate

 To your condensed milk so that you get a mixture that looks like this now that our base has cooked

 We're just going to pour the melted chocolate with the condensed milk over the cooked base

 My sister just made a nice swirly effect so with the remaining crumb mixture

 Just put it into pieces on top doesn't have to be neat you can just be in any way you like

 So now the fun part adding in a chocolate so you want to add your chocolate chips your chocolate pieces the milk and the white piece

 And I'm using cartonese and just put it in any way doesn't have to be neat or anything like that

 So it's now ready for the oven and I'd put it about gas mark 4 for about 25 to 30 minutes

 So this is out of the oven just make sure you let it cool completely so let it aside for about

 1 to 2 hours before you start cutting into it otherwise you'll end up with a big mess

 So serving suggestions you can serve it up with some double cream or with some chocolate ice cream or chocolate mousse

 Anything you fancy really I promise you this is going to be a great treat for Eid

 So I really really encourage you guys to make it so I hope you enjoyed this tutorial I had so much fun baking this

 It's probably my absolute all-time favorite dessert in the whole wide world

 So I urge you sisters to please try it out trust me I know you'll love it

 Our chocolate elegance is a luscious dessert that is also great for entertaining.

 The layers of creamy chocolate are topped in a rich chocolate glaze made with Cool Whip

 You won't believe how sophisticated yet simple this is to make.

 For this double layer dessert, let's start with the first layer.

 I'm going to blend with my mixer one and a half packages of Philadelphia Cream Cheese

 Just microwave an unwrapped brick in a bowl for about 15 to 20 seconds and your cream

 Then just slowly stir in one and a half cups of Cool Whip Whip topping.

 Simply spread two cups of this mixture into the bottom of a plastic wrap lined 8 by 4

 I'm going to add it to the remaining cream cheese mixture along with half a cup of milk

 This is going to be our chocolate cream cheese and chocolate instant pudding.

 We'll spread this over our creamy mixture to create two perfect layers.

 We recommend about four hours so everything is firm and chilled perfectly.

 This dessert gets even better because it's topped with a chocolate glaze.

 I'm going to microwave three more squares of Baker's Semisweet Chocolate and one cup

 I've inverted my dessert onto a platter and removed the pan and plastic wrap.

 Now just spread the chocolate glaze over our dessert as evenly as possible.

 I've toasted one quarter cup of sliced almonds and we'll just add this to the top of our

 Now refrigerate until the glaze is firm and our dessert is ready to be served.

 For more information, search keyword desserts on CraftCanada.com.

 Hi, this is John from Disney Day by Day and today we're making a simple craft.

 Sun catchers out of plastic beads, pony beads that you can buy at Walmart or any of your

 First you get a pan, a muffin pan or cupcake pan and even a cake pan will do if you want

 To get your pony beads we recommend buying some of the clear style pony beads over the

 A couple of our examples we made earlier, the clear ones the sun catches and goes through,

 the solid ones you can see are more decorative than they are sun catcher.

 So take your pony beads and you want to try to make a single layer in your pan.

 You try to make a single layer, they don't have to be exactly straight up and down.

 Make a single layer, then go ahead and start your oven preheating to around 400 degrees.

 Fill in the pan, fill in your dish that you'd like to make the sun catcher in.

 Here we've got one that's got a solid and some of the clear things, clear beads mixed

 So we're trying to do a Disney theme here, a Mickey and a Minnie type of theme with the

 You will smell, because of course it's plastic, you will smell a plastic smell so you may

 So we'll check them here in 28 minutes and see how they're melting.

 It's been about 24 minutes so we're going to check on the beads.

 As you can see here, they are definitely starting to melt but they do need to go a little bit

 longer so we're going to probably do another 5 minutes and check on them.

 The cake one looks like we'll let it go just a couple more minutes longer.

 So you just basically turn them over and they normally will just pop right out.

 You might have to use a little force, bang it down a couple times.

 Now you can go ahead and some of them may have holes in them or you can use a small drill bit and drill it out.

 Again, it's around 400 degrees in the oven using pony beads for about, I'd say around 35 minutes is what we had to do for ours.

 On this video we're going to be installing the RIDGID Industries Dually 2 lights on the

 I will be mounting the switches using the Daystar rocker switches and Daystar lower

 The lights, the switches, and the dash panel were all purchased from Northridge4x4.com.

 Remove the two lower bolts on the front side of the windshield.

 Mount your windshield bracket using the two bolts previously removed.

 We put a thin piece of rubber between the bracket and the Jeep to avoid scratching the

 It may be necessary to temporarily remove your windshield wiper to fit the plug under

 The two wires come down to this, a red and a black for your positive and your negative.

 Place the D-Box 5 on the battery and hook up the positive and negative D-Box leads to

 Run the switch wires across the engine compartment and through the firewall.

 Remove the lower dash panel by pulling the top toward you, then sliding the panel straight

 Using a small flat head screwdriver, remove two of the retaining clips from your stock

 After that, take your panel and cut out the locations for your switches.

 Once your D-Box wiring has run through your dash, you'll plug your wires into your switches.

 You have a ground that will connect to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, the top terminal.

 You have your power to each switch, which will go to the center terminal, 1, 2, 3, 4,

 Then you have your colored wires, which is one wire for each switch, the bottom terminal,

 Plug in all of your switch wiring and snap the dash panel into place.

 Now plug the red positive wire from your lights into one of the 5 D-Box output wires.

 The products used in the Stock-To-Rock series can be purchased from these vendors.

 Now I'm in the awkward stage or the in between stage, whatever you want to call it.

 But yeah, basically this video is just going to be about how I do my high puff.

 This spray bottle has water, Tresemme conditioner, and I think olive oil.

 Now when I was doing this, I did start to wipe off my makeup a little bit around.

 So don't write a comment telling me that my makeup is coming off because I know.

 And next I put some whipped shea butter, homemade whipped shea butter around my edges just to

 soften them a little bit so it'll be easier for them to lay down.

 Then I use some Shea Moisture Kids butter cream, curling cream, whatever they call it,

 Then I use Icy Fantasia gel because as I said in my other video, I don't like the way

 It doesn't leave any crunch or flakes or any type of residue that I've noticed anyway.

 And again, there I go, wiping again some more of my makeup as you can see.

 Now I didn't notice that I was wiping my makeup away until after I recorded and started editing

 Next I'm going to take an old elastic headband, a really very stretched out headband to wrap

 around my head once and then to tighten a little bit, smooth it in the front, sides

 Mainly in the back is where I begin so it'll be easier to smooth it in the front.

 And then I tighten it a little bit and as you can see I flipped it over my hair and

 I made sure I got all of my hair from underneath the band so it wouldn't be stuck down and

 Then I take my pick, yes all naturals have a pick, should anyway, and I just fluff it

 out, try to, you know, give it some volume, make it a little bigger than what it actually

 Then I take a scarf and tie it around my edges to help my edges lay down a little bit.

 I didn't really leave it on long because I had somewhere to go so I just went on and

 Thanks for watching and don't forget to like, subscribe and comment.

 No matter who you are or what you do, chances are you're one of the millions of people that

 ask the same question at the same time every day of the work week.

 Every day the same places are suggested and the same debate ensues.

 I feel like something that won't make me doze off and drool all over my keyboard again.

 Something that's light, flavorful, and won't knock us out like an elephant tranquilizer.

 In a blender, combine cucumber, grilled onion, red bell pepper, and garlic.

 So next time you're faced with that nagging question of what's for lunch,

 forget about sticking it to the man and opening up your own restaurant.

 My front bulb here, this one, the main light bulb went out on me.

 And a lot of the videos on YouTube I saw were saying you had to take the whole front bumper

 My understanding now after looking into it is that is if you want to replace this whole

 So in order to just switch the bulb though, it's really very simple.

 But before you start, make sure your car is turned off and your lights are turned off

 So the first thing you're going to need to do, so it's my left bulb, this one right here,

 But if you're working on the left side, the first thing you need to do is take out this

 So the way that this pulls out is you just get a screwdriver underneath it.

 That way you can come from both sides and not feel like you're yanking it too much.

 Okay, you're going to pull it out and it's going to look like this.

 Now it is connected to a hose on the bottom, so you can't pull it very far.

 But you're just going to kind of want to pull it to the side there so that you can get a

 If you're facing the front, again this is looking at the left bulb, then whichever one

 you're going to want to switch, you're going to rotate counterclockwise with regards to

 It's just the online version of the owner's manual, which can be helpful.

 Once you've got this guy moved out of the way, you're going to reach down and grab a

 hold of the back of that, like I showed you in the diagram, and twist counterclockwise

 And you can even see the bulb starting to pull out of the back there.

 Okay, here's my replacement bulb that I ordered just off of eBay, I think, or online.

 So you can kind of see what it comes with and where you're going to have to disconnect

 And this gray part right here is where it's going to kind of clip off.

 I've gone ahead and loosened this back clamp just a little bit so I can wiggle it off,

 And you can see the inside of that one is just the same as the other.

 We've got this connector here where the new lamp is just going to slide right on there.

 There's kind of these two little parts that clip onto either side of this latch right

 So you're going to want to do the same thing that you did before, just in reverse, putting

 You kind of put it in at an angle like this and then twist it so that it's going to be

 Make sure your two holes are lined up, which mine are not quite lined up.

 And you're just going to push down on this top part here and lock it into place.

 If you look closely right behind the reflector there, the bulb is securely in place.

 So let's go ahead and turn it on and see if it's working or not.

 Another important thing, make sure your car is off and your lights are off before you

 Your owner's manual will also have a list of the type of bulb that you will need, whether

 Now you're going to want to start mixing the mixture with your hands instead of the spoon

 Make sure that you don't make it too fat and not cover it around the whole length of the stick

 and then do one piece and then once that's done do the other piece

 I didn't have enough mixture to cover the entire two sticks so I'm just going to make a bit more

 I'm just using again two tablespoons of hamster food to one tablespoon of flour

 Just make sure all the mixture is compact around the chew stick so it doesn't fall off

 Now put the chew stick into the microwave for approximately one to two minutes

 A thrust kick is when your toes are facing upward and you're pushing onto the bag.

 Your knee comes up and then you thrust, pushing with your heel.

 Looking at the foot position, you notice the toes are facing up and the heel is pushing.

 The fact that you're getting your knee up and pushing out to the side is.

 Hold onto the bag, bring your knee up and also try to bring your heel up.

 This way you're actually coming around almost like a round kick.

 Once again, the kicking height on your back leg depends on your flexibility.

 And if you were thrusting with the right, then you would lunge back with your left.

A lot of you were able to take part in the Target deal regarding

 the Lysol No Touch Kitchen System, which was awesome depending on where you were.

 either didn't have a Rite Aid in your area or your Target wouldn't price match.

 just want to say you really shouldn't be too disheartened about it because this and the

 regular one that you use in the bathroom are pretty much the same item.

 able to find this one, we were all getting them for free, you could pretty much turn

 ones, the kitchen refills or the containers in this, they've made it so that they don't

 fit and to take the regular one out, you know, you just press the button and pull.

Okay guys, so obviously what you'll be needing is an empty container

 actually you could probably do this with the kitchen ones when you get to the point where

 are, you know, you're shaky or you know, you don't necessarily pour straight, you'll need

 going to do is you're going to take your butter knife and you're going to position it.

 doing it on the back of the bottle and you're going to position it towards the middle of

 Now don't be scared of the little white marks that are going to come in the lid.

 happen and you just go around, apply a little pressure on each side and basically all you're

 all the refills I have for that, my Dawn will be going in there.

 put your hand soap in here and hopefully you know when we get those cheap deals with the

 soft soap or even if you're the type to buy those big large bottle refills, you can get

If you're uncomfortable with this version, I've seen where some people actually

 just drill a hole in the top, use a funnel and refill it that way but it's up to you.

 I prefer this way because it stays neat and if it tips over it's not going to spill anywhere.

 You can strum from the 5th string down or from the 4th or from the 3rd string down.

 Now next chord will be D major and we play this concept here from the 4th string, ok?

 And basically what we are doing, the first note from the strumming, this is the root

 So on the A chord we've got note A. On the C we've got note C here.

 And on D we change to 4th string because there's note D here, ok?

 And on D we play 4, 3 and the same concept, strumming down, yes?

 Like this part here with the strings 1, 2, 3, 4 and second part is with the strings 6,

 That way you can create nice, you know, variation in the sound, it doesn't sound the same like

 On the intro instead of playing D major here, what you can do, you can take C major chord

 Hi guys, now today I will be growing loquats from seed and these seeds or fruit have originally

 come from China but mum has just been back from Spain and has been nice and collected

 So they're pretty big seeds and apparently the fruit is really nice and the trees are

 mainly grown for the ornamental standards and then secondly for the fruit.

 So here I'm just using general old yoghurt pots, I'll put the seeds there and now I'm

 just using a mix of half sieved and sieved compost, moist and all dry but remember we'll

 So I'll just start off with three for now and I've heard that they're pretty easy to

 grow from seed and they've been grown a lot in the Mediterranean areas so I've got three

 pots here and I've already made holes with the pen knife at the bottom so I'm just going

 to select seed and I'm going to push it in sideways, about half an inch down and cover

 So I'll do it again for you, push in your thumb, put the seed flat about quarter to

 half an inch down and then cover it lightly with some compost, do it once more, use your

 Now what I'm going to do is water them and then I'll be putting them, leaving them here

 in the solar tunnel where they will have a nice humid warm temperature for them to germinate

 and so that's the simple way of growing row crops from seeds and this is my I think 100th

 video and I'm getting close to my first anniversary so thank you every single person who has supported

 me, watched my videos, subscribed, liked, even commented, thank you so much for all

 your support, I've found this experience really good and I'm not even thinking about

 stopping and my next video will probably be about my spirea here, let's find a good one.

 So I've left some in water and they're just beginning to root so that will be my next

 video of transplanting these, so thank you so much everybody for supporting me in my

 YouTube channel for my 100th video and I'll see you again sometime soon, I hope you enjoyed

 the video, please like, rate or comment and check out my Facebook page and I'll be posting

 up photos and videos of stuff that I've been growing so just give those a quick water and

 put them to one side, so thank you very much for watching and I'll see you again soon,

 Cast iron skillet, butter, fresh from the gulf, red snapper, oh yeah, blackened seasoning,

 Now the one thing I love about living in the city is that you have a plethora of incredible

 neighbors and my neighbor came over to the house just the other day and he brought me,

 and this is only a small portion, about a 10-12 pound red snapper.

 So I didn't grow up eating red snapper as comfort food, though we did have fish fries

 all the time, but we're going to draw from my background and the background of Louisiana

 and Chef Paul Prudhomme and we're going to blacken some of this red snapper.

 Now blackened seasonings usually traditionally goes with red fish, but you can have it with

 This butter right here is just in the pot to melt because I'm going to pour it in here

 with this bacon drippings, butter and bacon drippings, and we'll explain what that's

 I'm going to take a little bit of lemon juice and put it right onto that red snapper.

 Now the fish is nice and cold so it could make this butter and bacon grease congeal

 a little bit, solidify a little bit, and that's alright because we want it to stick to the

 And when we add this blackened seasoning and then put it in a super hot skillet, that butter

 and bacon grease is going to help it brown a little bit, creating a burn.

 The milk solids and the whey and that butter are going to burn a little bit and the bacon

 Now I know, I can hear you asking already, what's in the blackened seasoning?

 Well if you go to ChefScott.com after you watch this video, then you're just going to

 click on the link and you'll see my recipe for blackened seasoning.

 You can go and buy a mix of blackened seasoning that's already done up, but it's going to

 And then you'll have a good bit of spices in the cabinet after you buy each individual

 I'm going to put that right over there in that skillet, but not before I add just a

 But the outside's going to be super black and spicy, and the inside's going to be beautiful.

 We had breakfast with the grits, but before we poured the grits out, I added some Parmesan

 cheese, Romano cheese, and cheddar cheese, and a little bit of Asiago, and made like

 Just poured that into a little skillet and just let it get nice and congealed like that.

 But while we're doing that, let's take a look at our blackened fish here.

 And that dark caramelized flavor is going to completely contrast with the fish.

 You know, all comfort food does not have to have lots of fat, right?

 Now, any time you have grits left over, go ahead and pour them out into...

 You can take them and put them into a pan and cook them up just like that.

 Now, we're going to let these grits cook probably for about another, I don't know, six or eight

 We want them nice and brown on one side and crispy on the other.

 Now, also, all day long, we've been working on that right there.

 I'm going to take a little bit of salt here before we finish this up.

 A little bit of salt on the grits and a little bit of salt right there on the fish.

 I didn't think about making a video until I'd already pulled the alternator out so I'm

 The only thing that I've done before starting this was bolting on the alternator and reaving

 Bolting the alternator on uses four reverse torques, what I call that tool, not sure if

 A size 12 and it's four bolts, all very easy to get to, and this bracket on the outside

 So now that that's done, I'm going to hook up the connector wire, this little plug.

 Oh and to tension the belt you need a torques, size T60 to release pressure on the tensioner

 And that's all it takes to get an alternator out of an E53 BMW X3.

I'm an international gold medalist in figure skating for the U.S.

 going to try her best to stay on one leg all the way around the circle.

 build some strength in the quads so that you become a better skater.

She's going down, up, down, up, down, up, down, up through the knees.

It's going to build strength for her quads so she becomes a faster, stronger

When you're doing this drill, you normally go around the circle one or two

 also staying on the ball to the front of her foot as she comes around the circle.

 series or for how-to videos on almost any other topic, visit monkeyseed.com.

 Hello YouTube, I'm going to do an unboxing on Beach Spotted Dry Solo HD.

 These are fake, I got them on iOffer.com, didn't know they were fake until yesterday.

 Alright, these look almost exactly like the real ones, but they're a little bit smaller

 The Beed logo is the exact same, and it doesn't say Beach Spotted Dry on the top.

 So look on the top, it doesn't say Beach Spotted Dry is fake, or it doesn't say Monster on

 Another way to know if these are fake is to look at the box where Dr.

 So if you want to get a pair of Beach Spotted Dry, I suggest you get Studio or Pro.

 I'm getting the fake Detox, just like the real one, just like the merch.

I am going to do a look for you but basically what's happened is I've had an allergic reaction to all of my base products.

 So my concealer, my liquid foundation and my powder foundation.

I do discuss this in more detail in the previous video uploaded which is my latest vlog.

 I'm going to show you what I'm doing while I'm waiting to get new products because I have decided to just ditch the ones that I was using because there is no point clogging my pores and still breaking out just for the sake of using concealer and foundation.

 So what I've been reaching for lately is something that I do use when I am not wearing any concealer or foundation because I can't be bothered.

I've talked about it before but normally it's for a sort of primer use.

 But this here I'm going to use it to take away any redness because I do find for my skin that this does take away redness.

 I'm going to use a little bit more than what I would if I was using a primer.

 So I've got about that much on and I'm just going to... it says on the back to sort of wipe it across your face.

 But because I'm not using any foundation or concealer or anything like that, I'm really just going to rub it in because I just want it to take away the redness.

 I don't have to worry about applying another product on the top which is something that you have to worry about when you're... I went blank.

 It's something you have to worry about when you apply foundation.

 So I'm just applying it everywhere and hopefully it takes away any redness and it just gives a more sort of brighter look and gives your skin a nice fresh look.

 And I do have oily skin and I don't find this makes my skin any more oily.

But do test it out on yourself before because everyone's different.

 I've applied my Beauty Flash Balm and I've just let it sit for a little bit and I'm just going to apply a few products.

 And keeping in mind that this look is really just a 5 minute out of bed sort of look, really something fresh and very little effort.

 So keeping that in mind I've kept the products down to a bare minimum.

I'm going to do my eyebrows because that does wonders for your eye shape without really having to apply any makeup.

 So with mascara I suppose just choose whatever your favourite mascara is.

 I have many but lately with this sort of fresh look I like lengthening my lashes rather than doing something that volumises or does both.

 Now I'm just going to define my eyebrows by filling them in with a brow pencil.

 And as I said I really do think that this adds wonders to the shape of your eye.

 I've been keeping it really glossy just because I think it keeps the look a bit more fresh.

 And it also gives you that sort of sexy cute pouty look and I like that a lot.

 And then colour wise I've been using really neutral colours or colours that enhance my skin tone or the colour of my eyes or even the colour of my lips.

 It's in the colour Bloom and it's a real peachy coral colour and that looks really great against my skin tone.

 It's a limited edition one but it's an example so you can see it.

 If you want to go down the more neutral road I would recommend using MAC.

 This is called Ample Pink and it goes on really sheer and it just gives that tiny touch of pink whilst keeping it quite neutral.

 If you do want to go a bit more pink again then I would choose.

 The thing that I've been using the most though is my tinted lip conditioner by MAC in Petting Pink.

 If you did want to maybe go a little bit more of a step further.

 I would use maybe like an eyeliner and just smudge it in the lash lines.

 Do my eyebrows, a little bit of a lip product and you're set to go.

 And you don't want your skin to be bothered by lots of concealer and foundation.

 And I think it's important too to let your skin breathe every now and then.

 And maybe you consider to give your skin a day off from wearing concealer and foundation.

 If you're thinking about joining the military and you've been just hanging out in the weight

 room, chilling out for the last few years, you've really got your work cut out for you

 Whether you're gunning for the Army, the Navy, the Marines, or the Air Force, it's going

 You're going to have to do a ton of high rep pull-ups, long ass runs, and endless ab crunches,

 So if we're going to get serious, we all know this is not a meathead's best friend.

 So I'm going to show you how to up your endurance today, guys, while keeping that muscle.

 It might be tempting to pump out rep after rep with little to no weight, since your tests

 will most likely require a certain number of body weight pull-ups.

 However, guys, heavy weights and low reps are actually much more effective at increasing

 If you increase the additional weight, you can do four or five reps.

 You'll get even better at grinding out those hard pull-up sets.

 Even if you're not part of your official test, guys, you'll still be doing lots of push-ups

 So unless you're already an outstanding bencher, you don't need any fancy routines.

 Just plug away at heavy sets of three and five and do lots of volume.

 I find that people who really suck at the bench press basically just don't do it enough.

 Every time you finish your heavy lifting, follow it up with higher rep benches and body

 You've still got to practice the actual movement to get better at it.

 You can have super strong abs, the kind that can stabilize hundreds of pounds in the squat,

 and deadlift, and still come up short in your crunches and sit-ups.

 So if you're aiming for 50, 75, or even 100 crunches, the only way to reach that goal

 So if this is a weak point for you guys, then you should be doing crunches at least once

 The running is going to be the hardest and most agonizing part of the military fitness

 I can give you all kinds of crazy circuit routines and sprint workouts, but that's not

 The only thing that's going to actually help you get better at running is actually running.

 So get out there and nail those two to three mile runs and make it happen, guys.

 And for those of you who are wondering when you should incorporate this into your routine

 if you're trying to preserve the maximum amount of muscle mass, I would say at the end of

 Some guys like it first thing in the morning, but I think there's just too much demand on

 So go ahead and at the end of your workout, get out there, hammer out that two to three

 We're going to talk about some cool things you can do to garnish your drinks if you're having a party, having people over, making cocktails,

 salt and sugar, two of the main ingredients that you use to rim the glass of a cocktail with.

You can actually make your drinks look better by doing things like this.

 So I'm basically going to show you a couple ideas of how to spruce up your drink and make it look better.

 I like to use the coarser grain because it adds a little texture to the rim instead of the super fine

 The aroma, the smell, every time you put your nose into a glass that's garnished with a fresh herb, you're actually going to smell this

 before you taste the cocktail, which helps enhance the flavor of the drink, which is kind of fun.

So in this situation, if you're going to be infusing something with

 basically to a fine powder or as much as a fine powder as you can get it to because rosemary is pretty pungent, a little

 margarita or you can, like I said, if you're creating cocktails at home,

 salt in this case, and it adds a little dimension to the cocktail.

 So because you have zest, you have lime juice in a margarita, we're actually going to take a

 Make sure you're always cleaning your fruit first because fruits are generally coated in waxes and pesticides

We're going to take some lemon as well, and we're going to take a lime.

 Now what this is going to do, it's just going to be beautiful, vibrant color.

 The reason I'm putting the pulp and the zest on top of a paper towel is because we want to press all the moisture out of it

If you add the sugar and salt to it, sugar and salt is going to start to dissolve

So you're going to fold the napkin, you're going to give this a little press.

I always like to add a little spice to my drinks because I really like the idea of spice and sweet at the same time.

 coarsely ground, and I'm going to grind some peppercorns right over the top of these.

 If you let the zest dry a little bit more, it will stick to the glass a little more, but I like the fresh flavors.

If you're doing mojitos, instead of traditionally garnishing them with garlic,

 fairly boring to me, you can take some mint, do the same thing as a rosemary, dice it up fresh, really teeny,

 or you can do it in really long, really thin strips and actually put the mint in the drink or around the rim in the same fashion.

 You can do wasabi sugar, wasabi salt, depending on the cocktails you're making, pepper, any fruit.

And if you do have any good ideas, send us pictures, ask us questions, find us on Facebook,

 hit us up on PourYourPoison.com, and let us know what you think, for sure.

 Sup guys this is Paul from IO and today I got a package from FedEx.

 They actually arrived two business days beforehand because it was supposed to come next Wednesday

 But yeah it came actually it came in today I checked the shipping delivery confirmation

 online and it said it was on my way to delivery so I'm surprised it came early and I'm not

 Alright it's just in another box, priority box for some reason.

 Here are the specs 528 megahertz Android 512 megabytes of ROM 288 RAM and the 5 megapixel

 And yes I did get the brown one I didn't want the white one because it's too common.

 Alright welcome to HTC, HTC care, warranty statement, accessory guide of all the accessories.

 To prevent damage do not apply excessive pressure to the screen.

 Please remove the device from your pants pocket before sitting down.

 So yeah for those people who break iPhone screens and what not.

 There's the call button, home, menu, and an end and also power.

 On the left side it just says HTC innovations and it has the volume rocker right there.

 And then on the top there's the case opening and then the 3.5mm headphone jack.

 Actually I'm going to charge it and turn it on and make another video.

 Alright well that's all for now and I will have more videos on the Android platform.

 cake set and I failed like on decorating the cake I absolutely failed.

 I don't know and so I just like took it off and I put it on the top and yeah and then like

 sprinkles went everywhere and yeah and I'm sorry for the background my brother's playing in the

 back of some video games or something and so yeah um I didn't record me doing it the

 pumpkin cooking but I just wanted to um I guess do a taste test and what mine looked like.

 thought mine was gonna look a lot better but uh as you can see I'm a pro at this

 but uh okay so I'm not very good at I'm pretty good at decorating stuff but I wasn't I didn't

 really well this stuff was kind of hard because I make cupcakes and all that stuff

 so yeah again sorry for the background noise my brother's playing like a video game

 somewhat you can I got the circle one and just I just it's so it's so um

 lopsided so it's like really ugly so I please pardon all the noises

 it's really ugly so I'm really sorry but I'm just gonna have a little taste test okay

 so let's begin let's cut the cake oh this cake is really hard to cut oh my gosh

 it can't even cut anything okay you know I'm just gonna try the pink icing whatever this is

 strawberries yeah just the pink icing tastes like strawberries and stuff

 let me taste the red icing that was supposed to be the strawberries

 the the strawberry jelly icing it's uh really good really really gooey-ish

 the cake itself as you can see there's a part taken out of it the cake itself is actually

 really really really really really good beside the fact that all this is really ugly the cake

 is really good this is a pretty good set um if you guys ever see this around

 you know it's a really good set um I'm gonna show you guys the cake itself

 this is a pretty good set um if you guys ever see this around I recommend you guys to buy this

 even though if you guys are not so good at decorating like me it's still really really

 good to try and it's really fun to make as long as you don't get frustrated like I did

 the white icing tastes just tastes like uh tastes like candy on the little sprinkles

 and they taste like I don't know like Mexican bubble gum that's what they taste like

 sorry my dad's playing my dad got a new stereo and so he's hooking it up in the living room

 and he's playing all the old songs in the living room so yeah so uh one out of ten I give this uh

 10 out of 10 I got frustrated that I did not do good decorating this cake but uh

 the taste is amazing taste-wise and fun-wise it's a totally 10 out of 10.

 close view on that look at the inside but uh I can wash out this and use it for I can use it as a mold

 I can also use this as a mold maybe well that's it thank you guys for watching I'll see you guys

 over here I know this is a short video but just for you guys so today we were having a look at the

 I got a request and I get a lot of questions regarding my hair and how I

 keep up the color and how often I wash it all of that good stuff so that is

 because since I talked to you last I've kind of switched it up because I can't

 Panic, purple plum by Enrage, and purple passion from Beyond the Zone color

 jams with a Z. Here I'm just showing you how much of each thing I put in.

 it a brief summary because I kind of just mix until I like the color and I

 ultraviolet as I had left but usually I like using more of the ultraviolet than

 anything but then I end up using a lot of the Enrage color which is in the

 other color and I use a extremely little amount of the Beyond the Zone color jams

 turns it to like a blacky tar color so that's why it's that color but it doesn't

The last time I did this I used what I had left over of my color

 to make the conditioner but this time since I didn't have any color left I

 color and this is my conditioner that I use every time I wash my hair.

 roots and I like massage that in and I shake it out and brush it out whatever

 and put it up in a ponytail just so I can be chill with it and I don't have to

The next day, it depends on if I'm like leaving going somewhere nice,

 weeks I will condition it with that same conditioner but add a little bit more

 color to it and without bleaching my roots I'll just put that all through my

 hair like and on my roots to like really just like really refresh the

Yeah and then I'll leave that in for like a few hours maybe a whole day

 if I'm not really doing anything and then I'll wash that out and it's like I

 a comment and I will answer them but I think I got really everything.

 Hey, everyone, today on the Cooking Everything Outdoors show we're going to be having Mexican

 style beer can chicken and some grilled corn with cilantro mesquite butter.

 The Cooking Everything Outdoors show is sponsored by Camp Chef and www.OutdoorCooking.com and

 You'll need a teaspoon of either ground red pepper or this I'm using McCormick's Fiery

 4 tablespoons or 1 quarter cup of their chipotle roasted garlic.

 This is going to give us really robust flavors and a little bit of heat.

 Then you want to take your olive oil and you're just going to rub it on the carcass

 The reason you want to do this is so that your seasoning will stick and it's going to

 And then you're going to take the rest and sprinkle it all over the chicken.

 Now all we need to do is either stuff a beer can up the backside of the chicken or you

 So you can pour your beer or chicken stock or whatever you want inside of this cavity.

 And then you want to take your chicken and we're going to slide it carefully over the

 I put mine in a little cake pan there so that it balances and stays stable.

 And it also is going to catch the chicken dripping so those aren't going to fall into

 It's indirect heat, which in actually I have it in a somewhat of a circular pattern.

 I've also sprinkled some soaked mesquite chips because I want a little delayed smoke flavor

 I've got my meat probe into my thigh so we can check the temperature.

 Now, what I want to do is I want to take this off and let it rest and I'm going to prepare

 I've just peeled the husk back, tied them off and removed the silk.

 While our corn is grilling up, let's go ahead and make our compound butter, which is going

 to be a tablespoon of McCormick Grillmates Mesquite Seasoning and then about 2 tablespoons

 Take our Mesquite Seasoning and our cilantro and we're just going to very simply mix that

 And it's just a simple compound butter that we're going to brush on our grilled corn.

 Now, I have some, and I hope I pronounced this right, cotija cheese, which is going

 And the question that I want to ask you today is what do you do with this?

 Well, this is the heels of a bread or I'd say the side crusty part which generally you

 And what about those recipes which tell you to cut the sides of the bread?

 So don't throw them away, make something very easy and very amazing.

 First we're going to begin by making our garlic oil for which you need some chopped garlic

 And remember, if you're using salted butter instead of olive oil, then don't add salt.

 Moving on, then we're going to add some black pepper, some basil leaves, some chili flakes

 Make sure you crush everything together and there you are, your Italian seasoning is ready.

 Okay, now in a container, we're going to add our chopped garlic, our Italian seasoning

 And make sure that you don't tell my mom that I spilled so much oil on the counter.

 But what you should remember is that you have to mix everything together and let this mix

 At this point, we're going to slice our crust into sticks, transfer them to a baking tray

 But wait, you have to remember that you have to give the garlic oil a little bit of stir

 And before you bake them, make sure you spread the oil thoroughly.

 Now for baking, I just want to show you how I use my microwave on convection mode.

 But if you don't have that option, then set the timer for 10 minutes and the temperature

 And if you're using an oven, then set the mode to toast, your timer to 10 minutes and

 Well, the problem with microwave convection is that heat comes only from the above and

 for heat to transfer everywhere, you have to keep the product on a high.

 But anyways, just bake at 220 degrees centigrade for five minutes, whether you're doing in

 Well, the reason they are so crispy is basically because they are just crust of the bread,

 And that is why I feel that they're much better than soup sticks or even if you want a simple

 But anyways, guys, there it is, how to make garlic breadsticks in five minutes.

 You'll find all the list of ingredients and their measurements on the website.

 For updates and queries, you can like me on Facebook, follow me on Twitter and Google+.

 It is frittata night in our house, so we are on to another video post.

 I have been preheating the skillet here, which is getting really hot.

 First off, to make a frittata, you want to note that you want to use something that can

 go in the oven that doesn't have any plastic handles or anything.

 This one is all metal, and I have my mitts here just to put it in the oven.

 We have the broiler set also, and we have just a bunch of vegetables that we have on

 We also like to make this with asparagus in the springtime, and red pepper, and tomatoes,

 Just put in what you like, measurements don't matter, just throw it in there, it will turn

 We also have about 2 ounces of fancy shredded Colby cheese that we had in the fridge, as

 well as 3 eggs that I've already kind of beat here, and 3 egg whites, which is the equivalent

 We are going to start by cooking the vegetables first, and this is super hot.

 So let the vegetables cook, basically just until they're, I mean if you like them crunchy,

 Well as you can see, we've been cooking these for about 5 minutes now, and they are nice

 If you're using something that's real watery, you might want to just turn the heat up a

 We have thyme here, we would go get fresh thyme, but it's like 10 degrees outside, and

 And then I have the addition of caraway seeds, because I love rye bread, and I just thought

 that they would go well in an omelette, or frittata, so we'll see how they go.

 And we're also going to add a little crazy salt, which is like a really light and sodium

 And while I let those kind of aromatically fumigate, I'm going to add the egg whites

 And then I'm just going to kind of make sure my vegetables are pretty like spread out and

 And you just want to let it sit for just a minute or so, basically enough time to add

 So we will then kind of just make sure everything is nice and flat in there.

 So now we have been preheating the broiler, so I'm going to stick this guy in.

 And you probably, oh first I should probably turn the burner off.

 And just watch it for five minutes, maybe a little longer until your cheese turns brown,

 Nice and puffy, and as they say on the Food Network, golden brown.

 One thing to note is this entire recipe is only about 600 calories, so we are each going

 You can easily feed a family of four and then have a little something extra on the side.

 I forgot to mention that in the time the frittata cooked, we also cleaned the entire

 kitchen and put all the dishes in the dishwasher, so it's a very simple meal, both cooking-wise

 And we also assembled a little green salad and toasted some focaccia bread.

 But I just wanted to take a bite of this on film, as is tradition, just to see, you know,

The Great Unboxer here and today I have got an unboxing for you guys of the Spec C-through Satin for my MacBook Pro 13 inch.

 And this is basically a case for my MacBook Pro, in case you guys don't know.

On the website it looks actually much more bluish than the actual product colour, which is more blue-greenish kind of thing.

Pretty expensive, but then again it's Spec so I expect good quality stuff.

 This video has actually been delayed as I have not had the time to do editing and what not these past few days.

 My last video was the unboxing and installation of the clear backplate for the iPhone 4.

 And you could see the Spec C-through Satin on the table as well, so I decided to post this up now instead of later on.

 But I do apologise because I have been really busy with school and everything.

 So, taking the case out of the box, as you can see there is nothing else in there.

The top is there, and it has the Spec logo on the side, which I'll show later on.

 And here's the bottom piece, with some instructions taped onto it.

 But installation for the case is pretty straightforward, nothing really complicated to be honest.

 And I'm just going to wipe down the case in case of dirt and what not, and debris or whatever.

 Spec does say to clean out the case every once in a while, a couple of weeks, maybe two weeks.

 Every two weeks take the case out of your MacBook Pro, give it a nice wipe in case there's any built up debris in there.

 Because if that happens, then your MacBook Pro is going to get scratched.

 Here I'm just going to install the bottom one, which is basically quite simple to do.

 You just put the MacBook Pro into the bottom one, and it just snaps into place.

 And it has four clips on the sides, which I'll show you in the review video.

 I have a lot of review videos to do before I actually show you this one.

 But when that comes up, I'll post a link in the description box below.

 It feels much, much more heavier than what the MacBook Pro usually feels like with the case on.

 You get used to it after a while, but the first time when you first get the thing, it feels really heavy.

 As you can see, the battery indicator's there, and the lights for the battery shines through.

 And here's the inside of my MacBook Pro, which I have no idea why I'm showing you that.

I was actually going to show you the clips on the side of the case, which are in the MacBook Pro.

 Please subscribe, do all that fun stuff, and I'll see you guys in the next video.

 Hey guys, so this is my first new video on my new channel and I just want to thank all

 So this look that I'm going to show you guys is inspired by a famous Korean figure skater.

 Her name is Kim Yuna and she is currently competing in the Winter Olympics.

 If you look on YouTube, Kim Yuna, James Bond, you can see the video or I'll just put the

 So if you guys want to see how I did this look, continue watching!

 So I'm going to take this yellow color and I like using this color because it's similar

 So now I'm going to take a gel liner and I'm using Stila Smudge Pot.

 So now to make the wing at the end, follow your lower lash line and go upwards.

 So it doesn't have to look perfect because we're going to go over with black eyeshadow.

 And then you're going to go over your eyeliner and slightly go a little bit above your eyeliner.

 So now I'm going to go over my lower lash line with black eyeshadow.

 So now I'm going to apply false eyelashes and apply mascara to my top and bottom lid.

 festival dish from the south and the reason we are visiting this sweet desert

 today is because every Sankranti this dish is a must have in any South Indian

 Sankranti as you're aware is the harvest festival and it marks the changes in the

 growing season naturally there is an abundance of rice and this rice dish

 became popular with the farming community whatever the history behind

 this dish pongal always takes me back to my favorite childhood pastime that is

 flying kites and seeing this tons of kites in the sky and not only in the sky

 we used to get tons of relatives visiting us for this festival it also meant that

 mom would make this utterly delicious dish with rice and jaggery and is loved

 so much so this Sankranti if your mom is not around and don't fret let me teach you

 one cup of rice, half a cup of moong dal, lot of people love to roast this moong dal

 but I always love to mix both of them just wash it good and add water and

 now that I have washed this rice and moong dal I'm going to add 3 cups of water

 for this preparation you can add 2 cups of water and 2 cups of milk or 3 cups of

 there are many kinds of rice sweets we make and one of the popular dish and

 which I like very much is also called jarda pulao which each rice grain will

 look like gold rice so we're going to make that also in the future

 once you bring this rice and moong dal to boil just mix it one time and then cover it

 and let it cook fully for this preparation you want this rice to be

 over cooked just like how you make curd rice so bring it to a boil and cook it well and

 when the rice is almost done we're going to add milk, jaggery and other ingredients

 while the rice and the dal is boiling I'm going to cut this coconut into very

 small pieces because I like the bite of raw coconut in my pongal and whenever we

 say pongal there are two kinds of pongal one is sakara pongal one is kara pongal

 while the sweet pongal or the sakara pongal is had as a dessert the kara pongal is

 usually had as a breakfast items and lot of times it's also called as a kind of

 now the rice is almost cooked so what we're going to do is we're going to add milk

 we're going to add another one and a half cup of milk and bring it to boil

 there is the reason why we did not add the milk in the starting because if you

 add milk sometimes it can get stuck at the bottom and there is more chances of

 burning it and also when you add rice to the milk and cook it takes very longer

 time so what I did is we cooked the rice almost in the water and then we added

 milk to give that nice milky flavor to the pongal while the rice is getting cooked on the

 other stove I'm going to saute some nuts and dry fruits and add to this so I've

 got some almonds here so saute them little bit add some cashew nut and pistachio

 whatever nuts you have you know so once the cashew nut gets little bit color add

 raisins ok now it's very easy as soon as these raisins puff up you know that this is cooked

 transfer it out and then add into now we're going to add jaggery you can also add sugar but jaggery gives a very nice

 remember one thing see once you add jaggery the rice won't get cooked easily so the rice almost has to get a mashy texture

 that's when you add jaggery and let it cook on a medium flame I also have small pieces of

 coconut add because kids love this small piece of coconuts and even I love this small pieces of coconuts in my pongal

 if you have little bit of cardamom powder just sprinkle little bit of cardamom powder one of the beautiful

 flavoring that goes in this pongal sweet is camphor flavor but camphor is available in two forms one is

 edible and other one is they light it and pass the flame around to take the blessings so make sure you get edible camphor because the regular camphor is not good for you

 out so if you have edible camphor add very little bit usually it comes like a small pieces if you are adding that make sure you crush it fine add it into the milk and another ingredient I love to add very little

 do not add people should not know that you have added that is little bit of pepper powder just you know small trays of little bit I add do not add too much let me tell you it should be so little people should not even figure out that you added pepper that gives another nice flavor to your sweet pongal

 and my last ingredient I also love to add saffron to this so I have little bit of saffron here so I'm going to add little bit if you want to add little bit butter go ahead and add and mix it well and then your pongal is ready

 I hope you have enjoyed to learn this beautiful pongal with your VahChef on this occasion of this Sankranti pongal I wish all my viewers on behalf of vahrehvah and your VahChef a very very happy pongal to you all and remember that vahrehvah is all about inspiring

 others to cook so please post your cooking recipes and tips so others may benefit from your great cooking.

 Okay, so the next thing we're going to go and do is prep the speaker for the locomotive.

 I've already cut out my wires here to the length that I need them.

 So if you want to look into that, I will have all the parts that I use for installing

 the sound decoder in the description of the video which will be right below the video

 So anyways, first off, we're going to go ahead and solder our two wire leads to the speaker

 And as you can see right here, the two speaker wire pickups on the speaker.

 And okay, so I went ahead and got my two wires drilled, or my two wires soldered onto the

 And this is the next thing we're going to go and do is install the speaker into the

 And in order to do that, I'm going to go ahead and have to drill a hole so the wires can

 So using a drill here, I'm going to go ahead and just drill a hole through it.

 And I'm going to go ahead and clean that hole and go ahead and feed our wires through the

 And it's going to be a little tight because we actually want it to be like that.

 And we're actually going to go ahead and seal this hole off again as soon as I finish because

 So I'm going to go ahead and pull these all the way through and we'll go ahead and glue

 Alright guys, so I went ahead and got my speaker installed in the baffle.

 And as you can see here, I went ahead and just glued some very small pieces of styrene

 onto the four corners because there were four screw holes there.

 And I also went ahead and put a little bit of CA glue around this right here, even though

 So anyways, just one last thing to make sure this speaker is nice and solid and doesn't

 go anywhere is I'm going to take just a little bit of plastic cement and just go ahead and

 I'm not going to do right here because it's a little too close to the speaker.

 The main reason I'm doing that is just to make sure that when the speaker is on and

 So I'm going to go ahead and let this whole thing dry for just a few minutes and then

 we'll install it into the decoder and see how the engine sounds.

 Alright, so I have the speaker sitting back here and this is where it's going to go.

 But anyways, I'm going to go ahead and start off by installing it here.

 So very quickly, I'm just going to go ahead and solder these in.

 And I'm going to go ahead and work on the second one real quick.

 Alright, so again I'm just going to go ahead and take my soldering iron and get that soldered on.

 If it's possible, I'd always recommend gluing your speaker to the frame itself.

 Because if you glue it to the shell, sometimes it can vibrate around it a little bit.

 But anyways, we're going to test this out on the air now because I don't have the shell completely on.

Now that we've got all the sounds and locomotive and engine working,

 I have 1 1⁄2 cups of raw sunflower seeds that I soaked overnight, rinsed and drained.

 So I'm going to take a little over 1⁄2 cup of raw sesame seeds.

 What I did was I took and grinded them into a powder in my coffee grinder.

 Then I'm going to add a touch of water to make tahini out of it.

 Then I'm going to add some parsley, ginger, and some sea salt and process it in my blender

 This is my 1⁄2 cup of sesame seeds that I took and grinded in my coffee grinder.

 I added about a tablespoon of water or less just to make it a thick paste.

 I added my tahini, my sea salt, black pepper, some parsley, and ginger.

 You're supposed to use fresh parsley and ginger root, but I don't buy that.

 I'm going to chop it up and put it in there and adjust it as necessary from there.

 For people that are transitioning that miss cheese or green onion dip, creamy things like

 You can add other things to it or leave some out according to how you like it.

 Always taste it as you go along because if it doesn't taste good, it's not going to work

 Once I added all the onions chopped up and a little bit of garlic powder, it really changed

 Hi guys how's it going welcome to another amazing edition of my virgin kitchen tonight

 I am attempting to cook a salmon the most intimidating fish known to man it's pink it's

 scary and I don't like it but I'm gonna go for it I've got to learn how to cook it so

 let's give it a go and see how we get on we're gonna make it with a little bit of mashed

 potato serve with a leek on the side stir that in and also some hollandaise sauce which

 is like a french buttery sauce we're gonna give it a go see what happens it's actually

 another month a new month's May and that is the new picture of Richard Hammond calendar

 he's looking pretty wild there the hair is a little crazy probably longer than my own

 actually so girls steady yourself if you know if that's the sort of thing you like you know

 I'll only show you that for a few seconds so rewind the video if you want have another

 Ok so a work colleague of mine Emma has asked me to do this whole video in a Birmingham

 accent which is a place in the middle of the UK where they have a funny accent well there's

 lots of places in England that have funny accents but particularly the Birmingham accent

 or the Brummie accent is pretty tricky to do from my point of view it's rubbish so I'm

 gonna give it my go I'm gonna try and introduce the ingredients in a Brummie accent so bear

 with me if you don't understand me ok so what you basically need is you need some white

 vinegar in a bottle like this you only need a tablespoon of that you need some olive oil

 which you get that makes you like burst your pan into the heat and things like that you

 need some double cream you need some Dijon mustard which is like posh mustard from France

 it's lovely you need some pepper and some salt some lemon juice 4 eggs some potatoes

 and a leek which you could cut up you could cut this up as well and then you're gonna

 boil it and then you also need some unsalted butter alright that was a rubbish accent I

 apologise for every Brummie person or Birmingham person for their accent rubbish I know but

 anyway I hope you're happy about that Emma so what we're gonna do first of all is peel

 the potatoes and chop up your leek because we're gonna start to make mashed potatoes

 so let's do that and then we can start to cook the salmon and the sauce which doesn't

 Right so as you'll see I've started to cut my potatoes with the leek start this end because

 it gradually gets worse and worse tasting so you don't really want to eat that because

 it's gonna be like eating plastic so you want to eat that end cut it up finely into

 little thin strips anyway so cut it to about there and then we're all good alright.

 Ok guys this is where we're at that pan is nearly boiling which is gonna check the leeks

 and the potatoes in I've now got a bowl with 225g of the butter which is chilling out to

 room temperature which we're gonna shove in the microwave in a minute to melt and then

 I've got a big pan with only a teeny bit of water in so what we're gonna do I've also

 separated my eggs as well so you've got the egg yolks in there one of them split actually

 it's kind of like a yolky river and the whites these can just go down the sink with my psycho

 knife anyway so you get this bowl you need to make sure that this bowl can rest upon

 the pan and it doesn't touch the water apparently apparently that's really important for the

 hollandaise sauce so what you're gonna do is get your egg yolks in there with a tablespoon

 of this white wine vinegar let's see if it tastes like white wine.

 Urgh no it tastes like vinegar chuck that in there and a tablespoon of Dijon mustard

 mix it together and then when the melted butter is there we'll mix that in as well ok.

 Ok guys so I've put the eggs in there with a tablespoon of Dijon mustard and the white

 wine vinegar just gonna whisk that all together ok so just keep doing that.

 Ok guys so that was boiling so I've just chucked my leeks and potatoes in there kind of looks

 like a nasty stew at the moment but I promise you there are potatoes in there at the bottom

 it's just the leeks are treading water what I've also done is that little bit of water

 that's in here I've put it on to heat so that's gonna you've got to wait until it's boiling

 and then you can chuck your mixture in there and then gradually pour in your melted butter

 that makes the hollandaise sauce thing I tell you what that thing tastes disgusting but

 I'm gonna try and liven it up a little bit anyway so we're getting there only the salmon

 Ok then guys that water in there that little puddle is starting to boil so all you've got

 to do is grab this plop that on top remember so it doesn't sit in the water and what you

 need to do is turn it down to a really low heat and just keep whisking this like an omelette

 mixture but you just keep whisking this until it starts to thicken and then here's my melted

 butter we're just gonna gradually pour that in until it's all gone and then chuck in some

 lemon juice and some salt and pepper as well but I'll show you that.

 Ok guys as you can see that's got a little bit thicker so what you've got to do is start

 to get your melted butter and just pour it in gradually until it all goes and just keep

 Ok guys this is when it gets a little bit crazy the leek and potatoes are nearly done

 they're gonna be drained off in a minute all the butter's whisked into there just added

 my salt and my lemon salt pepper and lemon juice in there about a teaspoon of lemon juice

 in there I've got a hot pan on there I'm just about to whack the salmon on there which I've

 seasoned with salt and pepper so we'll chuck that on there it only takes about 2 or 3 minutes

 to do the salmon so it should all be pretty darn come together any minute now.

 Ok guys we've got a trio of things going on here still want that sauce salt and pepper

 all stirred in and lemon juice I've just whacked those salmon on there it's kind of scary I

 need a spit guard because that fat is going everywhere the oil it's only gonna be about

 2 or 3 minutes gotta flip it over in a minute I've got my mashed potato and leek there just

 about to pour about a tablespoon of cream into it and that should all be done so it's

 all coming together and it's scary right now ok so the cream is in there it's all mashy

 now I've got to flip these over nice we're getting there ok then guys it's all chilled

 out I've just put some potato on the plate and I've turned all the heat off everything

 it's all calmed down so what I'm gonna do is get my tuna steak my tuna steak my salmon

 wallop it on there with the potato kind of at some sort of funky angle then get the sauce

 that I made with a ladle old school just dribble a little bit over the top like that and that

 is pretty much all done so it's a good job I'm not that hungry because it doesn't really

 look that appealing on its own but that is all done you could probably have some vegetables

 on the side with it or just have massive pudding afterwards or even order a pizza but I'll

 let you know what that tastes like because that sauce is probably pretty interesting

 so anyhow done it if I can do that anyone can have a go for yourself and I'll see you

 Ok guys I just want to say I've just had a little nibble of it and it is blowing nice

 that sauce so as bad as it looked trying to put it together it actually turned out pretty

 good it's just a shame the salmon I bought is full of bones it's kind of like a skeleton

 but we're getting my way through it and I really recommend giving this one a try it

 is actually quite cheap all the ingredients and it's quite filling as it is so maybe not

 I'm sure everyone here has wanted good luck, but you don't have to go searching through a field

 for that lucky four leaf clover, and you don't have to wear the same socks to every baseball game, every football game.

 I have been making and I've been eating strafulli for as long as I can remember.

 Every year around Christmas and New Year's, my mom and I mix, glaze,

We make 365 pieces of strafulli, and it brings you good luck in the upcoming year.

 Our strafulli has caught the eye of some of the best chefs in America, and they've been begging us for our family recipe.

 But instead of selling out and giving it to these chefs, we've decided to just share it with a small group of people.

 Making strafulli is kind of a complex process, and it takes about seven steps.

 finishing the dough, frying the strafulli, adding the honey, and then finally eating.

First, you have to get all of your ingredients to make the strafulli.

 lemon zest or orange zest, it's any type of citrus that you need.

 You'll need vegetable oil to fry in, it doesn't matter what kind of oil, we happen to use vegetable oil,

 a slotted spoon so that when you pick out the strafulli, all the oil slips through the spoon,

 and you also need some paper towels or newspaper so that you can get the oil off of the strafulli when they're done.

 you need a bowl to mix in, and you need a bowl to serve in, and

 you can use a bowl to add, you can use a separate bowl to add honey in.

 After all of your ingredients, you have all of your ingredients,

 conserve it, so when you mix it, you have something to make sure the dough is not too sticky, and you add your salt also,

 And it is really messy, so you can let your little, like your little siblings or any kids that you babysit do it, because they'll have fun.

You just want to add it to taste, so you can add as much or as little as you want,

 and it actually makes it taste really, really good, and so it's not just a piece of fried dough,

 This part takes a little while, because you have to get the right amount in.

 It does kind of get stuck on the bottom, so just use your hand to get rid of, to get the zest off of the bottom of the grater.

 You don't have to use the entire orange, like you don't have to go through every single spot on the orange to get enough zest.

 So now you have eggs in a bowl, with your flour and your zest and your salt.

 So again, just use your hands, it does feel really gross, but your little siblings will like it.

 And you want to mix it up until it kind of starts to stick together.

 And this is just mixing it, this isn't even making it into a dough yet.

 It's hard to eat it off your hands too, but once it's kind of mixed together,

 You want to flour the surface you're working on, which is why I saved some of my flour.

 Today's video is going to be my updated foundation, contour, blush, and highlight routine.

 It has been a little while since I posted my most recent routine so I figured it would

 Oh and also I do have a little bit of an exciting announcement for you guys.

 If you don't follow me on Instagram you won't know this yet so I'm going to go ahead and

 We are very excited to say that we are expecting our first child.

 My due date is February 19th and as of right now I am just a little bit over three months

 along and it has just been such a great thing especially with all the things that we've

 It's really been an awesome and just, I don't know, our little bit of happiness every day

 and we are just so excited and we already love our little baby so much and we can't

 But anyway if you want to see my updated foundation routine then just keep on watching.

 And so as you can see I went ahead and squeezed a little bit of the Rimmel Stay Matte Foundation

 and the L'Oreal True Match Lumi Foundation and depending on the weather, if it's going

 to be hot and a little bit humid I do more of the Stay Matte Foundation, just a little

 So I just squeeze that onto my Real Techniques Stippling Brush and then I'm going to start

 Now I'm going in with my Coty Airspun Powder and I just concentrate this powder mostly

 So that's kind of like my nose, my chin, in between my brows, my cheeks as well because

 And I love this powder, it will really make your makeup last all day long.

 And then I just go around really lightly and pat it all over the rest of my face.

 Grabbed my NYC Sunny Bronzer and then I have this angled BH Cosmetics Blush Brush and I'm

 Get it really close to the hairline and then start to blend it downwards.

 And then I do a little bit on either side of my nose, not being too precise but just

 Grabbing my Mary Kay Light Medium Bronzing Powder and to apply it I'm going to be using

 And we're just going to use this to bronze up our face so applying it onto my cheeks.

 And then of course working it onto my forehead to really bronze up that area and make it

 And then I work it onto my jawline and my neck as well as a little bit onto my decollete.

 Now that our face is all bronzed up I'm going to move onto blush and the one I'm using today

 Just using this brush by BH Cosmetics to apply it onto the apples of my cheeks.

 I'm taking more of that Airspun powder and applying it right below where we just did

 And this way it will help to sharpen up that line and clean it up.

 The neat thing about this powder is that it really does act as a highlighter so you're

 So I work it underneath my eyes just a little bit to brighten it up and onto the bridge

 And then I just like to take that powder brush and blend everything together so that the

 Alright and here you have the finished foundation, contour, blush, and highlight.

 I hope you guys enjoyed this tutorial and maybe learned something new today.

 Don't forget to like this video if you liked it and also subscribe so that you'll get a

 As always I really do appreciate all of you guys and I will see you all soon.

 just from some parts I had around the house and why I made this.

And you really can't get really good shots of just showing below without making something smaller.

 So it's much shorter and you can customize it by using different lengths of PVC.

You could cut this down and make it smaller, which would be pretty nice.

Well, you got a 1.25 inch screw, which is the universal thread for cameras.

 You got a Gatorade bottle cap, a clamp, which has an adjustable piece right here, which is adjustable by a flathead screwdriver or something with a flathead that will fit in that socket.

And my camera is pretty small, Kodak PlaySport, so I don't need that much counterbalance.

So you can see that this clamp is actually part of the Gatorade top.

 I will have some pictures at the end of what it used to look like before I fix it a bit.

 But if I do put it like this, then it's going to stay like that.

So that's really nice, because of the counterbalance and because of the clamp on it.

 So this is just an overview of what I used to make these, or make this stand, and what it looks like, what it can do.

 So if you're interested in that, you can like this video, just because you're interested.

 And you can subscribe to see this in a future video, actually in action.

But that's pretty much it for this video, and I will see you guys next time.

 Little Wheel has a sort of companion piece that we've got for you here.

 we're capoed up to the second fret, so it's technically it's in E, but we're

 talking about it as if we're playing in D. So, got a lot of D chord, a lot of E

 It always keeps this ring finger pressing down on the B string there.

 E minor seventh, A7sus4, and then it's got a sort of a B part, a second

 This chord is like a D over F sharp, and it goes in between those two.

So I know it's been about a week since my last video but I've been

 preparing to go to Vegas this coming Friday for Alex's birthday so we are

 away from Caleb for two nights and three days and that is going to be so hard on

 me so honestly I've just been kind of sad lately and I feel so bad that we're

I'm sure most first-time moms feel or have felt like I'm feeling

 now so that's what I've been doing and that's why I hadn't had the chance to

 too light for me but it actually works and that's what I'm going to be showing

 I'm all out of this so I just kept it because I like the spoolie on the end.

 Another way that I really like is using my Makeup Forever Aqua Brow and this is

 this when I had blonde hair because it has a little bit of a red tint to it but

 I think online you can get colors that are more ashy if you do not have red in

 your hair so I've rediscovered my love for this because my hair has a little

 one that I was just my holy grail that I used for the longest time and I always

 go back to it is my charcoal brown eyeshadow and this is from Mac.

 are the items that I like to use for my brows and I just switch them out here

 and there but the technique that I do is pretty much the same so you don't have

 tweeze them just to clean up around certain areas like the middle here and

 then I do a little bit underneath just to make them more precise.

 coming out a little bit washed out on camera but this is the lightest, medium

 And what I like to do first is just make a line under my brow to form the shape.

 kind of at an angle almost like I'm holding it flat and I'm just kind of

 Now I'm going to fill in this part of my eyebrow with the lightest color from the

 because I do want this to be fairly light in the inner portion.

 is to try to keep your eyebrow as relaxed as possible when you're doing

I have a habit of like lifting my brows when I look in the mirror.

 to relax your brows when you're coloring them in so you get the most natural

 when I brush up you'll see where I miss some spots like right there.

But this is just going to help keep those hairs in place and keep

 the eyeshadow you put on but that is basically it for the brow now.

 Hi, today we're going to make crockpot tacos, which is one of my favorite recipes.

 I used to make tacos in the pan, you know, I would just cook up the ground beef, but

 I found that the taco meat was still kind of grainy and a little bit chewy.

 When you cook it in the crockpot, it just breaks down the meat and the seasoning just

 And the tacos or the burritos, whichever you make, it just melts in your mouth.

 And it's really easy, it's only three ingredients and you can make it in less than five minutes.

 So what you're going to need is you're just going to need about a pound and a half to

 If you do put the beef in there frozen, I would recommend adding about an hour if you

 cook it on high or about two hours if you're cooking it on low.

 Then you're going to have a medium to a large onion that's diced up.

 Believe me, it's great because then it cuts down on all the tears too.

 All right, and then what we're going to do is we're going to take about a half a cup

 Of course, I get mine in bulk because we have tacos probably about once a week.

 All right, and you can just pour that right on top of the meat.

 You don't have to add any water because if you add water, it's just going to get really,

 The natural meat, excuse me, the natural fat in the meat will just break down and that's

 So then you cover it and you're going to cook it on low for eight to ten hours, which is

 perfect because you can make it before you go to work and when you come home, it's ready.

 And then you can cook it on low, excuse me, you can cook it on high for about five to

 Now right before you serve it, I would say about a half hour to an hour before you serve

 it, you are going to want to go back in there and smash up the meat a little bit and break

 I also would do a taste test at this point to make sure there's enough seasoning.

 If not, you could always add that seasoning a little bit later and then just let it kind

 All you've got to do now is just break out with your little side toppings like your tomatoes,

 your lettuce, your cheese, and that could all be prepared in about five minutes as well.

 This is Eric and Corrine with MotivatedFitness.net and we are going to discuss how to do modified

 There are various ways to do them and we just want to get you to the point where you feel

 comfortable with them and pretty soon you'll be doing the advanced pull-ups.

 Okay, first I'm just going to show you how to do the ones with the stool.

 You can see this on the P90X video and the easiest way to do it is just to have the stool

 All right, so she's going to use one leg and she's going to pull herself up and she'll

 Even easier way is to put both legs on the chair if you want and you pull yourself up

 Okay, now as you get stronger and as you progress, you want to take that stool or chair that

 That makes it a little bit more difficult and then that's going to put more emphasis

 Now, another thing too, when you do these types of things, make sure you have a spot

 if you can, especially if you're putting two legs up on the stool.

 Okay, now once you get those down and you feel as though that you're ready to push it

 and exit up and do something else a little bit more difficult, now you can do what we've

 You want to jump up, you hold it for as long as you can and you let it go down.

 Now, if Corinne is doing it, I'm not sure if you can see it from this angle.

 Now, that's just a little extra because that will work on the hip flexors here as well

 One quick note about this particular exercise, the reason why this particular modification

 is really nice, this isometric hold, when you do an isometric hold, your muscles basically

 An isometric hold is going to allow you to hold 10% more force than with the concentric

 All right, now we're going to go ahead and move to another one which is called the negative.

 You're going to jump up to a hold and you're going to do an eccentric contraction.

 Okay, now once you've got that down, Corinne has never done this before, this is a tip

 Once you've got that down and you have a spot, what you want to do is you want to do

 a pull up and then have someone hold one of your feet behind you.

 And then what you'll do is you'll pull yourself up using your quads as assistance.

 Once again, you start off at the lower end and you slowly build yourself up.

 Now remember, Corinne and I, we just finished the 5K race so we're a little bit, yeah, we're

 Just wanted to show you how to bring it when you do your pull ups.

 Hey dudes, I'm Hilah and today on Hilah Cooking, back with Carlos for another episode of How to Grill Like a Mexican.

We've got the chicken marinating, we've got the fire going, and we're just going to get down to business.

 Alright, I'm going to brush the grill with a little bit of oil so our chicken doesn't stick.

 And we've got the coals all on one side, so we have a hot side and a cool side.

 And these are whole chickens that we butterfied or spatchcocked.

 So I did a video on spatchcocking if you want to see how to do that.

 I'm going to put it on the hot side just a couple minutes and then move it to the cool side and let it cook.

 Just going to move it to the cool side of the grill and just let them sit there 20 minutes and then come back and flip them.

 And we are going to brush them with some of that marinade just to keep them juicy and red.

 But let's flip these things again one more time and brush them and keep going.

 Our grill is getting a little cooler so we're going to put them closer to the coals.

 So the marinade, it brings the flavor out of the chicken really, really, really good.

 And also, anyone who has enjoyed these videos we've done with Carlos, stay tuned because we're going to do a whole series on interior Mexican cooking with your recipes, your grandma's recipes, your mom's recipes.

 I'm going to show you how you can use a clicked eyeliner to create different looks, from a

 At the outer corner, you can turn the brush and work a little bit back towards the center.

 It's important not to stretch the skin at the corner of your eye, otherwise you'll distort

 Curve the line gently upwards to extend the natural line of your lower lashes.

 If you do make any little mistakes, remove them gently with a damp cotton bud.

 Start in the center and work outwards to join the flick you already created.

 Then you can extend the whole line gently outwards into an elegant wing.

 Looking straight ahead or slightly downwards will stop the product transferring onto your

 For more great looks, tips and advice, or to see the full product range, visit the Very

 Trust me, these are not the sardines out of a can that you used to eat.

 Essentially, I clean them because my son likes to eat them clean.

 What I'll do, I'll just lightly salt them, the sardines, before I do anything.

 It depends if it's your main course or you prefer to have it as an appetizer.

 I'll take about one tablespoon of olive oil and mix it with a tablespoon of butter.

 Depending on the size of the pan, you decide how many sardines you would like to add on

 We'll do it in two batches so we don't get too much liquid going here.

 We'll fry it about a minute and a half to two minutes on each side.

 I'll remove them and I'll put them on the plate with paper towels just to get the oil

 It reflects the spirit of this dish with a touch of lemon, a little bit of parsley here,

 I like sometimes to add a little bit of black pepper, fresh pepper.

 Hello everybody, welcome to Simply Basic Recipes first video in April and spring

 has finally sprung here in the south so we're going to be planning our

 spring parties and family get-togethers and everything for spring

 and summer so today I wanted to show you a recipe that you can use for all your

 little get-togethers and special events and they are orange and lime jello shots

 now of course I'm going to show you how to make these for the whole family you

 don't have to use liquor you can always substitute the water for the liquor in

 these but what I'm going to do is for the orange ones you're going to need

 some orange flavored vodka some oranges how many I'm not really sure yet because

 we have to still have to make it so I'm not really sure how many I'm going to

 need and I've got a small box of orange flavored jello gelatin and I've got some

 limes here again I'm not sure how many we'll have to see as we go I've got a

 small box of jello watermelon flavored gelatin and for the seeds of the

 watermelon I've got some mini chocolate chips here and you're always welcome to

 also use some chocolate sprinkles if you want to because these still might look a

 little big in there and I've got regular flavored vodka for the watermelon ones

 now you're more than welcome to buy the watermelon flavored vodka because they

 do make that kind I just didn't have any in my house and it's Sunday I wasn't

 able to go to the store to buy any so I'm just going to use regular flavored

 it should still be just as fine because you've got the watermelon flavored jello

 here so let's go ahead and put this together and see how what we're going to do

 I'm going to start with the oranges here now whenever you cut them in half I'll go ahead

 and do a lime so you can see this you're going to want to scrape out the insides

 and I'm just going to take a knife and go around it first but go ahead and go around the

 insides and take all this out all the pulp and you want to save this too because you can

 use it for other things you know fresh squeezed juice whatever you want to use it for

 and that should be good you don't want to waste anything now save you want them to look

 something like this when you're done now save these and go ahead and just put all your juice in a bowl for later for whatever you want to do with it

 ok the next step is to add your boiling water here I've already microwave this it was

 bubbling add it to your orange jello and stir that around until it's dissolved

 ok now that you've stirred that around until it's dissolved add in your one cup of orange flavored vodka and stir that around and mix it really well

 and bring over your oranges now I'm not having a party so I only cut up two oranges and two limes just for demonstration so I'm going to have some of this left I'll put it in some cups for

 later just pour it in your orange halves and these will wobble so you want to have them sitting in something I decided to put them in a cupcake cup here and I've got paper towels under them so they will so they won't go down too far in the cup and I won't be able to get them out

 ok same thing you get your watermelon powder here pour in your one cup of

 boiling water to it and stir it around for a couple minutes until it completely

 dissolved ok once that's dissolved pour in your one cup of regular flavored or

 watermelon flavored vodka and stir that around really well now if you want to

 make these kid friendly or for people that don't drink alcohol you can

 substitute the one cup of vodka with one cup of water and once you mix that

 in go ahead and bring our limes over here and we will pour this in

 ok put these in the refrigerator for about two hours and then come back and

 ok now that your oranges and limes here have been in the refrigerator for two

 hours you can cut them in half so let's go ahead and slice this up

 get a lime here see how the limes look when we cut them in half

 now take your chocolate chips and stick them in the pink jello and they make

 little seeds these turned out really well look at this they turned out so

 cute these will be perfect for your July the fourth barbecues or any kind of

 dinner party that you have and you can like I said make these for adults or

 kids they are so cute they're so easy to make I think I'm gonna have to try

 one right now you guys and I'll let you know how good they taste because I have

 never tasted these before from this recipe anyway so let me switch my camera

 ok I'm gonna be the guinea pig here and try these first I'm going to try the

 that is really good and it is not too strong it's really really good it tastes

 that is even better I think the orange one is definitely my favorite but I'm

 definitely it would be good to make both and have a variety just because you like

 one better doesn't mean anyone else does I guess so but I want to thank you for

 watching I hope you try these at your next party they're really really cute

 and I will see you next week with a new video please click subscribe at the

 bottom of the video and you can see my new videos every week thanks again for

 I mean like, uh, they're like pretty chill and stuff, like swag, but like I've seen better.

 Hey everybody, it's Gracie, and today's video is very exciting.

 We're all going to be doing back to school kind of videos, and my video is DIY school supplies.

 I literally worked on this so hard, and I just edited this hardcore.

 And I really hope you guys enjoy it, and if you do, make sure to give it a thumbs up.

 If you want to, and if you like what you see, there's the subscribe button.

 And without any further ado, sorry for this really long intro, let's get into the video.

 All you're going to need is some clay, an empty EOS container, and a flash drive.

 The first thing I did was take the protective coating off my flash drive and empty my EOS container.

 And I couldn't find Model Magic anywhere, so I just decided to make my own clay.

 For this, you're going to need equal parts glue and cornstarch, and then you're going to need equal parts white vinegar and baby oil.

 Then you're just going to mix it all together, put it in the microwave for a minute, and then...

 After this, you can add food coloring if you want, but pretty much you're just going to knead it in your hands until it feels like regular Model Magic or clay.

 Once your clay is finished, you can kind of mold it into the dome shape of an EOS, glue it into your empty container, and then just stick your flash drive in, and you're completely done.

 Next, for this adorable galaxy notebook, all you're going to need is a plain black notebook and some paint.

 I started off by putting some painter's tape on the notebook and just got any bubbles out of it, and I just painted with a bunch of different colors, so I did dark blue, light blue, red, pink, and white.

All you're going to need is either a white paint or a sparkly, like silvery paint, and you're just going to put that on a toothbrush and then flick it around, and it just adds the prettiest, like, star constellation look to your notebook.

 The paint block trend has been so popular lately, so I decided to make a paint block clipboard.

So all you're going to need is painter's tape, paint, and a clipboard.

 You can start by erasing some writing on the clipboard if you're anything like me and you write on your clipboard when you are bored.

 You can just start by arranging your painter's tape in whatever pattern you want, and then just paint away.

 Next, you can peel off the tape, and voila, you have your beautiful creation.

 Now for this blah, blah, blah school supplies holder that you can just kind of put on your desk for organization.

All you're going to need is a cereal box, some paint, possibly duct tape, and some paper to decorate with.

 To make it the same shape as mine, all you're going to do is kind of make a diagonal line and then start cutting.

 And then you're just going to paint blah, blah, blah on, and if you want it to look like mine, then you can just outline it with a black sharpie.

 Like, pretty chill and stuff, like, I don't know what I'm saying.

 We're going to show you how to repair your Dell laptop keyboard.

 What you should receive in your kit is a green spring cup, the key cap, and the plastic parts

 If you order just the plastic parts, you won't receive the key cap and you can skip this

 We're going to show you how to remove the plastic parts from the back of the key.

 These parts are very delicate and they can come apart very easily.

 If they do, we'll show you how to put them back together later.

 What you're going to want to do is you're going to want to get a small screwdriver like

 this one and you're going to want to gently get underneath the back of the clip between

 You're going to want to gently pry the parts off and set them down.

 You're only going to need to remove one of the pieces, which is this U piece right here.

 As you can see, there are two different ways the clip can go on.

 We're going to put on the one that's 180 degrees off from this one.

 If they're on the bottom, then the U-shaped plastic piece goes upside down from the one

 If these metal tabs here are on the top, then the U-shaped piece is going to go like this.

 Now you need to get the back part underneath those small little tabs here and then get

 The black side of the clip is always going to face the U-shaped part.

 The white side of the clip is always going to be opposite of that.

 So in this example, we're going to orient our second part of the clip like this.

 Now the way we're going to put it on is we're going to put it on this way.

 We're going to tilt it, put the two little feet here on this side underneath this plastic

 piece here, and then we're going to push down on the right to bring it in.

 I'll try to show that as easily as possible without getting too much in the way here.

 Now we're going to show you how to fix the clip if it came apart.

 Now unfortunately, there's a very complicated part, so you're going to have to listen carefully.

 Visually, you can tell which way everything should be rotated by looking at these parts,

 This top portion is a little bit longer than the bottom portion here where these rectangles

 Plus you have a little piece here that's cut out on the left that shows which way it should

 Now as far as flipped, it's a little more difficult to tell, but on this clip here,

 these inner pieces, this plastic piece here and this plastic piece here, should be a little

 On this piece, you're going to want to look at this edge here and this edge here.

 There's little plastic raised tabs at the very edge here and the very edge here that

 In this one, it's more obvious that these two feet should be touching the table and

 Now what you're going to do is you're going to take this piece right here and you're going

 The little lip on this piece is going to go under this bar right here.

 Now you're going to take the plastic piece, the white piece here, and you're going to

 But you're basically going to stretch the top of the clip over that piece.

 All I did was I placed this white piece on top of this entire assembly and I kind of

 stretched the parts out and placed them over where everything should be flush.

 It might take you more than one try, but eventually you will get it.

 Hey so today I'm gonna be doing a banana fruit salad recipe but first of all it's

 the end of the fruity challenge so if you manage to eat one piece of fruit

 every single day make sure you comment below telling me how you did and I'll be

 announcing the winner on Monday when I am announcing the new challenge for the

Make sure you click on the link below to see what challenges are

 actually posted a picture of it on Instagram the other day and a lot of you

 liked it and the thing about it is that it's not anything like extravagant or

 new or something you wouldn't have like ever seen but basically it's just to

 banana it's not very exciting on its own you know it's just a piece of fruit

 it tastes good but it you know having a banana every single day might not be too

 exciting so I'm just going to show you guys how you can make this little fruit

 right here a little bit more exciting and something you'd have every day.

 so let's get on with the video and I'll show you how to make this banana fruit

 all you're gonna need a large banana this has around a hundred and twenty

 calories in it so it really should fill you up as a snack or even a small meal

 granola or oats whatever you want to use I'm using fruit and fiber cereal because

 it has so much fiber in it it's really really good for you and your digestive

 system and you're gonna need some sort of yogurt you can use any type you want

 I'm using this 0% fat yogurt by Activia it's really good for your digestive

 system as well it only has 69 calories in it so it's really really good I would

 recommend to use Greek yogurt though but we don't have any Greek yogurt right now

 we just had this and of course I'm gonna be putting some peanut butter in it so

 we're gonna start off by peeling the banana if I can actually do it

 so here we have the banana and I'm just gonna chop it up I'm just gonna chop off

 the ends because I don't like the ends they're just so I'm just gonna cut the

 so next you're just gonna need a bowl to put everything in I like to do a sort of

 trifle effect so I get different layers of each of the stuff that I'm having so

 first of all I'll put some bananas at the bottom just to get some in there

 so now you have a nice layer of banana at the bottom you want to take some of

 your cereal in your hand and just do that crunch it up and just sprinkle it

 on top make sure you get it all broken up and just sprinkle it on top so we

 have a nice base layer now of just that now you're gonna want to take your

 and then you want to take the peanut butter and just get a teaspoon only a

 teaspoon of peanut butter okay so this is my banana fruit salad I'm really

 annoyed because it looks so much nicer yesterday when I made it and now I made

 it and it just looks like a bowl of blah but it looked really nice yesterday and

 presentation is so good because when you make something that looks really nice

 set out it just tastes nicer because it looks nicer so definitely always

 concentrate on your presentation as well so even though this looks an absolute

 mess I hope you guys still liked it and liked the idea so yeah that's the banana

 salad and it's just super simple I always feel really silly for making

 these recipe videos because I feel like my recipe videos are always super simple

 but I guess it's just good to have different ideas and just different

 things if you guys have like really good ideas or recipes or anything like that

 just comment below or you can do a video response if you want to if that would be

 cool with you that'd be awesome just to get some different recipes and stuff

 because I know some people would never think to make this weird little mix but

 it tastes awesome anyway guys if you want to see any more recipe videos just

 comment below and I will make them but I hope this is just a little bit helpful

 The ice maker is most commonly used in many Whirlpool, Maytag, Amana, and Roper refrigerators.

 Level two being basic and can be performed by most non-professionals using common tools.

 Appliancevideo.com advises you to take caution while performing this repair.

 During this video, you will see caution icons appear on the screen.

 Such icons include sharp edges, electrical dangers, gas and fire hazards, lifting hazards,

 Before you begin this repair, make sure the appliance is unplugged from the wall outlet.

 To remove your ice maker, let's first begin by opening the freezer door.

 Push in the flipper on the side of the unit and lift up the ice maker cover.

 To remove the ice maker cover, take note of the two pins holding it in place.

 While holding the cover up, release the left side by sliding the pin to the left and release

 Using your quarter inch nut driver, remove the screw by turning it counterclockwise.

 To remove the ice maker, push in the left tab on the bottom of the mounting bracket.

 Press the flipper inward and slide the ice maker forward and gently pull it out.

 Now let's disconnect the wiring harness to remove the ice maker assembly.

 Using your number two slotted screwdriver, press in the top and bottom locking tabs to

 On the bottom of the ice maker, there are three quarter inch screws securing it in place.

 With your quarter inch nut driver in hand, loosen each of the three screws by turning

 With the screws loosened, grasp the mounting bracket and lift it up to remove.

 To begin, locate the three screw holes on the ice maker and mounting bracket.

 Align the mounting bracket to its corresponding holes and set it in place.

 Using your quarter inch nut driver, slightly tighten the left screw so you can adjust the

 Afterwards, make sure you fully tighten the first screw you started with.

 Next, turn the ice maker over to gain access to the wiring harness that needs to go through

 As you can see, the harness has two locking tabs that will prevent the harness from pushing

 Now, pull the harness from the other side and make sure the tabs are pushed in, locking

 Insert the ice maker into the freezer adjacent to the male wiring harness and connect it

 Next, align the ice maker's base to the two side rails and slide it in to secure.

 To install the wire shield onto the mounting bracket, lift the shield apart with your fingers.

 Slide it over the wires and push it down to snap it into place.

 Using your quarter inch nut driver, tighten the wire shield screw by turning it clockwise

 To finish this repair, we will need to reinstall the ice maker cover.

 Take note of the two pins on the ice maker cover and their corresponding slots on the

 Finally, push over the other pin gently to the left to lock the cover in place.

 Alright, so this video is going to show you basically how to remove your winch cable and

 I've used this rope here for a few years now and although it has broken, the nice thing

 about using a plow rope instead of a plow cable obviously is when it breaks, and it

 will break, you can basically tie a knot in it, keep your gloves on and everything,

 where if you break your cable, you're going to have to take some u-bolts and you'll be

 I've actually had to drive in reverse because you're basically plowing snow and the blades

 For this job you might want a pair of heavy gloves if you've got a frayed cable because

 the only thing worse than getting one of these strands in your skin while you're changing

 this cable is getting the strands in your skin when it's like 10 below zero.

 I'm going to flip this over to free and start pulling the cable out.

 Now if yours doesn't pull freely, you may need to actually use a winch and back it out.

 Alright, I don't know if you can see that but there's an actual hole on the winch spindle

 Alright, what I like to do is just take and coil up the cable and use one of these cable

 Alright, so as I said, I got a smaller diameter rope this time.

 This is a 3-16th inch and the reason why I got a smaller rope is because the actual hole

 in the spindle is a smaller diameter than this and I had to tape it and try to drive

 You can get various lengths and colors and different diameters as well.

 This is 3-16th inch and it seems to be fitting in that spindle hole quite nicely.

 Okay, what I'm going to do now is actually fire up the four-wheeler so I don't drain

 my battery down and actually wind this thing in and kind of feed it by hand.

 The original U-bolt that came with this plow assembly is broken.

 So I've come up with my own rig and it's held for a couple of years so we're just going

 I use lock nuts or lock washers on everything because the vibration is quite significant

 Okay, so the biggest reason why these break actually is from over-tightening.

 So you might want to take a small U-bolt or something and actually put it here so you'd

 I've run it without this a few times so I'm kind of used to how high this should come

 But if my kids or wife were using this, I would actually put a U-bolt here and just

 I'll be changing the line on the brute force here the next wheel or over and I'll put a

This video sort of goes along with the one for the mandolin, but this one

 that Bob Schmidt, who plays banjo for Floggy Mulley, actually records their records with

 The trick to playing Irish music is you never end on the same note as the key.

 Alright, say you got a John Deere backhoe and everything is going along smooth and all

 of a sudden it starts to run a little hot and then a lot more hot and before it gets

 to the red you shut it off and you let it cool down and you do it again and then all

 They jam when they're in there and these are 25 years old, these are brand new ones here.

 So what you do is take your hood off, your air breather, muffler, that's how I did it,

 Of course you can just take this one side access panel off and reach in to do it.

 There are three bolts and voila, one, two, these are longer and here's your little itty

 Of course you'll wire wheel these buggers and it never sees on there to put it back in.

 Of course if you flush your system out, it probably prevents a lot of this.

 See gasket, you got the red ring on one side and nothing on the other.

 So you look at this and say, oh gee, am I going to scrape it off there?

 So you have to remove the gasket from here, it goes face down here.

 Now of course you clean these all up and I'll spin a little tap and die through these to

 Now I'm going to flush this all out with water all over again because I didn't realize I

 cleaned this out years ago when I did the water pump and flushed the system out completely

 Here's the two old ones, one, two, and I stick a new one in there to gauge it by to see how

 What I always do is I use a scraper, scrape the hard stuff off in the chunks and get it

 And the reason I go with paper towels is like chunks and dirt that go down inside, it'll

 get stuck down in there and it's going to go through your system.

 Well, that got caught right on that paper towel there, it didn't go down in.

 You can dampen the towels, have a little paper towels, and catch the stuff before it goes

 Then give it a grinding around with the same thing, or a wire wheel or whatever.

 I like the Rolox discs with the sandpaper on them, they work really good.

 A little update, I stopped doing it last night, I came back this morning thinking about this

 because these things look like they were put in backwards, and they were.

 And it says on them, 2 radiator, it tells you right on the stinking thing.

 Come over to this one, here's one of the old ones that was taken out.

 It says toward radiator, and it's got an arrow pointing upward.

 And in the video, you'll notice these were protruding up like this when it came out.

 It either had to have been John Deere, when they were assembled new, that they put it

 But another thing was, I did have an injector pump put on from a guy from John Deere.

 And this guy, it was, well, not the sharpest tool in the shed, I don't think.

 Do injector pumping and injectors, he might have to take all this off and just unbolted

 But I know for a fact I didn't, and I looked through my receipts, and I didn't buy these

 I unbolted it down here, and the O-ring on the side popped it out when I did the water

 I should have taken this apart when I had the chance way back when.

 Well, I guess you could, it gets warm, the heat transfers, probably just doesn't function

 The first time I put it in the batch of water, they didn't open very good, and then they

 The new ones opened right up, and then after a couple times these started opening better.

 And when they go to close, you put them under cold water with a pair of tongs, and these

 I'm going to put it together, and we're going to see how it goes.

 We spun this through a tap and die set, and then wire wheeled the little sucker, and never

 So, I don't know how much more you can go on this, but that's what I do.

 I'm a fanatic when it comes to the bolts and stuff, with never seize, and sealants, and

 This way, when I know when I go into something, if I'm going to get it out, I can get it out

 As you can see, we got it in there, we'll tighten those suckers up, and we'll go from

 As you can see that little white nib on the center of the grain there, that's where the

 Now it's just a whisker to the left, about an eighth of an inch over.

 So, flipping them things over, cooled it down about 20 degrees or so, 15, 20 degrees, and

 It doesn't go over top of that, and grows like a kitten as always.

 I'm an associate at Haggard Equine Medical Institute in Lexington, Kentucky, and I've

 The goals of stretching your horse are to prevent an acute injury while you're riding.

 So you want to make sure that they're ready for the level of activity that you're going

 You can do stretching to improve range of motion, especially when you have an unfit

 horse that you're trying to bring back into a level of competition, or if you have a young

 horse that you're just trying to teach where to move its body in an appropriate way.

 Range of motion is great for neck and back exercises to help maintain an appropriate

 level of fitness for jumping or dressage or whatever sort of competition you're doing.

 You always want to be aware if your horse is coming back from an injury about specific

 So if it's got a neck issue, you might not want to necessarily do long and low or really

 You know, when they're coming back from an injury, everything should always be very easy

 A lot of walking until they've come back to being an athlete, a fit athlete again.

 And then once they're more fit to start trotting and cantering, that's when you can start putting

 You want to make sure that they don't get any muscle cramps from the cold weather.

 Even if you're an indoor arena that seems like it's warm to you because you've been

 working and riding, you need to make sure that their muscles are cooled down.

 So when you're starting your exercising in the cold weather, you want to make sure that

 a lot of your stretches are done at the walk and you can do a lot of walking in the initial

 part of your exercising and doing a lot of bending up and down and left and right.

 A lot of leg yielding, lateral movement is really good in the cold weather just to help

 get those muscles warm before you start doing your trotting and cantering and jumping, if

 Most people know we call them our carrot stretches or peppermint stretches, depending on what

 And that is just standing to the side of the horse and having them move their neck from

 And then you can go to the other side and have them just move their neck to the right.

 Again, if they're coming off an injury, you don't want them to really start cranking their

 neck from side to side, but it's definitely good to start doing that.

 Some people will put a carrot or a peppermint down at their knees and that way they can

 And then when you're riding, it's always great to do, again, similar things at the walk and

 Just a lot of moving from side to side and not necessarily just pulling their head with

 your hands, but using your legs and your seat to move their body.

 And the lateral movements is just when they move off your leg to the left or to the right.

 And that's really good for their back muscles and it helps them come through the reins a

 And if your horse doesn't want to stretch and you make him, he can get hurt.

 So you don't want to ever force them to stretch if they're not ready.

 If they're unfit, you've just pulled them out of the field from the winter, if they

 get the winter off or they're coming off an injury, or they're young and they're just

 starting, you don't want to force them to stretch because you can either hurt them or

 you can turn them into a sour horse if you're forcing them to do something they're not ready for.

 That's why the carrot stretches or peppermint stretches are great because they want to do

 So it's always, you never want to push them to do something that they're not ready for.

 You don't want to also let them get away with just misbehaving.

 So if you know your horse, you can kind of tell if, oh, they don't want to bend their

 So that comes into how well you know your horse or your trainer knows your horse.

 Your trainer should know you and your horse and what the ability levels of both you and

 And they can recommend good stretches that you can do at home if you're not at a barn.

 And your veterinarian, someone who you use commonly, who knows your horse and their ability,

 and they'll also know the fitness level and the musculature, what you might specifically

 AAP, which is the American Association of Equine Practitioners, has resources for horse

 owners and local chapters of different organizations should have similar things.

 Hey y'all, so a lot of you have been asking me about my hair on Instagram lately and today I have the perm rod set tutorial for you guys that I promised you, so if you're interested, stay tuned.

 So I'm starting off with a super old braid out, so my hair is pretty stretched out by now.

 I'm just gonna go ahead and establish my part, section my hair into four sections, and then I'm gonna re-moisturize and stretch my hair with the Curidu.

 To style my hair today, I'm gonna be using Camille Rose Naturals Aloe Whip Butter Gel.

 Only taking a small amount of the Aloe Whip Butter Gel, I'm gonna apply it to my ends all the way up to my roots, and then I'm gonna brush my hair smooth and get my roll on.

 Here, I'm just gonna start wrapping my hair around the rod starting from my ends, and then I'm gonna wind it around the rod in a twisting motion just by simply twirling my wrist around until I get to the roots.

 Then secure the rod and be sure that the band is closest to your roots for extra security.

 Now just repeat the steps until you're done with your entire head.

 50 perm rods later, it looks something like this, and I am super worn out.

 Now with the little oil that I just used, we're going to remove the perfect sleek wire braiding.

 Now with the first one wipe off a little bit and then I startusing the wheel system to let the connection sit up in the loop so they don't come out.

 Now with a little oil on my hands I'm separating each curl for more volume.

 Carefully separate them and twirl them around your finger all the way down.

 I separated each one about 6 times depending on the size of it.

 Now I'll just pick my roots for extra volume and curl separation until I'm happy with the look.

 Thank you so much for watching and I'll see you in my next video guys.

 To create a more elegant look for our plain cornice that we've already applied the face

 fabric you can apply a second layer of fabric like this sheer and all the pleats go across

 What we've done with the welt is we've wrapped that netting around the welt and

 Second layer is put on the cornice, you finish off the welt and the rest of the cornice board

 We took our pattern that we used to cut our cornice shape, marked it on our fabric.

 This sewing machine has a special foot that allows me to apply the beading on my chalked

 Make sure that you add a little additional fabric at the back so that when you apply

 your cornice fabric to the face of your cornice it fits properly.

 We've got a fabric trim on this one and this is a white kind of plastic trim.

 And we are finishing the back of these cornice boards before we apply the wood trim.

 Now here's the wallpaper border and trim that we're going to use for this cornice

 We have a wallpaper border that's actually 7 inches wide but we're only going to use

 Now the trick with the paper, you can see here how the design was nicely balanced.

 Now, hopefully this will inspire you to find a few ideas to decorate your cornice boards.

 For decorating tips, fabric selections, and all of the step-by-step instructions that

 you've seen in this video, check out the DVD at theupholsterystudio.com.

 So, just to show you how we are now, we are having the print, that's where my hand will

 And, very important, when you see, here is my thumb, I don't know if I can make it more,

 We are going to back and forth, as a flat panel, e-wrap for 20 rows.

 But then again, it depends on, everybody's hands are different.

 So for me, 20 rows, I find it a little bit tight, I don't know, maybe I have a long thumb,

 My advice, if you're not making those mittens for you, but for a gift, for holidays coming,

 if you don't want it to be a surprise, ask someone who wants mitts to just lay their

 hand flat on a table, on a piece of paper, and design with a pen the shape of their hand.

 That gives you a nice idea for how long you need to do the cuff, the hand of the mitt,

 I made some for my husband, he needs bigger, and of course, you know, it's all custom,

 We're going to go back to where we start, where the entry yarn is.

 I don't do the slip stitch, so I don't remember if there's slip stitch actually.

 Just to make sure, when I do, I just put a little piece of tape on 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.

 I don't touch the number 6, just sometimes I'm getting busy, baby needs me, or hubby,

 I'm like, ok, where I was, which row, and sometimes just daydreaming and keep going

 So we're going to e-wrap, 2, 3, 4, and 5, lock your loops by the last one, so that the

 Push down, I redo the same one, so I really don't do slip stitch, sorry.

 It doesn't have much of a stretch, it's like a very tight acrylic.

 Then again, maybe later on, if you want to custom the pattern, do the tail, the fringes,

 I think every loomers are artists, so artists usually have imagination.

 This is the base of wonderful items that you're going to create.

 Till then, I don't think there's any confusion here, just going back and forth, back and

 So, if I put it on the right side, how this is going to look like.

 Then I'm going to take a strainer and I put the noodles in the strainer.

 So what I want you to notice is that I've got these noodles I've rinsed off really well and then I dried on a paper towel.

I think the drier that you can get these noodles, the better they taste, the better the texture.

 You don't necessarily, you don't need to cook these because they're nothing but fiber.

 But I like to eat them heated and right now I'm trying to get them as dry as possible.

 I think that heating oil very high tends to destroy it and that's when it becomes not so healthy for you.

 Okay, I'm going to put a little bit of garlic in with the medium chain triglyceride oil or MCT oil.

 A little bit of garlic and I've got this heated over medium heat.

 And as soon as that gets to sizzle on a bit, I'm going to add my onion.

 And it's going to take me a little while so I'll fast forward a little bit because I'm sautéing this over medium heat, not over high heat.

 Okay, now I've got my onions nice and, maybe half of them are translucent.

 And I'm going to make a well in the middle and I'm going to add my shrimp.

It's usually, the kind of shrimp that I buy, it's usually 9, 8 to 9 pieces.

 So while they're cooking, I'm going to go ahead and add the cilantro.

 And then quickly, because the shrimp is just going to cook so, so fast, I'm going to add all of my seasonings.

 Now for some of the liquid, I'm going to put some real lime juice.

 Now the shrimp are pretty much cooked and I'm going to add the noodles back in so that they can soak up the liquid juicy stuff.

 I'll go ahead and flash up the calorie count here on the screen.

 at an angle to the end seam of the first plank, and then lock them together by laying the

 the random stagger pattern, always ensure that the end joints are staggered at least

 row firmly against the side seam of the start board in the first row, but do not fold it

 row in this manner, you can now go back and lock the side seams of the first planks into

Use a carton of planks as a weight to hold the locked planks down at the start

As you finish the rows in rooms with long spans, continue to stay 3 or 4 planks

 ahead of the locked side seam position planks as you finish the rows.

 if necessary to help maintain the raised, unlocked plank positions.

 wall is uneven, the planks must be adapted to fit its contours.

 of the wall onto the first row of planks using a ruler and a pencil and following along the

Do not forget to allow for the minimum 1 quarter inch expansion space

You may have to disassemble the flooring due to obstructions, etc.

 the same method of assembly by working on top of your start rows and pulling the planks

 starting planks, but always stagger end joints a minimum of 12 inches and keep them random

Stop and reconnect if a joint is not tight or if all edges are not even

These planks can be engaged and disengaged several times if necessary

 Hey guys, Marius here from Restroom Fitness with a nutritional tip.

 Customize your food items and your meals according to your specific training program, lifestyle

 Now in order to do that, you have to identify the main characteristics of your training

 Based on that, find out which food item or meal best meets these requirements.

 Cycling requires a lot of energy that needs to be accessible quickly by the body and also

 So think about the food item that best affects everything that I just described.

 Cycling requires a lot of energy, easily accessible by the body and also replaces the

 Today's exercise is inspired from yoga, but I also added a couple of down downs on the

 I'm going to point out which are the key elements you need to pay attention to in order

 to have the proper form, get the most out of your body and get the most out of your

 Starting position, make sure you have a wide stance with your feet pointing 90 degrees

 Bring your arms up to shoulder level, pivot forward, making sure your knee doesn't go

 Make sure your arms stay point standard with the weight shoulder level, and also make sure

 This exercise will help you tone the upper body, engage the core, make it stronger, and

 Now before a plan to train your repetitions, two, three sets, and obviously, swap sides.

 Feel free to increase the weight or keep it light and we'll get you better with this exercise.

 Hi there, Marius here for iStrong Fitness with the motivational tip.

 When choosing a training program or favorite activity, be focused, keep your eyes on the prize,

 If you're looking forward to your training, it's a huge smile on your face, those are pretty clear signs you're on the right track.

 Hey guys, it's MWRocks32 here, and I have an unboxing today that, it's a product that's

 been out for a while, but I just got my hands on one and already own one, so I now have

 the white version iPod Touch 4th generation, uh, 16 gig, if you can see that, there you

Alright, iPod Touch, iPod Touch, and, Apple's iPod Touch blah blah blah.

 And there we go, and, take that out, set that off to the side, um, it says designed by Apple

 quick start guide on how to use an iPod Touch if you've never used one before, um, then,

 we have the 30 pin dot connector with the USB, and we also have the regular ear pods,

Alright, and then, however you get it out of this, um, thing here, I don't know,

 on the top, bottom, the, the speaker port, 30 pin dot connector, and the headset jack,

 and nothing on the right side and the left side, volume up and down buttons, and let's

 up, this is the 16 gig model, um, should set you up right there.

Alright, alright, let's slide this setup here, well, okay, um, English,

 next step, country, no, whoops, back, English, yeah, country, United States, yeah, Wi-Fi

 Yeah, T-Poss home, alright, sweet, connected, activating, iPod, location services, um, enabled

 that, alright, set up as a new iPod Touch, yeah, Apple ID, I better do that for a second.

Okay, agree, agree, take a few minutes to set up your Apple ID, no

 last step, oh, um, whoops, yep, messaging, totally not gonna give my email right up to

 from the Game Center, wow, alright, cool, well I'll get a review on this in a few days,

 and let you know what I think of this, since I already own one.

 late, alright, rate, subscribe, comment, like, alright, buh-bye.

 Alright, 5 beginner yoga poses for guys or for anyone else, but our purpose of this video

 By the way, thanks for making me the most watched yoga guy on YouTube.

 Relax your neck and as you exhale, work your chest towards the legs.

 Down dog stretches your legs, your hamstrings, your calves, your achilles, your back, your

 One of my favorite poses right here, hands on the shoulders, is basically push up position.

 It starts from your center out, so it works your abdominals, your core, then spreads out

 through your whole body, building strength, building balance and presence, being right

 So drop your left knee down, your right ankle is right underneath your knee.

 You can bring your hands to the top of your thigh or extend the arms tall, relaxing the

 Great for stretching your hip flexor and working your leg, itch the nose, working your front

 So we have a whole body integration here and of course, do the other side.

 I recommend holding these poses for about 5 to 10 deep breaths or 30 to 60 seconds.

 Your right arm is forward, snake your left arm underneath, this one's fantastic.

 If you can't wrap the hands all the way around, bring the fists together or bring the hands

 If you want even more, take your right leg and wrap it high on the left so we get the

 Your fingers are going up, your shoulders are going down and your elbows are going forward.

 So fingers up, shoulders down, elbows forward, stretching your shoulder blades, your back,

 Sprinklers are optional but you keep your eyes fixed on something.

 Tucking in the shirt, arms to the sides, heels underneath the knees and as you inhale,

 So peel your spine off the mat, the weight goes into your shoulders, your eyes are up

 on the sky or the ceiling or the sprinklers on the ceiling and you breathe into it.

 If you want more, you can lace your fingers together, draw your shoulders back, really

 You can even walk your shoulders underneath your body for a marvelous experience working

 the muscles of your spine, your glutes, opening your hips and really opening the chest because

 it helps fix that posture where you roll the shoulders forward.

 You can check out my Yoga From In download at SeanVeighFitness.com and I hope you have

 Hi everyone, this is Robin Moses and I am here with, I can't remember your real

 name, no, someone, someone, oh it was, oh was it Cat Scratch Fever?

 Anyways, I'm gonna do the most cutest little flower tutorial and I am starting

 off with, I started with Julie G, that's what it's gonna look like, Julie G

 Cabana Boy in black by Wet n Wild and now I have all my paints out and I have

 and pulling up, this could be a little thinner, but like that, pulling up, push,

 pink, now everywhere that you go out of line or whatever, you can go back in with

 the black and then you can traverse back up and then it will make it perfect.

 gonna take little middle dots and give them middles that are opposite of their

Yellow I already used, pink I already used, so I'll use green for the pink and

 the orange one doesn't need one and then I will meet you back, wait, no I won't

 size, I don't know, but the same size as a pin and I'm going to go in and then just

 kind of dot a few of each color in and around the nails and make it look like

 candy, but also doing the dots in here as well, okay, and I will meet you back.

 like four second tutorial, you guys are like, what the heck did she do?

 and purple blue, that's almost the same color as Cabana Boy, so if you

 use a regular purple and teal blue and mix it together, that's how

Alright and here is the finished result, let me get you some different

 you try them, please show me at my fan page and show everybody and try them and

 Hello everyone, one more time I welcome you all to your cooking channel Let's Be Foodie.

 And today I will be showing you how to make fusion noodle in which I will be using our

 favorite Maggi noodles with other ingredients to create Maggi fusion noodles.

 Cover the lid and let this cook for 4 minutes until bell pepper and tomatoes get soft.

 After 4 minutes take off the lid and you can see that they have turned soft.

 After mixing this well, I am going to cover this and let this cook for another 5 minutes.

 Just turn off the stove and our maggi masala noodles is ready to be served.

 Hope you enjoyed watching this video and learnt how to make maggi noodles more interesting

 Do try this simple and easy recipe of maggi noodles and if you like this video, give a

 Write comments in comment section below and let us know how it turned out for you.

 Refer my other videos as well for healthy and delicious recipes.

 And you will also find Let's Be Foodie on Facebook, Google+, Twitter and Pinterest.

 right now is if you're going to be using scotch bonnet pepper be sure to use

 As you can see I used four potatoes here and I cooked the potatoes in with the

You may want to cut the potatoes even smaller because that way it'll cook

 a lot faster and quite frankly you want it to cook fast because you want to get

 At the risk of being redundant let me say again use some gloves when using

 course you want to drain it off just like that and then you want to crush

 peppers, your butter and your beaten egg into your mixture and then you want to

 then add enough flour to make sure that it's firm enough to form little balls

Keep your eye on these little babies now and turn them often and cook

 I wanted to tell you guys that I was going to make a second video and it's about chicken.

 The particular part that I'm talking about for the chicken is the chicken breast.

 the reason why I was making this video is because, okay, I went to my friend's house

Anyway, so I went over to her place and had a meal with her and she had decided

Which is not that hard to cook, but it is, in a sense, kind of technical

 because you have to be able to keep the moisture within the chicken, whether it's dark meat

 going to say her name because that will either embarrass her or she'll kill me.

 to show her how to make chicken breast, which was what she used, moist.

So for this recipe you'll need three chicken breasts, black pepper and salt, a

First, you'll pound the chicken so that the breasts are the same thickness as

I put it in a plastic bag so the juices don't go all over the place.

 both sides of the chicken, so it doesn't need that much seasoning.

So what you're going to do is you're going to lightly dredge the chicken

You're going to use a medium saucepan that has a lid, as you can see there.

 And then after that, you're going to get your spatula and you're going to just incorporate

 both the oil and the butter on the saucepan, just to make sure it's fully incorporated.

 Now we're going to add the chicken breast, making sure that none of the meat overlaps

 it doesn't show in the video, but what you're going to do is once I'm done flipping this,

 on low, so just put your timer on for 10 minutes and then go do whatever.

 done, you're going to open the lid and the chicken should be done.

You don't necessarily have to do this after, but I wanted to because I was going

So I'm going to grab the chicken breast now and I'm going to cut it and I'm

 going to make sure that the breast is actually white, that there's no pink.

 Hi, I'm Cheryl LeBette with ChildCareLand.com and today I want to share with you 10 ice

 This is a fun counting magnetic board or felt board activity that we like to do.

 You'll need the patterns which can be found on my website at ChildCareLand.com underneath

 the video section and you would print that on a card stock paper, cut them out and laminate

 So all the back of our pieces have magnetic strips on the back of them but you don't have

 to, you can use a felt board and with Velcro or masking tape that works great too.

 And to start this you would say, I love ice cream cones, do you love ice cream cones too?

 And then you would say, let's build an ice cream cone with 10 scoops.

 So you put the ice cream cone itself, the ice cream cone base on the board and now we're

 One scoop, two scoops, three scoops, four scoops, five scoops, six scoops, seven scoops,

 And then you would count or go back down and take one off, take the top one off and say

 I know you can't see me rub my tummy but you rub your tummy, yummy.

 And that's the way you would end it or you would actually, we say actually, thank you

 So be prepared for things to get a little bit loud kind of at the end there.

 For Ten Ice Cream Scoops, I'm Shelley Lovett with ChildCareLand.com and thanks for watching.

 This video is brought to you by Osmocote, the planter's plant food.

 It is spring and this is the time when you want to amend your soil,

 If you don't improve your soil every year when you're growing vegetables,

 So I'm using this tool just to loosen the soil up a little bit.

 You want to put about two inches of soil amendment on top of your old soil.

 you're going to be adding plenty of new organic matter to last year's soil.

 It takes a long time for all those nutrients to get down to the roots.

 So the best thing that you can do for your garden is to either rototill

 this amendment into the soil, or if you have a small raised bed garden like this,

 Hey kids, there's still time to make dad a great gift this year!

 All you need is ArtSkills Tape Trends Duct Tape and a cardboard six pack from the recycling bin

 Today we'll be using one of my favorite designs of duct tape, our mustache duct tape.

Then take our silver mini tape and we're going to simply accent the corners

 Then take your poster knife and simply round the edges off for a finished look.

Add a little bit of an outline, do your thing, make it creative.

 Peel up your duct tape fabric and place on the center of your toolbox.

 I hope that you had a great time making this craft and again happy Father's Day.

 For more videos like this subscribe to our channel or click any of the videos shown here.

 Hey guys, so a lot of you were asking me how I get the flip in my fringe

 And so I just want to record a quick video to show you guys how I do that

 I do it with a one inch curling iron, and this is just by Conair and

 You're going to have to excuse like the pajamas and like velcro rollers, I don't usually do videos in the morning, but

 That's really the only time I do my hair, so I hope it helps you guys and stay tuned if you want to know

 Then I always have trouble when I do it over here because I don't know if I want

 On the sides I do pretty much the same thing I started the root and then twist away from my face and then pull down

 And those I like to kind of pull down so it gets straighter and then same thing on this side

 Kind of do the same thing that I keep them a little bit straighter

 Actually pull the curling iron like in because I want to get some volume there

 So basically the shorter the hairs the more I go in and the longer than they are the more I go out

 Hope that helped you guys, and you're gonna have to forgive the fancy rollers today

 Don't forget to rate and comment and subscribe so have a great day guys

 You also need cilantro, green onion, I use five garlic cloves, and this chili, chile

 And you can find this dried chilies at any food for less or any Mexican market.

 So the first thing you would do is boil the tomatillos for about 20 minutes until they

 Okay, for the cilantro, you'll be rinsing it and chopping it up really fine.

 Chopping up the green onion and the garlic, you will be toasting on a pan with a little

 You're going to be toasting the chiles and the garlic together just to get them browned

 Okay, while the tomatillos are boiling, I counted out about 17 chilies.

 And what I do is I cut the stem off because it gets in the way when I toast them.

 Usually I just sometimes toast the chiles, but the garlic gives the garlic a good toasty

 And you just kind of don't leave it alone, just keep turning it.

 So, after these are toasted, we're going to throw them into the blender with about a teaspoon,

 if you want a tablespoon, but probably a full teaspoon of salt, along with the tomatillos.

 So once they're done boiling, we're going to throw them into the blender.

 And next you're going to crack open the chile, and I take the seeds out or else it would

 I have all my chiles in the blender, and I'm going to put about a teaspoon of salt in there.

 And, I'm going to put the tomatillos, just not all of them, but I'm going to put about

 four tomatillos in just to blend up and grind up the chiles and the garlic.

 I usually do two pounds of tomatillos and about eight chiles, but this time I'm doing

 four pounds of tomatillos and about double the amount of chiles.

 Okay, then I'm going to fill up the blender with the rest of the tomatillos.

 Yep, because you don't want to blend it too much because you want to keep it a little

 I chopped up the green onion and the cilantro, and we're going to add it to my salsa.

 And this was quite easy to make, so if you end up making it, let me know.

 I'm going to show you how to make a Mexican style broad bean salad.

 Broad beans combine with tomatoes, chilies, fresh coriander and drenched in a tangy lime

 There's a few varieties here, little ones, green ones, brown ones.

 They're all known as fava beans or more commonly their Spanish name is abas.

 Now fava beans, abas, whatever you want to call them, are used both fresh and dried in

 Also called broad beans by the way and are especially important in many dishes prepared

 Now let's take a look at our ingredients for our simple but hearty salad.

 As well as our broad beans, we've got a cup of unpeeled tomatoes here, just unpeeled and

 And for the dressing we've got 4 tablespoons of fresh lime juice, 3 tablespoons of olive

 oil, we've got a half a teaspoon of dried oregano or oregano, however you'd like to

 We've got 3 teaspoons of yellow aspart... 3 quarters of a teaspoon of yellow aspartate

 powder, 3 sliced red jalapeno chilies, 3 tablespoons of chopped coriander and some extra coriander

 Now over here we have a batch of broad beans that have been soaked and boiled until they're

 So in actual fact we're going to use the beans as they are without peeling them and we're

 All we have to do now is to mix up the dressing ingredients and they're right here.

 So we'll pop in our lemon juice, our collavita olive oil, our lovely, fragrant, delightful

 it is too, oregano, salt, sea salt, aspartida, my little addition to this recipe and our

 Now let's grab a bowl and mix together our tomatoes, our coriander together and then

 Now with your cooked beans be very careful because they're generally, when you cook them,

 You may like to cook them until they're not so soft in which case they're more chewy.

 We'll need to leave this dressing by the way for about 45 minutes actually and allow

 it to sit and marinate so all the lovely succulent flavours of the salad are combined.

 And if you have a sweet tooth like me, you do not have to feel guilty because this is

 It only has about 133 calories, 4.5 grams of fat, 10.5 grams of carbs, and 12 grams

 So you can either keep it all to yourself or share it with your friends.

 This recipe is so easy that Erica even leaves me alone in the kitchen while I do it.

 This is her kitchen, not mine, just in case you haven't picked up on that.

 So if you don't have a high powered blender, you can still make this.

 But what you're going to want to do is, as you start to hear your blender maybe start

 to stall a little bit or slow down, turn off the blender, open the top, and get in there

 with the spoon and just try to kind of dig things up around the blades, stir it up a

 And keep repeating that until everything blends really nice into a smooth mousse.

Synthesix Isolate because it has very low carbs and low fat and dissolves

 You're going to need half of an envelope of sugar free chocolate pudding.

 Now, you're also going to sweeten it up with sweetener of your preference.

 Usually I like to use Stevia, but they were out at the grocery store, so this is what

 And then just to top it off for a little crunch, I like to put a little bit of chocolate sprinkles.

 What I like to do first is add the almond milk and all of the powdered ingredients and

 leave the tofu for last because it's the toughest part of the recipe.

 Then we're going to do half of the envelope of the chocolate pudding, sugar free.

 I already have half measured here because I already made the first half and Scott already

 And then my four envelopes, one, two, three, four of my sweetener.

 And like I said, you can use whatever is your personal preference.

 And as many as you would like or as little as you would like, depends on how sweet you

 So I'm going to mix this first and make it like a nice liquid mixture before I add the

 Now that we have a nice base, now we're going to get the tofu going.

 So it makes, it gives you that creamy consistency that you're looking for in a mousse.

 I've tried several different mousse recipes and none of them are as good as this one because

 Because like I said, a lot of blenders have a tough time breaking it down.

 I like to let it blend really well and you want to blend it until you can no longer see

 So the small white, it should be all one smooth, consistent mixture.

 So, like Scott said, if you don't have a powerful blender, I'm just going to show you guys how

 But you just get in there, especially at the bottom and you mix things up a little bit.

 And we already know how much to pour in each one and I'm not as good as Erica, so I'm probably

 And so what we also included in the macros for this recipe was to add chocolate jimmies

 or chocolate sprinkles to the top to give it a little more taste.

 And if you want to add even a little more, what you can do is you can put some fat free

 I mean, it really has five calories for two tablespoons, so it's not really adding anything

 Listen, you have to go around a few times so it has that cool spiral effect.

 So I'll put a little bit on top and you can just do about a pinch.

 Pretty easy recipe to make and you can enjoy it just like this creamy right off the blender.

 Or you can put it in the fridge for a couple hours if you want a firmer mousse consistency.

 And if at any point in time you guys want to see the write up with all the directions

 and ingredients, just click on the SHF symbol down here in the corner.

 For more great tips, exercises and routines and recipes, feel free to join us on scotthermanfitness.com.

 For more great recipe ideas, be sure to go to the recipe section of scotthermanfitness.com.

 We're going to start by taking out everything in the hair dye box.

 Then punch a hole in your color cream and empty the tube into the bottle of cream developer.

 Before you begin, you want to foil off any sections that you don't want to dye.

 Then you're going to section your hair in half and secure the top one up.

 Now put on the gloves that came with the hair dye box and let's get to work!

 Divide one side of your bottom section into two and apply the hair dye mixture to it.

 Continue to divide your hair into one inch sections and evenly apply hair dye to it.

 When you're done, put your hair under a shower cap or a plastic bag and blow dry it for a

 When the time's up, rinse your hair out and apply the conditioner that came with the box.

 I think it looks very mature and sophisticated and it makes my hair appear healthier because

 But when you're outside under the sunlight, you can definitely see the reddish tint.

 It actually is more like a burgundy and a maroon color combined to be exact.

 So I think this is a great hair dye for people with dark hair who don't want a dramatic change

 Since I've had experiences with this hair dye before, I know that in a few months, my

 hair will fade to a visibly reddish brownish color and that's because I have previously

 Now, if you have virgin black hair and you use this, your hair probably will fade to

 Before any of you attempt to try this at home, I want to warn you that this hair dye stains

 So try not to work over any carpet area and remember to lay down a lot of newspaper to

 The hair dye will also stain your scalp as you can see with mine.

 Another thing is when you rinse out your hair dye, it's going to take a very, very long

 time and your bathtub's going to look like it's filled with blood.

 But if you are careful with where you work and how you work, then you should be fine.

 Now, for the pros, number one, I obviously love the hair color.

 And secondly, I like that even though the hair dye mixture can be quite strong, the

 I can just easily run my fingers through my hair as you can see.

 I'm actually going to try to see if I can find this conditioner in a bottle because

 If you have any questions, you can leave them down below but make sure that you read the

 Hi guys, today I'm going to show you how to upgrade the bearings on your Daiwa Steed

 Now, first of all, you're going to need the reel, you're going to need a small screwdriver,

 a coin, some electrical tape, a fishing hook, and a spool pin removal tool.

 A lot of Japanese tackle websites or eBay, they sell this tool.

 It's very great for removing the spool pin without scratching the spool.

 Now this is the one I use, it's the Lightning Lube High Speed Oil from Boca Bearings.

 It's specially formulated for ceramic and stainless steel bearings.

 This is the set of bearings that you're going to need from Boca.

 You can find it under a model search and select the Steed Speedcast reel.

 The first thing that we're going to do is remove the side plate from the reel.

 I would suggest using electrical tape to tape the line if you have line on the spool.

 Now before we install the bearings in the reel, we're going to prep the bearings.

 So what I mean by that is we're going to remove the seals and put some oil in it.

 Now to remove the seals, take the fishing hook, put it at the inside of the seal, and

 Now for those of you who fish in rivers or places with a lot of sediments, you only have

 to remove one side of the seal because you're going to have to put the seal back on.

 For me, because I fish from a boat, that doesn't really concern me and I like to run my bearings

 This allows me to put oil in it a lot easier and it's easier to clean as well.

 The next thing we're going to do is to put some oil in the bearings.

 The first bearing we're going to be replacing is the one on the side plate.

 As you can see, there's a retainer holding the bearing in place.

 What you want to do is take a finger and hold the retainer and remove it with a small

 And all you have to do is to take the retainer off, use a screwdriver, remove the bearing,

 The next bearing we're going to be replacing is the one on the spool.

 As you can see, there's a spool pin right here holding the bearing in place.

 The first thing we want to do is to put a piece of electrical tape on the spool lip.

 Just take the spool pin off, remove the bearing, and put the new one in.

 Just turn until there's equal lengths of the pin sticking out on each side of the spool

 We're going to take the spool with the bearings facing the inside of the reel and push it

 There are several benefits in upgrading the bearings on the Steeds.

 The Steeds is actually a pretty fussy caster and part of the reason is that the bearings

 By changing the bearings, it allows the spool to start up easier and give you a more consistent

 The better bearings is going to spin longer and give you a longer distance cast as well.

 These are brown noodles and masala delight, pizza flavor noodles and chicken flavor noodles

 We also have masala fusion flavor but I don't have that flavor right now at my home.

 So here I have 1 1 half tea spoon of oil heating up in the pan.

 We have to brown it and here I have my noodles taken out from the packet.

 While my seasoning was getting ready, at the first itself I added my water to get boiled.

 I kind of switch it up all the time so I don't have a regular foundation routine.

 I use MAC Face and Body foundation which is a really good summer foundation because it's

 I also use this NARS Creamy Radiant Concealer for my concealer.

 And then I use this NYX Concealer Palette which is a really really really good concealer

 So if you don't want to spend $40 on the Anastasia Contouring Palette, this is a good palette

 So I'm going to show you my foundation routine that I achieve with this look right here.

 Okay guys so right here I am just going to color correct some of my dark areas on my

 I'll have to do another video on color correction because it's too much to explain in this video.

 And I'm going to take my MAC Face and Body foundation in the color C7 and just using

 I'm not dragging it with the brush because I don't want to move the peach corrector.

 Almost similar to using like a beauty blender or something like that.

 I could have used a beauty blender but I just like using a brush sometimes.

 And then I'm going to take my NARS Creamy Radiant Concealer in the color Caramel and

 this is also my highlight because I don't really need a lot of concealer because I don't

 And then I'm definitely going to press it in with a beauty blender.

 And then I'm going to set that concealer with this AJ Crimson Bamboo Setting Powder.

 But for some reason I keep going right back to this AJ Crimson Bamboo Setting Powder.

 It looks exactly like Ben Nye and the Sasha but for some reason I don't know.

 And then oh I'm going to contour right here with this NYX Contouring Palette.

 I'm putting the powder under the contour just to make the contour stand out a little bit

 And then I'm just going to go around my forehead with the contour.

 Sometimes I go with a lighter color if I don't want a strong nose contour.

 And after I let that setting powder just sit there and bake for a minute.

 And so under my eyes I'm just taking a fluffy clean fluffy brush just to dust off that excess

 And then I'm going to go in and further blend out that contour.

 And then I'm going to set the other areas with my face with this MAC Select Sheer Loose

 There's a delicious morsel of meat called the spider steak that sits on the inside of

 You'll never see this in a butcher shop because this is the cut that the butchers will remove

 and season with a little salt and pepper and cook up for themselves as a snack.

 It's quite flat and literally just rides on the inside of that pocket.

 You'll hit the bone of the hip bone or H bone in the process of removing it.

 There should be some nice distinct lines of fat that you can see coming out of that.

 The H bone is a socket bone that has the tailbone vertebrae still attached to it.

 Scrape some of the fat away so that you can see the bone with your knife.

 If you use the hilt of your knife, you'll have less chance of dulling the blade.

 That hilt of the knife works quite well for scraping alongside bones also because of the

 Then take the tip of your knife and trace along the edges of the H bone.

 You'll see from this angle that the section where my knife is meeting right now is the

 Turning it for better visibility, you can then take your knife and see that ball and

 In the H bone, there's a small circular hole where my finger is that you can use as a lever

 The ham will create a counterweight for you so that you've got better visibility when

 There's a slight hitch at the top that you do need to work your knife around.

 Then you just continue to roll the bone towards you and keep cutting with your knife angled

 against the bone so that a majority of the meat stays on the ham roast.

 So keep cutting down until you're able to remove the tail vertebrae.

 There's a gland on the very surface of the inside of the ham that you do want to remove,

 Now the hind shank is very easy to remove because there is a joint that moves back and

 Look for the section where there is the most connective tissue.

 Cutting it from the front and then cutting around the back allows you to actually see

 So you'll see there's a seam that I'm following with my knife, cutting straight down, exposing

 the femur bone, turning the meat around as I need to so that I can see what I'm working

 Just take the tip of your knife and angle it against the bone and then as you need to,

 switching the grip on the knife so that you can cut through the meat and against the bone

 You'll see because I took that extra time to cut with my knife angled against the bone,

 There's your femur and that's what your finished ham roast can look like.

 Growing up, we had so many different types of Christmas cookies and candies and confections.

 And I always looked forward to the days that we would start to bake them all.

 I can't even hardly remember all the different types we had, but one of the ones that always

 sticks out in my mind are the chocolate covered cherry cookies.

 They sound absolutely weird, and I understand if you are not used to them, but they're kind

 of the idea of a chocolate covered cherry, which come into stores around Christmas, and

 They are a simple chocolate cookie with a marshmallow cherry inside with a little bit

 Once you try them, you are going to fall in love with them, and I hope they make it onto

 Once your eggs are incorporated, you can add a little bit of vanilla and just mix it to

 In a separate bowl, I always make sure to sift my dry ingredients, especially when working

 with cocoa powder, because it can have a lot of lumps and extra dry bits in it.

 You want to place your cocoa, a little bit of baking soda, baking powder, salt, flour,

 into your sifter, or whatever you use to sift your dry ingredients.

 Make sure to tap it through and get out all those lumps that could be left behind.

 Once you have it sifted, you can add it all to your big bowl that you creamed your butter

 You want to make sure to do this very slowly as it's a lot of dry ingredients.

 It's going to be a very firm dough once it mixes up and a little bit on the drier side,

 Once it's completely combined, you just want to roll these into about one inch balls.

 Of course, a small cookie or ice cream scoop makes this job so much quicker and easier.

 Make the balls and then roll them between your hands just to get them smooth and place

 In a separate bowl fitted with a fine mesh strainer, you want to make sure to strain

 They have a lot of liquid on them and they're extremely wet, so make sure to let them drip

 dry for quite a while and then put them onto a paper towel lined plate and let them dry

 You want to get as much liquid as you can because if you had all that extra liquid in

 them when they baked, it would just kind of ooze out and go all over your pan and that

 Once you have your dried cherries, kind of place and push each one into the cookie.

 As you can see, you just kind of press it down and make sure the cookie flattens slightly

 Once all your cookies are filled with their cherry, you can place them right into your

 You may be worried that they're underdone after 10 minutes, but if your oven is correct

 on the temperature, that is the perfect time and you should take them out right away.

 While the cookies are baking, you can make sure to get ready your frosting.

 Just some chocolate chips, some sweetened condensed milk, and a little bit of the cherry

 This is really just a little bit for flavoring and it helps thin out the frosting a little

 Let this melt together on your stove over a low temperature so when your cookies come

 Once the cookies come out, it's really best to frost them right away as it kind of helps

 It's a really thick frosting, so don't expect it just to ooze and melt all over.

 Spoon about one teaspoon on top of each cherry and you may need to help it out slightly with

 your finger and the teaspoon you're using just to help it cover the cherry and adhere

 And once you have your frosting on, I think it looks so great around the holidays to put

 It really just finishes the cookie and makes the presentation all the more beautiful.

 Let the cookies cool completely on a rack and then store them or give them away as gifts.

 Around the holidays, I'm making so many different types of cookies and candies and I love making

 plates and bagfuls for friends and family and giving it to them.

 It's such a special time of year and I love sharing all the amazing things coming out

 I hope you have inspiration to make these one of your new Christmas cookies and hopefully

 Please leave comments and questions below on all the videos as I love reading how you

 guys use my recipes and ideas for inspiration around your own home.

 And today we're going to be making some good old fashioned blackcurrant jam.

 And what you need to first do is sort out 4 pounds of blackcurrant.

 So this is like taking off any stalks and just putting it in a good bowl.

 Before we add the sugar, we're going to put in 2 pints or 40 fluid ounces or 1.1 litres of water into the currant to let it simmer beforehand.

 The jam has been simmering for 20 minutes and this is when we add in the sugar.

 Make it boil vigorously and keep on stirring until it reaches setting point.

 Now to see if the jam is at setting point, you want to go get a bit of liquid, not too much,

 and then put it on a plate that's been chilling in a fridge or a refrigerator.

 And also with another spoon, just push it slightly and if you see it wrinkles, that shows that it's at setting point.

 Okay, so luckily this doesn't have any scum and scum is basically some froth.

 So if you do have that, just add a knob of butter and stir it in and that should fix it.

 I've sterilised them before by washing them out and then pouring some hot boiling water around the edges of them and filling the lids up.

 And then only pour it up to where it starts, to where the lid is because you want to save some space where you're going to put in a seal over.

 Finally, either by cutting some wax paper or buying your own jam sealers, pop it in carefully like that.

 So as you can see, we've made ten and seven eighths jam jars of blackcurrant jam.

It's such a fun thing to do, quite time consuming but definitely much tastier than what you get in most shops.

 And I left a place at the bottom for the water to come out and there's many holes.

 didn't go all the way up because I don't want a lot of water setting on top after

 mixture in, then I put this on top and I have not cut my three inch PVC out yet

 You can see I have about three inches or so, maybe a little more than that, sitting at

I'll have to hand press out some of the water to get my ram tube, three inch

 ram tube, down inside to a certain level until I've got about less than three inches, the

Then I would just stick it in there and I would jack it up and press

Once all the water is pressed out, I'm able to pull it apart and take my

 up pretty good, but I've got to get it blended in and made into a slurry so that I can use

 Now that your machine is threaded, I'm going to show you how to choose your stitch and

 As you can see, I've changed the thread color back to a lighter color so that you're going

 to be able to see it well when I start to sew on my cardstock, since my cardstock is

 But before we get started, I wanted to show you that you have different options when it

 You can either use a straight stitch or you can use a zigzag stitch.

 And in this case, I'm going to use stitch G. Stitch G is the perfect stitch length for

 when you have two pieces of paper that you want to bring together and they're a quarter

 So for example, if your back piece of cardstock is 5 1⁄2 by 4 1⁄4 and then the piece that

 you lay on top of that is 5 1⁄4 by 4, this would be the perfect length stitch to go in

 So I'm choosing zigzag stitch G. Now I wanted to tell you a little bit about the tension

 And tension is when you have an even stitch look on the front and the back.

 If the bobbin thread, the bottom thread, shows up on the top, then your tension is

 So you could take it from 4 to 3 and see if that helps or from 3 to 2, see if that helps.

 Now if the needle thread shows on the bottom side of the fabric too much, then you want

 So if it's on 4 and it's just not looking right, try bringing it up to 5 and seeing

 Okay, so now let me show you what I do when it comes to cardstock.

 I'm going to sew two straight lines here, two zigzag lines just straight across.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to apply my tape just down the center of my piece of

 This way, the area that I'm going to sew here is not really attached and that gunk, the

 glue won't get caught up in the needle and down into the bobbin area.

 At this point, I've chosen stitch style G and I have my tension set at 4.

 I'm going to show you how to sew a zigzag stitch in a straight line and then I'm going

 to show you how to sew a zigzag stitch around the perimeter of a card, turning at the corners.

 We are going to use a zigzag stitch but we're only going to stitch in a straight line.

 And what I've done here is I've pulled my bobbin thread and my needle thread out from

 behind my presser foot and I've positioned my cardstock and then I've lowered my presser

 Now the way I'm deciding where I'm going to sew is there is actually a line right here

 I'm going to line that line up directly in the center of the presser foot.

 And as long as I keep it right in the center like that, it's going to give me a nice straight

 stitch and I'm not going to have to worry about it being all wobbly and going all over

 So I'm not going to backstitch on this because this is a piece that's going to be layered

 So I don't need to lock the stitches, but in the next demonstration I will be locking

 Okay, so to begin, we're just going to go ahead and go straight down, keeping that line

 And I'm stopping every once in a while just to make sure I'm lined up.

 Make sure your needle is in the upright position before you raise the lever, and then you can

 Now you can see I have a nice zigzag stitch going across and it's very even because I

 used that line between the two pieces of paper and I matched it up with the line right in

 Now rather than locking this stitch, what I'm going to do is I'm just going to flip

 over my piece of cardstock and put a little piece of tape on there and then just attach

 And then you don't see any excess thread hanging and you don't have to worry about locking

 I could still add a little bit of tape there and just tape down my excess threads.

 Now when I glue that piece onto my card, I don't have any extra stitches on the side

 so it looks very, very clean, but it won't unravel because all of this will be glued

 I can stitch this one going down and I'm just lining that up next to that stripe.

 And then I can either just use the tape that's already there to tape it down.

 Now when I place this piece on top of my other piece of cardstock, it looks very finished.

 I'm going to show you how to remove tape hair extensions, which I have a couple around my

 face place and it's been just over three months since I've had them.

 So I'm going to show you how to take out yourself this tape hair extension.

 So you want to section your hair and I'm just going to put one of the clips in and you can

 see my regrowth and it's a little bit of also shedded hair caught up in a bond, which is

 So I'm going to put a little bit of the spray solution, which is methylated spirits.

 Just rub it in between my fingers and get a tail comb and get in between.

 So I just want to sort of make the area of the tape bond easy for me to open.

 Okay, so what I'm going to do, I'm going to open and basically peel them off.

 Now this area here, you might want to open up with your fingers.

 If it's sticky, just spray a little bit of solution onto the area and then use your tail

 And what you're brushing out here is some shedded hair that's been caught up in the bond.

 So we just want to make sure there's no any little knots left and it's all nice and clean.

 And I'm just going to let go and repeat the process for the other side.

 So I section my hair and I'm going to spray a bit of solution onto the bond.

 Use my tail comb and just hold it with two fingers there and just sort of try to kind

 of stab it in between and go to the end so I can actually peel it with my fingers.

 And sometimes if they're a little bit too sticky and you can't open it like in this

 one, just apply a little bit more of a spray in between the bonds and rub it with your

 And for the second one I'm just going to hold my natural hair and the length of the extension

 So again I'm going to put a little bit of the spray here and then with my brush I'm

 So today I'm going to show you how you can get wavy hair and I know you can get it by

 braiding but that kind of takes a while because you usually have to sleep with it.

 And you can do this on yourself and it's super easy but I'm doing her hair anyways today.

 And what I'm doing is using this Golden Hot 3 Barrel Curling Iron and I'll put all the

 Okay so I'm going to start and you're just going to start at the top like that.

 And I use small pieces so that way the waves look a little bit more natural.

 And you're just going to go all the way and start as close to the root as you can because

 I'm pretty sure anybody can do this so I'm going to do a few more and then I'm going

 I've been wanting one for a really really long time and they actually sent this to me

 After I'm done with this first layer, then I'll show you what to do and I'm just going

 And it's a really really wavy, it's kind of like a beach wave look so this would be perfect

 Even now that it's winter, it's still, when I think of winter I think of curly hair and

 Okay so now that I'm done with that first layer, I'm just going to take some hairspray

 and I'm not going to spray it heavily, I'm just going to do a couple sprits, kind of

 You can even, when you want to scrunch your hair, if you have naturally straight hair

 So now I'm just going to finish and then I'll show you when it's done.

 As you can see, I'm all done with her hair and now what I do is I just take it again

 and I just randomly grab sections and just go through her hair randomly so that way it

 So as you can see, it starts really close to her root and so it looks kind of very natural

 I like these cookies, but what would make these cookies better?

 What we did, a little bit different than the normal sandwich cookie, we did a gourmet kind

 You can pick from shortbread, peanut butter, or chocolate, and then from there you can

 We have everything from my personal favorite, salted caramel, which goes great with shortbread.

 And if you can't decide, you can do one on one side and one on the other too.

 So why don't you start with the two shortbread and I'll grab the chocolate for you.

 So this is just one of the great things that you can get at Sweet Flower Bake Shop.

 One, if you love cookie dough, you don't have to bake the, you can have cookie dough.

 And then for those that like to lick the spoon, one of my personal favorites as a kid, we

 The other thing I really think is so cool that if you, maybe you don't want to go with

 the baked cookie route and stuff, you have some awesome granola that you can do in a

 So we put it in our warmer here and you can do it over cold organic milk.

 We're located at 2352 Bloor West Village between Jane and Runnymede in Toronto.

 Check it out and for now, I'm going to check out these fixings again.

 In this tutorial, I am going to talk about health and hair and show you some new goodies

 My friend Amber's hair is currently very dry because of medications she has been prescribed.

 And because she is not accustomed to dealing with the changes to her hair, she has been

 covering it mostly with wigs as she continues to exercise and take meds per her doctor's

 I am going to show her how to install and maintain moisture in her hair and give her

 Since Amber sweats in her scalp, I want to introduce her to the new Cream of Nature Pure

 Licious Co-Wash and Argan Buttermilk Leave-In Hair Milk, both of which are formulated to

 go along with the other Argan Oil from Morocco for natural hair products.

 After thoroughly wetting the hair, I am going to apply the co-wash throughout, massage it

 This formula gently removes buildup and refreshes curls with elements of a shampoo and conditioner

 It has Argan Oil, often referred to as Liquid Gold, for frizz control and shine, Panthenol

 for improved elasticity, and Behentrimonium Chloride for easy detangling.

 And it also has Lactic Acid as a gentle exfoliant and cuticle smoother.

 It is safe for all hair types and textures, including color-treated tresses.

 Co-washing is an excellent way to cleanse and condition quickly in between wash days,

 And as summer approaches, it'll definitely get those pool chemicals and seawater out

 while on vacation and remove the free radicals floating around in the air after you've been

 After detangling, I am going to rinse with lukewarm water and proceed to apply the new

 It has argan, coconut, olive, and avocado oils along with soybean oil to help carry

 This creamy leave-in is great for sealing in moisture, and this doubles as a daily moisturizer.

 The hair on the sides and back outgrow the top dramatically, and she prefers shape over

 You should consider your signature style when deciding on a cut, and you should also search

 for a stylist that is comfortable with cutting curly hair if you don't want to have to straighten

 As I am going through, Amber's hair feels incredibly soft, much better than what it

 And it's incredibly easy to comb through without pulling hair out.

 That is an indication that the moisture is balanced and the hair has proper elasticity,

 The Purelicious Co-Wash and the Argan Buttermilk Leave-In are designed to keep frizzies away

 after styling and increase natural luster with argan oil, so they provide structure

 And like the other products in this line, they are sulfate, paraben, and petrolatum-free.

 After you have co-washed and applied the Buttermilk Leave-In, you can style as usual.

 There are two styling creams available in this line, the Twirling Custard and the Pudding

 I am going to use the Pudding Perfection to set Amber's hair in finger coils.

 I want this to last as many days as possible without her having to reset, so I am installing

 In addition to argan oil, it has avocado and olive oils along with shea butter to seal

 in moisture, just like the Argan Buttermilk Leave-In, so the products will blend well

 The pudding functions as a gel and moisturizer in one, so it's great for flexible hold without

 After all the hair is coiled, I am going to set Amber under my hooded dryer so she can

 Because it is present in the Argan Buttermilk Leave-In and the Pudding Perfection I used,

 it'll be good to provide additional moisture and prevent unnecessary frizzing while pulling

 Avocado oil is high in vitamin E to help prevent breakage and it acts as a natural sunscreen,

 which makes it perfect for summer to help ward off UV ray damage.

 In just one hour, minus the cutting time, we have transformed Amber's dry, stretched

 out of shape hair to moisturized, shiny, springy, beautiful coils.

 With her workout regimen and prescribed medications, she has to have styles that last in shape

 This Cream of Nature Co-Wash and Buttermilk Leave-In Duo will give Amber days of moisture

 and give her wiggle room to cleanse and condition in between wash days without overdoing it

 These new additions to the Cream of Nature Argan Oil from Morocco line are available

 at many of your favorite local beauty supply stores and drugstores.

 You can use the store locator at CreamofNature.com to find exact locations.

 You can find more hair care tips, information, and links at Monosehair.com.

 I'm going to be going over a lesson I just called polyrhythm and this is part of a series

This lesson starts out with a foundational polyrhythm and a polyrhythm

 is basically the word poly means many and rhythm means rhythm so it's many rhythms or

 when I play a regular rock beat I've got three things going on but those are three different

 drums they're not necessarily three different rhythms they're all playing together to create

A polyrhythm it's like you have contrasting rhythms playing together as one

 rhythms so rhythm one it says is one two three and rhythm two and rhythm three and

 then when I put all those together you get the foundational pattern.

 separately and then try to just play them put it together learn each count or each beat together

 so one and two maybe one two and then throw in the and one two and and do that part over and

 over until you're comfortable and keep working your way through the rhythm that way and then

 your body becomes comfortable with it and your muscle memory kicks in and you can play it.

 as with a lot of the Monday lessons I don't like to just stop at a foundational groove I want to

 add to it so one two and three below are expanding the polyrhythm to create more layers and basically

 one adds in some toms number two adds in the China symbol if you don't have that you can hit

 something else and number three adds in the medium tom I'll play each for you.

 Now that's a lot of fun but what I want to do and this is a good way to practice it and it also

 lets a listener hear the development from that foundational rhythm start with the foundational

 and then add on number one then number two and finally number three.

 I hope you enjoyed this lesson remember to take it slow piece by piece and build up that muscle

 video or above depending on where you're you're viewing it from drum magazine is offering a

 special to online drummer visitors and people who enjoy our lessons it's 1995 one-year

 subscription to drum magazine as well as their digital edition so it's almost half off the

 entire price it's very cool I'll be doing drum lessons for the digital edition of drum magazine

 every month and also the regular print magazine so check it out.

 half cup sliced mushroom, 1 cup spinach, that's my spinach, 1 cup cheddar cheese

 shredded, 1 tablespoon red bell pepper chopped, 1 cup white chopped onions.

 want to make it spicy you can add 1 red chili and 2 tablespoon olive oil.

 Need quarter teaspoon salt and pepper to taste and if your spinach is too big you

 to make your vegetables so I'm gonna go ahead and fix my mushroom.

 Looks like my mushroom is done so I'm gonna take my mushroom out and set it aside.

Once it's ready I'm gonna go ahead and add my spinach to my oil.

Once it starts getting down and has a beautiful green color to it, you can take it off the stove.

Make sure your skillet is a little bigger because you need a lot of room to

 make an omelette and if you want more oil you can drop it just a little bit more so

 Once my oil is ready I'm gonna go ahead pour my eggs on my skillet.

 Once you notice that your egg is getting a little bubbly here, that means the

 bottom is getting almost done so we're not gonna turn right now.

 sure all your rest of the eggs that needs to be cooked can come on the side.

 I'm gonna go ahead and add just a little bit of cheese on top of my egg here.

Now I'm gonna go ahead and add my spinach and my mushroom to my egg.

 Lesson 7 brings us to the critical moment where you practice more swimming and less

 A relaxed compact recovery is essential to those loose fingers, no tension in the hand,

 It also sets up the propulsive part of your stroke by putting your hand in the most advantageous

 You'll travel farther if your hand faces directly back from the moment of entry and throughout

 When your hand is relaxed on recovery it's easier to avoid tensing it as you stroke.

 The main reason is my ability to maintain recovery form helps me move through the water

 It means I'm going in on the correct angle but it also means here the water will be calm

 Rehearsal exercises like these will be invaluable in mastering the small consequential details.

 And I'll spend 30 seconds rehearsing and printing then I'll swim and just feel what I felt on the rehearsal.

 So watch the elbow, the loose relaxed circle of the elbow coming out.

 Now let me just tell you what that does, the loose relaxed circle.

 So you've probably heard the conventional stuff about you should push past your hip.

 People want you to accelerate back there, push all the way back and so on.

 What that does to the recovery, first of all it adds nothing to your stroke.

 They've done a study in a flume and found that past the hip bone there is no propulsion created.

 So it's a complete waste of energy making your tricep tired to be pushing past your hip and all the way back.

 So what it does on the recovery is it means you've got a linear action followed by an angular action.

 So the recovery is going to start with an angular action, linear, angular.

 Plus I've generated, I've developed a certain amount of energy here.

 The only way in which I can conserve the energy coming out is to circle forward.

 I want the inertia being developed here to go directly into that.

 So I've spent a lot of time training myself because I spent 25 years pushing back.

 And it was the idea of practicing elbow circles, literally standing, doing this,

 doing what it felt like to do an elbow circle, making sure that circle was out here, not coming up here,

 and then putting my face in the water, and taking six or eight or ten strokes and saying,

 For most people, their elbow comes up across the shoulder blades, up across the shoulder blades.

 It causes instability, causes you to swing across the center line.

 All right, so here's one of the things I've spent a ton of time visualizing.

 And I've talked about the importance of visualization in creating new circuits.

 I know the exit point for my stroke and I know where my target is.

 In my mind, for so many hours, what I've done is visualize a laser from the exit point to that target

 Because there's no point in going there by a circle if I can go there by a straight line.

 But my instinct as a human swimmer is to get there by a circle.

 The other thing is, I was talking about the importance of stroke tempo, stroke rate.

 If you want to have velocity, there's only one absolute mathematical absolute in speed.

 A certain combination of stroke length and stroke rate will always yield a certain velocity.

 When I'm training for pace, I'm doing it with mathematical predictability and rigor.

 I'm not just swimming a certain number of VO2 max sets and hoping, please God, I go faster as a result.

 So stroke length and stroke rate, you can't have velocity without both of them, so rate is important.

 Well, if I'm going from here to there, that's having an effect on my rate as opposed to going via the laser line.

 So I can have the same length and get my rate up a little bit higher by following that line I just described.

 Again, going higher is just going to take me more time to get my target.

 This is one of those kinds of songs where you get really carried away with all the details

 or you can just realize that it's basically like a bluesy shuffle with three chords.

 So basically what I would do is just first, just make sure you can do this.

 I'll just play along and I'll show like the easiest possible way and then show how to

 First thing I would do to learn this song is do E5, so 0, 2, 2.

 So make sure you can do that with power chords, you can even play it that way.

 And then after you can do that, it kind of starts doing this bluesy thing like.

 So you're going to do a lot of ring finger, a whole step over from that finger.

 So you go up to B5, but instead of putting your pinky up there like a power chord, you're

 And then same thing on A5, just slide down to 5, 7, and then stretch out to 9.

 And you can get it perfect, or you can just learn this bluesy idea and then just kind

 And you can get on the 4 occasionally and hit the open strings.

 So hopefully that was helpful because I was looking at these tabs and I was thinking if

 I was teaching this to my students, like this would be way too hard to like try to play

 If you're having a hard time stretching, you can, instead of doing it like this with your

 Hello YouTube students, my name is Vincent and today I want to take a look at angles

 When we have some circle with intersecting chords BC and AD, I want to focus on this

 And I want to prove that the measure of arc AB plus the measure of arc CD divided by 2

 So to get started I want to connect points A and B to form a triangle.

 So we connect these two points and I'm going to label this intersection point E.

 So now we have triangle ABE and now I want to label the missing angles.

 So now we need to think about inscribed angles and the arcs that they intersect.

 Well angle Z intercepts this arc here which I can highlight in red.

 Notice how this angle, the line segments forming this angle intercept this section of the arc.

 So the measure of this arc is equal to 2Z because the measure of the intercepted arc

 of an inscribed angle is twice the angle measure of the inscribed angle.

 And the measure of this arc AC is equal to 2Y which is twice the measure of the inscribed

 Using the inscribed angle theorem we can set up or we can describe the length of arc AC

 So we have arc AB plus arc CD, that's the sum of these two arcs, plus arc AC plus arc BD.

 Which makes sense if we think about it, a circle in general will span 360 degrees.

 But now we need to find a way to substitute for these particular values.

 We have X plus Y plus Z equals 180 degrees because the sum of the interior angles of

 And now what I want to do is I want to subtract X from both sides.

 So the next line will say arc AB plus arc CD plus 2Y, all we're doing is substituting

 Remember, we said arc BD was equal to 2Z, twice the measure of the inscribed angle.

 So now we have arc AB plus arc CD plus 2 times Y plus Z equals 360 degrees.

 We have Y plus Z, but over here we have Y plus Z equals 180 degrees minus X.

 So now we have arc AB plus arc CD plus 2 times, and we're substituting 180 degrees minus X

 So we have arc AB plus arc CD plus 2 times 360, I'm sorry, 2 times 180 degrees is 360

 I want to subtract 360 degrees from both sides, and I want to add 2X to both sides.

 So on the left-hand side, 360 degrees and minus 360 degrees cancel out, minus 2X and

 On the right-hand side, we have 360 degrees minus 360 degrees, that cancels out.

 So now all that's left on the left-hand side, we have arc AB plus arc CD, that's all that's

 So now when we divide by 2, we have that X equals, well all that's left is we have X

 equals arc AB plus arc CD divided by 2, which is exactly what we were trying to prove.

 So this intersecting chords theorem involving the angle X, we just really need to be careful

 how we substitute, or at least to prove this theorem, we just need to be careful how we

 So we set up these inscribed angles to represent the measure of the arcs.

 But this is going to conclude the proof of this intersecting chords theorem.

 Thank you all for watching, and I hope that this video was helpful.

 Wow, it's so soft and very creamy as you guys can see and it's just melting in the mouth

 and with this fresh pieces of mangoes they are just refreshing.

 Today in my kitchen as a summer special I am going to show you how to make a mango kulfi.

 And previously I posted ordinary and simple version of kulfi with milk and some dry nuts in it.

 To begin take teaspoon of milk and soak 5-6 saffron strands in it.

 So make sure the mango you are using is really fresh and ripe well.

 So if it's ripe well as you see in this video you can easily scoop out the pulp using a spoon itself.

 So since it's ripe well you can see I am just easily scooping out the pulp.

 And add it and give it a mix once again using your hand blender.

 So you can check for the sugar, I mean the sweetness whether it is ok or not.

 And now I am going to add this saffron milk followed by the cardamom seeds.

 I have only popsicle molds but I wanted to make this kulfi in a cone shape in authentic style.

 So if you prefer you can add in some basil seeds at the bottom.

 It's optional but I am just adding it because it will add some nice crunchy texture to the popsicle.

 So I am adding at the bottom and over to that I will add that kulfi mixture.

 And then freeze for at least 6 hours so that it would get set perfectly.

 And now you can simply run the tumbler at the outside under a tap water for just 5 to 6 seconds.

 And then flip it upside down and if you tap it on the top that is bottom of your tumbler your kulfi would come out.

 So it might take couple of seconds but it will come out like this.

 And they are really very delicious and just great to refresh yourself for the summer.

 Thank you so much for tuning in and if you are a viewer have not yet subscribed to my channel.

 Hello guys, in this video I'm going to make a demonstration on how to paint a door in

 The shabby chic style is a rustic, old school wood painting technique or sometimes in iron

 pieces like candle holders or something, coffee jars like this.

 This is sort of shabby chic style, old barn, like maybe 1940s, 1930s style.

 I have a picture frame right here already painted in a shabby chic style, worn out paint

 and right now what I'm going to do is I'm going to do the same technique with my door.

 I painted the whole door black and then with some wax, like from this tea candle, you use

 the wax and you rub it on the edges where you want the underpaint to show up, to bring

 So you just rub it like this, everywhere where you want the black to come out, all the corners

 on the, these places right here, maybe just rub it a little bit right here on the frame

 So once the white paint, which is the outer coat, has dried out, you take some sandpaper,

 in this case it's a 280 grit sandpaper and you start sanding where you want the black

 So the purpose of waxing the edges is for the paint to come out easier.

 I mean you can do it with your fingernail if you want but it would be a pain, right?

 Now this is depending on each person, the style that they want.

 Some people would like to have a very very rustic look and would sand heavily all over

 The other edge from the outside, come here, I don't know if you can see this, see how

 You know you gotta be inspired and see what you want and start scraping here, scraping

 there and at the end the whole door has this style and it becomes a shabby chic.

 The worst thing that can happen is that you don't like it so you start over again and

 you just paint it again and do it with some other technique that you might like.

 Right now I'm experimenting and I think it's going to come out really good.

 This is Miss Mary I'm at coming back to you with an unboxing video.

 Today I'm going to show you my recent purchase of the mini pochette in the Damier Abin to

 go with another purchase that I made of the Louis Vuitton Speedy 25 in the same print,

 So if you want to learn a little bit more about my unboxing video over here, please

 Today I'm going to unbox for you the Damier Abin mini pochette that goes into the recent

 purchase that I made of the Speedy Bandolier 25 in the Damier Abin print.

 So I just wanted to show you guys a quick unboxing video because I am going to be wearing

 Just open it up and like everything else Louis Vuitton it comes with that pretty dust bag

 I'll be giving you specs in the comment box below on you know how big this is and I will

 be doing a full review on this and my Speedy Bandolier 25 to show you what you can wear

 this with, what it fits in, you know how you can carry it alone, some modeling shots as

 far as you know what you can use it with and how well it looks.

 But typically speaking you know you can use this on its own if you want to just throw

 it over your shoulder or you can use it by detaching it right here.

 You can clip this onto the D-ring inside of a lot of the Speedys and other bigger bags

 Hey guys, SamuraiApplianceRepairMan from FixItNow.com here with you.

 Today we're going to talk about replacing the touchpad on a microwave oven.

 Clint writes in, he's got a Whirlpool microwave oven, and he asks,

 Well, whether it's Whirlpool or Sharp or LG, they're all pretty much the same.

 So what I'm going to explain to you here will be pretty much applicable to all microwave oven brands.

 They all pretty much come apart and go together the same way, and they work the same way.

 So the first thing to do on this when you're going to replace this is to unplug the microwave.

 Okay, with the microwave unplugged, next thing you do is there's a grill, the vent grill, right up top there.

 And if you're looking at the vent grill, you've got to look closely sometimes.

 Then that vent grill piece will tilt out, unsnap, and come right out.

 With the vent grill removed, now you're going to expose a retaining screw on the touchpad.

 It's a single Phillips retaining screw that just affixes the touchpad to the chassis of the microwave itself.

 The touchpad will sometimes unhook, sometimes just tilt straight forward.

 Either way, if it doesn't come straight out, just try lifting it up and then pulling it out that way.

 It's a flat mylar ribbon connection from the touchpad to the control board.

 To disconnect this ribbon connector, you'll look on the connector on the control board where the ribbon connector sticks into.

 And you'll see on either side of that mylar connector, there are little tabs that you have to lift to unlock the ribbon connector.

 If they do, just lift them up, and then the ribbon connector will pull right out.

 Just replace the new touchpad in reverse order, and you'll be good to go.

 If you have any other questions, come see us over at the Appliantology Academy.

 We've got many forums there, including the Kitchen Appliance Forum.

 Just register, create a new account there, and start a new topic in the Kitchen Forum for kitchen appliance help, and we'll help get you going.

Great texture filled with cinnamon chips that just melt through it and make it just delicious.

 The kids will love it and so will anybody else that loves cinnamon.

 You're going to need a medium-sized bowl, one large egg, and one cup of water or 8 ounces,

 an 8x4 loaf pan, which you're going to want to spray with cooking spray, and a spatula.

 Preheat your oven to 350 and then with a little cooking spray or butter, coat your pan, getting it ready for your batter.

 And I've pre-coated my pan here, getting it all ready for the mix.

 So what you really want to do is just kind of blend it all together, get it nice and smooth.

 You want to bake this at 350 for about 55 to 60 minutes or until when you insert a toothpick, it comes out clean.

 We've sliced it up and now I think we're ready to take a taste.

 You know, these cinnamon chips, first of all, that we use, melt during the process, creating all these little cinnamon pockets.

 We have a great recipe in our recipe section on our website, Desai.com, that makes a delicious French toast.

You've got to check it out and try it on a weekend or something.

 Today on Amateur Kitchen we are making chicken with lemon caper sauce.

 Packed with flavor with the salty capers and the tanginess of the lemons.

You are not going to be missing any of the calories in this one.

 And this is one of those recipes, it's better when you make it at home.

 It's a great way to entertain because you know exactly what ingredients that you are going to put in there.

 Because I don't know about your place, where you shop or where we shop, but chicken breasts are ginormous.

 I've said it before, I don't know where the chickens come from or what they feed them, but they're big.

 And also what we're going to do Maria, is we're going to season...that's plenty.

 We're going to season the other side just a bit, since we did a lot on this side.

 It'll probably take about 3-4 minutes per side, just until it's nice and cooked in the middle.

 Our pan is on medium-high heat and now I'm just going to drizzle some olive oil in.

 After 4 minutes, I want you to flip your chicken breast to the other side.

 Once the chicken breasts have cooked through, we're going to go ahead and remove them from the pan and put them on a separate plate.

 And with this warm pan, we're going to turn it down to a medium heat and add in 1 tablespoon of butter.

 And this is just going to help start making our sauce for our lemon caper sauce.

 And you're going to want this flour to cook for about 1 minute, just to cook out some of that flour taste to it.

Now we're going to go ahead and just slowly add in some chicken broth.

 And again, I use reduced sodium to cut out some of that sodium.

 And just go ahead and keep whisking this until it kind of comes together.

 And just keep adding a little more, until it almost looks kind of like a gravy.

 And make sure you get all those little yummy bits at the bottom.

 That's tons of flavor that's going to go right back into this sauce.

 I just want kind of that subtle flavor, especially because Maria is trying it too.

 And I love the zest because it just adds so much more flavor than the juice.

 And be sure just to get the zest, not the white part, not the red.

 You're going to mix this together and let it sit for about a minute.

 And after it sits, we're going to go ahead and taste it to see if it needs a little bit more salt or pepper.

 And especially when I'm watching what I eat, that is exactly what I want to do.

 With this dish, you can find tons of sodium in it when you go out to other restaurants.

 And when you make it at home, you know exactly what goes in there.

 The last thing that we have to do is stick these chicken breasts right back into our sauce.

 You could serve this easily with a little bit of pasta on the bottom.

 So I'm going to put the sauce on the side a little bit because I'm going to use it for dipping.

 Well, this is always a great healthy alternative to something else.

 In the meantime, as we always say, we want you to head to our website,

 And as I mentioned in the last video, you can get a healthy eating recipe

 Well, at least I'm going to finish eating my chicken with lemon caper sauce.

 We want to see you right back here again next time on Amateur Kitchen.

Today I'm going to be doing a formal makeup tutorial for you that's kind

As always, you should always moisturise your skin to keep it smooth.

 And then put some lip balm on your lips to keep them from cracking.

As you can obviously see, my lashes are so bad at the moment and

 I'm getting them in-filled next Monday, so I'm very sorry for you having to look at them.

 to show the full footage, but you can click the link below to have a watch.

 After the eyebrows are done, I'm going to cover my lid in concealer and then set it

 I grabbed my Masquerade eyeshadow and put it in the same place.

 I then took Burnout and Dusk from the palette and I just put it on the outer lid.

 After that, I took the darkest colour of the palette and I just went over the section that

 didn't have lash extensions, now would be the time to put lashes on.

 of my eye and the darker colour under my eye and to highlight my nose, cheekbones, forehead,

 Next, I just took my loose powder and my brush and I just set my whole face with that one.

 Then, I took my contouring palette and used the banana colour in the middle to highlight

 Next, I just took my bronzer and I just kind of warmed up those areas of my face.

 Then, I just did my lower eye with a black eyeliner and I used trick and limit on my

I just blended it out a bit just to create more of a smokey effect.

 I then took my little Napoleon glitter and I used it on the inner corners of my eye.

 As I felt like being a bit spicy, I decided to do a little hair tutorial.

 up in a tight ponytail, tazed the ends and then I just twirled it into a bun.

 need is a couple of bobby pins and hairspray to set it and you've got yourself a really

If you like this video, make sure you subscribe, like, comment and

 Okay, so I hope you guys have a lovely day wherever you are around the world.

 So today I'm going to show you how to make one of my favorite curry dishes.

 It's really simple, anybody can do it and it just takes a few minutes.

 So first thing you can do, you can do this in advance or you can do this while you're

 making the curry, is to whip up some rice and lentil or just rice together medley.

 This is nice because the lentils and the rice makes it a little bit more interesting.

 I like these because they taste good and I like the colors too, the red and the orange.

 And some celery which is going to add a nice little crunch too.

 And this is a really great curry, they sell it at Whole Foods and I'm sure other grocery

 stores hopefully if not, call your grocery store and tell them to get this because it's

 So we're going to cut the celery, cut the onion and the peppers all at the same time.

 And we are going to put these in the skillet after we cut these guys up.

 So I'm going to simmer these along with the onions so they are nice and mixed together.

 And while I'm doing this, I guess I could always heat up the cast iron.

 So I like to cook with this Earth Balance butter instead of oil.

 You can cook with whatever you want but it's just a little more lighter and tastes good too.

 So we're going to simmer that for a while and chop our onion on up.

 I like the red onions honestly because they look nice and they taste good too.

 So all the juices of the peppers and the onion and the celery start to mix together.

 Alright, so now we've cooked this down a little way so all of the vegetables have vegetable-ized

 Just kind of spread this out into the goodness and then add some curry.

 This is just more warming the curry, warming the rice, lentil mixture.

 We are going to put it on this nice little plate for presentational purposes.

 All of the peppers and the celery and the onions, they all get together and have a big

 party with each other and it becomes a party in your mouth and then a party in your belly.

 Hi, I'm Anna and I'll be bringing you fresh ideas to make dinner planning easy.

 Tonight it's lamb roast with streaky bacon and these gorgeous potatoes with pistachio dressing.

 Lamb and bacon are two of my favourite ingredients and they come together beautifully in this dish.

 And you'll also need cream delight potatoes and pistachio kernels.

 Click here for the full recipe and to add all your ingredients to your trolley when you shop online.

 This is such a great way to dress up an easy carved leg of lamb.

 I'm starting with a little bit of olive oil and we just drizzle it over the lamb.

 And so now we're going to cover this in the gorgeous streaky bacon

 and you can see all the wonderful streaks through this piece here and all that flavour will go over the lamb.

 We secure the first piece of bacon with a piece of butcher's string and we start with a simple granny knot.

 And then we just secure the bacon down with the string all the way along.

 Now we're adding some cream delights to the pan, whole big ones.

 They'll be nice and fluffy on the inside and crunchy on the outside.

 And to make this recipe even easier, you can buy your ingredients online and get them home delivered.

 Now this goes into a 200 degree preheated oven for about one and a quarter hours,

 if you like it medium and still a little bit pink and juicy, or a little longer if you like it well done.

We're going to whip up a quick pistachio dressing in the food processor.

 One small garlic clove, half a cup of parsley, two tablespoons of lemon juice, two tablespoons of warm water,

 one tablespoon of honey and half a cup of extra virgin olive oil.

 And as you can see, the potatoes have soaked up all that amazing flavour from the bacon and the stock.

 And we just remove the leg of lamb and let it rest for a moment.

 Now we're just going to cover this lamb to keep it nice and warm.

 All those flavours are going to reduce down to create a beautiful jus.

 Now I have hands of steel, but if you don't have hands like mine, you can always do this with a tea towel.

 And now we're going to spoon this beautiful, vibrant green pistachio dressing over the potatoes.

 Tonight, it's lamb roast with streaky bacon and these gorgeous potatoes with pistachio dressing.

 Hey guys, decided to go ahead and get this unboxing done and you can see in the title what it is

I like that and then you've got your menu and back over here on the bottom

 You've got a 3.5 millimeter headphone jack and also a noise cancellation microphone and on the back

 And then you've got the single LED 5 megapixel camera with single LED flash LG logo on the back

 iPad mini wanted to get some some time with the iPad mini recording

 from the box, you've got the USB micro USB, so we're USB charging cable and

 Let's put the battery in here and I'll see how heavy it is with the battery.

 See here actually know what this one's not compatible with Isis my galaxy note has an Isis

 I thought this one was compatible with Isis the new SIM cards have like this red trim on it

 And I thought I saw the Isis logo, but I did not see the Isis logo.

 But the Isis logo would be on this side right here or on the other side

 Sorry, I haven't used LG products in a while and it goes like that

 Is this some manuals and stuff in there even with the battery in it

 Let me grab the 1s here, sorry for the shaky cam and you can see the size comparison here

 Smidgen thinner, but you know these phones, you know how they are

 We'll get it fired up and maybe we'll get some video up who knows but thanks for joining me.

 I've got a couple of things talking about today and one main thing is the little third

 You can make these things out of almost anything laying around.

 You just need something that's got a little weight to it, a base and a little piece of

 This one I just happen to have a big old chunk of steel and I've got some quarter inch or

 316th round stock, sharpen the point on it, put a bend in it and bam, you've got a third

 For holding little odd shaped little things like this that can't necessarily clamp easily,

 all you need to do is hold it until you get a tack on it, the third hand tool is the bomb.

 It's putting arc strikes on parts where I don't want arc strikes.

 That little sharp pointed steel point sometimes transfers the welding current to a place where

 I'm going to do a little mod on this one here and I'm laying it against this big copper

 It's about a good half inch thick so I know it's not going to ever get hot enough to accidentally

 I'm going to use it to trap gas and I'm going to use some aluminum bronze, feather metal,

 I'm going to put a little ball of that on the tip there and that's going to keep it

 Copper is a much better conductor than steel and I won't get that spark and arc that way.

 I'm setting this machine here just like I would weld aluminum because the aluminum bronze

 has got enough aluminum in it that it really scums up and welds fuzzy and scummy without

 You can see I'm using just enough heat, just adding a little bit, a little bit, a little

 bit and I'm going to wind up with a ball of copper alloy, aluminum bronze alloy, on the

 end of my third hand here and now my arc strike problem is going to be fixed.

 By laying it on that big chunk of copper it traps argon and the alternating current makes

 I'm going to give you a little example here too on how it can be used to overlay a little

 This one's got some rust pits on it so it's not going to weld all that clean but basically

 the premise is, I'm using alternating current again here, just add a little ball and just

 play with that foot pedal just enough to where that wets in because you don't want to really

 melt the steel, you don't want to change the properties of the copper aluminum bronze deposit,

 It's like brazing, it's technically TIG brazing because aluminum bronze melts at less than

 So you just need to use just enough heat and keep the arc kind of over the base metal and

 just flow it forward and just wet it in and that alternating current keeps the puddle

 I could file a notch in here, I could sharpen it just like I had the steel point but I'm

 just going to try it just like it is because I've got a couple little jobs here to do.

 Also I'm going to wrap some bare copper wire around the base so I'll pick up plenty of

 And I'm going to get a tack on this thing here and this is just a quick way, it doesn't

 really need to be clamped, it's a really close tolerance fit, slip it on, it needs

 a tack weld but I need something to hold it and get a good ground and keep from getting

 And that's what the third hand thing is good for, it's just a very quick temporary way

 to hold something and hold an odd shaped thing in place while you get one tack on it.

 And then once I've done that I can slip it down through the slot here of the portable

 welding table I've got, get some more tacks on it and even weld it and spin it around

 But this little deposit of aluminum bronze on the tip there is the ticket today.

 Okay that's it for today, thanks for watching, I hope you learned something.

 Hi, I'm here to introduce you to Simplicity's Deluxe Rotary Cutting and Embossing Machine.

 This machine features a speed control dial, an LED lighted work surface, a fabric cutting

 guide to cut fabric and paper widths between a quarter of an inch and a six inches wide.

 The cutting action happens with the pressure between the blade and the wheel beneath.

 To remove the blade, simply tighten or loosen the screw beneath the cutting surface with

 the provided screwdriver to replace the rotary blade with the embossing disc.

 We've added the extension table to make cutting large widths of fabric and paper much easier.

 Line the edge of your fabric up underneath the cutting guide and press down on the foot

 Replace the fabric underneath your guide bar and press down on the foot pedal.

 The fabric glides smoothly between the blade and the presser wheel to create a nice even

 If you're having trouble cutting a straight line, make sure your fabric is underneath

 Keep one hand behind the blade at all times and guide the fabric through onto the other

 Now I'm going to demonstrate how to remove the rotary blade and exchange it for an embossing

 Use the provided wrench and turn the lower wheel into the down position.

 You need a Phillips head screwdriver to remove the screw on the plastic shield.

 Make sure when you replace the embossing disc, you line up the small hole with the notch

 Replace the black safety knob and the plastic shield, tightening the screw.

 When you're ready to cut, use your wrench again to turn the wheel into the upward position,

 Now that you've changed the rotary blade to the embossing disc, you're ready to emboss.

 Place your paper underneath the guide bar and press down on the foot pedal.

 Make sure you look for the deluxe rotary cutter and embosser, plus all the accessories, at

 Here's a common problem for anyone who is going to be putting a cap on a fence,

 actually something like this on a guardrail or a handrail where somebody

 is actually going to be running their hands along this on a regular basis, then

 you can do and that will be to reduce the amount of breaks in the railing.

 mean if you have a 16-foot stair handrail let's say, then make sure that

 If you have a 24-foot long fence like this let's say, then make sure that you

 problem like this is to first start by reducing the amount of breaks in the

So in other words, get longer lumber so you don't have to deal with as

 plane it off and you know within a year it's warped back again.

 course you're going to need to do, you can just see here that they just have

 two nails and the nails are off to the side and of course the side where the

 bad idea to put a few more nails in something like this and realistically I

 would, this is this would be a good spot to put some screws in it while you're

 and you need to fix it, most of the time you could just grab a clamp and like a

 C clamp and pull the two boards together and then use some screws.

 every once in a while you're going to run into a problem where you're going to

 have boards that aren't going to want to come down or they're going to want to

 has damage, I mean let's face it gaps like these are what allows water in.

 have enough water come in and it remains on the top of the fence underneath these

 the case and there's a good chance you're going to need to do a little

 extensive repair work and replace some of the framing parts for the fence

 before you can actually put a screw in that's actually going to hold it

So you can always cut if you have a gap like this you can always

 go four foot on each side or should I say four foot on the right side four

 the damage out and put a new board on and hopefully that will solve your

Sometimes you're going to have damage in an area like this but you

 won't have it two feet away on either side of the break if of course the break

 is what's actually causing the damage and then that would allow you to put

 another board in and you know fasten it securely to the top of the fence and

 the old thumbs up button and if you guys and gals have any questions feel free to

 leave them in the comment area email me and I will see if I can answer them as

 On Monday I showed you how to make those really gorgeous little homemade apple pies.

 And today we're going to make some absolutely delicious bacon and cheese scrolls.

 To start with our first piece of puff pastry we're going to add on some mustard.

 Now for the one with the mustard I'm adding on some black pepper.

 And with the one with the tomato paste I'm adding on some mixed herbs.

 Then all we need to do is evenly cut them between each slice of bacon.

 Using a toothpick we're then going to pierce it through making sure it doesn't come out

 Then we're going to place them onto a baking tray with some baking paper and pop them into

 After about 15 minutes in the fridge we're then going to take them out and brush them

 Then we're going to take the toothpick out, we're going to flip them over so the folded

 To top it off we're just going to add a little bit of grated parmesan.

 Then into the oven for about 20-25 minutes until they're golden brown.

 Once out of the oven pop them onto a wire rack to cool and then you are ready to tuck

 As you can see they're really quick and simple to make and they taste great too.

 So thanks again for joining me, have a wonderful weekend and I'll see you all on Monday.

 Hey, this is Brian B. I'm a dance instructor from here in Vancouver and I'm specialized

 So in this video, I'm going to show you what you can do with your arms when you're dancing

 Well, the big thing that you might be missing out on is what you are doing with your arms

 Point is, what you do with your arms can change the entire feel of your movements.

 Getting started, one thing to remember is to have your shoulders really relaxed.

 Arms up, fists, and they are loose fists, not clenched tight like this.

 And you want to have pretty much everything relaxed when you're moving.

 Second thing, pretty similar, if you have a blazer or a coat on, you can do this.

 And this can work pretty well if you're a big guy and it's a little bit awkward for

 Lastly, a little bit more advanced, if you're comfortable with it, you can do the snap.

 I show you three dance moves you can learn in 15 minutes to make you look like a natural.

 I show you a concept for you to keep in mind to make you look more comfortable when you're

 And lastly, if you're looking really stiff and really tense right now, then I can show

 Hello and welcome to the first episode of Amy's Kitchen Gadgets.

 it stupid kitchen gadgets because that's what my husband calls them, but I think some of

So this is actually my favorite one and I have to credit my friends

 and this works best if the egg is a little bit warm, which this one still is.

 square part in the bottom, then you put in your egg, then you put in this, which is going

You can really freak your kids out if you put this in your lunch.

 do with it is take the yolk out and try to make deviled eggs with it.

 and once you take the yolk out, the white kind of loses its shape.

 If you go to selfishmom.com slash kitchen gadgets, you can see the link to buy this.

 The Heroes is going to be on UPS whenever that gets here, Matt, so that could be any

 Sat beside him, Chad Brown, in the Omaha tournament last year, number five, number three.

 Jean Robert Ballon, which he's not the best poker player in the world, but he knocked

 Saw him on that NBC Heads Up Championship the other day, and he looked pretty nerdy.

 There you have it, Matt, and we'll do that Heroes later today when it comes in.

 First we begin by applying compound to the leather like a little girl coloring.

 All you are doing is enriching the fibers of the leather with the compound.

 I start at the plunge line and I always lay it flat on the piece of leather.

 Then I will lift it and then push down into the leather so it starts to bite.

 From there, I will very lightly drag the handle back to the tip.

 Always following that edge because that's your only point of contact.

 So down and then up and then bite and drag backwards to the tip.

 It's flat, lift and then we bite and drag it backwards all the way to the tip.

 Once again, it's flat, lift, push forward so it bites into the leather.

 I've already put four cloves of garlic that have been minced as well as one teaspoon of

 Of mirin, let's see what it says mirin is sweet cooking seasoning.

 Boy maybe I should have poured this out first or taken out that little spout.

 Mirin, let me see what it says in the back of this because I'm sure

 That unless you have a really good Asian market, you're not gonna be able to find some of these things

 Mirin sweets cooking seasoning gives teriyaki and sukiyaki the full flavored sweetness and glaze for which they're known

 Water rice seasoning vinegar fermented wheat proteins blah blah blah.

 No crap, right say one cup, okay, let me read what it says here

 Before I put that wet in there, but one tablespoon of roasted sesame seed

 I have a bunch of this stuff a bunch of my things in containers

 That's how I started gardening was having almost everything in containers and this one shares space with a

 This mixture and we're gonna keep it and reserve it on the side because we're gonna add in a

 I'll show you what what it was that I picked it up at the Safeway house in half a second.

 Okay, sorry the sprinklers just went on this here is marked as beef round tip steak cap off thin

 But because I'm making this for a cookout tomorrow and I have a party that I'm going to

 When I get home as soon as I get home, I have to start cooking for

 I've made this before and I put it up on my on my channel not even that long ago and

 I'm going to continue making it until I find the Colby that I love

 Marinating you can grill it or you can pan fry it until it's done and then you brush it with this extra sauce here

 so I'm gonna try to remember to take you with me out to the grill and

 I can barely wait to nom nom on it, you know, so I guess we'll see you when we're nomming

Welcome back to A Vintage Vanity and today's hair tutorial is this!

 three elevated pin curls, the ones that are almost in a triangle,

 I just used my rollers and rolled up just the very end so not coming all the way up

 So between the two gels it left me with a pretty crunchy bit of

 and then push them forward and kind of work with that wave to get into the hair.

 For this look you really want to try and push all that curl to the very ends of the hair.

 You can either take bobby pins at this point or if you have a nice set of combs

 Then again let's brush out that hair so all the curl falls to the bottom.

 Then on this side we're going to go ahead and take out our clips.

 With these clips in I'm going to give the hair another good brushing

 For a quick and easy way to let me know that you liked this hair tutorial

 As always to not miss a single minute of what goes on here at A Vintage Vanity

 I love hearing from you guys so let me know did you like this hairstyle?

 Hi, my name is Kelly and I'm here to show you some yoga postures that can help with

 You're going to lay on your back, feet the distance of your hips, feet flat on the ground,

 and you're going to pull your right knee in towards your chest and place the right ankle

 From here, you're going to lift left leg up and grab the back of the leg, pulling your

 knee in, left knee in towards your chest as you push the right knee away from your right

 Feet down, bending the knee, ankle on the knee, flexing the left foot, pulling the knee

 in towards your shoulder and pressing the left knee away from the left shoulder.

 My name is Michael James and I'm a former sciatica pain sufferer.

 After extensive research, I found the ideal combination of strategies that work to keep

 For more information about several sciatica pain relief strategies that may work for your

 Be sure to sign up for the ten-part mini-course with information that is critical to any sciatica

 The better you understand the condition of sciatica, the better your chance is to eliminate

 Alright you guys, I have a new technique for you and it was inspired by DepeshGraw.

 She's on Instagram and I'll link to it here below in the YouTube box because she's super

 I don't know what to call it but it's like a cat eye but it's smoked down here underneath

 I just did purple because did you guys notice my new hair color?

 I got some purple little peekaboo highlights in here which I love.

 This is what I came up with and this is my favorite lip combo right now which you have

 Alright so the first step to our look is to take a black gel liner.

 I'm using the Makeup Geek One in Immortal in a bent liner brush.

 If you don't know how to do that, I've done a video on that as well.

 But we're just going to start the liner close to the lash line, right about halfway.

 Okay so this is the shape that I have right here you guys where it's winged out.

 Now you're going to take a pencil brush and the Makeup Geek Shadow in Drama Queen.

 All we're going to do is smudge it underneath the wing of the shadow because we want this

 Now we're going to go with a new shadow I haven't even launched yet.

 We're going to blend this down even further underneath that wing.

 And we're going to smudge it under the lower lash line as well.

 Okay now to blend under the lower lash line, kind of brighten it a little bit, you're going

 We're just going to put a little bit under here and then take your soft dome brush and

 blend this out and that's going to soften the line under here because that's where we

 We're going to contour but I'm going to show you an easy way to do it.

 I'm using the Bobbi Brown one in Golden Light and all we're going to do is put this here

 We still want the top of the cheekbones to be blank because we're going to go in with

 Take some of that and we're just going to put it on the top of the cheekbone just for

 I'm going to do my favorite combo that I've been wearing for a while.

 We're going to take the NYX Soft Matte Lip Cream in Abu Dhabi which is a taupey color.

 So if you've got two cups of rice, you'll need four cups of water.

 So as it's cooking, I'll go through some of these other buttons in the front.

 We also have a brown rice steam, so you can steam cook vegetables or what have you.

 And you've got a delay timer, so you can set the time for later in the day when you want it to begin cooking.

 And you've got a keep warm button to keep your rice or whatever inside warm.

 You know it's getting pretty close to being done when you see the steam coming out of the vent.

 As the little sticker says, do not touch, cover or obstruct this steam vent.

 And of course you might cause too much internal pressure if you obstruct it.

 This is a steamer bowl, plastic bowl and heat safe so that you can put your vegetables or xiu pao or whatever it is that you need to steam cook.

 Finishing up a simple breakfast of rice and bacon flavored spam.

 Next, remove the surface element and the drip pan from the receptacle you're replacing.

 Use a Phillips head screwdriver or a quarter inch socket to remove the screw securing the receptacle.

 Remove the mounting screws securing the element switch housing.

 You can now pull the receptacle wires free of the switch housing, conduit and bracket

 Install the new rear receptacle by threading the wires through the bracket

 Remove the wires through the bracket, conduit and switch housing.

 Realign the wire harness bracket and replace the screws to secure.

 Re-position the switch housing and secure it with the mounting screws.

 Remove the support, lower the main top and replace the surface element knobs.

 Align the new receptacle on the main top and secure it with the screw.

 Now insert the element into the new receptacle at a 40 degree angle

 Today I'm going to build a slightly upgraded version of the T-hat.

 The advantage with this one is that the strapping is actually higher up,

 so rather than just chopping off the pith helmet at the top like I did last time,

 I'm going to try and hide the cut underneath the banding so you won't even know that it's there.

 and you can see there's just enough space above the band to fit the T-cut in the top of the pith helmet.

 I've used a pencil to draw around the top of the band, because this will peel back.

 This will allow me to make a cut just below the top level of the banding,

 I've cut the top off the pith helmet following the wrappings all the way around.

 At the back I've left a small section flat which will allow me to easily attach the hinge.

 The next stage is just to use a bit of glue to seal up the fabric around the edges so it stays in place.

 The next stage is to reattach the cap part of the hat to the main part using a hinge.

 So I'm simply going to bolt a hinge to the back of the hat and bolt it to the lid.

 I've glued a thin rim of stiff plastic around the edge to support the fabric

 By cutting the wooden core of the hat below these strips of fabric which were wrapped around the original hat,

 it means when you actually close the lid it's harder to see the join.

 I now need to build a platform inside the hat to mount the teacup on.

 I'm going to make the platform out of the top part of this cheap felt hat bought from a costume shop.

 I'm going to simply cut this off and mount it inside the pith helmet.

 You can slot the whole felt hat inside the pith helmet to judge its size

 and I'm now going to mount this inside the pith helmet with some glue.

 I've bolted four brass picture frame loops around the outside of the felt hat

 Because the felt hat is flexible, the pressure of the elastic bands on the cup and saucer depress the hat.

 To stop this from happening I've put a stiff piece of brass metal across the centre of the hat to support the cup.

 I experimented with some different ways of keeping the pith helmet closed

 So these simply just hold it in place with friction so you can still open the pith helmet.

 The amounts of the ingredients that you're going to need to make the salad will be listed

 ingredients that you're going to need are a cucumber, and I have peeled it and sliced

 it, and I used an English or hothouse cucumber, but you could use whatever kind of cucumber

Some lemon juice, some onion, some tomato, some dill, and you can use fresh

I have my sliced cucumbers in this bowl, and I'm going to add the onion

 some of the lemon juice, a pinch of salt, and some of the dried dill.

 to whisk this all together until it's smooth and mixed together nicely.

 my dressing and just pour it over the cucumbers, onion, and tomato.

 I'm going to put some on a little plate and show you what it looks like.

 Good afternoon, this is Stephanie from eFoodDehydrator.com and today we are dehydrating nectarines.

 I put a bushel into the sink with some water and I've rinsed those up.

 And what we'll do is we'll put it face down, get nice slices this way.

 And then what we do, we flip it over because there's a pit right in the middle, but that

 This is Markham, he's my son and he absolutely loves nectarines, so he's having some of those.

 And the neat thing about this is it's a good quarter inch thickness.

 We try to put them together here, but we have all of these and they're almost heart-shaped,

 It has an awesome five year warranty and it will dehydrate your beef jerky, your vegetables,

 So we are going to dehydrate this batch of nectarines and we will let you know how they

 because I don't want it to get too overly pureed with the seeds.

 Hey guys, in this look I'll be doing a reverse eyeshadow look where I put a light and light

 I used different shades of yellow, green-ish to kind of complement my outfit.

 If you would like to see an outfit of the day, check the information box.

 I'm taking Soft Ochre Paint Pot by MAC and I'll be applying this all over my lid as a

 Now what I'm going to do is take my NYX Jumbo Pencil in Milk and apply it all over my lid

 You know I said I'd put that primer on my lid, but I actually put it all over my eye.

 I'm going from dark to light or kind of light to dark to light.

 For the inside of my lid, I'm taking this eyeshadow from 3 Concept Eyes.

 If you would like to see a review on this eyeshadow, I'll link a blog post down below

 For the inner tear duct area and lower lash line, inner corner, I'm taking a golden eyeshadow.

 This is also going to be swept through my crease as a buffer shade.

 For the lid area, I'm packing it on with a MAC Sainsmoke brush similar to the MAC 239.

 For the brown highlight, I'm taking Earth and Glow Minerals' Shell Island with a Bare

 For the liner at the bottom, I'm taking my Bare Minerals 118N Round the Clock Waterproof

 For the top, I'm taking my 3 Concept Eyes Eyeliner Gel in Black.

 A link to this will be down below as well where you can get that.

 And I will return when I'm done and show you the rest of my face.

 For foundation, I'm taking my Bare Minerals Bare Skin Pure Brightening Serum Foundation

 And I'm using the complementary or complementing brush to apply it.

 It's going to help deepen this up because as y'all know, my forehead is darker than the rest of my face.

 And I don't want to go darker on my foundation, so that's not an option for me.

 For concealer, I'm taking my Bare Minerals Correcting Concealer in Tan 2.

 Like, I mean I don't even know why I'm putting this on with the same color as me.

 I'm using the MAC 130 to try to build it up and make it darker.

 For blush, I'm taking the Cargo Cosmetics Laguna Blush with this random T-Mark Blush Brush.

 I'm taking my 3 Concept Eyes Moist Glossing Face Oil Mist to set everything to give my skin a dewy glow.

 For lips, I'm taking the Clean Color Lip Liner Pencil in Rose and MAC Half and Half Lipstick.

 Pictures of the final look will be in my blog, a list of everything I used as well.

 For an outfit of the day, check the information box that will be down there as well.

 So now I'm going to take our 2 and 3 quarters cup of water with salt dissolved in it,

 From there, I'm going to break up some of the chunks of this rice.

 We're just going to let this sit now like this until the temperature of this comes down to around 80 degrees.

 This is a three stage fermenting process that takes place over four days.

 It's going to be going on from now on until this evening when we wash and prepare another 6 cups of rice to be steamed for tomorrow.

 Until then, we will be stirring this once every 2 hours for the next 12 hours.

 We've installed a nice soft handle to make the operation much more comfortable.

 You may be asking yourself, why are these girls stirring the sake for 34 minutes?

 Supposedly, the more air that's in there, the better the fermentation will be and the higher the alcohol content.

 adapters for the Wii and the Wii U. So here, this is the motion sensor bar.

And this one is compatible, well even on the Wii U motion sensor bar it

 someone asked about the audio view component because some of their TVs don't have HDMI.

 The Wii did not have HDMI but you can buy one of these third party adapters for it,

 but the one that came with the Wii where you can buy a third party, you can also buy one

What kind of sucked is that the Wii U power adapter does not work on the Wii.

 just hoping that, ok, I already have everything all wired up for the Wii, I can just basically

 leave it plugged in on one room and then I want to take it to another room, just unplug this unit

 itself and bring it to the other room and plug all the connectors in.

 connector so there's no way of making this fit onto the Wii U. So this AC adapter, this AC

 that only has component and still on HD, you can just get one of the Wii cables, such as this.

I haven't seen many videos out there on the Sterling Arms 302 22 long rifle pistol and I figured that I might as well make one that puts together some history and shows you the gun a little bit and uh, I don't know, just shows you how to disassemble it because information is a little bit sparse on these things and scattered about various little nooks and crannies in the gun community across the internet so I figured I'd put it all in one place for anyone who's interested because these little guns do still float around out there.

As you can see, there's nothing in the chamber and the magazine is empty so it's safe.

I had some feeding issues, although when I broke it down, I realized that it still had grease in it.

 It looked like packing grease that you would find in a new gun so I don't think this had been fired many times, if at all, although it was a little bit dirty in the barrel and around the feed ramp there so that probably had something to do with it.

Apparently they started in either 1967 or 1968 and they were founded in Buffalo, New York.

 In 1971, they were contacted by E&R Machine from Gasport, New York because they were having issues making the pistols.

They gave production to E&R Machine in Gasport and from 1972 onward, they made these.

I haven't actually seen any of those, although I have seen a few of these around.

 Eventually, apparently sometime around the, there was no real date given.

Apparently what put them out of business was some kid got shot by the babysitter's boyfriend who took the magazine out but left one in the chamber and crippled the kid.

 The parents sued Sterling Arms for negligent manufacture and to put them out of business in 1983.

Unfortunately, while they had well made guns, they weren't lawyer safe enough and someone got the better of them in their pocketbook.

Not that it doesn't work, I mean you can't pull the trigger then, but it disengages quite easily and if it brushed up against anything, it could pretty easily flip off.

So I would not carry this with a round chamber if you're going to carry it at all.

What you'll do is you'll remove the magazine and then you'll dry fire the pistol and then you find this little button right here, right?

And once that's popped out, you can take the slide and just pull it back a little bit and up and then let it go forward.

You can remove it, then here's your spring, take that off the barrel.

I wouldn't break it down any further than this because it looks like it would be pretty difficult.

 And the firing pin and spring are attached to one another here.

 So, to put it back together, it's really just a matter of going in reverse order.

And then it has this little ridge here, which you guide it in with.

 So, you basically just take it and fit it up in there like that.

Put your spring back into the barrel like you would with pretty much any other pistol.

And once it's fit in there, you just push this back in, this back piece in, until it clicks.

And you've got yourself your functioning pistol, having cleaned it.

Generally, I've heard that these are pretty reliable up to 50 rounds.

And once they get dirty, reliability drops the dirtier they get.

And I'll probably post a follow-up on this with some different types of ammo testing and a little bit of range shooting.

So, that's just a little bit about the Sterling Arms .302 pistol.

 Okay guys, so the first thing I do before applying my makeup is I will apply my

 Prevage Brow and Lash Grow Serum from Elizabeth Arden onto my brows.

 I'll only do my brows before my makeup and then when I'm going to bed or right in the

 And then the next thing I'm going to take is my MAC Pro Longwear Concealer and I'm going

 And for this look I'm going to be using the Tarte Lip Palette and taking the color Caregiver

 which is a light pink color and the 217 brush from MAC, I'm going to apply this under my

 And then taking the color Natural Beauty and the 217 brush again, I'm going to apply this

 Okay now we're going to buff that into the crease and go more above your crease and this

 And then taking some more of that Natural Beauty color, we're just going to deepen the crease.

 Now we're going to take the color Force of Nature and apply that in the crease as well.

 Now taking a 219 brush from MAC and the color Best Friend, we're going to apply this in

 And this is going to help define that crease more and make our eyes look bigger and wider.

 And then I'm just taking more of that light pink shade and reapplying that to the brow

 And now taking my MAC Pro Longwear Concealer, and this is just a random fluffy brush, I

 If you want to see my full highlighting and contouring routine, you can click here.

 Okay and now I'm taking more of that Natural Beauty in my 217 brush again and I'm going

 to blend that under the eye and soften the edges of my eyeshadow.

 And then taking my Soft Brown Brow Wiz from Anastasia Beverly Hills, I'm going to fill

 First thing I do is brush all my hairs up and then pull them to the side.

 And really brush the product out with the brow wiz and you'll get a really nice natural

 Alright and then I'm taking a flat concealer brush and I'm just going to carve out my brows

 I'm using two concealer brushes from Bare Minerals and I'm just using the MAC Prolong

 And then taking the color Supermom in the 217 brush again, we're just going to apply

 And then this is the Deep Sea Pearl Gel Liner from Elizabeth Arden and I'm using my Tarte

 But I like this brush because it's super nice and skinny and flat.

 And I'm just going to create a nice thick line on the top of my lid.

 And then taking my Bronzed and Beautiful book from Too Faced, I'm going to use my Sun Bunny

 And then taking Pink Leopard, I'm going to apply this as my blush.

 And then taking my L'Evolume de Chanel mascara, I'm going to apply some of that to my lashes.

 Okay, now I'm applying the Ethereal Pink Tartelette lipstick and this is my new favorite pink

 It leaves your lips super moisturized and beautiful and it feels really smooth and the

 Okay, so I'm taking these lashes from Kiss and I pre-double stacked them, which is layering

 two pairs of lashes on top of each other and gluing them together.

 And now I'm just applying the Thin Bead of Glue and I'm going to apply it to my eye.

 And you always want to dry the glue off a little bit first because if it's too wet,

 you're going to have to just hold your lash there for a long time.

 You want to wait until it's a little bit tacky so it'll just stick right on.

 Okay, now that we have our lashes on, we're going to apply a little bit more of a highlight.

 This is Midnight Magic Glitter from Sephora and I'm just going to apply this above my

 Okay, and then taking this Pistol Pink Wink Eye Pencil from Butter London, it is a hot

 Now, if you don't want this, you can just leave it the way it was.

 I just thought it would be nice and funky and kind of different.

 Please remember to subscribe and like this video and have a great Valentine's Day, everybody.

 Even if you don't have a date, still have fun and keep loving your heart for all your

 Today we're going to work on a pumpkin with a little variation from just a pumpkin.

 Now how we're going to do that is we're going to start with a lead bubble and we're going

 When we come up from the bottom of the pumpkin I want to make the pumpkin's chin and we're

 So then I'm going to do his top lip and I'm going to give him a small nose.

 Now what you want to do is take this just like you would a three bubble roll through

 And then after you get it rolled through then go ahead and send one of these other ones

 And that way hopefully when I tie this together it won't unravel.

 Okay so now we're going to match that with three more bubble roll throughs.

 I'm going to go ahead and stick my finger in, take this knot, stick it down inside,

 Just going to take that around, around one of the loop twists, around again,

 Squeeze those together, take the chin and the back of the head, and then twist it.

 Now, I don't have enough left over to tie off the way we did last time.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to deflate one of these.

 And I want to squeeze these together to kind of give them a little bit of separation.

 Now I'm going to open this up, put the chin in between these two bubbles.

 Now the eyes, you can either use a 260, or I'm going to use a 5-inch.

 And I'm going to go down, just give a little bit of air in there.

 I've squeezed it up so it's not too awful bad, too hard to twist.

 So anyhow, I'm going to twist that in half the best that I can.

 And I'm going to stick it through here, through the back of the nose.

 And just bring it above the nose, each eye above the nose, just like that.

 And now we can do a little, you just need to go around the outside and make sure everything's looking good.

 We're going to make a really easy, simple recipe for you today.

 You can have it as a family dinner, as an appetizer, for the Super Bowl, for the game,

 It only takes about four ingredients and it only takes about 10 to 20 minutes.

 And then we're also going to use some green onions or scallions.

 One is obviously going to warm the beer too, but it's going to get rid of all the alcohol

 So we're going to do that and we're going to combine the cream cheese.

 The cream cheese, you want to make sure that it's soft before you start cooking it.

 We're going to combine that and we're going to stir it very carefully.

 What we're going to do is start warming up the beer and start melting the cheese.

 You want to make sure that it's not burning, the flame is not too high, because that's

 So you want to make sure that it's just warm enough so that it's melted.

 What we're going to do is add the cheddar cheese to our cheese.

 We're going to whisk it in over low flame so that as we're whisking it in and building

 We're going to let that simmer for about a minute or two, just enough until the cheese

 And of course, you've got to remember, the more cheese you add, the brighter the color

 is going to be, but the stronger the flavor is going to be as well.

 So you just want to add enough cheese as you're feeling comfortable with.

 So next thing, we're going to go ahead and serve it so we can enjoy it.

 So we're going to use any sort of serving bowl that you prefer.

 We're going to accompany this with corn chips, but you can also accompany this with pita

 And as a decoration, and for a little bit of extra flavor, we're going to add some green

 Again, my name is Chef Fernando Mojica with LearnToCook.com, and we hope you enjoy your

Today we're at Bill's RV service here in beautiful Ventura, California

 Once again to do a little repair job on our rubber roof up here and to help us out once again is Bill Geer.

 It's an emergency repair kit that you can pick up at Camping World.

They run about 40 bucks and if you get a tear in your rubber roof, it's basically only for rubber roof

 It comes with the sealer and a piece of the rubber to actually patch it.

 Something I'd really recommend if you got a rubber roof when you're out somewhere and you tear it on a branch

 So here we are up on the roof and this is our nasty little tear and you can see we got a couple of holes

 Well three actually, yeah, and you can see that the rain is gonna run right in this and damage the wood and whatever else

 so it really is imperative that this be patched and as anything you want to make sure that

 You want something fairly strong, but you don't want something real caustic.

 So once we have that clean like that we can now we can cut this piece of rubber roof

 You just want to make sure you get at least an inch of coverage around all sides or a little bit more

Yeah, let me peel the paper off here so I can get a better idea where we are

 Yeah, some strange rubber that's for sure it doesn't feel like anything you see in a hardware store, right?

Yeah, we're gonna I'm just kind of kind of size it up here a little bit

 So let me get the sealer out and we want to make sure that we pretty good put a pretty good bead around here

 This tube that they send you you put that all around the holes there

 It's not gonna get past even if it gets past the edge it probably won't get past this in in board seal here

Yeah, and then what they want you to do in the direction is they watch you literally pull these edges up

 Right here and just kind of run a little bit of a bead under up.

 Get a good seal here and you can still go over the edge some more and really flatten this out

 Say you can really go across here and you can really make a nice seal

 Right once this sealer dries, it really is more of a permanent type seal.

 Yeah, it's about 40 bucks for the kit and a little bit of your time in it.

 Hey everybody, it's me Liz Hicks and today I'm going to share with you how to

 flowers I actually use deep plum, black cherry, and frozen lake.

 packaging is actually a little bit bigger with 81 feet and your favorite

 crepe paper so you can see how beautiful glimmer mist takes to just some plain old

 is I actually just went ahead and saturated misted all three of the pieces

 careful not to heat it too much because it will burn and you'll probably see

 do burn it or if you want it burned then you know just go ahead and add more.

 gonna go ahead and take this frozen lake piece and I'm gonna take craft and

 photo tape again by Scrapbook Adhesives by 3L and I'm gonna lay out probably

Now what craft and photo tape is it's actually a really nice thick double-sided

 adhesive so it doesn't... what I like about it is that it actually you can pick it

 up and reuse it and kind of move it around because it's more of a kind of

 of like a weave to it so it makes it a little bit more durable.

 the protective backing off and then I'm gonna go ahead and take my crepe and I'm

 going because I'm gonna really concentrate on my ruffle when I put it

 edge right up against the adhesive so that my bloom stays consistently the

 Since I am running out of adhesive there I'm just gonna go ahead and cut it.

 Normally I would just rip it but I want to have that versatility on the end if I

Alright so now that I have this little ruffle, another cool thing too if

 you didn't want to make flowers you could easily just gather that up onto

 your craft and photo tape, pick it up and then put it onto a project.

 wanted to put it behind something you would put your craft and photo tape down

 then put your misted side facing down and do your ruffle and then pick it up

 and put it behind something and then all that pretty little glimmery goodness

Now what I'm gonna do and this is where the craft and photo tape

 comes in really handy, is I'm actually just going to go ahead and pick up my whole little strip of streamer here.

 it behind a project or gather it around a project, gather around a title.

 doesn't have to be a flower but it just shows you a really quick and easy way to

 just go ahead and take this little piece of cardboard and gather my adhesive and

 this is where I'm going to really put the effort into making sure that my

 though the adhesive gets stuck I can still like pick it up and move it around.

 It's that sturdy to where I can just keep moving it around if I need to.

 You basically just keep doing that until you get tired, until you get the

 building it in closer and closer to make it more of a kind of a puckery look so

 what's cool too is that if you find that one of your ruffles is like totally

 these little guys is that I misted some Prima lace and then another cute little

Also this here is actually made not out of crepe paper but just paper

You can see here that I have all of these paper towels that I have used

 this flower here is actually straight off of this paper towel where I just cut

 that actually, you know, if you get the good kind they're actually double ply so

 that kind of little bubbly look to help absorb anything that you spill.

 different look but it's what you've already used, what you would normally

I use my paper towels to either clean up after I've misted or to

 put down on my misting mat and then mist on top of just so that it catches any

So yeah, it's just a really nice resourceful way of showing you how

 I'm going to use a little bit of the same color to paint the clouds.

 As I scrub, I also pull some of the pigment onto the white areas.

 I'm going to add a little more cobalt blue to the left side as it has more cloud than

 I don't want my clouds solid white, rather I want them to be made up of various shades

 When I've got the look that I want, I'll lock the colors in with my blow dryer.

 Using the same colors that I used in the sky, I'll begin painting in my mountain base

 I'll start with the most distant mountains and I'll apply the paint just slightly darker

 With my brush dipped in water, I'm going to diffuse the edge that runs into the closer

 I'll carefully follow the upper edge while making sure that the lower edge of my painted

 As these colors approach the closer mountains, I'll diffuse their edge with a brush loaded

 The next area of mountains are a bit closer to the viewer, so I'll paint them in a bit

 darker in value, but again, I'll use the same colors that I used in the sky.

 With a larger flat brush, I'll do the same as the previous set of mountains, carefully

 following the top edge while making sure that the lower edge does not dry on me.

 Make certain that the previously painted mountains are completely dry.

 If they're not, you won't be able to get a nice crisp edge on this set of mountains.

 And I'll spray with water again the area where the mountain colors intersect the trees.

 I try and vary between these two colors so that the mountains do not end up being one

 This wet on wet blending effect is one of watercolors most amazing attributes.

 And I'll pick up some of the puddles with a dry brush and a tissue.

 Again as I get closer to the viewer with these mountains, I'll make them a bit darker than

 So as you can see, same as before, but just a little darker in value.

 Now with some cobalt green and cobalt blue and a flat brush, I'll begin working in the

 You can see that this edge has dried on me a bit and that a hard edge has formed.

 This is ok in this case since I'll be covering it with dark colors, but this is the hard

 edge effect that I've been trying to avoid on these lower edges.

 After I dry that, I'll pick up some more cobalt green and blue for the next wooded hill.

 As the hill merges with the rock of the mountain, I'll blend in some cobalt blue and rose.

 1998 KitchenAid refrigerator and freezer and the problem that I'm experiencing is

 that there's water dripping into the fridge from the freezer and this is

 freezer into the fridge and so water is dripping not constantly but almost daily

 shelves out of here which is not quite as easy as maybe you think.

 to lift up the shelf completely, move it to one side and then it will slide out.

 over on this bottom portion and then there was ice all back in here.

This right here is the drainage hole that goes down to the plastic bin

 underneath the fridge and it was packed with ice all around in here.

 there were there was some ice all in here and pull this back side off that it

 of the ice from the bottom of the freezer and started to work on this over

It's easiest with a hair dryer and you just blow hot air into this area and

 the ice that you could see gone then I used a funnel put it into this hole here

 and started pouring some hot water down in there just a little bit and after

 about I don't know that probably took about 15 minutes of putting hot water in

 there and letting it sit and then I just let the whole refrigerator sit for

 about an hour and a half and now when I pour hot water or any water down this

 remove this pops right out and then there's a tray here whoops there's a

 tray here that just pulls right out and there will be water catching in there

Then all I need to do is reassemble this put the back back on put the bottom

 back down put the shelf back in plug it in and we are good to go.

 This is the Yamaha DX7 and the battery has died on it after 25 years so now I am going

 I guess I would have to remove the expansion board to get access to the backup battery.

 The back of the backup battery shows it is very low in voltage.

 There you have it and that is how we change the battery of a vintage Yamaha DX7 keyboard

 It would have been much more effort to unplug all the cables and take out the motherboard

 recycle plastic bottles to make a super cool and super useful pencil case.

 You will need two small bottles, a zipper of course, the size of the bottle's diameter,

 your bottles, you wanna make sure that your pencils or your brushes or whatever object

 so pretty straight bottles, cause you wanna use the entire bottle.

And if you want to, you can also use some sandpaper to smooth the

If your two bottles still have some liquid inside, just dry them out

So now your two bottles are ready to be assembled to form a pencil case.

 But before you do that, you wanna make sure that your pencils and your brushes still fit

 thread a needle and sew the zipper to the plastic bottle like so.

 you have to keep in mind that the hot glue, being hot, will melt the plastic a little

 So now you wanna attach the second bottle to the upper part of the zipper.

 This operation could be a little bit trickier than the previous one, so I wanna remind you

 do put my brushes inside or my colored pencils and I'm ready to go!

 Today I'm going to show you something that I just learned last week from my friend Glenda.

 I think another one that would be good, I didn't try it, I will try it.

 I'm going to be using Tempting Turquoise, more Mustard, and Rich Razzleberry.

 First thing we're going to start with is the lighter color, and that would be the Tempting

 On the marker you get 2 tips, the writing tip and the brush tip.

 This one is kind of easy to see where you went because it's darker.

 I'm going to warn you right now, I don't think it's going to be two that are going to look

 Then I'm going to use the more mustard, again remember use the brush tip.

 Maybe I should have started with the more mustard, it's lighter, it doesn't matter really.

 One thing I'm going to tell you, after you're done thumping we should pass our brush on

 I'm going to just go like this so if you get different color on it, it would take it off.

 One thing you want to do, maybe you want to huff on your stamp just because it's been

 Then usually I would take a piece of scrap paper, put it on top, and rub it.

 Another way that you can do it is take your brayer and pass it so you know it's all over.

 This was the same color, and you see they don't look alike at all.

 I get more mustard on this one and less of the blue I would guess.

 It's the same color, more mustard, Tempting Turquoise, and Rich Razzleberry.

 Then this one I used All Olive, Marina Mist, and Pretty in Pink.

 Over here I used Calypso Corral, I cannot remember the green, I think it was All Olive

 Installation, remove battery from your starter with a half inch wrench.

 Using a 7mm socket, remove the three bolts on the solenoid cap.

 When you remove the cap, carefully remove the gaskets and apply to the SOS cap.

 This is the Exoskins install of the black carbon fiber on the iPhone 5.

 You want to make sure your hands are clean and your phone is clean as well.

 Gradually lay it down and run it flat along towards the bottom of the phone.

 If it doesn't line up right the first time, you can peel it back off and stick it back

 If you get it wrong, just peel it back up and lay it back down.

 Afterwards, a good tip to do for these small pieces especially, especially when you heat

 it up with a blow dryer, heat up the little pieces so they adhere and conform to the phone

 That is the Exoskins install for the black carbon fiber on the iPhone 5.

 if you want to see my braiding method and also the pineapple method.

The two products I like to use on my second day hair are the Kinky Curly

 on my hair with some water but I don't have a ton of frizz so I'm just going to take some

This gives my hair more shine and it really calms down the frizz.

 because my second day hair doesn't have as much hold as my first day hair because I feel

If I have any frizzy curls I would smooth those down with the Gloss

And if my hair is super frizzy I just take some water and conditioner.

 I use this one when I put in my hair because if your hair is frizzy it needs moisture but

And at the end of it I had said that there were two other tests that I

 being unwatched, but I don't like to do that because you should always watch your

 what's the consumption of fuel, I just want to see if it actually heats it up

 and I've been called up on that one too, that why didn't I do a boil test instead of

 That waving action just moves the flames over to the jets to light them up.

 Sometimes if the flames are just going straight up, they won't light the jets

 In the last test, two cups of water with the lid on it starting at 60 degrees,

 it doesn't really make that much of a difference putting it on or not putting

 and take two tests, one with, one without the screen, and we'll see a big

 it's going to make a big difference and I'll show that to you in the next lab.

 I look forward to your input, questions, remarks, helpful suggestions.

 Just because it was the one that needed the least amount of ingredients.

 So now, once this is open, we pour it ever so gently into the pan.

 And I will start the stirring and then my assistant will finish the stirring.

 And then, that's right, so I'm just going to start the stirring.

 Now this is muffins as I said, but we've chosen the more conventional camp style of a cake

 Now, in a real cooking show, I would just place this aside and come up with the already

 But, since this isn't a real cooking show, you'll have to bear with us as we mix it all

 Now, I'm going to put in a couple of handfuls of chocolate chips.

 This isn't going to take long to bake either because it's not going to be a very thick

 Remember back at the beginning of the show we started with mixing the mix and the chocolate

 Well it was on the reflector oven and here's the finished product in about 15-20 minutes.

 Kaila's got pepperoni and mushrooms on hers and cheese and we have zucchini, mushrooms,

 We have from just a package where I had to add water and knead it and roll it in oil.

 And we're going to show you the best way to pull your napkins from the laundry, not the

 in the washing machine or hand wash them is to wash them on a delicate cycle, preferably

 with laundress or some other type of detergent that's quite gentle to your linen.

 napkins out of your dryer or off of your dryer line just before they're completely dry.

 when they're just a bit damp, that's when you can press them with a very hot iron.

 don't want to use any kind of starch because that actually starts to break down your fibers.

 And using any kind of harsh abrasive detergents will also break down your fibers.

 give it a little bit of steam just to get those extra wrinkles out.

 way to store them is to either lay them flat or if you're not ready to have them pressed,

 you can certainly put them into a bag in the refrigerator or the freezer to keep them nice

 Sometimes if you have a bit of an extra wrinkle that just wants to not come out, just give

 I typically fold my napkins and then steam over them just to give it a nice crisp line.

 And this of course would be if you're entertaining, you can certainly press them before or you

 This works quite well with all linen napkins or with a linen blend.

 Hey guys and today I'm going to be showing you how to make a Lego Yoshi

I also made a video on how to make this so you can check that out

In this video, I'll show you how to make an anti-aging face mask at home

 So this anti-aging face mask gives an instant firming, lifting and tightening effect to your skin

 So the ingredients that you need to prepare this anti-aging mask you require is

 But a few banana and papaya slices and then you require this honey

 And then you require this essential oil that is grapefruit essential oil or

 Orange essential oil so this essential oil or any one essential oil you can use

 This is optional just in case you want to avoid the smell of the egg.

 And suppose for those who don't like to use egg, we can use thick milk

 So now what I'm going to do is I will blend all these ingredients into a smooth paste

 So what you will need is a flathead insulated screwdriver, you don't need an insulated one,

 What you need to do is get the flat screwdriver, open it up, both sides, clip them open, put

 the back over there, well just put it over there, get the front, clip it off and you

 And I've taken all of the buttons out and removed all of that and then there should

 be a capacitor here and there should be two prongs coming out on the circuit board next

 What I've done is either you can solder the two wires onto it or get some sellotape and

 Ok then what you do is you get the front bit and then you should see the two wires come

 out down here and then you put it through that little groove bit which is a little hole

 and then you put the top on, the back on as you can see and then that clips quite nicely

 Then you put the battery in and you just spark it like that, like so.

 So we've got the battery in, all we need to do now is turn it over and all we have to

 Hi guys, we're in the kitchen today and I'm going to make oat milk.

 I would go towards nut milk, coconut milk for weight loss drink in a protein smoothie

 I would recommend this for anyone who doesn't have a weight problem.

 This is a good transition milk from formula or breast milk when they turn a year old,

 Now my baby is gluten free and if you want a gluten free oat milk, then you'll have to

 Oats are naturally gluten free, they just get contaminated either in the field or in

 So even if you get an organic oat, they can still be contaminated with gluten.

 So you just want to make sure that it has certified gluten free on the oats.

 Today I'm just going to take one liter of water and one cup of oats and a nut milk bag.

 My nut milk bag is a paint strainer that I got at Ace Hardware and it was like $1.29

 Go ahead and pre-measure out your water in the container that you're going to use.

 Next we're going to get one cup of oats and just pour it in the blender.

 Alright, just put your nut milk bag inside the container that you're going to use.

 I'm not even going to refrigerate this because he's going to drink this entire jug today.

 This bread was still steaming in the package, Italian twist bread, yum!

 I'm going to get it and bake it at the deli at the local grocery store.

 So I'm going to get this out of here, put it in a Ziploc and get it marinating.

 We're going to just slap it with your mama and put it on a grill.

 So I got the gas burner lid underneath and it's going to light that charcoal up.

 Now what I got here is some slap your mama from them people over in Ville Platte that

 See it's brown on the edges from that Bacchan brown sugar marinade, but cooked well and

 It's going to continue cooking wrapped in foil and the temperature is going to continue

 This is the finished roast and I'm going to transfer it into this pan or plate with the

 If you guys want to see how to get this look, then please continue to watch!

 Hey guys, so today we're going to be doing Honey Swamp from Monster High.

 And that's not like a smear above my lashes and my crease, that's definitely glitter.

 So I'm going to start by using my NYX Jumbo Eye Pencil in Milk and just putting that all

 And now using my Aichi's Girl Spoiled Rich Palette from MAC, I'm going to be using those

 I'm going to be putting that all over my lid, just the plummy color.

 Now with my Too Faced Summer Eyes Palette, I'm going to be using the color Plumeria.

 I'm going to be putting that in my crease and my transition zone and just blending that in.

 You don't want to get it on our brow bone, but we don't want to put it wherever.

 And now using my Urban Decay Ecstasy color, it's a frosty purple.

 And now I'm just going to tight rim with my black Urban Decay Zero Liner my top and bottom lashes.

 And now using my blue glitter that my friend Deanna gave me, I'm going to be putting that

 And when you get to the tip there of the eye, the inner corner of the eye, you're going

 You might have to layer the glitter a little bit to get it to show up.

 I just didn't want to show it because I did it like several times.

 Just to make sure the glitter is like very vibrant and everything like that.

 And now I'm going to put on my false lashes with my duo adhesive.

 And then the blue I kind of added in as kind of like a nice touch.

 And now with my All Make It Up and Grow mascara, I'm just going to do my bottom lashes.

 And then I'm going to glue my real lashes and my fake lashes together.

 I don't remember what color I used but I'm just basically covering up my red spots and everything like that.

 Just to see how I'd like it because honey is kind of like a green blue mix.

 Don't forget to get it in your hairline if you're wearing a wig and stuff like that.

 You can add in some cheekbones if you'd like but I liked how the shadows were just looking on my face at that moment.

 So I just put on a base color which is my Saint Germain color from MAC.

 And I just took an angled brush and I started to draw the teeth.

 It was really fun to do a character that just came out and everything like that.

 And if you have any suggestions, leave them in the comments down below.

 Cover it and cook it on low flame for 4-5 minutes till beans are half cooked.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make a classic English scone, perfect for an afternoon or cream tea

 and I'm going to show you a slightly different method to normal, something you'd normally see in a hotel or a restaurant.

 The first thing we need to do is put some hot water over our fruit, this time currants.

 It plumps up the fruit, it stops it from being burnt as it bakes and it also just gives you a much nicer feel in the end product.

 So we're just going to leave that to sit and soak for a while while we make the mix.

 So what we have is some plain flour and a little bit of salt and to that we're going to add some baking powder.

 And then what we're going to do is add our butter and just rub it in until you can't really see any chunks of butter anymore.

 And the reason we use the tips of our fingers is they're the coldest part of the hands,

 so if you rubbed it between your palms you'd melt the butter and you wouldn't get a lighter scone then,

 So when you can't feel any lumps of butter anymore that means you've rubbed it in nice and fine.

 So we can add our caster sugar in there and just stir that through with your hands.

 So we're going to crack three eggs into our milk and just use a fork just to break that up and mix that together so it's nicely combined.

 Then you're going to take the liquid, pour that in along with our fruit as well.

 I was taught as a kid that you had to be really careful and not touch this mixture at all

 However, I spent some time at Le Manoir, which is Raymond Blanc's restaurant down in Oxford,

 So what you're going to do is mix it until you have a nice batter.

 Dust the surface quite liberally with quite a lot of flour because this is a very, very sticky dough.

 Flour the top of the dough as well so it doesn't stick to your hands.

 What you're going to do is just very lightly fold it so you're not pressing, you're not kneading,

 you're just incorporating air and you're just looking for a really smooth dough.

 And if you find it is sticking, just add a little bit more flour.

 And when you find it's just becoming nice and smooth and uniform, then you can stop.

 we just need to clean down the surface so it doesn't stick as we roll it out.

 lightly flour your surface so it doesn't stick as you roll it out.

 What we're going to do is dip it in flour and that way it won't stick as we cut our scones.

 it's going to kind of jar the surface so it all screws up on the side

 Once you're down on the surface, you can give it a little twist then

 try not to disturb it and place it onto our baking tray like so.

 And then what we're going to do is we're going to leave the scones

 Once you have cut all the scones out, you can very lightly re-knead the rest of the dough.

 You won't get as nice a finish on those ones but they'll still taste delicious.

 So if you look at this one, you can see that you've got a slightly wider part of the base.

 And all that does is when it bakes, you get that slightly more hotel look,

 So try not to get this onto the sides of the scone, just on the top.

 If you don't have any more eggs, you can do this with a bit of milk if you want.

 we can pop those in the oven for about 15 minutes until they're nice and golden.

 So you can take a scone, and technically you should never cut a scone.

 Take a spoonful of the clotted cream and then onto the scone like that.

 So there's our classic scone, perfect for a cream tea or afternoon tea.

 leave me a comment, like or subscribe, and I'll do my best to make a video that you want to see.

 It's one adapted from one of my books, and it's really, really easy.

 and then some light brown sugar, eggs, and a little bit of caster sugar.

 And you get this delicious, rich, but also light at the same time chocolate cake.

 Hi, Carol Fitzgerald here once again with VeganRecipesForHealth.com.

 Today we're going to make a vegan, no oil, orange vinaigrette salad dressing.

 In some parts of the country they are only in season in winter.

 And run this around your orange all the way and you will get wonderful strips of this

 Just slice off the ends and then peel all the way and take most of that white from the

 So anyway, we've got half to three quarters of a cup of ice water here.

 And again, we just slam our knife into the pit, twist it, and it comes out very easily.

 If you want your dressing a little more liquidy than creamy, then cut down on the water.

 So okay, we have the half of an avocado in there and two medjool dates.

 As I mentioned, I can't actually demonstrate how to do that zest because I'm on my own

 This is the zest that you get when you take it off the orange like that.

 And I think the whole orange and the zest is a lot more flavorful than orange juice

 Save some of the jars that you buy, whatever, if you buy mayonnaise or vegan mayonnaise

 You can see the flecks of the date in there to give it a little bit of sweetener.

 Thank you so much for watching and I'll be back with another video soon.

 I'm going to show you guys what the inside of an automotive AC compressor looks like.

 First I had to remove, first we start out at the clutch and there was just a single

 So if your clutch bearing goes bad and is making a lot of noise, it's this bearing right

 Here's your electromagnet right here and this is what energizes the clutch and makes it

 Down in there, there was another snap ring but I don't think I needed to remove it.

 So upon removal of the bolts, you can remove the back and the front plate.

 And then there's a reed valve plate right here that probably comes off as well.

 This is actually a six piston, technically, because there's three pistons on the other

 But anyway, when this piston goes down, you'll see that the reed valve, like the tip of this

 one, covers up this hole so it'll suck freon in and then it'll discharge it out this one.

 But this little metal plate just keeps it from opening too much and snapping off.

 So there's a plate in the middle that's going to, I believe it's called swashplate, but

 it's going to be at an angle and be rotating in there and eccentric or something to that

 And then we got our three pistons that just ride up and down as this rotates.

 Just a quick video on what's inside an automotive AC compressor.

 This is the video review for Transformers Alternators Grimlock.

 Again, if you look on the side you can see his energy sword there.

 And it's the same type of in his forearms, same kind of thing as on Tracks legs.

 There's just a couple little pegs that alternate back and forth as you push one wheel,

 And back here you want to lift up this and extend the bumper out.

 And that's going to let you take his legs and flip them right back and around.

 Split them and then you want to flatten the seats out to be his feet.

 And under here you want to get, this is where it gets tricky, his arms kind of come out here.

 Slide them out and then bring his hands around so the wheels are outside of the forearms.

 And we'll bring it down so it's even with this black piece right here.

 You want to pull this whole thing away from the, from the back there.

 Flip that all the way around and then you want to push his head.

 And slide the, and just put the hood, the roof back into place.

 And then there's a couple tabs here that are going to click onto this little silver piece

 You see those tabs and those tabs and then lock those right into place right there.

 We'll give him, again, he's got little pegs on his gun that he can hold in his hand.

 So make sure you're facing it the right way when you're sticking it in his hand.

 Hey, it's Keith, and today's trick tip is going to be the impossible.

 You could do it rolling with an ollie pop, or you could just do it stationary from the

 You know, if you're just learning the trick, you want to do it by some grass, maybe have

 Okay, in order to do the trick, I put my foot parallel on the deck, on the back foot.

 My front foot's going to be also parallel right underneath the nose of the board, just

 Once I'm up in this position, I'm going to do the scissor rotation like this, just to

 At that time, my feet are going to come off, and the board's going to stay up.

 Okay, today we're going to remove our rear wheel on my old Fuji 10-speed.

 First thing you've got to do is loosen up your bolts on the back and I'm going to replace

 I've got the rims on line for $75 front and rear, made in the USA.

 So you want to loosen up your bolts on both sides, I've got most everything loose already.

 Sometimes you might have to make sure your brake is loose or it won't pull out of the rim.

 When you're doing this you want to be careful that you don't lose your bearings on the inside of this.

 My new wheel is all sealed so you don't have to worry about it.

 Then you can take a standard 1 inch wrench, hold it down and just go backwards with it.

 If for some reason it doesn't work that way you can always put that in a vice and turn the wheel.

 You got to hold that with a screwdriver to get it to come loose.

 If you don't use a screwdriver on the inside then it will just keep spinning on itself.

 A lot of times you can fit 5, 6 and 7 will all fit on a free wheel hub.

 So when you go to get a wrench make sure you get one for the right application.

 Now is when you need to be careful you don't lose your bearings.

 Now all I have to do is take the tire and I've replaced the rim.

 Hey everybody, today I'm going to make a very quick and simple low calorie meal for one.

 This is like egg beaters, you can use that as well, over regular eggs.

 You're not working with the yolk, so that takes out a lot of the calories, plus it's

 And when it's nice and lightly whipped, I've got a cast iron pan here.

 You can make any kind of egg you want, but I like scrambled, so in they go.

 The egg substitute, the egg beater type stuff, really does a great job.

 Very satisfying, very filling, and the protein sticks with you.

 It takes a little longer to break down and absorb, so feel fuller longer.

 So what I'm going to do is, again, I'm not using any oil or anything.

 I'm just going to put the tortilla shell in here, the tortilla in here,

 just to heat it up a bit, make it a little more pliable and flexible.

 With that just warmed up, you can actually turn your stove off.

 It's going to give you some nice protein there to work with throughout the day.

 I'm going to go ahead and put the entire thing in because it's good for me.

 And calorie count, you can get this at any Target, is 50 calories per cheese stick.

 And the hot sauce is very good because it gives you a lot of flavor and a lot of intensity.

 And it increases the circulation in your stomach, which means you're burning more calories because you're eating it.

 And zero calories for the hot sauce. Enjoy folks. Happy and healthy eating.

 Today we're going to do a really easy and beautiful half up hairstyle.

 You can do it while you're errand running, you can wear it to the office, while you're hanging out with the girls, or even if you're just bonging at home.

 So I promise you it's really easy to do and I know you're going to love it.

 Okay, so the first thing we're going to do is create a little bit of body at the top of your head.

 And you're just going to take hair just around this crown part of your head and just start backcombing it so that you create just some more volume there.

 Just going to do a little bit back here underneath that top part of the crown.

 So once you look like you are an 80's diva, it is time to get started with the next part of this hairstyle.

 You can see my hair just looks kind of crazy right now, but we're going to cover it all up.

 And what you're going to do is you're just going to take this front hair, which you shouldn't have teased,

 and you're going to bring it backward and you're just going to start creating a half ponytail.

 I'm just going to comb that back with my fingers very gently because I don't want to remove any of that tease that I've done.

 And I have some still on the top, so I'm going to go ahead and comb that backward.

 It's nothing extreme, but it's enough to give you a little bit of oomph.

 I mean, this depends on how big of a braid you're going to want to sweep to the back,

 I like the look of a really tiny braid too, like really tiny and tight.

 And you're just going to braid it down and keep braiding and braiding.

 You want to make sure that the two braids are pretty similar in size on either side.

 And I'm going to tuck it underneath here and secure with a pin.

 so what I'm going to do is I'm going to take a piece of braided hair again

 So how I'm going to do that is just take a tiny little section of hair

I think it would look great any kind of way in any kind of hair.

 Hey there, I want to share with you an exciting new product called the Citrus Singer.

 The Citrus Singer is a water bottle that creates great tasting, healthy drinks on the go while

 The Citrus Singer allows you to press citrus fruits into the bottom of the bottle, infusing

 The rind, seeds, and pulp are kept at the bottom for further steeping.

 Today I'm going to make orange lime water, but as you can imagine, there are many other

 The first step is to unscrew the base and place the Citrus Singer on its head.

 If you'd like to add an herb such as mint or a fruit such as strawberry, go ahead for

 For a more intense flavor, press more than one citrus fruit into the citrus press.

 Also, you don't have to leave the citrus half in the bottom of the cup if you don't want

 I will press one full orange and discard it, and then press half of a lime and leave it

 Next, screw back on the bottom of the cup tightly to create a good seal.

 Now remove the top cap, add cold water and ice if you'd like, seal tightly, and shake

 Since it's citrus, the juice flavors instantly, and I'm ready to go.

 After I'm finished with my first drink, I refill the bottle with more water, shake it

 I simply flick the ingredients from the base cup into the trash and rinse.

 The Citrus Singer is made of BPA-free Triton plastics, fits in a cup holder, and is perfect

 It's easy to use and a fun way to add more water and nutrition in your life.

 For more recipes and ideas, go to zinganything.com slash recipe.

 So, pulling your knees down into the surface, you're using the hip flexors.

 My right side feels a little more, gives a little more sensation, that painful sensation.

 The way you adjust is, one way is do more with the left and less with the right?

 And you may notice that causes your head to shift position slightly to one side.

 The purpose of the head shift is simply to be able to get the left and right hip flexors matched.

So, now that you've got that movement rehearsed, let's add the next part of that action pattern.

 So, in this action pattern, you pull your knees into the surface, cause your butt to rise,

 And now lift your head slowly off your hands until you feel your back tighten.

So, now you connect the sensation at your groin to the sensation in your back.

 And the way you make that connection is by regulating the amount of effort

 And then, in this movement, I want to remind you to let go completely between repetitions.

 And lift until the amount of sensation in your back from lifting

 That makes it possible to feel like they're connected to each other.

 Let your legs go so that you have to find that working position afresh.

 that you're feeling pressure on the same location on each foot.

 gradually pull the knees into the surface so that your groin lifts up.

 And then slowly lift your head and equalize the hip flexors with the back muscles.

 And then you slowly lower your head, forehead onto your hands to complete rest.

 And then lift your head and match the back effort to the groin effort.

 You're going to feel how the groin effort goes to the low back.

 you have the mid back and you connect the low back to the mid back.

 And you'll feel a pull that goes straight down the front of your trunk.

 If you're pressing your forehead, it will actually flatten your back some.

 You press your forehead against your hands and your pubic bone against the table.

 And feel the connection between your head action and your pubic bone action.

 On the bottom, right down here, there's a rope running the length of it.

 The rope is what I use to attach the bottom of the blind to, the bottom of the matting.

 Just throw a few screw eyes through the boat, run the rope through there, pull it tight

 What I did to get maximum usage out of them, I just threw on some of this prairie grass.

 It's got a few different colors, brown, green, and it's got this faded grass color.

 All I did was buy all standard raw colored grass and I dyed it.

 Go get some dye at the store, mix up a few gallons of boiling water, and just put the

 grass in it, leave it soak overnight, take it out, let it dry, and you can mix up the

 You're getting kind of faded now from usage, but it blends in really well.

 There's a little trick to that too, and I'll show you that in a second here.

 I usually, when they're new, I'll have the mats run from the bottom all the way up to

 I put the flippers down, fasten it on there, so that way it's a little bit loose here when

 But it just all blends in and I can break up the outline a little bit with the grass

 That's another nice thing too about using these, when we put these up over the top,

 It gives that little bit of up and down, just breaks up the outline.

 I don't have any brown in here, but it just breaks up the outline, hides the hunter, does

 Grass mats, you can buy them, Cabela's, Fleet Farm, if you're from our area.

 We just opened this one up to use it the last few days of the season here.

 What I do early season, when I use new mats, I take them out of the bundle, unroll them,

 Don't worry about it, because after you stand them up and you use them for a little while,

 But Cabela's, you can cut it and you can tie it off and it won't unravel.

 So when I cut it, I have to take zip ties and zip tie it every few inches onto a rope

 I'm just going to lift her up, put in my little bracket, put my end brackets on.

 Alright, so I want to demonstrate using primitive tools, a mallet and a machete, how to split

 a cylindrical comb from bamboo and make it into little strips so that they can be used

 So utilizing a nice sharp machete, for our purposes here we're going to be splitting

 them in fours, so we split it down the middle first, and having a little workhorse helps

 So then you've got a half, and then again, you cut that in half, keeping sure to try

 So now that you've split your half, you're going to want to cut the other half in half.

 Once you've split your half, you have a nice strip, just like this.

 Now the advantage to using bamboo is because, due to the long vascular bundles that are

 nice and uniform, you can create nice and uniform strips and utilize them for all sorts

 of things, such as constructing houses or fending up fences, or anything else you need

 What we've got here, my name is Todd Edwards from Only Latte Coffee.

 We've got a little bit of a ghost pepper challenge for Aaron today.

 What I'm going to do here is I'm going to just start kicking things off.

 We've got our ghost pepper chili powder and I'm obviously handling it with care with gloves.

 Then we're also going to be topping it off with a ghost pepper salt.

 Just because I like Aaron a lot, we're going to go ahead and allow for a little bit of

 caramel in there just to give it a little bit more flavor to it.

 Today I'm actually, because I can't find my goggles, my safety goggles, because safety

 first, we're going to go ahead and throw it down with my sunglasses because I can't find

 I don't have a mask with me, but I probably recommend dealing with it when you're dealing

 We're doing this in real time when the carts open, so you might have some passers by here

 This is super dangerous stuff, so I want to make sure that we're keeping all protected

 And then one last thing, I'm going to finish it off nice and neat.

 I know that Todd also had to tend to some customers because he is a very popular cart

 I don't want you to lose all of that because that's great stuff.

 It's going to start kicking in a little bit more in a little bit.

 You can see I'm starting to also salivate because of the spice.

 If you like it, give a thumbs up, share, subscribe, comment below.

 But otherwise, you can find us on every social media that's out there available for you.

 I look rough because I don't have any makeup on, but who cares?

 My first one was how to tie a scarf, how to make a scarf out of a bow.

 Well now I'm going to show you guys how to make a bow using weave.

 This is a very fun look if you have little kids, little babies.

 This would be a real cute wear for the prom or when you want to have a little date with

 If you guys want to see how I created this look, please stay tuned.

 All you got to do is just brush your hair up and put in a half ponytail like this or

 Okay first you're going to do, what you're going to do is just brush that out real good

 Now this is very optional, but I'm going to spray some hairspray on it to keep that hold.

 You don't have to do that, but I'm going to put it on there just to show you guys how

 Okay, you want to take it, just make sure to really get all the naps out.

 Then get your Barbie pin and stick that on, excuse my hair ladies, right there.

 Now you're going to take the other side and do the same thing you did to that one as well.

 You're going to flip this one backwards like that, kind of like that.

 Okay, then you get your other Barbie pin and place that right there to secure it.

 You're probably going to need about a couple of Barbie pins for this.

 I got two packs of hair in this, so it's going to be a little bit thick.

 Okay, when you get done placing the Barbie pins in, it's going to look like this.

 Okay, now that piece that y'all had left out right here, y'all going to take this, take that,

 Barbie pins come out, and just wrap that, split that hair, like so.

 Then you're going to take it and just wrap it and tuck it underneath there.

 Now, when you get done, and then put a Barbie pin, of course, to hold it.

 Okay, now when you're done with that, you're just going to kind of tease and flather it

 I'm going to put another Barbie pin in it to secure it real good.

 Actually, to be honest, this is my first time ever really doing it, so yay me.

 I hope you guys will try this look out on your little daughters, on yourself.

 Still got to get a little bit better, but this is how I create my bow.

 I don't know how anybody else do it, but this is how Black Diamond, TMG, does it.

 All you guys, I mean, every time I upload a video, y'all constantly, constantly on it,

 You guys keep me motivated, and I really do appreciate that from the bottom of my heart.

 I subscribed to this young lady, and she's doing a weight loss.

 She's exercising, so I'm going to be doing ... I'm going to leave her link at the bottom,

 She kind of motivated me to get back in the groove of doing my weight journey again.

 She's been doing what, actually, the little ... a thousand punches.

 It's kind of funny, because I have to play the over and over again, because every time she hit 20,

 I got to replay it over and over again, so that's all I hear for an hour, 20.

 I'm going to be updating you guys about my weight loss journey.

 Hello, my name is John Snyder with Stouffers of Kissel Hill Garden Centers.

 Today I wanted to talk to you a little bit about enjoying your outdoor living space with

 This fire pit kit that we carry here at Stouffers comes with everything that you need to start

 It comes with 72 of these munich wall blocks right here to make your circle around there.

 It comes with a steel ring insert on the inside, four bags of sand to put down in the

 Very importantly it comes with a spark arrestor which some townships require which will make

 The first thing you're going to do is excavate the ground around here and make sure you get

 The first run of block as you can see here, you do want to have below grade just a little

 Get your first circle in place and then take this steel ring that comes with the kit and

 Once you set that steel ring in there, you're able to then pull that back out and start

 Your second course, you want to stagger so that half of the block is on each side of

 the joint on the bottom one and do that as you go up staggering.

 Some people will recommend that as you put the one course on and you put a retaining

 If I were doing it, I probably wouldn't in case I ever wanted to move it, but you can.

 After you get everything in place here, the bags of sand are what come next and you put

 All that's going to do is make sure that we've got a good base for the fire there.

 The next piece is after you put the steel ring in to install the grill cover here, which

 This piece up here, the spark arrestor, does not come assembled, so there is a little bit

 of screwing that you have to do to put that together, but it's very simple.

 It's got a nice hinge here that comes over top so that you're nice and safe.

 That is pretty much all you need to know, but if you have any further questions, feel

 free to stop in at Stauffer's and ask any one of us and we'll be happy to help you out.

 rock a red lip when you have fair skin that's prone to blotchiness.

 the skin with a good base of foundation and concealer to cover any blotchiness, flaws

Orange based lipsticks look more flattering on skin that's prone to blotchiness,

 and then apply a little foundation around the lip line to ensure you have a really good

 in the centre of your lip line and then join up from the outside to the centre.

 out, joining up with the lip line, ensuring that you don't go over the top of the lip

So the key to rocking a red lipstick when you have either pale or blotchy

 skin is to number one, always wear a foundation and concealer and number two, opt for a red

 Today on this video I'm going to show you how to fix a TRS plug.

 That's your normal headphone plug that you find on headphones that don't have any extra

 However, I've had a lot of questions about replacing the broken headphone plug with a

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to cut the wire off and I'm going to solder or just bound

 You're going to see in the upper left corner of your screen there's a hyperlink to the

 That plug is a little bit more complicated than this normal one.

 For headphones with a microphone you'll see the hyperlink in the upper left corner of

 But this video is just the tip, ring, sleeve, the normal TRS plug.

 This is probably the most important step of the video and I can't emphasize this more.

 You're going to burn the enamel coating off with a lighter or a match.

 Make sure that you're careful wire lighting it because it will travel along with the wire.

 You're also going to need a piece of sandpaper to help get that enamel coating off as well

 You're also going to need some isopropyl alcohol just to wipe it clean.

 You want to make sure you put this on because you don't want any cross connection between

 So let's get this started and I'll show you how to take your broken set of headphones

 That way we make sure that we get any short that's occurring in this wire.

 And then also you're going to take 5-6 inches of your good wire and we do this so that you

 That way if you have to redo the connection you can cut it off and have some more wire

 Here we have the Sony headphones that I'm trying to repair, the black wire, with the

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to use my wire strippers, strip off this rubber coating

 on the outside of each of these wires and expose the wires that are within each of their

 I've showed this in my other videos but I think I'll just reiterate it because this

 You're going to take the red wire or your color, any of the wires actually, you're going

 to separate it out and then all you do is just take the lighter and just burn the very

 Make sure that you keep a good amount of this insulation on here because you don't want

 It's a good idea only to do the first quarter inch to half inch leaving this red enamel

 So I'm just going to do it one more time just to get a little bit more off.

 And then I'm going to take some sandpaper and again very lightly because these wires

 And you should start to see the copper kind of showing through underneath.

 And then what I do once that's kind of exposed, I take a paper towel with some isopropyl alcohol,

 Remember to do this on the copper colored wires as well, the ground wires.

 Even though they're copper colored and you can see they're kind of shiny there, they

 And you do the same thing, just use some sandpaper, take that soot off because that'll prevent

 Make sure you do that to every wire that you're going to be working with, that way you get

 Okay so I cut the wires in half and I split up the wires that were inside each of them.

 The iPod earbuds, this is just the TRS plug, you can see there's a tip, ring, sleeve, and

 Of course Apple always makes things a little bit more, it's a little bit better quality,

 On the right hand side of your screen you'll see a red wire, that's your right earbud.

 And then on the top here that I just spun around, this little V here of copper, there's

 a red and green striped wire on the right hand side, that's a ground.

 What's nice is that Apple has two grounds, one for each earbud, but they don't make them

 I'm not really sure why, I guess that way you know which one goes to which earbud.

 In our case it doesn't matter, you just keep these two together.

 So make sure when you do that you're connecting three wires, the red, the green, and then

 We're going to be connecting this to a Sony pair of headphones, so I'm taking the Apple

 earbuds and I'm connecting it to a Sony pair, which also have a very similar setup, which

 The Sony plug has two wires, they're like, I don't know if you can see, I'm splitting

 And on the right side you'll see that there is a red wire on the right here, and then

 And then on the left, for the left earbud, we have a green wire all the way on the left

 And then this is the ground for the right earbud and then this is the sound for the

 So that means that you can take these two center copper wires, after you remove the

 enamel coating, remember to remove the enamel coating from copper colored wires because

 And I'm just going to wrap them together to make kind of like a trident in the middle.

 So see how I have the copper's in the middle, our green wire, which is our left, is on your

 left, the middle is the two grounds, and on the right is the red, or the right earbud.

 And I'm just going to connect them to the Apple earbud the same way, red to red, green

 to green, and then the green and red striped one on the Apple earbud, with the copper from

 the Apple earbud, I'm just going to twist those together, not to confuse anyone, that's

 your ground, and you're going to connect that to the copper ground in the Sony.

 Next we'll do the green wire, and then put that off to the side, and then finally the

 So now all three of those are together, then what's a good idea is to make sure you don't

 have any stray wires coming out, if you do just cut them off, break them into three like

 this, wrap each of these in electrical tape, one, two, three, that way they don't touch

 each other, and then you can simply flatten it out once the electrical tape is on there,

 and then give another layer of electrical tape on top to give it a nice finished look.

 Before you do that though, it would be a good idea to test them out, make sure that they're

 If you have any questions feel free to comment below, just remember that every manufacturer

 is going to be a little different, they might have slightly different colors, if they do

 Thanks again for watching Rich's Methods, I'll see you on YouTube, bye!

For today's tutorial I did a very colorful eye look and a little

I love them, they are so affordable and a lot of the high end eyeshadow palettes

 that are out there you can most likely duplicate the looks with these palettes.

 will like this colorful eye look and let's go ahead and get started.

 off by taking Maybelline's Color Tattoo in Nude Pink for my eye base.

 I'm going to start off with this eyelid shade and I'm going to take Zoeva's 228 Crease brush

 and I'm going to use this shade for the transition all the way to the inner corner and outer

 I'm going to take this brow bone shade and I'm going to apply this right at our crease

 to focus this right on top of the eyelid staying beneath that transition.

I'm now going to use Blue Had Me At Hello palette and use this silver eyelid

 shade and only focusing this right on the eyelid without going above the crease.

 now going back into Comfort Zone palette and I'm going to use this shade down below using

Taking it to the center and I'm not going to bring it down and cover

 Now taking a clean blending brush I'm just going to blend that out.

 I'm now going to take Crown C433 blending brush and I'm just going to use a matte white

Going back in with Blue Had Me at Hello palette and I'm going to take an angled eyeshadow

I'm going to take this aqua eyelid shade and I'm going to place this from the

 to just place that right at the inner corner of the eye going a little bit up and at the

 I'm just going to take a little bit of the same eyeshadow and I'm just going to take

 a little bit of the same eyeshadow and I'm just going to take a little bit of the same

 I wanted to let you guys know that today I did film a review and demo on this Youthful

 Wear Spotless Foundation from Physicians Formula and kind of, I don't know if I like it or

 This is my second time trying it out but look out for that review and demo.

 And also today I did finally film my updated eyebrow routine and also how I contour and

 I'm going to be busy editing and hopefully getting them up one every day so look out

 Thank you guys so much and I will see you guys very, very soon.

 If you see, they're very compact, very small beans here, but we have soaked them overnight.

 Regular water, just... When you're trying to sprout anything, if you soak the beans

 cheesecloth over our pot, and we're going to go ahead and put our soaked beans in here.

 the fact that you have never done it, and you haven't seen anybody do it.

 this will take the fear out of it, and you'll be sprouting so fast.

 to take the ends of our cheesecloth, and just kind of tie them together tightly like this.

 like to keep mine in the oven, simply because it's undisturbed, and there's no draft or

It needs to be a room temperature or warm setting for them to actually

And the whole point of sprouting, we're fooling these beans into thinking that

 it from the glass to the steel one, so that there's no light going in.

And if it looks like it's drying out, just take a little bit of water

This is the kala chana, the garbanzo beans, there's a black variety, that's what

And anything which comes in a whole, you know, with two sides attached,

 I'm here to show you exactly how effective the AquaSana drinking water filter is at removing

 I'm going to add a chemical to it called OTL, which is commonly used to tell exactly how

 To take it to a little bit more of an extreme, I'm going to add some bleach into this municipal

 tap water, which will increase the overall chlorine level in it.

 So you can see the municipal tap water that is common in a lot of municipalities has a

 In addition to the chlorine, what I'm going to do is add some dirt to demonstrate exactly

 how effective the filter is at removing particulates from your water as well.

 So what I'm going to do is pull some of that water through this sink to show you exactly

 The final step is to actually filter this water through the Aquasana drinking water

 When your package arrives, it will either be in the 1 pound container or in the 3 pound

 It's about the size of a cigarette pack for like $5 plus the shipping on it.

 There will also be a list in there explaining how to use the product and if you're watching

 This product in its dry state is non-combustible and non-flammable.

 When you're done, you can pour it into a glass container, cap it, seal it, keep it like you

 You need to get what's on the list, which will be at least two containers, one for holding

 I've got people out in Wyoming that are doing hundreds of deer sheds.

 Now this shed is one of Bruce Plummer's, of course, because it seems like all I'm using

 I'm not sure how long it was out there, but it's very white in some spots.

 We're going to start at the burr, because it's quite dark on the side that was probably

 down towards the ground, and just start changing the color just a little bit.

 If I don't think it's quite dark enough, I'll dip it back in and use it.

 I'm going to use it without much more of the activator on it, because that is what

 I started at the base and worked my way up through, just like with the wet formula.

 Some places where the mice have chewed it up might grab a little more color than other

 areas, and you can always make it lighter by dipping it back in the activator.

 Just touch up any areas that look like there might be a little bit of run to it.

 Now as it's darker here, I might want to bring this in a little darker.

 When it gets totally done and it's dried, if you want to go over it with a non-glossy,

 Otherwise, if you don't do anything with it, it'll be just like regular antler, but if

 you do want to lighten it, you can always go back, hit the activator, and go over it,

 I wouldn't want to be doing this in Mother's Kitchen, I'll tell you.

 This is quite small so it's not dried on the end like they usually are, because usually

 you spend enough time doing them so that they're dry by the time you're done.

 I said, well, that was the first one people do, they usually make way too dark.

 Now and then they call me and go, boy, it's really darker than I thought it was.

 I use straight activator and that brings the color right down so now it looks like a deer you'd shoot around here.

 I've got a run that's coming down the back because I've got a little bit too much activator on it.

 I'm shipping it right now anywhere in the lower 48 and in Canada.

 You can check us out on Facebook at Deer Antler Magic on Facebook.

 We are using less quantity of garlic because already Schezwan sauce also have garlic.

 We have served the Schezwan rice and we have sprinkled some spring onions on the top.

Today I thought I'd share with you my makeup routine that I usually do when I'm

I don't really wear makeup every day, but I'll probably wear it maybe once

 a week or when I'm filming or if there's any special occasion when I'm going out.

 I was a teenager, when I was growing up and I just started using makeup, all my friends

 used to do makeup together in front of the mirror and the toilet at school and so on.

 this is kind of my first time doing it in public and showing it to the whole world.

 and I also apply it under my eyes, as a concealer, under my jaw, everywhere really.

 And if you have dry and flaky skin, this is a perfect way to apply it.

 circular motions, you can simply tap in downward motions and this will keep all the flakes

 Next I use a pointed foundation brush by Real Techniques and the same foundation powder

I don't have to buy a separate concealer and it works really well.

 Next I use my Isadora eyeshadow palette in Bohemian Rhapsody and I use this fair skin

 colour with just a random shading brush that I had and I apply it to my inner corners and

 the inner half of the eye just to highlight it and make it brighter.

 buy it in all the Scandinavian countries in Eastern Europe, I think, in the US as well.

 Next I also apply some of that cream shade under my eyebrows to highlight them.

 I use the golden shade and apply that with my finger to the other outer half of my eye

 a blending brush and just tidy up the edges, the corner of my eyeshadow.

Next I use an angled brush and use the darkest colour which is kind of a really dark

 chocolate brown, almost black with golden flecks and I use that to define my outer half

 of my eye and just do a little flick on the outside corner and I do the same on the bottom

 lashes and make sure the flick follows the lash line, the low lash line.

Next I take a pencil brush and I just blend out the edges of that

I just don't like any harsh lines, I always like to blend them out to

No problem, I just take my pointed foundation brush and just dust it all off.

 and the same golden shade and I apply that to my two thirds of my outer lash line on

 the bottom and that will give me a bit of definition on the bottom as well.

 I take my Urban Decay brow box in Honey Pot and define my brows.

 a spoolie again just to blend everything and there you go, my eyes are done.

 take my Lilolo bronzing powder in Bondi Bronze and my powder brush from Real Techniques and

 still has some powder on it, so I just blend out the edges and make it blend in with the

 in Hibiscus and my stippling brush from Real Techniques and apply the blush just above

 and just blend out all the edges once again to make sure it's really blended and really

 Next we take the Burt's Bees tinted lip balm in Red Dahlia and this is my absolute favourite

 I hope that you enjoyed it and I know it's not totally natural, but I'm still in the

 process of transitioning to natural products for eyeshadows and brow products.

 know, it costs a lot of money and I don't like spending too much money on makeup and

 products on my skin because of my sensitive skin and acne issues.

 me know what you think of my first makeup tutorial and if you like it, then I might

 So a number of people have been commenting saying that I haven't posted a video for a while

 but the reason is because I've been at the beach for the past week.

 But being at the beach has inspired me to make this easy and quick hairstyle video.

 Obviously when you're at the beach, you don't want to take too much time getting ready

 because, you know, it's just a laid-back vacation type of thing.

 So here are three quick and easy hairstyles that I've got for you

 This first hairstyle is called the Shake and Go, which I actually got from a book.

 I kind of knew about the hairstyle, but I got the term Shake and Go from this book, which is in the description.

 For this hairstyle, we're trying to go for more of the natural look.

 So whichever way your hair grows, its natural wave, all those kind of factors,

 So basically we're just trying to take all the attributes that your hair has

 Basically, you just get all your hair wet and then towel-dry it.

 And since we're going for more of a natural look, I like using lighter products like a leave-in conditioner.

 The one that I'm using here is Hans De Foucault's Scheme Cream.

 but it's really supposed to work with the natural way that your hair grows.

 So I'm just going to take a scoop of this stuff, put it in my hands, and apply evenly all over my hair.

 And what shaking your head does, it just allows your hair to land in its natural position.

 So whichever way that your hair grows, also taking into consideration its thickness level and all that stuff,

 it basically just allows your hair to fall in its natural position.

 After this, I personally like to just tweak it a little bit with my hands, get it into a position that I prefer.

 So after my hair fully dries, this is what it looks like and I am good to go.

 All right, next up, this is even more simple than the first hairstyle

 because you don't even have to get your hair wet in the first place.

 So all I'm doing here, I'm starting out with dry hair and there's nothing in my hair.

 And what this is going to do, it's going to add a lot of texture and it's going to add a lot of volume to your hair.

 So I'm just going to take a little bit of this and I'm just going to apply it on my hair.

 And then I'm going to take a little bit of this and I'm going to apply it on my forehead.

 And this is going to add a lot of texture and it's going to add some definition into my hair.

 Just to make it look a bit more edgy and not so kind of flat or clumped together.

 What I've decided to use for this hairstyle is Joico Erratic Molding Clay.

 And there's a lot of other products that can be substituted instead of this one.

 it tends to be a bit more difficult to work it into your hair than if it's wet.

 So just keep that in mind and maybe you have to spend a little bit more time

 And after that I've got a lot of texture, some definition, some volume and I'm good to go.

 I'm going to start off by doing a little bit of a straightening.

 This is a Pulled Back Slickback Hairstyle for those of you who want to get the hair out of your face.

 Usually when I'm going for a slickback look, I use a blow dryer just to position my hair and get it all going back.

 But if you use the right products, you can achieve a slickback without blow drying in the first place.

 Like the first hairstyle, I'm going to start off with damp hair, towel dried.

 It goes into the hair super easy and it stays pliable so I can have a messy slickback all day long.

 And like always, evenly distribute in the hands and then get it all over your hair.

 You just want to make sure that you get an even coating throughout.

 Next, after this, I'm just going to take a fine tooth comb and I'm going to slick all my hair back.

 And this is just going to allow me to make sure that my hair is all going in the correct direction.

 That it's all going towards the back of my head and it's not leaving out any loose strands.

 After this, since I'm not going for a professional look, I'm just going to run my fingers through my hair.

 This is going to allow the product to kind of loosen up and for my hair to fall in a more natural position.

 Alright guys, good time to stop the video because it has seriously started raining.

 By the way, I have never announced this before in a video so I want to do that now.

 I have officially gotten a Hans DeFuco discount code that you guys can use for 15% off Hans DeFuco products at HansDeFuco.com

 And yeah, that's just going to give you 15% off your entire purchase.

 So yeah, I was really glad that I could arrange that and get that out to you guys.

 Just some quick, easy hairstyles that shouldn't take you more than two minutes to do.

 Like always, if you did find this video helpful, clicking the thumbs up button would be great.

 You should think about subscribing if you're new and I'll see you next time.

 make these delicious, delightful, and delectable double chocolate cookie balls without using

 a half a cup of milk, one small box of instant vanilla pudding, 8 ounces of semi-sweet baking

 up your cookies into fine crumbs using either a blender or a food processor.

 your cookie crumbs and find any large chunks and put them back into your blender or food processor

In a separate bowl, mix your pudding and milk and stir just until moistened.

Take your cookie dough and form it into one-inch balls until there's no more left.

 chocolate consistently melted without burning it and I don't have to worry about it hardening

Now go get your cookies out of the freezer and dip them one by one into your

While your cookies were in the refrigerator, you would have gotten your white

What you're going to do is you're going to take your white chocolate and drizzle it

I started off using a spoon to attempt to put excess over the top of my

 cookies, but I certainly didn't appreciate the way that they were looking.

I went and grabbed my old turkey injector and used it instead of a

 chocolate, put them back into the freezer until all of the chocolate is hard and set.

 These cookies make great gifts for teachers, friends, co-workers, or neighbors.

 Hello, my name is Laura and I'm here to show you how to make coffees.

 My classmate Lily is right behind the camera filming this video and we're doing this project

 Alright, so as we start we're going to show you how to make simple coffees.

 First of all I'll show you the actual machine, which is this one right here, which is a cafeteria

 Then there's the hot water dispenser, then there's the coffee maker and there's this

 Alright, so there's, let me show you what type of coffees we have.

 We have espresso, double espresso, coffee cream, coffee cream double, double, chalet, and then

 on the other side we have chalet double, double ristretto and double ristretto.

 First of all, in any situation, it doesn't matter what type of cup we use or what type

 We usually put two cups together if they're normal cups, coffee cups.

 This allows us to give the client a cup, a coffee with a warm cup that shows that it's

 So we just click here, coffee cream normal, and you can see, you can hear how the coffee

 And we have to see that that little foam that it's creating shows the good quality of the

 We take these smaller cups, since it's a small amount of coffee, we do the same thing.

 And since it's a smaller cup, we put less amount of water in there.

 Now that it's warm, we can put this down because it's flexible.

 If it's a double espresso, we usually put it in a normal cup of coffee.

 Alright, so there is, you can see how this can be pulled up and down.

 And also, if we're making a coffee in a taller glass, we can use this other way of getting

 the coffee, which is pulling that back so nothing gets dirty or anything like that.

 Alright, so finally, we're going to show you how to make our ristretto.

 Put it down again, take out the water, click to the second page, and we click here, double ristretto.

 The more times you click it, the more amounts of coffee you get.

 It's obviously not as much as a cup of creme, as you can see here.

 The double ristretto is almost half the amount of a cup of creme.

 But you can also see how it wouldn't fit in a small espresso cup.

 We did a carbon fiber wrap and I'm about to show you how to reinstall all the pieces.

 What you have to do is reattach the knobs to the back of the circuit board and then

 So after you've got the screws back in, you're going to turn the piece over and reinstall

 You just have to line them up to where they fit and then click them down.

 These cables attach to the heater diverter and the temperature control.

 You're going to click them in place and slide the cable part forward so that way it also

 And then you're going to install a small c-clip to hold it in place.

 Now you're ready to reinstall the 516th bolts that hold the heater controls in place.

 The 12 volt outlet and airbag light display are held in place by two Phillips heads located

 Next, the carbon wrap stereo is slid into place and attached by two more Phillips head

 Attach the vents with three more Phillips head screws and you're ready to reinstall

 All you have to do is reconnect the hazard light switch, snap it into place, and reinstall

 This trim panel attaches first at the glove box side and then just snaps into place in

 order to hide the screws that hold the stereo and the vents in place.

 We also installed a DICE Electronics iPod interface so that way the driver can control

 The cable is going to be located back here in the center console and it's going to allow

 you to keep your iPod charged and also control what tracks you're listening to from the display

 All we have to do now is go ahead and snap together the rest of the center console.

 All these parts just slide over each other and clip into place.

 This shifter handle is a nice finishing touch and looks good with the carbon fiber wrap.

 Hey guys, coming back at you with the last Super Bowl recipe for this year, and that

 I'm going to be using a fresh habanero, so consider yourself warned, alright?

 Watch how I handle this pepper in the video with gloves, and if you actually handle it

 with your bare hands, which I don't suggest you do, make sure you wash your hands thoroughly

 and don't put your hands in your face or in your eyes immediately after handling these

 peppers because you want to make sure that you don't burn your eyes and things like that

 The hot wing sauce is going to consist of a little bit of butter, lots of garlic, and

 And the wings are not going to be fried, they are going to be baked on a high temperature

 Alright everybody, so the first recipe consists of two ingredients.

 I'm going to go for about a tablespoon to a tablespoon and a half of seasoning per pound

 All you have to do is sprinkle it over, give it a good mix, and then we're going to put

 I'm placing the chicken on a rack, that way the hot air in the oven will be able to circulate

 around the chicken, giving us that crispy skin that we so love when we fry.

 And I'm just going really light on it because the hot wing sauce has the salt and the spice

 And I'm going to do the same thing and put the chicken on a rack, skin side up, so the

 What I wanted you to see was using this rack during the cooking process, the chicken doesn't

 And then all the fat has rendered down to the bottom of the pan.

 And notice I am wearing my gloves, that's because I am preparing to handle this habanero

 Remember that the seeds and ribs of a pepper on the inside, that is where the heat lives.

 If you want to tame the spice, take a little bit of it out just like you see me doing there.

 In a pan over medium low heat, I'm going to drop the butter, the garlic, and the habanero

 Doing this process slowly gives the garlic and the habanero a chance to infuse the butter.

 So while I have the butter and the garlic over here going in this pan, right next to

 it I have the hot wing sauce that's already simmering very low.

 Now I'm just going to slowly add our hot sauce to our butter and our garlic and habaneros.

 And the butter and garlic and habaneros have been turned off, that pan is off at this point.

 I'm just going to go ahead and add the hot sauce, give it a nice stir, and pour it directly

 You can smell all the spices in the hot sauce, the habanero, that garlic is really coming

 And you're just going to pour that over the wings and give them a great toss.

 Whether you decide to make the lemon pepper wings or the garlic and habanero wings, all

 And it's really just four chords and the exact same loop is repeated throughout the song.

 I'm going to put the chords up here, you can follow along, and I'm going to show you what it sounds like.

 But the song isn't played on the piano, so this is just sort of my own arrangement.

 So E, B, E in your left hand, G sharp, B, and E in your right hand.

 So you hold the first one for a count of one, two, three, and then you move right to the next one.

 So it's rushed to the second and the four are a little bit longer.

 Okay, now I'm going to show you the rice is ready and you're going to take the rice off.

 Always when you drain the rice, you make sure that you rinse it with some water.

 One thing that you should remember is that don't ever rinse your rice with cold water

 This time I'm not going to make this rice with a lot of taggi because first of all,

Sometimes if you want taggi, you let the rice cook for a longer time

 But if you don't want taggi, you can cook it only for 15 minutes over the medium heat.

 At the beginning, I'm going to start with a high heat and then after two minutes,

 Another thing that you need to do is that you need to cover the lid with a fabric that I have.

 And you cover it so when the water evaporates, it won't go back to the rice.

 Okay, and my chicken is cooking and it's going to be ready soon.

 What I'm going to do now, I'm going to show you how to unbone the chicken.

 Because when you're preparing a dish with chicken, you have a choice.

 Then what you need to do after you cook it, you can take the skin off.

 Now since we're going to cook Zereshk Polo today, I'm going to show you how to get the Zereshk, or as they call it here, Barberry, ready.

 One thing that you should remember, and it's very important, don't ever heat your oil before you put the Zereshk.

 Because if you heat your oil and then you put the Zereshk in, then all your Barberry will burn.

 Zereshk will burn and discolor and your whole purpose is defeated.

 Now I love mine sweet, so I'm going to add about one and a half cups of sugar.

 After the sugar starts dissolving, I add a little bit of the juice of chicken to it.

 In the Tupperware sale flyer this month the smart steamer is on sale.

 I borrowed it from another Tupperware friend of mine for a demonstration last night and

 So today we're trying out this recipe that's actually featured in the sale flyer this month.

 I just did some carrots so I'm actually just going to leave that water in there.

 It's got some carrot juice but I think it will add some flavour in the steam to the

 So the recipe says to first put the chicken in the base of the steamer.

 And these I did dill carrots and I just had these in the same bowl so they just have a

 I just had a green pepper so we're doing green peppers and beans.

 Looks like I had a little more than will fit which is just fine.

 And on will go the lid and off to the microwave for 14 minutes.

 Alright so the chicken has been in the smart steamer for 14 minutes.

 So you're supposed to just take this sauce and put it over the chicken.

 Hi there, I'm Lindsay and we've made this quick video to show you how to choose what

 size helmet you need and also to show you how to wear it properly.

 making sure you keep the tape just above your eyebrows and ears.

After loosening the dial on the back to its full extent, make sure

 the ear pads are out of the way and put the helmet on your head like this.

 all this, your helmet should feel very comfortable and not tight.

 it properly, put your hand to the top of the helmet and gently rock it backwards and forwards.

 rucksack when they're ready and raring to go when you want them.

 is unclip this bit here and put the goggles on top of your helmet.

 off your helmet at the end of the day to prevent the foam from becoming misshapen.

 Hi everybody, this is Anita Stone with another episode of Anita's Messy Kitchen.

Fried chicken, meatloaf, tacos, those were like the mainstays of our diet as we

Well now, as I've gotten older and I've had to start learning how to

 cook healthy, I've had to learn to recook some of those favorites.

 today when I went to the grocery store, and normally I don't buy chicken legs, these are

 chicken quarters, but my kids like them and they were on sale for 39 cents a pound, so

 oven and bake them, but sometimes they get a little bit dry, and so what I've decided

 crumbs with herbs, and I wish I could show you the container I put a lot of things that

 or an oat product, like if you buy oatmeal or something like that, when you bring it

 home from the grocery store, put it in the freezer for just about two days, and then

 take it out and put it in your pantry, and it will keep a lot longer.

 parmesan bread crumbs, and what I'm going to do, I've already washed my chicken, and

 so I'm going to just push it down in the bread crumbs and coat it.

 you could dip the chicken in egg before you put it in the bread crumbs, but really, as

 and pepper and, I don't know, maybe some basil or oregano or something like that.

And so I will normally put a little bit of salt on the chicken, not

 And then we'll put it in the oven on 350 for about 40 minutes, and then it'll be done.

 I'll cover this metal pan with foil during most of the cooking, and then I'll just reach

 in and take the foil off during the last 10 minutes or so, and that will get it a little

 you is one of my favorite yogurt treats with Kashi cereal on top.

 hands, and then I'll be right back, and we'll show you that great treat that you can have

 From my wintery decor to more of a summer decor and they were like 35 up to 45 dollars per throw pillow

 I made these images for you guys, which you can download down in the links down below

 I'm just gonna go ahead and make my own fabric paint and I'm gonna pounce it on with like these pouncer and

 Foam pouncers, I guess they're called and the first pattern I'm gonna do is the quatrefoil pattern because if you go on Pinterest

 It's like the number one pattern that people do on their walls their throw pillows, etc.

 And my acrylic paint in these little cute containers, which everything I'm using will be down in the description box below

 You could even use a paintbrush, but I'm just going to apply my

 For a couple of minutes before you take off the stencil and then move it to finish the rest of the pillow

 And this is a 20 by 20 pillow that I'm doing the quatrefoil pattern on

 and as you can see, I'm just lifting it up making sure that everything is aligned as I move on and

 Again I've made these patterns for you guys to print out and cut out yourselves down below

 so the first thing I'm gonna take my pillowcase and I'm just gonna take some standard painters tape and

 So I'm just applying it here and I'm making sure to tape down my pillowcase onto the surface as well

 And then I'm just kind of looking to see where I want the anchor if I kind of want it, you know in which direction

 So here I've just pre-made some gray paint and mixed it with my fabric medium

 And I'm just gonna do the same thing and just pounce on the paint

 I wanted a really light gray background with a really bright blue anchor in the middle

 And I'm just removing the painters tape very carefully I'm doing this while it's still wet like I just finished painting it and I'm gonna

 So I'm just gonna let this dry for about an hour or so and then in the meantime

 Now I'm just pre-made some this is like a pearly blue color that I've mixed with my fabric medium and it worked out wonderfully

 As you can see there's like these little notches that I left for you guys to cut out

 So the circle in the middle of that top part would still be there

 So you're just gonna take a paintbrush and kind of fill in those gaps

 The next pattern that I printed out were some arrows and I was gonna do like

 More arrows in this but I figured three looked actually really good right in the center of

I think it's actually 12 by 12 pillows the anchor and the arrows

 I've pre-mixed some paint with my fabric medium and I'm just going to fill the first two arrows one color and then I decided on

 I'm using a toothpick to kind of hold down the stencil on like the smaller detail parts just because it's easier

 My fingers were too big and I was just getting paint all over my fingers

 So I figured a toothpick would be a good choice and it actually worked out really nicely

 so here I'm putting in kind of like the metallic copper color and

 After I put on this first coat I went with a second coat of a more glittery type copper color

 And that's what it looks like and I'm gonna let that dry and then my last print was a chevron print

 It looks a lot more red orange on camera, but it's a really nice pretty coral in person

 Once I was taking off the stencil like it was just like big blobs

 But I was managed I managed to salvage the chevron print despite after it dried completely

 I just went back with a paintbrush like a detail paintbrush and then I just cleaned up all the lines and it looks perfectly

 So once they've all dried for minimum 24 hours at least that's the directions of what my fabric paint said to do

 I'm gonna go over them on the hottest setting that my pillow cases can handle with my

 So again, make sure that they're completely dry and this is what they look like at the end

 I have other DIY videos and some beauty videos if you'd like to see more of that

 Hey guys, I'm going to share with you my updated foundation routine, especially for the winter.

 I think this is my first time that I'm going to be uploading a video in 1080p, so funny

 how I choose a time when I have absolutely no makeup on to do that, but hopefully you

 I just want you guys to be clearly able to see everything before I apply the foundation

 So for winter time, it's really important to make sure you exfoliate, use some kind

 of scrub to slough off all of the dead skin cells, all those flakes that you don't want

 I've been using this more often lately because now that it is winter, I need more moisture

 It just really soaks into the skin and makes your face, your skin feel so soft and supple,

 which is exactly what you want before you apply your foundation.

 So I've got that on and now I'm going to apply my Shiseido SPF as a base because this really

 Of course, if you're going out in the daytime and you want to protect your face from the

 sun, you would apply this all over, but I'm using it just to control my oil.

 I like light coverage for every day, but this is more so for special occasions or when I

 You know, like if I'm going out on the town with the girls or something and you want that

 So I'm just applying this mostly on the T-zone where I do get shiny.

 It just mattifies the face so well and it really helps control the oil.

 Alright, now that our face is clean and moisturized and prepped, time for the foundation.

 And this is a combination that I've been loving lately because I am so particular about how

 So I've been mixing these two, my Estee Lauder Double Wear in Sand and my Neutrogena Healthy

 The reason why is because this has a matte finish and by itself it can look kind of pasty.

 It can really emphasize any dryness, flakes, anything no matter how well prepped your skin

 So I mix a little bit of this in with this which I really love, but the only thing is

 that this can be a little too dewy for my skin type since I have oily skin.

 So it doesn't hold up as well and my face greases up pretty quickly with it.

 First, I just pour a little bit of the Neutrogena onto my hand.

 Now I'm just going to pour a teensy bit of the Estee Lauder just right into it.

 Okay, so I put less amount of that and now I'm just going to use my fingers to mix it

 Sometimes I use my Sigma Synthetic Kabuki to just mix it together and apply, but today

 I'm just going to even use my fingers because sometimes I like how it looks even more applied

 And now we're just going to dab it onto the skin and just smooth it out.

 And it's long-wearing enough because I mixed some of that Estee Lauder in there.

 Of course, you don't have to go and buy these same exact foundations, but the idea is to

 Make sure you get into the crevices of your nose because as you can see I have redness

 So I'm just going to apply a little bit more than I normally would just so you can kind

 And it just really evens out my skin tone but it doesn't look mask-like, which I love.

 I'm going to put a little bit more here because there's some redness peeking through there,

 which I usually don't mind, but if you're just trying to get that, you know, perfect

 canvas to work with, just apply a little bit more where you need it.

 So notice how it does give me a slight dewy sheen, which I think just looks more skin-like.

 Okay, so I have some extra on my hand and I'm actually going to apply that all the way

 And this is really key, especially if you are, you know, wearing this out at night and

 you know there's going to be flash photography and you want to make sure you don't have a

 You should be able to clearly see how that looks and then you would just proceed to apply

 your concealer on any spots that might need extra concealing and then also underneath

 So I'm just going to use my Maybelline Instant Age 1 and just brighten up underneath the

 You definitely want to set it, even if it's just lightly with a powder.

 It just really helps matte out the skin and helps set everything.

 And then you would continue to apply bronzer and contour, blush, the rest of your face

 And so that is my foundation routine for this winter when I want more coverage.

 In a large bowl, mix 2 cans of red salmon with 1 minced shallot, 1 egg, 1 tablespoon

 of Dijon mustard, 2 tablespoons of breadcrumbs, the juice from half of a lemon, and season

 Saute in a good amount of Bertolli extra virgin olive oil over medium heat until the croquette

 To make the remoulade sauce, start with half a cup of Hellman's mayonnaise, half a minced

 celery stalk for some crunch, 1 minced scallion, a tablespoon of minced parsley, a dozen capers,

 1 tablespoon of ketchup, juice from half a lemon, a generous splash or two of Worcestershire

 sauce, a teaspoon of minced garlic, an eighth of a teaspoon of cayenne pepper, and season

 Serve these salmon croquettes atop a generous puddle of creamed corn and top it with a little

 Go to HolidayKitchen.tv for a cornucopia of delicious video recipes.

 It's your Muscle Building Coach, Lee Hayward here and in this video clip you're going to

 get a tasty alternative to hot chocolate that you can enjoy over the holidays this year.

 We actually made this earlier this evening and it was really good so I said this is worthy

 Some protein powders if you add hot water to it, it clumps up and it's almost like it

 Make sure there's no air pockets caught in there so that there's little lumps of protein

 Another cool thing I just noticed, by putting the milk in there, that's going to cool off

 I actually made a video similar to this with coffee and protein powder and some people

 So the milk is going to keep it cooler and prevent it from burning.

 So it's simple, protein, milk and hot water and you have cocoa.

 And again, all you need is chocolate flavor protein powder, some low fat milk, hot water.

 And for this one we used Blue Star IsoSmooth protein from Blue Star Muscle.

 That one's our personal favorite, but you can try another flavor of chocolate protein

 Just make sure that you mix the protein with the milk first so that it cools off the protein

 Let it sit for a little while so that it's not too hot, that it doesn't burn the protein.

 And please be sure to like, share and subscribe so you can stay up to date with all our latest videos.

 It was the end of the 15th century when Portuguese and Spanish explorers ventured to the edge of the world seeking riches and spices.

 Follow me as I seek to become more self-sufficient in my suburban homestead.

 Here's how you can grow your own paprika and grind it into powder for seasoning your favorite dishes.

 Paprika is nothing more than a mild red chili that is dried and ground up.

Like all peppers, paprika needs lots of sun and temperatures around 80 degrees to produce.

 It may take a while for you to get a ripe pepper, but towards the end of the season

Since paprika, like other chili varieties, is a tender perennial that dies with frost.

 Tie them together in a chain and hang them in a dry, airy place with no direct sun.

This will include producing enough calories to sustain yourself,

 Although one of my elusive long-term goals is to produce most of my own food,

 I feel that it's better to dry them during winter here in Maryland because the climate gets drier.

 this is a perfect activity for winter when cabin fever is running high.

 I use a molcajete or a Mexican mortar and pestle to grind the peppers into a fine powder.

It's all about working slowly, making sure that you don't spill.

 The first couple of minutes will be a little awkward as the large chunks of pepper try to fly away.

 If the peppers are not completely dry, they will not become a fine powder.

 it will become easier to turn it into fine powder by using a circular motion.

 You will want to separate the finer powder from the larger chunks in order to toast your paprika for that smoky paprika flavor.

 it should be a loose powder with large chunks and not a gummed up paste.

 Using a fine mesh, sieve out the powder from the larger chunks.

 If it turns brown, it becomes bitter and loses the more subtle flavor overtones.

 Your paprika is now done and you can store it and use it for months to come.

 It is especially handy to have a home-grown, freshly ground spice to brighten winter meals.

 Kay here in the Late Bloomer garden where borage threatens to take over.

 Make sure to watch Kay's gardening saga at her YouTube channel, Late Bloomer.

 Remember to send questions and comments to seedofchoice at gmail.com

 Hello everyone, today we're doing another candy melts demonstration.

 These are candy melts, they're like little candy wafers that are very easily melted and

 They come in different colours, different flavours, and for information about them,

 These are black candy melts that I have melted in a Ziploc bag, and I'm going to use that

 This mold I found at Michael's Craft Store, and I wish I had this when I made the moustache

 So once I put the candy melts in the Ziploc bag, I cut the corner off the bag, and I'm

 You could spoon it into the molds as well, you don't have to use a plastic bag for that.

 If your candy melts are too thick and you're having a hard time with them, you can thin

 them out by adding a little bit of low taste vegetable oil, like canola oil, or even a

 Once you put it in the mold, lightly tap it on the counter several times to smooth it

 I'm going to fill up the additional moustaches that are on this mold as well.

 You don't have to use black, of course, you could use whatever color you'd like to make

 You could use yellow for blonde, orange for redhead, chocolate for brunette, and you could

 even make grey by taking white candy melts and adding a little bit of the black, just

 Once they're filled, you can add the sucker sticks or the lollipop sticks.

 I purchased these at the Bulk Barn, which is a bulk food store in Ontario and in other

 However, they also can be purchased at certain craft stores like Michael's, and you can even

 So I will put examples of that in the description box if you're looking for them.

 I find the best way to use these is to insert them into the mold and give them a turn so

 Just don't push it too far up to the top because you don't want it showing through the top

 Chill them for 15-20 minutes until they're thoroughly chilled, and when they're chilled

 And when they come out and they're properly chilled, they are also nice and shiny, and

 There's Max, modeling them for you and me, and Kettle and Duck.

I am an educational program specialist with Healthy Child Healthy

Homemade Play-Doh is extremely easy to make at home and you'll know exactly

You don't have to worry about what you're buying when you're buying Play-Doh.

 So to start off, you're just going to need flour, water, oil, crema tartar, which you

 can find in the baking aisle, and some salt and then food coloring and some essential

 this recipe since the kids aren't going to be eating it, you probably don't have to use

And then we're going to use a cup of warm water, which I already have

 adding a quarter cup of salt and then I'm going to turn on the stove to medium heat.

I usually add my food coloring at the end of the process so that

 the part on the stove that obviously you need to be safe with them.

 if you can see how it's kind of bummed up in the bottom and the texture is like Play-Doh.

 can put heated material directly on it without worrying about it.

If you want to let it cool a little bit and have the kids do the kneading,

So I'm going to add my food coloring and my peppermint essential oil.

 Just need two or three drops if you're doing a single recipe of it.

 Okay, so we're back with food fight and the battle today is over the city's best ramen.

 I'm in the really tiny but hot kitchen of Ramen Misoya and we're gonna make one of the

 And then also over here is server Mickey who's gonna be helping us with the translation.

 They opened up a couple months ago, so almost every week I come.

 Ramen Misoya offers three styles of miso, well known in their Japanese cities of origin.

 The Hokkaido style, kome miso, is full bodied and as hearty as any of its sister dishes.

 Of course, the addition of a few pieces of marinated and grilled pork belly make this

 If the last time you had ramen was in college and it looked like this, take a look at all

 One's in New York City, one's in Silicon Valley, and the other one is here in Chicago, like

 And you have to really appreciate the saltiness of the miso broth.

 It's not quite as interesting to me as that previous bowl, I don't think.

 Coming up, you don't want to miss my interview with the best man,

 and I've kind of swatched this and had a little play around with them

 I'm going to start off with this sort of style where I have nothing on

 just because the majority of you said that you preferred it like this.

 I've already got my foundation on just to save a little bit of time

 I've also done a little bit of concealing just on any blemishes

 I can never remember the name because it always rubs off the packaging.

 I think it's called Lasting Finish or Lasting Perfection Concealer

 So I'm going to use this silver colour all over the lid which is called Solstice

 I found that these eyeshadows go on much, much better with your fingers

 because they sort of tend to cling to brush bristles a little bit too much

 I'm not going to use a base either because I kind of want this to crease a little bit

 but you still want to find a dupe for this silver cream colour called Solstice,

 a really good option for that would be the Avon Super Shock Gel Liner.

 I'm just going to dust that over the lid to set it a little bit.

 Now I just want to give my socket line a little bit of definition

 Okay, so I took that colour quite far up towards my brows actually.

 I haven't filled in my brows yet, I'm going to do that afterwards.

 And again, taking it on my finger, that's going to go underneath the eye.

 And again, to set the bottom lash line, I'm going to just apply this.

 Okay, so I just want to leave the eyes there in terms of shadow.

 So you can see we've got the gorgeous shimmery silver on the lid

 Okay, so I'm not going to apply any eyeliner to the top lash line.

 I want it to be kind of neutral and just sort of like the metallic

 but it seems to have gone on a little walk and I can't find it anywhere.

 Then in the centre of the lip, I'm going to use the gold from the palette.

 Obviously you can just stick a gloss on or just do kind of a nude lip

 It's kind of a little bit like space age, metallic kind of look.

 Today we will be working on the round hand minuscules, which are the letters you have

 I hope that you have got the latest minuscules down, the I base, N, E, P, and B.

 But first, let's start off with a comparatively easier letter, the M. M's truly are just ends

 of another leg, so if you watch carefully, you can see that they are very similar.

 Sorry for leaving off the part with the I last time, but now you can work on it.

 Anyway, these dots are not very easy to do the first time, so practice until you can

 The dot itself needs to be just a little ways above the I, so keep practicing until the

 Coincidentally, there is a dot on the J too, so let's try out a J. It's just an I, but

 It's an odd curved stroke, and it's important that you don't make the tip too big or too

 A hairline is a really thin stroke made by moving the pen sideways, so it is as thin

 Before we move on to rounded letters, let's try the K. The K is, first, a long I base,

 One of the problems that happens a lot is when the main part of the K, the enclosed

 Also, it's sometimes hard to make the bottom of the K correctly, so work on the K until

 This letter is pretty tricky, so you might need to practice it a bit before it looks

 After you get the C down, how about you try out the F, which is a similar letter.

 The reason that it is similar is because it also has the same sort of shape as the C.

 The C and the F have the same stroke that starts on a hairline, goes over, and comes

 The cross part for the F goes across at a diagonal, so you need to be able to see the

 There are two ways to do it, but I first will show you the double-story A. This A is made

 One is an over-stroke that ends with a flick like the one on the I base.

 The next stroke is a semi-stroke, and the last stroke connects that stroke to the main

 This letter is another letter that often gets deformed, so try to make yours look like mine.

 Also, the top part does not cover the bottom entirely, so you need to be careful to make

 Then the last stroke is an easy I base stroke that goes straight down.

 This should be pretty easy, because I'm sure you've practiced quite a lot.

 Alright, well I'm at Junkyard and I'm here to teach you guys fakie 540 big flips.

 To know this trick, you should at least know how to do tray flips, but for sure you need

 The only reason why I say fakie big flips is so you know how to get the feel when your

 body is doing a half cab and you're trying to catch a board that's spinning more than

 For foot positioning on a fakie 540 big flip, you're going to want to do your foot positioning

 It's easier for scooping and the whole point of the trick is you're going to scoop a fakie

 You're going to want to create kind of like an air time as you're doing the half cab so

 You can see how you swing your arms and your shoulders to give you a zero gravity momentum

 From your own experiences, you can learn how to do this trick off anything.

 Hello and once again welcome back to the Belmont Big E channel.

 And what we've got, we've got a chicken that's a whole chicken.

 You usually get good deals on whole chickens as opposed to buying the cut pieces.

 McCormick Montreal chicken and it's got paprika, garlic, salt, onion.

 You know it's good so we put that on the chicken inside and out.

 And I like to spray it with a little cooking spray or olive oil spray just so it kind of

 And what we're going to do is we are going to take a half a can of beer.

 And we are going to put that chicken on our grill and we're going to stand it up and you

 We're going to stand it up on that putting the beer can inside the chicken so that the

 This is the indirect method of cooking so that the chicken doesn't get burned.

 It's a little tricky getting the chicken to stand up like that but we managed it.

 And the beer can is, it's hard to see it, the beer can is under there.

 That's our old faithful Weber grill we've had for about 15 years I guess.

 That should be ready to go and we'll come back and show you what it looks like right

 As you can see the lighting is getting a little darker as we go into evening.

 We checked it once and it tipped over so that's one thing you want to make sure with the beer

 I put some baked potato on there and some, got some of the other, what do you call it,

 And the good thing about cooking it like this is you see we're cooking it with the legs

 And by cooking it this way we kind of even it out so we don't dry out the breasts.

 And we'll be right back and show you the finished final product.

 This is charcoal half beer can smoked whole chicken right here on the Belmont Big E Channel.

 Alright welcome back and we're back in the kitchen and let's take a look at that bird.

 That is the half can of beer smoked charcoal grilled whole chicken.

 Thank you for watching and good eating from the Belmont Big E Channel.

 Hi, I'm going to be making a video today showing you how to make your cheap, slow RC car go faster.

 Alright, so this is basically what we're going to be doing today.

 First, you must get the body off of your car, which on this car is a simple four screws.

 All you're going to be doing is soldering the red contact right here on the 9-volt battery adapter to the red wire there.

 So, the reason that this makes it so much faster is this car runs on three AA's.

 Which, one AA weighs almost about as much as one 9-volt battery.

 Not only are you doubling the voltage, but you're saving a lot of weight off the car.

 Alright, now stay tuned and I'm going to show you how to do the mod.

 So the first thing you're going to do is get your soldering iron.

 And you're just going to touch, I choose to do the red one first, touch down here.

 And now, you got that one, you just go here, melt this terminal and stick this one in.

 Just in case the car solder that comes with it isn't wanting to cooperate with you.

 I'm excited for this one because there's a little more variety I guess.

 Well, besides I guess the almonds because I've had those in two meals.

 Little bit of yam for the carbs and that's going to be 50 grams.

 But yams are pretty packed with carbs so you can't have too much.

 So I'll have plenty of it ready to go for tomorrow or my next meal if I feel like having it.

 That will give me, since I'm a little behind on protein, that will give me a little boost in this meal.

 Because there's still some protein in the almonds, some in the broccoli, chicken obviously, and then the cottage cheese.

 And then for a half a cup on here, I like to do it this way instead of just grabbing the half cup.

 Okay, and then for the broccoli, it's going to be the same serving as last time.

 Okay, so I'll post the macros as I've been doing with the other ones.

 Today has been easier and I can play with things because I was off work.

 then I kind of have my stuff more set up and I know more exactly what I'm going to eat.

 But today I tried to show you guys what happens when you kind of run out of food

 And then I went shopping and then was able to have more variety in this meal.

 But I'm glad that you guys got to see today because it was a little bit out of the norm.

 And yeah, I thought it would be kind of fun to show you guys what I do every day

 So if you guys want to see how I do my foundation, then just keep on watching.

 I like to start off with my oil control lotion from MAC because I do have very oily skin.

 I am having a little bit of difficulty going around the eyes because I do have my brows and eyes done already.

 Recently for my foundation I have been using this 3-in-1 Covergirl foundation.

 Okay, I don't know if you guys noticed this, but on the side of my lip I totally did not blend out my foundation.

 Now I'm taking my Age Rewind Concealer, Corrector, whatever it claims to be.

And I'm going to be applying this under my eyes, on the center of my nose, my forehead, my chin, and right on top of my lips.

I am going to go in a little bit and add some more and just blend, blend, blend.

 I'm going in with this Dermablend Professional Setting Powder and I'm going to set my under eyes and the rest of my entire face.

 To give my face a little bit of color, I like to take my Too Faced Chocolate Soleil and I like to bronze up my face with the F10 brush from Sigma.

 I like to apply this under my cheekbones, my forehead, and on the sides of my nose.

 To give my color and to give it some punch to it, I like to use the frequently used red lips matte brown color.

 I'm going back in with my F20 brush and just blend out everything very well so there's

 I'm now taking this M Cosmetics blush and this is in the color First Date and I like

 to use this color for an everyday blush because it is very natural.

 I like to just apply this on my cheeks and I like to apply this with my F15 Sigma brush.

 Now I'm taking my mineralized skin finish in the color Soft and Gentle and I'm applying

 I'm taking my F35 Sigma brush again and this color is gorgeous.

 I'm going to apply this on the center of my nose and also right on the top of my lips

 Now I'm just taking my go-to fall lipstick which I really do love.

 This is Rebel from MAC and I'm just going to pop this on my lips.

 And now I'm just going to take my Fix Plus and spray this all over my face to set my

It's actually six o'clock so I am going to make some breakfast and it's snowing

I've actually been up since like 4 30 when my husband got up for work

 because I wanted to see if the kids school got canceled and eventually it did.

One for the turkey kielbasa and one for the two eggs and then I used a blue container

 for the cheese and I used some shredded cheese and it was just mozzarella and cheddar.

 there is breakfast and I'm gonna have my coffee and yeah I'm starving so I'm gonna dig in.

 sliced strawberries and I'm having one red container with Greek yogurt.

Here we go all set and this is actually one of my favorite snacks.

 of water and I just filled my water bottle up again so I am heading towards 50 ounces for the

 one green container filled with spring mix and just a tip when you're filling up your green

 container with something like you know lettuce or spring mix or whatever you're using.

 cucumbers and tomatoes and I'm having an orange container with sunflower seeds.

 some balsamic vinegar on that and I drank my other 25 ounces of water so that's 50 ounces down.

Okay I'm back and I am just having a snack and I am having a sweet potato diced up and

 I used two yellow containers so I already dumped one of the yellow containers on here and this is

I'm just gonna dump this on and these are just steamed and these are actually the

These are just the steamed in the bag sweet potatoes that I got from the store.

 one's gone that will be 100 ounces and these right here what I was saying these steam in the

 mean you can definitely have them for a few days but yep that is my afternoon snack.

 I only have one yellow, one red, and one purple left and this shake is gonna take care of that

 and it is only about 4 30 I think so I'm gonna go ahead and mix this up and hopefully it takes me

I'm not sure if it's gonna so we'll see but my containers are in the

 dishwasher right now so I'm gonna use a purple for half a banana.

 my almond milk and I'm going to use two teaspoons of peanut butter and a red for my scoop of shake

 ology and I just realized that actually this yellow is going to put me over anyway.

 to be over one one yellow because I already had two yellows for a snack.

 starving today but I am and I'm gonna eat because that's what I do.

 we'll see hopefully this will take me through the rest of the day.

 to eat another green container with some tomatoes and some sliced orange peppers and then I am going

 to go upstairs and get my workout in since I got Madison to sleep which is awesome and Kevin's

 ounces and now I'm working on another 25 ounces so I'll drink that while I am working out so that

 as you can see it's fairly well dissolved on its own but we need to

 stir it up a little bit just to make sure and get it dissolved as much as we

I have yet to get all the bentonite dissolved in any of the 200 wine kits

 that I've made but you want to get it dissolved as much as you can.

 into the wine and stir as we add because once again we want to get this as

 thoroughly mixed as possible and as you can see I didn't get it all quite

In all of my equipment kits from the beginners up you get a drill mounted

 at this time you might have wine splashed all over wherever you are and

So I found that for doing the initial mixing the spoon works just fine.

 In this video we're going to learn how to render glass or transparent plastic.

 It seems like something hard to render but in actual fact it's quite simple if you know the steps to follow.

 One of the things you have to keep in mind is that in terms of the area that's meant to be transparent, there's not much you need to do to that.

The areas that you do need to focus on are the areas in the interior of the object if there are any.

 You need to make sure that those are correctly rendered using tone.

 So we're going to render the tic-tac box or the little tic-tac package.

 The first thing we need to do is to select or determine where our light is coming from.

 So in this case I'm going to select that my light's coming from the right down to the left.

 Now the areas which we need to fill in blue are the ones I'm going to outline.

 So we're going to do one full coat of that as per the theory of thirds.

 Now this is a little trickier because you kind of have to bend your marker as you're going.

So we're going to go from around this area here all the way down and just this area on the top will be our lighter area.

 So it's important that you see that this internal casing has a couple of sides.

 So the first thing is that this area here has to be darker because there won't be much light going into there.

 So hopefully there you can see that there's sort of lighter tones on the top.

 One thing we haven't been saying in the video so far is that the maximum sort of application of Copic marker you can do is four times.

So we could probably get away of doing an extra one just to get a slightly darker effect.

 Pastel is probably the best option because we'll apply it sparingly.

 So what you need to do is you need to get the colour you want of your choice.

 In this case we want to give it that sort of glassy blue finish.

 Now what you want to do is apply it on the whole back section of your Tic Tac box.

 Just for this demonstration I'll probably go a bit darker so you can see how we're going to use the rubber to create highlights.

 You can see here that the area we left white kind of gives it a nice finish.

 Then to finish off you may want to use a Sharpie to just go over.

 Make sure that the darker areas where no light will reach are dark.

 This is Nike's new running watch with a built-in TomTom GPS receiver.

 So we're going to go ahead and open the box and see what it looks like.

 On the side here we have a nice picture showing off the front face of the watch.

 And on this side it shows off the GPS functioning with computer, with USB computer syncing.

 Also this watch is capable to integrate with the Nike shoe pod, foot pod that goes inside

 So we're going to go ahead and open it up and see what's inside.

 Let's take a look and make sure everything comes out of the box.

 Alright so we have, in the top of the box there you just kind of pull this out and this

 So it looks like here's a little product guide, a little manual on how to work all the functions.

 It's supposed to be a very easy to work watch but there's a little product guide for that.

 Looks like here's a USB transfer cable for syncing the watch with your computer.

 The watch itself is supposed to have a built in USB adapter so this would be a nice extension

 cable that way you don't have to reach behind your computer every time you want to plug

 So I'm actually surprised, the watch does come with the NikePlus foot pod.

 It actually has the Apple logo on there but if you have NikePlus running shoes, the bottom

 sole of one of the shoes has a built in receiving slot for this little foot pod.

 If not, I know there's other adapters, little pockets and pouches you can buy to tie in

 This is a great little device to use if you do any running inside.

 GPS probably won't, obviously won't pick up running on the inside.

 So if you're on the treadmill, this is a great little device to use.

 Probably also makes the watch a little bit more accurate than just having the GPS by

 So let's go ahead and remove this packaging from the actual watch.

 Alright, so that was some interesting packaging but I don't think there's anything going on

 I think that was supposed to be sitting inside of there but not the easiest packaging.

 It's all black except on the inside you have this neon greenish yellow color.

 It's not a very bulky watch compared to other models like the Garmin's.

 I don't know if you can see that clearly but a little screen protection cover here.

 As far as buttons, you've only got two buttons here on the side and then this third button.

 So this here does have, these are two plastic clips for snapping into the band and then

 On the back of the watch here, just a little bit of product details.

 Basically you've got your product guide, USB cable, NikePlus foot pod, shoe pod and then

 ingredients are sifted flour, salt, sugar, egg, melted chocolate, vanilla essence,

 After that we put it in the fridge at least for three to two hours.

 I'm making 2 large, sort of barn doors that open to the front of the shed.

 And to make it nice and sturdy, I joined the corners with some bridle joints.

 I had to cut these bridle joints, at least this part, on the bandsaw

 because this member is just too long to put upright on my table saw.

 this whole frame has still got no resistance to twist like that.

 So, a good way to solve that is actually to use something like a torsion beam.

 And that will give the door a lot of reinforcement against twisting.

 So, the easiest way to join this door is to just dowel it into the frame.

 So, I'm using my self-centering dowel jigs to drill the holes in this large door.

 And to make sure that all the dowel holes are all gonna line up, I need to very precisely

 I also need to drill just 1 inch deep because I'm using 2 inch dowels.

 I drill the little hole in this block of wood, which is just the right length.

 And putting that on the drill, that limits my depth that I can drill to.

 The last hole is a bit tricky because I still want to do everything from this edge.

 But I just barely have enough clamping on here to drill that last hole.

 So, now I just have to repeat those same relative measurements on the rails.

 So, to cut this panel to width, I'm making a deep score along the length.

 And then by bending it back and forth, it'll eventually break along the score line.

 The next lengthwise cut I had to make wasn't along one of the ribs of the sheets.

 So, I went back to using the angle grinder to cut the sheets apart.

 And the block of wood in the mortar is the best way to do that.

 So, I folded it over 90 degrees for the left door, just onto the wood.

 And for the right door, it's folded over 180 with a lip extending past.

 Hi guys today, I'm going to show you how I created this floral and bow design the inspiration for this is this beautiful

 Custom-made little mini poach that I received as a gift and you'll need an assortment of polishes for this design.

 So we're gonna jump right in you'll see I've got some polish here on a little piece of paper

 By adding the lightest shade of purple to my nail and kind of this circular shape.

 I add a little bit of my white and then you'll see I start going back and forth with the different shades of the purple polish

 Typically when I'm working with my polish, I have it on a little piece of tinfoil

 I do find when I'm filming that it reflects a fair bit off of the light

 So I thought for ease of the film, I would just put it on a little piece of white paper

 So I would recommend using some tinfoil when you're doing your nail art

 So you'll see I'm just going back and forth with the different shades of polish

 But I promise you once you add your greenery and do some white highlights with this flower

 So in the center of the flower, I've added a little bit of green and some white to just add some dimension and highlight to the design

 It's easy to add more to your flower as you go a lot harder to take things away

 I've got two different shades of green and here I'm just adding a little vine to my nail

 If you see some of that base color peeking through that's okay.

 I'm just using that purse as a guide finding different aspects that I like and recreating it on my nail.

 Just find something that you're drawn to and then try to recreate pieces of it on your nail

 So you see I added two larger leaves there, but I wanted it to look like it was underneath the flower

 I'm creating these blue flowers basically the same way but with just some different shades of polish

 I'm just gonna go and continue building this design by adding some more greenery and some flowers to my nail

 I just add five little dashes to create these flowers and add some white highlights to them as well

 So add the pieces that you like change up the colors if you want to do this design

 But aren't really thrilled with these colors try some pinks and peaches

 I've added my base color and left a little triangle at the end and just to tidy that up

 We're gonna repeat that on the other side and we're gonna fill that in so that you have a solid blue bow

 So once you've done that and cleaned up around the edge of your nail, we're gonna move on to the next step

 So ignore that blob of dark blue polish that was a little boo-boo you'll see I'm just carefully outlining the bow

 Once you've done that we're now ready to add kind of the details.

 Just to kind of give that bow some dimension and just two little straight lines

 You'll see we're gonna repeat that on both sides and the last step is we're gonna add some silver dots

 To the bow and let everything dry and apply your top coat and here's a look at the finished product

 Guys, if you recreate this one, I'd love if you could add a hashtag

 Krista Bell nails so I can see your recreations, of course thumbs up new subscribers and comments below are always appreciated

 Then take half the donut and just place it on top of the cupcake.

 And then using the icing, you're just going to ice all around it and over top.

 Now the donut was a tiny bit too big for this particular cupcake.

 It was overhanging a bit and it caused some gap problems between my cupcake and the donut.

 I should have used my own buttercream recipe, but I happened to have some in the refrigerator

 Now I'm just hollowing out a little bit at the top here to make the top of the apple

 Then take some red coloured sugar and just dunk it in there and cover up all of the icing.

 Tootsie Rolls are simply chocolate taffy for those of you who don't know what it is.

 What's great about these is that you can put them in the microwave for 3-4 seconds and

 they will get soft enough that you can mould them just like modelling clay.

 If you don't have Tootsie Rolls where you live, you could use caramels as well.

 And you're just going to simply mould the Tootsie Roll into the shape of an apple stem.

 For the leaves, I'm using fruit roll-ups that I'm just going to cut into a leaf shape.

 If you don't have fruit roll-ups where you live, you can use a gum drop, a green gum

 drop that you simply flatten with a rolling pin and then cut out into a leaf shape.

 They're softened in the microwave a little bit and then rolled out to make a leaf shape

 So I'm just pinching the bottom of the fruit roll-up leaf just to make a leaf shape.

 Then place the stem in the cupcake, add the leaves, and that's pretty much it.

 These would look a lot better if they were in red cupcake liners, but I didn't have any.

 Building chords is a lot like building scales in the sense that they both have formulas.

 Triads is just a simple fancy term for, you know, just simple C chord, D minor chord,

 And what we do is if I were to take the C major scale, I have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.

 And what we do is we take the first note, the third note, and the fifth note as kind

 of our, we're going to basically skip a note in order to find the notes in the chord.

 So our first note is going to be C. Second note of the C major chord is going to be E.

 So C, E, G are our three chords, our three notes in C. So if I take an open C chord,

 So this is the only three notes that we're playing in our C major chord.

 So to build a C minor chord, all we do is just change one note.

 So if we take a look at our bar chord, here's my C major bar chord.

 That's because what we're doing is we're changing an E note to an E flat note.

 So if we do the same thing in the key of D, we take our whole, whole, half, whole, whole,

 We will find, skip a note, one, three, five, D, F sharp, A. Let's take a look at our open

 D chord and see if those are the only three notes that we find.

 And then F sharp is going to be on my first string, second fret.

 So now if we were to turn that into a minor now, one flat three five instead of F sharp,

 The only two notes that change are going to be F sharp to F. Notice how it's not in the

 As long as it starts out on the root note, D, and it has the three and the five in there

 How we find chords that go together are going to be using our same formula, one, three,

 So for example, to find what note is going to, what chord is going to be next, if I start

 from D and C, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, back to one.

 Now what's really nice is that each chord basically has a formula.

 And then our seventh one, or our eighth one is going to be back to one, C major again.

 So that's major, minor, minor, major, major, minor, diminished, back to one.

 you want to see on the next Cookie Monday and No-Bake Cookies won by

So I'm going to share with you how to make No-Bake Microwave Cookies.

 So in the microwavable safe bowl or mug, you're going to add the butter and make

 sure it's softened and you're just going to butter the whole bowl or mug.

 So once you're finished, you're going to add the granulated sugar, the brown sugar

 some vanilla extract and you're going to mix it until it is well combined.

 don't forget guys, starting this Monday I will be having my drink series for the

 Next, you're going to add the flour and a pinch of salt and you're going to mix

 it until most of the flour is disappeared or has disappeared and then

 So next, with your spatula, you're going to flatten out the cookie and you're

 I suggest warming it for about 45 seconds and then taking a look at the

 cookie to see if it needs like a couple of more seconds or 30 more seconds.

 So I added a little bit more chocolate chips to make it look more delicious and

This is such a quick and easy recipe especially for those of you who

 This helps spread the message to other people who want to learn how to bake.

 to weight the canafa and refrigerate it so that you can cut it and bake it.

 we need to do is we take our finished canafa and then we cover it with tinfoil.

 press the tinfoil actually down right onto the top of the surface.

 that all of it is covered and that it's nice and even and flat.

So I'm going to actually put that bag of pie weights right down on

 reason that we do this is because it really helps the canafa, the strands to meld and

 kataifu would be lighter, less dense, and a little bit more difficult to eat.

 going to transfer this to the refrigerator and we're going to leave it there for one

 been over an hour and now we can remove the weights from our canafa and cut it.

 just going to take the weights off and set them aside and take off our tin foil.

And then we're just going to take a knife and we're going to make even-sized

So I'm going to make about seven lines across the top of our pan

 don't want to go all the way down because if you do, when you pour the syrup over the

 top, it will just go right to the bottom and you won't get any of the syrup on the top

 And you can just patch if you get any little broken pieces as you go through.

 see if you were to do this in muffins or in mini muffin tins, you could have very easy

 of the things that's very traditional in the Middle East, I'm going to make about five

But one of the things that's very traditional in the Middle East

 is to make the kataifi into little nests which looks like bird's nests.

 fill them with a sweet cheese, which is like a sweet version of a mozzarella kind of a

 we rotate the pan during baking, it gets a nice, even, golden consistency.

 what it looks like when it's golden and when it's ready to serve.

 is cool, this is really going to grab on to the kanafa and make a nice, delicious, sweet

 but I like to ladle it on because I think you can see what you're doing better and get

And then you just let this cool all the way to room temperature.

 And then you can finish cutting it very carefully and then serve it.

 Hi guys, quick video here today just to show some of the basic fishing knots that I use

 This will lay some groundwork for a video I have coming next week.

 When you read about how to tie a clinch knot, it'll tell you, you go through, you wrap it

 If you do that with heavy pound tests like this, the knot's not going to set down when

 So for this pound test, I'll go through the eye and we wrap around the standing end three

 All right, now that little opening that's formed there, the tag end goes through that

 If you had six, seven, eight wraps, it's not going to pull down as well.

 Another knot that comes in handy for connecting your running line to your snap, your barrel

 So with the palomar, we're going to double over a section here, approximately that long.

 I've just doubled over that loop and now through this loop, whatever object you're tying on

 This last loop comes in handy for tying a whole bunch of different kind of rigs and

 As many times as I tie this, it still can be a little bit of a pain in the neck, but

 So we're going to take our running line, just double it over like that so we have a loop.

 And we're going to take that like so, just spin it around that other standing line there,

 Now this running line here at the bottom is going to come up through this opening here.

 Now it's good if you put this on an eye hook in the wall or whatever and pull it.

 Grab both ends of the running mono and I just pull this down like so until it gets to that

 There's going to be a video I have coming on some of my favorite fluke rigs and using

 Here we go from the birthplace of American BBQ, South Carolina.

This is the show that takes about a beer to drink and it's Starch Madness week.

 I enjoy a great potato salad with BBQ and I really enjoy a loaded potato salad.

 When I go to the parties and the BBQs, you go and a lot of people bring grocery store stuff to the party.

Yeah, it's a little bit intensive because you start with 5 pounds of potatoes.

 And you gotta make 5 pounds of potato salad and it's a lot to deal with.

 Why go to get the big gallon jug of pre-made potato salad when you could probably do it for pennies on the dollar to make mayo or whatever, all these things.

 I think one of the things that really is included in all that is it just takes time.

 Because to do the potato salad the right way, the potatoes have to be cooked and then cooled.

 So I think a lot of people just opt to buy it rather than go through the trouble of making it.

 And of course, you know, in the south this is nothing but Duke's mayonnaise.

 And we're going to use a cup of mayonnaise and a cup of sour cream.

 And then, in my opinion, the greatest thing ever invented, of course, the ranch dressing mix.

 And this is just going to bring a whole lot of flavor to the pot.

 Well, yeah, we could make our own ranch dressing mix if we wanted to.

 But, you know, ranch dressing mix is one of those things that's been around forever.

 Everybody's, you know, your chicken wings come with ranch dressing.

 And all your potato salads now have just that little bit, because ranch has a little bit of garlic in it.

 And you've said it before, people get attached to certain tastes.

 And this is going to be a little bit thick to put on the potato salad.

 And I'm just going to mix it until it gets to be kind of a thin dressing more than a sour cream that has peaks in it and stuff.

 In the south here, in the south, they generally put mustard in potato salad.

 And I'm okay with mustard in a potato salad, but I don't think I'm okay with mustard in my loaded potato salad.

 We're going to get to these, cut these up, and let's see what we end up with while that rests.

 Yeah, we'll let this rest, and we'll do some cutting up of some vegetables and stuff.

 All right, send us your great plates at greattv.com or jack at great tv, bill at great tv.

 That looks like the perfect potato salad to add to pretty much any barbecue.

 I would be proud to serve that at my next barbecue gathering, Bill.

 Buy local, think global, stay sustainable on every chance you get.

 So this dish is called a salad mimosa and it can be served alone or it can be served

 The shakes that I used to feed would love to have this with the cardiac party because

 it's a good palate cleanser, it's a light dish and it's a good follow up to that dish.

 Anyway, you just take Boston lettuce, find a nice bowl and take the darker leaves first,

 put it around and then the smaller leaves go next and then the smallest leaves go right

 And then you have your olive oil and your lemon juice and your egg yolks.

 Put them in cold water, bring it to a boil, turn it off, time it for 10 minutes exactly

 And the way you can tell a perfect hard boiled egg is there's no gray around the outside

 There's only one technique involved in this and that's straining the egg yolks.

 You want to find a, not a fine strainer and not a coarse strainer, but something in between.

 Just take them, put them in the strainer and take the back of a spoon or I prefer to use

 a ladle and you just push them through and make them very, very fine.

 And it'd be best if they chilled them because if you chill your egg yolks then they'll go

 You don't have to use it all if you don't want, but whatever you have left over can

 So once you get this done and one other story I wanted to tell you about the shakes is one

 of the first times they ever came to America they saw an above the ground swimming pool

 and they thought it was a very unusual thing because there's sand shifts so much in Saudi

 Arabia and Kuwait that they thought this was a great thing to buy their friends.

 So one of the first things I had to do was I had to find a hundred swimming pools for

 them and I can't tell you how many people hung up on me when I would call them up and

 And I'd have to call them back up again with a credit card and say, okay, wait a second,

 So it took me about, I had to call all the way from Arizona, New Mexico, Southern California

 You just take your ground egg yolks and this is, the reason it's called a salad mimosa

 And serve it to your guests and if you have any Saturday shakes at your table, make sure

 Hey guys, I'm back with another recipe and this one happens to be a protein shake that's really easy and really simple.

 You know, we don't always have the time to make our full-on breakfast like we should, like the oatmeal or some egg whites or eggs

 So what I do in lieu of that when I don't have the time is I create myself a nice protein shake.

 Now you'll see in a little while the protein that I use and that's just for me.

 I would suggest for you, the protein that you choose, make sure it suits you.

 Is it a supplement that can be drank in between meals or is it totally a meal replacement?

 So here's what I do to make my shake to get me to lunch and tame the beast if you know what I'm talking about.

 but what I decide to do is bump up the flavor by using some almond milk.

 The particular protein powder that I use comes from Arbonne and this just so happens to be the same company

 where I buy my cosmetics from, my skincare line and a lot of the makeup that I use.

 It has 20 grams of protein and then I can bump it up with a little frozen banana,

 some strawberries and some Greek yogurt and just blend it all together.

 You know, adding your favorite frozen fruit to a shake like this just helps you get in that serving of fruit that you need in

 Again, I would encourage you to read the nutrition facts on any protein powder that you purchase to make sure it has ingredients that you are

 Well, that was especially simple and easy to do and actually a no recipe recipe.

 For other great recipes like this, go to GDCeasoning.com and I'll see you guys next time.

I'm going to teach you guys how to play When You Look Me In The Eyes by Jonas Brothers off their Jonas Brothers album.

 I think this is the last song off of that album that I'm going to be teaching and then I'm going to move on to their a little bit longer album.

 And the strumming, not the strumming so much as the chord switches are going to be a little bit more difficult when you have to switch them.

 So, for that what I did is I did a G, then an A, B minor, A, G.

 So, you just have to kind of get down when you're switching them.

 I think everything is kind of like a measure of G, measure of A, measure of B minor, half and half, something like that.

 Your chorus is going to be D, then an A, B minor, A, G, A, and back to D.

 The only other part of the song you need to know is the bridge where he says,

 it's going to be an A, and then you go back to the chorus with the D.

 So, I'm going to play through the intro, first verse, and chorus.

 So, like I said, leave some suggestions, some subscriptions, subscribe.

 Here's the video on how to replace the wiper blades using the Tri-Code Break to Fit wipers

 This is the original Bosch with the old blade that I want to replace.

 This was the old Bosch and it came with these two metal frame railings here.

 You can see what I had to break off and cut to make it fit there.

 You have your old wiper blade and it comes with a pair so you have the other pair.

 I just primed it a little bit like this so that it's a little bit curved.

 If you look at the ends here, there's a shorter end and there's a longer end.

 The longer one is free moving and the shorter one is where it's stuck.

 It's gripping onto the rubber here so you have to separate that from the rubber.

 The other end is free and there's some notches here that mark off the inches.

 What you need to do is take the old one, put it against this one,

 Basically, I'm going to take one, two, three inches off this frame.

 Take your plier and bend it inwards and it will snap right off.

 Make sure this metal thing is brought up against this side as well.

 On this side, you want to cut off a little bit past where the metal is.

 There's this side with the thing sticking out and the flat side.

 You want to insert it through the flat side and in the end, you want to lock it in with this one.

 What you do is you take the end of this and you'll see that it's going to slide right in.

 If you look at the cross section, there's a place that dips on both sides.

 The end part, like I said, this little tab here, you want to push it in so that it clicks into place.

 So now it's not going to come out without pinching it with pliers.

 Because the frame usually, you know, it'll last you many, many refills until it starts rusting or whatnot.

 Usually some people have some really nicer ones that they want to keep or maybe the stock one that they have.

 Hi everybody welcome back to the Pixar Cars Thomas and Friends Fan Channel.

 We will find out when we get it apart and see what is inside the package.

 If you have seen the movie Cars 1 this is always spinning around.

 The lights in the V8 Cafe are actually flashing to the firing order of a Chevy V8 engine.

 But your parents if they're watching this video will know exactly what that means.

 Look under here it says coolant, grease, oil, gas and lug nuts.

 etude, Andres Segovia asked him to make a complete set of 12 etudes and he did.

 right hand that's also fairly inventive and the left hand for the most part is

It's a series of moving chords just like we did with the Giuliani.

 We're going to learn the right hand in this video and then we'll be looking at all

 the different chords as we go along and then there's one section with some

Open, second fret, second fret, open, open, open, E minor chord.

There's lots of different ways of doing this right hand pattern.

 fourth string, then fifth string, third string with M, fourth string, second string with M.

So it's P, M, P, M, P, M, I, A. P, M, P, M, P, M, I, A. P, M, P, M, P, M, I, A. Very slow.

So after you do this, P, M, P, M, P, M, I, A. Second half, middle finger on the second string.

Then we're going to do the rest, P, I. Fourth string, third, P, I. Fifth string, fourth, P, I. Then you start over again.

 two, and, three, and, four, and, five, and, six, and, seven, and, eight, and.

So you can do one, E, and, a, two, E, and, a, three, E, and, a, four, E, and, a. That's one measure.

 If you're getting the published version of this etude, you'll see around each measure is a set of repeats.

They're an editorial thing, and I don't know if Villa-Lobos ever actually intended them.

If you look at his original manuscript, which is available on the internet, you can just Google Villa-Lobos Etude 1 Original Manuscript.

But if you're going to be playing it at a really fast speed, it's probably a good idea to repeat just the first two measures.

 Just so you have some time on each chord, and so that the piece is a little bit longer than, say, 45 seconds.

P, M, and incidentally, I should talk about preparation here again.

As you play P, this finger should already be prepared on the fourth string.

M, A, I, M, P, I, P, I, P, M, P, M, P, M, I, A, M, A, I, M, P, I, P, I.

Some people do P, M, P, I, P, M on the way up, so that I and M are playing M twice in a row.

 P, M, P, M, P, M. Some people do P, M, P, I the whole way through.

And that's actually a really good way to practice your string crossings.

 If you're practicing piccato and you want to do some string skipping or string crossing, that's a great way to practice that I, M, I, M. Some people do it all P, M. Some people do P, M on the way up, P, I on the way back.

M, A, I, M, P, I, P, I. So that's the right hand pattern for that.

Practice that and eventually you should be able to play it somewhat zippy.

But work up to a nice steady speed and feel comfortable with it and then we'll add the chords in.

 I love fresh pineapple, but boy you pay a lot per pound at the store when they cut it up for you.

 And I'll tell you what, they probably don't do it the way that you would like it.

 The tough skin of the pineapple makes it really difficult to cut, so serrated slicing knife and its teeth are probably the best tool for the job.

 Also, we want to cut around the contour of the item, and the width of the blade helps us do that, rather than the chef's knife which has a tendency to cut straight down to things.

 So cleaning our pineapple is going to entail removing the top down through that.

 And don't throw this away immediately, this is really good for garnish.

 If you were putting a fruit platter together, this goes on the back of the platter and your sliced fruit around it.

 Or if you're in Hawaii or a climate that will allow it, this is how you grow a new pineapple.

 And now I want to fillet the pineapple around the core, trying to get these woody eyes away.

 So let's take our first cut in a roundabout way and see how deep we have to go.

 Still, I left a lot of eyes there, that's not what I want, so I have to cut a little bit deeper.

 And again, notice I'm setting my non-knife hand, the finger of my non-knife hand, where I want that knife to start.

 Set my finger where I want the knife to start, put the knife against the finger.

 This is always the most accurate way to cut, is to start your cut with a guide of the non-knife hand.

 So as I continue to cut around the pineapple and look for the eyes, get rid of my refuse and here's our core of pineapple.

 Now this core in the middle is very woody and it's not digestible and it's really tough to chew.

 Now what I can do is cut it into quarters, if I'd like, lay them down and at an angle,

 using my serrated slicing knife at an angle, cut down through it that way, getting rid of the core.

 So if you cut it in quarters, about a 45 degree angle, push down through the pineapple and we get rid of this woody core here.

 If you would like sliced pineapple, well, easy enough to return to your chef knife and your tip fulcrum method,

 Or if you'd like to cube the pineapple, similar type thing, cut into sticks, sticks into cubes.

 And again, using my finger as a guide, set the knife against the finger, pull the knife through,

 move the finger the increment that I want, set the knife, pull it through.

 Alright, today we're going to do a little demo on how to scrape paint.

 It's covered in all this, well not covered so much anymore, but it used to have this

 One of the last people have just painted over what was falling off and it looks terrible.

 So we're trying to get that off today using this delightful tool.

 Now this thing can do a lot of damage if you use it improperly.

 You can see here it leaves ridges in the work surface as it scrapes.

 So you've got to be careful to come back and hit those with the sand or fill them in putty.

 You've got to find a nice little, you've got to find a nice medium point between force

 and finesse because you can really gouge the wood if you use too much force.

 So you've got to make sure you keep this thing flat or it will damage the wood.

 You've got to come back in later, make sure we sand off the extra.

 So if you want to do your whole house, it's going to take you a while.

Today we will be learning how to install a new hard drive in your PC.

 Now you may remember that from our memory installation video, it is necessary whenever you're going to access the inside of your computer to discharge any static electricity on your body.

 I recommend touching the power supply or a big metal part of the case.

So I'll be using my screwdriver to take the screws out of the back of the panel.

 Alright, so once you've removed the screws, you can just slide the panel backwards and then out away from the case.

 So now you have access to the inside of the case, which leads us to our next step, which is locating the appropriate port for your new hard drive.

 So now we've got our case open, so I'm going to show you how to identify an IDE or a SATA port.

 So you'll plug an IDE ribbon cable with the notch going into the corresponding notch on the plug, just like that.

 For SATA, you can see it uses a much smaller little connector in here, this black one, and you can see that it's in an L shape.

 So you're going to plug your SATA cable so that the little L on the cable corresponds to the little L on the plug.

So that's how to install the two different kinds of data cables.

 So now that we've covered the differences between the internal connectors for IDE and SATA, we're going to talk about the differences between the drives themselves.

 The biggest difference between SATA and IDE is that SATA uses the smaller connector we saw internally on the back of the drive,

 and IDE uses the big ribbon cable that we saw on the inside as well.

 So you can see here how the data cable plugs into the back of an IDE drive.

 And the data cable on a SATA drive will plug in just like this.

 So you may be asking yourself, what is the big difference between SATA and IDE, which one do I want?

 SATA is the newer standard, it offers improved speed, smaller cables for easier cable management and better airflow, as well as higher capacities now.

 IDE is getting very close to being phased out, so you will definitely want to go with a SATA drive if your motherboard supports it.

 So the next thing we're going to do is remove the hard drive cage from this case.

 You'll have to check the manual for your case in order to find out where the hard drives are installed,

 but in the case of the P180V, the case that we're using right now, we just remove this screw and slide it out from the keychain ring.

 So you can see that this cage holds four hard drives up vertically like this,

 so that means that we can install as many as four hard drives in the bottom of our chassis.

 So here I am putting the last screw into the hard drive, I've already put in the other three.

 Once that's in securely, now you can see the hard drive is held in on both sides, and we are ready to put the cage back into the case.

 The screw goes back in place to make sure that if you tip your case that the hard drive cage won't slide out.

 In this particular chassis, in order to access the connectors, which are on the hard drive that is closest towards this panel,

 I'm going to need to actually remove both side panels from the case, which is something we haven't really touched on in the past.

 So I'm just removing the screws at the back here, and then I will remove the side panel just like that.

 So as outlined when we were showing you the SATA connectors, I've plugged the SATA cable into the motherboard,

 Now, I have a newer power supply, so I have native SATA connectors on my power supply, so I can plug that directly into the back of the drive.

 Now, if you have an older model power supply that does not have any SATA connectors,

 you can use an adapter to go from a 4-pin Molex connector to a SATA power cable, just like that.

 So I've put this panel back on already, but the last step is going to be putting the panels back on your computer.

 Put it in place a little bit back, slide it forward, and then put the screws in from the back.

You need more capacity for a hard drive space, more movies, more music, more photos.

 As you may have noticed, that last little bit sounded like a wrap-up, but it wasn't,

 because if that all looked like a huge chore to you, and opening up your case is not something you really want to do to add some more storage,

 What this is, is a fantastic little device that connects to your computer via simple USB.

 You can put as many as four hard drives inside it, in here, in these handy little hot-swappable cages.

 And what this enables you to do is back up huge amounts of data, and you can also do data redundancy.

 In the event a hard drive fails, the Drobo will still maintain your data on a separate drive if you fill it up with drives.

 So you can connect it via Ethernet to a router, and then you can transfer files to and from it, just like you would another networked PC.

 So this holds two drives, and is also capable of data redundancy,

 although it cannot do on-the-fly switching of drives like the Drobo can.

 The Drobo, you can take out a drive, push another one in, and it will automatically start to back the data up onto a new drive.

 but it does have the advantage of not needing to sit on your desk and connect with USB.

 So these are a couple other options if this looks like too much of a hassle.

 Right, I just want to give you some pointers to foaming and texturing your milk for cappuccinos

 is often an area that people struggle with, it's often a lot of questions that we get

 our processes into two different processes that we're going to go through today.

 first one is foaming, that's the addition of the air into the milk and the next is texturing

 where we really mix the air smoothly through the milk to give us that really smooth, luscious

 creamy foam rather than our big bubbles, our big washing up liquid like bubbles.

 and foremost with our foaming we're going to do this as the first process and it's just

 the same as if we were whisking eggs from around cream for cream cakes.

 we were whisking eggs you're using that sort of motion and what we're actually doing is

 creating a wave and when that wave collapses it traps the air in the liquid.

 got a whisk here, we've got a steam one but if we look at the steam you'll see that it

 operate because when we've got our milk in the jug we're going to position the tip of

 the steam one just underneath the surface of the milk and what happens is it sort of

 ripples the milk away in our wave-like motions as if we were whisking.

 sort of noise which is really a sign that we're adding the air in in the right manner.

 Now that noise should be high pitched t-t-t-t sort of chirps, not big gasps of air which

Now as the foam starts to grow as we're adding air into the milk

 all we need to do to maintain that noise is just a slow steady lowering of the jug and

 40 degrees we're going to go a little bit deeper into the milk, about an inch deeper

 into the milk and we're going to move the steam wand onto the side of the jug.

 then has the sort of effect of causing our next process which is called texturing.

 texturing is when the milk starts to spin with the power of the steam around the jug

 so rather than any noise at all now it goes silent and you see a spinning motion, a whirlpool

 like motion of the milk in your jug and that takes the air that we've got and it mixes

Now that whole process we want to stop when we start to feel the

 we're getting to around about 60-65 degrees we're wanting to be turning the steam off

 change the flavour of the milk, it's what we call denaturing of proteins and it gives

 you that sort of eggy smell, that cooked smell for the milk and we're not wanting

So basically the technique is first half is foaming, steam wand just underneath

 the surface of the milk, steam wand on full power, lowering the jug to keep out the t-t-t-t

 noises and then we switch to texturing which is taking the steam wand a little bit deeper

 into the jug, onto the side of the jug, the whole process is silent now and it spins the

 the process of foaming and texturing now, so purge the steam wand, just pull it out,

 into the milk and then full power, foaming with our little churks of air going into the

 milk, starting to get a little bit of warmth in now, and then we're going to go through

 the process of purging, so onto the side, spin that milk around, starting to get hot

Give the milk a little tap, wipe the steam wand down straight away afterwards

And what we've got is really sort of nice shiny tight foam, almost

 like emulsion paint, like thick cream, but really shiny, smooth foam.

 Hi, I'm Mark Makovic, one of the executive chefs here at Wegmans.

 So I'm going to make for you today a slow-cooked Asian chuck roast.

 It's getting cold outside, so this is one of my favorite dishes to make.

 It's airtight, so it's going to keep in the fridge a little bit longer.

 All these Asian classics products are great to have in your freezer.

 It's a Japanese-style noodle that once thought I could use it in any of my recipes.

 It's part of our line of barbecue sauces developed by our chef's team.

 I keep it on hand so that I don't have to go through the trouble of cooking lemongrass,

 I think I have everything that I need here, so now it's time to cook.

 First step in any of the slow cooker recipes that we're going to teach you is to sear the meat.

 I don't want you just kind of dumping all your ingredients and then kind of taking off

 What we do first is we're going to take some pan-searing flour, going to coat this on the top,

 All right, next thing I do is take two tablespoons of olive oil and put that in the pan.

 Promise me that because once you add that oil into there, you want to make sure that

 you have something to put inside that pan to cool it down just in case your pan gets

 So that pan is on a little bit medium-high heat, and we're going to let that sear until

 It's two cups of the Thai culinary stock and one full jar of the Asian barbecue sauce.

 If you really want to maximize the flavor in this, make sure you brown all the edges

 I'm going to put the lid on that, kind of turn it on, let it cook four or five hours

 And I got two packages of clean and cut baby carrots, the fresh kind from produce.

 Actually, that's a good thing because we've cooked this tough cut of meat a long time

 Then I add the full package of broccoli, the two packages of baby cut corn, and the two

 After I add those into there, I'm going to turn it back on high, put the lid on to that,

 All right, the vegetables are cooked about 10 minutes, just enough for them to warm all

 So, a bowl, come over here with some of those noodles, which has soaked up all that flavorful

 And let's add a piece of our beef over the top that's shredding apart.

 Once you taste this, you're going to know exactly why this is one of my favorite meals

 Hey guys, I'm going to show you how to make a dry shampoo out of two ingredients, cocoa

 The lighter color here you have, the less cocoa powder you will need.

 So I'm going to start out with three tablespoons of cornstarch.

 You could use arrowroot powder if you don't have cornstarch, that's fine too.

 Now if you have really light hair, white or gray, or really, really blonde, that's all

 But if you have kind of like a really light brown hair, I'm going to add one tablespoon

 So here's the first tablespoon of cocoa powder I'm going to add to it.

 I'm just going to mix it up so you can see what color it ends up being.

 That would work fine for really, really light brown hair or blonde hair.

 I'm going to go ahead and add two more tablespoons of cocoa powder because that's how much I

 So then to apply this, all you're going to do is take a small makeup brush or an old

 And then apply it to the root of your hair and then just use your fingers to kind of

 comb it through if you have curly hair or use a brush if you have straight hair to evenly

 So easy, so frugal, and it will give any of those store-bought brands a run for their

 Be sure to subscribe for more and I'll see you again very soon.

 Welcome back to another installment of Drum Lessons with Aiden.

 I apologize for the shortage of videos lately, I've been very busy.

 We are moving to San Francisco and I am going to college in Nashville, so trying to get

 And unfortunately this will be the last video for about another month or so.

 Just getting moved in and everything, have to put the drums in storage for a little bit.

 But hopefully, cross my fingers, I'll be back in a month with a brand new drum set and a

 So faster on the bass drum, kind of substitute for a double pedal or just give yourself a

 So first I'll show you a video of what we are going to be doing and show you what it

 Okay guys, so there you go, that's what it should look like once you have got it down.

 Of course you can go faster, slower, I just showed you the basics of it, what it should

 So first I'll explain it and then I'll give you a close up of the actual bass drum and

 So basically all it is, is you want to slap your heel down on the back of the pedal and

 You don't have to change the position on your foot, it's the heel-toe method, not the slide

 Slap your heel down, rebound with your toes and make sure you give yourself a good full

 hit with the leg just like you would a normal bass drum hit because you want to make sure

 you get enough power to be able to rebound off the heel hit and actually make a sound

 And basically now I'll show you what it looks like slowed down and at a normal speed on

 Okay guys, so as I said before, first I'm going to show you a slowed down version and

 So like we said before, you want to first start by going by slapping down the heel,

 get a good bass drum hit off that, then you want to rebound with the toes.

 Of course in slow motion it doesn't really work but just to get the feel of it you start

 Yeah, so practice that and of course the metronome and you should have it down in no time.

 Make sure to always, as always, practice with a metronome at home and keep playing those

 If you have a private message or a question you want to send me, feel free.

 I'll respond as quickly as possible or you leave a comment and of course as always, like,

 comment, subscribe and hope to see you again in the future guys.

 Hello and I'd like to welcome you to the Joy of Spray Paint series.

Sorry that was a little Bob Ross cameo I'm not sure how well I portray

 start off with a layer of black without adding anything on top of it and then

 Before I cut all this down this took me about 12 minutes to do so and you

Next you want to take your sock make sure it's inside out fold it

 You don't want to make them all the same size and shape you can curve some of them

 somewhere else so it's a clean piece of dirty old sock and start dabbing away

 are a lot different than spray like space paintings and things like that but

 quite a bit of paint on and I'm just dabbing more so I sped that up a little bit.

 There's really no science to it just you know make it look like there's like an

 background from the foreground and I'm going to begin scraping away my two big

 to do than just like little trees that I do in my other paintings just because

 When you stand up close to it it's just like a big curved rectangular shape

 with a tapered bottom to it which is where the trunk is going to be.

 just keep widening out what you have for your tree as you go up the poster board

 little bit and just keep adding on to a widening out to whatever thickness you

 painting surface because otherwise the palette knife gets a lot of paint on it

 going to speed this up because I think you only need to see how I do one tree.

 The other tree is the exact same way but I made a different shape.

 leaning more to the right because if both trees were just standing up it

 just move away from it at some point using the thinner part of the palette

 trees is like how I made the tree in my cave painting tutorial but you're just

Then I took the sock and without adding any paint to it you want to dab away at the

This will pick up and remove some paint at the same time and it will

 also covers up the bottom of your trees so it doesn't look like they're just

 more on the handle and you just give a few quick flicks upright with the end of

 the palette knife to give the illusion of sticks and grass and things like that.

 And then I held it closer to the end and this is like adding highlights but

 palette knife towards the end and you just make like a little curve pattern.

 sticks and like little trees that maybe look like they're growing.

 sheet of magazine and I fold it in half and added green and yellow to the sheet.

 And I dip my sock in and I was mixing the colors together to make like a really

 dabbed in before and this is going to be our highlight color for our grasses and

But yeah, I just... and you don't want to get rid of all the dark

This is going to give like shadows and things to make it look like it's dark

Okay, then we're going to take a bigger straight edge or just a straight edge that can cover up most of the painting.

 We're going to add blue and then we're going to add white on top of it.

If you add too little, the paint won't want to smear when you go to make your water.

And then you just drag your finger across to blend the white and the blue together to give that illusion of water.

I could add some yellow or anything in there because of the light spot in the background.

And just smear it across and you'll have that illusion of water.

Like I said, take your time on this painting because like I said this took me about 12 minutes.

 Some people think conditioning is not important, but actually it helps to protect your hair.

 Once you have chosen the right conditioner for your hair, put a walnut-sized amount into your hands.

 It's best if you use shampoo and conditioner from the same collection.

 Spread the conditioner evenly across the palms of your hands before you apply to your hair.

 To help spread your conditioner properly, use a wide-tooth comb and gently comb the conditioner through your hair.

 For fine hair, try to concentrate the conditioner on your split ends to avoid weighing your hair down.

 It's important to make sure you rinse your hair completely to make it look fabulous.

 Do not rub your hair with a towel as it will tangle and damage the hair.

 Press the hair instead and keep it wrapped for a few minutes while you brush your teeth or put your makeup on.

 When combing your hair, start from the ends and go up to the roots to remove knots.

 To find out which products work best for you, go on the Know Your Hair tutorial.

 And remember to visit your hairdresser every four to six weeks to keep your hair looking its best.

 Two different computers and sort of migrated all the footage that way.

 Two different puppets, but they're both sort of edited in a linear fashion.

 Now what we're going to do is grab the foam head that you've just made and you can either cram it through the mouth or

I prefer the mouth, but then you run the risk of ripping the actual mouth when you're putting in

 and basically, like I said, you're just gonna cram it in and make sure that it's in the

 Head, you're not going to worry where it is positioned wise yet

 And you're just gonna grab the fabric and put it over the mouth

 But I used to do that, but I don't like doing it this way that way this way is a little bit easier

 Puppet and what I do is if it's fur I'll use a dog brush or cat brush and basically brush the fur

 Curled up into the head that sort of thing and I'm just gonna start to position where the

 What you're going to do is make sure that the seam on the top of the head on the inside matches

This is really important because you want to align these perfectly and you're going to pin it

 And you're going to do the same on the other corner of the mouth now you can do it doesn't need to be in any necessarily

 Any pattern like I'm doing it could be the bottom first and then the top but usually I try to get that the four

 The four main parts of the mouth to meet and I can try it on just make sure

 When you try it on that your fingers aren't going into the needles that you just put in and it seems like it's a good fit

 I recommend doing that just so that you know that it is a perfect fit and it's not misaligned in any way

 Now the cool thing is is I've gone around and pin put pins all through out the outside of the mouth

 What I like to do is put a little bead of glue in the back first and you really can't see it from this angle

 but you'll see it in a different angle and you're just gonna put a small little bead and

 Now you don't want to put tons and tons of hot glue in there because what'll happen is you'll go to

 Press the fabric down or yeah, press the fabric down and it'll gush out onto the mouth plate

 It's really important that you get a good adhesion around the mouth because that's the part that's gonna be used the most

 Give it a couple minutes to for all the hot glue to set and then you're going to take out the pins now

 Use the round headed pins just because they're easy to refine especially in fur and you won't put on

 Put the puppet on and find your fingers getting caught by pins and after that basically I go around

 That haven't been quite glued properly or that the glue isn't hasn't set properly

 It's gonna you're gonna have glue all on your mouth plate and it's gonna look terrible

 All you have to do is get a red sharpie if it's a red fabric or whatever color fabric is in your mouth

 a little small little scissors and clean up the edges sometimes fit there is a edge to be cleaned and

 faster than I think if you were to sew the the actual mouth into onto the

Oh, there's parts here that are that I still need to pull out using a needle or use my dog brush

 What we're going to do now is start working on the arms and features and everything else with the puppet

 So give me an email at Tom at the creature works dot CA if you have any questions.

 I'm tying it with one of my favourite materials, black pheasant tail, dyed black pheasant tail

I would say pheasant tail fibres are easily one of my favourite fibres for

 uni thread in black, I'm going to put down about half a dozen turns of thread, just at

 one of the best materials you could use is marabou, in this case white.

 off, just moisten it so it doesn't go all over the place, tie it forward with the eye,

 two or three turns down, at a slight angle cut the marabou, the base piece, at the back.

 Now, you can trim this straight away if you want, which I'm going to do, probably around

 tin, not like a Mylar which is basically plastic, this is actual tin.

Now what I do is, you've tore them off, and there's the roots, hold

Just work your way up, so you get, when you let the thread go, it's

Take your time, now when you get to this point here, cross your thread,

Now you're looking probably, it's five turns anyway, so we're just into

 Now, if you've ever heard of a flag called the grey boy, it's a midge pattern.

 will give that grey colour onto the fine hairs of the pheasant tail, which gives it its look.

 This is a good midge pattern, it's a dressing I would have actually, especially when I'm

Now what I'm going to do here, I'm going to add in some wing buds.

 It's optional where you do this, this is a jungle cop, naturally split as you can see.

 All I do is, with the good side of the feather facing up the way, just force split fibre

Just bring your thread round two or three times and then tighten up.

You could use gooseback if you want, use fine holographic or whatever.

 seal spur if you want, but I like the rabbit, it's much finer and softer for the smaller

 Now I'm going to varnish the thread in this way by simply wiping some varnish onto the thread and then

Just bring your finger on the top here, holding back the marabou.

If you look closely, the marabou gives a great impression of the gills as they would

For all it is a bit of marabou, there is a tiny bit of movement.

 Now let's go in here and do the first Elevate Tours by Diesel Ducy unboxing in a hotel

 That's right, you all remember this place, Quality Inn in Bristol.

 But before we get started, another huge thanks to Illegal Popcorn, and the awesome people

 over at Schindler in Switzerland for authorizing this piece to be sent.

 This is a Schindler, I think an FIGS, call station from over in Europe.

 This is where the micro switchboard would clip onto right there.

 But still, nonetheless, this is a very neat piece from the fine folks at Schindler over

 So, Manuel, thank you so much for this amazing Schindler elevator call station from Switzerland.

 Sometimes if you're by yourself, this can be a difficult chore.

 So what I do is I just get it started, just keep pulling it, and then take what's left

 here and tie it around a table leg or something that's not going to move, something steady.

 You don't have to tie a heavy knot, just something that's going to hold it.

 Then you're going to step back and you're just going to start pulling.

 So we're probably going to have to change this knot a few times.

 If you have two people, one person can hold one end and then you don't have to do this.

 You're going to have to pull very carefully to go over that knot.

 As you see, you're going to go over the part that you started on.

 If I had sewed this tight, I'd be able to turn it, but it would be a real difficult job.

 I'm going to go back to the table, cut them into three pieces for my braided tie back.

 We had no waste because we measured off our finished length when we started.

 Since it's going to be a tie back and I cut it in three pieces, I'm just going to find

 If your machine can't sew something real heavy, you might have to do this by hand.

 Like I said, I just cut a piece of scrap and then I just don't need that piece.

 Hey kids today, we're making chocolate cheesecake stuffed strawberries

 Cream cheese at room temperature and I just measured out a third of a cup of

 Alrighty so it's nice and smooth I scraped down the sides to make sure everything got incorporated really well

 Delicious, so we're gonna go ahead and move on to the next step earlier.

 Baby and then we're gonna create an X I have made these before in a plain

 I will provide a link in the description box below as well as in the

 alright, so what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna continue doing this and then I'm going to get my

 then I'm gonna fill the bag with my cheesecake and I will then be able to

I cut the hole I added in my tip and I will just go in and fill my bag up.

 Hey guys, it's Dave and today we're gonna make some enchiladas, Primal Style.

 Alright, well Monica and I are, we picked up a copy of the Primal Blueprint cookbook the other day

 and it's been, we waited way too long to get a hold of this thing.

 Have made a couple of meals out of it, all of which have been really good.

 And of course, in line with the Primal Blueprint theory of things,

 which has a lot to do with eating lots of plants and animals and not eating any grains.

 Well, what we're gonna do is we're gonna use some egg whites and a little half and half

 And then those crepes will be the foundation of what would normally be the tortilla.

 Now we're just gonna use, I've got all organic ingredients here,

 some organic chicken, organic tomatoes, these are canned tomatoes, ready cut canned tomatoes.

 You can use, you know, regular tomatoes if that is what you like.

 One of the things I really love about the Primal Blueprint is the way Mark Sisson, the author,

 And so it's not just about eating, you know, everything but grains

 Organic chicken, organic eggs, organic produce, stuff that's good for your body.

 So, that's what we're gonna do today and I'll kind of film little snippets of this as we go.

 Monica does all of our cooking and she's a very, very good cook.

 to see whether I can kind of put this together and figure out how to cook something that

 What I'm doing here, I've got a poblano chili and just a nice little orange pepper there.

 I'm gonna broil these for about 10 minutes, maybe 15 at the most.

 Pull them out, put them in a plastic bag here and the skins will just peel right off.

 So, take the skins off of those and then we'll be using those to flavor our enchiladas.

 Alright, so I've got this poblano chili and I got the skins off of that and the orange pepper.

 And, in here with some diced tomatoes and I'm just gonna puree them.

 And, this will basically be the base of the sauce that we're gonna use.

 Okay, so now I've got an onion that I've kind of quartered here and some little garlic cubes.

 They're...this is the brand and Monica gets them at Trader Joe's.

 You know, not perfectly primal or anything but generally pretty healthy.

 Alright, so I've got my onions chopped up here, sautéing over kind of low-medium heat.

 And, I'm just gonna add a little bit of chicken here and just kind of brown it, basically.

 In the tomato sauce that we made earlier, let it cook up for a while and then move to the next step.

 Alright, so onion sautéed, chicken is now sort of browned and I'm just gonna add the tomato sauce that I made.

 I've got a little bit longer than that that I wanna let it cook.

 So, I'll probably let it go for close to an hour on really, really low heat.

 I forgot to mention earlier, sautéed the onions and the chicken, browned the chicken in coconut oil.

 So, you can use it in a lot of different places where olive oil might not work.

 Alright, so, cooked the chicken in the sauce for about 20 minutes.

 Now, I'm just slicing it up into little bits and putting it back in there.

 Alright, so, by far the most challenging part of this recipe is making the tortillas.

 So, I've got like an egg white and half and half mixture here, which is what they tell you to do.

 And then, they tell you to just kind of put enough in there to cover the base of the pan.

 At the end of the day, you get sort of this, I don't know, it's like an egg white flat thing.

 This is the, you can see they're just like little egg wrapped enchiladas, basically.

 So, I'm gonna make a couple with regular tortillas for the kids as well.

 We've got three, no, four made, I think, with four, three or four made with the egg.

 And then, a couple made just with regular tortillas that the kids will probably enjoy more.

 Baked it in the oven for a little while with a little bit of cheese sprinkled on the top.

 Hi, I'm Shelly Young, owner of The Chopping Block, and today I'm going to teach you how

 Today, when I came into the farmer's market, I walked through the market, I looked at the

 different stalls, I landed at this one, because what caught me was the aroma.

 I could actually smell the melon, so that's the first sign that you can see that your

 So when I look at these, I just pick one up, smell it individually, it's a nice, bright

 I smell it, it's not quite ready, but I know it'll be ready in just a couple of days.

 So we're back from the market, we've got our beautiful, ripe melon, and next I want to

 So the first thing I do when I cut a melon is wash it thoroughly, dry it off, and then

 The next thing I want to do is take my knife and just follow the contour of the melon,

 You really want to get any part of the melon off that is green, unless you happen to like

 Traditionally, people like the really ripe part, so the green part doesn't have as much

 Simply rotating the melon and cutting them as wide as you like, usually about a half

 These are perfect to wrap in prosciutto and serve as an appetizer, or of course for breakfast.

 If you want to cut these into cubes, just simply take your wedges like that and cut

 Hi, my name is Jenny and I'm from Mid-State Equipment in Gainesville, Wisconsin and I'm

 going to show you how to take a deck off of an X500 tractor, which would also be the same

 First thing I'm going to want to do is come over here and I'm going to want to take my

 deck and I'm going to want to put it to the lowest setting right there.

 Then when I have it there, I'm going to make sure I can turn all my deck wheels.

 There, now I have all my wheels set sideways so it will roll right out.

 Then I'm going to come over back to my foot pedal over here and I'm going to take and

 Then once I let it down, I'm going to be able to take my pedal, pull it back.

 Now when I come under here, I'm going to be able to take my belt tension and I'm going

 Then by doing that, I'll be able to shimmy my drive belt off, which will be right here

 I'll pull the pin off of this and then I'll be able to lift this up, go back to the other

 Now my lift arms are free so I'll go back over to the foot pedal and when I pull this

 back, push that down and my lift arms will raise up out of my way.

 Now my deck is off other than moving it forward to get it off of the lift bracket up here.

 Lift it up, go back over on the other side, lift it off of here.

 Hi, I'm Rebecca Brandt and today we're going to make pumpkin cupcakes.

 The ingredients for this dish are flour, sugar, eggs, butter, baking powder, cinnamon, nutmeg,

 ginger, vanilla extract, powdered sugar, food coloring, and the star, pumpkin.

 I just used a pumpkin from my porch from Halloween and that's what's going to make our pumpkin

 So I've lined my cupcake pan with little papers and I preheated my oven to 350 degrees.

 So I took my porch pumpkin and cut it in half, took the seeds out and put it face side down

 on this baking tray lined with foil and I cooked it for two hours at 400 degrees.

 If you want to see the start to finish on that, check out my Halloween pumpkin pie recipe

 For this recipe I need three quarter cups of pumpkin puree for the cake mix and one

 You can use a potato masher if you have one or you can use your blender, food processor,

 but I do things the old fashioned way because it's sometimes simpler than having to clean

 So if you come across a little piece of skin like this one, you want to take that out because

 I've gotten so many comments that the only kind of pumpkin you can use is a sugar pie

 When I make cakes, I always cream together my sugar and my oil or my butter.

 So I'm putting in one half stick of butter with that and we're going to mix that up.

 Make sure your butter is room temperature so it mixes with that sugar well.

 Now I'm going to add three quarters of a cup of my pumpkin puree.

 So my proportion for my pumpkin pie spice is one teaspoon cinnamon with one half teaspoon

 Now that's the proportions I use every time for anything that requires a pumpkin spice.

 So we're going to mix all our wet ingredients with some of those spices.

 I'm going to dump in my one and a quarter cups flour and I'm going to kind of aerate

 it as it goes in because aerating is what's really happening when you're sifting.

 Our two teaspoons of baking powder has to get mixed in that flour pretty evenly so I'm

 Here goes those two teaspoons of the baking powder and look at that.

 So I'm going to mix that for about one to two minutes until it's thoroughly combined

 So with an ice cream scoop I'm going to put my batter in my little cups.

 This is the most handy dandy trick and one of the reasons why you like to use the same

 measuring device in the same way, it's going to cook evenly in your oven.

 The rule of thumb is to fill them two thirds the way up and that's about exactly one ice

 Okay, I don't want to waste any and I see I have a little bit left in the bottom of

 this mixing bowl so I'm going to find it and I'm going to stick it in the ones that

 So depending on your oven those are probably going to have to bake between 16 to 20 minutes

 So to make that frosting I'm using a third cup of the pumpkin puree and that goes in

 That's one teaspoon cinnamon, one half teaspoon nutmeg, and one half teaspoon ginger.

 While that mixer's on low I'm going to start to add my powdered sugar.

 So all together that's three and a half cups of powdered sugar.

 The moisture from the pumpkin puree is what's going to bind it all together to make the

 This is interesting because this is one frosting that I'm not using any butter in.

 I'm using a little yellow and a little red because I want that beautiful orange color

 That looks like just the outside of that pumpkin that I used to make it.

 Yes, finally the whole house smells so good from these pumpkin cupcakes.

 So let them thoroughly cool because if not your frosting is going to go all over the

 All right, I took them out of that pan and I scattered them about so they could cool

 I'm always in it to win it and winning it is getting that first bite in my mouth as

 If you like me, I hope you comment and you share me with your friends.

 I always make a little extra in my recipes for frostings because I always go through

 it and all those other recipes never seem to have enough for me.

 Oh man, I am telling you, this is the most moist pumpkin cupcake.

Yeah, so this is our rework, kind of, of a white Russian, and we dubbed it the Svetlana.

 Yeah, and we're just using a little smidge, because we found when we did it just alone that it didn't really have that kind of mouth-feel body that a liqueur has, with your shot.

 And so you're doing a shot of espresso, and then you're doing a shot of vodka?

 Despite the working area of molten O-ring chains being sealed and greased inside, you

 still need to clean and lubricate the outside of your chain to ensure the efficiency of

 In this video, we'll show you how to properly and efficiently clean and lubricate your motorcycle

 To make your life easier, a motorcycle rear stand is very helpful, as is a drip tray,

 cardboard or rags, something to clean your chain with and chain lubricant.

 That is a grunge brush, a wonderful piece of engineering that will greatly assist you

 in cleaning a motorcycle chain and costs a few dollars on eBay.

 Jack the rear wheel up, put the bike in neutral and place some cardboard behind the chain

 Continue spraying along the top or inside of the chain until you've done a complete

 Place cardboard behind the chain again to protect the other parts of your bike.

 Leave the bike for around 10 minutes to let the chain cleaner penetrate and dry.

 Even without taking a brush to the chain, a good quality cleaner will already make it

 First, manually rotate the back tyre like you did when applying the chain cleaner.

 Or, put the bike in first, turn it on and use your left hand on the clutch lever to

 Before applying the chain lubricant, you may want to hose the bike down to remove any grime

 Before you begin lubricating, a quick run down on what it is that you're spraying.

 Essentially, you're lubricating the external sections of the chain that make contact with

 Specifically, you're lubricating between the side plates, which are made up of an outer

 When applying the lubricant, you can either be surgical, using just as much as you need,

 Do it regularly enough, you'll enjoy smoother drive and longer lasting chain and sprockets.

Tony from Learn Auto Body and Paint.com and in this short video you're going

 we have enamel paints a lot of guys are like man what do I mix this stuff with?

 get basically a gallon of paint if you're doing a complete paint job here.

 eight parts of this you're going to add one part of reducer and one part of catalyst which

 eight cups of paint you're going to put one cup of reducer and one cup of activator.

 if you're working with Chromabase, if you're working with DuPont or the Shopline version.

 Deltron is just the more expensive version of, sorry I got my neighbors over here cutting

 Reducers, this stuff will mix with your base coat and your clear coats.

 We also want to talk about the temperatures of reducers but we actually have another video

So if you want to learn more about the temperatures of reducers and hardeners,

Okay so usually a complete paint job, you only need about 3 quarts which

You'll probably have extra if you're not doing a large truck or something

A lot of people like to think too much and get all confused about

But when you start getting to candies, stuff like that, it's a little different but

 Paint, learn more about how to customize and paint your car, check out LearnAutoBodyAndPaint.com

 right now and get a free 85 page manual that talks about Auto Body and Paint, all kinds

 of procedures and steps so you can learn how to customize your project from home.

 care if you want to put spoilers on it, body kits, or you're trying to fix some rust spots.

 Whatever you want to do, check out LearnAutoBodyAndPaint.com right now, right after this video or if you're

 You got something to draw with, a piece of paper and a little artist with you.

 This activity we're going to use shapes and so it's going to be a lot of fun to build

 Okay, little man, we're going to start with our paper horizontal and the first thing we're

 going to do is draw a straight line right in the middle of our paper, okay?

 Okay, can you draw a line right here in the middle of your paper and we can connect the

 Okay, now we're going to draw a curved line underneath and this is going to be for our

 So we're going to come down like this and it's kind of like we're drawing a smile shape

 So start there and then draw a big smile underneath and then back up.

 So we're going to draw a big oval on this side over here and this is going to be for

 So we're going to draw a line that comes down right here and connects to right there.

 The other line, and we draw another line right there and it kind of almost looks like a triangle,

 So we're going to draw a line that comes out over here and draw a curly line that comes

 Okay, now we're going to come back down with another curly line like that.

 So we're going to draw from that point all the way down to there.

 We're going to draw the bottom of his foot and then connect it back up to his body.

 As you can see, we now have the premium ballast securely mounted to the wiring harness here.

 We can now go ahead and get the bulb installed into the socket.

 On here it tells you whether it's on the open or locked position.

 If you turn counterclockwise, you unlock the bulb from the housing.

 You should be able to find the grooves pretty easily and press it in.

 You take your white retaining ring here, place it back on, and twist it shut.

 Now you can take the bulb, make sure you find where the grooves are on each side, line them

 It should just take a little bit of jiggling around to find it.

 There are two smaller wires here coming from the bulb that connect to the ballast.

 The wire that came from the harness on the other side, right here, needs to connect to

 You may want to electrical tape this connection just to make sure it's secure.

 Just like the driver's side, the passenger's side bulb install has to be the same.

 Remove the socket from the bulb by twisting to the open position.

 Make sure you get it in securely and put the white ring around it when you're done.

 Reconnect the lock and you can now get the rest of these connectors connected.

 Small signal wire, remember you want to electrical tape this connection right here.

 These two wires here will be connected to the wires coming from the ballast.

 At this time, you can go ahead and connect the ballast wire to the ballast on this passenger's

 Now that the wiring is all set, let's go ahead and test the new Bi-Xenon headlights.

 The relay and the rest of the wires here have been bundled together down here at the bottom.

 I've actually wrapped the positive wire around the battery coming through here.

 The wires leading to the driver's side go underneath the radiator housing here.

 As you can tell, they're switching up to high beam, both in the temporary state as well

 So, welcome to the Permajet instructional video and on this demonstration we're just

 going to show how pretty straight forward it is to stretch an inkjet canvas wind using

 And that is the method whereby we actually wrap the image around the side of the stretch

 So we have our 18 x 12 stretcher frame and as always we must make sure that the profiled

 edges face the front of the canvas as those profiled edges prevent the canvas from touching

 the wooden frame and leaving an unsightly wooden frame indentation.

 The gallery wrap system is much simpler than wrapping a gallery with white edges as we

 are actually going to wrap the image all the way around the sides so we don't have any

 So first of all we'll start on the side here and to start just three staples at an angle

 If those staples just protrude slightly we just finish those with the hammer.

 We didn't use the canvas pliers there as we don't always need to use the pliers for tension.

 Doing it this way we can staple on that side, rotate 180 degrees and on this side we can

 By using the neck or the back of the pliers we can actually use that to roll the canvas

 pliers and that provides us with that tremendous amount of tension.

 So already we're pulling tension into that canvas so you may be able to see there's a

 slight kink in the canvas there and that's just again showing how much tension is applied.

 Rotate 90 degrees, always try and lift and rotate rather than dragging the canvas across

 This is a shorter length so I'll just place two staples in the middle, rotate and place

 Again if any of the staples sit slightly high just tap those home with a pin hammer.

 If you leave those staples high you can allow the canvas to drop some of the tension there.

 So we now, if we look at the back again, have a couple of staples on the short length, two

 Because we're working with the canvas in portrait mode we're going to have the corner

 Much harder to see a corner fold here at the top than it is at the side.

 This is the most commonly viewed angle if you're looking at side or top.

 So if you're a bit limited on the amount of surplus canvas you have you may not easily

 With relatively small canvases you can simply use the grip from your fingers, like so, because

 when we rotate by 180 degrees we've got a little bit more surplus canvas here and that's

 where we can bring back our stretcher pliers and really put tension into that canvas.

 So we're taking the staples into the corner on the two sides and that's already starting

 If we take out some of the surplus canvas just by cutting out a corner there that will

 make the fold much simpler and will also remove some of the volume of the canvas in the corner.

 So the neatest, simplest fold is to tuck in, gather up a small fold in that corner

 Certainly my preference is just to taper that in again so that we don't leave too much canvas

 Using the canvas pliers again because any final stapling here now needs lots of tension.

 If it's a little bit cumbersome in the corner, revert to using your hands.

 Having completed the canvas by folding all four corners, sometimes a good idea just to

 go across and tap home any staples that haven't quite given us full tension.

 Again, if we leave any staples raised up it may allow the canvas to drop tension in the

 And then just to fold that over, we're looking for a nice bounce on the canvas, not quite

 And this will be coming off screens, fading to the corner, fading up, maybe off of ball penetration.

 Getting yourself in a position where you're open so you can shoot the ball.

 So again, the most important factor in this are going to be your feet.

 What your feet do, how you set them, what foot you plant on is going to create the rhythm of your shot.

 So as much rhythm as you can create that you can get into, the better shooter you're going to be.

 So first thing that we're going to go over is planning your inside foot.

 So if I'm coming off a screen this way and my left foot is on the inside, meaning it's the closer foot to the basket.

 You're not going to try to square up on the catch when you're moving laterally.

 And I'm going to place my right foot, and since I'm right-handed, my right foot is slightly in front of my left, down.

 And then again, I'm extending, high finish, elbow above the eye, everything that we went over previously.

 So again, as I'm coming to the ball, as I'm curling off a screen, as I'm straight cutting off a screen, I'm going right.

 And then I'm extending straight up and down, shooting the ball.

 But again, if you can plant and pivot, and the important part is on this pivot,

 is I'm on the ball of my foot, my knees are slightly bent, my hips are back.

 If my hips start pushing forward, this is where balance issues can come into play.

 So you want to be in your shooting position as you're pivoting.

 Hips are back, I catch, pivot, pull to my shooting pocket, and then straight up and down I'm shooting the ball.

 So if I'm running to the outside or if I'm running left, my inside foot is going to be my right foot.

 My left foot is going to end up slightly behind my right because I'm right-handed.

 So another time you're going to be on the move, you may not necessarily be in a running motion,

 so your inside foot is not going to go down, but you may be sliding.

 Someone's penetrating, you're kind of sliding to an open position, getting yourself in a window so you can shoot the ball.

 You're just going to one-two step, and the one-two step is going to be directly at the basket and not sideways.

 Again, you're creating rhythm, momentum going towards the basket, you're not fading right or left.

 So as I go, I'm just going to slide, and as the ball comes to me, I'm stepping left-right.

 I'm stepping left-right on the catch, I pull the ball to the shooting pocket, and then from there I'm extending into my shot.

Some players are a lot more comfortable with one foot down at all times,

 But you could step right-left, pull the ball to the shooting pocket, and again I'm up in my shot.

 If I step right-left, this left foot, if I'm right-handed, must stay behind my right foot.

 If I get it in front, I'm off balance, my elbow's not in line, my hips aren't in line, my knees aren't in line.

 As I'm sliding, left-right, pull, on the catch, hips back, knees slightly bent, I'm on the balls of my feet,

 Same thing, hips back, knees slightly bent, ball to the shooting pocket, and now I'm extending up into my shot.

 What you do with your feet when you're on the move, the quicker you can get them set,

 the more on balance you can be, the better shooter you will become.

 And again, when you're a shooter, you're rarely standing and shooting.

 So when we're talking about on-the-move shooting, a couple things you really want to focus on

 Your feet have to be on your toes, your feet have to be constantly moving,

 so you can get them set very quickly, on balance, quickness of your shot, rhythm, all those different things.

 Hi, I'm Mary Ajagwe and this video is about how to use the EatRight Yam Pounder.

 Let us go through the process of preparing fresh pounded yam with our EatRight Yam Pounder.

 First, you place the EatRight Yam Pounder on a flat surface so as to enable it to stand properly and not spill over.

 Then you open the cover and take the bowl out by turning it to the left direction.

 Fill up the steam cup at the base of the Yam Pounder with water.

 Then you put back the bowl to sit up on top of the steam cup which is already filled with water.

 Turn the bowl slightly to the right direction so that it locks into position securely.

 After that, you pour in your fresh yam cut in cubes of 1.5 inches.

 When the pounded yam is served, you clean up both the bowl and the steam cup.

 2004 Infiniti G35X, we are doing the brakes, and we do the front brakes.

 For anybody that wants to do the axle, this is the bolt for the axle.

 And we take the, we install the 13mm bolt that attaches to the brake caliper housing.

 Well the first thing you need is one of these things right here.

 Now you need like a long, you actually want to cut out like a long aluminum foil.

 This way one side is going to be right here on top of the pan and the other side you're

 Then you'll need a spare bowl, that's actually where you're going to crack the, you're actually

 So it doesn't have to be this exact shape but anywhere along this side.

 You can take whole wheat bread crumbs if you have access to them, I just didn't so I prefer

 You want to preheat your oven to 400 degrees for about 5 minutes.

 And you want to spray some of this, just a little bit, just so it won't stick at the

 Next thing you want to do is you want to cut your chicken up in 4 ounce portions.

 Alright next up you're going to prepare the bread crumb mixture.

 Also feel free to throw in any kind of seasoning you actually want into this mixture here.

 The only reason why I don't have them here today is because I'm actually, what do you

 As you all know I'm on a clean buck so if I put too many egg yolks then I'm going to

 have to cut down on my peanuts and cashews and stuff like that to fit my macros.

 Which I hate doing because if I have to pay between egg yolks and almonds and cashews

 and stuff like that, I go with the cashews because they're very expensive and if I actually

 Alright so now you have your 3 egg whites, you have your parmesan and your breadcrumbs

 What you're going to do is after you wash your chicken and clean it out, you're going

 You're going to dip it in here first, then in here, then you're going to place it on

 This way the breadcrumbs and the parmesan cheese is going to stick.

 You're going to throw it in this mixture, roll it around like you're making a snowball.

 Then what you want to do is you want to grab the leftover of this.

 Alright, when you're finished, next up you want to cover this up and place it in the

 Now in the meantime, for the 45 minutes that your chicken is going to be in the oven, you

 want to make sure you're either cooking your brown rice or you're heating it up if you

 I'm going to do the math and tell you guys exactly what the micronutrients are for this

 But it's pretty much 5 ounces of chicken breast, boneless, with all that cheese and good shit

 Hey everyone, so today I'm going to teach you how to do a sea green water marbling.

 As you can see, I have a base coat of a navy blue and I've prepped my finger with tape.

 The actual colors for the water marble are going to be a lighter navy than your base

 And in the beginning, I'm just going to start using the lighter navy and the teal.

 And then after a while, you're going to want to add in your green.

 So take your orange stick and start from the top or anywhere and go towards the middle.

 And then from there, take any outer point and just keep dragging it towards the same

 And then when you have the design you like, just take your finger and dip it in and remove

 I know it's a little blurry on my camera, but I'll have some pictures at the end that'll

 Chana means you know we have lot of chana, different kinds of chanas.

 So here what I did is I have soaked this chana dal for atleast 4 to 5 hours and just removed

 You can just add some spinach and some coriander and some amaranthus leaves.

 So here I am going to add little bit of green chillies for nice spiciness and some salt.

 So first we are going to blend this and make it into a nice fine paste.

 So this we are going to shallow fry it or pan fry it by adding little bit oil or even

 So dear friends here is our nice chana and our green paste is ready.

 Just take it into a bowl and in this we are going to add some more of seasoning.

 We are going to add little bit of coriander powder and some amchur powder very little

 Because we added greens some moisture will come out from the greens.

 So we are going to add some chickpea flour to give little bit of binding.

 You know either this you can deep fry it or even you can shallow fry it or even you can

 Just make into nice round dumplings and then we are going to shallow fry it.

 And now we are going to make it into small dumplings and make our kebabs.

 So dear friends here just make a nice small dumpling first and then make it into a nice

 You know whichever shape or whichever size you want you can just make this.

 And this please cook it in a very very slow flame otherwise you know this will cook fast

 So we are going to shallow fry this till we get a nice golden color both the sides.

 So just switch off the flame and now this you can serve it hot hot.

 You know once your mixture is ready anytime if you have any party or anything just make

 a small dumplings make it into kebab shapes and just saute it and just give it hot hot.

 Or what you can do is just the cooked ones what you can just keep your oven on in a grill

 mode and you can just you know don't grill it just on the grill mode and once you switch

 off your grill mode put this for you know 5 to 10 minutes in that and this will be again

 Just remove it on to a plate and this you can enjoy with nice tomato ketchup.

 So isn't it very very simple to make it and that too for this winter or anytime if you

 So be careful this is very very hot because we added chickpea flour little bit this is

 So very hot wow see because I cooked on a very very slow flame if you see this has cooked

 Perfect spices are there not too spicy this is little bit mild and even this you can feed

 So dear friends if you want to enjoy this make it and feed your family and you also

 So see you in another session with some more recipes that too home style.

 Today I'm going to make pasta dough and this is really basic pasta dough for anyone.

 Now basically all you're going to need is flour, eggs and salt.

 Now the easiest thing to do if you've got some scales like I've got here, the easiest

 thing to do if you want to know the ratio for eggs and flour, it's basically every 100

 So I hadn't really kind of worked out how much I was going to make but I might go for

 You know some people put it all on the bench but from experience most people don't like

 doing that so I thought I'll just do it in a bowl just to make it a little bit easier.

 Like you don't want to have just four eggs if you're going to use 400 grams of flour

 You can, like some people add different things to their pasta but generally it's just flour

 Sometimes people add a little bit of olive oil or what have you.

 Alright now I'm going to use the flour again so I'll put that there.

 Now try and use organic eggs too and free range eggs because the yolk is a lot better

 And then what I can do, if it's a bit too wet I can just put a little sprinkle of flour

 And you'll find that the finer bits will all start to clump together.

 Now I would suggest getting, make sure your hands are clean of course.

 If you find that it's a little bit kind of dry, try and knead it as much as you can in

 Because you should, well you don't have to, but you probably will flour the bench.

 Now I'm just going to go to the bench because that's what I'm used to.

 What was kind of dry a few minutes ago will become kind of sticky.

 Now I normally, I'll let this rest for a while before I roll it out.

 I'll come back and I'll do another video showing you rolling it out and we'll make something with it.

 I just wanted to do this video just to show you the basic pasta dough.

 And obviously from this you can roll it out for lasagna sheets or ravioli or spaghetti.

 I'm showing you some of the most basic and popular Pilates exercises.

 Right now, I'm going to show you one of the most fundamental, they're pushups.

 Now pushups done in Pilates are much like pushups done in other sports.

 However, we're just going to do them a little more slower and a little more controlled.

 So go ahead and sit yourself back towards the mat just a little bit.

 Go ahead and walk those hands forward just so they're just below your shoulders.

 What I don't want you to do is to let your hips sag forward or for you to tuck your tail

 I want you to have a nice flat back, abs pulled in, shoulders open.

 Take it down for about three counts, nice and easy, just about to your nose touches,

 Now if you'd like to take it to a full pushup, just tuck those toes under, extend those legs.

 Unroll your vertebrae one at a time so that you're sitting up nice and tall.

 To watch the other segments in this video series or for how to workout with a workout

 So from there, once you can play that basic rhythm, first of all, play it as a rim tap.

 Every time we play a rim tap, we're going to play three triplets with the right hand.

 So the counting of that with the right hand and not the left hand is just 1 and a, and

 And play a slight accent on the first because you're playing that with the rim tap and the

 I'm playing the accents with the shoulder of the stick on the edge of the hi-hats.

 And the non-accents I'm playing with the tip of the stick on the top.

 So that's the first way that you can play a Bukutsi and that's probably the easier way

 because all you're doing with the bass drum is just playing 4 on the floor.

 That works really well at like a driving up tempo thing like...

 In the next example we're going to play a more intricate bass drum figure.

 We're going to bring the tempo back for a start but the bass drum pattern that we're

 Now that's almost the same ironically as like a 3-2 Afro-Cuban clave.

 With the extra note on 4 and a leading back into the downbeat on beat 1.

 Now because we're now playing a syncopated pattern on the bass drum and we don't have

 it like as the reference, you know, the 4 on the floor driving the whole way through

 and given that the left hand is also playing that 3 over 4 polyrhythm, we need something

 I explain this a lot with things like Salsa and Afro-Cuban in the Latin Styles DVDs.

 Quite often when we've got all these different rhythms falling around the beat, in order

 to tie it all back in together and give it some kind of a reference like a pulse, we

 So with the right hand now, I'm going to play just quarter notes on the hi-hat and that

 Particularly in beats 2 and 3, this is where you can come a little bit unstuck because

 Hi everyone, welcome to Hayes Kitchen, I've finally given in to all the peer pressure

 I'm hoping I can teach you all, you can learn these in 5-10 minutes, you can do it with

 You're going to learn it nice and easy and it's going to have really simple step by step

 So first up, what better than an English classic, we're going to be doing poached eggs on top

 of gluten free toast with spinach, mushrooms and roasted vine tomatoes.

 For this we're going to need the ingredients of, we have some gluten free bread, we have

 some whole mushroom, we've got some vine tomatoes, Kerrygold butter, some chives, basil to garnish,

 free range eggs, handful of spinach, salt, pepper and some white wine vinegar.

 We're going to need two pans for this and an oven on to do your roasted vine tomatoes.

 The back pan is going to be for spinach and mushrooms, front pan is going to be for boiling

 water and you want to be adding some white wine vinegar and salt.

 It sounds silly, I've seen so many people do poached eggs which makes such a hash but

 So water's coming up to boil, white wine vinegar inside, big pinch of salt.

 Now the reason I do that is it stops you having to do the vortex thing which I see so many

 You don't need to be spinning this as quickly as you can, pouring in hot water, spinning

 You want to be doing three or four or five or six or however many eggs you want to do

 but they'll all come out perfect as long as you use just the right amount of white wine

 Reason being, when you drop your egg into that water, the white is going to come over,

 the yolk's going to drop down first of all and the white's going to come up and cover

 So right, keep boiling away, pan at the back is getting nice and hot, let's start cooking.

 type mushrooms just because they're full of flavour and they go really well with the spinach

 At this point I usually crack my eggs and put them straight into a ramekin, it just

 makes it a little bit easier if you just tip it into the water.

 Turning that heat back up again is going to bring that white so it covers the yolk as I said earlier.

 Get your toast down, get your little vine tomatoes, poke a little hole in the end and

 And this is all about the dressing of the plate, making things look a little bit prettier.

 And you get two little vine tomatoes like that, don't they look pretty?

 As you can see, this is what you want to look for for the eggs.

 These are brilliant just presentation wise and also spinach is obviously a very watery

 type green so it tends to leak off a little bit of juice at the end.

 I generally don't but if I do use any butter it will be Kerrygold.

 Purely because that's from a grass fed cow which means it's better for you basically.

 You've got Mother's Day coming up, what better way than to surprise your wife with a meal

 like this in bed first thing in the morning and just show off your new cooking skills.

 I think that fuels down to happy wife, happy life which is what you've all hoped for.

I don't know if you can see this but that's how your eggs should be.

 Perfect little balls, we're just going to put that on top of your toast.

 The reason being if your egg goes everywhere it's generally because it's a bad egg.

 Now dress the plate finely with a little bit of pepper just from the outside.

 If it doesn't don't worry, have another go at it tomorrow, the next day, the next day, the next day.

 Until you've mastered it and then you've got your first dish under your belt.

 If you've got any recipe ideas put them on the comments below as well.

 Tell your friends about the channel and we'll see you next week.

 Oh bloody, oh bloody, I just did a couple of tutorials before for something and Ticket

 to Ride, both of which are in A. This one's also in A, so pretty much uses the same chords

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to take that lick and today I'm going to do half

 of it and tomorrow I'll do the other half, just so it's not overwhelming to you.

 Okay, now what that is, is you're hammering on 0 to 1, or sorry 0 to 2 on your first string.

 And when you do these pull offs, keep your bar flat and just angled up just a little bit.

 And when you pull off, don't pull straight up, pull back, snap that string back.

 And then go back up to your second string, hammering on 0 to 1.

 Okay, so what you're doing there is middle finger, hammer on, pull off.

 So I've got here a sheet which was white and I've dyed it and that's another video where we show you how to very quickly and easily and in a fun way dye your old sheets.

 This one I have been using, I've taken several strips off of it but you see here there's a patch so I'm going to have to cut that piece away because this stitching will impede the splitting that I'm going to do.

 So I'll just strip that off, I'll strip off the good piece that I want.

 I've got the sheet folded in half and I'm just going to take a strip from there.

 Now that's one way to strip the fabrics, it can be quite hard on the shoulder if you've got a shoulder problem.

 There's another way to do it, not so easy to show you with such a small piece but however you're stripping, whichever method you're using, you do want to just cut a few slots at the top.

 So cut your 2 inch strips from there and this one's going to be narrower an inch and actually makes up a 2 inch because it's on the fold.

 If I had a whole sheet I would lay it on the ground, perhaps a whole sheet would have been easier to show you but this is the one I've got in progress.

 I did a lot of this one night and it really was hurting my shoulders so I thought there's got to be an easier way than that.

 So you can do it the lazy way or you can walk along it as I did the first one.

Now this would be far too long, this would create too much work so I'm going to just roughly cut them in half.

 But for me that's a good working length, you'll get to know your own working length when you've made a flute.

 So you could splice together strips of sheeting to do your warp or you could be miserly about it and save your printage sheets by using T-shirt.

 You can tell it's one of my favorites because it holds really quickly.

 And nowadays they come where there's not very much ribbon on them.

 So you're going to take, it's really easy, just take the cardboard off of each side.

 If you first go to the four points and then cut in between, it gives you an eight petal

 Now remember you're going to cut out both of your ends of each bolt with the same flower

 So I just cut the actual spool or bolt and I spread it out and that's what I'm going

 Or just putting color on color is kind of cool because it gives you a shaded effect.

 And then I also put paint on this side because when you have it up in an art piece, you're

 I don't just keep putting the same color on and that gives it a different effect.

 And you can see all the different shapes of flowers, all the different colors.

 Now what I did was my background was actually a tile background that I got a sample tile

 It was a discontinued tile board and I put some dimensional paint on it.

 And all the different flowers, the leaves are cut out of the bolts and all the flowers,

 Today's house call takes me to the famous French Quarter of New Orleans.

 This bastion of food, music and fun is such a favorite getaway for New Jersey residents

 The couple recently purchased a vacation condominium in this 1830s building, located just two blocks

 Now Eric and Patrice contacted me about installing storm shutters for their windows, but French

 Quarter ordinances require that any exterior additions be historically accurate.

 So today, I'm helping Eric and Patrice build a set of early 19th century shutters.

 Well I want to set up some tools down here in the courtyard and that's going to be a

 Our shutters will be made from planks of wood, fir in this case.

 The planks will be joined together by cutting tongue and groove joints along each edge.

 Back in the days before plywood, the only way you could really make up a large panel

 of wood was to take narrower strips like this and connect them together.

 Now while French Quarter craftsmen of the 1830s would have used a hand plane to create

 the tongues and grooves, we'll achieve the same results, but much more rapidly with a

 What I've done is taken a router, very similar to this one, and I've mounted it up underneath

 And while it's spinning, we're going to pass this board over it and it's going to cut a

 Patrice guides the first board through the router using rubber-faced safety grips.

 Using these, she can press the board firmly against the tabletop for a consistent cut.

 Once we've completed all our grooves, we'll cut tongues on the opposite side of each board.

 You'll notice as Eric passes the board through the router, he's not actually forming a tongue.

 After this first pass, we turn the board over and run it through the router again, this

 Now with the tongues and grooves cut for each shutter, we're going to add a decorative feature

 Using a third router bit, we're going to cut what's known as a bead along the tongue

 The bead helps disguise the joint between the boards, making each shutter look more

 Instead of running the wood flat, this time we're going to turn it up like this, okay?

 So whereas before, it was important to press down on the bed to keep it flat, now it's

 important to press into the fence right here and keep this right through like this.

 Our next step is to create rabbit joints along the interior edges of each shutter.

 These joints will overlap when the shutters are closed and prevent light, wind, and water

 The router is set up just as it was for our tongues, but this time, instead of making

 With all our machining complete, we're ready to move on to assembly.

 What we're going to do here, these are actually the inside edges of the shutter.

 We begin assembling the shutters from the center outward toward the edges, sliding each

 I find it easier to assemble the shutters first and then trim them to size afterwards.

 Don't you love that feeling when they slide together like that?

 We're going to hold the boards together by attaching strips of three-quarter inch lumber

 We cut three boards called battens to the correct length for each shutter and attach

 them with screws, countersunk so that the heads are below the surface.

 Now one thing I hate in a restoration project like this is to see Phillips head screws because

 We've concealed the screw heads, turned the shutters over, and transferred the window

 Using a hammer and chisel, Eric cuts mortises or rectangular recesses on the outside edges.

 The mortises will allow the hinges to be installed flush with the surface.

 Now these hinges were purchased at a French Quarter store that carries pre-Civil War era

 reproduction hardware for restoration projects just like this one.

 When we see if the shutter and the window are going to become good friends.

 Just to give us some clearance underneath so that it won't drag on the sill.

 With the shutters resting on shims, Patrice transfers the hinge location on the shutter

 Then Eric chisels out two mortises on the inside of the frame so we can attach the matching

 And you know, if you get a coat of paint on those, they'll look like they've been there

 Well this house call makes me appreciate what a national treasure the French Quarter truly

 And for me, helping restore a small bit of history here, even in the form of a pair of

 OK, so then we just have a look round, make sure everything's fairly happy, sitting where

 Now, we're going to take these, we need to zoom in a little bit more than that.

 Now we've got these two electrical plugs, we'll just pop them back on for good measure.

 Put them on first because if they're out of the way they can't get trapped anywhere when

 We just put the two case bolts in here that hold everything together.

 Make sure that goes up alright and the same with the other side.

 Right, now you've got three pipes you'll find that you're left with that are heading down

 This one, one off the bottom of the float bowl and one that's coming from the fuel tap.

 It goes in there, now you'll see three spikes sticking up in the bottom of the tray.

 So those pipes just go onto the spikes and that is so that any overflow or fuel that

 comes out of them is directed out of the bottom of the chassis.

 OK, turn the machine around to the front, we've got those two bolts, at least we hope

 we've got those two bolts on there, there they are, that go in the front.

 And I think we'll put the socket on there, we'll just pop those in.

 And then we've just got the two screws for the pull start guide, we'll just pop those in.

 OK, and we won't put the back plastic case on this yet because we're going to want to

 just switch the control knob fully on, that will let the carburettor fill up with petrol.

 There's no point pulling that over straight away to start it because there's no fuel in

 And then we're going to want our load bank just to set the speed and check it over.

 Right, now we plug in the load bank and we can see it's reading there, I thought if you

 There we go, there's the load bank and it's reading 50 hertz with no load.

 Well that's a little bit low, because when we put the load on it'll slow down a bit.

 So what we do to up the speed a bit, all we've got to do is, if we zoom in a bit, zoom in

 a bit, there's a screw, that's it, that's lovely, just here is the screw for adjusting

 Just pull it, OK, and we can see the speed's just gone up, with no load we've got 51 hertz,

 Put the case back on, I must put the air filter in there before we get too much further and

 I have with me a self-adhering screen protector which is made specifically for the HTC Evo

 So important to have a screen protector these days, especially with the importance of touchscreens.

 First you take off the one that says the number one on it and second you take off the number

 You clean off any dirt, dust, fingerprints or oils from the screen before you apply the

 Lastly is an installation card and this is used to smooth out any air bubbles before

 First peel off the number one layer and that is going to reveal the adhesive side.

 So the best way to apply one of these is to line up a specific feature of the phone.

 Once you have it applied now you can use this installation card to smooth out any air

 Once you have those all smoothed out, it should only take you about a minute or so.

 It's best to get them all out before you peel off that second layer.

 Once all the ones that you see are out, a lot of times you can work out any remaining

 You have your self-adhering screen protector protecting the screen of your HTC Evo 4G.

 Probably one of the most important accessories as a screen protector.

 Don't forget to check out CellphoneTrek.com where we feature all of your latest cell phone

 breast, one third cup of olive oil, one medium onion chopped, one red, yellow, orange pepper,

 three cloves garlic minced, one bay leaf, half a cup of white wine, one can of tomato

 sauce or diced tomatoes, one fourth cup of ketchup, half a teaspoon of oregano, half

 a teaspoon of cumin, one and a half teaspoons of salt, half a teaspoon of pepper, one third

 cup of raisins optional, one fourth cup of olives optional, and one small potato optional.

 On medium high heat, go ahead and add the garlic, the onions, and the pepper with the

 Once the onions and the rest of the vegetables are translucent, I go ahead and add my one

This gives it a little sweetness that everyone enjoys in my family.

 the rest of the seasoning, which is cumin, oregano, salt and pepper to taste, and raisins.

 the large pieces of chicken because, remember, chicken has to be very well cooked.

 it down to a simmer, like in low-medium, and keep an eye on it.

 Hi everyone, it's Kyle here with another video inside the Jeep here.

 This is a really cool steering wheel cover I picked up off of Amazon for $15.

 You can actually go to my Amazon store down in the description.

 So I'll go ahead and try to fit it on and I'll do a clip once I'm back.

 You can see here on the side it has one Jeep logo here and another one on the side and

 But just get two people and you just have to stretch the sides over to get it on.

 Check out the YouTube channel here at GetJeeping and subscribe for more videos to come.

 As well you can get this steering wheel cover at my Amazon store.

 If you've purchased your water kefir grains and are ready to get started, they arrived

 in a box that looks like this, and they need to be activated, which involves rehydrating

 So if you've received your water kefir grains in the mail, the first step is to activate

 It's easy to do, so what we're going to do first is go ahead and take the items out of

 Before you do anything else, be sure to read the instructions that came with the kefir

 There's lots of great information in here, including 10 different recipes, so once you

 get your kefir grains going and you're making water kefir, there's lots of great ways to

 Now we need to make a place for the kefir grains to go, and we need to make a sugar

 Now you want to use 4 to 6 tablespoons, which is about a quarter of a cup of sugar.

 Now the easiest way to dissolve sugar is to add hot water, and this is really hot water

 So I'm going to put a little bit in here, and then I'm going to go ahead and swish it

 You could use whole sugar like ravadora, something that contains molasses.

 What we have here is called organic evaporated cane crystals, which is just a fancy way of

 If you go to your local health food store or local grocery store, you should be able

 And worst case scenario, just go ahead and use white sugar that you find in your local

 What we want to do is go ahead and add cold water to basically fill up the jar.

 Now it's very important before we add the culture that we make sure that this water

 mixture is completely cooled all the way down to room temperature.

 I'm going to go ahead and stick my very clean finger in here and it is cool.

 There's quite a few of them, so I don't think they're all going to fit very well.

 And so they look like little pieces of like large pieces of sand or maybe almost like

 This is because we grow water kefir grains in Rapadura and water.

 It has lots of minerals in it and it's very good for the water kefir grains.

 And this brownish color that they are currently will fade if these kefir grains are cultured

 And so what you're going to do is go ahead and add these kefir grains to the cooled water

 And now what we're going to do is go ahead and cover this jar up.

 Now as the water kefir grains start to rehydrate, they are going to create some gas.

 Instead we want to go ahead and put something that will allow the liquid to breathe.

 But want to keep bugs out because ultimately this is sugar water, which attracts things

 So a towel, just like a dish towel or something with a tight weave can work really well.

 So we're going to go ahead and let this mixture sit now for four to five days.

 Now let's go ahead and take a look at some kefir grains that have been sitting for about

 So once the kefir grains are rehydrated, and all you'll really see is that they're plumped

 You may see a few bubbles here and there, but if you don't, that's not a problem because

 all the kefir grains are doing right now is taking on sugar water.

 They're not really doing much of a job of culturing the liquid.

 Now we get lots of questions about whether or not you can drink this liquid that the

 One, because the kefir grains spent most of their time hydrating in the liquid.

 The other reason is that while the kefir grains are coming out of hibernation, which is what

 happens when they've been dehydrated, the yeast and bacteria that make up the kefir

 And so often if they were doing any culturing, this liquid is not going to taste very good.

 So go ahead and just toss it and make your first batch of water kefir with the kefir

 So now you have hydrated kefir grains and you can go ahead and start making water kefir.

 energy, it keeps me feeling very full and satisfied and most importantly, it tastes

 absolutely delicious which is always a must in everything that I make.

 I think it just makes the most perfect, crunchy, delicious base for a granola.

 free, very very high in protein and fibre and since we're going to be sprouting it today,

 Okay, so to make this amazing granola, you will need approximately 3 cups of raw buckwheat,

 1 cup of organic sunflower seeds, 1 cup of date paste which is approximately 20-25 dates and to

 make date paste, just simply blend soaked, deep hitted dates with a bit of water.

 apple, I'm using Fuji apple because it's my favourite kind of apple.

 cinnamon, vanilla powder or extract and a pinch of Himalayan salt.

 make your granola so much more digestible and nutrient dense and buckwheat is actually

 cover it with some good quality water and let it soak for around 3-4 hours.

 soaking, just drain the buckwheat in the strainer and let it sit in the strainer for a day or two

 notice that the buckwheat gets really really gooey so just rinse all that off.

 see those cute little tails developing, you know that the buckwheat is packed with live enzymes and

 nutrients and it's ready to be a part of your delicious granola.

 soak and sprout any other nuts and seeds that you're going to be adding into the granola.

 I just soaked these sunflower seeds in water and a bit of sea salt overnight.

 is sprouted, you can just transfer it into a large bowl and begin adding the other ingredients.

 ahead and add the sprouted sunflower seeds and date paste and stir that up a bit.

 grated apple, cinnamon and vanilla powder, a pinch of Himalayan salt to bring out the sweetness, a

 drizzle of orange oil or the juice and zest of a fresh orange, and finally a handful of delicious

 organic dried cranberries and anything else your heart desires.

 tasting good, we can just spread the granola batter out onto a parchment lined dehydrator

 tray and then plop it in the dehydrator and dehydrate it at about 105 degrees until it's

 the most amazing, delicious, nutrient-dense granola known to man.

 off the tray, bring it with you on the go, eat it as a cereal, use it as a crunchy topping.

So give this recipe a try and let me know of any other cool variations

Remember to give this video a thumbs up and share it everywhere you can.

 is a relatively new fly devised by a gentleman called Chris Reeves and it incorporates the

The hook we are going to be using today is actually a Camisole B160 which can be used

Wind it down nice and securely and then come back just a little.

 wire on the object of the exercise is to get nice touching turns.

 transition that we have got here from the tail end onto the body.

 Simply because we haven't bolted the wool too close to the tail.

Now we are going to make the thorax with a piece of peacock hurl.

 very fragile so I would recommend that you tie it on together with your tying sock.

 By the way for those of you who worry about the amount of thread I am using when I do tie the

 amount of your head varnish on the head a little bit and over the peacock hurl.

I think you will find the Taze Bug is little more than buzzer with a difference.

 Hi guys today I thought I would film a different view of the craft room.

 You can see this lovely amazing wooden wall feature in the background as designed by Mr.

 I also noticed that Woody was kind of in view of the camera so you know I thought I'd put

 him on my shoulder and let him have like his two seconds of fame.

 So today I thought I would share with you a really great recipe that I've recently found.

 So for those of you who have seen my summer favourites video you will know that I have

 I don't actually know what size it is, it's like giant size I guess.

 So I adore Starbucks just like the next guy but it is quite expensive and you know I can't

 really justify spending three or four pound every single day on coffee.

 If you're a millionaire like a Kardashian then maybe that's fine but a poor poor like

 So I visited London recently for work and went in Starbucks one afternoon, it was so

 hot outside I didn't really want a hot coffee, I didn't really want like one of them milkshakey

 Anyway I saw on the menu they had two new drinks called Refreshers.

 They come in lime and orange and oh my god it instantly became my favourite drink in

 And since then I've been kind of obsessed with it in a weird way, who becomes obsessed

 So I recently came across this recipe to make my own version of the refresher recipe.

 So with that being said let's get started and I'll show you how to make it.

 All you'll need is iced tea of your choice, orange juice, caster sugar, a cup of ice cubes

 First of all you want to fill your drinking cup with the ice cubes.

 Next you want to fill your cup three quarters of the way with the orange juice like so.

 This drink really was amazing, so quick, so easy to make and yet so refreshing.

 Thank you for watching guys, remember for more recipes like this subscribe to my channel.

 Also look in the playlist thing, I'm sure I have like a cooking with official Luke playlist

 Also if you decide to give this recipe a go let me know how it turns out.

 Leave a comment in the box down below or tweet me at official Luke with a picture and a just

 or tweet me at official Luke with a picture and your verdict on the recipe and let me

 I'm taking this one apart because my partner has broken the internal charging socket.

 You can see nothing on the back so I couldn't figure out how to do it.

 The touch screen, to get to the screws, to further remove part of the phone, you need

 I'll stick to the other side and put my glasses on so I can see what I'm doing.

 Try and keep your fingers under the screen so it won't pop back on.

 Obviously if you're going to use the phone again, you've got to be careful.

 Right, so we're up that way, so we're folding the touch screen out.

 You've obviously got to be careful with these wires down there.

 So this is the touch screen, here's your four screws to get into it.

 This is a Torx, Torx drive they call them, in this country anyway.

 Tiny little stars, but you probably can't see it, it's so small.

 That's all I've done for now, but to get into the phone, that's what you need to do.

 Hey guys and welcome back to Pearly Beads Crafting and today I am super excited because

 I am going to share with you all another 3 in 1 tutorial which I think are really awesome

 and today I am going to be doing the summer ones because I will do every season so that's

 4 every year because it does take a little while longer but I am really excited to share

 For today's activity you will be needing pearly beads, wax paper, a circle pegboard but if

 you have more it will be better because then you don't have to take separate times ironing

 But first let's get started with this rainbow ball I just want to show it to you I love

 it it's just all rainbow and colorful I absolutely love all these colors and everything it's

 For this rainbow ball you will be needing 5 of each of these colors, 5 reds, 5 oranges,

 You will also need another rainbow color that you did not use originally for our other 6

 So first you are going to be making the rainbows in order which I said them just now and basically

 For the third line you will be creating 3 of these different lines so you should be

 using 3 of each color and then for the second line you will be doing 2 lines and then for

 the first line you should only use 1 of every color and then you should be done with your

 You are going to take out your random bead color that was not used and you are going

 So to make this ball look better if you have any 2 that are together that are the same

 color it might not look too good so basically you are going to switch them around until

 It has the colors and the designs on it I just think it's really really cute.

 The next one that we are going to make is the sunny days beach ball.

 So for the sunny days beach ball you will be needing to pick out the 3 colors you think

 I will do these yellows and then these light blues and then these pinks and sometimes it's

 hard to estimate but probably around 13, 14 or 15 of each of those.

 For the sunny days beach ball all you are going to do is take those 3 colors that you

 have chosen or do the ones that I have already and basically you are going to put them in

 To be honest you could do the same thing as you did with the rainbow balls just mixing

 them around but in this one I did it and it came out with a cool design so you can either

 So the next one is this polka dot and it is the last one I will be showing you all how

 I really like it how you can play around with the colors and it's all so cute polka dotty

 For the polka dots you will need a dot color which mine will be red and you will be needing

 FYI this is the base color and then these dots are the dot colors.

 So for this one you are going to be filling in with your base color those 3 circles so

 it's the same size as all the rest of the ones except you are going to leave 9 random

 Actually my reds are going to be my base color and my blues will be my dot color.

 If this is difficult for you then you can put the dots on before you fill it all up

 Now you are going to take those dot colors and fill in the random pegs so we are finished.

 Once you are done go up here and wax your iron and you are finished.

 Now you are finished with these 3 very awesome beach balls and ready to show them off.

 Thumbs up if you want more fun and awesome 3 in 1 tutorials and I will see you next Monday

 This uses the Bridgeford frozen ready dough and the Bridgeford sliced pepperoni.

 What we're going to do to start off is go ahead and make the filling that goes into

 We're going to use our Bridgeford sliced pepperoni and to chop it up smaller, just use kitchen

 It takes one cup of pepperoni and one cup of shredded mozzarella cheese, half cup of

 Now if you're making these for the kids and they don't like olives, it's okay to not use

 So go ahead and mix that up until the sauce has incorporated and coating all of the ingredients.

 It can thaw at room temperature or it can thaw in the microwave or even in the refrigerator

 So go ahead and roll this out on our lightly floured board and you want to roll this out

 What we're going to do now is grab our filling and we're going to put that down the center

 I like to use my hands, it's just easier to get the filling on evenly.

 Now you want to leave this front border, about an inch border on the dough with no filling

 Now to roll it up you just fold the dough over and pull towards you.

 What you'll want to do is go ahead and start pinching the dough end to seal the seams and

 What I'm going to do because this is so long and hanging off, I'm just going to go ahead

 Let me show you a really great trick we use here at Bridgeford.

 Just take some wax dental floss, not the flavor kind, just plain, and what you want to do

 is just put it under the roll of dough about a half inch in and bring both sides up and

 And voila, you have a perfect round of dough, the perfect spiral.

 What I've done is just lightly sprayed this with our spray vegetable shortening.

 If you don't have the dental floss you can go ahead and use a knife, just slicing and

 So the next step, we are going to lightly brush with olive oil and then sprinkle with

 As you're brushing, press slightly down to flatten it out a bit.

 Now just take your grated parmesan cheese and just lightly top each dough round and

 Then we're going to go ahead and bake this in a 425 degree preheated oven for 12 to 15

 Once you're ready to serve, of course serve them warm and just place them on a prepared

 Hope you enjoy this recipe and making it with your family and look for more recipes and

 Hello everyone and welcome to another long-awaited episode of cooking with Lauren.

 So it is fall time and it is getting a lot cooler outside and when it gets cold I know

 To make this we will need milk, sugar, cocoa powder, and vanilla extract.

 So to start off we are going to need one cup of milk in a little pan or something.

 And we will just add all the ingredients and put it on the stove.

 Working with I swear working with small things is very difficult okay.

 So on the next teaspoon I am going to make sure I get a lot more sugar.

 And all of these measurements make one serving so you can just double the recipe if you would

 like to make this for two or triple it if you would like to make it for three.

 This is kind of a tricky fraction and most of you probably won't have these types of

 So you could just use a good guess or you know on how much you think should go in.

 But not too much because this is vanilla extract and a little goes a long ways with this stuff.

 Alrighty so now we are going to get a whisk and we are going to mix this all up in our sauce pan.

 So our last step is to put this on the stove and we are going to switch it to medium heat.

 That has been spreading and it should be like obviously hot by then.

 So we are going to wait and yeah we are just going to wait for them bubbles.

 So now we are going to pour this into my mug and we will see how it tastes.

 I hope you try this at home because I swear this is like really good hot chocolate.

 And I am so sorry for the long wait and that there has not been a cooking with Lauren for ever.

 I am really enjoying these tutorials that I've been doing and today I'm going to be

Patrick's Day look using this Lime Crime palette and also this Stila palette

 I wanted to do a very soft look which is this and I am using soft green and I am laughing

 right now because my daughter did not want to leave me alone so she's right here.

 Anyways, I am going to be finishing off this tutorial and showing you exactly what I use

 This will help your eyeshadow from creasing and help your shadow last all day.

 We're going to take the color Kitten from the Stila In The Light palette.

 Now we're going to apply it just below your brows for your brow highlight.

 We're going to take the color Sandstone and draw a precise line throughout your crease

 Using a pencil brush, we're going to take the color Bliss and we are going to blend

 Now we're going to take this Cali Green eyeshadow from the Lime Crime palette and we are going

 In the same palette, we're going to get this vanilla color and we're going to apply it

 It's a black eye kohl from MAC and we're going to apply it to your waterline.

 With a smudge brush, we are going to take the color Sandstone and we are going to apply

 We're going to create a very thin winged out eyeliner using black liquid eyeliner.

 Now to finish up the look on the eye, we are going to add our Dowel Demi Wispies to our

 That finishes up the look for our eyes and we're going to move on to our lips.

 Using Dose of Colors Karma lipstick, I'm going to apply it all over the base of my lips.

 I'm going to use a matte gloss also from Dose of Colors called Sunshine Kisses.

 chord feeling the nuts slide forward three frets okay and it's laying your

You take the G chord, get rid of your pinky finger, get rid of your

 And you move your middle finger all the way across the fretboard to fret 2 and

 And again, those of you who don't have the D chord yet, get this to the point

 that you don't even have to think and you can play it super fast.

Then, lay all of your other fingers in there, take your pinky finger off,

 And eventually it just becomes one thing where you're not even thinking.

 We added a special cool blues note or jazz note inside that chord.

 And from the C chord, move these two fingers down to the high strings.

 This is also called a F4 because you can move it up the fretboard.

 So you take your finger off the 3rd fret C and you move it to the 3rd fret A on the G string.

 Your A minor chord, if you got it, you move all three fingers down and you've got an E major chord, which I didn't even write on the sheet.

 Now, just like the G and the C and the F chord were on top of each other,

 the E, the open E, and the A and the D strings are on top of each other.

 Put your pinky down on the D, 2nd string, 3rd fret, boom, D minor.

 That's that weird G string, B string interval that you have to get over.

 And if you keep your finger right here, and you kind of move back towards the C chord,

 and go over, this G7 chord looks just like the G chord up here.

 There, if you can play a D chord, you take a finger off, you have a D9.

 And then you're going to move this finger down and this finger into the spot.

 So you take your A minor chord, which is related to your C chord.

 and you move your index finger in between those, so all three strings are covered.

 Here's how I play my A chord sometimes, a little country thing.

 Some people also in some of the books will finger the A major chord

 It's an old TV commercial a few years ago that used those two chords.

 And I wanted to do one that's still like really wearable and neutral, but I wanted it to be

 dramatic because I think that on Valentine's Day it's fun to be kind of sassy and like

 kind of just go outside of your comfort zone a little bit and go a little, do a little

 And I think it's perfect because on special occasions like this, you just want to kind

 of be a little sassy and do a little bit more than you normally do.

 I think that it's, you know, still very wearable, but you're like a little, a little more like

 It's one of my favorites, especially because I'm using ColourPop in it and this is my first

 I have like eight shades, so I'm going to go ahead and do a review on those for you

 I did want to mention this video is a collab with my new obsession here on YouTube, AmazingAshley127.

 I just found her channel the other day and I'm super excited to be collabing with her.

 She'll be linked down below or you can click on the annotation and that'll lead you right

 I'm excited to see what kind of look she comes up with and if you guys want to see

 what kind of look I did right here and how to do it, then please keep watching.

 I'm using my Urban Decay Primer Potion and I'm applying that all the way up to my brow

 For my shadow today, I'm using my new ColourPop eyeshadow in the color Get Lucky and guys,

 It is my favorite gold color out of my whole entire makeup collection, which is saying

 Now to give my eyes a little bit of depth and make them look a little bit larger, I'm

 By the way, the best way to apply ColourPop eyeshadows is with your finger.

 So I'm just tapping that in and I'm kind of like building up the pigmentation.

 So I'm starting off light and then just working it up and building it up and adding more.

 So just apply that right with your finger right to your outer V.

 Now to help blend Get Lucky and Mooning together, I'm applying I Heart This right over the two

 This will also kind of highlight the center of our lid and make our eyes look larger and

 it's also kind of hiding that extra, you know, harsh line right there.

 Unfortunately, I didn't purchase any matte shades from ColourPop because I was way too

 I'm taking Sable and buffing that right into my crease with a big fluffy blending brush.

 And with a more tapered blending brush, my E36 from Sigma, I'm using black and I'm just

 going to really carve out my crease and make it a little bit more dramatic.

 I just want this to really make my eyes just look gimongous and huge.

 Now I'm going to go ahead and line my lids with my Lorac Front of the Line Pro Liner

 Feel free to skip the wing if you want to make it a little bit less dramatic.

 For my foundation today, I decided to go with my CoverGirl 3-in-1 foundation.

 So I'm going to apply that all over my face and then just blend it out with my beauty blender.

 I'm applying it in a triangle shape underneath my eyes, down the bridge of my nose, and a

 Then I'm going to go ahead and blend that out with my beauty blender as well.

 So yeah, I'm blending everything out with my beauty blender today.

 To set my under eyes today, I'm using my Rimmel Stay Matte Powder.

 So I'm just going to apply that underneath my eyes and anywhere else I'm feeling a little

 That will kind of soak up the extra oil and extra shine that we just don't want.

 For my contouring today, I'm going with my usual Black Radiance Mineral Powder in the

 I'm just going to hit the hollows of my cheeks, my hairline, and my jawline as well.

 This will make us look like we've been dieting when really we haven't been.

 I'm just going to blend out any harsh lines, which I made a lot of harsh lines.

 I'm also contouring my nose a little bit with Taupe from the Lorac Pro Palette.

 Heading back up to the eyes, I'm using Mooning right underneath my lower lash line.

 Feel free to make this as dramatic or as natural as you'd like it to be.

 But here I am about to vamp up the drama a little bit more by tightlining my lower and

 So if you want to get a little bit more dramatic, then feel free to tightline like I am.

 I forgot to do my lashes because I'm going to move on to my lips right now.

 And then for my lips, I decided to go with kind of a dramatic color, yet something really

 I'm Jamie Geller, and you're watching Quick and Kosher, and today we're making a sensational

 Basically, you're going to start with about 2 pounds of pre-cubed butternut squash.

 I say pre-cubed because I like when everyone does all the work for me.

 So if I don't find the pre-cubed squash at my grocery store, I actually just, like, bring

 the squash to the produce guy and smile, like, could you please chop this for me?

 Okay, next we throw in some onions, a chopped medium to large onion, and secret ingredient

 Don't make the mistake and get, like, that Coco Lopez pina colada milk.

 You just actually want coconut milk, and that gives it a very special, creamy, and delicate

 I happen to always have jars of the prepared garlic that's already chopped or crushed in

 You just find it in a jar on the shelf in your grocery aisle, in your supermarket aisle.

 Kosher salt or sea salt work really well in soups, and specifically kosher salt really

 pulls out all the great flavors of your food, so definitely use kosher salt.

 It's a more coarse-grained salt in your cooking, not in your baking.

 Secret ingredient number three is our Don Ernesto's Collage White Table Wine.

 You know how much I love these Hagafen wines, and I love them because they're just excellent.

 This brand, the Don Ernesto brand, is really fun and really delivers a great value for

 So, throw it into your soup, and then serve it with your soup, and it will just be fabulous.

 So basically what you're going to do, everything goes into the pot all one stop, everything

 in, your squash, your onions, your coconut milk, garlic, thyme, ginger, curry, kosher

 You want to bring it to a boil, covered, and then simmer it uncovered for about 30 to 40

 I use a potato masher or a really large fork, and just get it like, mush it up a little

 Or you could take and put it in an immersion blender, and that will get you a really thick

 So whether you like it super creamy and smooth or a little bit chunky, serve it hot in a

 Alright guys, if you want to taste their wines at a 15% discount, check out the Hagafen website.

 Enter Quick and Kosher, one word, no spaces, as your promo code, and you'll get your discount.

 And a lot of their wines are actually only available on their website.

 So it's great, they'll be delivered to your door, and I hope you enjoy them as much as

I've been wanting to do it for a long time now, but I just never got the chance

I think I have a couple videos that I put up, or I didn't even put them up.

I'm wearing right here is a headlamp, just because what I'm going to be showing

 Right here I got some cardboard, electrical tape, Velcro, and there's one other thing

I kind of rounded the edges so it would fit right into my helmet

 you know, I knew it wasn't going to be that great to begin with.

So yeah, I put electrical tape after I shaved it off to get rid of that yellow ugliness.

 And then I put Velcro, not the smooth side, but the rough side on it, so that I could

 take it off easily and then the smooth side would go on my helmet.

 strip here that was previously there already, that came with the helmet, and then I added

 I'm using the camera that I have the Velcro on, but on this camera that I have, it has

 cards and the access port where I can plug it into my computer, I'm able to open them

 So what this thing does is, when I set it in here, is that this rough side will go up

 it's going to be sitting, basically I put it at the bottom, at the very, very bottom,

 And then I put this tiny one, I try to make it so that it's a little bent downwards.

 really complicated because it's not all that stable, but when it's in there, it's nice

But so it's not going to be all completely Velcroed to the helmet.

 right on top of this, and then what it leans against is this part right here.

But the good thing about this is that the camera won't face down, but

So if you want to be as less destructive as you possibly can with

I haven't gotten used to the pain yet, or maybe I have, I just keep

And so the pieces on the side, also I have soft pieces on my camera,

 can't even feel, I don't know, on the bottom edges, so that it'll stay there too.

 So I didn't cut my cousin's hair but I lined it up and I'm about to Beijing it.

So you fill this thing in, it has little numbers that tells you.

 use a half, so I use a half water right there and I use half the container for that.

So nice little consistency, it's kind of thick and that's how you want

 back over with your clippers and you line up it over again just so the Beijing looks

 if I remember her name, Rosie Huntington either Whitley or Whiteley.

 Cream Shadow and Liner from Benefit and just take a little on my finger and pat that on

Next I'm going to grab a fluffy pointed blending brush and pick up

It is just like a little bit of a shimmery shimmery shimmery shimmer

If you look closely at the look, it is just like a very warm warm

Now what I'm going to do is just take CoverGirl Lash Blast Fusion in

 to finish the rest of my face and I will show you that in a second.

 I actually don't have any bronzer or blush or other face products on my face other than

Then I took some kind of gorgeous by benefit and just used a flat top brush.

 This is the ELF Studio Brush and patted it over my cheeks just where there was any redness

I obviously have a lot darker skin than her in this picture but it's

Then for the lips all I did was took Mellow Mood which is a luster by MAC.

I'm not sure if it was ever re-promoted or if it's a permanent line lipstick.

Then I just took a little tissue, patted it, took some setting powder.

 over it, removed the tissue, put more on, and then just blotted again.

 need garlic, onion, hamburger, flour, brown sugar, chili polvo, gomino, mustard, liquid

 from your butcher and you'll add your meat in after your onions have become translucent.

 And then we're going to add in a quarter cup to half cup of chili polvo.

Now you really want to make sure this is cooked really well because otherwise

 Once that gets mixed and wound you'll let that cook for two minutes.

 add in your two cups of reserved bean juice but you could also add in vegetable stock.

You'll add in your tablespoon, I'm sorry that's a teaspoon of liquid smoke.

 my stove top set at two while I'm melting butter and the blocks are thin.

 This video will show you what the integrated aluminum base mounted manifolds are all about.

 The gaskets, I don't know if you can tell here in the video, but they have a flatter

 The side with the pointy ring is going to push into the holes on the manifold.

 And then the solenoids are going to mount right on top of those gaskets.

 You use the two provided screws to screw down the solenoid into the manifold.

 And we sell these manifolds from two all the way up until sixteen, so you could stack these

 Your air in for all of the solenoids is going to come through the middle, and your exhausts

 The other side you can send air to another manifold or another solenoid or along your

 air line, or you can just plug it with a hole plug like I have here.

 You can also plug these if you'd like, or you can put in a couple more exhaust mufflers

 And then each valve would get its fittings as usual to go to the cylinder or wherever

 That's the Phryprops Integrated Aluminum Base Mounted Manifold.

 Today I would like to talk to you about the front kick, the limiting factor for the front

 kick, the height of the front kick and especially how the front kick is thrown in regards to

 Now many martial arts instructors, specifically in traditional arts, insist that a front

 kick should be thrown straight in front of the body with the supporting leg to be facing

 This of course gets the body ready to punch right away once the leg comes down.

 Now if the front kick is going to be thrown very low, it's okay.

 But the second you want to throw the front kick to the groin or even to the abdomen,

 Now the reason this becomes an issue is because most people do not have enough flexibility

 Okay to test the true flexibility of someone's hamstring, the person has to lie down flat

 on their back with one leg extended straight on the floor and one leg extended straight

 Now, once we do this with both hips on the floor, we're going to find that most people

 It's rare that someone has the flexibility of a vertical line which is 90 degrees at

 If someone does not have that flexibility and someone expects it to kick so the leg

 is parallel to the floor while standing, something is going to give.

 What usually is going to give is there's going to be a rotation of the hips, the supporting

 leg is going to feel extra stretch in the hip flexors, the quadriceps are going to be

 under pressure, the supporting knee is going to be under pressure, and the person will

 go on the ball of the foot or on the toes, lifting the heel from the floor to gain the

 That's usually what happens when the flexibility is lacking for the front kick of the supporting

 leg if the front kick is facing straight in the same direction as the body is facing.

 Now, if someone has a flexibility of 60 degrees, as I'm simulating right now, 60 degrees flexibility

 or 70 or 80, but not 90, and someone is expected to kick with a 90 degree hip flexibility,

 But if someone turns, the advantage from the hips, from the fact that the hips give more

 distance and from the fact that the inner hamstring and the inner thigh is usually

 more flexible than the outer hamstring, there's an automatic height gain.

 Meaning that if someone has, right now I'm demonstrating about 75 degree flexibility

 in the hip, if someone were to turn sideways, they'll automatically gain anywhere from 5

 So someone would turn over on the side and now because of the distance in the hip and

 the flexibility of the inner part of the hamstring and the inner thigh, all of a sudden they're

 So, by throwing the front kick and turning the body and turning out the supporting leg,

 someone automatically gains, number one, the distance advantage, number two, the advantage

 that the hip turns into the kick for more power, and number three, the height.

 So the hamstring doesn't have to get injured, supporting hip flexor doesn't have to get

 injured, there's no strain on the abductors of the supporting leg, there's no strain on

 Unfortunately, very often there is an insistence that the body does not turn, remain perfectly

 Which in my opinion, if it's an art, then you have to develop flexibility in the hamstring

 If that's exactly just how the front kick is thrown in your art, no question that.

 But if you can get your student to turn a little bit, you might lose a little bit of

 advantage of a punch following a kick right after, or landing into a perfect stance right

 after, but that could be adjusted, so turning back on the foot, but at the same time, there's

 less chance of injury, the person is going to maximize their height, maximize their power,

 So feel free to post your comments, concerns, questions regarding this video and other videos,

 Just tweeted this last night that I was getting some chicken ready to cook on the grill.

 So I got the chicken, I got the corn, I got the vegetables, I got the steak.

The main reason I don't like to use this is I like my chicken breast to be thick.

 Got it all in the bag and today's flavor is Weber's Real Molasses BBQ Sauce Kicking Spicy.

 And the good thing is it's the night before I'm gonna cook that, so it's going in the refrigerator.

 Now I know last time I didn't show this step, but I always clean up after I do the chicken in the sink.

Best thing to do to these is to spray a little cooking spray on it.

 And then, of course, you guys know I love that kick of chicken.

And we were gonna put the corn on there, but there's not enough room,

Now a lot of people will put foil on it, or they will peel the shucks and the hair off of it.

 We're gonna throw this on here, flip it over a couple times, and we're gonna get the steak brother.

 And you'll have to taste it according to how crispy you want your vegetables, but they're getting close to being done.

Now remember I was telling you guys that you could cook on this deal for hours if you carbureted it just right.

I'll show you how to eat that here in a minute, but I always leave the husk on there.

 But when you leave all this hair on there, when it's still steamy like that, it peels right off.

 Intensity Rules, Trent Hardcourt, and we'll see you next video.

 Alright, I'm going to show you what a certification close would look like on a number 3.

 Hi everyone and welcome to Lance and G. I'm Gianna and today I'm going to be doing the second video in a nail series

 Today's video is going to show you how to recreate three really really easy nail designs all three of these nail designs

 Artist you don't need to have any type of artistic ability whatsoever

 All you need to do is follow these simple saddles and you will have pro inspired nails

 So I was thinking about doing this nail series every once a month or maybe twice a month

 I kind of want your feedback on this if you want it more than once a month make sure you leave it down below

 My first video in this series was two weeks ago and I got a lot of really great feedback

 Recreations, so I'm gonna share with that with you at the end of the video.

 I painted my nails with a white polish and added different colors to each nail

 Then I allowed this to dry for a few minutes and took some scotch tape to create the color blocking

 Start by taking the piece of tape and adding it to the top portion of your nail design

 Add polish the bottom part of the nail design and remove the nail tape quickly

 And I love wearing these nails because they seem to match all the bright colored outfits.

 Make sure you allow enough time for your white polish to really dry

 Taking your dotting tool place two scoops on each side of the cone

 Here's the finished manicure with a top coat I just love this manicure it's just so perfect for summer

 For the third and final manicure I'm having some fun with lines this easy manicure will only take you a few minutes to recreate

 Always starting off with my white base coat to make sure my nail polish pops

 I'm going to take my color polish and I'm going to pick a different color for my middle finger

 For this part of the manicure you can use a nail pen or a nail striper

 I'm going to use a nail striper to create some horizontal lines that stop in the middle of my nail

 Be sure to wipe most the polish off your brush before creating the lines

 Now I'm going to go in and taking my other polish and put some horizontal lines going the opposite direction

 Make sure to leave a comment down below and if you recreate them make sure to go on Instagram

 Facebook or Twitter and make sure to hashtag me so I can see them and

 If you guys are interested in who was my favorite for this week the recreations, I'll show you right here

Thanks for watching and don't forget to thumbs up if you enjoyed this video

 my name is often given to things that are duds, and I'm a berry.

 and the inside can both be used, as they will be in the Consuming Passion's classic lemon

 mixing bowl goes some plain flour, about 500 grams, icing sugar, 175 grams, and unsalted

 butter, brought to room temperature, about 250 grams, and a grated rind of a lemon.

 is now mixed up with hands that are spotlessly clean, until a good crumbly consistency is

 eggs, along with about a teaspoon of vanilla essence, and this is all kneaded into a dough.

 into a ball, wrapped in plastic sheeting, and put in the refrigerator for a half an

 caster sugar, that will dissolve easily, until all the grains of sugar have quite dissolved.

 Now I add the juice of four or five lemons, I need about a cup full, and the zested rind

You could also use grated rind, but I prefer to zest them, so I have

 pastry, and it involves putting down two sheets of plastic film, putting the refrigerated

 ball of dough in the middle, covering with more plastic film, and rolling it on the outside

 I remove the top sheet, and lift the pastry onto a greased baking tin, pressing the edge.

 It doesn't have to be that neat, you can just take pieces off one side to put on the other

 then some baking paper, and cover with some dried beans that I keep just for this purpose.

 Then it's into the oven for ten minutes or so at 180 degrees C. After ten minutes, the

 case is half cooked, which means I take out the beans, and allow to bake for a further

 and the tart is baked for about thirty minutes, or until when you shake the tin, the filling

 flourish you could caramelise the top, which I love to do, by sprinkling on some icing

 sugar, and then it can either go under the grill, or I can use my trusty blowtorch.

 and just a small portion, surely, before I have a little sip of wine.

 You know, you always hear me say, you are what you eat and have food work for you, not

 70%, 70% on how you look and how you feel has everything to do with what you put into

 We also heard a lot about raw food, but what exactly is a raw diet anyway?

 Raw food is a plant-based diet where we're eating everything that's not cooked.

 Yeah, we're gonna learn today how to make a really quick and easy smoothie that's loaded

 So right here we've got ground up pumpkin seeds, it's loaded with selenium.

 When you get it pasteurized in the store, all the good stuff is gone.

 All right, we're gonna put in some Celtic sea salt, loaded with all the trace minerals

 All right, so right here we've got some brown rice protein powder.

 Then we've got spirulina here, the highest source of protein on planet Earth.

 So this is the highest source of electrolytes on planet Earth, and the water tastes delicious.

 And then what we're gonna do is put it on this high-speed blender, and you're gonna

 Eating a raw diet will help you have more energy, will help your skin, your digestion,

 will even help you lose weight, and will lower the risk of cardiovascular disease.

 Try something maybe you've never tried before, like eating green.

 Lebanese food has become synonymous with Meza, but actually there's far more to this wonderful

There's a whole world of one pot dishes and hearty stews or Tabkhat as we call them,

 some onions, some garlic, some butter, and of course beans and tomatoes.

 I've added a knob of butter and I've transferred the sliced onions and just get some of that

 garlic in there as well that's been smashed and then I'm just gonna mix it quickly.

 the heat a little bit so we're doing this on medium to low heat.

 add these topped and snapped runner beans that have been prepared.

 Cover and then just let them sit for about two or three minutes and then we'll add all

 these lovely chopped tomatoes, a little bit of cinnamon, a little bit of allspice,

 So that's ready and the green beans are tender but they've got a little bite to them still so

Turn off the heat on that and then drizzle it with a generous amount

We're going to let it cool because this is actually traditionally

 eaten at room temperature but I much prefer it a little bit warm, not too warm, so we're just

Got some Arabic bread here as always and I'm going to dive in, use it to grab

 some of these lovely green beans, dip it in some olive oil and tomato broth.

 days when I'd come home to a pot of this boiling on the stove and I hated it.

 One pot... sorry I just completely... One pot dishes and hearty stews.

 Hey guys, I wanted to show you from start to finish how I do my pipe cleaners.

 The reason being, when I first filmed that video, my hair was much shorter so I used

 It comes in a package like this and it says Chanel stems or it's also called pipe cleaners.

 So it's a wire that has some fuzz on it and it's usually used for arts and crafts.

 You can bend it into shapes or you can make it with a spider or a bug or anything like

 So when I had shorter hair, I used to fold it in half like this and then spiral the hair

 So I curve it like that and then I wrap the tip around like that so then I have a loop.

 Then I'm going to take my lock and I'm going to tuck in the end and spiral it up the pipe cleaner.

 And you just slowly, well when you first start it will probably be slow but for me my record

 So now that you've reached the top, you just fold in the end and that's it.

 I tend not to re-twist my hair when I do pipe cleaners because the volume of the curls,

 And in the morning I would just brush the edges with a bit of gel and I'm good to go.

 Hey guys, so this is about an hour and a half later and it looks like this because I am

 If you do want to leave the house, if you just take your time and kind of bend the wires

 I'm not ready that fast so I'm just going to leave it like this.

 I'll just do a little 360, not a 360 but I'll turn around and show you what it looks like.

 In terms of drying time, I personally don't use hair dryers or the hooded dryers.

 I use them occasionally if I just want to do a little blast and my hair isn't completely

 dry but to completely dry my hair, I've never actually done that.

 So in terms of the time frame, I have no idea how long it would take if you blow dry it

 or if you sit under a hooded dryer but from my experience, I prefer to air dry and it's

 better for your hair in terms of heat damage and it's going to take, I like to leave it

 It's Sunday morning now and I'm going to take it out on Monday before work.

 Hey guys, so it's the next day now and I'm removing the pipe cleaners.

 So I'm just going to do one or two of them on camera so you can see what I'm doing.

 So you're going to take the part that you folded over which is just sticking out here

 and you kind of straighten it up, unravel it from the root a little bit because you

 don't want to be tugging on your root and then you're going to try to loosen it up a

 Make sure you're securing the lock and then you just slide it straight through and then

 So when you first take it out, you have a very nice tight curl and this is how it looks

 If you want a looser curl, you would do two or three per pipe cleaner.

 So I'll just remove another one, so unravel it slightly, grab hold of the loop and loosen

 As I said, I did not re-twist my hair but the body that I get from this style, I don't

 Some of them have fallen because yesterday was very rainy and cloudy and rain comes through

 my window all the time so my windows were closed and I was kind of just trapped in my

 Usually my hair is air dried, there was no air in my room so a few at the back have fallen

 But I'll just do a quick 360 of what fresh pipe cleaners look like.

 The old one, like I said, that was how I did it for shorter locks but my sister, her hair

 is down to her waist and she can still use one full pipe cleaner.

 Somebody was suggesting that maybe you can kind of intertwine two pipe cleaners together

 if you have really super long hair but that would be up to you.

 If you have any questions, let me know but that's it for today and I'll talk to you guys

 Well, the minor chord, the most significant note is the third note of the scale gets lowered

 Taking the first three notes of the C major chord, the second note would be flatted and

 Three most common minor chords, I've already shown you what they are.

 It's nice to hear that little finger down on the third fret on your B string.

 You could use two fingers there on the first fret or do a bar like that.

 All you have to do is take the third note of the scale, which is in each one of those

 positions and lower it one fret and you have your minor 7 chords in the key of A.

 So I have A7 here, take that note, lower it a half a step and now you have an A minor 7.

 It was created just by taking one of the notes of the A7 chord and lowering it a half a step.

 Why do you need to learn all of that instead of just one A minor 7 down here?

 Well the versatility and flexibility you get out of knowing more than just one voicing

 Say you're playing with a piano player that's got the mid-range of the sound that you're

 Say down here, you might want to pick the voicing that's up here and cover the higher

 So it's a good idea to take the time to study all those chords.

 Okay, this is our V12 engine came out of a series 3d type what we're doing is removing the cylinder heads

 Now normally this is a really hard job to do considering this have 30 or 40 years

 We've already taken the head off so what we're gonna do is show you how to do it with no damage at all

 Now the key with this is to keep it even the whole way across so when you're jacking it

 What I'm gonna do is show you how good this machine really is by showing you the head that we've already taken off

 Now anybody that stripped an engine before will tell you that if you're

 Stripping an aluminium block with aluminium heads and you use Fox wedges

 But with this little machine there is no damage on the mating face at all

 So what we're gonna do now is have a quick look and we're gonna break the seal on this head and start to jack it up

 You can see all he's using at the moment is just a straight half inch ratchet and a socket

 It's not a fast process but it is by far one of the safest ways with no damage to the head or the block

 What we'll do is in part two we'll show you the head just about ready to lift off

 Today we're going to show you how to work with ink, and we're going to show you how

 And then Kira is going to show you how to add the ink to the clay to change the color

 First, I'm going to start with a kneaded piece of clay, and I'm going to roll it between

 And then I'm going to flatten it on my work surface and use my rod to do that.

 And I say a little because we don't want it to be too wet when we add the ink.

 And I place it down onto my piece of clay, then use my rod to add the texture.

 And because these are clear, you can see through them, and you can lift it up to see if it's

 And I want to wipe it off and get the water off that's on there with my mold release,

 And I just get a little of the ink on my finger and gently roll it on top of the impressed

 And then I can add a little other color, which is, this is a brown color.

 I'm going to actually put some of this Pearlescent Sky Blue, also a Tsukineko Dew Drop Brilliance

 color into, this is a mix of pearl and silver, equal amounts that I have premixed together

 And I'm going to just put a bunch of this ink right into the clay and mix it up.

 And pigment inks are one type of ink you can use with polymer clay.

 And they actually have, this ink has pieces of blue pigment in it, which will mix into

 the silver and white clay that's already blended and turn it a little bit more blue.

 When you're buying ink, you need to make sure that it's pigment or dye.

 For this one, you're using pigment ink, and it's actually the blue pigment that's turning

 Whereas if it was a dye ink, it would actually be seeping into the clay and dyeing it.

 It takes a couple minutes, but, because the clay can take a lot of extra pigment.

 The ink is heat-set ink, and since you have to fire polymer clay anyways, it just really

 So if you had white, and you only had white clay, and you wanted blue, this would be a

 So here, I'll show you a piece of how it started out, and this is now turning into a nice,

 And now I'm going to show you one of my other techniques that I like to use with the texture

 sheets, or a rubber stamp, anything that can create a texture in the clay.

 I sometimes use the ink as an actual release, which means I'm going to stamp it right onto

 So it'll be moist, and it'll act as a release agent, so that when I press my clay into it,

 the ink's going to go down into the cracks, and it's also going to create a nice, easy

 So Kira presses hers into her texture, whereas I roll my texture into my clay.

 Now when this is heated and cured, this is actually one of the only times you might catch

 me sanding maybe just the very top layer of this stamp to pull the ink off of it so the

 sky blue color shows through, and that the ink would be in the cracks of this stamp.

 You can turn this into jewelry, you can make a variety of things with this technique, so

 Make sure you tune in next week to Polymer Clay Podcast, when we will be talking about

 The storm blew from behind, with all of your lies, you pushed me aside.

 I traveled the world for you, straight like a fool, the cold-born truth.

 This is the instructional video of how to make an origami paper crane.

 And I haven't made one in about 2 years, but here's the instructional video of how to make

 Then the sides should just fall right in as you're pushing it down.

 I don't know if people, some people blow in the hole at the bottom just to make it bigger.

I've recently seen Rihanna's pictures from the video Princess of China

 and I thought it would be a good idea to create an inspired look based on the picture.

 To begin with, I have to say that Rihanna's makeup resembles, in my opinion, a Nemo look.

 By the way, the link to the picture from the video will be in the description box below.

 The most interesting part in the look are the brows, which are pointed upwards.

 these kind of brows, you don't need to shape yours and then draw them in the needed direction.

 By using the glue stick method, you can create any shape of brows you want.

 Apply some glue to your brows and then set the glue with some powder.

 And as you can see, half of the brow is my own and the other half is created.

But if you are afraid of greasing, then definitely use some primer

First, create the contour of eye makeup and then fill the shape in.

 Thereafter, line your lower lash line and fill in the waterline.

Therefore, do your fish face and apply some product to your cheekbones.

 Thank you for watching all the pictures of the look and much more will be on my blog.

 And this is the main ingredient for many of my recipes, so it's very important that you

And be ready for this week, light tamales, and the next, light tacos.

 So, let's get ready to get our ingredients from the Mexican section in the stores.

 This actually is really easy to do, but you need to go into the supermarket and look at

Don't worry, I know it sounds awful, but it tastes great, I swear.

 We will need some boiling water, so put your water to boil and cover it.

 boiling, just turn off the fire, and we're going to put in here our chile guajillo.

 After 15 minutes, our chile guajillo is ready to go into the blender.

 to do is put it into the blender, and we're going to add some salt and some conim.

 why I asked you when the water was boiling just to turn it off and just leave it with

 Now we're going to add some conim, just a teaspoon of conim, the two pieces of garlic,

 you want to keep the flu and the cough away, you need a lot of chile colorado.

 And this strainer is going to keep all the seeds away from the juicy chile colorado.

 So when all you have left is just the skin and the seeds, you can put this back into

 the blender, put another two cups of water, and blend it again.

 the time to make chilaquiles, to make the tamales, to make chile beans, and to teach

Today I will show you how to make Yamarita which are egg coated yam fries.

 First wash the yam, peel off the skin and cut into thin rectangular slices.

 So now pour the content into a sieve and set the yam aside to cool a bit.

 Break the eggs, add the ground pepper, coarse seasoning cube and salt to taste.

 Now dip each of the cold yam slices into the egg mixture and into the flour.

 Toast the yam to evenly coat in the egg and on the flour making sure that the yams are well coated.

 You can also do this in two ziplock bags, one with the egg mixture and the other with the flour.

 Finally, fry the coated yam slices in hot oil but on moderate heat until both sides are golden brown.

You can make use of any sauce of choice or also try out this recipe here and twist it to your taste.

 Thank you so much for watching and do give us a thumb up if you like this video and don't forget to subscribe if you haven't done that yet.

 Hi everyone, welcome back this is VeeryeIndia food recipes dhoti.

 Here I took half a pound of chicken and one red onion, one tomato and 4 tsp of oil and

 2 tsp of chili powder and 1 tsp of turmeric powder and salt as per taste and crushed ginger

 Here I am going to use cinnamon stick one and one cardamom, three cloves, one tsp of

 Here I don't have coriander seeds so I am going to use coriander, coarsely powder and

 Let us see how to prepare this chicken curry Chettinad special.

 How much spice you want you can add it and one fourth tsp of turmeric powder.

 Now you prepare naan mixture, try to add turmeric powder and salt and half amount of crushed

 Here our masala is ready and one more ingredient I am going to add kasuri methi leaf also.

 Then we will add our green chilies and tomatoes and crushed ginger and garlic over here.

 Now I am going to add green chilies, crushed ginger and garlic.

 Also add salt carefully because we already added salt in the chicken.

 Now I am going to add our masala that is coriander powder, black pepper, fennel seeds, cinnamon, cardamom, cloves and poppy seeds.

 In the meantime I am going to add small amount of water over here.

 After that we will see how is our Chettinad special chicken curry.

 You can serve this curry with chapati, roti, naan or any kind of variety rice, idli, dosa also.

 Hi, Mike here from PlayWhatYouWant.com, bringing you part four of my five part series introducing

 In this lesson, I'm going to introduce you to the 12 bar blues.

 Now the 12 bar blues goes back over a hundred years and has formed the foundation for thousands

 upon thousands of blues songs, jazz tunes, rock and roll, country music, and pop songs

 The 12 bar blues is something that musicians all over the world know and I'm going to show

 I have it written out in Roman numerals so that this first chord here is 1 7.

 Musicians often use Roman numerals so that when you are playing in different keys, so

 if you're in C, if you're in D, if you're in E, if you're in A flat, it doesn't matter

 If you think of the numbers, the Roman numerals of the chord, it means that you can apply

 We're going to say we're in C. The one chord in C is obviously C. Now later on in the song,

 If we go back, C is one, D then is two, E is three, we just said F is four, five is

 This is how you use Roman numerals to figure out what chords you're playing.

 We're going to use this system in C. To play a C blues, let me walk you through this blues

 The first chord is one, seven, which is going to be your C dominant seven chord.

 Dominant seven, remember, is if you take the high C, walk it down two half steps, that's

 The next chord I have in parentheses, because the blues over its hundreds of years have

 Instead of having a one, seven for the first four measures of your blues, a lot of people

 To get to four, seven, count up from C, one, two, three, four, that's F, and there's your

 Measure five right here, we're back to F seven for two bars, and then C seven for two bars.

 Five, seven, count up from C, one, two, three, four, five is G.

 If we're at C seven here, and we want to get to F seven, I'm going to play the F seven

 To get to an F, move your G down to F. To get to your A, move your B flat down to A.

 The same thing can be done to G, and I'll let you figure out G on your own.

 I'm going to play through the 12 bar blues form after I show you one more thing, which

 To keep the tempo, it's going to be really nice if you put a walking bass line.

 Now the easiest way to come up with a walking bass line right now, is to, with your left

 So that when you're playing the one seven chords, what I want you to do is arpeggiate

 So what we're going to do is make this 12 bar blues form be in four four time, meaning

 And if you put that over your one seven chord in the top, now it's starting to sound like

 All I'm doing is outlining that F triad with my left hand, and doing the arpeggio.

 At that point we're at the end of the form, and we can repeat back to the top, and play

 I'm going down here because this way you can see the actual written out letters of that

 C7, F7, and it's just our way of applying the Roman numerals to the key of C.

 Remember all of these PDFs are available for free download from my website, so feel free

 to check out my channel, look in the comments, and there will be a link to take you to a

 So now for an example, a real world example, I brought the tune Kansas City.

 Kansas City is a 12 bar blues, and it's actually in the key of C as well, so that makes it

 Now when you're playing Kansas City, you might not want to just hold the chord and do your

 You can leave it just right there on C, and try doing hits like that.

 And now when you're playing that, you can sing over it, or you can have someone else

 And there's our 12 bars, and now we would repeat with the next verse or the chorus.

 And you can take this to a jam session, you can play with guitar players, with bassists.

 All you have to do is say, 12 bar blues in C, and they'll know what you're talking about.

 Practice doing different rhythms, practice doing the walking bass line, and I bet you're

 Now if you enjoyed this lesson, please feel free to check out my website at playwhatyouwant.com,

 where I'm offering one-on-one private lessons live over the internet.

 These pre-recorded lessons that you found, either with me or with other people, are good

 They're meant to educate a large audience in a very general way.

 You can't ask any questions, there's no interaction, and there's no one there who really cares

 Now if you're interested in private lessons, come by my site, send me an email.

 I'm offering to give you your first private lesson with me for a full hour, 100% for free,

 Because I know that there's no reason that you should not be playing what you want to

 And then it's starting to come into this kind of triangular shape

 So I guess it takes a little practice, but then you can knock it out

 And, you know, in order to get it crispy, it's better to not have a flavor

 So you wait until you get a crust, and then you brush on the soy sauce

 Hey guys, chelow, it's Holly here and I'm here with my best friend.

You can either have a yarn base or you can have Marley Locs brace.

 With a yarn base, you just braid at the root, braid or twist all the way down and then

 depending on the length and the, depending on what length you get, you'll have, you probably

 have to buy six or more packs of Marley hair just to, just to braid or twist all the way down.

 If you have yarn, it's just two dollars a spool and it could last, last longer than Marley hair.

 I had yarn, I put in yarn Locs about a couple months ago and I didn't like how it looked dry.

 I would prefer Marley Locs over yarn Locs because yarn Locs are just too dry looking for my taste.

 I had them in a couple months back and I didn't have them in for very long because I didn't like

I like Marley Locs as opposed to yarn Locs because they're, in my opinion, they're a little

 bit more realistic even though they're a bit shiny depending on how you wrap it.

 tight, of course the shine is going to, you know, but if you wrap it a little bit loosely, not, not

 Here's what will happen if you don't do it as tight and if you do do it tight, it'll look like

 on how you take care of your hair, this, this style could last probably up to two or three months.

 going any longer than that because your hair might lock up into the actual and like, you know, you

 Because, I would say yarn will last longer because it doesn't show as much wear and tear as Marley

When Marley hair starts to get old, of course it's going to tangle up and look more

I think for, definitely what you just said, if you're looking for a dread look,

 installing the faux locs, you're going to have your hair, your real hair, of course, and you can

 either use your base, which is yarn or Marley hair, whichever you choose.

 and twist your own hair into, into the, into your base, which is either yarn or Marley.

 into your, into your own hair, the Marley hair, you would have to twist it all the way down.

 But with yarn, you can just, you can just stop until wherever your hair, wherever your hair length

So you braid the yarn up until where your hair length ends and then you just leave it.

 If you use Marley hair, you would have to braid it all the way down because you don't want the

 moisturize my hair, it's optional for anyone else if you don't want to use this.

 use Cantu Shea Butter Leave-In Conditioner and I just, and I just apply around the scalp

 and apply to the ends of my hair before I put the yarn or Marley hair and do the style as a whole.

 Cantu Shea Butter Leave-In Conditioner, Black Castor Oil, and Tea Tree Oil.

 spray bottle and I just spritz it across my scalp and massage it in.

 You don't necessarily have to use Cantu, but that's just what I use daily.

 If you don't want to burn the faux locs, another alternative is to take a little piece of hair and

Boiling the ends of marley locs as a means of sealing it does not work.

 As soon as you put the end of the locs into water, everything will unravel.

Because the little, the little piece that you use, it'll, it'll, it'll

 The responsibility of all running backs when we're going to run the football and the quarterback

 The best way to create a good pocket is if the ball is being handed on your right-hand

 The most important part, so your elbow doesn't dip into the pocket, throw your hand flat

 If you turn your hand over like that, your elbow will be flat and parallel.

 Now for the floor, you bring your left hand and you come under it.

 That allows us to keep our eyes focused on the blocking that's going on up front and

 Left hand underneath, creating the pocket when the ball is entering on our right side.

 Our left side, hand goes down, elbow comes up, right hand underneath.

 So whatever side the ball is entering, that arm must be up and parallel, keeping the elbow

 Now we're going to have Chris Mortensen come in, our quarterback here.

 We're going to show you what the pocket must look like as we come straight on.

 Now remember, if it's a two-point stance, let's go out of a three-point stance.

 Good base here, sink my hips here, put my hand down so I can go right or left, but I'm

 So as we snap the ball, I open up, up, under, and look at my eyes.

 Now I get the ball high and tight, and we'll talk about that in a minute.

 a little bit about fake silver, or what I like to call them is silver duds.

 if you have bought silver and it wasn't what you thought that it was, then that is a silver

Any of you that have bought silver and found out that it was a fake, I feel your

So here today I want to talk to you a little bit about some ways that you can

 all of these are 90% silver, so you can see that this is a quarter.

 is a quarter, what we did with this one, it's black as you can see, super oxidized.

 this quarter wore .999 fine silver, it would turn to this after being heat treated.

 this is one of our silver blanks after being heat treated, and it turns a really bright

It doesn't say that it's 2 troy ounces, but it does actually weigh

Now a grain is an increment of measurement, and 15 grains of silver is the

 equivalent of .03 troy ounces, and it weighs quite a bit more than an ounce of silver.

These actually do weigh 1 troy ounce, but they're obviously not .999 silver.

It says it right here, silver certificate, and it's got that design

Take a look at that, 1 troy pound, which is the equivalent of something

 silver duds together, here are some of the things you need to know in order not to get fooled when

 say 1 troy ounce or 1 kilo, and along with the weight, number two, it needs to have the purity.

 You're going to pay a lot more for a 99.9% pure coin than you will for a 90% coin.

Now the dealers don't mint the coins or the bars, so make sure that they know

 where they're getting it from so that you can look into the pieces that you're buying.

 for joining me today on Quality Silver Bullion, and until next time.

 Take one mango and remove the skin with a knife or using a peeler.

 When selecting a mango for the green mango salad, make sure that the mango is green.

 Once the skin is removed, we want to shred the mango traditionally with just using a

 The trick here is to chop in parallel and keep your eyes on the mango so that you do

 Slice sections of the mango that has been chopped as finely as possible.

 Once you have sliced off all the chopped pieces, repeat the process again by chopping

 vertically in the areas that have not been chopped and then thinly, finely slice the

 In a small bowl, add one teaspoon of shrimp paste and two to three tablespoons of sugar.

 I add only two tablespoons of sugar because I like my mango salad sour.

 Mix the ingredients together until the sugar is dissolved and then you need to add the

 chilies and the red onions and then mix again to incorporate all the ingredients.

 Add the mixture into the bowl of shredded mangoes and then mix the mango together with the sauce.

 The green papaya salad is mixed in a mortar pestle but do not mix the green mango salad

 Always mix the green mango salad in a large bowl before serving.

 Once all the ingredients are thoroughly mixed, top with crushed toasted peanuts or ground

 My name is Maniwan Laplom, teaching you how to cook Thai and Lao food.

 And then what we're going to do is keep on frying them, slowly but surely, and we'll

 And we're going to mix them up a little bit, and then we're going to put them on the pit.

 And we've got our other corner there going with our bacon and our peppers.

 We've got our tomatoes also on the bottom shelf and some more bacon.

 But I actually haven't had a camera and then I now finally got a new one

 I actually won one at work, so I'm like really happy about that

 You can also add your own ingredients like yogurt or honey, or if you want to use coconut oil

 So you can mix them pretty much whatever you want in this and just go ahead and just blend it all the way

 And then you just put on your hair and you keep it in for 30 minutes

 And just it makes your hair perfect when you get out of the shower

 so I'm gonna show you guys how I make mine and then how I apply it and

 Please leave a comment or a thumbs up or let me know how you like it

 And then I will be making more videos for you guys and yeah, and let's just get started

 So for this hair mask I'm using two bananas and also some olive oil if you'd like you can also add in some

 Give it a little bit of coconut oil because it's really good for your hair

 And you can also use an egg if you need protein for your hair right now

 I'm just gonna peel these off and add them to my mixing bowl, then I'm gonna grab a fork

 I'm just gonna blend it all together and make sure there are no lumps in this little mixture

 And that's just because you don't want to have lumps in your hair because this is what's gonna get stuck when you're trying to wash

 And then I'm gonna mix it all together and when I apply it to my hair

 It's gonna give it a lot of moisture, and that's super healthy shine

 And of course you're going to want to mix it as much as you can and get out all the lumps of it

 I'm just going to let my hair down and then I'm actually going to part it down in the middle on the sides

 I'm just going to section this off using a hair clip, and then I'm gonna start on my bottom section

 And I'm just going to brush it out to make sure there are no tangles in my hair when I apply the hair mask

 and then I'm going to grab my banana hair mask and you can actually apply this straight on with your hands and

 You want to make sure you just blend it really nicely into your hair

 And you're getting all of it pretty saturated, and you just keep going until you feel like you're happy with the application

 And this is just so it just stays saturated and don't get anything else dirty

 And I do recommend using an elastic band so it doesn't really get dirty

 And then I'm going to do the exact same thing to my top section, and then I'm going to tie it off as well

 You're going to want to leave the hair mask in your hair for about 30 minutes or more

 After 30 minutes have passed you just jump in into a shower, and you wash it off

 I hope you guys like this video, and I'll see you guys in my next one.

 Ok guys, hi it's me again, Artistic Snail, and I'm going to do my first tutorial.

 It's a design that I created entirely by myself, and I just hope you guys will like it.

 So, actually, you only need to have four bands, these four bands, to do it.

 These two gold ones are from the metallics pack, and this is just from the regular startup

 So, I am obsessed with Harry Potter as much as I am obsessed with Rainballoon, and I just

 Someone might have already created it, but I assure you I thought of this entirely on

 Set it to the side, and then I'm going to take the two white ones.

 So, you do this so that one band is like hanging from the other.

 And then you do what you would normally do to start doing a single with your hand.

 But then you'll create a slip knot, pulling one band over the other.

 Now, we're going to take our hook, and wrap, and take a gold band, wrap it around three

 Soon enough, I'll probably make a whole Quidditch series on the Rainbow Loom, but for now, just

 So, you got those two cap bands, these are called, when it's wrapped around more than

 It's a good thing to know when you're watching a video, other video.

 So, you take the band, you pull it from there, and now this is tricky.

 It's already starting to look like this, but this is too insecure.

 Once you start doing this, you can't turn back, because it's really hard to undo a knot

 I'm going to do it, of course, because it's a tutorial, and yeah.

 B. And another D. So your E string is tuned down to a D on the top string as well.

 So the outside two strings are tuned down a full step and the A string is tuned down

 Ok, again, if you haven't seen my other videos, I stress playing the thumb on the downstroke

 That's the traditional fingerstyle blues and it allows you to do a whole lot of really

 So the beginning riff, the way I play it, I play also with my second finger on this

 Sometimes I don't use my second finger to pluck multiple strings.

 I use my thumb on the low G and then my first finger on the open third string, which is

 And what that is, is upstroke with the first finger, downstroke with my thumb.

 When you're playing with basically one finger on this hand, the fretting hand, you can't

 use your third finger to fret a note because you've got your slide on it.

 So I usually use my first finger to do all the fretting down here on this side.

 So what you've got is one finger on the open D string and it's on the third fret.

 Then you add one more strum of the open strings with no fingers.

 And then your first finger slides up on the third string to the fifth fret and then it

 This guitar happens to be a very percussive guitar and it's great for slapping the strings

 My thumb is actually slapping the bass strings kind of like a bass guitar does.

 So I'm putting some syncopation in there and some extra strums.

 When I do the picking or the plucking, what I call plucking, this is what it looks like.

 As you notice I'm playing the low G bass string at the same time that I'm playing these.

 As usual on these old blues tunes there is a million ways to play them and you can interpret

 So you don't have to play it exactly note for note the way RL does.

 It's a warm smoky eye look basically with no liner and a pop of color on the tear duct area and on the waterline as

I'm going to begin by applying my foundation and today I'm using Dior capture total

 I just find that their shade range needs a little more variety because I'm kind of in between shade the shade 20 for me

 And then the tan is a bit too fair and also a friend of mine wanted to get her shade and she couldn't find any

 So I'm going to apply my highlighter next and this is a concealer by Mac.

 191 brush and I just find it easier to blend it out with this kind of brush because the texture is very light

 you can also use a wet Beauty Blender if you prefer that as well and

 you can see that I'm just highlighting the center parts of my face and

 Just the parts where I shadowy and I just want to bring them forward and make them look more, you know

 Eyeshadow helper and I'm gonna apply a tiny amount all over the lid next I'm going to take this individual shadow by Anastasia Beverly Hills

 I just find their shades are very pigmented and they just glide on really smooth

I'm blending it out into the crease using this makeup forever blending brush

 I'm gonna put that number in the description box below and then I'm going to take this makeup forever shadow

 Pointy crease brush by Sigma to kind of blend that on the outer part of my eye

 Just gonna blend some of it on the lid and I'm gonna use the same makeup forever blending brush for this

 I'm just gonna go back and forth and just where the two colors meet has to really transition well and

 So I'm gonna take some of the orange soda in with this small blending brush

 I'm just gonna apply that on the lower lash line to warm it up hardly shows any I

 Just applied a tiny amount and now I'm going to take the same makeup forever.

 846 and I'm going to place that on the outer part of my eye to deepen it more then blend it out using a Mac

 217 brush and I'm gonna take my Maya Maya palette and the shade deep brown

 I'm gonna place that using a Mac 217 brush on the outer part of my eye to give it some more depth

 And then we're gonna define the lower lash line more using the deep brown shade from the Miami a palette

 Then I'm going to take the shade vanilla and highlight my brow pop using this shade

 Going to apply some NYX jumbo pencil and milk on the tear duct area to make my next shadow really pop

 Just apply that over the NYX jumbo pencil on the tear duct area and this will be our pop of color

 You guys can use another shade if you want you can use the peach or some of the light champagne shades

 Then you're gonna line the waterline using a turquoise eyeliner pencil and apply some lashes.

 I'm gonna modify my face using Mac blotting powder and apply some bronzer

 I'm gonna use the contour kit by Anastasia mix the three shades and with an angle brush apply that on the sides of my forehead

 Just the hollows of my cheeks and along my jawline to define it

 When apply that on the highest points of my cheekbones and just a little bit on my cupid's bow as well

 Next I'm going to apply some blush on the apples of my cheeks and I'm using my favorite by Dior

 The shade is new red and next I'm going to line my lips with Mac pro long wear lip pencil in the shade

 What I'm using is by Mac sushi kiss then take a bliss ablaze lip liner and tone it down a little bit.

 So this is what you're gonna get and this is the final look guys

 I really hope you enjoyed this tutorial and you found it inspiring and you wanna of course try it out

 I know this lip is a little crazy for many of you and you guys be like girl you can miss me with

 But anyway, you can try something new which is what I should have done

 But anyway, never mind if you guys have any requests on looks you want to see next, please comment below.

 Filming mode lately and I want to have as much as two three tutorials a week for you

 So if you have any ideas and any requests, please I'm open for suggestions in that way

 You'll make my life so much easier and I'll create so much more for you

 Ok, this fly is one that I've been messing around with for a bit now and to be honest

 So what I'm going to do is it starts off with a, it's just got a regular tube and then my

 junction tube, this is Flex Tube from Canadian Tube Fly Company and this is just the regular

 And what I do is I'm going to slide my monster cone on there and I need to singe that in

 so that it gets flush against that cone and then just let that cool.

 Now on these, sometimes I'm going to weight them so on this one I'm actually going to

 take some 020 lead free wire and I'm just going to wrap this first little section behind

 the cone and this will also help to shove that cone up into the singed piece of tubing.

 So the first thing I'm going to do is I'm going to tie in some rabbit strip and you

 This is going to be a green kind of olive pattern but you can use them black and blue,

 So ok, I'm going to go ahead and start my thread just right behind my flex tube.

 The first thing I do is I grab my rabbit tail and I usually like to make this about double

 Now the next thing is I'm going to grab some just bass skirt material.

 And I want these about the same length as the rabbit strip, maybe a little shorter.

 Do the first couple of wraps over the top of the fishing, the bass skirts there.

 And then to add a little bit of variety I'm going to add the black.

 Okay once I've got that on the last step is to put in a dubbing loop.

 Now on this one I like to tease the fibers a little bit before I wrap it.

 And I'll try to tease them in one direction so that when I wrap these go back against

 Now the final thing here, I usually like to take the fly and brush that chenille laser

 And finally the other thing that's very important here, and one of the reasons I use tube flies

 for this type of pattern, is that I can grab this weedless wacky hook, and you just buy

 these in the bass section, has this nice built in weed guard, like so.

 And now what we can do is we can take our tube fly and simply insert that into the tubing.

 Now what we have is a virtually, well it is, it's a 100% weedless fly.

 And this monster cone gives this some nice vibrations as it goes through the water.

 And then the tail and the skirt material really shake and shimmy.

 And I've seen a lot of fish just come out of nowhere to slam this.

 And the reason I call it the deflectinator is because that monster cone, as you're pulling

 it through, actually will deflect off of some of the structure that you get.

 Combine that with the fact that it's a weedless hook, that again the hook point is kind of

 Hey Kickstarter, my name is Bryce and I'm the inventor of the SushiQuik.

 Have you ever asked yourself, man I'd love to make some of that sushi?

 and I thought to myself, you know what, I'm going to try making it.

 the nourish was moving all over the place, and this wasn't a dishwasher safe.

 So I went out and worked really hard to design the best sushi kit in the world.

 some of the hard things to do is how much rice to put on the nourish.

 When I was using one of these, the nourish was going all over the place.

 Again, I had nothing to spread it with, I had sticky rice all over my fingers.

 And then with these walls here, they're perfectly measured for the right amount of rice.

 Something else that's extremely difficult to do when you're just starting out is laying the rice.

 Another thing that's extremely difficult to do is cutting the sushi roll.

 And we designed it so you can grab the roll while you're cutting.

 So when you're done making the roll, you put it on top of the roll with the knife,

 So Sushi Quick is a lot more than just rolling ingredients and just rolling raw fish.

 And one thing that I wanted for Sushi Quick is for it to be fun and easy,

 so the kids could have fun using it as well, and have fun rolling healthier ingredients.

 I love to make lentil rolls, and lentil avocado rolls, chicken rolls, steak rolls.

 Anything that you want to roll, you can roll with the Sushi Quick.

 It requires five injection molds, and I'm counting the shipments and the first order of the products that we need to get you guys to roll with us.

 Something else that I want to do is I want to get a life-size version of the Sushi Quick made,

 and set the world's record for the world's biggest roll, which I think would be a lot of fun.

We appreciate all your support, and we look forward to rolling with you.

 However you think you can remember how each plug came out, I'm writing down on the package

 We are now going to try to get this section out so it can lift the whole harness up.

 That's how easy they should come out when you have anti-seize on them.

 One more time, remember how important it is to check your plugs.

 I'm going to find my socket, put my extension on, and try not to cross thread.

 Very difficult for two of the banks, the first and the fourth one.

 You cannot complain for a very simple tune up, but if you run into complications and

 you're stuck and you can't get that plug on, never rush the job.

 I hope this video was informative enough to show you the unconventional way of changing

 If you think you could do any better, video response your video here and I'll approve

 Hey guys, KineSanDocs1 here and my package is here, my speaker.

 Alright, it's not big or anything, it's just I rearranged it so it looks a little bit bigger.

 We have a USB adapter, a plug, and actually you have to charge it, so it's pretty cool.

 It seems like no one even has one of these because I couldn't find anything on YouTube about this, so it's kinda cool that I have one.

 So, there's a logo or whatever, I don't know why I'm saying it's a logo, but whatever.

 Because this is a lower-end model and that's a higher-end model, so it's not gonna have a display.

 Because this is a lower-end model and that's a higher-end model and the lower-end has better stuff.

 I'm shooting this part maybe three or four hours after the first, like, when I unboxed it.

 Actually, I'm not gonna show you it because that will be coming in my full review.

 Alright guys, I'm going to show you how to remove a variator from a motorbike cane.

 I grinded those down with a dremel and a stone wheel because the thinner they are, the easier

 So the first set of clips in there needs to be compressed in, okay.

 Now inside you're going to see one more circlip, the one you just loosened up, one more washer,

 And just so you remember, the order that these will go back in is bearings with a washer

 This, where'd it go, where the hell is the fucking, there we go, whoa.

 Now if you wanted to say install a Varplus, which is a very common and cheap way to upgrade

 your stock variator, totally worth it on any and every day driver, what you're going to

 This nut is, I want to say it's 36 millimeter if I recall correctly.

 It's not that hard to find a nut for it at AutoZone or something, but they can be kind

 Whatever you're going to have to do, put the variator in a vice, crack this nut.

 It's not reverse threaded or anything, so just crack it like normal.

 When this nut comes off here, this fixed cheek, right here, this guy, see what's happening

 Then you can put your bar plus in it, put the slide, screw the fixed cheek back on,

You have to have something to mute the strings with that you don't want to hear right now.

So, in order to make it go flat again, I'm just going to turn the opposite direction just a pinch.

An F sharp is flatter than a G. So, I'm going to turn it clockwise.

 Alright, I started tuning the piano already, but it is not finished yet.

 So, you can see that the B is very flat because it's showing it's an A sharp.

So, I just want to go up and put it on one of the three strings.

 And I'm going to go ahead and turn this clockwise to make it sharper.

 So, in order to do that, I'm going to take a piece of cardboard.

So, the purpose of the cardboard is to mute two of the strings because there are three strings for each key.

Now, I'm going to go ahead and switch it to the third string that's there.

 And if you've gone a little too far like I just did there, just go ahead and go the other direction.

 And now, when I do the middle string, I don't really know how to mute it any other way.

 I just go ahead and hold with two fingers here on the outside strings while I... Go ahead, Lily.

When I pinch too far, I'm going to back it off and then I'll stop it.

 And you can see that we're hitting right about in the right spot now.

 To create your tuning hammer, just turn your quarter inch socket drive around so that the square end that goes over your quarter inch drive is there.

 And use a hex head in here, whatever size socket you've got, and hook that onto your wrench.

Just mute one while you tune the other and tighten them down or loosen them up, depending on what you need.

If you watched part 3 of this series, you'll know that I did a braid out in order to get this look.

 I'm showing you that I separated one section of my hair from the other 2 thirds.

Once that's set, just re-insert your water tank into your Sonic line.

I like to keep mine around 7 or 8, but you may require more heat depending on your hair.

 Before I begin straightening, I press the steam button and gently squeeze the iron down the length of my hair.

 This will help to soften my hair and iron out any wrinkles before I begin straightening.

This way when I'm ready to straighten the whole one, the ends won't get tangled.

 Now that your hair is softened by the steam and your ends are a little bit detangled, you want to gently and slowly run the iron down the length of your hair.

This may be your desired result, but if not, go ahead and run a second pass through your hair.

 Once again, it depends on your hair texture and also the amount of heat that you're using.

 Remember that you need to steam it first to soften up your hair and then run the iron through your hair.

You may find that your hair may want to revert to its curly texture, and that's okay.

 That was the situation in my case and I kept on running the iron through my hair.

 One of the great things about the SonicLide is that you can place the iron right at your root.

As you can see, it gets it straight right at the root and it doesn't actually hurt.

 And here's a quick visual on how I'm doing with my legs so far.

 As you can see, my hair isn't going straight, but it does need some sort of shaping.

 One of the cool features about this iron is that I can do flips and curls with it.

 As you can see, there's grooves on the outside that I pointed out before in my earlier review.

And you can go ahead and run it through your hair and those grooves will help to flip your strands and add curls and waves.

 Quick tip, if you press the steam and pump the iron, it will help you as you curl your ends.

 Now I decided that I wanted to have some sort of fuzz on my hair.

 So I went ahead and parted my hair to the side and flipped it using the iron.

 You'll notice that a lot of steam does come out of the iron, even though you're not pressing the button.

You'll be left with hair that is straight, but once again, as I've mentioned before, it won't be bone straight.

 You'll have a lot of body, it will be light as a feather, and you'll notice that it will be very bouncy and flowy.

Try it sometime, I recommend it, and I hope you get equally good results.

 Then, on the side, we're going to have braised potato and fennel.

 And then, we're going to serve it up with a side of sautéed spinach, just simply, with garlic, olive oil, and salt.

 Now, when you buy these in the store, you're going to notice that you have a little bit of excess fat.

 Okay, so now that you have your tenderloins pretty much trimmed up, it's okay if there's a little bit of fat.

 And that's more of a muscle fat, and that's what's actually going to flavor and tenderize the meat.

 So now what we have is some sage, some cumin, some cinnamon, sea salt, and freshly ground black pepper, and a few sage leaves.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm just going to simply mix these up.

 So what we're going to be doing, we're waiting for this oil to get hot enough to prepare us for searing.

 Searing is when you put a really, really high amount of heat onto the meat all at once.

 And that's going to lock in the juices that are naturally found within the meat.

 Okay, so now we're just going to let these sear for about five minutes on each side until we have a beautiful golden brown.

 Now I'm just going to transfer it to a foil lined baking dish so it can finish cooking.

 It looks kind of like a giant grass alien, but it's actually called fennel, also known as anise.

Remove the fronds from the bulb and finely chop two tablespoons.

 So now I've got about a cup of fennel, of the fennel bulb, and I've just cut it in, I'd say, an inch slices.

 Put the fennel and three tablespoons of olive oil on medium heat and cover.

 I'm just going to quarter it and then I'm just going to chop it into fourth inch slices.

 I'm just going to toss these in and as you can see, the fennel is softening pretty nicely.

 Add one pound quartered potatoes, one fourth of a teaspoon salt, and one fourth teaspoon pepper.

 Okay, so the whole point of braising is to cook something at a high heat using a liquid.

 The liquid I'm going to use is just going to be a little bit of water.

 The whole point of braising is to cook something at a high heat using a liquid.

 So a lot of you might struggle with how to know if your meat is done or not.

 I have a tip that I've used, my mom taught me, and I've been using it ever since.

 It should feel like the palm of your hand, like the pad right here.

 It feels about the same, so I know that my meat is about medium to medium well.

 It's really important so that the juices don't just all pour out once you cut it.

 So whenever you're making an au jus, as they call it, which means with juice,

 And you're going to create a juice or a sauce from that to use on the side.

 So what I have here is about three tablespoons of the drippings that I got from my pork tenderloin

 and about a tablespoon of the remaining oil that I cooked it in the skillet.

 Now I'm simply just taking my spoon and I'm just going to scrape up all those yummy bits.

 It's really important that you take about a minute and do this so that you really get all of that good, good juice.

 So after about five minutes at a roaring boil, we're going to add our butter.

 After about 12 minutes of braising, remove the cover, turn off the heat, and stir occasionally until served.

 Now we have prepared three-fourths of a teaspoon of cornstarch and one tablespoon of water.

 Cut tenderloin into two-inch slices on an angle and transfer to a plate.

 Thanks for joining Forts and Figs for our very first food vlog.

 In Rasmalai ingredient, we use 1 can of Rasgulla that contains 20.

 We use 5 cups of boiled water that we are going to put Rasgulla in.

 Starting now cooking, we put already half and half in saucepan.

 And then we put it in hot boiled water for 5 minutes to take out syrup and make spongy.

 Now still it's boiling and we are starting putting Rasgulla in.

 Hi guys, it's Jonna and I'm going to show you a little hairstyle today that I like to

 do sometimes just to have your hair up and out of your face and it's good for summer

 when it's hot or when it's windy and you don't want to deal with your hair sticking in your

 So what you're going to need is some sort of shine polish or shine spray, some sort

 So first what I'm going to do is get a little bit of whatever shine product you like.

 And I do that first because I don't want to have to deal with it after my style is complete

 and try to get this shine product in there while not messing up the style.

 Okay, so I dumped out some bobby pins here on the counter so they'll be easier for me

 And the first thing I'm going to do is grab the front portion of the hair like you're

 Just about, I kind of go from the corner of the eyebrow in the corner of the eyebrow to

 And then what you're going to do is twist that portion of hair and pin this up top kind

 My hair seems to kind of do what I want it to do so I don't have to use too many pins.

 But if your hair is straight or fine then you're going to probably have to use at least

 So then once you have that there, you're going to grab a section of hair.

 So grab the section of hair by your ear because we're going to use this to camouflage what

 And then grab underneath that, kind of from the base of your head, a section of hair about

 And then I'm going to divide that hair into three sections and braid it.

 Then when you get to the bottom of this braid, or as long as you want it to be, you want

 to get it as long as possible because we're going to need a lot of length to this braid.

 But then just to fix it and keep it in place while you're doing the other side, just go

 ahead and slide a bobby pin on the end of the braid like that so it doesn't unbraid

 Now I'm going to do the same thing on the other side and I'll be right back.

 Okay, so what I've done is braid the other side and I also fixed it in place with a bobby

 Now what we're going to do next is grab that hair in front of the ear that we left out

 of the braid and pull it back and pull up all of the rest of your hair, everything that's

 And at this point, you can kind of do whatever you prefer or whatever's easiest for you when

 I would just go with what do you do on a hot summer's day to throw your hair up?

 Just for the sake of time, I'm going to do what's easiest for me.

 After I gather all of my hair in my hand here, I try to spread it out evenly in a circle,

 fanning outward, and then grab it with the other hand with the ponytail holder already

 And grab it all, get any that I missed, and go ahead and fasten that with the ponytail

 Then you can fluff that up, tighten it, make it as big or as small or however you want

 The next step is going to be to take out those bobby pins at the end of your braids and these

 So we're going to bring this braid over here and secure it behind this ear with one bobby

 And again, if you have straighter hair or slick, fine hair, it's going to take more.

 We're going to grab this one, wrap it across the top, and secure it behind this ear.

 Then once you're finished, you can do whatever you want to do with bangs or curl these little

 I'm going to use this Bed Head Masterpiece hairspray and just kind of finish the look.

 Hey guys, so I'm back with another makeup tutorial video doing this eye which is very

 I'm going to be using MAC's Painterly Paint Pot which is a neutral skin tone shade.

 I'm just taking this on my finger and placing it all over the eye area.

 The first color I'm going to be taking is Brulee and I'll be using this as my highlight

 I'm just taking a big brush and then just placing this right under the brow.

 It is called Naked Lunch and it is basically a champagne type of pink color with a little

 I'm using that same brush and I'm just going to be packing this all over the lid area.

 You'll be able to fill your crease if you take your brush and press in a little bit.

 I am going to take it in the tear duct area because that will highlight in there a little

 Then taking a blending brush, I'm just going to go between the two colors, the lid color

 And I'm just going to take my brush and just go back and forth just to make sure that everything

 With that same brush, I'm going to be going in my crease area with Cork.

 So if you tilt your head back a little bit and place the brush on your outer corner of

 your eye, you'll be able to see your crease and be able to place your crease colors perfectly.

 And I'm taking this all the way in to right about where my brow starts.

 I always get questions asking how everything is always blended smoothly.

 If you press hard, you're going to get a harsh line with your shadows.

 Next I'm going to be going in with Saddle, which is another brown shade.

 Same brush and in the same area, but instead I'm going to start it out here and instead

 What this will do is it'll kind of have a gradient effect between your browns going

 And it's another brown color, but it has a shimmer sheen to it.

 I'm placing this on the outer corner and I'm just staying out here.

 And then the last color I'm putting on the lid is Carbon, which is just a matte black.

 Only take a little bit of this color and I'm just placing it right out here.

 I'm not putting a lot of pressure, I'm just lightly flicking the black on my outer corner

 And since I have that brown and black recently used, I'm going to take that Twinks color,

 the darkest brown color that we used, and I'm just going to line underneath my eye.

 I'm not going in the waterline, I'm just smudging this right along the lash line.

 And then take the black as well, but don't bring it all the way in, just take it halfway.

 To line my eyes, I'm going to be taking MAC's Dip Down Fluid Line, which is just a straight

 Okay guys, so I went ahead and put on some top lashes off camera, and now I'm going to

 be going in with this yellow from the Make Up For Ever Flash Palette.

 You can take a brown, you can take a white, and you can line your inner line.

 But I'm going to take this yellow and I'm going to line my waterline with it.

 And to set that, I'm going to be going in with MAC's Chrome Yellow Eyeshadow.

 Okay, so now the eyes are done, and now you have this neutral, almost soft, smoky eye

 So while my bottom lashes are drying, let's go ahead and get started on the lips.

 Okay so to start out the lips, I'm going to be taking a neutral shade lip liner.

 Okay so I wasn't really feeling that, so I'm going in with Cork instead, which is a little

 And to finish off, I'm going to use a little bit of Laura Mercier's Lip Glossier in Bare

 Okay guys, so this is the finished look once you have eyes and lips complete.

 It's very clean, very simple, but it has a pop of something on the eyes and with a nude

So today's juicing recipe is going to consist of all this fruits and vegetables

I have eight leaves of kale right there, and I have two beets right there

 Then right here is a cucumber and then right there I have four carrots

 But not like very sweet, and I would say the main thing that I'm tasting in here is the beets

 Beets are slightly sweet, but it's not like a bad type of sweetness.

 So this is very good, and you know all the ingredients that I put in here is so good for the body the carrots the cucumbers

 Everything is so good and so good and so nutritious for the body, so I would say go try this out

 Let me know how it tastes so you and I will see you guys on the next video.

We are going to make semolina or suji pancakes and of the savory kind.

 So for making the pancakes, here I have taken 1 cup of unroasted semolina.

 liquid side because I am pretty sure that when it is going to stay in while I am doing

You could add coriander, really anything to make it more colorful, more wonderful.

 So now that our batter is ready, we are going to make the pancakes.

Take another spoonful and I am going to flatten it as best as possible

You can see these little bubbles coming up over the surface which

I am going to add just drops of oil again because I think that the tawa has really less oil

 maybe cabbage, french beans, anything and it would taste amazing.

 So the holiday seasons are upon us and we're all going to have delicious, beautiful holiday

 dinners with our families, but there's a lot of problems with some of the foods we eat.

 For example, stuffing has lots of bread that activates your fat programs, mashed potatoes,

 How do we get through the holidays, eat really, really well, and at the same time stay fit,

 keep our blood sugar stable, nourish our bodies, turn off the fat programs?

 In this stuffing we're basically using chopped walnuts instead of bread crumbs.

 This is a stuffing that you can make inside a turkey if you want by just putting all the

 ingredients I'm about to tell you about just in the turkey and cooking it, or you can make

 We're going to make it today on the stove top because you can use it as an accompaniment

 So what we're going to start with, we're just going to take a pan, we're going to put it

 Ghee is a very friendly cooking oil because it doesn't get corrupted at high temperatures.

 Okay, so I'm going to take two chopped red onions, I'm going to put them in there.

 Alright, so after about five minutes the vegetables are nice and lightly browned.

 Either you make it on your own or you buy it but make sure it doesn't have MSG, also

 known as hydrolyzed vegetable protein, hydrolyzed yeast extract, flavor enhancer 621, up to

 MSG has a chemical inside it that excites a part of our brain that activates our fat

 It turns on our fat programs and gets our body to want to be fat so you don't want MSG

 So this is a nice chicken stock that's got free range organic chickens, no MSG.

 Alright, so it should boil straight away but if it doesn't boil straight away put it on

 And then put it on a low heat and simmer it for about five minutes.

 That's what we're going to do right now, we're just going to let it simmer.

 Okay, so now that it's simmered for about five minutes we're going to add two large

 And optional, a quarter cup of wine, which I highly recommend, especially if it's the

 Now, I recommend using a healthy salt like Himalayan salt crystals or Celtic salts.

 These salts have really good trace minerals that your body's really craving.

 And a lot of times we crave salt and we eat table salt and table salt is just poison but

 Celtic salt is very high in iodine and has other trace minerals and sea salt is also

 And your body really does need this, it needs the trace minerals, it's not getting them

 And then you can serve it warm if you want or you can refrigerate it and then heat it

 I don't think that I do it any special way that anyone else doesn't do or does or whatever.

Today I'm going to be showing you really quickly how I do a sock bun.

 I had a lot of requests to do a video for this in my previous video and since I'm filming a lookbook today

 and I'm going to be wearing my hair in a bun, I figured I'll just film the process for you guys.

 So the first thing that you're going to need is like a boar bristle brush or something just for combing the hair back.

Forgive me, I did not prepare for this video and clean out my hair brush for YouTube.

 The next thing you're going to need is one of these little hair donuts.

You can get them at a lot of different beauty supplies and things like that.

 A little hair tie that is whatever size you like for putting your hair up in a ponytail.

 And then I like to use a little smaller one and you'll see why in a second.

 And then you'll need various little bobby pins and things like that.

 I really just try to focus on getting the hair at the right angle because my hair is still relatively short for this and it's not so much that it's short but it's very layered.

 So I try to get the right angle of the ponytail and I find that for me it's about there but everyone is a little different.

 I think in the video from the other day I was wearing it a bit higher and it was a bit of a pain to work with.

 And I think the ones piled completely high on the head are a little bit funny looking anyway.

 So I feel like it's better to be at the top side of the crown of the head.

 So you just want to make sure it's really smooth or if you have wavier hair or curly hair I think it looks really great when it's a little messy personally.

 Okay, and I'm just going to bun it like that for right now and you'll see why.

 Because I'm going for a sleek look so I don't want any flyaways in my hair.

 Also because it's gotten used to being in a ponytail it will kind of work with you a little easier.

 Kind of adjust the front hair if you want to loosen it and pull it out a little bit.

 So usually we'll sort of set it in the front first and then wrap the hair around.

 Now luckily the bun that I'm using is black and my hair is black.

 So if a little tiny bit of the bun ends up showing or the hair donut, it's not the end of the world.

 Okay, so then once I have all the hair tucked around I take this little guy.

 And I'm going to take the donut and I'm going to tuck it around.

 And then I'm going to start taking the bobby pins and just pinning.

 Especially the back hair that really doesn't want to tuck in because it's too short really.

 So that way this hair in the back will stay up just in case there's any little bits that don't want to cooperate with the rest of the class.

 And then I will play with my little sideburn hairs and all that.

 And you can see that I have like really bad roots in my hair right now.

Maybe it was helpful for you guys to see like a shorter haired person put their hair up in a sock bun.

 I just think this is so cute and it's really great for days when I don't feel like doing my hair.

 And I'm so happy that it's finally long enough to do this with.

 I hope that you guys are having a fantastic day and I'll see you guys in my next video.

I've had school coming to an end and finals and all that stuff so I probably

 should have my head examined for doing this now because I still have one final this evening.

 these on the shelf for ages and I've always been tempted but never gone through with it.

They're boneless packed in vinegar and from some of the other movies I've seen

 people recently that posted a pickled pig's feet videos and didn't look like there was a whole lot

I mean I still have to get a good recipe for cooking them but hey.

I always thought it was just fat and skin because the pig's feet I got in the freezer don't have pork hocks.

But the only thing I can see that would be offsetting to somebody if they were eating this is if you're not a fan of vinegar, you probably shouldn't eat this.

Well, for being filthy animals, pigs sure taste magically delicious.

Like I said, I'm not going to eat a strip of fat soaked in vinegar.

I don't think I'll give it a two thumbs up because it's not like I'm going to go buy a case of this stuff.

 The next one I'm going to show you actually includes a flam tap and the stop.

 What I'm going to do is flam the first time and the snare drum.

 Now after I flam that, I'm going to do a tap with my left hand.

 And after I do that tap, I'm going to bring my right hand back down and do a beat with

 Now after I do that, I once again hit the bass drum while I'm hitting the hi-hat.

 And you can actually contribute that lick in a two-four groove.

 The way I use it is in a straight ahead groove and it sounds kind of off when I do it.

 Hi this is Leonard from Cosmic Sound, we're here to talk about the Native Instruments

First thing I want to do is run you through the setup we've got here.

 We're running a Macbook Pro here, running Traktor Pro, we've got two CDJ-2000s running

 in HID Kontrol mode, Zone 92 mixer by Allen & Heath, and of course the two units in question,

 to you today how these things work and how they can impact upon your usage of the Traktor

Whether you're running Traktor Scratch Pro or Traktor Pro, it's definitely an excellent

So what I want to do first is run you through the different elements

The bottom we've got the playback section, right above that the looping

 section, above that your browsing controls, and then finally at the top all these are

The second part here is for jumping backwards and forwards within your track so you can

 actually move to the nearest cue point or back to the beginning of the track using the

 shift button, and this one here, or this one to get back to your nearest cue point.

 row of buttons here you can use to jump beats, backwards and forwards.

 hear this very well but it's basically jumping forwards and backwards one beat every time

And finally at the top is your manual looping controls which you

 probably won't use a lot given this excellent control from this loop knob here.

 these buttons has a shift state as well, so for example to jump back to the beginning

 want to use timecode, you can use these ones here as your pitch bend.

 to jump between different cue points in the track that you've set up previously.

 The beauty of this as well is that I can actually hit all these buttons out of time and as long

 as I've got the snap and quantise features enabled on the software, it'll always drop

Above that you've got your looping section, this is very very simple.

 Basically set your loop size, click the button to create the loop, you can then lengthen

 want to move that throughout the track, hold shift and twist the knob.

 because I've got snap and quantise enabled, it'll always drop in on time, so you can be

 in the middle of a four deck mix and do this and it won't affect it at all.

 can do, if you hit shift and click, you can go to full screen browser.

 is holding shift and twisting this knob will actually move your position in the track.

Also because I've got snap and quantise enabled, this will always

 time, I can quickly catch up by moving four to beat at a time and get back into the mix.

 you have an advanced effect, this top one here will actually turn the effect on and

 using a chained effect, this will actually control your three different effects.

 The major advantage of this is that you can't do that with the software.

This gives you control over three different parameters or three different effects all at the same time.

 Finally, your shift state here can actually be used to change effects very simply by holding shift and pressing the button.

 As you can see there, it's cycling through the different effects at the top.

It also comes with an excellent bag, which we do a bundle for $329 including the bag.

It looks really great next to machine if you're a current owner of a machine as well.

 Today we're going to make a slow cooked sausage that you can put in your crock pot the night

 before, turn on when you go to work in the morning, come home to something ridiculous.

 This is a pound of homemade sausage from the church next door to me.

 Put that in there and then we're going to add some other ingredients that will really

 We have a green pepper, an orange pepper, a yellow pepper, a red pepper, two onions,

 two fresh tomatoes, fresh garlic back there, pepper, garlic salt, crushed red pepper, and

 then a can of chopped Italian tomatoes and whole peeled tomatoes.

 Cut those up nice and fine and then we'll drop them into the pot.

 You're using canned tomatoes but a couple fresh ones are absolutely no joke.

 As far as all these peppers go I'm just going to use half of each one.

 Next I'm going to use half of the colored ones here and then a full green one.

 But man if you can get these other colored peppers they don't just look different they

 If you haven't had them, I know some tomatoes in the sink will blow your mind.

 Then generally I like to put the dry things on the bottom and the wet stuff on top.

 During the day when this is cooking the stewed tomatoes and all that good stuff will trickle

 Even though it is garlic sausage I don't think there has ever been enough garlic in the world.

 Tomatoes, onions, yellow peppers, green peppers, red peppers, orange peppers.

 After this simmers for a good solid ten hours you get home from work it will blow your mind.

 Usually when I get home I cook up a little bit of pasta or elbow noodles, macaroni.

 If you leave the top off for 20 minutes to half hours it will actually thicken up.

 Had the top off for the last half hour so it has thickened up a little bit.

 We're going to practice the angles against one, two, and three.

 Starting off, the opponent's going to be doing the one strike, which is a thrust.

 When that thrust comes in, we're going to step at an angle forward like this, bringing

 We're actually allowing the point, his blade, to continue its journey forward as we strike

 The next one is against the same strike, a forward thrust, but this time we're going

 We step out, striking as if we're throwing a punch into that wooden sword here, and then

 We're just going to bring it up and protect, then back forward.

 He's going to strike a little bit harder each time to get you used to protecting.

 Now he's going to do a number three strike, the other side, same roof block movement right

 Once you're comfortable with these movements, you're going to add a strike and a step.

 He comes on the number two strike, the other side, block, strike.

 Notice I'm doing a little bit of a movement as the strike comes in.

 When you're doing this training drill, it's okay for your opponent to strike a little

 When you have it on this side and he strikes, there can be a gap right there, but if you

 have that gap between the arm and the back of the blade, you need to make sure that you're

 If I'm not holding it strong, he's going to keep hitting me in the arm.

 If you're just beginning and you're not used to holding that blade there, go ahead and

 For example, if I have it here, it's resting against the back of my arm, I'm blocking.

 If this elbow is here, he's going to hit the arm when he's striking.

 I want to turn, make sure he does not hit my arm and he hits the back of the blade.

 He is transferring that force from his stick into your arm, so start off with light strikes.

 This short video will show you exactly how to use safe lace and never again have to worry

 Watch and see how this innovative product eliminates a problem that we have all struggled

 Usually the outside holes are for adult shoes or wider children's shoes such as skate shoes

 and the inside holes are for smaller children's shoes or narrow adult's shoes such as football

 Ultimately you can choose whichever hole feels the most comfortable and fits the best on

 Once the laces are threaded through, hold the laces in one hand while pushing the safe

 Tie your bow as normal with no double knot required as the safe lace eliminates the need

 for this difficult, inconvenient and unreliable method of tying.

 Now for the final step to keep your laces locked and secured once and for all.

 Put your finger under the front of the safe lace and lift slightly while pulling the lock

 tab over the bow and around the safe lace tab to lock it in place.

 Make sure all edges of the tab are completely hooked under and your bow is secured.

 You can now feel safe in knowing your shoe laces are locked in place with safe lace and

 When your day is done and it's time to kick off your shoes, it's as simple as releasing

 the lock tab, untying your bow as normal and allowing the safe lace to just hang on your

 Enjoy this revolutionary product on all your lace shoes every day.

 Now today I thought I'd show you how I like to make my chicken burgers.

 Now I love chicken burgers and I tend to make these all the time now because they're just

 so easy and they taste so good and they only take about 5 minutes to make.

 Okay so for this burger all you're going to need is some chicken, some bacon, some bread,

 tomatoes, plastic cheese, some of this lettuce in a bag, some mayonnaise, now this is Kewpie

 mayonnaise and I love Kewpie mayonnaise, it tastes really good, it's great on burgers.

 Now I wish they'd sponsor me so I wouldn't have to keep forking out $4.50 for it though.

 Now first things first, I'm just going to toast this bread and get it ready.

 Now with my chicken I just like to get the piece of paper that I've just bought it in.

 Now I just get my knife and I just slice like this along the top.

 Now I've done this before in videos, it's not hard and now that that's done it's time

 Okay now I'm just heating up this frying pan right, ahhh, and what I'm going to do is spray

 some olive oil on there or some cooking oil and now I'm just going to tear this bacon

 in half because it is a bit big and I'm just going to start cooking this and I'm just going

 Over the top of the chicken I'm just going to sprinkle some salt and pepper.

 And make sure if you're doing this at home you make sure that you use a fork or some

 Now because this chicken's cut fairly thin it actually cooks pretty quickly so you can

 Okay so while that's cooking, that toast's now ready, so I'll just add a little bit of

 butter to this so people can have a whinge about how much butter I'm using.

 I'm just going to plonk some lettuce on the bread like that, smash those on that bread.

 If you want to know how nicely it's cooking just get a knife and cut a bit in the middle

 Still a little bit pink so I'll just give it another minute or two.

 Oh well that's looking cooked so now it's time to make this bad boy.

 The plastic cheese to melt over the top and some of my favourite mayo, the more the better.

 Now I'm just going to add a little bit of BBQ sauce on top because I do like my BBQ

 It looks absolutely fantastic and I cannot wait to smash it into me.

 Oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh oh

 That chicken burger is so delicious and I've still got three quarters of it sitting over

 there taunting me to go and eat it so I'm going to say goodbye.

 Remember to thumb this video up or down if you believe the chicken came before the egg.

 Thanks for watching and I'll see you next time right here on Greg's Kitchen.

Today I'm going to show you how I made these fun little flowers with the

 color, but you could complement these with any papers, back and forth, patterned papers.

 I made my own patterned centers, so we'll show you how I made those.

 First thing you're going to need for the center embellishment on this flower is a background

How I do the background stamp is I put my paper from the top down.

 get a little bit of ink on here first and be very generous with it.

It's all writing, but if you had a special image that you wanted on there, you

 How I do it is I gently lay it down on the top, and then I take a piece of scrap paper,

 copy paper, lay it on the top, and without moving the cardstock underneath, I just lightly

 used for this project, the largest circle I used, Cherry Cobbler, and it's plain cardstock.

 couple of pieces of adhesive on the back of the middle one, flip it over, and line these

 use one of the large Cherry Cobbler buttons from the Designer Series buttons.

 you get a lot of different colors, and it coordinates with the papers in that collection.

 If anybody does not know, you go from the right over to the left and wrap it around

If you have a larger glue dot that's more heavy duty, I would suggest you use that.

 I'm using up some of my smaller mini glue dots, so I put three on.

 Then for the back, I don't have a brad on this one that you could use to secure it on.

 I just used a heavy duty 3D glue dot and pressed it on the back.

 Hello again, it's been one day since we put in packet number one, the water purifier.

 And now it's for the moment of truth, we're going to put in the instant live eggs.

 So, after you've waited 24 hours, open packet number two, put it in, and mix it.

 And you'll notice that the water has turned a shade of blue or green.

 This is normal because they put coloring in so you can see the babies better.

 I'm not sure if the camera is clear enough for you to see them, but if you can, well, here.

 Well, if you can't see them, then that's fine because in a few days you will be able to.

 And from now on, this is what you should do for the next five days.

 This is a recipe from Carla Hall's brand new cookbook called Cooking with Love.

 And I was actually really surprised how wonderful these dumplings turned out.

 They're kind of a cross between a siu mai, which is a Chinese steamed dumpling, and then

 Now if you're surprised to see the yellow curry powder showing up in a Chinese dumpling,

 Curry powder is used in many, many different types of Asian Chinese cooking and dishes,

 My mom used to make puff pastries filled with ground beef and curry powder.

 I grated fresh ginger using a rasp grater, and then I also added a ton of garlic.

 This is some salt and some cornstarch to help bind everything together.

 I'm going to whisk in an egg, add a touch of sesame oil, and add in the ground beef.

 And remember, all of the exact measurements of the ingredients are in the recipe, written

 You defrost them in the refrigerator or on the counter for about 45 minutes, in the refrigerator

 First step, dip your finger into the egg wash and just go around the outside of the dumpling

 I'm going to add about a tablespoon of filling, and with your right hand, make a letter O.

 Now take the dumpling, stick it in that O, and that will help tighten the dumpling up

 You want a flat bottom as well, so you can just place it on the table just like that.

 Make an O. Stick your dumpling in there, push it in there, and that will help make the beautiful

 Tap the top just to make sure that everything's even, nice and even.

 And place it on your table to make sure you have a flat bottom.

 Make sure you cover everything with a plastic wrap so that they don't dry out.

 All right, you can do this on the table if you don't like making your hands into an O.

 You just put it on the table and kind of squish it together, just like that.

 Once it's brown, you're going to take your lid and use that sort of as your shield, because

 you're going to add a couple tablespoons of water, and cover immediately.

 This will steam and cook the rest of the dumpling the rest of the way.

 The meat is fully cooked on the inside, and you've got a beautiful, crisp, browned bottom.

 If you love my video recipes, make sure you subscribe to my YouTube channel.

 So, on a typical morning, I'll get up after pressing the snooze button a customary 12 times.

 So, the first thing I do after sprinting out of my room to panic is going to wash my face.

 Next, I'm starting out with my makeup so people don't think that Halloween came early this year.

 Then, I apply a little bit of black eyeshadow to my lash line to accentuate my eyelashes.

 Then, I'm just going ahead and lightly filling in my brows with some brow powder.

 Thank you guys so much for watching and I really hope you enjoyed the video.

 And I hope you're going to relate to this and I hope I'm not the only one who actually wakes up

 And I also just made a Twitter and Instagram for my YouTube channel so I'll link those down below.

 So send me in your questions for a Q&A video because I really want to do a Q&A video.

 Today I'm going to be showing you guys something called the Bubba Keg.

 It has these two side panels that most of the Kamados don't come with.

 And each one has three tool hooks where you can hook up this unique little tool that comes

 Also for when you're out tailgating or camping or whatever it is you might use this grill

 There's a bottle opener on each side for a nice little adult refreshment.

 The other thing that it has that is really good for the novice cooker is that the top

 One of the neat features about the two side trays is how quickly they'll come off.

 There are buttons and in the next segment we'll actually zoom in on all this stuff but

 It's not like you have to have an engineering degree to figure that part out.

 Like I was saying the dampers, once you've been playing around with it a little while,

 I would think probably after about a week or so, you start to learn your numbers.

 This thing will probably roll up to 700, close to 800 degrees for when you're doing some

 Now the construction on this thing is steel and it's basically a two ply system.

 One layer is a ply of steel on the outside and one on the inside.

 The center is oven grade insulation and there's also an oven grade gasket on the top to hold

 So it performs an excellent convection form of cooking because your heat is going to come

 You have this top grade here which with use of the handy tool will move out of the way.

 Now granted when it's not hot you obviously don't need to use the tool but it will move

 The other neat thing is, and when I zoom in in a little while we'll get to look at this,

 but this bottom grade also has two different levels depending on how close you want to

 be down to your coals and what type of heat you're looking for.

 So what I'm going to do now is get you guys in for a close look so we can zoom in.

 Alright as you can see, as I was showing you earlier, the top grill will move out of the

 So I'm going to take it off to show you what you can do with the bottom.

 All you do is you place the handy tool in there and lock it in place.

 You can actually rotate it out like this and it can be set up here about three inches

 higher to get a little bit away from your heat depending on what you're cooking.

 Possibly if you're cooking a roast or doing some chickens you might want to be up a little

 Now I want to show you the mechanics on this thing so I went ahead and removed the fire

 pit and fire grate so you can see how large it is and where your ashes will go, how easy

 Now the next thing that would go in is the fire pit and it's enameled steel.

 Goes in there like that and then your fire grate goes in the bottom to hold your natural

 Other than that you put in your grill and you're ready to cook at the tailgate or camping

 I've zoomed in tight on the top damper to show you what I was talking about earlier.

 As you can see the top damper's number from zero to five, zero being closed and as you

 It opens up the damper's top and bottom to allow more oxygen through which is what gets

 There are still two other convenience features that I'd like to show you guys and one of

 You can roll it around wherever you'd like but one of my favorite things about this that

 I find just amazing is whenever you're ready you unscrew this pin and once it comes out

 Now you will need two people to perform this operation but nevertheless as I said this

 You slide this guy in right into there where this cart used to be.

 It now hooks up to the back of your vehicle and you're ready to tow it off to whatever

 facility you plan on cooking at so you can show up to be the pro chef that you probably

 I want to show you all a zoom in of the Bubba Keg and how it looks once you attach it to

 See it's perfect for taking it tailgating, for camping and for whatever else.

 Stick around because in a minute I'll be doing grill tests on this unit and we'll see how

 Thank you and remember at Shoppers Choice we smoke the competition.

We're going to start off with about maybe about a quarter cup of

 Now we're going to go ahead and turn the heat off and add our shrimp.

 All right our shrimp lo mein is done and we'll go ahead and get it plated up and

Today I'm going to show you how to clean your air filter on your Ninja

So first thing you're going to do is you're going to remove that little screw I

And then you're going to remove this side panel on the motorcycle,

Well, mine's actually not that messy because I cleaned it a few days ago.

 and I'm just trying to really, really get all that dirt that builds up in there.

 filter and you're going to want to remove these little grit things and you just want

 to apply some pressure to that, just like I'm showing you in the video.

Remember, your filter is going to be much dirtier if you haven't cleaned

Just scrub it, scrub it, scrub it, get all that oil out of there.

 the foam because you might rip it, so all you're going to do is squeeze it like I do

There's no oil, there's no residue, there's no dirt, there's nothing in it.

 you because I haven't found a good video on how to do this so I just thought, hey, why

 simple to just put those in the holes there and then you're going to want to, they have

 good clean and then you're just going to want to put everything back on its place.

 screws and then put the side panel on the right side of the motorcycle and you should

Now my warranty manual says to do this every 1000 kilometers or 600 miles

 because it's a very important part of your motorcycle life, your actual motor.

 want any dirt in there, any nasty stuff so just make sure you clean it.

 please subscribe, please leave me a comment below if you have any suggestions, if you

 have anything you want to see, if there's anything you think I did wrong, you know,

 anything, anything, you can just leave it in the comment section.

 new channel and I really want to know what you guys think about it.

 me know if you want to see anything, see me doing anything on my motorcycle, you know,

 If you have any further questions, just let me know in the comments and I'll do my best.

 AMSR's Crystal Tempered Glass HD Screen Protector provides superior screen protection with an

 Optically clear adhesive ensures HD clarity and the 3D beveled edges means it's AMSR

 case compatible and prevents fractures or chipping on the sides and edges.

 Installation is quick and easy, but first let's see what's inside.

 We have installation instructions, de-dusting film, a microfiber cleaning cloth, an alcohol

 prep pad, a scratch card, two optional home buttons, and the Crystal Tempered Glass HD

 You'll achieve optimal results with a clean hand and in a dust free environment.

 First, thoroughly clean your device's screen with the alcohol prep pad, removing dust,

 Remove the protective film labeled 1 on your tempered glass screen protector.

 Now firmly press in the center and sit back and watch the screen protector self-adhere.

 If air bubbles are present, use your finger or the scratch card to remove, working from

 Remove the protective film labeled 2, and if desired, the optional home button may be

 Enjoy and be sure to visit Amzer.com for this and other amazing smartphone enhancements.

 Hey everyone, this is Alia Ceja and today I'm going to be making one of my favorite

 breakfast comfort foods, sauteed potatoes and longaniza breakfast tacos paired with

 This is the perfect brunch combination to satisfy any morning hangover or craving.

 A little bit about our sparkling wine, we're very excited to introduce our first Ceja Vineyards

 My uncle and winemaker Armando Ceja made a very limited production, less than 300 cases.

 It's crisp, it's refreshing, this sparkling wine is perfect for any occasion.

 This recipe serves 4-6 people and I'm going to start by cooking the longaniza.

 I'm using one package and you can find it at most supermarkets.

 For those of you who don't know what it is, it's a spicy pork sausage, similar to chorizo,

 I placed it on some paper napkins to soak up the remaining grease.

 Now I'm going to begin sautéing the potatoes with a little bit of olive oil.

 I'm using 12 small red potatoes, but any type will work just as fine.

 I'm going to slice them into thin triangular pieces and I'm going to sauté them on a medium heat

 To finish off my taco filling, I'm going to be making a sofrito,

 I'm going to put a little bit of olive oil in the pan on a medium heat

 Before serving, I like to put a slice of avocado over the top of them.

 The acidity in the sparkling wine cuts through the spice component of the longaniza,

 show y'all how to make a shake at home with our products, how to make a correct shake.

 water and then you take 2 scoops, which is a 2 tablespoon scoop.

So, okay, this is blueberry muffin so we're going to use a 2 ounce, which

And we're going to use about a quarter of a teaspoon of that as well.

 equal to a 20 minute workout and it's a thermogenic so it heats your core up.

It should be a nice pourable consistency and it should make, like I said, you start

 out with about 8 ounces of water so it'll make a nice full cup.

 distributor or your sponsor that got you on Herbalife because we have some phenomenal

So it's been a really long time since I've uploaded a tutorial or video actually.

She commented on one of my videos asking if I can do a nail tutorial on the El Salvadorian flag.

Yeah, I got this request during the holiday break and the holidays are pretty hectic.

 I couldn't do it last week because school, I'm very busy with school.

 So for this video we're going to need our base coat and our top coat.

 For the center I'm using Sally Hansen Extreme Nail Wear Lime Lights.

 So anyways, what we're going to do our first step is we're going to put our base coat on and two coats of the white.

 You're going to let that dry and then we're going to start on our next step.

 Okay, so once you have your white painted on, you can just, if you want to do this now, you can remove the extra nail polish around your nails.

 But I usually do that at the end of the video just saving me a whole bunch of time.

 So once you have your white dried, you're going to take your blue.

 I'm using a light blue but in some pictures of the flag I'm not sure what it's colored, if it's light or dark blue.

 So what you're going to do is on your nail, you're going to have two strips of blue on the top and the bottom.

 So going that way and that way and then you're going to have a strip of white in the center.

 So you're going to take most of the nail polish off the brush because right now we're just going to outline the strip and then you can fill it in more later.

 So you're just going to make a line of blue on the top, or as it's showing on the bottom, and then on the other side as well.

 So once you have done that, you can go over and make it a little bit darker, which I'm going to go do.

 Let it dry a bit and then we're going to continue with the next step.

 So on the El Salvadorian flag, in the middle of the white part, they have the crest which is like, I'm not even sure, it's like a triangle with green around it and then it has writing on it.

 Because I do not have nails big enough for that and because I just don't have the patience to draw all that, I'm just going to use green and I'm going to do like a half circle, kind of like a smiley face without the eyes.

I suggest you don't use this shimmer, lime light by Sally Hansen because it's not very good.

 So I'm going to have to go over it a couple times, but you're going to take your green and you're just going to draw like a little semi-circle.

 Or if you have a detail brush, that's even way better than this.

 Or if you just want to draw a circle with your green, then you can do that too.

 So it's going to look, I don't even know if you can see the green because it's so light.

But anyways, I'm going to go over the green a couple more times and then add my top coat and then we'll be done.

Okay, so I have gone over the green a few more times and that's about as dark as I can make it.

 But anyways, so I've darkened the green as much as I can and I've put my top coat on.

I would suggest using a darker green if you're going to do this, but I don't have one so I can't do that.

 So anyways, I hope you liked this tutorial and that it was really simple to follow.

But anyways, so I hope you enjoyed this and I'm willing to take any requests.

 Are there any options now you've had the car for a while you wish maybe you would have

 I wish I had the glass roof and I've been seeing the puddle lights on Instagram a lot

 The puddle lights though, Starkey actually offers an aftermarket puddle light kit designed

 for the 2013-14 Mustangs and today we're going to install it on Courtney's car.

 Starkey includes everything needed to add the puddle lights to your 2013 or 14 Mustang

 including the light assemblies themselves, all the wiring necessary, as well as templates

 The lights are going to be available in white, red, blue, green, or orange.

 These are going to be the same lights Ford installs on other vehicles such as the Taurus

 It's not going to be the Mustang outline that's found on the factory Mustang puddle lights.

 For this installation you'll need an 11mm wrench, small flat head screwdriver, scissors,

 You don't even have to take your door panel off, just this little cover here.

 Courtney actually asked if she could help since it's her car, we're going to let her

 To do that, basically just squeeze and pull up here and do the same thing down on this

 Make sure you get the last one, you're holding onto the mirror, then you can unplug it and

 It's a good idea before you remove this last nut to take the mirror off, disconnect the

 Once you get the mirror off the car, you have to remove the mirror glass to be able to actually

 The first thing you want to do is tilt the mirror down and angle it inwards so you can

 What you want to do with that little round tab comes out, you want to put it in there

 Once you get the top clip, you want to flip it over and flip the glass downward just two

 Sometimes the clips will reattach, you just got to take your time and make sure you separate

 When you cut the template out, it's actually a set of embossed plastic in the bottom of

 This is where the factory installed the puddle lights, this is where we're going to install

 If not, you want to use a pilot hole first and then gradually open it up.

 Before we mount the puddle light, this plastic cover has to be removed, this is how we're

 To remove it, simply get your hand underneath it and pull straight up.

 Fish the wires through the hole we just drilled, then we're going to install the puddle light

 Once the puddle light is installed, now we can bring the wires, we're going to fish them

 Then once you bring that over, then you can reinstall that plastic plate we just took

 Putting the wires right next to the factory loom will guarantee they stay out of the way.

 Now we're going to actually put the wire tabs in place to light up our puddle lights.

 You want to take the harness that you removed here, the side with the spring, you're going

 to go to the opposite side, pin five is the first one and then pin seven is going to be

 On the passenger side, it's going to be purple and black with a yellow stripe.

 For your driver side, it's going to be purple and a solid black.

 Once you prepare the wires, you can install the supplied wire tabs.

 You want to fish the harness for the puddle light through the main hole where the factory

 Now we're going to put the red lead to the purple wire and the black lead to the black

 Now that's plugged back in, we're actually going to check it first before we put the

 What you want to do here is line the glass up with the three tabs you released and then

 Now you want to repeat the process on the driver side and your installation is finished.

 Just like your factory lights, when you disarm your headlights, taillights, and now your

 As soon as you arm your car, it'll dim just like your factory lights.

 So Courtney, what do you think about your Starkey puddle lights?

 They look great and as Courtney showed you, they're pretty easy to install and should

Marina Jones-Bailey with Fallsville's Veterinary Hospital and this is Ashley.

 Today we're going to show you how to clean your cat's ears, which is pretty simple.

 Ear wax production can cause infections of the ear, which can be very painful and cause hearing loss.

 For ear cleansing, all you need is a basic ear wash and there are multiple types.

 Once you want to start with is getting them used to having their ears played with.

 With cat's ears, what I do typically is take a cotton ball and soak it with some of the ear wash.

 You can go, as deep as your finger will let you, you're not going to hurt her eardrum whatsoever.

 If you're getting a lot of dirt out or if the ear is really red or irritated, that can be a sign of an infection.

 Other signs can be them scratching at their ears, shaking their head, an odor or a discharge from the ears.

 If that's the case, you definitely want to let your veterinarian know that.

 What you do to one ear, you definitely want to do to the other one.

 You also want to make sure you get the ear flaps good and clean as well.

 If they're food motivated, you can definitely give them some treats as well.

 If you bathe your cat, you would want to clean her ears after you bathe them as well.

 That way, if you get any water in there, you're kind of drying that up to prevent your infections.

 filled with mushrooms and cheese, and you could have ham or other kinds of meats in

 Not a lot of prep needed, and you can just have it and it¡¦s very, very healthy

 So here are some of the vegetables that we¡¦re going to be using

 We have some green bell peppers, we have some chopped mushrooms, and we have some onions

 If you want to omit anything or add anything on, then feel free to do that

 I think the traditional one has meat So if you want to make it with meat, please

 got equal amounts of all the vegetables And the amount really depends on you because

 it really depends on the baguette you get So just go with that, but make sure you get

 And we¡¦re going to season it with a little bit of garlic powder

 All these seasonings are to taste If you want, you can also add fresh garlic

 Or fresh chilies or jalapenos And just a little bit of Italian seasoning

 very wilty and release a lot of liquid right now, so we¡¦re going to add it in a little

 But we found that the French bread is a lot softer, and you don¡¦t end up tearing up

 your mouth while you¡¦re trying to eat this It is going to be baked eventually, and it

 gets kind of crusty But when you buy French bread, make sure you

 buy the thin loaf and not the wide loaf, because again, it¡¦s just easier to eat when it¡¦s

 Okay, I¡¦m actually getting good at this mixing It looks really good

 Just enough to coat the vegetables, so be careful when you put it

 They serve it with ketchup But we don¡¦t prefer the flavor of ketchup

 on this particular dish, so we¡¦re just improvising, and we thought we¡¦ll put some pasta sauce

 going to turn it off, add a little bit of salt so that the veggies don¡¦t let water

 So that part is done, and now what we¡¦re going to do with our bread is, we have a serrated

 So we¡¦re just going to cut around at an angle, but you don¡¦t want to go all the

 Now, this is perfect for snacking or making some bread crumbs, but we¡¦re not going

 So to this, we¡¦re going to add some cheese and quickly mix it up

 So we¡¦re using a Mexican blend, it¡¦s got cheddar and Monterey Jack, but you can

 use any that you have, just as long as it¡¦s shredded cheese that kind of mixes and melts

 Oh, it looks so good So you kind of want to over stuff it basically

 And over the top, we have some Italian cheese, which is, this one¡¦s a combination of Parmesan

 So the oven is preheated at 450¡V It¡¦s going to go in there until the cheese

 melts because the vegetables are already cooked So just keep an eye on it, everybody¡¦s

 So our zeppeh kanki or zeppeh kanka, whichever one, if you¡¦re a female, you¡¦ll call

 it zeppeh kanki For all you Polish people out there, disregard!

 Well, it¡¦s called different things in different parts, so whatever you¡¦re comfortable calling

 it, it¡¦s fine with us Which means, we have to get into, zeppeh

 baked and it just looks so delicious It came out of the oven, it was at 450¡F

 It baked for 7 minutes and it¡¦s got a wonderful, just a little golden touch of caramelization

 And if you really want to have the authentic style, you can just put some ketchup on top

 So I have to thank Piotr So my husband went to Poland and actually

 was introduced to this amazing dish by Piotr and just wanted to thank him because now I¡¦m

 introduced to it, and so are all of you So thanks a lot, and we hope you enjoy the

 recipe of the Sapokanka, and join us again on another episode of ShowMeTheCurry.com

 I'm going to show you how to make chicken and vegetable bolivans.

 recipe I'm using nearly 300 grams of diced chicken thighs, then salt and

 pepper and some vegetables, leeks, carrot and green capsicum and one onion finely

 any other kind of a cheese and for the I'm going to do a white sauce for that

 I'm using nearly 20 grams of butter with 1 teaspoon of vegetable stock and 2 bay

 leaves and half a teaspoon of nutmeg with nearly a tablespoon of flour plain

 flour and 2 tablespoons of white wine and a cup of milk or you can adjust the

 what I'm going to do the first is to do the white sauce in one pot and the

 chicken in another and the bolivans I bought it from the shop to do it quickly

 but you can make your own bolivans for that you can you can get the puff pastry

 sheets and cut around for the bottom and cut the middle circle out with another

 two layers of puff pastry and bake it first and make bolivans like this or

 After take it onto the bench top and add the milk slowly the milk has to be cold

 mixing the flour with the milk into that add the white wine and the bay leaf and

 the nutmeg and the stock powder use vegetable stock or chicken stock powder

 chicken and the vegetable with the white sauce fill the mix into the bolivans

 and then add some cheese on top and this goes into the oven 160 about 10 to 15

The bolivans are ready to serve and I hope you will enjoy this too.

 Okay, now I'm going to show you how to get PayPal binders to put on your site, go to

 Control C copy, go to your site, go to the bottom or wherever you want to add it, custom

 Okay, and if you want to add multiple spring columns down, move it into one column.

 All right, by now you should have PayPal or Google checkout link to your site already.

 And then you can start making links now to all the pages because you have them created.

 All right, let's learn Austin Mahone what about love on the acoustic guitar no capo standard tuning

 Okay, we're gonna start it with a low G note right here third fret

 Right you're doing that okay, that's a G note that they're playing there

 Now if you don't know these chords go to chord tutorial number 33 and learn the chords here

 And then come back that's chord tutorial number 33 on the Eric Blackman guitar channel

 And then back to G7 okay now that is our verse okay, so we're going C minor 7

 Now as long as the verse is going we're going to be doing that okay

 And that's going to take us into our chorus our chorus is going to be G minor 7

 Okay, now what I'm doing there is I'm jamming on my G minor 7 chord

 Now I'm putting some emphasis on most strokes, but you can strum that whole song like this

 We're gonna do that a few times before we go into the bridge for the bridge what we're gonna do is

 Hi guys today we're going to show you how to make mini Rice Krispie Pops.

 They're really easy for kids to make with just a little bit of adult help.

 and do paper straws for the sticks but we found out it was a little too long so my brother

 to put the pops in these little cupcake holders so they don't get messy.

 Remember if you put this in the freezer first it will be easier.

 Carefully place it back into the cupcake wrapper and there's your Rice Krispie Pop.

And after you're done and you want your couples to have something

 I'm going to make chicken kebabs today for this recipe I'm using 500 grams

 chicken breast I cubed that then I have garlic ginger some olive oil little bit

 of mustard white wine salt lemon and for the spices I am using pepper chilies

 turmeric powder stock powder and some curry powder what I'm going to do is I'm

 going to add the curry powder and the other spices into the chicken then a

 little bit of salt and white wine I'm going to marinate this at least 12 hours

 now I am adding mustard garlic of course a lot then some ginger if you are using

 wooden skewers you have to put them in water soak them in water maybe six hours

 but I am using the metal one so before you do this you have to do soak them too

 so if not it will burn now I am going to add the lemon juice and mix it well

 and now cover it with cling film and leave it in the fridge about 12 hours for the spices to

 and it will absorb and marinate properly so I'm going to leave this in the fridge for 12 hours

 now after 12 hours take the skewers and just put them like this and pack on a barbecue tray

 and like this do the rest I finished making all so I am going to put this under a hot grill

 about 30 minutes turning each side finish making my chicken kebabs and I hope you will enjoy this

 I'm going to take these caramelized on the one side, flip them over, and what I'll do

 to slow cook them, I'm going to take my potatoes and I'm going to rotate them out.

 I'm going to actually push my potatoes towards the outside of the grill.

 If I added some water to it, I could actually steam them and accelerate the process.

 I'm going to take my steaks, probably going to want to push these in just slightly so

 that we get a little hotter temperature and then I also have some more room on the outside

 Actually, if you have some kids, it's always nice to have your kids help and they always

 I think that this grill actually allows for kids to work with you in a safe environment.

 It does get hot around the outside, but it's a safer environment than allowing your children

 I'm going to take my grill and I'm going to pull the debris from the steak and I can

 I have a drip pan that goes completely around the circumference of the cook surface.

 We also have a waste container that I can push all my debris in.

 Now that I wiped off this one area, I might as well start cooking some vegetables.

 Unless you have some sort of pan or tin foil over an open flame grill, you're usually going

 I can cook this and not have to worry about it falling through the grate.

 We've been cooking here for approximately four to five minutes.

 We have pork satay, we have our asparagus going, and our steaks are nicely seared, caramelized

 For quick dinners, this proves you can have healthy, quick dinners.

 We can use either the spatula or you can use the scraper, which comes with your cleaning kit.

 Every grill comes with a cleaning kit and a scraper is included with that just for this purpose.

 Any type of debris that's cooked onto the surface, scrape it right off.

 I usually have a nice terry cloth towel or paper towel handy so that I can wipe off the cook surface whenever I need a clean spot.

 The reason why I'm going to show you how to cook this is because we're going to do a different method.

 We actually are grilling our steaks and pork, but with this, I'm going to steam.

 Since our asparagus is going to have some lemon wedges, so we're going to add a little bit of flavor to those asparagus, a little lemon flavor.

 I could throw a little bit of garlic on there too, but I just like a little bit of lemon and butter on my asparagus.

 Now that we have our Swiss chard going, I'm going to stir it up just slightly.

 You can do this with spinach, kale, mustard greens, collard greens, whatever pickles you're fancy with.

 Once again, I can take a little bit of my liquid, my braising liquid or steaming liquid.

 You can use water, chicken stock, use a little bit of balsamic vinegar.

 A healthy way of cooking is you don't have to use all the butter or oil and everything.

 Even though olive oil is very good for you, you can actually just steam.

 Steaming probably is one of the healthiest ways to eat your vegetables.

 You're not cooking out all the nutrients and all you're doing is cooking it through.

 Bringing out the natural sugars of the asparagus and it's cooking through.

 I think right now we've been cooking for about six or eight minutes.

 I have asparagus, I have some beautiful potatoes, my pork satay appetizers.

 That was the down and dirty, easy way to cook a nice quick dinner.

 Ten minutes and I have steak, Swiss chard, asparagus, potatoes.

 I'm not overpowering the ingredients with flame ups and with smoke and with charring.

 Hi there, and welcome to my tutorial on how to play the Lime Tree on guitar.

 The guitar is tuned standard, EADGBE, and we have a capo placed at fret 4.

 If you need to learn these chords, go to chord tutorial number 154.

 We do have a few exotic sounding chords here that we'll be working with.

 The first one is C suspended 2, and that's going to start our verses.

 We're going to strum C suspended 2, and we're going to hold on to this high E string, and

 That's C suspended 2, and we're going to strum once, like that.

 The chord names we call are form names, and we're calling frets in relation to the capo.

 Our next chord is E7 suspended 4, and as we said before, we're muting that high E string

 from the A, and we're strumming this one from the low E all the way down to the B string,

 So in the verses, we've got C suspended 2, G, E7 suspended 4, and that will be repeated.

 Now for our chorus, we're going to go to a C add 9, and start strumming like this.

 Then we're going to go to a G. Then we'll go to A minor 7 and strum upward like this.

 So for the A minor 7 and E minor 7, we're taking our finger and going like this.

 Now, we have a music break that follows the chorus, and it's going to go something like

 We're going to take our first finger and hammer on the A string, second fret.

 When we get to verse 2, the chords are going to change a little bit.

 After that, we'll go back to the chorus, and actually we'll play the chorus until the song

 Alright, that's about all you need to know to play the Lime Tree on acoustic guitar.

 And we're down here at Merritt Kitchens in Kerrisdale to show you a quick and easy salad

 This is a wonderful product to use, miso paste, which is made from basically a fermented

 And it's a wonderful ingredient, low in sodium, high in protein.

 And this is a salad dressing which you can make from it that's easy.

 It's actually your baby, so I'm going to let you take control here.

 We don't have exact measurements here because we just throw things together.

 Mirin is a Japanese cooking wine, basically, that's sweetened, quite golden, and added

 This one's come all the way from Malaysia, and that we get brought over when someone

 And when you go into some of the markets and see these Japanese miso dressings, and they're

 like $4 to $5 a bottle, here you can make it for next to nothing and make it nice and

 Keep in mind, this is unpasteurized, organic miso, so you want to keep this in the fridge.

 This is a yummy dressing, actually a very healthy dressing for you.

 And the rest of it, and there's also some sugar in there, obviously, that's in the mirin,

 A miso salad dressing that is simple and easy to make, and one that I know you'll really

 For recipes and information on cooking classes, visit SpicySteve.com.

 ounce package from tofu, 3 tbsp hoisin sauce, 4 tbsp seasoned rice vinegar,

 1 tsp chili garlic, 4 tsp sesame oil, 1 tsp kosher salt, 2 cups of panko

 cut each side and I'm gonna cut this vertically into three slices.

 tofu is cut in very good triangle here so I'm gonna go ahead and place in the

 paper towel here and try to get all the moisture out as much as I can.

 In a small bowl, whisk in 1 cup hoisin sauce, 3 tbsp rice vinegar and chili

So what I have here is my hoisin sauce, rice vinegar and chili sauce.

 ahead and add my 1 tbsp rice vinegar and I'm gonna go ahead add 1

 teaspoon of my sesame oil to my egg plus I'm gonna go ahead and add my salt to

So I have my egg, my hoisin sauce, my rice vinegar, sesame oil and salt all

 Make sure it's on both sides and I'm going to turn this and salt on the other

 mixture here and after my egg mixture I'm gonna take it and put in my panko mix

 coated well on both sides and once it's coated I'm gonna go ahead and place it

 Tofu is nicely golden brown and I'm gonna go ahead and serve them.

 with rice vinegar and garlic chili sauce all mixed together as dipping sauce.

I'm using gum paste here, but if you want to use fondant, make sure to add

I have rolled my gum paste very thinly, you can see my fingers through

You want to roll it this thin because it makes the flower look more delicate.

For the smaller flowers, you can leave them in the foam to dry, but the bigger flower

 have more shape, or you can leave them almost to the top so the shape is less.

 You can use them in cupcakes, you can use them in party cakes, and you can use them

 But keep in mind, you can use royal icing or buttercream to finish them.

 I used all the sizes of the plungers, and then I added the damask lace.

 my website Design Me A Cake, and you can see all the tutorials there and my recipes.

 can press on the links on the screen, or I will post the links below on the box.

 Welcome to MikeBarrGym.com workout and today we're doing a 6x4 workout and we're going

 to alternate kettlebell cleans, double cleans and kettlebell back presses.

 And what I want you to do is I want you to just work up again to as heavy a weight that

 Now I don't want you struggling on these weights where you're having to teach to do it.

 So, you're going to put the bell between your feet, chest and butt out, you're going to

 Ok, when you're done, look straight ahead as you set them down.

 Now, if you don't have heavy enough bells, start from a dead clean.

 You're going to work up to find your weight that you can do for 6 sets of 4.

 Lean over to one side, grab the bell close to your body, pull this bell in close to your

 The forearms are vertical, you're squeezing your lats, your feet are flat and you're going

 When I'm done, bring it down, set it down, roll over and set it back down.

 Try to find a weight that's nice and strong for you to do 6 sets of 4 with so that you

 can hit it all the way through because in 2 weeks we're repeating it.

 Maybe you can do 6 sets of 5 or 5 sets of 5 which would be great or you go up to a heavier

 Stability level, they're just going to crawl without the power wheel.

 Strength and power level, they're just going to be doing power wheel crawl with the power

 You walk all the way until your hand touches the line and then you walk backwards again

 Ideally, strength level you might be able to do this in 2 sets.

 It's a very hard workout but if you've done it before, you've got to put a weight vest on.

 If you can see what I'm doing with the weight vest on, I'm up to 52 pounds.

 In this video you'll learn how to cope the end grain of the rails, make the long grain

 cut in all the frame parts, and make raised panels using the CMT Junior Set.

 The 3 piece Junior Set is perfectly designed for smaller scale projects.

 The end grain cutter is the bit with the ball bearing in the center.

 Using a felt tip marker write a number 1 on this bit since you'll always use it first.

 The long grain cutter has the ball bearing on the top of the bit.

 Again using a felt tip write a number 2 on this bit since you'll use it second.

 The panel raising bit includes a back cutter which guarantees that the tongue on the end

 of the panel is always a perfect fit for the groove in the frame.

 This simple shot made coping sled with a toggle clamp is used to secure the rails for the

 Get started by clamping a test piece, the same thickness as your door material, into

 Position the fence by using a straight edge to make the face of the fence even with the

 Make a test cut by locking a sample piece in the coping sled and cutting partially into

 Before machining your door parts, take the time to mark the back face of each piece.

 In addition to securely holding your material, the coping sled prevents chipping on the exit

 Insert cutter number two in your router table and set the height of the bit.

 Align the groove cutter on the bit with the tongue on the completed rail.

 Once again, position the fence by aligning the face of the fence with the ball bearing

 Add feather boards to your fence and run a test piece past the cutter.

 If the piece with the end grain cut is too high, you'll need to raise bit number two.

 If the piece with the long grain cut is too high, you'll need to slightly lower bit number

 With bit number two fine tuned to the proper height, machine a long grain cut into all

 Calculate the size of your door panel by measuring on the face of the door frame.

 Use the transition between the profile and the face of the door frame as a guide for

 Adjust the gauge stick, which is the same thickness as the width of the groove, to set

 Adjust the height of the bit until the gauge stick easily slips between the two cutters.

 Position the fence by making the face of the fence even with the ball bearing in the cutter.

 Add feather boards to the fence, then bring the fence forward to position number one.

 Check your work by slipping the test panel into a door frame piece.

 Position the fence for the second pass and complete your panel.

 Refit the door to check all the parts, and then you're ready to assemble your beautiful door.

 and make beautiful frame and panel doors the CMT way, the easy way.

 You can use it as a snack when you're sitting out on the porch on a Saturday afternoon.

 So a little bit of butter and bake them in the oven for about 4 minutes at 350 degrees.

 When those are done, and I would do those first, then you go ahead and make your mousse.

 And one of the things, you have to be careful about removing the pit.

 It's always dangerous to put a knife towards your hand, but if you feel comfortable doing

 I'm going to add olive oil, lemon juice, lime juice, and salt and pepper.

 You can either take the cracker and just dip it and swipe it through.

 Otherwise, if you're presenting it for guests, you can pipe it on with a little pastry tip,

 and a little pastry bag, or you can make what we call a cannel.

 You need two small spoons, or two large ones if you have big toast points.

 But two small spoons, and you just turn one spoon into the other, and you drop the mousse

 Hey guys, Jor Dude here and welcome to an episode of Learn to Fingerboard.

 we're going to teach you how to do a varial kickflip on a fingerboard.

 Okay, so the varial kickflip is a combination of a kickflip and

 Before you learn this trick, you should know how to do a shove it and

 a kickflip is optional because when I first started fingerboarding, I found that doing varial kickflips were a bit easier.

 normally where you would have your kickflip, so in between the middle of the board and your front truck.

Now what I found with this trick is that you don't have to have your index finger

 So you don't have to completely cover the board with your finger with this trick.

 when you pop the board, you want to kind of give it a little scoop.

 I didn't make a tutorial on this, but it's pretty simple how to do a shove it.

 Basically, you just take your middle finger and give it a little scoop back and that'll get the board to spin.

 So when the board is coming up and you're going to slide your hand and fingers up gripping the board and you want to give the

 So when you lift up, when you raise your fingers to grip the board and the board is already spinning,

 the flip will come naturally once you get that little flick off.

 You'll also be able to feel it too when you pop the board and slide your hand up.

 You'll be able to feel your fingers flicking off the edge of the board and getting that flicking motion.

 You're going to flick it like that, kind of like how you would turn a doorknob.

 raising your hand, flicking a little bit, giving that little flick where you'll be able to feel it around here on your finger.

 I find it's the happy medium between a kickflip and a 360 flip.

 So if you can't quite get the 360 flip, try the varial flip first and then you can move on to the tray flip.

 See you next time on our next episode of Learn to Fingerboard and later!

 To go with the jerk chicken and rice and peas this is a bit of an essential thing to have with it really

 So I've got half a pint of tomato sauce in there tomato ketchup

 And you can use this sauce to go with any of your barbecue food really I mean, it's just really lovely barbecue sauce

 Now the secret ingredient is one tablespoon of the jerk marinade that

 Hopefully you've made to make your jerk chicken with so one tablespoon of that going in

 You can also put some kind of leon parens or with the sauce in give it a little bit more of a cake

 Think I've been wanting to know the recipe for this for a long time.

 So what you're going to need are two colors, any colors you want, but preferably these type of bottles.

 The ones that you use for like art designs or whatnot with a thin brush.

 First thing I'm going to do is take my first color and try to get a generous amount on the brush.

 And you're going to make diagonal lines going this way from long.

 And then you want to make sure both bottles are open and ready for you because you have to do it fast.

 And you want to eyeball it first to make sure and see what length of design.

 Okay, so now what I'm going to do is take the sharp object and just drag the color diagonal.

 And it doesn't matter, I mean, if it's long, short, or whatnot.

 So the reason why you want to apply a generous amount onto the nail is just so that the nail polish gets to move smoothly.

 And then I'm going to show you how to clean up the bottom to make a perfect line underneath.

 I'm going to do it on this finger right here, my pointy finger.

 To give it more of a rounder shape and an even shape on the bottom.

 So if you just have an extra concealer brush lying around, use it because it really, really works.

 So you get that rounded part underneath and it's very clean compared to that.

 And then you could, as a base coat, I'm probably going to use this right here.

 We are with Marlene Cook, the author of Eat What You Love Every Day.

 Today we are making a burger, but this burger has 340 calories?

 This is a bodacious 50-50 burger and it came from a restaurant that the burger is 50% bacon

 Well, what I'm going to do is I'm going to lower over 700 calories from that original

 So what we do is we start with, I start with 93% lean ground beef.

 I'm not buying the 99% lean beef because it's so dry and we all know that that's just not

 And then what I add, and it's really fun, is I'm adding a whole cup of finely minced

 They add the moistness back so we're not going to have a dry low fat burger and they also

 give that umami that all chefs look for in a great burger or any type of food.

 And this is incorporated, you can see how fine that the mushroom was cut.

 And this is made, someone like my son who hates mushrooms loves these burgers.

 Then you add an egg white to help bind and a third of a cup of breadcrumbs.

 And what they do together is they pull the burger together to hold together so again

 you don't have the burger falling apart or being dry and crumbly.

 I'm just using a regular breadcrumb but if you want to use a whole wheat breadcrumb,

 And then you're going to of course always season with salt to your taste and some ground

 What's great about liquid smoke is it's an all natural ingredient.

 They take and they put liquid over wood smoke and they come up with a smoky liquid that

 Like hickory and that's exactly what bacon smells and tastes like.

 So when you give a little shot of this, what it does is it's like putting bacon in your

 burger but without the extra calories, nitrates, sodium and any of those things.

 And then to finish it off, I've taken and cooked up some onion to caramelize it along

 And because I like real bacon flavor best, I just use center cut bacon.

 So you mix this up and what's really nice is with those mushrooms, and we started with

 a pound of beef, a lot of books that are healthy, what you find is the only reason the recipe

 So now what we're going to do is I'm just going to take this and I've just washed my

 hands before we started, is I'm going to take this and I'm going to make four patties.

 So they're not going to be small patties and we're going to take and round it and make

 You can do it inside or outside if you want even extra smoky flavor.

 Well I have lettuce, tomato, red onion and what comes with the recipe for that same 350

 I use some regular barbecue sauce, whatever people's choice is, and then I use a little

 light mayonnaise to make it nice and creamy so you have that wonderful creamy barbecue

 It doesn't matter whatever brand you use, but these have only 120 calories in it.

 These are what they call white whole wheat, so it's really nice as they look white, they

 taste white if that's what your preference is, but there's actually fiber in them because

 So if you're just buying them from the grocery store, just make sure to look on the back

 If you can find a bun that's got 20 carbs or less, it's basically like a piece of bread.

 Thank you so much Marlene for teaching us how to make this perfect burger and obviously

 As I mentioned in part one of the video that I would show you a breakdown on how this puts

 together, we start out by some ripstop nylon and I just purchased this at the fabric store.

 This is about 28 inches in width by 68 inches in length, pretty close to my height.

 And I didn't even bother hemming this, like I said this is going to be the prototype so

 if this works out I'll probably just get a piece of it and have it hemmed on the ends

 But I started out by taking the end of it and you can see that I had it just kind of

 folded together and I took about four inches of it and just bent it over my hand to get

 And I took this webbing, this is some sling webbing that I bought at the outfitter store

 And I took that and just fed it through where I had the nylon bent over.

 And you'll just have to take an estimate of how much you want to feed through there and

 But then what I did was just loop it over the top, come around the bottom again, back

 over the top and I just pulled this piece that I had looped over the top up and fed

 And then I took that top loop and took the other part of the sling and fed it through it.

 Once you've got it through there just dress up the sling a little bit and just give it

 And so I probably have, I don't know, a good ten or twelve feet of length for the end of

 And then what I did was took some low residue duct tape and took maybe, I'd say about three

 And just to dress up the end of this where the nylon is bent back.

 If you wanted to I guess you could take some heat shrink tubing, put over that to dress

 And so that's the end of it right there and the other end I have made up just like it.

 And the way I do the cordage is I just take that and I figure eight it around my fingers.

 And I'm going to start with doing a wrap just around the figure eight cord.

 And this keeps it nice and bundled up for you so when you get ready to use it everything

 And I just give that a wrap around my finger and just slide the tail end of it through

 And pull it tight so it keeps everything nice and bundled up for you.

 And when you get ready to use it all you do is just give it a tug and everything pulls

 And to finish that off, what I wrap when I fold everything up and get it into a bundle,

 I just have one of these bungee straps that I picked up at, I think it was Gander Mountain,

 When you have this rolled up in a nice bundle you just wrap it around it and it Velcros

 It slides in your pack and again it's only a little over seven ounces.

 Alright, we're going to do a demonstration on how to use the pitch gauge to adjust your

 So I'm going to set mine at zero, because in this particular one, which is the Walker

 So if you're going to go right here, you can see it's about, I don't know, a quarter inch

 Now what you're going to do, you're going to look down at the pitch blade.

 On this top, you want it to line up with the top of this or some other stationary object

 You'll also notice that my swash plate right here, I've leveled out.

 You're going to look down this, and if you notice, it's a little crooked.

 What you want to do is you want to spin this around to the other one.

 This way, in case your servo or the fly bar or the swash plate is not quite level,

 this will make sure that everything is in the same setting if we want to do the other side.

 I'm going to line the top of this up with the top of my main rotor right there.

 If you're a beginner with a fixed pitch, you want to set it to about 5 degrees.

 As you're learning, I don't know if you can see on there, that's just 5 degrees.

 Let's see if we can get this sucker to take off without crashing or anything.

 Let's see if we can land it again in front of the camera without crashing.

 Okay, this is the second installment of improvising variations for fingerstyle blues.

 In the first installation, I used the Ironweed rag, one of my original songs, to show you

 Okay, minor chords are a little trickier because some of the minor chord forms, shapes that

 we know are fairly well known, but others we don't really use very much.

 For instance, going back to the major chords, the major triads, C, everybody knows that

 shape, at least hopefully you know that shape, A, G, E, and D. So those are all very common.

 For the minor chords, three of them are probably chord shapes you're familiar with, and two

 And I probably, for the most part, for my fingerstyle playing, won't use the C or the

 To make the minor chord form for the C, you have C major here, and there's the major third

 And what you do is lower that note half step, and you've got a C minor.

 You've got a G major, and you've got the major third there on the fifth string.

 You lower that down one fret, so that's a B, now you make it a B flat, and then it becomes

 The other chords, the A minor, you probably know that one, and the E minor shape and chord,

 So those are the chord shapes I'm going to use more often than not.

 So I'll just play A minor, D minor, and then for my five chord I'm going to play E7.

 So I can play just those first position chords, and then I can move it up the neck.

 I can play an A minor using an E shape between the fifth and the seventh fret, and I'm going

 So instead of playing this full bar, I'm only going to bar the bottom three strings, and

 add my ring finger to the fourth string seventh fret, and leave the A string open.

 And for the next chord, which would be the D minor, I'll just use this minor triad, which

 is basically, if you can see the A shape there, that's your A shape.

 All these chords, you'll notice, are right in between the fifth and the seventh fret.

 I'm going to use an E7, which is like a C shape, between the fifth and the seventh fret.

 Let's look at one other set of chord shapes that we could use in this progression of A

 Up here, between the eighth and the tenth, adding the first finger to seventh, I have

 For my D minor, I'm going to use basically that same E shape that I used for the A minor

 So let's see if I can come up with something just using those three different chord positions

 if you all want to see the hair care routine that I made for my sister

 and the majority of you said yes so I'm finally going to do it because

 I had the time to film it with my sister because my sister really likes to dye

 this is the hair care routine that I made for her to help her maintain her

 times to where she would dye it or she would use heat on her hair and also

 this is the state of her hair when she just newly dyed her hair

 so she noticed that her hair dried out and also it was a little bit frizzy

 so I started by letting her use my Saint Tropicus coconut hot oil

 hair mask and this mask actually is very convenient for the on-the-go people

 like her because you don't have to make it you just simply have to apply it on

 now this mask helps nourish your scalp it hydrates your hair if it's dry

 it also promotes hair growth and this can make your hair really soft and it

 like to apply this on the ends or on the bottom part of my sister's hair

 because that is a part to where her hair is mostly dry so after

 and then after that I'm going to wrap a plastic bag around her head and let it

 towel or a shower cap but I prefer using this just because for convenience sake

 so that I don't have to wash anything afterwards so I'm going to leave

 that on her hair for about 15 minutes and then she's going to wash it off

 using just water you can also use an apple cider vinegar rinse if you want to

 and then I bought this Pantene total damage repair for my sister

 because when you dye your hair or use heat on your hair you are doing some

 help that issue so she's just going to use that all over her hair

 intense hair repair mask that I actually like to use in the bathroom especially

 not applying my DIY hair masks so I'm letting my sister use that all

 over her hair especially to the areas to where she feels like her hair is dry

 and you don't necessarily have to use this if you have already used any DIY

 this is another option that you can use if you don't have time to make your own

 now she's going to rinse it off and I'm also letting her use one of my favorite

 your hair if your hair feels super super dry and I'm letting my

 sister apply that onto the mid and to the bottom part of her hair

 especially the ends so she left it on her hair for another three minutes

 and then she washed it off and I really suggest that if you can find a soft

 rather than using the regular towels now when drying your hair with a towel

 wrap the towel around your hair and then just squeeze out the water instead of

 because sometimes it can lead to making your hair frizzy or tangled and after

 when you comb it wet so my sister's hair is not tangled at the moment because she

 so that is also a good tip and when you comb your hair start from the bottom

 so after that I'm going to apply the L'Oreal Extraordinary Oil on my sister's

 hair before she dries her hair so once again I'm focusing on applying it

 on the bottom ends of her hair and after that she is just going to dry her hair

 and then when that part is done I will apply my Dove Cream Serum all over my

 and then I'm just going to use a wooden brush to her hair and as you guys can

 sometimes experienced frizz, waves and puffiness on her hair but this

 routine has made her hair look straight she also noticed that her hair was

 that can straighten or curl your hair in one use so that you'd avoid

 so after my sister flat ironed her hair I will put this Pantene

 hydrate your hair without making it look oily or feel greasy at all

 plus the smell is wonderful so I'm going to run that through my sister's hair

 and that is the last thing that I will be applying on her hair by the way for

 all the products used in this video I will be putting them in the description

 box down below because I know you guys always ask me to do it and

 this hair care routine has worked wonders for my sister's hair and it

 actually maintained her hair because she uses heat on her hair twice

 now I think the key to bringing your hair back to life or just to simply

 maintain it into making it look healthy is consistency so that's why I highly

 to back your hair up if you dye your hair or if you like to use heat on your

 hair because you'd really see amazing results when you're consistent

 with your hair care routine so I hope you guys like this video and if you did

 please give this video a thumbs up and also share it to a friend if you found

 comments down below on what more hair videos you would like to see

 And I always talk about an imaginary line down the center of the baguette.

 You're then going to take your blade, and you're going to make an incision like a paper

 You cut, you don't overlap, and you start where you left your previous incision.

 So what this is going to give you is a bulge here, a tightening here, a bulge, tightening,

 And the other incorrect way of doing this is making a sausage-like cut where you go

 Let's put these in the oven and observe them when they come out of the oven.

 Here I had that line drawn along the side, and you can still see the line.

 And then this one right here, you can see these horizontal lines that cut across the

 width of the baguette, and it looks nothing like the baguettes should.

 So this, I think, is a nice developed, nice ears that are starting to open up.

 And when we go to cut one of these things, what I usually do is I take the nice exposed

 So what we're looking for here is a open, creamy crumb, irregular cell structure.

 When you smell it, it should have a nice, sweet, nutty flavor profile to it.

 And again, flavor-wise, I have to admit that this baguette will taste the same, but as

 So the lesson learned here is that make sure that your incisions are at a 45-degree angle

 Traditionally, you're looking for five even incisions along the length of your baguette.

 Just wanted to do a little video showing one of the methods I use to sharpen my knives.

 This is my sandpaper method, which uses different grits of sandpaper on top of a mouse pad for

 And what that does is give you a convex edge versus a regular flat edge.

 There's a convex edge, which the sides are rounded versus a flat edge.

 And convex typically holds the edge longer and is just a great durable edge, wouldn't

 So what grits I have here, which I use to start out and start the convex edge, get it

 And after I'm done with the sandpaper, I move to a leather stop.

 And what sharpening does is remove all the burrs from the metal and everything to give

 I do have a magnet here, a little magnet sticking up at the end, because when I sharpen, it

 creates a little bit of dust and it picks up all the dust out of the air and everything,

 So I got one of these little clips here that I use to hold my sandpaper in place.

 So my knife is already pretty sharp, so this is just for the sake of the video, this is

 just a little crappy Appalachian Trails knife that needs sharpening.

 There is the strop back and the back and forth like that, or there's this one where you go

 into it and strop the blade right into it, which I think in my opinion is a better way

 to do it, because if you strop back like that, it creates a burr on the edge as you're going,

 and then that's just less of a hassle to remove later and it typically makes it a little

 So to start out, let me zoom in here a little bit better for you guys, I'm sorry.

 Okay, to start out, place your tip against the paper, roll it, bring it down, and swipe

 I'm not really knowing all the correct terms, but this is basically the gist of it.

 And just a little further explanation on the mouse pad, is the little give that it creates

 when you push down and sharpen your knife, it creates that little roundness, that little

 And you want to keep a pretty good angle going, pretty, I don't know, just pretty consistent

 With convex edges, you can put it at a steeper angle, put your knife steeper, and it won't

 So let me finish this up real quick, strop that a few more times, and then we'll move

 You can put water on this, this is wet or dry sandpaper, so you can put that on there

 and then it'll create more, less, I don't know, it just cleans the shavings up off of

 it and everything, and keeps the pores on the sandpaper from getting clogged up.

 So with the strop, you will take it the opposite way, keeping your blade against that and then

 So you want to strop that across, keep it a nice consistent angle, which will get all

 You want to do this about, 20 times gets a pretty good edge, so 20 to 30 times, and that

 Got a little caught there, but see, as you can see, razor sharp.

 Well that's just a little short vid on one of my methods of sharpening.

 Hey guys, welcome to the last lesson in the beginner quick start series.

 way to being able to play some pretty cool stuff on the guitar, so that's always cool.

 So if you remember in the last lesson, we went through a chord progression with some

 it takes a few months, but it will go away if you keep practicing on a consistent basis.

 So what we're going to do in this lesson is take our strumming just from regular down

We're going to kick that up a notch and put a real strumming pattern with this

So let me play it for you real quick and then I'll break it down for

 you and tell you exactly what I'm playing so you can play it too.

 Alright, basically all I'm doing is for the first three beats or first three strums, I'm

 I'm hitting with a down stroke again, but right after that down stroke I have a down

So if you're thinking about 16th notes, you may not know what that is, but that's

 4-E and a. If we have on 4, if we have a down stroke, remember 1, 2, 3, 4 on E and a. On

It's going to be, without thinking about the notes and the counting,

 the entire strumming pattern we're going to be using for this entire progression.

 through once on a G chord, then move to a D. Then move to an A minor 7 and play the

 chords if you don't feel like, if you don't think you can do it, just stay on one chord,

 times as you need to to get comfortable with that strumming pattern.

 And then once you get comfortable with this after a little while working with it, go ahead

 and try the full progression G, D, A minor 7, C and see how it works for you.

 Once you've got these two things down, changing chords smoothly and just a really basic strumming

 lot of your favorite songs, simple 3 and 4 chord songs with some simple strumming

 It's one of the harder things for beginner guitar players to do.

 guys enjoyed this beginner quick start series and I really hope it's really sparked something

 in your life that is going to be a lot of fun for you and be very rewarding for you,

Now if you like step by step progressive lessons like this beginner quick start series,

 I just want to really tell you about the beginner guitar system right now.

I wrote this especially for people who are beginners or people who have

 always wanted to play the guitar or people who are just picking it back up after a long

 and really see progress with your guitar playing, this is a really, really cool option for you.

 It's super high quality and it's probably the best thing out there that I've seen for

 beginners or people who haven't just haven't played the guitar after a long time.

 guys there's tons more lessons here on GuitarLessons.com for you to check out.

 or anything, there's always the GuitarLessons.com forum or you can email me directly and I'll

 What's up everybody today I'm gonna teach you guys how to do a backlash so first I'll explain how to do it and

 Pretty much this trick is gonna be a lot easier on a cassette just because you have that pedal pressure

 The pedal pressure, but you do have the ability to lean back easier because

 The first thing if you guys want to help try learning backwards manual.

 You're gonna hit it and once you go back you're gonna throw all your weight back and try to balance it like in a manual

 Kind of like that, it's a lot harder on a cassette because you have to pedal back so I'll try to do another one

 So it's sort of like that I don't really have backwards manuals

 I could backwards manual a lot longer because you don't really have to pedal back

 That's why all the people that have a free coaster they can backwards manual pretty far, but don't get me wrong

 You just have to pedal back and you just have to practice finding your balance

 Like I said, if you guys learn backwards manuals first, it'll help you

 And I don't really practice backwards manuals that much but if you guys want to that'll help you so for a cassette

 Pretend like you're doing a 360 tire tap when you guys do it 360 tire tap you look back

 And you usually drop it at 180 and then you keep looking to complete the spin

 But with this you're gonna want to be lazy and do like a lazy 180 and once you land

 At the 180 don't try like you don't want to suck your knees up for this leg because you don't want the back to go

 Usually when you go do a 180 you go right here and then you pick up right

 Automatically or like as soon as you pop but with this you're gonna want to pick up

So you're gonna use pedal pressure for a cassette if you guys want to it'll be easier

 Once you use that pedal pressure, it's gonna slow you down and then you're gonna want to crank back either half a crank

 When I learned it I did half a crank and I still kind of do half a crank

 But if you want to go farther, you could just keep cranking back

 Cab out when you cab out you probably use pedal pressure too if you guys want to cheat when you learn that's fine

 With a free coaster, it's a lot more with balance because you don't have that pedal pressure

 So you're gonna 180 and you're gonna want to throw all your weight backwards

So you're faking backwards in the manual on your back tire and from there

 You're gonna want to like compress because when you compress that's gonna give you the pop so you're gonna compress

 Hard and just try to like pop out really hard without pedal pressure

 Remember if you're learning this on a cassette learn with you by using pedal pressure.

 And if you're on a free coaster, it's gonna be a little bit harder

 But the benefit is you don't have to pedal back and you can probably backlash

 So if you're learning this on a cassette, you're gonna learn it by using pedal pressure

 I know it's cheating and but it's just gonna make the trick a lot easier

 Farther than a cassette which is kind of debatable because you could also

 Backlash far with the cassette, but it's harder because you have to do that pedaling back motion with the free coaster

 I just practice doing a 180 and landing back tire heavy and just lean back and try to use that pedal pressure to cab out

 More thing that's gonna help you a lot when learning this trick is

 when you're learning backlash is going very very slow because I

 Know some people a lot of you guys are gonna have free coasters

 And if you try to backlash while going fast, you're gonna loop out easily

 It'll help you get into the half cab easier because you're going so slow that your back tires already gonna stop and

 Just practice leaning back when you land into 180 and you should be fine

 You guys have any other questions leave a comment, thank you guys for watching

 used to watch on commercials and order them around the holidays is now a beloved breakfast

 cereal and I am going to show you in a few easy steps how to make it.

 down the street to this place and I would get their chia seed breakfast pudding every

And that was great, but it's $7 and I decided I could very easily make

 single size serving of the recipe we are going to be making, you are getting 12 grams of

 fiber, 6 grams of protein, and almost 6 grams of omega 3 fatty acids.

 people or you can save it up to serve yourself four times, which is what I have been doing

I have been eating this recipe for the past about a month, maybe a little bit

 any milk or any liquid for that matter, those chia seeds are going to bloom.

 to kind of expand and puff up and they are going to take on the consistency of tapioca,

So for all you tapioca lovers out there, this is a great alternative

 to tapioca and you are getting some extra health benefits in there.

 also omit the sweetener if you want, just have the strawberries and the apples be the

 sweetness for you, but I do like adding a little bit of this stuff because it really

Then you are just going to stir until combined and once you got that all mixed

 up you are going to pop it in your fridge for two to three hours or just leave it in

 my little apple rings around the edge and I'll put my strawberries in and maybe top

I'm not being paid to say this at all, but it's great because I'm

 able to go throughout the day and I can either scan in the food that I'm eating or I can

 in an apple or half an apple, I can type that in and it will tell me.

 healthy, super clean, nothing bad for you recipe for your morning and breakfast really

 foods in season, some chia seeds, getting some good fiber and protein and omega 3 fatty

So if you wanted a recipe that was on the lower carb side, for 2 tablespoons

 comment and let me know what you think if you try it and also what variations you would

If maybe you're not a walnut, strawberry, apple person, perhaps you are

I'm posting more pictures on there now and for more recipes and reviews

I'm off to eat breakfast even though it's like 7 o'clock at night.

 at the end if you want to put it in cold water it should spread out a little bit

 always going into the previous one with the point but not cutting it

 Okay everything's lovely and everything's fine and isn't this great?

 Press the two rubber washers into the holes on either side of the lower shaft.

 and the spring-loaded pin at the top of the lower shaft is pointing towards the back.

 Insert the plastic bolt through the bracket with the plastic spacer and fasten with the plastic nut.

 but not too tight that it cannot easily be adjusted if the terrain changes.

 Be careful not to damage the thread of the bolt by over-tightening.

 Ensure that the twist locks on the shafts are loosened by rotating them counter-clockwise.

 Compress the spring-loaded pin in the lower shaft and slide it into the middle shaft until the pin reaches the adjustment holes.

 Place the armrest onto the top of the upper shaft lining up the hole in the armrest

 with the hole in the upper shaft that best suits your arm length.

 Insert the screw up through the stand, upper shaft and armrest.

 Tighten the screw being careful not to over-tighten or damage the thread.

 Once the shafts are assembled, adjust them to suit your height and

 With the screen facing up, push the control box onto the end of the handle until it fits into place.

 Align the coil plug and push it into the socket in the back of the control box,

 Use the Velcro tabs to keep the coil cable in place against the shaft.

 Access the battery compartment via the battery door on the side of the control box.

 Place the batteries into the compartment ensuring the positive and negative contacts

 When you look in the dictionary under how to cook duck, it says see the French or see

 Forty minutes in your Cape Canaveral duck cooker and your duck's done.

 While I don't expect that you can cook these at home, what I'm going to do is show you

 This is one of the easiest dishes you'll ever learn and it's nutritious and huggy.

 Fresh noodles, we've pre-cooked them for two to three minutes, right there.

 Local organic farmer's market, snow peas, spring onions and then we've got our duck.

 Now what we have to do, a little bit of sesame oil, don't add too much because it can impart

 This stock is so easy, chicken stock, sliced ginger, orange peel, a couple of star anise,

 Now that you're not ducking for cover at the thought of duck, let me show you a beautiful

 With duck breast, I don't add any oil but what we need to do is we need to forge a criss-cross

 pattern in the skin so that the fat renders and it cooks in its own fat.

 Any good chef seasons everything because if you season, what happens, your friends taste

 If you don't season it and they ask, can I have some salt, then you get the raw salt

 flavour on the top, make it a symphony rather than a discordant instrument.

 Three minutes, turn it over, look at that and I'll cook it for three minutes on the

 The reason is I want to drink Pinot Noir, I have it with anything, I love it with corn

 While my breast has a rest, it's time to make a big bold sauce.

 I'm going to add some wine, I'm going to reduce it down and some beef stock.

 You can use duck juice, you can use chicken stock, I've got some beef stock.

 Just before serving, add a knob of butter and you'll have sauce.

 If you were to cut this a bit earlier, the juices would run everywhere.

 Cool, duck's happy, I'm happy, now we'll put the sauce on the duck and we'll live happily

 We've got Pinot Noir braised beetroot, duck, poi lentils, wilted spinach and a few vegetables.

 This is going to be the first of a few videos that we do with the phantom 2 models

 this is the this is going to be about calibrating your compass and

 So when you first turn your radio on you want to have your switches both in the upright position

 And then what you end up doing is whenever you go to a new flying location

 You want to calibrate your compass the compass is the little tiny guy that's right here

 So whenever you go to a new flying location, you want to calibrate the compass that's done by toggling your switch your right switch up and down

 They'll turn solid yellow so that that's when it goes into callous compass calibration mode

 You'll know you get there because they'll go from solid yellow to solid green you tilt it on its nose and you rotate it another

 Blinking yellow means that it's it's still establishing a home point

 so you'll set it down once they'll turn green then that means that your your

 Your GPS is locked in you've established a home point you're ready to fly.

 So first the lights just do a self test and then you'll see right here

 They're gonna go blink blinking yellow, so I'm gonna flip my switches there

 So now that they're now that they're solid yellow what we'll do is we'll hold it in front of us

 Now back to blinking yellow so now you see the quick green flashes mean that a home points been established and that were GPS enabled

 how to play all the rhythm guitar parts to While My Guitar Gently Weeps by the

Now there are a couple of guitar solos in the song and they're actually

 gets 600 likes here on YouTube and I will make sure that I'll get to work on

 fret on the sixth string with your pinky and just keep the A minor there.

 Then move that third fret down to the second so the best way to do that is

 just reach your thumb over and grab the second fret on the low E string.

 to kind of move your wrist up a little bit behind the neck just kind of move it

 up towards your face and that usually helps that thumb come over.

 Now if you don't want to use your thumb you can actually use your second finger

 here and replace those two notes with your third and fourth finger.

 That's a full barre at the first fret, second fret on the G string, and then the

 All right so I'm gonna go through all those chords just so you can see how

 Now that takes us back to the first chord and you're gonna go through those

 second time through is instead of playing that D major chord you replace

 and everything else is the same so I'll just play through that the second half

 Now I'm calling it a verse but really this is like the verse and the chorus

 and then the next progression could be a bridge or a second verse or it's really

 not a verse chorus-y type of song so they're just two distinct parts just

 All right so that was played a couple times too so that starts with just an A

 If it's just a basic chord a really kind of basic open position chord I'm not

 just in the beginner section it shows you what an A major chord is and stuff.

 But now we have a bar chord at the first I mean sorry at the fourth fret so you

 do a bar across the fourth fret and then you're gonna put the fifth fret here on

 All right now I'm gonna go to an F sharp minor chord which is just pretty much

 Now back to that previous bar chord and now just move this shape down two

 obviously a lot more difficult with all those bars so let me just go through it

 bars if you're not good at bar chords just kind of work on them.

 once again if you guys want to do Eric Clapton's solos for this song just make

 The next self-defense issue we'll deal with is a hostage situation.

 Again you're being held at knife point, but this time with overwhelming control.

 Let's get Cameron over here and wrap up from behind his back across his neck.

 Very common hostage situation in which your life is being threatened by this knife here

 and your body's being controlled and you're being held in a passive sort of way.

 Now the operative function here is that this knife to cut the man is going to be drawn

 So the first objective that Damon has when he wants to extract himself from this is he

 And he could do it with as little as one finger pushing across right here.

 If he just holds this and Cameron tries to pull across that, you'll find that you have

 The knife is now just going to be secured to the neck instead of being able to draw

 At the same time, right here, Damon wants to practice bending his elbow and giving Cameron

 Now once that's occurred, you're going to duck in and keep this thing controlled right

 here at your neck and rotate towards him until you can hand the knife off or hand the

 Right, he hands it off to the second hand, he comes out, let's turn around so they can

 So let's set the whole thing up in action so they can see the dynamic.

 First issue is to control the knife so it can't draw across your throat.

 The same time, practicing bringing the elbow into the man's ribs or solar plexus, wherever

 Because we don't want to deal with the knife coming towards us.

 Often in fact, as you make this little transition in the first little part of the action here,

 you'll have a tendency to throw the knife into their body right here.

 They're not going to be shoving into their own sternum or chest cavity.

 The second hand can control from this point forward and roll around so that you're always

 What we're doing is the lamb burgers, and so you are going to make the lamb burgers,

 And the thing about this, inspired by my husband, he cooks two things, burgers and bacon.

 He introduced me to lamb burgers, and I just sort of picked them up a little bit more.

 So with the lamb burgers, we're doing a fantastic apple mint jelly, which you want to make sure

 Not the dark green food coloring stuff, but something from England or the States.

 And then we have a mixture of feta cheese with mayonnaise, and that's the garnish.

 And here we've done, if your local bakery will do this for you.

 You can just order up some mini, it's sort of like a cocktail roll.

 You don't want to be, you know, stacking the whole time, right?

 So this, you can have the barbecue going, you've got dips and cheese happening, and

 So in here, you just put a little salt and a little pepper, that's it?

 And the thing about lamb, especially if you're doing it on the barbecue, you want to make

 sure that you cook it on a low heat, because there's quite a bit of fat, even in the lamb,

 So cooking it slowly is the key, otherwise it's going to flame up.

 It's true when you're doing a leg of lamb, any kind of cut of lamb, you want to cook

 And we're going to cook it to medium, so that it's still a tiny bit, a little bit of color

 No, all we're doing is mixing mayonnaise and crumbled feta, and if you can, get sheep's

 milk feta, because it just has a kind of richer flavor and it's not quite as salty.

 Hey guys this is the tutorial to the P-sine index down song by Jim Clauseiros.

 I'm just going to start off by playing the verse part of the song.

 In your left hand you're going to play just C. So you're going to play that four times.

 So all you do is with your right hand you just slide your thumb over to B minor and

 So it's going to be A, C and F in your right hand and A in your left.

 And yeah you just, on the last time you play it just extend your pinky and play G.

 In your left hand for the next chord you're going to play G and in your right hand you're

 That's B flat in your left hand and then B flat, D and F in your right.

 So I'll just go through it slowly and I'll just make sure you can see.

 And then for the chorus part of the song it's just I think four chords.

 So you have an A flat in the bass and you have an F minor except it's inverted.

 And then in the bass as you do that you just play A flat, G and F.

 It's an internal external skimmer and it really does work well folks.

 This has been a great skimmer for us but it takes up a large footprint about 12 inches

 It's actually been cleaned here fairly recently which is maybe why it doesn't look as dark

 But this thing has done great with this couple hundred gallon system.

 I'm going to actually probably hate to sell it but we got to move on.

 This is a $500-$600 skimmer that we'll see if we can sell for probably $400 or a little

 less and we have to go on to something with a little bit more space if we want to add

 a reactor into this chamber which is what we want to do in the future.

 Took it all apart and put the new one in that came earlier today.

 It's going to be a little disappointing because I like this skimmer so much but I'm really

 Some talking with some other people that had very similar models including Synergy Reef

 It had a smaller footprint, that 10x12 footprint that we were looking for and it arrived today

 One thing nice about this Vertex that we bought, it is the newer model.

 It is their wine bottle body shape which is the cast acrylic which is really nice and

 It has that pinwheel impeller and that is a custom pinwheel impeller that they make

 And then of course it has fine tuning adjustment on the Venturi.

 I'm not a big ozone person so I'm not worried about that but definitely the screw on collection

 It has titanium screws and the whole thing is like 22 inches tall by 9 by 10 with a footprint

 It has a 10 millimeter drain output which we're going to use and it comes with a 2 year

 This thing is sized all the way up to like 185 gallons which is just awesome.

 And then on top of that, the thing does like 343 gallons per hour of air draw which is

 Like I said, I'll be probably selling it on Reef2Reef and whoever gets it is going to

 get an awesome Super Reef internal external skimmer because that 2000 series has just

 And I am going to break this one in the way I've broken it in in the past kind of with

 I'll show you the method that they recommend from Vertex over in Germany but I'm going

 As far as putting this in the sump, you can probably see the difference here just in footprint

 This thing will totally allow us to add another reactor behind it which is fantastic.

 And we don't have to do much height adjustment because this one runs between 7 and about

 And I got about 7 and 3 quarters, 8 inches in this part of the sump here right now.

 So once you get this thing installed, what the Germany Vertex company wants you to do

 is turn this thing on for 24 hours and just have it bubble over the top but without the

 And what this basically does is it runs a ton of bubbles along the surface of the acrylic,

 cleans out the whole system and helps it cycle faster so that thing produces a skimmate.

 But I've actually found it to be better to put the collection cup on and work the system

 This has definitely sped up how fast our skimmers start skimming.

 I wish I had a comparison trial to show you but this will probably cut 3 to 4 days off

 So what we do is we put the collection cup on and then we put the lid on and everything.

 Yeah, there's going to be some bubbles upstairs in the tank but you know what, a little extra

 They're in the closed position so it just sucks in water and of course the air is open.

 And we're just going to let this thing bubble over and basically kind of use the bubbles

 as a source of, if you want to call it friction, to clean out all the acrylic and make it work.

 We're just going to basically put this thing into overflow mode and we're going to let

 So after we get done with this, we'll shut down the whole system.

 We'll kind of wipe everything down so we don't have salt creep all over it.

 So 24 hours later we're coming back to it and I'm going to set this thing up more normally

 And we're going to run it this way in kind of a low bubble level until she starts breaking

 in and producing skimmate in the next 6 to 7 days or even sooner.

 Then what I'm going to do is I'll come back for you folks in about a week or two and I'll

 I hope it keeps up with my reef octopus that we had in the past.

 Again, in a couple of days we'll start refilming for the 14 day episode and we'll catch you

 Hello, today I'd like to talk to you about one of our favourite umbrellas here at Shade

 This umbrella has been really popular and it's a proven umbrella and it has some great

 What I'd like to show you today are just some of those really nice features that make this

 Let me start with a few of the features of the frame and you'll really see what a great

 It can rotate 360 degrees, it has a raising and lowering and a tilt feature.

 To lower the umbrella, use both hands simultaneously, one to wind the umbrella closed, the other

 To open the umbrella, release the strap and again using both handles, raise the umbrella

 Once the umbrella is fully opened, it can then be set in the tilt position.

 This is simply done by using the raising and lowering handle and the trigger.

 It's important to try and keep the umbrella canopy parallel to the ground.

 This is very useful if you want to move the umbrella around on a flat surface.

 If the umbrella isn't going to be used for a period of time, the Easy Reach cover simply

 It's important to try and keep the umbrella canopy parallel to the ground as you lift

 The umbrella comes in a nice range of colours and is made of a Bravia canvas, which is a

 The resin base is on wheels, and this can simply be raised and lowered by the retractable

 Simply squeeze the trigger and the umbrella locks into pre-set positions on the mast.

 It simply clips on the underside of the umbrella and runs on batteries, so it's very easy to

 Standard with the Savannah is the base plate, which bolts to a concrete slab, and the cross

 The box is a large box that needs to be handled carefully by two people.

 We hope you've enjoyed this presentation on the Savannah cantilever umbrella.

 Today I'm going to show you how to draw a cute little baby using the alphabet.

 Make sure that there should be a sufficient gap between two lines.

 Now, again I'll complete my A by making one horizontal line here like this.

 Now, connecting this end and this end, I'll make a curve like this.

 Connecting this end and this end, again I'll make another curve.

 And one small dot for a tiny nose and a big smiling mouth like this.

 Now, character looks okay but I guess it needs some more decoratives.

 And here also I'll make one band with some beads kind of thing.

 So, if you want you can add some more beads like this to give a texture here.

 Now, in the beginning I showed you a drawing in which there was two flowers.

 This is just an additional to give an additional beauty to this artwork.

You'll need 500 grams of beef chevaps which is skinless sausages

 remove the plastic from from the outside of it and we're going to get a fork and

 press the seam together crossways and lengthways to form a very good seal.

 them onto a baking tray which has been covered with a sheet of baking paper.

 Cook them for about 12 minutes in a fan-forced oven at 210 degrees Celsius

 outside, they're not greasy at all and they taste really delicious.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make these deliciously wonderful portobello mushroom

You'll want to cut out the stems and make sure you wash them all.

 up with water, just go ahead and pat out the middle of them with water because you don't

 Next, you're going to want to go ahead and get your favorite ingredients.

If you're on a low carb diet, try and find the lowest in sugar or sugar

 one thing you want to keep in mind is that there's a little bit of excess liquid after

 Okay, the mushrooms are topped and now they're ready to go into the oven.

 They're going to taste so good that you don't even care how they look.

 Let's throw them in the oven for about 20 minutes or until the tops are nice and golden brown.

 Hi, I'm Monica Reinagle, the nutrition diva, here with another quick and dirty tip for

 Today I'm going to show you how to make your own fabulous salad dressing.

 Because for me, nothing kills a salad faster than bottled salad dressing.

 They're just too heavily flavored and they tend to completely overwhelm the flavor of

 Before you put your salad in, that's when you make your salad dressing.

 And the first thing we're going to do is add some form of acid.

 Now, if you were going to make a Caesar salad dressing, you might start with lemon juice.

 If you wanted to make an Asian-inspired salad dressing, maybe rice vinegar would be a good

 I'm going to make a balsamic vinaigrette, so I'm going to start with some balsamic vinegar.

 And you're just going to add a little bit of vinegar to your salad bowl.

 If you want to, if you've got an extra minute or two, you can add some extra flavoring to

 If you were making the Caesar salad dressing, you might want to add some crushed garlic

 Or for the Asian dressing I talked about, I like to add a pinch of dried mustard and

 For my balsamic vinaigrette, I'm actually going to add some finely chopped shallots.

 So, I've got my flavoring ingredients, and you just want to mix those up a little bit.

 You can see there's not really that much in the bowl at this point.

 And now it's time to add our oil, and this is where the secret comes in.

 What you want to be doing is whisking the vinegar and the ingredients in the bowl as

 And while you're whisking, you're just going to start drizzling this oil in very slowly,

 Now, you don't want to add the oil and then start whisking, because it's not going to

 What you're trying to do is create an emulsion, where the oil and the vinegar stay in suspension

 When you get this nice emulsion, it also gives the salad dressing some nice body, so it doesn't

 just run off the leaves and sit in the bottom of the salad bowl.

 Now, when you've got about as much oil as vinegar, you want to taste it.

 If it's not tart enough, you can go back and put in a little bit more vinegar.

 Same technique, whisk and just drizzle the vinegar in while you're whisking.

 And if by the time you get your salad dressing balanced, you've got way too much salad dressing,

 because that's happened to me before, just pour a little bit of salad dressing into a

 I've already got it washed and dried in my salad spinner, so I'm just going to add the

 lettuce with my nice clean hands, of course, to the salad bowl.

 Once you get into the habit of making your own salad dressing, which as you can see,

 takes less than two minutes, I guarantee you're never going to go back to bottled salad dressing

 They just don't hold a candle to the nice balanced flavor you get from a homemade vinaigrette.

 I've got lots more tips on how to put together healthy meals and everything you need to know

 to put together a healthy diet in my new book, Secrets for a Healthy Diet, What to Eat, What

 It's got recipes, meal plans, and shopping guides, and it's on sale now at Amazon, Barnes

 Hello again, this is Margie here And today, I want to share with you how easy

 and you will have watercress in abundance growing from your kitchen windowsill

 So, I just want to tell you what happened I bought this huge bunch of watercress

 The frost got the watercress through the window It was on the windowsill

 and obviously the glass was freezing So, the watercress really took a little bit

 Cut the stem and that will still grow roots and you'll have beautiful watercress

 So, once the roots are established, you can pop that watercress straight into the garden

After 6 weeks, this will start getting a little bit scungy in there

 vitamin C to help the iron to be absorbed But watercress is high in iron and very high

 It's a restorative tonic using watercress So, check out my website for that recipe

 And if you liked what I had to say about that, there's lots more to see

 Please click the Like button And if there's someone that you know would

 appreciate what I've said about growing your own watercress on your windowsill,

 We've made ourselves up a Carolina vinegar-based finishing sauce for that pulled pork.

 Well, a mop basically is just some moisture that we're going to go ahead and add into

 As your meat gets cooked at first, you just want the rubs to be working.

 You can have the slow temperature and the time of the heat, and you're also going to

 But after a little bit, the outside is going to crust up a little bit.

 And at that point, we want to start adding moisture in to keep it absorbing and allowing

 To do that, we're going to go ahead and use one cup of a good chicken broth.

 If I was doing just a beef brisket only, I probably would use a beef broth.

 I'm going to go ahead and use a really nice virgin olive oil, but you could use a vegetable

 I would say using a sesame oil might be a little bit strong, but a little touch of that

 And if you don't know how much a tablespoon is, measure it in your hand, get a tablespoon,

 Then not only do you want to mix that up, but you want to go ahead and run that over

 We've had it rolling, and you can see that it's changed from being that light color with

 And that is what we are going to go ahead and put on our meat as we're cooking.

 So next thing we're going to do is we're going to get that pork butt going and get it on

 To watch the other segments in this video series or for how-to videos on almost any

 Today I'll show you how to make a figurine body base that could be used for your favorite origami character.

 I used this to make Hello Kitty and it worked out perfectly, except for the large pink ribbon which I needed to use a smaller paper.

 You could attach any head onto it and it would look really snazzy.

Fold it down so that the two ends that will form the hands will form this white triangle at the end.

 Bend the hand in a way you see fit to create the expression for your character.

 You should have it pointing or you could have it pointing upward to make a waving hand gesture or you could position it however you like.

 So you want to get a little plate if you're making this for miniatures.

 If you're making it a charm, I'm making it for miniatures obviously, it's got a plate.

 I have a darker brown and a lighter brown and I mixed them together, but not a lot so

 Take a circle cutter, this is rolled out on number one on the pasta machine.

 And take some translucent clay, roll it out on the number one as well, but you're going

 Now we're going to take, I'm using a rolled up ball of tin foil, you can use a peppercorn,

 I'm just going to roll this on the bottom because you know how cheesecake always has

 And I'll take and finish it back up after I get done recording.

 What I'm doing is I'm just taking this and just giving it a little bit more color.

 So I'm going to take and make and round the edges here because they're really bugging

 Now we have, we have a little cheesecake now and you can kind of see the color a little

 You can take and cut a little bit out of this, like a little piece if you wanted to.

 Now what you want to do is if you do cut it, you can't, this isn't going to fit.

 So what I'm doing is I'm just taking and I'm just messing it up, digging into it, making

 How this side looks so much better than this side just because I messed it up a little bit.

 And for, oops, for this piece, you can, you can use the, you can just use the little

 So now if you did cut it, take your brush and your chalks and just color it a little

 this is going to be a quick dinner because I'm using pre-made sauce.

 this one what I'm going to do is I'm going to do one and a half cups of rice.

Now because I'm using a sauce, just dump it in, it's about one cup of

 But like you can see, very fast, very easy meal for those days when you're a little bit busy.

You can email me other suggestions for things you'd like to see.

 But I hope you really enjoyed it because I'm going to enjoy this dinner.

 To start off the macaroon, we're going to first combine basically the almond meal and the powder sugar.

 I'm doing that into a smaller bowl first so I can whisk it together.

 I'm going to just give it a light whisk just to combine everything.

 And then we're going to do the next step which is very important.

 Sifting the almond meal will give the almond meal and the powder sugar a more airy texture.

 This is what helped the macaroons rise and also get rid of the lumps.

 You can use a spatula to finish off the last bit of the almond meal to help it pass through.

 Now that we have the almond meal sifted, we're going to add egg whites.

 This is also when we're going to add the color to the macaroons.

 We're going to just let this sit while we work on the sugar and the meringue next.

 For the sugar, we're basically going to add the water to the pot along with the sugar.

 And we're going to bring this to a soft ball which is 245 degrees Fahrenheit.

 While this is going on, we're going to add the other egg white to the mixer.

 We're going to spin the meringue with the hot sugar now to cool it down to 122 degrees Fahrenheit.

 We're going to check it every so often, but it's going to take about 3 to 5 minutes.

 So right now we're going to check the temperature of the meringue to see if it hits 122 degrees.

 Okay, so we have this beautiful meringue that we just whipped up.

 And now we're going to mix this into the dry in about 3 portions.

 Once you have the meringue combined with the dry, the next step is very important.

 And basically, what we're doing is deflating some of the air that's in the meringue.

 And you've got to do this for a couple of minutes, working in a circle motion.

 And the consistency that you're looking for, it's somewhat like a lava-like consistency.

 But basically, we're going to beat some of the air out, and it's going to get a little bit more runny.

 So next step, we're going to put it into the piping bag and pipe it onto the sheet tray.

 And the next step, after that, we're going to have to let it dry and form a skin.

 When you're piping this onto the sheet tray, make sure you keep some space in between,

 so it forms a skin on the top of the macaroon before we put it in the oven.

 Alright, so after about 15 to 30 minutes, your macaroon is going to form a skin.

 This is where you touch it and it doesn't stick to your finger.

 The oven is preheated to 300 degrees, and we're going to bake this for about 14 minutes.

 So after 14 minutes, we have these beautiful macaroons ready to be assembled.

 I have some strawberry buttercream right here, and it's pretty simple.

 You're just going to put a dab of the buttercream right in the middle,

 give it a good amount, and put your second piece and sandwich it together.

 Okay, I'll be showing you how to disassemble a DualShock 3 controller.

 It's a little bit different than some of the others, but for the most part it's pretty

 Now when you take, you have to pull the covers apart, and on this one there's actually a

 You'll have to push in with the flathead to get that out, and then it should just pop

 Okay, now I got the back off, and since this is a DualShock you have your shockers here.

 Now each shocker has two screws you need to take out, one on each side, so you have a

 Then you'll take your battery out, and it's connected to this connector here, and then

 you'll have one screw for your circuit board here, and you would take that out.

 After that's done you'll just pop out your triggers and your L1 and your R1 button, and

 And then you'll have two pads here, and you can see each one's different.

 Your directional pads will just have a round hole in the middle, and then your buttons

 Now in my case I took this apart because I spilled some soda on it, and my buttons are

 Now take a Q-tip and some rubbing alcohol and just wipe around the outside of the button,

 and then I'll wipe around the inside of the hole that it goes into.

 So as long as you remember where everything goes you can put that together pretty easily.

 So as I double those notes, it becomes more vocal, and it's really important for you to

 A lot of times when people are playing, they're so used to just moving up and down or side

 to side, and of course we need that, but they forget that when somebody is singing, if you're

 going to try and replicate the voice when you're soloing, the voice does a lot of the

 same pitches over and over and over, you know, they're not always moving like this when you're

 We want to do the same thing when we're playing guitar, you know, it's not just a matter of

 ... You know, sometimes that can be really cool, but your whole solo can't consist of

 So you want to make sure that you're trying to think like a voice would.

 So when you're playing something ... You see, I can use the same phrase over and over and

 And then within that, I can also use repetition of the same pitches, be it side by side, or

 That's how true phrases really start formulating, is that you're aware of a pitch or an idea,

 Now the truth is, when you're soloing, there's a lot of times that you won't think of that

 When you're moving around the guitar, either visually or doing the meandering technique

 we talked about, you're doing something and all of a sudden you'll play something and

 So it's not like we've prescribed everything out and we're sitting down and now we're playing

 The goal to improvisation is, you're playing within your comfort zone, and you're trying

 to create things that sound A, melodic, B, rhythmic, C, interesting, all of these different

 When you go back to your practice space and you go back and you start trying to work through

 all this stuff, that's where you're going to keep trying to elevate your techniques,

 whether it be your bending or your vibrato or your visualization or theory or who knows

 But when it comes time to jam, you don't want to step outside your means, you want to stay

 inside there and use all of the various techniques and thought processes that you have that you've

 So see, right now what I'm doing is I'm trying to think about creating something that's melodic

 I could create a chord progression or something underneath that or whatever.

 So I can use that repetition, either repetition of a phrase or repetition of a note.

 See that's the half the fun is now you're utilizing all of these various little techniques.

 You're utilizing all of your visualization and now you're using your thought process

 You don't know at first, but as you continue playing through this, something starts creating

 And you go, okay, I should do that again, I should try that again.

 And you just keep building and building and building as you go.

 If any of those blocks, any of these things that we're talking about are failing on you,

 So if you're trying to do something and it's just not working, you have to either A, not

 do it anymore, which would be a shame, or B, go back and figure out why it's not working

 a little bit longer than a normal just curling, but as you can see why, it's definitely worth

 a 1 inch or if you have shorter hair, a 3 quarters of an inch and hairspray.

 going to start by taking the hairspray and we're going to just lightly mist it all around.

 When you spray your hair with any sort of hairspray, you want to make sure you hold

 the hairspray out about at least 8 to 10 inches away from your head.

Really hold that heat there for a little bit until you start to feel the

Once it gets warm, then we're going to continue on down the rest of

What you can see is I'm taking the curling iron out of the actual curl and

 did one big curl, it would look like a huge spiral, but this gives it a nice, soft wave.

 We're going to take it again, start at the top, hold it until it gets warm, and then

 This almost gives it a little bit of a messy curl, which is what we're going for.

 Once you've completed curling your hair, now comes the fun part.

 is flip your head upside down, run your fingers through your hair to separate everything,

 What I love most about these curls is that they are very big and almost like Hollywood

 questions or comments, please leave a comment in the comment box below.

 I'm showing you guys how to make your own potato chips at home.

 And the only ingredient you're really going to need is a potato.

 If you don't have a slicer, then you can buy the one that is a set.

 If they do touch, they're going to come out looking all types of crazy.

 The set only comes with one tray, but I bought two additional ones.

 Every additional tray you have to cook for an additional minute.

 This is something that everyone will enjoy and not really know the difference.

 to 4 years or it's that 9 kilo or 20 pounds mark for when they can go forward facing and

 support here, that does actually grow with the child as they grow and very easily adjusted

 and what you'll find is when you do come to release off your car seat, we've all done

 it, you have to fiddle around inside here and release that off, you don't have to do

Press your red button and what you'll find is it immediately springs

 days, it keeps these really out of the way so we don't have any worry about the child

 drops down into position against the seat unit itself and that then allows you to pull

So again, all nice and easy, keeping those well out of the way from that

It also means that when we do come to put the child in, we haven't got that silly

 this particular system is, attach your two pieces together, put it back into position

 into your seat belt and lock it off and then we have this traffic light system going on

If you watch this Chevron at the front, we have it red at the moment.

 You know how we always tell you, you do need to tighten it up so you've got just two fingers

 soon as that goes to the correct position, we now have gone green.

 and just to point out to you guys, if and when you are using the system, if and when

 you've gone green and they do lean forward slightly afterwards, it might go red.

They do come off so if we do have any little spillages, we can do that.

 going to release this off to let you know how we can actually adjust the headrest as

With a lot of systems, you do need to undo the back and do little fiddly things.

 out and what you'll find is the whole thing just adjusts up and down and that means that

 your straps go up and down and so does your headrest as well and then you just lock it

So checking that we've got that locked off into the green position.

 on here and it's just a handhold on the front, grey button, squeeze and release and the whole

 it goes around the front where the red routings are on the side here and into your seat belt

 making sure that you have not got buckle crunch which is where your seat belt is actually

 It then feeds through and goes through this first red routing that's at the top here and

It then continues all the way round the back of the seat and again through the

 And then once we've done that you've actually got a tensioner on the front here as well

 Hi, my name is Justin Fraser and today we're going to make a simple omelet.

 Simply start with two or three eggs, a pinch of salt, and a little bit of fresh ground

 I just want the yolks to fuse with the whites of the eggs so it just becomes one yellow

 This is a mixture today of tarragon, parsley, a little bit of lavender, some marsh, as well

 as some fresh thyme which I chopped up and here I have creme fraiche and both of these

 will be the ingredients inside the omelet and I have the beat eggs.

 Put it on full heat or a little bit less than full heat and I'm going to put just a little

 Basically what's happening now is very important when you cook an omelet to have a very hot

 You can use oil, you can use butter, you can use any substance you want to lubricate it.

 Canola oil has a very high burning point so I like to use canola oil because I can let

 It won't burn, it won't smoke here and it will serve as a great lubricant for the omelet.

 As a general rule if you leave it for about three, four minutes then it should be hot

 Now that the oil is hot enough we're going to take the eggs which we previously beat

 When you hear that sound, when you hear it frying, that's the sound you want to get.

 So basically I'm just going to rock the egg around to make sure it's fully covered and

 then I'm going to just keep knocking off the edges and bringing that into the middle of

 I'm also rocking the egg around the pan just to make sure that the whole inside is going

 Just so it becomes one round substance, it's going to take on the shape of the pan.

 Once the egg takes on the shape of the pan and I can freely move it, now we have to find

 The best way to do that would be to find a way to flip the omelet over.

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to use the lip of the pan and I'm going to rock the omelet

 So basically it's very simple, just move forward and flip it over just like that.

 I'm just going to add the creme fraiche and I'm going to put it right in the middle of

 I need a little more creme fraiche just because I'm feeling very risky today.

 Now when that's all set, take your plate and your spatula and simply just fold the omelet.

 And there it is, a simple omelet with creme fraiche and fresh herbs.

We're gonna show you how to make protein cupcakes with protein frosting.

 are gonna be of course your lovely protein, some baking soda, egg whites,

 juvia or stevia, some cinnamon, pumpkin, and some flaxseed, and most importantly dark chocolate.

 So you're gonna need a mixing bowl, cupcake tin, cupcake papers.

 Really best results if you do this nice and slow and controlled.

 You just like to add some cinnamon in there because you know I love cinnamon.

 So what we're gonna do next is we're gonna pour our little concoction.

 Before we get started, there's something that we need to cover, right Karen?

 Before working on a pump, always follow the complete safety and operating instructions

 And don't forget the required personal protective safety equipment.

 In addition to the precautions that come with your pump, you must always follow the recommendations

 of the chemical manufacturer or the material safety data sheet and check local codes for

 Preparing the metering pump for service can vary by application, but in general will consist

 Pump a compatible buffer solution through the pump for several minutes to clean the

 Turn the motor on-off switch to the off position, which is down or to the rear of the pump.

 Disconnect the suction line from the pump tube suction fitting labeled in in the pump

 Before disconnecting the discharge side, bleed off any pressure.

 Then disconnect the discharge line from the pump tube discharge fitting labeled out on

 If the power cord plug end has been removed, modified, or the metering pump has been directly

 Consult an electrician to aid in disconnecting the pump from the electrical supply and to

 Using a pair of pliers, grasp the main shaft and rock it back and forth, clockwise and

 While pulling it straight out of the pump head, set aside the shaft to be reinstalled

 If the shaft will not come out, remove the cover from the pump head and use a hammer

 to tap the shaft from the front of the roller assembly to dislodge it.

 Put the new pump head onto the feed rate control and turn it counterclockwise until the shaft

 Line up the rivet holes on the pump head with the rivets on the feed rate control.

 Turn the pump head counterclockwise to secure the rivets in the rivet slots firmly attaching

 Allow the pump to run the roller assembly in its collapsed position for approximately

 Remove the tube housing cover and flip to use as a tool to expand the roller assembly.

 Align the center of the inverted cover with the center of the roller assembly so that

 the three holes on the face of the cover align with the three knurled lugs on the

 The roller assembly needs to be expanded so the tube is pressed against the tube housing

 Hold the feed rate control securely, use the cover as a wrench and quickly snap, rotate

 Affix the front latches to the cover lip and then press the latches back to secure.

 Lift the latch located between the tube fittings, leaving the end of the latch engaged with

 Turn the tube fitting on the suction side not more than one-eighth of a turn in the

 Do not let go of the fitting until the tube rides approximately in the center of the rollers.

 Turn the pump off, let go of the fitting and secure the latch between the fittings.

So I was recorded to do a video for you guys on how to cut your lace and

 be a two-part so I guess you're gonna read the title to know if it's cutting

 being a little bit long so I might have to speed up certain parts.

 the video I'm talking like you know extra fast just look at what I'm doing

 is by Equal Free Tress and this is their lace front with the baby hair and the

 What I usually do and I'm going to bring the camera down so you can see is I take it and I place it on the mannequin head.

 So you can see the lace and you can see where the hair knots are.

So let's pull her securely on the mannequin and let's adjust her so the lace lays nice and flat.

 The next thing I do is I take clips and I nicely just clip the hair or the section that I'm cutting out the way so there's no hair hanging.

 The next step is I take my scissors and sorry if you see a lot of camera adjusting but I just really want you to be able to see what I'm doing.

 So what I do is I hold all the hair back and I take a pair of sharp scissors and I cut as close to the hair line as I can possibly get.

 Without cutting the knots and I just go a little bit at a time just cutting as close as I can.

Now sometimes you might have to go back and trim up a little bit closer but I try to just do little snips at a time so I can get as close as possible.

I'm cutting as close as possible to that hair line without cutting any of the knots.

 So once I get halfway I just remove the clip and this top part I can usually use my hand to hold the hair back.

 The reason why I put it on the white mannequin head is so I can see the knots very clearly.

 Before I cut I look to make sure I'm not clipping any of the knots.

 Okay, let's zoom out just a tad bit and you can watch me do the rest.

 So for this side I'm going to take my clip again, gather the hair and just clip it so it's out of my way.

 Like I said, it's very important to be able to see all the knots.

 As you can see I'm just using the tip of the scissors actually to get a piece of hair in the way.

 I guess I will do a part two to show you how I apply this unit using no glue.

 This is one of three kinds of saws in an up-and-coming tool category called track saws.

On the surface it's a specialized handheld circular saw that fits onto a track that guides the travel of that saw across sheet goods of all kinds.

They're also surprisingly accurate and they make terrifically smooth cuts on all kinds of sheet materials, even melamine.

 So let's take a closer look and I'll show you exactly how this works and how it cuts and help you decide if this sort of thing's for you.

Now there's high friction surfaces underneath these tracks too, so although they're designed to be clamped to the wood, it's often not necessary to do that because, as you can see, it takes quite a bit of jiggling to get this thing to move.

 Now in practice, you line up the edge of the track with the place where you want the cut to occur exactly.

That's one of the advantages of this system is that what you see is what you get as far as the cut goes.

 And the reason for that is because of an effective rubber lip along the side of the track.

A rubber lip that gets cut to size the first time you use one of these saws.

 The reason these saws cut so smoothly is not just because of the tooth design of the blade, but because that all-important rubber lip fully supports the top edge of the cut, the place where ragged edges and chipped surfaces normally occur.

Take a close look at that and you'll see that it's pretty much flawless.

It's every bit as smooth as the kind of cuts I get on my table saw, except it's in a portable package.

 You can also use these saws to cut all kinds of angles on sheet goods without the need to wrestle large heavy sheets across a table saw.

 Hi, my name is Tim Stein and welcome to this first video lesson on the basics of playing

 Well, you want to feel as comfortable as possible and you want to avoid injury.

 So the most important aspects are distance from the piano and seating height.

 If you've got an adjustable stool, that's probably the best thing.

 If you don't, you can either put a cushion or a book on top of the chair to adjust the

 Well, often I see students, the first thing they do, they sit down and they bring the

 chair so far forward that they end up restricting their movement.

 They can't move their elbows, they can't move their arms, they're completely locked.

 They sit on the front edge of the stool with their feet firmly in front of them.

 And then for a good test, ask them to make a karate punch so that the fist should just

 Alternatively, you could just grab hold of both sides of the instrument.

 And if you feel a slight stretch across your chest, you'll know that you're in the right

 Thing about seating position is that you don't want it to be fixed.

 And the idea is that when you're sitting on the edge of the piano stool, you should

 And the only way to do that, as I say, is to make sure that you're sitting in the middle

 of the piano with your feet firmly in front of you and that you feel that your center

 I mean, you do see lots of pianists who play very far forward and who also sit very far

 Well, it might work for them, but for mere mortals like ourselves, my suggestions are

 Find the two black keys in the center of the piano, or even the name of the instrument

 And a useful trick is to take a pencil, place your arm on the keys, hands on the keys, and

 your forearm and your wrist should make almost a straight line so there's no break between

 And you can just place a pencil over your arm and you can see the pencil should be straight.

 And similarly, if your wrist is too low, you've broken that line.

 And you want to engage when you sit, you want to make sure that you're engaging what we

 call the core muscles here, and that your shoulders are down, your chest is open, and

 that you can swing very freely from one side of the stool to the other without falling

 So as I've mentioned before, sitting is very important, no matter what you do.

 So try to experiment and find what works for you so that there is a lot of freedom of movement.

 I hope you enjoyed that video and that you look forward to my next one where I'll talk

 Hey everybody, today we're going to start working on hammer-ons, which is kind of a

 It creates a very legato sound, which basically means smooth in music or connected.

 And it's the ability to, instead of picking every note, some of them are actually being

 So it's a technique that you're going to use every day of your guitar playing life.

 It's used in just about every song, so you need to get it down.

 So we're going to work on hammer-ons first, and then another, the reverse of that, is

 when you play a note and then you pull off, you go down the string to a lower note.

 Another term you'll hear, these call them slurs, legato, or whatever.

 So get to it, follow the lesson, and then wait for tomorrow, and we'll do the reverse

 Now basically what a hammer-on is, is the ability for a finger in the left hand to come

 down on the string hard enough and fast enough that it plays the note without having to be

 A lot of times on guitar, the first, if you have like a series of hammer-ons in a row

 on one string, a lot of times, not all the time, but a lot of times, the first note on

 Now you need your hand positioning to be, your thumb needs to be in the middle of the

 It really kind of lets the fingers kind of do what they want to do.

 Like this, you'd be really hand-cuffed with what the fingers can do.

 It's good for certain things, but for this, we need your fingers to have full mobility.

 So you keep your fingers relatively going straight up, and what you do is you basically

 And it's not necessarily you need a huge motion to come whamming down on the thing.

 So basically, it's more about the quickness that you get there than it is how hard, how

 So the more you try to train yourself to do a hammer-on, but do it relatively close, is

 what's going to keep you, be able to incorporate it and make it quick and everything.

 So what this little exercise I have on the download that you can get at GuitarLessons365.com

 is basically we're going to work out all the finger combinations that you can do with hammering-on.

 We're going to start off with the first finger, and we're going to pick, hammer-on the second

 We did it four times, and you'll see on the paper that was three to four, and underneath

 the tablet here, you'll actually see the left-hand fingers, first finger and second finger.

 And you'll see the little slur symbol, which means connect the notes.

 And then we're going to go three to five, and we're going to use our first and third

 Now really listen to these and try to make them both the same volume, and just make it

 And then the last one would be, well the next measure is one, I mean third fret to sixth

 fret, which is going to be with your first finger and your pinky.

 We're just taking that same pattern and moving it all the way across.

 To continue the pattern, we did all the notes off of the first finger.

 And that's going to be the fourth fret to the fifth fret with your second and third

 And then the last one you'll see there is five to six, but we're going to do it with

 You know, even after you get good at this, it's a good warm-up routine.

 Eventually, as you get it faster, you can really loosen up with it.

 Because the guitar feels completely different at the ninth fret and the twelfth fret.

 Tomorrow, we're going to work on the reverse of this, which is, they're called pull-offs.

 And really try to get a crisp, come down on the note nice and strong.

 You don't want these two fingers kind of going down here while these two are doing their

 See if you can start disciplining your fingers to stay in line.

 Try to keep them level with each other, kind of along one string.

 You're not going to be able to do that perfectly on most things you play.

 But it's a good thing to start training your fingers to be able to basically be where you

 And this is a good exercise where there's not that much going on, and you can concentrate

 And all you do is you take your white flour, and we're going to put that in the bowl.

 And then you're going to take your salt, your butter that's at room temperature,

 Okay, and then we're going to go ahead and mix it, just until it's all mixed together.

 And it's going to be very sticky, but we're going to refrigerate it overnight so it'll firm up.

 What you're going to want to do is you're going to want to mix this.

 Now you'll notice that it's very sticky, but you're going to divide this into four equal parts.

 And then we're going to wrap it in plastic wrap, refrigerate it overnight,

 So I'm going to go ahead and finish wrapping these, put them in the refrigerator,

 Hi, today we're going to go ahead and make parmesan crescent rolls.

 And we're going to go ahead and roll out the dough that we had in the refrigerator.

 And then what we're going to do is we're going to go ahead and cut a fresh grated parmesan cheese, like so.

 And then we'll bake these in the oven and we'll be back to show you what they look like.

 And now all you do is you just put some melted butter on top of them,

 and you put them in your preheated oven at 400 degrees for 20 to 25 minutes,

 Hi there, tonight we talk about Thunderstruck and everything you're going to hear will be referred to the live at Donington version of this song.

 So let's start with the intro and you can clearly see in the live at Donington video that it's all picked by Angus

 and the picking pattern is very simple because you always have a fret note and an open note like this

 So with your right hand you go on doing this movement and now let's see the note that has to be played with the left hand

 Obviously it can be very challenging when you try to do it at the real speed which is like this

 While Angus plays this riff, Malcolm enters with a simple B power chord and in his trance I think it's something similar to this

 Ok, now it's time to see the solo in the key of B on a B blues scale

 And I remind you this is the live at Donington version of the solo

 Now there's a lot of practice to be done on this song to get it right

 I'm using Clorox and a spray bottle to put the bleach in so you can spray it and make

If you do not want to fray your edges, then you won't need this, but

So here's me wearing the jeans, unfortunately in portrait, but yeah, this is how they fit

So this is me just drawing on the jeans where I'm going to make the cuts with

 before, I haven't done it in a really long time, and so I was trying to make sure that

I know this is going to be really awkward because it looks weird, but

 is I'm cutting the pant leg, and I'm just using those red scissors from before, and

 I realized that was way too short-ish for a first cut because I didn't want to make

 a mistake, and I kind of want them to be a little slanted in the front cut.

 I just cut the right side, and I'm folding that over onto the left side and cutting it

 like a boss with one hand because I'm using the other hand to film.

And then you're going to keep marking like before, and you're going

 to keep cutting it until you get it to the size that you like, the length.

 going to take your handy-dandy fork, and you're going to make downward and side-to-side strokes

 on the edges of your jeans, and that will give you the frayed look.

 and in this picture, I flipped them forward because I like the way they look that way.

 little bit of water in your spray bottle, and then you're also going to pour in bleach,

 and make that like a 1 to 2 ratio, 1 being the water, 2 being the bleach.

 Sometimes, it says, do not bleach, and your pants can come out with like a yellowish change

 where you put the bleach, so make sure your jeans are 100% cotton to be safe.

 Now, it's time to bleach, so take your spray bottle, shake it up, and start placing the bleach where you would like it.

 I want my denim and white to transition in the middle, so I'm concentrating the bleach on the bottom portions.

 Also, you want to note that your spray bottle has to spray outward and not just downward.

 and then I bleached more, and after 15 more minutes, this is what it looked like.

 You want to keep doing that until you reach the desired design.

 This is what my shorts looked like after I put them in the washer and dryer.

 They look really awesome, and as you can see, if you look closer up,

 Ombre starts right in the middle of the shorts, just like I wanted them.

 So what I'm using are some Mickey Mouse rhinestones that I got from Michael's,

 So what I did was I disassembled the Mickey head, and I took the bigger part that made up his actual head,

 and the two tiny rhinestones that made up the ears, and I alternated them big little little, big little little,

 all the way around the rim of the pocket on both sides, and I'm just pressing securely so that they stay on,

 even if I put them in the washing machine or when I'm wearing them around.

 If your rhinestones do not have adhesive on the back like mine did, you can use your glue gun to secure them,

 I think it looks really awesome, and it gives a little extra oomph to your jean shorts.

This is the finished product with the rhinestones and the ombre bleaching.

 The best parts about it is, one, it was cheap, and two, you get to customize it yourself.

 and the right one is an American flag Minnie Mouse fringe tank top that I got from Target.

 Don't forget to like, comment, and subscribe to my channel at Kayla J,

 and make sure you follow me on all the platforms below, Twitter, Instagram, and Vine,

 Hi, on today's Crochet Corner I'd like to show you some quick cleaning tips for your

I don't know about you, but I don't go anywhere without my yarn and

And sometimes, unfortunately, some of the oils in my hands or maybe something

 I've been eating or my son's been eating somehow gets in a little spot of my work before I'm

 done working with it, before I have a chance to wash it and block it.

 I get those stains out, one thing I like to carry around with me are some delicate wash

I have a sample here of a beautiful vintage piece of filet crochet that has a

 it up and just really delicately, with a towel underneath, so you don't transfer the soil

 dabbing a couple of times, so you can really see that's very effective.

 of working with a delicate wash like that, whether it's in the bottle, in the liquid

 really great for helping to keep wrinkles out, also to keep dust mites and other critters

So it's a great way to keep them preserved after you've cleaned them as well.

 vintage pieces because you're not going to want to put them in the washing machine.

 don't want them to rip or tear, especially since the older they get, the more delicate

 go with your delicates because the dry cleaning chemical fibers actually make your fiber more

 the first couple times, but over time your pieces will last a lot longer if you use a

 going to use some of the pieces that you've made by hand, especially in lace work like

 this, again, you're not going to want to put that in the washing machine.

 too many delicate pieces that could get tangled up on something else.

 suggest using the liquid wash and putting it into a bowl of water and soaking your piece.

 Now depending on the type of fiber you use, it depends on how much you're going to agitate

Even in a hand wash, separate from your washing machine, if you're using

 wool or other natural fibers, you can actually still felt your piece if the water's warm

And the manufacturer's instructions will all be different, so make sure you read

And it takes a few seconds and up to a few minutes for the water

 actually a no-rinse wash, which means it's one less step for you to worry about.

 just to let it really break down the soil or whatever else is sitting in your yarn.

 You can roll it up, and you're going to press it along the side of the bowl.

 to not... If you're wringing it, you might stretch out in one way, in one section or

 home is pull out the towel and leave it flat like that, and then roll it up in the towel.

 Now if this was a big piece and I was actually at home, I would stand on this because my

 press, and the harder you push and the longer you push, the more water will come out.

Depending on how loose your gauge is, some things are going to have

 to be fully blocked again, where you'll take out your blocking board, your pins, and even

 This particular product comes in lots of different sizes, and one of the things that I really

 like to do is if I'm making something for a gift that I think should be washed with

 delicate in a delicate way like this, I'll send one of the small packages in with the

 gift, and then it's a nice way to show the person, your gift recipient, how to take care

And that's today's Crochet Corner with some quick cleaning tips for your delicate

 Hey everybody, so today we're going to be doing this Panda Yaki, um, popping token kit or whatever you want to call it.

 So the first thing you're going to do is take packet one, and you're going to pour it in one of these sides.

 Now you're going to take your icing bag, and you're going to just put the icing in it.

 So what you're going to do first is you're going to add the chocolate to the ears.

 So now you're going to take step number two, and you're going to pour it into the other side.

 So now what you're going to do is you're going to take the vanilla and put it onto the paper.

 So at this point you should have something that looks like this.

 It might look a little bit like this, but it's actually a little bit like this.

 So you're going to take the vanilla, and you're going to put it onto the paper.

 So it might look a little bit better, it might look a little bit worse.

 So here's what it looks like when it comes out of the microwave.

 Here's what the panda looks like when you pull it off the paper.

 It's really, really fragile because they don't really give you a lot of frosting or anything like that,

 so you kind of have to stretch it, so it's really, really thin.

 I'm just going to do the taste test and show you guys what it tastes like.

 Hi I'm Dean Edwards, everybody loves a traditional Sunday roast, especially in my family, you

 the meat and it's not about the potatoes, it's all about the gravy.

 show you a really simple recipe that is absolutely guaranteed to blow your family and friends

It's got one special ingredient which will make all the difference.

 on, that way it stays away from the direct heat but also adds a massive amount of flavour

So that's just been cooked away, I'm going to add a couple of tablespoons of

So you need to cook that out for a couple of minutes just to take

 and you'll see the gravy will start to thicken immediately with the flour.

 down now for four or five minutes and as you can see it's really nice and thick.

 we're ready to pass through a sieve to get rid of the vegetables.

 You want to make sure you get everything out of that roasting pan.

 This is a tutorial how to paint a sunset with a silhouette of palm trees in front of it.

 I like to do a taped border in the beginning just because it kind of brings everything

 And if your yellow has some green in it like mine, just clean it up a little bit.

 Then dip your brush in your red and make a red stripe, leaving a white stripe in between.

 So my next color is the only one I haven't used out of my primary colors.

 So I'm going to get my yellow, and just like I did before, I'm going to leave white in

 So I'm going to start with yellow instead of ending with yellow.

 And then just like we did before, slowly move it up into your red.

 So I don't know, five to ten minutes, and then you're going to do the next step.

 To see if it's dry, don't touch it, because you could pull up some paint.

 There's a lot of different sunsets, so you can't really do this wrong.

 So to put a sun in, just get a smaller brush, get it kind of wet.

 You don't want to scrub through your paper, but you can take a paper towel and just blot

 I'm going to put like a little beach down here, and I'm just going to color this all

 Now I'm going to bring maybe like an island or something out into here.

 So I'm going to have one coming up here, and then I'm going to have another one coming

 So palm trees usually, I'm not an expert, but they get a little thicker towards the

 Now to make the palm trees, you can do it in a few different ways.

 I don't want to cover up my sun, so I'm kind of being strategic.

 Now once you've drawn those on, you can go ahead and put the rest of the palm leaves

 on, and you just can make little lines or hairs coming down from the palm trees.

 If you wanted to, get your paintbrush and you could make some highlights in the ocean

 I'm just getting my paintbrush wet, and then I'm kind of squeezing out some of the water.

 You could make those come all the way to the bottom if you wanted to.

 They're great, they're cheap, and you can do a lot of really fun things with them.

 You can do a cityscape, a person standing there doing a yoga pose, whatever you want.

 Whatever you're into, you can make a silhouette of it somehow, and put it in front of your

 We love also hearing comments from you in the section below where you're from, and also

 So have a great day, and I will hopefully see you soon on YouTube.

 Welcome, I just recently got a request of the comments of my original Shure SE215 unboxing

 This is the user, I can't pronounce it, let's get that back, and djalberthiphop said nice

 Now I failed to remove the cable mainly because I just opened them, I literally had opened

 them just then and never sort of had a go at pulling the cable off so I didn't really

 want to break them but I have good news, I found out how to do it.

 This is also going to be a sort of a part 2 look at, sort of almost a year on of how

 they've handled being used most days on the bus, train and just being generally used.

 Alright so this is how they get stored inside the case, rolled correctly as some of the

 previous comments a while back mentioned and yeah, let's pull them out.

 Alright now we're into the up close and personal look at the Shure SE215's and part 2 and the

 Now it did take me a while to get this curve going and that's now curved to my ear and

 it takes a bit of effort to do but I must report, I do report that it's worth it, it

 really is worth it for the amount of noise that you block out, the train noises, the

 screeching of the wheels, the bus driving along, it's really really worth it, for me

 I'll show you how to remove this and then we'll go in a bit closer and have a look at

 Alright so the way I remove my, the way I remove my heads is I get my thumb in there

 and I pull, so I'm not pulling, I'm not pulling on the actual foam there, I'm pulling on the

 Now you've got to be careful your thumb doesn't slide off and pull on the foam and you just

 And there's also a lip on the earpiece which I'll show you, you'll see in a second when

 There we go, coming off, it's a bit stiff, just need to play with it to get it.

 And I apologise for any earwax you might see and go eww, but these, as I said, these

 Now I apologise if this goes in and out of focus but that's just the nature of macro.

 So you can see your plug goes in there and cables go through into your transducers there.

 This is the head of the Vitronok, so that's sort of a size comparison, that's my thumb

 I won't show you both ears because well, they're pretty much the same and I don't want to bore

 Headpiece goes on there and you can see that lip that I was on about there.

 Alright so we'll see if we can put these two together in macro without going blurry or

 There and you can see left lines up with left, make sure you get them the right way around

 otherwise your ear curl, the curl around your ear there won't fit.

 Alright we'll put the head back on, just on there and just push in.

 So I just push in from the other side, this is how I do it all the way.

 Then squeeze, then squeeze and pop it in your ear and you can see how it expands out when

 I tried to use the, well I tried to use the other, the inserts, they didn't block enough

 Alright so you've been watching the part two of my first unboxing, this is more review.

 Yes I would and now you'd probably be able to get them a bit cheaper because I bought

 them as soon as they came into the country, so the first shipment, so they were a bit

 Yeah, roll them up and this is how they roll up for me, like that.

 The earbud's pointing in the centre, close them up and there's the Shure SE215's review,

 Hi, this is Sarah from Heirloom Creations in Sioux Falls, South Dakota.

 It is something I have personally been waiting for for years, ever since the walking foot

 came out where it has the multiple soles that you can change out from the standard foot

 When you had your walking foot years, years ago and you opened it up, you found that inside

 along with the walking foot was an open toe foot and of course the guides that go onto

 Now a lot of us use the open toe foot because it's just easier to see when we were doing

 stitch in the ditch, we wanted to see where that needle was going so we can follow that

 Of course when I put binding on a quilt, I love using the quarter inch marks that are

 on the walking feet and they're actually on both of the soles here.

 To change out the soles, there's only one screw on the walking foot and you're going

 Five or so turns should loosen those black arms right here on this side far enough open

 That will just drop off and as we get into our brand new one, it has the special guide

 right here that we'll use to lay right down into the quilt seam groove and that's just

 You want to line up the sides here and then as you tighten that back up, those black arms

 Sometimes you might move it to the right or left just a little bit and then put the guide

 Now we have three feet for our walking foot and it is available now.

 You take out the basket, and you're going to want to soak it in some sort of thing like

 Pour it into the bottom of the tub, and then dispense some hot water directly over it.

 Let it sit for about ten minutes or so, and then give it a good scrub with a sponge, rinse

 Cleaning the rest of the coffee brewer, most of it is just wiped down with a rag, but underneath

 Make sure you use a towel when you do this, but you can unscrew the spray head.

 It holds a great amount of hot water, which is why you want to make sure to use a towel.

 Now these spray heads are the main reason why it controls the flow rate of the water.

 So you want to make sure that you clean these using the soft side of a sponge.

 No soap or anything, but just take the soft side of the sponge and give it a scrub at

 Additionally, about once a week, you want to take a toothpick and poke out all the little

 holes so that no calcium has the chance to build up inside, because that will affect

 Now when your brew basket's all done soaking, give it a rinse with cold water, scrub it

 Run a hot water batch through it, let it sit, rinse it out, scrub it out, rinse it out,

 Once a week, you want to use the same product, this Urn-X or UrnCleaner, whatever brand you

 Take some of it, pour it directly into the dispenser, and what this does is break down

 So we're going to brew a batch of water directly over the Urn-X.

 And then once it's done brewing, we use a scrub brush to scrub it out.

 And then pour it out, and you can see all the coffee that's built up in there.

 Give it a rinse with very, very cold water to get all the Urn-X out.

 And then brew one more batch of hot water in there to preheat it for the next day.

 Use all of your dispensers for the next day so that you're always brewing into hot stainless

 Hi everybody, today I'm going to show you how to make the world's quickest egg salad

 This is for one person, one sandwich, and I'll just get right to it.

 Two boiled eggs, 1 quarter cup of like miracle whip salad dressing.

 If you don't have one of these, they're kind of neat for salads.

 Take our miracle whip salad dressing, 1 quarter cup, two eggs, put it in there.

 I'm just going to use a pie crust masher to put it all together.

 Okay, while we're doing this, throw in a couple pieces of toast in the toaster.

 Maybe just to work the salad dressing or the miracle whip into the eggs.

 Rags, gloves, cleaner, a drip pan, screwdrivers, set of socket keys, ramps, the new filter, two screw clamps.

 Using a screwdriver, unscrew the two clamps at each end of the filter.

 Attach the hoses to the filter and then tighten the clamps without damaging the hoses.

 Prime the fuel system by turning the ignition key on, or as stated in the manual of your vehicle.

 Start the engine and let it run several minutes until a stable engine speed is reached.

 Do not throw away your used filter in the household waste, but take it with the used engine oil into the nearest garage.

 Valeo recommends that you change your fuel filter every 30,000 km or every 2 years during maintenance of your vehicle.

 season just around the corner it's also perfect for popping in your tea.

 delicious, it's very good for you and it's a great way to use up those lemons.

 These are my organically homegrown lemons off our tree and we've got some

Just take the end piece off because that's going to be really quite

 commence this project to make sure there's no bugs guts on them and continue with the

Just pick out all those seeds, just lose those, put them back in the compost.

 have any little cuts or scratches on your hands this is exactly the time to

 that have been finely sliced and we've taken all of the seeds out.

 to pour a little of our honey into our sterilized jar, just a little.

You'll have to shake it from time to time over the next couple of

 days, probably once or twice a day, just to make sure that the lemon and the

You can even freeze the little slices and use them in your drinks.

 jar for any more than about three or four days because if you do they will

 mixed rind flavor that you get in your mixed peel at Christmas time.

 delicious juice that you can use in drinks, cordials, to flavor jellies.

I'm just going to wipe the edge of that so the ants don't decide to have some too.

 three days and shaking our honey lemon slices, once a day for three days, you can

 see that the honey has withdrawn a lot of the lemon juice from the lemon and

 We're just going to take a couple of those honey lemon slices out and just chop

Now these honey lemon slices are delightful in tea or ginger beer.

 the skin will impart a bitter unpleasant flavor to the honey and that's less than

 cubes in drinks if you like or because they've got such a high sugar content

 sugar content they won't stick together too seriously in the freezer and you

 will have them for quite a period of time for use in cooking, drinks, punch and

 stay in the fridge and the honey lemon slices go in the freezer.

 Install one paddle between the hanger and the header at each end of the cover

 using one number 10 by half inch sheet metal screw at each end of the panel.

 Make sure the posts are plumb before attaching the panel to the header.

 The panel should be flush with the roll form hanger at the house

 using two number 10 sheet metal screws at the bottom and one at the top.

 Also fasten the pan to the header using two number 14 tech screws

 Interlock the panels, start at a 45 degree angle and connect them.

 Fasten the rain flashing to the house or wall or to the fascia board directly

 Fasten the flashing to the roof panels using number 8 by half inch tech screws.

 Overlap the flashing at least 1 inch and fasten through the interlock.

 If access to the top of the cover at the house is not possible or impractical,

 flashing must be installed in conjunction with the roof panel installation.

 Good evening everybody, we are about to test out tonight the Stuffs Ultimate Burger Stuffing

 In order to do this we've got to make stuffed burgers, so let's have at it.

 So we're going to come over here and we've got our trusty ingredients for Big Wieners

 We've got ground beef, paper cheese, you can use whichever cheese you would like, but because

 I like to keep it on the budget I use paper cheese, and we've got some diced jalapenos.

 So according to the instructions what I'm supposed to do here is I'm supposed to pull

 Let's open it up and we can see in here that we've got a couple different mechanisms.

 We've got a place to put our topping and our ground beef, and what this also does is this

 also functions as our mechanism to make the cavity for the burger.

 You know, it looks pretty innocuous, but as you can see here I'm going to be pushing

 That I confess is going to be pretty darn handy when it comes down the road.

 So I'm going to set this down for just a second and make sure that we are ready to go.

 So they were nice enough to put instructions with this, so let's take a look.

 And it says it's approximately a third of a cup for the max, so that's close enough.

 Then what we're going to do here at this point is we flattened it.

 And then we're going to pull it back up and lock it back in place.

 So now what should happen is when I open this up, I should have a little cavity right there.

 You can see that probably due to the way that the meat was put into place, the cavity

 So what I'm going to do here is put my toppings in and give plenty of jalapenos.

 Now we're going to take the cheese and we're going to put it in.

 In the instructions it does say to make sure that the, whenever the meat is formed, that

 Ground meat to the inside and spread it out evenly to fill out the entire shape.

 I think it's just because I make my burgers, make my burgers huge.

 And the part that I actually really like about this is I can push up the top from the bottom

 Just come around, we can see there's a little bit of a break there in the seal.

 The one thing that I do like about it here is, again, we've got a little problem right

 If you run, the problem that I just saw was, I attempted to pull the bottom off so I could

 So a lot of times what's recommended here is to actually take the apparatus and make

Today we'll be showing you how to change the vanes on a Panther 56 pump.

 To do this job you will need a 4mm Allen key, a pair of long nose pliers and a set of replacement vanes.

 Begin by using the 4mm Allen key to remove the four bolts holding the cover plate in place.

 When all four bolts are removed simply lift the cover plate out of position.

 Now use the long nose pliers to remove the rotor and vanes from the shaft of the pump.

 The vanes are spring loaded so they will eject from the rotor if you do not hold them in place.

 Remove the five vanes from the rotor and place the rotor back in the pump.

 When placing the rotor back on the shaft observe that the dot pointed out here is showing.

 Before installing the replacement vanes into the pump observe the schematic diagram on screen.

 Note the rotation of the rotor is in the anti-clockwise direction.

 It is important that the vanes are installed in the correct position otherwise the pump head will not rotate.

 Take the first vane and partially insert it into the rotor of the pump.

 Instead rotate the rotor and compress the spring before pushing down fully.

 Repeat this process for the four remaining vanes until you have the complete set installed.

 When you have installed all five replacement vanes check against the photograph on screen that the chamfered edges of the vanes are matching up with the diagram on screen.

 When all of the vanes have been replaced, replace the cover plate.

 Secure with the four cover plate screws using the allen key to tighten.

I've been using henna now for a little bit and the reason why I started using henna

 is because the hair dye that I was buying at the store was giving me an allergic reaction.

Sometimes you're going to see those little packages and they say

 red or black but there's no such thing because henna only has one molecule and that is lawson.

 that I bought today was from a local Indian store by my house but I will be placing a

 link at the bottom of my description box that will show you where to get henna that is 100%

The other good thing is that henna will make your hair strong and

 And I said hey if I'm already using sulfate free products and no parabens I might as well

 start doing the same thing with the hair coloring products that I'm putting in my hair because

 the only thing that you're doing is damaging your hair even more by using hair dye.

 with that said I want to show you how I prepare it and how I put it in my hair.

 Apple Cider Vinegar, Olive Oil, optional you can use an application brush but your finger

 will be fine, gloves, surround wrap to cover your head and a no t-shirt that maybe you're

 not going to be using because it's going to get messy, newspaper as well.

 really great for black hair and sage is going to help with the gray hair.

Next add coffee and coffee also helps with the stimulation of hair growth.

 My grandmother, my mother and my aunt used to use this for their hair and it makes your

 people find it to be too dry so if you are planning to keep this mixture overnight, skip

 Cover the mixture and let it sit at room temperature for at least 12 hours.

 looks oxidized, it looks a brown color, that means that it's ready.

 going to need them because this will stain your fingers and hands and everywhere.

I parted my hair into four sections and it's a lot easier for me

 scalp with it and you're rubbing it at the same time while you're applying it.

And after you're done applying it to the scalp, apply it to the length of

 red orange but this color is translucent and it will combine with your natural color.

 to dye your hair black, you need to get a black henna which is actually indigo.

And after you're done, get all your hair on the top of the head and get cellophane

This will keep the moisture inside and it will prevent the henna from

And now I'm going to leave this on my hair for about 3-4 hours to make sure

 to prevent my hair from being extra dry because the lemon is going to make it a little bit

You can't see actually the color that much here because of the lighting.

 Hey everyone, I'm going to show you a really great, simple, very fresh and delicious salad,

 I'm going to do a watermelon feta salad and I'm going to do some arugula and some mint

 What we have here is I just have some nice fresh arugula that I went and put in there

 You can use the ones with the seeds if you want but I like to use the seedless because

 And then I'm going to take some red onion and I'm just going to very thinly slice some

 We're just going to have little tiny strips of some red onion, almost like shaved on the

 And then I'm just going to finish it off with a really nice, simple balsamic vinaigrette.

 And then what we're going to do is we're going to take our basil and take it off her

 So if you ever get the chance to use herbs in a salad, definitely do it.

 Actually this feta I brought back when I went to Greece last year.

 And I just kept it in the freezer and I've been using it ever since.

 And then I'm going to show you how to do a really simple balsamic vinaigrette.

 Alright, to make our balsamic vinaigrette, it's going to be very simple.

 So now what we're going to do is just drizzle that over the top.

 The door's a bit, it's just been ripped off the hinges basically.

 Alright so what you're going to have to do is fill this with glue, wood glue.

 Try and get that bit there because it's quite important that bit.

 I've got a book, because it's got glue on it, put it in a plastic bag so you don't destroy the book.

 Right, once you've managed to battle with the clamp to get it where you want it,

 I've taken the clamp off and as you can see it's actually done, it's solid now.

 This part here, this bump here, what you can do with it is just put a bit of filler on it, sand it down and then you can repaint it.

 So now, before the screws couldn't fit in there, so let's just test to make sure the screws are ok before we actually hang it back.

 So just test, you can test them all, make sure they'll hold the door.

 These are the original screws, what I might do is actually get some longer screws as well,

 just to make sure it's a bit more solid, even though it works now.

 So all you've got to do now is just hang the door and everything should be fine.

 Texas AgriLife Extension Service and I may have an answer for you.

 great for those nights that you are pressed for time to get dinner on the table.

 this recipe you'll need 8 ounces of linguine pasta that you've cooked in boiling water

In the same pot, you'll combine 1 10 1⁄2 ounce can of 98% fat free cream

We'll add 1⁄2 cup of skim milk, 2 cups of chopped cooked chicken, and

 1⁄2 cup of shredded parmesan cheese and 1⁄2 teaspoon of black pepper.

 to cook and stir because this mixture is thick and it will stick.

Combine 16 ounces of baby carrots, 1⁄2 cup of water, and 1 tablespoon of lemon

Carrots also contain a lot of vitamin A, so this meal is actually

The broccoli and the carrots are good sources of vitamin A, so this is

So the next time you're wondering what's for dinner tonight, remember

 that Texas AgriLife Extension Service has lots of recipes and other information to help

 As you can recall, I glued only the bottom separation, not the side.

 And since I'm having a hard time prying this open, it did work on the bottom.

 So for the separation on the side, you would need to repeat the same steps that was done

 in the previous video, but this time, you're going to apply the pressure on the side.

 So there's another separation issue that needs to be addressed, and that's midsole separation.

 The process of applying glue to the separation is done the same way as we did in the previous

 As you can see, I did get some glue on the patent leather and on the midsole.

 So after you have applied the glue, the next thing you want to do is clamp the shoe.

 The clamping process is going to require pressure from these two points and pressure from the

 I have two pressure points right here and I have pressure coming down from the bottom.

 However, when I push on the patent leather, it doesn't separate like it did before the

 The gluing process may take several steps to get the job done right.

 Keep in mind that I used the Air Jordan 11 as an example for sole separation and midsole

 You just need to modify how you use the laces to clamp up the shoe as well as the paper

 Hope you guys enjoyed this video and be sure to stay tuned for our next episode.

And I'm going to do a quick demo on a recipe that you can do at a tailgate

Steak, a little bit of stock, a little bit of brandy, salt and pepper to

And before you cook your steak, you want to season it with a little

And also remember with salt, you don't want to put that on too early or

 for is a nice brown, crispy mallard reaction color on your meat.

 When you get your steak cooked to the temperature of the nice color you're looking for, you

 trouble with cooking steak, a good way to test for your doneness is your hand.

 going to take this steak and we're going to put it in the oven.

 so much about a wide variety of ways of cooking and just basic techniques to improve on.

 The first stage, you're going to do a keychain with your non-dominant hand.

 So you can do that just by getting into a front mount, stick your finger in, practice

 What we're going to do is throw a trapeze over our non-dominant wrist.

 You get right into that trapeze mount, do a reverse flip, dismount, let it fall off.

 It takes a slight adjustment because we're not doing the trapeze and reverse flip over

 Try to get it one fluid motion where you get that mount, that flip, and the dismount.

 Once you've got those two elements together, you can combine them to create the whole trick.

 Get into your keychain mount, do your trapeze over your wrist, and you're going to do the

 keychain flip and the reverse flip and dismount at the same time.

 You can just drop the yoyos, bring them both back to your hand, and that's the Shima Wrap.

 In this video I will show you how to weave in a very short tail on your project.

 Unfortunately sometimes this happens and you're left with a very, very short tail, either

 by accidentally cutting it too short, which I've done before and it happens, or sometimes

 you just simply run out of yarn and you really just have no choice and you're left with this

 So I'm going to show you just kind of what I do and it kind of will get you out of this

 Now you don't really just want to cut it because then you'll have this little tiny piece sticking

 out and this is a baby hat that I knit for charity and you don't want to, this would

 So what I like to do is if you were to just thread this like so and try and get in there,

 your needle is, my needle is actually, maybe your needle is shorter, but mine is actually

 So what you can do is without threading the needle, you can run your needle in to the

 piece as you would if you were weaving the piece in, just like that.

 Now pull it almost all the way through and then, you can give this a twist if the plies

 Now I like to, when I'm weaving in ends, I like to give it one pass in one direction

 If you have a very very short end sometimes you just have to trim it and be done with

 But if you have a teeny tiny bit left you can also try and come in the other direction.

 So you can do the same thing, go ahead without threading the needle in the eye, go ahead

 You don't need to go too far again because your tail is so short.

 So just run it in a little ways and then you can thread it through.

 My plies are coming apart, that's okay just give them a little twist.

 So you can just pull it right through and the tail is woven in.

 Just take your scissors, give it a little tug, trim and then it disappears.

 So we've woven in our little tiny tail and our hat is ready to go.

 So I can, this is my charity hat, I'm going to, it's ready to be donated.

 Thanks so much for watching and be sure and click the red subscribe button to get all

In this tutorial I'll be going over what a low blood sugar feels like.

 People ask me all the time if my blood sugars are moving around whenever I'm filming.

 going to go low throughout the night it's normally like 3 in the morning.

 blood sugar usually makes you feel really dizzy or like you're gonna pass out.

 usually my back though which is kind of a difficult area to fan.

 sweat things where you want to put a sweatshirt on because you're cold but you don't because you're

Can we just take a second to acknowledge the fact that I just made bugle ice cream cones.

 is really the only time that it physically can make me stop filming.

 hear all the time is that we can't eat sweets or we can't eat candy.

 would probably have more of an effect on my blood sugar than eating like a piece of cake.

If you have any questions, comments, or concerns feel free to contact me.

 I'm then going in with a small made you look eyeshadow brush and graphitopian pro paint in

I'm then going ahead and using an eyeshadow brush to fill in the

Then using an angled brush to create hues in between the drips to

This method is a lot easier than trying to outline them and fill them

Repeat that process with pink body paint to make the strawberry ice cream.

 For your shoulders, once again repeat the same thing just on a larger scale.

 brush, a small eyeshadow brush, and then also a foundation brush to fill in the drips on my

Using my double-ended brush, I'm taking BH Cosmetics white eyeshadow.

 going underneath my brow as well as on my inner corner of both eyes.

 medium pink from BH Cosmetics and going along my crease as well as underneath my eye.

 filling in my lid itself with the brightest pink in the 120 palette.

For my regular liner, I'm using the Madeyewlook eyeliner that will be released in

I'm then using the Madeyewlook angled brush and BH Cosmetics same hot pink eyeshadow to fill

On one side I have it behind the ice cream and on the other side I have it in front of

I'm then outlining my eyebrows using the Stila white liquid liner.

 on all the pink ice cream, I'm using the brightest pink in the BH Cosmetics 120 palette and then just

 shading one side of the drips as well as little sections within the melted area.

 Using Graftobian Propane white and the Madeyewlook detail brush, I'm then going on the opposite side

I'm also going ahead and using pink, blue, and green body paint to add in my sprinkles

 very light tan body paint and the Madeyewlook detail brush and just drawing some cross patterns.

 I also had my entire vanilla section glittered by Lit Cosmetics and it didn't show up very well

 on camera, but let me tell you, it is super super sparkly in person!

 Now, the key is to multiply each ingredient by the number of drinks you want to make.

 Now, while you're doing this, well, you may need to break out a calculator in order to

 But for batch recipes, I have found that these pitchers here work out perfectly, especially

 Alright, now the first thing you're going to want to do is pour in your vodka, which

 But of course, if you were making one, well, then it would be an ounce and a quarter.

 But if you remember correctly, yes, that's right, we're making five.

 Then the next thing we're going to do is we're going to squeeze in the juice of five lemon

 Now, if you want this thing a little sweeter, well, then of course you could add a little

 But we're going to be pouring in finest call strawberry mix, which should sweeten it enough

 Now the next thing is we're going to pour in two ounces of finest call sweet and sour

 Now, finest call sweet and sour is the key to great lemonades because it is made with

 So you kind of get a little bit of sour, but kind of sweet, which, well, I guess maybe,

 you know, that's where they came up with the name sweet and sour.

 Yeah, you use it for whiskey sours, collin drinks, Long Island iced teas, the list really

 But anyway, so we're going to pour in ten ounces, okay, I'll do the math for you, of

 our sour mix, and we're going to put that directly into the pitcher with everything

 And then we're going to be adding some finest call strawberry mix, yeah, since this is,

 Yeah, look at that, we've got the flip top lid so I can pour twice as fast, making me,

 Turn it to the strainer part here, this is where that comes in handy there, and pour

 myself a drink because it's going to strain out, you know, obviously the lemons, but also

 Now, all you've got to do is put this in the fridge, and when you're ready for a refill,

 Alright, now for the garnish here, I thought we'd get a little festive, you know, maybe

 put a little lemon wheel on there, obviously a lemonade, and it's a strawberry lemonade,

 Hello fellas, it's Versa2 and basically I have a little guide in here which should help

 you to take apart, basically disassemble the Asus E-Pad transformer.

 I have a broken screen, I'm waiting for the replacement so I'm not going to take the whole

 thing apart but I do want to show you how to take out the trim and the back panel.

 So basically all you need is a Phillips screwdriver, Torx and basically this kind of flat plastic

 tool which is going to help me to kind of split or take this, the aluminum trim out.

 It's kind of brass color so you better be careful not to scratch it.

 It's really thin so you can even bend it very easily so just be careful about it.

 So the first thing you want to remove, you have to remove these two screws, D5s on the

 So basically take these out and as soon as you've done that, alright, we can start taking

 Some people are saying to start from the top, some people say to start from the bottom,

 All you have to do basically is just to put your tool in here and try to split it in here.

 I don't know if you can see it, basically just pull this trim off, kind of away from

 I got a better experience with this tool so you can see it goes pretty easy.

 See that's the one side, so I can show you a close look in here basically.

 Now you can see, there's a small clip so you just want to drive the tool around and just

 Alright, so go all around, alright, and hold this item, you can see that the whole trim

 So you can see this is the really, really thin, it's kind of a plastic piece with, I don't

 know if you can see, but it's kind of a plastic piece combined with the aluminum, I believe,

 All you have to do now is to remove these four screws on the side in here, basically

 And after that, you got to remove another six screws, which is hiding in here.

 Basically, there's nothing you can really find on eBay or somewhere else.

 So I was digging online and I googled some website for a selling kind of replacement,

 So basically I'm going to do a video part two where I'm going to show the screen replacement.

 But for now, we kind of just, you know, I just want to show you how to take this apart

 So about that screen, I heard that Asus basically charged about $300 for repairs.

 So basically that website I found, I'll put it in the description.

 So let's say about $100 with shipping, which is really probably an easier way,

 As you can see, there's the speakers on both sides, battery, the models,

 I believe because I tried to go kind of farther, if I can split the screen,

 it really looks like I have to take all these small motherboards apart

 That's going to be kind of video number two, part two with the screen replacement.

So today is the last day of my exams and I decided to do a what I ate today video

 In case you guys are wondering what I eat before exams, after exams, blah blah blah

 I don't know what you guys but I like to wake up considerably early just so I can make myself a nice breakfast because I believe

 That if you start off your day really good with really good food

 Then you'll just have a nice morning and hopefully the rest of the food that you eat throughout the day

 Is just gonna be just as good so you're gonna be happy because obviously food is what fuels your mood

 Then I will do that and that is exactly what I do when making breakfast or putting on makeup

 I'll usually either go with a podcast from JK films about their news or I will just go with an audiobook

 But this morning I decided to go with an audiobook from audible and I'm actually listening to test by black hole

 Don't really like reading fiction books because you feel like it just doesn't add much to your life and you're more of like a

 Honestly, if it's a textbook that I'm not being tested on then I'd be so willing to read it

 You guys are like being you like to be as productive as possible.

 Then I hooked you guys up with a link for a free audiobook at audible.com slash Eva

 Other than that I'll just play it on my phone, blast it up to max and make my omelette

 I'm really lazy when it comes to cooking though in my opinion if I can do it without making as many dishes as possible

 I'll basically just oil up my pan with some palm oil and then I'll just put in some onions that I chopped up from a few

 Days ago because ain't nobody got time to chop up onions every day

 After that I'll just crack an egg and an egg white and if you guys are wondering about the egg

 You can basically just keep it in the fridge for until the end of the week or like a couple days later and make a really

 I tend to make custards or puddings with it and it's a really nice way of rewarding yourself at the end of the week without

After that I'll just sprinkle in whatever vegetables or whatever I have in my fridge

 And to speed up the process I basically just put a lid on top just so that I can cook the top as well

 After that I just flip it over and make it look like a fancy omelette because aesthetics matter

I just decided I want to play with an apple that I just cut fancy just for this video

 But normally I would just have the apple cut in half and just munch on that.

 I normally would have ketchup, but I didn't have any for whatever reason today

 So I'm just using sriracha on top, but you know either or works.

 Which is a really late lunch because like that was at 12 which is smack in the middle of lunchtime

 Obviously they don't care if we starve and especially if we commute and we get there at lunchtime

 I decided to go out because I wanted to treat myself after my exam and I've been craving

 Okonomiyaki for the longest time and I've never had it before until this day and

 If you guys have never gotten it before you have to go and get it because it is one of the best things

 After that because I did a lot of walking because I refused to take the subway since it was such a nice bright beautiful day

 It was like 10 degrees and I was sweating under a giant chunky sweater

 But regardless anyways, I walked around a lot and I figured I might as well try the new Nutella donut from Tim Hortons

 So I just got one and split it in half and shared it with Linda

 I probably wouldn't buy it again just because it's so sweet and I just can't bring myself to buy another one

 I decided to have a really late dinner plus I got home late as well because commuting problems

 I just grabbed some leftover cabbage soup that I had in my fridge and if you guys are wondering how to make it

You literally just toss everything in and that's what I really love about soups

 Whatever the heck you have in your fridge and then you can put in some onions, garlic, salt, pepper

 Honestly, just stick in whatever you find in your fridge into the pot and simmer it for 30 minutes and you'll basically have it

I don't sleep at a normal time anymore regardless of how tired I am

 mini oranges, tangerines, clementines, whatever the heck you guys want to call these things

 And I basically eat this throughout the night and I eat plenty of these because these taste freaking amazing and I love them

 I don't know probably gonna get comments saying that you know, there's a lot of sugars in fruits

 You probably shouldn't eat them right before you sleep blah blah blah

 I don't care because I really like these and these make me happy and I will eat them if I want to and if I

 So I want you guys to comment down below and let me know what you had for

 If you guys did like this video make sure you give me a big thumbs up and don't forget to subscribe if you haven't yet

 Hi there and welcome to Sportsbikeshots video on how to change a Nolan N20 visor.

 So with the visor in a closed position the first thing we're going to do is remove this big cover here.

 So just hold the helmet still with one hand, small tab at the back, just take hold of that and pull it off like so.

 Now the actual mechanism on the pivot point here is a small slider, just slide that down towards the centre

 So what we're going to do first of all is take the back of the visor off and as we do that we're going to slide the whole visor down

 There we go, that's that side done, we'll do exactly the same on this side.

 Again just holding the helmet still, take hold of the tab and remove the cover first of all.

 Slide the little slider down, take hold of the back of the visor like so and just slide it down and that's the visor off.

 So to replace it, exactly the same in reverse order, just line everything up first, don't worry about getting it straight on.

 We're going to locate the front of the visor, push it back towards the back of the helmet and the reverse will just snap into place.

 Put that slider up to stop it coming off again, then lugs in here, two bigger lugs sit on the two bigger holes like so,

 Same on this side, again hold the helmet still, locate the front first, give it a push and then the back will pop into place.

 Slide the cover up, locate the covers, give it a good push into place and there we go.

 Just open and close the visor, make sure it's seated correctly along the top of the visor seal.

 And there we have it, that's how you change a visor on a Nolan N20.

 Thank you for joining us today for another one of Sephora's quick tips.

 Today we are going to be looking at how to melt our chocolate in a double boiler.

 Now a double boiler is simply two pots that nest into one another.

 The word or name double boiler insinuates that you're boiling water to melt whatever

 In the case of chocolate, that could not be further from the truth.

 Now water boils at 212 degrees Fahrenheit or 100 degrees Celsius.

 Chocolate scorches or burns at 132 degrees Fahrenheit or 55 degrees Celsius.

 So if you've got your water boiling, you've heated your chocolate about two times the

 It's going to thicken, it's going to caramelize any of the milk or dairy that you happen

 to have in your chocolate and nothing's going to bring it back.

 Now here's the key temperature that you're looking for and I have a little candy thermometer

 in the water that is going to indicate to me when I've reached 115 degrees Fahrenheit

 We today are going to be using Sephra's Premium Milk Chocolate and we've designed this chocolate

 to melt at about 92 degrees Fahrenheit, 33 degrees Centigrade, which is just below your

 We've designed it to have 39% cocoa butter in it so that it melts very quickly.

 I'm going to go ahead and add this to our pot and then I will heat the water and we'll

 go ahead and mix it up and have a look at how to melt our chocolate in a double boiler.

 It's been about two minutes since I've had this pot of chocolate nested in the hot water

 Your machine may require considerably more depending on if it's a home or commercial

 I'd say that it's been about five minutes since I've added this chocolate pot to the

 warm water and the chocolate's what you're looking for, the consistency that you're looking

 Hello guys, I am Sifu Tibor and I would like to show you new upgraded exercise which if

 you are training Wing Chun you probably know at Lao Tsao cycle.

 Normal Lao Tsao cycle is that somebody do chain punch and I do chain punch opposite

 to him or I can do Pak Tsao or he doing one arm Pak Tsao and one arm strike.

 Nice exercise, however you are not learning in this exercise one really important element

 So if he is punching here and you do just this and your head is still here you rely

 But in the fight I would prefer rely also on my body movements like you can see in Eskrima

 So I am not moving just my head like this but I also turn my head.

 Because if I am straight like this and he hit me perpendicular to my face it's quite

 Visualize small ball in the core and you try the ball move from side to side.

 It can be big movements like this, small quicker movements randomly how you want something

 Third movement which I am talking about is you shift your weight from leg to leg.

 If you are happy with this movement then you can train with partner.

 Then if I am doing much better then I can go closer, I can go into range.

 Because finally we don't do just shifting from side to side but we do V step, Biuji

 If I don't do the Biuji step and I do just this, here, he has chance for other strike.

 So train against this chain punch and against chain punch like this.

 You don't slap him only when he is lucky that he holds his arm between his face.

 I do Park Sao with Wu Sao or I do Park Sao with Wu Sao but always I am moving.

 Here I am going to use 1 cup of dried coconut and 3 4th cup of all purpose flour, 1 cup

 of sugar, 3 4th cup of oats, 1 tsp of baking soda, 1 cup of honey, 6 tbsp of butter, 2

 Take a wide bowl like this, in that bowl I am going to add first dry ingredients like

 It is very simple and quick snack for our kids and this is a very good festival recipe

 This is a very good and healthy recipe for our family as well as our neighbors also.

 Take the sauce pan like this, in that pan I am going to add first 6 tbsp of butter and

 before that I am going to add 1 tsp of honey, 1 tsp of corn syrup.

 In between I am going to add this 1 tsp of baking soda into this hot water.

 Now I am going to add baking soda and hot water mixture into this butter.

 Now I am going to turn off the flame and I am going to pour this mixture into this

 After pouring this baking soda you can hear fuzz sound like zzzzz sound.

 Now I am going to pour this butter mixture into this dry coconut ingredient like oats

 Now I am going to take a spoon full of mixture and place it in a baking tray.

 Hey guys, this is Squishy Monster and today we're going to make a tuna kimchi jjigae.

 And even if by western standards something looks like it needs to be tossed out, we just

 So you can really toss in whatever vegetables you have laying around or whatever scraps

 It's really one of those kind of collection of leftovers, pushed together kind of I would

 So I ate this practically every day growing up and I hope you guys try it and you guys

 I'm starting off by cooking off a little bit of bacon and it's not traditional but I love

 it and really when you cook you should use what you like or what you have.

 So it's going to render off a lot of its fat and that's what I'm going to use to saute

 So I have a little bit of onion, gochugaru which is Korean pepper flakes, and then some

 And if you have fresh kimchi just make sure you set it on the counter overnight or a couple

 And I want a deeply fermented one because it's going to impart a really nice flavor,

 And this is back in the old days my mom said that it was just to use up kimchi but now

 After your kimchi has absorbed that second layer of flavor from the bacon and the vegetables

 and the seasonings, and remember not to over salt because the fermented kimchi is especially

 So that when it's softened a little bit I want to tumble in my tuna.

 And you can use any type of tuna you'd like and this was something we grew up a lot eating

 It's going to be a richer flavor that's going to add another dimension of flavor to the

 After that has kind of nicely mingled together I'm going to pour in my broth, my kimchi,

 I want to add in my tofu and you can omit this if you don't like it but I like the body

 And then I just kind of want to spoon over the sauce on everything.

 And let it become part of the soup and I like it to bubble for at least 20 minutes before

 I enjoy it just to make sure all the flavors are really solid and put together.

 And then on top of that I like to just add on a little bit of green onion.

 Now it's time to taste and my favorite way of eating it really is just ladling the hot

 If you like pickled things or even spicy or fermented things and you've never had kimchi

 This is probably my favorite way to eat kimchi aside from the kimchi fried rice.

 It's got that smokiness from the bacon and the vegetables are really nice and tender

 And it came up in no time at all and it really just utilizes all the leftover bits that you

 So I hope that you guys give this a try and that you guys enjoy it and let me know how

 Today I would like to share with you how to color these cherries with Copic markers.

 They're the cherries I used on a card last week, and I thought I would explain how to

 I could leave a place that was just the white of the paper, or actually this is a natural

 A cherry is shiny so I could get by with that, but I think I'll go back instead with a clear

 I think this is the only marker I'm using that Ellen does not carry.

 I could skip it and just go straight to an R29, but it would take me more time to blend,

 and I have only about 10 minutes on YouTube to be able to get this entire thing on, so

 And finally, an R59 or R89, whichever one of those you might happen to have.

 When you're blending 2 different colors, rather than using your clear blender, take the lighter

 On this cherry, I'm going to take my R24 next and add a little more pigment in here.

 Remember, I can go back with my clear blender and reclaim highlights if I get it too dark

 I'm just switching off, working with whatever color seems to be needed at the moment.

 Okay, I think I'm ready to go back to my R29, my deeper red there.

 I could go in with my clear blender and pull out a bit of a highlight.

 I'm just going to dab at it and then move back because it will keep fading.

 You don't want to scrub and scrub or you will take too much color out.

 They get a little browner as they get up near the woody part of the stem.

 and a little bit of darkness maybe near the base of the leaf and on one side.

 or I'll probably make it bleed because it's such a strong color.

 I could stop here, but I'm going to add a bit of warmth around here.

 but a Y21 would give you a very similar look if you happen to have Y21.

 Now, I mixed it with clear blender just to make it a bit lighter

 Okay, I think if I maybe take a bit more of a highlight out on the cherries,

 The Relate Workchair provides office workers with a combination of active and automatic

 The strongest ergonomic feature of this chair is the ability to easily adapt to many users

 The seat height is lowered by lifting the rearward lever on the right side of the chair

 To raise the seat height, lift the lever while taking your weight off the seat cushion.

 Your feet should be supported by the floor or your footrest, and your hips should be

 The seat depth is adjusted to support you and prevent pressure behind the back of your

 Lift the lever on the front edge of the seat and slide the seat forward or back so that

 you have space for two or three fingers between the back of your knee and the front of the

 The recline tension in Relate is automatic and has been engineered into the chair.

 When you recline in the chair, the seat will lift your weight and provide the correct amount

 This automatic tension can actually be micro-adjusted to five different positions.

 By moving the forward lever on the right side of the chair, pushing the lever forward will

 provide a lesser tension, while pushing it back will provide a stronger recline.

 To adjust the height, lift the button under the armrest and raise the arm until your shoulders

 Adjust the distance between the arms by pulling or pushing on the arm pad.

 The armrest depth can be adjusted by moving the arm pad forward or back.

 These adjustments customize the fit of the armrest to the user and the workstation.

 The backrest has a pivot that moves with the user's natural movements when seated.

 The recline can be locked in the upright position by pulling the lever on the left side of the

 The Relate chair lumbar can be adjusted by moving the lumbar controls on the left and

 Find a height that gives your lower back support as you move and work.

 The upholstered version of the Relate chair has a lumbar adjustment that moves underneath

 The Relate task chair is a versatile ergonomic office chair with controls that the user does

 not have to worry about and others that the user can override as needed.

 The chair will allow many different users to perform different tasks and optimize their

 Hi, my name is Sunny Khurana, Vice President of Khurana Group USA.

 My family and I have been in the automotive business for over 20 years, and we manufacture

 several machines, two of which we're going to demonstrate today.

 This machine changes oil fairly quickly without having to open the drain plug.

 This goes right through the dipstick and removes more oil than just opening the drain plug.

 Most mechanics who use it love the speed and the ability to get the customer in and out.

 You just go through the dipstick tube, turn on the pump, and it sucks out all the oil.

 Wherever the bottom of the suction tube touches is where the oil is removed up to.

 A lot of times you can remove a lot more oil through the dipstick than you would if you

 The average car holds about four to five quarts, so you could do, say, seven or eight cars.

 Push the machine over to a holding tank and reverse flush it out.

 To get steady customers coming in for oil changes, you have to be at a reasonable price.

 But in that, you have to cover the cost of oil, disposal, filter.

 So if you're not able to do it for $25, then a lot of people go elsewhere and you don't

 Ideally, you'd be able to sell them other products and services in the meantime.

 At this point, you would change the oil filter out or write up the invoice.

 This way, it removes more oil than opening the drain plug, and without having the fear

 of stripping or over-tightening or having leaks caused by improperly tightened drain

 With hot oil, it takes approximately two minutes to withdraw, empty out about seven liters,

 The bigger the probe, the more the oil that's transferred through.

 And then you would put the oil filter back in, put the oil back in the engine.

 From the barn I took apart this piece was already put together.

 It was basically a 2x6s held together with the cross pieces here.

 So if you don't have something you can easily put this together.

 There's about an eighth of an inch space between each board which allows for expansion and

 So put those together and then we'll start working on the legs.

 You can use math and do it on paper to figure out how long they need to be.

 Grab a straight edge because you don't want the edge of your legs going out past the top

 And then where you mark it, come back, pencil in your angle and make the cut.

 And once you have one finished you can go ahead and trace the other three legs and then

 Now we need to figure out how far apart they need to be so that that top is the same width

 And using a square, mark across them so I know where my X is going to be.

 So now I can match up those marks and make sure that I'm at the right, the proper angle.

 And then once I do that, I'll put four screws into the X, hold them together, and put some

 And for, if you're using rough barn wood like this, some construction adhesive would work

 And I used the 2 by 6 just because my piece came together, all together from the barn

 So since I didn't make it myself I'm going to use the 2 by 6 to give it some extra heft.

 So line that up, screw that board in, and then I'll be able to actually attach the legs

 Drill a pilot hole and then drive in your lag bolt, tighten it down with the washer,

 and two in horizontally into that 2 by 6 brace, and then one in diagonally onto this end piece

 because this is only, this side is only a 3 quarter inch, not enough to come in at the

 So now I have these legs being held up and down and side to side so they're not going anywhere.

 Okay so my last step is to put this cross piece, I've got this dowel that I also scavenged

 So I'm going to drill a hole through each side, right in the center, and install the

 And now for a stopper, I'm going to drill a hole and put a dowel on each end so that

 it can't push through, even though it's a pretty tight fit already.

 I drilled a quarter inch hole through the dowel and then drove a quarter inch dowel

 You can sand it down and thin varnish or paint it or just leave it as is.

 And the designer pack that you get in the Hostess Rewards is perfect for this.

 get all these sheets of designer paper and it's a level 1, so it's really easy to get.

 What you're going to do is take it apart gently, trying to keep the shape of your envelope.

 It doesn't have to be perfect, but at least you want it to be together.

 sides right here in the bottom, where you see the score line, I'm going to cut inside

So you want to go on the inside of that score line, just a little

 Okay, and then for the bottom, you can just cut it at the score line.

 Okay, so then take a piece of your designer paper, or I'm going to use the Hostess pack here.

 Okay, so then you're just going to lay your template right on that designer paper.

 I like to line the edge of the bottom and the one edge on the side up perfectly, so I don't have to cut that much off.

 You can use your removable adhesive too if you want to hold it in place, but I'm just going to do a quick pencil draw first.

And then you can also take another envelope and do a test run to make sure you cut it down enough so it will slide inside.

 Okay, so after you trace your template onto your designer paper, then just trim that out.

And then take your envelope, slide your designer paper inside your envelope, depending on what side you want to show out.

 And then you might want to make sure it doesn't overlap on the envelope, so you might want to just trim it down where it needs it to be.

 And then fold it over where the envelope would normally fold shut.

 Hi, I'm Nina and welcome to the Healthy Living Learning Center.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make mashed sweet potatoes with orange and vanilla.

 Four sweet potatoes roasted in the oven at 400 degrees until they're really nice and

 The zest of two oranges, a fresh vanilla bean, and a pint of cream.

 The first thing you're going to do is you're going to split your vanilla bean and steep

 I use the tip of my knife and I slice the bean lengthwise in half.

 Then using the side of my knife, I scrape out the little black seeds and put them right

 Once your cream is on the burner, you're going to get your sweet potatoes ready to blend.

 Once they've roasted, their skin should come off really easily.

 Remove the skins and place the flesh of the sweet potato into the bowl of the food processor.

 I like to let my cream steep for a few minutes to enhance that vanilla flavor.

 If your mixture is a little thick, you may need to add some more cream.

 This is everyone in my family's favorite thing on the Thanksgiving table.

 Ok boys and girls what we're going to be making is a Spanish sofrito style rice

 also I have four cloves of garlic here minced up a can of tomatoes it's 10

 ounces I think I use metric so it's actually 540 milliliters I think that's

 10 ounces anyway this size this is my phone this is the tomatoes that size

 tomatoes this is the green pepper celery onion variety you can use regular

 whatever that's just what I happen to have in my cupboard also you're gonna

 need some salt and pepper to taste a whole head of cauliflower that you've

 riced and a teaspoon of paprika okay oh also you're gonna need a little bit

 butter or oil to saute the vegetables now let's fast forward to the stove

 okay we have the oil already heated I'm using butter you can use olive oil or do

 okay I put everything in except for the garlic that goes in once everything else

 is you know pretty much done okay you want to keep doing this until the onions

 and the green pepper are translucent and I'm gonna fast forward to that bit as

 you can see now most of the vegetables have softened the onions are more translucent

 now we don't want them too too soft just yet we're just going to add in the

 garlic now okay garlic burns really easily which gives this sort of a bitter

 flavor so if you would have added in there the whole time I find that it

 gives it way too much of a bitter flavor to really enjoy now I really like garlic

 so you know now this recipe is really really customizable if you wanted to

 throw in some sausage or pork or beef or whatever you want now would be the time

 to do it I know that it's really really good with hot peppers unfortunately

 can't quite stomach them anymore okay we're just going to give that a few

 tosses just to make sure the garlic gets going in there okay give that a few minutes

 now what we're going to do from here is we're going to add in the tomato and

 we're going to reduce it a bit okay let's do that one more to serve while it's

 you can smell this oh my now one thing that we're not going to be doing that a lot of people do with sofrito is they actually blend it

 I'm not going to be doing that I like it chunkier much like myself chunkier

 self-depreciating humor now you can break those tomatoes up a little bit

 this is an awkward angle because my lighting is a little bit messed up today

 and if I stood up you wouldn't be able to see the pot so I have to sort of stay out of the way of the light while I'm doing this

 oh and one thing I forgot at the beginning I'm going to throw in a puck of stock

 these are turkey stock cubes that I made to check right here I'll give you a link to the video on how to make turkey stock

 now we're going to let this cook down a little bit the vegetables will get softer the garlic will sort of suffuse everything more

 and then we'll add the cauliflower be right back okay now as you can see the vegetables have softened quite a bit and the water is reduced a bit

 now I put a little bit of salt and pepper in to taste you can put as much or as little as you want

 now would also be a good time to have put in the paprika which when I checked my pantry had been conveniently mistaken for something else

 okay so you want to get that in there now this from here on it doesn't actually take long to cook

 okay so we'll just fast forward to that now we have the finished product and as you can see everything is nice and combined

 the rice is taking on a lovely pink color now the smell if you were in this kitchen you could smell this

 oh you would go wild it's delicious well it smells delicious it tastes delicious too actually

 but the proof as they say is in the eating okay so this has been a sofrito Spanish rice and as always bon appetit

 There's a lot of information out there, tons of our clients always, this is one of the

 Generally the answer is no, because it does create adversity between you and the dog.

 This is how personally, anybody who's in the protection world, we build aggression through

 So that's how you bring out the aggressive nature for future, but when you're playing

 this, all the owners, they don't know how to play this properly, so they start pulling

 on the dog, doing these things, making a conflict between them and the dog, they don't

 know how to play it, they try to yank it out of the dog's mouth, he lets go, they pull

 it away, they make prey, the dog starts coming after him harder, then eventually what we

 start getting, we have tons of clients with puppies that are anywhere from four months

 old to six months old, and the puppy's already growling at them, and they go near toys and

 the puppy growls, then it can start to turn over to food, so the tug of war game is a

 It gives a lot of power, and it creates a lot more prey drive when you do this, so with

 our own puppies, even my Goldens, we start to do this from day one, because I want to

 build as much prey drive as possible, but there has to be rules to the game.

 So you cannot just play tug of war with a dog and have no rules and start stealing toys

 and fighting and trying to win the toy from the dog, because now you're going to cause

 So here, with Hobbs, I just started this a day or two ago, he's got massive prey drive,

 and he does have a little issue because he is so prey driven for the toys that he does

 tend to go after other puppies that come near the toys, he becomes possessive.

 So here, with him, I'm teaching him, on cue, we can play this game, and for future, I don't

 So here, I let him have, I pull on a little bit, I make more drive, more conflict for

 him, the more I pull on it, the more I turn him on, but the game is, here, I'm going to

 relax him, let him feel good, if I ask for it, out, good, good boy, and immediately he

 And when I say okay, he can have it again, and while playing this game, here you see

 me, right, see, he let go there, so since it's new for him, and I've been adding discipline

 to this game, he tends to let go a little bit sometimes, so here, I'll turn him sideways,

 I keep the drive, he lets go, get the chase of it, get his prey going, pat him, good boy,

 like I'm not going to steal the toy from him all the time, or make him let go of it, he

 So here, when he starts getting chewy and mouthy and starts letting go, I put my hands

 on it, I let him have it, telling him that I'm not going to take it from him and make

 Touch, touch, touch, I pet, no out, touch, touch, touch, I play with him, no out, so

 I let him know, just because my hands go on it, doesn't mean that I want it, or he has

 Good boy, I'll move him around a little bit, instead of making him let go, good boy, I

 don't want him to become paranoid and lose his drive for the game.

 Okay, good, so self-control, when I drop it on the ground, doesn't mean he can go get

 it, when I tell him the okay word, he's allowed, he's free to go grab the toy again, on my

 So I control the game, you cannot let him tug a war, the dog control the game, or you

 may have problems down the road, with aggression toward yourself and your own family members,

 and while he has it in his mouth, never you do this, he's chewing on it, he's playing,

 and you go like this and try to pull the toy out of his mouth, this and try to steal it

 from him, because this creates a lot of problems with thievery, the dog thinking you're a thief,

 you know, then they try harder to get the toy every time it comes out of their mouth

 at you, and that's when you're going to start getting pursuing problems and mouthing at

 you and then eventually aggression towards you for stealing, he doesn't think you won

 it, he just thinks you got lucky and you took it, you didn't win anything from him.

 So that's why you need him on cue to let go on your command for respect.

 Hey guys, this is James Wilson with MTV Strength Training Systems and BikeJames.com.

 Today I want to share another great exercise that you can use with the sandbag.

 The rotational deadlift is a great exercise because it works on that lateral hip hinge

 and movement that we need on the bike, especially for cornering when we're leaning the bike

 over and having to shift our hips to counterbalance the lean of the bike.

 That movement right there, that lateral rotation and movement hinging at the hips is what we're

 This is one of the best exercises that I've come across to work on that specific movement

 I'm going to show you how it works, break it down for you a little bit, and then show

 What we're going to do is we're going to rotate over to one side.

 I'm going to show you a rep and then break down some of the stuff behind it because there's

 What you're going to do is you're going to rotate over to one side, bag's going to touch

 If you'll notice, I kept good position through my spine and with my knees over my feet when

 When you're doing that, you make sure you're moving from the hips, not from somewhere else.

 I'm coming over to my right foot, my weight shifts over to the right side, I'm light on

 If I've got good position here, good position through the spine, then I know I have to be

 Then you just drive your heel into the ground, back up to the top position.

 Again, rotating that other leg in as you come over, keeping the spine nice and long, drive

 You can do an exercise called shoveling, which is a more dynamic version.

 You're basically coming to one side, popping it out in front of you, and then switching

 It's a little more dynamic, explosive version of that exercise.

 Again with the bag at the bottom, bringing it up, catching it in your clean position,

 Couple good variations on that exercise, but the basic idea of learning how to rotate and

 hinge at the hip is really important for us as mountain bikers.

 Again, the kettlebell windmill is one of my favorite exercises up until this point for

 It's actually a little easier to learn and pick up than the kettlebell windmill, which

 requires a lot more core strength and shoulder mobility to really execute properly.

 Definitely something that I recommend you integrate into your training program.

 Again, I get people asking me sometimes, can I use something else besides the sandbag for

 Really this is one of those exercises that lends itself very well to the sandbag.

 The fact that you're rotating and moving the bag around the body, if you're trying to hold

 a kettlebell or a dumbbell or a medicine ball or something like that, it starts knocking

 The sandbag, the way that it moves around the body, works really well for this exercise.

 Again, I always use and recommend the Ultimate Sandbag, which is what I've been using in

 So anyways, hope you guys have enjoyed this training tip, giving you another good exercise

 Once again, it's been James Wilson with MTV Strength Training Systems.

 You can check me out on the web at bikejames.com, and I'll talk to you next time.

 I was going to try to make something with some chicken, but guess what?

 We don't need a whole lot, we're just going to make one burger.

 Right over there, I've got some butter and just a little bit of olive oil.

 Go on that little pan and we're going to saute these mushrooms up.

 Maybe I can figure out something else to do some other time with some chicken,

 I'm going to start with the mushrooms first because they'll take a little bit longer to cook than the burger will.

 And over there, I've got my cast iron with a little bit of bacon grease in it.

 Alright gang, I've got the mushrooms sitting on low in the back.

 Back here I've got me some bacon grease in my cast iron pan, which is coming up to heat.

 I want it very hot because I want a crust on at least one side of this burger.

 You don't have to do this of course, but I want to make sure I get that crust on that one side at least.

 So it might have just a little bit of pink in it, but we'll see.

 A buddy of mine, Greg McCutcheon, made a video either yesterday or the day before yesterday on some homemade onion rings.

 Now, if we can get this big ass Swiss mushroom burger cooked in bacon grease.

 I've been letting that burger cool off for about, I don't know, five or six minutes.

 Push-ups are vital if you want to build a big strong chest and nice big arms.

 Tabata is 20 seconds of work followed by 10 seconds of rest for 8 rounds or 4 minutes.

 Okay, so it's really important here that you want to be touching your chest to the ground,

 Tabata start off very easy and they become incredibly difficult.

 If you need to rest, try to just knock out one or two at a time.

 If you need to, you can take a full 30-second rest but I would try to just knock out one

 If you need to, move your arms out more wide, bring them in more close.

 We're gonna keep a neutral spine so look right at the ground, don't look up.

 And then as accessory work, we're gonna finish up with three rounds.

 I'm not sure what to call these, but they're really good for building out your core,

 It's the movement that we don't really hit very often, so I'll just show you how to do it.

 You don't want to go all the way to failure, but you definitely want to be feeling it.

 And then if those are too hard on the toes for you, you can do them on your knees.

 You're just gonna be pushing off your knees instead of your toes.

 And that whole time, I'm thinking about squeezing my core tight.

 Did you know that nine out of ten people who start an exercise routine make at least one mistake

 You can click here and learn how to easily avoid these mistakes.

 And as a bonus, I'll show you three simple strategies that will help you gain muscle and lose fat at the same time.

 And here, I got some green onion, bamboo shoot, sweet bell pepper, some onion.

 And this is the new one that I saw on the magazine, was really popular.

 It's going to be sweet and sour and tangy and spicy, everything.

 Now we're going to add some sherry cooking wine, soy sauce, some black vinegar.

 So sometimes you can steam the eggplants first to get the moisture out.

 But here, it's okay because I'm going to have a little sauce go with it.

 Wow, delicious, sweet and sour and tangy and garlicky, beautiful.

 On top, I'm just going to sprinkle some fine chopped green onion.

 I'm gonna give you some ways to tell if a Rolex is real or fake.

 If you look, if you see the gold crown thing on the top, hold on one second.

 The gold crown thing on the top, if you look on the bottom in the same slot, if it was

 Then if you look on the back, it should, right there, it says AAA.

 Then on the sides, to the left where my hand is right now, there should be a dot so you

 can put a certain tool in there to break it off and see the code in between there.

 If it's really light when you pick it up, it shouldn't be that light.

 If you put it up to your ear and you listen to it, it shouldn't make any ticking sound

 On all Rolexes you don't have to do that but from what I hear, that's what it usually

 That is all about what I would look for if I went to go get a Rolex off of someone that's

 Today I'm going to show you my range of curry sauces which are very easy to make simple

 All my curry sauces are sugar, dairy, gluten free and don't contain any added water.

 And it's lovely to go with a Matar Paneer which is the dish I'm going to make.

 While I get a few of the other ingredients ready, I'm going to add some chopped tomatoes.

 So for vegetable dishes you don't need to add too much of water but for other dishes

 If it does get thick and the sauce is reduced too much, you can add a bit of water.

 Just needs to be garnished with some coriander and ready to serve.

 We're here with Steven Schaftall today, who's a local expert on disaster preparation.

 We're here because he's going to school us on a very important issue, and that is water

 What can you do for your family if you're caught in an urban situation or out in nature

 to ensure that you've got not only enough water, but clean water to cook and drink with?

 Some of the gear I'm going to be showing you all today is really simple gear you can get

 I live in a town that's very ... We're right on a river, so it's really handy for that.

 However, it would work just fine for in your house or your apartment or whatever, too.

 Now, some of the stuff I've got today, I've got an empty just stainless steel water bottle,

 and we're going to be using for some water purification tablets to make potable water

 However, one of these, this is the purification one, and this one takes away the chemical

 This one's not necessary, but from what I remember in Boy Scouts using these, you really

 Secondarily, it's a pretty nice product called the Berkey Sport, and it's one of the simplest

 I'm going to demonstrate that in a little bit, but the filter's right there, and this

 It's a Katedon Pocket, and they advertise that it'll handle 13,000 gallons of water,

 and of course, they're probably talking about nice, clean water, not dirty, murky, mosquito,

 How that works is it uses a silver impregnated ceramic filter to move your dirty water through

 there, through pumping action, and you'll get it expelling through this top layer as

 But first, because it's going to take long, it's going to take 30 minutes to make potable

 So even though these are the smallest and easiest to carry in a gear or an equipment

 arsenal, it takes forever, so having alternative plans is always a good idea.

 It says that you're going to want to use two tablets for every one quart or one liter

 of water, and it just so happens that we have a one liter stainless steel container, so

 Since I don't plan on using these in the near future, I'm just going to go ahead and shove

 it back in there, and save them for another day when I really need them.

 That's a good idea, putting a piece of cotton in there so they don't rattle around and break,

 So we'll put the neutralizing tablets aside, because we're not going to need them yet.

 It's already leaving chemical colors in my hands, so it owes you into the whole organic

 So we'll just get ourselves a sample of some water we want to purify.

 And as per directions, you leave the cap unscrewed a little bit, so I'm only giving it like two

 Well, they want you to get the threading wet, they say, to let it soak out a little like

 I don't know the answer to that question, but I just think it's a good idea to follow

 We can go ahead and demonstrate and talk about the virtues of another device.

 This particular filter, it's not a 13,000 gallon killer filter.

 This thing will make it 640 times just filtering tap water, municipal tap water.

 But if you're into backpacking, hiking, whatnot, and you go and you fill it from some really

 stagnant, horrible sources, which I've done quite a few times, you're looking at about

 180 refills, which is still pretty good considering the filter's 15 bucks.

 Hi, I'm Heather with F Body Warehouse and today we're going to be installing a gold

 This will work for all the way up to 81, but I'm going to show you how to do it on a 77,

 The mounting stud on these is not threaded, so we're going to have to put the threads

 So take your nut and your 10 millimeter socket and just thread it on so that you can put

 And now that I've got my threads started on my stud, what we're going to do, we're going

 to go in from behind here, from behind the impact bar on the driver's side.

 We're going to set this in the hole and then come from behind and find where the stud comes

 And when you're tightening it on there, make sure that you're holding it straight on the

 Okay, we've got the nut tightened down on the stud and we've straightened it out and

 And this is a quick five minute thing to make the front of your car look really good.

 Hi, it's Brent Abel here at Web Tennis and let's talk about the high backhand volley.

 And I want to start out by kind of pointing out two sort of instinctive problems we have

 with really executing this shot to where we can really do some damage with it.

 Number one, because we're up at net and the ball is up high, it really feels like this

 And it would be if it was over on your forehand side where maybe you could really get your

 feet organized quickly, get into position where you could hit an overhead.

 And being that close to the net, you know as well as I do, the chances go way up that

 you're going to be able to end the point as a winner with your overhead.

 But once the ball gets over to the backhand side, this is really so much more technically

 And yet our mindset is still saying we've got to find a way to put this ball away.

 The biggest mistake that we make on this is we get on top of the ball too much and we

 end up getting too severe, too sharp of an angle where the ball leaves our racket.

 We're thinking, you know what, I just want to make this shot somehow.

 What I want to show you right now is one of those six fundamentals that are part of this

 And, you know, when we think about the standard backhand volley, you know, we talk about playing

 And once the ball gets up a little bit higher from say waist high where you would normally

 play a standard backhand volley, once it gets up into the high backhand volley category,

 if you play this ball at the same out in front point of contact that you would down here,

 I'm telling you, you're going to get on top of this ball and the ball is going to be angled

 too severely down into the court where it's going to bounce up and then really give your

 opponents that opportunity to be able to then take control of the point.

 What I want you to do on this high backhand volley is to think about playing the contact

 Okay, one of the six must have, got to have, vital fundamentals on this high backhand volley

 is going to be your point of contact and how it differs from a standard sort of waist high

 You know, standard waist high volley, you know, down here at this height is a little

 bit further in front than where you want to play this high backhand volley.

 I really try to feel that I'm playing it to my side and even though this is not, you

 know, literally to my side, it's just that, you know, it's slightly in front of this front

 shoulder, it feels later than where I would normally play this shot for standard waist

 high volley down here or even something down below the, down below the top of the net.

 If you get this point of contact, even, you know, let's call it four to six inches further

 out in front, if you make the contact point out in here, what's going to happen is the

 top of your racket starts to flatten out on top of it and now your trajectory is much

 It either ends up going into the net or else it's more of a, you know, angle like we've

 been talking about where you end up playing this ball short, relatively short to where

 it bounces right around the surface line of your opponent's court and doesn't really get

 that skid that you want through the bounce where it stays low, it really kind of just

 bounces and now it bounces up and allows them to be able to sort of have an easy lob opportunity

 or even worse, they can, you know, sort of tee off in a ground stroke.

 So what I want you to work on with this is playing this ball later in here so that the

 stroke mechanics really get a much better chance to be able to create that skid and

 Welcome to this episode of Outside Fun, where we'll be taking a look at black walnuts.

 The leaves are narrow and grow in pairs along the branch, one across from the other.

 The leafy branches also grow outward from a central hub, which the walnut fruits are

 It doesn't look too much like a walnut now, but that's only because the shell is covered

 They will also have a potent odor, which to me also resembles the scent of a lime, only

 In these shots, I'm picking the walnuts from the branches, but the best time to harvest

 That's because when walnuts ripen, they automatically fall to the ground.

 Once you've gathered the walnuts, the next step is to peel the outer layer of flesh from

 I suggest wearing a pair of gloves to do this because the flesh will stain your fingers

 green, and you probably don't want the smell getting on your hands either.

 Another way to tell if a walnut is ripe is by lightly pressing your thumb into the flesh.

 If it's hard to make a thumbprint, then that means it's not yet ripe.

 Peeling the flesh away should be quite easy, and after that the flesh can be discarded.

 However, I let the bag sit for a few weeks, and the walnuts quickly turned to a black

 It's best not to let the flesh turn black like this, because the juices from the flesh

 That being said, walnuts that have turned black are still good to eat, it's just that

 they may not taste as good as they could have when they were ripe.

 I peeled the flesh off, and I threw them into a container of water.

 The water quickly turned black, and I washed any remaining fibers from the walnuts, and

 I agitated the water to let the shells rub against each other to continue to remove any

 When the water becomes black, I pour it out, and I fill the container back up again, and

 If you crack the nuts open too early, the nut meat will be soft and it won't taste

 I've been told that you can keep the shells for up to a year before needing to crack them

 But I recommend that you let the walnuts sit for about a month after defleshing them.

 Here's a quick way to discover which nuts are good and which ones are bad.

 The nuts with good meat will sink to the bottom, and the nuts with underdeveloped or bad meat

 Once you've tossed the floating walnuts into the garbage, you're ready to shell the good

 I place the nut on its end, and I gently but firmly hit away at it until it cracks.

 The trick is not to use excessive force, but rather to hit it at the right angle.

 I keep gently cracking the shell until the nut meats are loose enough to remove without

 As you may have been able to tell, black walnuts are different from the store-bought walnuts,

 I found the flavor of the black walnut to taste a little sweeter and fruitier than its

 Just to show you, I cracked open the bad floating walnuts to show their nut meats.

 As you can see, the meat from the bad walnuts are shriveled and dry.

 This allowed cavities of air to form inside the shell, which is why the bad ones float.

 If you liked today's episode, anything to do with wild edibles, log cabins, or survival,

 I just remembered instead of a hacksaw I just use my cutoff wheel, my Dremel tool.

Because it's already been bent it kind of holds into place pretty well.

 Like I say I'm going to have to do some padding in here so this

 stays a bit firmer in place but you're kind of getting the idea how this is working.

 Okay now this is what I'm going to try doing to hold this thing in place.

 of my 16th inch basswood and cut a few strips, stack them up, and put them on top of this sifter

 here so when I glue this down the basswood will press, the layers of basswood will press against

 together and stuff like that but I'm just trying this right now.

So I'm going to cut the length of the basswood a little bit wider than the width of the zapper itself.

It's not going to be pretty, elegant, but it should be functional.

 screws in this should clamp down on this tight enough to hold this in place.

I'm not going to say nothing pretty but we're looking for functional here.

 Okay looking through my toolbox I found a couple of pieces of wire here.

This black wire is going to... I'm actually just going to hook this

 I've seen pictures where you take a tiny little nut and bolt and attach it on there.

 one right now but I think if I just spear this through the mesh here and pinch these shut I

 should get good enough contact for now until I can get a hold of a little nut and a little

 bolt and screw to actually screw it on here like that like this.

 quick project and one of the things I'm going to have to do is also solder this wire to this wire

 just buy wire connectors and do it that way rather than messing with a soldering iron.

 You get something like this and I happen to find these in my toolbox.

 in there, crimp it, stick the other end, crimp it, and you're done.

 All right there and this way I can actually take this and tuck this underneath right here.

 I just buried that underneath and the wood will hold this down, keep this from moving around too

And what you want to use, you want to use that, you don't want to use the solid core wire.

 about half an hour of real work on this to get this into shape so this is a really, really easy project.

 And let me say that I'm so excited to be here and be a part of this right now.

 We're actually really excited to have you because I don't know if anybody knows this

 but we're real friends in real life and I'm a fan of both your channels as you know.

 So I think she's going to bring a really amazing perspective to the show.

 I'm just really excited because I get to get my makeup done today.

 Okay so as you can see Megan is not wearing a lot of makeup right now so this look is

 To take it from like a conservative work look to a night out with the girls.

 So I'm going to start with powdering the face and I'm going to use the MAC Mineralize Skin

 So I'm going to swirl that around and just lightly dust on the areas where you might

 If you're light like me and Megan and you're going to use bronzer you want to use a really

 I don't think I own bronzer but now I feel like I should go get it.

 Because I'm pretty tan and I use bronzer every day and I feel like it makes my tan more better.

 And when you're going to do it make sure to take it down the neck so that you don't have

 And take it from like the temples like above the forehead like that.

 I like how you're doing your makeup but I'm the one lifting my head.

 So the next thing I'm going to do is I'm going to put some blush on.

 Like you said adding color to the face after a really long day really wakes you up.

 I like putting it like right at the tip of your nose here as if you know.

 So if at the end of the day you're really seeing it under your eyes brightening up that

 So the concealer that I'm using is the NARS in surprise zero zero Chantilly.

 And then you're going to take your ring finger and you want to always be really gentle because

 So this is more just kind of like wakening brightening yourself back up after a long

 day but now we're going to actually darken the look and make it more dramatic.

 By the way if you're in a crunch for time or you can't bring a lot of products with

 Some of my best like and favorite makeup looks have been with my fingers because I have so

 So I'm going to start with my finger and I'm going to dip into like a champagne.

 I'm kind of going to mix it with a little bit of white and just kind of get a nice light

 color and that's what I'm going to bring over her eyes to start with.

 So now I'm going to really darken up the outer corner by using the taupe.

 But the first fun fact is that you can't bring the lower V like past where your natural lower

 That's why when people want to have that sharp line, they put tape or they use a business

 So if you have a big brush with you, what you're going to want to do is make sure it's

 clean and then swipe from underneath your eyes and you fall out, which you shouldn't

 have a lot of if you've tapped your brush off before you put the eyeshadow on.

 I do because I use a lot of the pigment, the matte pigments in darker colors.

 So I'll just lay a square from here to here and then there's no clean up.

 Yeah, I just hold it there and do my eye makeup and then take away and then out goes the trash.

 So a good thing to do, though, because it is long lasting, is to kind of dab it on and

 maybe use your ring finger and then use some lip balm if it is too intense for you.

 If you have a lip gloss with you, you can add it, but you don't have to.

 I feel like anybody can do that because they're very simple steps that can take you to that

 In fact, I actually wrote an article that is up right now on girlsguide2.com, so go

 And I will actually be answering questions directly on girlsguide2.com tomorrow.

 We are actually going to be doing our very first live streaming Google Plus Hangout session.

 So come to the channel, leave us your questions and comments, and we'll be there.

 And Saturday we are going to be talking about what to do when you're miserable at your job.

 Yeah, and we are going to have career counselor Judy Barrow come.

 And as always, make sure you like, comment, favorite, and subscribe.

 Today I'm going to share a few things I've learnt about water marbling.

 It's easy to fail and make a mess with it, but once you know what you're doing and you've

 I screamed and cried in frustration and even smashed a cup in a violent rage.

 I use this Brita water filter that I picked up at a homeware store for £15.

 I don't measure the temperature, I just pour it into a cup and leave it to sit for about

 If you don't have a water filter, you can use bottled water instead.

 Some people say you can use tap water, but that depends on where you live.

 Some taps have water filters installed in them, which is perfect.

 My taps don't, and I live in a hard water area, so my tap water is rubbish and doesn't

 Basically, the more pure the water, the better your nail polish will spread.

 You'll usually find that the slower drying runny ones work better than the thick heavy

 If you do have thick heavy ones that you really want to use, try thinning them with nail polish

 It does work really nicely in the first instance, but it will ruin them in the long run.

 I've prepared by painting my nails white and protecting my fingers with tape.

 I'm not going to demonstrate how to put tape around your nails.

 You need to work reasonably fast, so have everything prepared and open the lids of the

 Make sure you're not near a fan, an open window or breathing too heavily because this will

 Once you find an area that you like, carefully dip your nail in face down.

 You can dip more than one in at a time if the pattern is big enough.

 Now blow on the surface a few times so you can scoop the remaining polish out in one

 The reason we have to remove this is because it will land back on your nail when you take

 And if you want to get right into all the nooks and crannies, you can use an angle brush.

 I always use acetone free remover with brushes because if you use too much acetone on them

 I ruined more than three brushes before I actually learnt this.

 If you're worried about wasting nail polish, just do it on one or two nails instead of

 I was going to leave them like this, but I added zebra print and sparkles in the end.

 So the main things to remember when water marbling is room temperature, filtered water

 or as pure as you can get it, trial and error with different colours, work quickly and practice

 Once you've got the hang of it, you can move on from scribbles and try different patterns.

 This DVD is meant to be a visual supplement to your owner's manual, so please refer to

 it throughout the setup process and be sure to keep it on hand for future reference.

 We're sure you're anxious to get your oven up and running, so let's get started.

 We think you'll be pleased on just how easy this is going to be.

 Always lift from the left and right side of the oven, never from the front and rear, and

 especially never from the door handle to avoid damage and or injury.

 Place the oven on a countertop surface at least 30 inches deep and capable of supporting

 After the oven is in place, remove all remaining accessories and literature from the shipping

 In it, you'll find one ceramic cooking platter, one wave guide cap, two Teflon screens, oven

 cleaner, oven guard, two trigger sprayers, and a wooden paddle.

 Be sure to fill out the warranty activation card in order to take full advantage of the

 Once the oven is properly positioned on the counter and all packaging materials are removed,

 To make cleaning your oven easier, we recommend you lightly coat the interior of the oven

 cavity and the inside of the door panel with Turbo Chef oven guard.

 Simply spray oven guard on a towel and wipe down the interior of the oven and inside the

 It's important to not have any puddles or excess guard in the bottom of the oven cavity.

 Next, locate the wave guide cap and ceramic platter and place them inside the oven.

 These are the soft keys, eight oval keys used for different functions, depending on what

 They're used to access the edit mode and also to move between screens.

 It's used to enter data in the edit mode and also to manually input cook times.

 It's used to move to a previous screen in the operation and edit modes, as well as to

 It's used as a space key in the edit mode, as well as to enter the number zero.

 The oven will begin to warm up to its predefined cooking temperature.

 When the warm up cycle is completed, the oven will beep and display the menu screen.

 Now you'll be at the ready to cook menu and you're all set up to begin using your new

 In the next section of the DVD, we'll discuss oven programming.

 If you need more assistance on getting started, please refer to the cooking instruction section

 Also, in that section, you will see a step-by-step guide and useful tips on editing and customizing

 If you should need assistance at any time, don't hesitate to call us at 800-90-TURBO

 We'll be glad to help you with your specific needs over the phone or through email.

 We're sure you will enjoy the advantages of our patented RapidCook technology.

 Here we have one rabbit and my game dealer has been able to take that and skin it for me

 Today we're going to be using some Punk IPA and we're going to make a Punk Rabbit Stew.

 First thing is take the back legs and we're just going to break them by hand and it's away.

 Generally on farms and things they're considered a problem and all that

 so they are a class of pest and they are getting shot on a daily basis.

 They're not subject to very strict game rules and things like that

 so you can get these like that from your butcher at a very, very reasonable price.

 Next I'll separate the rib cage and I've now separated that from the loin.

 What we'll do is we'll take the rib cage and we're going to add that into here.

 There's sort of two options at this point I do in the restaurant.

 One is to remove this whole fillet that runs along here and pan fry that.

 and I pan fry that to order with the different components of the rabbit as a starter in the restaurant.

 But the dish that I'm doing for you guys today for you's cooking at home is like a stew.

 So what we'll do is we're going to treat this almost like what you would with sort of osso bucco from a veal.

 In our stew we'll add some vegetables and just start browning these off.

 Browning the veg in there is adding the vegetable flavour and all that.

 Then we're going to add some special ingredient, the punk IPA itself.

 We're replacing punk with where you would use a white wine or a red wine in this dish.

 Because this is like a rabbit stew, it's quite a traditional sort of rustic French dish.

 You don't have to worry about how finely chopped or cleanly chopped everything is.

 When you do this dish, even the recent situation, it's got the homely, home-cooked style about it.

 Then we'll place this into a baking tray and cook this at 180 degrees for three hours.

 It saves on the washing up and it's nice to show a continental edge to things.

 You can see the bones in the middle, the meat's on the outside.

 The meat will just break away into small nuggets as you eat your way through.

 We've got this wonderful, deep, rich, tomato, punk, vegetable sauce.

 You could add some beans or some new potatoes or something, but I just find the way that that is, that that's there.

 It's super healthy, it's super lean, it's all good for you basically.

 I hate calling these Rice Krispie treats healthy, but compared to the ones with tons of sugar and corn syrup,

 All you're going to do is take a third a cup of almond butter, a third a cup of peanut butter, and two thirds a cup of rice to it.

 Brown Rice Krispies are just that much better for you than white Rice Krispies.

 I cooked it for about two minutes over low heat just to soften it up a little bit.

 It's a little warm, so you might want to just make sure that you don't get your little one too close to this.

 I like to use the rice syrup instead of agave or honey or maple syrup because it has a neutral flavor.

 And all you want to do is make sure that your Rice Krispies are totally coated.

 These are fantastic because kids love them as an after-school treat.

 I brought these over to Kenya's sports class with his friends, and not only did the kids freak out for them, but the parents love them too.

 And another great thing about them is you won't get in trouble when you bring them because they're a really healthy protein because of the almond and peanut butter, and a healthy carbohydrate because of the brown Rice Krispies.

 So the best part is you're giving your kids a healthy treat in the afternoon.

 Now you're just going to pour it into a greased 8 by 8 inch pan, and you're going to press it down.

Put a Ziploc bag on your hand like this, and you're going to squish it down.

 And so you're just going to press them into the pan, let them cool for about 5 minutes, and when they're finished, they're going to be like this!

 For more fast, fresh, and easy recipes like this and more, check out ReeLicious.com.

 Hi, I'm Andrew Barton and welcome to my salon here in London's Covent Garden.

 Today with Naomi, what I want to do is create a fantastic step-by-step for She Said Beauty,

 It's inspired by those beautiful Parisian chignons that we saw in the 40s and the 50s,

 but we've brought it up to date to give it a really modern twist.

 So I've got the tools, I've got the equipment, I've got my gorgeous model Naomi, let's get cracking.

 So now that we've blow-dried the hair through and got that smoothness and glossiness to

 the hair, I'm going to start by just pulling all the hair over to one side.

 With the chignon, we can make it as big or as small as we like.

 I want to give Naomi quite a dramatic look that she'll be able to leave the salon feeling

 very glamorous, almost like she's ready for a red carpet event.

 So we'll pull that over, and then I'm going to go in with one of the Sure-Fix Technology

 So we just get that into the hand, and you're going to secure it just into a ponytail to

 They're made out of foam and padding, and they work brilliantly.

 Look, you can stretch them, and then they just go over the ponytail.

 I'm going to start off with the first one just by using some of the Sure-Fix Technology

 grips, and we're just going to push that into the padding, into the bun ring, and that locks

 We're probably going to put four or five in, just to make sure that it's completely

 So what we're going to do is just start by pulling all the hair over to one side, and

 I'm just using my backcombing brush, because it's got those beautiful, fine teeth in the

 That's just going to help me to smooth it over a little bit more.

 And then, this is a little bit, it's not difficult, it'll take you a couple of times.

 All you're going to do is just loop it over like so, and then once you've got the loop

 in place, we're going to start putting the grips into the hair to secure it.

 So those grips go down into the padding, through the hair like so.

 zucchini or half of a large zucchini, about half of a large carrot, some white rice to

 go on the side, a sachet of the chilli con carne mix, which is egg free and dairy free

Then we have some canola oil, a tin of diced tomatoes, a tin of red kidney beans,

 they're both 400 gram tins, and half a kilo of four star mince.

Okay, so we're going to first brown the onions with the oil, we're going to then soften

 the vegetables also in the oil, then we will be browning the mince and the vegetables will all

We'll then add half a cup of water, the chilli con carne mix and everything

 and we'll let it simmer just for a few minutes and then it will be ready to serve.

 I would put the rice on around about now with boiled water from the kettle.

 It's getting all nice and brown now, so we'll just give it another minute and then we'll add

Okay, so now we're going to add the rest of the ingredients to the

It gets a bit of a pasta look about it when the meat, the colour of

So if you don't like it too saucy, you can leave it on here for a little

If you're going to add rice or pasta, do you want it runny or not?

 rice, like if you like it when it runs across the plate and the bottom of your rice is all nice and

 the sauciness about it, you can either start off with less water or you can just let it reduce for

 till now, but probably a lot of other single blokes maybe don't know how to make it or people

But I'm glad you've cooked this and I'm glad it's on the video because I can never

 remember these things, so now I can just watch the video if I want to watch, if I want to see how to make it.

 Do you eat it straight like that or do you have to add rice and pasta?

 No, you don't have to have rice or pasta on the side, but it's a little bit bland if you only

 have it, so I always put rice on the side and because I like it saucy, I always put rice on

 cook it a little longer and you can keep adding water if you don't think it's saucy enough.

 Ok, so today on Daily Face, it's Saturday and Saturdays are for when we're

 Ok, so we're going to teach you, or I'm going to teach you how to do a heel

 Ok, a heel stretch is like, it's in cheer and so, which I mean I'm pretty sure

 most of you knew that, unless you're just like weird people that just decided to

 be watching this, or girls that want to be cheerleaders, or like gymnasts or

 So I'm going to get on my phone and I'm going to try to find a picture of a heel

 stretch real quick, so I can show you guys and then I will show you how to

 So um, first, like a heel stretch, you just like take your foot and you bring it

 like, I will show you the right way to do a heel stretch and the wrong way to do a

And um, yeah so I'm looking for a picture right now on my phone and

 I'm like, I'm really sorry that it's taking so long because my phone's being

 whatever leg you're most flexible with, that's the leg you want to do it with.

 don't do heel stretches at my school, but I do a heel stretch, I stand on my right

 stretch, right, like when you, hold on, I need better adjustment.

 stretch, like, let me see if I can, okay, um, whatever leg you pull up in the front, once again, you're

 going to want to like, not this far out, but you're going to want to stick it out, you're um, going to halo

Like, um, when you're standing, let me set this against the wall so you can just see my feet.

 Alright, um, guys, it might be hard to hear me for a couple minutes, but I'm going to get it to where you can just see my feet, so the position you're supposed to be in.

 Alright, so um, you won't be able to hear me, but you're going to stand straight and squeeze and lock out very, very, very tight, and um, then you're going to do what I do with my feet.

Alright, so that's what you're going to do before you do a heel stretch.

And when um, you do it, you're just going to stand there, lock it all out, put your foot out, you can't see my feet right now,

 but I'm holding it out, and then swing it, kick it straight up to the front, and pull it.

 So um, that is the proper way to do a heel stretch, and I'm really sorry that I was all shaky and stuff, but I promise it makes you gain your balance, and um, I had to do, um, last, um, like I'm really sore right now because Thursday I had cheer practice,

 and then I had to go to Oxford Cheer and Tumble to take my tumbling lessons, so um, like, just, I'm sorry about me being all like, um, sore and stuff, I think I can pull it a little bit higher, like maybe like right here, I think, but I'm so sore right now I just can't do it.

 Um, and the wrong way to do a heel stretch is when you sit down like this, alright so ready, like, you're just sitting here, and on your bed or whatever you're on, and then you think, ooh I'm going to do a heel stretch, and you think, well, I can do it the same way, I'm just sitting down.

 So you think that you're going to pull it up, but really, do you notice what's going on here?

Um, my tumble teachers tell me that when you're tumbling, you never, ever, ever want to pike.

 Alright, um, unless you're a flyer, like me, and when you cradle, that is the position that you hit, you must pike in order to land correctly.

This is the only time you should ever hit this position, is when you are cradling.

And if your skull just cradles, if your skull just walks down, then you don't have to worry about anything.

And um, so before you ever do a heel stretch, you also want to do a lot of stretches.

I have another video called cheer stretches, you can go and check that out, and you can walk through those stretches as I do them, and you want to hold them for at least 30 seconds, and then you can try to do anything like um, like toe touch, heel stretch, pike, scorpion, um, scale, bow and arrow, anything.

 Um, I might show you guys my scale and scorpion another day, but um, right now we have family that's coming, um, that came down from Alabama, and so like we're doing a lot of stuff today, but I might just show you all that.

 Now um, I told you I was going to show you the wrong way to do a heel stretch, this is the wrong way to do a heel stretch.

And then just go, never just like do that, because if you try to pull it up really really fast, you're going to get unbalanced.

The correct way is to do the up, and you always want to bring it towards your face, and then slide it to the side.

And then um, but before you slide it to the side, you always want to lock your legs up.

So um, I hope this video is going to help you guys, and um, keep watching.

 So we'll go ahead and take this top piece off and this screw out.

 Now the old ones are not bearings, they're just pieces of solid metal.

 As you can see, I went ahead and put the rear carrier on back on the axle.

 Hi everyone, it's Shirley George-Fraser and if you've been having problems with shrink

 wrapping, I've got a method for you that I know is going to work.

 Shrink wrapping is a popular way to close a gift basket and we're going to see how it's

 We're going to take a shrink wrap bag that you can get in many, many arts and crafts

 stores, some retailers that actually sell items for gift baskets.

 The shrink wrap bag is fused on three sides and has an opening at the top.

 This heat gun happens to be 1200 degrees in temperature, I believe, but a heat gun you

 Now, I didn't buy mine from that store, but I've heard that they are very low, so try

 From here, you will place it underneath the gift and bring the shrink wrap up.

 After you bring the shrink wrap bag up, you want to make sure that the items in the gift

 are still in place so that the shrink wrap, sometimes the shrink wrap brings the items

 From here, you take a twist tie, sorry I didn't show this to you before, twist tie, bring

 Alright, we're cooking, well we're designing really, we're shrink wrapping.

 From here, you have your gift in the bag, you're going to take your scissors and snip

 two really small holes into the shrink wrap in the back at the bottom.

 That allows the air in between the shrink wrap and the gift basket to be released so

 From here, we take our heat gun and start to shrink the shrink wrap.

 Turn your heat gun on low, hold your shrink wrap out from one side, let me do it like

 Now that the shrink, and it'll come in and shrink, and you want to pat the shrink wrap

 Go to the other side, so you want to shrink wrap the two 90 degree edges first so that

 And as it shrinks, you pat it to the side so that it is in place.

 You can see also that the heat gun is about six inches from the shrink wrap so that the

 You can see that this is also on a Lazy Susan, but if you don't have one, it's okay.

 Turn the shrink, the heat gun, around and around and from the front and the back of

 As the shrink wrap is heated at the bottom, you keep bringing your shrink, your heat gun

 When you shrink the wrap where the wrap is really on top of itself, folded on itself,

 you put your fingers through the folds so that the shrink wrap does not heat on itself.

 Continue to turn your shrink wrap and your gift basket and continue to heat the wrap.

 If you do get some shrink wrap heating itself, pull it off of the fold and then heat the

 Continue to bring your heat gun up and around the gift so that you heat it properly.

 After the shrink wrap is heated and shrunk all around the gift, then the shrink wrap

 If you need to pull the top of the shrink wrap down to heat it, do that so that this

 You also want to make sure that the bow looks correct on the gift.

 You also cut some of the top of the shrink wrap so it's not as tall.

 And even if you are a perfectionist like me, maybe you see a little bit more that you want

 But this has come out super clear, wonderful on the sides, all nice.

 So glad that you joined me for this quick shrink wrapping tutorial.

 I know that it will make your gift baskets even more gorgeous than they are now.

 Visit me on GiftBasketBusiness.com for more ideas on gift baskets.

My name is Jeff Black from Black Salt Fish Market and Restaurant.

 We're going to be performing a series of videos teaching people how to purchase, handle, clean, cook, and fillet assorted fish and seafood.

 Our first in our series is going to be at the fish market with our fishmonger, MJ Gimbar.

 Every day I come across fish that is beautiful, and there's the fish that remain here at Black Salt.

 And I come across fish that is not so beautiful, and those are the fish that go right back out the door.

 Now I'm going to tell you a few rules, rules of thumb that you can go by so that you can be the judge of your own fish.

 Well if you come here at Black Salt, you don't have to worry about that.

 But if you go elsewhere, you might want to follow these few simple rules.

 And when you're looking at whole fish, you're going to first notice the scales.

You're going to want all the scales held tightly together, no chipped away scales.

 And you're going to want a nice sheen, almost like the fish just came out of the water.

 Concave eyes are a sign that the fish has been out of the water a little too long for you to take home.

 Next we're going to look at fish that have already been gutted but are still whole.

 If the fish has been out of water too long, the blood in the bellies have dried out.

 So you're going to be looking for blood in the bellies that looks like the fish has just been caught and just been gutted.

 If there's any off odor to the bellies, you should not get this fish.

 If ribs are broken, if broken the skin of the belly and your whole fish has been gutted,

 then that means that fish is most likely either old or has been mishandled.

 When you go to look at a fillet, you want to look at the bloodline.

 On the ends of the fillets, there should be no off color or no hard bits.

 If there's hard bits or off color to the ends of the fillets, that means that fish has been out way too long and it is dried out.

 Another thing you want to look for on whole fish is a little bit of gleam, a little bit of slime.

 That means that he hasn't been sitting on the docks for three days waiting to be bought.

 Come by here to Black Salt and we'll put you on some really nice stuff.

 I'm going to make some hot dogs today and they're Cleveland hot dogs.

 So the first thing you want to do is you want to slice your hot dog a little more than halfway

 And we're going to roll the bacon around it, kind of at an angle.

 Next I'm going to make four hot dogs and I'm going to put these in the refrigerator

 so that the bacon kind of firms up and the cheese does as well.

 I'm only going to fry two at once because I don't want the oil to go down in temperature

 Next what you want to do is, I did put my buns in the oven and warmed them up.

 I'm Daniel Holm, I'm the chef of Eleven Madison Park here in New York.

 A Coq Au Vin is a braised chicken in red wine, one of my favorite holiday recipes.

 Here we have the chicken broken down into eight pieces, four pieces of the leg and four

 And what we're doing now, we're just going to put it into a pot.

 Then here we have vegetables, celery, carrots and onions and garlic.

 And now we're just going to cover the chicken and the vegetables with the wine.

 What we want to do now, we want to use a meat fork, get the chicken out.

 So here we have the chicken, we have the vegetables and we also have the wine separate.

 This will help to give the chicken a nice color when we saute it.

 Now we're going to add back the vegetables that we used in the marinade.

 We have a little bit of chicken stock and it's going to go in the oven for about one

 Here you see the sauce is nice reduced and it added some nice shine to it.

 The red wine is rich and you get the flavor of the chicken and the vegetables.

 I hope you will enjoy this recipe and I hope it doesn't look too hard and you can do it

 So basically, in order to play outside, you've got to come from inside.

 Well, if you look at the scale, there are seven notes in the scale.

 So one method is just to use as many of those notes as you hear

 Now if the bass note, if it's the bass player and he stays out here,

 And the subtleties of playing outside mean that you don't have to use

 So now we're going to say, how do we play outside over progressions,

 Now with the C major 7th, you might want to put a sharp 11 instead,

 I'm going to take the notes that are outside of the C major scale

 which are still going to be these notes, C sharp, D sharp, F sharp, G sharp, and A sharp.

 So if I was going to play, if I were to play inside on this 2-5,

 I'm going to have some, put in some of these other notes that aren't in that scale,

 So again, it's just a matter of experimenting around and seeing how far out you want to go.

 Bill Evans once said, I don't want to deprive you of the opportunity to find these things.

 So the way you're going to find things and become an original jazz player is to take these concepts,

 figure out how you want to utilize them, and make them your own.

 Hi, I'm Joella and this is Cannon and we're going to show how to do a bat carry with an

 It's similar to a Mei Tai, except that instead of tying at the waist, it has two rings that

 When you're doing a bat carry, if it's new to you, and any time I'm doing something new

 to me with a bat carry, I always do it either with a spotter or with a soft surface behind

 I have my nice, coochie couch behind me so that if something should go wrong and I would

 need to drop him or he were to fall, he would just fall onto the sofa.

 A sofa, couch, or a bed or something like that behind you in case needed is always a

 To start, I'm going to tilt this down so you can see this a little bit.

 I'm going to start with the carrier centered at his back and with the straps under his

 I'm going to put that at his back and bring the straps under his arms.

 So to do that, you cross your arms to take your baby's arms and your opposite arms.

 So then, I'm keeping my hand on him here and get that strap through there.

 So now, I'm going to hold tight on the straps on each side so that I keep the tension on

 So I'm going to pin these straps now down between my knees to keep the tension on them

 So to make the seat with this carrier, similar to a wrap, I'm going to reach between us here,

 grab these rings, and pull up in between us to make a little seat for him.

 Then I'm going to leave one of these straps pinned between my legs.

 I'm going to pull this strap straight down and thread it through this ring.

 For me, it's just about to where the padding starts that works well.

 So now I'm going to pin this one again down between my knees and work with my other strap.

 So you just kind of bounce and pull on these straps to make sure it's nice and tight.

 Then from here, you can just tie it off at the waist right here.

 It doesn't work the best for me because of the way my shoulders are.

 So I take the strap up across my chest, and I like to spread them across my breasts.

 If you don't have wrap straps or if you don't like to do that, then you can just bunch it and pull it across like that too.

 So I'm going to take it up and across this strap and then pull it back through.

 If you have fabric that's grippy enough so it's not going to slip, you can just kind of let that hang.

 If you let go of that and it starts to slip, then you'd want to pin this one either down between your legs or if it's not long enough, you could pin it under your chin.

 So again, if the fabric that your carrier is made out of is grippy enough that it's not going to slip, you can just leave these tails hang like this.

 Or what I like to do, and if your straps are long enough you can do this, is just take these back behind us and tie them under his bum.

 That just gets them out of the way and gives a little bit cleaner looking finish in the front there.

These are placed really nicely on us so that they don't dig up into my armpits or anything.

 That's going to vary based on your size, your baby's size, and the way the carrier is made.

 So I didn't trim them up nearly as much as I usually do at competition.

 But what I will do, and you'll see later on, these chicken breasts after they've been marinating

 I trimmed off a little bit on some of them, but not a whole lot.

 And then I sprinkled them with some Mojo Rub Original Seasoning.

 And then I'll roll them a bit, tuck them under to put them on the grill and barbecue them.

 Before going on the grill we'll check in with the finished product later on.

 The skin, which I'm hoping is going to be really good bite through.

 I don't go for crispy necessarily, just as long as it's bite through.

 Once we get it in the bath and then get a little soft glaze on it towards the end, it'll

 Alright, since these practice cook offs are the time to practice some new techniques or

 new recipes or what have you, that's exactly what I'm going to do.

 I'm going to put a little butter on there and a little bit of honey as well.

 And I'm also going to add just a little bit of brown sugar to it as well.

 Then I'm going to wrap these ribs up and stick them back in the smoker to get almost all

 And then wrapping them inside this foil is going to help them steam just a little bit.

 And I don't want them to fall off the bone so we have to be careful how long we keep

 Not going to add any other moisture besides what we did right there to them.

 What I've done to them so far is simply marinated, well not really marinated, more of a, just

 let them cure with some mojo rub and a little bit of mustard on it overnight.

 And they've been on the smoker since about 6 o'clock this morning.

 It's now 1020 in the morning so they've been on there for oh, four and a half hours or

 And we're not really on a time schedule like we normally would be at a competition here.

 As I mentioned earlier a couple of certified barbecue judges will be here.

 But they'll be coming in after they get out of church so a little bit before noon.

 Because I'm cooking a lot more pork than I normally would at a competition.

 At the end of this next week I thought I'd go ahead and get that knocked out of the way as well.

 Time wise the pork's just a little bit behind but really not too bad.

 Boy all three racks have some really good color on them already.

 But this is just going to help add a little bit of moisture to it.

 Now one thing that I'll do, and I don't know if I'll get it on the tape or not.

 But after these have steamed for a little while I will take them back out of the foil.

 And I will put them back on the smoker just to help firm them up a little bit.

 So many restaurants serve them that way but in competition cooking that's really overdone.

 So we don't want to have them so tender that they're just falling apart.

 We want to be able to get a nice clean bite through on the ribs.

 When a person bites into them they should basically leave their teeth marks on the bone.

 So with a little bit of doctoring, a little bit of love added to it.

 Just waiting for the water to reduce a bit and I'll add the onions and we'll brown the

 It's really important that the spices cook otherwise you get that, just that yucky raw

 Now we've just let the mince come down a bit so it's not so hot, it's just been cooked.

 That's a lot in that wrapper so moisten it so it's nice and moist.

 You run your fingers, see it changes colour, the wrapper, because it is wet.

 Pinch opposite corners in the middle and just pinch them and run your fingers slightly

 Bring this over and just pinch it slightly just over the top of that.

 Try to keep the top not as thick so that it doesn't take as long to steam.

 So what we do is we will place them gently, not touching, in the steamer and we'll leave

 And you'll see the pastry will become translucent and then we know they're steamed.

 And the next thing we do is we garnish with just a hint of yogurt, it's moist at the top.

 I will show you how to make very easy, very quick, delicious cucumber kimchi.

 This what I'm showing you now is a very easy and quick recipe that anyone can do.

 After we press the cucumbers we use spring onion a little bit and sprinkle over the pressed cucumbers.

 The sauce we make from the previous kimchi we can use for cucumber kimchi as well.

 What you do now is you just help everything over the cucumbers.

 It's more red and the longer you keep the more color it will develop.

 Garlic taste blended with ginger, delicious juice from the kimchi.

 Get more recipes about kimchi and other delicious healthy meals.

 So today I'm going to be installing STRC's Red Aluminum Rear Hub Carriers, also known

 Alright, so this time we're just going to go ahead and cut into the bag, since I already

 And of course they do include the bearings, which I'm also going to have to cut open.

 Well, now that we got it out of the bag, let's go ahead and get these installed.

 Alright, so the first step is to go ahead and remove both rear tires by undoing the

 Alright, once you get the tire out of the way, it's time to go ahead and remove the

 Now I have the STRC Red Aluminum one, so I'm going to have to loosen this grub screw and

 If you have the stock plastic ones, you're going to have to use a flathead screwdriver

 Once you get that out of the way, you can go ahead and pull out the axle pin, followed

 First I have to remove this screw that holds on the top of the camber link, as well as

 Alright, once you get all that out of the way, you're just going to go ahead and pull

 We're not going to need those, so all this is just going to go into my stock pile.

 First step is I need to go ahead and insert the bearings that they included, put one on

 each side, and now I'm just going to go ahead and slide that onto the tip of the driveshaft,

 push everything down, line it up with the top hole, then I'm going to go ahead and insert

 So what I did with the top screw was I replaced it with one that was 20mm long.

 With the extra length, I was able to put a 3mm nut at the end of it.

 This is going to hold on a lot better than just the screw alone, and I don't have to

 With that being said, next up I need to go ahead and put on the Teflon washer, push that

 all the way down, then I'm going to go ahead and get the axle pin, slide that in, make

 sure it's even on each side, put on the wheel hex hub, tighten the grub screw, and then

 Now I never have to worry about these axle carriers ever again, because believe me guys,

 on the Stampede, breaking the axle carriers and steering blocks is an easy thing to do.

 But now that it's aluminum, not going to be such an easy task anymore.

 figures, but these two I've pretty much figured out how to combine them into a new

Now, first what you want to do is take Hot Rod out of the way for a minute

Now Optimus, what you want to do with him is take his backpack down

 and then you want to twist his head just like that, then fold it down.

 out these panels, or car doors, then you want to twist his arms like that, and then

 his backpack around, just like you're going to his car for him.

 have Hot Rod's panels, or I don't know what you call them, but down just like that.

 You can catch the next episode of Vets Safari on Wednesday 8.30pm on BBC One.

 Time now for Lazy Brunch with our guest chef Bryn Williams and our new kitchen boy Gareth Gates.

 Northern dishes, I'll ask you a bit more about that in a second.

 We're going to make a lazy brunch, very very simple, very very fast.

 We're going to do pancakes, then we're going to roll them in creme fraiche smoked salmon.

 So it's like a sushi of smoked salmon with some lettuce leaves.

 If you like smoked salmon, it's a real bit of a hangover cure really.

 So first and foremost we're going to flour in a bowl, in with the eggs.

 Then we're going to beat the eggs into the flour and add the milk.

 But we're going to let this rest for about, I don't know, at least twenty minutes after before we cook it.

 Because as you whisk it all together now you create air bubbles, and you want the air to come out.

 If you had a lot of air bubbles in it, the pancakes would rise.

 So you're good at making breakfast in bed for your lovely lady?

 And here we have one that's only rested for a good twenty minutes.

 A little bit of olive oil, you need a little bit even though it's a non-stick.

 So can you still do the whole like, tossing them in the air and stuff like that?

 Yeah, but I often buy the pancake mix which makes things easier.

 Sharp knives are the key, because if it's a blunt knife, you're always quite willing to cut yourself.

 See, there's going to be no excuse for you not getting in that kitchen now.

 You know when you were teaching Sarah to get the vanilla pod, that was just such a huge knife with such a little tiny thing.

 For this, it's fantastic because you can have long movements with it.

 With a palette knife, we're just going to spread the pancake with the creme fraiche.

 A bit like butter, a little bit thicker, you can put your butter.

 So can you use any other ingredients for this to put inside the pancake?

 You could put creme fraiche, or you could put more of a cheesy kind of creme fraiche into it.

 And then you're going to roll it up like sushi and then cut it.

 The next thing we're going to do, we're going to season it with pepper.

 We're not going to put any salt into this because smoked salmon can be salty sometimes.

 If you put the lemon now, it'll start to break down the smoked salmon.

 Now, if you fancy trying a hand at making any of today's dishes,

 After removing all dust I sprayed the nails with IBD prep and then I use a

 lint-free wipe to rub it in the nail and then I am using prep DX from NSI to

 going from cuticle to free edge making sure that you get every bit of the nail.

 Going around the cuticle with a rosewood stick this ensures that there is no gel

 With a dotting tool I pick up the red glitter and I place that on the upper

 left corner going to the middle bottom part and I just fill that area in to

 If you must perfect your line go in with your gel brush and then let that cure

 On the other side of the nail I do the same with gold gel but I'm not going up

 Again if you must perfect your line go ahead and do so and then let it cure for

 With IBD builder gel clear I am placing down a thin coat and then I just go

 ahead and fill it up with all those strings to create a smooth surface.

 I dip my brush into the gel and pull it up to create a string then from free

 edge to cuticle I go from left to right with that string to create a smooth

Then later I am going back over it to create thickness and if you must

 go to the sides to create an even more smoother surface then do so.

 When all ten nails are done I use a lint free wipe and non-acetone nail polish

 or anything because it is the same thing as nail polish remover.

 the sidewalls and free edge and this is to make sure that there are no scratchy

You can shape the nails and buff it later but because we had a really

 smooth application and the nail was really smooth itself we don't have to do

To finish off the nails I am going to put a thin coat of Orly glosser and

 this is a very shiny top coat and this will make it shine even more.

 Last but not least you have to revitalize those cuticles and I am using

 was inspired by Krista Bell Nails and I'll post a link below to her tutorial.

 Next with Liquid Palisade I apply it to my cuticles for a quick and easy

Once that is completely dry I'll take the large size nail dotting tool

 and I went over the dots to make it a little bit bigger and then I'll apply

 the second caterfoil pattern and I'll repeat on the side only doing half of

 Now with a smaller size nail dotting tool in the same color as the base color

 I'll go inside which makes it a little bit smaller and I'll do that on top of

 liquid palisade for a quick and easy cleanup and last apply a top coat to

If you recreate this look don't forget to tag me on Instagram at

 You're going to, this one is a walk from G into C. You can do the same thing moving it,

 starting it on the fifth string and moving it up to the fourth string.

 you did from G to C is the same for C to F. And I'm in F, so there's my four notes.

 Two, three, four, now I'm into F. Now you can do the same thing for other chords.

 Hi guys, welcome to Nigerian Food Channel, it's your boy Franklin

 I've been at this project now for about 3 months and I've been working on it pretty

 Sometimes though it feels like there's so many things to do you're just never going

 But I'm at the point now where everything is coming together and soon this project is

 The nice thing about this route is that I'm not worried about how exact my measurements

 are as long as there's enough space for the claw and springs to work properly.

 Just like in the last video I use scrap wood as my temporary template.

 For this guitar I wanted to incorporate a goalie stick into the back.

 Because the goalie stick is a different size and shape it had to be added after the clamping

 Then a trench the same width as the goalie stick was routed into the back of the guitar

 Just like the other sticks the goalie stick had to be trimmed on the sides and bottom

 With the router bit in the drill press I slowly trim the back of the stick until it's the

 The middle piece will be the access cover for the spring cavity and the other 2 pieces

 The body is clamped to a sliding jig at about a 75 degree angle.

 Using the sanding barrel I shape out the belly cut into the back of the guitar body.

 To figure out the position of the electronics cavity I start with the volume pot and switch

 Using a half inch MDF template I route out the top part of the cavity.

 To clean up the edge I use a router bit in the drill press set at the highest speed.

 One of the interesting design challenges was the contour around the neck plate.

 And with the addition of the goalie stick that added about another 1⁄8 of an inch.

 Thinning down the heel was mainly done for better playability, but ended up being a visual

 This is still in a very rough stage and will be finished by hand sanding.

 The excess of the goalie stick is trimmed off and the heel is shaped with the barrel

 To drill the hole for the input I use the drill press and clamp the body to a large

 Drilling the holes for the bushings is a lot easier than you might think.

 I pre-drill holes into a cut off piece from the body and test fit the bushings to make

 Figuring out the position of the hole is as easy as holding the bridge in place and marking

 Deep grooves from the sanding barrel had to be sanded out with a variety of sandpaper

 Sanding blocks helped to smooth out uneven surfaces and a hollow sanding barrel worked

 Trimming the narrow radius on the edge of the body was all carefully done by hand.

 What started as a 10 pound blank is now a 5 and a half pound guitar body.

 Some are solid wood, some are made out of thin layers, some have fiberglass for reinforcement,

 Every angle and curve of the body creates interesting patterns and designs.

 Some sticks have minor imperfections that just add more character to the overall look

 Check out my channel, subscribe, and feel free to leave comments.

 In this video I want to discuss the top five styling mistakes you make with your natural hair.

 Mistake number one is washing your hair with hard water but you fix this by infusing moisture into

I will be using Bikura Dew Handheld Steamer and I'm telling you guys,

To conquer this hair right now I'm going to fill the reservoir up with

Distilled water has no minerals in it so it's going to be perfect for your hair

 and what I'll do is section off my hair and use the Kira Dew to mist moisture into my hair shaft

 and because I'm missing the moisture into my hair shaft it leaves my hair moisturized.

 still very dry to the touch so I am not working with wet hair here.

 moisturized and I want to seal in that moisture that I've just put in there with coconut oil.

 Now the coconut oil will keep the hard water from penetrating my strands and since color treated hair

 is already prone to dryness I don't need anything else trying to dry out my hair.

The next mistake we make is tearing through our hair with combs and you can

 fix this by gently detangling your hair from tip to root preferably with your fingers.

 to use the Kira Dew in this sense because it does have these fingertip like prongs and it has been

 making my detangling sessions much more easier because it loosens all the tangles with the

 moisture and all I have to do is use my fingertips and the Kira Dew to detangle my hair so it's just

So prior to shampooing my hair I've been doing two things that are new.

 the Kira Dew to impart moisture into my hair shaft and I've also been sealing that with coconut oil

 so that the hard water cannot penetrate my strands all while detangling.

 Mistake number three is skipping out on deep conditioning and you fix this by deep conditioning

 because like I said color treated hair is prone to dryness so I apply a generous amount of deep

 conditioner making sure to coat all of my strands and because my hair is already separated

 and detangled it's very quick and easy for me to just put that deep conditioner all over my hair

 making sure I coat every last strand and paying close attention to my blonde ends because those

And considering I have a steamer now I like to use the steamer in conjunction with

 a cap and just steam my hair for a little bit maybe five to ten minutes and then I cover my

 to necessarily have big hair just from heat styling so you can air dry your hair or you can

 and then I apply the heat protectant section by section making sure I coat every last one of my

This is important because heat can fade your color and it can also damage your hair if

So here you see me unraveling a section applying a generous amount

 of heat protectant finger detangling my hair because I am not going to use a comb attachment

 but I am using the concentrator attachment to concentrate the air while it moves down my hair

While applying slight tension to your hair you are moving the blow dryer down the hair shaft

You're going to twist that section up once you're done and you're going to repeat the

 process all over your hair until all of your hair is blow dried.

The goal of this is to have my hair dry so that I can move to the next part of my

 low manipulation styles that are like twist outs, braid outs, roller sets, something that doesn't

 bit of foam just one pump for each section just to moisten my hair and I'm rolling my hair on

My end goal is to achieve a pillow soft roller set that will allow for me to wear my hair

 a few days without touching it without having to manipulate it and because I infuse so much

 moisture in my hair I shouldn't have to moisturize my hair for a few days which is great.

 So after all of the rollers are installed my hair looks something like this and it only takes two

 hours max for my hair to dry and I don't have to sleep in these so that's always a plus.

 done what I had to do and gotten ready I will fill around just to make sure my hair is dry and then

My hair is very soft, my curls are popping and I really don't have

So once I unroll every last one of the rollers and I do mean every last one of the

Let's see I forgot one there and it's right in the front too so how did I forget that?

 take everything out of my hair I will separate all of my curls and make it as full as I would like.

 I think installing the style on dry hair gave me extra fullness because I didn't even have to reach

I know, gasped because everybody who's been following my channel knows that I pick my hair

 like it's nobody's business but I didn't even have to use that.

 bit of hairspray just to make sure that we're good and I'm going out like this.

 Mistake number five is not using water as a primary source of moisture and we fix this by

 refreshing our hair with water and or using water-based products.

 go in moisturize those cuticles again and my hair will still be dry.

 without having to apply any additional heat or having to compromise moisture for a hairstyle.

 So for my refresh all I'm doing is just adding a little bit of butter or cream or whatever styler

 that you want to use, twisting it up and applying a roller and I'm doing that all over my hair.

 You can wait a few hours or you can sleep with this overnight and in the morning all you have

 to do is take down the rollers and the twist, fluff your hair and you have a beautiful refresh style.

 My hair is incredibly moisturized and along with being moisturized it is still very much stretched

So I didn't have to apply any additional heat to keep it stretched and I know

 that I will not have to put my hands in my hair for another few days.

 top five mistakes you're making with your natural hair and five ways to correct them.

Don't forget to like, comment and subscribe and until next time fam, peace.

This nice, soft, wonderful, and oh so tasty bread that's great for eating anything.

Well yes, I do have a pita bread recipe and it's a traditional recipe where you make it in the oven.

I like this recipe because you can combine a lot of different herbs and spices and flavors with the pita bread to make your own version of it.

 Now if you want this recipe or any of my other recipes, make sure to check me out on my website at DoodyMed.com.

You can also find me on Facebook, Twitter, Tumblr, Pinterest, Google Plus, whatever social network you're on, I'm sure I'm on it too.

If you don't have the packets, it's about a tablespoon of active dry yeast.

Now I'm just going to let this sit for about five minutes so that the yeast activates and then we're going to add the rest of our ingredients.

We're going to add about half of our flour and then we're going to start our kneader.

 We're going to add some salt to this and we're going to add some olive oil.

 Now if you wanted to add some spices to this or if you wanted to add some, say, rosemary or thyme, this is when you would add it.

 So we're just going to turn this on and let it knead for just a few minutes.

And while it's kneading, we're going to slowly add the rest of our flour.

 What I'm going to do, I actually want to just pour a little bit of olive oil in here because I'm going to keep the dough in the same bowl.

 And I like to actually cover it with a blanket or a towel as well.

 Let it sit for two hours and then we're going to come back and make our pita bread.

 I made some earlier so I can show you guys how to make the pita bread.

 If you want a different version of this recipe, check out Chef Diane DeMeo.

 But we're going to get back to rolling out our pita bread and then we're going to cook them in the skillet.

 So all you really need right now is just some flour and a rolling pin.

 You want to get some flour on your hands just so that it doesn't stick.

 And now some people like to roll it out and then cut the dough into equal pieces.

 What you want to do is you just want to kind of fold them in like that, slightly kneading them.

 I like to put a little bit of flour on them just so they don't stick.

 And then we're just going to roll them out to about a quarter inch thick.

 So for this part, all you need is a nice, I like to use a nice thick iron skillet.

 So, and I brushed it with some olive oil, some extra virgin olive oil.

 You want to cook it for about two to three minutes on each side.

 Every now and then, you'll get a nice big bubble to cause a pocket in your pita.

 If you want to heat them up, just like we cooked them in a pan,

 I figured what the heck, even if it's Chinese it's worth a buck.

 So I'm going to clean this up, put an edge on it, and put this brand new ash handle on

 It's not a brand name, it's just a mom and pop that has every little gadget and widget

 I could just spend hours wandering around there looking at stuff in that hardware store.

 I'm going to have to put this on the grinder because this edge is so bad.

 It's got so many deep gouges and nicks in it that it's going to take some pretty drastic

 If you do have to put an axe on a grinding wheel, you want to be very careful about keeping

 And if it loses its temper, it won't hold an edge for very long.

 So I'm going to have a bucket of water right next to the grinder and I'm going to grind

 a little bit and then dunk it in the water, cool it down, and grind a little bit and dunk

 And when I get a workable edge, then I'm going to take my brand new mill file and put a real

 And I may even take one of my stones here and give it a good surgical edge.

 Even my wedges, I don't know if you can see that, I'll take this out.

 Well I've rubbed on it a little bit with my Dremel and a little sanding, a little drum

 Just makes me mad as hell to see somebody have a good tool and to not take care of it.

 So I'm going to get a little bit more aggressive with my angle grinder and see if I can't knock

 If I can bring this down to the bare metal, I'll have to keep it covered in oil or spray

 But I'm going to work on it a little bit more, try to clean it up so I knock some of them

 I got the tip of that thumb cut off in a hydraulic shear when I was a kid.

 And I've had some people make comments about the one and only video I did that my thumbnail

 And I had like 7,000 views on that particular video when you would not believe the amount

 I got the first three fingers of that hand mangled up pretty good.

 That finger there was hanging by a thread and I had neurosurgery done.

 Occasionally a piece will come out and I take my Dremel tool and smooth it off a little

 bit so it won't hook on my pocket when I reach in for my keys or something.

 But I've had people ask questions about my screwed up hands, my screwed up thumbnail

 Okay, I hit it with some primer black just to keep it from rusting.

 I'll let that dry and put my new handle on it and I'll have a German steel axe for about

 And when I get that wedge in there, the wooden wedge, I'm going to put a couple of these

 That way it spreads the handle this way and the metal wedges spread it that way.

 And since I recently did a recipe for the ultimate brownie, which is somewhat improved

 by adding ice cream and hot fudge sauce, I thought this was the perfect time to do this.

 The ingredients are a quarter cup of cocoa, a third of a cup packed of dark brown sugar,

 That's light in color, although you certainly can use the light in calorie.

 And we're going to be using six ounces of good bittersweet chocolate.

 And we're going to cook this over medium heat until everything is melted.

 Obviously not only good on brownies, but on a hot fudge sundae, over a piece of pound

 If you have some pretty jam jars, save them when they're empty and pack them up with some

 We're just going to stir this until this chocolate is all melted.

 Our sauce has come to a boil and at this point we're going to turn the heat down and let

 The sauce has finished cooking so I'm going to add the remaining three ounces of chocolate,

 two tablespoons of butter, which I've cut into smaller cubes, and a teaspoon of vanilla.

 And we'll just stir that until the chocolate has melted and the butter is incorporated.

 You can buy this in a jar, of course, at the supermarket, but trust me, it won't be the

 All that remains is to ladle some of this wonderful sauce onto our ultimate brownie

 The rest will be stored in jars and we'll keep in the refrigerator for a week, if indeed

 For further information and even more recipes, please visit my website.

 I'm back with a great exercise for delts that may be underused or at least

The reason we use cables is it's a great way to strategically vary the

 is you can immediately see the force angle, right, because the direction of the cable is

 So the angle that that cable travels in is actually the exact force angle.

 and I want to make it really difficult at the top of the range, like way up here.

 So now I can strategically vary exactly what part of the range is overloaded.

 And as you all know who follow my stuff, you want to overload the short end of the range first,

 then the mid or lengthened range, depending on what you prefer.

 I usually prefer to overload the lengthened range and then the mid range.

 this way, we can actually come way across our body and still maintain tension in the chest.

 And if I step this way, now I'm overloading the mid part of the range.

 I just overload that muscle at all points of its strength curve in a matter of one set.

 So keep this in mind guys, when you're doing these exercises, how you position your body

 So knowing how to strategically vary, knowing how to strategically design a workout

And I'm here to teach you guys that stuff at the MI40 University.

 Hello, Darren Steen from Major League Health and fatlossliceall.com.

 I'm so excited today in my basement to bring to you our No Equipment Needed at Home in

 And I want to apologize for the lighting, but we are in my basement, but this exercise

 It's going to be what you do first thing in the morning two to three times a week.

 First we need to set up by showing you what proper form is on a squat jump.

 So squat jump means exactly that, but I want you to get in a middle linebacker type position,

 get your muscles nice and tight, rotate your hips and get your buns back behind you.

 The reason why I'm standing this way is I want to make sure as you squat down like you're

 sitting in a chair, your weight's on your heels and your knees don't buckle in or they

 I'm going to turn to the side because the key, get in your middle linebacker type position

 and you need to rotate your hips and stick your buns out the back so that when you squat,

 it's like you're sitting in a chair and your weight's going through your heels.

 What we're going to do is I'm going to explain it first because it's going to be so taxing

 that I'm not going to be able to talk to you afterwards, so the video will end at that

 But what we're going to do is we're going to do squat jumps up our steps and then once

 we get to the top of the steps, we're going to do 10 squat jumps at the top of the steps.

 And then we're going to come back down and we're going to do one more set.

 Entry level is skipping one step or if you're very entry level, maybe it's just doing a

 Skipping two steps would be intermediate and skipping three steps would be advanced.

 Now, what we want to do is in the morning for 15 to 20 minutes, go to bed early, wake

 But what I need you to do is go up, come back down and go up a second time and after that,

 you're going to walk around the top level and you're going to catch your breath and

 Now, remember, 10 squat jumps at the top of the stairwell to finish off the stairs.

 Then that's set number two, walking around, relax, catch your breath for three, four minutes,

 whatever it takes to feel really good again and then you do your third and final set.

 This is going to be amazing at how cardiovascular it is and it's going to be some of the most

 If you haven't been working out or very active, go into this very easily.

 Maybe just do two sets of one repetition versus my recommended three sets of two repetitions.

 I'm going to perform one cycle and that will be the end of the video because I won't really

 And remember, any time that you're going to radically change your waistline, your lifestyle

 and your life with our proven plan of attack, it's going to be a three-pronged approach.

 The exercise that you get, the foods that you eat and the thoughts that you think.

 All right, come with me over here and I want you to check it out.

 After this, I'm going to walk it off, catch my breath at the top of the steps and relax.

 In the future, if you want more at home, in office, no exercise needed, videos that you

 can do and radically change your body in only 20 minutes of exercise three times a week,

 Also remember to refer a friend to our program and get our valuable $19.99 video absolutely

 Your leg cardio routine that you can do at home, no equipment needed.

 Get to your level, start out, skip only one step, intermediate two, advanced three.

 Hi, I'm Mike with Cloverleaf Racing and one of the common questions I get is how to glue tires to wheels and today

 One of the main advantages of doing this is to eliminate wheel hop from tires coming off the wheels

 It's a little more flexible than your average super glue, and it has carbon inside it

 If you run higher rpm motors sometimes your tires can expand off your wheels

 I take my 1422 super tire, and I'm holding my four fingers like this and kind of open it up

 Or make sure it's on well, that's why I have the paper towels cut into squares to take up any extra

 Means you'll get all the squeeze out in the back where you'll never see it

 You want to be extra careful never to get any on the tire itself.

 We recommend you use an IC 2000 tire glue because it has a carbon compound which keeps it more flexible

 Again you take the tire squeeze it on you'll see they slide right on

 You have to take a needle or a small drill bit and find where the set screw is

 And then approximate put a hole in it CBD makes a really nice mark on the back so you can see exactly where you're

 That allows you to get into your hole without enlarging it too much

 The process we're doing here can be used on aluminum or plastic wheels

So maybe you guys have seen my planner doodles video, maybe not.

 But the point is, in this video I'm going to show you how to draw a beaver doodle

 And actually, you could probably turn this into a squirrel too, and I'll show you how to do that as well.

 And you'll need a good eraser, which this one on here is pretty good.

 This reminds me of drawing Hey Arnold, except he has a football head.

 For the body, you're going to draw an oval again, but you don't want to draw the entire thing

 Three little spiked triangles for the little hair at the top of the head.

 Then a beaver's tail is thin at the base, and it comes out to be a really thick, rounded shape.

 I kind of think of a tennis racket when I think of a beaver's tail.

 Three little dots on each side of the nose for the little whisker area, or just to look like freckles if you want.

 Draw a little half rectangle for the teeth and put a line down the middle.

 Before I get to the coloring, I want to show you how simple it is to make a beaver into a squirrel.

 So pretty much, this is the exact same thing that I did for the beaver.

 And the only difference, pretty much, with the squirrel is the tail that you're going to draw.

 I'm using Crayola Super Tip Markers, but you can use crayon colored pencil or whatever you want.

 I'm using this tan colored marker here and I'm just going to color in pretty much all of its body.

 And sometimes I go over the outlines with the colored marker I'm using just to emphasize the lines.

 I'm going to go over all of the lines on the tail because then you'll be able to see them when you color in.

 I'm going to use this brown to color in the tail so you can actually see the lines more.

 The final step is to color in the eyes, emphasize the eyebrows if you want, and color in the nose.

 Remember not to color in the little white highlights on the eyes.

 That will give your doodle more character, more animation, make it look more alive.

 Here's the squirrel all colored in and I just added a little bit of grass for it to stand on and a couple of acorns.

 Here is another type of squirrel you can draw and it's super easy.

 Then this is the little stomach, just like a little cloud shape.

 A triangle for the nose and a little curved line for the smile.

 Two triangles at the top for the ears with two tiny triangles inside.

 Two little half circles for the hands, two half circles for the feet, and a puffy tail.

 Finally I'll show you really quickly just how to do this squirrel.

 Just to give you guys some variety and a choice of what you want to make.

 For the face, you're going to start off in a half circle, but you're going to add two curves to the bottom.

 Bring this line up a little to form the nose, which is a little rounded triangle.

 You're going to do a half circle down here and another tiny half circle here to form the mouth.

 Actually I'm going to turn this one's body around just a little bit.

 And we're going to add both of the hands instead of it like flipping off to the side.

 Let me know what other things you'd be interested in learning how to draw.

 Just keep in mind I get a ton of requests so I can't get to all of them.

 I like to push mine over to the side there so the other one sits in there nicely.

 That's our shawl, it's going to look like half a granny square or a triangle.

 Now I need to put in our chain 1 because we're going down the straight here.

 I don't know about where you live but in Australia it's starting to get quite chilly now.

 We have a chain 1 and we're back to the edge here so we've got another space.

 I want to work 3 trebles into this edge space and a chain 1 and then 1 more into that same space.

 Remember if you use a double crochet you do 1 less chain on this part here.

 A, cause it was requested, and B, because I need to make a base of a skirt for my Halloween

 So as I've mentioned a bunch of times, this is gonna be my Halloween costume, and this

 So what I'm gonna do is use muslin, which is just really cheap cotton.

 That's gonna be under everything, instead of doing like a fashion fabric on the inside

 and using a lining, which is what most of you will probably take from this.

 So keep in mind, when I'm telling you to cut out all the pieces, if you're doing a lined

 skirt, just cut everything out twice, and then add the lining to every step you're doing.

 Oh, that's why it was hard to pop off, because it's a twist-off.

 You're gonna need a zipper, some fabric, any kind of non-stretchy cotton, like medium or

 You also need a sewing machine, matching thread, and a ruler, especially like a grid ruler

 Gritted paper will be super duper helpful for this, but if you don't have it, just like

 any piece of paper, because you're gonna want to make a pattern.

 As you can see, this pattern doesn't look like a full skirt shape, it's just a quarter

 So to get these lines with your own measurements, here's the math you have to do.

 So, once you get this all cut out, you're gonna want to lay it on fold on your fabric,

 so it'll be doubled up, and keep this straight edge on fold for the front.

 So you're gonna cut it out, and then that'll open up to be like double this.

 And then move it away from the fold, but still keep the fabric doubled up, and cut out your

 Although when you get to this straight edge, you want to add 5 eighths of an inch for seam

 allowance, because you're gonna be putting a zipper in the back, and this is gonna be

 One that looks like half a skirt, and two other pieces that when put together, will

 Next you're gonna put your two back pieces right sides together, and on that straight

 edge, you're going to do a basting stitch, just like a really wide, long straight stitch

 And then once you get past that point, I made a little mark just so I would know where

 You can switch it to a smaller straight stitch to do the bottom half.

 Once that's stitched, you're gonna press that whole seam open with your iron, and take your

 Hand stitch it down, and then sew down both sides, and make sure you go across the bottom.

 Now this looks like a total mess, but I did the basting stitch first, and then did the

 straight stitches, which also aren't perfect, but this is all getting covered up with fancier

 You guys better do it fuckin' perfect, or else I'm comin' for ya!

 Okay, so, as you can see, I did my basting stitches with a different color thread just

 to make it that much easier to just pull all of it out, and know that I'm not leaving any

 Once those stitches are pulled out, you want to go ahead and just between the seams that

 you just made for your zipper, you want to open up those initial machine basting stitches

 Next you're gonna take your constructed back piece, and put the side seams, right sides

 together, both sides, and do a straight stitch down the whole thing.

 You're just gonna measure around the top of the skirt you have now.

 The width will depend on your preference, but I'm gonna be doing like 3 to 3 1⁄2 inches

 Once you have that cut, go ahead and cut a piece of interfacing the same size, and fuse

 So to attach your waistband to the skirt, you want to open up the zipper a little bit.

 I'm folding the short ends of the waistband over about half an inch, and then folding

 that whole thing in half, and then facing the right side of the skirt, so the outside,

 put all the raw edges together over here, and then just do a straight stitch around

 Alright, I forgot to mention this at the beginning of the video, but you are going to need a

 hook and eye closure for the top of your waistband, since you already sewed in the

 A little bit bigger of a gap here than I wanted, but I'm gonna be wearing a striped shirt under

 I am done this skirt, as far as what I need, but you guys will probably want to hem the

 bottom, just fold it over once or twice, and do a top stitch around the whole thing.

 Hey guys, this is my breadstone and I want to illustrate her hair with a flat iron.

She is used so I just brush her but it's not the result which I want to.

 I want her hair pretty straight so I have to straighten it with boiling water or with a flat iron.

 A brush, a comb if you need a scissor and a flat iron which you can manage the heat.

 Really hot so what you're gonna do is take your bread or you can do it with any other dough.

 Brush her hair really really well so there are no knots or something like this.

So now I've brushed the hair and as you can see it's really puffy and I don't want this much puffy.

 But if you don't know if the hair melts which I don't know because I didn't try it before.

 I'm going to flip the hair over and take a section of the back so that you can't see it when if it melts and you have to cut it out.

 So you can clip or bend or hold it away the hair so that you have just a piece or you can take a little piece if you want.

 So what you're gonna do is spray it with heat protector spray and then I will show you after.

It will be really... it feels like it is silky but I don't wash it out because if you use it or brush or something it will go out after a while.

 You can start from the back but I just take a section from here.

 So just hold it in the air and then the hair will go through really fast.

 And I sprayed the whole head so that I mustn't spray the hair every time.

 But make sure that every hair is with this heat protector spray because the hair will melt really fast.

 And yes, you can see it's really not curly but it's wavy and these kind of waves don't look good.

Today I thought that instead of recording a solo or musical piece, I'd

 talk to you a bit about warm-ups and lip slurs and lip trilling and things like that.

 I'm not a real expert, but I've had a bit of practice at these kinds of things and hopefully

 on the first and third valves, and I'll just demonstrate that in a second.

And you can go up the chromatic scale doing that, playing in D, playing in A, playing

So the next step is from G sharp to C. And you can try slower than

 that or faster than that and gradually as your stamina improves you'll be able to play

 next step is to try to play two intervals, two intervals each of a major third from G

 And logically the next step is to take in the next interval, but as we get higher the particles

 become a little narrower so the next interval from D to F is only a minor third.

 And going up and down, so we get a group of four notes up and three coming back.

 Another important feature is that you should try to avoid moving your embouchure or your head.

 Try to keep the movement in your facial features as small as possible so that you can actually

 move between the intervals or the particles without too much movement.

 And following on from that you can actually do complete two octave arpeggios starting on the low F sharp.

 That's taking it to the high D. I don't think I really want to go a great deal higher than that today.

 So that's basically the range of arpeggios that I've been working on.

 You can actually do multiple arpeggios, so just as a demonstration, four of each,

 I've got a little bit of water stuck in this third valve that I need to get rid of.

 OK, so moving on from that, the next logical step is to look at lip trills.

 Now, I use these as a tool, not in performance generally, but as a tool to strengthen the muscles,

 So, the first note I want to demonstrate is from F to G using the first finger.

 I doubt whether I'll get a bit more than about three notes above that, but we'll give it a go.

 That's probably about my limit at the moment, but I have only been back in practice for about three months.

 I hope this has been informative and you'll be able to work on these

 and interesting to hear your feedback and how you're going with it.

 You don't need an ARVN tutor for this, just a knowledge of the chromatic scale and the intervals.

 Be careful that when you're doing the arpeggios that you make all the particles sound.

 Thanks for watching and listening, and I'll be back soon with hopefully another solo in a couple of weeks.

 In this video we'll be putting the Blaze Professional Series Grill through its paces with some steak,

 I'll start by testing the searing power of the Blaze Professional with the French Rib

 With all burners set to high, we're pushing 66,000 BTUs of heat.

 And from the looks of the vapors rising from this steak, we're in for a beautiful sear.

 The hexagonal shape on the cooking grids allows for more surface contact of the outside of

 the food, providing even more caramelization than traditional rounded grates.

 Now I'll throw on some pork chops spread out across the grill so we can check out even

 I'll give the crust a half turn and let it go a couple more minutes.

 After it's been on for a couple minutes, we'll give it a little half turn.

 For more information about Blaze Grills, please give us a call or check us out online today.

 I'm Chef Tony Matassa and remember, at BBQGuys.com, we smoke the competition.

 The Jacob's ladder is basically a cabled or a knit stitch that will bring these two stitches

 So what you do is you just take your crochet hook and insert it under the first two loops

 and then you just bring the second loop underneath the first loop and then you go underneath

 the third loop and then you just pull that through the second loop or the one that's

 on the hook and you just keep doing that all the way to the top and that will create your

 Okay, and then once you get to the top, you just want to remove the hook and then you

 just want to put a safety pin or a stitch marker into the loop so that it doesn't unravel

 Okay, so now that I have all the loops pulled up, what I'm going to do is I'm just going

 to work my edging around it and I'm going to work a stitch into the loop so that it

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to work one slip stitch right into the loop and then

 I can remove the stitch marker and you just keep going with the edging.

 Okay, now when you get to the bottom of it, you want to close these gaps up as well and

 because I'm using double crochet stitches as my edging, I'm going to work a front post

 triple crochet around these two loops right here and that will bring them nice and close

 So to do the front post triple crochet, you just yarn over two times and then you bring

 your hook from the front to the back around the first loop and then from the back to the

 front around the second loop and then just yarn over and pull it through and you should

 have four loops on the hook and then just yarn over and pull through two loops three

 I'm just going to work right up to the gap there and then I'm going to yarn over twice

 and then from the front of the loop to the back and then from the back to the front and

 So today we'll be making another Portuguese recipe and this time it is a Portuguese custard

 tart and it is very traditional and renowned all over the world and in Portuguese they

 And there are many different recipes for this, some harder than others, but the one I will

 be showing you today is one taught to me by my teacher Nino Guitart and it is a more simpler

 but very effective and very good recipe and we thought this would be a better one to start

 Right, so the recipe method will be divided into two stages, first starting off with the

 dough, the puff pastry, and then moving on to the custard cream.

 Right, and here we have butter as well as margarine kneaded together and divided into

 three and this will then be used for the dough once the puff pastry is made to cover the

 Right, so now for the custard cream we have whole milk, plain flour mixed with a bit of

 corn flour, sugar, and egg yolks, though some people prefer to include a whole egg inside

 So, I'll just start off, you pour in some of the water into the middle and with your

 And now to add some flavor to the custard we cut some melon skin into the milk and a

 Back to the dough and we'll be making the puff pastry in the Portuguese style as there

 Some people make it folded in threes, others they make it like a book, but we'll be using

 Right, so now you roll out the first layer as far as possible making sure you keep a

 Now you take the first portion of butter and margarine and using a spatula you're going

 to spread it all over the top layer, however, avoid the borders.

 Right, so now you divide it into three sections and we're going to do what in Portuguese they

 So now we have the puff pastry in the shape, so it doesn't need any greasing because it's

 So you dip both fingers into the water and then you open the shape.

 The bottom is thinner than the top and you use one thumb for the bottom and the other

 Preferably, you should then leave this in the fridge for about an hour because this

 will then strengthen the puff pastry and also later on after cooking it will make it crispy.

 For the custard cream, we have here the egg yolks and then you add them into here and

 Here's a technique, you pour it into the funnel which is covered by your finger.

 So now you place the pasteschnate into a preheated oven of maximum temperature for about 20 minutes.

 The hotter the better basically as the dough will become crispier, the cream will become

 a better color and more traditional which is darker and it will cook quicker.

 Just sprinkle some water in between and this gives it an extra shine.

 Right, so now the pasteschnate are ready and I recommend that if you ever go to Lisbon,

 you should go to Boulogne because there you will find the original and popular pastry

 If you haven't done so already, it's a good idea to memorize the note G and the note F,

 and that's easily done because G lives on the second line up from the middle, and F

 What we're going to do with those is we're going to use them as a starting point for

 So you can see that it's got treble clef and bass clef, and it's got notes written on lines

 So you can print this, you can find it online at Learn Piano Betty Lessons, and we're looking

 at this first group of notes, and we can see that there are four of them before this bar

 So looking at the first group of notes, it takes us into the second measure now.

 And if we still look at that second line, we'll notice that the notes in this measure

 So we learned before that notes on the piano have neighbors that move by step, and if one

 So you can see that the note that's in space two is one note higher than G. G is on line

 two, one note higher is A. And also relative to this G line, we could draw a note in the

 So referencing the second line G, down one note is F. So now looking at this line of

 music that's written here, we can see that there's a group of four notes on the line,

 on line two, a group of four notes in the space above line two, and then a group of

 So that would be the note below G. Here's G, the space note below G is F. So what I

 can do is I can play through this, now I know what is going to happen, so I'm going to be

 I'm going to read this group here and I'm going to play it with a nice steady beat.

 One, two, looking ahead at the next group, I see four notes, looking ahead, and looking

 So the way this works is I'm reading four notes here, they're all on line two, four

 notes here in space two, four notes back on line two, and then I'm holding this note that

 So I'll just play that again in case you didn't see it the first time.

 We've got G, two, three, up one, A, two, three, down one, G, two, three, down one, F, hold,

 So using just that note G, we were able to play this whole line of music that used three

 The other note that I showed you was your bass F, which is down to line two in the bass

 clef, and knowing, referencing this line note F, we're able to also read the note above

 F, which is a space note, and the note below F, which is a space note.

 So looking at the piano, here's my F line, the note above F will be G, and the note below

 F, two, moving down, space, two, three, four, line, two, three, on the line, one, two, three, four.

 So we've now read two lines of music, and the only note we needed to reference in the

 treble clef was G, and the only note we needed to reference in the bass clef was F.

 So if you'd like to print this off, you could practice it yourself.

 You could start this off with third finger on G, moving to fourth finger, back to third

 You could start the same pattern with your fourth finger on G, moving up one, moving

 Because this music doesn't tell us what fingers to play it with, we should experiment with

 So we can start with thumb, and then two, back to thumb, two, three, four.

 Now we can also start this with finger two, and we could start it with finger three, or

 So today I'm here with Ash and Charlie from Charlie's Crafty Kitchen and we felt like

 We're dressing up because the girls are doing something pretty cool on their channel.

 So if you guys want to see the frozen popsicles that the girls have done, I'll leave the link

 Okay, so the look that I'm wearing today isn't actually one that you see Anna wearing through

 And I'm going to do the actual Elsa and Anna look on the two girls, Charlie and Ash today.

 So if you want to see that video, I'll leave the link in the description box below.

 Okay, so to do this Anna from Frozen inspired look today, you'll need the following things.

 Some white eye prime, a bright purple eye shadow, a dark purple eye shadow, a dark blue

 and a light blue eye shadow, a green eye shadow, a gold eye shadow or a gold liquid eyeliner,

 a black pencil eyeliner, a black gel eyeliner, some black mascara, some sticky tape, some

 Okay, so your first step is to take your white eye prime and apply a good amount over your

 whole eyelid right up to underneath the eyebrow and blend it out using your finger.

 Next, take a small piece of sticky tape and line it up with the angle of your lower water

 Once you've done that, take a little bit more white eye prime and apply another layer, blending

 Now take your dark purple eye shadow and a very thin brush and apply a line following

 Once you've got that line nice and dark, take another brush and apply some more dark purple

 Take your white eye prime once again and use it to get the edge of that purple line really

 Once you've done that, take your bright purple eye shadow and apply it over that whole white

 First use a large brush and then use a smaller brush to get right up nice and close to that

 Now I'm going back in with my dark purple and making that line really really dark and

 defined and then I'm just going to use that same brush to blend the dark purple upwards.

 Now use your white eye prime to apply a thick line above the top lash line and end it in

 a large flick that stops at the same point as the eye shadow stops.

 Once you've applied the line the whole way across, go over it a couple of times extra

 with the white eye prime because you don't want to be able to see any purple through

 Now take your gold eye shadow on a thin brush and pat it across the white eye prime.

 It's important that you pat it otherwise it will rub off the white eye prime that you've

 Now take your black gel eyeliner and apply a very very thin line just above the top lash

 Peel off the piece of sticky tape and then we're going to apply another piece of sticky

 tape leaving a small gap between the gold and the new piece of sticky tape.

 Apply your white eye prime in between that gap as well as underneath the lower lash line.

 Apply your green eye shadow to the inner corner of the eye and about one third along the white

 Apply the light blue eye shadow to the middle section of the white eye prime and apply the

 dark blue to the outer section of the white eye prime as well as up the flick.

 Apply glue to your false eyelashes and then apply those to your top lash line as close

 Okay and there we have our completed Anna from Frozen inspired eye shadow tutorial and

 if you would like to see the video of the delicious Frozen popsicles that the girls

 made, click on the link here and if you want to see the video of the girls and I doing

 our Frozen dress up play around, you can find the link in the description box below.

 And I hope you guys enjoyed this look today and if there are any looks that you would

 like to see, just leave me a comment down below and I'll do my best to create them for

 As you may know, the light will come with the inverted polarity.

 So it means that you absolutely need to use the USB charging cable provided.

 So if you want to use some extra batteries from another brand and so on, you will need

 So the basic mod to do, given by the FC group member, is to first swap the rotate by 180

 degrees connectors, like this, and also to swap the two batteries in this mini GST connector

 As you already noticed, a drill hole in the top canopy part to install the antenna vertically.

 So when you remove the prop guard, you have a space between the upper part of the motor

 So don't tighten your screw too much because you will probably introduce some stress in

 So maybe you can use a very thin part of paper or plastic to make a kind of spacer if you

 And now it will be much more easier to access to the connector.

 And after, you can just pull it with hand, invert it, and reinstall it by pressing.

 So be aware, in theory, you just need to pull up the plastic part there.

 So use maybe something not metallic to pull out this plastic legs here.

 OK, I will use this very thin twizer and some magnifier to raise the pad.

 So you have to, while raising the pad, try to pull out the, for example, the black wires.

 OK, just a fraction of second in order to... when both will be removed.

 So now you can do the other one more carefully, well, without risk.

 So to be sure which sense is it, for example, take the quad and...

 the accessory, and you can see you have a mark of the port, OK, on this Nano.

 So it means that your connector, now you invert it, should be installed like this, OK?

 So to be sure, you have to have the plus on the left and the ground on the right.

 I'm Tresemme stylist Tyler Lysol, and I'm going to teach you a great look for the office

 Take small sections at the crown of the head and use a teasing comb to create a little

 A trick that we like to use on the runways to get the tease to stay longer is we use

 Once you've completed your tease, we're just going to gather all of the hair on top back

 So now that we have our ponytail secured, we're going to take all of the hair beneath

 the ponytail, we're going to gather it, and we're going to wrap it around the base of

 So now we're going to roll the ponytail back to the base of the head.

 Once you've completed your roll and everything is tucked in nicely, we're just going to finish

I am on this really fun trip with Clinique learning all about their makeup

 And I actually am here with Lawrence Close, who is a makeup artist, and he's going to tell us all about contouring

 Lawrence, so I feel like contouring is one of those really scary things where people

 Just have no idea how to do it, and it's a little bit intimidating

 I think the thing with contouring is you have to be subtle about it

 And you have to choose the correct color and what you want to do is basically you're trying to create a shadow

 Or your blush and a color that is either a soft brown or a dark grey

 So just a slight shadow color and the main areas to contour are

 Accentuate the peak and then you just mix the two on the back of your hand and then you'll contour in

 down through there and each side and then actually you can also get a little bit of either plain powder or a little bit of

 Ivory eyeshadow and just run it on the top there and it's got to be subtle it doesn't want to be too obvious

 The other points of if you have quite a broad forehead and you want to wear hairstyle where your hair goes back

 And then again you just go along the hairline and basically you're just shortening out

 The same thing with your cheeks if you treat your cheek like a box and you have this is where the light will hit

 Also sometimes if you're a bit strong round shadow you want to soften your jawline

 Again along the jawline and sometimes just on the edge right up to there

 Yeah because sometimes I feel like when people hear the word contouring

The last class we're doing in the GAPS diet series class is a class on

 children's nutrition and we want to have a good option for dessert for the children.

 actually cacao, which is raw chocolate on this recipe, which technically isn't GAPS

Natasha Campbell McBride says on the full GAPS diet that if you tolerate

Once you're on the full GAPS diet for a period of time, you can start to

 add in a few foods and just make sure that you tolerate them okay.

 really careful with because honey is recommended on the GAPS diet.

 The problem with honey is that so many companies out there are selling honey and they say up

 and it's too bad because honey is a very medicinal healing food that's been around for thousands

So make sure you get a good quality local raw honey maybe from your local farmers

 Like I said it's not technically recommended on the GAPS diet, full GAPS diet, but if you

 by itself, but it's one of the highest sources of magnesium of any food in the entire world

 of the highest sources of arginine which is very good for the heart and the cardiovascular

There's a whole host of other properties in cacao that are extremely healthy and beneficial

 other companies that have sweetened it or added any kind of sugar or anything to it.

 The next ingredient we're going to do two teaspoons of vanilla.

 stevia if you wanted as well or totally stevia if you were staying away from sugar completely.

 The one third to one half cup of cacao depending on how rich you wanted it.

 vanilla and the one cup of nut milk, almond milk, coconut milk or like I said if you were

GAPS again really encourages just sticking with fruit and honey.

That's the way God made sugar in its natural form and it's delicious.

 Hello everybody today we're going to be doing cucumber and tomato chips and I

 will use olive oil and a lot of spices and we're going to cook these up and

 instead of going to the grocery store and buying a fatty bag of potato chips

 we're gonna have something really healthy cucumbers and tomatoes and we're

 going to turn them into chips and they are going to taste very good with the

 nice spices off so first we're just going to start cutting them up into the

 thinnest little slices we can get with a old rinky-dink knife we don't have any

 fancy gizmos here we're just doing it the old-fashioned way try to get these

 pretty thin but they don't need to be real thin because we're gonna first

 we're gonna bake these then we're gonna broil them and get them really nice and

 crunchy and then you will have a very healthy snack to eat when you are

 this is an organic tomato some people don't care about it but I like organic

 stuff the next step we're going to do is we're gonna brush each side of the

 cucumbers with olive oil don't want to overdo it with this olive oil I found

 that out because a little bit goes a long way so it's just kind of a tedious

 little process right here what kind of olive oil are you using this is

 filippo barrio extra virgin olive oil it is extra virgin olive oil I like extra

 virgin olive oil and you usually want to see a brown tint to the olive oil what's

 the brown tint mean that it's really fresh it's the real deal you don't want

 any processed olive oil I'm putting oil on the olive oil on the tomatoes both

 no I've forgotten I should preheat the oven because it needs to be up to for

 baking these it needs to be up to about 350 and then after they bake for about

 20 to 30 minutes we're gonna throw them okay one more tomato slice on here but

 we got to add our spices first so that'll be we've got plenty to do okay

 okay we're going to preheat the oven to about 350 now while we're waiting for

 the oven to preheat to 350 degrees we're going to start adding our spices

 we've already put the olive extra virgin olive oil on then we're going to start

 with the pepper sea salt of Italian spices and this actually has all the

 good stuff in a basil rosemary thyme oregano and sage and then garlic powder

 too so we're just going to add this now so that's our next step and we'll start

 we'll just add a little garlic powder first sprinkle the garlic powder around

 the dish the cooking pan I mean okay now the Italian seasoning which is our sage

 our basil rosemary thyme oregano this really makes this stuff taste really

 good they actually taste better than potato chips so there's no excuse to go

 to a grocery store and buy a bag of fattening potato chips anymore when you

 know that this is available this is a healthy alternative now we just add a

 little sea salt don't want to overdo it with this now a little black pepper

 I kind of like a little more pepper than salt everybody has different tastes

 and that's a good thing about this you can season it to your own desire you

 don't have to settle for what they put on the potato chips or on the Doritos

 kind of get tired of that stuff after a while you can make this taste a little

 bit different every time you make it alrighty folks our soon-to-be tomato

 cucumber chips are ready to be put into the oven it is preheated to 325 degrees

 and they are just ready to be baked and then broiled so we will see you in a

 little bit bye guys come out much better okay so now they've been baking for

 about almost a half hour 25 minutes so we're gonna clear that and now we are

 going to switch to broil so this will give them a really nice crispy texture

 so here we are broiling them now now this takes about three minutes or so but

 I would eyeball them you know just just go about what they look like you'll

 you'll see when they start browning the more brown in the crunchier they'll be

 so that's up to the individual person okay so folks these are about ready now

 so we're gonna take them out be sure to wear your oven mitts because this is hot

 there they are those will be our chips after they cool down you need to let

 them cool down for say 10 minutes or more so once you take them out of the

 oven you can let them cool for about 10 minutes or so some people like to let

 them cool even overnight so they'll be nice and crunchy either ways and very

 healthy too okay so I let them cool for just a little short period of time and I

 am now ready to take a taste test this is the cucumber mmm very good I'm gonna

 try a tomato now this see mmm much better than potato chips hope you

My name is Brenda Davis and I'm co-author along with Fasanto Molina

 about my favourite breakfast and then I'll talk about some other even simpler breakfasts

 really all it involves is you take your sprouts and this is probably a half a cup of sprouts

 and you soak them overnight and then you drain the water and you take your jar and you just

 you can actually slow the sprouting process by putting your jar in the fridge.

And so also in here is some frozen berries that I've just thawed.

 I live in the Okanagan Valley so we get a lot of wonderful fruits here.

 and I will just sprinkle probably a quarter cup or so of these sprouted grains.

 really likes something a little more substantial so I make a cooked intact whole grain cereal.

 So I use the very same grains I use for sprouting like oat groats and spelt or kamut.

 the neat thing about this is a lot of people say well granola is so high in sugar and oil.

And so I blend that up in a food processor and that's my liquid ingredients.

 So that you can make your sprouted buckwheat granola or your oat granola that way.

And then the other source of omega 3s that are tremendous are ground flax seeds,

 the other thing I always love to add to my cereal is at least one Brazil nut.

 know this but one Brazil nut provides almost double the RDA for selenium for the day.

 about 100 micrograms of selenium and all you need is about 55 micrograms a day.

And sometimes I will make homemade yogurt or homemade pear cashew cream to put on

So in a cup of soy milk you might get six or seven grams of protein.

 of rice milk or hemp milk or coconut milk or almond milk you'll probably get about one or even

Sometimes I make homemade almond milk for a treat because it is absolutely

So if you prefer you can have rice, hemp, coconut, almond milk, whatever

And I actually keep it in the freezer and just take out little bits at

If you want a fast and easy breakfast and you prefer having toast and peanut butter, I just

The heavier your bread, the lower the glycemic index on the bread.

You know the rule of thumb with bread, especially if you have diabetes,

 is you should be able to stand on your bread and it stay intact.

 one thing that I would suggest is having some sort of vitamin C source with that breakfast.

 that will help with the absorption of iron from your breakfast.

And if you don't have time for that, you can always have a little bit of juice too.

 Although again, that increases blood sugar much more rapidly than if you ate the whole fruit.

 other thing if you really want to get some calcium into this breakfast, which is a really good idea,

 same amount of calcium as a half a cup of fortified soy milk or cow's milk for that matter.

Probably the easiest breakfast of all is to do some sort of smoothie.

 green smoothie or a smoothie for breakfast and then have a protein-rich food because her blood

She likes to have a really high protein sort of mid-morning meal like lentil

 some good ideas for breakfast and I hope you enjoy your breakfast.

Today on the show we will be continuing our butternut squash series

It is warm, it is light, it is inviting, it is sweet, it is almost a dessert, but it is really

 We are going to start this recipe by heating up coconut oil in a large pot over low heat.

 Add in chopped onions and let them saute until they are translucent for about 5-10 minutes.

 While they are doing that, we are going to go ahead and prepare our butternut squash.

 Today I am using a potato peeler instead of a knife, even though I think I prefer the knife because I felt like I had more

 control over peeling the skin, because it is still a tough skin.

 My second tip of the day is putting a damp towel underneath your cutting board.

 I didn't do this today, but somebody left a comment yesterday saying that would give me more control over the cutting board.

So just keep your fingers out of the way and do the best you can

 possibly do to cut the butternut squash into 1 inch square chunks.

 Once you have cut it open, you will find a surprise down in the bulb of the squash.

 I am going to scoop those out, put them in a separate dish, and refrigerate them for tomorrow.

 Add your chunks of butternut squash to the pot with the onions and then add in your liquids.

 I am adding in almond milk and then I am just going to fill it up with water until the squash is covered.

 You don't want it to spill out like mine is about to do, so use a larger pot.

 Bring your soup up to a boil and once you have the boil established and everything is rolling,

 Now we are going to transfer the butternut squash to the blender as well as some of the liquids to make sure everything mixes nicely.

It is going to take a while to get everything down to those blades

 and have it all liquefy, yet be smooth and all one consistency.

 And while the butternut squash was blending, I decided to boil the liquids that were left in the pot to reduce them to a sauce.

Because we are going to add the butternut squash back to the pot once we are done blending them.

 So we are going to stir it all back together and season them with salt, pepper, cinnamon, and nutmeg,

But I thought that since it kind of has a sweet potato, pumpkin-y undertone,

 that it would be nice to add in those cinnamon, nutmeg flavors.

You can leave it a little bit chunkier if you want a little bit chunkier.

 It tastes like everything that squash needs to make it taste edible.

 I would probably actually put this in a pie crust, chill it down, maybe add in some vegan cream cheese,

 I don't want the potato peeler to just go awry and slice off my finger or anything.

 The first thing we're gonna do is we're gonna ask for the plane to fly over and then we're gonna add one box of

 Mochiko, which is sweet rice flour if you can find it in the Asian section of your grocer

I know that's not a kosher way of saying anyway, you need a box of that

 Which is 16 ounces or one pound then we are going to add two and a quarter cups of sugar

 Okay, so there's our little well to this I am going to add three cups of milk

 Regular milk, which I have one percent low fat and then I use the one and a half cups one can of

 So we're going to just stir this around so we can get as much of the lumps out of it as

 Now I am going to add in a half a cup of butter or one block which has been melted

 To juj up the flavor you can go ahead and add in coconut milk to that mix

 because that's another thing that we add to our mochi's when we bake them here and

 So that my arms wouldn't get so much in the way, but now that I do that it gets in way of my lighting

 Hi, I'm Chef Tony Matassa with BBQGuys.com, a shopperschoice.com site.

 Today we're making Fresca stuffed burgers with shredded mozzarella, parmesan cheese

 We're going to top that with basil marinated diced Roma tomatoes.

 While the tomatoes are doing their thing, in a separate bowl blend together some shredded

 mozzarella cheese, some roughly chopped fresh basil, some kosher salt and black pepper,

 some fresh grated parmesan and a little extra virgin olive oil.

 In a large mixing bowl, lightly break up 4 pounds of 80-20 ground chuck.

 Add some kosher salt and fresh cracked black pepper and a little white pepper.

 With our seasonings blended in, we can begin to portion out very light balls, 12 each.

 Once you have all 12 portioned out, begin forming patties by lightly pressing them down

 Once flattened, use your thumb to make a well in the center of each of the 12 patties.

 Using a regular kitchen spoon, fill 6 of the indentions with your mozzarella blend.

 You can smooth out the roughness with the palm of your hand, kind of like this.

 In a separate container, blend together your tomatoes, some fresh chopped basil, a little

 Because of their weight, they may be a little bit more difficult to release, but they have

 At 6 to 8 minutes, your fresca burgers should be ready, unless you like yours more mid-well

 We'll put a little of our marinated tomatoes on top, like this.

 I'm Chef Tony Matassa, and remember, at BBQGuys.com, we smoked the competition.

 scooby which is leftover from a whole beef loin I have which is mostly fat but it's still

 and I'm going to mix about another pound of chuck in with this to give it some consistency.

 This just won't fall apart when you grind it but you've got to put chuck in with it

 You do a second grind with the little one and all this goes together in here.

 that right there and then the big one goes on here and it all fits together.

I've got to cut this meat into small enough pieces that it will fit down the hole

 called the scooby or the chain part of the upper part of the chain of a filet.

 never taken one apart then you have a beef filet, you probably don't understand what

 make just about a pound of chuck and we'll cut it into about the same size pieces that

Alright, we're going to cut this up, grind it and we'll be back.

 the mixer and get the old wooden plunger there and just kind of plunge it down, get that

 want to get hamburger, you can experiment with different kinds of meats.

 and New York strip, chuck and round, chuck and sirloin and just try to get your meat

I'll make it through on this small thing, small grinder and it'll be the good

If you were using pork butt at this point, I really like to make Italian

At this point, if it was pork, pork butt, you grind it like this.

 point where you add your Italian seasonings or whatever you want to do.

 make up your own, then grind it fine, put it in the refrigerator for two days and let

 going to put it under here, put it in this bowl and show you what's done and we'll be

Anyway, if you can't, this looks like it's a pretty thick grind.

It's about three pounds or so, two and a half pounds of freshly homegrown,

 one of these here Tupperware things y'all see me use them for, make the patties.

 two tonight and I'll probably freeze what I don't cook tonight and give them for later use.

 trimmed out and cut into steaks and this is what's off the chain that's left, called the Scooby.

It's got just the right amount of fat to mix with chuck and make

 it up and use that old Tupperware patty maker and I'll be back.

 to cook all four of these tonight and I'll have me a hamburger for lunch tomorrow.

 you know, people scared of salmonella and E. coli and all that.

 grind them and make them, make your own hamburger meat, you're about 99% sure you're not ever going

 Hi everyone, this is Adam from makingmusicmag.com and today I'm going to give you a product

 demonstration of this fine little tool called the Guitar Wheel.

 It's perfect to put in your gig bag for beginners learning about music theory or for advanced

 First thing to notice is that the guitar neck and the head point to the master key

 So let's say I know most guitar players like to use the key of G.

 So coming this way, you start with the major scale and it has all the chords laid out on

 how it would look on an actual guitar neck and it has all the notes within that chord.

 So it's really good if you're new to learning the different notes on the neck and if you're

 The Guitar Wheel also has tonic chord intervals, minor 7th chords and it has triads too for

 So on the other side of the Guitar Wheel there is essentially a piano wheel which is in the

 piano tuning which is flat and again the same thing you find the master key.

 We'll just start with C and this has concert pitches for piano, horns, sax, B flat sax

 and then it also gives you all the chords just as it did on the guitar side but this

 is a little more advanced, more for like orchestra composing or even just for piano composing.

 I think most people will be using the Guitar Wheel side which really is to a degree a master

 So this is definitely something people should pick up if they're new to learning about chord

 structures and about music theory and even if you're more advanced, you know we all need

 You can find more about the Guitar Wheel on our website which is makingmusicmag.com.

 While you're there check out our videos and tips and as always send us your feedback.

 with everyone and it's going to be a collaboration video with my fellow

And if ever some of the products that I use in this makeup tutorial are

 Up next, I'm going to set all my foundation together with this Neutrogena

 And then we're going to set the hairs in place by using the tame part of this

 Next we're going to add a wash of a cream colored eyeshadow all over our lid area.

 Next we're going to define our crease area by using a matte brown shadow.

 Now using a damp brush, we're going to pick up this beautiful shimmering coral

 Next we're going to add a shimmering gold eyeshadow on our lower lash line

So thank you guys so much for watching and I'll see you in the next

 Hey, it's Lisa with LA savings and thanks for checking out my first recipe video last week

 if you didn't see it, it was a double chocolate chip stuffed cookie recipe and I will link the

 But for this week the focus is pumpkins and I came across a recipe for a pumpkin muffin.

 But I do like to kind of make it on film with you guys and we can see how the end product is together

 I figured I'd show you how I prepare the pumpkins because I am gonna use fresh pumpkins rather than the can although you certainly could

 Use canned pumpkin, but I did grow a bunch of pumpkins this year

 So I'm going to be cooking them and showing you how I do that before I do the next video that has the actual

 So what I have is two sugar pumpkins the smaller pumpkins in the front are the sugar pumpkins and the pumpkin in the back

 I don't believe it's a sugar pumpkin, but it's still pretty small and I can easily work with it

 So the first thing you want to do is just wash off the outside of the pumpkins get off any of the dirt

 I usually just remove the stem and then I cut it straight down the center.

 Once you cut the pumpkins in half you're ready to remove the seeds and remove the inside filling

 As far as cutting the pumpkins in half go make sure you have a really sharp knife

 It took every bit of a half an hour to open up those three pumpkins that I had

 I find it easier just to use my hands and pull the seeds out and I'm just gonna stick them into a

 Strainer and I'm going to rinse them off and then I'm gonna come back and I'll take a spoon to get the rest of the

 Insides out but I am just using my hands to kind of pull out all the seeds

 So now all I'm gonna do is take a spoon and kind of just scrape the bottom to get out all of the rest of the

 Insides just get right in there and it'll all come out pretty easily

 Once that's done and the pumpkins ready to go into the oven, but as you can see I did already do all the seeds.

 Some people put a tiny bit of oil with this just a very small amount of olive oil

 I don't I just left a little damp and I sprinkled salt on it just enough to taste and these are ready to go into the oven

You really just have to keep an eye on it when they start to get brown

If you are in a hurry, you could bake them at a higher temperature

 It's gonna cook a lot faster and you have to keep an eye on them because they can go from being perfect to burnt

I'm gonna keep them in for about 45 minutes to an hour and keep checking on them

 Once the pumpkins are prepared you are gonna put them on a tray.

 I'm gonna keep them like this, but you could cut them smaller to have it cook a little faster

 So as soon as the fork kind of pierces through it and it's soft it's ready to come out

 I did cook them at 250 for the first half an hour and then for the second half an hour

It did need the full hour, but now it's got a nice toasted outside to it

So I would say start at 250, but if it's if it's not really cooking

 Right now you can see that it's just peeling away from the skin.

 What you want to do is either mash this you can use a masher potato masher.

 Just for you know, 30 seconds just to kind of mix it all together and really

 Get it smooth and you can see over here that I did do this to some of the pumpkin already

 I just put it right in the blender maybe 30 seconds and now it's ready for the recipes

I'll let it cool overnight and then I'm going to take out one cup size

 portions and I usually put them in a ziplock bag and then kind of wrap it all up and keep them in the freezer and

 Then throughout the year whenever I need to make something with pumpkin

 So I can just take out one or two bags let it thaw out and it's ready to go

 Hey, my name is Ben and today I'm going to teach you guys how to do some pop shove-its.

 Before you want to do pop shove-its, you may want to learn how to do regular shove-its

 So now that I've showed you how to do a shove-it, now I'm going to explain it to you.

 I ride goofy, so if you ride regular or whatever, which is where your right foot is your back

 foot, then picture it in regular because I'm going to explain it in goofy.

 So you put your front foot near the front bolts around there, however you like it on

 And your back foot is going to go on the tail along the corner here.

 And you're going to turn there, but don't turn your body, just your lower body.

 Make your feet go back, guide it a little, and once it's starting to spin, lift both

 your legs off the board just a little, and the board should do a 180, a little spin,

 And it doesn't even require a pop or anything, you just shove it.

 Once you know how to do that, then you've got to learn how to do the pop.

 So to ollie, you set your back foot, which is my left foot, on the tail, and you set

 Pop it, you kind of jump up a little bit, I can't explain it, but yeah, kind of jump

 when you pop it, and slide your feet up onto the bolts, and lift your...

 The more you bend your knees when you're about to ollie, the higher, the more air you'll

 get, and when you get in the air and you pop it and you slide your feet up, then keep your

 shoulders even so the board stays parallel, and instead of all weird and it looks better

 And then you combine the shove it with ollie, and it's a pop shove it.

 All right, so now you know how to do it, and yeah, hopefully you can do it now.

 Mmm, I'm gonna move for a bacon cheeseburger, but not the whole thing, just a bite.

 That way I can eat my bacon while I start off my day cooking bacon.

 So if you place your bacon down while the pan heats up, it will prevent your bacon

 I've seen people just throw bacon into a pan not neatly laid out flat.

 Okay, start by dangerously opening one Pillsbury croissant tube.

 So for the burger I just thawed out some mini meatballs, it's much easier.

 So we finally got the dough out of that tube and we tried a bunch of things here.

 And what we found out works the best is rolling up a triangle and then pressing it out in

 This will give it a more even dough exterior and of course, look better.

 So now we just layered it with crumbled bacon, cheese, and a meat-a-ball.

 Now grease up a baking pan so we can place our little friends down before we throw them

 But then I decided to make the exterior look better so I brushed them down with butter

 Hey guys, and today on Healthy Junk Food we made bacon cheeseburger bites.

 The preferred method of eating these is to place a pickle right underneath, just like

 It allows me to do my recordings and it makes me sound a lot clearer than I did in my previous videos.

 Hey, I'll be the drone that flies down and delivers your package.

 Binding is the trick that you use when you are playing with a non-responsive yoyo to

 In this video I am going to teach you a few different ways to bind just to get you started.

 The first technique of binding is that usually binding is easier, especially if you are just

 learning, if you get the yoyo on the string in the opposite direction.

 The reason for this is that if the yoyo is on the string in the opposite direction that

 also means that it is spinning in the opposite direction, which is going to make it easier

 If you are doing your front mount, this is normally the way the yoyo lands on the string,

 to do your bind you are going to flip it around and get it on the string in the opposite direction.

 Same thing with your side mount or your trapeze, you are going to do your bind over here, and

 that is going to make it easier to get the yoyo to come back up.

 The first technique for your bind that I found is very easy to do is to pinch the string

 It is going to be wrapped over your finger here, you can pinch it with your thumb, I

 Once it is pinched you are going to want to raise your yoyo hand up a little bit.

 You can see that I have started with my yoyo hand close to the yoyo.

 Just raise it up a little bit and as soon as you do that you will start to feel the

 As soon as you start to feel that you are just going to un-pinch it, you are going to

 pull your hand out, and then the yoyo should wind right back up.

 Again, you just pinch, you are going to raise up a little bit, and as soon as you start

 to feel it you pull your hand out and that will cause the bind to work.

 Same thing on your trapeze, you are going to go over here, pinch, lift, pull your hand

 A lot of guys, instead of pinching the string, what they do is they cross the string like

 You are going to want to do the same thing, you are going to want to lift your yoyo hand

 drop this hand a little bit, and as soon as you start to feel that tension on the inside

 of the yoyo, then you are going to want to pull your opposite hand out and that will

 A lot of guys that is the exclusive bind that they do and it can work pretty effectively.

 The third kind of bind that you can do, again a lot of guys do this, I don't really recommend

 it and I will explain why, but essentially what they do is they wrap the string around

 the axle like this and while they are wrapping it they throw the yoyo up.

 The reason I don't recommend this bind especially is because when you do that the string, when

 it first starts to bind around the yoyo, it is actually winding in the opposite direction

 So when you throw it back out you are always going to have that little bit of string that

 is going to come out of the yoyo and it is going to kind of mess up your throw a little

 You may not really notice, you may not really care, and what is nice about that bind is

 that you don't have to flip it over, you can just get right into it from your normal mount

 So those are just a few different techniques, practice them, work on them, see which one

 Now as you are practicing those binds you are going to find that you are going to make

 I am going to show you a couple of different ways that you can also use your binds to wind

 If you are going to do your normal windup trick like this, then to do your bind you

 If you want to get the yoyo spinning like this, it is going to be spinning the opposite

 direction so you are going to want to get it in the opposite direction, or the direction

 One other technique that you can use that I like to use a lot is instead of just spinning

 the yoyo and getting it on the string here, you can do it all in one motion.

 So I like to spin the yoyo, and while it is up in the air I just catch it right on the

 If you watch different yoyo players you will find that they favor different techniques.

 There are a lot of techniques that I didn't show you here, but hopefully these will get

 you started so you can start doing your unresponsive yoyo tricks.

 From surround sound digital entertainment to state of the art ovens, we've come to expect

 But there's one practical, brilliantly designed sink appliance that more and more people are

 It sits unobtrusively in the sink, so most of the time you wouldn't even know it was

 But once you've used it, you'll wonder how you ever did without it.

 This is the new Evolution food waste disposer from Insincerator, the world's leading brand.

 Insincerator food waste disposers don't just offer practical, contemporary convenience,

 they provide an environmentally sound answer to the growing problem of food waste.

 However careful and organized we are, pedal bins, bin bags and trips to the dustbin or

 The fact is that 20 to 30 percent of kitchen waste is food waste, and that can mean slimy,

 smelly, messy stuff to deal with, especially when things go wrong.

 If it's food waste, it can go off quite quickly in a warm kitchen, causing smells and providing

 And if you live in a flat with lots of steps between you and the outside world, well, you

 So let's get back to the alternative that Insincerator can provide.

 With the new Evolution models, which sit at the top of the comprehensive Insincerator

 Thanks to technological advances, the Evolution 100 and 200 models are the quietest, finest

 Both feature state-of-the-art grind technology and quiet technology, so when it comes to

 As soon as the fresh food is prepared, the waste can be dealt with instantly and effectively.

 A power booster circuit with microprocessor technology increases torque to tackle the

 Turn on the tap, press the switch, push the waste into position, and away it goes.

 The food waste disposer grinds it effortlessly and safely into tiny particles that are automatically

 flushed away down the kitchen drain to join the local waste treatment system or a septic

 Safety is no problem for a young family, or anyone for that matter.

 The grind ring that deals with the scraps in seconds is entirely safe and there are

 As we've already heard, the quiet technology of the Evolution models has helped to create

 the quietest food waste disposers ever, which makes our models perfect for modern, open-plan

 Every model is compact enough to fit neatly under the sink without taking up valuable

 There's a quick lock-mounting assembly across the range, which makes for easy installation.

 The food waste is flushed down the sink by cold water and drops onto a revolving plate

 The spinning action forces the waste against the outer wall, grinding it into fine particles

 The alternative to food waste disposers, the old way to dispose of food waste, is causing

 Governments everywhere are committed to reducing the amount of waste going to landfill.

 And think about this, all that food waste going to landfill needs to be collected and

 So, when it comes to carbon footprints, disposers score highly again.

 Food scraps that have been through disposers can be used to create biosolids or biogas

 When the recycled material is used as a power source, soil conditioner or fertilizer, the

 The revolutionary grind technology of Evolution simply powers through all kinds of food, full

 Spaghetti, chicken bones, meat bones, egg shells, coffee grinds, vegetables, fruit,

 And at the end of it all, your kitchen is left spotless, leaving you to get on and do

 You certainly won't have to worry about your insincerative food waste disposer.

 Our high quality design is maintenance free, so once you fit it, you can forget it.

 There are more than 75 million food waste disposers in the world and three quarters

 Hello, after so many people asked for me to make a tutorial on I Won't See You Tonight,

 And before I start, I just want to say that this is my interpretation that I figured out

 And so whatever mistakes you find, keep it to yourself because I don't care.

 So I'm going to show one hand at a time because I'm using my MacBook as a camera.

 It's pretty much that basic chord progression of those four chords throughout the whole

 intro, and so you can rewind that and watch it again if you need to.

 I just want to mention with the left hand, it's four chords and then there's a walk up

 So if you watched the video I did of the actual song, you can notice that.

 All right, and now I recorded the left hand already with my piano.

 And so I'm going to play the left hand and I'm going to show you the right hand that

 After watching that, I realized it's a little hard to follow, but I hate all the tutorials

 And so you can always rewind it, see the parts again, and of course, always learn it by ear

 And so it's pretty much those four chords of the left hand the whole song.

 Just figure out the right hand by ear, or you can watch my other video again and you

 can try to match the same sounds, or you can just do your own interpretation.

 And the song is basically those four chords, but you're altered.

 Sometimes you strum them, sometimes you pick each one, or you do different things.

 So now I'm going to show you the part that's after the breakdown, and you'll recognize

 I just recorded it, and so I'm going to play back, and I'm going to play with the right hand.

 See, it's the same chords both times, but I'm playing them differently with my left hand.

 And the chord progression changes here, and I'll show you afterwards.

 And now here's the chord progression for that part with the left hand.

 Alright, so if that seems confusing, rewind it, watch it again, try to match pitches.

 I don't like the tutorials that spoon-feed you everything, so I'm trying to challenge you a little bit.

 If you have any questions, just post it below, because I read all the comments.

 So in order to remove the fan clutch, we have to remove the shroud assembly.

 And the way you do that is, we're going to disconnect the hose right here.

 We're going to disconnect the 10 millimeter right below the upper radiator hose.

 And we're also going to disconnect this 10 millimeter screw here.

 We'll take these off, push that little clip in, and lift it up.

 And it's actually, it's just a very large wrench that fits right onto the water pump

 Now, if you don't have that special tool, a lot of times you can snap these loose just

 And on this one here, it's a 2004 Dodge, but most of the Dodges are all, you remove them

 So you turn it to the left to get it to remove, and you turn it to the right to tighten it

 So you put your wrench on here like this, and I'll show you how I usually get them loose.

 And you're just going to turn it left, take your hammer, just pull, and you give it a

 And the way you reinstall it is you just catch the threads and turn it until it's all the

 Tighten it until it's as tight as you can, and I'll show you what we do next.

 Make sure that the upper part of the shroud and the lower part of the shroud come together.

 And then we're going to install the 10mm bolts that hold the shroud to the radiator.

 Okay, once you've got the bolt tight, we're just going to reattach the pumps and they

 Okay, and the last thing we're going to do is reattach the hose for the coolant.

 because then it doesn't get imbued with all the nice seasoning.

 If you cooked it earlier in the day, rinse it in hot water, get it warmed up.

 So let's add that to that, and let's combine it together and see.

 And of course, we'll have to add some salt and pepper once we mix it.

 It's just slightly warm so it'll absorb the nice seasonings and nice flavors.

 so you add as much mayonnaise as you like in your macaroni salad.

 but sometimes the shells collect some of the mayonnaise in pockets,

 So I don't add any salt and pepper, so we need to do that next.

 because I like my macaroni salad with a little more mayonnaise in it.

 So we'll toss that, and I have a nice bowl to present that in as well.

 Welcome to Common Man Cocktails, I'm your host Derek Shulman and today we're doing a

 I think we're going to do all user submitted recipes this week.

 So this one is going to be called the Cherry Tootsie Pop and it's going to have a little

 We have HD now on YouTube, I started doing HD videos out there.

 We're going to use a little grenadine because you got to have grenadine because it's called

 A little Grand Marnier, we're going to do three quarters ounce of Grand Marnier.

 It's going to be shaken and we're going to use three quarters of an ounce of the Don

 It calls for a lemon rum, a limon, limon, it's lime infused I believe, lemon, lime,

 So we'll put those two ingredients with a little splash of grenadine in here, shake

 it up, put it in a little low ball glass and pour some Red Bull.

 So we'll do three quarters of an ounce of the Grand Marnier right into the glass.

 We'll do three quarters of an ounce of the citrus flavored infused rum and a splash

 You can see you get, it's almost like about halfway when you get all the ice in there.

 This stuff is debatable whether Red Bull is good straight or not.

 It's not like the chocolate cake shooter where you're like, oh, this is totally chocolate

 But if you, and you probably wouldn't catch it if you just drank the drink by itself.

 Knowing what it's called makes it, makes it a little more, you can imagine a little better.

 But if you put it in a drink with some different sweetness and different characteristics and

 you've got yourself an actual cocktail and that cocktail is called the Cherry Tootsie

Hello everyone, this is me, David Frith, showing you how to make a silver wedding

 I'm now going to put some flux on it, which kind of gets rid of any oxidisation.

 or helps to, and then that's a soda solution which kind of neutralises the acid.

 Hi, I'm Mary Rogers and this is the Cuisinart 1 1⁄2 Quart Compressor Style Ice Cream and Gelato Maker.

 You can do both styles of desserts and the reason is we have two different paddles.

 One is specifically designed for ice cream and the other is specifically designed for gelato.

 And the reason is that gelato has a lot less air in it, it's much more dense than an ice cream.

 Ice cream is more aerated and so we have designed two different paddles for you to use to get the perfect result for a great gelato or an ice cream.

 The other thing I want to show you is this is the 1 1⁄2 Quart Removable Container.

 Just put that right back in there and we're going to put the paddle in.

 You just line up the arrow with the unlock signal and turn it towards the locking icon.

 Also here you have a little window where you can add your ingredients or any mix-ins when you're making your ice cream or gelato.

 It has a beautiful stainless steel finish and like I said it has a compressor.

 And the benefit of that is that you can make ice cream or gelato at any time.

 And you can also make batch after batch of ice cream or gelato.

 It has a control panel here which is black and it's surrounded by a really nice accent of brushed stainless steel as is the front.

 It has a power button, a 60 minute timer, and then also a start stop button.

 It's beautifully designed and it's also a lot of fun to make homemade ice cream or gelato.

 And I'm just going to take off the lid right now because I don't want a splash.

 I prepared this in advance so that we'd have it all ready for making ice cream.

 All you do is put your lid back on, lock it into place, and we're going to set the timer for 40 minutes.

 And when we come back I'm going to show you a beautiful strawberry ice cream that we made from scratch.

 So our 40 minutes is up and one thing I wanted to mention to you is that when your ice cream is done mixing and cooling,

 you should take it out of the container inside and move it to a food storage container because it'll still be a little soft.

 And then put it in the freezer so it'll harden up a little bit.

 It's not going to be absolutely hard when it's finished churning in the ice cream maker.

 And it couldn't get more tasty than making fresh homemade ice cream.

 And honestly, I do it with my nieces and nephews and they love it.

 Who wouldn't want a beautiful creamy ice cream or gelato right at home?

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to be showing you how to make a Russian salad.

 I'm going to make quite a large dish suitable for 8-10 people so I'm going to start with

 You'll notice throughout this recipe that all the ingredients will be diced about the

 same size, 1cm cubes with the exception of the potato which is just slightly larger.

 The point of this is that you're meant to be able to taste every single ingredient with

 Firstly, it drastically reduces cooking time and secondly, because you're dicing the potatoes

 Pour boiling water into the pot just to cover the potato and carrots.

 In the meantime while your vegetables are boiling, dice about 200g of ham and put into

 Dice 8-10 dill cucumbers and then put into the same bowl with the ham.

 Put the onions in the bowl with the ham and the dill cucumbers, cover with glad wrap and

 So just remove the lid and scoop out the eggs using a slotted spoon and put aside to cool.

 Once cooled, peel and dice up the eggs and then add them to the vegetable mix.

 Now add the ham, cucumber and onion mixture to the vegetable mix.

 I'm going to use the Tommy brand, that's my favourite brand of mayonnaise.

 You don't necessarily have to use this brand but it is important to use a good quality

 Give everything a good mix through and then pour into your favourite bowl.

 Hey YouTube, today I'm going to be teaching you how to use a very easy algorithm based

 This is for people who are still using the beginner method and want to really improve

 their times and people who want to get started on F2L but aren't sure where to start and

 aren't ready for the full on intuitive F2L that most videos present.

 I will be teaching you about 4 cases and these 4 cases have a max of 4 turns for their algorithms.

 So it is a very easy to learn method, it should only take you about a day to learn at max

 It really improves your times, when I used to use it this way it would basically cut

 My fastest F2L with this was 8 seconds so it is a very good method.

 For this video I will be using the white cross so go ahead and do that.

 Okay once you have the cross you are going to put it on the bottom and look for any white

 So you are going to look for the green and orange center piece on top and if it is not

 And the first thing I do is check for the 2 cases where you can either drag it up like

 this to make the pair or drag it up like this to make the pair.

 You can see this is where you can simply drag it up and the pair connects.

 And then you would just move that pair out of the way and put that cross piece back.

 And to place it in you simply just bring up that middle piece, slide it in the corner

 Next we have blue and red and again you can simply slide it up on the opposite side this

 Next one, now you can't drag it up either way but when you put it over the white it

 So when the middle piece is over the white part the white is to the left of the middle

 So what you are going to do is left, front inverted, left, front.

 So this is when you can't drag it in either way and the white is to the right.

 For this you are going to do right inverted, front, right, front inverted.

 Like I said it was extremely easy to learn and it really does improve your solve times

 Like I said it doubled, I mean it cut my speed in half from the beginners method.

 So if this helped you at all make sure to comment and subscribe or leave a like if you

 So thanks for watching and check out my channel for other speedcubing videos.

You're going to need 1 cup of ketchup, 2 tablespoons of brown sugar, 1 shallot that

 I have minced finely, 2 teaspoons of kosher salt, 1 1⁄2 cup of minced red onions that

 the Worcestershire sauce, the onions, the salt, shallots, 1 egg, the thyme, and pepper.

Now you're going to combine these ingredients well in with your meat.

 like you can get in there with your hands, but now I just prefer using a wooden spoon and trying

You want to spend about three or four minutes on this and I'll come back

We love the leftover meatloaf to slice and put on pieces of bread and

 to make sure you've got your oven preheating to 375 degrees Fahrenheit.

 ingredients together I'm just gonna add right here onto the top and spread it all around.

On the bottom rack I've got a baking dish here that is going to bake along with our

That way it'll keep the meatloaf nice and moist and it'll keep the top from cracking.

 on the top rack and I've got a pan of water here on the bottom.

The thyme is coming through with that sugar and the ketchup on the tomato base.

 smørmælken, og jeg vil hælde det i, i min skål her, og jeg har tænkt mig at blande det med

 forslut det, eller du kan også bruge kærlig sæt, eller du kan bruge halv fennel,

Jeg har to kopper rødmel, og så har jeg to og omkring en halv kop

 50-50 mel, der betyder 50% hele mælk og 50% regulære mel, og jeg har tænkt mig at tilføje

 Bland det godt, og så jeg har tænkt mig at færdige det ved hånden,

 Jeg tror det er en lille smule tyndere, jeg vil gøre det ved hånden.

 Og så jeg har tænkt mig at knive det for et par minutter ved hånden.

 Så nu jeg holde knive det, og det er allerede blandet stærkere.

 Det er virkelig flot, og efter jeg er færdig knive det, jeg har tænkt mig at forlade det for en

 par timer, indtil det har vokset til omkring to gange så meget, og dette vil gøre to

 Okay, dette er blive virkelig godt, så jeg tror jeg har tænkt mig at forlade det nu i

Jeg har tænkt mig at dække det op med toppen, og efter to timer, jeg tjekke

Okay, så nu har jeg haft rød brød smør, dejen, ved at hvile for ganske en tid.

 Jeg smider det ned, og jeg har tænkt mig at sætte det i de to brødlovene her.

 til smør brødlovene, og jeg deler det i halve, og jeg stik det i brødloven, og jeg vil

 Jeg vil dække det op igen med en tøj, og tjek tilbage i omkring to timer, og

 hele baget rødbrød, og det er absolut lækker med almindelig smør på det.

 jeg har tænkt mig at gøre lige nu, og selvfølgelig, rødbrød er lækker, og det er

 Og, vær så glad, at abonner på vores kanal, og lad mig vide, hvad du tænker om rødbrød.

20, 2017 as the lawmaker of the Riyadh Medandal that became the foundation for the Mecca.

 Riyadh is the 12th most populated structured city on the Eastern continent.

 The medallion was built on the spot that paralyzed the body of one of Iran's greatest catastrophists.

 Plans to build the Medallion targeting Sayida Ali Yezidi have proven severe to them.

 The Medallion was built on the spot that paralyzed the body of one of Iran's greatest catastrophists.

 The conditioner that I used on my hair as well as the weave is Cream of Nature Moisture Extreme Conditioner.

 I just put this on my hair and let it stay in for about 5 minutes and I rinsed it out.

 So what I do now is I take my Cantu Shea Butter Leave-In Conditioning Cream and I just apply that to my leave out.

 I use it to seal in my leave outs as well as because it's a spray it's really good to lift the tracks up and spray this on my braids.

 And then once I'm done with it I just kind of finger detangle and then I just flat twist it down so it can dry.

 Ok so all my leave out is moisturized and sealed at the side and the back.

And what I do with the leave is I just gently comb it out while it's wet.

So if you have any more questions about how I maintain my sew ins or specifically about this hair then definitely let me know and I will talk to you guys later.

 buy these package for maybe like 39 cents or 40 cents a pack or something like that but usually

 I buy them in big old package like this for I think like 10 dollars a package or nine dollars

 flavors to it like the beef the big old package for like 20 bucks.

 up and once that it's heated once you get that in there you want to get the meatball and I'm gonna

 boil it frozen so it is okay that's why it takes about 10 minutes.

 frozen for like five minutes let it sit in the water once it's boiling for like two three minutes

 just to soften it up because these are cooked meatball ready so you don't have to worry about

 cooking it just gotta I guess thaw it up or whatever you want to call it warm it up

 and then the nice the benefit of these package mommy noodle is that it comes with its own

 ingredient and while I'm waiting for the water and the meatball to cook I'm gonna go ahead and get

 the green prepped if you have bean sprout and whatnot if you don't like green you don't have

 to add green it's it's okay it tastes okay so good but so I'm gonna go ahead and cut it I want this

 this is all cut up already slice some onions my onions and once the meatballs are ready

 once it's boiling usually I like to let it sit a minute or two after it's boiling

 it's been sitting for a couple of minutes so now it's nice and ready and steaming so we're gonna go

 So once you fill that up with the noodle some people like more broth than other

 once you fill up the bowl with water you're gonna let it sit you want to make sure you cover and let

 it sit for a couple of minutes you can actually just boil the noodle in there if you like it

 softer but in this case I don't really like it soft so I'm gonna go ahead and wait and while I'm

 waiting cut up my meatball and all that stuff and once that's ready just put in the ingredient

 you can add the pepper if you like spicy if you don't like spicy don't add the pepper

 and it should look something like this this is really good by itself just like this but

 you know for me I like a little bit of meat and onion in there in mine so unfortunately I don't

 have any bean sprout usually if I do I'll add some in there but in this case I don't so it's

 This is Meredith for Making Music Magazine and in this video we're going to talk about

 putting on tapes on your violin so that you know where your fingers are going to go when

 And we're going to play all the way through Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.

 And what you're going to need to do is actually put some tapes on your violin so that you

 You can buy just some simple electrical tape just at a hardware store or something like

 Try to get a bright color so that you can see the tapes easily when they're on your

 And you're going to put one for your first finger and I'll put it on my own violin and

 But then you can use a digital tuner or a piano to find the exact pitch and make sure

 Now that you have your tape in place, you'll just want to test the note and see if it's

 Test it on the A string and you'll be listening for a B. Since one note above A is going to

 Now you can check with a digital tuner or piano to make sure it's in the right place.

 In this case, mine is just a little bit too high or too low, so I'm just going to slide

 So that's the pitch you're going to be listening for for your first finger on the A string.

 For the second finger, it's going to be a C sharp and for the third finger it'll be

 Now the C sharp and the D, the tapes are going to be closer together for those two notes

 because it's only a half step interval in between C sharp and D.

 You have your B down towards the end of your fingerboard, then you have your C sharp about

 maybe an inch or so away from that, and then just maybe even less than half an inch away

 But always remember to check your tape placement against a piano or have another violinist

 help you out so that you know you have your fingers in the right spots.

 Now we're going to get started with playing Twinkle Twinkle Little Star, which uses all

 A couple things to remember when you're putting down your fingers.

 When we move over to the A string after we play the beginning, we're going to put all

 If you get all three fingers down ahead of time, then it's easy to just lift up one at

 For Making Music, this has been Meredith Lang, teaching you how to play Twinkle Twinkle Little

 you cut it for a stew, you're going to cut it into equal sizes.

 But I'm gonna give you guys a little update here if you haven't heard already now

 I'm trying out straight talk for the first time so I'll have another video about the coverage and so on so forth

 I'm sitting down here in Southern, California, so our coverage is pretty good down here in Southern, California

 Now you do not need to unlock your device to use straight talk wireless

 And this right here is your starter pack, and if you're wondering where to get this starter pack

 Well you guys can start by looking in the description box below

 And I'll have a link where you could pick this up if you don't need a starter pack

 And then go ahead and plug in your information and so on so forth, but right now.

 It says bring your GSM or CDMA phone to straight talk plan this kit right here includes a nano sim a

 45 US dollars unlimited nationwide talk text and data now from what I understand I understand that after

It's unlimited yes, but they slow you down now before you jump off this video and say forget this

 Unlimited internet plan as well the reason why I'm jumping ship is they slowed me down after two gigs

 Alrighty and what's good about straight talk is that you can keep your existing number or you can get a new one?

 So what we're gonna do here is we're gonna go on straight talks website here

 And we're gonna go look through a few things here, but I'm gonna protect my information

 So I'm not gonna fill in the forms or anything, but I'll go ahead and shop through you here a little bit though

 But first before we do that let's go ahead and open this guy on up

 Let's go ahead and look at what is inside the activation kit package now.

 It was about 60 bucks for this kit and again look in the description box below

 But this kit includes one month and the SIM card, so let's open it up.

 So I opened up the the package here, and they have some instructions here, so read over that

 You know you place the SIM card in your phone follow the activation instructions for CDMA

 Go ahead and pause this part of the video and go ahead and read that

 right here pause that and then there's some fine print for you guys there and

 So they give you this little thing here for obviously for the store

 It has how to use your service card, and what you do is you have to scratch off

 Which I'm not going to do on camera obviously because if you guys beat me to the punch which you probably won't but I need

 That and so you scratch off the gray straight below to obtain your 15 digit service pin go to

 BYOP calm or call one eight does it have to activate your service?

 Alrighty so let's go ahead and get rid of that here, and there's what we saw so this right here is

 I believe that is the same thing that you pick up in the store if you just want to reload for next month

 Now here is GSM phone start here activation instructions, so that's really cool

 This is part of the starter pack here, so we have standard or micro SIM card here

 And this is not your sim serial number, so this is you pop that out of

 The actual regular one so if you have a 3 3g or 3gs use the whole thing if you have a 4

 4 or 4s then you pop them the gray part out of the white part and

 Then this guy is the one I need this is the nano for the 5c 5s and 5

 Again, I'm going to be using it on the 5 so you just pop that out and place it in your phone

 And I'll go ahead and have a video of myself doing this as well, and then also look at this guys over here

 We have the nano sim the 4g and so this is a really nice starter pack

 so we have quite a bit of them here, but also the starter pack is for obviously GSM T-Mobile and AT&T and

 I'll have to dig through this a little bit more pick my exact one that I need

 But I'm going to need obviously the nano for the GSM because I'm using it on an iPhone 5

 And then there is my network access code so I have another one there to register your CDMA phone

 Quite a bit of action here, so you can do your CDMA phone here, and then of course

 Little packet of goodies there so read that pick which one you want I want to make this video short

 Here is your service guides right here talks about service guides, and then they try to sell you a course on home phone

 That is $15 and limited flip that out of the way and then of course we have the

 so guys that is the video of the activation kit and what's inside of it and

 Again stay tuned for my other reviews about the reception and how it is the text messaging picture messages, etc

 But that is pretty much the kit and stay tuned for my other videos about straight talk wireless

 I'm just using the silver Sharpie and you definitely want to start using a marker because

 if you just start automatically with your scissors, then you might mess up and if you

 Go in about an inch away from the collarbone and just make your markings.

 Going down and I'm actually just going to go a little bit under the armpit.

 Some people like to do them really deep and come like all the way down here.

 This is the piece that we cut off so you're going to want to take this and lay it over

 You can also just push it and flip it this way just so it's easier for me to cut from

 It's okay if you do it a little bit messy because you can always go back and touch up

 You can leave the collar on if you'd like and you really don't need to mark this.

 Now that we have the collar area cut off, you're going to want to turn your shirt back

 You're going to want to start at the collar and then stop at the end right underneath

 If you're wanting a really, really thin area, you can just leave it up to yourself how thin

 I typically will start about here and just go in like someone came out to here.

 You want to keep eyeballing this side just to make them symmetrical.

 Make sure you don't take off too much from this side and not enough from this side over

 This side is a little bit thinner so I'm going to just draw in.

 You just want to take the upper layer because if you take both pieces, you're going to cut

 You want to make sure you cut on the outside of the black line because if you cut on the

 inside, then you're going to get the black marker onto the shirt.

 I am going to go ahead and stretch the material because this shirt here was kind of a more

 You want to stretch it just to get it a little more loose and distressed.

 Take the bottom half and we're just going to cut off the very bottom.

 The razorback that I'm wearing now that I made, I went ahead and cut off the bottom

 That is also going to make it more loose when you cut off the bottom.

 You can always go back and cut off and trim off any pieces that you need to.

 I've seen some people use the little scrap pieces that you cut off from the shirt.

 You can either use the scrap pieces or you can get a really pretty decorative glittery

 In the center, the strap in the middle of the back can create a bow.

Again, this project is just one way that we want to help you eat

Eat fruits all day long, every day, eat them as a meal, eat them with a meal,

Figs have been around for a very, very, very, very, very long time.

 figs, make sure you look for plump yet tender looking figs, just a nice deep color, no mushiness,

 no bruises and don't rinse your figs until just before you're getting ready to eat them.

 And figs will last, ripe figs will last uneaten for just a day or so.

That's helping it decide when to fully ripen, helps it grow healthier, helps

Okay, figs have one of the highest mineral contents of all common

 so much calcium, figs have been shown to help prevent osteoporosis to help strengthen bones.

 Because they're high potassium content, figs can help lower blood pressure and they are

 And figs have also been shown because they are mucilaginous or have kind of a slippery

 considered the perfect fruit for athletes because of that high mineral content and their

So figs could make an excellent pre or post workout part of a meal or a meal.

 the kitchen and make a fantastic low fat raw vegan meal featuring Day 17's fruit, figs.

 Okay here we are in the kitchen going to prepare Day 17's recipe for the fig.

 first I wanted to show you just a couple different varieties of figs.

They seem to be bigger than some of the others and they're very sweet.

And then here we have a kadoda fig and they're obviously green on

 the outside, have the light brownish color on light brown flesh and then the black mission

 the fig, is figs, walnuts with a little bit of balsamic vinegar.

 You'll need two to three figs, a handful of walnuts and some balsamic vinegar.

 your figs through the center so you have quarter inch, half inch rings or rounds of your figs

 and then place a walnut half on each fig round and then either drizzle or pour balsamic vinegar

 them over the top of the figs, you can just put the balsamic vinegar on the plate or bowl,

 whatever you're serving the figs with and just dip the figs into the balsamic vinegar.

 So two to three figs has about 100, three figs has about 120 calories.

 It's something that's very different from the other desserts that I have there, so I

 thought you might enjoy something that is nice and light like this.

 So that means that it's not going to have a lot of calories that you have to worry about

 If you don't like the sweetener they use, then you can buy the sugared kind.

 I didn't really get a large enough bowl out, so I'm going to stand back and start on low.

 You need to beat this pudding for two minutes and this is what you'll get.

 Scrape down the sides and then let it sit while you prepare the rest of your ingredient.

 The next thing we need is some whipped cream or you may use whipped topping such as Cool Whip.

 If you want to make your own whipped cream, then use some heavy whipping cream and this

 And I've had this in the freezer, so it's a little slushy around the edges.

 Here I have one fourth cup of powdered sugar or confectioner's sugar or icing sugar.

 Take a sherbet glass or any kind of dessert glass, maybe like this, and the first thing

 Go down to the bottom with the vanilla pudding and fill it maybe a third of the way to the

 And next is going to go our whipping cream or whipped cream that is sweetened.

 If you want to make this, look up one, two, three chocolate fudge syrup.

 If you don't want to make it, then you can just buy a bottle of syrup that you squeeze

 But this is chocolate flavored and it's maybe a little messy here.

 And this is something you don't want to put an inch of that on.

 Then come back to your vanilla pudding and place some on top of your layers.

 And then you may finish it out with some more chocolate syrup or if you want it to look

 nice, you can put maybe a candied maraschino cherry right on the top.

 That would be saved for the end or else eaten right at the beginning but not in the middle.

 I chose it for the Mother's Day table because we're trying to make everything pretty easy

 But I think you'll enjoy this dessert because it's quite different from the other desserts

 It's kind of like Boston Cream Pie which is actually a cake I think but has the flavors

 But if you like the flavors, then you'll love Boston Cream Parfait.

 If you did, please give it a thumbs up and subscribe to my channel.

 This is a very common tip and you may have already heard of it but this one involves

 tires of course there wouldn't be tires on the screen for no reason.

 Anyway the problem is a lot of people especially from carpet racers they lose their grip very

 easily because their tires polish or for pavement racers or possibly dirt racers your

 There is a way to get your grip back and get the last ounce of grip out of every tire to

 Simple Green you can find this a lot of places it's an all purpose cleaner Simple Green.

 It's just an all purpose cleaner but surprisingly it gets your tires grip back.

 Like I've polished these tires from putting them on my old Slash Platinum 4x4 and I wanted

 You just kind of well hold on you might want to lay some paper towels well I do you don't

 You wipe some of it off but then you gotta let it dry off too because it's kind of hard

 Alright I have finished cleaning my tires or drying them off with the paper towels.

 We'll give them a few more seconds to dry and then I'll show you the difference.

 So there's a little helpful tip just how to make your tires get more grip.

 If you want it to be more crispy you can add one tablespoon of rice powder to it.

 So the filling of these delicious cupcakes is Devils Food Cake which is a really deep

 sort of chocolate, spongy, gorgeous cake and it just goes really well with the buttercream

 So you need to put 35g of cocoa in a bowl and I've just mixed that in into a paste with

 And then in a mixing bowl we just add 110g of self raising flour and then we just put

 a tiny bit of salt, just kind of half a teaspoon, just mix that in there and just give it a

 Now on the hob I've melted 120g of unsalted butter so just put that in there and we'll

 just add that to a separate bowl so just pour that in there and we want to stir the sugar

 So you need to keep stirring that until the butter turns cold and the reason we're putting

 the butter in with the sugar like this is it just gives a smoother consistency.

 And then to that, now it's a little bit, you can test it on your finger when you can feel

 it's a little bit cold, to that we need to add our two eggs which are beaten so I've

 So just add it half at a time, so just pour that in there and the reason we had to wait

 for our butter to cool down is so this doesn't curdle but if it does curdle just add a tiny

 So just stir that in and then do the same again in there and just mix that around.

 And then we want to add our vanilla extract, now for me it's really important to use vanilla

 extract not essence because this is an actual extract from vanilla and it smells so much

 So just add a bit of a splosh of that in there, just stir it around.

 And then now we want to add our chocolate in there, so it is a little bit dry so you

 just want to stir it for a while just to really make sure everything is mixed in together

 So we just need to mix those two together so they're really kind of thick and delicious

 And then once we've done that we need to alternate the flour and the sour cream.

 So it's 85ml of sour cream so just do one spoonful there and then just add a bit of

 And as you can see it's going a sort of milky colour so we just add another spoonful of

 And then add the rest of the flour and this is the bit which is the most important bit

 So that now is super fluffy, super delicious and we need to add that to our cupcake cases.

 So these are simply ice cream cones and they're flat based ice cream cones, obviously if you

 So we need to spoon our delicious devil's food cake into our cupcake cases and you need

 to use a teaspoon because it's just a bit easier to get right down to the bottom and

 I'm just filling them up so they're just over a half full and it's good to be kind of fairly

 accurate with this and if you don't think it's gone down just give them a little shake

 because sometimes you need to just make sure there's no air in the bottom.

 So once we've filled them all up we need to put them in the oven for 20 to 25 minutes

 So once we've baked these in the oven we can tell they're done because they've risen right

 up and when you just touch the top of them it feels firm and you can also test them by

 putting a skewer into them and then if it comes out clean it means that they're done.

 Now I've let these cool for sort of 10 minutes to make sure that there's no heat in them

 whatsoever because it's really important that there's no heat for the next stage.

 So in here I've mixed some butter frosting which is one of my favourite things, it's

 So you need 300 grams of sieved icing sugar, 150 grams of unsalted butter, two tablespoons

 of vanilla essence and two and a half tablespoons of single cream.

 So we need to start making our ice cream on top of our ice cream cones.

 So you just need to grab a cone and I've got a slightly smaller spoon here and just spoon

 a big blob onto the top and then another one on top of that and then I'm going to use a

 So just smooth the edges all across and you just want to get a kind of ice cream shape

 So just smooth it all over the top and then we want to repeat that for all of them.

 Now I've just melted down 85 grams of chocolate which is basically just one of those bars

 you can buy in the shop and I've done that over the hob with some hot water and I've

 So we just drip our chocolate which is kind of plummet all over the top and then it looks

 So we just drizzle them and the fact that we've kept these ice cream cones in the fridge

 means that the chocolate won't separate when it cools, it will literally just cool on top.

 We just pour those on and then we just want to add our cherry to the top of our ice cream

 So the other day I was cooking with my good friend Gennaro Cantaldo and he has a new book

 coming out on Food Tube which is all about pasta and bless him, that lovely man, he's

 given me these beautiful truffles so that I can try a dish from his pasta book that

 So this is a really simple pasta to make, all the ingredients are here and today I'm

 So the first thing to do is clean all the dirt off the truffles and then just slice

 Ok the next step is to cook your tagliatelle until it's al dente, which means nearly done.

 Take the stock, the hot vegetable stock, place that into a pan on a medium heat, then add

 So the sauce is boiling away, then just take the tagliatelle, drain it and simply add the

 You can add a little bit of the water that the pasta has been cooking in to cook off

 Add that beautiful shaved truffle, save a little bit too for the dressing at the end.

 Add your parmesan cheese, so stir that all around until it's looking creamy and delicious

 I'm serving this tagliatelle, Gennaro's tagliatelle, truffle tagliatelle, with a really simple

 So it's just three parts oil to one part lemon juice, you can use your hands there

 So into there goes the lemon juice, salt, pepper, give that a good shake.

 It's so lovely, it's all creamy, I think that's the parmesan mixture.

 I've got some lovely basil here, I absolutely love basil and rather than chopping it, if

 you whip it, you get all those lovely flavours of the basil coming out.

 If you've got guests over as well, you can just let them put the dressing on, everyone

 So there you go, Gennaro's truffle tagliatelle from his new pasta book that's going to be

 All that's left to do now is to give this a little bit of a taste, but I can't wait

 It's so simple, so delicious, the truffle, I absolutely love it.

 If you can find some truffles, I really would recommend this dish.

 Thanks so much Gennaro and thanks everyone for watching and see you soon on Food Tube.

 Kayla Fornia here and today I'm going to be showing you how to make these awesome crochet

 Now this is a very easy tutorial and even if you're a beginner at crocheting you can

 Please like this video and comment below, let me know what you think and feel free to

 And if you're interested in learning how to make a full time or even a part time income

 working online, click the link below to find out what I do so that I'm able to work full

 I will also put my Facebook link down below if you're interested in connecting with me

 personally and just let me know how I can be of service to you.

 So I'm going to be using a size 2mm hook and I'm going to be using crochet cotton number

 And then we're going to do a slip stitch into the last chain from the hook to make a sliding

 And we're going to do a double crochet back into the center of the loop.

 Then we're going to do 2 double crochets back into the center of the loop.

 So then we're going to do 3 chains and then 2 more double crochets back into the center

 And so we're going to do this all the way around until we have a total of 6 sets of

 Ok so now that I have my 6 sections of 2 double crochets, I chain 3 and then I'm going to

 slip stitch into the beginning of the 3 chains here in the first part.

 And then we're going to do a slip stitch into the top of the next double crochet.

 And then we're going to chain 1 and then do 4 double crochets into the next chain 3

 And our chain 3 here counts as our first double crochet so that would be a total of 4 there.

 And then we're going to continue to do 4 double crochets into each chain 3 space.

 And continue to do the same thing until you go all the way around.

 Ok so I made my way back around, I chained 1 and now I'm going to slip stitch into the

 And then we're going to slip stitch into each beginning double crochet going over to

 And then we're going to slip stitch back into the chain 1 space.

 And then we're going to slip stitch into each beginning double crochet to make our

 And we're just going to continue to do the same thing in each chain 1 space.

 So we're going to do 2 sections of chain 5's, 1 section of chain 7, 2 more sections

 So once you guys are finished, go ahead and sew in your loose ends and snip them off.

 And then go back to my channel and you'll find a video on how to crochet fish earrings.

 And in that video at the end I actually show you how to block and stiffen your earrings

 because it is essential for any pair of earrings that you make.

 So go back to that video and you will see at the end I'll show you exactly how to stiffen

 And then come back to this video and we'll see what our finished product looks like.

 Ok guys we have finished our earrings and this is what your finished product should

 Now I added a little spray glitter to my earrings, I don't know if you can tell, but just to

 Please like this video for me and comment below, let me know what you think.

 And don't forget to subscribe to my channel for more awesome crochet tutorials.

 And be sure to click the link below and find out how you can make a full time or even a

 Introduce the bolt head from the front into the bolt head carrier.

 Mind that the extractor points to the right in the firing direction.

 Place the control bolt with its control surfaces parallel to the firing direction into the bolt head and the bolt head carrier.

 Push in the safety pin until it is even with the side of the bolt head carrier.

 Before assembling the G36, all disassembled parts must be cleaned, carefully dried and the metallic parts must be slightly oiled.

 Introduce the push rod from the front into the receiver, push the rod against spring pressure to the rear and insert it into the rear of the gas piston.

 Slide the handguard from the front onto the receiver and push in the locking pin.

 Place the magazine well with its front extensions onto the attachment studs on the receiver, swivel the well upward until the magazine catch engages.

 Insert the backplate with the recoil spring into the receiver, introduce the bearing stud on top of the backplate into the hole at the top rear end of the receiver.

 Before mounting the grip, cock the hammer all the way and press down the automatic sear.

 Subsequently place the grip from the bottom onto the receiver and fasten it with both locking pins.

 After completion of the assembly, set the G36 at safe and carry out a functional test.

 For this purpose, cock the G36 and check the operation of the bolt catch.

 The bolt firmly locks with the locking locks of the bolt head into the barrel extension.

 For unsetting the safety, place the safety fire selector lever at E.

 When pulling the trigger, the front of the sear pivots downward and releases the hammer.

 The longitudinally movable sear is pushed all the way to the front by the sear spring.

 Upon acceleration of the bullet, parts of the propellant gases enter the gas port and push the gas piston and the pushrod to the rear.

 During the rearward movement of the bolt head carrier, the bolt head is rotated via the control bolt and the control cam in the bolt head carrier.

 This rotary movement of the bolt head disengages the locking locks and the bolt head separates from the barrel extension.

 The extractor in the bolt head extracts the empty case from the chamber.

 During the rearward travel of the bolt, the case is ejected to the right through the ejection port.

 In its rearmost position, the bolt hits the buffer in the backplate.

 The recoil spring returns the bolt to the front and the bolt head feeds the next cartridge from the magazine into the chamber.

 The automatic sear engages into the hammer and catches the hammer.

 The bolt head abuts the rear of the barrel, whilst the bolt head carrier pursues its forward movement.

 In the final phase of the forward movement of the bolt, the bolt head carrier pivots the automatic sear out of engagement with the hammer.

 The hammer is caught now by the sear, which is pushed to the rear.

 The complete sequence of operations is shown once more without interruptions.

 The optical sight is provided with a 3x or optionally a 1.5x magnification and a specifically designed reticle.

 The reticle is provided with range marks from 200 up to 800 meters in steps of 200 meters.

 The exterior diameter of the circular reticle serves as a lead mark for laterally moving targets at a range of 200 meters and a target speed of approximately 15 km per hour.

 The interior diameter of the circular reticle corresponds to a man size of 1.75 meters at a 400 meters range.

 The stadia pattern at the left corresponds to a man size of 1.75 meters at ranges of 200, 400, 600 and 800 meters and is used as a rough range finder.

 The heights of the vertical range mark lines for 600 and 800 meters also correspond to a man size of 1.75 meters at the respective ranges.

 The horizontal line across the central reticle is used as an aid against counting.

 The sight is adjusted for elevation by means of the upper adjustment screw and for windage by means of the lateral adjustment screw.

 Rotating the adjustment screws for one graduation changes the point of aim for 2.3 cm at a 100 meters range.

 With larger cakes, sometimes they don't get fully cooked all the way through the center.

 So what I do is right before they are finished cooking, I will take them out of the oven

 and I will cut the center piece out and then dig it out with a spoon.

 Then I will take it and stick it back in the oven and let it cook for about another 15

 minutes until it's thoroughly cooked all the way through the center.

 Once you've stuck the cake back into the oven to let it bake for about another 15 minutes,

 when you take it out of the oven to know that it's done, you can see that it's a little

 It doesn't mean it's going to taste bad, it just means that it's done.

 The reason why it comes out so easy is because I use a cake release that's made by Wilton.

 You brush it into your pan before you bake and it comes out nice and smooth.

 Now we'll take our cake board, put it on top, and then flip the cake back over.

 What we'll do next is we'll take and cut this cake nice and flat and you will not see

 You match it up to the size that you need, make sure that all sides are going to be flat

 The second step would be to cut again so that you can fill your cake.

 And then you can fill with your buttercream or any filling that you like.

 You can use any kind of filling you want, mousse, chocolate buttercream, whatever is

 Now we're ready to put the buttercream on the side of our layer of cake.

 It's very heavy duty, it's a lot of weight, and it spins really easy.

 Okay, once I have buttercreamed my whole entire cake, what I like to do to make it

 nice and smooth is to get a cup of water, warm water preferably, and dip my spatula

 into the water, get it nice and wet, and then apply it to the cake.

Before inserting the barrel, you'll want to make sure that the lock dial

 Turn the dial so that the arrow points directly above the locked lock.

The tool may not heat up properly or the barrel may fall out during

 First step, pop this corner right here, lift it up and this one should just snap up.

 One here, all the way and you might need a flashlight to see it.

 Move them like where you can see there's a clip on the second one.

 So you have one person doing this and another one pushing it like this.

 Once you take it out, put it here and then there's two screws here.

 And then, let me just kind of, once you take it out, pull it out.

 Once again, if you need any repairs on this radio, like similar to this,

 This week I'm gonna take a simple English Bloomer and really jazz up the flavour

 I'll start by adding 2 teaspoons of dried yeast to 300 g of lukewarm water,

 After 10 minutes kneading, you should have this lovely, soft, springy dough.

 It might take you a couple of minutes to get all the seeds and walnuts distributed throughout the dough.

 You can see that this dough has risen really nicely so I'll just unwrap it

 I don't know if this will show up on the camera as I'm filming it but there's like a faint raspberry ripple-type effect.

 You see some of the oils coming out of the walnuts and this is gonna permeate the bread.

 I'm just gonna lightly oil my surface with a bit of vegetable oil

 It's about 12 inches or 30 centimetres long by about 8 inches or 20 centimetres wide.

 and leave it in a nice warm place for about 45 minutes to prove.

 So you could use this dough and make it into rolls if you wanted to.

 Hi, I'm Celia Goldfarb and I'm here to teach you how to make three of my favorite Halloween

 Jack-o-lantern bread, a floating banana ghost, and a spooky spider.

 What you're going to do to make it is really easy and healthy too.

 You're going to dye some cream cheese orange and you're going to spread it over a whole

 Then, you're going to take some raisins and you're going to make a funny face.

 Maybe I can do a pig nose or maybe I can just do a nose sticking right up.

 And then for the stem, you're going to take some celery and you're going to make it into

 What you're going to do is you're going to take two Ritz crackers and you're going to

 You're going to take half pretzels and make eight legs out of them and stick it in between

 Then, you're going to take some peanut butter and you're going to make three dabs.

 You're going to take a banana and you're going to cut it in half.

 You're going to take two chocolate chips as eyes and stick them in.

 Maybe I'll just make a little mouth or maybe I'll do a gasping mouth.

 I hope you enjoy them just as much as I do and I can't wait to eat them.

 What we're gonna show you is how you can make the Lansean air burger while you're half in a bag

 You come home drunk and like oh, I got some fillets in the house.

 You're gonna want something that's gonna soak up every single bit of the alcohol that are you just making fun of me?

 If you're new to my channel, my name is Kadija and this is my wash day series.

 So I hope that you guys are enjoying the wash day series so far.

 Okay, so you're watching, let's see, we pre-pooed already, we cleansed already, so now we're

 And for like about a year and some months now, I have been loving the Shea Moisture

 You're gonna need a bowl, you're gonna need a spoon, conditioner, favorite oil, and of

 So I'm just gonna take my spray bottle with water and just kind of re-wet it.

 So once I'm done with one side, I just twist it up and I clip it like that.

 And I'm just gonna repeat the same thing on this side of my hair.

 So I will rinse my hair with cold water just to shock my hair and this is said to like

 I just do this because I'm high porosity and you know, I'm not trying to leave my cuticles

 I split my hair to two halves and that's how I rinse my hair and I'll be right back after

 Okay guys, I'm back from rinsing my hair and it's so funny me rinsing with cold water because

 Let me know how often you deep condition your hair, what products you use.

 We're going to pull this out of here, take it, get a new one, get it replaced.

 Now the mercury sable is exactly the same as the 98 Ford Tauruses, so they're exactly

 Once the belt's off, then we're just going to loosen up, pull the plugs out the back.

 So my first attempt at using the new canopy today, all heck broke loose and it downpoured

 So we're finishing up the how-to video on the mercury sable's alternator.

 You have two eight millimeter bolts right here and a 13 right here to remove this bracket.

 Once you remove this right here and the power wires, it's pretty much ready to pop out.

 We're going to go get the new one, replace it, put it back together.

 So by the time you turned anything on, it started dropping voltage quite quickly.

 All right, with the rain kicking back in, we're going to hurry up and get this done

 Even though we're underneath the canopy, we're still getting wet and nasty little storm roll

 I mean, changing your alternator on the Fords and the Mercury's are pretty easy, especially

 We got to put the top bracket back on, hook the wires up, and get this thing up and rolling

 We're going to go and put it back on, and then the alternator is replaced.

 We have a thermostat that's sticking, so it's not flowing through the radiator, so it's

 But that's another video, so let me get the serpentine belt back on and get this knocked

 All right, all we're going to do is pull this forward, bring the belt up around, get this

 All right, and that is your serpentine belt back on your alternator.

 It's a pretty tight fit on the Ford Tauruses and the Mercury Stables.

 So unless you have a really skinny ratchet and skinny socket, the wrenches work perfect.

 We're going to start up, and we're going to test it out here in a few.

 All right, so we're going to check the voltage after we change out the alternator, and let's

 That's where you want to be on your battery voltage, what the alternator's putting out.

 So that's your alternator change on your Ford Tauruses and your Mercury Stables.

 going to show you guys a hair tutorial that's really cute for spring.

 have all heard about the sock bun but the thing about this is that it's for girls with

 they're all on sock buns for girls that have very voluminous hair and long hair, non-layered

 length around here but it's layered up to here so it's really hard for me to do it the

 traditional way which is just sock and then you roll your hair down.

So if you want to see how I got the sock bun, if you have short,

 Alrighty, so the first step is to tie your hair into a ponytail.

 would like your sock bun place is where you will tie your hair.

 Alrighty, now I'm going to get my sock and I'm going to place it over where I just tied my hair.

If you have a darker hair color then go for a darker sock color.

 So I wouldn't be using a white sock for my brown and black hair because then you will see it.

 Anyways, I split it into two and then I'm going to spread it around the sock and then I'm just going to use another hair tie to tie it.

Right here I'm just loosening up the bun a little bit so that it will make it look more full.

 And then you're going to use bobby pins to wrap the ends of your hair so that it makes it look like you have hair wrapped around it rather than a hair tie.

 And there you have it, a sock bun for thin, short, layered hair.

 This is where it ends up, but it can't stay there all the way to the end.

 I just need some pieces to hold it together and keep it stable.

 Now that I've got these ones together, I'm going to take out, just a little bit out,

 And take these off again, but be very gentle trying to leave it all so that it doesn't

 There's three more pieces, which we need to use to make a central locking pin mechanism

 Now we're going to put these two pieces back, one on either side.

 Slide these guys into place, and let the whole thing fall down.

 You still have to be a little bit careful how you handle it, because if you move the

 911 emergency, something you need to to rush to your orthodontist about.

 practice we typically don't like them to go all the way until their next visit

 just because the tooth can move further out of position and prolong treatment.

 we like to get them in relatively quickly but it's not a 911 emergency

 where they have to come in that same day or that same hour for it.

 see we're on a small flexible wire right now so there's a lot of play between the

 bracket and the wire so it slides very easily in this situation.

 It's very very sticky and difficult to take back off your braces but that's

 actually a good thing if you're trying to protect your lips from your braces

 or if you're trying to secure the bracket so it doesn't spin around and

 put some wax on the bracket and on the wire on both sides of the bracket.

 basically gonna secure that bracket in place and of course this wax will be

It's not gonna slide back and forth and there you go that was secure.

 running through the contents of the new, larger Humbrol toolset, as well as introducing the

 A set of Basic cutters are present in both of the toolsets and these are ideal for removing

 cutters so parts can be snipped either flush with flat surfaces or on more delicate parts

 the cutters reversed and a larger piece of sprue left behind to avoid damaging model

 Both of the toolkits also come with a good quality modelling knife.

 has a knurled handle to enhance grip and a sharp blade which you should be very careful

The knife can follow up from the cutters to trim the excess plastic

 away much closer to the surface with minimal risk to the model part itself.

 plastic which does remain can be trimmed away with the foils which are included in both

The Basic modelling kit includes one foil which has a rough surface

 for finishing off any leftover plastic lugs where the part's met with the sprue.

 Removing the connection points from model parts in this fashion is one of the first

 Also included in both of the toolsets is a good set of basic tweezers with nice mating

 So there we have the four basic components of the smaller toolset which are also included

 in the larger toolset as standard and this is a great starting place for any beginner

 Moving on now to the larger, more advanced Humbrol toolset and those four basic starter

 tools are included in here as well, although the number of foils has been increased to

 knife as well as a drill bit and pin vise for drilling small holes in your model kits.

 A small set of mini snips are included for cutting less resilient materials as well as

 three clamps and a set of protective covers which can be used in conjunction with this

 The spare blades for the knife and the drill bit are kept safe in this small plastic box.

 The number of foils in this kit has been increased to include a half moon, a round and a flat

 The mini snips, even though they're ferocious looking, are actually a really easy to control

 and accurate way to cut less resilient materials like paper or card.

 cutting edge also makes them a great choice for removing small markings from decal sheets.

 The larger Humbrol toolkit also includes this very handy pin vise.

 lug on the base end which is designed to fit into the palm of your hand.

 the chuck is screw secured and is reversible to hold drill bits large and small.

 The drill bit supplied in the kit just happens to be the perfect size for opening up those

 To use the pin vise, simply secure the lug in the palm of your hand and rotate the drill

 Last but definitely not least, we have three different sizes of modelling clamp which are

 also provided with self-adhesive foam rubber protectors to avoid damaging your model's

These are useful enough on their own, but combine them with the magnetic desktop

 The protective pads simply press into place and avoid the clamps scratching the plastic

 These clamps are particularly useful for holding parts together whilst the glue is drying.

 Here, two fuselage halves are being clamped together whilst Humbrol Liquid Poly joins

 for your first tools or you want something a little bit more advanced to start building

 up your tool collection, look no further than the Humbrol tool sets.

 Thanks very much for watching and we'll see you again next time.

 who are very concerned about doing the picot edging with the crochet hook

I think it's even easier than doing it with the knitting needles.

 and also I used it on these mittens and they're very interchangeable.

 putting the edging on and you're going to chain three stitches.

 oh my goodness and then you're going to wrap the yarn around and pull it through both

 Now you're going to go back in the same stitch again and just do a slip stitch right

 So you're doing a bump, a single crochet, a bump, a single crochet.

 I'm going to tie a CDC elk haired caddis and I'm starting off with a Green Caddis Outfitters

 I'll get the thread started behind the eye, take enough wraps in to make sure it's secure

 and then I'll leave my thread just beyond the point in the hook or at the barb.

 Then I can tie in my CDC and for this I'm going to select a CDC feather that's relatively

 I'm going to be wrapping this up the hook shank so I want to make sure that I've got

 So what I'll do is tie it in by the tip but I want to capture some of those fibers at

 the front as well to help me build out the body and also make it a bit stronger.

 So I'll pinch those together and then make sure I take nice hard wraps through the material

 and I'll leave the thread at about an eye width behind the eye.

 Now I can take my hackle pliers and attach it to the stem and then wrap this up the hook

 Once my wraps start to catch up with my fibers I'm going to stroke those back towards the

 tail to give me that length that I'm looking for in the fibers.

 Then I'll hold my hackle pliers up when I get to the thread and take a couple of wraps

 I want to make sure that I've got this nice and bound down before adding in my elk hair.

 I'll take off a clump, trim it off the hide and then I want to be sure to remove that

 Usually I can pull it out by hand but if there's a lot of that fur under there just run a comb

 I'll put it in my stacker, give it a couple of taps to align the tips and then just like

 with traditional elk hair caddis I want it to extend to the bend in the hook.

 So while I have it on top I'll just switch hands and then I'll take a cut right at the

 eye and now I can take two wraps over and then pull straight down.

 I like to work my thread through those butt sections as I advance towards the eye.

 Once it's all in I'll take a couple of wraps underneath as well.

 You can whip finish underneath or I often like to take them again through the butt sections

 If you want shorter fibers trailing out of the back all you need to do is pinch them

 Our understanding of music begins with an understanding of notes.

 Now, trying to keep things very simple, there's really only 12 notes.

 Now, I suppose they could have just used numbers to name these notes.

 Such as, note number one, here's note number two, note number three, so on and so forth.

 Instead, for some well thought out reasons that we'll go into at a deeper level later,

 they went ahead and just used the first seven letters of the alphabet.

 Now, we use the first seven letters of the alphabet, but I said there was 12 notes.

 So, right now we don't have a name for all 12 of the notes, we just have a name for seven of them.

 We just use sharps to tell us one pitch is a little bit higher than another pitch.

 For instance, if I know this is an A, the pitch that's a little bit higher than this is an A sharp.

 If I know this note is a C, I know the pitch that's a little bit higher,

 So, in between all the letters in the musical alphabet, there is a raised note or a sharp note.

 But if we remember this exception, and remember that as our rule,

 So, once I know that, and I realize that there's a sharp between everything else,

 but not between B and C and E and F, I can begin to recite the musical alphabet.

 So, again, the rule is everything has a sharp in between it, except for B and C and E and F.

 So, does the musical alphabet just repeat itself over and over across the fretboard?

 Like I said at the beginning of this lesson, there's only 12 notes.

 But this is the right place to start to understand this concept.

 Just to get an idea of how to assign names to the notes that we're playing on the fretboard.

 In this episode, you're going to learn how to make a Mountain Dew smoothie.

 Before we get started, I want to say that this has a special ice crush feature.

 If you guys don't have one of those, just use a coffee grinder.

 You can take it and put the ice in a cup and just put it in like that.

 Before you press the ice crush button, make sure to take the top off.

 I'll get back to you once the ice crush feature has finished doing its job.

 The reason you want to peel it over the blender is so the juice gets in.

 And the reason we actually want to add this is it'll give the smoothie,

 or Slurpee in this case, a little pizzazz and gets a little more of a texture to it.

 Now you want to take the rest of your ice and just plop it right in here.

 Now once you've blended all the ice into it, you're just going to want to put it on

 Not to where it kind of just mixes it, but to where it'll still, you know, chop things up.

 Now once you've put the rest of your ice in, it should be three-fourths full.

 And then you're just going to need to take one thing full of it.

 Make sure it doesn't overflow at all because it'll be too sugary.

 But you want enough sugar to even out the kind of the tangy or sour bitterness of the lime.

 Now the consistency should be about that much of an actual slurpee.

 Don't forget to subscribe, leave a like, and share this video with everybody that you know.

 A great healthful dip or spread used on bread, baguettes, pita, bagels or French bread.

 If you want to buy the dried chickpeas you can soak them in water overnight, cook them

 You can even use the bay leaf if you want to flavor the chickpeas or combine some beans.

 Chickpeas are canned so they're already soft when they're fully cooked.

 They're known as chichi beans or garbanzo beans or chickpeas, all the same, just different

 I have about a 16 ounce, about a pound of drained chickpeas in there.

 I'm going to have some tahini paste, which is important, sesame seed paste.

 I'm going to be adding that, probably a tablespoon or two to give it some great flavor.

 It gives that traditional taste from sesame seeds that everyone knows and loves, those

 I'm going to add some of that smoked paprika in there, about a half a teaspoon, and some

 Then I'm going to stream in some olive oil into the top of the food processor.

 Depending on how loose or thick you want the hummus, you vary the amounts of olive oil.

 You can do a roasted red pepper hummus, you can do a pesto hummus.

 In the past we did a pumpkin hummus, beautiful for the fall season.

 And I like that consistency, it's a texture I like for hors d'oeuvres.

 It can be thinner if you want, like if you're going to spread it on a sandwich.

 And this works with a wired and a wireless Mighty Mouse, depending on what you have.

 And if you have a wired one, take the plug out so there's no power in it.

 Then, get a piece of paper and make sure the piece of paper is clean.

 I will leave a link for that below or right here on the screen.

 And like I said, if I'm going a little fast, go to my videos that teaches the

Very delicious and perfect for a Sunday lunch or even for dinner time.

 here are the list of the ingredients that you need to prepare this dish.

 I'm just going to add a little bit of salt, just about 1 1 4 teaspoon, about

And some cumin powder, just 1 1 8 teaspoon and 1 1 4 teaspoon of

 I'm just going to place a couple of eggs because we are just going to need two.

 water mixture along with the eggs, should come to a rolling boil.

 eggs are getting done, I'm just going to fry this basmati rice.

 I'm just going to reduce the flame to the lowest possible temperature.

 goes about 1 teaspoon of black cumin seeds, and just 3 cloves, 1 big cardamom

 And we need to fry this till we feel a nice aroma coming out of the spices.

 to rest them for a while because I'm not going to need this right now.

Add about 1 tsp of ginger which I have minced, and 1 tbsp of minced

 and 1 tsp of red chilli powder, and some salt that's sufficient for the

 pressure cook this or cook it in the same pan in which we have prepared the

But I kind of like to do it this way because we need not keep an eye

 It has been about half an hour now that the rice has been cooking.

 into the cooking rice, they'll be very rubbery at the time of eating.

 Well today we have a little Fiat 600D ring and pinion on our bench and we're going to

 be installing the Joel Engineering Limited slip on this and we're going to show you how

 You need to release these, kind of even pressure here, and take them off one at a time.

 Alright, well we've got all the bolts and locks out so now we're going to go ahead and

 You want to make sure this copper thrust washer is in good shape.

 Now we'll go ahead and get the ring gear off of the carrier and we'll pull out the pinion

 We're going to loosen this up so we can pull this out and the pinion shaft is right there.

 We have about three different springs that we can use and we found that for street use

 Well, before we actually make our installation here we're going to take this the rest of

 Well, we have things cleaned up so now we're ready to start the assembly.

 First off is we take our thrust washer, put it on this, and we'll put this down inside.

 Okay, then we take half of the limited slip and put it in here.

 Alright, next pieces to assemble are going to be the upper half.

 To make the assembly go a little bit easier, we have to take some longer bolts and stock

 and put two of them in so that we can crank it down to the ring gear.

 The brass or bronze pieces that you see there are forced against the drives for the axle.

 Now we'll go ahead and remove these two and then we'll put in the other four bolts.

 Alright, now that the bolts are in, we're going to go ahead and torque these down.

 Alright, well now that we have the tabs all bent up, I'll show you what the piece looks like here.

 Anyway, if you have questions about Jowell Engineering Limited Slips or installation, give me a call here at Custom Ace R&D.

 demonstrate how to set up a small, lightweight backpacking stove.

 the fuel pump in, you'll notice that it's a little bit awkward shaped.

 You want to make sure that this is not cross threaded in any way.

 So you can control from a large flame for boiling all the way down to a very small flame

When we're lining up the canister with the hose from the stove, we want to make

 sure that this gate is in the right position because this gate is going to be used to clip

 Then you should be able to move this gate around and snap it into place.

The purpose of this is to heat up the elements so that the liquid

 white gas will turn into a vapor because a vapor will burn much more efficiently than

As this heats up, it will start to convert that liquid into a vapor

 and that will burn a blue flame which is a much hotter and more efficient flame.

 before we turn on the gas, we need to get this to the right temperature.

 this start to crackle and fizzle as it converts the liquid into a gas and then we can go ahead

 The fuel inside the bottle is still pressurized, so we gently unscrew the top and you can hear

Here's the easy Indian recipe for Bandh Gobi Matar, which literally

 translates to closed cauliflower and peas, or you can call it cabbage and peas.

 You'll need half a large cabbage cut into strips, about 3 fourths of a cup of peas,

 a one inch piece of ginger cut into small pieces, and about a half a green chili diced.

 You'll also need a half a teaspoon cumin seeds, a quarter teaspoon each of coriander powder,

 turmeric powder, and chili powder, and about a half a teaspoon of salt.

 You want to cut the cabbage into long strips, the way my mom's doing for me.

 And once again, we wait for this cumin to sputter, because that's a cue that we can

 move on to our next step, which is to add some coriander powder, some turmeric, and

 as soon as it's all mixed together, I'm going to add my cabbage.

 At this point, you could add some salt, which I do a little bit later on, but go ahead and

Now we're just going to cover for about six or seven minutes, maybe eight, and

 For the complete recipe and to leave me your comments, visit me at theeasyindian.com.

 Hi, I'm Frank Dangereux and I'm going to show you how to carve a turkey.

 If you want to know how to cook this beauty, go to yuppichef.com and sign up for my free

 course on festive food where I'll share all my secrets with you.

 Gently cut the skin on the outside of the leg so that the leg is nice and defined.

 Then what you do is you actually pull slightly until the bone actually pops out of its socket.

 And if the turkey is cooked perfectly, that will happen just like that.

 So basically we've just now fried the leg and you can see the dark meat is cooked perfectly.

 It's a bit on the pink side, but that's not pink from being undercooked.

 Now what we need to do is we need to find the joint between the thigh and the drumstick,

 Right, so while I've got the turkey in front of me that way, I'm going to pull out on that

 So what we want to do is we want to first cut the flesh from the top of where the two

 And what I'm going to do, put the fork in there so you can actually help and guide.

 You can pull out all that beautiful meat and use it later for sandwiches and all sorts

 Make sure your slices are not too thick so you can feed as many people as possible.

 Remember, go to yuppichef.com and sign up for my free festive course.

 We got some new t-shirts actually, I'm wearing one of them right now that we designed for the website.

 Just to sort of keep things going, so if you feel inclined and generous, then feel free to check that out.

 There's really no need for tabs because it's a really simple song.

If you know B minor, E minor, A minor and F, you got the chorus.

 There's a warm breeze blowing by the ocean as you're taking my hand

 Alright, well, as you can see, the main thing other than the chorus that you really need to know is this little slide.

 All you're doing is you're playing your C, sliding it down two frets and coming back up.

 So you're playing your G. Here, I'll show you my strumming here.

 You're gonna want to check that out because some of the chords online are just not correct.

 Today's video I'm going to show you how to do this Brandy inspired look from her It

 It absolutely looked gorgeous, super glammed up and I'll show you how I achieved this look.

 If you guys are interested, you know, keep watching for the tutorial.

 Alright guys, so first things first, I have to perfect my face and I'm going to do that

 Let's go ahead and cover those up with some heavy duty concealer.

 Now that I'm sculpted to perfection, I went ahead and set my entire face with this pressed powder.

 Now it does blend everything together seamlessly, but it makes sure that your face is budge proof.

 Before adding any shadows, I went and primed my entire lid space from brow bone to lash

 Now this is an opaque color and the shade is very similar to what I would use normally

 For my transitional color in my crease, I took my pressed powder onto a tapered crease

 brush and swept it into my crease area and down the bridge of my nose.

 To add a little bit more depth to that crease area, I added the contour shade.

 I combined two cream colored eyeshadows, one matte, one semi matte, and applied that into

 Next, I picked up a beautiful brownish, kind of pink shimmery color and I took it onto

 a small shaded brush and patted it into the inner third of my lid space and a little bit

 Then I took an icy white color and added that to the innermost tear duct of the eye space.

 Next, I picked up this oyster color shimmery gray shadow and I packed that onto the middle

 Lastly, I took this shimmery, I mean glittery black eyeshadow and I ended off the eye space.

 Next, I went ahead and got that oyster color eyeshadow onto my tapered blending brush and

 I kind of blended that into the outer V to make sure that it was nicely blended.

 Taking that black pencil, I smudged the product right below my lower lash line and I smudged

 the product right below my lower lash line and right over it I added that black shimmery

 To define my upper lash line, I went ahead and grabbed this eyeliner marker from Wet n Wild.

 But for now, I'm just going to sweep it onto the apples of my cheeks and make my cheeks glow for real.

 So I'm going to shimmer on this beautiful bronzer to bring full glam light all over my face.

 Before adding any lip color, I muted out my lips using this eye primer.

 Then I went ahead and I lined my lips with this kind of burnt black cherry lip liner.

 Don't forget to keep checking that down bar below for more information.

 Today I'm going to be cooking fish curry or we call it curry ikan.

 We've got this ginger, garlic and onion and we've got this lovely curry powder.

 Yes, it is in a packet because when it comes to curry, it's very time consuming.

 I mean, this one is designed for the meat curry and this one is for the fish curry.

 There's a mix of herbs and you can easily get this in Asian groceries as well.

 So that's the mixed herbs and we've got this coconut milk and also we've got this tamarind.

 We've got fresh curry leaf as well and we've got okra and tomato to go with it.

 We've got this red snapper, sea bream, we've got lovely sea bass, my favourite.

 Because I've tried it with other fish like monkfish or even with sea bass.

 But the flavour, I mean somehow this salmon, maybe the texture as well.

 Like in my cookbook, I make it very simple for people to follow.

 So if you want to be authentic, I mean the way we complement our curry.

 And you're going to smell all the combination of the ingredients.

 Because once you put it in your curry, you're going to bite it and you can taste all the spices.

 Only put half a teaspoon because you don't want to put a lot of it.

 And this is when you're going to smell all the fresh curry leaves.

Just get a pinch of the tamarind block and then put a bit of water.

 Can we use other cuts of fish or I might get a bit of a bad taste?

 So again, this one you can get in the supermarket of Asian groceries as well.

 Because with the vegetables, I prefer my vegetables to be crunchy.

 We cook this like every day and we eat this with the rice as well.

 Hi this is Megan with Beadaholique.com and today I'm going to show you how to

 or ribbon or some other kind of textile into your bead embroidery between your

 lengths of ribbon here to make this into a waist sash, into a belt

 when there's not something inserted and you do need it to be a textile that you

 my basic beaded edge around the piece and I've been alternating

 if you don't know how to do the basic beaded edge go ahead and watch that video first

So if it's loose like this and you don't go through the very edge

 getting to the point where if I tried to do that it's going to start bunching my

 almost tight just like if you're doing regular edging and now what you're gonna

 out, you're just going to take your needle and you're gonna go right back

 above where it's coming out of the foundation or the backing material

 then you're going to go through that bead the same way you do for the edging

 for the next one just go ahead and grab your seed bead like normal

 between this and the regular beaded edge is that then you need to come

 you can see it's exactly the same thing you just need to make sure that you

 and the back is still gonna be secured and it's gonna be nice and neat

 it's gonna be a lot neater and more secure than if you tried to attach this

 Hi, I'm Leanne and today I'm going to show you how to thin out your own hair using scissors or a straight razor.

 For those of you who have thick hair like mine, you don't have to cut it all off or put it up all the time.

 You could texturize it or have someone else do it and make it a lot easier to deal with.

They cost $250 US, which is actually an average price for stylists to pay for shears.

It could be used by barbers for shaving, but it can also be used for cutting hair.

 I'd say it's way better to use a razor for thinning or texturizing than a cheap pair of scissors.

 It won't cut you because it has this guard on for safety purposes.

You'll also need a comb, some hair clips, maybe a claw like this, and a water bottle for razor cutting.

 If you want a smooth look, try to avoid thinning the top layer because that's where the shorter hairs you cut will be more visible.

 Also, remember that the sides of your hair already have way less hair than the back, so if you thin the sides too much, they will look stringy.

 Don't thin the very bottom section because then you may get short hairs sticking out when you put your hair up.

 If you start cutting too high on the hair shaft, you could have short hairs sticking out near your scalp.

 And if you start cutting too far down, your ends will be very thin or choppy.

 Unless you want that, try to thin in the middle of the hair shaft.

 While thinning with shears, if you do it on dry hair, you'll have more control.

 Comb out your section, hold onto the top, and let the hair hang down evenly.

 I'm going pretty conservatively because I want the hair to feel thinner but still look smooth.

 If you want a lot of texture or messiness, you can cut more hair off as you do this, but it's easy to go scissor happy, so be careful.

 When you use a razor, you need to wet your hair to prevent getting split ends.

 Keep in mind that the razor is really sharp and wet hair will cut through easier than dry hair, so you need to be very much in control of your tool and go slow.

 Comb out your section so the hairs are parallel and hold it firmly between your fingers.

 So as you can see, the hair still looks smooth and it's less thick than before, and this is going to make it easier to manage and style.

 series I'll be doing my own version of the sugar skull which is very famous

 be needing really good quality face paints and I got mine from Glamour Face

 your eye because we will be filling that with black makeup later on.

 always choose to cover your eyebrows however if you have very thin and sparse

 ones like I do, don't bother because we will be covering that later on with

 Once you're finished with that, go ahead and set your face with a translucent or

 eyes using a black gel eyeliner and first just making an outline all over

The whole idea behind these hollow spaces and dark shadows is to

 adorning skeleton heads with different kinds of ornaments and paints and there

 taking this hot pink color and placing it on my inner eye corner.

 begin to darken the outer part of your eye with a dark purple eyeshadow to

 more dimension by placing a shimmering white eyeshadow on the inner part of

And now we proceed to more finer details, especially the hole and

 the hollow in the middle part of your nose just like this and begin to add a

 purple eyeshadow that I used earlier and this time the contour has to be very

 a red lip because I want my sugar skull to be a little bit girly and less deadly-ish.

 And I'm just smearing the end part just a little bit so it doesn't look too

And from the edge of my mouth going to my cheekbone and temple, I'm

 just simply drawing it with a liquid pencil to further accentuate the skull

 However, make sure that there are traditional pieces like this Charlotte

 draw a spider so I opted to use a little cute heart to make the whole look very

 I wanted more dimension hence I'm using this dark purple eyeshadow to contour

 the sides of my face and wherever I want more shadow and more dimension.

 skip this part but I think it does make a difference on your look.

 you can see, I added a few more rhinestones on my face to give this

May God bless you abundantly and may you have a fabulous day ahead.

 Hi, you're at Margie's Kitchen and today I'm going to make brownies for you

 So what you start with is you're going to use the Baker's unsweetened chocolate

 I'm going to use 6 squares of that and I'm going to chop that up but I'll show you that as the next step

 Then we're going to take 2 sticks of butter, that's 1 cup, and melt it along with the chocolate

 And then we're going to use 3 cups of sugar, 1 1 1 1 cups of flour

 And I have 2 cups of walnuts here which I'm going to chop up a little bit

 And then I sprinkle some on top so I can tell the difference between my brownies that have no nuts and the ones that have nuts

 Now, what I've done is I've taken a 9 by 13 pan and I've put a piece of parchment paper in it

 See right now I kind of have some lumps in there still of chocolate

 But you don't want the butter to get too hot so you're better off letting the butter be warm

 And just waiting and be patient for the chocolate all to melt and just stir it

 You don't want anything too cold and you also don't want anything too hot

 Okay, so you melt your chocolate and butter together until everything is completely melted

 And I've chopped the nuts and as you can see I haven't chopped them really too fine

 Because when you cut through them when you're making each individual brownie

 You can see the nuts where you cut them through and I like to see that

 So I like to keep this a soft nut so it can tolerate that, it won't tear the brownies apart

 And I'm going to start to beat them and then I'm going to bring it up to high and I'm going to slowly add the sugar

 And I'll show you what that looks like because you want the eggs to beat up slow enough

 And let that mix in again just until it gets a little bit ribbony again

 I'm just going to raise this up a little bit just to help mix that in

 And you can tell that they're done because if you touch them they'll spring back

 Because the top is a little crispy, I don't want to be breaking it later when it's cooled

 And I hope that you enjoy them and I'll see you again very soon, bye!

 This video is going to show you how to wind a Singer Featherweight bobbin and

 you've got a front loop and then a tensioning there's actually a light

 our bobbin on here we take our spool of thread go through our loop down and then

 go around and up through our thread guide and they say to tie a knot and I

 it's hitting the belt and then hold your balance wheel and release the

 balance wheel release knob on the end and then basically just get it

 a groove kind of starts on the inside coming up out and basically you have

 your thread on your bobbin you want to come in over your bobbin and

 lay it into the cup so it goes down into the groove pull back and underneath the

It should be able to hold itself pull it with a little little force

 it's not supposed to be too tight there's an adjustment screw here if you

 made of fruits and nuts served primarily during Passover Seder.

 We're going to do a quick installation of the 12 o'clock lab speedo doctor on our

 You're going to need a 6mm wrench, a 4mm wrench, something to prop your tank up of

 your choice, and I also like to cut the excess off of the zip ties.

 Alright, the first thing we're going to do is take our 4mm T-handle Allen head wrench

 right here, and we're going to take out these two bolts on each side of the seat.

 Alright, now that we've got the left-hand side out, we're going to go ahead and move

 Watch out for your paint here on your tank, and then you need to slide it forward a little

 Now that you've got your tank free, use whatever you like to prop the front of the tank off.

 You've got a couple wires in here, so be careful not to let too much weight rest on them.

 Alright, the next step is going to be to locate the speed sensor.

 Just take your finger up the wire to trace it up to where it is in the tank.

 I just kind of jiggle the wire around, and you'll see it moving in there.

 The next step, once you've traced the wire up, is to find this plug here.

 And what you're going to do is there's a small tab right there where my finger is pointing.

 You actually want to pull out on that tab to release the latch for the two connections.

 Now once you've got it free, you can get ready to install your Speedo Doctor.

 Once you have your Speedo Doctor slipped in there, just take the respective ends, the

 And I'm going from the front of the bike to the back of the bike, and I brought it through

 I'm actually going to put this right here, so all I've got to do is pull the seat, and

 You can run it anywhere that you pretty much feel safe would, I guess, keep it out of the

 I just came right down through here along this other batch of wires, you'll see.

 Alright, now that you've got your Speedo Doctor ran, simply let your tank back down.

 Make sure the front tabs go inside your plastic pieces here, and bolt everything back up.

 Speedo Doctor already has an excellent video here on YouTube I'll make sure you have a

 Like I said, I went ahead and put mine right under the seat here, so it'll be easy to adjust

 It's just an expression, but it will taste sweet ass when it's done.

 So what you're going to need, we got some tomato paste, black beans, can of black beans,

 We got chili powder, cabbage, cumin, oregano, olive oil, and then we got two green peppers,

 two jalapenos, one medium onion, and then we got two pounds of beef.

 So we're going to chop up the vegetables, put them on the skillet here, cook on medium

 Alright, so we got the vegetables cooking up, the two green peppers, medium onion, and

 You want to cook that up until they're soft and the onions are just about to, are just

 And then what you want to do next, you want to throw in the oregano, chili powder, cumin,

 So you want one tablespoon oregano, one tablespoon chili powder, and then two teaspoons of the

 Alright, once you add all the other ingredients to the vegetables, you just want to cook it

 an additional one to two minutes until the tomato paste cooks through, and then you want

 Alright, once you get the vegetables over in the crock pot, you want to put the beef

 onto the skillet, season that up with salt and pepper if you like, and add a little more

 And we're going to chop this meat up until it's cooked, up until it turns brown, starts

 to turn brown, and then we want to put it over into the crock pot.

 Okay, once you got everything in there, you just want to add the other ingredients.

 So we're going to put in the one cup chicken broth, a can of black beans, and then finally,

 or not finally, the tomatoes, and then we'll get the cabbage in there, and then we'll cook

 this bad boy up, and you'll have Yun's Sweet Ass Chili ready to go.

 So on low, it's going to take 8 to 10 hours, on high, 4 to 5 hours.

 So give the recipe a try, don't forget to rate and comment on the video, subscribe to

 the videos, let me know what you think, if you did, try the recipe.

 In a medium sized saucepan, you're going to place 1 pound of pitted dates, or 454 grams.

 The dates around here come in a pressed box like I have here, and they also come loose

 Either one is fine, and if it comes in a block, you just break it up.

 To that you're going to add 1 quarter cup of white sugar, 1 half cup of water, and a

 Then you're going to heat this over medium high heat, bringing it to a boil, stirring

 it often, and as this begins to cook, the dates will start to break down.

 Now the recipe asks for chopped pitted dates, but I don't see the reason you have to chop

 As you're cooking, as long as you're doing what I'm doing now, as long as you keep poking

 Once they become nice and thick and soft, you're going to add 1 half teaspoon of cinnamon,

 And this is the recipe, this is basically the technique I use to make date square as

 Now for the actual pastry part, the recipe asks for butter flavor or golden flavored

 In this case it's Crisco brand, and a lot of people ask me what shortening is, this

 Shortening is basically soybean oil, palm oil, that kind of a thing.

 So what you do is you cream together 1 cup of that Crisco butter flavored shortening,

 Now I'm adding 3 tablespoons of milk, and you can also add a tablespoon of rose water,

 I didn't have any rose water, I'm not even sure if I can purchase it around here, I never

 That actually intrigues me, I'd like to try them with rose water.

 Now you're going to beat in 2 cups of all purpose flour, a little at a time until you

 And the pastry will be very similar to that, like a pie pastry, it will be very similar

 Except maybe a little bit sweeter because it has a bit of sugar in it.

 And once it's blended up enough, you can start to use your hands and form the dough into

 The recipe says that you can find that rose water at Middle Eastern markets, and we don't

 Then take a chunk of the dough, and you're just going to form a little cup shape with

 And you're going to place 1 tablespoon of that date mixture, the filling, into the center.

 And if it's sticking up a bit, you might have to push it down, like I'm doing here.

 And then simply seal up the edges, and turn it over, and you place it on a cookie sheet,

 After they're done being made, you are going to bake them at 300 degrees Fahrenheit for

 Now I noticed that I had more filling, I had a bunch of filling left over, and no more

 Now if you recall my sunshine cookie and bumblebee video, I had only used half of the sugar cookie

 dough in that recipe, so I'm using the other half of that sugar cookie dough.

 I'm simply just taking two sugar cookies, basically, cut outs, and just putting a little

 That's what I did with the extra cookie dough I had, because I didn't want to throw the

 And when they come out of the oven, let them cool a bit, put them on some racks, and the

 recipe says to sprinkle on some powdered sugar while they are still warm.

 The pastry itself is light and flaky, it melts in your mouth, and the filling is really nice

 If I were to make them again, I'd make the pastry a bit thinner around the date filling,

 and I think if I would have done that, the amount of filling would have matched the amount

 These are quite good, and there are the little cookies that I made, and those were kind of

 Hi everybody, this is Jennifer with Northwest Stamper and today I thought I'd show you the

 card that I put up for the beginning of my birthday celebration week on my blog Northweststamper.com.

 stamping up fans, if you haven't seen the occasions catalog that starts in January,

 this paper is one of the new papers and it comes in a really cute package.

 them you're going to need some scrap pieces of whisper white, of basic black, and then

 by our body, and all you need is the main part of the owl's body.

 have to worry about feet, as long as your scrap fits in the ears and the tummy.

So to do that, just take your piece, and all you really need are the

 feet, so depending on how your scraps are you could slide some scrap in and get some

 these pieces that aren't the body or the heart, you can brush aside, get them out of your

 get the most out of my scraps, so it just has my white and the tummy.

You can set your punch aside because it's all the punching you need to

So grab your scissors and we will start getting these ready to be penguins.

You might have little pokey, pointy parts, but you can always adjust those

 part so that I don't have to worry about too much showing behind where I'm at.

 piece, and then you can just stick the body over so that it hides your orange.

 tuxedo vest, but whatever you call his white tummy, you stick that right on top.

This is our little heart, and this is why I really like the two-way

 glue pen because it just makes it so much easier to glue it down.

 and then we're going to take our white circles and cover up the tips of our hearts.

 can play with position, you can play with the size depending on how bug-eyed you want

 there because now I can flip him over and grab these ears that we cut off, glue it to

 stick to your fingers just a little, so just be a little careful as you pull it off.

 the other one, stick it to the other side, squeeze, get that on and get your finger off,

 Right marker or some kind of black marker because you can punch out the circles, but

So I just use the little tip, draw him on, give him cutie patootie

 is grab your Pennant Parade stamp set, grab a stamp like I'll grab this one, and then

Now if you don't like that one because I didn't do a good job stamping or inking

And if you have those weird lines, that's okay too because the punch actually

 without the ruffles, and punch it in here, which looks like we have to just sort of take

 off the edge, run it through, say, oh, get a little closer in, and punch.

 just stick this little hat right on top of your guy, and then to get the little fringe,

 I like the silver dazzling details, put a little on the end, on the top, and you're

So I hope you enjoyed this and are ready to go out and try making your own penguins.

 It's a lot of fun and really fast, and so cute, so it's definitely worth it.

 it a try, let me know what you think, leave me a comment here on YouTube or my blog, or

 just shoot me an email, I'd love to hear how it's going for you.

 This is a great ab exercise that just uses a standard lat pull down machine.

 I've placed the knee rollers as high as possible to position my butt against it for stabilization.

 You place your hands in an underhand position less than shoulder width apart.

 You use very light weight so you do not engage any other muscles except the abs.

 Your arms serve only as a rope, you do not pull with your arms at all, it is just meant

 Pretend that you're trying to bring your torso over a tree trunk that's laying across

 You curl your body over it and at all times squeeze, squeeze, squeeze the abs.

 With this exercise there's a variety of movements that you can do to hit the upper and lower

 Bringing the bar behind the neck works the upper and mid part of your abs, adding a side

 Bringing the bar to the front of the head as you curl downward actually hits the lower

 part of the abs, especially if you go as low as you possibly can that the machine will

 It's a great way to get an ab workout especially if the ab machines in the gym that you use

 I always like to use other machines that are not meant for abs but I always try to do something

 different with it so I can hit the core from different angles and different movements.

 Thanks for watching and visit us on Facebook under Satellite Fitness or our YouTube channel

 Hi everyone, today I am going to teach you how to make the Japanese strawberry manji.

 It actually only take you 10 minutes to make this delicious dessert.

 You actually can find it at the local Japanese or Chinese grocery store or you can actually

 You can use water instead but I find out that milk will make your manji taste better and

 One note for the strawberry, you have to wash and dry them completely.

 I made it by myself but you also can purchase this at the Japanese grocery store or you

 If you have 2 cups of the powder, you will need to pour 2 cups of milk instead.

 So now you can see that you just blend them until you cannot see any powder inside of

 And I recommend that you guys just put into microwave and press 1 minute each time and

 So now you can see after I microwave for 2 minutes, it actually will become solid in

 So now you can see my mochi is completely ready and you don't have any liquor on it.

 So you can use some water or oil, whatever you would like, into your blender and blend

 So clean your... wash your hands and take out of some wrapping.

 So pour this mochi into the powder that we just microwave slightly.

 So you better make sure your mochi is completely flat like this.

 care, maintenance, upkeep of your table once you get it in your home.

 common what we're going to go over and with our proprietary blend of what we seal the

You just spent whatever you spent on it and the last thing you want

Now, wet rag, this is just a cotton rag, wet it down, regular old water,

 whatever your brand, whatever your fancy, and paint just washes right out.

 The continuum with our art project involves markers and pencils and the whole nine yards.

 Now, crayons, wax obviously, and your markers, take two different processes to get rid of.

 Now, your wax is going to be removed by a dry rag and just rub in a circular motion.

 Some of them need to work a little bit longer, but they all eventually come out.

 in the table are sealed by our sealer, so it's not actually going to seep into the wood.

And with the marker, go back to the wet rag, a couple quick swipes, the

Now, another thing you can use these crayons for besides artwork,

 mad or something drops and you end up getting, I don't know, a hole in the table, something

Now, you can take your normal black crayon and what you do is you just kind of

 color over the top, make sure to try and smoosh some wax into it, wipe away the excess, and

 this particular VTX that's been having issues maintaining a battery charge.

 that that's the issue for the battery not being able to keep a charge.

Always good to just double check and make sure the OEM one looks identical

 and after further inspection, the rectifier connection is going to be underneath this

So once you've got that first cover off, we're going to take out these two

Back behind the ignition, we found the three wires that we're going to

We're not able to pull this plug through the clutch in the frame.

 So what we're going to have to do is if you look inside here, there's little tiny plastic

 tabs that we're going to have to lift up so that we can pull out and disconnect each of

 to unplug the rectifier plug, which is as simple as, hopefully much simpler than the

 down through the bottom so we can feed the new wires back up to the top.

 the wires, strand the new wires up, and bolt up the new regulator rectifier.

 our new regulator rectifier that we're just going to set up in place here.

Now that I've run the new regulator rectifier plug up through the

 frame, you can notice the different colors here, I'm going to go ahead and put some dielectric

 grease on the old connector just to ensure that we're going to get a really strong connection.

 So dab of grease at the top of each of these, and then I'll be able to plug this back together

 back over and get this put back together, the seat put back on.

 Now that we've got these wires run back up from the other side, we need to stick them

That's the click that you need to hear in order to ensure that your

 reconnected each of those pins, I'm going to go ahead and throw some dielectric grease

 on each of these connection spots just to ensure that we get a positive connection.

Now I'm going to pull this bootie back up and over our connector

 and nestle it right back in behind the ignition where it started.

Now that we have the side cover installed, we're going to go ahead and put

 Today I'm going to be teaching you guys how to play Take You Down by Bow Wow, just the

 And I got this request yesterday, and because the person was trying to impress, I'm not

 going to say who it is, but they were trying to impress a girl, so I thought why not help

 So I'm just going to play it through once so you guys can hear how it sounds, and then

 we'll get right into breaking it down and seeing how it all works.

 last part, you can either play it in octaves, you can play it like this, or you can play

 up that B chord single notes, and we're going to add the passing note of a C sharp in there.

So we're starting out from there, and then all we're doing is going up.

I can kind of hear that, and I can kind of hear that on the recording

But if you want, you can just go... And that sounds perfectly fine.

So we've got F sharp in the bass, C sharp, F sharp, and A sharp.

Or E flat, G flat, B flat, whatever you want to look at it, it doesn't matter.

So, B major, go up that triad with the passing note of a C sharp.

You don't have to do that full of a voicing if your hand is small

 Which is probably the prettiest... That's the most easiest way to do it.

 Then I went to A flat minor 7th, which is basically a B major triad over A flat.

 So keep sending them to my inbox because I love teaching you guys.

 Resort Courses is designed to teach the basics of scuba diving.

 Although, along with the bad, the good definitely goes that way.

 We've seen dolphins, many types of species of fish, and conch as well.

 it is most suggested to go to a certification course rather than a resort course.

 Hey YouTubers, I just wanted to show you how to plant a fruit tree today, but first I wanted

 to start with this little side bed next to my garage that I'm starting to dig up.

 and I were digging this, it had lilies and different ornamentals in it.

 it up and since the southern exposure on the garage, we're gonna use it to propagate some

 but if you remember I did a video earlier about healing in fruit trees in the winter real quick,

 and as you can see the mice chewed all the bark off all the way around this one.

 that's what they call girdling it, and once this happens the tree's gonna die.

 like taking your skin off, you know, you wouldn't live long like that either and neither do trees.

It was the only two, three trees in my yard that I forgot to wrap,

 to be more of an ornamental display, but this is a cherry tree and I have a area for that.

 gonna put in a row here off of my, off of the kids swing and stuff.

I'm gonna show you how to do that real quick and get it to grow well.

 well I've picked my spot right here in line with these other trees and I've cut the circle out and

 cross-sectioned the soil so I can remove this sod and then I'll go take the sod somewhere else

 I have, some compost and I piled up the existing soil over here on a bag and I brought the tree

Now what I want to do is mix a little bit of your compost and the existing soil

 Okay, now I got the fresh soil in the hole and got it leveled out appropriately and I put the

 tree in here and you want to place it in the direction you want it to grow.

 the same variety as my other ones, this is different but that's okay because in your

 this is the graft right here, you always want that above the soil, usually an inch or two above

Earth for a fertilizer to get it started and I just kind of throw it around the

I probably would have had a little higher but that's where, you know,

 ground, a little lopsided but it'll fill out, it'll be a nice tree.

 water it in which is what we're doing now and then cover it up with mulch and you're done.

It's a gorgeous day out, we haven't had very many nice days so decided

 to take advantage of the Easter Sunday, the nice Easter Sunday that we're having and get some yard

 Hello, I'm Spencer Cook, Shred Ready sales rep and athlete, and I'll be guiding you through

 Not only does Shred Ready offer a helmet to fit your budget and style, we also offer some

 Follow these steps to ensure a comfortable and safe fit for your Shred Ready helmet.

 When choosing a helmet, you may have the option of different brands and styles.

 Take into consideration not only what the helmet looks like on the outside.

 Look inside the helmet and make sure it has what you need to properly protect you from

 Choose a helmet with a thick, dense foam liner that will absorb multiple impacts.

 Thin soft foam may feel comfortable and fit snugly to your head, but it may not provide

 Think of the liner in terms of slowing your head down upon impact.

 The most efficiently you can slow your head down at the time of impact, the better chance

 Shred Ready uses a couple different types of materials in our liners.

 One is VN, which is vinyl nitrite, and is used in the majority of our models.

 The other is a Brock EPP, which is a breathable, expanded polypropylene, used in a couple of

 They're both very dense to the touch, but comfortable fitting and great multiple impact foams.

 Watch this simple impact test that we've devised using a dumbbell and some different

 Notice how quickly the dumbbell is brought to a stop when impacting the VN and EPP liners.

 This demonstrates the impact absorption properties of the different foams.

 On less shock absorbing foams, such as standard mini-cell that comes in every kayak, the foam

 Then the second thing to look for when choosing a helmet, make sure it comes equipped with

 all the outfitting needed to keep the helmet properly positioned on your head.

 A Shred Ready helmet comes with universal fit shims, ear flaps, a hot lock or hog retention

 It even comes with a light, packable, enviro-conscious shoulder bag.

 Now that you've selected a color and style, proceed with the fitting process.

 The first step in fitting is to simply place the helmet on your head without buckling the

 Make sure that the helmet seats all the way down onto your head and that you have a contact

 Then make sure there's ample forehead, side and back of the head coverage.

 Now you'll want to work on shimming the helmet to customize the fit specifically to your

 Your Shred Ready helmet came with a universal fit kit, a small, medium and large set of

 Start by placing one set of shims in the helmet to gauge your size.

 You may find that you need to mix and match the shim sizes to achieve the proper fit.

 For example, you could need a small in the back and a large in the front.

 You may also find that you have a proper fit in back and front, but the sides are too tight.

 In this case, simply cut the sides of the shim and discard the unneeded material.

 Additionally, you may stack the shims or add additional shims in other areas of the helmet.

 On the hog, loosen the spools before placing the helmet on your head.

 Simply press the release and pull the excess cord from the reel.

 Loosen both reels simultaneously until the padding tightens snugly to the back of your head.

 The hot lock achieves the same fit by simply squeezing the two sides together and loosens

 Once tightened, the retention system should hold the helmet on your head without even being buckled.

 At this point, you want to give it the sneeze test or rock out to some hardcore to really test it.

 Now buckle the helmet and pull the tail of the webbing until snug.

 The idea is to get the front strap close to vertical, giving as much resistance to roll off as possible.

 Snap or Velcro these in for warmth during colder weather or for extra abrasion resistance.

 You can also purchase the CanCan ear flaps with built-in speakers for use with freestyle audio or your iPod.

 If you are not using the ear flaps, be sure to place the foam snap covers into the snaps for safety reasons.

 The newer Shred Ready helmets come with Velcro in place of the snaps.

 To summarize the fit process, first make sure you have 360 degree contact and coverage.

 Thanks for taking the time to watch and I hope you choose Shred Ready for a more enjoyable time on the water.

 In this episode I make Mok, which is a souffle-ish, curry-ish type dish.

 In this particular version I'm making a fish Mok with a dholsorver.

 Dholsorver fillets chopped up a bit, mixed in with kreung, which is an herbal spice paste,

 along with coconut milk, I'm sorry, coconut cream, palm sugar, fish sauce, and it gives

 Here I have some kaffir lime leaf that I'm going to slice up into tiny little strips

 and use as a garnish at the very end along with my red bell pepper aspic.

 And I wanted to use, an aspic is sort of like a jelly or a gelatin that I wanted to use

 Here I have some Chinese broccoli that I'm going to cut into strips and this is going

 And this is going to consist of the kreung that I'm putting in here, some coconut cream,

 mix all that up until it's all incorporated into the coconut cream.

 And afterwards I add some palm sugar into the mixture here and that gives it the sweetness

 And once again, mix all the flavors up, taste to see if it's to my taste and to my liking.

 I felt that it needed a little more sugar so I added that into there as well.

 These are pretty thin but it's a nice fish to use because it's tender and it holds really

 So once that's all cut up, toss that in there, toss one egg in as well and that's what makes

 You want the Mok to be almost sort of like a silky texture and that's what that egg brings

 And while you're preparing this, or before you're preparing this, it would be a good

 idea to get the steaming vessel ready, the steaming tray that you want to use to prepare

 So that way you don't have to wait until the water gets boiling and all that stuff.

 Pop it in there for about 12 minutes until it's just slightly jiggly.

 So I add some coconut cream on top, then the garnishes with some kaffir lime leaf and the

 Don't forget to subscribe to my channel, and I will see you next time.

 Hi ladies and gentlemen, my name is Samuel, black belt at the Coruscant Gomez.

 just going to follow on with some blue velvet lapel guard stuff that we've been doing previously.

 I'm here with Viking Lion who's going to assist me in doing this technique.

 Following from the last technique, we still have the same position.

 time, started from De La Riva, left leg, right foot on the hip, pushing your opponent back.

 Remember, disengage my left hand and my left foot, put an arm underneath, disengage my

 right foot, switch lapel back to this position and hold the hand nice and tight.

 partner, this is your partner now, not your opponent, is now sitting back.

 back in this position and he's moving his leg out and he's not allowing you to switch

 up just a little bit upright and you're in this position so you've got loads of room

 right here but you haven't got enough momentum to sweep him that way.

We're going to come forward so instead of bringing your hips to this position, you're

 and now I bring my leg in front of him in this position and I pull his leg to my hip

 is on top of my shin and I use my left leg to get as close to my hip as possible and

 now watch, I'm going to rotate his hips up in the air, hook and sweep.

 swept him over, I grab hold of his elbow and I pull to this position.

You can do whatever you want to do at the end, it doesn't really

 more, switch, underneath, I've got the bottom end of the pant mids in this position right

 here, my hips go out and I bring my foot in front of his foot and I slide his shin all

 bar is close to your shin, same thing, make sure his shin is close to your shin.

 Bring the arm back, I can let go, I can sit up, I can turn around, I can go just side

 It's a great sweep guys, give it a go, try it out, send us your feedback, send it off

 Recently, I have traveled to Ecuador, a beautiful country in South America

 The difference between Ecuadorian ceviche and Peruvian ceviche, the most famous one

 whereas the Peruvian ceviche has uncooked fish that cooks in the juices that it gets mixed with

 So if you are concerned about eating seafood or you cannot find seafood of a quality that allows you to eat it raw

 I boiled them myself in a big pot with water and a little bit of salt

 This will come into play when we mix all the ingredients together

 If you don't like cilantro, you can maybe try a little bit of arugula which is also very tasty for this recipe

 I sliced them very thinly and as you can see, they are now in water

 I added some water and salt so that the pungent flavor of the shallot gets drained out

 and a little bit of ketchup because Ecuadorian ceviche is actually red

 but Ecuadorians really like the contrasting textures in their food

 Ecuadorian ceviche is a little bit more soupy than its Peruvian cousin

 This is not very onion-y because we have been putting it in water and salt

 Approximately, I would say, probably a quarter or half a cup of onion

 And we will taste also to see if we need to add any other salt and pepper

 I won't add any spice to this because I like the idea of a sweeter flavor

 And it's also very tangy because of the ketchup and all the juices

 So the whole point is having enough juice for the shrimp to be completely flavored in

 It pops, but it also feels like it's absorbing a little bit of the liquid

 And I look forward to teaching you a lot of the other recipes that I learned

 You want to start creating the core of the bead over towards the left hand

 This allows you to have enough room to build towards the right as you go,

 because it's kind of a wide bead and you don't want to run out of room.

 So she just keeps on building up that clear core until she has the width that

 Then we develop the shape by adding some extra clear and building up the middle.

 then we even out the shape by adding a little bit of extra glass on either side.

 Next, Lisa uses a nice sturdy stringer and begins to apply a decorative pattern

 Now you have to really watch what you're doing when you're applying decoration

 with stringer because it's so easy to melt the stringer into unattractive

 So you'll see that what she does is actually she heats the stringer in the

 So she does not get that stringer to be so hot that she loses control.

 And then she continues applying stringer around the rest of the bead until she's

 You can use a small chunk or you can even just take some gold foil and wad it up

 Pick up the gold with the tip of a clear rod and hold the clear rod at the edge

 The gold will vaporize and then deposit onto your rotating bead.

 It starts as a delicate pink and you can keep going until it becomes more

 You can even go all the way until the whole bead was covered with metallic gold

 So today we're going to go over a stretch that's good for the hip flexors and the extensors.

 Ideally I'd have one of my yoga instructor friends to demonstrate it for you

 And we have Juz hanging out in the background, the oh-so-energetic cheerleader.

 Now we'll demonstrate the right side so that you can see what I'm doing.

 And then slide your left knee back toward the wall behind you and lower it on the floor.

 And always remember too, if you don't look exactly the way that I do demonstrating it,

 So you want to make sure that you're feeling this glute or these hip extensors,

 So once you're down here, you want to hold it for about 30 to 60 seconds to let that glute release.

 And then you're going to bend the left knee and reach around with the left hand.

 Grab the bulkier part of the foot and then pull that foot in toward your glute.

 So we're stretching this guy as well as this extensor at the same time.

 So once you're here, again you want to hold it for about 30 to 60 seconds.

 And once you feel all finished, you just get out of it the same way that you got into it.

 So lift the left knee, find this foot back over, and then just come back to all fours.

 And you always want to do it after your workout, after your muscles have been warmed up.

 But here I've got an apple, some plum, some bananas, a mango, a pear, an orange, a pomegranate and some grapes.

 So we'll put the fruit in a bigger bowl and then add in the banana.

 Let me say at the beginning that one of the key ingredients for a chaat masala is black salt or rock salt.

 Depending on where you live, you may find it difficult to find.

 Half a teaspoon each of salt, ground black pepper and dried mint.

 And a quarter of a teaspoon each of chilli powder and ground cloves.

 Mix them well together with a small spoon and break up any lumps.

 Fruit chaat is incredibly refreshing and as an alternative, instead of adding the orange juice, add in some yoghurt instead.

 When I first started on my path to live food, I was so excited to discover all the potential

 in using vegetables and fruits and nuts and seeds to make delicious dishes like pizza

 a coconut cake made with a Nutella chocolate fudge sauce, frosted with a cashew cream and

 And even effervescent probiotic drinks that are delicious like this kefir.

 And so I was absolutely turned on by raw foods and all the health benefits.

 They made me feel really great, gave me mental clarity, focus, helped me lose weight without

 So it inspired me to develop all my books and recipes so that they would be super simple,

 very fast and easy to make using just a handful of everyday ingredients.

 Now I'm going to make a delicious coconut cake with Nutella hazelnut sauce.

 My cakes aren't made using any flour, wheat, gluten, sugar, butter, eggs, cream, none of

 They're packed full of vitamins and enzymes and minerals and all these things that are

 really healthy for our body, boost our immune system, great for heart health, great for

 So I'll start by putting some of our Brazil nuts and a little bit of salt because I like

 to use a little bit of salt in everything that's sweet to bring out that sweet flavor.

 And dates are a whole fruit, so rather than using sugar, I'm using dates, which are packed

 with potassium and iron and fiber and all these nutrients that are good for us.

 And when you pick them, you want to make sure to get all the seeds out and all the little

 You can see it's starting to bind, but it could probably use a little bit more stickiness,

 I'm just going to add in a little bit of agave because it's a syrup and it's sticky and it'll

 I would say line it with a little bit of coconut oil or olive oil or even some plastic wrap

 I've rubbed a little bit of coconut oil onto the inside of my ring and then take a little

 bit of my batter and press it inside of my ring to make a mini little personal cake.

 And we'll press it firmly so that it will hold its shape when I take it, pull it out.

 Now I'm going to show you how to make a dairy-free cream using cashews.

 And what I'm going to do is blend up some of these beautiful cashews.

 I'm going to add in some coconut oil, which I've actually melted by putting coconut oil

 And so what I did was I just put this jar into another dish of hot water and I turned

 It doesn't have to be liquid so that it will blend in your blender.

 I'm going to add water only as needed because I want it to be thick.

 So I'm going to start with a little bit of water and blend that up and see how that goes.

 So you see cashews work really well because they turn super white and it just looks like

 Now we're going to be making a hazelnut chocolate sauce that is inspired by my love for Nutella.

 I'm going to be using hazelnuts, which are also known as filberts.

 I'm going to put them into my food processor, grind them down into small pieces.

 Okay, now that I have this into a really fine powder, next I'm going to add some agave syrup

 Now that that's mixed up, I'm going to add our chocolate powder.

 And so chocolate is also an FDA superfood so it's really good for us.

 It's really high in antioxidants and it also has theobromine, which actually releases endorphins

 And then to make this more sauce-like, I'm going to add a little splash of water.

 I'm going to take some of my chocolate hazelnut Nutella sauce and layer it into the center

 And then I'm going to take some of my cashew cream and put it on top.

 I'm going to finish off the top with the white cashew cream and frost it basically all around.

 And then I'm just going to sprinkle on some grated fresh coconut onto this.

 So you might want to garnish this with a little bit of strawberry or a little bit of mint

 Hey, welcome to another episode of Shut Up I'm Gonna Teach You Something.

 Today I'm going to show you how I got my wood burning stove operating in my kitchen.

 I'm going to get it lit up and probably cook some beans up on it.

 Some of those beans we stored up in the earlier episodes down in Florida.

 And we'll take one of these cast iron pots and put it up here and put a pot of beans

 Now with these wood burning stoves, the top half right here, this is where you put your

 We take the ashes and we take it out to the rocket stove outside to help insulate around

 Which if you didn't, you want to check that out because it's pretty neat.

 This rag back here, this basically just cuts the flue off I guess.

 The heat will go out and it'll go straight up out if you have it this way.

 We have a temperature gauge on an oven here, which is in Celsius, so you got to do a calculator

 And you can take out the rack if you need a little bit bigger to cook a bird or something.

 To get easier access instead of having to load it all through the front here, I like

 Now, this is just a little tool we use out there when we're burning the...

 So basically, just like any other kind of fire, just put your paper down first.

 I like cooking with twigs because there's twigs all over the place.

 We'll get it started with those, but behind here we have a bunch of wood already cut for

 But we cut it a little sliver and we'll throw one piece in there with the others and that

 So we have our cooler woods and our hotter woods that we can try to control our temperature.

 Now this thing does tend to smoke at first until the chimney gets heated up and it starts

 Now it does have vents on the side if you want to open those up too.

 Like I said, it smokes a little bit at first, but not for long.

 Once we get to this point, we'll go ahead and load some of these smaller logs on here.

 This right here, temperature should be about 150 degrees Celsius once it gets rockin' and

 that'll be a little over 300 degrees, I believe, if I did the calculations correct.

 You just have to rotate it because it gets heated up more on this side than it does on

 I'm going to show you how to get this rust off here in another episode.

 But you can take those off and it'll sit right over there and make your waffles.

 Go ahead and just throw some water in here and throw some beans on.

 And this cast iron sits flat on it, so it's just like having the lid on there.

 For this yummy aloo qeema, we'll need a pound of qeema or ground meat and some

 have used a lot of times, you know it and for all the details please go to

 first step, I've heated oil in my pan and I'm going to add my onions.

 little bit so the garam masala fries before I add meat and rest of the ground

 So next step, I've chopped the tomatoes thinly and to this I'm going to add

 a little bit of water and then cover it and cook it for five minutes covered and

 out of the meat and tomatoes and we have to evaporate the water.

 evaporated and all the oil you can see it's out so it's ready for the next

 Yogurt has evaporated and you can see the oil so I'm going to add four peeled

 pot and lower the heat to low to medium and I'm going to cook it for at least 20

 minutes and then I'm going to check whether the potatoes or aloo are done or

It's healthy, tasty dish and for all my recipes and ingredients please go

 into the water with the potatoes as they cook, 3 hard-boiled eggs that I'm going to chop later,

 So to begin this potato recipe we're going to add our potatoes right into our cooking pan.

 When we bring this to a boil we're going to turn it down to medium-high heat and let the potatoes cook for 20 minutes.

 My potatoes are boiling and now I'm going to turn down the heat to medium-high.

 So I'm taking this over to a colander and I'm going to drain the potatoes

 This way the flavors can infuse in those wonderful hot potatoes while we make our dressings and chop our

 If you would like to add relish with this or if you would like to add

 anything else you enjoy in your potato salad by all means go ahead and add it because this is just a basic potato salad recipe.

 Let me go get the potatoes the celery and onions and we're gonna chop the eggs and add to it.

 that have been well drained into this bowl and make sure you get it all out of the colander.

 And chop your eggs the way you'd like them in your potato salad.

 I like my eggs chopped like this and I'm adding it to the potatoes,

 I have a recipe available on YouTube on how to make the perfect hard-boiled egg.

 So be sure to look for it if you don't know how to make hard-boiled eggs.

 incorporate our potatoes and eggs and onions and celery with our dressing.

 Now this can be served right now or you can put it in the refrigerator and serve it cold.

 Or you might as well just call this one, one of the many reasons I need to eat that diet

 You've got the tart cranberries mixing with the sweet apples and spices, but it's that

 buttery bottom crust combined with the double thick walnut crumb layer that really makes

 Alright, to make the filling you'll need, 12 ounces of cranberries that you've rinsed

 and drained, 3 apples that you've peeled and diced, 2 tablespoons of cornstarch, 1 half

 cup of sugar, 1 teaspoon of apple pie spice, and a teaspoon of cinnamon.

 And for the crust you'll need, 1 and a quarter cups of gluten free Bisquick, 6 tablespoons

 And for the crumb layer, we'll need 1 and a half cups of chopped walnuts, 1 half cup

 of gluten free Bisquick, 4 tablespoons of cold diced butter, 1 half cup of dark brown

 Okay, now to make this, preheat the oven to 350 degrees and grease a 9 inch deep dish

 Okay now to make the crust, in a medium bowl, combine the gluten free Bisquick and butter,

 then using a pastry blender, cut the butter into the Bisquick until you have a texture

 Now stir in the water, starting with about 3 tablespoons, and adding a tablespoon at

 I like to use the back of a spoon to get it fairly evenly distributed, before pressing

 At this point I like to chill the crust while I continue with the other components.

 For the crumb layer, in a medium bowl, stir together the gluten free Bisquick, cinnamon,

 You could either use a pastry blender, or you can just break the butter up between your

 Now stir in the walnuts, and the crumb topping can be set aside while you mix the fruit.

 In a large bowl, stir together the cranberries, apples, cornstarch, sugar, cinnamon, and apple

 Once all the fruit is pretty well coated, pour the mixture into the prepared chilled

 Fill in any bald spots around the edges by moving the fruit pieces around.

 Now at this point, since the pie looked pretty full, I transferred the pie plate onto a foil

 Try to make sure you have it packed down into all the edges and crevices to make it more

 likely that this pie will stay together when you go to slice it.

 Bake the pie for one hour, then remove it from the oven and allow it to cool completely

 to room temperature before refrigerating it to chill completely.

 This pie was sliced after 4 hours of refrigeration, and although it had a very solid consistency,

 It was so bad I had to serve it in a bowl with a dollop of whipped cream.

 But even that slice, or bowl, was incredible, and the other slices came out relatively unharmed.

 And if you don't feel like making a pie crust, this whole thing can be done as an apple cranberry

 Just skip the entire crust making process and continue on with the rest of the instructions.

 And if you'd like to print the recipe, you can always visit my blog in the link below.

 And for brand new videos every Tuesday and Friday, don't forget to subscribe.

 We're going to cook, we're going to make some oatmeal biscuits.

 About two, I'm just going to use up what flour I got, which is what you should do.

 If it says you're cooking something and you've got a half an egg left, just throw it in there.

 Anyways, I've got the oven on over there for 450 degrees and I do have mine turned down

 I'm going to throw some, I'm going to put some pepper off over in there.

 I'm going to put some, I've already put some pepper in there and I'm going to put some

 Anyways, oatmeal biscuits and a little more than two cups of flour in there.

 I'll put you some, put some, about a quarter of a cup is what the recipe calls for, but

 And you're supposed to put some three quarter of a cup of milk in there.

 And I did keep a little bit of flour over there to go on the board.

 And I've done already run this board here through the dishwasher.

 And I did have a couple more requests that I'll follow up on a little bit later with

 But at the present time, I'm just going to work with what I've got.

 And really, I want to have about a pan of biscuits, more or less.

 And they'll be, and a biscuit like this right here, it's not too thick.

 Anytime you're cooking a little scrap of something, put it for the bird.

 You know a little bird's stomach ain't no bigger than about two grains of rice, I'm

 And this last one right here will probably be the first one that I eat.

 The little eye-shaped one right there, it always ends up being the best.

 Okay, now we got the biscuits on the pan and they look good now.

 I'm going to put these in the oven and I'll get back to you with the finished product.

 With a little honey, put your little honey on you under some butter, orange marmalade,

 Quick and easy delicious homemade cupcakes made in minutes without having to turn on

 your oven can be yours with the American Originals electric cupcake maker.

 It allows you to make six large cupcakes in a few easy steps and you even get the accessories

 you need to get creative with the decorating of your cupcakes such as the piping syringe

As for the decorations well you can get these from your local supermarket.

 What's more here at Robert Dyers we've halved the cupcake maker in price from £39.99 to

 Yes indeed all thanks to this machine you can see in front of me.

 electric cupcake maker a really stylish item which would look great in any kitchen.

 this is designed in a similar style to a toasted sandwich maker and it's just as simple to

Now you just wait for the light on top to let you know that the temperature of

Now with the cupcake maker you get 50 cupcake cases to start you off.

 simply close the lid and the machine will take care of the rest.

 it's such a compact machine it just doesn't take up much room does it?

The cupcake maker will cook a batch of cakes from start to finish

 your machine, you get the recipes, 50 cupcake cases and even a decorating kit with 8 nozzles.

 the mixture into the cakes and they're baking away nicely there.

Ok well after around 12 to 15 minutes your cupcakes will be ready.

 Turn the cupcake maker off and then turn the cakes out onto a wire rack to cool down.

 that if you've got little helpers around they're going to so want to take part in this.

 just to say these come separately from the kit but you've got your edible glitter, glace

 cherries, all different sweets you can buy in the supermarkets.

 maker comes with its own decorating kit with 8 nozzles so you can really create a lot of

Now I've got some butter frosting that you can do a really simple swirl

 and you just need to make sure that it's really tightly screwed on and just choose the nozzle

 you want because you've got all these different nozzles over there.

 would imagine you can make your cakes actually quite personal for special events.

 could put a name on there for your child's birthday or I'm thinking a little love heart

 a more of a personal homemade touch which is what you want when you're baking your own

 is you can create so many different variations of the same style of cake.

 cupcakes, coffee flavour, little carrot cakes, citrus, have you tried poppy and seed muffins?

Now once you get this machine home you're going to love trying out all the

 buy lots of fancy flavours in the shop but I always think that it's not the same as making

 it yourself and there's always that sense of achievement when you've baked something

 and then everyone in the house just devours the fruits of your labour.

 always a lot of sugar in them but there's also the chance that there are additives that

 to keep checking labels to see what's inside the cupcakes because you've made them yourself

 so you know that everything that's gone into them is healthy and what you want to be eating.

 And that's also a great thing of course if you've got allergies or you're intolerant to

 certain foods because you can be sure you're not eating anything that you shouldn't be

 and you keep a check at all times on your ingredients of course.

 always when you have that control as to what's going into them and if you're maybe watching

 the calories you can investigate recipes for people slimming because the cupcake maker

 can produce six cakes at a time so you can restrict the amount of temptation around.

 But if you're making larger batches of cakes you can be decorating one batch while the

 other batch is cooked or being cooked and you get decorations like these at your local

 supermarkets they're very easy to come by and the cupcakes also freeze pretty well too.

 Well there is certainly a lot of temptation around with that delicious pile of cupcakes

So to get six large homemade cupcakes without even having to turn on the

 oven get your American Originals electric cupcake maker for half price.

 Alright guys, so it's been quite a while since I've done a video.

 So I know that a lot of people said that they wanted me to make a pulled pork sandwich.

 It's going to be an Asian pulled pork barbecue sandwich with an Asian coleslaw.

 So first what we did is I went to the store, I got some pork shoulder.

 I cut it in half, I seared it on the stove for just a few minutes on both sides.

 I also put in some soy sauce, about two tablespoons of soy sauce and two tablespoons of molasses,

 And as you can see with the fork it is just falling apart, which is awesome.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to take this out, I'm going to shred it, get

 rid of some of the juices on the inside and then we'll put it back in here and then I'm

 Again, that was in all those juices and in the crock pot for about five hours.

 So what I'm taking is both the forks and just going in and ripping it and shredding it apart.

 Like I said, once we're done getting all this taken apart, I'm going to take some of the

 juices out of the crock pot because we don't want too much juice in there.

 And then after I'm done making the barbecue sauce, we're going to toss that in and we're

 So what I did is put a little bit of canola oil, about two tablespoons and then we've

 got a half of a chopped onion and then we've got four cloves of garlic.

 We just want it to get to a nice little brown, I guess you could say, for the next five minutes.

 So now that the onions are a little brown, what you want to do is turn it back down.

 Now we're going to start adding everything for our barbecue sauce.

 We've got, I'm doubling this, we're going to do two cups of ketchup.

 This is where the little Asian part comes in, just a little bit.

 We're going to do about the same thing, about two teaspoons, tablespoons of soy sauce.

 Then for a little bit of spice, we're going to put in about, maybe half a teaspoon of chili powder.

 And to kind of get that smoky flavor, we'll do about, again, half a teaspoon of some paprika.

 Alright, and then we're actually going to add about a third a cup, a little bit less than a third a cup of some fresh honey.

 And then if you want it to be a little spicy, just toss in a few red pepper flakes.

 And what you want to do is you want to get this up to a simmer, and you want to simmer it for about 15 to 20 minutes.

 You're going to see it bubbling, but it's not technically boiling.

 And you want to keep it on low heat, like low to medium, so about...

 So I've got about, so here's your medium and low, so right in between, maybe like a three or four.

 And then what we also want to do is we want to put in about a cup and a half of brown sugar.

 And once we get that in, we'll mix that up and then continue to simmer the barbecue sauce.

 I bought the coleslaw and the red cabbage that was already in the package.

 And I got some bamboo shoots, some radish, and I diced that up.

 I'll put in about, I'm going to say about two cups of mayonnaise.

 I put in some soy sauce, some salt and pepper, and some hoisin.

 And that's just going to be the homemade coleslaw that's going to go on top of the pulled pork sandwich.

 Alright guys, so once the barbecue sauce is done simmering, again, for about 15 to 20 minutes,

 You can get these at the gas station or even at just a regular store, but they're hot pickles.

 Hi, this is Dorothy from TaiChiBosman.com slash rawfoodblog and from favediets.com.

 No, it won't increase your cholesterol, cholesterol or your fat.

 And to start, well we made these raw Cheetos on the last video and I'll show the URL underneath

 This is Trader Joe's 21 seasoning salute but you could just put in salt and pepper.

 Garlic, a touch of cumin, just a little bit because I'm only making a little bit.

 This is some garlic salt, garlic sea salt, a little dash of everything and a tiny dash

 Then we have the nacho cheese sauce which I made on another video and I'm glad to make

 it because I made it thicker which a couple people said they like it thicker.

 And then the sour cream is made with macadamia nuts and what you do is you just take a cup

 That's all with a half a cup of water and to make the sour cream you put in a tablespoon

 of lemon and you let it sit on the counter with a paper towel over it for 8 hours and

 That's all you do to make macadamia nut sour cream or you could make cashew sour cream

 So now we'll concoct our nachos and to do it I'll put the, well we'll do the nacho cheese

 The nacho cheese is one yellow or orangish bell pepper in the blender with juice of half

 You can put in nutritional yeast but I didn't today because I don't want to be totally raw.

 And then some, a little bit of green salsa, some homemade salsa, some homemade sour cream

 So they're smoky and not hot but very rich and they're just really, really good.

 So I'll put a little bit of that on each one, each corner maybe.

 And of course you can find out how to make guacamole from one of my other videos.

 Didn't take the time today just running home from work to make nachos.

 And then the piece de resistance today is organic, raw Peruvian botija olives.

 From Dorothy at TaiChiBosman.com slash rawfoodblog and from favediets.com, enjoy your nachos!

 18 months old and you can see already it's up to my height and I'm 6 foot 5 so

 got to prune them to keep them compact and you need to prune them every year.

 Now's the time, October, November when the jacarandas are in bloom that's a good

 one we're going to try to create a bit of a trunk at the base with a bit of a

 very very low from the base of this tree and it's not going to fit in with the

 type of shape we're going to do so that's the first thing we need to do is

 so I'm going to use a nice sharp pruning saw to make sure I get a really nice

 finish on this and I've decided I'm going to take the cut right back to the

I don't want to leave a messy stub because it's only going to produce

 hard to the trunk so that it's dealt with it's out of the way completely.

 I'm not going to take it off in one go it's a good rule with anything with a

 cut straight away you might risk ripping the bark and we don't want to do that.

 it's just a matter of a little undercut first and then you work your way outward

 from the trunk and take an overcut and that'll break off nicely.

 matter of taking that final cut off and you can do that nice and easily now

 you've got most of the weight off that branch smoothly off it goes.

 lower branch out of the way we're ready to start doing some real shaping.

 can take them back by at least a third to even two thirds if you like depending

 this one back by at least about a half there's no real science to it it's just

 a matter of getting in and taking out the pieces in one go with like that to

 take the bulk away and once we get in and do that we can have a better look at

 branches that cross over the center so that you end up with a vase shaped

 see lots of fresh new growth appearing and before you know it your grevillea

 will be thicker and bushier and ready to give you lots more of those beautiful

 Preheat your oven to 350 degrees and roughly chop 1 1 3 cups of pecans.

 about 8 to 10 minutes, flipping and stirring them about halfway through

 mixing bowl add 1 4th of a cup of butter and 1 1⁄2 a cup of sugar.

Now sprinkle some flour into the bottom of a 9-inch pie plate and

 then line it with either a store-bought pie crust or a homemade one.

 a little more flour on the pie shell and then pour in your mixture.

 bowl add your toasted pecans and 3 4th cup of toffee bits and make sure you use

To prevent the edges of the pie shell from getting too dark you can

 you, you can remove the foil during the last 10 to 15 minutes of baking.

 in the oven at 350 degrees for about 40 minutes or until it sets up.

 combination of the crunchy pecans and the gooey center makes for a really

 Here in the Craft Kitchens we know how much you love crab cakes.

This stuffing mix will not only bind your fish cakes together perfectly,

 it's the only seasoning we'll need because all of the herbs and spices are right in the

Then we add 3 quarters cup of water, a third cup of craft real mayonnaise, and

 2 tablespoons of Klassen sweet pickle relish, and 1 cup of craft shredded cheddar cheese.

 We combine all these ingredients together and then we make our patties.

 in the fridge for about an hour so that they firm up and hold their shape.

 fresh in the fridge for up to 24 hours, so make a few extra for tomorrow's lunch.

 cook your fish cakes, coat a non-stick skillet with cooking spray and heat on medium heat.

 Cook the patties for 3 minutes on each side or until golden brown.

 stretch or exercise or stretches depending on where you are physically and what you're

 any back injuries, of course, consult your doctor before starting any kind of exercise

I think that your doctor will probably like these stretches and these exercises.

 If you aren't already on some kind of physical therapy, you might be doing something similar

 look at them and say that it looks really easy, especially one of them, give it a shot

The first thing that we're going to be doing is something called the Cobra.

 be an exercise depending on where you are if you're just starting out with fitness.

 Both of these things are very, very nice because you're going to be on your tummy the

There's not a lot of moving around for those of you who are injured or something

There's no reason in the world why you can't do these two exercises.

 All you're going to do is just get on your tummy and you're going to put everything flat

Everything is just weighted nice, your feet, your pelvic bone, your tummy,

 the name, you're going to act like a little snake and you're just going to prop yourself

 be up like that, just nice and strong, connected to the ground.

 want to incorporate the Child's Pose, the thing that I showed you guys in one of the

 other back stretching videos, you can just go right back up onto your knees and stretch

 This next thing that we're going to be doing is called the Superman.

 pelvic bone tight on the ground and everything nice and strong.

Be patient with it if you haven't done it before, but it's a lot harder than

 too, like squeezing up when you go up for that last little section.

 exercises and stretches that I suggest to all my clients for training.

 just in your natural position, is to be hunched over like that.

 Hi there, I'm John Christian, and some of you in the forums know me as OverMachoGrande,

 and if you're watching this video, you know me as the creator of the laser helmet known

Times are exciting because this helmet is now available on a much larger

 scale, so I wanted to put together this quick fitting instructions video to help people

 that have never worn a laser helmet before and might be confused as to how this thing

You'll get this thing out of the box and instantly think that this

 helmet is too small, or say out loud, this thing looks like it fits Stewie Griffin's

 than likely will fit your head very well, very well for a laser helmet.

 to fit quite like your favorite baseball cap, or at least not right at first.

 in a little, and then it will fit like a glove, but until then, this is how you adjust

 is designed so that it not only adds stability to the helmet when you're wearing it, but

 you can actually use it to offset a large part of the weight of the diodes.

 the diodes by themselves are practically weightless, but you get a few hundred up there, and all

 of a sudden you start noticing the brush bristles pushing into your head.

The principle is that you make the headband very tight so it won't

 move, and then position it slightly higher than you'd wear it normally.

 the diodes up just a little bit, which results in less weight on the bristles and more support

 but in order to make it so that the headband can fit tight enough, you may have to trim

 up this black piece because it might be slightly too long for those of you with heads that

So, when you put on this helmet, you want to put it on so that the bristles

In fact, you can use this as a hairbrush if you really wanted to.

 take the time to do this a few times so you know what I'm talking about here.

 on and tighten the headband and work the headband down into a place that feels comfortable for

Now, the first time you do this, you might have to slowly work it down the side

 of your head, but it will break in and it'll get so it falls just like it fell with this

 very top is lifting off the surface at this point because remember, the weight of all

They're going to be pressing down on the top part and that weight

 of the diodes plus the flexibility of this helmet is what will make this helmet conform

 maybe tightening it up again, you can see what I'm talking about how you can use the

 on the head where you want it now and now you can use these side flaps around the top

 you can bring the top closer to the headband or you can push it further away from the headband

 helmet until you have the best distance between the two pieces.

You'll find that relatively quickly you'll forget that it's even on your

This not only makes it feel less awkward, but it will eventually make

 it so that the weight will be dispersed very equally over the bristles.

 and they don't dig into my scalp from the weight of the diodes.

 new Laser Messiah as possible because I know that there are a lot of people out there who

 if the helmet doesn't seem to be fitting perfectly, the weight of the diodes coupled with the

 flexibility of the design will make it so it will match the curvature of your head,

 and rip the foam, or if I've made a mistake that I didn't catch, use super glue control

 glue together better with super glue than the skin on your fingers.

 Hey guys, today I'm going to show you how to conceal dark circles underneath your eyes.

 The best way to show you how to do this is to have a dark, kind of smudged makeup look

 underneath my eyes already so you can see that really dark shade and how I'm going to

 This will also work great if you drop any powder under your eyes and it gets kind of

 The first thing you're going to want to do is use a yellow tinted concealer and you're

 just going to gently pat that under your eyes with clean fingers.

 Now a concealer with a yellow tint is going to cancel out any dark shades like black or

 purple or blue which is really going to help us hide those dark circles under our eyes.

 Make sure that you use a really gentle pressure when applying this to this area.

 Now you can see how that kind of neutralizes the dark shade that was on there earlier.

 Obviously we don't want yellow circles underneath our eyes either.

 So you're going to take your foundation and apply that right over top of the yellow based

 And you can see how quickly that just gets rid of the dark area.

 So just make sure that you have a really great yellow based concealer and also a foundation

 So you'll apply gently the yellow based concealer underneath your eyes on any dark areas and

 then you'll just apply the foundation over it and you can see how well that conceals

 So this is how you would get rid of dark circles under your eyes.

 Okay guys, so I had a couple of requests for me to show you how I do the technique with

 I'm going to use these watercolor paints, but you can also use, I've used Distress inks,

 you can use Glimmer Mist, you can use alcohol inks, you can use any of those things that

 So that's what these are, is the watercolors, and I decided to do like a Valentine's theme.

 I'm also going to use this brush, but you can paint on them with just a regular paint

 You can stamp on it, I'll show you what it looks like when I stamp on it.

 To me the possibilities are really endless as far as this goes.

 So I usually put down a piece of wax paper first, just to protect my surface, and then

 I'm going to squirt the paper towel, that's what this is, is a paper towel, and it's two-ply.

 And then I'm going to squirt the whole surface of it with just regular water first, just

 Then I'm going to take the brush, and I'm going to start with the lightest color first,

 and I actually want some white, so I'm just going to stamp it on here, which you probably

 I kind of like it too, with the pink I had to mix red and white to get the pink.

 I like the, in the bottom, a lot of times it ends up with this extra stuff that didn't

 And obviously you can just stamp as much or as little as you want.

 And so now, actually, I'm going to take one of these, who is, Heidi Swapp stamps, and

 I'm going to use a paintbrush, and I'm just going to paint it on to the stamp, and just

 So then you would set this aside to dry, and it'll take a while to dry, because it's pretty

 Anyway, so then when you get done you'll have something like this.

 This one, I just didn't do the black, and I also sprayed Glimmer Mist over the top of

 So then I'm going to use Mod Podge, which I just stuck in the middle, and paint it on.

 I don't know if I mentioned, to me the whole point in using this technique is just that

 it adds a lot of really neat texture to whatever you're working with.

 It's basically a really neat textured paper that you're making.

 I think I seen it on a show that, I believe the girl's name was Tracy Batista, I think.

 And I don't remember how exactly she did it, or what she used, but she used some paper

 And so I just thought it was kind of neat and ended up doing it my own version.

 But I think that she had some pretty neat art journals and things like that that she

 So basically you're just going to lay the paper towel down over the top, and then you'd

 And obviously it varies based on the paper that you put on the background.

 You know one thing I've never figured out though, is like I don't know if you would

 want to do this if you're looking for something really archival.

 Because I can never figure out if Mod Podge is actually acid free or not.

 These are the bigger Heidi Swap hearts and then on black paper so it's obviously darker.

 It's just a really neat technique because it has the feel of it.

 This one is the same thing except I used Distress Inks on this one which is a lot more concentrated.

 And then I actually just threw glitter over the top of it after I had Mod Podged it to

 Okay, now that we've got our tip top on, our handle is finished curing, it's dry.

 The next step is actually marking your guides, where your guides are going to go on your

 No guide chart is absolutely perfect for each blank, but that being said, you would be fine,

 more than fine, wrapping a rod as is with a guide spacing chart.

 Once you come pre-ground, as far as the feet go, you can see that that foot is tapered

 So all I'm going to do is just take a file of any kind, some kind of fine tooth file,

 You want to be careful when you're doing this not to nick the ring up here.

 Once you have it ground down like this, go ahead and take a black sharpie and just go

 That way the black is flush all the way, and you'll see that silver shining through your

 You're building a custom rod for a reason, so let's take it a step further and make sure

 The way to do that is to actually take your guides, tape them on the blank, and then we're

 going to install our reel, run the line through the rod, bend the rod, and we're going to

 Just look at the line as it goes through the guides and look for any sharp angles.

 The general rule of thumb for a traditional build is one guide for every foot in length

 So here we have a six foot six blank plus one is going to make this seven guides plus

 Generally speaking, if you're using the length of the blank plus one, you're going to be

 We can move a guide up or back or two guides up or back, or if that won't work, add a guide.

 You want that line to follow the blank in a nice smooth arc without any sharp angles.

 Alright, now that we know our guide spacing is correct, what we're going to do is go ahead

 and install our guides with a little bit of guide foot adhesive to hold our guides onto

 It's much lighter than, or much cheaper than holding a lighter on the whole time.

 So what I'm going to do is just take my guide foot right here and just heat it a little

 bit and then take this guide foot adhesive and just smear it on the bottom.

 There's no tape that you have to take off or get in your way or tape residue to gunk

 I'm going to sit here and lay out all the guides in a matter of no time.

 So again, just lightly heat the guide foot, press it on the adhesive stick, and press

 And while I'm doing this, I'm trying to keep an eye on my tip top and my reel seat just

 So now we've got those laid out, we'll go ahead and wrap our guides.

 Hello everyone, welcome to my channel and I wanted to show you guys before I start this

 I'm going to have these brushes available on my website, my online store.

 Also the links to my Facebook, my Twitter, my Instagram are in the description box so

 It's a beautiful pink with very very fine glitter in it and I love it.

 The reason I use this cover is because I was already thinking of the next design I'm going

 It really isn't necessary because it's going to be covered with nail polish but I just

 wanted that under because of the next design that I was going to do.

 I left the thumb and the ring finger without that color because I'm going to use clear

 Extremely thin layer because I'm going to encapsulate something on that finger.

 Making sure it's very clean around to cut down on that filing time.

 Now on the ring finger I'm going to use the crystal clear acrylic also.

 I love to buy my gold leaf on eBay because it comes in little sheets.

 They also sell it at Michaels but it already comes ripped up into pieces and I like the

 square sheets because I can cut it to any shape or form that I want.

 So you know wherever you prefer but gold leaf is not hard to find at all.

 Always cleanse it very very well before polishing to assure that the polish will last longer.

 This little brush that I just showed you, I love it to clean around the nail.

 And I will admit when I am painting my own nails I can be very messy.

 Especially when I'm using my right hand to polish my left hand.

 But when I'm doing my own, especially as you can see right here.

 Let me tell you that lately I've really been into acrylic rhinestones.

 I don't even mind that they're acrylic because they shine, they're wonderful.

 And as you can see I put UV gel, UV gel, soak off gel actually I'm sorry.

 And I'm also going to be having different shaped stones on my website.

 I should be having a lot of new things up on my website in about a week and a half to two weeks.

 So I want to have it all in before I actually place it on my website.

 And I just sealed all the rhinestones and now I'm applying the UV gel over the polish.

 I will add that the polish has to be 100% dry all the way through.

 If you recreate it make sure you tag me on Facebook, Instagram or Twitter.

 I'm here with Stephanie Girdlestone of Fire Mountain Gems and Beads.

 And you know, Stephanie, today's show is all about Asian influence.

 And you brought along a fantastic necklace that really encompasses like Asian beads and Asian coins, actually.

 Well, I like coins because they bring in kind of that mixed metal.

 In jewelry years ago, it used to be if you're wearing gold, you're wearing gold.

 And it's really gone away from that now where you can spend time actually mixing the metals and mixing things up.

 And with coins, there's sometimes copper, there's gold, there's silver.

 Even in coin form, it's different shapes and textures and stuff.

 So I thought, instead of just putting these in a jar in my kitchen table, let's go ahead and try to do something with them.

 Well, you're going to show us how to make this fantastic necklace.

 And it's kind of a hobbyist kind of craft thing for using with metal, thin metal discs or certain coins.

 So the key to this little tool is don't try to force the coin off by wiggling it or anything.

 Actually, unwind it all the way and allow the coin to drop off.

 You know, if you wiggle it, then you loosen it and weaken it a little bit.

 And it makes a perfect little hole in the coin with no rough edges.

 And as you can see from this one here, it actually makes a larger hole and a smaller hole.

 So you can have two different sizes depending on what kind of material you're going to be using.

And if you're going to hang a lot of drops from it, you might want a larger hole or something.

 I do caution you to be careful with the coins because real dense metals don't do very well with this tool.

 And then from there I went on and I took some chain and I actually hung the chain here.

 And then I attached some of the coins at the top sort of as a place marker.

 Because it gives kind of a nice finished look to a piece that's a little bit more eclectic.

 So this one is the start of the third chain that I have on there.

 And I'm going to center that kind of like a frame inside a larger jump ring.

 And then I'm going to take a smaller jump ring and I'm going to attach it through the hole.

 And with jump rings, you know, you want to always twist sideways.

 Of course because you're using it in a chain going across, you've made the holes in both sides of the coin.

 So if you were using it as a drop, then obviously you're going to just do it in one side.

 And then I would just continue to go ahead and place jump rings on here wherever I felt like doing it.

 As you notice on the big necklace, I put crystals or all kinds of things.

 And then much like I did with the finished chain, I just go back and I finish that.

 You can even eyeball it if you want it to be a little bit more asymmetrical instead of so symmetrical.

 You know what would be interesting is if you use the drops, if you can see them putting the drops on the necklace.

 Because that's the kind of thing that I like to learn how to do.

 Well, I'll tell you the greatest tip I can give you, Katina, that I learned in doing this necklace, is to hang it on a display head of some kind.

 Because when you're laying the chain down, you never know which direction it's going.

 So you can get a really good idea of what it's going to look like when it's finished.

 And then you're just going to close it up just like you would if you were doing it down there.

 And then I would just place that and I would kind of take a look at it like I did with the other necklace and just say, yeah, I like that there.

 And the good thing is, like you said, that if you don't like it there, you can just take it off.

 Yeah, this one actually started with a different drop and I just couldn't make it work.

 It just wasn't talking to me and I changed the drop and the necklace came right together.

 So you can see, once again, let's go to the finished project and you can see what the necklace looks like when all of the pieces are all put together.

 And what's great also is that you brought along with you some other examples of incorporating different types of coin jewelry.

 We're looking at this necklace that's right in front of that one.

 That's the gold one and I used some gold beads on that and just made sort of independent drops, some pearls and some crystals on that one as well.

 And that has a different kind of Chinese replica coin that's on it.

 And then, of course, you have the matching earrings in front of it.

 You should always have matching earrings when you're making a set.

 Well, you know, we have a show coming up later on where we talk about incorporating trends and with knitting and also with coins.

 And the sound that they make is beautiful when coins are jingling together.

 And with the Chinese replica coins, it just doesn't get any better.

 And you can see you can get all kinds of varieties and just order them together.

 And all you can do is just sit there and just put them together.

 And then one of my favorites is attaching it to a different medium, like a resin.

 This was just a metal piece, and I put resin on top of it and then attached in the coins,

 just kind of in a different fashion, just to do something different with coins.

 You know, if you're going to make the necklace, why not go ahead and continue the suite and have your earrings and bracelet.

 And it's great, like you were saying, if you're traveling, too, and you have all these leftover pieces.

 So today I am doing a quick DIY tutorial and this is actually a tip for your nail polish.

 So if you're like me and sometimes you open your nail polish and you kind of hear like

 a crunchy sound and the nail polish what happens is it hardens around like the ridge of the

 nail polish and leaves that crusty stuff, the crusty nail polish around that and it's

 You might not know that this causes that many problems but the first thing is that when

 you try to scrub on the lid sometimes it's hard and it takes a while and it just feels

 like it won't budge and also if that gets to a point where it's really bad your lid

 can like get stuck on there from all the nail polish and you're going to throw away a perfectly

 So also what can happen is you know when, you obviously don't just take it out and put

 You can get that crusty stuff on the nail, on the brush and then you try to paint it

 will leave that crusty stuff on your nails and you're just like getting the smoothest

 So I'm not sure you had to fix that really easy, it doesn't really take that much money,

 probably stuff you have already in your house that you can do this with, it doesn't take

 Okay so things you're going to be needing are obviously your nail polish with the disgusting

 crusty stuff, you're going to be needing some nail polish remover, cotton pad or cotton

 ball, I personally suggest cotton pads, they're not that hard to find, pretty much wherever

 you can find cotton balls you can find these, q-tip and petroleum jelly and also getting

 So first thing you're going to do is take off the cap of the nail polish, just get as

 much as you can off, put it aside on a paper towel or something so it doesn't get all over.

 Then you're going to take your cotton pad and you're going to take your nail polish

 remover, put some on and you don't want to put like so much, like when you do this it's

 like dripping out because you don't want it to get inside of there, but you're just going

 to kind of put it on the top and kind of like make a little hat for it and just twist it.

 So you're getting all that nail polish off the sides and make sure you get all of it

 Okay, and as you can see it's already looking a little bit cleaner.

 So now what you're going to do is get your q-tip and your petroleum jelly and you're

 going to get a little bit on there, not that much at all, just kind of twist it in there

 And you're just going to take the q-tip and just swirl it around.

 If you dig it, try not to get any on the top, if you do want a little bit on there just

 put it on and then wipe it off because you don't want to wipe off your brush and have

 So you can see that's screwed on a lot more easier than before and when I take it off

 So that's just really quick and easy, didn't take that long at all and it's probably stuff

 If you want any more tutorials, request them, if you have any questions, comment below.

 Hello everybody, so today we are going to be doing the final touches of the lead for How Bizarre.

 So what we'll start by doing is we were going long long long short short short long long long

So to warm up for the actual rhythm we're going to do a slightly different

 pattern which is long long short then three shorts then long long short short short short

 long long short short short short long long short short short short.

 and then we're just going to go through that four times for practice and it'll sound like one two

Like that all the way down long long short then short short short.

Do that a few times until you're comfortable with the pattern of

 long long short short short short and then we'll go on to the next step which is just to add the

So while we've been practicing this we've just been going one two three one two three

In the actual song there's a bit of a swing to it so it sounds like

 um and that swing really comes from the way that you lean on those two longs.

 when we're going long long short short short short those ones are all quite even all the way down.

 So those shorts are all fairly evenly paced but when we go long long short there's a slight

 difference in the length and the emphasis on each of those ones and rather than sort of trying to

 count one and a two and a three and a four and that kind of thing I think it's easier just to

So I'm going to play it through four times nice and slow with that

 kind of swing feel and just see if you can play along and pick it up.

 and if you're playing the lead part you count three and start so it goes one two three.

 If you play the rhythm part you count to four before you start so it'll be one two three four.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to play both the rhythm and the lead together with the help of

Yeah and you can play the rhythm if you want to or you can play the lead

Remembering that you start after three for the lead and after four for the rhythm.

 Hey guys, so look if this happens to you one day and you have to replace the bumper cover

 this is what we're going to go over how to replace a bumper cover and I think this is

 going to cross between probably a 99 and a 06 somewhere in that neighborhood.

 Pretty much any Grand Am they're all built pretty much the same.

 The GT's as well as the SE's and SE1's, 2 doors and 4 doors, the nose clips, there might

 Alright so the first thing I'm going to do is I'm going to take this cover off, get you

 something like this, this is how these work, and they have these little flat spots on them.

 That's all you do, you just put it in there, pop it up, and of course it slides in when

 you want it to go back in, you push it in, makes it wider so it stays.

 Alright so I'm going to pop 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 of these and I'll be right back and we'll

 The fastener is all off, so it's got these little tabs underneath it, you just kind of

 I'll probably just set these up here just because, no big deal.

 Alright so the next thing I'm going to be concerned myself with is this headlight.

 So without further ado, actually you know what I might, yeah I think I do need to get

 Alright so give me one second, let me get what I need and I'll show you how to do that.

 Alright guys so look, take a look at these tabs right here, all you do is you just come

 And there's another one right here, that one went a little too easy, and you just slide

 That's how they said in the book, that's how it's supposed to, oh boy this is nice, they

 have that little thing wired in there, I guess they didn't know how to snatch it but snap

 Okay so, now that this is done you can see, yours is probably going to have two fasteners

 right here, you'd pull those out just like the other ones, this one does not have it

 Alright so take a look right here, and you're going to see a little, you're going to see

 Yeah, and basically that's what tightens up this, then there's going to be one, two, three

 bolts here, and then on the very bottom another three bolts and some snaps on the other side.

 So what I'm going to do now guys is I'm going to go ahead and pull these bolts out, and

 I'm going to get the bumper cover here and show you where you can actually physically

 One of the tips I'll give you is when you're taking the three bolts out right here, turn

 your wheel all the way in and remove the cover on the back here, and you can do them all

 by hand very easily, and then just the same thing with the ones on the bottom, no problem

 But anyway, let me go ahead and get this off and I'm going to point them all out to you,

 So I got all the fasteners out, and all you're going to need is a 10mm ratchet, a 10mm ratcheting

 A couple key notes here, of course I was able to come in from the back side and here so

 I had both of my hands grouped behind it doing this, but you definitely need a WD-40, the

 three fasteners that are right here, these are all 10mm, they come from the bottom.

 This right here, just giving you an idea, they're all kind of rusted in there and they're

 kind of long and just kind of stay with it, but WD-40, deep creeper, whatever you want

 to do, PB Blaster, do something because these right here are just, it's really, it's just

 Alright, let me just set that right back where it's supposed to be.

 On the back here, you're going to use the pry bar, pop, pop, pop, 3 10mm right here,

 There's actually 9 fasteners per side, you just disconnect those and it slides completely

 off, absolutely no problem and I don't know, how long would you say we've been doing this?

 Yeah, this is about a 20 minute job, 30 minute job, so don't sweat it if you've got to do

 Oh, and this, while this is out, let me show you this real quick.

 This is the clip that will hold it if you're not watching, so you got to pop it out of

 Because on the back side of this, it snaps into it and it holds the front of the fender

 Other than that's it, there's your horn in case anybody needs to change their horn.

 I'll come back and show you what it looks like when I got it back in, just to make sure

 The only thing I would suggest is definitely put the WD-40 or PB Blaster on those before

 The rest of this stuff man, just goes right together just like glue.

 In the next few minutes, we will show you the steps necessary using our revolutionary chip and scratch system

 that will put you on the road to a high-paying, successful business as a Premier Paint 2000 specialist.

 The first step is to show you how to remove scratches, scuffs, and scrapes from any vehicle using our proprietary scratch remover.

 Our specially formulated scratch compound and 3-inch buffer pad allows you to concentrate on individual scratches

 and literally remove those scratches, scrapes, and scuffs without wet-sanding.

 Our formula allows you to move the clear coat and factory paint back into the scratch and achieve an almost invisible finish.

 Here are the proprietary chemicals that have made us a leader in the industry.

 Now Ashley will show you how we mix our proprietary chemicals with the factory paint to achieve a color match and finish second to none in this industry.

 After mixing the necessary colors for the factory match, we add pearls and our proprietary enhancing agent and metallic modifier to complete the formula.

 Everything is mixed in a one-ounce container on the scale to get the exact factory match.

 We mix only enough paint, about one-quarter ounce, to address one car at a time.

 After completing the formula, we prepare the surface using wax remover and barrier coat to clean and prepare the surface for a permanent bond.

 Then we apply the paint with our Teflon hybrid applicator and allow the paint to dry.

 Then we use our proprietary excess remover to remove paint around the chips and scratches, leaving only the permanently bonded paint in the areas necessary to complete the process.

 Our last step is to use our diamond cut wax, which is a wipe-on, wipe-off system that takes less than ten minutes to dry.

 And together with the paint repair leaves a long-lasting finish that makes the vehicle front-line ready in about 30 to 45 minutes.

 We at Premier Paint 2000 are dedicated and committed to the success of our people by providing the best training, marketing, equipment, and business programs available to develop the skills necessary to make you a success in the automotive appearance industry.

 As in any market segment, if you develop a better product than the status you're in, you'll be a successful automotive manufacturer.

 We have invested a great deal of time, research, and expense in the development of a system that is far superior to the competition and that has given our specialists a great advantage in the marketplace.

 We at Premier Paint 2000 take great pride in running our business in a straightforward and honest approach.

 Your success is highly dependent on the quality and integrity of your products.

 And I cleaned it, took off the scale, and then wrapped it with paper.

 Because it's frozen, I try to get out as much water as possible.

 I'm going to turn it really low to slow cook it and let it form a crust.

 When you finish cooking, then I'll put it in the boiler for like five minutes.

 I want to make sure I go around to make sure that it's not sticking.

 Hi everybody, in this video I want to share with you a very very good homemade facial

 mask for oily skin which we're gonna make from lemon and green peas only.

 Lemon is full of rich in vitamin C, I'm sure you know that, and if you have any trauma

 on your face like cuts, small cuts and damages, do not use it because it will irritate your

 But if your face is clean, has nothing, no cuts, in very good condition, you can use

 So, I already boiled the green peas and mashed them to save the video time, here's how it

 And we're gonna take only tablespoon of green peas, here, just like that, and put it in

 So we're gonna just take lemon just like that, without any blenders, no squeezing,

 For oily skin it's very awesome mask because the green peas, they help to dry up skin a

 And they're also very good for aging skin, if you have both of them, aging and also it's

 But if you're a young girl, 20s and 30s, so you just can use it as a mask for oily skin

 First, if you have green peas, just boil it, small half cup, and you can keep it in fridge,

 just put in a, cover it with plastic bag so this does not contact with oxygen.

 Because green peas has vitamin C too, but not too much, of course.

 And this mask is just so easy to make and risk-free, you can make it anytime.

 And the lemon also helps to dry up a little bit skin, but it keeps also skin moisturized

 And even if you have pieces of lemon and if you're both working in the house, not working,

 like cooking, if you have a little bit of time and your hands has not any cuts, you

 can just take a lemon and rub into your skin, just like that, and squeeze a little bit juice,

 even the, take the pill, if you use all this and you have a little bit pill, just other

 side and it also has a little bit lemon juice, you just can put it on your hands and nails,

 it will make them soft, will make them very soft and moisturize them very good.

 So do not throw away any pills, try them to use for your beauty.

 You can just apply it on skin and do whatever you want in the house, but the best thing

 is use it when you go to take shower, because you psychologically prepare yourself to take

 So this you can just apply and while you take a shower for 15 minutes, you are not talking,

 you are not working, you are not doing anything, lay down in the bathtub and enjoy your mask.

 Your nurse has to relax at that time, the same thing how they do it in the spa.

 So very easy to make and very fast and very, very good results from that.

 Alright today we're going to cook pork carnitas and I've already cut up the meat.

 You just want to make sure that there's no deep deep pockets of fat in it.

 Alright, alright so what we got here going in here is two cups of water.

 It was a Boston butt so you can pretty much use any size you want.

 Two bay leaves, a half a teaspoon of pepper, a teaspoon of oregano, Mexican oregano that

 is, a teaspoon of salt, a teaspoon of cumin, I got two tablespoons of lemon, fresh lemon,

 Alright and then I'm going to put the orange pieces in there, the leftover pieces.

 Alright so what I did is I preheated my oven to 300 degrees or I'm preheating it now actually.

 Alright so what I'm going to do is I'm going to put this on the stove and I'm going to

 And that basically is just going to give it a head start in the oven.

 So bring it to a simmer, then I'm going to put it in the 300 degree oven for two hours

 and then about halfway through I'll probably move the meat around a little bit.

 Alright it's been exactly two hours and this is what you want to see.

 We're going to remove all the orange peels, the onion and all that stuff.

 You just want the meat in there and you can throw the onion if you want and all this other

 All we're going to do is just save the liquid and then we're going to cook this liquid down.

 Because what we're going to do is we're going to pull this meat apart.

 Basically just kind of squish it around like that, cut in half a couple times like that.

 When we get all that meat in there, when we reduce the liquid down, we're going to pour

 So while this is reducing, we're over here, Jasmine's pulling that apart and we're just

 going through and getting a little bit of fat pieces off because we don't really like

 I'm going to guess for maybe about 10 minutes but you just want the top to get crusty, you

 You've got the flat blade here, which makes your ribbons, and you've got

 So in order to make zucchini pasta, you're going to take your Spiralife in one hand and your zucchini in the other hand.

 Now you're going to turn in a smooth and consistent clockwise motion.

 Because you've got this cone shape, you're going to notice that it's going to take a couple of turns before you get the long strands

 But soon you'll see that these strands become exactly what you're looking for.

 At a certain point, you're going to want to start using your pushing cap.

 So place your cap on this flat space that you created with your knife.

 This is going to allow you to continue to push without getting your fingers toward the blades.

All you need to do is throw this in some heated pasta sauce and you have a beautiful,

 Check out our next video where we are going to talk about how to make spirals out of carrots.

 If you like pancakes for breakfast you have come to the right place because I have extra special pancakes which I'm going to make for you.

 They're semolina pancakes and if you've never had these before they're light, they're delicious, they're airy and best of all they're completely dairy free.

 Semolina flour straight in there and in terms of dry ingredients we've got a tiny touch of plain flour.

 A tiny touch of some baking powder going in and for a bit of sweetness we've got some caster sugar.

 Now those are our dry ingredients except I have one more, it's yeast.

 And once you've got the yeast in there we are talking wet ingredients.

 Because there is no milk we are relying on the rise from the yeast in there and to activate the yeast I have some warm water.

 Turn it off and you should be left with the most beautiful batter.

 This now needs to rest for about an hour or so just until it rises up and becomes bubbly and it becomes quite yeasty.

 And it's the yeastiness and the semolina which is going to give this great flavour.

 So I do have one which has been resting and you can see that when it's been resting it becomes all frothy and bubbly and delicious.

 The griddle pan means I can do more pancakes at once so I'm just going to brush it with some rapeseed oil.

While these cook off on the griddle pan you want to make sure you get those nice little holes, those little bubbles.

 And once you have them rising up and you've got a lovely golden colour underneath they're ready to flip right on over.

 Now this recipe comes inspired from one of my favourite cafes in Dublin called Brother Hubbard.

 And they serve their semolina pancakes with a little bit of rhubarb, some yogurt and some pistachios and honey over the top.

 Little bit of that poached rhubarb, my favourite little thing at the moment.

 You can check out how to make this poached rhubarb if you click on the link right here.

 We're going to get in there with some of our lovely poached rhubarb on the side.

 And you've got crunchiness, you've got texture, you've got that lovely sweet nutty flavour.

 I'm kind of making this up as I go along but it works, it works.

 Nice bit of sprig on the top and then just drizzle it with a nice bit of Irish honey.

 A little bit of mint, bit of yogurt, bit of pistachio, bit of honey.

If you've had American style pancakes, these babies will blow them out of the water.

 They're dairy free, I think they're vegan as well but don't use the yogurt and you'll be grand.

 Subscribe to this channel for lots more great breakfast recipes.

 Alright, hello, my name is Ty Mitchell and I'd like to welcome y'all today.

 know, some of the most common problems on the second barrel is anticipation.

 is we're running directly to a fence and it creates that anticipation.

 to go over a few things that are going to help you and your horse to get you ready in

Now that puts me in a straight line going straight across to my second barrel.

 Now what I want to be looking at is that four to six foot pocket.

 exercise that will help you if your horse is anticipating second barrel.

 this first barrel, there again, overturn it, but instead of turning this second barrel,

 I'm going to come on through the fence, turning him away from the barrel, and going back to

You don't want to ever overdo this, but wait and let that horse tell you.

 If he's still anticipating when you go over there, that means you need to keep doing it.

Now one of the biggest problems that we see in slow work is people

 will let a horse cheat them just a little bit, whether it's at a trot or a lope, and

You want to make sure that when you're in a practice pen, you want to keep

 in your slow work to exaggerate that overturn and get that horse where he's lining up.

 else that's the most common problem is we'll drop right about here, go to the saddle horn.

 is stiff or not pointing the turn, not rounding out, I'll carry him back through, lope him

 around that barrel slightly outside the tracks, get him to where they're smooth and fluid.

 At the beginning when I was doing this, this horse was being a little bit choppy.

 the end, he gets to where he's lining up, leaving the barrel, and that's a great exercise

 to do, especially if you have a horse that's maybe a little stiff in that rib cage.

 A culinary director from Texas Day Brazil Restaurants is here to share his special marinade

 It is time for a lunch break and joining us today is Evandro Carignano, the culinary director

 of Texas Day Brazil Restaurants, those Brazilian steakhouses with locations throughout the

 Leg of lamb is one of the 15 cuts that we have at Texas Day Brazil.

 We also have the flank steak, the lamb chops, sausage, filet mignon, filet mignon wrapped

 This is one of the cuts a lot of people, they ask us how we get so much flavor out of it.

 So because this is a nice piece of meat, but without the proper marinade, it's not going

 I just, of the alert, not too much rosemary because that's going to be too intense.

 And one of the secrets for the marinade that makes Brazil is red wine.

 Another trick here for the leg of lamb, that's something that you can make for Christmas,

 Are you going to, I'm just curious, you're going to hang around and cook those lamb chops

 When you have it all together, the blend or the marinade is going to look something like

 Is that how long you guys usually, your meats marinate or even longer?

 And you're going to roast these at 325, 350 for about 45 minutes, one hour.

 No, that's the color comes out because all the fat is going to come out.

 And then you're going to have a nice, nice, nice, nice, nice, nice, nice, nice, nice, nice,

 Can we just slice that and see what it looks like on the inside?

 Just so I can have a little taste and just let everybody at home know how good it is.

 And what we're going to do is we're going to cut this into little pieces.

 So first of all, I'm going to be showing you how to get the makeup look.

 I'm using my Bobbi Brown gel eyeliner in the color Espresso Ink.

 I chose brown instead of black because Sandy's makeup was definitely very low key in the

 Then after that, I'm just picking up a small smudge brush and smudging that out very well

 Up next, I'm going to be picking up a light brown eyeshadow on a really, really small

 eyeshadow brush and I'm just going to apply that on the outer V of both my eyes.

 Then using my Sigma blending brush, I'm going to blend that out to make sure I don't have

 Once you're done blending, and blending is key in this look, you're just going to apply

 I chose a really rosy pink, almost mauve rose for this color because that's what she was

 Now for the lips, I chose my Revlon Just Bit and Kissable Lip Stain.

 I chose a lip stain instead of a lipstick because Sandy's lip color definitely wasn't

 that harsh either, so this is more similar to what she was wearing.

 So basically what you're going to do is curl this baby up as best as you can.

 It has a clip, but I'm not going to be using it because I don't really need it.

 So once you start curling, just going to spray each curl with a little bit of hairspray after

 So I'm just skipping parts around here because I'm pretty sure you guys know how to curl

 So make sure you use a volumizing hairspray because we want volume!

 And once you have curled your entire hair, you're going to do a side part and then I'm

 just grabbing a section of my hair on the opposite side of the part to just add more

 volume and I'm pinning that onto the back of my head with bobby pins.

 Okay, so for my shirt, I chose a long sleeve shirt that I had in my closet.

 All you need to make sure is that it falls off your shoulder so you can just work with

 Now for the pants, you can use any black leggings that you have.

 I have these shiny ones which went perfect because she was kind of wearing leather pants.

 So what you're going to need aside from the shirt and the leggings is a belt to make sure

 you can accentuate your waist just like she had in the movie or in the song I guess.

 Okay, so for your shoes, you're going to need red high heels because that's what she was

 But if you're not a high heel person or if you're going to be running around a lot, you

 can definitely wear sneakers or flats with this and it'll still look good.

 If you guys try it out, make sure to send me pictures and if you enjoyed it, make sure

 I send a million kisses your way and I'll talk to you guys really soon.

John Martinez with Coastal Sports Wellness Medical Center in San Diego, California.

 Today we'll be talking about iliotibial band or IT band stretches.

 There's a foam roller IT band stretch, there's the figure four iliotibial band stretch, and

 Now the foam roller stretch is the one stretch where you actually need a piece of equipment

 You'll need one of those six inch firm foam rollers that you can pick up at any good running

 You're going to use your arms and your top leg to support your weight.

 If you roll across the knee you may irritate the iliotibial band.

 If you look at our photo here, this is an example of how you would stretch out or roll

 out the right IT band is you use your left leg or your upper leg to help support your

 Now the figure four iliotibial band stretch you do in a seated position and this is an

 You'd cross your right leg onto the left, you lean forward and you'd feel the stretch

 Now obviously you can also do this on the left side and it's important to make sure

 that you continue to do these stretches on the left and the right side.

 Now the standing IT band stretch, you do standing and you cross the injured leg behind the other

 leg, you extend the arms up and stretch away from the injured side and continue the stretch

 Hold this stretch for about five to ten seconds and then repeat it.

 So in this example we have the right leg crossed behind the left leg, we stretch over to the

 left side and continue that stretch all the way down to the floor or as far as you can

 Now the seated IT band or iliotibial band stretch, you'll do sitting on the floor.

 You're going to bend and cross that injured leg over the other leg and hold the injured

 You're going to twist your upper body towards the injured side and hold that stretch again

 And in this photo we're stretching out the right IT band, we've got that right leg crossed

 on over, holding it with the left elbow and then twisting back towards the right side.

John Martinez with Coastal Sports Wellness Medical Center and these are some

 If you want to download a free handout with detailed instructions on these iliotibial

 band stretches, just go to our website at www.CoastalSportsMedicine.com backslash ITB

 and put in your information and you'll be able to download a free copy of the iliotibial

 Now one of the things you want to keep in mind when doing your side walls is you want to

 This is so that you can debulk the nail and make sure that the product

 Remember we're not doing fake nails, we're doing nail enhancements.

 Okay, and then four is going to be the front part of that nail.

 And now I'm going to go with my buffer, also a hundred eighty grit.

 Multi-day whitewater kayaking trips can provide some of the most memorable times you'll ever

 have in a boat, but a little preparation to ensure you have the right gear and packed

 in the right way are essential to make sure you have a good time.

 Deciding what to take and what to leave behind is often the hardest part.

 You never want to travel without a safety pin kit, breakdown paddle, first aid kit,

 You can decide how luxurious you go within each category depending on where you are going

 Once you know what you're taking, it's important to determine how to keep things dry, and that

 Hard cases work well for some items, but aren't as easy to pack in your kayak as softer cases

 Other bags work well for items that you'd like to keep dry, like your tent, but where

 Ideally you want to spread the weight evenly throughout the bow and stern.

 I usually pull out my bulkhead and put heavier items that I won't need throughout the day

 The stern end is usually packed with my sleeping system and any extra clothes, then camera

 If you decide to go this route, make sure the items in your cockpit will not prevent

 One way to make it more safe is to leave those items loose instead of tying them in.

 It means they'll swim when you do, but it's better than being stuck in your kayak.

 I've seen people drill small holes in their blades and attach them to the foot screw bulkhead

 I usually use a mesh laundry bag to keep all the pieces together and to be able to clip them in.

 When you're packing for an expedition or a night or weekend away, the pounds can really

 Check the weight range on your kayak to ensure that with all the gear you're bringing, plus

 Boats handle very differently when they're loaded, so it's a good idea to try it out

 For tips on selecting the best gear for overnight kayak trips, go to RapidMag.com.

 I am a big fan of Harry Potter and always wonder what the pumpkin juice tastes like

 so I was searching for the recipe and most of it always mention about the pumpkin puree or pumpkin pie filling

 which I cannot find in my country so I am making it from scratch from the real pumpkin

 the skin is super hard and I use a big knife like that so be careful

 or at least the pumpkin are submerged in the water and boil until the pumpkin is tender

 and pass it through a strainer to obtain a smooth puree texture

 it requires a lot of work but it's worth because it's Harry Potter pumpkin juice anyway so it's okay

 this yields about 2 cups of puree and I am also adding 2 cups of water from boiling the pumpkin

 and then mix well and put in the freezer for 3 hours but if you want to make a hot drink or

 the not cold drink you just skip this part and use the mixture directly

 add in 4 cups of apple juice and spices, the cloves, grape nutmeg and cinnamon powder

 so this is the drink that Harry Potter and friends like to drink

 thank you for watching please like and subscribe more videos are coming

 Today I'm going to show you what else you can do with leftover bread crusts or stale

 Now I'm not using stale bread today because I don't have any, it never lasts that long.

 I have milk, 3 eggs, and a couple of tablespoons of brown sugar.

 We are going to make something, I don't know if it's been done before, but I've never heard

 What we're going to do is I'm just going to crack these, oh I almost forgot the cinnamon.

 Now we only have a couple of tablespoons of flour because we don't really want a lot of

 You're going to use more eggs than you normally would in pancakes because you're holding that

 And we're going to use about, well here's our 3 tablespoons of flour.

 So I'm going to beat this in the blender and then we'll be back.

 So I'm going to say, because I'm still developing this recipe, so I'm going to say for every

 cup and a half of bread crumbs you have, you use one egg and a quarter cup of milk or a

 Now we just stir this in here and it's going to make like a pudding-y kind of dough.

 So now what we're going to do is we're just going to fry them like pancakes.

 The ones I made the other day for my husband were a little more liquid-y and a little more

 For the simple reason is, is you've got, these are thicker than pancakes and they've got

 So when they brown up on, when these firm up, I'll just flip them over and we'll be

 I've got one frying pan or one burner that cooks hotter than the other.

 And when I've got a batch of these in a plate in the oven, we'll be back to show you them.

 And now Mom and I are going to sit down and have some breakfast.

 Now I made these the other day and they, for Howie, and they were a little thinner, like

 You can add dried apples or you can add, you know, you don't have to add anything at all.

 What's up guys, today I'm going to show you how to fix some dips in your pavers.

 First thing you want to do is power wash your pavers, get all the algae or grass or whatever

 Then the second thing you want to do is you want to locate where the dips are in your

 The best way to do that is to use a 2x4 and what you can do with a 2x4, you can just,

 You can see that part of my paver is pretty much lower and then it goes up right there.

 So what you want to do is you want to grab a piece of chalk and mark the area.

 I put a big circle so now I know that's where my dip is and after you find out all the dips

 on your pavers, what you can start doing then is start taking out the paver one at a time.

 Be careful when you take them out, I used a little crowbar and really you're not supposed

 to use a hammer, you're probably better off with a rubber mallet.

 If you don't have one, what you can do is just get a piece of wood and you can put that

 Alright, after you got your pavers out, what you want to do is you want to fill them up

 All purpose sand works good too, this is a little bit more pricier, I figured I'd give

 Alright, after you get out your pavers, you're going to add sand to your leveling spot and

 then after you add the sand, what you want to do is you want to get a paver and compact

 that sand in so that way when you put in the pavers, the pavers don't sink.

 Once you have it leveled out, then what you can do is start putting your pavers back and

 it is kind of important to remember how you took them out because different pavers have

 So what you can do is put that first level in, go ahead and grab your 2x4 that you've

 been using and as you can see, I've got still a little bit of gap over there but nevertheless

 And what you can do is you've got one of them or a couple of them that are a little bit

 higher than the other regardless, you can grab your rubber mallet or like I said in

 my case, what I'm doing is just using a piece of wood and just give it a nice little couple

 You don't want to hit them too hard, all you want to do is push them down a little bit

 in the sand and then you keep going and eventually when you get done, this is the area I just

 got done doing, you have a nice flush paver set and once you get done with that, your

 Now you can use multiple different soils to fill in the cracks but this perma sand that

 Once it gets wet, it hardens and it stops all the algae and the grass and stuff from

 growing in between your pavers and instead of having to do this every couple of years,

 this will probably last every 4 or 5 years so I'm not exactly sure on how long it will

 last but the ones I did up front, it's been like about 4 years and I haven't had to do

 any service to it so hopefully this video helps you guys out and see you guys later.

A winning hand of some of the most awesomest papers I have ever seen.

 And they're just these little tiny squares of beautiful designs of paper and they come in all different looks.

 I'm going to use this piece of paper right here to help me embellish a belt buckle.

 Yeah, believe it or not I'm going to use some paper on a belt buckle.

 Now first of all, let's talk about the tools that you're going to need.

 This is an old brooch and I have this one right here that I'm going to use for this one.

 And you're going to need, what I used is some glossy accents and it's a clear acrylic coating.

 And it dries hard and yet clear so you can see an image come through it.

 A lot of people say, Tio, what kind of glue can I use for this or that?

 Alright, you can also use like a jewelry metal glue if you like.

 But something that will work from, you know, for a metal surface.

 Okay, first of all, I laid my paper and kind of maneuvered it around over the belt buckle

 And, you know, if you don't mind, since I already have one this color and I only have this belt buckle,

 I'm going to choose a different paper so that I don't have two belt buckles that look exactly the same.

 I went in with my fingernail and I just smashed the paper down into the crevice.

 And I'm going to go over just a titch because I don't want to be short inside the belt buckle.

 In order to kind of get the paper all smoothed out and everything, I actually glued this to that.

 And the reason why is that way I can smooth out the paper and maneuver it and put it wherever it needs to be before I add my acrylic.

Just smash the glue, move it all over the place and just get your image smashed down and as smooth as you possibly can.

 Okay, so now I'm going to go ahead and glue this to the belt buckle.

 Another thing about using this type of glue, you know, just a water-based glue,

 because it allows you to move it around before it dries really quick and have you place your paper exactly where you want it.

 Okay, so now I've placed my paper in there and then all I'm going to do is take the clear, or the glossy accent and the clear,

 And just move it around a little bit, and if you need to, have a toothpick standing by,

 so that you can poke holes in your air bubbles or move something around if you need to.

 This is a water-based acrylic, by the way, so it's got a really nice clean-up to it, if you get it on your hands.

 Now, it's going to be hard to lay this flat because it has one of these little hooks right there,

 You want to find something that will help you keep it nice and flat.

 You don't have a whole lot of time to maneuver and move this around.

 Okay, so you do want to make sure that you get your air bubbles out fairly quickly and you have your surface nice and smooth.

 Make sure you keep the lid on this when you're done because it dries very quickly at the tip.

 Okay, so now all I have to do is let this dry, and then I'll add my brooch.

 And what I did with this brooch is I went, you can see, to the back,

 and I just used a pair of, you know, good heavy-duty needle-nose pliers

 and ripped off the actual pin part, ripped off the little holder to the pin so that I could try and get it as flat as I possibly could.

 Just be careful when you do that, not twisting and turning, because some of this older jewelry will bend really easily.

 When it's dry, I'm going to place that on there, and I'm going to use my E6000.

 And then I'm going to end up with a hot, rocking belt buckle that looks just like this.

 So, by the way, there are links on the website for you to go and order the actual belt buckle pieces and the papers.

 And make sure you use that special code, that's TO2010, when you check out.

 And that way, these fine people at HHH Enterprises do not charge you shipping.

 Okay, you got that squeaking noise whenever you go over a bump.

 Whenever you go over a bump and you go er er er er and you go over to a mechanic they

 are going to tell you it's your ball joint and you need to get your ball joint replaced.

 Alright, all you got to do is get, you know, oh yeah, three or four hundred dollars.

 You want to spray right there, okay, and you want to spray the rubber gasket right over

 I don't even think you need to take off your tie for this but I figured I'd make this video

 I'm not going to do an instructional video but hold up for one second.

 I don't think you need the straw but I'll use the straw anyway.

 So, even if it looks messy, even in the cold or the heat, it's not going to fail you.

 This video will help you understand more about the SOG PowerAssist B66N.

 You can see here the blade is available on the outside of the tool.

 Without opening up the tool, you have a spring-assisted blade right here on a plain edge.

 On the other side, another blade available, again spring-assisted, with a serrated edge.

 Also, in this particular multi-tool, you'll see the compound leverage.

 The tool is put together with hex bolts as well, so it can be disassembled.

 This particular one has a V-cutter, as well as a number of other items inside.

 A Phillips screwdriver, a regular screwdriver, file, can opener.

 V-cutter is a patented feature as well that allows you to cut webbing or strip wires very quickly.

 That's a really important feature that other multi-tools don't have.

 The locking feature is great because the tool won't close up in your hand when you're using it.

 Those covers there on the handles provide some comfort as well, make it easy to grip the tool.

 So I'll show you compound leverage and the advantages here just by clipping a washer.

 I put a washer in here, and without much pressure at all, I'm able to snap this washer in half.

 As with many SOG items, this particular one comes with a lifetime warranty.

 Today I'm going to show you how to apply our Ultra Cushion Replacement Earpads for both QC2 and QC15 headphones.

 This is the packaging of our Ultra Cushion Replacement Earpads.

 This is the instructions and warning information and a nice picture here.

 Because these sets has replaced everything that directly touch your skin, which is important.

 Accumulate dust and skin oil, bacteria, germs and everything inside.

 All you need to do is just peel the double-sided tape which is included in this mat.

 To apply the pads, all you need to notice is actually this is the ring.

 But if you don't, maybe you need to just press it a little bit harder.

 Just make sure it goes beneath all the 8 tabs in the inner of the ear cup.

 It takes just about a minute to change both of your ear pads and the inner mats.

 You don't want to keep them unwashed or uncleaned or unchanged for like 2 years.

 Please check my other videos about other ear pads and accessories.

 Hey folks, this is Vinnie the Wrench here at VeloWrench Bike Shop.

 I'm going to go over today something that everybody wants to keep from you.

 We're going to show you how to do your own tune-up in between your full-service tune-ups.

 Keep your bike working at optimum performance in between those full-service tune-ups.

 You're going to start at the front, work your way to the back just like we do here at the shop.

 Shake it around a little bit and make sure that there's no grinding, no stiffness.

 You're going to hear your cables, but that's all you should hear moving around.

 It kind of sounds like sand in there, but if there isn't, it's good to go.

 Have a towel with you the whole time you're working on your bike because you can wipe things down while you're going.

 It also helps you kind of keep a reference on where you've been.

 Next thing you want to look at is you want to look at your wheel and how it sits inside.

 In between your brake pads here, you're going to give it a spin.

 You want to make sure that the wheel isn't moving a whole lot left and right.

 If it is, it's probably time to bring it in and get the wheels trued.

 You want to look at your brake pads and make sure they're centered on both sides so that your caliper is in the center.

 Make sure that the toe or the way your brake pads are angled is true and correct on both sides.

 Depending on the brake types you have, you want the front of the pad to hit first and then the back of the pad.

 When you're done with that, just go ahead and wipe that area down and move on to the next.

 It's always a good idea to wipe down the sides of the wheel, too.

Make sure it's good to go, that there's nothing that needs to be replaced on it.

 Move things around and make sure everything on the bike is operating the way it should.

Make sure that there's no frays, especially in these areas here where they meet up with something.

 You can also, with the cassette up on the rear, you can relieve a couple of the gears like this to where it's loose.

 You can pull it out and it just gives you a chance to inspect everything and make sure that nothing is loose.

We use that to wipe down all the bikes, including yours when you're here for a tune-up.

 Make sure there's no cracks in here and make sure that they have good flex so that they don't break while you're riding and your bottle fall out on you.

 Then we're going to get to the actual tune-up part on your bike here.

 This keeps the derailleur from going too far out or too far in and the chain falling off.

 All the tuning, how fast your derailleurs work and how fast and crisp the shifting in, has everything to do with the tension on this cable and nothing else.

 If you start adjusting these, it's almost impossible to get them back, bring it into your shop, let it set up before it costs you a whole lot.

 This, which is called your B-screw adjustment, this sets the distance that the jockey wheels are away from the cassette.

 From there on out, if you have a little bit of hunting, in other words, if shifting doesn't sound quite right, you hear that noise?

 If it's doing it when you're going down or when you're going up.

 That means it needs to add tension, turn it towards the wheel until that sound goes away.

 Once the sound goes away, go back to your shifter, shift it down, shift it back up, make sure that everything is good.

 If it's the opposite way, in other words, you go to shift down and it hangs up and it doesn't want to go, it means there's too much tension.

 Go to your rear wheel, do the same thing you did on the front wheel.

 Same way you do on the, that I showed you earlier on your pre-bike inspection.

 Do the same exact thing when you're doing your tune-up inspection.

 Lube it, dry it off, clean the chain, off you go, you've tuned up your own bike.

 Yeah, but I use the other one too but then I have to take all the skin off and all these things.

 I'm sure it's pretty enough water but I'm going to throw in some more.

 She would put it in the mocajete and she would grind it and she would drink it.

 There's some kind of a diet that you can do and a lot of it is drinking garlic just like that.

 Yeah, she would drink it all the time and yet they had found that she had a little bit of diabetes

 I'm going to put some in the chili anyway, you know, when I cook the chili.

 And then I'm going to put a little salt, some salt in the water.

 Yeah, I think it's better two hours because that way you let it, the meat will get really, you know,

 because you have to take out the meat out of the broth and then you have to like shred it.

 Like I got some chilies and I was like, I'm going to rinse them a little.

 seafood appetizers and it is the Japanese baked mussels with spicy dynamite sauce.

 I love making these at home because they're so simple to make and cheap too.

 market and they are frozen so we'll need to thaw them and rinse them under some cold water.

 I just pulled this bag of mussels out from this box and you can see here that there's

So not a bad price, only six or seven dollars and you get this many.

 Next we're going to detach the mussel from its shell and you just basically pull it right

And if you want you can chop the mussels into smaller pieces or leave

 them whole, which I'm going to leave them whole because that's how I like to eat them.

 with Japanese mayonnaise, but if you can't find it for some reason or you don't feel

 like making a trip to the Asian market, just go ahead and use American mayonnaise, like

I have squeezed some of the Japanese mayo into this bowl here and

See how it's going to change color to almost like an orange-y salmon color?

 chopped green onions, shredded cheddar cheese, and panko bread crumbs.

 with them and then you can decide on what you like to garnish your mussels with.

 know about you all, but whenever I eat these baked mussels, I like to give it a squeeze

 Okay guys, my kids are home from school, so I made this plate of baked mussels for them.

 You can see here that I have chopped the meat into smaller pieces, which will make it easier

 I just wanted to show you that you can make them this way as well.

 I'm Brian Johnson and in this episode of Better Cocktails at Home, we're gonna be doing the Tom Collins cocktail.

 You can easily make it with like a London dry, very common also, but back in the day

And then finally some simple syrup, probably about half an ounce.

 And really, I mean, this is, you're adding gin to lemonade basically.

 You know, it's one of those cocktails where you can make this and when you make it right and properly

 And so, that's one of the reasons I love making the Tom Collins.

 And, yeah, depending on what kind of gin you use, you can really kind of tweak it there and play with it.

 evil invention made up by music teachers to make children hate music.

 It wasn't until I was in my late teens that I actually figured out

 So, the reason that we learn major scales, or scales in general,

 is because they give us a group of notes that sound really good in a key.

 So, if we look at the key of G, say, which we'll use for this example today,

 so you don't have to worry about it too much because it doesn't get used very often,

 Now, a couple of good examples of some songs that you might want to try this out over

 but that's the basic chord progression, and all of those chords are in the key of G.

 Look mate, I'm going to do this lesson about the G major scale,

 do you mind if the guy's just practice doing solos over the bits where you're singing?

 like put the track on and use this G major scale to solo over the top.

 I'm going to run through with you how to play that solo at scale in a sec.

 Another really good song is a Pink Floyd song called Wish You Were Here,

 that's another one that's a really good one, all of the chords are in the key of G,

 Even a lot of Chili Peppers songs, funnily enough for such a modern, funky band,

 So, the next step for you before you start improvising is actually to learn the scale.

 Now, I'm a really, really big believer that you should learn one scale position first,

 which would be down here, starting with your second finger on the third fret, this one.

 Now, all of these are on my website, which is www.justinguitar.com

 and check out position one, there's a nice little neck diagram there.

 So, have a go at learning that scale, just playing it up and down.

 Try and concentrate on making nice small movements with your left hand fingers.

 Doesn't look anywhere near as neat and tidy as if I do it that way.

 Yeah, so definitely try and keep your left hand finger movement small.

 As far as your right hand goes, you should practice your alternate picking

 However, you might like to take on the part three of the major scales,

 To start off with, just get down position one of G major scale at the third fret,

 Have a bit of fun with that, and I'll see you soon for part two.

 I have the step by step pictures, but the video I think will clarify the steps just

 So I've cut out my leather, and I've got the strips already prepped, and I've taped it

 Painting tape is nice because it's strong and it doesn't leave residue, but it doesn't

 Basically you want to ignore this end and just braid, and then you'll unravel it later.

 You can detangle part way, like halfway through, or you can detangle after your two sets of

 So basically when you want to detangle, you take this and you follow the top string over

 So it just goes, you follow this through the hole right here, and then you follow this

 And it gets tight, so if you want to do another set, then you want to tighten everything up

 And now that I've got that kind of scrunched up there, I'm going to start on my next set.

 And see, since it's already trying to curl in, it'll pretty much tell you where it wants

 So I'm going to just pull that out and finish my second set of three.

 One, two, and the third one on this set, three, it unravels itself.

 So you can see, it's pretty straightforward as long as you just count to three each time

 I haven't tried this, but I suspect it would work well with more numbers.

 But I think I would stick to five and seven rather than four or six strands.

 So in here I'm just going back, retracing my steps, and just making the spacing even.

 So as you make it into a bracelet or whatever, you might want to get it wet or just wear

 it and let it kind of wet wear into the shape you're going to have it on.

 If you're going to do purse handles, I would suggest getting it wet and probably pressing

 Thanks for watching and read moisseslin.com for more tutorials and printables and creative

 Three close buddies have an amazing success in the restaurant business, decide to open

 their own place, serve an incredibly delicious food and the freshest seasonal ingredients.

 Well they're tucked away just off 75 and West Paces Ferry Road and these boys are delivering

 The question I get asked the most is what kind of food do you serve, what kind of food

 We're trying to cook delicious food so local ingredients play a big part.

 We're a southern restaurant because we use southern ingredients because we cook locally

 but your collard greens might be in the form of kimchi as opposed to the collards that

 You can cross a lot of boundaries, you can cook in a lot of different styles, make it

 You guys are regulars at Local 3, what's so great about this place?

 It's always something different, it's a dish that you know but they always put a little

 So cheese is a big part and an amazing part of the dining experience and what's so interesting

 We try and do four distinct cheeses, all artisanally made, nothing mass produced and really just

 keep it fresh and interesting and it's really, really, really amazing how far we've come

 and the amazing cheeses that are being produced in the south and we try and highlight those.

 We're serving this kind of elote style, Mexican street corn style.

 It's a raw sweet corn that we've pureed with a little bit of homemade mayonnaise.

 So we've got a little bit of corn that we've just pickled, some fresh cotija cheese, a

 little bit of chopped cilantro and then we have our North Georgia mountain trout, elote

 Now let's go behind the scenes with Chef and behold what is simply one of the most amazing

 This is a map to our kitchen that was left for us by our friends at Joelle when we inherited

 In all seriousness, you've cooked in kitchens like this big, right?

 This is 6,500 square feet, which to give people an idea, we own two other restaurants and

 this kitchen alone has more square feet than either of the other restaurants.

 Super lucky we inherited it and now we're trying to make the best of it.

 Do folks who eat here ever get a chance to see the kitchen though?

 You take it out, you eat, and you come back as many times as you want.

 Speaking of eating in the kitchen, you've got one of the great chef's tables anywhere

 All right, we're going to go and we're going to take a look at our prep kitchen.

 This is the behind the scenes part where we do all the kind of nitty gritty stuff.

 It's for soup, use it for a lot of sauces, a lot of stuff around the kitchen.

 All right, it says I'm supposed to be at the coffee station right now.

 All right, now that makes sense because what's this bad boy right here?

 When we get half pigs or whole animals in, we can cut them all up.

 This is a half a pig, so you got a little shoulder here, ham, and then bacon down here.

 They're always making incredible new drinks that I've never tried.

 I like to be adventurous, so it really pushes my boundaries a little bit, which is fun.

 It's my poison of choice, and so I wanted to kind of showcase that.

 We are in the South, so instead of having, you know, ten of each thing,

 I just wanted to have the best bourbon selection in the entire country,

 And I want you to leave going, wow, that was an amusement ride like none I've ever had before.

 And it was something to remember, because you remember experiences.

 When I want you to come in, I want you to feel warm and comfortable.

 I want you to feel closed off from the world in your own little Oz,

 Then using a potato peeler, peel the taro root, just like a potato.

 So in a pot, boil some water and put the pork belly in and boil for about 5 minutes.

 This will help get rid of some of the impurities as well as get rid of some of the fat.

 Then add 1 teaspoon of chopped ginger and 1 teaspoon of chopped garlic.

 Give it a quick stir fry, and then move the ginger and garlic to one side and put the

 So grill each side of the pork belly for about 2 to 3 minutes, including the sides.

 Then take the pan off and put another pan with boiling water to steam the pork belly.

 So for the sauce, you need 1 teaspoon of salt, 1 tablespoon of dark soy sauce, 1 teaspoon

 of sesame oil, 1 tablespoon of oyster sauce, and 1 teaspoon of sugar.

 Be sure to add the ginger and garlic that you stir fried into the sauce as well.

 Dip the pork belly in the sauce and arrange between 2 slices of taro root and set it in

 Continue to alternate the pork belly and the taro root into the bowl.

 Make sure the skin side of the pork belly is facing down towards the bowl.

 Put any of the remaining sauce to cover the pork and the taro root.

 The water in the pan must be boiling by now, so put the dish in the pan and cover with

 Steam for about 30 minutes or longer if you want more tender taro root.

 Then take a larger dish to cover the first dish and flip it over.

 But make sure you remember to strain some of the liquid out before you flip it over.

 Welcome back to another Monday OnlineDrummer.com drum lesson, I'm Nate Brown.

 In this drum lesson you'll need the sheet music called Two Most Common Patterns in Drumming.

 I call these patterns Pattern A and Pattern B like you can see on the sheet.

 And these two patterns play a lot but maybe don't often recognize it or realize it.

 You can stick that right, right left or you can use alternating sticking.

 And number 1 there shows Pattern A played over and over for two measures.

 And you could say e there but don't play it if you're having trouble with the spacing.

 Number 2 shows a useful application of this Pattern A in a drum beat.

 So it's important to realize that it's all based off of that simple Pattern A. We're

 just moving it around to different drums and sometimes playing two sticks at once.

 That way your next hand's ready to hit right, right, left, right, right, left, right, left.

 I would do the same sticking right, right, left, right, right, left, right, right, left,

 Number 6 gives an example of Pattern B. And if you look back above, you can see Pattern

 Pattern B starts with the two 16th notes and then the 8th note is played.

 1 e and a 2 e and a 4 e and a 1 e and a 2 e and a 3 e and a 4 e and a.

 This is when we use both Patterns A and B and put them together.

 A lot of people want to put a pause in between each of the patterns.

 And number 12 is an interesting use of this with the bass drum.

 Sometimes it's more difficult to pick out the patterns when they're being played on

 But if you start when you're listening to your songs or reading your sheet music.

 Learning them, being able to recognize them is going to make you a better player overall.

 It's designed to help you learn to read from beginner through advanced.

 Hi, I'm Jason LeBond, the chef-cuisine here at Black & Blue Steakhouse on Albernie Street,

 Today by popular demand we are showing you the Steakhouse Nachos we do here at Black

 We're going to start with the chili and here we have some diced strip loin, tenderloin,

 We'll go ahead and add our house spice, Swiss Cheshire sauce, red wine vinegar, and our

 So we just want to turn it down very low, allow it to come to a gentle simmer.

 And maybe 10 minutes, once the consistency is nice of the sauce, which you'll see, then

 And if you have access to a mandolin, it's really an ideal way to cut the chip.

 Wash off the excess starch from the potato, which is going to enable us to get a nice,

 If you don't have a professional deep fryer at home, you can always set up a nice, big

 When we pull them out, we season them with a little bit of our house spice as well.

 And you see how that sauce has just thickened up really nice and rich.

 As we assemble it, we'll start to stack our chips up nice and high.

 And the best way to go about eating it in the restaurant when you come and have it

 Today we are going to be talking about replacing the brakes and the rotors on a 2009 Dodge

 To get started you are going to need to make sure that you have a socket wrench with a

 You also need either a combination wrench with an open ended wrench for the 15mm size

 So to get started we will need to take off the caliper bolts that hold the calipers on

 To do that there are two bolts on the back side of the caliper back here that we are

 going to get to and once we get those off we can go from there and take the brake pads

 Once you get to where those bolts can come out by hand just go ahead and unscrew them

 both and then you don't want to let the calipers just hang there by themselves with the brake

 What I like to do is put a piece of wire or twine or something, twist it around a little

 bit, make it a hanging spot for it and that way you are not hanging it by just itself

 Now you are ready to take the caliper housing and brake pads off.

 So to do that there are two other bigger bolts on the back side here that you will

 Alright, now that you have those bolts loosened go ahead and completely take them out by hand.

 Just take them out and then your entire caliper housing should come.

 You will have to squeeze the brakes out a little bit but it should come right off of

 Now that we have the caliper housing off I like to use a lot of this brake clean parts

 cleaner to clean off all of the gunk that has been on there for a long time.

 Before we take the rotor off and get it all ready to go I like to put on some CRC disc

 brake quiet spray because it has to dry for at least 10 minutes.

 While we wait for the disc brake quiet spray to dry we can go ahead and take the old rotor

 off and you will just pop that bad boy out of there and the brake reservoir is right

 So I told you to keep your old brakes because you are going to use those to compress the

 And just so I don't mess anything up you want to put a brake pad on each side and then put

 the C-clamp and then you are going to turn the C-clamp and tighten it up until it will

 One thing I like to do to keep the rotors from sticking if I ever have to take them

 Alright now that we have put the brake and caliper grease on our rotor and hub we can

 The disc brake quiet on the back of your brake pad should be dry.

 What you want to do is go ahead and put them in the caliper housing.

 Now that we have our brake pads back on our housing here we need to go ahead and reinstall

 Now that we have our caliper housing back on there or brake pad housing on there we

 You will notice probably that the two bolts that came out of holding that calipers in

 That is because they are using the blue colored thread locker as it is not permanent and it

 We now have it completely compressed so just make sure that you push the brake pads in

 all the way that they can go so that they make room for the calipers that they have

 You may have to push in each of the nut or the bolt receivers on each side of it here

 Once you have done that you just need to make sure that you get the bolts all put back in

 You need to go back up and close up the brake fluid reservoir and clean up any mess you

 And then go ahead and start up your car just into the electronic on position.

 And then you will want to pump the brake a few times so that you can reseat the brake

 Also if you have put up a wire or something here you can go ahead and take it off now

 You should be good to go for putting on the tire and rim and taking it for a test drive.

It's Mara and I'm back today to show you guys another natural hair video.

 So today I'm going to show you guys this awesome style great for ladies with a TWA, short transitioning hair, anything like that.

 So if you're interested in seeing how I achieve this style, just keep on watching guys.

I know that you hear a lot of naturals say start your hairstyles on damp hair,

 but for this style because you want super defined, tight curls, I say start on wet hair.

 and I'm using regular olive oil as my oil and Eco Styler gel as my gel.

 As you see right here, I'm just raking my products through and then using my Denman brush.

 I don't want any of my natural curl pattern to show through, so I want to tame that with my Denman brush.

As you see, I wrap my hair, the ends around the straw, and then I just rolled it up and secured it with a bobby pin.

 So you're going to repeat that process throughout your whole entire head.

Well, by the time I had gotten to the front, it wasn't wet anymore,

 so I'm just going to spray that down to dampen it up and then finish my set.

 I left these straws in for about two days, and right here I'm just going to show you the takedown.

 I did not apply any oil to my hands or to my hair to take it down because I was pretty liberal with the product when I set my hair,

 So this is what my hair looks like after I take out all of the straws.

 And next what I'm going to do is just separate each one of my curls until I get to the desired look.

 I don't want a ton of frizz, and I don't want it to be big hair because I kind of want it to last a little bit longer,

 so I'm only going to separate each curl about one time, and it gives me the fullness that I like because I do have fairly thick hair.

 But if you feel like you're not getting the kind of volume that you need by separating once, I will say definitely do it two or three times.

 Now I really love this style, but I will say that it is not long-lasting.

 This style is going to last me about two to three days before I have to reset it,

 which I'll probably do with some twists, but it's great for special occasions or if you're just looking for something different to do with your hair.

 So once my curls are separated to my liking, what I'm going to do is just go through with my fingertips and fluff at the roots.

 And I'm only doing this to give it the appearance of a little bit more volume and length.

 Because the curls are so defined, it does make it look like my hair is much shorter than it is.

It was a really easy style, even though it was a bit time-consuming.

 Please make sure that you check the description box for any information that you need.

 And if you're not subscribed, please subscribe and share this video.

 Hey it's PoppyBeauty387 bringing you simple but elegant hairstyles.

 Today we will be showing a tutorial on how to achieve K-pop star Eunice hairstyle from

 So if you want to know how to recreate this look, keep watching.

 So to start everything off, what you'll need is a curler, scissors, rubber bands, some

 clips, and preferably a ribbon or yarn or lay anything you like to put in your hair.

 Take a section of your hair from the top of your head and brush through it.

 Now, take a ribbon, and we're using a green one because we like green.

 And don't worry about the extra piece of ribbon at the top, we will cut it off afterwards.

 And make sure as you're braiding you braid tightly because the tighter the braid, the

 As you reach the end, before you tie the braid with an elastic band like we did here, before

 doing that, take your scissors and cut the ribbon as long as you want.

 Now, you have to cut the extra ribbon from the top of the braid.

 Probably have someone else do it for you or stand in the mirror and look at yourself before you do.

 Now, to make the hairstyle look more effortless, it's one extra step.

 Blend the braid into your hair by placing a chunk of hair over the top of the braid

 So now, we'll be demonstrating how to achieve the curls that we had in this look.

 And make sure to spray heat protectant in your hair before curling.

 So to achieve evenness, the loose curls, wrap your hair around the barrel and hold it for 10 seconds.

 Curl the rest of your hair and try to go in different directions to make the curls appear more natural and effortless.

 After all the hair is curled, repeat the process of creating the ribbon braid once again.

 Take a section of your hair and create a braid using the ribbon as the third strand of the braid.

 And with this side, the braid is going to start in the middle unlike where on the other side, we started closer to the forehead.

 Secure the braid with an elastic band and cut the ribbon from the top.

 And lastly, blend the rest of your hair into the braid to give it a more effortless and natural look.

 And to be more like Eunice, add an extra braid underneath your hair coming so that it looks more like Eunice.

 So, if you like this video, please give a thumbs up and subscribe for more.

 Thank you for watching and please follow us on Instagram at poppybeauty387.

 It's Jared Montz former pro and founder of OnlineSoccerAcademy.com.

 Soccer bowling is a fun way to work on your inside of the foot passing technique.

 This Online Soccer Academy training video is geared towards players ages 5-8 and their

 It of course can be applied to players of all ages and abilities.

 If you are an older player watching this and you are confident in your passing technique

 then play this game using your opposite foot or using the chip pass or the shooting technique.

 This is a fun game so challenge yourself on how you can participate.

 You are going to need 4 cones, either use real cones or 4 water bottle cones for this

 10 yards ahead of you, you want 3 cones spread out and then place a ball on top of each cone.

 If you don't have cones that can hold a ball then stand up a water bottle and knock it

 You want to pass the ball with the inside of your foot and try to knock over your bowling

 If you are a player practicing by yourself, time yourself and then try to beat your time

 If you are a coach watching this you can do this at practice with multiple players in

 For tips on how to properly pass with the inside of your foot watch my Online Soccer

 Like, rate and share this video if you did and don't forget to Subscribe on YouTube

 Players all over the world use it and you can do game reviews and track your progress.

 Post a comment, let me know what you think and how it worked for you?

 Until next time remember if you Believe in it® and back that up with hard work, anything

 What I did was my crinkles are starting to fall but I haven't been keeping them up like

 So what I'm doing now is showing you something you can do even if your crinkles haven't dropped

 so if your curls haven't dropped you can do this and your curls are fresh or your crinkles

 As you can see they kind of have dropped since the first time I've shown what I did with

 Actually it's like a little headband that you get from Walmart and I just doubled it

 Some people just flip their hair downward and then do a ponytail.

 I kind of comb it up because sometimes they bunch together and it's a mess.

 But yeah, after a while, have a lock for a while you realize what works for you.

 Now, you can do this the day before, the night before, or if you're going to the shower,

 I was going in the shower and I didn't want my crinkles to drop anymore or my little style

 Just simply put it over and go into the shower or if you're going to go to sleep.

 But anyway, I made my little hair sticks and I'm just going to show you.

 Alright, I also have pictures of when I put the flower in there and wraps.

 But again, very simple, very quick and I'll try it out sometime.

 This project we're going to add some personality to this jeans jacket.

 The supplies that you need for this type of project, this is called Magic Stitch.

 So to start off, you're going to plug in your iron to make sure that it's on a high heat.

 You're going to take the Magic Stitch and you're going to put the shirt wrong side up.

 Because the Magic Stitch is going to go on the wrong side of the shirt.

 The Magic Stitch has to cover the whole entire part of the shirt because it's like a base

 And the base coat doesn't actually stick that well onto the jacket so after ironing it on

 you're going to have to sew for a more sturdy fastening onto the jacket.

 So I'm cutting two pieces because the first piece didn't go all the way to the bottom.

 After cutting and placing the Magic Stitch with the glue side on top of the wrong side

 of your shirt, you're going to get the iron and then just iron it down.

 Okay so after you go over the Magic Stitch with the iron for like three minutes, evenly

 around the whole entire shirt, you let it cool for like three more minutes and then

 You'll see the clear film over the shirt and then you peel the rest of the paper off.

 After that's complete, you'll get the jacket and we're going to place the picture in the

 So you're going to place the shirt in the middle, make sure it's straight.

 You're going to have to put something on top of it so that when you iron and put the heat

 Just about three across, four going down and then three across down here.

 Okay after I iron it on, I'm just going to trim the edges down so that it'll be easier

 And then after we stitched, trimmed down the edge fully so that there is no leftover

 You don't have to go out and buy an $80 jacket that looks like this.

 Hi everyone, I'm Dusty Rogers from the blog All Things GND and today I'm going to share

 with you some of the ways that I like to use my Young Living Lemon Essential Oil.

 Now my favorite thing to do with the lemon essential oil is to clean with it and the

 easiest way to do that I've found are with these homemade reusable disinfectant wipes.

 I just take an old t-shirt and cut it up into rags, this is about the size I like to use,

 I've got them in a jar, I can usually fit about 10 rags in my jar, then I take 1 1⁄2

 cup of water and 1 1⁄2 cup of vinegar and I use about 10-12 drops of my lemon essential

 oil which is really good at cleaning, degreasing and disinfecting and I pour it right over

 my t-shirt rags and the water just goes all down through there, the water, vinegar and

 Put the lid on it, give it a good shake, that helps get the water all around and that's

 It just takes a few seconds as you saw and it costs pennies per wipe versus the more

 expensive wipes that you can buy to clean and disinfect at the grocery store and these

 instead of putting them in your trash can you can just toss these in your laundry after

 So it's very good for your home, it's clean for the environment and it uses these all

 So in addition to being good for cleaning, lemon essential oil is also really great for

 laundry, you can put a few drops of it into a really smelly load to help freshen it up.

 You can also ingest lemon essential oil and I would only recommend ingesting Young Living

 brand essential oils, they're the only ones that I can speak to that have been tested

 And lemon is a really great detoxifier so you can use it if you are doing maybe more

 of a cleansing kind of a diet or if you typically eat clean and you fall off the wagon for a

 day, I know I like to have some naturals once in a while, so I will have a glass of water

 in the morning and put a few drops of my lemon essential oil in my water and drink

 it and I can tell it just really helps kind of clear those toxins out of my body.

 And if you do ingest the lemon essential oil it's important to note that because it is

 so good at detoxifying you really want to make sure you're drinking a lot of water with

 that just all throughout the day to help really get all of those toxins out of your system.

 Another great use for the lemon essential oil is to diffuse it, you can diffuse it while

 you're studying and it can help you with retaining information which would have been

 You can also diffuse it to help improve moods, so of course lemon if you just think of how

 lemon smells it's so crisp and refreshing and you can use it in our Young Living cold

 water diffuser and our cold air diffuser and it can really help lift the spirits of everyone

 Oh and one more tip, this is a great one for as far as household tips go, you can use the

 lemon essential oils to get gum out of carpets, you can also use it to get gum out of hair

 and it can be used to get crayon off of walls and last but not least if you are reusing

 jars like juice jars or spice jars or baby food jars you can use lemon essential oil

 to help get that sticky residue that's left behind after you peel the label off, just

 put a drop of the lemon essential oil on there and it will clean it right off in almost

 So a couple things I do want to note with the lemon essential oil is as I've already

 mentioned I would only recommend ingesting the Young Living brand if you do opt to use

 the lemon in your water or you could also use it to flavor your food and if you do get

 some lemon on your skin or you choose to use it on your skin without diluting it or putting

 it into for example maybe a cream or sugar scrub make sure that you are not going to

 be out in bright sunlight because the lemon will increase the photosensitivity of your

 skin and you could be more prone to sunburn so just use caution with that and last but

 not least if you are using your lemon essential oil for things like making these reusable

 disinfectant wipes or also drinking them for example make sure you're always using glass

 containers with the lemon because lemon is so good at detoxifying if you put it in plastic

 it will actually try to leach the chemicals out of plastic and it could wear down your

 plastic so please don't use it in any kind of plastic cups, plastic containers, turbos

 So I hope you found this helpful and I hope you are now more familiar with all the different

 Thanks so much for stopping by and I hope you enjoy the rest of the tour.

 Hey, and welcome back to Banjo Tips for Beginners with Matt Marshall.

 I could go into all the reasons why, but I'll spare you the time and get right into the

 Tip number three today, we've talked about in one and two, we've talked about right hand,

 left hand positioning, how to anchor that fingers down, and we'll get into that some

 But we're going to talk today about the next building block here for you.

 Right hand rolls, left hand positioning and anchoring the fingers down, hand positioning,

 They really are, and they actually make the banjo sound really cool.

 But what you need to do is you need to be careful about how you play them.

 So one pluck on the right hand, one hammer-on on the left hand, but you hear two notes.

 On the right hand, I'm just moving middle finger, first finger, thumb, thumb.

 If you pluck to the back of the fret, it's not going to make it clean.

 Now, the next thing you want to do is try to hammer-on from an anchored finger to another

 Not up and down the fretboard, but you understand what I'm saying.

 But again, it's going to be a hard thing to do because it's clean plucking and clean hammer-on

 For the more advanced players, I'll do some sequences where I am playing like 1-3-1-2,

 Today we are going to install the new OSP one piece clutch guard for 2012, 2013, and

 So this is the front half, these holes reattach your stock fuse block.

 Then we have the rear section which has the ECU mounts built in for the back.

 And then the center support which basically goes on those three bolts right on.

 Ok so to start we just removed the seat, gas tank plastic, and we can remove the stock

 Ok with the primary clutch removed we can now go ahead and remove these three bolts

 With the stock guard removed you can see we have to remove one more bolt behind there

 Now we are going to go and get an 8mm Allen wrench and a 13mm wrench to remove this front

 Ok so with this bottom bolt removed here we can now take the bolts and this bolt will

 Alright now the next thing we are going to remove is this stock mount for the stock clutch

 It's going to be one T20 bolt there, one down here, and three rivets in there, one here

 And with the back piece removed you can see we are going to have to drill the two rivet

 So now that we have the guard sitting like this we don't want to finish these rivets

 And now we are going to want to put our converter on and figure out where exactly this has to

 So we will basically just put your belt on the outside of your converter and then we

 want to kind of just hold the guard up and see if we can make marks so that we are folding

 We got good clearance all the way around and we are tight against the chassis there, tight

 Now once you have your marks then we can go ahead and take our converter off and our belt.

 We are going to install this piece, bolt it down and then match our marks back up, check

 Ok so now with our guard in place where we want it, all clamped in and this is the time

 to be extra crucial on making sure you have enough clearance all the way around.

 So you want to take your belt, make sure you can get it on all the way around.

 So I got a clamp here holding back to get me down on my mark down here.

 So now we are sure that this is where we want, we want to make sure that our bottom

 piece is in position, our bottom bolt is in down here and that our top piece is going

 Everything feels nice, everything is comfortable, we are not rubbing on nothing, we are not

 So if all that has happened and you are ready to start drilling, we are going to start first

 and drill a quarter inch hole in this upright support and use the included bolt and then

 we are going to figure out where these two holes are in the chassis and drill those two

 holes in the guard and rivet those on and then we will rivet these on, tighten this

 Ok so with our guard in position where we want it, right on our mark, tight against

 So now we are going to take our quarter inch drill and we are going to go ahead and drill

 a hole right centered up in here and we will get that drilled and bolted in and then we

 As you can see, we have marked the tunnel with a top line and a side line to aid to

 So now we have our two rivet holes drilled and our back cover for those two holes there

 and you can see we marked the tunnel to line the holes up and now we have our top hole

 So now what we can do while we have this front piece out is we are going to use these two

 holes here and drill out the stock rivets out of our stock cover for the fuse block

 So we will go ahead and drill those out and rivet them back on.

 So as you can see now we have the stock fuse block mounted on and this is the front wrap

 piece so this will go up here and we will get the back wrap piece on and put the bottom

 bolt in, these four bolts, this bolt, these two rivets and we will rivet these two down

 Ok, now all we have left to do is put the ECU mount back on and we are all done.

 And now notice when this is all together this top wrap comes around and goes underneath

 this bracket and then this front wrap comes up over top of this bracket.

 We do this because then you have a smooth transition for your belt all the way around.

 Also on the bottom, see this top piece of the front wrap goes on top of the bottom piece

 So we will mount our ECU back on and put our clutches on and that's it.

 Today we're going to make lamb in France, otherwise known as guijo, guijo d'agneau.

 It is the leg of a lamb and you can buy them at just about any grocery store these days.

 So we're just going to start out with rinsing it in the sink and pat it dry because we're

 This is a very typical meat to have in France, very common, and here a lot of people use

 it on special occasions, but we find we do it just every couple months just because it

 What we want to do is get a lot of garlic flavor inside this lamb.

 Take a sharp little knife, poke some holes in the top, just right through the fat, and

 So that will infuse the lamb with lots of really great garlic flavor and the garlic

 So you'll be digging that out and eating that along with the lamb.

 While I'm doing this, I've preheated the oven to pretty high temperature, 425.

 So it's going to cook at a pretty high temperature the whole way around.

 Then, to help prepare it a little bit more, we're going to slather it with some olive

 And you can do this really generously, so don't be afraid to put on a little more than

 You can do kosher salt or any sort of more granular salt would be really easy.

 Okay, so we've got salt, garlic powder, and I'm just going to wipe off my hands.

 And again, it could be any kind of mustard you have around in the cupboard.

 Again, this is going to make a nice sort of a crust on the outside of the lamb while it's

 Just try not to touch the lamb and then put it back in your mustard jar.

 Okay, then our last step to make it very Provence, you can use herbs from Provence.

 You can buy them in big bags at the grocery store and I just keep it in a smaller jar.

 If you have one, a rack is really great because it lifts the lamb up a little bit and keeps

 And again, this is just going to go into the oven for 45 minutes.

 So I'm going to put it in probably about 30 minutes and then I'll turn it and do it

 And overall, it's probably going to be about an hour and 45 minutes of total cooking time.

 So we're going to take it over here and make sure it's got enough room.

 So we'll cook it for 30 minutes and we'll come back and check it.

 We'll flip it over, do it for another 30, and we'll check it and come back and take

 Alright, that lamb has been in for half an hour, so let's get it out and take a look.

 So it'd be best if we could turn this over so it gets cooking evenly from all sides.

 Let's keep it at 425, the oven, and we'll put it in for another 30 minutes.

 You can smell the rosemary that was underneath the rack getting all crusty and the mustard

 And we want it up to about 135, and this is 135, maybe a tad more in places, but I think

 We're going to tent it to give it a chance to rest, reabsorb the juices before we cut

 That can rest from 15 minutes to even up to 50 minutes before you need to carve it.

 It will continue to cook a little bit more, and then we can carve it up and we'll be ready

 Welcome to the layout, what I like to call the eye candy of the tiling.

 So what you want to make sure we do, like any other part, you want to do it right, but

 If you're crooked and off, you get frustrated to no end if you don't quite do this part

 So make sure you take your time with the layout, it's very, very, very important.

 Okay, so the first thing you want to do is, in this room, this layout will actually be

 What happens is when someone walks in, the first thing they do is look straight ahead.

 So what you want to do is make their eye look straight down the line of tiles and then

 So we'd go, we'd take a framing square and you would put it across, across your doorway.

 Now what you want to do is line it up anywhere that it's the same on both sides, whether

 you decide to do halfway on here or down, down to the edge here.

 And what we're doing now is we're just giving us a point to mark from.

 So what you want to do is take your pencil here, so this is the walk in the door and

 You'll take your pencil and you'll mark straight down the short side of the square here.

 You'll take the chalk line and you put it, put one end on here and string it all the

 And one of the reasons to have a friend is so that they can tell you whether or not you're

 straight because you want to just follow this line down and that's how you know where

 Actually I'm going to grab the cameraman right now, so he's just going to set it up and we're

 Normally you probably won't have a cameraman to grab, but any family member, anybody just

 So he's going to come here and hold this part and I'm going to go to the other end of the

 Normally what you want to do is as you're pulling it out, just give the chalk line a

 So bring it on here and you want to go as tight as possible, string it really tight

 So I want to follow that pencil line and it looks like right there is right on.

 So now that I'm nice and tight, really, really tight, bring it up, snap it once and you're done.

 You don't want to do it again because what happens is sometimes, the more times you do

 it, you'll have a wider line and it just creates more problems.

 Now you're not necessarily going to start your first tile there, just depending on how

 Alright, so this is what you're going to need to get started making your vintage frame.

 A frame, paint, a paintbrush, an image, scissors, and sandpaper.

 Okay, so before doing any painting, make sure you take out the glass, because you definitely don't want to get any paint on that.

 And if you're wondering where to get a cheap frame, go ahead and check out your local thrift store, because I went to mine and got this for about 50 cents.

 So you're going to want to begin by applying a thin coat of paint all over the frame.

 The paint I used is Americana Decor Chalky Finish in the color Refreshing.

 I just chose it because it has a nice matte finish with a chalky texture.

 Okay, so once you're sure that you've gotten paint in all the little nooks and crannies, go ahead and let it dry for about 15 minutes before adding the second coat.

 Okay, then you want to make sure your frame is completely dry before you start sanding it.

 And I would just go around the edges and the little details where the frame would have had some paint chipping if it was an actual vintage frame.

 And remember, you can always sand more off, but you can't really paint more back on without it looking weird.

 Once your frame is looking pretty good, go ahead and cut out your picture.

 I found mine by searching for free vintage printables on Pinterest, and it took me to this woman's blog.

 She had tons of cool printables, so if you guys want to check it out, I'll link it down below.

 I was just noticing that the picture was pretty flimsy, so I glued it onto some cardstock because I thought it would make it sit nicer in the frame.

 Okay, so after that, go ahead and put in your glass and then put in your picture.

 And then you can go ahead and close it on up because you have your very nice distressed vintage looking frame.

 I hope you enjoyed this tutorial, and if you have any ideas for any future tutorials, let me know.

 So what I do is I make a little area that's comfortable, because you'll end up doing a

 lot of these if you're doing it for a bunch of people like I am tonight.

 You'll find though, if you take the time, just as a little side note, that it saves

 you so much money, because fresh ravioli can be quite expensive, and it just is really

 So, the tools I have is a ravioli or a pastry cutter, which you can buy for $4, a pot of

 water and a brush to put the water on when you seal it, some chopped spinach that was

 frozen and I just put a little bit of garlic salt in there, and then 2 pounds of ricotta

 cheese with a handful of mozzarella, some fresh basil, salt, white pepper and garlic

 And then I have the trays to stick the ravioli once they're cut and ready to dry a little

 bit, because they cook a little bit better if you let them dry.

 And I just put them over this dish because I'll use this dish to put the pasta on later

 So, you start by making the ends a little bit even, and the sheet comes out, it's about

 this long, and what I'm going to do is I'm going to put little mounds on either side

 If you have a big space, you can put the ravioli bits all along the side, but I find that I

 First thing is I use a teaspoon and I put some on like that and I place it on there.

 And I'm going to do all the cheese first, so looking at this I would think I can get

 And usually you want to do 6 to 8 per person, unless you're in my family, they'll eat as

 And I didn't have my pasta cutter, pastry cutter rather, until today is my first time

 I've been doing it with a knife, which has been kind of arduous.

 Try and keep it as tight together because when you seal it, it's going to come apart

 My kids are home playing PlayStation upstairs, it's Friday, all is good in the world.

 Then you want to fold, well actually first you want to take the brush with a little bit

 I have my in-laws in town, we're having a dinner party, it's very exciting.

 And then you just kind of get that, you know, just slop it on there.

 The thing is that you can't panic because it's just pasta, you know?

 Okay, then you take the other side of the pasta cutter and you cut the pasta.

 So, then these guys we're not going to worry about right this minute.

 You just want to go through and make sure that the edges are sealed.

 Because if they're not sealed properly, all the filling's going to come out.

 And then you boil it in a big pot of water with salt and a little bit of olive oil

 because you're not going to need it for the rest of this video.

 hello YouTube I already made it but this time I'm going to show you how to make a

 target it's not completely done yet it's a target for bows and maybe guns okay

 right here the only reason I'm making it before it's done is all I need left is

 I'm going to put targets in and I'm going to have a stand in the middle

 coming out with like jars and everything to shoot okay so what you

 need for this is tar paper a tape measure you need any hammer any hammer

 is good plywood and if you saw how how dirty my yard is I'm sorry but it's like

 my work area I've been working on a target and it does not look very pretty

 from the back just warning you a good place to put it see I have mine

 connected to my reptile room and I built this whole reptile room down here

 I have my turtles just saying there's my diamond back okay so let's start and my

 yard will be cleaner soon it's just dirty today okay so first thing you need

 oh yeah by the way you also need nails of course okay now you have to get a

 board of plywood up to top just straight down does not matter how big it is how

 big you want it to be then get two pieces of plywood about that big it's

 about four foot long you get the longer piece you put it straight up and down

 right there then you get the two smaller pieces put it on the sides

 evenly nail them together and then here comes the fun part but you don't do this

 while it's already hung up you have to do it while it's laying down on the

 ground you don't have to but it's a lot easier and the nails I use nothing big

 just like two inch nails they're big enough to go through plywood I was

 surprised and I use a compound blow for this so I can stand at that fence shoe

 that cool tractor okay so yeah I'll probably do a video on how to assemble

 it because I'll probably build another one okay now let me finish it after you

 have it laid down let's pretend this is it you can get the tar paper which in

 this is much enough just lay it right on top of it and nail it in and if you

 want it to look good I suggest you cut it with a knife on like I did I just

 tried hiding it and then I put some shingles right here I'm telling anybody

 if anybody could shoot these shingles and make it through the shingles without

 breaking it I'll give them $300 if anybody could shoot through shingles and

 it's like don't think I'm stupid because it's like four sheets of shingles behind

 that I haven't had one arrow that's been able to go through it and yeah that's it

 see I had to use four layers of tar paper lots of nails now like literally

 this is like a really nice target I'm proud of myself what scared me was

 because when I was building it I found a scorpion a very small one though and it

 On this week's Butcher Block, we're making everyone's favorite wild game snack food,

We have a couple loins here, and the first thing that we need to do,

 we're just going to take our 6-inch boning and fillet knife here from our Butcher Lite kit.

 We're just going to go ahead and remove these last little strips of silver skin

 off the back of this loin, just to make sure that we've got a real nice clean piece of meat here to

 and easiest to use jerky slicing units in the world, and that's this jerky board and knife set

 it's set a little bit deeper for slicing minute steaks, and then on the front side,

 that actually helps to press the meat down tightly against the board, and we lay this knife

 sharp, very thin-bladed knife, and just run it back and forth, just like that.

 sliced, we're ready to weigh our meat so we know exactly how much seasoning to add.

We've placed it in a pan, and we'll put it right up here on top of our Westin scales,

That way, you know exactly how much seasoning to add, so you can

 seasonings that you'll find anywhere, and today we're going to be using their sweet and spicy

And a great way to accurately weigh and measure your seasonings is simply to

Now I have 250 milliliters of seasoning in my measuring cup, so I know that I

 need about 50 milliliters to season this three-pound batch of jerky.

Allow it to set for about 24 to 36 hours to let that marinade and that good

We're going to take our jerky strips and place them into a Westin vacuum bag,

 and we're going to add just a little bit of water to help blend those seasonings.

 to worry about adding too much water because whatever water we add, our Bradley smoker will

 pulling all that air out of there, and what it's actually going to do is suck and pull that seasoning

 right through those meat fibers and give it a very even smooth flavor and give you a perfectly

 refrigerator, allow it to marinate overnight, then we'll be ready to load it onto racks and take it

All right, well we've really got the smoke rolling out of our Bradley

We've taken our whole muscle jerky, we placed it onto racks, put it in the Bradley smoker.

 Now we preheated the smoker and pre-smoked the smoke box, and the reason we pre-smoked that

 degrees for about two hours, then we'll increase the temperature to about 180 and finish drying

 enjoyable, and very rewarding if you have the tools and the knowledge to do the job.

 Hello Hoopers, my name is John Coyne and in today's tutorial we are going to learn how

 to do the continuous pizza toss, aka the never-ending pizza toss, which is this continual throwing

 motion, catching the hoop, going back on the body, and doing the pizza toss over and over

 So before we get started on this trick, a prerequisite to knowing how to do the never-ending

 pizza toss is knowing how to do the vortex, the pizza toss, and catching the hoop from

 And if you would like to access my hooping tutorials on how to perform these tricks,

 So in this tutorial I will be spinning the hoop to the right, but you can also perform

 So to get started, you will go into this vortex motion like this, and as you are bringing

 the hoop up into the vortex, the same hand you used to do that is going to be the same

 hand you used to toss the hoop, just like you would do in the pizza toss.

 Now as you are bringing that hoop up, sometimes to get a better toss or give you a little

 bit more air under your toss, if you bend your knees and toss the hoop at the same time,

 or if you jump when you release that hoop, sometimes it can give you a little bit more

 And especially with the never-ending pizza toss, you want to make sure that you get a

 good throw, and the reason being is if you are having to run out of your way to catch

 the hoop, it is going to be a lot more difficult to put that hoop back onto your body and set

 Just like in the pizza toss, generally an arm's length so you are not having to run

 So once you have got a good throw, you catch it with your non-throwing hand, just like

 what you would do in the pizza toss, bringing it back down on your body, just like going

 into the vortex, and that is when you are going to make that hand off, and now you are

 coming back around and you are going to do the same thing, tossing that hoop up again,

 making that catch going back on your body, and now it is a continuous pizza toss motion.

 To make this trick easier, sometimes using a different size hoop can help.

 Personally, I like using the half inch width size tubing, just because it is a little bit

 lighter and also when I am making that catch it is a little bit easier to grip as well.

 And that concludes my tutorial on doing the never ending pizza toss.

 There's the post die, the stud die, the cap die, and the socket die.

 We're first going to attach the cap and socket, which is this part.

 The socket die attaches to the press from the top, and the cap die at the bottom.

 Hi everybody, it's Cecilia here from rawglow.com and today I'm going to make a really simple

 Now this nut milk is really easy to make because you don't even need a strainer.

 You need about a half a cup of cashews that have been soaked for at least a few hours

 You can soak them overnight and then what you want to do is you want to drain them and

 For a sweeter milk you could also use coconut water but for today I'm just going to use

 You can also add any sweeteners such as dates, honey, stevia powder or flavored stevia.

 You can also use flavorings such as fresh mint, cinnamon or vanilla.

 It's up to you but today I'm just going to make a basic plain milk.

 So now I'm going to go ahead and blend until everything is smooth and creamy.

 I've just finished blending the cashew milk and as you can see it's really nice and smooth

 You can also use it in smoothies and also in your cereal or just to drink it as you

 So I hope you enjoyed this quick recipe and for more recipes and for more information

 Hello and welcome back to the Mums iView channel with me Hannah Maggs.

 Today I'm going to show you how to cook an easy winter warmer pasta bake.

 One of my favourite things about winter is hearty rustic food and this pasta bake is

 All you're going to need for this recipe is 500 grams of pasta.

 You can either use leftover chicken or just cook a couple of chicken breasts.

 This is totally optional but I find it gives a bit more of a creamy texture.

 The first thing you want to do is preheat your oven to 190 degrees.

 If there's one thing I know how to cook well it is pasta because I pretty much lived off

 of the stuff every day straight for about four years while I was at uni.

 While your pasta is cooking you can start prepping the other bits and pieces.

 So I'm just slicing up my mushrooms now ready for them to be fried.

 The great thing about winter warmer pasta bakes is that they're very versatile so if

 you have anything else that you want to chuck in as well like if you've got onions or garlic

 or anything else, a bit of bacon maybe, just chuck it all in because it really does just work.

 Once the mushrooms are fried you just need to add your tinned tomatoes in there just

 I'm going to take a big old dollop of creme fraiche and just chuck it into the mixture

 Once you've heated the sauce add everything together in the pan and stir thoroughly.

 Now you can add your salt and pepper to season but remember if you're cooking for young babies

 Pour your mixture into a baking dish and sprinkle on your cheese.

 The final step is just to pop it in the oven for 15 minutes until the cheese melts.

 Nom nom, Chrissie's woken up just in time because the pasta is just finished cooking

 Thank you all so much for watching this video, I really hope you enjoyed it and don't forget

 Hello and welcome to another installment of Education Made Easy.

 Here I have two cups of frozen strawberries and six ounces of vanilla soy milk.

 If you don't have vanilla soy milk, you can use plain original soy milk.

 All of the specs for this blender will be in the description box.

 The first thing you're going to want to do is put the strawberries in the blender.

 You might need to add some and you might not have to use all of it.

 It depends on your blender and exactly how many strawberries are included in your two cups.

 I'm using a tamper that comes with the Vitamix to push the strawberries into the blade

 You're going to turn your blender on variable and I start all the way at one

 If I'm feeling a little wild that day, I might even go ahead and put it on high.

 Now for a little extra sweetness, you can add some agave nectar.

 You don't have to depending on how sweet your strawberries are.

 If you have a Vitamix, then you know it's ready when there are four mounds across the corners,

 And when you're done, it'll look a little something, something like this.

 So, there is your vanilla strawberry sorbet recipe for the week.

 Tune in here every week to get a new video from me because I will be uploading every week now.

 Don't forget to check out my website and all my other links to get updates from me about my channel and my videos

 and all the cool, awesome vegan dishes and recipes I make and eat.

 These links will be in the down bar and at the very end of the video.

 So, yeah, thanks for watching and you can tune in here next week for a new video from me.

 For this tutorial we'll teach you how to install and remove a wheel on any bicycle that uses

 You've got your skewer shaft, your cam lever, a couple of springs, and your retention nut.

 Before you attempt to remove a wheel there are a couple of things you want to do.

 First you want to shift all the way down to the smallest cog on your rear cassette and

 So Shimano and many other brake brands will have a quick release lever here.

 It works pretty similar to the way the cam works on your skewer.

 Now Campy brakes don't have the quick release lever but they do have a quick release button

 You depress the brake lever, push the knob in, and it opens it up.

 Once you have your brake open and your chain shifted down, open up your quick release lever

 Open up your quick release on your brake, open up the quick release lever on your wheel,

 There are what's known as lawyer tabs on your fork ends which require you to unscrew and

 Now you don't have to take the retention nut all the way off, just enough to clear those

 Now in the case that the nut does come off and the springs come out, the springs attach

 Now to reinstall the wheel, make sure again that your brake is open.

 And I find it easier to hold it at the top and guide in the skewer end of the tabs with

 Tighten up your retention nut and you'll want to have it tight so that the quick release

 So you start to feel pressure at the halfway point and then your quick release is tight.

 Now to install the rear wheel, you want to again ensure that your brake is open and you

 Take the wheel from the top and line up your smallest cog with the chain.

 Pull your derailleur open and it should pull right into your dropouts.

 And if you hadn't adjusted your quick release at all, it should be the right tightness.

 Once you have your wheels installed, you want to check to see that your brake still engages

 And a good way to make sure that your wheel is installed evenly on both sides is to have

 And you want to have your quick release skewers on the non-drive side of the bicycle.

 Hey guys, it's Tessa from HandleTheBeat.com and today I'm going to be showing you how

 These donuts have no yeast, so they're actually surprisingly quick and easy and are basically

 They're beautifully golden brown and slightly crisp on the outside and tender and soft on

 I'm going to be showing you step by step how to make these along with my favorite ways

 to sweeten and glaze them and some fun toppings we can put to make them so much more beautiful

 So if you'd like to learn how to make these cake donuts, then just keep watching.

 So to get started with our cake donuts, I have three cups of all-purpose flour and I'm

 adding in one tablespoon of baking powder, half a teaspoon of fine salt, and half a teaspoon

 And the nutmeg is optional, but it's really what gives donuts their characteristic donutty

 And by the way, that was one whole tablespoon of baking powder, which will help them kind

 In my stand mixer, I am adding two-thirds cup of granulated sugar, one large egg plus

 one egg yolk, and it's important that these are at room temperature so that they mix really

 And I am actually going to attach my paddle attachment and beat this mixture until it

 This is going to help give the donuts a nice light, airy texture while still being kind

 They kind of have their own thing going for them, which is why I love them so much.

 And now we just add a little bit of extra flavor in the form of one and a half teaspoons

 And now I'm actually going to alternate between adding in that flour mixture that we just

 combined with three tablespoons of melted unsalted butter and half a cup of sour cream.

 I'm just going to go back and forth between adding a little bit of these ingredients,

 And after this comes together, I'm actually going to let it sit at room temperature for

 about 30 minutes or until the flour has absorbed more of the moisture and it becomes firm enough

 And now we're just going to let it sit for 30 minutes and then we can roll it out.

 Also, by the way, the dough you can totally refrigerate and make ahead of time for up

 So on a lightly floured work surface, I'm going to roll the dough out to a quarter inch

 thickness and use my handy doughnut cutter, which I'll link to in the description box

 And once I have a quarter inch thickness, I'm going to go ahead and cut out my dough.

 And then I also wanted to make some other doughnuts without the holes because I love

 to top my doughnuts with M&M candies, mini M&Ms, and they stick on so much better if

 it's just one big flat surface, which you'll see in just a second.

 So as you're working with, this is the flat surface I was talking about.

 As you're working with the doughnuts, make sure to keep them, the dough covered while

 you heat the oil and while you fry the remaining doughnuts so it doesn't dry out.

 So I've actually heated peanut oil in a large deep Dutch oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.

 I have a candy thermometer here so I can know the temperature is perfect.

 And I'm placing three or four doughnuts in at a time and I'm frying for about one minute

 If you're doing the doughnut holes, they'll take maybe not even 30 seconds per side.

 I'm going to use my little skimmer here to drain them on a paper towel lined plate once

 And I'm using peanut oil here, which is my favorite frying oil, but you can totally use

 And the doughnuts that I created that were just basically big circles that don't have

 holes will take a little bit longer if you wanted to make doughnuts that shape.

 And after the doughnuts are all fried while they're still warm, you can toss them in powdered

 It just adds that extra layer of sweetness and I love powdered sugar doughnuts.

 However, what I love even more is doughnuts covered in my favorite thick fudgy chocolate

 So to make a chocolate glaze, we combine one stick of unsalted butter, a quarter cup of

 whole milk and a tablespoon of light corn syrup in a small saucepan.

 I'm also adding in two teaspoons of vanilla extract and I'm just going to put this over

 And then I'm adding in four ounces of chopped semi-sweet chocolate and I'm going to give

 It's really important to sift the powdered sugar, otherwise your glaze will have lumps

 So I have the powdered sugar and the rest of the ingredients and I'm going to give that

 And once the glaze is set, it becomes really difficult to add in any toppings.

 So straight after you dip your doughnuts, you want to add in any sprinkles or mini M&Ms

 I personally love rainbow sprinkles because they're so cute and they add a little bit

 I get them at Michael's or oftentimes the grocery store baking section will have tons

 They add the perfect layer of crunch and flavor and it's just like so good.

 Alright guys, so that is exactly how you make these adorable homemade cake doughnuts.

 But these techniques can be used for just about any homemade cake doughnut recipe.

 But my favorite one is going to be linked below in the description box.

 So if you'd like the full recipe that you can print out and take into the kitchen with

 If you did, please give it a thumbs up, share it with your friends, and be sure to let me

 Hi, today we're going to talk about our Island Oasis frozen drink machine.

 The drink machine is the same standard machine that you'd see in bars and pubs all over the

 What I wanted to do is tell you about where the drink mix goes and where the ice goes.

 A common mistake is that you'd take this lid off and you'd think you'd pour your drink

 The ice actually gets poured up here and I'm going to show you.

 You can get a couple of bags of ice and just pour as much ice as you can fit in the top

 Party Time Rentals does not sell the drink mixes, but you can go to any liquor store

 and get that and you would follow the directions on your drink mix container.

 Let's go to the front of the machine and I'm going to show you how that operates.

 Once you've put your drink mix into the pitcher, you're going to take your pitcher, insert

 You would turn the power switch on and depending on the instructions on your packaging, you

 You're going to notice that it's going to shave the ice and then it will mix the drink.

 If you find that you do not have enough ice or it's not to the consistency you like, you

 can press this shave button, which would shave more ice and then you could hold down the

 Once I have it to the consistency I like, I go ahead and I lift this out and I can pour

 What up y'all it's XQCity coming to you with a special unboxing video.

 We got a Nike SB box for you guys but on the inside it's actually a Jordan 1 SB QuickStrike

 This is the first Nike SB Jordan 1 to release but you can expect a lot more to come throughout

 So I'm pretty sure you guys have seen this online and you know it looks like a very normal

 shoe but there's actually a lot of detailing to the Air Jordan 1 SB, the first Air Jordan

 So just a little bit of history back in when the shoe first released.

 The shoe was a very iconic shoe due to the fact that the NBA banned the Jordan 1 in the

 black and red colorway and immediately the shoe became one of the most desired sneakers

 Not only that in the mid 80's when the shoe released skaters used to skate in the Jordan

 It was better than most canvas and suede shoes that come out from skaters for skateboarders

 and not only that it was high, it had the air technology in the shoe and not only that

 it just made it so much more iconic that Jordan was wearing them and it was just a better

 So this time what they wanted to do is they wanted to add a little twist to this Jordan

 So if you check in the back there's actually some detailing on the heel that says Air Jordan

 If you guys are familiar with Craig Stesick he also did a lot of designs and he's very

 iconic in the skate world and you can see his tribal like font on the back that says

 AJ 1 SB that can also be found, not a lot of people know this about this shoe, but that

 it can also be found on the heel in green and on the inside of the shoe.

 Sorry it's really hard to catch it but I'll take that out for you just to give you guys

 a little closer look and what I love about the fact that the shoe comes with an extra

 set of laces but in your SB laces so if you want to stick to the original flat laces but

 that's cool but you also have a second option of the SB circular laces for your Jordan 1's

 which is cool because I always switch my laces to the circular laces even for the breads

 and stuff and you got like this 3M stitching on the tongue right there as well as on the

 around the collar and on the side and finally they hit it with a sick icy sole with a little

 bit of carbon fiber design on the background of the shoe right there.

 You know there's also a shoe, sorry there was also a famous skate video that released

 in 1987 with Lance Mountain that wore the Air Jordan 1 while he was skating that just

 made it even more iconic and immediately skaters fell in love with the Jordan 1.

 So we can start with the unboxing, sorry for the long intro but just wanted to give you

 guys a little history on what the Jordan 1 signifies in the skate world as much as

 So let's start with the outsole of the shoe, you got your Jordan 1 bottom in that icy sole

 material from the toe all the way to the heel and you got that carbon fiber like design

 If you check out the midsole, you got your Jordan 1 midsole with a little hint of that

 icy and that white stitching from the toe all the way to the heel once again.

 The upper part of the shoe, you got leather throughout the entire upper part of the shoe

 with a little bit of mesh right around the collar and on the tongue and this material

 right here is like kind of pearlescent so you can see like the color shifts from a darker

 As I mentioned before, you got your AJ1SB on the back with Craig Stesick's famous font,

 Obviously, you got your Air Jordan Wings logo right on the heel and you got your mesh with

 Like I mentioned before, the shoe comes with your flat laces in black and also comes with

 your second set of laces with your circular black laces right there.

 And finally, at the top of the shoe, you got your Nike SB tag in that forest green.

 On the inside of the tongue, around the ankle, you have like that same font from Craig with

 That is also apparent on the inside of the shoe right there on the insole.

 And finally, on the inside of the tongue, you got your Imagine tag in that olive green.

 So, like I mentioned in the beginning of the video, there's a lot of details to the shoe

 And yeah, I can't wait to see what else they come up with, with the Air Jordan 1 Nike SB

 So for more information on how to purchase these shoes, you can contact us at 514-846-8887.

 You can also contact us in the West Island area at 514-626-4434 and at our latest location

 That's right, we're going to take fresh and delicious veggies and trap them into a tight

 So I decided to call the biggest jar company in France to help me out on this one, Le Parfait.

 I say we make a series about it, because the people need to understand how to preserve

 I just got back from the market and I got, hmmm, let's say, a bit carried away.

 My fridge is already full so I guess I'm just gonna toss that up.

 Don't be a fool, we are gonna preserve all that gorgeous stuff.

 And if you're afraid of preserving, don't be, because there is a video about essential

 For this recipe, you need intact glass jars, which can be recycled ones, but in excellent

 You also need lids, which on the contrary, have to be new ones.

 To make this ratatouille rainbow jar, I picked vegetables at their best.

 It should fit in the jars, but it's also good to have some proper texture at the end.

 Everybody loves a good ratatouille, but the usual brown and messy stuff is not appetizing.

 To counter that, we will use an oven instead of a pan and, cross fingers, the veg should

 Place them on trays covered with aluminum foil and cook them in the oven for about 30

 In the meantime, boil up some water in a pot, add salt, pepper, a bunch of dried herbs and

 Get the veg out of the oven and fill up the jar, stacking thick and colorful layers.

 Get rid of any air pockets using a plastic chopstick for example.

 Close the lid or screw on the caps depending on which or which system you are using.

 Fill some of them with hot water and cook them for 90 minutes starting when the water

 Don't worry if the jars make strange noises during the boiling process.

 When they feel cool to the touch, they are ready for what I call the leap of faith.

 If it's loose or if it opens easily, bad news because you gotta redo the heat treatment.

 So, six months have passed and it's now winter time and I am so missing the summer.

 It is the perfect time to open my summer rainbow ratatouille jar.

 Warning, if the lid is open or loose or if you can spot mold or any strange smell, don't

 If everything is good, take out the jar and open it by pulling on the rubber seal or by

 My favorite way to eat this ratatouille would be just as it is.

 A few basil leaves, a drizzle of extra virgin olive oil, salt and pepper.

 It's summer on a plate and I can already feel my winter breakdown fading away.

 If you need more information, check out my other video about essential tips to help you

 Sometimes bend that with an alternating C bass that we did on our finger picking.

 I like to play the G7, put the little finger on the third fret, second string.

 Sus2, take off finger 4, and then plonk it on to the seventh fret G string.

 I extend this chord, double it, just to give a bit more flow to the music,

Today I just want to go over how to make your own car trick and how to get into making car tricks.

 And basically, because I know some of my viewers probably like my car tricks and maybe want to start making their own car tricks on their own channel.

 And you know, I just want to show you guys how I started doing that.

 And uh, okay, so I'm gonna make a car trick here right now just like out of the blue.

 But first, I'm just gonna go over just basically what I did to make my, to now, you know, make my own car tricks.

 So what I started doing, I used to watch a lot of car trick people like mostly mismag822 and SchwarzeneggerMagic, you know, there's a whole bunch of car trick people on YouTube.

 So, I basically just watched them and what I did was I took some of their styles and their techniques and I put them into my own car tricks.

 Like the 2, 3, 4, 5 car trick, that came from a car trick based on the 4 Aces, which is a really nice car trick and a lot of people know today.

 So, basically, that's what I started doing, you know, to make my own car tricks.

 I just watch other people use their techniques, I don't copy their tricks, I just use their techniques and mix them with other techniques.

 Alright, so I'm gonna try to trick the person in thinking I have 8 cards here.

 So, what I'm gonna do is basically I'm just gonna do a double lift on this card right here.

 So, and I guess I'll just have to take them off the top of the deck, you know, and let the person shuffle them.

 Alright, now, I'm just gonna go over basically what I do to make a car trick.

 So, basically what I do, okay, I want them to think that I have 8 cards here and I really have 9.

 So, you know, basically just do a double lift or you can, before you do the trick, push the top 2 cards back like this.

 And then, when you go to pick up the first card, you say, okay, there's 1, and then so on.

 You can just be like 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and so, alright, there's an 8th card there, but it's pretty obvious.

 So, I'm gonna have them, alright, I guess I'll have them pick a card.

 When I have used tricks that you have to pick a card, I always look at the card just for the sake of me getting how to do this trick.

 Alright, so now, I know that if I go like this, I push the top card off with my thumb, and then push the bottom card off like this,

 So, I'm gonna do that real fast, so it kinda just looks like I'm taking 1 card, when really I'm taking 2.

 So, I don't know, I guess it kinda looks cool, so we'll do that.

 So, then, what I'll do is I'll just put all the other cards in here, and then I'll take the bottom card, put it on top.

 So, what I'm gonna do, I'm just gonna mix around the cards like this.

 Alright, what I forgot to tell you is make sure they memorize their card, you know, but you guys probably know that.

 So, say, okay, your card's mixed around in here somewhere, I mixed up all the cards.

 Now, what I'm gonna do is show you again that I only have 8 cards.

 Say, 1, and just say, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and the 8th final card.

 Alright, so since this card has been on the bottom the whole time, what we're gonna do is, we're gonna go, okay, well, now I'm just gonna count the cards.

 Alright, let's just take the deck, mix around the cards a little bit.

 Say, you pick 8, or, I'm gonna say, just like, I'm gonna get 8 cards, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

 And then while they're not looking, maybe like, just slip another card back in there, I don't know.

 And then just go through all the cards and say, okay, yeah, just do the double lift once.

 Alright, and then have them, alright, put the card on top of the deck.

 Okay, so now, say, okay, I'm gonna mix the cards around a little bit.

 Take the one from the bottom, put it on top, so now their card is on the bottom.

 And then go through the deck and say, again, they have 8 cards.

 And then just go through here, like this, and alright, the next card is yours.

 But thank you for watching, and this is how to create your own card trick.

 And you guys can use this card trick for your own channel if you want.

 And before I do that, I wanted to make an orange strawberry banana juice.

 Now I know I can blend the oranges in the Vitamix blender here, amazing Vitamix, but

 I want to get that liquid going and then I want to add the strawberries and banana.

 But I think I might want to juice a few because I'm going to be juicing my lemon ginger anyway

 I'm just going to taste it, see if I want any more banana or strawberry.

 So if I wanted I could add it to the blender now, pour more strawberries and banana in

 Now I know I left the skin here on this lemon, but it still has a lot of nutrients.

 So I'm going to show you guys how to clean it and cut the top and bottom off.

 But the lemon, we're going to cleanse our palate, cleanse our intestines.

 Then we've got the ginger that's anti-inflammatory, anti-viral.

 And if you don't prefer ginger, you can just have lemon with warm water,

 And do that every morning, especially if you are in any pain in any sort of way.

 That ginger, morning after morning, and after a couple weeks of doing it,

 but I don't like to talk about it that much because we can't let our pains consume our life.

 oh, my gosh, this happened to me, poor me, now I'm just going to live my life in pain.

 You've got to overcome it, and you can do that with awesome nutrition.

 Live it in a positive mindset, and that's what I'm doing here on Blend Happy.

 So remember, everybody, Blend Happy, you've got to live healthy.

 this is an amazing morning, and I feel great today, and I want you to believe it.

 And then follow through with it, and then make yourself an amazing breakfast and start your day off right.

 Just wanted to do a quick little video, show you what I do every morning,

 If you saw my video on my potato harvest where I harvested 139 pounds of sweet potatoes

You're probably wondering what is David doing with all those potatoes?

 Tonight I'm baking the perfect sweet potato or at least that's what the recipe that I'm following says it is

 I then punched them with the fork put in a glass pan and foil inside of that

 And now I'm ready to put them in the oven that I preheated at 450 degrees

 I'll cook them for 30 minutes flip them over cook them for another 30 minutes and let them cool

We'll get a sneak peek in about 30 minutes when they're halfway done

 Little sizzle there it's been 30 minutes, and I'm going to turn them over now

 There's a couple missing these sweet potatoes took longer than an hour to cook

 Hey, but I guess that's my own fault since I use the mid-light of gardening method and grew such big sweet potatoes

 You can see what I would call the caramelized sugar that's come out of the holes here, and it is so good

 Tried different things I put coconut oil and cinnamon in one half

 and then I also tried coconut oil salt and pepper and then butter salt and pepper and

 I'll be eating half of this one, and I'm going to go out to the garden and get some onion chives and

 Parsley I'll put that and salt and pepper and coconut oil and it will be heaven

 This is LDS Prepper reminding you if you are prepared you shall not fear

 And if you like potatoes at all you're going to love sweet potatoes

They're one of the highest nutrition foods that you can grow and they store really well, too

 Besides that they taste incredible check the links below this video to watch the video on how I grew

 139 pounds of sweet potatoes from three sweet potatoes that my wife bought at the grocery store

 And how you can do the same or even better using the mid-light of gardening method

 Kawasaki KLR fork seal, this is going to be the air pressure release method.

 I've already removed the seals, drained them of oil, and this is the assembly here.

 At the top end is the air valve where you can adjust the pressure for on and off-road

 And then the spring gets inserted inside the tube and then capped off.

 For this portion of it, I have removed the spring and the spacer and I've recapped it

 And I've actually zip-tied a rag and I've also removed the C-clip which goes over the

 This is for precautionary measures in case that seal pops off, which it doesn't usually.

 So I've crammed that down there and now I'm just using a bicycle pump and I've got...

 With this method, you do not have to remove the Allen wrench at the bottom, which requires

 So you don't have to remove the Allen wrench at the bottom, which requires a special tool

 So you stop the whole unit from turning while you actually unscrew that to take it apart.

 Not needed if you're just replacing the fork seals for basic maintenance.

 When seaming an EPDM liner, make sure the liner is clean and clear of contaminants.

 The overlap should be a minimum of 4 inches as the seam tape is 4 inches wide.

 So you fold back the top layer 4 or 5 inches, then you make sure the areas are clean of

 contaminants and then you take your scrubber pad and your primer and you put a generous

 Let the primer dry and then test it with your finger to make sure it is tacky or sticky

 Apply the 3 inch quick seam tape to the underside of the liner.

 Now we're going to fold over the top layer onto the 3 inch seam tape.

 The final step is to take the 6 inch cover strip and mark along your EPDM liner where

 Now we take the quick prime primer and prime the whole area that the cover strip is going

 Next we need to wait 30 seconds to a minute until the primer sets up.

 We test the primer by touching it, pushing down, and seeing if it lifts up a little bit.

 We'll next lay out the 6 inch cover strip, the length of the seam, and cut it with a

 Next we take the cover strip, backing side down, and place it over the seam on top of

 And slowly and carefully we place the cover strip centered on the seam.

 Hi everyone, I wanted to share with you all my recipe for true buttercream icing, and

 I will be using this recipe in several cake and cupcake tutorials in the future.

 So for this recipe you will need 1 cup or 2 sticks of butter, 1 tablespoon of clear

 vanilla extract, 1 quarter teaspoon of salt, about 4 tablespoons of milk, and 1 2 pound

 Then you add your powdered sugar, your vanilla, your salt, and your milk.

 Now don't add too much milk at one time, because if you add too much then it will make the

 icing very runny, and it's always easier to add a little bit more milk later if you need

 Then beat all the ingredients together with your blender until it's well smoothed out,

 Now to demonstrate using my buttercream icing, I am using a Wilton 1M tip and I'm just making

 Now I call this true buttercream icing because it is made out of butter.

 My decorators buttercream icing contains shortening as well as butter.

 And the reason for that being is that it holds its shape much better than just the plain

 buttercream icing, but it doesn't have the full buttery taste as this one.

 The only downside to this true buttercream icing is that it does not tend to hold its

 shape as well as the icing with the shortening in it, and it tends to melt easily in the

 So if you try this recipe out, let me know how it goes in the comments section below.

 And you can also like me on Facebook and share your creations with me there.

 Now I had thoughts of making small pine trees using toothpicks and the stranded wire.

 What I'm going to do is take my toothpick and run it right through the center of this.

 What I'll do is I'll just pull this down and just alternate like that.

 I don't know how well this is going to work or how efficient it is to do things this way.

 Hello, and I'm Misty with Big Weenie Brand, and today I'm going to show you the most simple,

 You need two cups of cubed ice, a Ziploc bag, and your Big Weenie Brine.

 We're going to dump the ice cubes right inside on the bait in two spoonfuls of the brine.

 You just want to seal it right up and stick it in the refrigerator.

 For maximum results, you want to do it 24 hours before you leave.

 You can get away with doing it a couple hours before if you don't really have the time.

 Take a little more of this powder, sprinkle it right on top of your bait, and you're good

 With our meat rigs and our brine, the fish don't stand a chance.

 Hey kids, today we're making Asian beef and broccoli slaw wraps.

 It's YouTube's best for creative things, it's cooking and crafting.

 So the first thing we're going to do is we are going to get our hamburger and we're going to put it in here.

 There's our price, $7.90 but I got it 30% off so it ended up being about $5.40 for this pound of very lean, 90% lean, 10% fat hamburger.

 We just want to make sure that it gets nicely cooked down and break up your pieces until they're about, oh I don't know, maybe about a half inch size or so.

 This is going to be another one of those really quick and easy, really fast and dirty recipes.

 I am going to take this and I'm going to drain off some of this juices and fat and I'll be right back.

 And we're just going to make sure everything gets to a nice hot temperature.

 I'm going to take these burritos and I'm going to go warm them up in the microwave for a couple of seconds.

 Before we have to say goodbye, make sure you comment and subscribe.

 As we've seen in other videos, there are a number of surfaces you can use for encaustic painting.

 This particular board is untempered masonite, braced with pine wood to create a frame.

 On the other side is watercolor paper that was glued to the masonite board.

 This isn't a necessary step, but some people like to use the watercolor paper as a white ground background.

 It has a temperature control on the side, but I also like to have this temperature gauge right on top of the surface

 I have some paraffin wax, which is used to clean brushes between different colors.

 And then I have some beeswax, which is often used in the beginning of doing encaustic painting as an initial layer.

 Then I have some other colors that I've been working with on this palette.

 Before you apply your first layer of wax, you usually like to have a warm surface.

 And then it has control over the temperature with a dial on the back.

 To heat the surface, you just turn the gun on and slowly move back and forth across the surface of the canvas

 until the surface of the full canvas is a nice warm temperature.

 Another method for heating the surface of your canvas is to take another clean palette, another heating surface.

 And then turn your canvas upside down onto that piece of paper and let it sit on that palette until it's nice and even.

 Oftentimes in encaustic, you want to use a layer of beeswax when you start.

 One is beeswax is less expensive than putting the beeswax with the domer on the surface.

 And most encaustic surfaces are porous surfaces, and you want the first layer to absorb in the beeswax

 lay it very flat across the surface to get a nice, even layer of beeswax as I go.

 When I heat the beeswax, I usually start from the bottom and work forward

 because as you start at the bottom, it kind of is warming the canvas as you go forward.

 It's probably hard to see on the video, but you'll notice that the surface will begin to glaze over and get shiny.

 And occasionally, you might actually be able to see a few air bubbles that are popping on the surface.

 It's just another added layer under your encaustic to assist with the ground layer before you paint

 and also, once again, to absorb into that surface of the painting,

 If you use a non-porous surface with encaustic, you risk the wax actually popping off the surface of the painting.

 For example, some artists have experimented with painting on plexiglass,

 but it's somewhat of a risky surface to paint on because the temperatures of heating and cooling of plexiglass and wax are different.

 And if the painting is exposed to different temperatures, it's possible that the wax could just pop right off the face of the painting.

 Hey family, so I just washed my hair and this is my hair with no product on it.

 I towel dried it a little bit but I just washed it with the Oyin Handmade Grand Poo Bar and

 I've been using this since I big chopped and for my oil sealant, I'm going to go a little

 light this time I'm going to use the Shea Moisture Curl Enhancement Smoothie.

 I'm going to try out this sample that I have of the Twist and Define Cream by Kera Kera.

 It says Twist and Define Cream for silky, shiny twist and twist out.

 Here goes, I normally detangle with my Denman but I'm not really in the mood to do that

 this time so I'm just going to take this out in sections and I'm just going to, I

 My hair is very thick, this conditioner is very light so I really focus in on the ends.

 I kind of get that going and then I just twist the ends back under while I'm going through

 So now that I've got my leave-in in, I'm going to be using the Shea Moisture Curl Enhancement

 Like I said, my hair can take a lot of weight so I'll work that in.

 I don't think this is going to be enough for my whole head but we're going to see what

 It's like sticky, slightly greasy but we're going to roll with it.

 So I'm going to do like a chunky twist out because I really don't want to be twisting

 So I'm just going to take a little bit, like this much on each section.

 Just going to run it through, kind of break it through my fingers.

 And my hair is still pretty damp but the product blended in pretty good.

 But I don't know if that's the shea moisture or if that's this product.

 So I'm just going to put my bonnet on and I'll see you in the morning.

 I purposely wanted a shrunken twist out just because it's so hot here in Dallas.

 But I mean it's not strong but I can smell it and I don't like it.

 I'll kind of give you a close up on even after I separated I still got great curl definition.

 If my hair likes it I might consider purchasing it as a styling product.

 Today, we've got some great ribs here from our local butcher, Oxford Meats.

 We're going to do a quick and easy Coca-Cola ribs, you know, like, there's so many options

 on the internet for Coca-Cola ribs, but they all take 24 hours plus to make because you've

 And of course, to lead a bottle of coke, you don't have to buy a cold one.

 And also too, with our camp oven, we've got it in the camp oven, mate.

 You'll find that you need a direct heat to actually get the Coca-Cola to start boiling.

 And if you boil in this camp oven, mate, the Aussie camp oven, just remember you do so

 So now we've got the meat boiling away and we're going to let that sit for half an hour.

 And this process will help tenderise the meat with the coke and help the ribs cook a lot faster.

 So when we get the time to bake them, they're going to be so nice and tender and soft.

 All righty, guys, so we've had these boiling away in here for about 25 minutes to half an hour

 Mick, you want to whack them out on the board and we can have a look at these boys?

 OK, guys, so what we've done here is, once we've taken the meat out, we've just emptied out the coke.

 OK, and also have a trivet on the inside of the camp oven here.

 Also, just thinned out the Smokey BBQ with a bit of coke because it was really thick.

 So also, too, what we're doing, we're just flipping them over so we can actually put the marinade on the other side.

 We're going to turn it down to low heat, and in about 10, 15 minutes, we're going to reapply some more sauce.

 Also, too, we've actually taken the lid of the camp oven off for the last 10 minutes.

 So for the last hour, we've had this baking in the camp oven, mate.

 Also, too, the last 10 minutes, we took the lid of the camp oven off.

 And whilst baking there for the last hour, we've marinated them every 10 minutes, 10 to 12 minutes.

 We just keep them marinated and turn them over, marinating, just to help give that lovely sticky coating.

 So who says that you need to marinate your meat in Coca-Cola overnight to make it work awesome?

 And all up, it's only taken about an hour and 20 minutes to make.

 Hey everybody, we're up at my wife's grandmother's house in northwestern Montana.

 Yesterday I caught three small northern pike up at Stillwater Lake.

 I filleted these up on the cutting board with the boning fillet knife.

 I have the Trout Slayer Wheat Ale that I used for the can cooker recipe the other day.

 I'll pull the fillets out of the beer and drop them in a bag of flour.

 I have hunting and fishing adventures, hiking, camping, wild game, and outdoor cooking.

 Until next time, this is the Rocky Mountain Meat Hunter saying praise the Lord and pass

 You're going to need 3 eggs, some oil, your favorite toppings, a spatula and a fork.

 Crack those eggs, grab your fork and start to mix it up, your eggs very well.

 This is very important because this is going to be the base for your omelette.

 In the meantime you have a nonstick pan on the heat, medium heat, you don't want a high

 And you're just going to put a little oil or melted butter, just enough oil to handle

 the omelette, you don't want a greasy omelette, this is very unpleasant.

 So we're going to start to put our toppings, I use sliced mushrooms, some diced ham, diced

 tomato, some green peppers and at this point we don't want to use the cheese, don't put

 the cheese at this moment, we're going to wait until the last moment before serving.

 Now start to saute the veggies, as you can see it's a quick move, fork, forward, back

 A lot of people ask me if this is difficult, but it's not really, it's just my practice.

 So just try it, don't be afraid to do it, just go ahead and eventually you're going

 And again, make sure your veggies are cooked and now it's time to add the eggs and we're

 At this moment you're going to grab your spatula again and well, this is very important,

 you're going to make a kind of hole in the center of the omelette just like this, it's

 going to help to cook the whole omelette evenly and then you're going to start to work in

 the edge of the omelette, try to lift the edge of the omelette and helping the egg going

 through the bottom of the pan and that way it's going to cook all the way through.

 As you can see all the eggs go through the bottom and now with the spatula make sure

 Try to move your pan back and forward in circles, as you can see my omelette gets stick

 a little bit so I'm going to put a little bit more oil, just a little bit, just like

 that and then the whole omelette is moving around and that means that it's ready to flip.

 As you can see the move is quick, forward, back and circle, everything at the same time,

 you can do it maybe once or twice, just making sure both sides of the omelette are cooked

 and basically that's it guys, it's no big deal, it's just my practice, don't be afraid,

 go ahead try at home and at this moment it's time to put some cheese, I like to put a lot

 of cheese on mine so just put as much cheese as you like and grab a plate and it's ready.

 a sound board, three strings, the bass, the middle, and the melody.

 The tuning is D for the bass string, A for the middle string, and A again for the melody string.

 You will notice that I have placed numbers beside each one of the middle frets.

 We'll use our right hand pointer finger to pluck the melody string, the one that's closest to you.

 We're going to take your left hand pointer and place it on fret number 1.

 Then your right hand pointer will come down here in the strum hollow and pluck one time for each fret.

 You place the dulcimer on your lap, which is the traditional way to play.

 Be careful to press down and slide like a snake from one fret to the next.

 A zero fret means you pluck the string, but you don't put your finger down on the melody string and it will sound like this.

 Once you practice your frets from 1 to 10 and 10 to 1, our next lesson will be how to use the triangle pick to strum all three strings.

 It's basically a vamp in A and then a vamp in C and then we have a little staccato riff

 that gets us from C back into A. The C part is the solo, when the solo is going on.

 Then we have this little staccato riff and then we're back into A again.

 Notice also that at the beginning I'm muting a lot with both hands.

 Now when he's done with his solo, there's a staccato break and it goes like this.

 The good thing about this song is there's only really two main parts and then a third little staccato riff.

 So once you get the A part down, you can go ahead and start playing along with the recording fairly quickly.

 So start with the A part, then add the C part, work out your staccato riff and you'll be able to play the whole thing.

 When your dough is 1 eighth to 1 quarter of an inch thick, you want to stop rolling.

 Now you're going to place your rolling pin at the top of your piece of dough and gently

 And then you're just going to kind of roll the dough toward you, almost like a roll of

 And this will allow you to pick it up and bring it wherever you need to.

 Then you're going to place the end of the edge that you just rolled at the beginning

 Gently place the rolling pin on the side of your pie plate and just unroll it.

 Okay, and if it's not perfectly in there, just gently get your hands under and coax it to

 Be careful not to pull it too much because we don't want to stretch the dough out.

 Okay, as you can see here, and you can see that there's all that wonderful marbling of

 So you can trim your dough away at this point with a knife or scissors.

 And then when you have that nice lip, you're going to come back in and crimp your edges.

 Typically, using your two knuckles and your first finger, you're just going to kind of

 push in with your two knuckles on the inside and then push your other finger, your first

 You pop it back in the refrigerator for a few minutes before you add your filling because

 remember, we want to keep it nice and cold so that the butter doesn't melt.

 And once you get your filling in there, you pop it in the oven.

 Now you want to follow the directions that are on your pie recipe.

 But for the most part, you want to cook this at a really high temperature because that

 is going to allow everything to set up quickly and for the maximum amount of steam to be

 And that steam is what's going to give you all those flakes that we want.

 So keep it cold, high temperature, about 400, 425 Fahrenheit, and you will have one of the

 You go to the forum section, Ask a Baker, to ask us any questions you have about baking

 and chefs from all over the country will be there to answer your questions.

 Hi, I'm Cindy Harris, and we love making this show available to you free of charge.

 If you'd like to help us keep it that way, make a contribution to our Karma Jar or become

 You know, in years past, people made a lot of cream soups, and cream of artichoke was

 Well, nowadays, people want something lighter and healthier, and with the help of an immersion

 It has very little fat in it, but lots of wine and great artichoke flavor.

 Now, for this soup, we're going to be starting by mincing two shallots.

 They're usually a little bit sweeter than an onion, but when we chop them, we want to

 chop them into a mince, so it's very important we get these nice and fine.

 And now I'm going to take these over to the stove, and we're going to start sauteing them.

 I'm going to put the heat on a medium-high heat and place two tablespoons of olive oil

 into the pan, and then I'm going to take my shallots and put that into the olive oil,

 along with a nice pinch of salt, and then I'm going to saute these until the shallots

 Now, after about five minutes, you can see they're starting to get golden, which is just

 perfect, and I've got two packages of frozen artichoke hearts, and the packages can be

 anywhere between nine and twelve ounces, but you do want two packages of them.

 I've put them in a colander, and I've just run them under some water, and I'm going to

 pour those in and give them a stir, and I'm going to let these saute for another five

 Now that the artichokes have sauteed, I'm going to add a little bit of wine, and I have

 Now I'm using a Chardonnay tonight, but you could easily use a Sauvignon Blanc if you'd

 Now if you did want to make this soup totally vegetarian, you could use a vegetable broth.

 Now I'm going to turn the temperature up to high because I want to bring this to a boil.

 Now that the soup has come to a boil, I'm going to turn it down to low, put a lid on

 Next I'm going to take my immersion blender, and I'm going to puree the soup.

 Now if you don't have an immersion blender, you could take and put this in a food processor

 Now the important thing with an immersion blender is you want to put it in the pot,

 and you don't want to lift it up because the hot soup could splatter on you.

 Now I'm going to add a tablespoon of butter, and that's going to add a nice little bit

 of richness, because you can see this soup has very little fat in it, just the bit of

 And once the butter is completely melted, you're going to want to take a spoon and put

 And this is going to need a little bit of salt and some pepper.

 It's always important to taste your soups and make sure that they're seasoned enough

 Now if you're into making soups, you'll definitely want to sign up for our badge program that

 We have all kinds of badges that you can earn for making soups.

 Now a great finish to this soup is some nice shaved Parmesan cheese on top.

 Well if you'd like to try this soup at home, just go to our website and go to the Soups

 My name is Chef Harpal and you're watching me cook some delicious recipes from kiwi fruit.

 I'm always in search of new ingredients and creating innovative recipes.

 Now those recipes which are absolutely tasty are the ones which are brought forward to

 These are actually seeds of watermelon, seeds from melon and seeds from cucumber.

 And along with raw papaya, what I'm going to do is add the kiwi puree.

 Amchoor powder, which is dry mango powder, one teaspoon of the same.

 Now those of you who don't get amchoor powder can substitute with lemon juice or vinegar

 as I'm using almost in all recipes, hence I thought let me change a bit.

 I'm telling you, if you make it at home, it's going to be divine for everybody at home.

 And, you know, in this environment, no drugs are ever needed, no antibiotics are ever needed.

 They get plenty of food, plenty of water, lots of area here to scratch around in.

 And the quality of the eggs really is determined by the environment that these chickens are raised in and what they eat.

 So now we're going to take some of these delicious eggs from Jack's Chicken Farm and we're going to make some baked eggs.

 We're going to use two different hams today, our slow-cooked ham and our smoked Black Forest ham.

 Like the eggs, these are raised on farms that practice sustainable agriculture.

 Never any antibiotics, no other drugs at all, plenty of space to roam.

 A little salt and pepper on my eggs, a little sea salt, love it.

 I like to break this up a little bit and just lay the slices on however.

 Now I can do a little asparagus if I want, little tips like this on top for decoration.

 You can use some roasted red peppers as I've had here and I'll quickly do some nice juliennes of those.

 It's really good, they set up, make it much easier to take out of the muffin tins here.

 Free guitar lessons and you are tuned into the top 50 greatest guitar riffs.

 Some picked by me, some picked by you, some picked by some of my students out there, my

 It takes me back to the day when we were sitting in your room jamming all these Motley songs

 It's going to take me a little time to get that one ready, but I will get that for you,

 So anyways, the tuning on this, I've decided I'm going to do the tunings that the bands

 I've got some songs that are just, they're not going to sound quite right.

 So I mean like Slipknot, Psychosocial, I mean we've got some drop tunings we've got

 So DGC FAD or however you need to, if you have a tuner, just tune each string to that.

 And through my website we'll have some offers coming up real soon of full songs and stuff

 And what we're starting with is open E, second fret A. So we've got a power chord there.

 And we're going to subgroup this into some little pieces for you.

 And then go open E with a palm mute and then second fret E. Palm mute.

 And I'm saying that in the beat of the song so you can get the rhythm of it.

 The best way to do this is to bar fret two from the D down through the high E. We're

 not going to play the high E though, but if you're barring you're going to touch it anyways.

 And then take your third finger, probably best fret three on the B string.

 You can go A through B or D through B. But strum those and then lift your third finger

 So now you'll be able to catch the second fret on the B string.

 And then you're going to repeat that and go to a different chord on the end.

 And I remember talking with Mick one time at his house and he said...

 We didn't have the quick convenience of a computer like we do now.

 So, just some theory to why these chords are called what they're called.

 Once you hear them clearly, then you're going to strum those 5, or no, those 4 strings,

 And if you can, if you're familiar with vibratos, this may not be a big deal.

 So if you're not used to that, just take one string and do each string of the chord.

 If you can get them individually, then you can work on them in chunks maybe.

 So after I hit the power chord, I'm starting the open palm mute with an upstroke.

 And then just alternate picking from there until you get to the chords that you're playing.

 So it's Friday so you know it's time for another tutorial, another autumn inspired look.

 My eyebrows are already filled in so I'm using this foundation by Illamasqua called the Skin

 I'm just going to put that on my entire face and also across my eyelids because I actually

 had done some eyeshadow looks before and there's a little bit of makeup still on them

 I have panda eyes and I'm going to do a separate tutorial on how I conceal those in a moment

 but I'm just kind of just making a nice clean base for my eyeshadow which I'm going to apply

 Now with all eye looks you want to start with a primer to prime your lids and then a transition

 This shade is a tad darker than my actual skin tone and what it does is it helps the

 blending process and also transition the eyelid colour from the eyebrow colour.

 For a base I want my eyeshadow to pop so I'm using NYX Jumbo Pencil in Milk.

 This is a classic eyeshadow base but I'm applying it ever so lightly than I would usually because

 I don't want it too heavy and it's just going on the pretty much lower portion of my eyelid.

 Make sure you use a fluff brush to blend out the harsh lines from the base.

 Now our key colour for this look is a lovely green called Lucky Green by MAC.

 I'm using this shader brush and I'm packing on the colour gradually to build up the intensity

 Note I'm not swooping it on, I'm actually just patting on the eyeshadow.

 This avoids fallout and also gives a nice rich colour on the lid.

 Next I'm using another transition colour going into the crease with this bright orange and

 It's a matte colour so I'm just going to swoop it back and forth in the crease of the eye

 My Carbon by MAC which is a deep MAC has broken so I've been using this which is just any

 Placing that on the outer third and the inner third and also swooping it within the crease.

 Now I've changed my brush which is slightly more bristles and I'm just blending that colour

 so it has a really nice blend and also helps the intensity of the eyeshadow to really pick

 Now grabbing a clean fluff brush I'm just going to be blending the outer portion of that

 Back with Lucky Green by MAC and a pencil brush I'm actually just swooping the colour

 I want a winged liner as well so I'm using this liquid liner and I'm just going to do

 pretty much a medium shaped winged liner starting from the inner corner of my eyelid and making

 I'm actually drying my lashes at the moment so after my mascara I'm just going to go straight

 So I'm applying quite a generous amount onto the eyelashes from the top lashes and then

 It's also cleaning up under the area where I applied the green onto the lower lash line.

 It was slightly thicker but I've just covered it up with the concealer.

 I'm also applying some of that highlight colour on the bridge of my nose and also just on

 For the sponge I'm just going to set my highlights with Ben Nye's Topaz powder.

 And as always I'm just getting a buffing brush just to take off the excess of the powder.

 And here I'm just showing my eyes which is complete with the eyelashes on also and with

 I didn't want to fill in my lips with the pencil so I'm using this lovely shade which

 And I'm going to be using a nice cream nude lip gloss just to go on top of it to make

 I normally apply my blush just before my lips but I actually forgot but it's not too late

 so I'm applying Sahara by Sleek onto the apples of my cheeks and this will complete the look.

 I'm going to be leaving all the products in my blog so please do check it out on chanelbritain.co.uk

 Drop in the bucket involves a complicated three-dimensional string formation that can

 cause knots if you're not careful, so pay close attention to where your string is going.

 A non-responsive yoyo is recommended for this trick, and you may wish to practice the formation

 Hold your non-throw hand with the thumb pointing up and bring it around the string so that

 Using your throw hand, wrap the string around your thumb, first in towards your palm, then

 Wrap the string underneath your index finger and in towards your palm.

 Now using the index finger from your throw hand, take hold of the position of the string

 If you look at it from above, the string should start from the loop around your middle finger,

 go around the index finger of your non-throw hand at a right angle, around the thumb of

 your non-throw hand in another right angle, back towards your throw hand, loop around

 your index finger, and go right back towards your non-throw hand, and underpass underneath

 It's this last segment of string that you want to land the yoyo on.

 You will string it up over the side of your hand and hopefully catch it in the middle

 Throw the yoyo sideways as in a breakaway, but instead of swinging it up, just let it

 It's as though you've thrown a normal sleeper, but the yoyo is sideways.

 As the yoyo is sleeping, you'll put it into the string formation we learned.

 Pay attention to the motion of your swing and try to make it perfectly parallel to the

 Give the formation a little bit of slack as the yoyo comes down, and we should be able

 Once you've got the catch part down, try tossing the yoyo back out of the bucket.

 Note that if you miss the string, you shouldn't immediately drop it and try to start over,

 Instead try to throw the yoyo back out the same way it came in, or else manually remove

 Hey everyone, I'm Whitney from WhitneySews.com and I make a lot of different types of zipper

 bags and I've been wanting to try out some new ones and I decided to try and make a pleather

 This is really easy to make and can be changed up in tons of different ways and you can even

 use upcycled materials like an old purse or jacket for your supplies.

 And to make my robot I used purple pleather and scraps of leather, a metal zipper, thread,

 To start I cut one piece approximately 8 inches by 7 inches and two that were 8 inches wide

 With a high numbered needle in your machine sew the zipper to the two smaller rectangles.

 I simply put the edge of the pleather on the zipper tape and sewed to attach.

 This is a really basic way to sew a zipper but it is perfect for this type of material.

 Place the larger piece on top, mark and cut the zipper piece to the same size.

 Place the eyes onto the front however you like and sew to attach.

 Place two of the trapezoids wrong sides together and sew along the three small sides.

 Place them on the front as shown lining up the long edges with the side.

 Make sure the zipper is partially open then place the back on top and use clothes pins

 Stack your bag under some heavy books overnight to flatten if needed.

 I think this guy turned out super cute and would be a great project to get your kids

 You can let them design the robot and then make the bag for them.

 Make sure to check back soon for more videos and go to WhitneySews.com for extras and posts

 But after you've been making gift baskets for a while, you get to understand how to pack the container,

 how to add the products, how to put in the shred and angle the enhancements,

 This gift still has to be put in a cellophane or shrink wrap and then topped with a bow.

 You're in one state or one country and a person is in a different state or different country.

 Well it doesn't take a lot of products, but you do have to have the right products.

 The small bubbles really work well in closing either small or large gift baskets or large containers.

 You also need a box that is the correct size for the particular gift basket.

 I find that if you need just one or two boxes, then office supply stores are great at having one or two boxes.

 You might also think about having a box that someone else has sent you, or maybe one that's in your garage or attic.

 Those boxes are usually a bit unstable because they've been used once, usually.

 And if they've been used once, then the box in a way loses its integrity.

 Can you imagine having a crushed box with a crushed gift basket arriving at the person's location?

 So you want a brand new box, one that's never been used before.

 So you take your wrapped gift, you wrap it in bubble wrap, and then you put it in the box, close the box.

 And if there's any wiggle room between the wrapped gift and the box, then you tighten up the wiggle room with newspaper.

Just crush it up and put it in the holes, the empty areas within the box.

 Close up the box, put your shipping tag on it, and your gift is ready to go.

 Again, not difficult to wrap a gift, but it does take some time to get used to doing.

 I remember wrapping my first gift, and I needed five minutes to get it to UPS, which is one of the shippers that we use quite often.

 And I had five minutes to prepare the wrapping, and five minutes to get it to UPS.

 And thankfully, I'm only five minutes away from the closest UPS.

 Even though there might be a UPS store near you, and not the UPS facility.

 So you will become familiar with not just making a beautiful design, but also packing it properly so it gets to its destination in the same way it looks when you've packed it.

You need tape, bubble wrap, and a sturdy box to get the gift where it's going.

 So I was going to do that artifact for Joseph, but you email back saying you might get a

 Here we have a Jaguar X-Type Estate fitted with a horizontal loading with a quantum detachable

 To fit the tow bar neck, first remove the dust cover, insert the neck of the tow bar

 To remove the neck, insert the key, turn, press the handle inwards and rotate fully

 Remove the dust cover, insert the neck of the tow bar and press down.

 To remove the neck, insert the key and turn, press the handle inwards, rotate as far as

 Reversing sensors that are mounted in the lower black panel of the bumper on X-Types

 are particularly sensitive and usually pick up the tow bar as an obstacle.

 If your X-Type has reversing sensors in this lower black panel, we would advise you always

 When the tow bar is removed, you can still see the receiver for the tow bar and the electrics

 So once again, to fit the tow bar, first remove the dust cover, insert the detachable neck

 Insert the key, quarter turn, press the handle in towards the neck of the tow bar, rotate

 On later versions of this car, the reversing sensors are mounted higher up on the bumper

 and do not have the same problem in detecting the tow bar that earlier models had with the

 Finally, you can see, press the handle inwards, rotate as far as you can and withdraw the

 We're making pizza today and right now I'm going to make for you a tomato sauce that's

 I have several different kinds of canned tomatoes because in the wintertime, the tomatoes that

 you can buy fresh in the grocery store are not the most flavorful, whereas canned tomatoes

 are picked during the summer when tomatoes are at their prime and they're canned, so

 you're going to get a better flavor even though it's a canned tomato.

 So what I would suggest to you is that you find tomatoes, find a canned tomato that you

 You can open several different kinds of tomato and they will taste very different from one

 to the other, so taste some tomatoes, find a tomato that you enjoy and then you can

 mix or just use a single kind of tomato to make this sauce for yourself.

 I have a couple of different kinds of tomato that I enjoy and I mix them together to make

 So these are just diced tomatoes that are packed in juice as you can see here.

 So the first thing to do is just strain out the juice so that you have, you're left with

 these nice big chunks of tomato, which this sauce is not a cooked sauce either, so it's

 So what you want to do is strain your tomatoes and then just put, take the tomatoes that

 And then you can take, what I have here is a different kind of, it's called a diced tomato,

 as you can see it's a very different kind of dice from that tomato, but it's also called

 a chopped, I think it's called a chopped tomato actually, and it's packed in a thicker, thicker

 So I mix a little of this in with my, in with my diced tomato and I like to use my fingers.

 If you don't like to use your fingers, you can use a spatula or a spoon and just mix

 Now I might put a little bit more of the, of those chopped tomatoes and now I have a

 little bit of mixture of large chopped tomatoes and sort of a more crushed tomato and I'm

 And make sure you salt nicely because tomatoes can tend to be acidic, so you want, you want

 So you'll taste the tomatoes and see, so you'll salt it to taste.

 And then I've got a little bit of chiffonade of basil, so I'm going to mix all of that

 I'm going to also add, excuse me, I'm going to also add some black pepper and just a touch

 And the next thing we're going to do is shape the dough for the second rise.

 of the ingredients that you're going to need for this recipe will be listed in the information

 skinless chicken breast that you've cut into strips, onion that you've sliced, some kind

 of mixture of red or green peppers and I've sliced these like this.

 of diced tomatoes with green chilies, vegetable oil, you'll need ground cumin, chili powder,

 you've sprayed with cooking spray and you'll need to preheat your oven to 400 degrees.

 I'm going to start this recipe by putting my vegetable oil and my spices in a little

 so now I'm going to pour over my tomatoes and chilies and I'm going to put my vegetables

I'm going to continue to stir until everything's mixed together well.

 really nicely so what I'm going to do now is put it in my preheated oven for about 25

Here's my fajita on a plate and I've put it in a flour tortilla and some of the things

 that you can serve it with are these condiments which are shredded cheese, guacamole, sour

 what I'm going to do is I'm going to put some sprinkles on mine.

 them over a cup just so the bits don't go absolutely everywhere.

Alright, and there you have one pink cake pop with sparkly glitter on.

 you can see it's obviously very hot in here because the chocolate is just melting quicker

 put in these little jars to harden off but because this is just so wet, what I'm going

 So I've got a cupcake case and what I'm going to do is put the cake pop in the bottom like

 that and then I'm going to put it in the fridge so it'll harden off and still be sparkly.

 Okay, and then for the rest of them you just pretty much do the same, we'll put some...

 Okay, the cake pops have been out of the fridge for about a minute and they're already starting

 put them in the fridge to harden off because it is so warm in here it's never going to happen.

 Okay, well you can leave the cake pops like this but when you pick them up they don't

And what you could do is you could cover them, you know, absolutely

 hot weather, to let them dry and harden because they're quite good.

 once you sandwich them together, the possibilities for what you can do are absolutely endless.

 I mean, I think these are really cute because I really like buttons and I like pink and

 And we'll review this when I'm happier with the blend than I am now.

 I'm going to have to do it with more of the light colored blend going through.

 But anyway, I have tutorials on my site about Leopard and every time I make a cane it comes

 What I ended up with was something that I felt would be nice as a tube bead.

 So I just wanted to show you really quickly how I make these tube beads because it's not

 And you know I'm always looking for, I'm sort of mashing the edges here, I'm always looking

 The edges so one isn't like pointed from the cut and the other is curved from the cane.

 So you see how I'm just like, I'm wrapping the slice around this skinnier tube.

 And I'm not going to mash it down and form it too hard because I'm going to have to get

 And this is a clay shaper and this is a, I don't know what size it is.

 And I'm making sure that I'm not pressing it so hard as to close up.

 Now what you can do is you can stick the preliminary skewer in there.

 So you use the edge of the clay shaper to flatten out the ends and then you go in with

 And if you have like more clay on one side of the tube than the other, this is when you

 I find that if you do it that way, you don't get a whole lot of distortion.

 And so then you just put it on up with the other beads and there you go.

 And you can, you know, when it's at this point you can sort of like fart around with it.

 Because when you, after you cure this and then you wet sand it and you give it a finish,

 you're going to be like turning them on the skewer to get them loose after they've been

 But look at the other videos on how to, how to wet sand and how to take the beads off

 And so there's, every place that you see the light, the light colored clay, that's the

 But when you get them all together, and this is what's trippy, okay, you know, when they

 get together, like that, let's say if we had like three strands or something, looking trippy,

 Okay, so that's just a little quick overview on how to make a tube bead the easy breezy

 Okay, so a listener on Twitter asked about how to plant amaranth.

 And as you can see, I've got amaranth growing here in and amongst the marigolds, a couple

 Better view here, these are a couple of plants here more mature.

 And it took me a while to figure out how to get them to really produce.

 And this is the first time I've ever had them really produce in the way I want.

 The flower head, you know, and I can share a couple of things with you with growing

 So what I do instead is I just get these little Dixie cups here.

 But you get these little Dixie cups and you put, you know, drill a hole in the bottom.

 I may try to do an annotated link to that, how to make your own seed starter mix.

 Now I put them in these little flats and these are all neglected.

 The thing is, is that, and then I just put the amaranth seed in here and then I water

 the top of, no, I water the bottom of it and it seeps up from the bottom.

 And then when they sprout, you'll know if they're a good seed or not because it'll sprout

 I found that when you put them directly in the bed here, there's not, especially with

 my drip irrigation, there's just not enough surface moisture to make the seed sprout.

 So what I have to do is go to a system like this, Dixie cups, or you can use transplanting

 And this is very humble and a little bit messy, but for me, it's all about the production,

 Dixie cups and the amaranth in the Dixie cups with the thing, cover them up lightly, put

 water in the bottom of that thing, it'll soak up from the bottom.

 And then when they sprout, I usually don't even wait until they produce their second

 I just, once they sprout and are clearly coming on very strongly, I'll take them and

 And then they just catch on up and they just produce and they grow.

 And I've had pretty good luck with them and I'm happy with them.

 So the first year I used golden amaranth, it didn't sprout at all.

 So I switched to a whole different kind of amaranth and I went with the Mayan amaranth.

 So if you're having problems with amaranth and the seeds didn't sprout, one, did you

 Now between the transplanting system and a different variety, I've had good luck with

 On the side of a 16 ounce bottle of Rydon Auto SUV formula, there are numbers in both

 directions that delineate ounce measurements in order to keep track of the amount of product

 Using the third number in the numerical sequence for this tire at 16, look at the dosage table

 Once you have found all of the 16 inch tires, match the remaining two numbers to find the

 For the actual installation, you'll need the valve core remover and the 5 inch tube that

 Remove the orange cap from the top of the bottle and cut the plastic 1 quarter inch

 The tire must be rotated forward or back until it is in the proper location for installation.

 Unscrew the valve cap and using the valve core remover, remove the valve core.

 Attach one end of the tube to the valve stem, the other end to the bottle of Rydon.

 Tilt the bottle up and squeeze to push the product out of the bottle and into the tire.

 If the dosage required is larger than 16 ounces, attach another bottle and add the necessary

 Take an air source and shoot some air through the valve stem to clear any product that remains.

 Reinsert the valve core to the valve stem and inflate the tire to the desired inflation

 Place the valve cap back on the tire and clean off any excess product on the rim or tire.

 Proper Rydon installation will evenly coat the interior of the tire and the highlighted

 area around the entire circumference of the tire and will provide protection to the contact

 High speed tires should never be repaired outside of this area due to the possibility

 Start with the string behind your thumbs and pinkies, running across both palms.

 With your right hand, reach across to the left hand and hook your pointer finger under the string that runs across the palm.

 Reach across to the right and hook your pointer finger under the string that runs across the palm.

 Curl your four fingers over all but the string closest to your body.

 Move the loop off of your thumbs and send the loop up and over your closed fists, landing on the back of your hand.

 Using your right hand, pick the left pointer finger loop off and put it on the left thumb.

 With the right hand, pick up the loop behind the left hand and place it on the left middle finger only.

 With the left hand, pick up the loop behind the right hand and place it on the right middle finger only.

 Using the right thumb and right pointer finger as pinchers, pick up the string that runs between the left ringfinger and the pinky.

 Using the left thumb and left pointer finger as pinchers, pick up the string that runs between the right ringfinger and the pinky.

The advantage of making your own is that you definitely know that you've

 got raw almonds and that you can soak and dehydrate them, right?

 butters, even the raw ones, not all raw almond butters have the almonds soaked.

 got the enzyme inhibitors in the skin, which makes them more difficult to digest.

 can really get the best quality almond butter really by doing it yourself, getting good

 good quality food processor that you can leave on for about 10 minutes without it burning

So, soaked and dehydrated almonds, it really is important that they are dehydrated

 Raw Chef TV where I talk about doing kale chips in an oven, refer to that and you can

 noisy so I'm going to turn it on when I finish speaking and I'm going to leave it on for

 up and it's going to look like it's never going to turn to butter but just leave it

 on with the S blade in there and I promise you it will turn to butter.

 So, it's about halfway, maybe a little bit over halfway now and I just wanted to show

 you where we're at because what will happen after that initial noise, it will start to

 break down into crumb and like I say you'll think it's never going to turn into nut butter.

 It will start to clump up at the sides and stop moving around so much so you need a spatula

So, like I say a little bit over halfway now so we'll just carry on.

It's just a little bit pasty now but you can start to see that it's warmed

 another couple of minutes more like that but I just wanted to show you how this is

And then the beautiful thing about this is that obviously you can use it

 in your recipes where it calls for almond butter but you can also make almond milk out

And of course, almond milk is great in its own right when you make it as I've

 is and how good your almonds were but two days to four days in the refrigerator.

 with almond butter like this, it will last for weeks in the refrigerator covered because

 almond milk, just with my almond butter, a bit of water and then you can add in, just

 do a bit more water, you can add in all the other bits and pieces that you normally add

 maybe a pinch of salt just like I showed you in that earlier episode.

You can put in a little bit of lemon juice, maybe some sweetener of choice.

 Optionally, I've got some liquid lecithin here that's going to emulsify the fat in there

So whenever you want it then, you've got, in a pinch of time, you've

 just got some really quick and easy beautiful fresh, fluffy almond milk ready to go.

 So we're learning how to roast coffee and the best coffee in the world comes

 that it was monks who actually made a stew using coffee beans and that's how

 And inside is a little charcoal to build the fire and the beans actually roast

 Something that's usually done after a special meal or if you've got time maybe in the afternoon you just whip a cup of coffee up for some friends.

 So after we're done here we'll take the beans, we're going to smash the beans and then we're going to boil them in hot water.

 That started a few minutes ago as green beans and now we've got fresh roasted, fresh ground coffee.

 In the baskets you'll see they have spices and to make the ceremony special the spices are actually thrown in on the fire.

 As the fire and the coffee and the beans are roasting and brewing it actually puts out a beautiful smell.

 we're then going to step with our left and left hand going across.

 Just need to get them straight so you can pull it out the bottom.

 Mine had some oil on it in the packaging so if you got a new rotor just make sure you spray it off and wipe it down.

 Okay so from what I found this thing takes 150, or no 200 foot pounds of torque.

 And then I'll just put on my breaker bar and see if I can take it just a little bit more.

 materials, whether it be sod, weeds, or any other substance above ground.

 By rough grading the area and uncovering everything underneath, including irrigation, pipes, electrical

 In this phase, we also cap existing sprinklers that will not be used.

 to cap sprinklers at the pipe level as opposed to the top of the riser.

 If necessary, relocate sprinklers, modify existing irrigation lines, and add any required

 Be sure to backfill and tamp the location of any unused sprinklers to avoid depressions

 When uncovering any underground wiring, electrical, speakers, etc., move it inward and away from

 The installation of the bender board is an important step as it provides for a clean

 at a 2 inch level in order to account for the 1⁄2 inch drainage membrane which will

 in order to account for sloping away from the living areas and towards the installed

Proper base distribution also ensures the turf will have a smooth,

 Compaction is accomplished by vibrating, tamping and rolling the gravel aggregate.

 a good solid base in which to drive the nails when installing the turf.

 the ammonia present in pet urine thereby reducing the odor and is applied directly to the top

 holes at its base in order for water and fluids to flow through the turf and into the drainage

U-nails should be used to secure adjoining sections of the membrane, apply as necessary

 to anchor the membrane and prevent movement when laying the turf.

 Now with the drainage membrane in place we're able to cover the collectors in the drainage

 of the membrane then allow the covered drains to be as active as if they were above ground.

 When laying the turf it's beneficial to find either a straight edge or two perpendicular

Square off the turf along your chosen location in order to minimize

 with temporary nails to hold it in place while cutting the opposite edges.

 When trimming the turf to fit the area properly, you should overcut the turf by an eighth inch

 by placing them six inches apart and driving them down three quarters of the way.

 used in the field should be applied as necessary to prevent movement of the turf.

 When finishing the nails, separate the grass to avoid pulling the blades down along with

The nail is then hidden within the grass blades at the base of the mat.

 Don't drive the nails too deeply into the ground as it will cause the turf to be pulled

 spaced six inches apart and driven three quarters of the way down.

 Tucking the turf involves hiding the edges of the turf against any hardscape or edging

 grain of the grass causing it to stand up in preparation for the final application of

After the initial pass with the power brush, apply a second coat

The Durafil sand is antibacterial and is not harmful to pets or children.

 the granules evenly throughout the turf installation with a conventional seed spreader.

 as a ballast to hold the blades upright and gives the turf more weight.

 The final grooming step involves power brushing the turf once again lightly to force the ATD

 and Durafil granules into the base of the turf for settling and optimal stability.

 up the brushing by using a plastic leaf rake to remove any excess debris and give the turf

In order to maintain clean, odor free turf, Turf Fresh odor eliminator

 causing bacteria with the live enzymes contained in the solution.

 formula and can be applied using a hose and mixer sprayer for ideal results.

 time to bring out your pet and start enjoying your newly installed Tiger Turf for many years

 I'm going to be showing you how to tie an improved clinch knot.

 hooks when you don't need a bait loop and you're not using braided line.

 grip on the braid to keep the braid from slipping through and coming undone.

 There's other knots such as the double palomar knot or the uni knot that you can use for braided line.

 monofilament and I will show you exactly how we're going to do this.

 So to get started you take the tag end of your fishing line, pass it through the eye of your hook,

 pull a good portion of that back through and on lighter monofilament such as

 8 or 10 pound or less you're going to want to run about six wraps around the main line,

So again you run it through there, you're going to make six wraps.

 it's just a clinch knot which will pull apart if put under significant pressure.

 So then you pass it back through this loop that you've created.

I don't trim it all the way flush down because I know the fish really don't care that much.

 and it does pull a little of that, it has a little bit of room to play with and it's not going to pull it

 Hi, Greg here from the Ballistic Barbecue Channel right here on YouTube.

 Today I'm hanging out with the Primo Ceramic Grills channel and I'm going to be preparing

 We're going to kick this video off by introducing the real stars of this show.

 I'm going to go ahead and set these off to the side and we're going to start the recipe

 Alright, we're going to start this off with two tablespoons of sea salt, two tablespoons

 of ground black pepper, four tablespoons of fresh chopped basil, four tablespoons of

 fresh chopped rosemary, four tablespoons of fresh chopped thyme, one teaspoon of cayenne

 pepper, two tablespoons of dry oregano, two tablespoons of onion powder, two teaspoons

 of smoked paprika, two tablespoons of one of my all time favorite spices and that is

 ground coriander seed, two tablespoons of garlic powder, two tablespoons of cumin, two

 tablespoons of chili powder, this is ancho chili powder that I'm using but you can use

 whatever you want, and two tablespoons of seasoning salt, I'm using Lowry seasoning

 Now I'm going to use a whisk, I just want to make sure that this gets nice and incorporated.

 A spoon can kind of just push things around so a whisk does the trick here.

 Let's go ahead and move this off to the side and we'll put that lamb back in play here.

 First thing I'm going to do is just put a little bit of extra virgin olive oil on the

 Doesn't need to be a lot, you just want to make sure that it's enough to where the rub

 Right now I'm going to take the rub, we're going to put a pretty heavy application on

 What I'm going to do now is place these in a glass like a baking dish, cover it with

 plastic and I'm going to put it in the refrigerator for 24 hours.

 Alright, here we are 24 hours later and I am ready to cook some lamb.

 I have the Primo running at 250 degrees, lower vent is open about a fingers width, daisy

 wheel is open about 3 quarters of the way and I have the heat deflectors in so we are

 Alright the next thing I'm going to do is insert a wireless thermometer.

 Just want to make sure it's in the thick part of the meat and we're not hitting any bone.

 Right now lamb is just one of those meats that's best when cooked to temp and I prefer

 So my plan is to basically pull this meat once it's 130, take it in the house, cover

 it with some foil and I'm going to allow that carryover to bring it up to my desired temp.

 Now running the Primo at 250, I'm guessing it's going to take anywhere from 2 to 2 and

 So anyway again what I'm going to do is pull this, I'll wrap it in foil, we're going to

 Temperature of the lamb has risen to 140, right where I like it.

 There's another step you need in order to serve these things correctly for the recipe.

 Alright now to finish this off we're kind of going with that little Greek vibe here

 Now with me if there's a bone attached I'm using it as a handle.

 And I'm thinking this would be a perfect kind of an alternative meal for the holidays.

 You know you got Easter coming up, Christmas, this is wonderful.

 I'm Lisa Bernbach for Howdini.com and this is Lauren Chapman for Pillsbury.

 Now I have just been informed there's neither snicker nor doodle in these delicious confections

 Very, very easy Lisa, especially when you start with refrigerated cookie dough.

 So here we've got our cookie dough all crumbled up into little pieces and we're going to add

 This is to customize that cookie dough so it'll bake up a little bit puffier and a little

 And then we can also say we made these cookies more or less from scratch.

 So you're going to knead all of that flour and this is a super fun thing to do, especially

 And then once the flour's all kneaded in, you're going to roll it back into that same

 And we're going to cut this log into quarter inch thick pieces.

 Once you've got all of the balls rolled out, you're going to put together the secret...

 This is three tablespoons of sugar mixed with a half a teaspoon of cinnamon.

 That's what distinguishes these cookies from plain old regular sugar cookies.

 So that's mixed up and then you simply take the balls, roll them in the cinnamon sugar.

 It's crunchy and caramelized and it's got that wonderful cinnamon aroma.

 And they're just beautiful added to a dessert plate like the one that we have here.

 Right next to the chocolate caramel cashew bars and the lemon bars also made with refrigerated

 Mudiga, otherwise known as bread crumbs, is a staple food in an Italian kitchen.

 We use it almost every day in some way, shape, or form, whether it's vegetables, or on fish,

 So today I'd like to show you how to prepare mudiga, a seasoned mudiga.

 In Sicilian, it's called mudiga gonzada, which means fixed or seasoned bread crumbs.

 So we're going to start with a pound and a half of plain bread crumbs.

 And to that, we're going to add progresso bread crumbs, and they are the Italian style.

 Next, we're going to add one package of Good Seasons Italian dressing.

 The next thing we're going to do is add some fresh grated Parmesan cheese.

 It'll really melt and makes it kind of crispy when it fries up.

 When I was a child, I remember going over to my grandmother Felicia's house.

 My grandmother used to make this, and I remember standing in her kitchen and just watching

 And I remember my mother learning how to make it, and now it's one of my son's very, very

 And he's a very picky eater, so if he will eat this, anybody will eat this.

 For me, you can never have too much garlic, so I'm going to break some up.

 So now, we have our garlic peeled, and we're going to just finely chop, mince.

 That's when you know that you're getting a nice, really good quality head of garlic.

 So all together, we have about, I would say, four cloves of garlic.

 We're going to add our chopped garlic to our breadcrumbs that we've prepared.

 So if you want to and you don't want to get your hands dirty, you can get a spoon, but

 Now I'm looking at this, and I'm thinking that I need to add just a little bit more

 We're going to place this aside, and we're going to chop our fresh parsley.

 So we're going to take a good handful, probably about a half a cup when it's all chopped.

 I remember cooking with my grandmother, climbing up onto a chair.

 If you ask anybody in my family, they'll tell you I was always next to my grandmother, always

 interested in what she was cooking, how she was cooking it, loved tasting it.

 We've learned so much from her over the years, and we were lucky enough that she was one

 So when she passed away, that recipe box followed from house to house in our family,

 I know the recipes because I cook with my grandmother so much, so I really don't really

 My mother, on the other hand, when she's cooking a recipe, she has to follow the recipe to

 If my grandmother's recipe said stir it five times, she will stir it five times only.

 My mother and I have a hard time cooking together, although we enjoy it.

 I cook more like my grandmother and just go by eye and by taste, and my mother is the

 And my son actually loves to help me cook, believe it or not, more than my daughter.

 My daughter likes to make desserts, so that's kind of fun to have him interested in something

 With these bread crumbs, you actually can do a number of things.

 Another reason why it's nice to make a big batch of them and keep them in your freezer,

 So we're just going to add this to our bread crumbs again, and we're just going to toss

 Now you can see why the fresh parsley would be better than the dried.

 You can actually see the flakes, and when you're breading something or using these in

 meatballs, you see the little pieces of the green, and it's so delicious.

 And it looks pretty, because it has to look as good as it tastes.

 So here we have our fixed mudiga gonzada, which means fixed or seasoned bread crumbs.

 While all regal salmon is divine, the regal artisan range is the absolutely best of the best.

 It's hand selected and smoked using native manuka wood chips and it's perfect for canapes such as these.

 And what I'm going to do is bring a tray over here that I've got just a little bit of oil on.

 Using a potato masher just gently press down on them until they are about that size, about a centimetre thick.

 Not too thick but not so flat that the whole thing is going to fall apart.

 And what I'm going to do is just give them a little drizzle with some olive oil.

 And then all there is to that is into the oven 200 degrees until they're crisp and golden.

 I've got some sour cream in here and I'm going to mix into that some finely chopped shallots.

 So we'll mix that in and of course with salmon as always dill because it's such a great flavour combination.

 And a little bit of seasoning for that with just sea salt once again and a little bit of freshly ground black pepper.

 These are the potatoes that have been in the oven, they've been cooked until they're nice and golden and they're ready to go.

 Now all I'm going to do is put a dollop of the sour cream, dill, caper and shallot mixture onto each potato.

 Make sure your potatoes are warm and not too hot because if they're hot the sour cream is just going to melt and run off them.

 They can of course be at room temperature but warm is probably the best.

 Be as generous as you like with this and when you're using this gorgeous artisan salmon it's cut finely and it really is easy to put a lovely twist on the top and get some height with your canapes.

 Let's go for a little sprig of dill again on top of each one just basically for a lovely splash of green.

 Into that I'm going to put a lovely big tablespoon or so, depending on your palate, how strong you like it, of horseradish.

 And the other thing I'm going to do is put a little slurp of vodka.

 And all that does is just gives a little bit of flavour interest to the creme fraiche.

 The horseradish of course will give it some heat and the vodka will give it a little bit of pep, a little bit of salt into there as well.

 To me there's certain things you make, certain things you buy and for blinis it's so easy to buy them.

 I've already cooked it and basically all I did was roasted whole beetroot, rubbed the skin off and then it's been grated.

 The earthy flavour of the beetroot complements the lovely richness of the salmon.

 Once again as I did with the potatoes, we'll put a lovely curl of salmon on top of the beetroot.

 And make sure however you put it that you still have some beetroot colour coming through because that colour contrasting with the salmon is just so vibrant and beautiful.

 And we'll get that lovely green colour coming through with the beautiful magenta of the beetroot, the rich pink of the salmon and then the beautiful little chopped chives.

 And of course the chives also give a lovely little onion flavour which complements everything we've got on the plate so far.

 There you have it, two delicious canapé ideas using regal artisan smoked salmon.

 Today, we will show you how to apply mirror screen protection on your cellular device.

 The first thing you want to do is use a clean cloth to wipe the surface of your screen,

 making sure that you get rid of all dust, oil marks, and fingerprints.

 Be very thorough when wiping the surface of your screen, as this is a very important step

 Once that is done, you are now ready to apply the screen protector.

 While doing this, be very careful not to touch the surface of the screen or this will

 You are now ready to apply the screen protector onto your cell phone.

 Please take your time to perfectly align the edges of your screen protector to the edges

 Be sure to apply enough pressure onto the surface of your screen.

 Try your best to apply pressure evenly and slowly onto the screen, allowing air to escape

 Once it has been applied, you can now take a cloth to apply pressure evenly throughout

 I'd also like to emphasize that it's very important that you do apply enough pressure

 as it will make the next step of removing the protective layer much easier.

 Apply pressure to the surface of the screen as many times as needed until you are satisfied

 You are now ready for the final step in the application process.

 Slowly and carefully pull up on tab number 2 to remove the final protective layer of

 If all the preceding steps were done correctly, you should have no problem removing the final

 Finally, use the cleaning cloth to clean the surface of your newly applied screen protector.

 The surface of your screen is now protected against scratches, abrasions, and dirt, while

 When choosing the proper mirror screen protection for your cell phone, it is important to recognize

 It is important to recognize that not all screen protectors are created equally.

 Manufacturers all use different materials in making screen protectors, offering different

 Oftentimes in an effort to save money, people will purchase lower quality, lower priced

 What they will find is that oftentimes their screen is more prone to abrasions, scratches,

 and peeling, ultimately leading to inadequate protection for their screens.

 You've spent hundreds of dollars on your cell phone, wouldn't it make sense to choose a

 Mirror screen protectors are a great way to protect your investment while giving it a

 For a complete line of mirror and clear screen protectors for all the latest and greatest

 Hi everyone, it's Anya from Cooking With Plants and today I'm making a super quick and easy

 The rice that I'm making today I'm actually cooking in the microwave.

 It's just a really quick and easy way to make a nice spiced rice.

 If you're in a hurry it's great for a quick dinner or afternoon snack or a nice side dish.

 It's just so easy to make and only takes about 12 minutes to cook.

 You can use any rice that you like and you can even cook this on the stove top if you

 I'm using jasmine rice today but like I said you can use any rice that you prefer.

 Once your rice is rinsed off you can then add some vegetable stock.

 If you don't have vegetable stock just use water and add your own spices to it to flavour

 Turmeric has really good health benefits for your immune system.

 Now that this is mixed up I'm going to place it in the microwave.

 My microwave is an 1100 watt microwave so I'm going to put that on for about 12 minutes

 But make sure you check with your own depending on the temperature and the settings of your

 microwave as to whether or not you need to put it on longer than 12 minutes.

 Okay so my 12 minutes is up and I'm just going to take this out and check the texture.

 So the rice granules are still a little bit hard and there's a little bit of moisture

 You could either just let it sit there and absorb for a while without turning the microwave

 on or just pop it in for another 2 or 3 minutes and just check again as to how the texture

 So if you wanted to you could put these into little moulds and shape them, whatever you

 I'm actually going to put this out on a little bit of a platter like a rice salad.

 So you could use fresh herbs, maybe some coriander or cilantro, fresh parsley, whatever you have

 I'm going to use some dried parsley today so I'll just sprinkle a little bit of that

 You could also mix this through at the beginning when you're adding your water to the rice

 That will infuse some of that parsley flavour through the rice as well.

 And next I've got some sumac which I'm going to put across this.

 It's a, I believe it's a Middle Eastern spice but it has a bit of a lemony flavour to it

 You could also roast some pine nuts if you wanted to and put them over the top or pistachio

 It's actually one of my son's favourite dishes so we'll be having this for dinner tonight.

 Quick and easy and it looks really, really good and it tastes delicious.

 Mmm, if you haven't yet subscribed, please do and I'll see you for the next recipe.

 Hi, here we are at Mountaintop Ranch with another Mountaintop Minute.

 And one thing we're working on real specifically with some horses this week is teaching them

 And that's a wonderful thing for a horse to know how to do, especially if you trail ride

 And it really doesn't make any difference if you have a shank bit or a snaffle bit on.

 We're out in the pasture because we find that horses are more motivated to learn to neck

 rein in a natural setting, going around trees, bushes, things like that, than cones in your

 But we find that the horse is more motivated and learns better out in the open.

 So Luann's going to go over how to start a horse neck reining and a few do's and don'ts.

 And then we're going to show you a pattern we're going to do out with these trees.

 And I have taught her to move her hips and move off of my legs.

 But don't hesitate to reach up and correct something if you have to, and then go ahead

 So if you're riding with two, you just want to ask for the little turn and be sure that

 I let her feel it a few times, kind of like a little tapping or thumping.

 A lot of people have, make the mistake of when they're turning this way, they're pulling

 And when you're out trying to maneuver around, you're really just sort of confusing the horse.

 So I'm going to walk around some of these trees, and I'm going to try it with Kate with

 And when I turn to the left, I'm going to exaggerate with my body to help her.

 And I'm also going to take this leg and push with this leg, since she already knows how

 And when I turn to the right, of course it'll be turn my body, exaggerate to help my horse,

 So it would have been the opposite leg of the way you're trying it.

 So I'm going to maneuver around some of these trees, and I'm going to be sure she feels

 Okay, she's slipping on this wet grass, so let me just get around this way.

 So remember, as you go around trees, bushes, logs, you want to lay that rein, if you're

 going to the right, you want to lay that left rein on your horse, pushing that horse off

 And to teach that horse, you also want to lay the left leg on the horse.

 And if you'll notice how Luanne is holding the reins, they're not forcing that neck around

 It's just a matter of laying the rein on the horse and laying the leg.

 Same rein, same leg, pushing the horse in the beginning off the rein and leg.

 If the horse doesn't, she's going to reach up with that hand and sort of help remind

 And we find that going around natural obstacles is a little more motivating than cones in

 the arena, but it might not be a bad idea to start some practice with some cones and

 then go to a small area where there's a lot of trees or rocks, natural objects that you

 So we hope this has helped you learn how to start your horse neck reining.

 And then neck reining is like any other thing that you teach a horse.

 And so you can practice neck reining every time that you ride your horse.

 And remember, you want, as your horse learns, you want to ride with less and less leg.

 Use less and less leg as the cue so the horse will start depending on the rein instead of

 So this is Luann and Lydia from Mountaintop Ranch, and we'll see you next week.

 Hello, I'm going to be showing you now how to make eggplant pizza.

 The wonderful thing about eggplant is that you can use it in a lot of dishes and it replaces

 For instance, I sometimes like to cut eggplant in really thin strips and use it as lasagna

 I'll cut big chunks and grill it and then it just becomes a very meaty part of the dish

 And you can also spice it and you can marinate it so it's very versatile and it doesn't have

 that much taste on its own so it absorbs whatever you add to it.

 So what you see here is a really massive eggplant and these are everywhere in Istanbul.

 I don't see these so much in the US but for this dish you could use any kind of eggplant

 What we're going to do is we're going to cut this into about one inch thick strips just

 And we're going to put it on a baking sheet and I already baked some and prepared them

 You're going to put the eggplants flat on a baking sheet, rub it with some olive oil,

 Make sure it's high quality because you're not doing much to it so you want to make sure

 So salt and pepper and we're going to pop them to about a 375 degree oven for I would

 So here are two finished ones and I'm going to take those off of here so I can show you

 This one looks like it fell apart a bit but this one's going into the oven.

 So we have two finished ones here and they're basically cooked through.

 The only thing that we want to do now is add the toppings and then boil it.

 Which means we're only going to be heating it from the top so we melt the cheese.

 You want to cut them pretty thin because you're only broiling it for a few minutes so you

 If you cook it too thick it might be too watery and fresh and you kind of want to have that

 I'm going to season with some thyme, some dried thyme, again with salt and pepper, and

 I like to use hard mozzarella because it's less watery and it just makes for a more cleaner

 And you're going to also put this back into the oven for about five minutes, broil, until

You're going to need a B chord, a G sharp minor chord, an E chord, a C sharp

 and at the end I'll go through, if you're more of a novice player and you want to play

 this as open chords, I'll show you how to change it into an open chord.

 transposition, moving it into another key or you can use a capo and keep it in the same

But for those of you who can play bar chords, I'll go ahead and go through the sections.

 F sharp major and then E and C sharp minor and B and G sharp minor twice each.

 To E, C sharp minor, E, C sharp minor, B, G sharp minor, E, G sharp minor.

 again and there's a little musical interlude which is B and G sharp minor.

 a little interlude in it, you just play one bar of B followed by one bar of G sharp minor.

 G sharp minor, B, E, F sharp minor, G sharp minor, G sharp minor, B, E, F sharp minor.

 together, every time you've got your verse section now, chorus and the bridge section

 and like I say, any time that there's a musical interlude in it, it's the B, G sharp minor

 you who can play the bar chords and have no problems strumming etc, that's about it

But what I'll do for anyone who likes the song, wants to play it but can't

 play bar chords yet, I'll just take you through, well it's not an easier version, it's the

 same version of the song but you've got the option of either using a capo or you could

So I'll just take you through a slightly different version of it.

 ok, so just for those of you who are perhaps new to the guitar playing and you can play

 a few open chords, the chords you're going to need for this is G, E minor, C, A minor

 and D. So providing you can play those chords, you can play this song.

 you can either play it in a different key, which would mean if you were singing that

 your voice would be lower in key or if you've got one of these things, it's called a capo,

 I don't know if you've seen one before, this is a very cheap one, you can get expensive

What it does is it changes the chords that you're playing because it raises the

So for this particular song, to keep it in the key of B, if you want

 to play along with Bruce Springsteen, what you would do is you would put your capo on

 at the, I'll get this right now, I was thinking, you put your capo on at the 4th fret and you

 play your G chord, one fret space, just like you would if you were playing it down here,

 leave a gap between the nut, the white piece down there, you don't leave a gap here, C

 to play along with Bruce Springsteen without having to learn the barre chords yet, if you

 along with the record because it will sound pretty horrendous because you'll be playing

 in one key and he'll be playing in another key and it's not your fault but it won't sound

But if you just want to play it for yourself, your own amusement,

 have a bit of a sing, then it will sound equally good if it suits your voice.

 you through the whole song, the PDF as usual is on the website, but what would happen is,

 you can make a note of this and change it on the PDF, all your B chords will become

 a G, all your G sharp minor chords will become an E minor, all the E major chords will become

 a C major, all the C sharp minor chords will become an A minor chord and the F sharp major

 chord that's in the chorus section will become a D major chord.

 play that from the capo or you can play it just in an open position.

 And you know, if you want to sing, you can still sing along over the top.

 transposing, I've got some stuff up on the theory side of things up there about transposing

 are in the original key simply because I think it's kind of cool for people to play along

 with original recordings, it helps the changes if they're a beginner player and you speed

 up a little bit with your changes because you've got to try and keep up with the record

 provided you don't try a song that's really, really stupidly fast.

 Chris here live and direct in my kitchen for another episode of food FAQs

 It's not ready for roasting or anything, but if you're gonna be steam cooking this

 If you're gonna be peeling it to boil it whatever sort of way you find to use it without actually cooking it in its skin

 I'm gonna show you guys how to peel it how to core it and how to slice it up or whatever you need to do

Breadfruit is a lovely lovely dish and can be enjoyed in so many ways

 Remember if it's your first time show me some love click on subscribe above below

 Leave me your comments and do give the video the thumbs up or like it.

 So I'm gonna need a sort of a bigger knife as well as my paring knife that you know

 And then using that as a base what we need to do is sort of work our way all the way down

 This is the sort of the core or the inside of the breadfruit and we need to remove that but the easiest way to do

 This pretty much put it face down on the cutting board and we're just gonna cut that again into quarters

 Just that sort of line use that as a guide where that sort of I

 Guess what would be the seeds I guess but there's no seeds in here that sort of core area is

 There we go and I've removed that now and all we're doing you can use a potato peeler

 Once you remove that skin you gotta have some water ready because it's gonna go discolored

 We're just gonna put this in some cool water as we peel the rest of them

 Especially if it's your first time working with this and I also suggest because if you're using freshly picked breadfruit

 Liquid that comes out of it once you peel it it may itch or irritate your fingers wear gloves if needs be or

 You can always rub some vegetable oil all over your hands to sort of form a protective barrier before you do it

 I'm just gonna go ahead and peel all of this and I'm gonna show you guys

 I'm all done peeling the breadfruit now and see nice and clean and lovely it's in cool water in a bowl here

Remember I said to put it in water so that whole oxidization thing doesn't take place and

 Get it all darkened and discolored all that skin and everything else here in the garbage

 Now what you can do you can boil this as it is as you would potato and you can mash it

 You can if you have a mandolin, you can certainly slice them into thin pieces and make breadfruit chips

 But today I'm gonna be steaming this in some coconut milk with some stewed pork all kind of niceness

 Look in the comments section know in the description section of this video if you'd like to see how I put this breadfruit to use

 Thanks for joining me in the kitchen guys Chris here food FAQs.

 I'm going to show you how to make my delicious gluten-free, sugar-free biscuits.

 Almond meal, coconut flour and baking powder for the second stage.

 You can also have sultanas, sesame seeds, macadamias, whatever else you like.

 Then we blend up the first four ingredients until it changes consistency.

 And a teaspoon of baking powder or two, depending how fluffy you like them.

 If you like shredded coconut, you can put half a cup of shredded coconut and half a

 Now just add in two to three cups of the stuff you really like.

 You'll find it's quite thick to stir, but don't worry, it's supposed to be.

 Now you just simply roll it into balls that will fit into the size of the palm of your

 Nice golden brown and they're very soft in the middle and best part is they don't flake.

Tonight I'm making a poor man's dinner and this is really cheap and easy

 french fries I made with onions and a jalapeno pepper and some garlic.

 is about six eggs, four potatoes, one garlic clove, and one pepper and about a

 You know, I can up and I'll stick the video below a link so you can see how I

 flavor from the pork roast and it's pretty thick with all the juice and we

Maybe a little piece, we got a little carrot, uh, cabbage in, a little bit of

 gonna, we're gonna open this up and we're gonna dump this, you're gonna open this

 Okay, now we added some, uh, I had some diced up, uh, tomatoes we put in there.

 we got the peas and the corn in there and we put up a little bit of the cabbage that's

 gonna get these up to snuff, get them almost tender and put them in here.

 that beef and oh, are we gonna have something good going on here.

 It's Crystal here, founder of Get Crystallized Products and Services and I hope you're having

 Now my helpful hint for today, if you're still having problems losing that last stubborn

 few pounds and or that happens to be your New Year's resolution, a helpful hint that

 Now carb cycling has been around in the fitness industry for quite some time but it might

 So basically with carb cycling what you do is you eat the normal amount of carbs that

 you would during days that you're weight training and then days that you're focusing solely

 on cardio, you basically cut out the starches, so no potatoes, no sweet potatoes and the

 grains, so no pastas and rices and breads and you focus on loading up on your veggies,

 on your beans, legumes, minimum amount of fruits and tons of protein.

 So with that, the benefit of that is that it doesn't mess up your metabolism which when

 you cut out carbs all together forever, that can have the potential to mess up your metabolism.

 So if you're looking to try something new, I will check out my blog at GetCrystallized.ca

 and I'll talk about more on the different ways that you can cycle your carbs, okay?

 Now, for today's Tabata training challenge which by the way, guys, if you're doing these

 Tabatas, make sure that you post your scores at the comment box below on my blog at GetCrystallized.ca

 because I want to see how you're all doing and if you're kicking my butt, okay?

 So with that, for today, the first exercise that we're gonna do is a push up, what I call

 Now, I like using push up bars because my wrist sometimes feel funky but if you don't

 So you do a push up either on your knees or on your toes, whichever you are confident

 in doing, one push up, then you step your feet to the left, center, right, center and

 So really try to maintain a nice form, suck your belly button into your spine, try not

 to let your lower back sink when you're doing your push up and then you do as many of those

 as you can in 20 seconds and you jot down how many you do, so have some paper close

 Then, the second exercise that we're gonna conquer today is what I call an alternating

 Now if you're a beginner, you literally wanna push up off your hand and try to get your

 elbow towards your knees but if you're a little bit more advanced, I challenge you to try

 to keep your legs as straight as possible so it looks like this.

 And you literally roll to the other side and do the same thing and keep rolling back

 So you're gonna do your oblique, alternating oblique roll ups again as many as you can

 in the 20 seconds allotted and in the 10 second break, quickly...

 Turn it on and even though the fan comes on, the elements are not heating up.

 What the cause of this is, is there's a limit switch in here and one in the bottom oven

 So the easiest thing to do is to do this with a electric drill.

 You don't have to use a ryobi, you don't have to use electric, you can do it by hand.

 It doesn't have one on the bottom oven, but it's the same principle.

 There's a little lip on the bottom here that has to jump over the lip on the oven here.

 The oven is, although you can turn off the breaker to the oven, I don't bother.

 There's a little button in there and all that needs to be done is take a screwdriver and

 Now with this still on, open, turn your oven on for a few seconds, turn on bake, and see

 And then if it does, just turn it off and then we can reassemble it.

 If you have any other questions or problems with your decor oven, leave me a comment and

 the past couple of days and I really like it because it is not greasy at all.

 So since I have combination skin, I have to use primer before using any makeup and today I'm using the QuickFX

You will see that instantly all the shine on your t-zone area will be gone.

 from the same set and just buff it all over my face just to give it a very beautiful seamless finish.

 Now for the face powder, I'm using the counterpart of the foundation which is the Healthy Skin Pressed Powder.

 I'm using the Urban Decay Naked Flushed Palette and this palette is really really perfect because it has a blush,

 And then I grabbed my Maybelline Diamond Glow by Eyestudio Eyeshadow Quad and applied it on my lid area.

 And then for the crease area, I just used the fourth shade which is the darkest and then I went ahead and grabbed my

This is the Hoola Lash Express Kit and then inside I got myself the Master Liner

 which is a perfect eyeliner to use to create a perfect cat eye look if ever you're not really

 I have my Maybelline Long Extreme Stiletto Mascara, which is also part of the Hoola Lash Extreme Kit.

 Now to finish off with my lip color, we have to use a very beautiful Holiday Glam Red Lipstick.

 So I used Red Revival also from the same Express Kit and this is from Color Sensational.

 And last but not the least just to give myself a beautiful bronzy goddess golden look,

 I used my Floor Mar Terra Cotta Powder and this is just a beautiful powder that you can apply

 on the contours of your face just to give it a beautiful bronzy glow.

 I hope you guys enjoyed watching and I'll see you in the next video.

 I'm going to run down, give you a quick breakdown of Michael W. Smith.

 Now I won't break down the C scale for you, I will break down the B flat scale for you.

 And when I break down the B flat scale, take it and move it to the C.

 So that breakdown there is F, with an F major chord in the right.

 Now the beginning part of the B flat, I'll run it through the first time and then I'll break it down.

 And then when you do the chording, what you're going to do is you're going to walk B flat, A, G, and F.

 And when you get to your E flat to your D, that's when you're going to change it.

 So while you're doing your B flat, A, G, and F, what you're actually doing is you're doing a B flat to an F major chord on the right.

 Now if you want to, you can invert the F major chord and move the F here, down here.

 Also, you can, instead of playing the E flat here, you can do the B flat.

 Go over to the E flat and resolve it on the F with an F major chord.

 As you can see, you want to learn how to invert chords because a lot of times when people play music, that's what they're doing.

 They're inverting the chords which give you a different quality of sound.

 You know, it's the same F major chord here, but it also sounds good here.

 So no matter which bass run you use, you can still use the same F major chord or any chord in the scale and invert it to give you a different quality of sound.

 And if you want to change the quality of sound there, you can still do the E flat to the F major chord, but instead of playing the E flat and F, you do a G.

 Alright, so I'm going to demonstrate how to take out and replace a hard drive for an ASUS

 First of all, make sure that it is powered off and not plugged in.

 The faceplate for the hard drive is held into place by two screws that we're going to take

 These screws are fairly small, so if you don't want to lose them, put them somewhere it's

 This plastic flap, you just need to pull that way and it just pops off.

 When you want to replace it, this bracket here, you need to take it off.

 And that is how you replace a hard drive for an ASUS UL 80V series laptop.

 All right, so in this video demonstration, I'm going to show you how to change the hard

 So things you're going to need is a unibody MacBook Pro, a 00 Philips screwdriver, and

 So first thing you're going to want to do is make sure the laptop is off and just turn

 I'm using an antistatic bag just to make sure it doesn't damage the MacBook.

 So what you're going to want to do is take out all the screws on the exterior of the

 Now for the purpose of this video, I've already removed all the screws.

 So take out the little back panel to expose the internals of the MacBook.

 You have two screws, two black screws, which you must remove with the screwdriver, with

 And you have a little lash on the hard drive, so just go ahead and pull that out.

 Now the final process actually involves grabbing your T6 Torx screwdriver.

 If you can see, you have four little connectors on the side of the hard drive.

 Now for the process of this video, I'm actually going to remove the screws, but using your

 T6 screwdriver, you'd want to remove them and put them on the new one.

 Now once those have been removed, just grab the new hard drive.

 Screw the little connector back in using the 00 Philips screwdriver.

 Now there's one more piece of information you need to know before placing the back panel

 That is that there's actually an order of the screws which you must put in.

 So the way it is, is you have to actually put them in the order that are shown on the

 So by screwing those screws in that particular order, after that all you have left to do

 is just reinstall all your software, whether it's Windows or Snow Leopard, and you're done.

 Piece of junk already been fixed once already fixed the unreadable disc air

 You know took it apart again try to fix it and managed to do it.

 There's really not too much to it and then you know forget all the videos is saying you have to take your box apart

 Next you're gonna want to remove this little tunnel hood right here.

 Let's get it out of the way basically so now you're down to this right here

 Basically what you're gonna do is gonna you're gonna want to run the blow dryer over the heat sink.

 All you have to do is, you know plug it back in make sure the disk drives back in before you test it out

 You know fixing something that Microsoft broke when they made this thing.

 So, you know just run the blow dryer over it and hook it back up and it should be good

 Again we're having some filet mignons we're going to put on the grill.

 I don't put a lot of salt because this Tony's has a little salt in it too.

 You can do it on both sides but I put a little bit more on one side.

 We'll probably cook these for about 18 minutes on a charcoal grill.

 I'm going to spray my grill with a little bit of spray cooking oil.

 I'm going to spread them around a little bit and get them kind of even.

 I've been soaking some mesquite chips that I'm going to put in here.

 This is going to make our smoke but I don't want to really affect the cooking part of the fire.

 I'm just going to put these around here and shake the rest of that seasoning on them.

 Okay, these fillets have been on about 20 minutes and I think they're probably done.

 If they're still too rare, we'll bring them in and we'll just bring them back out here a little bit.

Aren't these little shell fairies just the cutest little thing you ever did see?

The hardest thing is to actually get the shells but if you've got a seafood

 restaurant not far from your place, go and ask the chef or the kitchen hand if they can give you the

 about a meter or just over a meter long and I've got eight strands and I've just tied that into

You need to get your glue gun, put a good dollop of glue on here.

 gun's just not quite as hot as it should be and then turning that over, get that and put that,

 glue that onto the back like that and make sure that you've got a nice little wee fat paddy bit

 for the glue to dry and you do need to make sure that it is thoroughly dry before you go any

Right from there the next thing to do is to get a little polystyrene ball or you could get

 a wee ping pong ball and what I did was when I just put it down on the bench like that and I

 gave it a wee flatten out so that I've got a bigger working surface and then that gets stuck onto

Now about now you just have to hold it, don't let it down because if you do the

 head will fall off and we don't want to fail with our head dropping onto the work surface.

 there the next thing is to get a nice little piece of, this is a lovely bit of trim that's got little

 roses in it with little wee pearls, I'm keeping everything sort of like that pearly shelly look.

 Right a little bit of glue onto there and then that gets stuck up there up by her little neck

 hair and this stuff here, this is the dolly's hair, it's just I love it look at that, imagine if I had

 there like that and I'm just going to put a little bit of glue there and with lots of care and

 attention so as one doesn't burn one's fingers just put that, push that down onto there like that

 do is to get like some little, I've got some little wire with some little pearls on it because

 carefully push that down onto there and I know I'm going to burn my fingers so I'm going to,

 I'd rather burn or put it, push that down with that so that it doesn't burn my fingers.

 next thing to do is to quietly turn that over and then we need another little bit of string

 and I'm just going to put a little bit of glue there and then holding those two together, this

 is going to be the wee hanger for hanging her, put that down onto there and I'll use those to

 hold that, push that down into place so that that stays there and then the other thing I'm going to

 do is to just take a little bit of glue up to there and then bring that across to there.

 that little bit there, that little hooking string, what that will do is that will give even more

 got a little, this lovely little sterling silver star and I've got a little bit of wire which I'm

 you wanted to but I did this the other day and I found that this was a much easier way of doing it.

 Then getting a little bit of glue and then just push that under there like so and then just get

 that and push that up into there and bring that down to there because I wanted that to actually

 swing and it's gone the wrong way so I'll turn that over like so, try and get that as straight as you can.

There were many many years when none of my fairies that I made ever had faces

 because it gave them personality so about now be very careful about how you put your little eyes

 dot there and a little dot there for her little mouth and look at that, five fairies all made and

 ready to go and what I love is, look at this here, this is like her little legs or it could be her

 little like little bottom wings but I just think that that is just so cute, so easy to make and

 just moved into a house and they're starting off their life together and they don't have any

 Christmas decorations, make them a set of these and you can build onto them every year.

 Absolutely love it and I'll show you my tree in due course with all my little wee handmade

I hope you enjoy that because I've enjoyed making those, they're very special.

 Ok, the first thing the directions say to do is to coat the inside and the top with cooking oil.

 It says don't spray directly in it, spray it onto a paper towel.

 Ok, I have the bottom and the top piece on with the collar holding them together tight.

Directions say next to remove the lid and crack the egg into the eggies.

 We got the eggies bottom and top put together with all the collars we provide.

It asks you to put them in a saucepan with 2 1 1 1 inches of water and put them in there gently to make sure they float.

 I added a little bit more water into the saucepan and it's floating so I'll just repeat that 5 more times and then turn it on to high heat.

Cracking the eggs, putting them in the eggie, putting the lid on, making sure they float.

If the whole point of these is to avoid peeling eggs, I don't know if the return on investment is big enough.

 Six eggies floating and I'm going to turn the heat to high and start to boil.

 I'm not going to put the lid on for my saucepan because it pushes the eggies down into the metal which I think would melt them.

We'll let it simmer now until the eggs look like they are boiled through the plastic.

 The directions tell me to be careful because steam builds up within the eggies.

 Remove them with a slotted ladle and let them sit for 3-7 minutes before attempting to open them.

 But what that doesn't reflect is all the extra preparation time to put them in the shell and clean the shell afterwards.

 Unless they have some egg shell phobia that was paralyzing, I would recommend these to nobody.

 Welcome to the installation video of the CURT 31028 Front Mount Receiver Hitch on the 1999

To give you a better view of the installation, we are using a lift.

 most installations, this vehicle does not need to be elevated for the install.

 installation to take 30 minutes to an hour depending on your level of expertise.

 starting on driver's side first to provide adequate room for the bolt clearance holes

 are level with the bottom of the slotted foremost attachment point.

Be sure to use a cutting grease or coolant to protect the longevity of your drill

You may also want to start with a smaller bit to ease the drilling process.

 side attachment hardware by inserting the coiled end of the fishwire into the foremost attachment

 and angle the head up into the access hole and pull on the opposing end of the fishwire.

 fishwire the remaining hardware by threading the carriage bolt into the coiled end of the

 fishwire and angle the head of the bolt up into the mounting hole.

 will pass through the spacer and frame giving you your rearmost attachment point.

 on the opposing frame rail, be sure that you fishwire the foremost attachment point first so

 pull the bolts through the attachment points and fasten with the supplied half inch hex flange

Torque all fasteners to that specified in the supplied instruction sheet.

 the installation of the CURT 31028 Front Mount Receiver Hitch on the 1999 Jeep Wrangler.

 So to get started, what we're going to do first is we're going to make the brim of the

So I'm going to start in this corner and I'm going to make a really shallow bowl

 here, we're going to come up like this, it's going to curve away a little.

 hanging in space, but we're going to imagine that the hat finishes a brim that comes around

Next we're going to draw the bottom of the big sticking up part of the hat.

 I don't know what you call that, but I'm just going to make a line that comes in along here.

 Now I'm going to draw the ridge that makes the edge of the hat front.

 space here, and what I'm going to do is I'm just going to go a bit parallel to this original

So I'm starting here, just coming around, going up and over, right

 So if you want, you can just draw a little hint of where we'll put our shadows on the

 across the middle here, and I'm going to make it not this big of an angle, but the same

 kind of an angle as the top, just bulging up a bit towards the top.

 always have a buckle on their hat, so right in here we're just going to make a square

 I'm just going to draw a quick shamrock here, but I'm also going to do a tutorial on how

 clover, and it's just a series of hearts that stick out from the inside of the stem.

 Alright, so that's how you draw a leprechaun hat, and now I'm going to trace it with my

 and if you would like to comment below, you can let me know what else you'd like to see

And if you would like to subscribe to my channel, please click the subscribe

 Okay, this is a really neat little lesson on how to make a sweet soy sauce, which we're

 using in a few things here in the course, but you can find your own little ways of using

 It's the kind of sauce that you can put on grilled fish or steamed fish or put it on

 veggies or put it on your canopies or put it on just about anything, particularly your

 But anyway, it's a really neat item and what I've got down here, and Richard, if you can

 pan down here to the stove, I've got 10 ounces of light soy sauce right out of the supermarket

 And now I'm going to add a little bit of ginger root that's ground up to that.

 That I would suggest to you as being an optional kind of thing.

 And then I'm going to put a couple tablespoons of garlic in there, okay.

 Now I'm going to put you about one, two, three quarters of a cup of granulated sugar.

 And I'm going to put about a quarter, slightly less than a quarter of a cup of white vinegar.

 Let me get a spoon here and I'll taste this just to see where it's going so far.

 We're going to tighten this up, meaning thicken this a little bit.

 Of course you go to the thickening agents and liaisons under the stocks and sauces and

 But basically cornstarch and water, one tablespoon cornstarch, one tablespoon water is the basic

 And you make yourself a couple tablespoons of the slurry and you add it to your mixture.

 And as it thickens, that's when you know how much you got, you have enough in there.

 Now the only thing about this one, which you have to be a little bit careful about,

 is that you're thickening something that's hot and then when it's cold, and this is always

 going to be used cold, it doesn't have to be, but usually it is, then it thickens a

 So when you're looking at it, you say, oh, is this how thick I want it?

 You got to keep in mind that it's going to get thicker when it gets cold.

 So be careful about adding too much cornstarch at this stage, okay?

 I'm going to put a little teeny weeny weeny weeny bit more cornstarch in.

 Remember, keep in mind, let's say it was too thick after it got cool because you added

 You can always add a little water to this because you can always add water to the soy

 There are times where if you don't want it to be too sodium laden or salty, if you will,

 even the light sodium sauce has a lot of salt in it, you can dilute this light soy sauce

 by 50 or even 100% and still make the sauce, it'll turn out fine.

 So you don't have to use straight soy sauce, you can add water to it also, okay?

 What the thickness level of the sauce is here now, so you can see how it's coating that

 Remember, after it's cool, if you want it to be a little thinner, just add a little

 You don't want it too thin, you want it to be able to coat like that a little bit, okay?

 All right, back up here to me and I'm going to say goodbye on this particular item.

 So this is sweet soy sauce, multiple uses, not a complicated sauce, not part of the mother

 sauce tree or anything like that, just a little offshoot thing that you use for doing

 He asked me to do a leak down test, pressure test on a two cycle engine.

 This test procedure pretty much will cover any two cycle engine to date.

 There will be a few different engines that have fresh air ports on the side of the cylinder on each side.

 Once you get your adapters on here, you can actually bolt the carburetor back up here with that gasket,

 I like to use the spacers to take up the slack of the carburetor.

 Just tighten it down the same as you would to tighten the carburetor back on.

 Next thing you want to do is you want to grab one of these triangular pieces of rubber block off.

 But what you want to do, you just want to loosen the muffler up.

 Shove that down in there and make sure that it's between the bolts real good.

 As you're tightening it, that rubber may try to squitch out of there, but just get it as best you can.

 As you can tell, even though this engine is burned up, the piston is scored.

 Depending on the size of the engine, you may have to pump it quite a bit.

 Depending on the size of the engine, the volume of the crankcase, that engine seems to be holding good pressure.

 A lot of times the needle will just fall right back up very quickly.

 The main parts that leak on a two-cycle engine are going to be right here.

 There's one on this side and there's one on the other side of the engine.

 The only other spot that would leak would be right here where they split this crankcase in two.

 This covers probably about 80% of your two-cycle engines when it comes to doing a leak and pressure test.

 If you get an engine that's leaking, that won't hold pressure or vacuum,

 If you have a crank seal go out, you might want to check the crank bearing as well because it may be loose.

 If you put a new seal on a bad crank bearing, it's just going to fail within no telling how long.

 Here in San Helena Island, South Carolina, Bill Green is preserving the gulliculture

 Right now, at this time of the year, the field peas are starting to dry, and we usually take

 it and put it up and store it, and that's what we usually have during the winter months.

 I didn't realize it gets so tall, and the flowers, it looks like this.

 That right there, and you don't want it too much bigger than that, because if it get bigger

 This one looks nice and tender, but you know, a lot of people don't like okra.

 You know, you take that other stuff out of your mind, it's good for your body.

 You only get glue, it gets soft, and make that when it's cooked.

 Yes, these are traditional heirloom potatoes, and they grow very well in this climate here

 We made it back to Bill's kitchen here, and we're gonna do some Gullah-style cooking.

 And the first thing is, Bill's gonna show me how to do his dish, and you're making shrimp

 We're gonna use that okra that we picked just a few minutes ago.

 While he's doing that, I'm gonna cut the okra, get the okra ready.

 See, and this right here, any time you can't get your knife, that's how you're too hard.

 Doing okra and shrimp together, you know, is almost like a Cadillac to what a chivalry,

 There's a granular layer of garlic, this is the one you wanna use.

 If you can't smell it, and you can't taste it, you don't need to do it.

 And Bill, you said that the okra's gonna give off a lot of liquid and sort of juices.

 It'll give a certain amount and it'll help keep the shrimp from drying out.

 You're gonna add the shrimp soon, so I think it's time for me to get started on my dish.

 And I'm making a really simple thing using these amazing potatoes.

 And what we did was we just boiled them until they're fork tender.

 And I'm gonna start my dish with onions, and I'm gonna make sort of a creamy, sweet, sweet

 And you know, I think this is, my sweet potato dish is gonna go well with it because I'm

 And I'm gonna add just a little bit of light brown sugar just to bring out the sweetness

 The shrimp came from your creek, the sweet potatoes from your garden, the peas from your

 Special thanks to our sponsor Skacel for providing today's hooks.

 Today we are using their Addi Swing Ergonomic Crochet Hooks in the size US 8H and a ball

 Special thanks to our sponsor Lion Brand for providing today's yarn.

 Today we are using their Jamie line in the color Little Boy Blue.

 For this stitch you will need to know the following techniques.

 To begin this stitch you must create a foundation chain in multiples of 2.

 We are going to begin by doing a double crochet into the 6th chain from our hook.

 Then we are going to skip the next chain in our row and we are going to double crochet

 So we are going to repeat the chain 1, skip the next chain and double crochet 1 into the

 So we will turn our work and then we are going to start our repeat by double crocheting

 in the next double crochet after we skip this one here at the bottom.

 So we are going to skip this chain here and go into the double crochet.

 So we are going to do a double crochet into that double crochet.

 So we are going to skip this chain 1 and double crochet into the next one.

 So we will repeat that all the way across until we reach the last stitch in our row.

 So once we finish the chain 1 for our repeat at the end of our row we are going to do 1

 double crochet into the 3rd chain on our turn chain from the row before.

 So we are going to repeat row 2 until we have reached our desired length.

 Beer and chicken wings are made for each other when you're eating and drinking them, so why

 In a metal pan I'm going to combine the chicken wings with granulated onion, granulated garlic,

 chili powder, kosher salt, black pepper, two small bay leaves, the standard half stick

 of butter, 12 ounces of beer, and I'm just using a pilsner beer.

 You can use a pilsner or a lager or almost any kind of beer you like to drink.

 For a full printable copy of this recipe and many more, visit the Wolf Pit blog.

 I have the Rectech grill preheated to 350 degrees and I'm going to smoke these uncovered

 I don't want them to boil, I just want them to poach in the liquid.

 And now I'm going to grill the wings for five minutes per side.

 And don't forget, if you like this video, please give it a thumbs up.

 Also, if you're not subscribed, hit that subscribe button and come back every Tuesday and Thursday

 Once all the wings are on the grill grates, I'm going to start spooning the sauce over

 top of the wings and this is going to create steam as well as a layer of flavor on top

 And I know the smell from this sauce hitting the grates was driving my neighbors crazy.

 After five minutes, we're going to give the wings a flip and look at those beautiful grill

 Once all the wings are flipped, we're going to baste them one more time and let them go

 I wish smell-o-vision was real because this smell is absolutely intoxicating.

 And I make a lot of wings and I love chicken wings and these were flavor packed.

 I hope you give this a try and don't forget to hit that like button and subscribe button

 and come back every Tuesday and Thursday for new recipes and cooking videos.

 You guys remember the three little bears where the porridge was either too hot or too cold?

 Well, I'm going to show you a traditional Jamaican cornmeal porridge that's just right

 You will need one cup of fine cornmeal, two tablespoons flour, half a cup of brown sugar,

 one and a half cup of milk, one can of condensed milk, two cinnamon sticks or a half a teaspoon

 of ground cinnamon, one teaspoon of vanilla, sliced almonds, and dried cranberries for

 So we have our cornmeal and our flour together in a mixing bowl.

 So the next step is I'm going to add our cornmeal mixture to the boiling water and immediately

 And the trick to making sure your cornmeal porridge is smooth is to stir it immediately

 If you don't have brown sugar, you can use white sugar as well.

 If your cornmeal gets a little bit too thick or you like a thicker consistency or a smoother

 And also make sure the stove is on low because it will burn very quickly.

 I'm going to garnish it with some cranberries, dried cranberries, and slices of almonds.

Today I'm going to show you how to make this really fun Tutu Easter Basket.

We have a lot of different colors you can choose from Paper Mart.

 I've picked this really fun pink and white for our Easter basket.

 Also some grosgrain ribbon, flower embellishments, a ruler, a crochet hook, a wicker basket, scissors, and paper mesh.

 Depending on the size of your basket, it will depend on how many strips you need to cut.

 You can do it all one color if you want, or you can alternate like we're going to do.

 You can tell these don't have to be perfect, but I want them close to the same length.

 That way when I start putting them on our basket, they're going to line up nicely.

 Take two pieces of tulle at a time and stack them on top of each other.

 You might be able to do it with your fingers, depending on the size of your basket.

 Pull the tulle through the loop and pull it tight on the other side.

 We're going to continue doing that all the way around the basket.

 We're going to continue alternating our tulle colors all the way around the edge of the basket.

 I'm going to show you one I've gone a little bit farther on and completed with our skirt.

 Once we've gotten that all taken care of, we're going to take some of our paper.

 We have lots of different colors of paper, but I love this color pink for Easter.

 We have a lot of different types of boxes you can use to put candy in or different little gifts.

 If some of us aren't as adept at tying ribbon, we can use a little bit of paper.

 Here's a fun basket you can use all these great paper-marked products for your fun gifts for Easter.

 I hope you enjoyed watching this and I hope you enjoy making it.

 Make sure you go ahead and subscribe so you can watch a lot of our videos.

 This is a pretty easy tutorial to throw together for the weekend.

 It's so good for all those times when you just need that one bag that will

 I really recommend taking a walk through the patio fabric section of your fabric store.

 This is the kind of stuff that you'd normally see on like outdoor patio furniture.

 Usually they have pretty fun prints, but the great part is that they're stiff and durable.

 So they're really good for bags and they're also going to give you that

 If you haven't already, don't forget to subscribe so you can see more of my tutorials if that's what you want.

 Also, I really appreciate it when you guys let me know if you like the tutorials

 by hitting the like button and commenting all the things that you want to say.

 If you want to ask me questions or look me up on things like Instagram,

 With the right sides together, sew the small rectangle to the large rectangle

 along the long edge of the large rectangle, pivoting along the corners of the small rectangle as you go.

 This will make it so that the large rectangle becomes the wall of the bag

 To work your way around the corner, lift the foot, move the fabric of the small rectangle a slight bit,

 Just repeat this until you've worked your way around the corner.

 and we're going to add a little stitch at the place where they meet and also fit the base of the bag.

 If you have any extra fabric at this point, it's okay to remove it.

 Seal the wall with a straight stitch and go over those raw edges with a straight stitch

 Repeat these steps for the shell and we're almost ready to put it together.

 With the shell, fold the raw edge down onto the base and sew over it with a straight line.

 With the right sides together, line up the spine of the shell and the lining

 leaving a slight hole because we do need it to pull the whole thing inside out.

 With that hole you've left, go ahead and pull the whole thing inside out.

 Sew all the way around the upper edge and seal off that hole that you created as well.

 At equidistance from the spine, I marked slits that were 2 inches long for the bag handles.

 and then that way you're able to cut apart the fabric down the middle.

 For the handles, I brought the rope through the slit and then tied it together as tight as I could

 and sealed it with a zigzag stitch to give it a really cute shape.

 Click on the screen if you want to see this beach bag in action

 Start by cleaning your fish and scaling it, you probably don't need to scale the head

 but definitely scale the body and also gut your fish and clean that cavity up.

 Next you're going to cut your fish up, try to cut the fish into even sized pieces just

 So for my mackerel I sliced this into 4 pieces and then with my sea bream I decided to go

 Now you want to slice up some onions as well, slice them thinly because they've got to cook

 Then you put your fish pieces in a medium sized pot, sprinkle your sliced onions over

 them and then we're going to pour in 2 kinds of liquid, the first is coconut milk and then

 Season that really well with salt and then you're going to bring the whole thing to a

 As soon as it starts boiling you want to turn that down to a simmer because this won't take

 very long to cook and you don't want the fish to be tough so turn it as low as you can and

 Now we check that our fish is cooked just by going in with a spoon, pick up a piece

 and it comes with the camellia and a ribbon that says Chanel on it.

 Chanel Lip Boy bag in patent leather and the color teal and it has silver

 and inside it's just the main compartment with a slip pocket in the

The slip pocket holds the Chanel authenticity card that comes with every

 and to close it I thought you just had to press it down but actually you have

 In this video I'm going to show you how to play Your Guardian Angel by Red Jumpsuit

 Alright, to start out this song is in dropped C. And what you're going to want to do for

 And right here you're going to hammer on with your pinky or your ring finger, whichever

 Alright and on that part it helps if you put more emphasis on the second and third string

 And what you're going to do right after the first part is hammer on to the fourth fret,

 and then slide up to the fifth, and then back down to the fourth.

 And then, right after that, you're going to do a power chord on the third fret here, and

 And that's almost the entire song except the little pre-chorus.

 It's actually just the same chords, just strummed once while he sings.

 I hope you enjoyed the video, and thanks to John at Windrush Studios for letting me use

 As always, leave a comment down below or send me a message if you want me to teach a certain

 This makeup was inspired by Tiffany's makeup from the music video Twinkle.

 We begin with foundation ready face where I have applied face primer all over the face

 Define your brows according to the natural shape of your brows.

 I'm going to make mine flatter just to replicate Tiffany's brows.

 Always blend at the beginning of your brows to make it look natural.

 Using a liquid concealer and spoolie, apply an amount of concealer on the back of my hand

 This step is optional because this is one of the ways to lighten the brows.

 Use an eye primer and apply it all over the eyelid and lower lash line.

 Select shimmery champagne with an eyeshadow brush, apply it all over your eyelids.

 Select white with the same brush, apply underneath the brows to highlight.

 Select black liquid or gel eyeliner, apply on the upper lash line.

 Using black pencil or gel liner, line upper and lower waterline.

 With an angled brush, select copper brown and line lower lash line.

 When it comes to the end, you want to flick the brush outwards.

 Because there is more shading on the lower lash line, it also gives the puppy eye look.

 With the angled brush, pick the black eyeliner only at the highest point of the brush lightly

 These are meant for your nail decorations and it should look like this.

 Quickly pick up the sequins with the dotting tool and place it where the glue was applied.

 This step can be frustrating because the sequins doesn't stick at times.

 If you wish to add false lashes, I recommend using individual lashes

 Tiffany doesn't have heavy blush, so apply it lightly onto your cheeks.

 To do that, just blend the lip color on your lips and over the lip line.

 This look is simple and glamorous, definitely wearable for many occasions.

 Don't forget to visit my blog at lovewolffam.com for daily beauty updates.

Not just of your leading hand but we're going to get the left hand

It's going to stay there and the hand pattern is going to gradually

So now we've gone from quarters, we're going to go to eighth notes.

 our last pattern of sixteenth notes, we're going to switch our leading hand to our left

 side and seeing where the left side in comparison to the right.

So obviously if we're playing sixteenth notes, it's pretty tough.

 go for the whole thing again and then after the sixteenth notes, we'll swap hands and

 So over the weeks, you can gradually progress your BPMs, your tempos and you'll notice a huge

 Okay boys and girls what we're going to do is making a quick buttercream

 going to need one block of cream cheese that's been left out at room temperature

Okay we're going to add that to our mixer with one cup of softened

 butter, it doesn't have to be melted butter just you know room temperature

 little flavor to this a little bit of lemon or vanilla or whatever.

 need about two or three cups of powdered sugar okay which you can actually check

 sugar and the cream cheese will cream together and it will make a beautiful

Okay once it gets a little bit together, once the powdered sugar is sort

 you can you know leave it like this for a while but carefully you don't want to

 Now like I said if you want it more of a whipped consistency this is what you do.

 whipped cream cheese frosting and that's gonna be perfect for the carrot cake

I'm Amelia Ceja and today I will share with you a classic Mexican recipe,

It's a spices stew made with tripe and typically enjoyed on Sundays with family

This recipe serves 8 to 10 guests and for the first step, the ingredients you'll

 need are 8 pounds of tripe, 2 heads of garlic, 2 bay leaves, salt and enough water to cover

 the ingredients you'll need are 12 dry New Mexico chile peppers, 2 pasilla peppers,

Then rinse them in water and cook them in a small pot in some of the

Before serving, for more flavor and texture, I'll add a squeeze of

 lime juice, white chopped onion, chopped cilantro, minced serrano pepper and dry oregano.

 I've selected our Ceja Viñales Vino de Casa Red Blend to pair with this savory and delicious

Its moderate alcohol and balanced tannins marry well with the spiciness of this dish.

 Now, first, you gotta put up your hair, so it doesn't get in your face and distract you, causing you to look horrible.

 Okay, now that's up in my awesome fashion of a... whatever this is.

 Now, just cover up all your pimples, but apparently I'm just using this liquid stuff.

 And you can use any foundation you want, but apparently I have this.

It doesn't matter what brand it is, it's just gotta be eyeshadow.

 And then take the darkest brown you have, scoop it in there, see?

 Doesn't matter what brand it is, remember what they say, the cheaper, the...

 We just look awesome right now, I mean, I'm jealous of my own eyes.

 The transmission can be removed easily without splitting the upper and lower crankcases.

 The transmission case can be split with a flat screwdriver, then removed.

 When the transmission case cover is removed, the transmission, shift cam, and shift forks

 Upper and lower split type crankcases are used on the RD-500 to improve ease in servicing.

 Tightening bolts with larger numbers are loosened first in two stages, beginning from 18 and

At first, loosen each bolt one half of a turn at a time, diagonally.

 When you are installing, you must torque bolts with smaller numbers first in the reverse

 The upper crankshaft and the lower crankshaft are not identical.

The section where the flywheel magnet is installed is on the left side of the lower

The primary drive gear side of each crankshaft should be on the right-hand

There are a number of points you must remember when you are installing

The half circlips should be installed like this, between the upper and lower crankcases.

 The knock pin of the bearing must be aligned to the knock pin groove of the lower case.

 The projected portion of the oil seal must be aligned to the groove of the crankcase.

 This is the end of the major points regarding disassembly and reassembly.

 carrots into three parts and then cut it again into four parts.

 carrots are in the right size to eat and of course looking pretty good too.

 You take the Chinese cabbage and cut it into around let's say one and a half

I think this is sort of the right size to cut but you can make it

 find it at the local Asian store but if you cannot find it it's okay.

 it as well because first of all it's very easy to find in the local grocery

 stores and second it's a good replacement for the yard long beans which

 course you can use any other brand but just make sure it's Gangseong paste.

 now you put around 600 milliliter water into the pot and let it boil.

 boiling you put the paste that we have smashed earlier into it.

 careful of the smell because it can make you sneeze really hard.

So yeah just be careful and please don't taste it yet because it's gonna be

Here's the fish sauce looks like but you don't have to use this brand.

 here's the tamarind paste and of course you can use another brand.

 it takes a little while for the carrot to cook and also I want the sweetness of

 Yeah so that's why I put the carrots in first and later I don't have to add that

 course peel the shrimp and I cut in the middle of the back and take the black

 sure the water is boiling so there's no fishy smell in the soup.

 start to cook a little bit I put the cauliflowers into the soup.

 prefer it a little bit crunchier but if you want it softer you can put it earlier

 Once the soup is boiling again you put one tablespoon of sugar into the soup

 and of course at this stage you want to taste the soup to see if the soup is

 is really good you can now add the rest of the vegetables into the soup.

 to do this at the last stage because you don't want to overcook them.

 putting all my vegetables in the pot and this is when I realized my pot is a

 to move it a little bit get the hot water on top of the vegetables so it's

 cooked a little bit get softened a little bit and of course eventually it

 or three minutes to get it softened a little bit and voila now the soup is

 First, you must decide between whether you want to hang a curtain track or pole.

 The pole or track should extend approximately 15 to 30 centimetres past either side of the

 window and approximately 12 to 15 centimetres above the top of the window.

 This will help minimise the light when curtains are closed and also allow for curtains to

 The width will depend on your curtain pole or track and the length will determine where

 The most common drops are to the sill, below the sill or to the floor.

 Measuring a pole do not include the finials, in other words, the decorative ends.

 To measure the length of your curtain pole, measure from the top of the pole to where

 We recommend adding on 3 centimetres to account for the material above the eyelet.

 To measure the length when using rings on a curtain pole, measure from beneath the pole

 To measure the length when using a curtain track, measure from the top of the track to

 Now you've got both your width and length measured, if, for example, your measurements

 come to 60 inches wide and 85 inches long, you should get one pair of curtains 66 inches

 Each curtain in the set has a width of 66 inches, which allows for double the width

 We would recommend checking the measurements a few times just to make sure you're 100% correct.

 For eyelet curtains, when you fit the curtains, the leading and back edge must turn in.

 The last eyelet on the back edge must go over the bracket, which then becomes the end stop.

 For pencil pleat curtains, gather the curtain to the correct headed width and lock off with

 Secure the extra cord by wrapping it round and tuck it into the pleat.

 As a rough guide, space the hooks approximately 4 pockets apart, or 7 centimetres depending

 If you have too many hooks, this will restrict the curtains pulling off the window.

 Once you've added your hooks, carefully attach these to the rings on your pole or directly

 Before we install the two serial ATA hard drives into the 3.5 inch bays, let's talk

 If your motherboard has an IDE controller and you want to install an old style IDE hard

 drive, please go to www.homepcbuilder.com forward slash IDE for instructions on configuring

 If you have a serial ATA hard drive, you don't need to configure any jumpers.

 To install the hard drives, we have to remove the hard drive cage from the case.

 in by eight thumb screws, four per side, and it slides out the front of the case.

 There is also a bracket for an optional fan that we won't be using.

 We'll install the 1TB drive into the top bay and the 250GB drive into the middle bay, making

 sure the power and data connections will be facing the back of the case.

 We'll put two screws per drive on one side, leaving them a little loose.

 The reason for leaving the screws loose at first is to let the drive move just enough

 We'll slide the hard drive cage back in the front of the case and secure it with the eight

 You slide the hard drives in from the back of the case, again making sure the cable connections

 are facing the motherboard, and secure the drives with two screws on each side.

 will vibrate, which will increase the chance of failure and increase the noise the drives

 Other cages have sliders that put tension on each side of the hard drive and secure

 In the next lesson, we'll install the DVD recordable drive into a 5 1⁄4 inch bay.

 Let the oil heat up for a while and after it is hot enough put cut pieces of

 Keep on frying till the pieces start turning golden brown in color.

 Now let's start adding the other grounded spices which are ginger powder,

 fennel seed powder that is saunf, jeera that is cumin seed powder and salt.

 Mix all the ingredients properly then cover the pan and keep it to cook for 10 minutes

 Then after 10 minutes check if your pieces of lauki are properly cooked.

 This dish has a tangy flavor, it's light to eat in hot summer days

 Do give in your feedback and bye for now from recipes you like.

 a super simple recipe for Kali Dal, also known as Sabudh Urad, also known as whole black

And now that I learned how easy it is, I can understand why people

 Make sure you've picked out any impurities and rocks and rinsed it through water a couple

You don't need to soak it because we're going to use a crock pot.

 some garlic, so I recommend four cloves of garlic diced up, a half an inch of ginger

One teaspoon of salt, and you can add salt later, and if you don't

 want to add salt, leave it out, and you can put a little bit in for taste later on.

 add tomatoes to crock pots because the acidity, I guess, makes it not taste very good, so

 four cups of water, which I've already added to the crock pot, to one cup of lentils.

 the recipe on high, but you've got to check back maybe in like six hours, because that

 will make the water dry up faster, and then you want to switch it to low.

 going to plug it in and leave for work, and you're not paranoid that your house is going

 it in at night, and when you wake up in the morning, you'll have some wonderful bottle.

 Alright, the lentils have been cooking for about nine hours, and they are almost done.

 At this point, I'm going to add the tomatoes and let it simmer for maybe another hour or

 want to make it creamier in consistency, you could add a little bit of whipping cream,

 heavy whipping cream, or yogurt, you can Google those recipes online.

 very, very simple version of this dish, and it's so hearty and so flavorful.

They were in here, and while I was videotaping, I chopped my head

 off, so you can't watch me put the tomatoes in, but trust me, they're in there.

 Today I'm going to make something that a lot of people call Pumpkin Bread.

 But in my book, anything that contains as much sugar as it does flour isn't a bread at all.

 To make this Pumpkin Bread Cake Loaf thing, I've got 225 g of plain or all-purpose flour,

 You can either get this out of a can or you can make your own by using fresh pumpkin chunks.

 And then to spice things up a bit, I've got half a teaspoon of nutmeg and cinnamon

 and a quarter of a teaspoon of ground ginger and ground cloves.

 Into a large bowl, put the sugar and all the other 4 wet ingredients.

 Pop this in the oven at 180 degrees Celsius for about 55 minutes.

 Leave to cool for 10 minutes before removing from the loaf tin.

 You can cut this into slices and enjoy with a nice cup of coffee or tea.

 or learn how to make these fabulous pumpkin bread dinner rolls,

Today I'm going to be showing you guys my complete summer hair, makeup, and outfit look.

 So I'm taking my bare skin and pulling back my hair with my adorable headband.

 Then I'm using my Boots Mousse Foundation, which is a little bit too tan for my face,

 but my body is actually a lot tanner than my face right now, so I'm applying this to kind of even out my skin tone.

 Then I'm using my Revlon Photo Ready Concealer to cover any dark circles or blemishes.

 And now I usually wouldn't wear this much makeup in the summer, but if I'm going out, I will wear this much.

 Then I'm taking my Rimmel Stay Matte Powder, of course, and then setting everything.

 I mean, would this even be one of my videos if I didn't use this?

 Then I'm taking my Elf Blush in Candid Coral and applying this because I think it's more of a summery shade.

 And of course, you've got to fill in your brows, so I'm using my Benefit Brow Kit and just kind of defining them a little bit,

 Then taking my Maybelline Color Tattoo in Barely Branded, I'm using this as a kind of champagne primer.

 And then I'm using my Stila In The Light Palette and using the kind of light gold color called Bubbly all over my lid.

 And then I'm using my Naked Palette and using Half Baked on the kind of outer half of my lid for a more defined gold look.

 And then for the crease, I'm using my favorite color, which is Naked, just to kind of define overall the whole look.

 Then lastly, I'm taking these two brown shades and putting them in the outer corner to give that final touch of definition.

 And then you have to blend, so I'm just blending this all out with my favorite blending brush.

 And now I can't do this on camera, but I'm using my Stila Brown Eyeliner and we're just going to magically pretend I did.

 And then for mascara, I'm using my CoverGirl Clump Clusher all over my lashes.

 Then to moisturize, I'm using my EOS Lip Balm before I apply any lip products.

 And for a nice kind of shimmery coral color, I'm using this Clinique Lipstick in Deep.

 For a nice kind of shimmery coral color, I'm using this Clinique Lipstick in Sugared Grapefruit.

 First, I'm just going to brush it all out and pin back my bangs.

 And then doing my favorite curls with my Hot Tools 1-inch wand.

 I'm just wrapping it around, holding it for 10 seconds, then letting it go to get these very soft, natural wave curl thingies.

 And then of course you have to hairspray it, so I'm just using my favorite hairspray and kind of running my fingers through it to give it that wavy look.

 Then I'm taking my bangs, or just the front part of your hair, and braiding it just like a normal braid.

 And then you're going to use your elastic, which ideally would be clear, but of course I ran out, which is just fabulous.

 So I'm just securing that, and then I'm kind of pulling it apart to give it that more boho look.

 And then I'm just going to tease the crown of my hair because we all need a little bit of volume.

 And then I just did this to the other side as well and hairsprayed everything.

 So that is a super cute braided bohemian summer hairstyle that I absolutely love.

 It takes me a lot less time to pick out my outfit because really, who cares to be honest.

 For my dress I am wearing this Free People dress, which is absolutely beautiful.

 It's so summery and loose and comfortable and I absolutely love it, especially the sleeves, like come on.

 And then my bag is this super cute fringe kind of bohemian, I know I've said bohemian like five times, but bohemian bag.

 And then my sandals are these super cute strappy Urban Outfitters black ones that I absolutely love.

 So I really, really hope you guys enjoy this and try out this very simple, very classic summer look.

 Okay, so I want to show you how to do a stitch from Knit Your Own Dog.

 The stitch I'm talking about in the stitch dictionary in the back is P-U-L-T.

 It says, pick up loop below next stitch on left needle by inserting tip of right needle

 Then turn, leaving remaining number of stated stitches on the left needle unworked.

 Okay, so essentially this is just a way to do short row shaping.

 I want to show you the end result first so you can see what we're going for.

 You can see that we've got 16 stitches here, some short row shaping in the middle.

 You can see it's a pretty good job of not showing any holes throughout.

 Okay, so you can see here I have a swatch with 16 stitches, 15 that I've already knit

 So I'm going to pick up the loop below that stitch with my right needle, leave it on the

 So on this side, you can see I've got the left over loop, the picked up loop, and then

 I'm going to take that loop, pick it up from back to front, leave it on the right hand

 Okay, left over loop, picked up loop, we're going to knit that together with the first

 Knit two together, and then across until we're in fact two stitches short of the end this

 We've got the left over loop, the knit two together, the knit two before the end, and

 now we have to pick one of these two loops to sort of pull it all together.

 I'm going to take the bottom one because I think the top one is already stressed out

 We've got the two left over loops, we've got the picked up loop, and then the rest of our

 You can see this one was knit together with the one from before.

 I'm going to take the not stretched one to put on my needle right there, turn it all

 So we've got two left over stitches, the extra loop that we knit two together with the first

 Okay, now you can see we've knit across to the last three stitches.

 So we have the first left over one, the second left over one that's wrapped, the third one

 that we're going to leave behind and wrap, we just need to pick up that stitch right

 there, the one that hasn't been stretched already, turn it around, purl two together,

 We have the original left behind, the second left behind, the third one that we're about

 I'm going to take the stitch that is not all stretched out, it's going to be this one,

 enter from back to front, leave it on that right needle, and turn it around.

 Okay, so now I'm going to pretend we've done as much shaping as we want to do, and I'm

 going to purl, or rather knit, all the way back across until we get to, and we're going

 So there's my three left behind, the extra loop that I knit two together, and we knit

 all the way across until I get to the first left behind stitch.

 So you can see I have first left behind, second left behind, third left behind, this is the

 first wrapped stitch, I'm going to knit that, and then we're going to have to wrap again,

 So again, this one, I'm going to take that one right there, turn it, purl two together,

 okay, so I'm at the first wrapped stitch right there, you can see that it's wrapped, I'm

 going to purl it, and then I'm going to do the turn with this one.

 So once again, from back to front, turn it around, and go across.

 So knit two together, purl to the first wrapped stitch that I come to, so there should be,

 when I get to that point, there should be three stitches left on the needle.

 So three stitches left, I knit one of them, pick up that wrap, turn, and work back again.

 Purl two together, purl to the last three, and two at the end, there's your wrap, and

 I'm going to purl that one, this is the one I'm going to pick up and wrap, turn it around,

 this time we're purling to the last one, we're going to knit that one, and then pick up that

 daughter stitch again, from back to front, getting ready to purl it together on our last

 Purl to the last two, purl that first one, pick up that mommy stitch again one last time,

 turn it around, one leftover stitch, knit two together, this time we're going to knit

 all the way to the end, and then we'll come back and purl all the way to the end.

 Purling all the way to the end, one, two, and finally we purl that stitch that's been

 left behind this whole time, turn it around, or rather knitting all the way to the end,

 now we're going to come back, purl all the way back, just to show you what it looks like,

 So the last row, you can see that stitch that we left behind so many rows ago, we're going

 Now what's interesting about this is how you can see it's really caught the holes on

 both sides, and it's not perfect by any stretch of the imagination, I'd be curious to try

 you know, other short row shaping, but as written, that's what the P-U-L-T is for on

 Now sciatic pain is like a unilateral pain, so it means it's on one side, usually on one

 It's usually due to nerve compression or damage there, or a herniated disc.

 sciatic pain, you really have to relieve the constipation to treat it there.

 The way this plant flowers is it flowers and buds continuously throughout the whole summer.

 You'll notice that some of the flowers are in full bloom and other flowers are just buds.

 Some of them are green buds, yellow buds that are about to flower, and green buds.

 What we're going to do is we'll take the whole flower and the bud as well.

 maybe one like this, what's a good idea to do is actually make an oil in this way.

 With our calendula oil, we just packed the jar full of calendula flower heads and then

 we poured over the oil and that's how we're making our cold infused oil.

 On a plant like this, if you don't have a lot of it to harvest from at one go and fill

 up your jar straight away, what you can do is harvest continually throughout the summer

 and then top it up with oil and keep topping it up with flowers and more oil.

 It's important to make sure that your jar is completely bone dry.

 There will be some moisture from the plant obviously, but you don't want it to be wet

 What we're going to do is pick a number of the plants, cover them in oil and then we're

 I'm going to leave it for at least three to four weeks, even longer if you can.

 When you're doing it with a plant where you only have one plant, you're going to continuously

 So the oil that we're going to use is, today we're using sunflower oil.

 And the reason I want to use sunflower oil is because it's heating.

 And I do find that for a lot of people, if there's muscular tension or that kind of shooting

 And even the action of rubbing, massaging in the oil is a heating action and usually

 So I'll put that lid on that and I'll leave that sit for a number of days.

 And as more flowers and buds are produced, as this plant does flower and bud continuously,

 Now if you have a lot of them, you can just fill up your jar straight away.

 And what will happen is your oil is going to turn out like this.

 So it's only been infusing for about a week or so and it's already turning bright red,

 And as you can see, the plant material is completely covered in the oil.

 What I may do with this is to make it double strength, I may actually strain off the flowers,

 keep the oil, the red oil, and then put in more flowers and put in the oil again, the

 And at the end of it, what you're going to get is an oil like this, a really, really

 And it's just such a useful thing to have at home, especially if you do commonly suffer

 Now there's no point really massaging just along the pain that's running along the leg.

 What you really need to do is you need to find the point that the pain is coming from.

 So that's where the nerve is being compressed and you want to massage that point in particular.

 They're a type of fingerling potato that was perpetuated by the Macaw Nation.

 These are kind of knobby, so a little brush like this is real helpful for cleaning those

 So, explorers from Peru came up to Nia Bay, the teeny tiny part of the northeast part

 But they left behind these potatoes, and the Macaw Indians were looking for a carbohydrate

 I'm cutting them in half, but if they're big ones like this puppy here, I'm going to cut

 But we want to kind of honor the fact that it's a fingerling potato and keep it in kind

 It's about a half a teaspoon of salt in there, and we're going to parboil the potatoes to

 You'll notice that once you put those potatoes in there, it cools the water down and it stops

 So what you do, this is kind of cool, is once it starts boiling again, then you time it

 five minutes, and it should be about fork tender then, and that's just what we want

 because we're just parboiling them, not boiling them all the way.

 You can put a little cool water over them so they cool down quickly.

 Place them on a clean towel or a paper towel so they get dry, or a little bit dry, because

 when you put them in the hot oil, you don't want the water to cause a big old sputter.

 So let's get our skillet ready for those macaw osette potatoes.

 The first thing I'm going to do is put in a teaspoon of dry cumin.

 So putting it in here and toasting it for a second really gets it going.

 I'm starting to smell it because I had my skillet hot before I put it in.

 And I'm going to put in a tablespoon of ghee, clarified butter.

 What that means is they've taken the milk solids and the water out of the butter.

 I have a little extra here, but I'm not going to use it all until I taste it.

 And now we're going to give their backsides a little toastiness here.

 And the last thing I'm going to do, I'm going to turn the heat off and give them just a

 One thing's for sure, if you own a truck, if you have friends that own trucks, heck,

 if you've been around trucks in any way, shape or form, well, you have experienced the frustration

 And you also know that having an extra set of hands to help you isn't always an option.

 So how do you load something heavy, like a welder or an engine or a refrigerator, into

 the bed of the truck when you're by yourself and you're pressed for time?

 This is basically a small boom crane with a lifting capacity of 700 pounds.

 Number one, it mounts in and out of the vehicle in just a few seconds.

 This is going to lift 700 pounds, and what am I going to have to do to my truck to mount

 To mount the lift, you've got this adjustable holster that the lift slides into, and it's

 Now, like I said before, it's fully adjustable, so it'll fit just about any size bedside.

 You've got a foot down here on the bottom, one up here on the top of the bed rail.

 You just drill your holes, bolt it in, and that's all there is to it.

 Now, you just slide it into the hitch, slide in the support leg, and then the holster assembly.

 Now, you'll notice you've got plenty of gear reduction in your winch here to easily lift

 It's not going to freewheel backwards and drop the load on you.

 However, when you want to drop the load, just roll the handle backwards.

 You'll easily drop the load down, but still lock in place where you want it to.

 Now, once you have everything raised up, this whole assembly will pivot, and you can bring

 Simple, easy, and if you carry heavy loads in your truck, this is almost mandatory.

 Now, that's a little bit, that's quite different from the 1 to 3 bend in that to do the 4 bend

 The middle of your tongue is almost pushing forward to get that.

 So I would even say that the volume in your mouth is getting a bit smaller.

 In fact, there seems to be different ways of doing it because you can use your tongue

 You can use more of the back of your throat as well to get that.

 So there's a little bit of difference in tone, you know, the throat one.

 So, yeah, so there seems to be different ways of doing that bend and I'm sure that's the

 You know, you'll find there's variations of ways of doing it which doesn't really help

 Hi guys, I decided to make some dehydrated sweet potatoes for my dogs.

 shops, Salvation Army, Goodwill, you can find a dehydrator for cheap.

 for slicing the sweet potatoes because they're kind of tough to

You can dehydrate them as long as you want if you want a little bit

 you find tons of them at the Salvation Army because people don't use

So those are great places to look if you want to get a dehydrator.

 that you don't have to buy in the store and not know where they came

 what you're doing when you're making your own and what's in them.

 So they didn't take as long as I thought they were going to take.

 Hi, I'm Jenny with JustPoppin.com and today we are going to be popping some popping sorghum.

 And if you've ever seen it before, or never seen it before, it's these little tiny grains.

 And we're using the dry method today and we're using a high-sided pot because, as you can

 imagine, if you tried to pop this in an air popper, you'd have an enormous kitchen clean-up

 So we've been preheating the pot on five, on medium, for about two minutes.

 And a good way to test it is a little drop of water in the bottom.

 And I don't know if you can see, the little water droplets dancing across the bottom of

 So I'm going to put in an eighth of a cup of sorghum seed, which is a great serving

 And just shake to evenly distribute and then just gently move the grains around the pot.

 We've actually found that this does better in a stainless steel pot than it does in a

 And you certainly wouldn't want to use the dry pop method on a non-stick pan.

 Once it starts to pop, turn it down to just about four to keep it from burning and just

 continue your gentle, gentle stirring while you listen to the cute popping sounds of your

 And we used an eighth of a cup because it seems to be a good single serve size and it's

 just the right amount to get just about all of it popped in the dry method.

 Using oil in the popper tends to give you an ability to pop a whole quarter cup.

 As you can see for the most part they won't pop out of the bowl so you can do this with

 Don't expect them all to pop but you'll get a pretty good pop rate out of this.

 Now would be a great time to sprinkle on some Parmesan cheese or some salt or eat it plain.

 This is a transmission belt mixer, unlike most stand mixers that have gears.

 So you don't lose any power from the 800 watts that you have under here.

 So in here, I have some bread flour, and now I'm going to add some water.

 And we'll come back in a minute and show you the finished product.

 So if you look up, every three or so turns, it actually turns the dough over to keep kneading

 One little trick for testing if your bread dough is done, grab a little piece of it,

 roll it into a little ball, and you want to do something called window painting.

 And if you get to the point where you can stretch it out and see light through it without

 it tearing very much, that's when you know the gluten's developed.

 Hey, this is Aaron from www.AaronsGuitarLessons.com and I'm going to explain to you what a minor

 Alright, so you've probably heard of major sevens and minor sevens and suspensions.

 There's a lot of the same ways that you can find out how to play a minor seven by using

 Alright, so a minor seven simply means that you're going to take the minor scale and make

 a chord out of the minor scale using the first, the third, the fifth, and the seventh tones

 So we need to know what the E minor scale is or what the minor pattern is, period.

 Okay, so the fret numbers on that for the E minor scale is going to be 7-9-10, go down

 So if you want to start on C, do the same pattern, or D, but we're doing E right now.

 So if we're making an E minor seven, we need to find out what the seventh tone of that

 So 1-2-3-4-5-6-7, just count your way up, and then when you land on the seventh, figure

 So I'm playing a D, and I can use that by using my octaves, helping me figure out what

 that note is, or you can use half steps and whole steps and count your way up from the

 Alright, so if I'm playing an E minor chord, and I want to make an E minor seven, I just

 Top string's playing an E, there's really no good place to play a D there.

 I have an open G on the third string, so that means a D's going to be way up on the

 But on the B string, I have B, C, C sharp, D, third fret on the second string.

 Now sometimes you see on this particular chord, this E minor seven played like this, 0-2-2-0-3-3

 with your third finger on the D plus your fourth finger on the G on the first string.

 And that's fine, that doesn't make a difference because an E minor chord is an E, a G, a B,

 and a D. And on this first string here, if you play it open, it's an E, and if you play

 The only thing that makes it the seven is when you add the D in on the second string,

 Alright, so let's start on an A on the top string, fifth fret, and play that minor scale

 pattern, 1-3-4-1-3-4-1-3, count your way up to the seventh note, 1-2-3-4-5-6-7.

 And you find out that your minor seventh or your seventh tone in the scale is a G.

 So you can play an A minor, 0-0-2-2-1-0, and then you just need to add a G somewhere in

 Okay, well you have an available fourth finger to add a G on the first string, third fret

 Another way you can play an A minor seven is exactly like this, but take off your third

 So the basic thing you need to know is that a minor seven chord is the scale tones 1-3-5-7

 All you're going to need for this recipe is some self-rising flour and your favorite beer.

 Pretty much all you've got to do is mix the ingredients until it's about the consistency of pancake batter.

 And this stuff is good for onion rings, fried mushrooms, or fish.

 But just like any fish, you want to clean it up, make sure all the bones are out.

 I just like to use these needle nose pliers and dig in and pull each one of them out.

 And with these large fillets, I like to cross cut them into square chunks.

 It's good for halibut, cod, even catfish isn't bad to do it this way either.

 But to ensure that the batter sticks well, you want to dust them with some flour like this.

 The beer batter has had a little bit of time to aerate a little bit.

 And because they're floating at the top, there's going to be color variance.

 So you want to come back halfway through and flip each one of them over.

 Unless you've got one of those fryers that can cover the top and press them down so they're completely submerged.

 Thank you for watching and be sure to stop by PoorMansGourmetKitchen.com

 For more recipes and exact ingredients, visit www.PoorMansGourmetKitchen.com

 Hi, I'm Lou, and today I'm going to show you how to replace a rusty sink drain.

 All you're going to need is a new pop-up drain assembly from the hardware store.

 So if we look under the sink, there's the old drain assembly, and here's the new drain

 There'll be some water inside this tube, so it's best to have a pan or a bucket underneath

 Start by loosening both of these nuts and pulling this U-pipe off.

 Now reach around back and squeeze this little metal clip and push away, and that'll release

 You'll probably find that the whole pipe starts turning, so you can't get the nut off.

 If that happens, push up here, pull the drain out, and stick a screwdriver or pliers handle

 in there to stop that from turning while you undo the nut below.

 Next, there'll be a metal or plastic ring that comes off, and finally a rubber washer.

 Sometimes those rubber washers don't want to come off, but a pair of pliers will easily

 Now push up on this, and your old rusty sink drain comes right out.

 Now you have the drain out, you might as well go ahead and clean.

 Now you need to take a close look at your new sink drain assembly.

 Mine, for example, doesn't unscrew down here, so I have to take off the top and push it

 Take this back nut completely off, and slide it over the long end of the new rod they provide.

 This short end here is going to push up and down on the drain, so you want it to go in

 So drop that down in there, and put this in from underneath, like this.

 Make sure when you flip this up and down, that your drain is moving up and down.

 Now slide one end of your clip over the rod, put the rod through this bar, and then put

 the other end of the clip on the other side of the rod, and slide it forward until it's

 If it's done right, the drain should go up and down when you pull this lever.

 By the way, if it doesn't stay on its own, you need to tighten this nut some more.

 If you'd like this thing higher or lower, just put this in a different hole.

 Now to reassemble the pipes, put this nut back on with the threads down, and then put

 Run the water with the drain opened and closed, and look for drips like this one.

 And if you have any, that just means you need to tighten the nut more.

 Thanks for watching, and good luck replacing your rusty sink drain.

 What is up YouTube this is NextGenReview and today we are reviewing the Dell Inspiron i15 RN5882DBK

 Long name but I just got this today at Best Buy for $600 exactly.

 It's Black Friday obviously so I got this but there was no sale on it so...

 If you know Dell Inspiron you can switch out the cases but I'm not going to do that because they are like $50.

 The specs on this is the Intel Core is an i5 processor, 6GB of memory, 640GB of hard drive memory, integrated Intel HD graphics.

 The software is Windows 7 Home Premium 64-bit, Microsoft Office Starter, 2010 Dell.

 It includes a DVD, RW drive, wireless N, WI-MAX, a webcam and HDMI.

 It comes with a lot, this is a 15.5 inch laptop so it's pretty big.

 This will be my first unboxing for this YouTube channel so let me just open it for you.

 I bought this with my own money, not my parents money, I actually worked for it.

 As you can see there is kind of a wood grain on it, Dell obviously.

 Just these papers, here is the setup guide which is really nice.

 So it looks like you have your AC adapter which is pretty cool.

 So just take that to note because I don't have any outlets that have three prongs.

 It is a full keyboard and as you can see there is even numbers on the side.

 Hello ladies, it is me, the sexy one, the latin lover known as Antonio Bananas.

 Today I'm going to teach you how to cut into a pineapple, the sexy way, like only Antonio

 He is a good alien from another world, we seem to connect on many levels.

 Damien, say a few words for your fans out there, why don't you?

 Does that feel good when Antonio rubs your face like that baby?

 Oh baby, I am so sorry for what I am doing to you, but I am so enjoying it as well.

 Did you know that you can actually plant the leaves of the pineapple?

 Now that I cut off the skin of the pineapple, you can see the inner beauty of the pineapple.

 Remember this is the core, it goes all the way down the middle.

 So you have to cut around the sides of the beautiful pineapple.

 As you can see, now you have two beautiful containers of pineapple.

 I hope you enjoyed my video on how to make sweet love while cutting into your pineapple.

 Please like my video and share it with all your beautiful pineapple eating friends.

 And maybe if you're good, Antonio will make another how to do something video in the future.

 We're now going to experiment with a large tire, something that you will certainly come

 Now the higher the tire goes, the more you have to know what you're doing.

 In the episode before we taught you how to do a small tire D-Wake.

 Now this bigger tire is, you know first do the little one before you go into this big

 Okay so now we've seen the technique on a small obstacle and remember what I said, that

 So Brent's going to do the typical enduro style, pick up the front wheel, try and get

 Okay so we've brought the technique onto a bigger obstacle and Brent's shown you the

 I'm going to have to compress more, jump more and jump forward.

 So if I just ride up here normally with not a lot of legs, the previous technique that

 So what we're going to show now is Brent doing the proper unweighting technique on a big

 Okay so now we've seen the proper deweighting to get that back wheel to the top of the obstacle.

 What we're going to do now is we're going to break it down just quickly for you guys

 Alright, you'll see Brent coming in, he compresses, he picks up the wheel from about the height

 of the obstacle, lay it on the ground, that's where the front wheel leaves.

 And now a very important part about where that front wheel impacts is just on top.

 So you need to hit the surface of it so you can get good compression.

 That drives the motorcycle in, compresses both back and rear suspension and he comes

 Everything rebounds, he stores a little bit in the clutch, you'll see him drop it at the

 same time he jumps forward and he jumps up and accelerates off the obstacle.

 Okay to our wok on a high heat we are going to add our anchovy oil.

 going to give a lovely flavor to our stock once it's browned off in this anchovy oil.

 Now we've just chopped our garlic and our ginger and our chili roughly.

If you add it too early there's a good chance that your garlic will burn.

 Now we're going to send in our choy sum or Asian greens and our capsicum.

 And when it's absorbed most of that moisture we're going to send in our stock.

 Ok once this has come to a boil we're going to send in our fish fillets that have just been cut into chunks.

 When it comes back to heat we're just going to slice our silken tofu or our soft tofu into little cubes.

 Traditionally Sundubu Jjigae is served in a clay pot but I don't have a clay pot.

 What we're going to do is make a little dent in our boiling soup and break in two eggs.

 The reason that I do this is you don't get any surprises if that egg isn't perfectly fresh.

 And secondly I know that they are going to be a little bit hard to break in.

 So a little extra washing up could save a world of trouble later.

 We'll be serving it with kimchi, a traditional Korean accompaniment.

 Scoop up our egg which has still got a very slightly soft yolk.

 I hope you enjoyed this little cooking demonstration of Chiki Richo's soft tofu soup or Sundubu Jjigae.

 If you'd like to see more interesting recipes and ideas please just check out our Chiki Richo channel.

 And don't forget to please subscribe, leave a comment and give us a thumbs up.

 Hi there, I'm Ian McKinnon with Children of the Earth Foundation

 and I'm going to demonstrate today the hand drill friction fire method.

 You want to have it about an eighth of the pie, not quite to the center.

 A stalk, this is a goldenrod in this case, you want to have something with a 50th center

 and it's really as straight as possible, it's going to make it as easy as you can.

 Even if you think you have a coal, you might want to keep on building

 until you have enough dust, because otherwise it's going to be hard to blow up your tinder bundle.

If you want the rest of it, please email me at easypianolessons at yahoo.com.

 Or if there are any other songs that I have on YouTube that you'd like the rest of the song to, you can send me an email as well.

I forget how many times it does it, but it does it over and over.

 And the only difference in the repeat is that you're going to do a B here in the right hand instead of a C sharp.

 So the first time through, you play it as written, no B, do the C sharp.

 And then the second time through, you're going to do this B in parentheses instead of the C sharp.

 Left hand is on an A, a low A. Here's middle C. Here's the next C.

 And the right hand is going to have a middle C sharp to begin with.

 This C sharp, the black key on the left side of two blacks is a C sharp.

 And you want to try to put your hand in that position for the chord before you ever start.

 You don't want to do all this where you're trying to move around and get to the notes.

 And you want to slide your fingers up between the black keys a little bit to get some leverage.

 It's a lot easier if you're in that position to begin with before you start playing that measure.

 But we're going to change the A, which we had over here, to a G sharp.

 G sharp is this black key in the middle of three blacks right here.

 So the only difference is the A in this measure goes to a G sharp now.

And then the left hand's going to be on a C sharp octave and a fifth.

 And the right hand's going to kind of share that C sharp here in the middle.

 The only difference being we're going to play a B in the right hand here instead of a C sharp.

 You want to play it real expressively so it kind of takes some time.

 You can choose any one you like because they're all equal ingredients.

 I'd like to apologize for the amount of ingredients and tools in this recipe.

 Yeah, it passed the husband test in a recipe made of all vegetables.

 we're just going to cut up our purple potatoes a little bit smaller.

 But the reason I like to take it off is because it makes it prettier.

 I do want to point out this is a modified recipe from the Forks Over Knives cookbook.

 we'd probably leave the skin on because there's lots of nutritional benefits.

 Next step, while we're waiting, we're going to slice the tomato.

 I already took most of them off the stem, but just in case you haven't worked with kale before,

 You just grab the base and then you squeeze it and then you pull down.

 When Ro showed me that, it changed my life because I eat kale chips on a regular basis.

 So I'm just tearing these up into smaller bits as she cuts the tomatoes.

 No, this is because it comes from the Forks Over Knives cookbook.

 I do find because I just freshly washed my kale that the water on the kale actually serves that purpose.

 We're going to go medium heat and we're going to want to stir occasionally.

So if you're actually looking this up in the Forks Over Knives cookbook,

 we're going to use a little less than they say because when I made this before,

 I actually thought there was maybe a little too much sauce for my liking.

Also, it called for lime juice and I replaced it with lemon juice.

 But I find that the cayenne pepper is important in this because it adds a little kick.

 And we're going to, we're not going to make you sit through the blending,

 You're going to go ahead and add your potatoes to the kale mix.

 You might need to thin it down with a little extra lemon juice or a little bit of water

 And then we just saute it together for about a minute and then serve warm.

 And today, because it's such a beautiful day, we've chosen to do planked salmon on the grill.

 Native Americans taught us how to use wood to smoke their salmon or seafood.

 I put soy sauce on it, let it sit there for a little while, and then after it soaked for

 Then I grilled it, so now it's seasoned for me to use for the first time.

 Then I added some dried dill, some sesame seeds, both about a teaspoon each, three tablespoons

 of brown sugar, two tablespoons of soy sauce, and two tablespoons of sesame oil.

 These dials are on high full, so there's all kinds of direct heat that's coming up.

 This side is off, so I'm going to use an indirect heat to cook our salmon.

 So we're going to take our seafood, beautiful salmon here, skin side down on the plank.

 Then we're going to take our mixture of the brown sugar, soy, sesame, dill, mix that up.

 All the acidities on the bottom, so you want to make sure that it gets on the top, or blended

 We're going to put this on the indirect heat side of our grill.

 We've got it at a little over 400 degrees, so we're going to check it periodically.

 When we check it, we're going to add a little bit more of our sauce.

 Now this salmon, it's kind of chic nowadays to have your salmon medium rare or rare-ish.

 But I can tell you that the end pieces are going to be more done than the center.

 And it's such a fragile piece of fish that we want to either eat it now or refrigerate

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to make another traditional Japanese recipe which is Ehomaki.

 Ehomaki is sushi roll and we eat the sushi roll on Setsubun which is February 3rd.

 And we eat the sushi roll facing to the lucky direction of the year.

 So you face to that direction and you start eating the Ehomaki without speaking anything.

 And the another thing we do on that day is bean scattering which we call Mame-Maki.

 And one person wears the devil mask and the others do the bean scattering.

 And usually the devil is guy's job but people say that the devil is woman.

 Then slice through the rice using rice paddle to separate the grains.

 Red and yellow are the lucky colors so it's better to add those colors in your sushi.

 Make sure the ingredients are pressed in and roll it completely.

 So now what we're going to do is we're going to stand up the ladder and before we use it

 and just stand it straight up and move it up and down a few times, make sure it works

 Before you lift the ladder up, it's always best to make sure that these locks are locked

 because if you take the ladder when these locks are not locked and you stand up the

 ladder this top piece will slide down and if you're not prepared for it you might end

 So Troy and I are going to lift this ladder up and stand it up and mess with it a little

 Okay now Troy just noticed that we've got it backwards so we're going to flip it before

 I'm going to get the feet, the feet's now set up like it's supposed to and I'm standing

 Now before we extend this you'll notice that I'm on the side that pulls up so I'm going

 Troy is going to grab this side of the ladder because this side of the ladder is the part

 that does not extend and he's going to make sure his hands are out of the way which they

 are both on this side and on this side and then what I'm going to do once we make sure

 Pull it up a few rungs make sure the catches catch like they're supposed to, they're looking

 Now I just went all the way to the top, I'm going to make sure it feels pretty good, it

 When you come down the black thing keeps the catches from grabbing and then when you're

 ready to catch it on a rung you wait until the spring pushes it over and you drop it

 so you go just past the rung, you listen for it until it clicks, drop it back down.

A lot of times in my research research I gave up a couple of things because there

It will fit down inside the jar and then you'll have a speaker that you can use

 with your cord here to hook up to your iPhone or your computer or whatever.

 pieces and parts, a couple of LEDs here, of course the jack for the cord to go in, a couple

 other little connectors, small screws, and then the switch here.

 go, because you can switch from MP3 playing like off your phone or it actually has an

I did not get it because I don't play the guitar, but you can actually use

 this jack, it's for the cord to plug into, onto the circuit board which is, I've looked

It just says to make sure it's flat against the board and then you solder

 The next step is to put this on the circuit board, this right angle header they call it.

 you will notice that these LEDs each have a long and a short pin.

 And then the longer one goes into the board in the square hole.

 step is to get this toggle switch soldered onto the board like this.

And then you have eight different solder locations on the board.

The next step is that we remove these nuts off of the switch and the jack.

 want the jack to go where it says input and then of course the switch to go over here.

The next step is to plug in the speaker to the straight male header which

Okay, the next step is to put the speaker into the jar and put your

 going to use it in my shop to listen to podcasts and different things I like to listen to.

 The foundation I used today is Amazonian Clay 12-hour foundation.

 pencil in Milk on the T-Lex area as a base and I'm going to smudge it using a

 synthetic brush and then over it I'm going to apply a frosty white eyeshadow.

 I'm using Nylon by MAC and this technique will make your eyes appear

 I'm going to take the same shade and the same brush and apply that on the lower

 around the edges and in between shades for it to transition in a smooth way.

 The shade I'm using for the crease is Saddle by MAC and I'm applying it using

 I'm going to go back to defining the lower lash line using the same Saddle

To create more depth and define the look more I'm going to add a

 darker shade of brown on the outer V and the shade I used is by MAC.

 I'm going to focus it right on the outer V. Now I'm going to take a clean

 blending brush and I'm just going to go around the edges and in between shades

 same shade and using the Frosty White I'm going to highlight my brow bone and

 evening look so you know I wanted it more defined and more sultry looking.

 You can curl the lashes now and apply some mascara and you can go with false

 using Motif's Retro Red lip liner and then I'm going to fill them in a little bit

 before applying my lipstick and the lipstick I chose is by MAC.

It's a Riri Woo, it's one of my favorite shades of red and this is how it looks like.

 Now I'm going to apply a little bit of bronzer and the one I use is by Anastasia

It's a contour kit and once I'm done I'm going to move on to the

 cheeks don't forget to add some highlighter on the tops of the cheekbones

 look oily so to prevent this you need to apply a little bit of powder on the areas

 where you will get shiny and for me that is my T-zone and just underneath my eyes

If you want me to see your recreations don't forget to tag me on Instagram

If you have any comments or any questions you can either email me or you can leave them below.

I want to thank you all for always supporting me on all my videos, liking them and commenting.

I also hope you have a wonderful Valentine's date and if you don't have a date don't worry just go out and have fun with your friends.

 Hey everyone, welcome back to another episode of Honeysuckle Catering.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make my childhood favorite, and it's actually still

 a favorite today, the Vietnamese sandwich, or it's also called Banh Mi Thit Nuong.

 There's so many different varieties of fillings for the sandwich.

 You can have grilled pork, grilled chicken, meatball, fish, the variety is endless.

 Today we're going to be making the grilled pork, a crowd favorite.

 I'm going to break each of the steps down so that it's super easy and simple for you

 I have one that's already pre-sliced for me that I bought at the Asian market.

 A tablespoon of black soy sauce, and this isn't your regular soy sauce that you use

 It's actually a thicker soy sauce that has molasses in it, and so it's nice and thick

 A tablespoon of fish sauce, half a tablespoon of sugar, two cloves of garlic, half of a

 Now combine your soy sauce, fish sauce, sugar, and put it in a bowl with the garlic and shallot

 Now take your sliced pork and put it in a bowl and mix it well so that everything marinates.

 Take a dash of salt and pepper to give it some extra seasoning.

 Now set it aside in the fridge for about half an hour so that the flavors all come

 Next, I'm going to show you how to make the pickled carrot and daikon.

 This is a sweet, salty, tangy condiment that goes well with so many Vietnamese dishes.

 You're going to need one cup of warm water, one cup of distilled white vinegar, a carrot,

 a daikon, a tablespoon of sugar plus a quarter cup of sugar, an eighth cup of salt plus a

 You're going to want equal amounts of daikon and carrot for this recipe.

 Now put your daikon and carrot in a bowl and with the tablespoon of salt and tablespoon

 You're going to be drawing out all the water and juices from the carrot and daikon.

 Let it sit for about 10 minutes so it can soak all the water out.

 You should be able to bend the carrot or daikon without it breaking.

 Now take your carrots and daikon and run it under cold water to rinse off the salt and

 Take your quarter cup of sugar and an eighth cup of salt and mix it into the warm water

 Now take your cup of distilled white vinegar and pour it into your sugar and salt mixture.

 You're going to want to let it sit for an hour to overnight so that it pickles and it's

 If you have a grill pan, you can go ahead and put it on the stove and cook it on high

 for about 3 minutes on each side until it's nice and dark and caramely.

 You're going to need a Vietnamese French baguette, our pickled carrot and daikon, cilantro,

 some sliced jalapeno, some sliced onions, mayo, and maggi sauce.

 Now take your grilled pork, I would say about half a cup of grilled pork, and layer it inside

 Now take your pickled daikon and carrots, layer it on, and then take your cilantro,

 This is more flavorful than soy sauce and it has a special seasoning to it.

 And there you have it, the Vietnamese sandwich or banh mi thịt nướng.

 If you'd like to see more episodes, please subscribe above and let me know what you think

 I think this is just like the easiest hairdo ever for me personally because I move so slow

 in the morning already and this semester I have some early classes.

 awesome because I remember when I would just wear like short hair and like you know then I started

 then you know I just got tired of like getting up and having to flat iron it and you know do all

I really don't even know how many hairstyles I'm going to show you.

 I'm going to show you guys some hairstyles that you can do with your box braids.

You know what I'm saying and you have more time to you know beat that face.

I mean liking and thumbs it up is the same exact thing but I just said that.

 hairstyles that are awesome let me know because I want to know how to do them.

 Okay so this first hairstyle is a simple side twist and it's something super quick and easy to do.

Especially if you're like in a rush and you want to seem like you put tons of effort into your hair that day or night.

It's a half up half down do and I take two braids from behind my ponytail and wrap it around my band and I love it because you can wear it to school, work, or you could also wear it out with your girls or on a date or something and you seem like you really put tons of effort into your hair even though it took less than two minutes.

I take a few braids from each side on the bottom and I just wrap it around the back.

I tie it up and then I flip the ponytail and it gives it like this really like effortless look and it looks so snazzy especially like if you just want your hair to be out of your face and in control that entire day.

They look freaking awesome and who else doesn't love a top knot.

You can wear it to work, depending on where you work, school, out.

This is a serious on the run hairdo but it's still super cute at the same time.

 Now over time, fuel gets contaminated with just dust in the air, dirt, and here and there.

 Now ordinarily, our filter will take care of it, but sometimes the dirt does get inside

 Here's the instruction sheets, and basically we need a good T-pin, a little bit of a small

 ballpoint pen, or like I have here, a ball wrench, because you need two hands to operate

 Now what we first do is push in the plunger and put that T-pin into that first O-ring

 Now once we get the O-ring out, the first one, just peel it out all the way.

 It's a little difficult to get out because it is sitting there.

 If it isn't, put a little alcohol, swish it around, brush it out if you will, and it'll

 Push this in and start pushing the O-ring inside using whatever method you got.

 Sometimes it's a little bit of a bear, but you can't push it back into its seal.

 Make sure it's mounted fairly securely, either in a vice or in a vice grip like this.

 And once you get that first O-ring out, everything falls out and you can just reverse the process

 So now we have installed the rod in both of the roller machines and the X-axis motor.

 Make sure first that you put the wires of the motor in this space or somewhere that

 Make sure that prior to installing the back plate that you have all of these screws are

 You know that the motor is in correctly and it's relatively tight, the mounting screws.

 We're going to be using 1.5 inch screws all around including in this location and cross

 Today in the Yum Yum Yogi's kitchen we will be making mixed lentil crepe or

 brunch because it's healthy, satisfying, full of protein and delicious.

 empowers others to soar above mountains of despair using the wings of wisdom and

For this recipe we need equal amounts of four kinds of lentils, 1

 fourth cup of chana dal or yellow split peas, 1 fourth cup of urad dal, 1 fourth

 cups of water, exactly 2 cups of water after rinsing and soak overnight or for

 blended so fine that when you touch the batter between two of your fingers you

 high heat, put some oil, take a paper towel and wipe off the pan.

 cook for about a minute or two depending on how high your heat is.

 If the dosa is not turning over, remember it's not cooked enough.

 inexpensive nonstick pan, make sure you just use that pan for dosas.

 tip and the second tip is if the dosa is breaking or not flipping over, it's not

1 teaspoon ginger paste, 1 tsp cumin seeds, 1 fourth of a teaspoon

 turmeric powder, 1 tsp tamarind paste, 1 fourth of a teaspoon mustard seeds,

 about 5 red chillies optional, you can use green also if you want.

 seed powder that we just made and about 6 stalks of curry leaves.

 roast the cashew nuts, the curry leaves and about 3 of the red chillies.

 cashew nut mixture, the cumin fenugreek seed powder, the tamarind paste and about

 that the cashew pieces are all blended together with the coconut.

 high, add the cumin seeds, the mustard seeds and 2 stalks of curry leaves and

 2 red chillies and let the cumin seeds and the mustard seeds pop.

 heat, add the turmeric powder, mix and now add this tempering mixture to the

 it, I want you to remember this my dear viewers, I am a jewel of joy who empowers

 others to soar above mountains of despair using the wings of wisdom and

 My inspiration for today's look came from a few different people.

 I follow makeup artist Charlotte Tilbury on Instagram, and she had posted a picture of

 a vintage vamp which is like a 1920s Great Gatsby style of makeup.

 It's an era where women were not afraid to pair a dark lip with dark eye makeup, and

 lately we've been seeing super dark lip colors everywhere from runways to celebrities like

 I think it's sexy and perfect for the season, and for those of you who prefer lighter colors,

 you can always pair it with a nude or pink lipstick, which also looks great.

 I'm first applying NYX's Jumbo Pencil in Rust over my lids, but keeping it under the crease.

 Also guys, my foundation and brows are already done, and I have detailed tutorials on my

 Next, I blended out the pencil with a synthetic brush from Yes4.com.

 This is a champagne eye pencil by LA Girl Cosmetics, and I'm applying this to the inner

 corners of my eyes and blending it out with a pencil brush from Beauty Is Paradise.

 All the eyeshadows in this look are from my favorite eyeshadow palette, which is the OFRA

 I'm using a MAC 217 brush to apply the transition color into my crease.

 For this look, I focused on the inner corners of my eyes and then took the transition color

 Next I applied this gorgeous burgundy shade over the NYX Rust pencil.

 This is such a beautiful color, and I love it because it suits every eye color and skin

 And after that, to soften the shadow, I blended out the edges using a MAC 224 fluffy brush.

 So now I'm applying this same NYX pencil on the outer half of my lower lid and then blending

 I'm adding a bit of this MAC black eyeshadow to the outer corners of my eyes and then blending

 So next I'm applying some of the burgundy shadow over the rust pencil on the lower lid.

 I do a lot of blending on my shadows, so every time I apply color, I usually go back and

 Here I'm applying MAC's Feline Eye Pencil in my lower waterline and then I smudged out

 I wanted to deepen the eyeshadow color, so I went back and added some more burgundy shadow

 over my lower lid and after that I used more of the black shadow and added it to the outer

 So guys, to darken my crease, I'm using a darker chocolate brown shadow from the same

 Now this is a very bold look for the eyes, so I'm not afraid to bring the shadow up high

 For this look, I didn't want to add liquid or gel liner, so I actually just used the

 same black shadow and the same angled brush to create a smudged out eyeliner effect.

 I'm using this pearly white shadow now for the inner corners of my eyes to brighten them

 Just apply some glue to the lash band, wait a few seconds for it to dry, then place the

 lash down center first and use tweezers to push in and hold down the outer and inner

 Now once the glue dries, remember to go back and cover any visible glue with the black

 Next just add your favorite mascara to your top and bottom lashes.

 I add very little mascara to my upper lashes because I don't want to ruin my beautiful

 One thing I forgot to mention earlier is that since the eyes and lips are very heavy, it's

 best not to fill in your brows too much to avoid looking harsh.

 So for blush I mixed a few pinks and peaches from my Ofra Cosmetics Professional Blush

 This palette and the eyeshadow palette I used are seriously my holy grail products.

 Now for those of you who prefer a light lip color, you can stop here.

 I personally think that dark lips are really the star of this tutorial, so I first started

 I outline my lips right on my lip line, but if you guys have thinner lips, you can draw

 I love using lip liners all over my lips to give them a more pouty effect.

 To darken my lips even more, I applied this gorgeous lipstick by Fiyoshi Cosmetics called

 Dark and Lovely, and I'm not sure which dark lipstick Khloe wears, but this one is almost

 This is a beautiful color, but I still wanted to add a reddish tint to better suit my eye

 makeup, so I went over my lips with Fiyoshi Cosmetics Berry Exotic Lipstick.

 Please check out Fiyoshi.com you guys, their lipsticks are amazing.

 So here's a little makeup trick on how to mattify any lipstick.

 Place a thin piece of tissue over your lips, and then dust some light or translucent powder

 The powder adds texture to your lipstick that the tissue alone does not, and this helps

 And guys that's it for my Khloe Kardashian Great Gatsby Vintage Vamp inspired makeup

 Halloween is just around the corner, and I feel like this look will be great for a lot

 A few drops of fake blood and some vampire teeth will really transform this glamorous

 And you can also pin your hair to the side like I'm doing here with this ear cuff from

 And again if you don't feel comfy wearing the dark shadow and the dark lips together,

 I just like showing you guys a bunch of different options so you can pick and choose what you

 Please remember to comment, rate, and subscribe, like this video, and follow me on Instagram

 Alright you guys, I'm coming here to show you how to use the controller for the PS3

 going to go to settings under the PSP Go and you're going to go to Bluetooth devices settings.

 Then you're going to go to, you're going to make sure your Bluetooth is on because

 tell you what you need, PS3 system controller, PS3 system, two USB cables.

So, you're going to connect it and then you're going to connect it to this.

 you're going to do is, if it's already connected you're going to unconnect it and connect it

 everything you could do with the, do any ordinary thing really.

 It's been a while since I posted anything on the Massey Deere adaptation so I'm going

 Ok so as you've seen in the other videos I've made this bracket here that mounts right onto

 It stays on, it works with the loader bucket, it doesn't ever have to come off.

 Those are the only implements I have that go on the front end that would require me

 I don't know if there's other stuff that goes on here but it's got a bar on here for attaching

 weights and I hooked up the original bumper front fender guard, grill guard that also

 Adapter plate has a G channel at the bottom and a hole at the top.

 There's a pin right here on the Deere frame or plow frame that drops into here, slips

 We've got the hydraulic lines now, just push those through and we'll see it work.

 Okay so I routed the hydraulic lines through the grill guard here up to the side.

 I just threw a quick zip tie on this, driving up to the front end loader control.

 See the adapter plate goes right down here, it's this piece here.

 So if I come over here you can see down inside there the J channel where that pin is.

 That drops down into there and then up on the other side of these hoses you can see

 I used to think that if we were stuffing up the drain, we'd find out that this thing collects

 And if you're lucky enough, you've been to Disneyland, maybe in your tub you'll also have

 You don't want to do it too hard because you don't want to damage anything here.

 You just need to turn it enough so you can loosen it up and do the rest by hand.

 Just take the screwdriver into it, turn it, and just keep turning until the shaft inside the stopper is loose.

 And depending on how long the hair of the people is in your household, you may have more or less of a mess.

 The needle nose pliers work well so you don't have to use your fingers to dig in here.

 And more will come out than you think because your tub is getting slow.

 Maybe let them watch this video and then let them go to town on it.

 You probably want to do this pretty regularly so that any big clumps don't go further down the drain and cause more trouble if you have to do that.

 I thought we'd just run a little more water through the drain to make sure it's good and clear.

 But I encourage you to go paint your own tile and create your own artwork in your bathroom.

 So let's run some water through this tub to make sure everything is good and clean.

 Next time maybe I'll actually clean the tub before we videotape.

 Hey guys, today I have a lower calorie version of one of my favorites, Pad Thai.

 Now typically you can get it at a restaurant, but you have no control over what's in it.

 So by making it at home, you make sure that it is low calorie and a healthy alternative.

 So today one of the ways that we're going to reduce the calories is by using these tofu

 Now they only have 10 calories per serving, and there's only two servings in this entire

 So when we use a lower calorie sauce, like we are today, the noodles really pick up that

 First you're going to combine your ingredients for the seasoning.

 This is what you're going to add on top of your noodles and everything at the end.

 One tablespoon of rice vinegar, one and a half tablespoons of fish sauce, one teaspoon

 of coconut palm sugar or other sugar, and then a half a teaspoon to one full teaspoon

 To prepare the shirataki noodles, you're first going to drain them.

 Then you're going to microwave them for one minute or boil them for two minutes.

 This just takes away the natural fish smell that these noodles tend to have.

 The shirataki noodles are non-GMO and also gluten-free, making them a great choice if

 you have any food allergies or you're concerned about GMOs like I am.

 Over on the skillet, you're going to add one teaspoon of oil, a clove of garlic.

 Once the noodles are in there, we're going to push everything over to the side, and then

 We're going to do one whole egg, and then we're going to do one egg white.

 Now we're going to combine the egg with the noodles and the shrimp.

 Add in about one ounce of chopped scallions, and then about five ounces of bean sprouts.

 As soon as the bean sprouts are cooked, we're going to add in our chopped peanuts, and then

 we will remove it from the heat and add in our slices of lime to serve it with.

 Let your guests squeeze it on themselves, whether or not they want it.

 Now obviously, you can make this recipe not using the shirataki noodles.

 However, you are going to increase the amount of calories per serving by at least 200 calories.

 If you want a lower calorie version, go with the shirataki noodles.

 To get this recipe, click more info and click the link down below.

 This recipe was inspired by one of my favorite recipe websites, Skinny Taste.

 You can always go over to SkinnyTaste.com and get the original there as well.

 Okay, so I'm going to make a tutorial of Paul Westerberg's dyslexic heart to the best I can.

 I was having trouble figuring out a lot of things, but hold on a minute.

 It's probably going to cut out a lot because I'm going to stay up close to my computer so I can see things.

 So I'm going to be doing a different pattern than what he does.

 I'm not going to sing because I don't want you guys to hate me already.

 I'm going to have to sing this one because I don't even have a choice.

 And I'd prefer not to, but I can't explain it very well without.

 And the only difference between an F and a C is you're not having this hold both bottom strings down.

 So you guys can look up all of these chords up actually on different sites.

 Okay that one area right there is probably one of the hardest ones.

 And then it goes I ain't dying to offend you I got a dyslexic heart.

 And then it goes to the second verse which you can look up the lyrics.

 And if you want to get technical I'm not even playing the real rhythm to it.

 Because without the other instruments it just doesn't quite give out the correct sound to it.

 As I said in the description I'll leave the chord changes and everything.

 So yeah I'm going to leave the chord changes in the description.

 because the harder they are, the more juice they let go when baking

 Alright, this sits in here at 450 degrees centigrade for 30 minutes.

 Loud sirens and flashing blue lights warn other road users of an approaching emergency

 We can help too, by knowing what to do when the emergency vehicle is coming through.

 If you hear a siren or see flashing blue lights, assume there's something coming your way and give yourself time to plan.

 Turn any music off in your car so you can hear the siren better.

 Look for somewhere to pull over and stop if it's safe, even if the emergency vehicle is on the other side of the road.

 Use your indicators to show you're pulling over when there's no risk of causing confusion to other road users.

 Emergency vehicles come in all shapes and sizes, so if you stop, make sure there's a large enough space for the emergency vehicle to get through.

 One very important point is that you should always stay safe and legal.

 At traffic lights, emergency drivers will try to find their way around you.

 They won't expect or want you to go through a red light, so stay behind the white stop line.

 The exception is if a uniformed police officer directs you through a red light.

 In these circumstances, be sure to follow the officer's exact instructions.

 Be careful about entering bus lanes, as it may be unsafe or illegal to do so.

 If you're approaching a junction or roundabout and you see an emergency vehicle, remember the driver behind you may not have the same view, so don't brake suddenly.

 If you're already at the junction, be patient and wait for the emergency vehicle to come past.

 On motorways and dual carriageways, don't overtake a blue light vehicle.

This will ensure you don't become involved in an incident it's attending.

 Give any responding vehicle plenty of room and follow it at a safe distance.

 In a solid white line system, the emergency vehicle may switch off its siren as it follows you.

 So keep going at the speed limit if it's safe, until you're out of the solid white lines.

 Then expect the siren to go back on and the vehicle to come past.

 Also, keep going on the approach to a bend or on the brow of a hill.

 As we've mentioned, stay off curbs and pavements, and stay off verges as these tend to hide all sorts of obstacles and ditches.

 Check your mirrors for any signals the emergency vehicle may be giving.

 Of course, if it's a police vehicle in your mirror, look carefully as it may be signalling specifically for you to stop.

 If you've slowed down or stopped, don't move off or accelerate until the emergency vehicle has passed completely.

 Have a good look round and be aware of other drivers who may decide to pop into a gap created by the emergency vehicle.

 Finally, be aware that there may be more than one emergency vehicle coming.

 Listen for different sirens and look all round before moving off.

 In summary, remaining aware and observant gives you time to anticipate and plan, without compromising your safety.

 What's more, your courtesy could well be helping to save a life.

 We are talking today about salmon fishing, specifically with plugs.

 And he's a Northern California guy, but what we're talking about today, you can use it

 You know, we're talking about wrapping sardine fillets on your plugs to make that scent out

 Very standard practice for everybody that fishes in this neck of the woods.

 What we do is we roll this guy out, get a good little cut on there.

 And what I'll do is I'll make a slice down this and that's going to lay on the inside

 So what we're going to do to supercharge these baits is we're going to go ahead and drop

 What I do with this guy right here is lay it right there on my plug, put it over, grab

 Now a lot of people basically will ask us, okay, why are we using nectar?

 For those of you that don't know what nectar is, Potsky has cooked almost 90 million jars

 We got red, which comes from your premium, your green label, and your gold label salmon

 The scent that's being pushed out of this stuff is just tremendous.

 So get out there, try it yourself, and you'll catch a lot more salmon doing so.

 Tube motor, and I know that's going to go up to the ceiling fan.

 Twist that wire together, the stranded wire, to make one little wire come out.

 I know this is the wire up here that's going up to the ceiling fan.

 Looks like the copper portion that's stripped back is a little bit long for the little wire

 What you want to do is once you put the wire nut on, you want to make sure that the copper

 I don't want that, so I'm just going to cut the tip of this off.

 Make sure it's set in there tight because sometimes, believe it or not, those can just

 Now for added extra insurance, I'm going to put some electrical tape around there to keep

 Usually this wire, the stranded wire, is stripped back far enough.

 If you've got a question about that, you want to strip that back ever so slightly more,

 Look at this and make sure that you're hooking this up properly.

 You might be wondering, hey Joe, how come you didn't put electrical tape on the ground

 I twisted both ground wires together before I put the wire nut on.

 I basically do that on these others because you've got one stranded wire.

 Stranded means all kinds of small, very small little wires all together.

 That generally comes from a light switch that already has these wires on it or something

 like that for dimmer switches or ceiling fan switches, that sort of thing.

 The solid copper wire, you might have a tendency of something sliding there if you don't

 You can't get it on any tighter and all of a sudden you just pull and suddenly the wire

 comes out because it's just how it was hooked up and it just didn't grab it the proper way.

 You just have to be careful about that because the last thing you want is to push everything

 back into the wall and then find out later you've got a short problem.

 It might be because the wire nut came off or one of the wires came out of the backside

 This is Leo and today we're going to be making some empanada frita de pollo.

 Alright, to start off with our flour, as you can see we're going to make a well in the

 middle and in that well we're going to put in our ingredients which are an egg, some

 Alright, and finally we're going to add a good 3-4 wallops of butter or margarine, it's

 Alright, now this doesn't look pretty, I know, and it's not going to feel very pretty either

 but just start mixing those in, start incorporating all the ingredients and as needed you're going

 to add just barely enough lukewarm water to get everything together.

 Like I said, it's not attractive but it's going to get there, it's going to look good

 in a few minutes so just keep rolling that out, stretching it out and when it starts

 So you just make it into a big ball and let it rest for a few minutes, about 10-15 minutes

 You can also cover it with some kind of cloth or warm table cloth thing.

 Alright, after a few minutes you're going to start rolling them up into little balls.

 Now remember these have to be small because they're going to become, each one is going

 So yeah, don't make them too big, don't make them too small either.

 We made them a little too big on this one so you might want to go a little smaller than

 Alright, let the balls rest for a few minutes and after they've rested for a few minutes

 we're just going to flatten them out with our fingers into a little pile of flour.

 That's going to allow us to flatten them out with our rolling pin.

 And once they're well floured, you just want to flatten them out again on a well floured

 surface and like I said, ours were a little too big and we flattened them a little too

 Alright, let's start off with the higote, which is really just the filling or the stuffing,

 Alright, so in a nice thick bottom pan you want to heat up some oil.

 We used normal vegetable oil and then pop in a very finely minced onion.

 Now you're not looking to brown it yet, you just, as soon as it gets nice and soggy and

 it starts cooking and starts releasing some of its humidity, we're going to pop in our,

 again, finely chopped or diced or minced or whatever, green peppers.

 You might even want to add like a jalapeno in there or something.

 You can really do whatever you want with this mixture, you can add any vegetables you have,

 some people add potatoes, like cooked potatoes, some people add carrots, whatever.

 Alright, then we're going to add some salt, we're going to season this well with salt

 Remember this is supposed to be kind of strong because it's, you know, what we like.

 We added cayenne, like I said, you can modify this to your heart's content.

 Alright, and once all your seasoning is incorporated, you just want to let it rest, let it, you

 And as soon as the onions are starting to brown, and I don't know if you can see that

 very well in the video, but as soon as they're starting to brown, you want to add your chicken.

 The chicken, we just boiled it in plenty of salt water and that's it, we cut them up,

 we cut it up into really small pieces and here we are just correcting our seasoning

 Yeah, so just make sure you taste this before you put it into the chicken and that's it,

 We're just going to take our little flattened pieces of dough, put a good wallop of our

 stuffing or higote into it, right in the middle, and you flatten it out just like you saw.

 Alright, and that's what you want to take again, fold in, and squeeze.

 Just every time you get a new little ear, you want to take it, fold it, and squeeze

 And at the end, we're going to do the same thing but we're going to do it back into the

 Just a last note about the folding, you can do this with a fork, you can have one of those

 You don't need to do this but this is the traditional way and we opted to do it that

 Make sure to use hot oil for the frying and as soon as they look bright gold colored,

 Everything inside is cooked, we just want that very thin dough to fry.

 Please visit the website for the complete instructions and a couple extra picks and

 In today's video we're going to be unboxing and taking a look at the Speck Candy Shell

 Welcome back everyone and I'd first like to send a big shout out to the professional

 I'm going to go ahead and drop a link down in the description to their website.

 Be sure to visit their website and check out all the great products that they have to offer.

 In terms of the unboxing we get both images and text getting us more familiar with our

 After sliding off the outer layer of packaging we are presented with our Apple Watch Case.

 This Candy Shell Fit Apple Watch Case fits 42mm Apple Watches, Apple Watch Sports, and

 The case also features a dual layered design with a hard impact resisting exterior and

 The case is also extremely easy to take on and off and is made out of durable flexible

 The case has also been lab tested which means that the Candy Shell Fit underwent durability

 and accelerated life testing and stood up against extreme temperatures, cracks, and

 Let's go ahead and install the case now by simply sliding in the digital crown first

 The case features full bezel protection which means that it has a raised bezel that protects

 the Apple Watch's glass from impact without impeding the touch screen functionality.

 Although this case does offer full protection it does still allow for full access to the

 digital crown as well as the friends button and also access to the inductive charger on

 The case has some nice weight to it and feels excellent on the wrist.

 This Candy Shell Fit case is available for both the 42 and 38mm Apple Watches and is

 available in 4 different colors and comes with a 1 year warranty.

 Taking a closer look at the right side of the case we have a cutout for our digital

 On the left side of the case we have a cutout for both our microphone and speaker.

 I've been using this Candy Shell Fit Apple Watch case for several days now and I have

 to say that I give it a complete 10 out of 10 as I see absolutely no flaws with the product.

 If you're interested in further information, pricing, and availability all relevant links

 Once again big shout out to the folks over at Speck for sending out this case for review.

 If you have not yet subscribed to the channel now is a great time to hit that subscribe

 button and you will be notified in your inbox every time I upload a new video.

 Don't forget to drop a like down below and leave a comment down in the comment section.

 I'd like to take this opportunity to thank you guys for watching.

 As I mentioned earlier my name is Aaron and I'll see you guys on the next one.

 Hi everyone, in today's video I'm going to show you 3 different nail art designs using the help of some magic tape and some decorative studs

 They are all super easy to do, perfect for beginners and do not require any drawing skills to recreate

 Apply a thin coat of a red polish and let that completely dry before moving on

 Depending on the nail polish you use, you may need to wait 5-10 minutes for the polish to dry

 The best way to test is to just rub your finger over it and see if it's ready

 Now grab whatever tape you can find around the house and cut off a section using the dispenser blades

 and we're going to place that over the surface of the nail to help section it off

 Make sure to press down on the edges to flatten the tape so the nail polish doesn't slip through

 Grab your second colour and apply it over the exposed side of the nail to cover up the base colour

 While that's still wet, randomly place the different shaped studs onto the nails

 The bits and pieces of this design kind of resembles all the different parts of the Ironman suit

 When you're done, finish with a layer of top coat to secure the decals

 So if you own one of those, you can match your nails to look like them

 I went with a simple purple colour but you can also do rainbow clutch nails or even patterned clutch nails

 I have a video on animal print designs which I'll link below if you're interested

 We're just going to use the zig zag side again to create a triangle shape on the nail

 Use one piece to cover the top right corner and the other one to cover the bottom right corner

 When doing your other hand, you can cover the left corner since it's easier to get to

 Press down to flatten the edges, then apply the second colour over the exposed areas of the nail

 Carefully rip off the tapes and what's left will be the triangle shape

 While the nail polish is still wet, add in a little round stud to decorate

 The third and last design for today has a monochrome theme with gold detailing

 Take a piece of tape and cut out a few strips as straight as possible

 We're going to use 2 or 3 strips per finger, a thicker piece and a couple of thin pieces

 Place the big piece vertically on the nail, then the thin piece on the side of the first piece

 You can alternate the positions on the other fingers to mix it up

 Apply white polish over the entire nail, then carefully peel off the tape to achieve the stripy design

 Apply clear coat as adhesive, then place the studs over the thicker black sections

 Once you've placed the studs, you can push it around a little bit to adjust it into position before the clear coat dries

 Once you're done, always apply top coat to prolong the lasting time of your manicure

 If you like this video, please rate it, share it and add it to your favorite playlist

 Please subscribe for updates, I upload new videos every Thursday

 You can visit my channel to check out all of my nail tutorials.

 Hi, my name is Malia Bailey and we're inside a racquetball court right now and today we're

 going to learn about the fundamentals and basics of playing racquetball.

 A little bit talking about the size of the court and basic rules of racquetball so you

 The nice thing about racquetball is when you start playing, the ball stays on the court.

 You don't have to go chasing it around, maybe like other sports, and it's a good workout.

 This is the short line, front line and this is what we call the five foot line or the

 In order to get the ball in play, what we need to do is stand in the service area between

 When you start your service motion, you can start on the line, that's legal, but you cannot

 We're going to start with our foot on the line or anywhere in between these two lines.

 When you finish your service motion, your front foot can be on the line and over, but

 When you're in the service box, when you're swinging, you must bounce the ball.

 Once you strike the ball, the ball has to hit the front wall first and bounce beyond

 If it does not make it past the short line, we call that a fault as well.

 As the receiver, you're receiving back here about a racket arm's length.

 When you return the serve, you can contact the ball anywhere in this area.

 You may not go into this area, the receiving area, until the ball either bounces or passes

 As the server, you have to stay in the service box until the ball passes the short line.

 Once the serve is in play and the receiver has returned a serve, that's the beginning

 The two people on the court, if you're playing singles, take turns hitting the ball.

 If it doesn't hit the front wall before it hits the floor, that's what we call a skip

 Also, it would be over if one of the players hit the ball and the receiver, the ball bounces

 Either a point is scored or a side out happens, which they exchange places.

 Just so you know, a side out, that's a term that we use when the server has lost the rally

 The receiver becomes the server and the server is now receiving.

 Some of the other brief terminologies that we use, if we hit the ball to the front wall

 If the ball bounces twice before it's returned, a double bounce or triple bounce, however

 many bounces, but you only get one bounce in order to return the ball.

 Also, when serving, as we mentioned a bit ago, the ball has to hit the front wall first.

 If it hits a side wall or the ceiling or the floor before it hits the front wall first,

 it's an automatic side out, whether it's on your first serve or your second serve.

 As you're playing, the only way to score a point is while you're serving.

 You're playing a regular match, you'll play two games to 15, tiebreaker if necessary to 11,

 Coming up next, we're going to talk about the basic forehand and backhand grips.

 So here, what I would like to show you is a very simple recipe with sea scallops from

 And what you really need to do, a very simple recipe, is to pour the mushroom paste into

 And on that jar, you can put sea scallop, aquafaba, sea lily, rosemary, and chard,

 But I'm going to use truffle oil because I know that truffle oil is essential to make

 So it's something that I'm going to whip up in about five minutes.

 For this one, for sea scallops, I decided to use a little bit less, less taste, less

 And just a more bland aroma to make sure we get the full flavor of the truffles.

 All we need is a little bit of lemon because the recipe is a carpaccio, is a sea scallop

 So if you want to focus on the work here, what I'm going to do is just create a carpaccio

 of sea scallops by cutting very thin slices with a big knife and placing them in the small

 It's quite, it's a little bit, it takes a little bit of practice.

 When you lay out the thin slices in your dish, you take your truffle oil and just prepare

 a small marinade with quite a bit of truffle oil that covers the top of the slices.

 As much lemon as possible because it's going to cook the fish, the seafood, as much as

 You can find some in a few places, but a good way to find it is online.

 And so this website is dedicated to black winter truffles from France, from the Perigord

 And it's a beautiful region where people have been dedicating their life to food and good

 So they know what they're talking about and they've been harvesting truffles for many

 And truffs.com is a website that offers a whole selection of black winter truffles of

 Well, this particular recipe calls for white Italian truffles, which is a more potent aroma.

 But there are many other recipes that you can prepare with black winter truffles.

 And as I said, it takes just a few minutes and then we'll be able to taste this very

 You can leave it for 20 minutes, either in the fridge or even on the table and then serve

 And you can enjoy drinks with your friends while you're cooking.

 Again, you want to slice as thinly as, you know, as thin as possible.

 And then you can serve them directly from the dish or on a small plate and pick them

 But you can actually help me now and pour a little bit of salt and pepper as it cooks

 And I think we'll be just about ready once you're done to have a taste.

 So I think we will get some plates and forks and let it sit for a few minutes and we're

 And again, truffle oil, white truffle with sunflower oil from truffs.com.

 The utility stitches of the Bernina are really good to know how to use them.

 I'm just going to go ahead and show you a lot of the ones that I go to for a variety

 You'll notice by the way it's pictured, it looks like it has a little forward, back,

 As you stitch, it's going to go ahead and take about five or six stitches forward, and

 then five or six stitches back, and then go ahead and sew all the way to the end of

 What I have not had to do is touch and hold my reverse button to get the locking stitches.

 Get to the end of your fabric, touch your reverse button one time, that's it, and then

 It's going to go back in the exact same holes, come forward, and stop for you.

 What you have is pre-programmed locking stitches at the beginning and end of your sequence.

 What's nice is when you end it, then it's ready to start again, and you don't have to

 If you want a shorter line of stitching, just touch it whenever you need it, and let it

 Anytime I've got my hands full of projects, that I'll usually do, and then I have exactly

 The next stitch we're going to use is going to be a triple straight stitch.

 It's pictured as a straight stitch, and I'm going to sew on the bias of some denim here.

 I'm folding it on the diagonal, and there's a reason, because it is actually going to

 This is going to go ahead and take two stitches forward, one stitch back.

 If you want it longer, you can make the stitch longer, make it a little longer there.

 It's going to look like you have taken the time to use top stitching thread.

 You notice how all the stitches go back in the exact same hole.

 First off, it does stretch, so this would be a great place on the back seat of a pair

 of pants in the crotch area, where you need to reinforce something, but you don't want

 to have it so you're just stitching three times and having stitching that can actually

 This stitch is stitched reinforced, and so when you stretch it out, it's not going to

 Any place that I'm going to need some extra reinforcement, like where my handles might

 come into a bag, I'll switch over to this stitch, sew the triple straight stitch right

 It just looks, too, like I've used thicker thread, and I have it.

 Thicker thread only comes in, like top stitching thread only comes in, oh, 20 colors or so,

 All you have to do is put the spool of color of your choice on and stitch it out.

 You'll notice if you look at your stitch number six, there's a picture of a zigzag next to

 Take your stitch width button, send it ... I'm going to go up to four here.

 If you want to use that decoratively, all you have to do is add width to get that particular

 Anytime you're sewing on some knit fabrics and you don't have a serger, this is a great

 This is a lightning bolt stitch because it's stitching kind of down and back, down and

 What's nice is when I'm done stitching, it will stretch as needed.

 Any fabric that you need to make sure that a straight stitch isn't going to pop apart,

 It's going to look like a straight stitch, but have the give that's needed.

 Go ahead and set this so it stitches on the edge of your fabric.

 This one is the one that actually has you go to stitch foot number two.

 As we go ahead and set that up, just kind of lower your presser foot on.

 Yes, you can put the thread underneath the foot into the back like you're used to.

 It just kind of slips into that little pin area and goes out there.

 Now with this stitch, what's going to happen on lighter weight fabric is that little pin

 is going to help you not get the fabric kind of pulled down or curled under as you stitch.

 Part of this stitch, you're going to notice, it's going to form a seam on the left side

 You notice I'm just running the raw edge of the fabric right along the edge of the

 It really is going to help secure those edges so they don't unravel any further.

 If you pull straight back, the last stitch is released off the pin.

 Another stitch that's similar to that is actually your very overlocked stitch, stitch number

 I'm going to go ahead and I've cut a little opening like a neckline.

 I'm going to take another piece of fabric and fold it in half, wrong sides together.

 Actually, let me flip this over so I've got the same sides all looking at me here.

 Take a few stitches, once again, guiding this stitch to go right off the edge.

 This time, I'm going to take the fabric that is the ribbing and gently hold it in front

 Also, I'm going to lengthen this one out just because this fabric is a little fluffier.

 Notice that I'm just kind of turning the fabric underneath to the foot as I go, holding the

 As you can see, it goes around the edge, forms a seam and also has the give that you're looking

 I'm going to show you how to copy data from your SD card straight to a disk with the iShare

 I have a Ureach card reader which can read various types of cards including my SD card.

 Then plug the card reader into the USB port on the iShare duplicator.

 You want to make sure that the blue light on the card reader is on.

 If I push the USB copy button I can see how much data is on my SD card.

 I'm going to insert two disks and I will have two backups of my data.

 The percent copied and how many megabytes of data has been copied will be displayed

 I just showed you how to copy data from your SD card straight to a disk.

 Alright, Juice Up Your Lifers, back again in the kitchen ready to cleanse your liver.

 Now I get a lot of emails all the time asking what type of juice is going to cleanse your

 This is really exciting for me because not only does it, if you cleanse your liver, basically

 It's about this big and it actually purifies every single thing in your body so the blood

 So in order to cleanse your liver, you want to cleanse your blood and there's nothing

 So we're going to grab the beet, we're going to juice that right away.

 Now when you first start off juicing, you want to make sure that you're not doing too

 I've had clients call me and they're like, Drew my tongue is numb.

 I just had a whole beet and they're just getting into it, you know?

 So you want to be careful and it stains so make sure you don't get your hands all wrapped

 Next up, carrots are great for purifying your overall system, high in vitamin A and

 One of my favorites, we're going to water it down a little bit as well.

 Cucumber, it's going to hydrate your cells, it's going to push the toxins out of your

 It's going to open them up, you're going to feel like just cleaner.

 You ever breathe in and you're just like, wow, that's from the watercress.

 Now remember, when we're juicing greens, immediately afterwards, we want to go with something hard

 Now most people will say, Drew, you tell us not to mix fruits and vegetables, right?

 One is an apple and the other one is a pear when you're detoxing your liver.

 I've been juicing for so long, I can tell if something's bitter or the way that it's

 So what we want to do is we want to alkalize it a little bit more.

 Let's make things interesting just because I know you like suspense.

 Another thing that I'll often add to a liver detox just to aid in the digestion and the

 You know if your gut is clean then your body is clean and you can't get a disease basically.

 It boosts your immunity and there's so many benefits to it as well.

 If you're going out drinking 15 times a day and doing all negative things that are bad

 for your body then obviously one glass of juice isn't going to change that.

 Somebody that not only puts good thoughts in their mind, their body, but also puts good

 I would definitely feed a million dollar racehorse this glass of juice and watch how fast that

 One thing we could do is we could add a little cayenne pepper to it as well to give a little

 There's so many recipes, all types of different tips and tricks that you are going to basically

 leap frog over the learning curve with and inject yourself into longevity, vitality and

 health not only for you but for everyone around you and in your life.

 They're gonna notice this increase in energy and vitality instantly.

 Hey everyone, Chef Jason Hill here, and I'm really excited because the good people at

 Old El Paso asked me to come up with a fun and easy taco recipe for game night.

 So check it out, they sent me two dinner kits, one with a soft taco shell and one with a

 Each box has a recipe to get you started, kind of as a base recipe, but we're going

 Tonight for my game night party, I'm going to prepare one of my all-time favorite taco

 And since I'm using lean shredded chicken, I'm going to add a little bit of canola oil

 After about a minute, I'm going to add a pound of shredded chicken.

 You can use leftover rotisserie chicken or shredded canned chicken.

 I had frozen chicken breast that I just boiled off and let cool the day before and then just

 So we're not really cooking this, we're just bringing this back up to temperature and just

 And then we're going to stir in the season packet that comes with the old El Paso dinner

 Cover it for about 3 to 4 minutes so it'll reduce and the flavors will concentrate.

 Alright, after about a minute or so, our canola oil should be hot.

 So let's get our beans in there because we're going to refry our refried beans.

 Of course, if you make yours from scratch, by all means do that.

 But this is a quick, easy way to doctor up those plain can beans.

 It's a 30 ounce can of beans and I'm adding about a third cup of half and half.

 This is just going to add flavor, a creamy texture to these beans.

 Your friends are going to think, man, they made these from scratch.

 And I'm going to cover and let these simmer for just a couple of minutes.

 Shredded cheese, diced avocado, shredded lettuce, white onion diced with cilantro, and some

 And it even comes, the kit, with their own taco sauce to make it easy.

 You can do that in an oven wrapped in foil at 350 degrees for 10 minutes.

 Or you can do what I'm going to do, cover in plastic and put in your microwave for 45

 Next I like to drizzle a little bit of spicy nacho cheese down the beans.

 Now we're going to grab a crispy tortilla and we're going to fold the soft tortilla

 I really like making tacos at my get-togethers because they're fun, they're easy, and you

 I'm Joann, and today I'll be doing an unboxing on this Cooler Master G550M 550W Power Supply,

 and it's also available in the 650W as well as the 750W variants.

 So this is a semi-modular design, I'll show you what that's all about when we get inside,

 and it also has support for Haswell, and it's 80 plus bronze certified, which means at 20%

 load you get 82% efficiency, 50% load 85% efficiency, and at 100% load 82% efficiency.

 You also get DC to DC converters for the minor rails, and you get a 5 year warranty, wowzahs!

 I don't see that very often, so every time I do I'm like, yes, this is a good power supply.

 And let's turn it on to the side, and here is a list of the protections available.

 So you get built in protection for overvoltage, undervoltage, overpower, and the like.

 Here's what you get in the box, and of course you get the power supply, which I'll go over

 in more detail in just a bit, but first let's take a look at some of its non-modular cables,

 means connected to the power supply, and these cables are sleeved and black for aesthetics

 And as to the connectors, you get a 20 plus 4 pin main connector, as well as two PCIe

 6 plus 2 pin connectors, and of course a 4 plus 4 pin CPU plug.

 Now let's go ahead and move on to the modular cables, that means you can use them if you

 So these are flat ribbon black cables, I love these because it's really stealth and it's

 And so you have one SATA cable with three SATA connectors, and an additional SATA cable

 with another three connectors, three SATA connectors of course, and last but not least

 you have a Molex cable with one, two, three Molex connectors and a floppy plug.

 And it's really interesting that they still make these and it would have been nice also

 And last but not least we have the documentation guide, as well as installation screws, and

 Here's a closer look at the power supply, it measures 150 millimeters or 5.9 inches

 by 140 millimeters or 5.5 inches and it is 86 millimeters or 3.3 inches tall I suppose.

 And it weighs in at 1.6 kilograms 3.5 pounds, quite hefty for this little box here.

 And as you can tell it's a mostly black design with a bit of white, I'm thinking this could

 Anyway, and the logo is attached in such a way that no matter how you install the power

 So here is the 120 millimeter double ball bearing fan with honeycomb ventilation and

 On this side you get ventilation holes as well as the power switch and the power port.

 Here are the connectors for plugging in your modular cables and I like that they've included

 And this is a single plus 12 volt roll design at 42 amps with a total of 550 watts max power.

 And this power supply claims to be able to handle a Titan card.

 That wraps it up for this video on the Cooler Master G550M 550 watt power supply.

 If you like what you saw and you want to see more like it, be sure to hit the like, comment

 Join Tech Lover Facebook fan page, join Tech Lover again on Twitter and join Tech Lover

 Also please don't forget to hit the donate button so you can help expand this channel

 One last thing, go to storeenvy.com where you can purchase my 8.5 x 11 inch autograph

 But like most people, I don't always have access to a grill or a smoker.

 Well, I'm going to show you how to make great smoked ribs anyways.

 You're going to need a cooler, Ziploc bags, ice, cooling racks, ribs, and I'm using a

 It's going to allow us to add smoke to our ribs without adding any heat.

 Alright, so this is what you start with, a regular rack of ribs.

 And it has this membrane to separate it from the chest cavity, but we need to fillet that

 off with a knife so that your rub and your smoke can penetrate the meat.

 I've already done one, and this is what it should look like when you get done.

 Alright, so now that you've got your membrane off, it's time to season your meat.

 You want to use a lot of the rub, and you want to massage it into the meat so you get

 And we're going to let these sit while we go work on our smoker.

 Alright, so for our smoker, we're going to use a nice, clean, dry cooler, and in that

 But to keep them separated for airflow, I have these racks and they have feet on them.

 And so we're basically just going to put our ribs on these racks.

 Because I live in Florida, I have to have something cold, so we're going to put ice

 in these Ziploc bags and just set these Ziploc bags down in the cooler and around the meat.

 Okay, to assemble our smoker, we're going to need to take two bags of ice and throw

 We're going to take our first rack of ribs and set it on top of the ice, not touching,

 Then take our final cookie rack, set it on top of that one, and throw three bags of ice

 So now that we've got our smoker built, we just need the smoke.

 And I'm going to use this neat little smoke generator called a smoke pistol because it's

 going to allow me to put this hose all the way to the bottom of the smoker and not add

 I'm going to let mine smoke for probably four hours, but you can smoke it for as long or

 Just make sure that your cooler is in a nice, shady place the entire time.

 All right, so it's been several hours, and these are about as smoky as I want them.

 It's time to take them out, put them in some tin foil, and take them into the kitchen to

 And what I really like about the smoke pistol is, as long as it's been, the smoke is still

 All right, so once you get your ribs inside out of the smoker, you want to put them in

 tin foil and wrap them up nice and tight to steam them while we bake them in the oven.

 So now we have our ribs wrapped in tin foil and our oven preheated to 350.

 So we're going to stick these on there for about an hour or until they are done to your

 They've reached an internal temperature of 170, but we need to put them in a pan and

 Now once they've cooled down, you can slice them up and serve them with your favorite

 But it doesn't really matter how you eat them, because the result is pretty much always the

 to actually, this is going to be one of those recipes where we're going to

 prepare it so that the consumers can see the functionalities, hear how easy it is

 and convenient it is using every everyday ingredients whether they're

 fresh produce or in this case we are going to be using canned tomatoes but of

 know by just looking in your pantry you've already got a myriad of recipe

 shopping, this is called out on your shopping list but just a reminder that

 with the salsa and the tortillas that you buy, the salsa should be a basic

 salsa and when I say that I mean that it shouldn't contain things like black

 ingredients that we're going to be using basically for this particular recipe is

 going to be your fresh tomatoes or canned tomatoes, green pepper, garlic, who

 you're not looking at a salsa that may have other ingredients that aren't in

 your collection of ingredients that you're putting in the food processor.

 really easy for consumers to sample because all you'll do is with your

 sample tray is set up your napkin and we do want to just sort of do one per

 customer because again while it is featuring the food, the demo and the

 inactivation is more so about engaging the consumer in a dialogue about the

 actual appliances but obviously a little bit of fun for them too.

 tortillas, these are actually really great for sampling because they actually

 contain the salsa and it's a little bit easier and neater and you don't have to

 worry about them dipping or double dipping in an actual bowl of salsa that

So I'll show you that once it's prepped but what we're going to do here

 is just going to make sure, okay I've already got it set up here.

 want to work in small batches because like I mentioned with the cabbage and

 carrot demo there with the coleslaw or just showing the chops or slices, you

 whipping, chopping, slicing when there's nobody around because even though that

 allows you to get some of the food work done, you want the actual customers to

 you want you can go back to your supplies and use some more for a further

 to put that in and you just kind of adjust it so that it's locked in tight

 smaller blade that fits right into the middle of the bowl there and what we'll

 I've done is peeled it and we're going to stick that right in the bowl there.

 just going to knock the remaining out so it's nice and clean there and I'm just

 gadget set that was provided, you've got this great KitchenAid can opener and

 using a ton of the juice so what you can do is you can just purchase the actual

 like a bruschetta topping by just switching up some of the ingredients and

 recipes are basic so that you can start the dialogue with the customers and

 basically highlight some of the things that they could go from there with these

 inspiring recipes so that the customers can see if they're already culinary

They can see sort of how they can take these basic recipes to the next

So I'm just putting some of my green, whoops, my green onion in there.

 And depending, you can tell your customers if they like a chunkier salsa,

 then I mean by all means keep it just down to a few pulses there.

 But if they want something that's going to be sort of a little bit smoother, not

 wanted to do something like in the summer really refreshing like a gazpacho.

 Now as I said, we won't be really sampling these there, but just for ease

 of convenience, I want to show you what the demo will look like once you've got

 where the salsa is already pre-made and ready to go, you can then just scoop a

 show your customers, look as a salsa it's wonderful, but if you keep whizzing it, it

 will then get more liquidy, more liquidy, and then you could serve it as either a

 different tips and tricks that I've given you so far and incorporate them in

 Hey so I just wanted to show you my hair six months after the last time I put

 concealer under my eyes to make my face look bright and just a little bit of lip gloss.

 So once I get most of my hair down, I kind of use my hands to loosen up my roots a little bit.

 Because even though my hair is straight, they can be really stubborn.

 I'm kind of like loosening the roots up a little bit before I comb even more.

I kind of like comb it so that it falls into a natural part if you will.

I'm just combing most of my hair over to one side and combing the rest of the hair on the other side.

 So I hold the top layer back and comb the bottom layer straight down.

 So I comb the bottom layer straight down and then I try to swoop the top back.

So I do that on both sides but the other side, because of the way it was wrapped, it kind of falls into a natural swoop so I don't really have to do too much to it.

I kind of position all the hairs the way I want them and just mess around with it until I get it the way I want it.

 I kind of messed that up so I re-swooped it and just play around with it.

 I can be very picky at times so often times I'll go back and comb and re-comb and re-comb until I get it the way I want it.

This angle does not really work very well for showing the length of my hair but it's all I can do at the moment.

I took one picture of my hair six months ago when I last put heat in it.

 I'm going to try to put a comparison shot at the end so you can see how much it grew.

 I do need to trim them but they don't look as bad as I thought they were going to look.

So that right there is my hair perfume and I love to put this on.

 I only use a little bit because A. it's potent so you don't need that much for it to smell good and B. it's water based so I don't want it to revert my hair.

 I am going to wash this door panel with my Optimum No Rinse that I recently bought.

 One with clean water and the other with Optimum No Rinse solution.

 I have already cleaned most of the car so I know this works well.

 I am just doing this for the recording so you guys can see what I did.

 I also have a pre-mixed O&R solution that I will use to pre-rinse the panel.

 So I actually decided rather than doing the door panel I will do my trunk hood because

 that is a lot dirtier and it also has better lighting conditions for the camera to see.

 So as you can see the door panel has a lot of water marks on it right now.

 Not sure how well the camera captures this but it has a lot of water marks.

 So the first thing I am going to do is I am going to use my O&R solution.

 I have mixed two ounces and thirty two ounces of water to create this mix.

 You can actually go low if you are using it just for pre-rinsing but I am going to

 So first thing I am going to do is obviously I am going to just pre-rinse the entire panel

 And just squeeze it to remove all the water so the solution can actually soak in when

 Just in straight lines actually to minimize the possibility of marring.

 And right away you can see actually the water marks are pretty much gone at this point.

 You can see that the sponge has picked up a little bit of color but not a lot.

 And it seems to lose it actually when you rinse it once in water.

 Now I am going to take my O&R solution and I am going to go over that panel just one

 And just very lightly, so this is actually a microfiber cloth, so very lightly, don't

 Don't worry about that because we will actually go back with second cloth once over it to

 As you can see most of the water spots are actually gone at this point.

 So that was my quick demonstration of Optimum No Rinse 2012 formula.

 Some people call it the V3 formula, some people call it the V4 formula.

 Be sure to check out my post in the future where I will be doing similar car detailing

 It took me one whole Sunday to make a book called Yellow Sock, Yellow Sock, What Do You

 After some hard work, I deserve a treat like a piece of the ultimate fudgy brownies.

 100 grams of butter, 200 grams of sugar, 2 eggs, 2 teaspoons of instant espresso and

 100 grams of chocolate, 50 grams of cocoa powder and 45 grams of flour.

 Bake in a preheated oven at 150 degrees Celsius for 35 to 40 minutes.

 Check the brownie if it is done or not, we don't want dry brownies.

 Cool in the pan for a while, then transfer onto a wire rack to let cool.

 To start off your pumpkin cake pops, you're going to need some cake.

 I'm using an 8x8 inch chocolate cake that I've let cook, let cool, and then crumbled

 I just use my hands to crumble it up, it crumbles up very easily.

 To this you're going to add some frosting, which is going to act like glue to glue all

 I'm using cream cheese commercial frosting, you could use whatever kind of frosting you

 want, homemade, store bought, you could use whatever flavour you want, and you could also

 An 8x8 inch cake will make approximately 12-18 cake pops, of course depending on what size

 Then blend the frosting and the cake together until you get the consistency that's something

 The trick to this is not to put too much frosting, too much frosting will make for

 something that's too moist and may not stand up to the dunking process.

 I'm using a cookie scoop so that I get uniformly sized cake pops, but you don't have to, you

 You can see all the different shapes there, it's because I made different kinds of cake

 Then dunk a sucker stick into the candy melting wafer orange and into the cake pop.

 The candy melting wafer will help adhere the sucker stick to the cake pop.

 Then refrigerate them for an hour at least or for 15 minutes or so in the freezer just

 The candy melting wafers I bought at our local bulk food store.

 If you find them too thick when you melt them, add a little bit of vegetable shortening,

 I suggest maybe a half a teaspoon to a quarter teaspoon at a time and stir it around.

 So once it's dunked in there I'm adding a little green candy for a stem, but you could

 use anything you can imagine to put in as a stem, a piece of gumdrop, whatever you'd

 Let the excess drip off and then to let them harden I'm placing them on a cardboard box

 If you don't mind that your cake pop has a little flat side on the back you can put them

 Then let the candy melting wafers harden either on the countertop or in the refrigerator which

 After that's done you can draw on whatever pumpkin faces you want using whatever colour

 And you could wrap these up in individual little plastic bags with a nice orange ribbon

 We're gonna take a look at the opening riff to the grains by ZZ Top

 Now this uses a little bit of hybrid picking at the very beginning and then it goes to

 Picking but it's it does everything on upbeats and there's a lot of muting involved.

 We're just gonna start here with a bar across the second fret on the D and the G string

 With your first finger and you're gonna use your middle and your ring finger

 To pick those two strings together and as soon as you do that, you can release the pressure in your first finger

 Okay, so that's gonna be the kind of the technique you do the very first time you hit it though hit it twice it then

 I'm just releasing the pressure so that doesn't sometimes you can bring your other fingers down to help mute it as well

 And then you're gonna play you can place your pinky at the fifth fret on the D string

 While still keeping this bar, so you still have this second fret here on the G string play

 Now we have the second fret here on the D. It's gonna be hell so you're still doing that bar open a again

 Then the open a again and those two strings again at this time.

 Slightly bend the pinky a little bit towards the floor so we have this

 All right now after the third time there he goes into doing basically going

 Five then you're gonna hit the open a back to this two middle strings with an upstroke

 So you're gonna hit three five those two middle strings open a and then back to the two middle strings

 I'm hitting all three of these strings now when I'm doing the upstroke and you really got to kill the strings

 Now when the distortion kicks in it's pretty much the same riff you just really going to pull out

 Right, so it's got a little lot of upbeat stuff a lot of quick muting to really get that snappiness in the rhythm

 And at the very beginning you've got that little bit of hybrid picking and if you've never done hybrid picking it might be kind

 With that little bend they have to do with your pinky while keeping the other rest of the chord form

 I'll show you a couple of ideas about cutting gears out of plexiglass.

 I used Matthias's gear template generator to make the templates for these.

 You want to use a material that has a paper backing so that you can glue your pattern

 Often times, instead of cutting the plexiglass, the saw blade will melt it and it will re-form

 You can generally tell that your saw blade is melting the plastic immediately when you

 I'm going to make a cut with this fine blade to demonstrate how the blade can melt the

 And that piece has welded itself back together behind the blade.

 The best blades I have for cutting plexiglass are the Polar No.

 You will not end up with a polished surface, but it will be very smooth.

 When we cut the plexiglass you'll see free-flowing chips coming off the top.

 One thing you may find the hard way is that trying to cut a piece of this plexiglass without

 The adhesive that's on the backing sheet actually helps lubricate the blade.

 Or you can put some packing tape on here and it'll make cutting it a lot easier as well.

 When I'm cutting these out, I'm aiming for the saw blade right down the center of the line.

 Before I remove the backing sheet, I'm going to go in and file the corner of these teeth

 Others, it seems like this has been in a warehouse for a long time, it's been hot, that material

 I soak it in kerosene or mineral spirits, then it comes off easily.

 Once the backing sheet is removed, I'm going to go in and file the corners of the teeth.

 Once the backing sheet is removed, you can see these gears are quite attractive.

Today's makeup that I'm going to show you how to do is Anne Hathaway.

 Firstly I'm going to make the skin even and I'm going to pop some foundation.

 Pop a small amount onto the back of your hand, just a pea size.

 And then I'm going to take a Real Techniques buffing brush and work that into the skin.

 I'm then going to add a little bit of concealer under the eyes and I've got Bourjois Healthy Mix Concealer.

 And then I'm going to take a Real Techniques Deluxe Crease Brush and just work that under the eyes.

 I'm going to use my ring finger just to push that over the eye.

 And this is going to add some coverage but it's also going to work as a base to stop the makeup creasing.

 Then I'm going to take MAC Smolder Eye Pencil and I'm going to run that inside the eye.

 I'm also going to close the eye so it goes on the top waterline.

 Then I'm going to take a MAC 266 and just work a little bit of the smolder off of the pencil.

 Then add some mascara and I've got Revlon Grow Lushes Plumping Mascara.

 Now Anne's brows are much darker than mine so I'm going to use Brun Eye Shadow from MAC and a 266 brush.

 Her brows are also quite straight as well so I'm just not completely following the shape of mine.

 Now my brows aren't actually the same shape anyway so this one's going to be much easier to do because it runs a lot straighter.

 I'm then going to use a small amount of Bourjois Mineral Powder to set the makeup in place.

 I'm just going to pop a small amount of that just if I smile through the cheekbones.

 Through the apple of the cheek and then slightly pulling upwards.

 This is a brilliant product as well because it stays put so it's going to last all evening.

 And then over the top of that I'm going to use Avon Extra Lasting Lipstick and this one is in Vintage Pink.

 Alright y'all, this is the beginner tutorial for our burpees all the way workout.

 There's five different burpees and I'm going to show you how to modify the different kinds

 of burpees first and then I'll show you the five other exercises we are doing in the workout.

 You put your hands down, they're about shoulder width apart, you hop your legs back, you hop

 And if you need to modify it even more, take the jump out of it and just extend up on your

 Right, the next one is the same exact motion except you add a push up into the mix.

 If you can do the regular burpee but have a hard time with the push up, this is how

 So, step out, go to your knees, push up, up off your knees and jump or you can even walk

 So, you're either going to hop it out or you're going to walk it out.

 Alright, I'm going to hop it out here, do a push up, pop up and then you're going to

 Walk out, go to your knees, push up, walk up, here, one, two, three.

 Okay, next we have the competition burpee which is where you have your belly to the

 So your hands go down, you lay down on the mat, come up and jump.

 A surfer jump is basically a squat jump with a 180 degree turn.

 Modified, you can choose to hop it, you can use any other modification that I showed you.

 You're basically going to do a pivot turn instead of a surfer jump if the surfer jump

 So, you choose whichever kind of burpee you wanted to do at the beginning.

 So, that's how you modify the five different burpees in the workout.

 Alright, the first two exercises in our workout are four point lunges.

 You go to a front lunge, knee up is most advanced or tap your toe down for beginners.

 Beginners, you might not go as deep and you're tapping your foot in between.

 Alright, instead of trying to go for a 90 degree angle with your knee, you might not

 Alright, and then of course the next time around you would do it on your other leg.

 Next we had a crab dip with a body or torso twist and extension.

 So you're in your crab position, fingers are facing forward, you're on your, just your

 You're going to pulse, one, two, three, push your hips up, lift your arm and twist your

 Okay, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten.

 So you're going to crunch up, back, up and up, V through, back.

 But if you can't, beginners, you might just be working on just your shoulders off.

 Always leave 3 to 5 inches of tape at either end to allow starting of the filament at either

 Once the tape has been placed down, run your fingers over the tape making sure it is down

 We recommend putting the tape down in sections, just as you would prime your vehicle one section

 If you don't like the line you created, simply lift the tape and reseal.

 If not, your trim may not be where you wanted it and the trim may appear jagged.

 Always pull the filament at roughly a 30 to 45 degree angle, directly in line with the

 Pulling to either side can cause the filament to pull out from under the tape and you can

 Practice removing the tape with the practice line supplied in the kit.

 Once the vinyl has been trimmed with the KnifeLess Tech Systems tape, simply heat the

 We always recommend to use our tape whenever you need to trim directly on metal, plastic,

 rubber, or any other material that can be damaged by a knife blade.

 If you're a do-it-yourselfer and have just an average set of tools, there's really nothing

 One other thing, you can always run into complications, so if you do, check with your local shop.

 If you're doing this at home and don't have a lift where you can raise it up, or if you

 don't have an impact gun, this bolt right here has to come off.

 You've got the wheel down on the ground, the weight, so that you can break it loose this

 If you do happen to have an impact wrench, then you can get with an impact.

 You have to drive the axle shaft in, so just take a punch and drive it in with your hammer.

 What we did here to save a step is we took the caliper and the bracket off all in one step.

 Sometimes they slide right off, and sometimes they're just kind of stuck on there.

 In order to get to the bolts in the back, you may have to push that axle in.

 In order to get to that top bolt on the bearing, you're going to have to take the lower control arm bolt off.

 In order to get this lower control arm off, you're going to have to pry down on this lower control arm.

 We have other tools for this, but you can just take a piece of chain.

 Okay, you've got to break this joint loose, so use a pickle fork.

 Now you can use your pry bar and the chain and pry it down to get that lower control arm off.

 You may take a little piece of sandpaper and clean that out if it sticks a little bit where it slides in there.

 It's always best to start them by hand before you start putting wrenches on them.

 If that lower control arm is in the way, you can put your pry bar in there and hold it down.

 You can get that axle shaft to slip all the way through the front.

 Be sure and put that washer back in there and then your axle nut.

 That will help pull that axle up where we can get that lower ball joint in easier.

 Now at this point, if the rotors and brake pads are bad, this is the time to change them.

 Again, since they both had to come off, we took the bracket and the caliper off all in one step.

 You can do it where you take just the caliper, but then you'll have to take the bracket off too.

 Then again, if you're doing this where you need to lower it down on the ground,

 put it down on the ground where the weight of the vehicle is going to hold that wheel still.

 And then you can use your breaker bar and tighten that axle nut as tight as you can get it.

I'm going to be using two items from the Max and My Precious collection.

 I'm going to be using Golden Gaze eyeshadow, Mineralize eyeshadow, and Gem of Roses lipstick.

 Next for my highlight, I'm going in my Wet n Wild Vanity Palette and I'm taking light yellow shimmery color right here.

 Next I'm taking my Sonia Kashuk blending brush and I'm going in this soft brown color right here.

 Next I'm taking a pointier brush and I'm going in my Coastal Scents 78 eyeshadow palette.

 Alright, next I'm taking my Fix Plus from MAC and I'm taking this big eyeshadow brush or medium size I guess and I'm spraying it twice with Fix Plus.

 And I'm going in my Golden Gaze eyeshadow and this is going on my lid.

 Next I'm going back in Golden Gaze but this time I'm using it dry and I'm taking my smudge brush.

 Now I'm going back in that highlight color from Wet n Wild and this is going to go in my inner corner and yeah.

 So for blush I'm going to use my MAC Mineralize Skin Finish Blush in Petticoat.

 Alright guys, for my lips I'm using Gem of Roses from the Semi Precious Collection.

 Hey everyone, today I want to do a review on a product that I just love.

 This is my first time making food with these last night and it's called the ZipFlock

 Last night I cooked three chicken breast and it only took me six minutes to make.

 And it was really good and juicy and it's really a healthy way to eat is when you steam

 I actually seen one of the people that I'm subscribed to, one of the ladies that I have

 here on YouTube is cooking and crafting and she had made a western omelet in the zip and

 steam and it got me wanting to buy these and try it for myself.

 I haven't made the omelet yet but I'm actually going to be doing that on Sunday morning for

 These are the bags that you will get in the pack and it tells you on here what you can

 You can make all kinds of vegetables, you can cook shrimp, fish, chicken, hot dogs,

 And this is a great invention so thank you ZipFlock for making these because now it's

 And this is the omelet that cooking and crafting had made on the video that I told you that

 You can make mashed potatoes, you can make cod, there's desserts on here, any kind of

 You can make stuffed peppers in it and there's a lot of really good cooking tips on here

 Even though it was my first time last night I'll probably make chicken in this all the

 And here is a picture once again for those of you who don't know what they look like.

 Give them a chance because you will be just about surprised at how good they cook just

 I hope you subscribe and like and me as a friend and have a great day.

 This week and next I have midterm so I was like really stumped on what to do today so

 I thought I'd make this quick little video that I think will be helpful to just about

 So what I'm going to do today is show you a little DIY on how to make your hair grow

 So this is going to be like a cheap, inexpensive, all natural hair mask and then I'm also going

 to give you some of my best tips and tricks to growing your hair longer because my hair

 I bet about 99% of you have all these ingredients at home and as a college student I'm always

 struggling to find a recipe that I have all the ingredients for.

 All you want to do is go ahead and crack the two eggs into a bowl and start to whip them

 So you want to whip them really really good and then what you're going to do is add two

 And so what this hair mask is really going to help is the eggs have so much protein,

 good fatty acids and vitamins and that's all going to be awesome for your hair.

 Plus with the olive oil it's going to make your hair softer, shinier and it's not only

 going to help it make it grow longer but if you have damaged hair or colored hair like

 So you want to go ahead and massage that mixture into your hair really well.

 Go from your roots all the way to your end and then go ahead and let it sit for about

 You could wrap your hair up in a top knot, you could stick like a shower cap over it

 or even like a Walmart bag or something like that if you don't have a shower cap.

 Anything will work just try not to get it on your clothes it can be a little bit messy.

 After you've left it on for about 15 to 20 minutes you could go ahead and rinse it out.

 You can shampoo after if you want to but you definitely don't have to you can just rinse

 So now that you have a hair mask that's definitely going to help you out but you also want to

 try to implement some healthy habits for your hair in the process if you're really trying

 So your diet does play a big role in how your hair reacts of course just like your whole

 So drinking lots of water is of course going to help this is one of the costless kind of

 remedies for just about everything is water it's so great and then you also want to have

 The healthier you eat the more fruits and vegetables and proteins the better your hair

 You also want to pay attention to how you're actually treating your hair.

 If you're pulling it up in tight ponytails every single day it's really going to wear

 on your hair especially if you wear your ponytails in the same position everywhere that hair

 What I like to do is I wash my hair about every other day every two days.

 That's going to be best because then the natural oils from your hair are really going to get

 If you wash your hair every day you're going to be stripping all of those oils so you want

 to try to keep it as long as possible and use some dry shampoo in between until your

 hair gets used to it because your hair will get used to it and if you think your hair

 looks super oily after about a week or two it'll stop looking so oily.

 Of course I do use heat on my hair but I do use a heat protectant so that is really important

 but also like I said I wash my hair every other day or so so if I straighten my hair

 I'll just leave it how it was today, brush it out and then I'm good to go.

 I know a lot of people say you should get your hair cut about every six to eight weeks

 Personally I don't cut my hair very often at all, maybe like twice a year, a little

 bit more if I'm just getting a tiny, tiny trim but basically trimming your ends are

 What it is going to affect is if your ends are very dead and dry then they'll start breaking

 off on the ends so if your ends look okay I would say you don't have to get your hair

 cut that often but if your ends are dead you do want to keep them trimmed.

 So I did a video before where I talked about the hairfinity vitamins that I use and those

 It has biotin in it and it also has other vitamins that help your hair grow faster,

 You could also just take biotin by itself or just everyday vitamins but vitamins in

 general are definitely going to help your hair be healthy, strong and give it shine

 Alright guys so I hope you enjoyed this little DIY and tip video.

 Let me know what your favorite tip is for growing out your hair in the comments down

 Also if you missed any of my last videos you can go ahead and click them over here.

 I had a bunch of fun stuff going on so make sure to check that out and if you want to

 stay up to date with all my new videos just go ahead and click the subscribe button.

 Sometimes there's an extra video throughout the week but that way you'll keep up to date

 Don't forget to send me before and after pictures if you do try this out.

 I would love love love love to see and I'll see you guys next time.

 Oh, but the good news is Louie, apparently January uh, something, I've already drawn

 it, January 6th or January 13th or somewhere around there, Upper Deck is going to do something

 So just hang on to this Redemption because it's obviously gonna be expired and uh, they're

 They said they were anyway, so we'll see what they're gonna do.

 Maybe if they got the card, they're gonna redeem it and if not, they're gonna replace

 Maybe if they got that card in January, they'll redeem it for you and if not, maybe they'll

 Hi, I'm H. Joseph Ehrman from Elixir in San Francisco and I'm here at Riffle Northwest

 in Portland, Oregon to talk to you about using honey in cocktails.

 As a sweetener, it adds different characteristics to your drink and then it can change the texture

 Honey comes in a lot of different varietals from orange blossom honey to sage honey and

 That gives it natural inherent flavors but you can also use it as a base for making syrups

 In this case, for the cocktail I'm going to make for you today, the peppermelon, I use

 clover honey as my base and I cook some black peppercorn into it.

 Taking some nice peppercorns like this and cooking them up in a pan in order to release

 the essential oils, I mix about a tablespoon of those peppercorns to a cup of water to

 make a black pepper tea and then I'll mix that equal parts by volume with the honey

 So to make it a real summery drink, I use watermelon as the produce in my cocktail and

 to make watermelon juice, I'm going to take some nice fresh watermelon cubes.

 I'm going to muddle those up until I have them really nicely juiced and then I'm going

 to cut up fresh lemons, get some nice fresh juice for my cocktail and I'm going to get

 about a half ounce of lemon juice which is a little less than one half of a standard

 Then I'm going to add an ounce of my watermelon juice, three quarter ounce of my black pepper

 honey syrup and I'm going to brighten the whole thing up with an ounce and a half of

 Once I have all my liquid ingredients together in a glass, I'm going to ice that up and give

 Then I'm going to strain this up into a cocktail coupe, double strain it to remove all my ice

 shards and then to garnish this, I'm going to cut a slice of watermelon into a cube.

 I'm going to take that cube, dust it on one side with some crushed black pepper, cut a

 little slit into the bottom of that so I can get it onto my glass and then slide that gently

 This cocktail along with a number of other great recipes is available in the Sweet Stirrings

 To learn more about using honey in cocktails and to get your copy of the Sweet Stirrings

 Again, my name is H. Joseph Ehrman from Elixir in San Francisco.

Some salt, some rice, a cup of rice, a pot, some water, and the secret

Since I'm making one cup of rice, you're going to need two cups and a

The water I've already added to my pan, so now the next step would be to turn on your

Now that your water is ready to simmer, all you're going to do is add the secret ingredient,

 which is the butter, and we're going to add just one tablespoon.

 to your water, and the reason why I add this butter to the water is so that the rice doesn't stick.

 So now that the water is simmering, you're going to add a tiny itsy bitsy of salt,

 You add the salt, and you want to mix it a little just to make sure that it's dissolved.

Once you lower the heat, you put the lid on, and you just let it

 It's just kind of hot, so you can see that the rice, it's nice and ready in here in the middle.

 show you a little trick to make it look all fancy when you serve it.

 where you're going to be serving your food, and a small bowl like this one.

 Many a player has hit a bad shot that find themselves in this situation where

 they now are in the trees and they have to hit a remarkable shot to get out of

The interesting thing is a bad shot got them here but in having to hit

 a golf ball and keep the club underneath trouble they went and hit a good shot.

 The idea here is I can't come up at this ball or I'm gonna hit this wood so I'm

 gonna have to find a way to hit this ball without hitting the wood and

 If you don't know already and you probably do if you've listened to me at

 all hitting down at the golf ball is crucial to a good golf shot.

 understanding that and being able to do it sometimes are two different things.

 What we've got here is the DNT down and through and the idea of this little

 gonna set up to the ball as we normally would that ball is directly underneath

 Through the shot and then my club will pass under the DNT smoothly every time.

 This is adjustable I can adjust it depending on the club that I'm hitting.

 The idea is stay down hit through don't hit the DNT and you're gonna hit good

 Whether you're making an apple pie, cherry pie, or even a chicken pot pie, this Breville

 pie maker lets you make four servings of pie in a fraction of the time that it would take

 The exterior is brush stainless and the interior has an easy release non-stick surface.

 The pie maker comes with a dough cutter and a dough tamper that will show you how to use

 I'm using pie dough for the bottoms of my pie and puff pastry dough for the tops and

 Using my dough cutter, I'm going to cut out four of the large rounds of my pie dough.

 You want to make sure your dough is nice and cold before putting them into the machine.

 Now flipping over the cutter, I'm going to use the smaller circle to cut out our tops.

 I've preheated my pie maker and I'm going to begin by putting in the bottom crust.

 Just lay it lightly on top of the mold here and then our tamper will press down the dough

 Just a gentle press to make it fill the indent of the pie mold.

 You want to be sure that whatever filling you're using, whether it's a fruit or a savory

 I'm just going to gently place my puff pastry dough right on top.

 You're going to have so much fun experimenting with different flavors and different fillings.

 Try making a shepherd's pie or any kind of fruit that you like.

 In about eight to ten minutes, we'll have four servings of cherry pie.

 With my Breville pie maker, it was so easy to make four servings of pie in a matter of

 We're going to show you how to install the Scotty 244 Rectangle Flush Mount.

 The installation tools required is going to be your drill with 1 3 8 inch drill bit, a

 The first step in installation of the base is to find where you want to put it.

 This one is going to be used for a Scotty Trapeze so we're going to put it fairly close

 Once you have your place found you want to simply lay the mount upside down and mark

 Once your four holes are marked from the mounting holes you're going to want to find the center

 Using the straight edge you can align the two holes diagonal from each other and mark

 Once you've found your center you want to use your 1 3 8 inch spade bit and just drill

 Once your 1 3 8 inch hole is drilled you want to take your base and just make sure all your

 original marks for your bolt holes are going to be still aligned.

 Once you're sure they're still aligned you'll need a 13 64 inch or 3 16 inch drill bit and

 Once all your mounting holes are drilled you'll just want to take some marine sealant, we

 use marine goop, put a small bead around the outside edge of your post and around each

 Insert your Scotty mount into the hole and you'll take your hardware.

 You can use bolts, in this case we're going to use pop rivets, you'll just insert those

 When using a rivet gun you're going to fasten your mount to the boat.

 When you mount it you want to make sure that you can reach Scotty from the inboard side

 of the boat and also there is an arrow that's going to point inboard.

 So the excess marine goop or sealant you used, once it's dry that will peel right off.

 Other than that your installation is finished, you can use any of the Scotty products in

 To insert Scotty products into the mount you're going to face it inboard, it will pop right

 Okay, everybody, what I have in front of me is this is the lid from a Mitsubishi IMEVE

 So I'd already removed the battery pack from the car, and this is just the top half of

 And somebody asked me, hey, I heard this thing is air cooled, can you show me more about

 So for starters, what you're looking at is the front of the car, and the far end is the

 Right here is under the driver's seat, the left seat on American Roads.

 This is a big old hole that goes from the car into the battery pack, and that's actually

 So this little rubber boot fits right up into that, and that goes up to the HVAC system

 But what's maybe more interesting is on the back here, we've got a big piece that comes

 It's got a power cord on it, and down here you see sort of a real basic air filter.

 So let's flip this battery case lid over and take a look at it from the inside.

 Okay, just flipped it upside down, so you can see here our big air hole on the front,

 and in the back, it's kind of a cover that goes in place and is held in by a number of

 So what I'm going to do is take out all these bolts that hold this in, and there should

 Now what I've just done here is there were just three bolts holding the motor in, so

 If we look down here, it's got some information on the back saying that it is indeed a 12

 I just tried jumpering from a 12 volt battery to the 12 volt fan.

 If you look, I don't know if you're going to be able to see this or not, you can actually

 And of course, anything with a circuit board got totally wrecked by the sea water when

 So the way this cooling system would work is it would suck in air from up there from

 the HVAC system on the car through the battery pack around all the cells, get sucked up in

 And that's why that's kind of a wimpy air filter looking thing on there is because that's

 That's a basic overview of the air cooling system on the Mitsubishi i-MiEV battery pack.

I'm Tinela and today grandma Emma and I are going to make a pineapple coconut tart.

Place 100 grams of soft butter, 100 grams of powdered sugar and a pinch of salt in a mixing bowl.

 Add 200 grams of sifted flour and mix until the dough forms a mass.

 Dust the work surface with flour and roll the dough into a 27 cm in diameter round.

 Arrange 250 grams of canned or sliced fresh pineapple over the dough and place in the fridge until the coconut filling is ready.

 To make the coconut filling, place 100 grams of soft butter and 200 grams of sugar in a bowl of a mixer.

Gradually add 2 eggs, scraping down the sides of the bowl once or twice.

 Add 200 grams of unsweetened shredded coconut and mix until combined.

 Bake the pineapple coconut tart at 180 degrees Celsius for 15 minutes until golden brown.

 Once cooled, transfer to a serving plate, dust with powdered sugar and serve with tea or coffee.

Visit our website videoculinary.com for a 5-ingredient chocolate coconut cake, coconut macaroons and for other great recipes.

 Hi, my name is Kim McCusker, author of Four Ingredients Kids and I have a special helper

 And he goes to school with Hamilton, they're both in grade one.

 They've just finished grade one, going into big boy grade two next year.

 But I thought in honour of our fantastic counterparts across the Tasman in New Zealand, we would

 And you know what, very high in protein and essential vitamins and minerals.

 So when I fill it up, can you pour it down into the little measuring jug?

 So what we've done Dylan and I, we've got three tablespoons of beautiful, can you pour

 So this is a really nice way to encourage your children or start your children on spicier

 Now could you take your, see the little basting, oh there you go darling.

 And while Dylan mixes those together, I'm just going to lift up our beautiful lean healthy

 About four minutes, but after two, Dylan and I are going to start to baste them because

 And then we're going to put the lid back down and let it cook for a couple of minutes and

 I think it's easier for kids to like things when they try to cook it.

 I love using a hot barbecue, direct heat on a barbecue or a grill because it results in

 Now if you've enjoyed this recipe make sure you join us at facebook.com four ingredients

 page where every day we share quick easy and delicious recipes just like this where kids

 from New Zealand, from Australia and all around the world can make it.

 my paradiddle solo demonstration video and also the other videos explaining

 exercise putting an accent on the first and on the fifth note of the paradiddle.

 Now let's move that second accent we had done on our left hand on the fifth

 if you grab some sheets and you just put on lots of paradiddles and that's what I did back then

 when I practiced that stuff and then you just put accents on top of those paradiddles randomly

 Hey everybody, this is Melinda with Liberty Jane and today I'm going to be showing you

 You'll need a paper mache egg, an exacto knife, little figurines, some modeling clay, and

 Be sure to press the egg down into the clay so there's a nice little divot for the bottom

 And then let the clay harden following the directions on the package.

 Draw off the size of opening you want on your egg and then cut along the line you drew with

 Exacto knives, especially with roly poly paper mache eggs, can be very dangerous.

 I just made this one out of modeling clay so he needs a little spiffing up.

 Make a nice base for your figurines by gluing scraps of felt into the bottom of your egg.

 Well, sort of an invented name really, but we are working with a whiskey as opposed to

 So the first thing we need, because obviously it's a beer-y cocktail we're making, is we

 So this is a Hokusyu single malt from Hokusyu Distillery and this is the Distiller's Reserve.

 It's basically a blend of young and aged peated malts from Japan.

 So not really overpowering, but because of the smokiness of the beer, we're throwing

 So this, what we do here, so we're filming today at Birdcage, a draft house.

 We on a Sunday, we mix up all of our tomato juice in the morning and we mix...

 So yeah, we mix up horseradish, Tabasco Leoparens, a dash of Malbec tomato juice.

 Yeah, and actually, yeah, one more thing is a bit of Passata as well, just to thicken

 So squeeze about half a lime, which will give you about 20 mil or so, I imagine.

 And you probably want to double the amount of liquid with your mixed up special juice.

 And then always with the Bloody Mary guys or a bloody mat, always roll the drink.

 If you shake it, it's going to thin out too much, going to over dilute, but also you're

 going to smash apart the smarted by this and it's actually going to bitter out the drink

 So if you're a little bit worse for wear, the shake, that's not going to make you feel

 A bucket of ice water, loads of salt and then crappy beer cans in it.

 Yeah, so that's the Bloody Mac, Hakushu, Beaver Town Smog Rocket, special juice, salt, pepper

 and we're serving that with some wasabi nuts as well for a little bit of a spicy kick on

 It's like you get a whole, you get loads of Worcester sauce but it's smoothed out, nice

 and sweet and then there's a little bit of smoke at the end and the heat of the whiskey,

 Like I said, it's a blend of their peated and non-peated stock.

 If you're looking to eat something really healthy then you can do a lot worse than trying

 I'm just adding it to 600 millilitres of boiling chicken stock.

 Give it a stir and then you're just going to leave it to bubble down.

 Once you've done the quinoa you can just add to it whatever you want.

 So I've got some courgettes, some peppers and I'm going to throw in some chicken as

 And then, come check this out, just chop it into chunks like that.

 Next thing I'm going to do is just put a little bit of oil, some olive oil, into a big frying

 I'm going to fry them off in batches so they don't stew in the pan but I actually just

 quickly fry them and they keep a little bit of that crunch and keep their healthiness

 The thing about the quinoa, to know that it's cooked is pretty simple.

 Basically, I don't know if you can see this, but the grains, let me just put a bit on my

 All you need to do is just get a cloth and just put it over your pan like so.

 I'm just going to leave that so that the quinoa soaks up the rest of the chicken stock whilst

 Right, now the thing I said about this dish which is great is that you can essentially

 I'm going to put in some grilled chicken and I'm going to take the skins off just to

 But if you want to leave them on for a bit of extra flavour, you can.

 And then, to be honest, I don't really need to leave this quinoa for too long because

 it's soaked up the water already so you're pretty much ready to serve it now.

 And all I'm going to do is just literally stick it into this bowl like so.

 And then I'm going to put in my red peppers, green peppers, the courgettes.

 And the thing you'll notice is I haven't actually seasoned it because the chicken stock was

 quite salty anyway so it didn't really need to be seasoned that much.

 And then all I'm going to do is literally just mix it all together like that.

 Whatever else you can find in your cupboards you can stick into it.

 I'm going to get some coriander which I'm just going to open up.

 Adds a bit of texture, adds a little bit of colour, adds a bit of flavour as well.

 Quinoa with chicken, with courgettes, red peppers, green peppers.

 It's the cultures that have crossed time and oceans to come face to face with one another,

 to swap wisdom and exchange history, to carry heritage in our veins, break chains and change

Timeless Beauty are the songs that are collected over time through cultures and

It's the mothers who gently swap colors across their daughters' faces with each

 Drawing inspiration from cultures past and my own heritage, here's how to create my timeless beauty look.

 which will act like a setting powder and bring back some warmth to my skin.

 For my eyes, I'm skipping ahead a few centuries and pulling inspiration from the 60s,

Opt for a nude color eyeshadow like NYX's Leather and Lace and apply this all over your lids.

 Using NYX's Skinny Dip eyeshadow, I'm blending this into the outer V corner and feathering it

This next step is optional if you want to go for a more dramatic twist,

 jumbo pencil right on the center of my lids and blending it out.

 Grabbing my NYX Avant Pop palette in Nouveau Chic, I'm taking this light brown color and

 using this shimmery dark green eyeshadow to create a cut crease using a small brush.

 Going back in with Skinny Dip, blend out the edges with green eyeshadow so there isn't any harsh lines,

 and then blend those edges out with Leather and Lace while highlighting your brow bone area.

 Along your lower lash line, blend in Skinny Dip and tight line with the green eyeshadow.

 In vintage fashion, it's time to wing it out using NYX's Epic Black Mousse Liner.

 To get that twiggy doe-eyed effect, apply a nude liner to your bottom waterline.

 Going back in with my concealer and setting powder, I'm going to clean up and conceal under my eyes.

I'm using Vixen by NYX and applying a coat of mascara to blend my

I'm also applying it to my lower lashes to get that full doe-eye effect.

 For my brows, I'm quickly filling and shaping them up using my NYX's Micro Pencil and Wonder Pencil.

 Using NYX's Wonder Stick, I'm going to lightly highlight and contour my nose for more definition.

 For a soft highlight, I'm using NYX's Baked Eyeshadow Supernova.

 Next, I'm contouring with NYX's Matte Bronzer to bring shape to my cheeks.

 For my lips, I'm mixing NYX's Matte Lip Cream in Can with their Bewitching Simply Vette Lip Cream.

 timeless beauty look to the next level by drawing inspiration from traditional Indian bridal makeup,

 which is typically red and white, but I decided to go with a gold and white twist.

 This look is a celebration of my own NYX heritage and the diverse cultures that have inspired beauty

I worked really hard on this video for you guys and I hope you enjoyed it.

 please go to nyxfaceawards.com to vote for me up to three times a day or you can click for the

Most of all, remember that you're absolutely beautiful and I love you guys so much and until

 I've been playing around a lot lately with shrimp, and I've been peeling and deveining

 An adult on me, a couple people had asked me when they were volunteering to help me

 Now you can always get shrimp that's already been peeled and deveined and cooked off for

 They're going to charge you for the work that they've put into doing their deveining and

 And the second is, if you go to cook something, you've lost all opportunity to control it,

 the flavors and the textures that go into it from the beginning.

 So if you are peeling and deveining shrimp, what you want to do is see over here, I'm

 I'm leaving the tails on my shrimp, but I'm keeping all these shells, and these are going

 So what I'm going to do, and I'll show you how to do it because it's so simple and it's

 the most wonderful thing, is we're going to make a shrimp stock to use in a shrimp

 And the flavor that comes out of that is unlike anything in this world.

 And that is one of those top secret restaurant things that nobody tells you, is how to get

 All right, so all I have here, I think these were what, 21 or 25s?

 It doesn't really matter because they're all the same size, and that means they're all

 You're going to come in here, and he's got his little legs up here.

 All you're doing is you're going to pop a nail under, get a thumb under there, come

 off and a little strip around his tail, and then it's like pulling a little jacket off.

 Hold him like this, and right up here next to his tail, I like to leave the tail on when

 Come off in a little circle right up next to the tail, and then the rest of his shell

 If you're doing your own shrimp, it is really important that you devein them.

 So I'm going to step over here to the sink, and I'm going to show you the easiest way,

 not only to devein it, but we're going to take his little GI tract out as well from

 the back, and I'll show you how to butterfly them if you ever want to stuff some.

 All right, so I'm taking this one, and I give myself just a tiny trickle of cold water to

 All right, so hold him open just like this, and make sure that you've got a really sharp

 You know, in the kitchen, a sharp knife is your number one best friend and tool.

 So all you do is insert the tip just a little bit, and you follow that line right down there.

 I happen to be a little bit weird about it, and I like it to come out this way.

 But what you end up with is this tiny butterfly here, and a tiny butterfly on the back, and

 So if we're going to do one . . . say you have a big shrimp, and you want to do, I don't

 know, you can do a crab stuffed shrimp if you really want to get really decadent.

 So what you want to do is, I'm going to take this one, and I'm going to put it in the water

 I'm going to dip it in the water, and I'm going to dip it in the water.

 And then I'm going to put it in the water, and I'm going to dip it in the water, and

 You don't want to dip it in the water, and you don't want to dip it in the water.

 Of course, it wouldn't work quite as well with these little guys.

 After you've deveined it, you would simply reinsert your knife, come as far down through

 there as you can, but you don't want to let it come through this part of the shrimp.

 Now if you do it this way, you see how I've come almost to the front of the shrimp, and

 doing the pork chops, the stuffing the pork chops, same principle.

 So what you would do then is lay your stuffing here, and when he cooks, he's going to curl

 All right, well I'm going to come back over here and I'm going to peel and devein the

 Don't pay the extra money to have somebody else do it for you when it is this easy to

 And you get the bonus of all the flavor that you can get out of those shrimp shells to

Today I am going to show you how to make the laptop cooling pad using

 2 pieces of 8 inches, 3 pieces of 3.5 inches and 2 pieces of 1.5 inch.

 you need 6 elbows and 3 3-way connectors and a 5 watts CPU cooling fan and an unused USB

I trimmed this edge to fit into this PVC pipe like this and I drilled

And I will connect this cooling fan to this PVC pipe with a bolt and nut.

 Alright you guys, I have a celebrity makeup tutorial for you and I know I hardly ever do them because they're usually boring.

 But I saw Kelly Osbourne's makeup at the Emmys and I thought it was beautiful because she has this icy blue eyeshadow.

 Just very soft on the lid but a nice light blue in the waterline and then a winged purple liner.

 So whoever Kelly Osbourne's makeup artist is, you did a great job.

I'll put her address in the link below so you guys can contact her.

 I really don't know what brand they are, but that's where I bought them was at a little boutique.

 Okay you guys, to start off your makeup look, you just need to put a primer down.

 Then all you guys need is a crease brush like this or a soft dome brush of some sort and a light blue eyeshadow.

 You're going to take this on some sort of dome brush and all we're going to do is feather on the legs.

 Okay now wipe off that brush and go in with a color that's close to your skin.

 All we're going to do you guys is buff this above the crease just to soften it.

 Okay so take your piece of tape and you're going to line it up with the lower lash line.

 And for Kelly's look we're going to go all the way in with that purple.

 Okay once you guys have that liner on then all you have to do is pull off the tape.

 And if you feel like it wasn't crisp enough you can always take those little pointed Q-tips.

 And what you can do is kind of clean up the line by just pressing it like that.

 Or if you can find a light blue eyeliner pencil that's great too.

 But all you're going to do is pull down on this and run this in the waterline.

 Okay now this step is optional you guys but I want to darken the lower lash line just a little bit

 so that way my lashes don't disappear especially with such a light color in the waterline.

 You guys I use the pink towels to wipe my brushes off so if you see pink fuzz stuck to stuff that's what it's from.

I noticed that Kelly didn't do a lot of blush but what she did do is put the blush underneath the cheekbone if that makes sense.

 And I'm just going to take some sort of bronzer or contour powder that's just a little bit darker than me.

 We don't want super contoured look because that's not what she's going for.

 Take that stippling brush and you're just going to put it here under the cheekbones.

 If you are medium to dark skin I would go a little bit darker or brighter like Summer Fling.

 And then what you guys can do is switch to a cheek highlighter brush.

 Now we are going to highlight a little bit up here with a matte powder first just to brighten it.

 I'm using the Makeup Geek Shadow in White Lies because yes, this is what's brighter than Marlena's skin.

 If you have medium to darker skin, obviously don't choose this one.

 We're just going to stipple this on top of the cheekbones and here under the eyes to brighten it a bit.

 But paired up with the purple and just doing a really soft wash of it actually works really well.

 List everything I used, where to buy, prices, pictures, everything that you need to know.

 Hi there YouTubers, Pat Prepper here, and I have a poor little hen that's got frostbite

 Um, I'll get up closer so you can actually see the blisters, and it's really sad.

 She just developed this yesterday, and they're already blistering.

 And so what I've got, um, I've got lukewarm water in here with Epsom salt, and I'm going

 And then I'm going to pour peroxide over them and let that sit for a little bit, and then

 You want to make sure that your chicken does not, I know baby, does not drink this water

 If she develops an infection, I'm going to have to give her some penicillin.

 And it's probably going to take about four to six weeks for this to clear up.

 You can also wrap their feet in gauze to keep them really clean and sanitary.

 So I mean, they do, but not compared to some of the cases that are out there.

 If they turn black, your chickens can actually lose toes or their feet.

 And that doesn't mean you need to end that chicken's life because some chickens can

 And you don't want to put them through more than they can handle, that's for sure.

 So I'll show you what I'm going to do and then I'm going to actually soak her feet a

 So then I'm going to put her on this towel and gently, you can tell that they're really

 So, anyways, I'm not going to, I'm not going to, I'm going to finish this video today.

 And in four to six weeks, if it's not better, I may do another one and tell you what we

 Hopefully she's going to be better and I'm going to see some improvement coming up real soon.

 Today I made some apple turnovers and I used a little mini pie maker thing

 that's made by Wilton so I thought that I would show you how this turns out.

 made a pie crust by mixing 4 cups of flour, 2 teaspoons of salt, I'm doing a

 double recipe here because I'm going to use half of this for something else

Then I added 4 tablespoons of butter and be sure to take the paper off

 ingredients together very well and a pastry blender comes in handy if you

Then I added 10 tablespoons of ice-cold water and mixed it all together

 there for a couple of hours and if you go shopping you'll resist the urge to go

 with a rolling pin and the way this little pie maker is supposed to work is

 that you're supposed to be able to stamp out the dough with the bottom of this

 thing and then that piece will supposedly fit into the pie maker.

 piece of paper the size that I needed so that we large enough to fit in this

 little pie maker and I used a pizza cutter to cut out the little rectangles

 piece of dough out, put the filling on it and then crimp all the edges around

 using the tines of a fork but that never works out well for me because the edges

 end up too wide and end up puncturing it with the fork and all.

I did a video about that a long time ago and I'll put a link in the

 pie maker, I put another rectangle of the pie dough on top of it and closed it up.

 Then I took a knife and trimmed off the excess from the outside.

 open it up and take the little pie out of the pie maker and put it on a cookie

 them with a little bit of sugar and cinnamon that I'd mixed together and cut

I only had one little blowout on one of them and I'm sure that's my

It doesn't leave a big wide crust all around like I always get when I do it

 beat anything I've ever gotten from McDonald's or someplace like that.

 got this little pie maker at Bid Bath & Beyond but I believe I've seen them in

 one grab it up and then you can make your own little hot pockets or pocket

Today I'm going to show you what I would make for my friends at a picnic

 So we're here in Clapham Common and we've got a whole load of beautiful fresh

I'm just going to show you how to whip together a really beautiful

 off the bottoms and then also rip off some of these slightly more wilted bits

We've got some chilli in here just to give it a little bit of a kick.

 spicy add more chilli, if you don't like it spicy less chilli is fine.

 cutting, maybe into thirds like that, so you can see all the beautiful peas.

 So sugar snap peas are done, next we've got some cherry tomatoes which I'm just going

 picnics in the summertime, I feel like such a nice kind of relaxed vibe.

 friends there, lots of really like fresh foods and I love just being outdoors you

 go, like it's so simple, you're just pretty much whacking ingredients together

 food is really nice and advanced, I think sometimes someone likes a soggy salad do

 dessert, you know pudding, we're going to actually put them in the salad.

 like a nice fresh sort of summery vibrancy and a little bit of sweetness

 great for your skin, they fight against like free radicals, so you'll also be

 leaves which smell amazing and they go really well with the strawberries, you

 good pinch, just roll them up like so and then with your knife really just very

 like share the load, so someone brings drinks, someone brings food, you can make

 of protein, we always need a little bit of protein in our meals, so I've just got some

 simple recipe, like we've got lots of delicious flavours going in there, it's

 summer picnic, always bring some tissue to wipe your hands with.

 slice open, give it a nice fresh squeeze all over everything, especially the

 I think they're both pepper, we're gonna have a lot of pepper going on.

 looks unbelievable, you are definitely gonna be the queen of the picnics if you

 you know just get that chilli around, the spring onions, the avocado, and you just

 it's just like, I don't need to bring all the fussiness, all you need to do, take your

 So that was my very simple picnic summer salad, hope you enjoyed it and let me

 know in the comments below what you love having at your picnics and I'll see you

 welcome back to another session of cooking with technology using Philips

 today i'm going to show you how to make our very Hyderabadi very special onion

 samosa the cocktail style so today i'm going to use Philips airfryer to fry

 them so for this first i'm going to make the dough before i do the dough i'm

 going to add some pinch of sugar and pinch of salt in a bowl add a little bit

 of water for this i'm going to add all-purpose flour and whole wheat flour

 first let me just mix this sugar and salt so that they dissolve you know once

 the sugar is dissolving we're going to add a little bit of oil into this and

 ok this whole wheat flour it helps in you know making sure that the dough

 stretches good so just make it into a soft dough and we're going to rest it on

 the side for around 20 minutes before we make the bread we're going to make a

 kind of a chapati and then cut it into thin sheets and we're going to make our

 samosa so little more water that should be good and knead the dough till it is

 soft once the dough is ready we're going to let it rest for 20 minutes that's

 when it will become nice and soft then just divide the dough into the sizes of

 the rotis you want to make and we're going to roll it into thin sheets even

 after making into small dumplings we have to rest the dough if you don't rest

 the dough you will not be able to roll this into thin sheets once you rest the

 dough you will be able to you know make it into a thin sheet the thinner you

 ok so it is as like this once you make them thin all we're going to do is we're

 going to stretch it with the hand little more ok and for the one last time we're

 ok look at this and the grill is really really hot and all you're going to do is

 put this on top of it and we're not going to cook it for long we're just

 going to let it slightly heat so it should not get any color just look at

 this you can see the steam so once you see some of the steam on one side just

 ok that is how much you want to cook it but this has to be the hottest possible

 this is done ok you can make even thinner than this then you get your

 samosas much easier put it on the table just trim off the unnecessary part we're

 going to cut this into three ok so as simple as this and we're going to make

 I'm just going to cover it up with another plate you can use a you know

 I'm just going to take some chopped onion in this we're going to add chopped

 green chili if you want you can also add some grated carrot, lot of chili powder

 some chopped mint if you want chopped coriander a must little bit of garam

 masala powder and add salt now after adding salt just make sure you mix all

 of this to this onions we're going to add pressed rice and just add lot of

 this puffed rice so whatever the moisture that these onions are going to

 give out that will be absorbed by the puffed rice and this is the mixture what

 we're going to use for stuffing our onion samosa now we're going to take the

 bread what we have made and all we need is half the size should be good enough

 so now you have one more like this so in this stuff the mixture ok it is as

 simple as this you can seal it with water just take some flour and just make

 ok now this is the mixture you're going to apply on to the samosa and then just

 the edges and then seal it so it's completely sealed from all sides and you

 make your cocktail samosa I'm going to show it one more time just cut them into

 ok and now put this mixture with the pressed rice and the onion stuffing just

 stuff it in and the excess of it just apply some of this flour with water

 mixture and seal the edges that's it as simple as this and you have all the

 samosas ready traditionally we make them smaller like this but you can also find

 bigger in some of the you know cafes in Hyderabad and for this we're going to

 take a brush and just apply some oil ok just before putting it and I've also

 preheated the air fryer at 180 degree centigrade for around 3 minutes now it's

 all ready so I'm just going to put them in the air fryer now once you coat them

 pull out the air fryer and then just drop in the samosas ok just spread them

 if possible you know so that they get evenly fried now put the basket in and

 we're going to fry it for first four minutes just toss them out and again

 another four or five minutes till you get a nice golden color now after around

 four five minutes pull them out and you can see that they are getting nice

 ok I'm going to fry them for another four or five minutes till they get

 really nice color just before you finish one more time pull it out and put chilies

 also the chilies just slit them, add little lime juice, salt and you'll have

 awesome chilies also ready along with the samosas so another two minutes

 should be good now you know total around 10 minutes my cocktail samosas are all

 dear friends they taste really good I'm going to wait for you know a minute or

 so so they cool down so I can enjoy this awesome cocktail onion samosa look

 at these awesome samosas and they come out so good nice and very very crunchy

 hmm wow you know I think they nice crispy and they taste better than the

 enjoyed today's session keep watching and there are many more recipes that I'm

 Okay Lorraine I'm getting very Matt Preston here this is the pressure this

 is the pressure point of the recipe you're making burnt butter sauce yes

The rules are so simple that you just basically put the butter in a

 saucepan and just let it melt and it'll get foamy and that's it that's your

 sauce and it tastes so good and you know when it's ready if it starts to smell

 nutty nutty okay because I think people can easily burn butter.

You can make it black butter which is also an ingredient but I mean when you when you

 really start to smell it and the actual butter goes brown and it sort of it

 tell you it tells you when it's ready it will tell you but yeah you don't want to

 take it too far because then you end up with black butter which is quite strong

 in itself I mean it's sort of edible but you know the point where we'll get

 white and foamy like this or do you have to let it go to a caramel shade?

 have to let it go to the brown color because at the moment you can sort of

 see that it's still yellow there and it'll it'll get quite foamy.

 edges are starting to brown brown yes and you can see the foam at the top

 authentically nice and brown itself isn't helping but it's been used right

 about five minutes or so but we've got the gnocchi in the oven for 15 minutes

 still stay beautiful and you know you can maybe reheat it a little

 I know which notes gonna be on which string and that takes a lot of practice

 so at yet it's very simple and what happens is you get real familiar

 Hey guys, today I'm going to teach you how to play Tonight I'm Loving You.

 And that is on 8 10 10 of the E D A. Then 7 on the G. Then B and E are both 8.

 And that is on the 5th, the 7th, the 7th, the 6th, and the 5th and 5th.

 Then if you want the optional one you go down and back to the 5th.

 I've been trying to nom nom nom all the Girl Scout cookies I can get my hand on

 Hi everyone, it's Barb from Clevver and I'm back to show you what I'm doing with my hair.

 My hair has been washed and conditioned and I applied a mixture of Giovanni direct leave

 Now my hair is mostly dry and I'm unraveling it with a little bit of olive oil on my fingertips.

 On this side I have Labella gel, crystal clear, freeze and hold styling gel that I got from

 I'm using Icy Fantasia gel, hair polisher, olive styling gel with sparkle lights.

 I'm using a suggestion that I got from a YouTuber and it says smooth it on, starting at the

 I'm going to have to see what this looks like after I get off camera.

 I think my hair in the front, even though I think 4B is the last one, I'm not sure.

 I think that I hear 4C and I think my hair in the front is 4C and my back is 4B.

 I'm also doing a comparison of the product because this is the first time.

 Everyone says when you're applying the gel you know you apply your leave-in and then

 But I don't know how my hair texture is going to work with these gels.

 I'm just working it in my fingers before smoothing it on my hair.

 I'm starting in small sections because if I don't really like how it looks I'll probably

 So that's the Icy Fantasia Olive Styling Gel and this is the LaBella Freezing Hold

 See I'll comb this smaller section just to be fair to the little Bella.

 It just seemed initially as like my poofy hair like it dried with nothing on it.

 I'll hopefully have a video coming back and showing y'all how it turned out or whatever.

 Okay, we are going to make a Valentin of chicken by deboning this chicken thigh and drumstick

And I'm going to start by cutting off that ball and socket right there.

Holding the deboning knife vertically, all I do is go on either side of the bone

I want to take the tendons and the bone with me and all I do is release here at the ball

 And we are going to make a Valentin out of these duck legs too.

 This is going to be magnificent, I have to tell you, this duck.

 the tendon right there and I'm going to make sure my guiding hand is going to make sure that my knife

 Now, if you'll give me the call fat, why don't you go get the call fat?

 So, I'm going to take the meat, I'm going to take the meat, I'm going to take the meat,

 if you'll give me the call fat, why don't you go get the call fat?

Today I'm gonna show you an outfit that I made a long time ago for a dance performance.

It was filmed right that day, but I never got around to it because my friend had it

 But here's a gold bandeau and then I cut off one whole sleeve and did it into a tank top and had the other side

 into kind of like an almost off-the-shoulder sleeve and just left the sleeve alone.

 On the bottom I just cut it off so it can roll up a little bit.

 This used to be a small Fruit of the Loom tee like this one, but this is a grey one.

You can buy fabric paint, but since I was on a time crunch, I didn't have time to look around.

I got this from Lowe's and what it is is Rust-Oleum Metallic Finish.

 It's supposed to be for like ironing and stuff, but it's perfectly fine to use on your clothes.

 The only thing else you need is a pair of scissors and that's all.

 So let me just go ahead and just start showing you the tutorial.

 First we're going to grab the bottom of the tee shirt and we're just going to scrunch it up like so.

 I'm just doing this to have nicely textured paint onto the shirt when I do spray it on.

 Then I'm going to take the spray paint and spray it all over the shirt like so.

 I'm going to take all the little spots that don't have a lot of spray paint and I'm just going to pinch those parts and bunch those together like so.

 Then I'm going to spray again just to make sure it's nicely covered.

 I'm just going to flip over the shirt and do the same thing to the other side.

 And you probably want to start the back first because after you do the back you'll have a good idea of how to do it so the front won't look as messed up and that's the side that people are going to look at.

 And then this side is a lot nicer than the front because I already did a couple practices in the front.

I'm just going to spray again just to make sure that a lot of it is covered by the gold.

 Okay, so I'm just going to put the cut up shirt against the gray shirt but I'm not actually going to cut it.

 Basically I made a deep cut on this side and I brought it all the way up like this so you can show your sides.

 You can also do this on the other side just to be like those cool dancer shirts and stuff like that.

 In the middle I made not a really deep scoop neck but I made a little one and in the back I made it a little lower.

 And then with the bottom I just cut off the hemline so it makes a roll like this.

 And for the gold bandeau I just took a couple yards of gold fabric.

 And this material is actually really bad for what we were doing, how active we were because they have these little runs in there.

 But if you're in a rush like we were you can just cut strips of fabric like this and on one side you can just fold it over to hide these lines right here.

 So then it'll look nice and you can just leave the rest like hanging down like that.

 Just remember to wear something underneath so it won't slip off your boobs or something like that.

 I've worn this to the dance performance and I've worn this to a Saints game because it's black and gold and stuff like that.

 And you know you can also do this with like this shirt but not with like the less sexy side.

 With like a white shirt to make it more spring like because I did do this in the fall so that's why it's like black.

 We were inspired by these cool metal fringe earrings by Stephan Webster, which we pinned

 For this challenge, we must use $10 or less to make our own metal fringe earrings.

 You will need hoop earrings, beads, spikes, a brush, and E6000 glue.

 I decided if we are getting edgy today, I'm going to go big or go home.

 I don't have any copper jewelry, so we'll mix it up a little bit.

 So I am using silver beads, and then I'm going to stick with the same gunmetal for

 I am going to use an antique gold bead and mix it up with antique copper spikes.

 So if this is the part that goes in your ear, just directly below that, you can just eyeball

 And I think it's a good idea to get a symmetrical design to start there and work your way out

 I'm going to add three spikes down at the bottom and then some smaller spikes around

 And then I think I'm just going to put a little bead in between each of the spikes.

 And when you're laying these out, I think you need to take into consideration it's going

 At least my beads are, because they lay a little bit wider when they lay flat.

 And I'm going to have about a thumb's width between my hook here, my clasp, and where

 The glue's already starting to get tacky, so now I'm just going to lay it flat and flatten

 Great, and I'm just finishing up doing the same thing, getting any of that glue off of

 Maybe this will make Scarlett finally want to get her ears pierced.

 Subscribe to The Mom's View so you can see all of our DIY projects as soon as they come

 Actually, looking at my bracelet, I think I like it just on one side.

 So if you wanted to do your bracelet just on one side, you would actually only need

 to cut your first thread to the length of your bracelet with a little bit extra for

 tying a knot, and your second thread to double the length of your bracelet.

 I'm just going to hold this blue leather next to the chain and just continue threading the

 We're here today to create a flawless face using some of Avon's makeup products.

 Before I start any makeup, I always address the skin texture first.

 This product leaves the skin with a velvety finish, it minimizes pores, and it prepares

 Now we're ready for foundation, and I'm going to use Avon Ideal Flawless Foundation.

 The best way to go about that is to apply two to three stripes along your cheek and

 You should have good natural light and try a few colors side by side.

 You'll see that the best color match seems to blend into your skin, and I really like

 I like to use my fingertips, starting right at the center of the face.

 This formula is really lightweight, and it provides great coverage.

 Once you've got it sort of at the center of your face, you can start smoothing it out

 It's best to glide it across the face, a little bit in a downward, outward motion.

 Once you're pretty much done with all of that, you can buff it with a sponge.

 I like to use it over the lid also because it's a really nice base for eyeshadow.

 And now for the last step, a light dusting of powder over your foundation.

 Now that we have a flawless face, let's warm it up a little bit with some bronzer.

 Start where the sun would naturally warm your cheeks, right up on the top.

 And along the temple, sweep it across the forehead, along the cheeks.

 And you can warm it up a little bit around the bridge of the nose, tip of the nose, and

 And then from that point again it's A flat, G flat, F. And then you're going to do that natural blues change from the A flat to a C sharp or D flat same note.

 So you would go then from again the C sharp, F, A flat, B flat.

 And then you're going to return to the first part which is the A flat, C, E flat, F. Okay.

 And then we're going to what they call the turnaround which would be B flat, E flat.

And you're going to run from the A flat, A flat to C and then half step it all the way up.

 And then you're going to run from the A flat, A flat to C and then half step it all the way up.

So practice the parts and then I'm going to actually play it on another video putting it all together.

 Learn the parts then look at the other video and play along with that.

 Hello, I'm Yanni, the owner of King Eros Greek Restaurant in Columbus, Ohio.

 Today I'm going to introduce you to more than 50 years of Greek traditions and recipes that

 have been passed down in my family from generation to generation.

 The problem with most baklavas is that they're too overly sweet.

 They're drinked with way too much honey and you have to drink gallons of water in order

 Now my gourmet baklava is better because it's juicy, flavorful, and it's a light pastry.

 There's 20 filos per pack, one pound, and we're going to be using 50 sheets from these.

 We lay them out and then we're going to be using our walnuts and our butter between every

 We pretty much grind them down in a food grinder so they look just like this.

 The clarified butter is butter that we heat up and then put back in the cooler and then

 we take away all the milk out of it and all the other junk that doesn't belong there.

 You can use any brand because what you're going to do is you're just going to take it,

 you're going to boil it, put it in the cooler, and just dump out what's not good, all the

 Cover your filo with butter totally because that's what it depends on in order for it

 We're going to put the walnuts, we're going to put one third of the walnuts on this first

 So now the gourmet baklava is ready to go here, all nice and tight.

 If you do any more, it's going to end up being raw as you bake it.

 I like the one with teeth because it just helps it cut right through a little better.

 You're going to turn it over after 25 to 30 minutes depending on the color.

 You don't want it too dark, but this is about the color that you're looking to get.

 The honey syrup is made with honey, the sugar that is boiled, and a little bit of cinnamon.

 There's not chocolate involved, but I love mine with chocolate.

This is Bertie from clumps of Mascara, and I'm just going to do a quick quick quick quick quick

 Tutorial of how to do French manicure on your nails because this was requested for more day like a week

 I did it so much in middle and high school and early college that it's just like now.

 But people requested it, so I think you know I've done it enough back in the day to show you guys how to do it

 I'm sure that's people out there who do it a lot better than me, but this is just my rendition

 I like it and works well for me, and I use a brush and this brush is a Mac

 Not thick it's very thin actually, but the bristles are just so stiff and fine

 What you can get from Sally beauty supplies of course you can do this any way you want some people use strips of paper

 Some people use scotch tape some people use the things that you buy in the store

 I think it's the most efficient way, and it's not the quickest way

 But it kind of looks the most professional in my opinion, so what I do first of course is

 And it doesn't have to be perfect because we're gonna clean it up later, but at this point you should probably decide how you want

 Your line if you want a thick or thin I usually prefer mine pretty thick great.

 I prefer mine thicker because my nail beds are pretty long so thin looks almost non-existent

I'm just applying the nail polish to my nails and no kind of pretty order

 So maybe what two or three minutes or so some people like to hold their hand and do it

 But I like to look at my nail that way so it's a little more challenging to do it this way

 But I think you get the best results because you're actually looking at the line, so that's why I do it that way

 always keep a paper towel nearby because I used to I like to wipe my brush off a lot and

 And I'm trying to get as close as possible so it you can see that it getting too blurry there we go

 French manicure under five minutes well of course only did two nails

 And of course I would do a color under that and my line is straight.

 Have any questions don't hesitate to leave me a comment, and I will see y'all later

 Hey guys, today we are going to make blueberry pie, so I hope you'll enjoy.

 I got this miniature pie dish off ebay, but you can also use a bottle cap or make a dish

 Then add a light shading using soft pastels before weaving them.

 To create the colour for the blueberries I mix two shades of clay.

 For the main portion of the filling I just cut out rough pieces like this.

 Mix it with liquid clay and soft pastels and add it to the pie dish.

 Go around the edge with the needle tool to add texture and add shading using the same

 I didn't record this, but remember to texture and shade the back of the slice as well.

 The liquid you can see is just matte glaze which will make sure the pastel shaving stays

 So for our ingredients, we're going to start with a can of albacore tuna, one egg, some

 grated pecorino romano cheese, about a quarter cup of smashed up pork rinds, and some mayo.

 Okay, so in a bowl I have mixed all of our ingredients and I did not use a quarter cup

 Now in this skillet I have some bacon fat that I had used or saved since this morning.

 And I forgot to mention too, I put some fresh cracked pepper, some paprika, and a little

 So we're going to mold them up into little patties and fry them in our bacon fat.

 I have the flame on medium high and we'll be back to show you what it looks like when

 Here they are flipped over and we'll let them cook just a few more seconds.

 I broke it in half and I'm going to melt one on each of these tuna croquettes.

 And to be honest, it's like having a cheeseburger or a crab cake or you know, whatever.

 You can put cheese on it, you can put bacon on it, you can put pickles and mayo and whatever.

 But it's just a really good alternative to something when you really don't have the time.

 It literally takes five minutes to put together and I'll show you how it looks like in the

 I take a tablespoon of mayo, a little dab of pickle relish, and I mix this up.

 You can add a little paprika to it, some salt and pepper, you know, whatever you like.

 I definitely do a little salt and pepper to it and just a drop of onion powder and it

 Look at the size of these things with a slice of provolone melted on it and some homemade

 And if you have any questions on my keto coaching or anything regarding ketogenic diet,

 please leave it in the comment below, private message me, find me on Facebook, find me on

 Same name on every channel that I have is FeliciaNurse and I look forward to seeing

 I'm going to show you how you can indulge your sweet tooth while still saving calories

 because I'm going to make some raspberry friands and they're a bit like mini bakewell cakes.

 They're perfect to have with your afternoon tea or coffee and I like them as a little

 Now because we're not using the yolks here, it's a brilliant way of reducing fat.

 I use vanilla loads when I'm cooking because it helps add a bit of sweetness and I just

 My flour and four tablespoons of Splenda which will give us plenty of sweetness.

 Now I'm going to put in my melted low fat spread and give that all a good mix.

 Now be careful that you don't add too much all there because you can unwittingly put

 Again do it carefully because you don't want to bash out all the air that you've whisked

 Again not too many because you could load up the calories if you do that.

 And I'm going to pop my little friands in for about 12 minutes until they're golden

 A lot of people don't really know what a clay bar is for or actually how to use it.

 But today we're going to demonstrate the proper way to clay bar your car or actually see if

 And even though this car looks good, looks shiny, we really can't tell if it needs a

 But there is one surefire way to test to see if we actually need to do this.

 However, to really get the senses going and actually feel if we need to do this, we're

 And what I'm going to do is just run my hand over the surface of the vehicle.

 What I'm actually feeling right now is a lot of grittiness, a lot of texture to the paint

 What I'm actually feeling is a lot of fallout or contaminants that end up on your vehicle's

 So we're going to show you how to get rid of that and bring your car's paint to the

 So what we need to work with is a proper lubricant that actually gives us viscosity on the paint

 surface so we're not applying any friction to the paint surface or additional friction

 So what we're going to use is our Shining Monkey Show and Shine Detail Spray.

 This is the perfect product to use not only to give you an awesome finish at the end of

 the application, but it's also going to provide us the viscosity and protection that we need

 So what we're going to do is we're going to spray a substantial amount of the detail spray

 We really want to get the surface wet and provide a lot of lubrication for the clay

 Picking up the clay bar right here, we are going to make sure that the clay bar is kneaded

 So now what's going to happen is we're just going to apply the clay bar onto the vehicle

 and just let the clay bar glide over the vehicle paint surface without applying any pressure

 or any additional pressure or friction and just simply allow it to glide.

 And what you'll feel is the clay bar sticking a little bit and then releasing.

 And what you're going to end up with is a, you'll see what you're removing from the paint

 And that's taking all of that contaminant that you can't see with the naked eye off

 So what we're going to continue to do is while we continue finishing the rest of the car,

 we have to knead the clay bar to make sure we're always working with a fresh surface.

 I'll demonstrate it very quickly again, making sure that we apply a little bit more spray

 And again, it's catching and then releasing and you'll feel the gliding of the bar as

 So now that we've done this area, I'm going to just make sure or test it to make sure

 So what we'll do is we'll put the bar down here and dry it, dry the surface with a proper

 If you get any residue left over from the clay bar, don't worry about it.

 Now that this is done on this section here, we're going to continue doing the rest of

 But at the end of it, what we want to make sure is we store the bar properly.

 Proper storage of the bar is just as keen as the application of the bar.

 We want to make sure that the bar is stored in a plastic or sealable container or a plastic

 And we want to add some detail spray to the bag to make sure that the bar stays lubricated

 Another little tip is that if you drop the bar on the floor, get rid of the bar.

 You never know what it's going to pick up and we definitely don't want to bring what

 You're going to get amazing results and you're going to love the way your car looks and most

 A minor, we're going to be playing D minor, we're going to be playing C, we're going to

 be playing G and we're going to be playing a slash chord, C over B. Alright, so these

 chords are all basic ones and if we can just piece these together, the song goes through

 on one chord progression, so once you've got this chord progression down, it'll be easy,

 is the first chord and we're going to put our 1st finger on the 2nd string, ok, at the

We're going to put our middle finger on the 4th string 2nd fret and we're

 going to be putting our 3rd finger 3rd string 2nd fret and we're going to strum down from

So what we're going to do is we're going to shift the whole shape down

 a string, so we're going to basically climb down the ladder like this.

 point, you're going to slide out that 3rd finger and that's going to give us D minor.

 practice your changes, obviously if you're just beginning, is to practice the shapes

So you go from A minor, move it down a string, slide along the 3rd finger.

 So our C chord we're going to build from this 1st fret on the 2nd string again, with our

We're going to put our middle finger back to the 2nd fret on the 4th string

 and our 3rd finger is going to sit on the 3rd fret of the 5th string.

Now the G chord I'd use for this is a sort of old school G. Just using

A lot of people will maybe know this one, which is like the 2 fingers down

 our 3rd and middle up a string and lift off our 1st finger and then put the pinky here

 on the 1st string after the 3rd fret and strum all the strings here, we'll get a G chord.

 Ok, now once we've played that G chord, we'll go back to C. So move these fingers back down,

So it's 3rd down, middle down, pinky off and this 1st finger is going

 finger, lift up the middle and we've got C over B and we're going to play from the 5th

 C, then we've got G, then we've got C again, C over B, like that.

 got those chords down, let's quickly talk about our strumming pattern.

 pattern is, it's going to be A on the A minor, we're going to do down strokes, we're going

 going to change to the D minor, but we're only going to play 3 strums there.

 it's A on the A minor, 3 on D minor, then we're going to play 5 on the C. Ok, now what

 you need to think about with this pattern is, we'd have 4 bars, ok, and the first bar

 is taken up by the A minor and we'd have what would be called a quaver pattern, which just

 basically means we've got 8 notes in the bar, ok, we've got 8 strums in the bar. 1

Then what we're doing in the second bar is we're splitting up these

D minor for 3, C for 5, then we change to G and we do that 8 times.

Then we change to the C and do 1, 2, 3 and then C over B, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.

 that really slowly for you, so you can see how the strums fit along with it and then once we've

 3 on C, 5 on C over B. Ok, so let's speed it up a little bit and that's our song done.

 Alright, so hopefully that made a bit of sense to you and you can now have a little try at playing

 If it helped you, you can obviously press the like button or subscribe.

 In this video we will show you how to rebuild your Cane Creek Thud Buster.

 Before replacing your bushings, make sure you have ordered the correct rebuild kit as

 the long travel and short travel bushing widths are different between the two models.

 Assemble the bushing replacement tool as shown in your instructions.

 At this point it is easier, but not necessary, to clamp your bushing press in a vice.

 Then insert the hex bolt with the new bushing on it into the bushing press and begin to

 In this video we will discuss how to maintain your Thud Buster.

 However, over time your Thud Buster may develop a squeak and or a tiny amount of side play.

 To remedy this, apply a few drops of light weight oil to the pivots.

 This should be done from time to time to keep everything properly lubricated.

 Now I've done a lot of studies when it comes to guys and how they feel about makeup and

 most of them just don't like a woman that wears a ton of makeup.

 And the reason is because not only do they want to see what they're getting into, but

 And wearing a ton of makeup and a lot of bright colors on the lips is really going to put

 Also, when it comes time to get that kiss goodnight, they don't want to kiss a full

 They want to make sure that you look soft and you can look pretty and polished, but

 So basically what we're going to be doing is just a little bit more than the five minute

 I have my foundation and concealer on, but we're going to apply my highlighter now to

 So we're using a cream highlighter in this light kind of white shade and we're applying

 And again, when you go out at night, your guy's going to look at you and you're going

 to turn maybe in candlelight and you're going to have this beautiful glowing skin.

 So get that top of the cheekbone and this is just really romantic and glowy and ethereal

 And again, this looks so beautiful if he takes you to a candlelight dinner.

 And this is also a look if you have a day date that works as well because again, it's

 Okay, now what we're going to do is powder the skin and we're just going to dust a little

 So we're going to use a Forever Stay eyeliner pencil and we're using Chocolate Brown and

 So just as close to the roots as possible, just so you get a little definition.

 You don't want to do like a crazy smoky eye or a ton of eye makeup when you're going on

 a date with a man because he wants to know what your eyes look like, not what your makeup

 Save the crazy fun makeup for when you go out with your girls or if you have a fun party

 But when you're going on a date, especially the first couple dates, make sure that you

 So now what we're going to do is bring in a lid shade and this is kind of a quartzy,

 And we're going to sweep that color from the lash line across the lid and up into your

 And again, if you go to the Carmody app, you can avatar yourself and find the right shades

 So if you don't know where your crease is, what I like to do is hold the brush at the

 back of the eyeball and kind of tap and that's where your crease is.

 So just lightly apply there and then just with your fingertip, a little highlight just

 It's just a little bit of definition for your date so you're not overdoing it.

 And again, my little trick is if you have smudged anything underneath the lower lash

 line, get your little magic eraser which is just this little sponge and a little bit of

 So now I want you to take that same shade, that same kind of quartzy shade and with an

 angle brush, just slightly smudge it underneath your lower lash line giving the illusion of

 I don't like to use eyeliner underneath the lower lash line because I think it looks too

 harsh and you know the way that I do makeup ladies, it's all about subtle, pretty, soft,

 And that's pretty much all you need to do on the eyes except for mascara because you

 And unlike the five-minute face on your date because you do want that flirty fringe, we're

 going to do it on top and bottom so you have that nice full lash line.

 And you know, a lot of times I hold it horizontally and sweep from root to tip and then I'll turn

 So I always tend to go for either the Lancome or my own Lift and Define mascara in my Natural

 This is the quickest date look because it's just a new twist on the five-minute face.

 You're just adding a shadow on top and underneath and you're adding mascara on the lower lash

 And now a little bit of blush and we're doing this beautiful kind of pinky shade and just

 Because you want that kind of flush, that natural romantic flush.

 And once you have your apples nice and flushed, it's time for lipstick.

 And again, stay away from any goopy gloss because no guy's going to want to kiss you

 And stay away from bright, bold, crazy shades because again, that's going to be a little

 So I'm actually using a really pretty kind of rose blush shade.

 And it's just a nice, creamy lipstick that just adds color to the lips.

 What you can do is actually use a little bit of that highlight and trace around the perimeter

 of your lips to give a nice kind of highlight to the lips so you have a nice, full pout.

 And make sure that you just kind of use your finger to smooth it in so your lips are highlighted,

 It's a wearable, beautiful look that's natural, it's romantic, and your guys definitely want

 Top knob and replaced it with a piece of wire for lightweight and space reasons

 An alcohol pop can stove made out of a couple pieces of pop can this is a side burner

 underneath that I place a small piece of tinfoil to insulate it and

 Also to dribble alcohol in to burn to help prime it to get started quicker

 It's nice and foldable and durable I have used aluminum foil successfully, but this is way sturdier

 Boiling water was still a hundred and eighty one degrees Fahrenheit

 so for items that require a long cook time like my favorite Zatarain's black bean and rice a

 Cozy on you're ready to pack carry my fuel in a 16 ounce Nalgene container

 Cups that fold flat so I can store them in my backpack without using up any space

 In this segment we're going to be teaching you how to do a crimp.

 I want to be sure to use a little bit of heat protectant spray.

 And I moved my fingers out of the way when I got towards the end.

 Okay, what up YouTube bringing you a quick review today over the SMS Audio Street by 50

 Um, if you don't know about it yet SMS Audio has new headphones out the on ear headphones instead of the over ear

 So, thank you whoever sent me these okay on the website these retail for

 If you go to eBay, you can get them for sometimes up to a hundred two hundred fifty dollars off

I'm gonna say it right now get them on eBay or Amazon do not get them new

I'm just gonna do a real quick box because nobody likes the box.

 You take off the cover comes in an awesome box like this I love the box do not put this away

 Cleaning cloth you don't really need those because it's a matte finish got a carrying bag the cord

 This is the only thing we're going to need so let's get to the headphone review

 I want to show you what they look like because it drives me crazy

 When reviews do not have pictures of the headphones, they just lay them down like that.

 I want to show you guys these look like you got a nice s here for SMS audio

 You can touch these forever and they won't get fingerprints on them

 Got a blue finish here 50 cent loves that blue in case you haven't figured that out yet

 They are not exaggerating when they say these are huge headphones cable is awesome material tangle proof

 Because you have to wear it on that side for it to look cool next

 It's a 90 degree angle jack that goes into your device works with iPods.

 If you're going on a six-hour road trip, which I did once and all I did was listen to those they're fine

 They're to be honest, they're really good headphones for comfort.

 Disc so your ears will go all the way in you will be fine on comfort.

 I'm comfortable with doing this unlike most beats if you pick beats

 Solos up you're just gonna be like well, these are gonna break if I drop them.

 You can do anything to these except shoot them with a gun and they will be good.

 So if you want durable headphones get these do not get beat solos because those will snap or shatter

 These do not have replacement parts for one reason that is because no one ever breaks them

 Alright next to sound quality I am impressed with sound quality for these

 I'm gonna go ahead and fit sound quality and bass in the same thing because they're pretty much the same thing

 So bass I would say is a little bit lacking on these headphones, even though they say they are

 It is because of this around these will vibrate on your ears not thump.

 It's hard to explain if you have on my level by Wiz Khalifa listen to that song.

 Sound quality don't get those get these or sound quality for any headphones

 I would recommend these bass if you're if you just love bass and you

 Just want to look cool with your beats then get beats because you they have better bass

These have the best sound quality of the three celebrity headphones

I just want to explain to you guys that these headphones do not cancel out noise

 In large crowds because you can hear everywhere people are saying it might sound a little distorted

 Mean if you don't want your friends to hear your music fishing next to you on the bus then don't get these

 Really loud and easy to hear so don't get these if you want quiet headphones either

 If you want sound quality these score high on those about 10% sound quality bass is about 7 out of 10

 Durability is definitely an 11 out of 10 because they will not break

 So they're not good travel headphones on their neck they're a little ridiculous because that is huge these are huge cups right here

 You can get these for so much cheaper on eBay and they don't fake these headphones.

 Definitely get these used do not get them new because it's just not worth it because there's no noticeable marks on these and I got

 Today I propose you a simple and quick recipe, the porcini mushroom salad.

 The ingredients we need for 4 portions are 500 grams of fresh mushrooms, small and compact,

 two spoonfuls of lemon juice, 6 spoonfuls of extra virgin olive oil, some sangino or

 rocket salad or another quality of salad, 60 grams of grana or parmesan cheese, salt

 First of all we will clean the mushrooms, after removing the lower part with a knife

 we brush them accurately and then we clean them with a wet towel.

 After that we prepare the citronette sauce which we will use to dress our salad.

 We add the salt and pepper to the lemon juice and we melt very well.

 This happens when the oil particles create a bond with the lemon ones.

 If the sauce is not used just after its preparation, the two elements part from each other so it

 In a serving dish or in individual dishes we place a green salad.

 If we like it we can also add some balsamic vinegar and roasted pine nuts.

 This salad is very delicate so I advise you to prepare it a few minutes before serving it.

 Alright today we're going to install the Xtreme Fit and this is what it looks like.

 As you can see the earbud area is wider where it fully wraps around the edges.

 First you want to peel it off the wax paper and position it over the lower earbud.

 You want to make sure there's enough space right below the pivot joint so that you can

 Next you want to get a household hair dryer, heat it up a little bit and you want to start

 Okay next you want to start working your way towards the upper section of the pivot joint.

 It's good to have a little space so that you can rotate it without damaging the skin.

 You want to use a hair dryer and heat it up and slowly press one at a time.

 If you get an area where you have some wrinkles, what you can do is lift it back up, reheat

 Okay I'm not satisfied with this area so I'm going to slowly peel it again.

 Now it's good to give a final heat to seal the rest of the edges.

 As you can see this side is the extreme fit, wraps fully around.

 While this one is the regular fit now that just goes on the top surface.

 Get ready for the next video, part 3, which will be for the inner side.

 This week we're going to be taking a look at one of my favorite steak recipes, and that's

 So I'm going to go ahead and get started here with a basic ordinary paper towel, and we're

 So once we've got that folded down, we're going to add just a little bit of olive oil

 And the reason that I'm adding the olive oil to the paper towel is we're going to use it

 Now once I've added that and let that paper towel soak up that olive oil, I'll take a

 set of tongs and actually use that paper towel to brush the surface of my grill so that we

 It creates a non-stick coating on your grill so you don't have to worry about peeling little

 bits and pieces of your steak off of the grill and trying to dislodge it once you've

 And one of the things that you might notice is there's a little bit of seasoning on there.

 I always like to use a little bit of Mon Chou steak seasoning for this particular recipe

 We'll actually use quite a bit more of it in our Garlic Cilantro Butter glaze, which

 You'll also notice that I like to sear the outsides of it and then I always turn down

 the heat to medium once the steaks have been seared on the outside.

 Usually you can sear a steak in about a minute, minute and a half per side and then grill

 Anyways, go to my website and there's some great tips on how to properly judge when your

 Anyways, we're going to go ahead and get started here with making the Garlic Cilantro Butter.

 What you've already seen me add is about a stick of butter along with a couple of cloves

 Here, just as I promised, we're going to be adding some more Mon Chou steak seasoning

 I'd say typical standards are to where you can just barely see the butter anymore.

 The final ingredient that we're going to add is quite a few shakes from our cilantro.

 I really like using it in a lot of different recipes, but it really adds to the flavor

 Once we're done with that, we're just basically going to give it a quick mix.

 We pull our steaks right off the grill once they're done and brush them with the Garlic

 Now, a quick note here, something very important, don't cut into your steaks until at least

 If you cut into them too early, they're going to release all those juices a little early

 For more information on some really great recipes, please visit my website.

 Get an exact measurement between the wall here where the two by fours are

 We want to make sure this is exactly center for the bracket to bolt on the outside the support bracket

 15 and then this will reduce down it's going to give us about 18 inches

 We're gonna cut that out for the outside flashing and run it all the way up the side of the house and we're gonna

 It's about 10 feet so we're gonna run about 15 maybe 16 feet of chimney pipe

 So I get my flashing on here center that market cut it out and then we'll start running pipe

 Was using a little 4-inch grinder with an abrasive blade, but I wanted to show you this T support

 This bracket here supports the weight of all of the chimney pipe

 Then this piece a little 6-inch piece to go through the wall and this is your end cap and

 Mounted on the wall and slide the pipe through the wall and then I'll show you the connector on the inside

 The pipe on there so far and it's about 12 to get right under the Eve here

 The requirement for that is every 10 feet that just gives a little extra support

 But again, most of the weight is sitting on your support box here

 And I've got a little flashing for that and then cut the roof flash it chimney cap

 So you just want to make sure you get all the wood and insulation and everything at least an inch around this chimney pipe

 On the roof and the roof flashing will fit right into the rain gutter here

 The hole underneath the eaves and this pipe just barely fits under the eaves

 So the outside diameter this pipe is nine and a quarter and you need an inch all around it.

So I'm not going to do that here, but I will show you the inside

It'll slide inside and you can just adjust it where you need it and

Today we are going to be working on a July 4th water marble design.

Actually I'm going to do more than one drop of blue in the center.

 Now that my bowtie is complete, I'm going to go ahead and draw my pattern.

And I spend a lot of time trying to get the perfect looking star.

 And for this one I did spend a lot of time trying to clean up this look to make it look as realistic as possible.

 And now I'm just going to try to shrink down the star to a nice size.

We can patch it up with more of the blue nail polish once the design is on our finger.

 As you can see when I shrink down, it's starting to look more and more like a star.

 And we are going to do more clean up so that it looks really realistic.

 Now this design is going to fit nicely on two fingers or two nails.

I'm going to dip down here to get that more defined look at the edges.

 And also to make the star a little bit smaller by cleaning up the edges.

 Now I'm just going to go ahead and make the star a little bit more defined.

 And of course if you want this to fit on one finger you have to make the star really really small.

At this point you don't have to rush to dip down because even if it dries it's going to be okay.

 So I'm going to take two fake nails and try to get them as close as possible because obviously it doesn't fit on one nail.

 So I'm going to dip down and with one hand hold the fake nail in place and go ahead and clean up the surface.

As you can see this is a star when you put both of them together.

 So I really like this design and I hope you like this design as well.

 So I decided to get my hands dirty trying to find a craft that's going to be the most

 So get ready because this week I'm going to show you how you can make your own paper mache

 Just so you know, paper mache means that paper pieces are stuck together with some

 Newspaper is pretty standard for this project because it's so easy to find, but you could

 I'm going to be using paper from leftover art and beauty magazines that I just had lying

 You'll also need Mod Podge Glossy and a paintbrush, plastic wrap and wax paper, and a bowl.

 If you're using newspaper, make sure to rip it into strips about an inch thick.

 Like I said, I'm going to be using leftover magazines, but just to change things up a

 bit, I'm going to be using this one inch hole punch in order to create paper dots as opposed

 Either way, give yourself more than you think you're going to need.

 Your mixture should be kind of runny, so if it's too thick, just keep adding a bit more

 Take your plastic wrap and cover the outside of your bowl until it's nice and smooth.

 Now here's where you can decide how much you want to get your hands dirty.

 The first step is to put on some gloves if you don't want your hands getting all gooey

 But I don't really mind getting my hands dirty, so I won't be doing that.

 If you want to be like me, just go for messy gold and simply dunk your paper piece fully

 Make sure that you smooth out all air bubbles with your fingers so that your paper lies

 Other than that, have fun layering your dots any which way you like.

 Once you've finished one paper coat, you don't need to wait for the paste to dry.

 This is going to take several hours, so it might be easiest just to let the paste dry

 Once your paper mache has dried completely, slowly remove the mold from the plastic wrap

 All that's left is to give your bowl a couple of coats of glossy Mod Podge.

 And just so you can see, I did it with an even bigger bowl too.

 Now, I was working with super pretty paper, so my bowl looks good both on the inside and

 But if you're using newspaper or brown paper bags, that changes the game a bit.

 First, you'll notice that the edges are a bit rough, so go ahead and trim the rim neatly

 I first recommend using a neutral acrylic paint, like white, as a base coat.

 Just remember that these are decorative bowls since we've been using glue and paint.

 So if you want to put anything edible in them, like candy, just make sure that it's wrapped

 Tweet me at jamiepetito, Instagram me at heyjamie, or just tell me all about it in the comments

 Hey guys, so I am actually in the middle of filming a tutorial.

 My hair is actually drying right now and I'm supposed to be getting my son ready for school.

 Alright, so I wanted to just come in and show you real quick how I dust my ends.

 Especially when I have my hair in twists, the lights are bright.

 Now anytime, and you're going to say how often should you do this?

 You don't want to become obsessed because then you'll do this every time you style your

 hair and then you will not retain, be able to see yourself retaining a lot of length

 But whenever you're two strand twisting your hair and you feel like you literally get down

 That's like an indicator that you know you need to dust your hair.

 Alright, so all you want to do is, let me come close to darlings.

 Okay, so when you get to the end of your hair and you just want to run your, what I do is

 I run my hand on each of my twists and it's not all of them that have this issue, it's

 Hey everyone, today I'm going to show you how to make a Starbucks S'mores Frappuccino.

 You're going to need a cup, a blender, milk, a cup of ice, jet, puffed marshmallow cream,

 syrup, toffee nut, dark chocolate, some graham crackers, whipped cream, and of course, coffee.

 So let's get started making this Starbucks S'mores Frappuccino.

 Next we're going to need a half a cup of milk, two shots of espresso.

 You're going to want to blend until you can't hear the chunky ice anymore, roughly about

 Alright and there you have it, your Starbucks S'mores Frappuccino.

 It is so delicious, not really sure why I put the straw on that side because I won't

 So there you have it, your Starbucks S'mores Frappuccino and let's give it a taste.

 If you guys happen to try this Frappuccino, let me know down below.

 If you have any other questions, comments or concerns or requests, let me know.

 I got four quarts left over of the squash so I figure I'm gonna can them up

 Clean your jar lids and we're going to water bath them for 20 minutes

 All right, so we're gonna let this come up to a boil ready to go for 20 minutes and

 Well, she called her mama and asked her why her mama did it that way and she said well

 That's the way my mama did it and she called her mama and said why did you do it that way?

 So she called her her mama and after why she did it that way and she said she didn't have a pan

 This lesson will cover a song titled Awesome God recorded by Kirby John

 The introduction starts off where your left hand is on two E flats and you have a B flat

 D, F. Inverted E flat chord, B flat, E flat, G. That's the introduction.

Notice how your left hand is constantly hitting those E flats with

After you have played those few introductory chords, you'll stay there to start

 chord in your right, B flat, E flat, G, F in your left, inverted A flat chord in your right,

 C, E flat, A flat, G in your left, E flat root position chord in your right, E flat, G, B flat,

 A flat in your left, inverted A flat chord in your right, E flat, A flat, C. Take it back down

 to the G's in your left with that E flat root position chord, F in your left, F inverted chord

 in your right, C, F, A. Left hand is now on two B flats with that F. Right hand is on a B flat

 inverted chord, D, F, B flat, D in your left, C, F, A flat in your right.

 don't have a name but I think I'm gonna call it the Red Ear Ricotta Roundup.

 this was inspired by a trip to the Keys where we're catching yellowtail snapper

 and it was lobster season so we took these ingredients and a white sauce that

 I've learned over the years we put that in a lasagna and it was delicious.

 start with a half stick of butter, half a yellow sweet onion, and a shallot.

 gonna cut those up, we're gonna put those in a half a stick of butter, and that's

 snapper or dog snapper that you'll catch down in saltwater and this makes a great

 different ingredients get you a little I don't know four and a half ounce can of

 a tiny shrimp, maybe some clams if you like that sort of thing.

 to take 12 ounces of lasagna noodles and drop them in boiling water.

 them going and we're gonna simply drop our noodles into the boiling water.

 Alright now we're gonna take our pound and a half of fillets and we're gonna

 burn so I'm gonna get some wine, my two cups of Chardonnay and I'm gonna start

 Now I'm gonna take two cups of milk, stir that in, put it back on the heat.

 this point you're gonna take your fish and you're gonna let it cook just a

 and put your little shrimp in if you want to go that route and your clams.

 take me using my handy-dandy automatic grinder that my friends gave me.

 It's got just such a wonderful smell to it and supposedly that's what Colonel

 and I'm gonna take that and I'm gonna spread out on my first layer of noodles.

Right before we transfer this into the dish, mix it up real good, you take

 you about a half, three quarters of a cup of mozzarella cheese.

 Then I'm gonna come back with another layer of noodles and then I'm simply

 gonna repeat this process for three more layers and then at this point we're

 gonna take some whipping cream and we're just gonna drizzle over the top here

 I cut my cucumber into very small pieces cut them as small as you can because

 when you cut into very small pieces each and every piece will absorb the

 I'll let it cool down a little bit and then I will put this in the food

 everything in the same pan so you don't have to make too many dishes.

 cannot eat very spicy what you can do just add some of this spice mix and then

 cannot eat this spicy then you can just separate some portion with less

 This is very tasty you can adjust your salt everything is mixed well.

 And I just wanted to do a kind of a light, kind of celebrity type of tutorial.

 I have a few celebrity requests written down and Candice, the Victoria's Secret model,

 So I wanted to go ahead and do her because I don't think I have any Victoria's Secret

 So this look is going to look very different on me, on her, but it is a very simple, basic,

 fun look that's going to look great on everybody because it's just liner, lashes, and soft,

 I've already applied 100% Pure Organic Coffee Bean Caffeine Eye Cream.

 Due to a lot of the shading in the crease, you're also going to need a primer, the All

 Natural Face Magic Vegan Eyeshadow Primer is what I applied all over my lids and up

 I know a lot of you guys also have it as well, so it'll work out either way, I think.

 If you don't have this palette, you can take any neutral palette.

 I'm going to go ahead and take Foxy, which is just this beige-y cream eyeshadow.

 I'm going to pop this on with my Sigma brush in E70, just a medium-angled shader.

 I'm just going to use this as a wash of color from the eyelid to the brow bone.

 Tease, which is just this kind of light taupe-y purple-y color right here, and we're going

 I'm going to start making it a little darker in the outer corner first.

 I'm then going to take the brush and start doing a bit of a windshield wiper motion with

 It's kind of a fluffy, a bit on the fluffy side for an angled brush because it's kind

 of, you know, it's Teclon fibers and stuff like that, so it won't pick up a ton of pigment,

 Smoldery-er than this, but I'm going to be doing this because it's on her official website.

 I'm going to be taking Tease again, which if I'm out of frame, I'm sorry, but it's that

 I'm going to go ahead and flick a little bit of that eyeshadow into the outer corner just

 to kind of warm up the look, and so the crease where we started and stopped doesn't look

 So this is the second time I filmed this video, and I'm really paranoid about being out of

 This is so out of frame, the last one, that I'm re-recording it.

 I'm going to take Booty Call and the Art to the Brow Bone, and I'm going to go ahead and

 This is a waterproof matte black eyeliner from Inglot, and I'm going to be picking this

 up on a fairly generic angled synthetic brush, and just barely holding the eyelid taut with

 Just don't pull too hard, but you need to pull a little bit to get an even straight

 This is a brow pencil, and I just like this more than white on the waterline.

 I'm going to go ahead and take a blend of Tease right here and Snake Bite.

 So these two, and just kind of pointing it towards me like an angled brush.

 The inner tear duct, it's pretty glowy, so I'm going to go ahead and take a little bit

 A lot of you guys who follow me on Facebook know that I had mentioned the Urban Decay

 Lush Lash Mascara Gross Serum before the whole Urban Decay China issue.

 This was like my last Urban Decay purchase before the whole incident.

 I know Ardell lashes are pretty readily available, but once again, Madam Madeline.

 The Katy Perry lashes were created by Eyelore, so just click on the Eyelore link.

 These are called Oh Honey, and you can see right there, really fluttery, beautiful eyelashes

 So for blush, I'm going to be adding the Tarte Amazonian Clay Blush in Blissful, and it's

 I'm going to go ahead and pack this on with the Elf Stipple brush.

 I'm going to go ahead and take the Tarte Marajuka Blush and Glow.

 I know actually more people like the blush than the highlighter, but I bought this because

 This color is Candlelight, and I'm just going to go ahead and pat this on.

 I think this is a Sephora exclusive, so you cannot get it on Tarte.com.

 That way, when the lipstick starts to wear off, it all kind of wears off in one even

 Then I took number 224 all over the lips, a nice beautiful nudey pink.

 I know you're tired of me taking this probably, but I recommend it.

 Then I patted just a little bit of number 140 right on top of that, just to make it

 I'm going to go ahead and take the All Natural Face Vegan Lip Gloss now in Peppermint Stick.

 I don't have a Victoria's Secret one on my channel that I can recall.

 She has a number of looks, but this is just one that I have taken.

 I'll put a link to her official site where you can see this look or similar look.

 So, driving over here from Ottawa to Oakville in Ontario, Canada, the fuel filter for my

 I normally change it every six months, I'm thinking of buffing that every four months

 So you just go to any parts store and you look around online for whatever part your

 This is just your standard fuel filter assembly, rubber gasket, all that.

 Installing this is actually a lot easier than your normal diesel fuel filter because normally

 diesel fuel filter you have to prime this, topping it up with diesel fuel and then attaching

 it, but with a grease car kit you don't have to do that because you can turn on the car,

 put it into back flush and it will actually push diesel fuel through the filter and into

 So you take the filter out of your heater coil underneath and you unscrew it and make

 sure that it's really surrounded by all these nice grocery bags that will catch all the

 And when you put on your second fuel filter, you just dry off your hands and then screw

 Welcome to Holman & Finch Public House here in Atlanta, Georgia.

 I'm Linton Hopkins and we're doing a very seasonal fall accompaniment to roast turkey

 We have a cranberry sauce, dried cranberries, freshly squeezed orange juice, a little Coca-Cola

 Coke's purpose is to add the flavor, the nutty caramel and also the sweetness so it cuts

 Plus we have a lot of sugar coming from the orange juice and the cranberries.

 Otherwise you could really scorch this dish because the quality of this dish hinges not

 Many times I find people ruin a dish just because of the thinness of their pan.

 So we throw our cranberries in, have our fresh squeezed OJ, open up our Coke here, pour that

 If you have too much liquid, I'm going to put some more cranberries in.

 And we're just going to bring that up to a boil and let it just reduce and reduce and

 We've got baby fingerling sweet potatoes which I just adore, which we've blanched.

 So we're playing around with sort of the seasonality of what this dish is.

 Cranberries, sweet potatoes, roast Guinea, roast turkey as I said.

 This is a method I really enjoy which is similar to a brick press.

 There's a German chef I used to work for who used to always say, you can hear the flavor.

 Sauces have reduced around it and it's created an actual cranberry sauce.

 I'm actually surprised that people actually don't make this at home all the time.

 As you see, we just put it together, let it cook down to the proper reduction, and you'll

 So what I love about this going into the fall and winter season are these colors.

 We have the rich roasted orange, the caramelized on the chicken, the beautiful purples.

 I'm Linton Hopkins at Holman & Finch Public House in Atlanta, Georgia.

 We have a roasted guinea hen, baby sweet potatoes, and a cranberry coke reduction.

 how to make a recipe that combines raw broccoli with other tasty ingredients to make a broccoli

 You're going to need 2 crowns of broccoli, 1 1⁄2 strips of bacon, ½ cup of shredded

Today I'm using sharp cheddar because it gives that extra flavor, ½ of a red onion

 1⁄3 cup of slivered almonds, 1⁄3 cup of raisins, and then for the dressing we need

 1⁄3 cup of mayo, 1 tablespoon of red wine vinegar, and 2 tablespoons of sugar.

 them in the supermarket already packaged and cut up into florets for you.

 bacon bits, chopped onions, grated cheese, slivered almonds, and raisins and combine

 This salad has a nice crunch from the broccoli and it has that sweet and sour taste from

 the raisins and it also has like the sweet and sour flavor of the almonds.

 The bacon also gives it this savoriness that's really delicious as well.

 and share this recipe with your friends and I'll see you guys soon!

 Hi, I'm Chris Hudick, Technical Sales Manager for the Carnac Corporation.

 What I'm going to talk about today is how to perform some good preventive maintenance

 using Carnac 19 Ultra Rubberized Flashing Cement Caulk and 19 Flashing Caulk.

 What we have here today in front of me is a case for some good preventive maintenance.

 It's not a leak right now, but we have a crack in between where the edge of the roof meets

 Even though this crack here is not leaking, we want to fill it with asphalt.

 This will stop water from penetrating, which can lead to a leak, especially during the

 Expansion and contraction can cause this to open up and a leak to occur.

 Using our repair today, we're going to be using Carnac 19 Ultra Rubberized Flashing

 This is a great product because of the expansion and contraction to use on the edges where

 In other places on the roof where it's asphalt to asphalt or for general repairs, Carnac

 The tools that we need for this job today are safety glasses and gloves as always.

 We'll also need an open cradle caulking cartridge and also some type of a whisk broom or brush

 The caulking cartridge has an inner foil seal that must also be punctured before use.

 I'm going to put about a quarter of an inch bead along this crack.

 There, we've taken this crack, which was a place water could get in and cause a potential

 leak down the road and performed some good preventive maintenance.

 This flashing cement has a high degree of expansion and contraction to keep that area

 The preventive maintenance we did today is going to save a lot of money down the road.

 We're using Carnac 19 Ultra Flashing Caulk because it's rubberized.

 I could have done this if it was raining outside as well in case I needed to make an emergency

 Hey guys, welcome back to another episode of So Easy A Guy Can Do It.

 In this episode we're going to show you how to apply gel eyeliner.

 It goes on super smooth, it looks chic, and it lasts all day so you don't have to worry

 To start, you're going to need gel eyeliner and an angled eyeliner brush.

 Gel eyeliner comes in many shades, so pick the one that you like best.

 What's most important is that you pick a brush with thin, fine bristles for easy application.

 Make sure you lightly dampen the brush to ensure bristles stay aligned throughout the

 When adding liner to the brush, make sure the brush is fully coated and wipe off any

 The first step to applying gel eyeliner is creating a winged tip.

 To create the winged tip, you're going to look at your lower lash line and imagine your

 Now that you've created your winged tip, you can start lining your upper lash line.

 Starting at the corner of your eye, lightly draw a line as close to your lashes as possible.

 After the first half of your eye is lined, take your brush from your winged tip and draw

 a line to the center of your eye, connecting the two lines together.

 Don't worry if you weren't perfect at the beginning, because now you can go back and

 We'll pick one person and give you a shout out in an upcoming episode.

 Also comment below and let us know what you want to learn next.

 Before you can start walking in heels, you're going to want to pick out the perfect pair.

 And to this, we're going to add some minced sun-dried tomatoes.

 Fantastic bit of serrano ham and some really nice roasted pork.

 Hey Crafters, I'm Lisa Fulmer and today we're playing with Spellbinders.

 premium craft foils and I've been embossing them in their EmbossAbilities 3D embossing

 Try blending an iridescent medium with the silver paint, about 3 to 1, and this gives

This makes the wood look more like a piece of sheet metal and that's

 Weave embossing folder along with several colors of their craft foils.

 folder has the raised pattern and that's where you're going to place your foil.

 colored side up, the back side is silver, to get an emboss or put the colored side down

Close the foil inside the folder and sandwich it between the pink embossing

 plate and the special raspberry adapter plate and then run it through the Grand Calibre.

After you've embossed all your squares, take a marker and mark the corners so that

 you can punch some little 1-16th inch holes to insert some mini brads.

 sanding block to remove a little color for a more distressed look.

 first because I could eyeball the distance and then I added the outer rows evenly on

I used dimensional glue dots, one on each corner plus one in the center.

 The dimensional glue dots allow for just that little sliver of space between the foil

 on the board for the wire wrapping and the brad prongs to rest.

 embossing folder is going to give me some great random texture to accent each one of

I'm using a darker contrasting color foil as a frame for my metal tags.

 circles out of the embossed foil and distress them lightly with a sanding block.

 circle to the upper center area of each square and then we're going to add these cute little

 metal stamped circle tags to hang off the bottom of each circle.

 it into the eye screw and close it off with a second pair of pliers.

Get yourself some of the 3D Embossabilities folders, some craft foil, you're going to

 So for example in Chi Sao, when applying the Yiu Ma, we do not overturn because there

 will be a longer way for my hand to travel to do a second movement.

 So when we Chi Sao, we always attack from where the original position is.

 In a real fight situation, I would apply it this way because you won't be able to do it

 This technique is against somebody with the arm fully extended.

 So if you get a line and the toe is touching the line when we turn, if we turn correctly,

 So if you keep turning on a ball of foot, you'll keep coming forward.

 If you turn on a heel, all the way on a heel, you'll be going backwards.

 So when we do a side stance, same as the Silim Tao we mentioned before, the back of the skull

 There you can find nail art kits available for purchase with everything you'll need to

 Also be sure to enter the promo code getnailed at checkout for 15% off your purchase.

 It is Essie Looking for Love and this is a lace design so you're going to get this nail

 And then on my middle finger I'm going to get the pen and just draw a shape.

 And for this finger, out of the corner you're going to do the same oval shapes.

 And then on your pinky you're going to draw a half circle in this corner.

 So just let this dry for a few minutes and then apply your top coat and that's all you

 Today we're going to look at how to play a song by Minus the Bear, Get Me Naked 2, Electric

 The song starts off with a very cool tapping riff over a three chord chord progression.

 You start tapping on the 10th fret on the 5th and 2nd string in unison.

 The first tap is almost going to be a mute in comparison to the second tap which is a

 full fretting of both the strings at the 10th fret and then you're going to pull off up

 You then move to the first string 10th fret, tap that note and pull off and then you are

 going to move up to the 12th fret and you're going to roll your fingers.

 You're going to tap the 12th fret on the 5th string and then the 12th fret on the 1st string

 It also happens to be the same chord shape for all three chords.

 It starts the 3rd fret on the 5th string with your ring finger.

 Your index finger is going to go on the 1st fret of the 2nd string and your pinky will

 You shift that chord up to the ring finger 7th fret, tap the melody once, shift to the

 It's still using the same three chords but now it's more of a melody just based on an

 You have a picked arpeggio and then it moves down to the D and you have a pull off on the

 1st string, 5th fret with a slide on the 2nd string and then it moves down to the 3rd

 The verse riff in the song is actually also the last chorus of the song following the

 It's the most challenging riff in the song but it is the coolest riff without a doubt.

 But what we're going to do is we're actually going to start at the E this time, 7th fret,

 5th string and the tapping melody starts at the 10th fret very much like the intro of

 What's different is we're adding one additional note when we shift to the 12th fret to tap

 and that pattern is going to maintain all the way through where we have the same type

 of unison tap to begin and we're going to have a roll, tapping from the 5th to the 2nd

 to the 1st string and then as the chord shifts with each tapped melody, the tapped melody

 So your left hand is essentially moving downward towards the nut of the guitar while your tapping

 hand is moving higher up the fretboard as you go and it resolves with a single note

 tapped melody just on the 1st and 2nd string while you hold that C chord on the 3rd fret.

 The bridge of the song begins with a 10th fret or essentially a G chord in this case,

 Then it goes into what's essentially a syncopated rhythm using our same favorite chord shape

 where we're going to start at the 7th fret E, you're going to mute on the downstroke

 strum on the upstroke and you're going to play the same chord, muted downstroke, strum

 on the upstroke at the 10th fret and you're going to slide that shape all the way to 12

 making an A chord and then that goes down to the 5th fret D shape and you're just going

 The second segment starts at the A chord, 12th fret, you're going to mute on the down

 Your chord shape does the same thing, it's going to move to E, strum, mute down, strum

 It's going to go A, 12, 7, E, 10, G, 5, D and it just cycles back and forth between

 Check back in the near future for more instructional videos on Minus the Bear songs as well as

I'm Eric Lain-Lan and this week it's all about juicy plum and spices.

 I'm going to show you how to make a tarte fin with roasted plum and cinnamon crumble.

 On the way home, grab a packet of buttered puff pastry from the supermarket and that's it.

 I'm going to use plum because they are lovely and they are in season at the moment.

 But if you've got some other fruit like apricot or anything else, you can use them.

 You can use all your leftovers and you can really play around with it.

 Roll the sheet being careful not to place too much pressure downward as you roll.

 Don't stretch it because it's going to stretch back when it's going to cook and go in the oven.

 Brush each pastry base with egg which will give it a lovely golden colour.

 We don't want our pastry to rise too much so in the centre I'm just going to prick it with a fork.

 I'm going to move that aside and start to put the fruit on the top.

 The only thing you have to remember when you cook with plums is that they are very sour and acidic.

 On this occasion, because we're going to add a crumble on the top, that's going to cut through and give some sweetness to it.

 But when you make other recipes, it's always worth roasting your plums.

 To be honest, this is not a celebration cake, it's not a wedding cake.

 This is just all about the flavours, the flakiness of the pastries.

 If you cook it as it is, when you eat it, it will just turn into a cake.

 If you cook it as it is, when you eat it, it will just take your mouth away.

 You can see the crumble is nice and chunky and lovely, lovely dark colour.

 It's all going to caramelise and definitely boost the flavour of the plum.

 Carefully slide them on the tray to give them as much heat as possible.

 I'm going to slide it back to my baking tray, so you have to be careful when you do that.

 For more baking adventures and delicious recipes, don't forget to subscribe to the channel.

 Next week on Baking Mad Monday, I've got a sexy surprise for you.

And then the last thing you're going to need other than coffee is a little

But we've got my coffee cup here and I'm just going to add in the

So you're going to kind of want to mix that in and you can see it's not quite enough

So we're going to add a little bit more and you can see it kind of coming together.

 Now what you want to do here is you're really looking for not really a paste because I find

 a paste is too thick but you're just looking for like a smooth pancake batter.

 I'm going to stir a little bit faster just to make sure that it's smooth.

 of coffee and kind of temper it like you would with making candy or chocolate.

 stir quite vigorously just to make sure that you don't have any lumps.

 in there but you should be able to get those with just the back of your spoon.

 thing about the caramel latte is that it does kind of have a little kind of a real latte

So it kind of gives you the feeling that you're having a really special drink.

 First thing you're going to want to do is to remove the shift knob, get the car into

 neutral and then just kind of grab it with two hands and pop it straight out.

 to use, if you can, if you have something that's plastic that can get under here, that's

I've got a screwdriver here and I put on some painters tape in order just

 connections you can see under here that can be disconnected in order to lift it completely

You can also get to any of the lights that are located here and underneath here.

 I'm going to choose not to actually remove those because I can actually get under here

Then you just lift this up and then you can remove and take the unit

Then the release is just by pushing in the two ends and off it comes and

 if you needed to change any of the other switches or the light bulbs or anything like that,

 Hey everyone, this is Sarah with SewingPartsOnline.com and did you know there are some fabrics that

 I'm going to talk about what they are and how to start using them with your projects.

 So there's a few reasons you're going to love these Wonder Clips.

 Okay, with some fabrics you can't use pins in or you don't really want to use pins in

 Things like your laminates, your vinyls, leather, fabrics like that.

 Same as with like silks or satins, normally you have to stick to the seam allowance.

 But if you're using these, you're not going to damage the fabric.

 I'll show you how easily it's going to glide through the sewing machine.

 Alright calling all quilters, with these Wonder Clips you'll be able to add binding pretty

 You may know how with pins, when you have a good thick quilt, they can start to ripple

 These since they're so strong, clip right in and you're good to go.

 Now also on the back side of this, if you need to, there are little tiny markings here.

 So if you want to use a zipper foot, this can act as a seam gauge.

 So I'll show you really quick how this works with all those thick fabrics.

 Now if you normally sew your binding onto the edge and then turn it over to cover these

 raw edges and hand sew it down, you don't have to do that anymore.

 Because if you want to take your Wonder Clips and just line it right up against that edge,

 have it lined up right against the back so you know that you're not nicking into this,

 the bobbin will be right along there, but that you're sure to be nicking the front,

 you can get a zipper foot out so right along this edge, the back will look nice and clean

 The last thing I want to point out about these is that if you're trying to teach your children

 how to sew, this is the best thing you can buy because they don't hurt, they're great

 for little fingers, and unlike pins, they're not going to prick anyone or risk pins falling

 So if you have children and you want to teach them how to sew, these are the perfect tool

 To purchase your Wonder Clips, visit us online at SewingPartsOnline.com, on Google Plus,

 Now this is going to be the basic bracelet and I'm just going to show you what you need for this.

 Okay, so the first thing you want to do is make sure you have the rainballoon with the arrow pointing away from you.

 Okay, so now we're actually going to band our loom for the bracelet.

 So I'm going to start with the pink bands because there's 13 of them and you need the,

 you're going to kick it off with the one that you have the most of.

 So start in the middle peg and you just loop it over the peg to the right.

 Then you're going to take your next color and you're just going to put it over the band,

 the peg that you just put the pink one on and loop it over the one to the left.

 And you are literally just going to be crossing them over just like this the whole way up the loom.

Pick any colors you want and just keep going all the way until you get to the very end.

 Okay, so this is what your rainballoom should look like after you put all the bands on.

 So you're going to start on the side that's on the opposite side of the arrow.

 you're going to take the hook and you're literally going to loop the band that's underneath.

 You're going to take it and you're going to pull it off the peg

 And then you're going to take the band over here, for me it's the pink,

 You can just take your fingers to hold down the other band so it doesn't come up.

 So now I'm going to reach down, I'm going to grab this band, underneath here my white one,

 And you're just going to keep going down the loom all the way until you get to the end.

 And take the pink, pull it off the peg, and loop it over this one.

 Okay, so when you're done, the pattern should look like this all the way.

 So the first step before you actually take your hook and start making the bracelet,

 make sure your loom is facing with the arrow pointing towards you now.

 So you're going to take your hook and you're going to take a C-clip now.

 So I'm going to pull, and you're going to start at the end where the arrow is facing down.

 Make sure that you're hooking to both of the bands, not just one.

 And you're just simply now going to lift peg by peg each of the elastics off.

 And you can see the bracelet being created as you're pulling them off.

 And again, just pulling them off just like this all the way until you get to the end.

 Okay, now before I get to the very end and pull the last bands off,

 I'm going to take my C-clip where I have it double banded already,

 and I'm just going to put the C-clip right over the single band that I actually started with.

 So I'm going to pull the last bands off, and just like that, you have the bracelet completed.

 So I have my pink and white striped basic bracelet for the rain balloon.

If I have some time, maybe I'll experiment and do something a little more fancier.

 typically this is the chocolate Shakeology recipe that I make and that I love and enjoy

But to make this recipe, my easy peasy everyday chocolate Shakeology recipe, that's

I just use one of those and you can just bring one of those to work.

 you work from home, you can have one obviously in your kitchen.

 can just keep one of those in your kitchen, write your name all over it, lock it up, and

 much ice you put in it will cause it to be either thicker or not as thick.

 don't know, it's about, what is that, about three quarters of the way full.

 of the bag so I'm going into my individual packet supply that I have.

 to lose weight but if you're trying to lose weight, calories are important and do matter.

 is if I put my Shakeology in first, it just gets stuck there at the bottom.

So if I put the powder in first, it's going to get all down in there.

And I measured this before I did this video and it is about one and a half cups

 as far as the top so it doesn't overflow, which is about one and a half cups.

So make sure if you're watching this on YouTube, go to my blog, trevdbfit.com

 and you can search for this post, Shakeology recipes, and you can get all the recipes you

If you haven't created a free Team Beachbody account and I'm not your official Team Beachbody

 see free Team Beachbody account on the right hand side of the page.

 Learning a motor skill like swimming involves change in behavior that result from practice

As a swimming instructor, your job is to support and encourage learning by

 observing your students and providing them with the encouragement and corrective feedback

 understand the common progressions that occur when learning basic swimming skills.

 take a look at some of the common progressions your students will experience with three basic

 swimming skills, breath control, swimming on the front, and swimming on the back.

 Proper breath control and rhythmic breathing are essential for learning how to swim.

 important to breathe in and out rhythmically when performing strokes such as the front

You want to encourage them to start with submerging their mouths,

 submerging their heads, they're ready for the next skill, blowing bubbles.

 your students will often blow bubbles without submerging their heads, and when they do submerge

 fully, they bob up quickly and often wipe the water off their faces.

 breathing, bobbing up and down, inhaling as their mouths break the surface, then exhaling

Most important of all, they've overcome their fear of submerging their head

 need to learn how to achieve, maintain, and recover from a float position.

 of support techniques that you'll learn in another section of this video.

 able to float motionless, but this should not affect their swimming progress.

 show them how to curl their knees to their chest and push their hands down through the water.

 glide, you can begin to introduce different leg actions and arm actions.

 you should give them the choice of several kicks without naming them as flutter, scissors, or

Rather, allow them to experiment with the experience, the feeling of kicking.

 or simultaneously, as long as they're moving their arms in the water and experiencing how that feels.

 Now let's take a look at swimming on the back to see how the basic progressions develop.

 students may be uncomfortable when they're first learning this skill.

You can help the students progress by using a variety of support

 techniques, such as the hip support on back or the back support position.

 feeling of the water holding them up, they'll relax and progress to a position that will allow

Many students will not float horizontally with their toes out of

The key is to be floating unsupported with their faces clear of the water.

 less buoyant students to use hand motions, such as thinning or sculling, to help keep them more

 the back glide, the first experience you want to encourage is simply to move through the water.

 like the front glide, they can experiment with any kick or arm movement.

 skills can be a challenging and rewarding experience for both you and your students.

 You need to continually reassure your students that learning anything takes practice and time,

 and that the experience of learning how to swim, how to feel comfortable, and enjoy being in the

 Hello this is HowToBob and today we're going to use the Power Juicer Pro.

 thing we're going to do is take it apart and show you what the insides look like.

 So we'll take the locking bar down and we'll remove the lid and the pulp guard

 large pieces of fruit that are left over after you get done juicing.

 going to take off the blade and to do that you grab the crescent tool, hold on

 to the filter and simply spin it counterclockwise and remove the blade.

 Be very careful because there are a lot of sharp edges on this blade.

 And that has the removable spout at the bottom that's used to fill up your glass

So go ahead and put this back together and get started on juicing.

 put the filter in the slot, put the blades back on, hand tighten it first,

 then grab your crescent tool, hold the filter and slightly tighten the blades.

Go ahead and put the lid back on and then we're going to put the pusher in.

 our oranges peeled, go ahead and turn the machine on, let it start running and

 grab a piece of orange, set it in there, and you're going to get the pusher and

 gently push down on the orange until the pusher goes all the way down.

 And we'll just keep putting orange pieces into the juicer until we have enough juice.

 And like I said for this demonstration we left the spout closed just to see how much juice we would get.

 You can typically leave the spout open and the juice will come out as you push down on the orange.

 As you push down on the pusher and the fruit is creating juice.

 As you can see back here the pulp is starting to push to the back of the machine.

 First thing we're going to do is unplug it, take out the pusher, and lower the locking bar.

 Now as you can see around the top, the lid, that's where all the pulp is.

 And a lot of it was pushed into the pulp receptacle or the pulp collector.

 And this is how to make orange juice with the Power Juicer Pro.

 Today I am going to share a rice recipe that is a tempered rice with nice vegetable we

 So you can take some cluster beans and you can cut it into nice length.

 If you want big pieces you can cut it into more of big pieces also.

 I cut it into medium pieces and this we are going to use it and some fresh coconut, peanuts

 Add some oil and once the oil is hot you can use whichever tempering you want.

 Today I am using all the tempering which we use for our lemon rice and tamarind rice.

 If you want you can skip some of the ingredients but I love to add this chana dal, urad dal

 So here the oil is hot we are going to add mustard seeds, cumin seeds, urad dal, chana

 If I am making such type of rice dear friends I love to add lot of green chillies because

 I won't cook the onions too much when I make such type of rice because I want the crunchiness

 Now we are going to add the cluster beans and also very little of turmeric.

 If you want white in color then don't add the turmeric and you will get a nice white

 rice and little bit dal in between and you will get little bit green color that is the

 You can create your own variation and make different kinds of rice by using different

 I do that every time in my house because you know kids won't love to eat the vegetables

 This is the best way mix everything and you give it they will just take a spoon and they

 Now we are going to add salt first little then later on we are going to increase the

 We are going to cover this with a lid and cook for 3 to 4 minutes in a slow flame so

 that our cluster beans will cook little bit or otherwise what you can do is take the cluster

 beans and put it in a hot water and boil it for 2 to 3 minutes then they will become soft.

 So friends after 3 minutes of slow simmering if you want you can add little bit of water

 for cooking your cluster beans because cluster beans take little bit time to cook and for

 such type of rice you know don't over cook your cluster beans we want that al dente you

 know the bite of the cluster beans then only you will have a good taste.

 If you want you can add otherwise you can skip and here is the rice the cooked rice

 you know usually I do it regularly in the evening because if I keep the morning curries

 for my son and you know my husband they will tell me the same old curries please we don't

 So what I do if I have rice I will try to make different kinds of rice and you can see

 Now last we are going to add some fresh chopped coriander and some freshly grated coconut

 also if you want you can add lot of it but my rice is little bit so I am not adding too

 Mix it and also last we are going to take some peanuts and we are going to put it in

 dingchik crush it little bit these are roasted peanuts and now chop it off.

 This is optional if you have it you can use it otherwise you already added coconut that

 is the freshly grated coconut so you can skip the peanuts but I love the crunchiness in

 between so add it mix it check the taste so that we can you know adjust the seasoning.

 Super I can add little salt, salt is very less but taste wise its super and super nice

 crunchiness from the dal, peanuts and the cluster beans in between and even the chili

 dear friends which we added initially this chili also you can have it along with the

 rice this will taste excellent if you want you can squeeze in some lime juice but not

 Evening you need not worry if your rice is ready take any vegetable create your own ideas

 So dear friends I hope you enjoyed this simple simple cluster beans rice if you like it make

 it and also share it with your friends so that everybody can have fresh food.

 Hey, I'm Caroline Shin and I'm here with my grandma, Sunoh Kim, who is one of the best

 cooks and so today she's going to be teaching us how to make Korean food.

 And I thought, in the spirit of seasonality, why not make cheonggak kimchi, which is young

 Now you can get this at any grocery store, you can get this at many of the Korean restaurants

 But, you know, my grandma being the excellent, excellent cook that she is, she's going to

 Young radishes, fish sauce, ground red pepper flakes, garlic, sea salt, scallions, and sugar.

 So you'll take maybe about a tablespoon of the sea salt and just kind of sprinkle it

 The chemical compounds of unrefined sea salt help retain crispness.

 And when you first came to America, was there anything that surprised you?

 I didn't have any Koreans, and I was the only one who was in a hurry, so I couldn't even talk.

 And when I went into an apartment, there were Korean people in there.

 We leave this in room temperature for about two days so that it ferments.

 After two days, we put it in the fridge, and then it's ready to be eaten.

 So the radish is sweeter, softer, and definitely doesn't have that freshly spicy taste to it.

 So if you also have a hankering for something spicy, something Korean,

 head on over to a grocery store where they have some young radish and make yourself some kimchi.

 Once again I'm here with you with another one of my Monday Makeup Chats.

 In today's chat I'm going to go over simple contouring steps that you can take for your

 So if you have an oval shaped face, there's really no need to specifically contour one

 area of your face more than the other because it is symmetrical and we consider that the

 If you have a heart shaped face, you want to create the illusion that you have more

 And if you have a heart shaped face, what that means is that the forehead and the temples

 are wider than the chin and the jaw area, kind of like a heart.

 So what you want to do is you want to contour specifically the temples and the forehead

 to shade down those areas and give the illusion that the light is happening right in the middle

 If you have a round shaped face, which means that the circumference of your face is pretty

 round all the way around, there's no strong jaw or strong forehead, you want to contour

 your cheek area and you want to contour at a parallel level to your eye and to your lip.

 So what you want to do is you want to take your contour line starting at the ear and

 So kind of like right straight across, halfway between your eye and your lip.

 And that will give your round face more dimension by contouring right into the center.

 If you have a square shaped face or a very short face, your contouring benefit will come

 It will give your face more depth and more length in it because by contouring down, you

 will create the illusion that your cheekbones aren't sitting high up on your cheek, but

 they are actually elongated and almost go all the way down to where the top of the lip

 So your contour line should be up right in here and your cheek color should sit right

 If you have more of a square shaped face specifically, then that means that the forehead width and

 So you want to contour down your temples and contour down your chin and jaw area.

 Now when you're contouring down your chin and jaw area, you don't want to just leave

 the contour right here because there's a chance that you'll look like you have just a big

 blotch of bronzer or contouring powder right along the jaw area.

 You want to actually take it and follow it down underneath the jaw and down to the sides

 I really don't want to see contour lines and bronzers all in here and not in the hairline.

 So try to do your makeup before you do your hair because your hair, once you blow dry

 it and this and that, it's really hard to get color up into the hairline.

 But if you pull your hair all the way back when you're contouring or bronzing your temples,

 get the product and powder into the hairline, especially if you have thinner hair.

 And if you pay attention to her bronzer and her contour around her temple area, you'll

 see that the color always goes all the way up into the hairline.

 I hope you guys enjoyed this contouring basics for your face shape video.

 Please subscribe to my channel because I post every single week new pro makeup artist tips.

 Also follow me on Instagram and Twitter, at MatthiasForMakeup, for my behind the scenes

 And stay tuned because there are two more videos for you guys to check out right here

 I post three times a week and I do a Monday makeup chat, I do a Fierce Face Friday, and

 I do weekly beauty tutorials and demos and recommendations and makeup hauls for you guys

 So please stay with me, explore my channel, leave me a thumbs up if you enjoyed this video,

 Leave me a comment down below and I will return that with a reply.

 If you have any questions of anything that I've gone over, please let me know.

 To make the dough in a large bowl, add in the flour, the salt and a quarter teaspoon

 Using your fingers, combine the flour and ghee to make coarse crumbs.

 Cover the dough with a wet muslin cloth and allow it to rest for about 30 minutes.

 too much while shaping them as this can cause cracks in the Balushahi.

 once again with a wet muslin cloth and allow it to rest for another 15 minutes.

Once you notice the dough balls come floating up to the surface, flip over and

 on medium heat and not get the heat too high so that Balushahis get cooked evenly and browned

Once both the sides are browned well, drain and continue the same frying process

 In a saucepan, add in a cup of sugar and a quarter cup of water.

 on medium heat and stir the mixture until the sugar is dissolved completely.

 thread consistency when you touch the sugar syrup between your fingers.

 it sticky and when the syrup drips from the spoon, it will look like a longer drop.

 We will now dip each of the fried doughs one at a time in the sugar syrup until it gets

 the Balushahis with the pistachios and allow them to rest until the sugar hardens.

 these delicious flaky Balushahis for Diwali and share it with friends and family who come

So today we'll be cooking some breakfast and we're gonna be cooking a Turkish breakfast called miniman

 This one is optional, but it's a pepperoni I like it and cheese so let's cook

 So first take your pan and then your butter and put some in your pan

 While your butter is melting now we can take our tomato and begin

 This is a lot of pepper I know but I love it so now we crack an egg

 And you know, I just I just mix it I don't I don't care how it looks and also this one needs more tomato

 I don't know why but you know, I'm gonna eat it anyway because the taste will be

 So, hey guys, I know it's some kind of a fail because I didn't put enough tomato in it, but that's it I'm gonna eat it

 So comment down below so I'll be cooking more because I normally cook by myself.

 So what I'm going to do, I usually leave one grate out so I can deal with the fire.

 By using the leftover charcoal I notice I don't get the flare-ups in my coal chimney.

 So I'm going to get these out of my coal chimney and get my fire started.

 I usually don't use newspaper because I think the newspaper is flying around all over the balcony.

 And I keep them on there for a while longer to get the skin a little crisper.

 Then I'm going to throw them in the barbecue sauce and move it over there.

 dryer, first remove the screws at the back securing the top panel.

Open the dryer door and remove the remaining two front panel mounting screws.

 Now use a flathead screwdriver to depress the locking tabs and pull the front panel

 wire harness from the twist retainers and set the bracket aside.

 bulb wire and remove the wire harness from the bulkhead twist retainers if you haven't

Reach under the drum and push the idler pulley to release the tension on

Remove the mounting bolt and pull the old idler pulley assembly off of the motor

Install the new idler pulley assembly by positioning it on the motor bracket.

 the drum to the dryer cabinet and align it on the rear rollers.

 panel with the slots in the trim and snap the top edge into place.

 panel by aligning the edge of the panel with the tabs on the support bracket.

 all those people that are asking how you use the BB Super Grow or the Africa's Best.

 got out of the shower right now and my hair is still, it's not wet, wet, wet, but it's

 the B&B or the Africa's Best right there and you take it, and this is how much I use.

 take it out and you just put about, I don't know if you can see that or not, you just

 it and then you just run your hands through your hair like this.

 it whichever direction you want to brush it so the grease can get worked into the hair

I mean you want to put gel in it afterwards, just let it dry for a little bit and style

 and it promotes real nice hair growth and it keeps your hair healthy.

And then you pull it back so that the hair is still going in the same direction

Now if you brushed it forward you want to make it so that this right

 you're tightening it down and everything like that you can pull it forward and your hair

 for everybody that's out there and is viewing my videos and stuff like that.

 I wanted to know, I'm here in the Dallas Fort Worth area and I recently found Rastafari

 and I was wondering if there's anybody out there that's here in the Dallas Fort Worth

 Hey there, I'm Ryan and I'd like to welcome you to another painting tutorial.

 So like any other painting I go in with a thin base, it has no detail at all.

 If anything it's just going in the direction of the stroke that I want later and it's just

 to give me a general idea and make sure my proportions and everything's right before

 So I don't do like one area really nice, one area really nice and then just have them not

 This is just a really good way to make sure you're not going to have to backtrace your

 After that, after all of this is done I'm going to move in with this brush because I

 Because painting fur, feathers, anything requires a ton of strokes and if you did it with this

 So I cut this, I'm sure you can buy similar things or use similar appliances or just cut

 But when I use this it's great because when I do the stroke it makes four or five, maybe

 Now I'm painting a fairly young owl and it's not fully developed, it's not all feathers,

 it's still in that kind of funny furry phase birds go through, right?

 But I will add some slight feathers like above the eye just to show that they're developing,

 Now if you too are working with a feathered, furred kind of animal you're lucky, like me

 So it's not hard to distinguish the areas and where it blends together, it's pretty

 And then that's where I go into the little brush, the brush no one sees it.

 But what I do with this, it's not too much because we covered most of it with our other

 I go in with a dark colour, perhaps a black or a dark brown in this case, and I go in

 from the sides and I do a couple of strokes, not too many because you don't want it to

 overwhelm it, but going against the direction of my previous strokes.

 And what this does, it separates the colour, it adds another layer, but it does leave your

 darkest colour on top, which generally looks a little bit awkward.

 So once that's all done, I will go back to my bigger brush, lightest colour, and I'll

 slightly overlap it, just to make sure the brightest colour does come forth the most.

 And what I like to do, I do use a small brush for this, I like to add a heavy shine for

 what's reflecting directly off of the eye, if there is anything, and I make that a solid

 And I kind of like to feather it off into the eye on the edges, not much, but just enough.

 And then on the other side, I like to do a faux feathered, very light grey.

 And what this does, it just makes it a little bit more round, and I do it all in the shape

 of the eye, just to ensure it has a little bit of depth in it, because a full black eye,

 For the record, I do redo them, but it's in the same way, I just kind of turn them, so

 it doesn't look like it's going to kill you in the middle of the night.

 Sometimes I add a little bit too much white, or I make it a little too rich in the brown,

 and I find a really good, easy way to combat this little issue, is take the other colour,

 so say I put on too much white, and I want it to be a little more brown, I'll take brown,

 I'll put it on my brush, and I will really water down my brush with the paint on it.

 So when I put it on the painting, over the top of the white, it acts as a wash, and not

 You're not going to lose the original graphic, but you're going to have this colour soaked

 into it, and it can be really nice, because it can create really good green.

 Now I've found when I'm painting like this, it's going to look terrible for the majority

 of the time, and that's just something you have to accept and work through.

 Diligence, not giving up, that's all stuff you just have to drill into your head while

 You stop halfway, you might be stopping halfway to a masterpiece, you don't know.

 And even if it does turn out poorly, and you're not happy with it, at least A. you tried,

 B. you probably learned a ton, and you know what not to do next time.

 It's thorough, you went the whole nine yards, you know, it's not maybe I shouldn't have,

 And so no matter what, you're going to end up with a great lesson, or a great painting,

 Now I'm kind of strange when I paint, I like to mix the paint on the canvas.

 So I'll take brown, I'll put it on the canvas, I'll take white, I'll put it on the canvas,

 But because everything is so detailed and fine here, I find you can't really do that,

 so with animals, if that's what you are used to doing, I recommend actually blending it

 Now we've been dedicating a lot of time and effort into making everything look really

 pristine and neat and tidy, and making sure that the detail is all fine and perfect, but

 we should remember that this is a wild animal, and it probably doesn't actually look like

 So something I found I like to do is go in and be really messy in one or two to three

 And I do this just so it looks a little more natural, and it doesn't look like a model

 So anyway, after that, I just re-layered things, I finished it off, painted a background, basically

 just did more of what I was doing, and this is what I ended up with.

 I hope this has been helpful to you, and that you are able to create what you like.

 Today, out of the goodness of my heart and just because I'm an all around cool guy, I'll

 teach you how to make some hamburger helper for cheese lasagna.

 I mean, if I can tell you how to make it, it's because I'm retarded, but anyway, I mean

 You know, it's got all the instructions listed out, played out for you, everything.

 I don't know if that's a 10 inch skillet or not, but you can see there's beef in there

 Alright, first step in this process is to add 1 3 4ths cup of milk.

 Alright, now we need to add this little packet that comes in the box.

 I was going to say the noodles are easier to open, but that's a lie.

 Alright, now that we have that, we have to turn up the heat a wee bit and we need to

 So I thought, why not make a quick video on how to prep a new airbrush.

 Now what we're going to do is completely dismantle the airbrush.

 If you're not confident in doing this, do a quick Google search and look for something

 You may also need some plumbing tape and some very handy 3-in-1 machine oil.

 You can get from any good hardware store or even your local retailer like Kmart or something

 I'm just going to unscrew the handle, loosen the needle chuck and lightly, twisting as

 Now this little screw here holds a spring for it and it's what gives the trigger its

 So because this screw holds a spring, it's called a spring screw.

 This should just be able to pull the trigger out and this little wing lever.

 It's all coming apart pretty easily which is, I don't know, good.

 Being very careful with this part because it houses your needle tip.

 Now if I look closely at this tip, it looks as though it has a little rubber seal on it.

 Just grab the little spanner that comes in the kit and I'll align that.

 Now the reason you don't want to use rubber seals is because if you're using solvent based

 So make sure that you get an airbrush that has Teflon seals or the equivalent of a solvent

 So I've just cut off a tiny little slice of this plumbing tape and I've wrapped it.

 But as we do, we're going to use this machine oil to lubricate every thread.

 It's important to keep the airbrush lubricated because all your parts stay smooth.

 But it also seals any parts of the airbrush which may otherwise get an air leak.

 I'm just going to, with my fingers, I'll just grease up this little wing lever a tiny bit.

 Now holding the airbrush at this angle so that the wing lever doesn't fall forward,

 And now we're just going to completely loosen the needle chuck.

 The second last thing to do is to just screw on your crown if you want to use it.

 Now this felt a little bit rough so I just put a little bit of machine oil on my finger

 And I want you to put your little finger on the very edge of the needle chuck like this.

 I want you to slowly guide the tip of the needle into the chuck.

 Now you notice as I am putting this needle back in that I'm twisting it.

 So let it sit in the tip and tighten your needle chuck all the way.

 Now if you ever have any problems and you can't figure out what's going on with your

 airbrush, go through the process that we've just done including checking if anything is

 And 9 times out of 10 you're going to solve your problem just by re-lubricating every

 This is the best advice I can give you for how to maintain an airbrush.

 If you've picked up anything new or you feel that this is something that one of your friends

So, I've got here a pan, a touch of oil in there, I'm using sunflower.

 curry powder if you want, but what I've got here is equal parts, like one teaspoon each,

 of cumin, coriander, turmeric and chilli powder, and a little touch of garam masala powder.

 I'm going to add a little bit of cinnamon, whole cinnamon, some cumin seeds, and a couple

 minutes on this side, then we're going to flip them over, cook them for another four

These are not cooked all the way through, far from it yet, but we certainly

 have given them a nice head start and got some beautiful flavours in there.

 got some fresh curry leaves, and you can get these, they're fantastic.

Some more of our powders, either your favourite curry powder, or what I call the

Now some sliced onions, red onion I'm using, I just prefer red, so for white

 in. While I go with the lid, I'm on a kind of medium to high heat, I'll be back here

 starting to cook down nicely, and of course we've added lots more beautiful flavour now

 to stir these in now, keep them on the top, lid's going to go back on, about five minutes,

 they should break down nicely and create a beautiful sauce or gravy for us.

 take a look, let me try and get some steam out first, otherwise it's going to steam up

 you can see we've got quite a lot of juice happening now, these tomatoes have really

 tomatoes are or not, but these are pretty good, we've got a nice lot of moisture.

 I'm going to lower the heat now, and with the lid off I'm going to cook this for another

 got some nice lamb there, it's really worth it to add some fresh mint.

 we've hundreds and hundreds, literally, of different recipes from all around the world.

 Anyway, a lot of people have been watching my video on somebody that I used to know.

 So I'm going to teach it to you as best as I can and I'm going to kind of give you just

 the guideline to it and then I don't have tabs or anything like that, sorry for you

 tab guys out there, but just take a look at what I'm doing and then hopefully you can

 learn it and then hopefully you have some happy guitar playing and you can play this

 Okay, first we're going to start off with our D minor chord at the fifth fret, just

 And I'm going to kind of start the groove to the song where I'm hitting notes with my

 And I'm going to do a pick of all three strings here, backwards strum with my fingers and

 When I get to this chord, this is a C, I've got a strong bar there and my little finger

 Alright, now we've got to get to the twinkle, twinkle part there.

 So if you can't, take some more lessons and keep working on scales and things like that.

 I'm going to hit these two together and then do another little backwards strum.

 And I have to switch chords, so this is kind of stretchy when you have to put your third

 Then you put this finger down, middle finger, back to your D minor seven here.

 You'll notice that the melody is going da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, okay?

 So I'm going to hit that note with my thumb and middle finger there.

 And then you've got to hit this, that, and then we go to that, okay?

 Alright, so we're pretty much playing that D minor to C the whole time, okay?

 You'll notice I'm using my third finger for a lot of that melody stuff.

 Okay, one cool part that you may have seen in my videos where I did...

 So I'm kind of just really jamming out on strings five, four, and three.

 If you want to show off, you can bring your finger around and get that C.

 So you've got to have your little finger there on the tenth fret.

 On the part where it's somebody I used to know, it's a D minor.

 Hi everyone, in this video I want to show you how to make a stunning ribbon bow

 wide and we're going to need to make two patterns for this ribbon bow so let's go

 long and if you want to make a different size of bow you just measure the size

 is going to be the white and we're going to need for that four and a half inch

 ok now we have two stripes these are two patterns for our ribbon bow one is six

 layer and we're going to begin with tearing a piece of 12 inch long ribbon

 now with sharp scissors just cut off the edge on the right side and on the left

 that's one side and now the other side too but leave the center attached don't

 place one cut edge onto the other cut edge and when you have them both good in

 your fingers just take the white stripe that we prepared before and tie these

 ok now that we're done with this hold all the loops between your fingers of

 now as you see over here I pull and twist but when I pull them I bring the

 what I did before is actually I pulled them more to the sides because I want

 the ribbon loops to be also like laying down and also pulled up in the center

 ok that's what we get when we finish you can always straighten it out a little

 ok this bow is actually the smaller layer and soon we're going to make the

 wedding cars, bridal showers, decorations for holidays, for birthdays.

 two together, I don't use glue, I actually pull through the leftover white thin

 Now if you use this on a wedding car you could just tie this to the door

 If you remember in the first garden video we did the potatoes and the bulb onions right

 I'm going to make up some of the home grown pork chops and I'm also going to make some

 So this will be the first thing I get to harvest out of this year's garden.

 What I did is I just took the biggest one and I cut it down like this here.

 And I'm going to use that tonight and this will grow all the way back up right away.

 Right here on the charcoal I have a couple baked potatoes just because whenever I do

 I'm going to put some onions in there, butter, you know, some seasoning and stuff like that.

 If you guys remember when I made this I did two ounce packages, four ounce, eight ounce,

 And I'm finding that the two ounce packages are the one I use the most.

 You can grab one of these little packages and put it in a macaroni and cheese or if

 maybe you want to put some bacon on a sandwich for work, just these little packages are really

 Oh, oh, oh, oh, oh, oh, oh, oh, oh, oh, oh, oh, oh, oh, oh, oh.

 Now that we already washed our hands, let's go ahead and open it up.

 Now that we're done spreading it out, let's add garlic spread to the dough.

 Now that we already washed our hands, let's go ahead and add the garlic spread.

 I'm going to spread it onto my side because I like ham and Brittany likes pepperoni.

 Hey everybody, this is Katherine from KatherinePillar.com and whether you say papillon, papillion,

 papillo, whatever you decide to call this stamp set, it doesn't matter because it's

 I actually did some Google searching on that and I think there's a couple different ways

 that people might decide to say that, so let me know how you say it.

 I'm going to use my embossing buddy to wipe down Baja Breeze Daffodil Delight Rich Razzleberry

 and we're going to stamp in Versamark this wonderful butterfly because that P word means

 I did a review for Stamp Nation showing you the pros and cons and comparing it to the

 Then we're going to use the Elegant Butterfly Punch which perfectly punches out these butterflies.

 I've used my 1-3 1⁄8 inch circle punch to punch out circles of the Floral District Designer

 If you're viewing on YouTube click the link below the video so you can go to my blog where

 you will see a picture of all the patterns in this paper pack and the rest of the details

 I'm adding a mini glue dot to the back of each butterfly and adhering it to the center

 I've taken my butterfly piece and backed it with a piece of Baja Breeze.

 This pink is 3-1⁄4 by 3-1⁄4 and the Baja Breeze is 3-1⁄2 by 3-1⁄2.

 I took a piece of Designer Series paper, the same that is on one of the circles, and it's

 a 4-5-1⁄4 and we'll add that to our piece of white cardstock that was cut in half and

 I've added 1-dimensional in each corner of this main image piece.

 Then I have a couple strips of Designer Series paper that I cut from the coordinating pack.

 The last little piece is a banner that I made out of Rich Razzleberry and I embossed

 I'm going to finish this card off with a piece of Rose Red Seambinding and I'm just going

 Be sure to hop over to katherinepuller.com to sign up for my newsletter.

 If you haven't already you'll get subscriber only video tutorials, projects and a monthly

 I'm going to demonstrate how to weave in ends in garter stitch.

 Garter stitch being knit every row, so you have a bumpy textured fabric.

 Here is a garter stitch sample, and the end that I have already woven in is right here,

 So I have this end to weave in yet, but for the sake of demonstration, I'm going to use

 And I'm going to, I'll just weave it in right here in the middle of the work, why not?

 In my regular weaving in ends video, I show you how to weave in ends on reverse stockinette,

 meaning that the knit side is the right side, and we weave in the end on the wrong side

 Garter stitch doesn't look all that different from reverse stockinette.

 But it does have the purl bumps and knit stitches between the purl bumps.

 But we're going to ignore the knit stitches between the purl bumps.

 And I'm going to start here in the corner, and go up through a smile, and up through

 I'm going to follow that umbrella around and go down into the smile right next to it.

 I'm going to angle my needle to the left, and go down into the umbrella, just to the

 Now I came out the bottom here, and just to the right of where I came out, there's

 I take the tip of my needle, and just for guidance, follow that smile around, and go

 Then I angle my needle to the left, and go up into the smile, up and to the left of that.

 I'm going to follow the umbrella around, go down into the smile, angle my needle to the

 Follow the smile around, go up into the umbrella, angle my needle to the left, go up into the

 You see what we're getting here, kind of this figure 8 Christmas candy shape to it.

 And it is obvious to see out of this other color of yarn, but again, it is nearly invisible

 percent of shungite is the majority of the periodic table so it remineralizes

 And this will get the powder and the residue off of the shungite.

 And then we leave that for the shungite to be able to do its job.

 it starts to bioactivate the water and you'll be a noticeable difference in the

 72 hours we recommend decanting it and so it's there to be able to drink it

 Literally, we opened the bags and we were like, alright, what do they smell like, what

 We just started riffing on the smell of the ingredients and the seasonality.

 Do you ever go shopping in the Asian markets looking for local stuff?

 I mean, now we have virtually two people that are just devoting all their time to R&D and

 we send them on missions and I think they think that it's like, oh, the chef's trying

 But really, it's about trying to wrap our heads around what possibilities are out there.

 So, one thing that makes a Tom and Jerry a Tom and Jerry is egg.

 Classically, you take your egg whites and your egg yolks, you separate them, you whip

 your egg whites to stiff peaks, you whip your egg yolks separately, you fold them together,

 So instead of going through the labor of having to whip egg whites and whip yolks, we are

 Just give it a shake to break up the yolks and break up the whites and incorporate the

 On top of this, we're going to add another element that we thought paired well with the

 So we have a roasted banana, just a normal banana, put it in the oven, 350, for about

 To me, it just makes sense, because when you make scrambled eggs at home, you season your

 I know they probably weren't expecting a cocktail, which is exactly why we did it.

 We were going to put coconut, banana, we talked about other tropical fruits or things in that

 Ultimately, we wanted to do something different than the typical stew.

 When you steep it in a fat-based liquid, whether it be coconut or milk or cream, it really

 Whereas if you don't want to sit there and eat them, they're not going to be that appealing.

 If you're outside shoveling snow, I could probably have one of these and be happy.

 If you use them on their own, they're just going to overpower everything.

 So to make a really good dish with them, you're going to have to have a finesseful hand.

 In this video I'm going to show you how to apply a media crackle paste with a palette

 Before applying the crackle paste the surface needs to be sealed so I've given this heart

 I'm just simply going to apply the crackle paste with a palette knife.

 The thicker you apply it the larger the cracks, the thinner the smaller the cracks.

 I'm applying this probably about a millimetre thick in most places.

 Now if I was to base coat this red then I'd have red showing through the cracks when the

 The paste has now dried, it's been about an hour, it's important not to heat dry it.

 We've got lovely cracks going on on the surface and I'm now going to start just to antique

 I've got a very small amount of the paint on the brush, the brush is slightly wet so

 So the next colour I'm going to apply is Transparent Red Iron Oxide.

 I'm going to do exactly the same with this colour and again just apply it in random areas

 I'm now going to use the Media Black Antiquing Cream and this is going to tie everything

 I'm just going to apply this with a brush and making sure that I get the Antiquing Cream

 Now once applied the Antiquing Cream can be left to dry naturally or it can be speeded

 Now that it's dry I'm just going to take a damp cloth and I'm just going to start wiping

 You don't want the cloth to be too wet, even a baby wipe could be too wet and you'll end

 I'm just going to gradually remove the Antiquing Cream and leave it in the crevices of the

 You can see now as the Antiquing Cream is being removed it's tied all those colours

 together and we're left with a lovely distressed, aged, crackled heart.

 For more information about the Media Range please visit www.decoart.com

 There is some chopping involved with this recipe, so make sure you have a parent to help you out.

 My family likes to use a rotini multigrain pasta, but shells and elbow macaroni work good too.

 Using different colored bell peppers makes your salad look festive.

 Place your chopped bell peppers in a large bowl and add about two cans of sliced olives.

 Turkey pepperoni is great because it has all the flavor of pepperoni, but 70% less fat.

 We like to chop up a couple slices of provolone cheese and add that in too.

 My grandmother also likes to add cherry tomatoes to hers, but we'll just add the provolone to ours.

 Next, you'll want to pour just enough olive oil over your salad so that the seasoning will stick to the pasta.

 Some people like to add a splash of vinegar, but I like it best without it.

 Thank you for watching another episode of Kids Cooking with Chloe.

We are here now with the join or die edition for Assassin's Creed 3.

 To do these videos for you guys and then I get to go play it I'm

 Once again, we have our George Washington's journal the little bookmark.

 The Assassin's Creed 3 logo on it and you open that shit up and there's a awesome looking medallion

 Yeah, that's cool, so that's actually made out of metal that's actually cold so just some cheap plasticky thing

There's the Assassin's Creed 3 join or die edition with the awesome looking medallion

 Okay y'all, what you're looking at right now is absolutely nothing.

 My hair loves it, but it's broken my skin out and on top of that, the smell does get to me sometimes.

 sometimes the shea butter, especially when I'm working out and I smell it, it's like

So mango and coconut butter are two exotic butters that I've constantly slept on.

 It is used in skin care products, lotions, massage creams, and hair care products.

 Another interesting thing about it is that it is one of the most powerful exotic butters out there.

 According to the website that I read called Quality First and some other websites as well,

 Coconut butter is one of the hardest exotic butters out there, but it's super moisturizing, super soft, super beneficial,

 and it's also been known to help with ulcerations on like your skin, your hands, or the soles of your feet.

 So, I'm like, oh, okay, so my little cracked feet, it might help with that.

 But that's a good thing to know because now that I know, or now that I, when I found that out, I was like, okay, cool, let me go ahead and go with it.

It was not sent to me for anybody to pay me to do any kind of damn thing.

 So, what my butter mix is going to incorporate all three of these.

 Now, if y'all not familiar with the Ayer-Vernig methods, like the oils and the powders, I suggest that you Google it.

 Like, really, honestly, I could tell you some stuff about it, but there's no greater way to retain information than to read it for yourself.

 So, I will try to find y'all some links to it, but once you type in Ayer into Google, a whole bunch of shit pops up.

 Okay, so, anyone that says, I can't find any information about it, you didn't look, you didn't look.

 Ever since I incorporated Ayer-Vernig methods into my hair care, my hair has been even more in love with me.

 Well, I've started using NIM on my face more consistently as well, and I have noticed a major change.

 Now, let me go ahead and make this clear to y'all real quick, because I noticed someone was like, damn, that's a lot of shit.

 The only reason I'm using this one is because I want y'all to be able to see what I am doing.

 In order for y'all to see what is being mixed and how it is looking, it must be see-through.

 First thing I'm going to do is dispense it into this bowl, and then we're going to use our homemade double boiler,

 which is nothing but hot water inside of a bowl, and this is on top of that bowl.

 It's going to melt, melt, melt, melt, melt, and then we're going to get to mixing.

 So, until next time, DIY, nappy food, remember, be natural, be nappy, be kinky, be curly for you,

 Alright, this is the follow-up video to the banjo-based version of The Beatles' Here Comes

The part I'm going to talk about is the part in the middle where we have some broken

 chords and it's just a sequence of chords C major, G major, and D major.

 a little bit about how I came up with the patterns for those and what's going on the right hand as

When we get to the middle part we have this kind of an E and then an E major triad,

And the first chord we really tackle is the C major triad, C, E, G. Now I didn't

 want to just play three eighth notes, I wanted to kind of doctor it up a little bit and I wanted to

So what I did was I created two groups of three sixteenth notes and what I

 did, how I came up with that is I played C, C, E, G, E, C. Okay, again C, C, E, G, E, C. Two groups of three but now

And with the right hand what's going on with that is just all it is

 is just the down, up, index finger pluck and same thing, down, up, index finger pluck on the C.

 Okay, the next chord is a G chord but I inverted it just to kind of make it easier on the left hand,

 this is the pretty raw version of the chord B, D, and G. So I wanted to doctor this up as well so what I

 did was I played two groups of three again B, D, G, D, B, open G. Okay, B, D, G, D, B, open G. Okay, and it's the same principle on the right hand is the C major chord.

 Down, up with the thumb, index finger pluck and same thing again, down, up with the thumb, index finger pluck on the open G. And the next chord is a D major triad which I

 inverted in pretty much the same shape as the G major chord, just moved it down to the fourth fret, F sharp here.

 Now the notes are F sharp, A, D, A, F sharp, open D. Okay, again, F sharp, A, D, A, F sharp, D, open D. And right hand is the same, down, up, index pluck, down, up, excuse me, down, up, index pluck on the open D.

So, start at the beginning again, we have an E chord and then our triad.

 So, moving on from what we talked about last week, about incorporating rhythmic phrases

 into your solos, this is incorporating intervallic phrases into your solos.

 So, in this case, I'm in the key of A minor and I'm moving up basically the pentatonic

 But for every single note, I'm stacking a fifth above that and then a fifth above that.

 So I'm starting with our root note, adding a fifth above, and a fifth above that.

 When I move to the next note in the scale to start the sequence again, it will be what

 would be the third, and I'm adding a fifth above that, and then a fifth above that.

 Moving to the next note, which will be the fourth, fifth above that, and a fifth above

 Then I move into the fifth, with a fifth above that, and then in this case, it's actually

 not a fifth above that, it will be a sixth above that to keep it in the key.

 And then the next note in the sequence is the seventh, and I'm talking about intervallic

 So fifth above that, and then fifth above that, and then starting from the root again,

 fifth above that, and then the sixth above that rather than the fifth to keep it within

 So what I could have done is add all fifths like that, which makes it sound a bit more

 modal and a bit more open, but just changing those top two notes to sixths keeps it in

 the key a little bit more, makes it a bit more minor rather than modal.

 And then I finish on the fourth fret with that home note again.

 If you want to play this in standard, anything on the top two strings need to move up one

 Here, author, fly-tire, and blogger Matt Grobert is going to tie a blue-winged olive quill

 He was introduced to the fly by Doug Freeman, a friend and member of the U.S.

 For the fly, Matt uses a size 16 barbless competition hook with a black nickel finish.

 A 2mm silver tungsten bead is added to help the fly drop quickly through the water column.

 Make sure to place the bead over the hook point small hole first, then work it around

 For thread, Matt's going to wander way out of his comfort zone and use Uni 6-0 in Fire

 With the bobbin loaded and the hook firmly secured in his tying vise, Matt starts the

 thread on the hook shank just behind the bead and takes several wraps rearward before

 Medium Pardo Coq de Lyon fibers are used for the tail, which should be kept ultra-sparse,

 Pull the fibers down perpendicular to the stem and strip them off while keeping their

 Measure to form a tail about a hook shank in length, then transfer that measurement

 rearward and begin making thread wraps to secure the fibers to the top of the hook shank.

 Take wraps rearward to just shy of where the hook starts to bend.

 A single golden olive strip peacock quill is used to form the abdomen of the fly.

 Hold the quill by the butt end and orient it so the dark edge faces back and down.

 With your tying scissors, snip the brittle tip end of the quill off at an angle, like so.

 While maintaining the same orientation, secure the point to the near side of the hook with

 a few tight turns of tying thread and then continue taking nice, even, touching thread

 With hackle pliers, get hold of the butt end of the quill and begin making touching

 Really take your time doing this and you'll be rewarded with a beautifully colored and

 When you reach the bead, take a few tight thread wraps to secure the quill.

 If your scissors are sharp enough, you can use just a single blade to cut the quill off

 Dub the smallest amount on your tying thread to form an extremely slender dubbing noodle.

 Take wraps with the noodle to build up a short little collar and follow this with a few thread-only

 Complete a 4 or 5 turn whip finish to secure your tying thread and then snip the end off

 The svelte nature of this fly, along with the weight of the tungsten bead, allow it

 to sink with little resistance and quickly get down to where the fish are, an absolute

 Today we're going to show you how to change the ice bucket on your refrigerator.

 All you're going to need is a quarter inch nut driver and a putty knife.

 Now to do this repair we're going to start by opening the freezer door, and we'll lift

 the bin out of the way here and reach in and turn the ice maker off.

 Then we're going to lift up on the ice bin itself, slide it forward, pull it right out

 of the track, and then we'll put this on a suitable work surface to do the repair.

 Now once we have the bin on a suitable work surface, we'll first of all empty any of

 the remaining ice out of it, and we're going to turn it upside down, and we're going to

 start by removing the two quarter inch hex head screws from the bottom side.

 We need to disengage this lip, and we'll use our putty knife there to pry it up far

 Turn it over, and we'll lift the top side off, as it'll lip across the front of it,

 Now along the bottom we had those two screws that hold the angle brackets in place, we

 Now we can lift that auger assembly up, and pull it out of the bin, and set that aside.

 Now we'll take the new bin, and we'll take the auger assembly, and we'll slide

 that into the opening, and we'll lift the front up enough that we can hook the tabs

 into some cut outs on the front of the bin, and that helps us align it.

 Holding that in place we'll stand it on end, and we're ready to reinstall the little

 And we'll insert the screw in the pre-drilled hole in the bin, and we won't tighten that

 Before we tighten these up we'll need to make sure the adjustment of those L brackets

 And make sure that the tabs are still lined up across the top, and tighten the screws.

 Next we'll turn it upright, and take the face cover, make sure that hook across the

 top edge is fully engaged across the front, and we'll flip it upside down, and we'll

 make sure that it goes out over the top of those angle brackets, and with our putty knife

 we'll just work that left side into place, and we're ready to reinstall the two screws

 Check the operation of the auger to make sure it still turns freely, and now we're ready

 Now to reinstall the ice bin, we'll open the freezer door, align it in the track, slide

 it all the way back until it locks in place, we'll reach in and turn the ice maker back

 Alright guys, so last week we worked on an interval cardio workout and within that workout

 Well often times I get the question on how can I improve my sprints?

 Alright, well there's a couple different ways that we can work on this.

 The first way is just start with your feet shoulder width apart, lean forward, let your

 gravity take you forward, and you're going to lean into your sprint.

 That's one of the best ways to learn how to get a good start with your sprint.

 Find a line, find a steady point, make sure there's nothing in the way you're going to

 trip over, feet shoulder width apart, lean forward, catch yourself in your stride.

 Something else you want to remember, when doing sprints, you just want to be on the

 If you're a distance runner, you know you have a mid foot strike.

 When you're a sprinter, you want to be on the balls of your feet, driving your knees

 Cheek to cheek with your arm swing, rather than a short, shallow arm drive as you would

 So as we lean forward, you get that knee drive, and you get that arm swing with your take off.

 These are just a couple ways on how to build back up to sprinting if you notice that you're

 not sprinting at the speed that you want, not getting the time that you want in practice

 These are just a couple of different ways to improve on your sprint technique.

 I want to show you my new artist easel that I've designed from the ground up.

 And I tried to think about all the things that you want in an artist easel and I built

 Number one, there's plenty of leg room so that you're not cramped when you're sitting

 You've got plenty of room for your legs and even if you want to get in here close, you've

 Once it's mounted on the easel, it's just like painting on a wall.

 And so that rigidity is great, especially if you're using a projector and projecting

 an image on here where if you wiggle your canvas, it changes where the image is projected.

 Number three, it should be really easy to raise and lower your canvas.

 So that if I just have a single knob that I have to turn here and just with a single

 hand because of the counterweight system, very easily can lower it way down or way up.

 It's just a single knob and a big turn and real easy and then it's locked down, rock

 The way this canvas is supported on here with these clamps that I've invented is that it

 And so instead of having the canvas get loose because you're clamping it, it actually tightens

 And that makes it really nice because it keeps your canvas nice and tight.

 So the way these clamps work on the easel is that in a normal easel, it's like this

 You would put your canvas there and then lower this clamp down and that works the way a traditional

 And the reason I have this designed in there is in case you're using a panel that you can't

 pull from the back, just a solid piece of wood, you can mount your canvas like that.

 But what the Geneva easel does is instead of just squeezing it like that, instead we

 just hang it there on those two spikes, just like that, and then tighten this down so that

 Just push it in, let those spikes drop in, and tighten that down.

 Now you're pulling the canvas and it's tightening the canvas instead of squeezing it, which

 And also by having those four spikes in there, now this thing is just as rigid as can be

 And then the last thing this easel has is even though it's a large studio easel, it

 has a very small footprint so that it's not taking up a lot of space and so that you can

 bring your tables in and your photo holders and your pallet tables and bring them in nice

 The Geneva Studio easel holds canvases up to 60 inches tall, and if you want to use

 a canvas that's taller than that, you can get one of our available extensions and hold

 Today's lesson is going to be in the key of G and we're going to play a G, an F, a C,

 progression that is in the style of Southern rock music like Leonard Skinner, that style,

 Willie Nelson, their style is similar, their music style is similar to this.

 which is fine if you want to do that, I'm going to play this position.

G, F, C, and back to G. Those chord voicings sound better with Southern rock.

 And of course you can turn your guitar and your amplifier up and if you want to add a little bit

 of this, a little bit of that as far as some type of effect, you know, that fits what you're trying

 F, C, G. Be sure to visit our website for more complete, the rhythm of the song and such as that,

 Open the Bina lengthwise, place around your shoulders and slip your arms through the slits.

 Open the Bina lengthwise, fold in half widthwise and line up slits.

 Lay it flat and fold it lengthwise so that the slits are lined up.

 Lift the connected ends over your head and place around your neck.

 Lift the connected ends over your head and place around your neck again.

 Wrap the fabric around your neck making sure both ends are even.

 Put your face through one of the slits widthwise and cover head.

 Take the remaining longer length of fabric and wrap it around the back of your neck.

 Place the fabric around your neck keeping one side longer than the other.

 Take the longer end and wrap around your neck while holding onto the loop.

 Continue with the longer end, place it under the shorter end and pull it through the loop.

 You've just learned how to make a cute, unexpected shoulder scarf.

 Wrap the long end of the fabric around your back and put your arm through the other slit.

 You've just learned how to make a sexy, sophisticated back wrap.

 Before we go into physically what I was playing, let's talk about the chord progression.

 Basic 12 bar blues with a little bit of a different turnaround.

 Then I'm back to the 4 chord, which is E9, to the 1 chord, which is B7.

 For my B7, you're going to see me play this kind of voicing throughout the whole course

 Especially if you're playing kind of funk rhythms, this is the one you want to go for.

 And my 1st finger will bar the 4th, 3rd, and 2nd strings on the 7th fret as well.

 I'm going to use my 2nd finger and hammer down on the 3rd string up to the 7th fret.

 I'm going to flatten out my 3rd finger on those same 3 strings.

 And then the little thing I'm going to do here is hit the note with my 1st finger on

 Okay, now when I'm doing this thing with my thumb over the top, I have to be really careful

 Now, to get that whole kind of funk vibe, my right hand is doing a lot of the work.

 Okay, so if you notice my right hand kept on going the whole time.

 Now my left hand, the muting there is coming from me lifting up and down the chord.

 I'm releasing the pressure on the chord, but not enough to let the strings ring out, you

 Now when I hit this note with my 1st finger at the very end of the phrase, I've got to

 make sure that no other strings are ringing out except that one.

 And that's done by releasing the rest of the fingers just enough that that's going to ring

 So it's 2nd finger, 7th fret, 1st finger, 6th fret of the 4th string.

 And I'm barring the top 3 strings on the 7th fret with my 3rd finger.

 I'm occasionally going to add in a pinky stretch here on the high string on the 9th fret to

 So really the rhythm, the accents I should say, are coming from my left hand and the

 So my thumb, take that same shape from that B7, move it down a whole step.

 I'm going to put my 3rd finger on the 2nd string on the 7th fret.

 I'm going to slide it up a whole step and put my pinky on the 10th fret of the 2nd string.

 This one I'm going to get a cool little rhythm that you can get from Couldn't Stand the Weather

 So if you look, that rhythm is only really coming from my left hand.

 The hits are coming from my left hand and the rhythm, you know, my right hand is doing

 Now that whole funk rhythm stuff really takes a lot of time to get together.

 And I would recommend you listen to a lot of James Brown records.

 That's really where I kind of learned to put this stuff together.

 In the next section we'll talk about how you can expand on this idea.

 All right guys, we got the clutch in, so it's pretty much torqued to spec.

 Every single one of these nuts are torqued at 15 pounds of torque.

 Again, it ranges from 16 to 14, anywhere in that range really shouldn't matter.

 So the most important thing that you want to do when you're putting the clutch in is

 you have to use the alignment tool, and that's this thing right here.

 Usually when you buy a kit, they're going to give you one of these because it's just

 And how that works, you put that right in there, just like that.

 You can get a slight angle like that or like that, and that's not a good thing.

 It's kind of hard to know that when you're kind of like at the bottom of a car, trying

 to work it at that, but here's a little tip that you can use to know that it's completely

 When your alignment tool is completely square, and if it's free play, this is what they call

 free play, if you could just basically take this out so lightly that it just comes right

 If it's hard to take off, like you have to kind of pull at it, that means it's at a slight

 So you just have to adjust it in there, just take it, start moving it around.

 And mind you, you want to make sure that these nuts are not completely torqued down when

 So once it's not torqued down, then check for alignment, check for free play.

 If you could just take it out with your finger, you're pretty much set to go.

 So that's the first process you do, just make sure the alignment's in there, and then

 Now I don't start torquing until I got it tight and wrenched tight.

 So you want to go at a kind of a star direction, so here, then the opposite, back, and just

 This will make sure that it's completely squared straight in, it's not angled in at, you know,

 So that's not good, you just want to make sure it's completely flat when you're tightening

 So once you get these all tightened down, then you want to torque this back, and what

 I bought mine online, I like the dialed torque wrench, it's a lot easier to use.

 They got some older versions, but this one is basically you just dial it up at the bottom,

 and you can just use it with this little device at the bottom, just dial what particular

 This ranges from zero to 80, and what we're just doing is about 15 foot pounds of torque.

 You just take this and put it on here, just like that, and when you hear a click, hear

 So basically I can't go any further, if I go any further it's going to break.

 So it's that perfect torque, that 15 foot pounds of torque, and you should be set and

 So next up is to get the transmission in, and that's going to be a pain, due to the

 But if you have a friend or somebody that can help you out to put the training in, go

 As for me, it's like pretty much almost midnight, so nobody's up right now.

 I mean, people are up, but not enough to help out on the car, so I pretty much want myself

 So, other than that, I'm just pretty much going to do that next, and see you on the

 Hi everyone, I'm Noreen and welcome to my kitchen and in an effort to use up that roasted chicken that we made last Sunday

 We're gonna use it on our pizza because it is Thursday, and you know what Thursday means in our house that means it's pizza night

 Onion mushroom and bacon pizza, and I'm gonna use alfredo sauce and it's gonna be awesome

Just like when you buy it in the store after I finish kneading it I

 Put it in plastic bags, and I stuck it in my fridge for the rest of the afternoon

 And I let it rise that way and then when you go to press it out here

 Then it is very easy to press out because all the gluten got cold and it's had time to relax

 This is just a really quick kind of inspirational deal for you.

 So I'm gonna share mine with you, so I'm gonna do a very light kind of

 Of some prepared alfredo sauce that I always like to keep in my pantry

 You never want to put too much because then you end up with a you know a mess

 Then I I sauteed what I did was I I sauteed about a half a pound of bacon

 Cooked it off until it was crispy and there it is and then I drained off a majority of the fat

 Sauteed those in the remaining bacon grease after I drained most of it, so there's maybe a tablespoon

 Also when I saute the vegetables I added a little bit of Italian seasoning in there.

 This is gonna be for about 12 to 18 minutes until it's nice and golden brown and bubbly and when we will

 We used alfredo sauce of bacon some sauteed onions and mushrooms and garlic and we called it good

 I hope you try this pizza if you need my recipe for my pizza crust

 I'll link it in the description bar below and you can go ahead and take a look at that

 Don't forget to like comment and subscribe if you're not already subscribed and don't forget you can follow me also on Facebook

 Twitter Instagram Pinterest and you can also check out my blog you can also plus this on Google Plus and I think that's everything

 That I am out there on the interwebs having a lot of fun and I'm interacting with all of you and I may not put the

 Same thing out there on like Instagram or Twitter as I do here on YouTube

 You know I may be talking about other things so check me out look me up like me

I hope you enjoyed today's video, and I hope you learned something

 And I hope you're going to give it a try, and I hope that you love it

 I know that you will I also wanted to say if you're new to my channel

 I hope that you'll hit that subscribe button so you don't miss out on any of the fun

 We have here in our kitchen and also you can follow me on Facebook Twitter

 There will be links to all of those things in the information bar below

 So I hope that y'all have a great day and make sure that you come back tomorrow.

This is Betty Rocker from thebettyrocker.com and I'm going to make a

 green smoothie for lunch and I thought I'd share my recipe with you because you might

 Smoothie and I call it that because I put chia seeds into it and if you're not familiar

 with chia seeds, this is what they look like and they're these amazing little seeds that

 to be able to eat a tablespoon of these and just be able to have energy for hours at a

They have this wonderful absorbent quality so they'll actually make you feel full for

So what I'm going to put in my smoothie today is I'm actually going to

 soak a tablespoon of these chia seeds in about a cup of almond milk and you can see here

To make it the chai blend, I like to blend different spices into my green

 smoothies to kind of give it a really unique, delicious flavor.

 using a little combination of nutmeg, cardamom, and cinnamon and they just taste really good

 got just five strawberries and a half of one of these little mini like tangela oranges

I'm going to pop in like one scoop of this raw protein powder to give it a little

 but I just happen to have these guys in the fridge today so this is what we're going to

 either just squeeze this guy or you can peel it and put the whole thing in.

 squeeze it to get all that delicious juice because we've got plenty of fiber from these

 doing a little bit less than a quarter teaspoon of the cardamom.

 which is one of the reasons I like having it in my warrior smoothie.

 needs just a little bit more liquid so I'm just going to add a little bit of water to

 So I'm going to go ahead and push play and then I'm going to start doing burpees.

 smoothie yourself but it's completely appropriate for two people.

Alright, remember, be strong, be awesome, drink green smoothies.

 Be sure to get more of my awesome green smoothie recipes on thebettyrocker.com and check out

 the fuel system that has two unique green smoothie recipes a week and my complete healthy

 One of the number one reasons you buy blenders is to crush ice.

 Well, I'm going to show you the number one blender that crushes ice.

 Any size ice you put through the hole in the lid is safe for the machine.

 What we're going to simply do is just take ice and a little bit of water and we're going

 What you want to see is that ice just start to float right off the top of that blade just

 It's so amazing and you get the perfect snow cone texture every single time.

 I'm going to show you how to actually make a perfect smooth, like if you were looking

 All we're going to simply do is let the tamper just sit here and push everything down to

 So take this tamper and just sit here and push everything down to this blade.

 Again, this is how you can really break down ice until it becomes a cream.

 Let's go ahead and serve it up here real quick for you guys right here.

 So if you want to maybe slice it this way, if you want to do your own ice sculptures,

 Again, as I've always said, you can't afford to go another day without a Vitamix machine.

 makes the extreme countertop different than other countertop materials out there.

 fiber content, high PSI, you're achieving about 11,000 PSI after 28 days.

 a spiral type shaft blade on it and it prevents the fiber from getting stuck on the blade.

 Remember we've got to shake our modifier to get all the stuff off the bottom.

 I'm looking for a looser consistency so we can add up to two cups of water.

 water that you add so you make it consistent from batch to batch.

 I added 8 ounces of water and this is the consistency that we came up with.

 Today I thought of sharing another bun recipe, a bread roll, cream cheese bread rolls.

 For this recipe I am using 235 grams of bread flour with 20 grams of sugar, 3 grams salt,

 4 grams yeast, 110 ml warm water, 1 egg and 25 grams of butter.

 And for the filling I am using 1 tub 250 grams cream cheese with a bit of pepper and if you

 To start this recipe add the bread flour into the mixing bowl and into that sugar, yeast

 After kneading 5 minutes add the butter and keep on kneading another 10 minutes.

 And after kneading put that in a greased bowl and leave it in a warm place until it doubles in size.

 When the dough is double in size put some flour onto the bench top and put the dough onto the bench

 and put more flour onto the top and cut this into equal sized portions.

 I am going to put the cream cheese into a bowl and pepper and lime or lemon juice.

 So if you like this a bit sweeter you can add 1 cup of icing sugar into the cream cheese

 After rolling it into a ball use a rolling pin and make a circle out from that.

 So onto that add a bit of cream cheese into the middle and secure the edges nicely like this.

 And then after press it down and put them on baking sheets to proof again.

 I am going to brush the tops with the egg wash and put this in the oven 180 degree about 15 to 20 minutes.

 The cream cheese buns are ready and they are really nice and soft and well moist.

 It's nice cream cheese filling in the middle and I hope you will enjoy this.

 Hi, I'm Chef Jared and today I'm going to show you how to steam black mussels with white

 So, I have about a pound of black mussels from Prince Edward Isles in Canada.

 You'll need a little bit of red chili, some chopped parsley, some shallots, garlic, and

 You don't want the garlic to overpower the delicate flavor of the mussels.

 Saute under low heat for maximum two minutes until it turns brown.

 And I'm going to cover it and let it boil for about 10 minutes.

 And I'm going to cover it and let it boil for another 10 minutes.

 We're here today to talk about the proper installation of front hub bearings on a 2002

 Okay, we're going to work on removing the caliper off the front of the vehicle now so

 And as we take this caliper off, we always want to hang this caliper by a bungee cord

 or some sort of strap in order to prevent any damage from the brake line.

 Slide the brake caliper off, and then we're going to take and we're going to suspend this

 brake caliper in a bungee cord to prevent any damage to our brake line.

 A couple swings of the hammer on the backside of the rotor, sometimes on the front face

 Once we remove the rotor, we've got our 30 millimeter nut that is pertained to this vehicle

 On the O2 Ford Explorer, we do have an ABS cord that runs up into the firewall area.

 Okay, we're going into the bearing removal, and we've got three bolts that attach this

 Sometimes there's a clearance issue that you run into with the CV shaft.

 You cannot get a half inch socket and extension in through here because of the clearance with

 If you need the extra clearance, you can take and you can push the CV joint back to

 give yourself some more clearance, and then it's just a matter of removing all three of

 A couple other ways would be to basically the triangular part of the bearing, we can

 hit it with a hammer, and we can actually turn the bearing hub in the knuckle.

 A little slide hammer makes it much easier to remove this bearing.

 Now that we have the hub off, we're just going to do a brief cleaning to get all the corrosion

 We have added some anti-seize to the outer edge of this bearing hub.

 The reason we do that is the corrosion issue that's caused from the bearing on the knuckle

 Once we have the anti-seize installed, we're going to install the bearing, making sure

 that our ABS sensor is located in the correct spot, going off to the side of the back of

 Now we're going to secure the three mounting bolts that hold the hub assembly to the knuckle.

 Okay, we've snugged down all our bolts, and we're going to do a torque on those three

 You want to check your listing for any vehicle that you're working for to get the correct

 Okay, we're going to finish up on the installation of this hub here.

 The final critical torquing of this nut will come in play when we have the vehicle down

 And that final torque is very critical to the longevity and performance of this hub

 One of the good tips is to run a nut on it, secure the rotor, hold it in place.

 Okay, we've got our rotor and our caliper reinstalled on the vehicle.

 So what we want to do is set the torque on our caliper bolts to the proper specification.

 And we're going to continue with our ABS sensor wire installation.

 Lay them in line, making sure they're all secure so there is no wheel rub going on.

 Okay, we have our ABS sensor here that we're going to connect, which is on the top of the

 right side firewall, which basically just goes into the connector and snaps in.

 As always, the final installation procedure is going to be the torquing of our axle nut.

 Those axle nuts need to be torqued to the correct specifications.

 Those specifications are designed to set the preload of the bearing.

 The preload of the bearing is very important to the longevity and length of time that that

 We have this set to 184 foot-pounds, which is the torque specification for this O2 Ford Explorer.

 Once we get that all set, one of the important things is not to use an impact.

 Impacts can cause premature damage and failure to this bearing hub, not setting the preload correctly.

 Set them to the wind-choosing replacement hub for your vehicle.

You have a little song you were going to serenade the giga with.

Okay, so what we found out was that there's a bunch of like little walk you

So we're going to spin the dial on the top and that's going to bring

 of espresso, two teaspoons of chocolate sauce, and mixed peppercorns.

 it's not going to look like the one in the, because you're just going by the seat of your

 So now I have to season the chocolate sauce with a little freshly ground pepper.

 you know, you did kind of walk us through each of the functions and... I sang.

 So you get into this area of the drink options when you turn on the barista functionality

So you have the beans a la carte, which enables you to mess around with these

 too right before I take my sip because this is kind of cute on the machine.

Yeah, but like some Chipotle, like a smoky pepper kind of thing going on with

 Okay, I'm going to show you this new great way how to tie your shoes.

 In fact, I tie my shoes like this and I don't have to re-tie them for months.

 So what you do, you start with the typical kind of overhand start of any typical shoe

 Some people tie their shoe normally like this and they would tighten this up.

 But if you take the other loop and you go over the top then and through that hole like

 It's better than a standard double knot because the doubling of the knot is more linear.

 But the beauty of this knot is that all you have to do is take one of these free ends

 Alright, so I should probably say I'm not a doctor when I'm doing this or you know,

 I mean we're literally going to take your DNA, we're going to look at it, we're going

 We're going to make a bunch of successful real estate coaches and then just overpower

 We're going to look at his ancestry and the nutritional deficiencies that he has so we

 can supplement those and get him to live much more of a vital life, longer lasting, more

 energy because at the end of the day you want more energy when you're in Mexico doing your

 We rinsed your mouth out so now we got to rub one of these swabs on here 20 times on

 These ones you can get in the store cheaper than the ones that are already pre-cooked.

 You just take your finger and after you've thawed them, usually they're frozen, so you want to first thaw them.

 And it really is not going to take very long for these guys to cook.

 If I had both hands available to me right now, which I don't, I would do this a little different.

 Now I'm going to grab a spoon here and I'm going to just continually stir these guys.

 And I'd rather just do this instead of by timer, just by watching them.

 For me, one tip that I've found helpful is I watch for the water to start boiling back again.

 And that's usually a good indication that a lot of the heat has gone into the shrimp.

 And then I'll just, just like you would pasta, take and dump them in there.

 And you can save money by buying them this way rather than buying them pre-cooked.

 If you have another tip or trick you'd like to share, feel free to leave a comment.

 But I find it gives you also more control over the cooking aspect.

 If you buy them frozen and pre-cooked, then you're just buying them based on however prepared,

 And they may not prepare them with the care and attention that you would.

 So it's not just the price that causes me, or as a reason why I buy them.

 This way, I like to have the control over cooking them as well.

 It's just a nice bonus that you get to save money too at the same time.

 And that's the first hint to me that they're getting close to done.

 I can actually, it's going to be a little warm, but I can touch it and just feel that the meat is warm.

 You also see all the little white bubbles here coming to the surface.

 And I'm sorry for the footage right now while I do this carefully.

 Now to knit the two color plated basket weave stitch, English style.

 For this tutorial you will need a pair of knitting needles and two balls of yarn in

 Today we are using their Northampton yarn from their Valley Yarns line.

 Knit, Purl, Slip stitch, with yarn in front, with yarn in back.

 To begin this stitch you must use your color A and cast on in multiples of three.

 Now before we get into the main part of this pattern we are going to do a prep row by continuing

 Row 1, beginning on the wrong side of our work we are going to take our color B here

 I'm just going to wrap my yarn over like so and begin working with it.

 We are going to repeat this sequence all the way across until the end of the row.

 Then we will start our repeat by slipping the next stitch, which is our color A, off.

 We are going to hold this in front for now and then we are going to knit two.

 With our main needle we are going to pick back up our drop stitch and place it onto

 It is easy to find because it is the opposite color that we are working with.

 Then we are going to place this onto our working needle, the stitch that we had dropped.

 So we will continue doing this all the way until the last stitch in our row.

 And when we reach the last stitch in our row we are going to knit one.

 I want to make sure that I am working over our other color that is going to integrate

 Then we are going to slip the next stitch purl wise with the yarn in front.

 And we will continue purling two and slipping the stitch all the way across until we reach

 And when we reach the last three stitches in our row we are going to purl three.

 Then we will start our repeat by slipping the next two stitches with yarn in back.

 Then we are going to drop the next stitch, which is this one, that is the color B stitch,

 And we are going to pick up the dropped stitch onto our working needle.

 So that may seem a little bit complicated so let's do that again to continue our repeat.

 And we are going to pick up this stitch with our working needle.

 Then we are going to pick up the dropped stitch with our working needle and then we will knit two.

 Okay and we are going to work this pattern all the way across until the last two stitches in our row.

 And when we get to the last two stitches in our row we are just going to knit two.

 So we are going to repeat rows one through four until we have reached our desired length.

 And that is how you knit the two color plated basket weave stitch.

 Join our VIP email list to get every stitch directly to your inbox.

 so when I trim my sugar peas, you're gonna have a blossom end and then the

 stem end and most likely you will be able to tell for instance this is where

 the blossom is a little flower and then you have your the vine end right here

 okay so always start trimming from the vine end it's going to be your string

 is going to be tougher up here and it's easier to grab so you'll have usually a

 flat side and then a curved side I like to do the flat one first come in at an

 angle and then just pull it out like that okay and then don't come back up

 here and get the blossom in and try to pull it up because it's very weak string

 right here and you won't be able to grab it usually come back up to your stem end

 your vine end come in at an angle and then pull it out and that's going to be

 a much smaller string okay so I'll go ahead and get these going blossom end is

 usually you know fat down here skinny your vine end is skinny and narrow at

 the top come in on the flat side at an angle pull it down come back over the

 and you might not even be able to get a string when it's very young like for

 instance this is a young pod here I'm gonna see if I can get a string out of

 here a little bit of one not very much not enough to bother me I could leave it

 in there and we would eat it that's another advantage to having

 harvesting young things when they're very small is you don't have as much

 work in preparing it here at least with these okay so I'm gonna go ahead and get

 all these trimmed start at this vine end pull it back and there was not much

 Hello, welcome back to my kitchen and today I'm going to make an exotic dish.

 Today I'm going to make for you Moroccan chicken with my touch.

We will also need green olives, chopped garlic, preserved lemons, two

 green chilies, one finely chopped onion, cumin seeds, coriander powder, turmeric

 powder, ginger, pinch of saffron and cinnamon stick and some blanched almonds.

 45 minutes, added 1 teaspoon of salt, 2 more preserved lemons and a tablespoon

 Hello everybody, I'm Nick from Pixie Woo and today's video I'm going to do for you is Beyonce

 to use Sleek today because it does such a wide variety of colours.

 then going to go in with a little bit of Studio Finish concealer from MAC.

 anywhere that you find your skin may be slightly a different colour or the foundation hasn't

So I tend to find that around my nose a little bit and quite often just

I'm then going to powder the makeup into place and MAC do a brilliant

 and this one is medium dark and it goes to deep dark and it works for every skin tone.

I'm then going to take a Real Techniques Dome Shadow Brush and just

 Stick underneath the eye and use the same brush to smoke that along.

 Stick I'm going to run a little bit of Barry M Fine Glitter Dust.

I'm then going to take a little bit of Avon Super Shock Liner and just run

 I'm also going to add some false lashes to the look and I've chosen MAC number 7 Lashes.

 Look down and then place the lash and then you just tuck the other two sides in.

 On the lip I'm going to use a little bit of Bourjois 3D Effect Lip Gloss.

 Hi everyone, this is going to be a Copic Quick Bits video, so I'm going to keep my chatter

 to a minimum to fit it under the ten minute deadline that we have.

 show you how to color two different hair styles, actually two different hair colors.

The stamp is by Elizabeth Bell for Susanna's Custom Art and Card Design.

 It's called Me and My Buddy and it has a dog, so of course it's one of my favorites.

 cut out part of to show you how we're going to do a golder, redder, blonde color.

 area of the hair, including the bangs here, the sides here, the sides here, are going

I'm going to keep my darker colors at the tips of each of those sides

 going to show you how to bring a little bit more depth and movement into hair color so

They look much prettier when you have some movement going on there.

 and I color right over it and then I realize when I'm done that I've colored right through

I'm just going from the edge of what I'd already done, which was the

I'm not worried about huge blending right now because I'm going to come back in with

It will work like a colorless blender and remove that color or move it out

 of the picture, which usually means you're moving it out here or into her face, which

Even if I sat here and colored over and over and over this, eventually

 gives it a lot more life than if you colored it with one or two colors.

I always like to bring in some different colors like this into the hair.

 All right, so I have my drawing that I am basing this off of and my plexiglass

 So then after that I want to set up some of my ink and I think I might make this guy

 You can always put more ink out, but you can't put it back in so do not waste our ink

If you're having trouble you can always use a piece of tape to adhere to the top or bottom

 So to try to change that and make sure that we have some dimension in here

 And go back in here and figure out where some of my highlights are

 I wanted to do a quick, sort of quick video on the different styles that can be worn with

 You can also rock a back ponytail, so just pull it to the back.

 I mean, I'm pretty sure you guys know how to put it into a ponytail, but I'll show you

 And I know I did a high bun tutorial already, but I'm going to kind of do that again.

 So what I have to do is I have to bend over to get it all into the bun.

 And then it will stay like that, but you can also put another headband or scrunchie on

 And then you can bobby pin your hair to the side or just wear it like this.

 And then another style that I really like is the side twist or the side braid.

 So, while you have your hair to the side, you're going to take your hair and begin to

 So I'll take my twist and pull the top part back into a ponytail.

 And then, just regular down is another style that you can wear.

 In the back, to the back, to the side, however you want to do it.

 So, like I said, I just wanted to come to you guys and show you a few little styles.

 I know it was kind of fast-paced, but I wasn't trying to make the video long.

 So, just make sure you subscribe to my channel for the latest videos.

 Hi guys, my name is Peter Figa and you're watching my Salsa Man Styling Web Series.

 Today I'm going to talk about a very very simple concept and that is going to be that

 your movements look more detailed and bigger if you actually create a fixed point to which

 If you do some kind of move, whatever, body wave, chest movement, it kind of easily gets

 But if you manage to add part of your body that is like fixed in space, then your body

 movement, your wave, your chest side movement would get a context.

 It would kind of like visually create a way of knowing what's going to happen.

 So I'm going to show you two very very simple examples of this.

 On one I'm going to step to the side and push my upper body, my chest to the side.

 Now to enhance it a little bit, we're going to do the following.

 So kind of like my hand serves as a reference to my chest move.

 And second of all, somehow my chest movement looks much bigger.

 And once the body came back, just relax your fingers and take the hand down.

 Once you figure this, it's really good if you have a mirror at home to do this.

 And from here, we're going to step or a little bit tap to the side.

 Now, while I'm doing that spin, I will take the other hand, the left hand,

 If you don't do that, your spin may look a little bit like undefined.

 You will give a whole new meaning to your preparation and the start

 And then prepare while keeping the hand exactly at the same spot.

 And then you just close into that hand, and you make your spin.

 And I'm going to take this hand here a little bit in and out to the side

 can turn even the simplest move into something a little bit more

 My green beans are an updated version of everybody's famous green bean casserole.

 I don't know about your moms, but my mom was big on the green bean casserole with cream

 We're going to let that butter melt or not and toss in some onions.

 And we've got a little bit of marsala because wine is always a plus in any recipe.

 Cook them for about 10 minutes with the pancetta then put in the wine.

 We're going to be letting those onions cook, letting those mushrooms cook so they get nice

 A little balsamic vinegar is going into the caramelized onions.

 And then when we take our beans out of the pot, which I don't know if we can do that

 Hi there, my name is Sonia Ortiz and if you're watching, you can cook.

 We call it ate de membrillo and we eat it with slices of different cheeses as a dessert.

 They look like apples but they're not related to apples at all.

 Two cups of sugar approximately and the juice of one lime or two limes.

 Also we need some parchment paper or wax paper and that's all we need.

 First of all we boil the quinces in a pot with enough water to cover them for 15 to

 Cook over medium to low heat, stirring constantly for 30 to 40 minutes or until it thickens.

 Take into account that it will thicken even more when it cools.

 Take a little bit out and let it cool and see what consistency it is while you keep

 Then when you feel it's the right time, then you can turn off the heat.

 Don't forget to subscribe to You Can Cook where we publish for you five videos per week.

 I think I'll go ahead and finish up all the supports before I start putting the

 the miter saw extensions completed and now I'm going to put together the main

 ready to start by installing the top straps to create the top hinge.

 make four six inch pieces, this butane soldering iron to make the cut and to

 I've made a line that's at six inches and so I'll just place it there, it gives

 gives me my four six inch straps and what I want to do is fold these a half

 an inch on each end so that I'll double up the ends, they'll be folded over

 nicely and be able to put the screws right through, two screws in each end,

 outside edge measuring in so I've measured in that distance and I know how

 far down I want to go, inch and a half down but I'm going to make a mark half

 marks I know that I know where I want the bottom edge of the strap to go and I

 can just make the fold so that it comes right back up that half an inch and down

 to where I want it and again and then by having this line that is square off

 Then I'll just make sure the other side is flushed up, pull these nice and tight,

 sanded side since I've made a mirror image of each of the two I put the

 four straps and then on this first horse I have made my same marks where I want

 is 36 inches so I spread the horses until I have the height of measuring to

 where I want it and then I've clamped a board on here to hold it into place

 Okay now that all the supports are done and ready to use time to finish milling

 Hi, I'm Mary from V-Line, and today we're going to show you how to set your combination.

 That clears out whatever combination or whatever buttons have been pushed.

 You enter the existing combination, either the factory setting it came to you on or whatever

 After you enter that code, you turn your knob to the right clockwise, and that opens it.

 Once you have it opened, you're going to turn the knob back left counterclockwise to lock

 So again, whatever you just pushed to open it, you push those buttons, but don't turn

 Now we're going to go on the inside, and at the bottom of the lock, we've got a little

 What we're going to do is we're going to push this little tab up and into pushing this button

 We're going to take our knob and turn it left or counterclockwise.

 So for example, if we want our code to be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, we just go right down the line,

 And now, very critical, we take our knob and we turn it to the right or clockwise.

 Now we turn it back left or counterclockwise, and our new code should be set.

 So we push in our code, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and to unlock, remember, we're turning clockwise

 Now one thing that I do recommend when you set a new code, go back and do it several

 Do that code several times so that it becomes ingrained so that if you have to enter that

 safe in a hurry, you don't have to stop and think about, what's my code?

 There's nothing on them right now, but there will be real soon.

 And I don't need to see anything at the moment, but if you guys have glasses, then you know

 I'll be putting them on later because I'm going to be filming a few videos back to back

 because I like to do a few videos and then I'll just upload them randomly or whatever.

 But anyways, the nail that I'm going to be using is a different brand from the last time.

 The last time I used, I think it was like Maybelline or something like that.

 I'll try to put the link to that video down below so you can see how I did that one.

 And I noticed in Rite Aid when I was there that they had like different names.

 Like they had Street Beat, Runway, Ready or some crap like that.

 Some other, they had like cute little names depending on how they look.

 So these were like really kind of like out there kind of thing, you know.

 I kind of feel like I want to, and they come with a little bit of bling too.

 I was just going to say I want to put a little bit of bling on there, but they do have it.

 You guys know that I usually don't use the little glue thingies that it comes with.

 I'll probably just use my glue if I have enough glue left over.

 And maybe one day, not today, but one day I'll give that little sticky stuff that they

 I've been collecting them from the different nails that I've been getting.

 I'm going to go ahead and we're going to see exactly what we did to put them on.

 I was going to do a voiceover because there's some freaking noise in the background in my

 I guess they fixing something or something's going on with the pipes.

 So anyways, we're just going to go ahead and buff all our nails.

 I don't want to make my nails, my real nails, weak or anything like that.

 Alright, so actually the part was supposed to be from the bottom.

 It was easier if you just go ahead and take it off from the bottom.

 And I'm going to take a moment to measure these to my nails and lay them down so that

 Some of the pros and cons that I've noticed already from just getting them prepared is

 So you can't even choose if you want to put adhesive or if you want to put your own glue.

 I mean, just for security, I'll put a little dab in, like a little touch of glue on it.

 But one thing I liked about the other ones was you had the option.

 You can either put on the little adhesive that comes with it, the little stickies, or

 Another thing that I noticed is these don't have as many size options as the other ones

 Some of them are going to be a little bit like, eh, cutting it close as far as the size

 And even to like kind of try them on to see if they fit properly, you have to kind of,

 I like to put it on, measure, and see how good it is as far as the fit.

 And it's like, okay, once you put it on, it's starting to stick to your nails.

 And I did add the, I have one hand done so far and I did add one of those little rhinestones.

 They came with these little adhesives that you can just stick them on wherever you want

 And let me know what you guys think about this new style down below.

 As far as how I feel about them, I feel like I like the other brand a little bit better

 Ok, so today I'm going to show you how to make a sewing basket for your doll.

 You're going to need fabric, these are just fabric scraps, sorry, a toothpick or toothpicks,

 It's actually to put dye in when you're dyeing eggs at Easter time.

 She's awesome, she makes really good tutorials, but she hasn't made a tutorial on this, I'm

 Ok, so you're going to need the fabric, something to put them in if you have something, the

 Ok, so, and maybe a rubber band and some stuffing, I don't have stuffing with me right

 You're going to cut small squares, you want them all to be about the same size of all

 And then, those will be the fabrics, and I'm going to do that, I'll just do this first

 I would say maybe 2 inches wide, and then, I need a pencil or something.

 Ok, so just cut that out, make sure your scissors are sharp enough.

 Again, try and use fabric scraps if you can, you don't have to, like if you have enough

 fabric, but be careful that you're not like wasting, well not wasting, but be careful

 Try and make all the squares about the same size, they're not squares as you can see,

 I could actually cut this in half and make two, which I think I'll do that.

 And, ok, so I'm going to do that and then I'll tell you what to do next.

 Now, with your rubber band, where did that go, I'm just going to use this hair thing,

 line them all up, maybe you can do color order, I love blue and green as you can see, that's

 Ok, now just with your rubber band, or in my case, hair thingy, it actually looks kind

 I know it doesn't look that good, I'll do more later, I don't have enough time, I have

 Then take your toothpicks, find the color you want, I'll use blue.

 Well, unless you have all generic color, which would work better in this case, but it doesn't

 And then, your small spools of thread are actually pretty good for your doll sized,

 Ok, sorry about that, my camera ran out of time so I had to go back and delete some videos.

 I have to go really soon, my mom just yelled, in a sec she's going to yell again, so all

 And then maybe you want to make like a measurement strip for your doll, this is kind of big.

 But then you can put it all into your little sewing thing for them, put their needle in

 there, and you can put stuffing in there and other stuff, and then you have a bag of sewing

 Ok, so also for your, this you can say is for a project she's making, the fabric.

 And, um, then you can take other fabrics, just bits, fold them up so that they look

 nice, like this one I probably won't use, but cut up bits so that they look nice, and

 then you can fold them up and stick them in, and say that it's her fabric, like I'll probably

 But the cool thing is, it's for breast cancer, and there's these raffles, and um, one of

 them was a bitty twin, I mean not a bitty twin, a bitty baby, and I answered to win

 it, although very slim chances I am going to win, but it's ok, because the money goes

 Actually, they're probably doing the drawing for it right about now, or they already did.

 There were a lot of tickets in there, so I doubt I won it, but, you can always dream.

 G'day guys, Scotty Lyons here from the Hook and the Cook and today I'm going to show you

 The last thing we need is a good float, a long length of rope tied to your pot so you

 The last one's always a bit tricky to get in so you just have to put your foot on the pot.

 The main thing is that when the crabs come up through these entrances, you can see here,

 this is where they come into the pot, they can't actually grab the bait and pull the

 You got a drawstring on top that just locks over the other side.

 Okay, we made it along the creek, looking for a small drain like we've got here.

 Now this little drain feeds out onto the main river and these are ideal spots to find mud

 Well it's late in the afternoon and it's time to check the crab pot.

 Now tune in next week for another fantastic clip on the Hook and the Cook and remember

 Okay, so today I'll be showing you how to temporarily dye your hair with food colouring.

 I'm just using a dye towel, obviously I have done it before on here.

 So you'll need either your extensions or your real hair, whichever works.

 Something to mix it up with, I'm just going to use a paintbrush.

 You will need gloves for your hands because it will stain anything this touches.

 You'll need mousse, any cheap kind will do, I just got mine from the dollar store.

 So first, put on the gloves because you want the least bit of staining on your hands as possible.

 Then, you will take the, make sure your hair is nice and brushed out pretty evenly.

 So take your dish and fill it with, I'm going to start with the pinky purple colour.

 I recommend, if you want it to be a bright colour, I recommend doing more than two drops

 I'm doing two of each colour because I have to mix a purple and a pink together.

 Once you have it all mixed, then just wipe off your brush and put it on with your fingers.

 You can put it on with a brush if you have one of those nice wide ones, like touching

 And then just kind of put it wherever you want it to go on your hair.

 Like I said, I'm just using an old dyeing towel, so I don't care if it gets on the towel

 Once you've done one side, flip it over and get the other side.

 Okay, once you have it on, let the mixture sit on the hair for about at least half an

 I just do about half an hour because it's long enough for the food colouring to sink

 into the hair enough that it will stay when you rinse it off, that it won't all come out.

 Okay, so the food colouring mixture has been on the extensions for about half an hour now,

 If you use warm, it's going to make it come out easier, and we want it to last in for

 And I'm not going to rub on it too much, I don't want the colour to come out, because

 once it's dry it'll stay in, but when it's wet it's going to keep coming out.

 So once it rinses basically clear, then I'm going to turn it off and kind of just wring

 Okay, so you can see that there's a clear mark of where the pink is and where it stops.

 And so now, because I want to put green on the bottom, we're going to try and dry the

 And obviously the reason why I don't do the bottom first is because if the bottom colour

 is lighter, and then you do the darker colour over top, it's just going to run through the

 And it'll make it come out, plus it's being rinsed twice then, whereas at least this,

 the pink only gets rinsed once, and the green only gets rinsed once.

 So we're going to take our bowl again, and I've already rinsed it out.

 You want to make sure your brush is pretty rinsed because you don't want to get the other

 Okay, and then when that's done, just let it sit again, like the other colour, for about

 I think I might leave the green on for a little longer than half an hour, just because I know

 from doing my previous hair that it takes a little longer to kind of stay on the hair.

 G'day everyone, Kurupt Carnage here and welcome to another Minecraft cooking episode where

 we're going to cook up some pork and some rump at the back there and serve it with a

 This is definitely one of my favourite meals and I'm going to show you how to cook it.

 So basically you want to get some rump or some pork, I'm going to have both because

 So the first thing you want to do is obviously throw it out, which is thaw it out, grab a

 I like a lot of garlic, don't be alarmed over how much garlic is there.

 But you want to throw some garlic on the pork and on the rump and mush it out a bit.

 You can use all types of garlic, you can use garlic flakes, garlic whatever.

 And I'm going to leave this for half an hour once I put this on to try and get it into

 So place the garlic on the pork as well, I'm going to grab a bit of this and throw it on

 And yes, make sure you light the barbecue as well before you cook, you can get it nice

 So once you chuck the garlic on there like that, which looks very nice, you want to chuck

 A bit of Italian herbs, not too much, like a bit of a seasoning.

 And lastly, you want to add a bit of salt, not too much salt, this will actually tenderise

 So if I just put, especially the pork as well, so I'm just going to put a bit of salt on

 And that will taste absolutely wonderful once I chuck it on the barbecue.

 And also I'll put some veggies on the stove, it's just cauliflower, broccoli and beans.

 Sorry, I've got something stuck in my throat, a bit of phlegm, so I'll just clear my throat

 The plate is red hot, I'll just go over there so you can actually see the little barbecue

 Now I want to leave the pork on there for about 2 to 3 minutes, probably more like 3

 I like mine medium rare, so I'm going to cook it 2 minutes either side.

 I also like to keep the lid down on the barbecue just to get a bit more heat in there.

 Alright, the rump's been on there for 2 minutes, I'm just going to flip the steak now.

 So I'll flip the pork over and let that cook for another couple of minutes and I'll come

 I cooked the rump for 2 minutes either side to try and make it medium.

 And I also got the veggies off the stove and threw them on the side as well with a bit

 You might be thinking that's a lot of food and I'm going to take some of that for lunch

 Let's grab this fork and hopefully that will come off the side there.

 This is how you cook an Australian steak, Aussie style with a bit of veggies.

 And please like and favourite this video and subscribe if you're the first person.

 This is the first video I've seen and yes, I will see you in another cooking episode.

 I think I'm going to cook spaghetti soon so I might see you then.

 Today I'd like for you to kick the can, and what do I mean by that?

 The cream of mushroom soup is a very, very easy soup to make, and you can make it in

 Now I have a surprise ingredient here, so let me tell you what else is in the recipe.

 We are going to use mushrooms, because, well, it is cream of mushroom soup, onions, chicken

 Now I actually happen to have a few dried mushrooms on hand, and I am just soaking those

 Just a little bit of cream, some salt, and some pepper, and my surprise ingredient is

 It was about a large onion, and I think that was about eight to ten mushrooms.

 It wasn't even quite the small package that you buy in the store.

 You just want your onions to get kind of nice and translucent, and you want your mushrooms

 to sweat a little bit so it kind of releases some of those juices.

 Now it's time to add in our remaining ingredients, and that would be the small potato.

 Now if you are using the kind that comes out of a can, I highly recommend using the low

 sodium variety so you get to season your own food and let Swanson season something else.

 So about 20 minutes, your soup is looking like this, and now it's time to hit the blender,

 or if you have a hand mixer, one of those hand mixers, those work well.

 Now if you want to puree most of this, you want to leave some chunks left, or maybe not

 chunks, little pieces left so you can readily identify that it's mushroom soup.

 So you can see here, I can identify that that was probably mushroom at one point.

 Now all we need to do is add the cream that my dried mushrooms were soaking in.

 Now all you need for this is a bottle of cream, some chocolate ripple biscuits and a little

 this is a teaspoon of sugar in the cream to make it taste nice and a gourmet to help you.

 all you do is get some of the cream and spread it onto the biscuit like that.

Take another biscuit, pop some more cream on, it's like a sandwich,

 get more cream, doesn't matter if you get it on your fingers, mash it on.

 Get more cream, it's pretty easy, just got to be careful not to put too much cream on,

 otherwise there'll be none left to spread over the top at the end.

We're going to cover the two chocolate ripple logs with the rest of the cream.

 And in the morning we'll have a delicious chocolate ripple cake.

 Hi, my name is Ranjani and I write a vegetarian food blog and today I'm making a very popular

 Indian chickpea curry or garbanzo bean curry called chole or chana masala.

 These have actually been dried garbanzo beans that I've gone ahead and soaked overnight.

 And I'm going to go ahead and transfer this into a pressure cooker.

 Now if you don't want to add the tea bags to this, you don't have to.

 I like doing it because I feel like it retains the authenticity of the dish.

 But if you're lazy and you don't even want to go ahead and soak your garbanzo beans,

 So I'm going to go ahead and close the lid on the pressure cooker just like so.

 And you want to cook it until it's completely boiled through and soft on the inside.

 It's going to whistle once and I'm going to turn the heat off and then we're going to

 Okay, so while my garbanzo beans are cooking, boiling all the way through, I'm going to

 go ahead and do a little bit of prep work for the curry that we need to make.

 So I'm going to go ahead and chop up two small onions or you could use one large onion.

 Okay, so I've gone ahead and chopped up my red onion right here and now I'm going to

 You want to chop them fairly fine and if you don't feel like chopping them, you can always

 Okay, so I've gone ahead and chopped up my tomatoes and made a really quick ginger garlic

 paste with one clove of garlic and about an inch of ginger that I've shredded up.

 You can go ahead and buy this at the regular Indian grocery store, but I like to make mine

 Okay, the last thing that we're going to need to chop up for our chickpea curry is a couple

 These are really hot, so if you're not a big fan of heat and hot food, I'd go ahead

 Just slip them down the middle just like this and let's just talk about some of the spices

 It's very tart, so we're going to use about two teaspoons of that in our chickpea curry.

 And then we're going to use about a teaspoon of red chili powder.

 And so once our spice blend's done, we're also going to go ahead and use a little bit

 And we're just going to use that towards the end of our cooking process.

 And what I've done is gone ahead and put them in a separate bowl.

 And then I also have a little bit of the cooking liquid that I've retained.

 I'm going to add it later on if I want to thin out the gravy a little bit.

 Now if you were making this curry to eat with a flatbread, such as a roti or paratha, you

 But if you wanted to eat it with rice, you would make it a little bit more soupy and

 Now if you're watching your carbs and you don't want to eat it with the bread or the

 rice, a good way to eat it would be to have it with some quinoa, maybe mildly spiced with

 That would be a pretty good way to get both forms of protein in.

 Okay so the cumin's popped a little bit and I'm going to go ahead and add the split skinny

 And I'm also going to go ahead and add in the diced red onions.

 And you want to cook the red onions until they're fairly brown.

 Okay so my onions have been browning for the past few minutes and now I'm going to go ahead

 And as soon as this cooks up, I'm going to go ahead and add the tomatoes.

 Okay so my ginger garlic paste has cooked for about 40 seconds and I'm going to go ahead

 And you want to cook the tomatoes until they kind of get pulpy and a little bit mushy.

 And you want to cook the tomatoes down until it starts to leave oil around the sides of the pan.

 And that's when you know that your spices, your masala is fully cooked also.

 And as I was mentioning earlier, you can actually see some of the oil in this starting to separate.

 So now I'm going to go ahead and add my cooked garbanzo beans to this.

 And you want it just to cook down for about 5-6 minutes or so so that all the flavors absorb

 I did add a little bit more of the cooking liquid because it was drying out and I was going to eat it

 So I think most of the flavors have been absorbed at this point.

 And then finally finish it off with a little bit of the garam masala.

 Just cook it for an additional minute or two and it's ready to serve.

 Okay so I've gone ahead and served up some of the chickpea curry with a little bit of rice that I've made earlier.

 Now today I'm eating it with rice but you can always eat it with any Indian flatbread like I've mentioned earlier

 I just want to take a quick bite just to make sure it tastes good.

 For more quick and easy recipe ideas just like this one, be sure to visit my blog at wakeupandsmellthemasala.blogspot.com.

 Today I'm going to show you how to properly clean your bearings.

 But I will be using 70% because I do not have any 90% or higher.

 An old t-shirt or cloth that you really don't care about to get greasy and dirty.

 Today I will be teaching you how to clean your bearings with the metal shields on both

 Take your metal shield bearings and pour them into the wide mouth bottle like that.

 Next, take your rubbing alcohol, take the cap off, and begin to fill the bottle, the

 You don't want to use the entire bottle because that's a lot of wasting.

 It should be a little bit darker because my bearings aren't that dirty.

 Now what you got to do is grab your Tupperware container and your bottle of whatever you

 We have a sink filter, which is a really, really good idea because you don't want your

 So I'll be using a sink filter so my bearing won't fall down there.

 Another thing you can do is grab a large amount of Kleenex like this, put it over, and that

 Now what you got to do with this is dump it into the Tupperware container.

 There's still some, as you can see, there's still a little bit of liquid in there.

 Next thing you want to do is take your handy old shirt, place it in the Tupperware, and

 Get any of the excess alcohol and then just kind of put them into the cloth.

 Empty your Tupperware container, put them in the cloth, and shake.

 Now what you got to do is just lay them out and take your bottle of lube.

 Now one thing you can do is remove the metal shields off your bearing, but once you get

 them off, it's pretty hard to get them back on without breaking your bearing.

 Okay, so now that you got all your bearings finished, lubed, all that good stuff.

 Can I get it started out by just kind of popping it in like that?

 And then you could use your skate tool to push it in, but I don't like that.

 What I usually do is set it on the truck and push down and it pops it right back into place.

 We'll go through how to replace many of the small parts located on the inside of your

 The first step is going to be using a heat gun or a hair dryer to heat the outside edges

 Once the adhesive has been completely warmed, use a pry tool, in this case a metal pry tool,

 Once you have a good grip, use a safe pry tool to run along the outside edges and release

 This is normally a slow process which may take a time or two to heat up.

 Once all four sides have been released, use a safe pry tool to gently lift it up and swing

 Be very careful of the flux ribbon cable being pointed out in the video as you don't want

 You can now remove the four small Phillips screws as being pointed out in the video.

 Once these screws are removed, you can now swing the LCD screen to the side.

 Now you can swing the LCD screen onto the touchscreen digitizer, being careful as the

 You will now need to remove the flux ribbon cable being connected.

 To do this, use a safe pry tool, or in this case a fingernail, to lift the clip and gently

 You will now need to release the two clips holding the touchscreen digitizer flux cable

 You will need to use a safe pry tool, or similar, to lift the back of the connector, releasing

 You might be better off using something a little bit smaller than a large pry tool.

 Once both connectors are fully released, you can now gently pull the touchscreen digitizer's

 Alright, from here, in the lower right hand corner, we have the WiFi antenna flux cable.

 In the top right hand corner, we have the power button, volume button, and mute button

 Remove these and you can then replace the power button flux cable.

 And lastly, to the left, we have the headphone audio jack flux cable.

 This is held in place with a few small Phillips screws, as well as one connector.

 Hey ladies, I'm back with a new video and I decided to oil rinse my hair.

 I saw this method on various YouTube channels but I got the idea from African Export and

 she was basically talking about how she oil rinsed her hair and I decided to check it

 So I'm using coconut oil, olive oil, and castor oil for this oil rinse.

 I'm going to warm the mixture up for 30 seconds in the microwave.

 So while I do this rinse I want to make sure the oil is distributed well around my hair

 and on my roots and on my ends but especially on my ends since I did color that mostly when

 I'm not trying to leave any spots without the oil on it and I'm just making sure that

 I use all of the oil up before I decide to rinse my hair or I decide to sit underneath

 So I'm just working it through my hair and all the oil is gone.

 I'm massaging it into my scalp, working it on my roots, my edges, and the back of my

 hair and I'm just rinsing my hands off because it is really messy.

 So I looked it up and I didn't really want to shampoo my hair so I'm just using my TRESemme

 Naturals conditioner to get the excess oil off my hair and then after that I'm going

 to rinse it and then I will leave the rest of the oil in my hair.

 I did see there is no reason to really shampoo your hair because it would be a waste of oils

 if you did shampoo your hair but I am conditioning it and just getting all the excess oils off

 Don't forget to rate, comment, and subscribe and I thank you guys for watching.

 Here at the Regal Vegan booth, we're known for our banh mi sandwiches.

 And for my munchies moment, I'm going to show you how to make one at home.

 Today, I'm going to show you how to make an awesome banh mi sandwich.

 First thing you need for an awesome banh mi sandwich is awesome bread.

 What I look for is something with a nice crust, but soft on the inside.

 So the main ingredients in foie gras are walnuts, lentils, and caramelized onions.

 Once you've got this going on, you want to get some thinly sliced cucumber.

 I like to use a mandolin because it makes it super quick and easy.

 Now what we do is we pickle it with some apple cider vinegar, water, salt, and a little bit of sugar, and let it sit.

 If you don't get a chance to make this way in advance, all you've got to do is take some carrots and daikon and shred them.

 We soak them in some white vinegar for about 15 minutes, and that will give you the right amount.

 Now everyone's got their own secret kind of recipe for special sauce, but ours is we use the cock sauce, sriracha.

 It's pretty much like 10 parts this to, like, one part this and this.

 Hey everyone, it's Morgan from Meaningful People and I have no idea what time it is,

Breakfast was just some pieces of apple and I try to include every single

 fruit and vegetable I have in my guinea pig food drawer during the day.

 their vegetable which I clean out once a day so that way there's not any vegetables rotting

Okay, and now, because it is a late night snack, I must include some

Or it's just not a late night snack, so I'm just going to put a couple of chips

Which I don't usually do, but tonight's a special night because it is their first

 What I'm going to be showing you today is how to fix a filament clog

 set to factory defaults on your machine it'll preheat to 230 degrees C.

 Once it gets there what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to go up to

 You're going to want to grab your filament with your left hand and then push down with your

 You're going to push down on the filament until you see some plastic

 what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to go to info and settings

 preheat settings and change the temperature bump it up to 250 degrees

 the next thing you're going to want to do is repeat the steps that you did at 230

 and then hopefully at this point you should be seeing some filament

 If you don't see any filament coming out of the nozzle what you'll want to do next

 is go back into info and settings go back into preheat settings

 Now you're not going to want to exceed 260 degrees as this could potentially

 melt some of the plastic components and damage your makerbot extruder head.

 Once it's preheated up to 260 degrees you want to repeat that process

 of pushing it down and pulling it out quickly another three to five times.

 there's a good chance that your nozzle is clogged and it will need replacing.

 If the nozzle is clear what you want to do is you want to go back into info and

 preheat settings and change your preheat setting back down to 230 degrees.

 Alright so your makerbot rep2 extruder is now extruding filament.

 What you're gonna want to do is you're gonna want to do about a 10 to 15 minute

 or contact us and we can help walk you through how to fix your extruder nozzle.

 make sure you get printing, stay printing, and change the world.

 Sulky Threads, express yourself with sulky and create with confidence.

 Today we're going to talk about Boxed In, block number 171, designed by Julie Herman

 For this 12 inch pieced block, you're going to need some assortment of batik patches,

 two and a half inch squares, and some strips from another fabric, a contrasting fabric.

 The fabric requirements you'll need and the dimensions are on your screen.

 Okay, because this block uses two and a half inch squares, two and a half inch pre-cut

 And you'll want a variety of different colors to make it look kind of nice and scrappy.

 If you don't have strips of two and a half inch width, you can also use five inch charm

 You can see that this five inch charm square yields four different two and a half inch

 You can also use ten inch squares, like this patch here, and that will yield 16 different

 To assemble this block, you'll want to sew four of the two inch squares together in the

 You'll add the small strips to the outside edges, add a strip to each end of that.

 You'll sew three squares together for this side, sew those to the center.

 You'll sew five patches together for each of these ends, sew that to the center.

 You'll add the strip on the outside and the strips on the top and bottom.

 And you can see by this little tape measure that it's exactly two inches apart, which

 These three squares are sewn together with a little larger seam allowance.

 You see that there's a gap here, so your patch is not going to fit together as well.

 On this upper example, the seam allowance is a little smaller, so that makes a wider

 This first block uses the fabrics we were showing in the beginning.

 And we used a neutral contrasting fabric for the sashings on all sides here.

 We can take the same block and instead of the gray, we've used a black here.

 You can see that it starts with a light orange on this side and goes darker toward the middle

 From that orange fabric, we cut the lighter orange for these strips and the darker orange

 We used a third block on point and alternated where the light orange and dark orange strips

 Boxed In and 99 other fun blocks are available in Quiltmakers 100 Blocks Volume 2.

 We hope you'll join us again soon on Quiltmakers Block Network.

 And here shortly I'm going to attach the feathers to it just so we can see what it's going to

 Okay, how I'm going to do it is I'm going to fold a piece over like that.

 So just take them, put them sideways, fold the wire, roll it up into it, and the next

 Alright, right here, this is the top to the, just the feather decoy.

 So when it's on that spring and that wheel's turning, it's going to be good to go.

 And what I'm going to do is, I don't want too much weight on this thing so I'm going

 to make a little piece but I'm going to have it where it has like tails hanging off, tails

 And I'm going to figure out how I'm going to do that in a little bit.

 I'm just going to figure out how I'm going to do this and I'll show you what I'm going

 What I'm going to do is, I'm going to make basically a cross with this piece.

 In the middle where the stick is going to be, is going to be somewhere in there.

 So I'm going to make a cross cut out here, here, here, and here.

 Probably each tail I'll leave about two and a half inches of fur on it.

 And what I have, I'll probably cut these in half just so there's more, more tails flopping

 It will go on here, these short tails go around the stick and these are going to flop around

 Alright, what I'm going to do with them, the short pieces that were part of the cross,

 I'm going to cut these into three pieces, just like that, the short ones.

 But then, to tape to the stick, I'm only going to use the middle two and then the rest are

 Another thing I'm going to do is I'm going to round off these corners so they're not

 Just take them to a point, kind of round them off, just like that.

 Alright, so I just spray painted that stick outside, gave it a little green and some tan.

 What I'm going to do, I have an extra zip tie, so the best way that I'm thinking to

 put this on there is to take some tape and beef up the very end of this stick, only in

 So I just took some of that green duct tape and I'm just putting a big end on that stick.

 So I'm going to take that, put it in the middle of this fur, drape it over, grab my zip tie

 right here, take the very two middle tails on the cross piece, the short sided piece,

 I think I need to cut them into the middle more, so just hang on a second.

 I need to cut them into the middle a little more, make the slits a little deeper.

 And then on the side that does not have the tape on it, so just the wooden piece is what

 And that big bulb on the end is going to keep it from coming off.

 So now I have this motion, with this extra hair once it falls off.

 Today we're going to make a repair on a headlight using the Cure-It headlight and tail light repair kit.

 It's better to take the headlight or the tail light out of the car, but if you can't take it out you can do it in the vehicle.

 So we're going to open our kit up and we're going to dump the contents out carefully.

 One part activator, one part clear, one part activator or one part yellow, one part activator and one part red.

 You take your clear film and you cut it out a little bigger than the damage.

 You do the same thing for your tail light as you would your headlight.

 We're simply going to take the headlight now and we're going to turn it up.

 This is how you take one part of clear and then you take one part of activator.

 If you're not sure on a one-to-one mix, just use a little more activator to ensure the product gets hard.

 The activator is labeled part B. The clear adhesive is labeled part A.

 Now we've cut out a little larger than the damage and we're going to want to put the adhesive right on the clear on both sides of the clear.

 By the way, this product washes off very easily with warm water and soap.

 The adhesive that comes out, you just want to simply wipe over top of your clear plastic film that you have.

 It takes about 24 hours to get a full cure, but this is ready to go right now.

 You see me poking right at the middle of the hole and you see how solid that is.

 A lot of people think you can't curl pixie cuts, but in reality you really can.

 Um, mainly, you know, brush your hair and now I'm going to put a little bit of baby powder into my hair.

 It gives you a lot more texture to work with instead of your hair just being really slick and just not giving you much to play with.

 Just gotta be sure to zhush it enough so that you can't really see the baby powder.

 And I'm waiting for my curling iron to heat up so I have some footage of me playing with my ferret.

 Okay, my curling iron is hot and now before I curl it I'm just going to take a comb and I'm just going to tease the roots of my hair so that my hair doesn't just lie flat.

 Because definitely with a pixie cut the last thing you want is for your hair to lie flat because it looks absolutely ridiculous and terrible.

 Now I'm just going to take my curling iron and take off sections of my hair and I'm going to curl away from my- away from me.

 Okay, and now that I am done curling my hair, I am just going to spray it with a bit of

 And now I am just going to fold my hands through it so that the curls aren't quite so crazy

 And now I am going to take my Polymer Clay Hair Wax, it smells amazing, and I am just

 going to take a little bit on my fingers and I am going to mesh it in my hair.

 Just let me know what you guys think and if you want more tutorials like this, just tell

 Today we're going to talk about garlic, that wonderful herb that you can use in so

 Now garlic is available year round, however, they have different varieties.

 In fact, there's over 50 varieties of garlic that are available.

 They winter over and in the spring, they'll spring up and harvest in the summer and then

 There are different varieties that are harvested at different times of the year.

 So depending on the time of year really determines what variety of garlic you're going to get

 I've got a couple of different varieties here I want to show you.

 When selecting garlic at the store, regardless of the variety, you're going to want to look

 You want to look for something that has the paper or the covering nice and intact there.

 You can also see that they're starting to sprout there a little bit.

 However, that's not what you want to be looking for at the store.

 This is an elephant garlic, which is actually not a true garlic at all.

 But it can be used in exactly the same way, even though it's not a true garlic.

 They're kind of a cross, but they're more of an onion, but they have a garlic flavor to them.

 They're used a lot in Italian cooking and in the Philippines as well.

 They're very delightful, and you can use those as a garlic-onion combination in your cooking.

 Looking for that nice, tight wrapper, firm, and no sprouts coming out the top.

 We are looking forward to putting this garlic to use in some wonderful recipes coming up in some future episodes.

 Now that is, pico de gallo is fresh tomato salsa, which you can use on top of tacos, burritos,

 There's only seven ingredients, and we're going to put some together right now.

 And what it does, it makes long and beautiful thin stripes of food, hard vegetables.

 If you don't have turmeric root, you can add half a teaspoon of turmeric powder.

 By the way, the leftovers you can put in some kind of mason jar or anything like this.

 Because it's very packed with acidity that we added from rice vinegar.

 Hey, this is Angie from Happy Healthy Vegan and I've got another recipe demo for you today.

 Now this is actually an experiment that I'm going to do live to video so hopefully it

 is that other fruits seem to freeze more solidly than bananas so I'm going to try to blend

 could probably put a little vanilla in here too and it would be yummy but I'm just going

 So if you're using a Vitamix like I am, you take the, take that little lid part out and

 insert the tampering tool I believe they call it and pretty much just start going to town.

 I think anyone that you fed this to, vegan or not, raw or not, 80, 10, 10 or not, they're

 from Happy Healthy Vegan including more recipe tips, health and fitness tips, and more coverage

 Hey guys, today I'm doing a quick tip and this is how to make kind of a brush guard thingy for your brushes.

 Really, really, really cheap to do and it's a solution that I found.

 So pretty much I bought this essence eyeliner yesterday and it came with a little mini brush.

 Um, and I was about to put this back in my makeup drawer and I'm like this is going to get eyeliner all over everything.

 So this way the eyeliner is not going to get all over everything.

 All you need is some scotch tape, some scissors, and then for the actual thing you're going to be making, you can use stuff like, um, chip bags.

 I personally use, this was from like a Donna Michelle eyebrow razor kit and you know how sometimes it has that plastic stuff that's like for the packaging.

 Or, let's see, oh I got this um, elf eyelash curler and it has like the plastic right here.

 So any old packaging you have around your house you can even just use paper.

 So pretty much what you do is, um, I'm going to be using the packaging from the elf stuff.

 So I just took a little piece and I just folded it in half and you can kind of measure like is that going to be too big, too small.

 This is probably a little bit too big so I'm just going to trim it a little bit more.

 Now what you do is take your tape, take a piece off, go as the edge of it, fold it over.

 Now here's the thing, you do not want to pull the tapes over, pull the tape over on these sides.

 You want to cut that off because if you tape it over you're not going to be able to get your brush in there.

 And then you should have this thing with like a little opening and then you just slide your brush in it.

 So that way when you put it in your drawer you don't get any eyeliner all over everything.

 And yeah, so you can also make these for, where'd it go, like bigger brushes too for like traveling and stuff.

I really hope you guys enjoyed this and I will see you guys next time.

 It kind of just gives that little bit of elegant elegant touch to it

 So today I'm gonna be doing something with pearls, especially now.

 Jewelries and stuff like that for just you know to use for one night, and that's it

 So I'm gonna be doing a little tutorial a do-it-yourself little tutorial just to give your your pearls some makeover

 So pull out your pearls that's just been sitting around and you haven't used it in a long time

 I have a lot a lot of pearls just because I love it first thing is just get

 Someone gave me a really cute cute gift box, so I got this from there

 So pretty right and then also you can pull out like a little ribbon.

 Had this is just a small ribbon pink ribbon, so says Victoria's Secret all over it so cute

 so I have three little brooches, that's like ranges and sizes and

 Guesstimate where you want to put these I'm just gonna take this three pearls right here

 And then I'm gonna take this bow the small little bow, and I'm just gonna put that on top of the heart

 Just to make a little ribbon just to pull this side of the pearls together

 Randomly the heart is up here next to the bow and then I'm just gonna put the heart

 This is my other brooch, and this is the other one so I just placed it randomly doesn't matter you guys can place it anywhere

 You're the one who's gonna be wearing it right so something simple like this will make your outfit

 so you know something really simple that you can just pull out from your

 Old stuff like pearls and brooches and stuff like that and then there you go you have something really cute

 So you guys are looking for something to enhance your outfit if it's something just simple like a simple dress simple

 Simple shoes and stuff like that this will definitely give that you know that edge and that

 Pop appeal or whatever so I hope you guys enjoy this and we'll try this project because it's

 Definitely cute even if you're not going to prom or nothing special something like this for an outfit just going out

 Definitely cute because I would totally rock this so I hope you guys enjoy that and

 If you do try it like I always say I want to see pictures because I want to see your little creations

 What you guys come up with because you know you have to feed me more ideas

 You have to feed me more ideas, maybe I'll get more ideas from you guys, and you can get ideas from me, so I

We just got back from the lake and we were walleye fishing so we have walleye today.

 The first thing you're going to want to do is worry about safety.

 Of course you never want to cut yourself so you'll notice that I'm wearing a glove here.

 This glove comes in very handy because it's basically got metal strands in it and it keeps you from cutting yourself.

 If you poke into yourself it's going to get you but you can see I'm cutting my hand right now and it's not doing anything.

 Once you get that, the first cut you're going to make is right here behind the head, right down to this fin here on the side.

 I like to angle the blade just a little bit towards the head to get underneath the scales.

 Then you're going to make that cut right there and then you're going to flip this guy over and make the same cut on the other side.

 You're going to want to cut down to get down to the spine here and then you're just going to take the tip of the blade right along the spine.

 You're going to be able to follow it very easily with the knife.

 You just follow it down the spine and you keep going until you get to the part where you'll be able to poke through.

 You poke it through and you just keep following the spine right down to the end.

 Then you're going to want to go and start peeling the skin away right down the spine still.

 You're going to be able to feel it the whole way until you get to his rib cage.

 Once you get to his rib cage, you're going to want to just keep cutting along the bones.

 Keep peeling that away and you're going to want to do it on the other side.

 I leave that side on there purposely because it helps me to get momentum and it helps to balance the weight of the fish.

 When you get into these big fish and you don't have that other side there, this cut gets a lot harder.

 This side I always start from the tail and work my way back up.

 You're going to want to cut until you can get it far enough away that you're going to want to start cutting down and taking it off.

 He's got a lateral line that you're going to want to cut on because that's where all the bones reside.

 You basically just cut right down and it will go right down to where you poke through and it comes right off.

 Then you're going to want to do the same thing on the other side.

 Since it's a walleye, you're going to want to cut his cheeks out, obviously.

 If you have a flexible blade, you can very easily follow the contour of his cheek.

 You see there, I just would have cut my finger if I didn't have this glove on because I ran the blade right across my finger while I was cutting.

 When I'm right-handed, it makes it a little harder for me to do that side.

 You can see that I'm cutting it right down to where I poke through.

 To fillet him, basically take him, set it horizontally, dig your fingernail into his tail.

 Then what you're going to want to do is run your finger right down along this side because this is where all the bones are going to sit.

 I always just basically make this cut just to make sure that I get the bones out of it.

 You don't lose a whole lot of meat and it just makes sure you get the bones out of it.

 They'll have it all the way through their backside that you can cut out if you want.

 Now you can run your finger up and down there and there's no bones.

 The other place to check is right here and there is a little bit of a bone right there.

 Now you've got a boneless fillet and you've got your cheeks with no skin on them.

 Hi friends, welcome to Lovely's Kitchen and today I'm going to show you how to make paneer butter masala.

 Paneer butter masala is made out of Indian collard cheese and it's a gravy dish.

 1 cup paneer, 1 tsp dry fenugreek leaves, 1 tsp coriander seeds, 1 tsp garam masala, 1 tsp red chilli powder, 1 tsp ginger garlic and green chilli paste

 1 cup cashew nuts, 1 tsp sugar, salt to taste, 3 tbsp butter, 1 tsp cumin seeds, 1-1.5 cup whole milk

 If you have fresh cream, you can use fresh cream instead of milk.

 And then after that I'll be shallow frying the paneer for about a minute on high heat till it gets light brown in colour on each side.

 Butter has started melting and it's time to add whole cumin to the butter.

 When the cumin starts crackling, add chopped onion and we're going to fry it for a minute on high heat.

 Add sugar, salt to taste, coriander powder, red chilli powder, dry fenugreek leaves and garam masala.

 Garam masala is a mixed Indian spice you can get in any of the Indian grocery store.

 Now we're going to cover it and cook it for about 5 minutes on medium heat.

Garnish it with some fresh cilantro and it's ready to be served.

 Today I've served butter paneer masala with fried rice and homemade garlic naan.

 So we're here in France for my sister's wedding, and I'm going to make Croute aux Mourines,

 the dish I made when she and her husband first got engaged to honor the French region where he grew up.

 After her beautiful wedding, my husband and I took some time to visit the nearby city of Lyon.

 While there, I was able to buy all my ingredients at the many interesting and lively markets throughout the city.

 Pomme Thaie from the fromagerie at the open-air market along the Rhone,

 Morels and seps from the indoor market named after Lyon's most famous chef, Paul Bocuse,

 a baguette from the great little boulangerie where we ate breakfast every morning, and were ready to cook.

 We're back in the apartment we're staying in the old village of Lyon.

 We have everything that we need from the market, including our baguette, our mushrooms, our butter.

I've done the mise en place for the chives and the cheese, so they're ready to go.

 We had to purchase these dried because they're only available fresh in May and June.

 Otherwise, you can buy them dried in specialty stores any other time of the year, and they're just as good.

 We also have our sep mushrooms, which are known as porcini mushrooms or boletus edulis, in case you ever asked the Latin name.

 Now that our Morels are soaking in the hot water for about a half hour or until they become soft,

 You don't want to actually rinse or soak the mushrooms because they'll absorb too much water.

 What we're going to use is a paring knife to peel off just a thin layer from the outside.

 Now that we've cleaned off the dirt off of our porcini mushrooms, we need to chop them.

 Now what we want to do is rinse them in water to remove any sand or grit that might be remaining.

 Now I want to cut the mushrooms in half so that they keep their structure and shape,

 but they're small enough so that they will present nicely and eat well on the croute.

 All right, now we're going to take our baguette, and we're going to cut it on the diagonal

 so that we actually have more surface area on which to put your mushroom and cheese topping.

 I want to broil these until they're just lightly golden brown on both sides.

 I don't want to overcook them because they're actually going to go in the broiler again.

 In the meantime, what I'm going to do is take about a tablespoon of butter,

 melt it in my saute pan, and cook the mushrooms until they've wilted slightly.

 So I'm going to turn up the heat just a little bit so it's about medium-high.

 I want this to reduce by about a third, and then we're ready to go.

 What I'm going to do is season the mixture with some pepper and salt.

 All right, this is just about there with the reduction, so I'm going to add my chopped chives

 What we're going to do is put it in the oven to broil again for a few minutes until it gets nice and bubbly.

 There's a little bit of cheese in the bottom there, but I think that's okay.

 I'm going to take a little bit of the sauce and I'm going to put it in the oven for about 15 minutes.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make a really cute no-sew fleece blanket for your

 I chose this cute pattern that perhaps the child could grow into for a toddler.

 The great chic idea about that is if you use your weekly coupon that comes in the newspaper,

 Once you get home with your cute, adorable baby fleece material, you will need to find

 a good sharp pair of scissors, a ruler, and you will cut a 4 inch square of paper.

 A lot of people use a backing with plain color, but I prefer it this way.

 I've already started the blanket ahead of time, so this is actually my last square that

 Now you're going to take your ruler, line it up here, and you're going to start cutting

 Once you cut all your double layers of material, you're just going to take the two pieces and

 I prefer two because if you've got a baby or a toddler dragging this blanket around,

 I would think it would come untied, so I'm doing a little double knot.

 Nothing fancy because I was never a Boy Scout, so I don't know fancy knots.

 If it's not on sale in the fabric store, look for coupons online or in the weekly paper.

 Another great idea, if you have your own baby, you could also use this as a piece of art,

 All your friends and relatives will love this wonderful handmade gift.

 Okay, as I'm finishing up tying my fringe, I do have one tip for you.

 Make sure when you make your first knot, do not pull it too tight because it will bunch

 So just tie that first knot a little loose, and then on your second knot, you can tie

 And if you would like better, more complete instructions, you can go to our site, CheapCheapBaby.com,

 where you will find full instructions on how to make this wonderful baby gift.

 Hi guys, today we're going to be making tangy sweet baked honey barbeque.

 And here is the list of ingredients that you'll be using for this recipe.

 Salt, pepper, paprika, chili powder, garlic powder, and Weber Kickin' Chicken Seasoning.

 For the sauce, you're going to have barbeque sauce, honey, soy sauce, hot sauce, and vinegar.

 And you can cover it in a little bit of olive oil just to make sure that it doesn't stick

 So now once you get them all into the pan, you're going to sprinkle generously the seasoning

 Then you're going to take your palm, or you can use your hands, and flip your chicken

 That, I'm telling you, this hot sauce, it is going to sneak up on you, but in a delicious way.

 Like, after you bite the chicken, it's going to be sweet, but that hot is going to come after.

 The soy sauce, I know it's salty, but it's not overpowering at all.

 I guess that little piece that I had left there, I don't know how he got in there, but just put them in there.

 All the juices came out of the chicken and it's kind of bubbling.

 Now take your sauce and put it into just a medium sized mixing bowl.

 I prefer to do it this way because I just don't like pouring the sauce into my pan.

 I like to cover it, you know, mix it all so I can make sure the whole piece of chicken gets covered in the sauce.

 Then you just want to make sure you cover all of the chicken in the sauce.

 And then once you do that, you're going to transfer your chicken back into your pan and stick it back in the oven on 450 degrees for 10 minutes.

 Now, after you take them out after the 10 minutes, you want to just flip them.

 And once you do that, you're going to take them and put them back in the oven for about 8-10 minutes.

 This is after they came out of the oven after 10 minutes of broiling.

 And, I'm going to be putting out new videos every single Wednesday.

 So, one of the most important things to learn as a beginning skier or snowboarder is how

 to keep your balance, your speed under control, and how to stop.

 And here at Adventure Ski and Snowboard School, with our 101 instruction, you'll learn to

 When we rise up taller, we'll go a little bit faster in a smaller wedge.

 As we increase the pressure at the front of our boots and widen our wedge, we'll come

 Once we understand how to stop, the next goal is to learn how to turn, because we don't

 Most beginners take the second ski lesson immediately after the first, while the skills

 In turning, we keep our skis in the same V shape or the wedge position, and if we shift

 As we shift our weight to the right ski, we'll turn to the left.

 So in skiing, whether you're a beginning skier, learning how to make turns in the wedge, as

 I am right now, or an intermediate skier where you might make your turn in the wedge, but

 then bring your skis closer together at the end of the turn, making wedge-christie turns,

 or if you're keeping your skis together, making parallel turns, the principles are the same.

 You'll notice that I'm pressing my shins forward in my ski boots here.

 I'm keeping my upper body facing down the hill and letting my legs do the turning.

 That's a real important skill in skiing, keeping your hands and your shoulders and your hips

 facing down the hill and letting your legs do the turning of your feet.

 And when you start learning how to do that first from the wedge position, where you can

 learn to turn with one ski and then the other without your upper body, then we can start

 to apply that to how to turn both skis at the same time, making the more advanced parallel

 Of course, as you get better at this, we can start to shorten up those turns even more,

 make them a little bit quicker, like we would if we were on a steeper run on the snow.

 You'd have to turn a little bit quicker and sooner, transfer your weight a little bit

 So if you're a beginning skier working from a wedge position, you still need to have good

 And you'll notice when I make a parallel turn that I still keep pressing forward in my ski

 My hands and shoulders are still facing down the hill, and I'm using my legs to turn my

 skis, carving those nice, round, S-shaped turns that when we get to the bottom of the

 hill and we want to turn around and see our tracks, look just like those nice S's in the

 And right here in Encinitas, since 1977, we've helped thousands of people to have more fun

 So we hope to help you get ready for your next trip to the snow.

 Alright guys, here we are at Motorcycle Power Sports Industries Western Iowa Tech.

 You either took the recoil starter apart and you can't get it back together, or sometimes

 your buddy takes it apart and he just brings you the parts, the pieces.

 And what we're going to do, I'm going to show you how to properly assemble this bad boy.

 And most of the time, this is the nemesis right here of the recoil rebuild.

 I'm going to tell you guys, it takes some hand strength and a little bit of patience

 The forethought is, make sure you've got something handy, needle nose pliers or needle nose vice

 grips, to be able to hold this spring because you're going to wind this up tight so that

 Some blue points on this, we'll put a really light film of grease on the bottom of this

 pan area here, a little bit of grease right here, and then also on the pivot point of

 This friction disc right, will end up ultimately going on top here.

 Do not put grease on the friction area, otherwise when you pull the rope, it may not throw this

 Beans, why don't you just real lightly put some grease on those areas.

 What I want you to do is keep it in your hand, wind it, and feed the loose end of the spring

 I'm not going to make it as tight as it's going to go to start with.

 If you notice on the inside of my cover here, I've got this flat portion right here.

 I want to be able to put the end of the spring around this edge here.

 Notice how the tip of the vice grip fits nicely in that notch right there.

 This next part, I'm not just going to release this and let it be uncontrolled.

 I'm going to keep my fingers on the top of the spring and I'm going to gently release it.

 Just slowly let it unwind until it's sitting in the housing where it needs to be.

 If you didn't pay attention to how it came out, it's not a big deal.

 What you want to do is take note of the location of the end of the spring that's going to hook into the pulley right here.

 Determine which way the spring needs to be wound and then wind your rope in that direction.

 I'm going to leave the tail of the rope and set the body of the rope into that notch as I engage it onto the spring.

 I'm just going to make sure that I've got engagement with that spring.

 Because that spring could just fly out of there if it's not secured,

 I'm going to assemble the rest of the engagement dog on the top of the pulley before I wind the pulley.

 Now what I'm going to do is put three turns of tension onto that spring.

 Then feed the loose end back through the housing of the pull starter.

 Now the reason I'm pulling that right now is I want to make sure that with spring tension that my pulley is engaged fully with the spring.

 Sometimes it'll rub against it and it'll be enough to get a little bit of a wind to it,

 but as you pull the rope, you'll feel that spring actually disengage from the pulley.

 From here, I like to just put a little bit of a knot in the rope so that as I'm tying the handle on,

 Now it's best to have a half inch or so outside of that knot because as that knot tightens up,

 Thanks for watching Western Iowa Tech Motorcycle and Power Sports.

 We have our shears, clips, rat tail comb and of course a crystal thread.

 We also have the fusion gun because we're going to use the gun to fuse the glue onto

 So there's three different ways you can do the illusion knotting with the different types

 I'm actually demonstrating this on a mannequin hair and I'm going to use color so you can

 And as you can see we did a couple of underneath with the knotting but I'm going to show you

 This is pretty much how much I'm going to use this strand of hair here so you guys can

 It's being heated right now so we can use the fusion bars to show you how it is fused

 Now I went ahead and inserted the hair in as you can see and all it is is going in a

 Now to show you with the glue gun, this is the strand that I normally take.

 As you can see we inserted the hair and all it is is a looping process.

 So you're taking the thread and you're going around the natural hair along with the commercial hair.

 For more information on training virtual or live classes or even hair services.

 He's been watching Magic, so he's not going to be on this intro.

 Black olives, plain olives, garlic, cheese, cream cheese, and green onions.

 Alright, we'll be back to show you how to get the ingredients ready.

 Alright, we're back and Alex has decided he's done levitating and he's going to help us get the cheese ball ready.

 So one of the first things we're going to do is slice up four green onions and Sophie is slicing them up right now.

 She's just taking her knife and she's just cutting them into little pieces.

 She'll do most of the chopping, then Mom will probably chop them a little bit smaller.

 And while she does that, Alex, I would like you to take some of those, we need a quarter cup each of chopped green and black olives.

 Sophie's slicing up the green onions, she's using the big knife now.

Alex is going to chop those up, now just dump them onto the thing.

 If some of them are still too big, take them and put them in a different pile and chop those up too, okay Alex?

 I'm going to take this Kobe Jack cheese, otherwise known as cow pie cheese, and then I'm going to grate it up.

 While Sophie is going to take those corn chips and put them in the green for the Christmas tree style.

 And what we're going to do is at the end we'll roll the cheese ball in the green chips to make it look like a green Christmas tree.

 Small enough that when we roll it in there it'll look like a pine tree.

 Sophie's got the perfect size chips, so we're going to dump those in the bowl.

 And then we'll crunch up another bag full and we'll be right back.

 And Sophie's going to take the ingredients that we've prepared and pour them in there after Alex does a little bit of mixing, okay?

 Be careful to put, make sure to put this in before starting the mixing.

 Otherwise, it can result in disastrous cream cheese and it starts flying everywhere.

 And Sophie got all the other ingredients that are going to be poured in.

 Alex is going to scrape it down and then Alex is going to mix the last of the stuff in.

 And then we're going to put it in the fridge to chill for about 30 minutes to an hour.

We're going to put it in the fridge to chill for an hour and we'll be back.

 Then we'll form it into the Christmas tree and roll it in the green stuff.

 And we're going to make it into a sort of a shape as a Christmas tree, as you said.

 And Alex is going to remove the plastic wrap and roll it in the...

 And get it all full of the green chips so it looks like a Christmas tree.

 And then we're going to decorate it with olives, black olives and green olives.

 You can either use toothpicks cut in half to stick your olives in.

 Or you can just stick them on the tree and then we'll chill it again and they'll stick in just nicely.

 So we're going to decorate our tree and we'll present it to you at the end with our crackers for serving.

 This video tutorial is going to walk you through how to use our multi-decoration rhinestone

 We're going to walk you through the process step by step so when you get the file from

 So this is what the file will look like in CorelDRAW when you pull it into your program.

 So there's our vector file of the basketball right there, that's going to be our heat press

 vinyl and on the left side is our sticky flock template for our rhinestones to brush in our

 So we just brought it over to our Smart Cut program and we are going to go ahead, that

 right there on the left is our rhinestone design of course and this is our vinyl design.

 So with your vinyl design, whenever you're cutting the vinyl heat press material you're

 So you do need to mirror it because it's going to cut on the back side and then you're going

 So we went ahead and mirrored this design and now we're going to go ahead and cut it.

 The film we're using is the Ecofilm that we purchased from in Printables Warehouse.

 As you can see it's already done, we're ready to weed it real quick.

 Weeding process is very easy as you can see we just pull it off right here, cuts perfectly,

 So we're done with the vinyl part of the design, let's go ahead and make our rhinestone

 This is our GCC Jagwire 4 cutter here from Digital Art Solutions.

 As you can see we're doing a double rotation on our sticky flock here, just makes the weeding

 This is the GCC Jagwire 4 again, great cutter for your template materials, has great down

 force and great tracking which is something you definitely need for your rhinestone templates.

 So our cutter is done, we went ahead and weeded that real quick, now we're ready to brush

 Lay it down on our sticky flock workstation, we're using our SS10 Korean low lead stones

 These are the crystal SS10 stones here that we're going to use.

 So brush them in, very easy using the monster brush here, always like to use the monster

 brush, a little bit easier to brush them in, has a lot more coverage area on it.

 Let's go ahead and pull these stones off, as you can see there's an old design on that

 So make sure to save it after you're done, you can always reuse it.

 So what we're going to do, you can get some of those $50 pillows out there, what we do

 And the reason why we're doing this, we're going to put this design in the top back collar

 So you aren't going to get a good press unless your actual design where you're pressing it

 is raised higher than that, that has some firmness to be able to get that pressure down

 So all we do is we put some foam board in there, we're ready for the first part of the

 design, we're going to press this, we're at about 320 degrees for about 12 to 15 seconds,

 Make sure we get a good design, you're always going to heat press your vinyl part of it

 first, because you need to get that applied to the shirt, so if you did the rhinestones

 first you wouldn't be able to get down to it, because the rhinestones are obviously

 So we're done with the heat press vinyl part of the shirt, let's go ahead and get our rhinestones

 So as the file comes through to you, it's always going to be set up perfectly so the

 So as you can see, all we need to do is eyeball it, line up the rhinestones perfectly with

 Now we've got a great looking design with a basketball all outlined in rhinestone where

 the laces would go, but then we have our heat press vinyl in the middle to kind of make

 the design explode out a little bit, which looks great, great designs on shirts.

 We're going to do 15 seconds here, about 320 degrees at a light to medium pressure.

 And that's how easy it is, you have a multi-decoration design here, you can do it with all types

 We have it available on the TRW Forum website, so make sure to click on the link below.

 You can get this design right here in the file for free, it is in the members only section

 Make sure to click on it, make sure to join the forum right away so you can get this free

 file and if you do have any questions, make sure to contact us.

 We do do custom designs, if you need a custom design or logo made for you, we can create

 These are a couple different custom designs we've done for customers, different schools

 around our area, some local teams, great looking bulldog design here we did for a local football

 And of course we have all of our Sticky Flock alphabet files, where you can create all of

 A lot of different schools we work with, here's an elementary school that we work with for

 And of course if you aren't in the business yet, you want to get into it, we do have our

 Sticky Flock rhinestone starter kits, make sure to check those out on the site.

 We sell the Sticky Flock by the sheets, by the rolls like you see here.

 So come check us out, the rhinestone world dot com, email us at info at the decal world

 dot com with any questions or give us a call at the office at 941-755-1696 and make sure

 to go join the forum right now, get that free file download so you can test it out, see

 how it works and then we will have many other file downloads of the multi decoration on

 the site as well, including all the designs and downloads and pre-cut templates that we

 So thank you for watching the video and we look forward to working with you soon.

 Hi everybody, it's PonyGirl23453678 and I'm going to show you guys how to make these briar

 We've got style 2 and this is style 1, but it's not on her right now.

 So things you will need for this video is some hemp cord, some scissors, and of course,

 Alright, cut a piece of string from your hemp cord about this long.

 Then you'll take your briar model and you'll take your fingers and you'll even it up on

 Then you'll take your finger and tie this thing, string, around your finger.

 Then you'll take it and put it up over their head behind their ears and tie that just like

 Then you'll take it around the throat latch underneath and tie that.

 So next I'll take my other piece and put it through the nose band.

 Then you'll take your string and tie a little thing right there and tie that in a double knot.

 Then you'll take your scissors and make sure you don't cut it too short.

 I don't know why this sprung to mind, it's a bit random but who gives a damn.

 Then a big circle, then a little one, then like an oval and then shade all these parts

 We'll change, so there's the cheek, he gets his eyes, we'll bring them round.

 And then from his beak draw a line up, curve it just above the eyes and stop that there.

 And then you put like, I don't know how to put this, an army helmet-ish type of thing.

 Or you just draw a massive oval and join it up, a massive line to join that up just like that.

 Go out and round and then just kind of go straight and then round.

 And then we draw his big fat round, I wouldn't say fat, it makes him look more cute you see.

 where I teach you how to cook baked calamari stuffed with risotto and salsa verde.

We're going to put some capers into there, put some garlic into there and

 that will be the form and the base to our stuffing with the pasta.

 The red wine vinegar acts just to take away that little bit of bitter edge to the leaves

 So look, we'll take that pasta off, strain it into that risotto.

So what we're looking for, basically you should just hold together.

 across the top to hold the stuffing in there, obviously, keep it from squeezing out whilst

And basically we're going to put a little bit of the polentana sauce

So it's just some tinned tomatoes that have been cooked out with some garlic,

 onions, olive oil and they cook out for an hour and a half to two hours.

 simple, simple appetizer you're going to serve to your guests while you're sitting around

 because what we're going to do later on, we're going to slice these on angles to serve them,

The first ingredient we're going to add is a little garlic powder.

This will loosen it and make it much easier to spread and have, again, that real

What I did was I bought a, you could do this too, a package of sliced pepperoni.

 diced up and mashed up so you can blend it into the butter mixture.

You just want to get it all the same color, which is important because this was

 just means you're going to get the same amount on every piece of bread.

Do a little on each one first because then if you have extra, then you go back and you make

 them a little more heartier, but don't skimp with this now because they should want to stick all

We'll do it this way because they're a little... I've preheated my oven

I'm going to put them on the top shelf because it'll be easier for when we broil

Now we're going to brown the tops, but this is the time not to move away from the oven.

 You stay here and just watch them because they can brown very quickly.

 Now, if my friends were here already, I wouldn't have anything to put on the platter because they'd

 these on here and I want to open some champagne so when they come in, we can have a nice toast.

 the ball's going to fall and we're going to be in another new year.

 our friends and family and dig into these delicious appetizers.

 you out there the happiest and the healthiest new year in the world.

 flat against the surface and you can see that i'm still able to

 uh... magnetic bits inside of oil and then i'm able to view the

 of the ferrofluid here and you can see that i'm not really getting that big of a pull from it

 so roughly this is kind of the stuff i'm going to be working with and

 sort of source uh... i should have if you can give me any recommendations that

 uh... well i'm pretty sure twenty four volt will definitely yield more

 door for your shed using the plans available on my website at www.cheapsheds.com.

 This is video number 8 in my 12 video series on how to build a shed.

 mount the hinges and latch because they can't be backed out like screws can.

 Plus they hold much firmer and will help reduce future door sagging problems.

 with an inside diameter slightly larger than the 1-1-1 router bit.

 consist of the collar and a threaded ring to hold it to the router base.

 the thickness of the siding plus the thickness of the trim plus about an

 bottom of the side where you're putting the hinges and pull a router through the

 gap between the trim up to the top and about halfway across the top of the door.

 Make sure you cut well past where the hinge will be mounted so that it will

 not interfere with the base of the router when you start the second cut.

 If you aren't cutting through the siding then set the cut depth a little deeper

 because you'll have to go through one inch of trim and three and a half inches

Mount the hinges by driving five inch carriage bolts into the holes.

 where you left off and cut down the latch side to the bottom edge.

 to go and drill quarter inch holes and mount with carriage bolts.

 use a handsaw to cut the bottom plate out of the door opening between the door

 the shed and to see all the videos in the shed building series go to my

 Let's see a few simple ways to cut carrots into even, aesthetically pleasing pieces.

 To begin, we will first cut the ends of the carrots and then peel the skin.

 Holding the carrot with the fingertips away from the knife, slice them into rounds.

 Use them for pastas or salads and serve them for a delicious meal.

 To make the dice, we will first half the carrots lengthwise once.

 Bring the carrot slices together and cut them evenly into a dice.

 The number of halves you make of the carrots depends upon the thickness of each carrot.

 The diced carrots can be used in delicious hearty stews, hearty sauces like bolognese

 For the julienne cut, hold the carrot at an angle and make thin slices lengthwise.

 Stack these thin slices together like laying out a deck of cards.

 Holding down the stack, make tight cuts for a beautiful julienne.

 Julienne is what you use when you want to start getting real fancy.

 They look great and work well in stir fries and sautés as well.

 Now to make the finely chopped, we use the julienne carrots that we did earlier.

 Bring them together and slowly and carefully run your knife tightly to make a finely chopped carrot.

 You can now use these finely chopped carrots for fried rice, soups and sauces.

 The doctor's in and today we're doing beef and broccoli in a wok.

 What we have here are some beef strips that you can get from any store.

 I have them sitting in a simple marinade of low-sodium soy sauce, a little bit of olive oil and some black pepper to season.

 We also need a little bit of olive oil or a little bit of vegetable oil, not too much.

 So what we're going to do today, we're going to make this dish.

 You talk about trying to lose some weight and having some bulk and having some fiber, this is it.

 We want to use vegetable oil here, even though I know it's a trans fat.

 All we're going to do is put in about a tablespoon full of vegetable oil in the bottom of the wok.

 Next thing we're going to do is we're going to add a little bit of garlic.

Now we're going to add our final ingredient and a little bit of sauce.

 G'day guys, this is a video I'm going to make to show my viewers how to rig up a simple

Now when you're chasing live bait, it's always good to know, or it's always

 Now the reason why is because you don't really need to cast far to catch live bait.

 really need is a long rod, very light gear, and all you need to do is just drop the bait

But the rig that really really catches my eye is the Paternoster rig.

 Now there's a video on my channel about the Paternoster rig, but that's mainly used to

 at the end, if you can really see it, at the end of the line, all you need to do is just

 the better the chances of catching that yellowtail or tailor or whatever you want to catch as

Just make sure you don't use sand whiting as live bait because it's actually

But yackers and tailor and garfish, all that, that's acceptable.

 this, you might think it's a bit too big, but be surprised that this hook is perfect

 for live bait because the distance of the tip of the point to the actual long shank

And all you need to do is, it's just, you know, one, two, three step

I mean, like, it's the quickest way to rig up for any type of fish.

 I mean, the more worms you have on your rod, the better the chance of catching that redfin.

 you're asking what type of sinkers should I be using, well, you shouldn't be using heavy

So all you basically need to do is, you get one of these split shot sinkers.

 might be laughing, but I'll be honest, from a wharf, that's all you need.

 bait down, to drift along the current, because the more natural your bait looks, the more

So if you've got any questions about rigging up for any type of fish, leave a comment

 down below or send me a personal message and I'll freely and gladly enough to send you

 You either eat it as it's on its own or you can use it as a side with steamed fish especially.

 When I was growing up, my mother would just fry up some salt pork and put in it when we

 And it's not very lean, so it will certainly imitate the salt pork.

 I took the leaves off the top of the fresh thyme and I'm going to add that to it.

 I use the canned coconut milk and you might have to add about an ounce or two ounces of

 I give the coconut milk and the season the chance to come to a boil.

 In the meantime, I'll add a cup of cold water to the corn meal because you have to make

 it a little bit liquid to add to the boiling liquid in there or else it will lump and you

 I'm adding a quarter teaspoon of pepper sauce, Scotch bonnet pepper sauce.

 After the pepper sauce I'm going to add a tablespoon of margarine or butter.

 We do this so that when we add it to the boiling liquid in the saucepan it won't lump.

 I'm just leaving it to make sure that the corn meal gets cooked.

 You just keep turning on a low heat for about the most 10 minutes after adding it to the

 Well, you taste it and you can tell whether the meal is cooked or not.

 To those of you who have been asking for it, here is Jamaican turned corn meal.

 Now all you have to do is go to my website, cooklikeajamaican.com

 I like it with fish or any meat that you have if you have meat cooked already.

 We can also do extensions of a cascade by adding triplet harmonics or triplet

 slurs and what we do there we're going to hit in this case I'm holding a

 diminished shape over here I'm barring four strings at the sixth fret my second

 finger is on the third string at the seventh fret my third finger on the

 first string at the seventh fret sounds like that now the little triplet figure

 that I'm going to add I'm going to hit the when I get up to the top of the

 cascade where I'm hitting the third string harmonic I'm going to hit that

 and then pluck the first string with my a finger is normal and then pull off

 now so happens with this chord I can also do a triplet formation on the

 second string with a little pull off on the second string like that so again I'm

 hitting out here I'm hitting the fourth string as a harmonic plucking with my

 thumb shooting with the index finger and then the a finger plucks the second

 string and I've got my third finger I move my third finger over to the second

 string on to the F sharp which is on the second string at the seventh fret

 so I'm hitting the fourth string harmonic then plucking the normal F

 it's a very light pull off you don't as we've been talking throughout this the

 entire article here you've got to make sure the harmonic is equal in volume to

 the non harmonic notes so when you're doing these slurs you gotta be gentle

 with them so that they don't come out too loud now in slow motion it looks

 like this I'm holding the diminished chord I'm going to do a cascade

 then coming back I'm going to hammer my third finger onto the first string then

 I hit the third string harmonic hit the first string pull off then hit the fourth

 string move my third finger to the second string at the seventh fret and

 that first string pull off second string pull off you do it fast it's a really

 cool effect now if we put that if we do it fast sounds like that

 If you don't know what Nerunerunerune is, it's a classic Japanese mixing DIY candy.

I'll put the link down below to that one along with some other variations.

 Lastly, we're going to take our ramen candies and empty them into that glass tray.

 These are actually, on closer observation, are not ramen candies.

 They're actually puffed rice that's coated with a little bit of, you know, candy melt.

 You can dip it first into this really fun shaving cream-like stuff.

 And then you've got these little crunchy bits, which are a little bit fruity.

 So it's an interesting combination of chocolate and fruity flavors.

 Then you've got this really fun crunchy bit, the waffle wafer ice cream cone bit.

 So you've got a lot of this kind of rice crispy texture and flavor.

 Quite a different experience than the usual Neru Neru Ne because you've got the actual kind of cookie bit,

 Otherwise, it's like just eating candy shaving cream, which is great and all, but it's a little bit strange.

 When you taste it just...this one, it tastes more like Neru Neru Ne, like a sour, fruity foam.

 And then, when you have the chocolate, it tastes more like a dessert that you're familiar with.

 For those of you that don't know what candy melts are, you can find them here in the States.

 And it's kind of like unflavored chocolate, and they're used to cover cake pops and, you know, make confections and stuff.

 Let me know in the comments below your experiences with Neru Neru Neru Ne, if you've ever had it.

 Hello, I'm Mariette DiChristina, Editor-in-Chief of Scientific American, and these are my daughters

 In this episode, we're going to inflate a balloon using yeast, the same stuff that makes

 Yeast are actually tiny creatures smaller than the eye can see.

 When they eat, they produce gas, and as we'll see, millions of yeast working together can

 For this activity, you're going to need baker's yeast, a tablespoon of sugar, a funnel, a

 Okay, to start, we'll loosen up our balloon by blowing it up a few times.

 Now we'll pour in about two inches of warm water into this plastic bottle.

 These yeast are probably getting hungry, so now we'll add two tablespoons of sugar and

 Okay, we'll leave this set up here for around 15 to 20 minutes and see what happens.

 Okay, it's about 20 minutes later, and as you can see, our balloon has filled up.

 What's happened here is that millions of yeast organisms gobbled up the sugar that

 Because this gas takes up more space than the sugar, it made the balloon expand.

 For more activities to try, visit our website, scientificamerican.com forward slash bring

 This is Awesome Stuff 1000 back again with your paper Tech Tech Part 2.

 First throw out the excess parts and then after you've waited like 10 minutes throw

 Now in a different video we'll teach you how to make a customizable deck with a regular

 Well my Tech Tech isn't fully dried so I think I'm going to go back to my blue one.

 Please note if you don't have a sewing needle or a pin then it's going to be very hard to

 Well I'm not really going to teach you how to add the trucks because after you're done

 And also we hope you're not a retard because if you don't know how to put a Tech Tech truck

 Sometimes I get bored and I like stab myself but it doesn't really hurt.

 Welcome guys, we're going to make a nice chicken mousseline right now.

 And if none of those products are cold enough, it's going to break.

 The cream will separate from the chicken and eventually that cream will turn into butter.

 One pound of chicken, one cup of heavy cream, and one egg white.

 Make sure you remove any kind of silver skin, tender part of the chicken that needs to go.

 I'm going to use my little egg shell splitter here to break my egg shell, okay?

 Now I'm taking that egg white and I'm going to add it into the chicken mousse.

 If you add the cream and it's not smooth enough, then that cream might turn into butter by the time you make the whole mixture smooth.

 I'm going to add that to it because I'm going to create a stuffing after and this is what's going to be into it.

 The vegetable will render water as it's cooked and you have big holes in your mousseline.

 Anything you add to your mousseline to flavor it, it really needs to be cooked.

We all have those days where we've accidentally slept in our makeup.

 Now I say accidentally because it's not really accident that you've slept in

 your makeup, it's more of just I really don't want to take this off.

 I'm done, I don't want to have to sit there and just like... so you know there's the

 whole tricks of like keeping like baby wipes or wipes or something close to

 but if I do and I don't take it off at a specific time I'm probably gonna sleep

You slept in your makeup and the next day you realize that you have

 time to like you know kind of wipe it off a little bit but for the most part

 you don't have time to like scrub your makeup off, wash your face, and get ready

 because you've either slept in or you just completely forgot like me.

 I'm going to show you is just kind of how to touch up your slept in makeup.

The number one place that you want to apply this are if you wore

 mascara since you obviously you would have worn mascara the black usually will

 because since it is a liquid I could just slide it around my face but since I

 had makeup on previous if I'm gonna slide it over that makeup it's going to

 like you have caked on dirt on your face if you're just gonna like rub.

 want to pat, oh my goodness, so you want to pat the color in like this.

 fast, you can do it really slow and get it into the creases, whatever works just

 do not swipe and rub and buff and do don't do any of that stuff if you slept

 using this is illuminating mineral wear, okay so if you can see it it has a

 The other side is the highlighting powder, this is just the setting powder.

 and you look like you have clean skin and you really don't, you know deep down

I'm going to be using my Glamorous palette and using that middle

 lid and that color Halo is going to be inner corner and right underneath your

 And so the one of the only ways, besides if you don't want to like you know

 cleanse them off, then you take one of these little brushes, should seem very

You want the comb side and you are literally going to brush through

I'm sure you have to take just a little bit extra time but it's a

 little bit less time than having to completely wash it off and start over

 Also I'm going to use about half a tablespoon of vegetable oil, sunflower oil.

 Olive oil doesn't go too well with rice so I would suggest vegetable oil also.

 Now I've measured it in my special high school musical large cup.

 This will serve at least six people and I'm serving a lot of children today.

 OK, since I have one high school musical cup of rice in here, I will be using as a liquid

 Now with my high school special musical cup here by my side, I'm going to slice my onions

 My daughter is absolutely disgusted that I'm mentioning high school musical.

 OK, for the rice into a large saucepan I'm adding half a tablespoon of my oil.

 You can turn the heat up to make the oil heat up faster but don't forget to turn it down.

 Now you can hear the cumin seeds begin to sizzle and pop in the hot oil.

 At this stage, before they start to burn, I will add my finely sliced red onions.

 Now I want to get the onion sauce so I will turn the heat down.

 Now that the onions have begun to soften, I'm going to add my rice.

 Now I'm going to turn the heat up and fry the rice with the onions.

 I've been frying the rice now with the onions and cumin seeds for about a minute.

 I've used one cup of rice so I'm going to add two cups of water.

 Whatever container you use to measure your rice, double it for the liquid.

 Give it a good stir to make sure nothing's stuck to the bottom.

 Once your pot has come to a boil, cover it with a nicely fitting lid.

I've turned the heat off and left it covered for a further five minutes.

 just planning to do this morning, which is my favorite banana strawberry vegan shake

 gonna see here, I put some hemp protein, which is one of the best plant-based source for

I put maca powder in it, which is a Peruvian root, and it's very rich in

 smoothie already, I put, you see here, the white stuff, it is basically the coconut milk.

 Make sure when you use coconut milk, use the highest concentration of coconut, because

 can see that it is, it's saying that 95% of the coconut extract, the coconut concentration

 really like prova milk because first of all it's organic, second of all the concentration

 of the rice is 15%, and there's no sugar added, only some flour, oil, sea salt, water, and

Comparing to the others, you know, rice can be 8%, 9%, so make sure you

 usually about half a liter of rice milk to make sure that we have enough for the whole

So what I used, just to summarize my banana strawberry shake for

If you want to add, you're more than welcome to add ground cinnamon and lemon

 A lot of players when they're playing tennis, they catch the ball behind them, therefore

 they get a little overpowered and they can't put the ball where they want to put it.

 I've drawn a diagram of what I call Section 10, starting at 1, going to 10.

 When a player prepares to hit the ball on his forehand or backhand, he takes the racket

 He wants to get the ball out in front in what we call Section 10.

 When he gets the ball out in Section 10, that's when he explodes the wrist, controlling

 If a player gets caught in Section 3, what happens is he can't use his back leg.

 His abdominals are trying to get into the point, but he's not actually using them for

 When a player gets the ball out in Section 8, 9, or 10, he has his weight transfer, his

 abdominals are comfortable, therefore they can be used and engaged more easily.

 When the wrist is in trouble, you're fighting off and you're not using the power and strength

 Player prepares his body, gets the racket back, brings the racket through Section 1,

 You can use this on any shot, short, wide, deep balls, even defensive.

 It's good to get the racket out in front and control the power and the play of the point.

 Once again, it's James Springer with Tennis Works bringing you a quick tennis tip.

 and because a few of my followers requested a dessert that could have both fruit and chocolate in it

 You can find a full list of the ingredients in the more info area below the video

 and the cup of sugar, or if you're using grams, is 200 grams of sugar

 and I'm working it with a spoon first because I don't want it to splash all over the kitchen

 I use my hands a lot, I must wash my hands probably a thousand times

 but again, you can find all these information in the more info area below the video

 and you see how the chocolate chips and the pears fell at the bottom of the cake

 with this sort of caramelized fruit and chocolate at the bottom

 there's nothing better than coming home after a long day of work

 shoot regular wrist rockets with tubes and this is the first time I purchased

 flat bands on it and I can tell you I enjoy shooting this slingshot.

 It took a couple shots of course to get used to it but I was shooting

 So when I hold this slingshot, I place my pinky through that hole

 really, really much heavier than the yellow and black tubes I was shooting.

 you do need multiplex wood because the poundage pull on it is pretty heavy

 I'm worried that if it ever breaks on me and hits me in the face, it could really

 if you do make one in hardwoods, you're going to have to reinforce these forks.

 It doesn't matter if this wood attachment is on the inside or outside.

 I slide it right up to the fork where the rubber tubes are tied down.

 aluminum, your diameter is going to be a lot more than carbon fiber.

 learned less than 24 hours ago, and one that I didn't invent myself.

 was invented by my sister-in-law Naomi, and it's basically so cool.

 is she takes a scarf, and with the two ends hanging equally, she ties them in

 something a little more elaborate, just for the sake of a video, to show you how

 two scarves of similar color, you can really do contrasting colors, whatever

 you want, and I'm tying them around my head with one end hanging shorter than

 gonna remain hanging down, and I'm just making the front all even.

 gonna do, this is so easy, I almost feel embarrassed, but it's wonderful.

 you do this with a stripy scarf, by the way, it looks so cool, but I'm doing it with

 now, so I'm not gonna have a weighing down on my head problem, but if you're

 doing this with heavy, thick scarves, it might not be as comfortable as what I'm

 always do this with the end of a scarf and leave it hanging down like that.

 knots, it kind of does this alternating thing that I'm getting here.

 end thing here, and what I'm gonna do is now, I'm gonna bring it up and around my

 ends, these ones here, and you want to tuck them underneath the whole deal.

 find a space and a knot that you have at the back, and you just shove those ends

 Hey guys, today I'll be showing you how to make homemade ice cream of your choice using a plastic bag and a few simple at home ingredients.

 It is super crazy that you can make ice cream in a bag, I know, but it is super delicious and it tastes just like ice cream.

 And you'll also need some large size zipper sealed storage zip lock bags also.

 The flavor of your choice, I'll be making peach vanilla ice cream today.

 So you can choose any flavor, mint, chocolate, butterscotch, pistachio, whatever you want.

 I'm using 2 eggs, half and half, so this is half milk, half cream already, but you can use milk and half cream or you can use whole milk, sugar, salt, and that's about it.

 I was supposed to use 2, but I can't seem to find my other one.

 And then you can just dice those up and I'm going to add these to a pot.

 Alright, so in my measuring cup, I'm going to bring together about 1 cup, so it would have been half milk, half cream.

 So I'm going to bring 1 cup of this and then I'm going to add this in to my ice cream.

 Alright, so you want to bring this to boil on your stove for about 5 minutes and then meanwhile you can just whisk it to just beat in the egg with this.

 And the egg, I find, gives it a much more creamier and richer taste rather than just doing it with just the milk and the flavoring.

You just need to boil this for 5 minutes and then we're going to blend it.

 So after 5 minutes, you can go ahead and pour your mixture into your blender.

 So after you're done blending, I'm going to go ahead and strain my mixture now.

 And just sift through it just so you get a nice smooth thick liquid.

 And to remove any of the little particles and clumps that you won't want to eat.

 And then you just want to put this into your freezer again for about 30-40 minutes until it's nice and cold.

 For just plain vanilla ice cream, what you do is you add your half and half.

 And with the egg, you can just put a little bit of your cream on the stove and drop one of your egg yolks in there.

 The reason why you want to bring that to boil is because you want that egg to cook.

 Because you don't want to be eating raw eggs in your ice cream.

 You can go ahead and double up your bag and put your mixture into your bag and just continue the same process as I will be demonstrating for the peach ice cream.

 What I've done is I've frozen containers of ice and with my hammers, I'm just going to break it up.

 So now with my small zip lock bag, what I'm going to do is just put one in the other.

 And you want to double this because sometimes these can be leaking and when you shake them with the salt and the ice, it can get into your ice cream.

I've actually watched a few YouTube videos where they were eating salt ice cream, which was kind of funny.

 And then you just want to pour your ice cream mixture into your bag.

 So afterwards, you want to zip this closed and just clean up any mess that you might have made on it.

 What you want to do is make sure that there is no air in your bag.

 Alright, and then you can just set that aside and now we're going to work on our ice.

And then you want to double zip lock this just so to make sure that your ice doesn't leak.

 And then you want to get your winter gloves ready because it will get too cold from here.

 And what this does is bring down the freezing temperature of the ice.

 And then what you want to do next is put your ice cream mixture into the middle of this.

 And then you want to put that in there and then you want to zip each one of your bags closed.

 So after you seal that, what you want to do is begin to shake this for about five to eight minutes.

So you might want to get some gloves because your hands will feel like you're getting frostbite.

 Make sure you wash off the bag so no salt gets into your ice cream.

 So you want to just continue this for at least another five to eight minutes.

 So I hope you guys enjoyed and I'll see you for the next video.

 Hey guys it's Rachel and today I'll be showing you how to make this adorable little monkey

 This tutorial is in collaboration with Holly or Pastel Charms TV and the theme we were

 Firstly with some brown clay we are going to make the head which is an oval shape.

 To make the ears create two teardrop shapes with the brown clay.

 With a creamy colour shape two smaller teardrops and place them onto the ears and then just

 To make the face flatten out a piece of the lighter colour that we used for the ears.

 For the body make a chubby little teardrop shape and blend it onto the head.

 With a piece of yellow clay shape it into a banana and add it onto the tummy.

 Don't forget to add an eye pin if you want to make it into a charm and then it's time

 After baking I'm securing the eye pin with some super glue and then I'm just adding a

 So here's what my little monkey looks like when it's completely finished.

 I hope you enjoyed this video, don't forget to give it a thumbs up if you did and I'll

 Here's some photos of charms you guys sent in to me on instagram.

 If you make a charm inspired by me, don't forget to use the hashtag Rachieh96 so I can

 see your creation and you could be featured in one of my upcoming tutorials.

 Now one of the most famous coffee drinks out there is the Irish coffee, which of course

 But it wasn't until it came down to San Francisco that it really started to pick up

 We start off with an Irish coffee cup, which any time you've got a fine glass you're

 going to be putting hot liquids into, you want to make sure you preheat it ahead of

 Now in the past we commented about using simple syrup instead of sugar.

 Since sugar really dissolves well in hot liquids, we don't need to worry about that

 Then we take some cream that we've already partially whipped up ahead of time and have

 We don't want a thick whip on it, but just kind of a nice frothy whip.

 We just want to take and put that on the top of the drink like that.

 One of the secrets of an Irish coffee is getting the cream to sit on the top of the coffee

 The original Irish coffee served in Ireland was using the local cream.

 Here in America we don't have that type of raw cream and there's some slight chemical

 characteristics that are unique to having the raw cream versus our homogenized pasteurized

 So when down in San Francisco they kept on trying to do this, the cream kept on floating

 What they discovered was by not using fresh cream, but actually using cream that had been

 sitting in the refrigerator for a couple of days, then whipping it up, it did something

 So try to avoid using fresh, straight from the supermarket cream, but let it sit in your

 refrigerator for a couple of days so it can also sit on the top like this.

 Hey y'all, so in this video I'm going to be showing you how you can save your eyelashes

 Like I will go out and buy a whole bunch of different type of eyelashes.

 Maybe not a whole bunch, maybe one or two or three different type of eyelashes.

 I would pick one that I wear on a daily basis and a more dramatic one and then a medium

 I usually go for the more dramatic being that I like a neutral face.

 So anyway, starting off I have been wearing the, I've been using the bonding glue to

 So that's 7 years and I have not lost any of my natural lashes from using this.

 I know a lot of people are very skeptical about using the bonding glue and you know

 I feel like it's pointless to say oh you know it could be dangerous to your eyes.

 Anything you apply by your eyes can be dangerous to your eyes if you get it in your eyes or

 I've gotten this in my eyes a couple of times and it does burn but the way I, you know I

 So what you do is you only adjust this just a small amount so that when you go to go like

 You don't make sure you know you don't do it so that there's glue dripping or that it's

 Now removing them all you do is literally peel them off your lash.

 It's not like you have a whole bunch of hair on your eyelid to where it would get stuck.

 I take these off every single night and I apply them every single day.

 It is so easy to put like you would just take a pen like a bobby pin or something.

 Just put a little bit of glue on the bobby pin and then you just apply it to the part

 Just apply it to the little part of the lash where um it's lifting and then you just place

 Now in this video I'm going to show you how you um remove how you clean it basically.

 What you do is you just pull it very very softly and it just lifts off and that's just

 It lifts right off and I call this the track because it's just like applying it to your

 You can rip the track and um it'll take some of the lashes off and you don't want to have

 Literally that's all you have to do to clean it and you do it really really softly.

 And sometimes you'll get some that don't come off and it'll just be a little bit but you

 know it's it's not gonna look crazy when you put them on because this this is black like

 And look how clean that is and I've been wearing these lashes for two entire weeks.

 So um if you have any other type of questions um leave them in the comments.

 I was requested to do this video once again because I I re-wear my lashes all the time.

 I will have the same pair of lashes and I'll be wearing them for like three four months.

 Seriously and I only pay about two dollars for lashes three dollars for lashes when I

 And I do prefer um I do prefer to get human hair lashes because they're um they're just

 They're very very plastic and very very um shiny and they break really quick really easy.

 It's just really aggravating and it doesn't um I don't know when I try to apply it to

 my lash it just does not you know stay on it doesn't apply well.

 You don't see them when I put them on so I don't really like them.

 Just use the technique and um always keep like some type of box that can get securely

 One of them I just cut a little bit off and the other one is the whole entire lash and

 Once again if you have any questions just leave them in the bottom bar.

 forms but let's look at the left hand and we'll look at the right hand

 we're in the key of C I'm just going to invert the C over to the top so you get

 that and the A in the middle so you get E, G, A and C in the middle.

 sort of jazzy chord for the right hand especially if you slide up from there.

 that's quite nice actually but the one I'd use is probably simpler than both of

 and back to C. Now if you put those right hand stabs I told you that would be

 the one you'd play on the C. You wouldn't go all the way up to the F you just put

 the thumb down to the E-flat for the F chord back to there for the C and then

 and then you go to the C. So we'll do the whole swing thing with those chords.

 okay so that was quite so notice how I was sliding off on the C okay and on the F

 you can slide off and on the G you can slide off and the GI was well that's the

 C chord I did for the F I did that and you can slide off that just as good

 and then that's the C and then the G. For the G I wasn't doing all of them I was just doing that.

 Now just a there's no point giving you loads of information but if you invert

 okay so that's real nice and then one of the little right-hand trick is just put

 that if you're in the key of C again is put that sixth note in so you've got the

 it's kind of it's kind of the same as that one without the G. Now walking

 okay now as long as you come in so you obviously got to start on the C when

 you're in C and you got to start on F when you're on F you've got to start on

 G when you're on the G other than that you can do your walking bass lines vary

 okay so that was just and you so that's that's following the very basic pattern

 well maybe not chromatic all the way down but chromatic a bit of the way down

 and then conventional the rest of the way so you might go in C you might go

 is a nice little one just to finish with that I it's easy and yet it's hard

 and on that shaky ending will finish up that gives you some guidance there's

 loads more to do but those to practice there I'll do another one soon see you

 Hey, this is Angie of Happy Healthy Vegan and I'm back with another recipe demo.

 So persimmons are in season and I'm starting to see them all over town as well as at Farmers

 I got some really ripe ones yesterday for just a buck a pound and these are just perfect

 So first of all, these Fuyu persimmons are usually sold to be eaten firm like an apple

 as everyone says, but I actually like it when they get darker and squishier, more like what

 I still think that these are sweeter in their gooey state and it's going to be just perfect

 So I'm just going to take a bowl of persimmons and blend them up in the blender with a handful

 of Kadrari dates, which are also very sweet and sticky, a little Ceylon cinnamon, it tastes

 Which reminds me, if you'd like, in addition to the cinnamon and vanilla, if you want to

 make it a little more pumpkin pie flavored, you can also add a pinch of ginger, a pinch

 So first we're going to cut this sucker from side to side here and then open it up like

 Then we're just going to take a spoon and scoop them on out into our blender.

 Alright, so I'm not going to scoop the guts out of all of them here on camera, but I'll

 I've got my persimmons back there in my mixer and just for you guys, I'm going to measure.

 I'm going to put a quarter teaspoon of vanilla powder in there.

 I'm just going to put a couple sprinkles of the cinnamon in there.

 And now, gee, I guess I'm going to have to commit to how many of these Kudrari dates

 Now, if you want to take it a step further, some of you may prefer to keep it exactly

 like this, but if you want to take it a step further, you can add some cashew cream to

 If you want to get crazy, you can do a layer of cashew cream, a layer of the fruit, a layer

 If you're worried about food combining or you're worried about your fat intake, as I

 But for those of you who want to hang on and see about the cashew cream, I believe I've

 Granted, you could probably eat that whole thing by yourself, no problem, but two small

 Now, earlier I took a quarter cup of cashews and I soaked them in an equal amount of water

 Now, it can be hard to make this little amount of cashew cream.

 A lot of times it doesn't turn out as smoothly as you'd like, so you can probably make a

 couple servings worth and just keep it in a container in the refrigerator.

 So I'm just going to try my best to make a small amount of cashew cream.

 So I'm going to take these soaked cashews and put them in the blender with some more

 I put another one of those little one quarter teaspoon amounts.

 Okay, well as I feared, it was really kind of a little bit too little material to get

 I added a little bit more water, a few more dates, a little bit more vanilla powder.

 So cashew cream really is best made with a larger amount in advance.

 I made this for some of my family last year and they were really excited.

 And when they saw me posting pictures of persimmons on my Facebook page, they got really excited.

 So this is like a really great little dish to bring to Thanksgiving, for instance, as

 well as something to enjoy to get a little taste of that Halloween vibe.

 Let me know actually in the comments if you have a problem with the food combining.

 I personally don't have any problem combining persimmons and dates, but I think it was Hannah

 So in the comments below, just let me know, do you have a problem with the food combining?

 Do you have a problem combining the cashews and the fruit, cashews and dates?

 I've got a few more Thanksgiving related ones coming up soon that I'm excited to share with

 So I'm going to pause it and come back to this and finish up and show you what happens.

 This thing, the menu here that comes with the package says it's going to take about

 15 minutes for boneless chicken breast, thick, frozen, which is the cool part about this

 So I won't videotape this thing for 15 minutes, but I'll let you guys at least see how this

 And then, let's see if you can see in there, it actually is cooking.

 It's actually cooking the spices on the top too, which is good.

 But, 10 minutes into this, things are starting to look like they're getting cooked.

 As you can see, it's actually starting to look like things are starting to get cooked here.

 You can kind of see that it's starting to brown things a little.

 OK, you can see that that meat is starting to bubble up right there.

 But, I will admit, it does have this, first time around I hope, plasticy smell to it.

 I'm going to have to cook in there a few times for that to go away.

 I'm not exactly sure...actually, I don't know what to do with this lid part.

 I'll just kind of take it off and put it over here on the oven.

 this tutorial we will be using the gelish colors Arctic Breeze, Champagne, Copacabana

 Banana, After Dark, Tahiti Hottie, Rock in the Reef, Pacific Sunset, and Rub Me the Sarong

You will also need a customized mini striper, marbleizing tool, and an 18G LED

If you have not done your natural nail prep, please click the link below before continuing.

 Apply a thin coat of Arctic Breeze making sure to cap the free edge.

Apply a second thin coat of Arctic Breeze making sure to cap the

 of Arctic Breeze, Copacabana Banana, After Dark, Tahiti Hottie, Rock in the Reef, Pacific

 lemon yellow, create a curving wedge from the free edge towards the cuticle.

 custom blended light blue, outline the right side of the wedge.

Your stripes should be wider at the free edge and get thinner towards the cuticle.

 the marbleizing tool and light blue, create dots along the light blue arch.

 tool and use Tahiti Hottie to create dots along the purple arch continuing towards the cuticle.

Using the marbleizing tool and Arctic Freeze, create dots inside the

 create dots along the perimeter of the design using After Dark, Rub Me This the Wrong Way,

Remove the tacky residue with Nail Surface Cleanse and the Limp-Free Wipe.

 Hi, my name is Pam and today we're going to make homemade jalapeno poppers.

 Jalapeno stuffed with cream cheese with a little bacon wrapped around it, toss it in

 the oven for about 20-30 minutes and you're good to go for any party that you want to

 I'm going to take all the seeds out of these jalapenos and that can be treacherous.

 The most important part is that you don't cut through your whole jalapeno, just cut

 You want to kind of open it up like a little flower and then I just take a little bit and

 Then I'm going to take a little spoon, which I need to grab, and just core this out.

 You have to get all the seeds out, otherwise these things are going to be more smoking

 So you can see I just really, literally core this out but leave it open because I'm going

 to fill it up with cream cheese and that's what makes it so good.

 So we get as much of that out as we possibly can and we're good to go.

 Now we're going to kind of stuff it up here with cream cheese, get as much in there as

 possible because a lot of it's going to seep out when it cooks so be generous, don't be

 You can do anything you want to, you can put chives in it, cilantro, you can season the

 We know they're done when the bacon looks nice and crispy here, you can see.

 We've had a little mishap with our 2007 Toyota Prius and we have to change the tail light

 I had broken this tail light here sometime before via a hockey stick and then recently

 With the trunk open, if you come around here, inside the trunk you'll find this door here

 that you can simply just lift up on the bottom and pull that out.

 And that's how you get to the light sockets and the light bulbs.

 Now looking at the new light, this is the, of course, the outside and this is what's

 There's a bolt here just to the top left of the top light and then there's a bolt here.

 These two pins just go into some guide holes to keep that side in alignment.

 So we really just have to figure out how to get to this fastener and that fastener.

 And they're going to be just inside, probably up in high here and something else that's

 So I'm going to take out the carpet and the floor area down here that covers the spare

 This little corner black plastic piece that was here, it had one little nylon plastic

 nut on the top of it that you could get to from inside the bin.

 And then there's some trim across the back here that you can just pop out of place.

 And then there's this trim on the side here that has a couple of fasteners like that one

 And with that, you can pretty much get to what you need to get to to get the light out.

 You'll want to slide that off and then the nut is right here behind it.

 Same 10-millimeter socket worked for the bolts that were holding the light in place.

 You probably want a good deep one like this because the bolts are pretty long and the

 So now that I have those out of the way, the light fixture, I believe, is ready to

 Of course, I have the electrical connections inside that I'll need to undo, but I might

 Again, there were those two clips on the other side that just seemed to fit right into holes.

 This little thing here goes into those little holes there and it sort of just catches.

 And so it looks like if I can clear these wires of this adhesive, I will be ready to

 The new light is down here and it actually comes with that wiring harness in place with

 So really all I have to do is disconnect this connector here and then this will plug

 All right, well this connector is a little bit tricky, but the trick to it is to push

 down on this piece here, which will raise up on the other end of that and release it

 Of course, this side is still loose because I haven't put the nuts on it yet.

 I'm just going to put these nuts on, of course, by hand here to begin with.

 You can feel that foam rubber on the back of the light start to give as you...

 I'm going to slide these plastic wire retainers back over the ends of those bolts because

 Down here you want this carpeted piece to go underneath this threshold for the back

 Let's go without the wrench first so I don't block the view too much.

 We don't carry those tail lights, but remember at lubeudu.com you can order just about any

 And each of our oil and filter kits come with free installation accessories including a

 line box you can drain your oil into, our patented oil diverter, a window cling to note

I'm Noreen and welcome to my kitchen and another episode of what's for dinner

 What we're going to do tonight is we're going to make a leftover makeover, but a brand new dish to Noreen's kitchen

 And we're going to use some of the chicken from our French style herb roasted chicken as the protein that goes into our lasagna

 We're going to go over the ingredients of what's going to go into this leftover chicken lasagna

 Mexican style and I have about three cups of shredded chicken from those roasted chickens that I made yesterday.

 Couple of the pieces of onion that roasted inside the chicken I put some in my refried bean mixture

 Which is on the stove, and I'll show that to you in a minute, but this is what's left

 We're going to use this when we cook up the chicken and season it up real nice.

 one large can of diced green chili, and I have some seasonings here as a tablespoon each of chili powder and ground cumin and

 It's about a pound of cheese there, but I'm pretty sure I'm not going to use all of it

 And we'll see what happens and six large burrito sized flour tortillas

 I've lined the bottom of my foil pan with two of the tortillas now

 We're going to go ahead and we're going to build our chicken mixture, and I'll meet you over at the stove

 Tablespoon or so of olive oil heating in my cast-iron skillet that I received as a Christmas gift

 Yeah, somebody gave it to me for Christmas Santa brought it, and I'm going to throw in this chopped

 roasted onion the other half I put in my refried bean mixture and

 Mean I turn my burner up just a little get this in what you really want to do is just take the

 Add this can of green chilies in here just because I opened it and we like them so you know they're gonna be great

 You can add salsa taco sauce enchilada sauce whatever your heart desires

 Only you can decide that but you see when I pull the spoon back

 It's just moist enough because we're gonna be putting this on top of some tortillas, and we don't want those to get soggy

 They're gonna act like our lasagna noodle and since they're already soft.

 Okay, I think we're ready to build so I think we'll meet you back over at the counter

 We're gonna start to build I have laid two of my large burrito sized tortillas in the bottom of this pan

 And I'm gonna go ahead, and I'm gonna spoon in with a larger spoon probably would be helpful

I'm gonna go ahead, and I'm gonna lay two more tortillas on top of that

 And I'm gonna give it a gentle press to kind of even things out on the layer below

 Again with a gentle just a little gentle press and then we're gonna take the rest of this cheese

 And I'm gonna put it right on the top I have my oven preheated to 350 degrees I

 This has been in for just about 20 minutes or so and it is ready to come out

 Because you don't want to cut into this right away, or it's not gonna come out of the pan the way you want it

 It's gonna be too soggy you want it to cool down a bit and let that heat subside and let everything settle nicely

 We'll serve it and we'll have a nice little guacamole salad on the side, and we'll be back when it's time to do that

 For about 20 minutes, and I have sliced into it, and I'm gonna serve it.

 Served it up with a little guacamole salad on the side just a little shredded lettuce your favorite guacamole and whatever else you like

 And I hope you're gonna give it a try, and I hope that you love it

 Today I'll be showing you something highly requested in my laurel leaf bracelet, and I don't know where the bracelet is

 I'll probably find it like two minutes right after I finish filming this

 I don't think I'll tell you what national day it is cuz I'm actually filming this before when I'm actually gonna post it

 But in case you want to know I'll just tell you it's women's national fitness day

 But yeah, I'll be using black and white for this bracelet and you can use as many colors as you want

 You're basically going to do loop on bands like half of a shell chain mail

 Take your first white pull it through this first white on your hook

 Take another weight pull it through just the first weight on your hook

 And then you flip this off your hook make sure you hold on to these tightly

 And you take your black you pull it through just this first white

 And you're gonna pull it over place it right in between the two blacks

 And then you're gonna take a black and pull it through not these two blacks, but just this black and this white

 And then you're gonna do it again take the white put it in between the first two blocks

 And now instead of just one white you're gonna take both of these whites right here

 Pull it through this first black and the two whites make sure you get both of them

 Laurel leaf pattern yet, it's not supposed to for this first white

 Now you take right bands and you're going to do your next section white since you're alternating

 And then take away and pull it through the first white and the first black

 And then pull white through the first white and the second the first black

 And then you pull this white through the first white and two blacks

 I'm gonna do the rest off camera, but I'll come back to show you how to finish it

 Basically, this is what I do for most of my hook designs at the end of a stitch

 Through it all one person was like I wonder how she finished it, and I was like

 the second half of this we're going to play exactly the same thing and this

 okay then after that we're going to go to a E minor seventh chord which is

 okay then without moving the chord on the right hand the right hand stays the

 okay and then coming back to the D minor chord back to the beginning we just do

 okay part six the chords for part six basically lead us back into part five

 and then you play part five again so what we have to do is we have to play

 this whole sequence of chords again and the second time around we're going to

 play a D major 9 chord which is going to lead us back into part five so the

 chords are the same except you move to a D minor D major 9 in order to get back

 okay and there's your D major 9 chord left hand E B E right hand D F sharp A

 okay there's your part five that begins your part five the A major A major 7

 your top note should be a C sharp and then you move to a D and then an A

 and there's your A major 7 there that is left hand A D A E A right hand is a G

 okay so that's basically all of the parts of Lady in My Life now what you

 have to do is you have to take all of these parts learn these parts and then

 put them in the correct order and at the end of this video I'll basically

 display the correct order for playing all of the different parts

 sandwich, actually croissant-wich, and it takes less than five minutes to prepare.

 Now the Wigs community has asked me to participate in their Quickie food video

 challenge and basically it's what's your favorite go-to meal that takes less than

 husband's favorite breakfast sandwich and it's just a go-to sandwich to have

 can have breakfast any time of the day whether it be breakfast, lunch, or dinner.

 quickie go-to food meal slash tutorial and the video will go into the What's

 the easiest way to get a nice even slice all the way around and then just

Now you want to go ahead and add a little bit of mayo or you can

 if you're not a mustard fan you need a little bit to make it kind of a little

 lightly season with salt and pepper and then cover with a clear lid.

 important to use a clear lid because you want to see the progress of the egg.

 like my sunny side up but I need all the whites to be completely cooked so as

 soon as I see the white start to cover up the yellow that'll tell me that my

 now that I know this is done I'm going to remove my pan off of the heat because

 Freshly grated is much much better but this is what I have on hand.

Put the top on and then cut into it and that yolk should be slightly

 Hi everyone, I just got home from work and I'm going to make dinner for tonight.

 And since it's a weeknight, I like to make something that's really quick and easy.

 And one of the dishes that I make pretty often because it's so simple is called Mapo Tofu.

 And that's a popular Chinese tofu dish that's made in a lot of households around the country.

 I like to do something different to it and I'll show you what it is later.

 And for today I'm using ground turkey because it's a little bit more lean.

 And I think this is nicer for that nice gravy kind of feel when you pour it over rice which

 You can get this a lot of times in the Asian food aisles these days.

 And I make my Mapo Tofu different by adding Korean kimchi which I really love.

 I just chop it up and throw it in at the end and it really just adds a different element

 So that's...you can add other things too but this is pretty much all you need at this time

 And you let this sit for about 10 minutes and then you can start cooking right away.

 I have a large skillet that I have heated up here over high heat.

 So this will take about 2 to 3 minutes I guess to sort of cook it.

 Maybe a little bit more because it looks like I have a little bit more meat than I usually

 And because I use lean turkey I didn't have to worry too much about excess oil.

 But if you did use a little bit more fatty meat then you might have a little extra oil.

 And what you might want to do is just kind of squeeze it out of the meat and then take

 Just to make sure it kind of blends in all nicely with the meat.

 Because it's soft it's going to break more when it's in the dish.

 So you don't really want to break it too much but you just want to kind of fold it in a

 I put in about a cup of kimchi that I've chopped up to be nice and small pieces.

 I'm going to turn down the heat a little bit because I don't want it to dry out too fast.

 So here I have the cornstarch and a little bit of water about a quarter cup of water.

 And I'm going to add this in to just sort of give it a sauce, start thickening it.

 I'm not going to put everything in just enough that I feel will kind of give it a sauce.

 So you see I still have a lot left so you really have to gauge your own sort of look

 And again you don't want to break your tofu so you just want to fold it so that it kind

 So I've turned off the heat because like I said this is so fast to cook that we're

 And then now I'm going to serve it up and we'll be ready to eat.

 So now that we're done with our Mapo Tofu, all I have is some rice.

 Just get a bowl of rice, put it on the table, and then just put the Mapo Tofu right over it.

 Hey guys, so today what I'm going to show you is like if you have a loose tooth with

 So when I got my braces on, I got a little kit thing that came with a whole bunch of

 And one of the things that came in it was Plaque Smacker Ultra Thin Gentle Floss Threaders.

 And what they look like is they're little loops with flat ends.

 And so once you have it on your loose tooth, which I'm not going to do it right now because

 So then once you have it on there, you can either have it so the pointy end is facing

 But whatever way you're going to want to pull, take that end and just pull back or pull forward

 And that's basically all you're going to do if you have braces and you have these Gentle

 Which I don't know if you can get some in the store but they just came in this kit with

 And then the ear thing, the wax, the floss, all the different types of floss, toothbrush.

 Hi everyone, today I will show you how to make an ingredient for Korean cooking, sticky

 Many people cannot find these sticky rice cakes around where they live.

 But with this recipe you can make sticky rice cakes at home and can enjoy tteokbokki and

 For steaming, fill almost half of a pan with water and boil it on high.

 Once the water starts to boil, steam the rice flour for about 20 minutes on high.

 In a bowl, add 1 and half cup of cold water and 1 teaspoon of sesame oil.

 If you don't like sesame oil, you can use normal cooking oil instead.

 The dough will be hot so wear gloves before placing plastic gloves over your hands to

 When you handle the dough, put some of the oil and water on your hands and the board

 Roll it on a board with your hands until it becomes about half an inch in diameter.

 If you put some water on your knife, it makes it easier to cut.

 Put the rice cakes in freezer bags and keep them in the freezer.

 If you don't have a bread machine, please see my blog at alicekitchen.com.

 Here we go guys, I am throwing some Mod Podge down on this card, and I'm going to be sticking

 I don't do a layer on top because I did want the fibers to be able to feel the fibers.

 If you would have Mod Podged that, first of all it would have sealed it so anything you

 put on top wouldn't have sunk into the fibers, and I wanted that on this card.

 And I also wanted to be able to feel it, I didn't want it to be all glossy even though

 This is a new technique I invented, so it's copyrighted, so don't use this technique,

 So I'm using my little homemade kids block stamp with foam on it, and I am just stamping

 And what's nice about these little homemade stamps is if you mess them up you can fix

 I usually don't do trendy stuff, but I love the hexagon trend, they're great.

 I don't think it's really going to be so much a trend as it is going to be circles and lines,

 it's just a different shape that will probably always be in mixed media art and scrapbooking.

 So this card right here that I'm using to mop up is another ICAD card that I started,

 They end up blending because that paint was watered down, yeah that other card right there,

 And then I just wrote using that black paint, I wrote the word Obsessed because I'm obsessed

 with neon colors, especially pink, and I'm also obsessed with hexagons.

 So that's what I wanted this whole card to be about, my obsession.

 So then I was going to do a little drippy type of thing, and because the fibers were

 I ended up mopping it up and then it just looks like I grunged it up, so it doesn't

 I liked it better before, but I mean it's still kind of cool now.

 Just a little bit darker, which is cool because usually obsession is considered a darker feeling,

 So yeah, using a white Uniball Signo pen, I love this pen, it's one of the only pens

 One tip I do have for these though, make sure that you keep the tip clean.

 If you're using it on wet media, I wipe it off on another piece of either clean paper

 or a paper towel, that paper towel right there, I use to just wipe it off a little bit, see

 right there, and just to keep it clean so that way the rollerball doesn't take paint

 back up into the pen and then it gets clogged and then it doesn't work, and then you're

 like, hey my paint pen doesn't, or my white pen doesn't work, and it's like, oh you did

 So I'm just outlining the hexagons, just giving them a little bit more shape, and because

 everything was still kind of wet, it blended a little bit, made some areas a little bit

 I went back over some of the spots because they really faded a lot, so, cleaned off my

 pen, dried it, oh I guess I didn't pull this drying time, sorry.

 Oh, apparently this is why, because I was stamping at the same time.

 So I'm using the Mixed Media inks from, I think that's Donna Salazar, the Color Box

 inks, and I'm just stamping in white the date, and that's all she wrote.

 Hey guys, today I'm going to show you how to change your rear diff oil in your S13.

 So first what you should do is just take it around the block and get the diff oil nice

 and warm because it's just going to make it run out a lot easier.

 If it's cold you probably won't get it all out and it'll come out in clunks and it's

 Now what you're going to do next if you've got a low car is either jack it up and put

 it on an axle stand or do what I did and just make some ramps with wood.

 So basically what you're going to need is you're going to need some diff oil obviously.

 If you get the little ones they usually come with a little sort of hose that you can put

 So I've got a little pump that I've just kept in here so I don't get oil everywhere.

 Also you're going to need a half inch either breaker bar or ratchet.

 I just got both because I don't really know if I'm going to need the ratchet because sometimes

 the plug's in a different awkward position you can't actually get the breaker bar in

 Now the drain plug is just on the bottom there, you can see the middle and that just

 So you just put a half inch drive in there and that'll come out anti-clockwise.

 Now these plugs are tapered fit so basically what it means is the plug actually looks like

 this, not exactly like that but yeah it's tapered so the more you tighten it the tighter

 It's not like you know when you put a nut on if you just turn it down a bolt it doesn't

 These actually get, the more you put them in the tighter it gets so you don't need to

 put them in mega tight because otherwise they'll be seized and when it comes to getting them

 And I've had a few cases of this where people can't get their diff plugs out because people

 just don't know that and they put them in uber uber tight so when you're putting it

 back in don't put it in mega tight just you know, it's not sleek so just put it in tight

 Now the filler plug is just on the side there, should be, I can't really get my head under

 Now we're going to take the filler plug out first because obviously if you are filling

 up your diff with oil or you've just drained it and then you can't get the filler plug

 out you're going to be a bit of a shit so we'll take the filler plug out and make sure

 we can actually fill it before we actually empty it all out and then we'll empty it out

 Okay so the filler plug is actually on the passenger side just there.

 Now my exhaust was coming through about here and it was in the way so what I did was I

 dropped that away just from the cat, well I got a custom exhaust so before the cat and

 I just dropped the exhaust down, basically you just need to undo the two bolts there

 Now if you have a stock exhaust system it's going to be pretty hard because it will be

 pretty old but if you've just had the exhaust done recently they should be pretty non-rusted

 and then you just got to take it out of the hangers which is pretty damn easy, just pop

 them out of the hangers and I just left the hanger in there because it's just rubber so

 And that gave me enough room to get in there and get the filler plug loose and I've just

 loosened that one as well, just levering off the wheel, just pushed off the wheel and then

 undid that so now it's loose enough so I'm just going to drain tray under it and loosen

 Now the car is on a bit of an incline here so I might have to drop it off the ramps so

 Okay so just cleaned up the diff plug in the pass washer and this has got a magnetic end

 on it which picks up all metal particles and all that sort of thing so you can just check

 If it's got a lot of metal shavings on it that's a bad sign, you might want to get that

 Mine didn't have any it just had old oil on it so that's all good.

 Now the oil that came out wasn't actually too bad, I could have just left it in there

 but I didn't actually know the condition of this because I bought the diff and I didn't

 Now let's put some new oil in, so it's pretty much basically drained now.

 I might just drive my car down and drain a little bit more, put the plug back in and

 I'm just going to remove the fill plug and fill it up with oil.

 So for the oil, like I said if you get the little ones they'll come with a little tube

 most of the time but this one you just put the plunger in which is in here, screw the

 tap off, put the plunger in and you just pump it, you put the hose into the fill plug, pump

 So you pump it until oil starts coming out of the filler hole and that means it's full,

 Just drop the car down and take it for a spin, make sure it doesn't make any funny noises

 Pretty easy other than having to remove your exhaust and that sort of thing if you get

 You might not have to but for mine I did and yeah that's about it so thanks for watching

 Just one more tip, it's a good idea to degrease your diff after you do it and just check it

 The reason being is if you don't degrease it and it does have a little bit of an oil

 leak you don't know if it's just residual oil left on there or it actually has a leak.

 So put it onto the grass and degrease the diff and then over the next couple of days

 If it is it might have a little bit of sand on the threads or you haven't tightened it

 I'm coming to you from the front porch today because I had to show off my cool lilac bush.

 We actually live in a hundred year old house and we have a picture of it when it was first

 So this week I wanted to give you a fun creative way to use the spring that is in blossom all

 Now with spring coming on and Easter just a couple weeks away, I know a lot of us like

 to decorate our homes and come up with cool ideas to decorate for Easter when company

 But why go and spend a lot of money on a wreath that you're just going to put into storage

 when you can use all the pretty stuff that's in bloom right around us, plus a few other

 things to make a cheap wreath that will look great and look like you spent a lot on it.

 So today I'm going to show you how to make a wreath for your front door that's great

 for spring and for Easter in a couple weeks and it will save you money.

 It will cost about $10 for the supplies that you need, plus you'll need to go out and find

 some trees or flowers, whatever you want to stick in your wreath.

 And I would use pastel eggs instead of the bright colored ones.

 Next you're going to get some material that you can mod podge onto these eggs.

 Just something that you can mod podge onto them to give them a little bit of texture.

 So once you've picked out what you want to do, just go ahead and get some mod podge,

 or you can even use school glue, and just mod podge on some paper.

 And just trace around part of that dinner plate, a little bit more than half, and then

 Then you're going to do the same thing with the back of the box.

 So you have two little bit bigger than half circles to work with.

 They should kind of slide and fit right on top of each other to make a perfect dinner

 And you can add glue into the back just to make sure they're nice and sturdy.

 Then find yourself a lid or some smaller circle, something about this size that you can trace

 So get your pipe cleaners and just wrap them around your wreath, kind of this far apart

 We're going to use these later on to put some greenery into our wreath.

 Next go back to your dry Mod Podge eggs and just brush them with paint, kind of shabby

 And while those are drying, go out and get all the greenery and flowers you want for

 So take those eggs that are painted and dried now and put a big glob of glue where you want

 to start and just start gluing those eggs on, just kind of to one side of the wreath.

 Once you have a few down, you can put some of the prettier, more textured eggs on the

 You have your pretty textured eggs on the top but just kind of space them out a little

 Next I took some Winter Gem boxwood, which is an evergreen that I have growing outside

 You can use whatever plants you want but I think Winter Gem is really pretty.

 And you're just going to stick those sprigs underneath those pipe cleaner rows that you

 You can add a little bit of glue to the tip of the branches if you think it will help

 it stay better but they actually stay pretty well if you just kind of wedge them underneath

 And then you're going to take some smaller sprigs and kind of glue them within the eggs

 So just kind of take some glue, put it on the end of your little branches, and just

 kind of stick them in there, nestle them in there until you get a nice balanced look

 So once you have all that greenery in place, this is kind of what it's going to look like.

 So next take your scissors and just kind of trim up all those branches so it's about the

 And then finally take any flowers that you want to add or anything else and kind of wedge

 those on top so that they lay right on top of all that greenery.

 And this is a fresh wreath so it won't last that long, but I think it's prettier that way.

 And finally to finish it off, I took some pretty satin ribbon and I just kind of wrapped

 And I let the two ends kind of dangle down just to give it some different dimension.

 And then to hang the wreath, you're going to take one more piece of ribbon and just

 tie it in a loop around the top of your wreath and just tie that in a bow at the top.

 So when you're all done, here's what your finished product looks like.

 So you need the plastic egg, some greenery, a cereal box, hot glue, and pipe cleaners.

 It's a fresh wreath, but I think it's a pretty addition for a couple weeks to your front door.

 Next week I will have the continuation of our matching Easter outfits.

 I'll show you Charlie's Easter outfit and my Easter outfit and how to put them together.

 And I hope that you have a good Palm Sunday coming up this Sunday.

 So thanks for watching and I'll see you right back here next week.

 In this video, I'm going to show you how to replace the blades on a handheld planer.

 Most planers made within the last decade or so will use a small disposable carbide knife.

 These knives are great because they're relatively cheap and they're very easy to change.

 If you have a different brand of planer, the fasteners may be a little different, but everything

 I'll take my wrench and loosen the three bolts that secure the blades in place.

 I'll spin the cutter head around to the second knife and repeat the process.

 Like I mentioned before, the knives are sharpened on both sides.

 If you've never flipped your knives over on your planer, you can just simply turn them

 If you've already done this, then you'll need to replace the knife.

 To reinstall the knife, you'll notice there's a groove on the top portion of the knife.

 That groove goes up and slides in against some notches on the cutter head, like that.

 Now I want to carefully hold the knife in place and take my wrench and loosely tighten

 Now verify that I have my knife centered on the cutter head so it's not going to rub here

 That's how simple it is to replace the blades on a handheld planer.

 If you found this video helpful, please feel free to leave a comment or ask us a question.

So today I wanted to share a really quick, easy and basic buttercream recipe

 Well, a lot of people use two more that I'm going to talk about in a little while.

 Then the next ingredient I'm going to be using is a powder sugar.

 This is unsifted and for the other two ingredients that a lot of people use,

 If you like to add flavor to it, you can go ahead and add a teaspoon, teaspoon and a half.

 But it depends on how soft or how smooth you want your buttercream to be.

 And towards the end, we're going to see if we need to add some milk.

 I haven't tried it with other kind of milk like almond milk, coconut milk.

 So the first thing we're going to be doing is putting the butter here.

 Then I'm going to be mixing it for about five to ten minutes at a medium speed.

 You can see it's much fluffier and the consistency changed and everything's changed.

 So I'm just going to give it a couple of minutes and then we'll move on to the next step.

 I'm going to be adding my icing sugar or powder sugar or whatever you call it.

 Don't add it all at once because you're going to end up, you know, covered with icing sugar.

 You can do this by hand as well but you're going to be working out a lot.

 Well, then again, low speed just until those two ingredients are mixed.

 Thank you so much for watching and don't forget to check out my channel for more baking stuff.

 Yo what's up everybody it's sneakerhead in the bay from AngelusDirect.com and

 today I'll show you guys how to remove jean stains from your kicks.

 Alright so you guys need four materials first thing being the shoes that you're

 working on second thing being the Angelus Easy Cleaner this is the most

 important thing please go ahead and check it out at www.angelusdirect.com

 I will actually link this in the description so don't worry about that we

 also need a soft bristle toothbrush as well as a rag or towel of some sort to

 most if not all of the jean stains you can see right there used to be up here

 like on this side and literally all you need to do is just dip your brush in the

 Angelus Easy Cleaner and just start scrubbing away and it will remove most

 if not all of the jean stains so I'm gonna do a time-lapse of that I'll show

 So I finished both shoes and there's still a very light small blue tint on it

 but it's not like a full jean stain this will get rid of it sometimes if not it

 will make it look better for sure so don't worry about that guys this is

 pretty much a problem that happens when people wear dark jeans with light kicks

 but this is a solution to it it won't get rid of all of it but it will get rid

 of most of it in some situations it will get rid of all of it so yeah you can see

 the small small little tint right there but it is what it is it's way better

 than before I'll tell you that so yeah go ahead and check it out www.angelusdirect.com

 you could also use it for cleaning different materials such as leather,

 new book, rubber, linen, gortex, nylon, satin, canvas, plastic, and vinyl so you

 can pretty much clean all of your sneakers with this bottle it's called

 the Angelus Easy Cleaner go ahead and pick it up catch you guys next video

 There are three basic stretches that I want everyone to work on as I've

 The beauty of these particular stretches is you don't necessarily need to be warm

 So you're going to get a stretch through your hamstring and also through your

You're just going to lay here, straighten your knee, don't push real

 hard against it, but just let everything relax and lay here for six minutes and

 the outside of the door and put my leg back through the other way and do the

 necessarily need to be warm in order to do it and you're lengthening the muscle

This for me from a cycling perspective has arguably been the single

The second stretch that I want you to do involves laying down flat,

 grabbing your ankle with the opposite hand, supporting your knee with the same

You want to pull it, keep it in this position and bring it up and

 the ball of your foot, put it against the wall to a point that's comfortable, put

 the stretch either in your quad or up through your hip flexors.

 will get your quads, it'll get your hip flexors, and it'll get your psoas muscle.

 And you can either do two minutes on each side or you can alternate doing 30

 you want to do depending on your particular needs, but these are the three

 Hey fam, it's Makita here from SkinnyGotCurves.com and today I'm going to share with you my high

 So we're going to first start off with one stalk of romaine lettuce.

 And I also add baby spinach, but honestly you can add whatever greens you desire.

 And this, the two avocados will run you in the range of 480 calories.

 Next I'm going to add 1 fourth of a cup of raw sliced almonds, which will run me about

 Then I'll add 3 tablespoons of hemp seeds, which will total 180 calories.

 You can use whatever dressing that you desire, but this particular dressing will calculate

 One of my favorite things ever is this Greek sauce called tzatziki and it goes on almost everything

And if you've got a Cuisinart, it makes your life very very easy

 And while those are processing we'll get the shallot ready to go in as well

 Seen me do this before you don't have to be all that meticulous because you're saving the skins for stock

 Everything sticks to the side of the work bowl when it's just the right size now we can prep our cucumbers and onions

 Ends off you can actually peel them first and then take the ends off and we're going to peel these

 When you're using a peeler always keep your vegetable down on the cutting board so you get better leverage

 If you're using standard cucumbers, you'll see they have quite a few seeds in them

 Sometimes it's a little hard to hold on to the cucumber while you're doing this and sometimes the edge of it breaks off

 You don't have to be again too compulsive about this the seeds won't kill you but they're a little watery

 Now a lot of people will tell you you need to salt and drain the cucumber

 If you drain the cucumber the sauce stays very very thick if you prefer it thick, that's fine

 We can take the entire outer ring or two off because we're saving it for stock so it's not going to waste

 So it gets very very thick you don't really have to because I again

 I like the sauce a little bit thinner more like a dip consistency

 But I'm gonna kick it up just a little bit with a little bit more flavor

 I'm gonna use plain kosher salt because I want the flavors very pure.

 This will get better as it sits some of the liquid will leach out of the cucumbers, but it has a lot of flavor

 It's really fantastic the cucumber gives it freshness the onions

 And if you want to be a little more authentic about it you can garnish it with some nice tomato wedges

 A little bit of olive oil and so there you have it so Greek tzatziki sauce

 in crisis because you don't have a clue what gifts you may make to your beloved ones.

 Today I'll share with you these precious handmade solid butter bars to use in the shower

 pricey to buy in the fancy bath and body stores but incredibly easy to mix up yourself at

Making your own presents shows care, consideration and creativity, all of which

 And if you love coloured layered butter bars you may use any of these natural colourants.

 For a scented butter bar make sure to use essential oils or liposoluble fragrances.

 You'll absolutely need silicone moulds and for a cute unique result you may add some

For a soft and moist butter bar you may use a soft and moist sponge.

 For a soft and moist butter bar you may add some sweet accessories.

 Solid butter bars have a similar formula except you can add some wax for a more solid and

 resistant texture to warm temperatures and a vegetable oil of your choice for further

 After a couple of hours in the freezer you'll get all these wonderful lightly scented butter

 I hope you have enjoyed the tutorial and that it will help you find some inspiration for

Look around my channel and I'm pretty much sure there are lots of other

 Also don't forget that you have only left a few days to enter the ongoing giveaway.

Not too long ago Velveeta reached out to me and a few other YouTubers

 and asked if we wanted to participate in this Treasure Chest Challenge.

 looked at all of the channels that were involved and they selected the items based on the type of

 The wheels are turning and I think I know what I'm going to do.

 So I guess they also have a gift card here for 20 bucks to help buy

 All right, I think Velveeta nailed it when they were selecting my ingredients because,

The name I came up with while walking around the store is the El Dorado Burger.

 Just kind of making a little divot here that I can put the Velveeta in.

 is lay down this beautiful, beautiful burger, and then we're going to pile on

You get that nice, warm, gooey, cheesy goodness, and that sweet,

 and that sweetness of the caramelized onions, but that pepper hits you from the A1.

Guys, I have a link down below you can click on to see the other videos that have

 Hey it's Missy and today I've got a fancier updo that would be perfect for a wedding or

 Start by sectioning off a portion of hair from the part down to the left ear and clip

 Then repeat this step with the other side of the head, clipping the front portion off.

 Next create a little bit of volume at the crown so pull up a small section and gently

 brush the hair downwards and then smooth down the very top layer of hair.

 Next gather all of the hair into a low ponytail and wrap it with a clear elastic band.

 Take a second elastic band and place it over the ponytail and then pull it down a little

 Pull the end of the ponytail upwards and lay it flat against the head, tucking the

 tail inside of the bun and this second elastic band is what will help anchor the bun in place.

 Grab some hair pins and slide them horizontally through the hair to help hold the bun against

 Next let down the front portions of hair that were previously pinned and take the hair on

 the left side and divide it into two sections and we're going to smooth it down and wrap

 Grab a hair pin and pin down the section of hair, sliding the pin downwards so that it

 stays hidden underneath the strands and then tuck the tail inside of the bun.

 Now with the other section, divide it in half, smooth down the section and then we're going

 to lay this over the top of the previous section and then pin it down with some hair pins.

 Once the hairstyle has its basic shape, you can go back and gently pull on the top of

 the hair and this will create a little bit of volume and it can also help balance out

 the entire hairstyle but this is just personal preference so you can definitely skip this

 Now we're going to repeat the last two steps with the remaining hair so take the section

 on the right side, cross it over the top of the bun, wrapping it around and then pinning

 it in place and then we're going to do the same with the other side.

 As always, don't forget to subscribe below to be notified of all new videos and give

 it a thumbs up if you like this hairstyle and I will see you on the next one.

 Hey YouTube, it's me Claire Moi and I am back with another tutorial and I'm going to show

 Make sure you thumbs up this video, comment and subscribe and I'll see you guys really

 I'm applying Rebel Lipstick from MAC Cosmetics all over my lips.

 After applying a generous amount of lipstick, I'm going to line my lips using Knife Mop

 Look at the difference, it just makes your lips look a lot more defined.

 So I'm going to take my lipstick again and I'm just going to apply it all over my lips

 The lip gloss that I'm using is by a company called Shades by Gal and I'm using shade Vivid

 I'm then going to take the lip liner and just outline the bottom half of my lips just to

 Leave a comment below and let me know what you think about this lipstick color.

 The next lipstick that I'm going to be trying on is called Gamma by Stila Cosmetics.

 This lipstick is already pretty glossy so I will not be adding a gloss to this one.

 I will however line my lips using Knife Mob Lip Liner from MAC Cosmetics.

 But because this lipstick is so glossy, my lip liner is going to work as a barrier.

 So it's going to lock in that lipstick and it's going to prevent the lipstick from bleeding.

 I'm then going to take that same lipstick Gamma from Stila and I'm going to apply this

 This is going to take away my lip liner from being so dark and it's going to blend it all

 Also a tutorial for this eye look foundation will be coming up soon.

 The lip liner that I'm using is called Chestnut from MAC Cosmetics.

 However this time I am not really carving or exaggerating my cupid's bow.

 The lipstick that I'm going to apply right on top of that is called Brave from MAC Cosmetics.

 I'm not such a matte fan because I have dry lips and my lips tend to get really really

 I think I'm going to go with this lipstick so let's clean it up some.

 And to carve out my lipstick I'm going to use my foundation with a flat rounded brush.

 And I'm just going to go around the sides and just clean it up.

 This is really going to make your lipstick stand out even more.

 And let's cover up that ugly pimple that wants to make an appearance today.

 you can keep them in an airtight container and they serve as a delicious snack for about

Just a heads up, this recipe is usually prepared a little spicy.

 turmeric powder, 1 teaspoon of asafoetida powder, 1 teaspoon or to taste red chili powder,

 that your food processor can make dough and mix all the ingredients in there.

 water to make a soft dough, similar in consistency to pizza dough.

 make sure that the oil is hot enough, put a small piece of dough into the oil.

 Once one side turns golden brown, flip it over and fry until the other side is equal in color.

 Remove the fritters from the oil and let the excess oil soak into a paper towel.

 The fritters will stick together while frying, so once they cool,

 you can break them into smaller pieces, so that you can snack on them like chips.

 The next step is optional, but it's a great way to add more flavor.

 leaves, just fry them in the same oil and sprinkle them on top of the fritters before storing them.

 You can't really do it in slow motion or else it won't work as well, unless you really master it.

 Then you can do it in slow motion, but you can't learn how to do it doing it slow.

 But the way you hold this card is what's going to block it off from being seen.

 So when you have it at a certain angle, and you flick it, and it just changes.

 Real shuffles, no false cuts, because it really doesn't matter.

 And all you have to do is do this one small move where you lift the top card up just a little bit,

 That way, your hand's really blocking off the card from being seen,

 it gives you a split second longer for people to see that card.

 But if you're like, alright, I'll do it a little bit slower, and you go through,

 So, then you do all these, your false cuts, the ones I've been teaching you,

 where you cut, cut, cut, cut, take packets off at a time, whatever you want to do,

 So then, you do what we call a double lift, where you basically take two cards off the top,

 So, if you are ever watching a magician, and you see him do something like that,

 So, a double lift is, the best way to do it, is, that they teach, when you're first learning,

 and flip it over as one card, show it, and then flip it over again.

 And the easiest way to set up for that is to either be talking, move your hands,

 and while you're doing that, you're pushing off the top two cards,

 and then when you bring it back, you have your pinky underneath,

 or riffle the deck, and make sure to stop under the top two cards.

 Or even, talking about what you have accomplished so far in the trick,

 yeah, so we riffled through the deck, and you just remember one card.

 So it's all in preference, it's really what you have to feel to your audience.

 If they're moving a lot and talking a lot, you should probably do the moving one, talking one too.

 If they're more into the story, and looking into your eyes, it's all about misdirection.

 and they'd be questioning what's going on, or they'd be wondering why you're doing that,

 you should probably stick with the riffle one, and still be telling your story,

 So, you got your break under the top two cards, and go through, show the card,

 so like, this is not your card, this is a wild card, let's say.

 And the way you have to hold it is, three fingers on top, in this pip of the corner closest to you,

 Because what you're going to do is, these two fingers are going to perform this motion, boom.

 And then it's going to be your thumb and your index finger that pinch shut.

 So they call it the snap change because you're almost making a snapping motion.

 So you take it, and this, the whole flicking thing is what really sells it.

 And you have to have the card at a 30 degree angle to their eyes.

 You want this card looking them dead in the eye, like that's why it's aimed right at the lens right now.

 So when you flick it, these two fingers are pulling it back, and these fingers are trying to come together.

 So you flick it, and you just have to naturally, just hold the card like this.

 Just practice by holding the card like this, because you'll naturally, because then you'll feel what it feels like.

 And then you can stick your other card right in there and feel how it's going to end like when you're first practicing.

It's going to be very peel, peel, peel, your thumb is going to your index finger.

I always keep these two fingers here to make sure, prevent any sliding.

 Because if these are here, then it will keep it perfectly aligned.

 And then when you put it back on the deck, just cover their eyes from it, so when you peel it in, you could even do another double lift, show the four of spades.

 Flick it, get it on top, already got your double lift, king of diamonds is your wild card.

 If you're really sneaky, you can get the top card on the bottom and even hand this card out for inspection.

 I'm going to mix this up and just let these marinate or macerate the strawberries for

 Well it's just started to bubble and I'm going to let this bubble like this for 10 minutes.

 Then add your pineapple mixture into a glass jar and store it in the refrigerator.

I'm going to turn it over and make sure that any juices fall into your dish.

So today I would be showing you a three-step facial that I do at home.

 All the ingredients that I have used in this and I do use it on my skin,

 face, do a patch test somewhere here and see if it does react to your skin.

Once you do this and then go to sleep, your skin will rejuvenate.

 It won't be that prone to collect dust and then you know create acne and all.

 If you don't like using natural products, you can always substitute them for any

 make a video about that, then please leave it in the comments box below.

Okay, people who wear nose pins like me, the first thing you should do

 pin is because when you're scrubbing your face and all of that, if you have the nose pin,

 it kind of like the portion beneath the nose pin doesn't get clean and it just looks really weird and patched up.

 Mix two teaspoons of the neem powder in two and a half teaspoons of curd.

 And with the use of a damp towel edge, remove it from your face.

 With the help of a towel, place your head really close to the bowl so that you can feel the steam

 Removing the excess water from your face, take a blackhead remover.

 It has a loop on one side and you put pressure on your skin with it

 Now all you have to do is place it where you have whiteheads or blackheads.

 For me, I have whiteheads around my nose and on my chin, more so on my chin.

 an ice cube and with the help of a towel placed right beneath your chin, you are going to rub it

 Take half a teaspoon of honey and half a teaspoon of lemon juice.

 After about 15 minutes, you can follow me on Facebook, my blog, Instagram, Google Plus and

 yeah, all of my social media links are going to be in the description box.

 do give it a thumbs up and if you like this video a little bit too much, you can also share this

You can also view two of my previous videos by clicking on them.

 Today I'm showing you how to take an old unwanted t-shirt and turn it into a super simple DIY

 My son is three so he's a little too old for bibs but I put one on him anyway because he

 was eating a popsicle and he started calling it a superhero cape even though it was faced

 So I looked at it with its t-shirt neckline and an idea was born.

 I'm going to be sewing parts of my cape but you could easily make this without any sewing

 In fact all you need is an old adult sized t-shirt and scissors.

 I'm going to be making a superhero logo out of felt and sewing it on but you could easily

 glue it on with fabric glue or you could paint it on with fabric paint.

 First you need to turn the t-shirt inside out and put it on the kid you're making it

 I'm using a fabric pencil to outline a rough sketch of the future cape.

 I'm marking roughly where the shoulders end and in the front I'm going down to just above

 Once that's done you can send the kid on his merry way and get to cape making.

 Then I'm cutting up the sides of the t-shirt from the bottom up to the armpits.

 Now I have a big long rectangle with a hole in the center for the head.

 Now I'm just cutting off the front of the t-shirt just above the old t-shirt logo.

 Next you want to fold the t-shirt in half lengthwise with the wrong sides facing out

 Now I'm cutting from the shoulders and flaring all the way out at the bottom so it makes

 For the front I'm kind of rounding the corners and then I'm unfolding it and kind of evening

 It doesn't fray so you can leave these edges unfinished but I'm going to finish my edges

 just to hopefully prevent a little bit of that curling under that knits tend to do.

 So for me I'm putting a quarter of an inch hem all the way around using a ball point

 Again you can leave it unhemmed if you want but if you want to prevent the curling but

 don't sew you can use a fabric glue or some other kind of similar product at your local

 Now we could be done here if you want but I'm actually going to go ahead and add a superhero

 logo with felt and we're going to do that by starting with a pattern if you're going

 to be using felt or you can make a stencil if you're going to be painting it on.

 So to make my pattern I'm just tracing off of my iPad and the only reason I'm doing that

 is because I wanted to save the ink on my printer but you could easily just pick a font

 make it really large and print that out on your computer or do as I'm doing and trace

 Next I'm cutting it out then pinning it to my felt and cutting out my felt and then I'm

 pinning the logo to the back of the cape and sewing it on again with my ball point needle.

 I stitched about an eighth of an inch from the edge using a straight stitch.

 You could also applique it on using a zig zag stitch or again just glue it on with fabric

 You took an old unwanted t-shirt and turned it into a superhero cape for your favorite

 Thanks for watching and if you haven't already I appreciate any thumbs up you want to give

 me if you liked the video and if you haven't already you can also subscribe for more DIY

 Now, to make a patterned oster rig, the simplest way, my way of doing it, is just to form a

 large loop and just a simple overhand knot through its own loop like that, draw it tight

 like that, and then before you cut the spare end off, just tie a, make another loop above

 the one you just tied, another overhand loop knot, the knot you just tied will go through

 that, so basically you've got two knots very close to each other.

 Now on the end of your big loop I'm going to attach, just slip on a swivel, and this

 one's got a snap swivel attached to it so that I can change my feeder very easily,

 like so, so that's on the end of your line now, and your feeder will clip onto that.

 Now between these two knots that we tied we have a double piece of line which is strong,

 obviously, and that's where my hook length is going to be attached, and all I need to

 do is get my ready tied hook length with a loop in the end and just lasso it round in

 between those two knots, and then it just sits, tightens onto itself and just sits in

 And that I find is the most tangle free and easy way of tying a paternoster, that little

 In this video I'm going to show you how you can add a Facebook like box to your school publication site.

 The first thing that you want to do is log into your dashboard and head over to appearance and then widgets.

 And figure out where you want that like box to be, what sidebar.

 I suggest putting it on a sidebar that is going to be seen on a lot of different pages.

 That way people are more likely to sort of see that box over and over again and eventually like your page.

 The next thing we want to do is open another window and head over to the Facebook developer site.

 This page that Facebook has put together is going to allow us to develop some or create some code to put the like box right on our page.

Just go straight to Facebook and have Facebook give you the code.

 So I'm going to go to my Facebook and switch over to one of my pages.

 I'm going to paste that into the URL and press tab to go down to the width.

 If you don't know what width and height you need, I would suggest going to your site and measuring.

 If you're on a Mac, you can press command shift and 4 all at once and you'll get a little cropper tool.

 What this is going to do is take a screenshot but it gives you a measurement.

 There's other ways you can measure the objects on your page but I think this one's nice and easy and simple.

 So I'm just going to draw a box around where I want that Facebook like box to go.

 I'm using these lines between the categories as my guide for how wide this should be.

 So I'm going to go into my like box creator, change the width to 193, and then let's make it 300.

 I prefer not to show the stream because I don't put a lot on Facebook.

 So if I have the stream, every time people look at my site it looks like I'm not updating anything.

 And I can see that my little Facebook icon is cut off a little bit.

 What we're going to do is we're going to try to build ourselves a piston stop tool.

 So, first thing you need is you need a previously enjoyed spark plug.

 You want to try to get one that's 3 quarter reach, 14 millimeter thread.

 Put that in your vice because we have to remove the ceramic to do that.

 The hard way to remove the ceramic is to do that and get a hammer and start beating the crap out of it

 and then using a screwdriver and trying to gouge out the middle or go from this end.

 What we're going to do is we're going to take it out the easy way.

 The easy way is at the top of the metal part, it's rounded, cut that part off

 and the ceramic part can be convinced out very easily after that.

 When you get through to the ceramic, it will let you know because you'll see powdered ceramic coming out from your saw blade

 and the blade will start jumping quite a bit and so will everything on your bench.

 It might be just one little bit that's holding on to make it look like an idiot.

 There's always a little ring underneath that little piece of sleeve.

 So, yes, I did change the body because it's being a pain in the arse on that one.

 I don't want to spend all the time just beating the crap out of things with a hammer.

 Bit of a pain in the bum, but you can twist it off and get that part.

 Then what you do is you take an inch and a half, quarter inch, 20 socket head bolt or machine screw.

 And just because this thing was being a booger to me I'll go back to this one.

 So what we'll do is we'll just give her a little bit of a smack on the head.

 You know, you give them away as party favors or as giveaways at the rally.

 Many of you have requested how to make the Outback Steakhouse steamed green beans, so

 that's what I'm going to show you how to make today, the Outback Steakhouse steamed green

 Whenever you have green beans, you don't need to have them out of a can or frozen.

 You can buy fresh ones and go ahead and steam them up yourself.

 I'm going to steam mine today on a stove top, but you know what?

 When you select green beans, try to get thin ones because they'll cook a little bit quicker

 All you need to do is just simply trim off the end that comes from the stem and just

 Again, all you need to do is trim off about a quarter inch of the stem.

 I have all of the green beans here prepped and I am just going to put them in my pot

 I'm going to drop it in right here, put the lid on and come back in about 10 minutes and

 A lot of our cooking sets came with these steamers and you may have never tried using

 All you need to do is fill it three quarters full of water and you put the steamer in and

 put the lid on and go ahead and turn it up to high so the water will boil and the steam

 So if you wondered why the Outback Steakhouse green beans taste so incredibly good, well

 they do steam them but they do add a lovely sweetened butter sauce.

 So this is sold in typically the oriental or Asian section of your grocery store.

 So if your store happens to have this, go ahead and pick this up.

 Okay, so if you don't happen to have the Maggi seasoning available in your area, go ahead

 Everybody has soy sauce and it'll taste just fine with soy sauce.

 Okay, so my green beans, you can see they're steaming away right here.

 I'm just going to go ahead and add these to my bowl of seasoning.

 Okay, and I'm just going to stir this seasoning over and we're going to finish these with

 So we've just finished making Outback Steakhouse steamed green beans.

 Now if you liked that video, check out my YouTube channel, CopyKat Recipes.

 We have lots more recipes that taste just like they do in the restaurant.

 Visit copykat.com and find recipes from the Olive Garden, Outback Steakhouse, the Cracker Barrel, and so much more.

 Visit copykat.com and discover recipes such as the Olive Garden Alfredo Sauce, Olive Garden Salad Dressing, and Hooters Fried Pickles.

 The Besi Balabath is a traditional South Indian dish made from cooked rice and lentils mashed

 along with a spicy tamarind and vegetable curry that is simply delicious.

Stir continuously until lightly brown and you get a roasted aroma.

 lentils are roasted, we will add in the cinnamon stick, cloves, cardamom pods, the dry red

 until the chillies brown and you get a roasted aroma from the spices.

 for about 30 to 40 seconds until the coconut loses its moisture.

 the roasted spices are cooled, add the ingredients to a spice blender and make a fine powder

 we will add in the tamarind water, the jaggery, drumsticks, pearl onions, beans, carrots,

 bell peppers, tomatoes, salt and finally the Bisibella bath spice powder.

 pressure cooker, place the weight and allow the vegetables to cook until you hear at least

 very quickly, we will release the pressure by running cold water over the pressure cooker.

 let's get the main ingredients to make the Bisibella bath and learn how to bring them

To the large pressure cooker, add in the washed rice, the washed lentils,

 passed, turn off the heat and allow the pressure to release naturally.

 for the pressure to release, let's proceed to make the seasoning.

 tamarind curry and stir all the ingredients together until well combined.

At this stage, add in the prepared seasoning and two tablespoons

Sprinkle the chopped coriander leaves and the fried boondi on the top.

 this delicious dish from South India along with a tomato-onion raita for lunch or dinner.

 With just a little preparation, you can get really satisfied tummies.

 Gà Chịnh Mùi Sáng, fried sea salt lemongrass tilapia fillets, and aromatic bouquet flavors

 1⁄2 tablespoon granulated garlic, 1⁄2 tablespoon sea salt, 1⁄4 cup minced lemongrass,

 1⁄4 cup cooking oil, and here I have 1⁄4 teaspoon sea salt and 1⁄4 teaspoon granulated

These were pretty big and I like mine more on the crispier side, so I'm going

Now sprinkle on the granulated garlic to evenly cover your entire fillet.

 because I like mine a little bit saltier, I add just a dash more.

 glassware to repeat the same process with the other side of the fish.

 Doing it this way gives you an even fry with the lemongrass and the fish.

 high and in the same frying pan we used to fry the lemongrass, pour in the remainder

Place your fillets in, reduce the heat to medium and let it sizzle.

 Cover loosely to prevent splattering, but we want to let the steam to escape for crispier

 Now this is a great alternative to say a hot cereal that you might have in the morning

 like oatmeal or cream of rice or cream of wheat, something like that.

 And we're making this with, like I said, chia seeds which are really healthy for you and

 We're going to use some cinnamon because I love it and some fresh fruit.

 So I'm Rockin' Robin and I'm going to show you how to do it right after this.

 Before we get started with our ingredients, I just want to mention a couple things about

 They have a lot of fiber in them which is really good for those of us that want to increase

 So our recipe today is going to call for two tablespoons, we're making one serving and

 But that one serving has ten grams of fiber so if you need to do that, you need to increase

 There's about five grams of protein in this little bit of chia seed and there's phosphorus,

 there's manganese, there's magnesium, I mean there's just a whole bunch of good nutrition

 in these and they're just great, it's a great way to start off your breakfast.

 Alright so we're going to need some chia seeds, I've got two tablespoons of chia seeds and

 I'm using light coconut milk, I got mine from Trader Joe's and I've got six ounces.

 So basically the ratio here is one tablespoon of chia seed to three ounces of liquid and

 that liquid could be anything you want to use, any kind of milk, any kind of juice,

 Alright so I'm going to spice this up and jazz it up with a little organic pure vanilla

 extract and cinnamon, I've got some cinnamon here and I'm going to take the juice from

 this orange and I'm going to squeeze it right in there and add that plus I'm going to use

 some of the zest, some of the orange zest from that and you want to use organic oranges

 for this because you're using the zest and you don't want to add pesticides to your breakfast.

 And here I've got some fresh raspberries, feel free to use any fruit you want, it can

 And then for a little more sweetness, again everything is optional but I have a few organic

 raisins here, just a few, there's a lot of sugar in raisins so you want to keep your

 Alright guys so here's all we have to do to make this simple and easy breakfast, you're

 Alright so I've got my coconut milk right here and I'm going to pour in my chia seeds,

 dump them right in and I'm just going to go ahead and add my cinnamon, you can add as

 much as you like, I think a nice half a teaspoon for one serving is pretty darn good for me,

 Drop that in there, I'm going to add a drop of vanilla extract, probably about a quarter

 Remember now we're just making one serving, but you can easily double, triple, quadruple

 I'm going to stir this around, we can toss in the raisins, why not.

 And I'm going to add the orange juice, actually I think I'll add the zest first, I love the

 zest, those orange oils just really add some nice flavor to this and then I'm just going

 to squeeze some of this juice in here, then I'm going to give this a nice little stir

 and we're going to let this sit to give the chia seed time to absorb all the liquid and

 So while that's thickening up, I want to ask you guys a question or two.

 Now what do you, if you've had hot chia cereal before, how do you make yours?

 Let me know in the comments below, I'd like to hear what you guys do.

 And then also, the second thing I want to ask you is, what does chia mean?

 Our chia seeds have been thickening up here, I want you to have a look at this and you

 Wow, nice and thick, it makes a great breakfast guys, let me tell you.

 And if it gets too thick, you can always thin it down, or if it's not thick enough, you

 can always add a few more chia seeds to it and let it thicken up.

 So you can always play with it, get the consistency that you like so it's perfect.

 Alright, so now what I like to do, it's kind of cool, so for breakfast I like to heat it

 You can either pour this into a saucepan, heat it up on the stove, or you can do like

 Once you've got your cereal hot, what I like to do is, I like to add about a cup of fruit

 I like to just pour my chia right over the top and it's breakfast time guys.

 Delicious, satisfying, filling, the fiber, it keeps you full for hours, I mean it's really,

 I can taste the vanilla, the cinnamon, I like the orange zest and a little bit of orange

 The coconut milk gives it a little bit of sweetness, but if you need more or you'd like

 more, you can certainly add honey, agave nectar, whatever you like.

 You know, I was even thinking about making one chocolate flavored for dessert.

 It's really delicious and so this thing is just, these chia seeds are just so versatile.

 And if you haven't subscribed yet, go ahead and click that button, I'll leave it right

 And I especially appreciate it when you share the video, it really helps me out.

 Thanks again everybody, give me a thumbs up and we'll see you in the next video.

 My name is Christine and on today's episode I am showing you the Art-C Groove Tool.

 I'm not going to use the brush tip today but that would be great for adding paint to a

 So I have this little frame here and I had painted the frame and then I put some texture

 Then what I did was I painted over the paste and then I used the Groove Tool and I sanded

 off some of the paint to reveal the texture paste and then I went over with the inking

 And I had done heavy gesso on this and then went over with paint.

 And I wanted to sand it off but when I used regular sandpaper I just wasn't getting the

 So now that I got the Groove Tool I went through and you can see now that all these edges have

 been sanded down and there's like sanding marks all throughout it.

 Now on my blog, on Scrap Time, I'm going to post a picture of this page before and after

 just so you can see the difference that the sanding makes on the page.

 So I have this card here and it was similar to that page I just showed you.

 It's the heavy gesso through a stencil and then I painted over top.

 And the first thing I'm going to do is add some ink over this and I'm going to use the

 And the reason I'm using Archival is because it's oil based it'll stick to my acrylic paint.

 If you use Distress Paint over acrylic paint it'll just wipe off.

 So I just put my sponge in and I'm going to do it on the low setting.

 So that's the difference by adding ink over top of this texture.

 And you can see now with the heavier grit the difference it makes.

 Here is the one just with inked and then here all the white marks.

 And it's been able to rub off some of that paint that I had layered on there.

 Because if I was to have to use a sand in my arm it's a lot of work.

 And if you have any problems like carpal tunnel syndrome or something and you don't like to

 do a lot of movements with your arms this is great because it will put your paints on

 really easily, your inks on really easily and help you sanding.

 So you can check out the ArtSea groove tool if it's a tool you think would benefit your

 And on our next episode I am showing you the Chibi Tronics Kit.

 roughly one pound and it comes already cut up, peeled, and you just boil it according

 So like I told you, the yuca is already boiled, it is cooled down, and you need it to be

 cooled down because then one, of course, you can handle it, and two, it will dry out because

 If you're interested in buying one of these, you can go to eltostonero.com.

 I'm going to put the link down below if you want to find one of these.

 you do, I covered it with plastic because it's way easier to clean, the cleanup is way

So now we're going to place them here, and we're going to continue,

 high, my stove goes from zero to ten, and it's at an eight right now.

 one to make jibaritos, one to make the tostones rellenos that I made a video on.

 all you do, you fry them quickly, brown them, and we'll be back when I get to eat one.

Nice, quick, easy, a nice alternative to plantains, so you can make tostones de

If you like this video, please show me some love, give it a thumbs up.

 this there's going to be a little box that says click to subscribe, click on that if

 I've sawed it to actual length now, which is the full length of what we call the wrong

 Now I'm going to square this up, just like we did with the rungs.

 I'm going to work again on both ray planes first and check the thickness with the red

 Only this time, we will use the portion of the red gauge, which marks an inch and 3-8ths.

 Now if you've taken off too much wood at once, rather than just go full across, you

 We've put the one line at the top, which will always tell us that this is the way up.

 We lay the chair stick out here, and we have a line, oh, about an inch and a quarter below

 Then to decide how big the taper is going to be at the bottom, we lay out a one inch

 The reason for that is if you come all the way up here, you have a tendency to undercut.

 If the edges aren't good, it doesn't matter, because they're all going to be gone real

 It's a simple tissue paper roll that you find in the bathroom and you can get them in different

 They're about three times as long if you get them out of a paper towel roll.

 Now, if you want, you can put one in each end, put a little one in the middle.

 I like to stuff the big treat in the center and a medium one at the end.

 If you turn them different ways, see this is horizontal and this side's vertical, you

 Now this is the best potatoes you're ever going to have in your entire life.

 You chop up some potatoes and you want to put them on a wet paper towel on the bottom.

 What the wet paper towel does is it absorbs the starches from the potatoes so they don't

 Now let's just say you're cooking at home, the husband comes home and did what I just

 We've lost the heat that we've had, the 360 heat that we've had.

 All you've got to do now is just bring it back up to temperature.

 When you bring it up to temperature, watch the vapor come out, turn it back down to low

 Just take the cabbage, rinse it off, pour the water back out, put the lid back on, and

 Now today I want to show you how to do corn on the cob without any water.

 Now a lot of people like to put their corn on the cob in boiling water and that water

 Now when you cook in the AmeriCraft cookware and you don't use any water, all the sugars

 Now for those of you who are health conscious or the doctor's telling you to watch that

 Well in AmeriCraft we're going to do all 15 ears right here in our three quart.

 Now when you don't use any water, it gives you a lot more volume to work with.

 The double boiler is good if you want to melt chocolate or do fondues, things like that.

 But also what it can be used for, if you turn it around, you have a six quart Dutch oven.

 Now we're going to start, since corn has a lot of natural sugars in it, we do want

 So we're going to take some of the leaves from the shucks and put it right there on

 Now if you don't have the shucks, you can also use a wet paper towel like we did with

 But I kind of like the shucks because it just keeps that corn flavor going.

 We're going to take this corn and we're going to place it around the bottom of the pan.

 Now corn does dehydrate as it sits, so we're just going to add a little bit of moisture

 It doesn't really need that much, just a little bit for the dehydration.

 Now we're going to take our double boiler dome cover, AmeriCraft cookware, very versatile

 And we're going to wait until we see some vapor coming out of the side.

 And then we'll turn it down to low and let it go for about another five minutes.

 When you cook with AmeriCraft, you get the finest results there are.

 All you've got to do is just put it right on top of that cover.

 Now how many times are you looking for a place to put your cover?

 Pick it right back up, flip it around, and it's right back on your pan.

 You know, cabbage, normally at times you can smell it two blocks away.

 Can't smell it in the AmeriCraft because when that lid is on, it does seal everything around.

 Yeah, Saturday morning and I am going to kind of run with you guys and show you guys kind

 Things like what I eat, supplements that I take and this is actually my pre-workout

 meal of the day because Roxy and I, aka just me, are going to go train legs around noon.

 I did this before in the past and I'm kind of getting back to it.

 I'm going to make myself a greens and red shake where I get a lot of things like extracts

 and whole food extracts from things like fruits and vegetables.

 I'm going to show you guys how I do that in supplement form and then we'll make some food

 So like I mentioned, I like to have a green shake every morning and I did a video on this

 It's a little bit different and if you didn't see the video, well now you can see it.

 So I like just to make sure I'm hitting everything, not only my macros but my micros and I really

 do like to take some things to highlight just health and well-being.

 It's nice to take things like creatine and things that are going to help you build muscle

 and recover and all that good stuff but it's still important to get things that still will

 help you recover and everything but just great for overall health and well-being and that's

 like these greens and red products on the market now which have been there for a while.

 Now when it comes to the products, there are so many different products.

 A lot of times you'll get yourself a greens product and there's only like one or two grams

 Like this one has ten grams of actives, this one has eight grams of actives.

 A lot of times you get products that are a little underdosed in the whole greens or reds

 aspect but really vegetables, things that are green, red, things that are red, just

 for like an example to tell you guys how great these are and some of these positive

 We got black raspberries, we got red raspberries, we got blackberry, black cherry extract, we

 got things like pomegranate extract, we got things like green tea extract, red grapeseed

 There's enzyme and probiotics, there's a detox blend, there's antioxidant blends, there's

 So I usually do a scoop of this which I'll show you which has a little bit of natural

 The greens tend to give it a little weird aftertaste but I'll show you guys how I make

 Two other supplements that I add to it, these are both my products so yes, you need them.

 It kind of goes good with it because apple and there's actually apple extract and stuff

 And then one thing I've been doing lately is normally I do creatine in my pre-workout.

 It really doesn't matter when you take your creatine but this stuff is flavorless.

 So I'm going to be throwing in our newest product, Creatisize, with my green shake.

 This pasta actually is from brown rice and quinoa or quinoa, however you like to call it.

 Do a lot of chicken thighs in the off season just because there's a little bit more fat.

 So I'm going to kind of eyeball how much I'm going to throw in here.

 If you have a hard time getting your fat requirements, switch up your protein sources.

 Another thing that I'll have is some of these organic banana chips which I've talked about before.

 And that's what I like is the coconut oil so it has a decent amount of fat.

 Per serving, which we'll do about a serving, got 11 grams of fat, 13 grams of carbs.

 So it kind of acts like a fruit source and a healthy fat source.

 I usually try to drink, I honestly probably drink between 2 and 3 gallons a day.

 But especially in the morning just because if I'm going to train early, I'm a little bit dehydrated.

 You ever notice that when you wake up from sleeping, you know, it's like, man, I look a little bit leaner, you know?

 That's because you're a little bit more dehydrated just because you went all those hours.

 And a lot of bodily processes are happening while you're sleeping.

 As far as like the food goes, I don't have a specific food that I eat.

 You know, it might be a little bit later in the day for some people.

 But, you know, I'm eating chicken and essentially pasta, which is from brown rice and quinoa.

 You know, I just eat and I'm not – I guess I'm the type of person where I don't like –

 I usually crave things like eggs and breakfast food for like dinner type of thing and then everything else for breakfast.

 So don't fix it over the type of foods that you eat but really how much.

 We got Create Size, the new creatine like you guys saw in the video.

 We also have the new version of Pump Complex out, our stimulant caffeine-free pump version product.

 nice thing about the Radiopopper PX system is that you can shoot up to 1 8000th of a

Shooting at higher speeds sync will allow you to shoot at apertures of 2.8 or

 1.4, which will actually give you that buttery background goodness.

 antenna to these flat kinds because the original antenna just got in the way.

 extra antennas, switched it out, and it actually works pretty well.

The number one thing, the difference between the two, and how you can tell, is

 the only thing I don't like about it is that it can easily fall off.

 with ours is actually use gaffer's tape to secure the bottom part so that when we switch

 out batteries, we can easily replace the cover and the potential of losing it is very minimal.

 way is using your flash and putting the transmitter right on top of the flash and setting your

 and we just put the transmitter right in the front right here, and it works perfect.

 actually sells mounting brackets for your receivers, but what we've found in the past

 is we've actually gone through several of them, and they kept breaking because they're

What my husband did was he matched up the receiver and the transmitter

 holes with industrial strength Velcro, and we actually just Velcro it right on there.

This is the battery life, channel, so you can actually choose what channel to

 is hit this auto channel just to see what the best frequency is, and this one picked

 That just means that it'll blink once the transmitter talks to the receiver.

 actually learned that when you put the batteries in, as soon as you put the batteries in, it

So as wedding photographers, we actually prepare our gear the night before,

 and we put the batteries in, and it actually started draining overnight.

 we actually used it the following day, the batteries were all done.

If you guys do want to load up the transmitter the day before your shoot

 and prepare, what we do is flip the batteries so that it's not draining, and right before

 multiple flash groupings where you can use the Radio Popper Nano system and the Radio

The Radio Popper PX system has been very reliable for us as wedding photographers.

 me to shoot in TTL high speed sync mode and also manual high speed sync mode.

 photographers, I love the Radio Popper PX system in conjunction with our Nikon SU800.

 The Nikon SU800 allows me to adjust my settings right on camera versus having to walk all

 Today we're making up a fast and easy seared salmon with sautéed green beans.

 Begin by seasoning the fillets with salt, pepper, and do this on both sides.

 Now let's cook the salmon by adding some olive oil to a preheated pan.

 Now place the salmon in skin side down and sear it over medium heat on each side for

 And you'll notice it's ready to flip when the bottom half is white.

 Now let's cook the green beans by adding some olive oil to a preheated pan.

 Stir and fry for three to four minutes depending on your desired tenderness.

 When the green beans are cooked, turn off the heat and set them aside on a platter.

 Garnish with some fresh lemon wedges and you're ready to serve.

 For more recipes and cooking tips, visit our website at www.FilipinoCooking.net.

 And remember you can always go to the website and share your recipe with us.

 You know, playoffs are coming up, tailgating parties are happening everywhere, and I want

 to show you a great recipe that you can use to impress your friends and it tastes good

 I'm originally from North Carolina, and so as an end result, hey, we really like our

 It's pulled pork, North Carolina style, with a Lexington style finishing sauce.

 Since we don't have the big barbecue pits here, I wanted to do something very quick.

 So I put some pork right here and did this overnight in a crock pot.

 Now, what I did is I used between 4 and 5 kilograms of pork butt or pork shoulder.

 I cooked this overnight, and as you can see, this is just lovely.

 I left the bone in because there's a lot of collagen, a lot of fat on it.

 And as an end result, that gets imparted into the sauce and it makes it really, really lovely.

 It's very simple though because while the pork is still hot, just simply take your fork

 and run it through and separate all the pieces into little strands.

 Once this is done, you can set this aside and let it cool down because then we're going

 And then I'm going to get a pot and I'm going to make this finishing sauce.

 Now North Carolina, the Carolinas in general are known for their barbecue sauces.

 And then in the eastern part of North Carolina, there's a vinegar based sauce.

 And right in the middle of the state is this lovely, lovely little place called Lexington,

 And they've taken a little bit from the east, a little bit from the west and combined it

 About a half cup of diced onions, about two tablespoons of brown sugar, a tablespoon of

 All we do to make this happen is we combine these ingredients into the pot.

 Worcestershire sauce, salt, brown sugar to give it a little bit of sweetness.

 Now, I'll guarantee you when you're making this stuff, you're going to want to make a

 double or a triple batch because some of this will actually go into the pulled pork, but

 Well, through the magic of television, it's been about 15 minutes.

 Now, the idea here is not to try and reduce this so it's really, really dry.

 What you really want to do is you want to get rid of a little bit of the vinegar and

 And plus, the onions that you put in here, you want to become translucent.

 The onions have gotten to be a little translucent, and as you can see, this is really, really

 So what we're going to do is we're going to take this and we're going to put some on our

 pulled pork, but we're also going to take some and we're going to put it in a little

 So I'm going to put just about half of this on, and then I'm also going to put a little

 Now, I want these onions to get mixed in here as well, and the little bits of tomato that

 were already in the pork are going to be in here and give it a really, really nice flavor.

 If you want to take this and you want to tailgate, take it, wrap it up in some tin foil.

 Make sure you also wrap it up in some plastic wrap as well to keep all the bugs out.

 But take it with you, keep it on ice, pop it out, have a nice meal.

 We take a regular bun, and in North Carolina, what we do is we love fattening foods.

 I'm going to take some coleslaw and I'm going to put on the top of this bun.

 And I'm going to take two dill pickle chips and put on here as well.

 Anyway, that is Several Shades of White, this is a lesson on how to play Several Shades

 He's a great guitarist, the guitarist from Dinosaur Junior, it's a really good album,

 He's got some great songs in there, some quite clever stuff, really relaxing.

 So let's get started, it's actually really tricky, I found it really tricky to play,

 it's simple, but it's just the rhythm that was really tricky, I learned it by ear, I'm

 pretty sure he doesn't use a cap or anything, but I'm pretty sure I'm playing it right.

 The hardest thing I think is the start bit, it's just the rhythm between the two fingers,

 it helps if you do more finger picking or if you play classical guitar.

 So let's get started, first position, you're in the 7th position, and you've got your 3rd

 on the 10th fret of the A string, your pinky finger on the 10th fret of the B string, and

 So that should be the note you're playing, and this is what you play.

 That's the tricky bit, because this, you've got your thumb picking here, and your thumb

 is simply going, just straight rhythm on the B, and this is probably the trickiest

 So that's going to be the second part, so we've got the first bit, and then you simply

 move the bass down by one fret from your 3rd finger to your 2nd finger on the 9th fret,

 And that part is just simply doing a pull-off from the 10th on the B to the 7th on the B.

 First finger on the 9th fret of the A, 7th fret on your 1st finger on the A, then on

 the D and the G, you're on the 9th fret with your 3rd finger on your pinky, you're also

 So you're playing those three, you're landing back on the D string, and then you're doing

 So you're doing a pull-off on the 7th to the 8th on the B, and you're kind of walking it

 So you're doing a hammer-on to the 9th on the A, and then playing those two under the

 So that's pretty much the whole thing, I'll go through it slowly one last time.

 It's really nice once you get down to improvise, I've probably got the upper players very well,

 So it's quite nice to improvise once you get down, because you've got that nice walking

 And that's pretty much it, the chord I think is just three chords.

 It's basically just that I think, a D and a G and an A played, I think it's played open.

 I hope this was a useful video, please give us a thumbs up and everything.

 Check out my other pages, my band's page as well, we're a kind of hard rock, kind of dark

 Today we have here a vintage pen, the Montblanc 220, which is actually surprisingly easy to

 The blind cap or actually piston turning knob, if you just keep screwing that like this,

 Apply silicon grease right there around the seal and apply silicon grease there on these

 Be careful you don't break this off, as you can see it can move around, but it's pretty

 Here you have the end of the barrel, piston guiding rod, and the actual barrel.

 No ink should be in here because it's stopped by the seal, right?

 But if you want you can flush this out with a bit of water, roll up a tissue, stick it

 When you are ready to assemble everything again, slide in this part, the piston guiding

 Take the turning knob, gently screw that back in place, and as you can see the piston is

 The best thing you can do is turn that knob on there just a little bit, then put the piston

 There's not a whole lot more to do there except if you really want to screw the nib off for

 And once you're ready, be very careful to slide it back on there again.

 And note that this is all plastic so don't over tighten anything.

 Then operate the turning knob so the piston is back all the way retracted.

 The little bits of metal on the ink window go on the side of the nib, not on the side

 It's been burning for a few seconds, but it's just actually started to bloom.

 That way if I do have to cut it off the batteries or anything like that, I have something to

 Far enough away that I don't have to worry about my phone getting toasted.

 We're getting some good bubbles in the bottom of the pan there.

 Of course if you put a lid on it, it holds the heat in a little bit better and get it

 If you had a bigger pot, you know, something with a little bit wider bottom, this stove

 would be a lot more efficient because then the heat wouldn't be coming up the side of

 But even with it coming up the side, if I have to, I can grab these handles.

 They are a little bit warm up here at the front, but I can still grab them if I have

 And she's starting to make some noises, so I'll be right behind you here in just a few

 It ain't a rolling boil yet, but if this is water that you brought in from the, you know,

 brought it out to the field with you from a clean water source, that's hot enough to

 make your coffee, make your mountain house meal or whatever freeze-dried meal you happen

 If you were trying to purify it, you'd want this to go just a little bit longer, you know,

 I mean the cup will sway a little bit on you, but when you've got water and stuff in

 So the box said about 6 minutes to a rolling boil, and that's about where we're coming

 So I'd have to say, considering that it's about dead on the 6 minute mark for a full

 hard rolling boil, then I'd have to say it probably run for 20 minutes.

 I'm not going to do a 20 minute burn test on it and bore you with that, just to watch

 But that to me, the water's at 212 degrees because it is boiling.

 The bubbles are coming more from this edge and this edge, but I wouldn't have a problem

 It's been at that stage long enough that any bacteria that was in there would be killed

 So we're going to take that off, get a little windscreen here, blow that out, and I'm going

 to flip this with my multi-pliers just so I don't burn myself because that thing is

 You can use wet fire and that kind of stuff in there, but I would recommend using the

 trioxane bricks because they don't give off the soot that a wet fire does.

 And that's the other thing that's good about this as compared to having a penny stove or

 anything like that with you, is you've got alternate fuel sources you can use.

 So you can put that on and still set your cup right on top of it just like if you were

 There was probably about half a can of alcohol left in there, but you could also, if you

 were using jailed fuel like your Sterno, if you had a small one of the micro cans of Sterno

 you could pop this lid off, put your Sterno in here and use that as a Sterno dish to cook

 The cool thing is the flames are coming out of the side because the wind's blowing.

 They'll come right back up through the bottom like the alcohol did.

 You can burn alcohol, fuel tabs, wet tender, the little coaming cubes that we've all been

 Of course the trioxane, hesbit tabs, anything like that you can use in this stove.

 You've got multiple ways of doing what you want to do out in the woods.

 I'm going to dump this out on this piece of foil because I don't want to burn the house down.

 I'll let that little residue in there burn so I can clean that out.

 I'll try to edit this video down so that it is playable on YouTube.

 Fits inside of your Condor 10x4 pouch with your GSI cup and your guide design bottle

 I'm going to show you how to make a garlic panko jalapeno crisp.

 show you a great recipe that really will use up all your excess jalapenos.

 This is an original recipe and I'm going to show you how to take your jalapenos

 and basically make a jalapeno crisp with panko breadcrumbs, garlic from the garden,

 remove the seeds and the pith and kind of core out your jalapeno.

 water, rinse them, and what it does is you'll see all the extra seeds will

 So the best way to do it is just really crush and roll the breadcrumbs through your fingers.

 That'll grind up some of the cheese, but that's really going to mix everything for you.

 This is going to make a really nice crispy topping on your jalapeno crisps.

 In about 20 or 30 minutes it'll be really cooked and then you're going to just broil it to crisp the top up.

 The breadcrumbs are going to absorb the flavor from the jalapeno.

 And again, this is one cup of Parmesan cheese, one cup of mozzarella.

 And you could add in some other cheeses, but I wouldn't do too many.

 You want to use cheese you like, and two or three kinds of cheese

 let you taste the different flavors without really having to worry about the amount.

 You can taste the flavors without mixing too many flavors together.

 So in about 30 minutes, your jalapeno and breadcrumbs are going to look like this.

 Some ovens may cook hotter, so you may want to do this at 350 for 30 minutes, maybe a little bit longer.

 After you've taken it out in about 30 minutes, you're just going to work some of the breadcrumbs down into the jalapenos.

 What that does is it brings some crispiness and cheese down into the jalapenos themselves.

 So it's a half a cup of parmesan, half a cup of mozzarella right on top.

 Don't put it too high close to the broiler because it will burn.

 And you have to keep an eye on it because every oven is going to be different.

 And in about 3 to 5 minutes, your jalapenos are ready to come out.

 I don't really have a name for this, but it's a mozzarella, parmesan, garlic panko jalapeno crisp.

 It really will use up all the extra jalapenos in your garden and other peppers too.

 Alright guys, last week I showed you guys how to get into this crucifix position from

 Alright, now we also went over some lapel chokes from there too.

 Alright, so you have sometimes, I have Billy's arm here in the Kimura grip already.

 And I know when I'm trying to get his neck it's going to be difficult even if I'm nice

 I don't just try to come straight up because then you kind of put the guy in a neck lock

 You don't want to get yourself disqualified or hurt your training partner or anything

 I go up on my toes and then I bring my hip right to the other side.

 I already have him in a Kimura and then I finish my arm lock right here.

 Make the arm 90 and then you finish your Kimura position right there.

 Alright so guys, if you can't get this Kimura position that we just talked about, maybe

 you're not comfortable with it, maybe Billy is already holding his belt, you messed up

 Say we didn't stretch him out like we talked, Billy made a grip on his belt or his pants

 You will get disqualified for that if you're a competitor, okay?

 So scoot yourself back, switch your hips through, and you can secure right here.

 And guys, don't forget too, if the guy is being lazy with his wrist, you got your wrist

 One, plant it to the floor, open your legs, switch your hips, come up on your toes, sit

 Alright, if he gets a belt grip or if he's already holding something, come to under hook.

 Same thing, switch your hips, come up on your toes, avoid the neck locks, and there's your

 a family close to you that can feed you tons of really, really delicious Pakistani food,

 The first thing we're going to do is chop up our onions really finely.

And I'm going to use two medium sized green chilies that I'm going to run

 in my grinder and to make a paste that's going to go into our beef.

 going to add some spices like cumin powder, coriander powder, cayenne pepper, salt, ginger

 well to get rid of all the moisture because if it's too much moisture in your beef, your

 kebabs are not going to stick to the skewer and they're going to fall off.

 spoon but you really have to stop pretending and use your hands.

And we're going to pop this in the refrigerator for about three hours

 right there with mint, cilantro, and green chilies that I'm just going to run again in

And make it into a paste and pour this in my Indian style yogurt that I'm using.

 Try to get your hands on this because the other brands are mostly a lot sweeter.

 you just want to add your paste into your yogurt and add a touch of water if you want

Now for the main stuff, I'm taking about a good mound of kebab, the beef, and just

Basically you're going to use your middle finger and press it down in a diagonal

 feel like your beef is too moist, you can also get rid of the excess moisture by dabbing

So just take a little bit of oil on a napkin and brush the grill.

 as you can see I have some tin foil that I've only placed so that the juices and the drippings

And at the halfway point, about 10 minutes, you want to baste it with oil and

So even after opening my door and my windows and my ventilation and

 and really I think the secret to these amazing seekh kebab is really the mint in it.

 mint really brings that sweetness and balances out all the spices.

I just sliced some onions really really thinly and sprinkled them with

 want me to make something Pakistani, something more traditional.

And a really really happy Eid Mubarak to every Muslim person watching.

 This is Caroline here and I'm here to show you today how to make this beautiful vintage butterfly

 necklace using one of our favorite stamps from Maya Road and a couple supplies.

 Let's talk first about the list of things you'll need to gather in order to make this necklace here.

 The first thing you'll need is you're going to need to get some of these

 These usually come with a necklace and you'll also want the glass insert that goes with it.

 So decide what patterned paper you want to be stamping your butterfly on and I've already cut this down to size to fit

 Vintage Butterfly Set and you can see I took out the butterfly I want to use and I already put it on an acrylic block.

 You'll want a permanent ink pad because you're going to be putting using this ink pad to stamp your butterfly and to put into your

 And finally, I like to use my Xyron, my little X here to apply to the adhesive to the back of the paper

 So the first thing I'm going to do is I'm going to go ahead and stamp my butterfly onto this little square piece of paper.

 Now after you've done that, what you're going to want to do is you're going to run to run this piece of paper through your Xyron

 covering your entire back of your paper before you put it in the tray.

 Now after I've done that, what I'm going to do is I'm going to put my glass piece on top of the butterfly.

 You don't want to put too much because if you put too much you will flood the entire tray.

 You just want to put enough so that the glass piece will fit in and be thoroughly covered.

 After about an hour your necklace will dry clear and you won't be able to see kind of the cloudy look in the tray.

And then all you have to do is put your chain on and your necklace is complete.

 Hello, well today I'm turning the arm supports for the Sussex chair and they're a funny shape

 the arm supports so it will require some quite careful pole lathing.

 pretty sturdy bits of ash here which I'll just draw a knife down roughly to shape and

 slender at the base but really quite thick at chair seat level and then they taper back

 in so it is fiddly, you've got a very thick section and very thin sections so it will

Well I'm just working this blank round to a nice round shape so what I do is try

 and get it as round as I can one end then get it sort of around the waist in the middle

 little bit of oil helps on the wood when it's turning just makes it a bit happier stops

Anyway at the moment I'm just roughing off so I'm using my roughing gouge

 which is a curved gouge it's quite effective at just taking nice shavings off to get this

 to say I get far more satisfaction from a treadle lathe I think you're far more in contact

 necessary frankly at this stage but I think I will just so I can still see what wood I've

 got to play with I'll just use my flat chisel here just to smooth it off so it's a bit like

 a large skew chisel this one and as you can see that just takes off a nice even shaving.

 Well I've very roughly sketched out what the silk oil is where in terms of shaping on this

 arm support so I'll get on I do the fixed bit first in the middle and then I'll work out towards

 Well here's the finished arm support and I think that's gone reasonably okay so I'll

 try that in a chair just check it all fits and the critical points dimension wise is that's five

 eighths of an inch to slot into the seat assembly this area here I'll actually draw a knife it or

 spokeshave it down to make it a little bit slimmer just where it goes into the bottom stretcher and

 at the top fitting this into the arm I'll probably take a little bit again with a spokeshave just

 take this down but there's one one down it's always more difficult doing the first one one

Well I've now completed the other armrest and it's always easier doing the second one because

 you've got the pattern for the first one anyway here they are they're both side by side on the

 chair so next job is to fit those and that'll be the chair assembly complete.

 will show the finished chair I'll be doing some sanding and polishing and getting it into final

 Lean the washer against the wall and make sure that it's secure.

 Spray some penetrating oil, like liquid wrench, and let it soak for a while.

 Place the tool on the brake package assembly and use a hammer to break it loose.

 Yours may not come out as easy as mine because mine I already taken it out a couple times.

 When it's loose enough, turn it by hand by turning the tool and turning the transmission

 When it's all the way out, remove the tool and take it right out.

 If the radial bearing didn't came with it, remove the radial bearing by hand too.

 Clean the area where the brake package screws on with a wire brush.

 If the top radial bearing is rusted, you will need to replace it.

 Grab it with a pair of vice grip pliers and rock it from side to side until it comes out.

 If the brake assembly is okay, use a wire brush and a degreaser to clean it out.

 Put the new bearing in the brake assembly and tap it down with a rubber mallet so you

 Put the brake assembly in place and push it and turn it and turn the transmission tool

 Remove the wrench and install the brake assembly holding clip and secure it with the holding

 Make it tight, but don't over tighten or you could break the screw.

 When you tighten the screw, these two points dig into the brake assembly and hold it in

 Clean the transmission pulley with a wire brush and the brake rotor bearing and repack

 Screw in the transmission pulley with the brake rotor bearing on it.

 Turn the transmission pulley clockwise until you feel resistance and stop it right there.

 Install the stop lock key like this, half inch from here to here and screw in the holding

 Clean the pump and motor pulleys with a wire brush and install the two belts, the motor

 If you need to adjust the belts, just watch the video on how to replace the belts.

 For the best place to buy parts online, I recommend Repair Clinic.

 When you buy from Repair Clinic, you have 365 days to return any unwanted part for a

 Basically, what it is, is a cordelet made of 7mm line and it is tied off with the double

 To create the power point, you find the center point of the cordelet, which is here.

 Then you tie off again 2 limiter knots, overhand knots, about 9-10 inches apart and this creates

 One side of the equalet is being tied off on an overhand on a bite.

 One limb of the equalet, whether 3 point or 4 point, should always be tied off either

 The rest are usually used with clove hitches for easy adjustment.

 So here now, I'm going to place this in the upper aspect, the most highest piece I have.

 Typically it doesn't matter whether you clip the highest or lowest piece first, but essentially

 I'm trying to find where the power point would roughly be hanging so the limiting knots are

 I tie off this secondary piece, or the second piece, with again a clove hitch.

 Immediately I see it's a little tight, so here I'm going to be extending it now, or

 changing the clove hitch so I have a bit more room to work with.

 Now clipping the third piece in the system, again using a clove hitch to tie it off.

 So again, the adjustability of the clove hitches allows me to move this down fairly readily.

 And what that will do, it will put the power point roughly equal between those.

 You can clip a beaner through each strand of the power point and it allows for good

 Now because it's a double stranded power point, you could use each individual beaner, one

 for your climber and one for you, or you can use both as a single power point.

 And yet another way is to use a single beaner, tying into it as you would with a sliding

 Again, this system, regardless of the anchor point you use, allows for very good equalization.

 It'll still equalize very well between all strands, particularly between the two limbs.

 The intensity of the beef and the tomato and the chili matches really well with the intensity

 You don't really want a super lean piece of meat when you're making stew.

 You want something that's a little tough, and you're going to take a long time for it

 It'll slowly break down, contribute a lot of flavor to the stew.

 Which when you want to buy chilies, look for ones that are sort of pliable like this.

 And then with the arbols, I got rid of the stems but I'm not going to take the seeds out.

 This is what's going to give our little bit of background heat.

 The broth will thicken up a little bit as the juices from the meat mingle in with it.

 Let it cook for a minute or two to let the potatoes absorb some of the flavors from the

 And you can do this in the kitchen or you allow your guests to serve themselves and

 And chopped cilantro and a little squeeze of lime just to perk everything up.

 I think it's sort of nice just to let your guests decide how much or how little.

 It's not your everyday, ordinary Zinfandel because it's not just a big fruit bomb.

 Your Zinfandel is, as you said, not that big a fruit bomb, but it's a really nice glass

 All our wines are very food friendly, but I think balance is the key to that.

 And with the red wine in particular, you try to make sure that you're not getting too many

 And this is a wonderful pairing with the tomato, the beef, the potatoes, and the chilies.

 Hi ladies, my name is Bethany Herway and I'm the Glamrs Housewife.

 Short while ago I went to a really fun 1960s costume party, so of course I had to Instagram

 it and a lot of you really responded to the way I did my hair and makeup.

 A few of you asked for a tutorial and I had done a more modern version of a 1960s look,

 which is what I do when I'm kind of feeling sassy and 1960s, but I want to go out every

 This look is obviously a lot more extreme, a lot more costumey and fabulous of course,

 so I thought I'd put together this tutorial for those of you who might also be doing some

 You're going to need a very light eyeshadow with a brush, a teal shadow with a brush,

 I use two different pen liners, a teal sparkly liner, great lash mascara and a curling brush.

 I feel this really brightens up the eye and kind of sets your makeup in place.

 Next you're going to want to put on the teal shadow all over your eyelash.

 It took me about three layers to get the depth of color that I wanted.

 I use this sort of mauve-y purple-y color mainly because that's what I use all the time

 I normally don't put it on so dark, but I knew the party was going to be dark and I

 Next I used sort of a darker purple to really get the color inside the crease.

 It looks a little drag queen-y, but I like that look so it doesn't bother me at all.

 I use a pen liner, which I drag over the bottom of my eyelid, right above my eyelashes.

 Then I go from the corner and spread it out and then connect it a little further in.

 As you can see, it really gives an extreme cat eye, which I like for the 1960s.

 Because this is a special party, I want my eyeliner to be very black.

 So I go over it with a second liquid liner that I find a lot more difficult to work with,

 On top of the cat eye, I decided to use this sparkly teal eyeliner that I had from the

 I found it at Sephora, and I've actually used it quite a few times.

 And so I just use it to add a little bit of sparkle and an extra pop of color.

 I purposefully wanted to show you that it took, oh man, I would say about five or six

 different strokes to get the depth of color and the line that I really wanted.

 Once the liners have dried, I curl my eyelashes and then add a little bit of mascara to really

 I think it's important to do your mascara last so it doesn't smudge.

 And then for the party, I added a few little lashes at the corners, but in my opinion,

 that's a whole other video, which I'll probably be doing sometime on how to apply fake lashes

 I really like the way the teal and the purple match my dress, and I just did sort of light

 And in my next tutorial, I will show you how I did my hair, which is scary simple and of

 these other twists in the back are old so I'll turn so you can see them.

 nailers and an impact driver can help make it faster and easier for you to

 appropriate to use a nailer and impact driver and give you some tips on using

Air compressor, hose and fittings, framing nailer, fasteners, palm

 for each joist, use a palm nailer to attach both sides of the joist hanger to

 the palm nailer has a magnet inside so the nail stays in place very easily.

 Place the joist in the hanger and drive nails into both sides of the joist.

 same technique can be used for installing metal framing connectors.

 you want to toenail the joist to the beam using the framing nailer and

After all the joists are installed and cut to length, use a framing nailer

 between the joists and shoot a two and a half inch nail through the joists into

 impact driver weighs less than two pounds, making it less than half the

 you to screw down the hundreds, if not thousands, of deck screws in a standard

After you've decided on your decking pattern, position the boards on

 shank of a nail to maintain a uniform gap between the decking boards.

 fastest and more economical way to install deck boards is by using a

 important to control the nail penetration in order to leave a clean,

 Hello, it's Joe from Montmartre here again and today we're going to be doing some fantastic

 So we'll put a little bit of black in a vessel here and we'll put a little bit of white onto

 All right, let's put his neck in here and paint the rest of his body.

 And the funny thing about zebra stripes is every single zebra stripes are slightly different.

 And let's put his little mane on, which is a little tuft of hair there.

 Just use the ball of your hand to create a circle, or you can use your finger if you like.

 Just use the dark brown around the edge of the head to suggest the mane.

 Just create a dot for the nose, and use two little strokes to create a muzzle.

 Now you can create wonderful scenes like this African savannah scene.

 Next add 2 teaspoons of baking soda, 2 1⁄2 teaspoons of ground ginger, 1 teaspoon of

 ground cinnamon, 1 teaspoon of ground cloves, and finally ¾ of a teaspoon of salt.

 all our dry ingredients a good mix till everything is well combined.

 Now here's this recipe's secret ingredient, it's crystallized ginger.

 ginger and it really does taste amazing in these ginger cookies.

 chop the ginger though it gets quite sticky, so there is a secret trick to this.

 For this recipe we're going to need ¾ cups of finely chopped ginger.

 stop sticking together, just sprinkle the crystallized ginger with a little bit of gluten-free

The gluten-free flour sticks to the sticky bits so it doesn't all clump together

 Let's add this to our dry mixture, making sure it's evenly distributed throughout the

 In a separate bowl, add ½ cup of vegetable sharpening, making sure it's at room temperature,

 Once the sugar and the butter is combined, add 1 extra large egg or 2 small eggs.

 are really important in gluten-free cooking because it helps bind things together.

 Once that's nicely mixed, we're going to finish with ¼ cup of molasses.

 Of course if your mixer is still working, just add your dry ingredients to your wet,

 making sure everything is mixed well together and you're left with a nice thick batter.

 The butter and the lard will harden, which will result in a very stiff dough.

 you're going to line a baking tray with parchment paper and sprinkle some sugar on a plate.

 I sometimes like to squish down the cookie dough with a fork to give it a bit of a pattern,

 Bake a couple testers if you need to, just so you get the timings right.

 they're done when they just start to crack on top, but they're really soft inside.

 be so soft you'll actually have to let them rest on a cookie sheet for at least a minute

 With a spatula, carefully remove the cookies from the cookie sheet and let cool on a rack.

 If you've cooked these properly, they'll be nice, soft and squishy on the inside and nice

 One last important note is to keep them stored in an airtight container.

 So there you have it, gluten free ginger spice cookies, just in time for the holiday.

 So if you liked that video and you want to see more, and help me get a new mix master,

 chard because they're in season right now, and you can use any vegetables you

Because the udon noodles are already pre-cooked, we only need to let

As you can see, it was an easy and healthy meal to make, especially when

I'm David Rosengarten filling in for Sarah Moulton and I am joined,

 I'm happy to say, by master baker and cookbook author Rose Levy Berenbaum.

And then, of course, the devastating brownie puddle, which you shall see shortly.

 But right now we're going to finish the lemon poppy seed pound cake.

 Actually, the safest way to invert is by putting a greased rack right on top of it

 Yeah, and we just brush the bottom because we want to brush most of it onto the top since

 it's going to be inverted and the glaze sinks down into it and that way it will be even.

 But you know, David, the best way to have it really even is when you make this cake

 Because when you do a glaze in a cake, it takes about that long for it to even...

 it together because otherwise you'll be compressing it, even a pound cake.

 But don't worry because if you were to get a few marks, nobody would ever notice.

 And then you would just simply defrost it at room temperature and it would be great.

 If you were not putting it in the freezer, but you wanted to make it in advance, how

So I could just have it sitting in my kitchen at room temperature for a week.

 serve it at room temperature because butter gets firm when it's refrigerated.

 And if it were just sitting there on my kitchen counter for a week, would I have it covered

In fact, Saran is a plastic wrap that has absolutely no air spaces.

 meant to be airtight, whereas other wraps are designed to store vegetables where they'd

Now, to finish garnishing this, you do the blueberry thing, of course.

 Because otherwise it would roll right off the fork when you try to eat it.

 To me, that's a very attractive level of stickiness that you got there.

 Either you do a light dollop of the whipped cream, and I don't like it too stiffly beaten

 Like I would use a tablespoon of super fine sugar for a cup of heavy cream.

 I don't like to use powdered sugar because you know that has cornstarch to keep it from lumping.

 And if you don't cook it, then the cornstarch, you can feel it kind of.

 Before you do it, just give us a sense for people who haven't used this before.

 I like to use the heavy duty freezer bags, the resealable ones,

 A lot of problems people have with these bags is that if they don't hold them tightly here,

 Yeah, I'm going to be showing you that when we get to the chocolate one

 And I called it after that because I had the school for ten years

 But the important thing to this cake is in order to keep it creamy,

 because otherwise these springform pans always absorb some of the water

 Right, because we are in New York and the traditional New York cheesecake

 because then when it comes away, it can come away without splitting.

 Now these ladyfingers, of course, they came in the package like this.

 And then you can squeeze in as many in the center as you want to.

 gets absorbed into the sponge fingers and becomes really lovely, tender again.

 Do you know, this is actually a cheesecake you can make for Passover.

 And you'll get it to thicken, but of course you can't use this kind of cake.

 Okay, listen, I'll tell you what, you've got some cheesecake making to do,

 We've got chambord, we've got strawberries, we've got it all, folks.

I would think that lots of you out there have seen these old rocket nutcrackers.

So the action of cracking them up that way in the traditional way like this on a

 table top just kills parts of my wrist and shoulders after a while.

 drywall screw going right up through the back side of this board.

 believe it or not that simple modification of the nutcracker allows you to pull down

 my middle age miseries add up, I can do this action up and down like this for far longer

 the one long one back there, that you drill pilot holes so that it doesn't split the wood

Be aware though that now you're a little bit closer, your face is a little

 bit closer to the nutcracker and safety glasses would be the smart thing to use.

 The Hair Care Company Scalp Exfoliating System is the most unique revitalizing system on the market.

 The combination of the Dead Sea Scalp Mask and Turbinado Sugar Scrub cleanses, purifies, and refreshes the scalp to help maintain and promote new hair growth.

 This system has achieved the most amazing results for product buildup, psoriasis, dermatitis, eczema, and dandruff on the scalp.

Shampoo the hair with clarifying shampoo and apply the Instant Daily Conditioner to prevent the hair from drying.

 This will allow the mask to dry and tighten and pull impurities and toxins to the surface of the scalp.

After the mask has dried, wrap the hair and scalp in a hot towel.

 This can be achieved by placing a damp towel in the microwave for about 60 seconds.

Apply the Turbinado Sugar Scrub the same way you would apply the mask, but gently scrub each partings as you apply.

 Once the application is complete, gently massage the entire head for 5-7 minutes.

Shampoo with clarifying shampoo 2-3 times and apply Instant Daily Conditioner.

 Comb conditioner through and let it sit for 2-3 minutes and style as usual.

 For extra deep conditioning, the Hair Care Company's Cuticle Sealer and Reconstructor can be used.

 Please remember that all natural shampoo may not lather the first or second time with the amount of product that has been applied to the hair.

 Just use the senses of your fingertips to make sure that the product has been removed completely.

 Try some of our maintenance products to keep your hair and scalp healthy.

 The Hair Care Company Dry Scalp Remedy and Hair and Scalp Food are the perfect companions to fight dry and itchy scalp.

 Today I'm going to show you a recipe that many of you have requested from me and that's

 for my vanilla buttercream frosting which I use in many of my tutorials.

 This is really quick to whip up, it's smooth, sweet and delicious.

 I've got 250 grams of unsalted butter and this is very soft at room temperature.

 I've got 5 tablespoons of full fat milk and 2 teaspoons of vanilla extract as well as

 So the first thing I need to do is beat the butter and I have it here in my stand mixer

 I'm going to turn it on to a medium speed and this needs to beat for about 10 minutes.

 The butter needs to turn from this deep yellow colour to an almost white colour and it needs

 It does take a little while but this is one of the key steps in getting a nice fluffy

 The best thing to do would be to go and make a cup of tea and every now and again come

 After about 10 minutes, you can leave it even longer if you need to, you can see that the

 butter is very light in colour and it's got a very airy light texture about it.

 Now I've got here my icing sugar which I've sifted into a bowl and I'm going to gradually

 add it to my butter just a few tablespoons at a time otherwise I'm going to end up with

 It's best to put the mixer on low to start with until the icing sugar is blended with

 I'm going to continue to gradually add my icing sugar to the butter mixture and once

 I've added about half the icing sugar I'm going to pour in my 2 teaspoons of vanilla

 As I continue mixing and adding the icing sugar you'll notice that the mixture is starting

 to get a bit thicker and lumpy and a little bit difficult for the mixer to actually turn

 I'm going to continue adding the icing sugar as well as the milk until they're both finished

 Once everything is combined I'm left with a beautiful smooth and sleek very light and

 Of course you can turn this into any colour you like with the addition of some food colouring

 and it becomes perfect as a filling for your cakes or piped beautifully on top of your

 So guys I hope you enjoyed this tutorial on how to make my smooth sweet and simple buttercream

 If you did don't forget to give it a like and share it with your friends.

 If you're not already a subscriber make sure you click the subscribe button and head over

 to my channel and check out some of my character cakes, my fun themed cakes and my cake toppers

 If you cook two medium potatoes, you can get about six parathas.

 So you cook them in the pressure cooker or microwave, the whole thing.

 Another trick my friend told me, Sushila told me is to grate the potatoes instead of mashing it.

 And you can taste it, but it should be little more than you normally would like.

 Because when you put it on the stuffing, it's going to be little milder.

 So you mix everything, the spices, everything and you make round balls.

 I thought it was 6, but you can get good 8 parathas with two medium sized potatoes.

 And when you are rolling the paratha, you can do it little thick.

 We are going to make my favorite smoothie with a brand new ingredient, cashew milk,

 I'm going to tell you different tips on smoothie making that you may not have known

 First, I like to start off my smoothies with at least half greens.

 I use baby spinach, which is super sweet and it's packed with iron and it's really

 You just put in what you like, you mix it all together and see how it turns out.

 We're going to mix this up a little bit just to get it started so we can add more stuff

 A good tip for actually having your kids eat healthy foods is to have them participate

 I eat an entire small pineapple or a half of a large pineapple.

 I keep my water pitcher on the counter so when I'm making a smoothie I just add in a

 It also helps reduce the breakdown of enzymes and nutrients in the fruits and vegetables

 When you're heating things and blending, it heats up the fruits and vegetables only slightly.

 Adding dairy and mixing it with fruits and vegetables can cause a gastric nightmare.

 Raising a dairy cow puts a tremendous strain on the environment.

 If you look up statistics about factory farms, factory farming of cows is actually worse

 The funny story about these mugs is that everyone remarks on my Instagram every time I post

 So I made about 50 ounces of smoothie and that's good for two people.

 The difference between a smoothie and a juice is that smoothie is an actual meal replacement.

 So it has all the fiber, has all the parts of the plant, so it's good to have for breakfast

 I love your feedback and requests, so be sure to tell me what you thought in the comments

 And for lots and lots of free gift ideas, I'm going to be doing a giveaway.

 So if you want to win a free gift, you can go to my website, and I'll be sending you

 I love you guys, and I'll see you soon in another BexLife video.

 I am the arts and crafts coordinator for the Bronx Zoo in the New York Aquarium.

 I love working creatively with children and I have some new and exciting projects that

 This is a project that I'm currently going to be doing at the Bronx Zoo for the animal

 We can do a lion, a peacock, a ring-tailed lemur, an American alligator, and today we're

 The craft tools that you need for this project are appropriate size scissors, a good tacky

 sticky glue, and a brush to use with the glue, paper bag, construction paper in black,

 tan, brown, white, and pink, an empty paper towel roll, some yarn if you have it, some

 beads or buttons for the eyes, and some pipe cleaners for the eyelashes and for the tongue.

 So then, the first thing you're going to do is go to the website and get the templates,

 print them out, cut them out, and that's going to be what you're going to use to cut out

 There are going to be three little pieces that you can use, cut out, and put for the

 ear, and a few little pieces you can use for the eye, and then there are a bunch of different

 little shapes that you can cut out to use for the white part and the brown part of the

 giraffe, and that's going to be what makes your pattern when you put it on your giraffe's

 There's also a template that's the antlers, and that's the part that you can use the pom-pom

 for if you have it to make the little antlers that are going to go on the top of the head.

 The next thing that we're going to do is we have to make a nose for our giraffe.

 So we're going to take an empty paper towel roll, and we're going to cut it about this

 long, and then you can take it and bend it in a little bit so it looks more like a nose.

 Fold it down, bend it in, and then you're going to take a little bit of glue, and you're

 going to glue it under the front of the paper bag so that it's going to look like that,

 and hold it for a second so that it dries, and then once you've done that, then you can

 move on to the next part where you're going to use the part that you cut out in the beige

 to glue on and put his tummy, and then you're going to add the pattern that's the three

 Glue those on, and then you can start adding the different shapes that are going to be

 the pattern of your giraffe, and put a little bit of glue on them.

 And if it goes over the side like that, you can cut it off at the edge so that it looks

 You can add nostrils to his little nose once you've glued on the pink and the white and

 Stick those on, and then the little pieces that you've cut out for his eyes, like so,

 some of the glue, stick those guys down, and then you can take your buttons or your beads,

 put a little more glue, and stick on the eyes, and then you have the antler that you've maybe

 With the antlers, put a little glue on the back of the bag, and that you might actually

 have to hold for a second because it's going to be a little bit heavier.

 And then I think he's missing some ears, so let's find our ears.

 So now that you've added your ears and your nose and your eyes and your antlers and all

 of your giraffe spots, now we're going to add a few more details.

You can download the templates for these puppets at our website,

 A lot of people don't like this, and then again a lot of people do.

 You can cut yourself and it spatters all over the place when the lid finally rips off.

 I'm just going to show you how to mix the cake and icing together to form the cake balls.

 I know that there's a lot of people that have problems with them falling apart, not being able to dip them, and all sorts of things.

 I think I know what the problem is and I want to clear up once and for all how to actually make them.

 When I level cakes, you guys see me make and level cakes for others.

 You can use store-bought cake, homemade cake, box cake, any kind of cake.

 Just make sure that if you do use your hands, that they're very clean.

 As I said, you can use any kind of cake, but you can also use any flavor cake.

 You can use just vanilla or just chocolate or any flavor that you want.

 This can be store-bought icing, homemade icing, any flavor, any kind you want.

 If you make a lot of cakes, you know that when you do a crumb coat, you always have a little bit of icing.

 I'm going to go ahead and I'm going to add about two tablespoons to this mixture.

 You want to start out with less icing than you're going to need.

 If you put too much icing in here, your cake pops are not going to hold together well.

 You want to make sure that you're not putting too much icing in here.

 When I left off, I told you we were going to add a little bit more icing.

 Once I get them formed, I'll come back and we'll go from there.

 Now we're going to take the flat side and we want to insert our lollipop stick,

 whatever you want to call this, into the flat side because we want the top to be rounded.

 What we're going to do is take our lollipop stick and we're going to dip it into the chocolate.

 We're going to just as far as we're going to put it into the cake ball.

 You just want to hold it there for a few minutes until it sets.

 At this point, you can dip the cake balls into chocolate, whatever flavor you want, whatever color.

 When you bite into these, they're really great because you get a lot of cake.

 If you guys want to try this out, definitely let me know how they came out for you.

 Stay tuned because I'm going to do some more recipes that involve cake pops.

 We start out with hamburger helper, one pound of chopped meat, skillet, stirrer, and a big

 Be very careful to wash your hands after touching any uncooked meat.

 Mix three and one quarter cups hot water into the skillet with chopped meat.

 Place the pasta and sauce in the skillet along with the hot water

 So I was about to turn off the camera after filming some instructional how to play the

 Last of the Mohicans stuff, and then I became inspired to share something for the pure beginners

 So I'll do two different videos for you guys, and the first one is going to be how to hold

 So when you're doing your bow hold stuff, put the violin away, put it away for days

 And actually, to start, you can even put down the bow, and just deal with your hand.

 And you're going to want to keep your hand in as relaxed of a state as possible the whole

 So if you're ever getting a lot of tension in your hand, or if your hand's starting to

 Just stop what you're doing, shake out all the tension in both of your hands, and then

 From a completely relaxed hand, the first thing that you're going to want to do is just

 use the minimum amount of muscle tone that you need to bring your hand up like this.

 And you'll see that the fingers are still hanging there very loose.

 This is very close to the way you want your hand to look when you're holding the bow.

 The next step, step two, after you adjust your wrist, is bring your thumb right here

 These two fingers are going to stay buddies and kind of work together through the bow

 hold, and your pinky is going to work as a little balancer with your thumb as a fulcrum

 So now that you have this, kind of play around with the fact that you can still move these

 two fingers freely, because this is going to be part of what you do while you play,

 depending on if you're playing at the very tip of the bow or close to the frog, which

 is this part, for some reason it's called the frog, is going to depend, that is going

 to decide how much of each of these fingers is going to be pressing on the bow, while

 these two are just going to be kind of your stability there with your thumb.

 So once you have this kind of idea going on, there's something that I want you to check

 And that is that this joint stays bent, like you see mine right now, and that it stays

 nice and open and round here, rather than squishing off like this.

 This is another thing, if you start seeing this kind of action, stop and start over.

 Don't even try to fix it from there, just stop and start over, that way you can release

 all of the tension in your hand and have a totally fresh, good start.

 By the way, you can do this any time, you know, while you're driving in the car, waiting

 in line at the store, people will think you're a little weird, but it doesn't matter.

 Now when we're going to introduce the bow, we can start again from a totally relaxed

 step one, and then before you do step two and bring the thumb to meet right there, go

 ahead and slide the bow stick right along those two joints that you're about to touch

 with your thumb, and feel how that groove creates a really nice holder for the bow.

 Now it's almost like your hand could just, in a completely relaxed state, just hang on

 Now you're going to want to bring your thumb to those two fingers just like you did before,

 but now that the bow is there, you can put your thumb right there on the bow.

 You'll see, I'm going to press, it does not take much pressure to hold it.

 If you're holding it correctly, a very loose hold will be completely secure, but I'm going

 to press a little harder just so that you can see that my thumb is a little bit on the

 And now, because my pinky's there to balance, I can let go and hold the bow with my fingers

 There's still a nice wide opening here, and no tension in my wrist.

 So get used to that before you even try to play your first note, because there is your

 Have you ever wanted to eat quality ice cream but without all the preservatives, without

 What makes this machine unique is that it takes all of your favorite fruits and mixes

 The great part is that it looks and tastes just like ice cream, but is strictly all natural

 You can throw in some pineapples, a little bit of mangoes, and now you have a delicious

 Don't hesitate to throw in some of your favorite chocolate or peanut butter.

 For those of you who are just coming home from the gym, looking to lay back and cool

 down, you can add some of your favorite protein powder to your recipe to create a protein-packed

 Also, with the Cook's Club Dessert Maker, you can create cakes, pies, popsicles, and

 Just take apart the pieces, run it under warm water, and back together again for safekeeping.

 The Cook's Club Dessert Maker comes in many different assorted colors, making this a great

 Create delicious desserts while you're getting your essential vitamins and minerals.

 Hey everybody this is GAS96 back with another Transformers Lego video and today I'm going to be showing my G1 Sunstreaker.

 Uh, he pretty much has no wheels, well those are his wheels, but this, these front, um, these front ones roll.

 Uh, but they don't actually touch the ground and these ones are just pretty much fake.

 So he can't roll, he just slides around, but yeah he has the, uh, cockpit thing, whatever it's called.

 Um, and yeah he's all yellow and stuff, which is cool, I guess.

 Um, here's the front of the car, a little engine block which is his head as you can kind of see.

 Um, there's his spoiler and this part is kind of high up and there's his arms and stuff.

 So to transform him, you first, like, kind of lift this part up a little bit.

 And by the way, they don't really, uh, like, it doesn't matter which one you put on them.

 But I'm not going to put this one on because you can put the gun on the other hand.

 Thanks for tuning in to this video number three for Greg Shorthand and I think the last

 video we left off I was showing you some Greg Shorthand tablets and right after I show you

 this one hopefully we will be going to the board and I'm going to show you, I hope to

 show you just how far super seated fast Greg Shorthand is in comparison to our conventional

 And then we're going to sit here and wonder in awe, maybe you'll join me, why didn't our

 teachers teach us shorthand the first six years of our schooling and then the last six

 Can you imagine how further up the road we possibly could have been above other students

 of other nations to be able to take dictation and notation and lectures down a whole lot

 quicker than what we can in our regular longhand traditional riding.

 Instead of teaching shorthand in high school I wish the first six years would be shorthand

 But I'm not trying to tell the school system what to do, I'd like to make some suggestions

 Anyway here's an older, this is an older shorthand book and if you'll notice right here on the

 And basically what that means is that all these lines are spaced the exact space apart

 and when I show you the Greg shorthand alphabet you'll understand why it's important that

 And Greg shorthand, I think I made a note of this before, you have a lot of the same

 strokes but it's the length of the strokes between those two lines that changes it from

 So that's why it's important to learn on lines and that's why I'm going to be drawing lines

 on the board here in just a little bit after I show you the Greg shorthand alphabet.

 And even though I'm going to be moving on kind of fast you can play these videos over

 and over again and you can even stop them at any time and see what's right there before

 But once again I made a note of this is an older one I have and I played by the rules

 as far as writing to the middle line and then starting over and I'm sorry there that's math

 that let's see that's a little math but I'm not teaching math here.

 But that shorthand folks it does it as you can see it doesn't look nothing like our language

 and I'm kind of glad it does when you see how fast it goes with those strokes in comparison

 to how we have to write our alphabet you're going to be glad that Greg shorthand has been

 Okay because these videos are going to be a little on the short side because I notice

 if I make them too long 10-15 minutes it seems like the webcam or the computer it just kind

 of freezes up so that's why I've got to go a little fast here now we're going to move

 the camera a little bit get it towards this board here just bear with me here.

 Okay folks let me give you an example of how much more quicker Greg shorthand is than our

 Did you see how long it took me to write that in our regular longhand?

 Medical doctor if we had the lines on a page I would write MD that would be it.

 We could have used the alphabet in Greg shorthand and we could have wrote it this way.

 Okay now the reason why you see this and you'll learn more about this in a little bit.

 The reason why you see that K underneath the D here the way you write it in long form of

 shorthand would be MED and any word that ends with CLERCAL you'll always see this is one

 of the rules and we're going to cover one section on one video of the rules of Greg

 You will always see a K underneath the alphabet the last alphabet.

 Medical doctor in shorthand is DOKTR but just like we write medical doctor MD and that's

 I'm going to be moving kind of fast here but once again you can replay this and slow it

 By the way I'm having to write at a slant because I have to stay out of the camera's

 I can't write it as neat as I would like to because I'm kind of like way over here on

 Instead of writing that whole word tomorrow I just made a few strokes here.

 Now of course on pen and paper when you got the pen in your hand and it's a much little

 But on a pen and paper it's even much more quicker than what you're seeing me doing here.

 It is cheap, fast, easy, and it is good for those weekdays when you do not really feel like cooking, but you want a healthy option.

 What you will need is 2 potatoes, salt, pepper, mustard, a lot of mustard, that is going to be the base for the sauce.

 You can use maple syrup, and whatever other seasonings you feel like adding in here or there.

 I used a little bit of oregano, and a little bit of nutritional yeast, and some hot sauce instead of the pepper.

 I am just giving you the base and the tools and the knowledge to go for it and do your own thing.

 Start off with my 2 Idaho potatoes and I thoroughly rinse them.

 Same time, same heat temperature, so they cook at the same rate.

 I lightly salt the water and I just leave that for about 20 minutes.

 Use as much as you think you need to cover, depending on how much sauce you want.

 Now that I have my potatoes peeled, I am going to add the two potatoes to my sauce bowl.

 Hey everybody, Josh Harris with Future World Champ and I wanted to talk to you, I got an

 email about a round kick and I just posted this comment on Facebook and I said that one

 of my students saw me do a round kick and it was head level and he was like, oh man,

 you're young, that's why you could do kicks like that, I could never do them like that

 So I posted a comment and I said, what do you think about people that say that they're

 too old, do you think if you're 40 you're older that you've kind of lost your flexibility

 and I think that it's when you lose track of your goals, that's what happens and everyone

 has their different opinions, one guy said that it's not the kicks that hurt, it's when

 you fall down because you try to kick so high and getting back up, that's what hurts.

 But really, I think that no matter what age you are, it's not that you're too old, it's

 just that it's been too long since you've worked out and you have to build that flexibility

 Sometimes the way that you're working, whatever you're doing, isn't the right way to get you

 back into that super flexibility or super strong state that you have to do other things.

 But the specific question was during the second degree form, which will help you with every

 form, but during the second degree form there's a section where, I'll do it for you, you're

 in your fighting stance, you're going to come up, round kick, round kick, round kick and

 the problem was that this person couldn't get the leg extended all the way, so you would

 When you kick, it would only go out that much and then come back.

 When your knee is bent, when your knee is bent down here, this is like a regular range

 So I'm bringing my knee up, I take a step, my leg is almost straight here and then I

 If I'm going to bring my leg up real tight and then bring it up as high as I can, it's

 My different muscles are being used and stretched beyond the normal flexibility.

 So when I have that knee up really high, my knee is maybe not extend all the way.

 So like people can bring their knee up super high but then they can only front kick this

 That's super common and people have, I think that what I've heard is their mindset is wrong

 But when I try to kick that high, it doesn't go out all the way.

 Well that's because I have really strong glutes but really tight hip flexors.

 So my hip flexors will lift my knee up and my glutes will help that happen but then when

 I can do in a later video some things to do to stretch the hip flexors or maybe for you,

 you need to strengthen your glutes but the way to lock your kicks is to have very flexible

 Alright, so research how to stretch my hip flexors and whatever you do when you're working

 I know static stretching is bad for performance and all that stuff but in this case, you need

 to turn your hip flexors off because they're just overdeveloped and all that nervous energy

 from your brain is going to your hip flexors and they won't turn off.

 The only way to get those legs straight and locked is to turn off those hip flexors.

 Do whatever type of kicking workout you want to do and then before you're done, stretch

 It's Josh Hayhers from www.FutureWorldChamp.com and show me those round kick videos.

 Show me how strong you've been with those high kicks and good luck.

 Thanks for tuning in for this episode of Two and a Half and Two and a Half.

 What I'm going to do is I know that there were a couple of posts that I had made about foods

 and getting your kids to try new foods and really, you know, exploring the goodness of foods.

 See, the trick is that, you know, most of the time when people hear

 you know, when they hear about beef liver, they think, you know, absolutely horrible.

 But what we want to do is that when you are cooking it, you want to get something that's organic.

 You know, there's no hormones, synthetic, pesticides, basically anything with the cows that they use.

 The reason I like liver in terms of, you know, organ meats, essentially that it's one of the

 There's probably in one serving is about 150 calories for liver.

 And what I mean by that is that if you have a serving of liver that you can generally get

 most of your vitamins and minerals, 100% of your daily recommended vitamins, especially the B6,

 And it's so nutrient dense, again, that you don't need a whole lot of beef.

 And as I said, what we're going to do is we are going to, can you come over here?

 Again, the bacon, it's organic bacon that I get from a local butcher that I know where

 So what I've done is the liver and onions, basically just an onion.

 I'm going to add a little bit of thyme, a little bit of turmeric.

 Essentially, you guys should be adding turmeric to just about everything.

 And then what I'm going to do is I'm going to add some chicken stock to it and let deglaze.

 My son is filming and he's very excited about trying the liver.

 And I think that if you guys can start focusing on foods first and getting fit through foods,

 especially good nutrient dense foods, that the quality of your life generally is going

 Again, there's a link down here at the bottom that you guys can, you know, if you want more

 recipes like this or just free information on my digestion enzymes, feel free to message

 Today we're going to make a double grilled cheese bacon cheeseburger.

 That's right, two grilled cheese sandwiches for the bun and a bacon cheeseburger in the

 And yes, I know the sandwich is not healthy, but boy is it good.

 When a recipe starts with one pound of bacon, you know it's going to be good.

 We're going to fry one pound of bacon and I'm going to start this off on a cool griddle.

 If you start your bacon off in a hot pan or a hot griddle, it's going to shrivel down

 Now just slowly let the griddle come up to temperature and fry the bacon.

 Now once the griddle is up to temperature, you can start moving your bacon around and

 Now I'm going to remove and drain the bacon and wipe off any excess grease on the griddle.

 For the burgers today, I'm using 80-20 ground chuck, 8 ounces per burger.

 And to give you an idea of how big the burgers are, that's a regular sized plate.

 Now we're going to get these burgers on the griddle and cook for about 5 minutes per side.

 Oh, and as you can tell, they stuck to the plate and that one fell apart a little bit.

 I'm just going to season the burgers with a little bit of seasoned salt.

 After about 3 minutes or so, let's flip the grilled cheese over.

 Now just in case the cheese in the grilled cheese sandwiches weren't enough cheese, I'm

 going to add another piece of sharp cheddar cheese to the burgers.

 Now let's get these burgers off and finish up the grilled cheese.

 I'm going to give the grilled cheese one more flip for good measure and then we'll be ready

 Now like I said in the beginning, this is not a healthy sandwich and I know that.

 And see how I told you it would not shrink if you cooked it slow?

 And don't ask me why they call purple onion red, but that's what it's called.

 And now one more grilled cheese slathered with mayonnaise for the top bun.

 then route each cable individually, making sure we know which cable we are dealing with

 We will then dress the cable, judging for cable length, before we cut the cable off.

 Carefully measure out the length of wire, cut off the end, and make sure you leave enough

 tool, rotate the tool around the wire two to three times, once in reverse, and then

 To remove the nylon runner, simply cut it away using your cable cutters and discard

 If you press the cable in the bottom of the troughs between the IDC and the jacks, it

 will help you place the cable, and it makes for a neat appearance once the wires are all

 After separating your pairs, follow the color coding on the insulation displacement connection

While untwisting the wires slightly near the jacket, force the wires over the

 tower so that the top wire is the blue wire with the white stripe, and the bottom is the

Continue down in the same fashion with the orange, green, and brown

 Using the Leviton Punch Down Tool, punch down the individual wires into the IDC.

 Ensure that the cut side of the Punch Down Tool is facing the side of the conductor you

 and if you don't know what that is, don't worry, check out our video on bird base.

 So first fold the right flap over to the left as we're showing here.

 So we're just going to grab ahold of those four fingers and turn the top part

 The base of the figure, the base of the rose, will stay stationary while we're turning this top part, so we get a twisting effect.

 If you want a really tight twist, you can actually get in there with a pair of tweezers.

 and curling the tip over the skewer, just like we're showing here.

 rose and everywhere we see a sharp corner, we're going to do a curl over like this.

 And while you're doing this, don't worry if the twist that you made earlier starts to get a little bit undone.

 You can always go back at the end after doing all the curling and do some more twisting.

 Every swimmer wants to have super fast turns and wants to execute them with vigorous authority.

 Sometimes, however, this desire creates more problems than it solves.

 The desire to flip quickly with authority can often cause the swimmers to overuse their

 It's okay to use your hands when you are first learning how to flip because the hands

 But once you've learned the move, you need to rely less on your hands and more on your

 Once you've learned how to flip, the key assignment for your hands is that they have to be ready

 Many swimmers, in their desire for speed, try to use their hands way too much.

 Instead of going faster, they end up getting stuck in too tight of a ball and then have

 By the time the push-off occurs, the arms should be ready and they're connected, torpedo-like

 We all know that in a race, you're never faster than when you push off the wall.

 If your hands aren't streamlined at the moment of push, you'll be wasting a lot of power

 So you want to do everything you can to get your hands in position quickly and smoothly.

 First, approach the wall in a proper way, which means keep your head down and keep your

 Press your hands down, palms facing the bottom to help you initiate your rotation, but that's

 Wherever the hands end up after initiating the rotation, that's where they'll stay.

 The hands help you start the turn, but now your abs, your legs, and the momentum created

 Get the hands together before the feet get to the wall, then push off in a streamlined

 When you really want to play with this, don't even press down with your hands.

 Try doing turns without using your hands at all, and learn to use your momentum and the

 The entire point of this drill, or focus, is to create more flow on your flip turns,

 The goal is to eliminate any delay between when your feet are ready to push off and when

 The two things should happen at the same time, and the hands should get into position with

 Think about what the hands are doing in the turn, and get them ready for what they're

 Alright, the first thing we are going to do is pin the zipper onto the bag and we

 with the edge of the fabric with the zipper pull towards the M side and for

 even stitching you want to start with the pole down a few stitches and after

 we stitch you will notice that we will stop, we will leave the needle down and

 Now you do want it even from the end of the zipper to the zipper pull end as

 What we will do is we want to make sure that we change our presser foot.

 the coils and then the needle will go right there next to the teeth or the

 zipper pull we're going to leave our needle down, lift your presser foot up,

 close the zipper, then we all have a nice straight line to continue sewing.

 Make sure that you are staying in control and keeping it close to the

 step if you get out your directions you can read them there as well.

We're going to stop again with the needle down, lift the pressure foot, close

 Our needle, our pressure foot is keeping our needle closed and right in line.

 If you push this button right here that'll keep the needle down when you're

 neat zipper on one side and you will do the exact same thing on the other side.

 this side and then turn your tube of a zipper inside out and sew on the top

 Come on down it's time to begin, time to make a sandwich for two naked men.

 Okay, I mean the only reason why I'm doing this episode is because Howie from Howie Reporting Live thought we were one in the same person.

 We do sound the same on the telephone though, it's kind of weird.

 Our ingredients today are thickly cut ham, about a pound of it.

 We normally would use mortadella on this sandwich, but since the prefix of that is death, we decided to go with something a little bit more pro-positive.

 I know Sicily is in the country of Italy, but they definitely like to keep separate.

 Now, we chose to go with a pureed option, because we don't want the chunks of olive getting stuck in our teeth.

 The olive mix is a blend of Kalamata olives, black and green olives, as well as oil, garlic, and other spices.

 Now, we're gonna pass it over to Taylor so he can apply his meat.

 And if having this much bread is too sinful for you, just go ahead and take your top off.

 It was hot, and I actually had to take the trash out earlier, and I got to experience it myself, and holy crap.

 But after our road trip, and being able to experience the very dry heat,

 But the highlight of today is not the fact that we're working our butts off

 Because Mal has never made chimichangas, but you're making them today.

 If you haven't checked out the YouTube channel, you should do it.

 So we were watching that, Mal got some ideas, and now we're cooking some of those recipes.

 So instead of following a recipe, you can just watch his video.

 The reason I'm asking so many questions is that I've never had a chimichanga before.

 Stephen- But I'm assuming it'll be better once it's, you know, chimichangified.

 Stephen- And then you're gonna toss it in here and fry it, kind of?

 Mal- I'm just gonna toast it, basically, and then we'll stick it in the oven.

 Stephen- We will film the first attempt, even though the other ones will, you know,

 Mal- I'm gonna start by doing one at a time, and then maybe I'll do the rest of them together.

 Stephen- Pretty, well, as good as we could do with what we have avai-

 Stephen- Oh, yeah, you're sour creamed up, so you're good to go.

 As I said before, the recipe will be below, which is actually just a video.

 Tonight, even though we spent a lot of the day recording Resident Evil,

 And then, that means that we'll have everything recorded that we need to record,

 And I gotta get everything done tomorrow, because we leave Tuesday.

 And I'll talk more about the trip, like, on the day that we leave, but...

 But for now, I gotta eat this chimichanga, so I can then jump across buildings and stab people.

 I guess you can't- I don't know if it's possible to tell very much from the first episode,

 I was- I- my voice started to get a little raspy, and it was- it was weird.

 After that, I was good, and I recorded several episodes, but...

 And I guess in the back of my mind, I've always been keeping Mother 1...

 It's like, if I don't play it, it's always there for me to play.

 It- it is a game that I've avoided for- for some time, partially because of that reason.

 Hello everyone, today I'm going to be teaching you how to play Just Like Heaven on piano.

 Now if you do like this lesson, please subscribe to my videos because I make a brand new piano

 Also if you could check out my music myspace, the link will be in the description.

 And if you could go over to my website at derrickpianolessons.tk because all my YouTube

 And if you could please thumbs up and comment on this video, that would help me out a lot.

 So this song is going to start off with just drums, bass, and guitar.

 And you're going to start off by playing an A. Then you're going to go down to a G sharp.

 Then an E. And then a D. Then you're going to go down to a C sharp.

 Then a D. And then an E. And then you're just going to repeat it.

 And then you're going to keep on repeating that part until the intro is over.

 And then it's going to come back here and there for the rest of the song.

 So hopefully we'll be able to see more of the piano for this part.

 Now while the piano solo is going on, the synth part is also going to be playing.

 But I recommend getting the piano solo down before you try playing the parts together.

 So you're going to be starting off in the piano solo by playing an E. And you're going

 And then you're going to go down to an A. Then you're going to play a B twice.

 Then you're going to play A. And then B. Then you're going to go to a C sharp.

 Then A. B. So it's pretty much you're starting off the next part with this part that you

 Okay then for the third part of the solo you're going to go all the way up to the A. And you're

 Okay then you're going to finish off the solo by playing a D. Then a C sharp.

 And now I'm going to play the whole thing so you can hear it again.

 And that is how you play Just Like Heaven by The Cure on piano.

 Please thumbs up and comment on this video and please subscribe to my videos.

 I'm not 100% it's exactly the way the Edge plays it, but I believe it's very close.

 I may make some mistakes, I'm a little cold here, but I'll play it full through so you

 Okay, slight mistake in there, but let's go through it slowly so you have the chorus.

 I like to try to play in position, so pinky on the 5th fret, 1st string.

 So just a D chord and put the pinky there on the 1st string, 3rd fret.

 And you're going to do the same chord as before, right here on the 3rd fret, 2nd string, and

 So we've gone from here, to here, to here, and now here's the transition.

 So we have, I bar these two on the 3rd fret, the bottom two strings.

 I actually bar these two, but it doesn't matter because you're ahead one fret on the 2nd string.

 Today we're doing a kids lunchbox and I tell you now they're going to love you for it because

 we're doing crumbed chicken strips and we're doing an apple coleslaw to go with it.

 So the first thing that we're going to do guys is bread our chicken and I've got our

 breading station happening here and if you've watched me before on Nicko's Kitchen you would

 have seen me do this many times before but basically what we've got three plates.

 We've got one with flour, we've got one with a mixture of egg and milk and the other one

 Now guys I've just got a chicken breast here that I've just cut into a long strip.

 Now if you want to use the chicken tenderloins by all means go ahead.

 What I want you to do first is just roll the chicken in the flour just like that.

 Dust it off and then I want you to roll it into the egg and milk mixture and finally

 Now I'm using Panko Japanese bread crumbs here but if you just want to use ordinary

 And that's all you have to do guys so just keep repeating that process for as many chicken

 I've lined it with baking paper and I'm just going to pop on our chicken strips.

 Now they go into a preheated oven 180 degrees and we're going to pop them in there for 18

 So guys we're going to get started on our apple coleslaw that's going to go with those

 And what I've got here is just one red apple that I've just diced up.

 Next thing I'm going to put in is just some celery that I've sliced up.

 To really give it some color I'm going to put in some red cabbage.

 And I'm also going to add in just a little bit of chopped parsley.

 Now guys I've just got some low fat thousand island dressing that I'm just going to pop

 And just mix those ingredients around and get that dressing all over those ingredients.

 And the good thing about this is it can be prepared the night before.

 You guys take care and I'll see you here next week for Nicko's Baby Food.

 For today's classic recipe, I want the chefs to cook a classic chocolate and raspberry tart.

It has to tick all the boxes of a great dessert, the ultimate pleasure.

 Sifted flour, the soft butter in the centre, along with the sugar.

 Now, we start to bring in the flour, using the fingertips a delicate touch.

 So once you have achieved this kind of a sandy texture, now you take the palm of your hand and you're pushing away.

 And this is not kneading, but it's bringing the dough together.

 I did my apprenticeship at the age of 16, learning how to make beautiful pastries in a shop in Paris.

 Wrapped in cling film so that it doesn't get any crusts and doesn't dry out.

 20 minutes later, the sweet paste should be set and ready to roll.

 So now I'm going to put this in the oven to bake at 180 degrees centigrade.

 They've got to give us some kind of decoration with the chocolate.

Bitter chocolate tart with raspberries and a beautiful, imaginative decoration.

 I really wanted to share this with you ever since I got it a few months ago.

 So these are the two eyeliners that I've been using lately and they're both by Milani which

 It's lasted me a while but I definitely need a new one at this point.

 And the second one that I've been using is the Infinite Liquid Eyeliner and what I like

 about this one is that it says it lasts up to 24 hours and it truly does what it says.

 It's the perfect combination of a liquid liner and a gel liner.

 So I like it because it's super thick and creamy and I actually like putting this on

 It does a really good job at covering whatever glue might still be visible just like a gel

 With this one I actually put it on before I put on my fake lashes.

 It's kind of like as an outline of where this eyeliner is going to go later.

 I don't know if I'm like reading into it way too much but like that's literally what I

 Before that I used my 266 from MAC and I used my Carbon Eyeshadow which is an eyeshadow

 for MAC that's completely matte and black and it just works so well.

 So I'll probably do a tutorial on this in the future but just to give you guys a little

 So I get the black eyeshadow and I just place it on my lash line and kind of wing it out

 Then I put on my lashes and then sometimes your lash glue can even make your eyeliner

 disappear a little bit so then I go over it with my Milani Infinite Liquid Liner.

 And it is the best combination ever because it truly does last all night.

 So if you have problems with an eyeliner that doesn't stick, please try it out.

 I think you guys would really like it and I just wanted to let you know that these are

 my favorite eyeliners that I've been using and I think that I'm just going to keep buying

 I probably should post a tutorial on it so look out for that because that will be up

I love it when people take some of the stuff they've been learning and

So the research you put into trying to figure out this beautiful

But this is great because it's given me an opportunity to let everybody know a

 is really just give you a couple of hints, and I'll play it for you, you can see what's

 going on, and I'll talk through a little bit of it, and then I want everybody to tackle

 it themselves, and maybe tab it out themselves, and submit all this stuff.

Now when he plays this live now, it's in F sharp minor, as Willem noticed.

 He plays it using a small half bar at the second fret because he doesn't pick out the

 are done with a four string bar, two thirds of a bar across a certain fret.

 with an F sharp minor played with a four string bar at the fourth fret, and C sharp on the

 third string, and A on the first string, and then not hitting anything on the second string.

 That leaves your fourth finger available to play the B in the melody.

 step into an F, or technically an E sharp diminished seven chord, with a bar at the

 third fret, and adding the melody note going from G sharp to A, to an A six chord barred

 with E in the bass, all the top four strings just played together, A six with E in the

 the melody goes up to B, just lets go of everything, comes back to the D major seven, hits the

 high A at the fifth fret, and keeps that ringing, Paul doesn't do this, this is how Neil's version

 goes, keeps that A ringing as he goes to an A chord again, with a four string bar at the

And little on and off motion from the thirds on the second and third strings.

 Two, a D seven sus four, but you really want to think of this as a D minor seven sus four,

 so you're going to play it as a D minor seven chord, but add the high G. And the G in the

 melody comes off to an F that you hear late in that measure, to an A chord, with a little

 melody, the melody going from E to D to C sharp, to an E chord, and pinch three notes

 there, the low E in the bass, the B in the melody on the second string, and the G sharp,

 then we have this little ascent in parallel thirds, maybe tenths.

 on the sixth and fifth string, melody notes going up on the third and second.

 with, and gave me an opportunity to turn it into a quick lesson.

 going to get around to doing a full lesson on, not a short, and it's certainly not a

I certainly wish I was one of them, but loved hearing your version of the

 tune, and congratulations on just a great effort and job well done.

 try it now in standard tuning, in pretty much the original key, and a lot the way McCartney

 played it when he called it sing-along junk, because he was pretty much playing the melody,

 Hey guys, it's Paige here with OneHappyVegan.tumblr.com and I'm here today to teach you guys how to

 The first step is to take your raw walnuts and place them in a bowl or a jar or anything

 that you want and cover them with water and soak them for 8 hours or overnight.

 I now have my soaked and drained and rinsed walnuts in the blender.

 Now what I'm going to do is strain this through a nut milk bag.

 What you could do is just not strain this and just have it as a thick milk or you can

 do what I did and I used a reusable produce bag and we're going to see how that works.

 From what I'm seeing right now, this is on the thicker side of a nut milk consistency

 I kind of like it on this kind of consistency so it's just up to your preference.

 If you realize now that it's too thin or thick, then there's not much you can do about

 it other than adding more walnuts or adding more dates or something.

 But if it's too thick, obviously you could just add more water.

 So if someone wants to live with me, I'll make us awesome food and you can do the annoying

 So I'm now going to pour my finished product into a glass jar to store in my refrigerator

 This is a really awesome, simple, versatile recipe that you can make with a regular blender,

 And there's not a bunch of preservatives and ingredients that you're not really sure what

 And it's raw and it's super fresh and filled with deliciousness.

 You're going to take your shirt and fold it in half from the back and then just lay it

 Then with your scissors, just cut across the neckline all the way at the top.

 Make a line that pretty much reaches all the way up to the sleeve.

 And then you're going to just continue cutting along all the way to the bottom in a diagonal

 So you're pretty much making a triangle with halfway through your shirt.

 Take your second strand and put it under and over your first strap.

 You're going to do this all over again up until the very bottom.

 Once you're done, just cut off the last strand and you're going to do a double knot all the

 We're going to just twist the first strand and pull the second strand into that little

 And then with that second strand, we're also going to twist it and pull the third strand

 And we're going to do the same thing for the remaining of the strands.

 Once you're done, you're going to cut off that last piece into two strands.

 And then just make sure you double knot it with the last strand so that it comes all

 For the second shirt, you'll need your muscle tee, some scissors, and some fabric glue.

 You're going to start off by cutting the sleeves if it's not already a muscle tee.

 Then I'm actually going to cut another inch and a half lower on both sides of the shirt.

 Once that's done, I'm going to cut about an inch and a half along the neck area, only

 And then again, also only in the back, I'm going to cut that inch and a half that I wanted

 And then once you have that middle strip, you're going to cut it into three pieces because

 And then you're just going to start braiding as you would with your hair.

 Once you're done braiding, you're going to use your fabric glue to put the three strands

 Then you're just going to press the glue for a few seconds and just let it sit to dry.

 What you're going to do next is cut the neckline into two pieces because those are going to

 And then each of them cut into three pieces because you're now going to also braid these

 And again, once you're done braiding each of the strands, you're going to use your fabric

 And then once again, you're going to use the fabric glue to connect all three braids together.

 Then you're going to take one of the extra fabric pieces that you have.

 If the edges are messy, you can just cut them off to make it a little neater.

 And you're going to wrap this around where the three braids meet so that it doesn't look

 And again, just use some glue to put it all around and just wrap it around nicely.

 And this is going to create a much neater look to your braids in the end.

 Hey Paleo peeps, it's Dan from Primal for Life with a tasty, salserific Paleo wrap.

 We have some baby spinach, which is going to be sauteing up with onions, red onions

 I should add, in some Primal Fat Coconut Ghee from Pure Indian Foods.

 It's delicious, it's really good for you, and has a nice light coconut taste to it.

 You can get it through julianbakery.com slash paleo along with your paleo powder to spice

 this meal up and your paleo wraps, which are gluten free, grain free, there's no soy, there's

 Plus they're made with just organic coconut, just pure awesome stuff.

 No fillers or anything like that, no starches, just quality coconut.

 So we're going to start sauteing the spinach and the red onion in the coconut and then

 I've already pre-cooked some organic bacon, nitrate free of course.

 We are going to season it up with the paleo powder, top this with some fresh organic salsa

 So I've got my pan fired up, I'm going to throw in some coconut ghee in there and start

 Here's a quick shot of our Primal Fat Coconut Ghee, it's nice and soft, it's melting up

 Okay slight change in plans, I decided to take the spinach and onions, set them aside,

 I cooked up my eggs in a little more Primal Fat Coconut Ghee and scrambled them up.

 Now I have my bacon just warming up again so we can plate this in a paleo wrap from

 You can check them out online at julianbakery.com slash paleo or you can visit them in their

 And you can scoop up some paleo wraps, you can get a 7 pack, you can get a 49 pack to

 save you some coin and you can also check out their paleo breads, all terrific stuff,

 So I've got my salsa set aside, I'm going to slice up my avocado and top this with some

 Okay so I'm putting my eggs in my paleo wrap, next I'm going to layer in my veggies.

 We are going to add in some gluten free and MSG free paleo powder for a little extra kick

 and it's also got some nice seasonings, salt, paprika and let's see, throw a little salsa

 And there we have it, got your healthy paleo wraps, yummy organic bacon with some fresh

 farm raised eggs, lots of veggies in there, all good stuff, seasoned just right with some

 paleo powder and make sure you go to julianbakery.com check them out.

 They got a ton of great stuff as I mentioned, got the paleo wraps, paleo bread, paleo powder,

 the primal fat coconut ghee right there to cook with which is very good at resisting

 oxidation, handles higher heats, all good stuff and this is a very low inflammatory

 meal, kept high quality fats, low carb and it will keep you fueled for hours to come.

 So this is Dan from Primal for Life and I hope you enjoy this meal.

 Hey guys, Chef Jason Hill here, and tonight I am preparing an easy roasted chicken recipe.

 I've got one large sprig of tarragon, which is an herb, and it goes great with poultry

 Next all I do is I zest one lemon over the top of the tarragon.

 If you don't have a zester, you can use a cheese grater, but when you're using the zest,

 you want to make sure you don't go too deep into the lemon where you get the white rind

 After you zest your lemon, it's very important, keep your lemon.

 Now you're going to take your chef knife, and we're just going to give this a little

 I'm going to add the tarragon and lemon zest to two-thirds cup of extra virgin olive oil,

 followed by a tablespoon of kosher salt, teaspoon of fresh cracked pepper, and what

 Okay, now remember when I told you about 20 seconds ago, don't throw this away?

 Cut it in half, hold your hand out, catch the seeds, and run the juice into the marinade.

 Now that we've prepared our marinade, it's time to prep the chicken.

 We got to be careful that we don't tear the skin while we do it.

 I just slowly start running my finger up under the skin, about as far as I can go.

 Make sure you wash your hands thoroughly after touching the chicken like this.

 I also like to pull it apart on the thigh a little bit because I'm going to tuck some

 Sometimes it'll tear, but if it does, it's not the end of the world.

 Now I just have some small butter chips I'm going to place underneath the skin, just in

 Now I'm going to pour the marinade over the bird and in and under the skin as best I can.

 I'm going to place this on my grill because it's still summertime and it's hot and I don't

 We're going to close this up and it's going to get to be about 400 degrees Fahrenheit

 After about the first 10 or 15 minutes, I like to open it up, remove the foil, and give

 The spoon, the juices, and the marinade over a couple of times.

 A good way to tell the whole roasted chicken is done is when the skin at the end of the

 You can either stick your thermometer in the thigh or down deep in the breast.

 This is one of the most simplest recipes to try and I hope you like my version of it.

 Hey guys, today I'm going to be showing you how to do this hair and makeup look for a

 I think this would be great for a date night out or even a casual outing with your friends.

 So I'm first going to start by priming my face with this mattifying primer.

 And I used a very tiny amount, so I think next time I'm going to use more than this.

 And then I'm going to take a mix of my BB cream with my foundation that adds more yellow

 And then I'm going to blend it in with my Real Techniques brush.

 Everything that I'm using will be listed below this video in the description box as usual.

 And then I'm going to use my concealer to brighten spots of my face.

 So I like to apply this underneath the eyes, around the center of the forehead, down the

 And this kind of just gives a really nice highlighting effect and it brightens up your

 And for underneath the eyes, sometimes you really just got to go in with your finger

 And then for spot concealing, I'm going to use this concealer and just use my tiny little

 pixel concealer brush and dot around any spots that really stand out and blend it in.

 And then I'm going to take this MSF and blend that into the skin.

 It really looks nice because it doesn't look cakey on and it really does just mimic the

 Now I'm going to take this face powder that's a bit darker than my skin tone and use it

 to just bring some color and life to my face and do some really, really soft and natural

 And then I'm going to take this eyeshadow and then just softly fill in my brows.

 I'm just trying to give my brows some more fullness and a little bit neater of a shape.

 So that's why I'm being really, really soft with my angled brush and then also brushing

 And if you want, you could also take some concealer, especially if you have some left

 over, and just clean up the edges if you feel like it's just sometimes hard to get that

 And then I'm going to take my primer, which is pretty worn out on the label, and I'm just

 going to apply that to my eyes, underneath and above, just to help my makeup last longer

 And now going into my Kat Von D palette, I'm going to take this really rich brown shadow.

 And I'm going to apply that to the outer half of my eye and just slightly wing it out a

 And then I'm going to blend up the edges and kind of go upwards in towards my orbital bone,

 And then I'm going to take this softer shade just to blend out the edges.

 Wiping down that brush, I'm going to go into this shimmery shade.

 And it's a deeper shade just because I was going out that night, so I kind of wanted

 But you can go with a really light colored shimmery shade here, or even a matte shade,

 And now I'm going to go into this matte shade and apply it to my brow bone, just to highlight

 Now I'm going to take this shimmery olive eyeliner and apply it to the outer half of

 And then I'm going to rim the inner half of my lower lash line.

 And then I'm going to take this light shimmery shade and highlight the lower center part

 And I've just been really obsessed with doing this, if you guys couldn't already tell.

 And then I'm going to wipe down that brush and go in with this matte shadow that has

 It's really interesting to use, but I find it pretty easy as well, so I've been enjoying

 And I'm just going to not really do a wing with it, but just let it kind of taper out.

 And then I'm going to curl my lashes and apply some mascara to my top and bottom lashes.

 And then I'm going to take this really light, soft, peachy pink blush and apply that to

 And then I thought I would try out this lipstick shade that you guys recommended, and I really

 But honestly, I was going for something a little bit more nude.

 So a tip is to not condition your hair if you have hard to curl hair or just hair that

 So I'm just using my curling wand and I'm just really randomly kind of twisting sections

 So the front sections of my hair I usually like to twist away from my face.

 I only kind of leave it on there for about 10 to 15 seconds at most.

 Sometimes it'll be going towards my face and sometimes I'll twist the hair away from my

 If there are any large sections that are straight that I miss, I just make sure to grab it and

 And just to give my hair some volume, what I do is twist the top portion of hair towards

 I'm going to flip my bangs over in a minute to where it usually sits.

 But for the other side of my hair, I'm just repeating the same exact thing.

 All right, now let's flip it and see what we have to work with.

 So I actually really like how it looks here, but because it was such a humid day, I decided

 to kind of fluff my hair up some more and give it even more volume since I knew it would

 Let me know what you guys think, and I will see you guys again really soon.

 Today we're going to show you how we do our sesame seared ahi tuna.

 We do this for an appetizer and serve it on a rice crisp with a little wasabi caviar and

 What we do is I start with some nice ahi tuna, real fresh, you want to get like a sushi quality

 tuna, and go ahead and we'll take that and I've just cut it into some nice logs.

 From here, we're going to take a little sesame oil, and then I sprinkle it with a little

 Not too much, you just want to be able to give it a little bit of flavor.

 Now I've also got some mixed sesame seeds, I do some toasted and black sesame seeds,

 And what we're going to do is we're going to take this, and now that it's all nice and

 coated and even, we're going to coat the tuna in the sesame seeds, get a nice coat on all

 of it, and set it off to the side, and we'll do that with the other piece.

 We've got our ahi tuna that we've crusted down in the sesame seeds, and what we're going

 We want to keep it nice and rare, flip the oven, flip your stove on, we're going to run

 I've just used a little canola oil, it's got a real high smoke point, and we want to bring

 this up super hot, we're going to bring it up almost to the smoke point.

 So we're going to let that heat up, and when it gets up to where it's really hot, we're

 Now I've found that the trick to this, the secret if you will, is not to sear it too

 And that way you get all four sides coated, they get a nice sear, but the inside stays

 Alright, now that we've got this nice and hot, we're up to the smoke, we're going to

 Again, we're doing this here, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and we just flip them over,

 and again, 7, 8, 9, 10, 5, 7, 9, 10, and there's the last side, and there we go.

 Now you see we've got a nice crust on there, it browned them up nice, and they're ready

 Now that we've got this all seared, we're going to go back to the board, and what we're

 going to do is we're going to slice it up, nice even little slices.

 Now that we've got this sliced up, we're going to garnish them up and get them ready to serve.

 What I like to use, is get a little wasabi caviar, this is the Tobiko, the flying fish

 bro, and get that in, and then some pickled ginger that I've just fine minced.

 So take that, and we take a little bit, get a little bit on a spoon, and just dab a little

 Now that wasabi, the wasabi caviar has a little bite to it as well, so you get the wasabi

 So do a little bit of the ginger, and we'll finish each one up, and then I like to serve

 That's our seared ahi tuna with the wasabi caviar and pickled ginger.

 This is one of the many hors d'oeuvres that we do here at White Apron Catering.

 We're located at 1710 North Dixie Highway in Lake Worth, and the phone number is 561-585-2985.

 Before changing the engine oil in your tractor, allow the engine to run idle for a few minutes,

 It's easier to perform service operations on the engine if the hood is removed completely.

 The oil drain valve is located on the right-hand side of the engine.

 Open the valve by pushing it in, then turning it anti-clockwise and then pulling it outwards.

 Close the valve by pushing it in and then turning it clockwise.

 Always remember that old engine oil is an ecological hazard and should be disposed of

 We strongly recommend that you use our own oil, which has been developed for the engine.

 Check the condition of the air filter each time you fill your petrol tank.

 It's usually enough just to blow it clean, but if it's very dirty it should be replaced.

 Always ensure that the threads on the plug are properly located in the cylinder head threads.

 Screw the plug in as far as possible by hand, then finish tightening with a box spanner.

 After 25 working hours, both front wheels should be lubricated with grease through the grease nipples.

 If you're not using your tractor for a longer period of time, ensure that it's fully charged

 When ordering spare parts for your tractor, make sure you give us the reference information

 stamped on the model identification plate, normally found under the seat.

 So, when we want to swap out the components in our Macbook Pro, the first thing we need

 to do is flip it upside down and unscrew these 10 screws on the case.

 So you're going to need a very tiny but pretty good screwdriver for this.

 So you just start at any place you'd like and unscrew the screws.

 Now I have a little piece of painters tape over here that I stick the screws to so that

 I'll just set that to the side and now you can see all the parts inside the computer.

 So here's the battery, here's the hard drive, here's the DVD drive, and here's the memory.

 So before we can take it out, there's a little bracket here that holds it down so I'll unscrew

 Now to put the new SSD drive in, you just want to line up the two slots on the card

 So if you look here, there's two 2GB chips of memory so I'll pop these two pins on either

 And I have a package of two 8GB chips so instead of having 4GB of RAM, we're going to have

 It's about two thirds of the way over so you can only put it in the right way.

 If you had it flipped over the wrong way, the slot wouldn't line up and you couldn't

 Now you want to remove the DVD drive and there's three straps that you need to unhook.

 And you just kind of tilt them back and then there are six screws.

 Three of them go with a regular screwdriver and then the other three use a hex screw to

 And then you would put the new caddy back in place with the hard drive in it and screw

 Hey guys, so in this video you're going to be learning how to create the perfect white

 This is a really elegant design that can be dressed up or dressed down and it's really

 You need a nude pink color and a white color just to create the French tips.

 So if you guys see on my hand I have a bit of a henna on my hands going all the way down.

 I have this design up on Facebook actually, a picture of it up on Facebook.

 I'll put a picture at the end of this video also of the henna design.

 Every time I get a break from school I try to pick something I enjoy doing and then focus

 So I've been trying to do henna and I came up with two designs.

 They're not that great because I'm just starting out but if you guys are interested, because

 a lot of people ask me how I do the designs, so if you guys are interested I can try to

 make some tutorials and show you guys how I do these designs so you guys can try them

 But for right now this tutorial is all about these white French tips.

 So if you guys want to try to do these at home and save yourselves $20-$25 that it takes

 to do them at the salon, keep watching and I hope you guys enjoy.

 Okay guys, so the first thing you're going to do is start off with your bare nails.

 So I have nothing, absolutely nothing on any of my nails right now.

 So if you have a nice natural pink base to your nails, then you can skip this part.

 But I don't, so I'm going to use this nail polish from Nalene's French Tip Manicure Set.

 And it's just like the pink shade that it comes with and it also comes with a top coat,

 So I'm just going to use this and I'm going to apply one coat of this to all of my nails.

 Alright, now that we have that one coat of that nude pink colour on our nails, we're

 So I'm going to be using Sally Hansen's Hard As Nails Extreme Wear in White On.

 And we're going to use this to create the white tips on the end of our nails.

 So the way we're going to create the tips is we're going to follow the smile line of

 If you can see it, I'm not sure if you can really see it, but you're just going to follow

 the natural smile line of your nails and that's the way to make the best French tips to suit

 So you're just going to take a little bit on your brush, like this, and you're just

 going to start to follow the smile line of your nails to create that white French tip.

 Try to make it as neat as possible, but if it's not too neat, that's okay because if

 And you're going to go over it a second time anyways, so that'll help in making it neat.

 So we're going to let this dry and then we're going to apply a second coat.

 Alright, so while I was waiting for my thumbnail to dry from the first coat, I went over every

 other nail in one coat as well and I also did one coat on the other hand.

 Now the last step that you have left to do is just to go over the tips in one more coat

It's the combination of the Build Team, Grimlock, Wedge, Hightower

I find it's easier to start from Vehicle Mode to do all the transformation.

Again, it says to flip one of these down as a foot but again, I just leave that

 those are joined together, set them off to the side for a moment.

We open up these pieces right here and flip his head back and around to the back like this.

It's kind of like he's standing in robot mode with his arms folded up and forward.

 Then flip this bottom piece up and do the same over here like that.

Then we're going to take this and snap this piece right into the tabs like this.

We're going to split the treads again and pull them up forward and leave them

We're going to see a little circle with some triangular tabs on it.

 to open this up and flip out the head there and close the chest piece up.

 going to do is it kind of goes in sideways to get the tabs in and then twists up to lock.

There's a little tab here on Grimlock that's going to plug into the

There you have the combined form of Landfill or Build King if you're

The dump truck is kind of a claw weapon or a shield that you can

 neat things that's kind of ingenious, like I was showing you earlier, if you take Wedge off... I'm

 probably not going to go through the whole process, but you can see how these are all the same all

You can actually transform them down, bring him down as a leg like this.

 there's two... I'm not going to do the whole thing, but two legs.

 And with those extra joints you saw on the legs earlier on his review, form arms for Build King

So all of them can be either leg or the arm units, which is pretty cool.

 Hi, I'm Katherine, and today we're making tomatoes stuffed with French lentils, a delicious

 Once we hollow out these tomatoes, they'll make the perfect vessel for our lentil salad

 The ingredients we'll use are 4 large tomatoes, 1 cup of dried French lentils, 2 bay leaves,

 1 tablespoon of balsamic vinegar, 1 tablespoon of mustard, 2 tablespoons of lemon juice,

 1 garlic clove, a pinch of crushed red pepper, a pinch of salt, 1 stalk of celery, 1 small

 Use 2 cups of water to cook the lentils For equipment, I'll use a small saucepan,

 a small bowl, a knife and cutting board, a paring knife, a wooden spoon, a small spoon

 First let's prepare the tomatoes Using a paring knife, cut off the tops of

 the tomatoes, and then use a small spoon or a melon baller to scoop out the insides

 Be sure to leave a thick enough shell in the tomatoes to hold the lentils

 Place the tomatoes upside down on a paper towel and let them drain for about 30 minutes

 Mince the onion, then rinse the lentils and sort out any debris

 We're using French lentils in our salad because they're smaller and firmer and less likely

 source of fiber and protein Bring 2 cups of water to a boil, then add the

 lentils, bay leaves, and onions Return it to a boil, then cover, lower the

 heat, and simmer on low for about 20 minutes Dice the bell pepper and celery and mince

 In a small bowl, whisk the garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, mustard, and crushed red pepper

 together, and then sprinkle in a little bit of salt and pepper to taste

 Once the lentils are finished cooking, drain off any excess cooking liquid there may be

 and remove the bay leaf Pour our dressing over the lentils and stir

 in the celery and red bell pepper Now divide the lentil mixture evenly among

 it as a snack with some baked tortilla chips I hope you enjoy these tomatoes stuffed with

 French lentils One tomato only has 1 gram of fat and a whopping

 This morning I'm going to show you how to make puttu, Kerala puttu.

 water little by little, not all of us all together, just little by little till

 have this type of a steamer you can use it the normal steamer to steam the rice

Or you can have it spicy like the Kerala people would like to have it with channa or

 Okay, we've crushed the grapes, they're now fermenting in the barrel.

 We ground the grapes on Friday, and so now they are starting to cook.

 You can hear the boiling as the sugars ferment, and you can see the cap has been coming up.

 That's the action of the boiling, and it's pulling the moisture out of the grapes,

 We just push this down now, and you can see there's lots of fermenting going on.

 All we're doing here is just making sure that the grapes stay nice and wet.

 That should do them for about another 12 hours, and I'll come back and do this tonight.

 Okay, the grapes have stopped boiling, so now it's sitting quietly.

 and you're going to see we spill it over the top to keep the grapes nice and damp on the top,

 and then we let it settle, and we get ready to pull the wine off.

 Okay, this will be all done, so the next step is, is we've got a really big job to do now.

 We're going to pull the wine off, and then put it in Damijohn's,

 We need a total of five pieces in order to build this headboard.

 We can cut these out of a single 2x4, which length would be at least 82 inches.

 For aesthetics, I want the fence picket board to overhang the 2x4 by 6 inches.

 They're inch and a half drywall screws to hold the fence picket boards to the 2x4s.

 Again, for aesthetics, I want a half inch space in between my fence picket boards.

 I used two 3 inch deck screws to attach the headboard to the platform bed's frame.

 If you enjoyed this video as much as I did making this simple headboard, please subscribe,

 Then, in a second pot, here, we put the marinade with all the vegetables inside.

 and saw the Three Generations show, known Ted for a long, long time, a great photographer.

 He's going to show a small demonstration of his wet plate process, which I thought would

 So it's a process that was developed in probably the 1860s, right around there, and this is

 a piece of aluminum, or tin that they use, it's black enamel that's on it.

 do, I mix all the collodion by hand, all by the old recipes from photographers back in

And one trick is, it's just getting a nice even coat onto the platinum, and you

And you just pour it in one corner, and you probably get some runoff, just run

 you just pour it right back in, and then you tilt it back and forth so you don't get all

 it's kind of like a very sticky, stickiness, and it has the light sensitive material in

 nitrogen, or the silver nitrate, is all collecting onto the surface of that, with an even coat,

And it's still dripping when you, you'll see lines of drips going from my dark

 you only have about four to five minutes to actually work with it.

 spot because you only have like a seven or eight minute window from when you coat it

 and get into the camera and then you actually expose it and process it.

Now after three and a half minutes in the silver, I pull it out nice and evenly,

And now I have about six or seven minutes to actually shoot onto it and then

 I'm just going to set this down right here for a minute and double check to make sure we're still on focus.

And then I have a dark slide on here, so I'm just going to, this is pretty much my shutter right now.

 Now I'll put the dark slide back in, at the same time holding the shutter.

So now we're going to go into the dark room and power the sugar developer

 start getting like silver crystals, almost looking like snowflakes.

 the developer over the top, nice and even, very similar to putting the coating on.

You put it in there for about seven to 10 seconds and then wash it off.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make candy vanilla lip gloss, inspired by our Katiba

 So this is a really easy, fun idea that you could do for birthday parties or with your

 Step one, we're going to mix together half a tablespoon of vegetable shortening, one

 And I chose the raw agave because it's sweeter than sugar, but it actually has a lower glycemic

 Mix them together in a bowl, and you want to make sure that it's whipped really nice

 In another bowl, we're going to mix together a half a tablespoon of hot water.

 I just put mine in a mug, put it in the microwave for 30 seconds to a minute, got it hot.

 We could have used Kool-Aid, but I chose crystal light with antioxidants so that there was

 Natural vanilla extract is also an antioxidant that helps fight free radicals, and it tastes

 For the moms, you can add a quarter tablespoon of cinnamon extract, which will naturally

 It makes the blood vessels swell and creates a beautiful plumping effect naturally.

 You could use pink, crystal light, red, whatever color you want to do.

 We take one spoonful of our color and flavor into our base mixture and do one at a time

 I'm going to add just a little more to deepen the effect and the sweetness.

 I'm going to blend it really good and whip it really good so that all of it works together.

 And one last thing, if you want to add some sprinkles to it, you can get this at the store.

 Just add it to the mixture, stir it all together, and then you can go to your local craft store

 and get a little paint pot, and if you want, get a little jewel for some bling, and glue it on.

 And it's just something unique that tastes yummy and feels good.

 Hey guys, it's Ben from Ben's Home Brew and it's about 7 o'clock in the morning and today

 And what I'm going to try to do today is I'm going to try to make this as painless and

 as simple as possible because all-grain brewing can be extremely simple or it can be as complex

 So I'll probably be doing a little bit more handheld with the camera.

 Okay, as you can see I have my temperature, my strike water temperature up to where I

 The CPVC manifold is actually from my 48 rectangular, 48 quart rectangular cooler.

 Since my water is up to temperature right now, I am going to add some of this stuff

 What it does is it automatically dials in your mash pH to 5.2 which is the optimal pH

 for mashing to get the most out of your starches and converting them into sugar.

 I'm going to stir this up and we're going to start stirring in the grains and getting

 I actually have my system dialed in so that I can just heat it up to the temperature that

 And then I open up my ball valve here and I just start letting the water come in like

 And once I get some water in there, I'll start to add some of the grains and it will start

 One other thing about the 5.2 pH stabilizer is that it's kind of the cheating method.

 You know, it just automatically dials in your system for you which is nice.

 If you know what your water's pH is and what kind of minerals and everything, the hardness

 of your water, you can figure out what your mash pH is going to be.

 I'm going to fill this up and start adding some grain and going in.

 Ok, I'm doed in and I don't know if you can see this but I'm hitting right about 152,

 Speaking about the beer, the one thing that I also wanted to mention was whenever you

 do your strike water, what I do is I will use 1 1⁄4 quarts per pound of grain.

 So today I was using about 7 1⁄2 gallons of strike water for 27 pounds of grain.

 I'm doing an all grain batch for a charity event for the brewer at the zoo.

 I'm going to have some coffee and I'm going to start getting this Vorlof going and then

 When you're Vorlofing, which basically just means recycling the actual liquid inside of

 I placed a piece of aluminum foil in there so that I can not disturb the grain bed whenever

 One other thing that I forgot to mention whenever you're actually sparging or whenever you're

 actually mashing in is that you want to make sure that you stir up your grain really well

 I'm probably going to take about another 15 minutes to Vorlof this.

 Traditionally, a lot of people will mash for about 60 minutes and then they'll start sparging.

 I think that the majority of your conversion is going to happen within the first 15 to

 With the mash time of mashing in around 15 minutes and Vorlof at 15 minutes, that will

 give me about 30 minutes total time which I think is plenty for conversion.

 All right, I'm going to let this Vorlof and I'm going to get my sparge water ready.

 Okay, I got my sparge temperature up to about 180, 185, something like that.

 I have some heat shields right here, just some standard plywood so I don't melt my actual

 Once I start sparging, it's going to come up around over here and into my kettle over

 I'm going to use my little plate chiller right here to hold in my tube.

 This video is going to be a tutorial on a highly requested hairstyle that I wore recently.

 And as you guys know or you guys have followed me, I stretched for 6 months and during that

 time it's very vital for me to find something or you know, a hairstyle where I can retain

 You know, keeping my ends off my shoulders and off my clothing so it doesn't break.

 And I love this style, it's really quick, it's really easy and it's protective.

 Ok Youtubers, so I am back and I have let my hair down, my hair is officially down.

 And I'm going to go ahead, no seriously, I'm going to go ahead and part my hair with

 And right now my hair is, you know, middle part and how I'm going to do the swoop bang,

 I'm going to start it, I'm going to part my hair on this side, on this side, like a side

 And trust me, my side part is not going to be perfect and that's fine with me, it doesn't

 So now I have my side and I'm going to go ahead and kind of make like half of a rectangle.

 Ok, so it kind of looks like that, like a square like part but what I'm going to do

 Maybe I should do more hair tutorials, I don't really do them a lot but maybe I should start

 So I'm putting it behind my ear and now I'm stretching it a little bit, opening up to

 Ok, so now, like I said, I made my side part and I just wrapped it around my ear, I pulled

 it down a little bit to make it almost like a bang, like a fake bang, like a fake fringe.

 And the hair that's right here, I'm just going to pin that away for now.

 Ok guys, so now I'm just going to go ahead and put my hair in a high ponytail.

 And what I do is I fan my hair out, just a little bit, so it's like all the sides are

 So now all I'm going to do is take my hair, the hair that I fanned out, and wrap it around

 It's really messy, you can have it however you want, how neat, how messy you want it.

 And then going back to my bang, my fake fringe, I'm going to go ahead and take the hair and

 Kind of like how I had it earlier in the beginning of the video.

 And before I use like ribbon, you can use ribbon or you can use like a really cute headband,

 And just take your scarf and wrap it around this area, this part.

 And then, since this side is a little puffy, I want it to be a little bit more sleek, smooth.

 If you want to go over your eyebrow you can, but I just like to have it like right there.

 And then last, I smooth my edges down and have a water bottle, like a spritz water bottle.

 So, I put my hair in a high ponytail, band my hair out, I pin it going around, wrap my hair around, pin it around.

 Made my swoop bang in the beginning and tied it up with a headband or a headscarf.

 So, I've been retaining a lot of length by doing this hairstyle.

 And I've been wearing it like this for a couple of days now, straight.

 And if you guys are afraid of like breakage by wearing your hair in one position, you can wear it really high, super high, or wear it low or in the middle, it's totally up to you.

 They're actually in a leopard, not really an adder, but they have got extreme venom.

The head's going to be there, the tail's going to be in front of the head

 I did as a rough guide to where the backbone's going to be, I draw both sides.

 I'm doing rows like this, from the backbone, both sides are rows of scales.

 side, that wide, then they sort of disappear around the corner, and they pop out this corner

Same here, notice they come together here, they converge, become very, very small,

 because this is an animal which hides in amongst leaves, so lots and lots of leaves, and the

 shadows of the leaf falling down on the snake's body will also help give the snake the shape,

 this is a three-dimensional object, and shadows really help here.

 outer part of the coil, the scales are spaced out, and you often see a bit of skin between the scales

 sketch that I did, but if you're doing a snake, of any sort of snake, you might want to look at a

 photograph here, but there are sort of fairly stock standard places that the scales tend to

 fall, and this would probably not be a hundred percent accurate drawing, because I'm sort of

 You've got to sort of have your hand hovering over the drawing a bit, or you can put a piece of paper

 down if you want to rest your hand, but I just didn't have my arm up.

I'm darkening in stripes, and these will go and follow the shape of the body.

And here we have what is looking like a fairly respectable Death Adder,

 waiting in some leaves, wriggling its tail, waiting for its lunch to come.

 some twigs, little rocks, pebbles, shading in under the snake, making it anchor down to the

 for advanced drawers, those who already draw, that might pick up a few hints here on how to draw a

You can try and draw this one if you want, or if you want to make up a snake, I'll hopefully

 But there you have it, the gorgeous beautiful Death Adder, and here's my portrait of it.

 Hey everyone, welcome back to basics tricks again and I am doing another song lesson which

 is on O Jaane Jaane and this is from the movie Pyar Ke Toh Darna Kea.

 So you just heard me play that riff and that chord behind the riff.

 Actually this song was requested by Aman and here is the tutorial.

 A minor, then we have E minor, then we have G major, then we have F or F.

 Then we have C and D in the middle but this is for the main part where the riff comes.

 Alright so this is nothing but down up mute down up mute down down up mute down up mute.

 Alright so what this mute is basically I am using my palm to rest on the string so

 This is nothing but down down up down down up down down up down down up down down up

 Now we will also look at the riff over here which is played from here and it is you know

 The first chord is the A minor which you can also play from here.

 Alright so it is pretty obvious that the riff starts from the A in the key of A so.

 Let me make it a very slow version of this and I am going to also explain you how to

 If you are not able to play the whole note you can play it just like this ok.

 So this was the note for the riff intro riff and this is pretty much all in the tutorial.

 If you get any troubles with the song or if you get any question you can always ask me

 I will be here to help you all and thank you very much for watching this is basic strings

 That's gonna be our little design there hold up do is mark it up and cut it out now.

 All right, we got it all blowed off let's see if we can see how it's gonna fit up in here

 What we got to see now about is the carpet if it's gonna go around it

 We're not gonna put it on yet, but we're gonna make sure that it will go around all the edges here

 Right for the next step is going to be sliding this back up into place and I'm gonna mark get up in there and

 Put my hand underneath there, you know and mark on the outside of this and the backside of this for our hatch here

 Solid against and we're gonna mark it on the outside of this and the back of this

 Here it is all marked up best I could do is reach up underneath there

 You know and get it and then come out here and put a straight edge on it mark it up

 We want the front hatch running all the way to the very front here and we'll put a little

 Let's take a few more measurements before we cut because you know plywood is expensive

 We are in there cutting out a piece that will go right here now

 That will be for the support for this this back hatch I want to put in

 It's already on the bandsaw cutting now when that gets on there

 We're gonna go ahead and drill it out and rivet it and stick it on

 Okay, I built this bench this past winter and I put two leg vices, one on either end

 And this leg vice has the traditional pin on the bottom so when you're closing it,

 But you're limited to the dimension you can clamp without moving that pin.

 It's very easy to take it all the way off and have it out of the way though.

 This left vice, I have a chain mechanism on it so it stays parallel throughout and as

 you see there are no holes in the bottom beam for any pins whatsoever.

 And because it's adjusted so that the top closes first, I can clamp one of these.

 With any other vice, you'd have to be moving that pin all the time to do that.

 been growing in popularity since the mid-2000s, and people have found that

 orients all the edges and also solves two edges on the bottom, preferably in

The next thing you do is you solve two blocks here and here, then

 you have your last layer, oh and when you're solving your blocks you only turn

 your last layer, all your edges are still oriented, so you have far fewer last

 which confuses some people, but I will hope to clarify it so you understand how

So the idea is that we have blue on top all the time and green on

 So we can see this piece here is in its correct position and it is flipped the

 If we use only side turns, not URD, to put it into its correct place, it's in

So we make a mental note that it's bad and we find another one at

 it's between the correct centers but not flipped the correct way, so this one's

 makes all bad edges in the top or bottom turn good and all good edges will turn

 So if we do a very short sequence, we turn the top first, then this one turns

You can replace it with the other bad edge and then this bad edge, as when

 see if they're bad or good, so the way Azizi Solver identifies them is by

 looking at them and applying some simple rules to determine whether they're bad

So there are four rules total to determine whether an edge is bad or good.

 The first rule is that we ignore all stickers which are blue or green.

 So when taking into account whether, for instance, this edge is bad, we ignore the

 sticker on it which is blue and also we don't look at the center which is next

 colors to be similar if they are either the same or if their centers are on

 For instance, orange and red are similar colors because orange and red are on

The third rule says that if we see an edge sticker and a center sticker

 sticker on the same face which are similar, for instance these two, then we

 there is an edge adjacent to a center and a sticker on the edge which is

 not adjacent to the center is similar to the center, so these two colors are

 this center and this sticker not adjacent to the center is not similar.

 sticker which is not next to the center is similar to the center, so it's bad.

 Now this is definitely a project that you want to do outside because if you go dragging

 this critter in your house you're probably going to end up divorced.

 Now what we want to do with our groundhog here, we're going to be using Outdoor Edge's

 Flip and Blaze and we want to make some basic incisions in the hide.

 What we're going to do is just cut straight down the spine from the base of the head down

 to the tail, then we're going to cut right around the circumference of the groundhog

 and basically what we're going to do is we're going to grab a hold of that hide and we're

 going to pull that back just like pulling a shirt over your head.

 Then when we get down to the legs and we get right down to the wrist there, we'll take

 the game shears from the game processor set and we'll cut those legs off.

 The first thing we want to do is just, we'll take the drop point skinner here and we're

 going to make an incision right in the center of the back of our groundhog.

 Alright, now we've taken our groundhog out of the refrigerator.

 We've been soaking it in salt water for about three days now and he is a fat bugger.

 We're going to take our time, trim all this fat off the outside and then we'll be ready

 Alright, now that we've applied our garlic pepper rub, we're going to use one can of

 Trust me, I know this seems a little bit odd, but this is going to make a dish that you

 Now I've already drained all the juice off of my sauerkraut, so I'm just going to put

 Now to give it a good smoked flavor, we're going to take some sliced bacon and put it

 Alright, now we've topped it off with our pineapple slices and don't be turning your

 That is a tasty looking dish and I don't care who you are, that looks good.

 We can actually take this dish and put it right into our LOH can cooker and we can slow

 But what we're going to do is we're going to cover this with foil now.

 We're going to take it out and put it in the Bradley smoker and we're going to put

 a couple holes in the top of the foil just to make sure we let that good hickory smoked

 flavor penetrate into this groundhog and about five hours at 280 degrees, it'll be falling

 Now that is delicious and don't be turning your nose up to me until you've tried groundhog

 in itself so there's really no way that I can describe it to you.

 It's pretty much just like a really dark smoky... it looks like a gray.

 packing that onto an eyeshadow brush and applying that right onto my eyelid.

 This ensures that I get the most color payoff and it also reduces fallout.

 I'm going to take a 217 blending brush and blend out that shadow into my crease.

 It's going to look a little messy because I extended it out past my crease there.

 But that's something that I like to do when I want a little added drama.

 I'm using a black kohl liner of choice and I usually prefer kohl

 simply because it looks a little bit more smudgier and smokier.

You are more than welcome to use Smolder if you don't have Feline.

 But I'm going to take that color and this is going along my top lash line

 This right here is Inglot's number 464 eyeshadow but she is broken

 Instead I'm going to take a tapered and fluffy blending brush such as the MAC 224

 I'm going to now take Inglot's number 30 eyeshadow which is a gorgeous highlight color

 for pretty much all complexions and apply very little just in the highest peak of my brow bone.

 I'm going to be applying that color along the high points of my cheekbones

 And don't forget to value your worth because if you don't, someone else will determine it for you.

 Okay, so you put the rubber band on your left index finger and thumb

 You have that kind of shape then you twist and you put it on your pinky you have

 A triangle with circles around each finger that's holding the rubber band

 In your left hands pinky thumb hole under from under and you pull the one that's underneath you you have one awesome star

 You take two fingers of your right hand index and middle finger

 And you put them like this not like this like this and then you pull

 Then you twist and put your right hand index finger in your left hand thumb hole and your

 Under right here you pull it down with your right hand thumb and like pull

 Those two fingers out you then after that you leave your thumb you have two stars

 You put your index finger in the thumb in your left hand thumb and you put your middle finger in the pinky and

 You go in the triangle and you pull you let go of your index finger

 And you put it where the middle fingers you kind of flip it over and

 You grow up you pull the one that's like right above you after that you twist

 you put the middle finger on the pinky and the index finger on the thumb in the thumb hole and

 You find the triangle pull it down with your thumb take take it out and

 Leave your thumb you have the triple star you might not see all the stars, but they're there I assure you

 That was eight one two three four five six seven four teaching you how to do the triple star

 This is Mary who has been at Goblin Inn for quite a few years and she's our chef, mother,

 look after lady, whatever you can think of and today we're going to do brown, she's going

 When I clean the fish and I season the fish with my seasoning and I'm going to put two

 pegs of garlic in the pot, put the oil and I'm also going to put a piece of pepper in

 No bland food for Jamaicans, it must have taste and flavor right from the beginning.

 Mary's going to fry this fish, it's called parrot fish because they come in all these

 beautiful colors like parrots do and like she told you before, she seasoned and left

 Now she's using a paper towel to dry the fish out before she puts it in a hot oil.

 When one side is brown, I'm going to turn it over on the other side until it has a golden

 I just turned it over on the other side, as you can see it's catching the color there.

 I'm going to put my scallion, tomato, thyme and sweet pepper in the pot and saute it.

 I put the fish in touch by garnishing it with a tomato rose and scallion flowers.

 So today I'm at the Warren Tricombe Salon here in West Hollywood and I'm going to get

 my hair done by Jennifer and she's going to tell you what she's going to do.

 I'm going to do this kind of crossbreed between the Miley Cyrus rolls and then the things

 that you saw back on Gwen Stefani and the Spice Girls and we're going to do a little

 All you're really going to need is a comb, a brush, bobby pins, maybe a rubber band to

 Now on the top there is something called the round of the head.

 We are going to go make a part separating the top from the bottom at the round of the

 All I'm doing is separating it, pinning the top and I'm going to pin the bottom.

 I've braided the bottom of her hair just to kind of clip it out of the way so it doesn't

 Now all I'm going to do is brush all the hair to one side of this little square.

 Here I'm going to twist either forwards or backwards and I'm going to start swirling

 Once I've made a complete stop all the way around, I'm going to pin in place.

 I'm going to encourage that some of these little pieces stick out a little bit.

 I'm just going to add a little bit more texture because I want it to be fun.

 Now at this hair with my flat brush, I'm going to brush everything up to meet me in this

 Now I don't mind that there's parts, but I'm only going to leave one part on the other

 Now that we're in place, we're going to twist and start to get up here.

 Now that I've made it full turn, a complete stop, I'm going to secure it in place with

 I'm going to add any bobby pins that feel a little like, feel like the bun's not so

 I like to incorporate little frillies and frizzies and things around the face.

 You can just use a harder hold hairspray and slick them into place.

 And she's going to help me show you today how we use sock buns and how

 simple they are to make and an accessory that she made to go along with them.

 So you just take an old sock, one that maybe has a hole in it already or is

 missing its pair, and you snip off the end at the toes and then you roll it

 and just slip that over top and then gather the hair around and secure that

 So now it looks like Granola Girl's got a lot of hair and a huge bun.

 just to kind of secure up those stray pieces and just make it kind of look a

 Hi, I'm Kevin from Zoot and I'm here at exercise today to explain how to put a wetsuit on correctly

 to make sure it fits you well and it enables you to swim correctly in the open water swims

 First you turn the top down, so exposing the holes for the legs, so you can put your legs

 in and reach inside to pull it up or pinch it from the outside.

 Keeping in mind that fingernails are the biggest enemy of wetsuits, so the more you can pull

 from the inside, the better to get it up and also from the outside you pinch it between

 your finger and thumb, never using your fingernails to wrench it up.

 If you're having trouble putting your legs on, you can wear a pair of socks or put plastic

 bags over your feet and wetsuits for swimming are designed so the bottom part of the leg

 is well above the ankle bone, allowing access, easily putting it on and taking it off.

 So it's critical to start with the bottom of the leg well above the ankle bone, ensuring

 that the rubber goes all the way up over the hips and therefore the shoulders later for

 Once you've got the bottom of the legs on, it's then a matter of working your way up,

 pinching the bottom all the way up or putting your hands on the inside and pulling it up,

 Once Damien's got the crotch all the way up, he can then pull it up over his hips and

 So make sure your crotch is all the way up and you can see the bottom of the leg is well

 So once you've got the over your hips, we put one arm in and repeat the process.

 The bottom part of the wetsuit arm sits well above the wrist bone, again allowing more

 and more rubber to be up closer to the shoulders where you need the flexibility and you can

 see Damien is pinching the wetsuit between his finger and his thumb or putting his hand

 down the inside to pull it up, never, never using his fingernails to pull it up.

 One arm's in, other arm goes in, starting with the bottom of the arm well above the

 wrist bone and then moving the rubber all the way up to his shoulders.

 So he's got a few little creases there, so it's just a matter of pinching the rubber

 up above the crease and pulling it up and moving it out of the way.

 Once you've got the arms on, turn them around to do the zip up, make sure all their inner

 garments are well placed, the flap is exposed and shoulders back and the zip goes up very

 We then lock the Velcro in place and it's time to check the overall fit of the suit.

 So start with the crotch, make sure that's all the way up and then arms up into the air

 and it's critical to make sure that the rubber is right up against the armpits here.

 If it's not all the way up, we need to move the arms all the way down, starting at the

 edge and pinching it all the way along, ensuring that the rubber gets right up against the

 It leaves no air pocket for water to get into and puts all the rubber up on the shoulder,

 When you're putting the suit on, you're pulling it from the front, so you tend to end up with

 a lot of looser rubber here and we need all the rubber up on the shoulders, allowing more

 So get someone to help you and pull the rubber up, just like that, working it all the way

 up and it then puts more rubber up here and takes the looseners out here and you can see

 it's nice and firm here, no air pockets, no water getting in and it's a great fit on Damien

Today I wanted to show you how to make anko, sweet red bean paste from scratch.

 I received so many requests for this recipe, so I'm finally making this tutorial.

I really hope you enjoy this video and I hope you can try it out.

Simmer on medium for about an hour, removing the foam and adding enough water to cover the beans if necessary.

 Remove the foam and add enough water to cover the beans if necessary.

 Cook until the beans become soft enough to break by pressing with your fingers.

 It is bit soggy when it's hot but it hardens when it becomes cold so don't worry.

 with the large swallowtail stamp, and I just love how you can put it going off to the side

 just starting with a base of Whisper White, and I have run the front half through the

 I'm going to take my swallowtail stamp and ink it up with Early Espresso.

 angle it on my piece of paper here, press it down good because it is a large stamp,

 I want to make sure it all gets on the bottom, and there is my beautiful image with all of

So we're taking the really large size, putting that on the head,

 and then you'll see it just continues down with three of the sizes from the regular rhinestones.

 more exclusive videos, please visit my website, stampingonthebackporch.com, and opt into the

 Hey YouTubers, I am starting to create a series of videos on crochet techniques.

 I got the inspiration from one of the YouTube members that I follow, Mikey's Mail.

 And I've been doing crochet for several years and so I thought that I would use this medium

 This little tutorial is going to be about how to create the waffle stitch.

 This one is one of my favorite stitches because it really gives a lot of texture to a piece

 So basically all I started off with was a regular row of double crochets and the base

 row is just plain regular double crochets so there's not some special about them.

 It's once we start on the second row where you have to do some special stitches to get

 So what we're going to do is here on the second row, first we're going to go ahead

 What we're going to do to create the waffle stitch is a combination of regular double

 So this first one, our chain up, is going to count as the regular double crochet.

 When I say regular I mean that it goes into the stitch, the two strands of yarn that create

 So we've gone up and so now we're going to do two front post double crochets in the next

 So what we'll do is we'll go ahead and yarn over, put the hook around the whole post of

 the stitch below, grab the yarn, pull it around the back side of the post so you've got your

 three loops on your hook and now we're just going to finish like it's a regular double

 So we'll yarn over, grab it, pull through two loops and I dropped it.

 Yarn over, go around the post, grab it, pull it forward, yarn over, pull through two loops,

 then yarn over and pull through the last two loops and so we've got a front post double

 We're going to go ahead and yarn over, go around the whole post, the next post, grab

 the yarn, bring it around so you've got your three loops on the hook, grab the yarn, pull

 it through the first two, then grab the yarn and pull it through the last two on the hook.

 So we're going to go into this stitch like a normal double crochet.

 So yarn over and we're going to go into that stitch just like a normal.

 Now we're going to go ahead and do two more front post double crochets.

 I prefer one and two, combinations of one and two because you'll see a little bit later

 So we're going to go ahead and do two more front post double crochets.

 So we'll yarn over, go around the entire post, grab the yarn, pull it up, finish off

 like a regular double crochet, pull through two, pull through two.

 So we'll yarn over, go around the entire post, pull up the yarn, pull through two and pull

 And now we're going to go ahead and do one regular double crochet in the next stitch.

 So yarn over, go through the top of the stitch just like normal, grab the yarn, pull it up,

 And then we're going to do the front post double crochet twice again and then go back

 For a regular afghan you'll probably want to do like 150 to 180 stitches long.

 And then you'll do the same thing, you'll just keep repeating that pattern.

 One regular double crochet followed by two front post double crochets.

 So I'm going to go ahead and finish up this row and then the next video will show how

 We're going to show you how to do apples and oranges in a simple circle dance form that

 Clap your knees, clap your hands, clap your knees and clap your hands.

 The next part of the dance, the B section, apples or oranges slide away.

 In the simplest version, half of the circle will be apples and the other half will be

 You'll notice when the apples danced away, the diamond got back home a little early and

 In the song it says, apples come back home, suggesting that when they come back to the

 For a little more challenging version of the circle dance, you can slap twice, clap

 Slap your knees, clap your hands, slap your knees, take hands to the side.

 Slap your knees, clap your hands, slap your knees, let's circle again.

 Now we're going to show the simplest version of apples and oranges with one slap, one clap,

 Before you start, you'll need to know what kind of fruit you'll choose to be.

 Slap your knees, clap your hands, slap your knees, clap your hands.

 Circle around, circle around, slap your knees, clap your hands, slap your knees, clap your

 Oranges gallop home, oranges gallop home, oranges come back home.

It's Tatiana from Tatiana's Everyday Food and welcome back to my kitchen.

 Today I'm going to be sharing another great salad recipe with you guys.

 So usually for lunch I'll have a nice big salad to kind of balance out my day,

 but I get a little bored of having the same thing over and over again.

 So this new shrimp and avocado salad is one of my new favorite recipes.

 I'm going to show you how to make a nice garlicky cilantro shrimp.

 We're going to top everything off with an avocado and cilantro salad dressing

 and we're going to add some mangoes, some cucumber and tomatoes to the salad to finish everything off.

 I'm going to start things off by preparing my salad dressing first.

 So into a food processor I'm going to place a small bunch of fresh cilantro.

 I'm going to add in four garlic cloves and these are going to add lots of flavor to our dressing.

 It's going to add some zestiness, some freshness to our dressing,

 I'm going to close up my food processor and then give this a whirl

 Before starting on my shrimp, I wanted to run through all the other ingredients

 And these are the things that you want to prep ahead of time and have them ready for your shrimp.

 I have about a cup of some cherry tomatoes that I've cut into half.

 And then I have about a cup and a half of just one large mango that I've chunked into nice bite-sized pieces.

 And then I have about half of an English cucumber that I've chopped into bite-sized pieces.

 And then I have a nice large bowl of some chopped romaine lettuce.

 Today I'm going to be using this small frying pan and I'm heating it over medium heat.

 And you want to make sure your pan is really hot before you add the shrimp.

 You don't want to overcook them because then they're going to be tough and rubbery.

 After a few minutes, I'm going to add in two garlic cloves that I've minced.

 Toss that garlic together with the shrimp so it's nicely coated.

 So I'm going to place a generous amount of romaine lettuce onto a tray.

 And you get that sweet mango which is the perfect complement to this dish.

 And I transferred it into a nice little dispenser bottle to make things easy.

 You get so much color from the tomatoes, the mango, the shrimp.

 And the aroma from the shrimp cooking on the stove top is amazing.

 I am loving all the refreshing, tropical-like flavors of this salad.

 Give it a try next time you're looking for a not-so-boring salad for lunch or dinner.

Today I'm going to do a tutorial on this wedgie combination trick I came across one day.

 I don't really know if it has a name for it, I've never seen anyone else do it.

 It might help to know how to do a regular wedgie trick, so I'm going to put a link for that for some tutorials on how to do that.

 I'm going to show you what it looks like first, and then I'm going to explain how to do it.

 Alright, so with this trick it might be easier as you're learning it.

 Also, I have found it to be easier with a lighter hoop because it's easier to get it up in the air.

 Also, as you're trying it, I would try the whole trick and I wouldn't try stopping or slowing it down.

 It's easier because the momentum is what really keeps this trick going.

 So you're going to start with the hoop on your right foot, just on the ground.

 And then your right leg is going to kick the hoop in the air over your head.

 And the higher you kick it, it's going to help the hoop keep going.

 So once you get the hoop over your head, I like to use my right hand to kind of help the hoop push it down in place.

 And then once you get it here, your left leg is already going to be inside the hoop, and your right leg is going to be on the other side on the outside.

 You want to remember to kind of squeeze your legs tight together to get this hoop up.

 And your right thigh is going to push the hoop up and your right leg is going to go in it.

 Once you get your right leg in it, either you can continue waist hooping or you can just grab it with your hand and lift it up or do whatever after.

 So you just kind of want to remember to keep trying over and over again.

 When I kick it over my head, if you don't need your hand to push it down, then you don't have to use it.

 It's just something I kind of do without thinking as I was watching myself.

Today we're going to be making something that most people would never think about making on a grill.

 Grilling season has a great chance to be outside with friends and family and nothing brings people together like a delicious pizza.

 And like just about every other food, it tastes better on the grill.

 First thing you want to do is preheat the grill on high for about 10 to 15 minutes.

 Once the grill is nice and hot, you're going to want to turn off one of the burners.

 Now you're going to want to make sure that your hands are protected when you're grilling.

 What pushing the heat to one side does is circulate the heat so that the pizza will cook on top and bottom.

 Once your toppings are on, you won't be able to flip that pizza.

 Now that you have your heat circulating, it's time to cook your crust.

 Now when it comes to crust, I take all the guesswork out and use Boboli Pizza Crust.

 They are fresh, delicious, and much easier to use than dough, which can fall through your grill and make a giant mess.

 With Boboli, I pop it out of the package, brush each side with some olive oil,

 place the crust on the side where the burner is off, and boom goes the dynamite.

 I cook my Boboli Pizza Crust for about three to five minutes on each side.

I have always been taught that cheese equals love and that you should be generous with both.

 When it comes to your favorite toppings, one thing is very important.

 Whether it is meat, veggies, or whatever, make sure that you cook them beforehand.

 I'll let this cook for another 10 minutes until the cheese is nice and melted.

 Since all grills are different, you'll need to keep a close eye on your pizza to prevent burning.

 Pizza is a great chance to be creative with your toppings and try new things.

Let it cool for about two minutes before serving and you and your crew will have yourself a delicious outdoor pizza party.

 Hi, this is Laurel from Mirapois, USA, and today we're going to talk about merguez sausage.

 Merguez is the Arabic word for sausage, and this spicy lamb sausage comes from North Africa

 and is popular in France, Morocco, and really all over the world.

 Generally merguez does not have pork as it's popular in Muslim and Arabic countries.

 This particular brand, Fabrique de Lys merguez sausage, is really one of the most delicious

 Let that heat up a little bit and then add the sausage to the pan.

 It's best if it retains the juice and because they are thin links, it tends to cook rather

 Once the sausages are browned on all sides, you'll want to remove them from the pan right

 Merguez is traditionally served with couscous but it's also really wonderful with ratatouille.

 It's great as a breakfast sausage or on a baguette with some brie cheese.

 Hi, this is Thunder Ye from BoarderWalk.com and today we'll be unboxing the Lenovo Yoga

This is the latest in the Yoga line of laptops, ultrabooks, hybrid devices, whatever

Basically, the Yoga is the only laptop that's available on the market

 about the Yoga 11S is that this device actually is an 11-inch tablet that also has the capabilities

Of course, the Yoga line, as with the new ThinkPad lines, uses the rapid charge

 will get up to 80% charge, battery life charge in roughly 45 minutes.

 front of the device is where you have the power button, which is normal with the Yoga

You've also got your battery indicator and your lock button there.

Again, this is a touchscreen display, so you have both touch and you have your keyboard

You guys can see it clearly running Windows 8 Pro, 64-bit system, so that's

 we'll spend time with the Yoga 11S, see how well it functions, its battery life, use,

This is Thunder E saying thank you and always enjoy entertainment.

I'm going to show you something that's my favorite thing to paint.

 I love painting glass and I love our enamel paints and I love how easy this is.

 quick and easy project where you're sliding up, sliding back down, sliding up, sliding

And when we're done this real smooth and I want you to see how fast this is.

I want to show you what we've got done here in less than two minutes

Think about putting a candle in it and lighting it and putting it around.

 put a little one-stroke leaf if you want at the bottom and it'll just be really cute.

I put ink of gold and I put white and I want you to know I take glitter and

 enamel paints and I take metallics and I make these great wedding.

 I've struck my brush through gold, streak it through white so there's gold on one side,

 white on the other and I'm just doing these little commas on here and I'm going all, I

 do this on ornaments and we do it on glasses and sometimes I'll give a glass, put a little

 your liner, come in here and put a few curls, sign it and you're done.

Spritz some glitter, give it as a gift and they will think you're wonderful.

 On today's session I have a very requested, well most requested recipe which is one of

 Sheer Bera is basically made of dairy product and is a milk fudge and it's very famous.

 And this is special for Eid so you guys can prepare ahead of time any Eid of any year.

 I'll show you guys a very easy recipe so let's take a look at the ingredients and let's go

 It says skim milk but if you can find full cream that's okay too.

 Here I have is 1 teaspoon of cardamom powder and 1 tablespoon of rose water.

 A lot of people use just the sugar syrup for this ingredient but I'm using whipping cream.

 So first thing in a bowl you're going to add the whipping cream.

 You don't have to stir this because I'm going to place this in a microwave.

 Alright so place this in your microwave and set it off for 3 minutes and start.

 A lot of people make powder of this like they grind it in their mixer.

 And you can use a roller or you can use anything to make this into a crumble.

 So just remember if this gets too dry you can add a little bit more of the whipped cream.

 Or if it's too runny you can add more of the dry ingredient which is the milk powder.

 Alright guys so the last step here I have is unsalted pistachio.

 And it's about 2 tablespoons which I grinded and made into a powder.

 Cover this with a plastic wrapper and you're going to keep this in your fridge for one

 And it churns a little bit more harder than it is right now before you serve this.

 Alright guys so it's been one full day that this was resting in the fridge.

 And that's the whole benefit of keeping it in the almonion foil so then you can cut it

 Alright guys so this is our shirpera which is the Afghan milk fudge.

 I have already tried a little bit of this and my husband loves it too.

 This is specially made for Eid for all the brothers and sisters around the world.

 to do those and I've come up with a bunch of ideas and I've decided to share one.

 use origami paper it won't really use that good because you're going to have to color

Okay, so what you're going to do is, this is going to start off as an airplane.

Now on the same line, line a lot different from the last one like this.

If you want it to be even, you have to go like this and as you can see

 the visible lines right here, fold this part where it meets here.

 fold them back like this and align them with the body like this.

 what you're going to do is make this part fold to here like this.

I'm here to share with you how to recreate this cherry inspired makeup that you can wear this holiday season.

 Don't worry, cause we're going to blend all that later to remove the excess lip liner.

 Now just get a clean eyeshadow brush and blend everything up until the creased area.

 This is going to remove the excess lip liner so that it doesn't feel sticky or heavy.

 And now that we have our base, apply a brown shadow with a hint of red.

 This one is from the Too Faced Love Sephora palette and it's currently one of my faves.

 It doesn't matter if it's shimmery or matte, as long as you got the right earthy tone to compliment the red liner, that's okay.

 Then just blend the sharp edges with a clean blending brush to soften those lines.

 Next I'm placing a warm brown eyeshadow only on my outer V using a pencil brush to create more depth.

 I want to intensify the outer V even more, so I'm placing black eyeliner on that area and on my waterline as well.

 I couldn't find my black eyeshadows at the moment, so that's why I used liner instead.

 Then I'm just blending that with the same pencil brush I've used for the Buggy Brown eyeshadow.

 After lining my waterline, I'm going to go ahead and line my upper lash line with black gel liner and a fine liner brush.

 Using a fine liner brush gives you more freedom rather than an angled eyeliner brush, which we also use for the brows.

Here I'm using Fashion 21 Double Up Mascara to lengthen my lashes.

 I'm starting from the roots and brushing it up in a zig-zag motion to really brush the product onto my lashes.

 Then with my bottom lashes, I'm just brushing it down to separate them.

 I'm just going to reapply the black eyeliner on my outer V to connect the winged liner and then pop on some false lashes too.

 You may have already seen how I do my brows, but this time I'm trying to make my brows look soft and natural by just brushing my brows with a little bit of brow powder.

 And of course, I'm using the Look Beauty Brow Perfect from Makeup Pop, then setting them in place with Majolica Majorca's Brow and Lash Colorist.

I'm picking up this soft beige shade from the La Femme Blush Palette I got from Digital Trinket.

 For the lips, I'm actually having a dilemma because I don't know if I should go for mute or what.

 This one is NYX Soft Matte Lip Cream in London and I think this is perfect for those who are afraid of wearing colors.

 Regina Alston recently came out with Pure Organics lip products and I can't wait to try the other colors.

 I recently came out with Pure Organics lip products and I can't wait to try the other colors because they're all very pigmented.

 Or should I go for something girly like this with Gloric NY lipstick in 635?

 Should I go for nude, dark cherry, or pink this coming Christmas Eve?

 I hope sharing my knowledge about makeup is my gift to you guys whether there's a holiday or not.

 All right, so I got this recipe, I think from sitting at the dentist's office or a doctor's

 You don't even need to go this far with doing it, but the way I'm going to show you, it

 All right, so what I got here is some chicken tenders, some skinless, boneless chicken tenders.

 I got your basic dredge here with some flour and cornstarch, salt and pepper, garlic, some

 I got my egg wash, a little bit of milk, some hot sauce in there.

 We're basically just going to go ahead and coat these like normal chicken, make a mess.

 All right, guys, so we got our chicken tenders here all fried up.

 Now, if you don't want to go through the hassle of frying chicken, you can definitely go buy

 All right, what we got here is some Colby Jack and some Monterey cheese.

 All right, so what I'm going to do is I'm going to grab some bacon and get a nice piece

 We're going to get this back on the grill to get this all nice and melted.

 All right, so after about three to four minutes on a nice hot grill, I think we're ready here.

 All right, so all we got to do at this point is top it with some nice honey mustard.

 You can make it simple if you want to, but these are delicious.

 If you guys are still craving some tailgating fun, check out this great series on the Tastemade

 Join us as we drop in on the tastiest tailgates you could ever sink your teeth into.

 Our cross-country food adventure looks deep into a slow food revolution.

 We draft the best culinary trailblazers to step into our Tastemade kitchen at the Hyundai

 While the teams fight it out on the gridiron, our chefs turn up the heat on The Grill Iron.

 Using a pen, pop this off, slide this out, and now you'll want to put the factory sub-connector

 In essence, what we have here is a three-quarter installed proceed.

 The next step is to actually modify two wire locations in this gray sub-connector loop.

 To do that, we want to look at the numbers on the flat sub-connector, not the sub-connector

 You will notice that both these wires are on opposite sides of each other on the end

 You will also notice that both these wires have a wire tapped into it.

 To activate this harness, we need to switch the location of these two red wires with each

 For that, we need to extract all four sides of these two wires and swap locations.

 They should slide out very freely once this retaining pin is pressed with your pen or

 You do not want to bend these terminals because they would have to be replaced, which would

 Next step, putting these two wire sections back into the right place.

 The wire section with the blue and white stripe needs to go into pin number one on this flat

 On the other side, you'll notice that it's actually pin number 14.

 That's because the sub-connectors are mirror images of each other.

 Once again, on the flat side, the blue wire tap goes into pin number one.

 On the green wire with white stripe, goes into pin number 14 on the flat side.

 Be sure to update to this firmware before reinstalling this gray loom.

 Once the firmware's updated, turn off the ignition, wait 30 seconds until the ECU powers

 And that concludes the installation portion of this instruction.

 I have a C3 YoyoZine token here that I will be using as an example to lube.

 Thick Lube is used for a responsive yoyo because it adds that extra material into the balls

 that spin around in the bearing which makes it more responsive.

 Now if you put a Thick Lube on an unresponsive yoyo it will mess up the yoyo.

 If you put a Thin Lube on a responsive yoyo it will mess up the yoyo.

 I probably lubricated 100 yoyos and it only has maybe 1 16th the way down.

 Ok put the drop on the bearing and it looks like it spreads around and then you let it

 sit for about 5-10 minutes and then you spin the bearing like this.

 If it's not smooth then I think you should just let it sit a little more.

 Alright and that is how you lubricate any of your unresponsive yoyos.

 I'm John Claiborne from the Bashful Puppet Blog and we've been working together here

 So far we've gotten to the point where I'm ready to begin attaching the fabric to him.

 It's relatively inexpensive and thanks to marketers like Walmart and Target you can

 get a whole bunch of different colors that are available to you.

 Anyway, we've gotten to this point and what I want to do, the first part of attaching

 the puppet is to begin gluing with hot glue the fabric around the mouth.

 I've pinned it all in the back and I've pinned the bottom jaw, the chin piece in place.

 The reason why I don't begin sewing before this is because I really feel like this is

 Since this is a small piece and my hand will be in the way probably while I'm doing it,

 I want to describe just briefly before I actually begin gluing.

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to put glue all along, just along the edge, the inside

 I will start at the front of the mouth, keeping in mind that this is the part that is most

 Some will let it cool a little bit because it's very hot and it won't stick initially.

 I don't because this is terry cloth and the fibers are so loose.

 I actually want it to embed into the fabric a little bit and it does that better when

 If you're working with fleece, you don't necessarily want to do this because fleece is much thinner.

 It doesn't have nearly as much fabric to absorb the glue with and it can cause water marks.

 I'm not worried about this with terry cloth because it's toweling and it's designed to

 It's like a little plastic that you melt and when it finally cools, it acts as a cementing

 Now we're going to continue working around and go maybe an inch, inch and a half at a

 What's nice about this terry cloth is all those little fringes kind of hide the little

 tucks I'm having to take in order to make this go all the way around the edge here.

 We're probably going to be able to make it all the way around on each side with just

 In fact, I want to hold back a little bit from that because when I bring the other part

 of the mouth in, I need to be able to stitch those together and it's pretty hard to push

 So going down, leaving just a little bit free for me to be able to get my needle into the

 Now, while I hold these and let these cool, I'll just tell you how I'm going to finish

 And then in the next segment that we're going to show you, I'm going to describe to you

 the stitch that I use when I actually begin sewing the fabric together.

 One on either side of the chest piece and one long one in the back.

 So I'm going to finish gluing the bottom jaw in the same procedure we did in the top jaw.

 Alright, with Bashful Puppet Blog, this is John Claiborne and happy puppet building.

 Super easy, it's great for a night out and it makes it so much faster than using a traditional

 This boar bristle brush is great for vintage looks because it's really good at making things

 We're going to start with a deep side part over one eye and that's really key to achieving

 You want to roll the same direction as the side of the head that you're on.

 So if you're on your left side of your head, you want to switch your MiraCurl settings

 So we'll work one side at a time, that way we don't have to keep switching our settings

 On this lower piece for me, my hair is more resistant just because it's healthy.

 And so I use a little alligator clip to hold it while it cools, but other than that, it's

 I section it in half first and get one side out of the way and then we'll start on the

 Now this is really key to get this vintage look so that everything blends into a nice

 So take a long horizontal section from your face back towards the back of your head and

 Then you're going to use your MiraCurl and you want to direct every single piece forward

 So you can see here, I pull it forward towards my cheekbone and I'm going to put the MiraCurl

 Now my settings here are medium heat and 8 seconds, which is the lowest time setting.

 And that's key because we want these curls to be able to brush out and loosen up.

 If you want your curls to stay tighter, you want to up the time that it's in there, not

 On these lower levels I'm directing it towards my cheekbone and as I work higher I'll direct

 Make sure that you let every curl set before you brush or pull or tug on them.

 You can see it's a pretty tight spiral at first, but because it's only been in there

 So as I'm working up higher, remember you need to work in small sections for the MiraCurl,

 It has really great settings and sensors in it, so it's not going to get tangled.

 It will just not twist if it knows there's too much hair in there.

 I have to place the MiraCurl in higher to incorporate the bangs, but I would be doing

 These higher sections, direct them towards the corner of your eye.

 If you're working with bangs you're going to have to place it in higher, but that's

 That's going to help give that really beautiful directed curl so it's higher towards the face

 and as it moves back away from the head it's going to be down lower, which is really pretty.

 You can see that I bring every piece forward towards the corner of my eye and that's going

 Working on the other side now, it's important that you remember to switch your settings.

 Make sure again to split those sections in half and direct that piece towards the cheekbone

 You'll know exactly where you are on your timing because of the settings that MiraCurl

 Bring it forward right towards the cheekbone to get that really nice pop of curl right

 You can see that I'm lifting it up off the scalp just to get a little bit more volume

 And you want to form those curls into a really nice S shape pattern specifically right around

 So with me, since I have bangs and I'm working with that S curl, I use little alligator clips

 And then the second clip I will push and it's going to go in forwards to really create that

 And then as the hair cools it's going to help take that pattern right around my eye.

 And just throw a little hairspray in there too just to give it a little bit of help.

 This is the Big Sexy Hairspray which is great for vintage looks because it has quite a bit

 So give it a little spray as you continue to shape those curls, work them together.

 So this is designed to go in the bottom and the ends of your hair, not the roots like

 It refreshes and smooths and really tones the hair back down so it can be shaped again,

 But for these vintage looks it's so great because it gives a ton of shine and really

 helps you get that beautiful finish that the vintage looks are famous for.

 Then once those front pieces are cooled you can brush them out and again really form that

 This took me less than 10 minutes which is so much faster than wrapping it around a curling

 So that's why I'm really excited about the Mirror Curl because you get really great results

 So finish off with a little bit of hairspray and you've got a beautiful vintage look using

 I hope it helped you discover a new way to use your Mirror Curl.

 Please come over and visit me at thebeautysnook.com for more tips, tricks, tutorials and product

 Ok guys, for this recipe you will need 3 eggs, 6 ounces of self-raising flour, 6 ounces of

 caster sugar, 6 ounces of butter, 1 teaspoon of baking powder, 4 ounces of icing sugar

 in case I get any shell in so I don't have to hook it out of the mixer.

 Then I pour that into the mixer and start measuring out my caster sugar.

I will cut this into smaller chunks before I put it in the manti mix.

 You really do not want to put it in these massive chunks because it just will not break down

 Then I'm just sesting one lemon and mixing that all up together.

 If you get any flour on surfaces or some mixture that hasn't quite mixed in or on the outsides

 just do what I'm doing here and then mix it for a short time after that.

I am just going to take off the lid here and butter my baking pan thing.

 I think this is meant for a loaf more than cake but that's what I'm going to use anyway

 because if you get any thinner areas up the sides they will burn and then also the cake can rise up over those

 so you'll have burnt bits of cake sort of embedded in the rest of your cake which you don't want.

 Also a tip which I didn't do here and regretted it but I did it the next time I made this, yes it was that good

 is to dip it in the middle so that when it rises it doesn't rise up quite as much.

 I'm using a juicer for this part but you can easily just squeeze this into the icing

 however I prefer not to do this because you get pips and whatever the texture of the lemon is made up of

 in your icing however you can get rid of that by putting it through a sieve before you put it over your cake.

 Now when I mix this it's not going to look like icing, it is going to be very very very liquidy

 It's not really icing, it's just to sweeten the lemon and you have to use icing sugar because it's super fine

 Okay so my cake is done and I'm just going to take that out of the oven.

 Then I'm going to skewer holes in it so that when I pour the lemon drizzle over the top it will all seep in.

The second time I did it I spooned it slowly over the top which worked better.

 This meant that the edges were a little bit too lemony and the centre not lemony enough.

 Then I'm going to put it in this gorgeous antique bowl that I have had my whole life.

 It really was amazing, super delicious and the texture of the cake was incredible.

 Really really gorgeous and I highly recommend you guys try this recipe.

Please like and subscribe if you did and leave me in the comments your have for suggestions below.

 Okay, well what's up for me is that today we are going to be doing a collab with Far Above Rubies.

 It's a YouTube channel and it's two girls and they make really cute videos.

 And they are going to be doing breakfast and after-school lunch ideas.

 Okay, to start off with our first lunch, we have a The Classic PB&J.

 And well, if you're allergic to peanut butter, you know, it's not the best for you.

 And you can simply just cut that up and you can put that into a Ziploc bag.

 Now if you don't really like oranges, you can always do apples or plums or peaches.

 So after you have your food all prepared, you can just take your cute lunchbox.

 I added in a yogurt because it has calcium and it's healthy for you.

 So for our second lunch idea, I just have some protein roll-up.

 Good thing I brought my water that Marla Catherine told me to bring.

 you can always take a protein bar or a green shake just like I have.

 I hope you enjoyed the video because I had a lot of fun filming it.

 And leave a comment below saying which one was your favorite lunch idea.

 And also remember to give this video a big thumbs up for back to school videos.

 Hi friends welcome to easy and home style cooking today I'm going to share a

 steamed recipe and that too with corn and we're going to add little bit of

 so let's start how to make it to make this dish very very simple first we need

 so here I have the steamer so we're going to steam this dish what you can do

 is if you have a idli steamer you can just use the idli steamer or if you have

 any dish you can just add some water and take a strainer like this and put it

 so first we're going to add some finely chopped beans and also finely chopped

 carrot and also some green chillies and some cumin seeds and some finely chopped

 ginger and some finely chopped coriander and now the sweet corn so what I did is

 I have taken the sweet corn and I have just you know chopped it little bit

 that's it and here is the sweet corn more of sweet corn and less of you know

 beans and carrot and now we're going to add the semolina so here is the semolina

 you can just take one small cup of semolina that is sooji and same one small

 cup of rice flour and also one tablespoon of ghee so just add the ghee

 and also half a teaspoon of soda now we are going to mix this we need moisture

 to this so for moisture we are adding some curd either you can use buttermilk

 also and in this we are going to add some salt as per taste you can add salt

 and mix it thoroughly so that the ghee and soda and you know all the vegetables

 are mixed nicely so just keep mixing nicely or what you can do is just take a

 bigger bowl and you know use your hands and mix it I have mixed it nicely now we

 are going to add the one cup of curd and mix it again I can add little bit water

 into this bowl itself very little and add this also into this just mix it

 thoroughly you need to make this mixture like this little bit thick not

 too thin so thick perfect and this what we are going to do is we are going to

 steam it so for steaming how we are going to steam it so today I am using

 this is the sweet corn or you know corn leaf so you can take the corn leaf and

 in this we are going to arrange this mixture you know whichever shape you

 want you can just put it in this and just fold it you can put it in a steamer

 you know my husband says they make it in banana leaf so you know you can make it

 either in banana leaf or you know like this so I am going to put one more so

 here is the batter and just put it in the steamer and that's it so this we are

 going to steam it for at least 10 minutes and the dish will be ready so

 after 10 to 15 minutes our corn pankeys are ready you can switch off the flame

 in between if you want you can just remove the lid and check whether it is

 done or not so I have checked it's done and just remove it how for the idlis

 once you remove from the steamer you're going to you know rest it for some time

 and then we are going to remove it so same way this also we are going to rest

 it for just you know one minute you can just have it you know some mint chutney

 very popular in Gujarat and you know they don't make it like this but I have

 changed the recipe you can just try this this is very very simple way which I

 made it so here just remove the leaf you can see and that's it nice leaf

 marks on this very very nice and it will taste very very yummy also.

 this type of recipes are nice and fresh you know because we added lot of

 vegetables and less of you know suji and rice flour more of vegetables and this

 will be light also when you have this dish you can either give this for lunch

 or even for morning breakfast this is an excellent dish in the night also you

 can make it and have it hot hot it tastes awesome so this I'm going to

 enjoy with nice green chutney so here I have mint chutney just you can you know

 put little bit of mint chutney on top of this these are nice and soft because we

 added soda hmm Wow very soft and literally melting in my mouth and have

 with this green chutney only this is tasting awesome for your green chutney

 just make it little bit spicy and this will taste even more tastier because my

 chutney is nice and spicy Wow so dear friends very very excellent dish simple

 dish you can make it instead of making a regular you know idlis make this so see

 you in another session with some more recipes but try it share it and enjoy with your family

 So with every skin routine, we have to start by taking off that makeup.

 I'm just going to pop my lashes off and use some eye makeup remover just to remove my

 It just helps to kind of take off that extra mascara and liner.

 Make sure that you're very, very sensitive and don't be pulling and dumping at your eyes.

 So now I follow up with my Boshit Makeup Breakup Cleansing Cool Cleansing Oil.

 This here is actually going to help to remove the rest of the makeup on my face.

 I love this stuff because it's an oil-based cleanser that will kind of make or actually

 And as you can see, I am totally wiping away my brows just with this product in my hand.

 In this amazing, safe way, probably the most gentle way to take your makeup off.

 It's going to turn into this creamy consistency, which turns it into, obviously, a cleanser.

 So now that we've cleansed our face, I'm just going to use a washcloth with a little bit

 of warm water just to remove the excess, just to make sure that we get all of that oil-based

 And I'm going to be following up with my First Aid Beauty Face Cleanser to deeply cleanse

 I love this stuff because it's just a really great whipped consistency.

 And I like to use this in addition, or actually in addition to my Clarisonic.

 And then once I've done that, I'm going to follow up with an Apricot Scrub from St.

 And then I follow up with my favorite moisturizer at the moment.

 It helps with really, really dry skin and definitely hydrates the skin as well.

 So next, we're going to follow up with the Josie Maran 100% Pure Argan Oil.

 And essentially, I'll be rubbing this product together just to kind of warm it up

 It really just penetrates the skin and really gives it a good, good moisture.

 If you tend to be an oily person, I probably would stay away from this

 just got done looking at a PowerPoint and we discussed a variety of the

 see kind of different colors in the petals as well as the brownish ring that

 it from the side here that it will be this kind of like cone shape and you'll

 see some of the leaves on the side and so I've got two of those.

 kind of down here doing the same kind of deal and then this one here that's just

 blend a watercolor and a Sumier kind of philosophy into this with the

 when I photograph it and then write your grade and your teacher.

 draw lightly so that you don't completely ruin it and have pencil

 video but I'll pause it while we're in class and kind of redraw on it.

 have a different arrangement if you want but I would like to have those three

 off-center and I'm just going to kind of make a wiggly circle like that.

 Then a third wiggly circle on the center where the black is going to be.

 I'm going to put another one up here kind of just mimicking my original

 one right in here and I'm going to start with a triangle like kind of a triangle

 down here that's just kind of flopping over kind of towards the front.

 going to make it a little flatter on the back so it's almost like a trapezoid.

 part that's sticking out kind of like a little tongue or something.

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to take this area kind of semi-circle here

 want to have at least two paper towels sitting at your place so you can dry

 These things can be tricky to start, so we thought we'd do a little video to help you get yours started.

 First thing you want to do is you need to have the switch in the on position.

 Some people may think that O means on, but it actually means off.

 Next, you want to prime the trimmer again, maybe three or four times,

 but once you see that there's gas in the bubble, you're good to go.

 This little notch or switch right there, you want to leave it in that position for starting.

 You want to leave this lever in this position right here, the choke,

 and we're going to move it to the full throttle position once we get it started.

 Okay, so the last thing you need to do before you begin pulling on the rope

 is you want to take your throttle down here, which this is your throttle here as well.

 You want to pull that in, and then there's a little lever under here to hold that in place.

 And you need to have that in place when you're trying to start it as well.

 It's important to hold the trimmer in place when you're pulling up on the rope,

 So what I do is I take this off because, again, once it starts acting like it wants to run,

 If any of you have had frustrations with the string that you use on a trimmer,

 typically steel offers an alternative to the string, and that's these plastic...

 Hey what's up I'm Matt Wilhelm and I'm here to teach you how to do a time machine.

 There's the carve on how you get into it and then there's the actual time machine.

 So we're going to break it down into each part and then we'll be rolling.

 As you're lifting up the front wheel I want you to flip the handlebar 180 like this so

 You're going to bend your left elbow like this and you're going to lean with your left

 As you're doing that your right leg is going to be pretty much straight back like this

 Now when you go into the time machine you're going to basically do the opposite of everything.

 Your left elbow is going to straighten out, your right leg is going to come forward and

 up and you're going to lean back with your body just like that.

 Now the smoother you get with this transition to this the faster you're going to spin.

 After the first week you might not be very good at this but the smoother that transition

 And then when you're spinning the time machine you're basically just leaning back with your

 So if you're leaning one way like this you might need to go like that.

 And basically just to get out of it you just want to slam it down.

 So put your right foot on the tire, switch hands and just bring it down.

 Alright so if you really want to go fast in the time machine you've got to do it from

 a mega spin and I like doing it just with the bars regular like this.

 Now the hard part is going to be to flip the handlebar because your foot is kind of kicking

 the tire but once you get that motion down of flipping the handlebar you just go right

 into the time machine and when the handlebar flips 180 it feels like the bike just kind

 of like doubles in speed and when you try it you'll know what I'm talking about.

 It took me, I mean I didn't learn it until I'd been riding for about five years.

 It took a lot of practice to get but if you keep working on it you'll get it.

 I just used rubbing alcohol and rubbed the airplane down and then I used this rust-oleum

 And I've been spraying it far away, trying to keep it probably 2 1⁄2 feet away while

 I did get a little bit too close I think on there or it's just the way the foam is.

 But otherwise it's not really melting the foam at all as long as I keep it far enough

 away and I'll probably end up doing maybe 3 coats of this stuff, of the paint, flip

 Here is the second coat of yellow and it's about 61 degrees outside right now.

 The only spot where you can notice I think is right here I put a little bit too much

 And I'll come out and spray a third coat and then wait probably 24-48 hours and I will

 flip it around and coat again and I may or may not put on a clear coat afterwards.

 I finished taking the tape off of the plane except I forgot a spot here too.

 Hi, it's Rosie, and in this video, I am making a dinner for two, and this is

I'm going to place my T-bone steaks into a nice large bake dish, and

 then I'm going to start drizzling some extra virgin olive oil all over the

 adding some chopped garlic, and I'm also going to season my steak using moustache,

 but of course, you can use whatever seasoning that you decide to use.

 place it in my oven, set on 350, and let it bake for 40 minutes.

 drizzle some extra virgin olive oil all over the baked potatoes.

I'm going to slather some butter or margarine all over the corn.

 And then I'm going to start sprinkling some parsley flakes on top of the corn,

 And now I'm ready to add this, or place it in the oven as well.

 like to add more color, just remove the foil and let it broil for a couple of

My baked potato is nice and soft, there are no hard parts in this baked

You can add more butter if you choose, or salt and pepper, just jazz

 have somebody that likes to get their grub on and likes a lot of food, this is

 I would eat the corn on camera, but that's just going to show how good I really am, so we might skip that on that.

 If you are liking the Dinner For Two and you want me to bring back the series, be sure to give this video a

 thumbs up, and I will definitely make a Dinner For Two at least once a month.

 give this video a thumbs up, as well as my shrimp scampi, and I will definitely add Dinner For Two back into the rotation.

 Okay, so the goal of the kneading is to add air in the dough, okay?

 Okay, so the goal is to give strength as well to the dough, so it's a bit energetic.

 So, you will see that the dough will be really clear, but not like that, really nice, you know?

 Hi guys, today on Divas Can Cook we are making these Chipotle Lime Chicken

 It makes it super super moist and tender and it adds a nice flavor to them.

 brush them generously front and back with the mayonnaise just like this right

 can find this recipe with all the measurements on my blog at dwisconclick.com

And then once it's done sitting in the fridge, go ahead and place

 it on a four line baking sheet that's been sprayed with cooking spray just

 gonna bake these for about 20 minutes in the oven and then after 20 minutes go

 I kind of like it kind of chunky and a little bit smooth you know.

Okay you have to season salt and pepper otherwise it'll be kind of boring.

 Alright now go ahead and plate your chicken up and then squeeze on some

So now you have these smoky, salty, slightly sweet drumettes with this

 Okay, let's get moving on this fantastic zucchini or courgette,

 I'm going to get these in now because they take a little while to cook.

 And I've got a little bit of dried thyme and a little bit of dried rosemary.

 Just so we soften these down and give these potatoes a nice head start.

 Now I'm going to go in and I've got a little bit of sweet bell pepper or capsicum.

 You can add things like carrots or other sort of root vegetables.

 You want to put them in probably at the same time as the potatoes.

 You don't want to cook the hell out of them because they'll just turn to a mush.

 Just need to cook this for about 3 to 4 minutes with the lid off.

 What we're doing here is getting some of our beautiful flavours in and around our zucchini.

 I was just tossing these vegetables around to grab some of that flavour.

 Very simply now I'm burning them with a tin of tomatoes or a can of tomatoes.

 I'm not a great salt lover to be honest so you go in the direction you like.

Don't forget to subscribe to our channel where we have hundreds of different recipes from all around the world by many different chefs.

 Salute, David Olin here today talking to you about this little thing that we can add to

 our improvs to sound more alive and give more character to your guitar licks.

 When we think about bends, we usually think about the ring finger that is helped often

 I want to talk to you about this finger and this finger, not the ring.

 If we reach a note with the ring finger, any note, that note can also be played by bending

 the middle finger a half step above or the index finger a full step above.

 If I don't play any bend with the ring finger, well, I just hear the note with a little vibrato

 If I play it with the middle finger bending to that note, it sounds almost like a slide

 So here's a short lick using this technique and you're going to hear some things, I hope.

 How do you incorporate that to your playing so that you don't really have to think about

 That's going to comfort your fingers and it's going to give your index and middle finger

 Because when you're bending with the ring finger, you don't really think about it.

 And you probably should because after a while, without thinking about those bends with the

 We're going to use the first position of the minor pentatonic scale in the key of A. Here's

 And between both notes that I'm playing, I have an extra note right in the middle.

 Perfect opportunity for us to practice these bends with the middle finger and the index.

 The second note of strings five, four, and three can be bended using the middle finger...

 And now, if you combine these techniques with our minor pentatonic scale, it's going to

 That is bending with the middle finger, or like this with the index.

 Your ideas are going to convey in a different way, and it's going to give you more character

 If you consider any guitar lick, any musical idea on your instrument, you always have a

 For instance, the minor pentatonic scale in the first position is made of a far left note,

 And I say far left because you might have some notes in the middle.

 Where you still have a far left, a middle note, and a far right note.

 Whether that bend happens with the index or the middle, it can still happen.

 And actually, if I go further with this, any note on the fretboard, whether it's a far

 left or a far right note, can be bended to using any fingers really, but in this case,

 If you're trying to bend to a far left note, we're just going to have to shift our finger,

 our hand, one fret lower or two frets lower, depending on what kind of bend you want to do.

 You're going to be able to express yourself in different ways, and that's what music is

 If you have any questions, leave them in the comment section of this video.

 And to improve your skills, of course, you can get some backing tracks on guitarplayback.com

 Map tracks is a revolutionary way for you to learn your fretboard.

 It's a visual backing track that's going to guide you through what is sometimes difficult.

 Instead of baking in my kitchen today, I'm with my friend Barbara from Buona Papà!

Today we are going to prepare together two beautiful, amazing watermelon cakes!

 parts off the watermelon just because they don't look very appealing.

 a couple and then we put the second watermelon and then we just layered it that way because in

 pineapple, slice it up and then take cookie cutters and cut them into little pieces.

Next you're just going to put the blueberries in between the layers.

 If you don't want to use blueberries, I'm pretty sure you can use any other berries.

 the strawberries and lined it around the cake and then we took the blueberries and like dumped it in

 enjoyed it and I think it only took us probably 10 to 15 minutes to make it.

If you guys do make this for the 4th of July, send me pictures on my Instagram.

 I shot this video with a new camcorder, which is very confusing to me still, and I managed

 I've salvaged much of it and I'm going to piece it together into what I hope will be

 polymer clay jewelry projects that you can use to make your own inspirational pieces

 So please bear with me as I try to explain, narrate, and splice my way to making the best

 I started off with pictures of two inspirational necklaces that I had found in sales flyers

 Although I like the necklaces, I wanted to change some of the colors and shapes and make

 This is a quick shot of one of those necklaces and you'll see them both in the later scenes.

 I started by drawing my necklace on a piece of paper with a few shapes that I wanted to

 I used my Jewelry Charms Shapes Push Mold and my Hearts Shapes Jewelry Mold.

 The first one I made, the heart necklace piece, was lost but I do have the second focal bead

 This technique is also explained in my clay backing video also on YouTube.

 This is the next pendant necklace that we're going to be making.

 I'm still following the design I did earlier on paper which I took from my little magazine

 picture with some things that I didn't really like, some of the shapes, but I'm going to

 change them and also change the colors to match colors that I wear at the salon.

 So anyway, I'm just going to tell you how quickly it is to make this.

 It is shaped a little bit like a flower so that it fits nicely on the end of a bead.

 It might take once or twice for it to stick but eventually it will stick.

 You can put little tiny holes in it to give it a little bit more of a designed look.

 Then roll up a little ball of green clay and put it on the back.

 That is black soy added to the noodles and it will be stirred until it's almost crispy.

 We offer that same black soy sauce as well as the wide rice stick noodles at importfood.com.

 This is one of the most popular recipes that people order at Thai restaurants.

 It's also one of the easiest to make and we encourage you to try to make this on your

 The noodles will be set aside and next she'll put some oil in the wok and then some pork.

 Pat See Ew Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo Moo

 If you notice how useful that wok turner is, it's very high quality.

 We offer that same stainless steel wok turner at importfood.com.

 And that is brown sugar, a little MSG, and then oyster sauce, and then golden mountain

 Thanks for watching this look at the Thai Street Vendor prepare a delicious wide rice

 Pat See Ew, we have an entire series of Thai Street Vendor videos.

 Here's Larry Coates of Coates Saddlery talking about the proper positioning of the saddle.

 Hi, I'm Larry Coates with Coates Saddlery and I'm here today at the USTRC finals.

 The team are opening and I'm going to give you a little spill on a proper position that a saddle should fit on a horse's back.

 So I'm going to start with a tree and then I'm going to put a saddle on him.

 These little deals right here when the horses are running, they're like two little cylinders running up and down.

 So if you try to set the saddle up on top of the shoulder blades right here, they're going to restrict them.

 And then pretty soon you've got to take your horse to a chiropractor and he'll get out in the shoulders and maybe the ribs or something like that.

 And this is the backbone right through here, goes back to the loin.

 The shoulders, the scapula of the horse is designed for the saddle to sit behind so that when it takes a jerk, it doesn't go up over the horse's neck.

 So anyway, I want to set this tree on him and I'm going to show that this is the shoulder blade right here.

 So the front part of the bar is designed to flare up a little bit so it starts on the back side of the shoulder blade.

 We don't want it way back here, but we want it to kind of rest right behind that shoulder blade so it sits right there like that.

 A lot of people, on my rigs, I put my rigs and I set them at 7-8.

 So the D-ring is going to sit about right here, right down through here.

 Well, then they say, well, we've got to slide this saddle up so that the girth is right up in here.

 You put that saddle where it belongs and then you go ahead and cinch it.

 If you feel like the cinch is too far back, just go ahead and reach it up and tighten it up.

 Let that cinch angle because that's a good thing because you're getting more pull from the back of the saddle.

 That's the reason why I set my riggings at 7-8 so that we get more pull.

 We release the pressure up here on the shoulder blades of the horse.

 And so anyway, that is the most correct way of putting the horse back.

 Now, what I tell a lot of people, if they don't understand where it goes, well, how do you know this when the saddle's already built?

 I'm going to put this saddle on in here in a minute, but what you do is you go ahead and just throw it up there.

 I don't care if you throw it up there a little bit too high like that.

 That's a happy place, what we call the happy place of the saddle.

 So leave it, go where it's supposed to go because the saddle knows where it's supposed to go on the horse.

 Now, this is kind of leading you astray a little bit, but if a saddle wants to slide back too far,

 then we're having issues with the saddle and you better get a hold of your local saddle maker to find out what the heck's wrong with it

 But if you've got it way up here and it slides back about right in there, then we're looking good.

 So let me grab this other saddle here and I'll show you what I'm talking about.

 Okay, when you've got, of course you're going to have pads and everything up here,

 but if you want to just reach underneath the pad and you can feel the bar pad underneath here

 and the bar pad is always going to be right, this is the swell of the saddle,

 the bar pad is going to be right here in the middle of the swell and that's where it's at.

 So if you want to slide the saddle back and you're thinking, okay, it needs to be about right there,

 you slide that in there, kind of shake it a little bit because it's going to get in there.

 So the front of the skirt should actually cover the shoulder blade, this capillary right here

 because you're not going to see it, but it's not, the bar pad is two inches from the front of the skirt on my saddle.

 Other saddle makers might be a little bit different, but figure that the front of that bar pad is going to be about right here where this concho is at.

 So I like the rigging back behind the shoulder blade, or the shoulder of the horse, so it doesn't gouge in them.

 And so you've got plenty of room to work right here, and if you feel like you want it up there a little bit more, just reach it up there and cinch it up.

 That way, the angle of that latigo and the cinch is at an angle and you get pulled back from all the way up.

 It ties in all the way around the back, all the way around the front, so you get pulled from all the way from the back of the saddle.

 Like I said, I see a lot of guys, they throw that on the saddle, way up there on top of that neck up like that.

 Because they think, well, then they'll call me up and say, well, the front of my saddle is way off my horse's back.

 Well, sure it's going to be way off the horse's back, sitting on them shoulder blades.

 And you've got to have a little, of course, this is a brand new saddle, it's not going to sit down until you get it broken a little bit.

 But if you've got a lot of pressure up here in the front, you're supposed to have a little bit of pressure up in the front.

 Because if you don't have pressure up here in the front, this saddle, when you take a jerk, it's just going to slide all the way up on it.

 And so therefore, we want to make good contact up here in the front of your saddle to keep it from sliding forward.

 And so anyway, that's pretty much all there is about the proper position for a saddle.

 And if you have any questions, you'd be glad to call me at the saddle shop.

 Today I'm going to show you that baking is not just all about cakes

 if it sticks to your hands just put some flour on your hands and it will stop sticking

 to rise at room temperature between an hour and a half to two hours till it

 well risen you can see right to the top and I love that smell of yeast

 those little holes and now it's time to be creative with some ingredients

 and I've got some black pitted olive just gonna chop them as well

 Hello, this is going to be a video on how to make your cubes feel like they're brand

 They are the new type A from Q4U.com and I've taken apart a few of the pieces of each of

 the ones to show you how you can make your old cubes feel like your new cubes.

 This is one that I have not altered and this is one that I have made new again.

 Now what happens is, the reason that cubes get old is when you have the two plastic pieces,

 all the plastic pieces rubbing against each other, they rub together and they create all

 And a lot of that, what that does is it's kind of like sandpaper.

 It rubs together a lot and some of the pieces, some of the stuff of the plastic falls off.

 So you'll notice here on the core of this one, you can see some black stuff in the middle

 Just let me take out a few more pieces and have a better look at it.

 Another thing that happens is when you lubricate a cube with silicone for example, when you

 And the silicone, you spray it in there and it spreads out all over the cube and then

 what it does is it hardens and it kind of, it sticks to the plastic.

 When you're sliding all these pieces around, the silicone also gets rubbed together and

 And you can see here, there's a bunch of kind of whitish stuff.

 That's all dried silicone that's kind of peeled off of the pieces.

 See there's not that much on there and this one has a lot on there.

 My camera's not too good but I mean you should still be able to see a lot of the white gunky

 That's all just dried silicone that's kind of just scraping off.

 So basically all you need to do to make your cube feel brand new again is take a napkin

 and just rub all over the piece and get a lot of that white stuff off.

 Now you'll notice that this piece has some white looking stuff here.

 And again for the core for example has a lot of black stuff in it also.

 All those white stuff that's just silicone that's been dried and just that rubs off.

 So once you clean all your pieces off your cube will kind of look like this.

 A lot of this is not, you don't see all that white ring anymore.

 Now you can still see some of the silicone that's still on there and that's all good.

 It's still not connected to the piece so it's still helping it slide well.

 But once you get all that put back together you can go ahead and reassemble your cube

 But the important thing is that you got all that gunk out of the way.

 So when you slide the pieces together there's not as much resistance anymore.

 And then all you have to do from that point is give it a little bit more of lubricant.

 Because what you're doing is you're scraping off all the lubricant that's dried on to the

 It was my fastest cube for the longest time and then it just got slow all of a sudden.

 Give it like a tiny tiny little spray of silicone in the top and the bottom.

 You can just get some cloth or a napkin and just rub all that stuff off with your finger.

 Throst has a video on how to wash a cube by putting it in the dishwasher.

 But if you want to use a damp cloth or a wet napkin or something go ahead.

 Is just look for that white powdery gunk that's all over the pieces and the edge pieces.

 Not too much because if your cube is good you shouldn't need that much extra.

 This is a simulation, and what I have is I have some particle board, and that's what

 When you cut the opening for your countertop, you don't do it at the back side where you

 This is very, very important because when you go to cut, you'll want a nice, clean cut.

 If you do it on the other side, you're going to get a jagged cut.

 So for demonstration purposes, I'm using a piece of particle board, but just keep in

 Make certain that it's centered over the base cabinet where you have the right clearance

 So once you've taken your measurements and you know where you want to place your sink,

 And remember what I was saying about I like to cut diamonds there.

 You'll hold your template in place while you take a magic marker or a sharpie and outline

 Then once you've outlined your template, you just pull your template up.

 You want to make certain that the bit that you put in is wider than the blade for the

 Okay, so the next thing you want to do is you want to drill a hole.

 And whatever you do, you do not want to come out beyond this line.

 If you have to back a little ways away from the line, do that because once you cross that

 line, then you have to worry about whether or not the lip of the sink is going to cover

 Okay, so now the next tool you're going to need is you're going to need a jigsaw.

 I like to use a metal cutting blade because that's going to give me and you the best cut.

 Okay, so what this is, is this is the bit that we're going to put in the jigsaw.

 And that's what you want when you're cutting through laminate because you want a nice,

 Okay, so you just want to use your jigsaw and you want to follow the line.

 Okay, now when you get halfway around your cut, you've got to stop.

 And what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to take a scrap piece of wood.

 And the scrap that you get has got to span the width of the opening.

 All right, so now what you do is I'm going to drill a screw in the center of the wood.

 Now what's going to happen is you're going to finish your cut all the way around.

 Because it's going to hold it in place and keep the stress off the edge of the laminate

 And so that's a simulation of how to cut an opening for a sink on a countertop.

 Well again, thank you for viewing Roswellskateboards.com channel.

 Here we're going to be showing how to re-grip or to grip a skateboard.

 Now basically what you need, a piece of grip tape, here's some black grip here.

 You're going to need a file and a nice Phillips screwdriver would be perfect and a razor blade.

 It would be a good idea to have a good sharp blade and bottom line, if you guys don't know

 Just simply take the grip, peel off the backing, peel the backing completely off and go ahead

 If you use the right grip, basically this is the right grip to use.

 My grip, it has little holes in it to help the air bubbles come out from underneath.

 It is a good idea to do that out here in the sun to basically help the air bubbles come

 What I usually do then is just simply cut off the end off here.

 It'll get rid of the grit as well as give you a guide to be able to follow the laser

 Okay, let's go ahead and we'll trim it all the way around there.

 That's basically what you're going to do is create a line going out along.

 You're going to be in your little line right there and follow your line around.

 If you go too fast, then you're not going to get the right cuts.

 You want to put the blade at a 45 degree angle and let the blade just simply glide through

 Keep it right at your 45 degree angle all the way around there.

 You're beveled into the edge of the board and it's sealed nice and good.

 Then basically what I do is go ahead and take my screwdriver, Phillips screwdriver here,

 Make sure that where your holes are at from this side, don't push it all the way through.

 Make sure that you're pushing it through on the downside so that you're simply cutting

 But this look is completely sweat proof, sun proof, and water proof.

 So girls, next time you go to the pool with that hottie from gym class and you're showing off your best dive,

 If you're using your hands instead of a brush to apply your makeup,

 it's always a good idea to use a hand sanitizer or some sort of alcohol and a swab

 to get all the grease off your hands so you don't transfer it onto your face.

 Applying just a very small amount of anti-parspite deodorant around your face really helps create the water proof effect.

 Next you want to apply your primer and this is one by Smashbox.

 Now you want to grab your foundation and your sweat proof slash water proof sunblock.

 Then you're going to mix them together to make your water proof slash sweat proof foundation or tinted moisturizer.

 Next you want to use a concealer by Lancome or however you pronounce it.

 It's water proof and you just apply it to the back of your hand.

 I find the easiest way to apply concealer is with a concealer brush.

 Don't forget to go all around the eye to make sure that you cover up all the veins in your lids.

 Now using a darker foundation, several shades darker than your natural skin tone,

 you're going to mix it half and half with the sunblock like you did with your regular foundation to make a water proof bronzer.

 You just want to apply this down the sides of your face and down the sides of your nose

 just to give a really nice healthy glow like a bronzer would without making you look orange.

 And don't forget the sides of the neck too so it blends in really well.

 Now you want to apply a cream blush and this is one by Maybelline so it stays pretty well.

 This is Golden Sand Double Wear Cream Eyeshadow by Estee Lauder

 and I'm going to apply it like I would a highlighter on the tops of my cheekbones and down the center of my face.

 For the eyebrows, I just take my angled brush and the same cream eyeshadow but it's in Mochaccino

 I'm just going to take my concealer brush in that same Golden Sand color

 With that Mochaccino color, you're going to apply it just to the eye sockets as a contour on your eye.

 And then I'm going to take my concealer brush and apply it to the bottom part of my lid.

 Now you want to take a waterproof mascara, I use voluminous by L'Oreal

 and a really small eyeliner brush and you're going to dip it in

 and that works much better than waterproof eyeliners that they make out there.

 Next you just need to curl your lashes and apply your waterproof mascara.

 It comes in several different colors and I just chose the bright pink one

 Well that's everything, so go do your makeup and jump in a pool

Well, I think there's a lot of fun to go around and I can see getting, I've

 got a seven-year-old, getting the kids involved, washing their hands, greasing them up.

 What we've done here, this is a rice cereal treat that's been shaped into a ball.

 that you're going to be adding the marshmallows and the rice cereal treat, so you want it

 a little bit more intense than what you're going to actually end up with when you finish.

 And if you're going to get the kids involved, have them put some shortening on their hands

Then while it's still a little bit warm, rub it like that on the counter

 If you forget to do that, you can always slice it off, but then you'd waste a little bit

 And then we've just got some fruit gems here that I've cut in half and I've made as little

 lips and I'm using some buttercream icing and we're going to attach those.

 And when you colored the rice cereal, what did you use to color that with?

 And so we're going to just put that there and it's a little sticky, but I always like

 And then if it is too sticky on the bottom of the gumdrop or the jelly, do you put some

 And I mean it doesn't have to be perfect because this is kind of a kid's type thing.

 And then if you really want to make it three dimensional, I put enough icing there, you

 can take some store-bought icing and then you can just fill in with his pupils.

 This would even be a great take-home treat for a birthday party or something that you

 And we'll give him a little, whatever you call the top on a fish.

 So I've taken some non-porels and you can do it multi-colored, but I've decided to do

 And what we're going to do is we're just going to get it to squirt.

 It's cooled a little bit, but you don't really need any kind of a pattern because you're

 And then do you just let it set up or do you have to put it in the fridge to set up?

 So while this cake looks very elaborate and complicated, it truly is a process in the

 There's a lot of different elements and you could use it for different types of cakes.

 Then after it's hard and dry, put a little more candy on there and put your stick on

 Otherwise, you know, it might break if I try to stick the stick in there right now.

 You can use your marbled fondant and you can use your icing color and your toothpick

 or you can take some pre-colored fondant and some white and just marble it in.

 I mean, the covering the cake might be a little something that adults need to do, but as far

 And I've already rolled this out to an eighth of an inch in thickness.

 So when you're using fondant, you want it fairly thin when you're going to cover your

 Coat it lightly with buttercream icing to kind of fill in the holes and that acts as

 And then, I'm just going to pick it up and just begin to have it take shape and you can

 And on a big cake, you would do the exact same thing that you're doing right now and

 And then, you'll pick that up and usually, you don't have to be too neat on the bottom

 part of the border because you're going to put a border there whether you're going to

 add some additional fondant in the shape of a rope or some balls.

 So you want it to be a little, the color, you want it to be a lot of variation.

 And you can see there, you just tuck it down, tuck it in and then you'll finish your border

 Now, let's put some coral on the cake and we've just taken some really bright colors

 You want to squeeze a whole lot or a little depending on what you want your coral to look

 Now you could also use a leaf tip and this is a 352 and you'll hold it so that one of

 And these colors are what make this really stand out and vibrant.

 And just let it, you know, have bumps and let it fall over so it looks a little bit

 I mean, there's all sorts of things that you could do with it depending on what you want.

 And now, is this your border that you're getting ready to create?

 Mound it up so that, you know, you've got it there because you're covering up the bottom

 So, you're basically just squeezing it out and moving it along down the way because you're

 I love them because they're so colorful and so cute, but I hate them because they bounce

 Now, if you had a jelly roll pan, you could put your cake in a jelly roll pan so that

 So you can kind of pick them up and place them or you can roll them along the top.

 So you can see they're sitting there on the top, but for the rest of them, you're going

 to have to pick them up and kind of press them in so that you see them.

 That's probably the hardest part of this cake is getting the nonpareils to actually stick

 You can put as many as you want on there, but again, it just gives it that kind of ocean

 And you don't have to be real neat with doing your coral or anything like that.

 Now, would you put these on there with some buttercream to make them adhere to the top

 And I can see also just putting some around the cake if you're having a bunch of people.

 Now one thing, because your coral is a little more delicate with the candy melts because

 it's not real thick, you can take your lollipop stick and actually poke down into your cake

 and make a hole so that you're not breaking your coral as you're actually sticking it

 Well, I am telling you, if you are fishing for a compliment, this is the big one.

 And if you want to watch more videos like this, please subscribe to my channel.

 Hi everybody, today I'm doing this makeup look inspired by Candice Swanepoel.

 So I'm going to try my best to recreate that state for you guys.

 It's so hard to recreate a look from hers because she's just so gorgeous.

 But I hope you guys enjoy this tutorial nonetheless and let's jump into it.

 I'm going to start out with this Pixi primer and this is going to help make my face really highlighted

 But it helps prime your foundation but it gives you a bit of a glow too which is so pretty.

 Anyways, I'm going in with my L'Oreal True Match foundation and my beauty blender.

 I feel like this gives you the most airbrushed looking finish and her skin is always flawless.

 Then I'm going to go in with my MAC Pro Longwear concealer and just conceal under my eyes.

 And just dab that in and blend it all out with my beauty blender again.

 All the products I'm using I will leave down below in the description box for you to see.

 Then I'm going in with my Bare Minerals powder and just applying this very lightly all over my face.

 I don't want it to get too cakey but I do want to add a little bit more coverage

 and just kind of blend everything together because like I said, her skin is flawless.

 And this is really going to help define my cheekbones since she naturally has a lot more defined cheekbones than I do.

 So this is just going to help contour my face a bit and add some color to it as well.

 Next I'm going in with my Naked Flesh palette and just using the bronzer to contour up into my forehead as well.

 I don't like using the contour stick as much on my forehead because it kind of gets stuck in all my little hairs.

 And to be really convenient, I'm using this palette for the blush and for the highlight as well.

 So her blush is very pink and bold so I'm just applying that to the apples of my cheeks.

 And then I'm highlighting my face which her face is also very highlighted in this makeup look.

 So I'm applying that to my cheekbones and I'm also going to apply some to my forehead and down my nose.

 So pretty much in my T-zone, anywhere the light would naturally hit, you kind of want to apply this.

 Then I'm going in with my Anastasia Brow Wiz which is my all-time favorite thing.

 And her brows are kind of like naturally really nice and not so shaped.

I'm just filling in the areas that are kind of sparse in my eyebrows.

 So I'm just kind of filling them in, giving them a tad of shape but not too much.

 Then I'm going in with my NYX Jumbo Pencil in Milk which is just a white eyeshadow pencil.

 Just using this white color is really going to make the lids look super bright when we apply a light eyeshadow to it.

 Next I'm going in with Stila's Kitten and applying this all over my lids.

 It's really really really pretty and it's just flattering on everybody I feel like.

 So I'm applying that to my lids and also in the inner corner and under my lower lash line as well.

 I'm going in with this cool gray color from my Lorac 2 palette.

 And I'm working this into my crease kind of elongating my eyes.

 Normally I go up higher in the crease but I'm really just dragging it straight through in my crease as you can see.

 Hers is kind of angled out like this and it gives a more winged effect.

 And I think it's just... this eye look is very very simple but it's very flattering as well.

 And just kind of blending it a tad bit up into the crease and that's about as far as I'm going to go.

 So taking a more defined pencil brush I'm working the crease a little bit darker.

 And I'm also applying this to my lower lash line to get a bit of definition because we aren't going to be doing eyeliner on the bottom.

 This one's from NYX and I'm just going to apply eyeliner all the way from the very inner corner to the outer corner.

 I feel like Candice pretty much always has a wing especially with her more natural makeup looks.

 So I'm taking a black pencil liner and just applying this to my tight line.

 Then taking a nude eyeliner I'm going to apply this to my waterline.

 It doesn't make a tremendous difference but it really does make your eyes look kind of brighter and more awake and not as red as if you're tired.

 I'm using the L'Oreal Telescopic Mascara on both my upper and lower lashes.

 I find that I don't really feel like she uses false eyelashes a lot.

 Then I'm taking this nude lip liner from NYX and just outlining my lips.

 This will help get rid of any fine lines and stuff and just really smoothen out your lips.

 Then I'm applying a sheer pink lip gloss from the NYX La Fleur collection.

 Let me know if you like this look and let me know what celebrity you would like me to recreate next.

 Hi, I'm Kathleen Sams with Red Heart Yarns and we are going to be working on block one

 You're going to have a long double crochet which sets up the foundation to make your

 This is a completed block here so you can see what it's going to look like when you're

 Now you're going to start out with your chain and I'm not doing the full size.

 And there's a little something different with this foundation chain.

 Keep it loose and what you're going to do is work in the back bumps as it says in the

 So we're going to go into the second from the hook, single crochet, chain one, skip

 the next one, go into the next bump, single crochet, chain one and you're going to work

 Then we're going to chain one, turn and you're going to single crochet in that first single

 crochet, chain one, skip your chain space, single crochet in your next stitch, chain

 one, skip one, single crochet and again as row two reads you do this all the way across

 Row three is where we start our long double crochet and it's listed as LDC.

 We're going to chain one, single crochet in that first stitch, yarn around your hook

 Now the instructions read single crochet in your first stitch and working over the chain

 one space you work your LDC or your long double crochet in the next corresponding chain one

 Now what that means is we're going to yarn over as I said, insert our hook in that chain

 Yarn over, you're going to pull that loop up through two, through two.

 It's just like a double crochet stitch, you're just going into the chain space in the two

 And then we're single crochet another long and then single crochet and let me do one

 Your fourth row you're going to chain one, single crochet in the first one, chain one,

 skip that long double crochet that you have just done, single crochet in your next single

 crochet stitch, chain one, skip that long double crochet again and again repeat this

 So we're going to chain one, single crochet in our first stitch, yarn around your hook

 Then we're going to go around the post of those long double crochet.

 Single crochet in your next stitch, yarn around your hook two times, you go around that post,

 finish your treble, single crochet, yarn around twice, around the post, complete your stitch.

 And what we're going to do again is come back now and we're going to do that row where we

 single crochet, chain one, skip one, single crochet, chain one, skip one, single crochet.

 And I want to show you now your next row you're going to actually be working your front post

 So your instructions are going to actually say that you're going to front post treble

 So we're going to wrap it around twice and insert your hook around the post of that treble

 Complete your stitch, single crochet, do your front post treble, single crochet, front post treble.

 And here we have a couple of rows so you can see what it's actually going to look like.

 So this is just a quick video about making these jig heads which are lead free and made

 So the jig head consists of a zinc or lead free fishing weight, this is a beaded type

 I've got a piece of stainless steel wire coming off which is a bit of paper clip and an angled

 jig hook, this looks like a 3-0 and it's just bound together with some twine.

 So first off I'm going to take a stainless steel paper clip and just open it up a bit

 And then with a little pair of pliers I'm just going to almost flatten it.

 I just want to leave the tiniest of eyes on one end and then I'm going to cut back about

 So this is my little bullet weight and I'm going to push these two bits through and they're

 So to knock that eye in and grip the weight all I'm going to do is just get a pair of

 pliers just to hold it, just rest them on the corner or something, a bit solid, and

 So now I've got my two bits of wire coming out my weight and I'm just going to trim the

 And then with my pliers I'm just going to make a hook and this hook is going to be the

 So then it's a case of whipping this to your hook using some thread.

 And I'm actually using embroidery thread and it's on a bobbin holder.

 There's a video, I'll post a link up about how to make one of these if you haven't got

 So I'll just roughly first, just to hold it in position, I'm just going to cut that tab

 In fact a bit of roughness will probably do better for grip of the soft plastic.

 If you tie your own flies and you know, whipping knots or half hitches, do whatever you want

 I'm just going to use the back of my scissors to run it along there.

 Super glue generally takes about an hour to fully set up, but over a day it gets a lot

 Other than that, if you're not happy just using super glue, is give it an over coat

 Maybe use some epoxy if you've got some 5 minute epoxy or cheap epoxy, araldite, whatever

 I've fished with these and never had a problem with them at all.

 You can see the strength in that already, but as I say, over an hour and a day, that'll

 So when you've finished your jig head, it's just a case of threading your soft plastic

 Here we go, it's one of these fluke stroke worms, stroke minnow.

 I'm just going to measure how far along, so I want my hook to come out, yeah, a quarter

 I'm just going to thread that down, try and keep it in the middle.

 With a few bites from a fish, hopefully, you might want to put a bit of super glue just

 It's bean season here and I'm really excited to show you these beans.

 These are grown in our cooperative garden with our friends, Beth and Carrie Olson.

 They have a pastured poultry farm and they've been growing these Spanish beans called Miralda

 We have been so loving them, just bringing home bags and bags of them every week when

 If anyone's interested in growing these beans, Beth tells me that you can go to ReneesGarden.com

 and that gardener, Renee, sells a climbing bean called Musica and it's the same as Miralda.

 So what I want to show you today is how I make this wonderful, fresh green bean salad.

 We're going to blanch the beans but we're going to flavor them with garlic and lemon

 So you've got to start with clean beans, of course, and you need to break off the ends.

 And if you're using French green beans or whatever green beans, you can use any of them,

 Although I have seen and I have done salads with long French green beans and kept them

 I removed any big, huge beans that are going to be kind of mealy.

 And then they are going to plunge into this boiling salted water to blanch, steam, only

 They blanched for five minutes until they were still bright green but softened, still

 They have to be drained immediately and rinsed under cold water until they're cool or plunged

 Now my original recipe is based on one pound of green beans and I'm guessing here, you

 know, this is so flexible, so you're going to see how I wing things.

 I'm guessing this is, oh, three to four pounds worth of green beans.

 So I'm going to go for, oh, between a third and a half cup of olive oil.

 You've got to give it a couple hours at room temperature for all those flavors to blend

 And then after it has time to mingle, you can serve it or you can chill it for later.

 I'm making a ginger turmeric tea which is a very warming and soothing drink to have

 as they are both decongestants, stimulate detoxification of the blood.

 it, but I like, I've discovered that by grating it finely it just gets more gingery.

 you have, depending on how much time you have, five minutes or 15 minutes, just let it infuse

I'm also adding half a lime or you can also, half an orange is a really

 straight edging the side of the carpet because the factory edges are never quite straight

 enough so you want to edge both sides before you put the carpet together.

 edge, edge in about a good inch on the carpet, all the way down the side here to make the

 edge here and I'm going to fold it back to keep it away from the wall because the seam

 a piece of carpet long enough to do the whole thing in one piece so we seamed it together.

Now we'll let the iron sit on the tape for a few minutes to heat it up.

 Generally I like to keep my iron heat somewhere between three and four but that can vary with

 it moves pretty freely by itself you don't want to force it so you know that the tape

 rub your hand back and forth like this and if you don't see a line you know you're getting

 I use my iron box as a weight to kind of hold it down while it dries.

 The reason we have to make seams is a lot of rooms come wider than the actual carpet.

 Of course when you have to join rooms with carpet to hallways and stuff like that you

 Alright, we still have about another 4 feet to go on this seam.

 Hi everyone, in this video, we are making an apple cinnamon French toast casserole.

 We're starting off with a couple slices of thick Texas toast and we are just

 kitchen utensil, lightly toss the bread, and make sure the bread is covered with

 we have about 2 tablespoons of butter and we're going to add in our apples at

 these apples for about 3 to 5 minutes, then we're going to remove it from the

 place our casserole in the oven on 350 for about 35 to 40 minutes.

 want to thank you all for watching, and don't forget to check out allfreecasserolerecipes.com!

 That way you can remember what color her belly is and stuff like that.

 If you're wondering why I didn't want you to color in the head right away,

 I'll need a brown colored pencil because Daisy's eye color is brown.

 Draw like a half rectangle, except for don't draw a flat end at the end of the rectangle.

 You need four of them, but don't work ahead because first, on one of her front paws, she has a white paw.

 You should go like half a line and then color in the upper part.

 And we'll put some lines here so we know that she's wagging her tail.

 After you've done that, make them big enough so that you can have a little ear hole.

 hey guys so today I just filmed my morning routine and this is my first

 like makeup tutorial video I'm pretty sure and so I'm super excited for you

 guys to see this and literally this video is 15 minutes long and then I like

 fixed all the clips and made it look good instead of looking bad and now it's

 four minutes that just shows how much I messed up but let's get started so right

 now you are basically just watching me force myself to get out of bed after 30

 minutes of procrastinating and this is not my room my room is being redone

 right now so I'm just sleeping in the office and then I just make my way to

 so the first thing I use is my Neutrogena rapid clear skin wipes and

 these you can really feel working and getting into your pores and while I'm

 waiting for that to dry I just brush my teeth and now I'm using my Maybelline

 BB cream and I'm just dotting that all over my face and now I'm just using my

 fingers to blend it in and this BB cream has very sheer coverage so I'm using my

 NYX concealer on top of that and I'm just putting this on all of my

 imperfections and using my knockoff beauty blender from Target to blend it

 in now I'm using my Rimmel stay matte powder and just putting this all over my

 face to set my concealer and then I'm using my Neutrogena oil-free eye makeup

 remover to remove any leftover eye makeup and then I'm using my concealer

 by Covergirl and just putting this on my eyelids as a primer and this actually

 works better than the elf eyelid primer and then I'm using my Naked Basics

 palette and using the color Venus on the inner corners the color WOS on my

 eyelid and then the color Naked 2 in my crease and using these three colors will

 result in a very natural but very pretty eye makeup eyeshadow look thing which

 made no sense but now I'm using my eyelash curler from Target and just

 mascara and this has a very small applicator so it's easy to get in the

 corners of your lashes now I'm using my Covergirl smoochies lipstick in the

 color hashtag sweet and now I'm taking out my bun to put in another bun.

 but anyway I am just spraying some water in my hair because I find it is a lot

 easier to put your bun in if your hair is kind of damp and now I'm just kind of

 gonna play with my hair to make sure the water is spread throughout and now I'm

 just doing the hair flip and gathering all my hair at the top of my head and by

 the way I take a shower the night before so that's why I don't in the morning and

 then I'm just wrapping the hair around itself to create a bun and then I'm just

 using my creaseless elastic from Target to keep the hair in place

 and we're done with the bun and now I'm just using my Suave hairspray and making

 sure all my flyaways stay down and now for the outfit I know you guys have seen

 this skirt like a lot but I think I've styled it kind of differently in each

 video but my skirt is from Brandy Melville and my sweater is from

 Marshalls so that's all for my morning routine and I hope you guys enjoyed this

 video and if you did remember to click the like button below and also give this

 video a thumbs up if you want me to do a get ready with me Halloween edition and

 also leave me a comment down below telling me if you want this channel to

 be focused on makeup and fashion or more fashion or more makeup I kind of enjoy

 fashion a little more but I still love makeup so just tell me down below and

 I'll try my best to do what you guys want and thanks again for watching bye

 Hi everybody, it's your friendly neighborhood Joe Fisher here again.

 We're going to rack from the Carboys, which are those two guys over there full of delicious

 For those of you who aren't familiar with Cornelius, we're going to talk about them

 We'll start with the commercial keg, which some of you may or may not have seen.

 It's got a little ball check so that when you snap the adapter on, this pushes down

 You can see it's a split ring just like your key ring for your car keys.

 A lot of times on this style of keg, you can see the end post always has a 12 point nut

 Ball locks are called ball locks because the fitting has a bunch of little ball bearings.

 What happens is the fitting snaps over the post and those little balls grab the post

 The Coke style of keg is a pin lock where there are little pins on the post and you

 The gas goes in, pushes the liquid out from the bottom, and it comes out here.

 They're usually shipped, if you buy them from a home brew company, they're usually shipped

 To take it apart, the first thing I do is I lift up the ring, vent the pressure, and

 You lift up this little handle here and the lid should pop loose.

 If it doesn't pop loose, either give it a little push with your thumb, be careful you

 don't cut yourself, things are sharp, or bop it with something soft like the handle of

 This one is actually full of seltzer because this just came out of my fridge.

 It's got a little rubber gasket and that seals against the back of the post and that prevents

 It has an O-ring here right at the top, which should be replaced.

 You can buy these in bulk if you go on a site like homebrewtalk.com and search for keg O-rings.

 You can probably find the part numbers and sizes from McMaster Car.

 So it's absolutely worth it if you're going to be rebuilding your own kegs.

 Because homebrew shops are going to charge you $2-$4 just for 3 or 4 O-rings.

 This dip tube goes all the way down to the bottom so that you can grab every last little

 Clean everything, sanitize everything, put a little bit of food grade silicone lubricant

 have on YouTube and I don't quite feel that they're covering everything that needs to

I live in Eastern Canada here, so right now it's minus 15 degrees Celsius

So if you want to grow these, there's a couple little tricks of the trade there

 I just take my mango and I like to buy the ones that are on sale, the ones that are nice

 and squishy, because I know that the seed inside is going to be ripe.

 middle and I'll get myself in there and you can see it's a juicy one for sure.

 than I like, but you can see this here was, this was ready to go in the garbage is what

 into this, remember you don't want to, you don't want to pierce the seed inside.

Okay, this here is a perfect example of what you're not looking for.

The easiest part about doing a mango, all you got to do, take your seed as

 climate, a good idea is to put a heater pad underneath it and let it grow that way.

 here and if you can see, there's a little green stem that's shooting out right here.

 it's going to take it to another level after that and then you're going to go to this stage

 here and you can see right there where this green thing that we're showing here, it split

 ground to this stage to this stage, you know, you're talking about three weeks and you got

 Hello guys, so for this particular project, it's a slight variation on the previous project

It's a little bit easier seeing as you're not having to thread continuous

 Once you get going, I'm not going to say it's easier because it's not, but it is a long run.

Now again, the sewing needle, the eye of the needle must be big enough for two

 pieces of material to thread through, but the needle itself must be thin enough to thread

You want one colour which will appear as the stem and then one more colour which will appear

 What you're going to do is you're going to snip them so that they're even, if they aren't already.

Take your sewing needle and thread the thread through the needle.

 So, my needle is thread and then you just want to pull this down a couple of inches,

 measure to the side and you can put your spare clasp to the side.

 take my green because this is the colour for the stem and depending on your preference, you can

 alter this, but I'm going to thread on, I don't know how I'm going to say this, but I'm going to

 You want to put that to the bottom so you have something that looks like this.

 your bigger bead, you might just want to mess about with this to find a good size,

 but what I'm going to do is I'm going to choose the petal colour and I'm going to thread on

 six of these, six of these and then you want to take the big bead and you want to thread that on

 is you want to take your needle, you want to take your needle and you want to bring your needle in

 and you want to bring it back through the first petal bead that you see, that you seeded on.

 you can see I just seeded it through the first petal bead that I seeded on.

 Now, you want to take your petal beads again, you want to take your needle and you want to

Now, you want to take your petal beads again, you want to take four this time.

 So, you now have something that looks like this and then you want to bring it up through,

 you want to bring it up through this, the bead that's just coming out of the big bead

 As you can see that was a lot simpler to make than the other one, it was a lot quicker.

 So, now something's like this then you want to bring it up through the top seed bead right there

 cutting the thread six to seven times as big as you want your final size to be

 This is Ty with GreenRegimen.com and this is week one of our intermediate smoothie series.

 By now, your palates should be pretty accustomed to drinking these delicious Korean smoothies.

 But if you haven't completed our beginner smoothie series, then make sure you do before

 Today we're actually going to be making what's called the low-cal smoothie and you'll actually

 And we're going to actually use ice this time, but I would say only about a half cup of ice

 And beta carotene pretty simply is, it's an element that once it's ingested into our

 bodies, our bodies turn the beta carotene into vitamin A, which of course strengthens

 And as you recall from our beginner smoothie series, cantaloupe is high in vitamin C as

 Watermelon high in vitamin A and high in vitamin C. As well as in the summertime, watermelon

 is a great fruit to actually eat or drink in a smoothie because it has a very high water

 Now chard can be found in a variety of different colors, such as rainbow chard or Swiss chard,

 Just like I did until I started drinking these green smoothies.

 I didn't even know that chard existed, but you can go to just about any grocery store

 And when it comes to these green smoothies, of course, the leafy greens, they have a high

 amount of vitamin K, a high amount of vitamin A, vitamin C. But what's also special about

 these green leaves is they have what's known as phytonutrients.

 Now phytonutrients are naturally recurring components that actually help us protect our

 So in essence, these green smoothies, these phytonutrients boost our health.

 So for this smoothie, we're actually going to use a cup of chard.

 Okay, now before I blend this up though, I do want to say that I've been getting a lot

 And then some people tell me that they've been a little creative and, you know, they

 might've thrown in a little bit extra green and all of a sudden when they're done, it

 Now remember from video one, I told you I've taken the time to measure this stuff out for

 And of course, when you've been doing the smoothies for a couple of weeks, a couple

 of months, sure, go ahead and throw whatever greens, whatever fruits you want to together

 So make sure you stick to the recipe as I've outlined it, because I have spent the time

 So you know, I also wanted to cover one more thing with you about these green smoothies.

 These green smoothies contain a high amount of fiber and fiber is great for our digestive

 So in essence, we drink enough of these green smoothies such as the low-cal as a great meal

 And this is where I'm trying to get you to, because once we get into the advanced series,

 More greens equals more fiber equals more opportunities to have meal replacements, low-calorie meal

 And another question I was asked is how long can I keep these green smoothies in the refrigerator

 So in my opinion, I say try to drink these green smoothies within 24 hours, maximum 48

 The recipe makes about four cups, each cup averaging less than 50 calories.

 The low-cal, you know where the recipe is right underneath this video.

 Well, maybe a little different, but more or less they taste like collard greens.

 So, the main thing that you're going to want to do is get rid of this piece right here

 So, we're just going to kind of skin, take the skin off on the outside here.

 what I like to do is just kind of cut it into little like carrot sticks or whatever.

 Maybe I'll try it cooked one of these days but for now I'm just eating them raw.

Good for putting in salads or just eating plain like I'm doing now.

If you see them in your local supermarket, definitely pick them up

 peeled garlic, red chili flakes, 1 peeled and chopped onion, olive oil, black pepper,

 mixed Italian herbs, a pack of pasta sheets which I am going to use raw.

 brand of sauces here which is Saccola Italia and I am using whole cherry tomato and basil.

 Their whole cherry tomato and chili one is my favorite as well.

In this brand you can also get the sauces which are suitable for vegetarians

 The mince is cooked nicely and I am just adding the sauces to it.

 cheese, 1 cup of olive oil or any vegetable oil, 1 cup of plain flour, dried chili flakes,

 a small pinch of black pepper and a medium pinch of chili flakes.

If you don't give it a few minutes, it will taste raw in your sauce and if you

It's very important to do it on medium low kind of heat and stir

Once we are adding the milk, it's very important to keep stirring.

And like I said before, I am using raw lasagna sheets or I haven't cooked

 You can either do that by a suspension component like a shock or a control arm or something

 The reason you loosen the lug nuts first is because the tire is going to spin if you have

 a two wheel drive vehicle and you're not on the drive wheels then the tire is going to

 So that's why you want to loosen the lug nut first then jack the car up.

 Make sure you don't take the lug nuts off obviously or the wheel could fall off.

 Make sure you include your safety jack stand as well as the jack.

 You may have to kick the wheel or the tire to get the wheel to come off because sometimes

 I'm going to put a little bit of anti-seize where the wheel meets the rotor just so it

 Lower the vehicle down and most vehicles it's going to be between 100 and 120 foot pounds

 for your torque on your lug nuts and you're always going to want to do a star pattern.

 You're not going to want to just go in a circle or anything like that.

 You always want to pump the brakes about 10 or 15 times after you do a brake job to make

 sure that the pistons compress on the pads which compress on the rotor so you don't go

 So make sure you get some resistance on your pedal before you go for a drive.

Well some people have asked for it and I've been putting it off for a while.

 Tonight I decided to make myself a little snack so I thought hey what a

 perfect opportunity to shoot a video for you and if you like this video we'll do

Today what we're going to do is we're going to turn these chicken

 breast tenders right here into a really yummy grilled oriental chicken.

 I like them because they're nice and thin and you don't have to leave them on

 the grill as long typically as you do a big fat chicken breast.

Okay so the first thing you do is take this Dynasty sesame seed oil.

 everything is coated with both the basil, thyme, and the color from the soy

Right before you put them on the grill your chicken should look something

You can see we've got the consistent color all through the chicken.

 You can see there's basil and thyme on everything and we put the oil on first

 these on here, close the lid, and we're gonna flip them in five minutes.

Oh always use a clean plate and fork when you do this by the way.

 don't want to get any kind of salmonella poisoning or anything.

Always a clean plate and fork when you're flipping and when you are pulling

 something nice if you like kind of hot spicy things check out this Bangkok

 Today we are going to make a dish that I used to eat a long time ago when I was little called

 Now these shrimp in the authentic dish are cooked with their shells on, which is what

 So let's go ahead and get started on our shrimp with tomato sauce.

 Now for our shrimp, I'm going to start out with a pound of large frozen shrimp.

 Now these are raw shrimp, which still have the tails and shells on.

 However, they have been cut down the back and the vein has been already removed.

 So these are perfect for this dish because they're still raw, but they have been deveined

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to go ahead and run these under some cold water.

 I'm going to soak them in the cold water just for about 20 minutes until they defrost.

 And here I have the two green onion, which I have rinsed under cold water and dried with

 And what I'm going to do is first chop off the ends, just like that.

 And then about an inch or so from the top of the green part, like that.

 And I'm going to just discard this here and then chop the rest into tiny pieces.

 And to do this, if you have large green onions like I do here, you just want to make a slice

 And once the green onion are chopped, we can go ahead and set them aside.

 And I'm just going to mix my chicken broth with my ketchup and my salt, the sugar, and

 It's okay if it's a little lumpy because the ketchup won't dissolve actually until it's

 I'm just going to mix together my cornstarch with a little bit of water.

 Now you just want to check and make sure your shrimp have defrosted.

 And once they have, you can go ahead and pour them into a colander and let them dry.

 And once the oil is hot, we can go ahead and add in our shrimp.

 And we just want to cook it until it's pink, slightly pink on either side.

 And once the shrimp are light pink, we can go ahead and add in our sauce and our green

 And once it starts to come to a boil, we can go ahead and add in our thickener.

 And once your sauce becomes thick, then you can remove it from the heat.

 And once you remove the wok from the heat, you can go ahead and place the shrimp in a

 We've got, we're using a Malibu Caribbean rum, coconut flavor, Malibu rum.

 We're going to garnish it with a big slab of pineapple right off the pineapple tree.

 We've got a Collins glass, and we're going to top it with the pineapple.

 Just because I don't want, I don't want there to be a fight between how I'm going to shake

 I don't know if foaming the squirrel is still as popular as it was in the early days.

 You can't put 151 in just a lowball glass unless you top it just to light it on fire

 They hide it in bananas and then they hide the bananas in a monkey.

 It's got a very nice pineapple scent because I've got this nice big old garnish on there

 If you could remove the taste from a blended banana, very much like a maraschino cherry.

 It's tasting pineapple juice, but the pineapple juice is actually very well masked by 151.

 Even though Malibu is pretty sweet, it's not balanced equally with the amount of parts.

 So you're getting a good punch in the face from the alcohol in this drink.

 If you're looking for something potent, you can probably make it more potent and use a

 But it is definitely more than you'd expect from a cocktail that looks subtle and sweet.

 Prepare to have your head 151'd off because this is some strong stuff.

 And if you could find other 151 to taste, I don't know if there's a difference between

 Check out the Caribou Lou if you're looking for a little potent cocktail that's a track

 This is a really delicious side dish to eat with rotis, kulchas and bread

 I boiled 3 medium sized tomatoes, removed the skin and grinded to a fine pulp

 To make paneer tikka in the oven, you can just put these in the skewers and bake it for about 180 degrees for 15 minutes

 Add ginger garlic paste, add some water and cook till the raw smell of the ginger garlic paste goes away

 I hope you guys like the dish and I will see you guys in my next video

 And we're welcoming you to Cavalcade of Food with a little bit of a switcheroo, me, in

 And the reason being that I am going to try making my mother's Spanish rice.

 My parents were both born in Mexico and I grew up watching my mom make this rice, but

 I've never tried it myself and I'm going to give it my best and hope it comes out.

 I remember watching her make it and I know she started off with a little bit of oil,

 She usually made enough for an army because of our large family.

 So you want that at about, you know, just medium, I think, heat because we're going

 to put the rice in there, two cups of rice, and we're going to let that get browned.

 I remember it being, you know, like enough to not make it greasy, but just brown it.

 I'm just, like I said, trying to remember my mom's, my dear mom's procedure, what she did.

 Okay, we've gotten the rice to be, you can smell the rice getting a nice toastiness to

 We kind of have it more of a rough chop, but a finely chopped onion would give it a nice

 I'm going to give this actually another little bit of oil because I don't want it to burn.

 And we want the onion and the garlic to be a little bit, you know, almost like translucent

 Like I said, I'm just kind of doing this from memory, from what I recall, watching

 my mom do it in the kitchen and having, for some reason, just not tried Spanish rice on

 And I'm thinking, well, it's about time for Ralph to learn how to do it.

 With Kevin's inspiration of being the wonderful kitchen chef that he is.

 So, but yeah, you can hear the rice is kind of almost crackling.

 I'm going to try to get in there, Ralph, so that people can really see the beautiful,

 And so the onion and the garlic are integrated into the rice pretty well now.

 And yeah, so you can use stewed or canned, I mean stewed or diced.

 And that's kind of a unique thing that not everyone does with their Spanish rice.

 Well, we're eventually going to lower it, but I think the heat should have probably been

 a little higher at this point because it should be sizzling like it did with that, with the

 And we had, you know, a bit of liquid, of course, in the canned tomatoes and not so

 And I know some people add cumin or some other, you know, Mexican flavors, even crushed peppers

 And then will this, like when you make normal rice, you bring it up to a boil and then turn

 And then we're going to, once it's nice and hot, we're going to, you know, as it gets

 to a simmer, bring it down to a lower heat and then cover it for about 20 minutes.

 So, so far, I have to say it smells right and it looks right, so I hope it all comes

 And one thing I have learned about rice that I've been cooking on my own is once it's covered,

 So I'm going to kind of keep it covered and I have a feeling that's about as hot as we

 Yeah, it's just starting to boil, not like a hard boil, but just like a, what is that

 And then we'll time from where we are now, about 10 minutes to three.

 Yeah, and then we take it off the heat and let it sit for another five or 10 minutes

 Yeah, it really does bring back some memories, so hope it comes out.

 Okay, it's been about 20 minutes and, you know, that time can vary a little bit depending

 So it's important to take it off the heat after the 20 minutes or so and let it sit

 and absorb the rest of the water for another five or 10 minutes, I would say.

 But yeah, I think it's coming along well and we're going to, you know, kind of fluff it

 So yeah, I think we've got the rice, the Spanish rice cooked just the way my mom did.

 Yeah, she was from El Paso, I believe, and I forget her real name, but it's a long, beautiful

 Well, thank you for joining us for this episode of Cavalcade of Food.

 I hope you enjoyed watching it as much as we enjoyed making the Spanish rice.

 Come summer and all that my kids want to do is run outside, play under the sun, play with

So today I'm going to show you how to make Indian style ice cream

 We are going to remove all four sides and then we will crumble this bread slice up.

 about 370 ml, one can and we will let our bread stand in this milk for about two minutes so that

Just crumble it up with your hand again a little bit and add it in and two tablespoons of

 Sweetened condensed milk about 300 ml is what we are using and last but not least we are adding

If you have none of these just use a fork and you know whip up everything together.

 molds like this, you can use a plastic cup big or small any kind and we are going to pour our

 mixture in this and we will let it freeze for four to six hours.

 our kulfi mixture in the glass container, plastic container and we are going to cover it up with a

 silver foil just putting a rubber band so that you know it's tight enough and if you want that

So after it has frozen, six hours later this is what you'll get.

 simply take the kulfi out of this plastic cup and serve it the way you like.

 watching this recipe video and will give this kesar badam kulfi a try.

 for you and we will see you soon with something more exciting so please do stay tuned to ET's

 Tindin channel and if you haven't already subscribed please hit the subscribe button

 on top and if you like the recipe do share it with friends and family.

 Hello everyone, my name is Jenny and today we are making a chocolate cake that has no

 This cake is great for those with allergies and those who don't want a lot of the ingredients

 For the dry ingredients you will need flour, sugar, baking soda, cocoa powder, and salt.

 The wet ingredients are vegetable oil, I'm using olive oil, white vinegar, water, and

 To reduce dishes you can mix all the ingredients in your greased dish that you plan to bake

 in, but I found it was way easier to clean the cooking dish if I mixed it in a separate

 One and a half cups flour, three tablespoons cocoa powder, one cup of sugar, one teaspoon

 If you decide to add chocolate chips, do that now, I usually add about a cup or so.

 Add one teaspoon of vanilla, one teaspoon white vinegar, five tablespoons of vegetable

 oil, and then pour one cup of water over the top and stir it up.

 Grease an eight or nine inch oven safe dish and pour in your mix.

 Put the batter into a heated oven and set the timer for 25 to 35 minutes.

 Because many ovens cook differently, when it gets closer to 20 minutes you should check

 If it's looking close to done, put a toothpick in the center to see if it comes out clean.

 If the toothpick is not clean, then you might want to try in a different spot because you

 My cake took about 40 minutes before the toothpick came out clean.

 When it's fully cooked, pull it out of the oven and set it aside to cool.

 I like to sprinkle a little bit of powdered sugar on top for a little decoration and a

 You will need confectioner's sugar, also known as powdered sugar, vanilla extract, butter,

 For this size of cake, I am making half a batch of this frosting.

 If you're making a bigger cake, then double the amounts that I give you.

 Mix together one and a half cups powdered sugar and one stick of butter.

 Whisks don't work very well to start, so if you don't have a mixer, a spatula works the

 When it's smooth, stir in one half teaspoon of vanilla extract and one to two tablespoons

 I personally like it best with two tablespoons, but that might just be because it's easier

 With an electric mixer, you'll mix for about a minute on low speed until everything is

 Then you'll bring the speed up to high speed for another two minutes.

 If you don't know what to do with your extra heavy whipping cream, you can check out my

 I won't pretend to be great at applying frosting, so I'll leave that up to you, but I hope this

 If you like this video, please give it a thumbs up, and if you aren't one of my awesome subscribers

 Thank you so much for watching, enjoy your cake, and have a great day!

 The French however, being far more sophisticated than we Brits could ever hope to be,

 Leave this over a very low heat just to simmer and bubble away.

 While you're waiting for the sugar, get yourself about half a dozen ramekins ready.

 When it comes to the boil, let it simmer very gently for about 2 minutes.

 Add a small amount of hot milk into the egg-sugar mix and whisk.

 just to get rid of any lumps that may have occurred during cooking.

 Add enough boiling water to come about two-thirds of the way up the ramekins.

 We'll bake this in the oven at 160 degrees for about 50 or 55 minutes.

 If you're gonna make Creme Caramel, it really is advisable to get ramekins.

 They're usually pretty inexpensive and they have lots of other uses

 One of the things you can do with these hooks is rig a swimming worm.

 Usually you have a swivel that weighs up the line so that you don't get your line too tangled.

 You can also rig a Solve Plastics Wacky Worm if you want by hooking in the middle.

 It gives you a chance to use some variety even if you're only fishing with one fishing

 One of the best things about this hook is it's fully adjustable to the weed cover that

 You can press down on the wire and you have a little bit less protection from the weeds.

 You can see the little tiny tip of the point is just barely sticking below the weed guard.

 If you need a little more protection, you can use a higher setting.

 One of the things that I like to do is if I see a bigger fish that doesn't take the

 frog, sometimes I'll quickly remove it off of the hook, push in on the back of the button,

 Now if I'm just going to make a couple of casts, I might not use the screw lock.

 I'll just hook it on right by the head, throw that a couple of times, and then if I don't

 It helps sometimes to make a quick check to see if you can get the fish, and sometimes

We're gonna start in boat, roll back onto your shoulders, squeezing the abs and roll up.

 Alright, tabletop, reach out, reach across, reach across, squeeze it back into the center.

 You can go up and over and then lift the legs up into what we call the jack knife.

 Now, you can point and flex to really stretch those legs, but you want to keep your tush down.

 We do a slow push-up, right in the center there, taking out the momentum.

Okay, so different variations there, starting with the push-up and then going right into it.

You're going to round that spine, slowly roll back to the shoulders.

 You can also take the arms out to the sides and bring it up if you're feeling nuts.

 Opening up, squeeze the glutes, shoulders back, and then back to down dog.

 We're getting those three big exercises in there with the decline.

 Adding a simple little angle to it can recruit a whole bunch of different types of exercises.

 And of course, my dog Addy patiently waiting for her dad to finish filming.

 Okay, so this video is about using the pillar drill effectively.

 Okay, now first of all, this is the piece of acrylic that I'm going to be drilling.

 Okay, now it varies very much as to how you use the pillar drill as to what material you're

 Now, some people often draw these big blobs where they want to drill these big circles,

 this is not a very effective way to position a hole because obviously if I bring my drill

 bit down, I could drill anywhere on that hole and it wouldn't be accurate.

 Whenever you want to do your marking out for a drill, you should always just do a simple

 cross like this, which gives you one very defined point right at the center of the cross

 Okay, now if we move over to the drill, we can see we've got a guard here.

 This protects our eyes from the spinning chuck at the top of the drill.

 And if we had a chuck key, we could put it in here to replace the drill bits.

 When we put the drill bits into the chuck, we want to make sure they're very straight

 Whenever I'm using the drill, I want to make sure that machine guard is out of the way

 and what I'm going to do is move this up just a little bit like this and there's a small

 And if we turn this clockwise to tighten it up, that will keep that guard just out of

 If you prefer and you want to be very safe, you can leave this down like this and it will

 move up on its own accord, but this can get in the way with your drilling and make it

 So I'm just going to keep that out of the way for the time being.

 Now it's very important whenever you drill any material or whatsoever that you keep the

 Now this is kind of okay and as you can see, if I just move this back a little bit, I can

 Now the problem with holding this thing like this is when I cut through the hole, I drill

 the hole through, if I'm left with nothing behind to drill into, it can create a cracked

 So we're not going to use the machine vice in this case, okay, but this is a valid way

 What we are going to do is we're going to use the G-Cram and we're going to clamp it

 Now you can obviously see that if I was going to drill this at the moment and I wanted to

 One, my drill doesn't reach down far enough and two, my clamp can't get to the position

 Okay, number three, obviously I've got nothing to drill into and I don't want this to happen.

 I don't want to be drilling into the base of my drill bit there.

 Okay, so the first thing I want to do is either get a brush or a cloth or my apron and just

 If we drill on an angle, it's very likely we're going to crack our work as we're drilling.

 Now what I need to do is bring this drill down now so it's going to go into the wood

 So if we come round to the back of the machine, we have a small handle here and if we just

 It allows me to spin the work backwards and forwards to allow me to clamp closer to the

 Now what I want to do with my sacrificial piece of work in the right place, I want to

 bring the handle of the drill all the way to its furthest position and bring the base

 of the drill up as far as I can so it's just touching into the wood like this, okay, but

 I'm also going to bring my drill all the way, the base of the drill all the way round so

 it's closer like this and just to make sure it's not moving around, I'm going to go back

 to my handle at the back here and just take this downwards like that and that will lock

 it into position so that's not going to move when we're drilling.

 Now it's very useful at this point if you've got another pair of hands, if you've got someone

 Now I'm bringing the drill down first of all and I'm just getting the tip of the drill

 going and this is very careful, you have to be as precise as you possibly can right into

 Now when I know that that's in the right place, normally I'd have someone holding this in

 position, okay, but what we're going to do is because I haven't got another person is

 So I'm going to lay the clamp on and slowly press the trigger to advance the clamp and

 Now as you can see what I've done is I've positioned it a little bit too far over, we're

 just going over to the line there so what I need to do is take it a little bit further

 away but basically the closer that we get to that point where it's drilling, the better

 it's going to be, okay, so we're going to clamp it close to the point but not quite

 Now, as with any powered machine I need to wear a pair of goggles, okay, when you get

 your goggles make sure they're clean and they're free of dust and hopefully not scratched.

 When we're using the drill we can bring our button up and we can see the green button

 will turn it on, okay, the red button here turns it off, the red button here turns it

 off, we also have a foot stop down here if for example we got something caught into this.

 Now you can notice by looking at me I've got my goggles on, my tie is tucked well away

 and luckily I don't have long hair but if I did have long hair I'd have to tie that

 back as well for health and safety because it could get caught into this drill bit.

 So I put the drill on and we advance the drill down until I'm in a comfortable position where

 You can see small pieces of plastic are appearing and I want to bring those out of the hole

 while I'm drilling so I'll just keep repeating this like this and because I've set the height

 of the drill correctly I know I can go all the way down, you can see there's a little

 puff of MDF dust like that and I can bring it out and stop my drill.

 Now I can unclamp this G-Cramp by pressing the silver button near the handle at the bottom

 and pushing it up and what we should find if we wipe carefully the swath which is the

 waste material away we can see the front and back of the hole is not cracked and it's completely

 Ok, so hey guys, for this DIY you're going to need some bananas.

 You could use any kind of sticks, the plastic sticks, whatever kind of sticks that you have

 You just want to make sure it's the microwavable kind is what I use.

 You can really melt any kind of white chocolate, but I like the candy wafers.

 You can get this at Walmart, Giant Eagle, any kind of craft store or anything like that.

 And it's normally by the Wedding Stuff and the Candy Molds and things like that.

 Ok, so we're going to take our bananas and what we're going to do is we're going to cut

 Ok, so what we're going to do is we're going to take our bananas one at a time.

 If your kids have parties around Halloween time this would be great.

 Ok, then what you're going to do is take your stick and put it up in the middle about half

 Ok, and then for the next part I like to put mine in the freezer for a little bit just

 That's a little overkill but I'll put them in there for about 15 minutes.

 Ok, so now our bananas have been in the freezer for about 15 minutes.

 We are going to melt our chocolate and I have my little handy assistant here.

 So we are going to open this bag which he said he was going to do.

 Ok, now when you melt chocolate in the microwave make sure you're really careful because chocolate

 Ok, so we're going to put this in the microwave and I'm going to start out in 30 second increments.

 I'm going to put it in for 30 seconds, pull it out, stir it up really good and see if

 So now we melted our chocolate and like I said be very careful when you melt chocolate

 Ok, so I left it in for about 30 seconds, took it out, stirred it and I put it back

 Ok, and here's our bananas out of the freezer and they're frozen so it will be easy to dip.

 That one's going to have a flat head because my oldest son peeled it.

 Ok, just stick it in there, swirl it around a little bit, coating it on both sides.

 Try to smooth them like that and this is what they should look like.

 And once you dip all of them, we're going to add M&Ms for the eyes.

 I would say if you have like chocolate covered raisins, I think those would look the cutest.

 I didn't so I'm just going to use some M&Ms because that's what I have.

 You want to work a little bit fast because chocolate is easier when it is really melted and soft.

 Ok, and then just for the eyes, I'm going to just put googly eyes, a little bit of chocolate.

 So super fun, super easy, a little bit nutritious because there is a banana in there.

 You can wrap these in cellophane or something for treat bags or something like that.

 But this is my ideas and I'll show you a picture of what they all look like afterwards.

 And if you have any questions, definitely just ask and thanks for watching.

 For this Wednesday's video, we're doing baking in a tiny house.

 We know some people think it's really hard to actually cook and bake like normal in a small space,

 and you do face some different challenges, but really, the end product is exactly the same.

 Today we're doing a family recipe of banana bread, and we have an old ripe banana.

 and so it had to be put in the freezer, and we're just going to put together a mixture and bake some banana bread.

 So the first thing I'm going to do here is put the sugar and the butter together.

 I'm not much of a baker myself in the sense where I know exactly what creaming means and how that consistency will be.

 But I am assuming after plenty of times of actually doing this recipe, we just need to mix well.

 And this butter right here, which we have already pre-measured, if I'm not mistaken, to be what it needs to be.

 The one thing about our tiny house and cooking is we don't have handles on these yet, so you have to be creative not to get food on it.

 It's not exactly creamy, so to say, because there's sugar in it.

 We ended up adding a half a stick more because once I looked at the recipe, we were a little bit short, so we just kind of melted that up a little bit and threw it in with it.

 After the eggs, we're going to go ahead and put in two thirds of a mashed banana, which is not currently mashed, but I do not foresee it being very difficult.

 Earlier you noticed there was one that was super brown and gross looking, and there was one that was super fresh looking.

 Supposedly, my mama always said that the browner they are, the better they are in baking and so forth.

 I'm sure all you baking ladies will have wisdom to add to that.

 But I'm sure if we have a little bit of an extra banana texture, it's not going to hurt nobody.

 And we're going to add the remaining ingredients, which is some baking soda, a tad of salt, and then our flour.

 As you can tell by this point, everything got mixed all together.

 By greased, we used coconut spray, which is supposedly supposed to be better, but spray's still not good for you.

 So if you're trying to be healthy, let's omit that portion and do whatever is healthier.

 I try to get every drop out because I'm pregnant and I have to limit my non-cooked egg supply, which means I'm technically not supposed to have any, which means what I don't eat, Jeff will eat, so forth.

 So as you may or may not be able to hear, our oven is kind of kicking on.

 We just kind of turned this little dial to 350, and it will cook.

 It's smaller than a typical oven, which is the reason it's able to function well in a tiny house.

 A lot of tiny house people opt not to have ovens, and some people don't even think it's possible.

 But this is a propane oven, so it doesn't draw any electricity, just propane gas, and it works really well for the space.

 So once it's ready to put in, we'll just stick it in for 30 minutes and pull it out and eat it.

 We just, 30 minutes later, pulled this banana bread out of the oven.

 Generally, you can know by sticking a butter knife or a fork in there when you pull it out.

 And yeah, that's banana bread baked in a tiny oven, in a tiny house.

 So frosting a rosette shape is kind of like frosting almost like a donut and

What you're going to do is start on one side, we're just going to

 just going to, to steady the cupcake, I'm just going to drop a little icing down

 cupcake, we're going to bring it around almost like a donut, and then bring it

 right into the center, stop squeezing, push in just slightly, and pull up.

We're going to start on one end, start squeezing, bring it in, it doesn't have to be very neat, bring it all the way around, come into the center, keep squeezing,

 keep squeezing, bring it right in, fill it up completely, stop squeezing, push in just slightly, and pull up.

 My name is Brett Bloom from San Diego and I've got the next 3D challenge for the GIF

 What I'd like to do is challenge the GIF community to come up with a land-based training program

 A couple months ago we went through the transformational zones of swimming and what we'd like to do

 now is really go through some of the specific exercises and training programs that we're

 Dave Gotfeld got the ball rolling really well with the 3D challenge for football, so

 hopefully we can just continue that momentum and develop a great program.

 That's what I like to do with our swimmers, is to get them into the true stretch and work

 Now remember, in the transformational zones of swimming, similar to throwing and similar

 to golf, the hips and shoulders are going in the same direction.

 Left hand up, right hand down, drive the pelvis saggily, then we'll drive the frontal plane,

 and then most importantly we'll do a little drive in the transverse plane.

 Because as that transformational zone happens, some of the first motion is that pelvis driving

 So as we're here, and as we're going to start to turn, that pelvis is going to drive.

 The next thing we do is really try to work on some of the areas we've noticed limit the

 So one of those areas is the posterior shoulder, lats, and all the front butt and rib cage

 musculature that limits our thoracic spine's usual ability to rotate.

 So really coming back, taking a big step back, getting that stretch, a lot of weight through

 So again, shoulders and hips in the same direction, hold on with that left hand, drive with the

 At the same time we're getting some extension through our hips.

 We're getting a little bit of rotation through our hips as well.

 After we've created some more range of motion in the true stretch, what we'll do is we'll

 We like to use a dowel to do this to really try to help to create some momentum that our

 So what we'll do is we'll start out in an XXX position and we'll do a left R45 step

 So the reason we do that kind of step is to get the hips and shoulders moving in the same

 So then we'll do a same step with a frontal plane, opposite side load, and then we'll

 Really getting the hips and shoulders moving in the same direction and that anterior butt,

 So again, while we're loading our front butt from bottom up, we're also loading it from

 So as we take that step, we're loading that front butt on that back leg, and as we drive

 Now obviously we can take it through any plane of motion that we want to.

 If we want to just go into a, here, we use the other leg, here, we do a traditional stretch

 matrix, but I really like the crossing over, it really allows better front butt load.

 So sagittal plane, frontal plane, we're kind of falling toward the right side here, and

 then we're going to do our sagittal plane load, excuse me, our transverse plane load.

 So the next thing we're trying to do after the stretch matrix is to really try to simulate

 what happens to that front butt as we're going through that transformational zone where we're

 starting to decelerate that motion and want a huge acceleration of motion.

 So as we're coming through and our hips and shoulders are going in the same direction,

 Now you can tweak that, add a little speed, or we can even tweak it by really putting

 Good, and the point is, and I don't know if we really focused enough during the transformational

 zone webcast, when you're going through that transformational zone of swimming, one of

 the most important things is that hips ability to decelerate that rotation left in this instance,

 So what we're trying to do is get that hip to decelerate and then start that rotation.

 Now if you want to use cords, that can be another great way to train this transformational

 So again, you can start out, we'll start out in XXX, use the same foot patterns we did

 So we can do a left foot R45 step as we're driving our hand into a posterior reach.

 You can speed that up a little bit, load, explode, load, explode, or we can do a right

 Same thing, hips and shoulders going in the same direction, load to the front foot, good.

 Again, same thing just from a different angle, again step, load, explode, those shoulders

 Hip driving back into its position, good, or right foot, and I kind of like that one

 I don't know why, it just feels like my hips move a little bit easier and I get a better

 The great thing is you can do all these things out of the pool deck too.

 A lot of times, in our land base training for swimmers, we don't have the ability to

 So we're going to do a little bit of a swim, and then we're going to go into a swim, and

 So we're going to go into a swim, and then we're going to go into a swim.

 With a lot of our swimmers, we don't have the ability to get into a channel, so we can

 use a chair, a lot of our drivers, do all the same pelvic drivers here, on the chair.

 We can do all the same, just use anything we see around the pool deck to do some of

 You see how to really use a stupid kick board to do some of your drivers with your stretch

 You can do a lot of things for your pulleys, or you can do working with, here, just use

 Well, thanks for the opportunity, let me show you some of these things.

 I can't wait to see some of the creative stuff you come up with, and you're welcome to swim

 Yeah, my name is Doug Paddock, I'm from Bennington, Vermont, and this is my product, the Pleco

 Basically, you would take a piece of squash, or cucumber, or zucchini, and you would just

 basically screw it onto the food, and then you would gently place it in your tank for

 your fish to enjoy, so you don't have to stick your hand in there, you're not getting wet,

 I was tired of sticking my hand in the tank to retrieve the rubber band that was tied

 to the rock that was laying on the bottom of my tank, I was tired of dripping water

 all over my living room while I was redoing my fish room, and I said there has to be a

 Can you tell me, what kinds of things can you stick on there, what's the best for like

 Oh, for Plecos, I have Plecos eating butternut squash, I have them eating zucchini, I have

 We're working with Repasci Food now to have a mold and mix up the Repasci Food and put

 this in there so this can be a delivery system for that as well.

 You can go to theplecofeeder.com and you can order it right online.

 Alright, so that was Doug at the American Cichlid Association's convention in Kentucky,

 I actually brought one of these products home because I wanted to share it with you guys.

 Especially compared to old school clips and stuff that I always used in the past, these

 things have the little suction cups and they just don't seem to work very long and then

 eventually this just ends up being a weight to hold the vegetables down and then when

 you're done feeding you've got to reach in there, pull it out, and it was always kind

 of a pain in the butt and to tell you the truth it kept me from doing it as often as

 I would like to because feeding fresh vegetables to your fish are a great way to just kind

 of vary their diet a little bit and get some good nutrients in there.

 Now some fish especially will only eat them if they're blanched.

 Now I'm told this makes it softer and easier for the fish to digest.

 That's the purpose of blanching your vegetables and just real quick let me describe how you

 Now the Pleco Feeder you actually feed it in larger chunks so I don't cut the little

 I cut them in kind of larger chunks and then I set water to boil and I set a timer for

 I carefully put the vegetables into the water and let it cook for three minutes.

 You can then use a slotted spoon to scoop out the vegetables and put them in a glass

 Now once you've fed the amount of food you're going to feed at that time you can take a

 plastic container after the vegetables have cooled down and throw it into the freezer

 This is a stainless steel product and it has some plastic parts here and here to kind of

 keep it from scratching up your aquarium or rattling around and making a lot of noise.

 Alright now setting one of these up to feed is a pretty simple process.

 It's basically a skewer and what I've done is I've left one half of the vegetables skin

 Especially after it's blanched it gets kind of squishy and mushy.

 So what I've done is I've left like the back half of the vegetable skin on and I'm going

 to run the skewer down the side of it and then turn it around and around and around

 and let it go through that skin and it'll kind of help hold that vegetable on there

 Alright so I've got my, I'll pick a piece of zucchini out here and what I'm going to

 I want to give the fish a little room where they can eat and just kind of get this thing

 Be careful not to get your finger, the end of this is actually pretty sharp.

 Now, you can tell from this part here that this is going to face outward of the aquarium.

 So what I do is I make sure that the skin is in the back and this one is ready to try

 And what you're going to do is you just slide it into your aquarium and what I've found

 Now I have a bunch of Eclipse tanks so I've got that Eclipse hood and they will fit, they

 will fit there and you can close the hood and the hood will kind of stick up a little

 So if you have an Eclipse also you can just simply hook it into anything that will stay

 I also was able to put this in the Fluval Edge and it's just barely long enough to go

 Now anytime you try a new food for your fish or you feed them in a different way, sometimes

 So what I would recommend is if you get one of these and you're trying it out, what you

 After that long I would pull out anything they haven't eaten and dispose of it.

 Now this isn't, this is a Placo feeder by name but I have tons and tons of shrimp and

 I don't think I've ever really tried to feed my shrimp zucchini before but they went nuts

 It took them a little while to come out and get accustomed to it but they also had a really

 They're not very expensive at all and they're just terribly neat.

 So that's all I have for you today and I thank you and I hope to see you again soon.

 It's kind of a recap of the live episode but it goes further because I've kept shooting.

 It's not looking the best but you know it is, I do want to show you where I'm at with

 Hi, this is the new Blaser R8 Jaeger and today we're going to discuss how to take it apart

 By doing this, we depress the two wings, remove the magazine, additionally inspect

 We depress the bolt release right here, bringing the bolt out and removing the quick disconnect

 Now once these parts are removed, you remove the barrel by taking your Blaser wrench, your

 5mm wrench, until it spins free and the barrel comes off the receiver.

 Now here's the great part of this, is that once you've taken the gun apart, you put it

 But here are a couple of tips that we use to maintain your gun so you get the full effect

 First of all, the barrel studs right here, they need to be devoid of grease.

 If you start having a problem with accuracy, clean them off with rubbing alcohol and make

 Secondly, in the mounting block itself, should be devoid of oil too.

 Our recommendation is to use some good alcohol and swabs, just wipe it off.

 The front nut right here, you use a long 5mm wrench to keep the forearm tight.

 Should that ever come loose, it will cause some accuracy problems.

 In the bolt housing itself, really the exterior of the rails need to be lubricated correctly

 Also a slight swipe of grease on the bottom of the bolt body and really everything else

 While we're talking about maintenance, let's look at the R8 barrel assembly right here.

 If there is any present, make sure you take a cotton Q-tip, denatured alcohol and clean

 Now when you clean the bore inside of the R8, this chamber area again needs to be devoid

 of grease and any solvent and we really recommend not using very harsh chemicals inside the

 The barrels are finished in such a precise manner that really just a good quality solvent

 and keeping the gun maintained is all you need to really get the best out of your rifle.

 In your left hand, take the receiver assembly and insert the barrel interfacing with these

 When you feel the wrench slightly flex, that is exactly 69 inch pounds.

 Now remember with the R8, when the magazine is removed, the gun always stays on safe.

 Place the scope on, again making sure that the inserts are devoid of grease and push.

 When you're looking here at the scope mount, it's very important to remember to fully engage

 Some hunters over the years have claimed that their blazer doesn't return to zero appropriately.

 Most of the problem is because they do not fully engage the scope mounts.

 100% accuracy, 100% return to zero, and you can switch calibers.

 Some of the more eccentric calibers are going to have to wait, but this is the gun right

 We have synthetics up to the Salu, the Jaeger right here is a mid-grade, but look at that

 We appreciate you listening to us, and we're going to do another segment in a little bit.

 Like I said, you just find the shapes around the edges particularly and you make that,

 I wanted to show you how I glue them because you can end up feeling like you're all fingers.

 What you do, I'll put this here, is you glue it, of course on the wrong side, the backwards

 Then to adhere it, some people use a brayer, but I just take the brush and I just brush

 If you use a firm brush instead of a soft brush, it'll just push it down into the fibers.

 I haven't decided yet if it's finished or not, but when I did it, I tore everything.

 I didn't cut any pieces, but if you want to, you can use one of these rotary cutters.

 I didn't get the cut this way, but ... Or you can use a straight edge.

 See, on this side, I wasn't too happy that all the values were the same.

 What I wanted to do was add a little light, so I added light here.

 Enjoy this process and enjoy just watching the colors and enjoy just creating.

 When you're railing through a corner to a wide exit and you spot that that exit is sandy,

 Straighten your exit path after mid corner as soon as possible so that you're exiting

 You'll exit the corner with a lot more momentum, traction and control.

 Don't be in a rush to continue the turn to get back to the middle of the trail unless

 As soon as I see I'm headed for loose terrain at the exit, I straighten my exit line as

 early as possible after mid corner so I'm not turning over the loose stuff.

 Your bike can still be on a lean, just make sure you're heading straight and keep that

 Because you're not turning over the loose stuff, you'll have improved traction, control

 Usually the hardest part when learning this technique is breaking that bad habit of rushing

 But turning over the loose stuff to get back to centre trail is exactly what will plough

 Remember, by the time you've reached mid corner, boost your eyes forward searching to find

 the exit to whatever's coming next, so that even on new trail you'll spot that loose terrain

 Now that I've got your attention, you should ride a wide and straight exit out of just

 Counter steering or simply just heaps of weight on that down outside foot are two ways to

 But how do you exit wide halfway through an S-Bend when you want to cross the trail to

 Alright guys, we're just taking the old line off here and then we're going to put the new

 Alright Jim, so why are we putting the electrical tape on there real?

 which we would never do, but if some guys do, maybe try to hand crank it onto a spool,

 not so much a reel like this, but a spinning reel, the whole piece of braid, the whole

 Alright guys, so we're going to put two-thirds of braid and one-third of mono.

 Just make a nice cut with a knife or a razor and hit the edges like so to knock any edges

 off and then we hit it with some 600 wet and dry to smooth it off so it doesn't snag

 Sometimes we'll do it more for the customer just because you don't want to take any chances

 Yeah, the way I finish it off, you really don't need to, basically you're just going

 to start another half inch and wrap it around the main maybe five or six times and then

 you just unwrap, basically unwrap the floss from here and tie it, it's coming over here

 I need to tell it's right if you look at it in the spirals, that shows you did the same

 That's pretty good there unless you want to go a little further.

 Black Tip H Fishing is brought to you by Bull Buster Brand Direct Fishing Lines.

 Hey everybody, this is Neil Bertrand with Cypress Cove Publishing, cypresscovepublishing.com.

 Today we are making a jambalaya called brown rice, black eyed peas and sausage jambalaya.

 I was asked to make this recipe using brown rice instead of white rice.

 A nurse called me who takes care of diabetic and cardiac patients and she helps them with

 So you can use instead of beef sausage, you can use turkey sausage or any kind of meat

 I always rinse my brown rice because a lot of times it would have some unhusked grains

 A small bell pepper and four cloves of garlic all chopped up in the food processor.

 And once you get it all stirred real good, cover it and press down the cook button.

 You don't have to stand over a stove and keep stirring the pot so the food doesn't

 So we're going to come back when it's done and I'll show you what it looks like.

 The food cooked for one hour and I let it sit on warm for 20 minutes.

 Neil Bertrand at cookbookdude.com also cypresscovepublishing.com.

 So you can buy our books at our website and it's also sold in e-book format on Kindle.

 Hey, what's going on everybody, this is Ken, and welcome to my unboxing and overview of

 So of course, these are the successor to the ATH-M50s which were released back in late

 And surprisingly, I have never used the previous version, the ATH-M50s, even though it's

 highly recommended or highly rated by a lot of reviewers or YouTubers, so I'm pretty

 So let's go ahead and get started with my unboxing portion of this video, and then I'll

 show you some of the new features that you can find on these headphones.

 Alright so I'm going to lift open the box, and inside of course, you'll find the headphones

 First impressions, it feels very solid, and definitely a very sturdy headphone when you

 It also comes with 3 different cables, first one is a portable 1.2m short and straight

 cable, the second one is a studio style 3m long straight cable, so it's a bit longer

 than the portable one, so it's designed for studio environment, and the third cable

 You'll also find some paperwork including the instruction manual, the warranty information,

 Very high quality leather, and it's quite nice that they include some sort of protection

 Keep in mind that this is not the full review, it's just a quick overview, and my full

 And by the way, if you are interested in a giveaway of these headphones, I might give

 one or two away to one of my viewers or subscribers in the next video, so I might do a giveaway

 So leave a comment down below or give this video a thumbs up if you are interested.

 So now the question that you're probably asking is, well what's different?

 What are the differences and what are the new features of the M50x compared to the last

 To put simply, the main difference here is the cables, or the connection.

 You can actually unplug the cable from the headphone itself, and as you saw in the unboxing

 So if the cable breaks, there's no need to go ahead and purchase another pair of headphones,

 You can fold up your headphones for traveling purposes, and it's also very flexible, so

 Something else I noticed right away was that unlike my Logitech UE9000 headphones, which

 attracts a lot of fingerprints, it's basically a fingerprint magnet, the matte black finish

 If you enjoyed the video, be sure to give it a thumbs up, and leave a comment down below

 telling me if you think that this is a worthy upgrade from the ATH-M50s.

 Thanks a lot for watching, and I will see you in my next video.

 Oh, don't forget to subscribe to my channel, my full review and maybe a giveaway, and a

 lot of technology videos will come very soon in the future, so be sure to subscribe, and

 Back by popular demand and because you asked for it, today I'm preparing my famous chicken

 I've got a yoga class in a few hours, so yalla, let's get started.

 I've cut up my chicken breast into pretty big size cubes and I've spiced up my chicken

 with an all spice blend, with olive oil, with some turmeric, I've even added some oregano

 But if I were you, whatever you've got in your pantry, whip it out and spice it up.

 I guarantee you that you'll find things in there that you didn't know you can use.

 While shopping at my local farmers market, I came across the most gorgeous red bell peppers

 I found some red onions too that are going to give a really nice sweet flavor to these

 And for a more meaty texture, I'm using some fresh, local grown mushrooms.

 That's because if you're barbecuing, or in my case, baking, it keeps the skewers from

 I would probably add some potatoes to this to give it a little bit more of a hearty flavor,

 I'd probably put some apples in there, give it a nice sweet flavor and a filling flavor.

 And I'm going to add some garlic truffle oil, a little bit of salt and just some cracked

 pepper, put them in the oven along with my chicken kebabs and get them ready for lunch.

 I've preheated my oven to 350 degrees where I'm going to bake these kebabs.

 So for all you guys that don't have access to a barbecue, either for the cold weather

 or you just don't happen to have a barbecue, you can bake these guys and they come out

 just as succulent, just as juicy as you would if you put them on the barbie.

 Lunch is served and everybody's going to go gaga over these kebabs.

 this dollus is sure to blow off your minds by working so perfectly.

But soon you're gonna find out that what I spoke was truly correct.

 gotta need a bit more salt than you usually think you actually need.

 a small amount of this because I've already made tons of them and at last I've thought

 magic is in the flour and water and the salt is for preserving it and not letting this

Ok for now I hope you guys like my easy stylus idea which is only made

 We got Taylor as always, my name's sous chef, James, my day sous chef.

 They're going to be putting together a four set of pizzas here.

 The four pizzas they're going to be making are the four that you're going to find on

 APN and VPN are just two organizations based out of Naples that kind of relegate the standard

 Anybody can say they make Napolitan style pizza, but unless you have these certificates,

 So the four pizzas are going to be a margarita, traditional margarita, named after Queen Margarita

 Key components to this pizza is San Marzano tomato sauce, basil, parmesan, bocconcini.

 Next pizza they're making is a marinara, which is another traditional pizza, San Marzano

 The third one's going to be a pomodoro, which is San Marzano tomato, basil, and a whole

 And the fourth one's going to be a ripieno, which is ricotta, bocconcini, basil, and parmesan,

 We don't do five, we don't do six, we don't do seven, just simply because when you work

 with a 900 degree oven, it's tough to get them in and out in time without burning them.

 All our pizzas are charred on the bottom, as they were in Naples day one to right now.

 Might look like he's using a putty knife, but it's actually what we call a torch here

 at Puccinella, just to loosen up the pizza dough from the granite.

 When they're loading these pizzas up, they got to be quick, because again, 900 degree

 oven means a very hot oven, and you'll burn that base before you char it.

 So total cook time on one of these pizzas is anywhere from 60 to 90 seconds for a perfect

 Obviously it doesn't cook in the oven the whole time when you're cooking four at a time,

 because you'd burn the base, like I've said a few times already here.

 So total time for four pizzas is going to run roughly five minutes.

 Build up a little flame, it's going to cook the outer edge of our pizza and build up the

 Our oven's 100% wood burning, there's no gas assist, no accelerants of any source.

 This Honeycomb Stitch is a brioche knit, which means it is light, fluffy, and has some great

 Before starting the Honeycomb Stitch, I am going to first knit two rows in Stockinette

 This first row is repeating Knit One and Knit One Below, which is K1B, across the row until

 I have an entire video dedicated to learning the Knit One Below Stitch, and the link is

 So if you are not familiar with this stitch, please go check it out.

 At the end of your first row, I like to hold out the last slipped stitch.

 It makes it easier to find when you are starting on the next row.

 So on row two, we will pick up that slipped stitch and knit it along with the main stitch

 Repeating again, pick up the slipped stitch and knit along with the main stitch on your

 Row three, we will first knit one below, and then knit one, and continue this until you

 On our final row four, we will first knit one, and then pick up the slipped stitch and

 I suggest always completing all four rows before you put your work down.

 This helps you not needing to figure out where you left off when you come back.

 So we just continue these four rows until your piece is the length you desire.

 Look how cool the Honeycomb Stitch looks using different yarns and needle sizes.

 If this video has been helpful in learning the Honeycomb Stitch, please hit LIKE.

 Coming up, I will share my FREE pattern to this Elegant Knitted Scarf in the Honeycomb

 And when you subscribe to Studio Knit, you will receive a new knitting lesson every Monday.

 Learn more knitting skills, like Knit One Below and the Bee Stitch.

 This is one of our newest survival kit bundles and it includes the following.

 Three waterproof solid magnesium bars with embedded flints or fire starters.

 It is also covered in black coating to protect your clothes from stains.

 And then, it also has three serrated metal strikers which can also serve as a small sole.

 And finally, three extra long chains that total up to 17.5 inches which you can use

 For this tutorial, I will demonstrate how you can start a fire with this survival kit.

 The first thing that you need to do is to make shavings of the magnesium.

 We need the magnesium in shavings or in a powder-like form in order to make fire as

 To make the shavings, simply take the serrated metal striker and then use the saw-like edge

 About the size of a penny is fine and that's around 0.75 inches.

 While you're doing this, you can keep your tinder such as dry grass, leaves, paper, or

 Now that you're done with the shaving action, use the flint or fire starter part of the

 Strike the striker on the flint and let the sparks from this motion fall into the pile

 As you can see, you have to put your tinder at this point to keep the fire going.

 But I wouldn't do it in this video since I am doing this indoors.

 But as you can see, the fire caused by the magnesium shavings is intense since it bore

 Now just remember that when you are trying to keep a fire going after you have made fire

 This means that you shouldn't add too many big pieces of firewood on your pile because

 As always, if you have any questions, please don't hesitate to get in touch with us through

 To see the product page of this 3-pack magnesium fire starter and striker, click this instead.

 To see our other available fire card bracelets and survival kits, go here.

 All in all, you can go to our main website at www.friendlysweet.com to check the rest

So part of some recent Halloween activities, I went to participate in the zombie

 syndrome which is this really cool interactive play that they have here in Vancouver and you're

 running around the city and trying to save the world from being taken over by zombies.

 small so it's really- I like this cool zombie hand coming out of the ground and then on the back it

So I'm going to show you guys how I cut up this kind of sexy weave all the way

 along the side, kind of zigs in and out so it's wide at the top, skinny at the boob and then wide

 at the waist again and then in and then out again at the bottom.

 kind of design so it's up to you guys however you want to make how wide the cuts are and then it

 is making lines from the neckline down to the armpit, kind of in a triangular shape like this.

 For me I put pins into the shirt to kind of guide where I want to cut but I'm basically

 freestyling it but if you guys are not comfortable with that you're more than welcome to draw the

 the shirt inside out because you don't want the pen marks to be on the outside but the best thing

 to use is fabric chalk, also called tailor's chalk because it's specifically made for drawing on

 clothes so if you have any of that lying around that would be the best option.

 the first few cuts I'm gonna weave it and secure it with a bobby pin so it doesn't unravel and try

 off the collar yet because this was printed on American Apparel t-shirt so it already has a lower

 neck than the usual crew neck so I kind of like it and then it kind of creates this little hole

I think I'm going to cut them a little lower just because here you can't really see any skin

 so I'm going to cut them a little bit wider so there's a little bit more room and if you like

 this look you can totally just leave it like this but I'm going to continue this all the way down

So I'm using a metal rule to guide a straight line as I cut each row a little

 bit deeper and then I'm going to continue down the rest of my t-shirt in a curvy pattern doing

Of course it's always better to cut less than to cut too much because you can't go

 backwards so as I go down the shirt I'm just doing small cuts and once I put on the t-shirt and I see

Now that I'm wearing the t-shirt I found that it's easier to adjust how wide each

 strips or you can weave all of it and see how you like that look.

 the side so if you are concerned about seeing too much you can just weave it on up.

 the description box below I'm going to put helpful links in there including a blog post with lots of

 photos of this exact same concept of t-shirt cutting but applied in different ways.

 you couldn't really see the bottom because I have blue pants on I changed to white shorts so you can

I also do this on the other side so it matches in the note but yeah that's

 interested in participating in the interactive play that I'm talking about the zombie syndrome

 Today what I want to do is show you how to remove this outer cloth bag from your Centria

 Sometimes what happens, there will be some stains that will get on the bag or there will

 be some pet hair or dirt that actually gets on the inside of the bag and you need to get

 One of the easiest ways for me to do it is actually remove this bag from the vacuum itself

 I don't recommend washing the outer cloth bag every week or else the color will start

 Maybe once a year or if you've bought a used Kirby and you realize that there is someone

 else's dirt on the inside of this bag, it's always a good idea to toss it in the washing

 I've shown this in another video so hopefully you've watched that and gotten this far.

 Next step is going to be to press this button to release this top part.

 The next thing we want to do is turn this emptier boot counterclockwise.

 The next step is going to be to pull this tab, this little cloth, pull this up around

 The next step is going to be to remove this upper plastic portion like so.

 This is probably the most difficult part of the whole task and that's going to be removing

 It's basically a plastic hose clamp and the easiest way to do it is to take a flat head

 screwdriver and just slide right underneath that band and pry out on it.

 The next thing we want to do is take the screwdriver and gently push it underneath that edge and

 If you don't feel comfortable with throwing it in the washing machine, you can just turn

 Take it out in the yard, lay it up on your fence or out on a sidewalk or on your driveway

 or on your deck somewhere and just hose it off with a water hose.

 This one's been cleaned already so there's really not a lot of pet hair.

 I'm just going to, at this point, I'm just going to do everything in reverse order and

 Just wash it either, like I say, in the washing machine or wash it with a water hose and then

 Then we're going to stretch this rubber portion of the bag back over this boot.

 You probably can't see it on the camera but if you could, you would notice that there's

 If you notice real closely, there's also a line on this rubber ring.

 When you do that, most of the time it'll be just about perfect.

 Our next step is to take this cloth strip, push it into this hole and then work it around

 One thing to remember is that this portion of the clamp always goes right along in here.

 We're just going to put that clamp like so and then feed it into there.

 We want to check it and make sure it's sitting in the groove all the way around in which

 What I always do is just take the screwdriver and push it up on there.

 Be real careful when you're doing this because if you're not careful, your screwdriver could

 slip out of place and it'll hit your finger and it'll hurt really badly.

 It's going to be to put the boot back down on the vacuum itself.

 There's a little bump here, a little notch, and there's a little one on here.

 You line those up, set it down, plunk it in place, and snap this in.

 Just remember what I was saying about washing and drying the bag.

 I wouldn't wash it in a washing machine that had a broken part in it because it could tear

 If you've got a good washing machine that doesn't tear your clothes up, I don't think

 If you don't feel comfortable with throwing it in the washing machine, then by all means

 Hey guys, it's Kasey and this is going to be a video on a hair tutorial for this little

 It's kind of like a waterfall braid but a lot easier and a lot quicker to do.

 And it's just taking two strands of hair, twisting them, and pulling another piece through.

 And so you're using the same two original pieces as you were when you started the braid

 I don't know how good of a help the video will be, but I figured I might as well try.

 I found out about this through, I think it's called the Beauty Department.

 Something to do with Lauren Conrad and it's one of her websites, kind of on all things

 I will have it linked down below along with the link for the actual article that I read

 It kind of took me a while to try to figure it out, but then once I got it, it was really

 I kind of messed up like 5 million times when I was making the video, so we'll see how it

 Either tweet it to me or post it on my Facebook page or anything like that.

 So I hope you guys enjoy this and let's just get right into the video.

 Okay, so to start off, I'm just going to comb through my hair just to make sure I get out

 Okay, then after I have my hair kind of in a side part, which is what it is at now, I'm

 going to just take that side and pull it over into a little piggy tail.

 I also have dark hair, so it's kind of hard to see the definition between the three strands

 So, I'm just going to take a section of hair as if I were to be doing a French braid.

 I'm going to section that off into three and begin my braid by taking the top piece and

 pulling it down to the bottom and moving the other ones up one.

 So once I have that, I'm going to take this bottom piece now and drop it to the bottom.

 Then I'm going to take the two other pieces that I had and I'm just going to twist them

 upwards until they are horizontally facing the top of the ceiling.

 Okay, so then I'm just going to adjust my grip so that I have kind of a good grip on

 I'm going to take another strand of hair and hold onto that and just place that in between

 the two strands of hair as you can kind of see and just pull that one down.

 I'm going to once again take the two strands of hair that I was previously working with

 So we're keeping with the same two strands of hair and just pulling another piece through

 It's kind of hard for me to get it so that I have a nice strand of hair that's not all

 messed up with the others, but you've got to be a little bit handy, I guess.

 And so I'm just going to take those two strands of hair, once again pull the hair through

 So you're working with the same two original pieces and just twisting as you go and pulling

 Similar to a waterfall braid, but you're not incorporating the extra piece in, you're just

 pulling it through and letting it hang and then twisting the two.

 And it's okay if it starts to get loose because you can pull it in closer.

 So then once I have, you can kind of see how it's just one strand of hair that's pulled

 all the way through and then the other ones are kind of twisting around that strand of

 And sometimes I have to use my other fingers to kind of pull it through, but it works.

 So then once I get it as far as I want to with the waterfall part, then I can just take

 the two original strands of hair and twist them as you would a normal twist where you're

 Okay once you get to the end of where you're done twisting, you can just kind of pull the

 hair as flat as you want it to so that you don't have a lot of bumps up top.

 Then you're going to just take whatever is left, pull it to the back of your head, and

 I'm going to pull it to the front of my head, bobby pin this onto the back of my head, and

 then pull this side of the hair kind of over it to cover up any bobby pins we have or whatever.

 I know that I probably didn't do the greatest job showing it just because it is hard with

 my color hair and the lighting and all that sort of stuff, but I hope it kind of helped you out.

 I will have the link down below for what the inspiration was from and what I kind of learned

 It's just really simple, really cute, and easy hairstyle for school.

 You can vary it by depending on how many twists you do in between each pull through.

 I did mine somewhat thin so that they're more evenly dispersed into my hair.

 There's many different ways that you can make this your own, so I hope to see you guys make

 I hope this was easy to understand, although I know it probably wasn't, but I hope it was.

 And yeah, I hope you guys enjoyed this video and I will see you guys later.

 What's up guys this is Derek Howes with The Protein Chef and if you've been

 looking for a delicious and healthy bodybuilding tuna salad recipe look no

 further this recipe is one of my favorites and it's really quick so let's

 Take out a bowl and the first ingredient you're going to add into it is two cans

 or eight ounces of drained tuna and then two tablespoons or 14 grams of bacon

 bits, a pinch of black pepper, 1 teaspoon of parsley, 1 tablespoon or 15 grams of a

 no sugar added sweet relish, 1 4th a cup of chopped celery, 1 4th a cup of chopped

 red onion, 1 teaspoon of lemon juice, 1 container which is 5.3 ounces or 150

 grams of plain Greek yogurt, and then two chopped up large hard-boiled eggs.

 hard-boiled eggs all you have to do is follow the instructions that you see on

 As you guys saw the tuna salad is done so now I'm just gonna try a bite.

 think all I have to say is that all the flavors come together and it's like a

 for this recipe fat-free mayonnaise or cottage cheese instead of Greek yogurt.

 As far as the calories go in the whole recipe there's 577, 21 grams of fat, 13

 scale this recipe up so if you want to double or triple it to have enough for

Three, if you're watching your carbs use lettuce instead of bread.

And five, whatever type of tuna you want to use is completely up

 that thumbs up button, leave me a comment below, or share it with your friends.

 First, the mayonnaise tastes great, but it's loaded with all kinds of unhealthy stuff.

 Number two, tuna is a fish like swordfish and many other fish that contain mercury.

 Today, I'm going to show you a way to make a delicious tuna salad with no mayo that burns fat

 and a way to block 92% of the mercury content and make it really healthy.

 And I just chunk the pieces of organic red pepper and half of the organic avocado.

 Next, we take three teaspoons of organic extra virgin olive oil

 and three teaspoons of balsamic vinegar and six turns of the lemon pepper mill.

 Next, a handful of organic fresh parsley and then we pulse and mix.

 Then we take a handful of organic sunflower seeds and a handful of organic dark flax seeds

 And now we're going to add one can of albacore, white tuna and water, drained, and then hand mix again.

 I broke down all the tuna and make sure all the mixture is mixed all together.

 There's two types of lettuce and some fresh organic spinach as well.

 And I put my tuna in here and it forms a mold and then I transfer it to the plate of lettuce.

 Men's Health Magazine did a research study on how to block mercury from fish.

 And if you add a couple of mint leaves on top, that will even add more to the fat burning.

 If you've watched my channel for very long, you know how very fond I am of my raspberry

 Still beautiful raspberries, but I wanted to get them all off before the first hard

 So I went out a couple of different times and picked a few little bowls here.

 The raspberries produced very heavily this year and I was very pleased.

 I was a little worried when we had such a late spring, but they bore pretty much from

 But one of the things I do right after the first couple of little light frosts is I try

 to go out and pick red raspberry leaves because they make a wonderful tea.

 And it's at this point that I want to put in the little disclaimer that I am not a doctor.

 I am not a certified healthcare professional in any way, shape, or form, and I am not giving

 But I'm telling you the benefits of drinking red raspberry leaf tea are well documented.

 In fact, if you put in that very little quote, benefits of drinking red raspberry leaf tea,

 So I will post a couple of those for you below this video in the show more section in hopes

 The stems are a little prickly, so sometimes it's just easier just to go ahead and snip

 And cane is just the word you use for the stem or the plant of the raspberry.

 I'm going to pull back the leaves so you can see it a little bit.

 The other kind of cane is the really new ones that only came out in the last few months.

 I like to collect my leaves off those younger canes because the leaves tend to be less beat

 The older canes sometimes are kind of yellow like this or bug eaten.

 You can see I've collected a whole colander here full from big leaves to little leaves.

 But I try not to get any that appear dirty or bug eaten or have holes in them.

 The other thing I like to do is I like to collect them a couple of days after a rain

 because usually that washes the dust off or any kind of debris that's on it.

 I clean a sink very, very well, fill it with cool water and then submerge my leaves.

 If you look at the bottom of your sink and you see a lot of dirt in there, just wash

 I won't get it all off because the leaves have a tendency to kind of stick together

 And so even when I take them to the dehydrator, they're very wet.

 It doesn't hurt if it sits there a few minutes and just drains on out.

 And usually this is what I collect, just one big colander full.

 There's still tons of leaves left, but this is really all I need for the winter.

 And then I take them to the dehydrator and I just start pulling the leaves apart.

 Usually when I use the dehydrator, I put everything in a really flat single layer, but I have

 so many leaves here that they would more than fill my eight or 10 dehydrator trays.

 So I do stack these a couple of layers thick and they overlap a little bit because after

 the moisture is, I mean, after the surface water is off the leaves, then I'll be able

 to go back to those trays and separate them much more easily to make sure everything dries

 It's kind of hard to describe what red raspberry leaf tea tastes like.

 So I may just throw in a bag of peppermint tea as well and let it steep.

 You can add sugar or honey or lemon juice, whatever you like, just like you would prepare

 We're just going to stack them up and keep going until I get a whole dehydrator full.

 The bright colors are the leaves that are facing up and the paler color is the bottom

 And I believe in drying herbs at the lowest setting I could possibly get away with and

 So I just take them off the dehydrator and put them in a big old bowl.

 And then I take my quart jar and I just begin pushing them down in there.

 And this batch that I made made a full quart jar and a little more.

 When I want to use them I have a little tea ball that has holes all in it, a tea infuser.

 There's a little extra bag I had that I'm going to give to a friend.

 I just crush up a little bit of the tea leaves and put them in that diffuser and then I put

 them in my tea cup and pour the boiling water right over them and let them steep.

 And it cost me nothing except for the little tiny bit of electricity, about eight cents

 And the rest of it was just an investment of my time going out harvesting the leaves,

 coming in and stripping them off of the stems, washing them, laying them out on the dehydrator

 trays and then plugging them in my dehydrator and dehydrating them.

 They easily fit in a quart jar or you could put them in a bag or you could vacuum seal

 Be sure to check the references below so that you can find out what the benefits are of

 Hi, this is Imogen Lamport from Bespoke Image and Inside Out Style.

 What I'll do if I'm taking this to the optometrist is I'll check out my frames based on whether

 With a frame like this which is two-colored, I'll look at both sides.

 Or if they look like the glasses don't blend with the frame and you notice that the two

 When I put these glasses on, what you'll see is that you really notice the frame and the

 Then other elements of frames that you might want to think about.

 The bridge is the part of the frame that goes between the eyes.

 You can have a heavy bridge like this one is, and this is quite a narrow bridge.

 If you've got really wide set eyes, a heavy bridge or a narrow bridge is going to help

 If you've got close set eyes, go for a lighter and wider bridge.

 Then we want to think about where the bridge sits on the frame.

 If you have a frame like this where the bridge sits right at the top, near the top of the

 If you've got a long nose, you don't want to have glasses with a high bridge.

 Instead, look for a frame that has a lower bridge like this one.

 If you need a deeper prescription glasses, say for something like progressive lenses,

 If you have a shorter face, think about going for a rimless or half rimless design if you

 If you have a long face, you can happily go for a design that's longer and deeper with

 If you're going for half rimless, think about where the rim goes.

 This one lines up fairly much with my eyebrows, so we only have one extra horizontal line

 If I went for a half rimless where the rim is on the bottom, what happens is my eyebrows

 Then I create another horizontal, so it's a little bit more shortening on my face than

 If I had a shorter face, I might want to think about only looking for a half rimless design

 That's just a few tips on how to choose some frames the next time you have to go to the

 beautiful red rose which will never die because it's made by play-doh.

 into a thin layer of play-doh and use your fingers to make it thinner and more

 small piece of play-doh and squeeze it into another petal and wrap it around

 making more petals as you like to keep the best shape of the flower.

 wrap around the stick, it's better to put the stick into a small bottle so it

 This is how the play-doh rose looks like compared to the dry rose.

 want to know how to dry roses, you can check out my website below as well.

 this play-doh roses, you can let the air dry as well so it will be harder and it

 We recently did that article on internet fasting and I got a lot of questions on what I eat

 So I wanted to show you my whole foods meal replacement smoothie that I do every morning

 I calculated the calories and the macronutrients as far as the proteins, fats and carbs.

 So if I need to change up how many carbs or fats I want to do for the day, I just pull

 The other thing I love about this is that it's highly portable.

 If you have to run out the door, take the kids to school, head off to work, you blend

 You don't have to worry about cooking, sitting down and eating, cleaning and everything.

 And the third thing I like is that this is just a large amount of food.

 And if you were to sit down and eat this amount of food, it would be really difficult.

 Your body can absorb it a lot better, a lot faster and you don't really get really full

 So what I start with is, I'm going to start with 10 ounces of almond milk, unsweetened

 Then I'm going to put in 2 tablespoons of ground flaxseed meal.

 It's great for inflammation and also a lot of soluble and insoluble fibers in there.

 The next thing I'm going to add into there is 2 cups of black emperor's rice.

 And the reason I like black emperor's rice is because again, it has the most fiber of

 Then for my protein powder, I do 2 scoops of warrior blend raw protein.

 Then I'm going to move on to the fruits and vegetables and the other stuff that I add

 As long as you buy organic free range eggs, you shouldn't have any problems.

 The yolks in there are loaded with nutrients so make sure you eat your yolks.

 So let me just hold this up so you guys can see how much food is on here.

 I use about a quarter cucumber, a whole apple, a whole orange, a whole banana, and one whole

 It's kind of funny because it's a process because there's so much food.

 What I start out with is I'm going to load it up with all the heavy stuff first and I'm

 I'm going to blend that down so I can get the rest of the ingredients.

 Now I just add the final, which is more or less my powders and then blend them in there.

 And I'm actually going to have to add a little bit of rice to that too.

 Finished product eats a lot, okay, but like I said, it's really easy for your body to digest.

 Alright guys, I gotta go because I'm starving and I'm going to eat this right now.

 I start by gluing together several boards to get a board of the total width that I need.

 I'm using some of my long-reach clamps to make sure the boards line up when I glue.

 The final width just barely still fits through my thickness planer.

 I'm using a sort of box joint to joint the top of the laptop stand to the sides.

 I couldn't be bothered to put a dado blade in my saw, so I'm just making several saw cuts for each slot that I need to cut.

 So, that was a more complicated cutting sequence than usual for those fingers.

 Some people suggest that I add some kind of quick release so I can just pull the carriage home.

 I would have to cut 240 full-width joints before that time would be amortized.

 So, I cut these fingers a second time because I had extra length left over.

 it lines up with those holes and I can accurately drill through here.

 So, I didn't drill a hole in every possible position because I didn't think I'd need that many dowels.

 So, now I need to drill the same pattern of holes in the end grain of the shelves.

 And I'm gonna use my doweling jig the way it's meant to be used.

 And to position the jig, I've clamped my doweling T-square on here.

 And I've got the same marks that I lined up the jig with on here.

 So, I'm gonna put the dowel jig on here and line it up with those lines there.

 Before I assemble the stand, I need to add a rabbet to the back edge for the back panel to fit into.

 These need to be just a bit longer than the pre-made ones, so I can't really use those.

 Now comes the moment of truth to see if my dowel holes actually line up.

 Before I can put the top on it, I need to cut some small pieces of wood

 But, those will fill up if I do a little bit of sanding and varnish right away.

 Now squaring out the end of that rabbet that I cut on the table saw earlier.

 So we're going to have a look at some bluesy riffs but we're going to start off with a

 really traditional, the very very first blues intro that I ever learned, and it's really

 fun to learn, so right from the beginner level it's nice and fun to do.

First finger's on the B string on the 3rd fret, 2nd finger's on the 4th fret of

 Another way you might do it is you might add the 3rd finger to get it.

 doing today are going to be in that key of E. Now let's have a look at another cool bluesy

This is taken from a Steve Ray Vaughan riff that I really, really liked.

 We'll do it in the open position and then we'll do it up the neck.

What it is, my 2nd finger, sorry let's just show what's going on with the right hand.

 My 2nd finger of my picking hand is going to be picking that bottom string and my pick

 is going to be picking the other notes, whatever notes they are.

And then when I go to the next note I'm just going to do 2 open notes.

 B string which is the 2nd string and play them together and then come back.

 If you're doing that up the octave you simply cover that fret position with the 1st finger

Just to make sure you get a nice flat 1st finger there so that sounds

 It's the grooviest cake you'll ever make, and it's super easy to do.

 The first thing we're going to do is we're going to preheat the oven to 350 degrees.

 Now we're going to add two tablespoons of oil, one and one-third cup of water.

 You can use butter and just get butter all around and then toss it with some flour, or

 Each bowl is going to get about three-quarters of a cup of the batter.

 Now that we've got all our batter divided, we're going to be adding our food coloring.

 This one gets about 15 drops, or I like to just put in about two-thirds of this little

 Then into this one, which is going to be orange, I'm just going to put about two more drops

 Then the last one, which will be the purple, I'm just going to finish off this little bag

 The yellow is going to get divided between the yellow, the orange, and the green.

 You're going to put about a third of it into the yellow, a third of it into the orange,

 The blue is going to go into the green, the blue, and the purple.

 One of the pans is going to go red, orange, yellow, green, blue, purple.

 We're going to start with the red and put about half of the batter right into the middle.

 Then we're going to grab the orange and do the same thing right into the middle.

 Next, we're going to take the other 8-inch pan and we're going to go backwards through the rainbow.

 And it's really important when you're pouring these that you make sure that you're not touching them,

 that you're letting them just fall naturally into each new layer of batter.

 Now that our oven has been preheated to 350 degrees, we're ready to pop the cakes in.

 And I would bake them for about 25 to 30 minutes or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.

 Our cakes are out of the oven now and we have let them cool about 5 to 10 minutes.

 You want to be able to touch the pan, but the cakes are still going to be warm.

 Otherwise, they're really hard to get out if you let them cool completely.

 So to get them out, I kind of bat the pan back and forth to loosen it from the bottom and the sides.

 So we are going to crown the top layer off so that when they're stacked, they'll lay flat.

 And I kind of turn the cake counterclockwise while I slide the knife through it.

 So now that our cakes have been crowned, we are going to assemble them on a piece of cardboard here.

 And one thing that I like to do is I like to grab a little dab of buttercream and just lightly ice the bottom of the cardboard here so that when you put the cake on it, it acts as a little bit of a glue so the cake won't slide around on the cardboard while you're icing it later.

 And now we're going to throw a layer of this yellow buttercream here in the middle.

 Hey guys, so today's video is going to be pretty much just the look I've been going

 My white balance was all crazy and it made me look really orange and it's annoying.

 Anyways, so I'm putting on Estee Lauder's Double Wear Light in the color Intensity 3

 And then I'm using MAC's Pro Longwear Concealer and I think this is the color NC20.

 Now I'm really tan and so this concealer, it looks like I'm putting a lot on but it's

 So that's why it looks like I'm putting a ton on but I'm really not.

 So I'm putting that underneath my eyes and some highlighting areas and then using the

 And yeah, I like to have that really kind of bright contoured look on a daily basis

 And then I'm using MAC's Mineralize Skin Finish in the color Light Plus on a small brush from

 Now I'm not using Emphasize anymore because it's too light for me now and it would just

 look crazy bright under my eyes so I'm just using that powder instead.

 And then I'm using Soft Focus Powder from MAC Pro and this is that yellow one in my

 And I like this because my skin has been really turning pinkish no matter what I put on.

 So I use that to set my foundation to really give it the more yellow look.

 My face is looking really red, or sorry, my body because I was just outside before

 And then I'm using MAC's Dark Deepest Mineralize Skin Finish to contour and bronze.

 It's one of the new colors that we've just come out with and it is perfect.

 And then I'm using the Emphasize Powder just to highlight my eyebrow.

 This is a synthetic brush from Sedona Lace from their synthetic 12-piece kit, I think

 And I'm using that on a MAC 217 brush and just putting that in the crease all the way

 My dog chewed up my soft brown, so I kind of switched over to this and I absolutely

 If you ever see me do that with my hands in my videos, it's because I kind of use that

 So anyways, I'm using Rice Paper Now to highlight my inner corners and then I'm using All That

 I've been trying to be really simple lately and very like natural, fast, kind of all that

 So then I'm using Bronze from MAC and putting that in the outer corner.

 And I'm sort of winging it out a little bit, but it ends up looking more soft.

 It doesn't look like a really kind of edgy, kind of hard edged kind of look.

 So I'm just putting that in the outer corner, blending it in a little bit.

 And then I'm also putting that underneath my lower lash line as well with the same brush

 Most of the way in, not all the way to the inner corner, but most of the way in.

 And just sort of pressing that really close to the lashes and pulling it down just a tiny

 And then once I have that on there really nicely, I take my 217 brush and just blend

 And I'll kind of go underneath the edge of that wing a little bit too, just to make sure

 So then I'm using my Physician's Formula Eye Booster in the color Ultra Black, my favorite

 It doesn't crease up into my crease, which a lot of gel liners do.

 The only thing annoying is that if you see in the inner corner, it sort of runs.

 If my eye runs a little bit, it'll run in that first couple seconds.

 You'll see in a second, I'll show you a little comparison between both sides of my eyes.

 It's ridiculous, as you can see, how big it makes your eyelashes.

 And then I'll also put it on my lower lashes as well, just to make sure those are nice

 And then I use this new MAC Pro Longwear Brow Gel in the color Emphatically Blonde.

 And I like putting that on top of that because I've liked the lighter brow look.

 And I'm using that just with the same powder brush I've been using throughout the video.

 And it gives you a really beautiful kind of natural rosy pink look.

 And then I'm using Global Glow which is one of the new mineralized skin finishes that

 And it's more of like a really, really, really light bronzy color.

 So I put that all over my cheeks as well and a little bit on my nose and my chin too.

 It's sort of like a natural-ish, plummy-ish, pinkish kind of mix.

 It's going to work your whole body and the first exercise is going to be a medicine ball

 So what you're going to do to begin is you're going to go ahead and get on your knees, pick

 So we're going to explode, pass it from the chest, come down, push up, catch it, and pass

 And the next exercise guys is going to be the single leg wood chopper.

 So what you're going to do is you're going to get down into a split squat position.

 Make sure both your legs are in a 90 degree angle and what I want you to do is I want

 you to go ahead and twist to your left, down, and you're going to bring the ball all the

 When you're done, after you're done with half the repetitions, you're going to go ahead

 and switch legs and you're going to do it from the opposite side.

 Okay guys, the next exercise are going to be medicine ball slams.

 So what you're going to do is you're going to start with your elbows bent and your medicine

 I want you to use your lats, your core, your arms, and your legs to slam it down on the

 The last exercise is going to work your core guys and they're actually called medicine

 So you're going to get flat on your back, put the medicine ball in between your knees,

 To your left, touching the floor on the side of you, and to your right.

 Please go to our Hasfit fan page and like us and please go to hasfit.com for your workout

 Today we're making another pressure cooker recipe and it's going to be pork chops with

 Ingredient list is you're going to need some pork chops of course.

 You're going to need a teaspoon of salt, a teaspoon of pepper, two tablespoons of flour,

 three quarters cup of beef bouillon, and one medium head of cabbage chopped.

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to salt and pepper these pork chops up and

 So the first thing we're going to do is salt and pepper each one of these on both sides.

 Alright after you've salt and peppered your pork chops you're going to heat up your oil

 or you can use bacon squeezins which is what I'm going to use instead of oil.

 Okay after your oil is heated you're going to brown the chops only on one side.

 I repeat brown the chops only on one side and depending on how big your pressure cooker

 And in your case if you weren't using bacon squeezins you're going to add the oil.

 Now what you want to do is add just a smidgen of your beef broth in there.

 Alright now after we do that we're going to add our cabbage goes in.

 Alright now we'll take our beef broth and we're just going to pour that around.

 Now remember the cabbage is going to release some liquid on its own and so is the chops.

 So you should have a pretty good amount of liquid in there right now.

 No we're going to set the pressure to high and then we're going to let it.

 We're going to do that for 12 minutes and then we're going to let the pressure release naturally.

 Alright we've let the pressure come down on its own and we have some beautiful looking chops right there.

 So now the next thing we're going to do is I'm going to remove the chops and I'm going to remove the cabbage out of this.

 And I'm saving the liquid and then I'm going to make a gravy with the flour out of the liquid.

 And I'm going to bring my liquid up to a boil and then I'm going to add my flour.

 And depending on how much liquid you have, you may end up having to add a little bit more flour.

 For all your enhanced 4WD suspension needs, take out the gas, install EFS.

 Over the years, we've found that if you drop the air out of the tyres just a bit when you

 start to hit the dirt, all I'm dropping it down is about 4 psi because I want a little

 Also, you've got to be careful not to drop the pressure out too far.

 If you start dropping it out too far, you're going to get a bit of roll in the tyre, and

 then of course, we've got a lot of load on this truck, so you've got to take in mind

 Jase has already explained about what you do to your tyres when you get onto corrugated

 The second rule of thumb, when you hit sand, you can let your tyres right down to the lowest

 BF Goodrich tyre, we've chosen this tyre because it can handle towing the big boat

 over the rocks and corrugations, and it also has the surface area when you get down to

 The surface area when we drop those tyres down increases two-fold, and hopefully this

 Apparently Roddo's been whinging to me he wants the night off from cooking.

 I've only got a few ingredients I've pulled out of the Waco, and basically with a few

 bits and pieces and a couple of bits of sauces, I'm going to be able to knock you up a nice

 A few ingredients, a couple of shallots, some celery, and some capsicum.

 I've got garlic, I've got some ginger there, a bit of lemon zest, something like that.

 Do all those sorts of things if you like, but that's all I've found in the Waco.

 Now my pan's getting pretty hot, because I want it absolutely smoking in there.

 Now if you have a look at that, you can see the pink's just gone out of the meat, which

 Now while that's just cooking there for the time being, I'm going to do the sauce up quickly.

 Alright, so I've got my lemon zest in there, and then I put a bit of BBQ sauce in.

 There's a fair bit of moisture in there with that meat, so that'll make the sauce.

 Now the idea is this is quick, simple, fast, easy meal to cook, especially when you're

 You can see the moisture in the meat there has created our sauce with that sauce that

 All we need now is our rice, so I'll just check my rice, see if my rice is going.

 The key to rice is, a lot of people boil rice, so it's all gluggy and crap.

 But the trick to rice is to put the amount of rice in, the amount of water.

 And then when that boils, you then turn it to low, and then you sit it there and you

 If you want it to taste like when you go to the Thai restaurant, that's how you do it.

 And if you have a look at that, that's a quick, simple meal in the bush, made from a few simple

 There's like three ingredients in there, other than all your sauces, but three ingredients.

 And the meat should melt in your mouth, because you haven't overcooked it.

In this video I'll show you some tips on how to remove trim when you want to reuse it.

 Although there are many types of pry tools available for removal, when you're removing trim particularly, you don't want to use a pry tool that's way too big.

 This dude's designed for big demolition projects, you don't want to use them.

 Then this dude here, although it's a little bit smaller, it's still way too thick and not near broad enough of an end.

A lot of people are familiar with this and use this primarily for removing trim.

 Although I would recommend we use this, I would use it in tandem with this little dude here.

 Very thin edge, very sharp edge, this is exactly what you need to get that trim started.

 Take your razor knife and cut along the edge right where the two surfaces meet between the wall and the trim.

 To make sure that you cut loose any dried paint, caulking or anything along those lines that's going to keep this trim from tearing up that wall when you take it off.

 Once you've cleaned the paint and trim from the top corner, take the very thinnest edge of your small pry bar and work it in behind the baseboard.

They think, well I'm behind it, I can give it all I've got to try to pry it off.

 What you want to do is you want to just very gently give it a little bounce, cheat it off, cheat the pry tool down a little farther and work the whole edge until the whole thing is completely loose.

 Once you've gently cheated the trim from the wall, go ahead and remove the entire piece from the wall.

 Any nails that stay sticking out of the wall but stay in the wall, not in the trim, go ahead and just very gently tap them in.

 Then, any caulk that remains hanging on the wall, either take a sharp scraper or putty knife and very carefully cut it off so it's nice and clean with the wall.

 In nails that are left sticking out of your trim, a common mistake people make is they'll grab their hammer and they'll drive this nail out the face.

By driving it out the face, it'll drive the putty out of that hole, creating a larger hole and sometimes even split the wood.

 The way you need to handle this is you need to take a pair of pliers or channel locks or dikes, grab the nail from the back side, twist it out the back side of the wood, leaving the surface untouched.

 Once your work's been performed on your wall, you have your wire run or you've installed your cabinets and you've cut this back to it,

 take your trim and take your razor knife and on the back edge, make sure you clean off any excess caulk or anything and take a little putty knife and maybe a piece of sandpaper and hit it a little bit so it's nice and clean and ready to go back on.

 Now that you have a clean piece of material and you have it back on the wall, you're going to re-nail it.

 Don't nail it through the same holes as it was before as it won't hold as well.

With a little bit of care and effort during removal, a little bit of nail touch-up and caulk and a little touch-up paint, you'd never know this baseboard was taken off.

Today I'm going to show you guys how to build a cable cam out of basic materials that I found at Home Depot.

 So the materials we're going to need for this project are a spool of rope, two clothesline pulleys, one 12 inch piece of 1.5 inch PVC, two 8 inch pieces of 1.5 inch PVC,

 two sprinkler clamps, and one piece of 1.25 inch threaded rod with a washer and a nut at each end.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to take the clothesline pulleys, the unthreaded rod,

 we're going to take the PVC, slide it through the second clothesline pulley, just like that.

 Now we're going to attach a washer and a 1.25 inch nut at either end.

 Once it's all put together, it's actually going to hang this way on your clothesline or your rope.

 So the next thing we're going to do is we are going to attach two of these sprinkler pipe clamps to the middle of this.

 One is going to attach to the camera and the other one is going to attach a weight to balance out the angle of the camera.

 Here's what the finished rig looks like with the mini-fig or top handle for the camera.

 This attachment here can also, you could probably drop it all the way down and attach it to a cold shoe,

 The reason why we have this extra piece of PVC sticking out here is because right now the camera is looking pretty level.

 I was expecting it to be out of level, but depending on the weight of your camera and the size lens you have on it,

 you may be able to shift this from this side or the opposite side.

 Then you'll be able to put a weight on it and you can increase the angle front or back so that the camera is level.

 Alright, so let's imagine that your rope is 50 feet or 100 feet long and you have it spanned between two trees.

 Well, you've got to let it go at one end and you don't want to slam it into the tree at the other end.

 So what I've kind of come up with was I found this pretty strong roll of line or small rope, whatever you want to call it.

 So if you set your distance with your line at one end, just before the tree or just before whatever you have it attached to,

 and then hold on to the other end, this can cruise along all the way until the rope stops, until you snag the rope.

 Now what I think I'm going to do is attach a bungee cord on the opposite side that's attached to me,

 so that when this thing stops, it doesn't come to an abrupt stop that it's got some sort of cushion instead of an abrupt yanking stop at the end of the line.

 So we're going to take this outdoors next and try it out and see how it does.

 Alright, so this is part 2 of my 4-look last layer Fritter tutorial, which is 2-look PLL.

 Now if you didn't see part 1, there's a link right here and in the description, so go check

 Now just a refresher, what PLL is, is after you orient the last layer, so you get all

 the colors facing up, you see a case and you permute all the pieces or put them all in

 Now what 2-look PLL is, is when you see a case and you apply an algorithm to permute

 all the corners and then another one to permute all the edges, which obviously isn't as fast

 Alright, so there are going to be a total of 7 algorithms you need to learn for 2-look

 PLL, which combined with 2-look OLL makes 14 or 16 depending on if you know how to

 Now you have to be sure that when doing the corners you completely ignore all the edges.

 So for example, I see that these 3 are matched up, I'm going to ignore that and just see

 So I'm going to match up this corner, I see that the headlights are in the back, ignoring

 So you have to be sure to just ignore all the edges because full bars and 2x1 blocks

 and whatnot can be very distracting when trying to recognize a corner case.

 Alright so the first 2 corner algorithms we're going to go over are 3 cycles.

 So it's going to cycle like this corner, this one, and this one, or this one, this one,

 So now what you need to do is match up one and only one corner.

 I've matched up this one and these 3 are messed up, which is actually what I want for this.

 And this, I see the headlights are in the back right here with this corner on the right.

 So these headlights need to go to here because their red needs to go to red and this needs

 And the algorithm for this, this is the counterclockwise quarter cycle, the algorithm for this is small

 Alright so now for this case I'm going to match up one and only one corner.

 So I see I matched up this one or I can match up that one, but I can't match them up like

 And this time if I hold the corner on the right, the headlights are on the left.

 So I'm going to turn it this way so that the headlights are in the back and the corners

 on the left and I see the orange headlights need to go to the right.

 So this is the clockwise corner cycle, which is small l', u', r', d2, r, u', r', d2, r2.

 Okay so the last corner case for 2-look PLL is when you can't match one and only one corner.

 I go to match up say this one, the opposite one's also matched up as well.

 And so that just means these two need to be switched and these two need to be switched.

 And you can hold it from any angle as long as the yellow's on top.

 And the algorithm is x', r, u', r', d, r, u, r', u2, r', u, r, d, r', u', r.

 You only had to learn three algorithms and now we only have to learn four more to complete 2-look OLL and 2-look PLL.

 This edge case I see when all the corners are matched up, which they are,

 I see that this edge needs to go here, this red and yellow edge needs to go here,

 And a good way to recognize this is just look at the middle edge and if it needs to go to the left, it's clockwise.

 I'm going to hold the bar in the back and I'm going to do r2, u, r, u, r', u', r', u', r', u', r'.

 So I have the full bar in the back and I see that the one edge in the middle needs to go to the right.

 Alright, so these next two cases will be recognized by no full bar on any side.

 So you will have headlights on every side, like always, and no edges will match up on any side.

 This case, which these two edges need to be switched, and these two edges need to be switched.

 And you're going to easily recognize this because orange is opposite red, and see orange and red.

 And blue is opposite green, see blue and green, and so on and so forth.

 And be careful because it also has no full bar, so it can be mistaken for the h-perm.

 So these two need to be switched, like this, and these two need to be switched, like this.

 And the algorithm for this is also very similar, so be careful.

 Alright, so that's just about it for two-look OLL and two-look PLL.

 I hope you learn it, and I hope this improves your times greatly.

 Hey, I'm going to show you how to crump your hair with a strainer.

 Make sure you don't spray it and then straighten your hair with it,

 There's a sticker on it saying 4GS and some writing that says WiFi.

 So, that blatantly shows it's fake because there's no such thing as a 4GS.

 The American plug socket thing, but I ain't got no use for that.

 And instead of a normal iPhone silencing switch, it's a button.

 You have to press it instead of switching it, which is fake as well.

 Hey guys, welcome to my kitchen and in today's video I'm going to be sharing

Okay so to make these burgers we're gonna need, we're gonna start off

 peppers here and then for the buns I have some whole wheat buns here.

 trying to find some gluten free ones I couldn't so I'm opting for whole wheat.

 At least it's a little better and then for the marinade for the mushrooms and

 It doesn't have a flavor which is why I like to use it in dressings and

 garlic powder or you can use fresh garlic as well and some Greek seasoning

 include all the ingredient list for you guys on my blog so you can go ahead and

 until the mixture starts to get a bit thicker and as you do this it's going to

 kind of emulsify and you can tell right there it already becomes thicker.

 marinade on there you want to leave it to marinate for at least about 15 to 20

 minutes and once it's ready we're gonna throw it on the barbecue.

 that they had a chance to marinate all I'm going to do is just pop them onto

 those grilling pans that you can put on the stove that has the marks or you can

 over to the other side and I've also put in the buns here too to get them nice

 Okay so now that it's all done all there's left to do is give it a taste.

 knife and sort of like fork and knife but you know what I'm gonna attempt to

So make sure to make this for your next family gathering or any kind of

 anybody that these are vegetarian and see if they figure it out.

 friends and family, leave me your comments below and follow me on

 Instagram for daily pictures and I'll see you in the next video.

 Now, as I said earlier, they can be marinated at least overnight.

 Today I am making protein bites that are made from dates and nuts and seeds.

 So the first part of the process is to use a half a cup of walnuts and a half a cup of

 almonds and process them in a food processor, like this Cuisinart that I can't get undone

 And then we're going to add sesame seeds, hemp seeds, chia seeds, and dates.

 Okay so what I do is I've got a cup of packed dates here and these have been pitted and

 And then what I will add, I'll add the chia seeds, the hemp seeds, and the sesame seeds

 And then once the dates are to a consistency that I like, and I'll show you what that is,

 then I will add this mixture to the bowl along with some pure vanilla, some clove,

 So one fourth cup of sesame seeds are added to the walnuts and almonds, and then one fourth

 cup of chia seeds, and then lastly one fourth cup of hemp seeds.

 And these hemp seeds I really like, they come from Nevitas Naturals.

 I like that it's a stand up pouch because it makes it easier to pour.

 And hemp seeds are loaded with protein and antioxidants, so they're a great addition.

 And so I'm going to get the dates processing and I'll show you what...

 And then we want one teaspoon of pure vanilla extract, and then one tablespoon of cinnamon,

 and then I also like to add clove to it because I think cinnamon and clove go so well.

 Oh, and then of course we want a couple of pinches of sea salt.

 So I just keep a bowl on top of my stove so that it's easy to grab like that if need be.

 And now you just want to evenly disperse, if you can, the seed and nut mixture throughout

 And basically at first it's going to seem like it's never going to adhere to one another

 And you can also obviously press it down into a cake pan or something similar and cut it

 Um, and I don't know, the consistency isn't totally changing yet, but it will.

 The sesame seeds and the hemp seeds have a very nutty flavor, so it's really nice aroma.

 I might need to add two or three more dates just to get it a little stickier, but you

 And then I'll show you when it's gotten to the consistency that I'm looking for when

 You can see that a bunch of it is clumped up over here and then some is over there.

 And then we'll put it in the freezer and then when you're ready to eat it, you just want

 And you can eat it before you go somewhere, like if you're going to the golf course and

 you need a little pick-me-up or if you're going for a run, what have you.

 If you want to know where to get this Cuisinart, I'll include a link to that online as well

 Thanks so much for watching and if you like this video, please give it a thumbs up.

 Helps our channel grow and helps us bring you more videos like this in the future.

 Hello folks, this is Cord from Woodsmith Cabinetry at www.cabinetsaz.com.

 Right now I'm going to talk to you a little bit about basic cabinet terminology, cabinets 101.

 A lot of people call that a wall cabinet or an upper cabinet and this is a pantry cabinet.

 The other type of base cabinet is a vanity base which we'll talk about in a minute.

 I'm just going to explain to you some certain key and basic things about these types of cabinets.

 It's 34 1⁄2 inches high and when you put the 1 1⁄2 countertop on top of it,

 The toe kick is typically recessed back 3 inches and these base cabinets come in all different sizes.

 You can get them with drawers, you can get them with drawers and doors, you can have a bank of drawers.

 You can have a false drawer if you wanted to have a sink or a cooktop on the base cabinet.

 The other type of base cabinet is a vanity base cabinet and the vanity base cabinet is always 21 inches deep.

 And then they have a higher version which is 34 1⁄2 inches, the kitchen height,

 which is for adults or some people just like that higher vanity in the bathroom.

 Upper cabinets come in the same type of different widths, 9 inches all the way up to 48 inches, every 3 inches.

 Upper cabinets, they're 12 inches deep, always, in the type we carry.

 And upper cabinets can be made to accept glass if you request it.

 And upper cabinets typically are about 18 to 20 inches above the countertop in the kitchen.

 They're either 30 inches tall, 36 inches tall, or 42 inches tall.

 anywhere from 84 inches tall, that's 7 feet, to 90 inches, that's 7 1⁄2 feet, and 96 inches, which is 8 feet.

 And pantry cabinets typically are 24 inches deep, just like the base,

 It's cooking and crafting, yeah cooking and crafting, it's YouTube's best for creative things

All we're going to need is a cake mix, seriously, or you can make your own white cake.

 Alright the first thing we did was we preheated our oven and Bain is going to help me grease our cake, our fluted tube cake pan.

 So you hold this and you put your finger on there and you spray.

 While Bain is having fun I'm going to talk to you a little bit about Noreen's Kitchen.

 I'm going to have her link down in the description box as well as at the end of this video.

 She's going to be doing a red white and blue berry ripple no churn ice cream which would go fantastic with this cake.

If you enjoy her please subscribe and let her know I sent you over.

 So what you want to do is you want to use whatever cake mix that you use.

 And this one is 3 egg whites, 1 1 3 cups water and 2 tablespoons of vegetable oil.

 So that's what we're going to add but if you're going to be making your own white cake do what you gots to do.

 Alright and we're going to put in 2 tablespoons of vegetable oil.

 Okay so what we're going to do now is we're going to divide this up.

 And then we're going to have 1 cup that we're going to dye blue.

 I always use Wilton dyes because they always give me big old...

 Going to pour the batter, the colored batters into the Bundt cake.

 It says that it's best that the blue just go in a ring around the middle.

 It looks best, it says, when you just make the ring around the middle.

 Now you're going to bake it to the specifications of your cake mix or your cake.

 This was sitting in the pan for five minutes after it came out of the oven.

 And we're going to let it cool completely for about 30 minutes.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to open the whipped fluffy white frosting.

 And we're going to zap it for a few seconds on high until it gets to a pourable state.

 And then we're going to color two of these with the red and the blue.

 So now that I have it at a pourable state, what we're going to do.

 Okay so we're going to drizzle with the red and the white and the blue.

 Alrighty so I'm just going to put a little bit of decorations on it.

 I'm going to share a few tips on how to clear blockages on a Dyson vacuum, and I have the

 And then the canister, one tip is just always keep an eye on the max line, and you always

 want to clean this out before it reaches above this so you don't clog the main filter.

 And then inside, if you're not getting suction, there's a couple places you can check right

 The first one is on the top of the ball to see if there's anything here.

 And then there's a little sight window that pulls up and allows you to have access into

 Now if you think there's something caught in the tube itself, you can lift this out,

 and then in front there's a small red tab that you just push your finger in here, and

 you can lift out the whole hose so you can gain access to the hose itself if there's

 And then if you had something caught down here in the back of the ball, you can just

 take a small Phillips screwdriver, and just by removing the set screw, you can pull this

 So very easy to gain access if you've sucked something up into this.

 That little tube just snaps right in, and then you'll put your set screw there.

 If you have a blockage or if something got caught in the brush bar, then to remove this,

 you would just pull the vacuum down, lay it on its front, and there's a retaining clip

 So you just grab the clip and pull it on both sides, and that allows this to pull free,

 And then if there's something caught in this brush itself, what you can do is turn these

 two screws on the top, and you'll hear them click when it's open, and that allows you

 And then this also allows you to clean off any hair or buildup on the brush bar here.

 And then to put it back together, all you have to do is lay it back down, turn the little

 knobs on top, and then you can either put this back into place and then put your retaining

 ring on, or it's easy just to put this on first, and you have a beveled edge and a flat

 And you want the beveled edge facing out, and you just snap this retaining ring back

 in where you can see the beveled edge, and then you're just going to snap this

 If you have a blockage in your Dyson vacuum, very easy to check.

 Hey guys, so just in time for Valentine's Day, I thought I would show you how I do these soft romantic curls

 So the first thing I did was I showered and I let my hair air dry

 When my hair was wet I put in the it's a 10 miracle leave-in product and now that my hair has almost completely air-dried

 It's important to just make sure those roots are completely dry just to make sure you don't burn your hair when you are curling it

 So today I figured I would show you how I do this with my hair straightener

 So the first thing I'm gonna do is I'm going to use some heat protectant on

 Each individual part of my hair right before I curl it and like I said, I'm using my hair straightener

 So I'm taking rather large sections today just because I want these to be really soft and romantic and not super tight

 I'm using the straightener and holding it for kind of a few seconds like a bit of a while

 Just to make sure that curl is actually really defined and then I use my fingers

 To twirl it around and make sure I get the exact shape that I want

 So here one more time just for you to see I flip it around going away from my face

 Holding it down towards about a 45 degree angle and then using my fingers to just define that curl

 And the straighter in terms of horizontal that you hold it the more volume and the more bouncy the curl will be so I just kind

 Of alternate some of them are straighter and some of them are like some of them are more vertical and some of them are more

 Horizontal it's really important though that the ones beside your face and in the higher

 That you do hold the straightener about a 45 degree angle because you don't want them to be too bouncy

 So what I do is I pretty much straighten the top of the hair and then I start the curl about

 And then once I get up to like the areas right near my face like my bangs

 I just kind of use the straightener to make sure I get the exact shape that I want like this piece right here

 I just kind of take it and then I flip out the end of it just to make sure it kind of goes with the

 It is important to go through your hair and kind of find pieces

 Where the ends are actually not curled because especially if you have layers in your hair that can happen

 I make sure I smooth everything out also with my comb as you can see and I just kind of make sure that

 It's really important to use your hands I think so I use my L'Oreal mythic oil

 I put a little bit on my hands and I run that actually through my fingers

 And then when I can I kind of run my fingers through my hair it actually defines it

 I can really use my fingers to just make sure I the curls are exactly the way I want

 And then I'm also going to use just a little bit of hairspray just to touch on the ends just to make sure that actually

 But using my Amika straightener, which I absolutely love makes them last all day, so those are my soft romantic curls

 I hope you really like them, and I hope you have a happy Valentine's Day

 I love you all very very much, and we'll see you in the next video.

 Hi, now today I'm going to be repotting some bulbs and it seems a little bit early normally

 I probably wouldn't be doing it for about another month or so but I've noticed that

 a lot of bulbs that I've got in storage, I haven't got the container here, but they're

 already starting to shoot out so I don't want to have that happen and have to rip them up

 and rip half the root system off and all that kind of stuff so I'm going to do it now.

 So I'm all prepped ready to go, before I start I just wanted to show you quickly this.

 Now this is parsley right, now just normal flat leaf parsley and I've just let this bolt,

 so just one, now this is all going to seed, you can see all the seeds there, now you can

 either just let that dry out and then keep the seeds and then replant them or do what

 I do, just let one like this bolt and just stay in the garden and the seeds drop and

 then parsley just comes up so it's kind of a nice way to just turn things over rather

 than just rip everything out, some stuff just let it bolt and go to seed, the seeds will

 drop in that area and you'll get that popping up, but parsley being an annual it's a bit

 Alright but anyway back to the bulbs, now what I'm going to do, I've got a container

 here and I've got my bulbs that are in here, now these are the bulbs that I actually separated

 and planted the oriental and lilliums, oriental lilies and I can't remember the other type,

 they were just a regular type of lillium, I can't remember which ones, remember I separated

 them and blah blah blah, that was another video, so they've died right back and now

 I can start to dig some of them up, there you go there's one, see the root system on

 that, there's another one there, now just make sure that you're not getting any other

 kind of foreign bits and pieces in there with the root system, you can be a bit harsh

 on it, the old growth can be taken off, so I'll just put these here for the moment, now

 these were all from the one, now I've got two pots so this was all from one, so you

 can see there's part of the old root system there that can come right off, it's actually

 it feels like it's been too wet in there too, some of it, I don't know if you can see

 the bottom of it's starting to brown off a bit and part of it's starting to break up,

 so that's a case of it being too wet in the container and it's starting to rot, alright

 there's another one, now that's nice and strong, you can see the new root system poking

 out there, that new white stringy one, that bottom one, so that's what we want to kind

 of avoid if we can, and sometimes because you've replanted them and bulbs often shoot

 out again and again, you get another one, that one's just rotted a bit too much, it's

 part of the old stalk from when they first flowered, and it looks like that's it, oh

 there's another little one there that's sprung off, and you can see how small, pardon me,

 you can see how small that is, but look at the root system on it, amazing, I know I get

 excited about stuff like that, but you know, alright now that looks like it's pretty much

 it for that one, I'm going to use this again, just make sure you're not missing any because

 you can have smaller ones that you've missed, but that pretty much looks like it, now I've

 got another container but I'll leave that and I'll just pop this one up first, so I've got a pot

 here that I've just got nice potting soil in and I've got some manure in it too, really well

 broken down manure as well, you don't want anything too fresh because the freshness of it just keeps

 that moisture and everything's going on still in it, so when you put up stuff in it it just tends

 to rot, alright, how many bulbs we've got, alright, so we've got four, we've got five, this one I don't know

 if it's going to make it, it might, we'll plant it anyway, this was the one that was probably on the

 bottom and got all the moisture and just started to rot, pardon me I've got a cold, alright so I'll

 peel off some of those outer layers, it's like a lotus flower and we'll see how we go, alright, so

 when you've got something like this I'm just going to top this actually up, so what you can do, put these

 aside, just dig a small hole, pop it in and that's it, now this one hasn't got a root system so we'll

 just pop it in there, you don't have to be full on with it, you can just be pretty nonchalant, just

 bury them in, they always tend to do alright, bulbs are pretty tight, some people dig their bulbs up every

 year, I never bother, alright so they're just under the surface, alright, and all I'll do is get some of this

 initial, get rid of that gum leaf, some of this other soil, make sure there's no bits of bark in it,

 alright now that's pretty good, break up any bigger bits and that'll do, that's pretty much it, it's that easy, a lot of

 people make a big palaver about bulbs, I treat them pretty mean so, and they come up every year, I get beautiful

 flowers so don't make a big palaver about it, now I'll just leave these for a while, pardon me, again, but when it's

 coming into spring and I can see something, they're just starting to shoot up from the surface, I'll feed

 them then, I won't worry about it now, they can just stay in here, make sure they're in a spot that's, a pot

 that's nicely well drained, in a spot that's not going to get soaked and soaked through winter because otherwise they can rot

 like you saw with that other one, and that's it, pretty easy, that's all you need to do, so leave them, spring, give them a feed

 when they start to shoot and enjoy the flowers, easy, cool, alright, dirty hands, alright, I'll see you soon.

 This is a little bit different than you're normally used to seeing.

 do a lot of different tasks, from looking for jobs, to processing video in my case,

So, this could be argued that it is a piece of survival equipment.

 Of course, this isn't going to help you if you're out in the wilderness.

 you need to do something on your computer and your current mouse isn't working, well,

I haven't actually seen that because I normally leave my mouse on.

 turned it off when I was done using it, I bet it would last a lot longer.

 older ones and then I had one similar to this, just a different color variation.

And that's the piece that fits inside your computer in the USB slot.

 push and this top section would actually come off and the battery would be installed through

However, on the 325, the battery compartment slides open just like that.

 models, the 310 I believe is what I had, had a red laser light.

 you'd have this light and if you looked into it, obviously you'd be like blinding yourself.

 And this, it's currently on at the moment, even if you can't read it.

 Welcome back to another great episode of Rihanna's cuisines today.

 You kind of need one of these mold things from either Wilton's or this is from

 Berkman but you know any would work, but the one thing that really I found

 That's a hard chip that I used for my coconut candies, and I'm actually have coconut in there.

 Candy coconut candy and so these need to go in the refrigerator

 But what I found with these was it was hard to get the chocolate out of it

 So that might you might want to get something that's just a little bit more flimsy a little bit more pliable

 And what you want to do is you want to use a good quality chocolate now.

 So basically you know you can just take this off and it goes back on there.

 settings here for like it's got the off the warm and the melt and that's perfect because when you put your chocolate in you want

 To put it on melt and then move it down to warm, so it's just kind of warm

 I've been doing a lot of projects using the chocolate just because of this device

 I just I love it the only one thing I mentioned in my other video is I wish it had a lid on it

 So you know if you had leftover chocolate you can cover it and just keep it, but that's okay

 And I usually get it when they have the 40 or 50 percent off coupon works out amazing

 So what we're going to do here is what you want to do here again.

 I use 60% cocoa now you could use milk chocolate you can use white you can do whatever you want really depends

 But just make sure that you use a really good quality chocolate and what you want to do is you just want to start

 So you do one and then what you want to do is you want to finish all of them you want to stick it in?

 After about 10 minutes, and then you want to do the same thing so it kind of builds a good layer

 So I've got some done here, and I wish I had more but Samaya ended up eating

 Fifteen and only three are left of the roses she ate all of them, so this is how they come out you know

 So that's why I was saying that if it's if you haven't covered it really really well

 It's gonna break so you want to make sure that the sides and the top are really covered really well with the chocolate

 Milton and it couldn't save a lot of them just because like I said it was it's too hard for the chocolate to come out

 You know a couple hours even in the refrigerator or the freezer the harder it gets the easier

 I'm also you can use these to fill with this what I'm going to do is I'm gonna take some more of this coconut

 Make sure I'm gonna fill it into the chocolate and that's gonna be my Valentine's another idea you could take mousse

 I'm gonna be doing a chocolate mousse recipe you can fill these up with mousse

 There's so many things that you can do with these so I just wanted to quickly quickly show you

 You know just make sure that you coat them three times once and then you put in the refrigerator take it out coat it again

 Take it out put it the third time and then put it back in the refrigerator when you take it out

 These kind of and I have the roses one there's so many available that you can do from like a cake store

 Wilton's or any other I think Michaels has some too that you can buy their their plastic type of thing

 But you can do so many with different colors, and it's actually really really fun

Thank you for joining me on this episode of her Hannah's cuisines

 This is a stainless steel, chrome silver, rear tail carrier for the Suzuki Inazuma GW250.

 designed to fit the Inazuma and can hold up to 80 kilograms of weight.

 allow the rear passenger to still get a grip when the carrier is full or overloaded or when a

 rear seat, remove the grab bar by removing the four bolts that hold it in, change the old grab

 bar with the new tail carrier, replace the four bolts, replace the seat, and it's done.

 And now that I've got the rear carrier off, the original carrier, I can take

 the new one, mount that into position, kind of hold it into position, and reinsert the four original bolts.

 Once they're all nice and tight, take your seat, lock it down, and it's done.

Today it's an updo and it's simple and chic and perfect for spring or summer

So if you like this look and want to learn how to recreate it, then keep watching

 Ok, so for this look we'll need some really basic styling tools and that's a teasing comb

 with some hairspray for some teasing at the crown and some bobby pins.

 the next step is to actually separate the pieces of hair and pin them away for now while

 you want to do is create a bump in the back by just teasing your hair.

 to do is decide which part it is that I want to actually tease and then sort of separate

 and then grab your brush and just go up and down for this entire crown area.

 have teased the hair in the back, you want to just smooth it out for a more controlled

 bump and then you want to gather up this section that you just teased in the back and I am

 going to turn around so you guys can see exactly what I'm doing.

 to do with this is just attach it in the back with some bobby pins.

 the hair with your fingers and then grab your bobby pins and just start to pin this in place.

 So now that we have secured the bump in the back, next we're going to lightly tease the

 make sure that everything is smooth and then I'm going to grab some bobby pins as well.

 So I'm going to bring it to the back and actually just kind of cover up the original bobby pins

Kind of go over it and then use a bobby pin to secure that as well.

 we have one side done, we're just going to repeat the same thing on the other side.

 what I'm doing with this is just going over the bump and also over this side right here

 and again we're just going to use a bobby pin and just secure that in place.

 that both sides are secured in the back, I'm going to turn around for this last step and

 rest of the hair and I'm going to start to just roll it up from the bottom up onto my

So I'll just start with the ends and just start to kind of roll it onto itself

 it down with your index finger in place and you want to just secure that with bobby pins

 is grab the end of this kind of looped hair and you want to just bring that over to sort

And then you want to hold it with your fingers and grab some bobby pins and you want

 back and created this sort of reverse bump from the bottom, we're going to release the

 and really really simply what you want to do is start to twist this hair and we're going

 and show you where to just secure that right there in the back.

 going to have an end sort of sticking out so what you want to do is just sort of find

 tutorial and I hope you're having a beautiful day wherever you are and I'll see you in the

 Sweep picking consists, well today's exercise will consist of just two motions, a downward

 This is completely movable, so this is an exercise you can do anywhere, as we'll see

 For example, we'll go the 14th fret on the G string, followed by the 15th on the B, followed

 by the 13th on the E. You just want to rake that straight down with the pick itself.

 See how the hand's not alternate picking or anything, it's just straight down.

 The second half of the exercise is an upward rake, which is either a hammer on and pull

 You'll see how that flows a little bit later once we put the whole thing together, but

 So that's going to pull off to the 13th, and then just hit the 15th fret on the B string,

 Okay, now we're going to take that same exercise and speed it up just a little bit for you.

 Okay, now that we have this down, what you can do just to kind of put this a little bit

 further, would be to ascend and descend the pattern that you're doing the sweep with.

 So basically what that would be, is you could start off real high, like say around the 17th

 and 21st fret here, and then when you reach that part, you'll want to go to your next

 So we'll put that together a little bit quicker for you, and we'll see what that sounds like

 Hey guys, it's Jen from Yummy Healthy Easy and I'm going to show you how to make peach

 It's really simple, you only need a few ingredients and you probably already have most of them

 So first off we're going to start by mixing everything into a mixing bowl like this and

 So what we need is two cups of milk and then a cup of old fashioned oats that are dried

 And then we're going to need a tablespoon of white butter, you can use regular butter

 too but it just kind of helps give it some extra little flavor there.

 We're going to need two tablespoons of light brown sugar, a half a teaspoon of cinnamon

 and a fourth of a teaspoon of salt, that gives it a good little flavor too.

 Two tablespoons of honey, put it right in there, stir it together.

 And then a half a cup of either chopped pecans or walnuts and I love the nuts in it because

 Mix that in there and then we're going to use a can, which ends up being about a cup,

 These are Del Monte brand, I love Del Monte because it's just better quality, the juice

 So mix that right in there, mix it together, you can kind of see what it looks like there.

 And then you're going to take your crock pot and you're going to spray it with cooking

 spray, give it a good spray there and then dump your ingredients right in, just like

 And set it right on to about four hours on high, it just really depends on your crock

 I would suggest putting it on low for about four hours and just checking on it to see

 if it's done, but I have put this in the crock pot and put it in low eight hours, like right

 when I've gone to bed and woken up with perfect oatmeal in the morning.

 Dave Whitley coming to you from the Strength Dojo at Nashville Kettlebell.

 And I'm going to show you something today that's going to help with being able to stand

 And what I'm going to do is I'm going to put a weight overhead either bent press or windmill

 And the other hand is going to do like a one arm deadlift on the bottom position coming

 It's important to use considerably more weight than you can bent press successfully, than

 you can stand up with in a bent press successfully to do this because what it's going to do is

 it's going to make your hips and your waist and all that stuff much stronger so that you

 can use the wedge principle to wedge your hips back underneath your shoulders as you

 So it's kind of a combination one arm deadlift windmill type thing.

 So what I'm going to use today is going to be a, where are they, can you see them?

 A 32 which is right here and then an 80 kilo which is the one that's over here.

 And the 32 is going to go up over top and the 80 kilo is going to be on the bottom.

 And the combination of the two, 112 or whatever that would be, is considerably more than I

 What it'll do is it'll help you be able to stand up from the bottom position of the bent

 press with more weight so that you can focus on keeping everything stable and not worry

 there and you know after you use an oven for a while, even if you clean the inside when

 General Electric oven, yep General Electric, a lot of them have a self-cleaning option.

 So what you need to do, the first thing is make sure anything, paper or any flammable

 materials are not near your oven because it's going to get very hot even on the surface

Once you've done that, the next thing, and this varies among models of

 ovens, but this particular one just has a button that says self-clean.

 did, I removed everything from the top of the oven, removed everything from inside of

 it, I hit self-clean, and then it made me pull this little locking mechanism out before

 you're doing this, and I probably shouldn't have that towel on there even though it's

 on the handle because that could still get a little bit warm, but it just gets really

 tip, if you didn't know that was built into most ovens out there, and this isn't a fancy

 your oven to clean itself whenever, you just follow this procedure.

 in, as always, if you haven't subscribed already, please do so.

 And if you've been watching Live at 9 for a while, now you know our next guest always makes us very happy with her recipes.

And blueberries, of course, if you don't know, are in season right now.

Department of Agriculture for Human Nutrition said that it's the highest ranking vegetable or fruit you can get with antioxidants.

Well, we have two different recipes that we're going to show to make a crostata.

 one cup of blueberries and one-fourth cup water that we've already pureed.

 And then here we have half a tablespoon of cornstarch that we're going to mix into this to make sure it's smooth and we don't want the lumps.

Because this sauce is less than seven minutes to, you know, to get it cooked down.

So we're going to add the rest of our nectar and the cornstarch.

 Stir it because you don't, you want to make sure that it doesn't scorch the bottom of your pan.

 I got e-mails from all over the country saying, why did you let that man break the food processor?

 And first we're going to pulsate it because we want all the dry ingredients to come together.

 You want a dough that's pliable, not a dough that's going to stick around everywhere.

 And a lot of folks might want to try to do the low fat or the no fat, God forbid.

 But it's really healthier to just go ahead and use real butter.

 And if you're using a food processor and you hear your sound changing, that's because your dough is coming together.

 And that's okay because you're going to pat it together, form it into a ball, flatten it into a disc, and refrigerate it for at least two hours.

 If you're not ready to make it at that point, seal it up perfectly so there's no air.

 And then when you're ready, let it thaw out in the refrigerator.

 And you can make it up in advance in all these steps with your blueberries in still freezer.

 So when you're ready, you have a surprise company to come over, you can pop it out and stick it in the oven and cook it.

 Can you make this also, you've made beautiful little individual.

 So if you don't want to take the, jump out and take a leap and do it like a rustic, you can buy the tart pans.

 Bake it in the oven, 375 degrees, preheat first, 15 or 20 minutes, and you have a delicious dessert.

 Here we have the blueberry tarts, raspberry, blackberry, a blueberry, well a berry combination.

 And see, now I can afford to eat this because I'm on a run tonight, Alice.

 This client has come in to see me today for an eyelash enhancement, which is whereby small

 dots of pigment are going to be implanted just between this client's eyelashes in order

 I'm just going to cleanse the eye, I'm going to take away any of the makeup that's already

 Next stage will be, I'm now going to apply some anaesthetic, which is a very fine gel,

 This client has decided that she'd like to have the eyelash enhancement done on the upper

 So I'm going to apply a very gentle anaesthetic just through the lash line to make the comfort,

 The eye is held very firmly, the anaesthetic is applied, it's absolutely painless.

 The anaesthetic will now remain on the skin for a period of about 10 minutes, after which

 The idea is for me to be able to place tiny dots of pigment just through the lash line.

 Most people come to me quite fearful of having their eyes done, but it's actually an entirely

 comfortable procedure, and the eye is very, very safely protected throughout the procedure.

 So first of all I'd like to assess exactly where I'm going to place the pigment.

 I'm going to stretch the eye gently, look through the lash line, and start to make tiny

 As you can see, the client is entirely comfortable throughout this procedure.

 The pigment that I'm actually implanting is an iron oxide pigment, completely non-toxic,

 very, very safe, and will last in the skin for a period of one to three years.

 The beauty of this treatment is that it gives dimension and frame to the eye, and especially

 on clients who have thin eyelashes, it will give the appearance of a much thicker row

 Okay, so we're going to take a look to see what type of effect has been achieved.

 I'm pretty confident that this client is going to be especially happy, because I know having

 discussed with her at length prior to the treatment starting, this is exactly what she

 Hi, this is Alex Kuliskov and this is my quick tutorial for the Arcanum project which we're

 And I'm going to show you how I did this self-portrait with the glass right here in the studio.

 And I'll be recording it with my glass, so it will be like two points of view, which

 It's pretty easy, nothing really special except one little thing.

 And we got this projection screen or pattern or whatever you call it sticking here.

 And I look at the mirror to see that this line, which brown color projector is right,

 You see, when I rotate my head that side, it will give not interesting, not nice looking

 And you have, you see on the background, there is a line, right?

 My eyes completely blown by this projector, which hit me right in the eye.

 If you have some spotlights hitting your model from behind, it's going to create a nice thing

 Hey YouTube, we are here recording for you in the blizzard of 2015.

 We are out here filming in this snow is coming down hard and heavy.

 They're expecting like 2 to 3 feet possibly in New York City and a lot of other areas.

 What you saw in the beginning of the video, that was supposed to be the whole night but

 So if you want to make your own blizzard, your own snow storm, you can get instant snow

 in a jar or in a little tube and you can make as much snow as you want.

 You can just have a good time with it and you do not have to wait for a blizzard.

 So make your own blizzard, cancel your own school and work and have a good time with

 We're going to add some water and then add some food coloring to the water.

 Take two scoops of the instant snow powder and just pour it right in.

 So if you want to make your own snow powder, get it at incrediblescience.com.

 Welcome to the Poor Man's Gourmet Kitchen where we share gourmet recipes at a low budget wonder.

 So I've got a pot of boiling water here and we're going to let them sit in here for just a minute.

 And once they come out all orangey and pinkish, we're going to chop them into bite-sized pieces.

 That is unless you've got some smaller shrimp and you want me to do it.

 And we're going to use two of each, so just chop each one of them in half.

 And believe it or not, after you're done squeezing all these lemon and lime halves,

 The acid is going to help cook it beyond what the steaming did.

 But the steaming ensures that it's not going to turn pasty and nasty.

 Now I've got a bunch of these baby tomatoes left over from the plants that I grew outside this last summer.

 But what you want is probably about a cup's worth of chopped tomatoes.

 Now what I like to do is go over the top of them again with my knife.

 Now when it comes to avocados, you just go right here at the top.

 And just work it all the way around in a circular motion on the blade.

 And the easiest way to get the fruit out is with a large tablespoon.

 It is one box of 2007 Exquisite Rookies and one box of 2008 Razor Signature Series.

 Looking for Tim Beckham, Pedro Alvarez, Eric Hosmer, all those guys.

 This is by far the best box of Exquisite rookies I've ever seen.

 Hey guys, welcome to the advanced section of this guitar lesson.

 at in this one is looking at how hammer-ons and pull-offs can affect your sweep, because

 I know it trips up a lot of guitarists, especially when you start creating your own riffs, which

The other things it can do is we can look at more extended chords.

 So rather than just taking the basic minor and major chords, you can actually look at

 You're going to be playing minor 7th and you're going to be playing major 7th, but you can

 be looking at the left hand first, building up the chord shapes.

 the right hand and then we'll start combining the things together.

 an A minor 7 arpeggio and it starts exactly the same as the intermediate lesson.

 7th of the chord, we're going to continue the A minor sweep from here over the next

Slide up, slide back down, and then you go through the arpeggio notes

 to sort of get your head around the riff, but here's it demonstrated slowly.

 Then, let me talk to you a little bit about the right hand on this particular chord shape

 so we can look at how the picking technique is affected by that slide, before moving on

And the right hand, you're going to be picking in a downward motion the first

 The high note is going to be the upstroke, I slide up and back down, which is very difficult

 to do slowly, but a pull off, so all of that last part of the riff pretty much doesn't

 most efficient way you can find of picking any riff will be the easiest and the best

 that you can play the riff, and therefore it becomes easier to play faster, which is

 generally the goal of most guitarists when they're going for the sweep picking, is to

 by an up, because you're going to have to skip over the strings in order to get that

 upstroke, whereas if you do two downs, it's a much more efficient way.

 that sort of context, that should hopefully help you piece together the rest of this riff.

 Now the tab is where you're going to be doing most of your time, so make sure you pause

 of the chord shapes so you can see how the slides and things sort of work with 7th chord

 you slide down, it starts exactly like the first shape that you did.

 going to be identical throughout all of this, by the way, guys.

 is obviously what the left hand is doing, and there's a lot more use of the pinky finger,

 God's little joke to all us guitarists, but we have to make do with the little finger.

 Particularly, the slide on that little finger is going to be what's going to take a bit

 of time, but do spend the time on each chord shape before moving on to the next part.

 So I do that A minor 7th, then I do the G major 7th, and then I do the F major 7th chord

 be quite normal for you to do something like that, but if not, just a quick sort of tip

 on bending, make sure you use the other fingers here, these two fingers, they don't have to

You can bend with the third finger all the way up there to that high note.

I would imagine for many people we're talking months of practice

 tips and hints for people who are already studying, you can use the comments section

 get a chance, then that's what the community spirit is all about.

 if you could help out some of the other guys learning the course.

 I've got a really quick, simple spaghetti and meatball pasta to share with you today.

 So just a few ingredients to keep it simple but it's a great budget saving recipe as well.

 So to start with, I'm just going to put that aside, I'm going to get the sauce on for the

 You want to get some really thin strips of red pepper and then dice that up finely.

 While this is all going on, you need to get some water on for your spaghetti as well.

 Before you crush your garlic up, I just want to put some fry light in the pan and get that

 So you just want to add the garlic, the onion and the peppers to a hot pan.

 For the meatballs, what I'm going to do, I'm going to take some sausages.

 Just cut that in half and if you just push it together and there you have it, a quick

 Just do that to the rest of them until they've all been used up.

 While you're rolling these, you want to put another frying pan on and put some fry light

 So I'm just going to add to that some basata, probably about 400 grams or so, some mixed

 While the sauce is reducing down, what you want to do is put those meatballs that you've

 Look at that lovely sauce, it's all thick and reducing down nicely.

 If you find that the tomatoes are a little bit acid for you, you can add some sweetener

 I'm just using this liquid one here, agave nectar, but you can use whichever you're most

 Okay, so the meatballs have just browned off nicely and what I'm going to do is finish

 So just place them gently in the sauce without breaking them up.

 Okay, now that's been cooking down for the last 10 minutes or so, looking really good.

 So what I'm going to do is get a bowl with some spaghetti in and get that all served up.

 There you have it, I'm just going to finish that off with some parmesan cheese.

 You've got a lovely, nutritious, healthy meatball pasta, well spaghetti and meatballs.

 It's done in less than half an hour and it costs less than a fiver.

 Hi, I'm Nancy Clifton here at the Chicago Botanic Garden, and we're making some decorative wreaths for the gallery for the Wonderland Express display.

 We thought you might be interested in seeing how to make a pine cone wreath.

 Here's a wreath that is of one type of pine cone, and when you have something like this, it's very uniform, easy to do, and you just need an abundant amount of your pine cones.

 When making a pine cone or even a spruce cone wreath, you're going to do a clockwise rotation, just going all the way around the wreath in the same pattern, just attaching those cones onto a wreath base.

 This is a foam base, fairly light, and then the cones are just glued on very carefully, and then this was post-treated with a snow-like kind of finish to it.

 When making a wreath that maybe is not of just one type of cone, and also on a grapevine, what I'm doing is setting out my pattern of the cones first before I start adding them so that I know that I have enough, and I space maybe the focal point cones appropriately.

 This is a white pine cone, and so I'm using them as kind of the sides, and this is a spruce cone.

 I'm just going to place the spruce cone in the middle, and if you can work with the grapevines and help those hold in, and the only trick is holding this as it kind of sets.

 I'll be covering and hiding some of my areas where there's a lot of glue with other pine cones.

 What's nice is the hot glue is liquid for a while so that you can rearrange or reposition cones as needed.

 Almost where I have kind of a gathering, I'm going to place this, and I can even kind of lift this up and tuck it in to there.

 You can kind of rotate it so you get the right turn on the pine cone.

 We're going to add a nice amount of the hot glue on the bottom, and then I'm picking the point and pressing it on, even rotate and do them upside down, which is kind of a pretty look.

 Here I'm taking the top of the cone, and I'll actually work these pine scales into that grapevine base, and that will really help hold it in to the wreath.

 This is why I like the little glue gun, as you can actually go and then reinforce it a little bit with glue directly to that spot.

 It's important, too, to every once in a while lift up on the wreath, kind of maybe rotate it, make sure that you haven't glued it to the surface you're working on.

 Now I'm just going to randomly add the cones to kind of fill in gaps and spaces, but I don't worry about the glue strands until I'm done.

 I also want to make sure that the wreath is fully dry and the cones are adhered before I start pulling on the glue strands.

 What's nice about a mixed cone wreath is you get a lot of interest.

It seems like you could just keep kind of tucking in more cones here and there.

 I like to kind of rotate it so I can make sure that, especially if there's no bottom or top and it's just going to be displayed really in any fashion, that it has a nice view from all the way around.

 Hi, this is one of the Wonderland Express wreaths that we've made.

 We actually have this on a wood frame that they made in the carpenter shop, so it would be nice and sturdy.

 Then the spruce cones, white pine cones, are glued on the base, followed by a ring on the interior, and then the pine cones on the side.

 Buckeyes, red horse chestnuts, and then the beech kind of shells and nuts sit as adornments with the pine cones.

 This is actually a lotus pod wreath with large lotus pods glued onto a square wreath frame and then accented with the little mini lotus pods, little touches and highlights of poppy pods.

 And then to bring some color into this wreath, we're using rose hips fresh that will actually dry on the wreath.

 A nice finishing touch for any wreath is to take and tuck in a little bit of green moss, reindeer moss, or even Spanish moss to kind of hide some of the holes and gaps that might show the frame that the materials are attached onto.

 And that was just poked in with a little bit of a pin or even a stick just to touch it and push it into areas so that it has a nice finished appearance.

 This is the Tillandsia wreath, and we started with a Styrofoam base.

 What's nice is the Spanish moss is a nice backdrop to the Tillandsia and helps it blend in.

 We used about, I would say, six to seven different varieties of Tillandsia, and some of them are actually about to flower.

 And so those are placed right at eye level so that you'll get to see that color impact as they start to open.

 These are held in place with what is called a S-pin or green pin.

 So without gluing or hurting these because they're actually live plants, they're like an air plant.

 They're held in place with the S-pin very close, just catching on a few of these needle-like leaves.

 I started off by placing some of the larger Tillandsia first, again, situating a pattern on the wreath.

 Then I go with the purple to kind of make sure that that stands out and you see that in the wreath.

 And then I filled in with these little Tillandsias, almost like little puff balls, here and there to kind of fill out any gaps and holes.

 Otherwise, the Spanish moss very nicely blends in with this wreath, giving it a finished appearance.

 Today we are going to show you how to cut pork spare ribs and make them into St.

 So we got our pork ribs here and I'm going to cut open our bag.

Louis spare ribs are very expensive, but if you get the regular pork

 chop, I mean spare ribs, I'll show you how to cut them, trim them, and then you have

 And I'm just going to get my cloth to wipe my hands and I'll be right back.

 Okay guys, what we're going to do is we're going to turn it over and we're going to cut

 Now what you do is you just bend this over because this is right here where all the little

 bones are at, the baby ones are, because all we're going to do is do this.

 So you're going to get your sharp knife and you're going to start to cut.

 And that's what they use as their appetizers in the sports bars and in the restaurants.

 So this part here is where all the little soft bones are at and where the meat's at.

 Then what you do here, all you want to do is make it nice and clean.

 It's just that we don't need it right now because we're making the St.

 So I'm going to pry this open a little bit and I'll be right back.

 That was the plastic that you just pick it up and you rip it off.

 And you want some of that fat on it so that when you bake it, it makes all this juice.

 You don't have to go out and pay extra for it because I know that it's very expensive.

 Chop it up in all little chunks and make it into little chunks.

 Barbecue time is coming so I figured you guys might want to do that.

 And regular spare ribs in a big slab is less expensive than just a plain St.

 And I was going to show you guys what we're doing here is we're going to season it.

 Since we have the garlic salt, we're not going to put any salt on it because it's already salty.

 And we're going to let it sit overnight because we're going to have a birthday party tomorrow.

 I'm going to cover it and let it sit in the refrigerator for overnight.

 And then after we barbecue it, we will also have some barbecue sauce on.

 So I'm going to cover this up, put it in my refrigerator and start on my next project.

 And we're going to get to the barbecue right now and we'll check you guys out a little later.

 And these are not just any chocolate chip cookies, they were given to me by my tour guide in Singapore when I was with my mom.

 And she told me that these were the best chocolate chip cookies ever.

 Once you are done creaming this monster, we are going to move on to the dry ingredients.

 So we have our cookie batter here and I know what you're doing.

 So we have our cookie batter here and we're just going to roll that up into balls and put it on our baking tray.

 She doesn't give very specific instructions, so I'm going to give you guys full instructions on how to do this.

 Make sure you have someone who is old enough to light the oven, light it for you, or else you might light the oven on high.

 While you are making your cookie balls, you are required to eat it.

 I mean, in the summer you have to have your bikini body and here you are, eating cookie dough.

 It has a very organic shape and it's just oozing with chocolate chips.

 And you have to have it with milk because milk just makes it so much better.

 You have your chocolate chip cookies and they're super simple to make, really good.

 I'm so glad that I came across this recipe because it's probably the easiest chocolate chip cookie recipe.

 So if you try this recipe yourself, you should leave a picture or a comment or tweet me.

 Leave a comment down below if you have any more suggestions for stuff I should bake or make or anything else.

 So Dad, how was it your first time being my special baking assistant on my Peppered video?

 It happens to be 36 degrees out and we're in a kitchen with an oven on.

 Now that you've gathered all the ingredients, here's the procedures you need to follow.

 First, you need to preheat your oven on 375 degrees Fahrenheit.

 Now that the oven has reached 375 degrees Fahrenheit, put the pork belly into the oven for 15 to 20 minutes.

 Or, put it into the oven until the pork belly becomes golden brown or tender.

 Now that it's 10 minutes, turn the pork belly to the other side.

I forgot to tell you guys that it's 10 minutes on each side for cooking this recipe.

 Now that it's 10 minutes, take out the pork belly from the oven.

 The total cooking time of this recipe in the oven is 20 minutes.

 So, if you find it hard to use a knife, you can also use scissors.

 Now that we sliced all the pork belly into pieces, it's time to throw it into another baking dish.

 Okay guys, the next thing that you may want to add to this recipe is chili pepper.

 If you want this recipe to be spicy, then you can put it into this recipe.

 But if you do not want it to be spicy, then you can just leave it out.

 Okay guys, your dinak dakang recipe is ready to serve and ready to eat.

 If you like the YouTube videos that I make for you guys, please subscribe to my YouTube channel if you haven't already.

 And I would like to express my sincere gratitude to Lina, who is our cook for today.

 going to be bright and fun and it's so weird because I feel like I haven't done a bright

 and they kind of went hand in hand when it came to the natural wearable looks and the

 see it is like an orange-y tone right on the lid with some gold undertone.

 bit of pink right on the brow bone and a little bit of glitter all over the lid and a little

 go out and have fun and that just goes to show you if you are a little bit daring you

 the lid and a little bit under the eyes as well because we will be placing shadow there.

 Then taking my CoverGirl Black Brown Liner I'm going to start lining the outer part of

Then taking the end of the liner they give you a smudger like kind of brush.

 to work your way up to the intensity that you want or the darkness.

 to go ahead and just place this right past the crease and continue on blending to the

Then taking a detailed fluffy brush I will be placing a dark brown eyeshadow

 right on the crease just to soften it out and create a very nice transition between

Then taking a large eyeshadow brush and taking a matte white tone I'm placing

 this as my highlight and blending out any harsh lines that I may have created with these

So I will be taking my MAC 224 and taking a lighter pink color and placing

 this right on the brow bone area just to create a nice transition and a well blended look.

 Then taking a MAC 232 and a bright orange color placing it all over the lid making sure

 I don't go past that cut crease color which is a dark brown and black.

 stay focused on the lid space and apply a generous amount of the orange color.

Now taking an orange color pigment with a gold undertone and using

 my MAC 232 I will be taking my MAC mixing medium liquid and I will be placing a couple

 take a little bit of the pigment and blend it out and then you want to go ahead and place

We do have a couple left on the website so check it out and then we're

 So just place this all over the lid and then just blend it out.

 like a tapping motion and then right on the crease blend it out with your brush very lightly

 lining my lower and upper lash line as well as my waterline using the same black liner

 placing this on my lower lash line kind of on the inner half of the lid and just blend

I like to intensify it so I like to always go back and add a little

 to be placing this on the outer corner and just combine them both together right where

 adding a little bit of my Makeup Forever Glitter all over the lid and a little bit on the tip.

 I'm going to be using this on my temples and cheekbones as well.

 a really beautiful kind of like Barbie doll pink color and it's very moisturizing to the

On my cheeks I am wearing MAC's Blush Baby which is this one right here.

 organizing my palettes right now so some of them are facing down.

 using that one for a couple of years now so it's one of my favorite ones and I always

 Si nous appliquons par exemple 100 Nm avec ce rachet, avec un petit angle,

 ce sera très facile avec les torsions et plus difficile avec le rachet,

 Pour choisir les outils de torsion, la première chose est d'avoir la spécification de la torsion.

 La spécification de la torsion est donnée par exemple par le fabricant d'engines.

 Le fabricant d'engines vous a dit que vous devez torser ce boulot à 100 Nm.

 Non, ce n'est pas un bon exemple, parce que quand vous faites ça,

 Je fais très lentement, continuement, et à la fin la torsion clique,

 parce qu'à l'intérieur vous avez un mécanisme, nous allons voir ce mécanisme,

 ça va vraiment modifier la force que vous appuyez sur le boulot.

 Je vais faire une deuxième fois, une troisième fois, non, non, non, les gars.

 Quand la torsion clique, c'est bon, donc vous n'avez pas besoin de le mettre deux ou trois fois.

 Juste une photo rapide pour vous expliquer qu'à l'intérieur il y a un boulot.

 et quand vous tournez ici, quand vous tournez, vous compressez le boulot,

 et plus le boulot est compressé, stressé, plus l'élevé du torsion sera important.

 mettez juste le torsion au niveau le plus bas pour détendre le boulot,

 parce que si vous utilisez toujours les cliquets de torsion au maximum,

 le boulot sera toujours stressé, et à la fin, le boulot perdra sa force.

 Hey everybody, I'm doing a quick video here on how to put an SSD into the Acer Aspire

 I was trying to do it, I couldn't find much online because basically the back panel here,

 you can put an SSD in it, but there's these structural ribs or fins or whatever on the

 The other one sits a little lower, obviously this one sits a little bit higher, so if you

 were going to actually put this right in there, it sits too high and you can't get the back

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to get rid of these ribs, I've already started and

 I'm going to cut these ribs off, I started with a pocket knife but I'll probably end

 Now the other part is, even though we all cut those ribs off, it's actually still going

 So what I found is that you can actually disassemble this SSD into what is going to be quite a

 I've had this little screwdriver for years, it doesn't even fit, honestly it's just a

 There's three screws, one here and actually two you can just press and feel, you'll feel

 So just kind of, I don't know, I just pressed my screwdriver in, broke around the sticker

 So these are actually, they're not torques, they have five, like a five star almost, right?

 I just have this flat little screwdriver, unscrewed it, anyway you guys can figure that

 So once that's unscrewed, this is a Samsung SSD850 Evo, I'm sure similar models are fairly

 similar if you're getting one of these, they're top of the line right now at a good price.

 So that actually is going to fit in here very simply and all you have to do is slide it

 Obviously there's some setup to do, I'm going to be installing Windows on this one and I've

 still got all my data over there so I'm going to, sorry I just got a text.

 So I'm going to run Windows off this and use that as my backup with all my information.

 Now I'm going to probably cut out here and Dremel that crap off.

 Alright there we go, I took my Dremel to this little section here, just that little bit

 I made sure to leave those ribs there just for some support so it's not coming in and

 I had to go all the way over and there was one of these little pegs, I had to go over

 So if you've gone this far I'm sure you can figure out how to put this back on but that

 All that's really up to you, I barely even know what I'm doing right now anyway so good

 Once upon a time in a land far, far away there was a little witch.

 But because of some odd circumstances she became homeless and had no house to live in.

 And all she had with her out in the cold dark woods was her fabric stash.

 And so she thought she would build herself a house with fabric.

 So she took a square, she dug in her box and she found this beautiful orange square that

 And since in her box she had a little heat and bond, she got a piece of that as well.

 She took the heat and bond and ironed it on the back of her fabric.

 But in looking at it she discovered she couldn't get in that house.

 She remembered right in the middle of making that door that she had a very pointy hat.

 So she thought she better put a door, a point in that door so that she could get in.

 It was looking more and more like a very nice little witch house.

 To be all by herself, one little witch, in this big old house, what would she do?

 And at that very moment there was a little tug on the bottom of her dress.

 And she looked down and there was a little ghost right in the woods tugging on her dress.

 And he said, I would love to live with you in your little house.

 And when they got inside their house, this is what it looked like.

 So if you gather up all your children, you can do this at church groups.

 And if you have two or three people who are doing this with you at the same time, you

 So instantly, just by telling a Halloween story, you're going to have a Halloween decoration.

 If all this witch had was little tiny strips in her stash, she could still make a pumpkin!

 You can do this story with any kind of fabric that you want, any size.

 When you iron on your Heat N Bond, you iron it bumpy side down.

 And because this is 8 inch, and we've used the Bella Solid squares from Moda, and because

 this is an 8 inch block on a 10 inch square, when you put those together like this, it

 We've got three different pumpkins here from three different people who were using

 the, from three different people who were cutting their pumpkins out.

 So, you tell this to a little group and you're going to have more pumpkins than you know

 So, Happy Halloween from Jenny, at the Missouri Star Quilt Company.

 To make the origami top hat, you will need one sheet of square paper.

 the way, you can just crease the center to find the center point.

Once you've done that, you want to fold the bottom side upwards to the

Once you've done that, you want to go ahead and repeat the same thing on the left side.

Next, you want to shape the hat's rim over here, so you're going to fold the bottom right hand corner down like this.

After that, we're going to soften these sharp points here and fold it inwards like this towards the center.

 After that, you want to decide how tall or how short you want your hat to be.

I want my hat to be a little shorter, so I'm going to fold down from the top a little bit.

This step is optional, but I want to have a rounded hat at the top.

 I'm going to fold down the top right corners and also the top left corner.

Once I've done that, I will flip the unit around and I have a completed top hat.

Also, check out my other free tutorials at the end of this video as well.

 Hey guys and welcome back to the TC Games Daily Origami Series.

 In this tutorial I'm going to show you how to make this simple Pikachu which is made

 Okay so to make this you're going to need a square sheet of paper and preferably a red

 Now we're going to start with the color side facing down so turn it over to the side and

 This is going to put in a diagonal crease going this way and once you have that aligned

 Now we're going to fold it so that the top edge aligns with the right edge.

 Once you have it properly aligned go ahead and crease it into place.

 And now you can take the red pen and just go ahead and draw two circles.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to start by turning it so that the color side is facing down.

 And we're going to fold it along the center crease right there.

 Now we're going to fold it along this crease so that it stands straight up.

 And if you squash it down along this edge, it should squash into a little triangular shape.

 And what we're going to do is we're going to take these two flaps here because both the ears are on this side.

 And the idea is to get these two colored parts on the same face.

 And we're going to start by turning it so that this flat side faces us.

 Now fold it so that this tip comes up and meets this tip up here.

 And once it's properly aligned, go ahead and crease that into place.

 Now we're going to go to this tip here and we're going to bring this tip to the center.

 Now take this flap here and you want to fold it so that this edge aligns with this edge.

 At this point, if you'll notice here, there's a pocket over here.

 And you want to take this triangular piece here and just tuck that in.

 So once again, take this flap, fold it so that this edge aligns with this edge.

 Now we're going to fold this tip to the center like we did on the other side.

 What we're going to do is we're going to take this flap where the ear is

 And now all that's left to do is just hold this nice and tight.

 And you might want to hold the top part in place because there's nothing securing it like there is down here.

The first thing we need to do is cut round the back of the pectoral

 fin as close to the head as we possibly can and open the flesh up just like so.

 Because I'm right handed I'm going to lie the fish to the right hand side with the head

 going to put my knife just above the dorsal fin and then I'm going to draw it backwards

 and forwards until it punctures the skin, drops on top of the spine and then in one

 gentle movement I'm going to run the knife down the whole length of the fish in one delicate

Then I'm going to use my knife, I'm going to turn it so it's cutting forwards

 and just cut forwards to release the flesh from the front of the head.

 to fillet the tail of the Pollock by pushing my knife straight through into the gut cavity

 of the fish and then in one draw with the handle slightly lifted I'm going to work my

I'm then going to use the tip of the knife to come up the rib cage very

 gently and then I'm going to put my knife on top of the rib cage and work it down towards

You don't have to do this in one cut, just make sure you stay tight on the

Then I just have to release the fillet away from the bottom of the fish and the fin.

Again, cutting behind the pectoral fin, around the back of the head,

 making sure we get a good yield and then I'm going to fillet it from the tail.

 tail end and then in one movement we have to pull the knife all the way up to the head

We're actually applying downward pressure to the tip of the blade and then

 we've released the fillet all the way off the top of the spine.

 the knife and make sure we're all the way into the lateral line.

 the tail of the pollock, push the knife right through into the gut cavity, draw it down

 the spine in one movement and then again we're going to use the tip of the blade to

 go up the rib cage, through the pin bones and then I can line my knife on top of the

 rib cage and just tease the fillet off the top of the rib cage and we've got the second

 see that I've left the fins on below and there's also some bone here so I'm just going to shave

 underneath the bone and then I'm going to cut the fin off the very edge of the fillet,

 I'm going to start at the tail end, pull on the tip of the tail with the tip of my fingers,

 of the skin I can just push the knife in one movement down the whole length of the fillet

 and the easiest way to do that is to produce what's called a V-bone.

 down on the table and the bones run along the lateral line there.

 my knife one side of the lateral line and pull it towards the front of the fish, insert

 my knife the other side of the lateral line and pull it towards the front of the fish

 and then the V-bone will actually lift out the centre of the fillet and there's the first

 there's a little bit of silver skin left on the belly wall here so I'm just going to trim

 front so I'm just going to trim that off because it's all about presentation and then I'm going

 tip of the tail, start the knife down onto the skin and then pull the tail with your

Once the knife starts running down the skin just push the knife as hard as you

 can keeping pulling to the left with the skin and there's your second fillet.

 Hey everyone, so I am going to do a quick little video on some of the baby foods that

 Last night I made peaches and I still need to make apples but I don't feel like doing

 that today so I'll probably put that off until maybe like tomorrow or something.

 Actually mine makes a little bit more because I went with some large sweet potatoes but

 it calls for about three cups of cubed, peeled sweet potatoes which is about two, kind of

 I went with two large ones so I should be able to get a little bit more out of it.

 So what it says to do is in a medium saucepan you are going to bring the potatoes and water

 So like I said, this book is kind of like just like a basic guideline but I'm going

 I have a cup of water and I put my steamer basket in and I'm going to add my cut up sweet

 I cut these up last night and I put them in water but I'm not going to put the water in

 Just the one cup that's already in there but I just saved myself some time and went ahead

 and cut them up and kept them in some water in the fridge that way they didn't go bad.

 So I am going to put these in the pot and let them cook up probably about 20 minutes

 until they're really, really tender and I will be back to show you after that.

 Okay so I just want to note I had to get a larger pot so I may have to end up adding

 a little bit more water to this because I only did one cup and normally when I do the

 two potatoes and the one cup works out fine but it normally all fits in my other, the

 So this is the larger pot because the other one was just way too full.

 So I will be back to show you in about 20 minutes and I'll let you know how they go.

 This is a package, I bought a one pound package of baby carrots that are already peeled and

 I'm going to use now this pot that I have with one cup of water and I'm going to put

 these on the stove and let them simmer for about 15 to 20 minutes until they're very

 Alright so I have steamed the sweet potatoes and I have steamed the carrots and they kind

 I'll do the sweet potatoes I think first and then I'll do the carrots second but I will,

 I'm not going to show you as I'm pureeing it because I'm not going to probably edit

 too much of this video out of the sound and everything and it's just, that would be annoying

 Alright so I have the sweet potatoes, they're all pureed and the carrots are all pureed

 and now I'm going to spoon them out into my ice cube trays and I will show you them when

 I got out of the sweet potatoes, the two sweet potatoes I bought, I got 35 servings because

 So out of the sweet potatoes I got about 35 and of the carrots I got 14, 15, 16, 17, 18,

 So just give your baby according to however you think they want to eat.

 So that is our homemade baby food, our sweet potato and carrots.

 If you'd like to see more of these videos, leave your request down below.

 After these are frozen, I pop them out and I put them into the Ziploc bags which I've

Today I'm going to show you how to make Kalua Pork, a Luau favorite.

 1 to 2 teaspoons of liquid smoke, very important, and 1 to 2 tablespoons of sea salt.

 This is Palm Island sea salt in red gold, but you could use kosher or regular sea salt.

Now you can do it in a dainty way and just cut nice little slits,

 Rub it really well with the sea salt making sure to get into all the slits that you just made.

 I like to use the banana peel because it's a little bit more flavorful.

 I've made this dish before with banana leaves, which is traditionally the way it is made,

 but being in the middle of England in the middle of winter, I couldn't find any.

 You want to make sure that no steam can escape because this dish is cooked by braising and steaming in its own juices.

 So use as much foil as you need, but try to recycle the foil when you're done if you can.

The water just needs to come up about an inch, maybe two up the side.

Unless you're a kid and then it'd be a real drag to open a gift full of pork and

 I served it with a broccoli and almond rice and fresh pineapple and it was fantastic.

Now with this piece of timber there will be quite a lot of different grain

I am really breaking one rule and that is by having a knife in my hand as

 tells you and that is that you hold the wood in one hand and you do this.

 doing here is we are keeping our arms close to our side at all times and doing this.

 way if you hold a knife in one hand and the work in the other, that is all the motion.

 Now you can put an enormous amount of power into your cut if you do this.

 we do not need an awful lot to remove an awful lot here, but there are little bits which

You want a fairly straight shape along here if you are going to do a

Now we are doing this particular type of cut here because the grain here goes

 this way and if we cut the wrong way, it will cut, but it is not very easy.

You can do it, but it is always a good idea to go with the grain

 because the handle hits the thumb or a part of your hand first before the blade does.

 Now what we need to do is round this over and we need to put a little bit on the end here.

 It comes in a sturdy box and includes a very nice, high quality bag.

 To put it in the proper orientation, the legs must be rotated 180 degrees and the center

 And it doesn't extend that much when it is in its proper setup.

 I thought I'd have some trouble with it but it really isn't much different from the lever

 With the legs fully extended, the tripod has a height of 56 inches.

 With the center column fully extended, the tripod has a maximum height of 66 inches.

 Just grab the foam padding of one of the legs, loosen it up, and completely detach it.

 Detach the ball head from the center column, attach it to the leg, and voila!

 Again, to extend the leg, just grab the twist locks with one hand and let loose.

 The Benro Travel Angel has a very nice ball head, a very nice construction, has weather

 sealed legs, can be converted to a monopod, will fit in your carry-on luggage, and has

 With all these features, The Shy Photographer rates it highly recommended.

 I guess they're protected so if you go and harvest them, you're allowed one per person.

 It's not a strong flavor, it's more of a texture and it has this sort of very light, pleasant

 They eat seaweed primarily so you get a lot of that flavor in a good way.

 So you go in on the thin side, the tip of the knife, and you just sort of wiggle it

 You sort of, you just kind of cut next to the foot here and that'll get this weird gooey

 It's the same idea though as like when you are working with lobster and you pull the

 It turns the sauce bright pink and adds just a little bit of that sort of briny sea flavor.

 Any chili will do but the first ones I found at the market were these Anaheim chilies from

 They've got a real sort of green, fresh flavor and a good amount of heat.

 Once it's done, once it's been in there for a few hours I actually just sort of...

 I'll pour off the liquid and then we just put it on the burner and just let it steam away.

 I mean I have a lot of experience with fish from before the days of dedicating myself to meat.

 I thought about a lot of things and I felt like an abalone sausage would just like...

 It's the texture that I think is really sort of makes it all happen.

 If it was ground into a sausage or chopped up into a sausage I think you'd lose a lot of that.

 So while that's steaming we're just going to kind of build the components of the salad here.

 So a little more of that same chili which I'll just slice as thin as I can.

 So because this isn't a restaurant and I don't have a grill I have to make actual toast.

 So we're going to take that and we're going to take our marrow from the bread.

 If you put too much in there you won't taste the abalone and we certainly wanted to taste the abalone today.

 I got a little extra special work so I'll pop it in the oven for a minute.

 Let that sit for a second just to kind of rest like it was a steak.

 So it's nice, you get a little bit of hot, you get a little bit of cold, you get a little land, a little sea.

 Like I think it gets lost a little bit in all the different stuff.

 I think maybe a little less bone marrow, a little less lemon, a little less garnish, a little more abalone would make it really stand out.

 Yeah, you know it's weird being surrounded by cows and pigs and things and suddenly this thing wanders in.

 Everybody spent a few minutes in the walk-in kind of looking at him.

 Knowing Jason, instead of going to an Asian market where you can buy frozen duck tongues,

 I'm going to encourage him and challenge him to call up our mutual duck farmer and see if we can get a bunch of duck heads and actually cut the ducks out of the beaks.

 Because, you know, if you're going to do it, you might as well do it right.

 The producer's found a nice little place, he tells me, that makes wonderful homemade

 These folks have been in business for over 50 years in Gatlinburg, right in the heart

 So rather than stand outside there and tell you all about it, I'm going to do something

 I'm going to tell you about it now, and then I'm making a belt for it.

 In fact, they tell us it might be the longest standing original store in Gatlinburg.

 So you're going to show me how to do a little taffy work today, huh?

 We've already got it cooked, and we're going to take part of this out to put on the pullers.

 Sure, so you want to get it to a temperature that you can go to the next step.

 You know, every time my back gets sore, I think I'd pay somebody to put me on one of

 So this is the point where we make it cherry or lime or lemon, whatever you want.

 Oh, you put it right on, oh like that, and then the puller mixes it for you.

 And I can see the taffy here on the end is getting that gummy, that pully kind of a texture

 You've got truffles, you've got all sorts of beautiful chocolates over there.

 We've got a factory up on Ski Mountain Road that they do all the small stuff.

 How many little of those taffy candies they get out of this factory?

 It'll run about 80 a minute and it takes about 15 minutes to run.

 So, it's just, they've not developed an easy way to do that over the 27 years you've been

 If we was going to put stripes on it, we'd put the stripes in right now.

 So, this is where the taffy gets made into little candies that go through this machine

 Hi everybody, I'm Kaylee from Sidewalk Party Everyday Fashion and today I have a woven

 A couple days ago when I wore this on my blog my hair was three days dirty so it's going

 But one thing that I like to do when my hair is clean and I feel like I don't have enough

 texture out of it is use one of my favorite products called Redken Powder Grip.

 This is something that I've mentioned a lot on the blog, I use this all the time.

 As I said it does make my hair feel dirty which is why it gives such good texture and

 So if you don't like that feeling you won't like this product but I love it and I use

 So basically what I do to use this product is I go in on either side of my part and separate

 Alright, so you can see that's already given my hair really good body and texture.

 I'm just going to go in and brush that out just a little bit to help spread the powder

 Alright, so at this point if I wanted to get even more volume I could backcomb it but I

 What I'm going to do is grab the little triangular section behind this ear here.

 I'm also going to take a section over on this side and I'm just going to set this piece aside

 Tuck your bobby pin up into it so it's just straight like that.

 And then you're going to spin it so that hair is covering the bobby pin.

 This one's hard to do without a mirror so I'm going to be checking this in between.

 Now something that I'm noticing now that I'm seeing this one is that I didn't bring it quite far enough across.

 So I'm going to take this one back out, just slide this bobby pin down a little bit further,

 So you want it to kind of reach that edge of that other section that you set aside.

 So now I'm going to take this section, do the same thing over here.

 Put that bobby pin in like you did before, spin it under, and pin it straight up.

 Alright, now I'm going to take this next piece that I set aside.

 Now this piece is starting to come a little loose so I'm just going to tuck that right back up in there.

 I didn't tie it off last time but I think this will help secure it a little bit more now that it's clean.

 And I'm going to put a little bit more of this dust in there, in my ponytail.

 I made a lot of sideburns in this video today, sorry about that.

 Now because my hair is straight, when my hair was dirty before there was some previous curl in it, so I'm going to be getting these ends sticking out.

 If that's an issue for you, you should curl your hair before you do your updo.

 Just curl the ends a little bit and it will kind of naturally tuck under.

 So when you're done, give it a good spray, do any adjustments that you want to the front.

 If you guys have any questions, you can email me at filealreadyatgmail.com.

 And don't forget to follow me on Facebook, Twitter, and BlogLove.

 In this case I'm using fresh chanterelles that I harvested in the woods this afternoon.

 And I'm going to use about 6 to 8 cloves of roasted garlic, minced.

 I'm starting with about a tablespoon of olive oil and a whole onion, chopped.

 I'm going to saute the onions with some salt and pepper until they are translucent.

 Once translucent I'm adding the chanterelle mushrooms and I want to saute those just for

 And then I'm going to add the minced garlic and stir that in as well.

 Once incorporated I'm adding about a half a cup of sherry to deglaze the pan.

 And once the sherry has reduced I'm going to transfer the onion and mushroom mixture

 to a bowl, set it aside, and add the shredded meat from one rotisserie chicken.

 Now I'm starting with 4 tablespoons of olive oil and 4 tablespoons of flour to create a

 I'm going to cook that for a few minutes and add another half a cup of sherry.

 Now stir that together and you can see it really thickens up into a paste.

 And using a whisk you can whisk that together for a couple of minutes and that will smooth

 And then the chicken and mushroom mixture with a little fresh lemon.

 Stirring all the ingredients together I've prepared a 13 by 9 inch baking dish.

 And finish it with a little bit more salt and pepper and paprika.

 Cooking about 350 degrees for about 40 minutes or until the top is golden brown and crispy.

 We're showing you what the problem with the spike and ferrule is.

 A lot of the installers don't pay attention to the slit in the ferrule, which needs to

 If they leave it facing up, the water goes back into the hole and expands the wood, so

 This is what happens after the ferrule leaks the water back into it.

 All you'll have to do is put some caulking in there to keep it from continuing to rot.

 This is another problem we find with gutters all the time, is that they don't get cleaned

 It either pulls the gutter down or attracts ants and termites to the house, and it also

 Okay, this time the drip edge was missing for part of it and not attached properly for

 You just have to push it back and put a screw in it to hold it in place.

 Okay, now we're showing you how to reinstall and fix old gutters.

 Both the new installations and when we repair old ones, we'll put the hidden hanger right

 in the front instead of the spikes so you don't have the big hole.

 Hi you guys, so I know there are a lot of videos on YouTube about how to French braid your bangs.

 So I'm going to teach you guys how to French braid your hair, just I guess, the front of your hair.

 And I usually wear this when I have my hair up in a bun or a ponytail.

 I usually do a French braid when I'm at a competition, I know it sounds weird, but it looks really classy

 and it makes you look more serious and pulled back, but it's still a little fun.

 So what you're going to do first is part your hair on the side.

 You can use a little bit of shine serum, like this one is from Garnier Fruity Teeth, it's an anti-frizz serum.

 You can use, you know, whatever hair products you need to make your hair smooth.

 And preferably straight hair could work, I mean curly hair could work too, technically.

 But obviously, I'm not going to curl my hair, because my hair is naturally straight.

 And then all of this hair is going to be, um, swept back into an updo or a ponytail or just locked down.

 So what you're going to do is you're going to start braiding it.

 So you're going to braid it, like, towards the back of your head.

 So, you get here, and you would normally just put this over into a normal braid.

 But you're going to take a little bit of hair from the front, like that.

 And then just braid normally, don't take any extra hair from that side.

 because you don't want to have that one attached to your head, I guess.

 And after that, I just, you know, normally braid it all the way down.

 So you can tell right here, that the French braid is right there.

 You can also use a clear elastic and tie the other side of the hair in,

 So, um, to complete this updo, you can either, you can leave it

 just so there's one side right here, and it goes down like this.

 And this is the, you know, Lauren Conrad braid that everybody really likes.

 But to kind of make it a little different, you can add a little jeweled bobby pin,

 or you can take this side of your hair and French braid it as well.

 So I'm going to take less hair on this side, because it's parted to the other side.

 And then I'm just going to bring this around and pin it in the back as well.

 So if you're going to do this hairstyle, I actually suggest using a clear elastic

 and tying two braids together in the back and then pinning it together,

 Hey, this is ball joint and I should not be able to do that so this one is no

I was taking my axles out and noticed this and it's pretty floppy so

 Alright so I'm alone here so I don't have anybody to videotape this for me

 but basically what I did cold chisel, big hammer and knocked out the side of this

 ring here and basically that pops it off that's what retains it in the arm so now

 that I should just be able to hit the top of this with a hammer and it'll drop

 Okay so here we are lower control arm ball joint removed this is what it looks

 like I guess like right here on the lip there's there's some silver solder there

 or some kind of looks like a welded joint I don't know maybe it's just me

 anyway so a lot of hammering this guy comes right out the bottom here's my

 jig a little old scissor jack out of my Subaru and the old outer race from the

 wheel bearing on my other Lancer so I was able to hold the arm while I pounded

 it out from the top so yeah pretty ghetto I don't have the the proper tool

 for this job nor did I have a vehicle to go retrieve said tool so this worked and

 all right so after a lot of banging here we have the new ball joint fully seated

 underneath and just got a the c-clip on and that retains it on the arm and then

 you just slide the boot over and and I believe it's just a it's just a

 compression fit the housing has a bit of a taper and that sits pretty tight and

 this is pretty hard rubber so I think the the knuckle just squishing down on

 that is what makes the seal as far as I can see I don't know how you would

 kilo eight zero three seven three and there it is installed on my Lancer which

 okay so here we are new ball joint installed this the snap ring was a

 little bit of a pain but got it in there that retains the ball joint in the lower

 control arm and you can see this ball joint has no slop can't even move it

 with my hands I have to use a hammer just want to straighten it out get a vertical so the

 so the knuckle can go back on it and yeah there you go on the other side

 here we are again still a little finisher but the boot on the boot doesn't just

 it doesn't just slide over for a compression fit it's actually it's

 actually retained I had to hammer it on what I actually used to seat the

 snap ring was a wheel bearing actually this is a spare wheel bearing for this

 car the inner race fits perfectly over the joint works for the snap ring as

 well as the as the boot you just give it a little smack and seat it home and

Today it's all about the trials and tribulations of sticking chicken.

You can use any kind of herbs you'd like, sage, thyme, whatever it is

 cranked up and you have to use some sort of olive oil or some sort of fat, margarine,

 your chicken sticking is cold pan, the oil is not hot enough and it just adheres

So we're looking for that mallard reaction and that will give it

 protect it from the garlic from burning too fast when I roast it.

 add some rosemary simply on the outside just for a little flavor and obviously I

 like to have the house smell good too because it's really aromatic.

 gonna try and let you guys see this but we're starting to get a little bit of

 and get a paper towel and wipe around it if you don't want that excess grease.

 And this will go ahead and take off all of the fond, the brownness from the

As you can see it's starting to change color to like a little yellow.

 we have our homemade chicken stock that we've made out of the ice box.

 comfortable with the consistency, for you people that went to culinary school or

 want to go to culinary school, nap hay, where it just covers the back of the

All you gotta do is make sure you agitate the pan and make sure it moves

 Alright, so today we're going to be replacing the air cabin filters in a 2002 Acura RSX.

 And then if you push up on the handle a little bit, slightly, it will come right out.

 It's important that you do that when you push the tab in to just kind of barely nudge it

 in a little bit because it will allow it to, otherwise it's easy to snap, break the plastic.

 Okay so once you get your glove box stoppers off, all you got to do is put your thumb right

 And you're going to want to just place them right on your glove box.

 So it looks like that hasn't been changed in a really long time.

 While you're in there, grab any foreign material like acorn caps and whatever you can find.

 And when you change these things, keep in mind the air flow arrow.

 So like I said, it's a good idea to lay them out right on the glove box as you do this.

 Make sure the air flow is pointing down and that the handles are in the right position.

 Take your cover that you've placed on your dashboard and then just push it.

 Okay, the last step is you just want to reinsert your glove box tabs.

 You want to make sure that this rubber stopper clears the area that it's supposed to be in.

 Thanks a lot for watching and I hope you subscribe so you don't miss my next tutorial.

 Your Kreg Precision Router Table Insert Plate is designed and manufactured to provide a

 Of course, none of that can happen until you actually mount your router to the plate.

 It's a straightforward process, but there are a few tips that will help you.

 To mount your router, you'll use the holes that normally hold the router sub-base in

 Some router table insert plates come with a bunch of holes to try to accommodate every

 But at Kreg, we think it makes a lot more sense to just carefully drill the mounting

 You'll find complete instructions on the back of your insert plate package or in the manual

 First, you'll remove the sub-base from your router, put it on the plate, and use it as

 Sounds simple enough, and it is, but there are a few details you need to pay attention

 The best way to start is to prep your sub-base so you can use it as a guide.

 Just place a couple of pieces of double-sided tape or some rolled up masking tape on the

 sub-base and then position it on your router so that all the holes are aligned.

 Now, turn the router so it's pretty squared up like you think it would be in the router

 table and make sure you have access to the power switch and all the adjustments.

 Next, grab the plate and bring it up so that you have the Kreg logo facing toward you.

 And hold it in place and look to see if any of the mounting holes are going to interfere

 with either the start pin hole or, if you have one, the hole for the height adjustment crank.

 And what you'll find is that you probably have to turn the plate just a little bit.

 Then you can press it in place lightly and you'll see that the router isn't going to be straight.

 It's actually going to be angled a little bit in the table, but there's still access

 So now you can pull the base off with the sub-base in approximate location and you're

 The next step is to make sure that your router will be centered and you'll do that using

 the targeting pattern that's engraved in the underside of the plate.

 Just pull your sub-base up, making sure not to rotate it, and position it so that you

 Once you're confident you have it in place, press it down and you'll be ready to drill the holes.

 If you have a drill press, use it because that's the best way to ensure straight perpendicular holes.

 And be sure to select a drill bit that's sized to match the holes in the sub-base.

 Place a piece of scrap wood under the plate to reduce chipping as the drill bit passes through.

 If you're using a hand drill, make sure you hold it perpendicular to the plate as you drill.

 A small block of wood with a line drawn on it can help you do this.

 After drilling the holes, flip the plate over and countersink the mounting holes so that

 the screw heads will sit just slightly below the plate surface.

 All that's left now is to mount the router to the plate with screws.

 You won't use the sub-base, but be sure to store it someplace convenient so you can find

 So all that's left to do now is to drop your plate into the table and you're ready to start routing.

 If you have any questions about setting up your Precision Router Table Insert Plate,

 For today's video, I'm going to show you how to create this turquoise blue cut crease makeup

 I posted a picture on my Instagram and in my past couple of videos I had some turquoise

 I will actually post it down below in the info box if you want to see that exactly because

 I still kept the bottom liner on the bottom, that bright blue that I posted in the picture,

 So to begin, as always, I'm using Peach Smoothie from Makeup Geek on an E40 brush and just

 Next I'm taking the color Shimmer Shimmer and I'm putting this all over my eyelid with

 a flat shader brush and this is just going to give a really nice shine and open up that

 I'm using the Inglot gel liner in black and here I'm just creating a pretty dramatic wing.

 Next I'm using this color from Sigma and on a pencil brush with my eyes open I'm creating

 a cut crease that kind of wings out and mimics the wing of the liner.

 I go back and forth and just build up this color and then with a clean blending brush,

 Next with the color Peacock, I'm defining that cut crease a little bit more.

 I'm using an angled liner brush here and this really helps to make it very precise and very

 Then with Shark Bait and a pencil brush, I'm just buffing that color out even more and

 it's really going to help so that it fades from the dark Peacock color and then fade

 up to that Shark Bait color and it's going to be a really nice transition.

 So here I'm just doing this to the other side, repeating those steps.

 Here I'm using that same clean blending brush to help blend it out and make it all seamless

 For my highlight, I'm using the color called Shroom from MAC and I'm using an E25 brush

 This is my favorite foundation of all time and I recently repurchased this because I

 For my concealer, I'm using the Pro Longwear Concealer from MAC and I'm blending it in

 with my Beauty Blender sponge and then to set that, I'm using the highlight color from

 this Wet n Wild Contour Kit and I'm using the tapered highlighter brush from Sigma just

 I recently gave myself a self tan so my face is like pasty white compared to the rest of

 So here I'm using Refined Golden Bronzer from MAC to give me a little bit more life in my

 I'm a pretty pale girl so the contrast was pretty obvious and I'm using this blush brush

 To contour my skin, I'm using the 109 brush from MAC and I'm using that darkest contour

 This has been my favorite go-to blush lately and it's super pretty.

 I'm using it on my cheekbones, down the center of my nose, and on my cupid's bow.

 My favorite part of this look is this eyeliner here from Inglot.

 It's in the number 88 and I'm just putting this right underneath the bottom of that original

 wing and I just think it really adds a fun pop of color to that under eye area and it's

 It's like a turquoise-y green color and I really like it in the waterline and I'm pushing

 it into the lashes and then with a clean pencil brush, I'm going to buff that out and that's

 I wasn't sure about it when I first got it in my BoxyCharm box last month but it really

 Then with that clean blending brush from before, I'm just buffing it out even more just so

 that it's very nice and gradient and then with Peacock on that eyeliner brush, I'm just

 rubbing it right against the lash line and also extending it underneath that lighter

 With my finger, I'm just taking Shimma Shimma on the inner corners of my eyes and it really

 For my lips, I'm using the same combo that I've used in the past couple of videos.

 This is the Peekaboo Neutral Lip Liner from NYX and this YSL lipstick in the number that

 And then I top it off with the NARS Super Orgasm Lip Gloss which adds a little bit more

 I really hope that you like this video and thank you guys so much for requesting these

 If you have any questions or comments or any other requests, please post them down below

 A lot of times I will try to reply to one of your questions and I can't because it won't

 So if you want me to answer your question, please make sure that your settings let it

 Thanks again so much for watching and I will see you guys in my next video.

 In this video we're going to have one on swing arm bearing replacement.

 To remove the bearings, which I've already done, you would just pop out the seals with

 And to actually remove the needle bearings, you take a socket that is about the size and

 The best way to do it is with a press, but again I do not have a press.

 Now on the bearings you will notice there is more of a curved side than a flat side.

 Once you've cleaned the swing arm, they should slide in fairly easy.

 Put you some grease on the actual outer shield of the needle bearing.

 And you simply want to make sure you've got it in there straight.

 We're actually pounding through the other side, so we've already got the other one on.

 Now these inner bearings, they have to be recessed a little bit.

 Now, the outer bearings are going to be flush with the inside of the lip.

 So, pay attention to that with your manufacturer's manual and whatnot.

Today on the show I will be teaching you how to make one of my favorite

It is a peach cobbler and we love peach cobbler here in the South.

 And I know I have made it several times on this show, but I want to make it again because I think I came up with a new variation

 All purpose flour, raw sugar, baking powder, cinnamon, and salt.

 Whisk that all together and then slowly drizzle in your almond milk and continue to whisk.

 Now you don't want to over mix, but if you slowly drizzle in the almond milk while you mix, you will have less lumps.

 And as soon as you have all the almond milk poured in, you can pretty much stop whisking because it will be all incorporated.

 Next I am using a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

I pitted them, I sliced them, I am layering them in the casserole dish.

I have preheated my oven to 350 degrees F and I am just going to bake this cobbler

What I love about this variation is that I used all purpose flour and I added in baking powder and salt.

 When I was growing up, we just used self rising flour, then added in any baking powder, then added in any salt.

 But with the baking powder and the salt added in separately, it makes the dough rise a lot more into more of a cake.

 And then you have the fruit on the bottom and it is juicy in it's own right.

Instead of with the self rising flour, you have flour that wouldn't rise.

 So it would be that glutinous, gelatinous, like settlement of flour at the bottom.

And with this you have the fruit and then you have the wonderful cakey cobbler at the top.

If you try it, leave a video response or a comment below and I would love to see them.

Today I have another cooking 101 session and this is going to be

So here are a couple of the products that you want to use to make

I have two things of angel hair pasta, some green onions, some shredded parmesan

 cheese, some Italian roasted red pepper dressing, some Italian dressing packet, some sliced

 boiling and I filled it up with water and I also added salt to the water.

 going to put in my angel hair pasta and I'm going to break these up and these do not take

So by the time I'm done chopping everything up, this will be ready.

 going to take our black olives, throw the whole can up in there.

 Hi, we're here today since I noticed there's no videos on there about changing spark plugs

 One of the first steps is there's six 10 millimeter bolts that you must remove along with the

 I have put back on the oil cover just to make sure no contaminants get inside there.

 But before we do any of that, we're going to disconnect the battery just to be sure

 I have already loosened the terminals, so you just give it a little wiggle and pull

 So what we're going to do in here is we're going to use a 10 millimeter and we're going

 The plugs are long, medium, and short so you won't screw it up when you put it back together.

 Next, we're going to get the drill and we're going to take out again, there's six 10 millimeter

 You're going to put them down in the same order that you're taking them out.

 Okay, we've removed the last one and we're going to set it here just to show you this

 is what they look like and this is what they're supposed to look like.

 Now we're just going to reverse the process and put in the new ones and plug everything

 The whole process itself took maybe about a half an hour and partwise it was about $12

 Now we're going to go ahead and start it up, make sure everything's running good and then

 As rice and fish are the main staples in East India and Bangladesh, the people in this region

 have developed effective ways to use the different parts of the fish in their culinary delicacies.

 The fish in Moong Dal is one such preparation where the fish bone and head are used for

 1 cup of oil, vegetable or mustard, whichever you have or prefer

 1 teaspoon of garam masala, which is made by mixing equal proportions of

 The fish head will be marinated with salt and turmeric powder and shallot fried in oil

 Next, the onion will be sautéed with spices and the fried fish head

 And finally, the fried spicy fish head will be added to the moong bean dal and cooked to completion

 Sprinkle turmeric and salt on the fish head and marinate uniformly all over

 Now, you're 2 cups of split moong bean in a moderately hot pan and roast it until it becomes a golden yellow color

 Boil the mixture for about 10-15 minutes or until the moong bean becomes half-cooked or semi-soft

 When the oil is hot to the touch, add the fish head and fry on all sides for about 3-4 minutes

 Break the fried head into smaller parts and fry uniformly all over

 Heat about 2-3 tablespoons of fresh oil or use the leftover oil from frying the fish

 If you so wish, you may add the ginger after the onion is half fried

 Then add the mixture to the half-boiled moong dal completed previously

 Boil for the next 25-30 minutes or until the moong bean is soft

 After the cumin seed starts sizzling, add the fish mix with the moong dal

 Bring the whole mixture to a boil and boil it until it becomes the right consistency

 Bundt pans make those big cakes that you put the powdered sugar over the top.

 Well, I saw this on Pinterest, and this is my own take on doing Bundt pan chicken.

 I've seen all kinds of things done to poor, unsuspecting chickens, including having a

 But the whole premise is cooking the chicken upright, and let me demonstrate that for you.

 You have one clean little chicken, see, like this, and then you place him thus and so on

 and, yup, he's standing upright, that's right, right there on top of your Bundt pan.

 First of all, it's going to crisp up the bird, and it's going to get it cooked all the way

 The other thing that's really great is that you can do all kinds of things.

 You can stuff the neck area, you can put fresh rosemary in there, you can put garlic, you

 But we're going to do it really plain and simple today, along the lines of how I do

 my pot roast, but of course this is going to taste completely different because we're

 So the first things first, let's get the chicken in an upright position.

 Now you have to remember there's a hole right there in that Bundt pan that I just put the

 chicken on, so it needs to go into a roasting pan or some kind of a pan.

 I prefer a roasting pan like this because everything is set up and nice, and the other

 thing is you'll be using the Bundt area of the pan for some vegetables.

 You'll also be using this area right here for the pan to roast the vegetables.

 Second of all, I'm going to use a little bit of garlic powder and sprinkle it all the way

 You can use fresh garlic as well, just for the ease of accomplishment.

 I am a big believer, I think thyme brings out the best of everything.

 And of course, you're always going to be bringing out the salt and pepper when you're talking

 Salt seems to bring the fat to the skin and makes it crisp up nicely.

 It has a very delicious flavor, a lot like broccoli stems, in my opinion.

 And we have several onions here, and I'm just going to put these quartered onions in

 And then, I'm going to take these onions, put these other two onions here, and we have

 carrots and a couple of turnips that we're going to put here to cook.

 And you'll see, it's just kind of lining inside of the bundt pan.

 I mean, this is your quintessential one-dish meal, and it's fabulous and easy.

 You just kind of want to give everybody a little bit of an olive oil bath.

 And do another round of all of your herbs and spices, just to get everybody hopping

 And I like to cook, a lot of people like to slow cook this kind of a thing.

 I like to see chicken roasted at about a 400, 425 degree oven, depending on the size of

 And what you're doing, for our purposes, for this one, we're going to do it at about 400

 And what we're going to be doing is, it'll be done probably in about an hour, an hour

 At the very end, we're going to pull out all these delicious, wonderful vegetables, and

 we'll put those on a serving platter, along with our gorgeous chicken.

 You'll have a lot of juice in the bottom of the pan, and it's really easy to make just

 What I like to do at that point is pull some of the grease off, but then add a little white

 wine and add a little bit of butter, just to sort of bring, velvetize the sauce and

 You don't have to, I mean, you can thicken up and make gravy if you want to, but I really

 And just put it in a little pitcher and put it on the table and let everybody enjoy.

 This peanut butter cup fudge is really easy to make and it is delicious.

 One of my Facebook friends had posted a link to this recipe on her page and I'll put a

 Add to that 3 tablespoons of butter and 1 can, 14 ounces or 300 ml of sweetened condensed

 Put that in the microwave and microwave it on high for about a minute to a minute and

 Take it out of the microwave and stir it and the remaining butter and chocolate chips should

 If they don't, put it back in the microwave for a few seconds and try stirring again.

 Then line an 8 by 11 inch baking dish with some plastic wrap and I sprayed it a little

 Once it's in there, spread it out evenly and pop it in the refrigerator or the freezer

 just to cool it down a little bit until when you touch the surface of it, it feels like

 Now for the peanut butter layer, you're going to need 10 ounces of peanut butter chips.

 This is Chip It's brand and it's actually Reese peanut butter chips.

 To this add 2 tablespoons of butter as well as a 14 ounce can or 300 ml can of sweetened

 Put that in the microwave and microwave that on high for an additional 1 minute to 1 minute

 to 30 seconds or so and stir it around and make sure that everything is melted and that

 Now take the peanut butter mixture and pour it over the top of the chocolate layer.

 Spread it around with a spatula until it's nice and even and then we're going to add

 I find these at our local grocery store and one 210 gram package is plenty.

 Take each little peanut butter cup and while that peanut butter layer is still warm, you're

 just going to push them into that peanut butter layer just leaving the top sticking out so

 Keep in mind that each little peanut butter cup is going to be an individual serving so

 you need to leave enough space in between them to cut them with a knife.

 Then put it in the refrigerator and let it chill for several hours until it's completely

 Pull it out of the container using that plastic wrap and then using a sharp knife, cut it

 This particular fudge made approximately 35 servings and as I mentioned before, each little

 serving will have a little peanut butter cup in the center of it.

 It's creamy, it's chocolatey, it has that peanut butter flavor and you have that little

 You must keep this refrigerated because it does get quite soft at room temperature.

 This is one of the disadvantages of making this what I call shortcut fudge using chocolate

 If you love chocolate and peanut butter, you should give this one a try.

 If you are interested in trying a different kind of fudge, try butterscotch pecan fudge.

 You can look at it by clicking on the link in the description box or by clicking right

 So thanks for watching and don't forget to give me a thumbs up while you're here.

 We'll need rib-eye steaks, fresh corn on the cob, fresh asparagus, yellow onion, jalapenos,

 Tex-Joy seasoning, extra virgin olive oil, coarsely ground black pepper, water, Worcestershire sauce,

 For this episode, I've asked my brother David Calhoun, owner of Texas Custom Catering,

 We're going to do some rib-eye steaks, some grilled asparagus, and some roasted corn.

 First of all, we're just going to start by getting our corn ready to cook.

 All you have to do is just get some good, fresh corn on the cob from your Brookshire Brothers produce

 David, I notice these steaks have a lot of marbling and a lot of fat.

 Well, the fat actually gives it lots of flavor and lots of juice.

 Now, do you have a particular preference for the thickness of the steak?

 Well, I like them just about like this, about three-quarters of an inch to an inch thick.

 That way you can sear them really good on the outside, which holds the juice in,

 The perfectly seasoned steak is just this close to having too much seasoning on it.

 Okay, asparagus, the bottom part of it is real woody and kind of tough.

 If you just pick up asparagus and just bend it and break it, wherever it breaks,

 And the texture of steak seasoning, again, is really good on asparagus.

 Yeah, if you want to get the neighbors looking over the fence, just throw some onions on the grill.

 Mainly just for smell, but if you want to season them up, they're great.

 We're outside at Morrison's Showroom outdoor kitchen, and we're cooking with a big green egg.

 First, we're going to start with our corn because it takes longer to cook.

 Well, the things I like the most about outdoor grilling are the rules.

 Don't catch anything on fire that's not supposed to be on fire, and don't make anybody sick.

 And they are already flaming up, so I'm going to have to kill the fire with my spray bottle here in just a minute.

 Okay, when you're shucking really hot corn off the grill, it's best to put on some cotton gloves.

 The best way to do it is grab the top and pinch about half of that shuck all at one time.

 Why don't you come around and put some butter and salt and pepper on it.

 Thanks for stopping by Sarah's Simple Solutions at BrookshireBrothers.com.

 Hello wonderful people, I'm Mei, and I'm part of Empathy Films.

 Anyways, I made a video a couple of months ago documenting my 365 day space.

 And I'm going to show you today how to paint an acrylic space painting.

 Even if you don't have any artistic background, or you're really bad at drawing, or you think you're bad at drawing or painting, don't worry, it's easy.

 And I'll take you there right now to my workspace and show you how it's done through the magic of YouTube.

 I'm going to show you the materials that we're going to need before we start.

 So the kind of materials you'll be needing are acrylic paint, paint brushes, paint a palette, a canvas, newspaper or scrap paper, and a toothbrush.

 It's more of a startup and inspiration kind of material, so it's not necessarily needed because all you need is your head, really.

 I usually don't use anything to put underneath my canvas, just because I like it messy.

 It's not only great for covering a brighter surface, but it's also efficient and quicker to get rid of.

 I got this at the dollar store and its quality is not bad for painting.

 Now, what you want to avoid for paint brushes is using ones like this one.

 It's much softer and also the bristles are falling off right as I touch them.

 So they fall off really easily and when you're painting, that bristles just fall off on the canvas and you don't want that happening.

 For canvases, depending on the size you want for your space painting, I got the 8x10, which is a tad bit smaller than just a regular sized piece of paper.

 There's another option for canvases where you can get a blank black canvas.

 For paints, of course, this is a tutorial for acrylic space painting.

 Particularly, I'm using Crafters acrylic, which is an all-purpose acrylic paint.

 They're actually not bad in quality and it's really good if you don't want to spend too much on high quality paint.

 And last but not least, you'll have your paint palette and cup for water.

 Now as I said before, if your canvas is already black, you can skip this and go to the next section.

 But for those who do have a white canvas and decided to go the extra mile, we're just gonna basically paint it black.

 Now if you have a resource picture, it'll be a little easier to figure out the kind of techniques you'll be able to use.

 But if you're using your imagination, just think of a fluid movement.

 As you get to this point where you see the edges are kind of sharp, what we need to do is start watering down the color a bit.

So you're gonna mix up the colors, water it down, add just a little bit of water, not too much, and just apply it on to the canvas.

 Another technique you can use is by dabbing the color on instead of flowing with the brush.

 The good thing about acrylics is that you can go over the paint over and over again because it just dries very quickly.

 And you won't be afraid of making mistakes since you can just go over it, unlike watercolors where you basically destroy the painting if you mess up.

 If you're finding the color on your painting is starting to get a little too muddy because when you're adding the black, make sure your palette is clean and your brush is cleaned after you mix colors.

 When you don't clean properly, the black is gonna seep into the color.

 And again, you can always just reapply the color onto the painting afterwards to fix it up.

 We're gonna use the toothbrush, and this is where it comes in, to make the stars.

 What we're gonna do is start with a little white paint and dab it with your toothbrush.

 And then put just a little bit of water, not too much or it's gonna be too watery for you.

 And start flicking all over the canvas, on the sides, on the surface.

If you use your hand as a kind of shield to block away the splattering, you'll be able to conceal the splattering to the area that you want the splattering to go on.

 Also to add a little variety to the stars, I'm gonna add a little blue and then put a star here.

 And just stretch out the rays a little bit to make it look like it's exploding in the distance.

I was asked on the Curly Girl forum if I wouldn't mind explaining

 how I pin up my short hair and so I figured instead of writing it down that I would record

There is one way where I do twist it and pin it up, but I have a combination of

 So I twist it and pull pieces up along the sides and so it ends up looking like a braid

 getting the hair up off your neck, especially when it's really hot out.

 going to be getting warm here in Ottawa, but it's going to be getting even warmer in the

 found that since I started the Curly Girl method, it's easier to do.

 be able to pin it up when it was wet and now that my hair is all soft and moisturized,

I just sort of keep adding bobby pins until I'm satisfied with how much is up.

 pieces at the back that I can just sort of twist and then pin into place.

 Most areas of the country have plenty of naturally occurring calcium in the tap water already,

 In areas where the tap water is very soft, say a pH of 6 or lower,

 you'll need to add calcium to help boost the performance of the machine.

 Remove the calcium basket, twist, and pull the empty basket out.

 and insert the whole assembly back into the calcium port and twist it,

 If it's not, you'll have a water leak from the top of your calcium port.

 you may get them in a small bottle where you just fill up the empty basket

 You know, I really like that water and I like to take it with me wherever I go.

 There's definitely an order of preference when considering containers to store your water,

 starting with the least desirable, which are the soft plastics,

 which is indicated by a seven inside the triangle on the bottom.

 Glass is totally non-reactive and a better vessel than the two plastics.

 There's a lot of research that suggests the plastic leaches harmful agents into the water

 But best for anything to store the water is the Ironways proprietary bottle.

 So the ideal way to store the water is to fill the container all the way to the top

 It's ideal to keep it in a refrigerator and out of the sunlight.

 But the best is to drink the water straight out of the machine.

 In this video, we will show you how to replace the air filter on a Husqvarna chainsaw.

 To replace the air filter, first set the chain break by pressing it forward.

 Take the new air filter, place it back into the air filter base.

 Today we're going to make eggnog pancakes with a butter rum sauce.

 And what we're going to do is we're going to need to bring this up to a boil until the sugar is dissolved.

 And then we'll remove it from the heat and add 2 tablespoons of rum.

 Okay, there we have a nice butter rum sauce that's at a boil there.

 All the sugar is dissolved, so we're just going to pull it off the heat and whisk in our rum.

 A little more or less, depending on how much you like cinnamon.

 And then last but not least, the final ingredient, 3 quarters cup of eggnog.

 All right, as you can see, our eggnog pancakes are starting to get nice and bubbly.

 Let me tell you, they just smell wonderful with the eggnog and cinnamon.

 So what we're going to do is give them a little drizzle of our butter rum sauce.

 Hi, I'm Danielle Walker and I'm going to show you how to make my grain-free wraps or

 We actually use them for anything from a standard crip with, you know, jam or bananas in it,

 You can also use them a little bit smaller and use them as taco shells.

 So I'm going to show you what the batter looks like, what they'll look like in the pan, and

 then I'll get to show you some of the uses that we have for them as well.

 I'm just going to take a little bit of palm shortening and rub it all over both pans.

 I find that palm shortening works best because it doesn't burn as easily as butter.

 I like to use this batter bowl because it has this little lip on it, so it actually

 But you can use a regular bowl as well and just use a small quarter cup to measure your

 My prior recipes for these, which you can find on my blog, don't include as much arrowroot

 powder, but I was finding that they were tearing, they weren't working as well for things like

 paninis, and so I increased it a little bit and got a lot more playability out of them.

 Coconut flour by nature does have a little bit of a sweet taste, so I like to add a little

 So what you will probably find is that the coconut flour clumps up a little bit.

 What I like to do is leave the batter sitting for a few minutes after my initial stir, and

 the coconut flour will start to soak up some of that moisture, and then those clumps will

 Now, you can also just throw this into your blender if you'd like.

 It also kind of helps those clumps like I was talking about, which is nice.

 If you don't get them thin, you're going to get that kind of egg-like taste.

 You're also not going to get as strong and pliable of crepes as you want.

 So what we want to do to get them really thin is you want to do a double action.

 You're going to swirl the pan with your wrist while pouring the batter in at the same time.

 You can add a little bit more if your swirl of the wrist is not getting it to go all the

 So you're going to see it stop spreading almost as soon as it hits the pan.

 And then we're just going to let that sit there for about 30 to 45 seconds.

 You'll see the edges start to kind of curl up a little bit, and that means that you are

 I like to sometimes test it just to see if they're moving, which they're starting to,

 So the edges of the wrap are just starting to curl up on the sides, which means that

 I like to run a spatula around it just to make sure we don't snag any edges as I'm flipping.

 And then we'll just go ahead and flip it right into our waiting pan.

 You can go a little bit larger too if you'd like to make burritos or something of the

 sort, but I find that this size is really great for pliability, works really well for

 If you have some that fall apart, save them because if you're making lasagna or enchiladas

 or something like that, you can actually just kind of fill in the edges and they're still

 They, of course, won't work for a burrito or something of the sort, but you don't have

 And after your first couple, I promise you, you will get the hang of it.

 This full recipe can be found in my second book, Meals Made Simple, which is linked below.

 And if you liked this video and want more recipes like this, make sure to hit the thumbs

 up and click the subscribe button below so you don't miss a single recipe.

 OK, you may have seen that video where Elvis the crocodile eats a lawnmower.

 The axle of the wheels will go in there, so that wheel will be about there, the front wheel.

 And then you're going to get this kind of box, cross-collecting box, sticking out at the back.

 You're going to get a kind of a box sitting on there as well, with another box on the side.

 They call them carburetors or something, I think they're called in America.

 And this will kind of come around there, so then you can draw...

 And then we've actually got another handle thing there, haven't we?

 And then you've got these kind of control mechanism things going on there.

 Once you see how easy it is to make compound or flavor butters, and you learn how versatile

 they are and how long they last, you may find yourself making and keeping three or four

 Now compound butter is simply butter blended with fresh herbs, spices, citrus, and any

 condiment and it adds a beautiful, elegant finishing touch to any side dish or entree.

 The first compound butter I ever made was in a hotel where I worked through college.

 It's actually quite simple and that's what I'm going to show you today.

 I use only Plugra European style butter and I'm going to start out here with a pound softened

 Now I'm going to add some fresh herbs, about a third of a cup of Italian flat leaf parsley,

 about a third of a cup of fresh basil, a little fresh oregano, a tablespoon, a tablespoon

 of minced garlic, about two tablespoons of Dijon mustard, and then a little fresh ground

 black pepper, two teaspoons, and about a teaspoon of kosher salt.

 I'm going to blend that lightly with a rubber spatula so I don't destroy my herbs and get

 And I like to finish this off with a nice, fresh flavor of the juice of one lemon.

 You're looking for a juicy, rich, elegant finish, so I suggest you use only the finest

 Now if you wanted to make a butter specifically for steaks and burgers, you could add some

 reduced wine or Merlot to this, or even a little bit of rich beef demi-glaze.

 Now go ahead and taste your butter, and if it needs any adjustment, go ahead and re-season

 To package your butter in a convenient roll for future use, we're just going to lay it

 It's going to be about an inch and a half by about five or six inches.

 And if I were doing this in the restaurant, I'd probably make it about twice this size.

 You don't have to be perfect here, because when it's finished and sliced, no one's going

 Okay, so I'm going to take the butter rolled in parchment paper, and I'm going to put it

 Once it's set up, I'm going to actually transfer it into plastic wrap like this.

 And in this format, I can hold it in the refrigerator for up to three weeks, or I can freeze it

 for months to give that beautiful steak or burger an uncompromising finishing touch.

 All I'm going to do is cut off a couple slices of this beautiful Puebra compound butter and

 This example is a Mexican butter, and I've got chopped cilantro, garlic, chipotle peppers,

 And this is a butter that I have some blended cream cheese, a little bit of maple syrup,

 Now, take this simple idea and create your own flavored butter.

 Then, enter our recipe contest and you could win $5,000, but you've got to be willing to

 Welcome to another instructional video brought to you by Dogpile Racing.

 Today we're going to be removing the old bearings and installing new ones on the Hostile Standard Hubs.

 This is the installation tool available through Hostile to aid in the installation of the new bearings.

 The first thing we're going to do is to set it on a block of wood.

 Give it a couple taps and then move it 180 degrees to the other side.

 That's really the only step that you need to actually hammer on a bearing to get it out.

 It doesn't necessarily have to be an inch and a quarter socket.

 The other thing you want to do is to make sure the inner portion of the carrier is clean.

 Any dirt or grime in there could cause the bearing to sit crooked.

 Here's a standard HPI axle, the stock axle that comes in all the kits other than the 5SC.

 The flush side of the installation tool gets slid onto the axle first.

 What I like to do here is to just wiggle it around a little bit until it slides in a little bit.

 Take the second half of your installation tool with the recessed part facing this way.

 Just press it hard enough so that it just gently seats the bearing.

 It's okay to have a slight bit of tension onto it, but you shouldn't have to hammer them in there.

 You'll notice, hopefully the camera picks it up, that this side of the bearing is almost flush.

 The amount that it sticks up depends on what degree hubs you get.

I'm an art teacher and I've been teaching art for kids and adults for

 we're going to need is actually a pencil for the guidelines and then I'm going to use two

Okay, and then I'm going to draw a bigger oval, which will indicate the center

It's narrow here and a little more wide on this side and now I'll

 like a curved line and now I'll go over to my medium pen, medium marker and start with

And I'll do the stem coming out from here and this is going to be for

Now I'm just going to add with the F marker, the fine marker, curved

 lines in the center of each petal and smaller lines here on the bottom.

 I can make also some curved lines like this and just add some here too and here also.

 That's it with this sunflower that's tilted to the side and I will go ahead and draw the

 the four main petals that I want across the other as you see over here.

 do also the middle one over here which is also pretty much full.

 Hey guys, so today I'm going to show you how I went from this to this.

 I achieved these awesome coils slash curls with the max hydration method created by Pinky

 But yes, please don't forget to subscribe, like, comment, and share this vid and stay

 Hey ladies and gentlemen, so as you can see what I'm doing right now is just taking down

 the sections I have in my hair and dampening my hair so that it will be easier to apply

 And now I'm clipping some of the sections back up so that I can work with a few at a

 Here I am adding my leave-in conditioner to some water to dilute it.

 And the leave-in that I'm currently using is the Kinky Curly Knot Today.

 I like the way it makes my hair feel, but I'll also be trying some more.

 As you can see, I'm just raking the product through my hair and making sure that it's

 evenly distributed, making sure that every strand gets covered.

 Now what I'm doing is just clipping up the sections that I've already applied the leave-in

 to, and I'm going to separate out small sections so that I can start applying my botanical

 It's easier for me to work in small sections, that way I can make sure that each strand

 is covered with the gel and that each curl or coil gets defined well.

 So as you can see, the gel I'm using is the Kinky Curly Curling Custard.

 I'm just gently raking the gel through my hair and pulling it down the length of my

 hair so that the cuticle of my hairs are smooth, or the cuticles of my hairs are smooth, and

 And I'll continue to do that for the remaining pieces within this section.

 As you can see, my coils are pretty well defined for, I think this is my second time

 And yeah, though I haven't been doing the whole process every day, my hair has remained

 So once again, I'm just raking the product through my curls slash coils, and continuing

 to pull it down my hair so that everything defines very nicely.

 Now you guys can see that I'm pretty heavy handed, but it's not really necessary to be

 I mean, I just prefer to be, you'll still get a nice result if you don't use as much

 Okay, so here's me doing the whole process one last time in fast motion for you guys.

 Just putting in the leave-in right now, and then I'm going to move on to put in the gel,

 Please stay tuned to see what my hair looked like dry, and if you guys want to see the

 remaining steps in this process, I'll have the videos linked at the end.

 Once again, don't forget to subscribe, share, like, and comment below what you'd like us

 Okay guys, please be sure to check out the Maximum Hydration Method website to see exactly

 I'll put the link down below in the description box and also in this video.

 Hi, this is Bianna from Splico Stampers and in this video I'll show you how to make this

 To start out with, the stamp used on this basket, the greeting, is from Verve's Everlasting

 To start out with, you'll need a 4 3 quarter by 7 3 quarter piece of cardstock and you

 Then you pre-fold each of these score lines and then cut two of the opposite score lines

 I'm going to add two on top and bottom to make sure my basket will hold together.

 Take the backing off and fold those ends in and that will give you your basket base.

 You will need a strip of patterned paper if you want to decorate it that measures 14

 I taped two pieces together and then added a decorative strip that I punched with Stampin'

 Now I just have to take off the backing and tape it all around to my box.

 Now all I have to do is add the handle and fill it with goodies.

 The handle I already took a 1 by 11 inch strip of cardstock and added a slightly smaller strip of patterned paper.

 I'll use my cropper dial and the small hole punch to center it.

 I'll use a pen to add brads to make sure the handle won't come off if you add something heavy.

 Now all you have to do is add some tissue paper or grass, some goodies and maybe a bow and you're ready to go.

 And today we're going to show you some more tips on how to do the splits.

 Before you do the splits, you should always make sure that you're warmed up.

 Okay, so our first stretch, you'll need like a chair, like a bar or something like that

 So you're going to put your leg up and then you're going to reach down like that.

 You're going to reach and put your head down as far as you can to the ground.

 And then you can also do the other leg and make sure so it warms up that muscle so you

 Another exercise you can do is when you put up your leg against the wall.

 Okay, first you're going to make sure that your bottom foot is right up against the wall.

 Then you're going to take the other foot up and reach and stretch it against the wall

 So it will be like you're doing the splits except against the wall.

 There are the types where you do mostly dance where your back leg is turned out and this

 And then the other way is usually for gymnastics where your back foot is turned in parallel.

 Some of you have asked us how to get down those last couple of inches.

 And I'm going to help someone get the last few inches she needs to get flat by pushing

 Before you do this you want to make sure the person you're doing it to is stretched.

 You have to remember that splits come over time and you don't want to press someone down

 Here's another exercise to help you improve your leg flexibility and your splits.

 So now I'm going to lift up Katrina's front leg to give her an over split.

 I'm going to lift her foot up until she says stop when it's enough of a stretch.

 So I'm going to do the same thing that I did from the front leg.

 When you're in this position make sure you're keeping your legs straight.

 So keep practicing your splits because they're great for dance, gymnastics, cheerleading and other stuff too.

 Hey everybody, I'm Robert and today I'm going to be doing a tutorial on LOS by Rammstein.

 To start things off it's going to be tuned in drop C and if you don't know how to do

 Okay what that is we're going to mute the bottom three strings and do that twice.

 Now we're going to bar the one on the bottom three strings and do that once.

 Now we're going to mute again and then play the three where we're going to bar the bottom

 Now we're going to mute the bottom three strings and do that twice again.

 Now we're just going to hit the open on the bottom three strings.

 What we're going to do is mute the bottom three strings and do that twice.

 So the last thing that's left in this song is the solo and it sounds a little bit like

 Okay so to do this what we're going to do is we're going to place our hand in the position

 So our ring finger is going on the seventh fret of the third string.

 And our index finger is going on the fifth fret of the fifth string.

 Alright so we're just going to play that five on the fifth string.

 Alright now we're going to lift our ring finger up and with our index finger what we're going

 So we're going to lift our ring finger off and we're going to play the fifth fret on

 Alright now we're going to bring our ring finger down and go to the eighth fret on the

 Alright now we're going back to that fifth fret on the fifth string.

 Alright now we're going up to the third fret on the fourth string.

 Alright now we're going down to the fifth fret on the fifth string.

 If you had any trouble learning this song just post it down in the comments below and

 Otherwise just leave any requests for any songs you'd like to learn down in the comments

So today I'm going to be creating a celebrity inspired look and I chose Christina Aguilera from the

 February issue for Marie Claire and let me give you a closer look of her look.

 So, I don't know if you can see it's better if I show you the front cover

 So if you're interested in this look stay in tune and I'll be doing it.

 Okay, so first I'm gonna be using Too Faced eyeshadow insurance primer.

 Okay, then we're going to be using this color here, which is called honey spice and these eyeshadows are mineral eyeshadows from Mary Kay

 So you're going to get that color first and all we're going to be using is an SS 217 Sigma brush

 Now we're going to use the Love and Beauty eyeshadow from Forever 21.

 Goddess bronze goddess collection and just use the same brush and this color you're just going to place it on

 So the first color we put it all over our eye lid and then this color is just going to go

 All we're using is just three colors the first color this bronzy color and then the blue

 The second color on your lid on the other eye and you'll be set

 It's very very pretty and that you're just gonna put it just slightly on the lid

 Just finish up putting that blue color on the other lid and you'll be set now that your eyes are looking very pretty

 You want them to look very very nice you can even apply falsies if you want false eyelashes and

 mascara that we're going to be using is Mary Kay's ultimate mascara in black and

 See this I have mascara on this eye and then this one you can see the difference

 so just apply mascara on this eye and then we're going to move to the next step and

 Using a brown eyeliner, this is from Mary Kay and just line your waterline

 You'll be done for your eyes and to finish off your look we're going to be using a Mary Kay lipstick

 It's very very pretty and this is going to finalize this whole look and

 You wanted to recreate this very very pretty look of Christina Aguilera

 Thumbs up and comment below if you like it and thanks for watching everyone.

 So I hope you enjoyed the first lesson and I hope you've had a chance to practice that little exercise that I showed you.

 And in this video today I'm going to teach you how to read TAB.

 Now TAB is short for Tablature and in case you don't already know, what that is, is a way of writing down and reading guitar music from paper.

 And what that means is that you'll be able to open a music book and read a song just by looking at the numbers.

 Or some people go on the internet and you'll find TAB for any song you want to learn there and you can download it and print it out.

 And you'll find it easy to read the notes and be able to play the song quickly.

 So for example, if you were writing your own music, it would be a way of keeping track of what you've been playing, you know, so you don't forget it.

It'll only take me five minutes to explain it to you and you'll get it straight away.

 So if you look at the bottom of the screen, you'll see six lines.

Now each one of those lines represents each string on the guitar.

 The bottom line is actually the sixth string and the top line is the first string.

 Now a lot of my students get confused by that because they say, you know, why is it back to front?

 On a real guitar, the sixth string is at the top and the first string is at the bottom.

 But what I will say is don't worry about it because you'll quickly get used to it and after a while you won't even think about it.

 You'll just be able to read the notes, you know, totally effortlessly.

 Now what happens is we put a number on the line and the number represents the fret we're playing.

 So for example, if we were to play the sixth string at fret one, what you would see is this.

 And if we were to play fret two on the sixth string, you'd see a number two and fret three and fret four.

 And just to give you another example, the second string at fret three, you'd see a number three on the second line.

 The fifth string at fret two, you'd see a number two on the fifth line.

 So what I want to show you in this lesson is a little song, just a short little riff, and it goes like this.

 Now you probably recognise that that's a sort of rock and roll style progression.

 One, because I want to give you a bit of music to start practising and playing.

 And for the second reason, that we can learn to read the tab whilst we're doing it.

 OK, so the first note I'm going to ask you to play now is the sixth string open.

 And of course, you can see the zero has appeared on the sixth line.

 And now what I want you to play now is the sixth string at fret four.

OK, so you can see all those numbers at the bottom of the screen.

 I'll demonstrate that again now, just to make it crystal clear.

Now what I will say is don't worry about what fingers to use on your left hand.

 What's more important is that we're learning to read the tab, OK?

 what I want you to do is go back to the fifth string at fret four.

 What's important at this stage is that you're learning to read the notes and play these notes.

 And you can play it over and over again until you really can play it fast.

 OK, now that was part of a longer piece that I just demonstrated to you then.

 Now, unfortunately, there's not time for me to show you that whole thing in this mini video guitar lesson.

 you'll find the full length video guitar lesson where I teach you that whole thing.

 So if you go onto the website, you'll find the full length video guitar lesson.

 And I'll also have a link to the full length video guitar lesson.

 And I'll also have a link to the full length video guitar lesson where I teach you that whole rock and roll piece.

 And it's actually called Rock and Roll, so go and check it out.

 And in the meantime, if you want to go on the internet and look for other tabs,

 and you can have a go at learning any songs that you can find on the internet,

 Or, you know, if you want to look at our website and find other songs that you want to learn on vguitarlessons.com,

 So, congratulations for getting to the second part of this course.

 I'll see you in a few days for the next segment of this e-course.

 The things you will need are longboard bearings, a razor blade, bearing lube, and acetone.

 Remove the metal shields from the bearing by using a razor blade to pry out the retaining clip.

 Pour acetone into a bowl and put the bearings inside the bowl, then move the bearings around to help remove dirt.

 Danger, acetone should be used in a well ventilated area with gloves.

 Remove bearings from acetone with gloves and place them on something to dry.

 off which is quite nice but I prefer wearing it with this and it's great at this time of

 year where you can almost go out in this kind of jacket and you're warm enough for the day.

 I'm not sure whether it fits me totally and it also needs a bit of do bobbling and all

 of that kind of thing but I get a lot of comments about people loving this jacket or looking

 smart in it and whatever because I can do like a school run and I can also do a meeting.

Looking at it from a shape point of view or a fit point of view, it's just a fraction

 too wide on the shoulder so what I would do is I would narrow the shoulder, let me just

 that would be nice to give you a bit more of a waist to it and then bring it out again over the hip.

People forget about sleeve widths and sleeve widths can really make a garment

 often garments just, they just need having their sleeves shortened and the whole thing

But if we just turn Katie sideways and if I just took the sleeve in here

 look at yourself in the mirror as opposed to that side and how much neater.

So there's only unfortunately really, well there are two ways to deal with this.

 One is quite long and complicated and would need a very experienced tailor to do.

The fullness could be brought down and put into the waist and a seam could

Or what we could do, supposing this was a brand new jacket and it was an investment

 purchase and that she wanted it to be right, it would then need to be fed into the collar.

What we'd have to do is take both the sleeves out, take the collar off,

 lift this back up into the neckline and then reset the sleeves, reset the armhole and reset the collar.

The only other way would be to let the waist out if there was enough room in the side

So I think the solution on this jacket is to make a seam in the middle here.

 Welcome back to another Drum Magazine groove analysis drum lesson.

 drum lesson we're going to be taking a look at the groove from Engage the Fear Machine.

 And this can be found at the bottom of page 41 of the September 2015 issue of Drum Magazine.

 Bruce Adler plays a really cool pattern here and I'll play it just on the hands once.

 And of course in the intro there's a bass drum on that first set.

 The sticking that I'm using is just alternating right left right left right left right left.

 And these are actually heard of patterns except that they're played in 16th notes and 32nd notes.

 So if you're listening to this groove alone without the rest of the music

 So if I play quarter notes on the bass drum you can kind of hear that contrast.

 So this repeats onto the second line and then you start playing the bass drum on every beat one.

 And then the third measure of the second line you have the bass drum on beats one and three.

 It's bass drums of one two three four and the last measure is just eighth notes.

 So this is a really cool application of the hurda and some other things that I was messing around with

 And to make that cooler you could do the first two strokes of the hurda on a tom.

 Do right left right, left right left alternating the whole time.

 Right stick on the low tom, left on the high instead of both on the high.

 And probably my favorite thing to do with this pattern is to keep the first two strokes on the high tom

 and then always every left stroke I'm going to play on the high tom.

 I hope you enjoyed this lesson and had fun with that drum fill.

 Remember that even if you're not a fan of a particular song you can still get ideas.

 Listen to the drum parts, try to change them to make them meet your style.

 impact gun and a powerful precision torque multiplier in the same tool,

 combining lightning-fast rundown with calibrated torque and raw power.

 impact zips nuts on or off regardless of corrosion or minor thread flaws.

 stabilizer handle and the Thrill becomes a powerful precision torque tool

 wrenches, which hammer the bolt with uncontrolled force and high noise and

 vibration, the Thrill Gun is a precision torque multiplier which produces

 consistent and measured power on bolt after bolt without the vibration and the noise.

 It is operated by a pistol grip trigger and features a directional control

 switch for tightening or loosening, a speed selection arm for high and low

 speeds, and a safety switch to protect the operator from pinch danger.

 work rules may require other safety items, such as hearing protection, face

 Check the condition of the hoses, connectors, and the general condition of

 needs a clean, dry air supply of 30 cubic feet per minute at 100 pounds per square

 pressure regulator assembly with any connector compatible with your air

Connect the air hose to the output side of the regulator and snap on

 operate the Thrill Gun without this FRL unit in the airline, as serious damage to

The regulator meters input air pressure accurately controlling the

 mist of oil into the airstream to lubricate and protect the internal parts

With air flowing to the tool, you will be able to see drops of oil

 knob increases the oil flow, and screwing it in decreases the oil drops.

 its built-in dual speed capability that is controlled by simply and quickly

 shifting the speed selection arm from high-speed rundown to low-speed torquing

When you do so, a cam locks the tool into the high-speed position.

 high-speed mode, the socket rotates at several hundred revolutions per minute,

 but torque is limited, so the tool cannot spin or kick back in the operator's

Rotating the arm down into the plane of the socket locks the tool into

 the low-speed mode, and the arm becomes the reaction point for torquing.

Let's suppose that the job at hand is to tighten these inch-and-a-half

 B7 studs with 2-3-8 nuts to 585 foot-pounds of torque using the dual-speed

 pressure supplied, we must consult the pressure-torque conversion chart for our

 foot-pound column, we find 584 foot-pounds corresponds to 50 psi.

 the tool on a stable surface, turn on the air supply and adjust the incoming air

 selection arm into the torquing position by rotating it into the plane of the nut.

 Engage the nut and position the arm against the next nut over, keeping in

 mind that the arm will turn counterclockwise as the socket turns

 hands in the danger zone near the socket, the tool will not operate in the

 low-speed power position until the safety lever switch at the rear of the

 to that nut and every nut will get the same tightening force until you change

 pass on all nuts because tightening one may change the achieved load in its

To remove the nuts, reverse the process, this time beginning in low-speed

 power mode with the speed selection arm in the lowered position.

 care about achieving a specific torque value, turn up the air pressure to add or

 next nut, keeping in mind that the arm will now move clockwise opposite the

 And there you have it, the Thrill Gun, the fastest, most versatile pneumatic

 for a demonstration on your applications and let you take it for a test drive.

 That's real tangy made from olives and then we also do an artichoke on one side

 Fantastic ciabatta bread and that's one of the things you want is you want to have a bread that has a lot of night nooks

So what I'm gonna do first is I'm gonna brush it with a little bit of olive oil

 This is the olive relish and it's got capers and three kinds of olives

 We're gonna spread that around real nice and even on the bottom of the bread and

 Then on the top of the bread, we're gonna put another relish now

 you can buy this in the deli case at fresh and it's got basil and bits of

 cheese in it and we're gonna spread that on the top side and just smash it down into the

 Delicious variety of meats and the way we make it at fresh is we use a soppressata

 Which is this large salami and that is really nice put that down

 So so we're gonna put this in the wood-fired oven now where we fire our pizzas and Chad's gonna do that for us

 The great thing about these wood-fired ovens is a lot of people are putting these in their backyard now

 And this is a great sandwich to have out and very simple you can throw it together quickly

 But what's so fun is that you can cook other things in the oven?

 We like cooking a sandwich because a lot of people they don't want to eat a pizza for lunch

 So Chad you want to spin that around a little bit and we really want to get it nice and crispy and hot

 So everything melts and the sandwich is cooked and it gets the flavor of that wood fire

 Okay, so what we want to do is we want to flip this over so that we have a nice

 Then Chad you want to cut that we're gonna put that right on this plate here

 Local smoked meats if you're in the mood for a really great sandwich and you want it from the wood-fired oven

 Hi guys, this look is inspired by Avril Lavigne in her video for Girlfriend and it was requested

 to do the hair, I actually did a video where I did Avril's hair from the video and her

 look from when she performed it on a TV show which I'll put the link to here.

 before I start I'm just going to say something before people do on comments.

 looks people sometimes say, oh why did you do that, it doesn't even need a tutorial,

But I'm just going to say to that, I've done pretty much every Avril

 Now my Urban Decay primer potion is not making an appearance today.

 I think that's how you say it, eye shadow base, which I'm going to be doing a review

So I'm just going to add a little bit here, just a tiny tiny smidge.

 to be doing a review on a few of their products from a website soon.

 any wax or anything to them today because the wax I have is coloured and her eyebrows

 black one obviously, and what we're going to do is just line the top waterline, not

 to the edge, and then we're going to line the bottom one about half way, three quarters

Then we're going to take a small round ended makeup brush and the black from

 the £120 palette, this one here, second one in, and we're going to take a little bit on

 the brush and we're going to apply it in what I like to call a whale hump shape.

 can see, it's like it humps over and then it goes down towards the edge.

 my lead and we're going to do that and then give it a little blend around the edges with

 Then take a flat ended brush and the black again and we're just going to bring it, like

I always apply this on top of chapstick because if not it can tingle

If you wear foundation I would recommend a full coverage foundation

 never use because I don't use foundation or concealer or anything like that.

 do then that is a must because her complexion is super nice in the video.

 introduce you to two major chords, the E chord and the G chord.

 look at both of these chords in what's known as the open position, which is

 right at the nut here of the guitar, so playing it from the first fret forward.

 When we talk about the open position, that's supposed to maybe be a barre chord,

 which could be on the frets on your guitar, which would then recreate the nut.

 So open position we're talking about right on the first fret forward.

 I've used tab here on the whiteboard behind me to explain these two chords.

 The E chord, for instance, what we've got here is tab, for just a quick overview, is

 got the low E on the bottom and our high E on the top, and then some numbers in

 look at the E chord and we'll go along with the tab as we play it.

 major chord, it's an open E string, so you'll notice there's a zero there, it's open.

 The next is on the A we play middle finger on the second fret of the A string.

 Next on the D string we use our ring finger on the second fret of that string.

And then the next two strings are open, the B and the E. So if we strum those all together...

 Here's a close-up shot of how my fingers are positioned on the neck so you can

 just the shape I made there earlier, was second finger on the second fret, third

 finger on the second fret of the D, and first finger on the first fret of the G.

 Notice how I'm using the tips of my fingers and my thumb is nice and in

 tab that we have in the E chord, but we'll go through it the same way.

 going to put our first finger on the second fret of the A. And then our third

 finger, pardon me, third finger, yes, on the third fret of the high E. And the

 other strings in between here, the D, G, and the B, they're open.

 Now this G chord can be a little difficult for beginners because your

 sometimes bend down like this and cause this blunting sound, which is okay, you'll

 your fingers to make the shape and that you've got your thumb nice and down and

 just mentioned, so we're going to use our second finger on the third fret of the

 low E, first finger on the second fret of the A, and our third finger we're

 little awkward first, but again, like the E chord, you want to focus on using the

 Notice, see, I'm not muting any of the strings, where if I wasn't using the tips I don't get that

 You'll want to note here that bend sort of at that joint like that to be able to

 these chords is you want to practice them one at a time right now.

So take your first chord, the E, and practice playing it in this

 Practice that off and on between those two chords, and worry about getting the

 sound right, not so much how quickly you're able to strum while you're holding the chord.

 Then if you feel confident, go ahead and practice strumming between the two.

 That's it for the intro to these first two chords, the E and the G major.

 Hey guys, Dave Wall, Karen, MetabolicCooking.com and we're back today with a cool carbohydrates

 recipe because most of the meals you're going to see, you need to add carbohydrates to it

 and sometimes just a plain sweet potatoes is not enough and that's not enough to maximize

 So we got a pretty cool recipe with sweet potatoes to share with you.

 So one teaspoon paprika, about one quarter teaspoon of garlic powder.

 We got one quarter teaspoon of thyme, a quarter teaspoon of rosemary.

 We like stuff spicy and cayenne is kind of that super metabolic, thermo-charged spice.

 So what I do, I need to brush olive oil on top of these sweet potatoes.

 We got two medium-sized sweet potatoes in there that we're going to brush the top.

 And what I do usually, I just pour a little bit of olive oil in a plate like this.

 You can use some paper towel, for example, that works really well as well.

 The olive oil, good properties, very healthy oil, but it's going to help as well the spices

 to stick on the sweet potatoes and give them that flavor that we like, the Cajun-style

 I put a little bit more than a teaspoon just because I want them to still stick.

 And what Karen's going to do, she's going to sprinkle a little bit on top.

 So I can use just a brush to brush the spices on top to make sure they really stick on the

 I've seen like sweet potatoes sometimes cook faster for some weird reason anywhere between

 So we're going to bake them for about 45 minutes and we'll be back with the final results.

 Okay, so Ajalia is going to make some angel hair zucchini pasta.

 First you cut off the top and the bottom of the yellow zucchini.

 Okay, so we added the noodles into our bowl and we're going to add our raw sauce.

 She can have jalapeno creamy garlic sauce, our curry, or healthy creamy garlic.

 So in this one it has tarragon, raw organic garlic, sunflower oil, organic flaxseed, omega-3, lemon juice, and sea salt.

 Wow. Okay, so we're going to plate it up and let the other kids try.

 The zucchini creamy garlic noodles with the zucchini creamy garlic sauce.

 Hey guys, so today I'm going to be showing you how you can make this pattern.

 One color will be the yellow for me, which is the background color.

 And then you'll need to pick two different colors for the criss-crossing diamonds.

 So you will need four background colors and then five of those.

 So one color for the zig-zag, background, background, background, background, and another color for the zig-zag.

 You only need to know the forward and backward knots to be able to do this.

 So first things first, you're going to take your first two strands.

 Then you're going to take your next two and you're going to do another forward.

 Then you're going to take your next two and you're going to do a backward knot.

 Okay, then you're going to bring in all your strands, leaving your two out of the strands to the side.

 Then you're going to take your first two and you're going to do a forward knot.

 Then you're going to take your last two and you're going to do a forward knot.

 Now you're going to bring in all your strands, leaving your two out of the strands to the side.

 For the last row, you're just going to leave your two out of the strands to the side.

 Then you're going to take your first two and you're going to do a backward knot.

 If you're interested and you're not sure, just personal message me and I'll get right back to you.

 I've got some cabbage and some leftover stewed pork my mom had sent down for me.

 So I'm going to put a nice little quick spicy, tasty, all kind of lovely things kind of dish

 Hey, speaking of which, I've got a couple assistants in the kitchen today.

 We've got Bridget on the left and Lexi, nicknames Bee Digger and Little Digger.

 Let's take a quick look at the ingredients we'll be using today.

 That's just to pick things up and add a little bit of a nice little kick to things.

 Obviously you guys can start off with a little bit less if you want to adjust it accordingly.

 It's one of those things where you got to sort of tailor it to your own taste, right?

 This one I had in the freezer so it may look a little bit frosty.

 You can certainly go without that Scotch bonnet pepper if you want or cut back on it.

 Try not to use any seeds because that's where most of the heat is.

 If you're looking for that recipe for the stewed pork, in the description below I will have the link to that video.

 If you want to make this totally vegetarian, you can leave the swine out.

 It's all kind of lovely things you can do with those ingredients.

 If I forgot anything as we go along, I'll be certain to add them.

 And immediately, since the pan is pretty warm, I'm going to add in the onion.

 And I've gone ahead and I've sliced up the garlic very very thin.

 Let it release all that nice garlic and onion flavor to the pot for maybe about 1, 2 to 3 minutes.

 Once you start seeing the edges of the onion and the garlic start to take on that little bit of color.

 So I'm going to hit it with that fresh ground black pepper because I want that pepper to toast a little bit.

 Then we're just going to start adding the shredded cabbage to the pot.

 It may seem like a lot, well it is a lot, but it's all going to wilt down as it cooks.

 The idea here now is to give this a quick stir to pick up all that garlic and onion flavor on the bottom of the pan.

 I'm going to put that lid on there and let that go for about 5 minutes or so.

 You're going to get that lovely little scent of that curry and garlic and the onion.

 So now what we're going to do is add that leftover pork in there.

 Try to get it if there is any gravy, get that gravy in there as well.

 Speaking about wicked, the kitchen does smell like wicked already.

 Now if you're doing this totally vegetarian without the stewed meat or smoked meat or whatever.

 You can certainly add a little bit of grated ginger in here as well.

 It's going to work well with the garlic, the onion, the curry, everything else.

 All I'm going to do now is put my lid back on there and let it go for another 5 minutes.

 It's nice and wilted down and here's where you're going to have to personalize this dish.

 And the second thing you want to do here is depending on the way you like the texture of your cabbage.

 You can turn it off at this point so it will have a nice little crunch to it.

 If you want it to cook down a little bit more, you can certainly cook it some more.

 But since I'm going to be cooking this for a couple more minutes, here's where I'm going to add the tomato.

 And with the lid off, I'm going to let that cook for a couple more minutes.

 That there is Karen's new roasting pan that I roasted some chicken in with a lot of BBQ sauce.

 So there's a lot of baked on BBQ sauce and everything on there.

 I put boiling water, soap, all kinds of different things in there.

 If you guys have any tips on getting that baked on stuff off the baking pan, leave me a comment below.

Ours features red wine and is a great way to showcase what cheap cuts

And this just makes sure that when we put it onto our hot oil and we start

 to sear the meat so that it gets a nice golden crust, that it's not going to be releasing

 Now that our meat's all patted dry, we're going to season it up.

 Now that we've got our meat all seasoned up, we're going to be moving over to the stove.

 bring the oil up to a temperature so that it's hot but not smoking.

 time and gently move it around on the olive oil to prevent it from sticking.

 We're going to sear it until it's golden on that side and then golden on all the others.

 It should take between 3-5 minutes each side for this to happen.

 we're going to move it aside to a separate plate and continue searing in batches until it's done.

 This is a really simple red wine stew, but one of my favorite things to use are actually

 usually sold in bags and they're pretty fun because they get really soft, molten-y and

 sweet in the stew without losing their flavor or disintegrating.

 We want to use a sharp paring knife and what we're going to do is remove the root and then

We're then going to slice down just a little bit so that we cut into the first

 This is another base flavor that we're going to be using, our carrots.

 sweet and they add that little bit of texture that you would often get with potatoes.

 this is a potato-less stew, so we've got three carrots that are going to be going into this.

 We're going to start by grabbing our peeler and we're going to be peeling our carrots

 on the thicker end, we're going to be halving it again and then cutting it into 1-inch pieces.

 To give this dish a little bit more earthiness, one of my favorite ingredients are actually

So we're going to be using cremini mushrooms, which look like this.

 called baby bellas and they usually come with a little bit of grit on them.

So we're going to take a damp paper towel, you can also use a damp cloth

 and we're going to go ahead and just give them a little bit of a brush along the top.

 same size, so if you have any that are a little bit bigger, feel free to cut them into a quarter.

 Now we have all of our ingredients prepped, we're going to be moving over to our stove

 Using the leftover olive oil from searing our beef, we're going to be turning this down

We're going to be adding our pearl onions and our carrots and we're going to

 We're going to be adding our tomato paste, then we're going to be adding our 2 sprigs

 1⁄2 cups of red wine and we're going to stir until the red wine has reduced by about

 a quarter, just a little bit, which means that you're going to be stirring for about

Then we're going to be adding our cup and a half of beef broth as well as

 We're going to bring it up to a boil and then back down to a simmer.

 is able to go into the oven, then preheat the oven to 275 degrees Fahrenheit.

 After an hour and a half, we're going to be adding our mushrooms.

 I cannot believe that such a cheap cut of meat that was so tough to begin with can get

 of our other episodes at thehotplate.net and make sure to check for updates on our Facebook

 I just one day was sitting, I'm like, you know, I'm not reaching my fat intake.

 used to have a sweet tooth in the past, I thought this was the closest thing to an ice

 what it has is, oops, it has, let's see, 11 grams for 2 tablespoons.

 7 times, 7 times 11, 77 grams of fat only in this little container.

So unless you're gonna be doing something that requires a lot of energy, then

There's a lot of stevias out there that have only the sweetening extract.

 If you remove the healing properties, you'll end up with the sweetener which is better

 it without the alcohol because sometimes they extract it with the alcohol.

 is just keep stirring and stirring and stirring until it becomes... it looks like mousse,

 If you don't like chocolate, you might be able to do this with a protein powder, a vanilla

But the most important ingredient is the crème fraîche which gives you a ton

 2 and a half minutes, you stir it and then 2 and a half minutes... because you know the

So if you stir it, you'll have both the bottom and the top frozen

Don't be afraid of eating too much fat or going over your calories.

 beginning, this is a fantastic option to bring your fats to the top, increase your fats without

Please subscribe to my channel and give this video a like if you

I'm gonna be putting more recipes because I have brilliant recipes in my head.

 And in this video, I wanted to do a video response to a question I had from a customer

 regarding wood mount, clear mount, and our photopolymer clear stamps.

 And they come with your wood block and your stamp is separate and you peel off the backing

 Our clear mount stamps come in this thin DVD size case and they come with, on a sheet of

 rubber like this, and I like to keep the rubber so that I can fit my stamps back in

 And it comes with a sheet of the stickers of the images that you can apply and I've

 done that on some and on some I have not because I have found that because I don't keep my

 But they mount on the clear block and then you stamp with them and then when you're through

 Then we have our photopolymer clear stamps and these are completely clear where you can

 see through the stamp where you're stamping after you ink it up.

 These are clear and when you ink it you can see the image through it very well.

 And they're under a section of photopolymer clear stamps and there are several.

 I have the type set alphabet and this thank you, another thank you set.

 But I just wanted to clear up a little notion about the clear versus the clear mount.

 It's a rubber stamp just like our rubber wood mount stamps but it mounts on a clear block.

 The photopolymer is actually a clear stamp, very high quality, very nice and is available

 So I hope that clears up any questions that you may have and if you have any questions

 you'd like for me to address just email me with your question or you can give me a call

 and I'll be happy to either respond to you or do a video response.

 So take care and I'll see you again soon with another project video.

 Today we're going to put together this way cool goal post from Global Trust

 sections here, one shorter horizontal section, two 90 degree sections to

 First thing you're going to want to do, or the first thing I'm going to have to do

 because of the space I have in the room, is go ahead and mount my vertical piece

 on the floor and then set it on the plates, but again because of limited

 space in this area, I'm going to have to do a little different.

 taking this cool little sticker truss, sticking it right there.

 Well now that you have your vertical pieces built, it's time to go ahead and

 put together these 90 degree sections that are going to go on the top of your

 do is attach to the horizontal section now and then lift it on to the vertical

 section with some help from Blanca who's on standby in the other room.

 have to do is simply put these pieces together, stick in the pins.

 do this by themselves, but me with one arm, I need a little help on this one.

 And just for fun we went ahead and warmed the truss up with a couple of

 have the giant base plates like you do on some of their trussing systems.

 base plates as you can see are very manageable to carry and pack in your

 Hi everybody, this is Tracy and I'm Talia and we are here to make this

 So in this it's very simple the coconut banana and chocolate goes so good together

 So we're gonna have some chunks of chocolate bar from a vegan chocolate bar we bought from dark

 All right, the ingredients for the chocolate chunk banana bread is going to be a half a cup of

 Broken pieces of chocolate bar vegan and then a half a cup of raw cacao powder

 That can be your choice bean flour oat flour rice flour a combine of all of them would be really good

 one third cup of agave nectar raw and about a half a teaspoon of sea salt

 Yeah, it looks pretty going in the bowl, it's like a little spiral and we will just

 This is the fun part look at that yummy who gets to lick this bowl I think both of us do

 Do we want to get this like perfectly smooth in here because the bananas are the bananas are chunky monkey in here

 Just kind of you know, have fun and just swirl it around like a cinnamon roll

 I like that and the fun thing about this is we're gonna show you how to make a raw version

 It's all perfect and ready to go and we have our little tin here

 Which actually should be maybe rectangular for a bread loaf duck, but we didn't have one.

 Kind of puff up a little bit and it will just oh, it'll overflow it

 So you want to do a little bit like an inch an inch and a half thickness?

 So we'll do two of these pans and just fill it about maybe halfway a little bit more than halfway

 We don't get to eat it yet because it's not done but we do get to lick the bowl

 need 2 cups of tomato juice, 1 cup of chicken broth, or you may use vegetable

 broth, 1 cup of sliced carrots, 1 cup of celery, 1 cup of onions, 1 cup of a fire

 use 2 teaspoons of oil to saute the onions, the celery, and the carrots.

 We're going to get a little caramelization going on with these three ingredients.

 I'm just going to saute these for about six minutes stirring every once in a

 while until the edges of your celery, carrots, and onions start to caramelize.

 Now this isn't necessary to make this vegetable soup, but it really gives it

 add the potatoes and we're going to add the fire-roasted tomatoes, along with the

 be too thick you may add more vegetable broth or you may use water.

 it down to medium-low and let it cook with the lid on it for the next 30

Then at the end we're going to add the already cooked corn and lima

Then we'll bring this up to a boil and I'll come back and I'll show you

 drain the water off of your cooked green beans and peas before adding to your soup.

 see the potatoes will release starches along with the other vegetables and make

 gonna add a cup of fresh water and I'm gonna bring this up to a boil and let it

 This specimen, the greater spotted Gilchrist, is trying to impress the herd.

 A misplaced matchbox means he's denied the chance of posturing and beating his chest

 But this doesn't mean he hasn't got a very nice country barbeque planned for us.

 I have got some slow cooked rabbit that I am going to wrap in bacon and cook that over

 I have got some homemade tomato ketchup for them, buns, salad, all that sort of stuff.

 I have got a lion caught sea bass that my uncle picked up for us yesterday.

 We can either pan fry it or I will fillet it, pin bone it and then wrap it up with some

 butter and lemon and tarragon, wrap it in foil and chuck it on the embers for a bit.

 While the beer chills in the stream, Mark has to avoid the natural defences of this

 So the first thing we are going to do is cut all these spikes off.

 Now you always want to be really careful with sea bass because the one thing they don't

 tell you is these spikes and they will go straight through your fingers.

 The gill plates in here are like razor blades so you want to be careful of those.

 The spikes, there is a spike in there, there is a spike in there and a spike there.

 This chap at the back here, just by his bum, he has got spikes.

 So if you put a towel around them and it holds the spikes flat, you see what I mean, so as

 Put a towel around them, pull it down slightly, all the spikes then go flat and then you can

 If you drop it, don't try and catch it because as it falls it will lift all its spikes out

 again and then you put your hand out and it goes straight in your hand so just let it

 Even the baby schoolies, they have got tiny little spikes but they still go straight through

 Those are pin bones and they tend to snap and go straight up the roof of your mouth.

 Now flat embers give Mark a service to fry the first of the bass fillet portions.

 Also on the go are pigeon kebabs made from the birds from Phil Spencer and Crowmount.

 Literally skewering it and what I am going to do is not overcook it which is a problem

 It is better off to take it out and realise that it needs a little bit longer than overcook

 You have to make sure the vegetables are cut the right size so they don't end up raw.

 You should do, I am hoping everyone is going to have had enough to eat and they are not

 Sporting Shooter magazine editor Dom Holtam has brought along a bit of kit that should

 So this is a device known as a pie iron which I saw in the bushware catalogue and when we

 were doing this feature I thought a pie iron sounds too good not to include, especially

 Talking of which, of course you can, you might end up in there if you are not careful.

 So the idea is that it is cast iron, they do them for sandwiches, they do them for steaks,

 So you put your ingredients in, close it up, put it in the embers of your campfire and

 the cast iron helps it to cook nice and evenly and hopefully in ten minutes there will be

 It's been a right royal feast and there really is something very special about eating and

 Even the little ones get to play at being cavemen for a few hours.

 All of Mark's recipes will be in next month's Sporting Shooter.

 Roger, I bet you've made hundreds of cabinets of this type and still you start out with

 If you can't draw it, you can't build it, I was once told and I agree with that.

 other thing is when I go to the saw, I know exactly what I'm going to do.

 wasted and there's no back up there and I think that's important.

One inch on the ends of each of the parts and I've actually made a sample test

 cut and I don't know if you've seen this, but the walls are nice and smooth.

 here and I've adjusted for that with a router and I'll show you that in just a second.

 this was done with a plunging cut and this is my first test set up in a scrap and I think

 The piece over there, I think you'll see, is a little bit different.

 and I'm satisfied with that and that's what I plan to use to cut the mortises.

 has a half inch shank on it going into a half inch collet router and I have variable speed

 The two sides equidistant and then I tried to shoot between the lines, so to speak.

 once I got there I measured carefully and it was about the third set up over there to

 Well given that you've got so many to do, it's probably worth the trouble to get this

 the mortises, I only have to set the dado head one time and both sides will be equal

 and that allows me to be able to flip the parts around and make some minor adjustments.

 And that's always a thing too because you put the best sides out but maybe you miss

And that keeps me organized again because once you get started cutting, if you cut the

 wrong side or the wrong end of something, I think you can make a mistake.

 Now the ends here are square but you know what bit is actually cutting in the round

 I'm going to bring the piece over here and this is where I was working earlier and I'll

 I've got a block that I'll put on here and the pad will protect my piece.

 I can move in both directions since the router only moves along the work piece.

 The upcut spiral bit also makes the routers travel easier because it clears the chips

 When the stop rod touches the stop on the turret, I know the cut is at my desired depth

 which is 1 1 6th inch deeper than the length of the tenon I'm cutting.

 I had put a roast in here in the pressure cooker and I've just let it, all the pressure go down.

 In here I've got some mixed vegetables and tomatoes and onions, letting them simmer.

 I just took the lid off of the pressure cooker and the roast is cooked and it's nice and tender.

 I'm going to cut off the fat and put it into the stew mix that's cooking.

 When I had put the roast in the pressure cooker, I had covered it with water and added an onion.

 I just added the meat and some of the broth from the meat to give it a little flavor.

 I'm going to let this simmer, probably for another 15-20 minutes so the flavor gets in there.

 Today I'm making it the quick way with some mixed vegetables and green beans.

 I decided to put the two cans of green beans in the pressure cooker to let them get a little more tender before I put them in with the other stew mix.

 I actually cooked the green beans in the broth from the roast to give it a little more flavor as they were cooking.

We're going to be talking about open D tuning, which is an alternative

 of open D tuning is that you've got to use a chromatic tuner that does half tones in

 to show you some chord shapes that are mobile, that can go up and down the neck.

 shapes that you're familiar with from your regular guitar playing.

 looks like a D minor, except we're going to play it up here on the 7th fret and the 5th

We're going to play one that looks like an A chord shape, the way your fingers come

We're going to take that same A chord shape and put it one string down on

 to show you, we're going to slide that up to the 5th fret as well.

 to use just two fingers instead of three on the 2nd and 3rd strings of the 12th fret for

 but these videos can't be very long, so I'm trying to cram it all into one video.

 bok choy, and I add to it some broccoli crown and some fresh shiitake mushroom.

 bok choy inside has a lot of sand, so you need to wash it and rinse it really good.

I like to split from the stem here, not the forward of the crown.

 split from here, everything will fall apart, which is not so pretty.

After I wash the vegetable really thoroughly, I'm just going to bring

If you don't have a steamer like this, or you can use this like a nice pot,

 Make sure you soak the shiitake mushroom dry for like a half an hour with warm water before

 and ginger, and we have some mushroom infused sauce, just a little more salt like this.

 of the sauce is you have to make sure the sauce bring up to a boil.

Then I'm just going to simply place the mushroom on the top here.

 Now the important thing is to measure them all more or less the same size.

 Now that it's flat, we're going to turn the carrot with a knife.

 Turn the carrot with a knife and there you have a turned carrot.

 I had some requests for explanation about how to apply the diminished scale.

 going to play, for reasons that will become obvious in a second, an A-flat diminished

 scale, which may seem like a strange place to start, but really there's no easy key for

 The diminished scales are always going to have a mixture of sharps and flats.

To remind you of the fingering, it's a two-string-at-a-time pattern that goes 1-3-4,

Then we're going to have to shift between this set of strings to go 1-3-4, 1-2-4, 1-2-4,

Now it seems like I should shift again, but the tuning of the guitar has already done

 root, but the strange thing about the diminished scale, the roots repeat basically every other

Like, this is a root, this is not, this is a root, this is not, this is a root.

 this is a root, this is not, this is a root, this is not, this is.

 F diminished is the same, A-flat, B, D, F. You might want to just memorize that group

 and then you went up here and played it on B, you would find those were all the same

This A-flat diminished scale works over an A-flat diminished chord.

 you often have use for these guys that have the root on the sixth string.

 that goes, say, G major 7, A-flat or G-sharp diminished, to A minor, to maybe A-sharp or B-flat

 diminished, and then maybe B minor, E7, A minor, D7, so you get something.

 First time I played it in E7-sharp 9, which that's the sound I like better, and I really

 it sort of changes what your scale choices are, but that's a common way to use the diminished to

 So that's one place you'll see this A-flat diminished chord, and you can actually solo on

 where you've got two beats on each chord, it might be tough to sneak that in.

 You could add a slower harmonic rate, you might be able to get away with that, but clearly you're

 Lift the marshmallow out using the sides of the parchment paper

 If any of you know me, you know that my favorite candy bar of all times is a Butterfinger.

 I just for the fun of it looked up the calories in a king size Butterfinger.

 Well first of all there's three servings in a king size Butterfinger each being 160 calories

 That's almost one fourth of what you're supposed to take in an entire day.

 Okay so then I looked up one of my other favorite treats from DQ which is the Butterfinger Blizzard.

 So and I mean that's depending on too what size you decide to go with the calories.

 So I have a really really fun replacement for the Butterfinger candy bar or the Butterfinger Blizzard.

 I'm using of course the chocolate Shakeology that I've used in all my other videos.

 I will be mixing, let's see, we've got one scoop of the Shakeology powder.

 I've actually already changed up the recipe that I found to fit the, you know, my taste.

 I am going to be using two tablespoons of a natural or reduced fat peanut butter.

 I like the thicker milkshake like consistency so I'm going to be adding anywhere between

 a cup and a cup and a half of ice like I do to all of my shakes.

 And then the secret ingredient, this is awesome, is sugar free, fat free, butterscotch pudding.

 There are four servings in this and a quarter of the package is only 25 calories.

 So since we're only going to be using like two tablespoons of this, I'm not too worried

 about the calories that are coming from this butterscotch flavoring.

 So if you have, you know, find the healthiest that you've got and use that or just don't

 I mean, yes, that's kind of what your butter finger tastes like but if you've got a high

 You can see the peanut butter is not always the easiest to work with.

 Then, the secret ingredient, I'm going to add two tablespoons of this butterscotch pudding

 If you can tell that your ice is not completely mixed up, your blender is not blending it.

 Add a little bit more liquid because that typically, I'll be right back, adding a little

 more liquid is typically the key to get that extra ice moving and down to those blades.

 Due to all the ice that I've added, it's just the consistency is thick enough in the blender,

 I'm going to smell it first of all and see if it smells like butter finger.

 It smells like a butter finger McFlurry is what it smells like.

 It's actually about five o'clock and I'm going to drink this before I work out.

 But, like I've said in the past, you can drink this as a meal replacement or as like a snack

 So I think I'm going to eat a smaller supper tonight and this will kind of be the bulk

 I would say this is the closest liquid milkshake-like form of anything that tastes like a butter

 I definitely would pick this any day, you know, instead of going to Dairy Queen to get

 that butter finger blizzard for 490 calories or swinging by the gas station for that king

 So if you like chocolate, you're a chocolate-holic, you like candy bars, I mean there's endless

 Plus, the best thing about it is that they're healthy for you and it contains all the vitamins

 You know, again, like I've said before, if you're a picky eater, what better way could

 you consume the nutrients that you need, you know, other than in a dessert form?

 You saw how many ingredients it took and how fast I was able to mix this up.

 And the problem this car is experiencing is it has a rear brake light that is out.

 First thing we need to do is open the trunk lid so we can get behind the light housing,

 and that's where the bulbs are accessed, through that area inside the trunk.

 Now inside the trunk, in back of the light housing assembly, you'll see a little door

 So you'll just pull it back, and now you can see, hopefully if I get my hand out of the

 way, now you can see the light assembly, the socket where all the bulbs are.

 Now to remove it, right here are two little tabs, and you'll squeeze the tabs, and the

 And there's enough room with the wires so you can pull it out just like that.

 And I can clearly see that this is the brake light bulb right here, and it's black, and

 Even without testing it, I can tell that this bulb is the problem, why we don't have brake

 All right, now to remove the bulb, it's just a matter of twisting it counterclockwise and

 All right, now we can just put our assembly back into position.

 And of course, once it goes into position, it will click like that.

 Hi, I realize that a lot of my DIY projects involve sewing and that maybe there's a lot

 So I wanted to do some little mini videos, I think I'm just going to do like a little

 series of videos, showing you some things I know about sewing and like the basic stitches

 that I use when I'm doing DIY projects, like any stitch that I use when sewing on any of

 I'll do a little video before or after showing you how to do this stitch.

 I really do want to make my DIYs easy for you to do, even if you aren't generally a

 The first thing I'm just going to be showing you is how to thread a needle.

 It's really simple, but in case you don't know, the basic straight stitch that I use

 If you already know how to sew, feel free not to watch this video.

 The first thing that you will need are a pair of scissors, some pins, maybe some thread.

 So you're going to start by pulling out some thread and just cutting it off.

 I like to sew with the thread doubled because I think it makes for a stronger stitch.

 You don't have to do that, but that's what I'm showing you how to do today.

 You're just going to want to take the end of the thread and stick it through the eye

 If you're confused at this point, you might want to ask a real live person for help.

 But then you're just going to pull the ends of the thread together so they match up and

 Then you'll want to take your fabric, and I'm just using this little piece of scrap

 Then you'll take your needle and stick it through the two pieces of fabric and pull

 Then turn it over and just stick it through a little bit over so you're making your first

 Then you're back on the back side and you just stick the needle in again a little bit

 over about the same length that you did the first time and pull the thread through.

 Then you just keep doing that until you reach the end of your fabric.

 Eventually you'll probably be able to do this without flipping it over every time.

 You can just do it from the feel of the fabric and the needle and you won't have to flip

 And then if you do this type of stitch again, you can just go in and out of the fabric like

 This type of stitch can be used as a basting stitch, which is the type of stitch that I

 It's just like a really loose stitch that you can use to pull the thread tighter than

 So that might be a little bit advanced for this tutorial, but I'm showing you anyway.

 And then the last thing you're going to want to do is to make the knot and finish off the

 So you want to go into the fabric and just make a little stitch and then have a loop

 So you don't pull the thread all the way through and you just have a loop.

 And then you take your needle and go through that loop, catching the loop you're making

 So you pull that first loop tight, but now you have another loop.

 And then you're going to take your needle and stick it through that loop.

 And I like to take the two ends of the thread and tie them in a regular knot together just

 I hope you learned something and I'll see you in the next video.

It's four rows of knitting to make this little bumpy stitch here.

 first row, the right side row, you just purl across all the way across to the end and then

 So the second row of the popcorn stitch is going to be where you do the actual stitch.

 the wrong side row and you are going to knit into your first stitch like you normally would but

So that's three stitches into one loop and then the next three you're going to purl

 together all three of them and that'll give you the same number of stitches you started with.

 So knit, don't take it off, bring the yarn around, purl, bring your yarn back around,

 could adapt this to any pattern you want as long as you have a multiple of four for your stitches.

 going to purl together and then I'm going to knit my little border and that'll be the end of row two.

 So for row three it's just another row of purling across on the right side and you just purl

 all the way across until you get to your border and knit your border and get ready for row four.

 And so row four, your last row of the popcorn stitch is going to be basically the opposite

 don't take the loop off, purl one just like before, knit one all in the same loop and then

 in the same loop and then slide it off the end and then purl three.

 as row two, you just start with purling three instead of starting with this part, knit, purl,

 a couple rows you've got it all memorized, you don't have to carry your instruction sheet around

 with you, you can just sit and veg out, watch tv and knit away.

 with but once you've done it for a few rows you get the hang of it and you just fly right along

 and knit your border like this and then you have your little bumpy popcorn blanket or scarf.

 Hi, my name is Leah Day and welcome to this video for the Free Motion Quilting Project.

 We've been working through many different designs that all kind of run along the same

 We're working in those orange areas of our Express Your Love quilt and we're filling

 in with very simple background fillers that incorporate spirals.

 And you might be wondering, well, just how many variations am I going to basically push

 Basically combining an independent design that we've already learned, like stippling

 And the answer is you can continue to infinitely combine and mix shapes together to come up

 And so I want to show you just a few more over the next couple of videos because I have

 basically six spaces to fill on this quilt and that seems to me like a nice opening for

 For a while I was looking at this going, well, why don't I stitch the same thing through

 But now I'm looking at it going, well, why don't I challenge myself to come up with more

 They're all going to still appear very similar on the surface, but at the same time they

 You know, the difference between a zigzag and a wiggle is not a humongous difference,

 but depending on the way your mind thinks, depending on the way your brain works, one

 So we've learned zigzag spiral, we've learned wiggle wiggle spiral, and now we're going

 Basically I've got this space just like the other spaces we've been working through and

 So basically this is a combination of sharp stippling and spirals, and the same open spirals

 So sharp stippling is basically stippling with sharp points, some nice wiggly lines,

 And of course you can do a lot more sharp stippling, you know, with the wiggle wiggle

 spiral we were kind of pushing that line of only doing the two wiggles and then repeating

 So now you can really feel free to do as much sharp stippling between the spiral shapes

 And of course always feel free to change these rules as you need them to change.

 So basically I'm just going to wiggle, form a point, wiggle back, and repeat that a couple

 And then I swing into my spiral, leaving a nice amount of space between those lines of

 quilting so I can stitch right through the middle to get back out again.

 And the best tip I have for keeping this small and tiny is to keep everything under control.

 Keep your lines as you're swinging out to do a flame shape like that.

 Keep it no longer than about half an inch long, and that's going to be a little easier

 So let's say if I came back here and then wiggled all the way down the full length,

 well that's just a little trickier if you're having trouble keeping your scale under control.

 And then a nice little tip, I've got this butted up right against Flock of Geese, and

 what I really like to do is that little bit of extra travel stitching.

 But it's kind of nice to add that little bit of extra travel stitching, build up the thread

 That's going to make the Flock of Geese stand out nicely against the Hot Hot Spiral.

 So I hope that makes sense and you enjoy playing with this design.

 We're going to continue working on variations on this theme because we have basically six

 Might as well learn six new designs and expand our ability to free motion quilt mixing spirals

 So my name is Leah Day and this has been a video for the Free Motion Quilting Project.

 Find many more design videos, all the designs that we've learned so far on this quilt at

 you also need some food colouring, we are using some green and red

 and since these aren't available in the market we are using unflavoured egg noodles

 and when it goes on boil we will simmer it for around 10 minutes

 and we will leave it aside until it is cooled down and put it in the fridge

 to add more colour to the falooda you can also add other flavours of jelly

 whilst the noodles are cooking and we are waiting for the milk to boil

 so we will lower the flame and put it on simmer for around 10 minutes

 make sure the glasses are tall so you can add all the layers in

 and to add colour we are pouring a little bit of rose syrup on top

 Let's put our PS3 back together step 1, let's place the motherboard back in the bottom tray

 Next we'll be placing this tray so simply align these two holes and place it in.

 Next we'll be putting all our screws that hold the motherboard.

 So there is one long screw that goes here and if you have a look at these screws they

 This is a bit smaller that goes in this where the hard drive goes and the rest goes here.

 Next we'll be connecting the blu-ray drive cable, the 55 module cable and we'll be placing

 Be very gentle with this connector, it's very fragile so simply lift it up and slide the

 Simply align these two holes with these two metal bars here and place it in.

 Next we'll be placing our hard drive and the Torx T10 screw in there.

 Simply slide it in and put back the blue screw and the hard drive cover.

 Please go to gc-repeats.com to purchase all the tools and accessories you need.

 I'm your host Derek Solmer and today we're going to create the Grateful Dead.

 You mentioned it and wrote it down in my notes to set it as a drink to do in the future

 and I went through my recipes, found it in there as well from our submitted recipes.

 So if you've sent me them, you got to give me some time to get them all plowed through.

 and I'm really excited about this because I get to use some Blue Coat Gin,

 and subtle taste characteristics that are just above and beyond neutral green spirits.

 So I'm going to use what I like and I think you should do the same thing.

 and all those things are going to be in this little drink in a Collins glass.

 So what we're going to do is measure in this little guy right here

 So if you're in Texas, if you go to I think it's called Spex is the big

 This is probably where the drink is going to get a lot of its intense flavors,

I'm going to go with smell since it obviously doesn't have that taste yet.

 And this will go into our Collins glass a huge fan of Collins glasses.

 So if I make a drink and I have the option and martinis aren't always cocktail glasses

 but sometimes you can't because things just look so sexy in those two.

 No purple looks like squished grapes like squished red grapes without the skins.

If you can imagine the intensity of a Long Island iced tea with berry and orange peel.

 A little tequila in the back, which I think you probably get from a Long Island iced tea anyway.

 This is for those people that like the strong drinks not necessarily burn.

 I'm not getting a lot of burn, but it's really right right in front of your face.

 It's like all of your tongue and everything kind of goes a little numb and prickly.

 But not for the faint of heart that I guess that's probably why they call it the Grateful Dead.

 If you put vodka in here is probably even going to be a little more intense

 because the Harmony Smooth as I've said since they're sponsoring.

 It's ultra smooth, but it's only half the alcohol percentage of a vodka.

 especially when you've got all these guys kind of dance around together having a good time.

 Hey, this is Lori, also known as Inspired Act, and here's Alex and Megan.

 And they're going to show you one of the recipes that we have been learning to make over the

 past couple weeks since we've been trying to get our two bunches of greens in.

 So it's actually a massaged spinach because if you look at that huge pile of greens, that's

 So it says that it's one pound, so that's 16 ounces worth, of spinach.

 And once I took it out of the bag, it just started overflowing.

 So kids, why don't you take the whole package and start massaging them with your hands.

 Shana, you want to get those couple that you're missing right there?

 Today we're going to be doing an unboxing review of the Peeple Smart S2 also known as

 Now we just did an unboxing of the Peeple S1 so maybe check out our channel.

 Make sure to subscribe so you can get all the latest, you can watch all the latest videos.

 Ok so this I believe is one of the first 8 inch Jelly Bean tablets.

 So this has dual cameras, 2 megapixel rear camera and I believe this is only a 3.3 megapixel

 S2 and we'll have the description up shortly after we upload this video.

And while this is loading and booting up, let's go through the ports real quick.

 plug a keyboard case, a mouse or a pen drive directly into the unit without using the OTG

 cable which is really really convenient because you don't have to carry around so many cables.

 If you want the keyboard case, maybe do a search on DLsPrime.com for a keyboard case

 and then we should be having an 8 inch case for this pretty soon if we don't already have

 reset button and the power button and then the mic is right next to the power button.

 There's a support form there where you can ask your questions, support questions.

 it comes with ear buds, cool, you can just plug them into your ears.

 Nice silicone so they'll fit into your ears really comfortably.

If you're in Australia, New Zealand, it comes with your country's

If you're in Europe, it comes with the famous round European plug

Okay folks, so this wraps up the unboxing review of the Peepo S2.

 I'm here to show you an exciting product that we've just created with the Saturdays and

We've got the blue which is Vanessa's and it's called Forever is Blue.

We've got Frankie's which is Notorious Silver and Molly which is Purple

So they're the shades that we've got so far that the girls helped create with us

 wave effect that basically, I'll show you how to use it but I'll also explain a little

You basically paint each nail with one coat and finish all five nails and then you

 go over with the second coat and just after you've painted the very second coat of colour,

 you're going to hold a magnet which you buy separately over the top of the nail and that's

 nail so you can see my ring finger has painted a different colour.

 wearing just to recap is Purple Me Up which is that one and this one's Notorious Silver.

 you know guys, these are £6 and the magnet is £3 but you only obviously need to buy

And the magnet has a slight detail on the lid so you can see that's

 about 8 seconds and also just so you can see there's like a ridge there that kind of acts

 as a guide so you don't touch the nail because obviously this isn't going to touch the nail

So the polishes contain tiny magnetic pigments that later on when I hold

 the magnet above the nail some of the pigments will draw forward to create really funky shapes.

 So that's the first coat of Notorious Silver and purple me up on my thumb as an accent.

I always hold my polish here in between my thumb and my forefinger, it helps keep

 close to you and remember there's that little ridge that you need to hold at the cuticle.

So put on a good layer of polish, pop the brush back in and then just hold the magnet

 of about a millimetre or two in between the nail and the magnet.

 just so you can see what kind of shape it gives if you hold it the other way.

 you go, you've got a nice wiggle down the nail instead of across.

 one coat of one of the shades as your base colour and then use another one as the second

 coat, a bit of the base colour may just peek through to give a different shade effect.

 But you need your second coat to be quite thin for that to work and you need to work

But it's definitely an option if you're quite crafty with nails.

So they are Magnetism Nails brought to you by Fashionista with the Saturdays.

 I hope you've liked that and please ask any questions about the polishes if you have any.

 We're really excited to know which is your favourite shade and to hear your thoughts

Please tune in again, there's going to be tutorials coming soon from me

 Alrighty, now let's see if I remember how to make me pizza bases.

 I had to add about a quarter of a cup extra of water to get it to this.

 Well, since I didn't use warm water, I used room temperature water,

 Hey you guys, it's Christina from Rawfully Organic and Fully Raw.

 And I'm here today because I'm going to share with you six easy food storage tips so that

 you guys can get the most out of learning how to store, ripen, and rotate your produce

 For those of you who don't know me, I run Rawfully Organic here in Houston, Texas, which

 is the largest raw foods, non-profit, local, and organic produce cooperative in the US

 I've been an 8-1-1, low-fat, raw vegan for almost seven years now, and I live with six

 people now who pretty much eat high raw, if not as much raw as me.

 Over the past seven years, I consider myself to become an expert at rotating, ripening,

 That way, I'm able to get the maximum amount of taste for the least amount of waste possible.

 And I'm going to teach with you how I do that at my house today.

 Keep in mind I have six people with me and eight refrigerators, and I'm just going to

 For any of you guys who miss any of this, you can always replay the video or you can

 Rawfully Organic shares with you recipes and videos and ideas on how to use produce

 And Fully Raw teaches you and educates you on how to be and become 100% fully raw in

 So the first thing I'm going to teach you how to do is how to keep your greens lasting

 A lot of people tell me that they can't get to their greens in time because they wilt,

 but what you'll notice that I do is I have these biodegradable produce bags from co-op.

 And what I do is I spritz all my greens and then I put them in here and I put them in

 In order to keep the air out, you just put them in here, twist it shut, stick them back

 Be sure when you're in your fridge that you keep the air vent open at the top because

 it allows air to circulate from the top to the bottom and it keeps things from freezing

 Bag your greens or put them in a Ziploc bag, a biodegradable bag, a Debbie Meyer bag, or

 This means that you want to keep all of your older produce in the front and all of the

 What this does for you is it allows you to get through your older produce first and eat

 And that way, your newer produce in the back has a chance to ripen up as well.

 It also keeps you from having things that go bad on you faster and you're getting through

 This also helps you when you're shopping because it allows you to know what things you're running

 out of, what things you need to buy, and helps you to space all that out.

 So learn how to rotate your food, eat the older things first, and always keep them in

 Tip number three, keep all of your fruits and veggies stored as separately as possible.

 This means you want to put as many green leafy things in the fridge as possible.

 And you want to keep as many fruits outside of the fridge as to allow them to ripen up

 Berries go in the fridge with as much air surrounding them as possible.

 For things like apples, oranges, pears, tomatoes, bell peppers, all of those can be stored outside

 of the fridge so that they ripen up and so you can taste their maximum ripe freshness.

 You'll never know what a true tomato tastes like in its ultimate form unless you keep

 Tip number four is you want to keep the air vents in the top of your fridge as open as

 This allows air to circulate from top to bottom and keep everything as crisp as it can.

 For instance, keep the things that need cooler air and more ventilation near the top, like

 This keeps them from going moldy faster and it keeps them cooler longer.

 Things like zucchinis and cucumbers, those can go near the bottom of the fridge because

 those just need a little bit of cooler air and not as much ventilation.

 Also keep in mind you want to keep your refrigerator door closed as much as you can.

 I know a lot of you guys like to cut and chop and prepare everything right when you get

 But the thing is that I like to prepare my stuff right before I'm going to eat it if

 When you make a smoothie one day and you want to eat it the next day, most likely you're

 going to end up throwing it away because it's not going to keep as well.

 There's nothing easier than biting into an apple or peeling a banana.

 You're getting the maximum amount of nutrients, you're cutting it all up then.

 If you're making a juice or a smoothie, many of you guys know that the second that you

 make it, it starts to diminish in color and in nutrients after you blend it.

 So you don't want to keep things cut up for too long in your fridge.

 If you cut it all at one time and expect to eat it throughout the week, you may lose more

 than if you were to cut it and prepare it right before you eat it.

 When you're going raw, keep in mind you are going to have things that go bad on you, but

 that's okay because things that are in boxes or have preservatives, those are meant to

 Like these local strawberries, I may have one that goes fuzzy every now and then, but

 I find delight in that because I know that means that it's real food.

 Real food does go bad, which means that you can't keep it forever.

 They are going to spoil within a few weeks of you getting them.

 There are tips that you can learn to make them last longer and you can eat all the right

 But just keep in mind, when you're going raw, you are going to lose a few things and you

 Dude, there are so many things that you can learn how to do just so that you can find

 satisfaction with what to do with anything you may not make it through.

 My six easy tips are actually written below this video and they're also on my blog at

 I would love for you guys to post more comments below this video if you have any other things

 And if you have any questions, I hopefully may be able to get to you all.

 The chord shape I'm forming is a little G-sharp minor 7th actually,

 but I'm putting my third and fourth fingers there on the fourth fret.

 I'm bringing my second finger over on the bass string on the same fret, the fourth fret,

 And what I'm going to do is put my first finger behind the third finger.

 It's on the same string, you can't hear it yet, but what we're going to do is lift that third finger off,

 Now, so they're the two chords we're going to use for this rhythm.

 This is very, very simple in concept, but quite hard to execute.

 First of all, pluck all the strings together, thumb and two fingers on the three strings.

 Second is I just get my first and second finger on the two middle strings and play them by themselves.

 Then I bring my thumb over on the bass string and play the bass string.

 And then I play the two middle strings again with my first and second finger.

 Now, what we're going to do is we're going to lift the third finger off after we've played that sequence through

 It sounds better on an olive string guitar than a steel string, but that's the basic beat.

 And fill the rhythm with more strums by all means, but get that basic beat down first.

 Spend five, ten minutes a night, and after a few weeks you should be able to get it.

 Now, because we're having problems with that, we are going to introduce more flour.

 So we're adding weight, which is not what we want, but it's what we have to do.

 For this, it's also important to try to make it as square as possible.

 We don't have the butter because I put the powder on to hold it in.

 we want to try to get as much to the outer, the long end as possible.

 If we don't, when we get to the point where we roll it together and start forming it,

 Hey everybody, it's your girl Jamie and this week I decided to do a Do It Girl mashup.

 I'm going to combine two of my favorite crafts from last season, stencil spray art and decorated

 So get ready to mash it up with the Jamester as I brighten up your day with my spray painted

 For your craft you're going to need tea lights and tea light holders.

 I recommend colored translucent holders so that way you can see the flame through the

 If you have clear candle holders, go ahead and paint them with glass paint like I did

 You'll also need metallic spray paint, scissors or an exacto knife, painter's tape, paper

 I went with hearts because Valentine's Day is coming up and I'm in the mood for love.

 No big deal, just make sure that when you're confident with your design that your stickers

 Feel free to wear protective gear over your mouth and hands as well as wearing old clothes

 Either way, head outdoors or to a well ventilated area indoors in order to paint.

 Then spray paint the entire outside of the candle holder with your metallic color.

 A good rule of thumb for spray painting is to always do several light coats as opposed

 If your fingernails aren't doing the trick, you can totally wedge the tip of a toothpick

 or something like that into the center of the sticker in order to pull it off.

 Did you come up with another creative way to decorate your tea light holder?

 Are there any mashups from last year that you want to see me combine?

 Tweet me at Jamie Petito or tell me all about it in the comments below.

Today we're gonna make fantastic, light, classic Italian appetizer

 And a very important thing is just try to keep the tomatoes in room temperature for all the time,

 because when you're gonna take them out from the fridge, the tomatoes got no taste.

I'm gonna use just half and I'm also gonna take all the root out,

 Now I'm gonna add some extra virgin olive oil, make sure it's very good quality olive oil.

 Extra virgin olive oil, make sure it's very good quality olive oil, because you don't save on taste.

 You don't want to slice your basil, you just need to just like that.

 Sometimes need a little bit of salt, sometimes a little bit of pepper.

 I'm gonna add some more olive oil as well, to make it nice and runny.

Now we need to... now I'm just gonna put my stuff on the top like that.

 Hello there, I'm your host Dan Rojas and I am next to a very large satellite dish that

 six foot in diameter and it has a pretty good focal point on it.

 ounces of water in about two minutes in just an aluminum beer bottle.

 so it absorbs a little bit better, but this material is about 85% reflective.

This does not give you the small tight focal point like a Fresnel lens does or our

This gives you a wider focal point over a larger area that's capable of pretty

 but it is very useful for cooking and it's also very useful for boiling water because you don't

You get a six foot diameter of reflective sunlight down to an area about this

I'm working on a better system for this but actually not currently working on it but I plan

Got rice spilled all over it and I just washed it down with a little bit of water.

So it's really when you do it like this it's almost impossible to burn your food

 forget towards the end of the evening you got to cook your food other ways.

That was about 32 ounces of water, some oil, and some frozen chicken with seasoning

 Welcome to the first installment of cooking with Scram or chefing it in Scram's kitchen.

 And today we're going to be making something famous in Hawaii called the Moco Loco.

 I don't know what it means but supposedly it tastes good and that's what we're going

 Because what a Moco Loco is, is two burger patties on top of white rice.

 So what it is, is white rice, beef patty, two burgers on top of the white rice with

 And then you got to start putting together the burger part of the chop.

 You know, you got to throw that in the burger and all that hot shit.

 Then I poured some of the beef broth into the burger's matrix so we can kind of get

 And when the burgers are really done, you can throw in some of that flour or something

 And we're going to do, we're going to plate this as they would say.

 Next time you got your shorty coming through or you want to cook for somebody special or

 So I'm really excited today because today I'm going to make a Filipino adobo.

 The only difference from the adobo that I usually make, this is adobo from America's Test Kitchen.

 If you want to see the video that I watched, it will be in the description down below.

 It's really interesting because it uses like coconut milk and just a different method of

 thighs have this big layer of skin that I just didn't need so I just cut it off.

 chicken to marinate in 1 3 cup of soy sauce for about 30 minutes.

 In a cold skillet, place the chicken thigh skin down and then put on medium high heat.

 going to cook this for about 10 minutes until the skin is crispy brown.

 marinade, you're going to add 13 ounce can of coconut milk unsweetened, 3 4th cup of apple cider vinegar,

 add 8 garlic cloves, about 4 bay leaves or shards of bay leaves, and then 2 big teaspoons of black

Mix the marinade or the sauce and then you're going to transfer your chicken out of your

Then you can put the chicken back in the skillet, skin down, and add that

Now you're going to let this chicken cook for about 20 minutes until the

And what we're going to do now is remove the shards of bay leaves and then you're

 After I was done cooking my chicken adobo, I was going to do this taste test between

 knew they would say no because it was like nighttime and it was too late.

And I think if I did do it right, it would have been really nice and tender.

 noticed that my sauce versus the sauce I saw in the video, it wasn't as white or creamy.

 because when I used the coconut milk, I chose the coconut milk that was low in fat and low in

My mom had like four cans of coconut milk and when I was looking at all the labels, I was

Number three, there was something that I liked in my mom's adobo

 that the America's Test Kitchen adobo didn't have, which was this other flavor that was sweet.

 plop them, boil them with your chicken and that flavor should infuse into your sauce.

 mom, is this some type of secret ingredient that your family has?

 This is a Beauties Hack video and I had to do a Beauties Hack collab with Beauties World

 So after you watch my video make sure you go right on over to Beauties World channel

 Awesome editing, good quality videos and we decided to come to you guys with some Beauty

 Beauty Hacks are finding whatever you have, getting the job done.

 Basic stuff around the house or a cheaper way to do things basically.

 A lot of these I have separate videos on so if I do I will link them below.

 But I'm just going to do 10 and well let me show you the 10 that Beauties World is going

 So make sure after you watch my video you head on over to her channel.

 I will leave the link below to her channel along with the link to her video ok.

 Ok if you are a matte lipstick girl like me and you have all of these lipsticks that aren't

 matte I'm going to show you how to matte them out with any translucent powder and how to

 Take your creamy lipstick, translucent powder of choice, a fluffy brush.

 Ok this one is kind of gross but go to your dollar store and get you some cheap tampons.

 You guys have that moment when your nails are done and you want to change your toenail

 color but you don't want to remove the polish off of your nails.

 Girl excuse them ashy toes but make a polish remover, the tampon, pour some in the top,

 Ok we all have those extra stubborn foundation brushes where the foundation don't want to

 The first one I'm going to put dish washing detergent and the second one I'm going to

 put vinegar and you're going to see how that vinegar pulls it right out.

 Now I've showed you guys this before but in case you're new to my channel let me show

 you how to remove deodorant stains with a cosmetic sponge out of your favorite black

 Ok so you ever have the bum eye shadow look and you go to dry your wing liner and you

 I'm going to show you how to correct that without having to start all over with concealer

 Reapply your eye shadow after you conceal that line and just go right back over it.

 Nobody is making organization acrylics to store palettes so I'm going to show you how

 Ok we're all buying this beautiful costume jewelry and we don't want it to turn because

 I usually use an acrylic spray but I don't have any so I put a picture of what they look

 So I have so many clients that get home and they cannot get that waterproof stain makeup

 Because everybody don't just have makeup remover or wipes laying around the house.

 I have to keep talking about eye shadow because it takes the longest to do on your face.

 So I'm going to show you how to put your mascara on without getting the mascara in your eye

 Very simple just apply the sponge right above your lashes and let the mascara hit the sponge.

 Ok so do you mix products around the house and you don't want to pay for those expensive

 Well you can get them cheaper at other stores but why when you can just use an old CD you

 So make sure you go over and check out Beauty's World team because there's 10 different ones

 Next I am just going to curl my lashes and apply a light layer of mascara before I go ahead and apply some false lashes.

 I'm going to start doing some videos of just riding my bike so I thought I'd make a little

 So just if you're wondering how I made it, this is how I made it.

 So basically I got a, I'll just remove this, I got a bolt that goes into the tank and then,

 What I did was I got a long bolt that goes into this tank here and then I put a washer

 and a nut there and tightened it down tight so that nut's like, the washer's not pushing

 Then I made up this aluminium plate that's bent like so just to raise the camera up a

 Then another washer, then another nut which is just tightened down tight and then another

 And then on the camera itself I've got a long quarter inch nut by two inches long that screws

 into the camera and then I got a nut that fastens it in place in the camera.

 On here I've got a nut, a washer and a rubber grommet and then the plate, a grommet, a washer

 So what the grommets do is they absorb vibration and they also let the camera move a bit so

 the camera can move on the mount without actually moving the mount itself.

 So the camera has quite a lot of movement, you know, so it's not going to destroy the

 So now I'll just show you, when I turn on the camera, hopefully you can see this, it

 has a, it films the instrument panel and it films the screen from about a centimetre below

 so it won't get that top of the screen and if you can see, if I put my finger about a

 So yeah, that should work well and hopefully I'll have some videos, some test videos of

 So tonight we're cooking kale, which is this stuff, and this stuff that I dropped on the

 We're going to be cooking this with some red snappers, with some fish.

 So the first thing we're going to do is we're actually going to marinate the snappers.

 So I'm going to pour some oil in this pan, which is going to be my snapper cooking pan.

 I think I'm just going to throw the snapper in there and let it marinate in the oil a

 So I think I'm just going to use this one giant piece of snapper.

 Alright, so I'm just going to put this in the olive oil and like dip it around and shit

 And then what I'm going to do is I got this garlic that I cut up, so I'm just going to

 And then this is all just going to cook together when we decide to cook it up.

 But, I found out the other day, I made kale for the first time the other day.

 So, we're going to cook up the kale while this is marinating in the olive oil and garlic.

 So we're just going to cut this now and we're going to put it into this big pan and cook

 Now we're going to move on to the next project, which is cooking the shit out of this.

 Alright, so we're just going to add a little bit of olive oil to this.

 This is like a first on Ryan's demo, actually doing two things at once.

 You know, actually what both these things need though is some salt.

 So while we're doing this, I might as well ask you the question of the day.

 So the question of the day is, what are you going to be doing this weekend?

 So fish, the way you know a fish is done is if it separates easily.

 These two DVDs, part 27 and part 29, explain exactly how this battery works.

 Push it down, and then he's going to hook up the piece of magnesium.

 Let's turn this light off so you can see what's going to happen here.

 It's probably best to use distilled water, but whatever water you have.

 And we'll give you an idea of how much light there is in the dark.

 And that'll go for hours and hours and hours and days and days and days.

 Probably about every four or five days you'd have to water that.

 Today I'm going to show you how to do an initial setup on your Bose L1 Model 2 system with B2 Sub and T1 ToneMatch mixer.

 Now when you unpack everything from the cardboard boxes, you're going to end up with five different packages.

 One is your bass unit, two bags that have each of your speakers in it, one for the sub, and one for the T1 mixer.

 Now your power cord is stored in this pocket, but we've already got one set up for the demonstration.

 The next thing you want to do with your speakers is go ahead and open up both bags.

 So that's the first thing that you want to set up, and you just drop it into place.

 The next step that you're going to do, you're only going to do one time on your first setup,

 is you want to put the bracket into the speaker that holds the mixer.

 So to do that, you can loosen the thumb screw, and just slide it in the slot in the back,

 Now this is the only time that you'll have to do that, because you can leave it nested in there when you're storing it.

 The next step is to take your other speaker, column, and just drop it into place.

 Now your speakers and your bass unit are completely set up and ready to go.

 It's a protective cover that you can use while it's even just sitting there.

 In the box with the mixer is your bracket that holds the mixer,

 and it just simply slides into the T-slot, and locks into place.

 And on the bottom of the mixer you'll see a hole with two slots.

 Now you can put the mixer on either side, whichever is more convenient for you.

 And to plug it up for power and for audio, you're going to be using the supplied Ethercon cable.

 It looks like an RJ45, and you just plug it into the input jack,

 The sub just nests right beside the unit, and remove your protective cover.

 And you take your speaker cord, it's supplied, it was in the box with the sub,

 the same so it doesn't matter which end you use, these are called speak-on connectors.

 The next thing that we're going to do is turn the power on on the mixer,

 In this case we're going to plug into channel 1 a microphone, so plug it up.

 When you first unpack it, all the volume levels on everything are down,

 and the volume for the first channel, which is what we're working on, halfway.

 Okay, now I have it about halfway, and that's a really good volume,

 and now it still gives me plenty of room to turn the system up or down,

 turn that channel up or down, and then still room on the master volume.

 So I'm not overdriving the channel and making it sound distorted.

 Once again, we're using our combo jack, but this time I'm using the quarter inch mono cable,

 and then plugging it into the iPod or iPhone, whichever the case may be,

 Now, before I start the music, I want to set the channel up properly.

 And the volume still needs to be louder, so I'm going to unmute it and start turning up the trim.

 Now, that's a really good volume for that, and it still gives me headroom to turn it up and down.

 Now, keep in mind that a microphone, which we used first, is microphone level,

 It's a hotter signal, so that's why I had to turn up the trim on the first channel, the microphone,

 so, once again, I can mute the channel, I can unmute channels as needed.

 The middle part of the mixer is where you'll find your different EQs, your tuner,

 it has a built-in guitar tuner, your parametric EQ, many other features,

 and the details on that can be found in your mixer and also online.

 Now, now that we've done all this, your system is completely set up and ready to use.

 If you're plugging in more devices, you'll just repeat the process that we did on channel one and two.

 The system is completely set up and ready to use, and it can be left alone until you're ready to use it.

 To pack it up, you simply just repeat the process of taking it down and putting it all back in the storage cases,

 and the system is completely ready to use in under just a few minutes.

 If you have any questions on the Bose L1 Model 2 system, give us a call at Jira Supplies.

 The number is 770-338-0999, or you can visit us on the web at www.jirasupplies.com.

 Once again, my name is Gene Bys, and thank you for viewing our video.

 Hello right now I'm going to be unboxing the Sigma 7200mm f2.8 APOEX DG Macro Telephoto

 And the first thing you get is a 7200mm f2.8 EG and like a little manual.

 And this lens has a weird texture to it and that's to stop dust.

 So, that is it for my unboxing of the Sigma 7200mm f2.8 APO-EX DG Macro Lens.

 Hey guys, it's Rosie, and in this video, I'm making crispy baked pork chops.

 this recipe was inspired by Diana because she made these lovely low-carb

I wanted to make her pork chops, but I didn't have the ingredients

 make pork chops this night, so let me show you what I came up with.

 starting off with my pork chops, and I'm using thick cut pork chops.

 seasoning salt, some ground black pepper, onion powder, and garlic powder.

 I'm going to use my hands to make sure everything is throughout.

 nonstick spray, placed those pork chops on the cookie sheet, and now we're going

 minutes, and then I broiled it for 1 to 2 minutes just to add color.

Be sure to check her out, I'm sure you're going to love her channel

 will be sharing my recipe for my Southern baked macaroni and cheese, so

 Today I'm going to show you how to make country style chicken and dumplings.

 We all love chicken and dumplings because they just are a wonderful comfort food.

 So our first part of it is we're going to make the stock of the soup.

 And for the stock of the soup, I am going to use both chicken thighs and chicken wings.

 I like to use the chicken wings because as you cook them, they release a lot of thickening

 And we're also going to season our basic chicken stock with celery, carrot, and onion.

 So the first thing that we need to do is we need to go ahead and begin to cook our chicken

 So I'm actually going to just salt and pepper these pretty heavily.

 And then we're going to cook them in a sauce pan or a frying pan for just a little bit

 And the next thing I'm going to do is I'm going to turn my skillet pretty low.

 And as they render out a little bit of fat from the skin in the chicken, then I'm going

 This way your chicken can saute in its own chicken fat and it's going to release a really

 So while these are cooking, I'm going to go ahead and chop up my veggies.

 All right, so our chicken, while it's not fully cooked, it has gotten nice and browned

 These were actually going to continue cooking this in the stock pot.

 So now that when we are sauteing our vegetables here, we have something wonderful right now.

 I've heard that's called schmaltz before, but we're going to go ahead and just saute

 So I have two onions, a couple of ribs of celery, and a couple of carrots in here.

 So we're going to saute these until the onions are translucent.

 So I'm also going to salt and pepper this because it's always a good idea to season

 So whenever you saute onions, you want to go ahead and add a little bit of salt.

 This forces some of the water to come out so you get a better caramelization.

 So we're going to let this saute for a couple of minutes while we go ahead and get our stock

 Okay, so our celery, our carrots, and our onions have browned a little bit.

 And we're just going to scrape around the pan to get up all the nice brown bits because

 Now I'm going to transfer this to the pot and I'm going to cook it in.

 Okay, and to this pot, we're also going to add our semi-cooked chicken thighs.

 Now we're going to come back later after this chicken cooks all the way through and we're

 So at this point, we're going to let this simmer for about 45 minutes until the chicken

 What this is going to do is it's going to let me deal with chickens a little bit cooler.

 And it's also going to let the chicken fat that's already in here come up to the top

 and we can skim some of that off so our soup is not quite as fatty as it is right now.

 So we're going to let this rest for a couple minutes and I'm going to go ahead and start

 I have skimmed off some of the fat on this soup and I just want to get it up to a low

 So we're going to go ahead and add to our flour a little bit of salt, a little bit of

 sugar, and I'm just going to add about a half teaspoon of baking soda.

 These are going to be the light, fluffy dumplings and not the noodle type.

 And the next thing we're going to do is we're going to go ahead and add in our butter.

 And we're just going to want to stir this together and let it combine a dough.

 And when it combines the dough, we're going to start to drop these into our soup mix.

 Okay, so you can see our soup has come to a rolling boil and now we're going to go ahead

 Okay, so I have my dumplings in there and I just want to stir them occasionally to make

 And the next thing I'm going to do is I'm going to go ahead and debone my chicken.

 And I'm just going to pull it off and just drop it into the pot.

 This is simply filled with all sorts of carrots and onion and celery and these beautiful,

 You can see it's really, really easy to go ahead and make homemade chicken and dumplings.

 Please be sure to give it a big thumbs up here on YouTube and be sure to subscribe so

 And drop me a comment down below of what you'd like to see next.

 I think there's like two that I've seen where we're going to be replacing a main board for

 I didn't get an exact count but make sure you have a cup like so.

 So anyway, I'm going to take off this screw and then the next time you see me we're going

 I found a new board which looks like this without the wrapper of course.

 These right here, these little side panels, the way you take these off, turn it around,

 you'll see that you've got this little clip right here that you've got to twist and then

 Just so you guys know, make sure that you use surge protectors.

 for the outside and a piece of fabric for the lining which will also show up as detail

The lining fabric needs to be a bit bigger than your outside fabric.

 match up because of the difference in sizes but we're going to make it match up.

 just move it on down here and we'll do the same, another 1.25 inch seam down this side.

 longer lining piece and press it toward the fabric piece that's going to be showing your

 We're going to even this out so we have about the same amount of the lining showing on each

 way we want it because our next step is to sew a 1.25 inch seam right through here and

 Up at the top is a plug gauge used to check the diameter of the rim.

You can see the rims over to the left and they're made from steel rolled and then welded.

 The wheels are made from plywood that a couple of pieces are put together and laminated.

It's a cart for a half Model T engine used as a stationary eye catcher at shows and events.

 Here we have the total workstation, a charcoal fire to heat rims, a place to pound them on and here in the back you can see some rims that we have completed.

 The old fashioned way was to pour water on it because they couldn't lift the wagon wheel but here we can just put the whole thing in some water and cool it down.

 You'll see here what to do if things don't go quite as well as you think they should go.

Just take it off and heat it back up and try to put it back on there.

 We've made this wheel just a little bit smaller and we're going to try again to see if we can get this done.

 There's a learning curve and as you go along you learn how to do this.

 We've completed the two front wheels which have a single steel rim on them.

 You can see the top of it has been machined to the proper size so it can accept the rim.

When it hits that un-machined area of the larger diameter it will stop.

 Then you'll see that we'll machine that off and put the rim from the other side.

 Here we're removing the stop on the other side of the wheel so that the rim can be pressed on from that side.

 The wheel is rotated around a hub that's on a fixed board with a stop.

 So you go in a certain diameter you can adjust the stop and go a little more.

 Here, raising the router bit so we can take a little bit more off.

 We get it down pretty thin and then you take a box cutter and trim the rest of it off as you see here.

 The next step is to take that router that you see and go around and put just a little bit of a leading edge on it to make it a little easier to get that rim to start.

 We've got it machined down to the correct diameter and put the lead in on it.

 We just move it right on down on there until it hits the first rim.

 So we have the two front wheels with single rims on them and this is the rear wheel that has a double rim on it.

 And we have one more wheel to go and that will complete the job.

 Head to everydaydriggers.tv slash lady to save 10% off orders $50 and more at ladyfootlocker.com.

 Today we're going to create the all-time coolest sounding recipe ever, the rum keg.

 This recipe can be made, it was originally probably a punch bowl or a keg, something large,

 big, but reduce the ingredients by half and create something that I can have for show

 Two and a half ounces of light rum, that would be your killer because you'd end up with five.

 So two and a half ounces of light rum, a half ounce of dark rum, a half ounce of apricot

 brandy, a half ounce of passion fruit syrup, one ounce of pineapple juice, two ounces of

 Pineapple juice, one of my favorite juices besides that of passion fruit juice.

 So what we're going to do, strain, garnish, cherry with the umbrella.

 I don't know if everything can be contained within there, but we can strain out what we

 Of course, the two and a half ounces of light rum is just to, uh, add emphasis to the name.

 It's like if you had a keg of rum, how could you make it taste better than awful?

 A little, like, single barrel of state from Cruis'n wouldn't be bad, but to drink straight

 All right, now we're gonna do our two ounces of sweet sour, and one ounce.

 I was just picturing, like, every Friday, Derek, what are you doing again?

 Tropical flavor, which I'm going to guess is a contribution to the citrus in the pineapple.

 Which, the citrus isn't playing as big of a role as I would have thought.

 Really, though, the big play here is the Cajun black strap rum or dark rum.

 Because it's got that, like, sweet dark maraschino cherry flavor.

 On top of that, then you layer some passion fruit and a little sour and a little sweet

 If I was stuck on a tropical island and I had rum and gin and I could only make two

 But if I was stuck on a tropical island and I had rum and gin and I could only make two

 cocktails, because it's got passion fruit and awesomeness in it.

 Either case, if I was stuck on an island, I'd bring all those ingredients.

 And I could make enough drinks for maybe a month and then I'd be screwed.

 Unless there was a truck that always delivered the same ingredients.

 hand saw, you saw the hole just a little bigger, and then you insert a piece of similar wood

 a little piece of wood off of a piece of walnut, the same thing.

 what you do is you take that little piece of wood and then you hammer it with a hammer

Now the reason for this is you want it to easily fit into the hole,

 but when the glue is applied it starts to swell up and it'll fill that hole very tightly.

 you let that dry overnight, you cut it off and you sand it down, and again you won't be able

 of repetitive cuts, for instance, let's say you're making eight or ten drawers for something,

 what you do is you align your wood the first time exactly where you want it on your jig,

 and then you take and put a little indicator or a stop like I have here with this little bent nail,

And now every time you want to do a second one, you just take this out,

 put another one in, index it over till it touches the stop, and they're absolutely repeatable.

 if you don't like doing the nail approach, you can just take and screw a block of wood to the

 exactly the same place, so for repetitive cuts it's absolutely identical.

 little tip that makes a dovetail joint look more hand, or actually handmade.

 joint together, just put a straight edge up to the back edge and then just scratch a little line,

And what that does is that gives it the appearance of a handmade cut,

 because that's one of the operations that you do when you put it together.

 sharp, thin material, then these larger cutters, you just cannot bring them down far enough to be

 able to cut very thin without the bearing falling off the guide.

 the small cutter, you can bring it down, down and down, and you can actually cut an eighth of an

 inch or less and still have the ball bearing in contact with the working template.

 these small bits are so important to you, especially if you do small box work.

 what you use is a T-nut and either a round or a square piece of wood, drive it in place,

 drill a hole in the wood, put the T-nut in, and now you have a much easier to use clamp than these

If you're only doing three quarter inch or half inch joints, then the three quarter inch

 inch thick boards, such as I used in this box, you need to go to a thicker template for your

 you do is you glue together two half inch pieces of MDF so you end up with a one inch thick board

Now you can see that as this is adjusted down, you can see you still have

 plenty of space down here for the router bearing to roll on, and then you can get accurate cuts

 Today we're making pepper steak and this is pretty sentimental to me because my mom used

 You can use some red or yellow bell peppers or a punch of color.

 We're also going to make sure that we have some minced garlic ready to go.

 Since we're chopping this stuff up into large pieces it's really not that much work.

 We're just cutting this steak boy against the grain so it'll be nice and tender just

 The next thing is to get a frying pan or a wok over medium heat.

 Then we're going to add some vegetable oil to our pan and let that heat up for about

 We're using top sirloin that I bought thinly sliced but then you saw me cut it against

 Once the meat is in there we're just going to stir it up a bit.

 We're tossing in our peppers and onions and we're going to stir this up a bit like we

 The key with this is, in my humble opinion guys, is to keep some crispiness, some snap

 Now we're adding our cornstarch and soy sauce slurry to the pan.

 You can find the recipe that is very pepper steak at chefkendraseasycooking.com.

 Now we're going to stir and cook this until our delicious sauce is thickening up some.

 Welcome WBP stars to Eskog Mat & Människor in Gothenburg, Sweden.

 My name is Stefan Karlsson and I'm one of the owners and chef here at the restaurant.

Today we're going to prepare a dish of tartare of Swedish strip loin

 Um, you know, I got some comments on the video but nothing that said they wanted me to build it.

 And as I put the tubes on, I'm going to take a tube off of here, put it on here, take a tube off of here, put it on here.

 Okay, first we're going to take one of these Bionicle Telefeet.

 Um, we're going to put it through there, but let's take one of these hand pieces first.

 Then, we're going to take another two hands and put them on either side like that.

 Another hand's facing the other direction, going upward kind of.

 Then we're going to take one of these lower telemetry legs and attach it to this one I put in the back there.

 Then we're just going to attach another little hand at the bottom of that.

 For all of these, this little part that comes out, make that face down.

 And again, put two more little black two-long pieces on either side.

 And then, lastly, we just stick them on the little prongs here.

 You can put them facing any direction you want, but I put them down this way.

 The reason I have you put these things all down is not only for the sake of consistency,

 but with the setup of tubes and these little things, if you do everything the way I did,

 one of these arms will serve as a very good spot to put one of the balls.

 and put them in either side of the two remaining unused sockets.

 Stick a four-long pole, like what's in the arms of the telemetry,

 And then, two of these really, really small short pieces go on there and on there.

 I'd use a white one, but I'm not sure if they actually made white ones.

 therefore attaching the white thing, the big white thing on the back.

 The next video, I'll be attaching the tubes and the big white things,

 You might not necessarily want it, but I'm going to make a video for it anyway,

 just so you can see how I built the kind of screen setup and stuff.

 Welcome to Brooklyn Cooking, a place where Brooklyn locals share their home cooking creations.

 Today we'll be sharing maple pecan sweet potato burgers and lemon garlic kale.

 For these recipes, you'll need two pounds of peels cooked in mashed sweet potatoes,

 a third cup cooked quinoa, two tablespoons of buttery spread, two tablespoons maple syrup,

 a half cup dry roasted pecans, chopped, and cinnamon allspice and nutmeg, about an eighth

 The juice of a medium lemon, one clove of garlic, finely chopped, sea salt, one to two

 So we'll start off with mixing the quinoa, the butter, maple syrup, pecans, and allspice.

 Sweet potatoes are one of my favorites, especially around the holidays, just because you have

 the sweetness of the sweet potato and the maple that actually brings out the flavor.

 Now that the sweet potato burgers are baking in the oven, they'll need to bake for about

 Halfway through, make sure you take them out and flip them over so they cook evenly on

 We now have time to turn our attention to the lemon garlic kale that's going to complement

 We're going to take the lemon juice, make sure all the pieces have some of the lemon

 I'm just going to add the garlic on top, a pinch of sea salt, and lastly, olive oil.

 All we need to do now is actually put it in the refrigerator for three hours to marinate.

 Now that our burgers are done baking and our kale is marinated, all that's left to do is

 One of the things I like about this dish is that it is a complex array of different nutrients,

 That lemon and the kale mixed with the sweet potato is a great combination.

 For the recipe, other shows, and more, check out brooklyndashcooking.com.

 A real short video just to show you how to use the Twiggy model, the smallest mini cooker that I make.

 And we're doing lump without a whole lot of firewood on top only because we don't need the flames for high heat.

 What I'm going to do is close the fire door but not fully close because we want air vents.

 And you'll notice the air vents are fully open on either side of the fire box along with the fire box door.

 What I need to do is prop this door up for the preheat so that we get a good draft.

 And also you'll see a grease drain to catch the grease while we're barbecuing.

 We'll let it sit for about an hour and see where we are from there.

 Now keep in mind this is only just to ignite the wood so it doesn't over smoke.

 I'm going to let it sit for 5 minutes so that it comes up another 5 degrees.

 Bake the crust at 350 degrees for about 12 to 15 minutes until slightly brown.

 You will need blender, cream cheese, heavy cream, lime, and water.

 Add the cream cheese and using your whisk, mix the cream cheese.

 This is the kitchen of Waterford Castle, this is where all the magic happens.

Now, my big fear is that risotto is going to take so long to cook.

 Basically, I cook out the risotto to a certain point for about five minutes.

The finishing is when you put in all the flavour, the taste and whatever you want to put into it.

 So the risotto itself, the arborio rice, is what you cook out first?

 Yeah, basically finely chopped an onion, sweat it off with butter, a little bit of garlic, throw in your arborio,

 and then you can lash in a bit of white wine so that the risotto is soaked and warm up.

 Then you put in a little bit of stock, chicken stock, cancer stock, which we call water in the English kitchen,

 I made that from the shrimp heads, from the shrimp tails, basically what was left over from when I peeled the shrimp.

They came in alive in a bucket and they were jumping out and we just cooked them very quickly.

 Now I used the grated parmesan in the cooking and then I'm going to garnish it with some parmesan shavings that I've peeled off the top.

 And then I have, this is the risotto that's already been partially cooked, as I said earlier.

 It's usually about, it's a starter so I usually use about two spoons per person.

 So I'm just going to, basically, it's very important to keep stirring it.

 Keep stirring it because then the rice, it's absorbing all the liquids evenly.

 You know, if you leave that on, I kill the chefs, they leave it on, they walk away, they're bubbling and it sticks, it's destroyed.

 And it's not to be scared of it, like it's a simple, you can see it there, I've got the stock going.

 It's the shrimp stock, you see the colour of it, it's beautiful.

 And in that, I'm going to enrich it with a little bit of butter.

 It's a fast heat you want, you want to get this stock into the rice.

 And don't be distracted, and if you are, you shouldn't be cooking risotto.

 A lot of people are scared of butter, but if they knew what it was in packet food, they'd gladly eat butter.

 That's just what, you know, I'm just going to keep stirring it in, you can see it there.

 I might need a little bit more stock, but I'm going to leave that rice absorb all that flavor.

 Again, it gives it the aniseed flavor, and that goes really well with fish.

 Again, I keep stirring, and you can see it all coming together now.

 And the reason I heat the stock is because it's already hot, the rice will absorb it quicker.

 You know, the Italians love this, and I think it's a lovely thing to eat.

 Now I'm going to put in some parmesan, a little bit of parmesan.

 Again, this enriches it, puts a little bit of saltiness into it.

 Yes, absolutely, and it melts into it lovely, and it kind of gets that gooey, that lovely tangy, gooey flavor.

 And the secret, as I said, was just to have it, you see it here, just keep stirring.

 Again, white pepper so it's not seen, it's not black flecks, and you just want that pink, that lovely rich color from the risotto.

 Yeah, but again, it's like everything, you've just got, you've got three ingredients here.

 Rice, shrimp, four ingredients, rice, shrimp, tarragon, and parmesan cheese.

 And okay, we can put foams and all sorts of stuff on it, but I think the shrimps are fresh, they came in from the North East, eight miles up the road.

 Alright, this one I'm going to cook for you right now is lobster in garlic and butter

 I used to, I learned to cook this when I was like 16 and this is still one of my favourite

 So for this you're going to use like ginger, fresh ginger, one clove of garlic, onion,

 spring onion, a bit of pepper for colouring and basically we're going to just season with

 all purpose seasoning, just some corn flour and that's how simple it is to make this dish.

 Alright, first thing we're going to do is chop this garlic and you know Caribbean food

 You can either use the ginger big, you can use ginger as a seasoning or you can use it

 Okay, and then first thing you're going to do is add some butter, good dollop of butter

 Take the meat out, cut it, stick it in, rustic as ever you know, just chop it up.

 It's really, really smelling really, really great now because it's like the ginger and

 So all we have to do now is just, this is all we need, just a little bit of seasoning

 I'm going to use all purpose seasoning because this is our base seasoning in Jamaica.

 And this lobster is already cooked so basically all you need now is a little bit of water.

 All of the butter and water and all of this freshness coming together now.

 Then once this brings to the boil, bring this to the boil and just let it cook for the next

 And then get the vegetables infused and then you're going to add some cornflour.

 Stick all of this nice lobster back in it with some vegetables.

 In the restaurant, you know, we have to find time to put this together properly.

 I'm telling you, if you ever taste this, it's so wicked because the ginger, the garlic,

 the fresh thyme, all of the onions and the spring onion and then you just garnish with some like fresh chopped spring onion again.

 This is absolutely 100% healthy for you and it's so perfectly and easy.

 Hello, my name is Don Talbot and we're going to go ahead and bait this super bait up today.

 One of the ways that we do that for fishing for salmon on the Columbia River is we use

 What I do is I separate the oil from the tuna fish and the reason why we do that is because

 You don't have to do all the oil out of it but squeeze it pretty good.

 And then once you get this lid here, you just force it back up and your tuna becomes a lot

 That way you can go ahead and stick your tuna into a Tupperware and it's a lot easier to

 So I'll take all the tuna out that has all the oil removed and get ready to put it inside

 Of course, take a lot of paper towels with you to wipe your hands off.

 What you do to undo the super bait is undo the rubber in the back of it, remove the sponge,

 If you want to, you can add other scent to it like Pro-Cure is one of the ones that I

 You can use any of that type of scent in the tuna oil and it'll actually enhance the flavor.

 Then I take this tuna fish and I pack it, I mold it right inside this super bait right

 In order to do this with a plug, you have to wrap the bait onto the plug and you can't

 I take the sponge and I take that sponge and I pack it right over the top of the tuna.

 And then it's going to squeeze into the tuna, all the leftover into the tuna, which isn't

 And that's how you go ahead and make a tuna snack for the fish.

 And I'll tell you what, we caught a lot of kings on this and this is a great way to go

 Don't let it crawl outside like this because it won't run right.

 Make sure you shove it back into the trap, pull the leader tight.

 We're going to be fishing with sardines that are old and frozen out of the freezer and

 they look like they're not worth anything but there's a lot of oil in a sardine.

 Even though this one looks horrible, when I cut this open you're going to find that

 You just chunk it into real small pieces like this and go all the way up and it will fall

 It's not going to fall apart inside the super bait like it will on a plug.

 When I'm done with the head and the tail I discard those off to the side.

 Just because it has a little freezer burn doesn't mean the meat's not good inside.

 I'll use this up trolling for lake trout or for kings if I have some kings in the water.

 Grape it right off into my Tupperware container or that type of a tank container.

 You can have the sponge resting right there in the oil just like that.

 You take the sponge out and you go ahead and you put it right in here.

 And then you take the meat and you just start packing the meat into the super bait.

 You've got a sardine meal ready for the kings or the lakers or whatever fish you're trying

 It doesn't matter how you do it, in which order, but I like to do it in kind of the

 Again, like I said, when you line it up, just push it forward and it will lock into place.

 So I suggest when you put on your case, put it on here so you can line up the three little

 I'd say you can put in your hard drive screw now if you'd like.

 Again, you're going to need your little Torx screwdriver and your four little screws.

 It's a little bit of a hassle, but it's a good way to get started.

 Be sure to show your love and support by commenting and rating all of his videos.

 Today I'm going to show you a quick and easy way to take your spice and make gravy with

 First, we're going to take some margarine, about a tablespoon full, and put it in a small

 Then we're going to take a cup of water, a tablespoon of cornstarch, add a cup of water

 Once we bring it to a boil, you're going to see some of the best gravy you've ever tasted,

 In the meantime, let me show you one handy side that magic comes in.

 As you can see, our less than three-minute gravy is now less than three minutes.

 I guarantee you, that will be the best gravy and potatoes I've ever had.

 This time I'm experimenting with a product by Affinage and it's called Be Red.

 This is a high lift product like Magic Contrast which will turn naturally dark hair bright red.

 The first thing you'll notice is that it's bigger than my head!

 You get double the amount you would with Magic Contrast and it's cheaper too.

 A plastic mixing bowl, something to measure the peroxide, I'm using a medicine cup,

 an application brush, oh so soft, gloves obviously, a comb, a mirror to see the back of your head,

 Vaseline which is a more expensive brand of petroleum jelly, they're the same thing,

 10V developer for my previously lightened hair and 30V to do my roots.

 Now if you've got naturally dark hair and you've never dyed it before I suggest you do 30V all over.

 And you might want to pause here just so you can read this little bit of handy information.

 Start off by putting Vaseline all over your hairline, all over the skin and everywhere that you think

 I'm using half the tube on my roots and you don't have to be a mathematician to know that

 Until you get something that looks a little bit like cake mix, although you probably don't want to eat this stuff.

 Then just apply it all over your roots avoiding the scalp and avoiding your skin.

 I'm going to spray a little bit of water on my dry ends just to help them absorb the dye a bit better.

 After rinsing it out, make sure you shampoo and condition your hair.

It's a really rich red rather than a bright fluo-red like I had before.

 Hey guys, my name is David D'Amuzio and I'm just learning how to play the song

 Now, the way that the Eraserheads play it, they actually play it in the key of C but

 you the same chords and the same style that they play it, and then I'm going to

 teach you an alternate way to play it so that you can play it in the same key as

 to know, but you don't have to tune your guitar down a half step, which is kind of

Alright, so this is what they do, it's C and you would play, I'll teach

 you the strumming pattern, down, up down, down, up down, up down, down up.

 down, up down, down up, down up, down up, down up, when we're down, up down up, down up, up down up, down up, down up, alright?

 chord, so first C major, then E major, down, up down up, down up, down up, down up, down up, and then E, sorry, A minor, down, up down up, down up, down up, down up, and then, if this is the intro, then you would play an F minor

 chord, but on the end of the intro, it's a minor, for the last chord that they play.

So one more time, this is the intro, E, A minor, F minor, so sorry, they don't actually strum it there, they just play one chord, F minor.

Now, that's basically how they play, those are the chords that they play, but they tune down a half step.

 Now I'm going to teach you what I think is a better way of doing it, which is to play it in the same key that they do, but this way you don't have to tune your guitar down.

 And then second chord is going to be an... it's going to be an C chord.

I'm teaching you in relative to the capo, so it would be C major chord.

 So C major, so you're basically playing this on the fourth fret, just a major chord right here, major chord, bar chord.

 Then the second chord is going to be an F sharp minor chord, so that's the second fret minor.

This last chord, this D, it changes from major to minor at certain different points during the song.

So if you're playing during the main parts of the song, it's going to be major, but at the end of every turn it's minor.

 So I'll kind of explain the certain parts where it becomes minor.

And other than that, it's the same chord progression all the way through.

 So that's the end of each part of the verse, it becomes instead of a D major, like that.

 So all those parts where it's like... You can kind of hear how that's just minor.

And then it goes back into the same progression, but then again, first time it's minor.

So the first time through every progression, it's gonna be major.

The second time through that progression, it goes to the D minor.

 So anyway, that's kind of one of the cool things that the Eraserheads do in their songs.

And that's sort of what makes them a little bit Beatles-like, because it's also very popular for the Beatles to change their major chords, which are within the key, to a minor chord.

 So that's the entire chord progression for Magazine by Eraserheads.

I saw a video of somebody playing it, but it was kind of very difficult to understand.

 Good day, I'm Rowena List, professional image organizer and speaker of GettingItTogether.ca.

 Now every house does not need to have one because chances are what's inside of a junk

 It's old pieces of paper, little pieces of twine, some elastic bands, takeout menus,

 This particular, and those junk drawers really, I mean you could probably just toss them,

 except for look for spare change because a lot of times there's spare change in them

 This particular junk drawer has items in it that of course you need in your kitchen.

 Now chances are the brush could be in the bathroom because that's where you're going

 So what I would recommend is having a little container that you would keep all your different

 We're not going to call it a junk drawer anymore because it's going to be an organized drawer,

 but we can toss this out and just have something just for batteries.

 So the tools could have their own home and you could have a space just for a home.

 They could maybe go in where you keep the rest of the sewing things.

 So just systematically go through this, organize it, tidy it up, and you will no longer have

 I got the idea from a demonstrator on the incentive trip and I can't remember her name,

There's a little fortune inside the cookie and I want to show you how

 from the Teeny Tiny Wishes and I stamped that with the black StazOn.

 Before we go any further, I'm going to take my paper piercing tool and get a glue dot

 it folded, we're going to put this Happy Graduation message inside and fold it back up.

You'll probably need 2 or 3 little mini glue dots here, so I'm going to take

Once you seal it up, you can put your fingers inside the ends right there.

 Hi everyone, I am so excited that it is National Ice Cream Month, a month to celebrate my absolute

And so this week I'm bringing you five of my most favorite recipes

I know ice cream makers are a little bit of an investment, but it

 is the only way to make a true and wonderful creamy homemade ice cream right in your kitchen.

 You can get one anywhere from $40 up to $200 and it doesn't take an expensive one.

 one for quite a while and now I have the attachment for my KitchenAid mixer.

 expense and $40 to $60 for a starter one, well worth the money.

 give you a link to some of my favorite starter ones that you can use right at home.

 ice cream we're going to start with as we do for about every ice cream, milk and cream.

Skim will give you a little bit icier crystals in your ice cream and whole

 milk will give you that smooth and creamy consistency you're after.

 my ice creams use raw eggs and I know there is so much debate about whether it's safe or not.

 I'm not going to tell you you have to use raw eggs, but I do think it makes a big difference

 heat the whole mixture with the cream and everything up to about 160 degrees on your stove

With the two raw eggs I'm going to beat them separately and add my sugar

 and then the cocoa and I of course always use a good Dutch process cocoa.

 If you want a little something extra in your chocolate ice cream, you can add melted chocolate

 but this will make the end result a little different than a creamy ice cream.

 The melted chocolate will form little hard balls inside of the ice cream almost like chocolate

So if you don't want that consistency, just leave it out altogether.

 Always pre-chill your ice creams before you put them into a freezer.

 just follow the manufacturer's instructions on your ice cream freezer.

 mine need to be set in your freezer to have a good hard freeze for at least 15 hours.

 Mine usually take around 20 to 30 minutes for a good hard freeze and then it's best to put

 them directly into an ice cream container and then back into the freezer for at least another

These countertop models don't get you a really hard ice cream but if you like soft serve,

This chocolate ice cream is a classic and you are going to be making

 So we're going to start off with a pound and a half of 80-20 ground beef.

 Alright once our ground beef is browned and we've drained the grease we're going to go

 ahead and add in one yellow onion that we've minced up pretty fine.

 Alright now we're going to go ahead and start adding our spices and we're going to start

 off with two tablespoons of chili powder, two teaspoons of black pepper, a teaspoon

 of cumin, a tablespoon of granulated onion, a tablespoon of granulated garlic, a teaspoon

 of salt, a teaspoon of oregano, two tablespoons of brown sugar, six ounces of beer, a quarter

 cup of apple cider vinegar, one fourteen and a half ounce can of diced tomatoes with green

 We're going to give this a stir and what we're going to do is reduce the heat and let it

 cook for probably about two hours over medium low and let it reduce down until it's nice

 Alright our hot dog chili has been simmering for about two and a half hours now.

 As you can tell it's reduced quite a bit and it's nice and thick.

 We're going to go ahead and give it a taste test and get it ready for our okie dogs later.

 Alright so in a moment of truth we're going to go ahead and give this a taste and see

 Thank you guys for watching I hope you give this hot dog chili a try on your next hot

 Hi, so I'm going to attempt the challenge with the paradiddle paradiddle paradiddle diddle one two

 So what I'm going to do with the two paradiddles is I love paradiddles.

 So I came up with just something fun that I do with the paradiddles and I'm going to incorporate that and that just goes like this

 The right hand is on the ride the left hand is on the snare and

 Three on the bass drum and beats two and four of a complete measure on the hi-hat so I got

 And you can do all kinds of fun things so the first part is going to be that paradiddle paradiddle with the

 One one and three there with the bass drum and the hi-hat and then for the paradiddle diddle

 Something I got from Mike Johnston, and I'm basically gonna play the

 Ride at the same time like that, and that's my pair and then and then I come down here

 I'm gonna show you what I do with the paradiddle diddle so you can kind of see what that sounds like so

 I'm gonna incorporate that and I'm working on the speed on that so I don't want to go any faster than what I can so I'll keep it within my ability and we'll see how it goes and I'll try to incorporate that into some kind of a feel from some groove.

 So I'm going to try and put the whole thing together and try and speed it up so here goes.

 So now what I'm going to do is I'm going to try to put that inside of a groove so I'm going to move the camera around so you can see I have a different angle.

 Okay so let's see if we can take that and put it as a feel into some type of a groove.

 Alright so I hope you were able to see what I was doing there and well I had a lot of fun and thanks Mike for everything.

 of jazz steps to work on, but for now I just wanted to give you a little bit of something else.

 since I don't have a partner here tonight, I figured it would be a good night to work on

If you have just learned the swing out, if you're kind of new to it and you don't really

 know what's going on, I would advise you to stop the video right now and keep working on the swing

 outs because a lot of people try to throw in swivels way too quickly and it just ends up

 And I'm just bending my knees to make it easier to emphasize the beat.

What makes a swivel particularly challenging and also the reason why

 it tends to throw off new lady hoppers is that all the movement from the swivel is coming from

 right here in my hips and a little bit to my knees to my extent.

 and twist like this, but so that like it's a chest motion, kind of like that.

 really want to do is to keep our shoulders about as parallel and square as possible,

Because if you think of this in terms of a swing out, we want to be square to our partner,

If we weren't doing swivels, we would still want to be square arms.

 even when we stylize, when we add in the fancy stuff, we still have to do the basic

 frame correctly, which is why it throws off so many new beginners, because we don't want to

 really comfortable with this whole keeping the shoulders parallel kind of motion.

 it's really nice to have a bar here, because it's something that we can hold on to, essentially

 I've heard that a chair, like the back of a chair, if you hold on to that, that also works.

 It's also good to practice in socks or some kind of slippery shoes so that you can really

 focus on this and not really what your feet are doing, because if your feet stick

 right here, as well as some of your inner thigh muscles, will be a little bit achy and sore.

 That's how you know that you're doing it right, essentially, after about five minutes of

But if you just do a little bit of this all the time, it'll start to feel a lot

The swivel, essentially, is going to start on the seven and a half beat.

 going to go like seven and eight, and then you're swiveled roughly.

I'll do a couple of normal swing outs first, and then we'll start

Again, it'll be on seven and a half, kind of when your swivels roughly

So, we have seven and eight, seven and eight, seven and eight, one, two.

It's kind of our inclination to go out, and this is where we tend

 step, triple step, step, step, seven and eight, and all of a sudden, we're out here.

 were facing this way, the swivel would be beautiful because our feet would be nice and parallel, but

 don't want to end up in that circumstance in the first place because then it detracts from the

 kind of swing out where we end up here, if our partner's like right in front of us.

 go rock, step, triple step, step, step, triple step, step, step, so that all of this is kind of

 when you've been dancing for a little bit, and you're really, really comfortable with the steps

 of the normal swing out, but they also look super, super cool and smooth, and also when you're dancing

 fast songs, they help, you know, eliminate some of the kind of minute footwork that doesn't make a

 Because don't you want a snack after you work hard at gymnastics?

 So I was thinking of something like this that tasted like honey.

 You go to the grocery and there's things that have tons of sugar, hydrogenated oils, words

 So what we try to do at Wheelicious is make healthy snack foods that are really snacks,

 that are crunchy, munchy, delicious, like things that you would buy in a package, but

 So Chloe's going to help me make one of our favorite snack foods, cinnamon honey chickpeas.

 All you're going to do is take a can of chickpeas that you rinsed.

 But if you didn't want to do that, you could soak and cook your own chickpeas.

 So what you're going to do is rinse them and drain them and then put them on a towel

 When you've done that and kind of loosened them with a towel, you'll just pick up the

 You're peeling off the little skins so that when you're cooking the chickpeas in the oven,

 when you're baking them, roasting them, you're just cooking that inner chickpea.

 And what you would think is like a soft, you're saying, wait a minute, isn't a bean soft inside?

 So what we've done is after you've taken all of the outer skins off the chickpeas, I've

 You want to make sure to whisk the oil and the cinnamon so it becomes sort of like this

 Whisk, whisk, whisk, whisk, whisk, whisk, whisk, whisk, whisk, whisk.

 You want to put one of those or we'll see what happens if it has the skin on it, just

 Place them on a baking sheet that you've covered with foil so it's easier for cleanup.

 You're going to put all of it, bake them in a 400 degree oven for 40 minutes.

 Pretend they came out after 40 minutes and they're nice and golden.

 So remember that tablespoon that you had already put the oil in?

 Now it's nice and greased so that when you put the honey in, ready?

 And look, the honey comes right out because the tablespoon was already greased.

 And then you're just going to coat these and you're going to put them back on your baking

 And one of the moms, when the kids were trying them recently, all the kids were tasting them,

 And then the mom turned around to me and said, those were delicious.

 For more fast, fresh, and easy recipes like this and more, check out WeeLicious.com.

 Hello, this is Diana again in the kitchen and I'm going to show you how to do some more

 Now say you want to put something on bread, well see I've got some baggies too.

 When you want to seal the bag up, pinch one end of it, put it in your teeth and seal it

 Now if you try to put something on the bread it's going to slide around so I put my bread

 on a towel and I put something heavy on the towel to hold it from sliding around.

 You can put it under your chin and twist it or you can put a jar between your legs and

 Sometimes if the towel is going to slide you put something a little heavier on it.

 And again, you know, and the ones that are homemade you can use a little can opener to

 And that's how you can put stuff on bread and open a jar with one hand.

I can open and close it to just a little pinpoint so it can shoot like a

 replacing your old sprinkler, you should know you can buy replacement parts and

 counterclockwise, it might be kind of hard like this one, if you turn

 together they don't use any glues or plumbers tape or anything.

You don't want water leaking inside, but outside if you had a leak it

 Okay so here's the old one on the right and the new one on the left.

 I'm putting in a shorter sprinkler head because the old one was too high up and

 Once you're done tightening it's not going to be spraying in the right

Some of the sprinklers, the very top needs to be unscrewed and you can

 is here, right here on the top, by screwing that in and out you can adjust

 making a lot more home repair and how-to videos so please subscribe if you'd like

 Hi, I'm Anna Ross Davies and today I'm going to show you how to load and unload your horse

 So Eppie lines Mary up with the horse box ramp so that she's straight, leads her calmly

 on, she doesn't run up the ramp or accelerate onto the lorry, she just walks her calmly

 up and then she clips the head collar to the bungee line which is attaching Mary to the

 She'll push her quarters over and then she'll remove the bridle.

 It's always safer to load a horse in a bridle, particularly in competition car parks where

 Just make sure that the bridle is easy one to remove and then she'll close the partition.

 As you can see this is a really good solidly built partition, it's a nice high partition

 that doesn't cause any problems for the horses at all, they're supported all the way from

 This is a George Smith horse box so it's a very well made and solidly built lorry.

 So Eppie's now going to unload Aramis, as you can see she's already gone into the lorry

 and put the bridle on with the coupling attached to the bit and opened the partition a little

 As you can see Mary is still safely attached to the lorry and so in a moment our helper

 will come and take the partition back and then Eppie will unhook the bungee line once

 her helper is well back and out of the way and then quietly unload Mary.

 So she'll travel her slowly down the ramp in a straight line, just to allow her time

 to look around if she needs to, straight down the ramp and walking away quietly.

 As you can see Mary is wearing some protective kit so that she can travel safely in the lorry.

 She's got four travelling boots on to protect her legs and she has overreach boots on front

 and back to protect her heels in case she stands with her legs too close together on

 She has a rug which wicks sweat away from her in order that she stays cool on the lorry

 and she has a leather head collar which is the safest to travel in as it has a braking

 A nylon head collar doesn't have a braking point and therefore they can be dangerous

 She has a tail bandage and a tail guard on to keep her tail from rubbing.

 My top tips for loading and unloading are, first of all make sure that your handler is

 My next tip is to make sure your horse is also wearing appropriate kit for the journey,

four travelling boots, overreach boots, a suitable rug that will wick away sweat

 And thirdly to make sure that you have prepared your lorry in advance so you already have

 the partitions open, you know how to open and close the partitions easily and smoothly

 and that you have a bungee line or a chain already attached to the lorry to clip the

 Today is Supernatural Day and I'm going to teach you how to make one of my favorite tibbles,

 Now, this recipe is actually one of my favorite drinks from the website, so it is on there,

 and I'll put all the details in the description box so you can get the correct measurements.

 Now, the recipe calls for ginger syrup, so all I did was I blitzed up some fresh ginger with the skin off

 I boiled it up with some sugar until it kind of reduced and made a bit of a nice, thick, sweet syrup.

 So I hope you all enjoy this recipe and thank you very much for watching.

 If you haven't hit subscribe already, then I actually do weekly recipes which will get sent straight to your inbox.

 And if you want any more vampire recipes, please do comment and let me know.

 In another video, I showed you how to make Peking duck by taking a whole duck and suspending it from the ceiling in front of a fan,

 In this video, I'm gonna make crispy aromatic duck which is different.

 I've got 3 star anise, 2 sticks of cinnamon which I've broken up,

 If there are any left in, just pull them out with your fingers.

 you can add either some rice wine, Chinese rice wine or some dry sherry.

 which has a beautiful aniseed flavour which complements these spices really well.

 I'm gonna cover this and put this in the fridge to marinate for about 4 to 6 hours.

 This has been marinating for 6 or 7 hours and it smells amazing.

 When the water comes to the boil and you can see steam escaping,

 Make sure you top up the water level about every half an hour with boiling water.

 To make the duck crispy, I've put them skin-side down in the basket of my deep-fat fryer

 and I'm gonna deep-fry them at 180 degrees Celsius for about 6 minutes.

 Hello everyone, I'm going to show you a short beginner exercise for pointe work.

 And I'm going to show you this exercise first of all in soft points.

 And these are soft points that I made myself from old pointe shoes.

 I took out the shank of the shoe and I think they can definitely be softer here.

 The box can definitely be softer, so I'm going to use a towel and a hammer to make the box even softer.

 I think it's still too hard, but that doesn't matter right now.

 And ask your teacher if you are allowed to wear soft points in class.

 And also ask your teacher for his or her opinion about soft points.

 Okay, so it's very important in this exercise that you go up on releve fast.

 And on pointe, the weight of the body is not only on your big toe, but also on your second and third toe.

 Because it's definitely too straining for your big toe if your whole body weight is just on the big toe.

 And keep your center tight, your legs very turned out from your hip.

 Okay, if you think you understood this exercise, you can go on.

 Growing up in India, my mom always made peas and potatoes with spinach or fenugreek leaves.

To make this dish you will need 5 medium sized potatoes, a cup of frozen

 peas, 1 tsp cumin seeds, 1 1⁄2 tsp coriander powder, 1 tsp oil, 1⁄8 to 1⁄4 tsp black

 pepper, 1⁄2 tsp garam masala, 1⁄4 to 3⁄4 tsp Indian red chili pepper or cayenne pepper,

 1⁄2 tsp turmeric powder, salt to taste, lemon juice to taste and about a bunch of

For the equipment you will need a pan with a lid, steamer, a spoon, knife, cutting

 Remove the hard stems from the leaves and then gather the leaves together and cut them

 Boil the water in the steamer basket and then add the potatoes.

 skillet is smoking go ahead and add your cumin seeds and quickly add potatoes.

 stick add a little bit more oil or I am going to add some water.

 Cook the potatoes for 5 to 7 minutes and if they start to burn reduce the heat to medium low.

 Cook for about 2 to 3 minutes and you could eat this just like this.

 Now add kale, 1 tablespoon of water and cook until the greens are done, about 5 to 10 minutes.

 I like my greens with a little bit of lemon squeezed on it so if you like it you could add it.

 We are serving it with some spicy quinoa and a side of cantaloupe.

 While holding the upper edge with both hands, place it onto the ground or in its entire length on an appropriate setup.

 Starting at the upper edge of the cloth, gather the over length of the material in the back of your baby's neck.

 Starting at the lower edge, gather the over length of material in the hollows of your baby's knees.

 Hold the lower edge to the left and right of your baby so that you can reach upwards to the baby's ears with the material.

 Gather the entire length of material on both sides in your hands.

 Now take both ends of material in your left hand and check that there are no twists.

 Reach with the right hand, palm facing upward and forefinger in the direction of the baby's face between the sling.

 The second sling should come to rest between the remaining three fingers and the forefinger.

 Tighten both ends of material in phases so that the sling individually fits your baby's back.

 Make particularly sure that the lower edge of the sling runs tightly in the hollows of the baby's knees since this will hold your baby later.

 Place both ends of material on the left side of your baby's body and with the left hand check whether your baby's knees are applied in accordance with the straddle tuck position.

 Lift your baby onto the left forearm with the right hand and if necessary stand up.

 Place your baby with feet forward over your right shoulder and with the left hand behind your back reach for the feet.

 Guide your baby downward between the shoulder blades and while doing so with the forefinger of the right hand allow the two separated slings to slip slightly.

 Do not let go of your baby under any circumstances and secure it with your left hand on the back.

 Dip with your head through the emerging gaps of the two slings so that one comes to rest on your left shoulder and one comes to rest on your right shoulder.

 Pull the two ends of material tightly and thus keep it under tension.

 Reach each end of material from the inside with the thumb downward and the inside of the palm facing outward.

 Guide this sling outwardly and forward again underneath your arm.

 It is important that you hold the cloth tightly so that your baby cannot fall out.

 Fasten the two ends of the cloth in front of your breast with a simple knot.

 Tuck the right sling between your legs and spread out the left.

 Take this edge of cloth at the upper edge and with the left hand guide it to the rear around the body in order to take it with the right hand and to pull it over the left shoulder like a jacket.

 Tighten the sling at the height of the hollows of your baby's knees in order to generate consistent tension and guide it below the right leg and forward towards your body.

 Now fasten the sling between your legs and proceed in reverse order with the other side.

 Spread out the right end of material and clasp the inner edge with your right hand.

 Take this edge of cloth as the upper edge and with the right hand guide it to the rear around the body in order to take it over there with the left hand and to pull it over the right shoulder like a jacket.

 Tighten the sling at the height of the hollows of your baby's knees in order to generate consistent tension and guide it below the left leg and forward towards your body.

 Fasten the two slings in front of your body with a double knot.

 Once again, check whether everything is pleasantly fastened for both of you and there are no twists because this can cause tender spots.

 Your baby is now sitting with a round back in the recommended straddle tuck position on your back.

 In order to take the cloth off, open the knots in front of your stomach and take it off by leaning your body so far forward that you only have the simple knot tied in front of your breast.

 Reach this knot with one hand in order to pull your baby forward under the shoulder around your own back.

 Afterwards, shove the sling running around your baby downward until your baby's feet are exposed.

 If your baby has fallen asleep, bend your upper body forward, lay your baby down and cover it if necessary.

 Only now turn the entire sling forward in order to open the knot and to take it off completely.

 Well when I use it for rabbits I usually make another loop on this side.

 Remember, any time you work on an appliance, make sure it's unplugged or the circuit breakers

 In this video, we're going to show you how to change out the Whirlpool refrigerator ice

 If not, you can click on the link below or get it at AppliancePartsPros.com.

 When you open up the package, you're going to get a new ice dispenser motor and a pack

 The main reason you'd be changing out the ice dispenser motor is if the motor shorted

 out or something in the gearbox is damaged, and both of these things would prevent the

 Now that we have the freezer door open, we have to get access to the part.

 We're going to lift this door up and slide it out of the way, and then we're going to

 remove the ice bucket, which all you have to do is pull it out a little bit and then

 In order to get this panel out and get access to the parts, we have to take out the four

 Once you have the four screws out, we can lift it out and set it down onto the shelf.

 Then we have to take a flathead screwdriver, release the wire harness clip, and pull the

 Once that's disconnected, you can pull the assembly out of the freezer.

 In order to get the dispenser motor out, we have to disconnect the grounding wire, and

 You can use a small flathead screwdriver to help pop them off if they're tight.

 Then the double white one is down at the bottom by the light bulb, just so you remember

 Then we need to turn the part over so we can remove the screws that actually hold it in.

 This is a 7-16 socket, and it's reverse threads, so you actually have to go clockwise to take

 You're going to have to take a needle nose pliers and grab the shaft to hold it in place

 Once you have it held in place, we can take off the auger drive.

 Now that we have that out of the way, we can take out the four screws that hold it

 Here's the old ice dispenser motor next to the new ice dispenser motor.

 You'll notice when you get the motor that it doesn't have any threads in the holes.

 Whirlpool does this quite a bit on their timers and on other parts.

 They actually give you a new set of screws, which are, as you drive them in, they will

 So as you're driving the screws in, you may feel a little bit of resistance, but you should

 While we hold it from underneath, we're going to line up the holes and get the screws started.

 Once you have them all in and started, then you can tighten them all down.

 Now that we have the new motor mounted, we can go ahead and hook up the connections.

 We have the grounding wire, and we have the blue wire up by the solenoid, and the white

 Now that we have all the wires reconnected, we can turn it over and reconnect the drive.

 Then to tighten it up, all you have to do is grab the shaft again with your needle nose.

 Remember it's left-hand thread, so you're going to have to go counter-clockwise to tighten

 Now that we have the part installed, we can put this assembly back inside the freezer.

 To put the assembly back in, we have to slide it back into the freezer and set it down.

 Before we can put the mounting screws in, we have to reconnect the wire harness, which

 Then we can lift the assembly up onto the mounting pegs and put the screws back in.

 Now that we have the assembly mounted back in the freezer, we can slide the ice bin back

 in, which all you have to do is set it on the rails and slide it into place.

 Now that you're done repairing your refrigerator, you can plug it back in, make sure that it

 starts to cool off, and that the temperatures return to normal.

 Thanks for joining us for another successful repair brought to you by AppliancePartsPros.com.

 Check out our other repair videos on our site, Facebook, and YouTube.

 In this video you will learn to make a six petal balloon flower using three 260 balloons.

 You will need three 260 balloons, one for the stem and two for the petals.

 your other hand making sure to pinch down on the knot in the nozzle.

Tie the nozzle and the uninflated portion of the balloon together.

 Join the two balloons you are using for the petals by centering one over the other and

 sliding each petal of the top balloon down between the petals of the bottom balloon making

 Now it is time to add the balloon you will be using as the stem.

 center of the petals on one side and holding the tulip twist in place stretch the balloon

 along the center of the petals until the balloon continues from the center of the other side.

 twists stick out from the sides while the rest of the balloon forms a straight line.

 And that is how to make a six petal balloon flower using three 260 balloons.

 It really doesn't matter if some of the skin remains on the nut.

 And now something of a surprise item perhaps in a sweet, pepper.

 White pepper appeared in even the earliest recipes for panforte

 Plus, panforte keeps extremely well as long as your family and friends

 Caster sugar is put in a saucepan along with a little butter and some honey.

 I'm using Australian red gum honey, and this is all cooked up together

 It's a good idea to use a sugar thermometer to check the temperature.

 if you're doing much confectionery work, and they're not expensive.

 If you don't have a thermometer, you can tell when the soft ball stage is reached

 by taking a little of the mixture out and dropping it into cold water.

 When it's cooled, it should be able to be formed into a small soft ball,

 When the mixture has reached the right stage, some deft handiwork is required.

 This requires a bit of strength because the mixture will want to solidify.

 It makes it easier to flatten if you use a spoon dipped in a little water.

 Originally from Siena in Italy, and now from Consuming Passions.

 She works around the corner and one day she was like, you gotta come try this

 It's just this perfect pairing of this kind of braised sort of tofu.

 It's kind of got a sauciness to it and the bread kind of soaks that up.

 And then they give it some more spice with tons of cracked pepper over the top,

 which I've never really had before, but it just adds a little more to it.

 And I get it with a little extra mayo and it's just like, for me,

 Totally makes sense now, but the little subtleties that make something great.

 Once you smell the fragrance of the lemongrass, it's just right.

 I've just gotten the mail today, well it gives it away there on the package, a Simadaptor

 I'm just going to get everything out and I'll tell you guys what this is.

 Right, so this pretty much will convert any normal Sim, or a MiniSim to be exact, into

 Pretty much how the device works is laid out here, as you can see.

 And of course I've got some mini adapters to convert them back into, obviously, normal

 Basically, all you need to do is stick the Sim at the back here, directly in, and it

 So, it's a neat little device, costs, you know, about $10 including the adapters.

 And, yeah, they actually are a really good device to have, for sure guys.

 So, I'm going to show you guys how to actually use one of these, obviously, in a sec.

 Right, stick that stuff back in there, because I might need it if I decide to go on the Vodafone network.

 But, we do have, obviously, our adapters here, in case we ever needed to.

 Instead, I'm going to put my newly made Vodafone MicroSim, using the MicroSim cutter.

 Get yourself one of those, if you want to have a perfect MicroSim.

 attach the splitter to the one-inch dump valve, being careful not to over tighten.

 hose above the water level in the tank will cause the flow to stop.

 happens, simply lower the end of the hose to re-establish the flow of water.

 ounce water bottles, or enough to fill over 3,000 cups with 5 ounces of water.

 It's recommended to use 7 to 9 ounce cups and fill them about half full.

 can hold approximately 1,000 cups when stacked three levels high.

With both hoses operating, it takes 8 to 10 minutes to fill 1,000

 gets below 1 third full, notify your captain to determine if a refill is

 Hey everyone and welcome to part 3 of how to make cozy sacks and cuddle cups.

 Part 1 and part 2, the links will be down in the description box.

 Part 3 is going to be about how to make a cuddle cup out of a cozy sack.

 You can either buy them or you can learn how to make them from part 1 and part 2.

 First I'm going to show you how to make one from the cozy sacks with batting and then without.

 So, you're going to take your cozy sack, right here, open it up,

We're going to be tucking them under later, but right now, don't worry about that.

 And I'm just going to be using another cozy sack right now, but it's basically the same thing.

 So what you're going to do is fold these two corners in at the edges, and then fold these two corners in.

 You're going to fold this triangle in, and then you're going to take this tip and also fold it in.

 So now turn it over, bring your cuddle cup back, and this edge and this edge is where these edges get tucked in

 And the only reason you're adding a hand-sized towel in there is because this can provide some support

 You can either leave these edges out or you can tuck them under.

 Okay, so that was how you made it with a cozy sack with batting.

 You can buy the cozy sack and then automatically have your own cuddle cup too.

 Mushroom gravy tastes great on mashed potatoes, roasted vegetables, on your main course, and

 You'll need a large saucepan and a mixing spoon, and a glass with a fork, and about

 These are portabellas, 1 cup of diced onion, 2 teaspoons of tamari soy sauce, 1 quarter

 cup of whole wheat flour, about 2 teaspoons of spices, this is a mix of basil, parsley,

 We're going to be cooking the mushrooms and onions in water, and you may need a little

 Add about 2 tablespoons of water to your pan, turn it on to medium-high heat, and then we'll

 While those cook down, we're going to mix the flour with the vegetable stock.

 It keeps it from being really lumpy, so I put all the flour into a glass.

 I'm going to add about half of the vegetable stock as I stir with the fork.

 I make sure I get all the flour mixed into that vegetable stock, and when I add it into

 When they've cooked down and most of the liquid is done, it's time to add the flour mixture.

 When it comes to a boil, that will be as thick as it will get, and if it's too thick for

 So if you want to increase your accuracy or ability to shoot your bow rig better, whether

 you're an archer or bow hunter, you've got to make yourself a strong core.

 These movements are a little bit off the wall, you won't quite see them in a normal gym,

 They're going to help stabilize your midline, make you shoot from a more rigid platform

 along your spine, and I guarantee your accuracy will improve and you'll be a better athlete,

 You're going to lay on the ground, you might have to take your shoes off, but you're going

 Bring your knees towards your chest, keep your arms straight, do a full set up, lift

 the dowel around your feet, extend your legs all the way back out, then bring your legs

 back into your chest, get the dowel back out towards the starting position.

 This cranks your entire rectus abdominis as well as some other core stabilizers and it's

 GHD's put a lot of torque on the abs, but they do work really well.

 Have your knees flexed, hold a strong natural S curve in your spine as you descend down

 Once your hands touch the ground or you feel like you've gone down as far as your ability

 will allow, drive by flexing your knees using your quads and your abs hip flexors and come

 You'll see that I'm using a kip, which is basically a gymnastic way to get up on a bar.

 I'm using my hamstrings, my butt, my lower back and my core as I fire up and then I'm

 using mainly rectus abdominis, abs and hip flexors to get my legs to the finishing position.

 Once you become proficient at toes to bar, you'll be able to string several reps together.

 A lot of stabilizers in the shoulders and the trunk as well as your hip flexors and your abs.

 Don't be surprised if you can't hold this movement for much more than a couple seconds.

 Work on this throughout the week and you will probably increase your duration to maybe upwards

 This movement requires a ton of stability as well as isometric strength throughout the upper body.

 To do weighted sit ups properly, make sure that your hips are as close to your butt as possible

 and that you have some dumbbells or some plates anchored to your feet down.

 As you sit up, keep your eyes on the plate the whole time and keep your arms covering up your ears.

 This puts a lot of torque on the abs and creates kind of a third class lever and this will make your abs stronger.

 When tonguing a reed, once again it's a hard thing to see because you can't see the inside

 of your mouth, but I'm going to tell you a few things about tonguing.

 And when that happens, you want to keep the air really moving and just move the tip of

 If you get too far back in your tongue, you'll hear a real thugging sound or you will not

 be able to tongue quickly because the tongue can't move as fast.

 I'll try to do that, but I'm not quite sure I can get a thuggy sound.

 You can also see how it makes the reed jump around and you don't want that to happen.

 You have to have, and when you're first starting, you want to continue to try over and over

 to get the same sound, the same quality, without cracking the sound and without tonguing too

 So a great exercise is just to finger certain notes and tongue them for four times in a

 Try a different note and things like that and get that consistency in air, the consistency

 When you're tonguing, you should never put the tongue and stop the air by putting it

 The tongue only touches the reed to allow the air to stop and then continue on.

 So if you think about your air as being maybe a closed line and your tongue as being the

 closed pins, they just sort of hang on the top of the line, but the line is always continuously

 If you think about turning the water on, your air should be the pressure of your air

 and continue moving as in that water inside the hose and then your tongue is just someone

 So the water continues to flow through and that pressure continues and then just jumping

 on the hose is your tongue lightly touching the tip of the reed to create the articulation.

 Another way you can try to see if you're doing that is by just saying it without your

 As you can see, you can hear the air continue all the way through and it doesn't stop.

 A great way, the tip of the reed and the tip of the tongue again, is if saying a two.

 There's different ways that you can think and use da's for different articulations down

 But for now, by saying a nice two, that will get the tip of the tongue to the tip of the

 When placing the reed on your tongue, you want to make sure the tip of your tongue is

Today on the show we will be making one of my Southern Holiday favorites.

 We are going to start this recipe by mixing together almond milk and ground flaxseed.

 But it is just going to make a custardy, thick, kind of yolky, kind of batter.

 Next in a medium sized bowl, we are going to whisk together our dry ingredients.

 I am using whole wheat flour, cornmeal, baking powder, salt, and raw sugar.

 Give that a good whisk before adding in your other ingredients.

 We have the kernels from one ear of corn, a little bit of onions, and vegan butter.

 Give that a good stir until everything is evenly coated in butter and in flour.

 Our last step is to add the wet ingredients to the dry ingredients.

 Stir all together until everything is evenly moistened and then pour it into a casserole dish.

 You want to bake this in a preheated oven at 350 degrees F for about 50 minutes.

 When it is done, you should be able to stick a toothpick in the center and pull it out clean.

 it is like a bread, but you have to eat it with a spoon because it is just so wonderful and melty and gooey.

The only thing is, I left out all the animal products, which is fine.

 I am totally used to that and it really wasn't a problem, but I used whole wheat flour.

 I am really not a fan of whole wheat flour, but I try to use it and our old recipe definitely didn't have whole wheat flour in it.

 Whole wheat flour kind of gives everything this branier taste, this wheatier taste.

 It is a really hearty wheat flavor that comes along with using whole wheat flour, but once you are used to that,

 and I am trying to get my taste buds accustomed to eating whole wheat flour, it is really delicious.

 It is really nothing wrong with it, but if I had to point out one thing, that would be it.

 And I would probably be eating this whole little casserole dish all by myself, because it is not the holidays just yet.

 Hello YouTube, CJNAW here and I just came at you guys because as you guys can see I

 put in yarn braids and I just finished uploading my natural hair journey one year picture slideshow

 she actually has locks and so I thought it was a pretty cool updo and I wore it like

 this to church today so I'm going to do a quick tutorial on how to do that style.

 So the first step is to section off a big chunk in the front, that's what I did and

 second strand, like I said check out bronzegoddess01, she did a better job.

So it's like so, and if I did a better job in the back you could wear this as a style

And next you're going to take the sections that are pinned, you're going to do like an

 I have a few strands that don't want to stay, you just take the next strand and you're going

 to take the next bobby pin and you can put bobby pins under and feel for the strands

 This was the first style that I really did with my yarn braids.

 To me it looks weird because in certain lights it doesn't look black because you know no

 Hello everyone, this is Briana Rutter, author of one of my most popular books, The Natural

 And for these videos, I answer the questions you all send me via email.

 So if any of you have any questions you would like for me to answer, be sure to check out

 So now we're going to get right on into the video and this video is because of an email

 Floretta emailed me because she said she just heard of a new hair term called oil rinsing.

 She's not sure what it is, what it does to the hair and how she could even incorporate

 So Floretta, thank you for your email and I'm going to tell you what it is and describe

 to you some steps that you can take to start incorporating it into keeping your hair healthy

 So the very first thing that I'm going to state is that oil rinsing is very similar

 And for those of you who don't know what the LOC method is, it's just a way of layering

 products onto your hair to keep your hair moisturized for a longer period of time.

 So for the LOC, L stands for liquid, O stands for oil, and C stands for cream.

 But when you are oil rinsing your hair, what you're doing is using the L and the O and

 So when doing oil rinsing, you simply want to make sure you have freshly washed hair

 and then you use oil, whatever oil of choice that you like to use as a sealant, and you're

 going to run it through your hair and then after that you rinse it out.

 So that way you can maintain more moisturized hair for a longer period of time.

 This is extremely helpful for people who suffer with hard hair that just feels really

 So one of the tips that I'm going to share when you are deciding to oil rinse with your

 hair is that you first want to make sure that your hair is very clean.

 So if you already use curl-friendly products, water-soluble silicones, or any other ingredients

 that can easily be rinsed out with water, you don't have to worry about stripping anything

 But if you use hair products that are filled with silicones or that are petroleum-based,

 The only reason why anyone with curly hair or natural hair, even relaxed hair, should

 So if you're using products that aren't easily rinsed with water alone, you have to use a

 sulfate product to fully cleanse your hair of any ingredients that can cause buildup.

 So after you clean or shampoo your hair with a sulfate shampoo, your hair is now squeaky

 And this is the perfect hair to start with when you want to begin oil rinsing.

 You want to choose an oil that's already liquidy so it's very easy to apply its consistency

 So anything from almond oil, coconut oil, jojoba oil, grapeseed oil, olive oil, any

 oil that's already at a more liquidy or watery type of consistency is the best oil to use

 So then the next thing you want to do after you have freshly washed hair and you have

 It doesn't have to be dripping wet but it should be extremely damp right before it's

 You're going to apply a good amount of oil onto your hands, rub your hands together,

 It's best to make sure to focus on the ends since the ends is the driest part of our hair

 So after you rub all of your oil all over your hair, you're going to leave it on for

 This is going to allow for the oil to further penetrate inside of your hair so that way

 your hair can be more moisturized and you can actually get the effects of what you want

 So then after that, the last thing you're going to do is you're going to rinse the oil

 Now you're not going to rinse out all of the oil because it's going to be lubricated all

 But the reason why you have to go back and rinse the oil out so that you don't have too

 This is a process that I only recommend if you suffer with damaged hair or extremely

 And an extra benefit to incorporate as well with oil rinsing is that when you do go to

 rinse the oil off of your hair that's been sitting for 10 minutes, you can apply conditioner

 So if you want really soft hair, apply conditioner on top of your oil and then rinse out.

 And because you've already applied oil to your hair and you don't have to apply after

 And in most cases, you don't even need to apply a cream as well.

 So Floretta, that is the whole breakdown of what oil rinsing is, what it does to the hair,

 and the process that you can do to start incorporating into your regimen if needed.

 So thank you for your email and also thank you all for watching this video.

 If you want to know any more information that I've mentioned, make sure to check out the

 Hi, I'm here with my friends at Allfeetcrochet.com and today I'm going to be showing you how

 This one has 4 pockets that I made but you can make it as long as you want.

 So I guess you can sew on a button when you're done but I just left it like this.

 You should have a total of 9 double crochets after you have double crocheted in the next

 Then yarn over and at the top of a single crochet there are 2 loops.

 Once you are at the end of the row you should have a total of 20 double crochets that have

 Now reverse the work and double crochet in the next 20 free loops.

 You are now going to line up all the double crochets and single crochet them together.

 And find the next double crochet which is on the opposite side.

 Once you are done single crocheting the double crochets together, it should look like this.

 Now turn the work and single crochet in each single crochet across.

 So once you have done single crocheting, you are now going to double crochet in the next

 So to do that, yarn over, go into the double crochet, yarn over, pull up a loop.

 So if you flip the work over, there should be a pocket for you to hold your hook.

 And to make more pockets, just repeat rows 2 and 3 for rows 4 and up.

 And as you can see, there are 4 pockets to put your crochet hooks in, which I have already

 So I hope you enjoyed this tutorial, and please visit AllFreeCrochet.com for hundreds

 And what most people don't know is that you can actually eat raw corn right off the cob.

 You know, raw corn, that's something that I've been doing for years.

 So whenever I buy fresh sweet corn, I always would nibble into one of the ears.

 When it's fresh and it's raw, it's so much sweeter and so much crisper than when it's cooked.

 Yeah, now I love taking this and eating it just right off the cob.

 But whenever you're cutting it off the cob, you want to try to get it as close to the cob as possible

 And then you're going to let this sit while we prepare our greens,

 And now we're going to take our salad and just put it right on top.

 Oh, I love this salad, especially with some of this avocado dressing right on top.

 You know, there are so many different varieties of salads that you can have.

 You're not just limited to, like, a leaf lettuce salad with some vegetables in it.

 So we prepared a few others just to give you an idea of the spectrum that you can have in salads.

 One of the ones that I made earlier today was a green bean marinated salad,

 And then I put in a special dressing and let it marinate for an hour so that all the flavors combine.

 This salad here can be found in the grains and salads section of Rhonda's recipe book.

 And all of this is couscous that's been cooked in some spices like nutmeg and curry.

 And we took some vegetables that we found in the refrigerator, just about anything.

 There's carrots, red bell pepper, green onion, broccoli, and cauliflower in it.

 And, you know, for those who have never had couscous, many people probably don't realize that couscous is basically a pasta that's been diced up very fine.

 And it cooks really quick, like 5 to 10 minutes, and it's ready.

 One of the other things about this salad is that you can make a salad out of any produce that you have in your refrigerator.

 And one of the things to be successful on this diet is to keep your refrigerator full of fresh produce.

 We go two or three times a week down to our local produce stand.

 Take your favorite vegetables, dice them up into small bite-sized bits, use your favorite dressing.

 It's something that you can throw a meal together in less than 10 minutes.

 These are just lentils that have been cooked in some taco seasoning.

 And we have some fresh tomatoes, some guacamole on top, and around it we have some blue corn chips.

 These are just fabulous for those nights where you want that Mexican feeling.

 I like to take salsa and put it on top rather than any other dressing.

 You know, the salsa, too, a little later in the program we're going to make a really fast salsa.

 That's another thing that you can put together in less than 5 minutes.

 One of the things about eating a diet like this is there are a lot of choices that are simple to make.

 You have a choice in what you do every day, and you don't have to spend a lot of time at it.

 Battle ropes are a great tool to get an aerobic and anaerobic workout all in one.

 We're going to be working on muscular endurance, cardiovascular strength, working multiple muscle groups all at once,

 We compiled five of our favorite exercises compiled in one workout to work the entire body.

 In order to perform this workout, you're going to want to pick some battle ropes up.

 You either buy them or you can do like we did and just build it yourself.

 Once you have that battle rope in hand, you're going to want to wrap it around a tree or a pole,

 anything stable enough to withstand a nice, intense battle rope workout.

 First on the list is going to be the battle rope jumping jacks.

 You're going to start with feet together and hands at your side,

 What you're going to do is jump up, pulling the feet apart and the hands over the head at once here,

 So what you want to do to perform this exercise is have your feet a little bit wider than shoulder width.

 You're going to be gripping the rope nice and tight with those hands,

 and you're going to have the arms straight out in front of you.

 and then you're going to sit back and squat down and slam that rope down as hard as you can.

 What you want to do is you're going to work the hips, you're going to work the legs,

 you're going to work the core, you're going to work the shoulders.

 Visualize you're the Hulk or Thor, slamming the ground as hard as you can,

 And no, this isn't a sequel to a cheesy Samuel L. Jackson movie.

 This is a great exercise to build those shoulders, chest, core, and this is how you do it.

 and you'll be having your arms parallel to the floor or ground.

 and then clapping them inward as fast as you can, and rep it out.

 So what's going to happen is it's going to look like snakes on the ground.

 It's going to be a highly endurance exercise for those shoulders.

 Exercise number four on the list is going to be the alternating wave reverse lunge.

 So what you want to do is go ahead and stand with feet just shoulder width apart,

 So bring one foot back and squat down into the reverse lunge position

 Now you're not going to be counting the repetitions in your arm.

 So you want to focus on getting 10 reverse lunges each leg, 20 reps total.

 So what you want to do is go and sit on the ground or the floor.

 Your knees are going to be bent and you're going to be leaning back

 Your elbows are going to be slightly bent and you're going to start at one side.

 and you're going to repeat the process for three sets of 30 reps total.

 You're going to be working the transverse abdominus and also the shoulders.

 We've included our top five favorite exercises that work the complete body.

 The good thing about the battle ropes is you can take them anywhere,

 to show you how to build your own battle ropes for really cheap

 Hello everybody and welcome to the Mark Thomas Home Builder Most Incredible Home and Garden

 Ok, I'm reviewing one of my favorite gadgets for cutting firewood.

 And after you drop a tree like this and take the limbs off and you're ready to start cutting

 it up, sometimes it's a little tricky depending on the thickness of the wood.

 Sometimes you get a really thick piece and trying to look at it and gauge like every

 16 inches or 18 inches, however long you like to cut your firewood, it can be a little tricky

 sometimes and a real quick and easy way is the mingo marker here.

 And what I prefer using is the green color, it's the upside down marking spray paint.

 And what I recommend doing is shaking it really good, you can, and then spraying it upward

 And you just drop it in there, feed it through the hole, and then what I do is, there's a

 tightening nut here actually when you're not using the wheel to keep it from accidentally

 You can set it so you can start right on the end and just wheel it all the way down

 your log and it'll make, this wheel I have is an 18 inch wheel, the mingo marker came

 with a 16 inch wheel but I prefer cutting 18 inch firewood and they do offer different

 So I'll show you, every 18 inches we'll check out and see if it puts a little green spray

 Okay, just kind of a faint green line and I'll just take my tape measure, well it's

 like a yardstick I guess, here's 18 inches and right center to center, right on, 18 inches.

 So that one, that one, that one, that one, all the way down, exactly 18 inches on center.

 It's very quick, one thing you can do when you're cutting if you don't want to have any

 paint on your firewood, you can just braze that green line, that green dot, it's a pretty

 small dot, you can just nick that off, the chain will quickly blast it away.

 So my recommendation is I give it 5 out of 5 stars, it's a very handy gadget for the

 firewood, this is my second year owning it and it's been in the back of my truck, I've

 got a toolbox in the back of my truck and it's kind of shuffled around with a few other

 As long as you lock it, that way the wheel doesn't accidentally turn and start spraying

 It's a great product and thanks for watching, have a great day.

 Mix white rice with sakura denbu until the rice turns an even pink color.

 Lay the seaweed on top of the rolling mat and remove the pink rice from the mold.

 For better definition, press the middle section of both sides of the seaweed down.

 Lay each slice into the little space created on the rice for the eyes.

 Scoop some yellow rice into the little space created in the center of the white rice to make the nose.

 Spread some white rice evenly over the konnyaku and yellow rice to fill up about half of the height of the mold.

 Lay the pink sushi rice roll into the little space on the side.

 Scoop more rice into the mold until there is enough rice to peek out from the top of the mold.

 With the help of the rolling mat, wrap the rice with the seaweed.

 Today, Lydia is here to help us make a Goya family classic, roast turkey.

I'm hosting a holiday dinner this year, and I'm having my in-laws, a couple of other relatives,

 and I wanted to do something with a little Latin twist to it since they are Hispanic.

 The secret to this recipe is a very simple overnight marinade that's so easy,

It's been thawed and rinsed and then patted dry with paper towels so it's ready to go.

 And I'm also going to add a very special seasoning blend called Sazon Goya with Coriander and Anado.

 This seasoning blend has been at the heart of Latino cooking for decades,

 and it adds incredible flavor and lots of great color to so many different Latin dishes,

 Okay, let's cover it with plastic wrap, and then we're going to put it in the refrigerator to marinate for 24 hours.

 Or if you're looking for something different, this is the Goya stuffing, and it's so good.

It's been marinated for 24 hours, and then I put it on a rack inside of a roasting pan so it's ready to get stuffed.

 I'm going to cross the legs at the ankles, and if you can help me tie a really tight knot.

 And then two cups of chicken broth go into the bottom of the pan.

 Now into the oven for two and a half to three hours, and we're going to baste the turkey every 30 minutes.

 Kari, I have a really hard time knowing when the turkey's done.

 You just insert it into the thigh without touching the bone, and when it registers 165 degrees Fahrenheit, the turkey's done.

 Also, if you're stuffing the turkey, you want to make sure that the stuffing reaches 165 degrees as well.

 I've already put the beautiful roast turkey on a platter, and now we're going to tent it with foil, and we're going to let it rest for about 30 minutes.

 So we're going to make the gravy in the pan that we roasted the turkey.

 I'm going to heat it over medium-high heat, bring it to a boil, and then if you could add a quarter cup of flour.

Now, we really want to stir to make sure it's all incorporated and cook it for about a minute or so.

 Okay, now two cups of chicken stock, and we're going to bring it to a boil, whisking the whole time so that it gets rid of any lumps.

 To finish, I suggest that you strain the gravy because this removes any lumps and it makes it look more elegant.

 Well, I hope you enjoy the recipe with your friends and your family.

 In this video we are going to show you how to replace a steering box in a 2002 Chevy

 To get to the step that we are on in this video, please watch our other video on how

 Loosen and remove the nut holding the pitman arm to the steering box.

 You will need to use this tool, a pitman arm puller, to remove it from the steering box.

 Slide the inner shaft using a socket clockwise to remove the pitman arm.

 Remove the three mounting bolts to the steering box located in the driver's side wheel well.

 After removing the mounting bolts, your steering box will be loose.

 We like to compare our new steering box with our old steering box to be sure for a proper

 Install the new steering box to the frame rail, reversing the steps that we have showed

 Also, your fluid might be low caused by removing the power steering lines on your power steering

 Add the appropriate power steering fluid called for in your owner's manual to reach the full

 In today's episode we're going to show you how to do an aspirin face mask.

 Yes, so aspirin face mask is something really easy, cheap, and good for your skin.

 Some of the benefits are when you make an aspirin face mask, it actually breaks down

 into salicylic acid, which actually can be found in a lot of expensive acne products

 The uncoated aspirin works the best, but if you do have coated aspirin it will do the

 We're going to use more than that because we're going to use it on both of our faces.

 So the next step you're going to do is to crush the aspirin with a spoon or like with

 You really don't want to worry about like actually breaking them all the way down.

 I'm going to take this from Josh because he's making a big old mess.

 You're not going to add a whole bunch of water, just like a couple spoonfuls.

 This should basically be the consistency of if you've ever used any kind of face mask

 Okay, so now we're going to do the face mask part, which is you're basically just going

 to apply it all over your face and then you're going to wait five to ten minutes and then

 You're basically just going to be using the face mask and water.

 Alright, so we're going to leave this on for five minutes and then we'll wash it off

 If you haven't already, subscribe to this channel, like us on Facebook, follow us on

 Also leave a comment below and tell us what you want to learn next.

 OK, this video will show you ways to install a natural gas BBQ line if your house has natural

 You should get a qualified gas fitter to do this type of work and follow all local codes

 So what we're going to do, we'll just kind of lay out some of the parts here in the first

 Where my gas line is downstairs, we're going to tap into the line with a 36 inch piece

 So you're going to need some black pipe or the yellow gas tight flexible pipe.

 Depending on the bends you have to go around and so forth, you may be able to use the flexible

 We're just going to use the straight pipe here, 36 inch black steel pipe.

 We're going to tap into the line downstairs, which we'll show in the next video, using

 And then we're going to come outside the house through the stucco and we're going to enter

 So we'll just lay out some of the parts, what we're going to use here.

 We're going to use a variety of fittings once we get outside the house, which I've pre-assembled

 So when we get outside the house, you see I've got a little elbow coming down.

 We've got a ball valve for the outside of the house, an adapter, and then the quick

 So depending on what your application is, you may need to get different angles and different

 You want to have a valve on the outside and again, check your local codes, but probably

 So we're going to tap off again, a line in the house, go outside, and then have our various

 I just assembled this, various black pipe fittings and brass valve and a brass quick

 You want to use either the yellow Teflon tape or a pipe joint compound like this with the

 So it'll say on the back, it'll say that it's for natural gas service.

 Then we're going to seal up the, where it comes through the house, we're just going

 to seal it up with some silicone so it's sealed from the outside.

 Okay, this is the gas line we're going to use to run the barbecue.

 This natural gas line actually is currently running the natural gas fireplace.

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to T here and then we're going to run our

 line back through the flooring here and out the back of the house right through there.

 So that's where the barbecue is going to be, just on the other side of that wall there.

 So again, this is for the barbecue, but we'll never run the barbecue and the fireplace at

 So there should be lots of gas to run one or the other in this half inch gas line.

 Okay, this is the back of the house where the barbecue is going to go.

 So downstairs in the previous video, we drilled some holes and I drilled a small hole straight

 through the outside through the 2x6 and then through the stucco here.

 There might be better bits to use, but we're just going to use one of these and hopefully

 we don't make too much of a mess of the stucco as we drill out.

 This is a 7-8 inch hole, which should be just about perfect to fit a half inch gas line

 You see I drilled holes there and there, coming through to here, which is where we'll

 We're going to use some silicone to seal up that entrance to the outside.

 And hook the barbecue and the fireplace back up and we'll be done.

 We're just getting some silicone up in the hole out to the outside there.

 And then what I did is, where I couldn't get the caulking gun up top, you just kind of

 And that's kind of what I did around the top and around the side there.

 And then button it up, put this ductwork all back together and all the insulation and the

 Sarah's created an amazing stained glass window for the shipping container house.

 I believe I'm the first person ever to install a stained glass window in a shipping container.

 Sarah went to a class where she learned to make a stained glass window.

 The dimensions were chosen to fit neatly on the side of the container.

 After it was brought home it was my turn to build a frame and install it.

 I had some steel box section cut to slightly larger than the dimensions of the window.

 My measurements are with intolerance so I can tack the corners.

 This guarantees that the window fits neatly in the hole and there's no errors.

 I used a piece of wooden board to prevent any damage to the window.

 I need to design something that will hold the glass pane inside the frame.

 I cut it to length and then I drilled holes and riveted the channel in place.

 I cut some villa board which is a similar thickness to the glass panel and this will

 I cut full lengths of packing to go on the inside of the frame.

 I then drilled a 4.5mm hole and used a 5mm tap to take some screws.

 After I'd finished all of the screws, here's the finished product.

 I held the frame in place using a piece of wood and some welders magnets.

 Then I used a permanent marker to draw a line round the outside.

 Then I used a straight edge to mark the cut lines for the exterior.

 I used a thin cutting blade on the angle grinder to cut the window.

 Installing the window is covered in full detail in part 2 of the e-book,

 I used a flapper disc to clean the paint off the areas that I'll weld to the frame.

 And then I set about putting the putty on the inside of the frame.

 I did a terrible job with the putty, so Sarah redid it and it looked much better.

 There are 75 individually crafted pieces of glass making up the window.

 The morning sun casts a beautiful variety of light on the inside of the container.

 Thanks for watching and I'll see you for the next installment of the adventure.

 For more information about the e-books, please visit my website at buildshippingcontainerhouse.com

 These are made from paper, but I reckon they'd be really good out of felt as well.

 Just Google heart template and you should see all sorts of shapes.

 you've got that sort of more normal heart shape, if that makes sense.

 Hey guys, this is Kogi from Kogi.in and this is the Carbon Smart A5.

 These are the specifications, 800 MHz processor, Android 2.3.6, 3.5 inch capacitive multi-touch

 screen, 2 megapixel camera, 1400 mAh battery, Wi-Fi, embedded apps, G-sensors and proximity

 Inside the box, the power charger with USB, the battery, 1420 mAh, the earphone, the call

 The front side, the rear side, the additional back panel, the four touch sensitive buttons,

 the speaker out on the rear side, 2 megapixel camera, this is the 3.5 mm jack, this is the

 The handset has got a curve downwards on the bottom side as well as on the top side.

 To open up the back panel, this is the SIM 1 WCDMA, the SIM 2, the micro SD slot.

 I've inserted my card, the SIM, the battery and the back cover.

 The Carbon Smart logo, the booting process and the phone has started.

 In wireless network, you have the teetering and portable hotspot, USB teetering and Wi-Fi

 In mobile networks, you can choose the SIM 1 or the SIM 2 for the default data connection.

 399 MB RAM, 202 MB internal storage and this is my SD card, the external SD card.

 The phone dialer has got the SIM 1, SIM 2 button, you can directly call using any of

 I've loaded my website, zooming in, you can see there is a slight rendering lag which

 System information, ARM V7 processor, frequency 800 MHz, this is single core, the memory,

 The sensors, gravity sensors and proximity sensor, there is no light sensor.

 This is the 2 megapixel camera, you have these options, auto action night and 4x zoom.

 Hello, welcome back to my kitchen and today I'm going to make a dish in memory

 Today's dish is quail biryani and she loved it and I hope you love it too.

 ginger garlic, bay leaf, cumin seeds, cloves, green cardamom, cinnamon stick,

 to build and as soon as it does I'm going to lower the heat and cook it for

If you don't want to use pressure cooker, in a regular pan it will

 All the water has evaporated now so it's ready for the next step.

 my pan with rice and put food coloring on top of it and then I'm going to

 and in a couple of minutes I'm going to lower the heat and cook it for about 20

 it's going to cook for 20 minutes and you will have the most delicious biryani.

 you for watching my videos and for all my recipes and ingredients please go to

 Hey Shooby Doodlers, it's the 50th anniversary of the Doctor Who this month, so I'm going to show you how to draw a Dalek.

 Hey Shooby Doodlers, I'm going to show you how to draw a Dalek.

 Start with a curve round there, but then stop, don't go all the way round, and put two lines across.

 And then you've got these kind of curves there, and you probably should need another couple there like that in fact.

 And then we've got these little indicators, tell them if they're going left or right.

 Draw two lines like that, and another two lines down there like that.

 And then here is the exterminator, the kind of ray gun electric cattle prod kind of thing.

 And I think when Doctor Who was first broadcast, they never expected it to be so popular.

 And then you want one sticking out at the edge like you have one sticking out there.

 So as you go around they will get, as you come around to the edges,

 So here, and you want them kind of pretty much touching the edge as well.

 So because they're hemispheres, but they're much more squashed.

 And then you're going to want to see the ones from the panel around on the outside.

 And you'll just see kind of little hemispheres sticking out like that.

 Now if you want to do shading in these hemispheres, then it's kind of like that.

 but they will get wider and further and further apart as you go around.

 And you can do the same here, and make them get further and further apart.

 So that we kind of get an impression of sort of three-dimensionalness going on around there.

 And you can make these stand out a little bit by putting a bit of shadow on the sides and underneath like that.

 And here we can again do a little bit of shading, a little bit of hatching I should say, around like that.

 And here on this kind of rubber sink plunger, you can do a bit of shading like that.

 And again we can put a little bit of hatching along the back here.

 We're going to put it on the table, well not on the table, let's put it in the old disused room.

 Which is where most of the old Doctor Who things were filmed, all the outside broadcasts.

 The TV was absolutely useless now, it was holding the aerial up on the balcony.

 And eventually this image appeared of a Dalek in Spanish going...

 Well I hope you enjoyed that, and if you did, go and have a look at my Doctor Who drawings playing list.

 Learn how to draw the TARDIS and Cybermen and things like that.

 Either way, make sure you are subscribed for new drawing videos every Monday and Friday.

 And why not go and visit my website shoe-rain.com just to see what I get up to.

 have an avocado that's starting to look a little nasty but not too bad.

 which I love which is sea salt infused with organic herbs and vegetables.

 actually gonna take probably a couple of the steamed florets and add to this

 press the soup setting which is right here and let it get started.

 Okay my soup is done and you can see the steam coming out of the top.

 gonna add some of the broccoli that I steamed into the blender.

 Just taking off the lid and you can see how green and creamy it really is.

And of course I can't finish this video without doing the taste test.

 probably I'll sprinkle a little bit of the a little bit more cheese on the top.

 success and if you don't like that much broccoli like I said balance it out with

 You can start by making 4 pairs, which is 2 pieces connected together.

 To make the diamond, start with 1 piece, then put 2 pieces on top of it.

 Now you're going to connect the diamonds and the mountains to make a circle.

 Make sure that the bottom piece of the diamond is in line with the bottom piece of the mountain.

 So the bottom piece of the diamond is not in line with the bottom piece of the mountain.

 making sure that the bottom piece lines up with the bottom piece of this.

 Because it's a big base, to prevent curling, you can just make the base in bits.

 I'm going to show you how to cook a super quick, high protein, low carb dinner.

 And what we're going to use is about 100 grams of white boneless, skinless chicken breast,

 I'm just going to heat up the vegetables a little bit because I don't want to kill all the vitamins in them.

 And I'm just going to put this aside so I have the pan preheated.

 So I'm just going to apply a little bit of olive oil spray on it.

 I'm using this extra pan just for a lid so you can see how quickly it's going to cook.

 So as you can see, the chicken is already getting white on the edges.

 Basically when you put a lid on the pan, that preserves the heat and cooks the chicken super fast.

 Another tip on chicken, always make sure to cut it in the middle, see if it's pink.

 Make sure your chicken is well done so you don't get salmonella.

 You're going to have like 25-30 grams of protein and a good serving of broccoli and carrots.

 And for dessert I'll probably have like a cup of sliced melon or a half grapefruit plus a teaspoon of peanut butter.

 For some more information on six pack diet, go to my website, nordafeedenergy.com.

 Hey guys, it's Kylie and today I'm here with my sister Christina.

 Today I'm going to be talking about this product called the Makeup Eraser that I recently got

 and I have been so in love with it and I thought I would share it with you guys.

 Basically it is a cloth that you use to wipe off all your makeup and all you need is water

 to take it off, like you don't need any removers or washes or anything, so it's really easy.

 I've seen people use special effects makeup and it takes off waterproof mascara and eyeliner

 and everything so you don't need to take off your eye makeup separately, it just takes

 It is also all natural and no chemicals and it is machine washable so you can wash it

 This is really awesome because you don't have to use makeup wipes and if you go through

 a lot of makeup wipes, like I do, then you're using a wipe every single day or maybe even

 So this is really good because you can use it so many times and you don't need to keep

 rebuying it because it's just one thing and it is a single price of $19.97.

 So this is what it looks like, it's just a pink cloth and then the two sides do different

 One side removes your makeup and the other side is for exfoliating so it's kind of like

 Since my sister and I like this product so much we are taking this business opportunity

 So we are distributors so if you are interested in buying one after watching this video you

 And if you're interested in becoming a distributor you can message me on Instagram because I

 always check all my Instagram DMs so you can just message me on there and I will kind of

 Since it has two sides you use the side without the tag to take off your makeup and then the

 So now we are both makeup free in just a few seconds and you don't feel that like liquidy

 I use them a lot after cheer competitions because I have like a lot of like blue and

 green eyeshadow and stuff and it like actually burns my eyes because there's so much liquid

 And this, I used this after a cheer competition one time and as you know if you're a competitive

 cheerleader you wear like a lot of makeup and it really took it off very quickly and

 As you can see, the rag has makeup on it when you're done and your face is left with nothing.

 So after we get our starter kit I will be giving away some goodies from the makeup eraser.

 So obviously we are both very impressed with the makeup eraser and I know you guys will

 be too so make sure to check out the link below to go buy yourself one.

 but first you're going to give us a whole bunch of ideas for our Oscar party, including this.

 Well, first of all, with the sunglasses, if you can, a really great thing to set the party off would be to rent a red carpet.

 Have that coming up to the front door, then you have a basket of sunglasses, so right away you've set the mood.

 So people come into the house and you've got the soundtrack from the latest movie going on,

 and then you're going to tease them with all kinds of great appetizers.

 So what we're doing first is smoked salmon, avocado tartare on wonton wrappers.

 Well, even if you can't get a carpet, you can get some red fabric.

 Go to your fabric store and just have that running through the front door.

And if you didn't, if you just get one of those little squares you wipe your feet on,

 just a red one like that for your apartment, it would just be fun.

 In the wintertime, tomatoes are not the most flavorful, and Romas have the lowest amount of water.

 So the avocado, as soon as it gets exposed to air, starts to go brown.

 So if you do this mixture up, then just put a piece of plastic on top of it, totally covering the top, like right on the surface.

 So depending on your heat tolerance, you should always taste the jalapeno before you add it.

 Because depending on the time of year, sometimes they're hotter than others.

 You know a good way to test it too, is you just take one piece and put it under your eyelid.

 Well see, that's why you're here, with all this important information.

 you can either put a little bit of peanut oil in a heavy pan, like a sauté pan,

 This is our friend Leslie Stowe, who's going to be cooking with us all morning.

 Hello, today I am making eggless, low calorie, butterless scones.

 If you want basic 3-ingredient scones, use only flour, heavy cream, and whole milk.

 To make it taste better, I am adding 1 tablespoon of granulated sugar

 And for cheese scones, in a mixing bowl, add in 1 cup of self-rising flour,

 I added more milk to maintain the thickness of the batter with cheese.

 And transfer the scones to a parchment paper lined baking sheet.

 These low-calorie, eggless, butterless, quick mix-and-bake scones

 So find the ingredients and related playlists in the description box below.

 How's it going guys, my name is Ammy Cadigan and today I'm going to teach you how to raw

 So a lot of people, they're trying to raw their bars or any kind of parts on their bike

 and they don't know how and they always end up asking people online.

 So I figured I'd just make this just so that the prevention of those asking the questions.

 This one's called Citrus Strip, I think is how you pronounce it.

 It says it has harsh fumes so generally you do not want to breathe that in.

 A clear coat is basically a shield against rust from your metal.

 But if you like to have the rust then don't put it on obviously, whatever you want.

 I have a big one for big wide areas and then I have a small one for small areas.

 Basically what you're going to do is you're going to get the paint stripper and then you're

 You want to make sure that you don't get it anywhere else but where you want the paint

 If you want to have paint in some places and not in others, go ahead and tape it off.

 But for me, I'm just going to strip the whole bars so I'm just going to spray it.

 Make sure you get it everywhere because if you don't then you're going to have to do

 You don't want to wait too long otherwise the paint stripper will dry up and then it

 So wait about 15-20 minutes so that all the chemicals can break down the paint.

 As you can see the paint is already coming off of my hands so you definitely want to

 wear gloves now because I'm just using this wire brush to loosen up all the paint particles.

 So midway through I realized that it would go a lot faster if I just used a paper towel.

 Normally if it's a company produced product that you haven't painted yet it won't come

 off as easily but if you have painted it yourself or somebody else has then it should come off

 If you'll notice, I don't know if you can even tell, but there's still a little bit

 So the steel wool will give the bars a nice shiny finish and it will get all the remaining

 Okay, so now that you've stripped the paint off your metal it's now time to clear coat

 All you need to do is keep it in a boiling water for about 3-5 minutes.

 Or else you can also follow the instructions given on the packet.

 So you can check over there or I will also link it down below in the description box.

 Then your Basil seeds, then white Rabri and then your Roast Syrup.

 To make the dough, sift together 500g of flour, 1 teaspoon of salt and 2 teaspoons of sugar.

 Add 50g of melted butter and mix for at least another 5 minutes

 Spread the dough onto a work surface and gather it into a ball.

 To make the filling, combine 400g of toasted chopped walnuts, pistachios or almonds.

 Add 200g of powdered sugar, ½ teaspoon of ground cinnamon and a pinch of ground cloves.

 Flour your working surface and roll each ball as thinly as possible.

 Sprinkle the thin sheets with flour and stack them on top of each other.

 Hi there, I'm Austin and I wanted to take a moment to tell you guys a little trick that

 the Traxxas U-joint and trying to separate the spike ball from the unit and then join

 nose pliers and you want to put it in to one side of the U-joint like shown and then you

 down keep your thumb free from this little area because that will pinch the crap out

 grab the other end, you want to feed one end into the side like so.

 focused, one end is here and from there you just want to take your needle nose and again

 insert your needle nose into the same side as the side that you're trying to pinch this

 into and again you just kind of want to do a pinch and wiggle action.

 the hardest part for me while trying to build the Steadicam and I figured since it took

 me like 30 minutes to figure that little trick out that I would share it with you guys and

 Then you add two cups of Cool Whip, which is supposed to be thawed.

 And then we layer a quarter cup of this mixture and two tablespoons of pie filling in each of four stemmed glasses or bowls.

 So we'll get some cherry, some cheese, whatever this is called.

Today I'm going to show you how to play Demons by Imagine Dragons

 I worked at a summer camp this summer and I was like, oh my god America, your music,

Anyway, that and Bloodlines, that was the only thing that was playing on

 going to need 4 chords, C, G, A minor and F. So if you know how to play those chords

So to play a C you're going to put your first finger on the 2nd string 1st fret,

 your middle finger on the 4th string 2nd fret and your ring finger on the 5th string 3rd

Ok so now to get from a C to an A minor all you're going to do is you're just going

Ok so now to play a G you're going to put your first finger on the 5th

 string 2nd fret, your middle finger on the 6th string 3rd fret and then your ring finger

 and your little finger on the 1st and 2nd strings at the 3rd fret.

 G. Ok so now there are 2 ways to play F, you can either play full bar F or mini bar F.

 So to play mini bar F what you're going to do is you're going to bar the 1st and 2nd

 string at the 1st fret with your 1st finger, then you're going to put your middle finger

 on the 3rd string 2nd fret and your ring finger on the 4th string 3rd fret.

Anyway, so then to play full bar F you're going to put your, are you going

 to put your first finger on all the strings at, oh my god it's all just kicking off today

Oh what's going on in the world, that's why I don't look at that later.

 going to bar all the strings at the 1st fret with your 1st finger, you're going to put

 your middle finger on the 3rd string 2nd fret, your ring finger on the 4th string 3rd fret

 and your little finger on the 4th string, sorry, check the boxes around my head, they'll

Then you're going to put your little finger on the 4th string 3rd fret.

 have a C, a G, an A minor and an F. Ok so the best thing about this song is there is

 only one chord pattern and one strumming pattern for the whole thing.

 to do, the chord pattern for the whole way through, you've got a C, a G, an A minor and

 then an F. And the strumming pattern I'm going to teach you sounds like this.

 going to split that strumming pattern into two halves, so the first half you have 3 down

 half of the strumming pattern you've got up, down, down, down, up.

So you mush that all together, you've got down, down, down, down, up, up, down,

 play all of that with the strumming pattern and then I'll try to sing a few words for

It's kind of low and I'm not really sure of the rhythm, but we'll see what happens.

 When the days are cold and the cards are folded and the cities we see are all made of gold

Ok so yeah, that's the whole song, so please comment, please rate, please

 exams, so I should be able to tell you something straight off, and I can't really think of

 But what I've been revising today, it's fascinating, it's electrophysiology.

 where if you take a cell and then you can use all these different techniques to see

 which ions are flowing in and out of the cell through the ion channels by the amount of

So you can use this thing called patch clamp technique, and what

 it is, you've got a glass pipette filled with a certain mixture of solutions inside and

 you put this pipette against the cell and then you run a voltage through it and then

 you'll be able to tell by the currents which ions are flowing in and out of the cell, which

Because what you can do, you can use it with cystic fibrosis, and so

 you can see whether sodium, you can see whether chloride ions are able to get through, I think

 it's like the apical membrane, because with cystic fibrosis, it depends which version

 you've got, but one of the versions, the problem is the chloride channel, which would normally

 allow chloride ions to get from the basolateral membrane through the epithelium into the airway,

 well not into the airway, but kind of like into the, what do they call it, the airway

 actually exist because it gets destroyed, because it's not folded properly and the endoplasmic

 reticulum is like, hell no, you're not built properly, I'm going to destroy you, and it

And yeah, cystic fibrosis, kind of in three seconds, probably wrong as well.

 But yeah, so you're having a nice life, you too, please call it Pleasure, please subscribe

 Let's take a white 260, blow it up, leave a good, I mean, probably about 3-4 inches at the end.

Start out, just make a loop right here, grab the knot and twist around that knot.

 And pull the nozzle end through the loop, that way it will lock into place.

 Next, you're gonna do another loop, pretty much about the same size, maybe a little bit smaller.

 Twist that, and you're gonna actually take that second loop you did, push it into the first one.

Next, we're gonna actually do like a little 1-inch bubble, pretty much.

 Next thing we're gonna do is grab this end right here and just pull it straight down.

We're gonna squeeze that, and that's gonna force the air to come over in this empty part of the balloon and give it a curve.

 So just squeeze it gently and see how it just comes right around there like that?

 Alright, so just give it a little squeeze and see how it just shapes itself right there?

 Alright, if you guys have any questions, feel free to message me or comment on this video.

 doing like collabs or something, I try to reserve my tutorials for Fridays, but since

 last week you got a review of the Naked 3 palette instead of a tutorial, I figured I

 One of you lovely subscribers actually suggested this because I did a whole Milani haul last

 week which I will have linked down below and besides foundation and stuff, which I generally

 only link and never really show in my tutorials anyway, I definitely had all of the tools

 of steps, totally easy, doesn't actually require very many tools at all.

 Eyes pencil in Champagne Toast and this is just such a beautiful shimmery pink color.

 Because these pencils are long wearing and crease proof, I don't need to use a primer

 underneath, but if you do have oilier eyelids, you probably want to put your favorite primer

So I'm putting this along my cheekbones and then I will also be placing

 Then I'm going to use the Shadow Eyes pencil in Winter White to highlight along my brow

 of my brow bone area, blending that in with my finger before placing a little bit in the

 going to use the Shadow Eyes pencil in Brown Deluxe and I am going to place this along

 outer corner as well and then I'm going to blend it out really well with my finger.

 To balance the eyes, I'm also going to sweep this along my lower lash line before putting

 Liquid Eyeliner pen, which I just love, and use this to line my upper lash line.

 start with a thinner line in the inner corner and get a little bit thicker as I work my

I then, of course, I'm going to add just a little bit of a wing and you can make

For mascara, I'm going to use their Runway Lashes Instant Volume Mascara, which

 I've actually been really liking, even though it's not waterproof.

 with my lower lashes so I don't get little dots of mascara along my brow bone.

 of course, I'm going to add a few coats to my top lashes as well.

 going to use their Baked Blush in Rose D'Oro and these blushes are so amazing.

 and back towards my temples since I am not doing any contouring for this look.

 finish the look, I am going to apply my lipstick in Naturally Chic all over my lips.

 bolder lip, I suggest using something like Sangria, which I've been loving a ton lately.

 give it a big thumbs up if you enjoyed the whole one brand tutorial thing and leave a

 comment down below if you want to see me do them again and with suggestions, my goodness,

 notifications when I put up a new video every Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.

 garlic chutney, coriander garlic chutney, dhania garlic chutney, dhania lasun chutney.

 Basically, the main ingredients are dhania, which is green coriander, and garlic.

 going to show you what all goes in there and you can just, you know, give you a little

And the best thing to do is, you know, just go through it, make sure you get

Now this looks like a lot, but when it grinds it's going to go down a lot.

Now depending on which brand of tamarind you get, it's going to be really

And just a little bit of sugar just to balance out that tartness.

 This is a chutney where you really do not need to use any water.

 a little bit of help with water, go ahead and just add as little as possible just to

 And you're going to need to keep pushing it down every once in a while to help it along.

 So we switched over to a different grinder because this grinder grinds really well without

 you can do a little taste test to make sure everything is okay.

 more salt, we had to add a little more tamarind paste to it and it's fantastic now.

 for the last grind, we're going to just add just about a teaspoon of oil so that the green,

 big batch when your cilantro is on sale or you have some chilies on sale.

 batch and put it in ice cube trays and freeze it for a couple of hours and pop them out

It's got the right amount of garlic, the right amount of tartness.

I know we keep mentioning this but on toast or in sandwiches, a real great

 Welcome to Spyder Auto's projector headlight installation guide for the

 ratchet, a Phillips screwdriver, and a flathead screwdriver or panel popper.

 remove the 10 millimeter bolt securing the headlight from the side.

 headlight garnish by pulling it towards the center of the Tacoma.

 Check and make sure that the turn signal socket and side marker socket

 see the Spyder FAQs playlist on the Spyder Auto YouTube channel.

 test the features of your lights before you proceed with reassembly.

 checking the lights, now reinstall the three Phillips head screws.

 reinstall the three plastic retainers securing the fascia under the grille

 bumper, reinstall the four plastic retainers to secure the fascia from

So I'm just making a quick video to show you all different ways to make your

And the first way that's really, really great is to highlight your

 If you have a warmer skin tone, like maybe a yellower skin tone, or if you have darker

 skin, they also make one called Moonbeam that's actually like golden instead of like champagne

So I'm just going to pop a little bit of that on the back of my hand.

 going to dip that in there and kind of buff that onto the brush.

 to use liquid products with powder foundation or powder products underneath because it just

 kind of disperses the liquid and keeps it from causing the powder to clump.

 like your upper lip is sticking out further and catching the light.

 you can do on the opposite end of the contouring spectrum is you can take a bronzer.

 it look like your lower lip is casting a shadow over your chin so it makes it look like your

Then the next thing is you can take a lip liner that's a few shades,

 look like I had some sort of horrible botched plastic surgery so I don't.

And then you want to take, you want to shade in the outer corners of your lips

 want to use something that's like slightly lighter and slightly pinker than your lip

 over top of this and go all the way to the edge of my lips with the lipstick and like

 And then you can just take your finger and blend in your lip liner.

Yeah that was really popular like around Spice Girls time I think.

I took the original bolt that came out of the bottom holding bracket.

 And as you see there, the holding nut is actually, I knocked it out a little bit.

 So what you want to do when you take it out so you have a clearer view is what I was doing.

 But because I couldn't reach the bolt directly from above the engine where I was standing, I had this there like that.

 You don't want to bang it back or anything like that really hard.

 And then you take this out and what that does, it pushes the locking nut back and it leaves a little clearance right here.

 And when you take it out you're going to sort of lift this way and it comes right out like that after you loosen this up.

 You have to loosen this up or it's going to be really really hard to get it out.

 But because I had this loosened up by banging it back a little bit, I was able to just...

 So it looks still in good condition but sometimes you get one of these where it's really old and really seized onto the holding mount.

 It looks scary when you put it inside the engine bay but because the shape of the pickaxe allows you to sort of leverage the alternator against the oil housing filter head right there.

It didn't even scratch it but I used it to yank out the alternator.

 What I'm going to do is just replace the gasket for this guy because it's leaking on the ground.

 And then after when I'm done with that I'm going to put the new alternator in which is really cool.

It literally took me about 10 minutes total to remove the alternator just now.

 So 10 minutes to remove an alternator using the pickaxe and the hammer technique I guess you could call that.

 Where you hammer back the bottom bolt to loosen up that holding nut.

 Because the alternator does have a holding nut that people don't know about.

 People just remove the bolts and then they just start prying and yanking it out.

 But once you get that nut, the holding nut, pushed back a little bit off the mount,

 But of course this car is over 10 years old so it's going to be seized on there a little bit.

 But use a little pry bar or this pickaxe technique that I used.

 Usually it takes, people say it takes like an hour, hour plus, but 10 minutes with this technique.

 Now that we have primed the pump, we're going to go through the setup of the extractor.

 The first thing that you do is plug both cords in and into separate circuits and that would

 Once you have located separate circuits, the green light will illuminate.

 We will start by turning on the heater into the high heat position for carpet extraction

 I will then turn the 500 PSI pump on, which will be followed by the vacuum motors.

 I will then check out my PSI and make sure that I am at the proper pressure for cleaning

 That is achieved by pulling the trigger on the wand and we are operating at the proper

 Hey everyone, it's Eric and today I'm going to be showing you how to make this 3-point

 And to make it you're going to need 3 squares of paper and we're going to fold them into

 modules that look like this and then we're going to assemble our modules.

 To make a module, you're going to want to take your origami paper, flip it over to the

 And we're going to fold it in half diagonally the opposite way.

 And then we're going to bring one of these open edges up to this top crease.

 And now you're going to want to fold this big triangle up along this first crease here

 Now take these two mini flaps at the bottom right here and fold them up along this edge.

 And now I'm going to make a mark right where this corner is along here.

 And I don't know if you guys can see it, but there's a diagonal line here that was from

 And we're going to want to fold this triangle up so that this edge meets with the line we

 The last thing you want to do is tuck this flap into this pocket.

 And you're going to want to flip them all so, you know, this pocket is a little bit

 And you're going to want to take, keeping it so that the thin pocket is on the top,

 you're going to want to take the longer edge of this and stick it into the thin pocket.

 Now take your third piece, remember keeping the thin pocket side up, and you're going

 And now you're going to want to pull your first point from the first module you stuck

 And you're just going to want to bend it backwards a little bit so that you can slide it into

 So in this case, I'm sliding my orange one into the yellow one.

 Okay, and then once I have that done, it's not going to look too good because we've sort

 of been shoving them in as if it were going to lie flat, and in most cases with origami,

 you know, okay, well if it's something like this, it should be all flat.

 So we're just going to let it curve a little bit and it's going to curve in.

 Welcome to Sanam's Kitchen and today I have very simple and very easy recipe of butter

 For the naan we need all purpose flour, salt to taste, water to knead the dough, sugar,

 So here in a bowl I'm going to put 2 1 1 cups of all purpose flour.

 Now I'm going to knead the dough using the kitchen aid stand mixer.

 Add a little water at a time and also make sure the water is little bit lukewarm.

 So after 30 minutes you can see the dough is almost double in the size and now we are

 So grease your palms with a little bit of oil to prevent the dough from sticking.

 And take a desired amount depending on how big or small you want the naan to be.

 And now dip it in a loose flour and we're going to roll it with the help of rolling

 Now heat a pan or griddle and we're going to put the naan on the griddle.

 Now as you can see it has lot of bubbles so it is puffing up just fine.

 For the other side I'm just going to flip it over the flame directly.

 I'm flipping it little bit above the flame so it doesn't burn but puffs up right.

 If you want to make a garlic naan just spread a garlic paste and sprinkle some fresh coriander.

 But for my butter naan I'm just going to sprinkle some kasuri methi for extra flavor.

 What I'll do is I'll just play the song first and you can decide whether or not you'd like to learn how to play it.

 Okay, so hopefully you stuck around and you want to learn how to play this.

 And the most important thing to start learning this song would be to learn how to use your right hand.

 And really, one thing to know is that your fingers go on specific strings.

 So, if we number our fingers 1, 2, 3, 4, the way I play it is I place my 3rd finger on the very bottom string,

 my 2nd finger on the string above, my 1st finger on the string above.

 So, that means my 3rd finger goes on the bottom E, my 2nd finger goes on the B string, my 1st finger goes on the G string.

 So, I'm counting it as 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3.

 Okay, and every once in a while you're hitting the bass E at the same time you're hitting the high E.

 So, again, 3rd finger on the E string, 2nd finger on the B string, 1st finger on the G string.

 And you always keep them nice and close to the strings, kind of curled under.

 You're keeping them nice and tight and you'll be able to get them more consistent and be able to go faster.

 Instead of just learning the song, what you could practice doing is learning all...

 is just playing all the notes of the E minor scale on top of that.

 Because really, you want to get your right hand down before you even complicate things even more with your left hand.

 So, an exercise that I'll give you is to start out with open and work your way up.

 And all I did there was just put my fingers over the 12th fret and hit the harmonics.

 Alright, check out the continuation of this lesson on my YouTube channel.

 Summer time is the time for fresh flavors and taste of the beach.

 But Dan from Royal Street Cafe up at Deer Valley, we are going to be making something

 Yeah, this is a dish I came up with a few years ago that we've sold a lot of.

 We use sushi grade tuna that I fly in daily from Hawaii with a little mango avocado salsa

 Okay, well we've already tried the mojito, so let's get started on the tuna.

 We do the tacos to temperature, so you can get them medium rare, you can get them well

 I basically made a simple syrup with lime juice and sugar and then some southwest spices,

 You know, not very long, just because the acid from the lime juice can start to cook

 I see you used the red onion to give it that little pop of purple.

 I like to do this at the last so the avocado doesn't turn brown.

 While I let the tuna marinate for 15 minutes maybe, 10 minutes isn't a problem as well.

 Yeah, I like to keep them as sharp as possible, especially with cutting the tuna and everything

 And then maybe I add a little bit of the Southwest sauce to that as well.

 And of course the recipe for all of these elements, both the salsa, the slaw, the marinade

 I also use it to build basically a little coleslaw that I've made with a little julienne

 So just a little of the tuna sauce, a little olive oil, a little salt.

 So with a super hot grill the way we have it, how much time do you think?

 I start to see a little bit of gray come up on the bottom of the tuna.

 And when I serve them just rare, you can still see the pink of the tuna on the outside.

 And then I like to go right back into the marinade with the tuna so it picks up as much

 Now normally you wouldn't put items right back into the same marinade that you used,

 And the fact that we take such good care of our products, everything is on ice all the

 It's just chipotle peppers and mayonnaise and some green onions and some other stuff.

 And then I'll build a little mound of the slaw right in the middle of that.

 And people can come up and see you and try these all summer long, right?

 And this is the next segment in drawing a Celtic cross found on one of the Zed Rods,

 Alright, in this segment, take your pencil, and from here to here, draw a curved line.

 Now, what I want you to do is focus on this portion here, okay?

 What I'm going to do is have you mark basically the halfway portions on this line and this line.

 Because our spiral is going to be the one that's going to be the most difficult.

 Now we're going to have to mark the halfway portions on this line and this line.

 Because our spiral is going to come around here and go this way as well.

 I want to keep it curved, but we're going to do that when we do our pen line.

 Hi, I'm Cassie Lomas and we're here at the Bourgeois Pop-Up Boutique for London Fashion

 Today I'm going to be showing you how to do the black and light look.

 This is something that's been all over the catwalks for this season.

 It's a 60s inspired look and I'm going to make it so that you can do it at home.

 So I'm using the shadow and light pencil and what it's doing is making a really heavy black

 Once you've got the black base there, what you want to do is start on the light look.

 Now when you've got the cold perfected, what you want to do is just set it.

 I'm using the black intense eyeshadow and I'm just going to go over the exact lines

 The best way to check is with your eyes open because when your eyes are closed they're

 Now I want to get a really, really luminous finish on the lid so I'm using the bourgeois

 light eyeshadow and I'm using a flat stiff brush to really pack the colour on.

 This is going to give a really, really dramatic contrast in the black.

 Okay, now before you start the lashes we're going to give them a little curl.

 Now we're just going to be doing a really nice pink flush on the cheeks.

 So we're finishing the look with the Rose Innocent Sweet Kiss lipstick.

 It's really hydrating so it keeps your lips nice and soft all day.

 I'm using a brush to apply this but you can apply it straight from the bullet.

 This song is played in the key of C minor and for us to find the accidentals of C minor

 So this is C minor so let's choose E flat major and find out which accidentals we have

 F is natural, G is natural, A is flat, B flat, C, D and E flat.

 The first is E flat, the second is A flat and the third one is B flat.

 We use C natural, D natural, E flat, F, G, A flat, B flat and C.

 So on the left hand we will use A flat, A flat and on the right the chord C, E flat

 So we press all these keys and we keep moving the right hand up and down.

 So when we press it all we count one and then the right hand two, three.

 So we have one, two, three, one, two, three and then the four is the chord G minor.

 So we have G, G on the left hand and on the right we have B flat, D, F. So one, two, three

 in A flat, four in G, one, two, three, four and this four comes a little faster than it

 So it used to be one, two, three, four but now it's one, two, three, four, one, two,

 So F minor is with F, F on the left, A flat, C and E flat on the right.

 And then we press all these keys and we keep moving the right hand up and down.

 F is one, pressing all the keys is one and then the right hand two, three, four and then

 we go back to G, we press all the keys and this is one and then the right hand two, three,

 So one, two, three in A flat, the four that comes really fast is in G, one, two, three,

 four, one and then we start counting one in F. One, two, three, four, one.

 And this one, because the previous four came really fast, this one, we will stay in this

 So one, two, three, four, one, two, three, four, one, two, three, four, one, two, three,

 And now we go to G. One, two, three, four and then we play C major.

 So in C major we use C, C on the left, B flat, E flat and G on the right.

 So we press all these keys, the other one and then we keep moving the right hand up

 So one, two, three and in the four let's use D, F instead of E flat, G, D, F. One,

 two, three, four and then back to A flat and we start from the beginning.

 One, two, three, four, one, two, three, four, one, two, three, four and then C.

 So as you see, as I keep moving the right hand up and down, when the right hand is up

 and I don't really press anything, I press this key on the left hand which is closest

 For example, when we are in A flat major and we start one, two, three, as you see, when

 So one, A flat, two, A flat, three, A flat, four and then F. One, F, two, F, three, F,

 four, F. Back to G. One, G, two, G, three, G, four, G and the same in C. One, so in C,

 apart from C, C on the left, we can use C, G a little bit higher on the keyboard.

 So we start pressing all the keys, one and then we press G while the right hand is up.

 And as you realize, in G minor, after A flat, one, two, three, four, before I just press

 So A flat, one, two, three, four, one, two, three, four, one, two, three, four, one, two,

 After G, one, two, three, four, I don't wait for the next one, we just come to start with

 both hands, for example, one, two, three, four and one, two, three in C minor.

 I will place the left hand to the new chord of C minor before I start counting one.

 One, two, three, four, C, one, two, three, four or one, two, three, four, C on the left

 The recipe says mandarin oranges, but I like tropical fruit salad better.

 So about 8 ounces or the small container of light whipped cream.

 This is basically, it is really easy, all you are doing is dumping everything into the same container.

 And it doesn't have to be crushed, it just helps the consistency out.

 You can also use mandarin oranges, that's what the original recipe said to use.

 try to put up maybe a photo here, but what I was doing was going forward and replacing

 a while, it's maybe been 50,000 miles or something, but was using a 12-point socket, which was

 with a pair of vice grips such as these, these are your standard vice grips, and latch onto

 you'll see here in the video here shortly, the housing has some fins on it, and once

 you get this latched on, it was actually hitting that housing enough that I wasn't able to

 turn with the standard vice grips, so I had to utilize these long, you can call them needle

 nose, whatever you want to call these, these are the long nose versions of vice grips.

 And utilizing these, I was able to get enough grip and still have enough room to turn it.

 So I'll go ahead and go forward here and make a quick video, but a torch and then some long

 nose vice grips were successful, at least in my experience, to break free that plug

 cameras here a little bit and I'll try to show you a video of that.

 Okay so here we are up underneath the vehicle now, and as you can see this would be my,

 this is actually the upper one, but as you can see my fill plug is stripped out very

Maybe you have the same problem on your drain plug, but either one is going to

And as I mentioned before, this would be the standard pair of vice grips,

 but the problem is once you get those locked on, there's actually no way to turn it because

 as I had mentioned, what I had to end up going with were these long nose ones, and then you

 can actually get them over here to an angle like this, lock them on, and that will allow

 you to rotate it at least a quarter to a half turn, then get another grip and repeat the

 So now to start with, and if you want you can go ahead and try that just as is.

 was locked on there enough that just by the vice grips alone it still wasn't able to break

 torch lit, and I'm just going to kind of try to really just heat up.

 heat to the bolt, that way the bolt will contract inside the socket.

 I would go at least 2, 3, 4, 5 minutes, somewhere in that range, and heat it up pretty well.

 Okay guys, I jumped away there for a second, but it's been about 2 to 3 minutes so far,

 and you can see this bolt is currently showing about, I don't know, 300 degrees Fahrenheit,

 to just heat up the surface, we want to make sure the plug and the bolt all the way through

 Once you get heated up here, I'm going to cut the heat off real quick.

 You go about a half to three quarter turn, then you can get another grip on it, and there

A little bit of heat in these long nose needle nose, and you can see

 it's completely stripped out, but I'm still able to break it free with that method.

 and the right pair of vise grips to allow you to get a grip on it.

 that plug free pretty easily, and it only took three to five minutes of heating it up.

 the second time, just to be sure that I had heated the entire stud all the way through,

 Thanks for stopping by, checking it out, and again go ahead and subscribe, comment for

 I don't know how well you're going to be able to see into my rain barrel there, but it is

 If they see somebody with rain barrels, they think that you just got a breeding ground

 There are a number of ways to control, however, the mosquito population and eliminate them

 The cheapest kind and cheapest pack of lemonade that you can buy in the store.

 It used to be ten cents, but they've raised it this last year to twenty cents.

 In no time, an hour or less, all those mosquitoes will be dead.

 Well it is the next day, and you can see that the mosquito larvae have pretty well died

 I'm not going to pull any punches or stretch the truth, lie if you will, to you.

 So since it didn't kill 100% of them, there's probably a dozen left in there.

 And again, what we use is just the basic lemonade, and we put it in there yesterday.

 But since there's still a few left, I'll use a Pam spray like this, and you can just simply

 In the old days, they used oil, you know, machinery oil, stuff like that, which is anything

 but then making the water safe to even use, even for gardening.

 There are many people that are against, especially in government and some of the corporations,

 you having your own rain barrels, because that's a freedom, and that allows you to be

 free and have a safe water resource without them getting a piece of the action.

 And any time they can use something against you, like the mosquito, saying that well you

 have a breeding ground, the idea is to show them and to show everyone all the time how

 you have a safe, clean rain barrel that is mosquito free, and yet still gives you the

Bill saying, you gotta spread the word, and you gotta fight for your rights.

 If you don't, you'll lose it, and getting it back is a lot harder than hanging onto

 and then you hold down the arrows again until another chime is heard,

 then you hold the arrows in again until that second beep is heard.

 waterproof eye speckle just a nice shadow primer and then on top of that

 I'm gonna put skinny jeans by benefit it's just a cream eye shadow

 so I just dyed my hair red yesterday all my uncle did and I am like in love with

 I'm gonna be this one right here I'm just gonna take a flat brush to

 dark brown color this one up top and we're gonna put it in our crease so we

 okay so all I did was apply eyeliner in my waterline and I did sort of a wing

 liner on top and I use the starry eyeliner gel I think my sister bought it

 at Ross okay so to finish off the eye look all I'm gonna do is apply a

 highlight and I'm gonna use this one this is really my favorite highlight

 color and this one is from the vanity palette from wedding while it's I think

 it's like $2 and it's really worth it I've hit pan on a couple so I'm just

 gonna use a fluffy um dome brush and go ahead and apply that underneath my brow

 I'm gonna be applying these false lashes and I'll be right back so I can show you

 guys how it looks with the eyelashes on okay so all I did was apply my false

 and I applied max mascara to my bottom lashes oh my god you need to try this

 out it's whole amazing seriously a little goes a long way and the brush is

 so cute it has like a little it's kind of like a round tip at the end pretty

 cool so that's what I applied and then for my eyebrows this is a fun part and

 it's just like a red I'm gonna go ahead and take a little brush and this one is

 by elf yeah it's the little brush like this and go ahead and pick some up

 it's I already did my foundation I did my foundation I and I use my Mac studio

 fix and then the Laura Giller foundation stick this is so amazing I'm literally

 out you can tell how much I like this and it's waterproof and then to set my

 foundation I just used to the rim of the mat warm and this is just a loose

 and I'm gonna use mocha by next just a really pretty pink I'm gonna use this

 if you haven't been a redhead before you have to try it at least one

 okay so let me zoom you in so you can see the finished eye look

 it's really easy all I am doing is just applying the extensions

 yeah I'm gonna do my hair so you guys can see how it looks cuz I bought these

 extensions too and I dyed them look how red these are oh my god I'm in love

 but yeah I'll be right back so I can show you the whole finished look

 yeah and this is my hair after I put in my extensions cuz normally my hair is

 like this short and oh my god friends what do you guys think of my new hair

 so yeah if you guys are like the 209 area I'll totally link my uncle's page

 in the description box if you guys are interested in dying your hair and

 getting leaves and stuff yeah so yeah I hope you guys enjoyed this tutorial and

 I hope I helped if you guys are like wanting to dye your hair red if you're

 wanting to dye your hair red how to do your eyebrows so yeah I hope you guys

 enjoyed this video and until my next video I'll talk to you guys all soon bye

 Okay, this little pan here, we were given a little smoke hut that was better than ours,

 it had tin sides, but this was inside it and you will not believe the shape this was in.

 I guess they used it to put the chips in and then put it on a hot plate, but this was hanging

 Now other than steel wool, normally we would just clean it with steel wool and oil it,

 but because it was pitted, Howie actually took it to work and wire wheeled it.

 I'm going to take some olive oil, not olive oil, sorry, I'm going to get some avocado

 I'm just going to take my pastry brush, I've washed this and I've dried it by putting it

 That way we know it's dry, that we're not trapping any rust inside.

 I'm going to take this, I'm going to pour off any excess oil for a second.

 Normally I wouldn't do the whole thing, but because this was so badly rusted, it has to

 I'm amazed when people find cast iron that's all rusty and pitted with rust that they go,

 So we're going to pop this in the oven at 400 degrees for about 10 minutes, then we're

 That will bake the oil in and cure our new cast iron sausage pan.

 You bake this until this gets tacky, and then you bake it until it's no longer tacky.

Levoife from our half acre homestead saying, just because it's rusty

 or even pitted with rust doesn't mean you can't bring your cast iron back.

 And to do it you get some mustard seeds, yellow or brown, and then you can grind them up in

 your coffee grinder and they turn into a nice powder like that.

 Mustard seeds are extremely high in selenium and tryptophan, which as you know helps you

 go to sleep, and omega-3s, and fiber of course, protein, manganese, phosphorus, magnesium.

 You just put the powder in a bowl and then you want to make a little paste out of it.

 So just put a little in it first and then mash it up with a spoon and make it into a

 And all I'm going to add today is a little salt and rosemary and a little pepper and

 And then you can just start experimenting with your own seasoning.

 Anytime you can make something yourself, it's better to do that than to buy it packaged.

 So it's almost taking, with this lemon, about 3 fourths of a lemon.

 And you'll have to experiment with this and see how much you like.

 Then you can put it into a little jar and it will last about 6 weeks.

 You don't want to make very much unless you just use a lot of mustard.

 So if you were to add things like onion, honey, more honey, some ginger maybe, some olive oil, basil, tomatoes.

 And their pigment, the beta-thionine, is a powerful cancer-fighting ingredient.

 And tomorrow I'll show you how to, or next time, I'll show you how to make some raw ketchup.

Then because I need the yolk to seal the marstadellas, I put the white

 well to incorporate the spice, the garlic and the eggs all together.

 in cold water and take a piece of meat, this much or less or more, according to what you

Seal every partition that you notice, seal it with water and later we are

When I do a lot of marstadellas like this, I wrap them in foil tightly and

So when somebody wants to make a sandwich they just take one, let it

 thaw in room temperature and they can prepare a delicious sandwich.

 On the right hand side, make sure it's the right hand side, just flip your Swiss Army

 You'll see in this area here, that thing attaches this side to this side.

 And at the top of the hard drive there's a long thing that attaches it to this thing.

 One time I took some alcohol and a q-tip and swabbed it and cleaned it because it was

 Now, I take no responsibility for you screwing up your own iPod.

So today I am doing a special Disney Princess collaboration with one of

 because Snow White is super pale and I'm pale so I thought it was just perfect.

 So for my brows I'm using this color Brown from MAC and I'm also mixing this with a black

 on how I do my eyebrows, I will put a link down in the description box to one of my videos.

 Now I'm going to highlight and clean up my brows with this MAC concealer in the color

 you apply a base if you want your eyeshadow to last the whole day.

 base it's just going to make your eyeshadow be a lot more pigmented.

 and I'm applying it on my crease and this is going to work as a transition color.

 Now I'm taking Espresso and this is a very dark brown color and I'm applying this in

 the outer corner of my eye and I'm also going to bring this up towards the crease.

 you can tell I put on way too much, that's why it looks so weird and unblended.

 Now I'm taking this Mica Bello Shimmer Powder in the color Tease and it's just like a very

 nice beige color and right there I'm just spraying like Fix Plus on the lid just so

 it's better to just like kind of wet the brush and it sticks on a lot better on your eyelid.

 So what I'm doing with this color is applying it in the inner part of my lid and I'm just

 I'm also bringing that beautiful color underneath my eyes and I'm just going to stop half way.

 Now I'm taking that dark brown color I used on my crease and applying it underneath my

 Now taking my Maybelline Gel Liner in Blackest Black and I'm just going to be applying my

 I'm also going to be applying some of that eyeliner on my waterline.

 Now I'm taking this lipstick in the color Wine Stain and this is from Michelle Phan's

 new makeup line and I'm just going to be applying this lipstick with this lip brush.

 Now I'm going to contour my face but I'm going to do this very lightly because I don't want

 Now I'm taking this peach blush and it's called Lufen I'm not sure if that's how you say it

 Alright so there is my finished look I hope you guys all enjoyed and do not forget to

 go check out Alma's channel and her video of her Pocahontas look and thank you guys

 It's the same sort of thing that happens in a sand bottom tank with no oxygen

 So I'm going to take it over to the sink and run it on bleach water, a mild 10 to 1 solution

 before I even open it so I don't get the smell into my apartment.

 So I'm going to run the filter on this for about 20 minutes or half an hour

 and then I'm going to back flush it, neutralize it with a chlorine remover

 Okay, so at this point the filter has been running on the mild bleach solution

 It tells me that the dead bacteria, the anaerobic decomposition

 water out of it and then I'm going to neutralize it with a chlorine remover

 to the tap and turn on the water and it's going to remove all of the

 debris that's trapped against the filter with the old diatom powder

 You can see the powder is coming off the filter bag as it's being run in reverse

 flush it to start it back up without ever having to take it apart.

 So now I've finished flushing the bleach water out of this filter

 and I've got the hoses into the tank and I'm going to start up the filter.

 I've got the hoses into the tank and at this point I want to prime the filter

 I take my finger off the end and this filter is now primed on tank water

 I have both the intake and the outlet inside a container full of tank water.

 This will capture micro-particles in the water that make it look hazy

 The intake and the outlet can be positioned so that it captures

So before I wash my curls out, I thought I'd come back and show you a quick little bun option that you have.

 But on a day to day, a cute little messy bun I think is just uber cute.

 I don't know if you can see, but some of my curls are coming out here on the bottom.

 And then I just twist my hair tie around and start pulling it through like a full pony.

 So you kind of have some curls at the bottom that are going to be pushed out, or under I should say.

 And then any of these extra scragglies, you just kind of work it so that it all comes together.

 Now, having done this without a mirror, I'm sure it's kind of messy looking.

 But all of these I kind of scrunch up in the bottom, pull through.

 Anything that's scraggling out, all of these, just kind of pull back underneath the hair tie.

 Now, like I said, without a mirror, it's going to be difficult for me to get it perfectly neat.

 And then if you have any sticking out in the back, like these little ones, you just kind of work them in.

 If you've got curls up here, you kind of stick them into the bun.

 So, like say this one right here, I'll just kind of stick it in.

 And I'm going to show you a quick little optional modification you can make to this messy, cute bun

 Okay, so if you just want to jazz up your hair, but you don't want to do too much, all I did was add a little scarf.

 I used the satin scarf that I wrap around my hair at night, just to give you an idea.

 It can be any color, something that compliments your outfit, or just like for me, just black.

 And even cuter, so you've got your little bling, you've got your headband on.

 And the other great thing about wearing the scarf is that you can do one of two things.

 Like I push the scarf back a little, so you can see my hairline.

 So if it were a time where you need to wash your hair and re-twist, your hair's a little bushy or kind of crazy looking, you just want to cover it up,

 Like I said, I push mine back a little, but you could leave it right at the hairline.

 Or if you want to push it back a little, you can just re-twist the front row of your locks.

 But as long as the front looks great, then the rest looks great.

 So like I said, I hope that helps with the holidays and maybe some parties you're going to, and gives you another option for your hair.

 This bun is really easy to do when you have either crinkles or curls in your hair.

 The first step is making sure that the shifter lever is in the forward position and then

 using a straight head screwdriver, snap off the clip that is holding the shifter lever

 to the car, remove the lever and the washer, save the clip for reinstallation.

 You want to disassemble the shifter, take off the top plate and the outer box.

 And the next step is to hold the shifter mounting plate centered on the shaft as shown and you

 want to mark the inside holes on the top and bottom of the passenger side and the outside

 Using a 5-16th inch drill bit, drill the four markings that you just placed on the body.

 One of your holes is going to go through the black plate and the shifter lever plate.

 The other three holes are only going to go through the black plate.

 Now we're going to mount the shifter plate to the car using the quarter by inch and a

 quarter bolts for the top holes and the quarter by one inch bolts for the bottom holes and

 We want to mount the shifter to the body and the holes you drilled through the stock shifter

 The next step is to unbolt the shifter lever from the shifter mechanism and install the

 Once this is installed, you want to slide it onto the stock shaft in the 11 o'clock

 The next step is to simply reattach the heim end to the shifter lever using the bolt that

 If you need to adjust your shifter, all you do is take the bolt back out and you can back

 off the washer and you can move this up or down the shaft to give it more throw.

 The next step is to reinstall the shifter housing using the stock screws that you took

 Taking the stock top shifter plate, you got to have the knob off the shifter.

 Slide the shifter plate cover into place and securely tighten with the supplied screws.

 The final step is to install the knob back on the shifter and you're done.

 If you need to make the adjustment, you just take the top off, back off the bolt and adjust

 Hi guys today I'm coming to you guys with another tip on how to make your

 come up with ideas on how to make them look longer and this is one of my

I hope you guys stay tuned for the video is actually quite quick

 supply so I'm gonna see where you guys can find this and then I'll post the

 give you a lot of lift on your eyelashes so what you want to do is just go ahead

 Okay and what I do is usually like maybe one coat will be fine and I like this

 here because it's not cakey where you know you can use this for your eyelashes

 What I do is I'll just put it on and leave it on you know I don't put any

 mascara and it still gives me long lashes but since I do want to show you

 guys how long you can make your eyelashes by using this and then your

 mascara which I don't have a mascara that I love I honestly love all of them

 and in this case I'm just gonna use this one by L'Oreal okay and this is the

 very natural mascara and I like this one because the bristles on the brush are

 really soft okay so once I primed my eyelashes I'll just go in and apply this

 on top of that primer it's not a primer I just to me that's what it I use it as

 a primer and look at that whoa my lashes look huge I love this I just got it a

 few weeks ago and I've been using it so that when I go out even if I just go out

 to work whatever and I want very natural looking lashes but long lashes this is

 what I would use and look at that compared to my other lashes here okay

 and of course if you're gonna use this at night it is perfect you can just put

 your eyeliner prior to doing your eyelashes I'm just showing you what the

 result is gonna be I honestly love this and it is very inexpensive I paid $2.99

 for it and I'm sure I'm gonna go back and get some more you get quite a few

 you know like a good amount and I use it for both my eyebrows and my eyelashes so

 if you just want to use it for your eyelashes it would be just perfect I

 hope you guys found this helpful I know it's just a quick tip and I will see you

 Half a package instant rice sevai, 1 cup grated coconut, 2 green chillies, few curry leaves,

 1 teaspoon mustard seeds, 1 teaspoon urad dal, 1 tablespoon chutney dal, quarter teaspoon

Normally I just eyeball the water, I just fill it like 3 fourth.

I use the 777 brand but you can choose to use the other brands also.

 package instruction says we have to keep the sevai covered for 2 minutes but sometimes

 this 2 minutes won't be enough so I will keep checking my sevai.

My sevai is not done so I am going to keep it covered for another

 Keep the sevai out for couple of minutes so that the water will drain completely.

 Hi, my name is David Clark and today I want to show you a little bit of things as far

 Maybe you received a gift in the mail, maybe you went for a prom and you want to save a

 These are garden roses, they are a beautiful coral color and they are called Attitude.

 These roses have some time on them, they are about two weeks old but they are really not

 You can use a little past prime product when you are drying it.

 It is going to continue to develop when it is inside of that gel or inside the sand.

 So things that are falling apart, don't use those because they are going to continue falling

 You want to get some things that are closed, some things that are open and some things

 that are very open like this but don't use falling apart things.

 What I have over here in this container, this has silica gel in it.

 So you can see that there is a slight bit of color change that occurs on it, they deepen

 This is another type of rose that I did, this is a garden rose, an orange one.

 What you can do with these when they are done, I am going to show you some tricks, is you

 The material that we use for drying these flowers is silica gel and what it is, it is

 When there are little crystals in it that turn a light blue, they have absorbed all

 So you bake this in your oven at 275 degrees for about an hour, then they will turn dark

 blue and you will know that your material is dry and ready to use all over again.

 After you cook these things or dry off the moisture in your oven, you want to make sure

 you let them sit for at least 24 hours to let the heat out of it, otherwise you are

 This blend over here, this is 50% cornmeal and 50% borax powder.

 One of the issues with the borax is that it will burn the flower just from the chemical

 So to do a rose, take your shears and you want to cut it to be about 2 inches long.

 So you want to make sure that is probably a little bit too long.

 You take your silica gel, again this would have been the regenerated type, and you slide

 And then you take the rose like this and you pop it right down into the silica gel like

 Then to cover the rose, you just start pouring your gel all the way around it.

 So you want to make sure that once that rose is in there, you are going to use some of

 Eventually you are going to get a lot of petals in this stuff so you are going to have to

 It has got to stay, you want to leave these in the silica gel container for at least 5

 And sometimes what I will do is I will put a little piece of tape on the top of it or

 And I also write it on my calendar just so I don't make a mess of everything.

 So what we learned today was how to start out with fresh roses.

 You may be getting them as a gift from somebody or even something that you did purchase for

 We took that and we buried it inside the desiccant in an airtight container just like that.

I'd like to give a shout out to Nikki for introducing me to this great product here.

 Valerie O'Macheree Challenge which will end on June 30th I believe.

 And it's time for us to put that last push in to make sure that we are retaining as much hair as possible.

It has reduced the amount of product that I'm having to use to place the potion on my scalp.

 I am still growing hair and I am able to maintain my protective hairstyle.

 I am also participating in the Protective Hairstyle Challenge and the Bun Challenge.

 With the amount of hair growth that we get with the potion, that's usually difficult.

 Because as I'm applying product to my scalp, the hair is growing out.

 How does one grow an inch of hair a week and be able to maintain a protective hairstyle so that you can retain it?

 Now, that same dripping process is happening while my head is going.

 Now, I don't want to lean forward because I'm dripping oil in my scalp.

 I'm squeezing a little extra in this spot because you guys know about this spot.

 Here, because I've had so much new growth since I've had this bun in a week,

 Once you remove the flap, the next thing you're going to do is pull out the bolts.

 There's going to be one here, one here, and another one right down here.

 Once the last bolt has been removed, there should be all three of them plus the flap.

 Once that gets removed, what you're going to do is give a good little tug to the headlight

 Next thing you're going to want to do is disconnect all the factory harnesses and bulbs.

 Once you have the new headlight assembly ready, you simply connect all of the harnesses back

 And then you'll be ready to slide the assembly back into its housing.

 As you can see, everything here is connected and we're going to slide it back into its

 Next, very simply, reconnect the missing bolts that you took out previously and you'll

 Soft, milk-based bread buns, flavoured with cardamom, rolled up around a wonderful mixture

 The smell of these baking is incredibly intoxicating and I guarantee you that they won't last very

 To make this dish you're going to need the following ingredients.

 For the buns, 1kg of plain flour, 150g of butter, 500ml of milk, 200g of sugar, 1tbsp

 For the filling, 200g of sugar, around 150g of butter, softened, and 2-3tbsp of ground

 And here are the ingredients, on screen once again for you now.

 First we'll start by making the dough as this needs a while to rise.

 Pound the cardamom seeds in a pestle and mortar to break the outer shell, and then remove

 Once this is done, grind the seeds finely, and then place the flour and cardamom into

 Next place the milk, butter and sugar into a large pan and set on the stove to heat until

 Place the yeast into a bowl, and once the milk mixture feels finger warm, pour about

 Pour the bubbling yeast mixture into the flour, and then add in the rest of the milk mixture

 Mix well to form a dough before turning it out onto a well floured surface.

 Knead the dough for around 10 minutes, adding more flour if necessary to prevent sticking,

 Once the dough has risen, punch it down and turn out onto a lightly floured surface, and

 Place the sugar, butter and cinnamon into a bowl, beat together until you have a paste,

 Roll out the first ball of dough to make a neat rectangle shape, around 7mm thick.

 Trim the edges with a knife to ensure it is as tidy as possible.

 Place just under half of the filling paste onto the dough, and spread out to evenly cover

 the entire dough piece, ensuring you do go right up to the edges.

 Next take one of the long edges and gently fold it over, and then roll the entire rectangle

 up into a long sausage, before repeating the process until all the dough is used up.

 Cut the dough sausage into slices, about 2cm thick using a sharp knife, and arrange the

 Brush the tops of the slices lightly with a beaten egg, and then sprinkle pearl sugar

 Cover with a cloth and allow to rise once more for about 45 minutes, and meanwhile preheat

 When the buns have risen again, place into the oven and bake for about 15 minutes, until

 These are best enjoyed warm, although they can be frozen to be eaten later.

 If you can't find pearl sugar, you can also sprinkle on regular brown sugar.

 I hope you enjoy making these as much as I enjoy eating them, do let me know if you're

 able to give it a try and as always, check back again soon for more recipes from 5eurofood.

 Hi, this is Jeanette from Happy Spots and Ink Spots, and today what I'd like to show you is how to color this really sweet image from Magnolia.

 It's from the new Fairy Tale Collection, and this one reminds me so much of Snow White that I had to color her with the yellow dress and the dark hair.

 And I thought it would be a really good opportunity to show you how I color dark hair, and to go over again how to do the face and some basic shading on the rest of the image.

 I'm going to split it up into several segments so that it's easy viewing, and we'll start off by doing the face and the hands and arms.

 Alright, I'm going to start off with E00, which is my lightest shade, and I'm just going to work in small portions.

 The next color I'm going to use is E00, so a little shade darker, and I'm going to be mindful of where I think the shadows are.

 You work in small areas so that your ink stays wet, and it makes the blending a lot easier.

 So you see when it's wet and you work in small areas, it's really quite easy to get your shading.

 Now I'm going to take my E00 and I'm going to want to blend any lines that I may have made.

 I'm just going to take my colorless blender and push the ink back in.

 Hi boys and girls, it is the season, it is the season to pickle vegetables.

 Yes, what we have here before us is the makings for some kimchi.

 I just have regular green cabbage, I got an onion, garlic, another form of garlic here,

 Bring it all together, we're going to salt it with some Himalayan salt,

 kitchen gadgets, kitchen gadgets work out well, this is a bee slicer,

 I'm going to use this to cut the carrots and the ginger and some of the other goodies.

 Make it happen fast, because that's what we want, we want it fast.

 It's nice to have a big crock container to transfer the stuff in, mix it all up.

 and then we ferment it for like a week or two weeks or a month.

 they're actually useful later on to cover the top of the fermented veggies.

 This came from a local farmer's market, a slicey blade or the thin blade.

 We're going to have some issues with width, so actually I'm going to cut this in half.

 Alright, right here, right here, right here and here, and here, and here, and also here, is where we separate.

 So far we've been making just plain old sauerkraut, look at that.

 Now we've got to bring it, and we're going to bring it with the onion, and the garlic, and the pepper, and the ginger.

 And that's how we're going to separate the kimchi from the kraut.

 Great book, hard to miss it, it's got like glow-in-the-dark colors, it's crazy.

 So what I'm doing is I'm following the directions in there in regards to making a paste.

 I'm going to make a paste with the garlic, the onion, and the peppers.

 Blend it up and put it in there, and then we'll get our fermentation on.

 Four of these chili peppers in there, a couple of these little fatty jalapenos, a whole clove of garlic, about four tablespoons of ginger.

 Now we're going to need a little bit of liquid to blend this, so what I have, I actually made pickles.

 So that brine has salt in it and active probiotic from pickling the cucumbers.

 Don't touch your pee pee after you make this paste if you get it on your fingers because it will burn.

 Hi, I'm Chef Scott Samuel here at the Culinary Institute of America at Greystone.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make a pita pocket with a white bean and red bell

 So it's a vegetarian concept and it's a traditional hummus, but instead of using chickpeas, I'm

 going to use white beans and I'm also going to incorporate roasted red peppers.

 I put this over medium heat and I did not put any oil on the pepper, so dry heat, medium

 heat until the peppers start to get slightly gray, as I'm seeing here, and soft.

 So at this point, these have been on for about 10 to 12 minutes, take them off the heat.

 So the first step for the hummus, I'm going to take my garlic and lemon juice.

 And I want to put these first ingredients in first to kind of make sure the garlic is

 I'm going to do this to the other pepper and I'm wanting to get about one cup of roasted

 I want to add the rest of the ingredients, which is red bell pepper.

 Small pinch of salt, about a half a teaspoon, and about a quarter teaspoon of pepper.

 Let's take it out and take a look at our white bean roasted red pepper puree.

 Okay, so this is something that could be done ahead of time and refrigerated, but this is

 Pinch of salt, a little bit of lemon, and I'm going to go with a little bit more heat,

 A few slices of tomato, a little bit of mixed greens, feta cheese, some sliced cucumber,

 And there we go, our pita pocket with a white bean red pepper hummus, mixed greens, and cucumber.

 You can cook in your backyard, cook out in the parking lot when you're tailgating, have

 It's going to be a great blended flavor that you're going to love.

 We've had these in the fridge for about four hours in this marinade.

 Worcestershire sauce, brown sugar, soy sauce, Dijon, kosher salt, black pepper, garlic powder,

 What we've done is we've built a two zone fire, hot side of the grill, and a void side,

 We're going to cook these indirectly on the cooler side of the grill.

 I'm going to cook them for about 30 minutes, flipping them once.

 We're just going to cook them, like I said, 30 minutes, flipping once on the indirect

 A lot of people ask, I have a kettle like this, but there's no thermometer.

 It's going to get a little hotter, but you can use a meat thermometer as well.

 Or there's thermometers that you can put right on the grill grate.

 The problem with those, I feel like, is you have to constantly open up and close the grill.

 Whatever you're cooking in here, just make sure it's not touching the meat, the probe

 It's going to be a nice blend of fruit and spice from the apricot.

 But it's a nice solid, it's probably 8 inches, 9 inches around.

 But I am going to go ahead and show you how to fillet a walleye.

 What you want to first do is start right behind the gill and cut straight down.

 If you, well actually even better than that would be an electric fillet knife.

 Ok, so you cut straight down as close to the gill plate as you can.

 And then turn your knife flat, lay it against the spine and cut and cut back.

 Ok, so basically now, once that's off of your fillet, that's the only part that you really

 This you don't have to worry about and I'll show you that in a second.

 It may look like I'm on an angle, I'm not straight up and down.

 I'm on an angle because there is a section of meat up here on what we fishermen call

 So if you cut it on an angle, you'll get that meat up there on the shoulder.

 Turn your blade flat and then stay along the shoulder, I mean along the spine and cut back.

 Now, once you have a nice, flat, large surface, you can make that a continuous cut.

 So I just kind of start at the edge, get my knife flat along that scale and keep it

 And that will make sure that you get all of your meat off and your fillet off just like

 You can just make sure you have all of the bladder insides that come off.

 I like to leave my bones in because sometimes you're going to lose meat when you're trying

 I have a bunch of other walleye, so it'll be okay if I show you this one.

 But as I said, the rib cage, just kind of work your way down like that.

 I'm going to show how to create a tri-fold gift card holder out of just half a sheet

It is the season of giving so I'm sure you'll be given a lot of gift

 it has a little belly band there on it and it just opens in a tri-fold form.

 going to show you how to create this gift card holder along with the belly band from

So with the short side of the cardstock to the top of the simply

 cardstock so that the long side of the cardstock is to the top of the simply scored tool and

I'm going to bring my cutter in and I'm just going to trim away those two

 Now the next part, we're just going to add a little bit of adhesive here.

 You're going to save this little piece here that you trimmed away.

You're going to need two pieces of designer series paper measuring 2-3 quarters by 2-3 quarters.

Now these pieces are going to go here, here, and however you want them.

 And then on the opposite side, we're going to go ahead and adhere the other pieces.

Now we're going to add a little bit of adhesive here on this corner on the small tab.

 Now that one strip that we cut earlier, it's already scored in one area.

 So that's going to go there and we're just going to add adhesive on one end.

 And as we wrap that around, we're just going to bring the other end up and put it right over the adhesive.

 So to decorate the belly band, you just need one strip of designer series paper measuring 1x7".

 And you've got a tri-fold gift card holder from just half a sheet of 8.5x11 sheet of cardstock.

 are really tight, and they're really difficult, and it's easier

 bottom bolts, and I've removed this nut on here, but this bolt is

 Now, I'll have to kind of pry it out, because there's actually a stud right in the middle

 front of the disc brake, because the entire disc brake will tend to flop down.

 Hi everybody, I'm Gianni Massalutto and I'm here to talk about my new creation,

 the Blue Harp Blues Chord Harmonica, produced in collaboration with Blue X Lab.

 With this harmonica you can play melodies and chords in second position, especially in the blues music.

 The real innovation is that you don't need to change your way to play, nor your style,

 In the first part, from hole 1 to hole 6, it is just a standard harmonica, Richter tuning.

 So, drawing from hole 2 to hole 5, you will get the first dominant 7.

 In the second part, drawing from hole 7 to hole 10, you will get the fourth 7 dominant.

 Drawing from hole 7 to hole 10, you will get the fifth dominant 7.

 To orientate yourself easily, on the bottom cover we placed a tiny pellet that you can fill with your lips.

 Don't forget that with the Blue Harp you can play the majority of the blues melody.

 You only have to learn how to play the second part of this instrument.

 However, this one's called Guo Tiew Hang, which means it's a dry noodle.

 So we take the exact same ingredients, but we don't add too much liquid.

 What I love most about this dish is that it's so healthy because all of the ingredients

 Blend it into a fine paste with a little bit of taro flour and then roll it into a ball

 And then just after a minute, take one of the noodles, break it and eat it.

 Just put all of the noodles, the Luk Chin and the prawn into the bowl and then we start

 Take some Tom Yum paste and about half a tablespoon into the noodles.

 Adds a little bit of sweetness and a slight smoky rich flavour.

 So now that the Tom Yum flavour has gone into the dish, it's important to get the consistency

 So I've just got a small amount of stock here just so that it comes slightly wet.

 Mix that in and then we move it across to our presentation plate.

 Make sure the Luk Chin are evenly spread around the noodles and the prawns on top.

 Okay, from that point on we start to add the other ingredients, the other fresh vegetables.

 At this point we just blanch them one by one and then place them delicately.

 You could use Guy Lan Chinese broccoli or mustard greens are fine as well.

 Sometimes it's important just to take your time and do these steps.

 A little bit of fried garlic in oil and you can put the oil on as well.

 You take that to the table, squeeze the lime on, stir it all together and then eat it.

 Another version of having a kway teow but kway teow hang, kway teow tom yum hang.

 In this lesson, I'm just going to talk about the importance of having a second bass if

 When you're playing, say for example, a chord of C and you're playing some melody here.

 So if you've got a long enough time, you don't just want to hang around here all the time.

 If it's G, then your second bass is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, D. And so on.

 If it's Bb, then it's 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, F. Ab, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and so on and so on.

 This is A minor, your second bass will be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, E minor.

 The C second bass is A, because it's 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 positions away from D minor.

 For example, if I was to start playing Peking, or if you're playing Tango, or if you're playing

 little things and they react differently on different surfaces.

 things is to use this plumbus tape that you can buy from any hardware store.

 I do is to very roughly cover a sheet of cardstock with this stuff.

 roughly you do it really, it doesn't matter if there are bubbles or wrinkles, but the

 one thing that you do want to make sure is that you don't have any lines in between your

 layers of tape, because otherwise the ink will settle onto the paper and you won't get

OK, so you've covered the whole sheet, don't worry about the seam, that's

Cover the whole sheet like that, and then what I did was cut out some flowers using

I used the shift flower for this, it's my favourite flower because

 but that really, it doesn't seem to matter on the finished article.

 the alcoholic applicator, this is by Tim Holtz and you just put a little square, a

 on so I'm just going to put some tiny drops of caramel and lettuce and the stream.

 Be sure you cover your rough surfaces because this can get really messy.

 To intensify the colour a little bit I'm just going to add a few more drops of caramel.

 Last time I did this I was wearing a new pair of shorts and I managed to splatter it all over myself.

I might spend a little bit more time when I'm not actually demoing it for you.

 But in fact the less time you mess around with it the better it is because if you keep adding too much then you do get this rather messy muddy look to it all.

 So you don't have to worry about getting your hands messy once you've finished it.

Obviously you don't only have to cut flowers you can cut all sorts of things out.

They really they make the card you only need a very simple card.

 Hello YouTube, I'm going to show you guys how to make plastic out of any old milk and

 white vinegar, doesn't matter really what type, but make sure it's white vinegar.

 And what you're going to need is a strainer, any size, any shape.

 You're going to need a tablespoon measurer, and you're going to need a cup measurer, and

 Okay, so to start off, I'm sorry if this is a little bad quality, but we're going to take

 the milk and we're going to pour just above the one cup line, so we have about nine ounces.

 Then we'll go ahead and put our milk away, and you're going to put this into that microwave

 We're going to microwave it for one minute thirty to two minutes.

 You don't want it to boil, you just want it to get warm, maybe hot, and I'll be back when

 With about thirty or so seconds left, you can see just the milk is steaming just a tad,

 and sorry, you can't really see through the microwave that much, but twenty seconds left,

 You might want to take it a little early, but as I said, you want it pretty hot.

 You might want to feel it with your finger to make sure it's nice and hot.

 Okay, and you're actually going to take your vinegar, and you're going to pour a couple

 tablespoons of that, so I'm just going to keep it in sight here.

 You can see the curdle starting, and I'm going to grab a spoon here to mix it with, and we're

 just going to mix it gently, making sure that the acid in the vinegar will actually separate

 As you can see, you can see the curds, and wow, I can really smell the vinegar.

 Okay, and we're going to let that sit for a couple seconds, and we're going to grab

 our other bowl right here, and we're going to take this bowl and put it in our sink.

 Sorry that it's a little dirty, and we're going to put the strainer over that.

 We're going to keep stirring for a few more seconds here, and I think we're good to pour

 And what you got is this substance right here that looks pretty interesting.

 Okay, and we're actually going to take our paper towels now and put them by the sink here.

 So add a few more layers here, and we're just going to take our plastic mold and just plop

 it right onto there, and you can take cardboard cutouts and fold it into any shape you want,

 It does take a little bit to dry, and you'll have to play around with it, but it's pretty

 I'm going to fold it into this kind of cylindrical shape, I think, and, or sphere.

 It does get pretty hard, and we're just going to mash it in like that to get that juices out.

 And as you can see, it's starting to form just a little bit, and when you smell it,

 And we're going to grab another paper towel, actually, and just fold that over, and let

 that sit for a few, just draining its juices out on its own while we clean up.

 It's starting to form into a real plastic-like substance, and I would not recommend using

 And it does get a lot harder than this, and it's best to make sure you don't use too many

 wet paper towels to try and dry it, because, obviously, wet paper towels won't dry it.

 But, the rest, you should let that sit for a few again while you take care of the rest of the stuff.

 But I'll let you watch it for right now, and I'll be back when it is nice and hardened.

 Here it is after sticking it under a fan for about an hour and a half, and then putting it in a cup,

 It needs to fully harden before you actually do anything with it, and you can shape it,

 but you could have shaped it before people have made dice out of this, but it's really hard.

 But, it depends on the mixture, and how well you actually dry it, and stuff,

 So, but this has been how to make plastic, or a plastic-like substance, out of milk and vinegar.

 Okay, our GPS just came on, so I'm going to show you the controls here.

 And to start your helicopter in smart mode or any mode, I believe, we're in smart mode

 Like I said, we're not going to test that because I already broke my helicopter once

 and I need to figure out the settings to be perfect before I try that again.

 When you hit the throttle, it's actually not going to be based on power.

 So the higher you have the throttle, the higher your helicopter's going to be.

 The lower you have it, it's going to go to a different altitude and stay there.

 You just push this up to wherever you want and you won't lose it.

 It can't go too high because you're not controlling the speed of the blades.

 And the maximum height that it'll go to in smart mode is about 45 feet.

 The trees aren't looking like they're moving too much, but it is a little windy here.

 In smart mode also, when you hit the forward stick, it's going to go forward no matter

 It's still going out farther away even though I was spinning the helicopter.

 So wherever the transmitter is, it'll stay like 15 or so feet away from.

 So as you can see though, wherever you point the right stick is where your helicopter is

 So this is really good for beginners because it's real easy to control.

 I got my camera facing to the right there and if there was someone riding a bike on

 So there's lots of cool things you can do in smart mode even if you're an advanced pilot

 We got the camera pointing straight at us and I want to show you guys one other thing.

 I pushed it the wrong way because I'm used to flying real normal set up helicopters.

 I don't think you guys probably know any other helicopter or any other thing you could do

 Just basically whichever way you push this right stick is the way the helicopter is going

 Stability mode should be like a normal helicopter, how normal helicopters fly.

 When you press forward, you're going to go towards the forward of where the helicopter

 So this is more like a real helicopter flight for pilots that know how to fly.

 And like I said, this is just normal helicopter controls for everyone that knows how to fly

 But if you can fly even a coaxial, you could probably fly this.

 Then with Naked Pigment from MAC and with my 239 brush I'm applying that on my lid

 And then with Sketch Eyeshadow from MAC I'm using a 222 brush and I'm going to apply that

 And while I apply that I'm blending it and also pulling it outwards and up.

 Almost like when you do a winged liner you want to wing your eyeshadow outwards.

 And pull it up when you pull it, when you go outwards pull it upwards.

 And then with Vanilla I'm going to highlight my brow bone with a 252.

 And then I go back in with my 222 and without applying any more shadow I'm just blending.

 I'm just making sure there's no vanilla falling onto the other shadows.

 And then I'm just going to intensify that Naked Eyeshadow Pigment just so it can define

 And then with Nylon, it's a frosty color, I'm applying that in the inner corner of my

 This brightens up your eyes and makes it look more like awake and alive.

 And then with Perversion Urban Decay Eyeliner, it's a matte black, I'm lining the upper lash

 line and I'm keeping it pretty thin and I'm just going to wing it out a little bit.

 And then I'm just going to apply Lash Blast, my favorite mascara, on my lashes.

 And I always like to apply behind my lashes before applying on the top of the lashes.

 For those of you who don't like to go too dramatic, it has a soft, subtle shimmer to

 Well guys this is one of the salmon that I caught during the salmon food fishery and

 he still froze kind of hard here but I'm going to filt him off and sprinkle some salt and

 cure him and hopefully tomorrow morning I'm going to get him in the smoke.

 Well guys I just gave him a little sprinkling of salt there and I'm going to let this cure

 overnight and tomorrow morning I'll probably do a little dry lube.

 And this salmon still froze a little bit, this is not the preferred way to do it but

 you know we're here on a boat and we want to have smoked fish tomorrow for supper so

 And I'm going to be using my mini chief, this is a brand new one, I used the big chief before

 This is a great little one you know for aboard a boat here, you know you do a meal or two

 And what I'll do is I'll put the bigger pieces on the bottom grate and the smaller ones on

 I prefer apple but there was none available here in the store so that's my second choice

 So anyway I'm going to let this cure overnight, like I said and dry a little bit and tomorrow

 morning we'll get a smoke on it and two or three smokes and we'll be ready to eat this.

 What I'm going to do is I just had two smokes on this and I was going to have a little sample

 but I already did actually but I'll have another taste test here now.

 I'm going to make up a couple of salads or whatever and this is what we're going to have

 I got the little chief there and the mini chief and the rest of the summer I'm going

 to do some smoked herring or maybe smoked cod, maybe smoked turbot and try some different

 We're going to get our oyster board and fuel and we'll be heading for the shrimp grounds

 So anyway guys like always thanks for watching and until next time.

 Hi, this is Debra from Dinglefoot.com and once again I have another technique that you

 So I need to have a stamped, embossed image because I need some lines to be able to paint

 If I have the embossed, raised edges it's going to make it so much easier for me to

 I have a little brush here and I have some Red Dragon Glitter Embossing Powder.

 I have my stamp and some black ink and of course I'll need my heat tool to emboss my

 Okay, and we're just going to pour our embossing powder over it and dump the extra back into

 Okay, oh, I kind of overdid it there but let's get the extra back in here.

 Okay, and then just give your project a nice little tap on a hard surface so that we get

 Okay, so we have our image embossed and the next step is to put some water on your craft

 This works great on the non-stick craft sheet just so you can easily clean up what you were

 Now what we're going to do is just take a tiny little amount out, you don't need much

 at all, and we're going to work it right into the water that we sprayed on our craft sheet.

 If you need more, don't be afraid to dip your wet paintbrush right into the Perfect Pearls

 because it's not going to make your powder all wet inside of your container.

 So all I'm going to do is just paint these in here just like you would with any other

 And so we can use any color of Perfect Pearls and water and make our own custom metallic

 With the raised edges, it's just so easy to keep in the lines because our little embossed

 You can use any of the 24 colors of the Perfect Pearls and you'll have all those colors that

 So if I want a different one, I'm just going to take a cloth, just wipe off my brush, and

 I can see I got a little bit of the bronze in my paint because I just wiped off my brush.

 If you want your brush really clean, make sure that you rinse it with something.

 And that's the thing with the 24 colors that there are of the Perfect Pearls.

 You can mix them together and make whatever color combinations you want.

 If you're painting along here, what happens if you get a huge big blob on this and that

 Well, just simply grab a soft cloth and just gently dab it and just take off the colors

 And remember you can get 24 different colors, so you can have jewel colors or earthy colors.

 Using these tools, you can make a costume in just an afternoon.

 selection of fleece you'll find anywhere, so you'll have more creative options right

Plus, this free how-to sheet, available at joanne.com, gives you

 a piece of fleece that's based on the width of the fabric right off the bolt, by the length

Now if you want a short cape for a child, you would have a short piece

If you want a longer cape for an adult, maybe, you would have a much longer

 The first step is to fold our fleece over on one edge about two inches.

 sharp sewing scissors, starting at one end, we're going to make quarter inch cuts into

 safety pin on the end of my ribbon so that I can feed it through the slits much easier.

 to the ribbon, pull the fleece towards the center, you wrap it around your child, and

So here's a little purple cape using the same techniques that we used to make the

We've added some embellishments, some Halloween buttons and some ribbon, and

 make a longer cape for maybe a taller person, and you can use a printed fleece, and we've

 added a different embellishment with a feather boa and glued it to the front and up to the

Okay, let me show you how to add a cool scallop technique to the bottom edge

 put it on the bottom corner of your cape, engage the blade, and press down firmly using

 a little bit of squiggle here and there, and add a few lines of the glitter paint up to

 With the right tools, tips, and techniques, you'll be amazed at what you can do when you

 Well today you guys are in for a treat because I'm going to make the most delicious, squishy,

 These are easy to make, they taste fantastic and you guys are going to love them.

 So for this all you're going to need is some marshmallows, some melting chocolate and some

 Right, so the first thing I need to do is prepare my strawberry and marshmallows.

 So I just grab a strawberry and a marshmallow, stick it on top and I just push a toothpick

 So I'll just prepare a whole bunch of these and get them ready and by the magic of YouTube,

 Now over to the stove I've come and I've got a pot with about an inch of water in the

 And once it's started simmering, I'll turn the heat down a bit and I'm going to stick

 So make sure the bowl isn't touching the water and I'll throw my chocolate bits in.

 So now we're just going to gently melt this chocolate over this simmering water.

 The best thing about having this big bowl is I can tilt it down so it all fills into

 Now I'm going to turn that heat off because that's pretty much nearly ready.

 Once there's only a few chunks left, the residual heat will keep melting that chocolate.

 So now what we need to do is grab our strawberries and marshmallows and dip it in this chocolate.

 Maybe get a spoon and start spooning it over the strawberry as well.

 I'll just let the excess chocolate drip off and over to a plate which I'll put some parchment

 And now all I have to do is put these in the fridge until our chocolate's set.

 Okay well these are fresh from the fridge and just look at them.

 Now all I need to do is grab them and remove the toothpicks from all of them.

 Here let me come in half for you to show you its internal delightfulness.

 Well they look absolutely fantastic and believe me when you taste one it will blow your mind.

 Anyway thanks for watching and I'll see you next time right here on Greg's Kitchen.

 mixed a batch of dough, if not every day, every other day for about 6 years at home

 I found a kind of a cross between how, you know, my family made more of a focaccia style

 Which I also like, but to take that and put it inside of a crust that's, you know, the

 It's kind of a cross between the Cipino, the village of Cipino and an East Coast dough.

Once the dough has finished being mixed, it's dropped onto a prep table in one

 Well, you know, I mean, I think they sense the level of care we put into it.

 You know, there's a lot of folks coming down here that are really interested in food and

You know, they want to get some great produce and some great things from

 out there, but they want to come and see something that's maybe a little bit different that they

And I think we've been able to provide that with some of the things we do.

 Point in case, we've got a mutual friend, Grant, over at City Wings, right?

 And you're doing some crazy stuff with some of his product, right?

 you know, he puts it on everything and pizza is the thing you put everything on.

And I just called him later and said, you got to make some for me.

 A succession of special City Wing ingredients are added, starting off with cherry peppers,

 smoked turkey, roasted garlic, smoked gouda, and of course, fresh mozzarella.

 But the one I think you really want to try today is a Bismarck.

 it's great after you're done, you know, you're done eating the pie, you get a little crust

 down here seems to be like a really tight, close-knit community of restaurateurs and market

 from day one, I had the support of like the guys that I bought the business from Russell Street

We've got the pepperoni with fresh sliced portabella mushrooms and

Out comes this fresh baked round of mouth-watering goodness with the

Now I want to thank all of you for joining us today here in Eastern Market.

For more information on Cipino's and other restaurants, join us at Dininginthed.com.

This is supposed to be one and a half cups of packed brown sugar, but because

 I'm using the Splenda Brown Sugar Mix, you only use about half of what it calls for.

 and what we're going to do is we're going to mix this all up really well, cream it really

 well, and then once I have that completed, I'll bring you back and we'll put all the

I've never seriously ever had this, and then they had some on sale

 in a cup, oh wait, there's a little bit of butter in there left.

 a cup of canned pumpkin, and one of my subscribers said that she's not sure that canned pumpkin

 time and my friend Trish had to bake her own pumpkin to get that, and I'm like what?

 would be no way, I would not be making no pumpkin stuff if I had to bake a pumpkin to

 here we go, we're now going to add in, I still see butter, maybe I should have gotten out

 my hand mixer, but I'm so happy since I had my carpal tunnel release that I can do hand

 mixing again, that I just don't like to bust it out when I don't have to.

 How about these beautiful purple Tupperware measuring cups that Van sent me?

A teaspoon of baking powder, and a half of a teaspoon of salt, and a half

 mixing up really well is when you would add in a cup of pumpkin seeds or chopped pecans.

 so that means in a minute dinner will come out and these can go in.

 Alright, so it says to drop them by rounded teaspoonfuls, but I'm using my Silpat here

 12 to 15 minutes, or until it says you press it down, press it down, press it down, press

 it down, until almost no indentation remains when touched in the center.

 Okay, so these don't spread very much and in order to press them down I had to use the

 back of a wooden spoon dipped in flour each and every time because it's kind of sticky.

 But I'm not sure, I'm guessing that the reason it doesn't brown very nicely is of course

 you try it and next time I'm going to try it with real brown sugar and see.

 There's a lot of stories about who originally created the Mojito, but we're going to cover

 Now to make a Mojito, for each Mojito you're going to need a pinch of mint, a lime, an

 For your tools you're also going to need a jigger or a pour spout, depending on if you

 A cocktail spoon, a muddler, a colon-sized glass or any other glass, about 14 ounces,

 If you don't have a shaker, you can stir this drink instead of shaking it.

 You can also try to put two glasses together, but if you do this, please be very careful

 That's the reason why bartenders tend to use a metal shaker with a glass instead of two

 So to start, you're going to take a pinch of mint, about four or five leaves.

 If you squeeze it in and don't drop the whole lime in, it creates a lot easier surface to

 Now, when you're muddling, you are basically bruising the mint and the lime together.

 What you don't want to be doing is mashing it like a pile driver.

 What you're trying to do is get the essence and flavor of the mint out without crushing

 it up too much, because if you do that, you'll get the bitterness of the leaf.

 Next, we're going to add our two tablespoons of simple syrup and ice.

 If you're able to accurately pour, that is about an eight count.

 Please remember to drink responsibly, because while everybody wants to make friends, no

 When my first child was very young, when she was a baby, I used to love to make her baby

I would make all kinds of vegetables, steam it, puree it, do all kinds of things,

With one toddler running around and me trying to make two different

 in one steamer and purer and it makes your baby food in a snap.

 have older kids, I know what it's like to have to make food for the baby and also for

So, I'm going to teach you a little trick to make your baby food and

 then add a little bit of extra nutrition to your older kids' meals as well.

 making a sweet potato and carrot puree and then we will also be adding it to my older

 container with water up to the mark and I'm just going to add it in the water compartment

So, the way that I cut up my vegetables to use in the BabyBreadza is you want to cut

 and I just cut, cut, cut and there you have very, very nice even dice.

 has this really neat cutting board that comes with it that makes it so easy to add to your

I mean, have you ever had it on the thing and you're trying to scoop

We put the hole right above the BabyBreadza machine and we scoop

And then I'm going to use my nifty little cutting board and put it in there.

 I have a cup of my sweet potato already crunched up, diced and then I have my carrot.

 going to do a little bit more of the carrot here and then watch this guys.

I'm telling you, I would just have this out on my counter every night if I still

 had babies and I might even do it now that I don't even have babies.

 how I'm going to make their food a little bit healthier without them even knowing it.

 I've already put my water in and then all I do is press steam and blend and I'm going

 to do it for 20 minutes to make sure to get those sweet potatoes nice and mushy.

 So, we've steamed our carrots and our sweet potatoes in the BabyBreadza for 20 minutes

 and at the end of that 20 minutes it automatically blended it up into a puree.

So, we're going to open up our puree very, very carefully to avoid

I'm going to open it up and we have a beautiful sweet potato and carrot puree

 Alright, so I'm going to put some of that in my little baby bowl here and get ready

 I have my baby food all ready but I have left over so what do I do?

 really neat storage container so what you can do is you can spoon your puree into the

 storage container and I bet you're wondering why it's shaped like this.

 this because I can refrigerate or freeze this container and then when I'm ready to

 reheat it I can set this inside my BabyBreadza steamer, set it on steam and it will defrost

 I'm going to do is I'm going to put about two tablespoons of my puree into the macaroni

These vegetables are very rich in vitamin C, beta carotene, all kinds of

 the amount of puree that you add just to kind of get your kids used to the taste.

So, I'm going to add a little bit of extra cheese and I'm going to spoon it out

Now, when you're feeding kids vegetables, I like to hide vegetables

 but I also like to offer it to them straight so they get used to seeing it on their plate.

 So, we want to have a rainbow so I'm also going to serve it to toddlers with some broccoli

 play with it but they have a little bit of extra fortification in their macaroni and

 machine and if you want to get all kinds of great recipes and to know about everything

 Hey everybody, this is Dave from Cook and Share and today we're making up a cheesecake

 What I have here is some Oreo cookies and I'm going to use the whole cookie because

 What you need to do is put them in a mixing bowl and crush them up until they're nice

 You can use just about anything you want to crush them up with, in this case I'm just

 And this is about the way it should look and of course this is going to be our base.

 Then I'm going to add in two tablespoons of melted butter and I should mention that this

 I'm just going to fold everything together until I get a wet sand mixture.

 Now what we're going to do is add this to the bottom of a 5 inch springform pan, basically

 you can use anything you want or if you want to make a 10 inch you simply double the recipe.

 I'm just going to take my spatula and pat everything down so it's nice and flat and

 Okay, what I have here is 250 milliliters of whipping cream and just make sure that

 you chill this beforehand because it makes it a lot easier to work with.

 So what we're going to do is take our mixer and we're going to beat this until it basically

 doubles in volume and you have some nice peaks happening and this takes somewhere in the

 Now what I'm going to do is add 100 grams of cream cheese to a mixing bowl and you want

 Followed by three tablespoons of confectioner's sugar, a quarter teaspoon of vanilla extract.

 So we're just going to take our electric mixer once again and beat it until a nice

 Then we're going to add our whipped cream to the cream cheese mixture and beat it together.

 Next I'm just going to use my hands and break up a couple of Oreo cookies into tiny bits.

 It really depends on your preferences but this is about the way I like it.

 Then we'll add the cookie bits into the cream cheese and I'm going to take my spatula and

 So what I'm doing now is adding the cream cheese mixture to the springform pan.

 I'm going to fill this up basically until I reach the top of the pan.

 Okay we're going to finish this off by putting some small broken up pieces of Oreo cookies

 At this point in time what you need to do is put this in the fridge for a few hours

 You could even put it in the freezer and that would kind of give you an ice cream texture.

 And there you have it, our simple and delicious no bake Oreo cheesecake.

 Personally this is one of my all time favorite desserts because I love Oreo cookies.

 For the exact measurements head on over to CookandShare.com and stay tuned for more cheesecake

 Welcome back again to the Bavarian Soundworks video installation guide.

 and then we'll get up to the front doors in the front dash and go over the rest

 So it's good that we have this car here because I can show you the more

 So what we're going to do is take our panel removal tool and very carefully

 Be very, you know, keep in mind it's especially in the car where it's not wood

 it's going to pop out like so and you see it's just held in by one, two, three,

 four little pops here and that reveals one and there's a second Torx T 20 way

 cars with sunshades, there's one more screw hidden right back here.

 but now that we've made this video will no longer be tricky because I'm going to

 there's a little piece of metal coming off the door here and it kind of hooks

 So what we're in essence have to do is lift up that little piece of metal and

 I'm taking a right angle pick here and I'm going to have to put this light down

 But all I'm basically doing is getting my angle pick up in there,

 So we're just lifting it up and then the bottom part just unhooks.

 You can see it's just a little divot there that slides into this piece of metal.

 But all we're doing is we're just lifting up that piece and that's going to let

 feedback from most oftentimes shops saying they don't know how to do that.

 So remove this last screw and now the door is ready for removal.

 They didn't have any any fastening points down in this corner and they did this,

 Usually what I like to do is take my fingers in the hole where the light was and

 Now we get the door free and we just take our panel removal tool and we come

 there's a pressure tab right here in the center and I'll show you when I get the

 But here's where you really need to be careful when you're removing this because

 we're taking this door panel and we're coming outward with it and we don't want

 you see the way that this attaches is it just goes in these little metal clips

 And you can see here we've got a little light that we need to release by

 So we're just going to clip this off and we'll take it up to the, to the bench.

 but there's usually a little plastic piece right here that, or did it come off?

 Sometimes you sometimes have to rock this point to get the door panel off.

 I'll go ahead and cut this tweeter off and we'll take you guys to the bench and

 show you how to do the mid range installation as well as the mid base

 You can get this at Walmart for like $2 and really lather that on, put a bunch on, not

 like too much, but put a decent amount on and let it sit for a few days.

 And then what you want to do is of course get some water and wet it.

 And then get some laundry detergent and start scrubbing like this to get the laundry detergent

 Even if you don't use laundry detergent, you can use dish soap, put that dish soap on.

 So after you've applied the laundry soap or the dish soap or whatever kind of soap, just

 get a sponge or a brush of some sort and just completely scrub it, like hard, hard,

 Start to see it go away and when it dries it will look a lot better.

 So this is what it looks like now and I'm going to show you what it looks like when

 If you want those stains gone and you want the sweat stains and everything, just scrub

 I know I didn't get to show you because I had one hand but that's just the basis of

 You just scrub it hard and then you let it dry and then it will look like this.

 Sorry about no trip to the thrift yesterday but I mean that's all I got.

 I just wanted to upload a vid for you guys and I figured this would be a good one because

 Hey guys, today I'm doing a lesson on Shut Up and Dance by Walk the Moon.

 So Walk the Moon plays it with the capo on the first fret, so that's how I'm going to

 a G chord for example, I'll say put your finger on the third fret of the E string.

 Ok, so the song starts with the chorus with just a simple C chord.

And I put my pinky on the third fret of the B. Instead of a full

 I just play it with a barre chord, only playing the first few low strings.

 And it would be a really smart move to subscribe right about now, right over here.

 We have a lot of fun stuff coming up, including 7 days of Beatles songs in like 2 days.

 Hi, it's Stephanie at eFoodDehydrator.com and I'm here to dehydrate papaya.

 What you'll do is you'll select a nice firm papaya, peel it, and then you're going to

 You're going to dig out all of these seeds and then you're going to either use your mandolin

 Then you're going to lay these on your tray and they're going to dehydrate for some time

 With this Excalibur drying guide you can see what they would recommend for each fruit or

 There's currently six trays but I have a whole other papaya that I'm going to put in here

 But I wanted to show you how nice they look and I'll be back with the results.

 Papaya is about 90% water so this is going to take about 12 to 18 hours or so.

 But these look really great and I think they'll be the best fruit ever.

 And I've put up new information on efooddehydrator.com if you want to learn about papaya and why

 And just by hearing that, you know that it's at least 98% dehydrated.

 What I'll do is I'll bring over some papaya to some of my neighbors and friends because

 If you have any questions, please feel free to see me at efooddehydrator.com.

 And it keeps out air and oxygen and moisture and it keeps your food fresher longer.

 Hello, this is Connie Fanders, the Director of Education and Training for Bernina of America,

 To prepare your fabric or your jeans for hemming, you will first cut off the hem, and then you

 After you have one inch pressed all the way around your hem, you will open it back up

 This will leave you with a very nice half inch hem for your jeans.

 Sewing is very important when you're preparing your fabric for hemming.

 At the seam allowances, you may want to use a clothes pin after you're finished pressing

 Now to prepare your sewing machine for sewing in a hem for your jeans, the first thing you

 I like to use a jean stitch thread in the color that matches the stitching on my jeans.

 I am also using a jeans or a denim needle, and I use a size 100 or 110.

 The pressure foot that I'm using on the Bernina machine is the pressure foot number 8.

 This foot is especially designed for sewing over heavy and thick fabrics with your heavier

 Having just a single hole opening helps to stabilize that needle as it goes down through

 Therefore there is little play of that needle and less of a chance of that needle breaking.

 Also the bottom of the foot is designed to work with this heavier weight thread, and

 it helps to glide over that thread and that heavier stitching as you are hemming.

 For the stitch, of course, since it is just a single hole opening, we will want to use

 a straight stitch, and you want to lengthen your stitch length to match the stitch length

 Now we are ready to sew our hem, and I like to take the slide table off of my machine

 For the bobbin thread, I have used regular weight all-purpose thread, and on the top,

 When sewing the hem, you want to guide the fold of your hem along the half-inch line

 And I'm going to do a little backstitch at the beginning, and then continue to stitch

 Now sometimes when hemming jeans, the challenge is getting back up over this hump where your

 What's very easy to do with the machine, because you're going to stitch until the foot reaches

 that seam allowance, and you can see how it is slanted here because it is going up that

 There is a tool here that we can use to level out that pressure foot, and there are three

 I'm going to lower my needle into my fabric, and I'm going to slip this under the back

 So going through denims and these thick areas here is very easy.

 I'm going to start with the little red thread, 70 denier ultra thread.

 I'm going to tie in the breathers and the wire rib at the front of the hook and secure

 I've got both my breather material, which is Fluorofiber, Spirit River Fluorofiber,

 And I'll wrap those down as I work my way to the back of the hook.

 When I get even about where the barb is, I'm going to start back to the front, spin

 my thread so it lays flat, about a couple millimeters from the back of the hook, or

 Now, I'm going to take a Blood Red CDC feather from Nature Spirit, capture that somewhere

 I'm going to pull until I get just the tip of the feather left.

 And I'll take a little Blood Red or Red Dubbing, make a small ball for the thorax of the fly.

 And we're going to pull that CDC feather back over the thorax of the fly.

 And now, to make sure that those thread wraps aren't going anywhere, we'll take a little

 And if you want, you can even work a little bit of head cement onto the thread body.

 Make sure it doesn't get frayed too easily by the teeth of the brown trout you're going

 And there we have a nice little Blood Midge pupa, featuring that nice red hook.

 A great winter pattern for the Black Hills, but also any water that's got a lot of midges,

 We do have actual red midge larva, red midge pupa, but the fish, regardless of the actual

 color of the midges hatching, a lot of times prefer that nice bright red color.

 I'm Hans from Dakota Angler and Outfitter in Rapid City, South Dakota.

 Check these videos out at flyfishsd.com, and you can also purchase the materials to tie

 I should hold my hand about there for three seconds and it's not too hot.

 All you do is you want to put a little tiny hole in the top of one.

 The one I threw right on the coals cooked a heck of a lot quicker.

 Now, in order to create the interior air seal and the exterior weathertight seal, there's

 Some people prefer to leave it open to enhance future drainage of it.

 If you do use PU foam to use this gap, you definitely should use a tape to create the

 The PU foam might initially give you very good air sealing, but over time as the building

 shifts, we're slightly worried that the air sealing of the PU foam will get less good.

 So one of these tapes that we use for that is Siga Corbum, which is a pre-bent tape,

 so you can use it, it's pre-folded tape, so you can use it easily.

 Here we installed a piece of it, so you see how one leg of the tape goes onto your rough

 If you use a tape, just be extremely careful how you treat the corners, so the corners

 Another option that we like very well as well is using a Becker rod and sealant.

 And then for the sealant, you should use something that is compatible with the wet flushing you

 Prisoco, whose wet flushing we used here, sells a sealant called Air Dam, so you use

 The nice thing about this is that you can very easily make very, very good corners.

 Now if you use a sealant, use a proper tool to form the sealant bead so you don't have

 For the outside, you can either use another layer of sealant, as long as you leave some

 drainage holes at the bottom, or you can use a vapor-open tape such as Siga Weaglive on

 Another great manufacturer of tapes is Ilbrook with this Intello tape here.

 One end of the tape glues onto the side of the window and then the other end of it glues

 onto your rough opening and it has this extending seal here to deal with any movement.

 These tapes also exist in special versions to directly connect to your stucco finish

 The key to really remember is that you want to bring your air seal connection on the inside

 So in order to achieve that, a few steps to think through is first bringing your airtight

 You see here, just brought in with ProSoco Wet Flesh prior to the inside of the window,

 and then making a connection here either with a cork joint or with a tape.

 On the outside, you should only have the weatherproof connection, but it needs to be vapor-open

 because this inside is where the air sealing is happening and you do not want to create

 Okay, today we've got a 2006 Volvo S60 with a 2.5 turbo engine, 5 cylinder.

 It currently has a CEL, check engine light, or MIL, malfunction indicator lamp, stating

 The car is running well, so I don't think it's an actual pressure problem.

 It's held in with a Torx T25, and then it also has a little hose, pardon me, wire loom,

 This is important because when you take that out, you'll get sprayed with fuel if you don't

 I'm just trying to show you that there is fuel pressure, as you saw by it squirting.

 Normally I would close that off so that I don't get sprayed all over, but I'm just letting

 I do, however, have a rag to try to keep the fuel out from going all over the engine.

 Now, if you don't do this, when you go to pull it off, it's going to blow off over there,

 and it'd be a lot harder to clean that mess up than this one here.

 All right, so now that that's off, I'm going to take that same rag, take my T25 Torx.

 Actually, before you do that, you're going to want to remove the electrical clamp.

 Just be careful not to break the locking mechanism, otherwise it'll fall off when you're driving.

 If you look here, there's the one bolt for the screw, the T25 Torx.

 Usually I would put something like Vaseline on it to help it slip in without cutting it.

 I'm going to not show it, but you just stick this in, put your Torx on, check your maintenance

 Clamp it on, erase your code, leak check it after you start it up.

 While cooking the rice I have added 1 tsp of olive oil and a little salt.

 Your nice messages and compliments are my motivation to keep making new videos.

 Today I'll show you how to make peanut sticky rice, a simple yet delicious food.

 I use this rice measuring cup which is exactly 3 fourths of a cup.

 Then turn off the heat and wait until the pressure releases on its own.

 But if you don't have a special setting, it will turn out fine.

 As long as you use the correct ratio of glutinous rice, water and peanuts.

 You can eat it as is or top with shredded coconut and sprinkle with the sesame condiment.

 I presented how to make the sesame condiment in the red bean sticky rice video.

To get a sense of how I make it, let's actually look closely at it.

 And I suppose I could probably argue that it has to be the case if I thought about things like

 and whatever it does when it weaves through must end up back at the left position.

 So you see there's going to be some restriction on how many times it needs to cross over to get back to the start.

 So actually there's going to be some mathematical restrictions on how many crossings there need to be.

 Six crossings brings each strand back to its original position.

 I suppose I could do another six crossings and have a total of twelve and so on.

 Alright, so knowing there's going to be six crossings, let's use that to our advantage.

 So if there's something you want in life, my advice is just make it happen.

 So what I'm going to do is take this object and make those six good crossings and see what happens.

 But I might just push down the bottom stuff, just give myself some room.

 Alright, it is somewhat scrunched, but I have made for myself, right at the top here, six very good crossings.

 My thumb and forefinger are going to hold on to that position for dear life and never let go of the six good things.

 Below my fingers I have good space to make those six good crossings look better.

 Just turn it upside down because it's actually easier to play on this end.

 And I can see, voila, there is my beautiful braid with nice flat strands.

 It's not quite as neat as that one, but if I play it a bit further it will make it look neat.

 is it possible to make a braid of four strands with no fixed ends?

 Hey guys, I'm back, it's Rafael and I'm going to show you how you can add some foliage to

 Sorry I have to use my one hand and camera because I forgot my tripod.

 You don't want to get the plastic ones that look like, you know, real cheap ass.

 Or if you can find some that are silk, which I was unable to, that would be great too.

 So first what we want to do is, you know, we can leave these in here except for the

 Some of these are quite big as you can see but, you know, we may need to cut a little

 So right now I'm just going to, you know, put them in different areas just to get an

 Alright, so it's a little wobbly in the original hole so I got a smaller drill and this is

 And once the hole is ready just put the guy in there and there it is.

 And again I'm just going to be drilling everywhere where I want them.

 Either drill in the same holes I already have or drill in a new hole like, for example,

 Hey, Lucky Penny Shop here and it's time for another Valentine's item here.

 If you're planning on giving things for Valentine's Day maybe you'll like them.

 Are there any Pez collectors who are Lucky Penny Shop subscribers?

 but you know I just don't mention it because there's no reason to.

 you've seen my past videos I sometimes struggle with loading my Pez especially

 to hold them all in a stack like that and it's a different picture.

 description or just go to our channel and type in Valentine's Day.

If you want to find this item, click the link in the description

Thanks for watching and always remember if you see a lucky penny, pick

 And all I've done is just keep this dough moving this whole time.

 Anyway, you can see if you pull it apart, then it does feel sticky still a little bit there.

 Okay, my whole entire piece of dough here is covered with a fine film of flour.

 then I kind of check to feel what the dough feels like on the outside of it.

 And what I like to see and feel is just a little bit of moistness,

 I kind of say that it feels almost like the dough is sweating on you,

 which is probably a gross way to describe it, but that's kind of what it feels.

 it feels like just slightly moist, a little bit damp on the surface,

 If you pull open that drawer over there, you can grab the plastic wrap.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to get my bowl back here again,

 And I do this because it seems to work a lot better than just throwing a towel over it,

 And you can put it into a slightly warm oven if you want it to go a little faster,

 Hi folks, today we're going to be soldering copper wire, that is joining or making a joint

 Crimp connectors are adequate for some low amperage draw conditions, but we're working

 on a boat and in the marine environment, the better connection you can make, the less chance

 Take a razor knife, get the wire on a solid surface, place the knife on the insulation

 Once the insulation is cut, you can take a pair of pliers of almost any type and pull

 So anyway, we're going to take our wire, no magic here, two strip wires, we're going to

 We're going to take that wire and we're going to just immerse it in that paste and get a

 And I've got a pencil torch here, just a little torch I picked up at one of the local hardware

 And the reason I'm using this is it's just easier to control the smaller flame.

 You could use a bigger torch, but you're going to be melting insulation off wire and all

 And the point is to heat up the wire and melt the solder with the copper on the wire.

 These little torches are a lot more temperamental than the big ones anyway.

 Like I was saying, the point is to heat up the wire and let the wire melt the solder.

 Alright, to top off our little soldered wire project, I'm going to put some heat shrink tubing on it.

 Alright, to top off our soldered wire project, we're going to use some heat shrink tubing

 And a little bit of heat from the torch, it'll draw right up around it.

 Let me try to get in tighter on that so you can actually see the shrinking take place.

 And try to get the heat dispersed evenly around it so it draws up on all sides.

 I'm going to go ahead and do the end of it here, just so you all can watch it pull up.

 Hey guys, it's a beautiful, beautiful February 13th, Sunday evening.

 Hard to believe that four days ago I was standing outside and tears were literally freezing to my face it was so cold.

 Today I figured I'd fire up the grill and we're going to make some bacon cheeseburgers, but probably really not what you're expecting.

I really wouldn't recommend going anything leaner than, say, at least 20% fat content.

 Okay, so I told you I had about a pound and a half, a little over, of ground chuck.

 I like to go in a one-to-one ratio, so I'm going to add in about a pound and a half of bacon.

 This would be a good time to mention safety and using caution because, you know, these little grinders show no mercy.

 There's no telling how many people have lost or mangled fingers over the years with these things.

 And I'll tell you, if you think you know bacon cheeseburgers and you haven't made them like this, you don't know bacon cheeseburgers.

 And of course, of course, a little dash of Worcestershire sauce.

Any day of the week I usually take a little smaller than a baseball size.

 All the bacon itself is going to impart a flavor and moisture to these burgers.

 Like I said, if you've never cooked them this way before, do yourself a favor and try it out at least one time.

 You got your neighbors outside, when you throw all these suckers on the grill, they'll be thinking, what on earth are they cooking?

 A couple of final things here before I get ready to throw them on.

 I'm going to just kick back and let these do their thing for a few minutes.

 It's an opportune time to kick back and enjoy a cold beverage of your choice.

 I know we're running out of light, so I switched over to night vision.

 I like to put these, throw them right on before the burgers are ready to come off.

 Nothing beats a good cheeseburger on a freshly toasted kaiser roll.

 And I'm not sure how the color looks because it's too dark for me to see, but I'll tell you.

 If that doesn't look good to you, you need to go look for another channel to watch.

 Hey guys I'm Al and I'll be showing you how to change the optical drive which is

 it's almost plug-and-play and only involves four screws really and plugging

 it's actually really easy you put your fingers in and you just simply pull and

Now it's got a bit of a tug to it this is not usually made to come out but

 that tough so there they are and there's the normal SuperDrive.

 replacing that with a Pioneer Blu-ray drive which is just a normal optical

 got some extra screws for us but since I'm going to replace the drive entirely

 All right all you need is a nice little Phillips head screwdriver and then you

 Blu-ray has a front little panel where the disc drive comes out which is like

All you have to do actually is just pull that off which is really simple

 it's not that hard at all otherwise it actually can't fit through the optical

 drive front which would be a bit of a disaster if it keeps hitting on the drive

 sure you don't drop them so a nice magnetic head screwdriver like this

 All right last screws out and there's the super drive not really anything super

 drive make sure it lines up with the little screw holes and then we put them

 Now to play a Blu-ray drive because it's not natively supported in a Mac you are

 going to have to use a Mac Blu-ray player software and if you go to a site

 called Stack Social you can pick it up for about five dollars usually if it's

 on sale if not you can get it through the App Store for just a bit more than

 that it's not really that expensive and it does work for all video formats

 really but it's not as good as VLC player I find but then again VLC player

 Now as usual you don't tighten something too much but you don't want it

 All right give a nice little check make sure they're not too loose on either side.

 drive and the computer is on let's see if the computer can actually see it.

 we go up here and click about this Mac and let's go to the systems report.

 that's there let's actually put in a Blu-ray and see if it works.

Now I already have the Blu-ray software installed down here so once it

 And there you go that's how you install a Blu-ray drive in a Mac Pro.

 simple it's just plug and play really all you need is the software.

 Hi, I'm Natasha of NatashasKitchen.com and it's snowing in Idaho.

 I love this weather, it's beautiful but it's also cold and I know just what to make today.

 So let's go inside out of this weather and get some cozy chili going.

 First we're going to start off with two chicken breasts, either fresh or frozen.

 Then we're going to take a can of black beans, a can of white beans, a can of sweet corn,

 a can of diced tomatoes and green chilies, half a bunch of cilantro, a packet of cream

 cheese, a cup of chicken broth, two small onions or one medium onion, a packet of ranch,

 a tablespoon of chili powder, you can use less if you don't like spicy, and a teaspoon

 My co-worker Amaya shared this recipe with me and she told me that she uses frozen chicken

 breasts which is great because I always have frozen chicken breasts in my freezer.

 So I'm just going to take the two frozen chicken breasts and put them at the bottom of the

 Then open your can of corn and your can of tomatoes with chilies and just toss them right

 And top with your chili powder, your ground cumin, and your ranch seasoning.

 Pour in your chicken broth and place the cream cheese right on top.

 So our chili's been cooking for the past 6 hours on low heat and it's ready.

 You want to pull out the chicken and just shred it apart with forks or a knife, whatever

 And once you're done, put it right back into the slow cooker and mix everything together

 You can put it over rice, maybe over a baked potato, serve it with chips, whatever you

 Hello everyone, today we're making something called Brownie Reese Cookie Cups.

 I found this idea on Pinterest and I also received an email from a YouTuber who brought

 This is more of a technique than a recipe, but the end result is amazing so I'm going

 I used some with silicone liners and I also used a muffin tin that I just greased with

 I took the cookie dough, divided it among 18 of these muffin cups, about a tablespoon

 or so in the bottom of each, and I just pressed them into the bottom of each of the muffin

 Remove the paper and just gently press it into the cookie dough.

 I bought enough to make 12 of those with Reese's peanut butter cups and I had 18.

 So to use up the remaining 6, I just put some Oreo cookies instead of the peanut butter

 I just used one right out of the box, mixed it up according to package directions, put

 it in a Ziploc bag, cut the corner off, and then I'm just squeezing out some brownie batter

 to completely cover the peanut butter cup and the cookie dough.

 As it turned out, the brownie mix I used had just enough to cover 18 of these little cups.

 I just gave it a little tap to make sure the brownie batter was spread out evenly.

 Then I baked it at 350 degrees for about 30 minutes until the brownies were set.

 When I stuck a toothpick in, it came out with just a few moist crumbs on it.

 Now, with cookie and Reese's cups and brownies, I mean, just those ingredients, you know right

 My favorite were the ones with the peanut butter cup in the center because they were

 The ones with the Oreos were okay as well, but I found them to be a bit dry and a bit

 But if you have someone that loves chocolate and peanut butter and cookies and brownies,

 Hi, I'm Lou and today I'm going to show you how to fix a slow running corroded faucet.

 While we're at it, let's get this corroded shower head off too.

 On these kitchen faucets that have a pull out hose, make sure you put a clamp on it while you're cleaning the head.

 This stuff is basically calcium and lime that needs to come off of here.

 These are all acids that will eat away the calcium in varying strengths.

 It would take soaking this in for at least a week or more to get it off.

 You have to wear rubber gloves with it and be very careful with it.

 Start by pouring some acid very carefully into a little glass bowl.

 Now using your rubber gloves, take one of the heads you need to clean and dip it in.

 Rinse the acid off in running water and scrub it up with a brush a little bit.

 You can see it's a lot better already, but we need to send it in for another dip.

 To get rid of the old stuff, very slowly pour it into the sink with the water running.

 For this bigger one I'll just take the brush, dip it in a little acid and rub it on like that.

 Here in this side of the sink when I was diluting the acid with running water the whole time, everything's fine.

 Over on this side though, I had accidentally splashed some raw acid into the sink and didn't rinse it.

 I'm hoping I can sand these out with really fine grit sandpaper.

Looks like we won't be doing another video on how to replace a sink.

 Hi, I'm going to show you something today, real simple, and I'm going to talk a little

 bit about details, real small things that make a difference in a pot.

 I've thrown some cups here, here's a square cup I did, which I've just thrown in the wheel

 and then I pulled my finger up four times to square the cup off, put a few little lines

 But I wanted to show you first the rim of the cup and see how that rim just folds out

 slightly and comes out, just rolls out, and that makes it nice so the liquid will just

 pour right over that fold and go into your mouth just the way you want it to.

 I'm going to pull a couple handles, or I'm going to pull a handle and apply that handle

 So I've rolled out a piece of clay like this and I've rolled it just tubular, just basically

 And I'm going to wet my hand, put it around there and start pulling on it.

 And as I'm pulling I'm twisting it around and I'm also not pulling all the way down

 See how the end is staying thick and the waist of the piece is getting thinner?

 So I'm turning it around, I get it to the thickness that I want it to be, and then I

 That's okay, I'll probably switch to a different handle because this is big.

 I'm flipping it around and pulling on one side, making that nice strap, and flipping

 it over and turning to the other side and making that nice and even.

 It's thick up at the top, it thins out, makes a waist, and then it comes out again.

 And then finally, if I want to get some detail to it, I can take my thumb, the thumb nail,

 And then when you get these little ridges, the glaze is going to sit in real nicely.

 I just hang that like I hung all these handles down here, let it sit up for a while, and

 In the meantime, after I pulled, this was 22 handles, I pulled them and I went over

 I start at the beginning, the handle that I pulled first, and then we're going down

 Alright, now I'm going to put a handle on this square cup, squared off cup, and here's

 If I want it even thicker than that, I can take a paddle, or a roller, one of these,

 And I can do the same thing at the other end if I want to, but, well, let's do it,

 Okay, you can see the little lines in there, very, very shallow detail.

 And I'll take some slip, put it on the handle, put it on the cup, top and bottom, hold it

 You can feel the slip grab and it's going to hold it tightly onto the cup.

 And I flip it around and I look at the bottom and I want to make sure that that sort of

 So it makes a nice transition from the handle back down into the cup.

 You may want to do that, and a lot of people do, but I want to see a seam there.

 I'm going to fold it around like that and bring it back into the cup.

 But that's a little bit thick for me, so I'm going to do a little bit of a pull on it.

 And this is a little bit long, so it's going to end up being more like that.

 I could have taken that and flipped it all the way around and brought it straight into

 the cup, and I would have had basically the same transition in the bottom as I do in the

 Sometimes I'll flip the handle in so that it's filled in just by the way that I position

 But if I put it on at an angle like that, it's not filled in that way.

 So I just rolled out this sort of football shape, and I'm going to squeeze it so that

 Take a little bit of slip and drop down there in between the handle and the cup, and then

 Push it down slightly, and then just pull it over with your finger like that.

 Now you've got that top part up in there that's not smooth at all.

 Just take a wooden tool, a wooden dowel that's been sharpened, and then pull it into the

 I could add, some people hate this, but sometimes I'll put a little thumb grip up at the top

 Another one of my inventions here, not really, just something I kind of threw together because

 I use, they're available in two sizes, either the eighth inch tubing or the sixteenth inch

 The sixteenth of an inch I use for the steam engines that I was building.

 I got kind of busy with those so I'm not really making those much anymore.

 But basically, 1032 threaded, so you just tap a 1032 hole in your steam engine.

 It does come with a tube, I include one foot of tube, that just pushes over that.

 And on the other end is a quarter inch connector, so like for your quarter inch hose.

 Or if you have an air regulator, you can use that like a carburetor.

 And adjust the air flow that you want to go to your engine and make it run faster or slower.

 And depending on your fitter, your fittings in the regulator, you can order the female

 If you have any questions, there's an ebay auction, which this video will be on.

 Basically the male kit will come with threads on the outside, so if you're screwing it into

 And like I say, you can order your choice of the sixteenth inch tubing, which is great

 The eighth inch, you know, is pretty great for the pneumatic cylinders.

 And it's a quarter inch hex to tighten them down on both of them.

 And for like the little air cylinders and stuff, these are awesome.

 What you'll get with your kit is, like I say, when you pick your size, will be the small

 So either the female or the male, plus the little one, plus I throw in a foot of tubing

 And I'm trying to make that pretty clear on the listing as well.

 The tubing is rated 85 durometer, 120 degrees Fahrenheit, up to 105 PSI at 100 degrees Fahrenheit.

 What we're going to go through now is the raft, which is the flavorification part.

 What we have in here is minced chicken, minced vegetables and egg white.

 Now we're going to give that a little whisk, bring it together.

 The stock has to be cold for the simple reason that as soon as the egg white touches the

 stock it will coagulate, and that's not what we're looking for.

 Now you can agitate, mix or whisk the consomme only up to boil.

 And what we're looking for is a small hole in the top of the raft for the consomme just

 to turn, and that's where the impurities will come up, get trapped into the raft and

 We'll bring this up to the boil, stirring occasionally, not all the time.

 Okay as you can see it's now come up to the boil and I'm just waiting for the stock just

 Now it's essential that it moves, if it doesn't move there's no filtration.

 Now I've got that I'm just going to pull it to one side and leave that to cook.

 Take on the flavour of the aromats and the chicken for about 20 minutes.

 Now the consomme has cooked, infused some flavour from the raft and more importantly,

 What we're doing now is it's been left to rest for about 10 minutes just so the raft

 Now it's going to be passed through a chinois but into the chinois we've got a very clean

 Now this kitchen towel has been rinsed under cold water, wrung out so it's not too wet

 Consomme is really an old classic but for me consomme is still relevant to today's modern

 You can set them into jellies with agar and use them in hot preparations or even cold

 But consomme still have an important role in the cooking of chicken.

 When you get to the last part of the consomme, be very very careful not to disturb the raft.

 You're going to do a lot of effort to make the stock, a lot of effort to clarify the

 stock and to get that lovely, lovely, lovely, lovely, lovely, lovely, lovely, lovely, lovely

 stock and to get that last ladle full out may make the whole consomme cloudy.

 Okay, there's a small amount of sediment left in the bottom of the tea towel.

 I don't really want to force that through, just let it work through naturally.

 And if you have something that's a little bit fatty, for example game or duck, a small

 amount of vinegar in the raft will help with that retention of fat in the raft.

 In today's tutorial I'll be showing you how to achieve perfectly smooth matte nude lips.

 With the matte lips being the in thing at the moment, everyone's concern is how to get

 them perfectly smooth and ready for the matte lipstick application.

 There are a lot of factors that can contribute to dry and chapped lips, such as change of

 climate like cold weather, frequent use of the air conditioning, dehydration and in my

 I always put my lips first when it comes to lip makeup application and this is why I make

 sure that my lips are always well exfoliated and well moisturized before I apply my lip

 It's time to begin with the tutorial and I hope you guys enjoy this video.

 For this I will need a damp face cloth and a chapstick dual ended hydration lock day

 This lip balm is amazing, I've never seen anything like it before.

 It's dual ended and each side has an advanced formula proven for healthier looking lips.

 It comes in two varieties, day and night and moisturized renew.

 I will apply the night side first, which contains tamano oil and coconut oils as well to really

 Next I'm going to take the damp cloth and rub the lips gently to exfoliate the dry skin.

 To bring back moisture to my lips and protect them from the sun, I will apply the chapstick

 dual ended hydration lock the day side and this also preps them for the lipstick application.

 The day side contains a moisturizing formula and an SPF of 12, which is perfect for keeping

 I will let my lips soak the goodness of the chapstick for a few minutes before applying

 Now that my lips are perfectly smooth and moisturized, I will show you guys how to achieve

 First I will line my lips using Soar lip liner by MAC and fill them in slightly.

 Next I will take this gorgeous matte shade and apply it all over.

 To plump up the volume of the lips I will take the matte nude shade.

 This one is Honey Love by MAC and I'm going to apply it to the center of my lips.

 To give it a bit more volume, I will contour the sides of my lips using Whirl lip liner

 If you are using a matte lipstick that is extra matte and dry, you can also use chapstick

 Now I'm going to show you how I remove my lipstick and how I keep my lips moisturized

 I use a cotton round and eye makeup remover or just a regular makeup remover to wipe the

 lipstick and then I apply the chapstick dual ended hydration lock nightside to nourish

 and moisturize my lips while I sleep so I wake up with smooth lips.

 Thank you so much for the love and support for my channel and thank you for all the comments

 Hey guys, Hack Tutorials, and I'm going to show you how to clean your PS3's thermal paste

 So for this, obviously your PS3 has to be taken apart, I just finished downgrading it.

 You're going to need some thermal paste, which there are different kinds of thermal paste,

 I don't know if you can see, but it's like silicone heat sink compound.

 Generally for PS3's, people like to use something like Arctic Silver 5 or MX4, go get yourself

 This is isopropyl, I don't know exactly how to pronounce that, but it's 91%.

 So as you can see, we have some compound on our CPU and RSX, and then also on our heat

 So all you've got to do is take some of this rubbing alcohol, you want to just get a little

 Well Sony does an absolutely horrible job of applying thermal paste, and they use very

 So it does not transfer heat very efficiently, and it will probably result in the yellow

 You might see a little bit of staining, stainage, I don't know how to say it, but it could stain

 That's okay, you can't get the stain off, but as long as you get all the actual compound

 You can see it reads, this is cell, that's the CPU, and RSX, so that's the RSX, GPU

 So if you can't see the lettering, then you didn't do a good enough job.

 So now, I'm going to move this to the side, and here are the heat sinks.

 You can always wash these cloths, obviously, so rub it off the same exact way.

 These are a little bit easier to maneuver because they're not sitting on a motherboard,

 Also try and avoid getting your fingers all over the heat sinks, which I'm pretty stupid

 and I am, but obviously your skin has natural oils and we want to eliminate that, we don't

 I'm going to put a little bit more, it's very stained there as you can see.

 Okay so that's off, again you can see the black stain, that's okay, as long as there's

 So we don't actually put the thermal paste on the heat sinks, all we do is we put them

 So get your thermal paste compound, that's just a tube of compound.

 We want to do is get a pea sized dot in the middle, so just place it right in the middle,

 you don't want to spread it around or anything, just a small dot.

 Okay that's all you need, just right in the middle, you don't spread it around with your

 finger or with a card or anything, just leave it in the middle just like that.

 This way it will evenly distribute around your CPU and RSX, because when you actually

 put the heat sinks on, they pressure this down and it kind of squishes it so that it

 And if you were to spread it around yourself you'd probably get some air bubbles, we don't

 Alright, so this video is kind of part of a four video series where I show how to take

 apart a PS3, downgrade it, replace thermal paste and put it back together.

 So I still have one more video after this to make and that's how to put it back together.

 So I'm not going to actually begin putting this back together, I'm going to leave it

 So if you want to see how to put it back together, go ahead and click on that video, it's on

 And yeah, or you can just put it back together yourself, however you'd like, but I'll show

 Hey everybody, today on Henry's How To's I'm going to show you how to make Persian Chicken

 Okay, for this recipe I'm going to be using chicken thigh mince, specifically because

 it's much fattier than breast mince, so when we're barbecuing it will get more flavour.

 If you don't like the taste of it, go ahead and use breast mince, but I'm going to tell

 So I've got 2 kilos here, to that I'm going to be adding in 1 diced onion, preferably

 And to the mixture there, we're going to be adding in 2 tablespoons of salt, and 2 tablespoons

 of red sumac, 1 teaspoon of black pepper, about half a tablespoon of turmeric, about

 a teaspoon of ground chilli, about 1 tablespoon of lime juice, and I will go ahead and mix

 this all together, just with your hand, just to get it a bit combined before we add anything

 Okay, now we're going to be adding in 1 tablespoon of saffron water, basically this is saffron

 You want to mix it as well as possible so all the flavours are even, we don't want one

 And the more you mix mincemeat, the better it's going to skewer.

 Okay, so that's what we're left with now, so we'll go ahead and get started on skewering.

 Okay so we've got 2 ways of doing this, one way is just the Australian way where we can

 just make them into little patties and fry them in a pan, but we're going to do it the

 Persian way, which is to skewer it, so basically get yourself a bowl of hot water, and get

 your meat right next to you there, and we'll go ahead and skewer it.

 Okay, now just note this does take a lot of practice, but once you get the hang of

 it it's very very easy, I pretty much do 100 of these every day.

 So put your hand first into the water to get it wet, and you're going to grab about a handful

 In your hand, you want to just work it into a really large meatball.

 So get it nice and round like that, now grab a flat long skewer like this one, and as you

 can see, I'm just making it a bit smaller, almost like a sausage shape.

 So now what we're going to do is get our skewer, and put it into the middle of it, and just

 And then just push down gently, wet your hand again, now just start skewering it.

 Get your hand wet again, flip it over, repeat the same thing again.

 We don't want it too thick, because it's not going to cook all the way through.

 We don't want it too thin, because then it will just be too crispy.

 As you can see it's completely skewered on, and now we can repeat the process again.

 Now for the sake of the video I'll just do one just to show you guys, but all you're

 Now once it's hot, all you do is put your skewer on, just like that.

 Now because we're dealing with minced meat, after say 10-20 seconds we'll just flip it

 When you're practicing with this, it is going to fall off every now and then.

 It used to fall off for me every day, but once you get the hang of it and you learn

 As you can see one side is sealed, so we'll just let that side cook as well now.

 Okay now we can flip it again because this side will be sealed and let it cook.

 So just let that cook, basically until it gets brown on both sides.

 So as you can see the bottom side is starting to turn very brown, so that side is cooked.

 So I'll just flip it and leave it on the other side and we're just going to let that

 So I'll just set that to the side and we'll go ahead and take it off the skewer.

 Now the trick to stop it from falling apart is, at the top, push it down like that and

 Please like and subscribe to my channel or leave any recipe suggestions you have for

 In the meantime, we have another cookie here, a mitten, and we're going to use a similar

 technique with the fondant, but in this case I'm going to split up the fondant colors,

 In this case I'm going to roll out a little bit of purple fondant.

 This is really only for the demonstration purpose, but if you do store them together,

 I'm just going to knead my fondant a little bit, just to get it all smooth before I roll

 If it is sticky, you can use a little bit of shortening to help you, or a little bit

 We're going to take our mitten, and I'm going to cut out the shape.

 Very similarly to making the hat for the snowman, I'm going to use the pizza cutter, and I'm

 going to slice off this portion of the mitten, because I'm going to do it in a different

 So I'm just going to take this and put it back on my back, and we'll take the top portion

 You can either fill this in with some royal icing, or we can use another piece of fondant.

 And the reason I'm doing this versus just laying the other color on top is it makes

 it look very smooth and seamless, versus this sort of 3D effect you get with the hat on

 Okay, so in this case, I think I'm going to put a red little wristband on him.

 And with the fondant smoother, we're just going to smooth the two seams together.

 So now you have a cute little mitten with two colors, the same thickness.

 You can even cut out, you know, circles and then fill them in with the red if you wanted

 Or you can make stripes, depending on how intricate you want them.

 Hi, it's Nigel McTrustery here and here I am with one of my twin tone SCAR cigar box

 It's got the twin tone neck happening, box, pick up and twin humbuckers.

 This is Wally's twin tone, I mean twin humbucker mother plucker.

 Before it goes I want to do a short video, some Jamaican blues.

 Now the key to this one is the foundation of the song is that, so I'm just down on the

 thumb on the G and up with that finger on the other two strings or three strings or

 That's what I'm doing, you can do it with a pick but in SCAR and reggae that up and

 And what you're doing is you're going 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4.

 And the little thing where the singing comes in or when you come back from the 7th.

 The first, the one is the open G, open D and then the open high G up to the third.

 And if you want to see more videos like this, please subscribe to my channel.

 Well there is a little bit I throw in in the chorus but it's just once you got that foundation happening.

 This is just a short video explaining the chords for How To Make Gravy by Paul Kelly.

 The next chord, you'll slide your index finger up one fret to the second fret of the third string.

That's an F sharp minor 11 for the people that care about such things.

 Once again, we've got the top two strings ringing out through there.

 And what Paul does is he plays the E chord, F sharp minor 11, E major 7, back to F sharp minor 11.

 The other section of the song, it's not really a chorus, whatever we call it.

 But, what we'll do is we take an E chord shape and we go all the way up to the 6th fret.

 Now what I'm going to do though is suggest that you use this fingering for that.

 I'm going to use my middle finger on the 3rd string and then use my ring finger and pinky.

 And I'll make it just a little bit easier to go from there to there using that fingering.

 The other chord in the song, we take that shape and we slide it up now 2 frets higher.

 And I'm going to bring my index finger up this time and I'm going to put that on fret 7 of string 6.

 Say you've got a manual transmission and you're driving down the road and you notice that

 your clutch is starting to grab higher and higher up in the travel of the clutch pedal

 Is there a way to deal with this, aside from replacing the clutch?

 Now there are several different types of clutch mechanisms that are out there, varying from

 One category would be mechanical, the other category would be hydraulic.

 We are going to adjust a mechanical style, specifically a cable style clutch on this

 Now if it's a mechanical system, it works similar to this in that you want to increase

 And the reason for this is you want to back the clutch mechanism off far enough so that

 The pressure plate is actually what holds that clutch in place whenever you release

 So what we're going to do is we're going to allow that clutch to grab a little bit better.

 And also we're going to make it so that the clutch pedal grabs a little further down on

 Now it may get to a point where it no longer has any adjustment left, and if that's the

 To alleviate that expense, time and effort, you might want to try adjusting it.

 And today we're going to adjust the cable clutch on this 1990 Integra.

 Really you need to consult a manual on your specific vehicle for how to adjust the clutch.

 But once again, for the most part, what you're looking to do is loosen it up.

 Where you adjust the clutch cable on this particular car is right there.

 That clutch cable runs from the firewall all the way over and snakes down to that point.

 Now what we want to do is we want to make it so that that clutch moves real nice.

 The way I do this is I'll pull up on the cable until I feel some tension down on the shift

 And I'll just keep running the nut down until it makes contact.

 And what I'm looking for is really just a slight movement on the pedal.

 Once I think I've got it, and when I say slight, I want it slight so that I know that the clutch

 Now I'm going to go inside the car and step on the clutch pedal a couple of times so that

 But also I want this rubber piece to seat in and I want the rubber down here to seat

 So if I hit the clutch pedal a couple of times, that will seat those parts.

 When you come back, you may find that it's a lot looser than it was when you started,

 You want to make sure that when you release the clutch pedal, it's fully released so that

 the throwout bearing is not still riding on the fingers of the pressure plate.

 So once again, I'm going to go in, hit the clutch pedal a couple of times.

 See if the clutch is a little bit better and maybe clutch is a little closer to the floor

 It will come to a point where you no longer can adjust and it's time to replace the clutch.

 But for now, this may get you by and make it so that you don't necessarily need a clutch

 You can find some of those things online sometimes for your specific vehicle on how to adjust

 And you don't need to have so much play in there that you push the clutch pedal halfway

 I'm Eric, the Car Guy, and I'm here to help you with your car issues.

 If you would like, you can always leave me text or video responses.

 Okay, so I'm going to try to assemble this as quickly as I can.

 So what I'm going to do is put this piece in that has the inner O-ring in it.

 And that's what I'm going to try to drop down in there into position, if I can do it.

 And sometimes it will just land right down in there where you want it to.

 And I'm going to use the screwdriver to try to get that up into its position and down

 And so once I've got it down there, I'm going to tighten that down.

 Now you're going to have to come back and readjust this because we don't know how tight

 The next thing I'm going to do is just probably put the air assembly valve all together.

 I'm going to put that into the bottom of the gun, screw that in by hand.

 We've talked about before that has to seal good and why that O-ring is there.

 And it comes with a tool, or I'm just using these pliers here that I can use.

 And you just slide that around and it has only one position that it'll fit.

 Don't go too tight with it because you don't want to crush everything.

 Now the trigger, we want to set this in so we want our angled grooves to the front.

 So set it in and you can literally visually line that up and put that into position.

 Boy, it's very easy, especially for us old airbrushers that can't see anymore.

 And that is for that reason so it doesn't slip down into the gun body in usage.

 Which makes it very unique in the fact that this gun won't have that problem.

 Okay, sometimes this will catch right on the edge like it has there.

 What's happened is that that stopped because there's an edge there.

 I can actually push my trigger back and get it beyond that edge and continue to tighten.

 It's just the nature of the way those parts are and how they fit together.

 So you have a varied room to increase the tension a little bit on the spring.

 Now I'm going to have to take all that back out when I try to make an adjustment.

 And I'm feeling right now, what I'm doing is I'm trying to feel how much tension that I have on that O-ring that's inside there.

 Because if I'm using solvent based, I do not want that solvent getting back in there as we talked about before to that O-ring that's in the air mechanism.

 I always recommend that you use a lubricant because that way you can get that a little bit tighter.

 And what that will do is allow that to slide in and out of the gun better.

 You know, that actually feels pretty good, so I'm going to leave it at that.

 Now, here's something about these open areas that you see in these handles.

 And a lot of times they use that for yanking back on it when you're flushing the gun out because it can pull it back pretty far.

 But what you want to look for here is that, and why it has an O-ring on there, a rubber O-ring,

 you don't want to have it setting like this because your finger can rub against that while you're pulling your trigger.

 And what that does is creates pressure against the side of that.

 And that side pressure is pushing parts against parts and is causing wear inside the gun.

 So you want to make sure that you are in that position so that on the side of the gun has a piece of that metal

 That way your finger slides along the side and you're not interfering with the gun mechanisms at all by your finger.

 I like to use the plastic caps more so than the metal caps because as paint gets old and you've been using the gun

 and it gets around these parts and it dries, sometimes it's very difficult to get these off.

 That's why they're knurled on the edges so a lot of times people hook pliers on them and yank them off.

 And what happens there too is you can pull it and sling paint all over the place.

 With the plastic cap you can literally grip it and peel it away.

 But there you have it in what I think is the finest automotive airbrush in its price range.

So anyway, I just wanted to shoot that real quick because that is a

 There seems to be a lot of confusion about how I'm able to generate that water down

 the drain effect with using slow shutter speeds and I'm here today to clear that up once and

 Hi, I'm Brian Peterson, author of Understanding Shutter Speed as well as Understanding Exposure

 and Understanding Close-Up Photography as well as Brian Peterson's Field Guide to Understanding

 I've picked a really great location of which there are thousands like this throughout the

 United States if not the world and these are walls of graffiti.

 The technique I'm about to show you I've certainly done a great deal amount of work in too with

 botanical gardens and just gardens in general at your local parks, even backyard flower

 gardens that perhaps you're familiar with if you do not live in an apartment.

 Nonetheless, this technique is a simple technique and yet it needs to be shown.

 Now before we get started, there's a couple of things that need to be addressed.

 If you have a camera that goes to 100, I'd strongly recommend using that as well.

 In addition, even after using the lowest ISO and even after going to the smallest f-stop

 which, in this case 22, will always force the slowest shutter speed that doesn't necessarily

 guarantee me that shutter speed that I need to pull off this effect.

 I put it on the front of the lens and what it does, it reduces the light that's now able

 Without this filter and the meter reading off this wall, I'm at f-22 at a 15th of a

 second but I need to be down to a quarter if not a half a second to do the effect I'm

 Now the effect I'm about to show you that looks like water going down a drain is a real

 simple trick I fought until people started telling me, I read how you do it but I still

 I face the wall, I've got a composition, camera to the eye, I'm at f-22 and my shutter speed

 What I'm going to do is start at the widest, in this case 12, and I'm going to zoom but

 while I zoom during the exposure, I'm also turning the camera in the opposite way.

 Notice that spinning going down the drain like water down a drain effect.

 You are going to go to your widest, then you're going to go to, in this case, 12 to 24.

 But as you zoom, you're going to go the opposite direction with the camera, okay?

 I'm going to have to go to 16 in this case to keep my exposure at a third because it's

 Until next time, this is Bryan Peterson saying, you keep shooting.

 on today's session is an Afghan cuisine and the name is Birani Köthalur.

 Köthalur means potatoes and on this recipe it is sautéed in a tomato sauce and served

Please note that some people use just a raw potato to sauté in tomato

Please make sure that you just peel the potatoes first, cut into two and

So at the same time I'm going to use about 1 tablespoon of tomato paste.

 the onions take the form of pinkish or brownish, it's been about few minutes I've been stirring

 Just a half a teaspoon of turmeric powder, half a teaspoon of coriander powder and salt

 cup of water to this and salt is to your own taste, so just a little bit.

 that you see on top is some more dehydrated mint, which is a dry mint I have sprinkled

Usually you serve this with any type of bread, naan bread, pita bread, afghan bread.

 Hey everyone, it's June and today I am making the most delicious, listen to me when I tell

 You need a quarter cup of extra virgin olive oil and a tablespoon of hot sauce.

 It's getting a little messy here, but you'll see what I'm doing because it's delicious.

 What I'm going to do right now, just to make it a little more smoother, I'm going to put

 And I put a tablespoon of olive oil and a quarter cup of hot sauce.

 I don't know why they do it, but I guess presentation is, oh, hello, tripped, is like the whole thing.

 I think I have to invest and get a bigger, a bigger food processor.

 I don't want to subject you to all the noise, so I'm going to stop right now and I'll show

 So, what I didn't tell you in the beginning is that you had to put a tablespoon of fresh

 And this would be great for dipping veggies, putting on your salad.

 Well, I'm going to put this in the refrigerator because as you know, when you have avocado

 So, I want to put this in a nice container that is kind of sealed, maybe like one of

 Maybe you can tweak it up a little bit, put your own little ingredients in there.

 I'm going to put this in the refrigerator right now and I'll see you in my next video.

 Hi, I'm Bridget Palmer and I'll be bringing you fresh ideas with what to do with those last two ingredients in your fridge.

 Apart from the salmon, you should have pretty much all these ingredients in your kitchen already.

 Click here for the full recipe and to add all the ingredients to your trolley when you shop online.

 We're using fresh salmon for these patties and you can ask the folks at the seafood counter at Woolies

 Nice and fine and to get some flavor into these patties, grate half a red onion on a paper towel because it's going to absorb

 Then finely grate a two centimeter piece of ginger and add to the bowl along with two tablespoons of fresh chopped parsley.

 Two tablespoons of select whole egg mayo and a tablespoon of lemon juice and

 To make this dish even easier, buy the ingredients online and have them home delivered.

 I'm using a quarter cup measure and I find it really helps to give it a little spray with olive oil so that the salmon

 While the salmon patties are chilling, I'm going to whip up a super easy tartare sauce.

 one tablespoon of lemon juice and a tablespoon of chopped fresh parsley, salt and pepper and

 You can click here for more super easy fish and seafood recipes just like these easy salmon patties and these are ready to turn.

 These salmon patties make the best salmon burgers topped with some shaved cucumber, salad leaves and crispy white rolls.

 I'm going to serve these salmon patties with some fresh lemon wedges and that gorgeous tartare sauce we made.

 Hi everybody, this is Diana from Sweet Y Salado and today we are going to make a coconut limeade,

 which is a very popular drink in Colombia, especially in the northern part of the country.

 It's really easy to make and the link for the recipe is going to be available at the

 And then we are just going to squeeze the juice out of the limes and put it in the blender.

 If you like this video, don't forget to give it a thumbs up and subscribe to this channel.

 And if you want to check out the recipe, you can click where it says Coconut Limeade Recipe.

 Thanks everybody for watching and I hope to see you all next time.

 Fly fishing from your canoe is all about balance and technique.

 If you're tandem, make sure that only one person is standing at a time or both stay seated.

 To start the cast, pick up your line by slowly raising the rod tip up to 12 o'clock.

 As your leader is about to leave the surface of the water, pull back your hand, snapping it to a stop at the 1 o'clock position.

 As you feel the line pulling back on your rod tip, loading the rod, start your forward cast.

 Leading with your forearm and stopping with your thumb print pointed at where your target is.

 Making sure your line unfolds evenly is all about the power snap.

 You want to snap your wrist forward with your thumb print pointing towards your target and your pinky pulling in.

You're pushing the door open with your thumb, the button, and then pulling the door handle away with your pinky.

 Don't cast side to side in the boat because all that will do is throw off your balance.

 If you want to cast in a different direction, just turn the bow.

 Line management is one of the hardest parts about fly fishing, especially if you're fishing from a boat or a canoe.

 Before you start every cast, make sure your line is coiled and piled neatly at your knees or at your feet.

 Using these tips will let you combine two great art forms, canoeing and fly fishing.

 I'm Ben DeChaney, the web editor at kayakangler magazine, and I'm hoping you paddle forever and fish longer.

 I've noticed over time, looking at some of the comments on videos that I put up, that

 a lot of the viewers are not familiar with using some, what I would consider to be, some

 So it's the old adage, really, if no one has showed you how to use something, then how

 So I'm going to do a little series of videos on how to use some basic tools, as far as

 In this video, which is going to be the first video that I'm going to do on using some very

 Now, this might seem pretty basic, but like anything else, if no one's ever shown you

 how to use one, little tricks to using it, then you wouldn't know how to do it.

 So this is commonly called a cat's paw, sissy bar, pry bar, whatever.

 So if you don't have one, I know in Canada here they're less than $10 generally, you

 should get one if you plan on doing any amount of do-it-yourself type projects.

 So I'm going to illustrate how to use this on this door, which we're going to replace

 So what I want to show here is if, just going to stick this down here for a minute.

 If I didn't have the pry bar and I wanted to replace that hinge, what I'm going to have

 So I'd have to position that hinge like that, and I'd have to either try to hold that door,

 which isn't going to happen because I'm going to be driving the screws in there.

 So I'd have to get somebody else to hold this door into place, because it's too far away

 Firstly, if you have somebody holding the door like this, you're kind of dependent on

 them to hold that door properly without you getting your fingers caught in between the

 So what we do is I'm going to take the trusty pry bar underneath and I'm going to get this

 Another high tech tool that's super handy when you're doing home reno stuff, shingles.

 So the first thing I always do if I'm working around the floor or something like that, any

 surface that I don't want to damage, I set a little piece of shingle there.

 That way you're not driving this pry bar into the floor or whatever.

 you could take the two wide ends like that and lay them like that.

 When you put them together, you've basically got a flat surface here.

 And when you're working, let's kind of experiment with it a bit, right?

 With everything that's happening with the National Archery in the School program, as

 well as Hollywood incorporating bows and arrows onto some of the biggest blockbusters on the

 And Easton has now introduced an awesome beginner bow and a beginner bow kit that's perfect

 Now this beginner bow set is going to be complete with not only a bow that can be shot both

 right-handed and left-handed, along with the components for the bow including the arrow

 rest and your sight pin, but it's also going to have an arm guard, a finger tab, as well

 as a hip quiver complete with three high-quality Easton arrows.

 This is the perfect set to get anyone started the right way in archery.

 Let's take a little closer look at everything you get with this complete set for only $99.

 Your seven-piece Easton archery set is going to include everything that you need to have

 First off, the bow, it's molded after the same style of bow that even the top-level

 This bow has a 10 to 20-pound draw pull, and it's available to be drawn up to 26 inches

 What's super unique about this durable bow is that you're able to either shoot it right-handed

 or left-handed, depending on which side of the bow you apply the arrow rest that's included

 Now, if you're holding the bow looking at it, if you're a right-handed shooter, you're

 If you're a left-handed shooter, you're going to apply the arrow rest on the right side

 From there, your kit also includes a sight pin that can easily be installed right here

 Simply loosen the nut, slide the sight pin through that slot, and tighten the nut on

 And then you're going to be able to compensate up or down to aim perfectly with your new

 From there, we've got a great finger tab that's included for shooting arrows all day long,

 Now, the Eason Quiver that comes with the kit can hold up to 12 arrows, but it's going

 Make sure you take part, and the new Eason Archery Kit is the perfect way.

 Hi everyone, I'm Jonas Rammel, Oriflame's Global Beauty Artistic Director.

 And today we're going to talk about the new exciting brand, The One.

 But before you start putting on the actual makeup, always make sure you have a perfectly primed face.

 Because if you have a cleansed and moisturized skin, the makeup will stay fresher and look nicer throughout the day.

 I'm going to use a foundation brush, because that's the easiest way to get an even and professional application.

 And I always start in the center part of the face that needs most coverage,

 using small strokes, blending in the foundation onto and into the skin.

 When I'm finished with the center part of the face, I blend outwards to the corners of the face,

 towards the hairline, towards the jawline, to make a nice and even complexion.

 Always remember to go a little bit below the jawline and onto the neck, so you don't get any ugly creases.

 It's a foundation that has this beautiful, lightweight texture and gives the skin a very natural and beautiful finish.

 It also has light reflecting pigments in it, to make sure your skin will look good in any light.

 When you have a small imperfection that you need to cover, my best tip is to layer the concealer.

 So I always add a little bit of a concealer, and I let it set for a couple of seconds, so it dries.

 Then I reapply, and by doing this you get extra coverage and the imperfection is gone.

 To finish off our perfect base, I'm going to set the makeup by using Ilush Skin Powder,

 just to take away any shine that's unwanted, and also make the base a little bit more long-lasting.

 So use sparingly a little bit of powder in the T-zone, on the nose, on the sides of the nose, and on the chin.

 The Ilush Skin Powder is also your perfect product to bring with you wherever you go,

 to make sure you always have a fresh face and a fresh complexion for touch-ups.

 And so, our perfect base is done, using only the Ilush Skin Foundation, Concealer and Pressed Powder.

 I'm going to run through a quick tutorial this evening for you on the way I apply decals

 I've been asked multiple times via email, PM, Facebook to kind of show my technique.

 I've actually been doing this for a number of years, way back when I started doing sports

 A lot of the sports figures are very decal heavy because of uniforms.

 One of them you can see here, this is a Cal Ripken retirement figure I did a long time

 Everything you see here, the Orioles logo, the number 8, the little patches, even the

 stripe down the leg along with his name and number, those are all decals applied to the

 I'm going to show you how I do it on a Masterpiece Soundwave commission I'm working on.

 What this does is it actually melts the decal to a degree and it helps it conform into ridges.

 First thing you want to do is you have your decals printed out.

 Basically what I like to do is I like to cut with my X-Acto knife as close to the actual

 Basically that allows you to have less decal paper on your custom, especially in areas

 I already have some assembled over here that I'm going to show.

 This is basically Soundwave's knee decal or knee decoration if you want to say.

 So basically what I do now is I take my little pipette, I dip it in my water and I... about

 My desk has got a waterproof coating over top of it so it's actually pretty strong.

 I don't like doing that just for the off chance that it melts the paint.

 So basically all you do is you take your decal, drop it in your water.

 I dab it off on a paper towel and I'll let it sit for a little bit.

 You let it sit for a little bit to help the glue kind of soften on the back of the coating.

 I do a real quick dip in the Solvif set and it will actually start to melt it if you don't

 Now what some people will do is they'll take a little brush or so and kind of just brush

 You don't want to have a wet brush because you can actually pull the decal which I did

 Another thing you do after this, and this is just my technique, I take my finger and

 dip it in the water real light and I kind of just press the edges out.

 Why I didn't use water on the brush is because the bristles can actually grab the decal especially

 I don't touch it for a good hour or so, let it dry and then I clear coat it.

 Usually I like to do a brush on clear coat and then I will spray everything with a dull

 It does take some practice especially when you're using clear decal paper.

 If you don't transfer it from the paper to the object really quick it can fold up on

 So as always, if you have any questions get in touch with me through ProCustomizers.com,

 through my Facebook page or you can email me at info at customs by zee dot com.

 I'm going to do hopefully a panel lining tutorial in the next day or so.

 That will be another real quick one and look for the pictures of this sound wave commission

 Super quick mid-week dinner, dairy free, gluten free, sugar free.

 Takes 15 minutes to make and costs about 7 euros to feed 4 people.

 We've got one onion, we're just going to dice it up nice and fine.

 But you want it really nice and fine because it's super fibrous.

 Okay, last thing before we get this going on is just you want to cook your noodles.

 It combines wonderfully with the ginger to give that real Asian-y Thai flavour.

 You see why the onions are starting to break down there nicely?

 We've left our peppers cooking on high heat for about four to five minutes.

 I was meant to, with the noodles, add in these beautiful sugar snaps.

 You obviously don't need to add as much, and we mightn't add it all.

 This is the part where you take a good dish and turn it into a great dish.

 You can add in any kind of veg that you have in the fridge, really.

 Now this is basic Thai cuisine that experts and amateurs alike love.

 We're going to make a really great Pad Thai with some nice rice noodles today.

 What we're going to do, first of all, we have this nice big flat rice noodle.

 All we want to do, all we have to do is submerge it in a little bit of cold water.

 Or you can of course boil some water, season it up with a little bit of salt, and blanch

 it and that'll just take just a couple seconds, maybe 20 seconds, pull it out.

 Very very important that you put a little bit of peanut oil, a little bit of olive oil

 on it so that it doesn't stick when you pull it out of the water.

 Now, you can't have pad thai unless you have a scrambled egg in there.

 So what we're going to do is we have this wok on high high high heat because the whole

 thing about wok cooking is that you want to cook everything really really fast.

 You see, unlike a saute pan where you'd want it to be nice and thick to really hold the

 heat, the wok is designed to cook fast and it's got a very thin metal to it and a very

 very hot base to it along the bottom and you use the sides of the wok as well.

 Push the egg up on the side right there so it cooks really fast.

 Hi, I'm Rob Kingsbury with the ACKC Cocoa Bar and today we're showing you how to dip

 So for the finale, we're actually going to be doing the dipping and the decorating.

 So to start right off, I'm just going to grab some strawberries, dip them in different types

 of dark chocolate, show some of the different ingredients that you can have fun with as

 far as sprucing up your berries and giving them that wow effect.

 And then I'll finish off by doing some formal berries, the tuxedo berry and the wedding

 So easy enough, grab a berry, want to make sure that you pull back all the leaves.

 And you're going to hold the berry by the stem with the leaves when you dip it into

 Real easy, throw the berry in, allow some of the chocolate to fall back off.

 And say you're not bringing drips all over your counter work, hold it upside down, that

 way the chocolate's going to pull back down a little bit just because of the nature of

 And after we do a little dipping here, I'll put these in the refrigerator just for a couple

 of minutes just so the chocolate can set up and snap into place and be nice and firm.

 So anyways, we'll do one white chocolate, I'm going to do one milk chocolate, one dark

 chocolate just to get your taste buds watering and then we'll do a little more decorative

 So again, dip it in, allow gravity to work for you and then place the berry.

 The other thing with decorating with the strawberries is that it's nice to show a little bit of

 So just dipping and allowing the chocolate to come up about three quarters of the way

 gives you a nice look of chocolate, the berry and the green stem to them.

 So and then as far as what you could do with the dipped strawberry at this point, it's

 really open to what you want to use or what ingredients that you personally like.

 So let's go with a little white chocolate and I got some beautiful fresh shredded coconut

 So come right in, give it a twirl, load it up there and you have a great looking strawberry

 This time let's do a little milk chocolate which I think would taste great with chopped

 nuts and some toffee bits blended together, all of which are real easy to make.

 You can buy the toffee bits at the grocery store and the nuts as well, throw them in

 Just pulse it a couple of times so they grind up a little smaller than what you're going

 Let's do another milk chocolate and this time let's just roll it in some dark chocolate

 And oh, I also have some chopped up Oreos which are really, really easy.

 Just take the Oreos that you buy right over the counter at your grocery store, put them

 in your Cuisinart, pulse it up, grind them until they're nice and fine and voila, you

 Center it all, don't worry about the cream filling, it actually blends right up just

 Alright, kind of a dirty strawberry look there but it looks yummy.

 And then I have just some fun M&Ms here which I think are cool to work with and the kids

 They can have a lot of fun, be really creative, design their own berry.

 You can do the whole field trip, take them to the store, let them pick out some decorations.

 And then I also have just some sugar sprinkles which would look particularly pretty on opposite

 So since I have some red here and some white, I'll do a white chocolate.

 So this is really pretty and in fact you can use whatever color.

 If you wanted to do a little decoration for the holidays, doing a little red and green

 And then I'll do a dark chocolate and do just a little bit of a white crystal.

 These are a little bit larger than just pure sugar so they have a really pretty effect

 Alright, so coming up on our next segment, we're going to do the formal tuxedo berry

 And I'm just going to clean up a little bit and we'll be right back with you.

Today I'm going to be making a video about a 2004 Jeep Grand Cherokee.

Before I come to any conclusion I'm going to go ahead and check the fuses.

 That's the first thing you want to do, check your fuses because this might just be a simple problem.

 The switch box is actually located under the car which is right here under the driver side.

You can check one of each or you can check your manual and just see which fuse is for the doors lock or doors windows.

 Another thing that I'm going to do right now is I'm going to check the cables right here from the door.

 If you guys see this cover right here I already took it off but the cables run from here to here to the door.

They get tangled here and they twist so when they twist the windows won't work.

Make sure they are straight, they are not twisted and they are working fine.

If you guys take the door off what you are going to do is you want to take one screw here.

It's kind of tight right now but if you stick it in here you just spray it out.

And what you want to do is you want to remove the panel by just pushing it out.

 And once you do that you are going to pull the door but don't pull it too hard because there are cables inside and there are some links that you are going to remove.

The door is off but I want you to hold the door because there are cables inside here.

There is another connection right here that goes to the switch box.

In this case one of the cables was loose so I had to put it all together.

 I already fixed this problem but I wanted to show it to you because this could save you a lot of money.

First you got to do if the windows are not working or the power locks are not working on the car.

 If that doesn't help there is a possibility there is an electrical problem.

 Fold your paper in half lengthwise and you'll make a crease along the center of the paper

 Now fold the point down so that the point meets the center base of your paper

 Make a new point by folding both upper corners to the center line

 Take one of the long top edges and fold it diagonally so that it meets the bottom edge

 Hello, I'm Bruce Shaney and today I'd like to take a closer look at Thomas Edison's invention,

 It lasted 13 and a half hours and it really hasn't changed much since that original bulb.

 So let's take a closer look and see if we can build a couple for ourselves and get them

 It's filled with some type of inert gas which keeps the filament from burning.

 Now this light bulb I wrapped in tape and then broke the glass so I'm going to see if

 When electricity runs through it, it heats up to about 3900 degrees and that's why it

 If we tried this filament now, it would simply burn in about a second or two because it's

 This first light bulb I'm simply going to make inside a little jelly jar.

 My filament is going to be a piece of graphite from a mechanical pencil.

 Now if I want my light bulb to last a long time, I have to keep that filament out of

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to replace the air inside the light bulb with helium.

 And I have a balloon here and I'm simply going to open the mouth of the balloon into

 Helium is lighter than air so as it rises into the jar it should push the air out.

 And the next step is simply put it down on the lid and tighten it up.

 I'm running it off a 12 volt battery charger and I'd say it's probably the equivalent of

 Now in this case we're going to replace that glass globe with something a little bit more

 Now this base has a hose that runs into the bottom so it's going to allow me to fill up

 Now it's not quite as bright as the first one, but in this case I have it set on 6 volts

 I found that I can make light bulbs in all sorts of containers.

 Now I've tried to remove as much air as possible and I'm now going to fill the bag up with

 helium and as long as I can keep the filament away from the sides of the bag it should be

 Let's get the bag off here and I'm going to replace it with a Dixie cup and see how that

 There's our light and I'm going to lift the cup up for one moment so we can see the filament.

 So there's my light bulbs and I want to thank you for watching.

 Hello, I'm Dewey Lodge and I'm going to teach everyone out there that wants to know this,

 This is a really good thing to learn when you're starting out for stick control.

 First before we start the free stroke, there's many forms of stick control.

 If you want, make up your own if that really makes you feel comfortable, but match grip

 You can use it with any kind of stick control and the essence of it is letting the stick

 do all the work, surrender to the stick, let it bounce up without you actually using your

 It's all involving letting the weight of the stick go down and bounce up.

 What you want to do when you practice it is hold your sticks in position and the best

 technique to think or if you want to think anything at all is stay down as you do it.

 When you're doing it, you'll see my wrist doesn't pull up on my fingers and it's just

 Now this is probably the best technique I've ever learned, more than triplets, paradiddles,

 It makes you faster, it makes the speed better, everything you do with the drums is more relaxed.

 If you're going to start playing drums, I'd always recommend to learn the free stroke.

 Now it looks easy, but it's hard to do at first because we're used to putting the pressure

 But the idea to play fast, and all great drummers do this, is they don't put pressure on the

 The second thing obviously helps, but how you hold your sticks and how you let the stick

 And actually it makes your snare drum sound louder if you let the tone of the stick resonate

 So all you do is you just hold your sticks in a triangle position, match grip or traditional,

 whatever you like, and just let the weight of the stick bounce.

 And this is a really good test to see if your wrists are pulling up.

 It's what all the jazz guys use, rock drummers, John Bottom, Keith Moon, any great drummer

 Hey guys, it's Jeff today and today I'm going to show you how to make CD bubbles.

 As you can see, I already did it three times and I will show you how.

 So you will need a CD, blank one that you don't need, a pair of scissors, and a lighter.

 So first what you want to do is take your scissors and start peeling off the label.

 And if you want you can do it to the whole CD just because if you're going to do it multiple

 But otherwise you can just have a little area or like a little part of it cut off.

 Okay so since you have a pretty good amount of area cleared and you want to make sure

 What you want to do is you want to take your lighter and if you saw my other video about

 the lighter mod, you can use that but it works faster but make sure you don't burn the CD.

 So what I have is my lighter mod and I'm putting it on in the middle so the flame's not big.

 What you're going to do is you're going to put the CD on top and leave some area for

 you don't want to put it like directly on it otherwise it'll burn and become black.

 And when you can go like this and the little pocket moves, that's when it's time for you

 You can just rip it off, put it in a trash can, do it again on a different area right

 If you want, comment, thumbs up if you like the video and subscribe please.

 This half wig was actually a full wig that I did not feel comfortable in wearing.

 really like the way that it looked and so I didn't want to give the wig away or throw it away so I

So if you are interested on how I cut this wig up and put it back together

 took the wig apart and put it back together the way that I wanted the wig to look.

 it's like some kind of like wig Nazis out there they're gonna freak out on how I made this wig

 hold the hair back that I didn't want to get cut up and stuff like that.

 because I actually cut some of the tracks off the wig and put them tracks back in the way that I

I also used a needle and thread and some of the areas where I wanted the

 Last thing, the other thing is when I originally started the putting the wig together I did

 use glue so some of the tracks are actually glued on like a regular hot glue gun wig.

 wigs um there are tutorials out there to show you how to make wigs with hot glue so this is not

This is a regular high temperature hot glue gun and I did use that for the front part

It is like a yacky texture so it's straight and wavy but it looks like relaxed

 in the front and I'm going to remove the comb and it does have bangs in the front here that is really

 sectioned off the top part where I'm going to the line basically where I'm going to cut right along

 that to turn it into a half wig and then all this is going to be the front and half that I'm cutting

So all I'm going to do is go ahead and start to cut and after I cut immediately after I cut

 I'm going to just put a thin line of hot glue on that area so that the tracks won't unravel and

I'm not cutting the elastic band on this side I'm only cutting the actual

 front part of the wig off and it's left me with a weight that looks somewhat similar to this.

 So I'm going to go ahead and right in here where the hair tracks are separated I'm going to go

 I had for the bangs right here you see the comb still there I'm going to go ahead and remove the comb.

 I have a little seam ripper and that's what I'm using to cut the elastic

 threading that they have here at the front that's holding the comb.

 is called this this uh elastic stuff it's actually called elastic threading.

 if you want to learn how to like construct wigs or anything like that you can get this stuff anywhere.

 Okay so what I'm going to do now is I'm going to take the bottom two tracks of the wig.

 actually have tracks that go um how this is constructed is actually has tracks that go

 the opposite way of how the rest of the tracks are being laid just in case if you want to wear

 to show you guys up close just so you guys can see exactly what I'm doing.

 cutting it cutting on the elastic band where the track is and just pulling it up from the wig.

 So we have two tracks here and I'm going to take the other one off as well.

 you probably can't see very well I just sewed the first track on the front half of the wig

 and now I'm going to take the second track that's right here and sew on top of that and you can see

 already that the construction of the wig is looking more like a half wig now.

 forgot to tell you is I'm taking the track I'm folding over the end of this track

 sewing on to the front half of the wig to make it look more authentic like a half wig and I'm just

 sewing it on the part to help keep the wig so that the wig can keep its shape.

 All right so now that we have the front of the wig constructed I'm going to go ahead and just trim up

 a little bit of the sides and the pieces that I don't want to be seen anymore and cut off the

Okay so now that is the front half of my half wig it looks more like a half wig now you

 can't see any of the glue and on the inside is the glue you can see that there.

 of the wig so you guys can see I mean if I wanted to I can make it so that it goes just like this

 and completely hides that front track but of course that wouldn't look too natural but um

 if you're gonna try this attempt um make sure that you put it on after you've cut it like before you

 I wanted the wig came down to right here and so I cut off just that part where I didn't want it to

What I'm gonna do is now that I put this on because I can't see I'm in here filming I'm

 gonna cut it in any specific way so it's not like something I'm gonna make a video of or need to

 make a video because I'm not an expert and I don't know what the hell I'm doing so I'll be back after

Yes I would wear this wig like this but the majority of the time I

 will be wearing my hair straight in the front um this will be the wig um like I wear to like parties

 wig the wig because the length is very close to the length of my own hair so that's one of the

 reasons why I had got it originally it's just when I actually had bought it and it was like in the

 store and I was like no I like this and then when I came home I was wearing it and trying to wear

 different styles and try to style it differently it just wasn't coming out the way that I wanted it

 to so I turned it into a half wig because I really like half wigs right now and this wig is really

 cute and hopefully you guys are inspired to maybe cut up some wigs that you haven't hung

 Okay, now I've got that kind of laid back in again where I've got some of my highlights

 And I did use some colored pencil to go back in and reform my lines a little bit so that

 Test it a little bit and then I just go back in and I start to lay in some of those middle

 And you're probably going to start to see some of that snakeskin fade away into that

 I want to keep it in some of the areas but not in all of the areas.

 Some areas you may want to mask off too with even a handheld mask to help give you a little

 Sometimes that's going to be okay but like I said, the way I work, I tend to like to

 I still have that frisket there so I'm not worried about spraying over into the leg or

 And I'll just continue this process and then from there I'll start to go back and I'll

 start to pull in more of the whites and erase again into the areas where I'm painting and

 then I'll go back in with real dark black paint, opaque black paint and I'll start to

 But like I said, it's a push and pull process where I've got to go in and lay a little bit

 Then I'll go back in and I'll start to pull the whites back and then I'll come back to

 It's a slowly layering and going back, layering again and doing it again, back and forth.

 But you do want to take your time and make sure that you're doing your layering and stopping

 when you need to and go back, pull out your whites, then go back and lay in more color

 so you start to push and pull that contrast back and forth between light and dark.

 The next step you're going to see here, you're going to see probably more of the darks laid

 in and you'll see some of the highlights pulled back out and some of that snake skin starting

 Once I go back in and spray those middle tones, I just want to show you that this is really

 just like I said, that push and pull process where I've gone in and I've erased those whites

 But every time you spray, it's a little bit harder to get back to that white again.

 So all I'm doing here is going back in and erasing those whites a little bit.

 Go in and take the colored pencil and make sure that you go back in and start to lay

 And I like the colored pencil for this because it does give me a little bit of texture, too,

 And you can see what you start to get now is more definition with those whites.

 The darker areas are starting to get brought out a little bit more and developed a little

 And the middle tones now are being developed a little bit more.

 If you're looking to add some extra horsepower to your 2011 to 14 Mustang GT

 available in the BBK classic chrome finish or my personal favorite this

 hardware, a detailed set of instructions, and this money-saving air filter.

 of these intakes are also designed and developed right here in the United

 add roughly 10 or more horsepower depending upon your modifications that

 performance parts such as this intake or any of their other performance parts

 make sure you head on over to latemodelrestoration.com and check out

 make sure you subscribe and click the link in the description to check out

 air sensor, removing the strut tower brace, and the decorative engine cover to

 lock the clamp open on the sound tube and pull the sound and PCV tubes away

 transmission cars have an additional vacuum tube that needs to be disconnected

 Remove the air box hold down bolt and lift the unit out of the car.

 on the center of the push-in pins to remove the radiator cover.

 Begin assembling the BBK cold air induction system by bolting the hold

 edge of the BBK filter shield and remove the mass air sensor from the stock air

Transfer the mass air sensor to the BBK inlet tube with the opening in the

 sensor facing the straight end of the tube using the supplied bolts.

 If the vehicle has a manual transmission, place the supplied vacuum

 studs and grommets in the heat shield into the holes in the fender apron while

 under the heat shield and secure it to the heat shield by pushing the rubber

 supplied couplers over the throttle body and secure it with a supplied hose clamp.

 can place the inlet tube into the coupler with the straight end protruding

 through the heat shield and attach the sound tube to it with the original clamp.

 Place the remaining coupler and clamps over the end of the inlet tube.

 place the end of the filter base into the coupler and tighten the two clamps

 hose and if you have an automatic transmission you'll connect the vacuum

Plug in the mass air sensor and finalize the assembly by reinstalling

 the radiator cover, decorative engine cover and the strut tower brace.

 put the 1768 cold air induction system to the test on the dyno.

 All right an additional 12 horsepower and 12 foot-pounds pretty much all the

Today we're doing some diagnostic work on a TPS, that's a Throttle

Have you ever had a vehicle where you were driving down the road and you

That's a typical problem of why the idle hangs up in a certain spot.

 sensor we're going to take our negative probe, and there are three pins inside there.

 the one way on the left, which is the A pin, we're going to put a negative probe in there.

Now if turning the screwdriver you saw that the needle did jump or not move,

 So for lunch today I went to Wendy's and I had their strawberry chicken salad.

 And so I decided that I wanted to have a salad for dinner also.

 So I went to Harris Teeter and I bought the ingredients to make a salad just like Wendy's.

 Okay the first thing is you're going to need some type of lettuce or spinach mix.

 And I like this cheese in my macaroni and cheese so I decided to try it in my salad.

 So I decided to use the Almond Accent Oven Roasted No Salt Sliced Almonds.

 Okay for my chicken I got the Purdue Chicken Breast in the flavor Honey Roasted.

 And this is how much you get in a bag and I've taken out about three pieces.

 So I picked this up from, I'm sorry, this is one of the brands that Wendy's uses for their salad dressings.

 I've got my spinach and lettuce on the bottom and my chicken and nuts in the middle.

 My strawberries on the side and my cheese and my chicken on top.

 1987 Mercedes-Benz, I'm doing the rear brake pads and the rotors to get the

There's these two pins here you got to punch it out, take this anti-rattle

 tip off and put your new brake pads in and put the new clips in.

 these bolts here, this one here, this one here, or this one, or this one.

 here, the brake fluid is gonna come out and you're gonna have to bleed the brake lines.

 There's two 17mm bolts here holding the, take these two off, 17mm with a box wrench, one

I'm taking out the small screw that holds it in place, the Allen key.

 this down with some WD-40 before you take it out, because these usually, they're stuck in here.

 Okay, these are the two pins I'm talking about, just take a punch or a pick or something and just

I already took this one off and then you slide the pads off and compress the piston both sides, this two double piston and then you just slide your new pads in.

Use a C-clamp like this, just put it like this, compress this side here, then turn it around, put it on this side, compress it and put in your new

These are the bolts, you don't have to open these bolts here, just open the two, these two here, 217mm bolts onto the hub assembly in the back here.

As you can see the two pins here and the anti-rattle clip, make sure you put this brake pad back in and just put it on and bolt it all back together, make it nice and tight.

 1 cup of milk, 5-6 tsp of condensed milk, 2 tsp of chocolate syrup, 6 tsp of vanilla ice cream.

 Now I am going to garnish this oreo milkshake with some crushed oreo biscuits.

 Definitely kids love it because we have added ice cream, chocolate syrup and biscuits also.

 marks and lay it on that score and mount it just like a plate and wrap it around.

 you're doing laser sheets, you'd probably mount it in the press a lot more.

 I'm going to mount it in the center of the die and then we're going to set up the press

And then when you get it, you'll see your lines matching up just

One thing you want to be sure if you're getting a mag die and you

 have the lift screws drilled in it, your mag die can't fall over that.

 For now though, we're just going to unbox this and see what we've got.

 Here we have the headset's transmitter, which serves as a stand for the headset and the headset.

 Beneath this, you see there's a sticker up here that says, look for accessories.

 In the cables and accessories, included with the XP510, we have the XBA.

 This is a Bluetooth dongle for fully wireless chat on the Xbox 360.

 so you can talk on the phone, stream music, and pair it to your PlayStation 3 for wireless chat there as well.

 This allows you to connect your headset to your computer for updating presets in the headset's firmware.

 That's for actually charging your headset, which you can do while you're playing.

 this connection here actually allows you to connect to a mobile phone for listening to music on the go.

 This connects to your transmitter and to your console, so you can power up the transmitter.

 This tells you what the programmable presets are on the headset that it ships with.

 You know Persian cuisine is far more varied than the staples that we know about baba ghanoush or stuffed grape leaves

 But it's still it's very exotic exotic for a lot of home cooks wasn't that what I was asking for was Baba

 And that's where a new cookbook comes in handy Persian food from the non-Persian bride is written for busy home cooks looking to bring a

 Taste of the Middle East to the whole family and joining us in the kitchen this morning is that cookbooks author Reina Simnagar

 But tell us about your story because your story is interesting so I married this Persian guy, and you're not Persian

 And I had to prove myself that you don't have to have Persian blood to make this food

 So that's what happened, and then I just came up with a cookbook for my daughter's in law because I have five boys

What are you gonna be making for so we're gonna be making beautiful stuffed artichoke, huh?

You can't defrost them the refrigerator and this is basically an artichoke

 You see that's concave you feel like you need to put something in there sure we are gonna do that okay?

 This is an artichoke that basically has been stripped from all the leaves and everything is an acre artichoke

 Okay, and we're gonna do we're gonna first make a bed of beautiful red sauce

 Little lemon juice if you want to but sometimes or most of the time I use jarred tomatoes, okay?

 And now this is what we're gonna do we mix it in we're gonna take our beautiful

 Beef now you can also use turkey if you want to be a little bit healthier.

 Cinnamon that coriander amazing, but you can use all spice if you can't find this which is really also really easy to use

 Okay, so we mix all this up together and now we're gonna make meatballs and we're gonna stop this little artichoke heart with the

 Meat and I like calling them little soldiers because they look like a little so you're gonna see okay

 You have to make sure that this size kind of feeds the artichoke each heart is a different size, okay?

 Yeah, this one is very big what's the Persian name for this recipe there is this is not a person oh, it's not no

 Okay, actually, but there are other there are other recipes in my cookbook besides personal recipes, and this one is one of them

 However, we we do have other Persian recipes here, which we'll talk about later now this you're gonna put in the oven

 Not too long and this is what it looks like at the end beautiful

 Yeah, this is beautiful as an appetizer to you can put it very nice one in each plate

 You can put it as an entry you can you can serve it at any anyway over Persian rice

 I ever made I ever made like I ever learned how to make Persian right that was my first what's in it for looks

 Beautiful these are sweet peas and yellow sweet peas and also current raisins which are different in every kind of raisins

 They've been a little bit fried to plump them up a little and these are caramelized onions

 Persians have a lot of influence of French desserts and desserts and that's why it's called the roulade

 This is a dill salad with cucumbers and has shallots which are very very Persian is a bulbs of pleasure

 If you'd like to find out where to get Persian food for the non-Persian bride and

 To download the recipes for the dishes that you saw today here on ABC 7 go to our website

 Hi, I'm Neil Barker and welcome to my guide on complete strip and reassembly of the iPhone 4.

 Right, first we go, we start off with our iPhone 4, nice little carbon sticker on the rear there.

 First thing we come across, obviously, are the little two screws in the bottom.

 Now the earlier models of the iPhone 4, they have the crosshead screwdrivers and screws in, and that's what we've got here.

 But the later iPhone 4, now the iPhone 4S, have the torques, the five star screws.

 So what we can do, I mean ours is the Philips, so we sell all the tools on our website.

 So we've got the standard torques, just like the one or two use only ones,

 and we've got the professional torques screwdrivers that you can use a lot if you're a repairer or you want to do it more often.

 And obviously these, we've got the small Philips screwdrivers as well, the crosshead type.

 So we remove these two bottom screws and they lift out like so.

 Dead easy to get into, but obviously, as you remember, if you've got the torques screws or the Philips, then get the tool to suit.

You've got the rear casing, you've got the two screws out there.

 We're just going to put the thumb on the back, we're just going to push it towards the top.

 and then what we're looking to do then is just literally lift at this end and it should come off like so.

 Obviously you must insist that you turn the whole thing off first before you do anything else,

 and you run the standard anti-static requirements before you do it,

 because if you put your fingers in there and you've got static, you're going to damage it.

 So we'll put the parts to one side, but that's the rear casing off.

 So if you're replacing the rear casing, that's it, simple as that.

 You get the new rear casing, you slide it on, and then away you go.

 I like to use these little trays because the screws are so many different sizes

 that I put them in the compartments as we go and it's so much easier.

 So there's the iPhone 4, of course you've got the battery there, camera, and all the innards.

 The battery connector here has a small Phillips screwdriver so we can remove that.

 So that screw comes out like that, pop it in that compartment, and obviously the battery will come out now.

 So if the battery's never been out before, they're pretty tricky.

 A lot of people make this error of tearing the battery connector off the board, we've noticed,

 so really careful, you're looking to get a little non-marking tool,

 hook it under this little tab there, I don't know if you can see that, under the top edge there.

 Don't go too far in, you're looking to just literally half a mil in,

 Any deeper, you're into the plastic connector on the board, and you ping the connector off the board,

 So the connector comes up, and there you have this small bracket underneath,

 which is used to, I might have to leave that in there to remove the battery,

 but that clamps between the battery connector and the board, and clamps the little aerial plug down there.

 So we can remove that little device there, that puts pressure on that little connector,

 it's got a little tag here saying, pull here, release the battery.

 Sometimes it's extremely hard, extremely well stuck down, but this has been off before,

 If all else fails, you get a little spudger tool, a little plastic spudger,

 and come in one side and just sort of pry it here, up this side,

 just be careful not to damage the battery, because if you split the battery then it's no good.

 So you're looking to lift the battery, maybe a little bit of warmth as well,

 but you don't want to heat the battery or the phone up too much.

 So the battery comes out like that, obviously if you're replacing the battery, that's great.

 there's little bits of sticky pads here that it'll stick down on.

 What I'd recommend is getting that bracket in first, push the connector on top,

 and then sit the battery in, and then obviously put that screw in.

 Now if you're doing this full strip down, you might as well remove this,

 because it just gets in the way on everything you're trying to do.

 That simply pulls off, leaves a bit of adhesive behind, so you can just push it back down.

 The battery adhesive strip, as we said earlier, it's easy to take that off,

 instead of having it flapping while you're trying to repair it,

 just sits it in, and then you just push it down either end there on its adhesive.

 Last but not least, and this is the one thing that most people get wrong,

 is this little retaining clip there has to go in before the battery.

 And it sits in, and the little rubber blob sits above the aerial and the aerial plug to hold it down.

 So that goes in there, hold that down with your finger, get the battery connector,

 and then come in with your thumb, locate it, push it down with a nice little click,

 Down on the battery, and then you can just literally push the battery in,

 the cable folds and drops down, comes back up again, takes the slack off,

 Last but not least, we've got our rear casing, it's just worth giving it a rub.

 Like I said, when you fit your new casings or covers, your new screens,

 There will tend to be a clear patch over there, like a dust-free cover on the back of the lens,

 And there will probably be a clear cover that goes over this little graphite strip as well.

 But the final thing is just to give it a wipe, make sure there's no dust in the camera lens,

 The rear cover goes in pretty much where it sets off, with a 2mm gap there.

 It sits down, you can see it's flush and it's sat into the phone,

 and then all you do is just push it down, put downward force there, and then slide it back.

 And what you'll see then is that the rear casing has actually slid down towards the phone.

 and we can put those in, Phillips or Torx, depending on what sort of screws you've got.

 One last thing, as you change the screen, just remember there's a clear,

 sometimes coloured, backing on the back of the screen as well, before you put them in.

 So remember to take that off, because there's not enough space for that clear protector

Obviously powered it up, but the battery's got no juice in it, typical.

 So we have a fully disassembled and reassembled iPhone 4, all the buttons work.

Remember, thanks for watching my guide, have a good listen to it.

 Take all the little bits of knowledge that other people don't tell you that I've dropped in there.

 And also all the tools, things like the iSesamo tools, all the screwdriver sets, the tweezers,

You can't beat these tools, and the iSesamo is just one of the best.

 So all the tools, all the parts, all of the knowledge and all the help on our website.

 So I'm Neil Barker, and thanks for watching this rather lengthy iPhone 4 repair guide.

Now, you may not have seen these, you may not be aware of these, or you may

 you like a bit of glitter, but you really want good quality shine and something that

 just catches the light like nothing I have ever seen before, this is for you.

 believe me, honestly, this is like nothing you have ever seen before.

But really on this video, I want to concentrate on the Mica Delights.

 Now these come in all little pots already with really good quality lids on, so you're

 of course there are hundreds of different ways that I use these, but one of them is

 silhouette and I'm just going to do this with some double sided adhesive sheets from

So I'm going to turn over my stencil and just rub it with a vegetable soap because

 sheet, these are the Woodware ones at all, which I find really useful because they have

 take off one side of the backing and I'm going to place the adhesive directly on to the soaked

 black because I'm going to do the silhouette first and just look at it.

 is a pure rock, an absolutely pure material and then you get this gorgeous, gorgeous sparkle

 little spatulas with it as well, so I'm going to go around and just sprinkle in some of

 the mica, tip some back in and I'm just going to go with my finger and just rub this around

 think just needs a little bit, just these little spatulas that come with this kit are

So I'm just going to do that with my finger and then of course you just tap

So I'm just going to tap this off at the side, just on a spare piece of

 card that I have and you put that, see I've got all that excess off just there, I'm just

 going to put that back in my pot in a minute, I'll just put that to the side for the time

Then I'm going to take off, peel off my adhesive sheet from my stencil and it will

 do this very easily because you've put the soap on first, if you hadn't put the soap

Then place down, and all of this now is adhesive so we can go ahead

 with another colour to do all the bits and look at that, just beautiful.

 to go with the lilac and sprinkle over all the bits that are remaining and just take

 I just adore it because it truly is the most unbelievable sparkle.

 the side and just put this over a spare pot while I just catch everything.

 to tear off the back because remember this is a double sided adhesive sheet so I can

 just tear, get these apart, just pull these apart, there we go.

 a piece of black card that I'm just going to mount it onto just quickly, just so that

 it's nothing like you have ever seen before, that sparkle is unbelievable.

 light, even if it's not catching the light, it's still just beautiful.

 US Art Quest My Kadeelites and they come in little wonderful pots in these great containers

 so give those a try because believe me when you see it in person, it is even better if

So enjoy using those, that's the My Kadeelites range and I'll be

 back with more videos very very soon with more ways to use that as well as the PPA that

 Hi it's Bea from Love Birdie Face Panning and Body Art and welcome to my video.

 Today I'll be doing a Teardrops and Perfect Dots Technique for video.

 I've been requested to do this video so I hope it's going to be helpful for you.

 A lot of these techniques I use in my designs so whenever I mention them you can refer back to this video and watch it.

 I've decided to do a whole design on my hand incorporating these two techniques.

 I thought it would be more interesting than just doing single teardrops and single dots to show you.

 You can use these for events that you go to like festivals and nightclubs.

 First off you need to get your 061 Superstar Face Paint which is a nice gold colour.

 You're going to swirl this around and it's going to be the centre of your daisy.

 Get the tip of your brush and do a wiggling round motion to get the centre of the flower.

 This paint is really opaque and really gold and shimmery so it's going to be perfect for the centre.

 Now you're going to get a tag white and swirl this around on the same brush.

 Twist the paintbrush to get a very nice tip on the end which is going to be easier to create your teardrops.

 Lay your paintbrush down flat and then slowly lift up to the tip.

 I'm just going to speed up the video so that it goes a little bit faster.

 Getting my number 2 Royal Majestic brush I'm going to add little swirls down my fingers.

 I'm going to have a really light line and then pressing down to create a little dot at the end.

 With the tip press down to get bigger dots and press lightly to get lighter smaller dots.

 Just on the end of my finger and I'm going to dab it into the middle of each flower.

 hello and welcome to the exclusive cooking show of Indian recipes, in today's episode

 you are going to see another exclusive recipe from my secret cooking book, I am Nikunj

 In today's episode of everyday special you are going to see Gujarati speciality the spring

 This curry is very easy to make and delicious in taste, so let's try cooking the Gujarati's

 For this you will need 1 cup chopped spring onion, 1 cup chopped tomatoes, 1 teaspoon

 of mustard seeds, 1 teaspoon of cumin seeds, 1 teaspoon of turmeric powder, 1 teaspoon

 of asafoetida, 1 teaspoon of sugar, 1 teaspoon of coriander and cumin seeds powder, 1 teaspoon

 of red chili powder, 1 and half tablespoon of oil, some freshly chopped coriander leaves

 First of all I am going to heat oil in a pan, now oil is hot so I am going to add the mustard

 seeds and cumin seeds, now add the tomatoes and immediately stir it, now give it a nice

 stir, now add the turmeric powder, salt and asafoetida, this curry is one of my favorite

 Because we grow everything at our farm so we can get fresh onions and tomatoes anytime

 Now cover it and cook it on a medium heat for 2 minutes, now tomatoes are half cooked

 so I am going to add the spring onions, add the red chili powder and coriander and cumin

 seeds powder, now add the tomato puree, so I am going to add half teaspoon of sugar,

 some freshly chopped coriander leaves, so this is it our Gujarati special spring onion

 Now it is the time to serve very easy to cook, very best in taste and totally fresh, numre

 You can serve this with chapatis but in Gujarat this curry is generally served with rotla,

 I hope you enjoyed this recipe, please don't forget to send me your feedbacks on this recipe,

 subscribe pudoon tv today for more exclusive recipes from Indian cuisine, enjoy the exclusive

 Hi dolls, my name is Bethany Herway and I'm the Glamrs Housewife.

 Today I'm going to show you how you can make chocolate mint brownies in individual mason

 jars to serve at a holiday meal or you can take them, put the top on, wrap it and give

 Now the first thing you're going to want to do is obviously buy your ingredients and then

 Now the recipe for everything will be both online at theglamrshousewife.com and I will

 have it scrolled at the end of this video so you can write it down.

 Now for the brownies, what I do, you might think I have some complicated, crazy brownie

 Now when you're making the brownies, follow the box directions.

 So what I do is I put it in at 325 and after 20 minutes I start checking on it.

 You can see the sides have set up but the middle is still pretty liquidy.

 So every 5 minutes after that I check it and wait until the top is basically baked over

 but if you put a toothpick in, it's still fairly liquidy in the middle.

 Because what ends up happening is the heat from cooling down, that will keep baking your

 brownie and by pulling it out early, you're going to get that wonderful, unctuous, chocolatey

 Let them cool down and then we're going to get on to step 2 which is the mint frosting.

 So what you're going to do is you need mint extract, some powdered sugar, some margarine

 This is a little bit cooled down so it's thicker than you might have but not by much.

 And then what I do is I take my spoon and I use my finger which is clean.

 I washed it beforehand and I just press it into the tin, the jar right here.

 And you just take it and you cool it for 20 minutes, half an hour in the refrigerator.

 The next thing you do is you want to make a chocolate ganache to put on top.

 So for that I happen to have some Hershey bars lying around because we made s'mores

 But you can use semi-sweet, bittersweet, dark, whatever chocolate you have lying around the

 house and a little bit of butter and microwave it at 30 seconds at a time.

 Again, I find using my finger and the spoon on this one easiest.

 And I take and using my meat tenderizer, if you don't have a meat tenderizer, you can

 use anything with a heavy bottom, your hand, your shoe, it doesn't matter.

 The reason I do it in the package, all you have to do, take, sniff up the top and pour

 The spoon, maybe on a pretty little dessert plate at any kind of holiday party, a buffet,

 But what I like to do is take it to the next level, which is wrap it up and serve it to

 Now to make this, what I did was I found these pretty round labels at Office Depot.

 And I printed out, there's thousands of free printables out there.

 I will have the link on where I found this at theglamoroushousewife.com.

 And you just stick it to the top of the mason jar that you got when you bought the mason

 I added a little bit of green twine and one of the candy canes just to make it a little

 more festive so people know if they're going to have something chocolatey and minty.

 Now remember, whether you serve this at a party or you give it to your friends as gifts,

 you need to make plenty of copies of the recipe because as soon as people taste this,

 Hey everyone, this is Daniel Sombrano and today I'm going to go over an old school boxing

 What we're going to do is we're going to take a medicine ball and I'm going to teach you

 Okay, what you're going to do first of all is get yourself a 10 pound medicine ball,

 You can go heavier but as you do the drill, if it's too heavy and you haven't worked up

 to it, it will tire out quicker and you won't get the full benefit of the drill if you use

 I mean you can work up to it but start with a little bit lighter and just build up from

 Okay, so what you're going to do is you're going to first get the ball and you're going

 to hold it in one hand and you're going to toss it up and then over to the other hand.

 Now you can go pretty high or you can go a little bit lower, like a little bit past

 your head here, alright, and just to get comfortable with it and get used to the movement.

 And it's a ballistic movement so when it comes, you feel it in your shoulders as it drops

 and your ligaments and tendons here and in your muscles, bones, you know, in the body

 And it springs up, goes through the arm, springs up, goes through the arm.

 And what it's going to do guys is it's going to develop your guard position so that it

 doesn't tire out and you don't start lowering your hands, you know.

 Especially when you're boxing or when you're sparring, your hands tend to get tired and

 you start lowering down, lower too much, you're able to get hit and you're susceptible to

 So this will help you keep your, strengthen your guard and keep your hands up.

 Now when you do this, I'm doing it right now in a static position so I'm not moving anywhere,

 What you can do is get into your fighting stance, whichever stance you take.

 You know, some people might have a karate stance, some people have more of an MMA, others

 So depending on whatever style you like, get into that position and then get the ball and

 hold it in one hand and then just toss it up and bring it down.

 Toss it up from one hand to the other and you toss it back and forth, okay.

 Now what you can do is you can go for time or you can go for repetitions.

 If you go repetition, you can go 50 reps, 100 repetitions, whatever you choose, then

 So that's 15 minutes total and three rounds to strengthen up and get that endurance in

 their shoulders and their arms when they're tossing the ball back and forth.

 If you do repetition, you can go heavier and you can just count the reps and then try

 to build yourself up on the reps and then whatever rep goal you get, then you can start

 All right, the more advanced version you can do with this ball is by moving.

 Doing the exact same thing, but you're moving around and you're using, working with your

 So the way you're going to do that is as you toss the ball back and forth, you just move

 back and forth, side to side, you know, whatever way you want to move in your footwork, right?

 And it trains you to keep your hands up while you're doing your footwork so you're able

 Now like I said, not only does it develop your guard, but because of the balancing back

 and forth on the arms and feeling that plyometric effect on your arms, you're able to spring

 and throw that punch a lot faster, a lot harder, a lot quicker due to the fact that you're

 able to absorb it and be able to throw it as a result of doing this technique, okay?

 So again, you're going to develop that strong guard position and develop that structure

 so that your arms don't go down and you're able to build that springiness in your punches

 So try them both, you know, try the first one first and then go to the second one and

 then mix them up and like I said, either do them for repetitions or for rounds and you're

 going to see that you're going to develop a very strong guard position using this excellent

 I just want to recap some of the stuff we just went over on the, again, it's called

 And you know, they've got two parts to it, two variations and I just want to make sure

 that if you have any questions about this, just email me or put it on the comments if

 Again, subscribe to my channel because we have a lot of good information for you and

 also like the video so that way others will see that you like it and you know, we'll get

 And again, do this exercise for either the repetitions or you can go for time.

 They both work really well and it will get you a really strong guard as far as when you

 hold your hands up and also help develop that ballistic spring in your arms for punching,

 So again, like I said, you get the two birds with one stone with this drill, okay?

 Take care and remember, don't just hit them, punch a hole through them.

 So while putting my hair together for a project, which I'll have pictures all over my different

 sites about, I accidentally did really good sleeping beauty hair, which I've never done

 So instead of showing you a video of me putting my hair up, I'm going to show you a video

 of me taking my hair down, and hopefully that will help you reconstruct it if you want to

 I chose lavender because my hair is brown and a black headband wouldn't have shown up

 Then I did small little curling iron curls at the bottom of my hair, all the way around,

 just really these last few inches, because you want it kind of straight and sleek, and

 Alright, so we're going to tuck that all away, just to show you what I did with the front.

 Pin curls would be, pin curls are basically flat victory rolls.

 So as you can see, this one on the side here is just a big fat pin curl, just a little

 You could do it lower or higher, because she's actually got little bangs, little wispy bangs,

 So if you don't have actual bangs and want to evoke the look, just do a big pin curl.

 So I'm going to take this out, and I'll show you that I've slid several different hair

 So I like hair pins for pin curls, because they're much more discreet than bobby pins.

 What you'll do is you'll take your little hair pin, let me show you against my skin so

 you can see what it looks like, and while you're holding that curl in place, you go

 towards the center of the curl, then come to the outside, so you're catching all of

 There are lots of good videos all over the internet about how to do pin curls, different

 tutorials, you'll be able to find information that will help you if you couldn't see what

 So you kind of do those all the way around, you can see I have little pins all the way

 Some of these are actually bobby pins, because I need to go buy more hair pins, I've lost

 But anyway, basically what I did is I just separated out this little section of hair

 And you'll see I pulled it down towards where I wanted the center to be, which is a little

 above the ear, and you just kind of wrap it around your fingers, all the way, tuck the

 ends in towards the inside, and then pin that flat against your head.

 And then again you would do what I showed you with the hair pin, put the pin in towards

 the center, capture the outside, and then push back in, and your pin curl will be held

 And that is exactly what I did over here with this section as well.

 So you see, it was again just the exact same thing, except this section is from a lower

 And this is the one where I say I just kind of accidentally did it really well.

 So you can see I've got that center hole, I can stick my finger in almost all the way

 But I've then pinned it close to my head so I've closed the victory roll.

 You can either, some girls will leave it so it's just that big like a surfing wave

 Or sometimes you take it so it's open in the front, and you just kind of shape it and mold

 it back and pin the back down so that it gets this closed off shape.

 So I've got it just secured with more bobby pins, hair pins, once you have it.

 You want to try to hide them so you'll see my bobby pins, can you see the shine?

 So I squared off from my side part to just a little above my eyebrow.

 Because I started with my hair dry this time, sometimes I start with it wet.

 And then, taking your two fingers in, I'm going to just kind of push it in.

 This time I spread out my fingers because I wanted that bigger barrel shape.

 So again, if you're doing this for yourself, what you're going to do first is this bit.

 Once you have your front curls done, curling iron to curl the rest of your curls all the way around your head, just the ends.

 If you have any questions, I know, because this was weird, it was totally backwards.

 Hi, I'm Jamie and one of the things I look forward to most every morning is a

 we needed a pick-me-up in the mornings and he started making one with one we

 had just gotten as a gift thinking we'd never use it and for the past 14 years

 nozzle on the the cappuccino maker and then we pour the coffee through and

 that's what macchiato means is when you pour the coffee through.

 gone through about five cappuccino makers because they're under a lot of

 pressure and eventually the little pipes fail and you get kind of a water puddle

 makes a little one that's a lot like this and they're kind of a passive

They just they build up steam pressure, you open a valve and that same

 pressure is also making the coffee while it's making your foam.

 luck with the cappuccino makers that have a separate pump to steam your milk

 because you just don't get enough pressure and it's a lot like a little

 cappuccino maker like they have in coffee bars you could probably get a

 Okay when I make a cappuccino I always start with cleaning the machine which

 means you take this little metal basket out which will have grounds from the

 because everything is too hot so I just let it sit and I clean it the next

 domed over the top of the basket and gently pack down because as the steam

 goes against it it's going to build your pressure to foam your milk so if it's

 not packed tight enough the the water goes through too easily and you don't

 to the silver band there because some of that's going to go for steam and

 then I want basically four shots of espresso by the time I'm done.

 up to a dangerous level it will let it out but I just you want the most

 pressure you can get so be sure that that is firmly tightened and go ahead

 enough milk so that when you hold it up under the nozzle the nozzle will just go

 cheat compared to what a regular barista would do and I take the milk and I

 Okay I've been microwaving the milk while the steam is building up and the

I used to on different cups I would microwave them for 40 seconds each

 and you will have a little bit of spare time but if you do this all at once the

 whole process goes more quickly rather than waiting microwaving and then

 milk and what we're watching for we're waiting I don't know if you can see it

 the cup tilt it slightly and start letting steam in to foam the milk.

 You don't want to bury the nozzle in the milk so as it makes foam you gradually

 Just right up to the top and then as soon as that one's done without burning

 immediately wipe this down because milk will bake on there and will get really

 but I just like the regular taste of coffee so I don't put any in mine.

 while you're doing this just to make sure that all the coffees come through.

You have to look at how much coffee each person gets because you got

And that's how I get my cappuccino every morning and if you come

 I just want to make sure it's light and fluffy but before it begins to curdle.

 Very careful to not over mix but just sufficient to blend the eggs into the mixture.

 What you want is just the flavour of the outermost covering and not the white layer underneath

 As you can see it's beginning to give it such a beautiful colour, the orange and the yellow.

 You want a bite of the ginger in each mouthful so you don't need to chop it too fine but

 If you have a nut allergy you could replace the ground cashew nuts with semolina.

 Now we just pop the cake into the oven which has been preheated to 150.

 As long as you've got a reliable oven this is in for an hour and it will be done.

 We have not used baking powder or soda nor have we used whipped egg whites so it's not

 We place it on a wire rack and if you don't have a cooling rack this hob is ideal.

 A little extra browning on the sides and it's come off the edges.

 This particular tin has got a removable base but if you have a regular cake tin it's cool

 If it's one with a removable base, gently ease the paper and the cake off from a corner.

 Now we portion it up as is traditionally done in small bite-sized squares.

 Part of the tradition of using the bite-sized pieces is most often you have people feeding

 And now finally a touch of colour and make it attractive for the kids.

 Ideal when you have family, a large gathering or friends around.

 Make sure you grab a slice yourself, it's going to run out quick.

 one of my favourite accessory movements when programming for Brazilian Jiu Jitsu athletes,

 some transferability to grappling in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu, especially if you've got someone

 press is that we can obviously take out a lot of the excessive stress that conventional

 it's just a movement that works really well as part of your program, especially if you're

 you need the J-hooks set at a height that allows you to take the bar out of the rack

So, when you've got straight arms, palm of your hands, you literally just

Take a really tight grip and then just there, just really, really

 stiff arms, you should literally just be able to lift the bar out to position you want

So, in terms of your position on the floor, you want to be just out from the

I like it so that I can see the bar within my eye line and I have a choice of

I have a wide grip, which is obviously closer to competition lift.

 is what I prefer so my little finger is closer to the smooth ring on the bar and obviously

 then finally a close grip, which my index finger is on the smooth inside part of the

 is that you need to pull your shoulder blades in and down and keep your lats really, really

 ability to the sport, but in this case, what I can also do is put my legs flat, which then

 takes out a lot of my stability, puts far more effort required on the upper body.

 for this one, I'm going to put my feet in pretty close to my butt, take that mid grip,

 Hi, this is Stacy Stone of Chesapeake Soda Clean, Incorporated.

 I'm one of the SodaWorks dealer distributors, and today we're going to talk about servicing

 the rotor valve on the bottom of a Buster Blaster 100 Soda Blast Pot.

 The particular unit that we're going to be working on today is a 2009 unit that just

 came in used that I'm going to clean up and service and get it ready for resale.

 There's a set of Teflon O-rings inside the valve where our chrome ball is.

 Those Teflon O-rings will need to be changed periodically due to wear.

 This is the only wear item in a SodaWorks Buster Blaster 100 Soda Blast Pot.

 Okay, this is a new valve assembly here, and this is what the O-rings should look like.

 These are some worn O-rings, and you can see the edges of the one on the right there are

 This one's worn completely through, and this one has a bad spot right here.

 Typically, you'll know that it's time to change these O-rings when the pot is under pressure,

 you're not blasting, but you can still feel air or some soda coming out of the end of

 It depends on what soda you're using, and it depends on how often you're on and off

 Your first O-ring is here, your ball valve, your second O-ring is down inside.

 The way I like to do it is first off, your relay assembly here, there's a thumb screw

 Next, you want to take a 7-16 and a 9-16 wrench and take your green air supply hose off of

 From there, if you follow your pipe down, you have a union right here, an adjustable

 You'll be able to take this whole assembly right off the pot and take it right up onto

 All right, in just a matter of a minute or two, I was able to remove the rotor valve

 The next step will be to remove the black actuator from the valve.

 It's just two screws, one on the top here and one on the bottom here.

 Okay, I've removed the actuator from the valve assembly and put the valve assembly in a vise.

 Next thing you want to do is take a wrench and take your big nut off the front.

 Now, the first time you do this, for you guys that have new pots, that nut's going to be

 So you'll really have to make sure your valve assembly is tight in the vise and you're really

 There's our first O-ring and I can see on this one that there's actually wear on this,

 There's our first O-ring, just pop that out, clean the surface and drop a new O-ring in.

 I'm going to take the valve out of the vise and then we'll go on to the next step.

 There's our ball valve and all I have to do now is just turn this over and the ball will

 If I look in there, I hope you can see that, but that O-ring on the backside is really

 So we'll pop that one out, clean the surface, drop a new O-ring in there.

 Now the stem in the kit, there's four O-rings, you'll get O-rings for the stem also.

 Those don't always need to be changed every time, but if you want to, go right ahead.

 Just if you take that apart, put it right back together again, exactly the way you took

 Also of note, when you drop the ball out of here, that valve assembly should have been

 The ball should have been closed off so no soda and air come out.

 Make sure when you put it back together again that the ball is in the closed position.

 If you forget and put it in the open position, which you can do, what'll happen is when you

 power your pot back up, it's going to want to open itself up and when you push the trigger,

 Alright, here's our rebuilt valve assembly all put back together again.

 And we just need to reinstall it back on the bottom of the pot, hook up our green air supply,

 That completes rebuilding the rotor valve assembly on the bottom of a SodaWorx Buster

 The first time you do it, it might take you 30 minutes just because you haven't done it

 Any of your SodaWorx authorized dealers can supply you with the O-rings for your valves.

 Last time I showed you a review of Drick Plate A. During that I talked about the size of

 I said that when I got my extra large stamper I would show you how the extra large stamper

 You can see that this stamper is close to the full size of this image.

 The first thing about this is a number of people have been having some problems using

 the big stampers when they come because what happens is they try to stamp and then when

 they pull up after a few times this will pop out and stay behind.

 But it turns out there is a way that you can keep that from happening.

 If you look on here there are these little indentations on the side and those correspond

 to, and I'm not sure if this will show up on camera, let me see if I can get this at

 The trick is you want to get the little indentation on here to match up with the little ridges.

 You're going to line that up and then you'll be able to push that in so that it goes a

 You'll see now it's only a little bit above the end of the stamper.

 Now when you stamp that sucker is not coming out of there no matter what you do.

 The thing about that though is because now there is very little distance between the

 stamper and the side of the stamper, when you go to clean it sometimes you'll get a

 All you have to do then is just pop the white part right back out and clean it up, stick

 it right on back in, lining up those ridges and it should be fine.

 First of all I want you to see how much of the image it picks up.

 You're just going to stamp down like you would with any other stamper.

 You can see as it left the circle behind how much of that image it covered.

 You can roll it on just like you would with any other stamper and you can see how much

 Some people have talked about how squishy this stamper is compared to the regular Conad

 In terms of rolling it might take a couple of times playing with it just to get used

 But I think it's actually better when it comes to other things.

 For example, I recently did a manicure using these skulls here.

 What I've found is this is ideal, this stamper, for allowing you to position exactly where

 If you want to isolate just maybe one part of the image, let's say I want to make sure

 that I get this little skull right here, right in the center of my nail.

 What I can do with this, I find it works so much better than with the other stampers,

 Because it is so squishy, let's see if you can see that there, because it is so squishy

 I don't have to roll it or anything because it just has so much give.

 So then when I pick it back up I've got my pretty little skull right where I want it.

 When I try to do that with the regular Conad stamper, because it's so hard I end up kind

 of getting some pull and the image never quite comes out right on the side.

 So I'm actually going to be using this on my other plates that are smaller too when

 I want to make sure that I get something centered just exactly the way I want it.

 But here again you can see how I've used it a couple of times now.

 You can see how this is getting a little bit more down as I'm working with it.

 But if it's getting harder to clean, just pop it right back out and clean that on up.

 And then just line it back up again, pop it back in and you're good to go.

 Alright, I hope this was helpful for those of you who haven't worked with an extra large

 I think it's really worth it, and especially if you want to use these bigger nail images.

 Any questions, feel free to leave them for me and I will do the best I can to answer

 Hi, my name's Clara Connell and I'm the author of Pop Party, the second book from Pop Bakery.

 This book is focusing on how to create a pop party, so everything from the paper props

 that you can see behind me to the pops obviously are the main event, and then the cakes as

 well, layer cakes and chocolate drizzle cakes and ice cream cakes, all sorts of things.

 Today I'm going to be showing you how to make a circus monkey like this guy.

 So you now take your cake balls, which you would have measured into 30 gram balls, you

 roll them and then you take your sugar ears, which you made in advance two days before,

 you dip them into any light coloured candy melts that's already melted and insert on

 the side of the monkey's head, like so, and keep going until you've got all of your balls

 for this batch, and then just put them in the freezer to harden for about 10 minutes.

 So once your monkey heads have hardened, but aren't too hard, you don't want them to be

 frozen through, you get them out, you dip the tip of your stick into some candy melts,

 you insert it three quarters of the way up, doesn't matter if it's a bit tilted because

 they can have cute little characters on them, and then you just tilt the bowl and dip your

 it on the side because I think when you tap it on the side sometimes it can come loose,

So just shake it and attach your hat that we made earlier, and then leave that

 So next we just have to make our skin colour for the mouth of the monkey.

 take about a quarter of a bag of pink candy melts, and then one, two handfuls of white,

 and then just a few brown because they can really darken the whole mixture so you don't

And then melt that at 30 second intervals, and then you'll get a

 skin colour, and then you take your monkey and you just dip, trying to make sure that

 it's in the centre of the head, close to the bottom of the face, and then you just dip,

 I mean just shake, and then you should have a nice mouth for the monkey.

 Here I've just mixed a bit of the edible tint in white, and then a bit of our half and half

So just mix it together, and get your monkey, and paint some nice round eyes

And this will dry almost instantly which is really handy for painting on black

 So now we're going to get our black, pour a little bit of the black onto a cling film,

 two little nostrils, I've already done the tassel on the hat but if you haven't, do it

And then maybe you could do things like glasses, or I'm going to do some

 and then choosing the best one for each section and carefully going over it.

 falls in a more natural position, while the right side can become a little awkward.

 drawing many circles, choosing the best one for every part and going over it.

 Normally I'll do this better, but please consider the fact that I have a camera in front of me

 that I have to be avoiding and that it doesn't allow me to even look at my drawing straight on.

I continue with the reflections and then smudge the graphite with a soft brush.

 While making the background I lost some of the roundness, so I fix this.

 I'll make them more spherical, as they deform when they float in the wind.

 If you want to achieve a perfect circle, you can easily get it with the help of a compass or something round.

 If you are interested in knowing what materials I used for this drawing,

 These spheres are not too bad, however, they look to me a little bit too solid.

 With a kneaded eraser I'm going to lighten up the darker parts,

 Otherwise I'll have to change the video title to floating bowling balls or something like that.

 I think they can be saved, but worst case scenario, we have a plan B.

 By the way, to accomplish what I am doing, of erasing an area where there is a lot of graphite already,

 If you enjoyed it, please give it a like and subscribe to my channel.

 Don't forget to follow me on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn and Google+.

 Go red, white, and blue with Jell-O by preparing our Jell-O Frozen Freedom Pops.

 Let's start by taking one package of Jell-O Strawberry Flavored Gelatin.

 Next, same procedure with the Jell-O Berry Blue Flavored Gelatin.

 Right into the bowl, and adding two-thirds of a cup of boiling water.

 And stirring just for about two minutes until it's completely dissolved.

 Next I'm going to coat these two 8 by 4 inch pans with some nonstick spray.

 And now I'm just going to put these in the refrigerator until they're firm, about an

 So my gelatin is nice and chilled, and comes out like a dream, very easy.

 To make this easier, you can coat your knife with a little bit of nonstick spray.

 And now I'm going to make the pudding, which is one package of Jell-O Vanilla Flavor Instant

 And I'm just going to go ahead and whisk this for about two minutes until it gets nice

 I'm going to spoon the pudding and gelatin mixture into eight five ounce cups.

 Now take a popsicle stick and put it right into the center of each cup.

 There's only one step left, and that's put these in the freezer for four hours until

 about a visual food diary first and then I'll go on to what you need and briefly how to

Food diaries can be classified as a creative means of evaluating

Recording your food in a food diary, you know, it gives you room to

 evaluate what you, the foods you eat and also to track your progress with it.

 are able to think twice about the food that you're eating before you actually eat it.

 to go on with this video, what you will need is a digital camera.

This will be used to take along with you wherever you go during the

Either at work or at home, you will record exactly what you eat for that day in this index

Okay, and another thing that you will need, you will need Microsoft Excel.

 don't have Microsoft Excel, you can also use an alternative software program which is called

Okay, now I will continue on to this how to create this visual food diary using Excel.

As you notice, I have already created my visual food diary, but I

 will go through the necessary steps that you need to take to create yours.

 or time of day, what I ate and drank, where and with whom, feelings before and feelings after.

When you freeze your panes, no matter how many times you insert your items, you

Okay, now to insert your image, it's very important that you save your image in the

 same folder each time so that you'll know exactly where to get your images from.

 and I click on insert and it comes on the aisle where I had my insertion point.

 time of day that I ate this chili cheese steak was at dinner time.

I ate about a cup of potato chips and probably about three teaspoons of

Okay, where you'll tab over to the next column where and with whom

 but I knew that it was my dinner time and I knew that I didn't want to eat too late.

 Okay, and that's basically how you create your visual food diary.

 ate and drank, where and with whom, how did you feel before you ate, and how did you feel afterwards.

 You save it as and you put the you would type the name that you would want to you will want it saved

This already exists but I'll go ahead and replace it because this is what I want.

 And that's basically it and that is my session of how to make a visual food diary using excel.

 From the worst beginners to even some PGA Tour players, they pull the handle too much.

 And that's a result of this fascination with lag and forward shaft lean and all that good

 People are trying to create too much lag right here and create too much forward shaft lean

 And you know, you want lag and you want forward shaft lean, but you don't get it by pulling

 One day I heard Johnny Miller on a telecast say, pull the butt of the club into a wall

 And then I came out to the range later that day and I saw people up and down the range

 Now Johnny Miller was a great player and I understand what he's trying to do with that

 But pulling the handle and pulling the butt of the club into a wall in front of you does

 The two main problems that cause this are backswings that are too long and then you

 can't create enough rotational speed and then you come into the ball like this.

 And more often is the upper body gets in front of the ball and if you made a proper swing

 So when your upper body gets in front of the ball, this shallows out the swing path.

 So pulling the handle is not what creates those, fixes that problem.

 As far as creating lag and creating forward shaft lean, you don't pull a handle to do

 You create lag by shifting the weight to the left with the lower body and keeping the upper

 So if you shift the weight forward with the lower body and keep the upper body back, you

 get all the lag you want and all the lag you need and the amount of lag you're supposed

 All that said, for those of you that are familiar with my videos, lag, not all that important.

 What's important is that you get to impact like this or somewhere about there.

 The forward, magical forward shaft lean that everyone wants to compress an iron.

 So obviously that's not the way the swing works, but the point being made there is,

 is lag and forward shaft lean are created with an in-sync golf swing, a shifting of

 the lower body, the upper body staying back and creating tilt, and then the rotation of

 So the lag is created by the lower body going forward and the upper body staying back and

 then the arms reconnect, lag, and then the forward shaft lean is created when you get

 So pulling on the handle will stop all of those good things from happening because it

 isolates the hands from the rest of the swing and holds the face open too long, often causing

 So if you pull the handle into the wall, that club face is too open, you have to stall down

 So in summary, shift, tilt, and rotate, and you'll get all the lag and forward shaft lean you want.

 Not much for definitive riffs going on in this song, but there is one I guess you could

 It's kind of cool, it's got kind of that twanginess to it, kind of a country style there.

 Sounds kind of cool, so basically it's just a little picking here on the E and then bust

 Nothing too crazy, so basically we just do the open E, and then 3rd fret, open on the

 A, and then we hit the D, but it's not complete, just kind of leave that middle finger off

 the bottom there, so just like that, and then hit that open E that you left open, and then

 the 3rd on the B, with the D there, and then do a E chord here, E minor, and then continue

 picking that with your pinky there, the open on the high E, and the 3rd on the B here for

 the D, and then open it on the B. That's basically what you're picking there on those high strings.

 That's pretty much it, what I would call the definitive riff of that song, so just like

 And you'll have to excuse my nasally sexy man voice that I got going on.

 I feel like I'm always repeating myself, but to do a white base I just use a French Tip

 white nail polish because they're the thickest and most opaque in one coat.

 I should probably make this whole white nail polish mystery thing its own video.

 I apply Simply Peel liquid latex barrier on the skin around my nail to help protect from

 You can watch a video all about these peel off magical wonders at the video picture link

 And I apply them on a regular makeup sponge and sponge them on with quick light dabs on

 But I just cut off the edge when it gets a little too thick and soak in polish.

 And then you can make a flower or designs are hanging on your wall and people will think

 When you're done, you can just take a toothpick or tweezers or whatever and peel off the Simply

 And I only have a tiny, tiny little bit of paint on my cuticle.

 So I just take a little bit of an angled eyeliner brush in acetone to get the tiny little bit

 Add a quick dry top coat because here we're going to put on nail vinyl.

 And so when you put on the nail vinyls, it won't rip off your pretty gradient.

 I'm using just some straight or striped nail vinyls from Twinkledtea.com.

 And I'm just going to stick them on my nail in a triangle form.

 I'm using the same white Color Club polish that I'd used as my base to fill in the triangle

 Remove the nail vinyls really quickly with tweezers before the polish dries.

 And I'm taking just a random striping brush I got off Amazon and some black acrylic paint

 Now honestly, it's like super hard to film this kind of detail on camera.

 And if you notice, my other nails, the black line is actually a lot skinnier.

 And you'll see later that the pattern is a lot better on every nail that wasn't filmed.

 Because whatever I film is going to turn out worse than all the nails that I didn't film.

 And then you're probably just going to think, well, she's obviously a liar if she can't

 She probably just hired like a tiny talented leprechaun to paint those other nails and

 Because when I paint my nails with little details like this, I literally paint them in my face.

 Like my nails are actually in my face and I'm painting them and I can eat the paintbrush

 Because I need to show all you great people of the nail art world how I do these nail arts.

 Okay, I think I should probably stop before I cover up the whole neon gradient.

 And then you look like a crazy freak with the craziest neon insane nails on your hand.

 It's a wonder that these nail polishes are called polish for tans.

 Alright guys, I'm going to go back to sleep or watch House of Cards or something.

 So, thanks for putting up with me sounding like a sexy dirty old man.

It's a rainy day in the Gulf Coast of Texas and I'm crazy enough

 for you and when you get a picture, I'm going to be the first one to see it.

So it uses lots of peppers and it uses some fruit juice in it to make

So, we're going to make that on this episode of the Hungry Hammock Hanger.

 The shopping list for today is 2 pounds of lean ground pork, 1 medium white onion diced,

 1 cup and a half of pineapple juice, and 1 half cup of orange juice, 1 quarter of a

 cup of apple cider vinegar, 1 quarter of a cup of chili powder, 2 teaspoons of kosher

 salt, 1 teaspoon of ground cumin, 1 teaspoon of oregano, and 3 cloves of garlic minced,

 2 small chipotle peppers, and 2 tablespoons of adobo sauce, 4 tablespoons of brown gravy

 all you Pork Al Pastor aficionados out there that this is not authentic.

 is either a pulled pork that's been marinated in the spices and then pulled, or it's been

 sliced, the pork butt's been sliced really thin and it's toasted over an upright spit,

 kind of like what you see with a gyro sandwich with a lot of spices and pineapple in it.

 Meats are whole like this, when you dehydrate them it's really just kind of jerky and it's

 really tough to get those whole meats even pulled to rehydrate all the way.

 kind of lightly tough and I don't particularly like that so that's why I always take and

 use ground meats when I can because they rehydrate fully again.

 of Pork Al Pastor recipes call for pineapple to be put in them.

 dense, fibrous fruit and those things, once you dehydrate pineapple, it will never, ever,

 pineapples to cut diamonds or cut steel with, but they're not going to be eaten again.

 that's why we're using pineapple juice and orange juice versus whole pineapples.

 Put your chipotle peppers in adobo sauce into a mixing bowl and mash them up really good

Make sure to mix them up really, really well and then let the marinade sit for about

 Then put your pork mix into a 9x13 baking dish and then even it out really well.

 it sit for about a half hour then bake in a 350 degree oven for 60 minutes.

 to give it a good stir about every 15 minutes to keep the pork broke apart.

 After an hour of cooking, your pork al pastor will look like this.

Then put it on a fruit roll sheet in your dehydrator or on a cookie sheet if

 Let's talk about some substitutions that you can make in this recipe.

 in the UK and you're thinking, I can't get half of these ingredients.

 the chipotles and adobo sauce and the chili powder, you're probably not going to be able

 chipotles and adobo sauce and the chili powder with one of two things.

 market and get an Asian chili paste because that's all we're really making with the

 adobo and the chipotle and the chili powder is kind of a chili paste.

 that with preferably a moderate to high heat Asian chili paste.

 six to eight to ten tablespoons on that depending on your heat tolerance.

 anywhere from six to eight servings depending on what your appetite is.

 you how to rehydrate it, I'll let you know that this is just like just about every other

 a pot, put about a half inch of water over your meal, bring it to a boil and let it sit

 in a pot cozy for about fifteen to twenty minutes and you're good.

I either rehydrate some dehydrated refried beans and turn this into a burrito

The other two ways that you can eat this on the trail is by putting equal

 amounts of pork al pastor and dehydrated rice or instant rice and eating it that way.

 sweetness in it and will certainly make a welcome addition to your backpacking pantry.

 and I'm really excited to have Shanna here from Ruffles and Rouge and today

 Okay, the supplies that you will need to make the paper rosette are thick cardstock,

 You can also cut it in thinner strips to make lots of different layers or you can cut in thick

 And all you have to do to get all of these layers is cut a really thin strip and keep going with a

 make sure you've got plenty of glue because as you will see, all of this is going to have to

While your glue is still hot, take your glitter and pour it right down in the

 a centerpiece, it's really nice if you have a long table, you can incorporate them in pieces

 a little flower arrangement, you can actually stick it down into your flower arrangement.

 dries, you'll know because it won't wiggle around on the glass.

 If you have a bad back, if you have bad knees, all jokes aside.

 If you have limited resources and flexibility, start like this.

 If you're not down with that, you need to get down with this 12-week program.

 Hello and welcome to another Aqualuso how to guide for your shower.

 focuses on removing the on off valve from your 3 dial thermostatic shower valve.

 important to note that if you have to replace the on off dial in your valve then you will

It's the middle dial that controls the water on and off and it's flow rate that we're

 lug that simply unscrews and inside we insert a 2.5mm allen key, give it half a turn just to

 holds on the dial plate, just simply unscrew the ring and next remove the dial plate.

 on the top of the valve where the dial was there are two holes.

 the hole of the chrome section should slowly unscrew and then remove completely exposing the

 shape which we can use a spanner or wrench to simply loosen and then remove completely the on

It's important when replacing your on off valve that you get exactly the correct type.

 The lower part where the red end is, if you measure that diameter that will give you an

 and again using the two holes to get purchase tighten up the upper chrome housing.

 sure it's orientated in the right direction and next using the silver ring tighten that over the

 on off dial and just check to ensure that when the lug is fitted that it points correctly to match

 where you'll find more useful help guides for your Aqualuso shower.

 container and let dough rise at room temperature for about an hour.

 on your work surface to come back to temperature for about an hour.

Once the dough is mixed and resting for 14 hours or more, it is not

 a big deal and once it is pulled out, it takes a couple of hours to get it done.

 the dough to a lightly floured surface without deflating it yet and divide it into 3 7.5

 shape each piece into a 16 inch length baguette the size of your baking tray, starting with

 folding and pressing with the heel of your hand as if you were folding a business letter.

 Elongate each baguette by rolling it back and forth on the work surface with both hands

 over the center of the loaf and work them out to the ends until the baguette reaches

 and let proof for about an hour or until it has almost doubled in size.

 baking mat onto the hot baking tray or stone and throw a few ice cubes for the steam and

And by the way, like professional, if you use baker's couche, flax linen proofing

 cloth and if you want to be more creative, roll shaped baguette in a damped clean kitchen

 You have some cumin seed powder and some coriander seed powder.

 I mean, in the north, we have a different combination of spices

In today's class we're going to learn the technique of stitching

Now a set-in seam is a seam that you must pivot in order to complete.

 It is also called a Y seam, and you can see why that is, because it is in the shape of

 a Y. It's a little bit more of a complicated seam, but I'm going to show you how to do

I've folded it over again, and I've lined this up along the grid on the

 bottom, and I'm going to line it up along the side, but as you'll notice, most of your

 fabrics are not cut off the bolt straight, so I need to square it up.

 just slice a real thin piece off the side just to make this nice and even.

 right along that line, and now my piece is completely squared on the corners.

 across the bottom, across the side, and my ruler is lined up here and down here.

 thing you can do to help you along is to put some tape down to show you where 6 inches

Now I don't totally follow that, that just gives me a reference.

Normally you would just move the ruler down, but since I've given

 myself a reference, I'm going to go ahead and move the material.

 your background blocks, we're going to go to our bow tie material and we're going to

Now the third of our bow tie square we're going to take and we're going to fold

 here, and we're going to take this square and we're going to lay it on top of it, just

Now we're going to pin this in place and we're going to straight stitch right

 to pin it in place and I'm going to straight stitch right along this at a quarter of an

We're going to take these center seams right here and right here

Wiggle our fingers back and forth, you feel that seam lock in place.

 sides and put our finger down in here to make sure we don't get anything that we don't want

Just like this we're going to lay it here and sandwich it just like this

We're going to come over here and we're going to do the same thing.

 we're going to take this to the sewing machine and we're going to sew all the way across

 at quarter inch seam allowance through our intersection, catching our pieces right here

 We're going to take our pin and we're going to pin it right here.

 Now we're going to set the seam and we're going to press it open.

 Hi there, it's Rosie from I Heart Recipes, and I'm going to show you how to make

 then I'm going to whisk everything until it is nicely dissolved, or until it is

 to start pouring in some more warm water, and I'm also going to pour in some

 I'm going to start off on a low speed, and now I'm going to start sprinkling in

 some all-purpose flour, but I'm only going to add in one cup at a time.

 this time, I'm also going to sprinkle in a little bit of salt, and I'm going to

 I would really appreciate it if you gave it a thumbs up, thank you in advance.

 that's just going to let you know right then and there that you did it right, and

 you're going to have some nice fluffy bread at the end of this.

 going to just knead our bread for about 10 minutes, and then we're going to let

Now for the resting part, you're going to need to oil a bowl or a pot, and

 we're going to cover this, and we're going to let it rest for about one and a

 after that resting period, it's going to double or be doubled in size.

 going to need to punch it in the middle to get rid of all that excess air, and

 I'm going to flatten this dough down, and then I'm going to grab two loaf pans

 I'm going to let this rest for about maybe 45 minutes to an hour, or until it

 going to remove it from the oven, of course, and then I'm going to immediately

 for this recipe, it can be found on my blog, IHeartRecipes.com.

 perfect for toast, bread pudding, sandwiches, anything you want to do with

And don't forget to visit me every Sunday and Wednesday for new recipes.

 Hey everybody this is Rory over at ANS Gear here to show you the 9V conversion kit out

 Now this 9V conversion kit can be used for any of your loaders that use the AA battery

 harness systems such as your Halo, your Empire loaders, your Prophecy, your Magna.

 All those loaders can be adapted with this 9V conversion kit to run 9V.

 Now 9V you can use if you're looking to maybe drop a little weight on your loader system.

 Also you can get a little bit higher feeding rate because you are increasing the voltage

 Therefore you can get the motor to spin a little bit quicker and feed a little bit faster.

 But your life span of the batteries does not last as long as if you were to use the 6 AA

 I've already taken the screw out of the battery door so we can pop this off.

 This side just has one set of prongs and this side has two set of prongs.

 Then we can take this, drop it down into our loader, and cover it up and use it.

 I've got a regular alkaline and a lithium battery here connected.

 If you wanted to switch back, you can leave your batteries in there and then put it back

 Again, this is the 9 volt conversion kit available from Empire.

 Works on all your battery harness sets like this for your loaders, your Halos, your Empire,

 your Empire reloaders, reloader B2s, your Magnas, your Prophecies.

 So this is the video for the Kiwi Mouse Trap, aka the No-Kill Mouse Trap.

 The things you're going to need for this are a bucket, some bait, I'm using peanut butter,

 some butter or Crisco oil, a bottle with a long thin neck, a towel, and some books or

 You're going to need a bucket that's deep enough so that when the mouse falls in there

 And you're going to just set that on the floor, preferably next to a high countertop.

 You want the long neck part to be extended off of the counter and over the bottle, over

 And you're going to use the towel, you're going to put that over the end of the bottle

 that stays on the counter to stabilize it and keep it from falling off.

 And you're going to use the books or magazines in this case to put weight on the towel and

 Then you're going to use the butter to make the neck of the bottle slick.

 And you just want to get a nice even coat on there so that the neck of the bottle is

 And you just want to put that right out on the end of the bottle.

 And the idea is that the mouse is going to smell it when he tries to crawl out and get

 It's going to be too slick and he's going to slip and fall off into the bucket.

 Well, as you can see, after changing to a bigger bucket, it was effective.

 If you're thinking of trying this at home, you may want to check out how high this guy

 So you want to make sure you use a plenty big bucket to catch these guys.

 And we've got the place that he came in blocked up, so hopefully he doesn't come back.

 To cast on with a ruffle yarn that has a mesh structure, you want to pull open the yarn

 And if the yarn has sort of a rough edge here, what you can do is fold it over itself once

 or twice, but then treat that folded piece as a single layer of the yarn.

 In order to cast on, instead of doing a traditional cast on, you're actually just putting stitches

 The way you do that is to insert your needle near the upper edge of the yarn from back

 to front so that the stitches end up pointing in the correct direction on your needles when

 In the case of this yarn, the manufacturer recommends going about three quarters of an

 inch at a time, but really you can pick any amount of space and really play with how ruffly

 When you have the desired number of stitches cast on, you simply turn the yarn around and

 knit it as you would any other yarn by putting your empty needle in the stitch and then using

 Turning it up and over, again sticking towards the edge of the mesh, knitting it as you normally

 Knitting a stitch, knitting the second stitch, and then passing that first stitch over the

 second stitch and off the needle and moving on to the rest of them, knitting one, passing

 You want to be careful with this particular type of yarn to do this very loosely.

 You might want to move up a needle size or two in order to do it because the tighter

 you cast off, the more pulled together the edge of your scarf will be.

It's one of my favorite redfish flies either for the grass in the summer or at low

 are a 1-0 Mustad 3407, Grande Root Beer Estes, some dark brown strung marabou, some brown

 polar fiber, and of your choice some variant crystal flash colors.

 You want to make sure this is nice and tight and doesn't twist on you once you get done

I do that a couple of times to make sure I get it nice and straight.

 I'm going to wrap back, about halfway back the hook shank here to give us the next start

 tied this in sufficiently, now I'm going to add some flash to it.

 to hold it, I'm going to fold this back, pull this over a little bit on each side, and I'm

After you have the tail, I'm now going to take a piece of this marabou and I'm going

It doesn't matter about this because what you're going to do now is you're going

 is where it becomes valuable because now I can rotate this around and wrap.

 I'd like to take you on a little tour of the Instant Cord Finder.

 And a desktop is a good place to put it, too, so you can always find it.

 And all you do is double-click on that icon, and you get the standard Microsoft message that says,

 And the notes of the C chord appear in the treble clef, and they appear on the keyboard.

 If you want to see what they look like in the bass clef, you just click this bass clef sign,

 And you can tell this part of the keyboard is lit up, so it's in the bass clef.

 We can toggle it back to the treble clef, and you see that's lit up.

 And there are the notes in the treble clef, and there are the notes of the C triad.

 If you want to see the notes of the C triad upside down, in other words, inverted,

 click on First Inversion, and you see now C has gone from the bottom note to the top note,

 If you want to know what the second inversion of the C chord is, you click on number 2,

 and there's the C chord upside down the second time called Second Inversion,

 If you want to know what the F major chord is, just click on F.

 If you want to know what the A flat major chord is, click on A flat.

 Now let's say that we're in the key of D, and we want to know what the scale of D is.

 We come over here and we click on the scale, and we have several scales to choose from.

 We can see the D major scale or the D minor harmonic, minor melodic,

 And I encourage you to click through all those, but I'll just click the major scale for now.

 And now we not only see the notes of the D chord, but we see all the notes of the D scale.

 That's useful when you're improvising to know what notes go with which chords.

 If I switch to G, and I want to know the notes of the G scale, there they are.

 If I want to know what the notes of the G minor scale are, there's the G minor chord,

 If I want to know what the notes of the A scale are, there's the A chord, and there's the A scale.

 Now, by the way, you can just put your mouse over any of those notes if you want to take off the gray for some reason,

 So you can have the basic chords here, and then the extended chords here.

 C minor sixth, C augmented, C diminished, C sus four, C seventh sus four, C sixth, C ninth, C eleventh, 13th, and so on.

 In five minutes, you'll be as good at this as I am, and there's not much to be good about.

 No, I wouldn't have, because I play my chords with my left hand.

 But I would have given my left leg for this back when I was in college.

 To have all this information, this is great music theory, and it's all on a concise chart on your desktop.

 Of course, you can get it out of a book, but you can't turn chords quickly upside down or determine what the scale is,

 Hey guys, so before I start anything today, I'd just like to say that I'm really sorry for not making videos for the past few weeks.

 If you've been reading my bulletins then you'd know that I have a lot of school things on right now.

 And it's been really hard to find the time to make videos lately, just because I'm very busy.

 And unfortunately the school things still haven't stopped, so I can't guarantee you guys that I'll still be making videos for the next few weeks, like every single week.

 Because I'm still very busy, but I'm able to make a video today, which is good.

 So today I'll be actually giving you a tutorial on the general swing cart, okay?

 Okay, so basically just what you're doing is just cutting the cards, just cutting the deck.

 But it's a much nicer way of cutting the deck than doing this, or just doing it on a table or something.

 And then you can also do it with multiple packets of cards, by going like that.

 So what you're going to do to start off is you're going to get into a biddle grip, a card biddle grip, okay?

 And what you're going to do, you're going to have your thumb on either the left or right third of the deck.

 If you are using your left hand, then you're going to have your thumb on the left third pointing towards you.

 And then if you're right handed, then you're going to have right third pointing towards you.

 And then you can either hold it like this with just your middle finger or your middle finger and your ring finger.

 I prefer to just do it with my middle finger, but middle finger and ring finger is fine either way, doesn't matter.

 So to start off, what you need to do is you need to break off with your index finger.

 Anyway, what you're going to do is break off a portion of the deck with your index finger, okay?

 And then, when you have that like that, okay, you're going to lock it in with this part of the flesh here.

 You take off a portion of the deck with your middle finger, swing it to the right, lock it in with this piece of flesh here, and then put the rest of the deck back on top.

 Now, if you want to do it with multiple portions of cards, you just basically do the same thing.

 So, yeah, you just go like that, lock it in, take another portion, lock it in.

 Now, make sure when you're doing it with multiple packets of cards, make sure when you lock it in it's a really firm grip like that.

 Really firm lock like that, or else the cards might slide over like this and then you're all over the place.

 So you just want to make a really firm lock if you're going to do it with multiple packets.

 Now, the reason I made this tutorial was because this is going to be good because if you know how to do a swing cut, I'm going to do a tutorial of the swing false cut, which I did the video before this one.

 Swing false cut, which is basically you just do a bunch of swing cuts and it looks like you're cutting the cards when you're actually just keeping the deck in the exact same order.

 I feel like I'm two years ago or something, back when the old YouTube.

 Anyway, comment, rate, thumb up, sorry, and subscribe, and I'll see you guys next time.

 Hi everyone, so if you have granite countertops like I do in my bathroom especially, you're

 probably wondering how to get watermarks, water stains off of your new countertop.

 I happen to have a black granite countertop, which I'll show you in a second, and I was

 having some difficulty getting the water stains off of it, and I found a solution and it works

 This is exactly what I use, so it's distilled white vinegar and a cotton ball.

 As you can see, it's on the left side, so it's near the hot water faucet, which might

 be from the water or maybe there's calcium or chlorine in the water.

 I'm not sure exactly what's causing that, but I've tried everything and I can't get

 So all you have to do is open up your bottle of white vinegar and just pour a little onto

 I'm going to try and rub it and see if it comes out, which last time I did it, it worked.

 It seemed to be the only thing that would work, and it didn't ruin the countertop.

 Sometimes they say that if you put vinegar on the countertop, especially if it's sealed,

 I'm just testing out a little area first to make sure that you're not ruining your countertop.

 My countertop, it's brand new, it's pretty new, maybe a month or so old, and it's sealed,

 came sealed, but for some reason these stains keep occurring right near the faucet and also

 when the water drips down and stays there for a little while, so you want to make sure

 So now I'm just going to dry it a little bit to see if it removed the stain.

 And if there's like little spots that you have to touch up, like maybe, nope, seems

 And if you have any questions or any solutions for me that might work better, please let

 Hi, it's Leigh and today I'm going to be making my favorite white bread recipe in the bread

 The great thing about using the bread machine is you just dump everything in, set the machine,

 I tend to put it on the dough setting and then shape the loaf and bake it in the oven.

 But if you like the harder crust, go ahead and bake it in the machine.

 I'm actually going to, there's a glare on it, but I'm actually going to set this on,

 I'm going to let this go and then take it out and shape it and bake it in the oven.

 And that, just thought I'd give you a little sneak peek at what's going on inside the bread

 And if you notice after a little while that your dough is really sticky, you can add a

 I wouldn't go crazy with it, but it's looking a little sticky right now, but I'm going to

 Turns out it really didn't need any extra flour, so that's why you need to give it a

 If at this stage it still looks kind of gooey, you can just add a little flour and start

 Okay, so the dough is done, and I'm going to dump it out onto this parchment paper I

 Okay, so I took it out of the pan and I put it on the parchment paper that I greased a

 little bit or sprayed actually with a little bit of cooking spray.

 You could put it in a dish, pan, or you know, however you want it.

 So anyway, now I'm going to add a little bit of spray to the outside to keep it from

 And I'm going to let it sit and rise, I don't know, probably about 25-30 minutes, we'll

 And then I'm going to heat up my oven to about 375 when it gets close to doubled in size

 I'm going to try to put a few slashes in it with my left hand, I'm not sure how well this

 And then you just put it in the oven, 375 for about, start checking it around 15 minutes,

 It could take up to 25 minutes, it really just depends on how it's shaped and you know,

 So at this point you could also put an egg wash on it to keep it nice and kind of softer

 So I will be back when it's done to show you how beautiful it is.

 It looks amazing and I can't wait for it to cool down so we can give it a shot, give it

I use a rolling pin, pastry cutter, these red little plastic smoothers that

 got at the bakery supply store and a piece of vinyl that I got at a Joann's

 So as you're working, when you see air bubbles appear, you want to take a little

 top of the fondant to get any of those extra air bubbles out as well.

 see I use a little water bottle to squirt or spray down my ganache cake.

Then you just pretty much want to smooth down the top and make sure

 As you can see I can already see there's an air bubble along the

 around all my edges, go around the top surface, and then I start to make a nice

 plastic folder, that was the right consistency, the right thickness.

 cut it into two little squares and that's my my go-to tool for smoothing

Some people use the acetate but I think that's just a little too

 thin for me so I found this this liner on the house and cut it up and it's and

 the edges and you know pop any air bubbles that may have appeared.

 dangers with using ganache is when you pop the air bubbles sometimes it will

 bit of a little bit of vodka and that's a you know good way to clean up the

 stain so a little bit of vodka it dries up and will cover up the hole.

 just going around making sure I got all the air bubbles and then I just take my

 So you can see here how I'm just pushing the two pieces of plastic together to

 around the whole entire cake just like this and you'll get those nice sharp

 So as you can see here I'm taking the two smoothers and I'm just piercing them

 You just want to pierce the little corners together and it's a little

 and I just feel like I have more control over how I'm you know working

I can see the the crisp of the edge appear right before my eyes so

 probably find these folders at Staples or I've looked at Target.

 the right kind of folder there but Staples and probably Office Depot I

 but sometimes you do have blemishes and luckily this this cake the final product

 had some decorations on it so I was able to cover up some of the blemishes.

 thank you for watching and I hope that I hope that this has helped you.

 Many boats have decks, hulls, and bulkheads which are made up of core material sandwiched

 When damaged, the core material must be replaced before new skins can be laminated.

 Another common problem is puncture damage in an area where access to the rear of the

 cutting three or four pieces of six ounce, which is 200 grams per square meter, of fiberglass

 cut through the fiberglass skin, one to one and a half inches or 2.5 to 4 centimeters

Pull the inner edge of the hole slightly to reduce stress concentrations.

 As with the solid laminate, measure the skin thickness to determine and mark a 12 to 1

 Mark a vertical line through the center of the laminated backup piece for orientation.

 Trace the outer edge of the core on the backup piece and cut out the oval with scissors.

 Insert the backup piece into the hole, wire side out, bending the piece slightly if necessary.

Wet out the core material and the hole with the resin hardener mixture.

 and apply the mannase thick mixture to the hole cavity and the inner surface of the core

Be sure to wet out the new core material before applying the patch.

 To accelerate cure time, use heat lamps or a hot air gun to heat the laminate.

 Hi everybody, I'm going to be sharing with you how I created this canvas.

 I ended up using a lot more color the next day after I created it, just because I wasn't

 But you get the idea of how I created it and the colors and things like that is all up

 So the paper I'm using is the Pink Paisley Butterfly Garden paper.

 I am making these strips of paper and I will be adhering them down with a little bit of

 I wanted to create kind of panels on the canvas and I used Mod Podge to adhere the paper.

 And then I used a pretty good layer on top so that hopefully the ink and stuff will kind

 They are different sizes because I wanted a lot of interest in the back.

 I'm not 100% sure where I got them, but I've had them for a while.

 I sprayed them with some Lindy Stamp Gang and probably some Glimmer Mist.

 This is a Crafters Workshop Honeycomb Mask and I'm using modeling paste.

 I am using a mixture of Lindy's, Glimmer Mist, and Smooch Spritz.

 So it's kind of hard to tell exactly which ones I'm using at a particular time.

 A lot of them are watered down just because I don't like a lot of dark colors.

 That one is Sea Grass Green and I used Dark Chocolate Truffle, Cape Cod Coral, South Shore

 But I do end up breaking out a lot of different colors off camera.

 I think I have them for every collection and I always forget that I have them.

 I sprayed them with the Sea Grass Green and I believe that's the Dark Chocolate Truffle

 This trim is from the Piece by Piece and I'm spraying the edge with Sea Grass Green.

 And I'm just kind of randomly spraying more where I see I think I want them.

 My camera kept stopping like every 30 seconds to a minute so it was hard to create and kind

 And I think I'm going to be using the Pink Paisley stamp from the collection.

 And I'm just stamping it randomly because I want it to kind of frame where I'm going

 It doesn't quite fit the whole canvas but I kind of try to stretch it so it fits.

 So these are the ones at the bottom, the flowers at the bottom.

 The big flower by the Create is a Prima flower, one of the Odette flowers, and then the rest

 I'm trying to shove them under there without ruining my canvas.

 And I've had these wings out for a long time and I try to add them to different projects

 So now I'm using some gesso to highlight some of the areas on the canvas.

 And then I'm going to be taking some Lindy's embossing powder and just sprinkling it on

 where I have put some of the paint in just different areas that are wet.

 And then I'll heat emboss that and it gives a really cool texture and effect.

 The following demonstration gives step-by-step instructions for installing the RONDO DUO

 A ceiling with a drop of more than 150mm will require a fully suspended system.

 Check the installation area to ensure the walls are square, parallel and plumb.

 Lay out the ceiling grid from the centre of the room to the architect's drawing, or to

 Mark the ceiling height on the walls using a laser, and then fix the perimeter trim with

 Mitre the perimeter trims at the corners and ensure all joints are supported by joiners

 Fix the main T-suspension hanger brackets from the supporting structure according to

 Suspension hanger brackets should only be installed using suitable fasteners.

 Hangers adjacent to the perimeter walls should be no more than 300mm from the wall, unless

 Assemble the suspension clips onto the suspension rods, which should be pre-cut to the length

 When using the 247 or 274 suspension hanger brackets, one end of the suspension rod must

 be bent to a 30 degree angle, forming a hook that will interlock with the suspension bracket.

 When using the 534 or 547 suspension hanger bracket, the suspension rod is not bent as

 the rod slides into the spring-loaded securing tabs of the clip.

 Cut the main T to length so that the first pre-punched cross T slot matches the chosen

 Dagger all the joints throughout the sealing system for best performance and appearance.

 When using clips 700 and 701, keep suspension points within 5 degrees of vertical.

 Main T's are joined at the end connection tabs and need a slight push to lock into each other.

 Install the cross T's into position through the pre-punched slots in the main T.

 Use a laser to check the alignment of the sealing grid before installing the sealing tiles.

 The sealing can be adjusted simply by squeezing the suspension clip tabs together to slide

 To stabilize the grid system in large areas, stabilizer clips should be attached to the

 The ends of the main and cross T's can be secured to the stabilizer clip via a tech screw.

 The grid system is now ready for light fittings to be installed.

 These must be supported on the main T only and may require additional suspension points

 The sealing tiles and air conditioning grills can now be added.

 If needed, tile hold-down clips can be used to prevent tiles from lifting in areas where

 The RONDO DUO exposed grid sealing system should only be installed by a professional

 For more information visit the RONDO website www.rondo.com.au or contact your local RONDO

 Alright, now this is a drill which incorporates the counter I just showed you against the

 You rotate your arms, step forward, passing through 3rd, cutting back into 6th.

 Durchtritt, thread through, cutting from 3rd board back into 6th.

 If you see the rear foot, maybe you want to step back a little bit.

 If you see the rear foot, maybe you want to film the feet only.

 The winding up prepares you for going to half and into a cover position.

 Then the other combo we did, oh I just did it from a different angle again.

 Because if I get overbound here now, it's easier to shield strike like so.

 You might do it differently than in the first drill we just had,

 Hey folks how is it going welcome to my virgin kitchen it is barry here you are looking gorgeous

 today it is the turn of another mini food kind of like the opposite of the giant food

 we do it is the mini food ok if you missed the playlist or any other ones you can click

 on the suggested thing that has just come up the budget for mini food has increased

 because you guys like it so much we have invested in a new set of tools how cool is that and

 today it is the turn of a mini s'more the ingredients are down there s'more s'more

 no lets do it alright then folks feast your eyes upon this first up is our fake winnie

 the pooh plate which is normally used for scale for the mini foods hopefully it will

 be smaller than that today these are some mini marshmallows you can get in the supermarket

 baking aisle this is a small thin chocolate bar by cabris quite like the planet on that

 one kind of cool I was going to use chocolate chips ok but it did not feel very s'moreish

 so we will not use those there is the toolkit thing and this is a graham cracker so actual

 s'mores are used graham crackers digestive biscuits are a good alternative these are

 actually from my wedding we found a sealed box from last year that is still in date and

 the kids have munched on them that is our biscuit tin there is none left in there this

 is the very last one so I was like no give it to me so we are making a proper s'more

Alright so this is probably the most important step in the video if this fails

 I have not got any more graham crackers left so the video is over this tool I just picked

 this out I think there is a selection of different toenail extracting tools I am going to go

 for this one because of the blade on it and I am going to try and cut a small graham cracker

 s'more piece times two actually we need two of those so here we go.

 working what I have been doing is scoring it very gently because these biscuits can

 snap so easily so let me score away and hopefully we will have some mini cracker things.

 check this out we have two little squares I have to say this tool has been amazing I

 am not sure if you can see it there but it has an amazingly sharp blade on it which has

 the chocolate and it is a little bit risky I am not going to lie but I am not that bothered

 so much about the chocolate it should oh there we go that piece will do lets just double

So I am looking at the marshmallow and thinking it might be a teeny

 bit too big so what I am doing is getting my scissors and giving it a little trim like

 that a little haircut and hopefully that is a little bit more manageable now we have to

 skewer and threaded the mini marshmallow onto it lets give me some flames.

 turn that right down, oh my god check that out that is amazing.

 the marshmallow my microwave was the backup plan but this is working and it is going to

 base the chocolate the toasted marshmallow I just did I actually ate it because I wanted

 to experience it and it was amazing so I will quickly toast this one and finish this off.

 Oh here we go come on come on yes, got to give it a little push to get that marshmallow

There we go then guys there are 4 teeny weeny s'mores I have done they

 are the smallest I have done so far even the plate is looking huge against it another thing

 for scale that is a 2 pence piece of coin right there and there we go mini s'mores lets

 I am a butch man style and I am going to have mini s'mores lets have a try a shot of mini

Shiver me timbers they were rather stonking indeed and rather filling just like

 the other mini foods randomly so as I say if you have missed the mini food playlist

 do not forget to check it out some of your requests may have already been done one of

 here here and here let me know down below what you want to see next and I will see you

 next time I am going to toast some more mini marshmallows yeah butch bye.

 Warning, never perform maintenance or assembly procedures with engine running or serious personal injury may result.

 Align hole in the upper plate with the notch and insert the locking tool.

 Remove cutting head by turning it clockwise until it comes off.

 Insert a flat head screwdriver into the notch for the locking tabs and push in to release each of the locking tabs.

 Remove the gold bushing from the core and replace it with the long silver adapter.

 Place core into top cover and install the spool with the L facing out.

 Line up locking tabs on the bottom cover with the top cover and squeeze both halves together to lock in place.

 Match the recess in the reversible spacer to the size of the fixing plate and install.

 Install speed feed head and insert the locking tool onto notch and upper plate.

 Rotate cutting head counterclockwise until the speed feed head is tight.

 Please note there should be no gap between the spacer and speed feed head after installing.

 Hello, I'm Kern Berg, fitness professional at BiggerWorks Fitness Center in Center City,

 Today, we're going to be guiding you through a series of exercise videos focusing on the

 This muscle group is often overlooked as people focus more on the anterior and medial

 The benefits of strengthening the posterior deltoid, it can improve posture as well as

 The exercises demonstrated today are going to be on a machine, a functional trainer,

 So you'd be able to find an exercise that best suits you, the gym that you work at,

 Justin is going to be demonstrating a reverse fly on our Cybex Eagle machine here.

 First you want to bring the handlebars all the way to the front and have your hands on

 And as you're coming back, you want to make sure you squeeze your shoulder blades together,

 You want to make sure that your elbows are slightly bent and maintain that slight bend

 Justin is going to be demonstrating for us a standing reverse fly on a functional trainer.

 You want to set the cables so the handles come from straight down below and grab in

 Your feet should be shoulder width apart, knees slightly bent, and lean in towards the

 Then you want to draw the arms up and out, maintaining a slight bend in the elbows.

 And again, you want to draw the shoulder blades down and in, isolating through the

 Justin is going to be demonstrating for us a standing reverse fly using dumbbells now.

 You want to start with your feet shoulder width apart, slight bend in the knees, and

 leaning further forward compared to the functional trainer with the back nice and flat.

 You want to draw your arms up and out so your palms are facing forward, maintaining the

 Again, squeezing the shoulder blades, drawing them down and in.

 You really want to minimize any rocking or using momentum in this exercise to focus on

 Be sure to click through all of them to check out different pieces of equipment that you

 Keep in mind that because these exercises are very isolating in the muscle group, you

 Also, be sure to maintain proper posture and technique through each exercise.

 If you have any questions, please visit us at www.vigorworks.com or stop by and speak

 Today we're going to show you how to change an ice maker in your refrigerator.

 All we're going to need is a quarter inch nut driver and a small flat blade screwdriver.

 Now the first step in this repair will be to turn the ice maker off.

 There's a couple of little hinge pins on the door that fit into a hinge bracket, so

 we're going to just push that bracket out just enough to clear the hinge pin and do

 Next we'll remove the shelf here to give ourselves a little more room.

 There's one quarter inch hex head screw on the right side here that we need to remove.

 There's also a locking tab on each side of these two tracks that hold the ice maker

 With a small flat blade we'll depress those tabs and then slide the ice maker forward.

 Now keeping the infrared door closed we'll slide the ice maker forward until we get

 Now we can take the ice maker to a suitable work surface and remove the base assembly

 Now that we have the old ice maker out and on a suitable work surface we'll turn it

 upside down and we're going to remove that base assembly from it.

 We're also going to need to remove the wire harness connector from the end of the assembly.

 Press the tabs in enough to drop it down through the opening and then we can discard the old

 Now we'll simply transfer the old casing onto the new ice maker.

 So anyone who has naturally curly hair knows how impossible it is to manage and maintain.

 So today's video is just a quick tutorial on how I curl my hair.

 Now I've already obviously curled this half and this half has just been brushed out.

 The products I'll be using in this tutorial are my Haatools curling iron, curly sexy

 hair by sexy hair, no this is a detangler, and I'll also be using Paul Mitchell Hot

 So the first thing you're going to want to do is just give yourself some nice heat protectant

 And then what I'm going to do is I'm going to go ahead and brush it out again.

 You can hear those tangles and anyone with curly hair knows my pain.

 Now I always like to section off my hair and I'm not big on this.

 What I'm going to do is I'm just going to take about the top half and I'm going to wrap

 Most people know what works best for their hair as far as how easy or hard it is to curl.

 Now what I do is you'll see that I take my strand and I apply the iron about center on

 Then I curl and wrap up and then I'm just going to continue to pull on the iron as I

 You'll see some of it might frizz out and so you can always retouch that up.

 But for today's purposes I'm just going to go ahead and leave it be.

 And depending on how much hair you have, you might have to do it in more sections than

 Now if I were going out or just wanting a more polished style, I might make my sections

 And if you don't want to brush through your curls, you can also just run your fingers

 through them to kind of connect the pieces, not make it look so choppy and separated.

 Now I'm just going to do that same thing to the rest of my hair.

 Now once I've got to the front, I am going to spend a little bit more time on this, a

 little bit smaller sections for a little more polish because I just don't want the front

 We're going to take this, now I'm going to pull front, wrap my iron straight up, then

 I'm going to do the same thing that I did with my bangs and just pull forward, curl

 Then what I'm going to do is I'm going to go ahead and brush out.

 Now you don't want to be crazy with it, you kind of want to be gentle when brushing your

 And then you can kind of decide if there are any pieces that you might want to redo.

 And obviously you can style to preference if you want to pin back or whatever.

 So that's all there is to my hair curling routine for curly hair, and this would probably

 I just found that with me and naturally curly hair, this is what works best.

 I'll go ahead and link descriptions of all the products that I used.

 When it comes on, it goes through the normal checkout routine and then it's ready to run.

 Right now we have the auto on, so when we drop in the bills, they'll automatically feed

 Now if we want to turn counterfeit detection on, we push this button here and now we have

 When we drop the bills in again, it counts 50 again and moves it over and it adds it

 Now if you want to batch, let's say you want to put the bills in bundles of 10.

 Now to clear out the batch, all you've got to do is hit this clear button right here.

 Oh, and by the way, if you don't like the bills to feed as soon as you set them in there,

 Hi guys, well I've done some videos recently on doing the cast iron skillets and things

 This is one I did a few days back or a couple weeks ago actually.

 And this is one that was given to me recently because of those videos and I don't really

 I don't know what's really going on with the pan so I wanted to clean it up but I thought

 this would be a great example of a trick that you might want to know how to do.

 Because of the grates and everything in the bottom here, this one would be really hard

 So what I'm going to do so that you don't think that I cheated or anything, I'm not

 I'm going to take it just like it is right now, I'm going to put it into my oven and

 put it on self-cleaning mode and then take it out and show you what it did.

 Anyway, that's going to take a while of course so I'll come back when that's done and show

 Okay guys, well it's been about three, three and a half hours, somewhere around in there.

 As you can see, this looks pretty much like a piece of metal now.

 It's kind of grayish, silverish looking and you can see some spots.

 Right here is a little bit of a rough spot and what I'll do is I'll just knock that off

 and you can see it comes right off no problem using a little scour brush.

 But this was a whole lot easier than trying to go in and do each piece individually.

 Now you see I'm having to work it a little bit because this thing is extremely hot right

 As you can see, it is completely stripped of its seasoning now.

 So what I'm going to do, and I don't know how the camera is picking it up, I think it's

 But basically this little brush will knock out any rust that's in here and extremely

 So anyway, I'm going to do this and then I'm going to let it cool, but not completely.

 Basically I'm just going to get it down to where it's cool enough that when I apply the

 lard to it, lard is what I'm going to use, but you can use vegetable oil, different things.

 But I'm going to be using lard and what I'll do is when it gets down to where when I wipe

 Anyway, I'm going to knock out a few of these and then I'm going to wash it with hot water

 and dry it really good and I'll show that in just a little bit.

 Now on the other video I showed, I didn't care how much I caked into it because what

 I was doing was flipping it upside down and doing it in the oven.

 This because of the grooves and everything, I'm a little bit concerned about buildup and

 having that sticky finish on it, which I definitely don't want.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to kind of put it on as good as I can like this and

 then when I'm done, I'm going to heat it a little bit and then I'm going to wipe the

 Anyway, that's what I'm going to do now and I'll be back in just a minute.

 Okay, well it's warm, I can touch it, but you know it's fairly warm.

 So what I'm trying to do now is just get out all the extra lard that has melted in here

 When you ever see them, you see them sometimes where they have dark spots that are kind of

 And of course using a paper towel, you have to be careful of lint, which is not a big

 Anyway, I'm going to wipe this down real good and try and just have a thin layer on it.

 And then I'm going to put it in the oven at 350 probably for about an hour, hour and a

 Okay guys, well it's definitely darker and it's a much more even coat than it had before.

 In fact, I don't see any buildup except for just a little right in here.

 So what I'm going to do is just keep on adding coats and seasoning it until I get it like

 I'm going to stop there and just let the natural cooking take over from here.

 It probably won't do as well because this is more of a grill than anything.

 To give you an idea of one that has done very well for me, this is one that has cooked a

 It's not quite as dark as you can see but it is still, it's getting there.

 So anyway, that's the easiest way I know to tell you how to do it.

 If you have one such as, you know, you've seen those, I did one for a friend a few days

 Those kernels and everything are so hard to get down into and things like that.

 So if you're looking for something a little bit harder than the, for the grill thing here,

 So if you have something with a lot of detail in it, a lot of designs, such as a lot of

 these pans like this, they have different designs like a star pattern, things like that

 If you have any other tips, tricks, or ideas, just let me know and I appreciate all comments.

 You know those indestructible glass cutting boards that really you can't break no matter

 Well, this is what happens when you let the hot plate sit on the hot pot sit on top of

 it and I was in the living room and all of a sudden we heard an explosion and this went

demonstrator and today I'm going to show you how to do version 4

 At the end of my video I'm going to show you a bunch more and hop on over to my blog because

 This one right here is the one I'm going to show you how to do.

 On this one I did Pistachio Pudding, Wild Wasabi, and Garden Green.

 You can see how the color graduates just like it does in the word ombre.

 When you start this you really do want to start with your center.

 I started with my center and laid my first one on, and then I added my next 2.

 I don't know if you can see this or not, but in this picture right here with this hexagon

 It lends itself to an extra technique and it's handmade with your punches.

 This piece of paper is 3-3-4 x 5, but this one is on a full sheet of cardstock which

 What I tell you to do is for the first time lay it out on a full card and then you can

 This is on a full card, this is on a scaled down piece of cardstock.

 What I like to do is come in and do the 2nd one here so I'm lining up just these 2 pieces

 The next one I'm going to do is line up this little piece right here and these corners

 Line up that corner, line up that corner, and you should be straight.

 This one I'm showing you because it's very easy to line everything up.

 Over here I'm going to add this one where I'm lining up that corner and that corner

 Because I don't have enough for 2 rows of each one I decided that the Daffodil Delight

 That's the beauty of stamping up product is that everything coordinates.

 Now I'm showing you that we're just taking and putting the corners to the corners.

 If you just punch out all your stuff and start layering it together it really doesn't take

 You know I'm all about let's get this done fast because I'm on to my next project.

 Now you're going to take this piece right here and very carefully turn it over and cut

 I like to cut mine with my trimmer because I think it's a much straighter trimmer but

 if you don't want to do that you can take and use your scissors and trim it off that

 I wrapped my ribbon all the way around, I added a little sentiment to it and that's

 This one I just showed you and that is done with this mosaic punch.

 We go from Pink Pirouette to Strawberry Slush and Rose Red just done with flowers.

 It really was not hard but I'm telling you, each and every one of these there's quite

 What I did was pop them up just so there were some little dimensions.

 One of the things I wanted to show you on my flower card is I popped one in each row.

 If you have any questions at all, please feel free to contact me.

 time to do your hair or curl it, and you have to have a quick fix and wear it up, all you

 need is a brush, two hair things, preferably if you get the clear, really tiny, thin ones,

I don't generally, but you might want to put some hairspray, have some

So what you're going to want to do is part your hair down the middle,

At that point, you just take the sections and do your basic hair.

 You can actually, even for different looks, you can do a fishtail braid, if you're familiar

You can also do a French braid, or an inverse French braid if you're feeling

I have a lot of layers in my hair, so as you can see, I just lost one

 same thing on the other side, separated into three sections, three even sections.

 I'm not very good with hair, and this is the only braid I can really do.

 you're going to bring one up over your head, put it where you want it, followed by the

I'm going to tuck in that extra hair until it's hidden, and tuck

 Okay, so today I am doing the tutorial for the look that I did for the Simply Smoldering

 I can't totally remember all the products that I used on it, but I basically know what

 I did a nude or a very pale lip instead because I just didn't feel like putting on red lipstick.

 So anyway, I hope you enjoy this tutorial and let's get it started.

 Okay, so first I'm going to take Nyx's Jumbo Pencil in Milk and I'm going to apply that

 just to my lower lid and I'm going to blend it out with a synthetic brush.

 The light's shining right into the room and the blinds have some gaps.

 So next I'm going to take this brush here and I'm going to apply Vex, which is...

 A lot of people don't like it, but it's like this weird kind of iridescent grayish color

 Usually I use this one here, this flat one, which needs to be washed.

 However, for some odd reason, maybe it's like a psychological thing, but I like to use this

 brush when I apply Vex and it's only Vex that I like to apply this with.

 So next I'm just going to take this brush here and I'm going to apply MAC's Blush in

 I'm going to apply that up to, almost up to my brow and then around and then under and

 So I'm thinking I might have used MAC's Parfait Amour, which is this one here.

 So I'm just going to use this crease brush and I'm just going to apply it in a kind of

 like an outer V and then I'm going to bring it into, or yeah, I guess into my crease.

 A lot of people don't like Parfait Amour because they think it doesn't apply properly, but

 However, I find that, yeah, using a base and stuff actually helps.

 So now I'm just going to take my smudger brush and I'm just going to apply Parfait Amour

 Now I'm going to take MAC's Carbon and I'm just going to apply it in the outer V and

 then probably go to a third into the way, third in the outer third of my lower lash

 And I'm going to take, let's see, MAC's Crystal Avalanche and I'm going to apply it as a highlight

 to my brow and then I'm also going to apply it to the inner corners of my eye.

 And this time I'm going to use the brush tip liner in Tense because I can't seem to find

 the regular Carbon Black one and the one that I bought in Europe called Super Liner and

 stuff, it's like this kind of like, it's not Carbon Black, it's like this weird kind of

 It takes a really long time to dry so I think they're kind of different in Europe than they

 Okay, so now I am going to curl my lashes, apply my false lashes, my eyebrows, my blush,

 That was what I entered in the contest, or basically, essentially what I entered in the

 I also wore Demonae with Love Alert, Demonae lipgloss with Love Alert, what is that called?

 Today I just didn't feel like wearing red lipstick though so I applied Velvet Teddy

 Anyway, I hope you enjoyed this tutorial and I hope you have a great week and I'll see

 Since it's supposed to come out on the 13th of November, I got it on the 3rd.

 The only thing keeping it sealed was this, which I laced over because I couldn't take

 On the side, we got the volume rocker power button and the IR port right there for controlling

 This is my first time doing this, so you're experiencing this with me.

 Hey y'all, so I just found out the easiest style in the world and it's just gonna be very brief

 Yeah, I did these twists yesterday I did a cast hair treatment and I did these twists with

 Paul Mitchell the conditioner which is a leave-in that I love and the generic

 Okay, so playing around trying to get my hair out of my face I came up with this little cute style

 And it's still not like how I had I'm gonna get it I'm gonna get it third time's the charm, right

 Yeah, that's that's good enough for me and I got two bobby pins and I dropped one

 And of course cuz my nails are getting long it's hard to pick stuff up

 Oh long my nails these nails are getting long I'm have to cut them

 And then give it in it's not perfect, all right back of my hair

 I mean, it's probably not the most neatest style that you'll ever see but I like it.

 They had I got a coupon for a free finger paints nail polish then they had by to get one free.

 It's like a pink don't ask me what color it is and then one little glittery here and this little nails sad now, bro

 One of them whoever did the falsies, you know, it's an appropriate tool.

 Hey everyone, this is Sarah with SewingPartsOnline.com and today we're going to go over how to use

 It's magnetic and it makes threading your machine or troubleshooting your bobbin so

 Now if you're looking at this and wondering what the hay is that, you are not alone.

 It is not a dental tool, it is actually for your sewing machine.

 But one side is larger than the other to accommodate larger needles.

 This is great when you have, if you're that kind of person who kind of fumbles with their

 hands or you have trouble seeing or you just like to have a nice manicure, this is a great

 The center is gripped so you can get a nice hold onto it and it has a nice weight to it.

 You're not going to worry about dropping it or flinging it around.

 So first we're going to go ahead and do the needle inserting part.

 The important thing to know is that your flat side is on the back because that's how we

 You put it up in there and then you just tighten your screw and then you pull it out.

 Now when you're ready to take this out, I just had this happen.

 Now if you've ever tried to change the needles in your serger, you know how much of a pain

 So, with this needle inserter, you can do it one needle at a time just like we did on

 the sewing machine or you can do it two at a time which is pretty cool and a lot easier

 And then you're going to let this hold your needles in place while your fingers bring

 So I'm going to try to keep my hands out of here as much as possible.

 So one at a time with the flat backs facing like they normally would to the back.

 You kind of use your fingers to push them up, the needle holder to keep it in place.

 And we have just changed the needle in our serger two at a time.

 Now when you're ready to take these out, you can take them out one at a time or two at

 When you grab your screwdriver, try to keep my hands out of the way.

 Which is so nice because my needles would fall into the serger so often.

 So if you like to get your nails done or you have long nails, you know how much of a pain

 Or if you have like fumbly fingers or if you have like larger hands, these small spaces

 So what we're going to do is just pop this off, get it out of the way, bring it up, you

 To purchase your bobbin puller and needle inserter, visit us online at sewingpartsonline.com,

 on Google Plus, or on Facebook at facebook.com slash sewingpartsonline.

 On this video I'm going to be showing a simple way to make homemade pastrami and we're going

 This one is the, they call it blue, it's more like gun metal blue which is pretty awesome.

 These also come in like a Texas Little, they're a little bit smaller than this but this is

 the 2015 model and I'll show you some features on it that are a little bit different.

 So one of the new features I like about this grill is the fact that it has some onboard

 It has probe 1, probe 2, you can have two different kinds of meat and you can monitor

 So as you can see inside I've already did your initial burn on this.

 Once you put this together you've got to start this thing off really high for running for

 So you can see there's some dust in here from the pellets that I did a burn in on.

 Pellets come from the hopper, run through here, drop in here, burn.

 Very simple, tons of videos out there on how this thing works but I just wanted to

 Alright so the first thing we're going to do is we're going to go ahead and power this

 Now what this is going to do is it's going to get the augers, it's going to get the auger

 turning, it's going to get the pellets start to drop into that pot and it's going to start

 When we start seeing a lot of smoke come out of this, we're going to go ahead and set our

 So our first step is to make a pastrami rub here and this is a very simple and easy rub.

 We're going to start out with some ground coriander, some garlic powder, some pepper,

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to hit it with our pastrami rub.

 You can also just wrap it tightly in saran wrap and we're going to let this sit overnight

 Here we have our corned beef that we put our pastrami rub on the night before.

 I'm going to go take one of the probes that the Traeger came with.

 I'm going to put it through the little insert that it has on the side here.

 What we're looking at is about 2 hours and I'm going to try to put it at 275.

 And then after 2 hours I'm going to go ahead and foil it and then put it on for another

 Alright, we're going to give this another 2 hours or until it hits an internal temp

 Alright guys, so it's been about just over 2 hours, maybe 2 hours 10 minutes.

 Now if you had a meat slicer I would definitely recommend it but we're going to go ahead and

 I've got some pastrami that I already fried up in a frying pan.

 I'm going to go ahead and top it off with some of my homemade spicy pickles that I made

 Might as well use it for something besides just corned beef and cabbage.

Hey, I just wanted to give you an update about the zebra pot clips

 I've had a few people ask me questions about the 10 centimeter pot and the 12 centimeter pot

 now there's two different ways that they can be mounted and I've got them listed on our website as

 You know, this is just kind of the standard way of mounting them and then this is the alternative way of mounting them

 So let me go ahead and zoom in on the standard way of mounting the pot clips

 Okay, so this is the standard way of mounting our new pot clips, which is on the inside of the handle

 The way that works is it still has its automatic function just like the old plastic clips used to have

 So as you raise your handle up it automatically holds your handle in the upright position

 So here we have a zebra 12 centimeter pot and let me just adjust my camera angle a little bit here

 But with the zebra 12 and the zebra 10 centimeter, there's not quite enough space

 They they're on the outside of the handle and they just swing up and manually click into place

 Removed or put back on while the handle is locked in its upright position

 And it's very easy to unlock it because there's room to fit your finger right in there

 So you just put a finger in there and push a little bit and it comes right out

 So what what that means is with the zebra 12 centimeter and the zebra 10 centimeter

 Which seemed a little less critical with these really really small pots because you're less likely to be doing

 Horizontal baking which is where I see the biggest advantage of holding your pot lid down

 Okay, so the zebra 16 centimeter pot the pot clips work on the inside of the handle

 They do have the automatic function just like the pot plastic clips have

 Which is great for pouring because you don't have to put your hand in the position where the steam will be burning it

 Or you don't have to touch the bottom side of the pan to tip it

 You can just use your handle with one hand and just pour like that and pour your hot liquid

 Out of your pot, which is really nice now while it's locked into this

 Position where they will function automatically you just clip these clips

 Right, so then you can use this handle as like an oven door latch

 so you can just open it then you have access to get into your baking project and then

I baked a bread loaf of bread in this actual pot and it worked out fantastic

 So that's the 16 centimeter pot once again that works in the regular position for the pot clips

 For the pot clips and it has all the same function as the 16 centimeter pot

 Then you have that locked handle that does all the same things as what the 16 centimeter pot does

 Manually locked position for the 12 centimeter pot and the 10 centimeter pot.

 when you want to put it in the fire, you just clip that back down and

 Once again, the lid is easily placed or removed and you do still have

 Because your handle is locked so you can just hold your handle and pour your hot liquids out

 So that's how the pot clips work with the various different sizes of zebra pots

 Today I'm going to show you how I put my hair up into a, I don't even know what you want

 And I've done many different types, but I just seem to always go back to this way.

 Even when it looks a little bit different in variation, it's just maybe that my hair

 was really messy that day or my hair was really slick that day, clean, dirty, whatever.

 That all kind of takes into account how your hair is going to turn out.

 A lot of times I just do this with my hair when it's curly and it looks a whole lot different

 So it will look a little bit more, I don't want to say fancy, but it kind of looks a

 little bit more fancy when it's clean and straight versus when I've let it air dry and

 So this should be a really simple tutorial, so let's get started.

 The first thing I like to do is create a little bit of volume by backcombing around the front

 And instead of combing through my hair, I just use my fingers to make sure it doesn't

 And then I just go ahead and pull my hair all up into a ponytail and you can put it

 Now before I start wrapping my hair around the pony, I really want to make sure that

 I will even go through the back part of my hair and make sure that that's not pulled

 Unless that's the look you're going for, sometimes I do this exact same look but I

 And you can do it either way, it really just depends on whatever look you're going for.

 Then I'll take my pick and I will backcomb my ponytail and try to give my ponytail as

 I like to spray after I've backcombed my ponytail just to make sure that it stays and

 So I gather all my hair to one side and depending on what my hair looks like that day, I will

 either twist it forward or I will twist it all backwards before I start wrapping it around

 And once I get the first wrap around, I'll bobby pin that in place and then I'll finish

 And then you can go ahead and pull at your bun and make it as pieced out as you want

 A lot of times I won't really care if I have all these little flyaways, but it really,

 like I said, just depends on the kind of look that you're going for.

 If I'm going to slick it back and have it be a more sleek ponytail or even if it's slicked

 back with a messy ponytail or if it's going to be like this, I can make it a little bit

 more formal if I dress it up with jewelry, whatnot, your makeup.

 It really all just depends on the whole look that you're going for and how you're going

 Give this video a thumbs up if you liked it and I'll see you guys in my next video.

 Neil Walter here from the Guitar Tricks ch-ch-ch-channel with a new lesson coming at you.

 Tip of the week, first off, if you're not watching this on GuitarTricks.com, head on

 over there to forward slash channel, GuitarTricks.com forward slash channel, sign up for our newsletter,

 Right here on your pickups, you can get a new tonal sound from your pickups by adjusting

 And as I mentioned before, you can bring the pickups up and down with these screws, so

 you'll get more gain by bringing the pickup closer to the string and less gain by bringing

 You can change the tonal characteristics by adjusting these screws right here.

 Give it a little test and use your ear for the judgment to see what you find that you

 It's a great way to add dynamics to your soloing just within the same notes that you already

 Most bends are generally about a whole step, say from here to here.

 But by doing an extreme bend, it's something a little out of the normal range of what the

 So if you're looking at the patterns of your pentatonic scale where they are three frets

 apart, say for example an A, this would be a step and a half bend.

 So with this and then down here, that would be the three most common places that I would

 So taking this 12 steps higher, I'll be up here at the 17th fret position using the A

 I'll be giving you an example of an extreme bend from 17th to the 20th fret like this.

 Here's an example of how I might use an extreme bend with the basic pentatonic scale.

 I'm actually going to bend from the 17th fret to the 19th fret, back down, and then to the

 So that bend right there, the last one, that was a little more over this note.

 The whole idea with extreme bends is to get that extreme rock and roll sound in your leads.

 So I'm bending up a step and a half here, and then when I go and bend on the G string,

 But it doesn't matter because it's that extreme sound that I'm after.

 So slowly I'm bending up a whole step at the 17th fret of the B string, back down, and

 then matching hitting that note there, and then doing a pull off.

 I'm going over the note just a little bit, and then I'm sliding down here from the 15th

 When I'm bending from the 14th fret of the G string, I'm also going up a step and a half.

 It's got like a typical blues kind of phrasing, but with the extreme bends it makes the note

 Another extreme bend you can use is two whole steps, which would be a major third, and a

 place where I would use that is, for example, if I had an A major playing in the rhythm.

 This is something that Eddie Van Halen does in You Really Got Me.

 But if I had an A major playing in the rhythm, and I was to grab an A here, then I would

 bend up to the major third quickly, in the context of my soloing.

 So that way you get the flavor of the major third in there, and it's a chord tone that

 This week, this is really hard on the fingers, so I recommend...I'm using tens.

 Leave me a request here on the Guitar Tricks ch-ch-ch-channel, and I'll see you in seven

 My name is Viktoria Pajkin and today I am here with my friend at recipelion.com who

 As you see, it's big, it's beautiful, it's puffed up and it's so flavorful.

 And run it until there is very smooth batter without any lumps at all.

 If not, you maybe will have to scrape it down, all those bits of flour.

 Just go to all sides and continue to blitz it until all smooth and beautiful.

 Classically this comes with powdered sugar on top and a little bit of lemon wedges.

 You can even stuff it with fruits and ice cream and cream and whatever you like.

 Just make it perfect late dinner or snack or breakfast or whatever you like.

 So subscribe, write me a comment, thumbs up me and cheers Victoria.

 I'm Trey Wilcox and I'm coming to you today from the beautiful Chantal Test Kitchen.

 I've got some great cooking tips lined up for you and they're all brought to you by

 While Trey prepares his first cooking tip, I'd like to introduce to you Chantal's new

 This exciting line of cookware combines the superior heat distribution of copper with

 It's finished off with durable and chemical free enamel which offers health benefits we'll

 Copper Fusion is available in two stunning colors, chili red and platinum.

 We never want to take these fillets right out of the refrigerator and place them into

 What you want to do is take these fillets out of the refrigerator, cover them loosely

 with a little bit of plastic, give them about an hour, set out on the counter.

 So what's great about cooking the petite fillets in the Copper Fusion line is that it has a

 And in my opinion, it holds heat better than any other pan that's on the market.

 Then when you're ready to serve these steaks, you can actually season them with a little

 And as you can see in this Copper Fusion pan, I've already got a little bit of grapeseed

 And then at that point, you can actually sear these steaks on top and bottom.

 Let's find out what Trey's referring to by visiting the factory in Germany where Copper

 Chantal's patented process of fusing copper into the carbon steel core creates an amazing

 This copper plate is fused at over 2,000 degrees Fahrenheit into the carbon steel base, providing

 the absolute best heat distribution and the ability to heat very quickly without any hot

 Then, both the inside and outside are coated in premium German-made enamel.

 The series is accented with tempered glass lids and stay-cool handles that are rivetless,

 All right, so now we've got some awesome Risotto secrets for you, okay?

 Now Risotto's one of those things that definitely takes time and love to make a great batch

 The number one thing you've got to do is you've got to add the chicken stock a cup at a time,

 What this does is it actually ensures that your Risotto's going to draw out all of its

 And now we're going to add the cream and the cheese, and this is what's going to turn this

 Using the Copper Fusion line, which is finished with an enamel coating, it's highly stick-resistant.

 This cookware is easier to clean than stainless and dishwasher safe.

 One thing about them, they're always sold with these little muscles that are attached

 These muscles are actually what open and close the shell of the scallop when it's in the

 And if you make the mistake of cooking these muscles, you're going to find that they're

 All right, right here in this pan I've got a little bit of grapeseed oil.

 I'm going to add a little bit more just to make sure we have a thin layer of grapeseed

 Copper Fusion having that copper core has a great ability to distribute the heat.

 And I'm going to season this sea scallop with a little bit of salt.

 So we're just going to sear this on its presentation side very quickly.

 One other thing about when you're adding seafood to a pan or maybe any other protein to a pan,

 the first thing that happens to that oil is that it kind of disperses, it kind of moves

 So what you want to do is you want to kind of come in here and lift up that sea scallop.

 The first thing that happens is that oil runs back up under it.

 That's what ensures you're going to get that perfect sear that you're always looking for

 So we're going to turn this sea scallop over and just like that we've got our presentation

 So another great thing about Copper Fusion is you can actually turn this pan on and the

 What you are now seeing is the automated application machine, which ensures the enamel surface

 As Trey mentioned, Copper Fusion is stick resistant and a healthy alternative to other

 Sharon Franke, Director of the Good Housekeeping Research Institute states,

 Many experts believe that at high temperatures, nonstick surfaces begin to degrade and begin

 While Chantal's durable enamel won't pose any health risks, it does not degrade and

 Because Chantal's enamel is chemical and nickel free, food can be safely stored or marinated

 This enamel surface also makes Copper Fusion easy to clean, stick resistant and dishwasher

 To find out more, ask a friendly salesperson or visit Chantal.com.

 Hi, I'm Tom from WorldOfCamping.co.uk and this is the Sevelor Colorado Kayak.

 Today I'm going to be inflating it with the Sevelor Double Action Hand Pump.

 I've already installed one seat and I'm now going to show you how that was done using the second seat.

 A thing to remember though is to keep the fastenings well forward of where you're going to put your seat.

Nice, tight, plenty of room, comfortable cushion, you're ready to go kayaking.

 Finally, you also have a baggage hold in the form of this little netted bag.

 It comes with a handle at either end and one on either side, so it can quite easily be carried between two people.

 But as you can see, it's incredibly lightweight, so if need be, you can carry it down the beach by yourself.

 On the back of each of the seats, there's this handy three-part bag.

 A Velcro section in the middle with two drawstring sections either side.

 This kayak also comes with its own pressure gauge, so you can keep an eye on its pressure any time you're out in the water.

 And also, for studio purposes, I didn't attach the fin to the bottom of the kayak.

 But this is to be attached before you inflate the central deck.

 Now when you're purchasing your kayak, don't forget to add to your basket a set of paddles, such as these, the Sevelor 2 Plus 1 kayak paddles.

 And I strongly recommend for inflating by hand, the Double Action Hand Pump, also by Sevelor.

 As we all know, stainless steel ideally is shiny and clean, but with time, stainless

 steel gets scratches, it gets dullness, and we use traditional polishes to sort of clean

 up the surface and try to get some of the staining and corrosion and a little bit of

 What I'm going to demonstrate is a fine pie polisher and the Sishio polishing belts.

 These belts are done and made particularly for this tool, which we have available on

 We use the original fine ruches, which is a two-step process, where we use each belt

 for each process, and then we apply the ruche, and then we go, and one cuts a little more,

 For this demonstration, we're going to use Sishio stainless polishing shine, which gives

 We'll put it into the belt, and we're just going to put a little bit of product.

 We don't need much, and make sure that we put the right amount so it doesn't splash

 So this is what we call a one-step process, and it will basically do, it will remove some

 Ideally, you start, and for demonstration purposes, we're going to start right here.

 Ideally, the product gets spread into the surface quite easy so it doesn't splatter

 And as you can see, just by that little bit of polishing, there's a significant difference

 So you significantly can see there's no waxes, there's no, it's just basically restructuring

 the surface, organizing all the scratches in the same direction.

 It brings the marrow of the stainless, and it just looks fantastic.

 We put Sea Shield Nano Coating extra on top for better protection, so when the water beats

 And then the regular maintenance is just regular repellent wash, and you kind of just go through

 For more information about our products, go to www.sea-shield.com, and that is S-E-A-S-H-I-E-L-D.com.

 Hi, I'm Angel with AllFreeSewing.com and FleeceFun.com and today I'm going to show you how to make

 What you'll need is an eighth of a yard of satin, a glue gun, a pen, a candle, thread

 and needle, approximately four inches of ribbon but that's optional, a clip or pin backing,

 You'll also need the free PDF pattern that's available on FleeceFun.com.

 You're going to print up your pattern on card stock and you're going to cut it out.

 After you've cut it out you're going to trace it onto the cloth and it's okay if it's just

 Once you have traced everything onto the cloth you're going to cut it out.

 You need to be very, very careful during this project and actually you do this at your own

 Make sure you have a fire extinguisher if necessary and again you do this at your own

 You're just going to carefully melt the edges along your flower.

 Now if you want to do the rose flower clip you're going to need to snip in between each

 You can singe them even more if you want it to look a little more burnt to give it a more

 Once you've done that to all your pieces you're going to take it and you're going to

 You might need to throw out a layer or two depending on how well it fits inside your

 And then once you have all them layered and burnt how you want them you're going to either

 Or personally I like just to hand sew it together really quick.

 Once you've done that you can cover up your stitches by gluing in a rhinestone in the

 center or a button or any other accoutrement that you would like.

 You can put on a pin backing, you can put on a bread backing, you can put on any kind

 If you want to make it look really nice you can use ribbon, just glue ribbon to it to

 You have a beautiful satin clip that looks great on little girls, it looks good on women.

 For more great patterns and tutorials you can go to allfreesewing.com.

 Have a great day and remember velvet is pretentious, fleece is fun.

 Now you're going to need a big pot because I have at least 25 pierogies and we're going to boil them.

 So we're going to put our saucepan on with some water and a bit of salt.

 We're going to bring that up to a boil and we're going to get our skillet good and hot

 I didn't have the camera on, so that's all you're going to see is that half an onion.

 And now we're just going to gently cook between medium and minimum our homestead bacon.

 I put a little bit of avocado oil in the pan only because this bacon's really lean.

 Now I've frozen these folks just so that they don't stick together at first.

 All our pierogies are in here and we're just going to put a lid on it and bring them up to a boil.

 Because once we boil our pierogies, we're going to brown them in this pan.

 Now remember folks, everything inside the pierogies is already cooked or can be eaten raw like the spinach.

 So now I'm going to transfer these into our hot skillet because we want to brown them.

 And you are going to see what Papa has to say about our Canadian traditional pierogies.

 Okay, Papa's not home yet so we're going to dish up without him.

 And hopefully you'll be able to catch him when he gets home to give it a thumbs up.

 Because you know he's going to and if he doesn't, I just won't cook for him anymore.

 But remember this, when they remove the fat out of something, they've got to replace it with something.

 And nine times out of ten, it's not as good for you as the fat was.

 So, we do this with a nice dollop of sour cream right on top there.

 you haven't tasted anything until you've tasted homemade loaded pierogies.

 Hello everyone, today I'm going to be teaching you how to play Times Like These by Foo Fighters

 If you do like this lesson, please subscribe to my videos because I make a brand new lesson

 Also, if you could check out my website, derrickpianolessons.dk because all of my YouTube piano lessons are

 And if you could please thumbs up on this video and comment on this video, that would

 So today I'm going to be teaching you how to play Times Like These by Foo Fighters.

 Now in the acoustic version of the song, there is some piano in it.

 Now for the first verse, first chorus, and second verse, there's not going to be any

 But once the second chorus kicks in, there is going to be some.

 And you're going to be starting off by playing a C, then an E, then a G, and then a C. Then

 you're going to be moving up to an E, a G, then a B, and then an E. And then you're going

 to go down to a D, an F sharp, an A, and then a D. And that is going to be the chorus of

 Now the other part that's different is after the second chorus is going to be this little

 And what you're playing there is a D, then a C, then a D, then you're going to go up

 Well, I'm in LA, or exactly to be exact, exactly exact, I'm in Glendale.

 Not really, they just put the fire out, but let me show you my view actually.

 I've got a bunch of them that are in the queue, but I wanted to show you a really cool little

 video today, a cool little, it's your decision to decide if it's cool or not, a cool video.

 But I'm gonna show you a cool technique that I will use sometimes when I want to practice

 So this is what I call spider fingers, and you do this by placing your first and third

 fingers on the first and third fret like this and pressing down.

 And then taking fingers two and four and putting them on frets two and four of the string that's

 And then what you do is you walk one and three up a string like that.

 So, this is hard to do when I'm looking at the screen, but basically you're doing this

 At first, you'll want to do this really slow and really methodically, you know?

 It does take some time, and I haven't done this exercise in quite a while, but you get

 A lot of people think that, you know, when people play fast, when guitar players play

 fast, that their fingers are fast and that's why they're so good.

 It has to do with the connection, the speed that your brain is able to tell your fingers

 what to do, where they're at, and then to relay the message back to your brain to say,

 So if you would like to be fast, if you would like to be accurate on your guitar, you have

 Okay, so now you have the next two pieces of your dress that you need to assemble.

 And what you're going to do is you're going to do a narrow hem all along the edge of what

 Because the top part portion of the ruffle you're going to attach to, you will attach

 So let me go make this ruffle and I'll come back and show you what I mean.

 Okay now this part can get a little tricky but I'd like to tell people don't be afraid

 So what you're going to do is put the middle section of the dress underneath your ruffler

 And there's a lot of really great videos on YouTube on how to do this.

 And then as you can see I basically took my strip of red which is going to be my trim,

 my ruffle and I did a narrow hem and I'll show you that in another video.

 And now I'm going to run the part that I want ruffled and you see you don't have to do ruffles

 I'm just going to run it through the ruffler, just kind of give it a little tug so it comes

 And we are just about ready to start attaching, we're just about ready to start attaching

 And I used to be really, really scared and I'll push this a little closer for you of

 my ruffle foot but I got past that and now I can do ruffles all day long which is so

 And you know your ruffle foot is going to make a lot of noise which is okay.

 You've got your bodice piece finished, you attached your ruffle to your center piece,

 you made your ruffles and don't worry if they're not perfect because you can do this.

 And next thing we're going to do, we're going to attach these two pieces together and you're

 One of the next steps that you want to do is you have your middle section and it's still

 open but you want to take your two end pieces together and stitch all the way along this

 edge right here and then I'll show you how to attach it to the inside of your bodice.

 Okay, once you've stitched up the back section of your dress, you want to find that center

 seam and take your bodice piece, take your bodice piece and you have that opening, that

 Now you want to take this and you want to put it on the inside of the dress because

 Okay, so you're just putting, you're basically putting the two right sides of the fabric

 Make sure that your dress, when you stitch it, it's going to come out the two right sides

 So once again, you're going to line up your center back seam of the bodice with the center

 back seam of the dress and you're just going to pin all the way around on the inside of

 Okay, as you can see, I pinned all along the inside opening, attaching the bodice to the

 So I already went ahead and stitched it and I'm going to take all the pins out and we'll

 Now what I will probably do later on or what you will do, I'm sure, you're going to go

 back with your overlock foot on your sewing machine and stitch this and make it come out

 It's going to be really hard for people to tell that this is not a store-bought dress.

 You now have a very lovely, adorable little dress for the little girl in your life.

 The pattern is going to be available for pre-sales only because you'll see a link down below

 Oh, and let me show you, for the back of the bodice, here you can either put a snap, and

 I'm going to show you in another video, this new really cool snap button thing that I found.

 And they have these snap making kits, these little plastic kits, in the stores nowadays

 Trust me, I've been tugging at them to see if they, you know, come apart.

 So I hope you enjoyed today's video and please pre-order the pattern.

 ball, place your feet about hip distance apart and then just put the small ball in between

It's kind of just around the inside of the knee and the bottom bit of your

And then bring your feet in so there's a little bit of tension on the

So the ball, what it's doing here is it's helping to keep the alignment.

 thigh muscle is slightly engaged and it's going to help you keep your focus on your

And then you exhale, drop the chin onto the chest, scoop your belly

 button in and you're going to roll down through the spine one vertebrae at a time.

 in, exhale, pull them back and again breathe in and exhale, pull the shoulders back.

 breathing in, you're pulling up through the pelvic floor, in through the navel.

 are together and down, chins are lifted, spines are nice and long.

 in your belly button so don't release the stomach muscles, that navel stays glued to

 in, pull in your navel, you can look slightly up to the ceiling.

 exhaling, and then relax as you bring the arms back down by your side.

 Let's go ahead and start in a cross-legged position, seated, comfortably tall.

 If you need to be on a pillow, we're going to start to work with some shoulder openers,

 Resting with your hands onto your legs, roll your shoulders back and down.

 Let's begin to sway to the left and to the right as we tilt our shoulders and our head,

 Just swaying left and to the right, just like a tree would be in the breeze or a beautiful

 Now we're going to begin to hug ourselves, bringing the arms back for a nice hug, right

 Try to overlap your elbows, drop your shoulders and your elbows toward the earth.

 And now let's raise that top arm up, being your right arm, so your hand's straight up

 Now if you'd like to modify, you're welcome to grab onto your right thumb, keeping a straight

 Exhale, lower your elbows and your shoulders away from your ears.

 Bring your head to the left and drop your chin in front of that shoulder.

 Continuing your breath, continue to drop those shoulders and elbows away from your ears.

 Inhale lifting your head and lift your arms back up slightly higher, keeping tall through

 Now turn your head to the right, dropping your chin in front of your shoulder.

 Roll your shoulders back and with your inhale lift your chin and your chest up.

 Inhale lifting back up once again, opening the chest, lifting the sternum up.

 Bringing the other foot close in toward the groin and your other leg in front.

 As you can see I'm sitting on an area of rocks here in the Grand Canyon.

 But you're welcome to be sitting on a pillow or something comfortable at your own place.

 Be sure to sit nice and tall raising up to the crown of your head.

 Once you find where you're comfortable, begin that tilting motion swaying left and to the

 Remember keep a straight left wrist holding to your thumb if you're able or palm to palm.

 As long as you can keep a straight wrist or you're welcome to place that right hand to

 Exhale lower your elbows and your shoulders away from your ears.

 Turn your head to the right dropping your chin in front of your shoulder.

 Bring your arms out in front of you holding on to your shin or you're welcome to hold

 Inhale moving back shoulders forward arms long for the stretch in the upper back.

 Well thank you for joining me for some shoulder openers helping to release tension in the

 Be sure to visit the website www.rufitness.com for downloading of full versions and more

 In this video we're going to show you how to change out the GE washer drive belt.

 It's going to be a very easy repair and it should only take a few minutes to show you

 When you open up the package, you're going to get the new drive belt.

 The drive belt is what actually connects the motor to the transmission so it can drive

 The main reason you'd be changing it out is if it's bad and it's no longer driving the

 In order to get to the part, we have to take off the front panel.

 So you can take your putty knife and run it in from the edge until you hit the spring

 Once you have that side off, we can come over and do the other side.

 Once you have those released, all you have to do is pull the panel forward and lift it

 Now that we have the front of the washer, we have access to the part.

 In order to get the belt off, we have to loosen these four 3-1-inch nuts that hold the motor

 Once we have them loosened up, we can push the motor forward to take the tension off

 Now that we have the nuts loose, we can push the motor forward and take the belt off the

 To put the new belt on, we want to get it back and around the rear pulley.

 Once you have it on both pulleys, then we can pull out on the motor and tighten down

 To make sure the belt gets tight, we want to put our foot against the motor mounting

 Then reach in with your wrench and tighten down the front two nuts.

 Now that we have the part installed, we can put the front back on the washer.

 All you have to do is line it up and set it onto the tabs at the bottom.

 Then lift it up so these pins match up with the holes on the front of the panel.

 Now that you are done repairing the appliance, you can plug it back in, turn the water back

 Check out our other repair videos on our site, Facebook and YouTube.

 On today's episode, we'll be going over shin splints, giving you three great exercises

 Shin splints, or medial tibial stress syndrome, affect the anterior portion or the front portion

 It's not to be confused with stress fractures, which actually affect the tibia bone.

 So a good way to treat shin splints, please be cautious how much you run of course, but

 number one is you want to make sure you have strong lower leg muscles, anterior, lateral,

 You want to make sure you have flexibility in those muscles as well.

 Depending on the degree at which you feel pain, decreasing your mileage by 30, 50, 70%,

 And always ice, ice, ice afterwards, and see a physician if necessary.

 My question to you is this, regarding workload, what percentage of body weight is placed on

 So here are your three activities to decrease the chance of you acquiring shin splints.

 The whole idea is when you keep your feet dorsiflexed, which is up like that.

 When you keep them in this position, you are working the anterior muscles of your lower

 It really actually looks quite simple, but it's amazing the workload that's being placed

 I feel it all the way from my knee, all the way down to my ankle.

 Now we're going to go and do our next activity, which is a heel step down.

 It's as if you're taking a step, but then I want you to stop short in your step with

 So we come forward and back, forward and back, forward and back.

 When you want to make it harder, you actually step further and back.

 You do those three activities back to back, building up your repetitions, and you will

 And if you have a lot of pain, please remember to stretch and don't do past what's normal

 The answer to your question is two to 300% of your body weight is placed on your shins

 Some experts believe it's almost inevitable not to get shin splints, but there's no conclusive

 If you were to run a marathon, that would be about 18,400 times that workload on each

 However, your Aspire Higher now, we're going to speak about rest.

 I thought it would be a great time to talk about rest considering when you have shin

 You have to have a day of rest, not only for recovery of your muscles, because there's

 something called overtraining, but just to allow yourself to enjoy and appreciate all

 You take a day, you enjoy it, and you appreciate this fabulous body and the wonderful fitness

 Please go to EmpowerYourBody.com and check out wonderful downloads we have and also great

 Please don't forget to check out the other Click Fitness videos.

 Hi, I'm Jordana Lorraine in suite 108 at Phoenix Salon Suites in Marina Del Rey.

 I'm going to talk to you about how to use Olaplex to enhance keratin smoothing treatments.

 This is my model, Marilla, and we're going to show you how to use Olaplex to enhance

 Before we start with our keratin smoothing service, we're going to do a full Olaplex

 That's using steps one and two to treat the hair before we get in there and coat it using

 What I like to do is perform a full head reparative treatment with Olaplex step one and two before

 The first step is to mix for medium to long hair a half ounce of number one bond multiplier

 I shake that gently and apply it to dry hair until it's completely saturated.

 Comb through and allow it to penetrate for five to seven minutes.

 I use about two ounces of the Olaplex number two bond perfector.

 I apply that directly onto the hair without rinsing out the first step.

 When steps one and two are complete, I rinse fully and then proceed with the keratin smoothing

 You may find that you need to clarify one or two more shampoos before proceeding with

 your keratin treatment because you've got so much Olaplex product on the hair.

 But don't worry, that's not going to undo any of the Olaplex results.

 First the Olaplex step one and two followed by keratin smoothing service.

 So it's a double dose of goodness making her hair super soft, smooth, shiny.

 Even during the keratin treatment, it was faster and easier to blow dry.

 So your weed trimmer, weed whacker, weed whipper, whatever you want to call it, has ran out

 This first step is going to vary on a few different models depending on what you have,

 but what you're going to want to do is remove this lower housing.

 On this model in particular, there's a tab right here, and if you spin it around, the

 What you do is press both tabs in at the same time, and it'll all slide down.

 What you're going to do is you're going to take your trimmer line and just take a decent

 And then what you're going to want to do, this is for a dual line setup, is take the

 ends and just go down an equal amount, and you're going to want to go down to the middle

 Now examine this inner piece, and you'll see that there's an arrow.

 You have to wind the line in that direction, and you'll see that there's a little hook

 Now what you do is you take right from the middle, and you go right in that little hole

 And now you're just going to wrap it around, one on the top, one on the bottom.

 Make sure they don't cross over, and you're just going to keep going around until you

 And then what you want to do is hold it, and you just bring it up into this little notch

 So as you can see, the other is going to be back here, and bring that back around, and

 Now what you're going to do is go ahead and place this inside this housing, and just clip

 Now to get more line out, obviously you're going to bump it unless you have an automatic

 And even though these are uneven, when you bump it, it'll come out to be even length.

 So that's how to restring the line on your Husqvarna or other trimmers.

 It's a very special year for Britain this year with the Diamond Jubilee

 and if you're hosting an event why not impress your guests with this cupcake

 and you can check out our other Jubilee themed recipes by clicking one of the buttons below.

 It may be contrary to belief but cupcakes are really simple to make

 into a mixing bowl and then add your 125 grams of caster sugar.

 and then cube up the 125 grams of butter and throw that in as well.

 Now break your two eggs into the bowl and then you need to give

 You now need to spoon out the cake mixture into each of the cupcake cases.

 We found using an ice cream scoop a great way to portion out the mixture.

 You then need to stick them in the oven for about 15 to 20 minutes

 or until they're golden and to check they're cooked stick a knife in

 All you've got to do is put your handful of strawberries into a bowl and then mush them

 into a bowl and it's nice to keep a few lumps in there as well.

 Once the cupcakes are cool simply cut out the core or if you've got an apple corer

 All you have to do is pack in your mushed up strawberries and then

 Begin by cutting the two fabric pieces and the interfacing to 4 3 quarters inches by

 Pin the pieces right sides together and trace a circle object with chalk to round off one

 Trace the pieces together with a quarter inch seam, using the chalked curve as a guide.

 Topstitch along the straight edge of the fabric with an 1 8 inch seam.

 We're sewing this edge now so that the snap won't interfere with the sewing foot later.

 flat ring will be on the lining fabric and the piece with the bump will be on the outer

The decorative piece should be on the outside of the rounded flap,

 For hundreds more tutorials, please visit my website, madebymarcipan.com.

 Hey guys, the Solomon bar or the cobra knot bracelet is one of the most popular and widespread

 The original design is not ready for quick deployment though, which can be a bit troublesome

 That is why I will present a modified chain synod technique that resembles the Solomon

 The first thing we're going to do is join two pieces of cord and then attach it to the

 I usually start at the bottom but I find it is easier to tie this bracelet starting at

 When you have attached the top, we can now also attach the bottom using the traditional

 We're going to start with the left cord, fold it and feed it under the cord.

 We're then going to take our right cord, fold it and feed it through the first loop, then

 Our loop now faces the left, so we're going to fold the left cord again, feed it through

 Then tighten up the right cord, fold a small piece of the right cord, feed it through the

 As you can see, we basically take the left, feed it through the loop and under the cord

 So the left one travels under the cord constantly while the right goes over the cord.

 And this will give you the design that looks like a Solomon bar, but is actually more of

 There is a lot of slack that builds up when you're building this bracelet, so I recommend

 that you make it as tight as you can and after that you remove the slack.

 The right cord is removed by pulling the cord from left to right, while the slack from the

 I'm going to continue making this bracelet until I reach the top and I will show you

 I'm now going to do the final pass through the loop with my loop from the right, then

 take the end of my left cord and simply feed it through this loop.

 Now at this point we can simply cut and melt our cords and that will finish our bracelet.

 When needed, simply undo the top and you can unravel it in seconds.

 So guys, here you can see the bracelet after some retightening.

 So basically my food style has definitely changed and over the years, you know, from

 when I was a head chef at Pilotaire to now, you know, it's got 15 years have gone by and

 I'd say since we did the refurb, which was last year, I wanted to really change not only

 the restaurant and the look and the feel of it, but also my food.

 So I'd say I've gone away from sort of predominantly more classic French into sort of, I'd say,

 And you know, I'd say in terms of the marriages and the matching of food is slightly a little

 I think the produce, number one, has got to be consistently top quality and fresh and

 I've been working with Wild Harvest since I was at Pilotaire, so from 1995.

 I think with Wild Harvest, you know, you're expecting obviously quality assured products

 and that's really what they guarantee in terms of, you know, the stuff that they deliver

 When I pick up that phone, I can ask for X, Y, Z and I know I'm going to get it.

 I think with all the products that they've got, I mean, they've got a huge list of products.

 I mean, I went there fairly recently just to see, you know, what extra things that they're

 And it's interesting to see obviously all the product development they're doing and

 And that's what it's really about, is having a relationship with a supplier that you can

 talk to or they can pick up the phone to you as well and you can understand sort of what

 products they've got or what products they're sort of taking off.

 So having someone that I can relay that onto and trust is great.

 The start that I'm doing is a salt cod brundad with pickled cucumber and poached cod.

 So the salt cod brundad, I take that and I soak it overnight in cold water just to get

 So you have a little bit of bronze fennel, a little bit of some picked dill, some little

 So the two types of aubergine, we have a burnt aubergine puree.

 And then the pork belly, we glaze it with a sherry apple caramel.

 So you just make a caramel with basically reduced apple juice, sherry vinegar, a little

 And then the pork, as I said, is nicely glazed with that sherry caramel.

 So the dessert today that we're doing is a mango and coconut dessert.

 So there's a little different flavors and textures on the mango and coconut plate.

 And then we pipe the cooked tapioca along that, and then just roll it up in long tubes.

 So we've got a mango parfait, and that is encapsulated in white chocolate.

 And then we do these mango films, and then the mango mousse is sandwiched between two sheets of mango film.

 We then got a coconut sorbet, which is just made a base of coconut puree.

I'm here to make a video on how to make your eyebrows stay in place all day.

There are a lot of products out on the market that claim to make your

 Shellac at Sephora retails for about $30, and usually you really don't want to pay $30

 or the eye pencil or brow pencil on your brows to stay in place all day because it forms

 done, I'll take my spray, and then I'll take a really, really small brush that looks like

You can use a liner brush, any kind of really small brush that can allow you to

 going to lightly mist your brush, or you could spray this in a little container and dip your

Once you get some product on your brush, you're going to kind of just pat

 it might have, it may, depending on what kind of spray you're using, it may have a bit of

If that happens, you could just take a little bit of face powder and lightly

 dust it over your brows to conceal a little bit of the shininess.

 already did mine earlier today, and they have stayed on all day.

 I want you to learn to play from the wrist, not from the elbows.

 If you start playing like this, you can only go so fast and you will never ever be able

 Well, basically a two stroke roll is you're playing two beats on each stick on the snare,

 alternately until at such point that you get to the speed where it just sounds like a buzz.

 That goes faster and faster until you get to the point where you can't go any faster

 And when you work from the wrist and play from the wrist, not the elbow, then you get

 And a buzz roll is when you're forcing it, which is even tighter.

 But while you're learning to do that, you'll also be learning to do everything else.

 This is the PID03 coming in and when you're checking your unit over, you will find in

 the bag on the back, the hand crank and the wrenches to loosen in order to remove the

 In order to change the drum, you have to loosen the two bolts on the side of the gear reducer

 And then you just lift it off, clear the way, put it down someplace where you won't step

 Now you remove your chain and pull out your axle and then you go and insert it into the

 Place your chain on it, then bring the drum back, line it up with the guide inside, lower

 Push your gearbox back with tensioning, then tighten the two bolts.

 Now, while you're working on the hole, drill hole, you would remove your handles.

 And you're ready to work by running your cable down the drill hole or whatever application

 The next part, in order to actually crank the unit back after it's down the hole, is

 The one that it's on right now is the direct drive up to the drum.

 So it's a regular, what is it, about two point something to one?

 Now that point there is where you insert in the lock pin to hold the unit in place.

 So you've got to push it in, then you slide your, rotate your drum slightly until you

 Now if you pull all that stuff off, pull out the pin, put it away, take the handle off,

 The brake is this handle at the back, you push down and then that locks it.

 On the four corners of the winch frame are these tubes for staking the winch to the ground

 So you put stakes in from the back side, going in at an angle, and straight down on the ones

 And that will secure your winch to the ground and prevent it from being pulled into the

 The smaller sprocket is for the signal cable drum, the larger sprocket for the dummy cable

 With the PID series of winches, we have a number of different sizes of drums.

 This here is a 25 inch diameter reel capable of handling 2500 meters of 6 millimeter cable.

 And this is the side where your chain goes on and your disc brake is there.

 And on this side over here, the little connector housing up at this point here is where your

 It goes over to the connector on this side on the slip ring and then exits through that

 This whole series of parts are completely independent of one another.

 And this here shows you the way that they are oriented on here.

 It's very simple to disassemble the unit or assemble it by simply withdrawing the axle

 Hey guys, this is Pete with Crunch Time Coaching and today I'm going to teach you how to play

 the right notes on your serve to have a more consistent second serve.

 What I mean by the right notes specifically is that when people are going to serve, I

 And if we can do this as tennis players, we're going to be way better players because I've

 never really played piano, but I do know that if you're playing the piano and you're going

 to play the note right next to the correct note, is that going to sound good?

 But as tennis players, so much we just do, well, this is good enough.

 We toss the ball up and we know it's not the right note to play and we still hit the serve

 So I'll see this all the time from students and I'm watching them play matches.

 They'll throw a second serve up, they'll throw the ball here and they'll still try and hit

 You know, they'll throw the ball and it's way out there and then you'll see them, you

 And they know right away if we're looking at that as like a piece of music, that's the

 It's almost in the right spot, but trying to actually make that work and land in the

 I mean, your racket is an instrument and when you do the right things with your body, you

 put your body in the right place to hit the ball, you're going to get much better results.

 So I'm going to show you exactly where I think you should be tossing that ball to play the

 You know, the more you come to 12 o'clock, it'll be easier to hit, kick, and also disguise

 As a lefty, for me, if I go out more towards 11 o'clock, that's where I can really flatten

 But it's anywhere within that parameter that you want to be thinking about.

 If it goes outside of that area, so that's clearly not 12 o'clock for me, don't hit the

 That's the cool thing about your serve, is you don't have to hit it.

 Well, first of all, make sure you really get set the proper way.

 You'll see lots of people at the club level, this is a big mistake I see.

 They'll come here, now it's going to be really tough because now there's lots of arm movement

 That's one of the biggest mistakes I see as far as people tossing the ball.

 When you release the ball, so you're coming here and you go to release the ball and you

 release too early, it's going to tend to go outside of those magic notes we want to plan

 If we release too late, that's when the ball's going to start coming behind our head and

 So what I like to think about is keeping my arm moving up and down like a pendulum and

 it gets to my nose, some people say the eye, but I like the nose, that's when I just open

 People make, whenever they get to their release point, they just kind of freeze their hand

 I'm going to go up and down like a pendulum and then when I get to my nose, I just open

 So that's how I'm able to play the correct notes on my serve time after time, because

 that toss is in the same spot and so you can hear as I'm hitting those, it also sounds

 So there you go guys, that's how you play the correct notes to your serve and if you

 want to learn how to play the correct notes and get the right spins and all that kind

 We go through some power, we go through some rhythm and we go through some how to really

 So if you'd like a free course on the serve, all you got to do is click here and also if

 you like this video, remember to like it, subscribe if you don't want to miss any future

 Thanks for all your support and we'll see you on the next video.

 Hey everybody, it's Ashley from Ashley's Greenline and we are here with Avery today.

 And we are going to talk about how we can make our frosting, color our frosting naturally

 You might be thinking, why not just use those traditional food dyes?

 It's just a little bit, it's okay, but as food colorings have been found to cause hyperactivity,

 So those are some things we want to steer away from and it's kind of no surprise that

 they can do those negative effects because they come from petroleum derived ingredients.

 Okay, so today we're going to be talking about frosting and as you can see we've got a nice

 They are gluten free, vegan, sugar free, and they're just my favorite vanilla cupcake recipe.

 So we have our cupcakes and my favorite frosting is from a blog called Whole Life Nutrition

 It's a vegan sugar free frosting and the base is, here's our ingredients for that.

 As you can see I've made a couple batches of frosting for this video so I'm running low.

 We have agave nectar, vanilla extract, almond extract, arrowroot flour, and organic shortening.

 We have just our plain frosting which before I used to be okay with but now that I have

 Now that I've got Avery and we have birthday parties and I'm sure someday she'll have parties

 at school, I want something to give it a little bit more, you know, just fun look and not

 It's called India Tree Nature's Colors Decorating Set and I'll give you a close up.

 You'll see when we're mixing them all up and it comes with three colors.

 Kind of about like you would a normal set of food dyes and food colorings.

 What I like about the India Tree colors here is that they say that they have no corn syrup

 One downside to the colorings is that it costs about $15 for one set.

 I know that's a lot to swallow when you're trying to go green, but to me it's worth it

 not to have the food colorings that lead to hyperactivity and all those other negative

 We're going to make just the red, yellow, and blue and we'll see how they turn out.

 Obviously you can continue to mix the colors together and you'll end up with your complementary

 Alright, so here's a batch of other colors I've mixed up with the dyes.

 We've got our orange and green, which pretty much looks like guacamole to me.

 I'm going to be frosting cupcakes with these, but you can put them on a cake or any other

 Alright, so as you can tell, clearly kids don't seem to know the difference between

 the natural food coloring and artificial, so it makes the transition a little easier.

 So basically that's how we color our frosting naturally and without regular food dyes.

 So if you have any special tips or tricks that you've used before, be sure to post

 but it's been pouring out all day and I don't know, just rain and love and romance all just

 But anyways, I've just been in the mood for Valentine's Day already even though Valentine's

And if you have someone to treat or even if you have a significant other

 you want to please or anybody you care and love and want to show your appreciation for,

 come join me and make this super quick and easy Valentine's Day breakfast.

 fancy, just like your basic simple stuff, your red velvet pancakes.

 some granola cups with a little bit of Greek yogurt and top it with berries.

Basically you want like a nice sticky mixture so that all our oats and almonds

 if you don't have melted butter you can simply use oil, it doesn't really matter as long

 mixture and pressing it into the cup just to give like the granola bars the cup shape

 that into an oven preheated to 325 degrees for about 15 minutes or until it's nice and

 of vinegar and milk and letting it sit for about a minute or two until the milk gets

 And on the other hand we have our dry ingredients mixed together and ready to go.

 to take some red food coloring and mix it into my wet mixture and pour that into my

 take a scoop and just lay about a quarter teaspoon into your pan.

And now my granola cups, I just want to show you how to take them out.

 cream cheese and some maple syrup and just give it a nice mix together with your hand

 pancakes in your fridge for a couple of minutes just so the cream cheese has a chance to settle

I made the red velvet pancakes and I mean look at these cute little granola cups.

 I mean these are the most gorgeous thing on this platter right now.

 these is that the ones that you're not using like this empty little thing right here, you

 can just leave it in your fridge or on the counter and then grab it to go whenever you

 This is such a nice treat, especially if you're just making it for yourself.

 are nice and fluffy and then you have this really nice cream cheese maple syrup frosting.

 little tart because it's completely plain and then you bite into the granola which is

 the Campbell Brothers group and joining me today is my brother Phillip Campbell

 in various configurations such as a 6 string, 8 string as well as 10 string

 tuning on it with the E major tuning with the C sharp on the top.

Many players use the blocking technique with the right hand but I'm using a form in which I use a picking up the bar, lifting the bar but

 Moving with the left hand with the bar, I'm also rocking the volume and the tone knob together or using the volume.

 Today we're going to learn how to braid a challah with six strands.

 Some people use a toothpick or a knife to hold them together, but I find it's not necessary.

 So what you're going to do is you're going to learn a new mantra.

 The one on the far right, you take it, you go over two strands, under one strand, and

 I like to turn it around and just neaten it up at the end, using the same formula.

 And I take the challah and I squish it all together like this, and then all together like that.

 And then, after 20 minutes, you cover it in egg wash and your sesame seeds,

 and you put it in the oven for three to five minutes, and you have a beautiful challah.

 For more information on how to make a challah, visit www.Flydreamers.com.

 okay this is going to be the hellion by Judas Priest it's going to be in

 standard tune and for this song I'm actually using my neck pickup instead of

 my bridge pickup for the sound difference it just fits the song better

 I think so I'm going to be breaking the song into parts and the first part I'm

 okay so what you're going to start off with is an open six string palm muted to

 the ninth fret fourth string all right and then it's going to be the 12th fret

 third string 11th to the ninth kind of vibe rather than the ninth

 all right now the next part is going to have the same beginning the sixth string

 to the ninth on the fourth string only this time it's going to be the 12th

 fret on the second string to the 10th then to the 12th on the third string

 so what you're going to start off with it's going to be you're going to strike

 the fifth string third fret to the fifth fret fourth string then it's going

 to be an open third string then it's going to be you're going to go to the

 fifth fret power chord on the fifth string and you're kind of you're not

 going to strike it like a you're going to like kind of roll down the strings

 kind of like that you're not like like I said you're not going to strike it

 the last part is going to be a ninth fret on the third string to the ninth

 Whether you're a veteran wig wearer or a first-timer, here are some quick and easy steps on how

 For most people, that's four finger widths above the eyebrow, so keep that in mind.

 The first thing that you'll want to do when you receive your wig is remove it from its

 So now that we've removed the protective hairnet, you want to give your wig a few quick shakes.

 What this will do is it'll actually loosen up your fibers and add more body to your wig.

 So now that my wig is ready to apply, I'm going to go ahead and place it on our wig

 Wig caps are great because not only will they keep your wig in place, but they'll also make

 Now since my hair is longer, I'm going to pin it back using bobby pins, but if you have

 Putting on your wig, you always want to start from the crown and secure on down to the back

 So we'll go ahead and put it right at my forehead and slide it down.

 And the next step is you want to grab the ear tabs and make sure they're positioned

 Go ahead and adjust the Velcro strap around the back of the nape if necessary for a more

 Be sure to tuck in any stray hairs that you may see before you go out.

 Hi, this is Robin Moses and I'm here with Mammy and Evil Client.

 a franken-polished pink background that you can find in the Hey Robin playlist.

On these two, I'm going to put the little pink flowers down across

They variate between pink and white because I'm going to do pink

 Asking Evil Client questions tonight, today is probably not a good idea.

 Okay, I went in with a light green and yellow and I added a little bit of red to tone down

 Just kind of go over the tops of them so they look like they're in a little bed of swirlies.

 So now on the middles of the flowers, I'm just going to go in with the same yellow that

 and dot in and that's going to take the yellow from the tips of the other nails and blend

 Just dot in there, make it into like this little springtime lacy look like that.

 Okay, on these ones, I'm going to do a three-pronged flower along the lines in the white.

 This is going to blend these into the white of the white flowers on the other nails.

 Okay, so I upload every Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, or at least I'm trying to.

 show not long ago and I met the vice president of a company that sells a stainable primer.

 about it is the way they put this together, the structure of it, it will absorb stain

Now, I can take this door, after I've painted it, and in most cases once you paint

 on top of this paint, then you can come back over and stain it and get a cherry look, an

 ebony look, any other stainable colors that you want to put on here, it absorbs it nicely.

 If I had a hammer ding in here or something like that, I can fill that, sand it, put this

 primer right on top of it, and get a perfect stain all over again.

I'm going to show you a number of different things that this works on.

 This has already been prepped and painted with a latex paint, so I can go back on it

 I set the door on the side, and now I want to show you how to clean your brushes an easy

And it saves money, especially when I'm dealing with oil-based paints.

You can cut it anywhere around there as long as this part sits in

 put just a tiny amount of mineral spirits in there and swish this in here, and you'll

 the bristles, so I don't have to put a whole lot in a container and shake it up.

 put a little bit in the bottom, and you'll see what I'm talking about.

 this into there, you can see, it's going to completely cover it.

If I use a larger brush like this, it'll clean this just as well,

 and it actually works better because the wider the bristles are on here, the more it tapers

 off the inside and hit it a couple more times until it's clean.

 it again a few more times, and you'll get all of that stain out of there.

So if I decide to glaze this now, I could put glaze on here, an oil-based glaze,

 because the mineral spirits will cut the lacquer, the regular lacquer.

 I put Deft on it, and use a latex-based glaze, and this stuff works great.

 water to wipe it off, and I have other videos on glaze to show you how to do some of that.

 If I'm using an oil-based glaze, like I said, I will use the pre-catalyzed lacquer first.

 Spray it, take my oil-based glaze and put on here, and then I can wipe that off.

 If I spray it with a pre-catalyzed lacquer, you can take this and rub it all day.

 use an oil-based now, and just rub it in those corners, and take it right off, and I don't

 it again with a lighter color stain or a darker color stain, anything I want.

Until next time, don't forget to subscribe, and check out my website, paulstoolbox.com.

 Ever since last year when I made those spiral cut franks and beans, I've been wondering

 what would happen if I spiral cut a hot dog, then threaded through a slice of bacon into

 Okay, now the first step towards making this epic wiener is to do the spiral cut on that

 And I'm using these jumbo franks today versus the regular sized ones I used in the franks

 Beyond them being larger, therefore more epic than your average frank, coincidentally they

 also came in a pack of four, just like the hot dog rolls that I'm using here.

 Now to spiral cut that dog, first you have to insert a skewer all the way through the

 center to act as a guide so your knife can't sever through as you do the spiral cut.

 And once you have it pretty well placed, holding your knife at an angle, work the knife around

 the hot dog, cutting straight down to the skewer as you go around.

 And I cut a tighter pattern for the franks and beans video than I did for this one because

 I wanted to make sure that one strip of bacon would make it all the way to the bottom.

 Now remove the skewer and secure the bacon to one end with a toothpick.

 Then do your best to jam that bacon into the groove all the way down the hot dog before

 Next we're going to pan fry this bacon wrapped wienie in a cast iron skillet over a medium

 heat, turning every few minutes until the entire surface has a golden char and that

 And I used relish, mustard, and onions, and instead of ketchup I've got a little sriracha

 And the way we have the bacon wrapped into that spiral cut groove really does an amazing

 And if you'd like to print a copy of today's easy recipe, you can always visit my blog

 And for brand new recipes every week, and next week I'm making those butter pecan cheesecake

 This was her original recipe and now it's my secret ingredient.

 We're going to start by adding half a cup of bread crumbs into your bowl here and half

 You have to let the bread crumbs absorb all of the milk until it forms a paste and this

 And to this we're going to add one egg, half a cup of parmesan, a little bit of pepper,

 We're going to break this up just a little bit and then we're going to mix it by hand.

 To prevent the mixture from sticking to your hands, just dip them in a little bit of olive

 Next you're going to use an ice cream scooper to make sure you portion them out evenly.

 When you do this, keep your hands just a little bit open and form a nice even ball.

 So to this, while it's simmering, I'm just going to drop the meatballs right in.

 So now we're just going to spoon the sauce over top of each meatball.

 We're just going to pop the lid on and let this simmer for 10 minutes.

 So once you have them all on your platter, we're going to take the sauce and spoon some

 When you get ready to serve, you're just going to take one out and plate it up.

 We're going to spoon a little bit of extra sauce and try finishing it with a little bit

 And there you have it, Bobby D's favorite meatballs using Bobby D's Ma's Red Sauce.

 To print this recipe and see more easy, healthy recipes, go to bobbyds.com.

 homemade Italian inspired condiment is a perfect addition to any pasta, spaghetti,

 Thermo Chef jug we are going to add our onions that have been peeled and just

Red peppers, you could use chili in this recipe if you wanted to.

 And just our tomatoes that have just had the ends chopped off them.

 in with our raw sugar, our cracked pepper, freshly cracked pepper, just cooking salt.

 it to evaporate without making too much of a mess in the kitchen.

You can see how much it has evaporated and lessened in quantity.

 least 1-2 meals of cooked tomato per week assists in the reduction of the incidence

 temperature it is time to remove, carefully remove our strainer.

 not want this to sit in the jug continuing to cook onto the blades and possibly burning.

A handy hint when you're storing tomato paste that has been opened, just drizzle a

 layer of olive oil onto the opened surface and pop the lid back on and store it in the

The reason that you do that is it excludes the air and your tomato paste won't

It's quite a thick mix so you have to assist it, it doesn't pour

This is an excellent way to use short coated tomatoes or if you've

 a problem with your garden at the moment and you're worried that you're not going to be

 and tomatoes are splitting left right and centre which means that they're all ready

If you're not sold on a thermo chef now, by now I'm not sure what's going to do

 which has had sugar added, to two full jars of thick rich tomato paste.

 very happy to burn on the stove top, has been cooked to perfection by the thermo chef jar

 without sticking, burning or requiring to be chopped up to start with.

 back and visit us again soon, we have so much more to show you.

It will bubble up and travel up into this area here, but you can soak this

It will also stop it from boiling over and it will allow, because of this wide area

 without making too much mess and you don't have to stir it, it doesn't burn on and you

 sauces, curries, pickles or chutneys, anything that's likely to splot and make a mess because

 it allows the moisture to evaporate and any splashes, most splashes, not 100%, but most

 Today we have an awesome treat because Nancy here in the office is going to be creating

 And Nancy's a little shy so I'm going to be doing the voiceover but one day we're going

 Right here she's going to be using some of these awesome Peace Joy Love papers.

 Then Nancy's going to be using some great Lawn Fawn stamp sets.

 And then of course we're going to use the dies to make cutting out the jar really easy.

 Some silver sparkle lawn trimmings and Peace Joy Love mixed sequins are going to be the

 The card base for this card is going to be 3.5 x 4.5 inches which is a really fun cute

 And then Nancy's going to use some of this awesome chalkboard polka dotted paper for

 And then she's going to go ahead and stamp out the Summertime Charm jar.

 She's turning it upside down and making it a snow globe which is so cool.

 Now the great thing about this whole snow globe jar idea is that you could put any type

 of wintery image inside but we think that these trees from Let It Snow look particularly

 I just love that cute little chevron thing and the idea of creating a sweet winter scene

 The next step is to add some sweet stars on top of the tree which really helps kind

 And if you guys were in Scrap Best, this was the card, one of the cards that we made there

 And then now I love this idea that Nancy had and that's to stamp these kind of star slash

 I think it's so pretty and it really gives that look of snow on a white card base.

 Now she's just adding some quick Copic coloring with a C4 gray marker for the lid.

 I love the dyes because it makes crafting so much easier and it gives this cute little

 white border when you pop it out of the dye which I just love and it would be easy for

 Here's that wonderful greeting from the Winter in the Park set and she's stamping that on

 a little strip of white card stock and she's going to create some flagged ends by snipping

 down the middle and then connecting each side to that middle part and that creates a cute

 little flagged end on each side and just adds an extra interest.

 Now this piece of pattern paper is going to be 3x4 and then this fun little candy cane

 stripe is going to be 3x1.5 and I love this because it gives kind of a little table for

 So she took her foam adhesive and put it on the jar leaving some space there around the

 end of the jar and this is going to help anchor down so when she ties this really awesome

 silver sparkle lawn trimmings around it, it's going to hold the twine in place for her so

 So you just thread that twine behind there and then you can tie your knot and bow really

 The next step is to adhere down the greeting with some foam adhesive right along the edge

 of the jar and then now Nancy's using a Quickie glue pen to add a little glue to adhere some

 of the mixed Joy Love sequins on there and this is really going to add to that kind of

 snow globe look and I love this idea of using this little glue pen.

 So a big thank you to Nancy for this awesome card and thank you guys so much for watching.

 This is my favorite daytime mask I like to use just before I put on my makeup.

 Best thing is, I'm pretty sure you have all these ingredients in your pantry.

 This helps you remove excess oil and bacteria from your skin while treating rosacea and blemishes.

 This is really great for your skin growth and repairs damaged skin cells,

 which means it can help prevent your skin from aging too quickly.

 Honey will even out your skin tone as well as brighten your complexion.

 Not only does it bring moisture to your skin, it treats redness, acne, and aging skin.

 You'll also need a small bowl and a spoon to mix everything together.

 I just like to mix everything at this point so the oats can start soaking in everything.

 If you'd like a thicker mass, just add 1 or 2 tablespoons more.

 You'll start to notice that the oats have gotten softer and that your aloe vera has actually changed into this tan, cloudy color.

 If you have a hard time putting on your mask, you can always add more coconut oil, honey, or aloe vera.

 And since that's a long time, you can write in your journal or even read a book.

 You're going to take a paper towel and scrape off all the oats on your face.

 I always laugh at this point because it's such a weird feeling.

 I like to cup one hand underneath my chin while removing any excess oatmeal on my face.

 Dry your face with a clean towel and you'll notice how shiny and firm your skin has become with just one use.

 Let me know in the comments below what you thought was helpful.

 I lift the palm of my hand, lifting up a little bit higher than normal.

 And I'm ready with my right hand to lead her down the slot while I turn.

 As I step for five, I want to lead her with my right hand for and a.

 Leaders, we're just doing our basic footwork, basic triple, standard anchor while she does all that.

 If we compress on three and a, match her compression, we'll give her enough to add that slide at the end.

 For three, I'm on my left foot, leaders, I pop the right leg for four.

 I'm going to walk with my right foot for five, six, cross seven and eight.

 For one, two, three, you're going to get full turn three, tap four.

 Now what we can do is shoulders, five, six, seven, eight, while he's going, or do the ribcages.

 And you will think, I'm sorry, by eight you want to transfer your weight to your left so you can walk forward with one, one.

 Little thing about that pattern, leaders, as we open up I'm reaching for two.

 As she comes in I reach two, use the full hand as I stop her on four.

 If you'd like to check out our next class, you can click on the link in the description.

 and the cooking time may vary depending on the type of microwave oven and its

 It still has 58 seconds to go and the popcorn is nearing the red rim before the lid starts.

 And to buy microwave popcorn it's about $4 a packet whereas I bought that packet

 there which has got significantly more kernels in it for $1.11.

 you can eat it straight from the bowl but I want to tip it out to see how many

 But it's still cheaper than microwave popcorn so I'll give it a bit of a veggie salt.

 Hope you enjoyed this little video review of the Popcorn Maker.

 If you'd like to see more interesting recipes and ideas please check out my

 CheekyRicho channel and don't forget to subscribe and leave a comment.

 This headset's direct setup guide will feature the Plantronics Savi W720 wireless headset.

 The Savi 700 series comes with a headset, docking cradle, bass unit, and cords.

 first thing you'll want to become familiar with is the bass unit.

 into, your handset cable, and last, the USB connection that goes to your computer.

 the docking station and firmly press it down on the bass unit on the right-hand side.

 is where you will store your headset and also is the charging portion of the bass.

 The first step to plug into your phone is the cable that plugs into where the handset

Unplug your handset from the side of the phone and plug this cable into this side.

 bass unit and the other end plugs into the USB port in your computer.

 to plug into is the handset cord goes back into that cable that came with the Savi.

 into the docking station and let it begin charging and it's ready for use.

The middle button is your mobile phone and the right is your desk phone.

 At the bottom of the bass, the blue LED shows you're connected to your mobile phone and

 to the bottom right, the light will come on when the headset is charging.

 the right is your speaker volume up, both of those you can control during your call

 and the headset on off LED light will flash green when you're on a call.

 or electronic hook switch cable, by pushing the call control button that's what allows

You also have a microphone mute and a noise canceling microphone extending forward

The Savi 700 series allows you to connect a computer, mobile phone and

 button on your headset will automatically answer whichever device is ringing.

 an outbound call, pressing the call control button by default will go to your desk phone.

 If you need mobile or computer, you would press that button at the top of the base.

 Just took some foil, knotted it up to make a rod of foil, and wrapped it around like

 I made sure I got a big pot so that I could submerge everything.

 Okay, so after about two and a half hours boiling, I took it out, put it on this towel,

 I'm gonna sit it on the mannequin head and let it dry the rest of the way.

 As you can see, I just sort of wrapped it around like you would a rod, a flexi rod,

 and just bent it on the ends to stay in place and to stay really securely.

 Okay, so I know this looks super ghetto, but I wanted to give it a little boost as far

 And so I decided just to put the mannequin head on the floor, put the hair on top of

 Sounds crazy, but I've definitely done it before with my other U-parts after I washed

 Alright, now that it's all dry, I'm just going to go ahead and untwist it from the foil.

 So what I'm going to do now is just moisturize with a little Miss Jessie's Curly Buttercream.

 So, I'm going to put a little bit of this in there and pluck the curls loose a little bit.

This is my skincare routine because a lot of people have asked and I'm just a

Now I do alternate between this one which is the gel and there's

 one called the squeaky clean and then there's a cooling creamy one.

 same thing but I use also a face brush from there and I kind of just go in circular motions

 it with their fingers and I just find this much easier to just pick it up with a foundation

I make faces so I'm going to make some funny facial expressions.

But I really do love the Tea Tree line because I'm a bit more oily than anything.

 I do have combination skin but the Tea Tree oil keeps pretty much my breakouts and everything

So I do have a breakout in this video which is why I decided to film it during

So I've let that dry down and I took a pretty warm towel and I put it

What that does for me and I've noticed with all kinds of masks that I use

 it a bit because it has a mattifying powder in it that sinks to the bottom.

 then after that I'm going to use just a little bit of tea tree oil and put that on one of

 For the 4th of July, you want to make a recipe that's simple enough that you can feed a crowd.

 That's why these chicken burgers are super delicious, easy as pie, and you can make ahead

 Heat a pan over medium-high heat, and you're going to saute some finely diced onions for

 about 4 minutes, or if you're like me, until they're a little bit golden.

 When I had fast food burgers when I was a kid, that was my favorite way to enjoy them,

 When the onions are nice and cool, you're going to make the mixture.

 You're going to take your ground chicken, sprinkle in about a half a teaspoon of garlic

 Take the cooled onions, add them into the ground chicken mixture, and using your hands,

 mush the mixture up nice and good to make sure everything is combined, and then you're

 going to make them into 8 even-sized patties, or if you're making big burgers, you want

 Place your pan over medium-high heat, and you're going to cook your burgers for about

 After cooking for about 3 minutes, you flip the burger over, and then you can cover it

 for a few additional minutes to make sure that the burger is cooked evenly through.

 When the burgers are nice and cooked up, you can top each one with a slice of cheese.

 Place the burgers with the slice of cheese on a nice, soft, fluffy bun.

 You can add tomatoes, lettuce, or pickles if you want, but I like to serve my burgers

 For more fast, fresh, and easy recipes like this and more, check out Weelicious.com.

 Don't forget to subscribe and leave a comment below telling me what are you making this

 So obviously the video I've gotten the most feedback from is Skin of Bones, my cover of

 And I know on Ultimate Guitar there aren't, I don't think, well at least the last time

 I don't know if that's still true, but I basically just figured it out myself and realized that

 G, D, E minor, and C work for it, the same way it works for many songs.

 But some people have been asking for help learning it, or just blatantly requesting

 I've never done one before, but I mean I will because I don't see why not, since there's

 It's basically just, I'm doing G like, with my ring finger and my pinky finger on the

 third fret of the B and E string, the high B and E. And then I just move my index finger

 to cover where the D is, and then E minor, and then C. I keep these two fingers in the

 I sure think you're beautiful with your long hair and your big blue eyes.

 That's the basic strumming pattern I use for most things really, but that's basically it.

 I hope you can figure it out, I know this isn't very helpful, but okay.

 So it's, hush your lips, I'm about to speak up if I talk real slow.

 Yeah, I've got a lot of nerves coming after you, but you're the only thing that's on my

 Let me keep this short and sweet, there's another line I want to do to sweep you off

 Okay, obviously I'm mixing all the lyrics up, but basically it's really just that one

 Um, and then during the chorus, I don't do any palm muting, so it's just...

 So long hair and big blue eyes, I'm thinking about making you mine tonight.

 And then during the- the only thing that changes is during the bridge.

 The way I'm getting that is just I'm just taking my ring finger off that B string, so-

 Um, so just change it up a little bit, you know, and bring it back down.

 With a little bit of palm muting in it, I think you can figure out if you play along and listen.

 I hope this was like slightly helpful, even though it's probably just really confusing.

 I think I should pick it up really quickly, and I'm glad I could help and have fun playing

 I've just woken up, I'm not thinking straight, and I usually just reach for the closest thing

 And I don't realize how crazy I look until I've had my first cup of coffee and finally

 Luckily, if I'm still home I can change my outfit, but if I'm out, oh the embarrassment.

 So I decided I'd pick all my outfits out a week in advance, but I needed a clothes rack

 to store them and my teeny bedroom really didn't allow the space.

 So I decided to utilize what little space I had and build my own clothes rack, perfect

 A white wall shelf, you can buy this from most home and hardware stores.

 And I picked up a heavy duty closet rod, make sure it's adjustable to fit the length

 Now there's a lot of different brands on the market so be sure to read the directions to

 Following my specific directions, I drilled in the screws, attached my shelf supports,

 Okay, now I grab my heavy duty closet rod and I place it equal distance between the

 two shelf supports and a couple inches away from the wall so I can hang my clothes.

 Now after marking where I want to place the rod, I use a drill bit to create a hole and

 It's a shelf and clothing rack, decorative and completely functional.

 One of my favorite inspirational sayings in yellow purchased from Target.

 A basket to display all my hats and scarves, my shoes for the week, and of course my outfits

 I turned a drab, boring half piece of wall into a functional, decorative, and inspirational

 I definitely think that's turning lemons into lemonade, don't you think?

 And now I can start my day without worrying about what I'm wearing.

 In this video, I would like to show you my medieval style crossbow.

 I made this completely out of paper and cardboard and this is also powered by rubber bands.

 You can see that there are yellow rubber bands which provide the power.

 You see this piece here, this piece is called the nut and this nut can rotate.

 So the string will be held behind this nut and when you pull the trigger, the nut rotates

 To cock the weapon, you have to set the nut of the crossbow to the correct position, that

 is like this, such that when we pull the string back, the string will come, push the

 All you need to do is put the crossbow down, then you put your feet over the prod and now

 that we have set the nut to the correct position, all we have to do is pull the rubber bands

 All you need to do is take your bolt and slide it over the railing and it's done.

 Another thing I want to show you is, I have made a groove over here in the nut, such that

 So the string can apply all its force over the bolt when you shoot.

 This piece can be put back by just sliding it in and now the weapon is loading.

 Set the nut to the right position, pull the string up, the weapon is cocked.

 I have kept a cup over there and I'm standing 2 to 3 meters away from it, but I still cannot

 I'm Ching-He Huang and I grew up around Chinese flavours, ingredients and wonderful Asian

I love using fresh ingredients and amazing flavours to create mouth-watering

In this series I'll be exploring classic Chinese sauces such as plum, oyster,

 bean is responsible for making the most delicious black bean sauce.

 then you can get bottled black bean sauce which is just as good.

 to show you how to make one of my favourite dishes and it's really easy.

Now these ingredients here form the holy trinity of Chinese cooking.

 Now I'm using green pepper in this dish because it's not as obviously sweet as red pepper

 but it's got a nice fresh bite to it, a nice savouriness that works really well with beef.

 Now salad onions are really perfect just to add a fresh bite to any dish at the end.

 So those are all my veggies prepped and now it's time for the beef.

 beef are all that sort of fat marbling that runs through the meat and you want to slice

 against it so that each morsel that you have is going to be meltingly delicious because

So what we're going to do is just slice this piece in half and then we're

 just going to slice it into sort of less than one centimetre thick pieces.

 flat wide rice noodles and these come dried in packets and you need to soak them for about

 ten minutes in boiling water until they're lovely and springy like this and then once

 you drain them and refresh them under cold water just drizzle a little bit of peanut

 oil just so they sort of stop sticking together and this is going to be minutes in the wok

 throughout the country from the backstreet kitchens of rural China to the five-star hotels

 the beef starts to turn brown I'm going to introduce some Shaoxing rice wine.

 just give that a good stir and as the alcohol evaporates you get this really nice whiff

 my peppers quite nice and al dente so just less than a minute in the wok is perfect.

 So I'm going to use a few tablespoons of light soy sauce, a good quality light soy

 There you go, really simple, that's my sizzling black bean beef with noodles.

 So with those chords known, we can start talking about things like 2-5-1.

 You know, Mary had a little lamb, her fleece was white as snow, that's a 2-5-1.

 Before we were just going to, you know, in the key of C, we would go to G major because

 But when you start introducing minor chords, then you start making your song more interesting.

 A 2-5-1 in the key of C would be like D minor, G major, or G7, but we haven't gotten to G7,

 And then can't you even put this in a little like bossa nova groove?

 So yeah, just connect that together because that's in a lot of songs.

 And then you got songs that go from C major straight down to the A.

 This next way that we're going to sweep your opponent is out of the half guard as well,

 Whatever the situation is, we're going to create space and we're going to move our butt

 Now when I move me, now if you can, you can fight for the underhook.

 What is the key is this leg is going to come straight in and tuck right behind, right in

 We're going to show this from a couple of angles so you can see it, but essentially

 You'll see from a different angle, but we're in this butterfly.

 Now what we want to do is just a Mayflower with an elevator kick.

 If he tries to post, we just collapse his arm down with an overhook, all in one motion,

 We've started out lockdown, X, however you want to start with your legs.

 We're going from here, moving off our back, setting this butterfly hook.

 If you fight for the underhook, most likely he's going to throw the wizard so that you

 You're going to shoot this other leg under, just like the Mayflower sweep.

 When you bring the Mayflower, this leg comes down, elevator kick, coming up into side control.

 That's your reverse elevator sweep from your half guard, half butterfly position.

 We're going to replace the seat cushion part, the covering of the seat cushion, and then

 Removing the seat cushion is as simple as removing these four screws.

 Okay, I've removed the seat from the cushion from the seat and the cushion is in fairly

 It's got a very tight covering on it, although the covering has some flaws on it.

 So what I'm proposing to do is that we're going to take our new covering and cover it

 I'm going to get the covering that we've got, I'm going to cut it to initial size.

 Okay, so we've cut the material and we're going to start from the back and work ourselves

 One of the things I want to show you is that while you're stapling this in, I grabbed a

 I've cut this a little bit, just a little bit oversized, so I can grab a handful and

 Now you see I've just got a little bit of a crease here and I'm going to bring that

 I'm playing a balancing game here because I want the front of this chair to look even.

 So I have to be very careful how tight I make this so that it's going to match over

 I've put a little crease, a little crease right here in the chair and that will be hidden

 We've got our creases that are going to be hidden by the uprights.

 I cut two pieces of wood for the arms because I didn't have any wood for the arms when I

 I also drilled two holes and used countersunk flat head screws to secure this arm to the

 I've made two pieces of foam, one for the left side and one for the right side.

 I've notched out here so this is the front of the arm and it's going to fold over the

 I've made this just slightly smaller so that it doesn't really bunch up on the sides.

 And how I determined the size of this piece of foam, the foam is cut this thickness plus

 this thickness plus this thickness and that's what I end up with.

 Okay so here's the chair with one completed arm and here's the second completed arm.

 And we're going to just attach it to the chair as I promised using the bolts that are through.

 And we're going to use these nuts and the nut driver to attach it.

 We have a little laser that will come down and show you right where the center of the drill bit will hit.

 But there's a laser line that's going right down, right where the tip of that drill bit is going to hit.

 Bring the drill bit down, touch it against the ball, and lift it up off the ball just the slightest bit.

 And line up the ball so that the front edge of the drill bit will hit that yellow line that I put on the ball.

 Clearly mark the drill depth right here on the side of my drill press.

 And here's another nice tool we have that fits right up with the vacuum cleaner.

 And we'll come back for the next video and show you how to drill it.

 in my little Christmas series and I'm not gonna load up a video next week

 because next Wednesday is Christmas so you should be with your family and your

 friends not watching me on YouTube but if you do happen to get a new toy that

 happens to let you watch the YouTube feel free to watch all my videos there's

 video this one is not a dessert but it's still baking and that's how I get

 I know in the North America's your bacon is a little bit piddly and crap compared

 to our big-ass bacon here in Australia so probably use about four rashers in

 the North America's but here I'm using two and I'm gonna cut it in half and

 then half again and then I'm gonna cut into strips and essentially I'm gonna

 seem small enough and it you know it becomes crap so buy the rashers and

 going, Laws it's an onion but trust me some people don't know how to cut an

Cut the base off then it makes it nice and flat and it doesn't wobble

 around and then you end up trying to stab yourself while trying to cut the

 slits and this is gonna give us essentially onion slices and then what

 I'm gonna do is I'm gonna cut down the onion and this is gonna give you strips

 so this is how you sort of work an onion folks it's it's all layers it's all

 layers and you reveal those layers and you end up crying but also doing it this

 dice so this is gonna be a nice fine dice once again no one likes big chunks

 of onion so if you find your dice too big just run your knife through it again.

 Then I've also got some cheese or cheese there you go cheese in Japanese I'm

 teaching you guys so many important things I'm gonna also run my knife

 cream beautiful full-strength cream people fat is flavor don't forget that

 then we've got one happy chicken egg some Dijon mustard and this will just

 give it a bit of a pip you know to your stip great and then we're gonna add in

 our onion that we just diced before and it's only about half an onion there so

 olives and capsicum essentially you want something with a little bit of salt but

 not too salty and maybe a nice simple flavor if you don't want to make it with

 now I'm just using pepper because the bacon has a bit of salt I'm gonna be

 using in the tray again that gives us the tartlet shape these are awesome get

 yourself one now I don't have a cookie cutter that fits that but I used simply

 a glass works just as well make sure the glass is bigger though than your little

 tray now make sure that you grease the tray and grease it like crazy because

 that is the way that your tart or your quiche it's gonna come out.

 gonna use some puff pastry here since you push down on the glass using my body

 of it essentially by going across three and down three and then using the extras

 and squishing them together to make the 12 so one sheet one tray dead easy folks

 peel that off and slaughter it in now give it a bit of a push down and make

 sure that you get the shape nice get that as even as you can but with puff

 pastry it's great you don't really notice those funky edges so yeah don't

 worry about it now I also have got parsley you can put parsley in this so

 if you've got someone who doesn't like parsley just sneak it in give it a bit

 of a good mix up just before you start pouring now you can pour this in or you

 can scoop it in I did try and pour it and then I absolutely suck at pouring so

 I went with the spoon I chickened out last minute so fill up your little

 quiches and then just before putting them in we're going to put some of that

 cheese that we had before just a little bit on the top whack them in the oven

 don't worry they will puff up they will puff down when you take them out of the

 oven they look beautiful and golden like this allow them to cool before you try

 and attempt to get them out because you may end up burning your little fingers

 there you have it guys this is the perfect snack for Christmas New Year's

 I hope you make them you will love them Merry Christmas dessert junkies thank

 and this year I'm going all out because I'll be teaming up with YouTubers across the world.

 We'll be cooking recipes from Ireland's wonderful food heritage, tasting treats from the land of

 leprechaun, and of course, proving to you that we don't just eat potatoes.

Patrick's Day collaboration, I am teaming up with Sarah Lynn from The Domestic

 Geek, who has a channel jam-packed full of great healthy eating recipe ideas.

 collaboration, we're both cooking up our favorite Irish recipes, so let's head over to Sarah Lynn

 some way over the top chocolate stout cupcakes with Irish cream frosting.

The only real challenge with making these cupcakes is getting them done before you drink

 Irish-inspired recipe, I'm going to show you how to make the most beautiful Irish cheddar and potato

They are so delicious, light and moist, and as you know, Irish people love their potatoes,

 so this is a great reason to get them involved in a recipe like this.

 got no lumps going on and you've got lots of light air running through the flour.

So in with your strong bread flour, I'm going to add in, quite unusually,

And the interesting thing about this method is that you get in there with your

 fingertips and just press the flour into the butter until you kind of have almost what you

 As soon as you've rubbed that butter and flour mixture, it should look just like this.

And now I'm going to mix through this a little bit of caster sugar,

 and to give it that wonderful rise, I've got some active dried yeast going in here.

 Give that a really good mix through, and our last little ingredient to go in here and get

 most beautiful, moist, and light and airy yeast rolls you will ever make.

 goes in, and it's a great little ingredient to add if you have any leftover in the house.

 Give that a really good mix through just to ensure that it's nicely combined.

 and you do need that warmth involved here because it's going to activate the yeast that's in our dry

So milk goes in, and I'm also going to add in the water which I cooked my potatoes in.

 There's lots of starch in that water, and it's going to help to make our wonderful yeast rolls

So a good bit of that potato water goes in, and then it's time to get your hands involved.

 get the claw in, and it's time to just mix it through, and it feels quite lovely.

 So just using your hand, bring this together until you kind of have a nice,

 knead it now for a few minutes, just until you get a smooth mixture that bounces back.

 with the palm of your hand, and after one or two minutes, you'll notice that if you flip it over,

So I've buttered the base of this, and I'm going to dust it with flour,

 and I'm going to slice up my little sausage rolls, basically into kind of 11 or 12 pieces,

 and then roll them out, stick them in here, and we're going to bake them off.

 circles like this, pushing with your palm, you should be left with a beautiful little dough ball.

 And now this goes into the casserole pot with the rest of them.

 an hour, just until it's doubled in size, and I do have one which has doubled in size, so come over

 and check this out, because in here we have the most beautiful little, look at that, these

They rise up together, the smell of that yeast and the potato is absolutely

So to finish this off, all I'm going to do is brush it with a little bit of milk over the top,

 and then we're going to finish it off with that cheesy topping.

 which I'm just going to sprinkle over the top, and then put this straight in the oven.

 Once you have each one of these dinner rolls completely covered in cheese, it's time to now

 get this into an oven preheated at 220 degrees Celsius, and it cooks off for about 20 minutes,

 just until they're nicely risen, beautifully golden, and that cheese has melted.

 The smell in this kitchen right now is so good, you have to check out my wonderful

 it's charred ever so slightly, it's possibly too hot for me to eat right now, so I'm going to leave it

 for a minute, but if you're looking for the recipe for this wonderful tear and share bread,

 collaboration list, which is right over here, it's a lovely playlist filled with wonderful

Make sure to check out Sarah's recipe, which is right over here, and make sure

 to check out Sarah Lynn's fantastic recipe over on her website,

 and of course, comment, like and subscribe, and we'll see you soon.

So what I like to do is use a dry erase board to practice my free

And if you've heard that it takes practice to get good at it, it's

 true unfortunately, but an easy way to make that happen is using a dry erase

And this is a nice echo-friendly way to practice and it's very easy to

 working on right now and I can just take my marker and practice a couple of

So I'm going to try a little flower design and I've got these little

 marks here because these represent seams and it also helps me to keep everything

 just erase it and this is a great way to use your leftover batting scraps as an

It's this little table topper and this is the section that I'm working

 here and that's my little quilt sandwich that I'm going to practice on.

 drawn in the lines that represent where the seams are for my particular quilt

I've used a friction pen to draw these on and the friction pen is

 nice because it erases with heat so as soon as I iron it those marks are going

The other thing that I've used is this little circle and I put it

 in the center here and I traced around it and these circles are great for lots

 of things but for me I like to use it to draw circles for my quilting and they

 are perfect circles from Karen K Buckley and they're great for for using

So you got to do all those things to get ready just to practice on

I'm telling you it really works so practice, practice, practice.

 Alright guys, today I'm going to teach you how to do and create my Bueno hairstyle using

 This is very similar to American Cruise, Forming Cream, Haz de Foucauld Scheme Cream, any really

 You're seeing a lot of these styles that hair is a little bit higher, a little bit more

 A lot of times they are using some type of forming or cream type product.

 People that put and take a lot of time styling up their front, but then it's productless

 My hair will probably come back in a half hour after the product has really had time

 The great thing about the paste is that you can come back in an hour, in two hours, and

 You can run your fingers through your hair and it's not going to mess it up too much.

 It's infused with aragon oil and some other oils and nutrients really to help fortify

 And a big problem that a lot of people have when using hair products is that their hair

 I'm going to finish doing the sushi and then I'm going to show you how to cut it.

 Also I just wanted to tell you a little bit about what sushi means.

 Like rice and seaweed or anything, any kind of sushi that has rice in it.

 And sashimi, which is the other term that you often see at restaurants, it means just

 If you're ever confused and you're wondering why they call it two different things, well

 So obviously everything that I'm making here today is actually called sushi because I don't

 So what you want to do is just run some water along your knife, like I've just done.

 Take your futamaki, which is the long rolls, and cut it in the middle, in half.

 Another thing I do is I get a kitchen paper towel ready so that I can wipe it.

 And if you don't want any messy looking edges, the best thing to do is to wipe your knife

 So you want to wipe your knife after each time that you make it.

 You can't really go wrong because it's quite easy to make sushi.

 If you're making vegetarian, keep them separate from the meat, just in case some people don't

 If you want to make a big sized sushi, like so, use your knife to help lift them onto

 This is not really a sushi knife, but it is a very sharp knife.

 There's the futamaki, which is the rolls, and the California rolls, these triangular

 Okay, we're going to get into the painting phase of this thing now.

 It's because wood absorbs the paint, where rubber doesn't do that.

 So we've got a little water over here, but we're not going to be using as much water.

 I'm going to do a little, kind of a little special effect with it.

 And you can use the paint a little bit thicker with this rubber because, like I said, it

 And it's going to take a little bit longer to dry than the wood because it does not

 Now, I'll tell you what, if your daughter or you or whoever uses a hair dryer, I'll

 tell you what, a hair dryer is the best thing in the world to use after you paint something.

 I don't use one because I don't, you know, it would be a waste of time for me to have

 But so we're using, well, I'll tell you what, it's a golf ball, all right.

 We're using a little gray for the hair and then I'm going to get into my, a few napkins

 Now, you may have to give it several coats which you probably will because remember when

 you go over a darker color with a lighter color, it's not, you're really not going to

 So like with the flesh tones, you're probably going to have to go over it several times.

 And like I said, it takes a little bit longer to dry when you're going over this rubber

 because it's going to take a little bit longer than normally it would to dry because like

 I said, it does not, the acrylics don't soak into the, do you see?

 Now as you see, it's gradually giving it a lot more of a personality than just that one

 But like I said, if you can obtain a hairdryer from your daughter or a grand, or just go

 buy you one, you know, like I said, you know, just throw a cheap hairdryer and use it.

 And as it's drying, just add a little bit more and you see it, it's slowly coming out.

 Indian food another food I love very much is the Mexican food because there

 is a lot of similarities between Indian food and Mexican food we make samosas

 there are a lot of similar moles they make but today we're going to make this

 awesome empanada but to the taste of an Indian so dear friends let's go ahead

 and make masala for this today I'm using mincemeat, lamb meat I'm going to make

 it the same way we make for our keema samosa fillings so let's go ahead and

For making this mincemeat masala add some olive oil do not add too much

 oil in this in this add some onions that are finely chopped and we're just going

 to saute this onions little bit once the onions are slightly sauteed add chopped

 garlic you know while the onions are slightly getting colored add some chopped

 green chillies, cumin powder and in this add small pieces of potato that should

 be enough and also small pieces of carrot, green peas and also add minced

 meat you know you can use chicken whatever today I'm using lamb meat in

 this add some chili powder and we're going to cook this till these potatoes are also

 on a medium flame for a few minutes so that this vegetables and the lamb cook

 nicely now wow the moisture from this meat is enough so I have not added any

 extra water in this so now add salt to taste and also I've got some nicely

 chopped bell pepper this will give a nice taste to my dish and lot of people add

 raisins if you want to add raisins add it if not you can skip it I'm just going

 to add few of them just for the flavor of it and I'm going to cook this with

 wow now this is all getting cooked well now the vegetables are also nicely cooked

 usually they add lot of meat in this but for these empanadas what I'm making

 I love to have lot of vegetables also in this if you want to use more of meat

 I'm going to finish it off by adding some chopped coriander and I'm going to

 now this is cooked I'm going to put it on the side and let it cool to use as a

 filling for my empanadas now we're going to make the outer sheet just the way we

 make our samosa sheet for this empanadas we're going to use some other

 mixture here I've got eggs in this I'm going to add vinegar, salt and some water

 I'm going to use this to make the dough, for the dough take all-purpose flour

 that should be enough in this you can add some baking powder only if you're

 going to bake them but you know for frying you don't need to I added pinch

 add butter you know just mix this with this flour till all this flour becomes a

 now pour this mixture of vinegar and egg you know I added some water

 it is not required if you want you can add little bit make this into a nice

 firm dough just the way we make our pasta dough now you know make this into a

 sheet and if you're baking them you got to make it little bit thicker but if

 you're frying they can be little bit thinner I do not want to make them

 really big the way lot of people do I just want them to be bite-size so I'm

 after you cut them just apply the egg wash on the edges because we want them

 to be sealed it is not necessary you can just apply a little bit of water also

 and they will easily seal now take some of this meat mixture put it in the

 center like this very carefully just stuff the mixture inside and the edges

 just pick it up and just do it like this after that you can nicely decorate it

 I've already cut them with a cutter with nice edges but you can also make it

 ok this will actually make it seal better also so here they're all ready

 look at this shape you know in India we make so many sweets and snacks in this

 shape they call it gujiyas we call it some other name but easy to make isn't

 it in this and then put it in the oil to fry we will cook them for around 8 to 10

 minutes now after cooking for around 10 minutes at 170 degree centigrade the

 same temperature we fry our samosas they're all nice ready you know look at

 them look at them and look at this awesome stuffing in this empinadas look

 at it the dough looks slightly thicker if you want you can make them slightly

 Dear friends I hope you enjoyed to learn how to make this simple empinadas to

 suit our taste but do not forget vahrehvah is all about inspiring others to cook so

 please post your recipes and cooking tips so others can benefit from your

 We've been working on a little rust problem here on the sunroof on this

 show people the problem here and how we're going to temporarily fix it.

 real repair would require removing the sunroof panel and removing this rear

 seal because obviously moisture has gotten down in the groove that holds the

 so we're going to do a temporary repair to keep the rust from getting any worse.

 And then this winter the sunroof panel is going to come off, this rubber seal is

 going to come out, and then the whole area is going to be cleaned up and coated

If this were neglected right in here you can see, watch this, that doesn't

 look too bad, but underneath that paint you can see quite a bit of rust.

 scrape the paint off you see just how big that one small area is.

 And if that is left unattended, moisture gets underneath the paint and that

 I've already been doing this, but I'm getting down in the groove here and

 cleaning out the rust as best I can with this small screwdriver.

 didn't do anything about it, let me tell you, you would have rust holes in the

 back edge of this sunroof panel and almost impossible to repair.

 going to keep digging here, keep scraping, and then I'll come back and show you how

 we're going to just apply the Miracle Paint down into the groove and on the

 coming winter when we can actually remove the rough and do a permanent

Okay, we spent quite a bit of time scraping that out and of course we

 scraped the rust, the paint loose, flaky paint, till we got right up to the edge

 then I'm going to come in with a little bit of ivory paint and just touch over

 going to spend quite a bit of time here just letting this run in to that groove

 to the edge of the rust and I will fill that pit with a very thick coat of

 going to be well worth it because when I get done with this we'll be able

 you may be thinking well Kent you're gonna have a hard time getting getting

 propane torch and get the metal hot it'll usually break the bond of the

 dealing with some of these minor surface rust problems on your own car.

 Once again I I can only warn you do not neglect to do something about the rust.

 really deep in the groove and force the Miracle Paint right out of the tip of

 sure that we get a lot of Miracle Paint down where we really need it.

 need some of these curved tip syringes they're really handy for applying

 Hello everyone, today I'm going to be teaching you Smells Like Teen Spirit by Nirvana on

 If you do like this piano lesson, please subscribe to my videos because I make a brand new piano

 Also, if you could check out my website at derrickpianolessons.tk, that would help me

 And if you could please write in comments on this video, that would also help me out.

 And this is not only the intro, it's also the chorus, and it plays in the background

 So you're going to start off on an F. Then a C. And then an F. So F, C, F. Then you're

 Then for the last chord, you're going to play a C sharp, a G sharp, and a C sharp.

 And that is the intro, chorus, and the background to the solo part of the song.

 Okay so when you're playing the verse and the pre-chorus to the song, there's actually

 So the bass part is actually a really simple bass riff, and it's played throughout the

 And you're going to repeat that for the verse and the pre-chorus.

 And you're going to play that at the same time as you're playing the bass part.

 Okay then in the pre-chorus, the only thing that changes is the guitar part.

 So you're going to keep on playing the same bass part, but the guitar part is going to

 And it's going to keep on going like that until the chorus kicks in.

 Okay so for the last part, it's going to be right after the chorus.

 So for the whole chorus you're going to play that main riff, but right at the end of it

 So you're going to still be playing the same chords that the main riff played, except they're

 Good afternoon, this is Jeff and Wilma here at Budram and the staff's now going to make Asian style garlic pickles

 We've got three and a half kilos at about what just over three dollars a kilo

 I planted another 45 in the garden plus I planted a whole heap to

 Somebody I did read how that freezing them does all of the flavor

 But we haven't noticed that and I found I always wondered how you'd how garlic would go in the freezer

 And I found that it actually peels a lot easier once it's been frozen or while it's frozen

 You know, if you see one at the supermarket, that's just an unbelievable bargain

A woman went and bought them and people were just sort of commenting in the aisle, you know

 Yeah, that's just the way it is some people just you know the bargain stares them in the face and they're just not interested

I made some the other day and we had a taste of it this morning.

 You can see they've soaken up some of the liquid and got that beautiful color

 Whereas the ones in the saucepan are still quite have lot quite light in color.

 Today we're going to be making a cocktail called the Pumpkin King.

 But before we get to the cocktail, we need to make one of the ingredients, and that is

 Now today we're going to be using a pumpkin beer, a nice spiced pumpkin beer.

 I'm using Southern Tier Pump King, hence the name of the cocktail.

 We're going to be putting this into a pot and making, for all intents and purposes,

 So it's just like you're making simple syrup, but with more flavors added.

 So again, on a nice hot pot, beer, and I'm pouring this from a height, because I want

 And we're going to add cinnamon stick to help up that pumpkin spice, some allspice,

 and we're going to stir that around for quite a bit on some heat to integrate all of that

 And you're going to find that as you do this, being a carbonated product and beer, you're

 We're going to separate some of the yeast and carbonation that's present in the beer

 So I'm going to stir this for quite a bit here and have it on high heat.

 Do not step away from your pot, because what's going to happen is this beer, this syrup we're

 You're not going to see it doing much, and all of a sudden, a ton of foam.

 So I'm going to keep stirring this, integrate all that sugar, try to get all that carbonation

 And I'm going to do this for probably around five minutes or so.

 And you're going to see after that time, it's going to start expanding and expanding, just

 as if you were working with a lot of sugar, making caramel and other such things.

 So once it starts expanding, all you have to do is turn off your heat and set it aside,

 And what you're going to want to do now is skim off all of this head, this sticky head

 You want to get some of those solids with it as well, until you're left with mostly

 We're going to take a bottle, put a funnel in it to make our life a little bit easier.

 And we're going to filter out any solids and hopefully some more of the foam.

 In this case, we're going to add cognac, which I think goes quite nicely with the pumpkin.

 And we now have a pumpkin liqueur that is ready for our drink, the Pumpkin King Cocktail.

 So now that we've finished making the beer liqueur, we can go ahead and make our cocktail,

 One and a half ounces of a wonderful blended scotch whiskey, in this case, Pig's Nose.

 Half ounce of that pumpkin liqueur that you just finished making.

 Half ounce of lime juice and a dash of Bitter Truth aromatic bitters.

 We've added lovely scotch, good flavors there, a lighter scotch, that pumpkin spice, we've

 had allspice and cinnamon, you know, the clove and nutmeg notes from the Bitter Truth.

 Do it as a wheel because I really don't want people to put lime in there.

 And we're going to teach you how to impress your friends with not even, not very hard

 tricks but just like random, random tricks just like fake kickflip and fake ollie and

 And so first this is a fake ollie and first what you do is you get a normal tech deck,

 And now what you do is you have to, when you try to ollie you have to put your thumb under

 And keep in mind this is the cheat way to ollie and if you want no skill at all, listen

 If you have no skill at this but you still want to be awesome and impress your friends

 You can either go like this, you can either go like this and then go like that and then

 You can carry it with your thumb or you can keep your thumb, keep your thumb under it

 But also what I like to do is you just get your three fingers and you slide your third

 finger under the board and you just can lift up and do whatever you want with it.

 What I would do is I would move it back and forth a few times because that's what you

 Okay, so now we're going to teach you how to do a kickflip and now what you do is, you

 So now what you do is, usually to a real kickflip you're going to, this is like a real kickflip

 Okay, so now for the fake kickflip what you have to do is you have to put your thumb under

 Okay, and then once you do that you have to flick it with your thumb so it spins around.

 And sometimes if you're awesome like me you can do like the 20 million which will go off

 Once you actually know how to do a kickflip you can do a heel flip by doing the same thing

 At least two days before you do the fake heel flip because you need practice.

 Okay, so what you do is you just flick that way with whatever finger and the board will

 Okay, so now we're going to teach you how to do a simple trick called, no not a simple

 So what you're going to do is you're going to put your finger right, right, you know

 You slide your thumb up to about right there where the wheels are.

 Flip it just like, flip it so it's just, just flip it kind of randomly.

 And keep in mind if you pound it in the middle your board might snap in half, but hopefully not.

 I'll now place the four batteries in the battery box in the order shown.

 Be sure that the battery is installed with the positive terminals facing each other.

 Now I'm going to secure the batteries to the battery box using the included battery

 When attaching the battery cables to the PMM, it is not critical which negative goes

 to which terminal, but always remember to wire the auxiliary battery bank positive to

 the aux terminal and the truck start battery positive to the start terminal.

 Be sure to route the battery cables following a very similar route as the factory cables

 It's your lovely girl Tinu and thank you guys again for staying tuned.

 Today I'm going to be doing this kind of teal, blue, smoky eye with a pop of glitter.

 First thing I'm going to do is go with this black base and I'm going to apply that on

 the angled brush and we're going to line our eyes like we're doing a cat wing and bring

 I'm applying that to half of my lid making sure I blend it in the crease.

 We're going to apply that right next to the first color and make sure we blend the lines

 Now I'm going with this kind of dark black shade with hints of plum.

 I'm applying that to the outer V and I'm also making sure I bring that in the crease.

 And then when you do that you just want to make sure you blend out the harsh edges.

 This is going to be applied in the crease to blend out that black shade and give some

 Since I'm going back with that plummy black shade again I'm trying to intensify the colors

 And then I'm going back with the same colors we have on our lid to kind of make the colors

 Now I'm just going to blend that out and make sure there are no harsh edges.

 Then I'm going with this concealer that is similar to my skin tone.

 I'm going to go into my inner corners and also my under eye area and blend it out with

 For my brow bone highlight I'm going with a matte shade that is similar to my skin tone

 Then I'm applying that black base all over the lower lash line basically.

 Then I'm going to go with the same colors we have on our lid starting with the darker

 Then for the inner corners I'm going with this pigment that I got from ebay.

 Then I'm going to be applying coats of mascara to my top lashes.

 Now for the real fun part I'm going with this kind of teal blue glitter and applying that

 Next I will be applying a couple of falsies and these are the red cherry lashes in number

 I am just going to link that video right on top of this video as you guys can see on the

 Now I'm just applying a blush that's kind of neutral on my cheeks.

 And then I'm applying this brown lip liner and I'm going to make sure I fill out the

 If you enjoy this look please don't forget to give this video a thumbs up and don't forget

 Okie dokie, so I am doing this video for Miss Susan Taming the Beast I think.

 going to get your safety pin and kind of put it like, let's see babe hold this, like

I'm gonna take one leg at a time and I'm gonna put it right here on

 We don't want to cut and have that curve and see how you're gonna have a slack.

 could get the safety pin and safety pin it here and then do an inch and a half.

 You're gonna take this, like I said you can do an inch and a half or you can

 been sewn, this inside seam of your pants and you're gonna match it up.

When you go to pin it, this you got to remember is smaller than this.

 want it and then after I pin it I'm gonna show you what it's gonna look like.

Okay so this is what it's gonna look like and so when you put it

 down on the sewing machine, you're gonna stretch it out and you're gonna sew

Now on the other pants that I'm going to cut, it's identical to what

It's up to you and when you go to cut, now this pair of pants, let me show

 back on, you're just gonna match this seam and this seam to it.

 you're not hassling with having to put a hem because this kind of material, when

 helps anyone when they want to fix their workout pants or any pants.

 better explain why I put a picture on there of me looking all sad.

 tomorrow but that's why I have that sad face because no more workout for one

 going to put about three stitches in me so I can't see him saying no.

 Today I'm going to show you a really easy technique how to get really pretty nails and you don't really have to do a lot with them.

 So the acrylic products I'm going to be using today is Absolute.

 For the nail bed I am using Neutral Pink and it's an opaque colour and this is by CND.

 But instead of just gluing these tips on and putting clear acrylic over them, I am going to use the black to blend the pattern into the nail.

 And then at this point you would go ahead and prep your nail bed.

 And then what we're going to do is just put a thin layer of nail bed all over the nail plate.

 The reason I put the nail bed on is so with using black it's a lot easier to file black off the nail plate when you've got a colour underneath.

 So next what we're going to do is get the black, cover the whole nail plate and bring the acrylic down in a fading effect.

 And we're going to get a hollow circle and a normal circle and add these onto the nails.

 The next thing we do now is just encapsulate the whole nail using the clear acrylic.

 Now the nails are all filed and buffed I'm just going to get a striping brush and some acrylic paint and do some lines and dots on the nails.

 Here is an older sewing machine that I no longer use that I partially took apart so

 So what I had done is I cut this band strip, I don't know, it's about an inch and a half,

 and I just created a circle with Gorilla Tape so that it fit that pretty snugly.

 And this ridge is here, on here, so you want to go and cover all the way through and snug

 You're not putting your jeans up against it so hard that it would cause it to slip when

 Okay, so here's the pair of jeans that I hemmed and I will try to create some of the distress

 So you want to go slowly because you can always increase the amount of fabric that you're

 You want to be careful over four layer thicks of fabric because it's very hard, it will

 create a ridge and pretty easy to actually blow a hole through that.

 So most of the jeans are distressed along here and along this ridge line and some have

 these vertical lines as well, but we're just going to do the horizontal lines.

 So first, to do the distress line above the stitching, I'm going to fold that over and

 Also sometimes for designer jeans, actually the back bottom of the hem is really distressed.

 It's supposed to look like you've been stepping on your jeans quite a bit.

 So let me just finish a little bit more of that and this is distressed because the person

 So I would say if you just pinch pleat like this and we'll see what that does.

 You don't want to get that fabric too much because we don't want to actually break the

 I guess you'd have to just kind of pinch it by hand just for a more natural, irregular

 Like I said, you start off a little bit and just keep adding however much you want.

 So if you want to actually blow through some holes, we can try it here.

 So you just kind of pick at that and every time you wash it, it will kind of fray a little

 And then you could do the same thing if you wanted to do some holes or distress marks

 This is part of the other Instructable for Hemming Jeans and then I will show also how

 Hey guys, today we wanted to share with you how we wrap a ponytail to cover up the rubber

 I know that lots of people wrap it with hair and secure it with a bobby pin as well as

 I guess it can be done with a topsy tail, but for years we didn't have a topsy tail

 Okay, so to begin with you obviously have a ponytail and you're going to pull out a

 section of hair underneath and you can do this as thick or as thin as you want.

 You can also braid this, we do that as well and secure it the same way.

 But you're going to want to make it probably bent down or spray it with hairspray to give

 Okay, so you're going to want to comb it a little bit and then you're going to wrap

 Okay, and you can wrap it a couple times and then you can wrap further down the shaft of

 your ponytail if you want to give your ponytail a little bit of lift, but we're not going

 You can spray a little bit more to give it a smoother finish, but then our trick comes

 So you're going to hold the hair that you've wrapped around to the side and then, I'm going

 I take my clear rubber band and put it kind of at the base of where you've wrapped the

 hair and then I grab that hair that I've wrapped as well as the ponytail.

 You're going to pull that through and kind of try to keep that up against that hair that's

 Okay, so you can still kind of see that right here, but then if you cinch it up, then you

 But then you've got your ponytail wrapped, and see that rubber band is hidden up in there,

 That's the way that we wrap our ponytails when we don't have a bow or a flower or something

 to match what they're wearing, or obviously if you're getting too old for that, then wrap

 Hey guys, in this video I'm going to show you how to go from these high-waisted old

 Levi's to these cute high-waisted shorts that are perfect for the summer.

 So the first thing that you're going to want to do is you're going to want to find out

 Now I'm actually measuring longer than where I want my shorts to be just because I don't

 want to cut them too short and have not enough fabric to work with.

 So I'm just going to find out where I want them and I'm going to mark them with a pencil

 Now that I've marked where I'm going to cut, I'm going to go ahead and mark the other side

 Then I'm going to go ahead and just cut in a downward angle that just goes with the shape

 And now that I've cut that side, I'm going to go ahead and fold the jeans in half and

 I'm going to do the same thing on the other side using the side that I already cut as

 And I'm going to go ahead and use the back side of the jeans as my guide just to make

 And remember, I'm going to cut them shorter but I wanted to leave a little bit of extra

 And now you're just going to want to figure out how much shorter you want them just by

 I've decided that I want mine probably about halfway more in the pant leg.

 So I'm going to go ahead, figure out where I want them, measure them.

 I'm not really sure where I got this, I just found it in my house.

 But I'm going to measure from the seams that are on the inside of each side.

 But I'm just going to go ahead and use this and measure down two inches.

 Just because I figured that that's where I wanted my shorts to end.

 So I'm going to go ahead, measure down two inches and just mark it with a pencil again.

 And I'm also marking both sides of the pant leg just so it's easier to remember to cut.

 And now I'm just going to smooth out the pant leg and taking a, something with a flat hard

 I'm going to go ahead and make a straight line across the pants.

 And I'm going to go ahead and using the pencil again, draw a line straight across.

 And I actually decided that I wanted to move the outer edge down.

 So I'm going to go ahead and redraw it and show you what that looked like.

 And I wanted to do that just because I don't want to cut it too short and have my shorts

 Because like I said again, you can't really go back and add any more jean.

 So now I measured it out on both sides and I'm going to go ahead and cut it.

 And what I'm going to do is actually just cut the front and not the back because I'm

 going to measure the back a little bit differently than I did the front.

 So I'm going to go ahead and just cut the front and I'll show you what that looks like.

 So here is what it looks like after I went ahead and cut both sides on the front.

 And now to measure the back, I'm going to measure up or line up where the cut is from

 the front and I'm going to find out where I want it in the back.

 And to do this, I actually tried them back on and just folded up where I wanted to make

 And then once you measure it and where you want it to be, you're going to want to measure

 with the ruler where to make the cut and then you're going to fold down the flap and measure

 again and you're going to do it on both sides just so you can make it as accurate as possible.

 And I forgot to mention, you're going to want to draw the line again using the book with

 So after I cut the back of the shorts, this is how they turned out.

 And I really like this length a lot, but if I want to go a little shorter or if you wanted

 to go shorter, you could just roll them up or cut them some more.

 Stay tuned for the next video which is going to show you how to put holes in them and stud

 Hey guys, in this makeup tutorial I'll be doing a more Sala inspired Valentine's look.

 It's also a collaboration with another beauty guru from YouTube.

 I will include her info down below so you can subscribe to her.

 She did an outfit for Valentine's and I'm doing the makeup for Valentine's.

 Possible coupon code and giveaway are down below if you're interested in that.

 I'll be using mostly bare minerals eyeshadows with the exception of one that I'm using from

 By the way, these are Jamberry nail wraps with the exception of these two colors.

 One of my friends gave me some to try and I'm absolutely obsessed.

 By the way, I did possibly use discontinued shades if you cannot find that duo from Bare

 And for the matte shade on the lid you can use something like Brulee or even Blanc Type.

 Taking that lightest shade I just applied to my eyelid, the color that's called Surreal,

 For the lower lash line I'm taking Urban Decay Whiskey 24-7 eye pencil.

 To set the lower lash line, you could definitely leave it as is, I'm taking Milani Beya Rouge

 And using that same brush used earlier for the crease, the Sedona Lace EB15.

 Now you can totally skip the glitter, but I'm going to glitz it up.

 I'm taking my Lit Cosmetics Clearly Liquid Glitter Base to apply that.

 I'm using this brush from Colors Online, just the tip of it, to apply this glitter.

 I'm going to go ahead and clean up with my Maybelline Master Conceal Camouflage and Concealer

 If you want to click on where I get all my Motives products, just check the info box.

 Quickly going to blend out my concealer before you guys freak out.

 I'm just taking a little bit of my Dior Dior Skin Nude in number 41.

 For highlighter, I'm taking the Ches Ches Le May Special Reserve Highlight Powder.

 For Maureen's Valentine's Day outfit, be sure to check the info box.

 I'll also include an annotation at the end so you can click and go directly to her video.

 If you guys are interested in info on the hair, on the Marsala nails, be sure to check the info box.

 Right then, I'm going to show you how to make a small amount of charcoal in a fire.

 You want a bit smaller tin and you want to cut and chop, I'm using beets here, cut and

 Right, you want to place that one inside, upside down in that one, so it's like that.

 Right, place this inside your fire and stoke your fire up around it.

 And there's one in there that's already cooking and there's one in there that's already been

 Right, I'm going to put this one in, I'll take the one I did earlier.

 Now when your wood starts cooking it gives off gases and those gases ignite and that's

 Now when your gases have gone that means your charcoal is cooked.

 When you take it out, put it upside down on the floor to stop any air rushing in.

 When it's cooled down, which, here's another one I did earlier, you can take the lid off

 and there you have your charcoal all ready for grinding up and doing what you like with.

 But that is a bit of quality charcoal ready for grinding up, doing whatever you want to

 So here we have fireweed and I'm just going to pick off some blossoms.

 And you're going to have to pick a bunch of them to basically make some jelly.

 And we are taking apart all the blossoms and putting them in this bowl right here.

 And so we're going to sort through our fireweed and make fireweed jelly.

 So after picking two grocery bags full of fireweed tops, this is about how much you'll

 Okay I took all the fireweed blossoms and I put them in a hot pot of water and I cooked

 it up and the color out of the flowers kind of just washes out.

 And then I'm going to strain all of this into what I have as a pitcher.

 I have some cheesecloth and then I have a mesh metal strainer there.

 The reason for this is to get rid of all the bugs that are living in the flowers so that

 I have three and a half cups of white sugar, granulated white sugar.

 The lemon juice is going to change the color of the fireweed tea and bring it back to a

 And I'm just going to stir it and you can see the color start to come back.

 And then we're going to put it on the stove and bring it to a rolling boil.

 Once it's boiling you're going to take your package of liquid sirtopectin.

 And it needs to be this brand because the other brands don't work.

 I mean I guess they work for some people but for some reason up here in Nome, Alaska this

 Okay so after it's been boiled, put it onto your table and then you're going to take your

 And pour them into the jars and make sure you leave some space at the top like about

 Some people like to put half an inch but a quarter of an inch is good enough.

 So after you fill up your jar you're going to need to take a wet paper towel and clean

 Make sure you clean it so that you don't have any sticky jelly around the rims.

 And this is going to create a vacuum seal and also the hot liquid is going to kill off

 It's going to kill off everything because the liquid is really hot.

 And once it's done for five minutes you're going to flip it right side up, let it cool

 It's just a picture of fireweed blossom and then I just put some lettering and that's

 But when you buy the jars they'll already have a sticky label that you can put on there

 or you can just use the ones that come in the box or you can just make your own labels.

 Putting in my jelly onto the bread and you can see that it turns out to be this fuchsia

 Hey guys, today I'm doing a trick tip video on how to do the Peter Pan.

 Well, you might want to know how to do crossovers first, because it's a sort of similar thing,

 you want to have your back foot on the tail, but not so far off that it will either slip off or bring the board up.

 And then your front foot, you want to have it sort of straight on the direction of the board,

 So when you're going into it, then bring it out, and then you have to balance on one foot,

 so practice balancing on one foot, and then you need to switch over to the other,

 So the crossovers, maybe try doing them first, because I didn't find them that hard to learn,

 while the Peter Pan will take at least double, so crossovers just go like that,

 So a few encounters you may have that you won't be able to do is that when you're going like that,

 you either won't be able to balance and fall, or when you're crossing over like that, you'll fall forward onto your front foot.

 But if you just keep practicing, then yeah, you'll be able to do it.

 Here is the second recipe in the My Buttered Life Personal Care Edition.

 This is a product that I've sold in the Made On store for quite a while now.

 If you're looking for something to replace your hairspray, this probably isn't what you're

 This is something that if you have very coarse, dry, flyaway hair, if you have a lot of curls,

 if you have frizzy hair, I'm trying to think of all the descriptions of who would want

 If that's you, then you're going to really, really appreciate this.

 If you are advanced in years and as your body ages and your hair ages, it becomes a little

 bit more difficult to tame, this would be another product for that too.

 This is another one where it's just a modification of how many of each ingredient that you put

 It's just the same base of beeswax, shea butter, and coconut oil.

 If you don't want any kind of scent at all, then don't add the essential oil at the end.

 That one I need to measure in, the other ones were pre-measured already.

 We're going to take that to the double boiler and melt that down.

 Then we'll come back, add the essential oil, and then pour it in our container.

 Our mixture is completely melted, and we are ready to wrap this up.

 The three ingredients are in there, and we're just going to add our essential oil, which

 It doesn't hurt to let it cool slightly before adding your essential oil.

 In fact, that again has a high note of essential oil, which means that it just stays for a

 Whatever essential oil you choose, you can add if you want it, or you can leave it out

 If you use an unrefined shea butter, that has a pretty strong, smoky, natural scent

 That would be the case where if you were using an unrefined shea butter that you might prefer

 That goes with all the recipes, by the way, not just the shea butter.

 Make sure you have some paper towels on hand to clean up your container afterwards so that

 I have a feeling that would only fill up half of that final container, so I'm just

 It may have filled up one more of those little containers, but it doesn't look nice if it's

 I use the shea butter on my kids and my husband because it adds some style to their hair,

 If I mess up on a haircut and they've got the little hair sticking up in the back, this

 I have some customers that just cannot live without this in their hair.

 I hope you are one of those people and you really benefit from this.

 If not, you find someone in your life who wants a natural product and needs something

 You can kind of tell sometimes by looking at someone's hair if this is the right product

 Some of that naturally peppermint patty type hair would really benefit from hair butter

 So the first video that you're going to be watching right now is actually going to be

 They're just so cool and you can do every different type of color.

 That's another way that you can tone down a black smokey eye if you're scared of doing

 one and you may feel like you may look like a raccoon or you got punched in the face.

 So what you can do is you can take your brush and tap a little in the black and a little

 So it kind of darkens the brown but lessens the black if that makes any sense.

 The lighting kept changing because the sun is rising so it kept messing with my light

 But I hope you guys enjoyed the video and I'll see you next time.

 I'm going to start off by moisturizing my face and I'm using the Pond's moisturizer.

 Then I'm going to go and use my Smashbox Photo Finish Foundation Primer.

 Then I'm going to use my Dream Matte Mousse in the color Dark Caramel with my Sigma Kabuki

 Then I'm going to use my Bare Minerals in the color, I think it's Dark.

 And I like to use this because it warms my face back up because the Maybelline covers

 my scars but it doesn't match my skin perfectly until the winter time kicks in.

 Now I'm going to use my NYX Photogenic Concealer, HD Photogenic Concealer.

 Now we're going to start on the eyes using the NARS Eyeshadow Primer.

 Then I'm going to go in my Inglot Palette and I'm going to use the two matte colors

 And you see I'm going back and forth to basically have a dark color but I don't want it to be

 So that's why I kind of toned it down with a little bit of that brown.

 You don't want to go too high because that's where you start looking like a raccoon.

 So now I'm going to take these two colors from my Lorac Unzip Palette and I'm just going

 Now I'm going to take my Anastasia Brow Powder in the color Ebony.

 And I'm just going to speed this up really quickly because it takes so long to do this.

 But I'm getting a whole lot better because I don't have to pull my eye anymore.

 And now I'm going to use my Urban Decay 24-7 Glide-On Pencil in Perversion.

 Then I'm going to take my little tiny Real Tech Sneaks brush and I am going to smudge

 Then I'm going to take my L'Oreal Volumis Carbon Black Mascara.

 This is one of my favorites and I'm just going to coat on my mascara on my eyelashes.

 Now I'm going to take MAC's Mineralize Skin Finish in the color Comfort for highlight.

 Now I'm going to take Candy Toffee's lipstick and that is by Milani.

 And then I like to just pat it on there so it doesn't put too much on there.

 Check out the link below if you want to see this tutorial on a milkmaid braid.

 Today I will show you how to make traditional Korean chicken soup samgyetang.

 In Korea, people love to eat this chicken soup when summer starts.

 Summer is the hot season, so why do Koreans like to eat hot soup in the hot weather?

 The belief is that you can get very tired and weak because of the hot weather, so you

 In that point, this chicken soup has many good ingredients that can give you energy

 and make you healthy such as chicken, ginseng, garlic, dates, and so on.

 Even though it is most popular during the summer in Korea, Koreans will enjoy this soup

 anytime, so I highly recommend that you try this healthy and tasty chicken soup someday.

 Prepare one cornish hen, remove all the organs, and clean it well.

 Prepare 10 garlic cloves, 1 piece of ginseng, 3 chestnuts, and 6 dates.

 If the ginseng or chestnuts are dried, soak them in water overnight before you use them

 You might have difficulty to find some of the ingredients, but you need at least the

 Place the chicken in a medium-sized pan and pour 5 cups of water in the pan.

 While it's cooking, turn the side of the chicken once or twice so both sides of the chicken will be cooked evenly.

 After 30 minutes, reduce the temperature to medium and then cook for 1 more hour.

 While serving, sprinkle some finely chopped green onions on top.

 When you eat, break the chicken and take out everything inside of the chicken

 We're here with another cooking, tropical cooking recipe for you guys.

 Yeah, our friend Scott invites us up when he does these classes.

 Today you guys are going to learn how to make a tropical pineapple pico de gallo.

 Hey guys, I'm Scott Allen and that means you're back in the rainforest with us here in Costa

 You may think here in Costa Rica we do it a little bit differently.

 For me it's truly tropical cooking because we're going to use some fresh fruit today.

 You can see a big pineapple here along with all the other ingredients that we're going

 Now, in terms of amounts, onion and tomato are going to be your two most used ingredients

 So if you use two cups of chopped tomato, you're going to use almost two cups of chopped

 And we're going to core that a little bit just right on the top.

 Again, we're going to use our technique, keeping our fingers in so we don't cut anything other

 This is very slippery so when you're using your knife you want to be able to cut the

 If you like spicy pico de gallo, or you like spicy stuff, the great jalapeno.

 You and your army back here have invited us here to learn the art of your home cooked

 We've got all of our ingredients, our chopped ingredients inside.

 We've got our tomatoes, our onion, our pineapple, and our red bell pepper.

 You guys can actually get salsa des ano when you come here on your next trip to Costa Rica

 They make it in a nice plastic bottle and it's easy to take with you.

 The only thing we need to do, and I like to do it kind of at the last minute before I

 I like to put a little bit of salt on this and I like to put a little bit of pepper

 And I like to do it kind of at the last minute before I serve it is with our fresh cilantro.

 And of course it's green and beautiful so it's going to give a great, great color to

 What makes this tropical cooking of course is that we're in Costa Rica and I've added

 It's not something that you would so typically find here in Costa Rica in your pico de gallo.

 And then we're going to add our pico de gallo with fresh pineapple guys.

 If you really want to bump this up even another way, it's like a fruity pico de gallo.

 So thanks for coming with us today on this little pico de gallo trip.

 Hey guys, in this video I'm going to show you how to put a patch on your helmet.

 So first thing we're going to do is we're going to use this reversed IR flag.

 So what you're going to do is you're going to hold the patch in one hand.

 So you're going to down here, kind of, oop, put the patch on there.

 Moving back, you know, maybe you want to put your name tape on there.

 Perfect for your Special Forces impression, because they love patches.

 So this is a cute little tutorial for these really cute um what are they?

 Okay so you want to put on base coat and then you want to do a little triangle with tape.

 Okay so now that you have your little triangle you want to take a dotting tool.

 And then you want to put a little dot at the top of your triangle.

 Okay so now you're going to take a small paintbrush and dip it in a bright purple if you have

 If you don't have a bright purple you can just use any bright color because you know

 Okay so now we're going to take our middle finger and I'm going to use green for this.

 You might want to turn your hand so you can like look at it because I don't want to make

 If you can't do this on your own you can ask somebody for help.

 I hope you try this out and if you do um just you know like post a video response.

 Leave a comment that you did it and you know have a great New Years.

 This is a demonstration of painted warp and weft for beginning fiber students.

 And this is an example of a completed weaving, plain weave with a painted warp and weft.

 And so what we're going to do is apply fiber reactive dyes to the fiber prior to the weaving.

 This is how the fiber will look after it's painted, rinsed, and dried.

 So I've asked each student to dye colors that represent them, their personality, colors

 The first step, of course, is to wind the warp and weft, which Katie has done.

 And this is how the warp will look after it's measured on the warping board.

 It's been soaking in a solution of water and synthrapol, which is a soap that we use

 This removes all the, if there's any sizing in the cloth, anything that would inhibit

 So the warp and the weft have been soaking in this cleaning solution for about 15 minutes.

 I'm going to bring, I'll just lay that there and do the other one.

 The next thing you do is you have your cloth on a table prepared, protected with plastic,

 and you unchain the warp and spread it out on your prepared surface.

 And then you unchain your weft, because today we're going to be painting the warp and the weft.

 The longer part are the fibers that get dressed on the loom for weaving.

 And we have a very simple way of determining whether or not we have the color that we want in the cup.

 And we put just a dot of the dye on the paper towel, and then we decide.

 Now, if you want to raise the value of the color, you would add more dye paint medium.

 So to get a darker turquoise then, what you would do is either put more dye in the cup,

 So the only difference in that solution is that there's less dye.

 So it's okay if you want to paint all the way to the end, but maybe you want to practice on that end.

 I somehow have yellow and green on my gloves, so I need to clean that up.

 So even though you may start with only four colors, as you paint and the colors come together,

 and especially after you weave them, new colors will be created.

 Every now and then you want to check and see if it's gone to the other side.

 It's not going all the way through, so you can either work it down in more,

 Lucy Kelly, the food editor of Weight Watchers, you're back again for another lovely, interesting,

 So you can still go and get Chinese takeaway or take the family to a Chinese restaurant,

 And we're going to make one of everyone's favorites, which is sweet and sour chicken.

 It's really important when you do a stir fry is to get all your ingredients ready.

 So you get all your veggies, do all your chopping, get all your sauces mixed up together,

 So Josie, if you want to cut those onions, the red onions, into little thin wedges.

 And the chili, I like to remove the seeds, especially if you're feeding the kids because

 Now you can either do some little thin slices of ginger, but I like to grate my ginger because

 And I've got my favorite little gadget here, which is a ginger grater, specifically for

 So really you just give it a little tap and there you have perfect grated ginger.

 So what I'm going to do is do a little sauce mixture for the sweet and sour.

 It's important to put the corn flour in first because it'll go a bit lumpy if you don't.

 And we're going to do two tablespoons of salt-reduced soy sauce.

 Sometimes you go, oh, I'm going to have Chinese on a Friday night or something, treat yourself.

 But I mean, you can make it at home and it's almost like you're making a store.

 Because all these flavours, I can see pineapple here and you've got ketchup.

 Like not classical, but like we as Australians love this combination of that really sweet

 You put a little bit of salt onto your garlic and then you use the side of your knife.

 So you hold the knife like this and you just give it a bit of a crush.

 Yeah, and if you haven't got a garlic crusher, you can use a knife.

 We're going to cook your meat for about 20 minutes, and then we're going to start adding

 Alright, so you use a knife, and you just give it a bit of a crush.

 Yeah, and if you haven't got a garlic crusher, it's a great way to improvise.

 In regards to this dish, there's still lots of vegetables involved, and that's why I think

 Load up more on the veggies, and less on the things that are the naughty, you know, that

 Yeah, but it's also, you know, Weight Watchers is very much about lots of flavour with spices

 and herbs, and so that you don't compromise on flavour at all with our recipes.

 No, because a lot of the flavourings that you add to food, like garlic and chilli and

 So, when I was doing the recipe for this, I thought I'd show you a clip of me.

 I was in a restaurant, and I was cooking a salad, and I was eating it with a few vegetables.

 You can also use olive, but I always think it's a bit of a waste to put olive in a stir-fry.

 Well, and also, you want that high heat, and that's got a high smoking point, so as soon

 So, in goes your chicken, and you throw your ginger and your garlic and your chilli all

 And it gets tossed around just for a few minutes until the vegetables are cooked through.

 The sugar snap peas are just nice and crunchy and bright green.

 Well, it's up to you, but usually half a cup to a cup of cooked rice.

 Now you know if you're going to have something else with this meal

 Himalayan pink salt and the only reason I have it is because it was a good deal

 you know if you get there at the right time you get a good deal.

 But if you have a little meat thermometer I would check it that way.

 And I want to thank you for coming back into my kitchen and spending part of

Today we're going to install a 12 foot round above ground swimming

We've got all the stuff laid out here, starting with our pool wall.

Also included in our box was a pack of hardware, all the screws and nuts

We've got these resin joints and seat covers, joints and brackets,

 all good quality thermoplastic that's not going to rust on you.

 on installing our top seats and our vertical rails and the covers for the 6 inch frame

Here we have some safety information included, along with some stickers.

 verticals, or the uprights, that go from floor to the top rail.

 which we'll start with, arranging them in a circle and it will hold our wall.

 opted for the Gorilla floor padding that's going to go in between the ground and the

Also included, of course, is a 12 foot round blue overlap pool liner.

 the bottom brackets, joining all the rails together with the point of the triangle towards

If your soil is soft, underneath each of the uprights it's common to put a

 shop to measure the level from block to block or upright to upright.

We've cut the box on the bottom, as recommended, to make it easier

 Next, after we got the wall together, we put in the Gorilla Pad floor padding underneath

 coping strips to lock the overlap liner right to the top of the pool wall.

After our upright installation, next we're going to screw on the top rails.

 we're putting on the top seat and the bracket together with one simple screw and one screw

 I'm going to let you guys in on one of my favorite little secrets of this really cool

 The tin foil that I am using is from the beauty supply store, but you could really cut and

 Taking about a 4 inch section of your hair, fold a piece of foil in half and place your

 Slide the foil all the way down the hair and make sure you get the ends of your hair

 Now take your curling iron and roll the foiled section up towards the base.

 I'm using a 3 4 inch iron on medium heat, but you can really use any medium to large

 Release the iron when you can feel the heat coming through the foil and then secure it

 And then take another section of your hair, fold a piece of foil in half and slide it

 Take your iron and roll it up towards the base and then again secure it with a clip.

 You really don't need to focus too much on making sure that the hair is parted perfectly

 Obviously the more hair that you put in the foil, the larger and looser the curl will

 Now continue working all the way around your head until all your hair is in the foil and

 I'm sure a lot of you guys are wondering, why don't you just curl your hair and pin

 Well I discovered that by using the foil it really helps to heat up the hair as well as

 Which allows you to create just a really soft, shiny, loose wave that normally on most people

 And it's also just a really easy way to keep the hair in place while you're waiting for

 After you've completed your entire head, you want to lightly hairspray your hair.

 Whenever you want to create a really soft look, you always want to spray it prior to

 We're using it more as a styling aid to create volume and have really soft, brushable curls.

 Once your hair is completely cooled, you can start removing the foils.

 You'll notice how shiny and bouncy the waves are because you allowed the hair to heat up

 After all the foils have been removed, you want to massage your head and shake those

 This is a metal mesh glove used for protection in case you slip and poke yourself.

 And what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to take the point of this knife

 and you're just going to want to jiggle it in between the shell.

 Yeah, and it might crumble apart a little bit, but you just got to keep working at it.

 And then wipe off the knife because it's probably going to have some debris on it.

 And then you're going to want to scrape off the top so that you get all the meat, you

 So is this the kind of oyster you steam or is this the kind you can eat raw?

Today I am making three kinds of tea sandwiches, tomato, tuna, and peanut butter and jelly.

 First, spread softened butter evenly on all slices of bread for tomato and tuna sandwiches.

 And for tomato sandwiches, spread mayonnaise on both sides of buttered bread.

 It's better for salads and sandwiches than white and yellow onions.

 For peanut butter and jelly, spread peanut butter on all slices of bread.

I guess every youtuber has made a face cast tutorial sometime or another.

 Make sure you remove all your makeup and false lashes and whatever you got on.

 Then dip the plaster gauze and apply to your face, but make sure you cover your brows with vaseline or oil or they will come off with the cast.

 Then move your mouth and face around under the plaster to make it come loose.

 Hold it up to the light and then you see the thin areas where the light comes through.

 You can add some more plaster in these areas to give it some more support.

 Next step in making our face cast is doing a plaster mixture and pouring it into our mold.

 Ellie is using oil on the inside of the whole cast so that our plaster face can come loose later.

 Give it a proper stir until you get this creamy, bubble-free mixture.

 Ellie created a little bed with towels in a box to give the cast some support while it's hardening.

 Now we're all done and we're just gonna let it dry over the night and hopefully it will turn out good.

 As you can see the surface is kind of rough so I'm gonna use sandpaper and smooth it down.

 This polishing and sculpting process, make sure you give it a lot of love and then your face cast will turn out awesome!

 To sculpt out all the small details Ellie is using a small file.

 To smooth out all the tiny little hollow areas and to give the cast a silky smooth shiny surface we need to coat it with something.

 This kind of lacquer surface will function as a protection when you work with all your stuff on your cast.

 The glue is all dry and I covered my face cast in about 5 or 6 layers.

 You can do as many layers as you want, just make sure it's shiny and all of the bubbles and holes are covered.

 And if it loses it's shine when you pull things off it, just cover it with another layer and it's all good.

I have a Formica door here and I'm using a file that's, I don't know if you

 make some practice pieces to practice on before you actually file your finished product.

 Now after you use your router, this edge on the laminate is going to be really sharp,

 so don't run your finger along that edge because it will cut you.

 want to do is you're always pushing the file away from the color.

 the file back this way because you'll chip the color on the laminate.

 along there and knock off that sharp edge from the router first.

And then I want to bring the file back and I'm not keeping it at a 90 degree

 filing that black line down to the actual cabinet door edge now.

Now one thing that I'm doing here is as I push and then whenever I stop,

 I'm actually lifting the file and then bringing it back and pushing it again.

 it filed flush here and you feel it with your fingernail, it's nice and flush, come back

 again and just make one, you can make one or two quick passes with that high angle on

 if you were doing the back side of your door, you're going to do the same thing.

 file in a high motion and you're pushing it away from you to knock that sharp edge off

 and then bring it back flatter like that and then come back and knock that sharp edge

Now let me show you if you're doing a countertop edge, what you're going to want

Now the first thing you're going to do is knock off that rough edge and you're

 pulling it towards you but you're pulling it in a downward motion also.

 it towards you, knock off that rough edge and then bring it back closer to being flat

 and you're doing it in long motions again, filing it down and then on a high angle knock

 so that's it for your lesson on how to file Formica or plastic laminate or Wilsonard or

 I've got this set up in a farm shed where we're staying, and it's provided a lot of

 the car's lights flash, and that tells us that the car is ready to drive.

 with each car and each controller until all the cars needed are set.

 want to reduce that, we can reduce it in 10%, we can have it in 10% increments.

 This is a useful feature if you're driving with children or with people that are new

 to slot cars, because you can set them on a low power to avoid crashes while they're

 If I reduce the braking now to just 10%, the car will coast to a stop.

 longer to slow down, which can be a lot more fun to drive, but it can be a lot harder for

 braking a little bit makes the driving around the track a little bit smoother and more fun.

 When you have a digital car with lights, you can turn the lights on and off while the car

I really like this feature and it's fantastic when you're driving in low

 that will drive on its own very easily by pressing the code button twice, pressing the lane change

 button on the throttle, and then driving the car to set the desired speed, a speed that the car will

 travel around at without coming off, but it'll still be fast enough to make good traffic and

Once you've got the desired speed, you press the lane change button and that car will go

 around on its own, changing lanes at random, and you can run your car against up to five others,

To do this, it's the same process as setting up a ghost car, except you press the code button

 three times until three lights come on, and you press the lane change button to set the car, and

When it comes out on track, at the press of the pace car button, it'll do two full laps

If you have a driver display plugged in, the lights will show the fuel rising in the

 tank as it fills, and when it's full, you can leave the pits and continue racing.

 fuel, your car's lights will flash and it will go down to half speed, so you'll need to come

 into the pits to get fuel, otherwise you just won't be competitive on track.

As I come around to the lane change, I'm going to press the lane change

 button on the controller, and you'll see the car swap from one lane to another.

 So with Carrera Digital, it's very easy to set up, it works very reliably, and it works flawlessly out of the box.

 All the accessories you see here, the lap tower, the start lights, wireless controllers, driver display, and the timer,

 they all fit, they plug straight in, no modifications, no tricky software, nothing that's hard to understand, it all just works

If you choose to set up with Carrera Digital, you're going to have a lot of fun.

So the first thing to do, we have to deflate the airbed that we got going right here.

Everything is made out of this pretty cheap pine that you can buy here and also a couple pieces of plywood.

 Ok, now we'll bring in the top piece of plywood for our, the platform bed.

 I'm Chef Say, next time you're firing up the grill, why not make a batch of sliders?

 Not only are they fun to eat, but I've got a recipe full of bright Latin flavors.

 And since I don't want to oil my burgers and I don't want them to stick, what I'm going

 to do is take a little bit of vegetable oil, take a paper towel, fold it into quarters,

 This way, I lightly oil the grill without causing flare-ups, and I prevent my food from

 I want you to put the burger patties on the grill and don't touch them.

 I also want to add, because this is a Latin recipe, a little bit of jalapeno.

 While the burgers are grilling, I'm just going to whip up a quick sauce.

 Now this takes the place of mayonnaise or any other creamy sauce that you want to add

 Greek yogurt is simply strained yogurt, so more of the whey is taken out.

 Same as regular yogurt, it's just thicker and has more protein.

 So to this Greek yogurt, I'm going to add a little bit, and I mean a little bit, of

 That gets mixed in with a little squeeze of lemon juice for flavor.

 We're going to add a little bit of salt, just a pinch, a very light pinch, and some pepper.

 Now second rule, so first rule with searing, second rule, don't press or poke these, okay?

 If you do that, all the juices are going to run out onto your grill, and there's going

 What happens during cooking is all the juices concentrate in the center of the burger patty.

 If you were to bite into these right now, all the juices would run out.

 So I'm going to let these rest, turning them over occasionally for about another minute

 While our sliders are resting, I want to grill my buns and probably give them about

 I'm going to invite my husband in because he has a special way he likes to assemble

 So I know you like to assemble them a certain way, so show me how it's done.

 So, three of these little guys makes one serving, and that is only 360 calories.

 That's fewer calories and half the fat and half the salt of most drive-thru burgers.

 And of course if you haven't seen that recipe, click right up there and watch it.

 Now for this recipe I'm using two different types of mushrooms.

 Now with these you just need to pop them in a bowl and cover them with hot water for about

 Now this is completely optional but I'm using some Italian ham.

 Now here I'm just peeling off the fat and then breaking it up into small pieces.

 So then into a pan we're going to add in some olive oil, the garlic and the onion.

 Give them a quick stir and then just simply cook for a couple of minutes until that onion

 Mix everything together and then we're going to cook that for a couple of minutes also

 Once everything is cooked nicely I'm just going to pop them into a bowl and put them

 Now to just a little bit of olive oil in the pan add in the rice and just give it a

 Now I like to add about half to three quarters of a cup each time.

 Obviously stir it well until it's well absorbed and then add in some more.

 When you add in the last amount of the stock we're going to re-add those mushrooms.

 Once that liquid has almost reduced down we're going to add in some butter and stir that

 Give it a good mix until it's well combined and then you are ready to serve it up.

 Top it off with a little more parmesan and you have got yourself one creamy, rich, delicious

 Now of course if you don't like Italian ham you can substitute that with some chicken.

 Of course you can leave the meat out altogether and just leave the mushrooms as a base because

 Thanks again for joining me and I'll see you next time on Cooking With Karma.

 This session is all going to be about super sets, higher reps, just pushing myself a little

 bit further today rather than before last week I did a little bit more heavier lower

 Also in my mom's car today, so taking full advantage, hitting those high speeds.

 So I'm straight in with that first exercise, which is going to be T-bar row.

 Obviously, as I fatigue here, I start using my hamstrings and lower back slightly, but

 really trying to pull through those elbows, really engaging the back.

 Once I finish this, I go straight into the straight arm push down.

 Into the next set of exercises, which is going to be heavy weighted pull ups, super set with

 I'm fatigued from the last exercises, but really just pulling through those reps, keeping

 Once again, no rest and then straight into the second exercise.

 I started with the heavy T-bar row, so now I'm going into more of an isolation working

 set, really just focusing on those good squeezes, more strict form.

 It's all about pulling through those elbows, really engaging the back, using those arms

 So here I take a few seconds rest and then I drive through those last few reps.

 So next exercise is that close grip pull down in my second set.

 Really focusing with a slight tilt my back here, but still pulling through and getting

 I'll be super setting those lat pull downs straight with this upper back row, more isolated,

 This is when it matters the most of those last reps and you don't want to do anymore.

 Just taking a few seconds rest and then really driving through.

 You always know it's a good back and bicep session when you struggle to fit your arms

 That session was all about super sets guys, higher reps, obviously thinking about every

 Smashing it as hard as I can, pushing myself to the limit and not quitting.

 You can't go in there and expect to make change without making a change from your last session.

 Always go in with the intention of progressing, never maintaining, always gaining.

 The first thing we're going to do is get a big pot of water boiling

It's basically got mustard seed, coriander seed, a little cayenne

We're going to add the pouch to the liquid and let that come to a boil

 But this whole cluster right here, you see this part where all that beautiful meat is.

 Anytime I have a great seafood dish that has a lot of broth, I like to serve it with bread

Red Monkey bread dipper is this really cool product that they have

 Basically add it to some oil and it's this delicious flavoring for your bread.

 And we're going to throw these underneath a broiler and toast them

 To plate this dish, start with some of the beautiful crab on the bottom

 Once you fill your bowl, add some of that beautiful broth right over the top

 How stoked would you be if you went to a restaurant and you got this?

 And if you want to cook for a whole bunch of people, just add more stuff in a bigger pot.

 Don't forget to go to facebook.com slash Chef Nathan Lippe, twitter.com slash Chef Nathan Lippe

 And every Saturday, we're live at youstream.tv slash food, drinks, and rock and roll.

It's Sunday, it's lunchtime and in our country, in Argentina, you have two options.

 Either you get together with family and friends and have the traditional asado or you have some

The thing is here in our country there are lots of immigrants, lots of grandmas who love to

It is better to slice it into bigger portions so that during the cooking it will keep

 if you're going to use it to cook, you should be able to drink it.

 We want now the alcohol to leave the pan, but the aromas and perfumes to stay.

 sweet pimentón, and ground pepper, which will make it also spicy.

 leave it boiling for an hour will reduce the sauce, will integrate all the ingredients together,

 Our pasta will be ready in about 11 minutes, according to the package.

 A little bit too selfish to eat this alone, but today I'm alone.

And now, the moment that I have been waiting for during the whole video,

 In this movie, we're going to talk about removing wax and acrylic polymer.

 Basically we have different chemicals for each and we put them into the sand boney

 And eventually you will see some whiteness on the floor which is the acrylic polymer

 Now I can tell you the first time that we did this, all of a sudden everything started

 But you'll see in this video, now you're starting to get the white.

 That's what we definitely want because this is getting the wax off the floor.

 What you won't see is the fact that right now the mechanic is not extracting the chemical

 He's letting the pads abrade the floor and make sure that he's getting all of the wax

 This is a different floor and the disintegration of the wax is a little bit more

 When we do acrylic polymers, it isn't quite as white but it still is coming off in a milky

 What we have to do is to be careful that we get all of the wax or all of the acrylic polymer

 So you'll see the men will use our edging tool so that they can get the wax off the

 And they can be sure that all of the wax and the acrylic polymer has been affected.

 And here he is, as we said before in some other movies, they have to do the edges by

 Now, this is a floor where we have removed the wax, but we haven't done phase one yet,

 Sometimes the guys will combine the wax removal with the phase one.

 Then what we're going to do is to rinse the floor to get all of the solution off of the

 And here we are rinsing it and you can see even just by applying water, the color is

 Now, on this particular job, this was in northern New Jersey, the customer got bids from

 We were the only people who could do what she wanted done, which was she did not want

 So not only were we significantly less than anybody else, but we were the only ones who

 And now he's putting phase three in the machine so that we can complete the preparation of

And basically in this case, we were down to raw wood, which is what you want.

 Once you get to raw wood, you're thinking that you're easily there isn't any need for the

 bonding coat because the profile offered by the raw wood is rough enough that the

 And you can expect this kind of refuse coming off the floor after each phase, it gets a

 little bit clearer by the time you get through phase three, but that is coming off.

 And in all of the movies of Sanfrey, that's exactly what you're going to see.

 And you can see now the prepared floor comes up looking great with a coat of urethane on

 With Sanfrey, 75% of the time is spent preparing the floor, actually putting the bonding coat

 So you can see how the color changes once you put the urethane on.

 And she had her wax off and there was no change of the color because that's how she

 So if you've been using Globecon or any of the other ones, don't be concerned.

 G'day ladies and gentlemen, my name is Jazza and I've taken this picture Evan from Cartoon

 Block did of Krillin in the tutorial where he taught you how to draw Krillin and I've

 turned it into a bit of a digital painting and a speed painting for you to enjoy.

 If you're interested there's a link in the description where you can check out the tutorial

 in which I go into more detail on how I painted this and there's also the reference file provided

 so you can open it up in Photoshop and have a look for yourself.

 I also have a whole bunch of tutorials on my channel on flash animation, digital painting

 So if you're interested feel free to check it out and subscribe to Draw With Jazza on

 Now the construction lines and the basic sketch has been provided by Cartoon Block and with

 that having been done already we're going to the refined line work on top of that which

 is basically tracing it and keeping our lines as smooth as possible, keeping things in mind

 like line weight variation and having the stylistic tone of the image held together

 You want to make sure to keep this separate to your sketch layer because if they're merged

 it's going to be much more difficult to refine things like color and remove those construction

 But once I've finished the line work I've added a layer in between which is a blank

 white so you can see it's just isolated that and now I'm going through and adding the color.

 So selecting with the magic wand and overlapping the line so that it doesn't leave an unsightly

 white line and then adding the colors through the image so I've got the orange of the gi

 It's quite simple to color and then once we've got the flat image you can see already how

 quite crisp and cool it looks so we're going to go through and add the first layer of cell

 shading and this is just a slightly darker skin tone and keeping it consistent with the

 So going through the arms shading in that sort of direction making sure that the light

 Going through and adding it to all the different parts of his skin and then the next thing

 So adding this really faint almost white skin color to the edge of the image.

 Now this doesn't have to be done in all images but it adds an extra source of light which

 I believe makes the image pop quite a lot and it's quite a common technique used in

 So I'm doing so with all the other layers of the image so making sure I do a shade of

 dark with the blues and the oranges and then a rim light on the edges of a very, very light

 Once I've finished the basics all of that you can see how much it pops.

 It's quite a simple method of coloring and now I'm going to add an extra layer with an

 airbrush so I'm just going through over the edges on the right side with a slightly lighter

 color and then with a slightly darker tone I'm going on the left side and this rounds

 Now this doesn't have to be done because cel shading can be quite effective on its own

 but in some cases it can be quite cool to kind of add that extra dimension of smoothness.

 Now I've gone and done that with the rest of the image with the blues and oranges and

 So going through with a polygonal lasso tool and selecting random segments, some large,

 some small, some with a wider gap and some with a thinner gap in between it and then

 behind that I'm going to paint the orange and you'll get this nice sunburst effect.

 And finally just to kind of add another dimension to the background so it's not so flat after

 painting the whites of the eyes and the teeth I go through and add a flare behind him so

 which is a bit of a white gradient, just a radial gradient going out and then finally

 I burn the edges of the image, lower the opacity and that rounds off the image and frames it.

 I hope you enjoyed this short tutorial and if you want to see something in more detail

 that I've done in this video make sure to check the link in the description and feel

 What we're going to do is take some unsalted butter, make sure it's unsalted, and we'll

 have this, we've got the heat here to medium, medium low, and we're just going to let this

 You want to make sure that it does not brown, so you want to keep that a very nice golden

 So that's why you want to keep your, well actually you have to keep it at that low to

 medium heat because if you kept it any higher and you started to burn your butter, you'd

 get a very different taste, it becomes nuttier, almost has a burnt flavor, and it will drastically

 Just right over here, all over the side, and we'll just slowly.

 Make sure you get all that flour whisked in, I think I still have a little bit in here.

 Alright, so once that's all whisked in, we are going to take, I've got whole milk over

 And so now we're going to slowly add this, we want our heat still on low, slowly add

 We heat up the milk because when you combine it with the flour and butter mixture, if it's

 You don't want to boil the milk though, because then you get that film on top, and we don't

 So we just add that in slowly and constantly whisk until it's mixed.

 At this point, you want to add salt and pepper to taste, and you can also add a little bit

 of nutmeg, it's not necessary, but salt and pepper to taste for sure.

 Welcome to CurryLeague, presented to you by IndiaNTracks.com and Sulekha.com.

 Myself Levin Johnson and I've got Arjun here to assist me for today's recipe.

 The ingredients that you would need for this, raw mangoes, 5 in number, just cut into cubes,

 40gms of jaggery, 40gms of red chilli powder, 10gms of turmeric powder, 10gms of mustard,

 10gms of ginger, 10gms of garlic, salt for seasoning, coriander leaves, just to garnish.

 Ideally a thick bottom pan because jaggery and the tamarind pulp tend to stick to the

 bottom and a constant stirring is a must, but at a later stage.

 Just when you see the garlic starting to brown, just throw in the raw mangoes.

 Just make sure that it's all mixed in nicely and it could already have the flavour of the

 So once the spices are all lapped up and it's broiled, you could just pour enough water,

 not totally covered, just enough to make it moist and get the lid on and leave it for

 What you want to do is just stir it and that's the consistency you need.

 You might want to pick on one of the big pieces here, just slide it to the side and just try

 Depending on how sweet you like, if you just use the recipe, it'll just be right.

 But if you like it more sour or more sweet, you can adjust the jaggery accordingly.

 Two things which is very important here is the consistency of the pachadi and the softness

 At the same time, you should be able to see the pieces lying in.

 You could add in some chopped coriander here and leave some for the garnish.

 Switch the flame off, not cook the coriander leaves and it's ready to be served.

 And I'm Vien, and today we'll be presenting how you can make falafels an alternative way,

 And obviously for that you're going to need a couple of ingredients.

 This is Fresh Eats Fresh Falafel Mix, and this product is easily available at your local

 But one thing about this product to know is that it is absolutely fresh, there are no

 preservatives in it, no fancy chemicals, and it really tastes absolutely wonderful.

 And why don't we go back over here to Anita and see basically how to make that.

 So you don't make them round, you kind of make them a little bit flat so they cook well.

 So it cooks all the way through and the temperature is passed on all the way around.

 And the other thing, and I've noticed this when we were trying this out the other day at the house.

 And is that when you have it laid down, you don't need to keep opening it and taking a peek at it.

 We happen to have a glass top, but if you have a metal top and you are very curious to know what's happening,

 don't do that because when you do that, you lose all the heat and the benefit of covering is gone.

 And how long do you leave them on till you basically, when's the right time to flip them?

 If you are doing it on the stove, then the temperature, the flame has to be at about low to medium.

 If you have it too high, then you'll just cook the outside and burn it.

 Well, basically this is a finished product of what the falafels will look like.

 Now, frying is also a good means because that is my favorite, I know.

 May not be the best healthy choice, but I tell you what, it does taste really, really good.

 Now, Anita, give us an idea on how you would basically serve them.

 I mean, it's just cooked differently, but serving would be just identical.

 And the other way of eating is another one of my favorite things with a dip,

 Well, I think not only is that your favorite, it's become my favorite as well.

 I've actually been starting to use this with just about any item.

 Instead of using some of the popular or traditional dips that we're all used to,

 I've replaced it with this, and I'll tell you what, it is very, very addictive.

 The taste is absolutely superb, and it's something that I would really recommend you give it a try,

 The other things that we do in our family here is we make sandwiches,

 they were all shocked at looking at the color and couldn't tell if it was turnip or not.

 So, now I understand the sprinkling of the special herbs and spices in the dip.

 Well, one of the most common things that people eat is falafel sandwich,

 and all you need for that is pita bread, salad like lettuce, tomatoes, onions,

 It's really simple to make your sandwiches, and I know that you will really like it.

 And if you happen to be in an area located where you don't have a grocery store

 that you can go and buy the product, visit us at www.fresheats.net,

 and you can actually communicate with us, and we'll be happy to mail you the product.

 And you can actually send us a message, and there's a place for you to place an order,

 Hope you enjoy our fresh heat falafels, as well as the dip that's coming out very soon,

 I'll maybe show you that a different way, but the masking way is a little easier when I want to add details back in.

 So now I know where the texture is that I want it to be, and I'll take my brush.

 It's kind of strong, so I'm going to bring it down a little bit.

 I'm just going to dab over it as if I'm painting and putting in that texture back in there

 You can also blur this out if you want it a little more to get rid of some of that

 All you do is go back to your black brush because that's the color of what it was when it was

 And then last thing I would do for this, I'm pretty happy I'd flatten it.

 And the last thing I would do is just make sure I'm happy with the exposure,

 oh, you know, well, the action didn't look like that when I ran it.

You are supposed to play around with it and get it to your liking.

I'm going to... Now I've selected this layer, the gradient fill,

 now I've selected this layer, the gradient fill, and my black brush, and I say I just feel like

And if you don't know exactly where it is, it's like all near the bottom.

 So I'll, you know, maybe I'll select this one so you can see it a little bit better.

 Today I'm going to share with you one of my favorite dessert recipes.

 First, I should say thanks for all the positive responses and all the comments for my Emmy Eats in a Week video.

 In the second video, I mentioned one of my favorite desserts and actually one of my go-to desserts, especially in the wintertime.

It's really easy, it's pretty healthy, and it tastes really good.

 So it's a great recipe in the summer when all the fruits come in.

 But I especially like in the winter when I'm really craving some good fruit.

 So come with me in the kitchen and I'll show you how it's done.

 One stick of salted butter, 2 thirds of a cup of sugar, and 3 quarters of a cup of flour.

 If you have a food processor, you can just combine this all together until they form a crumb.

 If you're using a food processor, it tends to make the crumbs pretty fine.

 So go ahead and dump the crumbs into a bowl and then use your hands to kind of squeeze the butter and the sugar and flour together so you get some nice big crumbs.

 And usually what I do is use half now and then I freeze the rest for another batch later.

 In this case I'm using a combination of mixed berries and wild blueberries.

 Then to the frozen fruit add about a tablespoon of corn starch.

 Finally cover the fruit with a good layer of your crumb topping.

 Then place in a 375 degree oven and bake for 35 to 45 minutes depending on the type of fruit.

 When the fruit is bubbling in the middle, then you know it's done.

 And if you want the topping to be a little bit more golden brown, then just put it under the broiler for a couple minutes until it's nice and golden.

 Then serve it hot over a scoop of vanilla ice cream, or in my case, a scoop of vanilla yogurt.

 So here's a little bite of the yogurt and the crumb topping and some of the fruit.

 The crumb topping is delicious and sweet and really compliments the fruit.

 And what I usually do, and what makes this recipe so easy and versatile, is I make a full batch of the crumb topping, and then I'll save half and I'll put it in the freezer.

 So if I want a dessert on a weeknight, all I have to do is open a bag of frozen fruit, dump my frozen topping on top, put it in the oven for about 40 minutes, and then I've got a really great freshly made dessert.

 So that's my little quick tip on how to make a really great, fast, easy, and relatively healthy dessert.

If you guys have any questions, just leave them in the comments below and I'll do my best to answer them.

 Thanks you guys so much for watching and I'll see you in my next video.

 I am going to add some turmeric, some salt, cilantro, and I am squeezing some fresh lemon juice.

 Papaya contains an enzyme called papain and papain reduces the risk of gastrointestinal problems.

 Papaya is also rich in vitamin A and vitamin C. It has more healing properties.

 Mix everything well and taste it if you need some more salt or lemon juice.

 If you want it as a 100% raw food, you can just leave it like this.

 with you a protective style that I'm so excited about and that's going to be my

You'll need clips, you'll need scissors, you'll need a crochet hook, a

 That's something you want to make sure as you're going to protective styling.

 What I did next was I blow-dried it on low heat just to straighten it out and

 decided to use because I wanted to have her hair fill in a lot more since it's

Okay so as you can notice the hair in the back is out and I left

 hair in the front out so that way I can put single twist in there so that way if

 she wanted to wear her hair up or down she'd be able to do that without you

 color in the middle of her hair as you can see or kind of see how the crochet

 I wanted it to be loose so it's hanging pretty long and we're going to go ahead

 go ahead and try this style and you can switch it up and wear it many ways

 Please thumbs up the video and subscribe so you can see my tutorial when I

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to take the product from roots

 And then I'm going to take the blow dryer and blow right inside here.

 So don't be afraid to take a little bit more of our volume blowout cream.

 First step in your chain assembly is to find the right chain length.

 So what you do is, take your chain, put it on your big ring in the front, put it on your

 big ring in the back, bypass the derailleur, so don't put the chain on your derailleur,

 and then just measure your chain length here, and then you just add one link to your chain

 After you have defined your right chain length, you cut your chain.

 Just make sure you always keep it at the right length you have defined before.

 Start to put pressure on your pin, and then just continue screwing until you hear that

 Take your chain, put it on your small car, route it through your rear derailleur.

 The next step is you do, is you take your power link, you take a simple tool, which

 Then you just close your power link, take off your spoke, here you go.

 Don't worry if the link is not completely closed, as you see here it's not completely

 Once you hit the pedals and you put the strings on the chain, it will close automatically.

 If you guys want to see how I got this look, then please stay tuned.

24k palette, I'm going to be using this skin tone color brown as

 Okay so now I'm going back into the palette using that really deep green color.

 And I'm going to apply that to the outer V and as well as the inner corner of my eye.

 I'm also going to apply that color along the lash line as well.

 Okay going back into that palette, I'm taking this really bright green that has bronzy undertones

 And I'm going to apply that color directly in the spots that I left open.

 And then I will blend the colors in with the first dark green color.

 Now I'm going to take a piece of tape and apply it to my, to the corners of my eye.

 And I'm going to take that color and apply it to the very outer edge of my V. And I'm

 going to extend it all the way out like I'm doing a really thick wing.

 And I'm going to take this really bright yellow, but you can use whatever yellow you have.

 And I'm going to just take that color and blend out the harsh lines of the outdoorsy

 When those two colors blend together, they make a really pretty lime green color.

 the Sonia Kashuk clean, Sonia Kashuk large crease brush cleaned off.

 I'm going to use that to buff out the harsh lines of the yellow.

 It looks bright in the picture, but it's really a soft orange color.

 And I'm going to use that with the dollar eyeshadow brush by e.l.f.

 Now I'm going to remove the tape and you should see you have a nice line and a nice shape

 Studio Tools smudge brush and I'm going to take that color and smudge it along my lower

's mineral eyeshadow in the color earthy, I'm going to take this

 And I'm going to use that into my inner tear duct as well as my lower lash line, taking

 Now I'm going to use this Jordana Kohl eyeliner in the color emerald and I'm going to use

 that to my waterline and I'm going to also use it to tight line as well.

 For an extra kick in this eye look, I'm using Clean Colors glitter liner in gold and I'm

 going to apply that to my lower lash line in the inner part, about half of the way in.

 Now I'm going to line my top lash line with Wet n Wild's gel liner.

 And I'm going to create a very dramatic thick wing to this look as well, but you don't have

 Okay, off camera I'm applying my favorite mascaras and I'll come back and show you what

 For my highlight, I'm using ELF's bronzer in sun kiss with the ELF fan brush.

 Now for my lips, I'm taking Nika K's dark brown and brown lip liners.

 I'm applying the dark brown first to define my lips and then I'll use the medium brown

 I do not know the name of it and I lost the number to it, so I'm so sorry guys, but it's

 And over that lipstick, I'm using Nika K's lipstick and the color to this lipstick is

 And I'm using this because it's a little brighter than the Wet n Wild one and it's a little

 For my lip gloss, I'm using L'Oreal's High Intensity Pigment Lipstick and this one is

 Don't forget to rate, comment, and subscribe and until next time guys, bye!

 I'm Jos Rozen from RadioGardenSense.com and you see how nice and thick that lawn is?

 I mean after the Tertius application about a week or two ago, it really thickened up.

 So the next step on the program is to take care that the lawn stays thick, that there's

 no crabgrass coming in there in the summertime and we're going to use the Green Light brand

 I do not recommend any other brand, this is only Dimension on just a neutral carrier,

 And the Dimension enables you to prevent crabgrass and also some abroad leaf weeds.

 What we're going to do, we're going to take the twice long little foot spreader and of

 course the instructions on the bag will tell you a certain opening for a certain spreader

 and most people don't have that type of spreader so what we're going to do is we're going to

 just take a spreader opening and the opening here of this little slit should be 5 sixteenths

 So I don't care what kind of brand of spreader you have, if that opening is 5 sixteenths

 of an inch you can use that Green Light Dimension crabgrass preventer in your spreader.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to take the Green Light crabgrass preventer,

 we'll put it in the spreader and then we're going to run up and down that lawn.

 And we make swaths about 6 feet so it throws it out 3 feet either way and that will take

 care of the crabgrass for the rest of the summer time because this dimension will last

 5 to 6 months so it will be safe all the way until August and in September it will be fine

 You'll see there's a few clovers coming here in this lawn here so what we're going to do

 the temperature is about 60 to 65 degrees now, kind of pretty consistent so it's safe,

 What we're going to do is we're going to use this PBI Gordon Speed Zone and we use according

 to the directions we're going to use this auto dial sprayer, don't use any other sprayer

 because it calls in the directions for the auto dial sprayer and it calls for the setting

 1 tablespoon per gallon so we look at the dial and we put the dial on 1 TBS so that

 We take the hose, we connect the hose to the device, we open up the bottle, so the bottle

 is here, we take the Speed Zone and fill it all the way up, we make sure that this little

 suction hose is connected, screw it back on the bottle, again we check if the setting

 is set on 1 TBS per gallon, the hose is connected, the water is turned on and here we go, we

 spray, again about 6 feet swath, 3 feet either side and we just walk just fast enough that

 the lawn is wetted but not that it runs off and you waste all your spray and you can't

 do 12,500 square feet with that bottle but also we're not going to walk too fast that

 you zigzag and you have spots that you don't reach or that you skip.

 So it's a great thing to put in your salad to make it a little bit more filling.

 and it's used in a lot of Mediterranean food like tabbouleh and things like that.

 It has protein and fiber and also has a lot less fat and cholesterol than regular brown rice.

 You can get it at any Mediterranean store or like grocery store,

 so just follow the directions on the bulgur wheat that you buy.

 where you're going to actually add a small can of tomato sauce.

 and it's going to actually give a really great flavor to the bulgur wheat

 it's going to actually shred the lettuce into nice little pieces.

 Make sure that the bulgur wheat has had enough time to cool before you add it.

 You're just going to add a third of the amount of lemon juice as you did olive oil.

 please ask them in the comments section below where I also list the recipe.

 Give me any suggestions you have for any meals you would like to see.

 Ok, I had a request for Modern Times to show how I play Modern Times by The Black Keys.

 I've got a cover of it on my page if you want to hear me play along to the record.

 Ok so pretty much, we're going to be doing pretty much an A minor, so we're going to

 So for the beginning part, just go from G to A. And I'm just playing G5, A5, so index

 And then we're just going to kind of go down that A minor pentatonic scale.

 And then go 5-3 back to the bottom E string on the 5th fret, which is the A note.

 And then the second time is two hits, again starting off the same, on the D string, 7-5.

 And then it's just, there's like him and Patrick are going back and forth, you know,

 So you can just listen to it and you'll figure out how you want to play that little section.

 Let's see, so we're going 3-5 on the bottom E and then we're hammering from 3-5 on the

 So after that second hammer-on, 5-3 on the A, I'm going to the 5th fret of the bottom

 3-open, 3-open, and then 3-open on the bottom A and E string, right?

 And then they have this part where they end the chorus and we're just going to go from...

 And I start, me personally, I kind of start vibing on that A string to kind of get a little bit of rhythm to it.

 So now we're just going to go 9, all on the G string, 9-7-5-4, right?

 Which is the same way we're doing it on the A string, just the different octave.

 Because if you put all those together, that's like the whole song right there.

 So I'll play those sections all together now and you can kind of hear how it flows.

 And again, if you want to hear what it sounds like to the record, just go on my page and find the cover of it.

 We're in my kitchen and it's almost 4 o'clock and I'm cooking dinner.

 And today's video is going to be a recipe video which is something that has been requested

 a lot because I've been doing the meals of the week video and you guys just love those

 videos and you always leave me requests of what recipes you want to see the most.

 And this particular recipe that I'm going to show you today has gotten the most requests.

 This is the roasted green chili pepper stew and it's a really good recipe for this time

 of year as well because it's kind of spicy, it's warming and it's something that cooks

 I've also been receiving loads of feedback of people saying that they have been thinking

 about turning vegetarian or they just want to start adding more vegetarian options to

 And I feel like this one will be a really great recipe for vegetarians and meat lovers

 So alright, I'm going to go ahead and get started and show you guys the ingredients.

 You are going to need some good quality extra virgin olive oil.

 I know this can be kind of hard to find this time of year so if you can't find fresh just

 Next is another optional ingredient and that is smoked mozzarella cheese.

 I think this goes really good on top since it's kind of a smoky stew.

 But if you're a vegan or something obviously you don't have to add cheese and if you don't

 This is also optional but I think it really adds a nice smokiness to it because this is

 Next you're going to need some garlic powder or some fresh garlic.

 You're going to need four green chilies and these are very spicy.

 As you can see I have halved the bell peppers and I've taken the seeds and the fleshy bits

 And the bell peppers I've actually just left whole and complete.

 And this is going to be the roasting process that I'm going to be showing you guys.

 You guys can get roasted bell peppers at the grocery store or at the farmer's market on

 Alright so there are all kinds of methods in which you can roast your bell peppers.

 If you have a gas stove there is a method you can do with that but I don't.

 So now what I'm going to do is I'm going to set my broiler on and turn it way way up and

 So you guys can see that my bell peppers are on the very very top.

 And what's going to happen is they are going to start like turning black and getting kind

 But you're just black on the top and it's going to get kind of a smoky flavor.

 As you can see they've got black whatever you want to call that all over them.

 So now while they're still hot I'm going to place them in a plastic baggie.

 And the reason for this is I'm going to actually be removing some of the skin.

 You want them to be like soaking in steam so that the skin is easier to take off.

 Alright so now I've got my roasted bell peppers all de-skinned and just cut up into like little

 You can de-seed the chilies if you don't want it to be too spicy but I like a lot of heat.

 We're just going to throw everything into a pot and it's all just going to cook but

 You could use vegetable stock but I find that this has a lot of flavor already so I'm going

 I'm going to add about, I don't know, a teaspoon of chipotle seasoning.

 So I've just moved it over to the stove and I almost forgot to add olive oil.

 It's really important to add at least two tablespoons of olive oil just because you

 know fat and stuff really helps bring out the flavor and everything and since there's

 So yeah, just go ahead and mix that up and put it on high and you're just going to want

 to bring this to a boil and then once it's boiling put it down to a low heat and let

 The potatoes are going to take a little while to finish depending on how big you made them.

 The longer you cook it the better it's going to taste is something else I wanted to add.

 I wanted to film it in the proper light but last night we cooked it for about two and

 If your potato pieces are bigger it may take a little bit longer but it's just so good.

 So I'll go ahead and I will demonstrate what it's like to eat this.

 It's probably going to be even better today because it was like in there all night just

 However, if you're not a spicy food fan instead of adding the chilies what you could do is

 Just add a few more red bell peppers or even some green bell pepper.

 You don't need to add vegetable broth to it because you really just want all of the flavors

 Hi there, today I'm going to make roasted dandelion root coffee.

 of dandelions here, they're a bit wilted because they've been in the sun for a while.

 these in a grinder that I just happen to have, it's a cheapo one, I think it was a

 grinding it up, it's still wet, I mean it still kind of sticks together.

 need to dry this out before roasting it but what I might do, so I could stick it in the

I just stuck it in the oven, stuck it on gas mark 2 for about 25 minutes

 and you know, there we got it there, it's kind of powdery and I'm going to stick that

 down to the lab and made up a cafetier's worth of dandelion coffee.

 I've been to many, many restaurants where they serve fried okra.

 I belong to a CSA, so I have gotten some beautiful, beautiful okra from my CSA.

 I'm going to use flour, cornmeal, a couple of eggs, some salt and pepper to make this

 Okay, so we're going to take and nick off the ends and start slicing the okra once it's

 I'm going to batter mine in both flour and cornmeal because I think it makes it a little

 Okay, so the next thing we need to do is go ahead and break a couple of eggs into a bowl

 We're going to toss it in our flour and get it to where it's well combined.

 Then I just want to shake off the excess and drop it into the eggs.

 Now we're going to pour a couple of cups of cornmeal into another container.

 Then we're going to go over to the stove top and cook these up after we get them nice and

 The first thing we need to do to cook our okra is we need to get a large skillet and

 Then we're going to go ahead and put our cornmeal battered okra right in.

 How I know that is I put a couple of little bits of crumbs in there and it's bubbling

 When it gets nice and brown on one side, you're just going to flip it over and take it out

 We're going to put a little salt and pepper in it and we will have us some fabulous fried

 We've just made fried okra just like they do in many restaurants.

 Click on the description box down below to get the exact recipe and ingredients.

 Be sure to rate, comment, and subscribe so you can see what's cooking next.

 Today I'm going to be doing Belizean powder buns but instead of the full recipe that I

 So take a look at the ingredients that we're going to be needing.

 We're going to need one cup of all purpose flour, six tablespoons of regular white sugar,

 one tablespoon of baking powder, one egg, quarter teaspoon of cinnamon, quarter teaspoon

 We're going to start off with a couple ounces of milk because I'm not sure how much we're

 This is one stick which is half a cup which goes with the full recipe but we're going

 They're the equivalent of an American type tea cake that you would eat with coffee or

 I don't know why it's called powder buns, I think maybe because it has a lot of powdered

 Like I said, you can use butter with this but it's going to come out more crunchy, more

 So let's go ahead and cut this in there right away before I add the egg.

 You can omit the egg if you want to but I found that the egg makes this a lot lot softer.

 So the next thing for me to add, because I have butter, egg and everything in there,

 What you guys do when you're adding any kind of wet ingredient to any type of dough is

 But you don't want to end up doing that because it's going to get too wet.

 I'm almost thinking that the 2 ounces are going to be more than enough.

 I haven't even put the whole thing in and it's feeling kind of sticky, okay?

 And the reason why this is a normal meal is because we're going to do it in the toaster oven.

 Actually, this is the tray from my old toaster oven because this one didn't come with any trays.

 Because you can actually go buy a regular size thing for this one because it's huge.

 If you're not putting the tin foil or aluminum foil or silver foil as we know it in Belize,

 This is like if somebody stops by your house, you know, to visit.

 What I want to do here now is get my hands cleaned off with some flour, okay?

 Or they can take this on their road trip with them after they leave your house, okay?

 And then we're going to come back and roll these powder buns off.

 I've heard nowadays that some Belizean people in Belize are greasing their hands with butter.

 I don't see how that would work for me because this is kind of sticky.

 And this, don't panic if you're just learning to work with dough.

 And you don't do a very good job with it because this takes time.

 Okay, so it seems like I'm going to get six, and it'll be the perfect amount for this tray.

 What I want you guys to know is that if you're omitting the egg,

 because, you know, some people are vegan and stuff and they don't do eggs,

 because, you know, the egg got it a little bit more wet, right?

 And this is not for people who don't like to play around with flour, okay?

 I know some people can't stand the feel of flour on their hands.

 This is not for you because you don't want to do this with a fork like a cookie

 and drop it and stuff because it's going to come out really stiff.

 And so basically this is not for you if you don't like to mess with flour.

 because I've been wanting to do this recipe for a while for the dorm room episode.

 For 40 minutes and then we're going to check on it as it goes along

 because this is not supposed to bake too long because we don't want it to get stiff.

 We want to get them off of here on the cooling rack, all right?

 OK, so Joe has graciously decided to do our taste today for the toaster oven pot of buns.

 To purchase copies of my book, just visit my website at www.BearPantryShow.com

I've been wanting to do this for a while, to get a smaller dose of the powder buns.

 Not that we ever need that in this household because everybody in here likes it.

 And just basically anything that you like, you can eat this bun with.

 And I just love that we got a small dose for the people who live in the dorm rooms

 Thank you so much for watching, for liking, for picking up the book,

 A celebration is never complete without a beautiful and delicious cake.

 There are a range of cakes that are really easy to make yourself.

 Today we will transform a simple vanilla cake into a stunning delicious pink treat,

 For this you only need Stork with Butter, sugar, flour, eggs and vanilla.

 Cream together Stork with Butter and sugar until light and fluffy.

 Then add the eggs one by one, beating well after each addition.

 Take two lined and greased 8-inch cake tins and divide the mixture.

 Preheat your fan oven to 160 degrees and bake for 35 to 40 minutes

 you can make your own rich and creamy icing in the blink of an eye.

 The raspberry puree will produce the beautiful pink colour later on.

 For the icing, put the Stork with Butter and vanilla extract in a bowl.

 Cover the top of the cake with a thin layer of your rich and creamy icing.

 Fill three piping bags with the raspberry icing and snip off the end.

 Special installation instructions for your roll-up fresh air screen.

 need a hammer, hacksaw, and a step ladder to install your roll-up screen.

 need a 3 quarter inch plastic conduit which is available at your local home center store.

 length of the conduit should be the same width as the screen you have purchased and will installed

 in the fitted pouch at the bottom of the screen to give it rigidity for easy roll-up.

 your roll-up fresh air screen kit, four eyelets, three pull cords, one short, one medium, and one

 Locate the end of the longest length cord and attach to the header on the street side of the

 garage door screen approximately 12 inches from the vertical edge of the door jamb.

 to note depending on which side of the door the pull cords will be cleated for adjustment and

You will need to attach the longest pull cord to the opposite side.

 the pull cords will cleat on the right side, you would start by attaching the longest pull cord on

Next, locate the medium pull cord and attach it to the header to the street side of

All of the enclosed eyelets go into the header approximately one inch from the

 and the medium length pull cords and run them through the third eyelet.

 about six inches from the vertical edge of the door frame on the side nearest the short pull

Next, install the cleat approximately three feet down from the header on the door jamb on the

 and cut off the excess pull cord while the screen is in the down position.

Slide a 3 quarter inch plastic conduit that you can purchase at your

 8 foot lengths and depending on the size of your screen you may need to purchase two of them and

Cut off the excess pipe with a hacksaw so the pipe stops inside the edge of

 Wrap the cords around the cleat to secure the screen at whatever height desired.

 going to be a prep video for styling and so today I'll be using the Carol's

 I've been blonde, I've been brown, I've been black, back to blonde, back to black,

 really moisturize and repair my hair after using all that color on a regular

And so my first step I'm going to do a pre-poo with the oil, hair

 sections and then apply the oil very generously all over my hair.

 will just apply the oil on their dry hair and leave it at that but I like to

 dampen it a little bit, add the oil and then detangle my hair to make the

 Now if you want this to be a little bit more intense you can always sit under a

 hooded dryer or wrap your hair in a warm towel or saran wrap just to intensify

 the process but I'm just going to leave my hair in twists and just you know

 waste time for about 15 minutes and then go ahead and start cleansing my hair.

 Now that I've let my hair sit for 15 minutes I'm going to go ahead and

 untwist my sections and cleanse with the Colored Hair Sulfi Free Shampoo.

 again I love this shampoo because it has the aloe leaf juice in it, the calendula

 extract but also this product has soy protein which helps rebuild damaged hair

 because my hair is color treated and then also I use heat from time to time

 so I can just use the extra oomph to rebuild my hair from that soy protein.

 I'm going to cleanse and I like this cleanser because it still has a really

 go ahead and cleanse my hair with the sulfate free shampoo and then move on to

 hydrating conditioner and I really like this hair mask because it almost feels

 all and it has you know really moisturizing ingredients such as olive

 oil and murita oil and cocoa butter that really is going to help soften up my

Now I'm just going to twist up my sections as I apply the hydrating mask

 all over and then I'm going to sit under a hooded dryer for 20 minutes to let the

 intensity and really penetrating the hair shaft and getting the full monte of

 My hair needed that treatment so bad as you guys could see in the beginning of

But now you guys can see my hair is clumping together really nicely

 and I know that my hair is really moisturized when it does this.

So because the everyday drugstore makeup tutorial was a big hit with you guys, I've decided to do a night out drugstore makeup tutorial.

 So if you'd like to see how I got this look, then please keep on watching.

 As usual for foundation, I'm using Maybelline Dream Liquid Mousse.

 And I'm actually going to mix a little bit of L'Oreal Visible Lift foundation into it.

 I'm not sure if L'Oreal still makes this, but I'm a really big fan of it.

 So I'm going to mix those together and apply it to my whole face.

 Then I'm going to take some Dream Liquid Mousse and I'm just going to pat it into

 Next I'm going to take my 16-hour stay all day concealer by Essence

 And then I'm going to blend it in with a Real Techniques brush.

 Pat it in with my fingers a little bit and apply it to my eyelids because I have really

 To set that, I'm going to use my usual Maybelline Fit Me powder in Classic Ivory.

 And then I'm going to apply my CoverGirl loose powder with my big fluffy powder puff.

 To fill in my crease, I'm going to use a little bit of the same powder.

 To fill in my brows, I'm using the Wet n Wild eyebrow pencil in Taupe.

 To set my brows, I'm going to use the Essence Cosmetics brow and lash gel.

 For eye primer, I'm just going to use the Essence Cosmetics I Love Stage eyeshadow base.

 And today I'm super stoked to use my Essence Cosmetics Sparkling Effect eyeshadows.

 You'll actually notice me using a lot of Essence products in this tutorial.

 So the first thing I'm going to do is apply Metropolitan to the center of my eye with

 This is a super gorgeous shimmering brown shade with gold reflex in it.

 Once I've applied that, I'm going to take Black Goddess and I'm going to apply it to

 And I want it to be super deep on the outer edge and slowly fade into my crease.

 And don't worry about being too generous with this because as you can see, I'm going to

 take a clean brush and I'm going to blend out those harsh edges.

 There can be a lot of fallout with this, so I'm just cleaning up underneath the eye.

 Taking Dance All Night and another clean brush, I'm going to pack that on to the inner part

 And I'm blending it into the tear duct and slowly sort of blending it into Metropolitan

 For my brow bone, I'm using the usual Wet n Wild Single eyeshadow in Brûlée.

 Then I'm going to go back in with Metropolitan and touch up the center of my eye.

 Then for eyeliner, I'm using the Essence Cosmetics Gel Eyeliner in Midnight in Paris.

 Because it's an evening look, I'm not shying away from making it super dramatic.

 You don't have to rush through eyeliner, just take your time with it.

 Once I've got my eyeliner on, I'm going to grab a little bit more of the Black Goddess

 I'm going to give my eyelashes a nice coat of Telescopic Mascara by L'Oreal.

 And unfortunately, I was out of my Ardell Demi Wispies, so we're just going to pretend

 But really, I'm using these eyelashes that I purchased off eBay.

 And they're actually even cheaper than drugstore lashes, so I'm going to cut one eyelash in

 half and I'm just going to use the end and place it on my outer edge.

 Using a black NYC liquid eyeliner, I'm going to fill in the glue that has not yet dried.

 Then I'm going to do another generous coat of mascara and touch up my bottom lashes.

 Using the Essence Cosmetics Sun Club Bronzer for Blondes, I'm going to contour and bronze

 And this is a medium dark, and I'm not sure if they still make this, but I'm going to

 And then I'm going to look at the mirror like I do on Sunday nights before The Walking Dead.

 And for lip color, I'm using my favorite Maybelline Color Whisper in Lust for Blush.

 And to top off the lips, I'm going to use Essence XXXL Shine Lip Gloss in Nude Candy.

 So if you enjoyed this video and you want more drugstore tutorials in the future, please

 The hot summer days are back and we all need refreshing dishes to cool us down.

 So today I'm going to show you how to make a rice tuna salad that is very popular in Morocco, especially during summer.

 The texture, the flavors, and the colors of this salad will brighten up your meal.

 Mix the lemon juice, the olive oil, the mayonnaise, and the Dijon mustard and season with salt and pepper.

Robert Das and this video was made to give you information about your upcoming

 This short video is about seven minutes long and it will give you information about what

 to expect when you come to the center and what you can do to prepare for the study.

 These detailed pictures allow doctors to get a good idea about what your brain looks like.

 The second part is collecting the functional data and it is painless and completely non-invasive.

 Magnetic source imaging can tell which areas of the brain certain activities are located,

 Since every person has a different brain, the places of function may be located in different

 Having a map of your personal brain function helps doctors when planning your surgery or

 During the recording, you'll be in the magnetically shielded room.

 This room is designed out of a special metal that keeps out electric and magnetic noise

 so that we can measure the magnetic fields your brain produces.

 The room also has a special camera that even works in the dark and a two-way intercom system

 Unlike an MRI, there aren't any loud noises and there isn't any radiation.

 There are two sensors that need to be placed next to your ears and three sensors will need

 The sensors on your forehead are secured with a special kind of tape and these sensors don't

 After you have your sensors on, you'll be asked to lie back on the comfortable recording

 Using a digital pen that does not mark, your head shape is measured and put into the computer.

 This image lets doctors merge the data collected onto your MRI.

 It's very important to remain still while this image is being taken.

 The recording helmet is designed to fit around your head while the recording is taking place.

 The helmet moves back and forth on an air-based system so that it can comfortably fit while

 For each type of mapping, you'll be asked to complete simple tasks including listening

 to words, looking at pictures, tapping a button, or lying still.

 There are language, motor, sensory, vision, and seizure studies.

 Depending on which parts of the study a doctor ordered, the recording lasts anywhere from

 Language mapping is an important part of the magnetic source imaging study.

 You'll be asked to remember a list of words to see how many you can recognize.

 You can have breaks in between the list of words so it makes it easier to do.

 If your doctor has ordered visual field mapping for your MSI study, you'll be asked to look

 It is important to remain still and focus on the picture for this part of the study.

 During the motor mapping portion of the study, sensors will be applied to your arms.

 The sensors are attached with an easily removable tape and gel.

 The sensory portion of the study requires small air-operated finger squeezing discs

 The squeezing is completely painless and if you want, you may go to sleep for this part.

 Epilepsy and seizure patients may have the epilepsy portion of the study ordered.

 If your doctor has ordered this, you will have an EEG recording as well as an MSI recording.

 You will come out of the magnetically shielded room and an EEG technician will attach the

 Once the EEG hookup is finished, the MSI recording will continue.

 There are some important things you can do to make your MSI study go smoothly even before

 Be sure to follow your doctor's directions regarding what medications to take.

 Be sure to leave all hair products out of your hair after you've washed it.

 It's okay to use shampoo, but please don't use any hairspray or hair gels and leave your

 Dress comfortably and don't wear anything with metal such as jewelry, watches, belt

 The MSI suite has a changing room and lockers that you can use.

 Following these simple guidelines will make your MSI study go quickly and smoothly.

 Hi, I'm Garm from RainChains.com and today I wanted to show you how easy it is to install

 This is what we call our gutter attachment piece, and this is a V-hook.

 It comes for free with every RainChain that we sell, and it's very easy to hang from your

 This is a RainChain, and this is the way it's going to look when it's hanging from the gutter.

 I have a little piece of gutter here today, and I'm going to show you where this goes.

 Basically, the V-hook is going to go in here, and the RainChain is going to hang from that.

 It's a little more secure, and I'm going to show you how to install that next.

 It's a little bit fancier way of hanging your RainChain from the gutter, and I'm going to

 The pieces for this, this is the outlet tube that's going to basically sit in your gutter.

 It provides a really nice tube that directs all the water down onto your RainChain.

 It also comes with this plate that you can slide the whole assembly into in case your

 hole in the gutter is very, very large and this won't quite cover it.

 Now I'm going to show you how to actually install it into the gutter itself.

 Now I'm going to show you how to put the installation kit in and hang your RainChain from your gutter.

 I've got a little piece of gutter here so we don't have to climb up on the roof with

 It might have a little flange on it from your downspout, but it doesn't matter.

 You might use a little bit of caulking in there to make sure it seals real well.

 The RainChain itself is going to hang from the middle of that bolt.

 I'm going to take the other nut here and that goes on the other side of the bolt.

 As you can see, our installation kit makes a really nice outlet.

 All the water will go down through the chain this way instead of splashing out to the sides.

 Because it goes through the bolt here, it's real easy to take it off either for cleaning

 or because you're going to have some work done on your house or whatever reason you

 Now in order to tell if your reed valve work, does work, what you want to do is you want

 to take your cage, I've already cleaned the edges of the valve itself so that it should

 be plain flat, but we can visually check that by taking the reed and dumping it in a little

 bit of water and putting the reed onto, hard to do with one hand here, put the reed on,

 now you can see the dark right, see the water underneath, the water has got a little bit

 of oil on it, it should seal like that, now watch, should be a dark, it should seal all

 areas, now you can see where the reed has, now that's a good seal right there, now let's

 check the other side, what the hell are you doing, yeah go ahead drink it I dare you,

 I dare you, cat, no pizza for you, now we can check the other side by taking the reed

 and dipping it in to the solution and we put it on again and see if it sticks like it should,

 and here's the other side, that's not quite as sticky as I want it, one problem is the

 grey moto seal that I have right down here, I have to take that off, then we try our other

 reed valve, we'll put it on, and you can see it does seal right there, so this method of planing

 the surface of the reed cage is a real, just a small trick that will really help in making your

 reeds do a better job of sealing, opening, it will make for a crisper throttle response, a crisper

 mid-range, a lot higher RPM, and then if you get the boysen reed valve material, that's what you're

 paying for, is this all the technology built into this, just take your old reeds, it came with the

 CT valve, get yourself a CR125 boysen replacement reed, and copy a reed valve out of it, and it'll

 work perfect, I'll put that on there, and that should stick, I got to put a little bit more water on there to make it stick, but once you have both sides totally clean,

 and it'll work a lot better, and that's my tip of the day on reed valves, and I probably should have had this on a white background, instead of a pink background, because it pink just doesn't, it's not a good background for filming this, but I didn't have a pink, white towel, alright I'm going to rebuild this, and we'll take a look and see what it looks like after I rebuild it.

 Today I'm going to show you how to wear the Instant Facelift Trick.

 It's the face neck lift because that's what bothers me the most about my face.

 the barb on the inside next to your skin so if someone goes to hug you, you don't feel

 kind of play around with it to see if one knot works for you or no knots.

 Just kind of play around with it until you find out how much pull you like.

 I've been using the Moores version of this item for a long time and I really like them.

 A dolly is what you'll commonly see on the harvest trail when a semi-trailer is pulled

 can find a donor truck in your kid's toy box or maybe you have another type of donor model

 wheel plate and then the slider, the fifth wheel slider part, you'll need the drill bit

 is a fairly simple process, but I know for some people that aren't toy gurus or as nerdy

 I've already messed one up by doing that, so I'm going to just glue these pieces together.

 You'll notice on this part that one part is longer than the other.

 the whole piece you can assemble wherever you wish on that frame.

And I choose to make mine just, I'm just leveling that up and that's

 some of these, break some of this in here because I was using a drill bit that's not

 to take this off and what I'll do is I'm going to paint mine gloss black.

 the morning till the afternoon and I wanted to show you how I prepare my meal for the entire day.

 So I just had a smoothie, my morning smoothie with some protein.

 and I make my smoothie out of bananas and today I had banana with acai berry.

It gave me this whole pot of quinoa and I'm just gonna put it in my Tupperware.

 And I love quinoa because you know it's got a nice flavor, it's got really like nutty flavor

 and you can make quinoa either salty or you can make it sweet and today I really wanna have,

This is a coconut spread and it's so good I can eat it by like tablespoons but you

It's really simple and I'm just gonna cover it and I'm gonna put it in my

 he's got something with his eyes and he's got mats and things like that so.

 And there's girls, Ashley and Nicole who doesn't want to be seen.

 So guys have a great Monday and leave me a comment on Facebook and on YouTube because I'm

 here all day just reading your comments and just share with me what you guys do for your meal.

 As my day approaches, I require one, no, two virgin sacrifices each day, or I, Epic Guy

 Randy, will lay waste to your Halloween party with some of these cocktails I'm going to

 They look as good as they taste, and there's something here for everyone.

 No matter how large or small your party, you can make it stand out using my recipe.

 We are quickly approaching one of my favorite holidays of the year, Halloween of course,

 and what can really make or break a good Halloween party is whether or not the cocktails and

 the snacks are themed along with the atmosphere of the rest of the evening.

 So I've put together a series of Halloween cocktail videos here to help you out with

 Tonight, I want to show you how to make what I call Dracula's Curse.

 As with all of my Halloween cocktails, you've got to start with a fabulous piece of glassware.

 This is a giant glass goblet that just feels fabulous holding onto it.

 As with several of my other cocktails, I'm going to sugar the rim.

 Once enough of the simple syrup has dripped off of there, you can scrape a little bit

 off of it if you need to, because you just need a little bit to make it sticky.

 We're going to build this cocktail in a shaker, so I'm going to move this over a little bit.

 This is a fairly large drink, so it's going to last a little while.

 Then as the last touch, just like the Purple Potion, you can put a piece of dry ice in

 It's big enough that nobody's really going to get it on their lip.

 If you can get a piece of dry ice in there, it's going to sink right to the bottom.

 And remember that on Halloween, if you're not getting scared or scaring somebody else,

 The demand for milk bread is getting higher and I thought of doing an updated version

 For that recipe I am using 300 grams of bread flour with 30 grams of sugar and 8 grams yeast

 and 25 grams milk powder, half a cup of milk and half a teaspoon of salt, 1 egg and 50

 For that I used 20 grams of bread flour with half a cup of water and I cooked it and put

 So to start this recipe, so into the mixing bowl I am going to add the bread flour and

 So the sugar, if you like a bit of sweetness you can add 30 grams more sugar and the milk

 Next while mixing add the salt, the egg and the whipping cream.

 After adding everything add the milk little by little and keep on kneading about 15 minutes.

 When you do this if you find the dough is a bit sticky don't worry about that.

 As I told you this dough is a bit sticky dough so what I am going to do now before putting

 it into a greased bowl, take it out first onto the bench top, adding a bit of flour

 onto the bench top like this and transfer the prepared dough that you kneaded for 15

 minutes and put it onto the bench top and put more flour on that and start working on

 If you can flour your hands too then start kneading it on the bench top in one way like

 So transfer that into a greased bowl and leave it in a warm place until double in size.

 The milk bread dough is ready so again put some flour onto the bench top and put the

 dough onto the bench and flour again on top and flour both hands and then press it down

 So flour again and then roll it to a rectangular shape like this.

 So fold it to the middle and fold it from the other side to the middle and then again

 Next roll it to the other end like this and leave it in a greased loaf pan until it double

 So what I am going to do is to brush the tops with eggs and going to bake this on 180 Celsius

 I finished baking the bread and it is very soft and moist and if I open one to show you

 how it looks like this is how it is and it is really nice and soft and hope you will

 may want to check the Asian food aisle because they usually will sell these little packets

These little bread bites are so easy to make, they're cheesy, they're

 soft, they're little, they're so cute, and they are best when they just come out of the

In a bowl, combine 1 cup of tapioca starch, along with 1 teaspoon

 of baking powder, 1 cup of crumbled or shredded queso fresco, usually I use about 6 ounces,

 it resembles a mealy, crumbly texture, kind of like the topping on a peach crumble.

 you want the dough to be a little bit crumbly, but you also want it to be slightly sticky.

 tap water, and I like to do this step adding 1 to 2 tablespoons at a time.

 me to work the dough and see where it is in terms of holding together, or maybe too

If your dough happens to be too wet, you will notice that it starts

 spreading out and it resembles more like silly putty than a crumbly texture.

 just sprinkle a little bit of more tapioca starch to your dough and continue to knead.

 for about 15 minutes until they're golden and soft and delicious.

 Well, this is a very special one today for all lovers of pizza and Italy and beauty

 Donatella has brought in the most celebrated of all, pizzaiola napoletana Enzo Coccia.

 Everything that's here I shipped over from Naples, Mount Vesuvius, the sand, the marble, the rock.

 And I also shipped over Stefano Ferraro himself who built this oven from the ground up.

 So the most important thing about my pizza that we're making and pizza napoletana is there are very few ingredients.

 It's just water, salt, a very small amount of yeast, and we use caputo flour which is considered the best from Naples.

 Neapolitan pizza is not stretched out with a rolling pin, it's stretched out by hand.

 And this technique which Enzo makes look so simple is one of the hardest things to master.

 These tomatoes are from Mount Vesuvius and have a volcanic, ashy minerality to the tomatoes.

 And then we're going to cook it and when we take it out I'm putting some stracciatella which is the inside of burrata and arugula because I always like to eat my pizza with salad.

 Basically we were having a Nerf war with it, we break guns during Nerf wars.

 I primed it back during an epic sniping war and the barrel was not glued in tight enough

 So now the barrel moves back and forth and that means the seal doesn't really work.

 So we need to fix that and while we are fixing it we will tell you exactly how to single

 Ok so the first time we just glued the barrel straight into here and that's kind of why

 So we have a new strategy here and we are going to show you exactly how to do that.

 This will be your stock long shot if you are starting a brand new one.

 We were looking for a catch spring and we happened to unscrew this and we found this

 So we are going to go out to the bandsaw real quick and cut along this first ridge and we

 So first you need to cut 8.5 inches of your cpvc then we will go on to the next step.

 Then you also put e-tape there and there to get this to have a tight fit.

 The best thing to use would be epoxy putty but we are poor and we don't have any of that

 We got a t-joint, end cap and then this is however long you want.

 Ok so we fixed the part of our long shot that was broken but because we want you guys to

 know how to single one we are going to show you the rest of it.

 The rest of this is already done we are just going to show you what we did.

 I think it's the ace 49 but that doesn't seem right considering the size of it but it's

 So you are going to take your half inch cpvc and oh this is really messy.

 Okay so since we lost the original o-ring in right there we are now using a little bit

 The industrial spring the plunger rod also has a double o-ring and a little bit of teflon

 So after you do that you just screw it back together which we will do off camera.

 Okay so we have to put the barrel in and we will put in the rest of the internals for

 Okay so this is a quick shot of the internals before I put it together.

 Trigger, plunger tube, barrel, catch, timing indicator, couple other things.

 So our question today is if you were trying to sell a gun on ebay and your parents were

 worried about liability issues what would you say to convince them otherwise?

 I'm going to be a Dia de los Muertos doll, also known as a Dia de los Muertos skull.

 And me and my boyfriend are actually going at the same thing as a couple, I guess you

 And we're going to be in full costume and full face makeup, so it should be really exciting.

 The reason why we're going to be this for Halloween is because his family is from Mexico

 and we're going to go to his family's Halloween party and there's a Mexican theme to it.

 I decided to do voiceovers with this because I'm sick and I don't want to be coughing to

 And this is my first time using these products in the video and it's the first time me doing

 And I'm also going to put a link to the picture below that I used as my inspiration.

 I'm not going to put it in this video in case there's copyright issues with it.

 And I'll also have a link to a post below showing better quality pictures and all the

 And I'll probably put pictures of my full costume, you can't really see it well right

 But this top is from Mexico, it's my boyfriend's mother's top and she's allowing me to borrow

 I got this ring that has a skull with a rose on it and it actually glows in the dark so

 And I'm wearing a couple of hair bows in my hair that have flowers attached to it.

 And I got these earrings when I went to Mexico with this family this past summer.

 I use products from Krylon and Mehron and I use my Mark brushes.

 Thanks so much for stopping by and please check out MakeupbylauraP.com for the post

 which will include better quality pictures and a list of the products used.

 And please post comments below what you're going to be for Halloween and feel free to

 Ok so right here I'm using a small hydra sponge moistened with some water and then I was using

 my Ben Nye Color Cake Foundation in white for the face and body.

 And I'm just putting that all over my face basically blending it out nicely with the

 And then after that I just use my Ben Nye liquid set, a waterproof mixing liquid.

 Next I'm just using my Krylon Aqua Color Palette which has 6 primary colors in it and I'm using

 And I'm already working on the flower shape for my eye, making the 3 petals.

 After I outline the petals for the flower I'm filling in each petal with yellow.

 And as I'm doing this I'm making sure to cover my eyebrows really well and get the color

 And then I can go back and redefine the shape of the petals with more black from that Krylon

 Next I'm using toothpicks to make 3 lines on each petal to give the flower more definition.

 And here I just add a white dot with the ends of q-tips to my eyelids on top of the green

 And here I'm taking some more black to make the shape for my nose.

 Next I'm taking some green and I'm making little shapes around my nose, which is just

 And I'm making teeth basically on top of my lips to kind of mimic a skull, but a more

 And then I'm making a horizontal line on both sides of my lips and bringing that out,

 And I'm using a picture right there for inspiration, which I'll show you guys.

 Next I'm using some blue and I'm using that to begin to fill in the teeth marks I made.

 If you look real closely, I made another set of scallops, if you will, above where I made

 my teeth and that's the area where I'm actually filling in the color.

 I'm filling in blue on two teeth and on either side I'm filling in green.

 And there, as I said, I'm filling in the last set for the teeth in yellow on either side,

 Now I'm taking some black and redefining the areas in case the black might have gotten

 And now I'm just going to finish up the bottom half of my flower, doing the same exact process,

 After I fill it in, using the yellow from the Krylon palette, I'm going to add some

 hash marks, again, in black for the bottom of the petals and red right underneath my

 I hope you guys enjoyed this day of the dead look that I created for Halloween and if you

 would like to see better quality of the pictures from this look or a list of the products used,

 please be sure to check out and subscribe to my website, MakeupByLaurenP.com, as well

 today we're going to replace the handle here for my Mazda 6 hatchback it's a

 little rusty and barely as you can tell work yeah it definitely needs replacing

 so we bought a new one she's down here from Mazda there's the part number still

 got the shakes okay so the first thing you need to do is actually go underneath

 here take out well the first thing if you want sliding up on me should tie it

 down just pull the top of this push that out and then you got to take out

 it's a 10 millimeter okay we got those screws out and one thing I forgot to

 mention before I see those screws that are moving there you can take those out

 they go to this cover right here to get them out and take it out and get access

 to this and see why it's not coming out oh this clip it's gonna be pulled back

 in the shakes like crazy today I must need something just putting your arms up

 in there don't help differences here definitely shot I've oiled it on and on

 but I think really rusty so let's be like night and day for me using my

 trunk so let's put this on the outside it's got a seal right here so make sure

 let's get some white grease I put on it let's go get paper towel so I cleaned

 that up there best they could it's gonna be like got the neighbors dogs

 going nuts go right gosh knows what okay that's should clean it up a lot more but

 I'm definitely not and then I gotta be you just go away so just put that

 through there so now right underneath and put screws back on it okay okay so

 we got it bolted up and put this here and we're gonna put that right about see

 the marks in it you can see if it's there's little marks like it's clean so

 I'm gonna put that right back in those slots like that lock it up test it all

 out we do still have to install this here we'll do that gotta love that left

 open so long it works beautiful and that's how you install the rear latch on

 taken it to a couple of festivals outside and we've beaten it up, which is great, and

 that it's all dirty and we want to change the tape and when we take the tape off it's

I noticed that when I came home after burning that in the first year, it wasn't

 just sticky but there was a thin layer of playa all the way around at the edges of the

 I would just make a video so that other people who maybe are doing the same thing and have

 the same problem can get an idea of how to clean up your LED hoop so it's just like brand

So what we'll do of course is first remove the tape and hopefully if you're lucky it's

 still kind of in one piece because if it's been skimmed across the ground enough for

 sharp objects it might have a streak in it which means that as you pull it you'll end

Once you've removed all of your tape, take a knife that is fairly

 sharp but something that you're not going to mind if it gets dulled.

 that's expensive or that you plan on cutting any tomatoes with in the future because it's

 garbage bag and lay it down because what will happen is you'll do this and all the little

 shavings and all these little bits are going to fall on your floor so unless you want to

 sweep up, either just do it on a kitchen floor rather than carpet so it'll be a lot

 way to remove grime or dirt on your LED hoop so maybe try that out too if you see some.

 I bet you could probably get it anywhere, home hardware, Lowe's, Canadian Tire, that

 told me it takes off all kinds of gooey, goopy things and maybe it works.

 I might also recommend doing this when somebody is in the house so that they get to enjoy

 this lovely, lovely sound as you scrape the blade across the tubing because it's always

 And quick little strokes can help just to get the lines so you don't necessarily have

 As well, you always have the option of sanding it which is a great idea.

 when I purchased my PSI hoops because they sand the inside so it's grippy and it doesn't

 affect the ability for the light to come through the hoop whatsoever.

 So it's always good to turn it on before you tape it, that way you know where your lights

 outside and then it will have to cross the light, it will have to cross your LED, but

 visible to the viewer and it's only covered on the inside which is closer to your body.

 So statistically it should in theory be brighter depending on the coverage and what not.

 So that's how I would tape it if I was going to tape this, but I don't think I'm going

 to because I'm giving it away to a friend so maybe I would let her decide if she wants

 So guys I was getting ready to make up some of those little baggies that you

 guys seen me eat in my last video here that was in that little cup that I

 cooked on that little wood stove and what I want to share with you here is I

 got this idea the exact same recipe you guys can look it up from another YouTube

 channel called this or my survival spot I believe he may have website I don't

 know he hasn't put anything up in well over a year got this I think two years

 ago something like that is when I picked up on this I was trying to get some

 ideas on some cheap meals I could do while I'm out camping and this is one of

 them but anyway it's really simple to do it does for me at least to get the

 lentils which are these little discs right here to get these to cook down to

 where they're soft enough it does take a little bit of time and they'll swell up

 quite a bit so we'll use lentils the recipe calls for a half a cup of lentils

 you need to know how to spell that I just got the cheap great value brand

 lentils and penne pasta or got they I don't know so that pasta looks just like

 this here and you know this stuff does take a little bit of time for the water

 to absorb into it so it's not too chewy or too hard for you but it's so simple

 to do so anyway all I've got is a half cup measuring cup here and we just do a

 half a cup of lentils and a half a cup of pasta per bag of these rice sides and

 you can do like I've got here cheddar and broccoli and see here herbs and

 butter and there's mushrooms so you guys just use your imagination

 there's a Cajun sides I've tried almost all of these and kind of ran out so

 we're gonna make another one up I've just got another bowl here so we'll just

 go ahead and get started I'm just gonna take a half a cup of the lentils and

 we'll do approximately a half cup we're not getting too serious about it

 penne and we just open up a bag so one bag of the sides and we just mix that up

 we'll go ahead and start mixing that up so once we dump that in there just stir

 it up really good and I'm a pretty big big guy but there's no way I know this

 doesn't look like a lot in this little in this bowl but there's no way I could

 eat this whole thing definitely got to split it in half and put it in two

 separate baggies I was sticking it in just those nice ziploc baggies and you

 know crunching up real tight like he had showed in that his video on my

 survival spot but I'm gonna try to vacuum pack it we'll see how that works

 here's the baggie we're gonna go ahead and try to vacuum pack this up

 what we've done here guys I'll show you we got two bags and went ahead and wrote

 the date and what it what flavor it was so we had an idea so this is very

 compact I mean compared to the size of my hand you can see and definitely trust

 me all this swells up and it is a very hearty I mean just you can fill it in

 your stomach kind of meal and I'll show you what we're doing with the baggies to

 make them this small so we're just cutting a length this is a pretty wide

 bag the normal size I can't remember whatever 11 inch bag and we're just

 sealing both ends I sealed this in and we still this in and you can see the

 crease in the middle we're just folding in half and cutting it so we'll just

 make two separate little baggies and then we'll just pour our contents in and seal

 this edge on both of them all right guys so what I ended up here was ten different

 meals these there's ten different bags so two for each one of these rice side

 bags so I did five of them and that was exactly enough for a 16 ounce bag of

 lentils and I still have half of the pasta left so if I were to buy another

 bag of the 16 ounce lentils then I'd be able to make for say ten of them so the

 bag of pasta or the box of pasta was a dollar the bag of lentils was a dollar

 and each one of these bags of sides were a dollar so what I've got in here right

 You have your water tank on top and below that is the toilet bowl.

 These two are attached by nuts, bolts, washers and rubber grommets.

 If you take these apart it can take you hours to put them back together

 and you will probably have to replace the bolts and nuts because of rust

 as well as the rubber washers and grommets because they turn to mush

 tank by placing one of our new flush adapter tubes over the overflow tube.

 Because most manufacturers cut down on the size of the overflow tube

 you are not getting the maximum amount of water necessary to get a good flush.

 But if you place a new flush adapter tube over your current overflow tube

 you will increase the amount of water flowing into your water tank

 A good test to see if your bowl can use more water is to fill up a pitcher of water

 You can check this difference in water level by first marking the bowl with a crayon

 If the water table comes up to where it should be this means your water valve is

 This is your old standard water valve or yours may look like this.

 It takes up less space and puts out twice as much water as most mechanical

 It even sends more water directly to the toilet bowl through this larger rubber hose

 it fills up the bowl faster before sending everything down the drain.

 Having more water in your bowl solves the majority of flushing problems.

 With the new flush high-speed valve and new flush adapter tubes

And then it gets a little different because the ending is drawn out.

 You do it seven times, then on the eighth time, you can do first fret power chord, first

 fret A string power chord, second fret, first fret, and then second fret hold it.

That's second fret E string, the first fret, and then once more, and once

 more, and do it again, then go to the open E string power chord.

 Basically you will need a regular bottle of ketchup, but make sure that it has some sort of wrapper or label on top.

Do this carefully because you will be needing it for later, so save it.

 Mark a square or circle on any part of the area where the label used to be.

 Depending on the size is how much messier this prank will turn out to be.

 Using a cutting tool, remove that piece, leaving just an opening.

 If you want to, you can make more openings, just make sure it's in the label's area.

 Remove the cap and with clear hot glue, seal off the hole from the bottom.

 Make sure it's enough to withstand the pressure from the bottle when it's squeezed.

 Lastly, twist it back on and now you have easily booby trapped a bottle of ketchup.

 With the hole in the cap completely sealed off, all the ketchup will only have one exit, the one you made.

 Today's the 18th of August, 2010, and the HeartGoldSoulSilver Booster Box Undaunted has been released.

 Back, it's got a Skarmory, Rayquaza, Houndoom and Jolteon on it.

 Alright, I'll just show you the packs before I put them back in.

 I'm excited to share with you the best and fastest way to make fresh brewed loose leaf

 iced tea at home in just minutes with a Tekea Flash Chill iced tea maker.

 Let's go ahead and brew Tekea's Tropical Black Flash Chill iced tea.

 Start by opening two tea packs designed to ensure the most flavorful iced tea.

 The foil packets are sealed airtight to lock in freshness and are filled with a pre-measured

 I'm using two tea packs for our two quart Flash Chill iced tea maker.

 You'll only need one tea pack for the one quart Flash Chill iced tea maker.

 Our large infuser provides ample room for tea leaves to expand and brew to fully release

 Lower the tea infuser into the hot water, leaving room for steam to vent.

 On the back of every Tekea Flash Chill iced tea box, you'll find exact directions for

 When the tea is finished brewing, remove the infuser from the lid.

 Twist the airtight lid to seal and shake for about 30 seconds or until the ice is melted.

 In just minutes, you can enjoy the refreshing flavors of fresh brewed iced tea.

 Since the Flash Chill iced tea maker is airtight and leak proof, you can even store it on its

 When you're ready to serve, simply twist open, aligning the arrow on the lid with the pour

 the description box below or you can press that little card that just popped up on your

 got a little template at the bottom and I'll link that in the description box below.

They're two different sizes if you can see there, I just think it

 light on and that'll help it to develop a bit of a shell so it helps it not to crack

 8 minutes and then I'll rotate them and bake them for another 8 minutes.

 I've got some white chocolate here and my heavy cream and I've got the recipe for this

 it's very finicky, you won't be able to handle gold leaf with your fingers so try to use

I'm just pressing it down with my finger to make sure that it sticks to the macaroon

I've got my wafer paper here and I've got a little butterfly punch.

 some little butterflies but I printed my wafer paper first with these little black polka

Hopefully these will be available for purchase soon as well for my website.

 pressing it down using the back of a brush here with some edible glue.

 the centre of my macaroon cookie with that ganache that we made before using a disposable

 And that's how you decorate macaroons using gold leaf and wafer paper butterflies.

 to my channel, I upload a new video every Tuesday and Saturday.

 I do want to give you guys a quick look-see of the inside of those.

 So what we want to do is lay it on our cutting board and use the flat side of the knife and

 Now when cutting your garlic clove, you want to cut off that little tip right there because

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to roll up these leaves, put this all together.

 Now you can use dry herbs as well and that's about two teaspoons.

 Now we need some parsley leaves that I've also already picked off and pre-washed.

 So I'm going to get those together and give them a good little rough chop.

 So now I'm going to go ahead and add my two cans of low sodium diced tomatoes.

 Now we want to reduce it to a simmer and let it sit for about 12 to 15 minutes.

 Now I'm going to set the alarm for 12 more minutes so it can finish out cooking.

 Now you can add fat free parmesan cheese, already grated, or mozzarella cheese.

 For a vegetarian variation, instead of the chicken, try roasted vegetables, zucchini,

 Your choices are endless when you have a wonderful marinara sauce and whole wheat pasta.

 Hi guys, welcome back to another of my English videos for those of you who don't know me

So today I'm gonna teach you how to make a heart pepperoni pizza

 This pizza is very easy to make and the greatest thing is that you don't need a heart pan

 And since we're doing a pepperoni pizza, we're going to learn to say in Spanish

 So if you want to learn how to make this delicious heart pepperoni pizza

 The first thing you have to do is you have to preheat your oven to 425 degrees Fahrenheit

 And then you're going to mix two teaspoons of active dry yeast and you're gonna add two tablespoons of sugar

 And we're going to add also one cup of warm water, okay, we're gonna mix it very well

 Then we're going to add half a teaspoon of salt one tablespoon of olive oil and

You can use regular flour, but I personally like better the bread flour how it tastes

 You first add the first then the second and then the third after the second cup of bread flour

 You're gonna see that it gets harder to mix but you can use your hands

 Then what you're gonna do is you're going to turn your pizza dough into a little ball and you want to add into a different

 Bowl some olive oil and we're gonna place our pizza dough there and we're gonna let it rest for one hour in some place warm

 Next what you're gonna do is you're gonna cut it in half because this can make two pizzas two heart pizzas

 we're gonna make just one then we're gonna spread some flour into our board and

 We're gonna place our pizza dough and we're gonna spread it with our hands and then you can also use this

 We're gonna add a little bit of olive oil to a pizza pan or whatever pan you have

 And for this part you want you can leave your pizza like that a regular circle pepperoni pizza

 So you're going to um grab a wax paper and you're gonna fold it into a half and then you're gonna cut it like this

 Okay, you're gonna place it into the dough and you're gonna cut your heart like this

 You want to make sure you close the corners from the pizza dough?

 After closing all the corners from the pizza, you're going to add tomato sauce

 After spreading the cheese all over the pizza you're going to add your pepperonis.

 It's very very delicious and it's perfect for Valentine's or for any kind of anniversary

 If you did, please remember to like it thumbs up comment and also to subscribe.

 Hey everyone, it's Clarissa and today I'm going to be doing a very very requested video.

 This is going to be my warm up routine and so many of you guys have been asking me to

 Also don't forget to check out my second channel so you don't miss out on any of my other videos.

 I'm doing a couple really funny videos in the future on that channel and I also do some

 more videos about my life and my morning routine and my night routine and my room tour.

 This is the link right here and it will also be linked in the description below.

 Also just one more thing, don't forget to stay until the very end of this video so you

 I always start off with some easy upper body, arm, and shoulder stretches.

 It's very important to start warming up with light moving stretches rather than deep static

 stretches so you warm up your muscles correctly and don't injure yourself.

 Once I finish up my upper body stretches, I move on to stretch out my legs with some

 Now I stretch out my back with seal stretch, child's pose, downwards dog, and a simple

 Next to activate my core, I do middle, right, and left planks for 30 seconds each.

 Now to warm up my feet, I do 30 ankle rolls to the inside and 30 to the outside on each

 Then to engage my turnout, I open my feet to first position 20 times.

 Now that I'm warm enough, I stretch out my middle splits in a turned out and turned in

 position then stretch out my turnout in a frog pose with an arched back.

 Next I go into my right and left splits and then I stretch out my over splits on all sides.

 Now to finish up, I do seated pigeon pose to stretch out my hips on both sides then

 Don't forget to give it a thumbs up if you did and also leave your video suggestions

 Hi guys, as I'm sitting here I'm kind of wondering if this is the best light to do this in

I'll tell you the colours and the techniques and we can do what we can do

 I tried to do this earlier on but my camera's been playing up so let's see how we go.

Okay, first of all I have put a primer on my eyelid and I'm going to put an overall

 Okay, now the white which is Ivory Box, I'll just put that on my brow bone just to highlight

I do use an old lipstick brush that I never use for a lipstick brush.

 But I use a tiny, tiny, tiny one because it's quite good for like the eye socket and things.

 So I'll put the darker red Berry Ice on the eye socket with this brush.

 This was supposed to be a lipstick brush but I've never used it as a lipstick brush.

When I use this generally I'll put it on and then I like blend it in with this but because

 it's just kind of a fine look that I'm looking for, I'm gonna get the pencil because it's real waxy

 Just gonna make them pop and that's when the, what was this one called?

 myself but this makes such a big difference I can't tell you when you put all those back.

 I'm surprised I didn't put myself in the eye trying to use this one when it's a time delay.

 Hey everyone, I wanted to show you this real quick tip and it's really kind of a cool trick.

 I'm working on that jewelry box lid and I've already got the base of it all stained but I

I want to put a darker band around here and kind of fade it in and leave

 here, calico walnut and I've already put one coat of red oak stain on top of the walnut to kind of

 spray paint, black spray paint and I'm just going to kind of spray around the band here.

 I want that paint to kind of flow over into the top a little bit, not too much.

 If you get a little over and make a mistake it's no big deal because we're going to

 immediately take, I've got, now I'm going to take some midwax stain, this is early American

 and I'm not mixing it up, I'm taking some of that red off the bottom because I want to kind of give

 this a little bit of a red tone and I'm just going to brush right over the top of everything

 Everything I just painted I'm going to put a coat of this on and then I'm going to put a real light

 I'm going to kind of get some of that off my brush and then I'm going to pull everything I got here

 and then I'm going to pull everything I got here into the center.

 you could probably just brush it right across the top, I'm not using that as a pattern or anything.

 I just kind of want to pull some of that excess off the sides into the center

 and it does kind of go from dark to lighter, sorry I got the garage door open, it does kind

 of go from a dark to a lighter tone and I'll just let that sit for, you know, typically I'd let that

 sit for a good minute and a half, two minutes and then what I'm going to do is I start on the outside

 edges with a cloth and I don't want to take all that paint off so I'm not pushing real hard, I'm

 just trying to get most of the stain off of it and a little bit of the paint you get a little

 And this way you can do, kind of create those shadowing effects, darker areas to lighter areas

 and it's inexpensive, you know, I bought that paint for I don't know 99 cents or something on sale,

 it's a, it's an oil base and then I'm going to kind of just come through here and rub off the top

 and leave the sides a little bit, I don't want to take everything off the sides

 and then just sweep back and forth across the, across those side areas there

 to kind of create a little bit of a shadowing effect that kind of brings that dark and fades it in.

 But what you end up with, and this needs to dry yet, is a really neat effect where it's dark,

 where it's dark here on the edges and then it kind of lightens up in the center and that

 didn't cover up all that really cool grain from that calcite, but it's still kind of a nice

 dark, dark color, but it didn't cover up all that really cool grain from that calico bookmatch here in the center.

 So that's a neat technique to use after this dries, a couple coats of pre-catalyzed lacquer

 and then I'll sand it out and put a coat of wax on it and it'll have that really nice deep luster

 and I'll have some red coming through and still show all that beautiful walnut grain.

 Try moving your fingers, then your hand, and then your forearm.

 Even typists who do not use the home row as a base position often curl their fingers.

 Now let your fingers out into the natural curved position and notice how much easier

 This means that you can't line up all your fingers on the home row to navigate the keyboard,

 which isn't necessary since the bumps on the F and J keys are sufficient.

 The reason finger curling causes tension is that when we curl, we pull on long flexor

 It pulls tightly over the wrist and fingers, limiting their movement.

 Clearly this is not a muscle that should be used, meaning that we should never curl our

 At the keyboard, when the fingers are in their natural curve, they are moved by short flexors

 Could you show when you do the middle finger when you depress the key, that's where the

 So you can't change the shape of the fingers, the shape of the hands.

 Once again, you can see more in-depth explanations and demonstrations in the complete Healthy

 And while incorporating some of these changes may seem to slow you down at first, once you

 use them correctly and consistently, you will be able to type speedily and without

I just want to start off by saying the weather in Melbourne today has been really weird.

 And if you've got one, it's great to use a cleanup product like liquid palisade.

 then want to come in with a layer of the pink in the middle and then a layer of the maroon down the

I'm then adding liquid palisade around my cuticles to protect the skin and to help with the

So once your polish and your cleanup product is dry, you then want to come

 in with the sponge and gently transfer the polish onto the nail like so.

 you're happy with how the gradient looks, come in with a pair of tweezers and peel off your cleanup

I'm then grabbing some nail polish remover and a cleanup brush and I'm

 just going to clean around the cuticles for any excess that was left over.

 a cleanup product, then this is where you'll probably need to do a fair bit more cleanup.

 can use q-tips as well, they're also quite helpful, or just cotton balls or cotton pads.

 Hi, my name is Debbie Tlauch and today I'm going to show you how to make a melt art canvas.

 The first thing we're going to do is take our tissue wrap and use a glue stick and just

 We're going to adhere it to our mini canvas, apply glue to the sides, and then flap down

 Next thing we're going to do is use our mister and just mist the surface of the canvas.

 We're going to take our distress paint and just give it a couple of dabs here or there.

 And the distress paint is reactive with water so we're just going to spray a little bit

 more water, we're going to watch it wick, and we're going to make it drip and do its

 And then once we get it the way we like it, we're going to use our heat tool and dry the

 Once we're done drying, what we're going to do is dip it into the melting pot.

 What I did was pour ultra thick embossing enamel into the pot up until the fill line

 and I squirted a couple of drops of the melt art heated ink into the pot.

 Be careful now because this is very hot and we're going to dip in the whole corner.

 Once it's cool, you'll be able to pull it off and you'll see the design in the uti.

 We're going to make that design pop out by using studio paint in sky blue.

 Just going to squeeze a little bit out and we're going to use our finger just to highlight

 You'll see your design pop out and if you've held it on the sides, you'll also see the

 We're going to hold the melting pot by the handles and pour a puddle of uti and we're

 going to take the heart cookie cutter and set it right in the center and let it cool.

 You can accelerate that a little bit by using a little mini fan.

 Tap it on the outside and actually tap it on the inside as well because that takes a

 Once you think your uti is set up when it doesn't make an indentation anymore, turn

 the whole texture tread over and press right down into the cookie cutter.

 The excess piece can be used as a frame, but if you don't want to use that, you can put

 So we've got our little heart here and what we're going to do this time to make the raised

 So we'll just use our fingers to apply and we'll see the design pop out.

 Now we're going to take our canvas and we're going to take the Multi Medium in MAD, just

 give a little squeeze, and we're going to adhere an embellishment on the side a little

 You can use different texture treads, heated inks, Perfect Pearls, or paints to get different effects.

 So after you've rinsed off the tank and any decorations you might have,

 you're going to want to first place the decorations in carefully

 both the wings on, both the ailerons connected, motor on, all fitted and all done.

 on via the secondary tube which was cut and sunk inside servos and what I've done is I've

 actually cut into the top here with some lollipop sticks and then just drilled through to put

 my link rods through so the bottom servo operates the top aileron as well.

 So, as you can see the lollipops are there and we have both ailerons going up and down

 hot glued in position with link rods and adjustable rods for the elevator and the A rudder.

 Also, as I said, what I have done is I have put some foam board on the sides to support

 the two wings to keep them nice and strong and nice and sturdy.

 mounted the receiver inside the front for easy access and also so it gets a good signal.

 Propellers mounted onto a piece of wood at the front with some holes drilled through

 mounted and it's strapped down and you can't see it down there, some of the wires are down

 the back of the back there and the board is epoxied on, a piece of wooden 3 ply which

 is epoxied on which is what the wheels are bolted through, as you can see there, giving

 the wings some support because they come in either side of the wing and we should have

 some nice support for the front lower wing and for the landing gear.

 done is on the back there's a towel dragger, I've mounted a credit card, debit card, discount

 card on the back for, so it can drag on the floor as it goes along.

 Hey everyone, it's Julie and today I'll be making stuffed French toast.

 Well now that I think about it, I never read a recipe that called for numbered strawberries.

 The bar of cream cheese is best, but I ran out so I just used my bagel cream cheese.

 You can make a little pocket like I'm going to do using a serrated knife.

 And you want to make sure that the pocket is as deep as possible without cutting through

 And now this one is going to be like a peanut butter and jelly sandwich.

 And then we're going to let this bread sit for about a minute on a plate just so the

 So I added some butter to my skillet and cooked these on high heat for about two minutes on

 So we cooked them in the skillet to give them that nice color on the outside.

 But we're going to finish cooking these in the oven at 300 degrees for about 10 minutes.

 Did you notice how cute my French Toast were when they were posing?

 Like I said, you have to close your eyes while you eat these because they're that good.

 I hope you guys enjoyed this video and thank you so much for watching guys.

 Inner and outer thigh is very important as you get a little bit older because they help

 And often we have issues with falling, especially as you get up into the 70s and 80s, people

 And in order to have balance, you have to have strength on the inner and outer thigh.

 Athletes work inner and outer thigh a lot because they're weaving from one side of their

 The outer thigh, the way to work that is to make sure that your body is square so that

 And all Christina's going to do is lift her leg to the side and then bring it back down.

 You tend like you have a big resistive ball underneath your leg.

 But the idea is that you're trying to work from the hip joint rather than from the knee.

 You can do little pulses where you just drop it near the ground or move it a little higher

 You can also go front to back in order to get some workout that's slightly different.

 So there's always multiple tasks that you can do in a workout if you want, which is

 very good because what it does is allow you to get more body parts in in a shorter amount

 If you work your bicep, you need to work your tricep because your body wants to stay

 So what you're going to do for the inner thigh is you're going to take this front leg and

 If you keep your heel and your thigh a little bit away from each other, and again, take

 your hips forward so that you're perpendicular to the ground, and you're going to do the

 Because the leg is now moving towards your midline instead of away, as you did on the

 Most people don't have much experience doing inner thigh work because you don't do this

 So you generally find that your inner thigh is much weaker than your outer.

 It's nice to have them just about even in terms, again, for balance and for not falling

 The nice thing about this is you can do it while you're watching TV.

 You can do it while you're reading a book, whatever, because there's not a lot of body

 The chest we're going to work flies and a bench press for the main chest muscle.

 Okay, for those of you that would like to make your own BIOS, maybe not the quality

 Take a bud light can and cut it off about an inch off so you've got the bottom and an

 Now take another bud light can, this one's actually a Mountain Dew, but Bud Light, Mountain

 Dew, whatever, and cut it three and a half inches long, and take this one and put down

 You'll probably have to use some kind of a press or something to get it on there.

 And then take it back off and turn it over, you can see there's a little bit of a radius

 in there, that's a secret, and put it right on the can this way.

 Okay now, put it in something for a press, like this, and press it down.

 This goes fairly hard, you've got to have something for a press I think.

 And then, when you get done, you'll have, see if I can get back in the camera when you

 Now this is not foolproof, probably if you do 20 of these, you'll have maybe 5 of them

 that come out great, and the rest of them will probably be wrinkled like this one is

 But you'll get some that come out looking absolutely fantastic.

 And some of them will have more of a radius that leans in on them, they have kind of a

 sloppy top radius because the can you're using isn't that great.

 It's kind of a wide walled deal, but it'll work, and it'll make a perfectly good stove

 So I'm Tinney from Mini Bowl Design and that's the secret of making a Bud Light stove.

 Now if you want to make a BIOS, you've got to have a 10 pound die, all precision machined

 within a thousandth of an inch with a very tiny radius in the top.

 And that'll make every single one perfect, absolutely straight with no wrinkles in it.

 But you know, that's a lot of money too, and a lot of machining.

 I don't machine them myself, I hire a machine shop to make those for me.

 I'm Tinney from Mini Bowl Design, have a great day and make some stoves.

 with Rafael, your favorite thing to watch on this channel, and my favorite thing to

 we're going to recreate the most popular video I've ever made on my YouTube channel, which

 is the two-minute chocolate mug cake in the microwave kind of thing.

you, because there's a whole chapter dedicated to mug cakes on my book.

 have bought it from Australia, New Zealand, U.S., so you can definitely get this.

 is like one of my favorite colors, so I'm going to use this one.

Not even going to lie, but measuring cups are basically your best friend when you're

 making a mug cake because they just make everything so much easier.

I'm using hot chocolate mix because I'm crazy like that, but this is going

And don't judge me because I've seen what you do with the whole pizza.

 of vegetable oil or sunflower oil, whatever it is that floats your boat.

But if you are a wizard and you like crazy things, some milk chocolate chips

 or you give this a quick mix and it smells so, so delicious right now.

 in, you're basically ready to put this in the microwave and cook it for about two minutes.

 I would say check it about one minute and see if it's not over cooking or if it's not

 I said, this recipe is from my brand new book, Epic Kitchen Adventures.

 best ones are strawberry, there's peanut butter, there's Nutella.

I know some people have pre-ordered it from the US, from Australia,

 recipes from the book so you guys actually want to get it and see how much fun it is.

 I actually just really want to know because I feel like sometimes we can't always track

 thank you and I promise you when you get this in your hands, you will not be disappointed.

 Hi, I'm Shelly LeVette with ChildCareLand.com and today I'm going to show you how to make

 These are really a lot of fun for the children to make and they look beautiful.

 You just need pipe cleaners, coffee filters, markers, and a spray bottle full of water.

 You will also need something to line your work surface with and paper towels and if

 you want masking tape to hold the coffee filter down while the children are coloring them.

 Some younger children may have difficulty holding the coffee filter and coloring or

 If you have masking tape that helps secure it a little bit better.

 Again you're going to want to line your surface with something to protect it from.

 I just use wax paper and I'm going to put a coffee filter down, flatten it out, and

 Again you can put masking tape around the coffee filter to help hold it down.

 Encourage them to use different colors because that makes the flower look more bright and

 So they can just go all the way around their coffee filter like so.

 And it doesn't have to be, if there's white space in between the markers that's fine.

 And once that's done, I have a finished one here that I finished.

 When you take a spray bottle and you want to put it on a mist setting, not a stream.

 If you don't have a spray bottle you could also use paint brushes and water.

 But you want to be careful when you're painting that it doesn't become over saturated because

 What you want to do with your spray bottle is you want to spray.

 I took it off our wax paper and then I put it on a paper towel.

 I put sheets of paper towel and the children put the coffee filter on a paper towel.

 I'm working upside down so it might be a little bit more difficult.

 You fold it in half and then you would fold it in half again so there's a line or a crease

 Then you want to open it back up to that first half and you want to take a pipe cleaner and

 You could also do this with double filters if you want to make more of a fuller looking flower.

 You can have these sitting in vases in your classroom or your child care home.

 Lots of fun to make and you can make lots of them to make a full bouquet.

 I'm going to be showing you great customers how we make our world's best funnel cake.

 Now what separates our world's best funnel cake from the competition?

 We're talking less calories, less cholesterol, less grease, but we're still maintaining a

So what I'm doing right now, I'm pouring the mix into the funnel in

 a circular motion, covering all the empty spaces, and then finally connecting it with

 dough rise inside the mold so that it'd be ready to take out without falling apart.

 to be waiting for now is a nice gold color that's coming around the corners.

It's a high-quality flour that doesn't absorb the oil, so you're

 to be topping it off with some vanilla ice cream and some strawberry syrup.

 You have a lot going on, work, school, friends, kids, cocktail parties.

 Head to EverydayDriggers.tv slash lady to save 10% off orders $50 or more at LadyFootLocker.com.

 That's actually Adam's name on YouTube so I'm taking him seriously.

 Anyway, one ounce of Jaeger, one ounce of bubble vodka, so bubble gum and Jaeger Meister,

 Unless of course you polish it off because you're at a party and you're just making like

 But this bottle has been, it's served us well here on the show and I think we have another

 You can already see the level how it rises when it starts diluting.

 We should make a cocktail of the Smitty Jager Worgenman Jensen.

 Definitely, there's like you're like, yeah, there's cream soda in here, which is cool

 What I am getting is this weird hint of bubble gum that you almost get in the back of the

 It's not like at the front of your senses, but down here, like you just swallow the bubble

 So by the time you're done, you should probably find the Jager.

 I think this is one of the first cocktails where Jager is not as pronounced because you've

 By the way, for those who don't know what this is, this is a SodaStream.

 So this is cream soda made with a carbonating injection machine.

 Sometimes I bring it up and I do it on the show, but search for SodaStream on YouTube.

 It's a very neat use of Jager if you're on the edge about Jager because you're getting

 It tastes like vodka with a pretend bubble gum, but when you put it in something, all

 Okay, so the first thing I'm going to be able to do to be able to take this apart is I've

 The reason why I'm using such long screws is by being such a long screw, then it seems

 to create threads and it doesn't matter how many times I seem to be able to take it in

 And even if it does strip out, I can just put another screw hole in another screw hole.

 So now that'll allow that to come ahead just a little wee bit and then I can just take

 this screw out and then I can roll this up and I can take my belt off, which will allow

 And this top piece, I kind of got it just made so that, you know, pretty hard to explain,

 you know, in much detail how I did this, you know, it's just a flat piece and then I built

 a little box in order to do the dust collection and then kind of depending on your motor size,

 if you were to copy something like this, then just had to make a guard here to cover up

 I did bolt my motor down and, uh, but this isn't the most important part.

 This piece here, this is the, this is the part that I really like how this comes apart.

 So, uh, so just by taking just a few screws out, I can get my drum out and be able to

 If you guys have been following my videos, still just using them inch and a quarter,

 And the same thing with this little block of melamine in there, it's holding up just

 And now all I've got to do is just take this side out, but this side requires a little

 So you can see this side has the, I had to put a little, uh, a bolt is what I use just

 so that chain could run on that to keep it away from my main shaft.

 So now when I take this one out, I got to kind of turn it sideways.

 And it just, it's loose enough now that it'll just roll right off.

 And then as you can see, now I can pop my drum out, go change my sandpaper, you know,

 So, uh, what I did find too is my drum now is a little wee bit at a true.

 I don't know what happened, whether it was from sitting or whether things just kind of

 worked in, but you can see here that the sand, the saw, or the one at sanding, it's

 So, um, one thing I would probably do different is I would, I would use a, uh, a piece of

 And uh, you know, I'd still use the MDF, but I definitely use, you know, a one inch bearing

 So, uh, you guys have seen the rest of it, you know, these little blocks just fit in

 If you haven't seen the rest of this machine, just have a look at my videos and you'll see

 I'm just going to be able to, you know, put this chain back on.

 The only thing I did do since that last video is I added the sandpaper to the, uh, to the

 I left a little space in between to make it so it went pretty easy.

 So then to put this back together, I might as well put it right back together, is I've

 And actually, I guess I just put it right down in there, turn it a little bit sideways

 here to get that chain back up around it, and then just put the screws back in.

 And if these do happen to strip out, like I said, I can just put a screw in a different

 Then I'll just be able to put my motor assembly back up on there.

 Pop it up in the air and put my belt on right now while it's pushed forward a little bit.

 Then I'll just be able to, with the same screws, just push that forward.

 That one's the hardest one because that's the one that's putting the tension on the belt.

 If I needed to do some sanding, I'd put my belt guard back in place here, put a screw

 Hello, I am going to show you how to make an eggless pineapple cake

 Now you are going to take 1 1 4 cup of maida, that is all purpose flour

 Meanwhile we are going to preheat the oven at 250 and bake it at 180 degree for 20 to 25 minutes

 Now I have poured in the melted butter, next the condensed milk

 Now we are going to pour half a cup of the pineapple syrup into the mixture

 And the rest 1 1 4 cup we are going to keep it aside to spread it over the cooked cake

 Since the condensed milk is sweet and the canned pineapple syrup is sweet, you don't need to add sugar into the cake mixture

 If you don't have canned pineapple syrup, you can use half of a pineapple and stew it with 2 tablespoons of sugar

 Keep boiling it until you reduce it to 3 fourth cup of the syrup

 Now we have our baking dish, we are going to spray it with a little bit of oil

 And pour the mixture over this and bake it for 25 minutes at 180 degree temperature

 It is in the baking dish, we are going to bake it and have a wonderful pineapple eggless cake

 So there you are, it is in the oven, now we are going to bake it for at least 25 minutes and your cake will be ready

 Once it is done, you are going to pour in the remaining pineapple syrup

 Hi friends, this week's recipe is for ginger chicken, a classic Vietnamese braised dish.

 The secrets to this dish's bold flavors are the savory marinade and the cooking method.

 Please join me in this short video and we'll make this tasty dish together.

 Fresh ginger, boneless skinless chicken thighs, oyster sauce, fish sauce, minced garlic,

 I shared this recipe earlier, so please click the link or see my channel for this video.

 And for the remaining ingredients, we need vegetable oil, water, ground black pepper,

 Cut off the nubs, remove the skin, cut the ginger into thin slices, and now we cut into

 For the chicken thighs, we can just cut them into bite-sized pieces.

 Let's try to keep all the pieces about the same size so they cook evenly.

 The savory marinade is really simple, so let's start by adding oyster sauce.

 Next add the fish sauce, half of the minced garlic, and half of the finely diced onions.

 This is the secret ingredient that gives this dish its lovely color.

 Let's toss everything together and combine all the ingredients well.

 Add one quarter of the ginger strips, and again mix everything together.

 We let the chicken marinate in the refrigerator for 15 to 20 minutes.

 Let's heat a wok over medium-high heat and then drizzle in vegetable oil.

 Add the remaining onions and garlic, and now we stir-fry quickly for about 15 seconds.

 Add the chicken to the wok and leave the marinade behind for now.

 Gently flip everything over and then cook on the other side for another 2 minutes.

 Give everything another quick toss and then turn the heat down to low.

 By adding some of the ginger last, we make sure it's still fresh and fragrant in our

 We cook for another 2 minutes and now we can turn off the heat.

 To finish the dish, we add freshly ground black pepper and the finely chopped green

 And there you have it, friends, a super easy and super tasty dish.

 If you have any questions or comments, please feel free to post below.

 I work on new recipes each week so please subscribe to my channel to stay tuned.

As you can see this video is about me clarifying or using an alternative

 to 3 parts water in my spray bottle, some clips, my dead man brush, excuse it being

 am doing is sectioning those parts into smaller sections and spraying the apple cider vinegar

 comes from us using protective styles, you know we're oiling our scalp or we're using

 gels, souffles, puddings, creams and whatever else we put in our hair during these fall

 vinegar mix down my shaft from root to tip because it also clarifies the entire shaft.

 That is a method of helping to prevent split ends and it also closes the cuticle of your

Now when you close the cuticle of your hair you're sealing in some moisture.

 read 2 different opinions about using apple cider vinegar either before or after you wash

I personally use it before because apple cider vinegar helps to balance

I want to balance the pH of my hair so that when I put a conditioner

 in afterwards it's moisturized effectively, not on top of anything else.

 up together so that when I rinse the apple cider vinegar out of my hair all of that is

 going to just come right on out and my hair is going to feel so clean.

Apple cider vinegar is not like a shampoo in the way where it makes your

I don't know if you're watching but I'm using only a Denman brush and my fingers

 the fact that apple cider vinegar adds so much slip to your hair.

 be the product that's already in my hair but I definitely think that detangling before

 I wash my hair is a beneficial reason to just kind of consider apple cider vinegar.

 everyone to consider using apple cider vinegar as an alternative to shampoo during the fall

 and winter months because you don't want to strip your hair of too much moisture.

 I've gotten a lot of requests to do this, so let's get started.

 This time we're taking salt dough and forming it into adorable little hearts to wear around our necks.

 Eclectic Designs by Catherine and www.allfreebeadedjewelry.com presents

 To make salt dough you will need a quarter cup of flour, 2 tablespoons salt, 1-4 tablespoons of water, a bowl for mixing and measuring utensils.

 To make your salt dough combine the flour, salt and water in a mixing bowl.

 Add a little water at a time until the dough becomes one mass of dough.

 To make the heart pendant you will need salt dough, a cookie sheet with non-stick foil, wire and wire cutters.

 For method one you can take a small piece of dough and roll it into a log.

 Bring the two ends together and pinch the bottom to form a point.

 Cut a 1-1.5 inch length of wire and pinch the ends together to form a loop and stick it through the top of the heart.

 For method two you can roll out the dough to a quarter inch thickness.

 Then using a piece of wire, I used a paper clip, and cut out a heart shape.

 Smooth out the edges with your fingers and then insert a wire loop.

 Bake your heart pendants at 200 degrees for about 2 hours depending on your oven.

 Mine took 2 hours to bake but yours will probably be different.

 You can tell if they are done when they are basically hot as a rock.

 I give them a squeeze and if they do not yield then they are done.

 To decorate your heart pendant you will need acrylic craft paint, polyurethane, two paint brushes and newspaper.

 To attach your pendant to your necklace you will need two pliers and a large jump ring.

 Take the jump ring and attach your pendant's loop and your necklace.

 This video was brought to you by Eclectic Designs by Catherine and www.offrebeatedjewelry.com

 If you are interested in making your own ribbon necklace please watch my video on how to use ribbon ends.

We have placed nachos over here you can see and on the top we are

Then we're gonna season it with some salt and lastly let's add in some

 gonna pop it in the oven for about three to four minutes at 250 degrees

 Celsius and if you want to keep it in microwave, keep it only for one minute.

 degrees Celsius until our cheese melts or for about three to four minutes.

 cheesy vegetable nachos are ready and you can see it's so simple.

 Hello, I'm Margaret Miller and I would like to share with you some information about the

 The Angle Play templates were developed in order to make the long triangle shape accessible

 This is a shape that's been around for a long time, but the problem has been that when you

 add a quarter inch seam to a long triangle shape, you have all kinds of excess seam allowance

 There have been all kinds of methods devised on how you trim that off, but until now there's

 been no foolproof method of dealing with all that excess seam allowance.

 Each of the Angle Play templates has been lopped off, if you will, at just the right

 You see, as the triangle approaches a half square triangle, hardly anything is lopped

 off, but the more elongated the template gets, this is the 2 by 10, you see the template

 So all of that math has been done for you, all you need to do is use these as a rotary

 template, you rotary cut around the shape, and you will have perfect sewing results every

 You can use them either as a whole template, just as it comes out of the package, and this

 In other words, you use it like any other rotary template, but what happens is that

 with the points lopped off, when you put these together for sewing, there's no guesswork

 Another way to use the templates is to use the half size templates, and each template,

 notice, has a solid line halfway down the template, so you can make either the whole

 So we have three videos to share, the first one is about using the whole template, the

 second one is about creating the half size triangle, and then in addition, you can use

 a line that cuts the triangle in half diagonally, and make what's called a pieced triangle.

 So we would like to show you a video of all three of these techniques, using the templates

 as a whole template, making the half size triangle with the same template, and doing

 a pieced triangle with these templates, and getting wonderful, wonderful sharp points

 Today we have Jessie and Saffi with us and we are going to cook a fruit cake rusk.

 Usually people eat it in the morning at breakfast and also at tea time, like at three o'clock

 She says thank you for cooking for her and then also I got a couple from my brother Mickey.

 We have four eggs, two cups of dried fruit, mango, strawberry, cranberry, papaya, and black raisin.

 And one teaspoon vanilla, and two teaspoons baking powder, one teaspoon baking soda, one cup of oil,

 and one and a half cup sugar, one glass of milk, pinch of salt, and two and a half cups all-purpose flour.

 After cutting, we need to put again in the oven for 10 more minutes.

 And I hope you're going to like it and you're going to try and enjoy.

 I had 3 separate requests from you guys to make these Minecraft charms

 and I want to give a shout out to Polymer Clay Productions TV, The Randoms Channel and Black Diamond

 If you guys are watching, I hope you guys liked how these turned out

 So grab a gray ball of polymer clay and you can also use granite clay or some silver clay

 To make the blocks with the polymer clay I squeeze 2 fingers on one end and then I'll squeeze the other 2 on the other side

 Don't worry about any fingerprints, we're going to get rid of that after we make the polymer clay

 Put a little bit at the end of your eye pin and then press it in the middle of your little cube

 Now let's start with our baby pig and grab a big pink polymer clay bead and squish it into a block

 Grab a smaller bead of pink polymer clay and make it into a small rectangle

 and place it on the bottom half of the square, this is going to be the snout

 You can also use a flat tool to straighten any edges that are too rounded

 Place your little baby pig upside down and make four little polymer clay beads

 Put some TLS on an eye pin and place it either on top of his head or in the back of his body

 Roll out each one and place it on each corner of the rectangle and squish it down

 Grab a yellow polymer clay bead and a small brown polymer clay bead

 and the tail on the ocelot is really long but I didn't want to make it too long

 and then grab the small brown polymer clay bead and place it at the top

 You can make it point straight but I didn't want to do it because I'm scared it's going to break off as well

 Make a small light brown rectangle and place it on the bottom half of the square

 For the diamond door, I will use three different square rhinestones

 I actually bought them a while back on Amazon and they came in these little sets

 To glue the rhinestones, I will use some of this epoxy glue and this nail dotter

 If you don't have epoxy glue, go ahead and use whatever you have

 and if you're a little confused on what shapes to create with the little squares

 Once everything's dry, put some rubbing alcohol on a cotton pad

 and wipe the surface of the rhinestones to remove any of the TLS residue

 Then grab some brown acrylic paint and make two lines for the nose

 Then grab some black acrylic paint and make a little box inside of the white

 Grab some hot pink and make two straight lines on each side of the head

 If your coats are too transparent, let it dry in between and add another coat

 For the feet, grab some brown paint and make two little lines on each foot

 and only do it in the front because the other ones are most likely going to be covered

 and then with some light brown and some dark brown, make some random squares all over the body

 I ended up doing three different shades of brown and I ended up doing patches all over

 Once the charms are all dry, grab some gloss glaze and a small brush and glaze them all over

 and for this diamond ore, just try to not glaze the actual rhinestones

 and because of the rhinestones, it really does add that really nice shiny effect to it

 The only downside to the baby pig and the ocelot is that they don't sit straight up

 So if you want them to stay leveled, I would probably say make the head smaller, but that's really up to you

 I hope you guys enjoyed this tutorial and if you guys try it out, I wish you the best

 Today I'd like to introduce you to what I consider the best mouse and rat trap ever,

 Here's a picture of the finished product and here's a picture of me for all it's worth.

 There's peanut butter smeared on that tin can, the tin can centered over the bucket

 All it takes to make this, get yourself a five or six gallon bucket, drill a hole a

 little bit bigger than the wire you'll be using to support the tin can.

 For the making of this bucket I'm going to use galvanized wire, about fourteen gauge.

 It's flexible enough to work with but still stiff enough to hold the broth can that I

 I'm going to figure out where on the bucket that broth can is going to go.

 I'm going to take a broth can, it's either beef broth or chicken broth, so you can pour

 The hole needs to be big enough to allow your wire to slip through there very loosely.

 Do it on both sides of that broth can, a little kink in the wire.

 That will keep your broth can from rolling over towards the edge of the bucket which

 Take off the label of course, that way it will be ready for smearing of the peanut butter

 Make sure the wire is straight, doesn't have a lot of bows or dips in it.

 Put it through one of the holes, then the other hole, then re-straighten that wire.

 Once you do that, bend the wire that's outside the bucket to hold it in place.

 Unfortunately I didn't center that broth can very well so I'll adjust it here just a little

 Remember, use a board or something to allow the mice or the rats to get up to the buckets

 but don't allow that ramp, that board you're going to use to overlap the bucket by very

 If you just have mice problems, a couple inches of water in the bottom will be sufficient.

 If you have rat problems, they can jump out unless you give them enough water to swim

 During the winter when the water would normally freeze, I use RV antifreeze.

 It's non-toxic so if your pets or children get to it, it won't hurt.

 If you are new to fauché, which is a new way to crochet, you can get this yarn tool,

 the Easy Loop Yarn Tool, and each package comes with the tool and an easy pattern for

 So it's really nice and so you can just pick it up right away and start working.

 And if you are interested in learning a little more, there are a couple good books.

 There is the Beginner Basics that will show you everything you need to do to get started

 And then there is a Beyond the Basics which will show you some construction techniques

 So these are all really good for learning how to fauché with your Easy Loop Yarn Tool.

 Just to give you an idea of how this Easy Loop Yarn Tool works and what it can do, we

 So you can see we can get something that looks a lot like a ribbed knitting stitch.

 So you can see it's pretty versatile and it is actually fairly easy to use once you get

 So here's our tool and I'm going to give you a little quick demonstration of fauché with

 So I have a sample here I'm working on with this lovely orange yarn.

 So once you get it threaded and the books will show you how to thread everything, everything

 You can see Easy Loop here and we've got an end with two eyes which if you're working

 And there's some tensioners here that will also, you can use when you're working on more

 This is basically a single crochet that we're going to do here and it is really easy.

 And one of the things about this is that you're always on the front side.

 You're just going to grab it like this and if you want, you can put the yarn here to

 And everything is done with these loops here and you're going to actually use your fingers.

 And the trick to this is to keep the needle over to the right, the yarn coming through

 So we'll go here and we're going to grab that loop and we're going to pull back out.

 And then we're going to take our needle and go back through and grab that loop again.

 You're going to hold everything with your left hand, a loop on your finger, two loops.

 And you will be able to adjust the tension based on how tight you hold this loop.

 See here I'm letting it get tight by keeping that loop a little small.

 So there you have it, a quick little demo of the Easy Loop Yarn Tool and Fauché.

And to marinate turkey legs we need some butter, oregano, salt and

Mix it and you just lift the skin and you just rub it on the turkey

And with the help of the knife you can place some gashes like this.

 Now you can preheat oven at 350 degrees Fahrenheit and bake it at 170 degrees Fahrenheit for 1 hour or so.

 but people were still asking me, well what about the regular puff?

 today and don't really have much to do, so I don't really need a big fancy hairdo.

 the first thing I'm going to do is apply some organic Shea Butter Plus to my hair, like

And also, most of the times when you see me wearing a puff, it's because it's

 a day or two days before wash day, probably a day before I have to wash my hair.

 that quick hairdo, when your hair is looking a mess, acting crazy, grab your brush and

So after you wrap your headband around twice, you know, so it's two

 headbands, well one headband wrapped around twice, now you want to slowly push it up into

Okay, once I've found the desired position in the back, grab a pin

 Then, I forgot to mention this step in my Puff with Pompadour tutorial, if you want

 your puff to be bigger, you can take a pick and lift from the roof.

Alright, so now that you've gotten that done, I'm going to add some oil sheen.

 if you're asking, yesterday my hair was in a three day old twist out, and that's what

 crazy, so I'm just going to put some gel on my edges like I usually do.

 you have time, like if you're doing this style and you're not leaving the house for about

 10 minutes, you can go ahead and just wrap a head scarf around here.

 keep it flat and that will help to bring out your waves better.

 so I'm not able to do that today because I really have to go get ready to go.

 you're sleeping with your puff, you also want to do the same thing.

 Ok, so I'm going to show you guys how to create a bow to go on the top of a gift.

 I'm going to be using the same wrapping paper as I have used to wrap my gift.

 And because wrapping papers are quite thin, I wanted to reinforce this using some cards.

 So I just have some white card here and I have my wrapping paper.

 I'm then going to cover the entire surface of the white card with this glue here.

 I have some left here so I'm going to do the same with this other card here.

 Ok, so I've gone ahead and trimmed off the excess card that I had on the sides.

 And what you want to do now is you want to cut out 4 10cm pieces,

 Ok, now I have all of my pieces here and I'm just going to be cutting out a piece of this card here.

 And just cut a rough square and then just round it up a little, just so that you get a circle.

 And it doesn't need to be perfect because it's going to be covered so nobody's going to see that.

 you're just going to take the piece and just loop it like this.

 So I'm going to do that for all of the pieces here except for the 7cm.

 So I'm just going to go ahead and do that for all of these here.

 And I'm using a hot glue gun here but you can use other adhesives.

 It just means you might have to hold it together for a little bit longer until the glue sets.

 Ok, now we have done all of the loops here and these are my larger pieces.

 I'm going to take my circle here and I'm going to add a little bit of glue to one edge here.

 Then I'm going to take one of my loops and I'm going to press that in.

 Directly across I'm going to add a little bit more of the glue and place my next segment here.

 And now with the smaller ones you're going to place them in between each of those.

 The last thing I want to do now is adhere this one to the center.

 And the reason we didn't glue this one beforehand is because I like to measure

 And then I can go ahead and add my glue here and adhere this together.

 And I can go ahead and add a little bit of glue on the center of the bow and then push that in.

 Last thing you need to do is adhere this to the present, of course.

 And just for the sake of this tutorial I'm just going to do this with my hot glue here.

 And depending on the size of your gift you could of course create a larger bow like I have here.

 And the difference with this one is that I have used six segments instead of four in each layer.

 And then in the center, instead of cutting a two centimeter wide strip,

 I actually made it three centimeters wide and that covers up the center a little bit better.

 I had a one person hire me to do three requests and I did them all together.

 They save a little money when you do that because then I don't have to listen to it

 So if I have sheet music and I can go strictly from that, it's a little easier for me.

 I'll do the rest of the lessons on my website, WebpianoTeacher.com.

 If you'd like to have custom DVDs and you don't want to be a member of WebpianoTeacher.com,

 get the videos you want only, just look on my blog, SeanCheekBlog.com and you'll find

 And I need my, here we go, I already see a left off a sharp somewhere.

 You know, but then when you get to the key of E and you have an extra D sharp, sometimes

 Right hand is in A and C sharp to start with, and then moves up to B and D sharp, and then

 moves up to C sharp and E. And it's just one and two and three and four.

 Left hand's going to have an A down here, it's middle C, so here's the A we want.

 We're moving up to an E, and then up to an A, and then back down to an E, and then back

 You play together here, and then left, left, and then right hand, and then left, and then

 Something that helps is to know that the eighth note beat keeps going consistently.

 Now, the next measure, all you have is B and D sharp, you just hold.

 Go back to that while the left hand continues to hold the A and the E on the left hand.

 Then we're going to start the next measure, which sounds like this.

 All right, so I played all the way to here, so let's take a look at this.

 We'll finish this part and do the rest of the boards for the rest of the song

 We posted a picture of pretzels a little while back and everybody seemed to want a video for it.

 one package of dry active yeast or two and a quarter teaspoons,

 And it looks like the yeast is starting to bubble and activate itself.

 So now, we're going to add one tablespoon of sweetener like sugar or brown sugar.

 But here, for this recipe, I'm using organic coconut palm sugar, which is a delicious alternative.

 Lastly, you're going to add two and three quarter cups of all-purpose flour.

 You want to stir with a spoon until you get to the point where you can get in with your hands and start to knead it that way.

 You want to be able to work with your hands without wearing all of it.

 And just keep working it until you get a nice dough ball that's not sticky.

 Once you have a nice dough ball like so, you're going to coat this bowl with a little bit of olive oil.

 And just, you basically want the whole dough ball to be coated in olive oil.

 And set it aside for about 40 minutes in a nice warm and dry, draft-free place.

 See it's all a little bubbly, about twice the size of what we had before.

 So you're going to want to cut the dough into 8 or 10 pieces, depending on how big you want your pretzels to be.

 Now while you're making this pretzel, you're going to want to roll this out to probably about 2 feet.

 Once you've got your 2 foot long dough strand, you flip it down.

 And we have them placed on a piece of parchment paper, just so they don't stick.

 Okay, the next step is to bring these bad boys over to the stove top, where I have a pot of boiling water.

 And you want to make sure it's big enough to be able to dip a pretzel in.

 We're going to add 2 teaspoons of sea salt and 1 tablespoon of baking soda.

 And make sure your oven is preheated to 450 degrees Fahrenheit.

 You're going to take your pretzel pieces and place them in the boiling water.

 Make sure you have a big slotted spoon, you know, to get the water out.

 After 30 seconds, you're going to take the slotted spoon, pick it up, and put it on a piece of parchment paper.

 Oh, and by the way, for all you guys who are wondering where Indy is, he's always in the kitchen helping me.

 Before you pop them in the oven, you're going to take a little bit of melted vegan butter or olive oil.

 And for our savory pretzels, we're going to top it with a little bit of coarse sea salt.

 At this point, you could throw on some cinnamon and sugar if you wanted to make a delicious dessert pretzel.

 All that's left to do is pop these guys into the oven for 10 to 12 minutes or until they're nice and golden brown.

 I just took all the pretzels out of the oven and they're delicious golden brown.

 Now, if you want to go the sweet route, take your unsalted pretzel, brush it with a little bit of melted vegan butter.

 Hi, I'm the Ultra Chef and after watching videos online and reading the comments,

 a lot of people are wondering how you make dehydrated tomato sauce.

 But after it dries, it just doesn't have the right flavor I like and it's just not the best.

 So the drying time, you won't have to take one sheet off and the other one off.

 You won't have to take one sheet off and the other one won't be done.

 What I'm actually going to test today is this Bertoli Alfredo Sauce.

 I've used it for non-dehydrated stuff, but I'm going to try rehydrating it.

 Now don't go home, or don't get off your computer and try doing this.

 I'm going to test it first and I'll keep you posted on if it works or not.

 They make the already dehydrated powdered tomato sauce that they have at the store.

 I think McCormick sells it and I bet you some other off-brand company will sell it now.

 You're going to want to have it set to vegetable, which is 135.

 and it looks as if it's not going to be fully dehydrated by the time you want to hit the sack,

My name is John Mahoney and I'm going to give you a little quick demonstration

 on how I'm going to take a Fuel 3D face scan and bring it into an already existing base

 mesh and kind of blend it on in there and make it look all cool.

 Alrighty, so first thing I'm going to do is import my OBJ file, which is that, which is

 want to bore you guys a little bit too much with the actual cleaning up.

 have your, the edge of your face cleaned, you can just slide it right in there.

 it's going to take a little bit of finagling, but once you get it into position, you're

 to want to do this, which is to take the clay buildup and just fill in those, those gaps.

 way high, 13,000, because I want to make sure I didn't lose any detail when I blast it out.

 is go back to those areas that I used to clay buildup and just use the smooth tool and blend

And then once that's done, I can just go to my clay buildup tool

 and clean, is I'm going to reverse the mask, click, hold down control, click on the canvas.

And then all I need to do is go to Z subtract and draw on top of that area.

 Actually, first thing I'm going to do is smooth it out a little bit first.

So all you do is click sphere and then just click and drag it on.

 So what I try to do is get the first eye as good as I can get it.

And after you do duplicate, you can go to the deformation palette and click

 So you may need to do a little bit of adjustment once you get the eye on the other side, but

I've done this demo several times where I actually mirrored the face.

 So anyway, that was a very quick demo on how to add a face to an existing face mesh.

Today I am going to show you how to make an epic M&M and Kit Kat cake.

 To make your Kit Kat M&M candy surprise cake we are going to start by baking a delicious chocolate

For that we'll want to combine two cups of sugar, two cups of flour, a teaspoon of salt,

 teaspoons of baking powder, one and a half teaspoons of baking soda, and three quarters

 two teaspoons of vanilla, a half cup of vegetable oil, and two large eggs.

 to combine and then finish it up with one cup of boiling water.

 just by spraying them lightly with non-stick spray and then put a circle of parchment paper

 right in the middle on the bottom and then spray it again lightly with the non-stick spray.

 that out, allow it to cool on a cooling rack, and then you can start making your chocolate mousse

Just let that sit for a minute until the water is fully absorbed

Then you can add in one tablespoon of boiling water to this mix just to

In a separate bowl, whisk a quarter cup of cocoa powder and a half cup of

Once that's combined, you can add in a teaspoon of vanilla and one cup of whipping cream

 and just whisk that up until it's all combined and then you can start beating it with your

 chips and you can use anything you'd like, dark or semi-sweet, and just put a little bit of cream

 in there and melt it in your microwave until it is nice and smooth.

 right over the top of your cake and spread it to cover the sides.

 put the outer portion of your springform pan right back on that bottom and you are going to place

I chopped up some Snickers bars and put those as my second layer of

 that with the rest of your mousse and then cover that with some M&Ms and then cover that with some

Put this in your fridge or freezer to chill for a little while before you take it out

 with a store-bought cake mix, some store-bought pudding, whatever you want to do.

 Okay, so now we're going to start working on our minor 7th chords, and they're going

 So if you remember, we had back here, we started with a C major 7th chord that was

 based off of this 5th string right here, and we called it form A. So we have form A in

 So all these 7th chord types are always going to be able to be played off the exact same

 So if you know your form A major 7th and your form A major minor 7th and your form A dominant

 7th, we can play all those chords right off the exact same note.

 We have a barre chord at the 3rd fret, so it's a full across 5 strings barre, and then

 we have our 3rd finger on the 4th string 5th fret, and then we have our 2nd finger on the

 There's other ways of playing this minor 7th, but we basically have a, the main part of

 It's going to be with your 3rd finger across the 4th string, 3rd string, and 2nd string

 Just smush it, kind of collapse that knuckle joint, and bring your, make sure your thumb

 is up, and then you bring your 2nd finger over to the bottom 6th string.

 So you'll see that I can hit all of them, and that 5th string doesn't ring.

 So we have this full barre at the 8th fret, 3rd finger at the 10th fret on the 5th string,

 and then 8-8, and then on the 2nd string we have the pinky at the 11th fret.

 Alright, so moving on, now we have the form D of the minor, remember the major 7th was

 Off of that C. The minor 7th, form D, is also going to be 4 strings.

 And that is, same 1st finger here, pinky at the 12th fret, double dots, on the 3rd string,

 The 2nd finger on the 2nd string, and the 3rd finger on the 1st string.

 And then our last minor 7th chord is going to be played way up here on the 13th fret.

 I could have played it down here, but I wanted you just to line up with what we did previously.

 I mean, the whole thing about these chords is not to use any open strings right now,

 So we could have played it back here because there's no open strings, but since we played

 previously the form C up here for major 7th, I'm going to do the minor 7th right here as

 So off the same root note, but with your 2nd finger on the 15th fret, and then on the 4th

 string, your 1st finger on the 13th fret, back to the 15th fret on the 3rd string with

 your 3rd finger, and then your pinky is going to play the 16th fret on the 2nd string.

 So get these memorized, and it helps you memorize them if you can compare them to the major

 And then tomorrow we're going to tackle dominant 7th chords, which is by far the most used

 In this video I'm going to show you how to remove the hard drive and caddy on an XPS

 If you're looking for the hard drive or caddy, go to our website and use this 5% discount

 Remove the hard drive caddy screws on both sides of the hard drive.

 Check out PartsPeople.com where we have hundreds of tutorials and hundreds of thousands of

 video is to show you a logical sequence of steps to help you get your first

 muscle up or to build repeatability into the movement for athletes who have

 get that first rep or you struggle to perform movement when fatigued, then this

 get a muscle up and some might get you there quicker than the way I'm going to

 describe, but what I'm most concerned with is building a good platform of

 skill and strength so no matter how tough a workout is, the ability is still

 athlete should strive for a strict muscle up before attempting to kip.

 the kip might get you there sooner, it also adds a lot of momentum to the

 movement that you may not know how to react to if the rep goes wrong, which

 up, I'm going to set you a few prerequisite goals to accomplish.

 that the transition from being below to above happens more smoothly and number

 two, the false grip shortens the lever length of the forearm which creates a

 second false grip hang and then on to false grip pull-ups before advancing to

 position will have the athlete fully locked out with the elbows, slightly

 the rings, this can be more challenging than it looks and a bit of shaking is

Keep working on this skill until you can hold for 10 seconds confidently.

 After you've built your ability to hold the front support, it's time to work on

These are also harder than they look and you may need to start with a

 good to be able to pull your chest high above the rings but if you don't know

 what to do when you get there, then the muscle up is going to evade you.

 lowering the rings to about head height when kneeling and practice transitioning

 pull the chest to the rings before rapidly getting the elbows behind the

 confident, progressively add height to the rings to the point where the legs

 are giving minimal assistance and you can also add in the press out at this

 muscle up as well as how to regain the false grip so that multiple reps can be

 allow your shoulders to move rearwards to instigate the descent under the rings.

 During this stage of the movement, concentrate on keeping your elbows close

 to your body and try to wrap your wrists around the rings in order to

If you're a crossfitter, don't worry about whether the rep is RX or not.

 bottom of the rings is about head height and practice the muscle up from this

 developed rather than using your legs or any other form of assistance.

 confident at this point, raise the rings a little higher and repeat the process.

 Don't move the rings more than a few inches at a time and eventually this

 laid out in this video don't have to be performed in the order you have seen

 them and you may choose to miss out a step altogether if you already possess

 because any shortcuts will surely show up when you least want them to.

 In episode one of our completed dish series, I teach you how to make our pan roasted halibut

 dish, which is a top selling entree and our most requested recipe by our guests.

 We're going to start by getting some cherry tomatoes, sliced lengthwise in half, some

 finely julienned red onions that have been lightly pickled, and I'll have a link to

 that in the show notes, some fresh chopped cilantro, a little bit of white bread, and

 this is our homemade white bread recipe, it's not that Wonder Bread stuff, and this gives

 Here we have some fish sauce, and this is actually a little trick I learned from my

 wife who's Filipino, fish sauce and tomatoes go extremely well together.

 Also you're going to need some basic stuff for your sauce, it's sliced shallots, some

 Also here we have a piece of halibut that has been brined in a 5% brine solution for

 about 2-3 hours and then we'll take it out, rinse it, and pat it dry.

 Now the first step you want to do is you want to make your tomato salad, or your marinated

 tomatoes, and you're going to add your tomatoes, your pickled red onions, with just a tiny

 You're going to add in a couple dashes of fish sauce, and obviously I'm not using measurements

 because this is all going to be done to taste, you want to balance the flavors.

 Balance with some salt, a little bit of sugar, and then cilantro.

 Now you're going to mix this around, and you should be able to taste the savoriness of

 the fish sauce, the sourness of the pickled onions, and also the sweetness of the tomatoes

 and the freshness of the cilantro, they should all be nice and bright.

 Now you can make this up to 24 hours in advance, and it does get better as it sits, so I would

 Now to start, you're going to pan roast your halibut, and we have a more detailed video

 on the actual pan roasting process that's a little too in-depth to go into here, so

 go to Stellacolony.com slash cooking techniques, and while the halibut is pan roasting, you're

 One's going to be for your beurre blanc sauce, the other's going to be for your panzanella

 So you're going to start on the right-hand side, you're going to add to that pan some

 clarified butter, and also some whole butter, and the clarified butter will actually raise

 the browning temperature of the whole butter, and to this you're going to add the cubed

 Now if you don't want to make your own white bread, you can go and buy brioche or something

 similar and dice it up, you can get that from your local bakery.

 If you do want to tackle your own white bread, it's really not that difficult, and I'm going

 to put a link in the episode one show notes, so you can go to Stellacolony.com slash tcd1,

 In the other pan, I'm going to just get some shallots roasting, this is going to be the

 start of our beurre blanc, and now you can see that our croutons are nice and golden

 brown, so we're just going to set that off to the side, and we're going to deglaze our

 Now around this time, you're going to want to check your halibut, and make sure it's

 done, it should be nice and supple, and when you squeeze the sides, it should spring back

 Then you're going to finish your beurre blanc sauce while your halibut is resting, and you're

 just going to swirl in some butter, I'm also flattening it in, and add in some capers,

 and we have a video on this more in depth in our sauces and soup series.

 Set the beurre blanc aside, and bring your croutons back up to temperature over a high

 flame, and you're going to add them directly into your tomato salad, and you're going to

 get this nice contrast of temperatures with the hot croutons and the chilled tomatoes,

 and it's going to play really, really nice with the completed dish.

 You're going to plate this directly on a round bowl, this is a 12 inch bowl with a raised

 rim, and you're going to make sure you have a nice flat platform, that you can lay your

 delicate piece of roasted halibut on top, and once you have your roasted halibut on

 top, you're going to sauce with the lemon caper beurre blanc that we made earlier.

 Now this dish conceptually is extremely simple, but the technique behind it of properly roasting

 the fish, making a beurre blanc a la minute, and just the flavor combinations that we have

 are really important, so for more information on that, head on over to StellaCulinary.com

 the only thing I dehydrate is jerky, whether it's deer, beef or turkey jerky.

 this lady that is doing cooking stuff using dehydrated vegetables.

I'm just going to do a half a head because this is only a trial.

 to save this head and probably make some slaw out of it or something.

 nothing but chicken gizzards, cabbage, tomatoes, and hominy in cabbage.

I took the cabbage and the celery that I dehydrated and made me a soup with

 It's something that's really useful for parks and manicured lawns where you don't

 It's really not necessary to dig plugs when you have a target that's maybe only 2 or 3

 This is a technique that not a lot of people know, but once you've done it a few times

 and perfected it, it's actually much faster than having to dig a plug and much easier

 So what I'm going to do first, I've pinpointed the target and I've probed it so I know the

 So what I'm going to do is take my, this is an automotive door panel remover tool.

 And what I'm going to do is take it, stick it in the ground and just kind of cut a little

 Once I get that slot maybe a couple inches long, what I'm going to do is take and pry

 So now that I've done that, I'll show you that this is actually where the target is.

 Unfortunately just a bottle cap but that gives you an idea of how simple that technique is.

 Once you've dug your target, you just take, push the ground back together, push it down,

 So hopefully you'll go out and practice that and happy hunting.

 So today I get to bring you along for fresh garden salsa or pico de gallo, whatever you'd

 I picked a bunch of peppers and these are a combination of serrano and what's called

 And the holy molies are a darker green and they're a long chili like these.

 And a part of a tomatillo, some garlic, cilantro, and these beautiful tomatoes out of my garden.

 And if you like salsas, I hope you go down in the about section below and check out all

 the links that I've left for you because I've got my Facebook page, I've got a link for

 an Amazon link so you can go check out, go shopping, help this channel out.

 And I've also got a link to the Power Pressure Cooker XL if you'd like to check that out.

 And I'll try to link a video on me using it because it's a fantastic product.

 Alright guys, so let's get to making this salsa that's going to go over some cod tonight.

 And I want it to macerate in the refrigerator for a while so we're going to make it early.

 Alright, I'm going to get to chopping and I'm going to put it all together.

 So I'm not quite done chopping all of this but I wanted to show you how fast and easy

 Look at this beautiful container of tomatoes and onions and cucumbers already.

 So we're going to go ahead and get our first batch of veg in here.

 And it's chopping all my vegetables and actually I hand cut most of the tomatoes just to keep

 a little bit of integrity because they were really really ripe.

 So we have some that are kind of smashed and then some that are nice and chunky.

 And I almost forgot to tell you guys, we're doing three limes in here.

 I've already added about a half cup of loosely packed cilantro.

 And what that's going to do is help macerate the vegetables as well.

 So be sure and leave me a comment on how you make yours and what ingredients you put in there.

 And we're going to use the rest of this bottle of red wine vinegar.

 I might need a little bit more but we're going to start with that.

 And then just go a nice lug around the bowl with some olive oil.

 I hope this inspires you to go ahead and make your own beautiful

 If there's something you'd like me to make, you'd like to see me make,

 I know you're probably asking yourselves how can you be vegan and tuna, but the truth is

 it's just going to be kind of an alternative to tuna salad and there's no tuna in it.

 I grew up a vegan and I became a vegetarian when I was about 13 years old and now I am

 mostly a vegetarian but I am sometimes a pescetarian so I have tried fish before.

 So I tried this alternative tuna salad before I ever tried actual tuna and it actually tastes

 You're going to be using chickpeas or garbanzo beans, whatever you call them, instead of

 You're going to take one can of garbanzo beans and rinse it out really well.

 You don't want any of the juice from the garbanzo beans canned into the salad.

 If you are a vegan, you're going to use something called Vegenaise.

 It's what I use instead of mayonnaise and you can find it at most health food stores

 If you're a vegetarian, feel free to use any kind of mayonnaise or healthy alternative

 Then you're going to use a potato smasher to mash the chickpeas and mix it in with the

 You want to mash them not into a mush but you want to break up all the chickpeas so

 none of them are whole but definitely don't make it anything like applesauce.

 Then you're going to add about 4 chopped up stalks of celery and then about 1-4th cup

 You can mix that all together and add a little bit of salt and pepper and that's it.

 Feel free to change the measurements of whatever you add depending on what you like.

 If you like more onions or less, more mayonnaise or less and if there are any other spices

 It's very similar to tuna salad so however you might prepare your own tuna salad you

 You can eat this just as a plain salad but I also like to eat it on a sandwich.

 I sometimes put it on a sandwich with a piece of tomato and cheese and it's really good.

 It's extremely simple to make and it is a great alternative to tuna salad.

 You can eat it if you're a vegan or a vegetarian or anything really if you just enjoy the taste

 Check out next week's episode for even more simple, delicious and healthy meal ideas.

 I hope you guys have a great week and I will see you next Wednesday.

Don't want to put too much because the pasta soaks up your broth.

 And tonight we'll have vegetable soup and crackers and we're supposed to have snow and milk.

It's been a while since we started cooking our soup, me and Ran Ran.

 Be careful because really I promise Daddy it's really, really hot.

 Hi, I'm Alan Tatro with Global Sugar Art and today I'm going to show you how to make some

Now I've already melted some of the Cocoa Dark and in order to melt

 this chocolate, all you do is you dump the wafers in a microwavable bowl and put them

 when you want to stop microwaving it and just stir it until it's completely melted and it's

 this is like a flour sack towel or at least a linen towel that will not have any dust

And then you want to buff the inside of these molds and that will help

 a little more after than to try to take chocolate out of the mold.

 lot of chocolate in the mold but once you drop them and they level out, you can see

 that the air bubbles are out, take the lollipop stick, drop it in and then turn it.

 completely enrobes the lollipop stick into the chocolate and it secures it in there.

 you put your finger on the back and it feels cold, you'll know they're ready to come out.

 to use some of the Royal Icing decorations that we sell at Global Sugar Art.

 decorations onto the chocolate, I'm just dipping a paintbrush in a little bit of chocolate.

 I'm going to put a little dab on the lollipop and then just stick that on.

 chocolate in the microwave at half power for, it took about a minute to three minutes, depending

 And then put them in the freezer for about five to ten minutes.

 just pop them out and you can add the decorations, the Royal Icing decorations with a little

And then to package these, I'm just going to use a clear bag that

 these are a great stocking stuffer or even a little placeholder at the Christmas table

 Go to www.globalsugarart.com to purchase a global sugar art set.

 and sunny and summer has arrived in England I thought I should do some

 barbecue recipes for the rest of July and today's recipe is going to be

 smaller ones so depending on how spicy you like it you can either leave the

 it's really really spicy so out of these smaller ones I'm going to take them out

 because I've got a bit of a family barbecue going on later and not all the kids or

 But these ones I'm going to leave in because at the end of the day, Piri Piri

 ingredients into a jug or something and we're going to blend everything up till

 I've kept the skin on because personally I like the skin to be on when I barbecue

 these because it helps keep all the juices in but you know take them off if

The only thing keeping the skin on on a barbecue is that it tends to

 like flare up a little bit so you're gonna be careful of that but I like to

 basically make some like stamp the meat a bit so that the marinade can sink into

 overnight, a couple of hours or do this in the morning before the barbecue starts.

 You can cut off you know if you've got excess bits of skin like this you can cut those

 We're gonna save the rest, save that bit for basting the chicken later on the

Now I'm gonna leave this to marinate and like I said overnight is

 best you're gonna get more flavor or just give it a good couple of hours.

 You can add some of the extra marinade that you saved from earlier and just

Now please leave me a comment, love hearing from you guys and if you

 haven't subscribed, hit subscribe wherever it is because my recipes get

 In this GoPro tips and tricks video I'm going to show you how you can for very cheap make

 your GoPro head strap mount into a versatile mount that you can use to mount to all kinds

 but in terms of flexibility and just versatility it's going to be very high.

 of my local outdoor store and it's designed to hold skis together or onto roof racks of

So it's a tough rubber band, it's got a little bit of stretch in it, really not

 that much, but it's very heavy duty rubber and then to use it, what you do is you take

 the end, you slide it through here, you pull it tight and then pop this metal piece into

 it and it holds on very securely as long as it's always under tension.

 two of these, we're going to take our head strap mount, now this is the front piece of

 our head strap mount, the front part of it, and if you don't know how to take this apart

 or get this piece out of your head strap mount, check out the video description.

 going to take our strap, we're going to slide this strap through the head strap, just like

 this and back out the back, just like that, our mount is done and now what we can do is

 the strap through the mount, pull it tight and then clip it into the rubber thing or

 to the water bottle and because this is rubber, there's not much movement.

 a very nice non-skid connection with whatever you're mounting onto and it creates a very

If you want to pick up two of these, you could probably fit some two smaller

 Now, this can be used for mounting into all kinds of different things.

 onto something here that's even larger than the roll bar mount would allow.

 You know people are busy and you can get the no sodium added canned beans and rinse them

 There's like refried beans, you can just blend them after you cook them and make like a mash.

 And the amazing thing is this bag of beans was $1.99 and what happens is you soak them

 and they swell up quite a bit and then you cook them so they get a lot bigger.

 Just one other thing, I know people that have slow cookers or instapots, pressure cookers

 This is just the method that's for people that follow what's on the bag and just don't

 Because this will make more, it swells up with water so it will make more than that.

 And I just rinse them up for a bit and then I put the beans in a pot and I put 2 inches

 I'm on a well just so you know I'm using my own well water in the country.

 And then I put them in a pot again and fill them up with 2 inches of water.

 And then set the, set it down to minimum, to low heat and simmer.

 So when you're done, you just drain the water and you're good to go.

 Hi guys, it's Angela Kim from the SquishyMonster.com and today I'm making a delicious honey garlic

And we're going to lock in all those juices by creating a really golden, deep,

 will ensure that we'll yield a very juicy and succulent chicken.

 cutting down your own chicken, getting a whole one at the market and cutting it down

Because I got an organic chicken at the market today for so much cheaper

 per pound than I did, than I could have, a pre-cut chicken from the in-store butcher.

 And it cuts down on packaging so there's no more wasteful styrofoam.

 soups, stews, collards, and like my honey garlic chicken in this video.

 at least an hour and it's going to add such great depth of flavor to our meal today.

 is I'm just going to take a little bit of crushed garlic and tuck it into the skin,

 know if you guys can hear that but I can hear my stock bubbling, simmering away behind me.

 Homemade stock is just one of those things that greatly improves the flavor profile of

 with some high smoke index oil and I'm going to put each of my pieces of seasoned chicken

Here are a few things to consider when preparing this chicken or any chicken.

 You don't want to overcrowd the pan and you don't want to flip the chicken just once.

 When both sides are a nice golden brown you want to take each piece of chicken out.

 the chicken drippings you want to toss in your onions and your garlic.

 onion out of the pan so I can make room for my next batch of ingredients.

To your melted butter you want to sprinkle in some unbleached flour

After a couple minutes you want to splash in equal parts of really high

While you're simultaneously stirring you want to slowly pour in your warm

And don't worry about the chicken that wasn't pre-cooked before because

 now we're about to bathe the chicken pieces in this luxurious bath and pop the entire

Now in goes all of your chicken pieces with that crusty golden skin

 and as it bakes off in the oven it'll just get really soft and tender in that sauce and

 it'll just get even more delicious as all the ingredients kind of meld together.

 a bed of rice just to keep it simple especially because the chicken is the star here.

 We have another G minor chord, and we're going to play the bass note, and then the chord.

 Now, you can play a G major chord, but just instead of playing the B here, just mute that string.

 And when you're playing, you need to make sure you play the G chord with the D on here, because if you have a B, it changes it to a major, so you need to have the chords.

 And then strum the rest of the notes, but make sure you've got your D on.

 It doesn't matter where you play those chords, but those are the chords.

 Welcome to SnackTub Korea, where every Monday we do snack reviews.

 And today we're eating soybean tofu snack and another similar snack, tofu crackers.

 You know, sometimes the weirder something looks or the more exotic a food is, I have

 I went to this sausage place and they were selling alligator meat.

 It's mainly made of wheat flour, tofu, sugar, salt, palm oil, baking powder, black sesame

 And like most packaging, half of it is actually filled with a snack and the other half is

 It's a very mild taste, but there's something addicting about it.

 Maybe they put some kind of drug in it or something, just like any other snack.

 This snack is for people who not necessarily eat for taste, but they just like to munch

 The black sesame is definitely there just for show because they're just sprinkled here

 You know, it's like asking someone to describe plain pasta without sauce.

 I mean, I guess both the snacks taste like tofu, and after all, tofu doesn't taste like

 When you think of tofu, you think about its texture more than the actual taste, because

 I'm going to try the first snack again to taste the difference.

 I like the crispiness of this first one, but I like the slight softness, the moistness

 From a child's point of view, I give it 2 out of 5 K-pop stars.

 But from an adult point of view, I give it 4 out of 5 K-pop stars.

 In a pan, add 2 cups of granulated sugar and cook it over medium heat.

 This technique used is called dry method because it doesn't require any water.

 The edges will start to melt first, but don't worry, you'll just have to stir it and it

 With this technique, you're allowed to stir your caramel as much as you want.

 Continue to bring all the melted sugar to the top and eventually it will become one

 This method is pretty great because no matter what you do, you won't ruin your caramel.

 For the sugar cage, the caramel should still be hot so we can create fine strings.

 Dip your spoon into the caramel, lift it up and in a zigzag motion, start coating the

 To create a firmer structure, you have to zigzag vertically and then horizontally.

 The hotter your caramel, the thinner it will be so it's easier to create this decoration

 Now cut off all the excess on the edges that dripped away, just like this.

 This could go on top of a cake or even covering completely a small pastry.

 You just have to dip them in a warm caramel and place them to rest over a parchment paper

 They will harden within minutes and add a nice crunchiness and look to your fruits.

 And don't forget that after you caramelize stuff, it should never be in contact with

 And once you do, you just have to lift your nut and this caramel continues its trainable

 Place them in the edge of your countertop with some weight over the toothpick.

 As they cool, the sugar continues to pull itself down, creating this amazing teardrop

 Place them upside down on top of cakes and you'll have the most elegant cake in the planet.

 And now with the sugar almost cold, I'm able to pull it easily and create sugar strings.

 Pinch the caramel with your fingers or a fork and start pulling the sugar.

 As long as your sugar is still warm, you can pull it to the infinite.

 If it starts breaking easily, you just have to reheat this caramel over low heat.

 But don't forget that to be able to pull the sugar, the caramel has to cool down a little

 A little cleaning tip, but after you're done, the caramel in the pan will become like a

 Today you learned how to make all sorts of caramel decorations.

 Hi guys, today I'm going to show you how I created this lace doily design.

 you'll need a beige polish, a gold polish, and a white, and you'll need a matte topcoat.

I have a base of beige on my nail and it's fully dry, and I'm using my small dotting

We're going to switch over to our thinner brush in a second here.

 any polish on there, but I'm just using my thinner brush and I'm just spreading out the

 polish that's already on the nail, just to kind of smooth in that circular shape on the

Now for this next pattern, we're doing a half circle, mostly because it's off the

If you had that smack dab in the center you would do a full circle.

 We're going to do some dashes and then outline again with another half circle.

 point of each of those dashes we're going to create a half circle, but this time we're

 little dashes in the center of those half circles, and then you're going to add bigger

 on your skin as you're working, just go in and clean that up with your acetone and a

Depending on how you want to do this, you could do every nail the same,

 you could add some components to some nails and not to other nails.

 dashes with another circle just using my thin art brush, and I finish this pattern off with

 my small dotting tool and just create dots all around the outside.

 off this nail just by creating the rest of the threading of the doily, or the lace, whatever

 sketch in these little random lines, tying everything together.

Welcome to Let Me Try That where I find things online from crafts and

 I'm just gonna start off by grating this cause we're gonna make it the crust.

 I'm actually gonna start grating it with this fanciest grater I've ever seen.

 Okay now that you're done with the most tedious part, grating that cauliflower.

 You're gonna want to put this in a microwavable bowl cause you're gonna have to microwave

 So I took out the cauliflower and you want to leave a little bit of time for it to cool

 Once you have that, first thing you're gonna do is you're gonna spray your pizza pan.

 The next thing you're gonna do is you're gonna start mixing this stuff for your crust.

 The cheese is gonna be used to kind of make your crust stick together more.

 And if you've noticed that all my seasonings are in the little red lobster thing.

 So when everything's mixed well together, you're gonna start putting it on your pie pan.

 If you really love thin crust pizzas, I would probably suggest this.

 Um, the next thing you're gonna do is you're just gonna spray it lightly with Pam, a non-stick spray.

 I already preheated my oven, so I can just throw this right in there.

 I have some pizza sauce, and I'm just gonna use some mozzarella cheese that we had earlier.

 I have to make the other side... I'm gonna make half of it really saucy and the other half not,

 Okay, now that your sauce is on there, I'm gonna put my cheese on!

 Once you have your pizza made to how you want it, you're gonna broil your pizza.

 So I'm gonna put it in for four minutes, and then I'm just gonna keep watching it occasionally

 because I'm scared that if I leave it in a little longer, it'll start burning the cheese.

 It is a little bit around the edges, like where the crust is, but the middle of it isn't.

 There's always like three, like two really big pieces and like four small ones.

 This pizza would be really good with just mozzarella cheese and like sliced tomatoes instead of tomato sauce.

 I tried a piece of this part up here where it's a little bit darker,

 but I kind of like it because it kind of gives you that taste that you get from a stove,

 So the best thing about this pizza is that the crust is only 84 calories a slice.

 If you use like tomato sauce, it's only like 25 calories a cup and like your cheese.

 So thanks for watching and please let me know if you guys have any suggestions on what you want me to make next or try next.

 And subscribe if you want to see more videos of me trying things.

 These tabs are in a specific location so you can't get it backwards.

I'm not going to deal with them trying to get a refund or get new parts.

 I just went down to the dealer and paid the extra money for it.

 I'm going to take this one bolt back out and put blue Loctite in it.

 And then I'm going to let the case sit and the RTV tack up a little bit longer.

 And now we're pretty much ready to marry the two halves together.

 To do this, we took the case half, brought it on, put a few bolts in there for alignment, and left it loose.

 And we came in, brought this in, tightened it up a little bit, and left it kind of loose.

 What you have to do is you have to slide the shaft back and forth in the assembly so that you have room to put this snap ring on.

 You won't see it until you grab this shaft and pull straight back, and then you'll be able to put that snap ring on.

 Just work with it, fiddle with it, and you'll eventually get it if you're determined.

 And then, as you're doing that, you need to make sure your oil pump in here splines onto the main output shaft, as you can see there in the video.

 That, too, is kind of a pain in the butt to get all three of those things going together at the same time.

 And we did our final tightening on this part of the tail shaft housing.

 It goes in here, and then after I get that in there and seated, I'll show you how to install the yoke and what to do with that.

 And I'm going to show you how to open your own superfood lemonade stand.

 Now the cool thing about this superfood limonada is it is packed with vitamin C, electrolytes,

 bioflavonoids, protein, adaptogenic benefits, and the best part is, unlike that crazy, super

 sugary sweet lemonade from your childhood, this one is ultra low glycemic.

 So we're going to start our lemonade recipe with six cups of spring water to your blender

 Next, we're going to add four to five organic lemons, which as you can see, have been peeled.

 And every time I say the word pith, I all of a sudden turn into an older British nobleman.

 So the pith here is important because it's got bioflavonoids, and the bioflavonoids here

 They're hot, healthy, very good for cellular development, antioxidants here.

 So when you're peeling, you want to leave the pith on your lemon.

 As a sweetener, we're using our brand new green leaf stevia powder, which is zero calorie

 and zero glycemic, which means it won't spike your blood sugar at all.

 And it's got a nice light flavor, and it's 30 times sweeter than white table sugar.

 Next, we're also going to toss in one teaspoon of our kamu-kamu powder, which is the second

 It's going to add a real nice tangy flavor to balance out the sweetness of the stevia.

 Lukuma powder is a custardy, sweet, caramello, yum-yummy sweetener that is high in beta-carotene.

 So add a tablespoon of your lukuma powder for that custardy, num-num undertone.

 Next up, we're adding a tablespoon of maca powder for its powerful, hormone-balancing,

 I tend to have a couple teaspoons a day just to get extra, shall we say, bullish.

 You might want to start with a little bit less and see how you feel.

 Next, we are going to put in one of the stars of our recipe here today.

 We've got super soft, super delectable, wild-crafted golden berries, which are a super potent

 form of vitamin C. And they taste like a cross between a citrus fruit and a raisin.

 So let's start with, shall we say, a quarter cup of golden berries here to our blender

 Our next ingredient is extra virgin coconut oil, which is full of medium-chain triglycerides,

 And it helps to give our lemonade just a nice, creamy, frothy consistency.

 Next up, we're going to add a half teaspoon of our Himalayan pink crystal salt.

 And our final ingredient, for all the lovers in the audience, thanks to Lisa Gutierrez,

 30 seconds later, you've got golden goodness by the roadside, kids.

 And I would even say, if you wanna sweeten it up just a tin bit more, you could add an

 extra quarter to half teaspoon of the green leaf stevia powder, if you wanna do that,

 Is there like some kind of law in California you can't have a lemonade stand?

 So leave me a comment below on where you think in LA I should set up a superfood lemonade

 So family, if you dug my golden berry camu lemonade here today, give me a thumbs up and

 Number one, where you think in LA I should open up that lemonade stand.

 And number two, what other beverages or treats do you think would go over well at that lemonade

 So I wanna thank you guys so much for tuning in and checking out my golden berry camu superfood

 I also wanna thank Ultimate Superfoods and Ogio for hooking us up with the maximum summertime

 So it's time to run off to the workshop and start building my lemonade stand even though

 So gonna go bang some nails, suck down some lemonade, and I will see you guys soon.

 Um, so are you thinking through what you're gonna put in your stall?

 Dad you wanna come jeepney, jersey, jeans, blouse, bald head, blind dog?

 Hi, I'm Amanda Hubba, and I am the corporate pastry chef here at AUI.

 Today I will be demoing how to make a tropical mango mousse cup.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make a tropical mango mousse cup using our Alaska

 Then I'm going to take pre-whipped cream and fold it in two intervals.

 Once it's mixed in, go ahead and place it in the refrigerator until set.

 Right here I have cake circles that I took a little circle cutter and cut out, and I

 Take kiwi, pineapple, diced small, and some passion fruit dessert sauce.

 Now very simply we're going to take the Alaska Express mousse and finish it off with a little

 Hello ladies, I'm Jenna and I just got the Lash Appeal Kit by Lashily so I'm very excited

 to show you how it works because it's just an easy, perfect way to enhance your eyes

 whether you're going for a natural look for everyday wear or something more dramatic for

 Inside the kit you will find everything you need to flawlessly apply your lashes.

 There's even two different sizes of lashes, 10mm and 12mm so that you can go natural,

 Now the first thing you'll want to do is grab a little piece of foil, makes it easier to

 The great thing about our glue is it's black so it will blend right in with your lash line.

 Now the first look I'm going to demonstrate for you is the natural eye and as you can

 see right now I have no lashes on so you'll see the difference when I'm finished.

 You'll want to take the short lashes, the 10mm and grab them with your tweezers, making

 You want to make sure that you get enough adhesive so it will adhere to your lash but

 Now you will wait 10-15 seconds so that the glue gets a bit tacky and drop the lash right

 The goal is to adhere not only to your lash line but to the base of the lashes.

 You can move from the outer edge of your eye to the inner corner, leaving just a little

 The closer together the lashes are, the more dramatic the impact.

 Now all I have to do is stay away from water and moisture for the next 24 hours and enjoy!

 For a more cat eye look, grab a 12mm lash while you've got the 10s on and add it to

 You see how it flares up just in the corner for that cat eye look?

 So you might notice I added a few more 12mm lashes to fill in all the gaps between my

 If you'd like some more information on applying these lashes, you can visit us at www.lashbelie.com.

 I mean, you want to take the fiber out so you get that liquid nutrition that quickly

 Get yourself a Diana Stobo nut milk bag and I'm going to show you how to make a green

 You're going to start with your apples, your lemons, your cucumber, your celery and kale

 Put them into your blender and you want to make sure that you cut them up small enough

 All right, so now we actually have a really thick vegetable smoothie that we're going

 Okay again, what's so great about this nut milk bag is it's got this draw string that

 you can pull up and you can hang and let it drip or you can start squeezing.

 This nut milk bag has been used several dozen times and I'm using it on purpose to show

 you the reliability and the sturdiness as it pushes through all the juice from the fiber

 I wonder what to do with the leftover pulp where you can make wonderful flax crackers

 Here we have a wonderful quart of green juice in under five minutes.

 I kind of have to laugh when I filmed the first part of this video.

 And then that night it dropped about 40 degrees and we had ice.

 So that's why I'm filming the introduction to this particular video inside right now.

 What we're going to do is I'm going to show you how to use the two techniques we talked

 about before which are coiling and pinch pots to make a little monster which is a real simple

 Now this video is going to run about 10 minutes so what I'm going to do is I'm going to break

 So what I'm going to do here is I'm going to just turn this and pinch in with my thumb

 So we can just keep doing this until we get it pretty even throughout.

 So what I've got here is I've got a little bowl, a little pinch pot bowl here, which

 First of all, for the project I'm using here it doesn't matter that this is all cracked

 But if you don't like those cracks I've got a little container of water here.

 Just take a little water with your finger and you can rehydrate that as you stretch

 This project is not important but just to show you this real simple technique here.

 So what I'm going to do now is we're going to take this little bowl and we're going to

 So what we're going to do is we'll take this and I'm going to pinch it in like this to

 So you've got to, if you can imagine this, this is the head of a little monster here.

 I'm going to dip this in a little bit of water and I'm going to just wiggle it right back

 on there like that to give the guy an actual, more like a nose.

 That way I can move him around and he's going to be a little bit fragile or soft because

 Next thing we're going to do is I'm going to make a couple of feet for this little guy.

 We'll take another little piece of clay like this and we're going to again do a ball.

 Then I'm going to cut it in half with my needle tool like this.

 And that's going to give me a couple little feet here for my little guy.

 What I'm going to do now is bring my board back out here so we can work on the board.

 I'll give a little definition to the back here with a needle tool so you can see that

 What we're going to do is attach the head to these little feet like this.

 I'm going to take a little bit of water here from my water bowl.

 All right, so this is going to be video two of the headboard build.

 This is going to be basically the interior of the bed or the headboard rather, so in

 So I'm going to be cutting the grooves for the top rail and the middle rail along with

 Each style will have a groove on each side so the panels can fit in them.

 And then I'm also going to be cutting the tenons for the top rail and the tenons for

 The groove is three quarters of an inch wide by three eighths of an inch deep.

 Three quarters of an inch wide by three eighths of an inch are deep.

 Each style, the tenon needs to be three quarters of an inch thick to fit into the grooves that

 All right, so just a little bit on the setup on how I've got this going.

 This is the reason why I didn't want to do, it's like eight mortise and eight tenons on

 I've got an outfeed, or not outfeed, but it's one of those rigid outfeed supports on the

 And then I've got my miter gauge with two clamps set on here to keep it against the

 I shouldn't have to worry about them touching the blade or anything like that.

 So I should have a nice straight feed to get my shoulder defined on all sides.

 For the top rail tenons, they were an inch and a half long by three quarters of an inch

 thick to once again fit into the grooves and the mortise that I had cut earlier in

 It's a little tight, but a little bit more finessing and it should be good to go.

 And yes, this is me being lazy and not wanting to move a four by eight sheet of plywood around

 And here I trim up my middle panel to size, which is 43 and three quarters inches long

 And then I begin to trim up my side panels and make sure they all have straight edges.

 And then trim them to size, which are 13 and three quarters inches squared.

 If any of you have done yoga before you might be familiar with this type of stretch.

 What we're going to do is we're going to attack it a little bit differently than you might

 We're going to turn this from a passive stretch into more of an active stretch.

 You'll see a lot more range of motion gained in a shorter period of time.

 You might not be able to get your leg quite as straight up front.

 What we want to make sure you're not doing is turning the hips out to the side.

 We really want to fight to square our hips up as best as we can.

 A lot of times in class when we do this I'll see folks lean over and put their elbows on

 We actually want to stay upright, keep our belly tight, and our goal is going to be to

 get our glute of this front forward leg as close to the ground as we possibly can.

 The way we're going to do that is we're going to do some cycles of active resistance and

 For the active portion, which we're going to do five second holds in, I actually want

 you to try and turn on everything that you feel the stretch in.

 We're going to do that by driving the leg into the ground, like you're trying to push

 After the five seconds you're going to relax and try and get a little bit deeper.

 It's a good idea to do about three or four rounds of this on each side, actively pushing

 in for one, two, three, four, five, and then relaxing again for about ten seconds or so.

 Make sure you come out of this nice and easy and then switch legs.

 If you notice that you can't do this on the ground, you can't get that leg around at all,

 what we're going to do is set you up on something a little bit higher.

 A bench works really well, a nice sturdy coffee table, a chair, you could even use your dinner

 Same idea, step the leg across, square the hips up, and now I have a lot more ability

 Same idea, push down hard for five seconds and then relax into the stretch.

 This is a great exercise to do before or after you do some heavy squatting.

 My other perfect egg videos seem to be doing very, very well, so I'm going to show you

 I do not have one, but we don't want this to boil, so you have to adjust this.

 I'm going to keep this at a medium heat, and I'm going to slap this beautiful egg together

 When you see these bubbles down here, you know this pan is ready.

 You're going to agitate these bubbles, get rid of them basically, with your spoon.

 These are going to take anywhere from four and a half, five and a half, six and a half

 If you want them a little firmer, well, geez, I bet you it's going to take a little longer.

 Now I'm going to set the timer here and check this baby again in around four minutes.

 We want to make sure it's not adhering to anything on the bottom.

 I may go like another minute, but you don't want it, like I said, you don't want it.

 Now see, this is a little firm, just like again, depends on how you like them.

 Like I said, if you took it out a few minutes earlier, it's going to be a little less runny.

 For more perfect egg videos and cooking videos, visit my YouTube channel and LiveLife365.

 Shrimp have long been the most popular seafood on mainstream menus, and for good reason.

 The extensive offerings of Portico brand cover all shrimp applications, and we carry a wide

 We also offer different forms of shrimp, such as raw or cooked, peeled and deveined, shell

 In a medium bowl, toss the shrimp with lemon and lime juice until well combined.

 Cover and refrigerate for at least 4 hours, or up to overnight, giving it an occasional

 As the shrimp marinates, the acidity of the juice cooks the shrimp, giving it a firm texture

 While the shrimp marinates, whisk together the oil, sugar, paprika, salt, and remaining

 Next, chop the tomatoes, cilantro, and onion, and mince the serrano peppers.

 Once the shrimp has marinated, pour off the liquid from the shrimp mixture.

 Add the chopped tomatoes, cilantro, onion, serrano peppers, and oil-juice mixture.

 If this dish is not being served immediately, you can cover and refrigerate for up to 2

 Serve with tortilla chips garnished with lime wedges if desired.

 Ceviche has recently experienced the highest percentage of growth among menued seafood.

 A great way to take advantage of this trend is with a ceviche bar.

 Provide your customers with their choice of seafood, such as halibut, salmon, tuna, or

 calamari in addition to shrimp, and offer select toppings to make it their own.

 For those seeking edgier flavor profiles, include ethnic toppings like red onion, corn,

 cilantro, sweet potatoes, and aji amarillo or habanero chili peppers for Peruvian-style

 For more fresh and flavorful ways to expand your menu, visit us at www.ciscoezyne.com

 In Cook's Corner, we have Forrest from the Nutfield Ale and Steakhouse showing us how

 Josh, this is one of those days when I wish that you guys could be here in the kitchen

 We have Forrest Rothschild from the Nutfield Ale and Steakhouse.

 It's actually a new cut that one of our purveyors happened to tell us about because braised

 All we did was we took some beef ribs, took out the rest of the bones, and then wrapped

 What's nice about it is you actually get more meat than you would on, say, a T-bone, and

 What we're doing is we're actually just going to sear it off, and then we're going to throw

 it in the oven for about 45 minutes to an hour at about 400 degrees.

 Then afterwards, we're going to take the remaining juices from it and turn it into the sauce

 Well, what we did is we simply took our saute pan, heated it up, threw a little butter in

 Because we want to get the sauce going also, we threw a little red wine in there.

 I just happen to be a Cabernet fan, so we threw a little in there.

 We got a little salt, pepper, garlic, shallots, and some butter.

 The great thing about butter is that it always gives that extra wonderful, creamy flavor

 It sounds sinful, but it's really ... As soon as you added the red wine, the whole smell

 It's always great to have an audience around and be able to have people smell it, because

 then it just gets a palate going and everybody's ready to eat it.

 This is something we're actually going to be doing as a special from time to time in

 If people want to check it out, they're always welcome to stop down and see what we've got

 At this time, no, but we're looking at working with different sauces.

 That's always a great part of being in the kitchen, is because you can experiment.

 You throw your pan on real high, throw a little dollop of butter in there, and you just sear

 Obviously, this is a big piece of meat, so it's going to take a little bit longer.

 If you just cooked it right away and ate it, it would be very tough.

 By braising it, it actually helps break down the collagen inside the meat and make it very

 That's why sometimes people are like, oh, look at this piece of meat.

 Well, if you actually cooked it in just a little liquid for about an hour or two, it

 actually break down the meat and give it a much more tender flavor and bite to it.

 When we come back, we'll show you how to put the sauce together.

 Braised beef ribs with Boris Rothschild from the Nutfield Ale and Steakhouse.

 So this has cooked for 60 minutes through the magic of television.

 And for those that have heard of that, our garlic mashed potatoes, yes, this is what

 So what we did with the sauce is we actually finished it with butter.

 A classical French term is monté au beurre or to finish with butter.

 Because if you just did straight wine, it kind of has a little acidic flavor to it and

 Well, I actually had cooked the wine a little bit more in advance so it would reduce real

 But all you have to do is reduce it so it has a little bit thickness in the consistency.

 And what you want to do is what's referred to as nappé or to coat the back of the spoon.

 What we did is we did roasted Roma tomatoes with Parmesan and parsley.

 And of course, it's New England, so we need to give it that comfort flair.

 And what better way to have it than to have Boris cook it for you, right?

 While you finish this off, why don't you give your phone number?

 And is this on special right now or is this something you're going to be...

 It's something over the weekend we're probably going to be doing.

 And every so often, we're going to be pulling in other specialty types of meat to try at

 We've got two medium tomatoes, here's one already chopped, here's one we'll chop.

 And I like to, when I do a cucumber, I like to take the seeds out.

 Now you can do, get the English one that doesn't have the seeds, but I'm going to take that

 And I like to see a little bit of green on the tomato, on the cucumber.

 And to take the seeds out, all you need to do is, take a spoon, and the tip of your spoon,

 The seeds are what make the, anything that you're making with cucumber, if you're making

 And then you just want to, let's see if I can get rid of this one.

 When I did the tomato, I seeded it a little bit, so we wouldn't have too much juice in

 I'm going to say if you cut off the top, then you can squeeze the seeds out.

 And nothing has to be very fine, since it's going to be a salad.

 You don't have to be real careful about getting all the things the same size, because you're

 And of course, you could always say, well that's the way I wanted them.

 And the way I do a green pepper is I take off the top, and then it's real easy to pull

 Rather than cutting it, cutting through the seed, and then you've got to pull all the

 And then you can also pop out the top, and use the top to chop up too.

 But we're going to put the whole green pepper in, because I feel like, what are you going

 When you taste it, really, you're going to, it's not going to need it.

 Or you could, you know, there's wonderful Greek vinaigrettes out that you could use

 We've got our can of olives, our feta cheese, and our little bit of lemon peel.

 And of course, I didn't bring my microplane, so I have this little knuckle buster here.

 Whenever you do this on a grater like this, just make sure you're just getting the white

 And I didn't take these out of the can this time, so I didn't have to worry about putting

 And just having the different shapes makes it much more interesting, too.

 So you've got the round olives, and you've got your chopped cucumbers and tomatoes, and

 What I did, when I cut the onion, I cut it in half, so I only have half moons rather

You know football season is upon us and that means it's time to make game food for game day or any other time.

 What we're going to do today is make deep fried pizza and all you're going to need is some flour, all-purpose flour.

 Next time you're in the store pick up one of these pizza crusts that's actually in like a long biscuit can.

 Mozzarella, pepperoni, I got pizza sauce over here and also I got some microwave bacon.

 I nuked it for about a minute in the microwave and then crumbled it up and earlier I also browned some Italian sausage.

 Okay, so the first thing we're going to do is sprinkle some flour on a clean sanitary countertop.

 Once you've got your dough out on the countertop, take a rolling pin and flour it down.

 If you wanted like a half moon shape you could actually take a lid cover and actually make them round and then just fold them back over on themselves like that.

 So what I'm going to do is make squares and in order to do that, get my sizing about right, I'm going to come down right there.

 I'm just going to take a pizza cutter like that and now because this crust is going to be thin,

 as soon as you get your sauce made and your cheese and you put all your toppings in and you fold it over and get that all done,

 So that means we need to make sure that our grease is good and hot and then we'll get to work on it.

 We're going to put some sauce and I'm going to leave one side of the triangle so that I can fold it over on top of it.

 Now the next thing you want to do is have a little container of water and just kind of wet the edges of this thing.

 That's going to allow it to seal up really good when you fold it on top of one another.

 Now when it comes to actually pinching this thing around, pinch it, press it down and then fold it back over on top of itself.

 That way you get those nice little ruffles along the edge and it will lock it in and keep the stuff from squirting out hopefully.

 I'm going to bump it up to just above that, get it a little bit hotter.

 We'll have a nice golden brown deep fried pizza ready for game night.

 What I'm going to do at this point is put it on a paper towel and I'm going to hit it with a little bit of garlic powder while that crust is good.

 If you want a quick way to have football food, there's nothing...

 Because you love me, and you want to cook for me, and you want to hug me.

If you love wearing glitter polishes, you must be as excited as I am about being

 able to take it off in large chunks like this and I'm doing this using school glue.

 been experimenting to find the best method for this and I'm about to share it with you.

 I use an empty nail polish bottle to store the glue so I can use the brush.

I will show you what it would look like if you paint it over a base

If you feel that your glue is a little uneven, you can use your finger to even it

So this step is over and the next step is to paint your nail with your

 a video that I swatched this polish for you to see but I used about 4 cups of glitter

 usually you're going to have to do the foil method or soak your nail in the nail polish

 remover to get all the glitter off or you have to scub it with your cotton pad many

 is the key to getting it to come off as a big piece because the glue actually is a little

 show you how I take off the glitter polish on the rest of my hand.

 You might find some glue residue left on your nail bed but nothing a hand wash with soap

 won't have any more hesitation to wear those beautiful sparkly glittery polish of yours.

 Thank you so much for watching and I hope you would try this out for yourself.

 Start with a piece of felt that's about eight inches long by about five inches wide

 Place some cotton balls about an inch from the bottom of the strip

 If you have fun for glue that across the top if not just a small piece of felt

 You can make a bundle of yarn for the beard, but I had a new mop

 So I just cut five strands off my mop use one of the strands to tie them together

 Like that now this will form the mustache and this will be the beard

 Like that on each side of the face glue some greenery like that

 you're going to twist the hat and bring it down beside the face apply some hot glue and

 Set that down in there like that use the remainder of the pipe cleaner to form a loop and

 I'm adding just a tiny bit more greenery here, and there's your finished Santa ornament

 Uh, I was in Florida on vacation, but now I'm back and ready to make videos again.

 It is called the Dutch French Braid, so if you like it, please keep watching.

 If you choose to use a spray bottle, take your spray bottle and just mist the doll's hair.

 Then, from the front of the hair, you're going to take a big section, just like this.

 Then you can brush it out to make the front look nice and smooth,

 Take the hairs from the front and divide it into three sections.

 To Dutch Braid, you will need to take your left piece and cross it underneath the piece in the middle.

 you will take a section of hair from the side and add it to that piece.

 Then you will take the piece on the right and cross it underneath the piece in the middle.

 Take the piece on the top and on the right and add a piece of hair to it.

 Then take the piece on the left, cross it under the one in the middle,

 And continue that, crossing, under, taking a piece of hair, cross under, take a piece of hair,

 cross under, take a piece of hair, cross under, take a piece of hair,

 Hi, this is Nick Robertson and we're going to be shooting for Slick Hair TV.

 Today we're going to be doing a Zayn Malik inspired fade, real tight on the sides and

 Now we've created the outline, cutting everything down to what I don't want and everything here

 I'm going to start fading sheer over comb and then I'll come back through and I'm going

 It's a matte finish and it's got a really, really, really strong hold.

 Get the product in there, don't even worry about styling it quite yet.

 Make sure that you get all your lines nice and clean and then start molding it into the

 Hey guys, thanks so much for watching and welcome to my kitchen.

 I actually got taught like the eyeball method which is like not using a

 measuring cup but I'm gonna roughly tell you how much you're gonna use and how

 know what I'm talking about when we get into the video because it is like

 homemade and a lot of people who make the same thing over and over again they

 picture on Instagram and everybody got super excited, now I did want to share

 with you guys that I am wearing my Courage in the Kitchen apron and I use

 it every time that I cook now that I have it and it's my favorite because it

 goes really really long on my body so I use it when I wash the dishes so I don't

 bath, honest to God, it just depends on where we go so like maybe if he painted

 or you know if he it was muddy outside or something like that and I have to

 where your money goes because a lot of people um you know are very selective

 and have maybe even a charity that's close to their heart so there's tons to

 choose from so don't forget to check out FordCares.com under Warriors in Pink

 doesn't necessarily have to be an apron if you want to get involved and help a

 a haul soon enough when their new line comes out because I do want to show you

 guys all the awesome things that they have in store because recently I was

 part of the summit and I got to see a little sneak peek of their new

 collection and I'm super excited because tons of things I cannot wait to

 get my hands on so anyways I'm just like I know I can ramble on and I'm just too

 excited but yeah so all that information will be on FordCares.com and I'll put a

 up for me it's because I use stew meat and the package it says stew meat it's

 circle steak and it's just a really good cut of meat but the store that she goes

 to out here is really far from me so yeah I'm gonna use the stew steak but as

 you can see it does have a lot of fatty parts you want to cut that off because

 it's gonna be kind of tough to eat if you have these really hard pieces in

Then you're gonna move over to your hot pan and a little bit of olive

 and this is just gonna start the browning process pretty much it's gonna

 gonna go ahead and let it start to simmer and cook a bit and then I'm gonna

I know she uses salt and pepper and also garlic salt for her seasoning but I

 saltier and spicier so I use one that's labeled Malibu and it's like an

 flakes and chili flakes and things like that so just makes the meat really

 then I'm gonna go ahead and give it a good toss let it cook and while you're

 doing this this is gonna add the flavor for your gravy because you're gonna

 dilute it with water and flour so you want to really give it a good generous

I know it sounds or it looks really scary and looks like it's gonna be super

 salty but it's not trust me because it will get you know almost like watered

So this is going to be the flavor of our gravy and I'm gonna do the same

 seasoning process twice then covering it and after about five minutes after I

 flavor it smells so good in here I can't wait for you guys to try this you guys

 yeah as you can see can you see those little pepper flakes involved so good

 the flavor of our gravy down we need to actually make the gravy and all you need

 cup of flour and you should get this really thin consistency almost like milk

 it's gonna look like milk you're gonna pour that straight into your pot full of

 the meat and juices and it's gonna thicken up so quickly as we continue to

 add more water and more of the water and flour mixture it's gonna start looking a

 little bit more like soup or a stew than it did when we started and that's okay

 because every time that you mix it and stir it and you let it heat up it's

 gonna start to thicken so that water is going to evaporate and just create this

 looks a little bit scary and kind of on the light color but as you let it cook

 and simmer it does change color quickly but this is actually a really quick meal

 you've got about 25 to 30 minutes you're gonna have an awesome meal that's gonna

 feed so many I have usually packed this up because I have a small family we can

 eat it two nights in a row or maybe even for lunch so this is pretty much how I

 plate it I'll take a bowl of white rice and then pour this beautiful concoction

 on top of it and as you can see it's really thick and chunky and then I add a

 little bit more extra gravy on top and it's just so tasty and it's a really

 for stopping by and watching me cook I know a lot of you guys really enjoy

 these videos they're kind of like um extra bits of my life because it is

 cooking it's not beauty usually I'm doing like fashion or beauty or males or

 something but yeah it's cooking I feel like I'm in my element because I'm a mom

 hashtag warriors in pink you guys if you want to see like pictures of the summit

 all the other models of courage you can use that also hashtag SC castnate if

 you're gonna do this meal or recreate this meal I want to see what it looks

 like what you guys think how it tastes if you guys you know totally nailed it

 or failed it because I I tend to be a 50% nail and fail when I do things on

 Pinterest so yeah let me know what you guys think and I'll see you guys in the

Today I'm going to be showing you guys how to delete videos from your iPod and also a tutorial.

 And what I have right here is an iPod Nano 4th generation with video recorder.

 And I've been searching on YouTube trying to figure out how to delete videos because I recorded some videos I wasn't proud of.

 Okay, first what you do is you grab your iPod USB cable which comes with the purchase of the iPod.

 Now in order for this to work you have to remember you have to have iTunes.

 Okay, you connect it and when you connect it the iTunes will pop up.

 The kit includes the seat belt bar, the hardware to install, the tools you will need will be

 a 17mm wrench and socket, and in certain cases you may need a 7-16 drill bit.

 As you can see the bar has a longer ear on one side than it does the other.

 So there are several different ways that you can install this bar to the cart.

 On this cart we will be installing the bar on the front and using the shorter ears towards

 We will take two bolts and then one of the short brackets and then the nuts and washers.

 Congratulations you have finished the installation of your MAGX seat belt bar.

 So what you can do instead of just going in here and shortening, duplicating notes, is

 So this is pretty easy to do, it doesn't give the same exact same effect, but if you're

 looking for a more subtle kind of build, it might be a good idea.

 So what I would do is turn the feedback up to 50%, turn the dry wet down because we're

 going to automate that, and then maybe, you know, choose either delay time 1 or 2, or

 And then basically all you'll do is have a simple snare roll, so this is hitting every

 So that's pretty cool, and you can also do a shorter delay time, for example this.

 In fact, what I normally do is link them, so it's just hitting in the center there.

 So that's just a simple way to use delays to sort of fake a snare roll.

 Now one thing you have to be aware of is that it can cause phasing, so if you have two snares

 hit at the same time, or slightly different times for each other, you're going to cause

 So what you may want to do is sidechain the delay to the snare, and you can do that by,

 if we cut this, insert a new audio track, and go to the ins and outs of Ableton, in,

 Now if we play the snare roll it will come through this channel as well.

 So all we do is copy this delay on there, and it's still automated, and then we can

 put a compressor on the delay channel, and sidechain this delay to the snare build, like so.

 And it's pretty powerful because at around 6,000 RPM you get around 155 horsepower.

 So in first gear you got the biggest gear, right, to get your inertia moving, right, get the car going.

 And then you got the smallest gear which is the fifth gear so you can go at higher speeds.

 Now gradually let go of the clutch while gradually pressing the gas.

 Hi there guys, well today I'm standing here on this box, fuse box, TV box, whatever you

 And well this is one we use in our country, yours may look a bit different.

 Doesn't matter, it's all the same, earth leakage, earth leakage.

 And well I've had a few questions or queries lately about what to do when the earth leakage

 Because first thing you want to do, well first thing most people do, call an electrician.

 Even if it's 10 o'clock, 11 o'clock at night, call the electrician.

 But there are a few things you can do to narrow the problem down or at least have some power

 And yeah, I'm going to go through them, show you some steps on what you can do.

 First thing you do is, don't call the electrician, there's a few things you can do yourself to

 Don't just switch it off, actually go and unplug everything, even the multi-adapters.

 If you've got multi-adapters or other adapters in there, unplug everything.

 So take them out from start to finish, even the hard to reach ones, behind the fridge,

 The fridge or freezer is also one of the main culprits why the earth leakage might drop.

 Come back to your trip box if you're sure that everything has been unplugged.

 Start from the one side, start from the main switch, then switch on your earth leakage.

 If it's all been switched on, still stays on, lights are on, then that means there's

 If you get to one plug and you plug it in, earth leakage trips off again, then you know

 that thing that you just plugged in, that's a suspect right there.

 So what happens, unplugged everything, switch it on, earth leakage still tripping.

 Test, if you switch the earth leakage on, switch the main switch on, it stays on.

 So you start from the one side, go through these ones, get to here, earth leakage trips.

 If those two are on, earth leakage is on, everything's on except this one and it still

 stays on, everything else is working, then you know something on this circuit is not

 So if you unplug everything on that circuit, then you know maybe the wiring is faulty on

 Switch it on, test it, one trips and you know that's your carpet.

 It could be plugs, could be the geyser, the hot water cylinder, which is also a main problem

 And yeah, at least you can narrow it down, then if you can switch the faulty one off,

 switch the rest on, you can live with some of the power still on.

 Your earth leakage is still tripping, even if you just switch that on, that on, still

 Okay, so for those of you still having a problem with the earth leakage tripping, next step

 Now some of you won't want to do that, call an electrician, that's fine.

 Like I said, this is just for demonstration purposes, your DB will have a lot more wires

 What you're going to look for now is the earth leakage at two points down here.

 Make sure the power is turned off, we're going to remove these two wires.

 What we're going to do, why we're going to do that, is just for the testing purposes.

 Remove those two, make sure they're not touching anywhere, well, it doesn't really matter.

 Then you switch on your main switch and switch on your earth leakage.

 Now if it's been tripping the whole time and it still trips, even if you remove the two

 wires at the bottom, it still trips, it still trips, then you know you've got a faulty earth

 If now you switch it on and it stays on, where it previously didn't, then you know it's not

 the earth leakage at the fault, there has to be something else.

 So switch off the power again, put the wires back in, if that's not your problem.

 Make sure it's nice and tight, pull the wires to make sure they're tight.

 Now you've got to find the neutral bar with the wire coming from the earth leakage unit.

 If this is the wire going to this neutral bar, then this is going to be the one you're

 Sometimes neutral bars might be bridged out, if that's the case, you know you've got to

 But if it's just the one with the one wire going to it, start with this one.

 There will be a few neutral wires going in here, as many neutral wires as there are circuits.

 What you're going to want to do is start from the one side and remove your first wire.

 Pull the wire a safe distance from everything and start switching on from the one side.

 If your circuit stays on with that one wire removed, electricity is switched on, everything

 is working except for the one wire that you removed, then you know on that circuit that's

 You can search for whatever is switched off, whatever is not working and on that circuit

 Make sure you check the outside plugs, watertight plugs, those are also a big thing.

 Garden lights, also one of the main sources of tripping on the earth leakage.

 If that's not your problem, put the wire back in, tighten it up, pull on it to make

 Loosen that one, same thing over again, switch it on, switch these ones on, if it's still

 tripping, put it back in, move to the next one, move to the next one, until you find

 So at least you've narrowed it down to that circuit, then you can start the fault finding

 If it's a hot water cylinder, the geyser, that's usually the element.

 If it's a stove, well stove does cause nuisance tripping, so you might get an electrician

 If it's the lights, also a big problem, get an electrician out.

 If it's the plugs, just double check if you've removed everything.

 If you've removed all the multi-adapters, all the plugs, outside plugs, everything.

 And well, if it's one of the wire circuits, one of the neutrals connected to one of the

 Now you're not without power for the rest of the night until the electrician comes.

 Hey dudes, I'm Hilah and welcome to Hilah Cooking on a special adventure today.

 We're up here at the original Louis Mueller Barbecue in Taylor, Texas.

 We're going to watch them smoke some brisket, rub some brisket, make some sausage.

 Here I am with Wayne Miller who is the third generation owner of the Louis Mueller Barbecue

 We started in an alleyway behind my grandfather's grocery store.

 He had a meat market and back in the 40s refrigeration wasn't as ubiquitous as it is today.

 My grandfather found that there was a demand for prepared meats at lunchtime.

 So he began, he put a pit together and kind of found a place in the alleyway that he started

 experimenting with some different cuts from the meat market and really kind of developed

 I started here cleaning bathrooms, sweeping floors, cleaning tables, washing dishes, taking

 I had probably about 11 years experience here before I left to go to school, to go to college.

 I took a 25 year sabbatical and have come back in the last few years.

 My father was ready to retire so I divested myself of my company and came home.

 But what I've really come to find over the last few years is that even though I'm saving

 some of my history, everybody who comes through these doors and has come through these doors

 Our Holy Trinity is really comprised of beef ribs, short beef ribs, beef brisket, and all

 That's the foundation from which I think Texas barbecue is really known for, specifically

 Before the big Austin push for barbecue in the last two or three years, most all of the

 heralded barbecue spots in Central Texas were outside of Austin.

 And so you found them in Luling and Lano and Lockhart and Taylor, these small little places.

 And they all did it in a very similar fashion, very simple rubs, little to no sauce, there's

 It's beef driven and a lot of salt and pepper, smoke and thyme.

 Well I'm going to help you out with some brisket and some sausage today, so let's go

 And when you look at the grain from profile, you can see there's no marbling really that

 This is the marble section, which is also called the point for the reason that it comes

 We have a lot of excess fat that's on the brisket that we really need to remove from

 And once we have those portions trimmed out, some of that will go into our sausage mix.

 The hardest thing we do, the most artisan part of what we do is to learn to be a human

 I grew up in Mississippi, in rural Mississippi, and from there I moved to Chicago and went

 I did my time in Chicago working in hotels and fine dining restaurants.

 And from there I moved to Nashville where I took a sous chef position.

 And moving to Austin, I tried to enter the barbecue world and got lucky and ended up

 I think with barbecue you see something that's, this is American history, it's United States

 I mean I consider Louie and Bobby Miller to be Central Texas barbecues version of Escoffier

 It's been around for generations and just set forth a specific type of cuisine that's

 different from anywhere else in this country and really anywhere else in the world.

 You know, they say there's three things that you don't talk about in mixed company in Texas

 Like, Hilah, if you feel this one right here, you can start to see how this one is starting

 And it's funny because, you know, we'll pull a brisket out to carve and everybody will

 be standing around and when it comes out of the paper, when it comes out of the wrapping,

 and it just hits the table, it just sort of jiggles in a certain way.

 And the first instinct of everybody is, oh, I want to touch it.

 Hi, I'm Trevor Royce, inventor of the great new revolutionary chute attachment called

 Today I'd like to show you how easy our product is to use and how quickly it attaches to any

 This chute adapter is constructed of a standard nylon ratcheting strap, very easy to use,

 and then it's constructed of aluminum with a stainless steel handle.

 The ratcheting strap gives it the ability to hook to any chute from any manufacturer.

 And even if your hooks won't hook onto the chutes, you can pull them all the way together,

 Works on any chute from any manufacturer like I said, but it also works on any aftermarket

 So you grab it, hook it onto the chute, check it for level, check it for level, and then

 The angle iron on the end of the chute works to keep this thing from ever sliding off and

 Also if you don't have the angle iron on the end, you can snug that thing down as tight

 Lightweight, great product with a rotating discharge plate, gives you the ability to

 Grab it, drop it on, figure out where it needs to be for its horizontal alignment, push the

 pin in, the stainless steel pin goes in, and then you have a lock, a stainless steel

 The stainless steel lock keeps that pin from ever coming out during discharge.

 On either side of this thing, anything can hit, bump, push on that pin, and it won't

 After that, choose from our many plate attachments for the product.

 Our product gives you the ability to core fill a block like you've never had before.

 Most people don't even try to core fill their block because it's so difficult or, or they

 don't even attempt it or they have to pay for a pump truck to come and pump it for them.

 With our product, you have the first time, first ever time, ability to core fill a block

 You drop them in, you still have full rotating motion, 360 degrees, you're ready to go.

 Now our wall attachments have drop down sides to give you added control while you're pouring.

 With this narrow wall attachment, you need to consider things like the amount of slope

 that you have on the chutes and the slump of your concrete so it doesn't clog up.

 12 inch diameter elephant trunk tube attachment drops right in.

 When you're dropping down a long distance and you don't want your concrete to fall through

 the air and separate, use a trunk attachment, eliminate separation.

 It's simple to take off and put on another truck, on the third truck, on the fourth truck.

 You can use this thing all day and just keep putting it from truck to truck.

 You're going to have the attachments you need to pour every job.

 If you take this truck over here and pour a slab and take the next truck and pour a

 wall, grab the attachment, throw it in, you're ready to pour walls like you've never poured

 And that's what makes this product so great is because it's easy to use and it works for

 Take the lock off, pull the stainless steel pin, take the product off.

 Grab the ratchet strap, pull it off, and you're ready to go on to the next truck or save it

 We love getting it out to the people who need it because concrete pouring is hard.

 It's hard to get concrete off the end of these chutes into where you need it until now.

 If you're interested in our product or want more information, give me a call anytime.

 Okay, what we're looking at today is a Maytag top freezer refrigerator.

 Customer's situation is it was leaking and no cool, which is basically, for this particular situation,

 is that the compressor stopped working, so all the food started to defrost, which is creating more water,

 and the water made it seem like it was leaking, and it's not cooling because the compressor's not coming on.

 So I have lights, the thermostats are set up, fans are on so it's not in defrost,

 so I'm going to go down and I'm going to check the starting components for the compressor,

 and I'm going to check the compressor to make sure this is in good operating condition.

 Today what you're going to need for this repair is a quarter-inch nut driver or an attachment for your drill,

 a wire strips, something to pry with, potentially a tag pull or a flat-blade screwdriver, and your multimeter.

 First what you would do is remove the back panel, which the customer's already removed.

 It's typically four, eight, six, twelve screws holding the back panel on.

 You want to remove them all and remove the unit or the cover from the unit,

 and what we have here is these are your starting components down here.

 You probably can't pick it up, but I can hear it click every 30, maybe 40 seconds, maybe a minute.

 It's going to click and then wait and then click again and then wait.

 It's trying to start the compressor, but right now what we're going to do is we're going to remove the tabs.

 You just got to see which way yours comes off, and once you're able to remove that,

 You're going to remove this box that's connected to the compressor.

 Once you remove it off the three prongs it's on, you can pull it out and be able to access it from there.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to try to make it so you can hear when I shake it.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to go out and make sure I have the part that I can either A, put back on here,

 So what we're going to do is we're going to take a meter, we're going to set it to read ohms.

 We're going to take our leads and we're going to touch two of the three, all three combinations,

 and two of the readings are going to add up to the other reading,

 and that will tell you that you don't have any bad windings inside the compressor.

 Also it's going to allow you to then put it on and check and see if you have continuity, see if it's shorted out to ground.

 So what I've done is I've tested the three separate ways I can touch two of those pins,

 so we're going to go ahead and look to replace the broken part at this point.

 Alright, so first thing that I'm going to do with this particular one,

 it does have a relay here, bolts to the edge, I'm going to remove that.

 Because now what you're left with are your two main power wires coming down to the compressor.

 You're going to take what the unit unplugged of course, you're going to snip them off,

 Once it's unplugged of course, you're going to snip them off, and throw away that part.

 With those wires cleared back I'll be able to take my universal starting component that I have here,

 This one has a diagram in the back of the package to show you just where to put everything.

 And it does have a common start and run that's on your compressor.

 You can look at the way that it's set up on the compressor and match it.

 So, the way that I have it set up now, my back wire is going to be red.

 Once they're in place you're going to remove the black caps from the red and the white.

 If it doesn't go on tight just go ahead and crimp down your wire connections.

 These are your two main wires coming in to your orange and your blue from the unit.

 Get that twisted on there all the way so there's no wire exposed.

 Once you've got that far, you can at this point plug the unit back in.

 You can already tuck these parts in, but you want to make sure that it's going to come on first before you do so.

 As I feel, one of these lines is going to start to get a little bit warm.

 I'm going to reinstall the back cover, put the unit back in place,

 Give it approximately 24 hours to get back down to temperature.

 Now I'm just going to tighten down the screws that are holding the back panel on

 Thank you for watching another quality video brought to you by ApplianceVideo.com.

 We're gonna put the enchilada sauce in there, the can of chili with beans,

 Mix that all in and crush the Doritos and put them in there, mix it all together.

 I'm gonna put the can of chili with the beans, with the onions and the jalapenos I chopped up.

 And then I'm going to put in a cup and a half of cheese, sharp cheddar cheese.

 I'm gonna mix this together and then I'm gonna crush up almost all of the Doritos.

 Kristen is going to give it a quick spray to eliminate the sticking.

 And then we'll let it cook for about 20 minutes and then check on it and see how it looks.

 I'm gonna put some, about 5 or 6 briquettes on the top of this as well.

 So the next step here is Kristen's gonna put some chips on the top.

 Put the chips on the top and then we'll cover it up with cheese.

 And then we'll let it melt for about 5 minutes and then it should be good.

 So after we get this cheese all melted up, we'll let you know how it tastes.

 And then on top of it, we'll add some lettuce and some black olives.

 The only thing that we forgot that would have probably been good on this is a little bit of ranch dressing for the lettuce.

 So we'll show you, or let you know how it tastes here after we let it cool down and take a few bites.

 Well everyone, after taking a few bites of this, got the olives and lettuce stacked on top.

 Not really a casserole, but anyways, mixed together like this, it tastes really good.

 This is another one that I would recommend guys if you like any type of Mexican food.

I think that we could have grabbed some ranch, but it's really good.

 I've had a lot of people ask me how I create curly hair for my dolls, so today I'm going

 Now I like to start at the bottom of the hairline on my dolls when creating curly hair.

 So you're going to insert your hook into the post, then you're going to yarn over, pull

 up a loop, and then you're going to chain the amount that you need to create the length

 So if you want a longer curl, you're going to chain more, but we'll make this one a short

 So what you're going to do is you're going to turn and single crochet back up in all

 So when you get back to this point where you began, you're going to single crochet

 Now if you want a lot of curls, you can do one in each post all the way across, but what

 So I won't do a curl in this one, I'll jump over to this one, insert your hook, yarn over,

 single crochet, and then once again, chain the amount that you want for the length of

 curl that you want, and then turn and then single crochet in all the chains you just

 And then once again, single crochet in the post where you started the chains, and then

 you just keep going all the way across until you reach the other side, and then you're

 So what you can do is you can jump up into the next round like this, and do curls in

 every single post, in every single row, or what I like to do, just so I don't get too

 many curls, is I'll skip this row, this round here, and I'll jump up another one.

 So you insert your hook into the post like this, yarn over, and single crochet.

 And then you'll just keep going back and forth doing curls all over.

 Make sure to check out my breakfast dish on Kitchen Conversations with Foodie's Dish.

 For the apples, we're going to take our apples, a tablespoon of cinnamon sugar.

 If you don't have a cinnamon sugar grinder, you can just take cinnamon and mix it with

 Now that we have that, we're going to toss this into our mixing bowl.

 And we're going to stir this up, just until it's all spread evenly on the apples.

 Now this is three apples, so we're going to take about a half a stick of butter.

 Now I'm going to turn the flame on, but make sure you have an adult present when you do

 Now that the flame's on, we're going to bring our butter over to the pan.

 Now that the butter's melted, we're going to go ahead and put the apples inside the

 So once you do that, you're going to let it sit for a little bit.

 Now that the apples are cooking, another option that you have is to use mixed berries for

 So what you can do is you can take a banana that's extra ripe, you can peel that, you're

 And now you're going to take a pork and you're going to mush it.

 So the apples are pretty good, we're going to lower the flame a little bit.

 So now you're going to take some batter and put it in with the bananas.

 It should be more than the bananas in the batter, otherwise it wouldn't be banana waffles.

 Now that the batter's ready, we're going to pour it onto our preheated waffle iron.

 Don't be afraid to add a little more batter, but it will spread out when you close the

 Now that we have our batter in, we're going to close our waffle iron.

 They should have this color when they're almost ready, so we're going to leave them in for

 So what you're going to do is you're going to take a half a cup of sugar.

 So when you buy the berries, they come with no sugar added, which is why we added the

 So now that our berries are cooking, we're going to finish our apples.

 So now that our apples are ready, we're going to put them into our serving bowl.

 We're going to bring them over to the counter and set them down.

 So depending on how many people you're serving, you can add more batter.

 So now we're going to walk over to our berries and see how they're doing.

 Now that my waffles are ready, I'm going to choose the toppings that I want.

 Hi, I'm Milani Lundgen, and you're watching Kitchen Conversations with Foodie's Dish.

 Hello YouTubers, this is how to make a healthy natural cirrhosis diet snack.

 What I've done is I've grated organic carrots, organic beets, organic broccoli, and organic ginger here.

 The avocado contains a large amount of glutathione, which is a super liver detox antioxidant.

 Glutathione is one of the most powerful antioxidants for liver detoxification.

 We basically just cut down the sides and the skin causes the knife to stop.

 You're just going to go through the sides to make little square chunks.

 Then get in there with a spoon and basically just spoon out all the avocado like that.

 Either way, it can go in the dressing or in the salad right now.

 Oil has really got essential fatty acids like the hemp oil and flax oil are really good oils.

 Here's organic spirulina, the blue-green algae with all the vitamins and minerals.

 To add a little bit more salt, the Himalayan sun-dried sea salt.

 All those kinds of salts hydrate your body and provide 72 trace minerals.

 This is a heavy metal detox chlorophyll used for if you have amalgam fillings and you're getting them out.

 You want to take a lot of chlorophyll to stop the heavy metals getting into your bloodstream.

 We're going to put raw organic tahini nut butter in there to give it a nice nut butter flavor.

 Then we have this turmeric, which is an amazing liver cleansing and detox herb.

 If you have a bit of chunks, it's okay because the miso has nice little chunks.

 If you have all those ingredients, you only need to buy those ingredients like the spirulina and the oils.

 Periodically, every few weeks or so because a little bit goes a long way.

 There it is, a nice soupy, raw salad snack for reversing cirrhosis of the liver.

 These are rejuvelate kombucha mushroom probiotic friendly bacteria drinks.

 It's a very powerful immune boosting drink because of its probiotic friendly bacteria in the intestines.

 It's not only a good liver drink, but it's also good for the intestinal tract.

 So one of my favorite tools in the kitchen that has helped me be more efficient and actually not only a time saver but also a money saver is my salad spinner.

 So what's really neat about it is you can use it not only as a salad spinner, I use it to drain pasta, clean my herbs, clean my other produce.

I do have a strainer but usually I just grab this and use it as a strainer.

 And for you parents it also makes apparently a great drum because it's often taken out of my drawers and used as a drum.

 So I just want to show you quickly how I use it to clean my produce.

 Put these away as is, they're covered with dirt, they're very wet, they're not going to stay fresh very long and you're not going to get your money's worth.

 So what I do is take them over here to the spinner and I have the water running, I have the strainer inside.

 What I do is kind of take them apart, helps loosen it up, get the dirt out of there.

 And what I'll do is rinse them down in this water and then I can just pull the basket out.

 And if you have a really thick bunch like this you can split it in half so you do even a better job at getting out the dirt.

 But basically now you have all of this dirty water down here and you can just rinse that out, kind of shake out some excess water.

 So now that I've rinsed it, you put the cover on and you have this really neat action where you can see it spin and you see the centrifugal force kind of throws all the water out.

 And sometimes I'll even kind of take it and I'll show you the next time around but you'll see all of it to the side.

 If you want you can just give it another toss and put it back on.

 And also by the way for moms out there and dads, kids love to do this part, to do the spinning and also the breaking.

 And again, after you spin all that just put it on a paper towel.

 It just again keeps any excess moisture, absorbs it, get rid of the excess air in the bag.

 I usually can keep my herbs and my lettuces for at least a week if not more.

 And every few days you can just change out that piece of paper towel.

 And just so you know too, as far as storage, you can press this part down.

 I'm going to show you how to put spark plugs and plug wires on a 2003 Volkswagen

 secondary air injection pump so you can get to the plug wires where they plug

 connector and then on these two hoses here you'll squeeze these tabs that stick

 numbered them just to make sure I'd get them in the right order.

You'll get underneath here with a 90 degree pick right in this area

 extension with your spark plug socket and you get right down in there.

 number two and three are kind of right up against the intake manifold.

So reach up under the intake manifold, unclip those, get your plug

 help you a little bit while you're getting your spark plug boots onto the

 Today I just want to do a refresher on how to print envelopes on the new Konec and Alta

 I'm looking at the 4E series, so that's the C224 all the way up to the C754E.

 We've got, I've already prepared an envelope, so this is a standard DL envelope.

 I'm going to go into Printer Properties, after selecting my printer of course, in the list.

 And you can see on here that I'm just going to go straight back to Default first.

 The first thing we need to do, and I'll go through the different tabs here, on the, jump

 I'm going to select here, I'm going to select A4, or Envelope DL I mean.

 And I'm going to make sure that the paper size is matching that, so I've got Envelope

 I'm going to select Paper Tray is going to be Bypass Tray, because I'm going to select

 And you notice there it says Stick To in the Paper Type, which is just what it was last

 Just notice that I've got it highlighted on the Bypass Tray, and the type is Envelope.

 It also gives me a warning on here now when I change it to Envelope that it's going to

 force the print type to be one-sided, because you can't print two-sided or back-to-back

 Now you can see it's reflected that change on my main screen here.

 I set the original size and the paper size to be Envelope DL, selected the Bypass Tray

 as the Paper Tray, and I clicked on Paper Settings for each tray and made sure the Paper

 We're just now going to go to the printer, and I'll show you the last stage of the printing,

 It now says, Please Insert Paper in Bypass Tray or Select Paper Tray.

 So of course, now we're going to put the envelope in the Bypass Tray.

 And I've got the special DL envelope with the flap on the short edge, which is the recommended

 You could also use the traditional one with the flap on the long edge, but it's not going

 So now I'm going to put the paper in the tray, and push that in there.

 And you can see now when I put the envelopes in the paper tray, there's a button here called

 Complete, and that was grayed out before, but that'll light up as soon as you put the

 So I'm just going to select Complete, just to let the printer know that the envelope

 It's now feeding in the envelope, and we should have that in here.

 This is the C754E, but it goes for the whole black and white and color range.

 Today, we're going to take a rotten banana and make it edible again.

 Not completely fresh, but definitely more edible than what it is now.

 And this is very much like the concept of putting a cell phone that's been dipped in

 But the important thing is to make sure you get all the air out.

 If you don't have a warm setting, you want to interchangeably go to the cooling setting

Alright, so I'm just going to go ahead and cut open the bag and just

 axle set, you're going to have to remove the little e-clip that holds on the tire.

 we're going to go ahead and install are the ones in the front wheels.

 front wheel off, you'll see that there's bushings inside of the rim.

 go ahead and just push it onto the axle and it should be enough to go ahead and push out

And now you can just do it the other way around and you are good to go.

 you're going to get your new little bearings, slide those into position, front and back.

 And now, slide it onto the axle and reattach the e-clip or the wheel nut.

 done with the front, it's time to go ahead and move on to the back.

 the bushings are not in the wheel, they're actually in the axle carrier.

 go ahead and remove this top screw that holds on the camber link.

 you're just going to go ahead and push down the axle carrier, remove the axle pin, and

 get your dry shaft, you're going to line it up with your axle, which you need to go ahead

 it up with the dry shaft, push it all the way down, and then you can finally attach

 Now this is definitely something that people did in the olden days.

 They pickled because they had a harvest they didn't know what to do with and this worked

 And of course as I said before, they didn't know how good the stuff was.

 One is if you want to have it for your kids to munch on or you want carrot sticks that

 sit in the fridge, you open the jar and within a week or so they're gone.

 You don't want a very, very salty product because you're turning it over before it's

 But if you were say wanting to do a great big vat of these over the winter, you have

 And I've always been anti-carrot sticks even though we run this weight loss site.

 Carrot sticks and me have never really gotten on but these actually are very, very good.

 And I find the best way to do this to fill the jar, and you may have different ideas

 about this, but I just grab a whole bunch of these things like so.

 Now they say, and I can't tell you whether this is true or not because I've always done

 it and maybe if you didn't do it, it would also work, but to put a grape leaf in the

 Now I know it's amazing because we're in the middle of winter here and I actually have

 And the tannins in the grape leaf will actually stop your pickles going soft and rubbery.

 It probably would have been a good idea to shove the thing in the bottom but I've put

 But you can put bay leaves or, like this one over here I've got lemon slices, garlic

 If you don't want to have this on your shelf looking beautiful, you can just be very rough

 So I'm going to chop these ones up into half and just basically throw them in.

 And to help the pH lower, I'm going to do just over a teaspoon of vinegar.

 One thing you have to remember here is not to use chlorinated water.

 Because you may end up getting the wrong kind of bacteria in here or the thing is going

 So what I do is I use water straight out of the tap because we're on rainwater and bore

 But if you are in the city, you can either buy bottled water, distilled water, or you

 can get your ordinary tap water and sit it on the bench for 24 hours and the chlorine

 Or you can boil it for 20 minutes and get on with it and use it, but not boiling, cool

 Or you can put a pinch of vitamin C in there, vitamin C powder, because that actually reacts

 So either way, you can use one of those two things, but don't use chlorinated water.

 And that's not going to be enough, so I'm going to do another one.

 Now I've noticed on the web that a lot of people say to inoculate this with whey.

 And I just can't figure out why that is because I make a lot of dairy products because I have

 cows, and I know that the bacteria that are in whey are quite different from what I'm

 There is lactobacillus plantarum in unpasteurized milk, but most of our milk is pasteurized.

 So if you see that in an instruction anywhere, I would ignore it.

 Basically, you're going to get the right thing doing it this way.

 You may notice that little bubbles start to rise up the side, and that's a good sign.

 And you need to leave it there probably at least a week before you start tasting to see whether they're starting to sour.

 And then, of course, you can start dishing them out to your kids.

 And you'll be filling yourself up with good things and that lovely Lactobacillus plantarum.

 We're going to use about 1 and 3 quarter cups of cornstarch and 1 cup of water to start.

 If that is not enough, we will add more cornstarch as necessary.

 After we thoroughly mix it, we will demonstrate how it is quicksand and why it is quicksand.

 What does it feel like when you move your fingers very slowly through it?

 When you move through quicksand or this homemade quicksand slowly, it behaves like a liquid.

 Because when you move slowly through it, it allows time for water to get in between the

 When you move quickly through quicksand or homemade quicksand, the water kind of gets

 pushed out and the little grains of cornstarch or sand cannot move across each other smoothly

 That is why if a human steps into quicksand and then quickly tries to yank their foot

 or leg back out, they feel like they're trapped because the quicksand behaves like a solid

 But if they were to simply move their foot back and forth very slowly, like you are moving

 your fingers very slowly, it will feel like a liquid as water can come back in between

 Did you know that a human won't really sink all the way down into quicksand?

 Try to slowly release yourself from it so it behaves like a liquid.

 Or lean back slowly and float on your back like you would in regular water to slowly

 This is one of my most favorite homeschool science experiments.

 When you grab it, it feels like you have something solid, but as you lift up, it all flows right

 I had some of the parents at our homeschool co-op were very excited and interested to

 So any age, but especially the young kids love this because they can get their hands

 Quicksand is a non-Newtonian fluid, so it does not follow the traditional laws of Newtonian

 fluid dynamics like honey, wood, or water, regular liquids we're used to.

 So it behaves, the viscosity of this stuff behaves differently depending on the outside

 When you go fast, hard, it behaves like a solid and you feel stuck in there.

 So this is how you make homemade quicksand using cornstarch and water.

 It's a great project and you'll probably play with this for at least a half an hour.

 Okay so in this video I'm going to be showing you how to make this handy little chisel holder.

 Now this holder can also be used for things like screwdrivers, marking gauges,

 anything with a handle really and it will take all of about 15-20 minutes to make.

 We start this project by cutting down a length of 75 by 35 millimeter pine for about 500 millimeters.

 here I've marked the position of every single hole that we need to drill and recess which will house

Okay so over at the drill press here I've got my 32 millimeter forstner bit set up

 so it will be cutting the shallow recess into our workpiece here so that's going to be about

 four or five millimeters but really that measurement doesn't matter.

 we've got all of our recesses cut we'll switch over to our smaller 22 millimeter

 okay so I've switched over to my smaller 22 millimeter bit and we're going to drill all the

Okay so with all of our holes cut and our recesses sort of bored out for our chisels

 it's time to remove a little bit of material from the front here so our chisels can just slide on

If you have a table saw that can take a dado stack you could come to your table saw with a

 miter bar or your crosscut sled and remove a nice fillet of material from each one of these holes.

 My table saw can't take a dado stack so another good option would be to use your band saw so just

 use your band saw to remove a you know a 10 millimeter gap so just mark five mil from either

 side of that center line you marked earlier and then cut from those lines.

 take a dado stack but my radial arm saw can so that's the way I'm going to be removing this

Okay so I've already got my saw set up with a dado stack which is set to about 13 millimeters.

 Okay now this step is completely optional but what I'm doing is adding a bevel onto the underside

 of the workpiece and that's just for aesthetics really it won't add anything to the functionality

 very rough here and I've just got my fence set on the other side of the blade as usual

 Okay so that's looking really good so I'll take all these sockets out and I'll give it a really

 quick sanding you know nothing special just maybe 120 grit if that just to make it look a little bit

 nicer and once that's done we'll go ahead and mount it onto the wall.

 to the wall it's fairly simple now I've got this slab up here which I use to hang my tools on

 now if you're not drilling into timber or something similar to that make sure that you use the

 appropriate wall plugs but what I've done I've pre-drilled the two holes which is inside of the

 socket so they're going to be hidden by the chisels for the screw heads and with those screws in I'm

 Okay so that's done so as you can see behind me we've got it full of some chisels I've got a

 marking gauge in there as well and I am really not concerned about these chisels falling out

 anytime soon so really simple design but super sort of sturdy and reliable so

 actually make yourself a clamp rack now the only difference between this rack and the chisel holder

 is that you don't need to pre-drill those holes at the drill press so here I've cut my piece of

 timber down to 1.2 meters long and I've also made the dado stack cut a little bit deeper so it's

 about three-thirds of the way through that workpiece or 50 millimeters but as you can see

 it works quite well and it means I can keep my clamps nice and organized.

 Again we're going with the 6 inch because it's a small area and

 So, you know I think after a final sand of that I think it should

 And I feel like I haven't done an actual makeup tutorial in a while.

 So I'm just going to do a really quick and easy tutorial today.

 And it's really just like the colors that I'm immediately drawn to.

 And like literally the first eye look I created when I first got the palette.

 And if you guys have any more requests of other colors you'd like me to do a tutorial with,

 And this is Lorac's behind the scenes eye primer that came with the Lorac Pro 2 palette.

 So we're just going to put this all over our eyelids to make sure that our eyeshadows stay on all day long.

 Okay, so the first eyeshadow we're using today is the color buff, which is just a matte cream color.

 And I'm taking a big flat shader brush and applying this all over my eyelid

 to create a nice even matte base for the rest of the eyeshadows.

 Now we're using the color nectar, which is a really pretty like peachy brown color.

 And I'm taking a rounded crease brush and I'm just going to work this color into my crease

 Now with a smaller round brush, I'm taking the same color and bringing that down along my lower lash line.

 Now with a flat shader brush, we are taking this really pretty rose gold color called rosé.

 And we're just going to pat this onto the base of our eyelid because it's really pretty and I just really like it.

 Okay, now with the same brush, we're just going to flip it over and then go into the color mocha,

 which is a really pretty shimmery brown color that I think works really well with rosé.

 And we're just going to put this on the outer half of our eyelid to kind of ombre the look.

 And then we're going to bring it up and kind of place it a little bit into our crease.

 Okay, now with another crease brush, we're going into the color, I'm pretty sure it means light brown, but it says LT brown.

 And we are just going to go back and forth with this into our crease to blend all the colors together.

 As you can see, I messed up a little bit, which is why I'm grabbing my beauty blender and cleaning that up a little bit.

 And now I'm going back in with the color buff, which was the first color I used just to clean up the brow bone.

 Now with a small brush, I am going into the color snow, which is this white frosty color.

 And just applying this on the very inner of my tear duct, just to brighten up the whole eye look.

 I used my favorites, Benefit They're Real Mascara, L'Oreal Smoldering Eyes for the waterline, and Stila Stay All Day for the top liner.

Like I said, it was quick and easy and super neutral and super wearable for everyday.

I've seen a lot of people, they cook it different and it still tastes good but

 done is I've washed them off with some water and with some lemon juice.

 the back is my pressure cooker because I'm also making Jamaican curry goat.

 to mention that this video was brought to you by my wonderful sponsors at FashionwithBP.com.

 Fashion is foremost inspiration so definitely check out their website.

 of kick, you can sprinkle some Jamaican Scotch bonnet pepper spice on there or whatever other

 one third of a yellow onion chopped finely, and one half stalk of green onion, which are

 putting it over it or putting it in your fridge or leaving it out for a little bit.

 it marinate for like 30 minutes just to give the seasonings and sauce enough time to marinate

 Alright you guys, so this has been marinating for about 30 minutes and I'm just going to

 point is make sure you spread your chicken out so they're evenly spread.

 your oven should be preheated and pretty hot right now to get everything going.

 you want to do is put a good amount of sweet baby-raised gourmet honey BBQ sauce into a

 is important is because this is what you're going to use to basically have color added

So what I like to do is use a basting brush and at first just go through

 and put some of the browning caramel directly onto the chicken.

 to put a tip of it into the separate container that you have mixed up with the BBQ sauce.

 Alright you guys, so my BBQ chicken has been cooking for about 45 minutes, covered.

 what I'm going to do at this point from now is we're going to cook it uncovered.

 pretty good right now but it needs to basically get some color to it.

 is take that same sauce that I had left over and you want to re-baste your chicken.

 also want to take some of the gravy that's formed around it and also baste your chicken

Once you've re-basted your chicken with the rest of the BBQ sauce, place it back

 in the oven and just let it cook for about 20 minutes and that will be it.

 the gravy, which is the water, start to thicken using the BBQ sauce and using the chicken

 for about 20 minutes and I will come back and show you the finished product.

 Alright, so I just cooked my BBQ chicken out of the oven and as you can see, look, it has

I'm going to be serving it with some rice and peas but my rice and

If you want to know how to make the rice and peas, check out the

 I'm going to show you how to do a small diameter circular knitting using two circular needles.

 You can use fixed circulars if you have just two circulars of the same size.

 Here I'm actually demonstrating with two circular needles that I've made using only the needles

 This is our Rainbow Denise interchangeable kit that we sell in our store.

 And so what I've done here, just to make this clear, is here's the needle size that I'm

 working in, size 10, and I've made, I've put a size 10 tip on each cable.

 And then on the other end I've put any smaller size needle tip will be fine as long as I'm

 off of that tip when I pick up my needle, it's in my left hand, then any size will do.

 Okay so to join this in the round, to begin doing a circular, a small circular knitting

 piece, I will transfer half of the stitches onto this other needle.

 I want to use my smaller tip in this case on the other needle just to transfer them over.

 Okay and now I'm actually going to slide them to the other end,

 okay so here I'm just to orient you, I'm holding in my right hand the,

 Okay so double checking that my cast on is in the center and not twisted around or wrapped

 is to make sure that I'm just going to be working with one circular needle at a time.

 So I'm about to knit off of this, these stitches, so I follow that cable and make sure I grab

I'm going to knit that first stitch a little bit snugly, that's a word,

 I just want to make it so that it's a firm connection between the two needles,

 Okay so knit to the end, and now we can actually just slide this whole thing to the cable to kind

 we're working the same circular needle once again, just begin knitting on this needle.

 So half the round goes on one needle and half the round is worked on the other needle.

I'm not turning the work, this is circular knitting, I'm just kind of reorienting

So here we again, we're using the same needle, and then we just continue like that.

That's it, two circular needles doing small diameter circular knitting.

 So today we are making a beer milkshake and I think everyone's ears just pricked up.

Two joyous things that no one thought could go together but we've done it.

 next thing we're going to do is, malted milkshakes are very popular, particularly in America.

 What we've done is use barley malt, which is what you make beer from.

 It's kind of earthy and kind of sweetness and all sorts of things.

 bit, it's got a little bit of sweetness, a little bit of flouriness and it's going to

 I'm hoping this is going to taste amazing because right now it smells like beer.

 kind of got this just subtle bitterness through it, which is really nice with the beer.

 So if we followed the recipe that I've done at home, we're going to add a garnish of Oreo.

 I thought you were going to do something fancy with like something around the rim.

 you can go over to Donal's channel where we cooked up some candied bacon and beer cookies.

 Hey guys, it's me Chromie here and today I'm gonna be showing you how to set up

 Triton Primers, a little box that comes with it, um, where's that, oh, USB port with

 this little connector, um, you'll be needing this, the thing that connects to the back

 of your Xbox and then the red and white cables for you to get picture, and then

 also this, so this obviously will go with the red and white on the other side,

 well the other part, and that will go into the box, so let's get started.

 first, you'll need your box, there's a little piece right there, I think it's

 called, let me see, power in, and you'll be connecting this little piece right

 there, not too hard, and then there's a USB port, I hope you know this, but it

 will go right into this little Xbox, it'll go into the Xbox, let's just put it that

Next thing you'll need is this, this will go in the back, back of your Xbox,

 so get it back there quickly, alright, they're in, and once that's in, you'll be

 needing this, this is the red and white cable, so you'll be connecting these with

 those, so it's not too hard, um, let me find it, alright, so, red with red, and white with white, so once that is done, let me show you what it looks like,

 hopefully you can see this good, red with red, white with white.

After that is done, you'll be needing this little green cord, and you'll be putting that right into this thing called the audio in.

Once that is in, you're practically done with putting in cords and everything, so it'll work.

 But, well they're not completely gonna work, well they'll work, but it's not everything, so, you'll be needing your Xbox on, obviously, there's a little sync button right there, you'll be needing that, obviously, you'll press that, and then there's also a little power sign with saying sync on there, so you'll press that too, and you'll just hold it there like you're connecting your controller with your Xbox.

 And, let me see if they work, oh I heard the dashboard noise, so yep, they're working, so once you have that in, that's what all the blue LEDs will be on, and then the blue LEDs with the box will be on.

 Obviously for you to talk, you will be putting this little piece right here, once you have that, you'll put that little cord right into the bottom of it, and then you'll put this right here.

 This came off my old headset, my Triton AX180's, let me show you the actual green Delacorte one too, it's actually this, but like the other ones, so you don't have this big ol' knobby thing, well, I shouldn't say knobby, just this big ol' thing.

 So yeah, that's what comes with the primer, so you might want to go to RadioShack 2 and pick up a cord, a 3.5 with a 2.5 cord, so it'll just last longer.

 So, oh yeah, so with this, for the game volume and chat volume, they're right there, just slide those up to adjust your game volume and chat volume, little mute thing right here, turn up red when it's muted, and not turn red when it's not.

 And another thing I just don't like about these is that they run on batteries, so that's how you open this thing, there's this little, oh, this thing, little slot right there, you lift up on it and it'll come off, so yeah, they're really easy to use.

 Easier than setting up with, you know, the Tranex 720s and all that stuff, but yeah, that about wraps my setup video for the Tranex primers, rate, comment, subscribe, and well, I just hope you liked the video and I hope it helped you out, if you do have the Tranex primers or you're just looking up to see how they're set up, but yeah, I hope you like it.

And this is a lovely stretch for the spine and it also strengthens up the shoulder

We want to start in neutral spine so make sure you've got your natural curves

 in the spine as you would do when you were lying down on your back.

 underneath the hips and the hands are directly underneath the shoulders and again we keep

 your tailbone, tuck it under and then allow the rest of the spine to flex.

 breath in as you sustain that stretch and as you breathe out zip and hollow and release

 back into neutral, tailbone first and it's like you're restacking your vertebrae into

 Breathe out, drop into your tailbone, lengthen the tummy muscles and lift up the chin.

 a deep breath in holding that spine extension, breathe out zip and then hollow and return

 back into neutral from the tailbone again restacking the vertebrae.

As you breathe out you squeeze your bottom, you lift up your pelvic floor,

As you breathe out release from the tailbone first and then one vertebrae

 our neutral and as you breathe out drop into your happy cat position just as if you're

Breathing out you start from the tailbone and then restack into neutral

Next let's take this into another exercise called the swim prep.

 you breathe out zip and hollow we're going to glide forward with one arm and then glide

 in and hold and then breathe out you zip and hollow and return the hand and the knee back

 out we zip and hollow and we stretch forwards with one arm and backwards with one leg.

 all the way out to softly return trying not to wobble on the return.

 Hello ladies and gentlemen, this is Daniel here and today we are going to do what I call

 I'm not really sure what the traditional name of this design is called, but we're going

 to start with our pre-soaked soda ash solution, pre-soaked fabric of soda ash and we are going

 to fold it in half and then we're going to take the top half and fold it back along the

 middle line and then we're going to fold that half in half again so it's in eighths.

 Then we're going to flip it over and do the same thing to the other side.

 And now what we're going to do is we're going to make little triangle fan folds going up

 So what you do is you just take the edge and fold it over to one of the vertical lines,

 then you flip it over and you fold it against the same line that you folded against the

 first time and then you're going to fold it 45 degrees across, flip it over and fold it

 up against the same vertical line, then you're going to fold it over against the other vertical

 This fold takes practice so the more you do it, the easier it will be for you to just

 Alright so now it's all folded up and I'm going to put a rubber band around it and there's

 Obviously for this one particular piece I'm just going to dye it one way and let's go

 It's basically just a tray with a grate over it and I figured the best way to show this

 fold would just be with essentially the primary colors, yellow, blue and red and I'm just

 So I'm going to start with yellow and we're going to get a lot of mixing.

 It's a fairly small piece so I'm just going to put a bunch of yellow on this side right

 These two sides are at 45 degrees and this side should theoretically be at 90.

 So I'm going to put some yellow right here and then I'm going to turn it around and I'm

 I've found the less dye you use you kind of get a floral effect.

 So now I'm going to use the blue and I'm just going to put it on this side right here and

 it's going to mix with the yellow and make some green and I may put some yellow on, some

 I'm really trying to concentrate on the different sides, not so much like this top side and

 this top side, whichever side is on top I guess is the top side right now.

 I guess if you were doing it with a shirt you could see where the cuffs were at, the

 I get these dyes from Dharmatrading.com and I'll try and leave a link in the description.

 So I'm putting red on this side, trying to just put it right here in the center of this

 I'm just trying to, I don't know if limit is really the right way to say it but that

 looks like enough so now I'm going to put it on this corner right here.

 I want to leave a little bit of yellow or a little bit of white.

 Now I'm going to put just a little bit more yellow on to finish off the piece.

 I will put it in a plastic bag and I will let it sit for upwards of a day and then I

Today I'm going to show you how to make this relaxation gift basket that you can give to a friend this Christmas.

 So you just want to go ahead and spoon the coconut oil into the sugar.

 And keep spooning it in until it gets to the consistency that you want.

 Then you're going to add about 2 tablespoons of olive oil just to add a little bit more moisture to the mix.

 I really like these jars because they keep things fresh and you know they're used for preserving and canning anyways.

 And it helps to just use a knife and a spoon to get it in there the first time.

 And then for the second cupcake it gets a little bit easier to spoon the icing on there.

 So you're just making a layer of cupcake buttercream, cupcake buttercream.

 So you just want to smooth the buttercream down and close that off.

 I like the electric light because there's no fire hazards and you can keep it lit when you hand them the basket.

 Now this is kind of boring, so we're going to add some presentation.

 I made these little tags out of cardstock, but you can print them off the computer and cut them out.

I stick both ends through the hole that I made with a hole punch.

 You've got little tags for each mason jar and it just makes it look pretty and adds that little special touch to it.

 And I wanted to make hand-drawn tags because I just thought they were fun and added a little bit of humor and they weren't perfect.

 And putting in the jars, the sugar scrub, the ambient lighting, and the dessert.

 Now, after you're sitting with all of this lovely stuff, you want to watch a lovely chick flick, right?

 And if your friend likes action flicks or mysteries or whatever, you can pick the movie that fits her.

 And if you'd want to watch my DIY skit for this basket, click right here.

 Hello again everyone, um, let's get that in the shot, there we go.

 That's what I'm going to be opening up today, or now, and the fan.

 So it's the Thermalright Venomous X CPU cooler for Intel Socket 1366, 1156 and 775.

 A big sticker, not sure if it's a case badge, bit too big for that.

 Always check that you've got all the stuff before you start putting stuff together, otherwise

 Note, before installing please read and understand the installation procedure, process and most

 importantly check that all the accessories are according to the user manual.

 If you do find any missing parts please contact the seller whom you purchased your unit from.

 Okay, I won't open that up but yeah you can see there's the back plate, there's the top

 Little spanner, that's for adjusting the pressure system they've got going on here.

 So here's the crossbar that goes over the heat sink that connects it to the plate.

 And if you want to increase the pressure you just pop that on there and you can twist it

 So you've got enough there to stick two fans on for a push pull.

 You install these between those fan clips and the actual fans themselves to stop the

 Alright, now we've opened all that rubbish, let's see the goods.

 This is the new one, couldn't really get the old one so I got this one instead.

 They've still got the issue with the base being not perfectly flat.

 Which is a bit silly because Thelma and I reckon that having a not flat base is actually better.

 They reckon it's nearly silent but there's no way this beast is going to be silent.

 This will be going into a fan control unit that I'm going to be getting within the next couple of weeks.

If you really want to find a really tasty chicken boonah sin-free recipe then keep on watching!

 Indian takeaway and I always have to order without fail every time a chicken boonah tastes delicious and

 I know I've said it before but for those who have never seen any of my videos

 350 grams of chicken cut into small bite-sized pieces and one tablespoon of lemon juice and

 But you could just chop these up very very finely, but we're going to put our onions

 Ginger and crushed garlic into the food processor and three tablespoons of water

 You could add two deseeded green chilies at this stage, but we don't like our curries very much

 Preferably a nonstick, but I don't have one with a lid and you're going to heavily spray your pan with fry light

 And I'm going to pour my onion paste in and cook for three to four minutes

 So it's been three to four minutes, and that's the onion paste so now we need to add your spices

 So you need to cook that for the next three minutes stirring continuously

 It's smelling good, so that's what it should look like quite golden looking so now I need to add the tomatoes

 Then you need to season it with salt and pepper I've got cayenne pepper because I can't find a regular pepper at the minute

 Because we are renovating and everything is not necessarily accessible

 So then pop your lid on and bring it to the boil so it just reached boiling point

 I'm going to take the lid off and then you want to pour all of your chicken into the pan

 and then you need to put the lid back on and pop it on medium heat so it can cook the chicken and

 But keep checking every now and again to see if you need to add any more water because it should thicken up

 And that should serve for what you're going to secretly serve two of us because it's all sin free

 If you really loved this recipe and you had fun doing it then don't forget to tweet me a picture

 I'll leave the link below or you could also tag me on Instagram

 I'd absolutely love to see your pictures of your chicken boonah

 So if you like what you saw and you want to see more give us a like and subscribe

In this video I am going to show you how I moisturize my hair and how I twist

 my hair to get a defined twist and how I reduce the frizz on the ends of my hair.

I haven't had any leave in since December so I have been using that because

 I purchased a ton of conditioner and I just wanted to get rid of it and use it.

 Onyx do a video on it some months ago and she described that method.

 You can always use a water based product but I prefer using actual water.

 I try to work the leave in conditioner mix through my whole hair.

Since it is pH balanced it allows my hairs on the ends to lay down

 my hair during the week or if I re-twist my hair this is how I detangle.

 and remove any shed hair so that once I do detangle on the weekend or once I do wash

 to make sure they are both the same length when I twist so that I am not sharing any

If one is shorter on one side I try to pull my hair in that direction so that

 even that allows me not to have frizz on the end of my hair when I do twist my hair out.

 Once I get my hair twisted up and it is nice and moisturized and soft I usually keep my

 twist in for about a day at least so that my definition is really good and it molds

 have seen that my twist are usually defined within hours of me leaving it in.

I hope you enjoyed this short video on how I moisturize and how I

 Hi everyone, I'm doing a tutorial today on how I wire my pendants.

 What I do is I fold it in half but I do leave one side longer than the other.

 I already pre-drilled my pendant and as you can see it has a small hole on there.

 What you want to know and what you need to make sure that you do is that you don't drill

 I'm going to put the long part of the wire through my pendant and I'm going to end up

 The shorter part of the wire I'm going to fold back like this and you're going to get

 Once you do that, take one of your pliers and fix the front piece of wire like this.

 It doesn't matter which side this ends up right or left as long as it's out like this

 Now the top part you're going to use your needle nose pliers and you're going to go

 about half way right here and you're going to wrap until you keep going all the way down

 I'm trying to do this as best I can so that way you can see and get an idea on how I do

 I had a request on it and I didn't want to forget so I have to make sure I get it done.

 Once you reach down to the pendant you still have the wire that you were just twirling

 right now with the pliers so what you're going to do is put your needle nose pliers

 face up like so and you're going to get the wire that you were twisting and you're going

 You can do it by hand or you can use your pliers to hold onto it.

 When you wrap it with your hands you can squeeze the wire to tighten it around.

 Once you have it like this, the wire that you wrapped that turned into a loop and then

 you're going to cut the extra piece as close as you can and the little point you're going

 to twist into the pendant wire until you don't see it poking out anymore.

 As you can see the loop is starting to form so this wire that you have left you're going

 You squeeze the wire and you pull and as you can see it's forming nicely.

 Hold that wire and you just squeeze that little piece into the rest of the wire so it's not

 poking out or poking you when you wear it or if you have it as a keychain or however.

 It kind of looks like the ones that are for the keychain because you have to twirl it

 All you have to do is open it a little bit and run it through and when you're done it

 might look open like this but all you have to do is squeeze it back together.

 Squeeze back with the pliers and here is your keychain loop and this is your final step.

 I hope this tutorial has helped on how to wire a pendant because I know bells could

 I wire the keychain loop and turn it into a necklace, a keychain, a keychain for the

 Today we're making pita bread, which is a bread served in the Middle East and other

 Mediterranean areas, commonly used for sandwiches and various other things.

 First we have instant yeast, salt, sugar, olive oil, water about 110 degrees, and all

 You could also use whole wheat flour or bread flour if you wish.

 The first step, we're going to activate the yeast by placing the yeast in water, which

 And we're going to put this in a warm place for 5 to 10 minutes until it becomes foamy

 And if you find it too wet, you can add a little bit more flour.

 Now we're going to flour our surface and we're going to place the dough on.

 And we're going to knead this for 5 to 10 minutes until it's nice and smooth and elastic.

 Might also add that if the dough you find is sticking to your hands, you can just give

 It's a little bit sticky, that's okay, we don't want it too dry.

 And we're going to place the dough into the bowl, making sure it's well covered with the

 Next we're going to slip this into a warm place for about an hour, an hour and a half

 Now that our dough has doubled in size, we're going to remove the saran wrap.

 Now we'll flatten each ball out with the palm of our hand, or the tips of our fingers

 Next we're going to roll it out until it's about, I'd say an eighth of an inch, a quarter

 And we'll repeat this process for the remaining balls of dough.

 Now that our dough is rolled out, I'm going to slip it on top of an upside down pizza

 Next I'm going to slip this into a 400 degree oven for about 4 minutes and that will give

 If you want it a little crispier you can leave it 6 to 8 minutes.

 And you can use this for shawarma, pizza, just about anything your little heart desires.

 For exact measurements on this recipe and more cooking tips, visit our website at www.FilipinoCooking.net.

 Hi guys, I'm Shelby with LB Teen and today we're doing painted pumpkins.

 I have a medium sized white pumpkin and then I have a tall orange pumpkin.

 You will need some toothpicks, some tape, and if you're going to use paint, a paper

 plate or plastic lid or something to put your paint on, a towel or a wipey.

 To start out, I'm going to take a wet paper towel or a wipey and I'm just going to wipe

 Ok, very similar to Jenny's video, we're going to do polka dots, only we're just going

 All you do is take your little round dotting brush and you're just going to dip it in.

 And if you want to make yours glittery like Jenny did, then I think that is absolutely

 Ok, for this one, this is a monogrammed pumpkin and I'm using my long top orange pumpkin for

 And I made this monogram on Google Docs and you can also buy monograms on Google and stuff

 So, you're going to do the same thing you did for the Aztec pumpkin.

 You're just going to take this on here and take a pen and outline everything on here.

 And you can use a sharpie to draw this on when you're finished or you can use paint.

 Ok, so I have dotted my pumpkin and to help out with the painting, I'm going to take a

 black sharpie and I'm just going to outline all the dots before I start painting.

 Ok, we're going to do the Aztec pumpkin and to start, I have a little Aztec template that

 And I am going to, I didn't realize this, but I'm going to flip them this way because

 And to start, I'm just going to cut these out and I'm going to tape them on my pumpkin.

 Ok, I'm going to follow the lines and I'm just going to poke some holes with a pen.

 Ok, so I have the little dots and I'm going to use a little bit of glitter paint.

 It has a little end right here so that you can just squeeze and it comes out nice and

 Don't forget to check out Jenny's channel because she has some really cute stuff that

 So check out Jenny's channel to see the polka dot glitter pumpkins.

 Thank you guys so much for watching and we'll see you next week.

 Well, this is the final build of the Freedom Gundam as you can see here.

 Now obviously according to this, you want to stick this part like that in here and then

 Now I removed the closed hand, the fist, from this arm so I can put the beam rifle

 There's a notch here which I'm going to, whoops, I'll have to put this in reverse.

 Then rail gun number one goes in here, which snaps into place like that.

 Obviously I'm going to have to pop it out so I can put it in again.

 So to put the shield on, we use this part here that's supported by the rear elbow, then

 Obviously I'm going to have to take the cover and see if it accepts it like that.

 This is a snug fit, but if you move around a bit it'll pop out.

 And finally, the wings, which I'm going to have to bend inwards like that.

 Come on, this can't be this difficult to put this thing together.

 For a moment there I thought I had a bit of a problem, but I guess not.

 The Rio Grade Freedom Gundam from the Gundam SEED animated series.

 This kit was a lot of work, but it was actually a lot of fun work.

 I hope any of you guys who get a chance to get this kit build it and make it as perfect

 For now, I'm done, and I would suggest everyone to go to Prime92's channel and watch her completed

Today for breakfast we're going to be making a Spanish scramble.

 eggs, we're going to be using almonds which are really high in protein and calcium.

 spice that's going to help us color our nut pate yellow so it looks like egg.

 we're going to use some salt and process it all and then add in a little bit of water

 in some scallions and cilantro and tomatoes and just folding that in, serving it on a

 bed of spinach and presenting a beautiful Spanish omelette or scramble.

 almonds, a half cup of dry sunflower seeds, one teaspoon of turmeric, a quarter teaspoon

 our dry ingredients, throw it into our food processor, our almonds, sunflower seeds, turmeric,

 to be mixing our tomatoes, our cilantro, a pinch of black pepper, and some scallions

So that's there and you'll see how it's yellow from the turmeric.

 Here is a half a cup of diced tomato, a quarter cup of slightly chopped cilantro that's been

 de-stemmed, two tablespoons of chopped scallions, a half cup of spinach leaves, and we're going

So then to serve this, what we're going to do is we're going to serve

So take your spinach leaves and just lay them out onto the bottom

 like to throw black pepper because black pepper looks really good and tastes really good.

 And then I'm going to just decorate it with a little bit of our edible flowers here.

 My husband doesn't like a lot of hot stuff, so he wasn't too happy with me.

 I'm just using a fork to do this so I don't get my hands all messy from the olive oil.

 We use these little guys for bean dip, your guacamole, your favorite salsa.

 And there's enough moisture in it for it to cook a little bit longer without sticking to the pan or overcooking.

 of the tents within the Premium Collection, so that covers the Montanas, the Vermonts

The one that we're going to use to show you how to fit is on the Montana

 5P, but what we show you will work for the rest of the tents as well.

 do have the option of either having the black on top here or the reverse side which is the

 Once we've attached the back two corners, we just simply need to take the back guy line out here and

 just loosely peg it in place so that when we pull it forward the protector is not going to slip

So once we've done that at the back of the tent, all we need to do is just repeat the

So again we'll just pull it forward and then take that guy line out into place.

 So once that's done, the final thing to do is attach the protector in the middle of the tent.

 A putty matrix is made of the tooth to be prepared using silicone putty.

 The putty is mixed with the appropriate quantity of catalyst to a uniform paste.

 It is carefully moulded into a smooth ball to ensure that it is free from creases.

 This is then carefully adapted onto the tooth surface and smoothed down to ensure that all of the surface detail is recorded.

 After the putty matrix has set, it is inspected to ensure that all of the surface detail has been recorded.

 It is then sectioned bico-lingually across two places on the occlusal surface to give three separate sections of matrix.

 These sections of matrix can be placed onto the tooth during the preparation process to check that the amount of reduction is appropriate.

Right here, this is Noodler's White Light Black Light Invisible Ink.

Right now we're working without a black light, so let's see how this turns

Right here I have a fountain pen that I have filled with this ink.

 write right away, I dip it in the ink, wipe the excess off on the paper towel, and start

Now this is invisible ink and it's not going to show in white light.

 to turn the black light on and see if we can still do this film.

If it did, I would dip it and hold it for a couple of seconds, wipe off the excess,

 ink in regular light, but if I wrote, Dear Alicia Summer Lee and KD, I would dip it in

 and use an awl to puncture a small hole in the old crankcase oil seal.

 Install the new crankcase oil seal by first coating it with oil.

 Then slide it over the drive shaft and tap it into place with a hammer.

 and confirm that the washer is fully seated in the blade driver.

 You know, when I first learned to play guitar, I was sort of taught by one of my first teachers

 that you had your hands, your thumb back on the back of the neck, and you always used

 So, for me, I like to have my left hand in a position like this where my thumb is just

 It allows me to play notes, bass notes, with my thumb, and also to mute the strings above

 It increases the dynamic range, because a lot of things I noticed in beginning, even

 intermediate guitar players, is they play with one dynamic all the time.

 I'm not suggesting that you should play aggressive and authoritatively all the time, but if you

 are able to widen your dynamic range to where your loud notes are fairly loud, and then

 your quiet notes, if you have a wider spectrum of dynamics, it makes your playing much more

 So my left hand is just anchored here in such a way to give me a chance to set me up to

 My right hand, as opposed to the way I was originally taught where you don't lay it down

 and you pick right here, I almost always have resting on the bridge.

 I use my pinky finger to sort of give me a sense of place, if you will, so I know where

 But with my right hand on the bridge, I can always mute whenever I want.

 When I was about 19 years old, I met Billy Gibbons for the first time.

 He told me that he always had his volume control on 10, and he did that.

 He kept his heel on the strings, and he kind of used his heel to control the volume.

 So this position of strength and sort of really focusing, yeah, I'm going to play guitar now,

 And it kind of cuts through all the technical stuff that we're going to talk about later.

 But if you're someone who's never played guitar, if you put your hands in this position and

 play one note and concentrate on that one note and make it sound juicy, groovy, whatever,

 and by that I mean just play one note and try to make it really feel good.

 Play the note, add a little vibrato to it, and before you get into practicing scales

 or anything else, just have an idea of what you're trying to accomplish.

 So just this idea of one note, I mean, take a page out of Albert King's book.

 Oftentimes two or three notes that he would just milk forever, and it's the most powerful

 And do that until you feel, you'll build up strength in your hand, you'll get a sense

 You know, the thing for me that's so important is that I feel like probably at least 80%

 How I put my hands on the strings, how I strike the strings, whether I use my fingers or a

 pick, the string pressure, the pressure of my left hand which will affect the tone as

 All those things, the tone being in your hands is something that is often overlooked, I think,

 and people think that if I'll spot the right pedal or the right amp or the right guitar,

 But truly, if I play my guitar for you acoustically, not plugged in, you will hear the exact same

 So remember that your tone is in your hands, so this idea of being centered, just concentrating

 Practice striking the string with different pressures, different spots through here, and

 see, just experiment and become more familiar with what that does.

 I think that alone, without really being a technical idea, will take your playing to

 And how dark your lines are can depend on how much pressure you put.

 And it also depends on how closely you space your lines, the values that you can get, as

 Or if you choose to crosshatch, you can get a much darker value.

 Sometimes I like to take a rather careful ink drawing like this one.

 This was done with a ballpoint pen, which allowed quite a bit of value range.

 And then just add a very loose watercolor wash to bring it out.

 So I'm mixing up some Burnt Sienna and a little Quinacridone Gold for warmth.

 This is my husband, who's trying to get warm wearing his hoodie inside.

 And I'm just going to splatter this on there, maybe leaving an edge, and the edge of his

 Oops, and since it's a lightweight paper, it's kind of wanting to curl on me.

 I like it, but I'm afraid it's going to try to run where I don't want it.

 And I got some of the Burnt Sienna on his lip where I don't want it, so I'm blotting

 Today we're going to learn a real nifty little tune called Blues on the Run along with some

 Today's lesson is designed for the intermediate to advanced player level 4 through 5 and we're

 going to be using a harmonica in the key of A. So if you haven't already gone ahead and

 printed out your harmonica tablature, go ahead and do so and then we'll go ahead and get

 Today's song is based on a five note scale that is not the normal pentatonic scale you

 And if you look on the sheet that says flat seventh pentatonic scale and patterns, there's

 And you can practice it going from G to G just to get used to it.

 And then you can also extend it down to the very bottom of the harp by hitting the F,

 And then you want to just practice it from that C all the way up to the G at 6th blow.

 You can also play the scale all the way across the whole harmonica up to the 9th blow which

 So go ahead and get familiar with that scale and then we'll start right into the tune.

 So go ahead and put the sheet that says blues on the run in front of you.

 And I'm going to play through it real slowly and I want you to follow along.

 Then after that I'm going to explain some of the other parts of the song in detail and

 Alright, let's go ahead and take a look at line one of the song.

 So one of the options we have with our tough roof systems is roof resurfacing.

 And what we do with that is we, what we're essentially doing is keeping your old roof

 intact and adding another layer to the top surface of your roof to make it last a long

 What it does is it keeps the cost a lot lower than a full removal and reinstall.

 If your roof is 70% in good condition, and what I mean by that is if 30% of your roof

 is saturated with roof leaks and the underlying insulation is wet, up to 30% it's cost effective

 We can resurface old hot asphalt and gravel, torch down modified bitumen, EPDM, TPO, any

 Then we use power washers, gasoline powered water power washers, and we power wash every

 We then look over the entire roof system, and what the infrared does is it shows us

 Shows us if there are any wet insulation boards we need to change.

 We cut them out and take all the wet insulation out and put new dry insulation in the places

 And then we use a primer, a clear primer over the entire roof, which brings up the old asphalt

 to a sticky state, which now it will accept the new asphalt and stick to it like glue.

 We then do a flood coat of hot asphalt over the entire roof surface.

 Then we add another layer of, we let that cool and add another layer of asphalt.

 We then roll Polaro reinforcement into that asphalt, and then after that is completed,

 we then add another flood coat of asphalt over the entire roof to make it nice and smooth

 You have gravel, white marble, Durox, Teocote, whatever toppings you would like on top of

 Let's go take a look at the guys actually doing a resurface on this job, and we'll go

 And like I said, we can resurface any type of roof, let it be a single ply membrane,

 torch down rubber membranes, but right now we're focusing on the classic tar and gravel.

 So what we have to do is, as you can see here, how loose laid the gravel is on a tar and

 So what we have to do is we have to get rid of all this loose laid gravel.

 We can either vacuum it or blow it into piles, but we have a large industrial vacuum mounted

 on a trailer, pulls behind the truck, comes to the job site and has a 10 inch hose.

 The gravel goes through the hose and gets dumped into the clean fill bin down on the

 On smaller jobs, we have walk behind powered rotary brooms and walk behind gasoline blowers

 and backpack blowers and we blow them all into piles, clean up the piles, put them into

 But that's how we take off the gravel off of an old tar and gravel.

 So let's take a look at the power washing of the roof to get rid of the environmental

 So as you can see, we power wash the roof after the gravel's removed.

 What that does is it cleans off the environmental dust that accumulates because the roof has

 been on for years and all the dust accumulates on the bottom of the gravel.

 So we have to clean that environmental dust off so the actual existing roof surface is

 So here is an area we had to cut out because it was wet after we did the infrared scan

 This tucked in rear area was leaking quite a bit back here over the years and it had

 So we've cut a line, taken out all this roofing and all the wet insulation board and then

 what we do is we put new insulation board up to the level of the old roof and then we

 can do the resurfacing on the old roof and bring it on to brand new insulation on any

 We put new insulation board which is like this at the thickness of the old roof.

 So when we install the new board, the new roof now is at the same level as the old roof.

 We bring the resurfaced roof membrane with hot asphalt up on to the new insulation and

 So here we're looking at the surface of the roof after the loose gravel has been taken

 The next stage is our priming and what we're going to be doing is spraying out a primer.

 What the primer does is it makes it, like you can see how it's dull, it makes it shiny

 but what it really does is activate the top of the old asphalt so it makes it sticky again

 and the reason why we want it sticky is that the new asphalt, when we pour this new asphalt

 So then when we add our reinforcement layers, the whole roof becomes one and that's the

 So here we're applying the primer onto the roof surface and like I said before, all the

 primer does is kind of make the top surface of the existing roof sticky so we can then

 But you can see the color difference here between the existing roof before it's primed

 So this area here has been primed and you can see now that if I take my finger and go

 like that, what it's done is the primer loosens up the existing tar on the top layer and

 It's actually sticky and you can see I can pull up some asphalt here and what that does

 is the asphalt that we're going to flood coat this with will now stick perfectly to this

 existing roof surface and that's the whole premise of the system.

 So we're putting a new roof directly to the old roof and strengthening the old roof and

The first part is to make a simple syrup and we're going to do that on the stove

The next part is to actually press the sugar into the red currants and

 can see that, but I'll bring it closer to you so you can see what I've been doing.

 the red currants have been sitting in the refrigerator with sugar for about an hour

 and now I'm pressing the red currants into the sugar and it's almost done.

 push the red currant juice around until there's no more juice or syrup going through the strainer.

 sugar water is boiling and you just want to be 100% sure that the sugar is completely

And once you're certain on that, then you just want to set this aside.

 which I have a little bit of lemon zest in it just to give it a little extra kick to

 the lemonade, but it's totally optional if you like to have that as well.

 itself that I freshly squeezed earlier today, which was of six lemons.

I'm about ready to pour myself a glass of delicious red currant lemonade,

Do you remember how we added the lemon zest to kick the lemonade

We're going to add one cup of these gorgeous red currants and this will

 to be coming out with more traditional Scandinavian recipes, a lot for the fall and definitely

 I'm pleased to present to you today a French helmet, Samshield.

 The ShadowMatte line, the Premium line, and the Custom-Made line.

 Today we'll be demonstrating how to properly fit yourself for a Samshield helmet.

 Now, allow me to demonstrate with the help of Rebecca how to fit a Samshield helmet.

 First, you need a soft measuring tape with a centimeter measurement and the help of a friend.

 Then, if you have long hair, we advise you to put them in a low ponytail with an elastic.

 To start, we're going to take the measurement of the head to make sure the helmet fits properly.

 You want the tape measuring to be above the eyebrow, right behind the ear,

 If we refer to the sizing chart at SmartPak.com, it will be a 7 for a Samshield.

 Okay, so we want to make sure that the ponytail is not in the way.

 You don't want the helmet to be too high in front or too low in front.

 The helmet needs to be snug at the beginning since we are using memory foam

 This is why, if you are between two sizes, we advise you to go with a smaller size first.

 After a while, the liner is going to warm up and take the shape of the head.

 Now, you can tell me, since you're wearing it for a few seconds, how's the feeling on the helmet?

 It doesn't feel like it's going to move and it's not pinching anything.

 They are made with nylon that we cover with memory foam for comfort and leather for the look.

 We also give an angle to the shin strap to make sure the rider can adjust the shin strap without struggling.

 So, if you look at the camera, you will see that it's too loose here.

 The shin strap must be adjusted properly for maximum safety to stop the rotation of the helmet and the shifting.

 We advise you to put the hair in the hair net to spread them properly inside the shell.

 Make sure the elastic of the ponytail is outside the shell, inside the harness.

 It's a nice look and it does not change the fitting of the helmet.

 Since you have more hair in the helmet, you may want to adjust the hair a little bit more.

 Since you have more hair in the helmet, you may have to readjust the shin strap.

 So, we're going to loosen it up a little bit to make sure that we have one finger.

 If you have any additional questions, you can contact SmartPak.

 Seafood phyllo parcels are great value and a speedy way to feed the family during the

 What I love about this recipe is there's just a few simple ingredients that when combined

 Two of the handy shortcuts that I'm using is seafood mix and phyllo pastry.

 And one other thing that I always keep handy in the freezer is select frozen peas.

 To make the filling, combine the seafood marinara mix in a bowl with couscous, frozen peas and

 Spray three sheets of phyllo with olive oil spray and stack on top of each other.

 When you have the four parcels ready, transfer those onto a paper lined tray.

 Then into the oven for about 20 minutes until golden and cooked through.

 When you need dinner on the table quickly, these seafood parcels will be a great hit

 Today I want to talk about something that confuses a lot of people and it's connectors.

 I mean, the thing about connectors is there's so many different types.

 And these are the connectors we use on antennas and leads to antennas and things.

 And again, there are just, there's really only two types that are in common use for

 our RC gear and that's SMA and reverse polarized SMA or RP-SMA.

 I'm going to show you why there is the difference, why you have the two different types and the

 So let's have a look on the beach and see what these things look like.

 Okay, here's a typical application where you would be using an SMA or an RP-SMA connector

 and it's a video transmitter and an antenna, in this case a linearly polarized antenna.

 As you can hopefully see, if this will focus, let's get that out of the way.

 It has a pin in the middle on the part that has the screw thread on the inside also has

 And this used to be the standard for antennas for Wi-Fi and all sorts of things.

 But if you look at the receiver or the other end, you'll see that it has the part where

 the thread's on the outside has a little bit in the middle where that pin on this side

 It was the de facto standard for 2.4 gig stuff and other frequencies.

 I think it's generally called, I can't remember if these are females or males, it's so confusing

 because it depends where you're talking about the pin or the threaded piece.

 It actually has the little hole for the pin because the pin, if we go to the other end

 of this, the pin is on the part that is threaded on the outside.

 So this is RP-SMA, reverse polarized, because the difference is, if I just try and compare

 the two, try and keep this in focus, it's always a bit of a challenge.

 If we go to the corresponding parts with the thread on the inside, which is usually the

 antenna or the lead, if this focuses, let's see if we can get this up here, you can see

 SMA has a pin on the middle with the part that's threaded on the inside, and RP-SMA

 Well, the justification, the rationale they gave was that this piece here, the threaded

 piece where it's threaded on the inside, it's usually the antenna or a lead.

 And that's the kind of thing you're likely to throw around or throw in a box or generally

 So that means that the little pin in the middle is going to be more exposed to damage.

 If you've got something like this video sender here, this video transmitter, you're not likely

 So they decided, well let's change it, let's put the pin in the middle of the socket piece,

 the threaded piece there, the piece that's going to be attached to your valuable piece

 of equipment, let's put the pin in that because you'll be more careful with that.

 And let's take the pin out of the antenna side of things, which means you can throw

 your antennas around without worrying about bending or damaging that little pin.

 So the problem is of course that not everybody has changed, so we've got some gear with SMA,

 for example when it comes to FPV gear, all the Fat Shark systems have SMA and then all

 the Boss Cam, Fox Tech, other ones have RP-SMA, so that's a bit of a nightmare.

 Now some traps for young players, some really, really things you've got to be really, really

 careful of is if you have an RP-SMA antenna or cable connector like that, you can still

 So you can actually screw those two together but you can see when you do that that there's

 not going to be a reliable contact between the innermost parts because there's no pin.

 And in fact, even I've done this before, I've screwed an RP-SMA antenna onto an SMA transmitter

 and it seems to work because although the inner part of the cables aren't actually connected,

 they're still in close proximity, so some of the signal gets carried across that little

 gap but you lose a whole lot of power, you lose your range, so you tend to fly out of

 There's a video on my XJet channel when I did that with a transmitter, a radio controlled

 Fortunately I had a FY21AP in that plane so I got to about 400 metres and the failsafe

 If I didn't have a failsafe, of course, who knows what would have happened, simply because

 I used the wrong antenna with the wrong transmitter module, something to be really, really careful

 You can't do it the other way very easily, of course, because the two pins will collide

 if you try and screw an SMA connector into a reverse SMA chassis connector, the two pins

 will collide so you can end up actually bending them and breaking them if you try really hard.

 So always pays to check, double check, make sure that you've got the right connectors

 and you use the right connectors, otherwise all sorts of problems can happen with your

 video gear and also your radio control gear because a lot of transmitters these days,

 So it will be either SMA or RP-SMA, you need to know which it is so that you make sure

 Okay, so that's just a really quick overview because it's really, really important if you

 stuff up SMA, RP-SMA, you will have major problems, either with your RC gear or your

 video gear so make sure you get the right ones and if you can't remember which is which,

 there's references on Wikipedia and things like that but the video that I've just shown

 you, you can see the difference, with SMA the pin is in the antenna or the cable and

 with RP-SMA the pin is in the bit that mounts on your transmitter or your transmitter module.

 So I hope that helps, any questions on the bottom, comments on the bottom, thumbs up

 if you like it, you want others to find it, I'll be doing a few more little videos like

 this in the coming days so that I can keep providing the information that so many people

 Today we're going to cover the driving elbow, which is an elbow, but if you start off out

 of range, how do you get inside and still strike at one time without having to step

 Combine the two, you step and the elbow, and drive and strike in the same motion.

 Basic round elbow, which you can go back and see the video I did on the round elbow as

 You're throwing, your body is one, so you're relying on the rotation, that spin to get

 Driving elbow, you rely on not so much the pivot, you're relying more on the drive, and

 So I can start off as far back as, let's say I'm in jab cross range, I can start back from

 When you do this, you have to drive and step and strike and all that good stuff at one

 I can't throw the elbow and step into it, I have to do it all at once.

 So I'm not going to go like this because in a real situation, if I do hit him, I'm losing

 power because I'm pulling back and fighting the drive, and I'm also setting myself up

 If I lean forward, then I can at least get inside, I can at least get a straight down.

 They're harder to control because you can get a little wild, you want them to stay tight.

 If you throw it a little wilder, with your arms really sweeping out, you end up a little

 Because again, ideally the elbow, the driving elbow, when you throw it once, you end up

 You can't just go, hop, end up way off size with your hands down.

 I don't think there's a lot of videos out there on how to hold Thai pads for strikes.

 I want to make sure people, you know, if you're going to throw it on someone, I want to make

 Alright guys, so to use the rower as a diagnostic tool for pacing, I came up with this simple

 I did the math off of a, see right there, a minute 30 split time for a 500 meter row.

 And what we're doing here for the workout is 21 of our strokes are going to be done

 at 90% of our 500 meter split time, which is going to be around a minute 39 for a 130

 And then we're calling them recovery strokes, but they're going to be, they're going to

 be pretty tough just based off of the, the, the pull and return that we're going to be

 doing, which is going to be a one to four, one to five, and one to six, which I'll explain

 So 21 of your strokes at 90% of your 500 meter row, and then 21 of your strokes at

 85% of your 500 meter row for a 130 individual, it's going to look like a 144 and I rounded

 So let me explain to you the one to four, one to five, one to six.

 This is going to be an individual who thrives on burpees, loves burpees.

 This is going to be a person who's neutral and this is going to be a person who absolutely

 So a hard pull with a four second return into the front of your rower, a one second pull

 with a five second return, one second pull with a six second return.

 And we're going to talk about some things like returning your, uh, your handle to the

 clip so you can kind of work on, you know, getting right back to your bar.

 So you're starting off with 21, um, 21 pulls at 90% for the minute 30 individual.

 That's very obvious with your, uh, with the monitor on the air.

 So having really quick pulls, really quick returns to simulate kind of that batch thruster.

 And now your recovery strokes, your recovery strokes are going to be a hard pull with a

 one, two, three, four pull or a one, two, three, four, five pull.

 Now the key here is going to be making sure you can maintain, um, with that slow return,

 Um, I would have the damper set up at 10 cause you can work on, you know, kind of lugging

 yourself around on the burpees and over the bar and that's going to simulate, um, your

 So hopefully that kind of makes sense and you can use this as a good warmup to figure

 Next thing that I want you to do is after you do your 21 thruster strokes, I want you

 to return the handle, come back to your rower and then right back onto your handle.

 That's just going to help you work on getting right back to your bar, um, after you finish

 So every time after you finish 21 strokes, put it up, 21 strokes, put it up, 18 strokes,

 put it up, another 18 strokes, put it up and do that till you get all the way through your

 Um, and I think if you, uh, if you have an appropriate percentage on your stroke rate

 and your recovery rate, you're going to find that it, it, uh, it's going to simulate about

 We're going to be cooking a couple of sea bream today now I'm going to use the whole sea bream

 They've all been sort of gutted and it's been cleaned up scales taken off

 I'll ask your fishmonger to do that, but you can do the same recipe with fillets

 The first thing I'm going to do is actually season it so I'm going to put a little bit of salt

 It's really important to season your food and again some black pepper

 So I've got the fish all seasoned, I'm going to move that to one side and what we're going to do is

 I've got a couple of onions there, they're fairly small to medium size but you could

 use one large onion and you just want to kind of roughly chop it really you know not too fine

 Also I've got a couple of cloves of garlic, you want to slice that up and again it doesn't

 matter if you haven't got it but I've got some spring onion I'm just going to slice

 olive oil in there and we're going to start by trying to soften up the onion

 I'm going to start with a pan on a fairly sort of medium heat and I'm just going to

 pop in the roughly chopped onions, give those a stir around because all we're looking to do really here is

 slightly soften them, we don't want to brown them too much because they're going to go underneath the fish

 and a little bit on top of the fish, so we're just trying to soften these a little bit and then we're going to add in the

 garlic and the spring onion, so I'll just leave those cooking away and just give them the occasional stir

 So I've been cooking mine for about five minutes on a fairly lowish heat, next thing I'm going to do is make a little space in the middle

 I say low heat not too high because we don't want to sort of burn the onions too much

 Now I've got the spring onion and I've also got the garlic there so I'm just going to pop those in

 Keep an eye on the garlic, make sure that it's not getting you know sort of too burnt because otherwise it becomes bitter

 So we're just going to again gently stir these and you know give it a minute or two just to get some of those flavours out

 and then we mix it all up, now what we're going to do is to put half of this in the baking tray and then we're going to pop the fish on top

 Now the next thing I'm going to do is, I've got a couple of slices of lemon there, I'm just going to poke that inside

 Then I've got some olives, you can use black olives, I mean I haven't got any black ones but the green ones work fine

 Then the next thing, I've got the other half of that sort of onion and garlic-y mixture

 Any oil will get out of there as well, so just kind of get that everywhere really

 Then I've got some tomato, I'm just going to really kind of place that over, over the top of the fish really

 So just you know put that over there like that, it doesn't matter exactly how it goes in

 And then just going to pop in, I've got some cherry tomatoes but you know you can use extra slices of the big tomato

 Doesn't matter how much you use, just a little bit there to sort of fill it out

 It's a good time to season it, especially with tomatoes, so I'm going to put a bit of salt over the top

 That ground black pepper, try and put it all over, be fairly generous with the salt and pepper on this dish

 Then I've got a good helping of chopped up parsley, so kind of add that on

 Save a little bit just for the end, you know to kind of dress it up a little bit

 I mean give it a real squeeze, it doesn't matter if the pips go in there, just get it all over really

 And the last thing I'm going to put on there is a little bit of olive oil

 Just kind of shake the bottle and you know be fairly liberal with it

 Now what we're going to do is pop a little bit of tin foil over the top, kind of loosely put on there really

 Put it into a preheated oven round about 200 degrees Celsius which is 400 degrees Fahrenheit

 And we're going to cook it for about 20 minutes and then we're going to pull it out

 Been cooking for about 20 minutes, so I'm just going to pull this out and let you have a look

 Now what we're going to do is push it back in without the tin foil

 And we're going to cook it for about another 10 minutes at the same temperature

 Right I'm just going to pull the fish out, now we've actually cooked it in total for about 30 minutes

 What we've done is 20 minutes with the tin foil on and then the last 10 minutes with the tin foil taken off

 So I've finished cooking the fish, in total we've been cooking for half an hour

 Now what I'm going to do is serve that up with some chips and a little bit of lettuce

 I'm going to serve that up with a few chips, a little bit of salad and a little bit of the juice

 I'm just going to serve that up with some chips, little miniature chips

 I'm just going to put a bit of that juice on there, look at that lovely juice

 I'm just going to move this aside, because that's really there for the flavours

 Hello guys, here I am with my second video for this toy channel.

 Um, I know y'all like Draco Spin, I'm joking I know no one but me really likes him.

 Um, the place and toy stores and Walmart and Target and stuff to find these are wherever the Pokemon cards and magic cards and all that is.

 So anyway there's 12 different ones, you can get Atomic Driller, Twin Blades, Axe Rotator, Spear Striker, Nuclear Blast, Cyber Twister, Demon Claws, Ultra Spinner, Spike Head, War Machine, Fire Blaster, or Razor Head.

 Um, I've got like 6 of these but even if you get 2 of the same thing their colors may be different and the bottoms may be different.

 I hope I don't get the same thing as what I already have, I only have 5 different ones.

 So, yeah it appears I got the same thing as what I already, no, no I actually didn't.

 So I have no, oh I got Atomic Driller, I think that's the most popular one actually.

 One thing I like about these, they're almost all gray, I mean, what's up with that.

 Now, for those of you who aren't even sure what Dragospins are, they're basically just a knockoff of the old Beyblades.

 Um, they're pretty cool though, they're kind of fun to mess around with.

 Almost everyone comes with a different winder, like same launch for all of them, different colors but these are about 3 bucks a piece.

 And um, they each come with the spin top which is made of 4 parts, the 2 bottom parts come already assembled for you though.

 You saw me assemble it, each come with a launcher and spinner, they're all the same thing though, in these little packs.

 And um, yeah, comes with a little sticker sheet and instructions.

 Um, tell me what battles you want me to do, I mainly do battle videos like I do these, Monsuno, my Beyblade channel is Vindonesian, make sure you check that out.

 So anyway guys, thank you guys for watching, please rate, comment, and subscribe.

 Today's lesson is all about learning to do draw bending on the harmonica.

 This lesson is designed for the beginning harmonica player at level 1 to level 2.

 If you're playing blues or simple melodies or bluegrass or any other type of music, draw

 bending sounds great and it's got a very emotive and a very exotic sound depending on the genre

 And today what we're going to be doing is learning exactly what is a bend.

 And then finally we'll be learning exactly how to go about doing draw bends.

 We'll be using a harmonica today in the key of C. If you haven't already printed out your

 tabs go ahead and do that and then we'll go ahead and get started.

 So the first question we're going to ask today is what exactly is a bend?

 Well a draw bend is a note that can be lowered in pitch by breathing in on the harmonica

 The total of 8 notes that are otherwise unavailable on the harmonica can be produced by draw bending

 A draw bend is a note that can be lowered in pitch by breathing in on the harmonica

 So on hole 1 I'm breathing in and employing a specific bending technique and I get this

 The draw bends can be achieved on 5 of the harmonica's 10 holes.

 So to get a better understanding of exactly where those are and how those work let's take

 As you take a look at our 8 draw bends you'll notice that they're actually specific pitches.

 They're not just these arbitrary sounds that happen on the harmonica but they're actual

 So one of the things that will help you learn to do draw bending is knowing exactly what

 So right now I'm going to go through each of those holes that can be draw bend so you

 We can bend from the 2 draw which is a G down to a G flat and then down to an F. It sounds

 Hello, my name is Calvin Smith, hairstylist at Avatar Hair Salon and Wellness Spa.

 Today we're doing a haircut called the natural mohawk and in this segment I'll be using magnetic

 We're going to start at our lowest point, which is going to be around the neck area.

 Me personally, I like to start from the lowest point and build up, that way you never have

 So we'll start with the magnetic clippers, taking it all the way down to a zero guard,

 starting right at the bottom of the nape line, coming in with a 45 degree angle or a scooping

 So we start our line here at the bottom and make sure it's nice and even all the way across

 Anything that you do on one side, you always want to do on the other side, so that way

 Starting our lines at the bottom, making sure it's nice and neat, making sure everything

 is clean and then we'll jump directly to the next guard, which will be a OA.

 Doing the same thing simultaneously across, 45 degree angles all the way.

 Also keep in mind, all your clients might not have the same wave patterns in their hair,

 so anytime you have a pattern that's going across, you want to cut into it.

 You don't want to go with the grain because you'll leave patches.

 Every time you go to a new guard, you're setting up a different line.

 This is as far as this particular one will go and this is actually a one guard.

 Starting up, 45 degree angles, taking bulk, but not pushing the line.

 Sometimes if you just want to remove bulk, just like little straight ends that you might

 Instead of just taking a whole different guard, sometimes it's easier just to go ahead and

 What you want to do is just kind of graze the straight ends just to make sure it's perfect

 So now that we've set up our design for the haircut, in our next segment we're going to

 So this is a new camera, super zoom, it's 26x optical zoom, a wide angle zoom, it's pretty nice.

 What else, we have paperwork, instructions and stuff for the warranty.

 Some software, and then we have a strap for an extra, it doesn't look that great but okay.

 Then this big ol' honkin' manual, this thing's pretty thick, looks like there's a couple manuals in here.

 Wow, it's a little heavy, let's see what else, there's something else in here.

 It's a little tight, and we can see, oh, yep, mini USB for memory.

 Some other software, there's one, two, three, three other manuals, or three manuals in different languages.

 Okay, lift this up, here's our camera, batteries, we've got a camera and some, what are these, proprietary plugs.

 This is a USB plug, nice, and then a TV plug for the TV it looks like.

 And then the camera itself, nice, wow, it's a little heavy, I like it, it's not too bad.

 Look at that lens, um, yep, this is not too bad, comes with a lens cap, little plasticky, rubbery, it's neat, feels good.

 Okay, and then, what else do we have here, we have some batteries, and they give you these batteries.

 The camera doesn't run on a rechargeable, so you just get the batteries.

 These are, huh, Panasonic's, okay, got some Panasonic batteries, and that looks like it.

 So look for a review to come along later on, and thank you for watching.

 Again, you're a certified strength and conditioning specialist.

 I'm going to do a chest press, a shoulder raise, and a couple arm activities, OK?

 So you're also working your glutes and your core in this exercise.

 I want to stop just before those hips so I keep that tension on that shoulder.

 This is a little more challenging, actually more safer for the shoulder

 On a bicep curl, I want to focus on keeping that elbow close to the side.

 You really want to focus on keeping that arm, elbow close to the side.

 I want to be hunching over, cause injury to that lower back and upper back.

 If you've got any more questions, visit me at SandEagleFitnessGuru.com.

 So, first off, you're going to want to have some sort of level space that's flat, about

 And that's just to make it so that you're not bending over, you know, breaking your

 Now, you need to have beef wood if you're packing up books, otherwise you're just going

 If you look down here, you can see I have it set up and the table works perfectly for

 Set the book down like that, folded this part just over on top of this.

 And if you want to conserve as much as possible, then you just put it over just enough.

 It's important to remember to make sure that the dust jacket is completely aligned so that

 way you're not destroying the dust jacket when you fold this over.

 This allows you to roll it over the edge and make sure that it's tight while not destroying

 I flipped the book to the side and did the other direction as well because you need to

 The next step is to cut it and then you're ready for the beef loop.

 The next thing we want to do is we want to fold this over once.

 Otherwise you're going to need a larger and wider roll of beef loop.

 Push in the corners like this to make sure that it stays tight as you roll it over again.

 But before you roll it over, you want to squeeze this part right here with two hands.

 As you can see now, there's two layers on that side and only one layer on the top side.

 Next thing you want to do is make sure that you compress this down on both sides.

 The other thing to consider is sometimes for the bigger books, this is either extra wide

 The reason this is so effective is because now it has about an inch of space here protecting

 This part here is maybe a third of an inch of solid padding material.

 If you drop anything on this or scuff it, it's really not going to do much.

 So this will protect it from the abuse that might happen to it during the transit with

 So this is a video review of the Fiskars cuts plus more scissors.

 I'm pretty impressed with the amount of design that's gone into this tool which I'll show

 Out of the box it cuts just as well as a fine pair of fabric scissors.

 I don't know if you can see the cut quality here but this is the Fiskars cut and it's

 Another thing you notice right away when you're trying these scissors out, a lot of scissors

 handles that are plastic will have the parting line from the mold right around the high point

 here which kind of bites into your hand as you're cutting but here they've either done

 a really nice job with the mold or they've actually sanded it off somehow afterwards

 Looking at the point of the scissors here it's nice that they've rounded this protruding

 edge off so that you don't jab yourself with it but the other tip is extremely sharp and

 The way they've designed the mechanism for releasing the knife is really nice.

 Basically they've calculated how widely you're liable to open these while you're cutting

 Now you'll notice the knife has got a couple notches on the bottom.

 The smaller one is for cutting twine and if we pop this back on to the scissors this

 As you can see there's two slots here and that's actually a sharpener in the middle

 so that when the blades get dull you can just stick them in and sharpen them yourself by

 So this protrusion on the bottom is actually for cutting packing tape off of a box.

 The only part of the tape that this is not so great at cutting at is where it meets the

 Like I said before I'm impressed with the amount of design that went into this thing.

 For example you'll notice in the end of the sheath there's actually a little hole.

 I thought maybe it would have something to do with the mold but in fact I think it's

 because the seal is so tight that because there's a hole there you don't get the vacuum

 And lastly you'll notice that there's a bottle opener in the bottom.

 Of course it's 10 o'clock in the morning so I probably shouldn't drink this.

 We're going to be making some stuffing today, really simple recipe but absolutely delicious.

 Now the stuffing we're going to be making is sage and onion with some sausage meat and a little bit

Now to make the stuffing I'm just going to run you through the ingredients.

 got two different types of sausage I'm using Lincolnshire sausages and Cumberland sausages

 you need to take the skins off this so you've got the sausage meat itself.

 Now the Lincolnshire sausages they're pork sausages and they've got sage and a bit of salt and pepper.

 These ones here are the Cumberland sausages and they're again pork sausages and in there we've got

 a little bit of salt and pepper we've got a bit of nutmeg and a little bit of ginger.

 So we mix those all together, couple of onions sort of you know medium to large size onions

 cut them down in slices and we're going to fry them up in a little bit of butter there.

 Also I've got one apple I'm going to use a Bramley apple it's like a cooking apple,

 peel it, take the core out, chop it up fine and just add it in with the onions you know when they

 finish cooking almost and also here I've got some sage look at that straight out of the garden you

 know obviously you can buy it in the supermarket it's a good thing to grow actually because it

 grows like a weed and it doesn't cost you any money at all and also I've got some granary bread

 I've got three slices of granary bread and we're going to blend that down make it into some nice

 breadcrumbs add it all together cook it in the oven really simple so let's get on with the

Now first of all got a little bit of butter there in terms of quantity is about 25

 grams, going to wait for that to melt and then we're going to pop in the onions you don't need

 to do this on a high heat sort of medium to low we just really want to soften the onions really so

 just stir those around break them up and you know just let them soften really and the next thing we've

 got is that apple we've kind of cut it up take the core out peeled it mix it all together and

 really you just want to cook that for you know just a minute really just to sort of very lightly

 soften it all up and then we're going to add the rest of the ingredients.

 apple we're just going to add a little bit of the sausage meat all of it actually then we're going to

 pop the sage in there and then finally we've got the breadcrumbs so you've got all those lovely

 breadcrumbs there and I'm actually going to mix all the ingredients into the bowl so I'm going to

 pop those all in try and be careful to get it all in there all these lovely flavours and then what

 we're going to do is mix it by hand try and get them all sort of mixed up together

 and add a little bit of salt and pepper as well so I've got it all in the bowl I'm just going to add

 I'm going to actually use a little bit of black pepper give it a good bit of seasoning really

 I know the sausage has got some salt and pepper but you know you've got to add a little bit extra

 obviously do these sort of things to taste so we've got all the ingredients in the bowl

 what we're going to do is just mix it up now mind it's not too hot when you do this because you know

 obviously these ingredients coming out of the pan but you just want to kind of mix this up until

 it's all blended together and then it's ready to go in the actual oven give it a squeeze as you're

 doing it you know it takes a few minutes really just to make sure they're all nicely mixed now

 what we're going to do is transfer that into a sort of ovenproof dish and then we're going to

 put it in the oven now I'm going to use this dish it's not particularly big but I think we can get

 it in there and it will be like a little mountain and be yummy so we can just push that in there

 there's no need to put any sort of oil or butter or anything just squeeze it all in so we've got

 the stuffing already and it's in a sort of ovenproof dish now what you want to do is put it

 in the oven for about 30 to 40 minutes now obviously at this stage you're probably cooking your turkey

 or your chicken or your pork so just do it at the same temperature you're cooking your meat

 put it in wherever you can in the oven keep an eye on it make sure it's not getting burnt or anything

 but you know 30 40 minutes should all be cooked and absolutely delicious so I've taken the stuffing

 out of the oven and it looks really nice now I've actually been cooking it 180 degrees celsius for

 about 40 minutes which is roughly about 350 fahrenheit gas mark 4 I'm just going to serve

 that up a little bit of stuffing there I'm going to serve that up with a little bit of chicken and

 some potatoes and vegetables I'm just going to try some of that stuffing so it's nice and

 browned off on top look at that looks lovely let me try that that is a really nice stuffing

 even without the rest of it absolutely delicious I hope you enjoy thanks for watching

 Last month on the website cnngo.com, an insider's guide to traveling in Asia, I was able to

 Today, the Tourism Authority of Thailand is delighted to provide you with a cooking demonstration

 of how to cook the number 8 of the world's 50 best foods, which is Tom Yum Goong, from

 It is a privilege for me to introduce you to the head of the Home Economics Department

 of the Rajapaksa Sundusit University, Assistant Professor Ekapol Ornompan, or Chef Jim, as

 I have just asked Chef Jim why he feels that Tom Yum Goong has become the symbol of the

 He has informed me that it is because of the ingredients that are used, which makes the

 fragrance of the Tom Yum Goong very nice and the flavour is very unique.

 Also because of the ingredients that are used, the herbs which are good for the body, and

 of course the river prawns, the Thai river prawns, which are fresh and taste like none

 So you can enjoy the food which is good for your body at the same time.

 To prepare the ingredients for Tom Yum Goong, the first step is to make the stock.

 Chef Jim has instructed that before you make your Tom Yum Goong, you have to get some big

 prawns like these and then you peel off its shell and then boil the shell in boiling water

 So after you have your shrimp stock, you crush the shallots and the coriander seeds in the

 stone mortar and pestle and then you put in the sliced lemongrass and the lime leaves

 So Chef Jim has instructed that once you put your herbs into the pot, you add in some mushrooms

 and once the mushroom is nice and fragrant and cooked, we add in all the prawns and then

 you let all of that cook for about 5 minutes or so and then you turn off the heat.

 So in the final stages of the cooking of the Tom Yum Goong, you start off with the seasoning

 and then you put in some fish sauce to start off the seasoning like so and then you move

 And then we finish the seasoning with the fresh fat from the prawn's head.

 So once you have stirred all of the seasoning in together, it is ready to serve.

 So you put it in the bowl and present it how you would like to, like so.

 And once it is in the bowl, you finish everything off with putting in some chilli.

 How much you put in is really how you can handle the spicy taste and then to finish it,

 And here we have the finished version of the Tom Yum Soup and it looks amazing and it smells

 I hope the cooking demonstration today was fun, enjoyable and insightful for all of you.

 If ever you want to taste the real full flavour, please visit and make Thailand your number

 one destination where we always look forward to welcoming all of you.

 looks like he is a bluish green so I'm going to color his skin with my blue

 make sure that you're in an area where it's okay to get the surrounding part

 dirty because chalks can be messy but they really give a nice effect.

Now you might want to use a piece of cotton or a q-tip or your finger

 if you like doing it the way I like doing it and I'm just going to go right

 One of the nice things about pastels and even these sidewalk chalks is that you can erase them if you make a mistake and go outside the line.

 extra chalk dust off and I'm going to add a little bit of green to the skin

 You may not see it on this film but to your own eyes you will see a big

 is a tan and I'm using one of my own pastel chalks and I'm going to put a

 what I love about Squirtle is he's got the coolest purple eyes.

 I'm going through the rest of it and I'm coloring over that dark purple too.

 brown and then I'm going to add a little bit of lavender to it.

 chalks when you're coloring, the sidewalk chalks or artist chalks, you can just get

 any kind of hairspray from any kind of dollar store and spray it onto the

 I have just always outlined things in black even from the time I was very young.

 and I've tried a lot of others, but this is still one of my favorites.

 key to Wire Loom's design is this split right there in the middle.

Now, you can apply this with your bare hands, but it gets a little

 Wire Loom from CableOrganizer.com, one of these comes free with your purchase.

 piece of plastic, and you're probably wondering how on earth this is going to help cables

 you this also has a key design element, and that's its hinge right here.

 through, and it also makes this little pointed guide, which is what is going to get your

 just going to take the Wire Loom Tool and kind of fold it shut about halfway.

 can see where that channel is forming, you can go ahead and put your cables in there

 and finish folding it so that the cables are right in the center of that channel.

 guide piece, you're going to take that and put them right, insert it right into the Wire

 As you can see, I'm fond of purple, but we've got green, blue, black, some neutrals that

 will blend in really nicely with your decor if you don't want something so noticeable.

 kind of awkward but it kind of is like a Kim Kardashian one but it's not like as cute

 To make it maybe with more volume you can actually just tease it.

 Let me show you how to test the timer when the dryer won't heat.

 Disconnect the dryer from the wall outlet and keep it disconnected.

 Put the timer knob back on the timer without the screws and set it on the cycle you want

 Remove the knob again and set the timer in a position that is easy for you to do the

 Take a reading with your ohm meter between the terminal of the pink wire and the terminal

 And take another reading between the terminal of the pink wire and the terminal with the

 If the reading is infinity on any of the two readings, the timer is bad and must be replaced.

 Pull out the timer knob, remove the holding screws, and take out the timer.

 Turn it around clockwise only to make sure that the timer turns okay.

 Use a flat screwdriver to remove the wires from the timer like this.

 Transfer the wires from the bad timer to the new timer one by one.

 For the best place to buy replacement parts online, visit Repair Clinic.

 When you buy parts from Repair Clinic, you have 365 days from the day of purchase to

 My name is Alexis Miller and this is my studio Cisco Pilates and today I am

 going to show you how to do the Pilates 100 and the Pilates Ab Series at home in

 the mat and if you have any lower back injuries you can keep your feet down

 like this or you can bring your feet like this like a tabletop and this is

 stomach in and make sure that your belly button is touching your spine and you

 have a strong connection of your low back to the floor and you want to

We're going to reach the arms here and we're going to be pumping

 them so it's inhaling for five of these pumps and exhaling for five of these

 take this a little faster than that and then we'll go chin on chest and curl up

 look into your stomach and that gets some of the upper abs working.

 legs up here and if this feels okay to you you can even lower them as long as

 hold down outside hand on ankle inside hand on knee and you curl up and look

 is not happening for you today you can always hold on underneath the thigh or

 if you have any knee problems you can do that also if your knees don't like to be

And again if you've been doing this for a while you can take it lower

You want to keep that upper body curled up the whole time looking into

 tight in your hamstrings but your goal is to have straight legs.

 ceiling and you take your hands behind your head and you curl up look into your

 you can also make a shape like this and put it underneath your hips and do like

You're gonna take your left leg out your right knee in and you twist

 Keeping that low back connected you try to lift those shoulder blades up off the

 the ab series and you want to stretch your abs out the other way you can flip

 over onto your stomach and you can do a little press up and down and you can do

 Now we are getting ready to season these pork chops because I'm going to make pork chops

 First I'm going to season it with a little salt, not too much salt.

 And we're going to put these in the skillet, two at a time, and let them cook until they're brown.

 Okay, now I'm getting ready to turn these pork chops over because they have been cooking for eight minutes on one side.

 And after they cook eight minutes on this side, then we're going to take them out.

 Now to make the sauce, I have some pork wine I'm going to add, and then I'm going to stir it and make sure I get all the drippings up from the bottom of the skillet.

 And I have two glasses in the freezer that they are going to go in.

 Always make sure that you have your glasses already nice and cold.

 And then also I have some strawberries we're going to use as ice.

 And to keep this chilled, we're going to drop frozen strawberries in now.

 And last but not least, we're going to add a little grenadine to give it a very pretty color.

 And I got these cute little glasses right here that I filled with pink heart-shaped chocolates.

 Along with these beautiful pink towels that we're going to be using.

 Also, I have the candles in these beautiful heart-shaped silver trays along with the drink.

 I use one for the flower arrangement, one for the candy, and then last for the drink.

 This is Sherri, and in this video I'm going to show you how to draw a snowflake.

 This particular snowflake is kind of large, so I'm making a nice big circle, really loose

 I'm going to go back in with my eraser and clean it up a bit because I'm going to do

 So first off, snowflakes are generally portrayed as having six points, so I'm going to start

 off with a straight line across the middle of the circle, and I'm going to cut it into

 six equal pieces like a pie, or pizza, however you want to look at it.

 I'm eyeballing it, if you want to measure it exactly, that's fine.

 It'd be probably pretty boring to watch me pull out a ruler and make sure it's all perfect.

 So I'm going to go ahead and start adding the little pokey points that come out on the

 I'm basically going to use the circle and I'm going to make a little triangle.

 So I'm going to connect these little lines to make a triangle connecting to the circle.

 Eventually I'm going to erase the circle, but this right here just helps to keep everything

 And I'm being real freehand about this, it's not going to matter if it doesn't look identical

 on all six points because it'll be enough, just seeing that repetition will be enough,

 And I'm being kind of lazy, we've been kind of out of it with the holidays and everything,

 Now I'm putting in some little triangle looking things that are poking out of the middle.

 And now I'm going to go around and put a little bit of structure around all these lines

 And because it takes a while to draw all that, I've got the camera speeded up because I think

 This really didn't take longer than eight to ten minutes to draw, so, you know, just

 And I'm going to go ahead and draw some hearts on the end, they look like little hearts or

 And then I'm erasing the middle of my snowflake because I want to make a little opening in

 So I'm going to make another cross section here like I did in the beginning, except now

 I'm doing it in different directions, like in the middle of this starburst here.

 And the reason why is because I want to repeat that same pattern.

 And that's going to be left open once I'm all done outlining it.

 Now guys, check this out, I got myself a new pen over the holidays because I decided to

 So I'm using this professional looking medium sized ink pen, I guess they use for manga,

 So I'm just trying things out and testing the waters and I think it's going to look

 And it's the same process, you know, point and pull, take your time.

 Obviously this is sped up so you guys don't fall asleep in your chairs watching me draw

 And to finish up I'm going to outline the middle of the snowflake with my beautiful

 Alright, now to bring back this familiar old eraser that everybody knows and loves.

 But you see that it already, the snowflake kind of has that, you know, it looks round

 So even though you don't have the actual line there anymore, it's suggested, which is pretty

 I hope you guys enjoyed watching me create this lesson for you and I hope you enjoyed

 Please subscribe, share with your friends, like the video, tell me what you like about

 I've got another one coming up and I'm going to show you how to color to make the snowflake

 Hi, I'm Tom Fleming and today I'm going to give you a free art lesson on how to use stencils

 First thing I'm going to do is I'm going to lay down a base tone of a stripe of light

 I'm going to use the acrylic through an airbrush and just lay down a nice light layer.

 And what that's going to do is you don't want to get too dark because the darker you get

 with the acrylic through the airbrush, the more the plasticky coating of the acrylic

 will seal the watercolor paper underneath and I still want to leave it a little bit

 porous so that we can go in with watercolor and it will still take to the paper.

 Next thing we're going to do is add a little bit of yellow ochre and do the same thing.

 So now we have nice light tones and I actually let it overlay in the middle there a little

 bit just so it kind of has a little bit of a graduated tone to it and I'm going to wash

 Now I'm going to take, this is just a very common kind of doily lace type of material

 and I'm going to lay it right over the top of that and I'm not worried about it sticking

 down to the surface of the paper because I actually want there to be different variations

 Some sharp and some will, as the paint goes underneath the lace, it'll create a softer

 Then I'm going to go in with a darker color which is going to be like a deep violet and

 I'm just going to lightly spray over the top of this doily and I want to use an angle that's

 going to shoot straight down because if I go too much of an angle, less of an angle

 So I want the air pressure from the airbrush to hold the doily in place and I'm just going

 Then when you lift up, what you have is all these neat kind of patterns and I use this

 I really like this because it has a plant-like, it looks like leaves and flowers and things

 I'm going to wash out the airbrush but you can see as I let the airbrush flow outward,

 I got lighter, I got darker on the inside for sharper shapes and as we go out, we let

 them fade out and you get all these neat little abstract shapes in there.

 Now the next step and there's some, sometimes you don't even want to go into this step.

 Sometimes you can just leave it as is if that's the effect that you want but then I like to

 go in and I'll use a watercolor or a combination of an opaque white watercolor which is Dr.

 Martin's bleed proof white and I'll go in and I'll start pulling out some of these shapes

 to exaggerate them a little bit and create even more of a pattern and you see how as

 I'm going through here, I'm using it pretty watery so it's actually lightening the areas

 and it's not getting too heavy but at the same time, it's bringing out these shapes

 and I'm just going in the middle and bringing them out and what you're getting is a nice

 layered technique and you can just blend those edges and create as sharp shapes as you'd

 like or just let them fade off into the background and that's just a matter of how much water

 The brush I'm using right now is a number six round sable and then in the middle, just

 for the sake of sharpness, we're going to do a nice crisp white dot which would be kind

 of like your focal point and then everything would go out from there.

 But basically, it's a very basic technique and you can even go in and work in colored

 You can even go in with a regular mechanical pencil and you can darken the under areas

 that would create like a shadow and make it even more three-dimensional.

 It's just one of those techniques where it's unlimited possibilities because you're really

 leaving that paper porous which lends itself to many layers without getting too thick with

 that acrylic and you got a nice blend of textures and colors and I hope that was informative.

 Take out your supplies, give it a try and be sure to catch some of my paintings and

 one of the paintings that I actually use this exact technique on is called Venus and the

 Contemplation of Beauty which you can find on www.flemingeditions.com.

 Check out my art book, Draw and Paint Fantasy Females and go get your supplies and get out

 No it isn't, but I'll tell you what, when people taste it, they're going to think it's

 I'm using a beef bottom roast, also known as a tri-tip in California.

 We're just actually going to make a mixture of onions, parsley, garlic, and olive oil,

 I mix the onions because the red onion is sweet, and the shallot is also sweet, but

 also has a really onion-y flavor that the red onion doesn't have.

 We can put some salt, and some fresh cracked pepper you've got to the right there.

 This meat I've already trimmed up, just to save some time, but I'm going to show you

 So butterflying is just a term that we use to bring out the meat, like that.

 So in thicker areas you can pound a little harder, in thinner areas you don't want to

 We are tenderizing that, but we're also pounding it out so it spreads out a little bit.

 Okay, and then we're going to take this mixture, and we are going to put this in.

 Okay, you don't want, you see how I'm leaving this inch of space around here?

 And we're just going to end up putting this right on top, and it really doesn't matter

 And then as you're rolling this in, you just want to kind of pinch it.

 Okay, you just cut some string, and you want to pull it under here, and you want to just

 Now this pan is actually a little bit hot, but that's fine because that's what we want.

 You want a hot pan, and we're just going to stick this right in there.

 You don't want any oil sitting in the pan because we're searing the meat.

 Good evening, or whatever time of day you're watching this, and welcome to stop-motion

 Now, usually, you would start off where you can't see him, and then you would like, um,

 put him where you can see him a little bit, and then you would start the walk cycle.

 First, you would have him standing like this, and then you would put one leg up, like that.

 And then, you put that leg down with the other leg, um, facing the other way.

 Or if you want to know how to make short-legged minifigures walk, it's very simple.

 And then, you put him on top of the studs so he's like, in between, and he's on top.

 And if you want to know how to do a certain thing in stop motion, then leave your suggestion

 So until then, comment, rate, and subscribe, and see you next time on Stop Motion Class.

 Joe Carabassi here, RIT Man TV here in the RIT Man kitchen answering this week's question.

 Now if you have a question you want answered, make sure to tweet at Joe Carabassi or comment

 I can't answer all the comments, although I'd love to and I really deeply appreciate

 So it means a lot that any questions you have, I will do my best to answer the most common

 Can you make a video where you explain how to do an energetic smoothie drink before training?

 Thank you very much and excuse me for my bad English, but I'm an Italian guy.

 Well, first off dude, your English is way better than my Italian, so don't worry about

 But I think what he's trying to say is energetic smoothie, something like pre-workout, something

 that's going to give you some energy but also allow you to build muscle and get a great

 So for a post-workout shake or meal if you will, I recommend doing about an hour to 30

 So what you're going to do is put in a cup of ice, so just or a handful, it's up to you,

 Now you want some sort of carbohydrate in there, something with natural quick sugars

 like a banana, apple, orange, but apples and oranges are hard to put into a shake for obvious

 So blueberries work as well, but you want something with some quick energy and those

 While I would not advise you to put in oatmeal or have oatmeal or some sort of like slow

 state low glycemic carb, it's because it's going to be sustained energy and your body

 is likely to have a lot of calories that you want to burn off during your workout.

 So you just want a little bit of the carbs, something quick to get into your bloodstream

 So we're going to put in one banana and if you're really watching your calories, I guess

 you can probably get away with one, or sorry, a half, but I'm going to use the full thing.

 Now I like iso pure zero carb, it does have a high potassium and a good amount of sodium,

 but for my particular diet, it's something I'm not worried about because I don't get

 Now I put in a full scoop, I have a higher lean muscle percentage.

 If you have a lower lean muscle percentage, you might just need a spoon fill, you might

 If you're not sure, start lighter and if you feel you need more, go for it.

 From there, we're going to add in three sprinkles of cinnamon, one, two, and three.

 And then, just going to fill it up with water, you put eight to twelve ounces, it's really

 Now I understand fully that a lot of you guys are busy, much like me.

 So the ghetto version of this shake would be same thing with the protein, half a scoop

 to a full scoop or it could be egg white protein powder, or sorry, egg white powder, or it

 An apple, just eat, and then chug eight to twelve ounces of water if you decide that

 you put protein, if you're going to have protein, put it in it, or if you just have

 You have a muscle drink that you can chow down right before you work out.

 It's going to give you a good amount of energy, but also help utilize as much muscle as you

 can, or sorry, I should say build as much muscle as you can during that workout.

 I'm sure they could use the information in it and they'll thank you for it.

 Hi there, I have a cut up chicken here and I'm going to show you how to freeze it properly,

 wrap it properly, and then how to defrost it so that you won't lose the meat or the

 chicken and you'll always have good food in your freezer and not worry about whether it's

 So the first thing I do, this chicken that I've cut up, we did a video on the cut up

 I have all the parts of a large chicken, the breast, the thighs, the bones, etc.

 So what I do first is I have proper bags for freezing, but I take a piece of wax paper,

 You tear a nice piece, you put the piece of chicken on, give it a good wrap, make sure

 You know the market baggies don't work because they're not properly, they're not thick enough,

 Now they leave a piece of white marking where you can label it, so I'll go ahead and label

 Now I will squeeze all the air out of it, seal it, and pop it in the freezer.

 And the reason I use wax paper is because if you just froze it by itself it's not good

 If you use two breasts you want it to be separated, you don't want it to be stuck together.

 So ideally always wrap each piece individually in wax paper and you won't have a problem.

 I took out something here from my freezer and what we're going to do is put it not into

 Let's say you took out a piece of chicken the night before and you came home from work

 and you defrosted it in the free, refrigerator, I'm sorry, and then it's not quite defrosted.

 You take that out that's been wrapped properly just like this and we're going to submerge

 Did you know I've noted four chicken drumsticks, I labeled it when I froze it in February.

 But it's a small bag so I put water into a large container and I'm going to submerge

 Now sometimes it'll pop up and I'll take something heavy like, I don't know, a glass, you know,

 After 20 minutes you could give it a flip, but usually it makes it soft enough you might

 Feel it through the package and if it's soft enough pop it open and it'll be fine for whatever

 you want, you know, and it'll be absolutely delicious depending on what you're going to

 kind of based around this kind of pedal note on the open A string, which I'm always going

 and alternate picking, but ideally you want to pick all this with down strokes to give

 fret of the D and the G strings, but of course I precede that with my palm muted As as well.

 That's a kind of common theme that carries on in the next 2 bars as well.

 But what we do in the first 2 bars is after we've done that, that 2nd barring at the 5th fret there,

So what I'm doing here is I'm playing open A string, palm muted twice again.

 G string at the 7th fret with my 3rd finger and I'm going to go... So I'm kind of doing a little

And then I play just those, the 7th and the D, 7th and the G again at the end.

 So the vibrato note lasts... If we're playing all these as open even 8ths, this lasts for a beat, the vibrato.

 Then the next 2 bars, we start off the same so we do our 5 to 7 back to 5 again.

 I'm playing 2nd fret of the D, 2nd fret of the G with the 1st finger, barring again.

 And then I'm going to go open A string and then pull off 3 to 0 with the 2nd finger.

 Ok, so if we put the 4 bars together nice and slow, this is what we get.

 Gold Rose coffee and a good rule of thumb is approximately one dessert spoon per

So I'm going to put five heaped dessert spoons of coffee into the

 Ok so the coffee has been brewing for approximately three minutes so we're

 This has 120 different recipes for scrumptious bars, tasty cookies, and delicious pies.

 You don't need the oven and you can mix them up in a matter of minutes and they're homemade.

 So first you'll combine a can of sweetened condensed milk into your microwave safe bowl.

 So I'm going to mix that up and then we're going to put it in the microwave for about two and a half minutes.

 So now that it's all microwaved, I've been stirring it about every 30 to 40 seconds.

 You're going to put those in the bottom of your 9x13 pan that has been greased.

 Alright, once you have all the filling in there, you're going to take the rest of your peanuts.

 And now we're going to put this in the refrigerator until they're firm.

 So our salted nut roll bars have been in the refrigerator for about an hour.

 Just one of the more than 120 recipes in the No-Bake Cookies, Bars, and Pies.

 Hey guys, Chris again from ClassicBWBugs.com and I've got a short tip for you today.

 And what we're doing is we're working on a 1954 Bug here and we just got it back from

 And one thing I want to talk to you about is running boards again, of course.

 And when you get your car back from the paint booth and you have it gutted like we do,

 a lot of times the holes where the running boards mount into the threads along the rocker,

 they paint in the booth and the paint then gets inside those holes.

 And it's real hard for you to mount that 6mm threaded bolt into the rocker panel to fasten

 I see a lot of guys that force their way in, I was a victim of that where I would mount

 the running board on and I start screwing in the bolt and sure enough it's getting tighter

 The bolt breaks and you've got a broken bolt inside that rocker and that's terrible and

 So what I do is beforehand I get myself a tap, something like this, I don't know if

 These are good for like if you have a broken bolt in there where you have to drill a small

 drill bit through the broken bolt and then you would use this tap to make new threads.

 But before you even get to that point, just use the tap to start the threads and cut them

 open so you get the paint out of there and then the bolts should go in just fine.

 This is, remember those bolts that go in for the rockers are 10mm bolts with 6mm threads.

 So what I basically do is find a hole, let's say this one right here and then you just

 A lot of these tools come with handles on them so you can just start twisting and turning

 Just a little tech tip there, just a lot of times if you paint your car and you have the

 car gutted like we do, they're going to paint over those holes on the rockers and you're

 Alright, that's a quick tip for today and if you have any questions, email me at chris

I have my filling, which of course can be any filling as long as it's relatively dry.

 I have the pastry sheets, and so now I'm going to show you how to make an edible glue so that we can bring the two together.

 So I'm going to start by taking a couple of tablespoons of plain flour.

 Some cold water and a whisk, and just pour a little bit in at a time.

 You're looking to make the consistency of perhaps Yorkshire pudding mix, or perhaps pancakes,

 And then you're really just going to beat this until you've got a nice smooth kind of paste.

 You want it to be quite gloopy because you want the kind of gluey consistency.

 It might remind you of pappardelle, which you might have made as a child.

 Have a little tea towel handy so that you can just wipe your hands as you go because you can get a little bit messy.

 You'll need to work quite quickly because they do dry out quite quickly.

 So we'll start by actually just placing the sheet on the surface.

 Perhaps you'd like to just visualise where a half comes to and then take it up to the right-hand side here.

 From the top you'll be able to see a kind of triangle formulation.

 And then from here we're going to take the glue and just paste along the left-hand parallel and this intersection through the middle here.

 Index finger, you want to place it at this angle here and take it from the bottom right up to the left-hand parallel once more.

 That's really important because if it isn't it means there'll be a hole in the pastry and that's when you're frying the oil will get through there.

If you can see the granite through there then actually you've got a hole and we need to fix that.

 Now you want to hold this in your hand like a little cone and then take a couple of teaspoons of the filling.

 Just use your spoon to make sure that it goes all the way to the bottom and just fill.

 And use the back of the spoon just to kind of pat it down so that it's firmly in place.

 And again your index finger needs to be placed just at this angle here and then you want to fold up and really make it parallel to the right.

 Once again you're going to take some glue and now you're going to just cover the edges here all the way along the remaining parallel.

 And once again lift your index finger at the angle once more just so that you've got very sharp corners.

 And so you're really just using the glue as a bit of polyfiller and then just sharpen the edges and here we have a samosa.

 Have you been wanting to put your creativity and inner craftsman to the test, but have

 Then you should definitely consider adding a personal touch to your home decor by creating

 LED rope light is long-lasting and easy to configure into beautiful, loopy lettering.

 Plus, you can adjust the size of the letters to cover medium to large amounts of wall space

 that would otherwise require a large, expensive painting or various amounts of smaller artwork

 Spell out your family motto, an important value, or your child's name and immediately

 Once you have all your materials, plug your LED rope light into the wall to make sure

 Use a ruler, measuring stick, or other tool to draw a straight line where you want the

 Keep in mind where the nearest outlet is and which end of the rope light you will plug

 Configure the rope light into the word you want on the floor in front of your wall.

 Use weights to keep your letters in position while you tape your letters in place.

 Attach your rope light word to the wall with more heavy-duty tape, making sure the bottoms

 Hint, you or your partner holds each letter in place while the other tapes it down.

 After your word is taped to the wall, repeat the following steps for each letter.

 The other pieces of the letter that are taped to the wall should hold the majority of the

 Remove the tape that was holding the letter in its shape and use zip ties to hold it together

 If you opted to use an incandescent rope light, make sure all the tape is removed before leaving

 Visually gauge the places where you will need to attach your clips to the wall, usually

 where the tape was, and mark these places using chalk or a pencil.

 Snap the rope light into the clips and pick another section of the letter to repeat the

 Once you've completed attaching your word to the wall, cut off any excess rope light

 Look closely at the cut marks on the rope light and cap off the end of the rope light.

 Purchase your own LED rope light at 1000Bulbs.com and check out our blog for more DIY videos.

 So, I've been looking on the internet for flagging videos and how to learn how to flag

 me to learn how to flag without having any videos of anyone around to learn from.

 I thought I'd make some good ones so that people can learn a bit faster than I did.

So it's a swing flag, so it's got weights along this edge here and

So on this edge it's about a third of the way along, so the weight

 to hold your flag from the longest edge, which is this edge here.

 Okay, so when you've got your flag, you grip the edge, grip the edge where the weight is

 and we'll start with a basic move of just swinging it from side to side.

 So if you're struggling to start with that, you either start holding the end with your

 kind of got that forward movement with your right hand, swap across, try that out with

 My name is Bindu Grandi and I am the author of Spice Up Your Life.

 I'm going to show you how to make easy, delicious and healthy recipes the flexitarian way.

 And what that means is an eating lifestyle that focuses on vegetables, fruits, nuts,

 lentils, legumes and the occasional serving of lean meat like chicken and fish.

 It's a diet that's low in saturated fat, high in fiber, you get all the necessary proteins,

 not to mention the vitamins and minerals because of the emphasis on produce.

 And people who eat the flexitarian way generally weigh less and they reduce their risk for

 hypertension, diabetes, cardiovascular disease as well as many types of cancers.

 And today I'm going to show you how to make spicy beets and rice.

 You can serve it as a stand-alone entree or as a side dish to any meal.

 Two cups cooked basmati rice, two tablespoons of extra light olive oil, one sweet onion

 peeled and diced, two green chilies stemmed and split in half lengthwise.

 That works out to roughly two to three beets depending on the size.

 One tablespoon of lime juice, two tablespoons of powdered unsweetened coconut.

 And you can get that in specialty Asian stores as well as markets like Whole Foods.

 The beets are just about tender, so we're going to go ahead and add the lime juice,

 And you want to saute this for about three more minutes until the beets are fully tender.

 And what I suggest is that you add the rice just before you're ready to serve,

 because you can see the beets impart that color right onto the rice.

 And just blend it well so that all the ingredients are well mixed.

 So we blended the basmati rice with the beets, and look how colorful this is.

 The pigment that gives beets their color is also a powerful cancer-fighting agent,

 And it has B vitamin folate, which is great for normal tissue growth.

 And sweet onions are low in calories and in sodium, fat and cholesterol-free,

 It's ready to be served, and you can garnish this with either curry leaves

 So the next time you're in the supermarket, pick up some beets and give this dish a try.

 Thank you for sharing your time with me, and make sure you look for my other recipe demonstrations.

 of my summer favorite treats that unfortunately stain my teeth, but I also want to show you

 a glass pitcher, I also have an orange, a basket of fresh strawberries, and some cherries

 just as long as you don't squish them so it doesn't get too tart in the picture.

 Next I'm going to be doing the same thing to the strawberries, getting rid of the stems

 and any of the ends because I want to have that strawberry on the inside exposed.

You can also use those to juice so you don't waste any of your fruit.

 Tossing those in the picture with the oranges and then washing up a handful of cherries

 Then you're going to add the bottle of sangria or red sweet wine if you have any.

 away I decided to add them straight to the picture and mixing them up.

 Now to serve them I added a couple of pieces of fruit and pouring it directly into these

All you need is olive oil, balsamic vinegar, salt, pepper, sugar, and citrus juice.

 Now what you're going to do is add even amounts of both the olive oil and balsamic vinegar.

 use lemon or orange depending on what you have readily available.

 You're going to mix it up and then set it to the side because now it is time to make

 can use a peeler or any other kind of method like boiling to get the skin off a lot easier.

 to be adding my goat cheese and my beet rounds at the center of the pile.

And I love it because it tastes good, it doesn't hurt my sensitive

 Don't forget to check out the description box down below and I'll see you guys in the

 Hey, so today we are going to try and make some chocolate chip muffins using an axe can

 So how we are going to do this is using just your normal candle pot and a Sea to Summit

 Now this is made out of food grade silicone so what we will be able to do is fill this

 full of water or about half way full of water and get that boiling and this will be sitting

 And this is the first time I am doing this so this is either going to be successful or

 But I am excited to see how it will turn out and hopefully in about 15 to 20 minutes we

 So first thing I am going to do here is we are just going to mix up this mix.

 Now I think we are just supposed to mix this up until it is about the consistency of a

 Spraying for about 3 seconds will give me about 10 minutes and I need about 20.

 So we will give this about 20 minutes or until we run out of fuel.

 Going to put the lid back on and we will check in a few more minutes.

 So I guess we are going to try and take it out and let's see maybe the bottom got cooked.

 I think next time I do it I am going to have to put a lot less in.

 So changes for next time is probably do just a third of that cup.

 But for a just add water cake this is super moist and super good.

 We'll see in the next video how to do that and what this TV does.

 Samsung TV, when you turned it on, it had a ring that you're clicking.

 Otherwise, if you put a cap in backwards, or a capacitor in backwards, you'll blow that up.

 I'm going to change these three capacitors, and I'm going to take it apart.

 lead down here, and you're just going to push the direction opposite of where you're at.

 Now, when I do the front, I'm going to push it back towards the heat sink.

So when you take your TV, and have your electronics shop fix it, and that's all they're doing is changing three capacitors out.

When they charge the price of a new board, say they put a new board in it, and all they did was change these three lousy capacitors, and they're banking it.

While you're thinking you're getting a good deal, they're changing at most $5 worth of parts, and then they're done.

 Now putting them back in, it's going to be just as simple as taking them out, except you have to check for polarity.

I just spread the component legs against the board, so when I re-solder it, I can cut it back here, and you're not going to have against the resistors.

Heat that little hole up, and you're pressing the capacitor through.

Otherwise, you can go to Radio Shack, and they sell desoldering irons, and they have a desoldering pump, which you have to use two hands.

This is Derek House with DHFTNS.com and today's recipe as you can see

 three-fourths cups of rolled oats, the old-fashioned kind because I find those

 cook better, and put them in either a blender or food processor and then just

Take two bowls out, one for your dry ingredients and one for your

 going to go ahead and now add our wet ingredients to the other bowl.

 Half a cup of water, around one tablespoon of apple cider vinegar, 8

 applesauce is a great replacement for butter or oil in a recipe.

 ingredients if you don't want to put a fourth a cup in your wet ingredients.

 finally before we mix all the ingredients together we're going to add

So now go ahead and get a hand mixer, you can use a whisk for this as

 slowly pour in our wet ingredients and mix everything together.

 one to two minutes all the chunks should be gone and you should be good to go.

 silicone muffin cups you really don't have to spray nonstick cooking spray, but

So now just take your mix and fill each spot up about 3 fourths of

 the way full because you have to remember they do expand when they cook.

 As you see I put them all in a cookie sheet that way it's easier to put them

I just want to go ahead and show you guys how easy these come out

 cupcakes, you have to use protein frosting and you can make my protein

 thing I do want to mention is that you want to make sure you use a good

 the past five or six years and I still see progress in the gym.

Alright guys I just want to go ahead and thank you for watching.

 like the video please go ahead and give it a thumbs up or if you're not already

 And what we're going to do is we're going to shoot a casual video to show you people at home

 how to safely fold your glider for maximum longevity and proper storage.

 So most gliders come with an outer bag and a compression strap.

 You might be wondering how to get the glider in such a small, compact way.

 So right after you land, you take the lines, bring them to the glider.

 So you want to check to make sure that there's no lines on the trailing edge.

 So one hand is holding the bunches of cells and the other hand is gathering the cells to meet the other hand.

Is it okay if it, you know, I just noticed that it expanded here.

 Yes, you can do this, but the air comes easier out when it's open.

 And so at this end, you've gathered up the fabric to make it smaller, right?

In the beginning, it's easier to start with two people and after then, it's no problem to do it alone.

 You see, at the moment, most of the gliders have, yeah, they're called rigid foil and…

 At MAKPERA, we're calling them C-Rod technology, so the nylon rods that are inserted into the seam here.

So, for starting, and for me, it's this important area and the rest is, for me, is no problem.

 So, I start this cell, I let him go, and I begin with the next one.

 Yes, all is flat, and it's important that the rigid foil is here and not here.

 Okay, so, you don't want to bend the nylon C-rods over this area.

 Here, make sure the rods are lying flat so that they're protected from the other half that folds over.

 Next thing is, when I make it, when I make a small package and I make it longer,

 the most reversible harness are constructed to make the glider longer.

 So, it's easier to bring it in the harness, to put it in the harness, so, like Leviti also.

 And to choose the right size, you have to make sure that the rods are not too tight.

 Today I'm going to be making one of my favorite recipes, which is Blue Ribbon Deep Dish Apple

 This is my favorite apple pie and it comes from my book, The Apple Lover's Cookbook.

 Now what I love about this pie is it's substantial, it has a lot of fruit in it, it has a great

 crust and what I especially like is that as a deep dish pie, the fruit actually fills

 You'll notice sometimes if you order deep dish pie that you'll get a little bit of a

 That's because the apples cook down while they're in the oven, but the crust sets and

 This method that I have allows you to cook the pie with a beautiful crust that goes right

 For this recipe you'll need two and a half pounds of firm tart apples, such as Northern

 Two and a half pounds of firm sweet apples, such as Golden Delicious or Pink Lady.

 In a large Dutch oven over medium low heat, stir the apples with the sugar, brown sugar,

 Cook stirring gently until the apples just begin to turn tender, about ten minutes.

 Stir in the corn starch and spread the mixture out onto a large baking sheet.

 Place it in your freezer to cool to room temperature, 12 to 15 minutes.

 Transfer the dough, peeled side down, to a 9 inch deep dish pie plate and press the crust

 Remove the apples from the freezer and use a spatula to transfer them with any juices

 Transfer the crust, peeled side down, to the pie and then fold the bottom crust up over

 Brush the crust all over with milk and sprinkle with the remaining tablespoon of sugar.

 Make three slashes in the crust to let steam escape and bake on the lowest rack for ten

 Reduce the heat to 350 degrees and bake until the pie is golden brown, another 40 to 50

 And I cut into it so that you can see that the fruit goes right up to the crust and it's

 Now for this and other great apple recipes, including some more from my book, you can

 Today I'm going to show you a super easy homemade hand scrub that will bring your skin and fingertips

 So the essential oil will give the mixture a nice lemony scent.

 Okay, the next step is to add some lemon juice to the mixture like this.

 So the oil will moisturize your skin while the sugar exfoliates and removes dead skin

 Lemon, as you already know, has acidic properties, vitamin C. So it will make your skin look

 Now I'm just gonna clean my hand and show you the final result.

 It's not full of chemicals and preservatives often found in manufactured skincare items.

 I received a couple questions on my last video about how I did the stenciling on the back

 of the cabinet, and also my logo on the air compressor station, so I figured I would show

 If you don't have one, which most of you won't, you can find a lot of these ready to apply

 You can have a design pre-made and then email it to them and they can make it, or you can

 give them an idea of what you're looking for and they'll design it up.

 Rather than using pixels, they use nodes with lines that create a cut path.

 There's a tiny little blade that rotates inside the plotter's cutter head.

 It's very hard to see, but the knife is cutting through the vinyl and not the backing paper.

 You basically remove the material that you're not going to use.

 I always prefer to remove the screws instead of going over them.

 Now a thorough cleaning with 99% alcohol to remove any grease or grime.

 Then I just place the graphics on the trailer where I want them located with masking tape.

 I place a piece of masking tape to act as a hinge to apply the graphics.

 I cut them up into smaller sections to make them easier to work with.

 Firm pressure with an application squeegee ensures that the graphics are staying put.

 Then you can remove the masking layer to reveal the vinyl graphics underneath.

 You can see here on the longer, narrower graphics, I used the masking tape hinge.

 This video hopefully answers some of the questions you guys had as far as the stencils on my theater cart.

 My wife had asked me to build a stool for the bathroom for our vertically challenged young ones.

 If you haven't seen my last video where I built a mobile workstation that I dubbed a theater cart, please check it out.

Okay, so I've done like two videos in the last two weeks for you all

So yeah, so I'm gonna give it another try and do some like step-by-step

 foundation routine and I'll probably use all the way up to the blush I think.

 actually pretty pigmented and my skin is a little darker I think.

 warming it up into my hands really really well and I usually start at the

 just kind of and then sometimes I'll just start kind of patting it in with the

All right I'm gonna wipe my hands off and then I'm gonna use some Bobby

I'm just gonna be dabbing into that a little bit and then going under

 And kind of down getting into the center of the eye and bringing it down a little

 I think this really matches my skin really really well actually.

 concealers are way too light and I'm gonna bring it excess down around

Usually in the summer the concealers that I use are way too light.

 Then any like little spots I might have really goes a long way.

 put a little in here because I kind of get red especially when I was small.

 just I just took a shower so my skin is really really really glowing I guess you

 say this powder is Origins multigrain makeup SPF 14 and medium 03.

 Oh don't make your eyes water by sticking the brush into your eyeball.

 look for a hopefully a tutorial coming next and I will see you all later.

 Wins Automatic Transmission Flush Service utilizes Wins easy to use TransServ 2 Plus

 Automatic Transmission Flush and Fill Machine and 2 part flush kit.

 Start the service by checking the transmission dipstick to check fluid condition, fill level,

 Disconnect an appropriate transmission cooler line and securely attach the correct Wins

 Attach the two service hoses from the TransServ 2 Plus machine to the hose adapters.

 The machine automatically corrects direction of flow so which service hose is connected

 Fill the machine with an appropriate amount of ATF based on the capacity guide.

 Attach the drain hose to the back of the machine with the open end in an appropriate used ATF

 Start the vehicle, check for leaks and no ATF flow through the machine.

 Use the convenient sample spigot for fluid sampling to enable comparison of the old and

 Run the vehicle's transmission slowly through all its gears during the flush cycle.

 After about 10 minutes, turn the switch to flush to begin the ATF exchange.

 The fluid level on the machine's sight glass will slowly drop during the exchange.

 When the process complete light illuminates, the ATF exchange is complete.

 Take a fluid sample to compare against the original used fluid sample.

 Add Wins shutter guard through the dipstick for added protection of the new ATF and check

 Shut off the vehicle's engine, remove the adapters and reattach the transmission cooler

 The transmission is now ready for trouble free operation on the road, thanks to the

 You might have seen in my other video about how to take off a stripped handle.

 And you can check out my video if you had a stripped screw underneath there.

 And if you did have a stripped screw underneath there, the most likely cause is a leaking diverter valve.

 Pretty nice setup here in that when it does leak, most of the time, it gets into the tub and not behind the wall.

 Now behind here, there's a washer that we want to make sure we keep.

 If you're missing one of these, you'll need to get a new one or make one.

 You can use a pair of vice grips and clip it on the end and pull it out.

 You want to take precautions so that you don't hit your teeth or anything like that.

 And you really want to lube this with some high temperature faucet grease or some silicone lube.

 I'm just going to use the bottle and put it just on the O-rings.

 And again, we're going to make sure that stop is on the right-hand side.

 And we'll just test to make sure everything rotates nice and smooth with our handle.

 We have a tiny bit of water coming from the tub, which is normal.

 One other thing I should say, it would be a good idea to push the stop so you don't lose the screw down the drain when you're doing this.

 So what I'll do is I'll take the seat and I'll make the back part of the seat point down this way.

 And then I'll take the diverter and I'll make the back part of the seat point down this way.

 If I can locate the correct little arrow for the diverter, I'll replace it.

 But at least that's kind of indicative of what's going on right now.

 Simply Ming is made possible by the generous support of Ocean Spray, Allclad, and Contessa.

You don't cut through, because right there you have the skeleton.

 That's when you turn the knife over, and you run it along the entire carcass, keeping it nice and tight.

Well, working cleanly, always have a wet cloth, you can take off this whole fat layer,

 So you actually dig in here, make a line down one side, make a line down the other side,

You want to get that out, because it has a little bit of extra texture.

 And once you pull all these bones out, all the way down, you can have a beautiful fillet.

There's a perfect fillet of salmon that would cost you $15 or more a pound.

 Hi I'm Jutal and this is one of my flower tutorial video series.

 going to need a sketchbook, a black pen, a pencil and an eraser.

 flower to face the top left so we'll draw the center on the top left of the circle.

 now we'll go over the center with my black pilot pen and we'll draw the petals.

We're going to branch it off into another daisy which is looking to another

 a regular daisy looking to my side, you can just watch my other video on how to draw that.

 I've got lots of more videos on how to draw different flowers, roses, tulips, daffodils,

 Of course, we're going to have to get the wheels off of the bike to change a flat.

 There are safety tabs on the front wheel that are going to cause me to reach down and unscrew

 For the sake of this demonstration, I'll demonstrate the actual change on the rear.

 Okay, for removing the rear wheel, it helps to put the chain in the smallest cog.

 It's going to put the chain in the slackest position and give me a reference point when

 I'm going to flip the release on the brake, opening it so the wheel will be removed.

 I'm going to grab my tire levers, sold in pairs of two or three.

 From this point, I should be able to simply peel the tire off of the rim.

 When I'm on the road or on a trail, there is no need to remove the tire from the rim.

 I'm going to take the inner tube out of the tire to begin the repair.

 The most common mistake people are going to make at this point is not finding out what

 The signs that you see on the inner tube will lead us to several conclusions.

 If I have a hole on the outside of the inner tube, something probably penetrated the tire

 If I have a hole on the inside of the inner tube, probably caused by that red strip not

 protecting the holes in the rim, causing a flat from the inside out.

 Another type of flat we'll see are two, like a snake bite, two holes right next to each

 They had low pressure in the tire and the rim pinched against the tube.

 We'll also see a very large star-shaped blowout or a large tear, usually caused by putting

 too much air into the tire when it wasn't seated properly, or it could mean some damage

 To patch a tire, once I locate the hole in the inner tube, I'm going to give that a little

 Want to use the sandpaper first to rough up the area where the hole is.

 Roughing up my glue, spread the glue out larger than the surface of the patch that I'm using.

 This is the part of the demonstration where we're watching glue dry.

 I'm going to separate a patch, peel off the foil backing, and when the glue here is dry

 to the touch, I want to firmly press the patch over the hole with my thumb.

 This is going to prevent any wrinkles and make sure it fits into the tire correctly.

 Another thing to be concerned about while changing a flat is to inspect the tire.

 If there's a cut in the tire, which I can see my skin through, I need to patch the tire

 I can do that with something like a power bar wrapper or a dollar bill between the tire

 and the inner tube, or I can use a patch just as I did on the inner tube to patch the hole

 I need to address that hole, otherwise it will cause another flat from the inner tube

 Make sure that the hole isn't so big that you need to address that also.

 After I have the tire patched, or the inner tube patched, and after having given it a

 little bit of air, starting at the valve, I'm going to put the tube into the tire.

 Then again, starting at the valve, I'm going to start putting the tire onto the rim.

 So rather than doing that, I want you to use the tire lever in a reverse fashion.

 I'm going to turn it over, put it into the rim, and pull that tire back onto the rim.

 I'm going to activate the CO2 with a good hard twist, and now use it to fill the tire.

 About halfway, I want to check and make sure this tire is seating properly.

 I don't want to put all the air in if it's not going to seat where it's supposed to be.

 So when the CO2 is emptied into the tire, remove it from the valve, close the valve,

 Remember, if I haven't done it already, shift to the smallest cog, which I already have.

 That's going to give me a reference point on where to put the chain.

 With the chain on the smallest cog, we lift the rear wheel into the bike, close the quick

 release, close your brake lever, give it a spin, make sure you're ready to go.

 Hi, what we're going to look at this time is a couple of fills from modern music.

 I like these because they're extremely characteristic of the way that Bill Nelson uses, for instance, pentatonic scales.

 They're lovely little fills which you can use in all kinds of contexts again.

 So let's have a listen to it and play along to it, and then we'll take the pieces and build it back up again.

 Basically, you can hear that in lots of different contexts, in lots of different ways in Bebop Deluxe's work.

 So what we're going to do is we're just going to take the effects off and have a look at this note by note.

 It starts on G on the 15th fret, and it goes G, E, D, E, D, B, A, B again, and then...

 Now you can do this different ways, it just depends on how your fingers feel at the time and what your personal preferences are.

 And then it's E, B, D, A, B, G, A, A again, A, excuse me, D, E, and then D.

 But if you hear that, that sounds a little bit sort of muffled, sort of thing.

 And I suspect that because of the cleanliness which Bill Nelson plays with, you would probably prefer the D there.

 And play it once more over the top of the music, so you see how it fits together.

 Hey welcome to sing and cook my name is Chef Harpal and I once again welcome all you fans

 who watch me on YouTube with all the love and care and this video is specially for people

 Now I am quite fascinated about this kiwi fruit specially the ones that come from New

 Zealand and this kiwi fruit I get a complaint from people that we have a problem buying

 Now that's what I am going to educate you how to select and buy a kiwi fruit specially

 It should be beautiful, the skin should not be bruised and it should be clean number one.

 Number two if you want to consume the kiwi fruit on the same day what you need to do

 is take the kiwi fruit in your hand and these nodes that you see all you need to do is take

 the kiwi in between your two fingers and specially hold them from the nodes as you see here and

 If the kiwi fruit takes the pressure that means it is ripe enough to be consumed the

 Now if you think that you want to buy kiwi fruits that you need to consume over a period

 of time and you need to select a few of them which are ripe like this and I can show you

 and the ones which are hard absolutely hard rock hard what you need to do is you want

 them to get ripen within a day like if you buy today and you want to consume it tomorrow

 and the kiwis are hard take them and place in a basket along with apples and bananas

 or take a bag a plastic bag put the apples the kiwis and the bananas along with this

 and just wrap it up and keep it like this for a day the kiwis will ripe in a day.

 This is because the apples and bananas release ethylene which helps the kiwi to ripen up.

 Now that's a simple trick and this fruit is so good to consume that you would love to

 eat good for diabetes type 2 diabetes two times more nutrition and vitamin C than an

 orange five times more nutrition than an apple lot of good things in this kiwi I'm sure you

 would love to consume them and that's education on kiwi keep watching.

 Now what you want to do is not curl the entire thing but just pieces that you want curled.

 So you definitely want to leave some of your natural curls to make it look effortless.

 Spray away to make sure your hair stays put for the entire day.

 I actually got this from the flower section at Ralphs which was pretty cool because it

 You just tie it into a bow and then secure it and if you need to just resize it the way

 you want it and cut it, trim it, do whatever you'd like until you achieve the type of bow

 I'm using this L'Oreal True Mesh foundation and I'm buffing this into my skin using a

 Of course all the information and all the product list will be down below in the description

 For my concealer, I'm choosing this Neutrogena concealer which I'm also using as a highlighter.

 This is two shades lighter than my skin so I'm just applying it under my eyes, my laugh

 To give my skin a healthy glow, I'm using this liquid illuminator by NYX Cosmetics and

 I'm applying this on the high points of my cheeks and on top of my nose.

 Next up is this matte bronzer again by NYX and I'm just going to define my features using

 So I'm just getting this on my forehead, the hollows of my cheeks and my entire jawline.

 Just so you guys know, NYX is now sold at Target so for those of you wondering, it is

 Using the same bronzer and a small tapered brush, I'm contouring my nose slightly.

 I'm using L'Oreal's Mousse Blush in Plum and this is just a beautiful color especially

 The easiest way to apply blush like this is just smile and pop it on using a foundation

 Just fill in all the sparse areas and if you'd like, make it just a little thicker because

 To intensify my crease, I'm using the same bronzer and a fluffy brush and creating depth.

 Using the same liquid illuminator, I'm just highlighting the inner corners of my eyes.

 Alright here comes the main focus of this look which is the signature Lauren Conrad

 What you want to do is grab a gel eyeliner like this one and a small angled brush and

 What you want to make sure is you keep your eye open and trace the line where you want

 And make sure your eye is not closed because then you won't know exactly where to place

 Once you're happy with your top line, connect it to the bottom lash line and make it go

 I'm using the famous Colossal waterproof mascara and I'm applying several coats on both top

 Alright using some individual lashes just on the center of my eyes and applying it with

 Once you apply about 3-4 individual lashes on each eye, grab these corner lashes and

 Afterwards you want to go over the line using the same liner to make sure the glue is not

 But I feel like she also wears inner eyeliner at times so I wanted to give you guys that

 This one with inner eyeliner or this one without inner eyeliner?

 Either way I really hope you guys enjoyed this video and if you did be sure to like

 Have fun recreating this look and if you have any future video requests be sure to leave

 Hi there, I'm Wendy from Hot Kitchen and I'm going to show you how to break down a

 Now there's lots of reasons why you want to break down a turkey breast.

 One because it's a lot of meat and two, sometimes you want to do something besides roast the

 So I'm going to start by removing this little thermometer doodad because that's not going

 And then I'm going to use my knife and I have a boning knife on me right now and you'll

 notice that it's a boning knife because it has this rounded tip to it.

 This is the best type of knife to use for this sort of task but a regular chef's knife

 So start at the crest of the breast and work along the breast bone.

 Work along the bone, cutting through the skin and just work your way in.

 Cut the skin back a little bit, give yourself some room to work with.

 Just keep digging the tip of your knife in along the bone and peel it away.

 And as you do that, the breast frees itself from the bone and kind of falls off to the side.

 And then from here, flip it around and break down the other side.

 And the same thing on the other side, only I normally start towards the neck area when

 And let's just talk about the composition of a breast real quick.

 You can either take that apart and use it as its own cut or you can leave it attached.

 And because I'm going for cutlets here, I'm also going to peel the skin off.

 Again, using my knife to kind of ease the skin away from the meat.

 You want to be a little bit delicate, but you don't have to handle it with kid gloves or anything.

 And then from here, to turn it into cutlets, I'm going to go for this method.

 I'm going to curl my hands, my fingers up so they're not in the way of my knife.

 And I'm going to use the knife to kind of saw into the meat a little bit at an angle.

 And this little guy, because I peeled it away, is going to come loose anyway,

 I'm cutting it into portions the approximate size of a chicken breast.

 And this one, once we're down to this much, we can just cut that in half.

 And that is the essence of how you make your own turkey cutlets.

 I'm going to package up what I'm not going to be using immediately in the freezer.

 And I just use little small bags, and I stick my portions in each bag.

 Other things you can do with it, you can pound them out, turn them into a schnitzel,

 Really, the possibilities are endless once you have it broken down into nice portions.

 This is Javi here, and I'm here with the Sheitelmacher Ruchi again.

 And today we are finally going to show you the video of how to style bangs on a sheitel.

 This has a pretty full bang on the left side of the part, and a thinner bang on the right.

 So, as you'll remember from my previous videos, basically to line up the sheitel on the head,

 go in the center of the sheitel and the center line of the head.

 Pull it down, and you simply pin the pins down and up so that they remain stuck in there

 Alright, so since we're just doing the bangs today, I'm just going to spray with some water

 So, for the bangs on the right side of the sheitel, and the right side if you're wearing the sheitel,

 but the left side if you're looking at it, you basically get the hair in here.

 Alright, so we've positioned the blow dryer just like so, close to the hair, and the hair in the brush like this.

 And you just simply want to blow up and twirl the brush as you're blowing.

 This customer likes her sheitel to be more in her eyes rather than back.

 So I'm going to start with the brush over the hair on this side.

 You might get a few longer pieces stuck in your brush, and then you'll have to restart.

 It also might be a little easier to work with smaller sections.

 It's important to go over it to show the hair which direction you want it to go.

 Obviously, this is a little too creepy probably for most people.

 And if you put a pin in it, you can totally keep it like that for a while.

 But I'm going to show you how to give the bangs a more finished touch.

 And how it's going to fall is going to be something more like this.

 Same kind of thing, but since it's thicker, I have to just work in a few more pieces on.

 And the bangs that are closer to the back that aren't really over your forehead,

 Really simple, quick, and it's for any kind of event that you want to go to.

 Some people also do like to wear their wig like this every day, so that works too.

 Notice how I held that last piece just a second longer than the rest.

 And to just keep it like that, you're not going to wear it right away.

 Now you have to flip the cube over so the yellow is on top and the white is on bottom.

 Look at the yellow side and find a piece that is supposed to go in one of those places.

 Now we have to do the same thing with this blue and orange piece.

 Put the orange opposite the orange side because the orange is on top.

 It's the first snow of the winter and I'm craving something hot.

 I'm going to season this with half onion, about 1 tablespoon of salt, and a bunch of epazote.

 I'm going to cover this and I'm going to wait until this comes to a boil.

 Now that it came to a boil, I am going to lower the heat to low heat.

 If you follow my videos, you already should know how to make them.

 Okay, so it's been about 30 minutes and I already put in here my guajillos, which are already soaked.

 I'm going to add a little piece of onion and 2 cloves of garlic.

 Okay, and the only thing I'm going to do now is that I'm going to pour this sauce.

 Guajillo peppers are not spicy, they just add flavor to the food.

 So if you're worried about your children or something, these are not spicy.

 When you finish taking all of the liquid out of here, this goes to the garbage.

 But you can add a little bit more, just so that you don't throw away the flavor.

 So I've added all of this red sauce to here, and this is how it looks like.

 So I'm just going to leave this for about 10 minutes simmering, while I go and chop and peel the vegetables.

 So basically, what I'm going to do now is that I'm going to peel the carrots and the potatoes.

 And for the green beans, I'm just going to cut the tip of them, like this.

 The first thing I'm going to add is the potatoes and the carrots, because these are hard and it takes more time for these to cook.

 Finally, when you see that your meat is almost done, this is like maybe about 10 minutes.

 You're going to add, at this point, your carrots are going to be cooked, your potatoes are going to be cooked.

 You're going to add, until the very end, the green beans, because these won't take much time to cook.

 And you're also going to taste to see if this needs a little bit more salt.

 So I'm just going to cover this again, and let it here for another 5-10 minutes until everything is cooked.

 So in general, this is going to take 2 hours altogether, since you start until you finish.

 So whenever you want to calculate when you're going to cook, just give yourself 2 hours and you're going to be good.

I just serve it in a deep dish with a slice of lemon, and a little bit of salt.

 And this just needs a couple of hot tortillas, and you guys are ready to go.

 And in the description box, I'm going to leave the links to my Facebook and Twitter accounts, so that we can stay in touch.

 front bumper install on this Kalahari special edition and because it's a

 special edition there's a lot of extra trim pieces on it that Kep is currently

 in the process of removing so we're getting all that off and then we'll get

 with bolts to the frame and then also with some allen bolts to the body of the vehicle.

 So what I'm doing here is I'm removing the two bolts that hold the bumper bar

 side so that the bumper won't fall off when we remove the other side.

 Now on the D2 the water bottle actually hangs below the lower level of the high clearance front bumper.

 So we're going to have to remove the water bottle and it will have to be relocated.

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to run this half inch bit through the mount holes.

 Kind of ream it out a little bit to make sure that the bolts will go in real smooth and easily.

 So we have a pretty tight fit so we're going to do a little adjustment on these mount brackets

 so we can slip it on there easily and then when we put the mount bolts back in it'll suck everything

 A piece of wood on the edge, a nice big hammer, give it a couple taps.

 So we've got the bumper all set up in here and fitted and the four bolts are in and loose.

 We did our trim work to fit this grill on this Kalahari real nice.

 And what we're going to do now is we're going to hold each side up.

 One of us is going to hold it and the other one is going to tighten the bolt down on each side so it'll stay up in place.

 Took us roughly two hours to do it on this truck and we had a little bit of extra stuff to do on this truck

 because it's the Kalahari Special Edition so we had to trim the bumper a little bit to get it to fit really nice.

 I got a request to do a video on my DIY hammock suspension system.

 two carabiners, knowledge on how to tie the Marlin spike hitch,

 What I tend to do is just go out and find a stick, and that's worked just perfectly fine for me.

 Now you guys know I've done a lot of climbing in the past, so I just had this laying around.

 The length that you want, that's going to depend, because there's several factors to consider.

 One, you've got a tree that's this size, or a tree on this size.

 So actually the two trees I'm using is a big thick heavy tree like this.

 That's going to eat up a lot of the length of my webbing, or the smaller one over there.

 So you don't want to take 30 feet of webbing with you on one side.

 and you don't want to take that weight with you while you're backpacking.

 So what I've got here is it's about between 10 feet to 12 feet roughly.

 You're going to have to kind of decide on what you think is going to be best for you.

 With this webbing, you're just going to tie a simple overhand knot on the one end.

 Now realize when you do that, this is going to take some weight on it.

 So if you want to untie this knot, it might be a little bit difficult.

 To start this off, this is kind of a one-time knot that you'll do.

 You're going to just fold it and create a bite here at the end.

 Actually, I'm going to move this down just a bit to give me a little bit more room on this loop.

 Now I've got this loop at the end and I'll show you what we're going to do with it.

 And we're just going to wrap it around the tree where we think we're going to need it.

 We're going to pass the end of the rope through or the webbing.

 You can see this is what I'm using about finger width, generally what I use.

 Now what you're going to do is you're going to fold the webbing over the tree.

 and then you're going to grab this part of the webbing and pull that through.

 One really nice aspect about this knot or this hitch is that you can put a lot of weight on this.

 And once you take the toggle out, the knot is that simple to undo.

 One of the reasons that I chose to go with this system, at least with my Eno Double Nest,

 And even that I didn't have to buy because I had it laying around.

 But again, this is a very simple DIY hammock system or suspension system that works great.

 But now I'm going to show you again how to tie this Marlin spike hitch.

 You're going to see it from a view far away, kind of, but you're going to see how easy it is to tie.

 The important part about this is sometimes there's a mistake that people want to hang off this toggle.

 And where you want to put your load is you want to put it right here on the actual knot.

 A couple lengths of webbing, a couple of carabiners, and you're good to go.

 I'm going to show you how to repair this tire when the shop says they can't repair it and

 I'm going to show you how I'm going to fix it with a tubeless tire repair kit.

 it for $4 at a discount store and it's the second time I'm using the kit.

 get this thing fixed for pretty much free and I'll show you how I'm going to do it.

 The first tool you use is this rasp type instrument that comes in the tool kit, in the repair

Where the hole is, just take the point, work your way in, find where the hole is and

 The next step is to take one of these, they're like rope kind of, gooey rope pieces.

 it through this tool here, which you can see the tool has been used before.

Now take some rubber cement, put it in the hole, and then you're

 You could get a flat in the middle of nowhere and if you can find the hole in the middle

 of nowhere, or if you can hear it or whatever, you could probably get that tire repaired

 Okay now I'm going to put about 40 pounds of pressure into the tire.

Now let me get some soapy water and to see if I can make some bubbles

 I'll start by putting our turkey legs into the bottom of our slow cooker.

 and I've got some chipotle peppers which I'm just going to quickly chop up.

 ago I opened it up, took the turkey legs out, separated the meat from it, put it back in.

 That's kind of your opportunity to add a little more liquid if you need to.

 my actual measuring cup, this Stonyfield Plain Fat-Free Yogurt.

 now, but I will be taking this cup of strawberries and throwing that in there.

 to do this with two hands, with one hand is a little bit difficult, but I'm going to make

 I measure out, let's get rid of this, but I measure out two ounces of aloe vera juice.

I try to get the sweetness from the banana, the health benefits from

 to fry one egg that's not in there yet, but I'll keep it on here while I show you this.

 I'm going to use the Weight Watchers singles American cheese slices.

 scramble this egg and I'm going to top it with the Canadian bacon.

So I just wanted to show you what I'm literally just scrambling the egg.

 that my eggs are finished, I'm using the same pan to cook my Canadian bacon, no oil again,

 And then probably two hours from now around 1130, I'll have this smoothie.

 yogurt, my Fage 2% with strawberry yogurt that I love and an orange.

 little crystal, these little water ads called sugar-free totally light.

 You won't get to see me make dinner today only because I made it yesterday and I'll

It probably doesn't look that great from here, but what this is, is

 this is chicken, orange, red, yellow peppers, mushrooms, and a white wine, lemon juice,

So what I'm going to do also is for dinner, I'm going to have this with

 a side of one cup of spinach that I saute in extra virgin olive oil to get in my healthy

 The first thing I want to show you is an easy way to build on a plain plywood a poured in

 What we're going to be doing is we're taking a circular saw with a Freud thin kerf blade.

 They use a very small router bit to router out the plywood itself.

 The spacing on the plywood itself, I know you can't visualize it too well with it laying

 In this particular case, I'm using 10 inch for a different reason.

 So what we're doing, this is going to represent the bottom of the wall.

 These two sheets represent one wall section about 8 inches apart.

 I've screwed in a screw here and on the other corner to hold the two sheets in exact alignment.

 So all we're going to be doing is slicing into the surfaces of plywood with the blade.

 The beauty of using this particular system that I'm using right now, you're creating

 It has to be perfect because when you cut through one sheet, you're marking the second

 What I'm going to do now is go through and cut out the rest of the marks I've got.

 If this represents the bottom of the wall where the sheet of plywood will be resting

 on the bottom of the footing, this is 12 inches up to the center where these ties are going

 What we're going to do first is go through and cut all the marks that I've got laid out

 We do the marks like I've done, the chop marks, all the way along.

 And then we remove the sheet of plywood, stand it up, and finish the cut through on the other

 The reason I didn't go ahead and push the saw blade all the way through both sheets

 You end up having a cut like this, which will work, but you also have quite a long cut seam

 You don't want too much excess room on either side of where your tie physically fits through.

 It could be a little bit bigger, which this will be, but that's the reason I didn't go

 I've cut through just far enough on the first sheet to mark the second sheet.

 What diesel does is puts a raw petroleum product on the face of the wood.

 It locks up the surface grain of the wood, makes it somewhat waterproof, and repels concrete.

 you will either insert a putty knife under the panel to release the two clips,

 or you will pull off both plastic end caps and remove the screws found

 insert a flathead screwdriver between the upper and lower front panels

 disconnect the wires from the old thermistor and remove the mounting

 by aligning its position and securing it with the mounting screws.

 Next, replace the drum by aligning its rim on the two rear rollers

 Replace the upper front panel by aligning the two rollers on the drum rim

 Now, replace the lower front panel by snapping it into position.

 Reconnect the door switch wire connector at the top of the dryer.

 You're now ready to plug the appliance back in to make sure it's functioning

 So first things first, we need to put on some very attractive bunny rabbit ears.

 Using a light pink colour on a sponge, I very lightly applied some blush to the cheeks.

 Using white, I outlined the area between my nose and my top lip to create the bunny's

 I went slightly overboard with the size of this shape and it was far too big so I just

 took a baby wipe and ran my finger around the edges to make it the perfect size.

 And then I went back in with my brush and made the edges nice and neat again.

 I painted a white arch extending slightly higher than my eyebrow and then I filled it

 And then I took some dark pink on a sponge and I filled in my eyelid area and then blended

 I painted in the bunny's teeth on my bottom lip and instead of making them a perfect rectangle,

 Next I added a cute pink nose in the same shade that I'd used on the eyelids.

 At this point I thought the design looked a bit simple and a little bit boring so to

 give it a bit more of a kick, I went in with a stencil and I added some pink stars around

 I faded them in from a darker pink on the outside edge to a very pale pink in the middle.

 And then, because I like this effect so much, I did the same thing on the eyelids.

 I added a small amount of black eyeliner to define the eyes a bit more and then I flicked

 For his mouth, I connected my nose down to my top lip with a straight line and then I

 rounded out the bottom edges and I also added a few flicks to the outside corners of my

 I also added a few little whisker dots each side and then I painted a black line down

 the centre of his teeth to separate them but I did stop before I reached the very bottom.

 Because I still had some of my lip showing through next to the teeth, I just used pink

 And then I decided that the eyelashes that I'd painted in previously were just not doing

 And then finally, I used white to paint in a few feathery whiskers each side and also

 For the finishing touch, I decided that my bunny did really need to have a carrot so

 I painted in some greenery running down the back of my hand and then I used a brown to

 And then finally, I added a bit more shading with some darker green and I finished it off

 There's just something about it I don't like getting it on my hands

 I do no you guys know I'm the one who's clean Brad's the one that's neat

 And then your middle finger would be on the seventh fret on the B string.

 And your pinky would be on the seventh fret also, but on the G string.

 And then you kind of bar it, so you press down on this whole fret.

 You can either do that, or like, it's easier to sing if you just go...

 And for the beginners, barring is kind of tough because it hurts your fingers.

 Today we're going to take a look at the main riff for Heartbreaker by Led Zeppelin.

 It actually repeats three times, but it begins with this little slight bend, which is actually

 So we're going to just start here at the third fret here on the low E string.

 And you're going to play that note and you're slightly going to bend it.

 Alright, now we have the actual riff, which you're going to repeat three times.

 See how that last note there was the note that we just started the song with.

 So that is just the open A string and then the third fret on the A string.

 Then come down and grab that third fret again on the low E string.

 So it's basically, the riff is, that is the whole thing played through once, but it's

 One riff is the same thing done twice, except the very first time you hit that open A once.

 So we're going to take this, we just finished with your third fret here on the low 6th string.

 It's the same type of phrasing, same type of notes, but it's just in a different key

 And then just like the previous riff before, on A, this is going to be the exact same time

 when we go through the second half of it, except the very first note is going to be

 Hi guys, today I'm making Vietnamese grilled banana sticky rice roll.

 Mix in with the rice and the water and it's best to let it soak overnight.

 While waiting for the rice, I'm using 250 ml of coconut milk, 4 teaspoons of sugar and a pinch of salt.

 After 15 minutes of steaming, slowly pour half the amount of the coconut milk into the rice and mix them well.

 After 10 minutes, slowly pour the rest of the coconut milk into the rice and mix well.

 Put one scoop of sticky rice on the wrap and spread it out into a thin layer.

 For this recipe, it's best to use the ripe ladyfinger banana or juicu.

 Put the roll on the table and then start to roll it until the rice becomes full.

 After that, open up the plastic wrap and then wrap the sticky rice roll with the banana leaf.

 Wash the banana leaves with water and dry it with paper towels.

 Put the oven on broil at 500 degrees Fahrenheit for 50 minutes or until the top surface of the rice is slightly golden.

 While grilling the sticky rice rolls in the oven, you need to make the coconut syrup with the tapioca pearls.

 On medium heat, cook 1 1⁄4 cup of white or mixed colors of tapioca pearls until it becomes all clear.

 When it's cooked, let the pearls settle down on the bottom of the pot and carefully drain out the water.

 To make the coconut syrup, I'm using 1 can of coconut milk, 7 teaspoons of sugar, and a pinch of salt.

 Remove the banana leaf from the rolls and it's good to eat when it's hot.

 When you eat, pour some coconut syrup on top of the roll and top it with roasted crushed peanut and roasted sesame seeds.

 Bonsoir tout le monde, or I should say welcome back Body Fire TV fans.

 and I'm joined today for a very special, special cooking programme.

You can mainly hear my brother shouting in the background, telling me how to do it

 your viewers as well and your subscribers and try to keep it healthy because I know

 I was always told never trust a thin chef, but you are in good shape and your food is

 the other way around, I should definitely trust a thin chef these days.

 for you, as you are in my kitchen, I thought we were going to talk about breakfast and

Honestly, the big thing I've always talked to people about is getting the start

Too many people make excuses about not having breakfast, avoiding things

 that people can prepare before and maybe pull out the cupboard or pull out the fridge, we're

All the information is going to be retained in the description of the video.

We're going to put a post on my website, which is www.jhbodyfire.com.

 So everything will be covered off so you can make this at home and follow it.

 into nutrition, we always recommend you need your saturated fat.

 add a little bit at a time because if you put everything in one go, it's going to go

I'm not so sure I'm good at delicate work here, but I shall try.

 you need, because a lot of people, even if you're trying to lose weight, you need to

 Well, for me, when it's time for a treat, I just think chocolates.

 Today we're going to make something that the kids really enjoy.

 Now I have also made this with Italian sausage, which is really good also.

 I always like to break the egg in another bowl, because if we get shells, then we can

 A good trick if you do get a shell is you take the egg and you stick it in there, and

 This other half is going to be for service when the burgers are done.

 You really don't need to because the way the onion is grown, if I pull these apart, they're

 Now on the cooking chart, this is approximately a half inch, which is four to five minutes

 Typically if you do a thicker burger, like an inch like this, then you're going to have

 This also makes a really good meatloaf if you don't have time to sit and cook them individually.

 Okay, and then we're going to come over here and we're going to show you the ones that

 Okay, what we're going to do, we're going to add some mozzarella cheese on them.

 But what I had done before is I cooked them for five minutes on one side, I flipped them,

 gave them another five minutes, and then I'm going to put the cheese on.

 You can do sliced cheese, you can do, I just happen to have the grated mozzarella, so that's

 So we're going to wait for our burgers to, the cheese on the burgers to melt, and then we're

 I like to put it on the bun because it soaks in, and then when you take that bite, it doesn't

 And keep in mind, this is for six burgers, so we're going to put that aside.

 Now, our cheese is melted, but I want you to notice all the fat at the bottom of the pan.

 It's going to be moist and juicy, but yet all the fat we are not putting in our bodies.

 We're gonna kind of move on from the simple riffs and just try and move on a little bit

 It's a 4-4 and it's at my website learn bass dotnet and the link is in the description below

We're gonna come to this G, which is the third fret on the E string

 Okay, when we get to the end of our slide wherever that may be you don't have to slide all the way up here

 Reason I do it all the way up here because it brings me perfectly to the next notes

 So it's a note if you are sliding up make sure you deaden the string after you slide

 Okay, so you've got to do is slide and then just put your fingers back down on the string again, and that will get in it

 So next thing we're gonna do is we're gonna go to the 14th fret on the D string with our index finger

 Unlike a bus and then we're gonna go to the 15th fret on the G string with our ring finger

So we're gonna pluck both strings the D and the G strings at the same time

 Like so but what we're gonna do with this is we're gonna slide it up a half step

 We're gonna slide to the 15th fret and the 16th fret like a bus

 Again alternatively if you are if that's too hard getting out to that too quite quickly

 Okay, you could just so that's the second fret and a third fret second fret on the D string and the third fret on the G

 Okay, I'm getting a bit fret buzz because I'm at the wrong angle.

 Okay, and if you guys don't know what you're doing you could put a muted slap in here

 Okay, then we're gonna do a double pop on the third fret on the G string, okay with our index fingers

 Okay, don't forget you can put that muted slap in there if you wanted to or you can just come down and do a

 Then we're gonna go to the fifth fret on the D string with our ring finger

 Okay, and we're gonna go back down to the third fret again on a D string with our index finger

 Again do you guys know what you're doing this open D could be a mute

 Yes, that's about it as I said the beat is below I hope you enjoyed it guys and look forward to the next one

 Transformers constructed bots, I'm gonna do a little build for you.

 I think customize them battle them you can do some stuff online.

 He's got several bags goodies here the wings some of these little bits look common in some of the different sets

 And if you're into the game, then there you go have some points

 Blitzwing mode pretty cool pretty basic looks like blitzwing got a nice face there

 Very g1 skull about it a little yellow head crest and that's really it

 This is very very plain and basic without all the other attachments now if you watch the bumblebee review

 You know that he doesn't he's not a true triple changer in the sense that he can just go from mode to mode to mode

 You have to actually put the parts on him that you want to put on him

 So yeah looks pretty cool like that a lot of little extra stuff now, so I put these bits on here

 You use your imagination a little bit here and you can probably make this look

 I mean you can kind of do some different stuff with it here now

 He's got like a bit of a tumbler feel to me like the batman tumbler

 I don't know why I think these these wheels up front just kind of have that that vibe I guess that aesthetic

 That's too jet like to me and the turret does spin and you can fire it too

 You can get your hand underneath here and friction missile will fire

 If you're a little bit better of a friction missile firer than me, it would probably go farther.

So if you don't like these like fins or whatever just take them off

 And there's megatron in his tank mode with some jet bits on them.

 And you can see he's much more filled out and again just like anything you can choose to

 So it's not so much arm stuff hanging out and now he looks a little bit more normal

 Cybertronian very again skeletal kind of, you know, there's a lot of empty space there

 Aren't put into this mode, but it really does look like they should be up here

 Oh, I don't know a little bit more filled out like in that empty area

There's bumblebee right next to him and they're both very big very large figures are they're about

 Oh, i'd say voyager size scale and unfortunately, I can't give you

 Well, let's bring back his leader megatron just for that little comparison in their respective jet modes nice

 This has been mitch santona and we have just been watching and playing with this triple changing

 The mixing and matching you can do with all these construction sets and that's really cool

 And the more you have I guess the more stuff you can make and that's

 There's a link below if you click it and tell them mitch santona sent you they're gonna treat you right.

 I've got iron hide and star scream construct abouts coming up as well as a big old titan metroplex.

 Today on Amateur Kitchen we are making Tortellini with Pumpkin Alfredo Sauce.

 Well you know Halloween is right around the corner so we're starting to see all those pumpkins in the stores

 And a lot of times when you think of pumpkin you think of something sweet like pumpkin pie or pumpkin cheesecake

 Anyways this time we're going to make it a little bit more savory with the pumpkin alfredo sauce over the noodles.

 We've got a pan here over medium high heat and I'm just going to put in some olive oil.

 I love this time of year because all my favorite Italian restaurants serve a pumpkin or squash ravioli and it's the only time that I can get it.

 And we're going to simmer this for about 5 minutes or until the heavy cream kind of becomes a little bit thicker.

 While the pumpkin and alfredo sauce is thickening up, go ahead and add in your cheese tortellini into a pot of boiling water with some salt.

 We took some help from the store and bought store bought pre-made stuff so this really only takes about 7 minutes.

 But if you make your own tortellini go ahead and use that as well.

 And she's also adding some parmesan cheese which is a great Italian cheese.

 The last ingredient to our sauce is some freshly ground peppers.

 And be sure to reserve a little bit of pasta water because if your sauce gets a little too thick you can loosen it with some of that pasta water.

 I know Halloween is all about trick or treat and this is definitely a treat.

 To finish off this dish we're just going to add in some parsley for color.

 And the tortellini that you find just right in the stores is so simple.

 It's just another way to do a take on pumpkin and something fun just for the kids and what not.

 But before we do we want to send you all of our friends to our website amateurkitchen.tv

 We also want you to head to our Facebook page, Twitter page, Pinterest, YouTube, Instagram

 and all those other social medias out there because we're on there.

 So I can't believe it's 8 o'clock at night, these kids got me up and said, we're hungry

 So I have this big old block of butter because it's not powdered because I hadn't prepared

 So I'm going to stick it in the microwave and nuke it for a little bit so that we can

 So I measured 4 tablespoons of baking powder that I'm putting in 4 cups of all purpose

 white flour and then we're going to do 1 1⁄2 cups of white sugar.

 And powder buns are one of these things that we make in Belize when we have nothing else

 to eat, when a hurricane is coming, and when you're going to take a trip and you want to

 travel, that's some cinnamon, some people put nutmeg, you've heard me say before in

 one of the other videos I'm allergic to that so I don't even keep that in the house.

 So I got the butter somewhat softened for 1⁄2 cup of butter and you would replace

 the butter with margarine only for this one recipe and my entire book if you wanted the

 powder buns to be a little bit softer like a cake or you can add a couple of eggs in

 there too but this is the Bear Pantry show so we're not going to add anything extra that

 So we're going to work our butter into our flour and at this point you could melt the

 butter in the microwave, you don't want to melt it before you measure it though okay?

 So let's get this working and we're going to get this can of evaporated milk open.

 Okay so I have my dough, it's nice and sticky, almost like a cookie I would say.

 I pick up a little ball and I'm rolling it into a ball, I squish it and I put it on this

 aluminum foil lined baking sheet because I don't want to clean up anything tonight because

 it's late and I don't want to have to, other than that we would have buttered the tray.

 I put a little bit of flour, I've heard that some people are buttering their hands before

 they pick up the pavlova and that makes it smooth but pavlovas are supposed to have a

 So you just want to set it a little bit apart and you can make them any size you want, small

 So see how many we've got on the bottom row, we have 1, 2, 3, by 4, 12 and then we have

 These are going to swell and touch each other in a little while.

 These only need to be cooked for about 35 minutes on 350 degrees Fahrenheit, I had the

 oven preheated already while I was making off the pavlovas and we're going to check

 back in on them in a little while to show you how they're swelling and touching each

 I don't know why the top row always gets brown quicker than the bottom but look at the top

 And look at the bottom row, it's not as white as it looks on the camera, it's a little bit

 So we're going to give it a few more minutes and then we're going to get the pavlovas out

 You know when I was learning how to make this pavlova, I'd say Catherine's Belize had a

 riot, one of the only riots I remember as growing up in Belize and I remember we had

 this in the oven and we just ran from the school because we were so scared and left

 Alright, here's our finished product, look at all my wonderful pavlovas, see, see how

 the top is, it's hot, see how the top has all these cracks and it's kind of rough or

 cruffy on the top, that's the way it's supposed to look, not smooth.

 So I cut one open for you, I put it on my English, my little English plate because this

 is more like an English thing and we put some butter and Jory's favorite cheese, Velveeta

 cheese, I like the other type, Kraft, Sharp, stuff like that and you can not use butter

 if you don't want, you can eat it plain like this, sometimes we flip it over and put peanut

 butter on the bottom or jelly or cream cheese and you can have that with a cup of coffee

 or some tea and look, clean up is so easy, you remove the foil and you toss it, you put

 back your baking sheet and it's time for bed because I can't believe these kids have

 Again I thank you for watching, I hope you enjoy these pot of buns, try them, tell me

 how they come out, like I said some people add a couple of eggs to that, some people

 put nutmeg, some people put raisins, you know my kids don't like raisins, I love raisins

 It's on page 20 of my new cookbook, I have a blog, I'm putting that up in the credits

 and I love you for subscribing, I thank you for watching, until I see you again, take care.

Today I'm going to show you how to replace the side marker light right

 you to remove the entire front bumper so you can get underneath the headlight to pop it

 out and then access the side marker light which is right back way behind there.

 pop out, pull these brackets up like this carefully and then you can get behind the

 light assembly and just give it a little pop and it will move out just slightly.

 which I already had this done, but remove this first headlight bulb.

 this entire washer fluid reservoir and you can reach in, twist and then pull the old

Going to the store, buying a new one and then replacing everything.

 when you're pulling the headlight apart not to catch it in this area.

 turn off the power to your dishwasher and shut off the water supply valve.

 Use a 5 eighths inch wrench to help unthread the water supply line from the

 Unthread the strain relief nut and detach the strain relief from the junction box.

 disconnect the drain hose from the sink drain or garbage disposer

 by using a 9 64th inch hex head screwdriver to rotate the adjustment rod

 Pull the panel forward, disconnect the leak sensor wire connector

 Depress the locking tabs to disconnect the wires from the old pump.

 Make sure the drain hose is accessible through the cabinet wall

 and that the water and power supply lines are positioned in their respective channels in the dishwasher base.

 With the repair completed, turn the water supply back on, as well as the power,

 Cornflake chicken that tastes like it's fried, but it's really baked.

 We have cut-up boneless chicken breasts, cornflakes, two cups of cornflakes in a bag, a Ziploc

 The first thing I'm going to do in the bowl is put my milk like so.

 Then I'm going to crack an egg and another one, because what I'm going to be doing is

 taking the chicken breasts and dredging them in this milk and egg mixture and then into

 I'm going to take a mallet, and I have my cornflakes in the Ziploc bag.

 And now I'm going to take my Italian seasoned breadcrumb, put it in the bowl, and I'll add

 It's really a great alternative if you like southern fried chicken.

 Mix up the cornflakes and the chicken with the Parmesan cheese like that.

 I think this is salty enough because the Parmesan cheese has a little salt in it and so do the

 Okay, so now I take my chicken, and I'm going to move everything over so I have my pan.

 You're going to put tinfoil on a pan because the chicken will go into the oven and cook

 I will take a piece of chicken and then put it in the egg and milk mixture like so.

 Then I will place it into this mixture here with the cornflakes and breadcrumb.

 I have some recipes, suggestions for side dishes on the website at www.simplydeliciouslivingwithmaryann.com.

 What I like to do too is drizzle a little olive oil on top because it just adds a nice

 This dish was inspired, really, it was inspired when we opened the restaurant.

 I wanted a true Italian restaurant and this is a classic Italian dish.

 There was a couple of things I wanted to put on and Parmigiani Bolognese was one of them.

 And the best way to serve fresh pasta, you have to take it and you freeze it right away.

 Then you put it in hot water and we make the ragu, celery, onion, carrots.

 Saute those, a little bit of garlic, a little bit of tomato paste.

 Then we put some white wine in it and then three types of meat, which is ground pork,

 And you cook that for about an hour, hour and ten minutes so that all the flavors meld

 And for dessert, we always have some wonderful Tiramisu that we make here.

 Because we get half portions, full portions, you have an appetizer before dinner or as

 You will cover the tomatoes with a dish towel and leave them to cure overnight.

 Okay, today I'm just going to show you, Tim, how to use this hemp and paste.

 And just to show you, all the threads here in Europe are non-tape, at least nothing that

 That's why we use the hemp and paste over here to fill in that little bit.

 So I'm just going to take some paste on my finger and put a little bit on the threads.

 You don't need to fill them completely up, but you do want to put a little bit on there.

 And I think all the paste does actually is just lubricate more than anything else.

 Then you take your hemp, and I know that your hemp is a little bit different styling than

 This is drawn out a little bit, and yours is more of a big clump.

 But the hemp will be three or four feet long, probably what you've got, and you need to

 And just take a little piece, separate it, or you can work with, and then just kind of

 And basically all you want to do is fill in the grooves of the, take a little more

 But just enough to kind of hold itself down and give yourself a little lubrication.

 Okay, and then just, truth be turned, it's already getting too tight for me to turn it.

 Okay, and then you'll notice here in the end, it's kind of pushed some of that hemp out

 And you can either leave it like that or just take a simple hacksaw blade or if you've

 got a little handle for your hacksaw blade like this, you can use a tooth, whatever.

 And when you get done, you wipe your joint down and you have a good looking joint and

 So that's the end of the lesson and in the email I'll write down a few other little points.

 Я покажу вам базовую мелодию, но эта мелодия будет более влажной,

 Если вы начинающий игрок, это не очень хорошая мелодия для начала,

 У вас есть несколько нот, которые приходят после четвертого нота.

 Когда вы дошли до последнего E нота, первого пальца на D струне,

 В этом уроке мы будем делать басовую мелодию для I Don't Love Nobody.

Я не буду разобрать ноту за нотой, как я сделал басовую мелодию.

 Я просто буду играть, а потом вытащу остальные, более подробные куски.

 Это происходит очень быстро, но это другой способ изменить это.

 how to make soy-free tofu and our main ingredient for this recipe is chickpea

 farmers market also carries it in their bulk section, so that's another option to

 I'm going to do is I'm going to measure out two and a half cups of the flour

 and I'm going to stir it really well to make sure I get all clumps of it out.

 That's a really important step to make sure you get as many of the clumps out

 water, you want to make sure that you add it gradually, a little bit at a time,

 it really well and then put it on your stove at about medium to low heat and

 make sure you keep stirring it consistently so that it doesn't clump up

And you're just going to stir it and heat it up until it gets thick and

 gets to that point, you're going to get yourself a baking dish and have that

You want to move quickly so that your mixture doesn't start to set

Make sure it's smooth at the top so that it will be easier to cut and

 the refrigerator for 30 minutes and take it out and cut it into whatever shape

 And once you have it all taken out, you will have yourself some soy-free tofu.

 Here is the finished product and you can use it in whatever recipe or dish you

Please like, share, and subscribe and comment and let me know if

 In a large bowl, combine 4 cups of flour, 1 1⁄4 cup of warm water, 2 1⁄4 teaspoons

 of dry yeast, 2 eggs, 1⁄4 cup of sugar, and start mixing with a wooden spoon.

 Cut a half a stick of margarine that's at room temperature into small chunks and add

 At this point, you could start kneading the dough by hand, but be careful not to add too

 When the dough is ready, sprinkle flour over a rolling surface and place the dough onto

 Using an I-4 pizza cutter, cut squares of about 2 ½ by 2 ½ inches.

 Separate the squares and sprinkle additional flour if necessary.

 Heat a pot of oil over medium to high heat for about 10 minutes before frying.

 At this point, you can optionally use your thumb to punch a hole through the center of

 Slip the dough into the hot oil and fry in batches of 3-4 at a time.

 Let it rise for another 45 minutes and then fry just like you would square donuts.

 For even easier donuts, just use leftover pizza dough or dough that you got from your

 Hello YouTube, this is PureMagic18 here with yet another card trick tutorial.

 In this card trick I shall be using my Shadow Masters deck with the Gaff cards, with the

 Okay so what I'm going to do is to show you guys what the trick looks like and then show

 Okay so what I'm going to do is I'm just going to cut the cards any random place, just like

 And now I'm going to, and now the first face down card that we get to shall be your card.

 Okay so put that just there and now I'm going to grab your card and put it into the deck,

 Okay so now what I'm going to do is I'm going to give the cards some cuts and stuff.

 Okay now what I want you to do is have a good look at this top card here.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to put the Joker back on top of the deck and now,

 just like this, the Joker is now holding, hopefully, your card, the three of diamonds.

 What you're going to want is your two Jokers, the one with the three of diamonds reveal

 and the hourglass reveal and you're also going to want the three of diamonds.

 Okay so the setup for this trick is the one with the three diamonds, the Joker with the

 three diamonds reveal on top and then followed by the second Joker and then the three of

 Okay now, what I'm going to do is I'm going to force the three of diamonds onto the spectator.

 So how I do this, if you have any other ways to force you can just go and find it, this

 So what you're going to want to do is ask them to pick any cards at the top and turn

 them around and go deeper than you were before and then do the same thing.

 Now the first face down card that we get to shall be their selected card and because they

 cut the cards anyway they'll think it's completely random but it's going to be the three of diamonds.

 So when I give this card to them to have a look at and stuff or just show them I put

 the deck, the little packet that was face down like this onto the table and then grab

 Now what you're going to want to do is grab their card and show them it's their card,

 Give it to them and they can put it straight into the deck wherever they want.

 It's very easy, it's similar to the 190 Helix cut except without that little awkward little

 So what you do is you just say to them I want you to have a look at this top card and it's

 You tell them to have a look at what he's carrying with him and they'll remember that

 So what you want to do is you want to flip the card back over and now what you want to

 Push that card forward and then the second card you want to grab with your palm and pull

 So over the edge like that and then push it over the top, come all the way back and then

 screw out the deck and that will put the three of diamonds reveal on top of the pack.

 So you just do like a click and a wave or something and then you turn the cards back

 around and magically he has changed the hourglass to the three of diamonds and they'll be amazed

 So please rate, comment and subscribe and until next time, see ya.

 Hi, this is Randy Zajac, Technical Advisor at Gujon Brothers Incorporated.

 to look at the steps involved in the construction of a carbon fiber skim board with our special

The core of the board will be built from two halves and the easiest way to get a symmetric

 shape is to cut one half and then use it as a pattern and trace it onto the core material for

Once this step was completed, Ben glued the halves together with West System 105

 breather materials and carbon fiber cloth to size as well as the vacuum bag.

 built into it but any flat surface that is hard and non-porous can be used as a jig to complete

Step four is where we wet out all of the materials with epoxy on the

For this project, Ben is using West System 105 resin mixed with the newly

 formulated 207 special clear hardener so that the weave of the carbon is showcased on the finished

Once the material is properly bagged, apply vacuum and let cure.

 project is different and the cure time depends on many different variables.

 first removing the skim board from the jig after the proper cure schedule, then cleaning up its

 edge to the skim board using West System 105 resin and 207 special clear hardener mixed with

 Ben is using West System 105 resin mixed with 207 special clear hardener.

 Here, Ben is troweling it onto the surfaces with an 809 notch spreader and then rolling it out

 lightly straighten the board surface with a propane torch to remove any air bubbles.

 after the epoxy cured, Ben flipped the skim board over and repeated the flow coat process on the

Step eight takes place after your flow coat has had a chance to fully cure.

 we are wet sanding both sides with 220 grit paper, followed by 320 grit.

 repeat of step seven, where we apply the flow coat on both sides of the board.

Ben started out the wet sanding process here with 220 grit paper, followed by

 Step eleven is the final step, where we apply a backline traction pad kit from SurfRide.com.

 has snapped a chalk line down the middle of the board to help him lay out the pieces.

 formulated 207 special clear hardener and to see other cool videos, go to westsystem.com.

 and doors and whatever is the glass door and glazing in the glass for years and years

 sticks in and pin nail them in and you know the problem with that is is that none of it really

 gives us a nice fine finished look but there's really nothing out there.

 and here it is and and it's we've been doing it for probably 10-12 years and it works really great.

 We simply take a hot glue gun and set some little put some little bit of hot glue around

 The nice thing about the modeling clay is while it will set firm it never gets totally hard.

We always when we're building a piece of furniture for our client

 we always provide an extra pane or two of glass and we always provide an extra brick of the

Should a glass ever break it's very easy and they can even replace it.

 about this is is that you can put it in, hang your doors and you're ready to go.

 Now while the clay at this moment still remains a little bit soft we can still clean our glass

 What up everybody, this is Rockstripe representing the Renegade Squadron and the Royal BC One

 In today's tutorial, I'm going to be going over the next level of basic freezes.

 Last time we only utilized stab ins, which is your basic chairs, reverse chairs, babies,

 This time we're going to go over a very similar thing, except you're going to start playing

 with levels, and you're going to go from your basic freezes and go up and go back down,

 utilizing your head and also your forearms and basically being off your head and just

 using your arm control and your arm strength to use all these freeze transitions.

 It is very important to start developing control and also how to go with levels because once

 you start adding levels to what you do in your freezes, it starts to look a little bit

 So here we are, we're going to start with the basic freezes again, and we're going to

 So you're going to start utilizing transitions within your freezes, but this is one of the

 This is something that was very fundamental to me when I was younger and I was developing.

 So where you start is you start here in the baby position, and then what you're going

 to do is use your back leg to push yourself up at the same time that you use your inner

 So when you go up, slide up, but if you notice my back leg was hooked to the back so I can

 find my balance right away and I can bring it back down if I need to.

 When you're on your left hand, you go here, core lefties, here.

 So remember, it's left leg, left hand, you're going to use it all, and you're going to remember

 So it gives you the balance right away, and then you bring it back down.

 You have to try and combine it together, and this is just the basic way to do it.

 Now to advance that, you can play with more variations of the same thing.

 So you can cross your legs, you can be here, cross your legs, cross your leg, switch.

 You can use your reverse babies, which is another variation as well.

 When you're doing it, keep your center of gravity tight to yourself.

 If you're really extended, it's a lot harder to develop momentum, especially with your

 So the more you're bought in, the better chance you have at doing it faster and developing

 And the last pointer for you guys that already got this, if you already have this basic freeze

 transitions and freezes, then it's time to take it to the next level.

 The next level would be for you to do it without utilizing your head.

 A lot of us use our head for everything that we do, especially in freezes.

 We always end up on our head and I'm guilty of it myself because I end up doing that a

 But if you really want to develop arm control and strength within your dancing, within your

 freezes, then you have to start learning how to freeze without using your head.

 When you're doing it, it'll be the same thing, but instead of, you got to keep your head

 And again, this is where your leg control and arm control comes in.

 So I'm here, left leg, it's going to help me get up, keep my balance, keep my arm and

 And again, if you notice, my center of gravity was in, I was never extended.

 And if you want to get even more advanced with it, again, cross your legs, add different

 forms to it, get creative with that, as well as just doing it on both sides.

 We started the day by visiting one of Rio's fabulous fruit and vegetable markets where

 we bought the ingredients for what is maybe Brazil's favorite dessert, guava and cheese.

 And this is simple as can be, which is probably why it's so popular up and down the country.

 All you need is a nice plain cheese, a big old slice of that, and a slice of the guava

 Luisa is from SENAC, a country-wide culinary school here in Brazil.

 And Luisa, we're going to do something a lot more complicated than this.

 Cateaupiry is this delicious Brazilian cream cheese, but you can use other kinds of cream

 Add 400 grams of guava preserve, cut into pieces, into a saucepan with half a cup of

 Keep stirring and in less than 10 minutes it will have turned into a lovely guava gooey

 Pour the hot guava goo into the egg whites and fold them together with a spatula.

 Scoop your pink mixture into dry porcelain ramekins and sit them on an empty oven tray.

 To make the cheese sauce, just heat up a mixture of 400 grams of cream cheese and one and a

 And thank you to Sennac for letting us use this wonderful kitchen and teach us this fabulous

Do you believe that the best way to have beautiful skin is to have clear and clean skin?

So in this video I will introduce you to a new product that I am using

 So this product is the SoniClear and this is the Sonic Skin Cleansing Brush.

 So I really like this product because it cleans my face and it actually removes excess makeup there

 So in this video I will review this product and I will show you how it works.

 This is how the SoniClear box looks and it comes in a complete set.

 First, there is the SoniClear brush and then there is the charger cradle.

 After that, the top light will light up indicating that you are ready to use your device.

 Usually when I get home I feel so tired but not only my body feels tired but my face and skin as well.

 So what I do is to remove my makeup, then I clip my hair and start my routine.

 You can either put it on directly on the brush or put some on your hands.

 So start by gently putting the brush on your face in circular motion.

 I like cleaning the areas where I get the most oil and dirt like my cheeks and forehead.

 But I noticed that my face turned a bit red due to the facial wash.

 This cleanser is so effective because it cleanses deep within your pores,

 removing the dirt and bacteria you acquired throughout the day.

 On the third day, the SoniClear brush continues to give me good results.

 It's really a huge difference to have clean and clear skin first.

 So I'm going to show you the difference when you just wash your face using a facial cleanser

 and when you wash your face using facial cleanser and the SoniClear.

 So I'm going to wash the right side of my face using just the facial cleanser.

 And for the left side of my face, I'm going to use the same facial cleanser.

 So anyway, I have my favorite facial toner and I have two cotton pads.

 Now we are going to do the same thing on the left side of my face.

 So this one I only used facial cleanser while this one I used my favorite facial cleanser and the SoniClear.

 I've been using the SoniClear for more than a month and I have seen a huge difference on my skin.

 because as you saw in the video, it was able to remove excess makeup.

 So as you saw in the video, it was able to remove excess makeup and it left my skin fresh and clean.

 So I really recommend this if you have troubled skin because you will be able to start fresh each day or each night.

 So if you want to know more about this product, please be sure to go to micheltoddtruorganics.com

 So yes, so if you have any questions or comments, don't forget to leave them at the comment section below.

 Hello everyone, today we're going to talk about three-point perspective.

 Basically, three-point perspective is the same as doing the two-point perspective,

 except that instead of having all the vertical lines be vertical and basically parallel to each other,

 And again I'm drawing without a ruler, and just ghosting my lines.

 So again, it's a good habit to practice drawing straight lines.

 As I said, I usually draw two dots on a page and just basically try and connect the two

 So again, I've created my two vanishing points on the right and left-hand side.

 And I'm going to set up the third vanishing point as soon as...

 Again, ghosting my lines and laying it down when I feel like I have connected with the other dot.

 Okay, and draw my other parallel line going to the vanishing point number two.

 So I don't use three-point perspective a lot, but actually I like it.

 And I mean, I use it mainly, I guess, for buildings or in kind of like cityscape.

 Okay, now this is where all the vertical lines are going to converge.

 And then I'm going to take that line, the center line, straight down and just connect it with the third vanishing point.

 So what I'm going to do actually is I'm going to duplicate this side.

So what I'm going to do is I'm going to find the center of this box right here by drawing an X in it from each corner.

 And then where that intersects, the two lines intersect, I bring a line to vanishing point number two.

 And then I'm going to take the top left corner and connect it with the center of that line right there, the midpoint.

 And I'll just take a line from vanishing point number three and connect it up with that point.

 So again, you can make a city block and you just repeat that process all the way down.

 And that'll give you a nice even section all the way down to the vanishing point.

 I'm here today to show you how to make our delicious pretzels in your home.

 The first step is you're going to take one and a quarter cup water at 105 degrees.

 Very important, you don't want it to get too hot, otherwise it won't activate the yeast

 Then we're going to take one tablespoon of dry active yeast, which you can find in our

 Very important, you want to wait two minutes before you add the pretzel mix.

 You want to pour the pouch of our at-home pretzel mix, which can be found in all of

 Once you have the pretzel mix in your water and yeast, you're going to take one teaspoon

 Very important, always wash your hands before you start preparing your food.

 Once you have all the ingredients, you're going to start to mix.

 You want to get it all together and then we can put it on the counter and start to knead.

 Now once we get our dough ball formed, we're going to place it on our counter and do this

 We're going to coat it with a little bit of flour and place your dough right on there.

 And then we're going to continue to knead until we get a smooth dough that we will then

 Now once we get our nice dough ball formed, we're going to move it over to another mixing

 bowl, lightly spray with nonstick spray, and we'll place our dough with a warm, damp towel

 Hey guys, tonight's project, I'm going to be working on the hit and run buggy again.

 Now the Vanquish guys have used before the mounts for the JK and simply bolted them into

 However, I'm pretty hard on this thing and I want something that I feel is going to be

 So I'm going to be fabricating a mount out of some eighth inch cold rolled steel as well

 I'll probably do a plate across the front here that will bolt down through these two

 and I'll probably add a third or a fourth hole that it'll bolt down into this roof skin

 and then I'll probably add something that comes down around these A pillars that'll

 Probably something along the lines of just a zip tie that holds the clamp or whatever

 I'm going to put it in the bender and put four 90 degree bends in it to make a loop

 I'm not going to go through this whole process on here just because it's kind of going to

 be long and boring but you'll get the point as I go through here.

 I've bent the outer light bar guard into the shape that I want and I'm going to TIG

 weld the two little joints, that joint together right there to hold this, hold its shape.

 Then I'll get into welding the supports onto the plate that will attach it to the roof.

 I'm just going to kind of freehand in some of these supports for the back and get this

 I know the dimension I want from the leading edge of this plate to my front hoop here.

 I'm just going to kind of throw in some for the meantime and then I'll finish doing the

 This is a piece of tubing that I have that I cut in half and what I'm going to do is

 take and attach it at this, roughly at that spot there with a zip tie around the A pillar.

 I'm going to groove this piece though to do that and make it look a little cleaner.

 This I just cut a piece of scrap and then I'll then weld on the brace to hold it to

 But that's what we've got now and I'm going to move over to the lathe.

 I just need to do some painting now and it'll all be wrapped up.

 When I do the final install I'll use black zip ties but I just wanted to put one on there

 I'll have a quick connect on the power inlet and that will be the story.

 Anyway, I'll have more on what I'll be doing with this light bar here in a little while.

 Okay, this is going to be the cross picking style of Cripple Creek and for this style

 Make sure that you're moving your pick back and forth, starting down, coming up.

 You're going to be starting here on the fifth and eighth frets, first and second string.

 And then keep your hand in about that same position but move up a string.

 First and second strings are going to be at the third fret with your index finger.

 Use your ring finger and your middle finger for the second and third strings.

 Now for part B, and for this particular version, you can kind of hear a C chord in here.

 So this would really actually work very well for the song Banjo in the Hollow if you were

 People back in here may want to play a C chord here because you actually can hear the C chord

 But it's just kind of a neat way to play this part of the song.

 So we're going to go back to this same position that you were using before, but we're going

 And then the same ending that you used before, starting on the seventh fret.

 Hi everybody, it's Brad with Big Family Homestead and in this video I'm going to show you how

 I've done it with meat sauce, I've done it all different kinds of ways and you can dehydrate

 spaghetti at home and what's even more cool than that is it lasts a really long time.

 I'm going to show you a process that we use and you can actually, well I've had it personally

 so I don't know what the USDA Choice Awards would say how long you're supposed to do this

 So this is just for entertainment purposes unless you want to try it on your own and

 Bottom line for me, I've had it up to two years in the method that I'm going to show

 It's a great way for you to, you know let's say you've got too much spaghetti and you

 don't want to throw away the leftovers, you know dehydrate it or maybe you're a camper,

 This is a great way for you to save a ton of money and instead of buying those bagged

 Now the way I'm going to do this is I'm going to go ahead and show you the steps on how

 I do it myself and then at the end of the video I'm even going to show you how to rehydrate

 You're going to basically mix it all together in this bowl and get it nice and incorporated.

 Alright now that our spaghetti is nicely incorporated we're going to move on to step two which is

 Okay as we move on to step two this is a very very important step.

 You can't just use the regular old slatted trays like this or else you're going to make

 You want to use the fruit roll up plastic flexible trays as your trays or else you're

 Give it a little space and I'll show you what it looks like when we are loaded.

 I do like using one of these spaghetti noodle holder thingy dealies whatever to spread it

 You want to make sure that there's good gaps between all the noodles so that it will heat

 There is one more important step that we've got to get to and I'm going to tell you that

 Alright now you're going to want to weigh your spaghetti before you actually go ahead and

 dehydrate it because you need to get the difference in the weight of the product so

 that you can rehydrate it properly so that you know how much water you're going to want

 You're going to need to fiddle with this a little bit but it will give you a good rule

 I'm going to start it out at about 135 degrees and we're off to the races.

 Let it dehydrate, get warm and toasty until it's crispity, crispity, crispity.

 I usually check it around 6-8 hours but you know it just depends on the consistency of

 Yada yada yippy skippy you check on it maybe 6 hours in, 8 hours in, whatever floats your

 I actually checked it at 6 hours and it wasn't ready to go so I ended up letting it go overnight.

 Alright now we're going to basically get our spaghetti off of our trays.

 You can do that really however you want but if you check this out most of it comes off

 We're going to kind of break this up down into the bowl for better storage.

 So what you're going to do is you're going to take something flat like this spatula and

 Okay so now at this point you're ready to either package this up for a weekend thing

 I prefer to use a vacuum seal machine because then you get all that air out of there.

 When you go to use your vacuum sealer machine sometimes those noodles will get all pokey

 and they'll poke through the sides of your vacuum seal bags and that's not good because

 So what you do is you take a piece of cardboard like a thin piece of cardboard like a box

 You fit that down into the bag and then you put your spaghetti down into that.

 And that way when the vacuum sealer seals it can't poke through.

 Now I'm going to go ahead and show you how to rehydrate this stuff based on our math.

 You may have to fiddle with the amount of water just depending on your math.

 I am Brad with Big Family Homestead and you have an amazing day.

 Hey everybody, have you ever been to a Japanese restaurant, the kind that cook right in front

 You know where they take the egg shells and put them in their hat and make a little volcano

 When you go there they usually serve a couple different types of sauces and one of those

 It's called Japanese shrimp sauce, also Japanese yum yum sauce.

 It's a mayonnaise based sauce and it's fantastic not only on fried rice, pork, beef, shrimp,

 Alright ladies and gentlemen, boys and girls, it's time to get started to making our Japanese

 First thing we're going to start off with, a cup and a quarter of mayonnaise.

 You want to use good quality mayonnaise, you don't want to use the cheap mayonnaise or

 So we'll go ahead in here and just kind of scoop some of this up here.

 We're going to go ahead and pop that in the microwave for just a second.

 While we're doing that, we're going to go ahead and put the rest of our ingredients

 Go ahead and clean my blender up here a little bit so we don't get it all messed up.

 And you can buy these squeeze bottles in any of the box stores.

 a very, very popular dish and we usually spread it on toast and it's a very good vegetarian

You can use it obviously as a snack or a starter and it's just absolutely delicious.

 It takes some time to prepare and chop the vegetables but once you've got a big pot,

 The next step will be taking our aubergine and I'm just cutting off the end bit that

 a bigger cube but it will fry a lot faster if you do it in a small cube.

 you've chopped and prepared all your ingredients, we get a large pan, a couple of tablespoons

 is mixed in and fried for a couple more minutes, we put our carrots and onion with garlic into

Again, we'll put some olive oil, a bit more tablespoons this time because aubergine

 to cook it again for a couple of minutes first, maybe about 10 minutes in total until it all

Now, we're going to add half a can of chopped tomatoes or you can use any

However, I like it smooth, so I'm going to blend it with a hand blender.

However, it's really good on bruschettas, also on crackers, whichever way you like it.

 like it spicy, you can add a bit of chili in there to make it a spicy eggplant mix or

 In this DVD we're going to talk about technique, how to move through your West Coast Swing,

 as well as some nice variations of the basics that you can use in your social dancing.

 Here we're going to start with some technical drills to really get you moving on your West

 The great thing about West Coast Swing is there's basically only two elements.

 So what I'm going to show you today is how to practice the elements within the basics

 on their own so when you add them to your basics you're ready to go.

 First thing we're going to talk about is the use of your feet and legs in your walks.

 When you're walking forward, and by the way this is for both ladies and gentlemen, the

 technique is the same for both partners, both the lead and the follow.

 Starting with walks, as we use our feet we want to roll the foot both off of and onto

 So a mental picture that I like to give my students is I say, imagine that I Velcroed

 As you went to take a step, the first thing you would have to do is bend the knee to start

 It's very important that every time you bend the knee that you don't leave the heel on

 So you're going to bend that knee, peeling that heel up, the knee bends straight forward.

 What happens to a lot of people is they practice their knee action, they tend to lift their

 It creates a bit of a prancing type movement and you want to avoid that.

 So if you watch as I bend my knee, it bends straight forward maintaining the same line

 I'm going to bend my knee straight forward, peeling the foot up from the floor from the

 My body weight is shifting forward so by the time I release the foot, I'm in motion and

 From here, I'm going to bend that back knee, pull it straight through, extend to a straight

 You will frequently hear people talk about whether you should step forward on a heel

 I always like to step forward on a toe because I want to see full extension of the ankle

 However, if you choose to slip to a heel at the last moment by releasing the toe, that

 But I'd like for you to practice landing on the toe to work on the articulation of that

 You're going to notice that I bend the knee, I release the foot from the floor, I extend

 My walks are done on whole beats of music, for example, your one, two of every basic

 Knee bends, weight shifts, I extend and push onto two straight legs.

 We're going to talk about weight transfers in West Coast Swing.

 There's a term that we use in dancing called rate of weight transfer.

 What that means is how quickly does my weight get to my foot upon the strike of the floor.

 In some styles of dance, your weight arrives right when your foot hits the floor.

 However, in West Coast Swing, our rate of weight transfer is a little bit slower.

 We want to occupy the time from one beat to the next with continuous movement over and

 So for example, if I'm practicing my walks and I arrive at the foot too early, one, now

 That's often going to cause me to be a little bit early and the foot's going to be in the

 air and I'm almost going to fall on my two a little bit too quickly.

 I start transferring my weight when the foot hits the floor, I'm split weight.

 I spend the rest of that beat of music pushing myself over that foot and preparing to step

 When we practice our backward walks, both the ladies and the gentlemen should practice

 But ladies, that forward walk is your one, two of every basic pattern.

 Gentlemen, a backward walk is your one of every basic pattern, so it's worth spending

 Gentlemen, when you step backward, even though I'm moving backward, my knee still bends forward

 As I go to take that backward step, I'm going to bend the knee straight forward, releasing

 I'm going to move the toe back and roll my weight from the toe all the way down to the

 It's going to cause you to pull your lady over just a bit as well as being off balance

 So I bend the knee forward to move the toe back, roll down to the heel.

 Once I'm ready to take my two, I'm going to bend that knee forward to release the foot,

 move the toe, roll down all the way to the heel, landing on a bent knee rolling to two

 The number one mistake people make is they don't let their whole beat last long enough

 An example of this, gentlemen, is if I place my one and as I'm rolling onto my one, I pop

 that right knee, it's going to cause me to be a little bit ahead of the beat.

 So I want to roll all the way to two straight legs before I release that right knee for

 For this look, I've already primed my eyes with Jordana's 12 hour made to last pencil

 The first color I'm going to use for the transition is this eyelid color.

 The brush I'm going to use is from Crown and I'm just going to use this very lightly from

 inner corner all the way to the outer corner of the eye as always, building it up very

 I'm going to use Comfort Zone palette and I'm going to use this brow bone eyeshadow

 This eyeshadow brush I'm using is Zoeva's 227 and I'm just patting this eyeshadow color

 It's really gorgeous and I'm just patting this on going a little bit above my crease.

 I'm just taking that same blending brush I used to apply the transition and I'm just

 I'm now going to take this angled eyeshadow brush and this is from the eBay purchase.

 I'm going to take the pink handled brushes and I'm going to use this dark definer eyeshadow

 I'm just going to start by pressing lightly, focusing the highest pigmentation right at

 When I lift my brush you can see how the outer V edge has now been formed.

 Going back in with Petal Pusher palette and taking a clean blending brush I'm going to

 just dip my brush into this same transition color very lightly.

 What I'm going to do is start blending out this dark brown eyeshadow towards the center

 I'm now going to use this brow bone highlighting color and the brush I'm using is Crown C433

 I'm going to very lightly apply this for our highlight and taking it down just a little

 For the lower lash line I'm going to go back in with the Petal Pusher palette and use the

 For the comfort zone palette I'm now going to use the same brown eyeshadow that we used

 Also going to use the same angled eyeshadow brush and I'm going to connect it with the

 Using that same eyelid color I'm going to just apply this and redefine the inner corner.

 I'm going to pat this on at the inner corner of the lower lash line so stopping right about

 Now what we're going to do is move on to lining our eyes using the same palette which is comfort

 I hope you guys liked this tutorial using Wet n Wild's Petal Pusher and Comfort Zone

 These palettes are so pigmented and these ones are also the ones I have brand new of

 So affordable and there's times where you can get to buy one, get one half off so it's

 The blush that I have on right now for today's tutorial is from Zoeva.

 They recently launched some cosmetics on their website and this is just a gorgeous peachy

 It is a matte soft pink lip color and I really really love it because it's like a nudey pink.

 Her makeup channel is Makeup By Nisha and we're going to work on something this week

 And it's a collab that has been overdue for quite a while now so I will see you guys soon.

 Hey guys it's Steve so welcome back to another weekly grill dome video.

 have some awesome neighbors that go offshore fishing a lot and they brought

 how quick and easy it is to grill up a nice piece of mahi-mahi on the grill

 What we have to do for this recipe is got some nice freshly caught mahi-mahi here and I've

 binder for our rub here and then also it's going to help it from sticking on

 And we're only going to be cooking these two to three minutes per side and then

 And today we're going to learn how to do the Peter Griffin voice.

 You've seen and heard this particular voice done by lots of people and today you're gonna

 To make any impression you have to know where the voice is placed in the throat.

 So what you're gonna do now is you're gonna shift your mouth either to the left or the

 So this is just me shifting my mouth to the right side of my face here.

 Now I know this looks a little bit weird but stay with me here.

 And all your words that start with T's like this, that, and the other are going to be

 So you're gonna replace them with D's and A's at the end of words like other.

 And you can just practice doing this as often as you possibly can until your face gets used

 So depending on your natural voice, you may need to go an octave up or an octave down

 So as you can hear from my speaking voice, my natural speaking voice, I'm very bassy.

 So what I need to do when I'm trying to achieve the Peter Griffin voice, taking what we've

 learned from step 1 and attributing it to step 2, what I need to do is I need to maybe

 So with that in mind, I'm going to talk a little bit like dis here.

 So as you can hear, dis is me shifting my voice a couple octaves higher.

 If you're familiar with Peter Griffin, his pace of speaking is a little bit quick paced

 With what we've learned thus far, it's time for us to become comfortable with the voice.

 And the best way to do that is actually just putting it on and doing it.

 So now that we kind of know how Peter Griffin's voice sounds here, what we need to do is just

 And also don't worry if it doesn't sound exactly like the character, because the thing is what

 But what you need to do is practice and practice and practice the voice.

 I still don't think my Peter Griffin is dead on, but there are certain aspects of the voice,

 of the impression that I do, that lets you know that this is Peter Griffin.

 Remember that one time there was a guy doing an impression of me?

 Now practice makes perfect, so go forth and do the voice in your everyday life.

 You're practicing, and the more you do the voice, the better you'll get at it.

 And don't just repeat lines that you hear on a television series.

 Say normal things that you would say in everyday life in the voice.

 If you already know the mindset of the character by watching the particular source material,

 And be sure to vote for Akeem in the Geek & Sundry Vlogger Search.

 Voting ends on July 19th, and Akeem is keeping his fingers crossed that he will make it to

 Pastry dough is often called 3-2-1 dough, referring to the three parts flour, two parts

 The apple cobbler recipe is a rich dessert that uses this dough and adds a half a cup

 Except for the ice cold water, have all ingredients at room temperature.

 The goal is to create a dough that achieves a light consistency, is not tough and has

 You can either do this by hand, with a pastry knife, with a food processor or by using a

 This recipe uses shortening as the fat and salt along with the flour.

 Once these ingredients are incorporated, it should resemble small peas.

 Add cold water to the flour-fat mixture all at once and mix to ensure that all the dough

 At this point, wrap the dough in plastic wrap and place it into the refrigerator for several

 These are important changes and are necessary to improve the characteristics of the dough.

 The recipe will determine when you need to roll out your dough.

 To roll out the dough, first lightly dust your work surface with flour.

 With the roller also lightly dusted, roll out the dough gradually.

 It's recommended to turn the dough 90 degrees every few passes to help in rolling a consistent

 If you are making a pie crust, make the circle slightly larger than your pan.

 While the dough is resting, make the filling for the apple cobbler recipe.

 Continue to cook, stirring constantly until the liquid thickens.

 Remove from the heat and blend the remaining sugar, cinnamon and nutmeg into the mixture.

 Add the apples and stir lightly to avoid breaking up the fruit.

 At this point, the recipe directs you to roll out the dough into two rectangles, about 20

 Lightly score the top of the dough to identify serving portions.

 Bake the cobbler until the pastry is brown and the filling is bubbling.

 Once cooked, use the scores made in the dough to help cut into portions for service.

 Hey everybody, today I'm going to show you Suicide Note Part 1 by Pantera.

 So this is in drop D. If you don't know how to go in drop D, you put your finger on the

 7th fret of your 6th string and it has to be in tune with the 5th string open.

 So I'm going to play the sad part, because I think both are really different but similar.

 And then you're going to put your index finger on the 3rd fret of the 4th string.

 Then you're going to put your index finger on the 2nd fret of the same string.

 Alright, I'm sure that you've seen a lot of videos on here on how to do the eyelashes and put them on.

 I don't know if you can see, but like my eyelashes are so curly.

I don't even know what the call is, but this is where you hold the lashes to help you.

 You're going to need, most importantly, some eyelashes and glue.

 Of course, I'm going to need some scissors because these things are a little too long for me.

 You don't want your eyelashes to go in the corner because it's uncomfortable for you.

 I have a cold and I don't want to blow on it and put it all over my eye.

 It's what really helps me because I have curly eyelashes that clamp onto my eye so it's hard to get behind and put that false lash on.

 Once you feel like it's on there, you can take this off of your real eyelashes and start to push down with the tweezers or whatever you want to use.

 What I want to do is just go ahead and blend my real lashes into the false lashes.

 If you want to see more videos from me, just go ahead and subscribe.

 As you can probably tell from all the extra ridiculous noise that the mic is picking up,

 However, if you like beer can chicken, you're going to feel right at home with this episode.

 If you've never grilled beer can chicken, you're going to really enjoy what you see.

 We really want to get this thing having some true barbecue flavor.

 At Hamlin, on the other hand, he's going for the gourmet angle.

 Instead of beer, he's bringing wine, and instead of a can, he's bringing a pan.

 I guess instead of beer can chicken, he's doing wine pan chicken.

 I have complete faith in this guy as far as turning out some great tasting food on the

 This is his friend Charles Maddox, also known as the Poor Chef, stopping by to join us and

 What you want to do is you want to soak a paper towel in oil, maybe a couple paper towels.

 You want to light a very thin piece because it's going to catch much quicker.

 You're going to have an average Joe approach to beer can chicken to a gourmet approach

 When you've got it open, you'll see the bottom under the plate.

 If you've got the long already lit lighter, just go ahead and light it up.

 When you put it down there, as you're holding it down, then put on and turn it on.

 Then most of the grills, newer grills, like on this one, you have four burners.

 Once one is lit and the gas is going through, one's lit, it'll just go through every one

 of them as you turn the burners on because it's taking the gas this way.

 I can light one, not have to worry about anything else, and just start turning on the other

 The roasters are a lot bigger and they're usually called roasters when you pick them

 It's been brining for several hours in just a mix of water and salt.

 I didn't go fancy on it just because I want the C-Dubs BBQ Rub to really stand out because

 Now I'm going to go ahead and rub down the chicken not only on the skin on the outside

 but we're going to put rub underneath the skin between it and the actual meat.

 So what I've got in here is a little bit of olive oil and a little vegetable oil.

 What I'm going to do is I'm just going to get my potatoes and chicken.

 Now that white wine, wine is acidic so that will help cut the fat down when it's cooking.

 So the vegetables when we pull out, it's all going to cook together.

 And what we're going to do is we're going to cover this up with some thyme and some

 So here we got our bird and I'm going to go ahead and pat it dry.

 What that's going to do is it's going to let the skin kind of relieve it of moisture so

 You're actually letting the smoke and the heat, the dry heat penetrate the chicken and

 This rub, when I opened it for the first time, it smelled a lot like a chili powder type

 You look right here, you got garlic, onion, spices, salt, sugar, and pepper.

 I love it when they say spices because you notice some Secret Squirrel stuff in there.

 No need to put it on the wing tips, we're not going to eat those.

 Unless you really want to eat that part, you don't really have to dress it up that much.

 With this particular spice, you can use a little more than you would elsewhere because

Today I'm going to be teaching you how to make origami dragon scales.

 I'm going to be teaching you how to make one scale, but if you learn how to make one scale, then you can make this.

 This part is difficult if you don't have a lot of experience with origami, but I'll try to do my best to show you how.

And the great thing about this Nutella is it's not just your regular Nutella, it's

 actually 55% sugar, which is almost as much as a chocolate bar.

 Nutella, it still tastes amazing, but you're cutting out all that extra sugar that isn't

So if you'd like to see how to make this really yummy Nutella, just keep

All you're going to need are some hazelnuts, some coconut oil, rice malt syrup.

 And rice malt syrup is made from brown rice and it's a complex carbohydrate, not a simple

 sugar and that means it has a much lower glycemic index than many other sweeteners.

 The first step is to preheat your oven to 180 degrees Celsius and grab a baking tray

 them for about 8-10 minutes until they're nice and golden brown.

 Once the hazelnuts have cooled down for a little while, you just want to grab them and

 Once you've removed all of the skins, you can pop the hazelnuts into a food processor

 and you just want to process them until they're really nice and fine, pretty much like bread

 Once the hazelnuts are nice and fine, you want to add a quarter cup of the cacao powder,

 80ml of the rice malt syrup, 1 tablespoon of coconut oil and 125ml of the coconut milk.

 Then all you need to do is process it all together until it's nice and smooth.

 You might need to scrape down the side of the bowl one or two times while you're processing

 the Nutella, just to make sure everything is mixed together properly.

 Once everything is mixed together, you just want to pop the Nutella into a jar and then

 you want to put it in the fridge for about 1-2 hours just to let it harden up a little

 bit and then you can go ahead and eat it on toast or spread it onto a banana or even

 So I hope you have fun making this Nutella and definitely have fun eating it.

 So I'm going to do a video today to go over some of the most common mistakes I see a lot

 They're not a lot because piston drops are very limited movement.

 It's a very limited movement and you don't have a lot of range of motion.

 So there's not a lot of mistakes you will be making but if you make one or two, you

 So the one main mistake I see a lot of people make is that they kind of think that dropping

 the hip, you're dropping it down but a little bit more to the side when in fact not necessarily.

 You can do piston drops straight down or you can do them down and out on the side.

 So your choice, you know, you can just kind of go straight down like that or if you want

 to make them down and up then you lift and as you drop, you push the hip out more.

 So to think that you have to push up to the side every time you do a piston drop, no,

 That's a choice if you want to create, you know, a variety in your piston drops.

 But if you're a beginner, please stick to the down motion all the time until you get

 it right and then from there you can go out to the side a little bit more because if you

 try to learn it going out to the side more, you know, you might not even get it.

 You might actually kind of look a little jerky and I see a lot of people kind of drop the

 upper body to the side because they try to exaggerate the hip out and they compensate

 Now, doing the basic straight down and up motion, one of the most common mistakes I

 also see a lot of students make is that they think only about their hips.

 And if you guys go back and watch the video that I posted in the past teaching you how

 to do piston drops, a lot of work actually does happen in your feet.

 So really be careful that you have to keep constantly doing this motion of up and down,

 And as you lift the heel, that's what lifts your hip, but as you drop the heel, you drop

 And you cannot move the hips with piston drops without really focusing on dropping the heels.

 There is a different version where you can do it, but it's a much harder version.

 And it's usually when you're trying to change levels, when you're going down and up, you

 kind of want to keep your heels down, but you're working it from the knee.

 But for just a basic piston drop, keep your heels down when you drop the hip down and

 Now, speaking of opposite sides, the third most common mistake that I see a lot of students

 make is that when they drop, let's say, the heel and the hip, they don't think about the

 When in fact, you have to think about the two sides together all the time.

 Keep thinking that whenever you drop, the other side is going to lift.

 So those are the most common, three most common mistakes I see a lot of students make when

 So hopefully, you'll find something here that you're doing that maybe could finally be that

 I'll see you guys in the next video on PreviousDanceClasses.com.

So today I'm going to be doing a do-it-yourself video and this is going

 so I got just a black sheet of construction paper that will fit underneath my picture

 use a black background I also decided to cut out just a little white sheet of paper from

Now I'm just making sure that they're all evenly spaced and they're

 Veloute is one of the five mother sauces and is very similar to a bechamel sauce.

 The only difference is that it's made using stock instead of milk.

 In its most basic form, it consists of only three ingredients, butter, flour, and white

 A veloute is usually made with a blonde roux, which gives the sauce a subtle, nutty flavor.

 This versatile sauce can be flavored and used to complement many fish, poultry, or

 It is also used in things like pot pies, chowders, and in many soups.

 The thickness of a veloute is determined by the ratio of stock to roux.

 Typically, chicken, fish, or vegetable are used, but it depends on the dish you are making.

 Meaning if you were serving a chicken dish, you would generally use chicken stock.

 Or a seafood dish, you would generally use a fish stock to make the veloute.

 The stock should be full flavored for the best results, as this is the main ingredient

 To do this, add the stock very slowly while constantly whisking.

 At the beginning, the sauce will be quite thick, but it's better to add the stock slowly

 as the roux will not fully thicken until it reaches the simmering point.

 Continue to add the stock a bit at a time, letting it come to a boil each time before

 Continue to slowly add the stock until you reach the right consistency.

 Here you can see we will still need to add a bit more stock, because as we stir, you

 Also when we drizzle the sauce, it momentarily rests on the surface before sinking back into

 Cook over low heat, stirring occasionally, for about 15 to 30 minutes.

 As a result, you may need to add more stock before using to get back to the right consistency.

 Once fully simmered and the consistency has been adjusted, season with salt and white

 White pepper is generally used as opposed to black pepper as its color blends into the

 The sauce can now be served as is or it can be enriched for added flavor and texture.

 For added body, you can simply swirl in a few knobs of butter or add a little bit of

 Veloute sauces can also be enriched with an egg yolk and cream mixture called a liaison.

 Combine 3 tablespoons of cream for every egg yolk and then temper into the sauce.

 Be sure the veloute doesn't come to a boil now as this will curdle the proteins in the

 Note if you are enriching the veloute with any of these ingredients, make sure to add

 Also note, if you plan to store the veloute in the refrigerator, make sure to store only

 the enriched base as an enriched sauce could split or curdle when reheated.

 Because veloute is a starch-based sauce, you will need to place plastic wrap directly on

 Once cooled and refrigerated, the veloute sauce will thicken considerably.

 To reheat the veloute, start with a small amount of water or white wine in a pot.

 Add the cold veloute, stir and bring back to a simmer before using.

 To change the flavor profile of a veloute sauce, many different aromatics can be used,

 Or you can give it an Asian twist by adding ingredients such as shallots, ginger, green

 The aromatics can be added either at the beginning with the butter or after the stock has been

 The advantage to adding these aromatics to the butter at the beginning is that the sweating

 Veloute sauce is one of the building blocks when creating many fabulous dishes, from pot

 Summer is just around the corner and it's time to break out your grills and time to

 My friend Larry from the Nature's Choice sent a few of us YouTubers a new box or kit of

 planks that he's now offering and they are meant just for burgers.

 He offers other planks that he sells for salmon and things and what not.

 You soak them for an hour and he's got other directions and recipes on here.

 As you can see there are 40 cedar planks just the size of a quarter pounder hamburger.

 The idea behind it is that when you place the burger on top, the smoke from the wood

 when it catches the sides, it penetrates the meat and gives it a better flavor.

 So we're going to go ahead and cook a couple burgers and we'll fire up the grill and we'll

 I'm preheating my grill to about 450 degrees Fahrenheit and the object of that is what

 we want to do is take your soaked planks smooth side down, place it on the grill.

 This is going to kill any bacteria that might be growing on the cedar plank.

 What we're going to cook today are some burgers, pastrami burgers.

 I love these things and thanks to my buddy Greg at Ballistic BBQ, he's the one that got

 We're going to put burgers on one plank and we're going to cook pastrami on the other

 The idea behind it is that the edges will start burning as you're cooking it.

 What you're going to do is you're going to notice that the smoke will wrap around the

 The convection that you get from cooking on the grill is going to do the work for you.

 Just make sure you have a bottle of water because sometimes the ends tend to catch on

 I'll go ahead and place them in the couch bar below and that way you guys can go to

 those videos that I've done with other foods using Larry's From Nature's Choice Cedar

 We'll go ahead and finish this up and we'll check back in a few minutes.

 Oftentimes when you're cooking you'll notice that the cedar will make popping sounds when

 Again periodically check just to make sure there are no flare ups.

 I was in such a hurry to get these on the grill I forgot to season them.

 I'm going to use my rub on here just to give it a little bit of flavor.

 As you can see it's flaring up so I'm going to grab my water bottle and we'll take care

 Now I'm just going to toast my buns and we're going to let this go for a couple minutes.

 I want to thank Larry from Nature's Choice for sending me this sample pack.

 Okay, today we'll be unboxing the iPhone 3G 16GB Black, sealed.

 So now what we're going to do, we are going to show you some activation, the activation

 So let's put everything back in the box and let's head over to the computer.

 And what I'm going to do, I'm going to put, as you can see, it's not, let's just pull

 Then we're going to take the phone, open it, take the SIM ejector tool, push it in.

 Remember, this is not activated now, so we're just waiting now.

 Okay, and it's asking us if we want mobile me, but we don't want to do that.

 Now we can go into the home screen and we have our applications.

 We should, and it's got Cita there, because we're staying in Cyprus.

 And then we're going to click not now, because we don't want mobile me.

 So we're going to say I have read and agreed to the terms of conditions of the iPhone software

 And then we're going to set it up as a new iPhone and we're going to call it legal iPhone

 And we're going to deselect all of them and we're going to click done.

 So that's unboxing of a brand new iPhone 3G 16 gigabyte and activating it.

 Be sure to subscribe, click the watermark up there or the subscribe button down there

 Hey guys, it's the end of October and in October we use any excuse we can to make pumpkin

 This time we're going to make pumpkin bread which is delicious, it's gluten free and that's

 It's also good for people that can who really probably shouldn't.

 I've preheated the oven to 400 degrees and basically I'm just going to tell you everything

 You want to have at least a 2 quart bowl, 2 to 4 quarts is best.

 That way you can really get in there and mix it up because you really need to mix these

 You want to have a spatula just to get all the ingredients out.

 Make sure you get everything because we've measured them perfectly.

 So the ingredients that you're going to need, you're going to want to have 5 eggs on hand.

 We use the cage free eggs, free roaming hens, they're healthier.

 And a teaspoon of baking soda, a teaspoon of vanilla, a quarter of a cup of honey.

 You can use a few drops of stevia if you'd like to replace the honey, it just cuts out

 We've got pumpkin puree, which if you can get the organic kind is great, but you definitely

 And this is coconut flour, we use that in place of regular wheat flour.

 A tablespoon and a half of cinnamon, oh it's a quarter, half a cup of the coconut flour.

 So it's really easy, you're just going to want to combine all the ingredients in your

 Measuring out the ingredients beforehand just makes it a little bit easier, quicker.

 So once you've got all your ingredients mixed in really well, you're going to want to spray

 Try and use an 8x8 pan, just because a regular loaf pan just doesn't work quite as well with

 So I took it out after 20 minutes and the toothpick really didn't come out clean.

 So I put it back in for 5 more minutes, took it back out after 4, it's perfect now.

 Now we just let it cool down for maybe 15-20 minutes and then you can top it with butter

 who asked me to produce a video on one of my patterns and today I'm going to be

 one for the border around the petals and then one for the rim on the outside

 white and black doesn't show up very well on camera so I'm going to be using

 to the color that we're going to be using for the petals of the flower so get that

 this as you can see is a split on the top, this is where you ended

 and then you just continue so what I'm going to do is show you how to

 but you have to keep in mind on the small when you're actually making the small

 you don't want to use this color, you're going to want to use the color that you use for the rim

 that way when you sew it all together it's not going to show up

 so basically I'm going to be showing you how to make them but when you start to make them

I want to show you on the ninth petal because it can be difficult to find

 stitch, you don't have to go through two of them, just get into one of them and slip stitch

 you would stop there and you don't need a tail for the small motif

 the big motif then you're going to have more than enough yarn to sew in

 ten of these little popcorns, so continue to do five double crochets

 and then turning it into a popcorn and chain two for the remainder of the eight

 by allfreecrochet.com and please stay tuned to the second part of this tutorial

 And it's Tip Tuesday on ShowMeTheCurry.com So today's tip is how to release glasses,

 It's just incredible, you know, you're trying to use all your muscle power to get them apart

 and that's really not a good idea because you can end up breaking them

 And even if it's not glass, because I know a lot of people use stainless steel cups

 This is our two glasses stuck together And what we're going to do is we've got a

 bowl of water over here Now it doesn't have to be a whole lot, just

 Now ideally you'd want a little larger bowl So water needs to at least be up to here

 So where the ice is kind of submerged in That way it works a little better

 So the science behind this whole thing is that the ice actually makes the inside glass

 contract a little bit and the warm water makes the outside glass expand a little bit

 And it should just loosen up So I think we'll just let it be for a minute

 or two and we'll come back Alright, so we're going to take our glasses

 Actually this worked out really good The two glasses were stuck and we just said

 So what a great idea and I know again, Hetal mentioned it happens to all of us

 So if you have a tip to share with us, please do so at tips at showmethecurry.com

 And join us again on another Tuesday for another tip on showmethecurry.com

In this case, this is a lick that I pluck with two different fingers here.

 one, two, three strings, with your first finger, and then take your third finger,

 and on the fourth string, fifth fret, that creates an A minor shape.

 this is all within the scale as well, the A minor pentatonic scale.

 with your third finger and your thumb, your third finger will be touching the first string,

 And so basically, here's a lick that fits within this framework.

 And you're always plucking that first string there, and you're sort of keeping this bar down,

 and you're basically moving this third finger from the fourth string, and then to the third string,

 and then taking your pinky and going to the fifth fret, or the, I'm sorry, the eighth fret,

 like this, coming back to the seventh, and back to the fifth, and back to the root, which is A.

 So here's the lick a little bit faster, and then I'll do it again slower for you.

 these three strings here, first, second, and third string on the fifth fret.

 my third finger is here on the fourth string, seventh fret, and then the next note that I play

 and then my third finger comes ahead of that to the seventh fret.

 My pinky comes and goes to the eighth fret, and then back to the seventh,

 Hi everyone, in this video I am going to show you how to make Arroz con Leche which is the

 usual breakfast drink in Mexico and sometimes in the night some people drink it with some

 I am going to turn on the heat and I am just going to add a stick of cinnamon.

 If you guys can find the cinnamon that looks like this that breaks into a million pieces

 There is some, here you can see it a little better, there is some cinnamon sticks that

 they are in one whole piece but they don't add, I actually personally don't like the

 flavor of that cinnamon and many times that I haven't find this cinnamon and use the other

 one a lot of people complain about the flavor so I don't know if it is like a Mexican thing

 or really that cinnamon is not good for making Arroz con Leche you know.

 So if you for some reason can't find this cinnamon I really suggest you avoid it and

 Ok but if you can't find the stick you just add one stick there and the other thing I

 You are going to tell me, probably you are going to say a quarter cup of rice that is

 not so much, well you are going to see at the very end when we finish how much one quarter

 So anyway there are some people that don't like too much rice in the drink like my husband.

 If you are that kind of people that don't like to have a lot of rice in the drink you

 I am going to remove this foam that is forming here and I am going to lower the heat to low

 So I am going to cover this and I am going to leave this here for about ten minutes.

 Ok it has been about ten minutes and as you can see now the rice has become fluffy.

 What I am going to do is that I am going to take out the cinnamon because it already finished

 Ok so now that I have taken the cinnamon, it is just optional you can leave it if you

 I am using regular milk, cow milk but most people that sell arroz con leche, I am saying

 And with evaporated milk you can use up to one liter, up to four cups of water for one

 They use that because it is cheaper to buy one can of evaporated milk than buying the

 But I don't like to use it because it adds like a weird flavor to the rice.

 Some people will use condensed milk and in Mexico it is known by lechera.

 You know lechera and they use lechera and that is how they sweeten the rice.

 And then I am going to set the heat on high again and I am going to cover it with the

 That is going to take about two or three minutes so don't go away from your stove because if

 the milk boils and you are not here, you are going to have a mess.

 Now when you see that the milk is going to boil, just turn it off or leave the heat on

 low right away because otherwise like I told you, you are going to have a mess.

 So I am just going to leave this on low for about let's say two more minutes and it is

 I already told you what are the different things you can use to make it different.

 Instead of cow milk, use evaporated milk and instead of sugar, use condensed milk.

 But you know, this is the way I like it because it has all natural ingredients so I like it

 to do the more natural as possible even though I didn't use brown sugar because I didn't

 But if I would have brown sugar, I would substitute it instead of the regular sugar.

 So after two more minutes, I am going to turn the heat off and I am going to serve

 So I am just going to serve it here in my Mexican pottery and this is it guys.

 Don't forget to, as always, don't forget to comment on the videos and in the description

 there is a link to my Facebook and Twitter accounts so that we can be in touch.

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to be making a gluten-free almond meal banana nut muffins.

 I'm going to be using Trader Joe's Just Almond Meal, this is a great product.

 Going to need baking soda, baking powder, salt, xanthan gum, vanilla, cinnamon, honey,

 I'm going to start off with a fork to help mash the bananas, then I'm going to switch

 In a large bowl, combine all the dry ingredients except the walnuts and mix them thoroughly.

 My bananas have all been mashed, I'm now going to add that to the almond mixture.

 The bananas have been mixed in, I'm now going to add three beaten eggs.

 The batter has been mixed, I'm now going to add some chopped walnuts and combine them

 I have my oven preheated to 350 degrees, I sprayed a muffin tin with some cooking spray,

 and I'm going to use an ice cream scoop to help measure out the muffins.

 I got 12 muffins and I had just a little bit left over, so rather than dirtying up a whole

 muffin tin, I'm just using a miniature rectangular ramekin dish, and it's going to bake about

 It took approximately 20 to 25 minutes to bake the muffins as well as the ramekin dish.

 I used my digital thermometer, when it reached an internal temperature of 205, they're done.

 The muffins came out of the muffin tins very easily, they smell wonderful.

 I'm going to let them cool for a little bit and I'll cut one in half so you can see what

 Here's the inside of the muffin, as you can tell it's very very soft and moist and it

 Hey everybody, this is the first of a continuing series that we're going to call Dragon Gym

 What we're going to try to do is address certain techniques, stretches, other things that concern

 One great stretch that we have is called the Cossack Stretch or the Long Stretch.

 This is really applicable whether you're going to do kettlebells, Taekwondo, Muay Thai, any

 type of martial arts, just your general health and fitness, this is a great stretch.

 There are a couple mistakes that we've been seeing when people practice this stretch.

 So first, Pat here is going to step away from the bar a little bit and just drop down into

 What we see a lot is that base foot, back foot, the heel comes up.

 When you do this stretch, number one, you've got to make sure that that heel is down.

 Right now, his shin, knee is vertical, knee is tracking the toes.

 Third, the long foot, the leg that's outstretched straight, the toes should be pointed up, hip

 Again, make sure your foot is externally rotated, toes pointing up.

 A lot of time we see people stretching and they're all hunched over like this.

 Use the bar as a counterbalance and lower yourself into it slowly.

 Then once you get the balance and the stretch flexibility, you can do it without the bar.

 OK, so here we are, we're back, we're going to look at the bread now.

 So here we have 2 kilos of bread dough, which is now about 40 pounds, because obviously I've added water to it.

 So pull that out, it's nice and sticky, very creamy and soft looking.

 First we need olive oil, olive oil inside here, around the sides and across the bottom.

 This one, cut the dough in half, cut the dough in half like that, pop that inside there.

 Using our knuckles, we force that down into a nice shape so it's flat and even and it rises evenly.

 Now we'll prick it all over with our fingers, make holes to help it through.

 Leave some holes in it, then we'll get the flour dredger, flour over the top.

 We're going to put it next to the stove here, it's quite warm here, but not too warm.

I thought I had a tutorial done of these, and I couldn't find it.

 So I'm just going to do another quick one because it was requested.

 I have two more to do, well actually three more to do, but this one I'm going to...

 But anyway, what you're going to need to make these accordion minis is you want a 12x12

 sheet of cardstock and you want to cut it in half so that you have two pieces of 6x12.

 And then you want to line it up on your scoreboard, and you're going to score it at 4 inches and 8 inches.

 And then you want to do the same thing to this one, up and back.

 And then you're going to need another piece that measures a little bit over 6 inches just

 And you want to line that up on your scoreboard and score at the half inch mark.

 And then you're going to add adhesive to both sides of the binder piece.

 Just make sure you get your adhesive as close as you want to the center, but do not put tape over the center.

 I'll try and get it up close for you guys so you can see what I mean about...

 So I put a really good amount of tape on each side, but I didn't get any adhesive in the center.

 And you want to open up your pieces, and when you put them together you want to make sure

 So when you line it up, you want to line it up right up to the score line.

 Just don't touch it or go over, because you've got to remember that it has to fold over.

 And then I basically just line this part up with the other piece and fold that down.

 And then that gave me a little leeway on this side, so I'm just going to trim that off.

 So when I matted my book, like I'm doing one now with the Goodwood stack from DCWV,

 But when I put my mats on, I always leave like 1, like an 1 8th of an inch border around the mats.

 So if you'd like to do it that way, measure your pieces 3 7 8ths by 5 7 8ths.

 And that will give you the 8th of an inch border all the way around.

 Some of them I just matted to the, um, sometimes it's easier to keep it folded when you mat them.

 But I made like little mats here and I used some of my spellbinders to do that.

 They measure like 2 1⁄2 by 3, or a little less, I think 2 3⁄4 by 2 1⁄2.

 And then I used like a spellbinder circle scallop to make a mat there, a corner pocket.

 You know, just play around with yours and see what you can come up with.

 You just need one sheet of 12 by 12 cardstock and one piece to bind them together.

 And then you're not going to see this binding here because you're going to mat over that.

 So first you got to fresh coconuts, you got to buy fresh coconut, then it is grated

 coconut is nice, not too small, not too big and then you going to put some sultana in

 and then fresh ginger, very fresh and then you going to put the green chillies which

 is fresh and then you put some sugar in, some garlic, this is the garlic, ready, then you

 can put some lemon in, fresh lemon and then you can put lot of coriander and then you

 can mix again, nicely, nicely you can put your fully positive thought, I always, whenever

 I cook anything, especially when I mix anything, I really enjoy myself, now is second stage

 for the patties, you got to boil the potatoes and then you got to proper right mash, mash

 the potato, buy like the yorkshite potatoes, yorkshite, yorkshite potato is really nice,

 now you going to put some ground flour, yeah, ground flour, you can put some plain flour,

 plain flour, so why we put the flour in, because they hold the potatoes, nicely hold it, so

 you can put the little bit salt and then you mix it, all dough you mix it nicely and then

 take the little dough and make like this flat and then you can put the little stuffing

 inside and then you can mix it nicely, you make sure all each gap you got to fill it

 up nicely with the patient, you can't be rushing when you are, especially when you

 cooking, when you do anything, you must enjoy and no rushing, if you rushing, always accident

 happen, then is all open in the oil and then you spoil everything, so you got to be very

 patient, you can see how I make it, I have no measurement or anything, all came to same

 size, why because I am really enjoying, now nicely, nicely you can put it, you don't have

 to rush, nicely, yeah, yeah, you always using the wooden spoon, so you don't break them,

 wooden spoon always not sticky, always, you can't go with that one, nicely, leave for

 How to make a wood staircase or wooden obstacle for fingerboarding.

 Mine ended up being the perfect length so I didn't need to do much cutting, but if you need to go ahead and do that.

 Also if your wood isn't smooth you might as well sand it just to polish it up before you glue it.

 The first thing I did was look at an obstacle I previously built.

 The dimensions were pretty much 2 inches separate for the length.

 For this build I wanted to test a taller staircase and how it would react to my fingerboarding skills so I opted for 4 pieces instead of 3.

 This was just a personal choice, you could make him have less or even more.

 Before the wood dries this is the perfect time to change the tiers.

 Once this has dried, you have successfully made a fingerboarding obstacle.

 As always, thank you guys so much for subscribing and watching this video.

 Let me know in the comments below if you want to see a sesh video.

I have a 2005 Lincoln LS and there's no videos on removal of the

 Harbor Freight or Walmart and you get it in here to a point where it lifts up and

 when it's time to put it back you want to make sure that they're put back properly.

So once you get that done you have a screw that is right here and here.

I usually work with electric tools but when I'm making videos I'm just gonna use regular tools.

 It really doesn't take that long to do anything that you really need to when it comes to radios.

 Okay once that's out then what you want to do is once you pry again you're gonna...okay hold on.

 Now people just to let you know that that one right there might just be a...okay it's 8 millimeter because of the way that Ford is.

You want to get those two out and then once you get those two then...

 After you put your gear back in you can actually take and pull your stereo out.

 If you haven't tried olive oil gelato with Maldon sea salt, you are missing out.

 Sugar, salt, and stabilizer go in, then whisk to incorporate all the ingredients.

 Get that pan over a medium-high flame and bring the mixture to a simmer.

 and then pour your tempered egg mixture back into the sauce pot.

 Now to finish your ice cream base, get that pot over a low to medium flame

 and stir the mixture constantly until it hits 185 degrees, which will take about five minutes.

 Now let's cool it off quickly, so pour it through a strainer into a bowl that's situated in an ice bath.

 Stir your base around until it's cooled off, and then whisk in that olive oil.

 Now transfer your olive oil gelato base to a container and chill it in your fridge for a few hours until it hits about 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

 Once that gelato base is cooled down, go ahead and take it out of the fridge and add it to your

 ice cream maker and spin it for about 20 minutes or until it's thickened up.

 Once your gelato is ready, transfer it back into a container and then drop it in the freezer for a few hours so that it can set up.

 Now when you're ready to serve that gelato, finish it off with a good drizzle of extra virgin olive oil

 and a little bit of maldon sea salt, which gives a great contrast between sweet and salty.

 Hi guys, today in the kitchen it is all about healthy eating because I am joined by a very

 You are the author of the brilliant The Extra Virgin Kitchen, a wonderful healthy eating

 I just like turning my pesky sugar cravings into a nutritional slam dunk.

 It's still got the sweetness but it comes from date syrup instead of white sugar and

 I want to walk you through the ingredients and share them with all your subscribers.

 Okay so first of all we're going to add some extra virgin coconut oil which like butter

 You can check it out in the box below if you want to check out the recipe.

 Maybe some sea salt because sea salt in chocolate is just alarmingly good.

 It is that wonderful mixture of saltiness with a little bit of sweetness.

 I'm going to add in some sweetener now and this is why I like a whole sweetener because

 it has extra minerals that white sugar and brown sugar just do not boast.

 So it's the bean smashed and before it's made into cocoa powder or any other chocolate confectionary

 It's not, because everyone thinks of chocolate and they think luscious sweetness but this

 is the raw ingredient and it does have that kind of bitter tone but kind of coffee-ish.

 And if you're looking for a boost of energy, it's got loads of B vitamins.

 And then sprinkle this on top and a bit more sea salt flakes, Donal, if you want to help

 But if you want, you can go to Middle Eastern stores and you'll get loads of date syrup for

 I mean, you see just all those ingredients being dumped into the pot and then being thrown

 I'm slightly scared that you're just wandering around my kitchen and pulling stuff out of

 I'm sure anyone who's watching would love to do the same thing.

 So it's creamy and fudgy like a toffee, but it's also got that sweet, salty kick as well.

 You're going to get about 30 or 40 portions from it, and it takes 60 seconds to make.

 It's rich and it's creamy, and I never thought you'd get the texture.

 It is in the box below, but it's also in Susan Jane's brilliant book, The Extra Virgin Kitchen.

 Give us a like and comment in the box below telling Susan Jane how brilliant her wonderful fudge is.

 Hello everyone, so today we're going to make a very quick omelette, three eggs.

 And as a filling we find a little bit of spring onion and some Emmental cheese.

 As you can see here, we have this headlight cracked open so we can install some halos.

 Now if you're doing this on your own car, what you want to do is you want to make sure you drill a hole in the back end of the headlight, just so you can feed the wires through.

 We'll go ahead and reseal that at the same time we're resealing the headlight.

 It's a black gasket maker that you can pick up at any local auto parts store.

 Now you want to make sure you have a nice bead of silicone just to make sure everything seals together and you don't have any air pockets.

 Now once you get the last bead of silicone put in place, you're going to want to take the factory headlight lens and reinstall it.

 At the same time, you're going to want to pull your wires through just to make sure you don't have any excess wire sticking in the headlight.

 Once you have your wires pulled through, go ahead and turn the headlight over.

 If your headlight has tabs, go ahead and make sure those are reinstalled in the proper place.

 If your headlight has bolts, go ahead and put those back in at the same time.

 Or to also help with the sealing process for those of you that have tabs, you can take a couple of vice grips and just put them in the corners.

 Now that we have the clamps in place, we're going to go ahead and leave the headlight for about an hour just to make sure the silicone seals.

 At the same time, we're also going to make sure all the holes we made for our wires are also sealed.

 Now here we have the finished product, a headlight that won't have any condensation during the worst of weather conditions.

 Hi, I'm Ed Kincaid and I have a great recipe for Grill Dome today.

 We're going to start out, we're going to do a little beer grilled pork chops.

 To make this marinade, just incorporate all four ingredients in a bowl, whisk it together.

 Once the sugar is incorporated pretty well, very simple step, we're just going to dump

 Seal it up and you want to make sure that you massage it in pretty good.

 Then you're just going to let that sit in the fridge for about 12 to 24 hours before

 While we let our chops marinate, we're going to go ahead and throw them on the grill dome

 We're going to go ahead and close it up and let them cook for a little bit.

 You want to make sure they get to an internal temperature of about 150 degrees.

 Usually 145 is good because they'll come up another 5 degrees while they set and they'll

 We have a little extra sauce too to baste them while they're cooking.

 Hi friends, today I am going to show you how to make fatafat chutney in just 2 minutes.

 And this chutney I am going to make with curry leaves and coriander.

 So to make this chutney we are going to take a pan and now we are going to dry roast some

 You can just take 1tbsp or 1tsp of black urad dal and this we are going to dry roast it

 Once this is you know slightly dry roasted you can just add some red chillies.

 You know as per how much spiciness you want you can add red chillies and little bit of

 I am adding just 2 pieces of tamarind and in this we are going to add the coriander.

 Just take 1 bunch of coriander and again we are going to saute this for a minute and then

 We are going to add tender curry leaves just like that in the blender.

 Once this is cooled down you know you can just transfer and grind it.

 You know either you can add water and blend this or you can just make a powder also.

 So today I am just going to add little bit of water and make this into like chutney.

 So friends just add enough water to make this into a nice paste.

 In between you can feel little bit of crunchiness from our urad dal.

 Once your oil is hot just add little bit of mustard seeds, some cumin seeds and some chana

 If you want you can add curry leaves but we made curry leaves chutney so I don't want

 You know my mouth is full of watery because I want to have this nice chutney with rice.

 So dear friends I am going to enjoy this nice chutney with rice.

 You can even have this with you know even dosa, phulka but this goes excellent with

 So please make it, share it with your friends and enjoy with your family.

 And the rest of the lessons for this, as well as thousands and thousands of other lessons that I've made over the past 6 or 7 years, are on my website,

 But it works on iPad, mobile devices, iPhone, Android, all that good stuff.

 Here's the intro of it, which is actually part of the chorus too.

 But there are some cool licks that we'll do in the chorus as well.

 As you listen to the song, the piano does a lot more than just this.

 You really need the left hand there to make the chord sound right.

 The left hand is C octave, B octave, A octave, and then a D octave.

 And you want to play the last two kind of staccato, space in between.

 So when you say short, sometimes people will shorten the value of the note.

 That means you can play more than just what I have written here with your left hand.

 But playing it just straight is a good way to start if you're a beginner.

 Sometimes I use weird fingerings because I'm at this severe left angle here to do the lesson.

 What I'm doing is I'm putting a low G in between each of these.

 So what I'm going to do on the left hand is just keep the G octave.

 Yes we are on the key of G and then we'll have some F sharps in there.

 I like the G octave up higher here because it's too heavy down here for me.

 All I'm doing is putting it in the gaps when the right hand is not playing.

 I don't have any other pianist who has played for a long time and just plays by ear.

 You just do what you feel like at the time and you feel differently every time you play it.

 And then you're just going to end it on a B, D, G, and left hand G, D.

 Same thing here, it's just a different inversion on the right hand.

 But if you've ever been trying to figure out a chord like that,

 The D is not really part of the chord, it's considered a pedal note.

 So you have the C chord with a line, and then the D underneath the line.

 side cup will be an indication that the cup and cone bottom bracket is serviceable.

 Turn the left hand cup on the adjustable cup and cone bottom bracket anti-clockwise.

 tool that locks a socket onto the fixed cup to turn it and various spanners that fit fixed

As a last resort you may need to partially strip the frame, clamp the cup in a vice

 So in this quick tip video we're going to show how to work with a kabocha pumpkin.

 The first thing I did is I cut this in half and you can see the seeds that are in here.

 And you can save the, the thing that's kind of cool is you can save the seeds if you want

 and then you know wash them out and then you can roast them and you can have pumpkin seeds.

 So that's one thing you can do to keep, or to make use of the whole, the whole pumpkin.

 Now what I like to do is I'll put the flat side down and I will cut just a little bit of the top off.

 If you're kind of new to this then what you might want to do is go ahead and cut it one more time.

 And I take these quarters here and a peeler and I just run my peeler down.

 One of the things I was having a discussion with some of the chefs the other day was you know to peel or not to peel.

 And that's sort of personal preference because some guys like to leave the skin on.

 And they feel that it gives it more texture, it gives it an earthy flavor and that's correct.

 But sometimes I want a more refined dish so I will go ahead and peel it.

 But it's also okay when you're doing this to have a little bit of the skin on.

 Because if you get most of it off then the little pieces shouldn't be a problem for you.

 But essentially I'm just going to keep going through here and working on this piece of pumpkin until I get all that skin off.

 Now if you run into a problem like this where you're having a hard time handling the piece now.

 Once you get the amount of skin off that you want you can go ahead and prep up your pumpkin however you need to do it for whatever the dish is going to be.

 Pretty quick and easy way to prep one of these pieces of kabocha pumpkin.

 So once you have your piece that's peeled then you can make adjustments.

 So once you have your piece that's peeled then you can make a judgment call as to how you want to cut it.

 You may use it whole like this and braise it or you might cut a wedge.

 In this case if I wanted to dice it I could cut a piece like that and trim it up here.

 So then I would take this piece here and I can cut it down one more time.

 So for more quick tips and recipes like this visit us at foodland.com.

 For my Normandy tarts, I've got 250 g of ready-made shortcrust pastry,

Obviously, if you don't like almonds or intolerant to nuts, you can leave the almonds out.

 Now we'll pop this into the oven at 200 degrees Celsius for about 25 minutes.

 This really is a fabulous tart that I can thoroughly recommend.

 we do have a video on how to do flat even count peyote stitch and that's

 when you are planning your piece of bead weaving, I have one here I already did

 the bead weaving isn't that flexible and the bracelet isn't going to bend

 this one here is about seven-eighths of an inch wide and this one

 I followed simple patterns on these ones and I gave them both a

 border edge just because I like the way it looks clean and finished on the edges

 you can give yourself a little bit of leeway if you want to really hold still

 your needle and go through the high bead on the opposite side there

 and go through the next high bead and you're just gonna go through all of the

 pull it really tight especially not for something that's only this wide

 you can go ahead and leave it loose until you get to the end and snug it up

 is that now you have everything connected except this very last pair of

 it'll go right to the middle and then you can decorate the rest however you want

 them hey I know how to make matki usal then he said aamchi mumbai ka matki usal

 woh toh matki usal nahi hai, khaana hai ek gavran matki usal kao so today i'm going to show

 first we're going to add our tempering ingredients mustard seeds when the

 mustard seeds start crackling add cumin seeds now add onions, crushed garlic and

 crushed ginger you know more of garlic and less of ginger, add pinch of salt and

 add curry leaves and chopped green chilli now add pinch of hing, add turmeric and

 now reduce the flame little bit you know whenever you add chilli powder, coriander

 powder or any of the spices powder into any oil preparation just make sure

 reduce the flame otherwise your spices will burn now add chilli powder you know

 this is red chilli powder I got it from Maharashtra and garam masala now add matki

 matki is nothing but these moth beans that have been sprouted and then mix it

 these are moth beans very small all you need to do is soak them for a day and

 the next day put it in a cloth and just tie them and you will have these sprouts

 ready in the next day now we can add water in this we want these beans to get

 cooked that should be enough and we can put the lid on and let it cook for

 around 15 minutes by the time they'll become soft once this matki, this gram

 gets cooked you know that is when this dish is almost ready then add some chopped

 tomatoes and coriander leaves in the Govran style what they do is they leave

 you know some of this moisture in the Mumbai style they make it little more

 dry in the village style they leave little bit of sauce because you know lot

 of times they want to eat it with rice or rice bakri or any kind of rotis you

 can take the sauce and just put it on the rice and wow you can relish it

 awesome in this matki usal we added onion, garlic, ginger and we did not add

 ah when you order Maharashtrian thali this has to be there in the thali

 Govran matki usal with your VahChef at vahrehvah.com but remember

 vahrehvah is all about inspiring others to cook so please post your recipes and

 cooking tips at vahrehvah.com so others can benefit from your great cooking

 In this video we are going to show you how we make our mushroom fried rice

 Vegetable oil and mixture of chopped onion and green pepper and red pepper

 second I am putting some coriander here finely chopped coriander

 and please kindly subscribe to my channel www.indianrestaurantcooking.com

 This dish simply involves some pink salmon, some heavy cream and a few peas.

 Then I'll add in the chopped garlic, the onions and we'll stir and saute these, I'd

 say for about two minutes, just until the onions become translucent.

 Now if you're a little on the health conscious side, you could probably get away with half

 The heavy cream just makes it a little bit more richer and thicker.

 What I've got here is some canned pink salmon that I've drained.

 So I'll just give this another stir until the salmon is well incorporated.

 Give it a quick stir and allow it to simmer, oh I'd say for an additional 5 minutes.

 Alright what we're going to do now is ladle this over some toast and you're ready to serve.

 And there you have it, our incredibly simple and delicious cream of salmon.

 And if you haven't already subscribed, remember to click the button and like our videos.

 This is best of the best stock pot you can have because this is double layered and it doesn't stick because even though it is stainless steel, it doesn't stick because the flame is not directly heating the cooking area.

There is actually in between there is an aluminum at the bottom.

So if you see this is a precision cutting lid for this stock pot.

So this is I am going to for every cup of rice you have to add 3 cups of water.

So we had 2 cups of rice so that means 6 and half cup of moong dal that is about 3 times of it is 1 and half.

It is fantastic to cook with iCook because it is a very very healthy way of cooking.

 So once you close this lid it is after sometime you will get that vital lock.

So it is not going to let the steam out or I mean it is going to recycle that steam to heat it.

So at this point you can save fuel by just keeping it in simmer.

 Okay, so I'm in Sham Shui Po right now, which is one of the underground mass

 transit railway, or MTR stations for short, and what we're doing right now is

 you don't really want to take a chance on people grabbing things.

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to take my card, put it on, and watch the value thing.

 It tells me how much value I have left, and just like that, I'm out of the turnstile.

 So, fairly easy, and transportation around here is fairly inexpensive.

 For an average trip, I can expect to pay anywhere from $0.03 to $0.07 Hong Kong dollars.

 I found that they have most things you're going to want as far as drinks, light snacks, even have sandwiches,

 The difference being instead of driving on the interstate everywhere, you just get in,

 you plug your cell phone in with your music, so you have your stereo,

 Right now, I'm getting ready to get on the escalator and go up.

 Generally, I found you want to stay on the right-hand side here, because if you don't want to walk up,

But if you get on the left-hand side, you're likely going to bolt over.

 It's a fairly hustle-bustle, fast-paced society, so you don't want to just stand in one place too long.

 Chinese, of course, have a saying that the nail that sticks up gets hammered down,

 Hey guys, this is RustlerVXL09 and today we're going to be doing the Slash 4x4's level 2

 Ok and right here we have our big bone center driveshaft and it's called big bone because

 Over here we have our out drives which will connect to each side of the driveshaft.

 Ok so the first part of taking off the front would be removing the screw going from the

 Ok and the first step would be taking off the front of the Slash.

 And the first thing we're going to do is remove the screw going from the servo arm

 Once that screw has been removed we can flip over the Slash and remove the four screws

 holding on the front which would be the two up here, one over here, and another one over

 Ok and with those four screws removed we can apply pressure to the front, press down on

 it, press down on the bottom, and it should slide right out along with the driveshaft.

 Ok so next we're going to remove the grub screw going to this out drive.

 Now we just need to pull out the grub screw and this should slide right off.

 So what I've heard is two washers go inside of each out drive so just push it in there

 You can get the driveshaft, push it in all the way, have it flat, and then get another

 Ok so now that all the O-rings have been added we're going to add a tab of grease to one

 Ok so now we're going to get the out drive we just greased up, place it on here so that

 I'm going to put a little dab of threadlocker on there so it doesn't back sway out.

 So we're just going to remove the one grub screw going in right there.

 Now we can grab the new one which would be the longer of the two.

 Having the side of the hole line up with the flat side of the slipper, get the grub screw

 So put it in through the hole that's going through the chassis.

 Ok so now all you got to do is get the drive shaft threads to align with the out drive

 Push together again until it locks into place just like it did.

 And once you have the drive shaft connected to the drive lines and everything is running

 Ok so we're going to put in the two screws up here and the two down here.

 Ok and once those four screws are in flip over the chassis one last time and connect

 If you have any questions at all be sure to leave it in the comments and I'll get back

 Alright guys, a lot of you have been asking about pre-weaving a lot of the crosses rather

 than just going one ahead and then pulling tension and then going one ahead and one ahead.

 As you can see I got one cross already tensioned and I had already pre-weaved this one.

 Now one of the things I do is I always leave one side with a long loop as you can see here.

 This side now when I keep going and pre-weaving you will see that the loop is a lot smaller.

 Just enough for me to be able to grab onto the string and pull it.

 And over here you will see I'll just leave a much smaller loop.

 And you got to leave the loop small enough where it doesn't get caught over here on the

 Because sometimes if you are swinging the racket around the string if you leave it too

 So you want to make it short enough where when you are swinging the racket it's not

 So I'm going to keep going and I'm going to pre-weave another string here.

 And I will keep going and of course as you can see I'm still fanning it.

 And then on this side now as you can see I got a long loop and I got small loops.

 Now from here on out all the crosses that I do the loops will be like this.

 Ok as you can see my end of the string is right here so I got as many crosses done as

 And as you can see all my loops are pretty short but long enough where I can grab the

 And as you can see here on my tension head they are not going to get stuck on the tension

 So now I'm going to start tensioning these and this is why you want the long loop over

 And now is the easy part you just go ahead and start tensioning all the strings.

 As you can see it's not too hard to fan it and pull the string through.

 And over here same thing keep fanning it pulling it nice and slow at a good pace pull it all

 And as you are pulling tension with this hand you are pushing the string so that it

 And tension and you keep going and then you keep going all the way until you are done

 and then you start all over and when you come back I will show you what happens when we

 Okay I got all my crosses tensioned as you can see and now I have a long piece of string

 again left and I'm going to do the exact same thing I'm going to pre-weave as many crosses

 as I can and remembering to leave enough space for the tension head on the first weave.

 So here I'm going to make sure that I leave enough string to reach the tension head.

 And then I'm going to come back this way and pre-weave all the crosses until I run out

 Hello guys and welcome to part one of the find any triangle program.

 I'm just going to be scrolling through it in this video so I'm not actually going to

 So first thing you need to do is you need to start a new program and name it FINDSTUF.

 So go ahead and do that and then once you've done that if you don't already have my clear

 and unclear programs in your calculator you're going to need to go to a video because we

 Alright now that you're done with that, alright we're going to get started.

 Right here this is just taking the inputs and turning it and storing it as a variable.

 So they put A and B and it's storing it as C. Then this is one side of the triangle that

 This is displaying the three sides of the triangle and these three texts here, here

 So that's the last leg or the last side of the triangle drawn out.

 And then pause so that the screen waits for you to hit enter and then it returns back

 The rest of these programs are going to be pretty much identical to that.

 EasyStrip Paint and Varnish Stripper is the safe eco option for indoor furniture refinishing.

 After only 20 minutes, softened varnish scrapes away quick and easy with EasyStrip.

 Use a plastic scraper or stainless steel scouring ball for wood furniture and always scrape with the grain.

 EasyStrip Cleans up with just water and is completely safe for your skin.

 Get great results like this with EasyStrip Professional Strength Paint and Varnish Stripper.

 Transform your old and damaged furniture into new treasures for your home.

 EasyStrip Paint and Varnish Professional Strength Stripper is the ultimate in performance and stands apart from competitors for safety.

 Visit EasyStrip.ca today for more great info on EasyStrip's brand of professional strength strippers and cleaners.

 And it's held in there by several of those plastic little nuts and one bolt.

 When you go and put the new filter back in there, fill it with fresh, clean fuel.

 Diesel engines, they don't like air or water in their fuel systems.

 After that, go ahead and cycle a few times and start the engine.

 You can see the difference between the old one and the new one.

 When installing this fuel filter, you want to fill it up with clean, fresh diesel fuel.

 And then after that, you just cycle the car by turning the key in the on position,

 You're just cycling, you're just letting the fuel pump build up fuel pressure.

 And just so you know, this right here is a drain plug if you wanted to drain it.

 Now you just have to put this car back on, which is really easy.

 And putting it on, remember, you just want to put it hand tight.

 If you've never done it before, just turn the key in the on position or the engine idle like it is now,

 and just hit the little set clear, which is right there at the end.

 And you just move this little dial up, push the button again, and you're done.

 And that concludes the fuel filter on the Chevy Cruze, the diesel version.

 at Vegan.com we're bringing you three very simple treat ideas that are vegan treats that

 you can bring to Halloween parties or if you're having your own Halloween party you can serve

 who makes YouTube videos and they were so cute I just had to veganize them.

 tuned to see how to make these adorable Mice Krispie treats which are especially perfect

 original Pillsbury Crescent Rolls which happen to be vegan and vegan hot dogs and you can

 over the internet but we're showing you that they are easy to make vegan.

 that we're going to be making are Orange Jack-O-Lanterns which is the most simple treat to make ever

 you're going to need a box of Rice Krispies, a bag of vegan marshmallows and three tablespoons

Go ahead and melt the butter on low and then add the entire bag or ten

 to take several minutes until it's completely smushy and melty like this.

 on top and smush it all together so it's well formed into a nice Rice Krispie treat block

 Take some vegan chocolate chips and melt it in a double broiler or in the microwave.

 chocolate into the corner and then create the shapes that you need.

 going to need are ears and stick those in the freezer for a little bit until they're

 completely hardened and then they'll be ready to use for the Mice Krispies.

 going to draw the face on these Mice Krispies so draw some whiskers, eyes, a nose and a

 little tail and then draw some on the top of the head where you can attach the frozen

 curl dough and just slice it into long thin strips and then wrap it around your veggie

You can use any type of veggie dog and you're probably going to need a few strips

 of dough for each wrapping and just make it look like a mummy and leave a little bit of

 that comes in the package, you're going to go ahead and pop them in the oven and just

 minutes or when they're golden brown so pull them out and they are looking fabulous, smelling

As you can see they have little spots where we can put the eyes.

 So take some yellow mustard and put it in a little plastic bag and cut off the tip to

 but it's so cute so it's something that I think everyone should do on Halloween.

 I love hearing from you guys and can't wait to read about your Halloweens.

 time I will see you later and as always you can find more bite-sized vegan videos, tips,

 recipes, reviews, guides and so much more information at vegan.com.

Oh and we just launched our newsletter so if you haven't subscribed you can check

 on over to vegan.com and put your email in and then you'll get our newsletter every Friday

The deck is now spread onto the table and the two jokers go onto

 of the pack and reappear in the middle, finding the selection in between.

The two jokers are going to help find the card in just a second.

 and then place it in a bowl and add 4 tablespoons of olive oil.

 Did you put some sort of like spicy sauce on them or something?

 How come people don't have pumpkin seeds more than just in the fall?

 I mean probably a little bit high in sodium but pretty healthy, right?

 They're kind of spicy so if you don't like spicy, skip the sriracha.

 This video will demonstrate the installation of a Headlight Armor or

 Headlight Protection Kit on a Volkswagen Golf R using our Clear Headlight

 squeegee, a spray bottle of straight water, a can-do attitude, a hairdryer,

 Once you have the inner corner aligned, mist it down with water and squeegee in

 Next take the kit, mist down the surface of the lens and the surface of the

 adhesive with water and align to the back corner of the headlight.

 perimeter and if you don't like where it's positioned simply lift it up and

 And once aligned you can go ahead and mist down the surface with water and

 squeegee from the inner corner to the far back corner along the high center

 line of the light, squeegeeing an additional track down the center to set

 edge of the kit and if it's cold out go ahead and warm the material with a

 Squeegee in short firm strokes a little at a time back and forth across the

 And if you leave a bubble in the process simply pull back the material, mist it

 down with water, realign and squeegee with firmer squeegee pressure.

 And with the top third of the kit secured go ahead and pull up the

 material at the bottom and mist it down with water on the adhesive side.

 little bit on the surface warm the material gently with the hairdryer.

 And squeegee from the center line toward the outside perimeter of the kit in

 short firm strokes back and forth across the kit until you have the entire kit

 the edge is secured and if you have any material hanging off an edge trim it

 Visit headlight armor.com for lighting protection kits for your specific

 As promised, today I'm doing a neutral look using my Naked palette.

 And with this look, I just threw my hair up in a ponytail and wore a really cozy hoodie.

 To start, I'm going to switch my primer for once and use Benefit's Stay Don't Stray Eyelid Primer.

 And I'm going to apply that in the crease of my eye and work my way upwards.

 I'm going to focus the shade on the inside of my eye as well, kind of reaching towards

 Once I'm happy with that, I'm going to take the shade Naked and I'm going to place it

 The one thing that I find is missing in the Naked palette is a creamy matte shade.

 So I'm going to cheat a little bit and use Wet n Wild's Single Eyeshadow in Roulette.

 And I'm going to place that on my brow bone and I'm going to clean up around my eye with

 Then I'm going to blend a little bit of Naked into Brûlée so the line isn't too harsh.

 Taking a flat fluffy brush and Sin, I'm going to apply that to the bottom half of my eyelid.

 And I want there to be a distinct difference between Sin and Buck above it.

 Taking Sidecar, I'm going to apply it to the bottom half outer edge of my eye.

 Now using a smaller shader brush, I'm going to take a little bit of Toasted and I'm going

 to apply it to the bottom part of my crease to give it a little bit of definition.

 And to deepen Toasted, I'm going to take a little bit of Hustle and I'm going to place

 For eyeliner, I want to stick with the Naked palette so I'm going to create my own by taking

 Spraying a little on an angled brush and then dipping it into Hustle and applying that very

 Now I'm going to apply a generous coat of my favorite mascara, L'Oreal's False Fiber Lashes.

 With a smaller crease brush, I'm taking a little bit of Virgin and I'm going to apply

 it in my tear ducts to open up my eye and give the whole look some glow.

 For blush, I'm using Wet N Wild Heather Silk and applying a little bit to my cheekbones

 And for the lips, first I'm going to moisturize them with the EOS lip balm in Sweet Mint.

 And then I'm going to use Maybelline's new Color Whisper Gloss Stick and this is in Oh

 They're very hydrating and there's so many pretty shades to choose from.

 Now this is optional but I'm going to use Smashbox Fusion Soft Lights in Baked Stardust.

 And because my eyes are nice and glowy, I want to add some glow to my cheekbones, nose

 This is a good look if you're just kind of chilling out, going to a movie, grabbing a

 bite to eat with a friend, or filming a video as I was that day.

 Don't forget to hit the subscribe button if you want to see more videos from me and I'll

 Alright so I'm going to show you how to change your cabin air filter on your Cadillac Escalade.

 The part number is CAF1707STBBRAND and it comes with two air filters.

 So when you get down here, there's one screw right here and another one on the bottom right

 This one is already missing so I'm going to take this one out only.

 Take this screw out, just peel it down and there's another screw right here.

 After that, once you get this cover off, the 7mm bolt right here, the cabin air filter

 Most people grab it by this end, but what you're supposed to do is open it at this end.

 Archaeologists actually found remnants of three sticks tied together with a little bit

 of food stuck on top in the ancient monkey burial grounds of East Timor.

 You tear the bottom of the cupcake off, put it on top, and create a cupcake sandwich.

 Most people use a knife, cut the green part off, and lose part of the strawberry.

 All you have to do is put the straw in the bottom center of the strawberry, push it through,

 And the best part is, you can fill it and have chocolate-filled strawberries.

 And if you're worried that something will ooze out, you just dip the top of the strawberry

 Simply the Ming is made possible by the generous support of Ocean Spray, All-Clad, and Contessa.

 it close to the skin because you don't want to lose it, but you've got to get all that

Mangoes, you can tell are ripe when they have this nice color like this.

Now let me show you a new funky thing to help you get the pith or

 Of course we have the seeds of the papaya, which you don't want to use, the caviar.

Quite commonly in Southeast Asia they'll just serve you a papaya

 half and the only thing they'll serve with it is some fresh juice of a lemon or lime.

I'll just put this right next to the mango and then a little bit of

 Hi guys, today I'm going to be showing you how to curl your hair with a straightener.

 And I did dye my hair back brown, so it kind of went a little bit of a tint of red, but

 And the straightener I've been using lately is this Krok Green Ion Straightener.

 I've used the same straightener for like two years and so I was excited to get a new one.

 This one is really neat because it's all kind of like digital... digitized?

 But I'm going to show you a really, really cool feature that most of you probably haven't

 So this is from ProHairTools.com and this green ion technology is super cool.

 You hit the power button once it's already on and it turns on the ion function.

 So you can use this as a normal straightener or turn this function on.

 It's not... well, it's not supposed to be as damaging as using just the regular flat iron

 I haven't really like tested that out scientifically, but from what I can tell, it makes my hair

 a lot softer and it's supposed to be good for color-treated hair.

 So what I like about curling your hair with this is the plates on the inside, they kind

 of like move back and forth with the way you move your straightener.

 I had a straightener like four years ago that I got from the mall.

 And you know the stands in the mall where they're like curling people's hair?

 Those straighteners have moving plates and it just makes it a lot easier to curl your

 And also when you get this, you get a either mat to set it on, which is cool if you don't

 I suggest with any straightener you have, find yourself a little stand or something

 like that so that way it doesn't burn your dresser and everything.

 Or you could also get this flat paddle comb, which actually feels like a head massage when

 I'm going to be using this heat protectant on my hair since I've been coloring it a lot

 Okay so what you want to do is take a small section of your hair and then you're going

 It'll usually roll like one and a half times before it gets kind of stuck and won't slide

 The more you twist it like this, the more you roll it, the curlier it's going to be.

 And this you want to go down pretty slow depending on how well your hair curls.

 And then I'll show you how to do the opposite side and then I'll go ahead and speed up this

 One side is probably going to be easier for you to do than the other side.

 It just takes practice just like anything else when it comes to your hair.

 So you're going to clamp it and then you want to roll it away from your face.

 So you might have to hold it a little funnier or just whatever kind of works for you.

 But it still works the same way and you still get a nice pretty curl.

 And then I clip the back part and I just kind of section it to both sides.

 Even if I'm using a wand for my hair, sometimes I just choose to use a straightener just to

 So I'm going to curl this a little bit differently than the rest.

 Just so it's not as like super curly but it still has some wave to it.

 And just get them to kind of curl into the rest of this hairstyle.

 So this is just an easy way to curl your hair if you don't have a curling iron or anything

 Alright so let me know if you guys like this video and I'll see you guys very very soon.

 Ciao, this is Daniel DiTurro and welcome to episode 14 where I'll be preparing bruschetta,

 a popular antipasto or appetizer found on many Italian restaurant menus.

 Bruschetta is simply toasted or grilled bread with a tomato or other topping.

 In this video, I'm going to prepare a tomato basil bruschetta that can be served as is

 or topped with fresh mozzarella to produce a mini antipasto pizza.

 Begin with a good quality bread sliced about quarter to a half inch thick.

 Artisan breads are closer in texture and quality to breads made in Italy.

 Try to avoid soft sliced sandwich bread and what's sold as French or Italian bread by

 For the topping, you'll need one medium tomato or two plum tomatoes, dried oregano, kosher

 The commercially available oregano on the left is made from chopped leaves and stems

 The oregano on the right is the crushed flowers from the oregano plant.

 You can use your oven's broiler, a toaster oven, a charcoal or gas grill, or a stove

 After the first side is toasted, you can remove the ends of a loaf of bread.

 Meanwhile, in a small to medium sized bowl, combine the diced tomato, a pinch of salt,

 oregano, chopped red onion, basil, and about a tablespoon of olive oil.

 Plate up the toasted bread and add a heaping teaspoon to tablespoon or two of the tomato

 For antipasto pizza, top each slice with a thin slice of mozzarella cheese and broil

 for three to five minutes or just until the mozzarella has melted.

 One tomato bruschetta has between 40 and 100 calories depending on the slice and thickness

 Our mini bruschetta pizzas have between 50 and 120 calories and 90 to 180 milligrams

 I actually used to eat the gluten crepes until I was a gluten free guy.

 So dad started making gluten free crepes and they're just as good but only better.

 So we have three quarters of a cup of potato starch flour, a quarter cup of sorghum flour,

 a quarter cup of flax meal, a quarter cup of almond meal, two thirds of a cup of tapioca

 flour and two tablespoons of sweet rice flour and two tablespoons of powdered sugar.

 And what I normally do is I divide it into three and then I mix it up as I go along.

 And what we're going to do is we're going to pour that in there until we have four and

 So now we've got the dry ingredients, a third of the total mix.

 We've got one egg, one cup of milk and a good amount of vanilla flavoring.

 And I'm going to take a little bit of the crepe batter and just pour it in here.

 So it's been cooking a little bit and we're just going to kind of peel it up here and

 Normally I would start a second crepe while I was preparing this one so I could prepare

 But what I've got here is a little strawberry jelly, one of my most favorites.

 Once it's all spread on there, I take this and flip it up over here like this.

 hey guys I'm back so in this video I'm going to show you how to draw a cartoon

 pig alright so I hope I can make this video as simple as possible okay so

 basically I want to start off by drawing this kind of cartoon chibi style pig

 so I'm going to draw a head first okay so if you've seen the thumbnail you know

 what this cartoon pig look like it's kind of different because it is more

 like have human characters on it okay so we I want to basically start off by

 drawing the head first okay so we're gonna draw a line up like this

 alright then we draw a few lines out to represent the structure and going to

 draw a line curve over alright then we draw a second one curve over okay and then we're

 gonna draw a I don't know we call it the front part of the head that's sticking

 out like that so this kind of look like a triangle shape alright okay now we're

 going to draw the pig ear that's sticking out when he is wearing the hat

 okay and then we're gonna draw his face alright so the face we're gonna be putting

 then we're gonna draw him two big smiles so smile eyes then we're gonna draw this character

 it's kind of important because you will saw what the pig look like

 this small look like pig so we just draw the nose okay so draw a big circle which will

 represent the nose it then make this part a little bit more darker okay

 detail alright then you draw two circles right here to represent the nose

 I will almost done since we're already finished drawing the head so we're gonna draw

 kind of side those things alright and then we're gonna draw his hands so that his

 hands will be putting on the back put it back and then we're gonna draw him

 okay and then we're going to draw the body so the I see all know he is kind of

 chubby alright so we're gonna draw a round shape okay then we curve down so this

 curve down part will represent the feet okay we do the same thing on the other

 side curve out then curve down okay so this down part will be the feet which is

 two knots okay two little triangles this part will represent the feet alright

 then we're gonna make a line to draw a circle okay so this will be the pig okay

 and then that's basically it for how to draw a cartoon pig okay thank you guys

 so much for watching and I'll be back with a new video as soon as possible

Today I'm going to show you how to make a very special Vietnamese sticky rice that has sausage,

 Rinse 4 cups of sweet rice in water 3 times and soak in cold water for 4 hours.

 I have 1 cup of Vietnamese ham, chả lò, 1 cup of Chinese sausage,

 1 cup of dry shrimp, 1 cup of chopped scallion, and 3 cloves of chopped garlic.

 After 15 minutes of steaming the sweet rice, you need to mix up the rice and then steam another 5 minutes.

 Lastly, add all the cooked ingredients into the rice and mix it well until the rice turns brown.

 After mixing it, you need to cover with the lid and steam another 5 minutes.

 I like to make this when I go on a road trip or go to the picnic.

 What do you call a potato that's reluctant to jump in the boiling water?

 Yeah, I saw you cutting melon online and I was like, what the hell?

 Well, I'll tell you what, how about I teach you how to cut a melon like a pro.

 And so the first thing you want to do is you want a cutting board that's not going to

 So what you do is you take a little wet rag, a little moisty, moisty rag and you put it

 You have my favorite knife so I'm going to give you my favorite knife.

 And it's so nice because otherwise, you know what I've seen people do is they cut wedges

 and then they peel each wedge and I'm just like, that's so laborious.

 Well, I never understood because you're cutting it with a knife.

 Well, I never understood because you go to the restaurants and they have these chunks

 And so yeah, you just do that and then you kind of like clean it up.

 Okay, so then I just cut it in half and then you scoop out the guts.

 Well, the other thing is though too is what you can do also is like let's say if you're

 You can be fancy and you can take something like this and you can do like a, you know,

 make a little pretty design or something like that and then you can stand that up by your

 fruit plate and people will be like, oh my God, how lovely that is.

 And so, yeah, this is really great too if you do it with watermelon because you have

 You can do all sorts of fancy things with it and people will be like, wow, what skills.

 When you use this method, it's the Mark Method, brought to you in part by melon.

 It's wonderful melons and now you can just, you know, put this out on a plate.

 And it seems like every time I do a melon video, I always have it cut.

 If your honeydew isn't ripe and you still want to eat it, add it to some curry sauce.

 Now there's a couple of valves that you need to be aware of on a water heater.

 That's this one up here located either on the top of the water heater, sometimes they'll

 The purpose of these is to prevent the water heater from becoming a rocket.

 So it needs to be able to open up if you have an over-pressurization situation inside the

 The way you do that is you just go ahead and you grab this, and this is kind of like the

 If it hasn't been turned in quite some time, good chance it may leak.

 But you go ahead, you grab this lever and you flip that up, you can see that you're

 Now if this continues to leak, you've been too long and you need to call a plumber to

 Now this tank drain valve is going to allow you to drain out the sludge and the dirt and

 You allow a few gallons of water to drain out, and then you go ahead and reseal that.

 Again, you're going to want to watch that and make sure that it seals up again.

 Hello everyone, this is the customer success team here at FeelID, and as part of our regular

 commitment to bringing you video unboxings and showing you the latest devices, we have

 Okay there it is, wrapped in plastic, and then here's the battery.

Nice big screen, plastic protection, I'll take it off for you guys.

 have, I can't remember the exact megapixels, I'd say somewhere around 3 megapixel camera

So here we have an 8 megapixel camera, you can also use it to scan barcodes.

 We can lift this up, there's a spot for a micro SD card, it comes with a 4 gig card.

 Just some other stuff, like some buttons here, USB slot, I think this area here is removable

Down at the bottom you have a little headphone jack, you have a little

 micro HDMI connector, and you also have your I.O.U dock, input output dock connector here.

 why don't we get the battery in, see what this thing looks like.

 not super rugged, I mean, you know, not sure how rugged you can make this, but still keep

Here's the power button on the back, we'll press it and hold it.

We have some, I guess, protocols here, so we can set it up, we can

 set up some programmable buttons here, some other Android keys here.

Oh, it just kind of vibrated, so we know it has vibration in it.

 this is kind of looks like, you know, your stock Android screen, so we'll go ahead and

 Let's see, if we can figure out how to scan a barcode here for you guys.

 maybe we won't be scanning our barcodes, we'll see what the camera looks like.

As soon as we have some more use out of it, we'll take a look, we'll play

 around with it and probably post up a review of it, an actual review of the device and

 As you can tell because of my last makeup look I literally named it like purple mauve

 I will have all the products I use listed below with the shades.

 Like comment subscribe, follow my Instagram which I will put somewhere on the screen right

 We're going to use this Dermablend smooth indulgence redness concealer and just put

 Using the Maybelline Fit Me matte and poreless foundation in 128 and a damp beauty blender.

 And I mentioned this in my last favorites video so here it is in action.

 And taking the MAC Pro Longwear concealer in NC25 we're going to use that as my highlighter.

 So I'm putting that on all the points on my face that I want to highlight.

 So my forehead, bridge, my nose, under my eyes, my cupid's bow, and my chin.

 We're just going to set that with the Too Faced candlelight powder.

 And then we're going to take the NYX conceal correct contour palette and the Becca concealer

 Using that same NYX palette we're just going to start our nose contour.

 And then we're going to set it using the NYX blush in taupe in a small blending brush.

 And then I'm going to use Stila's eye shadow in kitten as my highlighter.

 So I'm just going to put that on the tip of my nose, the bridge of my nose, my forehead,

 You can't really see what I'm doing with my eyebrows because of the angle, but I'm just

 going to fill them in using the Anastasia pomade in dark brown.

 And if you want a more in depth tutorial for my eyebrows just let me know.

 Taking the Anastasia contour kit in light medium I'm going to use this shade java to

 Taking that NYX blush in taupe and a smaller brush, this is when I'm going to really carve

 And then I'm taking kitten again and using that as my cheekbone highlight.

 And now we're getting into eyes, so I'm just going to use light and that's going to be

 And then I'm using makeup geek's creme brulee and I'm going to put that all over my crease.

 And then using NARS persia eye shadow which is my favorite eye shadow right now, I'm going

 to put that on the outer part of my crease and then the very inner part.

 We're going to try and avoid the center of our crease just so that we get more of a bright

 Taking light again, I'm just going to use my finger to swipe that on the eyebrow bone.

 And then we're going to go into the Lorac pro palette and use espresso and put that

 Taking nude from the same pro palette, we're going to put that on the inner portion of

 Using Rimmel scandalize in nude, we're going to line the waterline and I'm not totally

 attached to this liner, so if you have any recommendations that would be awesome.

 And then we're just going to line the top of our lashes and the underside with just

 Next we're going to take the L'Oreal telescopic mascara and just put it on our top and bottom

 To finish off the face, we're going to use the Dallas blush by Benefit and just put that

 Lastly we're going to use the Rimmel exaggerate lip liner in natural and MAC's lipstick in

 And it's super simple, I saw it on Pinterest and it's the original blog is from Growing

 And the 5 ingredients are a box of jumbo shells, 2 28 ounce cans of tomato sauce, a 32 ounce

 container of ricotta cheese, 2 cups of mozzarella cheese, and 1 egg.

 And I'm going to make this today and I'm really comparing it to, it's basically all the ingredients

 And I just thought it would be fun to see the difference in, you know, how it tastes,

 I don't think anything is going to compare to my baked ravioli.

 That was probably one of the best pins I've made, baked ravioli, or easiest.

 Check that out because I don't think any of these things can top baked ravioli.

 So this will be fun to try this and see how easy it is and see how it tastes.

 And it doesn't say this in the directions, but I'm going to put this in a Ziploc bag

 So here I made like a piping bag and I'm going to try that and see if that works for stuffing

 Because I didn't have enough, I didn't have as much mozzarella cheese as I should have.

 And then you put it at, then you bake at 350 degrees for 50 minutes.

 If it isn't quite done, remove the foil and return to the oven for another 5 minutes.

 If you don't have any origami kami as I'm using in this tutorial, you can use any other sheet and just cut a square.

 Let's get started and fold diagonally, edge to edge and corner to corner.

 So we fold the tip down so this and this length are about the same.

 As you can see the top bar is a little thick so I just refold it to make it look a little more neat.

 And if you want to learn more origami, click on the left hand side for the origami jumping frog.

 Or on the right hand side on the picture of the lily to learn how to fold that one.

Today I'm going to do another recipe for you in the old halogen oven here

 we're going to do is roast jackets okay and chicken in the halogen oven.

 under the tap, give them a scrub off if that's what you need to make sure

 there's nothing on there, no little bits of mud or root of potato.

 really important that you pierce them with the skewer otherwise they will

So I'm just going to pop them in there like that in the halogen.

 on them and just before the end of cooking time, I'm going to have to remove the foil in

 because it's, what it's heated it through, I'm going to check the potatoes and the

 skewer is going in but they're hard still in the middle so I know they're

But now at this point, I'm going to have the chicken to be cooked to a head of the jacket potatoes.

I want them to tie into the jacket potatoes and chicken is ready at the same time.

We'll take the lid off and we'll see how we get on with our skewer-ooey.

Okay if it comes out like that, there's no hard bits inside that potato.

Again you can put the skewer in there but you can see that is well, well done.

So if you want a nice quick easy dinner with no hassle, nothing much

 and I'm going to show you how to keep flavor at your fingertips

 there are a few requirements you need to meet in order to have the best

 The first thing you need to consider is the size of your container.

 This one's 12 inches in diameter, and I really don't want to go any smaller

 Don't put gravel in the bottom because that will oftentimes create a false bottom

 pooling water at the base and then rotting the roots from the bottom up.

 The next thing you want to think about is more of a personal choice

 So unless you're around to really be on top, just in case it dries out,

 you might want to go with a plastic container and finally go for your potting

 I just use a simple potting soil mix that I use to start my seeds

 it's more helpful for the plants to get their nutrients and also the moisture

 So I picked five of my favorites here and I'll tell you about them as I plant

 One thing you want to consider is planting the taller ones either in the middle

 or towards the back if you are going to keep the pot against the wall.

 So because you want to be able to see everything because they're just absolutely

 beautiful and you definitely want to be able to reach everything.

 I had to buy a new plant this year because I didn't get mine in before a freeze

 A lot of times people will use the stems as a skewer to impart that good kind of

 I watered it really well before I even got here and just plop her in.

 So I'm going to keep that one towards the back cause I'm going to push this

 Even if you're brand new to using herbs, you almost can't go wrong.

 The Italian parsley versus the curly parsley also has a better flavor.

 great in fresh salads, just really good way to go all the way around.

 I used to grow thousands of these for restaurants until I wised up and only

 And the nice thing with basil is it loves to be picked so you could just pluck

 I'll take the time out and plant it somewhere in the garden and mulch it over in

 A lot of times little herbs get lost in my garden because it's pretty much

 So when I'm cooking, I could just run out, take a few snips and it's ready to go.

 So I'm going to put this right here by the edge because I really want that to

 A good time release fertilizer is a really good way to go because then you don't

 you need to make sure they're fed every seven to 10 days because everything,

 all the nutrients are washing out because you're watering so frequently.

 I'm going to water in the evenings and sometimes in the mornings,

 you don't want to water in the evening because of mold and mildew problems and

 Sometimes it's going to be twice a day, but as long as you keep them watered,

 Keeping them in full sun and have a blast with them this summer.

 Recently I did a search on YouTube as well as some other places on the net and what I

 As many of you have seen, and I have done a tutorial video on things like the Elmsley

 count which is used to hide a card within a pack of cards and also the Biddle count

 which gives you the impression that there are more cards in your hand than there actually

 So what I figured I would do is go ahead and do a quick tutorial on that and I also have

 First of all, the frustration move is used to show your spectator that you have four

 The way you do that is by showing them the bottom card, sliding the pack to your hand,

 Make it look the same, that way it doesn't draw any kind of suspicion.

 Number two, when you show the card, after you pull it out of your hand, move your hand

 Now, another thing that's going to help you in making this more convincing is basically

 And the way I grip it is I put basically my index finger on top, I grip it in between

 my three fingers, pinky, ring, middle finger and my thumb and then I kind of just rest

 Now, as you can see by looking, the pack is pretty much covered and then of course my

 And then basically you go like this and then you slide off the top, pull it away, turn

 So by keeping your grip that way, making the moves consistent and just nice and smooth,

 you will give your spectator, you know, you will convince them that you have four of the

 Somebody used it in the trick Jumping Gemini, which this move is used in.

 And basically the way that works is you show the card you want to show four times.

 And basically you tip it forward while at the same time peeling off that top card with

 your thumb, resting it in your hand, flip it over to show it again.

 And try to keep the cards together as to not expose any cards underneath it.

 So at speed, that type of move there, you just basically hold it like this, tip it forward,

 I haven't done a trick using that move, I just recently picked that up, but I thought

 If you make the same moves all the time and use your hand as cover, it will help you to

 Holding it like this, you can't really see the cards that well as a spectator.

 They're really not that focused on what you're doing anyway as far as in your hand.

 The move is just so subtle, don't think about it, the move is just so subtle that it looks

 That is just a quick tutorial on the Flustration count and the second variation.

 Be sure to check out my channel, it has other card trick videos as well as deck reviews

 and different kind of tutorials and some other card related fun stuff.

 Once again, I do appreciate you watching, please rate, comment and subscribe.

 This time we're going to be learning the Big Shell, Little Shell pattern.

 My large shell is two double crochet, chain one, two double crochet.

 In the next one I make one double crochet, chain one, one double crochet.

 I'm making a large one, which is two double crochets, chain one, two double crochet.

 Skip two chains, and in my last one I'm making a small shell, which is one double crochet,

 Now I've turned, and what you want to do is work a small shell in the chain one space

 of the small shell, a large shell in the chain one space of the large shell.

 So you slip stitch over to it, and you chain four, that's my first double crochet plus

 So, you can see, small on top of small, large on top of large, and this is how you get this

 And I have an afghan pattern on my website, free pattern, stonishcrochetedesigns.com,

 it's under afghans, and it's probably still on the homepage, so give it a look.

 After you've created and confirmed your new account at BeersmithRecipes.com, the next

 If you haven't yet set up an account, you can click on the Register button at BeersmithRecipes.com

 I'm now going to go to the View ribbon and click on the Cloud folder to open up my Cloud

 Since I haven't logged into this machine before, it's going to ask me for my username and password,

 Once I log in, I'll be shown my Cloud folder, which is empty because this is a new account.

 So let's go back to the Local folders, which is My Recipes, where I have all my other recipes

 stored, and I'll show you how to store a recipe into the cloud.

 It's important to note that you do need to have an active internet connection to access

 your cloud folder, since your recipes are actually stored online.

 I'm going to store a copy of this recipe, Brad's Irish Stout, in the cloud.

 To do so, I simply right-click on the recipe and pick Copy to Cloud Folder.

 And now if I go over here to the cloud, you can see that the recipe, Brad's Irish Stout,

 Now one neat thing about being able to store recipes this way is if I log into my cloud

 account from another machine, say my laptop, I'll be able to view and edit all the recipes

 So this gives you an easy way to share and transfer recipes from one machine to another.

 You can even edit recipes in the cloud just by double-clicking on them, and the changes

 will also be synchronized once you save them to the other machine.

 By default, the program checks the cloud for new recipes every 12 minutes or so, but you

 can also click on the Sync button, the refresh button up here at the top, and it'll synchronize

 For example, if you find new recipes online, you may want to sync it.

 Another neat feature is that these same recipes are now available online from your BeersmithRecipes.com

 So you can log in from any web browser on your tablet, your PC, your phone, and view

 I'm going to bring up my web browser, and I am on the Beersmith Recipe Cloud site, and

 I've actually logged in under the same user, which is BeerTest.

 And if I click on My Recipes, you can see that my Irish Stout that I just uploaded is

 Now by default, all these recipes are private and only accessible to you when you log in.

 However, you can mark any recipe as shared using the Share button here.

 And now that it's shared, anyone can actually search for it, view, and download that recipe.

 You can also mark a recipe as shared from within the Beersmith program.

 So for example, if I go here, refresh it, you see it's now shared, and I want to make

 I can just click on the Shared Private button here, and I can change it from shared to private

 So it's very easy to change the status and publish a recipe online and share it with

 your friends, because once that thing's shared, anybody can log in and access that account

 You can do a whole lot more from the cloud, including downloading recipes, bookmarking,

 You can learn more about these features by going to BeersmithRecipes.com and clicking

 Alright, today I feel a little bit fruity yeah, so I'm going to cook myself a lemon tart, have a shower, come back down and we'll be good.

 Alright, so there we have it yeah, our dough is for the tart, so if I wrap this up, stick it in the fridge, we'll be right yeah.

 Alright, welcome back yeah, so I've got a bit of a problem, you see them lemons there, and that lemon there, it's not reaching up to two cups, so I guess I'll have to come to your shop, we'll go see what we can get there yeah.

 And after this is done, I just know it will just be wicked, you'll be laughing.

 So I've been door yeah, you can't really see, just give me a sec.

 So alright yeah, I've had the shower, look at all these lovely veggies, so here are my lemons, I'm just going to get some, it's only around five, do a trick.

 Get the hard ones, they're a lot cheaper, the soft ones at least, just get one more for good luck.

 Alright we're back yeah, so here's the pastry we're going to use, looks fine, it's sweet, it's just dandy.

 Alright so, we've got this water underneath this pot here, we're just going to simmer it yeah, so put two cups of lemon in.

 Alright so, to that we put around five parts of sugar, it really depends on like how sour the lemon is, so yeah, it's awesome, yeah.

 Four egg yolks and another four eggs and we mix for around ten minutes and we'll be right, so yeah, see you then.

 Yeah so we just finished it so, here it is, here's the thing we put in the cake, it's good doesn't it.

 Bit watery, I'm not sure what we're doing wrong but I think it should be right.

 So just put this cream in, cream in, put this cream in and we'll be laughing, Bob's Uncle yeah.

 Ooh that's just wicked yeah, you know, after it's ready we'll be laughing, we'll be Bob's Uncle, everything yeah, it's fucking awesome.

 Okay, so here's my brother Aaron who came to visit and help working on this

 clamped it there, he'll walk around and clamp, sorry about the sun, that stud.

 Alright so we have all these studs installed already but I just wanted to

 show the process that we've been doing since I haven't been able to detail the

And then you just want to put a healthy bead and little globs of

 it is okay because if it pushes out the edge that just means you did a good job

 and you can get rid of the excess when it pushes out like that.

 This was a little light so I'll do a little more here and that's probably more than enough.

 You can see I've got these two pieces of angle hardware installed on the board.

 And then I'll screw those in making sure that this stays flush to the surfaces I

 want it flush to which is basically my joist and this surface right here.

 want to clamp it if you're using construction adhesive or usually when

What we're working on now is cutting foam for these spaces in our new

For anybody that didn't know how to do that we had to take this one

Today is May the 6th, Sunday, about noon time, it's almost noon time.

 And Yeshita is preparing one of her favorite dishes, which is fried rice.

 I'm putting oil in the pan to fry the mushrooms and the green onions.

And this fried rice, is it an Indian recipe or a Chinese recipe?

And what ingredients besides mushroom and green onions do you use in there?

And could you give us some more idea on how to prepare this dish?

 First, wash... I would get... It says on the recipe to use six, but I use three.

 And three... I mean, it says three in the recipe, but I use two green onions.

And then after that, get the oil heated and add ingredients in it.

 So now you're going to put the mushrooms and the green onions in the frying pan.

Let's come on to this side so we can see how the onions and the mushroom is getting fried.

 Hey guys ParadoxesCubing here and this is finally the PLL tutorial.

 I got a lot of comments and people asking me to make this video already and I've been

 I've just been really busy with school work and stuff and I still have a lot of assignments

 to do but I'm still making this video for you guys because a lot of you asked for it.

 So PLL is the fourth step of the CFOP method and it looks like this.

 So right after you solve the yellow side you should get something like this.

 And this is the step which is called PLL which basically means switching around the positioning

 You're not changing the orientation you're just moving them around.

 So the yellow side stays solved and these pieces go to the spots that they need to go.

 So for example you can see that this green and yellow edge piece has to go here because

 So in a PLL algorithm you might see like an arrow going from one edge to another edge.

 So this is the T permutation where these two corners need to be switched and then these

 So there's a total of 21 PLL cases so that means that there are 21 PLL algorithms.

 And if you learn all PLL algorithms that means you'll be doing one look PLL which means

 But what I'm going to be teaching you is two look PLL which means you're going to have

 to learn only two algorithms but you can use those two algorithms to solve any PLL case.

 So let's say you're just solving F2L and then now F2L is completely done.

 Then you move on to OLL and once OLL is solved now you're on PLL.

 They're just two corners with the same color facing the same side.

 So you need to find a pair of headlights and match them up to the same color.

 So you put your headlights at the back and then you do this one algorithm which goes

 And now you'll notice that you have headlights all around the cube.

 So if you run into a case like this where you don't have any headlights around the cube

 then you can just do the algorithm on any face, any side you want and you'll get headlights.

 So then now we can move on to getting all headlights from here.

 So just keep doing this algorithm and now you'll notice that you have headlights all

 So now we have all the corners solved and the next step is to get all the edges solved.

 And to do that you put your one solved edge at the back and then do this algorithm.

 F2 and here it could be a U' or a U depending on if the edges need to go clockwise or counterclockwise.

 So what I mean by that is if you do a U, if these two edges don't match up that means

 So now it goes L, R', F2, R, L', and then since we did a U' before you do another U' again.

 You should have been able to do your first CFOP solve right there.

 So if you have a case like this where you don't have any solved edges to put at the

 back then you can just do that algorithm on any side and you'll get a solved edge.

 So you can put that at the back and then do the algorithm again.

 So if you get a case where you go like this and it's not and then they don't match up

 And once you memorize these two algorithms you'll be able to solve your cube.

 So for everyone who just learned how to do their first CFOP solves I'll be teaching you

 And so yeah guys I hope this video helped you and now you guys are all able to solve

 Hello everyone, welcome back to another great episode of Rehana's Cuisines.

 Today we're making pizza pepperoni rolls and they are super super easy and kids absolutely

 Let me go ahead and explain all the ingredients we're going to need.

 We're not going to have too many ingredients so that's why it's going to be really fun,

 So I have my, I bought the one that is 36, should be 36 rolls inside.

 Now in case if you don't get the Rhodes Dinner Rolls, if you can get pizza dough that would

 Otherwise you can, I do have a video on versatile dough that you can use for anything.

 I also have a tandoori roti that you can use the same dough recipe if you want to go all

 Now the package says 350 degrees but I usually go 375 just because my oven runs a little

 I think you should be okay with between 375 and I've also baked these at 400 when I have

 We're going to need some, I have here cheese that is the Mexican style but really you can

 This one really is really good because it's got the Monterey Jack and you know it's got

 I have beef pepperoni here and what I did with this was I kind of put them in a shallow

 pan and I just pan fried it to the point where I got some of the fat out of it.

 And the reason why I did that is just because I don't like the amount of fat that is in

 You can completely skip this if you don't want to do this but I just did it because

 And then when I also put it in my paper towels I want to show you this is all that fat that

 So that's the reason I kind of pan fried it and tried to take out as much grease out of

 And then here I have got some jalapeno slices and that's about it.

 Now if you wanted to go ahead and change it up by putting mushrooms and stuff in it, it's

 But these are just some of the ingredients that my kids love and so I thought you know

 But what you could do is when they are baked you know you can use the pizza sauce or tomato

 ragout, pasta sauce or whatever as a dipping sauce for the buns.

 I have one egg here that I've beaten up that we're going to use to put on top of our rolls

 And also very very optional I'm going to be sprinkling them with oregano.

 So basically these are amazing because they come pre-rolled in like small tiny balls here

 which is really perfect because they're so individual and you know you can do so much

 So the days when you know you just don't have much time and you just kind of want to make

 a quick something quick for the kids snack this would be perfect.

 So then what I did was I take one pepperoni put that on the bottom and then I add a jalapeno

 on top of that and then I add another pepperoni on top of that and then just when I take some

 cheese just put it on top and then just roll it up just like this.

 And these are great because I usually bake them and then freeze them.

 And when the kids want they can just take it out and put it in the small toaster oven

 if they like or you know put it in the microwave but usually I like them to put it in the toaster

 oven so they become really nice and they don't become soggy at all.

 And this bag was around $4 about $4.30 I think and then I think if you buy you usually get

 So for $4 I mean I think it's a pretty good deal if you're running on a tight schedule.

 So basically what I'm going to do is I'm going to finish these up.

 We're going to come back because I want these to puff up and once they puff up we're going

 to go ahead and put the egg wash on there, sprinkle the oregano leaves and then stick

 So we're back here, excuse me, we got these out of the oven and they look amazing.

 We also sprinkled them with a little bit of oregano on top and we brushed it off with

 They're really nice and soft and I'm not very much of a pepperoni person so I'm going to

 Okay so we got the dipping sauce and this is what I was going to say that you can serve

 They've got the jalapeno in there and then the cheese and the pepperoni and then the

 Do you like it with the sauce or do you like it without the sauce?

 Get your kids in the kitchen and start cooking with them this summer.

 Thank you for joining me on this episode of Rihanna's Cuisines.

 Alright, it is Roger with iGadgetGeek and I have another First Impressions unboxing

 Now this phone will go on sale the 4th of March or March 4th, 2012 and it will retail

 Now this phone does come equipped with a 5 megapixel rear camera that does record in

 You can also increase that storage through a micro SD card slot up to an additional 32

 Now this is a Super AMOLED display at 3.7 inches with 480 by 800 pixels.

 It would be pretty cool if this is the retail packaging but this may be the media packaging

 But it kind of comes in this waterproof case with this little thing here and it talks about

 how this whole case and everything in it is made from recycled materials.

 Let's go ahead and pop this open and take a look at the phone itself.

 Now it also comes with the battery and it is a 1650 milliamp hour battery.

 Now with this it does have a 1.4 gigahertz Scorpion processor so that should help it

 Of course you get your USB power outlet here that you can plug into the wall and has a

 And then of course you get a standard USB to micro USB sync and charge cable.

 Let's go ahead and get this battery out of its packaging and we'll take a look around

 Let's go ahead and pull this sticker off and we'll take a look around at the phone.

 Now on the very back it does give you some instructions on how to remove this watertight

 Shows you to take a coin into this little keyhole here and you want to rotate it and

 You can see the battery door itself has a seal on it to create a watertight environment

 that allows you to take this phone and place it and submerge it without worrying about

 So let's go ahead and get our SIM card popped in and the battery.

 Let's go ahead and get the battery slid in here and we'll get this back battery cover

 Now this battery cover does just snap into place and then you use that coin again to

 And while this is booting up we'll go ahead and take a look around at the phone.

 All right now while that boots up let's take a look around here at the very bottom.

 So when that is in place and closed it creates a watertight seal.

 On the right hand side you have your on and off sleep and wake button.

 This whole exterior of the phone kind of has kind of a rubbery texture to it.

 And you can feel the rubber cover over that button but it is still very responsive.

 Now on the very top you have another port that is your headphone jack.

 So once you pull this little port out you're able to use your headphones.

 And there again with that installed it does create a watertight seal.

 Now on the very back of course you have your rear speaker, your 5 megapixel camera, and

 And your main mic is right down there by your sync and charge port.

 The 480 by 800 at 3.7 inches does give you quite a few pixels per inch.

 So it does have a very nice pretty display being the AMOLED display.

 So you can see we have what looks to be kind of the newer version of the TouchWiz overlay.

 And with that single core processor I'm not noticing really any issues of lag.

 So we should be able to if we come up here to applications, unknown sources, we can install

 those so you can use secondary app sources without any problems.

 Alright that has been my quick first impressions video of the new Samsung Rugby Sport.

 It goes on sale March 4th, 2012 for $99 with a 2 year contract.

 And it is one of their new 4G devices running on the HSPA Plus network.

 That is a really good dip that you can serve with tostita chips or pita chips or just pita bread.

 To make this dip, these are the ingredients that you're going to need.

 You'll need sliced mushrooms, coarsely chopped spinach, a garlic clove that you've chopped,

 To start this recipe, the first thing I'm going to do is put my cheeses in a mixing bowl

 And then what we'll do with this is we're going to go ahead and set this aside.

 And then we're going to take these ingredients over to the stove and saute them.

 I'm melting my butter in the saute pan, and as soon as it's melted, I'm going to add my vegetables.

 Okay, my butter's melted, so the first thing I'm going to put in is my mushrooms.

 And we're going to just saute these until they're nice and soft,

 Okay, so now my mushrooms are looking good, so I'm going to add my chopped spinach.

 And I'm going to continue to just saute this until the spinach is wilted.

 Okay, so my vegetables are sauteed, so now I'm going to go back over to my casserole dish.

 Okay, so now I'm going to go back over to my cheeses and finish this up.

 And now we're ready to put it in our oven at 350 degrees for about 10 minutes.

 It cooked for about 10 minutes, and this is what it looks like.

 And this is what it looks like on a plate with the tostita chips all around it.

It's perfect after you've had a really long workout or in the summer heat.

So let's get started with the smoothie and I'll see you guys in a bit.

 And remember with raw food, you can be as creative as you like.

I mean there really is no limit to what you can do with your smoothies.

 Sarah from Average Betty here and I'm making trick and treat black bean avocado soup.

 If you think the trick is the avocado spiderweb on top and the treat is the delicious soup,

 Don't get me wrong, the avocado spiderweb is pretty tricky, but the real trick is all

 And this one I'm going to chop into bite-sized pieces, about the size of croutons.

 Make yours as elaborate as you like, just be sure to get it nice and smooth.

 The smoother your avocado, the easier to draw the spiderweb when you are piping it out of

 Into a soup pot, I've got some carrots, onion, celery, jalapeno, and red bell pepper.

 Cook and stir this a few minutes more and here's some chicken broth.

 If you want this to be vegetarian, use vegetable broth and omit the Canadian bacon.

 You could also just use tomato sauce or tomato paste and a little water.

 Bring to a gentle boil, cover, and cook until the vegetables are cooked through.

 Get that stirred together and as the spinach begins to wilt, here's the black beans.

 Back into the soup pot, bring to temperature, and here are some whole black beans.

 Some chopped tomato and that creamy chopped California avocado.

 Get the trick and treat black bean avocado soup recipe at AverageBetty.com.

 It doesn't need to be Halloween to treat yourself to my black bean avocado soup.

 Alright, so today it's not really a baking video like my normal ones are, but we are

 So we got two live lobsters, figured we'd make a video to show how to prepare and cook

 Each of these are just over a pound, so they're going to be cooking for between 5 and a half

 I'll put up other times based off of weight in the description below.

 You don't double cooking time though, I'm going to be cooking two at a time, but you

 Like even the two, they will still cook for 5 and a half to 6 minutes, just as if you

 They've been in the refrigerator for a little while, that will help kind of slow their metabolism

 That way their nerves aren't quite as ready, I guess, to receive signals when they go into

 If you are kind of squeamish about this, just keep in mind, the closest relative to this

 So if you don't feel bad stepping on a cockroach, you shouldn't feel bad doing this.

 They'll be gone in a matter of seconds when they go into the water, and there's really,

 there's no worries about them feeling any pain or anything like that.

 But I have put them in the refrigerator just to slow their metabolism down.

 One, it makes them a little bit less active, which makes them easier to handle.

 And two, like I said, it slows their metabolism and their nerves down a little bit, so any

 pain for just a split second that they would feel, they don't really feel anymore at all.

 I just, I'm a little bit nervous that there might be a little bit of chemical leak out

 If you want to leave them on for safety's sake, if you don't feel quite comfortable

 I make it taste like ocean water, because this is basically the only way you're going

 If you'd like to put a little Old Bay seasoning or something like that in there, that's perfectly

 And so what we're going to do is grab the lobster right by the tail.

 Actually, this one's a little bit heavier, so I'll put him in first.

 Grab him by the tail and what you're going to do is you're going to place him in head

 first and then I'm going to clamp the lid on for about 10 seconds and after you count

 You do want to place him in, like I said, head first like this.

 One, his head goes in first, which means the tiny little bit of nerve cells that they

 Secondly, in case he decides to flip his tail, which is a muscular response, he's splashing

 Like I said, he's a little bit bigger, so he needs a little bit more cooking time.

 Like I said, they have very little primitive brains, did not feel anything and even if

 there was a potential for him to feel something within 10 seconds, he's no more.

 So now that he's in there, I'm going to go ahead and put my second one in.

 He's a little bit smaller, needs a little bit less cooking time.

 In, and one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten.

 Now I'm going to get my tongs and just push him down, make sure that they're both completely

 Alright, and then I'm going to put on my lid, let them cook for about five and a half to

 six minutes and then we'll come back and show you what they should look like once they come

 One way to test that is if you pull on the antenna here and it comes out fairly easily

 Just to let some of that excess hot water drain off before we put them on a plate or

 anything like that because there will be hot water stuck in the shell at the different

 It will hold on to hot water so I normally let them drain for about three to four minutes.

 Make sure that all the hot water is off or at least it's cooled down enough that when

 you go to crack them open, if it sprays in your face, you know, you're not burning yourself.

 So hope that you make some and enjoy these yourself and thank you very much for watching.

 Congratulations, you have become the proud owner of a Cheryl Ann Design Wall.

 Whether you have received a large 72 inch size in either white or gray, the medium 54

 inch size or the tabletop 36 inch size, you will love its versatility and usefulness.

 Laying out intricate patterns or alternate designs and quilt block placements on your

 personal design wall to ensure proper placement has never been easier or more fun.

 The free standing walls take up a minimum amount of floor space when in use and collapse

 to fit in a nylon carrying bag for convenient portability and storage.

 The assembly of the design wall in 10 easy steps is very simple and straightforward.

 You should have 8 tent poles, 6 molded clips, 4 molded corners, 2 rubber feet, 2 stabilizer

 bars with a clip on each end and 1 cotton flannel piece of the desired size and color.

 Third, assemble all 8 tent poles by holding one end and letting the other end fall toward

 The interior rubber shock cord will pull the pole pieces into place.

 Fourth, slide one assembled pole into each of the 4 sleeves sewn on the outside edges

 Fifth, attach one of the 4 molded corner pieces to each of the 4 corners by sliding the poles

 Attaching the fourth corner piece should stretch the flannel slightly.

 Sixth, take 2 remaining poles and slip a clip on both ends of each pole.

 Then lay the 2 poles across the flannel at right angles to each other.

 Connect the clips to the outside frame poles near the center of each side by fastening

 On the large 72-inch design walls, take care to fasten the clips immediately above or below

 Fastening these cross braces in place ensures a taut piece of flannel.

 Seventh, take the 2 remaining tent poles and make legs of them by placing a rubber foot

 To ensure a snug fitting so the clip remains in place, we recommend you wrap a piece of

 Eighth, fasten the assembled legs near the ends of the top rail of the design wall by

 Ninth, attach one end clip of a stabilizer bar near the bottom of each leg.

 Fasten the other end clip to the bottom rail pole near the corner of the wall, thereby

 holding the bottom of the leg approximately 17 inches from the bottom of the design wall.

 Static electricity and gravity do the job for you and neither of them will ever wear out.

 To disassemble the wall for storage or transporting, simply reverse the assembly order and replace

 Should you ever desire to wash the flannel, we recommend using cold water and then drying

 the amounts of ingredients you need in the bottom of the video.

So when you put the gelatin into the cold water, you have to continue to move your

 three quarters of a cup of sugar, about a pinch of salt, and that's an eighth of a teaspoon,

Now, I'm adding a quarter cup of corn syrup, and this is light corn syrup.

 we bloomed, I'm going to put that into a microwave-safe bowl, and then I'm going to

 melt it in the microwave until it's completely melted, and then I'm going to pour it back into

So now, the pot is hot, and I'm going to turn the heat down, the flame down to medium.

 And we're going to throw the gelatin in the microwave, but you have to do it quick because

 this hits temperature very quickly, so you do have to watch it.

 gelatin into the stand mixer, and I've added the remaining quarter cup of corn syrup to this,

 and now my corn syrup and sugar that's on the stove is at 240 degrees.

 Now you see that it's starting to kind of whip up, and it's white, but not quite very white yet,

 but as we continue to whip this and add more air into this, this will get even whiter.

 So now this is on medium, so we're going to turn this on medium high,

 and we're going to allow this to whip for another five minutes.

 we're going to add two teaspoons of vanilla extract, or if you're going to make peppermint

 marshmallows, then add peppermint extract or whatever flavor you choose.

 this on the highest speed now, and this is going to go for about another three minutes or so.

 I'm going to start off on low, just so my vanilla doesn't splash out, and then I'm going to go to

It's going to nearly triple in volume, and it's going to become extremely opaque white.

 lift up the head of the machine, scrape off this marshmallow off of the whisk.

 And now we're going to take the marshmallow, scrape it out of your

 and just use your offset spatula to spread this out into the corners of the pan.

 Now you're going to need a sifter, and just, um, just put on about a third a cup of powdered sugar.

 And I'm just going to tap the pan, just to make sure this is evenly coated across the top.

 Now you're going to have to let this sit out for at least six hours, uncovered, to allow this to dry.

 Okay, I did a little test to make sure the marshmallows are fine for me to cut, so here it is.

 And if you grease your pan properly, it should just lift right out, no problem.

 And I'm going to dump off all the excess powdered sugar before I put it onto my cutting board.

 have to separate them, because they're going to be kind of sticky.

So here in the pan that I have the excess, um, powdered sugar in that I dumped off, I'm just

 taking the marshmallows and I'm just rolling them around in that powdered sugar.

 And you can use these as you would, you know, store-bought marshmallows.

 You can store these in an airtight container, and these will last for one month.

 Here we are at Charming Charlie's and one of the things that a lot of women have is

 And I don't know about you, but I have a really hard time getting rid of things that are beautiful.

 And so today we're going to take all this broken jewelry, there's necklaces and earrings

 and rings, and we're going to make this beautiful broken jewelry official.

 But you can use any letter you want, any shape, size, and even color.

 For this one, I wanted to accent more of the silver jewelry, so I painted the base of the

 For this project, it's going to be all gold, pearls, and blacks.

 And tin snips are perfect because they work as pliers and as metal cutters.

 And as we go through this, we just kind of get an idea of what we love and what we want

 And this necklace is actually really perfect for a project like this because it has just

 So what we can do is just take our tin snips and cut these apart.

 So basically I'm just kind of getting a layout of how I want everything to look like.

 And one of the ideas is you really want to take great use of all of this space.

 So as you're deconstructing your jewelry, like here is that broken rhinestone necklace

 You're actually going to want to use those individual rhinestones to cover up any holes

 And we can just kind of place those around and then we'll fill them in where we need

 This project has a lot of flowers in it, but you can do it really in any style.

 As you're going along and creating your broken jewelry initial, there are some pieces that

 So one of the things you can do is take a pearl and put it inside to fix the jewelry

 So what we're going to do is just take our glue gun and put a little bit of glue inside

 Here's another ring that is missing something in the middle and we're going to do the exact

 So we're just going to go ahead and add a pearl in the middle of it.

 And that way we take something old and make it work for this project.

 Chef Franz Koffler here and today we're going to talk about the difference between imported

 Now we've already made our chicken marsala dish and I showed you how nice and rich and

 So today we're going to be looking at a domestic marsala, this is Krobari, and we're going

 What we're going to do is we're going to crack open the bottles.

 Now marsala is made with three grapes, grillo, carrarato, and enzolia.

 Now to my knowledge these grapes don't exist in the United States, so how anybody from

 I'm going to pour an equal amount of the Lombardo marsala from the town of Marsala, Sicily.

 And you're going to see, you don't have to smell the difference, you don't have to taste

 the difference, although there is a huge difference in taste and smell, you can see the difference.

 Hi everyone, tonight I want to show you how to make sweet and sour chicken.

 I think this sweet and sour chicken is popular with a lot of people.

 You can use the same kind of method to make sweet and sour pork or sweet and sour any you like.

 For the ingredients, I will have some green pepper and onion and carrot for color and celery.

 And the chicken I use the breast, it's a two big piece of breast.

 And for the spices, today I think we just need to make the sauce for this sweet and sour.

 So remember that, two tablespoons water and the other one tablespoon.

 And here I have some pineapple, I just squash them, juice coming out.

 Here is one tablespoon tapioca powder and one tablespoon corn flour.

 I just mix up, put them in the chicken and have a little bit massage it.

 Because today we want the chicken more softy, so we don't use too much fire, it's about middle.

 You got to make this green go over the oil, it's called the guo you.

 Now you just use the same pan and put the spring onion and the garlic in.

 This sugar, this sweet and this color, we don't put any not natural thing in and it taste good.

 Thank you for watching TaiwanDuckTV and send the ingredients to allandtaewan.com.

 Miso is one of those really hot flavors that you find in trendy restaurants these days.

 It's Japanese soybean paste and it's a very versatile ingredient.

 We've got a marinade here, a very simple marinade and a very easy glaze.

 It's very easy to move in and out of the refrigerator and then clean up of course is

 And then this is going to go into the refrigerator for about 30 minutes.

 I've got a baking sheet here that I've lined with a little bit of foil.

 Now this is going to go under the broiler for five minutes and then we're going to flip

 it over, put it back in for about two minutes and then take it out before it's just finished

 Now while that's in the oven, what we're going to do is work on the glaze.

 I'm going to take just a couple of forks here and we're just going to pull the flesh apart

 There's just a little bit of pink tinge to it, that raw pink color.

 So you're going to put the glaze on and then this will go back into the oven for about

 And you want to make sure that it stays in there until the miso is nice and warm through

 And because things go very fast under the broiler, make sure to check on it frequently.

 So I just took the fish out of the oven and we're ready to eat now.

 For more recipes and ideas on your smartphone, go to SpecialFork.com.

 This is a tutorial on how to solve the Rubik's Cube beginner's fashion.

 Now I'll be going through just about all the situations so there shouldn't be any confusion.

 The special thing about the cross is the adjacent colors to the edges that you're solving for

 Now I can't stress enough that these corners don't matter as long as you have this cross.

 But this first step is the cross so if you have 1, 2, 3, 4, or none solved that's good.

 Once you solve that 1 check the adjacent color to the one you just solved.

 And then hold the top and turn the bottom two layers until they match.

 Now to do that you just do what you did here except in a little different fashion.

 There are 6 different situations, excuse me 8 different situations.

 Turn the top two until you connect and then turn that side, I mean the side that it's on, twice to bring it up to the top.

 Now when doing this don't turn the top because that will mess up what you already have.

 And once it's on the bottom do just like you did with the green one.

 Now again, remember we're not worrying about the corners so we can bring this one out.

 Since it's stuck in between these two we have to bring it out of there because if not we can't do anything with it.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to move this one out of the way just for a minute and then put it back.

 And then we're going to move it away from this side that we just moved.

 It's on the bottom so turn the top two until it matches and then turn that side twice.

 This one is, if it's in the right spot but it needs to be flipped, turn it to the bottom.

 Put it next to the corner that you want, where you want it to connect.

 Now again we're going to have to move this one out of the way for just a minute.

 Now if it's on the side, again next to it, move this out of the way to connect these two.

 If you're going to get into speedcubing, you should probably learn to solve it on the bottom.

 One of the key pieces of electronics we've been using over the last few years has been

 Once you get used to seeing that down imaging return on your graph, you don't want to be

 So for the last three years I've been running the down imaging up on my bow.

 To do that, you have to run an external transducer for the down imaging.

 The down imaging unit does not work with the Universal 2 sonar.

 What I had done in the past, the first year I ran it, I ran the cable over the top and

 you kind of had to really keep your eye on it so you didn't twist it up when you weren't

 But what I'm going to show you here real quick, and it's a pretty simple operation, is how

 to run that cable up through the notch on the shaft of the unit and up through the head

 It's just the four screws, you remove that and you expose the four wires that run down

 Once you have those wires exposed, you need to carefully cut the shrink tubing off one

 The other wire is just kind of, there's a piece of sleeving over two of them and just

 a quick disconnect for the universal sonar and it's pretty simple.

 Once you get that done, then you can go ahead and remove the main body of the control head

 After you remove the main body of the control head from the shaft, you need to slide that

 And I'll remind you later, once you get that collar off, that's the first thing you have

 If you get it all back together and that collar's not on, you've got to do it all over again.

 And what we need to do next is disengage the motor and carefully slide the shaft out completely

 and be careful not to get the wires snagged up and tear the wires off on their way out.

 You need to run your transducer cable up through the housing first and once you get that pulled

 through and most of the slack's out of there, then you need to carefully guide your four

 Make sure that transducer cable's in the notch of the shaft and then just kind of work its

 Okay, now that you've got the shaft pushed all the way back in, you've got your motor

 locked back in place, you need to get that collar on first before you do anything else.

 So get the collar on there and then you can go back and replace the main body of the control

 Now the next thing you need to do is just to reconnect all four wires, which is fairly

 You've got to remember in advance is to pick up a piece of shrink tubing at the local hardware

 store so you can reshrink over that push-on connector that's inside the head.

 What I do now is run a bead of silicone adhesive up the entire notch of the shaft and I'll

 lay that transducer cable down the middle of the shaft and secure it with wire ties.

 Come back the next day, cut off all the wire ties, and then you can dress up the transducer

 The tape will keep that collar from jamming into the transducer cable and if that tape

 There is one final step here and that's to drop your motor about a foot off of the boat

 and then you can go and secure that bottom part of the transducer cable with some more

 You don't have to do it right away, but it's good to get it done if you can.

 Once you have it all dressed up like this, there's no fear of ripping the cable off,

 It will give you a trouble-free operation for the rest of the season.

 Hi, my name is Vera on behalf of HowToExpo.com and today I'm going to be preparing Graham

 For a 9 inch pie dish, I'm going to be using approximately 9 Graham Crackers.

 I found that the easiest way to go about making the Graham Cracker crumbs is just getting

 a Ziploc bag, placing the Graham Crackers in the bag, and you can cut them up a little,

 And either using a rolling pin or something heavy, you just crack all those Graham Crackers

 You can also make the Graham Cracker crumbs in a food processor.

 So we were right on with the amount of Graham Crackers that we needed.

 I'm going to use softened butter, but it doesn't really matter.

 It doesn't take very long, especially if it's at room temperature.

 And if you're going to put it in the microwave, you should probably cut it into little cubes.

 We're actually going to let it cool down just a little bit for about a minute or two.

 The reason you want the butter to cool down a little bit before you put it into the Graham

 Pour the melted butter into the crumbs and with a fork, just mix together.

 I like making my own pie crust because at least I know what's in it.

 I like doing things from scratch, but also take as many easy routes as possible.

 Just with your fingers, pressing down, level all the dough on the bottom of the pie dish.

 Place the oven rack and the pie dish in the center of the oven and cook for about 6-8

 Now you're ready to put your favorite filling into this pie crust.

 Hope you enjoy this recipe and don't forget to visit us at HowToExpo.com for a delicious

 For great tips and ideas for your next meal, visit HowToExpo.com.

 I don't know about catfish because I really don't eat catfish that often.

 But tilapia doesn't have any bones in it so I usually cook that for me and my children.

 So I'm going to show you what I use to bread my fish and what I use to season my fish.

 I just use garlic salt, seasoning salt, and pepper to season my fish.

 I really don't season my cornmeal but if you want to go ahead and do it.

 I already have my oil on the inside of the skillet and it's already hot.

 You want that on high heat because when you fry fish you want the grease to be extremely

 You want it to be really hot before you throw the fish inside of the skillet.

 We're going to season both sides of the fish because you don't want the fish to be too

 I'm going to put a couple of pieces of fish inside of the cornmeal.

 I'm going to put all of them in here and just batter them all up.

 We're going to shake off the excess batter off of the fish and just lay it in there.

 We're not going to turn it over, flip it over because you don't need to now with fish because

 Okay, it's been like five minutes since the fish has been frying.

 This one is the smallest piece, so I'm going to go ahead and take it out.

 If you overcook it, it will be like fish jerky instead of fish.

 This piece is really small too, so I'm about to take that one out.

 Okay, so now we're going to turn it over and we're going to flip it over.

 Okay, so we're going to flip it over and we're going to flip it over and we're going

 Let this one cook a little longer than these other two because these are a little thicker

 It's crunchy and it's a little bit more soft than the other two.

 As you see, it is flaky and white on the inside, crunchy on the outside.

 So, don't forget to tell me what recipe you want to see me do next.

 Tonight I'm going to make one of my all-time favorite dishes, y'all.

 And it's been handed down on Karen's side of the family, my wife's side of the family.

 But it's a casserole, so John Holley, you know how I like my cheese, man.

 And Larry Wolf, dude, I want to see you do this in a single pot dish

But man, if y'all ain't subscribed to Larry Wolf, go check the boy out.

You can throw some sharp in there if you want or whatever kind of cheese you want.

 Usually the recipe calls for one pound of ground beef or whatever you want to use in it.

 So just know this is like one and a half times the recipe I normally use.

 Got some sliced up olives, green olives with the red things, pimentos.

I'm going to boil some pasta, some spaghetti up here in a short while.

 This meat was about halfway done so when all this onions and everything starts sweating down and getting right,

 Because the flavors in this stuff is pretty good all by itself so you don't want a whole lot going on.

 You kind of let the flavors that are in there do their own thing.

 Alright gang, all my veggies is kind of sweated down and looking good.

 I'm not adding any salt into this right now because the olives have quite a bit of salt.

 So we got this, and try not to get too much of the juice in there but if a little bit gets in there it's okay.

We're going to probably use half of this, maybe three quarters of it.

 And all these flavors, for some reason they all, they really come together really well.

 And again I'm more than, well I'm not doubling but I'm like one and a half times in this recipe.

 I'm just going to throw it all in there because I like my corn.

 Okay so we're going to let this cook probably 10 minutes or so like this.

 So we are back and I tasted this and it needs a little bit of salt.

 But not a whole lot because like I said we put some cheese in there.

 So I'm just going to throw a little bit of salt in there, just a touch.

 This is two cups of cheddar cheese and I'm going to use some of it here.

 Alright we're going to throw it in the 350 oven for about 15-20 minutes.

 Usually ribbing is one by one or two by two, but it can actually be any number.

 This one is four by four and I'm going to show you how to do that now.

 And you'll see that the first stitches at the beginning of the row are purl stitches,

 And you continue doing this until you've reached the length that you want the ribbing to be.

 Now, if you felt that I was going too fast, watch my videos on how to do the knit stitch,

 In this instance, you're going to knit four, purl four, knit four, continue, and just repeat

 When you've gotten to the point where you're ready to bind off, you simply bind off in

 ribbing, that is, bind the purl stitches off with a purl, and bind the knit stitches off

 The next stitch is a knit, so you're going to bind that off in a knit stitch, so forth,

 Again, you can watch my video on how to bind off ribbing to refresh yourself with how to

 And if you get to the point where you don't want to bind off, but you want to switch to

 So when you have one stitch left, you just cut your thread, which I've already done,

 You don't want it to be too wet when you plate it or it will make this soggy.

 So it's only just good to actually take some of the chicken out,

 So just take a little bit, a nice serving size, and stack it up.

 You don't want to overfill these things too much because you're paying an ass to eat.

 When you're dealing with high-end New York, bougie, highfalutin people.

 You could really add a regular tomato salsa, but I love the fruit kick.

 And it's summertime, so any fresh fruit that you can incorporate into your dishes,

 especially because you can really mask the taste of anything as long as you have a good zip.

 And it's always nice to have two that are different flavors that sort of balance each other out.

 You can even stack the tortillas on top of each other and press out multiple ones at the same time.

 All he does is take the tortilla, put the chicken on, zip it, get the salsa.

 Everybody loves it, and they're happy, and they think you're awesome.

 Looking at these tacos, they look great, but they need something.

 They need a little bit of garnish to really just pop, to really sing.

 Anything you have lying around, sprinkle those on, just a few on each.

 And look, you can even sprinkle a few on the plate for contrast.

 And you serve this up at a party, and people, I'm telling you, will freak out.

 You could be serving it to your friends who are wasted and drunk and high in college,

 And that is the beautiful thing, that the highfalutin, rich assholes don't realize

 that they're eating the same food as all the college kids out there.

 As long as it tastes good, it's flavorful, they're going to enjoy it.

 I've been wearing it in blends for the past few days and it's not detangled.

 Then I'm using my bed head foxy curls conditioner as well as my Y2 comb and my black comb.

 And then you need some clips and rubber bands as well as a blow dryer.

 So the first thing I'm doing is just spraying one side of my hair.

 I'm going to section my hair in four sections but as of now I'm just combing the ends a

 bit and then I section it out just to have a little bit more manageability and organization.

 So right now I'm just detangling it and I actually drenched the hair in water.

 I said in my previous videos that I wasn't going to comb this hair out or anything but

 it's kind of hard not to comb the hair out or detangle it or brush it.

 So now I'm doing it and the only time I do this is when I detangle my hair.

 Throughout the week when I wear it I don't brush it or I don't comb it.

 So yeah, it's kind of hard to comb this hair a bit so I start off at the bottom and then

 In my vlog I said the elasticity was bad on this hair because it's kind of hard with combing

 And the curl pattern does stay but I did get a few balls of hair with detangling it.

 So to keep the other side detangled I just flat twist it or two strand twist it and then

 And now everything is all detangled and tangle free, combed out and all that.

 I'm just showing you guys the pattern and now I spray my heat protectant on it.

 And so now I'm going to take a section of hair and I'm not straightening the whole thing.

 I'm just showing you guys that if this hair can be straightened or not and if this hair

 So I'm putting the heat on the lowest setting and I'm just working my way with my soft bristle

 But the reason I'm using this soft brush is that the elasticity on the hair is bad so

 you want a soft brush that doesn't really break the hair or stretch the hair in any

 So I'm using this brush and I'm using the tension method so that I can just get a good

 So I take that piece out because it was a bit shorter than the other side.

 I don't know the degrees of that but I put it on a 10 which is what I use on my natural

 And now this is just a tester strip to see how the hair is and how it can be straightened.

 It kind of feels like as if you were relaxed and your hair was blow dried freshly.

 That's how the hair feels and that's how it kind of looks when it's blow dried out.

 So maybe I should have straightened it a little bit more but I didn't want to put too much

 I just haven't tried it and I didn't want to straighten the whole thing.

 And so now I'm wetting it just to see if the curls will come back.

 And at first I thought it wasn't so I was kind of worried but as I kept brushing it

 and brushing it, the curls finally popped back up and yeah it came back perfectly fine.

 And so if you guys were wondering if this hair can be straightened, it can be straightened.

 I did use low heat on it so maybe if I used a higher heat I'm not sure if the curl pattern

 would come back but I did use a low heat with both the straightener and blow dryer with

 I actually do want to try blowing this hair out because it looks cool.

 As I kept combing, this is the amount of hair that I got for the whole entire head of hair

 And after I wear my hair like this, I take it off and I braid it into two sides and two

 And these are the results of the braid out that I did previously for my youth part.

 The curls are bouncy and it's like a loose wave, very different from the natural texture

 But the curls are bouncy and they are very loose and soft from the product that I put

 in and more manageable than the natural curl pattern of this hair.

 Hello, this is Kenneth14621 and I've got a recipe here for you.

 Simple name, but it's a little dish that I've been making and I don't think it's that fattening.

 If I thought it was too fattening, I wouldn't put it on the, you know, on a video.

 You know, when you get through, just go like this and just look at the consistency and

 And then you take about two lengths of sausage and you cut the sausage up.

 And you want to cut the sausage up into small pieces, okay, because that's a thick piece

 You cut them too thick and you won't, you know, you won't be able to get a good mix

 And I like to cook mine in a, this is a pressure cooker right here, but they do have rice cookers.

 Now I would have showed you the bell peppers and onions, but you know, I didn't think about

 And I'm going to show you how we're going to cook the tomatoes and bell peppers and

 One, you can take the bell peppers, onions, mushrooms, tomatoes and everything.

 There's not tomatoes in there right now because they cook faster.

 You can cook the vegetables and then cook the sausage and dump the grease out, you know,

 And so we put olive oil and we put the bell peppers and onions in there and we put the

 And then pepper, you know, put a little bit of pepper in there.

 Okay, now the last thing we're going to put in there is the tomatoes because the tomatoes,

 you don't want to cook them too long because they'll get all soggy and stuff like that.

 Okay, so we're just going to throw those in right at the last second.

 You don't have to do it like that, but we just chopped them up a little late and then

 Cook them about three or four minutes, you know, just enough to heat them up, you know,

 Okay, otherwise they'll lose the flavor and they'll get all soggy, you know.

 It's a lot of rice and that's been cooking three or four minutes and then you just scoop

 Now this, I'm going to go ahead and label this American food, okay.

 They're going to think they're not going to like it, but when they have this, they'll

 Right, the fourth step that we're going to learn also involves the zigzag movement which we learned out of Celtic Storm earlier on.

 Okay, so if you watch carefully, I'm going to jump up to start with.

 Now the next movement is a very, well, it's quite a difficult movement.

 if we're doing it with the right leg placed in front, what we need to do is place the two feet together and up on

 With the right leg in front, up on the toes, we sway over to the right first and then over to the left.

 So we're doing it with the left leg in front, we sway over to the left first and then back to the right.

 So we've got the left leg in front, we sway over to the left and then to the right.

 Okay, it's quite difficult to get that movement and it's probably a good idea if you hold on to a chair

 Okay, so we're going to combine that movement with some point movements.

 we're going to hop over and do a point hop back on the left leg and

 and then I'm going to do a point hop back with the right leg and then rock to the left first.

 One, two, three, hop point and rock and back, point and rock and back.

 Okay, now I'm going to do a hop point hop back with my left leg.

 Now the next movement is also a cut which we've also seen before.

 I'm going to stand on the back leg and cut the right leg up in front and I'm going to do that four times.

 Okay, and I'll show you later on how we're going to make that more interesting than routine that you're going to see it in.

 So after the four cuts I'm going to jump up in the air again with two feet together, jump.

 And I'm going to go step point hop hold two, three, four, five.

 Okay, so let's try it from the point hop back and jump and then into the four cuts.

 One, two, three, four, jump and point and hold two, three, four, five.

 Okay, now we're on to our fifth and final step in the slip jig.

 Okay, so we're standing up on the toes and we've got the right leg behind.

 Now I'm going to hop down onto my left leg from there and bring my right leg up at the back.

 So I'm going to step down and now the next movement is called a twist movement.

 Okay, then I'm going to twist the heel out and as I'm doing that I'm bringing the left leg back and putting it down behind.

 So I twist the foot, the right foot in, bring it back and as I put the left foot down I swing the right heel in again.

 Okay, then we repeat that movement by stepping on the right leg with the left leg up at the back and twisting back with the left foot.

 Okay, and then we're going to do two points and point hop backs, which we've also seen before.

 Okay, so one, two, three and twist back up, twist back and point and point hop back.

 And then we repeat that, but the only thing that we have to do is to hop back on the right leg to get into the movement again.

 One, two, three, hop twist back up, twist back and point and point hop back.

 Okay, now we're really there because the next two pieces we have done before.

 So all together we go hop two, three, four, five, hop two, three, four, five.

 And then we combine a hop movement with a jump two, three movement, which you saw in the basic reel.

 So I go hop over two, three and then we repeat that on the left leg.

 Okay, so I think it'd be a good idea to just put those last two steps to music and then we can give the ladies a break and then I'll teach the guys the double jig.

 We are using Saba or mackerel fish today, which is very flavorful when it's deep-fried.

 For more information about the ingredients and complete recipe,

 Right before frying, we take the fish out onto the paper towel and pat dry the surface.

 Fishy smell of mackerel is masked and the flavor is enhanced by fresh ginger in the seasoning.

 The contrast of the crunchy outside and the juicy fish inside is so delicious.

 And what I have here in front of me, before we get started, I have a brand new motor I pulled

 where somebody installed the wrong pulley on the shaft and it wasn't working correctly.

 the wiring, the exact colors and everything, hooked up to the motor as it was in the dryer.

First thing I want to mention, yeah, you can run these, you know,

 You'll see if you take these motors out, they're mounted on a base.

 here, this one has a screw underneath here that goes through and touches this metal.

 on this switch, they're both basically the same and I'll wire up both of them.

 These first two terminals, the ones directly behind it here, those back two,

 you will notice are hooked to the yellow and orange on this one.

 especially if I don't have a mounting bracket, because they do tend to kick.

 you'll see the... you might see the switch retract when I disconnect this.

 Usually when you're wiring these, you're wiring them so that you can put them

You get a cord like this that has your spade terminals with your hot being black,

 white being neutral, and the green being ground or earth as some people call it.

 But just like the other one, I'm going to plug the neutral into the top there.

 This has a flag clip on the hot side, which sometimes can cause you problems.

 I'll plug that in so that the wire's pointing just as you see it.

 Just got to be gentle with it so that you don't snap those pins off.

 And I've noticed my hair feels a lot healthier and it's really thick since my haircut and

 And in this video, what I want to do is show how I keep my hair wrapped and I use pin curls

 And it allows my hair to have so much volume and so much body and so much movement and

 So the things that you're going to need are some duckbill clips.

 I don't use a lot of oil because I don't like my hair to be weighed down.

 And then sometimes I like to add a drop of Ling Ling oil or something that smells really

 Alright, and I'll show you guys what it looks like tomorrow morning.

 Hi, today we're going to make a little bit of mortar and pestle guacamole.

 I like to use a mortar and pestle to crush up the garlic and the cilantro.

 It really breaks it up small so you can get a lot of flavor out of it.

 And when you give it a smash like that, the peel comes right off.

 And I use the sea salt here both for flavor and because it gives an abrasive.

 Because we're using a mortar and pestle, you don't have to be too careful about stems.

 But if you notice that any that don't break down, you'll want to pull those out before you finish mixing in the avocado.

 Try not to dig all the way down into the white pith that's really bitter.

 Then I just use a spoon to scoop the avocado right into the bowl of the pestle.

 I found that if I use the mortar itself, we end up with the avocado kind of trying to escape.

 And really use that to incorporate all those flavors into the avocado.

 And if you're a peanut butter lover like myself, you're going to love this episode.

 Simply because we're combining chocolate cupcakes with peanut butter frosting.

 And beat it until everything is nicely combined and there are no lumps in the mixture.

 And of course, if you have any dry mixture remaining on the side of the bowl, just stop

 Now that the batter is nicely incorporated, we're going to line our muffin tray with some

 Now using an ice cream scoop or a spoon, scoop some of the batter into the muffin cups.

 If you fill them too full, they'll rise and resemble a muffin rather than a cupcake.

 And we're going to put these in a 350 degree preheated oven for about 20 minutes.

 After 20 minutes, we're going to remove the cupcakes from the oven.

 Now we're going to set them aside and allow them to cool completely.

 Followed by the butter, which again should be at room temperature.

 Now we'll add the milk in and the vanilla extract, confectioner's sugar, and if you

 don't have confectioner's sugar, granulated sugar will work just fine.

 And we'll beat it one more time until everything is smooth and creamy.

 And of course you can use whatever design you wish, just make sure the piping bag has

 If you don't have a piping bag on hand, you can simply use a piece of plastic wrap with

 Now we're going to sprinkle with some chocolate chips, and you can use candy sprinkles if

 And here are our chocolate cupcakes with peanut butter frosting.

 Believe me, the peanut butter and chocolate make an excellent combination.

 Visit our website to find out more about this recipe, and remember you can always share

 This is part of our restaurant that has never ever been filmed before.

 And rather than build out this whole area and make it food service ready, we decided

 We didn't really have the luxury of a lot of time because we really needed to get some

 That's going to get the temperature in the burner to cycle off and then it will just

 And in Chicago particularly, there is such a right way and so many wrong ways to do a

 hot dog that you're going to create something that everyone is going to recognize instantly

 as a hot dog and to put it in an unfamiliar context, well it might not go over all that

 In that respect, it's a tough ingredient because you could argue that it's highest

 and best use is on a poppy seed bun with mustard, pickle, tomato, celery salt.

 These are the diced up hot dogs that have been marinating for about an hour in balsamic

 It turns out these are really good as a little salad topping too.

 In barbecue circles, I think a lot of people are familiar with something called dragon

 Dragon turd is not unlike this where you take sausage, stuff it into a jalapeno pepper and

 I kind of like to use a plastic knife because you're not going to tear the outside of the

 And then I use the plastic knife to just kind of scrape the seeds and the ribs out.

 I'm going to put just a couple of little strips of the Oaxaca cheese in here.

 Then you're going to take the filling and very small amounts at a time.

 Just kind of push it in and push it down with your finger to make sure it gets all

 Start by putting this cut side down in the middle of one of the strips.

 You don't want it to tear, but you want it to be nice and tight.

 Then you lay it on its side and wrap the second piece of bacon around that way.

 We're going to do about 325, just because you want to be able to let that bacon really

 Eventually it'll get there, but since we're using all cooked product in this, there's

 So how do you approach putting a barbecue flavor onto something that's already cooked

 Well, I think you go with that smokiness and you add to it and you add some other flavors

 that kind of counter it in the same way that you do with good barbecue.

 You want to take that smoky flavor and maybe want to add a little sweetness to it and a

 little tanginess to it and create something that's a little bit more balanced.

 Not crunchy that it's going to fall apart when you try to bite it.

 You get the sweetness from the cherry, a little bit from the balsamic.

 You get the smokiness of the hot dog and the bacon, a little spice from the pepper.

 But this will be your hors d'oeuvres before your breakfast this morning.

 I think when you're cooking with bourbon, you're talking about really strong and interesting

 You can't be a barbecue guy and not have spent some time cooking a little bit of bourbon.

 OK, we've got a JREG Celica, and we're going to change the indicator lamp bulb.

 All right, now I couldn't work out how to do this for ages, all right?

 So I'm going to do this, and first of all, we're going to take off the little screw cap

 OK, first thing we're going to do is take off the screw there, and I'll hand you over

 All right, OK, so we're going to unscrew this using the right screwdriver.

 So if it helps anyone out there, do this a lot, and work this out a lot quicker, because

 you can't access the light bulbs from the inside on these particular lamps.

 You can't access the light bulbs from the inside on these particular models of Celica.

 Now the bit that is very tricky to work out is, once we've taken that retaining screw

 So the trick is, take a little flathead screwdriver, push it about halfway in, and pry it open.

 It pops out just like a bonnet of a car, and then you can see there's like a spring

 Now, the next bit is a bit tricky, and not for the faint-hearted, because it seems like

 I've taken this one off already once today, so it'll come off a little bit easier.

 But you need to just give it a little bit of a gentle tug, and it comes out.

 What you'll see is, if you can close in on this, Caroline, or come in a bit closer.

 There's these two bars located into these two spring clips, and that's what's holding

 So you need to give it a little bit of a gentle tug, and off the cluster will come.

 Now, in this case, the bulb that's gone, and like I said, I had this open earlier on, was

 You pop that back in, and you give it a little bit of a tap, not too much.

 Make sure the light cluster goes in that way first, so the locating studs marry up with the holes.

 on the floor is not your favorite thing, you can do this even sitting in a chair.

 Then you're gonna take your left hand and you're going to weave your fingers

 in between all of your toes as close to the webbing of the toes as possible.

 you've never done this before, you're not going to like it, but it does feel better

 I'm just gonna let you move your foot off the leg just a little bit so you can

 did your fingers start to slide out from the toes just a little bit?

So you're basically going to try to turn the sole of your foot up toward

You're sort of twisting your foot and then you're gonna twist it down.

 So you're trying to turn the sole of the foot toward the bottom.

 Just trying to get some movement in all of the complex joints that make up the

And then come back to the center and again get your fingers in there even

And then from here you're going to squeeze your fingers together pretty

 instead of removing your fingers from your feet, which is the easy part, you're

 time balancing on your right foot now than on your left foot due to this

 All right, chocolate chip cookies are probably my favorite thing in the world.

 I was making a bunch of them one day about a month or so back, and we have a new addition

 to the family here at ChefSteps, the lovely Amy Hachono, and she's gluten-free.

 She couldn't eat any of the cookies, and I felt super bad about that.

 I'd never done this before, but we've got a lot of smart people here, so we decided

 The first thing to do is get rid of the gluten, the wheat flour.

 Second thing we had to figure out is how to get some of that structure back into the cookie,

 and what we came to was using cream cheese for some of the butter.

 The reason why we did that is cream cheese has xanthan and locust bean gum, which are

 They give it some of that chewy, stretchy texture that you want in a nice chocolate

 Cream cheese has a lot of moisture, though, and if you just add cream cheese, you're going

 The only moisture we can get rid of is in our egg whites, so we get rid of the egg whites.

 You start with butter, sugar, salt, baking soda, add the cream cheese, egg yolks, flour,

 there's a number of ways you can actually fold a pair of socks.

 the old fashioned, grab your socks, turn them inside out and there you have it.

 quite an airy stack there which isn't going to get them out of the pack so fast I suppose

 socks flat so they turn the tops over like so and that's it, there's your socks but that

 quite easily falls apart in the drawer and you end up with loads of old socks which I

So, the way that I do it now is, put my socks together like so, fold

 the tops over again, as just shown, this time paying attention to where you fold the second

So this sock here, as you fold over, comes over this way, like so.

 our heels in, if you've got heels that stick out, fold the sock right up to the bottom

 of the fold here and then start rolling the sock up, all the way to the top, nice and

Take your pocket, put two fingers in the pocket like so and pull it right over,

 like so, and then just feed it around, not pulling too hard, so you don't want to tear

 and say real why, but I think the fact that you don't end up with a drawer full of odd

 Okay guys, so I'm going to show you on the keyboard here so you can see the pattern a

 pentatonic scale, the notes are the 1 2 3 4 5 then of course the 1 again but we'll call it the 8,

 so the octave right 1 2 3 4 5 8 again so C D E G A and C again so 1 2 3 4 5.

 Now, its relative minor is the A. Go down count three three semitones down to figure out the

 relative minor so you're in C go 1 2 3 that gives you A so now you're in A minor which is the same

 as the C major pentatonic except it starts on the A and it goes 1 3 4 5 7 so if that's confusing

 just omit the A for a minute and do this see there's the A again and what's this this is the

 C major pentatonic scale remember 1 3 1 2 3 5 6 and if you take that top note A and put it

 down here you've got the relative minor which is A and this is an A minor pentatonic scale.

 Same scale starts on the A instead of the C. See how that works?

 arms are hitting the camera stand it's a little hard to do in this position but I just wanted to

So let's say and then if you're in A major you can figure out its relative minor

 by counting three semitones down so A and go 1 2 3 now you're in F sharp so F sharp minor is the

 relative of A major and you can do that in any key go to D 1 2 3 B minor is the relative of D.

 D's relative minor is D major's relative minor is B. So when you learn those when you learn a

 relative minor in a or when you learn a major pentatonic scale you just assume that you already

 know it's relative minor because it's the same scale you just start on that other note.

 that's the way you can practice and learn these and practice a lot of them like all the major

 ones like you play in rock and pop and blue songs you know A G is a good one F is a good one E is a

 real good one because guitar players love to play an E and for saxophones for tenor saxophones that

 turns out to be an F sharp which can sound a little scary but when you're really used to an

 F sharp it's just as easy as any other key believe me I've been doing it for years just have to get

Altos would would be in C sharp which is not not quite as nice but you just have to

 practice and get used to it and if you don't understand how we're converting these to the

 specific saxophone keys you have to read that link that I got on the page that I devoted a

 whole page to showing you how to do this and how to figure out this theory of it and again I got

 to reiterate that it's very important for us sax players to learn all right

 I'm going to pick up the color light brown from my Lorac Pro 2 palette and buff this

 all into the crease and in the upper crease to act as a transitional shade color.

 Then, I'm picking up the color buff and applying this underneath the brow as a brow bone highlight.

 I'm going to pick up the color cool gray and mix it with the color charcoal.

 I'm going to apply this color on the outer corner and I'm adding a lot of pressure and

 Then I'm going into my Sephora it smoky palette and picking up this silver color and I'm packing

 And I'm going to blend out any harsh lines from that silver color.

 I'm going to pick up the navy color from the Lorac Pro 2 palette and apply this on the

 Packing it on and it's just going to take the look from one flat color to more of an

 And then I'm going to take a mascara and apply it to the upper and lower lashes.

 And I'm really loving this mascara by the way, it's from Lorac.

 Then I'm going to tight line and add a black liner to the waterline.

 And I'm going to take a pencil brush with that same navy color and I'm going to smoke

 And with that silver color on the lid, I'm just going to apply this on the inner corners.

 And if you guys want to see a video on that, make sure that you let me know down in the

 For a primer, I'm using the monistat chafing gel and I'm just applying this in my t-zone.

 And I'm going to show you how I've been applying my foundation and concealer lately.

 So basically, I just take the hard candy concealer and mix it with the covergirl 3 in 1.

 And I just buff it in with a kabuki brush that is from kye brooks.

 I'm not really into contouring much anymore, so I'm just going to bronze and bring some

 As you can see, it looks a little patchy from the foundation, but I did that on purpose

 because I'm not going to take the foundation all the way up to my hairline because I'm

 So I went ahead and did that and I'm just going to contour a little bit on my nose to

 And then, to add a highlight, I'm using the city color sunlight trio in collection 2.

 And I'm going to line my lips using the nyx liner in natural and I'm going to use the

 I'm just touching up my hair with my numi flat iron, one of my faves!

 If you did, please give this video a thumbs up and share it with your google plus!

 Mushur dal or lentil soup is the most commonly eaten dal in India.

 but we've also trapped the heat of the spices to create an even spicier dal.

 1-2 tablespoons of mustard or vegetable oil, whichever you have or prefer,

 You'll mix the lentil with the spices and water in the pressure cooker.

 And then you'll heat the pressure cooker to completely cook the dal through.

 Depending on the source of the dal, it may need multiple washings.

 On the stove, heat a pressure cooker on medium-high without the lid on.

 And then when the mustard seeds start to pop, add the curry leaves.

 This will take approximately 30 minutes, depending on the type of pressure cooker that you have.

 If you don't want to wait 30 minutes for the pressure to build,

 you may want to heat the pressure cooker for 5 minutes after the steam starts escaping,

 It can be served by itself as soup, or it can be served paired with rice or chapati.

Today on Diva Skin Cook we are making cheesy bacon zucchini bake.

 Alright, we're gonna start by just slicing up our zucchini in little, probably

 Okay, and now I'm just gonna sprinkle on a little bit of oregano.

 fresh oregano if you like, but I always have this oregano, the dried oregano on

So and I'm gonna add in a little bit of minced garlic, fresh garlic.

 recipes on my blog at DevaSinCook.com, so be sure to go on over there and check

Okay, now I'm just gonna go ahead and spray down my little casserole

 Alright, now I'm gonna sprinkle the top with some parmesan, not parmesan, but some

 butter is gonna make it get nice and golden and crispy as it bakes.

 And then when it comes out of the oven, I'm gonna sprinkle on some more cheese

 comes out of the oven again, go ahead and sprinkle on some cooked bacon just like

 paper sizes from 8 1⁄2 by 11, 8 1⁄2 by 14, and all the way up to 11 by 17.

It can handle different paper weights from as light as 12-pound paper all

 so when the machine is not in usage, you would cover the machine to prevent dust collection

Let's go ahead and show you how to operate this folding machine.

 first step in operating this folding machine is adjusting the two fold plates.

 types of folds that this machine can do, and then also the paper sizes.

 size of, if you're using 8-nap by 11, 8-nap by 14, or 11 by 17.

So we choose this illustration, and then we're using 8-nap by 11.

 we'll do is we'll go ahead and adjust this setting until the arrow points right in between

You can also make fine-tune adjustments, so if the fold is not as perfect as you'd

 like, you can just simply rotate this knob either clockwise or counterclockwise, and

 of the two, you just simply insert it up and down, and you just want to make sure that

 is the top fold plate, and you have the same illustration of the different fold sizes,

So again, we're going to be using 8-nap by 11 piece of paper, and

 just simply move this guide along the rail to the right adjustment.

 in place, then you want to simply gently lower this inside, and you want to make sure that

 So now that we have the paper in place, we've got all the adjustments set, proper place,

You can either just press the start button, and the machine will

 automatically pull in the sheets until it runs out of paper, or you can do batch counting,

 you would choose the 100 marker, so we've got 100, and then you'd add 10 five times

 Now early in the video, we talked about the use of the paper support guides.

 these paper support guides would be used for if you have larger sizes pieces of paper,

 such as 11 by 17, or for heavier or even lighter pieces of material, for that matter, when

 you need that extra support to keep the paper nice and aligned.

 And again, this prevents the paper from curling up in the back, and this just provides some

 Well, this concludes our video demonstration on the MBM-207M Friction Feed Paper Folder.

 We'd like to remind you, if you're interested in any of our other line of paper folding

 machines from MBM, such as the Friction Fed or the Air Feed folders, feel free to give

 Hi, this is Robin Moses and I am starting this tutorial with Misty Rose by Sally Hansen.

 Then I used a mint color that was Azoteur Jade Diamond and then I'm going over it with

 I'm going over the top and just giving these a really iridescent flutterfly effect and

 So I'm going down with white paint and I'm going to push in, push, go down, okay and

 And then with your brush you push, push, push in a circular motion and then pull and

 Push, push, push, push, push in a circular motion and then pull in.

 Depending on what type, there's all different kinds of butterflies.

 So push and then pull down with long angel wings at the bottom.

 And I'll show you the thumb and then a little one on the pinky and I will be back.

 Now I'm going into the very, very center with a darker pink starting at the bottom down

 Okay, so I'm going in with a very light teal and I'm going to, I'm going to do scrolling

 underneath and around the butterflies, all up into the French manicure like so.

 And with a, with a gold paint, I'm going to go just straight through the body.

 You can find me, try them and show me what you do on my fan page and I will see you back

 In this video, I'm going to show you how to replace the carburetor on your Troy-built

 We'll get started by removing the air filter cover and the air filter.

 Now I'll remove the fuel line and the throttle linkages from the carburetor.

 First I'll reattach the throttle linkage and next the fuel line.

 Now I'll re-secure the carburetor and the air filter base to the engine.

 Next comes the heat shield gasket, then the isolator and the isolator gasket.

 When I do, you'll notice that there's the flap on the auto-choke system.

 I want that to go to the right side of this post on the carburetor.

 We'll finish up by reinstalling the air filter and the air filter cover.

 That's how easy it is to replace the carburetor on your Troy-built TB130 lawnmower.

 hear great music for Nightclub Two-Step in your country arena, in your popular music,

Or even at that special day if you're getting married or something.

 We have a lot of wedding couples that learn Nightclub Two-Step just for that special dance.

 It's wonderful because it gives you something to do to those love songs.

And we're going to just kind of break it down for you step at a time, do our beginner

 and it's also called Slow Two-Step in parts of the world, you sometimes start with the

But the way we break it down, we like to start with the quick, quick.

Rocking back with your left foot, quick, quick, and then side step on

Alright guys, now what you want to do is you want to make sure that each

 heel off the ground, replace the weight onto the left foot, step side.

 because that kind of takes away from the fluid quality of the dance.

 one more time with the guys, starting with the weight on the right foot.

 Quick, replace the weight forward on quick and then a side step on slow.

 reason that we use this box pattern is that it indicates if you're doing a rock here,

 talk about how you actually do that with another person at the same time.

 in closed dance position, which is just a traditional type of position for dancing.

 But we're going to teach you something that's a little bit special.

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to take a nice, strong, firm grip with my right hand.

 is I'm going to take my right wrist and I'm going to push it in just a little bit.

 Now when I bring that to her shoulder blade, it's going to fit right in there.

 to actually take the heel of my right hand and I'm going to put the heel of my right

And then at that point, guys, you can just wrap the fingers around the shoulder

 Now ladies, take your elbow and place it on the outside of his forearm.

On the other side, what we'll do is he takes his left hand at approximately

 any fingers sticking out straight like that, but you don't want to squeeze either.

 we're going to do is let the guy stand in the box in closed position and we'll try our

 thing that we need to talk about when you're doing this basic step.

 And do you know when I overdo this, it's not like an accordion type of a thing, but it

 does give it a nice type of a breathing and a little bit of a character of the dance.

 try that facing the profile so you can see the breathing action.

 Hey, um, we're making a pen today and, um, these are some of the things that you use

 Okay, I'm drilling a hole in the, um, in the blank to make, so we can fit in the tubes.

 Okay, so, um, I'm drilling the, this drill into the, um, the blank to make it level.

 Square to, um, so that when we cut it, it'll work out and fit the, um, pieces.

 And here comes, this is the fun part when you get to actually turn the pen and shape

 And so we're gonna use this tool and it'll carve it to make it a lot smoother.

 Okay, so we started, um, we finished, um, rounding out our blanks.

 Well, I'm assembling the pen on this vice, and, um, so you have to go really slow or

 brick that I reviewed in another video and basically it's a solid square brick

 of coconut husk that you add four and a half quarts of water and you end up with

 These are recycled cells from annual plants that I bought last year.

 you're using any seed starting mix you want to make sure it's pre-moistened.

 mix in here and then put water in the bottom of the tray it takes a long time

 the cell tray and the cells you run the risk of the seeds dropping down to the

 bottom because the mix is so loose and you really want to have a nice base for

So once you pack it down fill it again and you're going to press it down

 one more time and this is wet so the seeds will already start pulling water

So you're just wanting to make sure you're spreading a good amount of mix over the top.

 Once you do that all you're going to do is stir this to almost a half an inch deep and you're not worrying about if every seed gets covered.

 plants going to survive you can fill in your wildflower garden with these.

I'm also using large cells so if a lot of seeds come in I'll just divide it in half and then I'll end up with two plugs.

Again these are just going to be perennial flower plugs that can go anywhere.

 You can put a layer right over the top in case any seeds are sitting on the top.

Although the medium is moistened already you just pour the water into the cell flat and make sure you let it water the plants from the bottom.

Not only will it splash the seeds out but you set up an environment for damping off disease which will kill off your seedlings.

 So I would just fill this tray up, put it under my grow light, set a timer and in probably one to two weeks I'll have a lot of germinating seeds and in six weeks these will be ready to go outside.

 This August 15th would have marked Julia Child's 100th birthday.

 And so to celebrate, I'm going to show you how to make her most essential ingredient

 Sure, you can get some from the store, but why not make your own that way?

 Making your own butter is so easy to do, you wonder why you haven't been making it all along.

 You need 1 1⁄4 cups of cold heavy cream, a container with a tight lid, and some salt if you'd like.

 Now for the container, you want to make sure it's big enough so that when you pour the liquid in,

 Also, you want to make sure it's a secure lid, that way you don't get cream all over yourself.

 So first you want to fill up your container with the cold heavy cream,

 and our goal is to separate the fat from the milk, so that means we're going to do some vigorous shaking.

 So you're going to shake continuously and vigorously for about 20-25 minutes.

 That's going to take a long time, so you might want to entertain yourself, do a little shakey shakey dance like I am here.

 After a while, it'll start to look thicker, and even after a few more minutes, it'll look like whipped cream.

 And even after a few more minutes, it'll look like cottage cheese.

 That's when you want to release some of that liquid, strain it out, and after a few more minutes, you'll get butter.

 Now if you want to make salted butter, all you have to do is just before refrigerating it, add some salt and mix it up.

 So just roll it up and start forming it out into sort of a butter stick shape.

 Then just twist it up to make it nice and tight and ready for the fridge.

 This butter baby should take about 30 minutes to an hour to firm up in the fridge.

 Now once that butter baby's in the fridge, all you have to do is wait for it to become more solid,

 and this leftover milk, don't throw it away because you can make your own butter milk.

 All you have to do is add just a teaspoon of vinegar, let it sit on the counter, mix it up when you're ready to use,

 I really hope you guys try to make your own homemade butter, because it will make Julia Child really proud.

 But butter, moderation, well, just as Julia said, everything in moderation, including moderation.

 I hope you guys will stay tuned for our next two episodes as we continue our Julia Child 100th birthday celebration

 Today we're going to construct a raised timber bed for our garden and this is the materials we've got in front of us.

 These are 10 by 2 rough sawn macrocarpa, so they're untreated timber.

 The length of it is 3 meters and the width of it is 1.2 meters.

 We're going to lay them all out into a rectangular pattern and then we're going to staple them together with the planks in the corner.

 We've already pre-drilled the holes in the side to make it nice and easy.

 I'm going to lay all four pieces out so that the bed has it's, or close to it's final shape.

 Now that I've laid it out I'm going to put some nails in each corner.

 I've got this brick in the corner, I'm going to stick my foot in it and I'm going to nail my timber that way and that helps keep the whole thing square.

 So I put the nail in the guide hole and I just nail it in and I'm going to put the nail in the corner.

 I nail it in but I don't hit it the whole way, I just peg it down.

 And then I go across to the next corner and work my way around the bed.

 OK next we put a peg in each corner and when we turn this bed over these pegs are what anchors it into the soil.

 So that's the bed constructed, now we've moved it into position so that it lines up with the other beds and leaves an access way in the middle.

 Now I'm going to scribe around the outside of it with my spade so I know exactly where it is, then I'll lift it off and I'll dig some corner posts for those pegs to sit in and I'll tip it back up the right way.

 Stick the whole thing, pick it up like this and then pick it up so it doesn't sit on that leg.

 That's it, now bring it over here, put it in, line it up over here up he sits in the right spot with the edge of the bed.

OK so we've got the bed lined up with the marks on the scribe and what we're going to do now is tap the pegs down so they're solid and so that the bed ends up square.

 All we have to do now is dig it over at the bottom, turn that soil over and then add some more compost and good organic matter to the top to build it up to that level and we'd have like 60 centimetres of really good soil to grow in.

 I'm going to be doing a song called This Side by Knuckle Creek, which happens to be one of my favorite songs.

 I'll go through the intro and at least a verse or two and show you guys how to play it.

 And then you go up to the second fret of the G string and alternate between that and the E string.

You've got to slide from the fourth fret of the B string to the fifth.

 Then when you've got your open E and B and first fret of the G string.

 I like to play an open barre chord on the... let's see where is it...

 I'm not sure exactly what John Watkins plays, but both of them sound good to me.

 Alright, so I'll go through one verse and I'll tell you the names of the chords as I play it.

 Alright, just so you know I'll sing it too so that you know where the chords go exactly with the vocals.

 Hello everyone, today I want to do this video with pretty much a more detailed look on how

 This does look quite a bit different from your average Cooler Master QuickFire Rapid,

 but that is because I've kind of heavily modded it since the past year or so that I've had

 There will be a sticker here that will say void, warranty, blah blah blah.

 Let's say you spilled something on it, your warranty is already voided.

 Or if you're modifying it, it doesn't really bother you that much.

 You can use something else, I would stick with the razor blade.

 Alright, you'll see the top housing and the bottom, you can work it in right there.

 Don't pull this up all the way, make sure the keyboard doesn't fall open.

 These switches are stickered and lubed MX clears that I put in there.

 These are browns, these are blues, these are reds, these are greens.

 I'm just going to pull up here and there will be a little daughter board here that you need

 I don't have another Cooler Master to show you, but I can kind of show you with this

 There's actually, this used to be a port just like this one here.

 I kind of got a little overzealous and ripped the whole thing off by accident once.

 It was some pretty precision soldering for someone who doesn't, it's old.

 This was my first board I ever learned to solder on, so some were kind of ugly.

 So what you would do normally is you would unplug it here or here.

 If you were going to go any further in modding it, you would desolder every switch.

 You would desolder every switch, pull all the switches, put new ones in, just like I've

 It's a lot of work and most likely if you're watching this video, it's something for maybe

 And there's plenty of other ones out there, probably higher quality than the one I'm making.

 If you have any questions, leave them in the comments and I'll get to them when I can.

 Last week, Brandon McDermott showed us how to make a chicken tagine.

 To go with our chicken tagine, we made flatbreads, which we're going to go over right now.

 Whenever you're making a pizza dough or a flatbread or something like that, generally

 what you're looking for is roughly about two parts flour, one part liquid.

 We actually used two cups of all-purpose flour with one cup of whole wheat flour to give

 it a little bit more heft and taste and a little bit of a nicer color too.

 You can use it like black pepper, but it's actually related to ginger.

 And the nice thing that also goes with it is a little lemon zest, especially when it's

 One and a half cups warm milk and water, about 100 degrees, a little warmer than room temperature.

 And you throw one of those in and you mix it in, like whisk it in with a fork or with

 And you'll know by kind of getting kind of like a beer head on top.

 You pour that liquid into the flour while mixing it with the other hand.

 What you're looking for is something that almost ends up looking like chewed bubble

 You know, it should just come together and it should feel warm.

 And once it starts becoming like a nice dough consistency, you take it out of the bowl,

 kind of fold it over like a taco shell, and then just take the heel of your hand and just

 That will kind of make layers, which will help make it fluffy and kind of form like

 But it also will help get the yeast to distribute evenly into the dough.

 Cover it with some plastic and let it rest at about room temp, you know, 70, 80 degrees

 Then what you're going to do is you're going to punch it down a little bit.

 And if you feel it, it's elastic, so it's really got some nice stretch to it.

 You just take your hand and just kind of roll it around in a circle until it forms like

 And then you just put those onto a plate, cover them in plastic, and let them sit for

 I just want to try and get it even and throw them onto your grill or your pizza stone.

 Get a little oil on them and just quickly just give it a rub down.

 So we're just going to take that and put your bread down onto that.

 And then turn it a little bit if you want to get that little crosshatch.

 We'll finish off the bread in the oven and warm it just as we need it.

 About five minutes we'll just pull them out and get them going.

 The flatbreads were a perfect complement to our chicken tagine.

 They had a slight lemony flavor which paired wonderfully with the rich hearty vegetables

 The flatbreads are absolutely delicious when they're warm, fresh out of the oven.

 And you can adjust the flavors any way you like by adding your favorite seasonings.

 Now, one of my personal favorite things about this flatbread dough recipe is that it's basically

 the same exact recipe you would use to make pizza dough, which is something that we're

 This recipe makes two large flatbreads which is more than enough for four people.

 The total cost for our flatbreads came down to less than $1.50, which is under 38 cents

 If you made our chicken tagine last week, let us know what you paired it with.

 And if you've ever made flatbreads before, let us know what your favorite recipe is.

 Hey guys, it's Squinkiesandme365 and today I'm going to be doing something a

 and this was requested by Butterhopscotch AG and I hope I said that

Also I'm sorry I was a little late, it's just I've been busy and I haven't

 and the front and my nail is also prepped with a base coat and one coat of

 today is obviously LA Colors French White, Milani Purple Passion, and also

 want a toothpick or something to pick up the extra nail polish.

 and obviously you can see I've used it a lot and it looks really bad, but that's

Then while your nail is in the water, you're going to blow on it, you're

 going to blow on the extra nail polish a little bit to dry it up.

 toothpick or whatever you have and just get up all the extra nail polish.

And then when you're ready, I'm going to do it now so I can show you guys.

A little nail polish got on my finger, but that's quite alright.

 Because doing, when doing water marble, that's almost guaranteed that it's going to

I'm trying to get the tape off without ruining my nail, so bear with me

Okay, so here's my nail art design, and a little got on my finger, but

 take a q-tip and some nail polish remover and just get all the edges if you missed

 more about the network and to find more of our shows, visit us online at

They've got peanut butter and chocolate and they are always a hit.

Now you have to stay with this because the marshmallows need to be

 stirred quite frequently and they'll start to kind of glob together.

 they're about halfway melted we're going to take a half a cup of peanut butter

 minutes but we are looking for it to get nice and melted, nice and smooth like

And then we're going to take it off the heat and we're going to get some

 Muscle your way through but again it should only take just a minute or two to

 get that melted peanut butter and marshmallow mixed in with the cereal.

 Now once everything's pretty well mixed together go ahead and start spooning it

 bag, put it on my hand and for some reason this does not stick and you can

 chocolate on top of it so I'm going to take about a cup of chocolate.

 actually milk chocolate but you could use whatever you like and start by

 takes about a minute and a half total usually but you want to get the chocolate

 and get kind of firm so you can just kind of spread this right out while the

If you don't mind the gooey chocolate you could probably eat them in

 about a half an hour but if you want the chocolate to be set you may need to let

 get our recipe by going to the website and if you have any questions or ideas

 Want to see what's going on behind the scenes at Harwood Podcast Network?

 At this point in the year you've played a lot of hockey, it's very important to keep

 Chris is going to get into the push up position, toes inside the TRX, flex towards you, core

 really tight, he wants to pull those knees under him, not too far, just pull it in to

 there, keep your back as flat as you can, pulling your knees to your chest in control,

 staying really tight, really controlled through the whole exercise.

 Chris grab the cable with both hands directly in front of your chest, Chris is going to

 extend his arms full extension with a pause at the end, extend keeping your hips forward,

 keeping your feet shoulder width apart and straight ahead, in control, press out, make

 Chris is going to show us the Slider Body Saw, so a great little tool, those two little

 sliders are under his toes, his glutes are fired, his quads are tight, his heels are

 pushed back, he's going to extend through his upper body, keeping his core really tight,

 great exercise for the core, keep it really under control, try to come back as far as

 you can without losing the glutes or the lower back, have no arch in your lower back if possible,

 This is a video to demonstrate how to open a SimpleTek SimpleDrive.

 For this particular project you'll need a Phillips head screwdriver and a long narrow

 So to get started, looking at the drive, you want to locate where the name of the drive

 Here you'll see an opening into the drive and you want to take your tweezers or your

 nail file, insert it toward the far end of this opening, and you're going to press down.

 So now you can just remove the faceplate after it's been popped.

 So this is the tab that you put pressure on to release the faceplate from the front of

 You'll notice once you've opened the drive there's a Phillips head screw here and a Phillips

 And then at this point, these two pieces of the enclosure slide apart.

 So you want to push forward on this side and pull back on this side.

 And then you can open the enclosure and there's your hard drive.

 And at this point it's very simple to remove the hard drive with a Phillips head screwdriver.

 There's a screw here, a screw here, a screw here, a screw here.

 You can pull the drive out of the enclosure and then remove it from the tray.

 And that's how you open a SimpleTek SimpleDrive hard drive enclosure.

Today I'm making a fun dessert, mini pineapple upside down cakes.

 The amounts of the ingredients that you're going to need to make this recipe will be

 listed in the information box below or you can find it on my website.

 are, you're going to need eggs, granulated sugar, pineapple juice, and this is the juice

 I drained from the pineapples, maratino cherries, all purpose flour, brown sugar, butter, salt,

So I'm going to put my flour, my baking powder, and salt in this bowl and just

 in this bowl and I'm going to mix this and I'm going to beat it for two minutes.

 so I've beat my liquid mixture for two minutes, now I'm going to put my flour mixture in.

 butter and put it in a small saucepan along with the brown sugar and we're going to melt

 this together and once it's all melted and boiling I'm going to cook it for one minute.

 My butter and brown sugar's ready and so now we'll move on to the next step.

 to take my muffin pan and I'm going to start spooning a little bit of this in the bottom

 these will go in the oven that I've preheated at 350 degrees for about 25 minutes.

 pineapple upside down cakes cooked for 25 minutes and they're done.

 taken a knife and I've run it around the edge of every one of these.

 I have a cooling rack that I have put on a parchment lined baking sheet and I'm going to

 take this and this is to catch anything that might run over from the bottom of the brown sugar and

And I'm going to take it and I'm going to put it on top of these and I'm going to flip it

 rack before I put them on a serving platter and show you what they look like.

 Rhythm changes in G and don't worry about the chords at the moment, but just try and get that general sound of G.

 Dennis is playing soft enough to allow you to take the dynamics down a bit.

 So the soft playing with the accents to keep the energy levels right.

 We measured to make sure that we get our tie in the thickest part of the stone.

 We'll install a Tapcon screw through the wall tie into the stone and then we'll attach

 They're a little bit different than what you'd find on your standard wood screw or sheet

 It's going to bite into it and really hold onto it to where as if you tried to use a

 We put two spacers down here on our hearth and what we're going to do is we're going

 They'll stay in there and then we'll line up where we've attached our metal strap to

 Now, we'll check it for plumb and then we will attach this to the wall and that's what's

 We're only going to tighten this up to the point where we have a quarter inch because

 if we put it right up against the wall, then we wouldn't be able to get the unit plumb.

 Once again, we're going to drill into the stone for the Tapcon screw.

 The bit size is just a little bit smaller than the screw itself.

 Give it all kinds of expansion room to where that screw can just grab onto the stone because

 these screws are designed for masonry use and it will literally just grab on.

 As we mentioned earlier, we're just going to drill a little bit and clean out the pilot

 Well, I'm just making sure our top mantel piece, the dimensions on that, I just want

 to make sure that we're right on with this so that we don't have any lips or ledges before

 One thing that's nice about these pieces with this cast stone fireplace is if you notice,

 Each piece is numbered and you can put that up against the schematic that they send along

 with it so you know where every single piece goes, whether it's a right piece or left piece

 This is a showroom display and so we've got carpet over all the walls here, which you're

 So in this display, what we're going to do, because we have to anchor the top piece, we're

 going to loosen the carpet and we will attach our anchors to the top piece, attach it to

 Now in a residential home, because you don't have the carpet, what you can typically do

 is because this is going in before the walls are totally finished, textured and painted,

 normally you can cut out in the sheetrock to where your anchor will tie in below the

 Then the sheetrock crew can come in and tape and bed over it, mud over it and after they

 texture the walls, wallpaper or paint, you'll never even know that anything was done and

 Now that the whole unit is installed, it's highly recommended that you pack it and pack

 The spacers are just, they're holding everything apart and the masonry is what's going to help

 it bond together, which is going to make it structurally sound.

 Okay, if you remember when we started, we set our legs a quarter inch off the wall,

 both for allowing for an un-plumbed wall and also for condensation reasons.

 Now that the whole unit is installed, we're sitting approximately a quarter inch off the

 wall and it's highly recommended that you use a quality caulking to go around both the

 Just use a silicone caulking, it should be able to match the color of the material quite

 So you're going to eliminate the problem of small objects falling down behind the unit

 Alright, so as you saw from my last video, I was using my little French press I just

 But yeah, this is not exactly great for espresso because espresso is actually the grind of

 So while this is great for coarse ground, something like this is better for actual espresso.

 This is called a macchietta, or I believe a mocha pot, or Italian coffee maker, or stove

 But I bought this for $10, I got it on a sale, and this is the La Caffietta.

 I believe that's how you pronounce it, it's like an Italian name, like La Caffe or Cafeteria

 And so this is where your espresso beans go, your finely ground espresso beans.

 So what happens is, on these stove top makers, when you put your water in the base here,

 it steams and boils up through this hole, going through the espresso grind there, and

 So with a French press, while you might get some, even if you're doing coarse grind like

 you should be doing, you still might get a little bit of that coarse muddiness almost,

 a little bit of coarseness to it, because it's not getting rid of all the grind in the coffee.

 Where this is kind of strong more in the steam way, this is kind of strong more in just steeping.

 I can tell you what, the French press, the longer you steep it, the stronger it gets.

 As far as this goes, I notice that the cleanup is a lot easier on these, because all the

 water goes, evaporates through here, so there's pretty much no water left.

 And when your espresso is, when you're done making your coffee, this is, the espresso

 And you just go, boop, like that in the garbage and it's almost completely gone.

 This is all stainless I believe, so you just, you know, rinse it with water.

 Alright, so what I'm going to be using is the, yeah, Starbucks Dark Espresso Roast.

 Again if you don't know what espresso is, it's the grind, but they call it espresso.

 So it's kind of misleading, but basically it's just a dark, dark roast coffee.

 I noticed with my coffee grinder, I don't know if you can see this on the inside, but

 on the inside there, there's 4, 10, 12, and I believe that's like, I don't know, basic

 And it's okay if you make more because you can always seal off your fresh ground like

 But let's just put, right there, I mean it doesn't have to be perfect.

 Again this is nice and fine ground, so you want to get it as fine as possible.

 Let's see if you look in there, some of it's fine ground but some of it's not.

 And when you're doing this, it's actually releasing all the oils in there, so that's

 So you get your little thing here and I just kind of like to...

 See it's hard to do this on camera because you've got to show it all.

 But I just kind of tamp it down with my fingers, it doesn't matter too much.

 This is a big mocha pot maker here, but that should be about enough.

 And then what we're going to do is we're going to put this right on top and screw the whole

 I've seen some people, like my pastor, he actually puts his pot inside of like a pan.

 I'm not exactly sure why, but maybe just to protect from overflow or I don't know.

 Alright, so not even one minute in and you can see it's boiling over there.

 Alright, so as soon as you hear it stop steaming and bubbling, like just now, then you know

 And what we do is we can actually just pour it straight from here.

 You have a nice plastic handle on here so you know it's not going to burn you.

 One thing I forgot to mention is as far as this compared to like espresso, like from

 I mean I was up all night because I couldn't sleep because I had like a half a shot of

 Now, with a piece of furniture, common sense says you cannot get to all of these edges

 So that's where the little sheets, you know, you can come in here and you can hand rub

 Now starting with the coarser grits, like the 1500, that's doing more of a leveling

 And because it's using the random orbit action, it's going to give you a consistent even finish.

 Now I could go on up through the grits, but I think what I'm going to do is just jump.

 Let me jump up here to about, let's go to a 6000 just for kicks and giggles.

 Now common sense is going to tell you the smoother you are before you do your rubbing,

 the less you're going to have to rub and the better it's going to come out, the better

 Now what the soapy water does, I told you, I just put this on yesterday.

 If I try to sand it dry, and I know you, if I try to sand it dry, then what's going to

 happen to me is I'm going to gnarle up and get my sand papers going to get all gooped

 So I'm kind of, and the only thing the water, a little bit of soap does is act like the

 Now I would be better off going up through the grits, but for time constraint, we're

 Now the other nice thing about this product, of course obviously it's waterproof, but you

 One of the other things I notice, I'm streaking just a little smeary looking.

 Now guys, just to show you how well this is done, notice the reflective qualities of the

 And one of the things people don't understand when they're using a steel wool or rotten

 Now in this case, I put four coats on because I knew I was going to be sanding some off.

 You want something like General Finishes Arm-R-Seal, something like Waterlox.

 The secret to a good oil finish is wipe it back between the coats and use numerous coats.

 Then you can simply, you shouldn't have as rough a finish as you're going to have with

 But the thing of it is, is you can still come back with the micro mesh and rub those finishes

 What we're going to show you here is how to remove the front and rear quarter mounted

 You have two pieces here, you have the lens and then you have the grill.

 The grill has two studs that protrude out the back that go through the lens and hold

 On the driver's side you're going to move the battery up and out of the way and then

 Now if you have your cold air induction set up here, you'll have to move that out of the

 Once you get in there, it's going to be a 3-8ths washer that holds it in place.

 To get the one towards the cabin, you go in from this side, the battery tray side.

 To get the other one, the front facing one, you're going to reach your hand in on the

 front of the core support and that will go right up and come up and out.

 Once you've got that out, you're going to have your bulb which just bends and pops out

 and then the grill will come off in your hand like so and the light will come off on the

 If your lenses are faded and look pretty rough, you can buy them new reproduction and it will

 be the complete unit with the kit and then you buy the bezels, these outer bezels, separately.

 They come with the mounting hardware and it's a great way to freshen up your paint job on

 You may have to move your overflow bottle to get into the access area.

 Once again, simply get onto it and you're going to loosen it up.

 A lot of times, once you get these started, you can just spin them off by hand.

 And then on the inside, on the one face front of the car, you're going to reach in.

 Your wiring just simply turns and pulls out and that will go ahead and will remove those

 Once again, once you have it out, just wiggle the grill up and out.

 Push the lens out towards you and it will pop right up and out.

 And it's not a bad idea to support these with your fingers so that you're not banging on

 As that loosens up, the grill's going to try to scoot out of the car and it's going to

 make your gap smaller and it'll make it so you're banging your rear quarter panel with

 And note when you're reinstalling them, you can install them using three candle watt bulbs

 as opposed to one candle watt bulbs, which will greatly increase the visibility outside

 Trans Am Country, welcome to the largest 1970 to 1981 Trans Am and Firebird owners group

 Hey everybody, I'm KC the G free foodie, and today I'm gonna make an incredible

 recipe that I found in the first issue of Gluten-Free Forever magazine.

 All right, the first step is to turn the oven to 375, which I've done, and I've got

 A little Dijon mustard, gluten-free of course, you want to check.

 you can skip this if you're gonna serve it to kiddos, it's not crazy hot, so you

 don't have to worry about it, or you can cut the cayenne in the recipe in half

 conversion on this recipe, but the Gluten-Free Forever magazine also had a

 miso chili recipe for cauliflower that was delish, so you could grab that and

I cut it so it'll sit flat at the bottom, and I'm just gonna put

 some two-inch slits so that cheesy goodness can kind of get down to the

 the cheesy paste all over the cauliflower, and it's into the oven for

 We're going to put a big bow on her hair out of hair and we're going to do it on the side

 So first we're going to take all of her hair and we're going to stick it in a side ponytail.

 Alright, so collect all of the hair into a side ponytail and you're going to want to

 I found that elastics work better for this hairstyle because they're just really thin

 The elastics will keep the hair closer to the head so that the bow is not sticking out

 Alright, so once we get the side ponytail in, we're going to spray it and clean up all

 Okay, so once your ponytail looks nice, you're going to take the hair out of the ponytail

 and you're going to take about a third of the section of hair and we're going to put

 So you take the elastic and wrap it around a couple times just to secure it down.

 And then when it gets tight, you're going to take that hair and just kind of pull a

 Secure the elastic down with a few wraps around and then when it gets tight, you're

 And then just kind of tighten it down like that and that will help thin it out.

 Now what I do is I cross these two little ends that are sticking out and then I'm going

 And if there's some little short pieces, you can let them hang out.

 So pull the rest of the hair up that's not those little ends and then you're going to

 So make two even splits there and then you're going to wrap them around and tuck them underneath

 Alright, so now all we need to do is just clean up these bows a little bit.

 So we're going to take some hairspray and just spray them and just kind of, with your

 hand, just kind of wrap your hand around it softly with the direction the hair is

 Now if you have really thick, heavy hair, you can take these little bows and you can

 push them to the head and bobby pin them down so that they kind of stay put.

 And then you're going to take these ends that are left and we're going to curl them with

 a flat iron just to make them look like the ribbons hanging down from the bow.

 I'm going to show you how to play the basic jazz brush pattern.

 There are as many different grips and patterns as there are drummers who play brushes.

 I'll show you the two ways that I tend to hold and play the brushes.

 Beats two and three are played in the left hand as a lateral attack.

 The left brush is then lifted off the head as the right brush makes a lateral attack

 from right to left on the upbeats of two and four at about 12 or 1 o'clock.

 Then the right hand plays another lateral attack from left to right on beats one and three.

 I find this more comfortable for sweeping and for playing little three-note ruffs as well as accents.

 leaving on beat one from 5 o'clock, sweeping around clockwise to 11 o'clock.

 It leaves 11 o'clock on beat two and comes straight across to 5 o'clock.

 The right hand is playing the typical jazz cymbal rhythm opposite your left hand.

 When the left hand is at 5 o'clock, your right hand is at 11 or 12 o'clock.

 And when your left hand is at 11 o'clock, your right hand is at 4 or 5.

 Another easier way to vary your groove is to play little accents with your left hand.

 So in today's video, I'm going to be showing you guys how I was able to make this hello braid.

 I've seen lots of tutorials here on YouTube, but I've not been able to see anybody that did it with a very short hair like mine.

 I'm like, okay, let me just do it and show you guys how I was able to achieve it.

 Don't forget to like this video and please subscribe to my channel.

 And you guys know that I'm going to apply my castor oil on my edges just to make sure that my edges are well protected.

 Now I'm applying my Koi Enhancing Smoothie just to moisturize my hair.

 So after that, I'm going to clip one part of the hair away from the other side.

 And I'm just brushing this part towards the back because that's where I want the bun to be.

 I'm just going to tie my scarf on it and then just leave it to get dry.

 So you can see the hair is dry and it's looking really, really good.

 After that, you can see that I'm just attaching the Kanekalon hair to my scarf.

 I'm attaching the Kanekalon hair that I braided on the other side of the bun.

 But if you want to secure it very well, you can use the pins to secure it properly.

 Like I said earlier on, if you want to use the pin, you can go ahead and use it.

 Please don't forget to like this video and please subscribe to my channel.

 This is Chip's Hole at 408 and I'm going to show you guys how to, I'm not sure what it's

 going to make it again but I'm going to show you guys how to make it so hold on one sec.

And then you tape it all, you want to tape all the tape here on this so it stays.

So then you'll need to take those tops and you'll need to take those tops and cut

You put it there, line it up and then tape it all together so you

 you need to cut, you need a scissor and cut a rectangular or square shape.

And also what the best part is, this part is like jumping or popping.

 Hi, this is Dorothy from TajciBoseman.com and from FaveDiets.com.

 This crust is about a cup of sweet potatoes with half a cup of soaked sprouted oats and

 Pumpkins are a great source of vitamin A and powerful antioxidants.

 I use this to peel my squashes and all my squashes because it just makes such a nice

 And maybe if I remember I'll put this where to get these underneath there.

 So this is about, in here we've got a cup of macadamia nuts and a fourth of a pumpkin,

 And the recipes underneath you just have to click the more button.

 And then we've got a half cup of soaked dates and half a cup of honey, raw honey.

 We're going to add also about six tablespoons of psyllium seed to help thicken it up like

 You could also use a tablespoon of flax and three tablespoons of hot water.

 Five or six tablespoons of psyllium seed and then a dash of salt.

 And your pumpkin pie is going to be ready so fast so you don't have to bake it.

 And you don't have to save your pumpkin seeds because pumpkin seeds or pepitas, they are

 an amazing source of magnesium which is so good for people with headaches and migraines.

 They have rich in antioxidants and so good for you, the pumpkin seeds.

 This is real pumpkin so it looks a little bit richer than the canned pumpkin.

 And you could top this with some cashew vanilla whipped cream like I have on some of my other

 And if you wanted you could, if you want to add some calories back in, you could press

 From Dorothy at TycheeBoseman.com slash rawfoodblog and from faithdiets.com, enjoy your pumpkin

 Ok guys, today we have one of these DVDs from the library and as you can see it's locked.

 This is not a stolen DVD, this is just one that we forgot to unlock at the library.

 So two magnets we're going to need for this and then we're going to need something sharp.

 Very, very simple, take the magnets, put them on the corners of the DVD.

 So basically right now they both unlocked this mechanism over here and then all you

 I don't know how good you can see but this one slides open or close.

 All you have to do is just put the magnets on these two corners over here.

 You'll feel that it will actually catch and make a little click and then with something

 I'm going to let my girlfriend try it, give it a try and see if she can actually master

Today is tip Tuesday and in this week's home and kitchen tip I'm

 sharing with you guys three of my favorite tips on how to maintain your wood cutting

Now cutting boards are a very important kitchen tool and I don't know about you but

 I've spent a lot of money on my cutting boards and I want them to last forever, which they

 will, but you need to make sure that you take care of them and maintain them and treat them

 boards at least quarterly, if not monthly if you have time, but the reason why we want

 to do that is because a cutting board that is not oiled will crack and warp over time

 and in addition to that it will start to lose its luster and sheen.

 you don't continue to oil your cutting boards, it will start to lose that protective layer

 on the top, which helps prevent it from staining and also helps bacteria from growing in the

So to show you guys how to oil your cutting boards properly, I've

Now you can use mineral oil and that's what I used to use, but I was always

 weirded out about mineral oil because even though it's food grade, it still kind of felt

 than mineral oil, and it's edible because I use it for baking all the time.

 take a little bit of coconut oil and on a soft cloth or a paper towel, just put a little

 board is super thirsty, it might absorb all the oil so you may need to do a couple layers

So just keep rubbing it in and then buffing out any excess that there is and then

 when you're done, let it sit dry overnight or let it sit out for a couple hours and then

 and I don't want to and I don't need to wash it under soap and water everyday.

 I'm just going to do is wipe your cutting boards with a clean damp cloth.

Then with a little bit of vinegar water, I'm just going to spray the board and

 green onions and there's always that residual smell, vinegar water mixture will help remove

 for salads on your cutting board, you'll notice that they do a really good job in staining.

 And if for some reason you can't get those stains out with a little bit of vinegar water,

 you can always do the natural spot cleaner which is a slice of lemon.

 do is take a lemon wedge or a lemon slice, put a little bit of lemon juice on the board,

 rub the spot and leave it directly on top of the spot or where the stain is.

 sit for 5-10 minutes depending on how bad the stain is and voila!

 The lemon's acids work as a natural bleach to remove your stains.

 I hope you found today's Tip Tuesday helpful and now I have a question for you guys.

 float switch housing, we recommend removing the outer door panel.

 counterclockwise to remove, then pull out the access panel and sound dampening pad.

Now push the float stem to the right to detach it from the housing.

 Remove the screws securing the housing to the tank and pull out the old housing.

 the new float switch housing for installation by transferring the float switch from the

Open the dishwasher door and push the float down to realign the float stem in

Reposition the lower access panel and sound dampening pad, then secure the

Reinstall the outer door panel by first aligning it on the hinges,

 then slide the panel up and reinstall the screws in the inner panel to secure.

 You're now ready to restore power to the dishwasher and confirm that it's working properly.

 Hello, people often ask me how to roast garlic, so I'm going to show you.

 First, select the garlic bulbs that are nice and tight, not all dried out and loose.

 Select a small roasting pan like this, and we're going to cut the tops off them and put

 I'm using a non-reactive ceramic knife because it won't impart any flavors, and easy to clean.

 Obviously, we're going to use the top of these garlics for just chopped garlic.

 These are going upside down in the pan, and I'll be right back.

 The first one is we're going to drizzle a little bit of extra virgin olive oil in the

 It's going to produce a little caramelization, as well as keep the garlic from sticking.

 We're just going to move this around a little bit, make sure all the garlic gets a little

 Then we're going to add a little bit of very mild chicken stock.

 We're going to let this bake for maybe an hour and a half, two hours.

 The time's not that important because garlic comes in different sizes, as you know.

 This roasted garlic will squeeze right out of the bulb very easily.

 We're going to enjoy it with some French bread and a little sautéed chicken, asparagus,

 Special thanks to our sponsor Mountain Metal Wool for providing today's yarn.

 To begin this stitch you must create a foundation chain in multiples of two.

 Beginning in the second chain from our hook we're going to do a slip stitch.

 And we'll continue repeating the slip stitch and half double crochet until the end of the

 Then we'll do a half double crochet into the stitch after that.

 Hello everyone, ever wonder where the gold and glimpse paintings came from?

 Using gold leaves can be pretty tricky because they're extremely thin and breakable, but

 in this tutorial hopefully you'll learn how to use them carefully and have fun.

 Next you need a nice paintbrush, small in size preferably, a pencil, any sort as well,

 You definitely need a scissor if you want to cut in precision to something.

 Next you'll need a paper, again if you want to cut to like a shape or something, if you

 Some handy dandy tweezers, and last but not least a cup of water.

 You can use water but other glues also work with this, I just prefer to use water.

 If you're using gold leaves for the first time it's good to wear cotton gloves as it

 prevents the oils in our hands to get in contact with the leaves, which allows it to tear.

 However I don't have any cotton gloves at the moment so I'll just show you how to use

 So first I'm taking this paper and this pencil and I'm just putting the pencil aside for

 I want to use the paper and kind of go over the area that I want to frame or stencil around

 I guess so that I can cut my gold leaf to the exact precise measurement.

 So in this case it's a triangle so I'm just kind of folding the paper over to get the

 And then once I've folded it and it's unfolded I just trace out the shape again for extra

 So now I bring in my gold leaf and it comes in a booklet like this.

 In between them there's a thin layer of tissue to sort of protect them.

 I bring out my tweezer and you want to be really careful at this point because it's

 very easily breakable and especially because we're not wearing gloves you need to be even

 So now that I've got it inside my area like this, my paper is securely folded over.

 I take my scissors and I just cut around the shape that I want to go for.

 So now when you're done cutting I'm just going to put this aside after I've measured that

 So putting it in between the paper also helps it cut much easier than if you tried cutting

 And I'm putting away the extras because you can definitely use them later on for various

 So I've put my gold leaf aside and at this point I'm going to take out my brush and just

 Obviously you don't want it to be overflowing wet but wet enough so that it covers the space

 And I'm just making sure that I have all the edges completely covered.

 And it's pretty tricky because it kind of sticks to the water right away.

 So the look that I'm kind of going for is I don't want it to be exactly precisely on

 And when it does fall in you kind of can push it around with your finger and maneuver it

 a dilemma at this time of year, harvest time, what do you do with all those herbs?

You can actually just chop it up, put it in ice cube trays with a little water or

 But I've got an old-fashioned way to freeze basil along with Parmesan cheese that is fantastic.

 very lemony along with being clove and citrus-like and licorice-tasting as well.

And it was actually developed by a friend and colleague in Athens, Ohio.

 know, when you have basil that's been sitting around after you chop it, it'll turn black.

And before we go on to our freezing method, I want to show you a little bit.

 flower heads off, the plant is signaled to go to seed and then die.

 to, and just rake these with your fingers and remove the old petals, what you're going

 to find are, see if we can get a good shot of this, tiny black seeds.

 know it's the good stuff because the name will be on the outside of the rind.

 the way, when you get to this rind, you can't eat the rind, but it is great in soups and

So what I do is I just freeze this and then when I want to flavor a soup and

 Reggiano, more basil and just keep layering up, up, up with a layer of basil and a layer

 to take your lid, put it on, label it, basil and parm, 10-08, put it in the freezer and

 The Parmesan actually pulls some of the moisture out of the basil leaves so they stay nice

 Hey guys, it's Michael from Lean Body Lifestyle here, and today we're back in the kitchen

 with another recipe video, and what we're going to do is actually make some very simple

 So, these take around 10 minutes from start to finish, and we're actually going to prepare

 everything on the George Foreman, but like always, if you don't have a George Foreman

 at your house, you can easily make this on the stove, no problem.

 So this right here is probably going to be one of the quickest and most convenient recipes

 that I've ever done on my channel, and the reason for this is we're going to use 6 ounces

 This is great if you're ever in a rush, you don't have enough time to cook, this is better

 So, if you would rather use raw ingredients, you can do that as well, but all we're going

 to do is take this frozen beef and set it on the George Foreman.

 So the nice thing about using this beef is that it's already precooked, so all we really

 have to do is let the heat of the George Foreman warm it up, and before we close the lid, we're

 going to take 2 teaspoons of some fajita seasoning and sprinkle that on top of the beef.

 You can use any other type of pepper that you want, or any kind of onion, it's really

 And now that I've sliced up about half of each one, so we do have some leftovers, what

 we're going to do is put this on the other half of the George Foreman, and the beef is

 actually almost fully cooked already, but then we'll go ahead and close the lid so it

 And this is already shaping up to be a great meal with all the colors right here, and the

 smell of the beef, and now what we're going to do is actually take 2 teaspoons more of

 the fajita seasoning and sprinkle that on top of the peppers and onion.

 And we'll close the lid, and we'll let all of that cook in there for not much time at

 So after a few minutes, all of this is cooked up, it looks great, it smells amazing, and

 Now it's time to actually make the fajita and put everything that we cooked inside of

 So what I have right here on this plate is 2 whole wheat tortillas, and obviously I don't

 know the exact foods that you like, or if you like spicy foods, or if you like cheese

 But today I'm going to add some low-fat cheddar cheese to mine, some hot sauce, and a bit

 And there you have it, 2 beef fajitas that are ready in 10 minutes from start to finish.

 We've got the fajita seasoning that we added, we've got all the beef, the peppers, the onions,

 topped off with a little bit of hot sauce, some low-fat cheddar cheese, and 1 tablespoon

 These are really going to taste great, so I highly recommend you guys try these out.

 And that is pretty much going to lead us to the end of this video, but with a recipe like

 this, there really is no excuse not to make yourself a quick lunch or dinner, and I promise

 But if you enjoyed this one, I would really appreciate it if you would click on that like

 It helps the channel grow a ton, and I really do appreciate it.

 And as always, if you want to stop by Facebook or follow me on Twitter, those links are down

 You can subscribe for more videos, but I'll talk to you guys next time.

 Hi there fishermen, I have a simple solution to you for the big problem of getting your

 All you need is a little bit of zoom bait, a little bit of patience and a fishing hook.

 This is guaranteed to be able to fish around limbs, lily pads and all kinds of the other

 I'm going to show you how to run a hook through your zoom bait so that you will never get

 snagged on a log, weed, a limb or anything and you can go fishing some nice environments

 where fish are hidden and they will jump out and grab your bait.

 So basically you take your zoom bait and the idea is you're going to stick the hook through

 and then tuck it into the bait so that you don't get your snags.

 So basically you take the hook, run it through the top of your lure, your zoom bait in this

 Then run the hook out of the bait, slide, see it's sliding the lure up the string and

 then after it pops out you take the hook and you stick it back into the bait and then tighten

 the string up and there you have, as you can see, the hook is in there, it's not going

 to get snagged on anything, very smooth, no worries, so go out and catch them.

 What's up YouTube this is DocFunky told you last time we'd be back to Giant Robots

 you can see right away this is the wing version not the weapon version

 the cool side of the packaging because all the other ones are the same

 you see he comes with some hands and stands and all that good stuff

 there's the joint, the arm that comes with the stand, the revoltex joint that goes in it

 revoltex I've unboxed but the Evangelions are kind of a lighter build

 These are just kind of flat, matte finish on the inside, glossier on the outside.

 Because they're kind of small and hard to hold on to with my big fingers.

 I think that version also comes with a busted head and a busted arm

 He's a little bit, maybe just a little bit taller than the bracken.

 You can see he's not really, it's not anywhere near exact so forget it.

 I'm not sure what they're called because I'm not a big joint expert I guess.

 which doesn't go very far up, just, well, that's pretty decent.

 Hi guys, this is the second video tutorial based on some elements on this lovely card

The first one was on how to make this little ribbon flower at the top.

 This video is going to focus now on how to make this little ribbon trim down the bottom.

 the bottom here is just some cardstock with ribbon that's been threaded with some additional

 cropper dial and using the 3 16th hole which is the larger of the two holes on the cropper

 dial, lining that up in the middle of each scallop and going along, helps if it's in

 video and punching out some little holes all the way along the centre of your border so

 Then you get yourself a piece of ribbon, this is the 1 4 inch gosgrain ribbon.

 so you've got almost 1 1 half times what you'll need for your finished border that you're

The other thing you'll need to make your border is a contrasting piece of

 cardstock for the card that I've made there, this is some natural ivory.

 just want to cut yourself a whole bunch of strips of cardstock, roughly 3 16ths but you

 Once you've done that, the last thing you'll need is a pair of fine pointed tweezers and

 put your ribbon down on your tabletop, take your cardstock that's been scalloped and punched

 out, lay it over the top of your ribbon, take your tweezers and just gently pull through

 you take one of these lovely pieces of cardstock that you've cut into a little strip, I'll

 use my tweezers so my big fat fingers will be out of the way, feed it through the loop

I'm trying to watch what I'm doing in the video as I do it guys.

 there, pull your ribbon, now as you do it just make sure that your piece of cardstock

 lays flat, pull your ribbon like that, turn your cardstock over, hold your ribbon end

 down but hold either side of the little piece that you've added and give it a little pull

 and when you do you'll feel it sort of pop and that little piece of natural ivory cardstock

 will actually pop out and see how it's now protruding above the piece of real red there?

 I don't know if you can really see that very well on the camera.

 piece you don't need to do the subsequent pieces but just to keep your trim in the right

 place get yourself a little tiny bit of sticky strip and put it right at the start of your

 piece of ribbon just to hold that ribbon in place so that you're not pulling undone anything

 your ribbon, pull it through like that so you've got a loop, piece of cardstock, thread

 it through, turn it over so it sort of lays half flat, start to pull your ribbon back

 through and before you pop it all the way through flip it over, stick it on the bench

 top, two fingers either side and give it a pull and it'll pop up and a little piece of

 natural ivory will pop up and just continue along guys until you've done every single

Now there are lots of other tricks you can do with this similar sort of technique

 but with using the cardstock just as holders and pulling it out at the end and making loops

 instead of these pull bits I can probably make another video to show you all the other

 more zhuzh in your ribbons as you go along you can just use your tweezers and you can

 make that fluffy and puffy if that's what you want as you go along.

 work with your ribbon as you put your pieces in because it will get too hard as you go

So that's all it is guys and when you get to the other end secure the other piece

 up with a neat little scallop border that's something a little bit different.

 guys I hope you enjoyed that and like I said I might come back and show you a few different

It is one week to Halloween now, so we're kind of running out of time

 I was in Halloween store looking for my Halloween costume well for two Halloween costumes, and there were fake teeth everywhere

 Two they never ever fit in my mouth certainly not comfortably and obviously when you have them in you can't drink

 you can't eat with them in the plus side of them is that they really change your whole outfit and

 you can even dress relatively normally maybe with a smoky eye and

 Style version of this this will fit any teeth because you're doing it onto your own teeth

 This is just what I found on Amazon, and they are called tooth enamels.

 I got a brown one and I got a black one depending on what look you go for depends on what color you would get if

 You're going for zombie or decaying teeth you want to go for this brown one

 Which is called nicotine and then a black one which is perfect for fangs

 Because if you invest in one of these which is like four pound ninety nine which is a dinner like ten dollars a little bit

 You obviously aren't gonna use all this in one Halloween so you could save it and use it over like for Halloween's it doesn't have

 An expiry date or anything so it's just a paint that you can put on your teeth

 And it just scrubs off with a toothbrush really easily this may be something that you've never even thought of doing before

 So I'm gonna share that with you now this first one would be good if you were going to

 Anything that would any animal that has pointy sharp pointy teeth when you're doing sharp pointy teeth

 I recommend that you use a brush like this or you know like a lip gloss brush or a

 That's sharp so that you can you know be more accurate with it first thing you need to do with any of these tooth

 Makeup remover pad and you rub it on your teeth until your teeth are dry because the paint needs to be

 Your teeth to be dry to stick to it because if they're wet it's just gonna run off

 And then I'm gonna fold up and stick it up inside my lips so that it keeps my lips off my teeth really attractively

 Try not to find me too attractive right now, how do I talk while doing this?

 then you could literally just draw the whiskers on or whatever and your smokey eye and

 You're good to go so this is what it looks like with the spiky teeth you could do on the bottom teeth as well

 It's crazy isn't it okay, so now I'm gonna show you how to get rotted teeth, which would be good with a zombie look or

 Probably best with a zombie or you know if you go in as a dead version of something like a dead cheerleader or a dead

 Mini mouse dead nurse whatever this is quite disgusting so be prepared.

 We're going to use this to dab it on so there's more product in certain places

Okay, so this is what it looks like with the brown one for the rotted teeth

 Okay, so the final one I'm going to show you today is vampire teeth

 Which is obviously good if you're gonna be a vampire and this is the last one

 Experiment with these and see what else you can create these are just the three most obvious ones that would go with most outfits

 For this one do the same dry the teeth get them out the way and then we're going to draw these teeth shorter

 So like cut them in half in black and leave your fangs teeth exposed and then paint the ones next to it

 You know believable and I think it's really nice that when you just talk into people

 They'll just see glimpses of it and it's a lot more natural than having this big rubber thing in your mouth

 I wouldn't recommend eating because that might scrub it off, but you can definitely drink things

 I've also added a little bit of a black lipstick to make it more believable

 But you can definitely drink things and you can talk normally and yeah, it's really good

 so I do hope you enjoyed this video, and I hope you've enjoyed all my Halloween tutorials so far this year and

 So let me know what you'd like to see down below and I'll see you next time.

 It started out as a pound and a half but it's probably about a pound and a quarter, pound

 point ten or something after I trimmed the fat, ground, or sirloin steak.

 Tomatoes got most of the pulp out of it, so one large tomato, quartered, and I scraped

 Okay it's been twenty minutes, I'm heating up the pan, I'm going to put a little bit

 of vegetable oil in it and then I'm going to throw this in and cook it up a little bit.

 Then we're going to pull it out, throw in the vegetables, cook them up, and then throw

 Okay we got the pan heated back up and we're going to throw in the vegetables.

 The main thing is to get these onions, the onions and peppers, cooked down a little bit

 You can do it a stir fry type style and make it kind of crispy but you got to cook it down a little bit.

 Okay I added just a little bit of water so we can pretty much steam them.

 And we're going to cover them and let them simmer for a little bit and soften up.

 It's going to soften up a little more as I simmer the meat in with it more.

 I was kind of experimenting with a little bit of the wine and it didn't have brown sugar

 but barbecue sauce has a lot of brown sugar in it so I just made do with what I had and

 Okay, quarter cup of water and one small spoonful of the cornstarch.

 Directions say that one tablespoon is worth two tablespoons of flour so you don't need a whole lot of it.

 And this is just going to thicken up the liquid into basically a sauce.

 Then we'll bring it to a simmer and as it cools down it will obviously thicken.

 This is a 1996 Harley Davidson Softail Bad Boy doing an oil change.

 I couldn't find anything to show me how to do it so I had one of the manuals and I kind

 So sorry I already started but I'll show you where I'm at so far.

 Here's a little drain tube down here and it is connected to the frame right here and

 that is right behind the transmission so that's where your drain hose is.

 This is your drain hose plug and it just goes in the hose right here.

 Now I'm going to put the plug back in and remove the filter and replace it and then

 This oil filter wrench really comes in handy and it's just a few dollars.

 Here's my new filter ready to go and that's where it will go right there in front of the

 It says apply a thin film of oil to the gasket contact surface on the mounting plate and

 It says on all models except the Dyna-Glide put the filter on until the gasket touches

 the contact plate surface and then apply another one half to three quarter turn by

 I put the new filter on there and once the gasket touched the surface I tightened it

 another one half turn by hand and since I'm a weenie I put the wrench on there and turn

 In the manual I downloaded it says three US quarts SAE 20 WS slash 50.

 Also in the owner's manual for the oil tank it says three US quarts so I figure I'll put

 Make sure you have your drain plug back in your drain hose before you fill it up with

 What you need to do if your bike is like mine, if you try and put three quarts in there

 all at once it will go all the way up to the fill the neck right here.

 So what you need to do is put about two and a half quarts in and then you start your bike

 to let the oil pump circulate that oil throughout the engine and the level will lower inside

 Hi everyone, we are back in the craft room and this is my second to last video for the

 I have one more that might come out after, but with Christmas right around the corner

 I don't think I'll have time to finish all the other ones I'd hope to get done.

 But my hot glue is heating up and I'm going to do this cone that I made before.

 I wanted to show you real quick with a tutorial on how to make the cones.

 You don't have to do poster board, you can just do... this was out of a little lunch

 I made this out of just regular typing paper and I put a resin or a mod podge over it and

 Then I just glued together on this particular one a bunch of glass beads and a golf tee

 This one I put some ribbon around and this one I put glitter along the bottom and punched

 I'm going to start at the top, get that first piece down and then I'm just going to start

 Every once in a while I'm going to stick some hot glue on here so that it has something

 When you get to the very bottom, all I'm going to do is take my scissors and pull a

 piece off and make sure that the very bottom is covered everywhere.

 Then I'm going to put a dab of glue in there and I'm going to fold this last piece down

 You could do little beads or a ribbon to make a garland on there.

 I think all I'm going to do is I have these glittered pieces of resin that I had an ice

 cube tray of stars and I had some extra resin when I was working on another project, threw

 All I'm going to do is put a dab of hot glue on there and then plop it right on there and

 Remember the cones are really easy to make and I have two videos on how to make the cones.

 To get a similar sound out of your amp, use your clean channel with a slight reverb and

 You will want to use your guitar's neck pickup for a warmer tone.

 We start by placing our third finger on the 7th fret of the 5th string and our first finger

 Next we play the 6th fret of the 6th string with our second finger, followed by the 5th

 Make sure to leave your 3rd finger on the 7th fret of the 5th string the whole time.

 The riff begins on the upbeat after 4, so you will first hear a complete 4 count, followed

 Hey everyone, Jared here and today I want to talk to you about separating the two different

Now as drummers we're required to use all four of our limbs, our hands and our feet.

 And not only that, these limbs have to be doing different things at different times.

 So if you're just playing like an eighth note groove on the ride, sometimes you want to

 And so, you know, there's tons of ways to kind of figure this out and tons of ways to

 a day and I guarantee you, you're going to be absolutely amazed at how much better you

Okay, so it's a simple exercise and I've written it out in five steps.

 Step one is basically just between our hands and the right foot.

I'm going to play this for you guys at the same exact tempo so you can hear how

Now, for those of you who don't know what 16th note triplets are,

 we're basically fitting six notes into each beep from the metronome.

 Okay, so once you have that at 100 beats per minute, you move on to step four.

 we're going to be adding in the hi-hat with the foot on quarter notes again.

 is going to feel completely different than when you did the hi-hat foot with 16th notes.

 But just take it slow, work it out, and then you can move on to step five.

 on keeping the hi-hat consistently on quarter notes and keeping it consistently on the beat.

But this is something that's just really, really helped separate

 counts on the 16th notes and then again on the 16th note triplets.

 is just kind of keeping the beat and keeping everything consistent.

 you're used to always hitting both of them at the exact same time.

 I'm going to do it for you guys at 100 beats per minute, which is kind of my challenge

 to you and I really, really hope you guys take this challenge and at least just practice

 that's kind of where I'd love for you guys to get to that point and I think from there

 left with my hands, I just go right, right, left, left or right, left, right, right, left,

 Eventually you'll go into flams and you could go through all the rudiments if you want to.

 But today I really just wanted to challenge you with this one exercise.

 five, get comfortable playing that and see if you can get it to 100 beats per minute.

 time I hope you take it to your kit and actually get some use out of it and I'll see you guys

 Cut your glycerin into small pieces and place in a double boiler to melt it.

 Once your glycerin has melted, you can add a few drops of your favorite essential oil

 We really enjoy lemon, so I'm going to add a couple drops of that.

 Pour a little bit of glycerin into your mold, just enough to fill the bottom.

 Then you're going to want to wrap your toys in a bit of plastic wrap.

 Set them down inside and fill the cavity the rest of the way with glycerin.

 And I'm Bronson and I'm playing the chord of a 14 maple fusion.

 We're going to show you a hand technique that we used in the song you heard earlier.

 And it's actually, it's a technique that we learned from a group, Rodrigo and Gabriela.

 The strumming wise, it's you go down the outside of your fingers, any fingers you want.

 I usually don't throw my pinky in there, but you can do whatever you want really.

 Most people do their middle finger and their ring finger down and they go up with their

 And you get used to it, you get it in a groove, you get comfortable with it.

 And a way to spice it up I guess or put something else in there to make it more interesting

 or more expressive is you put in a triplet and that's just a...

 So how you do that is you go down with your fingers, down with your thumb, and then up

 You just put your, you go follow through with your, down with your fingers.

 And that keeps a momentum going so you can keep doing it over and over.

 When you see someone really comfortable doing it in action, they're playing a song, it just

 But I mean that's once you get comfortable with it, that's what you're doing really.

 Watch part two to learn how to add percussion to your strumming.

 Hey everyone, it's Tara here from 40 Below Fruity and my partner had his friend coming

 over to stay a few days ago and I always try to let everyone try my smoothies when they

 come over because I'm always curious as to what other people think about the food I eat

 and of course they're always curious because they see me eating so many bananas and so

 many dates and just so much food more than they would ever think somebody my size or

 So I gave him my smoothie to try and he went, whoa this tastes like bubblegum and I thought

 yeah we could make it a little more like a bubblegum smoothie so that's what I'm making

 Basically with this recipe what I'm trying to do is create simple recipes that don't

 use a ton of ingredients you don't have or really complicated because realistically I

 don't make a lot of complicated recipes in my life and I know that you probably don't

 Starting with two bananas, you want to make sure they're ripe and spotty.

 You could use two frozen bananas if you want, it's good either way, I've tried it both ways.

 Next I have about 15 Degletnure dates, you could also use Medjool dates, you could really

 I just find these ones aren't the greatest for eating but they're really good for smoothies.

 So you want to add this many dates because it's a bubblegum smoothie after all and bubblegum

 Next I have vanilla powder here, I buy it from a company called Organic Traditions and

 You have vanilla beans or vanilla extract that's fine but this stuff is so high quality

 and so tasty and a lot stronger than other vanillas so I'm not really measuring I just

 Then this is the one ingredient you have to have in this smoothie to really make it

 It's straight up orange oil, Simply Organic is the brand and this will last you probably

 six months so you don't need that much of it, you really only need a tiny drop, that's

 Using an orange is not the same, you have to have the orange oil.

 Then I have about a quarter cup of frozen strawberries and in here a quarter cup of

 Next I have about two cups of water, just a large glass of water that I'm going to pour

 Another option, I don't eat nuts or seeds but if you wanted to you could use almond

 milk in this smoothie and it would be really creamy and probably really tasty.

 You could double this smoothie, I practically tripled this smoothie for my breakfast in

 Depending on this lifestyle, the low fat, high carbohydrate, raw vegan lifestyle, can

 you drink a two litre smoothie that tastes like bubblegum if you want.

 So I hope you guys like this recipe, it's easy, quick and really really tasty.

 If you guys want more recipes like this I do have a recipe ebook, it's called Seasonal

 It's got lots of great smoothie recipes as well and some more complicated recipes that

 you can take up to potlucks or family gatherings or just make for yourself on your birthday

 So subscribe to my channel and share this video with your friends if you like it and

 Alright, this song was requested by Gun Master, who was the winner of the Guess That Riff

 contest and it is On My Own by Three Days Grace and the tuning is in dropped C. And

 Okay, that little walk up right there, all you want to do is barre across the fourth

 fret and on the sixth string you're going to go four seven, and then on the fifth string

 you're going to go four five, and on the third string you're going to go six.

 then there's a couple little chords here, it goes on the fifth string you want to be

 those and then you're going to do just the fourth fret on both of those strings.

 next little part is almost exactly the same except instead of landing on the fourth fret

 of the sixth string at the very end, you're going to go down to two.

 Okay, and these chords are similar but they're played different and they're down here.

It's second fret of the fifth string and then sixth fret of the fourth string.

 And it's actually kind of a reach for me and it might be impossible for some of you, so

 if you want to, instead of playing that note, keep your finger here on the second fret of

 the fifth string and play the first fret of the third string and then mute the one in

Okay, all you're doing is you're starting on the second fret of the

And then right after that, you're going to end with the open note on the sixth

Okay, and the last chords on the fourth string, you're playing on the

 fourth fret and all of these notes on the fifth string are going to be open.

Okay, and then the pre-chorus is the part that sounds like this.

 fret bar twice and then seventh fret bar twice and then eleven twice and then twelve

 And after the second time, the third time is the same thing except instead of landing

 do that once and then the fourth time, you're going to do exactly what you did at the very

 first and second time you land on open, the third time you land on the second fret and

 you're doing there is mostly bar chords with a couple of octave chords up here.

 going to go, you're going to start on the fourth fret bar and you're going to strum

 to go open and right after you strum it, you want to mute the string.

And right after you mute it, you're going to play an octave chord on the

And then right after you do that second octave chord, you're going

 to bar on the ninth fret with the 11th fret on the fourth string.

 you're going to go six and you're going to strum the fourth fret once and then you're

 thing except instead of barring on the second fret, you're just going to strum open.

And then right at the end of the very last chorus, you'll hear them

 For this recipe I am using 300 grams of bread flour, 160 ml of water, 50 grams sugar, 8

 grams salt, 12 grams milk powder, 5 grams salt and then I have 35 grams eggs with 30

 For the filling I have 75 grams desiccated coconut with 35 grams butter and 35 grams

 You can always reduce or increase the amount of sugar in this recipe.

 To start this, add the flour into the mixing bowl and into that sugar and the yeast, milk

 powder, eggs and always add the salt into a corner or mix this first and add salt next.

 While mixing add the salt and the water little by little and keep on kneading 5 minutes.

 After kneading 5 minutes add the butter and keep on kneading another 10 to 15 minutes.

 While kneading the dough, melt the butter and put that into a mixing bowl and into that

 add the coconut and the eggs and sugar and mix that and make balls out from that and

 When you are ready with the dough, put some flour onto the bench top and put that onto

 So add some more flour, flour your hands and in a rhythmic motion you can just knead

 After put the dough into a greased bowl and leave it in a warm place until it double in

 When the bread dough is double in size, put some flour onto the bench top and put the

 So make a ball and leave it on the bench and roll it to a circle and after take one ball

 of coconut and put it in the middle and seal the edges nicely like this and press it down

 So put the prepared circle on the bench top and cut that leaving the middle.

 So turn all over and put it on a baking sheet to prove again about 20 to 30 minutes.

 I am going to leave this in a warm place again until double in size.

 So I am going to brush the tops with the eggs and bake this on 180 in the middle rack about 15 to 20 minutes.

 It took only about 20 minutes and it's really nice, soft and moist.

 Hey everyone, this is Aditi and today I am going to be showing you all the tips and tricks

 to get these perfect little cake pops without any cracks with smooth coating.

 So I add the heavy cream to the chocolate and now we will microwave it for 30 seconds

 If the chocolate is still not melted, put it again for 30 more seconds.

 And after 30 more seconds in the microwave, I am happy with what I have got.

 I have got a smooth ganache and now I let it sit for about 30 minutes to cool down so

 Roll out a piece of fondant using a rolling pin to about this thickness.

 And using any flower cutter you have, cut out a small little flower.

 I will just smooth out the edges a little because I want them a little pointy.

 You can completely skip it out but it's just that I really like the look of how a veined

 I rest my flowers on a chocolate mold like this because I don't want my flowers to fall

 And here I have some water and some sugar beads which I will put to act as the center

 Put a dab of water in the center of the flower and stick a sugar pearl like this.

 Do these for all the flowers and then keep them aside till we make our cake pops.

 For the cake part of the cake pop, I am using some leftover chocolate cake from my previous

 video which I will link down below or you can click the box right now.

 I don't like processing my cake in the food processor because I feel it gives really fine

 Now that I have all my cake crumbs ready and my frosting has cooled, cool till it is slightly

 Don't add all the frosting at once because the amount of frosting really depends on how

 Don't add all at one go because you might end up with a very soft dough mixture.

 Check if you have enough frosting by pressing some of the mixture in your palms and if it

 forms a shape and doesn't crack, that means you have enough frosting.

 Now that my mixture is ready, you have several ways to shape out your cake pops.

 Either you can use a tablespoon measure or even an ice cream scoop like this.

 For me, a good size is 1 and a half tablespoons so that's what I am going to use today but

 Just don't make your cake balls too big as they might fall off the stick.

 So here I have measured 1 tablespoon and now I am measuring half tablespoon of the

 Shape it into a ball and then rocking them between the palm of your hands, try to create

 You don't need to be perfect at this point because we are going to chill it for 10 minutes

 And now that I have all my cake balls ready, it's now time to pop them in the freezer for

 For the coating on the cake pops, here I have some chopped up semi-sweet chocolate but you

 So I'll microwave it for 30 seconds in the microwave and this is what it looks like after

 Here I have some chunks of chocolate left so I'll put it again for 30 seconds.

 If your chocolate is not as smooth and runny like mine and is clumping on you, then you

 can add some vegetable oil or some melted shortening to your chocolate.

 That will make it smooth and glossy and give you a nice covering on your cake pop.

 And now that my cake pop has chilled in the freezer for 10 minutes, the cake balls have

 a flat bottom due to resting on the plate but no worries, we'll shape it again by rocking

 it between the palm of our hands to make it into a perfect round ball.

 I'm using some lollipop stick for my cake pops which you can find at any cake supply

 I've transformed my chocolate into a tall glass so that it'll be easier for me to dip

 Now taking a cake pop stick, dipping it about 1 cm into the chocolate and then insert it

 Once done, put it in the freezer for 10 minutes again for the chocolate seal to set.

 Before we start assembling our cake pop, we need all our decoration items.

 Here I have some sprinkles and the flowers we made and a styrofoam to stick our cake

 The chocolate seal is nice and set and my chocolate is all ready.

 There are two very important things that you need to note at this point.

 The chocolate should not be very hot while dipping the cake pops because the temperature

 difference might cause a crack and the cake pop balls should not be too frozen because

 while freezing, the cake pops contract and when you put it in the chocolate, it'll expand

 So if your cake pops have been in the freezer for too long, then just let them sit out and

 come back a little to the room temperature and your chocolate should be nice and melty

 Take your cake pop and dip it till this chocolate seal is covered.

 That's why I'm using a tall glass because it's easier to dip the cake pop like this

 Don't twist and turn it too much else the cake pop might fall off into the chocolate.

 Tap your hands to remove excess chocolate by turning around the cake pop so that all

 Don't tap it too hard, you don't want the cake pop falling off the stick.

 Once you're happy with the coating, put on the sprinkles on the cake pops when the chocolate

 And when you're happy, just place the sugar flower wherever you want.

 You need to be quick while putting your decoration because you don't want your chocolate to set

 Place all your cake pops on the styrofoam and let them set completely.

 If you have any queries regarding these cake pops, leave me a comment down below and I'd

 Today I'm going to show you how to make a Starbucks green tea frappuccino.

 The basic ingredients are going to be a teaspoon of green tea matcha powder and whatever kind

 of matcha powder you use, you're going to need two equal parts of sugar.

 So that will be one teaspoon of green tea matcha powder and two teaspoons of granulated

 The matcha tea that I'm using is called Matcha Grade A and I got this from ArtofTea.com.

 It is organic so I'm using an organic matcha and I just like organic.

 It's healthier for you, it's better for you and it's green tea.

 You'll need a cup of ice, some vanilla syrup and you're going to need a cup of milk.

 You'll need a third of an ounce of vanilla syrup and this is your choice, you can choose

 So you're probably thinking yeah that's a lot of sugar but when you're dealing with

 matcha powder, pure matcha powder, it is a little bit bitter and you do want to sweeten

 And of course I like to garnish it with some whipped cream, straw and there you have it,

 your Starbucks green tea frappuccino and it's awesome and I love it and it tastes

 So if you guys have any other requests, questions, comments or concerns, leave them down below

 Thanks for watching, don't forget to subscribe and I will see you guys next time.

 Last week I made a coffee smoothie and posted it on Twitter and Facebook.

 I had an abundance of questions on how to make it and what to do and how much it costs

 So I'm just going to go ahead and make a video of it and everybody that's asked me can see

 I've got my Hamilton Beach thing, blender, single stir, and I'm going to use Hershey

 syrup and some Hells Brothers cappuccino and some instant coffee.

 My kids can't listen worth a dang today and I don't know what the heck is going on.

 These things are a dollar at Walmart and there's seven packets in it.

 Sorry, I don't really feel like coughing this thing out so I hope y'all can deal with my

 And then I probably go a little overboard on the chocolate but I really like chocolate.

 And then I'll take my Hershey's syrup and I'll stick it in there.

 And then I get a little fancy and I take my Hershey's syrup and I stick it in there.

 And you know when you have a little bit of free time, it doesn't hurt to do a few little designs of your own.

 The kids might run in here because there's something going on in the kitchen.

 If you don't have it blended good, just be careful when you drink it.

 Make sure all the heavy chunks get under the bottom so I can blend them up.

 So, for today's DIY we're actually into the Christmas Holiday Series

 and if you didn't watch the previous video I'm gonna link down below and right here

 Actually, you can pause this video, watch the other one and come back to this one to finish

 It's a DIY gift ideas for your holidays, for people that you love

 So, if you are like me that you like to make your gifts more personal and cuter

 Also, don't forget to subscribe, there is a button down here and I'm gonna link also up here

 that you can click and you're gonna go directly to subscription

 It's a good Christmas gift, so you can give me one of your thumbs

 doily paper, a mason jar or any jar and some fresh and healthy cookies

 You can find the cookie recipe, the healthy one, down below on the description box

 and also some other really nice recipes, they are healthy and they are very Christmas like

 So, here I'm just placing the doily paper on the top just to get the jar shape

 and I'm gonna put the lid just to close it very nicely and well

 and with the Christmas ribbon I'm gonna make like a kind of a bowl

 For the next gift you will need a Starbucks cup which you can get in any store for free

 Some Hershey's chocolate, this one is not vegan, it's for my friend who is not vegan

 So, we're gonna start off just opening the cup and we're gonna place in all of the stuff that you saw

 and then I'm gonna get the card from outside of the paper that it came from

 and I'm gonna just place in all the chocolate and also the candy cane as well

 You can do whatever, it's up to you, it's up to your creativity, okay?

 You can just get it from any Christmas ornament and just put on the straw and yeah, that's it

 For the next one, we also need a Christmas bowl, Christmas ribbons, a mug and Christmas collars

 tea, sugar, I got a Starbucks sugar and hot cocoa mix and also candy canes

 Same thing here, not hard at all as you can see, very self-explanatory

 You're just gonna place all of your tea and your hot cocoa and your sugar

 finishing with a nice touch with the Christmas ribbon in red and also with the Christmas bowl

 Those gift ideas, they are all very cheap, very nice to make, very handicraft

 and you can give them to anyone that you love and that you want, enjoy

 So I hope you guys like those DIYs, those gift ideas that you can make yourself

 and you can just, if you don't have the money, you can just make it yourself

 and I hope you guys enjoyed this video, I hope you guys enjoyed this video

 I don't have a lot of money to spend on this holidays kind of craziness

 These are just great ideas that you can just do whatever you want

 and yeah, they are very cheap as you saw and they are very cute

 because we're having a very nice holiday series and if I was you, I would not miss it, ok?

 Hi, it's Olga from Decorate U, and in this video I will be showing you this chia seed

 I will explain all of the benefits in a bit, but if you haven't had chia seeds before,

 They actually have no flavor, but when they come in contact with liquid, sort of like

 It's sort of like flavorless jello, so to add flavor, you put chia seeds in other flavorful

 Like in this video, I'm going to show you how to make the green tea drink that will

 I will explain the benefits of both green tea and chia seeds along the way.

 You will need green tea, hot water, chia seeds, and a cup or travel mug if you'll

 Green tea is full of powerful antioxidants to keep you looking young.

 If you're trying to lose a few pounds, it may aid in your weight loss.

 These organic chia seeds pack a lot of nutrients in very few calories.

 They can help with weight loss, keep your bones strong, keep your heart healthy.

 Stir your chia seeds in and wait for them to form their jelly-like outer shell.

 When I'm in the mood for something sweet, I like to add raw organic honey and some muddled

 If you want to see more healthy snack and drink ideas, give this video a like.

 And let us know in the comments below how you use your chia seeds.

 To watch another one of our videos, click on one of the ones you see here right now.

 Please subscribe if you haven't already, and we'll see you next time.

 Asians store rice in big cupware containers because we eat a lot of rice.

 So when we wash off all the rice, now you can see the water is clear.

 It's because I use the same pot day after day after day after day and for years.

 So real Asians use the same pot day after day after day after day?

 Now we have waited for the rice to boil and now let's take a look.

 We will be back when the rice is done and we will look at us eating it.

 Well, thank you for sharing your secret technique of cooking perfect rice with us today.

 What you're looking for is something that will just come together.

 Because what you're going to do is you're going to take it out of the bowl and knead it on the board.

 So even if it feels dry when you're done kneading, it will feel wet when it has rested for about 5-10 minutes.

 So now, once you're to the stage where there's no or very little residual flour and clumps left over into your bowl,

 So what we're going to do now is knead the dough until it's a uniform, smooth dough.

 So if you have any cakes with flour and water on your hands, get it off there.

 So kneading, my technique is where I push it down and away from me with the base of my palm.

 And then, so now some of you have doughs that are a little dry.

 You can go ahead and take your fingers into your water bowl or water container and sprinkle your dough with some water.

 And what you can do with that is sprinkle your board with some more flour and work that into your dough.

 So now what you're looking for is a uniform mass where you don't see dry bits of flour.

 But the key here, and this is not, usually they're like three times as long.

 So now once you've gotten the top cut off, you can work around it with the cut edge.

 So now, once you've got some cut, you want to flour them so they don't stick together.

 So now if you don't feel comfortable in cutting it off of your hand, and this might be easier,

 if you just lay it on your board and you slice it thinly as you would a vegetable.

 No, you can squeeze your dough so that it's the thickness that you want.

 Mouthfeel, it doesn't matter how wide it is, it's how thick it is.

 Then we're going to add our sweet, tangy, homemade BBQ sauce when we're all done.

 To get the chicken prepared, I just added a little olive oil, some salt and pepper.

 Once we get them nice and brown, we'll move them off on the cold side.

 We're going to also do some grilled asparagus tonight and go with dinner.

 We're going to remove them from the heat and put them on the cold side of the grill.

 I always want to go with the vents opposite of the flame so it comes over our food.

 In about 45 minutes we're going to come out and start basting these BBQ sauce and we'll have our asparagus on.

 We're going to take our chicken and put it back on the hot side.

 I also have some asparagus oil, salt and pepper we're going to put on when we do the BBQ sauce.

 Now that we've got our skin crisped up, we're going to come back on the cold side.

 We're going to put these inside, come back out, grab the asparagus and we'll be ready to eat.

 Please like, subscribe, comment and let me know if you want to see anything else.

 First, we're going to apply our foundation and I'm using the Makeup Forever HD foundation

 I have a bit of a tan here so I want to just go with a deeper color and one that's a little

 I've been using a fake tanner on top of it too so I really like this foundation.

 It's super hydrating and I like to apply it first with a brush and then move into a damp

 beauty blender to help blend that out and really make it melt into the skin.

 It makes it look more natural this way and give really nice, beautiful coverage.

 To save time, I've already went ahead and done my eyebrows and now I'm going to move

 into my crease shade and I'm using the Makeup Geek Cosmetics eyeshadow, a current favorite

 We're going to use a lot of warm undertone shades for this look and I'm using my favorite

 style brush for that, a big fluffy brush to go into the crease with.

 It's really going to tie the look together by bringing it underneath and layering that

 Another Makeup Geek eyeshadow is Mocha and I'm working this into the outer V of my eyes

 and this color is a true chocolate brown and it is also a matte.

 So we've been using two non-shimmer shades to start with to kind of just sculpt out our

 So I'm focusing that on the tops of the eyelids on the outer portions and then I'm going to

 carry it underneath on the outer portion as well with that little MAC 217 tapered brush

 I am taking this L'Oreal Paris Silky Seam Eyeliner Pencil in Gold and I love doing this

 It looks like liquid gold and it's ultra shimmery and you can just kind of paint it onto the

 I apologize it's a little blurry here but I'm mainly just focusing it on the inner portion

 of the eyelid and then carrying it to the center and then kind of blending it out with

 On a small pencil brush, I am now taking the Makeup Geek Foiled Eyeshadow in Magic Act.

 This is a really light gold shade which will transition nicely from the center lid into

 It's just a brightened look to help make the eyes a little more open and pop.

 Next I'm taking MAC's Coffee Brown Eyeliner Pencil, one of my all-time favorites, and

 scarily tight lining my upper waterline and then my lower waterline.

 I just want to define the insides of my eyes here because I don't want to take away from

 Another way to define the eyes is by using a nice rich black mascara.

 And I'm coating my lashes before I go in with my false eyelashes.

 And these are just like the best looking eyelashes I feel if you want kind of like a medium intensity.

 And they just really accentuate the outer corners to really flatter this kind of eye

 And it's a couple shades lighter to highlight and conceal all in one.

 And this is a nice way to apply it first by using the applicator and then taking again

 We want it to look not obvious since it is significantly lighter.

 This beauty blender sponge is going to really help blend that in nicely.

 And it's in the yellow tones to kind of help brighten and not take away from my highlight.

 Just with this little brush to set everything that we've just done.

 Kind of create my perfect bronzing shade and just put it in the normal places like my temples,

 my forehead, and my cheekbones, jawline to give some life back into my face.

 And it's a very creamy pencil so it makes it easy to blend and apply.

 And I'm taking the Clarins Instant Lip Perfector Lip Balm in the shade Coral.

 Thank you all so much for joining me here for this makeup tutorial.

 Hello all, welcome to another episode of sugar, salt and spice.net.

 cream into a bowl in which I am going to whip it to get stiff peaks but not completely stiff.

 Now the reason why I want this texture is because we are going to add condensed milk

 and vanilla essence to this now and then we are going to slowly start mixing.

 the entire 14 oz sweetened condensed milk into this heavy whipping cream with vanilla

 I also don't want streaks of condensed milk there and here in the ice cream.

So very patiently fold it and now it is all ready to go in the freezer.

 it's been 24 hours now after I popped my ice cream inside the freezer to set.

 but then I have a solid base so that my ice cream does not leak out through the nest.

Serve it in something special like this and just transform a simple

 vanilla ice cream into an exquisite lovely romantic dinner dessert.

 So I hope you like this recipe and a video is not complete until I taste it.

 and if you really really like it, please keep watching and please please do subscribe.

 until I see you next time with a great recipe, this is Sharda Rather signing off and my baby

 I work at Five Seasons Automotive Rebuilders in Sierra Rapids, Iowa.

 And in this video we're going to be showing you how to remove dents from your car without

 First I'm going to be putting the hair dryer over the top of the metal, getting that metal

 I am trying to heat up the exact same dent that I used earlier with the dry ice.

 And also just to make sure that the heat that I'm applying to the metal is just on top of

 By using heat on top of your metal you can severely damage the metal on your car by fatiguing

 You'll get an oil can effect which will start popping up and down if you use too much heat.

 Now with my other hand protected with a glove, because we are dealing with heat, you do not

 Safety is always a consideration when working around cars and metal.

 I just turned the hair dryer down a little bit because I don't need all that heat anymore.

 Now if you can get to the back side of the dent, feel free to take the back side of your

 If you pop that dent up too fast, you'll have an oil can effect.

 Just working around the outside of the dent, pushing the metal around.

 I want to get it a little bit hotter again, so I am going to turn the hair dryer on to

 Once again, just slowly as it is heating up, I am working the outside of the metal with

 Remember, you definitely do not want to get that metal any hotter except from the area

 I said if you can get to the back side of the hood, where that dent is right there in

 I know I cannot get to it with any tool underneath because it is in a bad spot.

 Fortunately that dent is not coming out because it is in a bad spot on the hood.

 The hair dryer is a method I would not use and I would not recommend anyone else to use

 it mainly because it does not apply enough heat and if you are not experienced enough

 in how metal works, how the metal works, the hair dryer can cause a lot of damage to your

 If you bring it to a professional and have it taken care of after you have tried this

 method, they are going to probably ask you what you did and then you are going to probably

 say, well we are going to have to replace the hood or the fender in your car because

 you used a hair dryer and you severely fatigued the metal in your car.

 So you are going to cost yourself more money in the end than what you started with, what

 you began to start with, trying to fix your problem yourself and do it for a little low

 This concludes this video on how to remove dents from your car without damaging your

 I hope you have better luck than I have working the dents out of your car at your own home

 To watch the other segments in this video series or for how to videos on almost any

 Today we are going to cook a vegetarian dish using aubergine and miso

 It might be too easy for you but please don't complain as long as it tastes good

 Okay, we start with an aubergine Let's slice it into pieces, probably about

 Put 2 tablespoons of sugar, 1 tablespoon of mirin, 1 tablespoon of cooking sake and 2

 tablespoons of miso into a microwaveable cup Stir it well until it becomes a smooth paste

 This is miso dengaku sauce Then take out the aubergine out of water,

 Please use cling film to microwave the aubergine Great thing about microwaving is that you

 Coming out of microwave, aubergine is cooked Be careful, the plate is pretty hot

 But actually when you feel lazy, you can still cook this healthy and delicious dish

 You truly appreciate the taste of aubergine itself with the support of miso dengaku sauce

 This video is to show you how easy and fun it is to extract DNA in your very own home

 The items you need for this exciting DNA experiment are half a kiwi, a zip lock bag, some soap

 and water mixed together, a salt water solution, a coffee filter or cheese cloth, and some

 70% isopropanol, ideally chilled in the freezer before you've done the experiment, some spoons

 So, to extract the DNA from our kiwi, we're first going to put the kiwi into a zip lock

 And what we're doing when we squish it is we're breaking apart the cells and weakening

 the cell walls because the DNA is trapped within the cells and within the nucleus of

 So, once our kiwi is squished up a bit, we're going to add about 10 or 20 ml of the salt

 water solution or a tablespoon or two into the bag, seal it back up, and then again really

 So now what we're doing is further separating all the cells of the kiwi, weakening the cell

 walls and the high salt solution that we've added will help the DNA come out of the nucleus

 Once the kiwi and salt water solution are thoroughly mushed and liquidy, we're going

 So you simply pour it into a coffee filter and filter it into this cup or any cup you

 Usually you want to avoid getting a lot of flesh in with the salt and kiwi juice, but

 a little bit is not going to hurt, so don't worry too much about it.

 So in this solution now we have broken kiwi cells and weakened kiwi cells.

 The DNA is still mostly trapped within the cells and within the nucleus.

 Now we're going to add about 3-5 ml of a diluted soap solution, so a tablespoon or

 The soap is going to help break open the cells and the membrane of the nucleus.

 And because there's so much salt surrounding the cells and the nucleus, the DNA is going

 And what we're going to do is pour the isopropanol down the edge of the glass so that it sits

 I'm going to add about 20 ml, but again, it doesn't have to be precise.

 What we've created now is a layer between the kiwi and the isopropanol.

 And at that layer, you can start to see the clouds, the strings of DNA precipitating

 This cloud sitting in the isopropanol layer is a huge amount of DNA that has precipitated

 So that's how, within about 5 or 10 minutes, with using household materials, you can extract

 It's a great way to introduce yourself to DNA genetics, and I encourage you to try it

This was supposed to be a four-day dry-age but I went seven days.

 fine folks from Umai Dry Bag Steak provided the special bags that I used for this process.

 going to go ahead and show you the next steps and how I prepare it and we'll do that now.

Nature's Choice cedar planks are the best that I've had and I highly

We're gonna cook it for about a half an hour in your grill or oven at 350

You want the tenderloin to come up to about a hundred thirty degrees Fahrenheit

We'll check back in about five minutes and we'll place flip the plank over and

 we'll turn or place the almond crusted tenderloin on top of it.

What you want to do is make sure you have a spray bottle because sometimes

 the cedar planks on the edges will catch on fire and you're gonna need to extinguish that.

 gonna go ahead and take this out and slice it up and we'll do that next.

I want to thank everybody that participated in making this happen.

 In today's Slanted Lens lesson, we're going to show you how to make a smoke tube of death.

 We're also going to look at the camera settings and the lighting that we used to create the

 Finally, we're going to show you how to create a very simple set so you can get your camera

 down low as if it's looking out of the grave at the person who's digging.

 In our image, we're going to want smoke all over the graveyard and be able to place it

 You know, a single source smoker, all the smoke emanates from one place.

 But with the smoke tube of death attached to it, it creates that single source smoker

 So we can put smoke across a wide area, creating a mist through the trees in our cemetery.

 We're going to start out with a roll of plastic temporary heating ducting.

 At Roger George Special Effects, you can get a one-foot black plastic ducting and that

 Most of the places where you'll find this temporary plastic ducting are going to be

 First, you're going to lay your plastic tubing out on the ground exactly where you want the

 Here, you can see how we've kind of wound it through our cemetery.

 We tape a small tube to the end of our squirrel cage fan to attach the tube of death to.

 There's a lot of different ways you could connect your clear plastic tubing to your

 We just chose to put a small piece of piping on there to make it easy to tape it on.

 We're now going to tape the open end of our plastic ducting to the end of the tube we

 This may not be the most official way to do it, but we found it worked best when we taped

 the hose coming out of the smoker to the intake side of the squirrel cage fan.

 This draws all the smoke into the fan and shoots it down the tube.

 We're using the Rosco 1900 and taking the pipe from the 1900 and feeding it into the

 We're going to give the fan a minute to inflate the tube of death and to allow the smoke to

 Now go along the tube of death and cut holes where you want the smoke to come out.

 If you get too many holes or you don't like where you placed one, simply put a piece of

 There isn't much pressure in this tube, so it makes it easy to open and close holes.

 If you want a nice mist coming through a set of trees, you can just run the tube of death

 This is a great way to create smoke along a tree line or a mist on a large open field.

 We had to bring on our tombstones in order to create a cemetery in the backyard of my

 So this shot will rearrange them and look back towards the trees.

 We're going to use camera settings that will help us to expose for the kerosene flame that's

 in the grave digger's lantern and also allow for our strobes to be the main light source.

 The frame is actually very bright, so we're not going to need to open the aperture up

 For our camera settings, we shot at F8 at 1.30th of a second and ISO 320.

 I use 320 ISO because it's a lot easier to get a good exposure on the flame and I don't

 We're now going to add a Photoflex Triton with a grid for a key light on his face.

 We're using a 10-degree grid to keep the light controlled and intimate, just looking like

 When I set my color temperature to around 4,000 degrees, I get a nice warmth on his

 This is going to open up the smoke and separate him from the scene on that camera left side.

 We added a Rosco CTB full blue on this light to cool it off a little bit, give us depth

 We now added a Dynalight head from the deep camera right side to do the very same thing

 It's going to cool it off and again, give us more depth in the background.

 It's closer to the talent to give us some separation and light the side of his body,

 Now for our last touch, we're going to add a chill box using our Rosco 1700 smoker up

 This is going to put just a little layer of smoke onto the ground at his feet and create

 If you go back to how to build a chill box on the slanted lens, it'll show you exactly

 Earlier in the day, we built a fake grave using three boards that are about 18 inches

 We shot them together in a U shape that'll create the illusion that we're down inside

 So we flipped it over, shot screws into the sod with some washers on it to hold it into

 I'm now going to lay in the grass and shoot looking straight up.

 The talent stood on a studio box to get his feet over the top of the grave.

 To get that wide angle look, I'm shooting at about 17 or 18 millimeters.

 We now redirected the smoke over his head in order to help separate him from that night

 With this new setup, we're going to add an umbrella with a dime light head behind the

 That's going to give us just a little bit of fill light to open up the grave area in

 So send me some thoughts on how you're using the smoke tube of death and keep those cameras

 quite a while now and I've never heard him speak until today when he's telling

 everybody that he's going to be uploading all his videos on his new

 created and he said that I can go ahead and show the trick and do the tutorial

 spectator select the cards so we're gonna ask them to have a stop.

Have them place the three of clubs back into the deck and we're gonna take

 the deck and we're gonna cut the cards and we'll give the cards a shuffle.

 really tricky when they're shuffling the cards and mixing the cards.

 So here you take the deck and mix the cards any way you'd like.

 doesn't know what they're doing so they just mix the cards up any way they want

 and when they're good and ready and they feel like they've mixed the cards up say

 okay what I have over here are the two jokers and the two jokers have been

So what we're gonna do is I'm gonna just dribble the cards down just

 and the jokers have just plucked one card right out and the card they plucked

So wherever they say stop, peel it off, drop the three of clubs.

 clubs with these fingers you can shuffle the cards and as you're shuffling the

 you're gonna do now is you're gonna hold the deck like this and you're going to

 and you're gonna hand the deck to them and you've just stolen away the three of

So once again after you do all that and you have the three of clubs on

 the bottom you're gonna take the three of clubs with your pinky and you're

 spectator mix it as much as they want and you put that in your pocket.

 spectator takes the cards and they do whatever they want with the cards and

 joker, two jokers and you're holding them in a biddle grip because the three of

 locate your card and what you do is you dribble the cards down and as you're

 just separate it like a joker pulled out a card and it's a three of clubs and

 other than if you've got another three of clubs in your pocket but don't let

 them go near your pants and they'll never be able to figure out how this is

Oh I'm still sick but that won't stop me from uploading contest number

 I am Queen of Four and I am back at you with you in your home once again.

 A family is coming together, people are traveling together to be together and then for some

 it's a very sad time because family members have moved into the ancestral realm and they

 You had a wonderful mate last year or the year before and they are no longer there for

 whatever the reason is and you are feeling sad and so you might eat yourself under the

 And so what I want to say to you for those who are on this land, those who are the forefathers

 of this land, which was called Turtle Island before it was America.

 And for those of you who are now on reservations like in the projects, you know, been dispossessed

 And so we come together during this time and we lift everyone up because families do come

 And I want to say that now you are going to eat yourself under the rug, but don't.

 I am going to pull a few of the title recipes that are inside of the book, The City of Wellness.

 And then don't have potatoes that you put sugar in because the sugar is going to give

 Put that into your sweet potato and it will taste delicious with that cinnamon that will

 And some of you who are live foodists, then you may use your dehydrator now and get your

 almonds, your sunflower seeds, blend that with your olive oil and then you blend that

 down and then you have your crust once you dehydrate it for about eight hours.

 Now I myself, if I try to eat that, I might get an asthma attack.

 But for those who really need it, get your, not the white pasta, but your vegetable pasta,

 And for those who say, well I am not going to be able to have tofu.

 But watch out because right after that meal you are going to have to have lemon and warm

 Well, for those who are going to have a turkey, an actual flesh turkey, get an organic turkey.

 And then those who are ready to take a deeper step, use your soy in place of the turkey.

 And then those who are like me, then you just use your beans and your peas and all of that

 If you are going to have corn on the cob, that is going to be like a brick.

 Even if it is from whole flour and whole wheat and spelt and all of that.

 Take a cup of okra, chop it up raw, put that into the batter and guess what that cornbread

 It is going to be like a laxative because the day after Thanksgiving everybody is constipated.

 I was top heavy with so many clients because everybody over ate, stuffed themselves.

 And so I say that you are going to come to the table, just take one plate.

 Now just watch the family for those who are vegetarians and vegans.

 After they finish eating the macaroni and cheese, the normal, maybe, they may not want

 After they finish having the turkey and maybe the ham, they may not want to take it a step

 Light a candle of green for healing and go to that meal for wellness and come out of

 And when you bring your family together, don't make a big deal about your vegetarian lifestyle

 Put your vegan dishes on the table and let that just blend in with the decor of the Thanksgiving

 And everyone eat hearty, eat well, eat light, stay enlightened and try to get your food

 Sorbet is fat-free and dairy-free, and yet it's creamy and delicious.

 Sorbet is generally more popular in Europe than in America, where we tend to prefer ice

 I'm using red seedless grapes, but when they're in season in the fall, concord grapes would

 Next I'm going to add some agave nectar to sweeten it, but you could also use honey.

 What a food mill does is it's going to strain out the skins and some of the pulp from the

 It's more effective than a fine mesh strainer because it creates a medium-bodied puree.

 There'll still be some of the pulp in there, so it'll be a nice medium-bodied grape puree.

 Now I just turn the handle, and the grape puree is going to fall through the holes into

 Now I'm just left with the grape skins in the food mill, and all the grape puree is

 Now we're ready to put the grape mixture into an ice cream maker.

 It comes with a canister that has a freezing agent inside, and you just need to put this

 canister in the freezer for 8-12 hours before you make ice cream or sorbet.

 You can also purchase an extra one of these bowls if you want to make more than one flavor

 Now I'm just going to turn on the ice cream maker, and in 20 minutes I'll have finished

 I'm going to put a few sliced strawberries on top and a few halved grapes.

 Every time I eat sorbet, I'm reminded that a treat can be light and refreshing and still

 And if you're like me, once you start making sorbet, you'll wonder why you didn't discover

 at a Steve Morse arpeggio lick that he uses in his song Too Many Notes.

 a warm-up that he uses to get started every day with his practice routine.

 already familiar with an F major bar chord, starting at the first fret of the sixth string,

 it's almost note for note, all of those notes, we're just adding an extra note on the first

So one at a time we have sixth string first fret, fifth string third fret, fourth

 string third fret, third string second fret, second string first fret, first string first

 Second fret of the sixth string, fifth fret fifth string, fourth string fourth fret, third

 string second fret, second string third fret, first string second fret, and then back up

 those two chords back to back, those two arpeggios, we have F, D, first inversion with the F sharp

And the nice thing about this lick is you can actually move it up the fretboard

 almost indefinitely, basically until you run out of frets to play.

 D first inversion chord arpeggio, we can start moving it up to the third fret.

 playing the very first shape that I did here when it was an F major chord, but now it's

Then I play the second shape again, this time at the fourth fret.

 now I'm actually repeating the F major shape just an octave higher.

 example of how Steve Morse actually uses this in his song Too Many Notes.

And if I wanted to do the same thing but with a full arpeggio, it would

So this is a lick that has applications not only in soloing, but in song

You could use it somewhere in the middle of something, say you're playing in

 Now I'd like to show you now a simple texture of bricks and stonework.

 So you can draw just the top and the bottom of the courses like so.

 So what you're really doing is just basically doing a random brick effect.

 Now for the texture of brick you just can do a line that sweeps down.

 The light's coming from this side so we can do the shadow here.

 Just softening those off and just dotting a bit and dashing a bit.

 Just the shape of a brick and the next brick course down there.

 So as I say you can sketch this very easy and then drag it down.

 You can also put some extra shading where the bricks have been baked a bit more than other bricks.

 Again, little lines through, slightly textured lines down and so on.

 So we're getting elements now together to build up textures and tonal values.

 Again, in between the mortar in between you can just do some dots to give the texture of sand and cement in those areas.

 Again, if you wanted, that's a dry stone wall, we can get brickwork above.

 Just very random, very sketchy and then using the water brush end just to tone it in.

 It is so easy to do but gives it so much character to your sketches.

But what the whole point of this part is, is I'm going to show you how to get these

 So there's a ton of profit whenever somebody grows these if you want to sell them.

 you buy them at the store, one thing about when you buy them at the store, you don't

 know when they were grown and harvested and how long they've been in packaging.

 thing is when you grow these yourself, you know that on day 4 or 5 that you harvest them

So anyhow, the purpose of this video is I'm going to go ahead and show you how I get

 can see the difference, I don't know if you can see it or not, how green the outer part

 sunlight, but was sitting in the windowsill that chlorophyll I believe was being activated

 kind of a tedious process, but all, as you can see around the edge, hopefully you can

I'm going to put them in a separate bowl because then I'm going to go and feed

If you've got any questions, leave it down there in the comments.

 So the first thing that we want to do is we are going to polish our nails with the simple colors.

 You can actually use this color if you wanted to do your rockstar nails.

 You can use something like this, anything that has a glitter to it.

 So what we are going to do, we are going to get into some white paint is all that I use.

 And we are going to go in and we are just going to make our little flower petals.

 All we are going to do is use a very small brush, real tiny, right there.

 And we are going to go in and I'm just going to put one here on the corner of my nail.

 And I want it to be kind of a big petal so I'm going to go in and just set that down at the tip.

 And we are going to leave a spot open because that's where we are going to put our lighter like purple color.

 And all we are going to do is we are just going to keep doing this throughout our nail.

 I'm going to make some smaller ones that are going to go into bigger petals.

 And then we are just going to continue that throughout our nail.

 Now once we have that done, we are going to go in with our dotting tool back into our white paint.

 And we are just going to place a couple dots throughout our nail.

 And in the center of our flower is where we are going to place that color purple.

 And then we are going to add in our smaller dots of our dark purple and our yellow.

 Getting into our dark purple, in the center of our light purple is where we are going to place our little dots.

 And I'm just using a toothpick just because it makes them as small as I need them to be.

 And you are going to continue and do that to each of your center of your flowers.

 And then we are just going to outline, like we did here, around the center of our flower and right around where our purple dots are.

 If you don't have any toothpicks or a dotting tool, you can use like a safety pin or you can use a stick pin.

 Now once that is completely dry, that is when you will go in and you will apply your top coat and then you're all done.

 And I will have some pictures up at the end of this and that way you can see how wonderful that they look.

 5-point lighting with 3 Feloni bi-color high output and 2 dedolight DLED 4.1 focusing LED lights.

 5-point lighting with 3 Feloni bi-color high output and 2 dedolight DLED

 Hello, my name is Roman Hoffmann and in this episode I show a 5-point lighting interview situation using a mixture of 3 Feloni LED panels and 2 focusing LED spotlights.

The beam is put to the widest position of approximately 40° to be able to catch the hair, both shoulders and my talent's right cheek.

 The focused hard beam shows many skin details and should be used carefully if you do not want to show too many skin details or skin defects.

 My second light is a Feloni bi-color LED panel with softbox, which I run from a battery.

 It accentuates the left cheek and left shoulder, adds symmetry to my composition without lighting the front plane of the face.

 These two modeling backlights are very important for creation of plasticity in my two-dimensional image.

 Now I look for an attractive key light position, trying to put the light source high enough to create a shadow that separates the chin from the throat and the chest.

It catches both sides of the face, creating a not too dramatical balance between the lighter and darker side of the face.

 Then I attach the textile 40° grid, leaving the background dark.

 As my fourth light, I again use an LED panel to softly fill the darker side of the face.

 As dimming of LEDs does not cause any color temperature changes, I do not fear any color disbalance using the dimmer.

 My last light head is a focusing dedolight LED light with barn doors.

 As I want to concentrate as much attention as possible on my talent, I shut the barn door to a slit that more or less covers the whole dimension of my talent from one shoulder to the other.

 Final adjustments of intensity and position of all lights helps eliminating little mistakes and balance the light on my talent's face.

 The beam is put to the widest position of approximately 40° to be able to catch the hair both shoulders and my talent's right cheek.

 It catches both sides of the face, creating a not too dramatical balance between the lighter and darker side of the face.

 They're really simple, really filling, and really easy to make, and you can customize

 the omelet any way you'd like and put anything in that you want.

If you're interested in learning how to make some delicious desserts,

 I also have videos on how to make puppy chow and how to make cupcakes in ice cream cones.

 all you really need are a couple of eggs and some EVOO, extra virgin olive oil.

 You can use any type of oil or even butter if you really need to.

 vegetable you want, and you can even cut up pieces of ham or steak or any type of meat that you'd like and add that

If you're using fresh vegetables like I am, the first step is to wash them

 With this pepper, you want to cut the whole stem out and get all the seeds out of it.

 And be really, really, really, super careful when you're cutting this.

 And then make sure to get rid of the little stem thing at the bottom as well.

 Then you can either just start slicing them or cut them in half again.

 It doesn't really matter how your pieces look, how even they are or anything.

 I chopped up about a fourth of the green pepper and three of the mushrooms.

 so I'm going to make two eggs, and I'm going to put these vegetables with two eggs.

 So if you're going to make, for instance, eight eggs, use the whole pepper and use like 12 mushrooms.

 And you want to make sure there's enough oil so your eggs don't end up sticking to the pan,

Then you're just going to let your vegetables cook out while you

 Now I'm taking two eggs, and I'm going to crack them into this bowl here.

 If you happen to be on a health kick, you can take out the yolks and just make scrambled egg whites,

 You should have washed your hands before you started cutting the vegetables or preparing anything,

 but make sure you wash your hands right after you crack the eggs as well.

 Then pour in a tiny bit of milk, and this is at an odd angle so I can't do it on camera.

 I don't really like white milk, so I definitely don't want a lot.

 I don't do measurements, but you just kind of put in as much as you want.

 If you want your eggs to be spicy, you can add some Tabasco sauce into this mix.

 Also, before I add the eggs to the vegetables over there, I'm going to just put a pinch of each of these.

 Alright, maybe you can tell that the vegetables cooked out quite a bit.

 So if any of your vegetables were sticking to the pan, you could add a little bit more of your olive oil,

 If you see the edges getting hardened, that's when you know to flip it and mix it.

 And I probably didn't have to add quite so many vegetables to just two eggs, but it will be fine.

 And of course it's easier to mix and get off the edges of the pan if you're using a spatula as opposed to a fork.

 A lot of food doesn't really look delicious, but trust me, it's going to be good.

 If any of you guys ever were lucky enough to eat scrambled eggs at my house, then you would love them.

 So I'm going to eat all these and some other stuff because this isn't enough.

 Let me know if you guys like this video and let me know what your favorite things to put in omelets are.

 And if you say onions, I'm not going to try onions in it because I don't like onions.

 Be sure to check out all of my links in the down bar and subscribe to my channel if you haven't already.

 And there you get some instructions on how to install the case.

 And to authenticate it, they include this serial number for each case.

 And you go to their website and you authenticate the case there.

 Again, Spigen branding to make sure you're getting the authentic

 And I'm going to do a video, and we're going to go over each case

 Your lens is a little bit indented into the back cover, which is nice.

 which is really good because we all know the Note 3 lens tends to stick out kind

 This is a solo lesson for the song Deshacer el Mundo by Héroes del Silencio.

 Play 5-3-2, then 5-3-2 on the 4th string and end with the harmonic on the 5th fret of the

 You play 7-8-10, 7-8-10, 7-8-10 on the 6th, 5th and 4th strings.

 I'm going to show you how to make a delicious fish burger with a chunky guacamole and a wonderful tomato salsa.

 Place them on a plate and cover with cling film and chill them for about an hour if you have time.

 Heat the oil in a large frying pan and add the fish burgers to cook over medium heat

 Once your fish cakes are cooked off it's time to get onto the accompaniments.

 Now it's ready to serve, so spread a little bit of the guacamole on the base of the bread back,

 And there you go, a really fantastic fresh and light fish dish which is so so easy.

 Check out the recipe on the screen and subscribe to the channel.

 So today what we are learning is how to install a drain into the tub so that it drains into

 So the key is what we did is we took the drain and we pre-fit it, meaning we put these pieces

 This is the drain down here and then we have the overflow up here.

 And then, so we bought this kit and it has these pieces that we fit together.

 Now the next step is I took some primer, that's the purple stuff right there, and put the

 Now I've already glued this one, you can tell it's an amateur job because I put a little

 We want to avoid that, we want it to look nice and smooth like that.

 Beforehand, after we fit the pieces together we put a pencil line right there so that we

 Like for example on this T right here and we will line up those pieces like so.

 Next step is we'll take some glue and we're going to put some glue on there and fit them

 We have got this piece glued in right here and it's been a successful mission.

 The key is having these marker marks, marker marks right there.

 That way, because with a piece like this you're dealing with these different distances from

 You've got some funky angles in there and you've got to get them all lined up.

 By having these markers right there beforehand, before gluing it, we're able to line it all

 Hello, this is Gary Crowley with Do-It-Yourself Joint Pain Relief dot com.

 And this is video one of four videos for upper right back pain relief.

 And over the course of these four videos, we're going to run through basically all the

 Video one, we're going to cover all the stuff in the area where it hurts for you.

 But also, in these bodies a lot of times there are things in other areas that are pulling

 So in video two, we're going to release some things in the front of your chest that can

 We're going to release some stuff on the side of your chest that can be yanking on this

 And then we're going to be releasing some things kind of in your neck and lower neck

 So in video one here, we're going to get to work on the area where you're actually

 And again, I encourage you to visit my techniques page on my website where over one or two minutes

 I show you these techniques specifically that I'm going to use here.

 But you can also just play along and I'll try to explain while I'm doing it here as

 So we're going to do what I call a sports ball release on all these upper back muscles.

 There's some erector spinae muscles that run along the side of your spine.

 So if this is your spine, the first thing we're going to do is we're going to run down

 and make sure that big rope that runs up the side of your spine is free.

 Then there's a bunch of muscles between your spine and your shoulder blade, your rhomboids

 and your trapezius muscles and some other things that we want to make sure are released.

 And then there's muscles basically on your shoulder blade that we want to release, one

 So the first thing we're going to do though is we're going to take a tennis ball and I

 call this a sports ball release because everybody's a little different.

 I tend to use a tennis ball because everybody has one or generally has one.

 And if you do this on the floor with a tennis ball, it's probably the best.

 What I do is I just lay this ball down and then I scoot around to get it right next to

 my spine, not on my spine, but just to the right of it since it's my right back pain

 And then what you want to do is you want to find a painful spot, a spot where it's tender

 And then while keeping that ball in one spot, you don't want to try to massage yourself

 Now because it's right along the side of your spine, you're basically going to want to make

 I could go to the right, but generally if you go to the left, you're kind of forcing

 And then I move down and because I'm on the computer a lot, I have spots in my upper back

 Now when you press into one spot and you make the muscle move, your cerebellum at the top

 of your brain stem basically gets the message that you want that muscle to function better

 That's not going to get the job done here the way we want it to get done.

 And then you just basically move up your spine until you're about at the bottom of your neck.

 And when you've got that stuff pretty well released, we're going to move on to the next

 But I do want to point out that for me, because this is kind of cushy, if I was on the floor

 the tennis ball would be great, but because I'm on this table, basically this baseball

 gets in there, wow, even better, which is really nice actually.

 That's kind of what I need for this amount of cushion on my table here.

 But we're going to keep doing it with the tennis ball since I'm demoing for you here.

 And now I'm going to move, so we did right along the spine, now we're going to do the

 area between the spine and my shoulder blade where a muscle called your rhomboid and a

 And I'm right kind of in the belly of that upper back, and this might be exactly where

 And it could be your rhomboid, it could be your trapezius, but again, it's just reacting

 probably to a lot of the modern living we do, sitting on computers, driving cars, and

 So you release that, and I just scoot around and find all the tender spots.

 And if you want, you can put the ball in a sock, throw it over your shoulder, lean against

 So now we've done along your spine, we've done between your shoulder blade and your

 Again, I think it's probably more from computing than anything else.

 I make that tissue move by moving my arm, and it lets go pretty well.

 I mean, I get in here fairly regularly because, again, computing is hard on the body.

 I mean, that actually lets go pretty quickly for me because I dig in there fairly often.

 But again, I do, and then I go sit at my computer for way too long making all these

 So that is basically what I call a press hold move with a tennis ball press.

 And on the techniques page on my website, again, it's a minute or two for each video.

 But basically, you're using that ball to press into one area, and then you're moving your

 body in a way that makes that tissue have to function or move under the pressure of

 And, boy, your cerebellum, way at the top of your brain stem, really gets the message

 And then the tissue on your shoulder blade, which is basically, it's a couple layers of

 muscle, but you find the tender spots, move that arm, get it to release as best you can.

 And then, now what you want to do is you just want to assess for a minute, okay, so

 Is it mostly gone, except for when I do that, or when I do that, or whatever it is?

 And just notice how tight things were if there's more stuff you want to come back to later.

 Because after we do all this other stuff, the stubborn stuff might be gone or might

 Just do your little self-assessment, and I will see you at video two.

 is Fidel Salvalza, I'm the manager of Integrity Auto Coalition and we're gonna

 take some environment particles that fall when you paint a car and we're gonna

 sand them and you will see the difference what I'm talking about.

 as you can see it's still showing right there so that means it needs a little

 this happens in old spray booths even though we have a 1 million BTU spray

 looks like it's gone and that's what we have to do to the entire car

 hi as you can see now we remove all the environmental particles out of the car

 we went throughout the entire side and we remove everything so now we're going

 to go to the next step where we're going to come back and start polishing it

 now we go to the next step which would be the first step with light rubbing

 compound special for this urethane colors so we put some little bit rubbing

 compound here so we're gonna do which is going to go lightly and start polishing

 as you see now we're done with it we took all the particles that were in the

 car you notice that we send sections of it back in the door and the coater panel

 and this is the finished product now when we actually glaze it it gets all

 Usually there's one or two notes that kind of make the lydian pop.

 And if you're playing that lydian, it would be like the B and C area.

 where New Yorkers have been getting their corned beef and pastrami since 1937,

 Now, you guys have been here, well, since you were a little child, of course,

Now, Marion, tell me a little bit about the history of Carnegie Deli.

 We're located in Midtown Manhattan, 55th Street and 7th Avenue.

 We're known for our corned beef, our pastrami, the big sandwiches.

 the first thing I do is I try to make my decision between corned beef and pastrami.

 And fortunately, you have a sandwich that covers both of it, right?

 It's prepared with a pound of corned beef and a pound of pastrami on two slices of bread

 For game day, we're going to make something a little bit special with America's favorite snack, right?

 We're going to take the classic corned beef and pastrami, like the Woody Allen,

 and we're going to recreate it using delicious Ritz crackers, right?

 It's our secret sauce that we use on the Woody Allen and the Reuben,

 We're going to make our Ritz pastrami and corned beef mini sandwiches for game day.

 I mean, you're pretty much getting two crackers, putting in a little bit of cheese.

 Sort of swirling the powder a little bit as I do that to begin to work the water in.

 I will work the water into the powder just a little bit with my gloved hand.

 And this is what really integrates the water into the composition.

 I will pass this damp powder through my 20 mesh screen 3 times.

 But I'll push it through the 20 mesh screen or 20 mesh kitchen colander a couple times with my gloved hand.

 And that really mixes the water thoroughly into the composition.

 And I can see that the composition is getting nice and evenly dampened.

 And that's ready now to ram the increments of candle glaze composition into their individual tube sections for the Roman candle.

 Hey everyone, it's Rosie and this is my next video for my holiday series!

 video that I made it with my white chocolate cranberry cheesecake.

 missed out, there's going to be a link at the end of the video.

 now I am going to pat dry to get rid of all the excess moisture.

 surfaces of the chicken because nobody wants an ashy bird, right?

It could be Trader Joe's 21 Season Salute, you can use Miss Dash, or a

 apple is actually going to add flavor and it's going to help the chicken keep

 its form when it's cooking because nobody wants a caved-in, anorexic-looking

 thumbs up if you're liking it this far, I would really appreciate that.

I did tie the legs with butcher string and you can cook it with the

 breast up or breast down, whatever way you cook it, that's how I want you to

 concentrate thaw out, then you're going to brush it on the chicken or you can

 place this chicken back in the oven for an additional 15 to 25 minutes.

 of people think when you cook the chicken with the breast up, it dries out

 and pretty and I'm serving it with a nice dressing, or should I say stuffing,

 chicken, it's still nice and moist, it's juicy, and it is good to go.

 Good morning, my name is Grace and I'd like to welcome you to my kitchen in Murrieta, California

 My mother comes from a line of bakers in Italy and I used to follow her all around the kitchen

 Just absorbing everything she did like a little sponge and today we're gonna make a limoncello cream cheese tort

 You're really gonna love this dessert and I cannot wait for you to try it.

 So, let's get started first I'd like to talk about the lemon curd

 I I will post my favorite recipe online and I tell you it's foolproof.

 Lemony cream cheese filling we're gonna start with softened cream cheese

 We're gonna add a half a cup of sugar inside and cream everything together

 Then you can throw in your vanilla for a little bit of flavoring

 You want to whip this until it's really stiff and I'll show show you at the very end when it's ready

 You see how it's all separating and making swirls, that's what you want to start seeing

 Okay at this point we're gonna fold in the lemon curd the lemon curd gives the cream cheese filling a nice lemony tang

 Your limoncello I add this to the lemonade to give it a little pizzazz and it also prevents

 Spongy cakes from freezing rock solid when you freeze the dessert

 lemonade and watch this real closely because you need to do this as quickly as possible so basically just

Let it drain a little bit and start lining the bottom of your pan

 Next we'll spoon on another third of our cream cheese filling and spread it

 And basically what you're going to do is repeat the whole process all over again

 Now the rest of your cream cheese filling will be spread on the top

 Use the freshest and the finest ingredients put your heart and your soul in the preparation

 I'm going to put it in the freezer for two and a half hours and

 Get it to set to a semi frozen state to serve just add a dollop of lemon curd

 I want to thank all of you for watching and I hope to see you all in Savannah, Georgia

 Going through the process of getting your vehicle wired and ready to pull behind your

 This is not to mention that if you change vehicles, you have to go through the process

 The Towmate RVH-W32 RV Tow Light is a wireless solution with a 1,000 foot range that eliminates

 It is a safe, easy and affordable solution that can take the headache out of having the

 The setup for the RVH-W32 is very simple and only takes minutes to do.

 First, you plug the 7-pin wireless transmitter into the RV's 7-pin female lighting adapter,

 Next, take the RVH-W32 wireless light and mount it securely to the back of your vehicle

 Then plug the power supply into a power outlet inside of your towed vehicle.

 When the blinkers or brakes are applied, the wireless transmitter sends a signal to the

Our cement is pretty well dry, and so you're going to end up with something that looks kind of like this.

You're going to take your extra fleece and kind of peel it a little bit.

Now, it doesn't look perfect, and it doesn't look perfectly smooth, but we're going to fix that.

 and you start lining it up with that line of cement you just made.

 I'm going to take a little bit of a break here, and I will let this dry, and we'll see you in a bit.

 Makes my foundation flawless, but at the same time I feel like it's a little more

I haven't fallen in love with using it as my foundation application

 So I know a lot of people use the banana powder wet and you can use it dry.

I'll show you how I apply it with the brush that I use with it, but

 Use your damp beauty blender, and you can also dip it into the banana powder and then use that to set under your eye

I hope you guys find this helpful, and I will see you guys in a later video

 So go ahead and start off by putting your beauty blender under some running water.

 And I'm just squeezing out the excess and squeezing it while I'm running it under the water to make it grow a little larger

 Next taking a cap from an eyelash set I used and my banana powder

 So I'm just going to take my concealer and run that under my eyes in an upside-down triangle

 And then I'm also going to apply it to my eyelids just because my eyelids

 So I apply that on there, and then I'm just taking the beauty blender

 So now I'm just taking that eyelash cap and my Ben Nye banana powder and pouring it inside

 and it just take a little bit as you can see there, then I'm taking my setting brush and

 Dipping it into the powder, and I'm just going to kind of press the powder into

 Just kind of press that into the powder and then I'm just going to apply it to my under-eye area

 So I'm also setting the concealer that I applied on my eyelids as well

 And then I'm going to take a kabuki brush and just wipe off any excess that way

 Now I'm just going to apply my eyebrows and the rest of my makeup, so I just finished up my makeup and

 One of the products that I showed in the video I didn't actually use in the video, but it's the Maybelline Dream Lumi

 I've been using this one for a long time now, and I just went back to it

 I kind of just fell in love with it all over again, but if I don't use that one

I also sometimes use my Mac Pro Longwear concealer if I want a little bit more coverage

 But I wanted to show you guys like that you don't always have to use high-end concealers.

I haven't found one that is high-end that I really like besides the Mac Pro Longwear

 These are really great concealers, and they're great for brightening up your under eyes

 I'll also leave links to where I got my banana powder because I know you can only purchase it online

 So like I said, I'll just list all the products that I use down below if you have any questions

 Area down there if you guys have any requests on videos that you want me to do any tutorials looks on anything

 Go ahead and leave that down below as well, and I'll see you guys in the later video.

We have tomato paste, we're going to use two tablespoons of that.

This is going to be a little tricky because it's gooey and it doesn't

 Mix it all up because it's going to become like a coating for us.

 I'm going to be over here by the stove getting your frying pan started.

 If you notice I always use any kind of drying rack you can buy at your local

 You don't want to just leave them sit there and everything sticks together.

 In a couple of minutes when we cut it we're going to show you what the inside should look like.

You can make this on a barbecue grill or you can make it in the oven.

 And if you make it on the grill you'll just have to judge it the same way you make it in a frying pan when the interior is completely white and there's no pink.

 And this black you see here, it looks like it's really burnt but it's not.

 Before we do the taste test I wanted to show you the inside of this chicken.

So now you can gobble down your food and pick it back and hit your books.

 To begin this stitch you must create a foundation chain in multiples of 6 plus 5.

 Beginning on the right side of our work we are going to do a double crochet into the

 Then we are going to do a double crochet into each of the next 2 chain stitches.

 Now we are going to skip 2 chains and this will begin our repeat.

 And we will do 1 double crochet into each of the next 3 chains.

 So we will repeat this sequence all the way until we reach the last 2 chains in our row.

 Alright when we reach the last 2 chains in our row we are going to skip 1 chain and do

 Then we will start our repeat by doing a 3 double crochet into the next 3 chain arch.

 Alright now we are going to repeat this sequence all the way until we get to the last 3 double

 And when we reach the last 3 double crochets we will skip all of those and do a double

 Then into the next 3 chain arch we are going to work 3 double crochets.

 And we will repeat this sequence all the way until we reach the last 4 double crochets

 So when we reach our last 4 double crochets here we are going to work 1 double crochet

 into the 3rd of the 3 chains at the beginning of our previous row.

 So we are going to repeat row 3 until we have reached our desired length.

 Hey guys so let's get started with another healthy meal recipe.

 And if you don't, just watch anyways because it looks pretty tasty.

 So anyways for this egg recipe, we are going to need some eggs.

 If you want to use the orange one, the red one, the purple ones.

 And so I'm going to go ahead and use green bell peppers in my recipe.

 And then I'm going to use coconut to help me kind of fry things up.

 So the first thing we are going to do, the first thing I need to do is actually cut up

 So as you can see, I am done cutting up the green onions in a big circle.

 So these are the green onions washed and ready to be used in our recipe.

 The next thing we're going to do here is I'm going to turn on my stove to medium heat.

 And I'm just going to take a little bit of coconut oil and put it in the frying pan.

 I'm going to get one of those green onions and I'll put it in the frying pan.

 While the green onions is in the frying pan, I'm going to take two eggs.

 So I'm going to go ahead and remove the yolk because I don't need extra cholesterol in

 The eggs are done getting whipped up and I'm just going to dump the eggs inside the bell

 I'm going to use the excess eggs that fell out of the green pepper.

 I'm going to go ahead and put my stove on really low heat so that the vegetables can

 After about 30 seconds or a minute or so, I'm going to open up the pot and then I'm

 So I'm going to cover it back up and let it sit for another 30 seconds to a minute

 After about a minute, the eggs are done and we are ready to eat.

 You can eat this for breakfast, lunch, dinner, snack, in between meal.

 As I was making the sassafras tea, you might have noticed a strange rock sticking out of

 Well, I chopped up some of the berries and I minced some really small and I'm going to

 I discovered that as it's been sitting, more than an allspice flavor, it has a really nice

 While gathering seeds, I gathered a bunch of lamb's quarter seeds.

 So I'll add about a half a cup of lamb's quarter flour into my flour.

 Now all I've done is put in two cups of white flour, two teaspoons of baking soda, and two

 As with making other bannock, you just add your water until it comes to the consistency

 I just made a little well in the middle and I'll just keep adding the flour into it.

 Alright, I'm just kneading the dough, using up all the flour I have in my bowl.

 When I'm done kneading, I'll begin to shape my pieces of bread.

 It's almost a brown color and you can see the little flecks of the spice bush berries

 Alright, what I'm doing now is just breaking up portions and making balls with it.

 And then I'll flatten these out so we can bring them over to the fire to cook them.

 What I've done is I took the rock that I had in the middle of my fire and I had it sitting

 up there the whole time the fire was burning and it made the rock extremely hot.

 Then I moved it over top of the end of my keyhole and pushed all the coals underneath

 And what I'm basically doing is testing out today if I can cook without a fry pan, without

 And then what we'll do is we'll take these little bits of dough that I've flattened out

 And I'm going to keep adding little bits of kindling underneath the rock to keep this

 As you can see the darkness of the flour, if it were white flour you would see toasty

 brown, but being that I used the lamb's quarter, it's a dark green, you'll have a total different

 colored bread, but opposed to white flour, this is actually healthy flour.

 Now if you wanted to you could let these totally dry out on the rocks and pack them in your

 bag with you so they wouldn't spoil and just munch on them as food for along the trail.

 You can taste the lemon from the spice bush as well as a nutty flavor from the lamb's

 If I did it again I'll probably add a little less lamb's quarter flours to make it a moister

 This is Tam Wendel, thanking you for joining us for this episode of Stone Cooked Bread.

 Nothing like stone cooked bread and sassafras tea on a nice fall afternoon.

 Hello, ReefDVM is coming at you with the technique of baking eggs to make them hard, kind of

 We're planning tonight to take some vinegar and some Easter egg kits and do some eggs

 So, you know, we've heard about this on the TV and in the news and on the online about

 taking these eggs and basically you put them here in muffin tins or on cookie sheets or

 even directly on the oven racks and you put them in the oven and you bake them at 325

 Supposedly they don't, well, they don't crack as much and it allows you to do a large volume

 I mean, everybody online talks about how, oh yeah, you get a few spots when you take

 them out of the oven and you just quick wash them off and then it works great.

 So we thought, well, let's take five dozen eggs and let's try baking them to make them

 hard cooked and see how it goes and we'll see what we think of it.

 So the first thing was, is we got some eggs, we put them in these very clean brand new

 muffin tins, got the oven up to 325 degrees, which we're going to bake these eggs.

 There's no water or anything, they're just in the tins, they're just sitting in there,

 but we're going to bake them for 30 minutes and then we're going to take them over to

 a cold water bath, cool them down, and then they'll be ready for dyes tonight.

 So again, there's no water in these trays, just the eggs are just sitting in there, we're

 You could put them on your oven racks, some people said you get marks from the oven racks

 Ah, well, we didn't really care one way or another, but we thought we'd give this a try.

 So again, we're going to put these eggs in here and see what happens.

 I can tell you that personally I was a little skeptical about this, but again, after seeing

 it on the news and on the online and everybody saying how great it was, well, gotta give

 So we'll set the timer here, put about 30 minutes on there at 325 degrees, and we'll

 Let's go get some ice water and water ready here for these eggs.

 I like to have nice cold water because it really firms up that hard egg and I like that.

 I don't want the eggs real cold when we go to dye them because I think the vinegar solution

 works better with the dyes when the eggs are on the room temperature side, but I definitely

 want to cool them down and get that egg to solidify inside, is basically what I think

 So I'm going to dump, oh, I don't know, half a pitcher here of ice in the sink, and I'm

 We'll take a little break here and we'll come back and get the eggs out of the oven.

 The moisture from inside the egg seems to come through the pores and then it bakes onto

 They say that this should wash off, we will see, but here they are, they're fresh out

 Again, these are just store-bought eggs that were just put in the oven for 30 minutes at

 We're going to stick them in the cold water here, and then we're going to try and wash

 off the little black or brown spots here that developed from the baking process.

 Some people say these eggs are easier to peel too because they're baked, and I can

 tell you that right off the bat, some of the spots come off, but there's definitely some

 very obvious spotting, which is a little disappointing, and certainly some staining, some yellowing

 It doesn't stay quite as white in the oven like I would like it to.

 There's kind of a stain spot to that one, which is somewhat disappointing.

 Right off the bat, they're not cleaning up real great, but we'll grab our egg trays here,

 and we'll get them dried out after we've cleaned them up, and get them onto the egg trays.

 So on the first tray already, there's a cracked one, so apparently they do crack if you bake

 I will check some of the ones in the oven before putting them in the water, maybe it

 cracked when we put it in the water, but we'll take a look at that here in a second too.

 Anyways, we'll keep cleaning these up here, and I'll keep putting them in the tray, and

 from there we'll see how many of them are cracked or stained that we can't get cleaned,

 I wonder if I try a little vinegar on these, if the stains will come out with a little vinegar.

 We cracked seven eggs out of five dozen, and there are permanent blemishes on the eggs

 I mean, if I'm going to crack seven eggs, I could have put them in water, cold water,

 and put them on the stove, and heated it up to a boil, and then shut it down to a simmer

 for 12 minutes, and it would have been twice as fast time-wise and energy-wise, and I probably

 Wow, look at this, we cracked a few, they didn't shell any different than any other

 Interesting, but the same spots on the outside also transferred to the inside.

 I can honestly say I don't recommend baking eggs, it's not as great of a thing as they

 This course Elton John and Bernie Taupin's tune your song from Melton's second album

 It it just translates really well to the guitar if we do a little some picking patterns that are very piano

 Centric and in the introduction for example what that is is I'm starting with a C chord

 He's in the key of E flat so when I have students if you want to play along with the album

 C shape of a chord by put it the third fret is courts E flat a C chord

 Followed by F major 7 with C in the bass done by really just moving two fingers adding your fourth finger

 to the F on the fourth string and moving your second finger to the a on the third string and

 Playing only five strings so the same five strings you play on a C chord.

 And then to G, but with B in the bass, and this is what's typical of

 Elton and piano songs a lot of inversions of chords followed by E minor

 So there are the first four chords C F major 7 with C in the bass G with B in the bass

 And E minor now in the introduction something happens that is even more piano

 Centric almost and that is the bass note never changes it keeps a C in the bass while it plays a C chord

 Goes to an F chord with C in the bass done by flattening out your first finger on the first two strings at the first fret

 F with C in the bass, and we're not playing the fourth string in this case G with C in the bass

 But what I've got there is my fourth finger on the high G and my third finger on the C on the fifth string

 And then back to the F, so that's the sound we have in that beginning the beginning

 Anyway, I have a lesson together for this at totally guitars now

 It's part of the target program where there are hundreds and hundreds of lessons on

 Quite a few on unusual songs that you wouldn't think of necessarily as guitar songs this one of course translates really really well to the guitar

 It's not really easy unless all these techniques are sort of new from you

 We talked about a few different picking techniques not as necessarily just a standard alternating bass technique

 So those are what are addressed in this in this lesson, so if you'd like to check it out

 It's up now at totally guitars again part of the target program

 We also have a lot of lessons generally easier lessons than this that are up as free lessons in the TG free lessons channel

 Here at YouTube and of course over totally guitars all the lessons come with tablature that I've worked on meticulously and

 charts that show the chords and the lyrics so if you'd like to check it out and improve your guitar playing and

 Work on a lot of unusual things and join a really cool community of people

 So today I'm going to be showing you how I do my everyday makeup routine.

 You guys have been requesting it so I have finally done it for you.

 If you guys want to see how I do my everyday makeup routine, just keep watching!

 I'm going to put it all over my lid and also right under my eyebrow with this Sigma flat

 I also like to bring it in this inner corner area because I feel like it just brightens

 It's very close to my natural skin tone so honestly if you want you can put it all over

 Alright, next I'm taking Soft Brown by MAC and I'm using this kind of dome fluffy blender

 And I'm going to put this in my crease area, like brow boner area.

 Next, I'm taking Embark by MAC also which is a nice matte color and an angled brush

 And I'm going to do like the outer V area and then kind of deepen in the crease area.

 And then I go back with my fluffy blender brush again and just kind of deepen that and

 After you have the crease as dark as you like, take Embark again on a pencil brush and just

 Next, I'm taking my CoverGirl Liquid Lime Blast Eyeliner and it's a little nubbin, but

 I only use brown number one, which is the brown that I use for my brows.

 Okay, now that I have my brows, I am going to apply my Clump Crusher CoverGirl Lash Blast

 There's also going to be a link at the end of the video where you can go check out Stephanie's

 Be sure to leave a comment down below telling us all the products you use in your everyday

 Hello everyone and welcome back to another great episode of Rehana's Cuisines.

 Today we are going to be making an avocado and chia seed shake.

 You can refer to my video on how to make avocado and chia seed bread that I talk a lot about

 the benefits of chia seeds and how I stumbled upon this incredibly magical product.

 So basically this is what our chia seeds are going to look like once they are soaked in

 water but let me quickly go and grab you the chia seeds that when you buy it are going

 So basically what you are going to do is when you take a tablespoon of the chia seeds and

 you add 7 tablespoons of water this is what you are going to get from it.

 And one of the health benefits that are great for the chia seeds is not only their hydration

 properties but also for how great it is for natural weight loss.

 So make sure you do a little read up on it, it is just really really amazing.

 So I am going to go ahead and show you what ingredients we are going to need.

 So for this we are going to be using as much chia seeds as you like into your drink basically.

 I have my magic bullet here, you don't need it, you can use a blender, whatever you have.

 So I've got about 1 quarter cup of crushed ice in here and then we are going to be using

 sugar to taste, salt to taste, 1 cup of avocado and then we are also going to be using 2%

 They are really super super expensive, they are about $7 a gallon but there is no added

 stuff in it and so we have been using organic milk for a while now.

 So anyways, let's go ahead and so the first thing I am going to do is I am going to go

 ahead and add to the ice I am going to add just a little bit of water and or sorry a

 little bit of milk and what the milk does is it is going to help bind and make the shake

 So we are going to use this half avocado, we are going to add that in here.

 So let's say I am going to be adding about a tablespoon and a half.

 Again this is not for me because I can't have dairy but I am sure my husband will enjoy

 it and I am trying to get him to have these chia seeds and get him introduced to it too.

 It is tasteless, it's just got a little bit of texture in it but once the texture you

 So we are going to add just a little bit more milk and then just to balance it I am just

 Now it is going to start, because there is ice in it, so I am just going to keep on doing it.

 Okay, so now I can tell from the consistency that it looks just a little bit thick for

 Although I think we should be okay but I am going to go ahead and add just a little bit

 Because I am sure when my hubby sees the consistency he will be like, I don't know about the chia

 seeds but I am going to make sure that he starts having this in his diet.

 I am going to go grab a straw real quick or I can just use a spoon to give it a good taste

 But because it's so cold and that avocado rich flavor is coming through, anybody can

 But I am telling you, you guys have to give this a try because it's an absolutely amazing

 It's going to keep you hydrated and it's like a win, win, win, win situation with this shake

 Follow me on Facebook or you can even leave me a comment right there and I'll return your

 But I would love to get some feedback from people who try this and really tell me what

 you think about it and what has it done to you when you've introduced this to your diet.

 This concludes our episode of making the avocado and chia seed shake.

 Hope you can join me here next time with another great and healthy recipe.

 In today's video I was just admiring my garden here and you know, I noticed something.

 I was going through and looking at all the beautiful foliage in my shade garden.

 My hardy fuchsias there, my mimosa up above, how wonderful everything is doing.

 I went in to look at my Himalayan Blue Poppy to see the seeds or the seed pods that are

 hopefully forming on it and I noticed that they have been ravaged.

 So they're covering everything and there actually looks like they're working their way down

 So it looks like a lot of the seed pods if not all of them have been basically sucked

 But I'm going to remake that video and let's make some aphid spray together to blast these

 Makes it easy there to know how much aphid spray we are going to be making.

 And what the alcohol does is it removes that waxy coating that the aphids and some other

 This insecticidal spray, this aphid spray that we're using, it works on a wide variety

 Really does good for a really basic mix that's non-harmful to the environment.

 And I haven't myself, and this is a disclaimer here, seen it affect any of my plants negatively.

 So if you have a very sensitive plant that you're worried about, make sure you do a small

 Basically any outdoor plant that you can think of, I have used it on.

 Google Blue Dawn dish soap and you'll find all kinds of different uses for the Blue Dawn.

 I'm going to use this little measuring cup here, which gives me 1.5 tablespoons or 22

 So with a funnel I will quickly fill this up and then we're going to go blast some aphids

 So from pouring it you can definitely smell the bit of alcohol in it.

 And so as I was saying, the alcohol dries or removes the waxy coating on the insect

 Makes it hard for the little nectar sucking mouse to penetrate further in and basically

 makes it harder for them to reproduce and move around on the plants as well.

 So you can see the damage that is done on the leaves there and everything.

 I've never seen any real damage done by this solution but it works very, very well.

 Alright, it's been about 24 hours now and the bugs are definitely dead.

 I did check just before I started filming and it's hard to do with the camera in your

 Some of the bugs that were on there of course are still on there.

 So I just basically poked around and put them on my finger and made sure they weren't moving

 I hope this gives you some ideas for making your own bug and aphid spray at home.

 And if you want to see more videos like this make sure you subscribe to my channel.

 Hi, I'm Charlie Moore, President of Visual Apex, and this is the new Vapex Tensioned

 Vapex Tensioned Electric Home Theater Screens come in diagonal dimensions of 92, 100, 106,

 Dedicated for home theater rooms, these 16x9 Tensioned Cinema White Screens are remarkably

 All Vapex Electric Screens assemble in minutes and come with an unbeatable 3-year warranty.

 Here are a few quick tips on getting your screen up and running.

 The Vapex Electric Screen comes with a sturdy aluminum case for easy wall or ceiling mounting.

 Please make sure you unscrew the shipping braces on the back of the case before mounting.

 Mount your L-brackets into your wall studs or any other type of sturdy surface.

 When securely mounted, the screen can be easily adjusted on the L-brackets for more

 Before adjusting the height of your screen, make sure it's completely lowered.

 On the upper right corner of your screen box, you'll find two adjustment holes labeled A

 and B. B adjusts the 18 inches of extra fabric to your desired height.

 Rotate your wand clockwise towards the negative symbol to reduce the screen height.

 Using your remote, bring the screen up until there's no more black border on the top.

 Now press the down button on your remote and discover your new adjusted screen height.

 If you've gone too high, rotate the wand counterclockwise in the direction of the plus

 All Vapex electric screens come with a wireless 12-volt trigger.

 A red light will start flashing on the bottom right corner of your screen box.

 Using the small yellow wand, press into the hole into your trigger remote.

 And the red light on the screen will cease flashing and remain steady.

 You may need to turn on the trigger port of the projector by using the projector's menu

 When using the projector's remote, the screen is now synchronized to drop when the projector

 Now, Debra, if you¡¦re unfamiliar with the item, it¡¦s like a really spicy and flavorful

 add in bajra or millet flour in there So it gives it a special little different

 And if you have sour yogurt, and actually that¡¦s what you really need for this

 Since our yogurt is not sour at all, we tried But it¡¦s not sour at all

 Now if your yogurt is half way there, a little sour, you can use quarter

 One tablespoon of jaggery or brown sugar You can use either one

 And we¡¦re going to mix it So you¡¦re going to mix it well and break

 before everything else is because we want to give it a little time for the citric acid

 to melt and the jaggery to also melt and mix in with the yogurt

 To this, we¡¦re going to add two teaspoons of minced ginger, two teaspoons of minced

 garlic, one tablespoon of sesame seed, half teaspoon of cumin powder, quarter teaspoon

 of turmeric powder, quarter teaspoon of red chili powder or to taste

 We used about four or five small ones One teaspoon of salt, going to mix it

 And to this, we¡¦re going to add two tablespoons of kasuri methi or dried methi leaves

 If you have fresh fenugreek leaves or methi leaves, they taste amazing in this recipe

 But a lot of times, we just don¡¦t have fresh methi sitting around

 So you can easily use the fresh one, but because we¡¦re using the dried ones, we¡¦re adding

 something special in here Right, so here you go, special ingredients

 Quarter cup of fine chopped cilantro leaves So you¡¦re still going to get the nice green

 So once that¡¦s mixed, we¡¦re going to go ahead and start on our flours

 So we have one cup of chapati flour, which is a whole wheat flour

 And we have one-third cup of millet flour, which is the bajra flour

 We¡¦re going to mix this together We have two tablespoons of oil

 And we¡¦re going to mix this really well We want to make sure all the oil is well incorporated

 into the flour, into every bit of the flour And to that, we¡¦ll add the mixture, the

 When you make debra, it¡¦s purely made with the yogurt, no water extra

 So once the dough comes together, we¡¦ll just knead it for about a minute or so

 Right, we¡¦re going to drizzle a little bit of oil so that it does not form a coating

 So you¡¦re going to cover it, and now allow it to rest for about 15¡V30 minutes

 And I also have a skillet tawa on medium heat, and it¡¦s nice and hot

 Now, it¡¦s very, very important to do that It¡¦s very important that any time that

 you¡¦re making parathas, chapatis, or rotis, or any kind of bread, it needs to be hot before

 you put the chapati on there And you can take this dough and basically

 divide it out into maybe a little bit bigger than golf ball size balls

 Okay, then we take one of our dough balls and smoothen it out into a round, nice smooth

 extra flour that we¡¦re going to use for rolling and dusting so it doesn¡¦t stick

 into here and roll this out You have to keep dipping it in the dry flour

 to chapatis, not really thin, not really thick Just make sure it¡¦s even

 Just move it around once it¡¦s on the hot tawa And we¡¦ll just wait for a few bubbles

 to appear before we flip it around And of course, the color will change

 As you can see, it¡¦s already getting a little darker and more, you know, prominent

 And then we¡¦re going to take some oil and drizzle on the top, just a little bit

 Now this is, this unlike chapatis and rojis is not going to puff up, so you know, that¡¦s

 okay, don¡¦t get worried And we¡¦re just going to press it so it

 cooks on the underside And now we¡¦re ready for the oil on this

 And we¡¦re going to press it again Now I can already smell the wonderful aroma

 So once this is done, we¡¦re going to pick it up and move it into an insulated box and

 it¡¦ll be ready to eat And the good thing about Debra is that you

 can make a huge batch of them if you wanted to, and they store wonderfully in your fridge

 your tea, just pull one, two out You can reheat them on the tawa or put them

 in a toaster oven, and it¡¦s ready to go when you are, and it makes an amazing snack

 So if you are one of those people who does not really drink tea, and that¡¦s okay,

 you can still enjoy these Debras with pickle I mean, any kind of pickle, it just tastes

 A lot of times, I remember a long time ago, my mom would spread pickle all over the Debra

 and just kind of fold it in half or roll it up, and then stack a few in a foil

 And whenever we go on road trips, you just have this amazing tasty snack, halfway to

 just so full of just goodness that you¡¦re going to really enjoy it

 another episode of ShowMeTheCurry.com Adding a pinch of spice to your life

 This is a wonderful way to enjoy asparagus, and it's very simple to make.

 Be sure to click on the link down below the recipe for the exact measurements.

 What we're going to do is we're going to go ahead and batter this up.

 We're going to coat it well and then we're going to drop it into the buttermilk.

 Then we're going to drop it back into the flour to get a nice thick double coat on this

 We're going to go ahead and cook these for about 30 seconds to a minute on each side.

 Now for cooking oil, I'm using cottonseed today, but any vegetable oil will do.

 I always like to drain anything that I fry in a wire rack because I think if you put

 Before serving this, we're going to go ahead and we're going to take a little bit of Parmesan

 cheese and I'm going to use a vegetable peeler to shave some off to add a little extra Parmesan.

 You can see this is really easy to do and I hope you enjoy this recipe.

 You can serve this with your favorite ranch style dressing or you may want to take a ranch

 style dressing and add a little spice to it, some little chili in there and there you go.

 Here is your Parmesan crusted asparagus just like they make it at Lone Star Steakhouse.

 Please give it a big thumbs up here on YouTube and be sure to drop me a comment down below

 Hi I'm Angel with Fleecefun.com Today I'm going to show you how to make a cute mini

 You will need 1 1⁄4 of a yard of polar fleece or felt, items to decorate your hat, feathers,

 ribbon, tulle, brooches, etc., barrette clips or combs, cording, hot glue gun, spray on

 Alright once you have all those items it's time to get started.

 You can find free instructions on how to assemble your pattern on Fleecefun.com or Fleecefun.com's

 You will need to print up the pattern onto cardstock as the pattern will become part

 Be sure to tape the front and back of the pattern seams where you have overlaps on your

 Trace the pattern onto the cloth using a marking pen or even a regular pen as long as it doesn't

 Then cut down all the pattern pieces on the cardstock to the dotted line.

 Spray the back of the cardstock with glue and center on each piece.

 Using the glue gun fold over the excess fabric and glue down all the edges all the way around

 The wall seam will appear less bulky if you don't glue the ends together.

 Taking the wall piece gently fold it around so the two ends overlap.

 Be sure to hold it for a while to secure it with clothes pins or clips to hold it into

 Please note you should check to make sure that the wall and the top of the hat will

 fit together properly before gluing the ends of the wall together.

 Depending on the thickness of the fabric you are using you might have to adjust the

 Using your glue gun glue all the way around the top part of the wall, just barely on the

 Place the top on and hold it into place securely for a few seconds.

 Glue a cording all the way around the edge of the brim, all the way around the hat.

 Then glue on the smaller brim piece onto the cardstock taking care to glue the edges of

 Alright now that the top and the wall are built it's time to add the brim.

 Place the glue on the bottom of the wall of the hat, lining up the bottom circles and

 You may need to hold it for several seconds to ensure it is well glued.

 You should be gluing the wall to the smaller brim piece that you just glued down.

 Here's a tip, place a seam where you will be folding up the hat.

 The brim is an oval shape, the sides should be the thinnest part of the oval and the brim

 Alright now it's really not looking like much right now so now it's time to give it

 I strongly recommend that you play with the hat for a bit before you glue it into place.

 Taking the longer sides designed to be the front and back of the hat.

 Start with the back side, glue the brim of the hat up to the wall.

 You will need to at least hold it for one minute and repeat a couple more times to make

 Add a couple of clips or comb to make sure it will stay into place.

 You can glue them directly or you can also use a scrap of fleece to glue them to the

 You can also use a length of elastic thread to make it stay on the head like a party hat.

 Alright now is the fun part where you get to add all kinds of decorations and different

 What I like to do with this one is I added some cording and some beads to kind of emphasize

 I also added of course ribbon on one side and some other feathers and things on the

 It's interesting to see what different personalities can come out of a hat once you get going.

 This is a great costume piece that is fun and versatile and unique.

 I doubt anyone else at that party you're going to is going to have as cool a hat as you.

 If you like this project I have several others on my website FleeceFun.com that you'll also

 You can have it for any meal of the day, but I absolutely love it for breakfast.

 I'm going to move it around a little bit, just to get everything really combined.

 You want kind of a thick batter, so this is kind of the consistency that you're aiming for.

 Now that our batter is done, it's time to put a cling film on it.

 And then, just cover the batter to cover, or to make it as large as you want the cachapa to be.

 After a couple of minutes, you're going to see it's cooked on the other side.

 So, just get a spatula, go under it, go carefully, otherwise it will break.

 Let it cook on that side for a couple of minutes, and we'll be ready to serve.

 We're going to put some cheese into it, and then, fold one half on top.

So it's been a while since I did a hair styling tutorial and I've been dying

 So for the first look, part your hair on either side and start braiding the front section.

 Keep braiding all the way to the bottom and then tie it off with an elastic.

For look number two, take all the rest of the hair and tie it into a

Then wrap the braid around the ponytail, secure it with a bobby pin and voila!

 look number three, take all the hair to one side and separate a small section of the hair.

For the next look, part your hair right down the middle and divide

Clip one section to the side and French braid the other section.

 Make sure you secure it with an elastic and do the same on the other side and your two

Now for the last hairstyle, take the braids and cross them over on the

Then take them to the top of your head and cross them over again.

 Hi, I'm Kelly Riney, one of the Designer Physiques Ambassadors.

 The main ingredient in this is, of course, the Designer Physique vanilla whey.

 You need one fourth a cup of that, one cup of the fresh dates, and also some coconut

 When you get halfway through pulsing it, I just want you to stop and we're going to add

 Right, so once the mixture is all mixed in together, we're going to take it off and we're

 Get into a nice small ball and then we're going to roll it over the coconut.

 Okay, and what we're going to do is we're going to set that aside.

 Now, just remember, you can use the French vanilla or you can use the chocolate.

 Let's keep rocking with Disney Channel's Camp Rock 2 Freestyle Jam.

 We're dancing along and showing you the moves to some of our favorite Camp Rock 2 songs.

 And now we're going to show you some moves to one of our favorite songs, It's On.

 And the routine I put together is a combination of some of my favorite moves just for you.

 Now remember, this is just a dress rehearsal, so have fun with it.

 And if it gets too tough, just throw in your own freestyle moves.

 Okay, so the first thing we're going to do is we're going to start by standing straight up.

 We're going to pop our right knee and we're going to move forward four times.

 Okay, while you're doing that, act like you have weights and you're just going to pull up as we pull forward.

 Now the next move is you step out with your right foot and turn completely around over your left shoulder back to the front.

 Okay, the next step is we're going to step out with our left foot and stretch out our left and right arms like a rubber band and pull them back together.

 Then you do the same thing on the right, stepping out like a rubber band, pulling them back together.

 Now turn your body to the side, put our left arm out and our right hand up.

 And you're going to step forward four times, stepping on your left foot, punching.

 You're going to just step out on the left, turning your body to the side.

 And it goes rock it, rock it, rock it, rock it, rock, and make a muscle with your right and left hand.

 Act like you're lifting weights and we're going forward four times.

 Step out with your right foot, turn completely around to the front.

 Step out with your left, brush off your fly gear, come back together.

 Here we go, stepping out with your left foot, both arms stretched out.

 All right, now that we know all the steps, are you ready to rock at half speed?

 Remember, the more you add your own flavor, the more creative your freestyle can be.

 When we're back, we're going to mix up the moves into one big freestyle routine.

 okay so this is the last result you see it's very very small so I'm going to put

 them along with my tomato and cucumber okay also all of my parsley

 now I'm done I have all my ingredients here what I need to do is you remember this?

 at the beginning of the lesson I showed you that I put all my burgul in water so what I'm

 going to do is to dry all my burgul put it in a new... how is it called?

You can even do team colors for cheerleading and things like that.

 All you'll need is this plastic hair cuff kit that comes with the back that holds the

 I usually do the borders first, so I'm going to do the exact same thing on this side with the brown.

 Okay, I have both my edges lined with the brown and since I'm using a ribbon that has pictures on it

 you'll pretty much do the same thing only in the center with the glue and the ribbon.

 It is going to overlap your borders just a little bit, but that's okay.

 Ponyo and the other part of the cuff and attach it just with hot glue.

 Just push it down in the center nice and tight until it dries completely.

Um, I'm supposed to go to work tomorrow and my hair looks like this

Hopefully it'll come out good in the morning, but I wanted to show y'all what I'm doing

 Sit and get dry and had it in the puff and this is the way it looks

 Spray bottle with some water and I think this is just like water and olive oil

 Just because I have to go to work and I want in the morning and I want it to be dry

 Trying to resist the urge to use a lot of product because I'm so used to using a lot of products

 This is the way they look and then what I'm doing is at the ends.

 Hopefully I'll come up with something better than what I started with

 And hope I have something fantastic in the morning if not, I'm gonna pretend like it's fantastic so

 And I'm just gonna put a little bit of I'm just gonna put a little bit of coconut oil

 And I'll look at the back and make sure that's good, but this is pretty much what I'm going for today.

 I'm going to be making a recipe that is fantastic for our faces and our bodies.

 And while I get started with the preparation, you can look at the ingredients.

 For this recipe, you'll need one and two-third cups of cold-pressed vegetable oil.

 You can choose from coconut, avocado, grape seed, broccoli seed, or red raspberry seed

 Here we have our gently warmed, plant-based cold-pressed oils, our Manuka beeswax, and

 So it's really important to slowly dribble the liquid mixture into the oil mixture.

 Here's the combination of the oils and the liquid aloe vera and borax mixed together.

 We're going to add some rosemary extract, which is a nice natural preservative.

 And you'll see that it blends a really interesting green color, as well as some chlorophyll,

 And then for a finishing touch, we'll add a few drops of parsley, sage, rosemary, and

 These are all really tonifying essential oils that help us with our circulation and our

 Okay, now I have a really quick and easy Mexican dip for you to do for your home shows.

 My customers like this are always saying, didn't you make that dip for this show?

 So I just use our South of the Border seasoning now because we have that and we're selling

 Then we're going to add one pack of the South of the Border seasoning mix.

 And we're going to stir that in without getting it out on the counter which I can never do.

 So that should not be a problem for you to be able to do this dip because this is what

 So we're just going to pour it into our Grandma Bonnie's pie plate.

 So this is a great recipe to take and share with all of your friends.

 And if they don't have a pie plate, we can add one to their list.

 And for top of this, I usually put about half a jar or a little bit more.

 If it gets about to the top, I'm going to add a little bit more.

 And now we're going to stick it in the microwave just until the cheese is melted.

 Usually it takes a minute to two minutes, depending on your microwave.

 So I'll be back in just a few seconds as soon as we get this cheese melted.

 I've got my scoops out ready, and I hear the buzzer dinging, so we'll check out our dip.

 You know when springtime comes around my favorite pattern to use is a chronomid.

 It's called the acetate chronomid and it has a different type of material.

 If you do the right things with this fly you can get that acetate to really harden

 Make sure you have these materials ready before you tie this fly.

 We're going to tie the acetate chronomid on a Tampco TMC 2047 size 14 scud pupil hook.

 We're going to put a small glass bead near the eyelet to imitate an air bubble.

 We'll be using black thread, 8-0, some white Fentex for the butt.

 To segment the body we'll use some small silver wire, some pheasant tail for the wing case,

 some peacock curl for the head, and we'll dip the acetate floss in acetone to thin it,

 So what I've done to start off the fly is I've already put my hook in the vice and I

 Now we're just going to tie in our 8-0 black thread and make sure you cover the whole hook

 with the black thread and that way nothing slips right on your hook.

 I'm going to put this on right at the very base, right at the bend of the hook, pull

 it out, stretch it back, and this is actually going to imitate the small tail that chronomids

 We want to cut this so it's about just an eighth of an inch long.

 In preparation for the ribbing I'm going to put on some fine silver wire.

 And we'll just wrap that back, wrap it fully into the body, right down to the butt, and

 And this acetate floss is quite thick and it's really fine material.

 Remember chronomids have a very thin body so try to keep it as thin as possible.

 We'll tie that body right down to the butt section and then bring our thread back up

 Now we're going to slowly wrap our acetate floss to form the body.

 Remember this floss is really tough to work with because it just falls apart.

 Now that the acetate body is tied in we're going to take our ribbing we've had sitting

 back there, that's the silver wire, and we're slowly going to segment the body.

 It really doesn't matter how many turns you make as long as the segments are fairly even.

 Now what I've done is whip finished off my fly just to get rid of the thread.

 We're going to take the fly out of the vice and get a pair of tweezers and in a vial I've

 And what we want to do is dip the fly, the acetate floss, right into that acetone to

 You know one thing to remember about acetone is it is a solvent or a thinner.

 If it does give off fumes make sure you use it in a well ventilated area.

 Now that we've got our body nice and glossy and formed with the acetate floss, we're going

 to tie our thread back on and prepare to put on the thorax and the head and the wing case.

 We're going to take a few strands of our pheasant tail and tie it in and we'll form a wing case

 I've taken one strand of my peacock hurl and we're going to tie this in and then form a

 You only want one strand of peacock hurl because chironomids do have a very thin body and head.

 Take the pheasant tail that we tied in earlier to form the wing case and now we'll pull it

 forward over our peacock hurl and tie it off just behind the glass bead.

 Try not to get any material in front of that glass bead towards the eyelet.

 The special thing about this fly is definitely the acetate floss.

 Once you dip that acetate floss in the acetone, it not only makes a very effective pattern

 how to make a very popular dish, Chettinad Chicken, which is from the southern part of

 a lot of our spices to really bring out the aroma and the flavor of these spices.

So we're using a few of this and a few of that just so that we get the

 color, the flavor, and a little bit of spice, but not, you know, kill ourselves.

It releases a lot of the seeds from inside and flavors everything.

We're going to keep roasting it till the coconut gets a little bit of a color and

 and I'm going to turn off the stove, transfer it, and allow it to cool down.

And while Hithal's doing that, we have over here a large skillet.

 big enough skillet to be able to use to accommodate everything.

 of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon of minced ginger, and half a teaspoon of turmeric powder.

 Now we let the dry roasted spices cool down completely and then used a spice grinder to

And we had to use about half a cup of water to help us in the grinding

 Chettinad food is known for a lot of flavor and also a lot of spice.

 a lot of places where you can cut back and you can still get the flavor.

So our masala mixture has cooked down quite a bit and the oil is kind of leaving

 just going to allow it to cook for about 5 minutes on medium heat itself.

 5 minutes and we've been stirring in between just to make sure nothing gets burned, all

It broke really easily so it means it's tender and it's ready to go.

 on the salt and the spice level and everything and it was perfect.

 And right before serving, as always, we're going to garnish with a few coriander or cilantro

 So enjoy your chettinad chicken and join us again in another episode of showmethecurry.com.

 Alright, the pick, I hold it angled in the thumb and just kind of roll it.

 So there isn't much surface area above the thumb on this side, but there is quite a bit on the bottom.

 You want to go kind of sideways, get that swooshy Gilbert picking or what he mentions,

 where you get the... you don't want to hear flat, you want to hear this.

 It's just the wrist, or try as hard as you can just to make it the wrist so you get...

 And there's pretty much only two techniques that I'm working on right now,

 which is pretty much repeating every note, making sure that you end... your licks are on even numbers

 So what we're gonna do is, let's take that exact idea and ascend.

 And you could kind of make it longer by just staying or repeating some particular pieces of it.

 The last, last one that I practiced a lot to try to sync up both hands is a very famous Yngwie lick.

 I want to show you how to cook barley that will take just from about 10 to 15 minutes

 And this is about a pound of barley that you can buy at Twinkle or even at Smiths.

 And make sure to fill up your container with water until it covers the barley.

 Okay I have waited for 24 hours for my barley to soak in the water.

 We're just gonna fill it up with water until it covers the barley.

 Okay, so the first thing you're going to want to do is get your feather and figure

 You don't want to place it right at the top of your hair because you don't want the clamp

 You want to remove just a little bit of hair so you can overlap it to hide the clamp.

 So next you're going to grab one of the little micro beads and you're going to place it through

 Once you've done that, grab the little section of hair where you want the actual feathers

 You don't want too much hair, but you do want enough where it will grab and hold.

 You're going to place your hair through the threader and then with one hand, grab the

 Once the bead is in your hair, now you can actually insert the feathers into the actual

 Here I have a couple of different ones in shades of pink and purple.

 Now grab the ends of the feathers and slide them into the micro link, making sure that

 Once that's done, you can grab your jewelry pliers and secure the clamp by pressing down

 So I'll show you in the Instructable how to make this mitre gauge, or how I made this mitre gauge.

 The wooden fence blocks just held on with four screws, so that's sort of semi-sacrificial.

 The first thing you want to do is make sure there's no play in it.

 And then you're set to go with cutting whatever angle you want.

 Or if you don't want to cut that angle, then get your protractor or your angle set.

 It's a bit easier, so I've swapped out the dust extractor for the magnets that collect the shavings, the filings, iron filings.

 Often the power hacksaw, even the bandsaw, certainly when you hacksaw something by hand, you'll get a not quite square edge.

 Very rarely will you get a perfectly square edge, so we're going to tidy that up.

 So you're basically just holding it against the fence and going for it.

 And you can tell when you've got a nice square edge, because all the lines will be going in the same direction.

 You can see that all the lines are going in the same direction.

 I mean these edges are a bit iffy anyway, but it's pretty good.

 Today I'm going to show you guys a great way to save money by cutting your own pork chops.

 I went to Costco the other day and saw that they had a pork loin.

 Notice that the price difference between the pork loin itself and buying the cut pork chops

 This pork loin was $2.19 and at Costco that same day they had cut pork chops for $3.69.

 This is an 8.5 pound pork chop or pork loin and by cutting it yourself you're saving yourself

 So right now I'm going to show you guys how I cut my pork loin and we'll do that next.

 A sirloin roast, pork loin or pork chops and then on the end is the rib roast.

 The way you want to do it is to cut about 6 inches from the end on both sides and that's

 both your roasts and in the center of the loin are your pork loin or pork chops and

 you can cut them as thick or as thin as you want and we're going to do that next.

 What we're going to do now is cut it from the end about 6 inches in, about right here

 I hone my knives every time before I cut meat and that way it ensures a clean cut slice

 and if you want great tips on how to sharpen your knives, my great friend Mr.

 I'll provide his link and they'll have great tips on how to keep your knives sharp.

 Okay I'm going to go ahead and place the sirloin roast to the side and here are now the pork

 I'm going to cut these about an inch thick so you want to make sure your fingers are

 tucked in that way you don't cut yourself and then again just let the knife do the work

 and these are going to be nice thick pork chops and I'm going to leave the fat on these

 because it adds flavoring but look at this, this nice sized medallion.

 Again, keep your fingers tucked in and this should make quite a few pork chops and it

 I'm going to finish this up and get to the rib roast and then I'll show you that next

 As you can see here I've already cut up my pork loin into three sections.

 I've got the pork loin or pork chops in about one inch thick slices.

 I've left the fat cap on there, it's not really that thick but if you like you can remove

 I've got a sirloin roast and a rib roast and this is going to make several meals.

 You can either plank them which is what I love doing, tossing them on the grill, you

 You can do this also with your beef and do ribeye and it's a little bit more expensive

 as far as the initial investment but in the end it saves you tons of money.

 One of the other things I'm going to do is I'm going to use my food saver and package

 If you don't do it this way you can also, what I suggest doing is when you get your

 store bought stuff, pork chops and what not, is if you freeze them in smaller portions

 with your food saver or something like that, that way you don't have to prepare a large

 It's greatly appreciated and I would love for you guys to please leave some feedback,

 comments and if you like what you see please subscribe to my channel.

 Here we are in step number 8 of the invisible part sew-in hairstyle.

 In this step I will show you how to take down and remove your hair extensions.

 You simply want to start from the top of your head and work your way down.

 You will use your scissors to cut off any visible thread or knots from your style.

 To begin taking down your hair extensions you always want to start from the top of your

 Simply put, the last thing that you sewed onto your head, you're going to remove that

 By removing the closure piece from the top of your head, this allows you to see the rest

 of the thread to be able to snip and cut as you work your way down.

 If you simply start where you began sewing your extensions and try to work your way up,

 a lot of the hair that's up top will get in your way constantly.

 So to make things easier, start where you left off by removing the closure piece.

 To remove the closure piece you simply want to make sure to use your fingers to dig through

 So I'm just using my hands just to loosen the hair up and move it out and around from

 So with my scissors in hand, I'm only going to snip any visible thread that I see.

 You cannot see any thread, make sure to use a mirror to help you see.

 So now I'm just going to peel the hair back and just tug it slightly just to release any

 So now that I've found some thread I'm going to open my scissors, feed it underneath only

 You want to go a little bit at a time to make sure you do not cut any of your hair or any

 So lift the closure piece around until you can clearly see some visible thread and then

 Now your closure piece is removed and now you have more of your weft exposed to cut

 So now you want to go ahead and find your nearest piece that you can cut off which will

 be these individual pieces on our actual invisible part closure.

 I'm going to start at the top and cut off any knots like a knot you see here or any

 When cutting your extensions you want to make sure to take your time.

 You want to make sure that you are only cutting visible thread that you see.

 Lift the piece up, move it around so you will only cut your thread.

 So now here's a knot on the outside here on top of the weft and I will simply just cut

 Continue to cut off any knots or visible thread on the pieces of your weft until all your

 When you start taking down your wig cap you will simply cut off any thread or knots that's

 Now that you have finished removing all of your individual pieces of extensions that

 actually formed your invisible part we're going to start taking down the rest of our

 So you simply want to cut any knots or thread that you see on your extensions.

 And I'm going to continue to work my way up and trim off any knots or thread that I

 So as you can see I skipped this portion just a little bit because it's a little hard for

 So what you can do is skip it and just continue to take down the rest of your tracks.

 You don't want to accidentally cut your hair out of frustration because you can't take

 So continue to cut any visible thread or knots along the way of your extensions to remove

 After you are done removing your extensions the same process applies with also removing

 Now that you have removed all of your hair extensions you are going to do the same process

 You're going to focus on your cap and the strings and knot that stick out of your cap

 and you're simply going to carefully take your scissors and snip the visible thread

 So now right now I will start here at the beginning of my cap with my string here and

 Now I'm going to pull up a little bit of thread and sometimes it just slips out.

 Some pieces actually can slide out or you could simply take it down with your fingers

 So for example you take your scissors and you're going to cut the string and continue

 to cut the knots on top of your cap as you work your way around.

 In this step I showed you how to take down and remove your hair extensions from your

 When you are taking down your extensions remember to only cut any visible thread or knots that

 So you will be doing the same thing with your wig cap as you remove that as well.

 Be sure to check out our videos, blogs and online store at HowToBlackHair.com.

 Stucco Veneziano is an acrylic interior wall coating that enables obtaining a unique glossy decorative finish, reminiscent of the stuccos present in age-old Venetian palazzi.

 A steel trowel is used for primer leveling, whilst steel spatulas of various sizes are necessary for the coated finish.

 For the preparation of the primer at least two coats of the product are applied depending on the porosity of the surface, considering an average consumption of approximately 1 to 1.2 kg per square meter.

 Apply Stucco Veneziano with the steel trowel, leveling to obtain a smooth even surface.

 Wait 5 hours between applications, sanding with no less than 220 grit grade sandpaper.

 Before the finishing job is begun, the stainless steel spatula blade that will be used should be checked.

 If it is new or seems damaged, smooth out one side of it with 600 grit grade sandpaper to remove imperfections, and then with 1500 grit grade sandpaper to further smooth it.

 After preparing the primer and the tool, apply a coat of finish with the trowel.

 This operation must be performed by taking small quantities of the product, spreading it with quick firm movements in different directions at each stroke, and depositing only a thin coat of the product on the surface.

 After decorating the area of the wall, which should be approximately half a square meter, apply a coat of finish with the trowel.

 After decorating the area of the wall, which should be approximately half a square meter, it is possible to move on to the gloss finish, pressing the trowel repeatedly and firmly on the surface with circular movements.

 To heighten the brilliancy of the finish, sanding with fine 1500 grit grade sandpaper and then repeating the gloss finish operation with the steel trowel is recommended.

 Hello everybody and welcome along to this unboxing and review video of the device you

 see in front of you, the Heaven Fresh Naturo Pure Digital Food Steamer.

 So I'm going to do a little unboxing to see what comes in the box and I'm going to give

 11.5 litre capacity, 800 watts power, 6 preset buttons so it's got a digital timer and that

 And then 99 minutes, I'm not sure what you'd need to steam for 99 minutes.

 Auto shut off, water indicator so it tells you when it's running out of water.

 Compacts down, that's really useful for storing it in the cupboard, that kind of thing.

 On the left hand side you've got all the specifications and things in a foreign language.

 On the back you've got the foreign language again and this side we've got the English

 And we've got some information about the specs and that kind of thing.

 On the inside we've got polystyrene so I'm just going to pull those out.

 I'm just going to turn this upside down so I can pull it all out nice and easily.

 I've actually got this upside down so I'm going to take the plastic off.

 Next up is the kind of dish you would use for steaming rice I believe.

 On the bottom there's some nice rubber feet and some air cooling sections.

 There's a little thing there where you can pour more water in without having to take

 I've got some carrots in the bottom section and some potatoes and parsnips in the top

 Vegetables, fish, eggs, seafood, chicken, steaming rice and a timer.

 So it's like 25 minutes for vegetables, a little bit more for fish, even longer for

 When I press the button I want which in this case is vegetables.

 It comes with a 25 minute timer and shows the category I've selected.

 If I want to stop it at any time I can press the start button and that turns it off.

 If I want to set a time I just literally press this timer button for each minute that I want.

 It took quite a while to warm up so I'm not entirely sure that this vegetable is going

 to be done in eight minutes time but we'll stick a fork in and find out.

 All the lights are flashing and the steamer has now gone into keep warm mode.

 So I'm going to just press stop to turn it off and I'm going to give the veg a poke.

 In the future I might put it on for a little bit longer just for the potatoes.

 Other than that guys I'd probably advise putting a boiling water into the bottom so that it's

 Please also see my social links below and hit subscribe above to be notified of all

 Whether wearing it on a dress, on your lips, or on your eyes will definitely bring out

 Since I have oily skin, I use this oil control gel from Leferi Cosmetics on my t-zone area.

 And then I'm dotting this Leferi Cosmetics HD foundation with my fingers and then just

 With my Ben Nye concealer and my Real Techniques Detailer brush, I'm spot concealing any redness

 For my under eye, I love using my fingers because it warms up the concealer for easier

 And then I'm going to set the under eye area with the lightest shade from my Leferi Cosmetics

 And then I'm going to apply the darkest brown shade under my cheekbones and jawline to contour

 With my MAC 217, I'm also going to run some along the sides of my nose.

 I'm also going to highlight the bridge of my nose with a little bit of the lightest

 To set the rest of the face, I'm using my Virginia Olsen mineral foundation in Shady

 I'm filling it in with my Etude House Drawing Eyebrow pencil using light and short strokes.

 To act as an eyeshadow base, I'm using this light pink shade from my Leferi Cream eyeshadow

 palette and apply it on the inner half of my lids with my fingers.

 And then I'm setting it with my Virginia Olsen eyeshadow in Baby Roses using my Real Techniques

 With this flat shader brush from Beauty Cosmetics, I'm using the darkest brown color again and

 applying it on the outer half of my lids, along the crease and on the lower lash line.

 With my pencil brush, I'm applying this black eyeshadow on the outer half of my lower lash

 For highlight, I'm just applying the slightest shade on my brow bone and tear duct area.

 To define the eyes, I'm using my Sansal liquid liner and create a subtle wing.

 Try to keep your eyes open when figuring out the angle of your wing.

 And then I'm going to tightline with my Nichido pencil in Black.

 Next I'm curling the lashes and adding a couple of coats of my Milk and Company mascara.

 This step is optional but to really open up the eyes, I'm adding a natural looking false

 For the cheeks, I'm using my Virginia Olsen blush in Terracotta with my Beauty Cosmetics

 For my lips, I'm combining my two favorite shades from Everbelena.

 I usually apply Mauve-y first and then top it with a bit of Pink Flame.

 I like to use my lip brush from Beauty Cosmetics to precisely fill in my lips.

 Alright have fun with this look for a romantic date or anytime you want to feel extra feminine

 I hope you enjoyed this tutorial and I'll see you on the next video.

 And for those of you who like Reese's Peanut Butter Cups, this is the Reese's Peanut Butter

 Again, this is the protein pudding that there's one other on the market that was made previously

 by Dory and the Apes, but this is the one that's more commonly thought of as Vitamin

 25 grams of protein, 3 grams of glutamine, 1 gram of sugar, no sugar alcohols.

 And, you know, this seems so silly to do a video on, but when I try and explain it, people

 As you know, I like either Cabot, because it's got probiotics, or Nancy's, but they're

 Now remember, this is for the ultimate, the ultimate Reese's peanut butter cup.

 If you ever have never used cocoa powder, number one, what do we hear about all the

 And I'd like to think that I was the one that propelled it into the world and the universe.

 But you can go to birdmill.com, B-Y-R-D-M-I-L-L.com, and they sell a dark and a light roast.

 This is a sugar-free, you can see this, peanut flour that's more defatted.

 So if you're really, really watching your fat intake, this is something to think about.

 Now, what you do with the peanut flour, and again, you can use the Birdmill 12%.

 I'm going to take, this is a spoon, so this is, I'm, you know, I'm eyeing it, but it's

 That's the key, is how little water you need, because I think that's what gets confusing

 to people, is how to mix this, because if you mix it too much, you're not going to quite

 Okay, so, if you look at this, this is, this is a half a cup right there.

 This is way more than I need, but I'm just going to show you how little water I'm going

 I'm going to start with that consistency, and I'm going to start mixing, because if

 you can see how I'm mixing, you're making it like how you make a cookie dough.

 The idea is don't put too much in it all at once, otherwise you're not going to create

 So if you're getting a look at how I'm mixing it, this is, and I like mine thick.

 Now, if you want a thinner consistency, this one I'm actually going to put in the refrigerator.

 So then I'm going to actually put a little bit more water in there, because it gets colder,

 All right, so now that is, that's your Reese's chocolate right there.

 Be careful how much water you add, because this, again, thickens up.

 And I'm telling you, for those who have peanut butter addictions, wow, this definitely satisfies

 Okay, I'm kind of creating a little bit more of a consistency here.

 And if you do what I did right there, and it's too watery, guess what?

 Now I'm going to drizzle this, I'm going to drizzle this on top of, the idea is not to

 And I'm going to put this right on top and smear it in like a brownie.

 So I have the peanut, so that you can actually taste the two different flavors.

 So what you do then, see you can see here, I'm going to create lines, just like you would

 The key is not to mix it all together, so that when you have the taste, you have the

 To make it even more flavorful, put it in the refrigerator, and the flavors just kind

 today I'm going to make up an avocado and honey facial for you.

 thing that you're going to do is take your avocado and cut it open.

 making the facial just for yourself, you would only need one small slice, but

 today we're going to be making facials for a party, so we're going to use at

This is Organically Hua Honey, but you can use any honey that you

 antibacterial, and it will draw moisture to your skin, making this mask even more

 your face, and of course it also provides the moisturizing properties.

 after you've cleansed your face, you're going to spread it on, leave it on for

 five to fifteen minutes, and then rinse it off with tepid water, and your face

Today I'm really excited to bring you an unboxing and first look at

Now this phone at the point of recording this video is being announced

Now you've got serial numbers just on this side, in fact just on the right hand

 there's no battery in there so we'll have a look at that in a second.

 This is very familiar, a lot of smartphones come with this now.

 used to have one years and years and years ago but I think they got outdated very quickly.

 So I'm really excited to see a BlackBerry back with something like this.

If we look at the side you can see it's got a volume rocker button there

 probably power it on as well just to see what the first boot up screen is like.

Also it does take up to a 32GB SD card and it has got 16GB internal

 slots in and you just follow it around the edges and clip it all in.

 to do is I'm going to put the SIM card in there, have a good play with it, know my way

 around the operating system and then I'll update you with a follow up video.

I'm playing around with my BH Cosmetics 120 color palette today, and I believe

 and because it was really highly requested, I listened to you and I filmed it.

 live life in the fast lane and play with some color, then please keep on watching.

 I'm going to prime my eye with the Essence Cosmetics I Love Stage Eyeshadow Base,

 Then I'm going to take this random white eyeliner pencil, and I'm going to lightly

Once I've done that, I'm going to take the NYX Jumbo Eye Pencil in Milk,

 and I'm going to apply it to my eyelid with a brush, and then I'm going to rub it in with my

Now I'm going to go into the BH Cosmetics palette, and I'm going to grab this matte red

And with a large flat brush, I'm going to pack that all over the lower half of my eyelid.

 And as you can see, I'm packing on the eyeshadow, and I do back and forth motions.

 when you're working with really pigmented shades like this, it's best to just kind of press them

Now with that same brush, I'm going to go in and I'm going to grab a little

 bit of this orange shade and a little bit of this shimmery light brown shade, and I'm going to mix

 them together, and I'm going to pack them over top of the red in the very center of my eye.

 to dip it in this dark matte brown shade and that same shimmery light brown shade I used, and I'm

Now I'm going to take this matte orangey brown shade, and with a clean

 brush, I'm going to blend it right above where I've created that crease.

Don't worry about applying too much, you can always clean it up later.

 So as you can see, I've packed it on pretty heavy, and now I'm going to take a short,

 dense haired brush, and I'm going to dip it in this matte white eyeshadow, and I'm going to press

And as I'm doing that, you can see that I'm kind of blending the white

 eyeliner, but I know that sometimes you guys actually enjoy watching it, so here it is.

 As you can see, I'm really taking my time with it, and I'm being super careful.

It's kind of like a medium size in the middle, and then it gets really,

 Once I've done my eyeliner, I'm going to take a little bit more of that dark brown and the

 light brown shade, and I'm going to touch up the end of my crease.

 pigmented shadows, I'm going to use the Maybelline Age Rewind Dark Circle Concealer, and I'm going to

 pat some underneath my eye and sort of remove that fallout, and then blend it in with my finger.

 Then I'm going to set that concealer with my favorite Maybelline Fit Me Powder in Classic

And now I'm going to take this really shimmery white sort of pearlescent yellow shade,

Taking that same orangey brown shade that I used above my crease,

 Volume Express, and I didn't use false lashes for this because I didn't have it on in my April

 in Coralina, and because it's super pigmented, I'm using this e.l.f.

And for bronzer, I'm going to use the same brush because there's barely

 any product on it, and I'm going to use Rimmel's Natural Bronzer in Sunlight.

 NYX Mega Shine Lip Gloss in Beige, which is the most bizarre name ever because it's kind of like

If you have requests for other videos, leave them in the comments.

 Hi, I'm Jamie Geller from joyofkosher.com and I'm here with Naf Kanao from Grow and

 So please tell everyone why your poultry and meat is so, so far superior.

 They don't get any antibiotics, no hormones in their feed, and when you raise animals

 It costs a little bit more, but with meat you really get what you pay for.

 Okay, so today we're going to show you a gorgeous whole roasted chicken.

 So I'm going to give you some tips, Naf is going to give you some tips.

 Now we're going to break open this gorgeous, grow and behold, three pound beautiful whole

 People love the chicken because pastured chicken tastes different.

 So the fat that's in the legs right here, take that, just put it aside, and when we

 are putting the pesto under the skin, we are going to take that fat and put it under the

 You can roast it breast side up and you don't need to baste in between because you've got

 the super juicy, amazing, grow and behold chicken and with the fat inside.

 And we're going to use the convection setting on our oven so that the chicken skin gets

 a little bit crispy dry and still stays delicious if you reheat it on the Blech for Shabbos.

 Or if you don't have convection setting, you can do 325 for 90 minutes.

 Do a little paprika because I love the color and the flavor and my family is Hungarian.

 Yep, we make that and you know you can't always make chicken stock at home.

 I'm just going to, for one second, just to release the flavor in the lemon.

 Okay, so we put the tin foil on, loosely covered because our skin was browning but we wanted

 And Jamie, the thing with our chicken is we're not cooking to an internal temperature.

 This was a three pound chicken that we ended up roasting for about 70, 75 minutes.

 I'd love to squeeze whatever's remaining left just right into the manchures.

 Okay, so let's get this into your fancy schmancy fat separator.

 Chicken should rest for about 5 to 10 minutes just so the juices can redistribute and so

 We are going to use kitchen shears and we're going to just follow the seams.

 Now, we're going to cut the breasts off right below the wing from the back.

 And then this big double breast, we're just going to cut straight down the middle.

 First, tell everyone, growandbehold.com for this amazing chicken.

 Hello, this is the Zocar and today I'm going to teach you how to make a hybrid cube shinobi

 What it is, it uses the assembly of a 12 unit shinobi, but the units of a cube.

 This idea was given to me by a YouTube user whose comment can be seen right here.

 And it looks really cool in my opinion, so I thought some of you might be interested

 I'm not going to show you how to make the units because I've already done a video of

 However, I will, there is one slight difference in making the units.

 So when you get to the last step, instead of leaving it so the unit is flat, you're

 going to fold it like a shinobi unit, so it folds in half like this.

 Okay, so just like the shinobi assembly, I'm going to be using 12 units.

 I mean, I'll explain as I do this, but I am not going to go extremely slow.

 If you have many questions, you can see the shinobi video, 12 units.

 And also, if possible, remember to put the colors together in the same order because

 then you'll be able to make sure that no two colors that are the same are touching, which

 I find using these units is a little bit harder than using the regular units just because

 Also, when you're making the cube, I recommend using a toothpick.

 Hey guys, so I just did an apple cider vinegar rinse on my hair.

 But every time you shampoo or do one of these rinses, you always want to make sure that

 you place the nutrients back into your hair, then you rinse it out.

 So all you need is an egg, some honey, some coconut oil, some plain Greek yogurt, any

 So the first thing you're going to do is crack that egg and place it into your bowl, grab

 Trying to fast forward because I know not everybody has time to be sitting here watching

 We're going to take a heaping tablespoon of plain Greek yogurt, add that to the bowl.

 Then we're going to take a nice full tablespoon of honey, any brand of your choice, add that

 And last but not least, we're going to add a tablespoon of coconut oil and mix very well.

 Alright, so I'm going to do my usual sections and I'm splitting my hair in half.

 This can get pretty messy, so definitely do it in the shower or put a towel down or don't

 Notice I have a sports bra on today because I'm not trying to make a big mess.

 I'm going to start with the ends and work my way up to the ends.

 I'm just starting by working it up my hair from the bottom to the top.

 It's funny because I don't mind Greek yogurt, but like unflavored?

 And then simply what I'm going to do is twist that section and keep it separated.

 And then I'm going to let this concoction sit in my head for an hour.

 You will end up with egg drops over your hair and every natural girl knows how easy it is not to wash eggs out of your hair.

 If you guys try this out and you love it as much as I do, let me know.

 You got a lot of warped parts and you usually just take those kits and you discard them.

 Use your 1st finger to barre at the 2nd fret, then place your 3rd and 4th fingers at the

 Use exactly the same picking pattern but move everything up one string like this.

 We finish with an A major open chord, moving to an E major open chord.

 As you strum these two final chords, track the pick through the strings to bring out

 Come on with me to the kitchen, the kitchen, the kitchen, the bedroom, the kitchen, the

 Back in the day, I worked at Kentucky Fried Chicken and I got to give props to their popcorn

 I'm going to make chicken popcorn, literally popcorn and chicken.

 We're going to come over to the refrigerator and we're going to grab some chicken.

 This little piece that I have left over, that's all like, you know, looking good and perfect

 Take your chicken, put it on there and grab a knife, a knife right here.

 This is when you come home, you're tired and you're hungry and you just want a munchie

 Cut thin stripes, strips, whatever these things are, cut them up.

 Then you're going to get a nice brown, a nice cook on your chicken.

 If you just throw it in the cold, it's going to take forever to cook.

 I already microwaved it because if you don't know how to microwave popcorn, you are an

 I'll use my hand without the chicken on it because we know how you people are.

 You want to use extra virgin because you haven't been laid yet, by all means.

 Be careful not to burn yourself because you're a punk and you don't know how to cook as good

 So anyway, this is good for munchies when you just kind of want a little quick snack.

 Then all you're going to do is literally throw a little popcorn in there.

 I guarantee you this is the best chopped popcorn chicken you've ever had.

 So next time you're doing your thing, you want a little snack quick, that's what you've

 Hi everyone, recently I had a request to make Gary the snail from Spongebob so in this video

 The tools we need today is a little bit of water and a paintbrush.

 A balling tool, we're going to use the large end of the balling tool.

 I need a pair of pliers to cut the wire and some different color fondants.

 I've used this chocolate brown for Gary's shell and also a little sponge pad.

 Here's a little one I made earlier so I'm just going to pop him in front while I get

 So I've got this brown fondant which I'm going to soften up and just take off a little piece.

 Once I've got a nice ball I want to squash it down a little bit so it's not so round

 and then I want to pinch the sides almost to the bottom down so I get that nice shape

 at the bottom of the shell and just keep working with my fingers to smooth it in, make sure

 I also want to make a little bit of an indentation at the bottom so that it grabs the body when

 I move on to some green fondant now to make the bottom half of his body.

 Basically we just want to use our fingers to pat out a little rectangular type of shape

 and then press down on the sides with my fingers just so I can try and achieve those ripples

 Similarly we take the blue fondant now and we make the top part of the body.

 Try and get the blue part of the fondant to match the size of the green and then just

 Now we take the balling tool and put the fondant on top of our sponge and just press lightly

 on the sides of the fondant with a little bit of a gap in between so we can try and

 achieve more of that ripply effect at the bottom of the snail's body.

 Just use the back end of your paintbrush and just gently press in some holes and keep smoothing

 from side to side until you get the shape that you're happy with.

 Each time you make this cake topper you may have a different expression of his mouth.

 Now we need to make the eye stalks for Gary which is very simple.

 Make sure that when you do it it's not too tall and then just grab your wire and cut

 a length which is about a centimeter longer than the eye stalk.

 Once you've inserted it make sure you've got some wire poking out at both the top and the

 The top part of the wire we will use to stick the eyeballs in and the bottom part of the

 The next thing we're going to do is roll out the eyeballs and the best way to do it is

 to make a little cylinder and grab your blade or knife and cut it in the middle.

 I find this is the best way to get two even pieces of fondant and just gently roll it

 Now we're going to make the red part of the eye and we do the same thing as we did for

 Just roll it into a little log, cut it in two and then the easiest way that I've found

 is to let the ball sit on your work surface and grab your ball or eyeball, put a little

 dot of water and then from the top down press onto the next part of the fondant.

 And that way it's a lot easier than picking up that tiny piece of red fondant and trying

 Now before I put my red fondant away I want to just finish the detail on the shell and

 just rolling out a long piece of red fondant to make that swirl pattern on either side

 So it's a little bit tricky to do this standing up but just so you can get a good idea I'm

 What I do now is I just press it down a little bit while I'm working on the other side and

 this just helps for the fondant to stick together because I didn't use any water here

 Finally I'm going to put on some lilac spots around both sides of the shell.

 Basically just roll little balls and stick them onto the shell.

 You just want to now adhere the shell to the body so just get your brush with a little

 bit of water, rub it on either the bottom of the shell or the top of the body and stick

 Use your fingers to gently press on the sides of the shell so you get a nice smooth join.

 And now it's time to insert the eye stalks and again we'll just dampen the fondant with

 Insert the eye stalks at the front of the body just over the mouth and finally before

 Just roll two small circles and attach them to the centre of the eyeballs.

 The same way we did before, pressing the eyeball down onto the black fondant.

 Once you've done that again moisten the fondant with some water and slide on your eyeball

 Reshape the eyeball if you need to, if it's lost a little bit of shape when you've been

 I'm just going to start off by putting a little bit of olive oil.

 Next thing I'm going to do is put in one clove of chopped up garlic.

 I'm just going to cook that for about a minute just to get some of the flavours out of the

 Then what I'm going to do is add a little bit of salt and a little bit of pepper.

 I'm just going to put that on a low heat, I'd say almost like a simmer.

 If you can do a little bit longer great but fairly low heat and give it the occasional

 Now I'm going to give it a little taste, it's always good to taste it just to see how it

 So what I'm going to do is I'm just going to start off with just one tablespoon of white

 And then give that a stir and carry on cooking and then give it a little taste.

 Now I'm just going to give it a quick taste because obviously with the sugar and things

 I'm going to put in a tad more sugar, just maybe a little bit extra, a little sprinkle

 Now if you want to see what the sauce is like, it's starting to thicken up quite nicely now,

 I'm probably going to just give this a little bit longer so that the sugar sort of melts

 So I'm just going to pop that back on the heat for a little bit.

 It's a good time just to give it a final sort of taste test before you serve it up.

 As a little extra, what you can also do, you can actually use a little bit of basil.

 You can either use fresh basil or you can actually just give a squirt out of the tube,

 mix it in and you get a completely different flavour but it's really nice with the basil

 Give a little squirt here, let me get some of this out of the tube.

 You can probably just cook this for another few minutes, just sort of mixing the flavours

 of the basil and I think you'll find that this is really nice on pasta.

 I wouldn't necessarily use the basil on a lot of other dishes but certainly for pasta

 If you're interested in seeing my other recipes, I've got quite a few on there at the moment

 and again if you want to subscribe, I'd really appreciate that, all your comments.

 First you'll need a canvas, some lights, a pencil, a screwdriver, and some duct tape.

 Okay, here I'm just making, I'm just drawing dots in the shape of the picture that I want

And I decided on a dandelion, so that's what I'm trying to make.

 now you can't see the dots that well, but you'll be able to see it in a bit.

 make sure that the number of dots you have equals the number of lights in your light,

 After doing that, you want to get your screwdriver and just punch a hole in each dot.

 the holes was probably my favorite part, because it was so easy and it was kind of fun.

 and secure your lights in place or else they're going to fall out.

 And please don't forget to subscribe, like, and comment down below.

 So I bought a used riding lawnmower yesterday and I got it up into the bed of the truck

 Of course they didn't have any kind of special end or anything on them.

 Just kind of stuck them onto the tailgate there and they kicked up and it was kind of

 So I've bought something to try on this and I'll show you what it is.

 This is the ramps by Reese 8 inch ramp top kit and they're aluminum things like this

 and they clamp onto the boards and I'm going to go ahead and put those on there and see

 exactly how that's going to work, if it's going to work and make this thing a whole

 Ok one quick point of review, if you buy a 2x10 that's got any kind of like an arc here

 on it, like it's kind of warped a little bit, then these things are not going to want to

 I'm going to try to turn this one around and see if I've got more of a flat surface here

 Now it should also be said that these are made for 2x8s, not 2x10s, but it looks like

 The only problem I'm running into is it looks like, you see here, it looks like this notch

 And this one doesn't have much of an arch so I'm going to try to maybe drive those on

 And so they give you these really nice bolts here and locking nuts to go on the end.

 And so I'm going to go ahead and put it on the other board as well.

 Now the thing that is interesting to me about this is that gap right there.

 I really thought it would go over the edge of the 2x10, but even the drawing in the book

 shows this thing, if you look at it right here, butting up against that.

 It seemed like it would be stronger if the board itself went into that groove there.

 I'm going to pull the truck into position where I can bring this lawnmower off of it

 Ok it does come with some nice little rubberized sort of sticky things here that we can put

 on the back side of that to keep it from shifting as it comes off the tailgate of the

 So my last little comment here is that here it is with the rubberized stuff stuck on there

 Hi, I'm Shelly Young, owner of The Chopping Block, and today I'm going to teach you how to make aioli.

 So you're going to get to learn the technique of aioli and mayonnaise at the same time.

 Today I'm going to make it in the food processor because I have one and it's a lot easier.

 Simply by taking a bowl and drizzling the oil in and whisking it by hand.

 So the first thing we're going to do is chop the garlic in the food processor.

 We need to do that without anything else in the food processor.

 If you're making the aioli by hand, you'll want to chop the garlic by hand separately and put that in the bowl.

 Now what we do is we put the lid on the food processor and we start the engines, if you will.

 Sometimes a little tomato paste, some lemon zest, some orange zest.

 Aioli is wonderful in salads, in a potato salad, a pasta salad.

 Because I use this this computer to run two businesses and I do a lot of heavy

 editing and just a lot of processor intensive projects I'm gonna install a

 than adequate but it's just got so many hours on it I feel like it's time before

 that drive fails and I lose a ton of information and a lot of my programs.

 really because I need the space but just because they're they're cheap.

 thing that is really important is that it's serial ATA and it's also 7200 rpm.

 The RPMs is really important 5400 is generally what's in a laptop and a 5400

 drive isn't quite adequate for doing really intensive editing and stuff like

 are super fast but as far as reliability I think you get the best longevity and

 really great is that Apple has really done a good job engineering the whole

 drive bay in this computer so it only takes a few minutes in order to

 it is all crispy and new and you can see it's different it's power and it's

 different serial ports back here which we'll need in just a second.

 gonna go ahead and unplug the machine again and now that that's unplugged I'm

 gonna go ahead and it just actually flickered at me I saw the light come on

 and that that was a little bit of a power surge and you don't want to be

 working on it with it plugged in or with you know any power left in it.

 gonna take out all this stuff again my air deflector and then both my hard

 drives are up here and you can see that there is there are two of them in here

 got your master drive on top and your slave drive on the bottom it's gonna

 automatically read off the top drive and that's my system drive so what I'm gonna

 do is I'm gonna twist that thing up and then I'm gonna pull out these actually

 on both of these I'm gonna latch this back down until I get these out.

 just pulling out the serial cables here and then the power cable is on top so

 now I'm gonna flip that that lever up and then the whole drive should slide

I'm gonna be very careful not to pinch any of those cables and it's

 about these is that they've got these little nubs on them and that's all like

 we just have to take these out and put them on our new drive and we're ready to

 so here's my old drive and go ahead and lay it down up here and then I just want

 to put these little screws on the new one and I'm not gonna tighten them up so

 tight this time but that drive I don't think has ever been out of the computer

 so I think it shipped from the factory like that and then to install this it's

 just the reverse process I am gonna be sure that I've got these out of the way

 if you look in here you can see that I actually need to put that that top drive

 bay into the middle slot so it's not that it'll accommodate a few different

 sizes but that the back end of this top drive needs to go in that middle slot

 and then it's gonna it's gonna slide in here and then up in the back you can

 kind of see where I'm pointing there that's where it'll slide up and that's

 why I was having a hard time getting it out so I'm gonna hand that to you so now

 see if I can do this with the light so that was the middle slot and then I can

 feel it after I push it about halfway in I need to kind of pick up on the back

 end and then it should go right in if I can get these cables out of the way

 there it is so there you can see in there there's that new system drive in

 there so that was a little bit trickier than I remembered but I never had that

 one out the bottom one is super easy because I'm just gonna stick it right in

 the bottom there make sure all these cables are out of the way so I got it

 lined up on the two bottom sides and it slides right in it's easy as a dream and

 then I just have to latch these guys down and then I want to be sure that I'm

 plugging back in my power which is the smaller of the two so there's my power

 and then the serial cables for each of these I'm gonna do my power first because

 it's closer to me so there's my power in there's my serial cable in and you want

 to check those and make sure they're in snugly so then I can go ahead I'm gonna

 plug the computer back in now and I'm gonna put in my my air deflector and all

 that so now we're ready to go that's how to put in a new system drive and

 actually how to do the other your auxiliary drive but now this is a brand

 new drive so there's nothing on it now I'm ready to install my new operating

 Hi, this is Duane, and I'd like to share with you a bluesy little run.

 includes among other things a flat third a flat fifth and a flat seventh and

 That's not to say you can't use other scale notes you certainly can but it's the flat third and the flat seventh and to some degree

 The flat fifth that gives it that bluesy sound let's play in the key of F

 But let me just show you I play the root with my fourth finger my third fingers on the flat seventh

 My thumb on the fifth, and then I bring my fourth finger over and slide off

 Actually go to the flat fifth and then the fourth the flat third and the root again

 And you can kind of slide up to the first note if you want like use the seventh

 Okay, you see I can do it in any octave I did it up here, but I kept going sometimes tonight

 And of course in your improvisations you can play up play around with that flat third flat fifth and the seventh

 Okay, just a little a little quick lesson on playing the blues and the key of F using a

 So right now I have my caramel boiling and it's been boiling for several minutes now.

 You're going to want to test your caramel over and over again to make sure that it's in the hardball stage but not burning.

 Because it's a fine line of having it to be caramel and having it burn.

 You take your spoon and you're going to want it to be metal because the caramel is actually very hot.

 And if it's a plastic spoon, of course it's going to melt the spoon.

 Take your caramel off the heat because you don't want it to burn.

 Now the reason we're making caramel instead of using caramel and having to wrap it in to basil leaves

 Nowadays, from all these food products, you're getting all sorts of weird stuff in there.

 So you just want to make sure that you're making it from scratch so you know what you're eating.

 It always tastes way better and it makes you feel better when you tell people I did it from scratch.

 So here at the Cupcake Cafe, of course I make everything from scratch.

 From my frosting to my cakes and of course my fillings as well.

 If you want to make caramel candies, all you have to do is drop it into the water

 and then you form the ball or form whatever shape you want basically.

 You're not going to want to use homemade caramel and espresso drinks

 because when you put it in the hot water and the hot coffee, it just dissolves weird.

 So now I'm going to be showing you on how to make filled caramel cupcakes

 So what you're going to need your fork for is you just do a little hole in the cupcake with your fork.

 Now I don't like for my cupcakes, I don't like my caramel to be real thin.

 When I bite into a cupcake, I don't want to ooze it all over and make it a big mess.

 So now it will be soft, but it's not going to just be so thin where it's just oozing everywhere.

 That way when you take a bite, you're going to have ooey gooey caramel.

 And then I drizzle a little bit of caramel over the top more for decoration.

 Now I don't like dark chocolate, so I don't do dark chocolate when I'm making it for myself.

 Right now I don't have any sea salt, so I can't do that for you today.

 Well, thanks for joining me from the Cupcake Cafe in Anacortes, Washington.

 I'm open Tuesday through Saturday, 11am to 7pm, sometimes 9pm if I'm busy.

 And then I'm open on Sunday as well, but I'm open from 12am to 6pm.

 And I'm closed on Mondays because I'm the baker and I'm the only one that works here, so I need a day off.

 Well, thanks for joining me, and I hope that your caramel turns out just as good as mine did.

So today I will be showing you how I achieved this look with flexi rods.

I wear flexi rods throughout the week to keep heat off of my hair.

 I am starting on week old straightened hair that I just combed out.

Just to make sure that the ends are all moisturized and to minimize breakage.

I'll take a small amount and put it on the ends of my hair just to

 Now I am parting my hair in the direction that I want my curls to fall.

 If you want to see a tutorial on that, just comment down below.

 I am using Elasta-QP Olive Oil and Mango Butter Moisturizer on my edges.

 I like this better than edge control because it actually moisturizes my edges.

 control sometimes gets a little sticky and gunky and flaky on the hair and I don't really

This stuff works just the same and it's not greasy or sticky or anything

If you have any comments or questions, please leave them down in the comment box below.

 Also, if you want to see any other flexi rod tutorials with different sized rods or different sized curls, just let me know.

 Hi there and welcome to the Drawstoff Real Easy Bubble Alphabet

 and so if you take that height there and do the same as a width

 and I'm going to take that to finish just a little before that line

 and I think there are all sorts of laws and things for how you do typefaces

 and that's when you need a typographer to come and just tweak it

 and if you want to learn to draw lots and lots of stuff real easy

 Hey, I'm Stein and in this segment of Keeping It Simple, we want to show you how to cook

 Also, let you know how to keep track of your cooking times because remember, always, there's

 And most importantly, when we're all done, we'll pull it out, let you get a nice close

 All right, so let's give you some great information on getting your guajalote into your hook'n

 Rule number one, we always follow no frozen or partially frozen birds in our barrel.

 Then pull the giblets and the neck out and wash it, rinse it well and get it into your

 If you're going to do a brine, remember, you start the day before.

 You're going to cook up some spices and dissolve a lot of salt in some water.

 Most importantly to remember as well, cool it down before you put your bird in it.

 Then soak it for about 12 to 24 hours and then it'll be ready to go.

 There's some great recipes for those online or you can find kits for them in your supermarket

 You inject a Cajun seasoning into your bird and then sprinkle it with the Cajun seasoning.

 Recently I saw a picture online where they lay sliced bacon all over the bird and I want

 Now there's typically two types of birds out there, one with the pop-up timer and one without

 Right now, rule of thumb is internal temp on your Guajalote needs to be right around

 However, these pop-up timers are set at around 180 degrees Fahrenheit.

 So if you're using that pop-up timer, make sure once you pull it out you're ready to

 serve it because if you let it rest for too long it'll keep on cooking and you don't want

 Another option is getting a long stem thermometer like this one.

 I picked this one up fairly inexpensive at a hardware store and we'll show you how to

 Another rule of thumb that we're going to follow today is about 15 minutes per pound.

 We've got a 14 pound bird here so we're going to go for about three and a half hours.

 Now we're going to get everything all set, get our barrel lit, show you how to modify

 And then we'll go ahead and bring you out to our hook and cook barrel barbecue.

 All right, here we are out at our hook and cook and we're ready to hang our bird into

 We use about 15 pounds of coal because we're going to be doing such a long cook today.

 Now instead of using our rods and hooking and hanging our bird, what we're going to

 Our rods typically will go through these six holes, but instead of doing that in our upper

 Then we're going to hang our grill on those meat hooks and position our turkey on top

 So I'll go ahead, carefully set that grill right on top of those hooks.

 Then I'll position my bird with the breast facing towards these outer holes for a couple

 There's never any peaking, but with that center hole open, I can take a look in there and

 see if my pop-up timer has popped up or if I wanted to, I can take my long stem thermometer

 So we'll go ahead and position our bird right inside there, just like that.

 Now we'll go ahead, wait our designated time and start checking it when it's all set and

 We'll pull it out, bring it in, slice into it and give you a really nice look at it.

 So let me show you how you can check your pop-up timer or stick your long stem thermometer

 Now this might seem a little rudimentary, but all you need is a flashlight like this.

 You shine it here, you look here and I can see my pop-up timer perfectly.

 Or if I need to set my long stem thermometer, it's the same thing.

 I shine my light here, I look here and I can precisely set that long stem thermometer

 Now I set my mark, I'll know right when it's done and right when it's ready to be pulled

 So let me give you a quick tip or trick on keeping a more consistent cooking temp for

 your hook and cook barrel barbecue, especially when you've got a long cook time like on your

 If my temp gauge drops below 200 down to 150 or anywhere in that range, what I'll do is

 I'll take my lifting hook without pulling everything out and losing my temperature and

 I've got eight holes that are just the right height, so they're just above my disc.

 I'll take that hook and in every other hole, I'll slide it in there and very gently just

 And what you'll see right away is your temp gauge will rise and it'll keep a more consistent

 temp for the duration of your cooking time and it'll ensure great results.

 So our temp gauge is giving us 170 degree read and I'll set that down here.

 Also we're about three hours and 40 minutes just above our three and a half hour cook

 Now the lid's going to be hot, so I'm going to use gloves to lift it back and then we'll

 What I'll do is I'll place my hooks into the side of that bird.

 Now we'll bring him in, let him rest for a few minutes, cut into him and give you a good

 I'm going to go ahead right off the bat and make me a nice turkey club sandwich.

 Hopefully we've showed you a way that you can make a nice guajalote and your hook and

 Hey guys Ashley Nelzie here today with a get ready with me and this one was from the lost files

 I just put on the I believe that is primer that I use for my brows because it's just going to help the

 Tools that I use to adhere better to my eyebrows and just keep it on for a bit

 So back then I believe this is probably like in the winter time maybe like January or February

 I was doing my eyebrows with a pencil and this was before I found the wonders of using other things

 So yes, I also aided that with using the Anastasia brow dip pomade

 I'm just going to lightly feather that in so that we could actually make our eyebrows look normal.

 Now we're gonna move on to making our eyebrows look more believable

 This is just where we use a concealer just to clean them up a bit

 This is just going to give us that really like nice waxed appearance that we're going for and I'm just going to use this

 It's funny because when I'm doing these videos the eyebrow portion is like legit about 15 minutes to 20 minutes of me straight doing my eyebrows

 But of course for the power of editing it's all done in a couple of seconds if life were only that simple

 Now we're going to be moving on to our primer and I'm going to be using this particular palette from black up cosmetics

 But I just wanted to use some of the colors that were in this particular palette

 So I just went for that black in there that black is so so pigmented

 It's like a beautiful color and actually made this look come really, you know

 Well together after I finished doing that which you guys will see when I'm blending

 I'm going to go in with the glitter that's in the middle portion of there

 And this is just going to give like you'll see it gives this look such a nice effect.

 So that's exactly what I decided to go for and then power of editing that side will be done too

 And now I'm just going to go in and just blend this all out just to make everything come together

 I actually find that when I experiment and don't really have an idea of what kind of look I'm going for

So this is just me just you know freehanding it all not saying that I'm a makeup artist anything

 But you know, I think my skills are getting better compared to like those

 What is the name of this concealer and I use it all the time la pro as a la girl la girl Pro concealer

 I'm just going to use a little trick there where I just make everything a little neater and then all I'm going to do is

 But of course, we're gonna have a nice little cat eye and I'm just going to extend that not all the way out

 But just to the tip where it does go, you know with the little cleanup that we did on the side there

 Now we're moving on to our bottom lashes we cannot leave those out

 I'm just going to use this black pencil just to go in with the top lashes that we have on there

 And this is going to give the eyes a really just smoldering kind of look it just makes it come together nicely

 Now I'm just gonna move on to using my foundation as you guys can see I did not use a primer back then

 I definitely do use one now so you can see the difference as far as when you use a primer you don't use one

I'm also using this concealer stick by black up cosmetics as well

 Especially if you're looking for makeup that is going to last all day and cover all your imperfections

 So we're just going to buff that out and then this is going to bring light to the face

 And then once I'm finished with that, we're going to move on to contouring

 I usually do contouring when I really really want to have a nice beat.

 So we're just contouring all around and this just brings dimension and depth to the face so that you know

 You're not really drowning out by all the highlighting and just really high points on your face and um, yeah, we're just about done here

 I'm just gonna put that everywhere where I did put the concealer just to have everything set.

 And I'm just gonna put this on the apples of my cheeks and then we're going to move on to our lipstick

 I will have everything listed down below and this I know is definitely from elf

 So I kind of use this one just to kind of mute out some of that shimmer and it also gives a nice little

 Gloss to it and it just really goes well with this look so I decided to put on some eyelashes as well

 Really regretting putting the eyelashes because these eyelashes just didn't work and my eyelash skills was not a point

 For some of my subbies that have been long time, you know viewers

 You can pinpoint a couple of videos when my eyelashes continue to wave.

 I really wasn't gonna post this video at first because I wasn't too sure but I mean if you guys like this kind of stuff

 Hello there, guys, Kirk here with Kirk Giordano plastering my son Jason doing the technical stuff

 video, and of course, he's going to help me install these guys today what I'm called here today for is

 I don't know if you can see this, but we got a crack here about a quarter inch separation some

 areas are an eighth of an inch and some are as large as three-eighths of an inch the reason is

 water is coming through here and there's no vents this venting is going to go what I've decided is

 after looking at them the natural line five inches from here five inches there's five of these guys

 whatever bit I use they all got to be consistent whatever line I decide that also has to be

 consistent so I've installed vents in the middle of soffits according to what architects specify

 I've installed them next to the house to the wall I've installed them wherever usually indicated

 on print but for this it's just a common-sense thing I'm going to follow the natural break

 here so when I install these guys I've marked it already they're going to go like so and what

 I'm going to do is I'm going to saw cut this I'm not going to show you that nasty stuff because

 I'll be taking a skill saw with a masonry blade putting it up here and walking this line here

 and I don't recommend anybody do this and if you're going to do it wear a mask and good goggles

 because dust gets everywhere but what that will do is it'll allow air to flow in here and dry this

 out and also it'll serve as an expansion joint so the expansion joint stops this from being locked

 in we're locked in everywhere around here which is that's well you can see the damage what happens

 when you're locked in so that's where we're going with this okay guys we have got the vent installed

 still got four more to go but see where it's going now what I'm doing is got some really hot

 here this is got luminite in it so let's see I want to work away from the otherwise

 it's gonna come all over me so we do let's scratch it right now turn right around and brown it then

 after I put the second coat on I'm going to hard rubber float that because this is a smooth

 finish here I'm going to put some color coat over it to smooth the scratch and brown

 I won't bore you with this whole thing but you get the idea what I'm doing with the scratch and brown

 on this and it's all hard I'll show you that when I get to that stage.

 I'm gonna come back a little bit more on here, and what I'm doing is that way color finish well

 feather it in the rest of the way three two okay guys I finished the brown coat now I'm putting

 one more top coat on it this white stuff here it's uh it's color coat and I'm using color coat

 because it's real fine right here if I just try to use the scratch and brown material it'll be

 too rough when they paint it so now that this stage is done I'm gonna give it some chance to

 harden and I'm gonna scrape it back like this I'm using my toe here to really get it tight then I'm

 gonna come once more with a float clean up the vent and then actually they're getting ready to

 paint this so I'm gonna caulk this crack here too while I'm here I'm almost done with it all right

 guys over here this is coffee here this is plus a color coat we had some holidays in here that

 talking just wouldn't fix so I went ahead and put some weld cream down there incidentally my son

 pointed this out I should mention when I do little areas like this we chip out the stucco I actually

 put a weld cream which is a bonding agent on to this expansion joint I put it on both sides as

 well as here that way I got an even greater bond so this is one we still got four more to do when

 I get done with all of them I'll do one final just point it out and show you folks what it's supposed

 to look like when all five are done okay guys we are finally complete with this this is what the

 two-inch continuous vent looks like we cut the hole we put that in then we got to break all the

 stucco out around it tie it all together apply a bonding agent to both sides and do the two coats

 and then I put a color finish over it so give it a smoother finish that's this one here this guy

 here and we have three more that we installed this one's uh largest of them that's a 14-footer

 we have these two guys here and what they had was that moisture coming through that's why we

 needed to install them a real drag we got kind of beat up I got kind of beat up doing all the

 saw cutting but I'm glad that's over with anyhow if you're looking to install vents that's the way

 to do it it's kind of tough so far you at higher professional this is Kirk with Kirk Giordano

 plastering thank you for doing the video and we'll see you guys on the next one thanks for watching

And what I have here is I have an ale that's fermented for about three weeks

 now, and I'm transferring it over to another container called my bottling bucket.

 why you transfer it over is you get a lot of sediment left behind in your primary fermenter.

 So to get rid of that, we actually transfer our finished beer into another container.

 When bottling your beer, you're going to need your bottles, and how I sterilize these is

 Okay, we are now at a step where we're going to add our priming sugar.

 is I like to take a half cup of water and warm it up in the microwave for about a minute

 Once I dissolve that into my half cup of water here, I'm going to stir it in the beer that's

 Now that I dissolved my sugar in my half cup of warm water, I'm going to add it to my beer.

 you bottle it is to let the residual yeast that's left to ferment, creating CO2, which

 We are now at the bottling stage, and I'm going to start filling my bottles.

 we use to do this is we attach a bottle wand to the end of your siphon.

 apply pressure down, it's going to start filling the bottle from the bottom up.

 it to stop, I just relieve the pressure and it stops filling the bottle.

 Now that we've finished filling our beer bottles, we are going to cap them.

 to do is you take your wing capper, place your cap onto the magnetic strip, place it

I hope you enjoyed today's video tutorial on how to fill and cap your bottles.

 Please visit our website, YouCanBrewIt.com, for more video tutorials.

 Today we're going to show you how to actually make almond milk, because almond milk is just

 I have here Christine Matheson, author of the renowned Cancer to Wellness Manual.

 She's going to show and demonstrate how we actually use this in so many of the recipes,

 especially when you're creating recipes to help you recover from cancer, because you

 can't go and dive into the dairy or any of the other processed beverages that actually

 And you know, one of the things too about making your own almond milk, I know it saves

 an absolute fortune, because to buy a carton of almond milk, it's about $8.

 Whereas I worked out the other day, it cost me about $2.50 to make my own almond milk

 to have a container equivalent to what you buy in a container that you buy from the stores.

 One of the things that they're probably under the direction of through the TGA or through

 the government bodies was the fact that when they give out products, they heat them, which

 Now what I've done is I've actually soaked a cup of almonds, and as you can see, it looks

 more than a cup because it expands, and then you wash the almonds as well.

 So you just soak them overnight and throw them in a high speed processor.

 And what else, what I do with the pulp after I use this, nothing gets wasted.

 So I actually, because I had always had this over, and you can use it for sweets as well,

 But you know, I was always, because I make this regularly, I always had this over and

 It's not in my main book, but so you have to buy my recipe book eventually.

 Yeah, if you buy the e-book, if you can't access, like if you live in America or something

 like that at the moment where the book isn't, you can actually buy the e-book.

 It's not the full recipe book, as I said, it's just a mini recipe book just to give

 I have quite a few of them in my main book, but this was just a little additive.

 I make this almond milk quite regularly and I use it in a lot of my tea tonic beverages

 You certainly don't want to get into soy if you've got cancer in any way.

 You know, like I like to, I actually have used Ganoderma mushroom and I have a Ganoderma

 And so even though, you know, it is heating the milk, but I like to have one a day.

 And Ganoderma, which is the same as Reishi, it's fantastic adaptogenic herb.

 One of the Chinese herbs that they use for longevity is also called immortality herb.

 I'm going to rinse this off now and then we're going to do, show you how to do a sweet almond.

 Now I've bottled my almond milk and I'm just going to put that in the fridge normally.

 But today I want to show you how you can actually make a sweet almond milk and make it in a

 And to give it a sweet flavor so that we're sticking to the raw foods and et cetera, and

 So I'm putting some pitted almonds and the medjool almonds, not almonds, sorry, dates.

 So I've actually pitted those and I'm going to put them in here.

 So I've actually pitted those and I'm going to put the food back on the, on top of the

 So that is really good because sometimes too, when you're on the cancer programs and you're

 trying to detoxify your body, particularly in the beginning, you sometimes may even get

 If you're not feeling like that broth, like I have a broth recipe that I put people on

 And if they don't feel like that and they're a little bit headachy through the detoxification,

 So really you can get sucked into this and feel like you're really treating yourself

 Hi everyone, so for this very simple banana and chocolate chip muffin recipe you'll need

 self-raising flour, I'm using wholemeal coconut oil or any choice of oil, sunflower oil works

 ok as well, bananas, chocolate chips, vanilla, one egg and almond milk or any choice of milk.

 So first thing you want to do is preheat your oven at 180 degrees.

 your very ripe bananas, I'm using 5 bananas, you can use 5, 6, 4, it just makes it uber

 and one teaspoon of vanilla extract and give them a good mix together.

 get yourself some coconut oil or your choice of oil, measure out 75ml, with coconut oil

 it's obviously hard so you have to measure it out and then pop it in a microwave, I usually

 pop it in for only about a minute and that usually melts it quite nicely.

So once that's all nicely mixed together you want to add in your chocolate

 chips, I'm using this brand from Kirkland, it's from Costco, they're semi sweet and they're

 I'm sure if you're using smaller muffin cases you could probably get an extra 3 or 4 and

 video, I hope it's been helpful, let me know if you give them a go and I will see you all

 The Skinner Blend is a great way to blend two colors of polymer clay together.

 I'm Tammy Hahnemann and I can't wait to show you how well this technique works.

 Once my clay is fully conditioned, I've trimmed them to a square.

 I'll then take the super slicer and I'll take the squares and cut them on a diagonal.

 I'll flip the triangles on top of each other so now the red and the yellow are of double thickness.

 To create a Skinner Blend where the original colors still remain once you're done blending them,

 on the thickest setting, which for the poly roller from Fire Mountain

 and to continue to make sure you have this done correctly, you just want to fold that sheet in half

 are on each other and not folding it the other direction because then you'll just have a nice blend

 I'm putting the folded end back in first so that if I've trapped any air, it will come out

 you're going to want to just dedicate it to that process and not use it for food.

 I've trimmed off a piece of it and rolled it up so you can see what it would look like in a

 You can blend your own colors as well and then blend those together.

 This is for your inspiration as well as the designs on the table.

 There are over nine thousand designs on the Fire Mountain website which you can also draw from.

 time my parents took us out to an Asian restaurant, they would always order me wonton soup.

Well because they thought it was the most kid-friendly item on the menu.

 But I've grown up a little bit since then and when I tried these spicy chili wontons

 In a large bowl I'm combining a quarter pound of ground pork, a quarter pound of ground turkey,

 you can also use ground chicken but I prefer ground turkey, and a quarter pound of ground

I made my own ground shrimp by taking whole ones and just grinding them in my food

Then I'll add in 2 stalks of finely chopped green onions, 2 teaspoons of sesame

 oil, 2 teaspoons of Shao Qing wine, this is like Chinese cooking sherry, if you don't

 have it you can substitute for orange juice, ½ teaspoon of sugar, 1 teaspoon of salt,

 I don't want it to become too over mixed because I want to keep a little bit of texture when

 up, then fold it again, and now taking the bottom two edges I'll just overlap them and

 a non-stick pan, a little drizzle of oil, and place the wontons in my frying pan.

 cook them covered for about 5 minutes over medium high heat, then take the cover off

 and let it cook for 2-3 more minutes until they're fully cooked through.

 ¼ cup of soy sauce, 1 teaspoon of smooth peanut butter, 2 teaspoons of rice wine vinegar,

 1 teaspoon of sesame oil, ½ teaspoon of sugar, and then 1-2 teaspoons of chili oil depending

I love how the peanut sauce kind of brings everything together and after

 you're done you can still taste a little bit of the heat from the chili oil.

 Now going back a ways you might recall the kind of log treatment we put together for

 the gable ends and the sides of the front dormers using hunks of 4x6 western red cedar.

 We use spacers to separate those and create just enough of a space to fill later on with

 This is the material that actually provides a structure to apply your chinking to.

 So in other words, your two framing members, the backer rod slides right in between and

 Now it comes in a lot of different sizes which is good because logs will undulate up and

 down and you want to work with different sizes and even when you're working with straight

 timbers you may not get them placed exactly the same width apart.

 Now this is a friction fit so you slide it in there good and tight.

 That provides the backing for all the chinking and you want to slide it back just far enough

 Now this is the same material we used on the original log cabin over 20 years ago and the

 What's nice about this is it has kind of the texture of the old fashioned chinking but

 because it's acrylic you don't have to worry about it cracking and peeling out like the

 If you look at the chinking from the original cabin over 20 years ago, it's in absolutely

 Now one tool that really makes applying chink easy is a gun like we're using here.

 It squirts it out in a very even fashion and many times you'll see some of the old

 masters will use like one of the cake decorating tools where they put it in the end and squeeze

 it out but for people that haven't decorated a lot of cakes this is not a bad way to go.

 So now once we get the chinking in place, now it's just a matter of we have a little

 What we want to do is we just want a tool, in fact we really don't even want any chinking

 to stick to the blade so I'm going to kind of wet this down with a little bit of water,

 Sometimes you want to put just a little on the chinking itself.

 And the idea here is to just kind of work the chinking onto the grooves, just kind of

 You can see it's important to keep a little bit of moisture on the chink.

 If it's too dry it grabs on to your blade and then you end up with a mess.

 You just want to kind of slide across the top of it and shape it into position.

 I have a blade here that is really a nice slick type of blade for a really big chink

 joint we use something like this but you know obviously that's going to be just a little

 This works really perfectly and you know as we're going across this I'm leaving a few

 It just gives it kind of a nice hand tooled look which I don't know it's just kind of

 a nice look like human hands have actually been working this and it's not manufactured

 Of course as you start doing this you get your technique a little bit better.

 But and Bucky's telling me from the ground I'm using way too much water and I think he's

 I'm not going to be running down like this but once I kind of get my stride things will

 If you see clubbing pictures or you're wondering how to do clubbing makeup,

 this is just like the standard, standard, standard look I feel like.

 And it is a talk-through tutorial, so let me know if you guys like that,

 And I'm just going to jump into the tutorial and I hope you guys enjoy.

 Use whatever you have, it's just really important for dark looks

 and when you're wearing it out at night, you really, really want it to last

 So the big key for a classic smokey eye is that you really, really want to build your colors.

 If you start off really dark, it's going to be hard to blend it out.

 but use whatever kind of similar colors you have, it really doesn't matter.

 I just really like these because they're super pigmented and they're matte,

 I'm going to be mixing in some other colors too, but just use similar colors

 And I am going to take a flat shadow brush and apply it all over my eye.

 I'm going to add a little bit of fun glitter shimmer, and this is from Coastal Scents.

 This is an eyeshadow pigment, but you could use an eyeshadow too.

 That way the powder just holds it all in, but the glitter will still shine through.

 So I'm just going to pat that initial color that I used all over.

 So we're going to go back and fix the inner corners anyways towards the end,

 Next we are going to take a crease brush and a light gray color, like this.

 The darker the color that you're using, the smaller the brush you want to use.

 And this dark gray color I'm going to start to work under my lower lash line.

 so that way there's no harsh lines and it just looks very seamless.

 Now I'm going to go back with some of that original cream color

 and just touch up any of the places that kind of got covered up by the gray.

 It's really just depending on what kind of look you want to go for.

 and you just want to dip an eyeshadow brush in there or a concealer brush,

 and then you're going to go straight out from your lower lash line

 because if you're like me, my eyelashes aren't very big anyways,

 and they're just pretty much non-existent when your makeup is this dark.

 and this is just going to help them blend in a little bit more.

I'll play you just a little bit of this song and then I'll teach to you right afterwards.

 Yeah, so anyway, pretty easy song and just basically four chords the whole way through

 D, A, D minor, G. So I'm working on the key of D. I got this guy on the third fret relative

 G, to D, A, B minor, to G, to D, to A, A, to A. Be my waiting wall.

 Chris is about to pick one of the summer squashes that we planted this summer.

 with that bringing it right down to the center where the seeds are.

 I'll show you how much I get when I have both of the squashes julienned.

 to add a third summer squash because these are on the smaller side.

 don't want to use the seeds so I'm going to add that to my compost pile.

 also do this earlier in the day and just completely cover it with some plastic

 squash onto a kitchen towel and now I'm taking another towel and gently blotting

I'm going to let it dry on the towel for a little bit before I eat.

 going to cook for a minute because we don't want the garlic to get bitter.

 Just like the zucchini pasta, cook it to the desired consistency that you like.

 so it's going to cook a little bit longer and if you like it softer then

 I'll come back in a few minutes to show you what it looks like.

 cooked for about two minutes I just tasted it to see if it needed anything.

 day with a sauce and this is very simple with just olive oil and garlic and a few

 Hey it's Denise from Loomahat.com and on this video I want to show you how to do

 We're going to start with the e-wrap which is the biggest of the knit stitches

 beginners because it is quicker and because you get your knitting done

 much, I can't talk today, much faster when you do this knit stitch than

 your working yarn and you're basically going to wrap each peg with your working

So you're going to take it from behind, you're going to bring it forward

 each peg, right, and now you're left with a loop on the bottom and one in the top.

 What you're going to do is you take your pick and you lift the bottom over

 the top and to the back which is called, of course it doesn't want to do it,

 Okay, my next favorite version of the knit stitch is the U-wrap.

Okay and basically just like the e-wrap it gets its name by what

 the peg which forms that U and of course you can't go to all of them, you're

 working yarn and you're going to go from the front to the back but you're

 bottom over the top, go to the next one, half wrap, bottom over the top.

 So the next one I want to show you how to do is the flat stitch and as you can

 see there's a big difference in the size of the flat stitch and the e-wrap.

 when you use this flat one but it does have its problems and that is that if

 you don't know how to gauge the tightness on your knit, I don't suggest

 that you use this version because it can get almost impossible to work with.

 extremely, it can be extremely difficult and I really don't suggest it for

Alright so like the others it takes its name from the way you're

 using your working yarn, the way you're placing it on your peg and it is placed

 working yarn over the loop that's already on your peg and then just take

 to give you guys a look at it when you're knitting it because it looks, you

 would think that you're doing it wrong because you get this, this flat look here.

 little bumps and then a flat space here and you get that impression that you did

 you pull your knitting, your fabric when you pull it and it takes shape it will

So I did want to forewarn you about that stitch because if you've

 never done it before you're going to think you're doing it wrong because it

 doesn't look like this immediately when you get it off your loom.

 So the last thing, stitch I want to show you is the true stitch sometimes called

I think there's even a third name for it but that's what it's mostly

I call this the default knit stitch, it's the one most people will

 of the three small versions it's, it's the most loose of the three, right.

 your hook and bring it up through that existing bottom loop and scoop up your

 peg, take that loop off the peg, put the new one and pull on your working yarn.

 Again you're going to put that working yarn above the existing loop, take your

 hook, come from the bottom, scoop up that working yarn to create a new loop, take

 more effort than the other ones but for some people they just love it.

 Hey everybody, welcome back to Raw Food Muscle and today I want to show you a really good

I actually got this recipe from, well I didn't get the recipe but I got

 the idea from Awesome Foods, this is an organic store that we go to and they sell little serving

And they just pretty much have this on the sticker of the plastic container

 and I just kind of grabbed the sticker and I collected a few of them.

 was no demand I guess for the raw food so they stopped selling raw food.

So this is kind of complicated, I don't want to say complicated but it's long.

 that I just made another dish that has some nuts in it also and I'm going to be experimenting

 you can use black pepper but this is like a mixture of different types of peppers.

Alright so I'm all done and I'm going to go ahead and put this in

 noticed that the, it didn't have enough tanginess to it and I remembered that we normally use

 Himalayan salt and this is not the actual brand but I actually just used this container

 I do that with a slice of tomatoes but you know you can do so many things with it.

 going to be working on the actual tomato sauce and then we're going to slowly put this whole

 So, you got some new braces or maybe you've been in your braces a little while and you're

 trying to remember all the details we went over when you got your braces on about how

 So let me go through the stuff that you get in your goodie bag when you first get your

 braces on and how to use it to best take care of your braces and your teeth and keep them

 You want to keep your braces very clean and we give you the tools you need to get that

 Make sure that when you are using this that you let it go the full two minutes because

 Make sure you brush every tooth and you get around every bracket with it.

 Both from the front and let the bristles work around and then of course open your

 mouth, come inside, brush the top, the biting surface and the inside surface of all the

 When you're brushing with a regular brush, the easiest spots to clean is going to be

 the front lower half of the teeth and then of course the biting surface.

 What I notice a lot, people miss this upper part above the braces, between the braces

 So you have to angle your toothbrush, come in from above and brush this area.

 If you don't brush this area, plaque, food and everything else stays packed in above

 You will end up with marks, cavities, scars all along the top edges and bottom edges of

 your teeth if you don't get your toothbrush under there and brush under the braces.

 They're very good for cleaning in between the braces, underneath your wire.

 So make sure that you make use of these things because otherwise it's very difficult to clean

 They give you a package of floss threaders and when you pull them out, they look like

 Just a clear fishing line kind of thing with a loop at the end.

 What you do, you tie your floss to the floss threader and then the floss threader allows

 So you use the floss threader, pull it through and then you've got your floss ready to floss

 Then you pull it out, move to the next tooth, do the same thing.

 Use the floss threader, thread the floss through so that it's under your wire and then floss

 It takes a while to floss your teeth that way but you have to do it if you want a beautiful

 With the braces, they can rub your lips a little bit, rub your cheeks and they can make

 So use a chapstick, use the chapstick, keep your lips nice and moisturized.

 Also braces can rub so you'll find in your goodie bag a little package of orthodontic

 Let's say this bracket right here, the top edge of it is rubbing your cheek.

 Well you take some of this orthodontic wax and just make a little cushion over that top

 You can use it there, you can use it on the back teeth if you've got a little bit of extra

 So try and get the area dried off or dabbed off, then put the wax on there and it'll stay

 So you've got everything in your goodie bag to help you take great care of your teeth.

 And I'm going to use a lot because I actually want to be a little bit more pasty.

 What I'm going to do now is add some of my extra virgin olive oil.

 As I said I really like using the organic one but it doesn't matter whether it's organic

 So this is going to really help to moisturise the hair while we are clarifying as well.

 So stick around for that part and hopefully you guys find this video helpful.

 Which makes it a little bit easier because this part is way too big for me to just apply all over.

 So what I'm going to do next is I'm going to mist my hair with a little bit of water and aloe vera juice in this spray bottle.

 And I'm going to detangle the section and then apply the product.

 And I'm just going to take a bobby pin and just actually pin it there.

 And I'm going to put in the information box below all the information that you need to know about the bentonite clay.

 So you have a better understanding of how these products can actually help to grow your hair.

 And then what I'm going to do is I'm going to start to coat the hair with it.

 And then I'm going to rinse it out and come back and show you guys.

 Okay guys, so I just finished washing out the bentonite clay on my hair.

 I am making cupcakes for Griffin's first birthday party, but these aren't any

 we have the flour, the sweetener, some spices, baking powder, and soda.

 the details and all the amounts will be listed in the video description below.

 eggs, some applesauce, some butter, which makes everything taste delicious, a

 little bit of water, some stevia, and some of the coconut nectar.

 this by hand for about three or four minutes and now it's ready for the

 rice flour is a denser cupcake, so I think it will go better this way doing

Not an easy task in a normal blender, but we got it done, and the

I use a joint that the folks in Shasta use that's a little bit bigger than

 arm saw that has a stop set to 1978s to cut the long side of the box.

 block that gets added to this stop to shorten it to 14 inches, which is what I use for my

You could have a slightly different block that would get you to 16 and

 to best utilize the boards so we don't end up with knots in the joint area.

 that she puts in to shorten the stop to 14 inches so that we can cut a short board.

 8' 1x8s you can get 7 boxes out of 5 boards with about 10 inches of waste.

The boards are trimmed to 6 5 8s and then the board is cut to a length

 worst defect out of the edge as part of this process to improve the general quality of

You'll see I'm inspecting the crown of the board and the edges of the board to

 This is a dado blade that you can adjust from very narrow to wide.

 the fence of the table saw so that it's 3 8ths or half the width of that board so that

 I'd like to salvage so I'm trying to pick the best one to dado.

 had a defect in the edge that I was able to dado out to improve the quality of the board.

 2 by 4 at the front here and a big piece of 2 by 4 at the back because you end up cutting

 above the plywood by 3 quarters of an inch so you need meat to hold the plywood together.

 If I was to do this over again I'd use a thinner piece of plywood because I'm having

 a problem with my dado blade reaching high enough above the plywood to make the groove.

 On the back side here I have a board and I'll show it in operation in a minute.

 here allows me to unscrew it and put it on to adjust whether I start with a cut or cut

 a tongue so I use that extra board to position the inboard so that it gets a groove first.

 After all these boards are completed you can look at one of my other videos on using the

 Okay, one of the important elements of that shuffle feel is how you're playing the shuffle

 So I'm playing the downbeats with the shoulder of the stick on the edge, and the skip notes

 One thing you might find, this track moves along at quite a pace, really.

 And you might find if you're playing that too loudly, that really holds you back.

 And you really don't need to play that from a great high on the hi-hat.

 You'll find that a whole lot easier to play than from up here, for example.

 Okay, the next thing we're going to do is to start incorporating some ghost notes.

 We're going to place the ghosted note in between all the notes we're playing on the hi-hat.

 We're going to now play the second partial of the triplet with the left hand.

 However, after the backbeat, we need to also play one of those ghost notes.

 In other words, we've got to play an accented backbeat with a rim shot in this instance.

 So let's combine that hi-hat pattern and the backbeat really slowly.

Now in this video I'm going to show you what I do with all those

So then I have a product which I can then use on my barbecue at home.

 pieces of wood over a peer to tie them and sort out the hardwoods like this.

 I've seen people do this with old water tanks, 45 gallon oil drums, anything like that.

What's important is you've got a nice solid steel box that you can have

 all those little bits of softwood that you've been cutting off.

 or so you want to get a fairly strong fire underneath because you want to get a lot of

Now after about 10 minutes you can see we're starting to see some smoke escaping.

White smoke means that we're actually baking all the moisture out of the wood and

 have to sit here all the time and guard it but it's not a bad way to spend the day.

 somebody, the event was quite an important event to them so I thought I can't let them

 aged bloke sitting next to a fire and keep putting pieces of wood on it.

All they know is it mysteriously appeared in their local supermarket

 you can see I've got a decent fire underneath and there's a lot of smoke, still white smoke,

After about 2 hours of doing this you can really just walk away and

 leave it provided you put your fire somewhere where it can't get out of control and cause

 the fire nice and fierce, get lots and lots of heat in it, really heat the wood up and

 of the smoke because that's the clue as to when it's ready to finish.

 asked to do this video by some friends of mine in Canada, some fellow wheelwrights.

 for about 3 hours and as you can see I've got one hell of a fire underneath it and it's

 the only thing that's stopping the contents inside the box bursting into flames because

 build the fire up until it's really, really hot and then that's it.

 the whole thing is going to burst into flames and it will be quite nasty.

 had 5 hours on the fire and as you can see the smoke is now turning.

 smoke which is steam but it actually is grey smoke which means it's starting to burn.

 a couple of hours to cool down so let's have a look and see what we've got.

 Hello and welcome to science beyond this channel, we're gonna make scrambled eggs all of my eggs with that in mind.

 Here are the ingredients that you're gonna need in order to prepare the scrambled eggs.

 The reason I have four eggs is because I'm actually cooking for two people if it was actually one person

 I also have some country crock margarine or butter that you're gonna need to actually coat the skillet in order to

So the first thing we want to do is get a little bowl of some sort

 We're gonna crack it just a little bit open it's gonna release that egg

 Don't worry about the shells actually entering into the bowl because you can actually take that out discard that later

 I don't personally eat it, but the course that comes on the birth force that comes on the eggs

 So I take them off when I'm cooking for my kids or even when I'm making cakes I take it off

 So next thing you're gonna do I've made sure all the course off the edge.

 Okay, next thing we're gonna do is we're gonna take this over to the stove and we're gonna get started and cooking this scrambled egg

 Okay, we have brought over the scrambled eggs that we actually mixed up in the bowl

 The margarine the spatula that we're gonna use to mix it and the key to making a

 It's some type of cover lid because what's gonna happen is once we put this margarine

 Then we're gonna pour the eggs over into it with the cheese and we're gonna coat it with the cover lid

 So let's get started with that if you have a gas stove such as I do

 So probably about a three-fourth setting if you have an electric stove, make sure you turn it down

 So we're gonna take a teaspoon of margarine on a tablespoon of margarine and we're gonna put that inside the skillet

 If you want to put salt pepper or seasoned salt inside your egg, that's fine

 Because you don't want your dry season to overpower your egg or your cheese or just your eggs itself

 Let's mix it up a little bit more because it has settled since that time

 Okay, that's done as you can see the skillet is really getting heated because you can see the margarine actually is bubbling

 I'm gonna add half of that first piece of cheese the other half

 Seconds to a minute to cook a scrambled egg a good scrambled egg.

 You want to cover because what you want it to do you want it to cook and the steam from cooking the egg?

 Together if that makes sense to you and you're gonna see exactly what I'm talking about

 To foam up in a sense and what the egg is doing is cooking from the bottom

 So you won't have one of those situation where the egg is done, but the cheese is not melted

 So we're gonna leave that like that for a couple of second and it's actually cooking.

 The cheese on the inside is actually melting with the lid on top because the steam is trapping it while the heat is

Not only is it cooking the egg, but it's also met melting the cheese at the same time

 Let's go ahead and remove this lid because once you see the edge of that eggs on to cook.

 And here's the final results of the scrambled cheese and egg as you can see is fully cook that dried out

 Hope you have enjoyed the time we've shared together and making scrambled egg and cheese until next time be blessed

 Now remove all of the screws holding the handle base and cover together.

 and use a clamp to secure the handle base to the gearbox assembly.

 Make sure the throttle cable is inserted into the groove in the handle base.

 Then carefully remove the clamp, support the base, and realign the handle cover.

 Be aware you will need to thread the larger screws through the nuts to secure.

 Reattach the wire and boot to the spark plug and your hedge trimmer should be ready for use.

 wound my own transformer, which I've talked about, and I've got a 2222, and I've added

 an 18k in the base circuit, and another 2n2222 for the collector here at the base, and then

 7 tenths to 8 tenths of a volt, it pulls this to ground and shuts the Earth light off.

 spray this with a spray bottle, and I'll do that real quick here for you.

Okay, and shove that down in your air cell here, and connect her up.

 And then here's the circuit, and when I shut off the solar cell, the Earth light comes on,

 well, because I haven't done anything for days to it, except I only sprayed it once, but I did

Okay, and if you look real closely here, I show you 35 feet of number 31 wire,

 And as long as you use this type of circuit, and you adjust the base resistance, then the Earth

 light will come on every night, providing you can keep the cell wet.

But you only need to spray a little of this Elmon to make the magnesium, seems to make

 the magnesium last a lot longer, but you can get it in the grocery store, and that's what it is.

 So I just wanted to share this with you, that that's what I found that helps a lot.

 I'll do some other circuits with this later on, and I'll keep posting videos on when I find out

 I'll show you how to do it just only with one because that's all you need.

 Oh, I also did the heart puppy face and I dedicate that to my little doggy, Strawberry.

 So I'm going to do a figure eight and I'm going to put it here at the start.

 I'm not going to use double, I'm going to use three bands so that way the banana is

 So we're going to do this, take it down, like I said three, we're going to use three bands,

 So there, all three there, so that's one, two, three, four, five.

 Then let's do three rings and that's going to be our capping band here.

 So let me grab this, make sure you leave the capping band in there.

 This banana reminds me of the Minions one because they're always saying banana.

 mole and I've even darkened up my eyebrows a little so I just look like her.

 flick and I've got the mole and we're just going to do some red lips.

 Okay, so to start off with, you want to do just like your socket first.

Now if you're worried about your edges, you can go in with an angle brush like this

 so if you make a mistake you can just wipe with your finger and that pretty much gets

 take it up to about where your eyebrow is and you want to really angle it up.

 going to use the angle brush and I'm going to use the stick again but just taking it

 it to look like a straight line and when you open it, it'll look like a flick.

 down like that and then down to join where your bottom lash line is.

 Make sure you don't forget to powder these as well with the eyeshadow.

 And then just going back with the smaller Exhibit Brush that you used and the shimmer

Now for the cheeks, I'm just going to use this blush and bronze by

It's very important not to forget your mascara because it's such a dark eye.

 Hello, I'm Andrew, I'm here in the Love Food Kitchen with Sarah from Bray's Cottage Pork

 We're going to have a go at making a giant pork pie in the shape of Britain.

 What I always do now is I mix the flour in with a knife first of all.

 Because there is a chance that the fat's going to be really hot.

 The other thing about hot water crust pastry is that you don't have to be sort of very

 So I want it to just come together until it's a sort of play-doh consistency.

 There's pork and there's some smoked bacon and salt and pepper and then things I can't

 So supporting it as much as I possibly can, like a baby's head.

 We've trimmed it down and it's now looking pretty much British Isle shape.

 So I shall start down here where there's a nice corner and just start doing.

 And I'm also pushing it away from the edge a little bit because I'm hoping that should we try and get it out of the dish, that will help us.

 We've had it in the fridge for a while with nothing else in there and it's still not very cool.

 He'll be very capable without me of getting it out of the dish.

 It's the morning after the day before now and our pie should be nice and cold.

 You will need 1 medium sized white onion, I'd say a third of a cucumber, a teaspoon

 of garlic and ginger paste, a teaspoon of mild madras curry powder or a mixed powder

 of your choice, a teaspoon of chat masala powder, you'll find this from good Asian stores,

 a teaspoon of clear honey or use sugar if you don't have honey.

 Take a handful of fresh coriander and slice very finely, a tablespoon of butter ghee or

 oil, some pre-cooked chicken tikka, finely sliced and half a teaspoon of salt.

 Take a segment of cucumber and slice off the ends creating a wedge.

 Take your slices of cucumber and slice down lengthways making thin matchsticks.

 This is my new wok by the way, it's carbon steel and I can use it with metal utensils.

 Once you've softened the onion, add your garlic and ginger paste.

 What you want to do is reduce that down until you get a nice sticky base.

 Hey what's up, I'm Robin Nolan, creator and author of the best selling Gypsy Jazz

 have literally taught thousands of guys and girls all around the planet how to have fun

In this series of videos I'm here to answer your questions and in this

 video I've got a question from Jay in Portland, Oregon in the States and he asks, how do I

 obvious, play the chords and practice them, I would say, here's a little tip on memory,

 because I know what you mean, it's like basically you're talking about practicing chords which

 you're uncomfortable with playing, I mean we don't have to practice like... we never

 have to practice that chord because we already know it, because maybe that was the first

And basically you've got to get to the level where all these new chords

 feel like that, so there's nothing stopping you, it's just how many times have you actually

 you're a little bit unsure, then you've just got to go through it, you've just got to play

 it another 10,000 times or 10 million times until it feels like that chord, or that chord.

 Because when someone says play an E, I'm sure you never make a mistake, you don't go, oh

 God, E, you just go E, so that's where you want to get with every chord when you're learning

And the key to this whole thing, learning Gypsy Jazz, is to take it

 slowly, so don't be overwhelmed with all those new chords you've got to learn, just start

Let's just get simple, say you're learning a piece that's in G and you've got

 this chord G over B, which is kind of a Gypsy Jazz chord, unlike in Rock or Blues or Jazz

 Guitar, you've got this kind of, because you've got it in that sequence, it goes... So it's

 a new chord, you're a little bit unsure of it, maybe the stretch even kind of throws

What I would do is, of course just play it over and over again in context

 of the music, but if it's the actual chord which is causing you a little bit of discomfort

 or trouble, then fret the chord like that, and forget about the right hand, and just

 kind of look at it, look at the three fingers, and then take your hand away, and then kind

 of like, just for a brief second think about something else, then go back and go... And

 then fret it straight away, then back, then go... And maybe a couple of times you kind

 of get it wrong, but if you kind of... It's just kind of, instead of having to go through

 the whole piece until you get to that chord again, you kind of quickly do a bunch of reps

 if you like, you quickly kind of go, G over B, G over B, there's the G over the B, there's

And then, after five minutes of doing that, I'm pretty sure that you won't

 actually forget that chord, so when you see it on the chart, or you see me teaching it

 or whatever, in a song, and you want to learn that chord, then that's G over B, and that's

 example, if that chord's too easy for you watching this, then try this chord for E minor.

 And this is one of those chords which has kind of got a finger on every fret, and it's

 learning that chord, it's from Borelli Le Grand years ago, he did this solo piece, it

 was really beautiful, and I kept rewinding the tape, and then I eventually got the chord,

 the brain when it goes to the fingers, the muscle memory, all that stuff, it's something

 who's never played guitar, that's going to be just as hard as that.

So that chord, eventually, after doing this technique, will become normal.

 So there's another chord, there's the G over B, and basically what you want to do is do

 that with any chord, or a chord that you're having a little bit of difficulty with, and

And if you've got a question yourself, then please don't hesitate to fire away, that's

And also, if you haven't seen the Gypsy Jazz Guitar magazine, which

 is an interactive experience, then please go check it out, gypsyjazzsecrets.com, you

 can go there, you download the free app, and then you can see a ton of guitar lessons

 and exclusive performances from the best guys in the world, right to your iPad, iPhone,

 I'll definitely be doing another one soon, so stay tuned, and take care.

I started with these huge curls using a clipless iron and as you

 on the picture of my sister or you can check out the link in the description box down below

 My recent haul, you would have seen that I purchased another box of the L'Oreal Faria

 Then I'm going to secure it under my ear or behind my ear with two bobby pins.

 using bobby pins that are close to your hair color so that you can hide them and it looks

 one and have them crisscross each other like a little X as you can see here.

I'm going to go ahead and take that braid and pull it across my head, overlapping

 the original braid using two safety pins and the X motion or the X position as well.

 teasing my hair at the back of it so you're not touching any of the braid or anything

All the volume is going to be in the back and you can make it as big and as

It's really easy and it's perfect for out of the pool or summer days

 or those days that you have oil in your hair and things like that.

Thank you guys so much for watching and I'll see you guys in the

Now if you're anything like me, when I started learning guitar, and

 especially if you're into rock music and heavy metal, I found it very frustrating because

 I bought some books and videos and they seemed very generalised and kind of teaching you

 some pretty lame, you know, all these kind of open chords and songs that I wasn't really

 Which is all very well, but, you know, I just wanted to get stuck in and play some metal,

So, I've actually devised a system that kind of builds on what I learned and it bypasses

 all of the theory, so you can just get, you know, playing with no time at all.

 know, I've got a bit of stick from people saying you shouldn't do that, you shouldn't

I'm not saying that you should completely skip the theory, you know,

 you can always go back to that later, but surely it's better to, you know, get up and

There's a statistic actually that says 95% of people that take up the guitar

 to keep you interested and then as you get better, you know, you can always go back to

 Now, even if you're not interested in my product, my system, I want to show you some stuff today

 that you can use and take away with you and, you know, give you a head start.

 of which is something I'm going to steal from a Def Leppard song.

 you how you can sound pretty cool just by using one finger and two strings, alright?

 So this first one, I'm going to use the fourth and third string and I'm going to use the

 by moving that finger up and down the fret board and then moving it down to different

 strings, so the fifth and fourth string and then lastly down to the sixth and fifth string,

 Yeah, so in no time at all, you can get something that sounds pretty cool.

 use that first finger to fret across two strings, so say on the second fret over the fifth and

 fourth string, sorry it's a bit early in the morning, you can get a pretty good power chord.

 Then all you've got to do is just move that up and down the fret board.

 Yeah, so pretty simple, you're not having to learn all these very complicated chords.

 In fact, with most chords, if you're doing a bar chord, you only end up playing the first

You very rarely hear people playing, certainly in heavy metal, you're

 do that by the way, just use your first finger on, let's start on the third fret of the sixth

 string and then your ring finger on the fifth fret, fifth string.

 that's G, but you can then simply move that up and down the fret board.

 Then you can move that same shape up onto the fifth and fourth string.

 Yeah, so once you learn these little tricks, and that's the good thing about heavy metal,

 a lot of it is kind of tips and tricks, you can really be running away with it in no time

Now, to get those kind of chug-chug sounds, it's quite important that you keep

 your right hand using this part here, the sort of back of the palm, and rest it lightly

 as close to the bridge as you can, so you're slightly deadening the notes, rather than

 that you can do, once you've got these tricks down, you can really get some great sounds.

 Now, two very common questions that I get is how to improve the speed of your chord

So say you are practicing your, changing your sort of open chords, you would

 set a metronome at a speed that is comfortable for you to change the chords, so I'm just

 going to cheat and use my foot here, but... And then all you would do is just increase

 if you're going to be doing, I don't know, maybe playing a gig or something.

 scales, you've probably seen this exercise before, but it certainly works.

 to do this with three fingers and just stepping the notes up and down the strings and then

So, for example... And then you would do the same thing but with

Then you can do the same thing with four fingers, so... And then same again

Now, do that again a couple of times a day, all the way up and down the fretboard

 and in a matter of days, you will literally find that your fingers are getting stronger.

 These sort of tips of your fingers will harden up, you know, because obviously they might

Okay, slightly biased opinion, but I honestly think this is going

 to be the quickest way that you can get up and running playing this sort of music.

 it all comes with videos as well included, so after each main section, I'll show you

 guarantee, so if after going through it, you're not satisfied, no questions asked, you'll

 get your money back and you can still keep the e-book and all the videos.

Mother's Day is around the corner and what better way than to show her how much

 Before we head over to the machine I thought I would give you a quick tip.

 ruler and a disappearing pen and you can line up from point to point for a straight edge.

 So back at the machine we've got our seams lined up and pinned for stability.

 You're going to clip away all the seam allowance and head on over to your iron.

 is going to be the bottom of your little sachet and you want to make sure that you back stitch

Then you're going to turn it inside out and if you'd like to press it again before

 you add your scented fill, your lavender, that would be a nice touch.

 Alright, so if your studio is anything like mine it smells absolutely amazing from the

I think this is a great gift to wrap up a couple and gift to mom on her special

 Okay, Mighty Finers, now we're going to insert the micro tube into the main feed line with

 Towards the top of the pipe, you just poke a hole with your precision machine, take the

 black tube and insert it into the white pipe and then just push it down until you feel

 At that point, you take the other end and that green rubber band that you slipped over

 the tube a few minutes ago, got to reach down in there and get it, just kind of like a garter

 belt at your senior prom, one of those deals, or maybe it was a wedding, I can't remember.

 You take that little black tube, insert it into the green rubber band and let it stick

 down below the rubber band about a half an inch or so and the rubber band will hold this

 Then when the pump comes on, when the timer turns it on, the nutrients will come up the

 white tube and into this little black tube and that's actually what feeds the plants.

 The nutrient will come down into this dispersal pot and by the time it gets to the bottom

 of this pot, it'll have a wetting pattern about that big and then it will drip down

 After they've been fed, because we're using coconut and there's no soil, no dirt, which

 incidentally has bugs and disease in it and this does not, it's designed to let the liquid

 After about 10 or 15 minutes, the coconut mixture will tend to dry out and that allows

 a large amount of oxygen to the roots of the plants and that's really what makes the plants

 grow very rapidly and makes them so happy that they won't ever want to leave home.

 Now we've put the pots on, the reservoir is ready to go, you plug the pump in, it's plugged

 into the timer, which we've sent you pre-programmed and you're just about ready to start putting

 In our next little segment, we're going to show you how to mix the nutrients and then

 This is Diana Sullivan in Austin, Texas, doing some very basic beginner lessons

 the weaving cast-on, but I really don't know anybody but me who uses it.

 something a little different for experienced knitters, I use the needle

 pusher to bring out every second needle for a little distance, and then I simply

 thread the yarn down into the yarn feeder, close the door, and go across.

 then I use the needle pusher again and bring the in-between needles out to

 it will not unravel along the bottom, and again, you can knit very, very quickly with a knitting machine.

 I'm going to take this off so that you can see what this cast-on looks like.

This is a variation of the very popular weaving cast-on, and what it looks like when it comes off the machine, again, the top is going to unravel because I did not bind off.

 cast-on will not unravel, but what it looks like is just that the yarn is running through

 So you could pick those stitches up and do something with them later, or you could use this cast-on to

 thread up and do a few rows of scrap yarn before beginning the yarn that's going to be the main garment.

 And I share some of the frustration a lot of you do when you're trying to stand your road bike up

So how are you gonna stand it up those of you who go on many organized rides?

 Unless you're the first one at the finish line or at the stop all the trees all the all the telephone poles all the buildings

 Have been occupied as far as where you're gonna line your button lay your bike up against

 And it's a very easy way to keep your bike upright if you need to stop for

 Whatever the case may be and not damage your derailleur by laying it on on the ground or against another bike

 What you do is you take this very easy to install put it on your pedal arm on the bottom

 Some type of an elastic belt rubber band maybe from a even from a vacuum cleaner

 Something as elastic put it on your on your handbrake so the wheel doesn't move

 They can see it pulls the bike upright and nothing's holding up against it

 And it can stand there and probably can withstand the same amount of wind that any kickstand would do

 There's no patent pending on this all it's just a homemade very primitive device

 Made of a u-bolt like I said and the L bracket just measure to your bike with that ladies and gentlemen

 Don't necessarily enjoy standing your buck up bike upright, but enjoy the riding that goes between standing your bike upright

 Hope you enjoy this little homemade device and have a good time riding.

 This sausage steak would work well for any home cook and is perfect for a weekend.

 You're going to shape them to where they're kind of flat and kind of loaf-like, so it

 We're going to add two ingredients, cheese and the other mystery ingredient is bacon.

 I added just a little bit of beef broth to the bottom of the pan.

 Now we are going to top these with our bacon and our little bit of green onion that I didn't

 You can put this back in the oven or at this point you could just put these in a container

 Please remember to rate, comment and subscribe to this YouTube channel.

 I'm also making a couple of pies for dessert and they have what's called an oil crumble

 I made this yesterday because I've got a lot to do today and I want to have as much done

 Because I think it's important to stay relaxed when you're cooking.

 It's not easy, but if you feel that you have unlimited time, it's a lot easier.

 Another way that it's easier to keep relaxed is to keep things picked up.

 Now I'm going to reserve this bit of it that's going to get sprinkled on the top.

 I don't give it to just anybody, the recipe, because it was given to me by a woman that

 I met her when I was just newly married and learned so much from her.

 She made this rhubarb pie, which I've been making for 50 years.

 She was a jazzer and a Trotskyite, very interesting, sometimes difficult woman.

 This pie, it's not like your normal rhubarb pie that may have strawberries in it.

 I know it's classic, everybody thinks it's great, but it doesn't hold a candle to Rebop

 The filling is three cups of chopped rhubarb and a grated rind of one orange.

 I don't share it with just anyone, but since I'm rather selfish with the recipe, I decided

 It has a quarter of a cup of flour, one cup of sugar, two beaten eggs,

 And I will crumble that part of the pastry that I reserved over the top.

 Of course, you won't be able to taste this, so you won't know when you do it if it's like

 My daughter has been trying to make this for years and she says it just never comes out

 She's got my recipe and I've practically held her hand all the way through it.

 And we'd been married a short time and I asked her for the recipe for her meatballs, which

 And when I asked her about it, she finally told me, well, she had not really given me

 the recipe like she made it because she knew we were struggling and so we might not be

 So she had made a special recipe for us because of our economic conditions.

 I'm making two because doubled recipes don't work for me sometimes.

 I have known students, cooks, friends, cooks that would give me a recipe but not the complete,

 So that pretty much guaranteed mine would never turn out like theirs.

 But there's something, the proportion, if you double everything in a recipe, the proportion

 One more crumb deal and then I'm ready to put these into the hot oven.

 Then it's going to go down to 350 where it will cook for maybe another 45 minutes.

 For this lesson we're going to be making an origami nesting bird.

 something like this and then if you put a string on it it could be a pendant

Depending on how you do it, you know, if you put the string a little

 farther back or maybe even on the tail it might hang a little better.

 Okay and then flip it over and fold the top up here so that you go right along

 that edge and make a nice straight piece and then cut it with your scissors.

 And now we're going to take this corner here and fold it up and out like this to

 make it upside down triangle and this piece here should be parallel with this

 two corners are right at the same place and that you've got this line at the top

 down so the top piece is overlapping the bottom piece like that.

 going to take it and flip it over and you're going to make some little extra

 notice how this is a mountain fold and it wants to just come pop right up.

Here's what it looked like lying flat with those diagonal folds.

 I turn it this way, grab with my thumb and my other finger and let this part

 I'm going to fold it up and then I'm going to take this corner here and fold it inside.

 So you can see I'm going to just take this and I'm going to fold it so it kind of lines up with this so it's parallel on the inside of this line.

 Now we've got our basic thing here and now we're going to make the head.

I'm going to take this and I'm going to push this corner inside of itself and down.

Now it doesn't really sit up very well so what you can do is you can take this little back of this flap and just fold it out a little teensy bit and take the other side of it and fold it out just a teensy bit so that it's got a little place to sit on.

Then if we've got extra time you're going to take a hole puncher and you're going to punch a hole kind of right in the middle.

And take your extra piece of string here, slide it right through the hole, pull it out the other side, put the edges together at the top and then tie those two together in a loop.

 So you can see the pendant hanging, it almost looks like it's flying now.

 short for Galvatron and 25 standing for the 25 year anniversary

 And what you're going to do is you're going to grab each side here,

 pull that out and then you're going to push this whole thing together.

 And then fold these down and they're just gonna kinda tab into place.

 The only problem is he's kinda back heavy so he has a bit of a hard time

 is actually, I love the Decepticon symbol right there on the left arm.

 amazing, and the orange light piping is a really nice touch to it.

 and kind of what makes up for some of the flaws in the rest of it.

 All right well before we get started as always on Slow and Steady Kitchen we're

 for about three hours and we're just going to take these wings rinse them out.

 We're going to be finishing them off with a southern style barbecue sauce.

 From our good friends at Andy Nelson's Barbecue, their Bama Barbecue Sauce.

 way to cook is with charcoal, lump charcoal and the chimney makes it easy.

 We're set up for indirect grilling and so we're going to have hot coals on this

 side and we're just going to sear these guys to begin with and then move them

 So there we go and so we'll let them cook for a while while I enjoy a Shirebok.

 All right so we just put some sauce on it, some of that great sauce and we're

 And now my friends, I'm going to show you how to draw a flower.

 Just of any kind, and soon you'll be able to make your own kind of flower.

 So first, all flowers have this little center, no matter where you go in the world or wherever.

 And so, well, flowers, they all have different kinds of petals, so you have to choose a kind of petal that you want to draw.

 And all flowers are kind of irregular sometimes, so I'm going to give it like one irregular petal right here.

 Then give each petal a little tad of space before you make the next one.

 And after you get, let's say, your first layer done, I have five petals in my first layer, like that's the irregularity, but it's still petals.

 They don't have to be perfectly placed, like, you know, right between the two petals in front, but, you know, sometimes, if you want to, you can.

 And to make creases on the petals, what you do is you kind of make this line.

 And I'll give it, like, I'll give this petal, like, a little, you know, bend on the top.

 So give everyone maybe just a little tad of a curve or something.

 So I'll just have it go off into somewhere and not really have a definite place that it goes.

 And so, it's usually if you have a multiple of five leaves, then you have these branching out.

 And if you have a multiple of three or four leaves, then they go parallel, like this away.

 And if you feel very artistic, you can have a petal that came off over here.

 Make sure you keep it the same size as your other petals, because you don't want, like, a giant petal just flying out of nowhere.

 Aujourd'hui je vais vous montrer comment retirer un support de la moto

 Les outils nécessaires pour retirer un support sont un pinceau de 12 mm et un pinceau de 12 mm

 Pour retirer un support de la moto, vous avez besoin d'un pinceau de 12 mm et d'un pinceau de 12 mm

 Assurez-vous que le pinceau de 12 mm est bien serré dans le boulon

 Une fois que vous avez votre pinceau de 12 mm et de la moto, assurez-vous de tourner de la bonne façon pour lisser les bouts

 Une fois que vous avez lissé le bouton, il y a un pinceau de 12 mm sur chaque boulon sous le bouton

 Une fois que vous avez retiré tous les boulons, les mâchoires et les bouts du support, vous pouvez maintenant retirer le support de la moto

 Une fois que vous avez retiré le support de la moto, vous pouvez changer de support et mettre un nouveau

 Mais assurez-vous de garder vos boulons, les mâchoires et les bouts car ils sont spécialisés pour votre support

 Merci d'avoir regardé ce tutoriel sur comment changer ou retirer un support de la moto

 G'day, I'm Anthony Rieko from the Band of Brothers Fishing Team.

 Today we're going to be demonstrating how to do a typical plait on a monofilament line.

 Typically this knot is done to create a double at the end of a game fishing outfit, but it

 But the main reason is because it retains 100% of the line strength.

 It lays the knot along quite a long piece of the mono, so it distributes the pressure

 So to begin, basically you grab your line, strip off as long as you need to create the

 You ensure the rod is placed in the rod holder with the drag done up tight, so you can create

 So you grab your main line, your tag line, throw it over, around the back of it, and

 Now that we've come through the middle, like so, we basically grab always the outside leg

 Now the important thing here is to ensure you're pulling quite tight.

 It's also important as you pull the middle one through, to flick it back.

 That will, in essence, pull the knot tight at the point, which is the pressure point

 Then that goes shorter from there, for the line of the line class.

 So this particular line class is only 15 kilo line, so we're going to make this about 3,

 As you get into your heavier line classes, 37 kilo and upward, then the knot needs to

 Basically because the mono's thicker as you get into the larger line classes, so the number

 So we'll continue this process until we get to about 3 and a half inches long.

 Okay, so we've got towards the end, we're at about 3 and a half inches now.

 What we want to do, we grab the tag end, so we want to identify with the tag end.

 We want to make sure that that strand of line is at the top of our assembly.

 And then now you can see that the tag line is at the top and the two legs are beneath

 So we then fold that in half, like so, and continue the process.

 The tag line is now at the little twin brother, and he's going through there with him.

 We grab the main line down here and we pull it through the loop, like so.

 So it all comes through, then we wet it and pull the tag line up.

 Now the way you test your plait, you basically let it go loose.

 If it's got a slight curve on it, like so, you've done it correctly.

 This is the installation video for the Exoskins Black Carbon Fiber for the iPhone 4S, which

 What you're going to want to do is start by peeling off the large piece.

 You can spray the top of the skin to lubricate it a little bit.

 Then start with your side pieces and line them up with the openings on the foam.

 If you don't get them right on the first time, you can just pull it right back up.

 Work your way around the foam, installing each of the small side pieces.

 Then grab your top and bottom front pieces, line them up with the openings, and lay them

 Hanchet Entry Systems is a leading provider of innovative electromechanical locking solutions.

 Today we'd like to introduce you to the HES 8500 Series Electric Strike.

 The time-saving 8500 is a unique, concealed electric strike for mortise lock sets with

 Its heavy-duty design surpasses all ANSI BHMA Grade 1 standards, so you know it's built

 Designed for fast, convenient installation, the 8500 fits into low-profile openings with

 You get a flawless finish and one of the fastest installation times of any electric strike

 If you need to convert the unit to fail-safe mode, follow these steps.

 Then tighten the screws and remove the fire screw, which is located under the label.

 Please note that operation in fail-safe mode removes the fire rating of the electric strike.

 Dust boxes that are less than 1 3⁄8 inch in depth, as well as any additional material,

 must be removed to provide clearance for electric strike and wires.

 The 8500 features three different deadlatch profiles for compatibility with a wide variety

 Select the correct deadlatch option for your mortise lock set by simply determining the

 deadlatch platform position that's appropriate for the mortise lock set you're using.

 Insert the deadlatch platform into the keeper slot, ensuring that the screw holes in the

 You may need to retract the keeper slightly in order to properly seat the deadlatch platform

 Align the deadlatch platform to the electric strike using the number 440 screws provided.

 Select and electrically connect the appropriate 12 or 24 volt pigtail to match system power.

 Next, insert the electric strike in the jam cutout and install the appropriate faceplate

 In less than ideal sagging door conditions, the 8500 faceplate options kit comes with

 If excessive movement, in other words door play or preload exists when the door is latched,

 then remove the strike from the door jam cutout and add one or two of the horizontal lock

 You've now successfully completed installation of the HES 8500 electric strike.

 For more information about the HES 8500 electric strike, visit www.hesinnovations.com.

 Today we're going to be installing an RGB Angel Eye kit, also a Cobb Angel Eye kit on

 We're going to be changing out the factory Angel Eye for a Cobb Angel Eye, also adding

 This is a comparison between the regular Angel Eyes and the Cobb Angel Eyes.

 Here we see the Cobb Angel Eye installed into the factory location.

 The RGB kit includes two Angel Eyes along with the remote control module and the handheld

 We'll be installing the RGB Angel Eyes around the factory projector lens.

 First step is to open the hood, disconnect the wiring, and then remove the headlight.

 We'll need to do this so that we can bake the headlight housings in the oven to soften

 You'll want to be sure to remove all bulbs and any electrical wiring that can be removed

 They are sealed with a factory glue that when heated becomes pliable and easy to work with.

 We're going to place the headlight into the oven in a center rack position.

 We decided to go with 270 degrees for a little less than seven minutes.

 We're going to be installing the Cobb Angel Eye kit into the factory location.

 Slide the wire through the hole in the original housing and begin to insert the wire through

 Place the headlight housing back into the oven to reheat the glue to seal the inner

 Be sure to apply even and equal pressure all the way around the lens to make sure that

 After the Angel Eyes are installed, reinstall the headlights into the factory hood, reversing

 We've ran some additional wiring to make the lights function as we would like them to.

 Hi everybody, this is Mickey Adams with Mahlen Pedal Steel Guitars in Dallas, Texas.

 In this lesson we're going to look at example number two of a C pentatonic scale.

 In example number one, we learned that a pentatonic scale is nothing more than five notes, and it implies a minor chord.

This one's going to be descending two octaves, beginning in the fifth, G, and ending up on C.

 We're going to utilize all ten strings on the guitar with a repetitious, descending type of scale.

 So let's depress our A pedal and look at just the pentatonic scale alone.

 We're going to use string number five at position number eleven.

 So if we went down to one more, one, two, three, four, five, we'd repeat.

 Now let's look at a descending, close to two octave, descending, staggered minor pentatonic scale.

 Let's depress the A pedal and start with the G sharp string, or string number three at fret number eleven.

 And we'll see you right back here with lesson number three on the pentatonic scale.

 Hey everyone, so today I'm going to show you how to make my fruit dip that is so delicious.

 I've already recorded this and I did the first part and it froze and it's not there.

 So what I had in the KitchenAid was one whole stick, which is like an 8 ounce stick of cream

 cheese softened, two tubs of Cool Whip that is completely thawed and room temperature,

 So I creamed the cream cheese first, sorry, and made sure it was all smooth.

 And then I add the whipped topping and make sure that is added and it's all smooth also.

 And now I just put in the last two things, which were the marshmallow fluff.

 So now I've got those in there and you want to make sure that you mix this completely.

 But once you get it going, make sure you've mixed it really well and there's no lumps

 of cream cheese, but you shouldn't have any lumps if everything was room temperature.

 Now I'm just going to add a little bit of red food dye just to give it some color.

 Okay, you've got that in there and then just mix it very slow and it's going to come out

 Okay, now that everything is mixed, you can see that it's a soft pale pink.

 I'm going to put it into a Tupperware and put it in the refrigerator.

 You want to refrigerate it for at least two hours so it can set back up and it kind of

 So the fruit that I have cut up, right here I have raspberries, fresh pineapple, cantaloupe,

 Obviously this is delicious on its own, just the fruit, but having it with the fruit dip,

 It's super simple and if you make it, let me know and I'll talk to you all soon.

 I got my backlight here and my Mazda right here that was leaking.

 And then take that and put another bead on the outside as I'll show you in the next step.

 Okay, well we stuck it up there and realized that we needed another layer on here.

 So I put another layer, I don't know if you can see it, on the bottom on the inside here.

 There's a, I used my screwdriver here, paper towel to clean up.

 Well you could in between here because I'd like it to look like it's factory.

 The junk on here is from tape, I got to give it some glue gun to get rid of it.

 If it's not, I'm filling this hole in between here all the way around.

 If I do it right it'll blend in with it, you'll see it a little bit, but it'll at least seal

 But there's enough bead inside here to hopefully have sealed it.

 Once it dries hopefully it's good and we're, we got some right there.

 But, well there you go, there's a how to on how to seal your Mazda 6 rear brake light.

 Alright, I usually go by first placing a mark where the door seal is and see that this is

 where the joint is and that makes it really easy to put it back.

 And it's just a matter of removing this plate, take the plate cover.

 Remove it and then we'll put it on the floor and we'll stretch it.

 The next step is just getting enough lubrication into the holes in there so that when we pull

 the tube through, surgical tubing, it'll have enough lubrication.

 So what I do is I just shoot a little bit in each of these holes like this.

 And you're going to go right on down the entire length of it until you get enough in.

 I just use a simple electrical fish tape and we take it and we put it in the end of this.

 Okay, so we get it into that major cavity, the largest cavity there on the door seal.

 We're just going to run that fish tape all the way through the length of it.

 And in this case, I'm just using a black surgical tubing as opposed to the yellow latex.

 And it doesn't matter what kind you use, the black just matches the black door seal a little

 It has to be pliable enough in the wintertime so the poly and the vinyl tubings are too

 stiff and they might actually damage the molding when it gets really cold in the winter.

 Then I'm going to just tape this on with some electrician's tape.

 So you can see the fish tape here and we're going to now lubricate the tube as it goes

 And she'll just pull on that end until we've pulled it through.

 And I'm just going to cut off where it comes to the end of the door seal.

 We now have a truly reinforced door seal and you can see that as we close, that's going

 So when the kids get out of the car and they slam the door, it's not going to bang.

 And also when you go over bumpy roads, it's not going to rattle as much.

 But it definitely collapses and provides just a little more structure than this which is

 really quite thin and which definitely fades over time and kind of turns into very, very

 And that's why we want to keep enough space in there so that it will work properly.

 This is where that line helps you cut these off where we placed the door seal on there.

 Now just a matter of pressing it in place all the way up around the door.

So today I'm going to be doing my second Easter nail tutorial and this is

 So the first thing we're going to do is apply a base coat and the base coat that I'm using

It's called Vestral White and I'm going to apply this to all of my nails except

And now for my ring finger I'm going to take a bright orange nail polish

 And these, this line of nail polishes come with a really, really small script brush.

 like a teardrop sort of shape because I want my carrot to be a little bit more round.

 then just fill that in and I'm going to kind of flatten up that top right here.

 Green on a piece of paper and then put the Emerald City on top of that and just mix them

And the brush I'm going to be using is this little nail brush right here.

 those two colors is because like the lighter green is a little bit too sheer.

And now for this carrot, I'm just using really short strokes and just keeping the

 mix these two together so it kind of makes a really pale orange color.

 a mixture of those two colors and then just kind of create those little lines right here.

Okay, so right here on the side, I'm just going to draw like a huge teardrop.

 And then to the left of that, I'm just going to draw a very, very long elongated oval.

 And then right down here, I'm just going to draw a little circle like that and right here

 our little bunny shape, I'm just going to take a black nail polish and this is an Onyx

Go ahead and grab any black nail polish that you already have and

 to dip it into the black nail polish and then just outline everything that we have here.

 And then now that I'm getting to this portion down here, I'm going to kind of curve that

 out a little bit and then create his little fingers and make sure to use a really light

This is from LA Colors and it is Intense Pink and I'm going to put that

 to try and keep the lines just really, really thin because we have a lot going on.

 Okay, so go ahead and wait about 15 to 20 minutes for your nails to dry just so you

 is Such Vite and I've only been able to find this at a few places but I'll put a link on

So I definitely recommend this for very, very fast drying nail polish.

 Other than that, I hope you guys enjoy this and you guys have a happy Easter.

 Let me get this meat browned down and chop this onion stuff up.

 A lot of times I use a pound of regular beef and then a pound of stew meat.

 That's usually, I don't ever use three pounds so I'm just going to have to add extra tomatoes and stuff.

 You just put in as much sauce as you, you know, you've got to keep it wet.

 Because it's going to release, the tomatoes will release some more juices when they cook down more.

 And I'll take a picture and I'll put the beans in, in a couple hours.

 All they've got to do is warm up and they don't need to cook through.

 I'm going to taste this in an hour or so and see what it, what it needs.

 I've been tasting on it and adding a little more chili powder and stuff like that.

 That's what we got, I got light and dark red kidney beans in there.

 Today I got a lot of messages and comments asking me to do a quick tutorial on how I

 I braided my hair in cornrows and I actually latched the hair into my cornrows.

 My hair is braided not straight to the back, a little rounded off.

 When you are done, when you make them full, you just maneuver it a bit to cover the holes.

 Since I just did mine and I have a lot going on, I couldn't take a row out because it would

 So what you do is you braid your hair kind of back like this and like that and around.

 It was actually free because the guy forgot to ring me up for it and I used my credit

 You make sure both ends, depending on which kind you get, but you make sure both ends

 You have a loop that you make and you make sure that this hook is open when you put it

 But you push it through the hair, you hook it through that little noose and you pull

 Going in, open, about to pull it down and through your hair, close.

 Then you take this little noose that you still have or hook, hole, it's something,

 your little loop, loop, there it is, and you actually put it through.

 You have there your little loop and you put this hair through it and you do like that.

 After you make sure all ends are even, close the latch, pull it through the hair, open

 You still have your loop and you put this hair through the loop.

 Some people are pulling the other side just to make it two sides and then they're tying

 Because I found that with this hair that I bought that was already twisted, that it's

 So that is my quick little tutorial that I showed you guys on my daughter.

 Check my other video out if you don't know what I'm talking about.

 Hey you guys, it's Christina and today we are going to be making a fully raw cherry

 This recipe is dazzling, it is spectacular, it is creamy, sweet, delectable and delicious

 This recipe is perfect to share with family and friends especially since cherries are

 So go ahead and get loaded with fresh picked cherries and let's make some cherry cheesecake.

 For this recipe you will need a food processor, a juicer and a blender if you have them and

 if not then a high speed blender like a Vitamix will work just fine for all of the steps.

 You will also need a cheesecake pan or a pie pan and a beautiful dish to put your cheesecake

 We are going to be making this cheesecake in about 5 very simple steps.

 The first step to making this cheesecake is making the crust and this crust is nut free

 You will need approximately 2 cups of mulberries, approximately 2 1 1 cups of dried figs and

 If you want to add any cinnamon or vanilla in this crust it only makes it a little bit

 So when you are ready go ahead and add all of your ingredients into your food processor,

 So when you are ready you are going to be left with this absolutely crumbly, gooey and

 So when you are ready go ahead and take this crust, push it into your pan until you are

 Next step is optional if you want your cheesecake to be lower in fat but you don't have to necessarily

 Because I am going to be making a creamy banana cheesecake filling one of the main ingredients

 If you don't want to use cashew milk then you can just throw in the whole cashew and

 it will make it a lot thicker, it will make it a lot creamier but it will also make it

 By using cashew milk you are reducing the amount of nuts that you are using in this

 For the cashew milk what I have gone ahead and done is I have soaked my cashews in coconut

 water or you can soak it in pure evermore water if you want to do that as well.

 And what I am going to do is I am going to take a ladle and I am simply going to run

 So when you are done, step 2 you will have approximately 1-2 cups of fresh and sweet

 So step 3 we are going to be making the cheese for our cheesecake.

 Now keep in mind there is no actual animal product in this recipe.

 So for this cheesecake we are going to be using approximately 7-10 ripe frozen bananas,

 our 2 cups of cashew milk, a little bit of cinnamon and just a pinky of vanilla bean.

 And this is going to be like an ice cream consistency but because we are adding in the

 If you want it to be even more thick feel free to add in an extra few cashews just to

 So when you are ready you are going to be left with something that looks and almost

 It is creamy, it is milky and you could probably eat it just like this if you wanted a really

 But we are going to take it to the next level and we are going to add in a cherry swirl.

 You are going to go ahead and you are going to pour this mixture on into a mixing bowl

 And then we are going to go ahead and we are going to put it into the freezer to set up

 And now for our cherry swirl we first have to make our cherry glaze.

 I have gone ahead and I have pitted approximately 3 pounds of these delicious red ruby cherries.

 And I have gone ahead and I have pitted approximately 1 1⁄2 cups of dates.

 And when you are ready what we are going to do is we are going to go ahead and we are

 going to blend as many cherries as we can with our dates and we are going to make a

 This, this my friends, this is the most heavenly part of this whole cheesecake.

 And what we are going to do is we are going to take our bowl and our cherry glaze and

 I am going to go ahead and I am going to pour it on over and then I am going to swirl it

 in to make our cherry swirl banana ice cream magical dazzling sparkling cheesecake.

 So after you have mixed in the cherry and swirled it in just a bit, scoop it into your

 So take what is left of your cherry glaze and you are literally just going to pour it

 It is sweet, succulent, delicious and I know that you will absolutely love a slice of this

 If you guys want to give this cheesecake a try and if you want to slice all to yourself

 If you guys want more tips, tricks or recipes on how to go fully raw, please subscribe here

 to Fully Raw Christina as we have fun in the kitchen celebrating this lifestyle and

 If you guys want to follow me daily, you can also find me on Facebook, Pinterest, Instagram

 Alright you guys, I am going to go and enjoy a humongous slice of this cherry cheesecake

This used to be my mom's favorite dish and mine too, so I'm going to share it with

I'm sure you guys remember a couple of weeks ago I made pasta with chicken meatballs

 and the rest of the meat which was left over, I made tiny meatballs out of them and I put

To make this yummy dish, we'll be needing our handy dandy pressure

 fried onions, they are already fried, a cinnamon stick, 2 black cardamom, and 4 cloves.

 rice to it and then I'm going to pressure cook it in just one steam.

And I use a pressure cooker but you can always use a pot, a regular pot.

This is the perfect amount of water in cooking in a pressure cooker.

 So now the pressure is totally built and now I'm going to turn off the heat.

 the heat, the pressure is totally built and now the rice and the meatballs are going to

We are not going to open the pressure cooker and when the pressure

 Okay, here we are again with the Unboxing Toys channel and today we're going to be opening

 another one of our Superhero Mashers boxes here and this one I have learned online that

 the Venom character, who's this great big black Spider-Man looking guy, is actually

 It's hard to find him and so we happened to cross him in the store and I immediately snatched

 him up and was very, very happy to get him and now I'm very happy to unbox him for all

 For those of you that maybe aren't aware, the Superhero Mashers is something that's

 relatively new from Hasbro and from Marvel where they are releasing the superheroes and

 the villains from the comic books and the movies and the Marvel Universe and you can

 interchange all the parts and pieces for your heroes or your villains.

 So you can see over here by the illustration where you have a Hulk head on an Iron Patriot

 You can kind of mix and match and you'll get to see a little bit of that today.

 Carnage is another one of the villains from the Spider-Man Universe and you have actually

 It is a choking hazard so be very, very careful with all these small bits and pieces as you're

 playing with them, especially if you're around younger children or people who are like me

 Alright, so we'll spin the box around and you can see here the back of the box and Venom

 And you can see here there's a firing rocket launcher that may be in this box, we're hoping.

 Here's some of the other characters, Venom, Captain America, Wolverine, Doctor Doom, the

 We've had Wolverine on the show so far, so check our channel for that.

 So Venom, if you're not aware, is one of the big villains in the Spider-Man universe and

 Spider-Man had a black costume that you found out in the comics was actually an alien symbiote

 But then the symbiote escaped, melded with one of several characters and became its own

 I saw online you actually take the arms off too, but I'm not really sure how to do that.

 But the heads come off, so don't worry about that if the head pops off while you're playing

 So, as you're playing with your Venom, his tongue shoots out and destroys Spider-Man.

 There are all sorts of little places where you can hook things on these guys.

 Where you can hook in their various weapons or their accessories.

 And again, you have to bear in mind that you may have another toy that's part of the Super

 And then if you don't like the way your guy is looking, you can always mix and match him.

 Again, what we're going to do with all the toys that we unbox here on the Unboxing Toys channel.

 Is when we're done playing with them and unboxing them, we're going to box them back up.

 And we're going to start right here in Alabama, which is where we live.

 And share our videos, so that we can spread the word as we spread the joy of toys with kids everywhere.

 Okay, so now today we're going to continue with our open position chords.

 So you have that string open and then place your first finger on the second string in

 Now make sure when you're playing these open chords, you really have to arc your finger

 over the string so it doesn't rub up against the bottom of your finger, can't touch the

 That takes a little getting used to, but just rotate your hand on this fingertip until you

 Then you follow it with your third finger at the second fret on the third string.

 Then you do your second finger on the fourth string on the second fret.

 So you can see here in the picking hand, I start the strum on the fifth string and just

 And let your thumb just kind of rest at the top of the neck up here in the left hand.

 Now this one's going to be easy because it's actually played exactly like A minor except

 So if you take every one of your three fingers that is holding down here and you move them

 And then the first fret, second fret, second fret, and then it opens.

 All you have to do to play E minor is pick up your first finger, which will make that

 In the next lesson we're going to finish up with the last three.

 Hey guys, it's Yaza here with fruitballdanceclasses.com and I am teaching you several moves these

 days about how to do different moves that you already know on ballet dancing that you

 learned either on this website or on your own in your classes, whatever, how to use

 So you probably already know all the different types of figure eights you can do, they're

Okay, so first of all, you want to use all these moves while you're balancing

 your sword on your head because they are slower moves, therefore they are great actually

 for using for the lower body while you're trying to balance your sword on your head

 because upper body movements are a little bit tricky and they kind of make sure, they

 kind of move your shoulders a little bit too much and therefore they throw your balance

 eights are even the best because they're not only lower body movements but they're

 as far as figure eights, I mean I would honestly suggest all figure eights that you know, all

 figures that I personally have taught you on fruitballdanceclasses.com before, do them

So that means you can use your mayas, you know, the ones where you

 go down, you can do a straight level, you can go down, down, down, down, you can come

 up, up, up, so you can change levels with them if you'd like to, depending on obviously

 eights where you go down, up, down, up, so it's out, then lift, out, and then lift, so

 I taught you how to do these before, so you can do those with sword because they're lower

 front, back, front, back, front, back, and then obviously bring your hip from the back

 So all the different figure eights you know, there's also the side figure eight one where

 I think I taught you before, it's a little bit of a complicated one, but you can go down,

 up, lift, up, and then down, back, lift, up, down, front, so you're going down, front,

 lift, down, back, lift, so basically it's a figure eight from the side, where you go

 down, up, I'm going to draw with my finger first, and then down, up, so it's down, up,

 down, up, that's the basic shape of it, so you go down, up, down, up, down, up, down,

 up, down, up, chances are your sword is going to wobble a little bit, that's okay, just

 make sure you don't move your head too much so it doesn't fall off balance, okay?

 my basic simple video about how to do different figure eights that you already know with your

 sword balance on your head, I think it's one of the easiest ones because it's slow and

 it's low body, so perfect, and that's what we want with sword dancing, we don't want

 to do too much upper body stuff and we don't want definitely too much fast moves, okay?

 So I hope this helps you guys if you are a beginner to sword dancing, kind of get a little

 bit of a basic move on how you can do something you already know and then spice up your sword

 dancing, so have fun with it, have a great time, I will see you in the next videos on

 Hi, I'm Mike from The Red Cord and I'm about to play a couple riffs from the song Demoralizer.

 And then the part here goes, which is five, four, two, five on the G, four on the D, and

 And then basically the breakdown version of it, which is five, four, two, five on the

 Sometimes I sweep pick it, and I go, sometimes I single pick it.

 It sounds a little better, but if you're feeling lazy you can sweep it.

 Turn around in the middle of the breakdown is a bend on the three, bend on the three

 It's basically just slamming your palm down on the strings and you sort of make noise

 You're not really hitting a chord or anything, it's just basically an open chug.

 And then it's the bottom two strings, and then open, and then a two.

 We have to make some pieces with 5 8ths holes in it out of this flat bar stock.

 Now, they should also be... Those holes should be in the center.

 These holes are actually pretty close to where I want them to be.

 You wanna get them... They don't have to be perfectly centered.

 ...while I'm drilling the holes instead of a whole bunch of little pieces all cut up.

 We'll have to make five cuts, and then we'll have the top and the bottom of our brackets.

They're really fun to make and really easy and they sure are yummy.

 going to need mini chocolate chips, those are the eyes for the ghost, black gel to make

 So what you do is you take your Nutter Butter and just take it for a little swim down in

 you want to do is you want to set up in the fridge for 10 or 15 minutes and then you can

So let's just take our black gel and we just want to add whatever kind of mouth

A circle, an oval, a scary mouth, whatever kind you want, you can just add.

 boiling peaches in a bowl of ice cold water and sit them there and peel off the tops.

 The next thing we are going to do is take two sticks of vegan butter.

 vegan butter, usually the sticks are shorter than regular butter.

 And this is my favorite pan for peach cobbler because it almost looks like the color of a peach.

 Now I'm going to place this in the oven and let the butter melt and then I'm going to take it out.

 Now I'm going to show you how to quickly make your own self-rising flour because

 You're going to take a cup of all-purpose flour which is vegan friendly.

 too many parts and then it becomes complicated and then it's not a simple and easy peach

Okay now this is what the butter is supposed to look like in the pan.

Don't worry if your cobbler is going to be too soggy or anything like that.

 possible because you want to have a ratio of more peaches to the filling.

 a deep dish cobbler, I'm going to start out and I'm going to take some of my peaches and I'm going

 And if you boil fresh peaches yourself, then you'll see that they make their own juice also.

 Okay, now for my last layer of peaches, I'm just going to place them on the top

On this particular soup, I'm going to make sure I drain this time.

 And if you want your cobbler juicier, just simply add more peaches and juice.

 the corner, I wanted to create a soft, shimmery, romantic look that will be perfect for that

This is also a great makeup look for special events like a prom or weddings

 This is Cinema Secrets foundation and I mixed the darkest color in kit number 1 and the

 second darkest color in kit number 3 to create a custom color for my skin tone.

 a damp beauty blender sponge to evenly apply this foundation to my face and neck.

 I used the second lightest color in kit number 3 as my concealer for under the eyes and on

 kit number 11 for my contouring color and I'm applying this using a Real Techniques

I wanted to keep the contouring really warm, almost like a bronzer, and that's

 why I chose darker colors that have warmer undertones instead of a cooler tone.

 this cream over the hairline of my forehead, on my temples, on the hollows of my cheekbones,

 down the sides of my nose, over my chin, and underneath my jawline.

 and patting the puff all over my face and neck to get rid of any shine or oil.

 I used a very yellow tone concealer under my eyes, I didn't use any banana powder for

This is a Dior bronzing powder in color number 20 and I'm using a Real Techniques

 contour brush to apply this all over the areas that I want to look darker or more tan.

 I use MAC's Blunt to contour, but for today's look I wanted it to be more softer and bronzy.

 I didn't film myself doing my brows because I have a few tutorials on my channel on how

For the eyes I started out using a white eye pencil by Stila to draw

 a thin line right under my brows and then I used a synthetic concealer brush to blend

 and I applied this shadow over the brow bone to set the creamy pencil in place.

Because of the shape of my eyes, I always concentrate more of the color

 I'm applying this color on the inner corners of my eyes to brighten them up.

 a bronzy eye pencil from Tarte Cosmetics to create a little V shape on the outer corners

This is very helpful if your eyes are hooded or monolid and it gives your

The next eyeshadow I'm using is called Half Baked by Urban Decay.

 It's a beautiful gold color and I'm applying this to the inner third of my eyes.

 keeping all the eyeshadows that I'm applying to my lid under the crease because I want

I actually used a little plastic applicator that came with this palette and

 the texture and finish of the shadow from shimmery to like a liquid metallic.

 my waterline with Stila's Topaz pencil and then I used a shimmery brown eyeshadow by

 Milani Cosmetics called Javamean to darken the outer corners of my eyes.

 and define my crease I'm lightly bringing this shadow into the crease and taking it

 by LA Girl Cosmetics to trace a thin line halfway across my upper lash line.

 I used the same Javamean eyeshadow and a small brush to smudge out that pencil and to set

The lashes that I'm using today are by Koko Lashes in the style Goddess and

 I used L'Oreal's Voluminous Mascara heavily on my lower lashes.

 you guys are interested in this palette you can purchase it at OfraCosmetics.com.

 I used one of my favorite mineralized skin finishes by MAC called My Candlelight to highlight

 the high points of my cheekbones, down the bridge of my nose, on the tip of my nose,

 I used this very lightly since it's a dark color and if you guys can notice I used the

 lip pencil to give my lips a more heart shaped or rounded look.

Don't forget to blot so you don't end up with pink on your teeth.

 And that completes our pretty frosty pink makeup look for today.

 and the products used in the description box below along with a link for my brow tutorial

 in case any of you wanted to see how I did my brows for this look.

 to always love and respect yourself and the rest of the world will love you back.

 and then we're going to go in and show you how each tool works and show you some specific

Alright, all we're using at the moment is this tension wrench, just

 Then go in with your pick and start feeling your way through the lock.

 springing right back at you and having no change, that's not your binding pin.

Alright, the front ones are still springing, so I think there's something in

 works at all is because locks aren't perfect, and we're taking advantage of small mechanical

 perfect, when we applied tension, every pin would bind at once.

 it would fall right back down because all the other pins would hold it steady.

 I'm about to show you a possible way or design that you can incorporate the orchids that

 your grand has grown along with some anthuriums and you wanted to know what kind of leaves.

 I found the orchids Marnie, unfortunately they're not fresh but I did find them, thank

 you just picked it and you didn't know how to put all the things together.

 little bits that are sticking up along the side of the palm and when you're using the

 fresh ones, what I do with these is if I can get them which is like finding hen's teeth,

 just get a little knife, a standing knife or a craft knife and just go down the sides

 there, both sides and make sure that any of those little wee barbie bits have gone.

 I would start off with the leaf first and then incorporate the anthuriums.

 have a life of their own and they will just bend and go whichever way that they want to.

 bouquets and you said that you didn't want it to look like it was actually sort of arranged

So I would bring the longest one into there and then bring another one into there

 orchids coming out there like that and I like how they just sort of like are going off.

 you can to make sure that the stamens are all sort of like going in their own direction so that

 they're out in a way and I really love how you've got this lovely little this lovely pointed thing

 The cable tie needs to be just a little bit longer but never mind.

 Then bring your cable tie into there like that and then just gently pull it in.

 too tight because what will happen is these will just break apart or they'll squish.

 that's in place like that, just do that and then you wanted a little bit of foliage.

 of foliage that I could find that I thought that would be near enough was this stuff here but you

 could use asparagus if you wanted to and this stuff is really great because once you get it into place

Any kind of stem will do and take that into there like that and then you said that you

 wanted to use a little bit of jute or something like that because you were having hessian on the

Just get that there, take that around there like underneath like that and then just give that

Simple, simple, simple and Marnie you said that you were having seven bridesmaids

 or let me just tell you, you'll be able to do these the night before your wedding.

 like that and then take that into there and then I might just do a wee bow onto that just to keep it

You could have that lying down if you wanted to and I'm going to leave

 the stems, I'll just cut that bit there off, I'm going to leave the stems at the uneven length that

 they are because I think that that also gives you that look as if it's just been picked and then you

 said that you had a little bit of pearl embellishing on your frocks.

 pearl buttons here or I've got, I know this one here, that one there.

 put a little bit of glue onto there like that, like so and then just push that down and into there

 like that onto the ribbon and onto that foliage and Marnie there you have a very quick and easy

 bouquet with not much in it and you can do this, I know you can.

 are watching have enjoyed this and that I've given you some simple little tips on how to

 Joining me today, I'm so excited, is eco-vegan gal Whitney Lawrenson.

 When you're getting whole foods, and that's a huge factor of this, we're looking at

 these nutrient-dense foods that you can get at many different markets.

It's a really exciting topic because I want more people to eat healthy and I don't want them to be

 It's just a little bit of a shift in thinking and changing your life just a little bit.

They want to impulse buy, but that's where you're going to spend a lot of money.

 So if you plan ahead, you figure out what foods you're going to eat, maybe you want to have a meal plan.

 You can easily develop your own meal plans by searching for recipes online,

 Just kind of finding an idea of what you want to eat that week.

 That helps tremendously when you just know what you're going to eat.

 So that might be like a slight adjustment, but it's a great adjustment to me because it's exciting to learn like, wow,

And it actually is a lot more exciting and empowering when you know what you're going to have instead of coming home from work

 and feeling flustered because you don't know what you're going to eat.

 And that not only ends up costing you more money, but then you eat less healthy because you're starving.

 So when you plan ahead, maybe you get things started before you go to work or whatever else you're doing that day,

 So it's like, OK, now you can implement the rest of your bullet points into that, like shopping in bulk or whatever.

You can make it once a week, maybe on Sundays, whatever day is most convenient for you to just say,

 There are lots of different meal plan services that you can buy if you want it done for you.

 Number two is actually goes along with that is that when you plan ahead, you can actually plan to use all of the food.

 So when you're just making the recipes based on your list, you're actually going to waste less food,

 which saves you money because at least 30 percent, closer to 40 percent of our food is wasted.

I mean, let's just say you buy lettuce and you you don't know what to do with it.

 So, yeah, wasting less food is going to save you a ton of money.

 Number three would be, as you mentioned, to shop at farmers markets, grow your own food and eat food.

 That is local and in season and whatever that combination that you're doing there is going to save you a lot of money.

 And you can easily grow things like lettuce and carrots and whatnot.

 And when you buy a packet of seeds, it's like a couple of dollars or you can get a starter plant.

 You know, it's like even if you don't have space outside, a porch or a kitchen is a great growth spot.

 So you can't well, you could grow everything, but it's challenging when it comes to things like rice and quinoa.

All across the country, natural markets, not necessarily natural markets,

 whatever it's going to be, you can find things in bulk and you bring your own bulk bags.

You could bring different containers like spices or something you can easily find in bulk.

And they tend to be a lot cheaper to get spices in bulk than to buy a whole thing.

 So you might just need a little little bag of it or a little container of it.

 And so if you're just buying a little as opposed to waste, you know, a lot of people buy spices.

 It's like if it's been in your cabinet or your spice rack for more than six months, it's really not as fresh as it could be.

And it's great to not always have to recycle the glass containers.

 It's nice to like have one glass container, keep filling it up.

 It's not as convenient or maybe as cheap as it is when you buy in person at a local store.

But if it's not available to you when you buy, you know, maybe almonds or something in bulk,

 you just get one big bag and that can actually save you a lot of money.

It's like you get into the habit of it and it's really not that big of a deal.

 When you're shopping mainly at the farmer's market, when you're eating your whole foods,

 And you've got yourself some nut milk and you can do this with all different types.

I've made a really nice walnut milk before and it's so much healthier.

And when you buy a cartoned like nut milk, like how long has it been in that carton?

 So you can make an almond butter at home or a peanut butter if you want.

 Again, it's healthier and it saves you money, which is the whole concept.

So you will be able to find out about her healthy organic food on $5 or day less book on EcoVeganGal.com.

 Please subscribe to our channel and for more information about our home study course,

 culinary healing five minute recipes for health, happiness and beauty, visit LifeNaturalLiving.com.

 a Thanksgiving dinner in one hour, which leaves you 23 hours on Thanksgiving Day to cheer

Before we start cooking, add two gallons of oil to the fryer and

Spoon this mixture into the shells and bake for 12 to 14 minutes.

 While that's in the oven, it's time for our next play, stuffing.

 the freezer section or even go over to the salad bar and just scoop up what you need.

Now toss in a bag of stuffing mix and two cups of chicken stock.

We just need to let them cool, and now there's space in the oven for the

 back of your knife along the inside of the can to loosen the vacuum seal.

Then brush the top of the biscuits and sprinkle with sesame seeds.

Slowly remove the fryer basket and allow the turkey to rest about 15 minutes.

Let's get these biscuits in the oven and set the timer for 14 minutes.

I'm going to top each pie with a squirt of whipped cream and a dash of

Let me show you how to get the extra points with some of these prepared mashed potatoes.

 I'm going to warm them up and then add a large scoop of chive and onion cream cheese.

 ton of flavor and makes them just as rich and creamy as if you made them from scratch.

But we can't just serve plain steamed green beans alongside a deep

So I'll just toss the steamed green beans with a bit of butter and then sprinkle

 This is an instructional video on how to set up your glide strap.

 There's two stoppers, the swivel buckle, the strap holder, the quick attach buckles, and

 First thing we want to do is lay the straps flat with the buckle facing up.

 And how we install that is we open up the flap and then insert the webbing.

 So we're going to be using it with this quick attach buckle, the male end.

 If you have existing sling hardware, you would be inserting it at this point.

 And this is definitely a recommended bumper to install, unlike the front one which is

 And for this bumper, you want to insert it with the bumper facing forward and the nylon

 And to install this, simply stretch it a little bit, bring it through the nylon webbing.

 The final piece of hardware to install on the webbing is this swivel buckle.

 So to install this, simply insert the webbing through the top hole.

 After you get the nylon webbing through the top hole, you can then insert the end through

 After we've completed the assembly of the nylon webbing, we're going to attach it to

 The swivel buckle that's fixed to the nylon webbing will go to the front of the split

 The next step is to properly adjust the length of the split strap.

 To do that, simply pull at the end of the nylon webbing to the desired length.

 If it's too long, it can be trimmed and then burned at the ends to prevent fraying.

 After you've determined the length, you can put the end of the nylon webbing through this

 To use the C-loop with the glide strap, we'll need to attach it to the quick attach buckle.

 And to do that, we're going to first take the loop connectors and put them through the

 Once we have the loop connectors installed onto the C-loop, we're going to attach it

 And how we do that is simply slip the end onto the bar of the quick attach buckle.

 With the C-loop fastened to the camera, the final step is to simply put the two quick

 Today I'm going to do my vanilla bourbon tincture to add into my secondary for my vanilla coffee

 So basically I'm just going to get this prepared so that when I transfer from primary to secondary

 So what I'm going to use is French oak cube chips, a Madagascar bourbon vanilla bean,

 some actual bourbon from Ridgemont Reserve, that's Barrel Select Kentucky Straight Bourbon

 I'm going to mix all that stuff into my bullet bourbon shot glass.

 I'm going to put some plastic wrap over the top and I'm just going to let it sit for a

 couple days to have the bourbon pull out those flavors and to make sure that the oak

 chips are sterile and that the vanilla bean is sterile so that when I add it to my beer

 Okay so what I'm going to do here is I'm going to slice this puppy open and sort of fillet

 Once it's filleted what I'm going to do is I'm actually going to scoop out the insides

 and get all that vanilla bean guts out of the skin and I'm going to put it in the shot

 You fillet the vanilla bean down the middle and then split the vanilla bean open and set

 And then just take the guts and put it in your shot glass and that's what we're going

 I take all the vanilla bean husks and I cut them into little tiny pieces and I also add

 And then just take the shot glass and knock all that vanilla down on the inside.

 Add in the skins of the vanilla beans and add your bourbon and then give it a stir.

 Take your oak chips, open them up and dump those guys in the bourbon as well.

 And then just top up the shot glass with a little bit of bourbon.

 And lastly cover your shot glass with a little bit of plastic wrap and a rubber band.

 Greetings it's Imeladius, today is the day that I'm going to be moving my coffee vanilla

 I have prepared a bourbon oak cube and vanilla tincher that I'm just going to be pouring

 Tastes just like a stout, it's got more chocolatey undertones than it has coffee undertones but

 if you stick your nose in the glass and smell it, it really smells very much like coffee.

 So next time I use the coffee malt, I think I'm going to use a little bit more coffee

 So I'm just going to put all of the vanilla beans and all the vanilla seeds and the bourbon

 mixture into the secondary so I can let those flavors soak up for the next couple of weeks.

 Then I'll bottle it as per normal or probably put this in a keg and throw it on my nitro

 Today I'm going to start on my tincher for my vanilla coffee stout.

 Look them up online, you might want to order something from them.

 Hey everyone, it's Serena and today I have another Halloween tutorial for you guys.

 And this time I decided to do a Halloween tutorial based on some costumes that I had

 because I realized in my last tutorial I didn't really have any costume for the pirate show

 and I thought I could just find some clothes that looked kind of pirate-ish and I guess

 I know I can't go out and buy every single costume for all these tutorials I'm going

 to make and that I can't go out and buy all these costumes for every single tutorial that

 I make for you guys because some of them I can't find anything, I'll just have to find

 But if you guys want to go more in depth for the costume you can just use the hair and

 But for this tutorial today I have the costume so I'm so excited.

 And today I'm going to be doing Sleeping Beauty, a princess inspired tutorial and I'm

 As I was growing up Sleeping Beauty was one of my favorite movies to watch and she was

 my favorite princess because she was so pretty and I loved her and I was excited that since

 I was pink dressed and it looks like her dress in the movie I thought it would be a perfect

 So I'll show you guys the costume but first I want to go ahead and get on to the makeup

 Okay so first we want to take our Urban Decay primer and just prime our eyelids in order

 I'm going to be using the BH Cosmetics palette which I have and it has a lot of colors and

 since it's Sleeping Beauty she always had this pink look on her eyes so I'm going to

 Now that we've got that done we're going to just take the pink, a little bit of darker

 pink and we're going to apply this on top of it following the crease.

 And now last but not least just following the outer shade of this pink I'm going to

 So like so and now we're just going to apply a quick highlight on top and it's just the

 And now I'm just going to be lining underneath my eyes and I'm going to be taking this pink

 right here and just going to bring it, just bring it in this pop of pink.

 So the pink underneath our eyes just gives us more of like a young princessy look.

 And now we're going to go ahead and just apply a white eyeliner on our lower lash line just

 You can even go as far as applying a little bit in your inner tear duct.

 Like so and now we're just going to go ahead and curl our lashes.

 And now we're just going to be wrapping them for the mascara we're going to apply.

 We're going to be using Mega Protein Mascara which is by Wet n Wild and this is just supposed

 to straighten and lighten your eyes at the same time so it's supposed to be good for

 So here we are and make sure to apply a little bit on your lower lashes just so you can get

 that effect that your eyes are going to pop out because our eyes of a princess are very

 For cheeks, princesses have very rosy pink cheeks and this is the lightest blush I have

 and which is the Elf Contouring Blush in Bronzing Powder and it's just a very nice again light

 blush so I'm going to be contouring because it's focused most of the blush will be focused

 Okay make sure your cheeks are very very pink because you want them to be like you're always

 blushing and stuff and now we're going to have pink lips of course so I'm going to be

 using Maybelline's Fuchsia Blast and it's in the number 30 and it just looks like this.

 Now the gloss that goes perfect with this is my Mavica Plump 587 Lip Gloss and this

 is by Wet n Wild so I'm just going to go ahead and apply this on top and this is a

 mint flavor and my favorite they have a mint and a cinnamon and I think this is the best

 Okay so my hair has been up in a ponytail all day so it kind of has these crazy bumps

 but what we want to do is split our hair in half so I'm going to apply my heat protectant

 hammer spray and this is by Trust Me and so I'm heating up my anti-static straightener

 and it's at 370 because I don't want to burn off my hair since this gets up to 410 so it's

 pretty high and I think the best curls will be created again with a straightener because

 we want these loose voluminous curls so what you want to do is just take the hair and curve

 it inwards or outwards whatever you prefer and give yourself just loose waves.

 So here is a pretty curly and princessy hair and now what we want to do is to get that

 volume that Aurora has is to just brush out our curls very lightly though make sure that

 If you'd like you can tease your hair to give it some more volume or you can just mess with

 This should be the completed look and now I'm going to show you guys the outfit, hair

 So this is the whole entire look and if you want this part is optional but you can bring

 down your dress a little because I know all the princesses kind of show off their shoulders

 so you can do something like this but this is like the dress and everything has these

 little sleeves which she doesn't have but my dress is attached to me.

 These are the pink shoes I borrowed from my mom, they're too big but I just thought I'd

 And of course you need your crown but Aurora seems to be missing her crown sadly she doesn't

 But this is it and I hope you guys enjoyed this tutorial and let me know what else you'd

 I have that same snare in my hand and I'm going to show you now how to set and bait

 Now this log that's suspended behind me, there was actually a grey squirrel running down

 So yeah, I'm in the right place and if I set this and bait it and left it and came back

 in a couple hours, I'd almost guarantee I'd have a grey squirrel.

 I'm not going to leave it, I'm just going to set it and take it down and show you how

 And I'm going to probably go freehand in a minute with the camera so I hope I can be

 You see right there, this tree has fallen but it's not on the ground.

 What I'm going to do is use a branch on that tree and just take this 15 inch loop and wire

 it straight to the branch next to it, off the live tree and suspend it.

 Let me do that real quick and then I'll bring it in and give you a closer view.

I wouldn't put it on one of these because it would just break off.

Now to bait this would give you a much higher percentage than to just hope

Well, what if it came down the log and ate this and then jumped off?

 are if you bait both sides, it doesn't matter which side he comes from.

 a survival kit that I'm going to take out with me, it's going to have a two by two bag

 do videos on their kit and they put some sort of food in there.

 Some of you guys have probably already seen and even used the DIY trail cam bracket

 there's got to be a way I can adapt this to be able to use it on public land

 legally where screwing anything is illegal or if I'm hunting on somebody's

 land where they have really high value timber that I don't want to mess up.

 So this is the solution I came up with and it'll cost you less than four dollars in hardware.

 the camera, take the thumb screw, fender washer, short eye bolt, fender washer, long

 So now you can adjust this angle and lock it down with the thumb screw and the wing nut.

 I'm going to take off both of these nuts that came on the eye bolts.

 And then on the shorter eye bolt, once again put on a quarter inch wing nut

 through the front of the tie plate, washer, nut, and that's it.

 little half turn with your hands and then just put the free end through.

If this knot isn't very clear when I'm showing it to you, there's

 take that bracket, put it on the tree, put the free end of the rope around the tree

 Now traditionally trucker's hitches are finished off with two half hitches.

 I like to do is make the first half hitch, taking care not to lose any

 And then the second half hitch I like to leave just as a loop so I don't pull the

 can do is you can take one of these holes right here, drill it out a little

 bit wider, take a 3 16th inch eye bolt and actually I like to put a washer on

 either side of the tie plate just because the threads don't start until

 Put that in place with a nut and then just take a Dremel and cut off the end

One other quick tip, if you guys know that you're gonna be hanging

 your trail cameras on small branches or even brush, one thing you can do right

 away is take these four bolts and move them one hole closer to center and or

 has a gap between the tree and that you won't have a loose connection like this.

 If you guys thought this video was helpful, please click like, share on

 Hello and welcome to episode one of fret points lick of the week.

 Today's lick is inspired by Joe Bonamassa and includes sweep picking and alternate picking.

 The lick is in the key of B minor and here it is played at full speed.

 Now to start off with, we're going to be on the D string on the 14th fret with the

 Now with the picking hand, we're going to pick down and hammer on 16 on the same string

 Then we're going to add the second finger, go down with the picking hand, then the first

 Once we're here on the 14th of the E string, we're going to up pick 17 with the little

 Notice I'm keeping these fingers down too because we're going to bend this one up a

 I'm going to cut the note out by using the side of the thumb or the index finger to stop

 So together, 14, hammer 16, 14, hammer 16, 15 with the second finger, 14, hammer 16,

 14 with the first finger, little finger on 17, up pick, bend up, cut it out.

 So the first half of the lick, you can practice by taking it slowly.

 Now, there's a deception to this kind of playing and that is it's not actually that fast.

 The trick is if you can play every note in time, it gives the deception of it being faster

 Now the second half of the lick, we're going to start with the 17 on the E string with

 So we get down, then 15 with the second finger, up, 14 with the first finger, down, then upper

 And then we're going to go back to the E string on 15 with the second finger, down, then 14

 I hope you enjoyed this week's episode and don't forget to go on the link below to download

 Sup guys this is Hamza and I am really excited because I got myself my first ever mirrorless

 a sensor from an SLR but doesn't have a mirror and with doing that this camera has very small

 and I can't use heavy DSLRs for my photography and I need something slim that can provide

 And this is the twin lens kit as you can see the 18-55 mm and the 16 mm lens and that's

 there is the camera by the way the one that I have is a silver model.

 You get the Alpha disc which also has there raw convergence software.

 Obviously this is the brand new battery so it has a brand new charger.

 But because it's only 16mm you are getting only 24mm equivalent coverage.

 And everything feels very smooth and very sturdy like it is build to last.

 You can see compared to the lens the camera is actually smaller than the lens.

 That's the place where you can insert your memory card and your battery.

 So overall I think this is the best you can get in this interchangeable mirrorless camera

 Their true black technology which makes it equivalent to those of the AMOLED screen.

 So that's a lot and it needs that since it's a full electronic camera.

These are a couple of triceps exercises that you can use at home or at the gym.

 The first one is a triangle push-up or also a close grip push-up.

 And this is one of the best triceps exercises that you can do with bodyweight.

 This is one of the exercises that I still use a lot in my workout routines.

 But you can also be creative and do it between two chairs or something like that.

 The next exercise is the close grip bench press or the narrow grip bench press.

 Basically this is a bench press in which you place your hands close to each other.

 And this is something that some people find difficult because it might put some stress on the wrists.

 In this case it's not really a skull crusher since I let the bar go past my head rather than towards my head.

 I always let the bar go past my head because this puts less stress on my elbows.

 A great variation on this exercise is the bodyweight skull crusher or the bodyweight kickback.

 And you basically need something to put your hands on that's stable enough to support your bodyweight.

 Probably one of the best known exercises for the triceps is the dumbbell kickback.

 And as for any dumbbell tricep exercise make sure that the weight that you use is not too heavy.

 It should be a controlled movement and you should squeeze your muscles together on top of the movements.

 Again an overhead extension and you can use heavier weights for this one.

 I already demonstrated the barbell and the bodyweight skull crusher.

 And you can put the bench inclined which you can also do with the barbell.

 Then here is the last exercise which is a bodyweight exercise again.

 It's called the tiger bend push-up or at least something in that direction.

 Make sure to check out more of these back to basic videos on my channel.

 Alright, I wanted to do a little follow-up on that B major lesson, because this chord

 And as you start playing with other people, a lot of times you have to just kind of keep

 And as you're playing up higher on the guitar, and you have to keep doing this for like 15

 So the way I avoid this chord a lot right here, and here's a couple ways to do it.

 The first way is you get rid of the D string altogether, and you just only play these top

 So now it kind of feels like a power chord, but you're skipping the D strings.

 So notice I'm actually able to strum all the strings, but you're only hearing...

 The other way is instead of skipping the D string, you skip the G string.

 I use this one a lot too, but this one sounds a little nicer, because this one, this is

 I use this one a ton also, but I don't really, when I'm playing, I don't really consider

 this to always be a substitution for this, because this sort of sounds so much different

 I use that more when I want to make up a melody and have a bass note.

 So you have this chord, B major, or you can do it like this, or like this, or like this.

 Or the other way that people do it all the time, especially on electric guitar, is you

 make sure you spot these three notes right here, and then you just do it with a single

 So this is a little hard at first, because you don't have your reference bass note to

 look at, but actually what people do is you still imagine that it's there, even though

 And the reason why this is so useful is then you can start going to the right.

 Instead of here, you're pretty stuck with only having one real practical note to use.

 You can grab this note also, but it doesn't tend to be that helpful.

 But as soon as you go like this, you have all sorts of notes you can do.

 And then the other thing that's good to know about is when you're over here at this shape,

 you can add this note to kind of fill it out more, and this is the most practical inversion,

 which just means it's got one of the notes from this chord, but a different one than

 So you've got B major, where you can do that, and you can add this note.

 I like to, whenever I practice stuff, I don't like to do it just on a single chord usually.

 So I would first just go like this, and I just do like four strums.

 So when I practice stuff, like when I'm trying to learn new chord shapes and how they all relate,

 I mean, if you're having it technically, if it's a technical problem,

 But once it's not technical and it's more conceptual, then I would do like this.

 And sometimes doing it random is a really good way to practice,

 because when you play with other people, a lot of it's just random,

Hopefully this made sense, because some of the stuff's a little more advanced.

 one thing I would get used to is as you think about this shape,

 use your pentatonic scale, this basic pattern, with this shape.

 And once you can do that later, and then you start to get more comfortable

 If you want to make something dark, you can throw some of the notes in there that are a little weird.

 So all that stuff was just this shape with pentatonic on each spot,

 And one of the things that's cool about pentatonic is that it almost always sounds good.

 So you've got your brand new RC body here and you're painting along and all of a sudden

 If you're using acrylic paint there's one easy thing you can do if you want to start

 You can put paper towels in there, pour the alcohol on the paper towels, let that soak.

 Basically what I'm going to do is I'm just going to pour it on here.

 I'll come back and show you how easily this acrylic paint is removed with rubbing alcohol.

 Alright so we've let this alcohol sit in here for about 10 minutes or so.

 I'm just taking the brush and lightly wiping over the top of the area where the alcohol

 Everywhere where the alcohol was, you'll notice the paint is coming right up.

 You can see that the bristles on the brush are just barely moving.

 If you want, you can even use a paper towel and just wipe it away.

 I like using the brush because you can still maintain the alcohol in your brush and if

 there's something that's not completely released yet, you can continue just to brush

 it a little bit and you'll see it comes up like right out here at the edge.

 And we'll wipe away so you can see that that cleaned up right here at the end very well.

 Instead of having to go out and buy a new $30 shell or heaven forbid you have a $100

 fifth scale shell, if you're painting with acrylics, again, all you've got to do, a little

 When you're done, just get your squirt bottle, a little soap, paper towel, and go through

 When you're done with it, give it a once over, rinse it off, and you're good to go.

 When you're done with it, give it a once over with the alcohol again and you'll be ready

 If you read my blog you will know that I have a love for all things brunch.

 So today I'm going to show you how to make the most beautiful ricotta hotcakes

 with the most rule-worthy bacon which is glazed in a maple syrup

 and a little bit of buttermilk in here which kind of adds a sour note.

 Okay, that mixture is lovely and mixed through so now what I need to do is sieve in some flour.

 Now I'm going to get on my egg whites and whisk them up until they're nice and fluffy.

 and as you can see they've doubled in size and they've become really light and white.

 So take your mixture and take a good dollop of it out first and just fold it in

 You can just mix it through so that you get a nice kind of slack mixture

 Right now I have a lovely slackened off mixture and now at this point

 If you did want to make this a little bit different what you could do is add some cocoa powder in here.

 You could add some lemon zest and some poppy seeds which is lovely

 but I actually quite like them plain like this and they go beautifully with the maple bacon if you do that.

 So just fold this through until you have a nice smooth mixture.

 It's just a process of cutting through the centre and then twisting the bowl.

 Once you stop seeing those little flecks of white in there it's pretty much good to go

 and I'm just going to leave it to rest for one minute before I cook them up

 because I want to talk to you about this beautiful bacon I've been going on about.

 So I'm going to grab some which I've just been toasting up here.

 So once you've grilled them on both sides just take them out of the oven

 and then just give them this brush of the maple syrup or the apple syrup, whichever you have.

 I actually have this beautiful Irish product called High Bank Irish Orchard Syrup

 and it's made from apples and it's so so lovely and that combination of apples and bacon works really well.

 And to be perfectly honest I can't resist but sticking one in my gob right now.

 We've got our lovely hotcake mixture and now I'm just going to take a nice big tablespoon of this

 You know what on a Saturday morning when you're making brunch it's about making a bit of a mess.

 My hotcakes are going to rise and you'll know when to turn them just when little bubbles start coming up through the batter.

 So three stacked up like that and then grab one or two or three of your lovely maple bacon or apple syrup bacon

I just want to drizzle over a tiny bit of that apple syrup over the top.

 Just get it so it drips down the sides and then just drizzle it a little bit around the plate

 so that if anyone's having this, they've got really nice little touches of that sweetness

 And that, ladies and gentlemen, is a beautiful little breakfast which I know you're going to love.

Layers of beautiful ricotta hotcake dripping in beautiful syrup.

They're actually almost lighter than a pancake, an American style pancake.

 And you can unscrew it and screw it on however you'd like I guess.

 Okay, so basically what this thing can do, I haven't plugged in right now.

 Comment, subscribe, like, share it with anybody that you'd like.

 And today we're going to do some nice volley drills, really try and fine tune our volleys

 And then as soon as someone misses, we back up, go to the service line and just start

 So it's just getting our hands a little quicker, really teaching us kind of this nice reaction

 Next up, we're going to do two drills and they're going to be overhead drills.

 The first one is just straight up overhead drill, working on moving to the left.

 So we're running around a high backhand to hit the strongest shot, the overhead smash.

 And then in the second drill, we're going to do volley to close the net, back up, overhead,

 Two pretty basic drills, but really, really crucial in doubles because if we're both getting

 tight to the net, looking to close out points, we're going to get lobbed.

 This last drill we're going to do today is a game called attack and defence.

 We play it cross court, doubles alleys are good and then the court ends in the middle.

 We play it out, we start on the service lines, we rally, whoever wins that rally gets to

 move up to the net and the other player moves back to the baseline.

 So if Spencer's up at the net, he wins that rally, he wins a point, we're going to play

 If he loses, we both go back to the service line and then if I win that rally, I go up

 You can either be at the baseline, at the service line or at the net and you can only

 You can only advance one position or retreat one position at a time.

 One thing I forgot to mention, you want to make sure that both you and your partner have

 a ton of balls in your pocket so you can really keep the drill going and that way you don't

 The last thing we're going to do is work on our serve and return like we did in episode

 I think after exploiting my weaknesses on Friday, Chris actually, we looked at video

 on Friday and kind of went over it in the slow-mo, which is very humbling for me.

 But Chris, being the great teacher he is, was pointing out some of the things that might

 help me improve and one of those things was getting out in front with the volley.

 And so that was my main focus today on the drills we did along with now I need to work

 Today's episode we discuss roundhouse kicks as promised and we're also going to discuss

 how your footwear will determine how you're going to throw your roundhouse kick.

 Basically have an additional flaring out on each side to stabilize you when you go side

 Running shoes won't have that because you're going in a straight line and they want to

 The point with these, if you're not extremely light on your feet, this part of your foot

 is going to be stuck to the ground depending on what floor you're on.

 It's a light foam, you'll have a rubber or a rug even in a couple places.

 It's going to cause a tremendous amount of torque in your knee.

 So if you were to just step across and then decide you want to pivot and you're not that

 So if you're throwing a roundhouse with a cross trainer, I highly recommend you step

 across, stretch the hips out, chop through with the shin and then forget about it.

 Because I'm stepping so far outside the bag, my whole body weight is already past my target.

 All I need to do is chop through with the shin and trust me, it's going to be a very

 You're going to step deep, throw the kick and then go right back into your stance.

 If you're extremely light on your feet, you'll be able to pivot no problem.

 But if you've got your cross trainers on, something to consider.

Roger style, I'm going to slip into my Taekwondo shoes right here.

 I think they started out with a little bit of thread but not much and they're made to

 When you can pivot like this, you can just basically be like a ballerina out there.

 So when I have this shoe on, I'm going to allow myself to pivot and get a little more

 torque that way so I don't have to step as deep if I don't want to.

 But I'm going to step, snap and if you saw my foot, just completely rotate it around.

 Not only do they allow you to snap and pivot, they sound awesome on a bag.

 That little pivot just allows me to snap it out, get a little more whip.

 I would certainly, certainly recommend having a pair in your arsenal.

 After a long workout and the floor starts getting sweaty though, you can easily step

 This floor gets wet, you're going to slip a piece and they're not great for running

 So if you're doing cross training, you're going to keep the weight on the balls of your

 These are the type of shoes that people are going to think you're an absolute madman.

 After years of not wearing shoes, my toes, everybody's toes atrophy.

 So the idea behind these are you're going to constantly use the toes and all the muscles

 And you're going to be able to use those feet to do a lot of crazy and fun things at home.

 Trust me, it took me quite a number of tries to even be able to put my toes in each individual

 I think they were inspired by the Japanese used to wear a sock like this.

 These are the type of shoes where you need to try them on because they're just not going

 If your toes are a little bit long, you might want to try out a different style.

 They feel like my foot, but my foot with a whole lot more grip.

 I'm also able to just think about putting the weight on the ball of my foot and just

 So anytime I'm doing a squat or I just want to move around now, I'm on my toes much easier

Since it is summertime, I thought I would show you two easy, no-heat

 hairstyles you can do at home to keep your hair off of your face.

 And to get started, since my hair is super straight, I need to start the night before

 and add some texture by twisting and rolling my hair into two buns while it is still damp

Then just unpin it the next day and kind of ruffle it up and you've

For the first style, start by splitting your hair ear to ear and

 by taking small sections and spritzing the roots with the Nexus Hydra-Lite Root Lift

Smooth it back gently with a brush and pull the hair back into a low

Then I just pull at the crown to push the hair forward and add a little bit

 with, spray your hand with the Nexus hairspray and apply it to the hair.

 section of hair from the hairline area and add it to the section you just crossed over.

 Then cross the first section over the now bigger section and continue all the way down

Once you're done, just wind the twists around the ponytail holder

 tease it to give it that kind of wild, fresh from the beach look.

 hairspray onto a teasing brush and gently brushing the flyaways back.

 For look number two, section off the front and back section the same way as before and

 with two elastics, which I find just makes the ponytail a little bit more voluminous.

 Now split the ponytail into three equal sections and pin the right and left one out of the

Braid the middle portion and gently pull at the loops to give it a more, like, looser

Then take down the right and left sections and braid those with the braid

Again, just pull the sections to give it a looser, sort of summery feel.

 out of the way, by the way, so I could give my ponytail a little bit more volume.

 really, really easy to do, just tease really small layers of hair.

 by the way, because you can always brush out some of the volume later.

Give it a thumbs up if you love hair tutorials and want to see more of them, and

 Tools that match your passion for shaping metal into something of real value.

 So you can see on the model behind me you can flip it up, use it in the vertical position.

 And the difference in this and most of the bandsaws out there is it's got a swiveling

 In the old days this vice would actually swivel so you'd have to pull out a tool, loosen,

 If you needed to change the angle on your work it was a real pain in the butt because

 Well if you move it 5 degrees that's about 10 feet across your shop.

 Now the motor on this guy is pre-wired for 115 but it will also go 230 if you want to

 The Jet obviously does offer a belt driven type if you like that kind.

 It'll hold 7 inch by 10 and a half inch rectangle material, 7 inch round.

 If you switch it over to 45 it'll do 4 inch round or 4 by 4 and a half inch square.

 It's got a quick release vice and I think at that point let's show you a little bit

 It's got fluid for a coolant so that helps it cut faster, helps it cut cleaner.

 You want to set your guide so you just quick release here, set your guide, set your amount

 Now in order to get it started you're just going to turn this little lever.

 Now depending on whether you've got different materials, different speed, different blade,

 Now how can you watch that and not envision yourself on the phone, you know, talking to

 This is just one of the full range of JETT metalworking products.

 So for sawing, turning, milling, drilling, forming and finishing, metalworking experts

 And today for the super awesome kitchen stuff, we're gonna do the Bold to F up fat pancake.

 One, you can come closer if you want, Mike Johnson, I'll be bro.

 One cup of oats, two eggs, I'm gonna have half a cup of egg whites in there, one tablespoon

 And this is the secret ingredient, you're gonna see what the use of it.

 And tablespoon of outdated Niki Boys coconut oil, which is warm, you can see that.

 You can use Stevia, or you can just man it out and eat it like that with no sweeteners,

 Today we're gonna use Splenda, because Niki Boy only has Splenda.

 From saturated, mono from the almond, and saturated from the eggs and stuff.

 And it's free range eggs I use, so there's omega 3s too in there.

 been posting a few flight simulator videos because last summer, 2011, my old camera has

 I did a review of the Gemini Jet's 1200 Embraer ERJ145 of American Eagle Airlines.

 was recorded with my webcam and I promised that once I get a new video camera I would

 of focus in some parts, that's just because I have manual focus on and it'll come into

 auto focus, with this manual focus, I can zoom in really far and attempt to get it focused.

I personally really do enjoy this model and I forgot the last one off

 He actually lives down the street from me so he can help me out sometimes.

 The nice part about the manual focus mode on this camera is that it shows you what area is in focus by highlighting it in blue.

I'll use the auto focus mode when plane spotting though because you can't use zoom in manual focus mode.

 Actually you can but it'll just be hard to zoom and focus at the same time with a moving object.

 And since by the amount of views on one of my other unboxing videos of my American Airlines 727-200, also on 1-200 scale,

 And they're both American so you can see there is quite a difference in size.

 Today we're going to put the second coat of joint compound on our wall.

 First thing we need to do is we're going to use our largest drywall knife.

 We don't use this very much, but this is what I mostly use this for, is scraping on the

 wall and just getting the things that are sticking out off the wall.

 We're going to step it up to one more size, and we're going to use this.

 I usually use this for my second and third coat, and I hardly ever go to the biggest

 We're going to load up the pan, and we're going to get started.

 Always remember when you're done with your tools, make sure you clean them every day,

 because you don't want little bits of drywall joint compound in your finish.

 You can go over as many times as you want, to try and get the smoothest finish you can.

 Of course, this is not the last coat, so it doesn't have to be perfect either.

 Each coat takes a little more time than the last, because you're cutting a bigger area.

 You can see with our first coat, we covered up the tape pretty well, although you can

 Hello and welcome to this Norboard My Cabinet Guide video on how to assemble a 1000mm base

My first side panel and I'm going to turn this one round like this.

I don't require the other components at this time so I'm going to move them out

 And the last panels in my box are the base panel and the front rail.

Please take the time to read this as there is useful information

I get my back rail and the fittings for the back rail go behind so

 two solid doors, what they call highline doors or you can have two drawline doors.

 base panel are pre-drilled for the 50mm screws that you need to put in to hold the centre mounting

 the fittings in on your unit but we would recommend a hand held screwdriver because that way when

 you're putting the fittings in you can make sure you don't over tighten them.

So I fit the top two first and then I repeat for the bottom of my centre

 Hi, today I'm going to show you how to sprout sunflower seed shoots or sunflower seed greens.

 If you live in a northern climate and winter comes along and you don't have access to fresh

 All you need to do is go to a natural food store and get the black oil seed sunflower

 Now these are those plastic measuring dealies that come in different protein powders.

 If they say 60 cc's, that's 60 milliliters, which is 4 tablespoons or a quarter cup.

 So I've got a quarter cup of my black oil seed sunflower seeds.

 You just put them in here and you're going to do this at like 10 o'clock or whatever

 Put in this quarter cup, fill it up with water and just let them soak for 8 hours.

 Then first thing in the morning, what you'll do is you'll take those soaked seeds out,

 You'll take those soaked seeds out, you probably can't see it on the soil here very well.

 Oh, by the way, materials wise, you don't need to buy any fancy, expensive, you know,

 special sprouter deals that are, you know, they are really expensive.

 Plus I don't like how they're made out of plastic all the time.

 I prefer to have everything either, you know, be glass or ceramic.

 All we did is we went to the store, you know, any major department store and bought a bunch

 Organic soil, maybe like 6 of these pie plates if you want to set this up in stages.

 After you go ahead and soak them overnight, you're going to lay them in the soil.

 And you know, if you're wondering how much water to put down, just add, you know, really

 And then what you'll do is you'll take this, your second pie plate.

 Tilt it up when it's pressed firmly and just hold it like this until it like, there it

 And at this point, this one's ready to go, you would just go and put it in the closet.

 And I say in the closet because it needs to be in a dark place.

 The, the root of the seed cannot press down into the soil unless it has something to push

 Just like if you wanted to press your feet firmly into the floor, you'd have to press

 Otherwise right now you can't really do much more than what your weight is.

 And about a day in, you'll see that the, well I'll show you in a second here.

 You'll see that the roots are starting to push down through the bottom.

 You're going to leave it in the closet for, it's usually about three days, but it all

 When the plate is about an inch up off the surface, then it's ready for you to simply

 Then you would just take it, you know, once they're so high, and just put it by a window.

 So this right here is, once it's by the window, this is only the next day.

 And then this final plate, like I'm going to be eating this one in a couple minutes,

 And in the summer it goes a lot faster because it's hotter in our place, but you know, in

 But when you can't get access to fresh greens or lettuces, things like that, you know, keep

 in mind no matter where you live that the food has to get cut and packaged and shipped.

 A lot of energy usage and just transportation for some greens that you're going to eat in

 Why not make them fresh yourself and have them available in the house?

 But one final thing I want to tell you, when you're sitting down at night to watch TV,

 take a plate and just put it on your lap and spend some time just pulling.

 Yeah, sometimes instead of like if you have a popcorn fetish but you want to get away

 from it, you can sit on your couch and pull black seeds off instead of taking your hands

 So you can sit and do that because you want to get all those off.

 And then when they're ready to harvest, you simply just take a, if you have like a kitchen

 scissors, I'll just show you, I'm just going to cut a little bit of them here.

 But you just go down, it's kind of fun, it's like you're giving it a haircut.

 And if you want to make like a fancy meal at that night and you want it to look really

 high end and very glamorous, you can just put some of these on your plate as a little

 But I usually just take them and I make them as a full, as a salad, like instead of using

 And another thing you can do is when you're making like different sushi wraps, especially

 if you want to make like vegan sushi wraps that are really good filler in sushi wraps

 You can just put those in there, but they make a good like faux rice noodle substitute

 for things too as well if you want to have like a spaghetti-ish type dish.

 Welcome to my kitchen and to another episode of what's for dinner.

 I'm going to use a new product that I haven't used before and we're going to use some of

 the chicken that we roasted off the other night wrapped in bacon.

 I'm going to basically be making kind of halfway between a pasta carbonara and a pasta

 primavera only it's not a true carbonara because we're not going to be using eggs but I wanted

 And we are going to be using some of this Philadelphia cooking cream.

 With coupons I actually got this for free because my local grocery store that I go to

 sends me specials that are only for people who subscribe to their emails and once a week

 I had a dollar off coupon but over that particular weekend they had super double coupons where

 So I actually got this and another one for free which I was very pleased about.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to boil off some rotini.

 I heated up a big bowl full, not all the way, these are still a little cold but we're going

 A bowl full of mixed vegetables, this is a California blend, it's called Normandy.

 And here's that chicken that we had left over that was wrapped in bacon.

 And then I'm going to add some oregano, some basil and some garlic.

 And what we're going to do is I'm going to toss my veggies in there first.

 I'm not really wanting to fry anything but I do want my oil to go with my oil nice.

 And this is Tuesday before Thanksgiving that I'm making this video.

 So the name of the game is these three days before Thanksgiving is easy, easy, easy, easy.

 I don't really care for the way they taste, that's just my own personal preference.

 But anyway I thought this was going to be an interesting way of using this chicken.

 So now what I'm going to do is I've turned the heat down to about medium.

 I'm going to wait for my pasta water to boil and I'm going to cook it.

 And then when it's time to come back and pull this all together, I'll bring in and show you what we do next.

 And our chicken and vegetables have sauteed and they're all heated up.

 And I'm just adding in about a teaspoon each of basil and oregano.

 You want to put some Italian seasoning in there, that'd be great too.

 Now I've never used this before so I'm going to have to give you a review of it and tell you what I think.

 This is going to be a meal made from leftover chicken but then it's going to be, I'd say, serve easily 8 people.

 Because we're going to eat this tonight and we'll have leftover chicken for dinner.

 At least for tomorrow I'll take some for work, to lunch at work.

 Okay so what I'm going to do now is I'm going to take this cooking cream.

 It seems kind of thick so I don't want it to be, I don't want the pasta to be drowning in this stuff so I'm going to just kind of mix it up.

 And then I'm going to just kind of blend it in and get that all mixed up together.

 It seems kind of thick so I don't want it to be, I don't want the pasta to be drowning in this stuff so I think that one container is probably going to be perfect for this amount of pasta really.

 Because it's just going to coat it nicely and it's going to flavor it.

 And I just want to stir that nice and thoroughly because I don't want a giant clump of it anywhere.

 You know, if anything, that would be really good as a vegetable dip on a veggie tray.

 Because I'm throwing all these things around my kitchen trying to get a spoon.

 The recipe I have for you guys today is one that will make you look like you spent a long

 time in the kitchen, and it doesn't take a long time in the kitchen, and actually it's

 But also it gives you another option for the other white meat, pork.

 We'll be doing bacon wrapped grilled pork tenderloin medallions.

 All you need are two pork tenderloins, they're about this long when you get them out of the

 You need, I have ten regular cut strips of low sodium bacon here.

 Depending on how many medallions you come up with, that's how much bacon you'll need.

 You need about a fourth of a cup of your favorite BBQ rub or pork rub.

 If you, when you check this video out, if you're interested, I'll have the recipe for

 And what you'll do is you'll cut the tenderloin about every inch and a half, and then flatten

 out each disc to make a round, looks almost like a filet mignon.

 All you have to do after that is, and of course while you're cutting your tenderloin, you

 You also will need enough toothpicks, depending for however many medallions you have.

 Once you have all of your medallions wrapped with the bacon and stuck with a toothpick

 like this, all you have to do is take your rub, sprinkle a little bit over each one,

 I'm going to coat them, and then press them down nicely to make sure that the rub stays

 And of course, your pork is probably two-sided like mine is, so do not forget to flip them

 Your medallions only take you about 12 to 15 minutes, depending on the type of grill

 you have, and you just need to turn them once when they're in the middle of cooking.

 The other thing I usually like to do, and it depends on if you like crispy bacon or

 not, I will right as they're finished, I'll take them and stand them up on their sides,

 and roll them around their side a little bit and let the bacon crisp up.

 Alright, we're right at six minutes, and we're going to go ahead and turn all these

 We're coming right up on 12 minutes, and as I said earlier, since I like my bacon crispy,

 I'm going to go ahead and stand these guys up on each other if I can, at least some of

 And then in a little while, about a minute or so, I will turn all these guys to the other

 I'm going to turn all the medallions to their other side, leave them on for about another

 minute, and then I will take them off and plate them, and get you guys a close up and

 Wouldn't you agree that it does look like you've spent most of your time in the kitchen

 instead of the, I don't know, I think they probably took me 15 or 20 minutes from prep

 time to finish, including lighting the grill, maybe a half an hour.

 I think that's pretty good timing for a meal that looks that good.

 I hope that I've showed you today that with just a little imagination, you can take something

 that you normally cook every night or a couple times a week and turn it into something new

 If you're looking for a grill or a cart or some sort of a cooking accessory, just about

 anything, remember at BBQGuys.com, we won't be beat, and we smoke the competition.

 together would depend on whether you need to do all of the runs.

 This one of Thunderfoot, a 36 count 4-wall dance that rotates left.

 We're starting this one with a heel cross heel, standing on your left foot.

 Cross it over and touch your right toe across your left foot for 2.

 From here we've got a side together side touch for your second set of 8.

 This gets kind of hairy because we do dance this to Steve Earle's Copperhead Row,

 For beats 7 and 8, we're going to kick our right foot in the air.

 Kind of low so you don't lose your balance, but we're going to kick.

 And then your last 4 sets, so you can count on 1, 2, 3, 4, right?

 We're going to either split your heels out on 1, in on 2, out on 3, in on 4,

 or do a side heel, where you twist to one side, back to center, other side, back to center.

 So those last 4 beats are either 1, 2, 3, 4, or split one way, center, the other way, center.

 And then you're ready to start the dance over again with your heel cross heel.

 because there's that yi-yi yippy thing going on with the guys and girls.

 To start off with, MSD was the first company to have a spark plug wire with 50 ohms of

 It's the lowest ohms in the industry and we also have the lowest electromagnetic emissions.

 Next, we have a special magnetic compound that prevents the EMI from coming out.

 On top of that, we have a little tiny conductor that actually winds all the way around.

 MSD Ignition is the first and only company to have 50 ohms of resistance and 40 feet

 Fiberglass coats that and finally the outermost sleeve that you see when you put the wires

 MSD actually makes over 100 different part numbers for spark plug wires to cover as many

 We have race wires and custom wires that you can make yourself at home.

 The amount of insulation you cut off depends on if it's our dual crimp wire or the traditional

 On the dual crimps, you go just past where the insulation actually comes out of the crimp

 On a fold back style, you'll cut enough back that you can fold the full conductor back.

 When you're ready to put the terminal on, you take the wire and line the conductor up

 Right now, it's already a good connection, but we're also going to crimp onto the insulation

 Now with dual crimps, you have a solid connection that you can take on and off your plugs or

 With the wire all crimped up, we can show you that these wires in a single foot have

 On a lot of engines, headers can create clearance issues with spark plug wires.

 We have the multi-angle boot that you prep, put on the engine, and then you can bend it

 So first, in order to do the neck stretches, you're going to place your hands behind your

 Let's have you turn slightly sideways so they can see you better, Amy.

 Bring your head down and then bring your hands forward, fold them and allow yourself to go

 And then go up with your head muscles, neck muscles, and then bring your head down again

 And then use your body to very gently give a little bit of a stretch.

 Each time you do it, keep going, each time you do it, you're going to go two or three

 And just breathe, always breathe out when you do the stretch and breathe in when you

 So you breathe out when you go down, do it with us, and let your hands pull a little

 So you're actively moving, you're giving yourself a stretch, then you're actively coming back.

 You can do it sitting at a traffic light, you can do it on a plane, on a bus, at home

 Now let's move on to the next one, and that's going to be at a 45 degree angle.

 So we're going to have you rotate the head 45 degrees to the side and place the hand

 And you're going to now pull your chin toward the center of the right side of your chest

 And you go down and stretch one, two, three, and then come up really easy and exhale as

 The first time you do it, you're not going to really stretch it, you're going to take

 The second time you're going to go a little further, and each time you're going to go

 And exhale as you go down, actively pull a little tiny bit, never feeling any pain.

 And then turn your head to the other side, and place your other hand on the back of your

 head, and go forward toward the center of the left side of your chest now.

 And actively moving, it's very tempting to use force with your other hand to help yourself,

 but try to always use your muscles to bring your head up and bring it down.

 Now we're going to turn, rotate your head to the right, and then use your left hand

 to go over your head, and pull your left ear to the left side of your chest, to the

 And the head does it by itself at an oblique angle, and stretch it a little bit more, and

 We'll do that a few more times, and here you're stretching partly the scalenes, you're putting

 tension through the intertransverse ligaments, you're putting a stretch on the joints of

 the neck, and make sure that you breathe while you're doing it.

 And turn your head the other way, and use the other hand, and go down.

 And make sure that you exhale as you're going down, and you're using your muscles, not your

 And now, face forward with your head, and I want you to side flex to the right.

 If you side flex to the right, you're going to put your right hand over your head, just

 above your ear, and let your muscles take you to the side, and then give yourself a

 And then come on back with your muscles, and then over-stretch.

 There's a temptation to hold it longer than two seconds, but good to hold it no more than

 two seconds, and you can either count one, one thousand, two, one thousand, or what I

 like to do is just count at the pace when they're down, at one, two, three, and then

 And go, reach over, and give a little bit of pressure, hardly any the first time.

 And the second time, you do a little bit more, and you go to what I call the barrier where

 And then the next time after you hit that barrier, you just try to go one, two, three

 degrees beyond that, just a little bit, very, very slowly, and see if you can increase the

 And if you do this every day, once a day, twice a day, your range will increase, and

 So you'll turn your head to the right, and put your right hand over your cheek and jaw,

 and put your left hand in the back of your head, kind of over your ear or behind your

 ear, whatever's comfortable, and then take it a little further.

 And then bring your head back to straight with your muscles, not with your hands, and

 Any pain whatsoever, do not do it, or go up before where the pain is, stopping before

 there's any discomfort whatsoever, and working your way toward it, and creating increased

 And you notice that she's turning around a little bit with her body.

 So I'm going to cut this thin-walled pipe on this portaband that I have mounted upside

 down in this homemade stand to turn it into a vertical bandsaw, metal cutting bandsaw.

 And since this doesn't have a dead man switch on it, I have the trigger blocked open with

 So I'm able to turn it on and leave it on and then turn it off and let it sink.

 This is just about a sixteenth of an inch and that's about what the wall thickness is

 And I'm going to just see if I can't just roll and scribe this and do a little bit better

 job instead of fighting that thing in the vice because I don't want to crush that pipe

 I hope I didn't mess it up when I put it in that for the first time.

 So let's go over to the belt sander and we'll clean these two guys up.

 And then we're going to go to the lathe and start turning our barrels down.

 Oh and the next thing I've got to do before I go in there is I've got to clean the little

 And I've got my bucket of nasty water here because this one's going to get so hot because

 And so I'll just keep tossing it in there and so I'll go back and forth.

 I mean it will take a little bit of strength away from the ring but I haven't had one break

 So on these two you can see I've already got the rings with the inner weld ground down

 enough and then I took an old piece of sandpaper and welded a file first and kind of cleaned

 up the rough edges and then kind of worked it a little bit more with this piece of I

 I covered this with a piece of tissue paper just so you don't see the styrofoam between

 You can push it down a little bit to get it, so it sits in there firmly.

 You can use any size bucket, any size styrofoam ball, as long as the ball sits on top of the

 You can use any box cake mix or cake recipe you'd like, but these are mini cupcakes.

 I've also gone ahead and made some red buttercream frosting, which is in the refrigerator so

 You'll need toothpicks and some 2 inch squares of green tissue paper as well.

 Now before I start decorating the cupcakes, I'm going to put them onto the form here.

 Each cupcake will be held with two toothpicks, so that way they won't slide around and come

 Anyway, I'm going to start here with a row of cupcakes right on the base, right on the

 So I'm just going to take my toothpicks and stick two in for each cupcake.

 And I'm going to go around and I'm going to do an entire row on the bottom, then do

 another row up, and then finally finish with one right up here on top.

 Alright, I've got all my cupcakes on here and I think I used 4, 6, 8, about 38 cupcakes

 Now all I'm doing is taking some green tissue paper that I've cut into 2 inch squares and

 taking 2 pieces, offsetting them like so, grabbing them in the center and just kind

 of pushing these down in between the big spots, just to kind of hide that styrofoam ball a

 Now that I've got all my holes pretty much filled with that green tissue paper, I'm going

 Let me move this out of the way so I can show you how this is done.

 Basically all you do, I've got a pastry bag here with a 2D Wilton tip, star tip, it looks

 I'm going to use a 1M and I'm going to start in the center here and I'm going to pipe out

 and I'm just going to swirl from the center out, just like that.

 And you've got yourself a neat little rose, or rosette as they call them.

 So put that off to the side, bring my cupcake bouquet back, and all I'm going to do is

 And I'm going to go ahead and finish doing the other 36, 37 cupcakes here.

 Once you get all of your cupcakes frosted, this is what it will look like.

 Go ahead and put this in the refrigerator to let your frosting set up and then to transport

 it, probably be best to put it into a box of some sort and even put skewers into the

 empty holes, that way it doesn't bang into the side of the box.

 Rolling, the most important and fundamental move you will learn in your parkour and free

 So when first learning the breakfall roll, it's good to find a soft surface like grass

 You don't want to learn it on cement because if you're practicing and you mess up, you

 can hurt different parts of your back or hit your head and then you're in for a real doozy.

 So what you want to first initially focus on is it's not a forward somersault like you

 do in gymnastics because with the impact and momentum, if you're going straight over your

 So the idea of the roll is that you're going from one shoulder diagonal across your back

 to your hip so that you're not rolling directly over your spine so that you can avoid any

 potential injury because you never know what kind of surface you're going to be rolling

 What you're going to do is you're going to find the side you feel comfortable rolling

 over and you're going to focus on keeping your head to the side and rolling over that

 Some people like to use their hands to support themselves as they go into the roll.

 And so whatever your method, you just want to make sure you practice it slowly so you

 can get the feel for it and make sure you practice it regularly with your training.

 So if you take it real slow as you do your roll, the same way, you'll feel any bones

 or protrusions in your back that will hurt or kind of feel uncomfortable if you know

 And everyone's back is different so you may need to adjust it a little bit to make sure

 that you're doing the roll just so you're avoiding those soft spots.

 When you first start to learn the roll with doing drops, you want to start with something

 Maybe if you can find stairs over grass or something soft, you may not necessarily want

 But I'm just going to use these stairs as an example of how you progress.

 So when you land and hit the ground, you don't want to bend your knees a lot.

 You don't want to come all the way down and then roll, but you want to be able to hit

 And because of the way you land, you're able to fall into the roll and your momentum will

 By having the roll down, having it drilled, your muscle memory will know just how to do it.

 You can actually use the roll to prevent yourself from getting injuries that you would sustain

 So you have your basic rolls, but then you also have dive rolling, which is where you

 actually leap over the obstacle so you're going a lot higher and ending up into the

 roll where you're using your arms and the way you tuck into it to disperse your momentum.

 So this can be more difficult because you're not using your legs to help transfer the impact

 into the roll, but you're actually using your arms and the roll directly as the impact to

 So normally you don't do dive rolls off really high things, but you do it to get yourself

 over things that might be hard to jump over using your hands if it's, say, barbed wire

 And then you can start using lower obstacles to help in your technique and to see what

 So here's a low chain link fence that I'm going to use to aid me in how I'm clearing the obstacle.

 This is a guide on replacing the touchscreen glass digitizer and an LCD screen on an Apple

 To begin, turn off the tablet by holding the power button at the top and confirming the

 Hold the heat gun 2 inches away and direct it around the perimeter of the device while

 It takes about a minute or two to warm up the edge to the desired temperature.

 Once the perimeter is warmed up, focus the heat on the top left corner.

 Apply a suction cup as close to the corner as possible and while gently pulling on it,

 Run the pick along the edge while holding onto the suction cup.

 Place a piece of plastic under the top left corner to prevent adhesive from catching.

 If the edge is not separating well, heat it up for a few seconds and try again.

 Set the bottom left corner with a piece of plastic and move on to the bottom edge.

 Continual heating will ensure easy separation and will cause the least damage.

 Once the bottom edge is unglued up to the home button, come back to the top edge.

 Now that the three edges are unglued, using a heat gun with one hand and applying inner

 pressure with the other, begin opening the digitizer from the left side.

 Use a pick and a heat gun as needed to separate the bottom edge near the home button.

 You may need to use an exacto knife to cut some adhesive strands.

 The digitizer cannot be removed yet as it is still connected to the logic board.

 The LCD screen needs to come out in order to remove the digitizer.

 Place the LCD up from the top edge and stand it up at a right angle.

 The LCD and the digitizer connectors are located under a metal shield that is secured with

 Remove the screws while holding the screen and the digitizer in place.

 The LCD connector is glued to the shield and you can set the screen aside together with

 Using a pick or a flat screwdriver, pick open one of the connectors.

 Open the connector tab, opposite of where the cable slides in, and disconnect the home

 Pick open the last connector and begin separating the digitizer.

 It is a good idea to cut some of the glue strands with an X-Acto knife to keep them

 Align the digitizer connectors with the logic board and plug in two silver cap connectors.

 Connectors will make a distinctive click when plugged in properly.

 Ensure that the cable is in all the way and that the white stripe is parallel with the

 Close the securing tab on the connector and replace the black tape.

 Do a final wipe and make sure the inner side of the digitizer is also free of dust and

 Once the digitizer is aligned and closed, warm it up with a heat gun.

 Using a paper towel, go around the perimeter of the device, firmly pressing on the edges

 Warm the perimeter up one more time and do a final wipe over the face of the digitizer.

 Check that the touch screen and the home button are functional.

 Hi, I'm Keri Vitt with Deliciously Organic and today I'm going to teach you how to make

 So first to start out, I have my baking pan here and I put a sheet of parchment paper

 And then I'm going to chop up some carrots, some potatoes, and I'm going to cut some red

 So now I have all of the vegetables on the baking sheet and I'm going to make a bit of

 a well in the middle here of my pan because that's where I'm going to put my chicken.

 So I've got my whole organic chicken and I'm going to set it on my pan, breast side up.

 And then I'm going to take the wings and I'm going to tuck them underneath and then I'm

 So I'm going to brush the chicken and the vegetables with some bacon fat.

 You could also use ghee or lard or tallow or another kind of fat that's going to be

 That's why I don't like to use butter because butter has milk solids in it and the butter

 is going to smoke and oxidize and that's not a very healthy thing to have on your chicken

 Okay so now that we have the nice fat on our chicken and vegetables, we're going to season

 One thing I'd like to mention is that I use an unprocessed Celtic sea salt on my chicken

 And this is the salt that I love to use in all of my cooking and baking because it's

 completely unprocessed and contains over 80 minerals in the salt.

 And when you compare this to the store bought commercial salt, that salt has usually been

 bleached and it has anti-caking agents in it and that's just something that I want to

 So now we're going to put this in the oven at 425 for an hour and a half.

 And I have a chicken that I already prepared that I'm going to pull out of the oven.

 All of the vegetables have been roasted and this is like a whole dinner in a pan.

 This is a fabulous meal to make even on those hurried weeknights when you can come home.

 You can even have this already prepared and sitting in your fridge.

 And when you come home, stick it in your oven, let it cook for an hour and a half while you're

 One thing to keep in mind is when you pull out the chicken, you want to let it sit for

 20 minutes so the juices can redistribute and then you can cut it up and serve.

 So please make sure and subscribe to the Deliciously Organic channel where I'm going to have lots

 Hi, we're working on creating our own handmade wooden sign using woodwork and wood glue.

 I've applied a couple coats of stain to it so I think it's a nice color.

 I've got some stencil pieces here of all kinds of different letters and I'm actually spelling

 So I want to arrange my stencils so that I can read the name and kind of block it out

 on the wood so that it is spaced correctly and looks good so that I don't run out of

 room and I have room for any other decorations I might want to put on this sign.

 I've got them mostly organized so I'll just set the letters on the wood and what I've

 done is I've attached little pieces of scotch tape to the letters so that will kind of hold

 them in place for me while I get ready to put them on the sign permanently.

 So I've got my name started but I want to go to the next steps now so you can see what

 I'm going to take any permanent marker, I've got a sharpie here, and go ahead and start

 Now you want to make sure that obviously that your name is straight.

 You can use a straight edge, you can use a ruler, whatever you want.

 I just kind of do it by sight because these signs are kind of rustic with the wood burning

 In fact I think they kind of look better if they're just a little imperfections.

 So I'm going to go ahead and start filling in my stencil so that my name will appear

 And once I'm done with that I will then go to the next step which is actually wood burning.

 So as I'm doing this I'm going to talk a little more about what kind of decorations you can

 You can use other stencils, you know there are so many different options out there in

 You can get little pictures, stars, you know anything that is available.

 You can also do, glue on little jewels, little decorations, any kind of thing that you can

 Those things are always fun and you can really personalize this sign and make it really reflective

 It doesn't have to be absolutely perfect because when you go through it with your wood

 burner you can then kind of straighten out some letters or make something a little bigger

 So I'm going to go ahead and finish doing this and then we will move on to the next

 Hi guys, so this is just a quick video showing how I look after and store my extensions and

 I probably got from somewhere like John Lewis, they're really cheap and mine's just a small

And in this I just store all my extensions so I can put them away when

 I'm not using them and they stay really neat and tidy and no hair gets all over the place

 and when I want to put them in I can just take the box out and all the stuff is there

 they might look a bit messy but they're actually not, it's just because they're a little bit

 be dry and straightened when I put them away but I'm just leaving them to dry there and

 they would be just kept like that which keeps them all nice and neat.

 I keep all the clips which I use when I'm putting in the extensions to hold up the rest

 with my extensions, there's not many but obviously I do use other products because I just use

 things that I use on my normal hair because they are so good and they are human hair anyway

 extensions in I use a comb to get out all the knots so I just comb them through, get

 out all the knots and then once they're in my actual hair I vent them through the rest

 of my hair just using a normal paddle brush that I would use on my hair anyway.

 my two hairbrushes in there and these are the products that I use on my extensions.

 Firstly, you should use a good heat spray on them because they are human hair.

 want them to last as long as possible you should use some heat protecting and in a minute

 I'm going to talk about what sort of heated things you can use on your hair and how they

This is just the GHD thermal protector which you can buy from most salons

 that stock GHDs and you just spray this on your hair before you use your straighteners

I think you can buy it in pretty much everywhere and it's probably about £5

 infused reviving serum and this here is the Keratin infused argan oil spray.

 usually use the argan oil spray on my natural hair after I've washed it because it makes

 it the same silkiness as my extensions and you can also spray it on your extensions when

 serum is great for just smoothing down the ends of your extensions and also for blending

 them all look a bit more flowing, so they all flow together and there's no sort of stray hair,

 that's just a great way of keeping your extensions all in one place with all the products.

 you need to do is do your normal hair then get out my little box and there you go.

 I have other extensions that I keep in storage, ones that I don't really use anymore.

 use on your extensions, the heated products, I use pretty much anything.

Obviously you don't want to put fire on your extensions but then if you burn your real

 hair you can use in your extensions, I found, and that doesn't damage them.

 Hi and thanks for watching another video by WeldingTipsAndTricks.com.

 Last video we did we talked about horizontal lap joint, a little technique where you make

 little loops or ocean waves or a series of u's, whatever you want to call them, and how

 that's a good technique for doing lap joints, horizontal joints, overhead joints.

 We also talked about how there's not much difference between pulling and pushing.

 I just pulled that one there and then I did a little bit of an example of the same joint,

 We talked about how as long as you kept the stick out correct and didn't get carried away

 This week we're going to talk about a little technique for vertical MIG welding, vertical

 It almost looks like I'm making little circles here, and actually might be, but in my mind

 I'm making a triangle where I'm cutting across the leading edge of that puddle and straight

 The way I'm progressing up a little bit is I'm making sure that the arc comes across

 I'm actually giving you a perspective of two different welds here.

 You can see when I pull the lens away here, the front edge of the puddle kind of looks

 You want to take that arc, just trace that front edge of the puddle and then come straight

 The puddle will actually push you up without you even knowing it.

 You don't have to intentionally take big steps because the puddle is building on itself and

 if you just cut that arc across the front edge of the puddle each time you come across,

 Again think in your mind's eye as a little series of triangles and don't pause very long

 You can just bounce from tip to tip to tip, three point triangle and it will take you

 Now we're going to look at a little downhill weld, downhill vertical.

 This is almost like the horizontal technique where we're just kind of doing a series of

 Works good on all kinds of vertical downhill lap joints or T-joints.

 If you're building a rack at an angle iron, at a 3-16 wall angle iron, this is a really

 I don't care how hot you weld it, you're not going to get the kind of penetration that

 It's just very much like we did on the example on the horizontal lap.

 As much as I tried, this was set at the same setting as going uphill.

 As much as I tried to point the arc into the corner and bite into new metal each time I

 always ask us for healthy treats, everyone wants a cheat day, no one wants to eat boring

 food, so I challenge you today to come up with something special.

Well, for me when it's time for a treat I just think chocolates.

 perfect recipe to be honest, it's gluten free, sugar free and dairy free.

 and hopefully you will like this one and hopefully you guys will like this one too.

 it's called Trivia, it's from a plant called Stevia, so it's absolutely natural for extra

It's very important, it doesn't matter what you're cooking or what

 were going to get a chef from Greggs but we decided that we'd go for the king of cakes

 and king of cookies so yeah, never go cheap and always get your best chef you can find.

 A bit of salt and we've got some big cup of soda and of course being a chocolate cake

 I need to learn to do is the eggs with one hand but we won't do that now.

 my very own Tagaloa which is organic virgin coconut oil, you can get it from the website

 it, it's Eric Lallard and I tell you what I'm going to do, you click his face, you need

 to subscribe and keep following it because we will be doing more stuff together and when

 Noah's looking I'm going to cook all the unhealthy stuff as well.

And final touch, we've got some pure vanilla extract, always very

Keep an eye on it, if it starts to get slightly darker, just cover

 if you are dairy free, but I'm not dairy free, you're not dairy free, so we are going to

 make it extra special by just doing a good drizzle of chocolate ganache on the top.

 as an afternoon snack or a treat and even actually post training, you've got to have

 JH Fitness fans, your very own gluten free, dairy free, sugar free, chocolate cake made

 by the amazing Eric Lannard, who has his own channel that you need to go and visit.

 talked about subscribing to it earlier, but I'm going to say click on his chest to subscribe

 I'm now going to stuff myself with this very healthy chocolate cake.

 Hi, I'm Ron Lund, and I'm going to explain my laser pitch gauge.

 I know the written instructions that are on my website aren't the best.

 They are a little confusing, so I'm hoping these videos will make it clear that the tool

 I think once you get used to it, you'll find you can level the swashplate and set the pitch

 That's extremely important that you work with a level swashplate when you're setting a pitch.

 In order to do this, I've found a couple tricks that make it actually quite a bit easier than

 The easiest way to do it is to remove your head button and then just bolt the laser pitch

 Once you do that, you'll be able to mark your reference points.

 If you can't remove your head button, or you don't have a hole in the top of your head

 block, or you simply just don't want to bolt the tool on top of your head block, it's a

 very simple matter to tape the blade grips so that they're stationary temporarily while

 I like to degrease the head and the block and then take some blue painter's tape and

 just cover up that gap between the grip and the head block and stick it down on there.

 And then if it's not right at zero pitch, I just kind of adjust it and that's it.

 Once you either have your blade grip taped or the tool bolted on top of your head block,

 One in front of the helicopter, one to the right side, one to the rear, and one to the

 I like to cut a few pieces of tape and just get ready to mark my points.

 And what I do is I just fold that white end back on itself, put a little crease on it,

 So once you get the four points marked, the first thing you do is put the laser pitch

 Make sure all the links are hooked up and then turn our radio on.

 And if your elevator isn't level, there's going to be a gap between the mark and the

 If it's two inches away from the mark, use sub trim to move it one inch.

 And then use collective to move it the rest of the way to the mark.

 Now turn the head 180 degrees so the laser shines on the mark in front of the helicopter.

 Use sub trim half the way, collective the other half of the way.

 Once you get it where it's over both marks, rotate the head 90 degrees so it's lined up

 with one of the marks on the side, left or right, doesn't matter.

 Now the laser should track over all four points as you turn the head.

 Once it does that, you know your swashplate's level and we can move on to the next video

 boiled potatoes cut into bite-size, paste of 2 medium sized onion, 2

 teaspoons ginger garlic and green chilli paste, 1 chopped onion, coriander leaves,

 1 cup tomato puree, 1 teaspoon of asafoetida or hing, salt according to

 choice, 1 teaspoon of sugar, we need the following spices 1 teaspoon of turmeric

 powder, 1 teaspoon of cumin powder, 1 teaspoon of red chilli powder, 1 teaspoon

 least for 3 to 4 hours then with cumin seeds and green chilli we'll make a

 pakoda on a paper towel so that all the excess oil will be soaked by the paper

Add all the spices, turmeric powder, red chilli powder and garam

 Mediterranean dish and tastes great and the flavor will leave you very satisfied.

First we have to make the marinade to brush on the eggplant steaks.

 This is made with two garlic cloves minced, one tablespoon of balsamic vinegar, one tablespoon

 of low sodium soy sauce, a quarter teaspoon of freshly ground black pepper, and then you're

 your eggplant on the cookie sheet or whatever you choose to broil with.

Once you've done with one side, flip it over and make sure you put the marinade

We're going to make a pepper olive mixture that has an incredible

 two minutes on each side of the eggplant and then turn two minutes on the other side until

 take the seeds out, place them on a pan, and then broil them on high for about 10 to 12

 we're going to take them out and we're going to remove the skins.

 being in the bag is what helps the skins to kind of be able to be peeled right off.

 add them to the bowl, as well as one and a half cups of chickpeas or garbanzo beans,

 one and a half cups of, these are Kalamata olives or Greek olives.

Four ounces of feta cheese, two tablespoons of either fresh oregano or

 go ahead and just drizzle that on top and combine them together.

 going to use about three and cut these into triangles and you're going to toast them,

 We're going to add the chickpea and roasted red pepper mixture here to the top, complete

 I'm just going to try to show you what chords are in the five main guitar keys, which would

 be G, key of G, A, C, D, and E. So I start with G, and the chords are constructed off,

 if I'm in the key of G major, you have the major scale up to the octave.

 seven notes, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, octave, like an octagon or octopus,

And they number the chords, just like the numbers in the scale, they'll be numbered

 one chord, the two chord, the three chord, the four, the five, the six, the seven, and

 which is G, two chord is A minor, three chord is B minor, the four chord is C, the five

 is D, the six is E minor, the seven is F sharp minor flat five, which you don't play

 it that way, you usually use a jazz version, you get an extra note, but you have the seven,

 one chord, E minor is a two, F sharp minor is a three, G is a four, A is a five, B minor

 is the six, and then C sharp minor flat five is a seven chord, back to D. The key of C would be C,

 one chord, E minor is a two, E minor is the three, F is the four, G is the five, A minor is the six,

 is three, D is four, E is five, F sharp minor is six, and G sharp minor flat five is seven.

 And the key of E major would be the one chord is E, the two chord is F sharp minor, the three

 chord is G sharp minor, the four is A, the five chord is B, the six chord is C sharp minor, and

 keys for guitar, unless you're playing some like jazz with the horn instruments.

 And so if someone says like we're gonna do a one four five in G, so you just go one two three four

 okay there's a four five so B, there's the one, there's the four, here's the five, back to one.

They said we're doing a one six four five, B one, E minor six, and the key of G, C is the fourth chord, and D is the five.

 And no matter what key it is, if the chords are harmonized off the major scale, the one chord is

 major, the two and three are minor, the four five are major, the six is minor, and the seven is minor flat five.

 Naomi from Breville is joining me today and we're going to be making a curry.

 Usually people just buy the curry paste because it's easier, because at home they think,

 oh it's too hard to chop everything up, but food processor is the way to go.

 So we're going to really have the time for the flavours to get into the curry and it'll be divine.

 And we're using our ECE sear slow cooker so we can sear off the meat on the stove.

 Now I like chuck steak, it is a cheaper cut of meat and it has that little bit of extra fat within it,

 but it handles the slow, slow cooking without drying out and toughening up.

 Alright, while you're doing that, I'm going to show you how quick and easy it is to make the curry paste.

So I've got six of those, so we'll just pop them into the processor.

 I'm just using the smaller bowl of the food processor because we want to use the fine blade.

 And I'm not taking the seeds out, but if you don't like it as hot, you can just take them out.

 So I'm just giving them a rough chop because the blade inside will get them.

 So you could use the bigger bowl, I guess, but it wouldn't be as fine.

 Is that why we put the extra one in to get a really nice puree consistency?

 You want about a six centimetre piece of ginger, just roughly taking off the skin.

This is great because it's non-stick, so it doesn't stick too much on the bottom.

 When you're cooking really slowly, you don't want a potato that's going to be all flowering, crumble up.

 These ones are great because they'll hold their shape in the whole cooking process.

 And then we're just going to put this curry paste in and cook this off for a couple of minutes,

 And then we'll come back and I guess we put it all into the cooker.

 You know it's ready when you can start smelling all the aromats.

 So now you could even add a couple more potatoes into this if you wanted to.

 It retains all the moisture so you've got no evaporation that happens during the cooking process.

 So you don't only need to add just a little bit because all the juices that will come out of the meat will stay in the dish and you'll get all that beautiful flavour.

 And then on a higher setting, if you want to cook a little bit faster, about five to six hours.

 And then once it's finished, about an hour before it's finished cooking, we'll add some other ingredients to it.

 You can leave it, go to work, and when you get home, it's basically a dinner on the table.

 You know what you can do with this one is that you can just serve it straight to the table.

 You know, between the sweet potato and the potato, it just gives you a nice contrast of textures.

 And the point of this is it's so easy to make your own curry paste.

 Pop it in the food processor, really fast to do, and then slow cooking, a nice way for a winter's meal.

 This is the nail art design we're going to be working on today.

 It's just a bunch of patterns and colors we're going to be using.

 This is great for short nails, but if you have long nails, you can do your entire nail

 like this or you can do a French tip manicure and do this sort of nail art on the very French

 So go ahead and grab about 5 of your favorite nail polish colors and let's get started.

 Now we're ready to begin with the fun part which is going to be doing the background

 I went into my nail polish drawer and I got 5 random nail polishes that have nothing,

 I have a yellow over here, a green, a red, an orange, a purple and a blue.

 Maybe I won't be able to fit all the colors into it, maybe I will, I'm not sure, but these

 On some of them I was able to fit all the colors into them and then on some others I

 So I'm going to move these out of the way and we're going to get started with the fun

 So, the next thing to do here is we're going to allow this to completely dry and we're

 The next thing I'm going to be doing is I'm going to be sponging gold over the entire

 And the reason I'm going to be doing this is because I want them to have an even layer

 This is something, this is a step you can skip, but I decided to do it because it helps

 the top circles you're going to be adding and the shapes to pop out more.

 So I'm just going to be applying this very lightly, this gold color, over the entire

 And all this does is it mutes down the colors a little bit, as you can see there, it sort

 That way when we apply the next colors, the circles and the little shapes, they're going

 And you're still able to see the colors on the background, but it sort of makes the top

 After doing this I'm going to be getting a glitter polish and I'm going to be using this

 So what I'm going to be doing with this one after applying the gold, I'm going to be applying

 But like I said, you're still able to see the colors, as you can see in the other nail

 But it just gives it a two dimension, that you can tell the background colors from the

 So let's allow this to dry and then we're going to go in and start doing all the shapes

 Now I'm ready to begin adding the little dots you see in the design.

 We're going to be adding different colored dots and different sized dots.

 I'm going to be using my regular dotting tool, which is the big side, and then I'm also going

 The next thing I'm going to do is I'm going to move over to these glitters that you see

 Here, you can continue doing the white dots in your different areas.

 What I'm going to do here is I'm going to get a little bit of the silver one, so I'm

 So I'm going to get my clear polish and I'm going to add it over the area where I'm going

 So I'm just going to start placing them, some of the silver ones, just randomly.

 If you don't have these, it won't change the look if you don't use these.

 You could just continue dotting different areas and that will work just as great.

 So I'm going to dip in here and I'm just going to be placing about three of the red little

 And I'm just placing them going any direction you want, really.

 This is your nail art and you can make it as crazy as you want, as simple as you want,

 tarp in the back here as the catcher and this is where she would be throwing with her motion

So we're starting at the end of the motion when you would be finished

 In an open door position, you are imagining a wall in front of you and the ball is a piece

So what you're doing is you're going to draw a circle on the wall.

 we're going to get the windmill to where the arm is big enough, the bigger the circle the

 to come around our body and we're going to be pitching in a plane.

Now this is the most important thing, one of the most important things in pitching

 going to be, the more the angle is going to be, which is better.

 to do in a wrist snap position, you're going to have the back of your hand to your forearm.

And you're trying to keep it as close to your body but not behind

 Now you'll notice when she comes down, her fingertips or this part of her thumb is coming

 towards her toe and then she's snapping the ball right here at her hip when she brushes

 what a pitcher needs to do before they ever throw to a catcher because we don't need any

 harder the pot, the harder you snap the ball and that's what you want to do.

 Hi guys, so today I have a step-by-step basics on how to choose eyebrow products and what would work for you.

 So to me, the most important thing that you first have to do is to shape your eyebrows.

 I know quite a lot of girlfriends who actually do not shape their eyebrows,

 They are the most important thing to actually maintain on your face.

 So besides your skin, I think that as long as you shape your eyebrows and you have clear skin,

 even if you do not put on any makeup, you look quite pulled together.

 So bushy eyebrows are fine, but as long as you just maintain the shape.

 So don't have stray hairs flying everywhere and stuff like that.

 So if you're interested to see what else I have to say about eyebrow pencil, eyebrow wax, eyebrow powder,

 So the best gauge of what colour you should use is that your eyebrows need to match your hair colour.

 So if you use an extremely brown one and your hair is jet black, it will look extremely odd and strange.

 So because your hair and your eyebrows are so close to each other, you should be using something that is quite close.

 So I just filmed a comparison on the Benefit Browsings and the Etude House Brow Powder.

 So you would notice that most European and American makeup brands tend to be a lot more browner in terms of their browns and their tones,

 simply because it's catered for more fairer skin tones and skin tones that are not really as yellow undertoned as Asian skin tones.

 Hence, for me, I prefer using either Face Shop or Etude House brow items, just simply because the colour just suits it a lot better.

 So the first eyebrow tool that I would like to talk about is the eyebrow pencil.

 There are the ones that you have to sharpen, there are the twist ones, and the kind that have a spoolie, or some is just a brush, or some have angled.

 So how do you actually choose which eyebrow pencil to use to suit your own skin tone and your whole look?

 So I love to choose eyebrow pencils that have a spoolie, like this, so that I can just comb out my brows.

 When do you actually use eyebrow pencil and when do you use eyebrow powder?

 And usually, this is a question that most of my friends ask me, and to be honest, I think it's a preference kind of thing.

 If you want your eyebrows to stay on longer the entire day, if you use an eyebrow pencil, it usually has a wax in it, so that it will keep your eyebrow hairs quite sleek and nice.

 So if you overdo your eyebrows, then you will get a slightly harsher look, a harder look, if that makes sense to you.

 If you use a brow powder, which I usually prefer using, it would be a lot softer.

 So it has a little bit more of a cute and sweet look if you use a brow powder.

 So I'm gonna start filling in my brows with a brow pencil first, and then the other side I'll be using a brow powder.

 When using a brow powder, I like to take an angled eyeliner brush, and I love using the EcoTools angled eyeliner brush.

 Iatri is a popular book on makeup lately because of its featured effectively, but this has a let's say, vinegar-shaped foam glitter or really, it still 미모化 intelligence.

 So here you can see the difference and basically for me, the brow powder, I just use it to fill in whatever hair there is there.

 Using an eyebrow pencil, however, you can see that the look is a lot more defined.

 I personally prefer on an everyday basis to use the eyebrow powder simply because I find that it just looks so much more natural.

 And so I hope you guys actually found these quick little tips helpful and if you want me to do more of these kind of things, then do let me know in the comment box down below.

 I hope you guys are having a great day and I will talk to you guys very soon.

 He'll be unboxing it and we'll show you everything that comes out of it.

 It was actually in the bath at the time and I had to run through all wet and stuff.

 It's very shiny, I don't want to touch the screen because apparently it smudges a lot.

 Alright, I've just been feeling it up a little bit, you know, like you do.

 I'm having a hard time finding out how to turn all the players.

 You install this and basically it's like a digital locker room for your PSP.

 And all your save games and you can actually access the PlayStation Store app.

 I have a choice of Dutch, English, Spanish, Francois, Italian, or Dutch, Portuguese, something and something.

 No, I think you'll find I'm Korean, but I don't know how to read that.

 Much slimmer, feels much better built, but it's still kind of plasticky.

 And because the screen is smaller and it's got the same pixels,

 And the white one, not so much, but still, you gotta be kind of careful with it.

 And all the volumes and everything located on the bottom of the normal PSP

 Tile offers a great way to add durable, water-repellent, decorative appeal to

 is looking a bit out of style, with a dated looking printed pattern, or a color

 that doesn't match your new decorative plans, or is looking a little worse for

But now, with the Beauty Tone Wall Tile Refinishing Kit, you can

 leave your existing tile right where it is, and roll on a brand new stone finish

No mess, no pricey new tile, and no big labor bills to worry about.

 beautiful, high-performance finish, right over top of the old surface.

 Tone Wall Tile Refinishing Kit is a complete tile resurfacing system, that

 contains everything you need to renew your old tile like a pro, with no

 stone coating system, that blocks water penetration into old grout lines, and

 The colors blend together when they are rolled on, to do all the creative work

 Here's how easy it is to apply the Beauty Tone Wall Tile Refinishing Kit,

 adhesion coating, that grabs firmly onto your tile surface, and also waterproofs

 the grout lines, and any small cracks that may be present in the tile itself.

 Start by brushing the Bond Coat thoroughly, into all grout lines, and over

The goal is not to fill up the grout lines, since they will still be

 part of your final finish, but to give them a uniform protective coat.

 grout lines well coated, proceed with rolling on a uniform coat over the flat

Just roll on a good uniform coat, that conceals the tile, and offers

 cure thoroughly until the next day, before proceeding with the Stone Base Coat.

 The Stone Base Coat is applied in exactly the same way as the Bond Coat.

 adds a durable stone layer over the entire surface, and also serves as both

 the color of your grout, as well as one of the colors in your final tile finish.

 Begin by brushing the Base Coat into all the grout lines, to ensure they are

 decorative part really begins, while also adding an additional durable stone layer

 to create these effects, but you'll feel like one when the job is done.

 is roll on the Accent Coat in a continual X-pattern, like this, as you

 a small piece of sea sponge can be used to add a random natural effect, where the

 in this manner, and let it dry for 30 minutes before proceeding with the Stone

The Stone Highlight Coat is applied in the same way as the Accent

The color you will be rolling on has already been predetermined to work

 perfectly with colors that went on before it, so all you need to do now is

 go through the motions, and the product will do the rest for you.

 the continual X-pattern as you move your way across the surface.

 can also roll the Highlight Coat on more randomly, with more in some areas than

 you've already applied, it will create all the effects for you.

 the surface has been coated to your satisfaction, and the decorative portion

 Stone Clear Coat is the final step in your new tile finishing process.

 add an attractive sheen and final finish to the surface, and also protect it from

 thoroughly into all grout line indentations to be sure they are well

Immediately follow by rolling the Clear Coat uniformly across the entire

 You now have a new premium tile finish installed by you, quickly and easily.

 your kitchen, shower area, bathtub enclosure, and more, the Beauty Tone Wall

 Hope this video helps you out and if you enjoy it, please share it, comment or like it.

 It's a math resource blog, lesson videos for students and other resources for parents and teachers.

 Alright, let's do an exercise where we have to know the central angles and the intercepted angles.

 And question number one, name the intercepted arc for angle GTR.

 And notice how that's an inscribed angle for this arc right here.

 Now I know it has three letters in that arc, but it's a minor arc.

 the inscribed angle is always half as long as the measure of the arc.

 If I look on the other side of the circle, I have an arc that goes from G through T all the way to M.

 Well, I notice that G and M, which are the endpoints of my arc, make a semicircle.

 If angle GTR is 62, so let's mark that angle again, 62, inscribed angle,

 Well, from the previous problem, we talked about how arc GR has to be 124.

 The way I work best with students is live, online, in my classroom.

 So if I can help you in any way, answer some specific questions,

 the first lesson with me is free as I show you how everything works.

 If you've got a two oven oven and you've got a cake baker, don't just bake cakes in it.

 And this is a very quick soup, dependent entirely on the quality of the stock you're using.

 This is supermarket stock which has had some extraordinary filtration process going on

 So I'm just putting some stock in a pan, stick it on the boiling plate to come up to the

 Well, it's Thai style soup from Netherwallop, so it's not that Thai style.

 I've also got some stem ginger, or rather root ginger, which I've just sliced about

 And I've also got a couple of cloves of garlic which I've chopped up.

 And that all goes into the stock and flavours the stock as it comes up to the boil.

 As it's coming up to the boil, they float around, they flavour it.

 You can, if you want to make this soup as a sort of standby in the freezer, flavour

 But remember it is full of chillies and so you don't want to put it into a chicken dish

 You have to label it very carefully in the freezer that you've got chilli stock.

 And the next thing that goes in is a lime, which I've just cut in half.

 The lime juice changes the colour of the stock, makes it cloudy and very pale.

 So it's stock, chilli, ginger, garlic, lime, Thai fish sauce, Nam Pla, which is disgusting

 I mean, have a, if you can be brave enough, it's made of fermented anchovies.

 But it just gives a wonderfully magical Thai flavour to the food.

 And then I've got some Thai lime leaves, which I'm going to crush in.

 I quite like to leave it with the bits in because you get, mum, there's a rhododendron

 I hope you don't mind me passing things around to have a sniff at.

 The longer you leave the chillies in the hot stock, the more they flavour it.

 And the next thing that goes in is some rice noodles, these very fine rice noodles which

 They come in a packet, portion controlled, one handful per person, theoretically, although

 It's very, very quick and easy because if you look at Thai recipes for tom yum goong,

 And to finish it off, I've got lots and lots of fresh coriander which I'm just going to

 Sometimes we have it for lunch and you don't need any bread because you've got all the

 If you wipe the agar with an ordinary dishcloth, it leaves a smeary trail and you have to come

 Agar understand this, you can actually get a heat proof mitt that you can stroke your

 Heavy whipping cream, Malibu rum, Coco Lopez, pineapple juice, vanilla extract, sugar, and of course our star, the pineapple.

We're going to put a large amount of ice in here, but the secret to a good pina colada, or even smoothie for that matter, is to have a good balance between your liquid and your ice.

You've got to use it sparingly, but you've got to make sure that there's enough in there for the flavor.

This will bring out the sweet, coconutty taste that everybody loves in a pina colada.

Cover it up good, start your blend, and here you can tell how much more ice it needs.

 All you have to do is screw out the center of the cap and just add one cube at a time.

 We'll start adding the ice cubes, one at a time, and you can literally watch it thicken up right before your eyes.

Making a pina colada right here in the Poor Man's Gourmet Kitchen using all of these ingredients.

 Thank you for watching, and be sure to stop by Poor Man's Gourmet Kitchen dot com for more recipes and exact ingredients.

 I hope that you had a very happy Christmas with your friends and your family.

 Today I'm going to show you five tips and tricks to make the most beautiful, crunchy

 Okay so preheat your oven to 230 degrees and chop up one onion and garlic.

 Alright guys, so first tip is what we're going to do is we're going to get some boiling water

 Blanching the piece of pork belly helps to further dry the pork skin and also melt some

 So tip number two is to dry your meat using paper towels as much as possible and what

 The skin of the pork will only crisp up nicely if there is a dry surface area.

 You really need a sharp knife because you need to score the skin of your pork.

 Now it's very important that when you're scoring, you go at an angle like so and that you only

 As you can see, I have scored the skin in the other direction to give it this lovely

 I'm going to add one tablespoon of five spice powder and this is going to give the pork

 I'm just going to rub and massage all that in the meat like so.

 I'm also going to add one tablespoon of salt and massage that in as well.

 Now I'm using olive oil today but you can use any type of oil that you like.

 You're going to get your olive oil and you're just going to drizzle that onto your pork

 Now this is really going to help that beautiful crispy crackly texture that we really, really want.

 Grind some sea salt and add some black pepper and this is going to really add some flavor

 So this is preheated to 230 degrees and we're just going to put in this in the oven and

 we're going to cook it nice and slowly to ensure that we have a beautiful crispy and

 So delicious and still beautiful and moist on the inside but so nice and crispy on the

 Thank you so much for joining me on another episode of Forkling Delicious.

 I guarantee you're going to get this beautiful crispy, crunchy roast pork crackling.

 Now you can serve this with some potatoes and some carrots, other roast vegetables and

 You can serve it with basically anything that you like and I hope that you really do try

 If you enjoyed this video, thumbs up, please subscribe and thank you so much for tuning

 Okay, so now what we're going to do is we are going to use two little spoons here and you

 just get a little bit of mixture and we're just going to mix it up.

 And I scraped it on and did a little wet sanding with some 2000 grit wet sand.

 And my base coat, that's this one right here, which they used to use the Toyota color.

 Tear it off like you would, I don't know, some wax paper or something.

 What I'll try to do is blend the paint so it's not a noticeable patch.

 I think the idea is that you spray the paint so you test it on the card prior to spraying your vehicle.

 On the back it's got kind of a registration information about the car and the person and some details and some instructions.

 So we're going to paint the card first and then match it to the car and make sure that it's a match.

 Now, the paint can itself, I can tell you this spray design comes out in a very nice pattern.

 And what I've done, if you notice I've moved the masking back a little bit.

 Because I was too close with the masking edge and didn't allow me in a feathering room when I was spraying.

 You can kind of see where it's, I don't know if you can tell, where that base coat is sprayed on there.

 So, for forty bucks in paint and a few instructional videos online, I did it myself.

 Blissey Advanced is an exclusive, reducible, plated insect screen, simply with the power

 so you can adapt the system by yourself, in a workshop or right on the construction site.

 A few ordinary operations, such as the insertion of the end caps on the profiles, prepare the

 conjured design of the systems enables the insect screen to be installed in a few steps,

 the accessory kit must be fixed on the wall with a screwdriver.

 Next position the self-adhesive PVC bottom guide in line with the clips you have already

 screen is such a simple as the installation of a traditional one.

 Install the top guide, keeping the side with the plastic caps, in the direction of the

 Thanks to the vertical cord holder it is very easy to insert the tensioning cords in their

 installed the revolutionary Plicé Advance, the reducible, plated insect screen, which

 Okay, we're going to do a quick video to show you how to fit the skid plate on the rear

 So they're different, this section here that it covers is different on the Dynamic to the

 So I've got the exhaust in the shot here, so basically if your exhaust is this square

 So these actually come as a pair, you've got the front and rear, but this video is just

 So they're stainless steel, they come nicely packaged as you'll see, in a sort of cotton

 So it's a brushed stainless steel, okay you can see there, it's brushed stainless steel

 and it comes with the four holes, so Tom do you want to point out those four holes, so

 And it comes with the fitting kit and it's got a nice little rubber edge there, okay

 I don't know if you can see that, and it also comes with the fitting kit, we've got the

 So what you'll get in the fitting kit, okay you'll get two cleaning wipes, some silicon

 adhesive, okay four screws and we're also supplying this bit set kit that will have

 the right allen key, because you'll notice that these screws, they're hexagonal with

 Okay, right now at this point I'm going to have to do this together Tom, so if I pass

 the camera over to you, okay so you can see the car without, if you want to just get down

 a little just so we can see, and then you'll see this fits over here, okay, like so.

 Now that's, okay so once you're happy that it's the right product and it fits well, okay

 So if I put that here, so this is the silicon adhesive we supply and this will just stop

 any vibration and noise and give it a bit more adhesion as well, okay.

 So I'd recommend putting it in the middle of these three areas here, okay, so if you

 put a glob in these three areas here, okay I'll put a little glob there, there you go,

 So that'll just stop it in a few key places just to stop it making any noise, which it

 One thing we just did there was just check this rubber edging is all correct because

 sometimes when you offer it up and take it off again it just pulls it back a bit so just

 We've got the correct driver bit in a cordless electric drill, okay, and what we're going

 to do now is we're going to offer it up into place, okay, and it simply drills into place.

 So if we get that right, so start at the top, get that in there, okay, push it in, make

 sure you get it pushed in firmly against the thing and then for fitment, okay what we've

 got is these self tappers so you don't need to pre-drill the plastic, okay, just hold

 it in place, okay, and just nip those in, that's the first one, let me grab the others

 So you don't need to go too fast, just go nice and gentle because you're only screwing

 into plastic so you don't want to go too heavy with it and then the bottom two I'm not sure

 we'll get the drill in here, yeah we will, we'll be fine, yeah the drill's fine so just

 make sure it's pushed firmly back and we've checked behind the bumper so you're not going

 to go anywhere near anything important inside the rear bumper, okay.

 Okay, that's the job done, okay, and that won't rattle, that's absolutely solid on the

 back there and so that's just five minutes and that smashes the exhaust, looks a good

 I'm going to do another intro here, it's Tush by ZZ Top and here's how I play it.

 Then my 3rd finger gets the 4th and 3rd string at the 5th fret.

 So I'm going back to the 6th and then I go to the 3rd fret on the 4th and 3rd string.

 Then I take my thumb and do a little slide on the 6th string 1st fret, slide off to the 3rd fret.

 That one sounds better if I use my fingers but I can't get to my pick by going...

 When I get to that one trying to grab my pick I'm not quite fast enough.

 Then you hit the 6th string open on the 1st fret on the 6th to the 2nd fret.

 Then I go to a D power chord at the 5th fret on the 4th and 3rd string.

 Then I go to the D power chord at the 5th fret on the 4th and 3rd string.

 Then you go to a G power chord, 1st finger is on the 6th string 3rd fret.

 That's the 7th fret on the 4th string, 5th string to that 8th, back to 7th.

 Then I just take the C power chord again and go up a half step.

 Alright, I played a little bit sloppy, I haven't played it for a while, but I'm pretty sure that's pretty close.

 And really what I like about this exercise is take your body up.

 Even in the beginning position, she's going to start working her abs.

 So don't push against the straps, but do straighten your arms and your legs.

 And as you get really good at this, yeah, you can go higher one more time.

 Before we do that, actually, I'm going to actually, this is where I like to spice up your intermediate

 What you're going to do is you're going to loop the handle through, right?

 So you're going to lift up a little bit higher with your spine here.

 This is the unboxing of the Samsung Blackjack 2, the blue one, Skyblue.

 Actually, it takes a long time to let it load, so while that's doing, I'm going to continue doing the buttons.

 So, y'all can't see at all, so I'm just going to stop it right here and I'll do another review later.

 Hey everyone, welcome back to BrickCraft and on today's video I'm going to be teaching

 you how to do the criss-cross quad fish on your monster tail rainbow loom, and it's actually

 They show you pictures of it in the instruction manual, but I figured that some people have

 a hard time following instructions on paper, so I would show you guys on film how to do

 You'll need your loom and all your loom supplies for this video, of course.

 I don't know exactly how many rubber bands you'll need, but you'll need a lot.

 So go ahead and start, and you're going to grab your first color and put them onto one

 set of pegs that are across from each other, and do the little twist so it looks like the

 Then with your next color, you're going to take and make an X on those four pegs, like

 Make sure you're pushing down your rubber bands so that they don't pop off the pegs.

 And then the next one you're going to take and just go parallel to each other on those

 Then you're going to grab your bottom rubber band and flip it up over the peg.

 Then you're going to go ahead and push that down and add another row of rubber bands,

 Push the rubber band down and add your next row, which will be parallel, just right across

 Push down your rubber bands, and your next row is going to make an X again.

 So it's going to be parallel, then an X, then parallel, then an X.

 And you grab your bottom rubber band and pull it up over all of them.

 So it looks like an equal sign, and then an X, for those of you who don't understand

 Now I always know what color to do because I do my rubber band, my hexafish and my quadfish,

 and my, I mean, just do all my ones, my rubber band bracelets, and threes, three different

 And whatever one I flip up over is the next color that I add to the rainbow loom.

 But your shapes, you just have to keep remembering that you did the equal sign or you had done

 And you're just going to keep continuing this pattern until you get the bracelet to your

 And once you get to this length, you're going to take and make sure you pull your bottom

 And instead of adding another row of rubber bands, you're going to go ahead and pull the

 And then you're going to take the remaining rubber bands and put them all onto one of

 The next thing you're going to do is take and put your hook through and then pull one

 single rubber band through all of those rubber bands on the peg.

 And you can attach your S hook or your C hook, whatever one you use.

 And you're left with a pretty cool looking crisscross quadfish bracelet.

 Thanks for watching guys, I hope you enjoyed the video and if you want to see some more

 Rainbow Loom or Monster Tail videos, go ahead and click on my last video.

 I also have a playlist up for you guys where you can watch them.

 Hi, my name is Jim and this is my 1958 Corgi Sportster with a Paco frame.

 So, usually when it's been sitting that long, oil will drain from the oil tank into the crankcase.

 And so it will pump it out, usually out of the overflow of the breather here.

 So what I do before I start it, after it hasn't been started for a while,

 I just put a quart of oil there so you don't make a mess on the driveway.

 But once it's warmed up and pumps all the oil back into the tank, you don't have to do it.

 Hi, I'm Faith and this video is going to show how to do Wendy's Double Hammock with a woven

 I'm going to show a knotless or buleria finish which is my favorite way to end this carry,

 but you can also tie it shoulder or do a candy cane chest belt if you prefer.

 I'm pretty small so I can do this carry with a 4 or sometimes a 3, but most people will

 need a 5 or a 4 for this carry, usually one size down from what you use for a regular

 So to figure out where to start my baby on the wrap, I'm first just going to drape it

 Normally, you're going to go about to your hip, but because I'm using more length than

 I need, I'm just going to give myself a little extra length here for the video.

 Then I'm going to find the middle of my back on the wrap and that's where I'm going to

 Judah is about 4 months old, however I really love this carry for toddlers.

 So I'm going to go ahead and do a quick superman toss to get him on my back.

 I'm going to start with the short end over my shoulder and then the long end coming under

 I'm going to get the top rail nice and snug and pin it under my chin.

 Then I'm going to gather up this short tail on top of my shoulder and pin it under my

 Then I'm going to make a chest pass just like in double hammock, strand by strand, bring

 Then I'm going to give him an L-curve to tighten everything up.

 Then when I come to the front I'm going to bring it over my shoulder to the back.

 You could if you wanted to twist them across and tie here for a candy cane chest belt.

 So for the knotless finish I'm going to take the bottom one across and then up diagonally

 Then I'm going to switch to this one, bring it across and then up diagonally, bounce and tighten.

 I like to just tuck them back into my ruck straps to get them out of the way.

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to be making a gluten-free applesauce buckwheat flaxseed

 We're going to be using all gluten-free flours, buckwheat, brown rice flour, flaxseed, brown

 sugar, I'm going to add some xanthan gum, baking powder, eggs, pumpkin pie spice, applesauce,

 I measured all the dry ingredients into a bowl and I used a wire whisk to combine it.

 Because I'm using the powdered buttermilk, you add the powder with the dry ingredients

 I forgot to mention in the ingredients that I'm using coconut oil.

 I'm going to add applesauce and use the water to put in place of the buttermilk.

 Now I'm going to combine the wet ingredients with the dry ingredients and stir those together

 These raisins were very sticky so I took a little bit of the rice flour and just lightly

 I'm now going to sprinkle each muffin with some cinnamon and sugar.

 All the muffins have been sprinkled with the cinnamon and sugar.

 When it reaches an internal temperature of 205 degrees the muffins are done.

 This is about as short as pieces I'm comfortable sending through the service planer.

 And I've checked it with the straightedge and it's straight in this direction.

 It's flat down this end, but here it's got quite a cupping in it.

 And so that's going to call for some more finesse with the portable power planer.

 I'm going to start here in the center and slide off to that side, slide off to that side,

 And you can see with each pass I went down the board a little bit further each time.

 The first pass I was way up here, the next pass I was down here.

 I can still see a little bit of light at the edge, but that's not going to cause me any problem.

 If I had a thinner board it might, but this curly maple is pretty dense and rigid.

 So this will be a good enough face to take on the downward side.

 But I still do have to check it to make sure that it's flat with the winding sticks.

 And again I have this corner and that corner being the high spots.

 This time we're going to show you some interesting shapes built just by using circles.

 The base side of the first tree formation is a detruncated octahedron.

 It has 24 vertices which can be created from just four hexagons, like this.

 Now we build up the hexagons to make hexagon tubes which, when all connected, results in a small tree-like formation.

 This tree can also be extended at its ends to make an even bigger tree.

 The next tree form is based on rhombi octahedron, which also has 24 vertices, but now we are using 6 squares to create it.

 Now to make it a little easier, we've created a double 8 dot ring that makes 4 squares, and then we just add the last two.

 This formation can also be made with bigger cubes, or even square based columns.

 This time we're extending a dodecahedron, made of 12 pentagons, so we can add a little more detail to this.

 This time we're extending a dodecahedron, made of 12 pentagons, so we have already set up these 12 pentagon cubes.

 If you look carefully, you'll see that the correlations of the cubes are always interlinked.

 They could be lined up as well, but they wouldn't be as stable, so that's why we like to have them interlinked instead.

 This one has 120 vertices, and the easiest way to build it is from 12 decagons.

 Unfortunately, once you extend it to this size, it no longer is as stable.

 These two here are based on a truncated cube octahedron, with 48 vertices.

 One of them has 6 octagon cubes, and the other has 8 hexagon cubes.

 Can I just tell you how excited I am that it's finally time to post the lunch sack tutorial on YouTube?

 I've been looking forward to this since I posted the non video version on artdeco.com

 Since then though I've made several of these and have totally fixed my lame instructions

 Start out with the 12 by 12 half strip checkerboard and using a half strip of white to stabilize at the beginning

 Now cover the back with tape any old color sticky sides together

 After it's all covered turn it 90 degrees and add a second layer of tape in whatever color you want on the inside of your bag

 Trim the sides and cut the square right down the middle so you have two strips that measure 12 by 6

 Turn it over and cover the clear strip with teal to make it secure

 Now take the white half strip and cover the square on your checked end trim both sides down

 So you will know where to put in your side panels a little bit later

The second mark should line up with the seam you made with the clear and teal tape

 Now is also the best time to put in your closure whether that be a snap magnet or velcro

 Then use a half strip of an accent color to finish off both of your raw ends and set the panel aside

 To make the side panel lay two 7 inch strips down the mat four inches apart

 Then lay a strip right down the center to make it nice and stable

 This is the number one way to make sure that your lunch sack doesn't get all floppy and sloppy and lame and I have to admit

 Just mark a half inch from one end and then angle your ruler to the far corner and cut it

 Now carefully peel it up and flip it over line up your angled end on one of the 1 inch ruler lines on your mat

 Cover it with a piece of tape sticky sides together overlapping the bottom edge by a half inch

 Lining up the second angle edge on the same 1 inch line and again cover leaving a half inch overlap

 Lay a third strip down the center so the entire back is covered

 Now find the ends of your tape they are easy to see in real life

 Cut the tape on the wider edge leaving a half inch beyond the edge the skinnier end though trim right on the line

 Line up the fat edge of your panel with the marks you made earlier and cut the sticky white tape on the other side

 So it makes sense that this would be the section that I totally missed the frame while I was filming, right?

 Line up the edges of the back on one side nice and square with the corner of the side panel and then line it all

 Repeat on all four sides until you have taken this project all the way out of the second dimension and into the third

 Wrap a half strip of trim color around the bag covering the white border

 Where the tape makes a little corner clip it with your scissors and then fold it down

 Fold it down over the seam clipping it again where it meets the side panel and repeat on all four sides of the bag

 I went ahead and added a snap so it could be attached to a backpack, but you could use a clip too

I'll show you how to make a matching ice pack and some of the variations on the bag

 Thanks for watching duckos and remember you can find more fantabulous duct tape projects at

 my fake nail and just go ahead and aim for the middle part right here at an

Go ahead and dip down and let's go ahead and clean up the surface.

 intricate designs and because I used some shimmer polishes it's very very

But I'm gonna go ahead and wait till this is dry and just add a coat of

 glitter because most of you already know that glitter don't usually work in water

 in a very light green base so it's not going to overwhelm the water marble.

 it has these green and blue glitters in it and that just really makes the design

And now I'm just gonna go go ahead and show you what it looks like with the

That is just so pretty and because the base is so light it did not

 overwhelm the water marble but you just basically add it to it.

 I'm here talking about how to care for your rabbit and we are going to discuss diet.

 I have alfalfa and I also have oat hay as some examples of varieties that you can find.

 These tend to be a little less in calorie than the ones to my right.

 These should be used for younger rabbits who need that high calorie content to start building

 I also have some Timothy pellets made from the same stuff here, but these are more of

 We have bananas, we have apple, and we also have treats that come mixed in with some of

 You don't want to get a lot of foods that have high calorie content.

 If you want a healthy, happy rabbit who's moving around a lot, you need to give them

 If you give them too many treats, then they will gain weight and then that will be something

 Carrots, though rabbits do love carrots, should be taken in moderation.

 Moderation where only to be given as a treat every once in a while, including the fruits

 which are high in sugars and these treats that I showed here, also high in calories.

 If you're going to provide pellets to your rabbit, the best suggestion is the pellets

 here and I would suggest that you only use, to start, an eighth of a cup a day.

 And obviously, you need to talk with your veterinarian to figure out diet-wise what

 would truly be appropriate for the size of your rabbit and what they're currently eating.

 They need a large, consistent bowl or bottle of water to be accessible so that they can

 keep themselves hydrated, keep good kidney function and organ function in general.

 And those are some guidelines on how to create a balanced diet for your rabbit.

 Next, we are going to discuss the importance of spay or neutering your rabbit.

 to show you how to use it so you can start doing jobs and making money.

 the water hose valve, then open the small air valve to start the pump.

 gallon per minute pump, so it will only take one minute to fill your tank with 30 gallons

Add 38.4 ounces of Holdtite 102, and 300 pounds or 6 bags of water.

 air, by locking the air valve, and turning the air valve to run.

 The three items are a sensor unit, a transmitter unit and the display unit.

 Place the supplied batteries in the transmitter unit first and check that the switch is set to position 2.

 You'll need a small screwdriver to open and secure the battery cover.

 Activate the transmitter unit by pressing and holding the check button on the front for 2 to 3 seconds.

 You'll notice that the red light on the front of the unit will flash every 2 seconds.

 Insert the batteries into the display unit and a tone should be heard.

 The screen will flash until it finds the transmitter, then 0.0 will appear on the screen.

 Locate your electricity meter and clip the sensor around one of the two large single cables running from the meter to the fuse box.

 The sensor makes no electrical connection to the cable and will not damage or break it.

 You can now see how much energy normal household appliances consume from anywhere in your home.

 Hey what up guys, today I just want to bring you a super easy recipe for honey mustard.

 I love honey mustard, sometimes I just don't like what they sell in the supermarkets, I

 So I came up with a simple recipe that you can put together at home at any time, super

 Ok guys, so these are the basic ingredients that you are going to need for the honey mustard.

 Mayonnaise, yellow mustard, we have brown mustard, smoked paprika or pimenton, honey,

 extra virgin olive oil, sea salt, balsamic vinegar or apple cider vinegar.

 Ok we are going to add our first ingredient consisting of mayonnaise, this is about a

 Next ingredient in my list will be mustard, yellow normal mustard, you can find it anywhere

 That will give that little tang and stuff, it's really good, I like it a lot.

 Then our next ingredient will be just 1 teaspoon of brown mustard.

 Brown mustard is brilliant, it has a little bit of acidity that will help a lot in this

 You can see how it takes just a little bit of that characteristic honey mustard color.

 Next ingredient will be paprika, this could be paprika, I'm using right now pimenton al

 mal which is like a Spanish paprika, it's really good, I really like it a lot and it

 Just about a half teaspoon, so we're just going to go in with the paprika or pimenton,

 Just amazing, it gives a little bit of smoky flavor to our honey mustard and you know,

 And next ingredient of course, honey, I mean it's honey mustard right?

 So we're going to put some, this is about 2 tablespoons, but you can put more, I usually

 end up putting a little more of honey, just you know, you taste it and it will give you

 Just start stirring and you see how it starts changing color real fast.

 So see how it changes color when we add the honey, it's just a matter of stirring a little

 Now I add a pinch of salt, a little bit of black pepper, not much, just to make sure

 I like to put a little bit, just a little bit of balsamic vinegar in the mix.

 We go in, not much, just a little bit so you can get a time, maybe half teaspoon or a teaspoon

 You can see the consistency of this, it's really runny, it's really tasty.

 I love our roasted potatoes, chicken sandwiches, even with chips, it's really good.

 I recommend just to make small batches so you can eat it away and don't have to put

 Leave it in the comments below and see if you can make it at home and how did you like

 Hey guys, I'm Angela and you're watching Runway Done My Way for Viva Glam Magazine.

 Today's episode I'm going to show you the quickest and easiest way to shred the back

 So what you're going to need for your ingredients is one shirt, which I am wearing just because

 I wanted to show you how tight it needs to be to get the look that I'm going to show

 In the stores they have tank tops that have the back shredded and they're like hanging

 off you, but I like the more fitted shirts that have the shredded backs.

 And then other than a shirt you will need scissors and probably about 20 minutes of

 Alright, so first things first, you want to just take your shirt and lay it down flat.

 There's like a little seam, so I would usually just cut right under that.

 I think sometimes when you cut it too big it just ends up stretching the first time

 So you want to make sure that when you're shredding the back there's some structure

 I have a bunch of those shirts, those tank tops that are super baggy and they just kind

 So if I'm going to shred something I still like it to have some structure and have it

 still lay nicely on my shoulders and against my pants or my skirt or whatever I decide

 Okay, so now most people that I know would just cut along the back and it doesn't really

 Because you don't want to bring the shred up any higher than that because otherwise

 And a lot of people like I said would just cut across and that's why it takes forever

 So my little secret is to fold the top in half like this and make sure you have the

 Because you're cutting double the distance and expect to be cutting a straight line.

 I'm going to bring it all the way almost to the side seam, maybe like an inch off.

 I've tried to do it that way once before and then I kind of figured out this way once I

 There's so many easy ways to do things if you just educate yourself a little bit.

 I'm going to go ahead and wrap this up and I'll be back in five.

 You just want to continue all the way up to the top of the shirt.

 And I'm coming right up to that marker that I had us mark to make sure that we don't go

 So a few more cuts and then you just want to make sure, like I said, just stop right

 there and that will make sure that it has enough structure to stay on your shoulders.

 Like I said, you can do this, now you can do this with anything you want.

 You can do it with tank tops and you want to start with a fitted shirt.

 Don't think that if it's fitted that it's not going to shred and hang in the back because

 you saw how tight this shirt was on me and you're going to see in a minute how much it

 So a lot of people, you know, they make the misunderstanding that you need to have like

 a big shirt to have like the shreds hang down the back and that's just not true.

 So I'm going to put this on in a second and show you how it looks.

 I hope you guys enjoy today's project exclusively at Runway Done My Way for Viva Glam Magazine

 Alright guys, I'm going to be showing you how to repair a Xbox 360 drive that won't

 And in order to get to the drive belts in here, that dries up and gets a little weak,

 And the only way to do it is, most of the time on these Samsungs, there's a gear right

 here, you just move it clockwise and the tray will start to come out.

 Now what you want to do with these is go get some hot soapy water.

 And get some really hot water, pour it over top of it, swish it around a little bit, let

 And that will usually make them a little bit more rubbery, because this one is pretty dried

 But I've done that to, I don't know, like five or six others, three or four years ago

 And while you're letting this sit in the water, get you some sandpaper.

 And if you don't have enough sandpaper, a little flat head screwdriver like the ones

 And you've got to do it with two hands, but you just hold this with one hand and then

 Clean all this first because it'll be really dusty and real nasty and stuff inside.

 I've had this one spoofed as a MS-28 to work in a different Xbox, but it failed.

 What you do, you take this, take a needle or a small screwdriver.

 Most of the time you can do this without even opening your 360.

 Since they're probably out of warranty anyway, as old as they are.

 Now a BenQ will be pretty much the same thing as this light-on drive.

 Okay, ladies and gentlemen, it's time to make my homemade frappuccinos.

 Lower fat and lower sugar than the frappuccinos you get at Starbucks.

 Now I pour in this, I'm making two frapps, one for my daughter and one for me.

 And I squeeze in till the level of the milk comes up to about the two cup range.

 I generally don't use the ice that I make in the freezer because that

 tends to be harder and it's harder on the blades of the blender so I get the

 ice that you get at the store you know that's a lot airier and then you just

 Then I just just to make sure that the ice there aren't any two major big huge

 plastic cups because otherwise glass glasses get really really cold and hard

Another reason your spatula comes in handy is getting stuff out.

 Kaylin always hopes there's some extra left over because she usually gets the extra.

And then we like to dribble just a little bit of the Hershey syrup on top.

 Hey YouTube, today's tutorial is definitely one of my fave nail looks for the summer.

 By blending these pastel colors, you achieve what I like to call a 4 way gradient look,

 First apply a base coat and then paint your nails white, and wait for them to dry.

 After take a sponge and paint each section a different color like so.

 To mix things up, I replaced the blue with a coral pink for a different color combo.

 If you applied it on your nail and you still see a few white areas, what you can do is

 Take a q-tip and some nail polish remover to clean off the mess.

 If you have any questions or requests, please leave me a comment below, and if you haven't

 My next video will be a little something different as you can see, so I hope you look forward

 Today I propose you the recipe of the lingua di gatto, simple biscuits which

 form or remind a cat tongue that are used to prepare many desserts

 100 grams of butter, 100 grams of confectioner's sugar, 100 grams of flour, 100 grams of albumens

 that equal more or less 3 eggs, and a bit of vanilla into flavor.

 To make it easier it's better to take it off the fridge at least a couple of hours before.

 Squeeze the mixture on a baking tin covered with greaseproof paper

 With the same mixture we can also obtain various shapes such as cigarettes

 Once the cookies are ready let them rest for 10 minutes so that the mixture can widen.

 Remember they shouldn't stay too close otherwise they can attach one to the other.

 Cook them in the oven at 200 C for about 7-8 minutes depending on the oven.

 Once the linguine got ready take them off the plate and let them cool.

 If you want to obtain different kinds of little wafers, for example some little tiles,

 lean them on a rolling pin and wait until they get cooled and take this shape.

 To obtain a sort of a basket to contain an ice cream or a mousse

 put a still warm little wafer in a mold or a glass and let it cool.

 Once they get cold they should be crunchy and can be served in an airtight container for various days.

 We have two large chicken legs, which we're going to make the stock with.

 Just when you see some fat and some foam, just remove a bit of it.

 Which seems like a tremendously small amount for this amount of stock.

 But it's a porridge, so we're just going to cook it down for approximately two hours.

 You can use cooked rice, which would make it much quicker to cook.

 So after your chicken has cooled down for a bit, we can start by removing the skin.

 After approximately half an hour, the rice is much thicker and has approximately the consistency of normal cooked rice.

 The crewperson plays a very important part in maintaining the balance of the craft and

 As the IRB rises over a small, broken or green wave, the crewperson will raise their buttocks

 As the IRB rises over a large, broken or green wave, the crewperson will take the shock of

 the wave by standing in a slightly crouched position, both legs slightly bent and evenly

 positioned maintaining the hand grips on the bow rope and pontoon.

 It's important to not let go of the hand grips as the crewperson can lose balance and fall

 into the lap of the driver or onto the port side pontoon which could place the IRB in

 As a driver there is a natural tendency to turn the wrist down and pull the steering

 This means that the throttle will move down, rev the motor faster, cause the IRB to turn

 To counteract this the driver should lean into the IRB and maintain the wrist in a bent

 position when pulling the handle towards the body which will keep the engine revs at an

 Starboard turns should not be attempted until the driver is confident with throttle control.

 If you are performing turns and basic manoeuvres in a Class 3 IRB, remember it handles differently

 to a Class 1 or Class 2 so always refer back to your latest Powercraft training manual.

 When performing turns in a Class 1 or a Class 2 the crewperson has significant impact on

 the responsiveness of the IRB by appropriately moving their weight around.

 The crewperson should always move their weight to the same side the IRB is turning towards.

 When the IRB is performing a starboard or right turn the crewperson should move their

 When performing a port or left turn the crewperson should move their body to the port side of

 This is achieved by the crewperson crouching towards the centre of the IRB.

 When doing this the crewperson should ensure that they remain in control and not to fall

 onto the port side of the IRB as this may make the IRB unstable.

 The amount of movement required will depend on the weight of the crewperson and the weight

 I am the co-owner of EdTap Industries and the co-inventor of the Crownmaster Miter Box.

 Whether you're a do-it-yourselfer looking to add a special touch of crown to your home,

 or a professional looking to make your job a little easier, we've got the product for you.

 I'm sure when you bought your Crownmaster Miter Box, you had already selected a specific crown to be used in your home.

 but for our purposes, we're going to be using a standard 3 ¼ inch crown.

 Now you're going to place your scrap piece of crown upside down in the miter box,

 and make sure that both the bottom and the back are resting evenly in the miter box.

 Using the conveniently already installed tape measure, we can see that our crown needs to sit at 2 ¼ inches.

 It's very important when you're cutting that you make sure that your fence is at all times

 making sure that the back fence is always tight to the back fence of your saw.

 We're using a 12 inch rigid saw, however it works just as well on most major brands.

 and slide your miter box all the way to the right until the stop hits the base of your miter saw.

 make sure you only cut far enough to cut through your crown molding, and no further.

 You can see that this leaves you, this back fence, completely intact,

 making it really dangerous and risky that your smaller pieces are going to be thrown by your saw,

 and then you can just put it right back on to make an angled cut.

 Occasionally as professionals, we run across angles that are steeper than 45 degrees,

 typically on a coffered ceiling or on a staircase, and they'll look a little something like this.

 If you have come across these angles, you know how incredibly difficult they are to get right.

 First, you're going to remove the adjustable fence from the miter box, as we already have,

 and place the auxiliary back fence over the middle post in your miter box.

 so we're going to line up the back fence with the left cut that we had already made in our saw.

 Then, using the number you've already predetermined for your crown,

 Now, for cutting these angles, you're going to measure to the longest distance and cut a square end on your crown.

 Slide the box all the way to the left so that it's hitting the right-hand stop,

 Now, we hope that by using our products, you are able to achieve the professional results you desire,

 Hello, this is Bobby McKinney with McKinney Baseball Training Center and today we're going to talk about preparing to go out on the field and throw a baseball or a softball, either one.

 And this is something that pretty much you learn a technique when you're young and it kind of carries over as you get older.

 And what we find is a lot of the older players will just grab a ball out of the bucket and they'll just walk out on the field and start throwing.

 And you need to be prepared to throw before you walk out on the field.

 So these habits need to be picked up when you're younger, at six, seven, eight, nine years old,

 so they can carry over and carry you on through however long you want to play, but you make sure that your arm is in good shape and not susceptible to injury.

 The first thing you want to do before you go out is make sure you stretch.

 Our shoulder capsule is very interesting because it moves in so many different directions.

 And you'll see guys warming up for Major League games and they have bands and they're working in different directions and they're doing different kinds of exercises.

 And we can escalate to that as you move along, but just some basic warming up to get yourself ready to go out on the field is just basic arm circles.

 With just a little bit of break, we're going to go through them rather quickly.

 What we want to do is we want to have our hands facing backwards.

 You want to grab where your tricep is, not on your elbow, but where your tricep is, and pull your arm across the front of your body.

 We're going to do both sides, but most players like to start with their throwing side.

 Go above your head, pull down like you're scratching the middle of your back.

 One of the last ones we'll do, it's very important to make sure that when you throw, when you release the ball, your hand actually turns inward, or it turns outward facing your palm out, supinates.

 We want to make sure that we're ready for that, so we start with our palm up.

 This will make sure that everything in our shoulder, that twisting action, we're ready to throw.

 Make sure your cardiovascular's up a little bit, your heart rate's up a little bit, you're pumping blood.

 You've woke up all the muscles and let them know that you're getting ready to ask them to do something.

 You've got to make sure that all the fluids that are in your body that aid in the lubrication and easing the muscles, stretching them and making sure they work efficiently are ready to go.

 You can't do that by just grabbing a ball, running out and starting throwing for distance.

 Again, this is Bobby McKinney with McKinney Baseball Training Center.

 You can like us on Facebook at McKinney Baseball Training Center.

 Also, subscribe to our YouTube channel, which should be below this video.

 We do all we can just to put information out there for players of all ages.

 this beautiful curry fish with this fried fish and I have one with saute

 them up into slices not too thin and fried and pre-cooked them.

 curry powder into the mixture and let that cook and then I'm gonna take

All those flavors will come together nicely and one small piece of

The curry is now simmering and all those nice flavors are in there.

 When you see the curry is a little bit cooked, you want to add those potatoes

 Put my fish into the flour and I'm gonna fry them until it's golden brown on

Once it's fully cooked on both sides, you want to drain that oil.

 Put some paper towel onto a plate and you're gonna take your fish out one by

 same pan, wash it out, put some of the oil from the fish, a few teaspoons, heat it

Then I'm gonna take my fish, the same fish, and I'm going to saute

With all the flour, you want to let it cook for about two minutes on one

 This is tapioca maltodextrin experiment one, hazelnut butter, which we are salting now

 So this is a modified starch that thickens fats instead of water.

 So anything that has fat in it like caramel, chocolate, olive oil, bacon grease.

 You can turn bacon grease, bacon grease again, definitely there is going to be a lot of bacon

 Now it's just like it turns back into hazelnut butter in your mouth.

 We will bring you more tapioca maltodextrin goodness at a later time.

 And also we got some stuff that turns I think fatty stuff like into foams.

 McDonald's Big Mac was the second recipe I made for the Top Secret Recipes books, like,

 So I'm going to show you how you can make this world-famous hamburger at home.

 12-Week Patties, Special Sauce, Lettuce, Cheese, Pickles, Onions, and a Sesame Seed Bun.

 French Dressing, a little relish, sweet pickle relish, a little minced onion, some sugar,

 I need to turn this into fast-food burgers, which are very thin.

 You want to make a fast-food burger, I'll show you how to do it.

 And so you roll this into a ball like about the size of a golf ball.

 Throw this down on your wax paper and then, I love this part, flatten it.

 You want to flatten it and then take your fingers and tap in the edges.

 And as you go around and you'll get a sort of round, somewhat manufactured looking, very

 Now, take another piece of wax paper, pop it over the top, flatten a little more, spank

 You can use a flat griddle, whatever, saute pan, whatever you got that'll fit two burgers

 Take off all the wax paper and then add a little salt on each one and a little bit of

 We're going to put a slice of cheese on the middle bun and two pickle slices on the bottom

It is a very popular drink and enjoyed everywhere in Russia, in Ukraine and all the

So I used to drink it a lot and I thought I'll share this recipe with you

 any dark black bread, sugar, yeast, a lot of water and a plastic bottle where we are

You can do it on a toaster or on a pan until it's nice and a little bit burnt.

 When your water starts to boil we are going to turn off the heat completely.

 We are going to cover it with a lid and leave it for 8 hours or overnight.

Now the mixture is nice and brown so we are going to get rid of the

Ok, so it's been 6 hours and you can see the raisins are floating.

 in there overnight and you can see the colour is nice and dark and this is the colour you

 Sweetness comes from the raisins and the sugar and you do get that bready taste but it's

I like it cold and on a hot summer day it's a perfect drink to enjoy.

 Hello folks healthy cooking is simple with this very handy gift

 help your friends cook healthy by helping them take control of their eating and

 and healthy lifestyle means taking control of the quality of your food and the amount that is eaten and still have a

 Fantastic taste take out food fast food prepackaged and ready-to-eat foods all contribute to a lack of control

 Typically they have higher levels of salts and fats you have no choice about their ingredients

 You could eat the same food at home and leave out things that you should not

 You are more likely to eat healthy foods when you do the preparation yourself and with a handy tater quick

 You can cook a meal quicker than you can drive to the restaurant start microwaving with the right amount of food with

 You won't waste any food because you'll be cooking the right amount in the tater

 The microwave with a tater quick enhances flavors by cooking most vegetables without water which drains food of its flavor

 You need eat vegetables and fresh vegetables and a tater quick cooks them wonderfully and makes frozen vegetables seem almost fresh

 The tater quick is basically a steamer when microwaving fresh vegetables

 Why tater quick you microwave faster when holding food vertically when you hold the food vertical up and down

 It makes the food cook more even and doesn't damage doesn't overcook any portion of it.

 Microwaving in a tater quick because it's exposed to heat at less time

 So less nutrient draining heat for a shorter period of time and this will be true of almost all foods

 You eat more vegetables because they're cooked and stored easier you put in your vegetable

 Into the refrigerator the next day back out of the microwave and back to the table

 You're not washing pots and pans and wasting a lot of hot water and the tater quick ceramic

 You don't dry it out like you do in a pan on the stove and when you get done the grease is in the bottom

 It works the same way with bratwurst wieners leftover hamburgers leftover steaks and leftover pizza

 Cut your cooking cost immensely by using your microwave tater quick for almost all your cooking in this day and age

 Where time cost of food and the cost of energy is so important you need a way to help

 And you can even cook two kinds of foods at the same time in the two separate cabins

 And you can cook the right amount and it'll have a better taste

 Tater quick is your answer to quick easy cooking or healthy living

 Look at our other videos on YouTube and you might want to go to our website

 Cookware specialist.com and you can order several today on the website.

 This video is a short introduction to the structure of this side of the standard accordion.

 My name is Bill, and I'm the creator of accordion flashcards, a learning tool for the accordion.

 This structure is called the stradella bass system, and it's an incredible layout.

 Approximately in the middle of your keyboard is a button with a mark on it, and this is

 Every button in this vertical row is a single note called a fundamental bass.

 Each fundamental bass is a fifth in the scale above the one below it.

 In other words, the fifth note in the C scale is G, and that's the button above C.

 The fifth note in the G scale is D, and that's the button above G.

 The fifth note in the D scale is A, and that's the one above G, etc.

 The fifth note in the C scale is G, and that's the button above C.

 If you don't know your scales, you can always count seven half steps up to find the next

 That's the button above C. Seven half steps above G, one, two, three, four, five, six,

 In written music, the notes in this row, the fundamental basses, are shown in the bass

 So this would be fundamental bass C. And as you can see on this flash card, it's located

 Only the notes are either one line or one space lower than the treble.

 Some people remember, good boys do fine always for the lines on the bass clef.

 The third vertical are all the major chords of the corresponding basses.

 So for example, here was our C fundamental bass, and in a diagonal right underneath it

 Major chords are the first, third, and fifth notes in the scale played simultaneously.

 In written form, all chords have the stem going down, and in the case of the major chord,

 The minor chord is also the first, third, and fifth, but the third is flatted or lowered

 In written form, the chords have their stems going down, and in the case of the minor chord,

 The first row was our fundamental bass, then our major chord, then our minor chord, and

 The seventh chord has the first and third notes in the scale, as well as the seventh

 In written form, these have a seven above the root note, and the stem is down.

 The last vertical column is the diminished chords, the ones farthest away from the bellows.

 In written form, these have a lowercase d, or sometimes a d i, above the note, and the

 The vertical row nearest the bellows is called the counterbasses.

 These are a major third, or two whole steps, above the fundamental bass behind it.

 It's also the third note in the scale named for the fundamental bass.

 For example, for the C fundamental bass, the third note in the C scale is E. For the G

 fundamental bass, the third note is B. In written form, the counterbasses have a small

 C fundamental bass, C major chord, C minor chord, C seventh, C diminished, and the counterbass

 The number of buttons is 20 rows times 6, or 120 on a standard full-size instrument.

 You don't really need more than 72 in order to play all the bass notes and corresponding

 chords, but using 72 basses, however, is actually more demanding, since you'd have to do unnecessarily

 So the full-sized 120 bass accordion is actually easier to play, because some of the tones

 B flat near the middle is actually the same as A sharp at the top, for example.

 Most students begin by learning the C, F, and G columns, then they add the B flat and

 Some students find flashcards helpful as a learning tool, and I created these accordion

 flashcards to help me learn to quickly read and play the notes and chords.

 My daughter loves to help me practice my cards, and then we practice her math facts with flashcards

 The usual practice is to look at the card, say the name of the bass, in this case fundamental

 The card sets also include some general knowledge questions, which can be practiced without

 I hope this has been a useful introduction to the accordion basses.

 Okay, what we're going to do now is, guys, we have to eat some barbecue.

 Again, part of this class is tasting, feeling, getting what it tastes like.

 Okay, the first thing I'm going to do on the baby backs is we're going to make some Kansas City sticky ribs.

 If I see that they're lighter than this, that usually means they've been cooked without, A, enough wood,

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to make these a traditional Kansas City sticky rib.

 The way I manage a rib is I'll lift it up, and I'll start to see how it comes off the bone right here.

 When it starts breaking the meat off the bone, these are ready to go.

 I want to be able to bite and pull the meat off the bone and have a clean bone by the time we're done with this.

 So the first thing I'm going to do, now this is exactly what I did for competition.

 But these are basically a traditional Kansas City sticky ribs, and these won a lot.

 Now notice I don't use a lot because we're building that profile.

 We're not going to have a heavy butter flavor, but we want a zing of butter.

 Now the next ones we're going to do on our spare, we're going to do them dry.

 So when we're looking for the rib, that's what we're looking for.

 When we talk about the anatomy of a rib, see the smoke ring on the bottom, smoke ring on the top, the bar.

 did a similar video before, but in this video I will use a different technique of cutting

 I like to cut a little bit the corners, this will make the filing easier.

 Here I apply the first layer of gel, which is very thin, it's like applying a nail polish.

 If you touch the skin make sure that you clean it before curing the gel.

 Next I take a thicker layer of gel and I apply it and I first apply it near the cuticles

 I do circular movements, this will help me get rid of the bubbles that the gel has.

 Next I just go with the file and make sure that the nail is straight and that it has

 As you can see I still need to do a little bit of cleaning before I apply the nail polish,

 but anyway I hope you liked this video and I hope it was helpful.

 for some of the products that I used in the info section below this video.

 One was your typical asado with this indoor grill where it just cooked copious amounts

 of meat and ate more meat in three days than I think I've eaten in any other three days

 You know, the Argentinian food is kind of primitive in the way they cook it.

 You have to be patient and wait sometimes for more than an hour.

 In the case of a lamb, it has to be almost two, three or four hours.

 Sam's head, they chop the head off, but then they skin it, sprawl it out, you know, hack

 it up, sprawl it out and basically crucify it over an open fire.

 But they slow cook it for about three hours and I don't think you can mimic that sort

 of flavor by doing anything other than how they cook a lamb here.

 I don't think there's no way you can capture the taste of this on film.

 Yeah, I'll definitely be crucifying some meat over some fires when I go back to the United States.

 If you invite somebody over to a barbecue in the States and you have a sheep crucified on a cross hanging over a fire,

 But once they taste the meat, they'll know it was all worth it.

 Hey everyone, it's Michael from Lean Body Lifestyle and we're back today in the kitchen

 with another recipe video and what we're going to do is make some grilled chicken quesadillas

 So this is just another creative way for you guys to use your George Foreman at home.

 Let's say you're bored of just having the same grilled chicken, definitely try this

 one out and keep in mind if you don't have a George Foreman grill, you can easily make

 It doesn't really matter but I hope you guys enjoy this video and let's go ahead and get

 So what I have right here in this bowl is about 3 ounces of pre-cooked frozen chicken.

 So since it's already frozen and fully cooked, all that we really have to do is warm it up

 So what we'll do is just take our frozen chicken and set that on the grill and then we'll close

 So what we're going to do is just put that in a separate bowl just for a couple minutes.

 So here what I have is some Fiesta lime seasoning but really you could use whatever you would

 like and we're just going to sprinkle some of that on top of our chicken.

 Now what I have right here is one whole wheat tortilla and what we're going to do is set

 that on the George Foreman grill and then we're going to add our chicken but only to

 Then we'll sprinkle about a quarter of a cup of fat-free cheddar cheese on top of our chicken.

 Now if you don't have fat-free, you can use low-fat but it will change the nutritional

 Then we'll add 2 tablespoons of chopped onion and around 1 tablespoon of chopped red pepper.

 And for some extra flavoring, what I'm going to do is take a bit of lemon and squeeze the

 So what we'll do now is fold our tortilla in half and we'll close the lid and we'll

 And now a few minutes later, our chicken quesadilla is fully cooked so we'll put that on a plate

 and if you wanted to cut it in half, the best way to do that is to use a pizza cutter.

 And here's a better view of the final product for you guys to see at home.

 We have our chicken quesadilla with the onions and the peppers and the cheese and these are

 really going to taste great considering they only took around 10 minutes to make.

 Now since you guys are always supporting these videos, I figured I would give back a little

 So if you want to win a Lean Body Lifestyle t-shirt, it's really simple.

 All you have to do is like the video and then let me know down below in the comments if

 I want to start to bring some more variety to the channel but I want to get your guys'

 And as always, if you want to stop by Facebook or Twitter, the links are down below in the

 You guys can follow me there at Lean Body Lifestyle, just the same as my channel name.

 But I hope you guys enjoyed this video and I'll talk to you next time.

 Hey guys, it's Drew and today I'm going to show you how to DIY embossed metal.

 a video the other day where I thought they were going to show how to do that, but it

 turned out they were just using an embossing machine and those can be pretty expensive

 and I don't have that kind of money to spend, so I figured out a way to do it for much cheaper

 off the top, cut off the bottom, and then made it a flat sheet.

 going to need a knitting needle or something with a dull point that you can use to emboss,

 point was small enough to get into small places when I needed it.

 you want to, a pair of scissors that won't get ruined by metal.

 on hand, just various shapes that I thought I might want to use.

And any shapes, I mean you can freehand it, but I just wanted those stencils

 and I had them all on me because I didn't know, I didn't plan the design ahead of time,

 side so that I would be able to see the marks, but you're not going to see them in the end

But you need to be careful when you're embossing, you need to do it on

 it over and I'll start writing on the Coca-Cola printed side so that the silver side is what

 will be embossed later because I recorded a whole video with that and I realized I did

 it on the wrong side and I had to start all over and I was really disappointed in myself.

 Okay so you're going to begin, you also need some foam underneath.

 surface it's not going to emboss so you need to have something underneath it.

 was just starting to trace some shapes, you don't need to do it too hard because you're

 going to go back with the knitting needle, this is just kind of like a pencil sketching.

 So now I go back with the knitting needle and I'm just pressing as hard as I can, going

 over it a couple times because you really want it to show and don't worry if it looks

 a little messy because you're not going to see it on the other side, that's why it gets

And just do whatever shapes you want if you want to plan ahead or just

 and that's wrong and I realized my mistake so I flipped it over and I did that again.

 So I'm just using various designs and just drawing on the metal using some free hand

But it doesn't matter, nobody's going to know what your intention was, it'll

I messed up a couple times but it still looks really neat in the

 I'm going to start doing some dots and this took a long time because you have to use a

 lot of pressure and my hand started to hurt and I'm a very slow dotter so it was kind

 of painful to sit there and forcefully poke dots into a sheet of metal.

 it onto paper and I covered the paper with some tissue paper to give it a nice color

 and I let it dry in a book for 24 hours because the metal does have a tendency to bend because

 you've carved all these lines into it so you need to make sure that wherever you let it

 dry it's under a lot of pressure and that's how you know it'll dry nice and flat and then

 you can see all the nice texture and this is the first one I did.

 white with a nice purple background and you can't really see because of the video but

 it's got a nice texture and so I hope you guys enjoy this video.

 Hi, I'm going to look at Echo Beach by Martha and the Muffins which is a great song.

 of the G, 4th fret of the G, 5th fret of the D and back to open A. And then 7th fret of

 the G and then you immediately want to play the 5th fret on the A so that we get this

 I don't think you need me to go through, I'll very very quickly go through the chords that

 And then for the chorus it goes A minor, D, D, then C. And that then is A minor, D,

 Today we will be installing an XM Direct 2 kit for an Alpine aftermarket head unit.

 In this vehicle we will start at the bottom and work our way up, disconnecting power and

 We are using a nylon tool to remove the bezel, which surrounds the radio, working our way

 around until the trim comes loose, being careful not to apply too much pressure in

 Then we disconnect the climate control and any other connections and set the trim aside.

 This makes it easy to unscrew, then slide the head unit out enough to expose the power

 Using a special clip, we tap directly into the switch 12 volt power source as well as

 These connectors crimp on easily without cutting or slicing into the factory harness.

 Now we connect the 34 pin cable to the programmable interface and secure it in the open dash cavity.

 After connecting the Alpine specific cables, we are ready to mount the mini tuner.

 This sedan has a convenient pocket below the radio where we will mount the mini tuner.

 We route the antenna and interface cable directly out the back of the pocket and then carefully

 We insert the tuner chip for a quick check to make sure everything is functioning as

 Once we verify that we are operational, we fasten the mini tuner dock into the pocket

 Everything looks good, so we begin to reassemble in reverse order.

 Once the radio is secure, we make our climate control connections and carefully snap the

 Snap the mini tuner into the dock one last time and our installation is complete.

 The tools we used were a Phillips screwdriver, a nylon trim panel tool, and a pair of pliers.

 Hey guys today I'm going to be showing you how to do a cartwheel and also how to do a

 half ken flip but my friend is also going to show you guys how to do a light house.

 To do this trick you're going to have to have your finger placement.

 You're going to have all your fingers on the other side and then your thumb right here.

 Right when the ball leaves the kendama you're going to flip your thumb to make it do a flip

 and then you're going to want to spot the ball and have it come down.

 And you want to kind of do the flip a little bit slower so you can actually see the catch

 It's Christian and today I'm going to be showing you how to do a light house with a kendama.

 So what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to hold the ball like this.

 And holding it, well I have a stripe on my ball but so you're going to want to hold it

 And then you're going to want to have the kendama really still.

 And since I'm left handed and the kendama sits like this and it doesn't sit straight

 So big cups facing me because when it throws up it's going to come up just perfect.

 Oh yeah so when you throw it up you want to make sure that you absorb and bend your knees

 So you want to make sure that when you bring it up you only bring it up half way and then

 But make sure you don't pull it out because that will mess it up and it will look like

 So the half ken flip I'm assuming you guys have probably seen people do it.

 So a ken flip is where you do like a cartwheel but it's not sideways it's just like a flip

 But the half ken flip is where you do a half flip and land like that.

 So when you do the half ken flip you're going to want to have your thumb placement just

 So you're going to have all your fingers like this on the bottom but then your thumb right

 And you're going to have it set up and you're just going to flick your thumb.

 But to learn this flip movement you're going to want to wind up your ball like this so

 And you're just going to want to practice throwing it up and catching it.

 Just throw it up and just practice catching it right on the cup.

 And same with the lighthouse you're going to want to absorb it.

 So I'm going to show you what it looks like when it's all put together.

 It's actually personal preference if you start on the big cup and land on the small

 So you get it up on the small cup and you get that going right there and you just catch

 Setting up a Hyperlite Mountain Gear Ultimid is a very simple and quick process.

 I prefer stuffing the mid in its storage shack over folding it.

 Once removed, I zip the entrance completely closed, then find four large rocks that I

 place in a perfect square, along with four smaller rocks that I use to attach the guidelines

 The larger rocks are then placed on the inside of the smaller rocks over the guidelines.

 The guidelines can be either attached as a loop, wrapped around the rock, or tied on

 Once I have the four corners initially secured, I then go around and ensure that it is in

 With the HMB Ultimids, a standard trekking pole is not long enough for the center pole,

 I prefer adjustable poles so I can fine tune the correct height once inside the mid.

 This is raw goat milk that was quick chilled and been in the fridge since last night.

 It will be hours before this is done, but for you it will be pretty quick.

 Alright, cups are getting warmed up in there at just a low temp.

 I used 5 heaping tablespoons worth of the goat yogurt starter for this.

 Shouldn't run the dishwasher if it's going to cause any motion on the counter.

 Now if you were using store bought milk, you do need to heat it.

 I don't want to kill it off and then reintroduce just the yogurt culture.

 When I was making it with cow's milk, I would even add powder milk to make it creamy.

 much you guys love these kind of videos so I wanted to do one especially for you

 this and give this video a thumbs up if you do and don't forget to subscribe and

 thing you want to do is even out your complexion and I'm using this L'Oreal

 True Match foundation and I listened to you guys and I found my right shade.

 So I'm trying out this Maybelline Fit Me concealer and I'm going to show you

 So now you want to blend all of these areas out and I'm using this brush from

 the Sedona Lace and now I'm just going to do my brows using Prestige brow

 sculpt them out a bit I'm going to use that same Maybelline concealer and a

 So now I'm just going to take my first color from my lid and this is just

 Maybelline's Fierce and Tangy color tattoo and I'm going to spread this all

 I'm going to take this brown color and I'm going to pack it onto my lid.

 Just do tapping motions and get it nice and close to that lash line.

 want to blend out the edges using a nice fluffy brush and this is by Sigma.

 And I'm going to go back over that and I'm going to pack on some more because

 I want this brown to be nice and rich and I'm going to do the same thing and

 I'm going to pack this onto the inner corners of my eyelids using my pinky

 And now I'm going to take this top color and I'm going to use this as a brow highlight and I'm also

 going to apply this in the inner corners of my eyes but closest to my bridge of my nose.

 Now taking this Milani pencil I'm going to rim my top and lower waterline.

 Now you want to apply this wonderful, wonderful mascara and this is Revlon's Lash Potion by Grow Luscious.

 So now I'm just going to set all those areas I applied that concealer and I'm using Ben Nye's Banana Powder.

 And you can find this at Ricki's or you can order it online and I'll have a link on my blog.

 Now I'm just going to use this bronzer but first I'm going to sweep that powder off of my nose and I'm going to leave it in the other areas as a guideline for where I want to apply my bronzer.

 This bronzer is Revlon's Photo Ready Bronzer and it's absolutely gorgeous.

 A lot of bronzers don't show up on my skin, especially from the drugstore and this works amazing.

I absolutely love this and this is Luminoso and I'm going to use it as a blush highlight.

 And I'm showing you this one and this one is great if you're a lot darker than me.

 So now I'm going to move on to my lips and I'm using Prestige Lip Liner in Poppy and this is a gorgeous orange.

 And I'm going to top it off with an orange lipstick by L'Oreal and it's number 177.

 So you want to fill your entire lip in with that lip pencil and this is going to be great for wear off.

 So as your lipstick starts to wear off, you'll still have that layer of lip liner under.

 Thank you guys so much for watching and please please continue to vote for me on Allure.

 Hello and welcome to our series of how-to videos for our DIY picture framing products.

 Whether you're just learning to frame or you've actually been framing for a while and want

 to take it to a home-based business, this series of videos will help you all the way

 Most professional framers have a way of mounting down their artwork rather than just hinging

 the bag, and that gives us a beautiful, clean, flat surface to work with.

 What we've created here is a bag that you can actually fold up, put away in a cupboard,

 So whether it's prints, posters, or photographs, it's now easy to get that professional result.

 All we do is take our cone shape here, plug it into the vacuum cleaner, curl over the

 The great thing about using a vac bag is the cost-effective method of sticking down

 One is we've got our self-adhesive boards, which all we're doing is peeling back that

 first layer, putting our image down like this, and then peeling back, rubbing gently,

 and then using our release paper back over the top, either on a 5mm, 10mm, or here we

 The other way of doing it is onto a hardboard or an MDF, and we have two options there.

 We can use a spray heater and spray the back of the print, putting that down, and then

 What we do there is roll the back of the print, put that onto here, slide it in.

 We would cover that with a bit of paper because we're going to have maybe some exposed parts

 So with our first option, what we do is cover that over into our bag.

 That's going to take out all the bubbles in here and tear that down.

 So what we've got here is a pyramid map, and all the air is being sucked out through this

 We like having a lovely image with our hands, so we'll get another fingerprint on it, and

 we'll just leave that in there, and we'll suck it down nice and firm.

 It allows you to get that professional result using either a self-adhesive board or a spray

 It allows you to get any poster print and get it nice and flat without any bubbles.

 And best of all, what you can do once you're done is simply fold it up and store it in

 You can either work on your kitchen table, this is a plastic surface, it's not going

 So if you want a professional result with sticking down posters, prints, try our vacuum bag.

 Hey guys, today I'm going to be making this video about how to make your back more flexible.

 Now I'm even trying to make mine more flexible, like, for a chair and stuff.

 This is for IngridRSG, and I also got another request from another person of how to do the

 It's like, you take your legs and you put them in the yoga pose, which I can't even

 Like it's flexible like that and like backward, but not like that.

 So before you start bending or anything, you need to stretch your wrists.

 So just take them like this and put them on the ground, and sway back and forth.

 And then face them to where, like, like this, and sway, point your fingertips outward, and

 Okay, and then you need to stretch your arms really good, because if you don't stretch

 your arms, then whenever you go into a backbend or anything, it's going to hurt because your

 Alright, now, so there's two different types of like backbend type things.

 The first one is usually just called a bridge, and you lay on your back or stand up, either

 one you can do, and you do that, and then just prop yourself up and sway your shoulders

 And here they make us do it with straight legs, like that, so just try doing that, and

 try getting your head as far between your shoulders as you can, and that'll help you

 work on your shoulder flexibility, which you need for like scorpion and stuff.

 And then the second type of back flexibility bridge thing is you lay on your stomach, and

 you like bend backward, try to touch your feet, I'm not trying right now because my

 And every day it'll be different, like if you warm up and stretch a lot beforehand,

 of course you'll be able to stretch further because your muscles are warmed up, and they'll

 Okay, and, oh, what I do for cheerleading, girls who are in cheer or just want to learn

 how to do the scorpion, by the way the scorpion is, here you can see me, okay, it's like you

 take your leg and bring it up, like that, I'm not holding it today, and um, yeah, so

 you just, you can like get on your knee like this, see, like you're gonna go into the splits,

 but you don't, you just like, like that, and then this also needs a lot of back flexibility,

 um, so not just legs, and bend backward, so you can touch your foot.

 And um, it's not just like your spine, you also need to be able to stretch like the side,

 so just point your toes out, and try to go as far to the middle as you can, um, to the

 side, to the side, but also try to like touch this leg, and then bring your arm over, and

 that really stretches your side right here, other side, okay, and um, also stretch your

 hips, I think this will help for the lotus, bound lotus thing, like, I'm sorry, I just

 couldn't, it was so hard, and oh, and the bound lotus, you like put your feet like that,

 and then like put your arms over here, it's really good, look it up, it's really good,

 um, yeah, my hips aren't flexible, see, I can't even get them flat on the ground, ah,

 it's hard, okay, now, for like standing and stuff, my voice, something's wrong with it,

 okay, and just like bend and touch your toes, if you can't touch your toes, just like try,

 and eventually you'll get there, okay, so just squeeze as hard as you can, and then let go,

 try to hold it for 30 seconds though, and then, you know, cause some people can like do this,

 and just like go like all the way through, but I can't, it's mostly my legs though, cause my

 back's not that hard, and then maybe you'll be able to do like weird stuff, like in a bridge,

 um, yeah, hopefully, um, I'll have to cut it off here probably, because, um, I don't have that

 many minutes saved up, so, thanks for watching, please subscribe and comment if you have any

 questions or requests, and hopefully, um, I answered your questions, thank you, and, um,

 I'm not ending right now, I just did that because I might have to, okay, so, you can also try to

 get your back more flexible by going into a bridge and walking your hands as close to your

 feet as possible, or even like lay your forearms down on the ground, I'll show you,

 alright, and that's the end of the bridge video, I didn't stretch this morning, my back hurts,

 All you're going to need today for the workout is a heavy weight and if you

 want you can just get rid of it all together because we're only going to use

 stomach, stacking one hand on top of the other and bringing those legs together.

 directly behind just one of your knees and pull your toe towards your glute.

 Feel free to rest your head down onto your forearms if you'd like.

 all we're going to do just to warm up is lift your quad off the ground and then

 close to your glute to really activate the hamstring and right underneath your

 here for just about 30 seconds and then at the end tiny little pulses up.

Seven, six, five, four, three, two, squeeze and hold the top for a final

 head down, just lifting the glute off the floor and gently lower.

 you're holding that weight you want to keep a good grip so you don't let it

So now that we're all warmed up we're going to get rid of our weight.

 Plant your hands on the floor and take it to your all fours position.

 in your tabletop and we're going to get started with our left side.

 pulling that toe close to your body, lifting it up just like we were on the

 Slightly different angle, pushing your heel towards the ceiling for just eight

From here all you're going to do, pull that leg back in, bring your

 leg and then lift it up to the side so you're about hip height.

 extra challenge, then you're going to kick, pull in, drop down, lift.

You want to feel that hip press down to the floor to create that

 hug that leg in tight, bring it down to your left arm, right palm on the floor.

You're gonna hold it out right here, kick that leg out, pulse it up for eight,

 deep breath in, separate those knees wider than your chest, and slowly round to the top.

 sure you stretch and hydrate, and thank you so much for joining us.

 Hi everyone, welcome to Spicy Kitchen, the place where you can learn how to make simple,

 And today I am going to show you how to make Egg Curry, Kerala Style.

 Chili paste, Turmeric powder, Garam Masala powder, Pepper powder, Eggs, 2 Onions, Tomatoes

 Add oil to your wok, let the oil be hot enough and then please add the onions, followed by

 Then once the onions are translucent, you may add turmeric powder, pepper powder, chili

 After the masala mix is added, stir well, make sure that the rawness of all the masala

 Cook the tomatoes for few minutes and once they are ready, you may pour 1 or 2 cups of

 water to the above mixture so that all the ingredients will get cooked easily and this

 You need to remove the shell, cut each egg into 2 pieces and then all those sliced eggs

 Make sure to flip over the egg so that the gravy gets into the egg and that increases

 At this point, keep the flame low to medium and then let the gravy thicken and once it

 reaches required consistency for you, you may transfer it into a bowl.

 So friends, I hope you have enjoyed the show and I am sure you all will try the spicy egg

 Please do let me know about your experiences in trying that and please do rate and subscribe

 This fourth course is a kind of fun twist on scallops and bacon, but instead of scallops,

 We're even going to sear the turnips so that they look like the same thing.

 You might not know you can sear turnips, but they turn out crisp and tender just after

 First, I want to start with some bacon, which we got at Formaggio.

 Want to make sure that you get big slices so you can chop them up in these nice little

 I already chopped up some and I actually have some sizzling away and getting golden brown

 So let me just save these for the next round and check on how these are doing.

 We did cook the bacon and then we're going to cook the turnips in the same pan.

 It'll have that bacon smoky flavor throughout the turnip, which I think is a nice compliment

 Let's get the heat up nice and high so we can sear our turnips.

 They're really pretty and they're about the same size as a scallop, which I thought would

 Here I'm just going to toss them with some olive oil and salt and pepper, which will

 I'm going to place these down so that they're not on top of each other.

 I'm always looking for trying out vegetables in new and interesting ways because, hey,

 I bet a lot of people will be turned on to the vegetable after this.

 I'm not going to touch them after I did that initial placement because I do want them to

 The reason it still sears even though it's a nonstick surface is that it's PFOA free.

 It keeps the moisture in the turnip and it's going to brown and caramelize at the bottom,

 unlike you'll see in a lot of chemically treated nonstick surfaces.

 Even though we do have a lot of bacon fat in this pan, I'm using that for flavor rather

 than kneading it to flip the turnips because this is a great surface and they would just

 I'm going to let this cook for another minute to brown the other sides.

 You got the spiciness, a little bit of bitterness in the turnip, and of course, the smoky saltiness

 I'm going to try to go for a fancy restaurant style presentation here.

 I bet most people couldn't even tell what they are, but they are going to be delicious.

 We're going to add some bacon lardons around for crunch, a little bit of nice color.

 Last but not least, I wanted to give it a nice fluffy microgreen topping.

 Not too much, but we did get these great microgreens from the market yesterday.

 They're great and fresh, and it's going to taste lovely all together.

 Hi, I'm Mike Chapter, one of the chef instructors here at the Wooden Spoon in Andersonville.

 Today I'm going to show you how to get more fish in your diet with our recipe for stove

 So I'm really excited to show you this recipe for stove top smoked salmon.

 If you ever tried to make anything outside on the grill or in a smoker with wood chips,

 it can get a little bit messy, it's a little difficult, you have to buy the chips and soak

 So let me tell you a little bit about the stove top smoker and what comes with it.

 After you take the lid off, inside there are a few different pieces.

 You have a rack that the food sits on, you have a tray that catches any of the drips

 and juices, and then the bottom of the pan that sits right onto the stove top.

 You can get a wide variety of different wood chips and most smokers are going to come with

 So this is alder wood, there's cherry, there's oak, there's walnut.

 And you want to put that right in the center of the smoker, right in the middle.

 That sits on top of the tray, or the rack goes on top of that, and then your food sits

 I've got a beautiful piece of salmon here, this is about a pound and a half or so.

 And this still does have the skin on it, you want to keep the skin on because that will

 So place the salmon directly on the rack, and then we're going to add all sorts of great

 So the first thing I'm going to do is squeeze a little bit of lime juice.

 I have a little bit of white wine, again just drizzle that over, just for some flavor.

 And it's also going to create a little bit of moisture, create a little steam, and help

 And then I'm going to make a real simple paste with some mayonnaise and spices.

 I've got a variety of spices, paprika, dill, lemon pepper, garlic, and onion powder.

 Mix that together, and then we're just going to brush that right onto the salmon.

 Just smear that all over the top, get it nice and evenly coated.

 So what's going to happen is I'm going to put it right onto the stove top.

 It's probably going to take about 20 to 25 minutes total, and we'll come back and check

 So I'm just going to take the lid off and take a peek and see how the salmon is doing.

 To get the complete recipe, go to our website at woodenspoonchicago.com.

 We have a wide variety of classes, whether you're an expert cook or just a beginner.

 We also have a really great selection of everything you need for your kitchen.

 So today I have a tutorial on two different Korean common hairstyles.

 The very first one is the fishbone braid and a lot of Korean celebrities do this.

 Suzy from Miss A, she had this hairstyle a lot for her drama Dream High.

 So all you have to do is grab your hair and pull it to one side.

 So with this finger, grab some hair from the back, bring it towards the front and add it

 With this index finger, grab some hair from the back and add it to this stack.

 And you just continuously do that until you reach the bottom of the hair.

 I had this hairstyle a lot while I was at Hawaii for my honeymoon and it was really

 Depending on how loose you want your hair, you can do it lightly.

 And then with your other rubber band, you're going to twirl your hair around.

 And then with this rubber band, you just tie it around like this.

 If you want it looser, you can pull out more hair at the bottom.

 If anything is sticking out like this, you can just tuck it in under the rubber band.

 I hope you enjoyed my tutorial on the two common Korean hairstyles.

 And the hamburger meat has taco seasoning in it too because this is, well, it's called

 It's still a little bit, well, we're just going to let it go a little bit more.

 Okay, so in the middle of this taco ring, usually the Pamper, it's designed by the

 Pamper Jeff people to put like lettuce or olives or whatever you would usually put on top.

 For the most part we keep it plain and then I add tomatoes and sour cream.

 be talking about bananas and also giving you a great banana smoothie recipe.

 when we see bananas like this that are brown and spotted we think it's about time to throw

 them out because they're attracting the fruit flies and it's stinking up my house.

 get rid of them just yet because bananas that are brown and spotted are very precious.

 can either make banana bread out of them or you can freeze them and use them as smoothies

 the bananas is because they're very rich in nutrients and very healthy for us.

 of us know they're very high in potassium making it an excellent source to fight against

Also a diet that's high in potassium and low in sodium helps with arrhythmia

Also bananas are effective in relieving diarrhea in children and also in adults.

 to do is we're going to take the bananas and we're going to peel them so that we can

 put them in a Ziploc baggie and they'll be ready to make nice smoothies once they're

So I'm going to go ahead and put the bananas in my Ziploc baggie.

The good thing about the brown bananas is when you see that they're

So take your two bananas and it's really easy to break them in half.

Next we have two tablespoons of peanut butter or you can use any other

 want to stay away from nuts or nut butters because they tend to be high in calories.

 But if you're looking at a calorie for calorie, nuts are actually less fattening than meat,

 but their oil is composed of mono or polyunsaturated fats which are the good types of fats for

 us and they're easily metabolized and don't tend to be deposited in the body.

 you're using nuts or nut butters just put them in place of other calorie rich foods

So we're going to add our two tablespoons of peanut butter or any other nut butter you

Okay next we're going to take one cup of soy milk or any other milk alternative

You want to make sure that you're having the ground flax seed that

 triglycerides and also slows the growth rate of atherosclerotic plaque which is the hardening

Also helps to lower blood pressure which is great for people who are

It also helps with depression and if you're wanting to help with depression

So this is a great recipe if you're just wanting something light to eat

 because potassium actually helps with the muscles to keep them from cramping up on you.

This week we're doing how-to videos, and I'm going to show you how to make the perfect breakfast sandwich.

 I use Lenders frozen bagels, a Hornell bacon, just original flavor, one large egg,

 butter to cook the egg in, a slice of cheddar cheese, a few slices of a fresh jalapeno, and some cayenne pepper.

 The first thing you want to do is heat up the pan for the bacon.

 I have a cast iron pan, so it takes a little bit to heat up, so you might not have to do this,

 but I just let it get hot a little bit before putting the bacon on.

 Hmm, that's still actually a little bit hard, so I'm going to put it in for another 30 seconds.

 I'm not going to start it yet because I want everything to finish around the same time,

 I'm not the best at cooking bacon, so it's slightly uneven, but it's usually pretty tasty anyways, especially on a sandwich.

 I'm going to call it done, just because I'm afraid it's going to burn.

 I usually pat the bacon just to get any of the grease off of there.

 As always, I put too much butter in here because I'm still used to cooking with a full-size pan.

 So, when the egg is still cooking on this side, that's when I like to add some cayenne pepper.

 I'm going to start toasting the bagel now, since the egg is in.

 I like my eggs over medium, so fried eggs slightly more done than over easy.

 That wasn't the best flip in the world, but I was fearing it going terribly, so I'm satisfied with that.

 A minute of the way the cheese is not quite melted, but melting.

 I hope you enjoyed my video, and I hope you found it informative.

 Hello, my name is Ewa Kwasniewska and with a name like that, obviously I'm Polish.

 I'm going to show you how to cook a Polish national dish called Bigos.

 What you will need are sausages, some bacon, you will need sauerkraut mixed with some fresh

 white cabbage, you will need some onions and when I take you home from the shop and cook

 First of all, I'm going to take an onion, chop it very finely, fry it in a little bit

 And when your onions are softened, add all these ingredients into the pan.

 Then add a packet of your wild mushrooms, which were soaking overnight in liquid and

 Give it a good stir, cover your saucepan with a lid and wait for your Bigos to cook.

 Then I take my non-lead wire, start roughly half way, and wind forward.

 nice thing about the cone is you can kind of hide the lead up inside it.

 And I want my mirabou roughly to be the length of the hook shank.

 This way it gives me a uniform body when I'm adding the chenille.

 On some woolly bugger patterns you would add a piece of wire right here to use as a rib.

 I wind the chenille all the way back to the hook cone, winding away from myself.

 What I like to do is take my fingers and I'll push the thread away and then trim my chenille.

 Then what I like to do is take my thread and wiggle it back and forth as I go down the hook shank.

 What this will do is pretty much make this woolly bugger bullet proof.

 Two to three wraps towards the back just to secure that piece in.

 Then again I go right back down the hook shank just wiggling it back and forth in between the hackle.

 The great thing about a woolly bugger is you can do many different types of knots.

 The great thing about a woolly bugger is you can do many color combinations to get the fly pattern you want.

 means that he uses some of the basic techniques that socks do in terms of

 So if you've always wanted to make socks but you feel like you're not quite ready to tackle them

 But what's nice about them is that it's an introduction for you to reading charts.

 So if you've never done a chart before you're going to get to practice that.

 And of course he's got a really interesting construction and you're going to

 And I always like to have some split ring markers just in case you need to do

 some marking to help yourself keep track of exactly where you are in a pattern.

 So you're going to want to collect all of your materials before you start this.

 And so in this particular pattern we're going to be using a cable cast on

 cast on technique in the pattern sometimes it's worthwhile to practice it

 One of the cast ons that a lot of people do learn right away is the knitted

 cast on where you're doing a technique very similar to knitting

 but adding the stitches onto the needle instead of taking them off.

 Now for the cable cast on technique what you do is you put your needle

 And now you're going to repeat that throughout and you're going to

 And if you get a little bit split up you can always just drop the stitches

I just took it off and then I went back and did it all over again.

And so what's great about this is that you've got two knits and two purls

 another pattern somewhere along the line you can do that as well.

 And it's so great all over his body because he really looks kind of woolly.

 So next time we'll be going on into the body and starting our cable stitch.

 once we're done with our two legs we're actually going to show you how to join the body

 The only thing that's going to take some prep time is chopping up the vegetables.

 Once we get the heat going in the pan, we want to have everything ready because we'll

 There's not a whole lot that really needs to be done to these, although they have a

 Just want to be sure to take off the outer skin because that can be a little tough and

 And lastly, as far as vegetables go, I have a can of baby corn.

 And I have about an inch of fresh ginger that I'm just going to grate.

 If you don't have one of these little graters, you can just chop it really finely.

 If you kind of roll and press on your citrus before cutting it open, it will loosen up

 I want to get that going to be sure it's done when the rest of the food is.

 I'm just going to cut the pork into really thin strips so it will cook fast.

 This recipe also works really, really well with chicken or turkey.

 I haven't tried it with beef, but I imagine that would be good.

 Once the pork is all cut up, I'm going to add a couple of heaping tablespoons of flour.

 Just put my wok over high heat, and I'm going to add a couple of tablespoons of olive oil.

 My oil has gotten really hot, so it's time to throw in the meat.

 Since the meat is cut pretty thin, it's not going to take long at all to cook.

 As the meat gets done, you want to start taking it out of the pan.

 Now that the meat is done, I'm going to reduce the heat to medium.

 Now that the things have cooled down a little bit, I'm going to add my sister's juice.

 Kind of stir this around, make sure the honey doesn't stick the bottom of the pan.

 Scrape up any brown bits that are left on the bottom of the pan.

 This is also when we want to go ahead and throw in the garlic and ginger.

 We're going to let this simmer for about 10 minutes until it's thickened a little bit.

 Now that the sauce has had a chance to thicken a little bit, it's time to add the meat back in.

 You want to give this a really good stir, make sure everything gets coated with that sauce.

 I'm just going to cover this and check on it pretty frequently.

 Once your vegetables are as cooked as you'd like them to be, you're ready to go.

 Just serve it on top of some rice, and that's a great dinner all week.

 You're gonna need one and a half cups of all-purpose flour, 2 tablespoons of

 sugar, 2 teaspoons of baking powder, 1 teaspoon of baking soda, and 1 1⁄2

 buttermilk and your milk are at room temperature along with your egg.

 First I'm going to go ahead and incorporate the dry ingredients together.

 barely mix in the dry ingredients with your wet ingredients until your dry

 As you can see right here you've got a few little lumps in there.

Now come over here with me and I'll show you how to get the gribble

 When it starts drying out around the edges of the pancake and you see bubbles

 form on the top you'll know that's the time to turn your pancake.

 you can see it's been about two minutes and you can see the edges of the

 pancake how it's dry and have the bubbles have formed here on the top.

 delicious and yummy that light and fluffy buttermilk pancake looks.

 I'm gonna add here and look how nice and fluffy and delicious those turned out.

 I have 1 kg of chicken, 1 chopped onion, 1 cup of yogurt, 1 cup of chopped tomatoes, canned tomatoes,

 1 tbsp of black pepper, 1 tsp of coriander, 1 tsp of ginger powder, 1 tsp of turmeric, salt, 1 tsp of onion seeds, pinch of ajwain, green chilli for garnish, 2 tbsp of chopped ginger and garlic.

 After 30 minutes I added yogurt, turmeric, black pepper, coriander, ginger powder and salt.

 Alright, so we're back with part 3 of Tea Gabrielle's wonderful healthy stuffing.

 And I want to stress to you, when you make the stuffing, it's better that it's a little

 bit on the drier side than the mushy side because if it's mushy, you cannot correct

 If it's a little bit under, a little bit dry, you can always correct it at the last minute.

 So I tasted my stuffing and I decided, oh my, it's got a little more salt than I wanted,

 So I'm going to correct it right now without altering my recipe very much.

 I've also decided that I do want to add a little bit butter for flavor.

 So what I do is I typically take a plate and I use ice cream scoopers.

 The trick is, let me see if I can make more room here, to take it and press, just like

 ice cream almost, press against the pan and make ice cream scoops.

 I will have to taste the stuffing myself to let you know how good it is.

 And so the two packages that I used, I used two packages of the stuffing mix.

 And as you can see, I will tell you exactly how many servings I got out of that.

 So just to make this look pretty, I'm going to put the second one like ice cream, just

 And then I'm just going to, I don't know, what I'm going to, I typically don't have

 that much space, but I'm just going to break these up for right now.

 If I were going to present it, I'll just add some green stuff around it.

 But these have another use that I will share with you as we continue with our holiday recipe.

 And if you follow me, I will lead you to a most wonderful, fantastic Thanksgiving dinner

 Doctors are now recommending two squares of dark chocolate a day.

 It stalls off aging and lowers your risk for many types of diseases.

 Doctors are discovering new health benefits of dark chocolate all the time.

 Now we're going to fill the cup with the organic crushed walnuts.

 loaded with all types of vitamins, omega-3s, and tons of health benefits.

 Now we're going to take a handful of dark organic whole flax seeds

 And they're available at Whole Foods Market in the bin section.

 The next thing we're going to do is we're going to take two pieces of dark chocolate.

 So we're going to take two squares and put them in the microwave

 This is the best commercially available organic honey out there.

 Usually honey is so sticky sweet you have to put it in something.

 So I spoon two teaspoons of honey to keep it around 60 calories.

 So we're going to heat up the honey and the chocolate again for a few more seconds.

 And then we're going to hand mix the two ingredients together with a spoon.

 And have a large glass of mint water or green tea with mint and a piece of fruit first.

 This will be a great snack that will fill you up and satisfy your old sweet tooth.

 So pick the weakest time of the day that you're at your lowest point.

 That you know you're going to give in to something really fattening.

 So it's easy to give up your candy bar when you upgrade to something better.

 I will give you the websites in my detail sections of all the nutritional benefits of all the ingredients we used today.

 Just don't tell anyone you made it in the microwave in one minute.

 Concentrates on training your body to cope using real life body mechanics

 Join Suzanne Andrews, a licensed occupational therapy practitioner,

 as she guides you through routines that treat common medical conditions

 including diabetes, arthritis, obesity, neck and back pains and balance.

 Functional Fitness has made me more flexible and a lot stronger.

 And I think it's just wonderful that I can lay down on the floor

 and get up without any trouble, which I couldn't do for several years.

 Now I want you to do that one because it's really good for your heart.

 You want to put your – make sure your spine is nice and straight

 More information and resources are available at www.healthwiseexercise.com.

 So I had a request from Jessica on how I apply my blush because she mentioned that it looks

 So I'm going to use NYX's Pinky Blush and Purely Cosmetics Stippling Brush which is

 If you have a heavy hand, you can definitely use a stippling brush.

 You can just lightly tap it so you get a little bit of product in there.

 And then you're just going to smile a little bit and by smiling it accentuates your cheek

 When you do the fishy face, it kind of sucks everything in so you don't really see the

 It's more difficult when you have a cake load of color and then you have to minimize it.

 And if it looks too strong, you can definitely get some of your mineral foundation if you

 Then you can just tap a little bit using the stippling brush again and then just slowly

 Or what I do is since I use mineral foundation, I just take the brush that I used when I applied

 I don't know if you guys can see it, but it gives a nice natural look without being too

 The second way I do it is I use the MAC, I think it's the 109 brush and I just again

 And of course you can see there's a lot of product in there so you just kind of want

 And again, do a little smirk and just lightly in circles or up and down.

 I don't know, it's probably hard to tell on camera, but it gives a nice soft natural look

 again without being too overdone or you end up looking like a clown.

 So I hope that helps, if you have any questions, definitely ask me and I'll try to help you

 Okay, I've been asked, how do you test the spark transformer, that's right there, on

 I did one and kind of showed how it worked earlier, but it was not in the furnace.

 Now this is an old Becky burner, and they flip open like this, most of them flip open

 like this anymore, some of them flip to the side and so on, but mostly, well the Beckys

 And so there's a couple of things you've got to know before you start this.

 If you do, this little sensor right here, that's the CAD cell, it's going to probably

 Now remember you're going to have anywhere from 40 seconds to, well some of them are

 90 seconds, none of these CAD cell relays are, but some of the really old ones were

 So you don't have a whole long time to do this, you have to have your screwdriver ready.

 Okay, off it goes, you open it, keep your fingers away from here, and you can see that

 It's long, it goes out to about 3 quarters of an inch, it's got big yellow things on

 Now this will probably show it up a little better, it's kind of fuzzy, but you can see

 Be sure you use a well insulated screwdriver, otherwise you're going to get a shock.

 Start it close, and draw it out, it should draw out to about 3 quarters of an inch.

 Now you can see how that's working really well, so there's nothing wrong with this thing.

 That's another important thing you should be doing while you do this, it's one of the

 things we do often times to test the safety, lift that thing out like that, because then

 If it can't see light, then it's got a safety out, and you've tested it to be sure it works.

 So, it's safety'd out, shut down, after a couple of minutes you can press this button

 Remember, you've got to start it out like that, start it up, flip it over, and then

 The other thing you can do, if you want the CAD cell relay to not see light, you can just

 One more time, reset the safety, being careful not to get too close to the screwdriver, the

 metal part of the screwdriver, and you can check the spark with this thing.

 You can check your spark, make sure it's working normally, in case you have a problem where

 I'm Christine Bruhn, University of California, Department of Food Science and Technology.

 We've been talking about how you can tell if your food has gone bad.

 So freezing is a wonderful way to make your food life more convenient.

 You can put things in there, pull them out without having to go to the grocery store.

 And if you overbuy, you can have things waiting for you in the freezer until you're ready

 If you've had a good deal at your grocery store and you've got a bunch of bread or you're

 stocking up for the summertime, you can buy a number of things, just stick them in the

 It goes from three months to about a year, depending on the product.

 But I guess I would feel comfortable just putting in here in the original bag as long

 Your main problem with bread is it's going to draw moisture, the freezing is going to

 draw moisture out of the product and you're going to see frost accumulating outside.

 But you can freshen it up by just sticking it in the oven for a few minutes, so maybe

 10 or 15 minutes at a 200 or 250 degree oven and it becomes more fresh like.

 If you're going to buy frozen foods, it's the best way to stock up on your fruits and

 Buy products that are already frozen, such as frozen vegetables, corn, peas, green beans,

 Don't choose the vegetables and just chop them up and put them in a container like this.

 Vegetables has enzymes and the enzymes will slowly act while they are in the freezer and

 These Brussels sprouts are going to probably taste like hay by the time they're eaten.

 If you've got a lot of vegetables, maybe you've got a home garden or again a good buy,

 you blanch them first and that means dropping them for a few seconds, maybe 20 seconds,

 And that destroys the enzyme activity and allows you to freeze these products safely.

 So strawberries, blackberries, blueberries, I would wash them, I'd remove the stem and

 either drop them whole in a bag or you can slice them with sugar, whatever way you're

 going to be using in the future, and they can be frozen just fine.

 In the area of meat and poultry, you really have a higher quality product if you buy it

 It's got a little bit of a sauce, but you can really see the color of the meat there

 In the freezing process, the moisture on the surface is going to be drawn out of the chicken

 And if you have a freezer that is frost-free, this action will take place even more rapidly.

 The way they make it frost-free is every few days the temperature fluctuates.

 It warms up a little bit, which makes the frost on the outside of the freezer melt,

 So with the frost on the outside, they're always melting that frost, which isn't convenient

 for you, but they are also zipping out moisture from the frozen products every time it fluctuates.

 So longer shelf life and better quality, if you have maybe a chest freezer, then you have

 to defrost yourself because it will maintain that cold, cold temperature uniformly for

 a longer period of time and that keeps the quality of your product longer.

 Use it within, oh, three to five months, something like that, for better quality.

 But even better if you have a heavier plastic that has been shaped to the product.

 No spots for the moisture to come up, as opposed to this very lightweight little bag that's

 And you see all the moisture coming up and that's going to have a dry surface.

 So it's not going to be as high a quality as this commercial product.

 And here with the meat package, I guess the worst thing you can do is just stick the meat

 The product is going to lose moisture right away and that white chalky appearance of the

 dried out flesh, that's called freezer burn and it's dry and not as pleasant.

 Drop them in soup or put them in some sort of sauce so that the moisture from the sauce

 Equip yourself with heavy duty plastic, heavy duty freezer bags, or you can also use aluminum

 foil and make it tight and close to the product so you're minimizing any opportunity for the

 moisture to come in and move away from the product into the packaging.

 It's convenient whether we have a lot of our own food that we are storing or whether we

 have food we've purchased already that is frozen and we can quickly prepare a meal from

 Just be sure to watch the date and make sure your freezer stays nice and cold and then

 You've got to keep this food cold so when you're defrosting it, don't put it on the

 Defrost it in the refrigerator where it's still cold or defrost it in the microwave

 That way you maintain the safety as well as maintaining the quality.

 Next we're going to talk about the pantry and how can you tell if the food in your pantry

 Today I'll be showing you how to make the crossed hexagon ring.

 Good morning, so this is Ashley I here and I'm about to show you guys how to

 make ginger lemon cinnamon tea guys this only takes like 10 minutes it's an

 awesome thing that I started making every morning let me show you what I was

 drinking and then I was just like all right dude I could definitely make this

 let me show you what I was all right I was drinking this right and I was like

 wow this is good I like this but why not just make my own stuff right so all you

 need is like boom some lemon ooh some ginger and some cinnamon it's so easy

 it's so easy it's so beautiful you make this much about you know two lemons

 couple stalks of ginger it's already peeled guys this is already ready and

 good to go and some cinnamon um I make enough to go in this pot so that should

 be enough to last me about a week all right all right we are on the next step

 next step right um I used to just you know just try to boil the cinnamon in

 the water and chop it up in the pieces and I was just like sorry not cinnamon

 the ginger I used to just try to like chop it up and let it simmer in there

 then I was just like no like I need to actually taste this ginger I need to

 feel the burn right so what I started doing check this out is my ninja is I

 started putting this in my blender boom in my blender actually all of it in my

 blender so what's going in is the cinnamon the ginger and the lemon all in

 the blender and we're just gonna blend this up it's blended you're gonna get

 everything guys let me tell you ginger is good for gas it is good for diabetes

 it is good for skin care and health care not saying that I have any of those

 issues but I just like to be preventative okay there's several other

 health benefits to this and yeah you drink this every morning you'll be

 straight so yeah I put the top on and I'm gonna blend this up in two

 we are on to our next step yeah all right so this is blended it's blended

 it's it's really nice and like there's a lot of stuff in there it looks lovely

 um into the pot that's the next step and let's see okay yeah that looks looks hot

 right there um into the pot I don't like to waste so there's some left back

 I want to get all of it um so I'm gonna go over to my sink and just get like

 some more yeah um okay but anyways I'm gonna get the rest of it just now right

 so all of it's there right I have two of these I pour the water in it's already

 boiling guys the water is like already hot so that's one and the reason why I

 like boil it and then I kind of like let it simmer on the stove again is that I

 just like to let everything just kind of soak in you might not have to boil it

 twice I just like to but all right so basically I'm gonna heat up like one

 more of these pots and then I'm gonna fill the pot up to the top it's a pretty

 good sized pot and it's you know I actually have jars that I put them in

 like full-size jars that I put them in like the jars are about big so it's

 gonna fill a couple of these jars maybe about two jars and a half of this so

 this is this is where it's going at the end right and yeah so I add one more pot

 and I let it simmer put the thing on let it simmer for low let it simmer you know

 get it to a boil let it boil for like five minutes and you're good you get tea

 it's awesome all right we're to boil guys let that just go for like five ten

 minutes um maybe just five and then um let it cool completely and transfer it

 into your jar um you know make sure to get everything out you know you just

 want tea not like tea and everything else um yeah so right it smells delicious

 I know you're gonna love this drink it every morning it's it's beautiful tea

 The first step is to remove the rust using Action Creme Cleanser.

 Now that we've removed the rust from half the barbecue, we need to keep the rust away.

 I'm redoing one of my old recipes because something technical happened with it and I have to take it down.

 It's shrimp paillillo and it's one of the... it's so simple this recipe and so, so good.

And the only thing they have is their tails, but you can take that off when you're eating.

 But they're raw and cleaned and shelled, deveined, the whole bit.

 You know I don't measure people, so just watch and, you know, take it from watching.

 I don't know if I ever told you, but I chop my garlic ahead of time.

I chop like a few heads of garlic and I put them in a Tupperware.

 So you take about, figure, this would be, hmm, a few tablespoons of this would be about, I would say about six or seven cloves of garlic.

I always think I just use it for color like on chicken and everything.

 And that oil and all these spices are going to turn into a lovely, lovely sauce.

 You put it in the oven at 450 for about 10 minutes and then you let it sit on top of the stove for another, about five minutes.

 You just stir it around a bit and you're going to let it sit for another few minutes, another five minutes.

 I always serve it with a little bit of rice and maybe a salad or some vegetable of some kind.

 It's like three minutes to prepare, ten minutes in the oven, ten minutes sitting.

 The Blackberry Pearl you had, you were like Zoolander texting on that thing.

 We'll stir this until the sugar and onion powder dissolves completely.

 it with the flesh of the fish, phasing down so it would absorb the flavor.

Now we're ready to fry the marinated boneless bangus in heated oil.

 You'll know the fish is cooked when its color turns golden brown.

 We now have our fried marinated boneless bangus, the steak flavor.

 And together we're going to guide you through this very famous of ballroom dances, the waltz.

 Just to explain the format of this video, we'll first show you the steps of the music

 Now for the leader steps for the natural spin turn in the waltz.

 We start forwards on the right foot, side with the left foot, and close the right foot

Just like the first three steps of the natural turn in the waltz.

 We then dance backwards onto the left foot, turning the left foot in, and turning strongly,

 We then dance forwards onto the right foot, and side and backwards onto the left foot,

 We then turn to the left, taking the right foot back, side with the left foot, close

 the right foot to the left foot, and change our weight, completing our turn.

 Now let's take a closer look after the first three steps, which comprise our first half

 So see if you can practice that action where you dance backwards onto the left foot, and

 then forwards, rather than sideways, forwards onto that right foot, before you take the

 We start this figure with the first three steps of the right turn.

 So that's left foot back, right foot to the side, and close our feet together.

 Then onto the spin, right foot forward with a pivoting action, left foot back, and then

 Left foot forward, right foot side, and close our feet together.

 For the followers, here's a closer look at Joanna dancing steps 4, 5, and 6 of the spin

 Here you can have a little look, and she'll dance forwards, side, brush, step.

 Notice that the right foot came past the left foot, and did a nice neat brushing action

 So take a look now as we show you these three spinning steps close up.

 Notice where the positions of the feet are relative to each other.

 This is where the ladies are dancing forwards with their right foot, and gentlemen are dancing

 We really hope you found the information and teaching pointers we've given you useful in

 Hi, it's Constance and I am going to do just a little video tutorial on the wrap bracelet

 It is a headband so that you can wear it in your hair like this.

 What I've done is I've folded this bracelet like this so that it's in thirds right at

 But I just kind of move that down a little bit so I have a little bit more room.

 I have this hole that I'm working on right here where I've got the three together.

 So I'm just going to pull this and it's going to flip the outside in.

 And that's going to give you the, that's what's going to hold your braid flat.

 This braid, that's what it's going to end up looking like if you take a little bit more

 Is now you can take this and if you have a wider wrist, then it's going to be, you can

 Actually the first step I'm going to take is I'm going to put this together.

 Now it makes a headband and it's a really cute thing and it's great for short hair and

 So you can wear it in your hair or you can wear it as the bracelet.

 We have Amanda from Produce for Kids and her daughter Mia here to show us how to make some

 Today we'll be making the fruit tartlet with pistachio yogurt and we'll actually also be

 Amanda, if you'd like to put some of the pistachios into the yogurt, we can mix that up.

 This is actually just vanilla yogurt, but you can opt for strawberry yogurt or blueberry

 After you get the yogurt into your tiny graham cracker pre-made crust there, you can have

 the kids go ahead and choose whatever fruits they like and make their own creation.

 Yeah, these are great fruits for summer, but whatever fruits you'd like to use.

 And it saves the kids involved in making their own dessert for the party.

 And what you would do is basically use the wooden skewers and have the kids go nuts and

 Pound cake isn't necessarily a healthier cake than any other cake, but it's all about the

 So we're going to have you make a skewer for us and show us how it's done.

 That is actually just regular Hershey's chocolate sauce from store bought and you can use whatever

 And it's actually all about, again, about the portion of the chocolate.

 And then you can just grab a side of milk for the kids and for us adults we can have

 We also have, if you want to make it a little more fun, we decided to put some beads at

 Hey guys, it's Rosie, and in this video, we're making chicken fried rice.

 have any leftover chicken in that fridge and you just ran out of ideas on what to

 little bit of vegetable oil along with some diced celery and diced yellow onion.

 I'm going to sprinkle in some ground ginger, some garlic powder, and some

 Grab your kitchen utensil, stir those ingredients, and now we're about to add

 leftover rice, that it holds up a lot better than freshly cooked rice for my

 this recipe, just make sure you refrigerate the rice for at least one

 you need the exact measurements, come visit me at my blog, IHeartRecipes.com.

If so, please be sure to give the video a thumbs up, I would really

 not subscribed to my channel, please do so because I would love to keep in touch

 During the second chorus, when he finally ends the chorus, when he comes to D, he doesn't do the Dsus4.

 He's just holding a D, and I notice again live he comes to this D, and I'll show you why.

 When he's at this D up here at the fifth fret, you can hit that fifth note, which will be a

 Then we're going to go to the second fret of the sixth string to three and four.

 So let me do the, um, let's do the chorus all the way through the walk up.

 then they stop and there's acapella, meaning they sing without any, um,

They're just saying, sign said you got to have a membership card to get inside

 if you will, and we're going to bend the ninth fret of the third string up three times.

 Then we're going to slide from two into four and catch on the third string and then catch the third

Then we're going to take five, slide to seven on that second string,

 And then walk down second string, seven, five to the third string at seven.

 Then we're going to take the third string again, slide from two to four and hit three twice.

 Back to four in the third string and then we'll go three, five, three on the second string.

 Then we're going to take the second string at five, slide up to seven, go five, seven, five on the first string.

 At this point, we're going to take seven and at this point we'll take the second string at seven

 catch because we're using our ring finger with the first string.

 then we're going to hit ten twice again and one more time we'll slide it to eight.

Then we're going to take the third string from eight to nine real quickly

We're going to go eight to nine hammer on and we'll catch the tenth fret of the fourth string.

 Then we do that eight hammer on to nine on the third string to ten on four two more times.

 and then hit seven on the second and third string which represents a D chord.

 So I'll show you the whole lead slowly and then we'll do the whole lead slowly.

 and then you're into a real mellow part but it's the same as the verse.

 And then he starts picking it up a little bit with the B minor.

 For the next few moments, free your mind so that you can focus on you.

 In order for your mind to relax, you need to relax your body first.

 As you let go of that stretch, feel the sensation of relaxation come over you.

 Now, move your head slowly to the left and roll back to the right.

 Move your head from the right and roll it slowly around to the left.

 Allow yourself to ease into the warmth of this last stretch and settle into a comfortable position.

 As you settle in, let go of all thoughts other than those thoughts of feeling relaxed.

In this video, you will learn how to cook mussels with cooking wine.

 This will ensure that all the sand and all the dirt is gone from the mussels.

 Now that you've gathered all your ingredients, here's the procedures you need to follow.

 When the shells of the mussels open, you know that it's cooked.

 Now, you have to sprinkle your mussels with fresh parsley and black pepper.

 And if you like the YouTube videos that I make for you guys, please subscribe to my YouTube channel if you haven't already.

 From Think Accessories and also our standby Kevin Beck, product ambassador.

 Hopefully you've seen elsewhere on our YouTube channel the X1 Carbon unboxing that we did.

 And we wanted to show off one of the really great accessories that goes along with it.

 But we saw opportunities to improve on design and to improve on performance.

 So we'll walk through a couple of those improvements that we made as we go through and dig in and unbox.

 We have our driver CD, which, as I understand it, the drivers are required.

So you do have to install drivers, one-time thing, to get all the full functionality of the dock.

 We have our nice handy-dandy, I would say multilingual, but sort of no-lingual, nice pictures.

 I think we're all used to getting furniture with that kind of thing.

 And for those of you who are geeking up to care and perhaps haven't seen one before, you will notice that the A-side connector, I believe this is, is larger than the old USB 2.0 A-side connector.

 We do include in the box one DVI to VGA converter dongle so that if you've got an old VGA-only monitor lying around, you can still use that.

 And then here's your power cable and your very tiny and svelte power supply.

 And worth noting, again, the significance of USB 3.0 versus 2.0 is what, Brandi?

 So one thing I'd want to point out on this, so if you look at it just next to the X1 here, I want to focus on design.

 So part of the visual appeal of this product is that it matches so nicely with the X1 Carbon.

 And when you plug it in, you even get the eye lighting up and illuminating there.

 So you have this no-nonsense professional look that you have across all think pads.

 To cover the techno-gorpy parts of it, you've got, it's all USB 3.0 ports.

 This is the uplink cable that I just showed you to connect it to the system itself.

 So as long as powered in, you can power up your tablet, you can charge any device with this extra port.

 With your phone or your tablet cable connected to that one and it still charges even when the machine is not in the room.

 From a corporate security perspective, last thing I want to point out is we do also have a nice standard, industry standard lock slot here.

 So that your dock doesn't go walking away when you're not at your desk.

 And the last sort of techno-gorpy thing that I just want to go through for those of you who care is if you look at this versus a lot of the other things that are in the industry, you'll notice it's roughly about half as high.

 So we looked at a lot of designs, Brandy's team, usability team, ergonomics team, and if you make it tall, skinny, you've either got a problem where it's prone to tip over or you have to lay it down and it takes up a whole lot of desk space.

 So the team actually came up with a fairly ingenuous way of solving this, which is to take the printed circuit board and actually build it in two parts with a ribbon cable in between them, fold it in half, and put it all into this.

 So you've got something that's reasonably stable and doesn't take up a whole lot of desk space.

 And again, shocking dimensions for those of us who have used the classic sort of snap-in docks, right?

 So you have this great, slim, sleek design here, and it doesn't have the room for docking connectors.

 So you still want to keep your accessories, you still want to get maybe multiple monitors, you have that capability here with this product added on.

 Well, guys, thanks for being with us today, and this is available now on Lenovo.com.

 Hi everyone, it's Deja from CrochetEverAfter.com and right now I'm going to show you how to

 And I'm going to show you different things that you can do with this stitch and what

 So we're going to show you how to work the half double crochet in the front loop only.

 Now when you're looking at your work right now, it almost looks like your V's are facing

 But don't be fooled because that is just the third loop of your half double crochet.

 Your actual V's, if you turn your work, always turn it so that it's facing up, you can see

 So you need to know that to be able to work into the front or back loop.

 If you start working into V's, you're going to have the incorrect part of your stitch

 and it's going to create a funny looking stitch and not what you're going for.

 So to work your front loop, you need to know which one is your front loop.

 And that is the one in front and that is going to be this side.

 The back loop, of course, is the one in back, which is this guy here, the one further from

 So I start at the beginning of my row so you can see how I do this.

 Because I count my chain 2 as my first stitch, I don't have to worry about working into this

 If I was going to not count my chain 2, I would yarn over and I would find my V's if

 I needed to and find my front loop and insert my hook just under that front loop.

 But since I count this as my first half double, I'm going to skip this first stitch and I'm

 So this is a nice open spot to insert your hook, but just make sure that you're not going

 So I'm going to yarn over for a regular half double and then I'm going to insert my hook

 And then I yarn over and pull that up and finish it off by yarning over and pulling

 To be able to do it quickly, you kind of point down and then push up.

 So you point down to get under the loop and then you push up to get in between the 2 loops.

 Because if you push straight back, you're going to catch both loops.

 So if you push up, you can see that you get right under that front loop only.

 You'll get into the rhythm of it, of pushing it through just that front loop.

 But always remember, if you get lost, if you put your work down and you're like, oh, where

 I'm going to finish to the end of the row so you can see what the other side of my work

 So depending on what you're creating, if you're designing your own.

 Because our last stitch was a chain 2, which was the chain 2 at the beginning of this row.

 If I'm not sure I'm at my last stitch, I always count my V's to make sure.

 What you can do, because you don't really see it anyways, is on these last stitches,

 So when you get to half double crochet and above, when you're using your chain stitches

 So as you can see on this side, you get the ridge just from the half double crochet.

 But on this side, you get a nice horizontal line from that back loop that wasn't worked

 So if you're making a garment, working in the front loop makes a lot thinner garment

 than if you were doing half double crochets through both loops.

 And if you could feel this, you would feel that it's a lot thinner because you're only

 So that's good to keep in mind if you're designing yourself and you want to find a

 And if you continue working back and cross, you'll get these horizontal lines through

 the project every other row because your next row, the horizontal line is going to be on

 never been married nor have I ever made homemade baked egg rolls.

 four minutes until the cabbage and the vegetables are cooked down a little bit

 base of our sauce that we're gonna season our pork and our vegetables with.

But it's not that hard and what I like about it is it's a lot healthier than deep fried ones.

So we've got a little bit of pork mixture that's already cooked down.

 Now I should mention those you can pretty much find in any grocery store.

They're usually in the cool like refrigerator section or freezer section.

If someone gave me pork for a present I would love that person forever.

And when we're done we're gonna brush them with a little bit of oil.

But then what I like to do is I take a little bit of this egg mixture.

You wanna rewind the tape because I forget what happened to this.

And then we'd put them in the oven for about 12, 15 minutes until they're nicely golden brown.

You can check out this recipe and as well the Thai pork pizza that we started off with.

 So this is something that will make the picture or the image that you're doing a lot more

 realistic and let's just cut to the chase and I'm going to show you how to do this.

 Now all you got to do is just select out your propeller first of all.

 So I'm going to do this by hitting L, hitting the lasso tool, L on the keyboard, selecting

 that, hitting shift command I to invert the selection and then delete.

 And what I'm going to do is go to my eraser and maybe make that a little bit more feathered,

 So now that you got your propeller here, you can see it's just separate.

 Now the reason why I'm making a copy is because this thing in the middle we're not going to

 blur and we're going to use that later to, so we can keep that part sharp.

 So now go to your top layer and you're just going to blur this.

 So go filter, blur, motion blur and you want to blur this at about 108 pixels for this

 specific image and what I'm doing is turning this to a negative 15 angle just like that.

 I don't want it really straight because the blur looks maybe a little bit weird, but that's

 Then what you want to do is turn down the opacity a little bit, maybe around 50%, 40%.

 So now we have another problem where we don't have any blur coming off this way, which doesn't

 All you're going to do on this layer is go to your brush and paint at 100% opacity with

 All you want to do is just paint one right there and one right there to simulate the

 Go filter, blur, motion blur, except this time you are going to blur straight up and

 I'm going to actually turn this up a little bit more, so it's a little bit more blurred

 One thing you might need to do is sculpt this a little bit because this is looking like

 So you can hit E on the keyboard, go to your eraser tool and just sculpt that a little

 And then you can hit V on the keyboard, which is your cursor, and just sort of bring this

 It just adds a tiny, tiny blur, but it makes everything look a lot more realistic.

 What you're going to do is hit down Option or Alt and just drag what you've already done.

 Hit Command T and just flip this just like that and just put it into place.

 That is why we created this layer down here, which is going to be the middle part.

 So what you want to do is drag this to the top so it's nice and shiny, not covered by

 So I'm just going to go to E on my keyboard and you can just erase right here.

 Now one other thing you're going to need to do here is simulate the blur across the middle

 Okay, so I'm going to back up a little bit and see how that looks and just make a few

 Bring that in a little bit more and turn down the opacity just barely.

 That is how you make a propeller look like it is actually spinning.

 Check out compositeplanet.com for more free tutorials and pro tutorials.

 We are doing competitions and posting a bunch of free content every day.

 So check it out and subscribe to our newsletter to get a free pro tutorial.

 This is 29quickx and today we're going to show you how to make deviled eggs for Easter.

 Alright, so if you want to make deviled eggs, first you need eggs.

 You can use any type of eggs, but today we will be using white eggs.

 So first, you take the eggs and you put them in some cold water.

 Make sure it's cold or else you either burn your hands or you'll mess up the eggs.

 Two dozen means that there's 24 eggs and since we're slicing them in half, that means we'll

 Alright, so now you put all the eggs in and we will be putting them on the stove, the

 And we will be putting these eggs on the stove for about 15 minutes until they look pretty

 Okay, once you have it at a full boil like this, you want to turn the heat down to medium,

 Okay, so after it's been boiling for 15 minutes, first you want to shut off that annoying timer.

 Pour cold water into it so it overflows the hot water or something like that.

 Alright, so after you've let the eggs cool underwater for 10 minutes, you want to take

 the egg, take an egg out, and you put it on a hard surface and you roll it to make sure

 Then take a sharp knife, parental supervision may be required, and cut the egg in half the

 Then you want to scoop out the yellow part, the yolk, and put it in a bowl.

 Alright now that you've separated all the eggs into halves and you've put all the yolks

 So what you're going to do, we use a potato masher just because it's a lot easier to mush

 So you're just going to smush it in a bowl until it gets all mixed.

 Make sure everything is mixed so you don't have any lumps because nobody likes lumps.

 Alright so now that you've mixed it, you're going to put about a spoonful of mayonnaise,

 And you're going to keep mixing until it's all pretty much like a pasty consistency.

 So like this, it's too powdery so we're going to put another spoonful in.

 You don't want to put too much in because you don't want to get it all watery.

 One more spoonful because we used a lot of eggs so we're going to need to use a lot of it.

 But for our eggs, we like to use our secret recipe which is Vidalia onion, sweet onion salad dressing

 But you don't want to put too much in because you don't want to make it watery.

 So once you think it's mixed in pretty well, you're going to take a smaller spoon

 And then you're just going to push it right in just so it goes over the top.

 You don't want to put too much in because you want to save some for the rest.

 And it's very messy so you're going to have to wash your hands.

 And you're just going to keep going until you fill all of them in.

After you've filled up all of the egg yolks into the egg whites,

 the last optional step is to sprinkle a little paprika on some of the egg yolks

 And after that we have a nice plate of deviled eggs for Easter.

 Now grind 1 finely chopped onion, 10 garlic cloves, 1 big piece of ginger, some curry

 leaves, 2 1 1 1 tbsp of red chilli powder, 1 tsp of turmeric powder, salt and 2 tsp of

 chopped ginger, 4 slit green chillies, 2 cup of curd coconut milk, 1 tsp of pepper

After 2 minutes, turn off the flame and add 1 cup of first coconut

 So let me start off by telling you guys what I did with the fish.

 This is just some regular, I don't even remember what fish it was but normally when I'm doing

 steam fish I think the proper fish to use is some red snapper or red snapper is the

 Anyway, what I did before this video, I seasoned, I washed my fish properly with some vinegar

 and I seasoned with some black pepper salt and my special ingredients, I like to use

 a little bit of all-purpose seasonings but it's not a thing that you have to use.

 The traditional Jamaican way is that you season your fish with black pepper and salt and I

 like to put a little pepper as you guys can see on me because my husband loves pepper.

 So I put normally seasonings and give it a little half an hour so the seasoning can soak

 If you are not able to let it soak it's not a big deal but I traditionally like to soak

 I'll be using as you guys see a tomato, I'll be using onion, sweet pepper, of course you

 have to have the Jamaican Scotch bonnet pepper and of course you're going to need salt and

 So I'm going to go ahead and show you guys how to steam the fish.

 Okay guys, so we are now ready to add our seasoning to the pot.

 I have my oil, I have my pot on the stove with some vegetable oil and we're going to

 add the onion, the sweet pepper, the tomato and a little bit of hot Scotch bonnet pepper.

 Okay, so we're going to go ahead and mix it together and what we'll be doing is we'll

 So we're just going to let it fry a little bit and then add a little bit of water.

 So I'm going to let this fry a little bit and come back to you guys when I'm ready to

 Okay guys, so I'm just going ahead and showing you what we'll be eating with the steamed

 As you can see I have my dumplings, potato and I have some green banana in it.

 After having the seasoning fry for a couple of minutes, now I'm ready to add my water.

 I'm going to be adding a generous amount of water, not too much.

 Okay, so I'm going to add that and I like to use a little bit of all-purpose seasoning.

 This is optional guys, you don't have to use it but I prefer just for taste, I prefer to

 use a little bit of all-purpose seasoning which is optional as I said guys.

 So we're going to let this boil a little bit for a couple of minutes and then we're going

 After having the pot boil for a couple of minutes guys, I'm now ready to add my fish

 And then what we're going to do, we're just going to cover the pot and give it about,

 Steamed fish, our green banana, our dumplings and our potatoes.

 Hi guys, today I'm going to be making halal guys chicken and rice.

 Egyptian food cart that specializes in chicken and nero dishes.

I started with a pound of chicken breast and chicken thighs and you can use

Then I added my seasonings which were smoked paprika, onion powder, normal

 paprika, turmeric for color, cayenne for heat, and a little bit of cumin.

The spices in this dish aren't overwhelming but all work together

 browned up the chicken thighs well because I wanted to mimic what's on the food cart.

 This is totally unnecessary but on the food cart stuff stuck out there for a while and

 I know that's not appetizing to everyone but I wanted it to be as similar as possible.

 Then I added my chicken breast back in just to finish cooking them and gave everything

Now this part isn't necessary but I had a bunch of chicken bits and I had half

 an onion left over from the rice I was making and so I used the onions to pick up all the

 in the actual Hawal guys but I thought it added a nice sweetness.

 chicken pieces to my KitchenAid and I used the mixer to shred the chicken.

 chicken back to the pot, toss, take out some of the extra liquid, and I served it on top

 white sauce that they have on the cart which I'll have in the description.

 Hey welcome back YouTube today I'm gonna show you how to play Nicki Minaj song

 entitled pound the alarm it's a really easy song you catch it in probably about

 to your A minor to your Bb major to your C major and back down to the D minor so we got

 okay um no first chord on this D minor we got the left hand D and an A right hand D

 F A what I'm doing I'm rolling my notes in my right hand up the keyboard and I

 you go down to your five A and E left hand right hand A C E same thing applies roll them up tap the C

 go up a half step now we got a Bb add 9 major add to 9 and that chord I'm just hitting a Bb to the C

 okay and that little thing I did went from a C and a C sharp over A

 so all I'm doing is got a Db in my left hand and an A and then a Db E and an A in my right hand

 and then you come up back to your minor we end on the major so we got

 real simple D is hit twice A is hit twice walk it up to that Bb from a G A Bb

 this time it goes to your G on the end and the same walk up but an octave lower and it restarts

So if you've just watched my um, what is it called, my new mirror makeup

 challenge then you saw I did an okay job but I just messed up on a few things so I thought

 that I would do a video on how to fix your makeup, you know, touch up mistakes and remove

 as you can probably see the first thing that I haven't done too well is blended out my

 makeup in a bit of a darker situation early in the morning or anything like that, you

 get out in the sunlight a couple of hours later and realise you know you've got a really

 harsh blush or bronzer or lines, obviously the first thing you're going to think of doing

 your powder brush and start buffing out the lines, I like to do little circular motions.

 Already you can see that this side of my face is much softer than this side and if you're

 really having a really um tough job at getting it off, you can take your powder and just

 kind of like dab it around the outside perimeter of where you've put you know the product and

 that will just help it blend a little bit better without putting on too much product

 is really good you know even if you're just getting ready in the morning and you've applied

 way too much blush as all of us have done one time or another when we're in a hurry.

 So you can just kind of pat it a couple of times into your powder and just buff it out.

 Same thing with my bronzer on my head, I'm just going to buff it out a bit.

 eyeliner on my eyelid like this, which happens a lot more than you'd probably think, I mess

All you can do is, well all you have to do is just wait for it to dry.

 Once it's dried, just take your Q-tip and gently run it back and forth over any mistakes

 Then underneath my eyes, I just will take it and roll the Q-tip gently as I go across

They're a little bit wonky, so I'm just going to fill them in a little bit better.

 Just taking my eyebrow powder, just filling in any spots that I miss and just making them

They don't have to be identical, just you know, look nice together.

 The reason why we're going to truss it is that what trussing does, it helps to ensure

 In other words, if I put this in the oven like this, we're going to have very thick

 So by the time this is done here, the tips are going to be overdone.

 So we're going to end up with tough chewy turkey, which what do we do with that, right?

 This way, what we want to do is take that tip and I'm going to fold it under.

 Cotton string will, when you pull on the cotton string, it will cut into the product.

 Come up over the top, hold it down with your thumb, take your string and slide it right

 And then we're going to go right through the loop and there's our square knot.

 We're going to come with our string down to about a 45 degree angle.

 All right, then we're going to pull it around and come back towards ourselves.

 Okay, now we've gone again, so we've gone across one diagonal, the other, we've created

 Okay, now we need to tie this off so it doesn't roll off the end.

 So I'm going to roll this over, I'm going to come back up and tuck it under.

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to pump it right underneath the skin, up and in.

 And then I'm going to put this in the brine and leave it in the brine, like I said, one

 Alright, whether you're replacing high beam, low beam, or dual beam headlight bulbs, the

Now, if I were you, I'd replace both the high or low beam headlight

 don't want to drive at night with two headlights that have uneven or mismatched intensity.

 from being 100% true is whether your car has a lot of stuff in the way, like a windshield

 washer fluid tank or a battery getting in the way of the headlight.

 stuff in the way, you might have to remove it to make room to work.

 Okay, first, grab the bulb base, this part right here, and give it a counterclockwise

 cute little ears on it that fit into little slots in the headlight assembly.

 assembly and give a clockwise twist and presto, you've done it.

 The second type of installation is the retaining clip type, which you can see right here.

 just pull the bulb out of the headlight like last time, insert the new bulb, snap the clip

But then, instead of twisting out the bulb, you have to twist out the retaining

 Now most of us have iPods and you know they're great listening devices and you can use them

 for when you do, you know Nike made a device for this one that you can do your monitor

 your running and all that but what if you want to be able to record but you can't find

 I've heard complaints saying well I should have just bought a recorder instead of the

 cheap mic that hooks up to an iPod but there is devices out there that have made good quality

 mics for this to where you can record lectures or music and all that.

 Mic if you know Blue, the Blue brands they are known for making high quality mics.

 Now they've made this what's called the Blue Mikey it's been around for a little while

 and people say well it costs a little bit too much because it does go for about $79.

 I was able to go on eBay and get this for $65 with free shipping and the quality of

 I've been blown away with the quality of sound with this particular mic and it has

 It has three levels that has low sensitivity, mid sensitivity and high sensitivity.

 Now all you have to do is you just plug it in just like that, plug it right in there

 and what will happen is that usually your iPod will turn on you can't see that it goes

 So all you have to do is you push the center button here and just start once it starts

 It is now recording and I should have switched over to the iPod right now so you're hearing

 Now what this also has is on the back side of here is a playback so if you want to hear

 what the recording it's not that great of a playback but it's enough that you could

 get what you need off of here of what you recorded and it does a good decent playback.

 Just can't be in a loud noisy area but the quality of sound as you can see is very great

 quality and I can't tell you how much it can save depending on how much music you already

 I actually have had this I think I have this set up on a low grade recording at this point

 I think they accommodate each other so you have use of your iPod and you don't have to

 buy a separate recording device and this is one of the devices that I've been looking

 for because the only other option that I would have had to go to for a really good quality

 So anyways hopefully this can help you and just so you get an idea the thing flexes.

 You might be hearing me shuffling it around but as you can see it flexes so you can just

 So hopefully this can help you out and I know I'm still recording.

 If you have any questions about the blue mic here hopefully this can help you out.

 Always cook your food in Pam because don't ever use oil because when you heat the oil

 This is on an E46 with an M52TU, which is the same as an M54 engine.

 A common symptom of low power steering fluid would be a noise when turning from your power

 A lot of times when you get low, you'll actually get air pockets or air bubbles in your ATF

 You want to look for this star style cap and you want to make sure that you read the top.

 I've seen some people switch to Penison 11S, so it makes sure that the fluid looks like

 So you would just open your cap up and you can use any kind of transmission fluid.

 It is kind of common to see fluid kind of seep out of this reservoir.

 So before you open it, if it's really dirty, make sure to clean it.

 Check your fluid level, which actually on this vehicle my fluid level is good.

 Now if you had to drain your automatic transmission fluid, you would fill it first and then start

 your vehicle, turn your wheel left to right, shut it off, add some more fluid because it's

 And then start it up, turn the steering wheel all the way left, all the way right.

 is a really important rhythm to learn on the drums because it forms the basis of drum rhythms

 to the radio or anything like that today, you probably would have heard several 8th

 Let's look at the hi-hat part first because the hi-hat part is what really glues it all

 count a number, 1, 2, 3 or 4, for every one of those beats there's going to be 2 8th notes.

 but that will ensure that you're playing the bass drum and snare drum on the correct beats

 and not accidentally on the wrong beat or maybe on one of the off beats, on one of the

So again, nice and slow, counting what you're playing before you play it.

 make sure that you count yourself in and keep counting while you're playing until you're

 We've just finished the pie shell, the pie filling, and now I'm going to make some homemade

 First of all, we're going to use two cups of heavy cream and pour it right into your

 You can add more if you like it sweeter, but this pie is really, really rich, so it's

 nice to have something that isn't extremely sweet to pair with it.

 I don't like to measure the vanilla because a little bit more I think is just fine.

 So anyways, I'm going to go ahead and turn this on and let it spin around for about four

 All right, the whipped cream has been being beat up for about two minutes now, and you

 It'll probably take about another minute to have stiff peaks, and that'll be done.

 And we're going to just put this in the fridge until we're ready to use it.

 And next we're going to put our pie together and ready to serve so everybody can enjoy it.

 To watch the other segments in this video series, or for how-to videos on almost any

This is a fast and easy delicious vegetable soup that features Napa

This is a delicious cabbage that has fabulous health properties.

 one of the highest on the nutrient density chart for nutrition.

So when you see Napa cabbage listed in a recipe, do not substitute

And the white bottoms, I've put in the blender and blended into the

 water into our soup pot and we'll add to it carrots, cauliflower, zucchini, mushrooms,

 and then an optional item, some silken tofu that's been chopped into small bites.

 to a boil and then we're going to add our Napa cabbage leaves, our green peas, and our

 vegetables are getting tender and we're ready to add the final ingredients.

These are whole grain fettuccine noodles that we've broken into two

We've previously cooked them so that they don't absorb all the broth.

 peas and last, the leafy part of our Napa cabbage that's been cut and ready to be stirred into our

You can see all the lovely vegetables in there, the great noodles.

 Yeah, go ahead and cook them all and that way what happens, don't look like they're

 We sprayed this griddle down with, what was that over there, ham?

 Ham, just gave it with olive oil and just gave it a real light spray.

 What we're cooking on the side is mac and cheese that has been stored in a Mylar bag

 So it's been stored in the Mylar bag for about a year and three weeks.

 We're going to cook this up with the pork chops and see how it tastes.

 I've got two little stragglers here that need to go on a different platter.

 While the pork chops are cooking, I filled up their water jug and brought it out here.

 I kind of felt bad for them this morning because I don't let them out into the bottom section

 Whenever I checked on them first thing this morning, they were all standing around the

 I kind of felt bad for them, but I can't let them down whenever there's nobody here to

 keep an eye on them because the neighborhood, the neighbors let their dogs just run around.

 And this is my new rubberized whisk because I don't want to scratch the Teflon.

 They're supposed to quit using some of these liners by the next couple of years.

 And when that boils, we pour that in there, we'll just let it sit.

 Now watch out, there's going to be the cheese packets in there.

 I don't think, well they cooked that anyway, so there's probably no weevils in it anyway.

 This mac and cheese has been in storage for a little over a year, like I said.

 I can't tell any taste difference between the fresh stuff and the stuff that's been

 I didn't want to eat just mac and cheese, so we did pork chops and corn and noodles.

 So, say, six months from now, a year from now, I'll do a taste test of those also,

 Hi, this is Amanda from Barocco's Knit Bits, and today I'll be demonstrating how to work

 Right and left twists are basically just switching the arrangement of two stitches within a row.

 I've knitted a few rows with Lindsey here to show you what twist stitches look like.

 On this right hand side of my fabric, I've been working right twists, and on the left

 And I have two different arrangements of twist stitches that I've been working.

 On these two stitches here, I've been doing a right twist every row over those same stitches,

 so it's creating a column of stitches that are twisted, and you can kind of see it.

 It's sort of a subtle texture that looks really nice in a ribbing or something like that.

 And I also have over here twist stitches that are working on the diagonal, so every right

 side row, I move the two stitches that I'm twisting over one stitch so that it's always

 You can see this is the diagonal traveling part, and then over here is my column of stitches.

 So I'm now going to work my next row and show you how to do right twists and left twists.

 The first right twist I'm going to do is going to be the next one in my column of right twists.

 So here I am at those two stitches, and I'm ready to work a right twist stitch.

 To start, you want to knit two together just like you normally would, but instead of sliding

 these loops off the needle, I'm going to weave them on there and now knit into only the first

 So now I can slide off those extra loops and the twist is done.

 And I can tell since I'm sliding it over one stitch every row, I can see that I worked

 my last twist over these two stitches on the last right side row I did.

 So I know that for this row, because I'm moving it over to the right one more stitch, I'm

 So I'll do the same thing where first I knit two together, but I don't slide those loops

 And now I'll work over to the other side of my fabric where I'm doing the left twists.

 Okay, so I've reached the point where I'm getting ready to start doing the left twists

 And because this is the left twist side, I'm going to move my stitch one stitch over to

 So I can see that these two stitches here were the ones that I worked my twist on on

 my last right side row, which means that these two stitches here are going to be the ones

 And since it's pointing in a different direction than the right twist, you do it in a different

 You want to first knit into the back loop of the second stitch on your needle.

 And then you want to knit into both of the back loops of both those stitches.

 So you have to kind of work your needle in there and knit those as well.

 And here I am at the column of left twist stitches that I've been working.

 And so now I'm going to do the same process again through the back of the loop of the

 Twist stitches are a great way to add some texture into your knitting and it's a fun

 We're going to be doing a little cooking with Lisa Lillian aka the hungry girl

 She's here to help us satisfy our sweet tooth without the guilt.

 This is all the deserts they all have less than 200 calories and we are gonna demo today

 We gooey apple pie cones now regular apple pie has 500 to 800 calories a slice

 Really these cones are amazing for 84 calories and look how cute they are.

 Get a little vanilla I want to throw the sugar in this is the sugar not too much

 Nope, just like a table set it out a little salt a little dash of salt

 Just like that and a little bit of the cinnamon salt brings out the flavor

 You forget the salt cup and a half of chopped Fuji apples, I love Fuji apples

 They're tart and sweet a lot of people use Granny Smith apples, but those are a little more sour

 We don't have 15 minutes to cook this but let's say we did magic and then we were cool

 And now we like you said we are gonna fill these cones and this is just a you take sugar cone

 It's a standard sugar cone which is a great little vehicle because it has like 50 calories and look how cute it is and holds

 That's a perfect amount of apple and these are great for parties kids love these and the best part of course kids would love that

 You can sprinkle it with a little bit of cinnamon again 85 calories really yeah, you want to bite it yeah, all right

 Fruit waffle tacos now this is one of my favorite things because I take a waffle

 I roll it out, and then I bake it into a cute little taco shell so this is like a frozen

 It's a frozen waffle that has been defrosted and then I rebake it into a cute little taco shaped shell

 I fill it with really great and these also should have whipped cream on top

 Okay, beautiful anyway, and so what you were just getting them what came out of my nose

 There's mango and banana and pineapple and again mango right now

 157 calories so that's also a great little like that's into it very hard to cut can you get the frozen ones and you can

 Get stick bag you could you could defrost the mango that way or you can get a pre-cut mango

 I know it's a little hard to cut I like so hard and I do too, but okay forget about these guys

 I love these because they use cake mix and then canned pumpkin and marshmallow cream a little bit of graham cracker

 That well you're not doing oil or no instead you just use the box cake mix which has enough in it

 You just add the canned pumpkin it gets it nice and the pumpkin is gonna

 Give you what you would get from the oil exactly except you get fiber

 It's low in fat low in calories, and these have less than a hundred and fifty calories.

I want to say Lisa will be at the California strawberry festival on Sunday, May 19th at 1230

 And hopefully you bring some of these goodies because they are fantastic

 Stevie one time I will right after this but a Roxy has some important medical news right after this

 Today we're going to be doing a little recipe here using some Quest pasta.

 This particular one is my post-workout meal, courtesy of Quest Nutrition.

 Thank you very much Ron and everybody over at Quest for sending us a nice care package

 Then we just put it in a non-stick frying pan with a little bit of ham and fry it up

 just a little bit to give it a little bit more of a pasta consistency.

 You could probably microwave it, but we decided to use a non-stick skillet to fry it.

 We're using some cheese, pepper, garlic powder, and a little bit of teriyaki sauce, which

 It doesn't take very long to fry actually, so you can very easily do it.

 We pre-cooked some vegetables that we have in the refrigerator for our vegetable meals.

 It's some escarole and some mushrooms and usually some cabbage or some bok choy or something.

 A little bit more of, I think I used a little bit of soy sauce.

 This is a little Szechuan sauce, a little low calorie Szechuan sauce.

 I like to cook it fresh right after I get done working out because it always tastes

 Then of course, on this particular day, I get a half a cup of cooked rice.

 Then we just saute it up inside the pan there with all the noodles and everything else.

 There's not a lot of carbs in it, but it does taste very, very much like noodles, like fettuccine.

 We decided to do this because it fit within the confines of my diet.

 It's got about 25 grams of carbs, 28 grams of carbs, and about 50 grams of protein.

 I can't tell you how many times I've been asked how to cut up a chicken.

 I just have a roasting chicken here and I've got a chef's knife or a French knife.

 I want to make sure that my knife is sharp and you want to do the same thing.

 I'm going to take the wing tips off and there's actually a little joint right in the middle

 That comes right off and I'm going to save that for some stock or for some soup later on.

 There's another joint right here and you can actually see it just popping out right there.

 You're not really cutting through bone when you're cutting up a chicken.

 You're just cutting through these joints and they're much softer than bone.

 Now I'm going to flip my chicken over and I'm going to remove the drumstick.

 I'm just going to make one quick cut down here and then you can actually see

 The knife will pop right through it and then you're just going to cut right around.

 I'm going to flip the bird over and do the same thing on the other side.

 Then I'm going to remove the flat part, cutting right through that joint.

 I'll flip the chicken over, coming in through the back, just making these quick cuts.

 As soon as I see that white part right there, that's where I'm cutting through.

 I'm going to flip it back over and now we're going to get rid of the legs.

 I'm just going to make a cut right down here, right where the drumstick is,

 Then I'm going to take my hand on the back of the thigh and I'm just going to apply a little bit of pressure

 At this point I'm just cutting right through meat and I'll make cuts on either side.

 We're just cutting straight down in between the breast and the leg.

 Back of my hand, just pushing right up until that pops through.

 Then we'll just cut through the meat, right through there, straight down.

 At this point we're going to separate the thigh from the drumstick.

 Same idea, you're looking for a joint right there and you're going to cut right through.

 You can see right here it's just mostly skin in between the breast and the back.

 I'm going to take the tip of my knife and put it right in the center.

 I'm going to take the tip of my knife right in the center of the keel bone.

 the more comfortable you're going to be in the kitchen in general.

 Hi, my name is Bianca Walter and I want to be the next hot raw chef.

 Okay, today I'm going to be making a very simple, delicious recipe that can be prepared

 The ingredients I'm going to be using today is frozen bananas, macadamias, limes, dates

 The recipe I'm going to make for you today is creamy banana and macadamia ice cream

 To make this recipe you're going to need a high speed blender because you want to get

 Okay, so what I'm going to do is first I'm just going to put the macadamia and we want

 Just want to wipe the sides down every now and then and we want to get that into a really

 Now if you're going to freeze bananas, please don't put them in the freezer whole.

 We want to peel them, place them individually in glad wrap or put them in a container and

 I'm also just going to add about a tablespoon of maple syrup and a tablespoon of lime juice.

 Now this recipe is really nice without lime juice as well, but I'm using lime juice because

 it takes away some of the sweetness and the heaviness and it's very yummy.

 I'm really happy with that flavor, so I'm not going to add anything more.

 So today I'm going to layer up this ice cream in some parfait glasses because it's for Valentine's

 Okay, so first of all, I'm just going to add some ice cream to this parfait glass.

 Now I've got a sliced banana here and for the chunky goodness, half a cup of macadamia

 nuts and two medjool dates roughly chopped and just mixed together.

 Now this recipe is for based on two people, so there's enough ingredients to cover that.

 And it is very filling too, so if you really want to do four small servings, you can also

 I'm just going to put a bit more of the chunky goodness on top.

 It's really nice when you eat this ice cream and you've got those chunks and it's just

 Now I'm also just going to put a little bit of lime zest on top.

 It just gives it a little bit more freshness and just a little bit of extra color.

 You don't want too much though because you don't want the lime to be too overpowering.

 If you think my recipe is a winner, go to hotrochef.com to vote for me.

 Go to hotrochef.com to cast your People's Choice vote for me, Bianca Walter.

 What's going on guys, it's Dylan and today I will be showing you how to do a combo stick

 So by combo I mean just taking two twirls and putting them together.

 So take your index finger and middle finger, put them apart and put this right in the center.

 You're going to want to start down in here, I don't know what the hell that's called,

 And you're going to want to wave your hand a little bit, kind of like you're waving to

 Keep it firm in there so it doesn't fly out, just so you get used to the motion.

 And then eventually when you get used to that motion of back and forth like that, you're

 going to start moving your hand less and then the stick's going to become more fluid

 But then the trickier part is when you want to bring the stick up to your fingertips.

 Now that's going to make it easier to transition between twirl one and twirl two.

 So twirl two entails you taking it, same spot, in between your two index fingers.

 You're going to want to keep it, or your index and your middle finger, you want to

 keep it in between on the fingertips once again so it's more fluid.

 So what you're going to do is you're just going to toss it back and forth between your

 The hardest part is going from the pinky to the index finger because you got to bring

 it all the way around and catch it up top and you're going to want to use the momentum

 that you gain from going through the other two to bring that up.

 It's going to be a long, long, dirty road to get to, you know, being very fluid with

 both because you're going to be throwing the stick on the floor and you're going to be

 making all kinds of noise, pissing off all your family members.

 So basically, once you get to that point, you're going to want to do, you're going to

 Okay, so you're going to do twirl one, which is like a fake twirl because it's not going

 through your fingers and you're going to want to kind of like as you go back, do the first

 motion but as you come down, you're going to want to catch it with your index finger

 Okay, so to show you again, when you're coming down, catch it like that.

 To bring it back, when you're coming up from the pinky to the index finger, you're going

 to want to just go right back, you want to, like you're waving again.

 You're going to bring it like this and like you're waving again, right back into twirl

 You can find the full ingredients and measurements in the description box below.

 So the first thing you're going to do is take your ground beef, add the salt, pepper, paprika,

 The hoisin sauce gives it flavor and it also helps keep the burgers moist when you cook

 Try to get them the same size and also you want it to be slightly bigger than your bun.

 So when you cook it, when they shrink, you'll have enough meat on the bun.

 So pat these out to about the same size and then we're going to cook it.

 We're going to keep it at a sizzle, but you don't want it to cook too fast.

 And if it starts to drop down, I'm going to turn it back up a little bit and once it

 And this is going to cook for about five minutes to six minutes on both sides.

 It's just really up to you how you want your hamburgers cooked.

 So now we're going to flip these and then I'm going to let these cook again for about

 I put this on the plate and allow it to rest for about five minutes.

So here we've got a front haunch which we're going to use for our burger mince.

 We've also got some lardo, we've got some corn fat here and we've got some truffles just to make them extra decadent.

 So I'm going to hand you over to Dougie who's going to show you how we make our burgers.

 First thing, we've got this beautiful bit of venison, freshly butchered.

 For the fat content of the burger we've got some lovely lardo that we cured ourselves up.

 So if I just cut it down the middle here and then slide the knife along, similar to skinning a salmon or any other fish.

 We'll just chop it into chunks so it's manageable for the mincer.

 So now we're just going to mince the meat and the fat together.

 You can just drop a couple of the bits of lardo in with it as well.

 They'll be easier to mince with the meat pushing it through rather than by themselves.

 If you don't have lardo and you want to use some pork belly or back fat, but when you're using those make sure it's cooked through.

 So we've just finished mincing the venison there and you can see the lardo has been chopped through it.

 Seasoning wise, I've got some salt here, I've got some juniper berry and peppercorn, very classic flavours to go with venison.

Dave, if you could go get me a nice handful of ground ivy, that would be absolutely perfect.

 Here, what we're actually after is some, well what we call these days, ground ivy.

 It used to be called alehoof because they actually used it in the making of beer right up until the 1700s.

 Excellent, so the ground ivy's got the perfect sort of flavour to go with this venison mix.

 So we're just going to plop them in some water and you just give it a little swish around in the water.

 If you lift it out of the water rather than pouring it, it goes away from the dirt.

 And just drop it in a colander or a sieve or onto some tissue paper or something.

 Roughly chop it up and we'll go and mix it in with the rest of the pergamons.

 We can do the fun bit, mix it up and then we can start eating some really tasty burgers.

 The larder was cured but it's not going to bring too much of a salty flavour there.

 And then we've just got a little bit of peppercorn and juniper.

 It gives a really nice scent of gin, which is a nice accompaniment to venison.

It's really just a couple of peppercorns and a couple of juniper berries.

 So just make a claw in the hand and give it a good swirl around.

 It doesn't have much of its own flavour but it brings unctuousness.

 I'm going to sear them, get it really hot and get some really delicious venison flavour out of that.

 And then the temperature carries on in and you've got that beautiful pink sort of rareness in the middle.

 But if you melt that cheese, then you get an even better product.

 And you can just come in with the blowtorch and you'll see it beginning to melt.

 However, if you turn one of these upside down, you end up making a good sort of flamethrower.

 So it's a beautifully rare burger, but completely safe because it's freshly cooked.

 You've got the cured pork fat and then pork fat on the outside that was cooked on the fire.

 So go out, take apart a deer, make your own one, and we'll see you guys next time.

 First things first, we're going to get some breakfast on the go.

 I'm going to show you a nice little campfire trick to make perfect filter coffee.

 Hey guys, so today's video is going to be...drumroll please...a no mirror makeup

You guys have probably seen a lot of the no mirror makeup challenge

 videos on YouTube and they're absolutely hilarious and I thought I just have to

I have to make this video what you'd call this a container of assorted

I'll be turning my camera screen backwards so that I can't see what I'm

 using my fingers too because I have no mirror so what good is it gonna do?

 One of the most obvious tricky aspects to Ford pickups is the shape of the bottom of the roll-up windows.

 Here are a couple ways to cut the film to make it match the bottom shape of the window.

 In method number one, I've placed the film so that the bottom edge of the film is resting on the higher ledge of the window.

 I then use my two fingers to create a gauge, and following the slope upward, I now know how high to cut the film so that it will match the curve of the window.

 One downside to this method is that it requires cutting the film on the face of the glass.

 This could scratch the glass, which is why you saw me snap off a new blade prior to making the cut.

 If you're not comfortable with this method, try method number two.

 In method number two, we start with the film overlapping the entire bottom seal, and then using the top of the seal as a guide, use your knife to cut the shape of the film.

 This is done by just barely poking the tip of the knife blade out of the knife, and then using that to cut the film.

 One downside to this method is that it can distort or damage the bottom edge of the film.

 If that happens, simply trim this part of the film off before installing it.

 Also, you need to be extra careful not to cut the rubber seal of the vehicle.

 Now that the bottom of the film matches the shape of the bottom of the window, you can slide the film down and continue with the rest of the steps for cutting the film.

 If you haven't already, be sure to watch our video, How to Tint a Roll-Up Window, which covers the rest of the steps for cutting a window and applying it.

 So that's how we do a Ford pickup truck, and that's how you can do it too.

 If you found that helpful, go ahead and like the video and subscribe.

 And go to becomeawindowtinter.com and subscribe to our email list.

 After installing your new Metal Cloak Overline or Overland Rear JK Fenders, you may choose

 to trim the excess metal on the fender wall for maximum tire clearance.

 These marks should stop right before the pinch seam in the body.

 Avoid notching slots through the fender spot welds that are shown here.

 Use a hammer to pound the notched sections as even and flat as possible.

 Grind the folded over sheet metal to remove the sharp or jagged edges.

 Apply black paint to seal and protect the cut edges and give your job a finished look.

She asked me to make vegan Rice Krispie treats so that's exactly what I'm going to

 And then we're gonna keep this up on low until all the ingredients bubble for just a little bit.

 We're gonna remove from our heat mix in with our Rice Krispies.

 All right now that our mixture has bubbled pour it all in here.

 really firmly and you want to make sure you spread it out even.

 All right now that we've got our Krispies thoroughly pushed into the pan we're going

 to put this in the fridge to allow it to set up for about 30 minutes so that our Rice Krispies

All right and there we have it you could frost these with a little frosting if you'd

 and easy to make recipe would be a great one to do with kids and I hope you guys enjoyed.

 enjoy this video please remember to thumbs up, subscribe for future vegetarian videos, and leave

For a list of ingredients and a downloadable version of the recipe please

 How to start a personal footprints toe on one long circular needle.

 Dive through the loop with your fingers, pull part of the tail through,

 hold on to both ends so you can pull them apart and there is your slip knot.

 I'm going to take the ball yarn and go beneath the needles and up over the top

 When I'm done I will stop right here as if I'm about to do a fourth, but don't do a fourth.

 Before rotating them, let's pull the other needle in here so you can watch more easily.

 We're going to keep the right side facing us, the smooth side, and simply rotate clockwise.

 From now on, for this one round, stitches four, five, six, seven, eight, and nine,

 What this will do is double the number of loops on the needles.

 Notice that as I'm knitting these three stitches on the top needle, we now have six loops.

 Notice we're building stockinette in between and we've got a lot of live stitches there.

 To continue, I'm letting the tail hang because it has done its job.

 You can see that I've got smooth stockinette center and twelve live stitches.

 Now what we're going to do, notice that the right side is facing, of course,

 We're going to make six groups of stitches, each having two stitches.

 We're going to knit the first one and the second one we will knit into the front and the back like this.

 Knit one, knit into the front of the stitch, and before you take it off, knit into the back.

 So in this one as well, knit one, knit one to the front, one into the back.

 We have these little bumps, which are the purl bumps made by the increase.

 In a minute I'm going to knit a plain round, but you can see we're already beginning to get a toe shape.

 We now have nine stitches and nine stitches because for every two we added one.

 Of course it's a large gauge, so it's rather larger than it would be were it sock yarn.

 that is traditionally found in the Kenyan coast in Tanzania and it's called Baazi, which

 is basically chickpeas or some people call it garbanzo beans that have been cooked as

 chickpeas, you will need 3 cups of chickpeas or garbanzo beans and you will need to put

 them in a container, make sure that it covers the top of it and let it sit for 3 hours.

 Then after that, take it and boil it, put it in a medium sized pot, put some water in

 there, let it boil down until when you press one of the peas, it feels a little bit mushy,

If you are lucky enough to have canned garbanzo beans like I do here,

And then you will need 3 tablespoons of cooking oil, I use canola

So over here on medium heat, I'm going to turn it up a little bit, I have here caramelizing

And then to that, once it starts browning like this and you make sure that

 the garlic is cooked all the way, you don't want to bite into raw garlic, that's just

 that's very good, it gives food a good color and flavor, it's bright yellow and it has

 anti-inflammatory properties and it's also good for the skin, like we use this for masks.

 will add some curry powder, you will add 1 teaspoon of curry powder, I'm going to add

Now I add the turmeric first because it has kind of a strong taste and

 up eating food cooked with it, but for those who are not, who don't have that taste acquired,

 teaspoon of garam masala, this you can find at a grocery store in the international aisle,

Or if not, you can go online to any Indian website, they do have

Now I like the kick, but I do not like to fight with my food, that's why I add

If you like your food spicy, go ahead and add 1 teaspoon or if you're

 brave, 1 1⁄2 or whatever, however hot you like your food, just go ahead and add that.

 So I put it in here and you'll notice, it smells so wonderful, you'll notice it's starting

 Now one thing you want to do is if you buy the canned garbanzo beans, you want to drain

And it's such a simple dish to make, such a simple dish, not many ingredients

 it later to see if I need to add some more and then I'll add some more if I need to.

 So you see that beautiful yellow, golden color, that's going to turmeric.

 13.5 ounce canned coconut milk and it's heavy, so I'm going to stir it because it's kind

 let it cook for 15 to 20 minutes and come and check like I showed you.

 they cook faster than soaking them like the ones that you just get in a pack.

 But we'll be back so you can see the finished product and I'm going to show you how this

 bit of kick in the chickpeas because of the cayenne pepper that I put in there.

 every one of you who takes the time out of their busy day to watch my videos.

If you have any questions, if you have any suggestions or requests,

 You should put the screw where it belongs, so that way you don't lose it.

 All right, see if the hose comes off now once your clamp is loose.

 Once your clamp is loose, yeah, that hose should come right out.

 The bucket you're going to need after when you reach your pipes, your water supplies,

 Yeah, yeah, right from there, unless your clamp is still tight.

 So once you did that, now we're going to the next step, which is the top.

 We're actually able, after that, because you removed this, we'll be able to just pull the

 And that's how we're going to pick up the sink without damaging the bottom.

 Hi guys, today I'm reviewing the KitchenAid 5-speed hand mixer.

 The speeds are easy to adjust and you will hear a click when you change the speed.

 The one with the collar goes into the right side and you will hear a click so you know

 To eject the beater, simply push this button and they come right out.

 There are other attachments that you can buy separately like a pro whisk, a rod for making

 Speed 1 is for starting the machine and for stirring chunky ingredients in like chocolate

 Speed 3 is for heavy cream cheese mixtures or vegetables like squash.

 While you're mixing, if you want to put the beater down, it lays flat on your counter.

 Before you plug in the machine, make sure the speed is set to off.

 I've plugged in the mixer and I'm going to turn it on to speed 1.

 I will set my stopwatch because I want to see how long it takes to whip a cup of cream.

 The mixer did a good job of incorporating the water into the flour.

 My pizza dough is pretty wet so I will add a little bit more flour.

 As you can see what the dough is doing is climbing up the beaters and going into the

 It's best not to use beaters to make pizza dough because the dough is going to get stuck

 and go right into the holes of the mixer and then it's going to be a pain to clean.

 I'll cream some butter and sugar to see how the mixer performs.

 In this bowl I have a stick of softened butter and a cup of sugar.

 You just have to wash the beaters in warm soapy water or your dishwasher.

 It's really convenient to have on hand when you don't want to pull out your big stand mixer.

 It's perfect for smaller jobs like whipping cream or making cookie dough.

 The best way to clean your beaters is to eat the butter and sugar first.

 Okay, what I've got is I've got 2 tablespoons of butter going real quick, it's melting.

 We're going to sear the spinach real quick and finish off the dinner.

 Real quick, I've got the butter going, I'm not going to add that much olive oil, I'll

 Just enough to bring the heat up, just a little bit higher for me.

 I'm going to add about, I don't know, a third of a cup of onions to it.

 And we're just going to use baby spinach, organic baby spinach is all we're using.

 I'm going to pack it in a hollandaise, that's going to be your sauce that's going on top

 I'm going to real quick, I'm going to go ahead and throw in my salt and pepper right now.

 Okay, I'm in the middle of filming so we're going to do this real quick.

 I'm going to throw the spinach into the frying pan and let it sweat.

 That's all we're going to do, we're going to let it sweat down.

 Okay, so what we got here, we got our parmesan mashed potatoes, our salmon and crud.

 I have the bacon crackle which I made earlier, which is just bacon pieces put down really small and really low temp.

 Okay, now I got the holiday sauce and it was just a package holiday sauce that I made up.

 Listen, since tonight's menu has, we're using puff pastry because we're doing the salmon and crud.

 I'm going to make a quick appetizer for you to use for the Super Bowl this next week.

 It's going to be a baked brie with apricot jam and puff pastry.

 I have egg white to help seal up the egg wash, to help seal up the brie once I'm done.

 I'm going to put a little bit extra because I don't care if it leaks out.

 We're going to be doing the puff pastry with the salmon so you get to play with it a little bit more.

 Welcome back to my kitchen, welcome back to Cookingaround's kitchen.

 And yes it will destroy those fats and keep those calories down.

 So fast, so simple, you are going to be making this very very often.

 So let's not waste any more time and let's get going with this.

 So basically what I am going to do now is keep on cooking this for about 8 to 10 minutes.

 Hey guys, so I'm back with a tutorial this look is going to be perfect for any holiday events that you have coming up including

 New Year's and I thought it was super festive with the glitter silver

 Metallics and if you want to see how I did this look and just keep watching

 And this is just going to make sure that my eyeshadow stays on all night does not crease fade

 Smudge move around or do anything that I don't want it to do and I'm going to take this

It's like a silver metallic color with like purple glitter and blue and all these fun colors in it

 I'm just going to apply this on my eyelid and then a little bit into my crease

 This is just going to give the eyeshadow something to adhere to and then make them stand out even more

 I'm just going to blend this into my crease and it's just going to be a great transition color and make blending a lot easier

 And now I'm going to take buck from the naked one palette and blend this into my crease as well

 I'm going to blend this a little bit lower than the naked color, and it's just going to give my eye a lot more definition

 Now I'm going to take this silver metallic eyeshadow on a flat brush and apply this to my lid and a little bit into my

 Crease I'm just using a packing motion to get the most opaque payoff as possible now

 I'm going to take this black with the silver glitter in it and apply this to my outer V

 I'm kind of making a horizontal V shape on the outside of my eye with really really slow

 I'm taking a little bit more of that black eyeshadow on a tapered blending brush to give me a little

 Darker of a look and I'm going to gradually bring this into my crease and gradually bring it up towards my eyebrow now

 I'm taking nix's jumbo eyeshadow pencil and milk and applying this to my tear duct and this is just going to give the eyeshadow

 I'm just taking that same silver eyeshadow put on the lid and putting that in the tear duct and then sweeping it on the

 Applying this on the outer third of my lower lash line and on my waterline and a little bit on my tightline now

 I'm taking that same black eyeshadow and applying it on the outer third of my lower lash line for a little bit more sparkle

 I'm using this cream glitter metallic eyeshadow and applying this all over my lid

 I'm just gonna use this fully to make sure all the hairs are going in the right direction

 And I'm going to use benefits browsing's in dark to fill in my eyebrows

 I'm going for a much more bold look just to bring more attention to my eyes since they are the main focus of this look

 I'm just going to clean up any fallout with this baby wipe and also give my eyeshadow a much sharper edge

 I already have a little bit of foundation on but I want a more flawless look

 So I'm just going to play a little bit more with this duo fiber stipple brush for an airbrush finish

 I wanted to really highlight it under eye area, so I'm using a concealer

 I'm just going to blend this in like a triangle motion using my ring finger

 Which has the least amount of pressure going to set that under eye concealer with a brightening?

 translucent powder and then just set the rest of my face with a

 Regular translucent powder and I need to bring a lot more color back into my face because I am looking super washed out

 Pretty much all over my face to give me a lot more warmth and color for blush

 I decided to go with this purple pink shade here because I thought that the coolness of it would look really pretty with the silver

 Highlighting powder I'm applying that to all the high points of my face my cheekbones my

 The bridge of my nose and then my cupid's bow to give me like an added glow for my lips

 applied lipstick in a gloss, but I'll leave it down below in the

 Description box and I also cut out the part where I finished my eyes.

 Mascara wing eyeliner and then a glitter mascara over that and this is the completed look all items will be

Thanks so much for watching and I will catch you guys in the next video.

 I'm going to take my candle or my wax and I'm going to rub over top of my texture.

 Once you're done your rubbings, you're going to take an acrylic paint as well as an acrylic

 There you can see the polka dots from the stamp poking through.

 You take your white or you can use a black crayon and you rub over your stamp.

 Wipe some off to show the polka dot rubbing a little bit better.

 I'll show you a project using your Frittage for a layout or a card.

 Hi YouTubers, today I want to quickly show you how to implement a throttle kill switch

 First thing to do is to put it in model select mode and you do that by holding down the two

 Okay, so from here you want to make sure you go to the auxiliary 2 and you want to make

 sure it's not in INH which means it's inhibited or not turned on.

 So here I'll turn it to the 2PSW, I don't know exactly what that means but it allows

 From there go ahead and save it by holding down the two buttons again and dropping it

 So from your plain model here you want to go ahead and hold down both these buttons

 and click it again to get into the menu and click on the left rocker here again until

 you get to program mix and you want to use these mix 6, currently it's on INH, again

 You want to use the right rocker and change that over to auxiliary 2 to throttle.

 From here you hit the select, get it onto the right, you want to hit the right rocker

 down here again and drop it to negative 125, negative 125 and then your rocker on the auxiliary,

 turn that down, that should drop you down to the bottom piece, the bottom one, which

 And then from here your select again to the offset, negative 125 again.

 Okay and that should do it, all you're going to do now is hold down your two left buttons

 here again to save it and drop you into the main menu and I'll show you real quick how

 Alright guys, here it is, I've already plugged in the battery and turned the controller on

 and I want to show you real quickly, that's the on position, motor's on, off position,

 So this is very useful in the event when you've got your battery plugged in and you want to

 unplug the battery or whatever and you've got that kill switch as a safety switch so

This is just a remake of my previous video specifically on how to

 it's not too slimy and it actually has some pretty good hold to it.

 And then the hairspray I use is like I said earlier, it's called Glued.

 not too much, not too little, and I just rub it like that on my fingertips.

 just got out of the shower so my hair is just a little bit damp which actually helps.

 with it being damp, it gives it more of a...it works the gel in my hair more and allows it

 And you just rub it, I mean you just work at it until it's really worked in there actually

What I kind of do is I kind of just do this kind of like a scooping motion

 and just kind of get it pointed and kind of work it until it starts holding where it's

And then depending on how long my hair is, because I've got a haircut since

 last time so my hair is actually not that long, depending on how long my hair is, I'll

Just because whenever you go for the first time and you're rubbing it through

 your hair, I tend to miss like this part right here and sometimes it's like waving everywhere.

But with David Tennant, I mean he has so many different hairstyles,

 you can make it messy, you can slick it back or you can just leave it however it is.

 the main thing to work on is the bangs and the middle slash back.

 I mean the more it will resemble David Tennant's because actually his hair was always pretty

 of makes me look like a faux hawk which essentially that's what David Tennant has.

 some on the sides even though I didn't really put gel on the sides of my hair.

 in my hair, I'll go back through the back and the middle and just kind of like fluff

 Garlic chives have their own unique flavor and they are healthy.

 You might smell like garlic after eating, but it is very delicious and worth it.

 In a pan, add 1 1⁄2 cups of water and 3 tablespoons of sweet rice flour.

 In a large mixing bowl, combine 1 cup of cooled rice mixture and other ingredients for the kimchi paste.

 Add the garlic chives, onions, and peppers into the kimchi paste.

 Unlike the other kimchi recipes, this one goes directly into a refrigerator because garlic chive kimchi ferments faster.

 Hello guys welcome back to POPngames once again for another unboxing.

 Today we're going to be doing the unboxing for Shin Megami Tensei Devil Survivor 2

 the bottom right it says this game was developed or published by atlas.

 side view it's like a bluish background with the main character over here with

 three different scenes here and it shows you a little bit about the bonus

I'm gonna read for you guys from the top left it says your days are

 RPG Devil Survivor 2 warns us that the apocalypse is upon us again or once

What would you do if you could see other steps before they come to pass?

 will determine the fate of mankind as calamity of unprecedented scale strikes

Alright so from the first scene right below it says a new chapter takes

 full story voice work breathes new life into the high tension plot.

 and for the rating the rate the reason why this game is rated T for teen is

 because of alcohol reference, blood, language, partial nudity, suggestive

 alright with that being shown let's move on to see what's inside

 so that's exactly what came, how it came rather, here's the which one is this the

 shoji maguro and atlas sound team arranged soundtrack, here's the back side

 okay and here's the game so it's basically the same front cover as the

 collectible box now for the side view it's a little different it has the

 solid white background with the logo here's the emblem right there this game

 is a y-fold copy game it's y fold like the letter Y and moving on to the back

 it's exactly the same thing as the collectible box there we go just to show

 you okay now since you guys already know what written on there I'm just gonna

 there you go so as soon as you open it up it seems that you got a piece of

 paper on the left and the game cartridge on right nothing behind the

 front cover this so it's just this doesn't fold anything so it's just a

 warnings paper all warnings okay quick zoom in of the game cartridge

 alright and with that being shown and said that pretty much wraps up the

 unboxing for Shin Megami Tensei Devil Survivor 2 record breaker the

 collectible box and as always thank you guys for staying tuned to popngames

 for unboxings don't forget to leave a like comment and subscribe thank you

 Today I'm going to show you again how to use the Presta Poplite Hot Air Popcorn Popper.

 The only small minus is that sometimes you get spontaneous popping in the bowl.

 Which the other brand, the Pop Secrets, pretty much they all pop in the popper.

 So okay, so we're going to demonstrate this and let's get to it.

 And this is why I like the switch because after you turn it off, one or two or three

 I wet my hands, sprinkled it on top, cover it nicely, and then sprinkle a little salt

 This machine, I bought so many just as presents and people love them.

 Leave your comments, thumb up, subscribe, and I'll catch you next time.

 Aquatic exercise has been proven to be one of the most body friendly, fat burning and efficient ways to get into shape.

 But finding the time to get to a pool or to pay for a costly gym membership can now be a thing of the past.

 An affordable H2X fitness or swim spa takes up a surprisingly small space in your backyard,

 can be installed in less than a day, and can be used year round.

 a complete aquatic exercise program designed specifically for use in an H2X swim spa.

 This comprehensive program has tracks for beginner, intermediate and advanced levels,

 The exercises in this level have been designed for the person who has minimal experience with aquatic exercise,

 or for someone who would like a basic total body aquatic exercise program.

 Flexibility and stretching exercises for the upper body, lower body and spine are initially described,

 Exercise equipment can be incorporated into the strengthening exercises to add increased resistance.

 The extra swim propulsion system can also be utilized to add an additional challenge.

 With each of these exercises, hold the position for 15 to 30 seconds and do 2 to 3 repetitions for each side.

 Place fingers behind back and squeeze shoulder blades together.

 Slowly attempt to raise and straighten arms maintaining proper posture.

 This is just a small sample of the more than 100 exercises you'll find on the all new H2 Exercise video.

 The DVD will be available soon at local H2X dealers or online at www.h2exercise.com.

 I came out with a pretty bad cold which is kind of silly since it's summer and most people don't usually get sick in the summer.

 As you can probably see through the window, it's actually dark outside right now.

 But I really just wanted to do a quick video because I've gotten a lot of subscribers in the past two days.

I really would love to get to 100 before my month, my first month with YouTube is up.

 So if you guys could help me with that, that would be super fab.

 And so I thought today I'd just do a quick tutorial on a really easy updo.

It's super easy if you don't really feel like doing your hair that day or if it's messy.

 Or like if you've been sick like me and you have to run out and do some errands and you just want to throw it back and get out of your face.

It's pretty, got a big ol' poof right here and then it's big ol' poofed up in the back.

 So all you're going to need is some bobby pins, a ponytail and some hairspray.

 So if you guys want to see how I did this, just keep on watching the tutorial.

 So the first thing I'm going to do is I'm just going to brush it out.

 And so because we're going to do a poof right in the front, I have a lot of fringe and bangs right here.

 So that's where I'm going to start and I'm going to focus most of the hairspray I'm going to use for this right in the front.

 So if you just want to get the part that you want to use for your poof,

 I like to go right where your hairline kind of goes in right there.

 So I'm just going to start off by spraying it really good so all the hair stays together.

 If you just do that and pull it so it's really even, you can see how that works.

 I'm actually going to use two, just little, you know, some people call them grips, some people call them bobby pins, whatever you want to call them.

 The difference is they have hair pins and the hair pins are going to be for more, when you're using a lot more hair.

 And so they're actually going to be more open like this and then they're used in different ways.

 It's kind of hard to explain if I don't have anything to show you with them, but we're going to use the closed kind.

 So again, I'm just going to take this front part that's all hair sprayed and go as far back as you'd like.

 And I'm going to do this pretty messy because I like that messy look.

 Then I'm going to take the other one and go in from the other side and just kind of overlap them so they make an X.

 And this next step is I'm going to spray it again now that it's up.

 And I'm going to kind of just pull it apart, maybe rub my fingers through a little bit, make it really messy.

 Because you're going for that messy, not too tried hard look, you know, where it looks like you just threw it together and it looks fabulous.

 And this is a really good trick if you see those girls that have the big poofy ponytails but you're not exactly sure how they do it.

 So all I'm going to do is I'm going to go in from each side, just go right behind your ear with your finger.

 You can do it with a comb if you want it more perfect, but again, messy.

 You're just going to pull it all the way back to about the middle of the back of your head.

 You're just going to push it up and it's going to create that poof right there.

 And all I'm going to do is I'm going to go in with my fingers and just kind of pull it up.

 And it feels like this one side over here is a little bit loose.

 Once you get the volume in there, you don't really want to be messing with it all day.

 And then all I'm going to do is I'm going to take a ponytail and I'm going to ponytail the bottom.

 Just mess with it, get a few little adjustments, make it as big as you'd like.

 You can see by that it just looks really cute and it literally took what, maybe five minutes?

 You have those short layers that you can kind of play with and just make it big.

 It looks like, I mean, it's not super fancy in the back or anything and it'll look pretty messy.

 But like I said, this is a messy updo and it takes a couple minutes if you don't have time, you don't feel like washing your hair.

 And if you guys have any more hair requests that you'd like to see or anything like that, just leave me a comment down below.

 Hair tutorials are super easy for me and I have a lot of good tricks.

 So let me know if you have any questions and I'll make sure I get at them, okay?

 I am gonna make the most amazing, delicious, healthy dessert in under two minutes.

 I take my ripe bananas, because we know we always overbuy, or frequently I do anyway,

 and I have bananas that are getting soft and I don't have anything to do with them,

 so when they get super ripe, I take them, I take the skin off, and then I just slice them

 right into a Tupperware container, or a plastic container, and I put it in the freezer,

 Bananas' sugar, their natural sugar, is intensified the older they get and the softer they get,

 So this I have here are some frozen banana slices that I am gonna...

 I'm gonna drop here in the food processor, fitted with an ice plate,

 So what we have here is some frozen bananas in the food processor.

 You're gonna add this into it after you pulse this a bit and turn it into a mealy consistency.

 You can see it spinning around and it turns into tiny little marbles.

 And then what you want to do is drizzle some of this cold water in and start slowly.

 And just as I see it starting to move around a little bit, I open it up and I scrape down the sides.

 And if you let it run for about two minutes, it gets a little bit more whipped up and a little creamier.

 I make the best granola in the world, which is gonna be another video for another day.

 But I take a little bit of this granola that I make, I sprinkle it on top.

 And I have the most amazing, refreshing, light, nutritious and delicious dessert ever.

 And if you take a peek at where I live on the internet, you will find some great recipes, information and other videos about how you too can enjoy healthy, nutritious and delicious quick foods just like these.

 Hi, it's Christmas morning today in our house and we're going to be making a rotisserie turkey on my Weber grill

 I'm also doing a ham on my other Weber, but I was going to focus this video on the

 Recipes online and there's some pretty good stuff you can buy in the store, too.

 And I got some fresh rosemary, I'm just going to leave it on the stem cram that in here

Just simply because you know there was so much sage in the brine

 Okay, I'm gonna get this on the spit and trust up and then show you what what's the next step is?

 I want to hold the legs in as far as the trussing all I really concern myself was keeping the wings

 In tight I'm no expert in you know in trussing, but you just want the wings flopping around now what I have here

 Fold it together and make one big giant piece what I'm going to do is wrap this around

 Most of the cooking time it's going to be wrapped in the foil here

 So I've got all that butter and the herbs in there along with you know the

 In its own juices for you know a couple hours the last part of the cook

 I'm going to remove the foil to get the skin you know nice and browned and everything

 So what we're going to end up with is just a really really delicious

 Juicy juicy turkey I've done this a few times now and really happy with the results

 I just wanted to show you what I'm going to be doing the rotisserie on this is my old Weber kettle

 Ring for it the rotisserie ring comes with the motor and the spit and a counterweight

 From the Weber website the whole thing a little over 100 bucks for the whole kit

 And it also it's also nice because it gives you some elevation so you can fit larger things in there even if you're not going to

 And on this particular you know kit with the motor and everything you really don't want to go

 Much higher than 15 pounds flip the switch and we're cooking you know we're going to get the lid on

 And as usual when you're cooking indirect heat you want to keep the vent holes on the opposite side of the coals

 For obvious reasons that way forces the heat over your food and out the other end so check on in a couple hours

 if my coal start to weather I'm going to keep I'm going to try to maintain about a

 325 degree temperature in my grill here if the coal start to weather I can just you know either light up a

 Few more coals in my Weber chimney and Adam with my tongs or if there's still hot coals burning in there you can put unlit

 Just make sure you don't you know put any lighter fluid or just the coals right out of the bag.

 All right, so we're I don't know about two and a half close to three hours into the cook

 I just took the foil off as you can see there's literally no color on it because it's been pretty much poaching in that

 This little fire that started below me will extinguish itself as soon as I put on the lid

 And then I'm going to put on a I like this Dimitri's gourmet seasoning

 We're gonna give this bird, I don't know another 40 minutes or so just to brown up the skin

 But I add just a little bit of alder wood into the fire alders are really mellow mild wood

 As you can see it's got really great color now, and it's ready to let rest for a while before we carve it up

 Hey Tim Brown here, welcome to this week's Drum Leak of the Week.

 In this week's lesson we're going to be looking at a drum fill that I took from a great UK

 I just thought, I'm going to have that, so I nicked that one and I'm going to show you

 The drum fill is quite simple in terms of it sticking, it's just right left foot, right

But, what we're going to do with this one is we're going to apply some crossovers

 into it to make it look a bit flashier, but also kind of give us something as a good kind

Right hand on the snare drum, left hand on the floor tom, bass drum.

 thing about this fill is the fact it still incorporates the backbeat into it.

 it really usable and you can use it in your function gigs, in your band gigs, anytime

 you like when you need that little kind of flash lick just to perhaps get the spotlight

 we finish, thank you so much for all the kind comments and messages I've been receiving

You put it over your first needle on the left and pull it just a little bit.

 Then you're going to e-wrap around each subsequent needle so that you are making the letter E in cursive.

 Now a lot of people like to just put it underneath the last needle.

 I prefer to use just a triangular weight so that I've got something to work with here.

 I use the small ribber weight on mine just to give it a little bit more oomph.

 Now when you're done, you'll see that our E-wrap has some nice loops on the bottom.

 But if you take a look here, it looks just about like a cast on using the thumb cast on on hand knitting.

 The other video I have up is for sewing off the work off of your machine.

 You'll see in that one how it looks identical to the one that we do the E-wrap cast on for.

 Today I'm going to show you how to paint a one stroke technique flower.

 We'll go into details further on, but these are normal acrylic craft paints.

 Not to an extra sheen shine, but I do want it to be kind of matte looking so the paint

 Because otherwise we're going to waste a lot of time going over and over and over the

 What I'm doing is I just wet the bristles just to prepare my bristles, have them wet

 So I just picked up some teal color and some light blue color, each color on either side

 And that way when you do your brush stroke, it will give you this tone, two toned look

 So what I'm doing is I'm just patting out the extra excess of paint on my tile right

 So when I do the stroke, it won't have a bunch of wet paint over it and that way it will

 If I don't like the look or if it's too translucent, I'll just go over the same stroke as you saw

 And this is normal water having a dap and dish and a paper towel to dry off the excess

 So I just did three petals at the edge of the nail and then I'm going to paint either

 So you can do this big or you can do this smaller, it's all up to you.

 I make some pressure with my brush just to make them open up and paint the two fused

 So now moving on with a tad bit yellow and this is kind of drying out so I'm just wet

 It's very hot in here in Puerto Rico and I'm sitting right next to the door to go outside

 to the yard so it's super hot today and we're in basically in the sun so the paint is going

 Okay so I'm loading with two different tones of green for my leaves.

 Just grab a tad bit of black and give it a little oomph to the very edge of your leaf

 and keep on building or loading your brush with paint for each brush stroke because otherwise

 This one's kind of translucent but I'll just go over it once it dries.

 Load it if you need to and just go over your leaves once again and this is like a just

 If you need any further details on how to exactly do the brush strokes let me know on

 Facebook at mysticnails.fan and I will see how I can help you out with that.

 I loaded it with black and all I'm going to do is these little tiniest brush marks right

 in the middle of my flower just where the bottom petals meet the top petals.

 So my bottom petals you can't see it right here but they're smaller than these other

 petals I did at the first time I did the first strokes I did at the beginning of the flower.

 Take a dotter just with the tiniest dots right at the very edge of the black color

 There's barely clouds out but once in a while you'll see the glare from or the shadow when

 Okay so moving on to green we're going to do some leaves just where the smile line is.

 You can leave your nail as is do your flower smaller you don't need to do this exact same

 look remember I share with you guys what what I do in the videos and you guys can copy it

 but remember to give it that extra detail that unique look that is especially yours.

 And I would be glad to see your work if you'd like just email it to me or go ahead and upload

 So I did a daisy I'm just going to do four little petals on it.

 I used white with a number one squared brush and all I did was load it on one edge of the

 brush so the movements are from outwards inwards and a little small dot in the middle of the

 daisy and then random little bushy dots as if they were a cluster of flowers just make

 them randomly disappear at the end and make them a lot thicker at the very very bottom

 So pretty and it's ready for top coat so wait till everything is dry especially what you

 used with your daughter because sometimes the paint will still be kind of wet inside

 And if you like apply some sparkle glitter nail polish over the petals and this is the

 We have a butterfly on one side and I showed you guys how to do that a couple days ago.

 The flower and the crushed seashells if you guys want to see that go ahead and look on

 Greetings dear friends, Nick Fox here with another episode of Deep Fry This.

 Found out this week that the Texas State Fair is going to be doing deep fried Girl Scout

 So the first thing that you're going to need is of course Girl Scout cookies, but if you

 can't find them, what I found out from my friends on Facebook, these Coconut Dreams

 Make sure you have your wonton wraps, which you can get pretty much anywhere.

 You can get a brush so you can kind of dress the wontons, and of course vegetable oil and

 We're going to go ahead and start to make our little wontons with our cookies in them.

 Take some water, and you can use your finger or you can use the brush, and just dress the

 Put your little cookie in the center, fold over once, twice, three times, four times,

 and you see how you get this little shape, this shapely guy right here.

 Once you've sealed it, you can take some water with your brush or your finger, and just kind

 Until you have, make sure you're preheated to probably what's going to be your maximum

 Sit for a minute, and as I'm letting those sit, you can take, if you'd like, a little

 My mom's probably going to get mad at me because I'm not using a, thanks mom.

 So once you've gotten your mom to help you with the powdered sugar.

 Hang on, let me grab my camera for a little while, while you do this.

 This growing video is brought to you by Urban Cultivator, makers of the most advanced indoor

 Be a part of the Zero Mile Diet and start growing your own today with Urban Cultivator.

 Hi everyone, today we're going to be planting lentil greens in your Urban Cultivator.

 Now we all know that lentils are packed full of nutrition, but believe it or not, the greens

 So I have a tray here that's about half full of pre-moistened soil and about half a cup

 So take the lentil seed and spread it out nicely on top of the dirt.

 Now lentil seeds are quite big so it's easy to see if you're getting a good coverage or

 Now take some pre-sifted soil and give it a nice coating on top of here.

 Now grab the humidity dome and make sure that the two vents on top are closed.

 Now for lentils, I like keeping the dome on for about three days or so or until you see

 If you haven't already, check out our growing overview video for detailed information on

 Let's go into the watering menu and set your watering schedule for once every four days.

 Now you simply have to start the growing process by giving the flat an initial water by selecting

 water now on your urban cultivator commercial or manual water on your urban cultivator residential.

 For many centuries, lentils used to be considered the poor man's meat.

 In Catholic countries, people who couldn't afford fish used to eat lentils instead.

 So not only are lentils really good for you, but they're also ready in only a week.

 So if you want something fast, fresh, and delicious, lentils are your plant.

 And if you want to try something else, try growing them on a soilless medium.

 And if you have any questions about how to do that, check out our how to grow lentils

 If you haven't already, check out our troubleshooting video for tips and other growing solutions.

 Lentil sprouts are high in fiber and complex carbohydrates, while low in fat and calories.

 So I hope you had fun growing with us today at Urban Cultivator.

 And remember, if you have any questions, please don't hesitate to call us toll-free anytime.

 In response to a request from one of our subscribers we are going to show you how to

Traditionally served with roast beef, these little guys are delicious.

 With your meal, to make a meal go further they used to be used as an entree and served prior

If you have any left over, they don't actually reheat very well, they go a bit

 of leftover savoury or curried mince or some chicken mornay or something like that.

Our meat has another two hours or so before it's cooked so just allow this

And just before we put it into our muffin tins we may have to thin it down a little

 but I'm quite happy to leave it in the jug because it's going to be much easier to pour out of the

Ok, our meat is out of the oven and resting and we are going to make

 muffin pan and then we are just going to give our batter one more little wazz up.

 our muffin pan a brush around to make sure all of that oil is up the sides and along the bottom.

 our batter in and cook them for about 20 minutes just while we are making our gravy.

 water in that and the steam will cook it and make it rise up and puff.

When our muffin pan comes out of the oven, it's really hot, we are going

 to pour this quickly in and then straight back into the oven before the pan gets a chance to cool down.

Ok, so we just take them out of our trays, really light, and pop them into a

Ok, there you have it, Cheeky Richo's Yorkshire Pudding made in the Thermo

If you'd like to see more interesting recipes and ideas, please check out our Cheeky

 so much more to show you and we're uploading lots of videos every week.

 Roast beef with all the trimmings and a serving of Yorkshire Pudding.

 Next I'm going to show you how to write an equation of the line going through

 point or starting equation but let's say here I gave you two points so we are

 missing the ingredient m, okay, the slope m so we need to calculate m. Now let's

 review how to calculate m. We recall that if we have two points x sub 1, y sub 1

 and x sub 2, y sub 2 on the line then to calculate m we just use the formula y

 sub 2 minus y sub 1 all over x sub 2 minus x sub 1 or of course we can

 switch the order and have y sub 1 minus y sub 2 all over x sub 1 minus x sub 2.

 So let's go to these points that I have here to calculate m. If we start with

 let's say the first point I get 4 minus 6 all over 1 minus negative 2 so that

 will give me negative 2 over 1 minus negative 2 is 3 so therefore now I have

 the green ingredient the slope is negative 2 thirds and I can use the

 point slope form of course you'll ask well I have two red ingredients you

 don't really need both of them you can just decide which one you want to use

 y minus y sub 1 equals m times the quantity x minus x sub 1 so all we have

 to do is replace these guys x sub 1, y sub 1 and m by their values so here we

 have x sub 1 is 1, y sub 1 is 4 and we calculated our m to be negative 2

 thirds and let me just finish this formula here so I have y minus 4 equals

 negative 2 thirds times the quantity x minus 1 so there's our starting equation

 where we use the point slope form all we have to do now is clean this up well I

 see the fraction negative 2 thirds what I can do is I can multiply both sides of

 the equation by 3 okay to clean this up so over on the right side the 3's will

 chop okay and on the left we distribute the 3 to get 3y minus 12 equals

 negative 2 times the quantity x minus 1 on the right further cleaning this up we

 get 3y minus 12 equals negative 2x plus 2 let's say we want the standard form of

 the equation so if we want the standard form of the equation we want x and y

 together on one side so I can add 2x to both sides of the equation to get 2x

 plus 3y equals now I want to move that minus 12 over to the right side so I can

 do that by adding 12 to both sides so adding 12 to both sides the 12 negative

 12 will disappear here and the 2 will become a 14 and there you go you have

 the standard form of the equation of the line that goes through the two points

 It all started with the concept of cutting the seatbelt in case of an emergency.

 Then I was scrolling through ebay and I saw this SOG stainless steel manual folder that

 I actually paid more for the shipping than on the blade itself.

 Go ahead and subscribe to the channel and make your video for my 50 subscriber contest.

 Alrighty, Chef Buck here and today we're cooking us up super delicious, super simple seafood

 This is a great thing to throw on the stove, especially during some cool weather.

 Then we're going to throw in some chopped onions, some hot peppers, and some celery.

 Now the hot peppers, you know, that can be optional based on your taste, but always throw

 Celery is great in stew because no matter what you do, it's going to add a little bit

 Throw you some salt in there and some finely chopped garlic and then you're going to push

 these vegetables around until your onions get soft and translucent.

 You know, you don't want to overcook these things, but just give them a few minutes on

 their own and then we're going to throw some tomato paste in there.

 I like to get the bottom of the pan all nice and tomatoey pasty, you know.

 I'm almost cooking this tomato paste on the bottom, you know, and if it gets stuck, that's

 But what we're going to do is we're going to add one cup of white wine.

 And you'll get all these flavors going together and man, it just smells so wonderful.

 And then we're going to add some spices, a little bit of bay leaves, some oregano, some

 thyme, and some basil, and these dried herbs, you know, go ahead and give them a good rub

 between your hands as you put them in and that'll help to start to release these flavors.

 Let these ingredients co-mingle and fraternize for about five minutes, you know, allow a

 Then we're going to go ahead and throw in one can of diced tomatoes along with two cups

 Then what you want to do is you want to raise up the heat, you know, bring it to a nice

 Then we're going to reduce it to a simmer, throw the lid on there, and let it cook for

 And what you can put in here is one pound of whatever the hell you like.

 I got a little bit of chopped up white fish, some squid, and some shrimp, and some clams,

 but you can just put some shrimp in here or just some fish, whatever the hell you want.

 But what you want to do is you want to go ahead and let it simmer for about another

 Now if you just do it seven minutes or eight minutes, that's okay.

 But after that time, you know, go ahead and turn your heat off and you'll be good to go.

 Now if you want, you can go ahead and throw a little bit of rice in there with it, or

 Yeah, go ahead and squeeze you a half a lemon in there if you want.

 Last week, you know, I went to a dance at a clam bake and I pulled a muscle.

 This is one of the, we like to call it a tumbling maneuver, although it is a 3D maneuver.

 It's called a waterfall, and what this consists of is I'm going to push, pull down the elevator,

 the plane is going to flop over, rather quickly, there you go, and land like that, and then

 I'm going to release the elevator a little bit, and it's going to float in the inverted

 And of course we can keep repeating it, we're going to demonstrate it live, so here we go.

 We're going to push it hard, throw it over, and we're going to catch it with some throttle.

 add more throttle, keep the throttle high, and that's again a waterfall.

 We're going to do a flat spin, and how the flat spin works is we're going to throw the

 plane over inverted by pushing hard on the elevator, once it gets inverted we're going

 to hit rudder, and then the plane is going to start rotating that way, and I'm going

 to relax the elevator and add throttle in order to get the plane to stay on that axis.

 We're going over the top, we're going to initialize the rudder.

 I am going to teach you how to transition into a hover properly.

 just fly straight, point the nose up and catch it, and I'm going to show you why that is

What we're going to do is we're going to do the Harrier maneuver

 I'm going to gradually add throttle and elevator and stand it up in position.

 can control its altitude and you can stand it up down in front of you, rather than having

 Absolutely the biggest mistake everyone makes when they're trying to hover is they over

Two keys for hovering, one is really good throttle control, number two is anticipation

 This maneuver that I'm going to show you now is a maneuver that a lot of people have been

 Harrier, and then I do a quick snap flip that brings the plane back into that inverted Harrier

 just getting into a really nice, very straight hover, and then letting it naturally roll

However, sometimes you have to help it along by giving it a little

 It seems to be the maneuver everybody wants to learn how to do, which is a rolling Harrier.

I'm going to show you how to practice it, and how to become proficient

 When you first start doing it, we've showed you the maneuvers inside.

 In today's video I'm going to show you how to remove the nasty stains in armpits when

 Whether you're at the thrift store, estate sales, flea markets, or if you're just trying

 to get stains out of your t-shirts or clothing just to get rid of that funk, right?

 And these quick steps here, I'm going to show you how you can do this.

 Lots of people overlook this type of stuff when they find them at thrift stores and garage

 So for me, doing this for years, I basically just said, you know what, I've got the solution

 Basically applying it to there and what you're going to want to do is let it sit for about

 And sometimes, you know, you do have to apply it a couple times here and there.

 And this is just a little secret here for those that are out there that are wondering

 I found this to be the best one in today's market to get these stains out.

 But here we are, you know, we're getting ready to photograph this bad boy and we're going

 Some good information to have while you're out there hunting, don't overlook the stuff

 So if you found this information useful and helpful, please hit the like button.

 For more information, check me out on my website, PickForProfit.com.

 Congratulations, you just received your new Cook Shack AmeriQ SM066.

 My name is Butch Flick and I'm going to show you how to set up your smoker for its first

 As soon as you remove the smoker from its box, you need to open the door and make sure

 Your smoker should come with an operator's manual, a Smokey at Home cookbook, Cook Shack

 registration card, a meat probe, a control head, a 5 pound box of wood chunks, 4 casters

 with a wrench, 4 grill inserts, 2 side racks, 1 wood box insert, and a stainless steel drip

 Next you will need to find a location for your smoker that is dry, sheltered, ventilated,

 We recommend you run the smoker outdoors, allowing you to have the proper ventilation.

 The vent hole is located at the top of your smoker and a small amount of smoke will escape

 Be sure never to cover the vent hole as this will cause thermostat failure.

 Whenever placing your smoker outside, make sure that it's still sheltered from the elements.

 The assembly required of your smoker is installing your casters as well as your control head.

 Whenever doing this at home, make sure to have 2 people lifting the smoker and lay it

 Inside of your casters box you'll find a wrench, 2 locking casters, and 2 non-locking casters.

 To install the control head, you'll first need to remove the 8 screws that align with

 Place the control head on top of the smoker, aligning the holes, and then secure it in

 With assembly completed, I'm now going to show you how to season your smoker.

 Next you'll want to set your smoker to 275 degrees and let it smoke for a minimum of

 Now that your smoker is seasoned, I'm going to show you how to prepare it for its first

 First you'll want to make sure that the drip pan is placed underneath both drain holes.

 Next, for easy cleaning, you can take 2 sheets of heavy duty aluminum foil and line one over

 the top of the heat shield and the other across the bottom of the smoker.

 Make sure to punch a hole through the aluminum foil so that drippings can escape down into

 With your smoker seasoned and lined with foil, you're ready to load the meat.

 Hi there, in this lesson I'm going to show you a strumming pattern that goes something

 And if we added chords to it, it would sound something like this.

 My guitar is tuned standard EADGBE and I've got a capo at the fourth fret.

 Now the chords I'm using are A minor, G slash B, and C. For tabs on those chords, go to

 We have a sound, I'm touching the strings here, just barely touching them, keeping them

 And the strumming pattern we're doing is eighth note strumming like this.

 One and two and three and four and one and two and three and four and.

 On those emphasis points, we're going to strum a little harder so we hear that percussive

 Now we're barely strumming on the ones in between so we've got this going.

 And we want to push harder on the down, down, up, up, down, up.

 Today I'm coming to you with a video tutorial on how to achieve my braid out, pinned up

 one side look that I wore in a hair of the day video some time ago.

 And you just need some braided out or twisted out hair or some people say stretched hair.

 And the reason why I say that is because of course for this style you need your hair to

 So if you want to do this style on like wet, freshly washed hair, I can't guarantee what

 But have some stretched hair, braid out, twist out, preferably hair that hasn't been manipulated

 So what you're going to do is you're going to decide which side you want your hair to

 If you are like totally a neat freak and you need to have your parts straight, then grab

 So I made a part here going maybe about like a little bit before the crown.

 If your hair is shorter than mine, you may need to use smaller sections because you may

 But you know my hair is not that long so I'm going to grab this amount.

 I'm just going to pull it and I'm going to lightly twist at the top.

 And I'm going to just pin it up towards where my part was over here.

 And I'm going to take another pin because I feel it's a little bit too big.

 And I'm going to make sure that I have some hair hanging down over here.

 Because the style is supposed to be like, you know, a braid out, pin to the side kind of thing.

 And I'm going to take two because this section is a little bit bigger.

 Please thumbs up the video, especially if you like the tutorial.

 Hi, my name is Brandon Sweeney and I'm going to show you how to make some bio plastic in

 First, get a pot, silicone spatula, a stove or a hot plate, a teaspoon and a tablespoon,

 I've found that tapioca starch works the best, but almost any kind of starch will work.

 Before you start, get a silicone heat pad like this or some aluminum foil so you have

 First, measure out one tablespoon of corn starch, four tablespoons of water, which I

 already pre-measured, a teaspoon of glycerin, and a teaspoon of vinegar.

 Mix everything while it's still cold and once everything is thoroughly mixed, then

 It'll start out as a very white, milky looking mixture, but it'll soon start to get a little

 You can see it's going to start to clump up and it'll look like toothpaste in a second.

 When it looks and acts like this and it starts bubbling up and about this consistency, it's

 You notice that it's pretty much clear except for some bubbles.

 They range from thin, flexible pieces of plastic like this, slightly transparent, to colored

 It's impregnated with gauze, so it's thin and light, but also extremely strong and flexible.

 They are already starting to make some things out of bioplastic.

 Gift cards, produce baskets, grocery bags, golf tees, tableware, and cutlery are just

 Most of them are made from a starch-based bioplastic like what I've just shown you how

 See what new things you can come up with, and you'll be doing your part to make the

With the exception of the dried egg whites I don't see any other chicken

 Inside the box you get a plastic tray, instructions, a packet of mix for the

 chicken, a packet of mix of breadcrumbs, and a packet full of ketchup mix.

 Now give it a good mixy mixy until it becomes very thick and clumps into a

Now you're going to take that dough and portion it out into four equal parts.

 Now that they're all covered in breadcrumbs, we're going to take our

 plastic tray with the nugget molds and flatten out each one so that it actually

 of the ketchup mix with one scoop of water in the lower compartment of the

Now I'm going to add a little ketchup to my plate so I can just dip my

The first thing I noticed is that the nuggets don't quite look like

 Hmm, well first of all I think I cooked these a little bit too long because

The ketchup, although does have a slight vinegar taste to it, is very sweet.

 bit too much on the salty side but it's a really interesting interpretation of a

 by itself but it seems to go really well with the chicken nugget.

 nugget is more salty and the ketchup is more sweet so they seem to counter

 some of my other yummy nummies reviews you should totally check those out.

 and we're going to put it right here, right on top of our sushi roll base.

 And if you don't know how to make that, click on the link, we show you how to do that.

 And you see here we're going through, we have the cream cheese,

 Everyone loves it and tries to put a lot on there, but it makes it hard to roll if you go overboard.

 to make sure that the roll takes shape, but not to smash everything inside of it together.

Keep squeezing it while you roll it over, and that's what we want it to look like.

We put it right on top of our roll like so, and we use our fingers to put it on there.

 Ours is embarrassingly dull in this video right here, but trust us, for $12 on Amazon,

 go to our blog, check it out, you can get one of the best knives you've ever owned for $12.

So anyways, you cut it up, and that's what you want it to look like

 Now you take two pieces, or however many you want to put on your plate,

 Now once you have them on your plate, that's when you want to pull out this sushi ko.

 And this stuff really just brings that extra little pop to the plate,

 Really, this is just all about all the oranges and yellows kind of coming together.

 Okay, so we're back in the bathroom and we are going to be re-dyeing my hair red again.

 However, it's been a few months now since I dyed it the last time and so this is kind

 In the last six months though, my hair has actually got a lot darker than it was before.

 So yeah, it's probably going to come out a bit of a plummy colour.

 Right, I have shampooed my hair and I have left it to dry, like completely dry by itself.

 The reason I'm doing this compared to what the actual instructions of the hair dye tell

 you what to do is because my hair has got darker so I'm going for the less moisture

 A tinting brush, a pot type thing, spoon, we'll get to that, an old hair band, you don't

 give a monkey the bow, quite possibly a hair brush and of course the hair dye.

 So I am going to put this into the pot and then we're pretty much ready to go.

 Okay, so I have put, oh well, three pots of the hair dye into this larger tub.

 Right, so tie a hair back first and then this way we can do the hair like before, it's a

 I forgot to mention actually, make sure that you have a towel that you don't care about

 But yeah, make sure that you wash whatever, you get hair dye on individually because it's

 probably going to come out onto other things, especially if they're white.

 Okay, basically the reason why using a tinting brush is preferable here is because it just

 means that you don't get lots of hair dye all over your hairline.

 Saying this, I'm probably now going to get it all over my face.

 Okay, so for doing the back, it is actually pretty handy if you've got a mirror which

 Right, so once you've done with your hairline, you pretty much are done with the tinting

 Much easier, much quicker, especially if you've got quite a large amount of hair.

 A lot of people, when they dye their hair, or when they're dying their hair or whatever,

 they say that you should section it and put it in bit by bit, but quite frankly, I can't

 If you have shorter hair and it's quite fine, you're probably only going to need one pot.

 However, if you have longer, thicker hair like mine, be prepared to use quite a lot.

 Again, I can see why my mother used to go a little bit mental at me.

 Okay, so once you're through and it's all in your hair, I'd suggest just kind of working it through

 Like it was a conditioner, just to kind of make sure that all of your hair is evenly coated.

 Okay, so you want to try and get this onto the top of your head because, yeah, you want it out of the way.

 So the next time I see you, I will wash this out and I'll have red hair.

 As you can see, we have come to the end of our hair dyeing journey.

 So I left it in for about five and a half hours before, no, after, after I last spoke to you.

 And yeah, make sure that you wash it out with shampoo, otherwise you're just going to get bread,

 Perhaps just kind of keep one around your neck in case it does drip a bit, especially if you put on as much as me.

 As you can see, the hair dye really does make your hair quite glossy.

 My hair is naturally a lot lighter, for some reason, I guess it's because it's older, at the bottom.

 So I guess that kind of gives you a good idea if your hair is darker brown compared to having it a shade or so lighter brown, which mine would be at the bottom.

 Um, yeah, although I did still have red pigment in my hair prior to putting this lot of dye in,

 it will actually come out like this if you're putting it on natural hair.

 And just as much if you are putting it on treated hair, like bleach hair,

 this is going to come out like, more like my lipstick probably, what it comes out on dark brown hair.

If you've watched up until here, thank you very much for doing so.

 Oh, and in case you wanted to know what it looked like under natural daylight, here you go!

 This project uses PMC sheet, which is an interesting product because it comes in a sheet form that

 feels very much like fabric or paper and it stays very flexible and it doesn't dry out

And so you can fold this or cut this and treat it just like you would

 necklace that has a crisp knot design cut out of the PMC sheet.

So the clay you want to use this with is PMC Plus because it will share

 the same shrinkage rate and the same firing temperatures as PMC Plus.

 project I have photocopied or used on a scanner to make some high contrast designs.

 are very simple graphic designs, some Celtic knots that I want to replicate on the paper.

 And remember that the clay and the paper will shrink slightly so make sure to account that

 paper I'm going to cut out my square and use a very soft sketching pencil to trace

 be too careful because you can fix it when you cut it and keep going until you've traced

And then to transfer this you simply turn it over, put it on a corner

 of your paper or your PMC sheet and use your finger and then these very tiny cuticle scissors

 pierce the sheet with the scissors and just simply cut out the shape of the knot.

 I'll go across and then I'll go in like this and then make a little snip.

 you want to be cutting a lot of little, don't choose a lace pattern or anything.

 to pinch off a piece of PMC Plus, put it on my board, my work surface, wrap the rest back

And I want a nice level background so I'm using playing cards, four

 cards on each side so that I can roll a nice even sheet that's four cards thick for the

Use your roller and just roll out a square that's going to fit the one that

And just like any other type of metal clay, use water to attach.

 edges being too even because I can refine those after it's dried and ready to fire.

 simply let this dry until it is bone dry, ready to go in the kiln.

 hard and you're able to handle it and pick it up, you can refine the edges with a nail

 temperature that PMC Plus can be fired at, up to 1650 degrees Fahrenheit.

 goal of this video is to make it easy for you to set up and get growing with your Modern

We do encourage you to read the instruction manuals that come with each

 planter as there's lots of good tips and growing advice there, as well as check out our website

 planter, you'll remove the packaging and lift off the top tray.

 a bag of Koi Pellet Grow Medium and your planter's power supply.

Put the tray back on the top of your planter and remove the tape holding

Some of the baskets may pop up, but once you add plants in the grow

 preferably south, east, or west facing, and then add the nutrients and water.

 to do is you're going to pour it directly into the planter baskets, the net pots, and

 that will just fill right down into the reservoir and you should be good to go.

 from seed, do not use any nutrients until the plants have two or three sets of leaves

After that, you can start using quarter strength nutrients, working your way

 up to half strength as the plants become four to five inches tall.

 water to each planter basket, plug in your planter to the wall.

 Adjust the second valve to about 45 degrees until water begins to pump into the first

Adjust the third valve very slowly, opening it to about 45 degrees

 inside the reservoir, reposition the feeding hoses near the bottom.

 So we've washed off the roots of all of our plants, got as much dirt and rock out of those

 The beauty of this grow medium is that it holds a lot of water around the roots, but

 of dust on it, so rinse it two or three times until the water runs clean and you'll be all

 Place the plant and roots in the middle of the net pot, holding the plant so it is right

You'll have to distribute it a little bit to make sure the plant is

 Today I'm using the number four setting on the timer for wet herbs.

 fairly small still, so we could use setting number three, but as they grow you'll need

 Thank you for joining us today, and be sure to check out Modsprout.com for great gardening

 We're going to use the right hand and pull left and right with the stick.

 Now to make this work, your left hand has to be completely relaxed and just let the right one lead the whole move.

 You can see how I'm putting the power on on the left and right side.

 If I turn to the side, you can see my right arm is crossing under and then passing over my left arm.

 This is important to keep the Diablo from tilting forwards and backwards and will keep you balanced.

 When you've got the hang of the shape and where to tell the Diablo where to go, then you put the power on.

 We can now, after the wrap's on, either do some accelerations with the Diablo here or with the right hand wrap, do the same thing.

 Literally putting a wrap on and just doing some moves here will give you Diablo speed.

 It's going to pass in front of the left stick and land back in the centre, putting you into a wrap.

 Swinging into wraps is a nice way of getting in, and it looks a little better than actually turning over the centre with your hand.

 We're going to swing into a left hand wrap here and fade to black.

 Now, now we're in the wrap, this is how to do Chinese acceleration.

 And eventually, you're going to build up to being able to do continuous Chinese acceleration like this.

 The thing that makes this work above all else is your left hand has to be completely passive.

 If you watch my left hand here, you can see I'm just gently gripping it.

 If you apply too much pressure on the left hand like I'm about to do here, the Diablo will do this.

 It will travel towards the left hand and can smack you in the head and it will go out of control.

 We can also do Chinese acceleration on the side or up and down like this.

 Okay, so we're learning how to throw in a circle for circular acceleration.

 We're using the right hand to push and pull out, which gives you a circular throw.

 Practice this first, and then we're going to do the same thing, but we're going to put a wrap on.

 Swing into the wrap, and then with the right hand, push and pull in a circle, which gives you circular acceleration.

 It's very similar to Chinese acceleration, but it moves in a different way.

Eventually, you can make it go in really cool circles like this.

 And stalls, same thing, but when we go up, we're going to follow with both hands in the air.

 Now, here's a little way of putting all the accelerations together.

 So cups, throw start, circular acceleration, and we're going to do a couple of stalls just here.

 Chinese acceleration vertically, Chinese acceleration horizontally, whipping front and back behind you.

 Do a little cross, another stall, bit of Chinese acceleration, and finish.

Please hit me up on YouTube, subscribe, like, all the regular stuff.

 If you've got any suggestions or requests for tutorials, please hit me up, www.kineticworkshops.com.

 An exercise ball wall squat is a great way to get started on a squat.

 If you're a beginner or maybe you're a little bit overweight, you have bad knees, whatever

 it may be, it's an easier version of a squat that you can feel safe with all your joints.

 Now, first thing we're going to do, we're going to take the ball, we're going to place

 We're going to put your butt back first, head chest up, and as we sit down, go ahead and

 raise your hands up in front of you, butt back, and try your best to get your quads

 And then stand up, butt back first, head chest up, and forward.

 It's important that you place your feet at a point when you reach the bottom where you

 We're going to try to get our feet as far as we can, and we're going to do that, and

 If you have your feet too far out in front, then you have too much weight going back on

 lift the weight, maintain that muscular strength and then you're going to need some warming

 So let's go ahead and start off by shaking our hips, we're going to slip on the thread

 We're going to be giving the person kind of a little push at this point and be acting

 You want to feel the muscles find their support, you have a little fidgeting around the muscle

 So the first thing we're going to do is an excellent exercise for our posterior chain,

 We're going to start on a wall by placing our hands on the wall with our core tight.

 I'm going to bend at my knee, raise my heel up and squeeze my glutes up at the top of

 We're going to do one leg at a time, bringing it all the way down and resetting in between

 What I don't want you to do is like where you're standing, where you're breaking at

 Instead, just bring your heel up, keeping your back nice and straight.

 Don't come up to the point where you start to ground and break that back.

 We're going to do equal repetitions on equal sides and that's a heel kick.

 An adductor machine is not only a great way to isolate your adductors, but your inner

 We're going to sit down on the machine and we're going to do a couple of exercises.

 Now, every one of these machines is going to have a handle or a lever of some sort that

 can hold a certain distance between the eccentric counterbalance bar.

 The grab bar is going to grab and then it's going to turn the bar so me at the electrical

 I'm now going to take the tool out and let it sit for about 8 to 10 hours so that it

 I'm just going to set it out on my stand, close my oven up, make sure the oven's turned

 I'll come back tonight and I'm going to paint the mixture of pitch and turpentine on the

 Well now, the tool that we've made, the dental stone tool, has cooled for about 10 hours.

 I'm now ready to apply a mixture that I made of 20% pitch and 80% turpentine.

 I had melted it, poured it into a pan, or into actually a coffee can, and then I poured

 in about four parts of turpentine while the pitch was still in a more liquefied stage.

 Now it's been several months, in fact maybe a year since I've done this, but the pitch

 What I'm going to do is, and there's a couple of tools that I haven't discussed and I forgot

 to mention when we started, but one of them is a paintbrush, a cheap paintbrush.

 Another one is a round cake pan of proper diameter so that the tool can fit into it.

 Now I want to paint the side of the tool that was against the blank, because that's the

 I have to, it's not really a big deal to do this, this stuff is fairly viscous.

 Just take it out, paint it across the top, and this is really for a couple of purposes.

 One, it seals the tool, and two, and just as important, it provides an excellent base

 Just take a couple of minutes, this stuff is really pretty viscous.

 If it's too viscous, you can always add a little more turpentine, and I use Pure Crumb

 The ratio isn't really all that important, but ultimately what I want to do is I want

 Now I've done that, I've got a nice mixture on here, and this will make a very good base

 to pour the pitch lap when I get to that stage in a couple of days.

 Now that I've ruined this paintbrush, which is fine, it's cheap, I think it cost me under

 I'm going to take my tool, which is in this cake tin, and my camera girl, Joan, who's

 my 21-year-old daughter, is going to move the camera so that you can see what I'm going

 I'm at my turbo oven, my Farberware turbo oven, which I purchased this weekend at the

 Goodwill store, a place where you can buy all sorts of electronics and household gadgets

 I'm going to put it into always on at 200 degrees, put the tool inside, and I'm going

 I'll be back in two days, and we'll take a look at what we have, and we'll go to the

 Well, it's been about a day now that we've been baking the tool, the dental stone tool,

 I'm going to let it go for about another day at 200 degrees, and then tomorrow when

 I'm done, I'll take it out, and we'll look at letting it cool down overnight, and then

 on Saturday, we'll probably varnish it, today being Thursday, December 10th, 2008.

 It's about 7 o'clock right now at my home in Brewster, New York.

 It's been about 36 hours since I put the dental stone tool with the mixture of pitch

 I usually do it for about a day or two, and generally speaking, if I say a day or two,

 Well, I'll be back tonight at about 8 o'clock, and at that time, we'll take it out and take

 Then what I'll do is I'll let it sit overnight, and I'm going to varnish or shellac it tomorrow

 morning, and then I'll pour a pitch lap on it so that I can begin to polish my optical

 Hi, this is Mark at learnhowtogarden.com and in today's episode of the 10 Minute Gardener,

 we're in Betty's 10 Minute Garden and we're going to be constructing a brand new deep

 If you're not already subscribed to us at Learn How To Garden, there's a link below

 this video that will take you over to our website and there, just for the cost of your

 email address, it means we can keep you up to date with an email every single time we

 Also it gives you access to our monthly newsletter which I think contains useful tips, hints,

 sometimes recipes and occasionally me ranting about things that get me going in gardening

 The concept of a deep bed is not new, it's something that I was taught as a child and

 really the concept of a no-dig bed is just a progression of it to a certain extent.

 A deep bed means a bed that once it's cultivated you don't walk on it, you don't come pack

 the soil and the advantages of that mean that roots have a much quicker root run, it also

 Also it means that you can create ideal conditions for some of those plants that are slightly

 more difficult to grow in the soil that you have in your allotment or your garden.

 Now a lot of us will choose to surround our deep bed, especially if it's in the garden,

 with some sort of framework and I've seen these frameworks advertised on the internet

 for astronomic prices really and they are easy, easy, easy to construct.

 The one we're doing today is 6 inches deep and there's a reason for that in my mum's

 garden and basically it's going to consist of two pieces of wood that are 3 feet long,

 two pieces of wood that are 80 inches long and four pieces of 3 by 2, 6 inches long.

 Now if you've got a saw you can cut the wood yourself but in this day and age if you go

 to any of the big barns, any of the big DIY places, they will cut this for you and it

 will be half the price of what you buy if you buy it as a ready-made kit.

 And all you actually need then is a drill and some screws and put it together.

 The reason for the sizing here is very simple, my mum already has two and she's given up

 a bit more of her flower garden for a very specific reason, she wants to grow some very,

 So very simply to construct this you take your 2 by 1s, make sure that it's fitting

 just on the end, take a screw, rest it on your knee making sure the screws aren't that

 long they're going to go through into your knee and very quickly put it together.

 Now I'll just do this on all four sides and we'll create basically a wooden trough.

 This has taken me less than five minutes, it's taken 16 screws and the wood was cut

 I'm not a DIYer, I really don't know one end of a drill from the other but this has saved

 me 50% of the cost of buying this online so it really is worth doing and you can get a

 Now these are only three feet wide because that's the distance my mum finds easy to work.

 The reason you don't want them any wider is you do all the work from the sides of the

 Once this is constructed and dug over we're not going to walk on this at all because we

 want the friability, we want the sort of good drainage in this bed and what you can do now

 is create within this bed the perfect growing conditions for whatever you want to grow.

 Now normally what you would do now is just double dig this in a classic fashion.

 So what we would do is take out a spit of soil all the way across the bed and just put

 it at the far end of the bed because it's going to come in last and if you were growing

 Double dig this bed, if you don't know what double digging is there's a link below this

 video to a video we made earlier purely on double digging and you can grow whatever you

 This bed on the other hand is a very specialised bed in that my mum as we've said doesn't want

 to spend any more than 10 minutes a day on this bed so this is a perennial bed and that

 Saturn S series, but this procedure we're going to be doing today can pertain to

 Now on this particular car you can see them, they're right here

 What we're looking for is, we'd like to get it around 45 degrees.

 Now in this vehicle I'm going to be using a piece of credit card

 And of course you want the engine to be warm also to do the pressure check.

 Now if the low side pressure is low and the high side pressure is high,

 Now if the low side pressure is high and the high side pressure is low,

 Now here is a temperature pressure chart that will help you determine

 what your pressures should be for what the ambient temperature will be.

 And that's all there is to checking your pressure in your AC system.

 to need for this recipe will be listed in the information box below, or you can find

The ingredients are, you'll need some Greek vanilla yogurt, this is non-fat

 all you do is put all three of the ingredients in a bowl, starting with the yogurt.

 want to do now is I'm going to put this in a serving bowl and prepare my fruit and show

 and I've got some vanilla wafers, bananas, apples and strawberries.

 Alright, now we're going to talk about the benefits of, here's a wood, here's an iron.

 This is actually a similar weight, but it's much bigger and wider, bigger sweet spot,

 higher center of gravity, getting the ball not quite so high in the air, lower center

 of gravity in the iron, getting the ball higher in the air, and also able to cut through the

 However, I need the ball to get high, so when I blend the benefits together, here is the

 We're going to take the hybrid and allow the club to dig, or just to slide right through

 One of the things that we want to understand is, the normal golf swing, if there was a

 paintbrush on the head, it would make a U, kind of a U-shaped, not a perfect circle,

 Alright, when coming out of this rough, we're also going to get a little more of an upright

 We're going to hinge up a little earlier and allow the club to go down a little more, and

 If I come through with a U-shaped swing, this club is getting affected, twisted, turned,

 If I bring the club up a little steeper, bring it down a little steeper, I'm going to get

 the ball up and out with less negative influence from the grass.

 Again, the hybrid has the benefit of the lower center of gravity, the weight on the bottom

 I can put the ball back in the stance, which typically would make the ball come out lower,

 but because of the hybrid, I'm going to have plenty of trajectory.

 The grass could have held the club back from releasing or squaring up and are left or way

 right, or the grass grabs onto the hosel, this area, and flips the club over, which

Opens, and I've watched some of the greatest players in the world

 Or they aim down the middle of the fairway, and the club gets grabbed on by the grass

 See the ball come up, nice trajectory, plenty of distance on it, up near the green.

 Now here, one of the things I want to make sure is what's the difference between a fairway

 And you can hit good shots that way, but a lot of thin shots that go low.

 I didn't make a big divot there, but I definitely hit the ball on the downswing, trusting the

 When you look at the bottom of your hybrid, on this particular one it says 17 degrees.

 That means the ball is going to go up at about 17 degrees of trajectory.

 Now I'm in trouble, I'm a long way away, but I'm not worried about it.

 Now another option is to take that iron, put the same V-swing on it, but I won't get the

 So now I'm combining a longer shaft, heavier head for the iron in the hybrid, and I'm going

 to get distance and trajectory, higher trajectory bringing the ball down.

 okay well I just used my frame and I drew it out exactly onto this piece of

 plywood and then I did my standoff of 387 inch and extended these lines out

 well I only have to cut these angled pieces for this trapezoid section I only

 have to make two cuts because I was able to make these cuts since they're

 parallel I was able to make them on the table saw so now I'm ready to drop one

 side and all I did is then just lined up my my track saw guide to exactly to the

 mark and so I'm ready to cut I may not have the depth set quite right I'm trying

 to keep from cutting too deep into this piece of plywood but let's see got

 30 second of an inch into that piece so I'm you know this is a this is just

 getting used so it's no big deal I don't care about that okay so now what I want

 to make sure that I do is not release my panel my panel is pinned down just

 the way it's oriented on my drawing on my my piece so let me go ahead and deal

 with this I have to walk all the way around because I'm locked in here with

 I put this thing straddle in my okay so I want to go ahead and put a put a clamp

 out here so I always have two clamps on it at any time so I don't move it from

 okay let's see let's see if I've got this now I've got that that gives me

 enough room so what I'm going to do here is I'm going to take my I'm going

 to take my little square and I'm going to mark exactly to my outside line and

 then I'm going to put a take my sharp knife and put a mark on each each edge

 and that's what I'll mark line the the rubber cut guide up to on the track saw

 so let me get that done and and then I'll go ahead and make this cut okay so

 it looks right on here I can just reach under here for this one okay I'm ready

 okay that's that's all I need this for I put that back in the box so there's my

 there's my trapezoidal shape cut now I'll now all I could going to do is run

 the router around it with the you know cut that rabbit with the router and do a

 This thing is so old, I've had it forever and it still works great.

 Here's an adjustable simmer ring, you don't see that with the light weight ones and it

 You can simmer it down if you want to do some spaghetti or something.

 Put that on over it and it will not leak in your backpack, I guarantee it.

 So let's put this aside and see if we can put together a stand.

 Put that one there, put this one there, put that one there and that is your complete stand.

 Now once it gets warmed up, it will pop out through all the little rings.

 Someone once asked me I worked with, yeah but how do I do in a wind?

 So it's great for a windy area, of course you can put a screen around it and it would

 You want your simmering, your simmering goes on top, control some of the flame you put

 With a full seven ounces of fuel, this is just me, around 25 minutes of burn time.

 So there you go, you stick whatever you want to on it and happy cooking.

 Hey guys, it's Mike McIlhenny coming to you live with another episode of Workout 101.

 In this particular episode, I'm going to be covering an exercise everybody's used to doing.

 You've probably seen me do some of these movements utilizing the bands.

 Well, I'm going to go through an entire setup of how to incorporate the bands while you

 Before we get into it though, I just want to say that there's going to be a special

 coupon code for Maximize by iForce Nutrition that I'm going to be giving at the end of

 So stay tuned for that code and you can get that over at iforcenutrition.com.

 Now the bands obviously are a piece of equipment that's starting to get a little bit of momentum.

 If you have not gotten a set of these bands, I highly recommend them.

 The nice thing about these bands is that they have a clip system to where they have the

 barbell cuffs that are a Velcro strap that can fit around your hand or any barbell or

 They also have a clip system here to where they're easily clipped on, so it's very easy

 Now traditionally, if you're going to be using the bench and you want to incorporate the

 bands, you always want to go with about half of what you would normally bench for those

 So in other words, if I know that I can bench, let's say, 250 pounds 10 times, I'm going

 to cut that in half and go for a set of 10 and then add the bands as necessary.

 These particular bands, the orange here, add about 60 pounds of resistance when they're

 So what we do is we're going to slide the barbell cuffs on top or around the weight

 So I'm going to sit on first, put the barbell cuffs over the weight stack here.

 From there, and I'm only going to use one band for these purposes, but I'm going to

 take the band and I'm going to slide it underneath the lowest part of the bench here.

 If your bench setup does not have a bar down here, I suggest placing a heavy dumbbell in

 From there, I'm going to sit on the bench and I'm simply just going to hook one end

 of the band to the strap and the other end of the band to the strap.

 Now from here, the last thing that I want to do to make sure that I have equal weight

 on either side is I'm going to press down on the band here and the distance from the

 band is going to pull in one direction or the other so I can feel that it's even and

 As you add more bands, just do the individual bands to make sure that there's even resistance.

 So right now, the purposes of doing this movement, if you get stuck in a plateau and a lot of

 people get stuck on the bench, it's the most popular exercise that everyone does in the

 The bands have proven research to significantly increase and actually help you break through

 So if you get stuck to where you can't push too much weight, grab a set of bands.

 The nice thing about the bands is they incorporate something that not a lot of free-weighted

 When I want to go for speed, as far as pushing and pulling the weight as fast as possible,

 that helps recruit the Type 2B Fast Twitch muscle fibers, which are the muscle fibers

 So on the bench, if I want to become powerful in this particular movement and I'm getting

 stuck in a plateau because I simply just can't press or push enough weight back up, add a

 Now, I'm going to show you how to do this movement and then we're going to follow it

 First, what we want to do when we do bench, I see a lot of people do certain things on

 We never want to put our feet up because what that does, it creates an unstable surface

 There's your right leg planted, your left leg planted, your butt should be planted on

 Your shoulders or your shoulder blades should be on the bench and lastly, your head.

 So that's five points of contact that are remaining in place on a base.

 If you're not doing that, then you need to really look at your technique.

 So as we unrack the bar here, what we're going to do is we're going to go for as many reps,

 Now, the reason why I went as fast as possible, again, is to recruit those type 2B fast twitch

 Doing free weight only, if I were to try and go as fast as possible, I'd lose control over

 Because the bands provide resistance down the whole time, we can move that weight fast.

 The other benefit of adding bands to an exercise like this is the weight changes.

 As the bar moves up, the bands increase in tension, making the movement heavier.

 You're strong on the way down, but right here, you might not be able to get it.

 What this does is this allows you to push through the sticking point because the weight

 But as you're coming up and getting stronger, you're actually pushing heavier weight.

 So because you can only push as much weight as you are weak down here, you're only maxing

 By adding bands, this allows you to push through those stronger points in that range of motion

 with the weight getting heavier, which is going to allow you guys to break through your

 To download a workout program utilizing this exercise, click below.

 Hello, my name is Col Cavanagh, I'm Executive Chef in Carleton House Hotel and today I'm

 Firstly, a sirloin of Irish beef, secondly a rib eye of Irish beef or the best piece

 Firstly, the way to know a good fillet is a nice amount of marbling and a nice pale

 A lot of people will use black pepper but I like to use a mix of three types of pepper,

 dried green, dried black and dried white which I ground up with a little sea salt.

 Now with the beef I'm going to brush liberally over the beef some Dijon mustard, getting

 This basically is for taste and it also helps hold the pepper crust.

 As I was saying, the pepper crust I'm using is a mix of three and I want a nice liberal

 crust all around our beef so when we seal the piece of beef in a hot pan we get a nice

 Once your fillet is nicely coated with your mixed pepper crust it's time to cook it.

 To a warm or hot pan we add a little olive oil and then your fillet again.

 So as you cook the sides of the fillet it will hold the fillet up and ultimately when

 So we're moving the fillet now around the hot oil, building up a nice caramelization

 around all edges and you can now smell that beautiful, beautiful pepper scent which is

 It is only a matter of topping and tailing the beef and it's ready to put in the oven.

 Now I nearly finished sealing the beef on all sides and again as you know it's nice,

 To this now I'm going to add a little bit of butter and put the beef directly into the

 I'm cooking the beef in the pan today so cuisson or how to cook the beef in the pan, I would

 give a rare beef approximately 5 minutes in a pan in an oven at around 170 degrees centigrade,

 a medium 10 to 12 minutes and a well done 15 minutes plus depending on how you like

 So I'm just going to put this in the oven now for approximately 8 minutes.

 Now I've taken the beef out of the oven, it's been in there for approximately 8 minutes

 Now to our pan with all the juices still in the pan we're going to deglaze with red wine.

 Making the sauce for any meat product is all about taste and we're trying to use the natural

 juices from the cooking process as a base for all our sauce today.

 To this we're going to add a little bit of brown beef stock and allow that to gently

 Now the beef today I'm going to serve with chunky chips and a nice pepper sauce.

 Your pet deserves all the comforts of home even when traveling.

 with four different sizes of vent clips to fit just about any vehicle.

 the base plate and screw them together with the four short screws provided.

 Apply the weatherstripping to the dash cup and screw to the base plate with the

Cool K9 comes with 10 feet of flexible hose to reach the back of even

To install the other end, screw the kennel cup onto the hose and

 vents for maximum airflow and select the volume of heat or cooling with your

 I'm preparing to go into either the breed ring or the group ring and you

 need to have your dog cool and stress-free so that he'll give you the

 to our favorite hunting spot, it can get mighty hot or very cold.

 she's wet, keeps her cold when it's hot, and keeps her nice and warm when it's

Whenever we get to our favorite hunting spot, this dog's ready to go.

 Grilled chicken can form an important part of any weight-controlled diet

 a teaspoon of ginger paste or you could use freshly grated ginger,

 and here I've got four very thin slices of lime which I've cut into halves.

 Now that the pocket's nicely filled, we're gonna sew him back up

 Depending on how big a slit you made, you might actually need two cocktail sticks.

 Now take the chicken breast and on the upper surface, cut four little slits.

 Check it from time to time and don't worry about the lime burning because you're gonna take that out anyway.

 If the chicken starts to burn, just cover with a piece of aluminium foil.

 Serve with some steamed or roasted vegetables and a couple of new potatoes.

 I hope that's inspired you to stuff other things inside your breasts.

After the fourth time all you're going to do is take a G in the left hand

And then after that we're going to change to E flat on the left hand.

 So when we play the E flat on the left hand we're just going to do this first part and stop right here.

 Now, the second verse, because he does another verse right after that.

 And then we start over two times for the second part of the verse.

 And you can contact me by sending me an email to easypianolessons at yahoo.com.

 However, we disagree with that and we are about to prove our point

 Is it really necessary to use all that butter and cheese to get a state of the art gratin?

 The ingredients and other info for this dish are in the description down below.

 as the ones available in supermarkets are generally packed with salt

 Second, roll some flat parsley and chop it as finely as you can.

 If you want the parsley to be more visible, you can of course chop it more coarsely.

 grate the carrots into a bowl large enough to accommodate all the ingredients.

 You can grate them coarsely or finely, depending upon personal preference.

 Once the carrots have been grated, add the vegan bechamel sauce to the bowl

 feel free to experiment and turn this recipe in your own little masterpiece.

 Now, pour the mixture into an oven dish of the desired dimension.

 roughly an inch or 2.5 cm, so we opted for a rather small dish.

 and also add some coarse breadcrumb for a little bit of crunch.

 we are always extremely happy to accommodate your precious requests.

 So today I am doing a video for you guys about how to cover up your tattoos

 You all saw my Jeffree Star inspired video of how to create fake tattoos

 I mean, what if you're going to a job interview or something and you need to cover that ish

I am gonna show you how to cover it in the simplest way possible

So I'm gonna show you the products that I'm using for this tutorial

 so because tattoos are mostly kind of greenish in undertone you want to cover it up with a

 complementary color to green on the color wheel so the red color is going to cancel out all of those green tones in

 So now I'm going to go in with a mixture of my two full coverage

 Concealer slash foundation and you see how easily it goes over the pink red hues

 It just covers nicer than green and the trick is to keep the foundation going past

 Your tattoo so that it blends in with the rest of your skin now

 We can still see some of the pink showing through here this red

 Over the tattoo now, we're ready for our second layer and I'm going in a little bit lighter this time because

 So the powder will darken it up at the end and again just tapping.

 I am patting it on and this is the method that I learned when I was working at MAC

 So now you can see the tattoo is completely covered and I'm gonna go back in with my powder and just tap all over it

 To set it into place and this powder does also give full coverage as well

 So actually this one looks a little bit better because it's a little bit smoother

 Well, I hope you guys enjoyed this tutorial of how to cover up your tattoos time for the fan shout out

 I am pink everywhere today you guys like how do you like the pink background?

 I love you all so much and I will see you guys in my next video.

 I don't have an appointment for another year a freaking a whole nother year

 spinning helmet mount using stuff you probably already have around your house.

This should be about 2 inches long and you'll also need a nut and

 top or one you're willing to drill a hole in, although I don't recommend it.

 but anything will work as long as you bring something to tighten it with.

 bolt attaches the wheel which is free to spin on top of your helmet.

 or flathead which would require you to wedge a screwdriver or a pair of pliers

Hold it above your head and reach out as if you're trying to turn on the GoPro

 the bolt down to attach the rig to your helmet so an allen key works best.

 can get by with a flathead or just use a pair of pliers but it's a real pain.

 Take your skateboard wheel and drill two holes into it for the screws.

 want to use a bit that's pretty small since the urethane doesn't have too much

Now line up the center of the wheel with the hole you drilled in the

 You'll need a hole at the end of the pole big enough to fit a 1.25 bolt.

 sure it's aligned with the holes you just drilled for mounting to the wheel

 rubbing on the bolt, wrap some tape around it on either side to shim it up.

 If your wheel is really thin you can use a big washer here or just a lot of tape.

 Now put the screws through the pole and tighten them into the wheel.

 you don't squeeze down too hard and press the pole into the bolt.

 used to but once you're accustomed to this thing spinning around up there it

You'll also want to adjust your GoPro so you can see just the top

 Hi guys, it's Thriftastic Mom and I am making chili beans for supper.

 And if you're wondering, this video was requested that I show how I make my chili beans.

 There's no water left in it because ground turkey, you don't have to drain it.

 I don't put the pinto juice in it because to me it seems like it makes it taste more pinto-y.

 Alright, then I'm going to add, I always put diced tomatoes in mine because we like ours,

 Okay, I had to get some more tomato sauce out because I didn't have enough.

 And as I go throughout the day cooking this, you know, it tends to thicken up.

 So, just right now, I am going to start out with two cups of water in it.

 And as I cook it, you know, throughout the day, I will go back and add more if I need to.

 And I got to let it come to a boil and it will start mixing up about two minutes.

 And I got to let it come to a boil and it will start mixing up that chili really good.

 And I ended up tasting it and adding another, maybe a fourth of chili to it.

 And some garlic and about a half of an onion because my husband and son don't really like onions.

 So, I chopped it up small and let it cook down into the chili just for some flavor.

 I just have to let it keep cooking a little while and I'm just getting it so yummy.

Right, this is a very simple one and for those of you who, you know, who basically

 can fry plantain in your sleep, you know, I'm not trying to patronize you but this is

 tip and the bottom and then carefully push slightly deep straight line.

So, the good thing about plantain is it goes with quite a lot of things.

 goes with rice, it goes with beans, you know, it goes with shrimps, prawns, crabs or whatever.

 going to add just a little bit of salt and you do that to mix it.

So, we'll wait for it to, give it some, 4, 3, 4 to 5 minutes and then it should be

 to you that plantain goes with several things, you know, several food.

 fried eggs, you can have it with rice, you can have it with rice and beans, you can have it

 and fry yourself some beautiful plantain and enjoy it with whatever you want to enjoy it with.

 First, I'm going to start with 1 3 quarters cups plus 2 tablespoons of sifted all-purpose

 I'm going to put a quarter teaspoon of salt in that, and I'm going to put a quarter cup

 I'm going to put in next 1 stick of unsalted butter, and I'm going to actually use my cutter

 I did cut the butter into pieces, and I did keep it at room temperature.

 Now once I've mixed it and start to cut into the butter, it'll be sort of a crumbly type

 And then I'm going to add 3 egg yolks that I've had at room temperature.

 And again, I'm going to start to mix this in and start cutting it with this until it

 I'm going to be putting in anywhere from a tablespoon to 1 1⁄2 teaspoons of water.

 I generally only put in 1 tablespoon, but it really depends every time that you make

 I'm going to clean off my cutter here to get some of this out of it so that I really

 And I'm just going to keep pulling it together and mixing it so it all combines.

 And then I'm just going to put a little bit of water in, just a little bit, because this

 And just keep working with it until it forms a ball, and you can see that it's done that.

 And then with my clean hands, I'm just going to knead it, mix it again a little bit more

 Now it's best to actually form this into a little bit of a log and then put it in your

 refrigerator for about an hour to set up and let it cool, because it's much easier to work

 So what I did was I went ahead and made some so that I could have a chilled one for the

 So I will then later put some Saran Wrap, as I have, over this and put that in my refrigerator

 And then I'm just going to roll it out, because what I'm going to do is make actually an apple

 So I'm just going to stretch that out to the consistency that I want it.

 And I'm just going to press it down into my dough and just move it a bit about so that

 I'm going to take out the excess dough, but I can make another pie with it later.

 And then I'm actually going to take these pieces and I'm going to flip them on the other

 And I usually can put about two to two and a half pieces of apple to make the little

 And then I'm going to take that little dough and I'm going to lay it right on top of the

 And then I'm just going to squeeze it, as you can see, give it a pinch.

 And on a cookie sheet that I lightly sprayed with oil spray, and I'll pull out this really

 Now you'll bake them at 400 degrees anywhere from 15 to 25 minutes, depending on your oven.

 And then just with a little bit of egg white, you can just paint over your little pie.

 And then I like to sprinkle just a little bit of granulated sugar over the top and then

 Now you can bake those or you can actually fry them if you prefer in the deep fryer.

 You have a cute little pocket pie of apple or whatever flavor that you like.

 Greetings everybody, let's talk about how to draw flames today.

 So I'm just gonna do a demonstration with a sharpie or a colored pencil just so it's real bold

 But what I want to help you get a feel for is the way that it feels to draw flames and the kind of motion

 Smooth part and then I always kind of come in and put a little extra

 They don't have to but if you're doing a car, they should line up or they should come out an angle like this

 This is just you want to do a pair of few things in mind if you're doing two cars

 I mean two sides of a car you want to keep them uniform if you're drawing it on a car

 You want it to fit with the car and mold with it the right way?

 And if you're just doing an accessory port where it comes out of like an exhaust grill or behind a tire or something like that

 You just want to make sure you match up your flames to the right size and proportion of what you're doing

 Shade have it fade out and then it would be a little thicker back here

 Like that and then a little you know, just give it some texture

 Like that, you know something and then this part would be shaded if you're actually laying this down as paint

 And you would go around and pinstripe this final outline and then you'd have a fade from like bright red

 Orange to yellow right here and then yellow back to here or something like that

 There's also a lot of custom flame things you can do where you almost you have it come out like that

 Flame like that and then the next one comes in and it goes behind it like that

 You've just got to really get into that motion and the motion is this long swoopy kind of

All right, but when you draw it kind of try to think out be like, all right

 I'm gonna go down like this and I'm gonna bring all my flames to a tip here

 So like if this was a car and this was the wheel well like that and this was your tire

 Then you would want to make sure that it's kind of fitting in with those proportions

 So if this was a tire and it was coming out of the wheel well, I'd do something like this

 I've got all of my back curves kind of lining up with the angle that I wanted to I've got it

 Well, which is gonna look really nice and I've got them all kind of ending over here

So I'm gonna bring it out a little bit more and then I'm gonna bring it out

 Or if you really mess something up and you need to go in and be like, all right, I'm just gonna add

 If we want to render it, there's a lot of different things that we can do if we want to render it

 If we're doing it traditionally then you know, we would have read at the at the very end kind of bring it out like that

 And then bring that red in a little bit here in the swoop parts

 If you were doing this with paint or airbrush, I mean you would really need to do a lot of practice

 Just because and here I've got some different color orange as well

 Like that take your time by the way, don't blast through it the way I'm doing it but

 You can do flames in any color too, I mean you're not limited to doing it in the traditional style

 Really at this point with the yellow try to blend a lot of these different

 At this point with the yellow try to blend a lot of these different

 Different ones that we're using and then I'd fill all this out with the yellow back up into here

 Then I'd go back with my lighter orange and it's all fading at this point tons and tons of fading

 But when I'm done what then I would want to do when I'm sure I got the right look

 That's when I really have a chance to make sure that these lines are correct because before you can just do it with a with a

 But now is when I'm not getting all sketchy and crazy loosey-goosey now is when I'm going in

 For a really precise kill here and nailing those lines like that.

 Sorry, my paintbrush is currently offline so I can't help you there.

 Just in every piece of paper and textbook and binder I could get just trying to get these swoops, right?

 Hey everyone it's Julie and today I'll be making stuffed shrimp.

 place some mayo into my bowl, some Old Bay seasoning, some cayenne pepper, a

Gave it a little whisk then I'm going to add an egg to bind everything

If you see that parsley it's because I cracked the egg in the same

 seafood whether it's crab cakes, lobster, anything I like to add a little bit of

Now with a paring knife we're going to butterfly our shrimp just like

 it like that and then you're gonna poke a little hole like that so they can

Well not an actual hole just poke the shrimp a little bit with your

 some salt and pepper you can squeeze a little lemon juice if you like.

 don't own a mini ice cream scoop that would be the perfect tool to use but I

 never bought one of those because I always thought what would I use it for?

 think it'd be great for punishing little kids though when they're bad.

 want ice cream okay but one scoop they'll throw a tantrum when they see

 of crab meat on top then we're gonna bake them and look at that they turn

 with some rice or some vegetables if you really want to be nice to your guests

 you can serve it with some steak and this would just be the side.

 hope you guys make this and if you do let me know how it turns out I love

 If you like what you see, please give me a thumbs up and be sure to subscribe for all

 Hey everybody, it's Rachael O Beauty and today I'm here to do a very highly requested hairstyle.

 To do this style, all you're going to need is a few bobby pins, the open kind, as well

 And then to moisturize, I'm going to be using the Curls Elixir as well as the Passion Fruit

 And typically what I'll start off doing first is I'll section the hair into three parts.

 This is the bangs part and then the back goes into two separate parts like you're going

 So since I just woke up and this is a twist out, I'm going to start off with putting the

 Curls Oil in and that's just going to give my hair a little bit of shine, help me to

 As you guys can see, I just recently colored the front part here so this part is extra

 One other thing I like about this hairstyle is that because this is a fresh twist out,

 I can wear it in a protective style for a few days and then I'll take it down, I'll

 take the twist out down and you'll have a totally new hairstyle.

 Okay so what I'm going to do first is I'm going to just start off with tuck and rolling.

 And when I say tuck and roll, that means that you just take the hair and you just literally

 I like for my rolls to be a little bit full so I'll pull some of the hair from the back

 up here and you just basically start pinning and it doesn't have to be extremely perfect

 So you just tuck the bobby pins in like that and then you go around the back and just do

 I'm not into perfect hair so it doesn't have to be perfect for me.

 Okay now I'm using mainly primarily the closed bobby pins and I use the open ones to just

 I'm using the closed bobby pins because most times natural hair is really thick so you

 You can actually wear this top part out like this if you have twisted it out and it was

 You can either just roll the bangs under, pin and secure like this but lately what I've

 Kind of like on a slit because I want it to look a little funky looking.

 But if you guys want to see how it looks the other way you can follow me on Instagram.

 I have a few photos there and my Instagram is at Rachel O Beauty.

 I'm using mainly the open bobby pins here but I probably will stick some closed ones

 Okay so now what we're going to do is just take the Passion Fruit Control Paste and I'm

 Typically I don't use a lot of gel but when I do I'll use this.

 I've wet it a bit because it was bone dry so I've just sprayed it with a little bit

 I had a problem with this nuka glaze the last fire and I did some nice delicate sort of

 It's lovely but it doesn't like oxide on the outside obviously.

 So to combat this what I'm trying to do is I'm going to put this colouring on as an under

 So I'm going to put it underneath this glaze to see if it shows through and biscuit it.

 So the iron oxide won't show up underneath so I'll put a sort of a Hakimi type of brush

 stroke of white slip under there and I'll just show you how I'm doing it.

 So this is just white ball clay and just one movement like that.

 This one again, this one's been dampened off because it's got bone dry this weather.

 I've been using just plain iron oxide but I saw a video by Simon Leeds today so Simon

 It's not my best skill I must admit but I quite like the effect.

 I'm just determined to solve this problem of it melting on this nuka glaze.

 Bit of a disaster with this one in the last instant so it's a little bit wet still so

 Like I say, these pots were nice and if the oxides had worked it would have been a nice

 We're hanging out again with our good friend Brian O., raw food chef.

 Today we're going to be trying a delicious Japanese comfort food known as ramen.

 We're using the best ingredient of all, Hannah's home-brewed kombucha.

 Now this is exciting because usually people use miso or different ingredients.

 We're using kombucha in our recipes and it enhances the flavor, the uniqueness, the enzymes.

 So we're using the spiralizer machine and we have some cut butternut squash.

 And you just kind of twirl it a little bit with a little bit of pressure.

 Okay, so now we're going to pour the kombucha and this becomes the broth or the soup.

 And it actually kind of absorbs in the butternut squash and it gives it the cooked look and

 When I use my rooibos kombucha, it gives it a smokier flavor, which helps add to that

 And this looks like the fish cake that you always see in the ramen noodles.

 And then we use coconut that we opened previously and papaya and we carve them into an egg.

 And so you just scoop the coconut and the papaya and then it becomes like a boiled egg

 In just a few minutes, we have the Araragi Living Japanese Ramen Noodles.

 People ask me all the time, does it really take a few minutes to make?

 And if you look really close, you can see some of the fizz action as the natural occurring

 If you soak this overnight, like for 12 hours, or the longer you soak it in the fridge covered

 If you want it to be softer and have that really cooked flavor, you could do it the

 And the broth has adopted the color of the noodles, which gives it more of that traditional

 I highly recommend if you're going to soak this for 24 hours, definitely put the mushrooms

 Or you can make it fresh and it's kind of crispy, depending on your mood and how you

 I bet if you put ginger in the kombucha, that'll add to the broth flavor.

 I hope you'll experiment and do leave us some comments about your different experiments

This video clip goes hand in hand with you that was done as a post on the website

 Basically put it through the pasta machine as you would have if it was just normal pasta, so it gets passed through about 12 times.

 it is fairly tacky because it's a wet mixture, so just make sure between rolls that it's

I've got flour in a shaker just to be able to sprinkle flour over both sides.

 Exactly as I do with pasta if I had pasta that was a little bit sticky.

 So we pass that through and like a normal pasta we stretch it out.

 Now we're stretching this out down to millimeter and a half thick which on my pasta machines about a seven.

 then all we're doing, hopefully this shows it a little bit better, we're taking one end

 and popping it in the tray and sprinkling with a bit of flour occasionally.

Probably a little bit too much flour still sticking to the pastry.

 It's sunk to the bottom of the pan, but really hasn't affected the

 Then we just toss that into some icing sugar or as our North American friendly people call it,

 Then we just toss that into some icing sugar or as our North American friends like to call it, powdered sugar.

 So we're just tossing each of the pieces of cristali in the powdered sugar and they're done.

 Today I'm going to do something about cooking, we don't normally do that much, but every

 time somebody asks me about our Muscovy ducks, I tell them it tastes like beef and how we

 normally slow roast it or slow cook it and that it comes out like shredded beef.

 So it just so happens that tonight we're having some of the duck meat with a rice dish and

 So I'm just going to take open the slow cooker here and the first piece I'll show you here

 We've done it in 6 and less, it was just a matter we left the house early this morning

 So here you can go, I've just got these huge salad forks, you can see it just peels right

 And we've used this in a number of dishes, my personal favorite is for shredded tacos.

 I don't see any reason, I don't think we've done it yet, but it sure looks good for some

 barbecue sauce on a bun and probably any number of things you can think of that you would

 It's going to pick up flavor the same way beef does, it's going to have the same texture

 that beef does, but I have to stress to you this is Muscovy duck, this is not the standard

 Pekin duck, which Peking, by the way, just to get a pet peeve out of the way, Peking

 This is not Pekin, this is not what you're going to buy in a grocery store, at least

 When we butcher our Muscovies, we save the breast and the leg, we just skin them, because

 I mean if this were for barbecue, isn't that just what you want to see?

 I'm just going to kind of grab this bone here within the tines of the fork and lift it up

 This will come off real easy, I don't have to have the forks except that it's so darn

 This would peel off with just your fingers if you were calloused enough to put up with

 But anyway, there you are, that is Muscovy duck, slow cooked, and now you can put this

 As it happens, we do sell our ducks, if you live locally, we sell our ducklings all the

 They are different in price depending on how old they are, because not only have we had

 to put the time and money into raising them, but also the older they are, the better we

 can tell what gender they are, so you know more of what you're getting.

 So there you are, that is the amount of meat produced from one half of one Muscovy duck.

 And I'm not even sure what's there, I forgot to put my scale under this and zero it out

 So why don't I pause you and we'll see if we can determine just how much weight we have

 I know a lot of the time in stores when you read weight as something, you're talking about

 So take this with a little bit of salt, I don't know how much your other meat is cooked

 That right there will stretch over my 7 member family and have leftovers.

 Duck was probably about 8 months old at the time of processing.

 I hope you all learned a little something about Muscovy ducks with this.

 And if you want to, just contact us on our Facebook page or an email at jared at j and

 Hi everyone, today I'll show you an easy way to make Vietnamese caramelized

First of all, let's get the fishes ready and well seasoned with minced garlic,

 Then mix well and let the fish well marinated for at least half an hour.

 After that, have a pan with cooking oil ready and fry the fish for about 15 minutes.

 Meanwhile, we can prepare the pot with a layer of sliced galangal root, aka Thai ginger

 Now it's time to make the caramel liquid by adding 3 tablespoons of sugar and 50

 can be skipped if you happen to have or find this caramel sauce by using 2

 Well, there are actually many ways to make Vietnamese caramelized fish and

 books on how to draw cartoons, manga, animals, anatomy, all sorts of stuff.

 to show you how to draw a pretty retro girl, pretty retro girl character.

Generally, every artist has their own style, but generally speaking, very wide smiles

 are not as appealing on female characters as slightly more modest smiles.

 out the very bottoms here, the eyelids, which adds a nice look and adds a cheerful look.

 character, but when you're doing a pretty character, you have to round them off.

Because the light, the overhead light hits this way and the top eyelid acts

 as a roof, as a canopy, and it covers the eyeball and casts a shadow down on the upper

 And I'm the author of many popular how to draw books on everything from cartooning to

 In this video we will take the air out of polystyrene packing peanuts with acetone,

 What I put out here was not the full 6 grams, I just measured part of it for now.

 Then add the packing peanuts to the acetone which you've added to a beaker.

 When you've dissolved it all you should be left with this sort of gooey, very weird substance.

 So today's harmonica lesson is dedicated to arpeggios and improvisation based on arpeggios.

 There's gonna be series of these lessons where each one covers a certain individual improvisation approach.

 For example, A minor 7 arpeggio consists of notes A, C, E and G.

 Going up the whole range with A minor 7 arpeggio and down with D minor 7.

 Once you memorized the notes of both arpeggios, go on and play with the track.

 First play just arpeggios and then incorporate notes from A minor scale.

 So it'll make create phrases that you are not used to and do skips.

 You don't necessarily have to play arpeggios only when you improvise.

 The story that I've heard is that it was first made popular by Howard Hughes.

 Then it died off for a long time and now it's coming back and it's a huge rebound.

 A lot of times you order a mojito and the bartender is like, oh god, because you have

 The reason you need to muddle it with this little tool right here is that you need to

 smash it to release the oil so that you can taste them in the cocktail.

 So what you want to do is take two, you know, I say two of these little things.

 Because you have to muddle them up, what I'll do is I'll fold them in half and then I will

 Which if you have to do that, then you would want to add a splash of soda water on top

 But hopefully you'll have something in your bar called simple syrup.

 It's designed to go in a drink so you don't have to worry about that sugar granulating

 So we have simple syrup and we're just going to put about a half ounce splash or so.

 Then what I do is I will take a lime wedge and squeeze and drop that in there.

 So I have my mint, my lime, my sugar, or I'll have actual sugar packets and soda water,

 So this is the part that bartenders really kind of have a problem with.

 So you just smash this up a little bit, just enough to mash these ingredients.

 We put our flavors in there first and then it's just like a regular cocktail.

 Then for your mixers, you want sweet and sour, leave some room, and soda water.

 So I'll take my tin, just throw it on there, it'll lock, and then shake it two or three,

 And then it'll just kind of get all that stuff mixed up in there.

I promised folks I'd send one out with our email about how the easiest way to cook the salmon is.

And when I take it out of the bag, what I usually like to do is give it a quick rinse in the sink.

 If you notice, sometimes there's a little blood on the fillets.

 Because they use chlorine in their water and I don't want to marinate the fish in chlorine.

 So, once I get the fillet like this, the quickest way is just to cut them in little medallions.

 If you have a cast iron skillet, you can get by with no oil also.

 And they'll stick at first, but once they caramelize because of the sugar in the salmon, they'll release from the pan.

 Then we'll flip them and they'll be done in just a couple seconds.

 Let me show you a couple other things you can do with the salmon here while we're waiting for that to happen.

 Once you've got a piece of this thawed out, this will last for you in the fridge for 7 to 10 days.

 You can also take it and cut it on the bias at an angle like this.

 You go down to the skin and just keep on taking little pieces off like this.

 And that you can use to fry with your eggs in the morning or put on a salad.

 And how you tell that they're done is that when you compress them with your finger, they'll start coming apart.

 We'll give those just a couple seconds and they'll start going the other way.

 You can throw it in a lettuce leaf like that and we all get a piece of it.

 To begin making liquid fry food, first you need a Dixie cup or something similar.

 Add some tank water and then some spirulina powder which you can get at any health food

 You can add some other things such as hickory fry bites, as well as little pieces of shrimp

 But don't feed too much because otherwise it will cloud your water.

 I just finished doing my tutorial on how to do the Bentonite Clay treatment and now I

 pat dried my hair so it kind of messed up a little bit of the curl definition that was

 But if you want to know what that looks like, check out the video before this one.

 Right now, all I'm going to be doing is a quick style tutorial and tell the truth, I

 Like I said, it wasn't pre-planned, it's just spontaneous and the style that I have decided

 I think I'm going to do the Twisted Diva, but I'm going to do it the way that I originally

 The Twisted Diva, if you don't know, I did a tutorial on it before when I had my Kinky

 Twist in and the idea, where I got that idea from for that style, was actually when I had

 I was in month 6 or 7 and I did this, my first go around being natural, so before my second

 The first thing that I'm going to do is put some leave-in conditioner in my hair because

 So I'm going to be using Beyond Zone Pro Formula Last Call Natural Balance Leave-in Conditioner.

 I haven't done this style in like a year, over a year, so we're going to work with it

 I'm going to go ahead and part my hair out for the style that I'm trying to create.

 Okay, so the first thing that I think I did was, first of all, let me just fluff my hair

 up a little bit so I can see how much hair I'm actually working with.

 Alright, so the first thing that I did was I designated, I parted out the hair that I'm

 Okay, so the hair in the middle that I've parted out is the hair that I plan on leaving

 The rest of the hair is actually going to be twisted upwards, okay?

 So the first thing that I'm going to do is I'm going to start on this side.

 Okay, so the whole idea to this style is just to make sure all of your twists go upwards,

 So what you're going to be seeing me doing is just flat twisting my hair.

 I'm just going to be flat twisting my hair to go in that upwards direction.

 And basically what I did was kind of just twisted them up into a ponytail area, but

 As you can see, the twist as I parted the first one was up here.

 And the other one was kind of a little bit lower, going down this way.

 Then what I did was I went to the back and I did one, two, three twists going this way.

 That left me with one little corner triangle twist that I twisted upwards.

 Then this little area right here, all my flat twists became a little bit clumped.

 So what I did was just roll them together, the ends together into one big flat twist

 So what I'm going to do now is just take out the rubber band that I had holding my hair,

 Originally when I did it, I put some Hawaiian silky gel in my hair and I wore this style

 So what you can do with a wash and go is just pull your hair forward, which will basically

 just apply your Hawaiian silky gel on wet hair and pull it forward to make a bang.

 And because of how I parted it, my bang is supposed to kind of go sideways over here.

 And then you just use your finger or you can use a hair pick and fluff up the middle and

 The flat twist actually just took me about 10 to 15 minutes to do.

 So it's pretty easy, not much to do, not much to it and it's super cute.

 You can dress it up with shells, rhinestones, flowers, whatever you choose to.

 But how I plan to rock this style tomorrow is that I'm either going to wear it in a wash

 and go or I may just do a wet twist out and just rock it that way.

 I haven't really decided yet, but I'll post pictures afterwards.

 I'm going to go ahead and just take some quick pictures and post them and I'll talk to you

 Hi, if you have any of these combination locks and you happen to forget the combination number

 So I'm going to teach you a really fast way to accomplish that.

 And all you need is a can of beer or one of these, you know, any pop can will do and

 So what you do is you take the can and you're going to cut it like all around this way and

 What you do at this point is we're going to cut a small portion of like, not a square

 Once you're at this point you're going to cut a strip, a thin strip.

 One cut there, another one there and let's cut this right through the middle.

 And you're going to make a triangle here so it's basically one cut here and another

 Make sure it goes around and actually it fits right in around this, if you want, bracket.

 Again, going to insert it, wrap it around, pull out this thing and push down, okay?

 At this point all you do is just push down and pull up and it's open, okay?

 Pull this thing up while you slide it, insert the strip into the neck and all you do is

 Now I'll come over here and I will put a gentleman in some overalls some obogoshes

 Just come in and just loosen that up and he can be carrying a bag or something.

 Let's see if we can't put one more in here to where we can kind of make a nice grouping.

 Group them together bring that and I'll see this will the his jacket here will define the edge of this person's

 Coming here some dark britches for him and just kind of complete this here.

 Stoplights laying across the street waiting for a bus who knows what they're doing.

 We'll put a hat on this gentleman here coming down like that and around here.

 It's called negative painting you paint what's behind the object to make the object appear

See how that figure just pops right out at you and we'll continue it on down here

 Hi, my name is Amanda Hesser and I'm the author of the Essential New York Times Cookbook.

 And today we're going to make David Ayers Pancake, which is a recipe that was printed

 And the thing that's great about this pancake is that it's oven baked, super easy to make,

 you mix it up, and it's also known as a German pancake or sometimes it's called a Dutch baby.

 There's flour, there's milk, there's nutmeg, there are eggs, butter, lemon, and confectioner's

 I like to use a cast iron skillet with a nice kind of rounded edge and we want to set it

 Basically, you just want to get this warm so that it will melt some butter.

 And then I'm just going to transfer it to a very hot 425 degree oven.

 It has grown up out of its pan and now I have to move pretty quickly.

 And then you just cover it with confectioner's sugar and call everyone to the table.

 As you can see, it's super thin and delicate and it's delicious.

 This is just one of more than a thousand recipes from appetizers to soups to desserts that

 I hope you'll pick it up and I hope you'll get in the kitchen and have fun and enjoy.

 So to create the perfect burrito, the first thing you want to do is you start out with

 a warm tortilla and the tortilla already has fresh cheese in it.

 Now, our good friend here is going to demonstrate to you exactly how to do it as soon as he's

 You see at Baja Fresh, they start with a massive, massive tortilla so that they can create a

 I want you to notice that virtually everything they do here is fresh.

 And she's making or filling up fresh salsa bowls for an order that they're delivering

 An order that will be like many other orders that they make today for companies all over

 When you make a massive burrito, you want to roll it perfectly.

 So notice how he folds in the edges first, folds it over, wraps it very tightly.

 And he's going to wrap it because this will help keep it intact while you're eating.

 Now you know exactly how to wrap a burrito so that they don't fall apart.

 I know yours at home often explode out of the bottom and do that.

 Hi folks, today we're going to demonstrate the installation of the Access Truck Bed Mat.

 The tools necessary to do this installation are a drill with a 3-30 seconds drill bit,

 If you don't want a drill, you can use the optional adhesive snaps included with every

 We've got a nice clean truck box, I've familiarized myself with the instructions, now we're ready

 I've got my mat centered side to side, I've got a quarter inch to the front of the box,

 We're ready to install our snaps, we're using the bed mat as a template.

 The snaps have a through hole that acts as a guide for the drill bit.

 I've already inspected the box for any obstacles, now I'm ready to drill.

 Install your screw and snap, roll your carpet back, and carefully turn your screw in.

 I've got this snap fastened, I move to the opposite rear and work my way forward on the

 But while in place, it will protect your cargo, your truck bed, and your knees.

 Thanks for watching the video, and check out our other products online.

 minutes before the kids wake up and I just heard Brayden so I'm going to do this fast.

 I've had several video requests lately to show how I make my baby wash.

I made it in peppermint and it was actually like cold going on my

A couple notes on this is that it does not get all sudsy, so don't

 the coconut oil comes to room temperature, it even gets a little cool.

Not completely like it was in the jar, but it will solidify a little bit.

 to try it because lavender is really good for babies to help them sleep at night.

 more note I should say is that when a little bit goes a long way, and the coconut oil you

 use this on them because the coconut oil makes them so, so, so soft.

 use too much, it can also get in that bathtub and make it a little slippery.

Just because it doesn't suds up, that doesn't necessarily mean you have to

So anyway, if you like this video and you'd like to see more things like it,

 have a special baby wash or body wash recipe that you'd like to share.

 So next when it comes to liners, any sort of liner that's just a pencil, you can really

And again, I like to go ahead and after those are dry, I'll go and clean

Then when it comes to liners that twist up like this, I very carefully twist them

 up and I just kind of spray around it and then I set that to dry very gingerly.

 And then with things like NYX Jumbo Eye Pencils, again these you can just kind of roll into

 really can't necessarily, you know, the product itself can't be clean like this is my MAC

So what I like to do is I just kind of spray it down a bit, take the

So I just kind of like clean it, get the spout clean and then again spray into

 the lid just to really sanitize anything and everything just from touching it and using

 it and it sitting on your cupboard or your dresser or your makeup kit or what not.

 just make sure that everything like that is kind of cleaned out.

 again really take this and just rub it down and then you know you can really get into

 the spout because just from it like clicking over and stuff, some gunk gets stuck in there

 so you can really just tidy that up and make sure it's at least sanitized even if you can't

 you think you can clean or I missed touching base on, definitely leave me a message or

It used to be smaller and straight and now it kind of turns so that when you put

I do go ahead and I clean you know the top of it and I clean this stick

However, because I do use this on clients, when I use it on myself too, I

 kind of just put it onto you know like one of those little glass dishes or if you use

So I just kind of like smear it on there and then, so this has never actually

 like touched and you know been transferred like the whatever when you touch it to your

 kit and one that I use at home but both of them I don't use right from the wand.

 it's like dirty you know when you just get little like bits and pieces from your purse

So I mean you can clean here but because this is like it squeezes

 out and then you put it on and it squeezes back in it's quite unsanitary to use really

 on anyone else unless it's a family member and you're comfortable with it or what not

 because I mean you're probably getting like skin flakies from your lips.

So unless you plan for ever to twist up and use a brush these are

 So I mean you know you kind of put it on unless like I said from the beginning when you get

 it you know you take like a lip brush to it or you know you put it on a palette and

 that I own this kind or even like lip glasses like this with the doe foot applicator I only

 use on myself because you know I don't like using them on clients or anybody.

 those are a few items that you know you can't really sanitize much other than sanitizing

 it on anyone else because you know you do dip the brush in and apply.

 products that if you are a makeup artist or you do freelance like I do anything like that

 you definitely want to have you know yours and like liquid I don't ever use on clients

Other than brush cleaning that's how I sanitize all my makeup and keep everything

 clean after I you know use it on a client or even if you know I tend to try to sanitize

 my makeup at least once a month if I can get to it once you know every two months but when

 I do have a huge you know wedding or whatever like I just did on the weekend then I definitely

 to do this if it is your own product and you're the only one using it.

 you know how you feel about you know bacteria and stuff like that.

 bother some people are germaphobe so it's just kind of wherever you're at with that

 Tom Petty and I think John Mayer recently covered this too if I recall I think I came across that on YouTube so

 so I don't know if John's playing it differently or not, but here we go.

 And an a okay, we'll talk about the specific techniques and all that stuff in just one moment

 Okay, I'm gonna go ahead and play it and then show you how to do it.

 I'm looking at my chart over here on my screen and it's gonna go something like this

 Okay, literally that's the whole tune guys, so let's talk about specifics

 Okay, and by the way, any of the techniques that I'm talking about here today

 Get your hands on this chart here that I just did for this tune

 And then we got a G, okay, here's my cat it's a chew piece a H you mean then we got a G, okay

 Okay, the way I play my G is a lot of a lot of you will write to me and say what are you doing with

 Your G you're a freak and I say yeah, I'm a freak and here's how I play my G

 You play like this it's fine, but I lift my first finger up and I and I

 Put my second finger here, and I mute that fifth string okay, and that's how I play my G, okay

 Fingers two three four gonna be right there on that a okay, and this is how you're going to count this okay?

 And and okay, those are your hits your hit you're doing anticipations on the a so it's going to go

 Okay, so that takes a little getting used to most people when they're strong this they're going to do an all

 Okay, so there's a few different ways to play this one for those of you that are just starting off strumming

 That's the whole song guys all right if you have any questions check out your guitar sage calm

 Manual for some of my other videos that I'm doing on strumming and music theory and all that good stuff

 So check out those other videos as well keep stopping by I'm trying to put a video out a video up every day

 Well, hello everybody, my name is Atiya and this is my channel this is Smooth Complexions

 Eyeshadows and pretty much that's it on the top of my eye cuz it's just like a base color

 I'm gonna take some close-up pictures and I hope you guys enjoy

 But a lot of people wanted me to do a makeup look for the weekend.

 But if not, I may be wrong, but I like okra ultra style is a really nice light nude color

 I'm just gonna do the the bottom part of my eye with that to add

 My pigment after this so if you stay tuned for that, it's coming up

 Of course if you don't have Beijing you could use a paint pot and let's see there's plenty of them out there

 you can use a paint pot to set up a shade stick and right now I'm using the

 So I really enjoy when I slam my eye with my finger and then brush the brush back and forth

 So that'll be a good way to get the very edge of your eye when you're sweeping the brush

 And I think next we're gonna go ahead and take the cocoa motion

 I got that in the tester cuz I didn't know if I was gonna like it or not

 I'm gonna take the 239 brush and I'm just gonna go over there with the Beijing just over that I

 And at the end of this there will be close-up pictures so you can see how the eye came out

I'm gonna take my 217 brush and we're just gonna get in the edge there and

 Just darken it up just a little bit and just get it all shaped out correctly

 Just keep blending that's the main thing just blend blend blend blend you could be okay with that

 Okay, yeah, I forgot my liquid eyeliner but right now I'm just gonna take my fiber wig mascara I love it

 And I'm just gonna put that on but also just remember to put a black

 I use the Urban Decay liquid liner just a line the top in black as you're gonna see at the end

 Go ahead and just line the top with a nice little black liquid liner right now.

 I'm gonna take my mineralizer in dark and I'm just gonna sweep my face over

 NC50 and I just love this over that one on now it really contours my face just the way I want it

 And I'm gonna top that off just to give it a little dazzle and glow with a moth to flame.

 That came out so I'm just gonna top that off with the dazzle glass

 You can also add any liquid I mean eyeliner lip liner that you want

 Hello, my name is Kimberly Olson and today I'm going to do a review on my new favorite

 I'm also going to show you a bonus recipe for an amazing juice drink.

 If you haven't had a chance to check out my other videos, please do at FitKimTV on YouTube

 So with it being the New Year, I'm getting more questions about juicers than anything

 As I told you, one of my goals is to really make sure I'm doing videos that are answering

 If you've seen my other video on juicing, and I'll put a link on this video, How to

 Juice Raw Fruits and Vegetables, I kind of talk about the benefits of juicing.

 But today I'm going to tell you about this juicer compared to my other one, and I'm also

 This right here is the most amazing birthday gift from my husband.

 The other one I had was Jack LaLand's, kind of his original one.

 Let's just say it was kind of starting to wind down a little bit and I really needed

 What I would recommend is if you're just starting to juice, is just start with something between

 I did talk to a friend and she got hers on Craigslist because the lady who was selling

 So that's an option too if you feel comfortable using Craigslist.

 So this is, I don't know how to pronounce it, if it's Breville or Breville, but I think

 Scott and I, we juice every other day now and we make enough juice for the next day

 and just make sure to seal it in a mason jar and fill it all the way up so there's no oxygen

 So we're using our juicer all the time and it was really time to get a really good one.

 If you go to Bed Bath & Beyond and if you have one of those 20% off coupons, you're

 So the differences as far as that, like I said, it's a lot easier to use this one.

 So lower intensity fruits would be, or vegetables would be things like cucumbers.

 They're super easy to juice, but everything I have today is kind of hard to juice.

 I love this drink because you're getting great nutrients in your body and it looks fun and

 We have, let's see, five organic apples, two beets, and I'm actually using the whole thing.

 I have sweet potato and then about two inches of ginger root here.

 And if you look at this, look at this amazing, beautiful color.

 After you're done, it might drip a little bit, so I just put a little rag down.

 With the ginger, has heat generating properties to it, helps with thermogenesis, metabolism.

 They just kind of help purge toxins out of your body, cleanse your body.

 The apples add a really good flavor and obviously we know the benefits of apples.

 And then the sweet potato is loaded with vitamin C, really important for your immune system.

 Now what's also cool about this is that there is a foam trapper.

 And you just have a little bit here, obviously, just to try it.

 In what you're seeing, you're getting all the nutrients that are in the food and they go right into your cells.

 So they're going to absorb in your body within like 10 to 15 minutes.

 We eat too many dead foods and we need to put good nutrition in our body.

 So in the feeder, the catcher here, all of the fiber of the fruits and vegetables is in here.

 So you can reuse this if you want to, to get the benefits of the fiber.

 So if you like this video, please subscribe at FitKimTV on YouTube.

 I'm actually going to be covering an awesome weight loss supplement shortly,

 Hey everyone, it's Morgan and today I just wanted to do this big curly hair tutorial.

 So in my last curly hair tutorial, you guys pretty much liked the before result of me

 And of course I also had a little hater that was like, oh she's always bashing afros or

 What I said was I did not like the Diana Ross hair on me, on myself.

 I think it's beautiful in other women, but to me that's just not my thing.

 And Arizona is super hot, so I don't want to have a whole bunch of big, big hair when

 So um, yeah I have nothing against afros or natural hair or coily hair or anything like

 You guys who have been with me for the longest know that I have been natural before.

 So yeah, if you guys don't think I like big hair, you guys don't know me.

 Now if you have naturally curly hair and you don't wear weaves, I'm sure that this could

 But I say this is for weaves because with natural hair, with your own natural hair that's

 growing out of your head and it's curly hair, you're going to deal with your natural oils

 And it's just different when you have curly weave than having your actual naturally curly hair.

 So anywho, I hope that you guys will stay tuned to see how I got this big curly hair.

 But you know what, I want to switch it up and I want to do a middle part.

 Okay, so I'm going to have to spray this down so this will stay to this side.

 Now it's already a little bit big but we're just going to make it even bigger.

 First thing I'm going to do is I'm going to run some gloss drops because once this gets

 Not sure how much this costs but I'm just going to take two pumps here.

 It's going to be really easy to make this big then to tame it down.

 I'm going to take a wide tooth comb and I'm just going to start from the back section.

 I'm just going to lightly go through it from the end to the top.

 Try to split up some of these grouped together curls if that makes any sense.

 So you're definitely just going to go with the ends first and just bring it upward.

 Okay, so compared to this side you guys can see that this side is much

 you definitely want to make sure you get it up in the crown area because it's just

 I would suggest to kind of comb up and kind of not so much tease.

 You don't want to tease curly hair but just kind of like get up in that root area so that

 Okay, I'm just going to go ahead since I had created a new part I'm going to take some

 concealer and I'm just going to make that part look a little bit more realistic.

 So I'm just taking a little small brush and this concealer is MAC Studio Finish.

 And I'm just going to go ahead and place this right in the middle there.

 So yeah, I hope that you guys liked it and I'll see you guys in another video.

 So, it's all ground up and it makes a nice spread that you put on toast.

 It's good on a lot of things, but it's a great ingredient to use for brownie making.

 it's 10 tablespoons if you're not quite sure about measuring the 5 8ths.

 but into an 8 by 8 by 2 inch Pyrex baking dish, I'm going to put my mixture.

 The final ingredient is here to emphasize the hazelnut flavor of the Nutella.

You can just buy them in a package like this, at least where we live.

But, if you can't find them, you can leave them out or you may use a different nut.

 Pecans are always popular in the South, but you could use walnuts or

 I think I'm only going to use about half a cup because I'm covering the top and

 starting with 10 minutes and I checked and actually all I had to do was look in and see they weren't done.

 I have my tiny little glass of Coca-Cola to go with my brownie and

 I guess it's the hazelnut flavor that makes it just a little different from your normal brownie.

 It's a little more cakey than my traditional brownie, but some people like the cakey type of brownie.

 The taste is delicious and they're very easy to make and I don't think that you will fail

 with this recipe because it's just if you watch it when it's in the oven, you'll know when to get it out and it's perfect.

 It's a very simple task, but you know, I've thought I might as well show you

 Next thing you notice is there's two screws right here, which can be very difficult to

 Access if you have the glove box in so you have a hook arm right here

 I'm not gonna swing it down because I don't want to dump this one

 But yeah, you'll see two screws right here after you get them out you work your panel a little bit like this

 I'm gonna pull these two bolts out and if you have your factory stereo

 It just pulls right out of this pocket stay tuned and I'll show you what we do once we get that all out

 Alright guys, so the next thing you're gonna have to do is you see the dash gets very simple

 Make sure you test fit it and you do this the right way because it would suck if you didn't but all you need to

 Can be tough as you can see I used some spacers that came with the kit so that way it sits flush on

 So see these this is where you're gonna flip up the tab with a screwdriver flip it up.

 So do that and then next of course, we're gonna have to do our wiring hard

 This is the other thing you're gonna obviously need for this one is an antenna adapter

 And of course, all you have to do is go into your local store and they'll got and they have them

 I usually like to wrap a couple things of tape because there's nothing worse than your antenna adapter coming out

 Which you've already wired up now and then it's time to slip the deck in now if you have a Bluetooth mic

 I think you can always do is clip the Bluetooth mic on the top of this piece and then

 Drill a hole back here or you can try and work a hole somewhere in here

 Like I said drill a hole somewhere in here or you might be able to actually work it around through here

 But once you get the Bluetooth wire in behind you can plug it in

 just clip it on here and then you don't have to worry about your window being open and driving down the highway and when blowing

 All you do is you slip it in here and then you can tuck in the wire

 It is pretty easy, but your easiest bet is putting it right here.

 Next thing to do plug everything in and I'll show you what it looks like when it's all done

 It's a KDR 450 if you're wondering it's like the basic of the base deck

 Guy in here just needed so he could maybe plug in his phone and he mainly listens to a.m.

 For sports and stuff, so I hope this video helped you out if it did be sure to press the like button and of course if

 Thanks again for watching and again any other videos you want to watch I have like how to change the brakes on a Sunfire and

 This is the first of a pair of videos about the art of comping, which just means improvising an accompaniment for yourself if you're singing or someone else is singing or whatever.

 The particular kind of comping I'm going to be looking at is for contemporary pop piano ballads, pop songs, that kind of thing.

 So if you're into Elton John, Ben Folds, Tori Amos, it's the kind of stuff they play when they're singing, which is kind of half improvised and half not.

What I'm going to do is take a very simple chord sequence and show you a number of options, progressively more complicated, for working up a comp from it.

 So a chord sequence, a very simple one, starts with E, goes to B, then C sharp minor, then A.

 It's a really common sequence here in loads of different songs.

 OK, not desperately interesting but safe and steady and would definitely go under a song that had that chord sequence.

 Look at what I'm doing, just single beats on the chords in the right.

I'm using the pedal a little bit to sustain them, else it would sound a bit choppy.

If your piano is just a little bit clunky, playing three notes in the left as close together like that in a triad can sound a bit muddy or a bit over full.

 OK, so two notes in the left, just a little bit of a change in the chord.

 You often hear pop musicians who are not that great on the piano using it because it's pretty easy.

 So if you ever listen to Noel Gallagher or Paul McCartney or someone like that play the piano, you'll often hear that approach.

All you're doing is taking the chord, playing the top two notes with that hand, and then the left hand and the right hand.

 OK, dead simple, a little bit more interesting, a little bit more rhythmic.

 I'm not going to play it all the way through, but I'm going to play it in a way that's a bit more interesting.

 OK, dead simple, a little bit more interesting, a little bit more rhythmic, but again, nothing horrendously complicated going on in there.

 As you can see, what I'm doing there is exactly the same as in the last version, in the right at least.

 In the left, I'm just adding a little bit more interest, a little bit more rhythm.

 In the left, I'm just adding a little bit more interest, a little bit more rhythmic variation.

 Remember, we've just started off with that basic chord sequence.

 In the second one, we'll go on to look at slightly more complex variations of the comp we've just been considering.

 And if you want to see it in full size on my YouTube channel, obviously just Hunter Adam YouTube channel, you should find it fairly easily.

 If you're not sure about the chords I've been using, you could try the Piano World Chords Tool, the link for which is here.

 A really, really useful little tool which is good if you come across a chord you're not sure about and just need to figure out the notes quickly.

 Alternatively, you could have a look at my book which contains in the appendices a full listing of just about every chord you will ever need.

 The material we've been talking about in this video and which we're going to talk about in the next is all covered in part three of the book, Leadsheets and Comping.

 So you might find it useful if you're not looking at it already.

 If you're interested in finding out more about the book, how to really play the piano, the stuff your teacher never taught you, you can learn a bit more at this website address which is coming up now.

 Forget the books, forget reading music as far as I'm concerned.

 If you just want to play some songs and you want to do it quickly,

 Whether you're young or old, this is how I taught, this is how I taught, and it works.

 You've got four kinds of chords, major, minor, augmented, and diminished.

 If you've got a C chord and you're saying, but this is a C chord, this is all six strings.

 If I want a C minor chord, I take that three of the one, three, five,

 Lift up the little finger, insert the middle finger right here,

 Always put your little finger down first, followed by this finger.

 you've just further decreased the agility of this little finger.

 you put the pinky finger down on the B string at the fifth fret,

 followed by the ring finger on the fifth fret, and then the pointer finger.

 There are three ways that you can play a major and minor chord.

 you're going to drop this right here on the ninth fret on the G string.

 Then you're going to take this finger and put it on the eighth fret,

 you're going to put this finger down first, on the thirteenth fret, B string.

 you would just put the weakest finger down first, on the thirteenth fret, on the B string.

 And then you've got your middle finger right here, on the twelfth fret, G string.

 You now know enough to play along with Buddy Guy, and Feels Like Rain.

 Now this roast red pepper soup is always popular when I serve it in my restaurants and it can

 Now making it with this blender is really easy and it's great fun.

 Even if I say so myself, I think it's an essential piece of kit for any kitchen because it's

 so easy to use and helps to make great recipes at just the touch of a button.

 I strongly believe that if you buy something like a new blender for your kitchen, it ought

 to make your life a lot easier and help you achieve results to be proud of without a load

 Here we've got eight pre-programmed functions including dips, milkshakes, cakes, smoothies

 So whatever it is you're cooking up, you can just press one of these buttons and the Intelligent

 Each program goes through a unique sequence of speeds to create the best blender ingredients

 I'm going to roast six chopped red peppers that I've already chopped up, taken the seeds

 It's going to take about probably 35 to 40 minutes to get it nicely caramelised.

 Remove them and just let them cool a little bit before we start our blending.

 Okay once the ingredients have cooled slightly just pop them into the blender.

 Now to get the lid off we've got a lovely little ring here and it's got a great seal

 So what we're going to do is just scoop all these vegetables in.

 It goes fast, it goes slow, it throws all the ingredients around.

 Now you could of course prepare this well in advance of Christmas Day or whenever you're

 Maybe just finish off with a little what we call in the trade a chiffonade of basil.

 Salmon, herring, mackerel, cod, trout, sardines, albacore tuna.

 And this is flaxseed, which is another healthy fat, more omega-3s,

 And I'm introducing something in addition today, which is kelp.

 Cheeky Richo's dehydrated mango cheeks and mango fruit roll-ups.

 machine and the thermosheaf machine to make some mango leather and some dried

It's mango season and we have a lot of mangoes so let's not waste

 thing we're going to do is add the little pieces to the thermosheaf, not

 for any reason other than the fact they're going to be blitzed anyway and

 the other cheek pieces will be easier to use if they're in larger portions.

 just put all these small pieces which are on either side of the cheeks, see

 thermosheaf jug and now we're going to blitz them until they're really quite

 creamy puree here, pure mango, there's nothing else in there and we're going to

 the puree straight onto this because it'll just run right through.

 particular machine has three trays like this so just smooth it all around and

 it's just going to go like roll-ups only it's got nothing else in it except

 trays ready to go into the dehydrating machine and we are going to run it all

Okay our dehydrator has been loaded with our mango pulp and sliced

 mango cheeks and we're going to set it to the highest setting and set it for

You can make mango wheat spars that I show you in another video.

 Put it in muffins, you can do anything with it and that's what you should have.

 in it so it's not going to keep outside of the fridge but it's really delicious.

It's an energy food with lots of vitamins, light and it's easy to

It's making use of mangoes that are well and truly in season at the

Now to get this off easier you could actually spray the tray with

 olive oil or macadamia oil to release it but I prefer to have this all natural.

 matter you're probably going to tear it into pieces anyway and just separate it

 Squeeze it on itself it'll hold together and that's what you have.

 They cut easily, they hold together well and they transport readily and they're

 ideas please check out my Tiki Richo channel and please subscribe, leave a

 have so much more to show you and thank you very much for watching.

 Today I'm going to show you a recipe for cranberry banana loaf.

 After Thanksgiving and Christmas, I like to pick up bags of fresh cranberries and just

 stick them in the freezer and then they're readily available when you're ready to use

 And just, it makes a nice, healthy, colorful, interesting addition to banana bread.

 So the first thing I'm going to do is combine the dry ingredients in a bowl.

 And I've got one and a half cups of all-purpose flour, one and a half teaspoons of baking

 Half a teaspoon of baking soda, half a teaspoon of salt, and half a teaspoon of cinnamon.

 I've preheated the oven to 350 degrees and I've greased a 9 by 5 loaf pan.

 So I'll just set that aside and we'll go on to the wet ingredients.

 In this bowl I've got a quarter cup of melted, unsalted butter.

 And to that I'm just going to add one cup of sugar and one egg.

 I'm going to stir in three quarters of a cup of mashed bananas.

 I like to leave some of them whole, but most of them I just chop up.

 Now I'm going to add in the dry ingredients that we already mixed together and stir it

 And I'm going to bake this at 350 for about an hour or until the toothpick comes out clean.

 I'll pop that into the oven for an hour and I'll show it to you when it's done.

 Just want to let it sit in the pan about 10 minutes and tip it out and let it cool completely

 Thanks for watching and I hope you'll try some cranberry banana loaf.

 I'm not gonna outline my lips, because that can also be kind of scary.

 Don't be afraid to put too much, because if you put too little of black on your brush, it can turn out being grey.

 Try not to go all messy and big, because that can also be really scary to little kids.

 Yeah, this is basically the clown that I used for the Duxbury Student Union show, The Holidays.

 The kids loved it, and it was pretty popular since it was right next to a hayride.

 So, then, once you've got that, you always want to make nice big eyebrows.

 I'll probably, later in the year, be posting up a scary clown thing.

 I like doing, like, Clown 1 and Clown 2 from Baratunde Mansion.

 I was thinking of doing a teardrop, but I don't like being a sad clown.

 A clown's job is to get you thinking about other things besides the economy and all the bad things.

 another bartender, the challenged, makes a cocktail featuring that ingredient.

 My friend Lee Zaremba at Billy Sunday has challenged me today to cheese it,

 which was kind of ironic too because a couple days prior I was talking to a

 friend back home who had cheese it all over his car floor because his son had

 littered the car with them and I went on a huge rant about how much I love

 thinking about some of the things that we have here being a Korean influenced

I started rolling with that and I actually took a cheese it and put

 it's the most savory and I infused caraway into the gin so that's somewhat

 off with the City of London gin that I've infused with caraway.

 with flavors of orange, lemon, and lime and a little gochujang.

 I'm gonna fine strain this because there's not too many solids.

It's good and dry, and at this point we're going to finish the preparation for storage.

At this point, we'll cut them down to within about an inch of the top, making sure that

 we don't get into the top of the cloves, and if we cut too close to the clove, sometimes that will

 admit some disease spores, and so we want to avoid getting any kind of disease during storage.

 The next step in getting ready to store garlic is to cut off the roots.

 we don't cut too close to the basil plate, so we are not allowing in any disease pathogens.

 point, most of the soil should be gone from the base of the roots, and if you have some loose

 wrappers, it's okay just to peel it off like that, but you want to leave as many wrappers on the bulb

 make sure that you don't brush them hard or drop them or cause any damage because that will increase

 that you're sorting out ones that have obvious disease problems or perhaps damage from when you

As we're preparing the garlic for storage, this would be a really good time too

 cloves results in large bulbs if that's your goal to have large garlic bulbs.

 maybe use those for eating, and then save the larger ones for planting.

Ideal containers for storing garlic should provide great ventilation

You can also store in open containers like box tops or something like that,

 with 60 percent humidity, which is about an average house condition, you should be able to

 Hey guys, it's Christmas day and I had an iPhone today and a couple of other stuff and

 I got an iPhone 5 and I'm going to be filming what I had this morning.

 Not all of it but this one thing that I was so happy about and it comes in a box like

 You know in the film on the back of it it's got a silver shamrock badge that looks like

 And look it's there and it's got a thing on the back of it that makes people have wounds

 Next I'm saying the best for last so I'm going to show you the skull one next.

 So obviously my favourite and the best one by my opinion is the pumpkin one.

 So if you're wondering guys I'm probably going to put up there the title which is if you're

 wondering what these are called they're called silver shamrock masks from the episode Halloween 3.

 Like websites where you can find Jason Bowie's masks and other masks.

 If you're wondering on this tag it says Halloween 3 Season of the Witches.

 Hi, I'm Brittany with Kanye Systems and today we're going to be creating one of our iPad

 This is for the iPad 3 and the Smart Covers come in a variety of different colors.

 One of the great things about the Smart Covers is that it has an auto shut off feature so

 when you close the flap on the top, the iPad's going to turn off.

 It's one of the neat features of the Smart Covers aside from the multiple color variety

 When we're going to do the inserts, today we have three different choices.

 We'll probably do a gold finish considering our image we have here.

 I'll go ahead and clear off the table so we can show you how easy it is to press these

 These items are very, very popular right now and they couldn't be any easier to do.

 What I brought with me today is the image we're going to put on our iPad cover.

 I have a blank, pink, iPad 3 cover, a couple sheets of protective paper, and we're going

 What we'll want to do first is remove the protective coating on top of our substrate.

 Once we remove our protective film, we can go ahead and line our image with our insert.

 Once we get it centered, we can go ahead and secure it down with a couple pieces of heat

 Once we have our heat tape secured, we're going to move on to our press.

 We're going to place a sheet of protective paper on the bottom, grab our transfer, and

 You're going to want to find what's just right for your equipment.

 Today I'm going to be using 50 seconds, and I'm going to be using light pressure.

 We're going to lift up on the press, remove our protective paper, and we'll peel back

 Give it just a few seconds to cool, and that should be the last of our sublimation, and

 Now that we've finished our sublimation, the next step is very simple.

 We have a double stick peel coat on the back, so we'll just peel away.

 We're ready to align our substrate with our cover, and once it's in place, we'll go ahead

 and we'll press it, secure it down, make sure that it's not going to go anywhere, and that

 So we have one with an iPad 3 already in it, so you can see how snug it fits in our case.

 And again, the Smart Cover, when you close it, it's going to turn it off, and then when

 It's a nice little protective cover, comes in a lot of colors, and we have a full line

 of iPad and iPhone products that you'll want to be sure to check out, along with our other

 The ingredients for the Greek salad are Greek vinaigrette, Kalamata olives, feta cheese,

 red onion, cherry or grape tomatoes, cucumbers, olive oil, spinach, Greek dressing, and in

 Since it's chicken breast I'm being pretty liberal with the olive oil.

 I'll put those in about halfway through so that the shrimp can cook alongside it.

 The chicken has cooked about 10 minutes so I'm going to put them in for another 8-10

 The best way that I've found to seed the cucumbers is to use a melon baller.

 I've sliced it 3 times here and now I'm going to do really thin slices this way.

 I'm going to use all of the onion that I'm going to use amongst both bowls.

 Now that the chicken has cooled I'm going to go ahead and clean it up.

 I like to wait until after it's cooked so I don't have to deal with the raw chicken.

 I like to do it this way to add a little bit more of the Greek flavoring.

 I haven't been able to find a recipe for one that I enjoy that has those bright bold flavors.

 I like to add the dressing and give it a toss before I add the feta cheese.

 Now that I've made sure that was blended well I'm going to add the feta cheese.

 Everything I'm doing for this one I'm going to do with the shrimp.

 Now I'm going to cover this and put it in my refrigerator for a good 5-6 hours or better.

 The longer you let it sit the better so that the vinaigrette can get in there and make everything happy.

 If you want to make it the day before it's even better the next day.

 Then you will serve it on a bed of fresh spinach or even over some pasta.

 Opening a large glass jar that has a wide mouth, such as a pickle or sauerkraut jar,

There's a need to help people open the jar, a kitchen towel, or one

 of the many kitchen jar opening helpers on the market, such as this large, multipurpose

All these methods seem to help, but they don't make the job of opening

 means there is a net force of 85 pounds pushing down on the lid.

 seal and let air in, there's no net force since now 85 pounds of air pressure is now

That's 85 pounds pushing down minus 85 pounds pushing up and we get

 pop, you know the seal is broken and the outside air is rushed in.

 because the lid is easier to open when you run it under hot water.

 you destroy part of the vacuum inside of the jar because the warmer temperatures vaporize

 some of the liquid inside the jar so the net force pushing down on the lid is no longer

How much it is reduced depends upon how much you warm up the contents.

 In fact, so much pressure will be built up inside the jar that if you put the jar in

 a 250 degree oven, the jar will explode with the lid smashing into the ceiling of the oven.

 I'm in Maryland zone 7 and we had plenty of nights of 10 degrees,

 And instead of putting the salt either into your dressing directly,

 and you can always just add in whatever ingredients are fresh from the garden.

 I'm going to show you where I picked this from, get this set up, and show you

 ...flowers, buds, and leaves of second-year kale make delicious salads.

 You know, technically the kale leaves, the collard leaves, stay sweet.

 a large part of the stem and go ahead and make salads out of them.

 just how much really comes off of your second-year plants that you can eat.

 the flowers, small tender leaves, tomato unfortunately from a grocery store,

 but the garlic's from the garden, the cilantro's from the garden.

 I typically use about two-thirds olive oil to one-third red vinegar.

 to make a delicious salad dressing to go on your garden greens.

 Hey guys it's me again Elise and I'm coming at you guys with this really quick

 video on how I achieved my high twisted donut bun using clip-ins.

 basically what I just did was I combed all my hair into a high ponytail.

 your hair is shorter than mine's by all means you can go ahead and make a bun

 but I will be leaving my hair out and you guys will see why in just a second.

 So instead of installing my clip-ins the traditional way I'm just clipping them

 Okay so I used just about three maybe four clips and as you guys can see my

 left my hair out just because I wanted to look a little bit more natural and

I'm using my hair in order to get that yacky texture so therefore

 it looks a lot more natural as if it can really be truly all my real hair.

 So again now I'm just twisting the excess hair around my ponytail in order

 stretched out and I'm just tying it around my bun to secure it down.

 forehead so I'm not quite sure how I feel about high buns but you can

 accessorize your look by adding like a scarf or maybe a headband.

 can kind of just add little accessories or whatnot in order to make the style

 day I want to try something different in order to take most of that look off my

 and I'm just going ahead and clipping the clip-ins around that ponytail.

 So again I'm taking my donut bun and I'm putting it around the ponytail and I'm

 low bun looks like with the side part and I think I like this look a little

 literally grabbing the back of my head as we speak because it's bothering me.

 Oh Wigs if you guys want to know where to get affordable clip-in extensions.

 Again these were the double wefted clips and all you need is one pack in order to

 to correctly assemble a flute and the reason why you have to correctly

 assemble the flute is because if you incorrectly do it you can end up with

 that the flute case is top up because if you open it upside down it bonks it when

So if you need to put a sticker on the top that says top because

 your flute case looks the same on both sides that's a really good idea.

 moving parts because they bend and they bend in fractions of a millimeter and it

 just takes about maybe two months of bending them just by a fraction when

 they'll suddenly start to leak and you'll say why is my flute leaking all

 the middle section and I've got my hand around the smooth part.

 pick up my head joint and the head joint goes into the middle section with a

 mouthpiece can be bent up and it can wreck the soldering that's holding the

 magic marker so that I can see exactly where it goes every time it's perfect.

 A440 I've got a line drawn on there and I've got another line for if it's super

 flute many many times and I've got my line there so I'm set up there.

 some people say well put your thumb down over the bottom two keys okay to start

 it and you put it on in a circular motion okay and then once you've got it

 even a little bit on and it's nice and circular motion move your hand down to

 the very very bottom where there are no keys so that you don't bend them and

 If you put them on at an angle and kind of like you know bend it every single

 time this is going to go into like an oval shape and then the repair person

 a little bit until you've got it move your hand down to the smooth part and

Now there are many diagrams of how to line this up it all depends on

If you start with the ball in the middle of the bottom key you're

 an approximate average place to line it up okay but it depends on the length of

 ball closer to the body so that the pinky can reach to the B key or the C key

So start with it in the middle and then ask your teacher for help.

 Here's the little ball that's on the foot joint lined up with the center of

 clearly in this light and here's where I actually position it because I have

 extremely long fingers so that's where I have my line up of the foot joint.

 as the head joint alignment goes some people start lining up the hole with

 the keys okay but other people find because of what shape chin they have

 that they'll have to align it differently like for example I line the

 far edge up in the middle of the keys but because I already have my markings

 established a comfortable placement you can have markings on the back that tell

 place when you're not playing your flute for the flute to go is in the case.

 leave it on a table or a bed or a chair where someone could knock it down.

 Welcome to Stamp Me Fabulous eyebrow stamps, a patented revolutionary cosmetic product

 Our transparency design guide can help you select your ideal eyebrow design.

 Simply hold up each of the designs on the transparency to see which design you like

 Be sure to hold it against your bone structure so that you can see all angles of your design.

 You can adjust the placement and the angle of the eyebrow design.

 Using the side of the felt tip eyebrow design pen, gently draw across the design.

 This will give you practice and also give you a good color test.

 For those who have oily skin, you may find that you benefit from first applying the fixative

 Position your stamp at the desired location, gently press down, and roll it across the

 Carefully, position your second eyebrow, gently press down, and roll.

 When your design is complete, gently blot the excess ink with a tissue.

 The mineral powders are applied directly on top of your stamp design to create a softer

 The hair strokes will remain, creating a three dimensional look for your eyebrow.

 Water or mild cleanser will effectively remove your stamp design.

 If you are considering permanent cosmetics, permanent makeup technicians can work directly

 Your semi-permanent design provides an ideal template for permanent cosmetic technicians

 To remove excess oil and makeup that may have built up on your eyebrow stamp, simply rinse

 your stamp with warm water and using your eyebrow brush, gently scrub.

 This will keep the hair strokes fine and it will keep your design clean.

 Simply blot your stamp dry with a non-fibrous paper or cloth towel.

 The polymer eyebrow can be peeled away from the base of the stamp.

 Using the black guidelines on the base, place the brow along the guideline and gently press

 Flip the stamp over and align the second eyebrow along the identical guideline on the reverse

 Visit us at stampmefabulous.com to see our full line of products, including stamps for

 Go to www.stampmedia.com to purchase a Stamp Me Fabulous stamp.

 Okay, here we are at step six, getting ready to fill and polish this countertop.

 What we've got here in front of us is what you're going to get in every kit that you

 We've got a black, green, we've got oranges, browns, reds, and some yellows.

 That pretty much gives you the ability to go through the whole thing and do whatever

 So this is your chance to really get creative on where you want to go with this.

 The guys that we're doing this table for, they've chose to go with a gray color to start,

 For a desk, that's a really good thing to do, to do something crazy and to get a real

 You know, for countertops and things like that, you might want to tone it down a little

 So how you do this is we just got a little bit of our filler here.

 Just to do more of a basic color that we would normally do with a black countertop like this,

 all you do is just take a little bit of your color and just sprinkle it on there and take

 Now if you're doing bigger quantities, it's a lot easier just to put it into a quart mixer

 But for the application we're doing right now, we're not mixing a lot, so it's easy

 You want to make sure you mix it really good so you don't have any big chunks of color

 So all we're going to do is I've got some pre-mix that I've already taken and done

 This is something that you're going to have to mess around with yourself because the more

 If you're going to have to take some time, you want to put a little bit less in.

 And all we're going to do is just put it up here onto the countertop.

 And then what I like to use is just like an 8-inch knife so that you can cover a lot of

 And then we're just going to keep doing this until we've covered the whole, the whole thing.

 Okay, one thing I failed to mention earlier, when you're doing this process, we definitely

 The next step that we're going to take is we've just got a little bit of acetone right

 We just take a clean rag, get a little acetone on it, and then you just wipe this off the

 And then what you're going to want to do is just take the dry side of your rag and just

 Once you get it wiped off pretty good, the more you wipe it off with the acetone, the

 So I recommend just taking a little bit of time and kind of scrubbing it off pretty good.

 But once you get it down like that, you can kind of see a little bit of what we're getting

 Next thing we're going to do is just take, well, first of all, you're going to do that

 Then we're just going to take some 120 sandpaper on either a vibrating palm sander or a DA.

 And when you wipe that off, you can see that you're down to the, we're down to the black

 What we'll do is we'll just do that same process over and over two or three times, recoding

 And then once we get there, I'll show you how to finish polish.

 I think we hit it five times total and got it all hit with 180 and sanded down.

 And then after that, we're going to do a burnishing wheel and I'll show you that.

 You want to be careful to keep it nice and flat and not twist it or turn it or else you

 My name is Victoria Paikin and today I'm here with my friends at RecipeLion.com who

 For this recipe you will need cilantro, jalapeno peppers, cheese, use any sharp cheddar cheese

 I love the ability of mozzarella cheese to stretch when it's hot.

 So those are tomatoes that don't have a lot of seeds and juices inside.

 So if you don't like you can just pile it up and then place them in one layer.

 I'm trying to put on each one piece of this and one piece of that.

 After you have arranged all of this cover with a little bit of cheese.

 And if something fell in between the tortilla chips just take it and place them on tortilla chips.

 Really good with some kind of salsa or guacamole or sour cream.

 It's really fun to have around when you have a really good meal.

 And don't forget to subscribe, write me a comment, thumbs up me and cheers!

 It's John from JohnnyOctave.com and I've got a rocker for you guys today.

 So you're putting your index finger on the 5th string, 2nd fret.

 You've got E5 and then we have a G5 chord, or an open power chord is what I call it.

 You're going to play your 2nd finger on the low E string, 3rd fret.

 You're doing that with your 2nd finger right underneath here with the flesh on your 2nd finger.

 The high E string is muted out with the flesh on your 3rd finger.

 So you're kind of angling everything a little bit down so that you can catch that mute on the A string and the high E string.

 Now A5 is open A, index finger is at the D string and the G string.

 While you're still fretting A, what you're going to do is reach down with your 2nd finger

 and you're going to do a little quarter step bend at the 3rd fret 6th string.

 And then right to an A5 chord, that A power chord that you're fretting there anyways.

 And then right back down to the G note, the 6th string 3rd fret, which is a G note.

 So now what happens here is the chords get reversed for the chorus.

 So what that is, is you've got an A5 chord, quarter step bend at 3rd fret 6th string, E5.

 And then what you do is you catch the string so you stop the note from ringing, the chord from ringing.

 I am pleased to present this video in partnership with www.allfreechristmascrafts.com.

 Today we'll be making this simple and elegant Christmas cuff bracelet.

 And then you'll need your sewing machine or you can sew this by hand.

 For the width, I measured the width, added my 3 eighth inch seam allowance, multiplied

 The cuff I am using in this video is 6 inches by 1 5 eighths inches.

 Sew right sides together and then sew with a 3 eighths of an inch seam allowance.

 Now if you don't have a sewing machine, you could simply hand stitch this or use hot glue

 We have finished sewing our bracelet and we have left both ends open.

 Now we want to cover our bracelet with this fabric and we're going to have the seam be

 This is an interchangeable bracelet for every occasion or you can make different Christmas

 This video has been brought to you in partnership with www.allfreechristmascrafts.com

 Hey guys, so my kids are definitely not the best breakfast eaters.

 They would rather play, run around, do anything but eat breakfast.

 So the other week I called my mom up for any suggestions she had.

 So today I'm going to show you guys how to do Dutch baby oven pancakes.

 We have three eggs, milk, flour, vanilla, a little bit of ground cinnamon, and butter.

 And then you're going to want to put an oven proof skillet in there.

 You can also use a pie pan, something that's about 9 or 10 inches.

 And then you're going to pop everything right into the blender.

 And you guys, this is really embarrassing, but the other day Avery's teachers called me.

 So I rushed over to school thinking, oh, she must be coming down with something.

 And it turns out that she was just hungry and was like too shy to tell her teachers.

 Of course, I was like mortified because you don't want your kid to be hungry at school.

 But I realized then that I really had to change up what I was giving them for breakfast to entice her to eat a little bit more.

 So I'm just going to get a little of the cinnamon in there and then I'm going to blend everything up.

 The next step is to melt our butter in our preheated pan until it's sizzling and then pour the batter right in.

 And this is going to bake for about 20 to 25 minutes until it's nice and puffy and golden.

 It will fall as it cools, but it looks and smells so good, you guys.

 So I'm going to slice into it so you guys can see what it looks like.

 I'm going to put it on my plate and I like to dress it up just a little bit.

 So I'll do just a little bit of powdered sugar and then some strawberries.

 So this oven pancake is definitely a little bit more interesting than your standard cereal, but it's really hearty.

 It's quick to whip up and it's going to get your kids through their school morning.

 And hopefully I won't be getting any more calls from Miss Avery's teacher.

 week away so I thought I would do one more quick and easy Easter treat video.

 Today I'm going to be showing you how to make some of this super sweet and

 To make this you are going to need a bag of 24 ounce white chocolate chips.

 We're going to start out by pouring our chocolate chips into a large

 microwave-safe bowl and then we're just going to go ahead and stick the chocolate

 to go ahead and pour in our bag of mini marshmallows and then we're just going

 pan and lined it with the parchment paper and now we are just going to begin

 Once we have poured our mixture into the pan I'm just going to go ahead and

 Once we are done adding our sprinkles we are just going to pop this baby in the

 freezer for about 15 to 20 minutes until it is completely cooled.

 this out of the freezer we just want to let it sit and get to room temperature

 and then once it has gotten to room temperature we're just going to remove

 it from the pan and all you have to do is lift the parchment paper right out of

 the pan and now we can just go ahead and cut it up into pieces.

 So here is the finished Easter bark as you guys can see this is super pretty.

 All we've got to do now is put it onto a cookie sheet with a wax paper.

 We have kiwi, strawberry, blackberries, raspberries, and this is a star fruit.

 When it's just about ready, you'll get a few little cracks coming through the top.

 Then the next thing is you've got to turn it off that, up the other way, and put your cream on top.

 When it's gone cold, you can obviously put your hands underneath like that.

 Well, while he's doing this, I also want to mention that the recipe is on our website at myfoxdc.com.

 We will link you to Simon's website, which is saborepastrillon.com.

 I go into people's houses and cook private dinner parties for them.

 The base has got a lot of sugar in there, so we don't need to add any sugar to the whipped cream.

 Now we're going to add a little bit of fruit to the top of this.

 And then we're going to taste this in just a couple of moments.

 to get all the information about Simon and everything that he can do for you.

 So an eighth pound of the rayon fiber will make enough static grass to fill a 12 ounce

 As you can see, this is a lot better than my previous attempt at making static grass.

 You could apply it just like normal static grass, you don't really need to do anything

 Pick some up, sprinkle it on there, push it on, however you would normally apply static

 So that's the static grass I had made and it's applied to a base.

 Let me just show you real quick how I would normally apply static grass to a base.

 I just use Elmer's glue glue because it's cheap and that works out well for me.

 So you just need to apply a little bit of your PVA glue, just a drop or so.

 And then if you have something to spread it around with, you probably want to just spread

 I got like a pack of a hundred of these or something at my local arts and crafts store.

 They're great for applying glue because I don't care if they get all messed up.

 Once you have your glue applied and spread out, just grab a little bit of the static

 I grabbed a little clump of it here and I'm just going to smush that on there.

 Then what you need to do, just pick up your base, just kind of try to shake some of it

 After you've got as much of it shaken off as you can, what you need to do is blow on

 it to try to blow off all the other static grass that isn't quite glued down.

 Another thing that blowing the static grass does is help it stand up.

 You can see on the left there, that's what I just applied and on the right is what I

 That will conclude this little video tutorial on how to make your own and then apply your

 This is Derek Howes from DHFTNS.com and today I'm going to show you guys my sweet potato

 All you need is a blender bottle so take one of those out and then put in one cup or 8

 You can also use regular milk or any other milk substitute that you may prefer.

 If you don't have a blender bottle I do post a link in the description below to them.

 There's a ton of different kinds, they last forever, and they never leak.

 I usually make a bunch of sweet potatoes at the beginning of the week so I always have

 If you don't have enough time or you're just too lazy to cook your own sweet potatoes you

 can also buy and use canned sweet potatoes which they sell pretty much anywhere and they're

 As you guys saw the shake looks delicious and tastes even better.

 As for the calories in the whole shake there's 310, only 6 grams of fat, 35 grams of carbs,

 If you like this recipe please go ahead and give me a thumbs up it motivates me to keep

 If you haven't already subscribed and you'd like to you can click right there on the screen

 By subscribing you'll get an email every week telling you I upload a new video.

 Comments or suggestions go down below I do try and respond to everybody.

 Hi YouTube, it's Nicole Naturals and today I'm coming to talk to you about thinning edges.

 Now, I noticed maybe about 10 months ago, my edges are just thin and weak.

 Now, my guess is what happened back in 2009, 2010, I would always gel my hair back everyday with gel,

 So everyday I constantly just pulled my hair back so tight and I'm sure that contributed to my edges thinning.

 And then about 8 months ago, 7 months ago, I did a Apogee treatment and my hair came out in the very front.

 So that's when I really realized that I have protein sensitive hair.

 My hair does not like a lot of protein because at that time I was using a lot of products that had protein in it

 and I was not aware of the back of the label what everything that was protein.

 I mean I know it sounds crazy but now I've learned all the different terms that represents protein.

 So I just want to show you a quick look at my edges so you can see what they look like and what I plan to do about it.

 But if you look at this, this side is short, this piece is long, this piece is short.

 And I'm going to brush this down and I'm going back, further back and it's still really short, maybe an inch long.

 See my little bald spot right there and the hair again is one inch.

 So what I decided to do, another regimen, I have Jamaican Black Castor Oil.

 It's very thick but it's really good thickening your hair, making your hair stronger, making your hair grow.

 And I also use Jamaican Black Castor Oil in my hair butter that I make.

 My hair is getting so thick in other places but I'm going to really concentrate on my edges for the next few weeks.

 So when I come back October 14th and give an update on my length check,

 then we're going to also take a look at my edges and see did they improve or did they not.

 So twice a day, I'm going to take just a drop because this stuff is very thick.

 Just going to massage it in, get my blood flowing, get the blood circulating,

 and I'm going to actually really do it all around my entire edges.

 So for five minutes, twice a day, I'm going to massage the Jamaican Black Castor Oil around my edges.

 And then we'll take a look again October 14th and we will see if this actually helped.

 And this is kind of an experiment for me because I've never done this one before.

 So what I'm doing here is I'm steeping 200 grams of crystal 30 grains

 And after this I'll be bringing it to a boil and then reducing it to add some fermentables.

 Okay, so in this scene I'm adding 500 grams of yellow golden sugar.

 This is after the boil so I've taken it off the burner of course

 I decided since I had some lactose left over that I would try to back sweeten it just a little bit with some lactose.

 And just to see how this is going to fare out after fermentation.

 Okey dokey, in goes the mixture into the sanitized growler of mine.

 I'm going to pour it in here now and top her up with the apple juice.

 And here we go with topping her up with just regular apple juice.

 Buy it anywhere, supermarket, Walmart, wherever you can get apple juice.

 This is just regular stuff, it's not low acid or anything like that.

 Going to top her up and I'm going to give her a good stir, a good shake and a good stir.

 I wanted to make sure I had extra apple juice so I didn't run short.

 And now giving it a pretty good stir before I'm ready to add my yeast.

 Alright, so what I've done here is I didn't want to add my full package of yeast to one gallon.

 So what I've done is I've taken the package of Cooper's Ale yeast and I've separated it into two tablespoons.

 Getting ready to seal it and let it go for however long it needs.

 And here I am putting the rest of the yeast back in the package and I'm going to reseal it.

 And I'm going to put it back in the fridge just in case it didn't start fermenting.

 So hold on to that for a couple of weeks and if I don't use it I'll toss it.

 It's in the growler and it's getting ready to start fermenting away.

 And hopefully in three weeks time, four weeks time it'll be ready to go, ready to taste.

 How to play Rather Be by Clean Bandit on the keyboard with your right hand.

 So if you're interested in finding the notes, they will be on mintmusedo.co.uk

 and I will leave a link in the description box to where you can find them.

 then I'll teach it you and repeat that for all the verses to have learnt the entire song.

 So it's D sharp, F sharp, G sharp, F sharp, E, F sharp, D sharp, B.

 So it's D sharp, F sharp, G sharp, F sharp, E, F sharp, D sharp.

 But then we're going to play B, D sharp, D sharp, B, D sharp, B, C sharp.

We're going to start with D sharp, D sharp, B, B, G sharp, G sharp.

 So now we can move on to the chorus and this is how it sounds put together.

Now for the first line we're starting on the higher B and we're playing.

 So as I said before, higher B and then down to D sharp, C sharp, B, F sharp, D sharp, C sharp, B, B, C sharp.

It's B, D sharp, C sharp, B, F sharp, D sharp, C sharp, B, B, and then the lower G sharp.

 So it's B, A sharp, C sharp, B, A sharp, G sharp, F sharp, D sharp, B, C sharp.

 D sharp, C sharp, B, B, G sharp, B, D sharp, C sharp, B, B, C sharp, B.

 After you've played the chorus it's verse two and that's basically the same as verse one.

 If you want to pinpoint the very small note differences you can go on my blog and find the differences.

 But basically just play verse one because it's pretty much the same.

 And then you can play the pre-chorus again, the chorus again, the bridge and the chorus.

 Okay so it's just B, C sharp, D sharp, F sharp, F sharp, G sharp, B, C sharp, D sharp, C sharp, B.

 And after you've played the two F sharps then you kind of speed up a little bit.

So after that as I said before you play the chorus again and that's it for the entire song.

 So verse one, pre-chorus, chorus, verse two, pre-chorus, chorus, bridge, chorus.

I hope you enjoyed it and if you did find it helpful in some way

 If you want to see more tutorials next week then make sure you subscribe to be notified

 I'm going to show you today how to get the middle part, or at least my version of the

 I know that a lot of people have problems getting the middle part.

 Sometimes people have bangs so it's hard to work with them because the hair starts getting

 used to going one way and you kind of have to train your hair over time for it to completely

 So as you can tell with my hair, no it is not a complete middle part.

 And I will show you guys how to train your hair and you basically just do the same step

 process every night to get it to stay as a middle part and every day you keep going closer

 Now for me, this is as close to the middle part as I can get because I have a widow's

 peak and it prevents me from completely going straight through the widow's peak because

 as you guys know with widow's peaks, it's where you have a little tuft of hair that

 comes further out than the rest of your hairline and it only goes one way.

 You can't make it go any other way, especially if you have curly hair.

 So for me this is about as far as I can normally get my middle part.

 It's harder for it to do it that way and it doesn't look as nice so this is probably

 So if you follow my steps, you'll definitely be able to have a middle part in no time,

 especially if you have just like a normal person's hairline that just goes all the way

 But you can do these same exact steps if you have a regular hairline and it will work,

 I actually figured this out a few months ago and I was so excited about it because sometimes

 But yeah, so if you guys want to know how to get the middle part, then just keep on

 Yeah, so to start off at night, before I go to sleep, I split my hair the way I want it.

 Now the middle would be just a few centimeters over and it would be here.

 I actually have a widow's peak, as you guys can tell, so I can't split my hair completely

 If I wanted to, I would have to split the middle, the widow's peak, and the widow's

 peak does not split well, especially on me since I have curly hair.

 And it likes to go this way, so that's the way it's going to go.

 So I just split it as close as I possibly can to the widow's peak and then all the other

 So just split your hair in the middle if you do not have a widow's peak.

 I use it all the time and it just has really strong bristles that hold onto the hair.

 And what I do is I take the hair and I just really flatten it out with the brush and make

 I take a really long bobby pin, one of the longest ones that I have, and right about

 You actually want to pin it down pretty tight too, so make sure the hair is in good.

 It will force your part to be a middle part, so by the time you wake up, you'll have a

 So to make your hair look like a perfectly teased middle part, because you don't want

 What I do is I take this first layer of hair from the bangs, brush it out, and then I tease

 And I take my straightener, this is a GHD, and I have to straighten the widow's peak

 hairs because they like to curl up on me and they're shorter than the rest.

 And what I do is I just take my hair like this and I just put the straightener on the

 Then what you're going to do to make it so that the hair blends in better with the rest

 of the hair, I am just going to take a little bit of hair from the sides, like about that

 Starting from the ends of my bangs, I'm going to curl it at a downwards angle.

 And then take some hairspray and just spray it in place however you happen to like it.

 I'm going to flatten it out, straighten it, and make sure you straighten it at a downwards

 And then for the rest of my hair, I like to take the part right about here, midway down

 my head, I like to take that back and tease it just so that there's like a separation

 Okay, now for the rest of my hair, since you can tell that my curls are getting a little

 bit dull, I just spray in some leave-in conditioner spray, and this one happens to be by Yugo.

 It's called Repair Through, and it helps to repair the hair, but also give it like

 It just kind of helps me like restructure the curls without having to like go through

 And then throughout the day, it'll dry into, you know, really nice curls.

 I hope that this helped you guys, and if you have any questions, let me know and I'll talk

To get this thing started I'm working with freshly washed deep conditioned

 blow drying process about two to three times for each section of the hair.

 kupuasu anti-frizz smoothing blow dry cream is not only a heat protectant but it also

 allow for your hair to bounce back after using so much heat on it.

 that section I'm just going to loosely two strand twist it and then repeat this process

 My entire head has been blow dried and two strand twisted so I'm going to take some rather

 small flexi rods and begin to roll the two strand twist throughout the flexi rod.

 starting at the bottom of the hair wrap your twist around the ends of your hair about one

 or two times and then begin to roll up the flexi rod in a spiral motion.

 get to the top roll the flexi rod over to secure the twist in place.

 I did sleep with the flexi rods overnight just to really set the style.

 morning I'm just going to take my time and remove each and every flexi rod from my hair

 leaving my hair with these spiral beautiful bouncy flawless curls.

 to gently separate the two strand twist but really they just flow out of my head just

 separate each part into smaller sections to add more volume to the style.

 Giving my roots a little scratch and shake to get the parts to disappear.

 Hi, I'm Rebecca Brandt, and today we're going to make Christmas Candy Cane Brownies

 The ingredients for this dish are flour, sugar, dry cocoa powder, salt, butter, eggs, vanilla,

 All we're doing is aerating that flour and kind of breaking it up

 This is pretty generic, but don't worry, it's a super-rich chocolate brownie recipe

 So now we're going to add 1⁄2 cup of butter, but we've got to melt it

 And in my microwave, that's a minute and 15 seconds to melt that whole stick of butter

 Now I do this by hand, you don't need an expensive mixer to get this part done

 Because I don't want the sides to stick, I want it to come out really easy

 And it's kind of gummy, that means I'm going to have a really chewy brownie

 Okay, now I'm going to stick it in that 350 oven for 30 minutes

 Even though we don't have it in Santa Barbara, but tis the season

 This is one frosting I'm actually going to use a sifting device in

 Because I just have the time, nothing's going to cook for 30 minutes

 You can skip this step because you all know I cannot stand a sift

 I hate those little gadgets where you're like cranking with your wrist

 So as we make our frosting, I'm going to put in some of that powdered sugar

 And I've slightly melted the butter because I want to get it to room temperature

 And I'm going to add a teaspoon of milk at a time to get the consistency I want

 I've added four teaspoons of milk and I'm going to add the rest of my powdered sugar

 Okay, so I'm going to get my candy canes ready to decorate on top

 I think the biggest challenge to this dessert is getting the plastic off your candy canes

 I want to take it out of here and put it on something that's going to look really pretty

 So my goal is to get this onto this pan, right side up, that side up

 Doesn't always happen that way, there could be problems in the kitchen

 If you wait to do this, when it's cool, you should add a little more milk to your frosting

 You know what, try it with my hot chocolate recipe, that would be awesome too

 A bite of the peppermint brownie and hot chocolate to drink with it

 Oh man, that buttercream frosting is just the thing to hold that peppermint on top

 So like me, comment, tell me what you think, subscribe to my channel

 Merry Christmas, yummy brownies, and enjoy your time with your friends and family

 Now let's take a look at the blues scale over a dominant chord progression.

 Now it's going to be the same chord progression as you know, moving through four different

 Now those keys are going to be D, E, F sharp, and A. Alright, so make a note of those and

 Now to make it more interesting, the progression that I've put together is going to be an altered

 Now don't get scared by that, it's going to be that nice Jimi Hendrix type chord.

 So it's going to be a D7 sharp 9, E7 sharp 9, F sharp 7 sharp 9, and A7 sharp 9.

 Now the progression, I'm going to play that for you just so you get the feel of what that

 And it's got a certain feel to it, it's got a really nice swung 16th feel to it.

 So you've got this really nice opportunity to flow through your notes of the blues scale.

 So first of all, let me show you the progression and we'll reiterate the keys to you as well

 I'm just going to turn off my delay here so we haven't got that bouncing around.

 Now you guys might not be familiar with A7 sharp 5, but if this is an A7 chord, all you're

 Now that's a two bar progression, so that's going to cycle four times.

 Now at the end of that eight bars, it's going to move into the next key.

 And the next key is going to be the key of E. So we're going from D into E into F sharp

 and then to just make it a little more interesting, we're going to do a minor 3rd change from

 It's the same chord progression in four keys, alright, eight bars of each of those things.

 Alright, so there's the road map of the chords and the progression.

 Count the progression and go, alright, I'm bar 7, bar 8, okay, sure enough, there it

 A lot of you guys that I've worked with in the past at workshops are struggling with

 the length of bar lines, you know, so whether it's a two bar, four bar, or eight bar section.

 So this is going to really solidify that for you as well, working in eight bar sections,

 Now, let's take a look on the fretboard at the blues scale in position.

 And I'm going to play at the fifth position because it's a nice central location.

 And you're going to see me do a sample solo in position playing through those four keys.

 Now, I'm using the blues scale over this altered dominant chord and it's really great.

 The minor third in the blues scale is hitting that sharp 9, alright.

 And of course we know as blues musicians and musicians in general, you can use the minor

 So it's going to work, but now we've got that added ninth in there, that sharp 9, we can

 If you want to reference an F sharp 7 sharp 9, there it is with the fourth string root.

 Now the last one in our key of change is going to be A, and we're probably almost familiar

 Okay, and of course you know you can move it, play it here or here.

 Alright, so there's the reference, the road map, so your keys, the chord progression,

 Now if you can, memorize, get off the paper and into your head what those key changes

 So immediately try and memorize or visualize, okay, D, E, F sharp, A, they're my keys, alright.

 And maybe work through playing these patterns in position just as exercises if you like

 over the track when you get the shot at it, just to get familiar with that.

 And we're going to try and stay in position because that's going to build our knowledge

 of the scale, and it's going to help, you know, it's going to help us create licks within

 Of course we're playing four different ones in position, so it's really, really powerful,

 Basically the ideas here are to solo using these scales over these chord changes, alright.

 So this is not an exercise, it's actually a soloing workout, alright, so it's improvising.

 So I'm going to give you a setup for the solo that I'm going to do, and then we'll get you

 working with Powerplay Dominant over this altered dominant chord progression.

 Now this is the corner of the drywall and what I've done here is I've already filled

 in the gap that exists between this edge of the drywall and this wall itself.

 You can see a corner has developed there because I've packed in the mud and this

 all the way down you'll see a wide gap here and that's because the drywall never

 rock product or a compound that you mix with water so that it really hardens.

 And all you're doing there is creating the continuation of this edge of the

 So what I've done is I've given it a quick scuff off with a knife to knock

 Now we can't get the whole wall in but for demonstration purposes we're going to show you how we mud up and get

 and a half inch, three inch knife and we're just using the pre-mixed compound.

 If I'm out of your camera view I apologize but I'm just basically doing the same thing I did up top.

 I'm all the way down and where that crack was I'm going to lay a little bit more in there.

 And we just quickly get that applied to the wall and right into the corner.

 Before we go much further I just wanted to show you the tape here.

 We don't like to use the fiber tape because it's really just a band aid.

 It doesn't have the strength of the paper tape and it can actually cause us problems.

 Especially if we try to do a full drywall job with the fiber tape we run into issues.

 Now some people like to wet this but I don't because I find that if I wet it and then we start to use the tools on it it can break it up.

 So we get a nice fairly thick coat on the wall as we've already done.

 And then we're going to push this into the surface of that mud.

 And then we're going to apply another coat on top to seal the edge.

And we press that corner right into the new corner that we're trying to establish.

 And again, it may not be completely perfect but as long as it's generally there.

 And we've got about the same distance at the bottom as we do at the top, about an eighth of an inch.

 So now we'll take a look at what the corner looks like now with the tape coat on it.

 And we see that the edges of the tape have been buried in the mud.

 Well I hope you enjoyed that quick demonstration on how to apply tape into an inside corner of a wall.

 So if you have any questions, if you have any ideas for a demonstration, anything you want to see demonstrated,

 In the meantime, you can like the videos and by all means subscribe to my channel.

 Hi, I'm Megan Gilmore, creator of Detoxinista.com, and today I'm going to show you some of my

 What I love about these snacks is that they're easy enough that your kids can get involved,

 which will make them more likely to eat a healthy snack when you offer it to them.

 Slice the zucchini on a mandolin to make paper-thin slices, and then you spread the zucchini hummus

 You roll the zucchini and hummus up together to make these cute little rolls.

 Next we have ants on a log, which are an easy classic childhood snack.

 It's simply celery stalks filled with raw almond butter, and then you top them with

 What I love about made-in-nature brand is that they have no added sugar, and the only

 Another great way to use almond butter is these almond butter stuffed dates.

 You simply split a medjool date in half, remove the pit, and spread the center with

 If you have a nut allergy in the family or if you need to take these to your child's

 school, you can also use sunflower butter or raw tahini as a nut-free option.

 All you do to prepare these is slice the eggplant into half-inch slices.

 You can sprinkle them with a little salt to help remove the bitterness.

 Broil them in the oven for five to seven minutes on each side until they're lightly

 Then you'll top them with your favorite pizza toppings like tomato sauce and cheese, and

 broil them again for just about three minutes until the cheese is bubbly.

 All of these snacks are best when served right away, but you can also prepare them ahead

 of time and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a week.

 For more healthy snack ideas like my paleo banana snack cake or my chewy granola bars,

 visit Detoxinista.com or check out my new cookbook, Everyday Detox.

 Welcome to the OnTheGo Solutions official unboxing of the HTC X7500, also known as the

 This is a brand new product running Windows Mobile 5, and as you can tell, it comes in

 see DuoPod has put the product specifications, which can be seen in a close-up at our site.

 open the top, and there you go, you can see the phone right here.

The phone is a little bit smaller than the other phones, but it's still a pretty

Removing the phone from the box, and out of the plastic, you can see the huge

 there are many different buttons, the first one being a joystick for single-handed navigation.

 can see the video camera, and here you notice we have an Internet Explorer quick start button.

The next one is for VGA out, and the following is for USB connectivity,

 the power button, and there is a voice recorder, and there's a button for the camera as well

The next one is for Bluetooth and Wi-Fi, and the final one is a message

 the keyboard, which is nestled tightly inside the top layer of the box.

 the keyboard, there are many quick start keys which launch different applications as well

 Taking out the first box, inside the box, there is the carrying case.

 On the Dopa, this case comes in brown leather with no belt clip.

 There are cutouts for the camera as well as full accessibility to all the slots and ports

 Digging down further into the box, we come up with the accessory box.

 stereo headphones with a 3.5 millimeter jack, the HTC VGA out cable which connects to the

 side of the Dopa and has a serial port and some other ports for television and VCR and

 other type of TV apparatus, the ubiquitous USB sync cable, an additional stylus, a USB

 cable, a USB cable, a USB cable, a USB cable, a USB cable, a USB cable, a USB cable, a USB

 cable, a USB cable, a USB cable, a USB cable, a USB cable, a USB cable.

 The Dopa has a battery which is actually in the unit right now and a very interesting

 laser pen that most likely they included to enable you to do video presentations and PowerPoint

 And I'll slice these into pieces that will easily fit into the grinder.

 Elk meat, venison, and most wild game is so lean, there's just no fat.

 If you've been watching my videos for a long time, you probably know that I partner with

 But today, I want to introduce you to my new friends at Westin Products.

 Westin hooked me up with the Pro 550 number 12 electric meat grinder with a 3 quarter

I've been using the KitchenAid stand mixer with a grinding attachment for

 Anytime you take the grinder apart, you always want to make sure that you have a fine plate.

 I'm going to use a High Mountain Seasonings Hunter's Blend Summer Sausage Kit.

 A lot of processors will add the cure and the seasoning between the coarse and the fine grind.

 When I started doing this years ago, I accidentally did it at the end.

 Now I'm going to put those in the refrigerator to cure overnight.

 And I'll put the summer sausage sticks into the cook shack smoker.

 You don't have to do this, but sometimes I drop them in an ice bath.

 One of the objectives of Pilates is to help your body rediscover its neutral alignment.

 When your body is in neutral, your skeleton is in its optimal alignment.

 A neutral alignment creates harmony and balance in the body and helps to prevent wear and

 There are several bony landmarks on our body that help us find our way to this healthy

 Because the pelvis is attached to the spine, how the pelvis is positioned affects how the

 Place your hands on your hip bones and now work your hands forward to find the bony points

 Place the heels of the hands on them and reach your fingertips down to find your pubic bone.

 These three bony points need to be in a flat level plane to one another.

 If you were to take your pubic bone forward of your hip bones, you would notice that the

 upper curve of the back becomes exaggerated and the head will start to poke forwards.

 If you were to do the opposite of this and take your pubic bone behind your hip bones,

 Now these are extreme positionings of the pelvis, but even smaller deviations can cause

 So remember, we're looking to create a pelvis where the hip bones and pubic bone are in

 And we also want the hip bones to be in a level plane to each other so that one isn't

 Joseph Pilates wrote, above all, learn how to breathe correctly.

 By breathing in deeply, we bring energizing oxygen into the bloodstream, improving circulation.

 By exhaling fully, we rid the body of stale air, expelling toxins.

 This type of breathing is known as thoracic or lateral breath, because when we breathe

 Lateral breathing increases strength and flexibility, promotes relaxation, releasing stress, and

 And as you breathe out, gently try sighing all the air out until your lungs are empty.

 You should have felt a contraction under your hand, your stomach pulling inwards towards

 This is the first step in finding your center, your core muscles.

 Your deepest abdominal muscle is your transversus abdominis, and when strengthened, creates

 Most traditional exercise focuses on the superficial stomach muscles.

 In Pilates, we target the deeper ones that create stability for the spine and pelvis

 Today we're going to look at the 9200 and how to use it along with making a delicious

 So, the 9200 unit, this part is called the base, obviously this is the jug.

 When you look in the top you can only see 4, but underneath you'll see that there are

 So that's an excellent feature to help those things like nut butters move around effectively.

 And last but not least, no this is not a sword or a magic wand, it is called a tamper.

 So I've heard this called a lot of things, a poking stick, all sorts.

 Now over here on the base you'll notice that we have what we call a cushion pan.

 It's really important when you're using your optimum 9200, 9900 or 9400 that you ensure

 that it's dry around this area so that no water goes down into the motor inside of the

 Now to assemble the jug, you simply pop it straight on top, you put the plug into the

 top and then before using it, always make sure that you press around the edges and firmly

 Otherwise you can find a mess on your ceiling which we definitely don't want.

 Once you've got the jug together, you can use the features on the front.

 There's an on off switch, we turn it on and then you'll see that there is a low, medium

 Now unlike the 9400 or 9900, there is no dial on this machine, it's an electronic unit on

 the front which means that the low setting is 1 to 3 or equivalent to 1 to 3 on a dial,

 the medium setting is equivalent to 4 to 7 and then the high setting is equivalent to

 But the other benefit of having these electronic buttons on the front is that you have down

 the bottom here, 3 different settings or pre-programmed times, 35 seconds, 60 seconds or 90 seconds.

 The other thing that you have on the front here is a pulse button and the pulse button

 is great, it just gives a bit of a power burst to the jug which means that you can let things

 It's also really good for your motor to use the pulse button and you will find that you

 have to blend things a little less time if you pulse a few times at the beginning.

 So that's the basics of how to put it together, why don't we make something in it and go through

 We're going to take the lid off our 9200 jug and then we're going to fill it up with some

 First of all we're going to cut our apple into quarters, I will take out the little

 stick but you don't need it, you've got anything more than that.

 Now when you fill up the 9200 jug or any of the optimum jugs, what you want to do is

 put the more liquid items in first or the ice, the softer vegetables and then the firmer

 ones on top so what we get is a little bit of motion in the bottom and then that moves

 So I've popped the apple which is quite soft in the bottom, we're going to put 6-8 basil

 Now we're going to put in half a frozen banana, goes in there as well, along with 2, let's

 Now the optimum 9200 blender can very easily blend the zest and pith off this lime but

 instead we're just going to remove it because we don't want that taste in our blender.

 Pop that in the compost, throw the whole lime in and we'll put an extra half in for just

 If you like you can add a tiny bit of zest to this recipe but not too much.

 So a pinch of Himalayan rock salt in there, not very much but it just brings out the flavour,

 And then last but not least, 1 and a half to 2 cups or 1 to 1 and a half cups, it's

 So very very easy but remember, ice first, liquidy soft ingredients next, hard ingredients

 on top and then your absolute liquid last of all that will fall in between the gaps.

 Now make sure as I said, ensure that the lid is sealed correctly on top.

 If you wish to use the tamper, you can remove the lid plug, it's secure in there and place

 And then we're going to use the 35 second function to blend this smoothie perfectly.

 And there you go, at the end it stops all by itself and it beats to let you know.

 It's a really good key to note that it's not a good idea to use your tamper for more than

 So it's important to just use the tamper for what you need and then take it out and pop

 the lid plug on top if it's more than 30 seconds that you're blending for.

 You can see the little red pieces of the red apple skin, it's so tiny because the blender

 There's no trace of any of the seeds, any of the pith or anything that's come out of

 the lime or the apple and this is going to taste absolutely amazing.

 Now, if you enjoyed this recipe or you want to know more about the Optimum blenders, you

 can go to www.fruity.com.au or look down below in the description for your closest Fruity

 Remember, your Optium 9200 can do more than just make fruits and green smoothies.

 You can grind nuts and grains, you can knead bread dough, you can crush ice, you can make

 nut butter, you can make nut milk, you can make ice cream from fresh frozen fruit and

 You can make spreads and dips nice and fine, you can make fresh fruit juices, blender juices

 with all of the antioxidants still inside and you can make a cocktail if you like.

 So if you'd like more recipes like this, subscribe to the Fruity TV channel and check back regularly.

 This is a basic cashew cream cheese, you can use it to spread on your bread, you can use

 But what I'm going to do is take half out of the jug, put it in a container to store

 plain and then turn the other half into a pizza cashew cream cheese.

 Hello, today I'm going to show you, you've heard of pancakes, I'm going to show you how

 So here's the powder, and this powder here is all in one, you know everything's in it,

 all you've got to do is add water or milk, you can use the other, whatever you want to

 use, just make it in the bowl, you know put it in the bowl here.

 My water tastes like chlorine, but anyway, so there it is, now just mix it up, mix it

 in the bowl, you could grease the bowl if you wanted to, with some butter and stuff,

 you might have to, it's a little bit thin, I'm going to add a little bit more.

 Okay, the thicker it is, the less time in the microwave, and the thinner it is, the

 Okay, I use this, this is off of a slow cooker, doesn't matter what kind of cover, I could

 There it is, now I'm going to stick it in the microwave, and I'm going to let the music

 play, I mean let the tape run, and you listen to music while in the microwave.

 I put it on two minutes, and you'll see how it turns out in two minutes.

 If it's not done, you'll be able to see in the middle of it, you know, it'll be moist,

 wet, and you just put it in for another 20, 30 seconds or whatever.

 But these are awesome, you know, when it's finished, I'll put some butter on it, and

 You can mix strawberries in this, you can put fruit, bananas, blueberries, anything you want in there.

 And then just not something that will pop and explode in the microwave.

 But the other things, fruits will be fine, and then peaches chopped up and stuff.

 But anyway, it's delicious, it's just like a pancake, except it doesn't have the crispiness to it.

 And I've been doing this for years now, and I just recently remembered that I can make a little video,

 and show you all, I guess it's starting to steam up, we've got about 12 more seconds left.

 That noise you heard over there was the lid sitting on the counter making some noise,

 It might not be golden brown, or anything like that, but it is just as good as any other pancake.

 And this has been a bowl cake production, of a bowl cake, just for whoever's watching.

 Hello, my name is Colin Howard-Raff and I will teach you how to make a single rainbow

 a rubber band, put it on your toe, stretch it out, get another one, put it under, and

 it like for 30 minutes or an hour or 45 minutes, it would make like a rubber band.

 you would want to count in your head, but I didn't, so I have to count it like this,

 And then you would put it on your head, and then you would put it on your toe, and then

 you would put it on your toe, and then you would put it on your toe.

 like I did here, but you don't want to do that if you have colors here.

 and do like the same thing until you think you want to be finished.

 Hi, we're here at Standard TV and Appliance in one of their beautiful test kitchens.

 And again, we want to cook it kind of quick and don't let it burn.

 And after that, we're going to get ready to add the other ingredients.

 So once you can start smelling the garlic, you want to go ahead and start adding in the

 And if you haven't made your own like we did, then you have to get a can.

 We don't want to add something like sugar because it would burn a little bit easy in

 This is a tangy barbecue sauce, but you can make this and then you can switch it up, adding

 My big tip for beer is make sure that when you buy it, you make sure you have a big enough

 So you don't want to use, like, what did we talk about, an IPA?

 So what we're going to do now is we're just going to bring this to a simmer, and then

 And you want to stir occasionally because there is a lot of sugar in here from all the

 In fact, my recommendation is, you know, try the sauce, see what you think of the overall

 Like it's spicier, you could add more, you know, smoked paprika.

 You could add some jalapeno, maybe some chipotle, whatever sounds good to you.

 Well, what you always need is a little bit of that to kind of get the flavor.

What you're gonna need, 1 1⁄2 cup brown sugar and 1⁄4 cup regular sugar,

 1⁄2 a tablespoon of cayenne pepper, 1 teaspoon pepper, and 1 1⁄2 tablespoon of kosher salt.

 You're gonna need 6 tablespoons of chopped garlic and I mixed my vinegar and my soy sauce.

I'll be using my kitchen aid tonight and it will do the mixing for me.

 Of course you can do it by hand too but I prefer to use the kitchen aid only because I have 3

The only thing though if you're gonna be mixing with your hands, you have to thoroughly

 So what you want to do is scoop like a tablespoon or a little bit more.

See like right there it looks pretty small so I want to add like a

 half and you want to like squeeze it so it's gonna shape into a sausage.

 Definitely freeze them right after you put them in the wax paper.

I like to use the wax paper because once you freeze the longganisa it's really easy

 So you boil it on high and when the water is almost out I'll show you and I'll also let

 Hello everyone, Sam Sotiropoulos here, the Greek gourmand, bringing you the finest in

 the fine people at FoodBuzz.com for sending me this wonderful apron and the spatula which

 is the most direct way for you to get into contact with me or for me to get into contact

It is just the most convenient thing and I encourage you to follow the feed

 if you are at all getting anything out of these video recipes or the corresponding blog,

I also want to thank everybody for their kind words of encouragement and

 I hope to continue to improve in my presentation technique here.

 me, feel free to send them along either through Twitter or send me an email at GreekGourmand

 a great group on Facebook, so if you're on Facebook, just look up the Greek food group.

She had one done for my siblings, one each for my siblings as well.

 just a wonderfully beautiful cup and I use it every time I have Greek coffee and I think

 to create what is known as a metrion cafe, which is a medium coffee and it basically

 means that it is a medium sweet and medium ratio of coffee to water beverage.

 can have other ratios and other admixtures of sugar or non-sugar and we call, for instance,

Now, I am going to be using a briki, which is a traditional Greek

If you have a Greek bakery in your area or a delicatessen, they will

 we're going to move on over to the stove and I'm going to show you how we roast coffee.

 to coffee ratio to create what I consider to be the perfect metrion cafe.

And you'll want to do this quickly because things tend to get rather

 now starting to boil and we want to catch it just as it's starting to bubble up towards

And we're going to lift it away from the heat source because we want to create

 those little bubbles that you see forming right now on the surface.

 it up even a little higher at times to ensure that we make a nice foamy surface in the coffee.

And so now for the pour, which is likely the most important part of the entire

You'll want to dump it quickly into your cup in order for the froth, the kaimaki,

 to maintain its integrity across the entire surface of the cup, which is why we measure

 and all, to actually come right up to the rim of the cup that we're drinking from.

 should mention also that you obviously didn't notice any filtration in the process of making

 filter down through the water and end up on the bottom of the cup.

 Hi everyone, Cheryl here with a video on the Cottage Cuts Mini Tea Cakes, and so I'm gonna

 show you how I made these little tea cakes here, and they're still wet, so hopefully

 So the first thing you're gonna want to do is grab some tweezers and then get all your

 little pieces, and I'm using two flowers, the tea cake, the chocolate, and the leaf.

 And so I'm gonna start with the tea cake, and on this one I'm using E55 Light Caramel,

 and what I do is basically go over, like here's the dark, or the line, and so I just go over

 that several times, and then over the side several times, and that's gonna give you a

 darker of this color, and then I just come in with the same color and fill in, and if

 you don't like, you can just go back in, and so that gives you that.

 Now you could also dust with Tim Holtz Antique Linen and a duster, and I actually love dusting,

 so I do the same thing, start on the one side and just get that dark, and then come

 in and fill in the rest, so that you'd have two different ones, hopefully you could see

 So the next thing you're gonna wanna do is grab some Copic Markers and E29 Umber and

 And I do the same thing, where the line is that the cottage cut gives you, I go ahead

 and do a dark shade there, and then for the bottom, I just bring this dark across the

 Now I'm gonna come in with my lighter color and blend it so it doesn't look so funny,

 and I just go over that with this lighter color and bring it up, and then the same thing

 with where the line is, I'm just gonna go ahead and go over that a few times, it kinda

 And now for the little flowers, I'm gonna do some dark blue around the edges, and I'm

 using B14, so I'm just gonna lightly bring that to the edges of the flowers, and hopefully

 And then I'm gonna come in with B41 Powder Blue and just color those in, so there's the

 Now for the little leaf, I'm using G24 and that's the dark color, so I'm just gonna do

 that and then a little bit along the bottom, so I'm just doing the line and then a tad

 on the bottom of the leaf or the top, and then I'm coming in with YG03 and I'm actually

 So the next step is to go ahead and grab…I'm using these Candy Foam Squares, and these

 are from Really Reasonable Ribbon, these are perfect when you're working for…with little

 pieces, cuz they're not so big and they're not high, like your other foam squares, but

 And now I'm just gonna add the little chocolate piece to the top of my Tea Cake, and next

 thing you'll wanna do is grab some Helmar Scrap Dots, I love this stuff.

 A couple reasons why I love it is because you can pick the dimension you want with a

 Scrap Dot, and then you can also control how much you want, too, so I just stick a big

 glob, and then you don't push down with this stuff, I mean you can get it how you want

 it if you need to lift it up a little, however you leave it is how it's gonna stay once it

 The dry time on this I don't even know because usually I make all my little pieces, it might

 be like an hour if that, I usually make all my pieces prior to a project, so…and then

 I just add the little flower, and now I'm gonna add my leaf, and…whoops, sorry I'm

 gonna be upside down for you guys, and you could always come in and move them, you have

 So the next thing I wanna do is add some Viva Pearl Pin, and this is in the cream, and I'm

 gonna just add two little dots, I almost think I want another leaf on this one, so I might

 I'm just adding dots to the bottom, a lot of you think they're pearls, no, these…I

 love these pins, they make life so much easier, and they don't fall off, and I use them on

 a lot of my flowers when I do a ton of little flowers, I've used them, and I know people

 have left comments saying, oh my gosh, that must have taken forever to add all the flowers,

 no, I don't add all the pearls, so just to let you know, I did not add a ton of pearls

 to my flowers, that would take…it would take forever, especially because I go ahead

 So I'm adding this little leaf to the other side, for a couple of reasons, I left some

 Okay, so there you have another little tea cake, and hopefully you can see that.

 These are so cute and so much fun to make, I'm gonna move that one aside and show you

 They're the cutest little things, and I hope you enjoyed my video today on the Cottage

 Cuts Mini Tea Cakes, and thanks for stopping by, and we'll see you next time, have a nice day.

 And don't forget to check out my Nespresso Espresso giveaway for this summer.

Don't slice thicker than this, otherwise the onions won't get cooked thoroughly.

In a mixing bowl, add 1 1⁄4 cups of all-purpose flour and coat the onion rings with flour using 2 tablespoons of oil.

 It's possible to skip this process, but onion ring batter adheres to floured onion batter.

 ½ teaspoon of dried parsley, dried oregano is also great, and whisk to combine.

 And in a bowl of dry mixture, add in the egg and ¾ cup of milk.

 In a shallow dish, pour in ¾ cup of dried bread crumbs or Japanese panko.

 And transfer the batch to a wire rack to remove excessive batter.

 And immediately move the batch to bread crumbs and coat evenly with bread crumbs.

 Now add the onion rings into vegetable oil which is heated to 365 degrees F or 185 C.

 Just drop a little bit of batter into the oil and if it starts to cook with bubbles, then it's ready to go.

 And today in a deep heavy bottomed pan, I added about 2 inches of oil, which is enough.

 Now transfer to a wire rack over parchment paper or a paper towel-lined tray.

 But if you add salt in batter, the onion might sweat and the batter would fall off.

 And if you are a fan of cheese, like me, grate your choice of cheese over onion rings.

 Also, I love onion rings with simple tomato ketchup or mayonnaise.

 I'm telling you, old-fashioned breaded onion rings are the best.

 And you're going to see how wonderful the food turns out on this.

 Start with, we've already got the heat under it, so it's good and ready.

 I'm going to put a little oil in, let it get a little bit warm.

 And while that's getting warm, we season it a little bit with some salt around the edges.

 We've diced our potatoes and onions, mushrooms, we're putting sausage in, we've got cheese,

 We've got 10 people here this morning already, and we're going to fix a go-to-hill breakfast.

 It's just kind of a combination of whatever you like can go in it.

 We've got to do a lot of potatoes because we've got 10 people in here, so this is an

 easy way to feed a lot of people and get the cooking done fairly fast.

 I had help this morning cutting up the potatoes and onions and getting everything going so

 We had a late night last night getting all the meat in the ground in the pit, and we'll

 show you later this afternoon when we take it out how wonderful that meat turns out.

 We put in a hindquarter of a pig, and we put in a full goat, and we put in a turkey.

 These are going to take a little bit to cook because there's so many of them, but I think

 we'll take a quick break, and when we come back I'll keep cooking, and when we come back

 surface makeup first and I'm just going to just apply that to the eyelid without

You just kind of press it on for a couple of seconds and then you just

 contacts I think you should take your contacts out before using this product

 clean section of that towelette and continue to remove makeup off my neck

 this is going to do is clean my skin of any extra residue of oil and makeup.

 I use it every night to clean the makeup off my face just like you see me doing

 compliments a couple of days ago about how smooth my skin looks.

 part of my routine and that's what people see when they say my skin is

I really just like to just get in there and just clean it really well.

 I'm going to finish that up and now I think I'm going to just rinse my face.

 cleansing product that's on my face so that my skin is now just very clean.

 very watery in consistency and it has a very light fruity floral fragrance.

 review on this because I've been testing this product out for 14 months straight

 and I've had no negative results or anything from this product.

 show you a close-up of my face but right now I'm just patting it in.

I kind of pat it in around the eye and let it soak in a little bit and then

 I'm going to take the rest of that that's in my hand and I'm going to apply

 like to do with this product is I like to apply a little bit of it on my neck.

 And all we need for that is one pound of butter, four cups of flour, and one fourth cup, or

 So I'm going to take my butter and I'm going to mix it all together with my spatula.

 And once I get that done, I'll show you what's going to happen.

 Okay guys, I have my butter all mixed together and it's nice and soft.

 So now we add four cups of flour to this and mix it well, but only add two cups of

 Okay, I just added the one and a half cups of sugar and now I'm just going to mix it

 Okay, so this is what it looks like with the one and a half cups of sugar, the one pound

 So I'm going to add the other two cups of flour and keep mixing and we will show you

 Okay, we now have the mixture all mixed up and if you need to, you can always add one

 Me on the other hand, I did not need to add the actual one fourth cup of flour, but if

 Now what I'm going to do is put them in the little balls and put them on my greased pan

 and then stick them in the oven on 325 for eight to ten minutes.

 And there you go, that's the final touch of the shortbread cookies.

 They don't really get brown on top at all, but on the edges they do.

 So I will let you know how much or how many of these come out to those.

 So with these here cookies that I'm going to put in the oven now, I'm going to make

 I'm going to add some color to these cookies and just for an experiment, I just want to

 So we'll see what they look like when they come out of the oven.

 So I'll show you what they look like before they go in the oven.

 These didn't really look like much, but I'm sure the kids will love them.

 Let's put these in the oven and see what they look like when they come out.

 But yeah, I'm going to try to make some rainbow ones now for them.

 You can make them at Christmas time with cherries if you'd like.

 That's what I like doing, putting red and green cherries on top.

Today I'm going to teach you how to make this s'mores dip and it's super easy so let's get started.

 For this recipe you'll need a half a cup of semi-sweet chocolate chips.

You can use milk or dark chocolate but I'm using semi-sweet today.

You can add more or less depending on how many marshmallows you want.

 You'll also need some graham crackers that I just have on a plate here.

 First you will need to add your chocolate chips into a microwave safe bowl and then put it in the microwave for 30 seconds.

And as you can see the chocolate hasn't melted yet so put it back into the microwave for an additional 30 seconds.

And as you can see our chocolate has melted but we still have a few lumps so we're just going to mix that until we have a smooth consistency.

 And now we're going to add our melted chocolate into our ramekins and we're just going to fill them until we have an equal amount in both ramekins.

 Now we are going to be adding our mini marshmallows on top of our melted chocolate.

 And I haven't found the perfect ratio of marshmallows to melted chocolate yet but I just like to add in one layer because if you add too much the bottom layer of marshmallows won't be melted.

 Finally we are going to add our ramekins into the oven and you want a baking pan underneath them so that it's easier to take out.

 And you just want to broil this on high for about two minutes but make sure you're watching the marshmallows because they burn in seconds.

 Once you take your ramekins out of the oven you want to serve this right away with your graham crackers.

I hope you guys enjoyed watching this video and please subscribe for more.

 Hi, I'm Kristen Omdahl with Red Heart Yarns and today I want to talk to you about the

 The little mitten is actually knit separately and then sewn onto the stocking as the little

 It's worked in the round from the top down and I have a sample started here that I can

 show you but just real quick, it's worked in the round until you get to the heel and

 then we work what we call as a heel gusset where we work in rows back and forth on just

 a few stitches with a wrap and turn technique that I'm going to show you how to do and that

 creates the shaping that we turn our body of work so that we can then work back in the

 We worked in the round from the top of the stocking down and now we still have it on

 our double point needles and at the beginning of the round where we start the gusset shaping,

 If you notice I have a stitch marker here that notes the beginning of my round.

 We're going to use the red yarn for this portion of the stocking and I'm only going to be working

 on 28 of the stitches so I've put the other 28 stitches onto a stitch holder and the reason

 I did that is especially with working in double point needles, it's real easy for the yarn

 to slip off the needles on the unworked portion of this round so I just put them right on

 there to keep them secure and we're going to start our first row with the red.

 Now we were working in the round, we're only working in a row now and we're going to work

 28 stitches across this row with the red and then turn leaving the rest of the stitches

 Okay, at the end of that first row of 28 stitches we're going to leave the rest of the stitches

 I already put them on a stitch holder so that's an easy reference point to know where to stop.

 We're going to turn our work and we're going to purl across this row but we're only going

 to purl across 27 of these 28 stitches and then do a wrap and turn at the end of that

 So go ahead and purl the 27 and then I'll show you the wrap and turn.

 Okay, so now that we've purled across the 27 stitches we have our last stitch left unworked

 and because this is the beginning of a new color change also I want to just show you

 what I'm going to do to secure this yarn before we do the wrap and turn.

 So normally I would just leave this dangling until we've woven in the ends at the end,

 at the end of the project but I'm going to tie a little knot into the red and white tails

 I'm just going to tie that and do it a little bit loose just so it'll be easy to unravel

 at the end when we weave in our tails so that we have that stitch.

 We did a purl 27 and what you want to do is to do a wrap and turn.

 You're going to slip that stitch onto your right hand needle, wrap your working yarn

 around the stitch and then slip that stitch back to the left hand needle and bring the

 We never worked the stitch, it was just slipped temporarily to wrap the yarn all the way around.

 We're going to turn our work because we're now doing a knit row and if you'll notice

 that stitch is slipped but has a horizontal bar of yarn in front of it because it's been

 The reason we do that is to cover up the gaps from the, when we turn rows what we're doing

 is increasing height and we get a jog in between those rows and by wrapping and turning we're

 You're not going to see it in the end and I'll show you that when we get a little further

 For now we're going to knit 26 stitches and then at the end of the 26 stitches I'm going

 Now we've knit our 26 stitches and I'm going to show you how to do a wrap and turn on the

 What we're going to do is slip that last stitch to the right hand needle, wrap the yarn around

 the front, slip the yarn back, slip that stitch back to the left hand needle, bring

 our yarn back to the back, which is kind of just the opposite of what we did on the purl

 Whatever your yarn is supposed to be you're wrapping it to the opposite side around that

 So for this one we wrap to the front and then back around to the back side.

 And then turn our work and that stitch is wrapped with that horizontal bar of yarn around

 So this will be a purl 25, then a wrap and turn, then a knit 24, wrap and turn, purl

 23, wrap and turn, and so on and so on until we get to, let's see, how many stitches do

 And then at that point we're going to pick up and work across all of the stitches with

 Okay, so now we've done our wrap and turns down until we had 10 stitches remaining.

 And on the next row we knit across 11 stitches and then what we're going to do is knit the

 And what we do is if you see that there's the horizontal line from the wrap in front

 of the next stitch, so what I want to do is insert my needle under the wrap and into

 And if that's uncomfortable, you could always pick them up and hold them together like that

 And then you're going to knit them together like you were doing a decrease of some kind.

 So that was picking up the wrap on a knit row and now we'll work across a purl row and

 then I'll show you how to pick that up on the back of a purl row too.

 Okay, so now we've knit across, or sorry, purled across to where the next wrap stitch

 is and if you look, it's easier to see it from the front side on the knit side of the

 What I want to do is insert my needle into the wrap and into the stitch and slip it over

 to the right hand needle, insert your left hand needle into both loops and then do your

 And so you'll continue to go back and then you're going to turn your work and you'll

 continue to go back and forth, increasing one stitch in every row until you're back

 to the original 28 stitches and then we'll start working back in the round to complete

 This holiday stocking pattern is available on the website and many more patterns are

 Running off to the circus seems like a kid's dream, but the Actors Gymnasium in Evanston,

 Illinois makes it a reality for both the young and the young at heart.

 I'm here at the Actors Gymnasium on stage and I'm looking for Sylvia Hernandez.

 We have trapeze, we have juggling, tight wire, contortion, everything.

 I think, my personal opinion is that it's a great way to get a physical workout without

 You're going to wrap your leg and use the bottom of your foot and step on the web.

 Then you're just going to stand on the web and then scoot your leg up and then stand.

 Hold on to the loop on top and push the web out over your head.

 When you get started, you're going to stand up nice and tall and just try to feel your

 Healthy lifestyle expert and author Danette May is here to tell us the truth.

 I love this time of year if you're in the mountain states you are having snow out.

 It's time for making really yummy treats and all the fun that we have during Thanksgiving time

 Creating a really fast easy meal that you can have on Thanksgiving Day as a side

 Or you can have for breakfast on Thanksgiving Day or even the day after Thanksgiving

 This goes perfectly and it tastes really good because it has those sweet tones to it

 So it will fix those sweet cravings, but keep you on track with your goals

 So this is something that everyone can eat, but it's super fast

 If you know me and you've been watching me for a while, you know, that's how I like to roll simple fast delicious recipes

 And if you're not familiar with it, you can just get it in a package like this

 It's an amazing protein source and it's actually the most complete protein that you can actually get your hands on

 So I've already prepared a bowl right here and this amount made I used 1 cup of quinoa

 To 2 cups of water if you have a rice cooker, you could use that but it's super simple on the stove

 I think this can scare people and I don't want it to so I put it on the stove

 Literally put the water in put the quinoa in stirred it up put it on boil

 I make a big batch, but this is 1 cup of dry to 2 cups of water in this bowl

 Now what we're gonna do is we're gonna make kind of love this beautiful Thanksgiving side dish, but it tastes kind of sweet

 I take half a cup of raw sliced almonds as you can see pour that in a half a cup of raw

 Coconut oil if you're not a fan of coconut oil like I am I use it for everything

 It's up to you, but I have two tablespoons of coconut oil and it's a little chilly in here

 So it's gonna melt in there perfectly and I'm gonna stir that around and then I've got half a cup of craisins

 So throwing the craisins in that gives it that beautiful bright color that we like on

 I'm choosing honey for my sweetener, but you could actually use a hundred percent maple syrup

 So I'm gonna use that for today, but I have used maple syrup and I've used stevia even and stevia

 And this would be a great dish for picky eaters that want something sweet

 So you're gonna add 1 to 2 teaspoons depending on how much cinnamon you like

 I don't typically tend to measure because I have no problem with cinnamon

 And so we're gonna throw that in and so this dish right now has so many nutrients to it cinnamon actually

 Spice to use the craisins are a great fruit and then you've got your natural fats

 Which are the almonds and the coconut oil and you've got your protein source in there, which would be the quinoa

 I'm gonna kind of fulfill on that sweet craving that I have and I can share this with everyone

 I want to hear from you and if you feel comfortable share your recipes, please do we love reading them

 Everybody gets inspiration from one another on different recipe ideas.

 Inserting a branch fitting into a saw pipe is pretty straightforward, but what about

As you can see, it's called a slip socket because there's nothing inside

 it to stop the pipe travelling through, so we can slide it up the pipe, helping us to

 I've prepared a section of pipe which we'll need later, and now we need to mark where

 branch, and follow that down, and that's where we need to cut the pipe.

 OK, so these are our two marks indicating the section of pipe we're removing.

 we first remove the burrs, on the outside, and don't forget the inside too.

 clean chamfered edge, we can get the fitting on, starting with the repair slip coupler.

 something that I have been going to a lot lately and that's really easy.

 A list of all the products I mention will be below, as well as my social media accounts

 and my new Google Helpouts account where I can teach you a one-on-one makeup lesson over the internet.

 So go check that out if you're interested and let's get started!

 First we're going to start out with our canvas and this is the Makeup Forever HD Foundation

 and I am in the shade N140 and this is a great foundation if you want your skin to look flawless

It's kind of crazy using those two words in the same sentence but it really does

 look like second skin and I'm using a Samantha Chapman Real Techniques brush to help me blend that in.

 Here I am taking the wonderful LORAC Pro Palette that I cannot keep my hands off

 and I'm going to go in the middle on the top row there to grab the color Mauve

 and I'm picking that up on a fluffy blender brush and you know what that means.

 I'm going to go into my crease and whoa I put a little too much color there but these eyeshadows

 creating a bit more depth to my crease but I'm also going to take that color and run it

It is very shimmery and it's going to go right on our lid space.

 my eyes with matte and then putting shimmer right in the center.

 that color then I'm taking the shade Nude which is even more iridescent as you can see and I'm

 putting that concentrated on the center of my eyelids so that it pops even more.

 popping effects here so I'm just packing that on and layering the two together.

 basic gel black eyeliner by Maybelline and I'm taking it on a liner brush from Sigma and I don't

 is I am usually just programmed to do so I'm just doing a basic thin line across the eyelids.

 Black Mascara, a very bushy wand that's going to thicken up my eyelashes and I like to go side to

 brown eyeliner and this is Coffee by MAC, a really nice soft kohl pencil to define the lower lash line.

 So that it isn't that harsh I'm going to take the edge of an eyeshadow brush and I picked up a

 little bit of the same color we used in our crease that we used earlier on on the lower lash line to

Now I'm using a creamy concealer by Maybelline Fit Me and it is in the

 shade Fair and this is going to brighten up the under eye area as you can see it is very bright

And now I'm going to take the same brush I used for my foundation and

 just work that in and as you can see that already brings the eye makeup forward it just intensify

 those colors a little bit so I like using a light concealer for that reason.

 that makeup with my Laura Mercier Translucent Powder and I'm taking it on a small dome sigma

 brush and I'm working this on my t-zone area especially underneath the eyes to prevent any sort of

 creasing happening and this is going to help give a nice smooth surface before we go into our powder

 bridesmaids last weekend of all different skin tones and it worked for so many of them so I

 really highly suggest this bronzer a lot and it smells like chocolate so that's an extra bonus.

 Here I'm taking a Sigma blush this is called Serene and it's a gorgeous mauve peachy tone.

 nice with the eyeshadows we have on here and it's super highly pigmented.

Here I am taking my current favorite nude color this is by L'Oreal

 Infallible line and it's their 8-Hour Lip Gloss and they are not kidding about the staying power

 products I used in this tutorial will be listed below as well as on my social media accounts.

 Thank you so much again for always joining me and being so supportive.

 He told me that I should upload this, you know, because he wanted to see it.

 I really like this guy, because I mean, I have the toy version, I mean, I think he looks

 He has articulation, he has T-joints in both shoulders, lachet joint here, um, stud friction

 He can waist swivel, his head moves like this and then it can turn, but it's kind of a pain

 He has ball joint in knees, and his feet do pivot, but it's more for transformation.

 This is the only, you can consider this a take apart transformer, but I mean, this is

 Um, straighten up this, the tail, pivot it back, and then straighten this.

 I mean, you can, this is the tail, so you can position it however you want.

 You fold this up, and then the top, the bottom drop up, and then the top drop down.

 Yeah, and uh, you take, this is his fin, and you take it, and it's on a ratchet joint.

 And well, now he's come apart, but um, anyways, you take it, and you kinda have to hold it

 Anyways, I'll fix him, and I'll ratchet it up, and I'll be right back.

 What you do is you spin, you spin the legs to where the legs are facing backwards, but

 And what you do is you lift them up, just so they look like he's using them.

 Um, and then you take the ball joint, and you fold it like this.

 So, if you enjoyed this video, like, comment, and subscribe for more videos coming soon.

 Tell me what I should make next, because I don't really have any ideas.

 I mean, so, I'll do more, and once again, thanks to 97legomaniac, um, go subscribe to

 him, because he's a great builder, and I like his transformers.

 Hi, today we're going to create our own Stamp-A-Ma-Jig with kids' Lego blocks.

 put one of the smaller blocks there, one of the smaller blocks there,

 Thanks for watching, and hope you have a great day of stamping.

 Today in the Detail Garage, we're going to apply the perfect combination to this white

 That's going to be a coat of White Light, the Hybrid Radiant finish,

 topped with a protective layer of White Wax, the Luminous Glow Infusion.

 This is a brand new car, and the owner wants it to stand out from the crowd with a superior

 We want to bring out the pure white look, so we're going to be applying the glaze to

 and then we're going to protect it from any yellowing using the White Wax.

 First we're going to grab some microfiber applicator pads and our White Light,

 White Light is designed to cleanse the paintwork, so it's going to bring out any white shine,

 and it's going to make sure that the beautiful color of the white stands out.

 Plus it removes any yellowing that can be caused from UV solar rays,

 All you need to do to apply the White Light is to spread it right on the paint using a

 You can do this by hand or machine, but since we're in a pinch, we're going to do it with

 This is really easy to do, all you need to do is spread it out, sort of like you're spreading

 You don't want to get any splotches, you don't want any spots that are missed, or that don't

 This product is mainly designed for paintwork to enhance glow and depth,

 The best thing about White Light is that it doesn't just work on white vehicles,

 Plus it works on solid and metallic colors to bring out the shine.

 So now that Matt and I have a nice coat of White Light on the hood, we're going to wait

 Then we're going to come back, buff it off with a microfiber towel, and apply a layer

 So now we're back after 20 minutes and our White Light has bonded to the surface of this

 We're going to be using some premium microfiber towels to buff off the White Light.

 So all you have to do is take your microfiber towel and buff it off.

 When you apply White Light, you need to make sure you apply it in a nice, thin layer.

 If you put it on with a machine, you're going to be putting on a perfect, thin layer every time.

 It's important whenever you touch paint, whether you're spreading product or removing product

 If you got something in your pad, or if there was a piece of dirt, rock, or something on

 You're ending up with circle scratches, those are easier to see and harder to take out.

 So now that our bright white look has come back to the hood, we need to go ahead and

 So White Wax is our luminous glow infusion for white and light color paintwork.

 It's a premium carnauba based wax with specialty gloss enhancers blended in.

 Now you take off the cap and the little sleeve in here, and the consistency is unique.

 So because White Wax is a premium carnauba wax blended with synthetic enhancers, we can

 Yeah, we've actually blended White Light to bring out the brightest color of white.

 Since white can absorb UV solar rays and get contamination and over spray on the vehicle

 So it's going to last in all climates and all seasons, and it's going to keep your

 Just that one little dab that I got on the pad is enough to do this entire half of the

 So a little bit goes a long way when you use the products properly.

 If we spread on too thick of a coat, it would be hard to remove, and we would waste a lot

 So now we're going to wait 20 minutes before we buff off the White Wax to make sure it

 bonds to the surface and gives a full six months of protection.

 That way our white vehicle is going to stay looking its best in all seasons.

 We're going to come back, buff it off, and then we're going to show you that brilliant

 To do that we're going to use a 16x16 black edgeless microfiber towel.

 We like to use the edgeless towel because there's no chance of scratching with any hard

 Just like before, when we buffed off White Light, we're going to go in straight lines only.

 We like to use microfiber because it's extra soft, and if there is any extra dirt or debris

 on the surface, it will get picked up and held in the microfiber away from the paint

 Since we used a foam applicator pad to apply the White Wax, we got a perfectly thin layer

 You want to make sure when you're applying any type of paste wax that you put the thinnest

 That way me and Matt, or anybody out there, has no problem buffing off any of the wax.

 If you put a nice thin layer, the wax should buff off effortlessly with a microfiber towel.

 So now that we've got the White Wax buffed off this white BMW, it really stands out and

 Now our white vehicle is going to stay looking good, and it's going to be protected for up

 That way any type of over spray, contamination, or UV solar rays aren't going to harm this

 Hopefully if you have a white car or any light colored vehicle, you can pick up White Light

 and the White Wax to make sure it stays looking good for the life of the vehicle.

 So hopefully we'll see you next time right here in the Detail Garage,

 but always remember to have fun, stay clean, and keep on detailing!

 In this video, I will teach you how to solve the Hanayama Cast Chain Puzzle.

 So that's how I'm going to call these pieces during the puzzle.

 So first, the secret move to this puzzle is this move right here.

 You have to pass the two pieces through using the two holes like this.

 So first, you have to connect pieces 1 and 3 together like this.

 Now in order to find the solution for this puzzle, you need to have this piece in the middle.

 In order to do that, you have to connect 1 and 2 again from this position.

 So now the order goes 1, 3, 2, or if you look at it the other way, 2, 3, 1.

 Now there's a groove in piece number 1 that fits into the notch in piece number 3 like this.

 Make sure that this area right here is flat so that you can slide piece number 2 out without it hitting anything.

 Now for the putting back together, do the same thing with piece number 1 and 3.

 And then fit the little groove in number 1 into the notch in number 3 again.

 And then put piece number 2 back in so that the icon depicting piece number 1 and piece number 2

 And do the same thing to get all three of them hooked onto each other by connecting 1 and 2 this way.

 It might be easier if you kind of shift it around a bit before you try to do it again.

 Alright, so unfortunately, Kombucha Master Flex couldn't make it today.

 He's off in China dealing with his mentor, but he told me that I have this.

 I'm going to show you exactly how to get into our Kombucha here.

 So the name of the YouTube subscriber was way out of space and it was Obi-Wan Kombuchi.

 A lot of you were asking how do you get a scoby and that's exactly it.

 You need somebody to produce it for you or you can order them online.

 So the second step is to take some of this kombucha and put it into here like this.

 Now if you guys remember, if you're big fans of Synergy, the kombucha that I used to grow

 up on and I absolutely loved, they took it off the shelf for a while and that was because

 So the way that we do that is we add a little bit of apple which has natural fructose, form

 It's going to create a different taste in the kombucha which you're absolutely going

 So now I'm going to add a little bit of cranberry and apple which we just juiced.

 We're going to let it sit for a couple more days and then this kombucha will be good to

 So you remember last week in the video, you have to save a little bit of starter kombucha

 Kombucha is expensive, 4 or 5 bucks, sometimes 7 bucks if you order it online.

 We're all about bringing you good content because we believe that health starts with

 So if you like any one of these videos, the video last week or this video, make sure you

 Using the succulent cutter D, cut 14 leaves and place them in your storage board.

 Repeat the same process, cutting 7 cutter C leaves, 6 cutter B leaves, and 4 cutter A leaves.

 Roll 2 1⁄2 inch and 2 1⁄4 inch balls of gum paste and flatten to 1 16th of an inch thick.

 Place one of the largest leaves on a cornstarch-dusted piece of thin or medium foam.

 Using the small ball tool, soften the outer edge of the leaf, pinching the end with fingers,

 Place one of the large gum paste circles in the bottom of the cup.

 Brush the stem end of your leaf with gum glue adhesive and attach it to the circle,

 Brush the center area of the leaves with gum glue adhesive and attach the remaining large gum paste circle.

 If needed, use the foam decorating wedges or crumpled paper napkins to support the leaves for dimension until they dry.

 Brush the center area of the leaves with gum glue adhesive and attach one of the smaller gum paste circles.

 Repeat that same process with the 7 size C leaves, again positioning them between the leaves of your previous row.

 Repeat the process with the last 4 A leaves, this time attaching them to the center of the plant.

 To make the center of the succulent, roll a half inch ball of green gum paste into a log measuring 3 quarters of an inch long by 3 eighths of an inch in diameter.

 With scissors, snip 4 slits 3 eighths of an inch deep to create outside leaves and 2 or 3 slits for the inside leaves.

 Cut the bottom of the log flat and attach it to the center of the succulent with your gum glue adhesive.

 Once your succulent is completely dry, brush the leaves with color dust accents for a more realistic look.

 Welcome to the Real Brides Makeover at the Asiana Bridal Show 2015, in collaboration

 with Estee Lauder Companies and exclusive makeovers with Estee Lauder Company products.

 I'd like to show you how to create a striking smoky eye using shades of bronze, gold with

Colours that compliment the ornate work many of the traditional outfits

 Firstly, I've applied a base using Bobbi Brown Longwear Eye Base to ensure the longevity

 always safe to have a play of colours that are earthy so that they can compliment the

 For the eyeshadow here, we have used the Clinique Quad Shadow in Morning Java.

 I've applied the lightest colour to the brow bone and inner corners and swept the gold

 across the ball of the eyelid, ensuring to smudge the chocolate along the crease line

 To add definition, I'm smudging Bobbi Brown Longwear Gel Liner in Black Ink right up against

 the upper lash line and blending it with a brush, creating a dramatic, voluminous look.

 Now, line the waterline in Clinique Quick Liner for Eyes Intense in Intense Midnight,

 We go back to the Clinique Quad Eyeshadow Palette in Morning Java and apply the same

 I believe that all brides should celebrate the voluminous lashes, which compliment the

 elaborate jewellery and garments and give the face a bold and defined look.

 great in photographs too and open up the eyes, making them look bigger and more open.

 Here, I've used MAC Lashes, which don't feel heavy on the eyes.

 Before finishing the eye area, I apply Smashbox BB Concealer in Shade Medium and sweep it

 gently across the under eye area, giving it a clean, finished look.

 Well-groomed brows will instantly give your face a more polished look.

 To finish off the eye area, I'm using the Bobbi Brown Longwear Gel Liner in Black Ink.

 If you really want to make the eye stand out, try using some glitter.

 afraid of using glitter, but it doesn't have to look childish or girly, it can look striking

I have used MAC Reflect Glitter in Antique Gold and gently pressed

 To help blend your own lashes with the false ones, use mascara, such as the Smashbox Full

 Finally, finish off the look with the Clinique Bottom Lash Mascara, used specifically for

 the bottom lashes to make the eyes look wider and more defined.

 As you can see, you get dramatic, sparkly eyes that compliment and give you the finished,

Today's video is going to be a tutorial on how to do this braided updo,

 kind of like a Heidi braid sort of thing, without any tricky French backwards fishtail,

 formal because you can still see the hair bands here and the pins and you know, it's a little

 running errands or on those days when you haven't washed your hair and you just need to get it up

 a tweedus or a twitter as you might want to call it, but check me out.

 ally k. It's something I just kind of started, a little something if you want to keep up with me

 and fashion tips as well as updates on my life and all sorts of good stuff.

The problem is you part it in the side, you might have some shorter pieces over here that

For this side, you're going to want some hair gel or just get your hair

Now you're going to start your braid just behind your ear, straight down.

Now you're just going to simply pin your braids on top of your head.

 You're going to take the one side, pull it up and over to make a crown on your head like so.

 Make sure you pull it tight because if you don't pin it right, it's going to pull down a little bit

 and it's going to do this weird like slouchy bump thing right here, which I'm just so paranoid about.

 So depending on the look you want, you can pull it more forward to create more of like a

 I like to just wrap them around here, around the base of the other braid and pin it back up along

 So since this braid end is already behind the base of this one here, just wrap it around itself.

 it looks a little funky sometimes like this side here with the pins and the hair and stuff, but

 it's just so simple and from the front, super cute and pretty just really easy.

 but it's one of those ingredients that paired with the right flavours.

 Leave the skin on because it just adds a nice bit of colour and crunch.

 You'll find when it's ready, the oil will start to pool around the edges

 and the colour of the spice paste will also become much deeper.

 to something that's just got a nice, pleasant, toasty, prawny flavour.

 It's rice that's been cooked the night before and refrigerated.

 and that way you don't get a horrible, steamed, stodgy mess at the end.

 As long as it tastes good, otherwise this whole thing will taste like shit.

 Please note that cocoa powder is not a substitute, otherwise there'll be no protein in it.

 Don't overdo it with the water, because then it'll just be like fucking watery.

 I might make a joke about weigh and weigh protein, because no one's ever made one of those before.

 Say something about, like, no or no weigh, or, you know, something like that.

 Okay, you don't have to, it's fine, I think I'm going to be exhausted.

 Need to mix it up first, or do you want to put the banana in first?

 Don't forget to tear the scales once you've put the kitchen roll on,

 And you see, the thing is, if you need more water, you can always add it,

 but you don't want to go overboard with the water straight away,

 It should fall off the spoon as though it's like a shit, really, the way it's shaped.

 What you can do as well is add a little spoonful of peanut butter as well and then microwave it for 30 seconds.

 I prefer it with natural yoghurt instead of water, but we'll do that in another video.

 Hi, I'm registered dietitian Carolyn O'Neill, author of the dish on eating healthy and being

 Welcome to Emory HealthCare's cooking series, Recipes for Wellness.

 We're going to show you how to cook delicious and nutritious foods that are good for your

 Well, you know, I understand that the kitchen is one of your favorite places to be.

 It's where the whole family gathers and this is where we teach kids about food and the

 You know, we always want to get people to eat more fruits and vegetables.

Lin, I think a lot of people would never even imagine that a dietician and a

 bariatric surgeon would be standing in the kitchen telling you to eat dessert.

 Well, everyone may think surgery is surgery and we, our technicians, will do operations

 It's really what's happening to people's, in their minds, their lifestyles, the foods

 First of all, I'm going to have you help me and add some brown sugar.

 We have a top surgeon working with blueberries right now, folks.

 And we're going to add to that, if you can, again, assist here on the operating table,

 We're allowed to have a little bit of saturated fat in our diet, right?

 People think that you should cut out all fat, but fat's important for hair growth, for your

 Fat that contains both omega-3 and omega-6, they're very important.

 And again, it's going to add more crunch to our crumble, and more crumble to our crunch.

 A lot of people don't know, too, that almonds actually are a pretty decent source of calcium,

 You know, I'll tell you, the people will say that you get your best omega-3 fatty acids

 I think a lot of the vegetables, beans, they contain a lot of the good quality.

 And again, you want to have it really crunchy and crispy on top.

 And it's going to cook for about 35 minutes, or until the blueberries kind of are bubbly

 What is it that you wish that your patients knew more about the enjoyment of food?

 I think too often people go out, buy something because it's convenient, or they're too busy,

 or it's been a long work day, it's much easier to buy something out.

 And it's been about five minutes, I said, and I guess about five minutes have gone by

 We already have some that are done, and you and I are going to get to enjoy them sooner

 I am adding a little scoop, you know, not a whole bunch, but a little scoop, and this

 And if you didn't have frozen yogurt like this, you could just use regular Greek yogurt

 And oh my gosh, I love the fact that at Emory Health Care you are telling people they can

 Hi, I'm Megan Mohamedion, a registered dietitian for Emory Health Care.

 That delicious oatmeal blueberry crumble that you just saw is a perfect example of using

 Greek yogurt actually has twice the amount of protein as regular yogurt.

 Join us at emoryhealthcare.org for more nutrition information and tips.

 Today we're going to make French toast, which is a great way to use up leftover stale bread.

 All you need to make French toast is your bread and then we're going to make a custard.

 So in a large bowl, put three large eggs and I'm just going to whisk those until they're

 And to that I'm going to add three quarters of a cup, that's 180 milliliters, of either

 Depending on how rich you want your French toast to taste will depend on whether you're

 And then to that I'm going to add just a pinch of salt and a quarter of a teaspoon of vanilla

 If you have your temperature set at 350, that's about 180 degrees Celsius, or you could just

 do it on a frying pan on the stove and have that at medium, medium-high heat.

 And then if you have a non-stick surface like this, you could just spray with a non-stick

 cooking spray or you could just use a little, I'm going to use a buttery spread, or just

 And then we're going to take the bread and dip it into our custard.

 Now if your bread is really stale, you may have to leave it in the custard for a little

 You want it to absorb some of the liquid, but you don't want it to get all soggy where

 My bread's just about a day old so I don't have to leave it in too much.

 I'm using a white bread, but you could use whole wheat, rye bread, cinnamon bread, I

 And then all you do is fry it until the bottom side is golden brown and then we flip it.

 Now the butter or the oil that you put down does, as you can see, help with the browning.

 Now you will see the second side never browns quite as much as the first.

 Now if we want to do some more, then I would put a little more butter or oil on there and

 You want to make sure that the French toast is cooked all the way through.

 So the outside should be nice and crispy, yet the inside nice and soft.

 But another way I like to do it, especially if I'm having it for lunch, is I like to spread

 the bread with some jam and then maybe have a little whipped cream on top.

 It's a beautiful day outside, we're in front of our grill, it doesn't get any better until

 And that's the topic of today's masterclass, how to grill the perfect steak.

 We're going to give you 10 easy tips to follow to take your steak grilling skills to another

 You need to know what kind of steak you're cooking and how thick, that way we know how

 Also make sure you're taking your steaks out 10 to 15 minutes before you grill them, that

 You've made your grilling game plan, now let's go on to tip number two, and that's taking

 This is also a good time to gather any accessories and tools that we're going to need for grilling

 We've cleaned out our grill, we've got all the tools and accessories we're going to need,

 Since these steaks are going to take less than 20 minutes, we're going to be using the

 We've got our grill prepared, and that's what takes us to tip number four, preheating your

 grill, and this is by far the most important step in grilling a steak.

 This brings the grill up to temperature, and that's what helps in searing.

 Those beautiful grill marks that we see, that's where all that great flavor comes from.

 The reasons why we oil our food and not the grates is it creates a barrier between the

 food and the cooking grates, it helps with caramelization, and it also helps the food

 Once you've oiled both sides, now it's time to season, and this is going to add some great

 We've got our steaks prepared, now we're on to tip number six, which is cleaning our cooking

 Today we're going to be using our gourmet barbecue system with sear grate insert, which

 Just remember the best time to clean your cooking grates is right after you preheat

 We've got our cooking grates clean, now let's put our steaks on.

 We've got our food on and our timer's going off, and that takes us to tip number eight,

 And that usually happens in the first two to three minutes when we put our food on a

 Our timer's gone off again, which means it's time to flip, and that's tip number nine.

 Whenever you're grilling directly, you should only turn your food once.

 We've got our steak off the grill, and we're now on tip number 10, letting your food rest.

 This will allow it to relax and the juices to run back into it.

 It's been a beautiful day, we have an amazing steak, and with these 10 tips, the next time

 If you have any other questions, you can find us here on Weber.com, refer to your owner's

 And they did all this fruit and olive oil and salt and fresh honey.

 Because you get the sweet, you get the peppery, you get the crunch from the bread and the nut.

 When you're gluten-free and dairy-free and soy-free and everything-free,

 I make everything and anything that I want, that I used to love, that I can't have anymore.

 I couldn't have yeast anymore, so I created a way to have a fluffy bread that tastes like bread,

 Anything that I wanted to eat and couldn't anymore, I figured out a way how to create it here.

 You give someone a sandwich that can't have a sandwich anymore, or a bagel,

 I had a 65-year-old woman sit right in this seat and cry because she had a bagel.

 People don't realize that food is such a part of life that normally people take for granted.

 Every kind of event and holiday, there's some kind of food that goes with it,

 It's not only giving them a bagel, it's giving them a peace of mind,

 Traveling and just wandering through the city and stopping at a place to grab a bite,

 I wanted this place to feel safe, number one, because with celiac disease,

 you pretty much never feel safe when you're eating, especially when you're eating out.

 So I wanted it to feel like someone's kitchen, like grandma's kitchen.

 I wanted to make this place feel as though you step back in time and you're in grandma's kitchen

 and she just pulled some tomatoes out of the garden or some berries off the tree

I mean, would you ever think that that's gluten-free, dairy-free, soy-free, egg-free, yeast-free?

 It's honestly trial and error of using different leavening process.

 In case any of you guys are wondering how to compress a caliper when you're doing your

 breaks I've always used a simple method that I was taught years ago that always worked

 What it does is you put the C-clamp here, put this behind the caliper and then once

 you have it there then you just turn, turn, use a little bit of elbow grease and you

 It's a new tool that I'm using that makes the job ten times easier.

 Because sometimes when you're using the clamp it slips from behind here and here and you

 I'm just going to give you a quick demonstration of how it works.

 You can get it online or go to your typical O'Reilly's, Kroger's, AutoZone and purchase

 To be honest with you, you can compress this brake within literally seconds.

 So pretty much you get to where it will fit into the caliper and get the brake pad.

 Wind it all the way down to where it will fit basically and slide that sucker right

 I try to line it up in the middle and all you do is simply, I would hold the back piece

 with my other hand but obviously I'm holding the camera, but you can put one hand, preferably

 left hand behind here and put the right hand on this side and all you do is simply just

 turn the wheel just like that and if it gets a little firm, you feel a little resistance,

 just stop for a minute and it's compressing, then you keep going.

 Oh, and what I'm not doing which normally we do is put like a pan under the car because

 brake fluid is going to come from the master cylinder boot and drip down into the floor

 and just to avoid making a mess, you put like a little oil pan or something under here and

 Sorry about that guys, I dropped the brake pad but that's a perfect example of why you

 want to hold your left hand back here and use this hand to turn the presser because

 But I forgot to remind you or say, when you're putting this against the caliper, make sure

 This way will also work but it's a lot easier and more effective this way.

 So slide it in just like that and try to line up in the middle if you can, slide it over

 I mean, it's awesome, amazing how effective this is and how easy it is compared to using

 And once you feel it getting tighter and you're almost there, the whole objective is to line

 up the, just to compress it to where it's even, to where it's pretty much flush.

 You know, with this right here, the caliper here, and it's flush against this outside

 portion right here and you can kind of, it's a good idea once you put the brake pads on,

 if it's not flush, you may have to compress it a little bit more or depress it.

 And there's kind of an example of what I was talking about, about it being flush against

 And that's a simple way to remove your deep compressor brake caliper.

 Now I've got my mum coming over for dinner tonight, and I'm going to cook her a wonderful yellow curry.

 Okay, for this delicious recipe we're going to need 500 grams of chicken,

 1 very large potato, a few bits of ham, which I'm going to cut up and just dice,

 Rightio, so over a fairly lowish to medium heat, we're going to put the half jar of this curry paste,

 Now we'll just stir that around until it starts getting all nice and fragrant.

 Right, well once that starts bubbling, it's time to throw in the chicken.

 Get that heat really happening to sort of semi-cook this chicken.

 It doesn't really have to be cooked at all, because it'll cook later on.

 And now I'm going to add the ham, and after about a minute we slowly pour in the coconut milk.

 Now we're just going to bring that to the boil, and once that starts boiling,

 Now remember, the smaller you cut the pieces of potato, the faster they will cook.

 We're then going to add the cherry tomatoes, which I've just cut in half.

 Now we're just going to turn the heat right down, and let that simmer until those potatoes are cooked.

 And once again, if you think the sauce is looking a bit too thick,

 don't hesitate, just add a little bit of water, just to thin it out a little bit.

 While that's simmering, I'm just going to cut this red onion in lengthways like this.

 So I'll just add these onions, give it another minute, and that's ready to be served up.

 All you've got to do now is serve that over some rice, and your dinner is done.

 Probably not as good as the red or the green, in my opinion, but still a really nice curry.

 A little bit spicy, and with the coconut milk, you always know it's going to taste nice and creamy.

Thanks for watching, and I'll see you next time right here on Greg's Kitchen.

 Hi guys, this is how to play the classic riff wild thing with just three chords E, A and

 With this riff we're starting on an A chord, playing it twice and then doing the palm mute

 Then we're going straight to a D chord and playing that twice but we're playing that

 one a little quicker so the first two happen on the beat, 1, 2, mute on beat 3 and then

 and 4 would be your count so 1, 2, 3 and 4 would be the count there.

 And then we've got the exact same rhythm happening but E this time on the beat, E, D, mute and

 So listen one more time, we have 1, 2, mute 3, 4, E, E, mute 3, 4.

 The biggest change I think to watch out for here is definitely this D to an E change.

 It's not too quick but it is a big change and I recommend really working on that anchor

 And then at the end of each section, so before it goes into the wild thing I think I love

 you and before the verse starts, we hit an E major chord instead of going back to the

 And then that either follows on straight into the riff or goes into another section

 And for this section we're doing something that generally only happens in guitar riffs.

 So what we're doing here is we're taking all three fingers off from your A chord, we're

 lifting them and playing the three open strings, but just the three strings that you had your

 So the D, the G and the B. And then on the second strum we're putting those three fingers

 back down with whatever way you're playing an A chord, it's totally fine.

 It's an easy way to do a fast change rather than having to do power chords or anything

 And it's great for coordination and as I say this happens an awful lot in classic riffs

 and is a great way to add some riff content to normal strumming.

 So it starts with open, open strings, A chord, open strings, A chord.

 Keep your fingers down on this A chord while he says, wild thing I think I love you.

 Even a very slow psychedelic version by Jimi Hendrix which I recommend checking out.

 You can do lots of strumming in between each of the main beats.

 But you've got to make sure that those main beats are in the right place for it to sound

 And if it doesn't sound like wild thing, pull it back to those main beats.

 So the challenge here is to make 3 chords that are fairly simple sound like the classic

 Now you may accidentally after doing the E, E, accidentally go back to the A chord.

 Everybody makes mistakes with riffs and when even the greatest guitarists that you'll see

 live and you'll pay good money for, mistakes happen when you play things live.

 The best advice I can give you is where the riff restarts on the A, always join back in

 So that you know where you're going to come back in, in case you do make a mistake, in

 But other than that, have fun with it, play it down the guitar shop, see if anyone recognises

 it and that's another video, part of your 10 songs with 3 chords, E, A and D.

 The place ain't the same, the details have changed since I moved away years ago.

 The place I was born, where I say I'm from, with an accent not strong as before.

 My family are here, my memories are here, my heart always is in this town.

 Changing from my background, an old mining town, breathing new life all around.

 G'day, I'm Warwick Schiller and recently on my Facebook page I had several people ask

 me how you go about fixing a horse that spins on the wrong hind foot.

 Spinning on the wrong hind foot is basically a lack of forward motion.

 So I thought I might, because I'm working on that a lot with him, I thought I might

 So before you start trying to teach one to spin you want to make sure they've got good

 You want to make sure that he has good lateral flexion on both sides like that.

 You would want to make sure, you know, there's a lot of tools you need.

 You want to make sure they disengage really well so you can really push that hind end

 You would want to make sure you have a really good backup and the reason you'd want to make

 sure you have a good backup is because in this exercise you will be handling both reins

 And so with any horse, any young horse, you know, when I first ride them around it's either

 I don't even start, I never ever touch both reins at the same time unless they're standing

 So he's only been backing up for about three weeks but I should be able to just close my

 fingers, he should break at the pole and step backwards, bend his hocks like that.

 That's my goal teaching these horses to back up is have them really, really soft right

 And what that does for you then every time you touch both reins they know what the answer

 I see a lot of people riding around pulling on both reins and the horse sticks its head

 in the air and he's pushing on it because to me they never taught that horse what both

 reins meant before they started trying to use both reins for something or other.

 You know, same thing, you want to be able to, you know, if you can do that you can ride

 forward, you can ride forward and pick up on both reins and add your leg and they look

 And he's only been doing that for about a week now but it should be that soft, you know,

 just close your fingers, they break at the pole, add leg, they step up under themselves

 It should be that soft this early on if you can get all the right stuff there.

 But anyway, that's a bit off track but I was just making sure that, you know, so you want

 to make sure your horse has good, you know, they're good when you pick up on both reins.

 So you know, I've done a lot of stuff before I started trying to teach this horse to turn.

 I've walked around the fence quite a bit and I've stopped and backed up and tipped

 Stop, back up, tipped him into the fence, see they get over their hocks and walk forward.

 I'll just bend his head off to one side and I'll start to back him in circles like this.

 You can see this really makes them bend their hocks and get their hocks underneath them

 So he almost knows how to spin but I haven't started working on the spin yet.

 So I'm just backing him in a circle right here and he should just put his weight on

 his hock right there, step his front feet over and step out of it.

 So all I'm going to do right now is just basically I'm going to do like a little star shape.

 And I want you to watch when I step forward because that's the most important part.

 If you're trying to fix a horse that spins on the wrong foot, they have a lack of forward

 You just walk along here, pick up here, pick up, move that front end over right there,

 You watch next time I do that, he will start to turn on his inside hind foot and then he'll

 So right there he's sucking back, right there I push him forward.

 So I'm just going to move both hands over this way, he steps across like that and right

 That will help you a great deal with getting those horses to stand up on an inside hind

 foot and that's kind of how we start teaching these young horses to bring their front feet

 The main thing you want to be aware of is that you don't do too many spins and get them

 Another way you can teach them to spin is just walk a circle and make that circle smaller

 Just make that circle smaller and smaller and smaller and they'll start to step across

 See his back feet are walking forward but they're getting smaller and smaller so that

 So what they do when you're doing that is, this is their hind feet.

 They're walking forward and then that inside hind foot takes less of a step and less of

 But if you keep turning right there it'll start to take less of a step and go the other

 So basically you're going to wind them around, you know, their inside front foot stepping

 Once it gets to where they place all their weight on it and start to turn like that,

 if you keep going further they will then start to step back with it and their weight's on

 So you just want to make sure, I'll show you once more, but you just want to make sure

 that you just wind that turn down and then step forward out of it.

 You can see how when I pick up on both, I've got to use both reins to do this and see how

 That's because I taught him what both reins mean before I attempted to do this.

 Otherwise you'll teach your horse to get stiff on you when you turn.

 So I'm just going to make this circle smaller and smaller and smaller and right there he's

 on his inside hind foot and see right there he starts to suck back.

 So I was too late right then but I wanted to show you what to do.

 So I'll try it, I'll do it again, but this time I won't wait as long.

 I'll wait until he gets his weight on that inside hind foot and then I'll step forward.

 So just make this circle smaller, smaller right there, step forward.

 You can just make that circle smaller, he really wants to turn right now.

 Make that circle smaller and smaller and smaller and then they'll suck back on that inside

 Oops, see he sucked back too much right then so I'll go forward.

 Anytime you feel that inside hind foot step backwards, just step forward and keep that

 So today's only the first day I've started working on turning and you saw right then

 he did a pretty nice little half turn and that's another thing.

 Just make sure your horse is pretty broke to do a lot of things before you start teaching

 You know if they're not soft in the face, they don't get off your legs, that sort of

 thing, don't try and teach him to turn because then all that resistance will come out and

 you'll probably end up making him spin on the wrong foot anyway.

 So that's your answer to how to stop your horse from turning on the wrong foot.

 Are you one of those women that's out there constantly working on your lower body, only

 to watch your shoulders look smaller and smaller as you go and not get any results with your

 If that's you, then you're probably an endomorph, a small, petite pair, or perhaps a medium

 Hi, I'm Stacey Rae Mednick, and I'm a personal trainer and group certified fitness instructor.

 Let's take five so that I can help empower you and teach you more about this body type.

 Usually what I like to tell my clients that are endomorphs is that the weight comes on

 first on where they gain it in the hips and thighs, it's last off.

 So usually they gain it there first, and it's usually last to come off.

 However, with proper exercise protocol, they can slowly whittle away at that lower body

 while they simultaneously build their upper body, so they have more of a symmetrical appearance.

 She's a combination body type of an ectomorph and an endomorph, the top of a banana, the

 Exercise prescription for this body type would be a 60-40 ratio.

 Sixty percent of the time this body type wants to be out moving, doing cardiovascular exercise

 They want to be moving about four to six times a week, anywhere from 45 to 60 minutes at

 The other part of the time, the 40 percent, they should be doing a strength training program

 The first exercise is she's going to be doing a decline pushup with leg curl.

 She's going to slowly go into a decline pushup, lowering her body down to the floor, elbows

 out to the side, coming up, and then adding the leg curl with the lower body, bring the

 heels to the glutes, curl, squeeze the hamstrings, and go back to start.

 Inhale, lower down, elbows out to the side, press through the floor, squeeze the chest,

 hold that position, and pull the heels towards the glutes doing a leg curl, strengthening

 We're going to inhale, lower the body down, elbows out to the side, push through the floor,

 squeeze the chest, and bring those heels to the glutes, contract those hamstrings, and

 The second exercise we're going to do for the endomorph is a squat with an outer thigh lift

 So we're going to start off with legs shoulder width apart, a little wider than shoulder

 We're going to go down into a squat position with the arms alongside the body, dumbbells

 in the hands, sit back on the hips and the heels like you're sitting in an imaginary

 Come back up, squeeze the glutes, take the right leg out to the side and lift the arms

 We're going to sit back on the hips and the heels, stomach tight, eyes forward, back straight,

 come up, squeeze the glutes, lift the left leg out to the side, arms out in line with

 We're going to sit back on the hips and the heels, tummy tight, come up, squeeze the glutes,

 lift the right leg out to the side, lift the arms up to shoulder height to work those shoulders.

 Inhale, sit back, come up and squeeze, lift the left leg out to the side, and arms up

 The third exercise is a deadlift with shoulder press and calf raise.

 Let's start with legs slightly wider than shoulder width apart and elbows in line with

 As we inhale and fold forward from the hips, we're going to pull the abdominal wall in,

 eyes forward, back flat, going to the point where we feel a stretch in the hamstrings

 As we come upright, we're going to squeeze those glutes and hamstrings, press the weights

 overhead, come up under the toes, doing a shoulder press and a calf raise and going

 And again, head is forward, back is flat, stomach tight, hinge forward from the hips

 to the point that we feel a stretch in the hamstrings, low back, draw the upper body

 upright, squeeze the glutes, raise up under the toes, and add that shoulder press to work

 Some of the disease potential with this body type is the fact that the upper body tends

 And endomorphs, remember, work your upper body so that you look more symmetrical with

 Hi everybody, I'm Maheen and this is your Tuesday technique for the Daily Belly Dance

 I have been teaching workshops here this weekend and so Jenna is going to show us one

 So it's a little bit of a twist on a step that you might already know and it's rooted

 in what I call an arcing circle or a small hip circle or a waist hip circle.

 So the kind of hip circle that comes right from the waist and since it's technique Tuesday,

 if you don't mind Maheen, I'll give my little pet peeve about this kind of circle.

 Okay, so what I would love everybody to be careful about with this kind of a circle is

 that the rib cage stays lifted in a nice posture position even when the hips come forward in

 So a lot of times we get this, this tuck and we sink back each time and sink back and that's

 We'll keep that lift in the rib cage every time we tuck forward.

 When we travel with this, sometimes we travel with the direction of the front of the hip

 So if we're going towards the right in the front, we're stepping on the right foot and

 that's the little bit that we're going to kind of switch up here today.

 So it's almost like a walking hip circle combined with what I call the Nabil step or the grapevine

 Basically, we just cross in front, open to the side and cross in back and touch and rest

 and cross in front, open side, cross in back and touch in front.

 Let me show you how it looks like first and then we'll break down how the footwork fits

 So when we take that first step across the body, we're going to push the hip out and

 So we kind of take a breath back first and then push forward in to your front foot and

 So we're starting one and a half circles, sort of like the end of a safety pin that

 We're going forward, around to the back and then in towards your standing leg.

 Out, away from the direction you're traveling and then in with the front hip towards the

 Now if you find that a confusing breakdown, I'll give you one more option.

 So as I mentioned, you have this step together, step touch which some of you may have seen

 with using the same hip circle and if you get yourself into the flow of that, you can

 So if we're going here, we're going to keep going the same direction but switch our hip

 So first we'll try from the footwork adding the circle and then we'll try switching directions.

 Let's do it two more times and then we'll take the foot that's touching, circle towards

 You can use it continually or you can stop and add little fun things.

 Yep, it doesn't have to be fancy but you can use it as a transition.

 So let's try now taking it from the step, together, step and changing directions.

 So that's what we have today and we will be back next week with more technique.

 Hello, today we're making peanut butter chocolate chip cookies.

 Start off with a large bowl and 1 1⁄2 cup of white granulated sugar, 1 1⁄2 cup of

 packed brown sugar, 1 1⁄2 cup of softened butter, which is butter at room temperature,

 And then you're going to add 1 1⁄2 teaspoon of baking powder, 1 1⁄2 teaspoon of baking

 Blend that in and to that you're going to add 1 1⁄4 cups of all-purpose flour.

 If you prefer, you can blend the flour and the baking powder and those things together

 first and then put it in, but I don't really see the point, the big difference here.

 Blend that together until it is well mixed and then you're going to add 1 cup of semi-sweet

 chocolate chips, or you can even put in milk chocolate, it's up to you.

 Then using a cookie scoop, you're going to get a nice portion of dough, and I like mine

 You're going to flatten it slightly and then you're going to put it on the cookie sheet.

 The cookie sheet should be covered with parchment paper, lightly greased, or use a silicone

 The recipe says to use teaspoons, but I find these to be really too small.

 Then you're going to bake them at 375 for 10 to 12 minutes, and if you have an oven

 like mine, you should probably turn them halfway, turn the cookie sheet halfway through the

 You want it lightly golden brown on the edges and a lightly golden brown underneath.

 It makes them a little bit sweeter as well, so you know, whether you roll them in sugar

 And do not remove them from the cookie sheet until they are cool, otherwise they'll fall

 Hello everyone, I am your produce guy and today I want to bring you a recipe that was introduced to me by

Produce guy and this is a delicious salad that fits great into a healthy eating program

 Now I've already started on my dressing for this here in the bowl.

 Then I've zested one large lemon taking all the zest off of there put that in the bowl and to that

 we're ready to assemble the rest of the ingredients for the salad dressing here is 1 quarter cup of

 Dijon mustard and that oh, that's one of the secret ingredients in there very nice

 Honey, so we'll get that all in there for the sweetness, and we're ready to mix that up

 Maybe a little over a cup, but you want about a cup of that celery root, and we're just going to toss that right in the

 Now if you don't have a box grater at home that this is box grater intensive here

 If you don't have one a salad shooter or something like that is going to work great for this all right

 I'm going to go ahead and quarter those get the core out and then we will start

 Now you notice that I left the skins on those apples you can leave the skins on the carrots if you prefer them that way

 You can even leave the skin on that celery root if you like it is edible now

 But I like walnuts more than mrs.. Produce guy, so I'm going to throw a few extra in there and

 Salad, but I'm going to let those who serve it up for themselves put it on their own plates

 So I'm going to have a little pepper right there and just a tiny bit of salt

 Beautiful right there look at that the the orange the carrot the green of the

 If you want to throw a protein source in there such as cooked chicken or something else make that a meal all on its own

 Produce guy and the star of this of course has been our celery root

 Very versatile can go summer winter anytime and of course these ingredients are available year-round

 So give it a try and let me know what you think I am your produce guy.

 Do pineapples actually ripen after you remove them from the plant some say no I

 I'm going to pop this right into the refrigerator and leave it there

 Hoping to suspend it at its current state of total greenness there

 So we've got the three most common ones here from a four-in-one bucket.

 So like anything, if you're unsure or you've got a specific job, always talk to the guys

 at the counter at any Kennards branch and they'll advise you on what we've got going.

 The feature that all attachments have in common is a very simple hose fitting.

 They all have the same hose and two pins to release the attachment.

 Making sure the locking plate engages and safety pins do engage before you operate it.

 So we just need to reverse the procedure of taking the bucket off, which is engaging the

 pins, ensuring the pins come all the way down into the locking holes, and then just reverse

 We've got the trencher on, pins in, we're right to get to work.

 The thing to make that a lot easier when you're trenching is the mini loader is fitted what

 So what we need to do is if you bring that right around, what it does is it puts 100%

 of the hydraulic power to the attachment, in this case the trench digger, and very little

 So what we need to do is get as maximum power to the train digger, get it set up to the

 depth you want, engage your drive, you always trench backwards, not away from yourself,

 always trench back towards yourself so you can see where you've been, and also, so engage

 the drive and then we slowly bleed off the flow valve, just till we get enough pressure

 and drive to the wheels to maintain our travel speed, and then once it's set, it's all ready

 So just remember guys, when using the equipment, Kennard's Hire recommends the use of safety

 Be sure to use the personal protective clothing and equipment recommended for each product

 So whenever you're digging a hole in the ground, always remember the dial before you dig, so

 check with your local authorities to check for any underground services.

 The last thing you want to do is hit underground mains or something along those lines.

 If in doubt, always check with your Kennard's Hire store, we're happy to assist where we

 All right, so I'm back and with the stuff right over the flames, it's actually was cooking

 I've kind of rigged it up where I've got two of the skewers out to the side, and I'm actually

 using them to hold the four that are cooking up a little bit off the flames.

 A left-handed Michael Jackson or anything, just wearing this glove is allowing me to

 And we're getting a really beautiful grilling effect with this.

 There's a couple things I've already figured out about trying to use this tool this way.

 And one of them is, of course, the smoke's going to blow at me even though I set it up

 One of them is, the best thing I could do to do something like skewers or sausages or

 anything like that grilled would be to get a hold of some of the metal skewers and let

 the skewers just simply sit on the sides and make sure the fire's nice and low like it

 But the other thing is probably with grilling with this is to let these coals burn down

 But I don't think I'm going to be complaining about what I'm eating.

 Now what I have done that's kind of already saved me from burning everything when it just

 got started is you'll notice that the grill is sitting way off to the side.

 And that allows me to kind of take this stuff out here and give it a rest and rotate things

 around where some of them, see that one there, I burnt that one.

 But you know what, I'm going to probably really enjoy eating it anyway.

 And lamb as a red meat is something you don't want to overcook anyway.

 And what I'm going to do, I'm going to go ahead and kind of set these off to the side.

 And I'm going to tell you this cast iron sitting on top of this thing is so hot, these things

 are still sizzling and cooking and they will continue to cook through.

 And I'm going to basically let them cook through off to the side.

 I'm going to come back at the end, I'm going to hit them with a little bit of this glaze.

 And actually while they're doing that, I don't want these videos to get too long on the iPhone.

 It makes it much easier to upload if I keep them down like under five minutes.

 I'm going to let this continue to sit off to the side and cook like this and come back

 I'm going to talk a little bit more about how these things are traditionally used and

 some of my plans on YouTube for continuing to investigate alternative cooking, different

 Rocket stove, this being a Jamaican coal pot and some other ideas that I have down the

 This is my pot and I'm going to teach you today how to make the cha.

 And put the stove on, maybe just put the heat, because other cha people don't teach you how

 Cover it on its stove and it's going to boil the water because the stove heats up at the

 The heat causes water to boil, causing the water to become hot.

 Then you take this guy, khaliya, this is like you know like, so you open the cover, you

 Good now, the patila, you put it inside and then you let it boil.

 The dhudh is opening, this is where you need to be very careful.

 And so when the dhudh starts going up, you probably want to turn the heat down just a

 little bit and then probably like lift it up so it doesn't go over the edge.

 And then it rises up, then you lift it so it doesn't spill and then your mom doesn't

 This is something that I've just come up with along my adventures in life.

 So you probably noticed that I didn't put any sugar in the cha.

 One thing I like to do on, you know, I run marathons every three days.

 You know, for children with pointed Judah syndrome or somebody who's having a BPD, a

 So, for that situation, I would like to recommend one thing for you.

If you've got the strapless dress, just make sure initially when you put it on,

 make sure you turn your elastic under so it's a nice clean finish.

 And if someone's assisting you, they should stand on the right side of you.

 And before you even start tying the bow, it should be able to sit exactly like this.

 When you're about to tie your bow, it's not the bunny-er version we're doing.

 And then you take your other side, you go under, over, and through the hole.

 If it ends up a little bit bigger than what I've instructed you,

 because it really should only be like 3 to 4 inches in width on either side,

 if it's too big, then you want to pull these vertical ends and make it smaller.

 But if you've got it perfect on the first trial, then you're an expert at tying a bow.

 Just make sure your satin side's on the outside of these vertical pieces

 You might have to just fidget with it just a little until it's perfect.

 Your cummerbund area, you should make sure your edges are turned under

 And when you have it on, just make sure you pull the dress slightly

 And just make sure ruching is all adjusted so you don't get this,

 But just make sure the ruching continues beautifully all the way down your dress

 Okay, so now we're going to transition over to the B chord, and I like to throw this little

 bass run in there to get me from the E chord over to the B. This is a pretty cool moment

 where you're getting ready to set up the turnaround, so I'll do something quick like this from

 leave out this and add a bass run to get me over to the B. Okay, and that's what we're

I've got my third finger, third fret on the E, and sometimes you'll actually see

 I really prefer starting this with the pinky because it can just reach up there and it's

 on the E string, I'm hitting the A string open and hammering on to the first fret and

 then walking right up, and that's with my first finger, and then walking right up to

 first fret, G string, second fret, B string open, and then the E string, second fret.

 again, from the E, and I'm grabbing this open E first, the high E, and here's where

 we get into the B. Okay, if you can get that down, it's pretty quick to lay down that chord,

 usually been on either the E string or the A string, but here I'm going to actually come

 to the D string and pluck it open, and then hammer on with my first finger to the first fret.

 the rest of it is very similar to the A. So I'm plucking my E string, the B string is open,

 and the E string is third fret, B string is open, and then holding the B7 chord down here on the

 bottom strings, I'm plucking the D string, first fret, and then the G string, second fret.

 and then we move back into familiar territory and go to our A chord,

 and we're going to do the second half of that A chord with that little tail on it.

 starting from the very beginning, and then we'll talk about the turnaround.

 Okay, so here we are, the last two bars, and you can do a lot of special things here to kind of

 set you up for going around the whole progression again, which is fun to do,

 and it makes practicing this stuff just more and more enjoyable.

 I'd like to stick with just playing the chords that belong in that part of the progression,

 and then we'll plug in some cool turnarounds in an upcoming lesson.

 and then for the 12th bar, you're going to go to your V chord, the B chord,

 and then finally you'll just end back on I and start the whole thing over again,

And the B chord, I play a little bit differently for the last bar.

 The only fancy thing that I'm doing is this hammer on on the D string from the open to the first fret.

 Let's put it all together and play it one more time from the top.

 Congratulations on your purchase of Marshall Towns Enforcer Portable Texture Sprayer.

 We're confident that after watching this video and becoming familiar with the Enforcer, you'll

 be spraying a consistent, professional finish with more control and more mobility than a

 Place the bottom support bar into the notch on the bottom of the tank.

 assembly is facing the right-hand side as you would wear the backpack.

 If the straps seem excessively long, check to make sure the tank is attached so that the pneumatic

 you simply loosen the top four bolts a turn or two until they are no longer holding the lid down.

 It will become obvious when they are loose because they will turn freely in either direction.

 Once the four bolts have been loosened, lift up on the red top cap, locking pin, and turn the lid.

 Often the lid will seal during shipment and storage, making the lid very difficult to turn.

 If this happens, simply place your thumb on the upper portion of the lid as shown.

 index finger on the lower lid and apply pressure with your thumb.

This red pull pin forces you to release the pressure out of the tank before

 removing the top cap, thus preventing the lid from blowing off once aligned for removal.

 notice the lock-in tooth system that has been designed in the lower lid and locking pin.

 ensures that you have pulled up on the safety release valve prior to trying to remove the lid.

 The second very important feature of the lid is the emergency safety relief valve,

 which is located underneath the red Marshalltown cap in the top cap assembly.

 as a fail-safe mechanism in case the air pressure regulator in the pneumatic system fails or

If a dangerous amount of pressure has built up in your tank, the emergency safety

If it does happen, the safety relief valve will make a distinctive

In this event, disconnect the inlet air pressure and contact customer service

 because the pneumatic assembly is not functioning properly and could cause component failure or

 the blue handle on the piston, squeeze the trigger on the gun, and pull up.

The piston forces the mud down the tank through the mud hose and out the gun.

 you're familiar with the lid and piston, there are a couple of other components on the enforcer that

This consists of one on-off toggle switch and a mud flow control knob.

 first, the toggle switch, acts as the cutoff switch for airflow.

The second, the mud flow control knob, allows you to control how

Once you've reached your optimal flow, lock the knob in place by

We'll talk about this knob and switch a little more as we get into filling

This gun is much like a standard hopper gun but with some improvements.

 The first is its bottom feed port which ensures maximum maneuverability and comfort when used with

The Sharpshooter 2.0 gun features soft grip trigger and handle for

In addition, the 2.0 gun features a new adjustment system which allows

Simply adjust the spray flow using the adjustment knob as shown.

 Once the ideal spray is found, it can easily be reset using the indicator marks for reference.

 To help reduce fatigue on the larger jobs, the Sharpshooter 2.0 comes with a trigger lock feature.

 At the rear of the gun, you will find an airflow control which is very similar to standard

The airflow control allows you to control how much air pressure is created at the

This is extremely important as most orange peels and miss patterns are sprayed

 at high pressure while most knockdowns and splatters are sprayed at lower pressures.

 Now that you're familiar with the enforcer and all its features, let's move on to filling the unit.

 Today I'll be showing Feefe Healthy Recipes dot com how to make these banana blueberry

 Now, these are made with a batter that's really similar to banana bread.

 But instead of adding walnuts or other flavors of fall, I've given the recipe a more summery

 And those blueberries also pack an extra boost of antioxidants, so you really don't have

 Plus when you make a muffin at home, it's usually much more appropriately sized than

 Alright, to make this you're going to need 2 ripe bananas that are well mashed, 1 quarter

 of a cup of melted butter, that's a half a stick, 1 quarter of a cup of milk, 2 eggs,

 1 teaspoon of vanilla, 1 and a half cups of gluten free Bisquick, if you're not on a gluten

 free diet you can just use regular Bisquick, or visit the website and I'll give you more

 One half cup of firmly packed brown sugar, 1 half teaspoon of cinnamon, and 1 cup of

 And to sprinkle on top you'll need 1 quarter of a cup of sugar mixed with a quarter teaspoon

 And if you have some extra coarse decorating sugar that you can sprinkle on top, that'll

 Alright now first, preheat the oven to 350 degrees, and line a muffin pan with 12 paper

 In a large bowl, combine the mashed bananas, melted butter, milk, eggs, and vanilla, then

 using a wire whisk, stir it all together until all the ingredients are thoroughly combined,

 In another bowl, stir together the Bisquick, brown sugar, and cinnamon, then add the dry

 ingredients to the wet ingredients, and using a rubber spatula, stir until the wet and dry

 Now stir in the fresh blueberries until you have them pretty well dispersed throughout

 the batter, but try and be as careful as you can not to mash them up too much.

 At this point, I felt like the liners looked a little full, so I decided to spray over

 the top of the muffin pan with non-stick spray, just to ensure that nothing would stick if

 Now sprinkle the tops of the muffins with about a teaspoon of the cinnamon sugar mixture.

 Next, if you want to, you could sprinkle on a little of the coarse decorating sugar, then

 bake them for 24 minutes or until a toothpick inserted comes out clean.

 Allow the muffins to cool in the pan for 5 minutes, before removing them to cool completely

 Now these muffins are just a fantastic fusion between banana bread and the classic blueberry

 They're great for dessert with that cup of coffee, or in a pinch, it's not really the

 worst choice for breakfast if you want to grab one of these with a glass of milk.

 So I hope you'll give these a try, or leave me a comment and let me know what your favorite

 And if you'd like to see this recipe in print, you could always visit my blog.

 And for additional recipes and tips to fit in with your healthy lifestyle, visit my friends

 In my neck of the woods, June and July is the best season for basil.

 homegrown basil tastes so much more pungent than the commercial kind.

 This is going to be the ice water bath that we'll need to cool the basil.

 Alright, our 15 seconds are up, so scoop it up and put it in the ice water bath.

 As soon as the basil is cooled, and this only takes a few seconds,

 We're ready to make the best dough, and as you know, this happens very quickly now.

 The best part, of course, is that the pesto is going to keep its vibrant green color.

More of you requesting for short or medium hairstyles, so I'm going to show you 4 quick and easy ones today.

 Each hairstyle took me less than 3 minutes and they're cute for all occasions.

 This is one of my bestie, Ally Mae, and she's going to be my hair model because her hair is up to around her shoulders.

 The first hairstyle that I'm going to show you is a versatile twisted halfdo.

 When it's at least halfway back, pin it down by inserting a bobby pin horizontally into it.

 Repeat this to the other side, making sure that the second twist goes under the first one.

 This hairstyle should work well even if your hair is above your shoulder.

 It's a simple look that takes a minute and it can be worn for casual or special events.

 The second hairstyle is for those of you who like to wear your hair up.

 You're going to tie your hair into a high ponytail with a strong hair tie.

 With your other hand, grab the bun with your fingers and push it upward towards your head.

 Afterward, accessorize with a bow and you have yourself a super cute look for school.

 For the third hairstyle, you're going to grab a small section on top and divide it into three.

 Start a french braid by placing the outer sections over the middle.

 Then, you just keep adding hair to the outer sections before placing them over the middle.

 If you're not familiar with this braid, I'll link a more detailed tutorial on the screen and in the description box.

 When your french braid has reached about halfway down your head, you're going to tie it off.

 You can continue on braiding normally if you like and accessorize at the end.

 You're first going to grab a section at the top on one side and divide it into two.

 If this is a little confusing, then feel free to watch my more informative tutorial on the rope braid.

 Next, you're going to loosen the side of the braid that's closest to your face.

 If you like, you can also grab a section right in the front and twist it back towards the braided flower and pin that down as well.

 This is one of those looks that you can try when you want to wear something different in your hair.

 So those are the four hairstyles that are suitable for short medium hair.

 Before I go, I'm going to do a giveaway for these hair accessories.

 Don't go great with the hairstyles I showed today when you try them out.

 For a chance to win, just follow the rules in the description box.

 Special thanks to my friend, Ally Mae, for making this video possible.

 If you like K-pop, then you should check out her channel for singing and dancing covers.

 She also recently joined a K-pop contest, so if you can, please watch her video and cast your vote for her.

 To that I'm going to add around half a cup of crushed pork rinds.

 That will add a little bit of carbohydrates there, so you've got to watch out.

 According to the back, there are 6 grams of carbohydrates per serving, and there are about 6 servings.

 So total, in all this whole recipe, we'll have approximately, maybe about 40 grams of carbohydrates.

 Now the next part is, once you get all that in there, mix it up.

 Now when this starts to form up pretty good, you need to add 2 eggs, which I forgot in the refrigerator.

 Alright, now that that's well mixed up, it's time to start forming in small meatballs.

 I like to make them into about little 2 inch balls, about like so.

 While it was forming the meatballs, I brought the ragu sauce to a boil on the stove.

 Brought it back down to a simmer, it's time to add the meatballs.

 So you can have about 5 of these, for around 10 grams of carbs.

 Of course your mileage might vary, depending on how you make them and what you add to them.

 Okay, re-lid them, leave them to simmer, and we'll come back and check them in just a little bit.

 At one point I did take the lid off and kind of move the meatballs around a little bit.

 Whenever you're putting them in, you don't have to be worried if they're not completely covered with sauce.

 The sauce will kind of build up a little bit, and the meatballs will go down a little bit.

Stinging nettle is a very high chlorophyll plant, it's very high in iron.

Most people collect it with gloves, but I'm used to it, and actually

 the sting of the stinging nettle, if you touch it on your skin, is used as a remedy for arthritic

We are going to make something in the kitchen with stinging nettle.

 so here I am with my blender full of free wild nettles that were growing about a minute

Now you could do this with other greens, dandelion greens, amalga, purslane.

 there's a lot of great green products out there, but this is something you can do for

 free from the harvest of the weeds in your yard, and they were just growing a few minutes

So I'm going to add about half of an organic apple and put it in the blender here.

 The nettles are nice and young and tender, which is the best time to use them, so a regular

 And if you go to your local hardware store or paint store, you can find these things

 weeds, apple, and water through one of these clean paint strainer bags, and with clean

 hands, squeeze it, and you have just made about a quart of fresh green juice.

 I'm going to be cooking simple and affordable recipes every single week.

 Today I'm going to make a dish for you which is lamb with creamy parsnip mash and mushy peas.

 But before you do that, you're going to need lamb loin, parsnips, select frozen peas, select olive oil and fresh rosemary.

 So take about a handful of rosemary, tear it off the woody bit there and then run through like that.

 Sprinkle it over the top with a good pinch of salt and some pepper, some select olive oil.

 And then roll this around so sort of the salt, the pepper, the rosemary, the olive oil coats the whole surface area of the lamb loin there.

 They have a sweet nutty flavour which is great in soups, stews and roasts.

 Look for firm, well-shaped parsnips with a creamy coloured skin.

 Take a bit off there so you've got a flat surface so it's not wobbling around.

 Whenever we're cooking root vegetables, it's really important to start with cold water because it all sort of heats up at the same time so everything's cooked evenly.

 A really great little trick is to put rosemary into the water and that flavours up the water the same way you flavour a stock.

 To get a beautiful, velvety parsnip mash, pop some select cream into a little saucepan and then warm it up.

 This little marinade we made, there's olive oil in there so these can go directly on.

 I'm going to cook these for about two minutes on each side for medium rare.

 So this layer's been cooking for a couple of minutes and I'm going to give that a flip.

 Fish out this bit of rosemary and then this beautiful cream goes in.

 You don't want to put too much in there otherwise it'll become a little bit acidy but just enough so you can taste it.

 So take this opportunity to season with salt and pepper as well.

 Directly onto there and allow it to rest for a couple of minutes.

 And the general rule with grilled meat is you want to allow it to rest for half the amount of time it's cooked for.

 While the lamb rests for a couple of minutes, we have time to make our mashed peas.

 I'm going to put these into the water that I actually cooked the parsnip in because we've got so much flavour in there.

 Once the peas are cooked, we can strain the water out and give them a good shake just to get rid of any water in there.

 If you wanted to, you could do this in a food processor and just give it a quick pulse.

 Drizzle the resting juices and then a tiny bit of cracked pepper.

 Mainly for offshore, amberjack, kobe I like it as well, barracuda.

 Usually I tie these big humongous crease flies on 5 and 7 aught hooks.

 They work well but they are time consuming to tie and they don't seem to last very long

 And basically what I'm going to do is take my pliers and bend this 3 aught hook out just

 Since I've already got it 5 minute epoxied on there, we're going to just attach the tail.

 Just poke the end of your scissors in there and it will open right up.

 What we're going to do is just build up a huge, huge tail of marabou here.

 It doesn't have to be pretty because all this will be covered up.

 Maybe some of that less desirable marabou you've had hanging around.

 I'm going to go ahead and come through with a little hardest hole.

 You can go from curly to straight simply by just spritzing it with water.

 To go from straight to wavy, use a misting hair spray bottle with water.

 Once the hair is to a desired wetness, take your hand and grab a section,

 squeezing it in the center of your hands for a couple of seconds.

 Continue throughout your entire head until you get your desired look.

 For a beautiful straight look, use the Izanami iron, set to 400 degrees.

 Gently glide the iron over each section of hair until the entire head is done.

We're going to show you how to extract heads by using our product the headcone.

 Okay, here's today's demo drum model Hitachi 400 gigs with three platters and six heads.

 When you do such things be sure to do it under dust free environment.

 Okay, first we loosen the screws that holds the top magnet of the voice coil motor

 Then we go ahead to remove the screws that holds the ribbon cable which connects the heads to the board.

 And now we're using this white security pin to get the head arms fixed.

 Now we use the screwdriver to remove the bottom screw that holds the actuator axis.

 Now we're going to reverse the process and put the drum back together.

 Okay, here we use the screwdriver to remove the head connector.

 which basically protects heads from unwanted movements when HSA is in the parking area.

 and you gotta be very careful because it may hurt you or your hard disk.

 or you can give us a call or send us an email if you have any questions.

 We're going to start on this G over here, find these three black keys, and between the

 A scale is simply a succession of notes that you climb up from the bottom note.

 Put your hand there, the pinky here, the thumb here, and we're going to play this note over

 here in the middle just a skip away from that top seventh note.

 Now we're going to do the same thing, but we're going to move the whole ... Just keep

 your hand like a cookie cutter shape here, and we're going to do the same kind of pattern,

 but this time with this pinky now on a C, which is these two black keys.

 Next to the right, these two black keys over here, that's a C, and we're going to have

 One, two, three, four, five, six, seven, and then we skip a note.

 I want you to get comfortable between moving from this G, the two black keys here, with

 the seven, and look at the three black keys that's right next to that, and then to there.

 See if you can practice going back and forth to this a couple of times, because that's

 Again, the first white key in between the first two black keys here, that's a G as well.

 Skip to that, and now we're going to move to a B, which is a note that's the same as

 Pretty easy to find G, G, B, B. Practice going back and forth between these two.

 Now the next note we're going to do, we're going to have to skip to a black key.

 That's going to help us reach up for this higher note in the melody.

 Look for these three black keys here, and in between the second and third key is an

 A, A, then play the G, and back to the A, G, E, C, and then put your second finger over

 Find those three notes here, and then we'll find this A up here.

 We had two A's, a G, back to the A again, and now we're going to skip notes, E, C, A.

 Find the same chord that you found going down, but up with one little difference.

 Then the last thing we're going to do is jump down, same chord shape, but this time you're

 Find the C, but instead of this, move this down to a B flat, and then F.

 Take the first two notes, just like we did earlier, and then we're going to jump to your

 If you get this thumb under, now we're going to play these Gs three times.

 Now the left hand, when last we left it, was left with this chord.

 Now we're going to do something similar that we did with the C7 chord and lower this to

 Then we're going to jump to a new type of chord, similar shape, but this time we're

 Then we're going to play this F, which is the white key right next to the first black

 What I like to do is I like to visually use my thumb to visualize here.

 I'm going to look for this black key in the middle, which is A flat, and keep my hand

 I'm going to take it over with my right hand, so I have to let go of my left hand note from

 Then you come down to an F. Now follow along with me if you can.

 E. Now the left hand is going to go to that, remember the C7 chord?

 You're going to play an A in the bottom together with the right hand.

 Then we're going to go to an F in the right hand, and the left hand is going to jump way,

 Then the left hand is going to go back to the very first chord we learned, the G. Remember

 Play those three notes, though, and then return to a C. Left hand, you're going to jump to

 Go to a G, which is between these two black keys, the first two black keys, and look for

Last night I prepped my hair using the best twist out ever technique.

 I'll post the link to the tutorial in the description box, but you can also click the link on screen.

 I changed a few things about my technique, so if you want to see the updated version, just let me know.

 Okay, so now we've got all these individualized sections from the twist out, which will be perfect for the next step.

 I'm using the Black Pearl Tapered Curling Barrel by Hotshot Tools.

 Now, while that's heating up, I'm going to section my hair into two front sections and a back section.

 So, this is where those individual twist sections come in handy.

 I'm going to start in the middle for a more laid back and relaxed curl.

 And then just hold the curl while it cools so it can set, and you've got a perfect little springy curl.

 Wrap it around the barrel, hold for 10 seconds, let it cool, then release.

 Okay, so just keep doing this to each of the individual groups of hair.

 Now, if you want to keep some of your length, on the bottom layers of hair, start the curls lower and they'll hang lower.

 And remember to start the curl halfway down for a more laid back look.

 And if you want to keep your length, start the curls lower near the ends.

 The entire time I was doing this, I kept thinking of that girl who burnt her hair off.

 So now that we've got all our little random curls, I'm using some Giovanni hairspray to set it and protect it from the humidity.

 So I'm gonna grab one half of hair at a time, twisting it up and into a bun.

 So while my curls are stretching, I'm just gonna brush my edges with a bit of gel.

 And you could totally pull this off in the morning before you leave the house.

 Check out my last video where I show you easy and gentle DIY hair ties.

 Get to know my girly side, as girly as I get, on my style channel.

 And come chill with me and the fam over on my daily vlog channel.

 We're going to use this cast iron fry pan with some peanut oil in it to do it.

 We're going to take a little bit of salt and a little bit of pepper and put it on both

 Okay, the pork chops have been salted and peppered on both sides.

 Light coating of flour and we're going to let them rest now for about 5-10 minutes while

 We're going to have it hot, but it's not going to be so hot that you see a big fire and smoke

 All we've got to do is put the pork chops in the peanut oil and let it fry.

 Then we're going to turn them over and let them get nice and brown and well done.

 Notice that the grease is not screaming hot and there's no smoke and fire.

 We'll turn it over another couple of minutes and brown it on the other side.

 And we'll try to keep from cooking it so dry it tastes like cotton.

 Alright, so this is just a quick how-to on how to fillet some of the most common fish

 We'll start with the two that people seem to struggle with the most.

 I want to kind of angle my knife to get all this meat in this area here, where the majority

 What I like to do with white bass is just keep the upper part of the fillet.

 You can see there's some left here, a little bit there, but the majority of it's gone.

 You can see these spines lock out, so I take them to the edge of the board.

 Make one cut down where I can put my fingers to hold onto the fish.

 If you get pretty good at this, you can try to leave your knife high.

 You can see the part where the dark stuff was left behind is missing from the skin.

 So all I can do is just kind of trim that by putting pressure down on the center of the fillet.

 You take just a quarter inch or just a little bit off the top of the fillet.

 Next fish we'll take a look at is a delicious sheephead or a freshwater drum.

 The thing to notice about sheephead is there's not a lot of meat on them to the size of fish.

 And that red stuff that's left over, if you leave your knife high, most of that will stay on the skin.

 I like to trim these little bit of bones here off of my fillet.

 That's how you fillet the majority of the fish that you'll catch in this area that we commonly eat.

 Sometimes you just have a craving for chocolate cake, but it's no one's birthday.

 Well, if you're like me, you've seen plenty of these chocolate mug cake recipes out there.

 So I played around with it a little bit and I came up with two that are very easy.

 A tablespoon, something to eat it out of, and something to eat it with.

 Now this is not a recipe that requires an apron by any means, but I'm going to go ahead

 and wear one anyway because I got a very generous birthday gift this year.

 I call this recipe chocolate cake for one or two, depending on how indulgent you're

 I tend to like to share these with my husband, so I make a nice size, but you can easily

 For wet ingredients, mix 1 1⁄2 tablespoon olive or coconut oil to 2 tablespoons milk

 Dry ingredients are 2 tablespoons flour, whole wheat if possible, 1 tablespoon sugar.

 A dash of baking powder, a pinch of salt, and any flavor you like.

 Stir to combine thoroughly and press to fit into your dish or cup.

 If you want to be a little extra decadent, you can put some chocolate chips on top.

 I've actually got these little carrot chips, which are really yummy.

 So I'm just going to sprinkle them on and then kind of press them in so that they don't

 burn on top and they come out nice and gooey when they come out of the oven.

 There is no need to use an entire oven for this tiny little cake.

 If you've known me for any length of time, you know that I hate microwaves.

 I'm sure they're bad for you, but it's more that I blow things up in them.

 So then, when it's done, you can see how it's fluffed up and you've got those yummy little

 And if you can stand to let it cool, then you have to wait a few minutes before you

 For the gluten-free version of this chocolate cake, I'm going to use my new favorite thing,

 It is nice and fluffy, but it soaks up more moisture than regular flour.

 So I'm going to change how much I put in there, but you will still only need a tablespoon

 Mix only one tablespoon coconut flour to one tablespoon sugar, two tablespoons cocoa powder,

 a pinch of salt, optional flavoring, and a dash of baking powder, and mix to combine.

 Still use two tablespoons milk of choice, and one-half tablespoon olive or coconut oil.

 Add optional chocolate or carob chips, pressing them into the mixture so they don't burn on top.

 I was making dinner tonight and I thought, you know what, this would be a great recipe

 It's a really quick meal, it's really healthy, it's great for weight loss, extra minerals,

 I know I don't look like I'm dressed for it because it was almost 90 degrees today.

 So today I'm going to show you how to make a green burrito and after that I'm going to

 So we have collard greens and we're going to use this to make our green burrito.

 Now the great thing about these is they are fall and winter vegetables so this is the

 But these are really high in vitamins and minerals so it's a great way, an easy way

 to get nutrients, a great way to get vegetables and greens in your diet.

 And if you just do not like the taste of collard greens, you can use lettuce leaves, like a

 So we're going to use this like a tortilla basically or an oversized taco, how about

 And we're going to put everything in here and we're going to roll it up and eat away.

 So I'm going to make a really simple one for you, you can add whatever you want but

 I'm going to start with a little bit more greens because I love greens.

 Alright, so we're going to put some of my salad greens in there which I just, you know

 I always have a bowl of salad in the refrigerator to scoop out of.

 So that way whenever I'm on the run I just grab a salad and I got a healthy lunch going

 So think of something like maybe you want sun-dried tomatoes in yours, olives, hummus.

 I'm also going to put some seasoning in mine so I'm just going to spread some hummus.

 I'm also going to put tomatoes, so I chopped up some tomatoes, diced tomatoes already.

 Now one thing you could do is you could put like an Italian salad dressing on it or something

 like that for some more flavor but it's going to get kind of runny if you do that.

 I'm going to do onion powder, just sprinkle a little bit in here.

 There's my green burrito, my green wrap, my green taco, whatever you want to call it.

 This is my last video before Thanksgiving, so I wanted to do a little dessert that if

 you're visiting somebody, you can bring this, or you can even make it for your guests when

 Okay, you're gonna take a cup of chopped pecans, or is it pecans or pecans?

 Anyway, this is a cup of chopped pecans, and we're gonna put them in a bowl.

 To that, we're gonna add a cup of brown sugar and a cup of flour.

 We're gonna beat a couple of eggs until they're nice and frothy.

 To the eggs, we're gonna add a half a cup of melted butter, which is one stick of butter.

 Add your wet ingredients to your dry, and just mix it until combined.

 Now you're gonna put these in the oven at 350 for about 20 to 25 minutes.

 So I'm just gonna snip off the corner of it and use it to frost it.

 Hey guys, alright so this is lesson two for my folk blues style fingerpicking series of

 In the first lesson we talked about single note bass picking and we're going to continue

 that with this lesson but showing it in a practical sense in the form of a song by Mississippi

 John Hurt where he utilizes the same technique and the same chords we did in lesson one.

 And so I'll play it first and then I'll teach you guys how to play it.

 Alright, and now I'll show you what my left hand is doing first and the chords which are

 Alright so instead of playing the A chord like this or like you know that, Mississippi

 John Hurt, he bars it, plays it like that and then with his pinky he plays an A note

 on the high E and then goes down to a G. So fret 5 and then 3 on the high E. And this

 And then the way he plays the D, he slides into the D and then pulls off on the high

 And then he plays the E on that B string, fret 3 where he pulls off and hammers back

 And then you put it all together, boil it in a stew, and this is what you got.

 But yeah, so like I said, the order is A, D, A, E, and then repeat.

 But yeah, I hope that was helpful and another lesson will be coming up shortly on alternating

 bass lines like Mississippi John Hurt did, but who's very well known for that as well,

 Today I'm going to do a video on the replacement of an iPhone 4S battery.

 So what you're going to need is a spudger, your new battery, you're going to need one

 of these weird screws on the bottom of the iPhone 4, not sure what they're called, and

 And it's better if you have some tweezers with you for the small screws so they don't

 Okay guys, so before you start, you're going to have to completely power off your device.

 Okay so first we're going to begin with taking the two screws out on the bottom.

 So next what you're going to have to do is push the back cover up forward just a tad

 Okay so next we have two screws here that we're going to have to take off with a Phillips

 Okay so sorry about the flashing light but that would be the first screw right there

 It's best if you have a magnetic screwdriver so that when you unscrew the screws they just

 stick to the screwdriver and you don't have to worry about any pieces falling inside the

 These are both different sized screws so make sure you put them in at the right order and

 Okay so now what we're going to have to do is using the spudger we're going to have to

 Right here this piece is now loose since you've unscrewed the screw right here.

 So be sure that you don't lose this or that it doesn't fall into the phone because it's

 Okay so now we're just going to gently use the spudger to lift up this metal piece which

 So as I said this piece had fallen out and this is where it's best to use tweezers because

 Plus it's best not to use your fingers because the oils on your fingers can disrupt signal

 Okay so now that that's off you're going to want to pull the battery off of the phone

 Now I've heard that Apple apparently used a lot of adhesive when mounting the battery

 to the device itself so you're going to have to use the spudger to gently, well you might

 have to put some force into it but you're going to have to pry this up a bit.

 So now if you pull that tab the battery will just fall right out and now you can replace

 Now you just have to put everything back into it's original spot.

 So first you're going to want to put this little grounder piece.

 Now using your Phillips screwdriver again you're just going to take the small one preferably

 It's out of battery at the moment actually it's a new one so I'll just charge that and

 Okay so I gave that a few minutes to charge up just to show everything is working fine.

 Alright I've got the signals good, internet's working, everything looks pretty good.

 If the butter is not cut in smaller pieces, it's going to take too long for

 evaporate it and you're going to lose the proportion you should have.

If you cook it too long, the butter is going to break out from the

 So we're going to try the channel and see if it closes on itself.

So you take your pastry bag, you're going to fold it inside out a little bit

 am grabbing my filling, put it inside and see, I grab it with my two fingers,

 Now you want to finish by unfolding it and bringing the content up front.

 You can tie it up this way and then when you're ready to use it, you cut it.

 Hey guys, it's Ivy and if you didn't know, Julie has this show called Cooking with Julie.

 So I was watching that and I thought it would be fun to have a show of my own.

 have a show called Cute Creations because this is going to be a craft show.

 Today we're going to learn how to make lucky origami stars like the ones in this container.

 a centerpiece but you can use them for anything else such as gifts.

 don't know where you can find them, just at any store, craft store I guess.

 papers that sometimes they're just plain colors, sometimes they have little patterns and designs

Now you're going to sort of curve it like this and go under like this so that

 through the paper at the end through here and just pull, but not too hard.

 try and put it, flatten it down and make sure it's not folding at the back.

Then you're going to flip it over to the side where this is white and this is

 Now turn it over and turn it to the left, but hold the bottom here so it doesn't flip

 then you will be creating this type of, you'll just be like wrapping this around.

 and you're going to use your fingers to push in and it will make this pop out.

 Today is chocolate fondue, which is one of my favorite desserts.

 I'm adding whiskey too, but leave that out if you don't want it, or if it's for children

 Add a small amount of water to a pot, pop it on the heat, and then use a heatproof bowl

 I have a fresh vanilla pod here that I'm slicing down the center, and then I'm going to scrape

 If you don't have fresh vanilla, you can use vanilla essence or vanilla paste.

 I then added it to the cream, and this is a really good point to taste everything to

 Okay, I got distracted while filming, but if your cream boils over, pick it up and blow

 Once the chocolate's melted, start to pour in your cream, just a small amount.

 And once you're happy with the consistency and you think it's good enough to dip, then

 So anything that you like dipping into chocolate, grab it, and I'm going to show you what I

 So I've got some cookies here in a bowl, some biscotti that I bought, which is really good.

 As well as the two different kinds of biscuits, I'm going to grab some fruit too.

 So I took some pineapple, chopped the end off, took off the edges, and make sure when

 Then I took a mango, sliced it in half, and peeled off the skin, and then I chopped that

 The chunks are important because you want it to stay on the fork when you're dipping

 Lastly, I put some fresh cherries and then some frisales and some grapes, and I chopped

 First I took some walnuts, chopped them up finely, and I'm going to toast them in a minute.

 I won't be roasting them because they get a weird color after they're roasted, but I

 So I'm going to toast the walnuts in a pan, making sure that they don't burn.

 And after that, I toasted some pre-chopped almonds and some coconut flakes.

 And there you have it, a little dipping pot of healthy goodness.

 Use profiteroles, marshmallows, anything that you like to dip into chocolate works here.

 Tell me how much you ate before you put it into the fondue kit.

 My name is Joe Wiles with the Rock and Roll Conservatory, and in this video we're taking

 Now the cool thing about this song is it's a cover that Joan Jett chose to do, but she's

 But her original recording of it featured Steve Jones and Paul Cook of the Sex Pistols.

 Now that was never released, but copies of it are distributed and are actually considered

 In this video we're going to take a look at the intro, which is basically the chorus,

 All right, the intro, which is also the chorus for I Love Rock and Roll, starts with an open

 E power chord, which is your open E string, second fret A, and second fret D. I use the

 And then you'll use your middle finger to grab the third fret of the low E string and

 Then you'll go to an open A power chord, which is an open A string, second fret D, second

 fret G, and again just use the pad of your index finger to fret that.

 Then you're going to go to a B power chord, which is the second fret of the A, fourth

 fret of the D, fourth fret of the G, hit it twice, and then do that third fret bend on

 And the last time you'll hit that B power chord, and then right immediately back to

 Then you'll come up here to the seventh fret of the A string and the ninth fret of the

 D and hit it twice before you hit the riff that finishes off the introduction.

 You're going to bend it up, release it back to its original position, then pull off to

 the twelfth fret of the B, and then the fourteenth fret of the G, and then the twelfth fret of

 Make sure you tune your browser to HowToPlayAnySong.com for the rest of this tutorial and to learn

 Hello guys, I just wanted to show you how to sync up your new PS3 controller with your PS3 device.

 You're going to need a coin skewer, or paperclip, or sharp pencil, or something that will fit in a small place.

 That's right, this is also a tutorial for the people who have gotten a new one, it synced up well when they used the USB cord, but after a while it just stopped working.

 So what you're going to want to do, by the way this is out of pure luck, what you're going to want to do is plug it into the PS3, make sure the light starts beeping, and unplug it.

 Turn the PS3 off from the back, and then put the switch back on, and then press the touch sensitive switch.

 Then you're going to want to hit the reset button, with a toothpick or something, whatever, autofocus, come on, come on, you know you want to.

 And then just plug your controller, god it looks so awesome on camera, plug, sorry, plug your controller into your PS3 via USB device, or USB cable.

 Hit the PS button, or don't, I did it, I didn't on the first time.

 And it should sync up quite well, and just automatically become player one.

 So yep, that answers quite a few questions for people who've had a new PS3 controller in the past, but it just stopped working after a while.

 I immediately looked this up, and then after I found the reset button I tried to find my own way, and it worked, so.

 Thanks for watching, comment, rate, subscribe if you want, Infernal Island, out.

 In this video I'm going to show you how to crochet a ruffle scarf using Red Heart Boutique Sashay yarn.

 I crochet left-handed, but for the pattern it's the same for both hands.

 Originally in this video I planned to use Red Heart Boutique Sashay yarn in the color called Twist.

 The yarn takes some unraveling while crocheting, but I prefer to do it all beforehand.

 I take a post-it block and wrap my yarn around it so that while I crochet it's already spread out for me.

 This part is where I switch colors because I found a knot in the Twist color and I'd rather not crochet around a knot.

 To begin I usually fold about 3 or 4 sections or loops to the back.

 Then you're going to take your hook and bring it through both of the spaces at the top to connect the folded yarn together.

 And you're going to do this until you have about 9 sections on your hook.

 I prefer to somehow hold on to the top loop and pull the bottom loops over with my fingers.

 Then you'll want to put your hook back into the last space and pull the bottom loop over the top.

 Next you're going to skip the closest space and go into the next space.

 Basically you're going to keep doing this until you've added 8 more spaces on your hook.

 Sometimes it's hard to find so you just have to mess with it until you can find that loop.

 You don't have to be perfect with these because it doesn't show when you have the full scarf.

 I think here I lose count so I'm not sure if I do 8 or 9 because my son walked back into the frame.

 Like I said you can do anywhere from 6 to 10 and it will still make bigger or smaller ruffles depending on what you want.

 Then you're just going to want to keep continuing on with this pattern down the rest of your scarf.

 When you get to the end I usually set it up the same as when you start your scarf.

 Skipping one and going to the next space until you reach the last 3 or 4 loops.

 When you get to about the same as where you started you can fold it over.

 Just like when you started the scarf go through both the top loops on each side.

 Like the rest of the scarf just pull them all over whatever loop you have left.

 Then you're going to take it and tie it into a knot over that loop that you pulled through.

 This all gets covered up by your ruffles so you don't have to worry about that knot showing in your scarf.

 Besides that little cut off piece that's what the scarf will look like when it's finished.

 use the link in the description to take you to my 12 bar blues series.

 and then we'll plug in the ring finger to the B string second fret

 When we get to the ending of the 12 bar blues we'll be playing B7

 Now what I'm going to do is play through the 12 bar blues and show you how this

 Last video the bantu nut curls video you guys asked me so much questions about it

 It may not look exactly the same just because I was like playing around with makeup

 The lip may be a bit off because I've mixed colors, but that's about it

 So the first thing I do is prime my face with elfs mineral face primer and I focus that in the t-zone

 And this will just make sure that my makeup stays on for a really long time

 Next I'm gonna color correct with this orange shade I have in my shiny cosmetic kit and what this does is it cancels out all my

 I have this coloration like around my mouth area and as well as on my eyes

 330 toffee caramel and I just mix those two together and this just allows me to create my perfect color

 So now that my face is even I'm just gonna fill in my brows and I'm just gonna brush them out a little bit

 Dark brown pencil and then I use a angle brush and sort of just fill it in make little strokes

 So once that's done I just feather out the front of it so it doesn't look so harsh and then I apply

 My setting powder from Elf's eyebrow kit and this just helps set it and also lightens it a bit so it's not so harsh

 And then I like to go in and clean up my brows and I just use a little bit of concealer

This just gives my brows more definition and it looks like I kind of just did them

 Now on to concealing this is what really brightens up my face I just conceal under my eyes

 Those are like the highest points on my face and then I go in with a beauty bender

 Not a real one a fake one and I just wet it a little bit and then I just blend it out

 Then I go in with a contour shade from my shiny cosmetics palette and I just

 Contour my face a little bit my cheekbones chisel them a little bit.

 Yeah, I'm kind of all over the place I've got to set my highlights so I'm just setting my highlight with this Sasha cosmetics powder

 But it does the job it really highlights my face and then I'm going back to contouring

 My face is fat and I just need to add some dimension to my face

 I'm just using two light colors because I didn't want to go in with anything too harsh because I think we just clash with the

 Whole look so I'm just using that putting it on the apples of my cheeks and then I'm using Missy Lynn's

 Palette and I'm using the two highlighters to highlight my cheekbones

 Or the highest point of my face right there and also my forehead my nose

 My cubics bow and my chin and then I'm back to contouring again my nose

These are my two favorites Maybelline's the rocket volume Express as well as last

 Sensational and I do about two to three coats depending on what I'm what I want

 And for my bottoms, I use the last sensational because the brush on it is pretty small

This is just a dark brown lip liner and and then I'm taking what in wild bear at all

 This is my base color and then I use Rimmel's exaggerate lip liner in epic and this is just more of a pinky tone

 Nude color and then again I go over with some wet and wild don't blink pink and I just dab that on for some more

 Of course, I'm not a makeup guru, but I hope you guys liked it.

 Hi there folks, just adjust the camera so you can see what I'm doing now.

 my previous video are in the oven and so now it is time to make some laundry powder, some soap

 smells quite good actually but you'll find this in the laundry aisle and what I've done is I've

So there's half a bar of ordinary household soap, not your washing soap that you use

 And you're going to need some oxy powder and like I said I get all of mine off Amazon so it's really,

So in my bowl at the moment what I've got is I have got one cup of

You're going to need half a bar, these are quite large bars, half a bar grated of

Then you're going to need, get that out of there, one cup of your oxy

Now this is a stain remover but it's far more natural than what you find in your household

So one cup of the oxy powder and then one cup of your soda crystals.

 Okay, and this just makes sure that you're not going to gunge up your washing machine.

 We've all seen the adverts of washing machines with wonder with... don't say the name there.

 borax, one cup of oxy powder, one cup of soda crystals, upside down, and half a bar of sunlight soap.

 Then what you're going to do is you're going to just, you're going to have brought over your wooden spoon,

 If you do want to add extra fragrance to your washing, what you can do is, you know the little

 ball that you put into your washing machine, you can put about a tablespoon full of vinegar

 with some essential oils in there, a few drops of essential oils.

 out smelling like vinegar, it will come out smelling like the essential oils.

 tend to do is, I use this washing powder and when it's all nice and mixed up, you need two tablespoons.

 I have a handy little cup that is two tablespoons and you just put two tablespoons of this

 into your load, into either the drawer in your washing machine or into your plastic ball that

 I have some felted woollen balls that I just add a few drops of essential oil to.

 And the felted woollen balls go in there and they behave as a softener and a towel fluffer and

 you know, it makes your washing smell really, really nice and pleasant.

 have, oh and by the way, this here is enough for about 50 loads.

 depending on how many loads you do, for me it's about two months worth and this cost £1.53.

I've just got a tub with a lid and all I do is, I'll just put it into there.

 and if you want some more healthier tips and cheaper tips for changing your life,

 subscribe to our channel down below at Chuckleberry Willow and we'll, well, keep you posted.

 Hi everyone, my name is Odette and today we're going to be cooking another Thai yummy dish.

 chopped, we have black pepper, ground it of course, we have garlic chopped and

We only take the top of it and then make it to little pieces and

 this is only for decoration later and we have green onion only the top will make

 the food look nice and yummy and this is also parsley chopped but only this is

 green onion chopped and sugar, cooking oil, fish sauce and of course,

 you know a good smell of garlic and all the ingredients mixed together.

 but usually I always use high heat because you know I like to get my food quick

 Keep looking at them so you don't want it to get too burnt and like not too hard as well.

 See there you go, you get a really nice colour, a bit yellow and orange.

 yourself and then you know cooking is like, it's like, I don't know how to say it.

 I always want to get the last bit out because that's the yummiest part you know.

 Hi boys and girls, it's Carolyn from PlumbingSupply.com again and today we're going to talk about

 a teeny tiny part that goes in your toilet but that's really important.

 Most of the time the part that's going to wear out the fastest in your toilet is going

 Every time you flush your toilet, the trip lever pulls this little guy up, all the water

 goes down into the bowl, flushes the toilet, and it sinks back again to fill the water

 One easy way to tell if you have a bad flapper is to take a few drops of food coloring, drop

 them into your tank, not the bowl, the tank, and wait 15-20 minutes.

 If you come back and you find color in the water in the bowl, you need to replace your

 The flapper I have right here is the most common type of flapper you're going to see.

 It's got a chain and it's got these two little brackets right here.

 This kind of flapper is what most flush valves are going to use or some slight variation

 This is your flush valve and you see these two little, they kind of look like little

 ears or little arms sticking out here, and that's where you're going to attach the flapper.

 You're going to go right here, in your toilet of course, not just on your table.

 You're going to go here and you're just going to hook these little rubber parts over the

 ears and then you'll take the chain and hook that up to your trip lever.

 You might need to adjust it a little bit depending on how tall your toilet is, but there you

 Sometimes though, your flapper's not going to look like that one.

 Now the reason that some manufacturers use these is because they want to be able to give

 you one flapper for all the different flush valves that they make.

 So you take this little float, and see these little white plastic things on there?

 You're going to pop those off of the chain, and then you can move this little yellow float

 This lets the flapper close really fast or really slow, depending on where you set the

 An alternative to the adjustable float that some manufacturers have come up with is these

 Now when you flush your toilet, the flapper lifts up, and there's water in the tank.

 Some of that water is going to enter the bottom of the flapper and displace the air in there.

 As that flapper fills up with water, it's going to get heavier, and it's going to close.

 The great thing about these inserts is if you look closely, you'll see that they have

 If you want to use less water, use a bigger hole size, because that's going to get more

 water into the flapper more quickly, which means the flapper is going to close more quickly,

 If you have an older toilet, a 3.5 gallon per flush toilet, that's using a lot of water,

 this can be a great way to save some water and save some money for less than $10.

 Another way that manufacturers have gotten adjustable limits for your toilet is with

 Now you'll notice here it has all these little grooves with all these little numbers, and

 To adjust the flow rate for this flapper, what you'll do is pull this down and just

 That opens up a little hole here that controls how fast or how slow your flapper is going

 to close and how much water is going to go from the tank into the bowl.

 Some flappers you're going to come across are going to look really weird, like this

 This actually is a bracket that will fit over the refill tube on some kinds of flush valves,

 but for some, you might not need it, especially if you've replaced the flush valve previously

 and now you're putting a new flapper on a previously replaced flush valve.

 So what you're going to do with this, if you don't need this middle part, just cut it off

 right at those little lines, and then you can hook it on to the little ears just like

 The most interesting thing about this flapper is that it has this little kind of tail-looking

 It doesn't have a chain like the others, it doesn't have a bead with a hook like the others.

 This one works by just putting the end of this through the holes in your trip lever,

 Now you're going to want to make sure that you don't pull it tight.

 That's not good, it's going to cause a bad seal in your flapper and your toilet's going

 You want to give it just a little bit of slack so that when you pull the trip lever, it actually

 This is called a counterbalance flapper, and this is going to fit onto special flush valves

 kind of the same way that this works except in reverse, because it's going to go over

 and it's going to go into two little holes instead of on two little ears.

 This one works in much the same way that the others do except this part over here controls

 The water flows in here, which counterbalances the action of the flapper.

 Sometimes you're going to have a situation where you want to replace your flapper, but

 Maybe your flush valve broke one of its little ears off, or you have a different kind of

 flush valve that you can't find a flapper for anymore, but you really don't want to

 Replacing a flush valve is not difficult, but it's a time consuming job.

 You have to take your toilet apart, you have to take all the pieces out, you have to put

 the pieces back in in the right order, making sure that everything is fitting together perfectly

 Sometimes it's just easier to get a quick fix, especially if this is an older toilet

 This is a unique little fix-a-flush guy, and the great thing about this is that it comes

 Now this little sticky stuff goes right over the top of your broken flush valve.

 And stick that on there, and then attach this, and now you have a flapper for your new flush

 valve, and you didn't have to change the flush valve and take your toilet apart.

 So now that you've learned probably more than you ever really wanted to know about the flapper

 inside your toilet, go check and make sure your toilet isn't leaking, and if it is, get

 This is Carolyn from PlumbingSupply.com, and if you enjoyed our video, please subscribe

 look is inspired by Adrienne Bailon and I hope you guys really like this one.

 brush, make sure you blend all of the concealer into the crease of your eyelids.

 you want a cat eye effect, make sure that the line is thinner towards the inner portion

Lightly work in a gold pigment to the inner portions of your eye.

 brown, go into the outer corners of your eye and accentuate the cat eye shape.

 layered look, apply another eyeliner over the eyeliner that you've already applied with

 to two shades lighter than your skin color underneath your eyes, down the center of your

 or darker setting powder to the hollows and outer portions of your face.

 a concealer that's one to two shades lighter than your skin color underneath your eyes.

 To brighten your face, go in with the darker eyeshadows to your lower eyelids.

 you want to make your nose appear slimmer, apply a darker shadow that does not have too

All you have to do is take your time with blending and I really hope

Make sure you leave me a comment down below and let me know if you

 Now I'm going to show you how to take the printhead out of the Artisan 50.

 Now the first thing I'm going to do is just take off this little plate here on the side.

 Okay, now I exposed the ribbon cable which plugs into the printhead.

 Now what we've got to do is we're going to take off this back chip board.

 I'm going to show you one because I took another one off earlier.

 See, you've got to go behind the printhead carrier to get at it.

 And then once I wedge it out, like I already did, then I can slide this off.

 Now what I was doing was wedging that out so this would slip off.

 If you ever pull that out by accident, you're going to have to dismantle the whole machine to get it back in.

 Now this larger cable, ribbon cable, will come out, but don't touch the small one.

 And now what we've got to do is release the tabs on the back of the printhead.

 Now after I got this ribbon cable out, and I used this little coat hanger to go behind and unsnap.

 Now to give you a view of what it looks like from behind, there they are.

 Then, once those are released and there's no cable in there, you'll be able to pull that right up.

 You should be able to take the needle nose and carefully lift it out.

 Now you've got to remember this ribbon cable right here is going to be attached to the printhead, which will take off.

 So when you go in to take this printhead up, you're going to have to maneuver back and forth to get it out.

 Okay, now I got it by the needle nose and I'm going to pull it up.

 I still have the screws in here, so I don't want to drop them in the machine.

 Now I want to point out, you don't want to get any of this area here wet.

Okay, so the main variation today we did mostly variations on the inside turn.

 And this flows really well with everything that we learned the last week.

 It just really adds on to a lot of the combinations that you can do.

 So basically in short it's going to look like this and then I'll explain a little bit more.

 So we're going one, two, three, five, six, seven, cross body lead, five, six, seven.

 And it's going to be this almost push-pull movement in our arms right now.

 Now on five we're stepping back at an angle with this foot and pushing her back.

 The last variation that we did with this was cross hands and we broke her hand in the back.

You're just really just kind of twisting her arm down a little bit.

 Real quickly, we're going to put this together with what we learned last week, which

 What up y'all, Texas City coming to you with another unboxing video.

 The official colorway for the shoe is actually white, chrome, metallic silver.

 So if you guys know that Jordan brand for this year, what they're trying to do with

 So they brought back the Air Jordan 4 with the laser engravings on the upper part of

 They did the same with the Air Jordan 20s and the Air Jordan 1s.

 As you can see, they used the same themes when it comes to the entire collection.

 So IC on the bottom, a little bit of 3M at the top, and the laser engravings on the upper

 So if you guys don't know a little bit of the history about the laser engravings, those

 So you'll see a bunch of logos and numbers that kind of have a deeper meaning than just

 You got your regular Air Jordan 4 bottom in the fully icy sole bottom.

 It's really cool to see a full iced out Air Jordan 4 because we don't really see that

 The midsole features a little bit of that icy sole along with some metallic silver on

 the upper part of that midsole and also on the airbag of the shoe.

 The entire upper part features that premium leather from their remastered program and

 also the laser engravings throughout the entire leather part of the shoe.

 You also have the white on white mesh there and also that wing on the side or the crown

 On the back, they kept the Air Jordan 4 tab right there in white and metallic silver and

 they finished off the shoe with a nice waxed white laces along with a 3M patch at the top

 So like I mentioned earlier, there's a lot of nice detailings to the shoe.

 You can also contact us in the Westside area at 514-626-4434 and the Brassard location

 And finally, at our newest location in LaValle at 450-681-8777, don't forget to check out

 If they don't have a deep fryer they can fry them on the stove, right?

 So right now, this part you can make it sweet or you can make it a little bit sweet.

 Sriracha is a really trendy ingredient right now, but I think it's for good reason.

Cooks Illustrated named it one of their highly recommended hot sauces.

 And it's made from red chilies, red jalapenos I believe, and it adds just really nice flavor and heat to so many dishes.

 So in addition to the sriracha garlic bread, my friend Angie from the Squishy Monster is gonna make some sriracha chicken and waffles.

 I'm gonna add a little pinch of salt since this is unsalted butter.

 And the reason why I like to do garlic powder and the fresh minced garlic is because they both provide different garlic experiences.

 So I want to end up with about 2 tablespoons of freshly minced garlic.

 Alright, so this was just 3 garlic cloves, but they were enormous.

 So I have a half loaf of bread that I saved for my garlic bread.

 Once they've got a nice good spread on them, just place them on a sheet pan.

 It's gonna go into a 400 degree oven for about 10 to 15 minutes

 till the edges are golden brown and crispy and the butter's all melted.

 I got an email from Dylan and he said he had an essay to write in school about his favorite

 He also sent me this recipe and because he didn't give it a name, we're going to call

 You're going to need a heavy bottom saucepan, a half a cup of semi-sweet chocolate chips

 You're going to need a half a cup of sugar, I use raw cane sugar, one egg, three quarters

 of a cup of white chocolate chips and a half a cup of craisins, which are dehydrated cranberries.

 You're also going to need three quarters of a cup of flour with a quarter teaspoon

 of baking powder and a pinch of salt and a quarter cup of cocoa.

 Okay, now that our chocolate's melted, we're going to go ahead and put it in the cowgirl.

 We're going to lock down the cowgirl and we're going to drop in our half a cup of sugar

 Now we're just going to add our cocoa, our flour, our little bit of baking powder and

 And now, just drop in the craisins and the white chocolate chips.

 You could probably roll these into balls, but they're kind of sticky.

 So we're just going to drop them from a spoon onto the cookie sheet.

 Okay, these are going in a 350 degree oven for 12 to 14 minutes.

 But as soon as they cool down a bit, we'll take him a cup of tea.

Wolfie from our half acre homestead saying, there you go, Dillon Cookies.

 What's up guys, I'm going to show you how to play Stir It Up, a very easy song to play.

 You're going to start with your index finger, you're going to bar on the 5th fret, 1st,

 Then you move that same position down to the 7th fret, and you do 2 ups and downs.

 And that plays, gets played over and over and over in the song.

 You're going to start with the 4th fret, I'm sorry, 1st string on the 7th fret.

 Then you're going to move down to the 5th string on the 4th fret.

 Then move down the same on the 5th string, you're going to go down to the 5th fret.

 Then you're going to go down to the 5th string, 4th fret on the 4th string.

 You can even spike it up a little bit with a little bit of a sublime feel.

 I'm Tim McWelch of Earth Connection School of Wilderness Survival and Ancient Skills

 In this clip, we're going to show you how to purify water with a filter and also with

 We always should assume that the water is contaminated with viruses, bacteria, protozoa,

 and other parasitic organisms that would cause us bodily harm if we drank it as is.

 Now if we're out camping and we don't have a lot of equipment, we can boil the water.

 Boil it for 10 minutes in a metal pot or some other fireproof vessel and that will kill

 all these different organisms and make the water safe to drink.

 However, a lot of outdoor enthusiasts use two different methods besides boiling to avoid

 the work of having to make a fire and boil the water and wait for it to cool down.

 This actually screens out any harmful organisms through a ceramic filter which also has silver

 The small particles of these organisms are stuck in the filter and then killed by the

 So all we have to do is put the intake hose, which has a little screen in the front of

 I should consider my hand contaminated by viruses, bacteria, protozoa, and other pathogens.

 So I'm not going to touch any of the drinking water spots on my pump or my bottle.

 Now I place my little pocket filter on the ground, being careful not to get my wet fingers

 Priming the pump involves getting some water in the hose and up through the filter.

 A filter like this is expensive, but it's quick, easy to use, and reliable.

 If you did not have a filter to purify the water, we can go with a more affordable purification

 system which involves either iodine tablets or chlorine dioxide tablets.

 Following the instructions on these products, we would place the tablets in our bottle of

 contaminated water, which we would simply scoop up out of the creek.

 We place the tablets in the water, let them dissolve for approximately five minutes.

 Then we're going to allow that chemical-filled water, either with iodine or chlorine, to

 We're going to turn our bottle upside down, and our chlorine-filled water or iodine-filled

 water will rinse the cap and our hand and the outside of the bottle to sterilize all

 of these surfaces that have come in contact with our stream water, which we should assume

 Now different products require a different length of time to reach their full activation.

 The iodine tablets require about 45 minutes to completely kill and sterilize the water

 So they are safer on a person's body, especially for long-term use.

 Chlorine is not as toxic as iodine, but the iodine tablets give you a faster result.

 So you can pick and choose whether you want the one that works quicker or the one that's

 and turn this brownie in the mug into a brownie in the mug rap song thing.

 So, I'm going to rap and sing and cook and do my own hack at the same time.

 Thank you, Co-op, for your amazing food hamper that you guys sent me.

 I just wanted to let you guys know that Co-op and NUS partnered up.

We have another fan request a video to make from the Thomas the Train

 he's not in very many of the Thomas the Friends videos so we had to make some

 came pretty close to gold one of my favorite colors which is hard to get and

 used and there's the orange, whoops, the orange and some yellow and I even used

 some of this like a pink hot pink and that's the color I came out.

 look, Curious George over there in the background and of course Cookie Monster

Same as we always make the base first out of black and we're gonna add

 the wheels and for wheels I always use these toothpicks to make the axles and

 Stepney and then we'll do the magnets on the front and the back out of some white

 of black Play-Doh and we'll flatten it with a piece of track to make it nice

 Now I'm gonna push the three axles through and then I'll add the magnet for

 and I press it flat and then I add some white to the top and there's my magnet.

So there's a magnet on both ends and now I'm gonna push the axle through and

 And I'm gonna take six portions of this nice, newly created color Play-Doh and

 black part here and then we can build the rest of the engine on top.

 I'll get another big blob of Play-Doh and roll it flat about maybe a quarter of an

 gonna put this over here for now and work on building this part of the train

 of this new color, whatever it is, green or gold and make this part here in the

Now it's a little bit low, of course, because it's not on the base but once I

Next we're gonna make that round piece right in front of here and I'll just

 get some Play-Doh, a nice little ball of it like this here, and I'll roll it to the

 push that flat with my finger and cut a ring with my Play-Doh cutter.

 first attempt and then I'm gonna turn that over, flatten it again, and cut out

 add the eyes and the nose and the mouth and the eyebrows while it's on the deck.

 I'm gonna add the white at the top right here and I'll put some black on the side

 then we'll cut it just to match the top of the roof and then we'll add it.

I didn't put the number on, that's too small, and I didn't put his name on, but we

 him on the track next to his retirement hat and see what he says.

 here, the black, and I'm gonna get some more black Play-Doh and push it in the hole and then I can

I hope you liked the show and please hit the like button or the dislike

 have any ideas or maybe even birdie the bus or something, whatever you want, send

 Hi, I was reminded recently that I hadn't done a tutorial for this Oasis song, A Bell Will Ring, from Don't Believe The Truth.

I don't play it very often so I'd forgotten that I hadn't done a tutorial.

It's probably, almost certainly not the correct way, but it's just the way I like to play it.

So that little intro part, that little lead bit, I'm just playing between an E7 to an A, back to an E, but just sort of hitting some of the key notes out of those chords.

 So, just make it a regular E, but then bring your pinky up onto the 2nd string, 3rd fret, to get one of those E7s.

 Basically all you've got to do is hit the 4th, 3rd, 2nd, 4th, 3rd, 2nd, 2nd, then the 1st, open up the 2nd, then more or less just strum into an A, as long as you make sure you hit that 2nd string then twice.

 Then what I like to do is, because I'm playing that formation A with my pinky on the 2nd string, you can do the slide on that 2nd string up to the 3rd and back to the 2nd.

 Then I'm just going to hit the 3rd string and strum back into an E.

 There's no strumming at that part in the original, it's just, I think again, probably just playing a lead.

 But if you want to play it acoustic, I like to be a bit dirty with my covers, I don't like to be so precise and hit exactly the right strings all the time.

 Kind of just like that, I'm not exactly sure what I'm doing there, but if you just want to play the lead notes, go right ahead.

 If you want to sort of just, as long as you hit those notes more or less during your strum.

 Often in this song I'll just release the E to an E7, you might see me do this through the verse and so forth.

 It doesn't do that in the album version, but I think it just makes it a little bit more interesting when you're playing it solo acoustically.

 Then it goes to a D substitute, to an A, and then the verse, E.

 Now the strum, he's sort of going down, down, down, up, down, up, down, down, down, up, down, up.

 But the accentuation is on the ups, so it's down, down, down, up, down, up, down, down, down, up, down, up.

 Now keep that strum down, down, down, up, down, up, down, down.

 I know that's not right, so you don't have to do that, that's just what I do.

 E to Asus2 is easy because you don't have to take your finger off the 3rd string.

 Just bring these 3rd and 4th strings, fingers straight down to Asus2, back up to the E.

 Alright, so this is one of the mounts that come with the GoPro Helmet Hero.

 This wraps around your head and this goes around the top part of your head.

 So what you want to do is you want to take everything off so it looks like this.

 So now that you have it like that, you want to take the smallest strap, which is actually

 So take the top of the head strap and then after braid it through the camera mount.

 Now before you do this, these things are sewn, like here and here, which actually go inside

 Now what I did was I pretty much re-sewed this part just so it's stronger because I

 felt that it was kind of weak and kind of like threading a bit and I didn't want my

 camera to, you know, I don't want this to break and my camera to fall off.

 Then take the two ends and this piece and put it back in, right?

 Now the coolest thing about this is I actually wrapped this around the strut of your kite

 So you put this in the corner of your kite and you can pretty much film yourself.

 And it's pretty much like the only way to do it and it's super stable and your camera

 Just make sure you, as I said before, just make sure you make sure this is good and if

 But this is pretty much the coolest device and that's why I have two of them.

 So I leave one as a head mount and I have one just as a little small loopy device.

 Alright guys, I'm going to show you how to install a new fuel filter onto a Nissan hard

 In the truck now, first thing to do is open your fuse panel and look for the fuel pump

 Once you get your fuse out of your fuel pump, you want to start your truck and let it run

 On my hard body, it's been modified in the engine bay, but the fuel filter is still in

 Just for me, I'm just going to have to remove some of this stuff so I can get to it.

 So I've got myself a little bit of room and now I'm going to start by taking the top hose

 out and then I will remove it out of this clip and take the lower hose out.

 So after finagling for a good 10 to 20 minutes, I finally got it out and I had to slip the

 This is definitely the most difficult part is just getting the old one off.

 But what I found works best is, well to be honest, clear everything, the more room you

 I tried to fight around a couple things and I ended up taking that little bracket off

 I found what would be easier though is to take the bottom fuel line off first and then

 you got, it's easier to get the top off than trying to go top bottom.

 So I recommend trying to get the bottom off first and then you'll have room to get the

 One last tip, when you are trying to take off the hoses, try to kind of twist them.

 That will help take it off instead of just pulling it straight out.

 So now what's left to do is grab this thing, put it back in place.

 So if you also spilled some fuel, make sure it's evaporating before you try to start it

 Last thing to do, get your fuse that you pulled out, pop her right back in.

 It'll just take a little moment to get the fuel back to the engine, but there she is

 If any of you are wondering, I got a knockoff Magnaflow in the back.

 Today I want to show you how to make a really good low-calorie dessert for

 holidays because the holidays are coming up and so many times we you know eat

 things without even thinking and there's so many calories in them it really

So today I want to show you how to make a pumpkin pudding that's

 not pumpkin pie mix it's just regular 100% pumpkin and put that in the bowl.

 Then we're gonna also add a container of vanilla flavored yogurt and you can use

 Greek yogurt or any brand that you want this one is soy yogurt but as long as

 because not only does that help it get thicker but it also increases the omega

 3 fatty acids in the dish which is very helpful, healthy and good for you.

 gonna also add a half a teaspoon of vanilla extract, cinnamon and nutmeg.

 can actually do pumpkin pie spice if you want but I'm just gonna add cinnamon and

Then for the sweetener add some stevia powder, you can use Truvia but the

 I'm gonna add that is an option you don't have to add it is a half a banana

 and the reason I'm gonna add that is because I want it to have a little bit

 of extra texture and thickness to it so it makes it stand up a little bit more

 Okay so I mixed it so that it has a nice thick consistency and then if you add a

 little bit more chia seed to it will actually thicken it up even more and

 here's a fun thing that you can do you can serve it in champagne flutes and a

 half a cup has a lot of fiber it has your omega-3s because there's a lot of

 which is so festive and then the other thing that I like to do is just top it

 with a granulated stevia because then it's gonna give it that kind of fun

 about seven grams of fiber it's got protein in it it's really good for you

 there's no artificial colors or flavors and it's just a really healthy great way

 to add some health to your holidays and we'll talk to you soon bye

It's SheKnits and I'm going to show you how to work an I-cord and these are for some straps for

 two strands because both of those particular straps you work with two strands held together

 And I want to say something about substituting leather or plastic or whatever other kinds of handles if you want to do

 To see how long of a strap that you want for Kimmy and for Samantha

 Well, and for both of them, you're gonna have to wait because it's a mystery and I'm not gonna give away anything

 But for Samantha for sure the body of the bag strap needs to be there's gonna be a few different straps for Samantha

 You really need to do a knit strap an I-cord strap and you'll see why when you're finished

 Make my slipknot and I have double pointed needles because that's what you need though.

 You're working yarn being closest to the end of the needle for I-cord

 It's the opposite you want to slide your stitches all the way across the needle and you're gonna be taking your working yarn back across

 The needles you don't wrap it around you come in between the needles

 Here's one and that first row is a little tight typically and two

 Now instead of you know, like normal knitting you would turn your work and then maybe knit or purl back across depending

 To the end again so that again you're bringing your yarn across the back of those three stitches

 The tail yarns just to get it nice and snug and when you're pulling your yarn across the back

 Pull snugly across the back of those three stitches in between the two needles

 Now that you have determined what type of leather you have, we will show you how to

 correctly apply the Leathermatic Cleaner and the Leathermatic Protectant with Scotchgard

 For finished and aniline leathers, first you will apply the Leathermatic Cleaner for finished

 Before you do, test a discreet area to check for color fastness.

 Apply the cleaner by spray on soft white cloth and rub from seam to seam.

 Or you may apply directly on the leather's surface, being careful not to allow cleaner

 While surface is wet, rub the cleaner in with the cloth provided or a clean soft white cloth.

 When surface is dry, move on to step two, applying the protector.

 Spray the Leathermatic Protectant with Scotchgard Protector for finished and aniline leathers

 on and wipe into the leather with the cloth provided or with a clean soft white cloth

 For first time application, two coats are recommended, allowing drying between coats.

 The Leather Protector will reach its full repellency after 24 hours and will repel water,

 Repeat the application as needed depending on the use of your leather.

 The finished and aniline care kit comes with one spray bottle of Leathermatic Cleaner,

 one spray bottle of Leathermatic Protectant with Scotchgard Protector and two cloths.

 If you haven't already, please click that red button, subscribe to us and be the first

 to know about all of our ongoing hundreds and hundreds of dishes from around the world.

 Right, the first thing we need to do is, as you can see here, I've cooked some lentils,

 I've soaked them, washed them nicely, cooked them, they're nice and soft, I've drained

 I'm going to go in with some fresh ginger, fresh garlic and red chilli.

 Here I've got carrots, normal potato and sweet potato, kind of chunky cut.

 Just note, with your sweet potato, when you peel your sweet potato, get it straight into

 I'm going to be adding a few more vegetables, but these root vegetables are going to take

 So with the lid off, let's cook this in a kind of stir-fry manner, just for about four

 Okay, I'm going to add a touch of salt and some ground black pepper.

 These vegetables are nowhere near cooked, but they've certainly got a nice head start

 Now here, I've got some tomatoes, fresh tomatoes, and I'll just put them in my liquidiser and

 You could just cut them really small if you want yourself and then chop them in.

 I'm using a brown lentil like this, but again you could use any sort of lentil you like,

 The yellow ones and the red ones will break up a lot more than these.

 I just want to cook this, bring it together for about five or six minutes.

 Let me let a little bit of steam out of here, otherwise it will cloud the lens.

 Wow, what an incredible smell, all that ginger, garlic and that chilli.

 I'm just using some zucchini or courgette and a little bit of green capsicum.

 But you can add what you like now, maybe some mushrooms or something like that as well.

 So, we now need to add some liquid to this because you can hear that it's quite dry, like it's frying.

 Now I'm going to add just water because I want to keep this completely vegan

 You could add chicken stock or fish stock or any other stock you wanted.

 But I want to keep this vegan for a start, not only vegetarian but vegan.

 And if you want to follow the Asian route, which is the basis of this dish really with the garlic and the chilli,

 That's going to be about another 7 minutes and that dish is done.

 If you wanted you could add some fresh herbs now, like some parsley or some coriander,

 entirely up to you, fresh mint or something would be really good.

 I usually make about 40 of them, you know, about 40, or whatever, however many you come

 And in my bone pile here, I've got a bunch of scraps from when I was making my egg.

 In order to pipe these, you have to use some care because to get a really good, like, nipple

 of venus going, the way to do it is you've got to hold your piping to a good half an

 And you're going to pipe straight up and down, and you're going to pipe, I'd say about a

 half an inch above, create sort of a round sphere, then stop squeezing and pull away.

 I'm looking to make my piece about the same diameter, as big a round as my bases.

 Because if the bases are bigger than the top, what's going to happen is it's going to show

 These bases are also going to make absolutely sure that I don't have any bald spot on the

 So remember, you have to stop squeezing in order to get it to a nice, clean peak.

 Otherwise, if you don't stop squeezing, it'll just keep coming out.

 After I pipe all these, I'm going to refrigerate them, get them good and cold, before I dip

 Like anything else, of course, I'm trying to make my portions about the same size.

 In the book, it shows that it's lighter and it's better because they use different kinds

 You'll find that dark chocolate is a lot easier to temper and a lot easier to work with than

 Hey guys, I'm going to be showing you how to fix a broken blush or bronzer.

 But I think it's a lot better and it's more usable than what it was before.

 And basically, when my sister went to Europe, she came back and got me... or brought me two bronzers.

 And I haven't done it with this one yet, just because it's so big.

 Basically, it did have the layers or the strips of different kind of bronze tones.

 So obviously, you lose that because it's just kind of smushed into one big thing.

 But kind of it combines it together and you get an overall different color.

 Now, I know a lot of people are like, oh, can I use vodka or other kind of alcohol?

 So, if you have an alcohol that is kind of like 60% or above alcohol, then you can use that.

 Whereas if you're getting a high alcohol level bottle of alcohol to drink, it's going to be a whole lot more expensive.

 You can have like a kind of glass or dish that you want to mix your product in.

 And then if you want to like push it down the bottom with the bottom of that, then that works as well.

 So I just, as you are going to see in the video, I kind of smushed it up.

 When you are going to use your spoon, then disinfect it with the rubbing alcohol before.

 Because you don't want to be mixing in bacteria into your bronzer.

 And then again, if you use this, a glass to push it down, just clean this.

 I ended up using my fingers at the end just to get it a nice smooth finish.

 So again, sanitize your fingers either with this or then kind of the hand sanitizer as well.

 And then other things that I've seen, kind of some people push it down with a piece of saran wrap.

 But then kind of as it got to the end, it did stick to the spoon.

 So make sure you use clean fingers or then use like sterile gloves if you have them.

 And then after you do it, you want to just kind of set it out in a warm place to dry.

 It was still a little bit wet when I checked the next morning when I did it at night.

 But kind of 24 hours, then it's completely hard and ready to use.

 Just to kind of clean up this and around the edges to keep everything nice and sterile.

 So first off, using your clean spoon, crush down all of the larger chunks and make it into a fine powder.

 Then pour some of the rubbing alcohol into the cap so you don't accidentally add too much.

 And pour small amounts into the powder, mixing with your spoon after each addition.

 And if you add too much, then it's just going to take longer for it to evaporate.

 So you'll only be able to start using your bronzer after a few days or a week instead of just 24 hours.

 So keep mixing and when it's nicely mixed, then start to smooth it out and press it down with your spoon.

 Then you can use a tissue with the rubbing alcohol to clean around the edges of the container.

 And I decided to use my clean finger just to make it extra smooth, which I couldn't do with my spoon.

 Now I know there's so many videos out there that's showing how to do this.

 It's more just kind of encouraging you guys to check your makeup collection

 and see if you do have any products that are completely shattered or broken,

 but you're just hanging on to them because either you really like them or then you just forgot about them.

 I hope you guys enjoyed this video and thank you so much for watching.

 After watching this video, your car problems stand about as much a chance as this laptop

 Now make sure you stay tuned so you can see what happened to the laptop at the end of

 And as always, don't forget to subscribe, like, and leave a comment down below.

 Today I'm going to be showing you how to change your cabin filter or air purifier filter in

 You could also use a screwdriver, a flathead screwdriver, a Phillips head screwdriver,

 anything that looks kind of like that so you can hold a piece when you're putting it back

 Okay guys, the first thing you're going to do is go ahead and locate your glove compartment

 Okay guys, the first thing we're going to do is we're going to remove this piece right

 But you must remove this piece first because it's connected at two plastic clip on clips.

 And if you go ahead and remove the glove compartment first before you remove this piece, apparently

 And what that piece does is ensures that this thing kind of drops down smoothly instead

 So I'm going to take it out and show you where it's connected so you kind of understand how

 Alright, so this top piece right here is going to be clipped in right there.

 And the bottom piece right there where my pinky is touching is going to be clipped on

 You have to squeeze that and pull it off and same thing at the bottom.

 So once you've got this disconnected safely and you're not going to break it, then you

 can go ahead and squeeze together on both sides here and pull the glove compartment

 Like I said, you just squeeze and it just comes right down like so.

 Okay and once you've got your glove compartment down like this, you're now able to either

 pick this up off and set it off to the side or you can leave it there.

 But we're now able to access our cabin air filter or purifier air filter.

 I'm going to set our glove box to the side and now we'll go and look at the cabin air

 This is where we're going to access the cabin air filter and what you've got to do is you've

 And when you do it on both sides, it's going to fold down like this and now we can see

 So once you've got it like that, you're just going to slide this filter out.

 Okay guys, so here's the cabin filter that I pulled out and it's really not all that

 There's just a couple things right here and then down in those ridges there's some stuff

 So if you're doing the same thing, if you're just inspecting yours, then what you can do

 is make sure the clean side is facing down when you get it put back in and the slightly

 So that's all I have to say about the air filter that came out here.

 So we're going to go ahead and put it back in and I'll show you what you need to do when

 Okay guys, so when I took it out there, I gave you a really good shot of it.

 But when I'm putting it back in, I'm going to show you from this angle so you just have

 an idea of where the cabin filter sits, the general area it sits.

 And then I don't know if you can see this little flap here, but the flap you took off,

 you're just going to push until it clicks back in on both sides.

 Okay guys, and after I've got my cabin filter back into its place, we're going to go ahead

 If you did take your glove box off, we're going to hook these clips to these little

 So I'm just going to stick it right here and you heard it clicking and now it can come

 So if you took this piece off, which is like the little suspension type piece, see it kind

 If you took that off before you took your glove box down and it's not damaged, then

 you will now be able to replace this piece back into its place and you'll have a smooth

 Okay guys, now as you can see, I've got the glove compartment back down.

 And what I'm doing now is I'm going to be installing this piece.

 Now how you're going to do that is you're going to get this bottom piece right here.

 It's this bottom piece right here and it clips right into this piece right here.

 Just kind of slide it over and it'll clip in, it's clipped in now.

 Then you're going to take a screwdriver, or in my case, a pen, and we're going to pull

 this piece down and we're going to hold it with the pen and then we're going to line

 the pen up in this piece right here and we're going to slip this piece over that clip right

 And I'm going to set up the camera so you can see what I'm doing.

 I just explained to you what I would be doing so you'd understand what I was doing when

 Okay guys, so now you're going to see me, I'm going to pull down this little piece right

 I'm going to lift this guy back up and then I'm going to bring this piece over and then

 when I get just about lined up, there we go, I'll take it off and I'll hold it with my

 We've got the piece hooked back up so it closes and it smoothly comes down like so.

 And when you remember seeing this piece when I had it out, there was two holes, one on

 the bottom and one on the top and I just hooked the one on the bottom up to that inner piece

 When I took this one out, there was nothing to clip the top one to.

 I'd imagine there should be but I imagine that this cabin filter has been replaced before

 But I didn't see anything to hook up to up there and I didn't pull it off anything when

 If there is something extra up there, make sure you clip that to the top of that piece

 That pretty much sums up today's video for how to change your cabin filter or purifier.

 As always, I thank you guys for watching and I'll see you next time.

 So we got one right there, one right there, one right there, one right there, one right

 Start this out by doing a ball change, ball change, bringing the second leg back.

 And then do a heel with the front, two, and then bring it down onto the ball of your foot.

 The whole time you can be very high off the ground, at least the way I like to do it.

 You also want to do hips, you want to go one, one and two, and.

 One and two and, then you're going to reverse it, three and four and five and six and seven and eight.

 Ball change, cross, lean this way when you cross, one and two, and then bring it down onto the ball.

 Okay, what I mean by cross is you're going to cross, you're going to cross these legs, okay?

 For the most part though, I like doing it to the side, it shows more.

 Tonight I'm going to show you guys how to make beer bread with a little bit of a twist

 You can either put a loaf pan or you can do it as muffins or you can do mini muffins,

 So all it's going to take is, you're going to have one bottle of your favorite beer.

 Then you're going to have four tablespoons of just white sugar.

 Then I like to put a little bit of a kick in there, so I have some sharp cheddar cheese.

 I'm going to add that after I add the beer, just so I can stir everything in a little

 I mean, obviously the alcohol bakes out anyways, but you can use whatever you want as long

 Okay, so I'm going to go ahead and start mixing the cheese in here.

 You can put chives in here, you can put garlic, you can put olives, whatever you want, whatever

 And we'll come back in just a minute once I've got it in the pan to show you how it's

 I don't like it to get too done, but you want it nice and brown on the top.

 So, I'll put this in the oven and we'll get back in just a few minutes and show you guys

It's been a while since I've done a cooking vid so I thought that I would record this because I'm mimicking a recipe that I tried at the Cracker Barrel.

 I went to the Cracker Barrel and I saw these big foil concoctions come out on a plate and the foil gets pulled back and they call it campfire beef and campfire chicken.

Now for your carrots you can get whole carrots and chop them in half after you peel them.

 But I like carrots and I went ahead and just got a bag of baby carrots and washed them.

 And I got a lot more carrots than what usually comes in the campfire chicken meal because I love carrots.

 And I might add a little bit of my seasoned blends that I make up.

I did 2 pieces long ways and 1 piece straight down under the bottom.

And then I'm going to lay my breast meat on the end of the wing.

And then after that what you do is just lay all of your vegetables around it.

And put it on the sheet pan and slide it in the oven that's set to 375.

 Make sure that your foil is sealed and there's no holes so all of your juices won't run out.

 Because if all of your juices run out you're going to have dry chicken and possibly a mess on a shallow pan like that.

 For this recipe you'll need 200g of 70% Cocoa Dark Chocolate, 1 cup of White Chocolate Chips,

 1 cup of chopped walnuts, 1 cup of brown sugar, 200g of unsalted butter, 1 cup of white self

 raising flour, 4 eggs at room temperature, 2 tablespoons of cocoa, 1 teaspoon of vanilla

 To start, place the chocolate, butter and sugar into a pot and melt slowly over a medium

 Stir it occasionally to ensure that the chocolate doesn't burn.

 Once it's melted and smooth, transfer it into a bowl and place aside to cool for 5 or 10

 Place the eggs and vanilla extract into a jug and whisk together.

 Then add the walnuts and the white chocolate and fold again until mixed in.

 Pour the mixture into a brownie tray lined with some baking paper and ensure that the

 Give the tray a bit of a shake to ensure that there's no trapped air.

 Place the tray onto the bottom rack of an oven that's been preheated to 170 degrees

 Allow to bake for 20 to 25 minutes, then remove from the oven and allow to cool.

 You may find it easier to slice if you place it into the fridge for about 20 minutes to

 Stack them high onto a serving plate and dust with some icing sugar.

 For some of my other recipes, please click the screens to the left.

 And if you like what you see, please subscribe and stay tuned for more.

So today I'm going to be doing this tropical rainbow inspired look.

Now before I get into it, I just want to say that I did dye my hair red, as you can probably see, hopefully, the red tint to it.

 I do want to ask you guys if you have any suggestions on different hair dyes that I can use to get it to be more of a bright, intense red.

 I really wanted it to be more intense, but at the same time I didn't want to go straight to that.

I felt like that would be very odd since I normally have dark brown hair.

But I'm not exactly sure which hair dyes would work best to get more of an intense red.

I want it still to be more of a deep red like it is, but just a little bit more intense.

I've heard Manic Panic, I believe in Vampire Red is really good.

If you've ever tried that, please leave a comment below telling me how you liked it and how it worked for you.

 Just because I'm really trying to figure out which type of hair dye I want to get to get to the color that I've been wanting.

I know that was kind of off topic, but anyway, if you want to see how to get this look, keep on watching!

 Okay, so to start off this look, I've already applied my Elf Eyelid Primer onto my lid and then I applied my NYX Jumbo Pencil on my lid and on my lower lash line.

 The first three colors I'm going to start off with are this pink right here, this hot pink right here, and this red down here.

 I'm starting with that first light pink color onto a Sigma E30 brush and I'm just applying this into my crease.

Also bring it down to connect towards your upper lash line in a very kind of rounded shape.

 I just picked up that hot pink color onto the tip of my E30 brush and I'm going to focus this mainly in my crease, right at the edge where we put the pink.

 You want to kind of define the crease even more and bring it all the way in.

 Now I just picked up that red and I took it again onto the tip of the brush and I'm just going to focus this even more along the edge to just define the crease.

 Okay, so I just picked up that red color and I'm focusing this even more into the crease and just making sure you define your crease really well.

 Once you're done with that, I just wiped off the Sigma E30 brush and I'm just going to blend all these colors together into a gradient.

 Next I'm going into this turquoise color and I'm just taking that color onto a flat shader brush.

 I'm just going to apply this to our lid on top of the jumbo pencil that we have and just make sure that you get that defined crease line.

 So you want to focus on making it a lot neater right where the pink and the green will meet.

 Next I'm going into this purple color onto another Sigma E30 brush.

 I picked up that purple and I'm just going to define my crease even more with this purple shade.

 Bring it all the way into your tear duct and just blend it into the pink but not onto the green.

 Next I'm going into a large shader brush and a highlight color.

 I'm mixing one that's matte and one that's shimmery together onto this brush.

 And what we're going to do is just apply this to our highlight and blend it into the pink to fade it out.

 I just picked that color up onto a Sonia Kashuk angled brush and I'm just going to apply this to my lower lash line.

 Next I'm going into my MAC Beauty Any Pigment onto the same Sonia Kashuk angled brush.

 Tap off the extra because you don't want too much of this and just apply this on top of the blue we have on our lower lash line.

 Okay so I already applied my inner corner highlight which is just to use any highlight that you use on your brow bone.

 Now we're going to move onto the yellow eyeliner and what I'm using is my NYX yellow jumbo pencil and my Sigma E05 brush.

 So I'm just going to get that onto the brush and then I'm just going to line my upper lash line.

 Now I'm taking an angled brush in a matte yellow color and I'm just going to set the jumbo pencil that we have on our upper lash line just so that it stays in place and it's a little bit brighter.

 I'll come back and show you what I used on the rest of my face.

 Okay so now that we're done with the eyes I'm just going to explain what I used on the rest of my face.

 One thing I didn't mention in the tutorial that I forgot to film was I did add a little bit of a matte black eyeshadow into my crease just to deepen up the crease

 For my lips I used my NYX Luscious Lip Gloss Palette in the Perfect Everyday Colors.

 For my mascara and eyeliner I used just my Avon Super Extend Mascara just to give me more length.

 And then for my eyeliner I used my Maybelline Eye Studios Gel Liner in Blackest Black onto my waterline and then I tight lined.

 For my blush and contour I used my Sephora Colorplay Palette and I contoured with this shade right here and then I used this shade as a blush.

 And then for my eyebrows since again I did dye my hair red I wanted to go for a more warm tone brown so I used this shade from my 28 Neutral Palette.

Don't forget there's going to be links in the bottom bar to my blog where there will be pictures and a full list of products.

 Also there will be a link to my email where if you have any inspirational pictures, questions or requests you can email me there if you don't want to leave a comment below.

 I'm from cellphonetrek.com and today we've got a box opening of the Samsung Impression.

 Samsung Impression, this one's currently for the AT&T market as the box falls out of my

 We're bringing it back, the one, the only, free Bluetooth Friday giveaways.

 Took a little time off here in January, but we know we're coming back strong.

 So this Friday, picking a winner from one of our many, many subscribers.

 Basic box contents is you're going to have CD, safety, health information on the back

 Wall charger with standard Samsung M510 charging port, proprietary Samsung charging port.

 Samsung Impression features a four line, slide up QWERTY keyboard.

 I'm not 100% sure what that does, but we'll find out later when we do the full review.

 So, that right there is basically a Samsung impression at an early glance.

 If you're going to go ahead, subscribe to our channel, possibly win free Bluetooth.

Today we are going to show you how to do the French Fishtail braid.

 Take a small piece of hair from one of the sections and combine it with the other one.

 Cross a piece over again, but now you also want to add a piece from the head.

 So again, I'm crossing over a small piece of hair and then adding one from the side.

 You need to add very small sections, otherwise the technique won't work.

 When you don't have any more hair to add, just do a normal fishtail all the way down.

 Here I'm just adding my final piece and then doing a normal fishtail braid.

 I like to use well or small sections, but if you want to save some time, you can always use bigger ones.

Please share your recreations with us on Instagram by using the hashtag...

 If you have any questions, please leave them in the comments below.

 Start off with a pack of jello shot cups or I call them jello shot cups but they're actually plastic portion cups.

 I use a .75 ounce because a 1 ounce is a bit tall when trying to get it out.

 I have a school tray here and I just put my jello shots out on the school tray.

 I make at least two packs at a time, two to three, that will fit in my pitcher.

 I use a pitcher to help dissolve it and put my water in and put my liquor in.

 And the process for making jello is one cup of boiling water and one cup of cold water.

 So I never use one full cup of vodka because jello shot is kind of strong at that point.

 So what I do is I add one fourth cup of pucker of whatever type of gelatin I'm using.

 So I always use one fourth cup of some type of schnapps or pucker.

 And then the other remaining three fourths I'm using Sobieski vodka.

 No it's not a grey goose or a Ciroc but you don't want to use those for jello anyway.

 You want to drink those but I'm not going to use five o'clock vodka either and have a headache.

 So Sobieski is on the same level as Pearl which is a really good vodka.

 So a cup and a half of vodka and a half a cup of the grape pucker since we are doing two boxes.

 I used to just use the actual Pyrex measuring cup and it took forever pouring into those little cups.

 And I make jello shots a few times a year so I had to come up with something quick and easy.

 And I use that for my finger to help me stop the liquor from pouring out as I'm pouring into the cups.

 So I take my bottle, have my finger right here getting ready to stop the flow whenever I need.

 Put my finger over the hole and it stops the flow so I can move on to the next cup.

 So you put the lids on, stick them in the fridge and you're done.

 So I just stack 3 rows at a time, put a new school tray on and just keep going.

 So I hope you learned the quick and easy way to make jello shots.

 Oh the new diet is working out just fine, you know, eat veggies and stuff and yeah,

 Hey everybody, yeah today we're cooking mussels, beautiful Canadian mussels, even better, Atlantic

 I'm gonna be cooking them in beer and I guess it's the easier way to cook the mussels and

 you know, then after that you have a beer with that and share that with friends and

 Alright so, I put a bit of water in my sink and all my mussels and basically the way I

 clean them, let me just zoom on my hand, there you go, just like that, clean that, that,

 You know, most mussels today are pretty much clean, you know, they're not, unless they're

 really dirty, like I don't know why they would be dirty, maybe they got trampled in some

 And anyway, and you know, if you find some that are broken, we'll throw them away, or

 As you can see, this one has a little crack in, you just whack them, something hard to

 Paprika, this is a nice smoked paprika and two cloves of garlic minced, just shake it

 So what, one stick of celery, there you go, four green onions minced or chopped, really

 And you could take all of this and you know, just like sauté it in the butter or maybe

 Put it on your stove, cover, and now we wait for what, maybe three minutes.

 So it's pretty easy and you know if you're out with the boys or the girls or boys and

 girls, whatever, on a campfire and yeah you know you got some muscles, just put that on

 there and they'll probably be cooked even faster on a campfire.

 Alright so, once it was boiling like crazy, I turned off the heat like, I guess midway

 Alright, let's just dump it in there and we'll see what happens.

 And yes they don't taste the same if you're just using plain water.

 And you know if you can get some of the little broth that comes with them, they're even better.

 So yeah, if like me you find some on sale or you know you're feeling like, ah money is no problem, I'm gonna buy me some mussels.

 Nah they're not that pricey I guess, not over here because you know the beach is right next to us.

 Maybe run it through a coffee filter just to take out you know impurities or maybe some sand.

 But yeah not this time, I'll buy some more to make those recipes.

 Hi everyone, this time I will show you how to knit the stockinette stitch.

 The stockinette stitch is alternating between one row knit stitch and one row purl stitch.

 And you can decide if you want to use the normal knit stitch and the normal purl stitch

 I prefer the crossed because it's easier to work, it's easier for your hands and you have less work.

 So I will show you the two ways and you can decide which one you like more.

 So go through the stitch and grab the yarn from above, pull through.

 Okay, so this is the crossed way and you continue doing this until the end of the row.

 And if you decided to do the crossed way, so you use the crossed stitches,

 But for the stockinette stitch you should use only crossed or normal.

 Your yarn is in front of your loops and you go through the loop like this.

 So you go through the stitch, but you don't grab the yarn from above.

 Go through the stitch, under, through the stitch, under, through the stitch, under.

 Usually if you have your knitting needles, we should go from this side, so under the stitch.

 So your yarn is in front, always if you purl in front, if you knit in back.

 because you don't have this extra movement or this extra, I don't know how to call it.

 So and now I will show you what would happen if you combine crossed and uncrossed, or crossed and usual.

 So at this time we should look the normal purl stitch, because we used the normal knit stitch.

 So if you combine the crossed with the usual stitch, you have a crossed stitch, as you see.

 Changed at this point, so we have here the crossed stitches, and all the others are okay.

 Every time we went to the Mexican restaurant, Jack Jr., when he was little in California,

 It was delicious and he always ordered the order of chimichangas for dinner.

 He loved chimichangas and I'm like, man, good thing they make them because I don't know

 I finally looked the recipe up and, well, my wife sent it to me.

 We've got a beautiful onion, your favorite taco sauce, any kind you want.

 And I've got sour cream, Mexi blend cheese, and green onions to top our chimichangas.

 I'm using garlic powder, but it asks for garlic salt in the recipe.

 I'll leave the garlic salt in the recipe, but I don't use garlic salt.

 Okay, we're gonna brown the meat even though it has natural fats.

 Okay, once all the meat has been browned, I want you to take this over to the sink and

 Okay, now the onions have been softened, get your taco sauce, and you're gonna add that

 You grab this end, you cover the mixture, you pull it back with your fingertips.

 Now, when you go to cook this, you wanna make sure you cook the seam side down.

 I'm gonna make a few more and then I'll meet you over at the table.

 First thing I tasted was the beef that's seasoned with the cumin and the garlic.

 And it's something that takes a tremendous amount of craftsmanship.

 It's something that the skill and the labor that goes into these is really a labor of love.

 The playability, the way it feels, it's all about what the people put in.

 We're going to have Frank Untermeyer take you through the factory tour

 Before we fit the neck to the body, we're going to bind the body.

 It provides for a great transition between the Honduras mahogany back and the spruce top.

 It's real important to get a very tight fit at the waist and all the curves on the guitar.

 Where the wood could dent, the binding won't dent as easily as the wood.

 When we were trying to figure out how to actually go about binding the VXT,

 it was kind of cool because we actually thought about making a fixture to automate this process.

 To see that binding in those tight radiuses takes a lot of skill.

 Another unique aspect of the VXT is the amount of time that we put into hand sanding and sculpting the bodies.

 Mike hand sands the side of the guitar so that we can get a good flat surface on which to later apply our finish.

 If there's any imperfections in the wood, I try to make that so it's nice and clear.

 So then when we build our finish, we're going to have that deep mirror-like finish that we're striving for.

 We have the contour back, which adds for a lot of comfort and ease of holding the instrument.

 A lot of people have commented about how great it is to hold a VXT.

 This is one of the things that differentiates an Ovation VXT from a lot of other guitars.

 The amount of handwork that goes into each and every one of them.

 We apply a traditional woodworking water-based glue to the neck socket.

 So when they come together here, we're going to see that this particular neck was built for this particular body.

 Each neck is hand-fit and then clamped so it'll stay stable during the drying process.

 After the neck is fit and clamped, we're going to let it sit for about 24 hours, allowing the glue to harden.

 Then we're going to go back and feather in where the body binding meets the fingerboard binding.

 One of the best things about our guitars is the finish that we put on them.

 Gary's going to bring this guitar to life with a beautiful sunburst finish.

 The kind of quality that you get out of these bursts, it only comes from years of experience and an eye to detail.

 It's something that takes a person who knows what they're looking for.

 He's got an idea ahead of time and he'll just work it until he can get it to be that smooth burst that he's after.

 It takes a few passes to go around to get it there, but once it's done, it just jumps alive.

 It's been so cool because with this whole VXT project, we've had a lot of guys who've just

 embraced it, who wanted to make this thing work, and to turn these guitars into the best

 They'll have their own nuances because a human being actually does the spraying.

 And yeah, we try and get consistency, but I think that's one of the fun things about these guitars

 And they all have their own personality when you strap them on.

 We're going to have 14 coats of finish on this guitar by the time it's done.

 What we do is we spray it and then we knock it down, what we call leveling.

 We flatten it, then we'll spray it again, and then we'll flatten it again.

 We'll just keep on building it up with real thin layers of finish.

 With the VXT, we've really aimed for the semi-professional and professional player.

 The amount of handwork that goes into an Ovation is phenomenal.

 Every day, the amount of lutherie that goes into our guitars is unsurpassed in the industry.

 I think that there's a lot of misconceptions about how much handwork actually goes into an Ovation.

 All of our guitars are hand-assembled using only top-shell components.

 and two seed beads crisscross with right end and pull so you should see like this

 right input to seed beads crisscross with black in and pull right input into

 right input into next two beads so you should have three beads in the line

 right input one seed bead crisscross with black in and pull so you should see

 like this right input into the next bead this one and then you see like this

 black input to seed beads crisscross with red in and pull after you pull tight

 right input to seed bead crisscross with black in and pull see like this

 right input two seed beads and one blue three millimeter crisscross with black

 in and pull you should see like this right input into next bead

 black input two seed beads and one three millimeter blue crisscross with red in

 right input two seed beads and one blue three millimeter crisscross with black in

 black input two seed beads and one blue three millimeter crisscross with red in

 right input one seed bead and one blue three millimeter crisscross with black

 Hi everyone, TinkermanRC and today we're going to attempt to start the Sato FG-20.

 I've got everything in place that I need to be, my receiver battery, everything's

We've got our fuel here, we're running aviation fuel 100 low lead mix

 gonna do is we're just gonna idle it below 4,000 and break it in a little bit

 because it's a 10 minute idle at 4 under 4,000 to break it in and then you

 See we're fueling her up we're gonna get about a half a tank and then we'll start.

We're just gonna let her run right around this here for about 10 minutes.

So I just wanted to kind of start it, let everyone see how she sounds.

 So we'll get the motor broken, we'll get the cowling on, we'll get it all back together as she jeeps, we'll get it out on the field.

 I also use watercolor paper some, but I've grown accustomed to the printmaking paper.

 It has a different texture and it does not take the beating that your watercolor paper

In fact, the surface, when it's saturated, begins to pill a little bit.

 Reeves paper lives and breathes with me, so to speak, a little more than the watercolor

Now, I've used a lot of different printmaking papers and I've grown to love Reeves the most.

 It does take a little more of a beating than some of the other printmaking papers.

 for me, working against the clock with a figure, to use a toned piece of paper because then

 I can use that tone as part of the color nuances and I don't have to worry quite as much as

It's just that it allows me to work a little faster to get a finished

 one, 12 years old, it's been whittled away into a nice filbert with a sharp edge.

 and probably holds a little more paint than my very own brush with some age on it.

Sometimes they'll use a color of light, like a soft yellow of some

And those flecks of erasure from the easel will actually just blow off later.

 Head to everydaydriggers.tv slash lady to save 10% off orders $50 or more at ladyfootlocker.com.

 I'm your host Derek Shomer and today we're going to create the Yellow Star Cocktail.

 This recipe was submitted by Papermonster87 who submitted like two last week and the reason I did

 this not I like to mix them up and get different submitters but I did a search through my inbox for

 passion fruit syrup because last week I happened to notice I had bought this probably many months

 Faye Brothers, they make a lot of bitters and stuff too and so do I have any other bitters?

 So I've got Martin Miller's gin right there and Martin Miller is going to be poured into here

 Unfortunately for those that for some reason think this is the best gin in the world,

 So if we were to make this at home she would pick New Amsterdam.

 You probably can't see it from there but England is on the back.

 There's something to do with I think okay it's distilled in New England.

 Distilled in England and shipped to Iceland where it's blended with Icelandic spring water.

 So that's they cut it with the spring water from Iceland as opposed to just.

 But the the water probably makes a big difference like it does in most products.

 Big difference being not necessarily one is better than the other.

 But you can get a different flavor or different consistency or weight.

 We're going to do three quarters of an ounce of banana liqueur.

 Just to me nobody can beat New England today because I like that taste.

 Or I don't think it's I don't think it's um I don't think they color it.

 Doesn't say high fructose corn syrup but it has corn sweetener, sugar, water, artificial flavor,

 Which makes sense because I think if you break up passion fruit it comes out like a weird color.

 And for a garnish I was trying to fit this cocktail because the glass wasn't that big.

 It's got definitely has that gin flavor like you'll go oh there's gin in there.

 So I think you're going to get that mainly because you get this nice wrapping of

 A little extra potency from the 99 bananas because it's a little higher proof.

 If you take the first like that sip it's right on the tip of the tongue.

 So you start out with this banana the sweet banana passion fruit gin finish orange juice

 throughout that drink like that citrus juicy heavy flavor as opposed to like a citrus paste.

 Hi, Reg from Quick Squiz and today's recipe is tempura prawns, tempura salmon on a nice

 lazing around the pool with friends and great served with a nice little white wine.

 So over here the ingredients are peeled green prawns, strips of Atlantic salmon, one egg,

 half a cup of corn flour, one cup of self-raising flour, 200ml of icy water, I've got the ice

 cubes still floating in there, salt, some flour for dredging and my salmon and prawns

 Very simply we just thread salmon onto the skewer like this, pop it over a bowl ready

 of self-raising flour, icy water, a little squeeze of salt and all I do is mix it together.

 Now that I've got all my ingredients in my bowl here I just gently mix them together.

 This sort of recipe it doesn't matter if it's a little bit lumpy the batter.

 at the end of the tail part here, thread the prawn on and then you dredge it in the flour

This could also be vegetables if you like vegetables or it could be chicken

So in this case the batter sticks nice and easily to the salmon.

 batter and we go like this over the top of the prawns and that would create a nice little

 sort of feathering effect of the batter across your cooking ingredients, your seafood, that

 I've just finished cooking the prawns and the salmon in my deep fryer.

 we need to add is a little bit of salt because most batters need a little bit of salt and

 most people are used to adding some salt to their battered seafood.

 I've made a little Asian salad which is bean shoots, tomatoes, some nuts, some bean curd

 And of course over here I've got my dipping sauce in the front.

 nice, lift the salad nice and high, into the centre there like that.

Approximately we'd use about maybe three pieces of fish and maybe three prawns.

 thinking, how incredibly boring, but these are my favorite salads.

 than other salads, but I do make a lot of salads and I do eat them all year round, regardless

 have these ingredients always in my fridge, so it's very quick and easy to whip them up.

 And secondly, because they're usually in season all year round.

I'm also making a warm potato salad, which is actually made with roasted potatoes.

 This is nice to serve with barbecues, but it's also quite nice, interestingly enough,

 just as a little entree all on its own, especially if you make the potatoes quite tiny.

 or cooked meat or fish or chicken or any of those things you might like.

 also going to make a watermelon salad that has olives and feta cheese in it.

It sounds really weird, the mixture of ingredients that are in there,

It's not great the second day, as you know, a lot of salads aren't.

 Once they've been dressed, they really do lose a whole lot of their texture.

You'll need some cubed seedless watermelon, sliced or diced red onions,

 depending on the texture you like, cubed feta cheese, and you can use whichever feta you

 like, pitted black olives that have been halved and chopped fresh parsley or mint,

Toss the ingredients again using tongs so the dressing ingredients

 Now this is, as I said, I normally make with spinach, baby spinach, but if it's not in

 season or it's not at its best when I purchase, then I will go for mixed greens, which is

 Choose greens that are small in size and ideally include a mix of colors.

 washed and dried either with a salad spinner or between sheets of paper towel.

 if you're making it for a vegetarian, you want to leave out the prosciutto that is included

You can also cook the prosciutto with the potatoes in the oven, but I've done

 and we're also going to add it to the salad itself at the end when we serve it up.

 let's have a look at the ingredients for this and how to put it together.

 which you're going to roast in the oven along with the potatoes.

 you'll need some crispy prosciutto or bacon, unless of course you're making it for vegetarians

 in advance and the video on how to do that is also on blackbookcooking.com.

 is made up of seeded mustard, sour cream and whole egg mayonnaise which you can make yourself

 tray or cake tin if you're making a small amount and break up the onion quarters so

 a good quality olive oil and sprinkle them with a good quality flaked salt.

 in a moderate oven for about 20 to 30 minutes depending on the size you've cut the potatoes.

 to mayonnaise is a matter of personal taste, some people like the dressing very mayonnaisey

 add your mustard, this too can be adjusted according to the taste.

 a little crushed prosciutto to enhance the flavour but don't use all of it because we

 want to use some of it for the garnish and just a little bit of chopped fresh parsley

Now once the potatoes and onions are cooked place them into the bowl immediately

 and add the dressing straight away so that the warmth of the potatoes will melt the dressing

 Well I hope you enjoyed those 3 salads, I know I'm going to enjoy eating them along

 I always have those ingredients in my fridge and in my cupboard so they're salads that

 I can whip up at any time because they're staples that I carry all the time.

 of course come in a packet and they keep for a long period of time.

 there, always have spinach and salad greens in my fridge and olives are always there as

Probably the only ingredient I'd have to go out and buy each time would be the watermelon

 and that's not difficult to get because it is available all year round although it does

 I hope you go away and try some of those salads and if you've got any salads of your own that

 you really think are fantastic, I would love to hear about them because I'm a big salad

 you so much for your company, I hope you enjoyed today, I hope you come back to blackbillcooking.com

 to have a look at all the other skill and technique videos and base recipe videos and

 of course don't forget to connect with me on Facebook and Twitter, I would love to get

Thank you for being with me, I'm Victoria Hanson, I'll see you again next

 This week I want to show you a really cool way to personalize your cookware.

 The first thing I did was I used a program that I have called Art Text, but you can use

 Then what you're going to do, you got to make sure that you're using the paper side up,

 Now just remember, you see these parts here that show the opening of the P?

 Just make sure you save those because when you place it onto the pan, you got to place these

 So if you put, you know, the etching on it, you're going to ruin the texture of it.

 Once you get your contact paper on, and you have to be very patient when you do it.

 Well, once you get it on, you're going to take a boning tool like this or a popsicle stick or a

 spoon, whatever you can get, and just go along the edges to make sure you have very good contact.

 Just be patient and make sure you get all the edges done well because you don't want your

 exposed area and then just let it sit for about 5 minutes and it should be done.

 going to peel it off and when I'm done peeling it, I'll show you the finished product.

And this is a great idea for wedding gifts, shower gifts, Christmas gifts, birthday

 gifts, and even for yourself because if you go to a potluck or something, you don't have to fight

 Hello everyone, today's review is going to be on the stone wave that everybody's been

 getting at the Dollar Tree because this past week they've had some few products that are

 And it actually says, there's a tip in there that says to make sure you whip the eggs really

 The more whipped the eggs are the more soft and fluffy the finished omelette will be.

 And I've got some chopped yellow peppers that I actually saved from yesterday because I

 I normally like my omelette with tomatoes, jalapenos and spinach but today I'm going

 So you put that in there and then we're going to just kind of chop these up a little bit.

 But if you put some real cheese in there I'm pretty sure it'll taste really good.

 Now the directions say to put it in the microwave for one and a half minutes.

 You take your fork and just roll around like that a little bit.

 Put it in a container and then just keep one of the stonewaves at work.

 to pour over cheesecake, pound cake, ice cream, or you can use it for beignets.

 of light brown sugar, two tablespoons of cornstarch, and it's an eighth of a cup or two tablespoons,

A cup of dark corn syrup, a half a cup of chopped pecans, and a teaspoon

 going to do to start this recipe is put our cornstarch, our brown sugar, into this pot

 and stir it around a little bit, get it mixed up, kind of break up the lumps of the brown

Then I'm going to pour my dark corn syrup in, and I sprayed this cup with cooking

 And what we do now is we take it over to the stove and we cook it over medium heat until

So we're at the stove now and I've got my stove set over medium heat

 and I'm going to stir this while it gets hot and it'll probably start to bubble until

 I'm going to take it over to the counter and finish it up for you.

 bubbly now and so what we're going to do now is put the pecans and the vanilla in.

 So that's our pecans and our vanilla, it bubbled up a little bit.

 going to let it sit in the pan and cool off for just a little bit.

 has cooled down a little bit so I'm going to pour it in my container.

 can be refrigerated and you can actually pull it out of the refrigerator and heat it up

 in the microwave and use it as you choose, either for cheesecake, pound cake, whatever.

 Hey guys and welcome to the first in the series of my sleek palette looks.

 sleek palette, it's the Bohemian palette and I wanted to do a dramatic look kind of inspired

 be called the Bohemian sleek look, not very original but in honour of the new palette

 I'm going to do is prime my eye using Benefit's Lemonade and I'm just going to spread that

 this is just to give me a really sharp clean edge like I have on the other side, it's not

Once I've got that on I'm going to use the Barry M Super Soft Eye Crayon

 in Black and I'm just going to really roughly line my upper lash line in this.

 soft, hence the name Super Soft and it just makes a great eye shadow base, I got it yesterday

Just going to blend that with my finger, just kind of gently blend it in

 to take the Matte Black, I will put a link and picture in the sidebar of colours that

 I used because I've made a little code way of doing it rather than me showing.

 picked up some black onto that brush and as you can see that is like the most pigmented

 black eye shadow ever, ever in the history of black eye shadows ever.

 like this and I'm just going to go over it, just kind of buffing it.

 not being like particular about this, I'm just really slapping it on like so.

 going to take this brush, just an all over shadow brush, I'm going to take the Matte

The matte shades are not quite as pigmented as the shimmery shades

I'm just blending as I go, I want the black and the red colour to kind

 fluffy brush and I'm going to take the matte brown and a little bit of yellow on the tip

 of my brush and I'm just going to blend that along the top line of the red and just blend

This isn't really giving any colour off as such, it's just to kind of blend

On my brow bone I'm just using the pale cream colour and just really

Then I'm going to reapply that red just to bring it back up and I'm

 going to apply some of the kind of red shimmery colour now over the top of that.

 the Evian which is just like a toner and moisturising kind of spray, it's amazing.

I'm going to go into the olive green colour and get that right on the tip

I'm going to kind of line my upper lash line but again really roughly.

 Just so you can kind of see the sheen of it there and then just with my finger I'm just

 I'm going to put the copper colour, the orange colour on top of that.

 all cleaned up I'm just going to line my waterline with this Barry M black pencil.

Now I'm going to curl my eyelashes and I'm going to use Maybelline's false lashes

I'd probably only wear this if I was going out in the evening to a party

But hey that's my bohemian look and I kind of just worked off the packaging

 back and I have to apologise I did my blush and my lips off camera and it was too late

And then I used the Gouache on stage lip jam in 100 which is like a purpley blue

 iridescent clear sticky bubblegum flavour lip gloss and it's lovely.

 We've got some water, some chicken breast, we've got some hot pepper flakes, Old Bay

 seasoning, some frozen vegetables, we've got some shrimp, we've got a box of chicken flavored

 vermicelli rice, we've got a little olive oil, and we've got some pepper.

 First thing we're going to do is add a little olive oil to our pan, put our vermicelli in,

 Alright once we get a little color on our rice, I've got it browned up here, I'm going

 Alright, once we get a little color on our chicken, rice goes back in.

 We're going to add our Old Bay seasoning, our red pepper flakes, our chicken seasoning

 Once it comes to a boil, I'm going to reduce the heat, and then I'm going to cover it and

 What we're going to do here, I'm going to cook it for another 5 minutes or so, but I'm

 I'm going to leave the cover off now and let some of the sauce reduce a little bit.

 All the ingredients are listed down below or you can go to thebuildblog.com to see all

 need a lined alligator clip, a needle and thread, and a piece of black 3⁄8 inch ribbon

 want to take your pencil and you're going to draw a small C, a bigger C, and then a

 on the top right side you're going to start drawing your C, just a small C, and then a

 Now, get your lighter and just smooth out the edges around with your lighter.

Now take your ribbon and fold it back in half again to find your center.

 Okay, now you want to get your 3-8's ribbon, seal the edge, and we're going to get some hot glue.

 Now get your hot glue at this point and put a line down the back.

 Get your lined alligator clip and put it right down the center.

 This is what it looks like when it comes from the butcher or the supermarket.

 then wrap this up in foil and freeze it separately and put it in your

 I'm cutting not with the grain because that would make it tough.

 You know, once you learn this two-step method, you can have as much meat and as much vegetables as you want.

 You know, you can use low sodium if you like if you have a problem with that.

 And I'm going to also use a little kosher salt, just a drop of kosher salt.

 Cornstarch is what we use for thickening as a gravy, but also this is going to take about a tablespoon.

 It should coat the meat a little bit so that when we sear it, you'll see

I believe an eyeballing thing is you can't be bothered measuring.

 So ideally this should marinate for about an hour at room temperature or maybe overnight in the refrigerator, of course.

 pre-chopped ginger and garlic, which is going to go into the wok.

 I'm using some oil that I had around just a couple of days, and I'm going to lace a couple of

Now if you don't have a wok, you know, a frying pan would be fine,

 but it's nice to have one investment if it's not a lot of money if you're near Chinatown

 You have a wok that has sort of a concave utensil like this, which is pretty cool because it goes around the sides.

 If you can smell, it's beginning to smell wonderful with the ginger and garlic,

 I separate the meat because we don't want it to get too conglomerate in the bottom so it'll steam.

 So then you wait a few seconds or whatever and then give it a turn.

 We're getting pretty much to the brown part, and it's going to be cooked again with our vegetables, so, and it's beef.

 I have a little bit of oil left, so I'm not going to put too much.

 The wok is very hot, so we can go very quickly into the asparagus.

 If you wanted to add another green vegetable, like zucchini, you could.

 When they get a bright green color, I'm going to add the meat right to it.

We'll combine and make a little gravy, and then they'll also be ready to serve.

It's about a half a cup, but you need to just look at how much gravy you have.

 So it's now absorbing all the flavors from the meat and the asparagus.

 I'm going to help it along with a little bit of oyster sauce, perhaps a tablespoon.

 I'm not going to put all of this mixture, cornstarch is one-to-one, just a little bit to bind it.

 Now if you had some pasta from the night before, you could warm that up, put it underneath.

 I can remember actually spraying lacquer with the gun in one hand and a lit cigarette behind

 Most small spray guns sold today are labeled HVLP, meaning high volume, low pressure.

 A higher volume of air is used to atomize and propel the paint at that lower pressure.

 Remember from my previous video on compressors that CFM, that's cubic feet per minute of

 The result is a high proportion of the paint reaches your target surface with reduced overspray,

 Also, these guns are almost all designed with gravity feed cups mounted on top rather than

 The fluid tip, which regulates the flow of paint, and the air cap, which atomizes the paint.

 Gravity allows the paint to flow down into the head of the gun and is controlled by the needle.

 Note the holes for the airflow surrounding the fluid tip opening.

 Pulling it partially back introduces air into the air cap without pulling back the needle.

 As you continue to pull the trigger back, the needle will start to move, opening up

 As the fluid hits the air already flowing through the cap, it is atomized or blown into

 The further you pull the trigger back, the more material goes onto your workpiece.

 Conversely, the further you pull it back, the less the material is atomized.

 The gun also has a fluid adjustment knob, top rear, that will restrict the distance

 I always leave this wide open and control the fluid flow I want with the trigger.

 I find that for spraying latex paint, the 2mm tip supplied with this gun works quite well.

 To adjust the regulator, pull the trigger to the air position and turn the knob.

 If you don't have a regulator at the gun, you may use the flow valve at the base of the handle.

 If you don't have either a regulator or a built-in flow valve, you may use an external

 This gun comes already equipped with a regulator and is available through my tools I use, Amazon

 With the fan control turned off, air flows just through the center of the cap.

 As you open the valve, air is introduced into the wings on the cap which flatten the spray.

 Here is an example of the pattern you get with the valve closed.

 A good use for this pattern is on edges such as these louvered doors.

 I just can't imagine hand painting a louvered door when I can spray it.

 Turning the wings of the air cap vertical will give you a horizontal spray pattern.

 Check out our tools I use, Amazon online store at www.budmanproductions.com.

 all the claws, any part of the Tyranid that's not skin, in Mephiston Red.

 I then go ahead and shade all the red areas with Reikland Flesh Tone.

 I used Flash Fitch Yellow for the eyes and then Palette Witch Flesh for the teeth.

 While the model is drying, I go ahead and base coat the base with XB88.

 Now that the model is dry, I go back to the carapace in red areas and use Evil Sun Scarlet

 Moving back to the base, I go ahead and dry brush the whole base with Underhive Ash and

 then moving onto the rim of the base, I airbrush Vallejo Game Colour Terriato.

 As a final addition to the video, I'd just like to say the new website has been launched

 along with a brand new blog which is updated weekly along with the YouTube channel.

 here's a link to the new website and it would be greatly appreciated if you'd check that out.

 for eyes I am using cotton thread white color white color cotton thread and make

 make same size another one and here I am using this type of eyes

 here I have attached eyes of the owl and the first one attached and then

 here i am using single crochet, triangle, crochet triangle and attach here

 deburring wheel on your grinder or something like that so just that you can kind of break the edges and remove some of the worst of

 So I would spend more time on this, but I just want to get along to show you more about the finishing process.

 In particular you want something that goes through a series of grits that you can get ever and ever finer on the pick.

 I'm just going to start off with a really coarse 220 grit here.

 And for this first piece, I'm just going to wrap it right around the pick.

So even just with the 220 grit applied, this is already dramatically smoother.

 And I'm going to go ahead and move on to some even finer grits so that I can get it as smooth as possible.

 If I were to put this in a lock right now, I'd be getting pretty good feedback.

 But I'm going to go ahead and move on to some even finer grits so that I can get it as smooth as possible.

 Now again, when I was grinding, this is mostly just because I was moving a little too quickly as I made this video.

 And I would have spent longer on each of those stages than I did.

 So, I'm going to grab a lock and we're going to pick it open with our brand new pick.

 Alright, so now we're going to use our new pick and our new tension wrench

 I just wanted to show you that these tools are entirely usable.

 Tilapia has now become one of the top 10 fish consumed in America.

 In fact, 4 ounces of tilapia has just over 100 calories, 21 grams of protein, no saturated fat or cholesterol.

 Tilapia recipes can include grilled tilapia, baked tilapia or fried tilapia.

 The rising popularity of this fish has made tilapia recipes easy to come by.

 I recently hosted a cooking show and part of the class focused on healthy entrees.

 I chose a tilapia recipe served with sautéed bell peppers and onions.

 Tilapia is a freshwater fish whose meat is firm, white and flaky.

 It has a pleasant mild sweet flavor and is reasonably priced in comparison to other seafood.

 To begin, we're going to toast about a cup of cornmeal in a pan over medium heat for about 2-3 minutes.

 After about 2 minutes, you're going to notice the toasted aroma.

 Add 1 quarter of an onion, thinly sliced, 1 pasilla pepper, 1 red bell pepper and 1 green bell pepper,

 We're going to cook this down until the peppers and onions become real soft.

 The peppers and the onions have been cooking down for a good 10 minutes.

 You can see our pepper topping is cooked down after about 15 minutes.

 Next, I season each fillet with a little bit of salt and pepper.

 In a large sauté pan, we're going to heat up 3 tablespoons of olive oil over medium-high heat.

 Then we're going to fry the tilapia until they're golden brown,

 Alright, these actually went a little longer, about 5 minutes on each side.

 I like to serve the tilapia on a bed of steamed basmati rice and topped with the peppers.

 Alright guys, so today I've come in and I'm going to be doing hamstrings.

 What I'm going to do is take a bit apart away from that and just run you through deadlifts.

 Deadlifts are probably one of the exercises I've done religiously throughout my whole

 I kind of keep a stiff leg but today I'm not going to be lifting heavy.

 One thing is you'll see in this video is that I'm not strong at all.

 And that's one thing I want to stress, you don't really have to be strong to get kind

 of the size that you want because that's something that I've never done.

 So the strength that I have got is purely from training for the way I look.

 So I'm just going to run you through my deadlifts, the form, the technique or whatever.

 For a little bit of fun at the end of the session, or end of my deadlifts, I'm going

 Just to show you all that I'm not some massive power lifter and yeah, it's going to be embarrassing

 You guys shouldn't worry too much because I'm going to struggle like hell.

 So I'll put that at the end of the session guys, so a little bit of entertainment at

 So I'm obviously starting off with a nice and light weight, so obviously get warm before

 Obviously one of the main struggles that we all struggle with is, especially at the beginning

 of your training, is to obviously get that good deadlift form where your hips are right

 We don't want it as that arched back, you want that really good flat back.

 And that just comes with time and muscle memory as well, but it's obviously key that you have

 your weight on your heels and you push your hips back, keeping the bar able to slide down

 Alright, so some of my key points for this deadlifting is obviously safety is first because

 So obviously keeping that weight back, weight through your heels, flat back and just being

 Right now I know my grip is going to be a bitch, but if I need to rest pause it, I'll

 put the weight down, rest pause, get myself together and finish my reps.

 That's what it's all about, especially when you go into these bigger lifts and stuff,

 Obviously thinking you're about to lift it, don't let your mind wander, focus on that

 I mean this ain't heavy, I ain't strong, but I'm not about that.

 But just a recap, remember it's all about that technique, don't rush your weights up.

 So make sure you comment below with any videos you want to see.

 I'm here to make them guys, so you've got to hit me up to give you guys what you want.

 And also if you have questions, hit me up on my social media guys.

 I always make sure that I get back to you on Twitter, Facebook, Instagram and Snapchat.

 It's all Dickerson Ross, so follow me and I'm going to keep those videos coming as long as you keep them comments coming.

 Hey what's up everybody it's Chef Alicia and today I am making chocolate chip

 pecan cookies and this happens to be my very favorite recipe for chocolate chip

So we're going to start off here with two sticks of butter, one cup of

 creaming stage when you're making cookies because the creaming really

 it's light and fluffy you're going to incorporate more air and you're going to

 end up with a lighter cookie because that air that you incorporate is going

 to become part of the leavening and you're definitely going to have a nice

 light cookie but I want like a thick dense chewy chocolate chip cookie.

These are two regular old large eggs and I'm going to mix these in.

 I'm on low speed but I have a pretty powerful hand mixer so you may need to

I'm going to blend these just until they're incorporated because

 again I do not want to add a whole lot of air to these cookies.

 it's like kind of special cookies which these are because again these are one of

 bean paste and it's Nielsen Massey is the brand that I happen to like but

I have a half a teaspoon of each and I also have about somewhere between

 a quarter of a teaspoon and a half of a teaspoon of nutmeg and then three cups

 if I know the kids are going to be eating a whole bunch you can do like two

 and a half cups of whole wheat flour with a half a cup of wheat germ but then

 all-white flour today and you just need to mix it until it's incorporated.

 that's just the theme of the day because we don't want to make these fluffy we're

 ingredients which notice I stirred my dry ingredients together that was kind

 your baking powder into your flour or my little nutmeg I put in there you want

 to make sure you stir it up so that it's kind of even before you even add it into

So as you can see this is a super super dry dough that's something that we

 want because the more liquid that you have in your cookie batter the more it's

 going to spread but this is also a temperamental dough so I'm showing you

 here the texture is just a tiny bit more dry than I want so I'm going to add one

 touch your dough and feel it and see if it crumbles like mine did but that one

 tablespoon see you're still gonna have the same kind of texture when you look

 at it see when you look at my dough it's not really coming together it's not you

 know coming together into the one ball and it's not real moist but see when I

 squeeze it together it's more like if you were making say a pie crust and it

 holds together just like you see here so that's kind of the texture you're

 chocolate chips and one cup of pecans which I have broken up into like fours

 or so and normally I would tell you to stir these in with a rubber spatula but

 again this is a really dry stiff dough and you will get a serious arm workout

 if you try to do that maybe you're way stronger than me which is totally cool

 except that I don't want to have a sore arm tomorrow so I'm using my hand mixer

 little stir here just to make sure everything is getting incorporated in

 there nice and evenly and again I'm just gonna check my batter and then I'm gonna

 go ahead and play with my food because it's fun and also because I am going to

 try to match everything together and make sure that everything is

Now it kind of looks like I'm doing a kneading motion here which I

 dough because well everybody needs cookie dough but that's not what I mean.

 Okay you don't knead your cookie dough because if you do it's gonna end up like

 weird and funky and stiff with tough cookies and that's not what I'm doing.

 I'm just trying to mash all my chocolate chips and pecans in there and also I'm

 gonna grab all those little guys stuck to the bottom of my bowl because they

We're gonna go ahead and put them out onto the sheet pan by scoop

 them too far apart because they're really not gonna spread because again we

 take 16 minutes and I rotate them halfway like you know switch the pan

 them out let them sit on your sheet pan for about one minute and then put them

 cooling your cookies you don't want to have them like in a draft you don't want

 to try to cool them too quickly because that's what makes your cookies crack

You need to make sure that they're just having a little bit more cooling

 time so maybe put them in a little bit warmer of an area of your kitchen.

 eat you now so everybody enjoy and you can get this recipe on my site

 This is John McLennan and I'm a guitarist, singer, songwriter, and musician here in sunny

 And today you're going to get a free guitar lesson on Colby Calais' new hit tune, I Do.

 I think it's a great song, really excellent acoustic guitar work.

 It's simple but it just fits the tune and the choice of voicings that are used really

 So let's start right at the top and I keep looking over here because I just heard the

 song about 30 seconds ago and I just charted it out really quick so I'm looking at that

 which is basically kind of like what I would prepare for a student if they were taking

 So yeah, basically we're going to start on a D chord and let's talk about the rhythm

 because that's kind of the groove for the whole thing just like this.

 So if you notice my right hand, I'm constantly going down, up, down, up, down, up.

 So just start with that, maybe do this without playing any chords and just get that flow

 One and, and then on two our hand's going to go down but I'm going to stop the strings

 so that goes one and two and then I'm going to come up on the and of two and then I'm

 So I'm thinking if here's a beat one, two, three, four, I'm subdividing it in eighth

 So basically it's one and two and three and and then on beat four we're going to rest

 and then we're going to come up on just whatever strings, you know, open and that's going to

 Here comes the sun by one of my favorite guitar players George Harrison so if you don't know

 So that's the intro and then we're going to go to the verse which goes.

 So just for a second there they sneak in from a D chord at D major 7 which is where I just

 Cool so that's basically the verse, the pre-chorus and the chorus and one of the unique things

 about this song is that you know typically at the end of the chorus in a pop song you

 go back to the top and hit the re-intro and then hit the verse two which a lot of times

 There's just subtle changes so like the pre-chorus the second time goes like this.

 So just that one chord changes but it just breaks it up you know so you're not just saying

 okay here comes the same thing again maybe with different words or maybe even the same

 That's kind of cool and that's notated on the chart just in parenthesis under the chord

 Great song hope to see you in the next lesson and if you like this I have a new album coming

 out that's acoustic music and has a song very similar kind of vibe as this called Start

 All Over Again so hopefully you can check that out and we'll talk to you soon.

 Hi, Dan Brzozowski here from BodybuildingWithoutSteroids.com and EatToLiveDiet.com where you can get your

 What we have today is a vegetarian, really a lacto-oval vegetarian breakfast, lunch,

 I've got fresh mushrooms, vine-ripe tomatoes, we use scallions, and here I've got Italian

 So what we're going to do here is we're going to make ourselves a really, really, really,

 really healthy breakfast, lunch, snack, dinner, however you want to put it.

 First off, what we're going to do is we're going to take our spinach and our squash,

 The same thing, I cut up one scallion and just put about an ounce or so of my cheese

 I want all the protein that comes from both the white and the yolk as well as the good

 I get this mixed up and I want to do this with the minimal amount of mess.

 Once you saute the vegetables, what happens is you kill the vitamins in there.

 You know I always use an iron skillet if you've watched any of my past recipes.

 And again, there's a secret I'm about to tell you of how to stay on your diet.

 So one of the things I want to do again, I want to keep stirring it around.

 I want minimal amount of heat on the spinach, the mushrooms, the onion.

 A straight vegan would not have the cheese in there and would not,

 a little bit of ground beef in there will really take it up a notch or two.

 Now, again, if I'm going to want carbohydrates that are starchy,

 I'm going to have myself some oatmeal with it or some 100% stone ground whole wheat bread.

 And also Ezekiel bread is really good for more of a carbohydrate.

 If you want to prepare a meal like this, you want to make it large.

 If I break this in half, this is about two breakfasts for me because I'll add oatmeal to it.

 So if you make larger meals and section them out for more meals later on,

 Anyway, you want a free book on dieting or on bodybuilding without steroids,

 www.bodybuildingwithoutsteroids.com, download it absolutely free.

 Get in there guys, Scotty Boxa here for another Drink Lab How To.

 it out, you've got to stick your finger in there, try to peel it out or stick your tongue

 any kind of peeled fruit, some jelly, some boiling water and 500ml of your favourite

 spirit, preferably your clear ones like your vodkas, your white rums and your coconut rums.

 to the mix because it was half water now it's half the spirit that I'm after which should

With the half of the orange what you're going to do is squeeze some of the

So basically there we have it, the two half shells ready for pouring.

 we need to do is place them inside a muffin tin or the top of an individual glass.

 just pour the jelly mix into the shot holders and just pop them into the fridge until set.

 Right now our jelly is set so the next step is to cut them up into little pieces.

 Sometimes it's easier to place them upside down and then just cut them into thirds.

 fruits, different colours, different flavours and see what you can come up with.

 If you're looking for other brilliant ideas and other cocktail recipes don't forget to

 The tools you'll need for that are a couple different size Phillips screwdrivers, a larger

 head and a smaller head one, a pair of scissors or wire cutters, and something to strip wires

 In the kit, you have a bearing well plug and some screws and some wire nuts already with

 you and then you have the actual motor itself that you're going to have to install.

 As you can see from looking up at the turntable, we've already removed the pulley and that's

 And this is where we're going to insert that bearing plug to keep the oil from spilling

 I decided also to put the transport screw in to the sub chassis.

 This has got a nice new Rega RB301 arm on it and the new co-plumb or arm board on it.

 I've got this suspended on four quart paint cans with padding to protect the wood surface

 Okay, we're going to flip the turntable over, making sure that the can is not going to be

 Now in most cases when you go to install a motor, you're going to have a cardboard housing

 There's three screws here and it's held with an adhesive up here.

 In this case that's already been removed, but you will see that when you turn your table

 You'll need to remove those three screws and then tear away the cardboard so you no longer

 So you locate the motor and you can see the wires that are coming off the power supply

 And basically what you want to do is snip those fairly close to the power supply.

 Okay, I've tucked the motor wires out of the way and we're going to remove the old power

 You could leave this in there as a vestigial kind of thing in case anybody wanted to make

 I don't want anyone to have the plug and plug it in accidentally and get shocked.

 So I'm showing it the way we're going to remove the entire power supply.

 Okay, you need to locate the switch, which is over here in the front.

 You can always go over to the other side and find where that is.

 And then this is the switch that's going to go to and connect to the new upgrade motor.

 So you need to snip these wires as close as you can to the power supply.

 So you want to make sure as you're removing these that you are keeping an eye on them

 You have to pull the motor out that you're not going to lose them or they can't be knocked

 But again, just have in mind you don't want to lose those screws.

 You want the wires coming out towards the side where the power supply was.

 You'll see if you went to go in the other direction that you would be messing it up

 So again, we want to keep track of these motor screws right away.

 So we're going to reinstall those right now so we don't risk losing them.

 With these two screw holes that are there, you can't go anywhere but where it belongs.

Merrill, when he designed it, decided to put brown wires so it would be easier for

 you to figure out that brown wire is going to be connected to brown wire.

 And there are a variety of different types of wire cutters that you can use.

 And I'm going to get my wire nuts now and make a nice solid connection with these.

 You want to really tug on it, make sure it's not going to fall off.

 Now what we're not going to show at this time is the fact that you'll want to clean up these

 You can use the old AC cord connectors and put these so there will be no way for them

 to at all get caught up with the suspension or anything else that's going on under the

 And in a second we're going to flip this and plug it in and show you that it's working.

 Welcome to Debbie's Divinely Healthy Kitchen where this time we're going to make oven roasted veggies.

 Now this is one of the best recipes I think in terms of your heart health or just in terms of your health in general

You can see that I've got some yellow peppers that are julienne, some red peppers.

 And peppers are excellent because they have tons of antioxidants which are so good for you.

 And then a little bit later on, after I've roasted these for about 25 minutes in the oven,

 I'm going to add some green beans and maybe a little bit of broccoli just for the last 10 minutes.

 And what makes this so tasty is that I've mixed up some olive oil and balsamic vinegar,

 a little bit of rosemary, dried rosemary and dried thyme, a little bit of fresh peppercorn and sea salt.

 I've mixed this all together and now I'm just going to lather it on here.

 As it roasts in the oven at 425 degrees, it's going to be so flavorful when we take it out.

 I especially love the red pepper taste when they've been roasted in the oven.

 And again, we're going to roast this in the oven at 425 for about 25 minutes.

 And to keep it from sticking on the pan, I always just put foil on the pan

 and then I spray the foil with a little olive oil and then it doesn't stick

 And you probably want to know what the nutritional breakdown is here.

 Well, I've cut this recipe in half for today because it's just my husband and I,

 but this would be about four servings of vegetables, each serving 180 calories,

 4 grams of fiber which is so good for you and just 1 gram of saturated fat.

 and it's going to be so tasty, so flavorful with this balsamic vinegar

 that's just going to roast right on and then that rosemary and thyme,

 And I know a lot of you are trying to eat healthier and stay away from the processed foods.

 I'm going to save a little bit of this mixture to brush across the green beans

 Put it in the oven, take it out, 25 minutes later, add your green beans,

 cook for another 10 minutes and you're done and your family's going to love it.

 And look at all these fresh vegetables that you're going to be getting into your system.

 Just click on the Healthy Living tab and join me next time in Debbie's Divinely Healthy Kitchen.

 It's not supposed to be that long of a pause, but I don't want to go to effects on this

 Yeah, Sliverous theory per request of ZnowBright0608, thanks for the request man.

 So it sounds more busy than it is because it's got a delay echoing each note that's

 I turned the volume off because I don't want you to hear the delay.

 There's two hits on every string, but there's a pause in between each one.

 And when someone knocks on the rocking guitar lesson's door, my security guy is not here

 It goes bar the third fret on the E and A. Hit those two strings, hammer to the fifth

 Okay, this part is open E and A. First fret E and A. Third fret E and A. Fourth fret E

 But end it on the third fret instead of the fourth fret on that one.

 So I do have a client at the door, so I gotta wrap this one up quick.

 Make sure you subscribe to both channels, Rocking Guitar Lessons 1 and Rocking Guitar

 Watch my website, rockingguitarlessons.com, because it'll be here soon.

 If you want to do private lessons with me on Skype or Google Hangout, send me a friend

 Work on the things you want to help you get to the next level the fastest way.

 If you'd like to make a donation to this channel, take my videos, spread them on your Facebook,

 Hey guys, so today I'm going to be showing you a hairstyle that I sometimes wear to school

 It's just kind of a different hairstyle that you can use for lots of things.

 Okay, so the first thing I'm going to do is make my bangs, and if you don't have bangs,

 So for that, you're going to need either bobby pins or like a little clip like this, and

 So take a brush or a comb and take your bangs back with it like this, and you keep grabbing

 It depends on how big and thick you like your poofs to be, but I like mine to be kind of

 So you find the place where it looks the best and pin it right at the top of your head,

 And if your poofs don't stay, you can use hairspray, but mine usually stay fine, so

 Okay, so for this next part, you're going to need a hair elastic and a straightener

 But first, I'm going to take my hair elastic and put my hair into a messy bun that's going

 It's not high, it's not really low, it's kind of in the middle of your head.

 So I take my hair back, and I'm going to be turning around for the next part so you

 But first, you get all your hair into like a ponytail and take out some hairs right here.

 If they're long, that's fine, you're going to be curling them anyways, but I take usually

 Okay, so I'm going to take about this much over here and this much over here.

 And if you're like me and have some random baby hair that like stick to the back of your

 neck, you can just take a bobby pin and take them and you can just pin them under your

 Okay so now I have my bun, I'll show you different angles of it.

 So after your bun looks like that, you're going to take your hair straightener and you're

 I curl my hair with my straightening iron because I find that it's easier and it works

 better for my hair texture, but whatever thing you use to curl your hair, usually use that

 You put it at the top, flip the hair around, curl under, and pull.

 And then I'm going to take the top baby piece, clip up top, pull around, twist under, and

 You might look really freakish, but if you play with it a lot, it kind of smooths out

 If you leave it really messy in the back, it's kind of more casual, but if you want

 it very fancy, like if you're going out to dinner, it's a nice dinner, you can make your,

 you can straighten your hair first and then make your bun very smooth and hairspray it

 See these pieces right here, you can like pin those to your head so it's not as like

 You guys are asking for a lot of hair tutorials, so I wanted to show you this one.

 I wore this to school on Friday and everyone complimented it, so I'm sure if you wore it

 Rust prevention, fixing small scratches and chips, and even damage to larger surface areas

 But the first thing you need to do is diagnose your vehicle's damage.

 It's a fast and simple assessment, and it's just a simple walk around your vehicle, and

 something you should do once every 30 days to prevent any costly future body shop repairs.

 It has around 90,000 miles, and it's showing a little bit of wear.

 So what I'm going to do is take a quick walk around the vehicle and note any damaged areas.

 This vehicle is seven years old, so it is showing some signs of wear.

 On the bottom molding here, there's typical scrapes and chips, and this is a perfect large

 We already went through and verified the color code of this vehicle on Dupli-Color.com.

 Before any of the paint work starts, prep is the most important.

 After the car is dry, we'll follow it up by prepping the surface with Dupli-Color prep spray.

 We have our shop towels, and we have our 600-grit sandpaper, masking tape, and of course the

 I'm going to spray on the Dupli-Color prep spray, and what this is going to do is it's

 going to remove any of the tar, wax, dirt, anything that you didn't get off the vehicle

 You also want to make sure the wax is off of it because the paint won't stick to a waxy

 Like I said earlier, you can use household rubbing alcohol as well.

 Okay, after the prep spray is dry, the next step is to take the 600-grit sandpaper.

 Now depending upon the severity of the chip, I am taking 600-grit because of the chips here.

 A regular surface like this lower part here, we can use just a red Scotch-Brite pad.

 Since these chips are a little bit more severe, I'm going to have to sand them and feather

 I went through and finished sanding all the heavy chips with the 600-grit sandpaper.

 Then I went through, sanded all the other areas with the red Scotch pad.

 The next step is taking masking tape and your regular Sunday paper.

 We're going to mask off all the areas of the vehicle where we don't want to get paint on

 The final step before paint is applied is go over it one last time with prep spray or

 This is going to remove any sanding dust, any oils from your fingers from touching it,

 This will give it a good clean surface for the paint to adhere to.

 The filler primer is going to give the surface a nice even finish for the color coat to go

 You're also going to want to make sure you're in a well-ventilated area or have a mask.

 What this is going to do is help you get a feel of the can and that will help your paint

 Whenever spraying, just hold the can about 8 to 10 inches from the surface.

 We're going to usually do this in about 2 to 3 coats, enough to cover.

 You're going to want to give this about 20 to 30 minutes of dry time before you lay down

 As mentioned before, we already verified the color coat of this vehicle so we got the correct

 The nozzle on the Perfect Match paint system is the Easy Touch 360 Dial.

 It can spray in vertical and horizontal patterns by simply turning the front of the nozzle

 When spraying the color or really any paint, hold the can 8 to 10 inches from the surface

 The first coat is going to be your tack coat and then you'll follow up with about 2 to

 The clear coat is extremely important because that helps complete the exact color match

 Go ahead and start laying this down just like everything else, 2 to 3 coats.

 I'm Hilah, and today on Hilah Cooking, we're doing Christmas around the world in Mexico,

 We're going to cut the ends and then score them a little bit so when you put them in

 If you can't find these, you can find these easily at any Mexican store.

 I've got the hibiscus flowers, which are also pretty easy to find, but...

 In the meantime, you can wash all your fruit, cut it, and have it ready to put it in the

 Just going to let it cool down a little bit and we just kind of take all the skin off.

 And after we peel them, we're going to add them to the pot with everything else.

 No, we don't because if you leave them, they will become a little bitter.

 If you can find this, you can use brown sugar just to make it sweet.

 So just going to put this here and it's going to melt eventually at some point.

 So I'll put a lid on this and we'll just wait for this to boil?

 So these are the whole beans that we just pulled the dry shell and the little veins

 Because it's pain in the ass and you might cut off your finger.

 You usually add more than this but we couldn't really get that going so.

 And you said some people add raisins but that's not really your favorite.

 So this is good because you keep it non-alcohol and then when you have kids show up they can

 So we know it ended up taking a little bit longer than 15 minutes because you want to

 And this is something you could just kind of leave it warm all night and serve it to

 So first of all you're going to start with your square piece of paper and fold it in

 And then you're going to want to fold it in half again and then unfold it.

 And then you're going to want to fold both of the sides into the center.

 Then you're going to want to insert your finger into the flap and then flatten it out.

 And then you're going to want to flip it over and fold these flaps into the center.

 After that you're going to want to fold this corner up but only one layer, not both layers,

 And then you're going to want to fold this edge, just fold it up to the midpoint.

 And then you're going to want to fold up through that half point.

 Then you're going to want to flip it over and do the same thing but this time fold this corner up.

 And fold it from this corner diagonally so that the crease is from that corner to that corner.

 Now you're going to want to open up your, because you have a hole right here,

 you want to flatten out this little part until you get to the spot where you can put your hand or your fingers in and make it tuck.

 Hey YouTube, BattlesongAddict here, and today I will be doing a Battlesong tutorial for the move called the Index Rollover to Thumb Chaplet.

 Alright, so for this move, you want to get to this position right here.

 I'm just going to do two rollouts, so kind of like a horizontal opening.

 So, double rollout, and then instead of just flipping it up, I do a back flip.

 So, double rollout, and then instead of just flipping it up, I do a double rollout.

 The next part is I'm going to dip down and then throw the bite handle up.

 It's going to do a kind of a rollover over my index finger, and then I'm going to catch right here.

 And that's when we're going to want to do the next part of this move, which is a chaplain around my thumb right there.

 So it's going to come down, and then I'm going to use that to do a chaplain around my thumb.

 And then right here, what you're going to do, it's kind of like the vertical, the basic of vertical opening.

 So I'm going to put my middle finger in there and move my thumb.

 Then I'm going to flip up, flip down, move out my index finger, move it out of the way, and bring it up and catch.

 Alright, so one more time, double rollout, up, chaplain, after the chaplain, these come in, up, down, catch.

 I don't know if it will be for you, but I'm just, I'm not very good at that last part.

 Alright, so some tips, obviously, when you get here, the fight handle's coming up.

 And then also, also once you get to, sorry about that, once you get to the very last part,

 just don't forget that you need to take your thumb out and put your middle finger in there.

 And then come up, and it's just like the, the vertical, the basic vertical opening.

 Hey, this is Herman from J*** Force and you are right now at blender.com.

 So I'm just going to play some cr***y noises that we did on our new album Inhuman Rampage.

 Basically we make all kind of cr***y noises on the guitar and we give it kind of video

 So this one is from the song Through the Fire and Flames and just before the solo kicks

 It's actually cooler if you combine it with a ghost noise since Pac-Man is a bit pointless

 We're going to try to put Pac-Man and the ghost together just like the video game.

 But we're going to dive down and we're going to do the explosion of course.

 Pick these two notes and on the fifth fret on the D string and seventh on the G string.

 You pick those two and you turn the volume up with the whammy bar at the same time.

 Alright, so that was changing d*** and I guess skidding and crash and burn.

 One of my favourites that I like to do on stage and we got it in the song Through the

 Fire and the Flames at the end of the song we actually break the s***.

 Hey, I hope you guys had a good fun, you know, had a good laugh.

 You know, watching me make these kind of crazy noises and maybe you can learn it and I'm

 three easy delicious snacks for the new year and this week we're going to show you how

 To make the muffins you'll need 1 cup sorghum flour, 3 1⁄4 cup garbanzo flour, and 1⁄2

1 teaspoon cinnamon, 3 1⁄4 teaspoon baking powder, 3 1⁄4 teaspoon

In a large bowl mix together the sorghum flour, garbanzo flour, and flaxseed

If you don't have a fresh orange on hand you can use a tablespoon of orange

 in the dry ingredients a little bit at a time, stirring until they're well combined.

 make regular sized muffins scoop ¼ cup of the batter into each of the muffin cups.

 you've filled all the cups, put a little bit of water in each of the remaining cups.

 and then transfer them to a wire cooling rack to cool the rest of the way.

 Alright, this time I'm going to show you a really cool twist on the Eldridge knot and

 So anyhow, I'm going to show you exactly how to do that step by step.

 It's going to be tied with the little end, so it's going to be the long end.

 It's not going to move very much afterwards once you've got the tie all done up.

 So if it's just past your belly button, that's probably going to be just right.

 Alright we're going to take the big end, we're going to pinch it.

 And now feed it up through the front, over the top of the necktie and back down.

 Once we've got it to that, we're going to cross it over the back like that.

 Over the top, and now cross over the back with that little end.

 And this is where it starts to look like and feel like the Eldridge Knot.

 Now we're going to feed the little end up through this loop that I just have loosened.

 And it's going to get tucked underneath in the back of your necktie.

 So what we want here is very similar to the Eldridge Knot, we want these layers to start

 We're going to wrap the little one up and through that same side again.

 We can keep it a little bit loose and then cross over the back like that.

 Now we're going to take this little end and feed it up and through.

 So I want this part to be tight and covering up any of the necktie that's crossed over

 And I don't want this part overlapping any of my other layers here.

 Now this loose end, we're going to tuck this around our necktie eventually and then just

 Alright, now holding on to the knot, pulling down on the big end we can cinch it up to

 So I'm just making sure that I want this part of my necktie covering up the layers in behind.

 So if that's the kind of thing you're looking for then please subscribe.

 There's a place in your house where it's cool to chill, get some me time or even cook a meal,

 it's your kitchen mofo, ain't no time to slack so just grab yourself a penny and let's work

 that ass, if you're scared of this place, ain't no need to bother, just lay down your

 Hi guys how's it going welcome to my virgin kitchen today I am going to be super lazy

 hence the t-shirt Mr lazy right there, I'm going to be showing you how to make a BBQ

 chicken bake, I'm going to rush through this video so quick because I'm feeling lazy I

 just want to make it, I want to eat my dinner, I want to go to bed, I had half an hour of

 sleep last night I'm kind of tired so we're just going to make this and hopefully you'll

 try it, it's based on, I don't know if you've ever been to Domino's and they do this Texas

 BBQ pizza, it's kind of like that but putting it into a bake, yeah bake.

 Here are the ingredients hit pause on the video now and write them all down but basically

 we're going to start on making the funky chickeny mixture with all the vegetables and some BBQ

 sauce, some Caesar dressing and some BBQ seasoning, you're going to love it, I'm going to love

 Ok then first of all I have got myself two chicken breasts here which have been cubed

 easy peasy and this is four slices of bacon into little squares as well so kind of like

 cubes but squares flat ones you're on us, ok so what we're going to do is grab a mixing

 bowl like this and if you just push both your chicken like this in and also your bacon like

 that ok so that is in there and what we need to do is season it ok so I've got some BBQ

 seasoning I'm going to add that on right now, lazy, ok so I've got myself some basic

 BBQ seasoning here you don't have to do that you could make your own you could get cumin

 seeds and garlic powder just buy some BBQ seasoning if you're feeling lazy, key word

 today lazy, right ok so about a tablespoon of that is going in like so not too much not

 too little just want to get enough coating on it then grab your spatula and stir it all

 Ok so it's been about 3 or 4 minutes of constant stirring that seasoning is hugging it all

 now it's all nice and orangey it's got a little orangey tang to it it's kind of like fake

 tannic which is lazy you need to be out in the sun on the beach getting a real sun tan

 Alright put this mixture to one side for just a minute ideally if you want if you're not

 being lazy you can put it in the fridge with some cling film on to really get that seasoning

 hit home yeah so yeah I'm just going to put mine right up there and we're going to start

 Ok so we've got a funky oval oven dish here what we're going to do is place it there easy

 peasy just place it down lazy ok vegetables yellow pepper green pepper and chopped onion

 nice and rough what I'm going to do is just push them in like so any sort of way you like

 really that onion slipped out I'm just going to pick that up there scatter it all around

 so mix it all around like so yeah my little pepper jumped out but you didn't see that.

 Ok so it's all looking like that it's nice and mixed and random together there's not

 too many onions on one side it's all random baby let's get ourselves some caesar dressing

 around about 200ml of caesar dressing you can make your own if you want but I'm lazy

 today lazy ok let's pour that over the top like so get it all nice and coated.

 Ok so that's on there and it's not looking very barbequey at the moment in fact smell

 it it's very sort of cheesy and garlicky but that's what you want all those flavours are

 going to mingle in there we need to add some barbeque sauce same amount of caesar salad

 sauce as barbeque sauce ok let's get it on there I'm going to squirt this in here we

 go wow check that out ok that will do and it needs to mingle so grab yourself your wooden

 spoon that you use for your veg like this and just give it a little stir stir it all

 Ok so I've stirred that through there and it's turned into a funky deep barbeque colour

 so if you want it more barbequey and tangy add some white wine vinegar in there or just

 even simply lazily some more barbeque sauce or alternatively some more caesar salad dressing

 if you want to calm it down ok it's going to give it a really cheesy kick and you're

 going to love it so into here we're going to add our chicken and bacon we're going to

 Yep so here is our coated bacon and chicken from just a minute ago all we're going to

 do is push that in with my spoon like that and it's just going to plop on the top there

 so we just push it around like that and what we want to do is coat it get it all covered

 in this barbeque sauce and vegetable mixture ok so get it all around there oh yeah.

 Ok so that is all thoroughly mixed in there like so let me just show you that looking

 good so we're going to top it off with a final bit of cheese if you want you can add some

 sort of herbs on there or maybe some ground black pepper just scatter the cheese on there

 nice and generously like that oh my goodness that is going to look so good we're going

 to plonk it in our oven now it's actually going to go in there for about 45 minutes

 but when it comes out that chicken is going to be uber tender lazy.

 Ok so I'm now putting our barbeque cheesy mixture oh my goodness this is going to be

 so good into the oven about half way round just give it a little turn so it cooks nice

 and evenly and the cheese all melts so let's close this oven shall we in that goes there

 and what I'm going to make alongside it is just simply some rustic mashed potato with

 some chives and some creme fraiche which again is very lazy I've got my pan of water just

 sat here actually which I might drink on but I've got about 20 minutes to kill so I'm just

 going to have a power nap and I'll see you in 20 minutes thank you goodbye.

 Ok then folks that has been 20 minutes I've span round the bake thing and it's smelling

 like barbeque heaven right now you're like this oh my god oh my god every time I'm inhaling

 Ok so right here I've got a pan of water that was boiling literally just a moment ago and

 I started adding in my potatoes I'm using baking potatoes and I'm cutting them up into

 little slices like that just so they cook quicker I'm also leaving the skin on as well

 because I like mashed potato with my skin on there so give them a good wash or peel

 them if you want ok so I'm just plonking them in there should take just under 20 minutes

 bring it to the boil nice and soft mash it with some creme fraiche chives serve it with

 Ok my potatoes are nice and soft now so I'm going to take them off the heat and drain

 them like so let me just show you that wicked so they are totally mashable let's mash them

 up lazy style so just mash away like so ok so grab a knob of butter and just slide that

 in nice dollop of creme fraiche in that goes oh wow right on top of the butter let's get

 some chives yeah chives yeah still have to use chives if you don't want to maybe some

 parsley but I'm just going to get some there and make some snips and put them in there

 like that oh my goodness try not to cut off your fingers teeny weeny bit of ground black

 pepper oh my goodness stir that all through now and you're going to love it yeah so I'm

 just working this through now it's nice and smooth you can get it almost sort of to a

 liquidy texture the more creme fraiche and butter you add but I'm going to have mine

 Ok so our potatoes are done check it out you sort of go into it like that in the pan

 it's got a nice rustic feel to it it's all sort of a little teeny bit chunky you didn't

 mash it too much but you're pushing out all that skin and the chives and the taste of

 the creme fraiche and the butter you're going to love that in there just got the bake out

 wow it smells good in here nice crispy brown topping on that where the cheese has melted

 I'm going to eat it right now mash barbecue bake together lazy time.

 Alright here we are then on a nice funky dish there let's get some mashed potato on first

 of all because I'm feeling naughty wow a nice big old helping of that oh my goodness

 let's just sit that on there like that wow ok let's get it on there let's get the bake

 there right now ok so I'm just spooning that on there like that now my cheese layer has

 gone to the bottom so you're going to have added cheesy bonus at the bottom if you're

 a surgeon like me so just grab yourself some more if you want just scatter it on the top

 like that and my goodness that is lazy and it's going to taste good.

 Ok then guys sorry it's been a little bit of a short punchy video this one not too quirky

 but I just wanted to show you how easy it is to put this together it smells incredible

 in here and trust me just making that mashed potato on its own is good so it's all about

 That chicken is really tender oh my god I just found a part of my mouth and the tanginess

 is there it's good the caesar dressing has done enough to take the little nip out of

 that but it's still definitely barbecue I am loving that it's so soft and subtle and

 just chucks it together lazy so if I can make that absolutely anyone in the world can have

 a go for yourself let me know how you get on I'll see you again next time yeah cheers.

 It's fun, but it's not so dramatic that you couldn't wear it out.

 Whatever you want to come up with, just get inspired by the picture that you see on the main page.

 Before you do your look, you want to make sure you use a good eyeshadow primer.

 Take any kind of flat, inexpensive brush and put on a blue color on your lid.

I haven't used this yet because I just got it at the cosmetics company outlet.

 Those are your three options, but I'm going to use the Coastal Scents one today.

 Like I said, any kind of inexpensive flat shader brush will do.

 Staying just on the lid, underneath the crease, just kind of sweep that on there.

 Now, I do have some eye makeup on because I just did an Angelina Jolie look.

 I'm just going over what I already have on with this base and it'll work just fine.

 You guys won't have to worry about that because I won't be having eyeshadow underneath, I don't think.

 To clean up the edges, just take a q-tip and wipe off that edge.

 I'm going to use MAC's 239 and the 217, but honestly you could use just the 217 if you wanted.

 Again, I know I'm saying this a lot, but if you had to pick one brush to get,

 I would get the one that looks like this and that's the MAC 217.

 I promise I'm not a MAC snob, but this is the only brand that has this brush and this brush is magic.

 MAC should pay me for all the brushes that I probably sold for them at 217.

 So MAC, if you're watching, I want free 217 brushes because I've brought in a lot of income for these babies.

 Anyways, take your flat shader brush and we're going to use Urban Decay's Deluxe Palette.

 This is my favorite palette, well my second favorite, but it has beautiful vibrant colors.

 So take that on your flat brush and just pat it over your base.

Don't swipe it yet because you don't want fallout and you also want to make sure that color sticks to that base.

 And I do have a video coming of my favorite things, so keep an eye out for that.

 I put a lot of time and effort in coming up with stuff like that, or for that video, so just keep an eye out for it.

 Okay, go in with Peace and that's that really pretty aqua color.

 If you do the opposite, you're going to get more purple blue than vibrant true blue, really.

 And you're going to come out here a bit because in the picture, it's kind of a cat eye, I guess.

 I'm going to use the color Shag, but I'm also going to mix it with Honey to get a really true coppery gold color.

 And it's up to you if you just want to use one color or the other.

 And we're going to blend this above that blue that we just put on.

 Same brush, go right over that Shag we just put on, and boom, you get some really bright copper color going there.

 If you want, if it needs to be blended up here, don't put any color up there unless it's something that's close to your skin tone

 Just take any kind of fluffy dome brush and just kind of blend out above that.

 I'm going to intensify that golden color a little bit more, so a little bit more Shag.

 Then you want to go over that blue color again just to intensify it some more, so pick up some more Peace.

 Again, this is the eye that you're going for versus this shape.

 For my lashes and whatnot, I just put some black gel liner here.

 And yes, I do sell these in the store, but I did a little blurb on that in my Angelina Jolie video.

 These, I'm completely honest, these are my absolute favorite eyelashes in the whole wide world.

 But they're number 305, so they're the half lashes, and they give your eyes that kind of authentic look.

 If you have this Urban Decay palette, it definitely will be a good look for you.

 If you have brown eyes especially, it's really going to make your eyes pop

 because that contrast between the blue and the brown is just really pretty.

Pull out those bright blue shadows and golds and go for this really pretty look.

 but they're thinking maybe they'll continue on for even longer than that

 We should let it cool for a few minutes, like to room temperature.

 And after that, what we're going to do is just arrange eggplants.

 We have rice kibbeh, we have potato kibbeh, we have wheat kibbeh.

 About 40 years ago when I first got married, I got interested in coffee and coffee roasting

 Eventually we found people here and we taught them this business because this gourmet business

 We're using this particular machine, roasting machine, now about two years.

 There's about 100 variables going on here and we have to figure out how to get the type

 They're very careful roasters and the coffee is handled properly.

 We're really spending at least three generations in that plant.

 Our core business has remained constant so I assume that the people that like our style

 But wherever you go in the world where coffee is done, a manufacturer, you'll find this

 A second makes a difference in the way coffee will come out if you're going for a specific

 If you're roasting to darker levels as most people do, then it's not as critical what

 When you're riding the razor's edge, any little slip gives you a cut.

 We've inserted the same amount of ground coffee from these trays into these cups.

 And I'm not only stirring it, but I'm sniffing it to see if there's any problems with any

 It's just we're trying to select what I think epitomizes what we're trying to do.

 You only get the quality nuances in coffee if you roast it on the light side.

 But every afternoon around 4 o'clock when I'm beginning to wane, I go downstairs to our cafe and I pour myself a coffee.

 Very loyal to us in the sense that this is the way they think coffee should taste.

 So if you want to get coffee that's almost out of the roaster, visit us on Tuesday morning and ask for the previous day's roast.

 I am going to give my friend Yancey a luscious twist out using Camille Rose Naturals products.

 Her signature style is the wash and go, so I want to show her that she can achieve the

 same beautiful definition and volume with a twist out on her gorgeous coils.

 First I am going to shampoo with the Sweet Ginger Cleansing Rinse, which is formulated

 with castor oil, ginger for growth stimulation, and aniseed oil, which is used to cleanse

 This cleanser is sulfate free, making it great for color treated hair.

 Now I am going to apply the Camille Rose Naturals Algae Remove Deep Conditioner and detangle

 This super rich conditioner is infused with cocoa and mango butters, which are natural

 It also has blue green algae, which are packed with vitamin B and vegetable protein to make

 There's lots of other awesome ingredients in this one like Manuka Honey, Jojoba Seed

 Oil, Primrose, Aloe Vera Juice, Peppermint Oil, Coconut Oil, Rosehip Oil, and Hemp Seed

 Basically, this conditioner is designed for intense moisture, repair, scalp health, and

 I was able to very easily finger detangle with this conditioner and got through Yancey's

 As a side note, I am super proud of Yancey for taking such good care of her hair in the

 Very little shedding going on and her hair wasn't completely dried out when she arrived.

 Now I am going to cover with a plastic cap and have Yancey sit under my hooded dryer

 Now I am going to set Yancey using three Camille Rose Naturals products in an LOC type fashion.

 First I will smooth in the new Coconut Water Leave-In Detangling Hair Treatment, which

 is going to install lots of essential oils and vitamins to protect the hair after styling.

 It has coconut water and oil, grapeseed oil, hemp seed oil, and flaxseed oil, which is

 great for elasticity improvement because it is packed with fatty acids.

 Next I am going to apply a bit of the Coco Nibs and Honey Ultimate Growth Serum, focusing

 It's packed with virgin omelet, coconut and olive oils, biotin, macadamia oil, organic

 honey, and cocoa beans, which is a superfood rich in sulfur, an agent that helps build

 This oil is super lightweight, more than I expected, and it smells like all kinds of love.

 And last I am going to apply the Almond Jive Twisting Butter and use my Denman brush to

 Those curls could very well just be dried into a perfect wash and go situation, and

 Yancey was incredibly impressed herself, but we shall carry on to the twist.

 I am two strand twisting medium sized sections of hair and then coiling the ends.

 If your ends don't stay securely coiled on their own, you can use small perm rods to

 The Almond Jive Twisting Butter is a thick, rich, creamy setting product that has almond

 milk, rice bran oil, pumpkin seed oil, caster seed oil, and olive oil to infuse the hair

 There's also aloe leaf juice for soft moisture and some bark extract for a little flexible

 This cream is going to give lots of hydration to the hair and give it hold, making it perfect

 The two strand twist out is probably one of the easiest styles for any natural to do because

 The trick is finding the right product combination to give the twist lots of body, shine, hold,

 That's a lot to ask for, but the combination of the Coconut Water Style Setter, the Coco

 Nibs and Honey Serum, and the Almond Jive Twisting Butter are surely going to do all

 After all of the hair is twisted, Nancy is going under my hooded dryer for 45 minutes

 I can literally feel the moisture as I am pulling these apart, but it isn't in any way

 The products absorb beautifully to give Nancy a perfect blend of definition and moisture.

 Nancy's natural texture is a 3B right on the brink of 3C, so a two strand twist out is

 I love how soft her hair is and that it is full of natural volume and body.

 After separating each piece, I am going to use my pick to lift the roots and continue

 Total style time was around 2 hours and 15 minutes, and Nancy will treat this like her

 wash and go and sleep in the pineapple and just fluff in the morning.

 You can find all of these products at CamilleRoseNaturals.com and the Algae Renew Conditioner, Coconut

 Water Leave-In, and the Almond Jai Butter are available at your local Target stores.

 You can find more information and links to everything used in the about section below

 I'm here in my living room working out on my fitness trampoline just like I do every

 I just wanted to show people who are beginners a few moves so that you don't feel intimidated

 and you get started and you'll feel some differences in your body from it too.

 You can do them for an hour and 12 minutes, two hours, however long you want.

 If you're an advanced bouncer, then you can probably still benefit from these because

 Of course, you put your favorite music on or the TV on and you get going.

 When I first wake up in the morning, first thing I do is get water and coffee.

 I'll start out just by warming up, going back and forth, one foot, then the other.

 I go both ways because it's better for your brain to go both ways.

 A lot of people forget to breathe in almost all kinds of workouts.

 You probably may be breathing through your nose, but breathe through your nose, inhale,

 Now, this one, you can really get your heart pumping and you can do it again.

 As I said before, as long as you want, as short as you want, you're just going to rotate

 Now if you're uncomfortable going in a circle because it starts to make you off balance,

 And if you start to get off balance, number one trick, bend your knees.

 So bend your knees, shoulders up, look forward, and just get used to jumping.

 If you've never done this before, a little bit goes a long way.

 This is one of my favorite moves because it gets me out of breath if I just do it for

 And also, another little tidbit about Alzheimer's is if you eat a lot of sugar, not good for

 And that's all you've got to do to get going on a fitness trampoline.

 I wonder if I could do any exercises with a trampoline over my head.

 What I love about these jump sports is you can have them just like this and they stay

 so incredibly easy to make and they turn out really cute and delicious.

 the cherries have stems on them because the stem is going to be the tail of the

In a microwave-safe bowl, melt some dipping chocolate in the microwave.

 almond bark but you could also use semi-sweet or even milk chocolate

Now dip the whole cherry into the chocolate by holding on to the stem

 still soft and gooey, take a Hershey Kiss and gently press the bottom of it into

 two sliced almond pieces between the chocolate kiss and the cherry to make

 icing, pipe on the eyes and the nose and you can use any color you like but I'm

 Line a baking sheet because the stem is going to be the tail of the mouse.

Now this is the only cake that I make that calls for box anything because typically I'm not fond of box anything, but for some reason this cake is really good.

 So, it calls for a box of dark chocolate cake mix, pudding, oil, three eggs, 16 ounces of sour cream, pardon me, two cups of semi-sweet chocolate chips, but I'm going with the dark chocolate chips since I couldn't find a dark cake mix.

 And it calls for Kahlua and of course you need to flour your bundt pan.

I don't really like the baker's joy so I go with the old-fashioned way of greasing and flouring as messy as it is.

So, that's the ingredients and I'll be back in a minute with them.

As a matter of fact, I broke a plastic spatula getting the chocolate chips folded in.

We're going to put it in the bundt pan and we're going to put it in a 350 degree oven and I'll be back.

You cook it one hour or until it springs back when you touch it.

We're going to let it cool for 10 minutes and then we'll take it out of the bundt.

I turned it over on a wire rack after 10 minutes of it cooling in the pan and there's the Kahlua, chocolate Kahlua bundt cake.

 And today we're here with Renato, who is a hair stylist who's going to teach us how to

 Is there something we should be looking for when we're buying curling irons?

 With a curling iron, you want to, again, ask your local stylist what would be suitable

 And the size is important, and the handle is important as well.

 There are different types of handles that you can use, but for commercial use or residential

 use, this type of handle is probably the easiest for somebody like yourself to use.

 Again, with finer hair, you probably don't need to have it on as high.

 So with Katrina's hair, we just have it on a medium heat, and she'll get a nice curl

 When you're curling the hair, just be very careful because it's very hot.

 You don't want to get it too close to the skin because you will burn yourself.

 Again, the clips are really a great tool for you to use and have when you're doing your

 So I'm going to show you just how to section the hair and where to hold it, and then wrap

 You want to open it up and grab the hair and just twirl it around your iron, just like

 You don't want to be close to the scalp because we're not really doing a real tight, wavy

 Whenever you're curling your hair or doing your hair, whether it's a flat iron or a curling

 So when you do use a hot tool like a curling iron, you're not damaging the hair.

 There are times that I've seen clients have come in and their hair is burnt.

 Hi guys, today we're going to be making a really easy summer dish.

Alright, so we're going to begin by getting all of our vegetables

 off some of the zucchini to make the zucchini more stable while I'm slicing.

 slice the cylinder shape or the round vegetables makes it a lot easier for the

That way, the vegetable won't run all around on the cutting board

 Probably by now, you've figured out that you can use any of your favorite

 like this because when they're fresh, in their raw state, they're very sweet.

 Time to give our vegetables a nice coat of extra virgin olive oil.

 great zing and zest to the recipe, in addition to the fact that we're going to

So it's really small and it's great for recipes like this because it

 to get it for a few months and I finally got it not too long ago.

 are some downsides to it and I'll be willing to share those with you if you

 nice and fluffy and it's just a little bigger than it was in its original

 vinaigrette, which is equal parts fresh squeezed lemon juice and extra virgin

 olive oil, a little salt, a little pepper, and we're just gonna give it a quick

I'm making the vinaigrette at this point because I want to go ahead and

 This recipe is not only easy, but it also is inexpensive and it travels really

 up into oblivion, but just a nice bite-sized dice where people can still

 I'm gonna roll them into each other like a little small cigar and just chop

 Lastly, I'm gonna add some grape tomatoes that have been cut in half and just give

 recipes and a whole lot more can be found at GDCeasoning.com, and I'll see

 All I'm really doing is going grocery shopping so I will take you with me.

 I went for a run and I was really warm so that's why I chose to wear a tank top and

 shorts but then I also knew that the aircon in the grocery store would be crazy because

 I got it back when I was living in England so quite a long time ago.

 I love the really pale aqua colour and I just love their t-shirts in general.

 They wear really well and if you can get them on sale, go for it because they are worth

 And then I just have my white jean shorts from Jeans Warehouse that I purchased recently.

 I love the way they are giving a little bit here to widen the cuff so I'm actually just

 And then I have my flip flops from Sam Adelman and these have the zebra print and the gold

 For accessories, I'm wearing my aqua raksha worn long and then I have the bracelet detached

 from tira raksha, my silver bangle, my gold bangle and then some little homemade earrings

 So the reason that we're driving a convertible in all my vlogs with the top up in Hawaii

 And then finally today I was just like messing around in the trunk and just moved things

 around because if the plastic, there's like a plastic sliding piece of sheeting in the

 So this is a breezy vlog and we're just going grocery shopping.

 And we are at the Time Supermarket, which is just like a local one in the area.

 Anyway, I'm just in the grocery store and Clareton is doing nothing for me.

 It was like just the same as normal, except it gave me a headache.

 And we'll see how that goes because it just kind of sucks to have red monster eyes and

 It's just such a novelty to be able to get that at the grocery store.

 This is just so much easier than having to go to the liquor store.

 If you don't know that in Canada, you have to go to a special store to get liquor.

 We have capers for piccata sauce, wine, more wine, and more wine for the holidays.

 Then we have some coconut milk for curry, pecorino, mascarpone cheese, this is to make

 I never eat them because it's really not the healthiest, but I made an exception for the

 Then I have some poke over there, papaya of course, eggs because I'm going to make popovers

 at some point, guava juice for boyfriend, and then my mom got a pork roast.

 Tutu, exciting, and then of course I have my allergy meds and my mom's hair dye.

 Hey everyone, so I am cooking dinner tonight and I thought I would check in with you and

 So, my mom and I really like yams in our curry or sweet potatoes, whatever you like to call

 So I'm just stir frying some in some oil with a little salt to keep it from splattering.

 Until they're pretty much cooked through, and then I'm going to cook all of my other

 I also have some Asian rice cooking, and then I'll show you how to put together the rest

 This is quite important to develop the flavors and really kind of get close to that authentic

 And then I have my cooked veggies removed off to the side, some coconut milk prepared,

 then I'm going to get the help of my mom to chop up some fish, which I will eventually

 And then I'm going to add a dash of fish sauce as well when my sauce comes together.

 I certainly sometimes make it without, but it does kind of bring it to the next level

 So if you have it and you can get your hands on it and you don't mind using it, then I

 I combined the coconut milk with the curry, added a dash of fish sauce, and I now have

 Poaching in the curry, and it's almost done poaching, but you can see there's still a

 As soon as I feel like everything is fully cooked, I will add my vegetables to warm them

 I'm going to post any details that I think you might find helpful in making the recipe

 So what it is basically is that I have all my hair swept to one side and then I try to

 do a huge flat twist here and then I stop somewhere here and then I took hair from the

 This is very easy to achieve and all you will need for this hairstyle will be a few hair

 So I think I use maybe two or three in my hair but depending on the length of your hair

 So if your hair is short all you have to do is to do the twist and then pin, do the twist

 So if you'd like to know how to do this hairstyle go ahead and grab your accessories and I will

 So what we're going to do is to start by sweeping all our hair to one side like this.

 Then what you're going to do is to take a small portion of your hair from the front

 like this and then take another portion from here and put it over like this.

 Then make sure, make an X, make sure you sweep your hair so that it is very neat.

 Then you go ahead and pick up a little more and then bring the other one over, sweep some

 Don't worry if you have hair sticking out, you can fix that after.

 Then go ahead, take some more here, try to take up very small portions at a time.

 Bring it over like this, comb your hair and then go ahead and take up some more again,

 We're going to go again, take some here, bring it over like this, go again, take some here.

 So when I've gotten to this point, it's quite difficult to take more off my hair so then

 what I start doing is I start wrapping the hair around like this because now it's too

 thick for me to do the flat twist so I'm just wrapping, oops my earring fell out, let's

 Okay, and then what I did was I used a pin to try and secure it somewhere here, there's

 Okay, so next what you want to do is to bring this portion of the hair over like this and

 then take some here from here and bring it over like this and then use a pin and secure

 You can use another one to ensure that it is very secure because you don't want it to

 So now this here that you have right here, all you're going to do is to tuck it somewhere

 And then these small ones, all you're going to do is to put them in, the short ones, sorry

 So like the ones here, just take your pin, go ahead, secure it here, oops.

 So the ones that are sticking out, just ensure that you secure them with pins.

 So this is the completed hairstyle and I will go ahead and leave you with a 360.

 I will have pictures at the end as usual and for more pictures, please go ahead and

 check out my blog, junglebarbie.bloxsmart.com and friend me on Facebook which I'll have

 the link in the info box and follow me on Twitter at JungleBarbie1 and thank you so

 We're going to be learning how to blend using an acrylic block.

 You can use a container for a scrapbook kit, not scrapbook, sorry, stamp kit.

 I like the acrylic block because I find that it's really easy to take the ink off after

 So what we're going to start is we're going to take E33 and we're just going to put some

 And then taking it, I'm sorry this is not E33, this is E37, and then we're going to

 And again we're coloring our little circles that we're very used to.

 And hopefully, yeah, you can really see how that outer line is a lot more pronounced.

 Now you want to be careful that you do know that you are making a shadow, but you're doing

 It's literally called sand and I find that this is another really flexible color if you're

 That's because it literally works with everything from sand to horses to cats to dogs to really

 Now this really works great when you don't have an in-between color.

 For instance with this, I don't have an E35 and an E37 on its own is way, way too dark.

 So without having to buy an extra marker, I'm able to get another color from markers

 And like I have said many times, these are not inexpensive markers.

 These are very expensive and therefore I believe strongly in getting the most out of each and

 I know that we talk about this a lot, which is basically that in some shapes and animals

 And I'm going to be using this E37, which is what we were using on our acrylic block.

 And hopefully you will be able to see how much darker it is in reality without getting

 You can really see how much we are diluting it when we do our acrylic block technique.

 I first learned how to do the acrylic block actually with EK markers.

 Now I'm going to do the same thing with, sorry this is two different colored tops,

 So you can really see how, even if the last number is the same, how much darker the color

 is in the E27 because in the gray scale it has less of a number.

 So I'm going to take my marker and do the same thing that I did for that, for the shadow

 This is actually for a Gina K challenge, which is going to be to create my scene.

 It's going to be a cute little card for maybe a little boy who's not feeling so well.

 This video is about how to install shock socks or seal savers onto WP forks.

 This is just for the fork guard that fits on the front of the fork.

 It keeps that guard from wearing a hole in the outer fork tube.

 But when you put the shock socks on that doesn't need to be there.

 If you leave it there it doesn't have enough clearance between the shock sock and the fork

 But you just stick a screw driver underneath there and take another one and pry it forward.

 You can see that's the groove I'm talking about that I used for the pry point.

 If the forks are still on the bike you can just cut this off at this point.

 You can just take a pair of side cutters and just cut it in half and pull it off the fork.

 You can put the shock sock on or steel series, whatever brand you prefer.

 I put the long one on first, stretch it around, and I slide this down a little bit.

 When I put on the second one I push this over with my thumb, pull this over, and then push

 this one over, pull this over, so that it's on nice and secure.

 a cup of sugar, a quarter teaspoon of nutmeg, and a quarter teaspoon of cinnamon.

 I like the bread hard because that way it soaks up the stuff better.

I'm gonna spray it with a nonstick, grease it with a nonstick spray.

 but I went somewhere and to the store and it's been soaking for three hours which is fine.

 It's five zero minutes at 350 and bake it and it's gonna be great.

 salted a little bit because here in the United States you can get unsalted butter but it's not

 soon as it melts very quickly, as soon as this melts down, I will come back with you.

 I forgot to put, I'm devastated, I forgot to put raisins in here.

 Starts in the key of D. D natural has two sharps in it, F sharp and C sharp.

 As a matter of fact, there's no instruments at all, no music at all.

 Now, to actually start this out, there isn't an introduction so to speak, but you're going

 So, it's important that as a musician, you give them that one note, a D. You're just

 D, D, D, D. Give them that note and the choir will get that note and they'll start in on

 When the band actually comes in, you're playing a D major suspended chord.

 D, G, A and D, left hand is on A. You're going to hit that two times, twice.

 So, one more time, just from the beginning, just to kind of show you how they go.

 So, once we hit those suspended chords, when we're ready to come in, let's start with the

 Right hand, when we're on D, do a D flat major, D, F sharp, A. Add this E.

 Left hand goes to B. Bring the right hand back to that D major chord with the added E.

 When the left hand goes to G, right hand goes up to this G major seventh.

 Once you get to that F sharp, right hand is going to do E, G sharp, A sharp.

 What can you eat for cheap as a dessert that is quick and easy to make?

 I was thinking anyway, I was thinking how about we make some brownies.

 I wanted to take a poor man's approach to it and an approach that is actually pretty

 Cook them on the propane because propane makes them taste so good.

 Da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da.

 Da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da, da.

 I don't know about you, but this is adding just a little bit more to it.

 So, if you'd like, head over to InvincibleProductions.net to get the recipe.

 Hey Cooks and Gamblers, I'm Debbie Wong and you're watching Debbie Wong's Walking Gong.

So the next time you guys see me, I'm going to be kicking it in Shanghai.

 So in honor of my trip to China and this boiling hot weather, I'm going to be making one of my favorite Chinese salads.

I'm not talking about those Chinese chicken salads from the 1980s

 with the grilled chicken and the crumbly noodles on top and the sesame dressing.

 I'm talking about what the Chinese people call Lum Chai, which literally translates to cold dishes.

 One of my favorite Chinese cold dishes is Pai Huang Gua, which literally means bashed cucumbers.

 This is one of those things you can have as a starter for your Chinese food or alongside your food

I don't know if this is the mortar or the pestle, but you know, it's the, that thing.

And you're going to get these wonderful crevices, nooks and crannies

 So now I have these beautifully rough cut, jagged cucumber pieces.

 Cucumbers have a lot of excess water, so I'm going to put on some salt to draw out all that liquid

 So while the cucumber is in the fridge, it's the perfect time to do our dressing.

 I prefer not to put the peppercorns themselves in there, just because I don't really like the numbing effect it has on the tongue.

 Then I rinsed them for a good minute, just to get the excess salt off.

 Petland's Critter Care is brought to you in part by Nutrients Pet Foods, online at nutrients.com.

Now Robert, I was just telling you that I've never had, of all the pets I've had, I've never actually had a pet fish, so you're really going to have to help me out with this one.

 But I do know that keeping your pet's area clean is extremely important.

 Well, it is really important because fish live in water and that's what they breathe and so the quality of the water is really important for maintaining their health.

 And what we're going to do today is I'm going to show you how to do partial water change in your aquarium that will be quick and easy and won't have water everywhere and it's far easier to maintain an aquarium than a lot of people think.

 So what we're going to do is use our gravel cleaning vacuum and also you want to make sure you have a towel handy because a towel is something that you're going to be using to wipe up that little bit of water that you spill.

 We want to have a nice clean bucket that is going to be safe to put water in from the tap and then we want to have water conditioner for when we replace the water.

We just pop it in the tank, open it up and you can get it going.

 It's even got a little valve on it so you just shake it up and down like that.

 Now I'm going to be pumping water out and if I stick that down into the gravel, you can see all the dirt that comes out.

 You don't need to worry about getting everything out of an aquarium out of your gravel but it is good to get that detritus out of there because it does make your water quality deteriorate.

 Now does this get dirty because the water is stagnant or fairly stagnant or why does it get so dirty?

 The water gets dirty just because we've got live fish in there and we're feeding them and they're eating and they're pooping and some of it gets caught up in the filter but a lot of it gets broken down into the gravel.

 It's very important that we have a good gravel bed in the bottom of our aquarium because that holds stuff, you know, holds stuff breaks down into the gravel and if you've got a very thin layer of gravel then your water quality won't be as stable.

 So a good gravel bed is very important for the stability and health of your aquarium.

 Well, the other thing that we're going to do then is when we replace the water we're going to make sure that we use a water conditioner and that makes the water more fish friendly for us.

 It takes out chlorine and chloramines and it also has aloe in it so it helps to reduce the stress on our fish of the new water.

 We're also going to use a product called Cycle which is a beneficial bacteria supplement.

 Our aquarium has high levels of beneficial bacteria in it that uses oxygen and it breaks down fish waste and so we need to have a good population.

 We need good healthy bacteria to break down all the fish waste and stuff.

 And the other thing that we can do is use a product called Waste Control.

 We can add that to the water and that will help make our filter work a lot more efficiently and effectively.

 It has lots of oxygen in it but it also has chlorine and some places have chloramines and stuff.

 And if you're not 100% sure about something, always good to ask questions and do your research.

 So get down to your favorite pet store and talk to the fish guy there.

 Pet Labs Critter Care is brought to you in part by Nutrients Pet Foods.

Well, today I'm going to show you how to cook up a nice piece of

 So for this, all you're going to need is some olive oil, some salt and some pepper.

 sure it's nice and deep red color because if it's not that color, that means it's not

 cook it in, we want it nice and hot because we want it sizzling when we apply it.

 forgot to mention, you also want your steak to be about 2 centimeters or just under an

 a half to 2 and a half minutes on each side because you still want it a bit pink and red

Right, I'll just put this little piece of green stuff on the plate

 cooked and I tell you what, it smells absolutely amazing and I really just can't wait to give

 Hi guys, today we are going to show you how to make amazing Murgh Makhani which is butter

 chicken or Murgh Makhani which for some strange reason the British call Chicken Tikka Masala.

It consists of us making Chicken Tikka and then the Makhani sauce into

 you hang your yogurt it is better because it takes... Neena what do you mean hang the

And then I am going to add my spices which is one teaspoon of red

 chilli powder, half a teaspoon of garam masala, one and a half teaspoon of salt and one teaspoon

 marination will go on to the chicken pieces and the chicken has been washed, pat dried and then

And she is very dangerous when she has got the karchi in her hand.

We are going to add the butter to the pan and a drop of oil so the butter doesn't burn.

 In goes two teaspoons of ginger, chopped ginger, very finely, nicely chopped.

And when it's brown after a few seconds in goes two tins of tomatoes.

 And one tablespoon of kasuri methi which is dried fenugreek leaves.

Neela, the main thing about the masala always is, like we always told our students,

 will take, I would say about 15 minutes till the oil comes to the sides.

 one teaspoon of crushed red chilli powder, one and a half teaspoon of dhana jeera powder,

 which is coriander and cumin powder, slit green chillies or crushed green chillies,

 about a teaspoon and a half of crushed black pepper, which gives a lovely flavour.

 Then I'm going to add about a cup to three fourth cups of water,

And we've got a cream which goes in on a very low heat, about 250 millilitres.

And if you're a vegetarian, Sumita, you could add paneer or cheese to it.

 Garnish with coriander and we've got chicken tikka masala omur makhani ready.

 A third of two thirds pound and two thirds pound of ground pork.

 We cooked that for about another five minutes to get the flavors going here.

 And we're also going to top it with tater tots because that's how our recipe is called and that's how we've always done it.

 This was originally my great grandmother Jean Weber recipe for tater tot casserole.

 Then at the end, about ten minutes before it's all done, I like to pull it out and toss some grated cheese on top of it.

 Alright, here we have our tater tot casserole out of the oven after thirty minutes.

 And I actually buttoned my heat up to about 400 degrees because I wanted a little crispier tater tots.

 Alright, I took a pound and a third of ground beef, two thirds of a pound of ground pork, half a teaspoon of pepper, a teaspoon of salt, a tablespoon of garlic granules.

 I flipped it the first time and put the other half of my salt and pepper down.

 I've got my tater tots over here, all in a pan, all ready to go.

 We did drain this mix before we added 20 ounces of cream of mushroom.

 The recipe calls for 15 ounces of cream of mushroom, but we didn't have a big can so we used two small.

 So on this one we're going to put our prefabricated pipe boot into position,

 measure the height of it so where the top end meets the pipe itself we're going to put some

 of the pipe itself where it actually surrounds the pipe it will make a nice watertight seal.

 Around the base area we make a mark around the flange and then we'll prime that area.

 Once we've established that that's nice and tacky we'll remove the backing paper

 that's on the underside and offer that into position on the primed surface.

 Make secure with the silicone roller and of course the penny roller too.

 And then we just need to finish the top edge with a jubilee clip or clamping ring.

 That will tighten up into position and will remove any of the excess part of that clamping ring.

 Welcome to the Jamboree Nails application tips and tricks video.

 We're now going to go over some tips and tricks that will help you really master the application

 If you haven't already seen the application video, we recommend watching that first.

 If you're experiencing difficulty getting the wraps to stick to your nails, the first

 thing to do is make sure your nails have been thoroughly prepped.

 Any nail polish, dirt, or oil residue on your nails will prevent the adhesive from properly

 Wash your hands with soap that has a decreasing agent, such as a dish soap, and clean your

 If you have oily nail beds, you may want to prep one nail and then apply the nail wrap

 When applying nails, use enough pressure to really seal the edge of the nail to your wrap.

 Begin at the middle of your nail and work your way to the edges.

 Using the buffer block to remove nail shine will also help the wrap adhere to your nail.

 If your wraps are lifting at the edges, it is most likely because they're touching your

 To prevent this, make sure the wrap you're using is the right size.

 With our nuclear backing, you can easily select the best size nail wrap by holding the sheet

 over your finger and matching the wrap to the finger it best fits.

 You can also trim down the sides of a wrap for a better fit if necessary.

 It is important that the wrap is not touching the skin or cuticle when applied to the nail

 A good seal is what helps your nail stay on for a longer period of time.

 If the wraps are curling when you heat them, you may be using too much heat.

 Another option is to apply the nail wraps before heating, then heat the wrap after it's

 If you experience buckling at the tip of your nail, try stretching the nail wrap a little

 If you experience buckling at the sides of your nails, be sure not to stretch the nail

 Instead, concentrate on applying pressure beginning in the middle of your nail and working

 While the nail wrap is still warm, you can also use the rubber cuticle pusher to smooth

 If your nails are too short to file, you can trim the excess nail wrap using nail scissors

 If the tips of your nail wraps are wearing back, it may be because they were filed too

 Remember to gently file the tip of your nail using a downward motion at a 90 degree angle.

 It is also helpful to wait until the wraps have cooled before you file the excess.

 For fast application, you can apply all the wraps to your nails before heating, then apply

 For application over the top of gel or acrylic nails, apply the wrap to your nail using no

 heat and making sure to apply firm pressure from the middle of the nail out to the edges.

 Heat the wrap using the mini heater for 3-5 seconds to seal the wrap to the acrylic or

 Then apply more pressure using your opposite thumb, rocking back and forth across the nail.

 For removal from gel or acrylic nails, do not use acetone as this will eat away the

 Follow the quick removal process or the organic gentle removal process using warm water or

 Another removal trick that works on natural nails is to use a Q-tip and rubbing alcohol

 Soak the Q-tip in either liquid and then gently lift the edge of the wrap.

 Run the soaked Q-tip along the edge of the adhesive side, slowly pushing the wrap from

 For more information on our basic removal methods, you can watch the Jamboree Nails

 application video found at JamboreeNails.com or contact your local Jamboree Nails consultant.

 The raw food diet, a lot of people swear by this, others maybe a little intimidated.

 I fall under the intimidated category, Annie, just to let you know.

 This is all about fruits, vegetables, nuts, and seeds just being fresh and whole food.

 So there's been a movement that's kind of picked up momentum recently.

 How do you think it's ... Why do you think more people are getting into it, I guess?

 I think people are realizing the importance of unprocessed whole foods.

 We're also in Southern California where we have wonderful farmer's markets.

 It's summertime right now, so it's tons of fruits and vegetables.

 Well, it's packed full of antioxidants, so it's all those different colors, the bright

 So they're packed full of antioxidants, which actually fight free radical damage.

 So it's helping to combat signs of aging, slowing down signs of aging, helps boost our

 The acai, the San Pazano acai is also a great source of omegas.

 Okay, and you also say, I guess, not all calories are created equal.

 Well, if I'm going to eat something that is 100 calories, I can eat a piece of white bread

 that's 100 calories, or I could drink an eight ounce of San Pazano acai juice, which is packing

 me full of antioxidants and vitamins and omegas and all these things that are really great

 Okay, and then is it possible, I mean, you don't need to go completely from one to the

 other, so you can just kind of maintain the diet you have and just kind of slowly include

 I think we should, because I want a nice explanation and I want to maybe learn how to do some of

 I'll just have you start with that one, and then I'll start making the next one.

 I'm going to trust you, Annie, because you wrote the book, right?

 And when you think about what that is, it's orange, green, it's iron, potassium, fiber,

 Can this substitute as my morning pick-me-up, my morning breakfast meal?

 The next smoothie I will make you, it's actually a variation of this one, which you could taste.

 And so we can also add cacao powder into that as well, if we wanted to.

 This is a good way to hide greens in for kids, you know, if we're trying to feed our children

 Well, I actually make double this, but my container's a little small here, so.

 So cacao is really, also a really high antioxidant food as well.

 So again, packed full of antioxidants, omegas, great for vitamins and minerals.

 I'm not, well, okay, you don't have to convince me to try the chocolate.

 So instead of using dairy, we're actually using almonds for protein.

 And almonds are FDA superfood because they're full of vitamin E, which slows down aging

 Which one of these three, I mean, are they all equally beneficial as far as a healthy?

 It's important to eat a wide spectrum of different types of foods all the time.

 So Warrior Up is San Bazon's newest campaign right now that's live.

 We have billboards and bus shelter posters all over San Diego so everyone should go out

 And September 1st we launched a new campaign as well where online you can nominate somebody

 in the local community who's doing great things for the community, nominate them, and they're

 giving out grants to these people that are going to be voted on and chosen.

 But have you ever tried with poha different kinds of varieties of upmas?

 So in different places like different countries they make different kinds of upmas.

 So dear friends to make this poha we need some nice potato which I have boiled it.

 If you want you can just cut into small cubes and directly fry in the oil.

 In the last to give nice colorful look I am going to add some sev and some peanuts.

 Once the oil is hot we are going to add some mustard seeds and some fennel seeds.

 We are not going to use cumin seeds we are using the fennel seeds.

 Add the mustard seeds then our fennel seeds and some cashew nuts and some curry leaves.

 I have not added the peanuts in the oil because this peanuts which I am using today is the

 While this is getting cooked now our poha we need to soak it in water for just 1 or

 Then we are going to remove the water and add it into our mixture.

 So this is the thicker version of poha which we use to make upma.

 So after 2 minutes of soaking in water just remove the excess water.

 Don't soak it too much because it will break and it will become lump.

 If you want you can add turmeric but I don't want to add turmeric.

 I can feel nice flavor from this fennel and I added little bit of sugar.

 When you add lot of freshly grated coconut this poha will taste different.

 So always eat poha when it is nice hot because once it is cool down then it won't taste that good.

 Nice sweetness from the fennel and little bit of sugar I added.

 Because I roasted and added it I can feel that nice crunchiness of the peanuts and even

 You can just skip the regular way of making poha and make this nice indoor style poha

 So dear friends I am going to show you some more poha recipes with different different

 We're going to show you a quick, easy way to refresh yourself at the hot end of the

 Great way to make it even more refreshing is to put some fresh watermelon in it.

 And we're in the heat of watermelon season, so I've got some fresh cut watermelon, a couple

 And with my muddler, I'm going to press it all, get the juice out of the watermelon,

 Here's two ounces of rum made by a local distiller and Texas ex named Daniel Barnes at Treaty

 How's that for a refreshing watermelon mojito for your cocktail gate party?

 Hi everybody, so I just wanted to come on and share a quick video about how to make

 a hobo bag or purse or whatever you want to call it out of a tank top.

 A lot of you probably already know how to do this, but I learned this back in my cosmetology

 I actually did this the other day, so I was like, oh, I'll put this on the channel.

 If you want it to be more dressy, I would choose something with a design or sequence

 And then you also need a hair band or a twisty whatever like that.

 So what you're going to do is you're going to flip your tank top inside out like this

 Put it to the side like that, where the two holes are like that.

 And at the very, very bottom, go ahead and put your tie around it.

 And then all you do is just flip it back inside out, or right side.

 It's cute for a bag if you're going out or whatever you want to use it for.

 Quick, easy, fun, no cutting, and it doesn't ruin any of your clothes.

 Hey guys, I'm Paolo Popovich, this is Fred Mokai, one of the Black Belts.

 First of all, I see people having a lot of problems with the choke here because they try to go with the knee and the stomach, and this collar is super tight.

 So by the time you come up, you go with the knee and the stomach, you cannot get the hand that's going to choke in.

 So what I want you to do, as you get side control, I want you to reach on the collar, open it up, and make it real loose.

 Now, I'm going to go back, re-grip it, one, two, grab the belt, and as I come up, now I've got good knee and the stomach position.

 My feet is just like this, and my toes on the floor, and I'm keeping that pressure on the guy.

 The reason why I like the collar and the belt is I can pull the guy into me because he's going to try to push off.

 Now here, I don't stay him here too long because in Jiu-Jitsu what happens is this.

 If you do a technique and the guy doesn't feel in danger, all he's going to think about is to escape.

 Now what I want him to think about is I want him to think about that I'm going to choke him out.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to open this collar, come in with the hand, four fingers going in, all the way in, and I'm going to grip it like that.

 Keep the leg out, you don't want to keep the leg too close so a long guy can go inside your leg.

 It causes problems with balance already, so I keep the leg out.

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to reach over with the thumb.

 In Jiu-Jitsu you have more leverage if you're choking over top.

 If you're choking under top, which is a harder choke in my opinion to apply, you go with four fingers again.

 But as I get my thumb in, look how my elbow is pointing out that way.

 Now what we're going to do here is, a lot of times I see guys doing this mistake too, is they either come down too much to try to choke the guy.

 What happens here is I'm out of balance, I'm going to get flipped before I even finish the choke.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to pull him into me and I'm going to come down at the same time.

 By pulling his back off the floor, I take the bridge out of him.

 Because he cannot bridge with his head off the floor like this.

 So once again, you want to pull the guy off the mat a little bit and you want to come down so you meet half and half.

 And as you do that, then you start opening the elbows and using this part of your arm to choke the guy.

 Another key point, you got to go with the hands as deep as you can on the collar.

 If you go to the guy trying to do this here, that's not going to work.

 When you get your hand in, if you pull too much of the gi, when you go to the other side, it's going to be tough.

 So the first hand you go in, try to go as deep as you can, but don't hold it too hard.

 So when you get the second hand in, now look how deep both of my grips are.

 That's when I can pull the guy out, meet him halfway, and apply the choke.

 That's my basic choke from the side when I go to the knee on the stomach and try to choke the guy out.

 Next I'm going to show you how to do advanced choke when the guy is defending.

 Hi guys how's it going welcome to my virgin kitchen tonight I am making a chicken pot

 Chicken pot pie, when I first heard that recipe I've been asked to make it a couple of times

 before I was thinking is it like you just get a chicken and plonk it in a pot and then

 magically a pie comes out, no, kind of like a rabbit in a hat with a magician, it's not

 going to happen but it is kind of that theory a little bit and the ingredients are minimal

 and it's supposed to be amazing so yeah I did the actual inspiration for this recipe

 comes from a lady called Lynn who's on YouTube, Lynn's recipes, check out her channel she's

 a very nice lady and I saw this video and I thought well let's use that as a little

 bit of a model and try and make one ourselves ok over the pond as it were.

 So anyway first thing I've got here is a load of chicken cut up and some water bubbling

 away there and in my three shot glasses I've got some pepper, some salt and I've actually

 got myself a vegetable stock cube as well you can use garlic powder or onion salt I

 think you can use as well but I just thought I'd use a bit of a stock cube just to give

 it a bit more of a flavour boost yeah so first thing I want to do is plonk my chicken, my

 My chicken into the boiling water so let's do that please and we'll boil it away lovely.

 Ok so the chicken's floating in there kind of like some icebergs that's the best comparison

 I've got right now but I do apologise anyway I'm gonna chuck in my salt like so my stock

 cube sprinkle that in lush and my pepper that's gonna help to make a broth with the water

 that's in there with the chicken very nice so we're gonna bubble that away I'm gonna

 put a lid on it probably gonna leave that for about 25 minutes obviously if you're losing

 massive chicken breasts it might take a little bit longer so keep your eye on it and when

 you feel that it's all cooked through and you're feeling it you're feeling that goodness

 take it off the heat and then we're gonna tear it up into little bits wicked lush.

 Right guys that's been 26 minutes if you want to know the exact time that I cook my chicken

 for and it's all nice and tender and the smell can you smell that it's amazing in here that

 is the broth that we are left with so I'm just letting that cool down remember we need

 to use a little bit of that and there is my chicken also cooling down so I'm just gonna

 shred that up with my knife just gonna cut it all nice and fine cos it's so soft now

 it literally just peeled off cool huh so let's do that right here that's all ripped

 up and in case you're wondering how I did it I basically grabbed my fork like so and

 used my other hand to hold it down and just scratched away kind of like a cat going meow

 meow meow until it all tore up into little bits very nice really really nice and soft

 as well the way we cooked it all that flavour is soaked into it am I going on too much yes

 Here you go guys so I just grabbed a can of cream of chicken soup and poured that all

 over there and as you will notice there is not cream of chicken soup in there that is

 some of the broth you can see the level has gone down I have poured it in there fill up

 your can with your broth and pour that over the top like so amazing kind of like a swimming

 pool of chicken love I hope you agree with me yeah and what I have got now is a bowl

 of mixed veg just frozen stuff but I have left it at 4 for about 5 minutes you can use

 absolutely any veg you want apparently so I'm just gonna scatter that on there cool

 huh wicked gonna stir that through right chicken tastic that is all stirred through

 nicely what I want you to do is go preheat your oven now to gas mark 4 slash 350 degrees

 Fahrenheit yeah yeah get yourself a bowl like this and get a stick of melted butter like

 so which is about 100 grams 125 grams of self raising flour boom and 250ml of milk nice

 and a whisk a whisking device such as this my friends and stir it all together yeah like

 this so keep doing that until you have a nice funky sauce like so and just pour that over

 the top of your chicken pie mixture right so that is all covered on there as best I

 can unfortunately it is a little bit watery under the surface so I might have used a little

 bit too much broth so what I will do is plonk it in the oven now for 45 minutes like you

 should spin it around halfway through until it is all golden brown and all the funky stuff

 and if I have used too much broth well we will both find out won't we righty ho then

 guys it has been 40 minutes I have spun it around halfway through it is starting to go

 all brown around the edges and the smell is fantastic so I am gonna get it out I have

 got some plates there with a little bit of salad on the side and we will see what it

 tastes like my friends yeah there we are then guys that is right out of the oven nice and

 golden brown on the top and as you can see the pastry has nicely formed and my fears

 of it being a bit too liquidy are all ok I did put a baking tray underneath the dish

 when I was in the oven and it did catch a teeny bit of fluid but you know if you are

 like me and you are worried about it just put a tray underneath it caught it it is all

 good so lets get that on a plate ok then guys lets see what it tastes like it is piping

 hot still all my salad I can dip into the chicken fluid as well so it is all good no

 dressing on there just gonna use the chicken bit in the middle here we go wow that is amazing

 it is very chickeny obviously but that chicken is so soft in there and the vegetables as

 well jumping in there going hey I am a vegetable absolutely loving that so thanks lynn for

 letting everyone in the world see your recipe and letting me try it out if I can make that

 absolutely anyone in the world can have a go for yourself let me know how you get on

 remember I started video number one on a poached egg I am not a chef I have learnt ok see you

 Whatever part of the world that you are in, I don't know what's going on with my shoulder.

 I got, what do they call it, something blah blah, wrong with your tendons in your shoulder,

 Anyway, alright, I have had a question about selecting eggs for the incubator whenever

 That is the process that we use from getting the eggs from the hen house into the incubator

 And it'll take a little bit, if you get a rooster today, you won't have fertilized eggs

 It'll take them a couple, two or three weeks to get in there and woo the ladies, so to

 And you're not going to get a fertilized egg unless you have a little bit of that bow-chicka-wow-wow

 So once you have that and you've witnessed that there's a little bit of bow-chicka-wow

 going on out there in the hen house, then a couple weeks later you can start collecting

 And what we do, this is the eggs that we got this morning from our hen house.

 So the first thing that we wanted to look at is any eggs that are obviously dirty and

 Even though it looks like it's a good egg and it's probably fertilized, it's got enough

 It's got enough of that around the edge to where I don't want to put it in the incubator

 and we don't want to wash it off before we put it in the incubator because that may damage

 the egg and it won't hatch properly once you wash that membrane off of the outside of the

 We have two little containers here and we will separate these eggs out.

 One's going to go into this one right here that we're going to put into the incubator

 Second, what we'll look at, we see we got one here that's really, really large.

 It's not going to, you're not, me personally, I'm not an egg-eologist, okay, I'm not any

 It could be possible and if it happens, congratulations, you got two chickens with one egg.

 It's got a good shell and you don't want to shake it up a whole lot.

 But whenever you go to store this, especially if it's one that you're going to put into

 your incubator in a couple of days, then you'll notice, you know, the old teardrop egg shape.

 You know, they've got a, there's a pointy end and there's a rounder end.

 Whenever you go to store this egg, you want to put it with the pointy end down so that

 the air bubble can start forming in the, in the larger end of the egg.

 That way as the chick develops in this part of the egg, they'll have their air bubble

 up here and this will be the part where they hatch from up here.

 They'll, they'll start pipping and they'll unzip the egg around this part and that'll

 give them a bigger area to come out at and helps them strengthen and develop correctly

 We'll label this, you know, hatching eggs, don't omelet or something like that on there.

 Like I say, in the wintertime, if you're bringing your eggs straight from your hen

 house into the house, yeah it's cold outside in the wintertime, but they should still be

 fine if you bring them straight from the hen house into the house.

 We, I've heard that you can leave them set for about a week or so before you put them

 We'll choose the eggs that we want to put into the incubator from those eggs that we

 have on those four days and then we'll go ahead and put them into the incubator.

 We're just trying to be gentle not to shake them up too much and then the ones that we

 decided we're going to put in the incubator, like I say, we'll store with the pointy end

 down and the other ones we'll just store however because they're not going to incubate.

 Now once we have our eggs selected, say you want to put 40 eggs, 45 eggs, whatever it

 is, into your incubator and you have your amount of eggs, you're going to put them into

 your incubator the same way that you have them stored with the pointy end into your

 If you have an incubator that just has a flat bottom, then you just lay them on their side

 like this and you want to try to put it in a way where they're not rolling around a whole

 bunch and they're not getting all shook up and stuff like that.

 But every couple of hours you're going to have to go in there and take that egg and

 As you're rolling the egg, that keeps the chicken embryo from sticking to the inside

 membrane of the egg and that helps the hatching process and chick development on the inside

 So again, whenever you're putting it in, put your pointy side end to your egg turner just

 like that and then you put your whole egg turner into the incubator or you got all your

 eggs in the incubator and then you start the whole incubation process from there and 21

 That is our process that we use for selecting our eggs that we're going to incubate.

 Obviously if you have one that's really, really small compared to your normal eggs, then you

 Nice good, non-cracked, you don't want to put a cracked egg in there, semi-clean eggs

 are the ones that we're going to select, like I say, for the incubators.

 Like I say, no more than four, so that will be three more days today unless we have enough

 eggs over the next couple of days to run a batch and then we'll put them into the incubator

 It's just the process that we use for selecting our eggs that we're going to hatch and we

 usually get pretty good hatch percentage ratios, especially with this new incubator.

 We got lucky and you're just going to have to be patient and keep your eye on eBay, on

 We paid $125 for ours and I've seen them for up to $1000, which is ridiculous if you

 Eventually you'll come across something that is what you're looking for, that is in your

 it comes with a key, it doesn't need any screws to snap the aluminum case around the iPhone aluminum edges.

 Maybe a Swarovski style or Swarovski cutting, let's do an unboxing of it.

 of the case and when you apply on it, you gotta be extremely careful not to

So it's back to school season again and I have a back to school video for you all.

 I'm actually doing a makeup tutorial which I haven't done a makeup tutorial for like two months I think.

 So this is a back to school makeup tutorial and because a lot of people in school don't have that much money

 and maybe you're not interested in like expensive makeup or you're just not interested in makeup.

 I decided to make a all drugstore makeup tutorial because that way more people can afford it.

 So I decided I can't always use my beloved MAC products and such in makeup tutorials.

It's an all drugstore, natural, everyday, back to school makeup tutorial.

 So I hope you guys will enjoy this video and let's just jump right in.

 Alright so for my foundation I'm going to use my L'Oreal True Match foundation that I love.

 And I'm just going to add a little bit on the back of my hand and then just blend it into my skin.

 And you really want to blend this in really well because you don't want to have a cake face in school.

 I don't know about you guys but I feel like during school I never sleep enough and that's my lovely demonstration.

 Anyway I'm using my Collection Lasting Perfection concealer in medium and I'm just dabbing that on the back of my hand.

 And then lightly applying that underneath my eyes and also on any blemishes or imperfections.

 So a lot of teens, me included, get pretty oily around the T-zone especially.

 So I'm going to use my Rimmel Stay Matte powder and just powder up my face focusing on the T-zone.

 And that's just going to keep my face nice and matte throughout the whole school day.

 I also like to fill in my eyebrows not to change the color or anything but just to make them look better.

 So I'm just going to brush them out and then I will take my ELF eyebrow kit and I'm just going to lightly fill my eyebrows in.

 To fill my eyebrows in I like to start at the bottom just to make a clean nice line.

 And at the end I like to go in the very inner corner or inner part of the eyebrow I guess.

 And I will make strokes upward but you will see that in a little bit.

 Let me tell you my eyebrows can be pretty crazy and they definitely have a life of their own.

 So I'm going to use my Maybelline Great Lash Clear Mascara to keep them in place.

 So I'm going to use my Chocolate Soleil bronzer from Bourjois which smells delicious.

 So after the contouring I'm just going to bring the bronzer up to give the rest of my face a little bit of color.

 For my blush I'm going to use my Milani blush in Berry Amore which is really pretty and really glowy.

 Now for my eyes I'm going to start off by using the Maybelline Naked Beige eyeshadow which is really pretty and shimmery.

 And in the crease I'm going to mix two colors from the Sleek Oh So Special palette.

They're matte brown eyeshadows to give some more definition to my eyes.

 Instead of using eyeliner I decided to mix the black and brown eyeshadows from the Sleek palette because it looks a little bit more natural and I like that look for school.

 And sticking with the theme of trying to look more awake for school I'm going to use my Rimmel Scandalize waterproof eyeliner in the beige color.

 And I'm just going to apply that in the waterline to look more awake and I don't know to look better I guess.

 And also I'm going to use my L'Oreal pressed pigment and I can't remember the color but I'll put it down below just in my inner corners.

 And then for my mascara I'm going to use the Maybelline Falsies mascara which is a really really great mascara but it's not my favorite.

 I have two lip options for this look and the first one is a CoverGirl lipstick in the shade Darling.

 And on top of that I picked the Revlon lip gloss in Natural I think it's called.

 And the second look is the Tanya Burr lip gloss in Aurora and oh my gosh these smell amazing.

 And I'm just applying that and you don't need a lipstick under this because it's so opaque.

I really hope you guys enjoyed it and thank you guys so much for watching.

 This is the shade Vegas Volt and this is just a super vibrant really fun orange color.

 If you touch that, it will allow you to navigate from row 1, 2, 3 or 4.

 Whichever row you're working with, if you're working with 4 and you want a decorative stitch

 You're going to notice it recommends foot B, a needle based on which fabric we have

 You really understand why you want to use it and how wonderful it is with your machine.

 We also have the navigator arrows on certain places where you need to go up or down.

 If you're on row 4 and you're stitch 5, you touch it, it will go to stitch 6, stitch 7,

 You can roll through all your stitches until you get to the right one that you're working

 Or if you're just sewing out all your decorative stitches, which I highly recommend, you can

 use that up arrow and just work your way through all of the different ones.

 If we want to make it spread out a little bit further, that will do it.

 Notice that it highlighted this number when I started changing it.

 You can easily see when you have changed it off the normal setting.

 If you want to not have altered settings of width and length, one way to clear that is

 Since we know we can touch the arrows up 1 and down 1, that will bring it back to the

 In the set menu, we can do different things where we can have our twin needle, our fix

 or cut on or off, a lot of different things that we can set up based on the way you like

 Things that are set up in here in the set menu are held when the machine has been turned

 You won't see it on this particular stitch because it's symmetrical.

 If we change it end to end, here the leaves are sewing first versus the stem or we can

 We have a recommendation for the pressure of the foot and that is right over on the

 Then also this picture indicates whether you should have stabilizer for this stitch.

 We're going to get into this machine and explore its different options and how to work around

 Now you can see how and where all the different functions are that I'll be pushing throughout

After that I want to answer today to a question that we receive from you.

 question is how can I use my velvet material to create a new style?

 quite complicated sometimes to use this kind of fabric material.

 According with the width of the trousers you have to cut two pieces of velvet, one for each leg.

 So now we leave the two pieces of fabric materials for the legs here for a moment and we start

 After that take two more pins, safety pins, and fix the button of the top to create a curly effect.

 Then you have to take an elastic like this to fix this way, this way.

 Take a popper button, open it and sew the two parts on the two upper sides of the top

 After you have sewn the two corners in the bottom to create a final curly effect,

 fix the elastic on the two sides of the top, approximately at your chest height.

 Take one of the two pieces of velvet you have already cut for the legs and fix it to your

 What you can do now is create a skirt or a new kind of trousers.

 middle of the textile, I mean to your knee height, last to the ankle height, so at the end of the

After that you can sew everything by yourself because it's very very simple and you

 Hi, my name is Cedric Doyon and today is another episode of super awesome kitchen stuff.

 And today we're doing something cool, the extreme chicken shake.

 And pineapple, raspberries, unsweetened almond milk and natural peanut butter.

 You can use, I guess, normal milk if you want, but I like this one better.

 Alright and this is, this Extreme Chicken Shake is very useful for people who have trouble eating.

 So if you have trouble eating your chicken, you can just drink it like that.

 So you can just cook it, freeze it or just even put it in the fridge and then do a shake like that.

 Chug down your chicken with the fruits and stuff and it's tasty and it goes down easy.

 start off by putting some, let me get that, just some kind of lines just to

 give me a feeling of the top and the bottom where I'm kind of just a kind of

 a bit of a layout and I think this wants to be pretty italic to make it italic is

 just a little bit more scary I don't know why and what I'm gonna do is very

 very gently very easily do very simple lettering scare and give it give it a

 t does that fit in it does pretty well what I'm gonna do today is use a Copic

 ciao and this has a brush tip on the end and you can do this with a paint

 brush or you can do it with a pen let me show you how you can probably do this

 with a pen to start off with you've got to kind of X over do the whole thing and

 then go around it and in the middle you can make it more blobby so it's kind of

 thicker does that make sense so it's kind of thinner at the top and then

 now alternatively we can just kind of do it immediately with the pen which is

 speed it up with this brush just speed it up for me a bit anyway

 you really want to use the tip of the brush to to do these world is quarry

 bits and then fill it in and then maybe a bit of a little tail of it on there

 with the W you might want to have a thick stroke than a thin straight thick

 so we'll see how that works out so we make this one quite thick and then maybe

 now here that the tea I'm not quite happy with that so having done it look

 at it you can always add more on afterwards so I'm going to fill that bit

 in there and I think it just needs to be a little bit kind of fatter down that

 and here I'm having to make this a bit lower to squeeze the dot in there because

 just going to blast this with my hair dryer to make sure it's completely dry

 you can just wait until it's dry and then erase all those pencil lines and

 just to make it a little more scary you can give it some kind of wobbly line

 on the camera yesterday and you can use this for Halloween posters or scary

 pirate party posters or whatever it is you're doing and whatever you do don't

 well thanks for watching and if you're in the mood to see how to learn how to

 draw a witch's hat on draw stuff really easy my other channel or just try the

 mystery drawing either way make sure you're subscribed and keep coming back for more

 drawing lessons and advice on the Shooterainer drawing channel.

 Hey guys, today I'm going to show you my everyday makeup routine.

 Now this is definitely in no way a tutorial because I am not a beauty guru, nor am I really

 I just asked in my video about makeup storage ideas if you guys would be interested in seeing

 So I just wanted to show you the products that I normally put on my face.

 I really like seeing what other people use on a day to day basis so hopefully you guys

 This is the look right here, this is what I normally wear everyday.

 Normally with a different look colour I like to change that up quite a bit but everything

 So let's get into it and prepare to see me with a totally naked face.

 So the first thing I like to put on is the Lush Feeling Younger Skin Tint.

 I guess I'm sort of applying it where you'd normally put highlighter but really messily

 A fairly new addition to my everyday makeup routine is the ChiChi Super BB Cream.

 I don't really like to use a foundation everyday, especially when I'm going to work, I just

 I just like to have a little bit of coverage with the BB Cream just to cover up any redness

 And I just buff that in using my Real Techniques buffing brush.

 Right now I'm using the Maybelline Fit Me concealer but honestly I think this is a bit

 So I think when I use this up I'll probably go back to the Rimmel Wake Me Up.

 I like to set under my eyes with the Alpha HD Under Eye Setting Powder just because like

 I mentioned that concealer is super creamy so this just helps a little bit.

 I don't really contour as such but I like to warm up my face a little bit using the

 Then before anything else I like to put my eyebrows on using my e.l.f.

 Next for a little bit of colour in my cheeks I'm going to use this sleek blush in Rose

 Eyes are definitely the part I find the most fun in my everyday makeup routine and generally

 Mostly because it's the only eyeshadow palette I really have but also because it's pretty

 much just got all the colours in it I could ever really need to use.

 I wrote a blog post about it that I will link down below if you would like.

 But I generally like to do a flick everyday when I have time in the mornings just because

 I just like the way it looks and I've really been enjoying using the Stila Stay All Day

 Does anyone else find eyeliner is just one of those things that some days it goes on

 super easy and you get it in like one try and then other days you feel like there's

 I find that it doesn't get as messy on my lower lashes as falsies does and I'm the kind

 of person where I cannot be bothered having two different mascaras, one for the top and

 Lastly I put some lipstick on and it's probably my favourite part of the whole routine because

 I like to wear a new shade every single day pretty much and it just depends what mood

 So there's not one particular lipstick that I always reach for but I'm going to show you

 For the bold my current favourite is the Karen Murrell lipstick in Racy Rata.

 These lipsticks are awesome because they're made of natural stuff and they're not tested

 And for my nude option at the moment I'm really loving my Bobbi Brown Creamy Matte Lip Colour

 I think today I'm going to go for the bold lip just because that's what I feel like.

 I don't normally make makeup videos I know but please let me know if you liked it anyway

 by giving this video a thumbs up and subscribing if you haven't already.

 I love the crispy outside of pot stickers just as much as I love the filling.

 So I created these pot stickers so that one, they're easy, super, super easy to fold, and

 These are my vegetarian version with shiitake mushrooms, tofu, and cabbage.

 What I love about pot stickers is that you can fold a hundred of them or even more if

 you want and freeze what you don't eat that day and it becomes a very, very quick 15 minute

 meal because the dumplings can go from freezer to the pan straight away without defrosting.

 I chopped cabbage, you can chop it with a knife like I did or you can use a big box

 This is shiitake mushroom that I've diced as well, so just mix everything together.

 I love lots of garlic and ginger, so I add a lot of that to the filling.

 I'm using fresh herbs, so I'm adding fresh Thai basil that I'm just running my knife

 Add all of these aromatics into a small bowl and then pour in your soy sauce.

 Doing this in a small bowl first before adding it to the big bowl helps it just disperse

 Here are two different brands of wrappers that I happened to pick up at the Asian market.

 They only take about 40 minutes on the counter to defrost or you can defrost them in the

 microwave but don't defrost them underwater because they'll get wet and soggy and unusable.

 Okay, these are defrosted and there you can see they're really thin and flexible.

 What holds a pot sticker together is either an egg wash that you can make or just cornstarch

 Paint around the edges of the skin and fold them in half and make sure that everything

 is, that there's no air in the pot sticker so push out the air and make sure that all

 If they're not sealed tightly then they open up and then oil seeps in and the spilling

 Don't add too much filling again and just fold it in half into a half moon.

 I squeeze the middle first and make sure that that's sealed and then seal the rest of the

 edges and make sure that there's no air, air bubbles and then I go over one more time with

 Now for those of you who like to get a little bit more fancy, here is the real way of folding

 Again, fold them in the middle and make sure it's tight in the middle and pleat one side

 I do three pleats on each side and make sure that that's sealed correctly.

 Now I'm going to go on the other side and I'm going to pleat towards the center.

 And then I go over it one more time on the edge to make sure it's tight.

 And now you can see it's like a nice cute little dumpling that stands up and also can

 I'm pleating towards the center and I'm only folding one side which gives a nice curve

 Go over it one more time with my fingers, make sure it's super tight and that's it.

 The first way is much easier so if you've got kids or you want to do them super fast,

 Plus the first way gives you maximum exposure to crispiness in the pan.

 Heat a pan, non-stick pan, with cooking oil and once it starts shimmering a bit, go ahead

 and add the potstickers and let them fry for a couple minutes until they are browned.

 You're going to add just a couple tablespoons of water to the pan, close it with a tight

 lid and let the water steam and finish cooking the potstickers.

 The water has evaporated and just put them on a plate and serve them.

 Remember I said that you could freeze these and then go direct from freezer to the pan?

 Once you take them out of the freezer, you want to place them one by one in the pan with

 Make sure that they don't overlap each other too much in the pan and just add a couple

 For the full recipe or if you have any questions at all, head over to steamykitchen.com.

 My brand new cookbook, Steamy Kitchen's Healthy Asian Favorites just came out.

 There's over 100 Asian recipes that are easy, they're healthy, they're good for you.

 We've got some Asian cuisine going on, and you're going to share with everyone how to

 And then finally, you know, just to add a little bit of interest, I'm going to do a

 Also, I'm going to take a little bit of that rice wine and just marinate a little bit of

 I like a high temperature, low flavor oil, so I'm using canola oil first.

 And you know, for people at home, the easy way to dispatch the bell pepper is I just

 Depending on how hot you are, you don't have to do chilies if you're not a big fan.

 These are serranos and of course, you can go all the way to thais if you want to.

 So, I'm just going to finish up with a little bit of the drunken noodle sauce that we made.

 And then I want to just finish with even more basil and really let that basil wilt right

 Again, a simple dish to put together as long as you have the right ingredients.

 You can go to our website, our Facebook page, facebook.com forward slash Rita Lay and you

 We can see drunken noodle is popular in the restaurant, also at home.

 Hey there, TRW crew, Matt Vassallo here with the rhinestone world.com.

 So this video is going to show you how to make a rhinestone sticker with the bling anything

 So as you can see, we're going to do four at a time here and we don't really like to

 actually cut the decal material on our cutter because we like to do it in groups.

 So if you want to do three or four or five, 10 at a time, you can do that.

 So you see we pulled off the backer on our transfer tape there.

 And then if you scratch on the decal material, one side, if you scratch it, you'll hear like

 We have a little bit extra there and we have this all prepared and ready to go ahead and

 So we have it over at the press here and this is another part of this order.

 So we're just going to show you, we're going to press nine different megaphones here.

 This is a method we've been using for about three years that we find works best.

 If you press it upside down first and we're at about 320 degrees and we're going to do

 Our method is, is it's a lot harder to overpress it than underpress.

 If you overpress it, they're just going to be embedded in there a little bit more.

 So what you're looking for when you get it is obviously with our hotfix tape that we

 So a lot of people run into the issue when they cut the decal material on their cutter.

 And if you cut or bling anything sheet on your cutter right here, and then you peel

 it off, you're going to have an issue where the little edges right around where it's contoured

 But you can see when you do it the way that we do it here, how easy it is.

 I'm going to go ahead and zoom in here and I'm going to show you what you're actually

 It kind of has like a little, you can see it kind of bubbles around the stone a little

 bit, kind of where the stone is set into the actual bling anything decal material.

 And this time we're going to press it from the top for anywhere from five to seven seconds

 And we do have a pretty good pressure on here because we want to make sure that those stones

 are getting down into that material good so that they do stay on.

 You can put these on a laptop, any hard surface, a car window, whatever you want.

 But again, we're going to zoom in here and you can kind of see what we are looking for.

 You're looking for, see those almost like the little where the rhinestones are kind

 That's what you're looking for to know that it's set in there good.

 We make anywhere from 25 to 300 of these a day, just depending on our orders.

 All we do just grab a pair of scissors and obviously you want a little sharper pair of

 We're going to get another pair of scissors here and I'll just show you how easy it is

 So with the decals, you really want to get a dense design kind of like this is.

 Get it nice and compact and dense because that's what's going to look best.

 It's going to take you that much time to set it all up in your cutter to weed it.

 If you do weed it or you screw up weeding your wet wasting material.

 We found out that it's actually quicker to do it this way than it is to actually cut

 And the great thing about that is if you have a heat press you can actually make the decals

 So we're going to go ahead and show you how to apply them here.

 And with the Bling Anything Decal Material, you don't need any kind of special adhesive

 All you're going to do with the clean window, you kind of just hold it kind of like a U.

 Because if we try to pull this off right now, what's going to happen is that material is

 going to stretch and the rhinestones are actually going to start popping off.

 We have a couple on our cars with over 25,000 rhinestones on it that we've had on for a

 This is actually the same material we use for our Bling Anything Sheets that we blinged

 So all the different things that you see that we have blinged out, we've done with this

 Again, this is Matt with the rhinestone world.com and you guys all have a great day.

 When printing on a flexible substrate like fabric, mesh, or banner material with the

 HPL26500, the loading accessory can make the loading process easier.

 It is a good idea to use the edge holders with flexible materials, and especially with

 Place the loading tool on the loading table with the flaps facing up.

 Unwind enough material from the roll to place into the loading accessory.

 Be sure to remove any wrinkles from the material before loading it into the printer.

 Next, insert the loading accessory into the printer the same way that you would load any

 After the printer feeds it into place, lower the blue lever as indicated on the printer

 Remove the loading accessory after it has fed through the front of the printer.

 The printer will then check the substrate and calibrate the substrate advance.

 It is recommended that flexible substrates, like fabric, be attached to the take-up reel

 Next, if you plan on using edge holders, unlock the right and left side of the printer and

 Make sure that the white line matches up with the edge of the media.

 If you have any questions about the HPL26500, please contact a Lexicheck customer specialist

 Okay, this corned beef is one of Alton Brown's recipes but I'm going to go ahead and add

 my little twist to it and what we're going to do is go over the ingredients for that

 This is a 10 day cure but my twist on the end is we're going to smoke it.

 It's a cup of kosher salt, half a cup of brown sugar, two tablespoons of yellow mustard seed,

 You're going to need allspice, about a tablespoon of allspice, berries, and you're also going

 You're going to need a tablespoon of celery salt, a half a teaspoon of, I'm sorry, let's

 go ahead and cinnamon sticks, just crush them up, okay, and three bay leaves, crush

 them up as well, put it in, and I can't think of the last spice but I'll go ahead and put

 So what we do is we go ahead and mix it with two quarts of water and we then add the brisket

 Okay, the last ingredient that I missed was a half a tablespoon of ginger and again I'll

 What's next is take a two gallon Ziploc bag, put two quarts of water in there with your

 dry ingredients, mix it up a lot, and then place your brisket inside the Ziploc bag.

 You want to put it in the refrigerator for 10 days, every 12 hours you want to rotate

 the brisket and that will ensure that the brine cures the meat properly.

 Something with the steering and under braking or there's an unusual noise.

 As soon as you can, when it's safe to do so, pull over, get out and check your wheels and tyres.

 Don't think you can look at a tyre these days and tell whether it's flat or not.

 This tyre could have no pressure in it at all and it would still look as it should do.

 Off comes the dust cap and either check the tyre pressure with a portable tyre gauge

 which you can get for a few pounds from your dealership or from any car accessory shop.

 Or better still, if you're on a car forecourt, you can check it with a machine

 Even if that was only to get you to a dealership where you could have it professionally checked out.

 You should only do so if you've first made sure that you're in a safe place to do that.

 For goodness sake, don't try and use the jack on a grassed or a soft area.

 I know there's no traffic coming from that direction and I can see if anything's coming from that direction.

 Everything's in place for me to change this tyre and so that's exactly what I'm going to do.

 They're normally foam backed and it makes the job a lot more comfortable.

 We've got a big wheel brace here which allows you to exert a bit more pressure than the standard one which we also have, which comes with the car.

 And don't forget, if you've not got the key for the locking wheel bolts, you can't do the job.

 Right, on this particular car, the first job we have to do is to remove these plastic caps that go over the actual nuts.

 Yes, they do look like the actual nuts themselves, but they're not.

 Because when you try and undo them, the wheel will just turn round and round.

It's the adapter key for the one locking wheel nut which we need to release first.

 Now, I could have used the standard wheel brace, this lightweight one that came with the car.

 You need to have had a decent breakfast if you're going to use one of these.

 I'm a reasonably robust lad, but what I'm going to do is rely instead on what I think is safer,

 We can get two hands on it and we can exert some real leverage.

 But I'm not going to take them off completely, because I do not want this wheel to come off when I don't want it to.

 There will normally be, almost always, there's instructions in various languages on here as to how to use this jack

 If you try and raise the whole weight of this vehicle by putting this in the wrong place,

 it can puncture the bodywork and you really don't want to do that.

 And worse still, it can be a danger to you, the person who's changing the wheel.

 So I've had a look and it tells me that there's, on the sill here, there's a depression where that goes.

 One thing as well, if you do have other people with you, for goodness sake, make them get out of the car.

 Or if they're in the car, they're children and they're in the car, make sure they stay in the car.

 The last thing you want when you're jacking up a car is for people opening and closing doors unnecessarily

 Just put these to one side, there's nothing worse than getting halfway through this job

 There was quite a bit of resistance to space server tyres and wheels when they first came out a few years ago.

 But as well as having the advantage of liberating space inside the car

 and reducing weight, which reduces your fuel consumption and improves your performance,

 Wheels and tyres have got bigger and bigger and bigger and heavier.

 It's perfectly safe, but don't leave it on your car for a few weeks.

 I don't want to see you in the car park at the supermarket, loading up the car with one of these things on.

 Once you've got one of these on, the only place you need to be going is a tyre specialist or your dealership.

 I don't think I'll put the plastic caps back on because I'm only going to be leaving it on for as long as it takes me to get to a dealer.

 So you've seen me put them on finger tight at first, and that's a good way of starting them off

 However, once you've got them all finger tight, it is good practice.

 Get ahold of the tyre at the top here, if it's this space server like this,

 and just give them a twist in turn with the wheel brace so that the wheel isn't moving around at all.

 I can let the jack down, and then I'll properly tighten those five bolts and make sure this wheel's on right.

 Now that the wheel is firmly on the ground, tighten these nuts.

 As much pressure as you can apply on one of these four-way wheel braces.

 When you're tightening these up, by the way, try and tighten opposite to opposite

 instead of going round the clock to make sure that it's squarely on the hub.

 Right, they're all tightened, the wheel is secure, it's pumped up, I'm ready for the road again.

 Today's project is we're gonna try to rotisserie this, it's called a fresh picnic.

 It's a rather small one, but I was wanting to try something called roast pork knuckle,

 which technically it's not a knuckle, it's more of the elbow, and it's considerably smaller

 than this, but I've looked all over and I just cannot find what's known as a pork knuckle

 or a pork elbow, which is, I guess it's not quite the ham, but it's not the foot, it's

 And it's very popular in Germany, and I've seen a few videos on YouTube in like some

 German restaurants where these things are on a rotisserie in front of an open fire

 and they just look magnificent, so I want to try to see if I can replicate that with

 It's a very simple seasoning, it's nothing more than just some coarse kosher salt, and

 what you want to do is slice the skin a little bit like that and rub the salt really good

 Oh, and the other flavoring is going to be smoke from these wet applewood chips.

 And this is a four and a half pound fresh picnic, so I think I'm going to let it go

 I'll check it after three hours and make sure that the internal temperature is at least

 I don't know if that's going to go three hours, but let's let it go just the same.

 I could have skewered it the spit the other way, I think it would have been better, but

 there's no way I could have done it lengthwise because of the bone.

 I'm going to double check it here in a little bit and check the temperature and see if it's

 I like it that the skin is, it looks like it's really crispy now.

 And I've turned all but one burner off, so I've got the front burner on high, that's

 Had to reload the smoker box halfway through, but it looks pretty good.

 I think I should have left it go longer, because it's really good, but I would like it to be

 a little bit more tender, I mean a little bit more fall off the bone.

 Three hours I don't think was enough, but I was afraid that if I left it on too long

 I'm going to show you how to make cashew cream, which is an ingredient used to make non-dairy

 desserts, but it's also good to enrich soups and sauces, just the way cream would.

 Once you've drained and rinsed them, put them right in the blender.

 And I'm going to add just a little bit of water to help it move.

 From time to time it might be necessary to push it down with a spatula and mix it up.

 It really helps to have a high-speed blender because it will create a very, very smooth

 As you'll see, this is very, very smooth, just like whipped cream.

 You can use it to enrich a soup or a sauce the way you would with cream.

 Or you could sweeten it and put a little vanilla or perhaps a little liqueur and use it as

 One word of advice though, use it up within three days because it's very, very perishable.

 So in this video I'm going to show you two different feather nail art tutorials.

 I'm going to show you a free handed version where I actually drew feathers on every one

 I recorded that one a couple days ago and I wore it for a couple days but then I wanted

 Feather hair extensions, I think everyone has feather hair extensions right now.

 Feather jewelry, feather earrings, I actually have one up here.

 They kind of remind me of dream catchers but it took me three attempts before I got it

 to where it is now and it's still not perfect but I think the next time I do it it's going

 There's like hot pink and neon green and all these colors if you want to do something a

 But for my first time I wanted to kind of do more of a natural look so that's what I

 So let me know in the comments if you like the drawn on version or the actual feather

 Well I mean it does matter but it can be you know a little bit messy.

 So then we're going to let that dry and then we're going to go in with the last color which

 I haven't put a top coat on them or anything but all I'm doing is I'm putting Sedge Feet

 a top coat on top of the blue, sticking the feather on and then I'm going to do the top

 coat after all the feathers are on if that makes any sense I'll show you.

 So I'm putting a top coat on so that the feather has something sticky to adhere to I guess.

 I'm going to do the rest of my nails with the feathers just like I showed you and I'll

 I actually think my right hand looks better which I am right handed so you'd think it

 would look worse but I kind of discovered that using sharper scissors works a lot better.

 I don't like the bottom of that one but I really can't do anything about it.

 So you can see how much better it looks with the top coat on it.

 But there's really no right or wrong way to put the top coat on.

 You just kind of have to figure out which way the feather is going and kind of work

 You have to let me know which one you like better in the comments below.

 If you have any questions regarding this then I will absolutely be sure to answer that.

 I've already gotten so many compliments on the feathers on my nails.

 I'll have photos of all of this on my blog and my pedicure that I did which I still have

 So I hope this gave you inspiration and you want to try something similar out.

 Send me a photo or leave a video response and I'll talk to you guys soon.

 because the main flavor and there's going to be a lot of salt in the sauce or in the

The cornstarch is going to make a nice little coating on the chicken as we saute

 So most recipes for chili chicken that you've had or you've seen at restaurants, the chicken

So in terms of wasting oil and in terms of health benefits also, we don't

 want to eat a lot of fried foods, we're choosing not to deep fry this recipe.

 So also for the chili chicken, we have these nice dried red chilies.

 mixes the flavor of the chilies throughout the dish as well as release some of those

 So now that we've got our chicken prepped and a lot of our ingredients prepped, we've

 We have four tablespoons of oil heating up on medium to high heat.

And we're going to try and spread it out so it doesn't clump up together.

 And try and put it directly into the oil so that it gets a little bit of oil and it doesn't

 And we're going to mix it so it gets evenly cooked and evenly coated in the oil.

 going to cook it uncovered until the chicken is cooked all the way through.

We've been stirring it constantly, making sure it all is separate

We're going to pull all the chicken to the side, drain out all the excess oil,

 And to that we're going to add in two tablespoons of ginger, two tablespoons of garlic, and

We're now going to add in half a medium onion chopped, and approximately one bell

We've chosen to use three different colors, but you can use any one.

 sauce or to taste, two tablespoons of sambal or any kind of chili sauce, and one tablespoon

 So we're going to toss it until all the sauce gets incorporated well and it becomes a nice

 And of course, if you're a chicken lover, there's no stopping you.

 It's a healthy form of chili chicken that we like that it was not fried.

 it's going to give you the same amount of flavor and just this oomph of flavor.

 and you'd like to see more from us, please don't forget to subscribe and tell your family

And join this delicious chili chicken and join us again on another

 Alright everybody, today we are going to be making pizza de spaghetti, which is a simple and yummy recipe involving leftover spaghetti.

 And I got this recipe from foodnetwork.com, but I've altered it a bit.

 1 half a cup of cheese, plus some extra for garnishing, salt, freshly ground pepper,

 and about 2 cups of leftover spaghetti, as well as 1 fourth a cup of extra virgin olive oil.

 Alright, so in a large bowl you're going to want to beat the eggs, your milk, and your cheese all together,

 So you can probably tell the recipe calls for a half a cup of cheese.

 We like a lot of cheese in this family, so I have obviously used more.

 Parmesan is what is recommended, but I like to use mozzarella with just a little bit of parmesan.

 You're going to want to just reach right into your leftover spaghetti, pull it out,

 I'm obviously holding the camera in one hand, but as you can see, you want to just blend it up really well.

 Just keep pulling apart the spaghetti and flipping it over and mixing up all that egg mixture.

 Get every little bit of spaghetti and all that mixture used up.

 Just keep doing this until every bit of that egg mixture has been moved from the bottom of the bowl

 If I had done that, I'd already be moving on to the cooking portion, but this time we cooked meatballs separately.

 They are just hamburger meat, mozzarella, bell pepper, onion, and some seasoning, breadcrumbs.

 You're going to want to tear them up into bite-sized pieces and add them to your spaghetti mixture.

 Then you're going to want to make sure they are also blended up very, very well within your spaghetti mixture.

 In an at least 10-inch nonstick skillet, add your extra virgin olive oil and heat it over medium heat.

 Once your olive oil is heated, you're going to add the spaghetti and egg mixture directly to the pan,

 Next, you're going to want to cook it for about 8 minutes or until it's turning golden brown.

 You don't really need to do much while it's cooking, but as you can hear, it's really starting to sizzle up, so it's cooking well.

 It's starting to get all bubbly along the sides, and trust me, it's starting to smell delicious.

The original recipe tells you to invert the entire mixture onto a plate.

 First, as you can see, I'm going around the edges, and I'm just starting to gently loosen.

 Start getting deeper and deeper underneath it, just taking my time.

 And then what I'm going to do is I'm going to quarter the whole thing.

 I start by cutting it in half one way, and then I'll cut it in half the other way.

So then I'm going to take one quarter, and I'm going to quickly flip it.

 To me, this is a lot less stressful than trying to flip the whole thing.

 As you can see, it was really getting nice, deep brown crust on the backside.

 Alright, the fire's going, and the pizza di spaghetti is sizzling.

 Now you're going to want to let it cool down before you serve it,

 but I do like to take my spatula and go around the edges to loosen it up a little bit.

 You'll notice I did prefer to use a metal spatula when I cook this dish,

 and that's because I feel it works a little bit better at getting up underneath it than a coated one does.

 Then you can serve it all on a plate, or I just leave it in here.

 It is really, really delicious, and it's a fun way to use your leftover spaghetti.

 Like I said, it tastes great without the meat, but if you like to eat meat, it tastes great with it.

 You can add in extra vegetables, like bell pepper and tomatoes are really good ones, or olives.

 Sometimes we want this more than we even want the original spaghetti.

 Ah, nothing like the right spices to enhance the flavor of a good meal.

 So on my steak that was smothered in gravy, I added spicy vinegar.

 Well, my Scotch bonnet peppers that come to the end of their days.

 I did not want to throw them out so I used them to enhance the flavor of my vinegar.

 Sugar, about 2 tablespoons full of sugar, more or less, to taste, really.

 And what you use or the amount you use depends entirely on you.

 If you want to use white vinegar, it will make your product look that much better, really.

 And this is just a very small one because I am going to make a small amount.

 But keep on doing it, keep on trying because you need the sugar to melt in the vinegar.

 And then what I do, I place this in a microwave oven for about a minute, minute and a half.

 In the meantime, I chopped up my onions and my scotch bonnet pepper and I added pimento

 Put them all in a jar and once that's in the jar, then I added my hot vinegar with sugar.

 I made this last night so it sat in the refrigerator overnight.

 By the way, I had a very good suggestion from a woman I met today and she said, when you

 make your cooking videos, would you please add a shopping list?

 Chances are you have everything you need to make this in your cupboard.

 So I had macaroni and cheese with steak and I added some vinegar to the steak.

 So as always, thank you so very much for watching my videos and please share my videos with

 favorite fruit in the whole wide world, I thought I would share with you today

 they are starch and then when they become black spotted and black, they

 transform into carbohydrates, into simple sugars and then if they become overripe,

 they're not easily digestible, you're putting a strain on your body and

 you're not getting the maximum amount of nutrients from bananas.

 ripen faster, put them in a plastic bag or a paper bag with an apple because

 bananas, when they ripen up, they give off ethylene gas which makes them ripen

When you put them in a bag or in an enclosed space with an apple or two,

 apples give off more ethylene gas so it's gonna make them ripen up faster.

 If you want to avoid that and have more control over the peel, all you have to do

Tip number three is something that most of the people do not know.

 Everybody throws off the banana peel but what you can do with this because it's

 filled with potassium and calcium, this is really good at whitening your teeth.

 So if you just rub the inside of the peel on your teeth for about one minute,

 two minutes, this will really whiten up your teeth because ripen bananas have a

 really high amount of potassium and not only that it won't damage your teeth, it

 will make them stronger because banana peels are also very rich in calcium

 around your feet, just gently rub this on the hardened area and it will soften it

 you know any other tips or tricks when it comes to the amazing bananas.

 I have just learnt that in the United States of America every single day over 1 million

 Well, no longer do you have to buy it in a box when you just need four simple ingredients,

 And you can make a really delicious creamy mac and cheese at home with your own ingredients.

 And then you need a cup, I use cheddar cheese because I find it really nice, a cup of cheddar

 Set aside about a quarter of a cup because you want to use that for the topping a little

 Now, stir and then you just want to put this creamy mac and cheese into a baking dish.

 Preheat your oven to about 320 Fahrenheit and you're just going to bake it for about

 If your kids like spices, a little bit of nutmeg goes beautifully.

 If you want to add in some chopped ham or bacon, you can customise this to however your

 The great thing about four ingredients kids is it's using everyday regular ingredients

 and encouraging you and your children to cook what you usually might make or buy in a box

 You know exactly the ingredients that are going into your dishes to fuel the bodies

 And then just spread it out nice and evenly over the top, the reserved cheese and I had

 So I just chopped that up on the top and then into the oven as I said for 30 to 35 minutes.

 Hi girls, this is Barbie Chan again and now today we're going to be doing the 5 minute

 So, let me show you what are the things you need for this look.

 First, is a black eyeliner, your blush on, your lipstick, or a BB cream or concealer,

 BB cream is the newest range now in the market because it combines concealing, foundation,

 So, for now, we're going to be using this since we're pressed for time.

 I'll use it like the eye concealer and then I'll spread it evenly.

 The good thing about the black eyeliner is if you apply it very close to the lashes or

 the roots of the lashes, it creates the illusion of a thicker lash.

 This makeup is perfect for mothers, for women on the go, for women who woke up late going

 to work and you don't want to look like you just came out of the shower.

 You can even do it while inside the car, while driving, while in the bus, of course not while

 It was brought to my attention by my homegirl Tatiana like a while ago and I just never

 But I looked around on YouTube and the only video I could find was by Jessica Peckway.

 I will leave her link and everything to her video in the description box below.

 And it's basically an alternative to a Bantu Knot Out which is very challenging for a

 I guess it's extremely hard for some reason since I became natural to just have a good

 This was the old finger coil twist out and all I did was one night spray it with a little

 It was slightly damp and all I did was put it in four sections, finger comb it like I

 said and twist it up into some buns and it kind of stretched it out more.

 So what I'm going to do is, I'm going to just put some Shea Moisture Curl Enhancing

 And then after I put that on there, I just follow up with the Argan Natural Exotic Argan

 Now you don't want to add like water or if you do, you don't want to add too much because

 And since it's not too dry, I don't mind combing through it with my faux tangle teaser.

 So what you want to do is you want to take that piece and you're going to take a finger,

 it doesn't matter which one, you can use one finger, two fingers, and you're going to wrap

 And just take it, wrap it around your finger in the direction that you want.

 And you want to bobby pin that down with as many bobby pins as you want.

 I see that one kind of works for me, but some of them I needed two for that.

 So, hopefully it comes out good and I will see you guys in the morning when it's time

 So, yeah, make sure that you guys comment, rate, and subscribe.

 We're going to show you the tools, terminals and methods that we use in our workshop.

 To demonstrate these methods, we're going to make up a small loom to wire this light

 Using the simple British standard 7 colour code, we've made up this short loom and tagged

 We've got here black for earth, three greens which are ignition fed auxiliary feeds.

 You've got R there for reverse, S for stop lights and IR for indicator right and the

 This combination rear light has a bulb holder inside which has five quarter inch spade terminals

 First you feed your wires through the grommet in the back of your light.

 You then need to strip about a quarter of an inch of the insulation from each wire.

 We now cut one inch length of heat shrink to slip onto the wire.

 This F crimp female spade terminal has two crimping areas, one for the insulation and

 And this crimping tool has specially machined jaws to accurately crimp the terminal.

 It also has a jig for holding the terminal in place whilst crimping.

 You insert the wire so the insulation is aligned with the first crimp and the copper aligned

 And there you have a perfect crimp which you can leave like that or as we do, solder it.

 The secret to successful soldering is to keep a clean prepared tip.

 We achieve this by using tinning compound which cleans the tip and a wet sponge.

 We've clamped a small crocodile clip in the vice as a third hand.

 You first need to tin the iron, hold the iron on the job until it gets hot and then

 To activate the heat shrink you can use a regular DIY paint stripping gun.

 Once your joint is cooled, slide the heat shrink to the end of the terminal and warm

 We install these in any section of a wiring loom where we may want to remove a component

 They're available in 2 pin, 3 pin, 4 pin or what you see here, 6 pin.

 We have soldered the female terminals onto the end of our loom.

 This time we're going to slide the heat shrink to just before the spade section.

 Installing heat shrink to here reinforces the joint and also gives you a nice finish

 All you need to do is make sure that the wires match on each side of the plug and socket.

 back up on this old tri-bar tire for the B10 and I wanted to tell you guys

 something that'll help save yourself a little bit of aggravation.

 have got this type that's got automotive style bearings and races in the rims

 it's a real good idea right after you take your lock collar off that holds the

 bearings in place you're going to leave a little divot in the axle shaft.

 best to take a flat file and go around after you clean all the grease off go

 around before you try to take the wheel and tire off okay go all the way around

 it clean any flat or high spots or burrs or anything like that so that when you

 go to pull it off or put it on your bearing just slides right on and off

 just like that and also some people don't put their bearings on tight enough

 their lock collar or they put them on too tight and you can cause premature

 wear in your bearings of course you're only going seven miles an hour top so

 it's no major deal there but I'll show you guys how I lock mine down.

 stems inherently these garden tractors are used for a myriad of different tasks

 some of them will get you into areas where you run the potential if you've

 got your valve stem facing outward that something can come up and catch that

 valve stem knock it off and you've got a flat tire and you're dead in the water

 put your valve stems to the inside always put if you can you know some

 wheels won't allow you to deep dish I've noticed some of the deep dish will not

 allow you to turn your wheel around because the dish is offset but if you

 are able is my knee in the way of this sure is wonder if it's been in the way

 all the time sorry about that anyway put your valve stem to the inside if you can

 and also if your inner bearing which it should if your inner bearing has a

 rubber seal on it make sure it seals good within the wheel in the inside the

 rim to the outside of the race so what I do typically I'll get things started

 I'll get my wheel on I'll get that bearing started and I'll hold it back

 and I'll push it in you guys can't see this part but I'll push it and make sure

 that I've got that seal inside the lip of the rim then I hold with my finger

 and give it a spin if I feel any grit or grinding I know I've got dirt on my

 bearings I'll pull it off I'll pull my bearings off I'll clean them up I feel

 nothing now so now I'm gonna take my sleeve grease still intact set my sleeve

 on and I just push and hold with hand pressure but I make sure that everything

 is seated well and then when I tighten down you don't have to go super tight

 but you do want to go tight enough that you're sure that your lock collar is not

 going to move okay and give it a good tightening there give it another spin

 and there you got it you don't have any side to side play with the wheel moving

 back and forth which will cause uneven wear on the needle bearings and you're

 good to go just put your grease cap back on and you're off and running there you

 go guys another tractor video I'm gonna go through my memory bank here and see

 what other tractor videos guys were asking me about see if I can't get

 another couple put up today so anyway this is Ippo wheel mounting 101 later

 dough to about nine inches this way, this way right here, five inches this way, and

 be over there on the floured surface, but I had moved over here to try to pat it out

I think I will move that over here now and turn so it won't stick to

Press that out until again you have nine by five by three quarters.

 dimension and then come in with that like you're folding a letter and come with it,

 way and now it's ready to roll with a dough roller or pat with your hands and you can

 All right, usually when you're asked to write the equation of a line, they always want your

 answer in slope intercept form just because, you know, writing the equation is not just

 You're going to eventually be graphing them and be doing all kinds of things with them.

 So I want us to see how, even though they tell us to, you know, write it in slope intercept

 Anytime you see these keywords here, write the equation of the line.

 Anytime you see that, then automatically I want you to think of that y minus y1 equals

 Now in order to write the equation, we need to have a point, which we have two of them,

 We can find the slope as long as let's label our points as x1, y1 and x2, y2.

 And remember your formula for your slope, you're going to be using this all the time.

 Now we can use that slope along with our x1, y1 to create our equation of our line.

 So I'm going to have y minus y1 is 2 equals the slope, which we found to be 5 times x

 So if they told us to write it in point-slope form, we'd be done.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to clean this up a bit.

 So now we have y minus 2 equals, we can do our distribution here, which would be 5 times

 We could actually go ahead and add 2 to both sides to put our numbers together.

 That now is in the proper form for slope-intercept, slope-intercept form.

 And if they ask us to graph it, this would be the easiest way to graph it now.

 But I hope that you understand that we write equations using point-slope.

 And then we solve that for y to turn it into slope-intercept form.

 Now even further than that, the third form of the line is called standard form.

 This is a lot of times the way that they present lines to you and say graph this.

 So let's start back from where we just finished at y equals 5x minus 13.

 We can, we can manipulate that into standard form just by moving things around.

 This says that the x's have to come first and then the y's and then the plain numbers.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to subtract 5x from both sides to move it over.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to multiply this entire equation by negative 1.

 You have two big rules when it comes to standard form, which this is standard form.

 The first one is you cannot lead with a negative, which is what we just saw just now.

 And the second one is you cannot have any fractions in your answer.

 So if you have any of your numbers or fractions, you'll have to multiply through by the common

 Today we're going to show you how to change the crisper drawer cover and shelf frame on

 Now to replace this part we simply need to open up the refrigerator section, empty out

 these two crispers, we'll remove the top one first, start by taking the crisper drawer

 Then we'll lift up on the front of the shelf, pull it forward and remove that.

 Remove the crisper, the glass, and again lift up on the front of that shelf, pull it forward

 Now there are two elongated slots on the back end of that shelf, we need to line those up

 with the shelf pins at the back and then lock it into the two pins on the front.

 Replace the glass, slide the crisper into place, same thing with the upper crisper,

 there's two elongated holes there, we slide those over the pins, lock it in on the front,

 my skin gets really dry and so I try to make a shea butter or use all natural moisturizers

 you using it on your hair unless you leave out the perfume part of this.

 the fragrant ingredients out you should be fine to use it on your hair.

 could be good for your hair, it's just the perfume that I made with alcohol and other

So I will be using this though in my mixture today because I want it to

If you've been following me for the years that I've been on YouTube,

 in February of 2011 I made a shea butter tutorial and I used a whole bunch of different ingredients.

 This time I'm using some of those same ingredients and a lot of other different ingredients as

 purchase in Morocco but I do have another argan oil that I'd love to use and that I

 will put the link below for that if you're interested in buying some argan oil.

 is a moisturizer for your skin so I'm just adding this in because I know I'll be using

 about a half a tablespoon of argan oil, and about a half a tablespoon of 100% vitamin

 My mixture was way too oily so I went ahead and added some more shea butter that I had

This is of course not raw or organic but it was nonetheless shea butter

 and it made my mixture a little thicker and the perfect consistency.

 all of your ingredients and you've got the right consistency, go ahead and add your fragrance.

 I took an old Shea Moisture Curl Enhancing Smoothie Jar, cleaned it off, and went ahead

Grab a spatula and get the rest of that shea butter out of that blender.

 mine to settle for about a day just because it's really oily from all of the oils.

 it sits and thickens up a bit, it'll be more like a creamy butter.

 perfect for just right out of the shower for your daily moisturization.

If you have any questions or comments about this recipe or if you have

 a recipe that you use for your body butter, please leave it below.

And if you like this video, give it a thumbs up and let me know if you'd like to

 The bellow is most commonly used in many whirlpool, Maytag, Amana, and Roper washers.

 Our experts give this repair a level 3 skill rating, level 3 being moderate and may require

 A quarter inch nut driver, a flathead screwdriver, a 10 inch extension bar, and a 5 16th inch

 To begin this repair, we must first remove the front and bottom panel, commonly known

 There are three screws in the bottom of the tow panel that need to be removed.

 Using your number 20 Torx screwdriver, remove the middle, right, and left screws by turning

 Take note of the lip on the tow panel as it tucks underneath the front panel.

 We are now ready to remove the spring clamp from the front of the bellow.

 Lift the bottom of the bellow up, then place your flathead screwdriver underneath the spring

 Be careful not to damage the bellow, as it can easily be punctured.

 As you pull the spring forward with your flathead screwdriver, gently pull it towards you until

 To disconnect the bellow from the dispenser tube in the upper left corner of the tub,

 Locate the tub clamp's 5-16th screw by placing your hand in between the outer bellow and

 Then, slightly peel back the bellow and use your 5-16th inch bit and ratchet to loosen

 After the clamp has been loosened enough, remove the bellow from the unit by untucking

 You may need to readjust and situate the clamp to take it out of the washer.

 Take note of the triangular point on the bellow, as it is a guide to show you the top center

 There is also a mark on the top of the tub, corresponding with the triangular point.

 As you can see the bellow has a large and small diameter, the larger diameter of the

 Now, align and lift the point of the bellow to the top center of the tub.

 Then, tuck and push in the large diameter of the bellow all the way around the outer

 Next, feed and insert the tub clamp around the front of the bellow, making sure the 5

 sixteenth screw is facing downward on the right side of the washer.

 Push back the clamp around the lip of the bellow on the inside of the outer tub.

 Using an extension bar with a 5 sixteenth inch bit and ratchet, access the clamp from

 the bottom right side of the washer and turn the screw clockwise until the clamp is snug.

 It may help to use your other hand to hold the clamp as you tighten the screw, as this

 Now, slightly tug the bellow out of the tub to make sure there are no creases or wrinkles.

 Then, re-tuck the bellow over the dispenser tube by using your fingers to stretch the

 Recheck the outer lip to make sure it is fully tucked into place.

 To reinstall the spring clamp that secures the bellow, begin by placing the spring coil

 Now, insert the coil or bottom portion of the spring behind the bellow's lip.

 Then, tuck the spring behind the lip of the bellow by starting on the left and continuing

 Once you get to the right side of the bellow, you will need to use some force to continue

 After you have tucked the spring in, double-check that it is behind the bellow and is secured

 Place the tow panel flush against the front panel and lift upward, sliding the lip into

 While holding the tow panel, use your number 20 Torx screwdriver and reinstall the three

 bottom screws on the panel by turning them clockwise until snug.

 now we are going to make the canvas this is part 2 board making for this and what

 you have to do you have to take the chalk powder and sieve it nicely and

 then take two big spoon like this one tablespoon like this one one two

 spoon two spoon you can take it okay then you have to add one spoon water

 okay just add one spoon water to it just you know mix it nicely till it

 begins no it's you have to make it take your own time and make it into a nice paste like this one

 there is no lump or anything like this one see it is like a butter you know like a butter it was like that

 margarine like this then you have to add okay same one spoon pebicol or pebicol okay just add one

 one spoon one spoon okay then add it to the paste now you are mixing it thoroughly nicely

 it will be like a paste like this so nice when you mix it it is like a smooth one like a butter

 you can mix it thoroughly if you cannot you can do it by your hand also hand will be nicer because

 you can see the lumps or anything over there then what you have to do once you mix this paste

 then you have to spread it on the top of the canvas we made it okay this is the canvas

 see this is a board we made it then we are going to spread it on the top like this

 we are going to spread it nicely you can use the brush also but the brush you know it won't

 you can use anything like that okay brush means the brush fibers will come attached to the board

 therefore you don't know what is going on over there but just take your finger and spread it

 nicely nicely and evenly over there see then later we are going to sand it but no need to worry

 just spread it nicely everywhere just spread it all over the place like this

 spread it nicely and evenly the cloth will be looking very nice

 leave it for a dry part one day in the shadow place leave it for a one day you have to keep it

 otherwise then you know the paste won't be dry very quickly because it is a paste with the

 baby girl you know that's why it will be spread it nicely just spread it nicely and then leave

 it under shadow place this is the canvas making okay we made the canvas later we will sand it

 okay this is the canvas we made it okay we will leave it in the shadow place leave it to dry for

 give it a thumbs up or subscribe if you haven't done that already.

Then you fold the paper at a right angle and try to make sure that it is completely

The more uneven the paper is, or the more uneven you fold it, the worse it

 good right angle the first time, you just follow the crease down into the bottom and

So when you open it, it will look like a crisscross in the middle of your paper.

 a sandwich style and just push in the two outer pieces so they fold inwards.

See I have to redo it myself because I choose the wrong length to make it.

 sure they're, if it's like a centimeter or two short, that's fine.

Fold back the top of the paper without bringing down the two top corners

 look even and with nice lines and make sure you press it down so that it stays.

 going to fold over the paper into the little pockets that are there.

 see what they look like better if you don't already see how it looks on your piece of

So you just fold it over into the little pocket that you see there.

Next you're going to flip over the little top papers at an angle.

 sure you remember which type of angle you flip it down at because you want them both

 if they don't go down around the same angle they might end up looking like sided and you

 don't want the peaks of the heart to look completely different.

 If you want to give it another press down around the entire thing then you're good.

 write save the date, the date, and our names on them with some markers and invitations

 forget to comment or subscribe if you're not already subscribed.

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to make half of this recipe.

 This is good for your leftover bread before you guys throw it out.

 You guys can go ahead and just cut it up and make it into squares.

 And what we're going to do is we're going to add the canned milk.

 And we're going to also just mix this up a little bit here just to break these eggs up.

 Now if you're not too happy with the taste of nutmeg, don't put so much.

 We're also going to add our raisins which I already plumped in the water.

 Hi, I'm Bella of Vox and Vox of Hairstyles, and I'm just going to teach you how to dress

 So I'm just going to start by getting three sections of hair, and just doing a regular

 We have lots of tutorials on how to do this, and I will link them below if you just go

 So just keep French braiding, and then when I get to about to here, I like to stop and

 tug on my braid so it fits my head shape, and then just regular braid the rest of the

 Now push it up how you want, but my bangs are in my way so I'm going to get rid of those

 And you don't even need an elastic, you can just bobby pin it back once you get it to

 Bobby pin to each side so they won't come out, and then go back and fix your braid how

 And you can do it however you want, however high or low you want, but I'm just going to

 So just brush it into place, put in your elastic, and then once you have your ponytail in, fluff

 it out so that it looks really wide, and then get a piece of hair and wrap it all the way

 around your ponytail until you run out of hair, and then pin it in the back, behind

 And then hold the knot of your hair, and then brush your ponytail.

 Today's recipe is lasagna rolls, a great alternative to traditional lasagna.

 I'm just going to get started here by adding a bit of oil to a preheated pan.

 Then we're just going to brown this up and this is going to take somewhere in the neighborhood

 After that, we're going to add this to about a thousand grams of spaghetti sauce.

 And of course you can season this according to your taste, but this is good for me.

 Meanwhile what you want to do is cook your lasagna noodles in some salted boiling water

 While the pasta is cooking, don't forget to click subscribe because you don't want to

 Okay, what we're going to do now is spread some sauce onto a baking dish.

 Insert a toothpick into the middle just to hold everything together.

 Okay what we're going to do now is slip this into a 350 degree preheated oven for about

 These are so meaty, cheesy, and an all time favorite party hit.

 ends of wires, either for the end of the ear wire or whatever it is that you're doing.

 the most important thing to do, I believe, is to use flush nose, the best that you can

 afford, and snip the ends so that this flat side is against the wire.

 a lot of the pointiness, a lot of the sharp edges on your wire.

 also called a burr cup, a deburrer, it's called a lot of things.

 it's inside, I don't know if you'll be able to see it, but it's got little file-like things

 is a little bit too small and it won't quite touch the burrs, I've gotten into the habit

 can also buy burr cups in different sizes to go on your Dremel.

I'm not going to bother bringing those down right now, but you can

 option if you don't have any of those is to take a jewelry file, or any file, even a fingernail

 Today I will demonstrate how to change the trimmer head for an echo trimmer.

 So as you can see I have this setup just to hold on the vise but it's not really necessary.

 So the trimmer head as you can notice it has a cut off here and inside you will notice

 a hole that you need to align with this cut off, then you put a screw or anything else

 And that's it, you unscrew this unit now as it is screwing here, just be aware that the

 So now we take a different trimmer head that we have available and we just screw it in.

 Here we have special blades for bushing, to replace this you just push it in.

 You push on the bottom here, this, and you push this red pin, you press it down and

 That's it, press this red, push this in, and as you can notice I am working with one

 Ok so now the blades they are off, here I have three spares and a few other spares,

 you just align with the hole, push it in, press the button, pull it out.

 Align, have the same direction, push it in, lock it in place, with one hand press in,

 you can pull all the way through so there's more ends poking out

 if you're having a hard time grabbing that last ponytail holder

 but you probably won't need to if you got the hair in there good enough

 Mario, I'm going to be teaching you the foot position for the tray flip.

 Now, your back foot is going to want to be pointed at an angle of like 45 degrees

 so you can get that real nice scoop to get the full 360 degree shove.

 And your front foot is either going to be like a normal kick flip for some people

 while other people will have it off more or right in the middle of their foot.

 So you're going to want to vary up your positions, you know, like keep it in like your mid-vicinity of your board.

 You want to be able to be balanced on your board before you do it.

 And now Eric is going to be teaching you the foot motion for the tray flip.

 Okay, to do the tray flip, your back foot, like he says, is going to be like this.

 And you have to do it really hard because it's all about the back foot.

 Your front foot comes straight out, but see how the board's like this?

 It can't just come straight out because then it's not going to flip properly.

 But the board will still be doing the 360, but it will just flip that way.

 And if you don't come straight out and your foot follows the board,

 like if you learn three shoves and you're trying to flip with three shove,

 that's not going to work because for three shoves your foot follows the board.

 For a tray flip, your foot doesn't even come close to the board.

 Hi, I'm Stephanie and I'm Camille and we're from Six Sister Stuff

 So all you need is one yellow cake mix, just the mix, not the prepared cake, just the powder

 on the inside, and then you need 1 third cup of vegetable oil, 2 thirds cup of milk, and

 then 2 tablespoons of flour and 1 teaspoon of baking powder, then you'll add 3 eggs,

 And then 1-2 cups of blueberries, I love them full of blueberries so I usually go heavier

 on those, but in the winter time you can use frozen too, so any kind of berry works.

 I was just going to say you can substitute it for raspberries, for blackberries, for

 Yep, you want each cupcake to be about, well each cupcake liner to be about 2 thirds full

 That's okay, if it's messy that's how you know it's going to be good.

 The other thing I love to make these with my kids and let them help with the mixing,

 with the blueberries, any way that they can help and be involved they love.

 You can find thousands of recipes just like this one on our site, SixSisterStuff.com or

I'm going to be showing you how I made my vino straps to go around

As you can see I have two of them and I cut them, I think I made them 10 feet

 can see I just folded the rope in half and then tied a bunch of knots, just like a knot

I'll show you how I connect these to a tree and I'll show you how I connect

I will connect this cord, I'll just wrap it around the tree like this, pull

 it around and then, it's hard to do this with one hand, but I'll take this other string

 it on one that I think will be long enough and then pull the hammock out of the rest

 and I would take the rest of the hammock and just connect it onto the other loop.

Now what we need to know is where we're putting our marks so we know where to cut.

 I can probably do this when it's spinning but then it will get blue everywhere including probably on my bike and my wife's blaster.

 Now the reason we had to take all that material off is because we want to get rid of this cone shape in here.

If you don't take enough off you're going to be left with a remnant of that.

 A remnant left behind like a small cone I don't think will affect very much.

 I've got it up really good so we can see what the hell we're doing.

 I've done it with porting so I haven't done it on the actual head.

Hell I might even do a video later showing you how to do this on a drill press.

You just got to set it up right and I bet you I can make it work.

 We're going to line this up properly how it would be on the engine when it's dry.

And we'll be able to get a rough scribe around the center of the hole.

 And once we get our scribed line where the outside of our combustion chamber is.

You want a nice sealing surface that's going to match up with that diameter.

 This is kind of some of the specs we're going to shoot for here.

 Hi, I'm Chloe and I'm an apprentice here at River Cottage and I'm really excited to be

 at foodrevolutionday.com and you can also find the recipe just under here.

 to start by melting 200 grams of dark chocolate, 70% cocoa solids.

 touching the water just to stop your chocolate from going a bit grainy.

I've already peeled and grated mine but if you've got a food processor with

 free range egg yolks and I'm going to keep the whites in a separate clean bowl.

 got my eggs in my beetroot I'm going to add my dry ingredients.

 a teaspoon of baking powder, a tablespoon of cocoa powder, 150 grams of golden caster

 sugar and lastly 120 grams of ground almonds and mix all those ingredients together.

 looking for everything to be a nice deep purple colour with no ground almonds or caster sugar

So now that everything's incorporated I can add my melted chocolate.

 egg whites that I saved earlier I'm going to give these a whisk.

 peaks with these so if you're doing it with an electric whisk it'll be pretty quick but

 to loosen up the mixture a little bit and then I'm going to add the rest.

 to be really careful not to knock out all the air because I want the cake to be really

It's quite a loose wet batter but it makes for a really deliciously

 already I've got a piece of grease proof paper at the bottom, I've oiled the sides and then

 piece of parchment paper around the edges but it's just a little bit more fiddly.

 I'm just going to use a palette knife just to smooth out the top so I get a nice even

Now that's ready I'm going to pop it into a preheated oven, mine's at 180 degrees

 around the edge to make it a little bit easier when this comes out of the tin.

 finish off I've just melted an extra 100 grams of chocolate and I'm just going to drizzle

I've just popped a bit of baking parchment underneath the cake just

And now it's decorated with chocolate I'm just going to pop it on a serving

 plate and it's now ready for a little bit of artistic licence with some lovely edible

I've got a lovely little marigold which I've just picked from the River Cottage

 give it a thumbs up and leave some comments below and if you want to see more Food Revolution

 recipes don't forget to check out the playlist where we've got lots of recipes from all over

 It's Christmas outside, let's make it Christmas inside with a holiday stinger.

 Now at Christmas time, it's nice to go out and have a drink at a bar, watch the frantic

 They've got beautiful big windows that look out upon the street, and I love to go down

 I've taken some liberties with it, liberties that the traditional stinger drinkers out

 there may not quite approve of, but I think it makes for a great holiday cocktail.

 We're going to simply start off with an ounce and a half of brandy, or in this case we're

 using a cognac, and then a half ounce of green creme de menthe.

 Now here's where some of those stinger aficionados out there might say, green creme de menthe,

 Well, I think it's actually quite suitable for the Christmas season because it makes

 The flavor is still the same, but I think it helps get that holiday spirit a bit.

 You'll notice I've chosen a rather small glass and it wasn't an awful lot of ingredients

 Part of the reason for that is the stinger is a little bit of a flavorful, sweet, minty

 Now in my case I'm using some gourmet maraschino cherries that aren't quite the same neon red

 that we normally have in bars and stuff like that, which a lot of us might kind of say,

 This is actually a drink, if you've got one of those neon cherries, it works really well

 I just don't happen to have any of those neon cherries on me, so I have to use these instead.

 And there we end up with a nice holiday drink, the Holiday Stinger.

 So since I already did my foundation, concealer and powder routine

 I'm just going to jump right into the eyebrows and I actually got a new eyebrow product

 It honestly makes my eyebrows look so much more full but natural and I really love that look

 So I'm just filling them in with that and then setting them with the Benefit Gimme Brow

 Then I'm hopping into highlight and blush because I love highlighting

 This is the Benefit High Beam and I place this on the cheekbones, on my cheekbones

 and down the bridge of my nose and in my cupid's bow and it just allows a lot of light into my face

 And then I jump into blush and this is my all-time favorite blush

 It's just an awesome pinky color and I love that especially for spring

 Then to bring a little bit of color to my face because I am very pale right now

 This is the NYC Sunny Bronzer and I love this because it's not orange and it's also not sparkly

 So I just put that to contour my cheekbones and on my forehead.

 I'm going to move into the eyes and first I'm priming them with this Mica eye primer

 And I also am using this revealed palette by Coastal Scents, which I also got in my BoxyCharm

 They give you all these amazing products every single month for $21 a box.

 I love it so much and then this brush that I'm using to highlight my inner corners is also from BoxyCharm

 So as you can tell they give you some pretty dang awesome products

 I have moved on from all their mascaras and now I'm using my Benefit They're Real which I am

 And then I'm using this NYX lipstick, which I also forgot the name of I'm super bad with names

 But I'm just placing this on my lips because it is an awesome spring color and I just think pinks are just awesome

 Okay, I don't really know what else to say except I love pink lipstick

 But I thought it was pretty perfect for springtime if that ever comes here in New York

 But now I'm going to be moving on to the hairstyle and this is my go-to hairstyle right now

 I'm not really up on my trends, but this is how I do my half up half down curled hairstyle

 I put my hair up into a half up half down and then I take my Conair curling wand which I got from Rite Aid

 For $20 and I heat that on the highest possible heat setting and it's really not that complicated

 I also don't have a particular technique, but it seems to work and hopefully you guys like how it looks

 And now I'm going to be showing you guys how to make two amazingly easy and amazingly delicious

 Easter treats and the first one I'm going to be showing you guys how to make is this little

 But you're going to need donuts green food coloring coconut flakes and bunny peeps

 so first start off by taking your coconut flakes and putting them in a bowl and then you can dye them with as much

I wanted my grass to look really really green, but it's all up to you

 Then you're going to be taking some frosting and using the frosting almost as if it's glue

 So you're going to need to frost the entire inside of your donut hole

 Then you can pack on some of your coconut flakes and this will help the coconut flakes stay on the donut

 Plop that on there and then you can decorate with any other kind of Easter candies that you like

 So for the second treat I'm going to be showing you guys how to make Reese's peanut butter cup eggs and these are awesome

 All you're going to need is peanut butter confection sugar vanilla extract butter chocolate chips and a microwave safe bowl

 So in your bowl, you're going to put in your peanut butter and butter and microwave those for about a minute

 You can just do it in 30 second intervals and pull it out when it looks ready

 Then you're going to put in some of your confection sugar and your vanilla extract and mix those together

 So after stirring those up, this is definitely where it gets kind of messy and kind of tricky

 You're going to need to form your peanut butter into egg shapes and this can be hard

 Especially when it's all gooey then after you've all done with that, you're going to melt up your chocolate

 my personal favorite is milk then you're going to have to dunk in your egg shapes into your chocolate and

 totally worth it because it tastes exactly like a Reese's peanut butter cup egg and

 It also works as a gift if you put it in a little gift bag and give it to some of your friends

 I really hope you guys enjoyed and if you did make sure to give it a big thumbs up and click the screen right now

 to check out my last video and also don't forget to check out my social media sites and

 Hello everyone, I'm going to show you how to repair the seal on a Skoda Favia 06 model.

 If you own one you'll probably get maybe damp, wet carpet in the back of the car.

 usually because this unit here, which the rainwater from the windows goes down, it leaks

 as a gasket over down here that leaks so it's perished and the water will then trickle into

Now I had a lot of trouble doing this, I had a lot of trouble getting the door

If you look on the door panel, if I lean it up against the car, there, to

 get the, what I had to do was I had to take the top of the armrest off first of all by

 did using a metal spatula, make sure you put a cloth over it so you don't damage the plastic.

 After you've done that you've got two screws, one here and one there.

 just clips on so you just pull the neck up and it comes straight off, simple as that.

 After you've done that you've also got to unhook that, which is for the handle mechanism,

 you've done that the door panel will still sit solid on the car door.

 unfortunately I ended up snapping all of them so I'll have to buy some new clips.

 Now as I said earlier, when I'm working at the top of the cake, I like to use a little

 This is an 8 inch cake, and this size border up here would look a little too heavy for

 So I'm going to take off this number 22, and I'm going to switch to a 16, 17 or 18 is good

 And I could do the star border around the top edge like this, but I prefer a shell,

 Working on the top edge of the cake, you should be able to pick that up fairly easy.

 Now to me, this top of the garland looks a little bit loose and unfinished, so I'm going

 to just finish it off by just putting a little star right around the top of each of the garlands.

 Now my cake needs some leaves, and I might want to add some extra color around the bottom.

 A very easy border to add some color, and it's a tip that I've already been using, is

 And I used to play the flute when I was in band, and I can't figure out why they call

 And then we're going to finish off in a minute here by putting the leaves on it.

 This is the leaf tip that I told you in another video that I like the best.

 It's just this nice little V-shaped, if I had some icing out of there, you could see

 In order to make leaves with it, you want to set it down near the surface of the cake

 And I'm going to just use a little bit of a heavy pressure to begin with, and then pull

 I can make them real roughly, all dependent upon the amount of pressure and the way that

 So I'm going to just add some leaves on this cake here and finish off this little design.

 And if I have a little stem sticking out or a nice little empty spot somewhere, it's an

 And there we go, we have a nicely decorated cake and we are done.

I want to go back to taking care of our hair in the shower and how to comb our hair properly.

 It's important to keep it healthy by not doing certain things to damage your hair.

 Most of the time people will say comb the hair when it's dry to prevent damage, but that's wrong.

 To separate the hair, you want to hold it with one hand down and the other one above as if you were drawing a straw.

 If for any reason your hair gets tangled beyond any way that you can help it, then get a scissor and cut it off.

 This is going to help detangle my hair even more before I get into the shower and start my process of washing my hair.

 The shampoo I'm using today is nothing but Clarifying Shampoo, which is a gentle deep cleansing shampoo for the scalp.

 It has no petroleum, minerals, sulfate, parabens, colorants or anything damaging for the curly hair.

I concentrate on giving my scalp a massage with the shampoo and cleaning all the dirt and grime from the hair.

 Any excess from the shampoo will go down my hair and will clean my hair.

 This shampoo I don't use very often because I don't need to clarify every single week.

 The second time that I wash my hair is going to be with a conditioner.

It could be a cold washing conditioner or a regular conditioner.

 This time, I apply it throughout my hair to clean anything that wasn't cleaned the first time with the shampoo.

 You want to get a big amount of conditioner to start detangling the hair.

 But if you have more hair than I do, it might take an hour to two hours.

 That's why it's good to only wash your hair once a week because then you get it out of the way and you don't damage your hair as much.

 Then you go to the second section and you untangle that section and bring it all the way down.

 Separating my hair like this into sections makes it easy to detangle.

 To detangle, if your hair is thick and very, very curly, leave the conditioner in your hair.

 The conditioner will hydrate your hair and will leave your curl shiny and bouncy.

 My hair is not very thick so I will remove the conditioner with cool water.

 Now to style my hair, I will use a little bit of the Coconut Hibiscus Curl and Shine Conditioner.

 I will apply it to my hair, to the ends, and except for the roots.

 That's why it's good to apply conditioner because it won't leave it sticky or crunchy.

 The conditioner weighs your hair down, which is something that we want.

 The next product that I'm using is the Curling Gel Souffle French Moisture.

 Or my favorite, the finger coiling, where you take a small piece of hair and you start coiling it with your finger.

 You take one section and you start finger coiling it in the way that your hair curls.

 And this process of defining my hair like this, finger coiling or raking my fingers through my hair,

 And to get more volume on my hair, I apply two clips in the front and one on the back.

 And what I do to divide my hair once the hair is dry, which takes two to two and a half hours,

 and then I separate that section into one or two or even three curls.

 I'm planting several, like four or five rows of tomatoes today,

 but that roll of... this roll of... it's literally gopher wire.

 Alright, now that you have all your vegetables cut up, you have the vegetables here, red cabbage, green cabbage, carrots, yellow squash, zucchini squash, cucumbers, butternut squash, you have onion, and you have salad.

 Now let's go ahead and make the nine layer vegetable garden salad.

 Now don't forget you have the number five cone, which is your crinkle cut cone.

 Take your carrot, remember put it in the back of the machine like this.

 Now if you want to use your number five cone for the carrot, go right ahead.

 It's going to give you a nice crinkle cut carrot, and I'll do that one next.

 As I'm pushing the carrot down, I'm also turning the carrot, just a little bit.

 When you get your fingers down to the end, you can either take it out, throw it away, put your hand inside here to get the remaining vegetables out.

 Remember your guide, pinky finger, ring finger, set it on like that.

 And again, take it all the way down to the end and just let it go.

 As you can see, I'm turning the carrot as it goes down the back of the hopper, just like this.

 Take the number five cone off, add your number two cone back on there.

 You're going to have a nice, fresh, julienne cut yellow squash.

 All you're doing is setting it on top of the cone and turning the handle.

 You're using your finger, your ring finger, and your pinky as your guides.

 As you're holding the zucchini, make sure you give it a little push.

 Put a little pressure on top of it so it goes through the cone nice and easily.

 You're pushing down on the red cabbage, green cabbage, against the cone for a nice shredded cut.

 So what we're doing, putting the celery right on top like this.

 Again, you want to put the onion between your two fingers and your thumb on top.

 There's your nice, fresh shredded onion for your favorite salad, sautés, soups, stir fries.

 Leave the skin on all your vegetables to keep all the vitamins intact.

 You gotta love those nostalgic recipes like broccoli and cheese sauce.

 I've got a great recipe for this, but it has one little sneaky advantage to it.

 It's got tons of calcium in it, lots of vitamins and minerals, and it's dirt simple to make.

 So what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna put in some nutritional yeast, and this is actually

 It's very high in B vitamins and other minerals as well, and you only need a little bit of

 So I'm gonna put this into a bowl, and then I'm gonna add some spices to it, a little

 And already it's starting to look a little bit like cheese sauce, but we're not done

 And then to really give the cheese sauce a nice buttery flavor, I'm gonna add in just

 So next we're gonna add in about three cups of finely chopped broccoli florets.

 They have a lot more vitamins, a lot more minerals, and they taste really, really delicious.

 But by all means, if you'd like this as a warm dish, just give these a light steam for

 And then I'm gonna stir this around so that the broccoli is well tossed with the cheese

 You wanna make sure that, of course, the broccoli is evenly coated.

 And then what I like to do is sprinkle this with a little bit of hemp seeds.

 A great, healthy dish with that classic broccoli and cheese flavor without any of the guilt.

 For more food, health, life, and fabulousness, visit JulieMorris.net.

 Oh, she's going to help me shuck corn, but she's not going to be too happy.

 So all the corn is going to go into there because I could put it in my fridge, but we

 And so my guess is that corn, very nice, beautiful corn, is pretty much the same as

 So there's my nice corn and we're going to pressure cook corn today.

 So if I stand over here, actually a little bit, I was kind of centering myself.

 I don't know what the different style or how they make sweet corn versus peaches and

 Now depending on your pressure cooker, there's a line inside and that's how much water you

 Pressure cooking corn is about the same as boiling corn, just a little bit faster.

 What we're going to do now is just turn it on and just let it pop.

 I'll show you whenever I take her off because I don't really want to be too close while

 And the neat thing about this, on this side, this is our pressure release valve, just in

 It's our secondary valve, just in case this thing blows a gasket.

 They say three minutes, but we go seven to ten just to make it extra soft.

 So start your timers for five to ten minutes, depending on how soft you like them.

 Okay, so as we can hear and see that pressure is being released.

 Now just before I crack this baby open, I just want to make sure to let you know that

 Some pressure cookers require more, some pressure cookers require less.

 So some corn, depending on how good the corn is or bad, or just different qualities.

 I don't know if my pressure cooker gets to that pressure, but we're going to crack this

 Any questions, comments, or ideas, please feel free to email me.

 I know I have one right now, currently, but I know lots of you guys are watching, so thank

 And then I have some moisture sauce, some fresh lemon, black pepper, and a lot of kosher

 salt because I'm going to add some fresh vegetables so we really want to pop the flavor.

 And you can always add a little bit of hot sauce to make it even a little spicier.

 I have a half a red bell pepper here and I'm just going to kind of coarsely cut it up because

 my Vitamix blender is really going to blend this up so you don't have to cut things up

 I'm going to blend it on my Vitamix Bar Boss Advance on setting number three.

 Setting number three really gets it to a nice consistency that I like.

 The other really key component to this Bloody Mary is the Bloody Good infused vodka.

 It's vodka with sun dried tomatoes and that's what kind of gives it this really golden color.

 Fresh basil, a little bit of thyme, garlic, chili pepper, depending upon how spicy you

 I have a glass that I have done a really nice Bloody Mary rim on.

 If you're doing rims on your glass, you can cut a lemon like this, just kind of in a little

 V shape like that, and just rim it around your glass, pressing it in.

 And then you can just press it into your salt just like this so you get a really nice, wide,

 About an ounce and a half or two ounces, depending upon how strong you like it.

 I'm using my hand so that I don't disrupt any of my really pretty salt rim.

 I have some olives, some salamis, some cheeses, tomatoes, a little bit of rosemary.

 And then if you want to, you can grate a little bit of fresh horseradish just over

 the top too to give it a little extra pizzazz, a little extra heat.

 Hey guys, it's your girl ShadyLane2121 coming at you with a quick healthy meal that I'm

 What you're going to need is three egg whites, which I had three large eggs cracked and got

 the egg whites, some cooking spray for your griddle, so you're going to need a waffle

 You're going to need a protein powder, some milk, skim milk because it's fat free, rice

 I'm going to use some blue agave sweetener for the syrup instead of regular syrup because

 I eat bacon and eggs for dinner, so I don't want to add any extra yolks.

 I got it at the swap meet flea market in your area, it might be.

 We're going to let those cook, and I'll come back and show you the finished product.

 I put on some I Can't Believe It's Not Butter spray and the agave sweetener.

 For your carbs, 38 grams of carbs, 4 grams of fiber, only 5.8 grams of sugar.

 This is going to be my Breaking Fast meal, so 50 grams of protein right off the bat.

 all these delicious ingredients into your yogurt and you can either use a bowl and eat

 it at home or pop this into your favorite to-go container to eat this on the road.

 is optional but if you like a little bit of spice I recommend adding a dash of cinnamon

For our final breakfast option this is my favorite chia and oat pudding because

 It's the original version, it's a little bit sweet so it adds a nice bit of flavor to this

So from here on out we're just going to dump in our oats and our chia seeds into

I use about a tablespoon full of chia seeds to one packet of oats.

 And then we're going to top this off with about a cup of almond milk.

 to mix this together and then pop this into the fridge overnight.

 in the morning feeling like P. Diddy you're left with this amazing pudding and it tastes

I don't add anything else into this you guys, it's my absolute favorite breakfast

And for my final breakfast option I'm going to show you guys how to make my

So for this we're going to need one frozen banana, vanilla flavoring

So from here all we need to do is dump in our ingredients, make sure

 you peel and chop up your banana and add in a cup of almond milk.

Make sure to give this video a big thumbs up, it really helps me out.

 So then for the bridge, you're gonna play G, and then you're just gonna move your pointer

 You're just gonna hit it, and then you're gonna go to the E minor, B minor, C, and A minor.

 So then for the 4th verse, you're gonna play, it's right after the bridge, you're gonna

 play all the same thing, so after you do the A minor, and then slide down to the C chord

 on the 3rd fret, you're gonna slide back up to the C chord, and you're gonna go back down

 to the 3rd fret, and you're gonna go C, D, C, D, and A minor, and D.

 So for the end of the song, you're just gonna play the same thing you played for the intro,

 you can choose either to play the... or you can play the... but then you just end on a

 Now one of the questions I'm getting a lot of is in regards to calf training.

 Which is unfortunate because as you probably know, there are two major muscle groups in the calves.

 You've got the gastrocnemius, which is that major superficial calf muscle that has that upside down heart shape in a well developed calf

 Now the soleus muscle is a big muscle and by bringing that up it helps to push up the gastroc

 But the only way to properly train your soleus muscle is to do calf raises with your knees bent at a 90 degree angle.

 So the seated calf raise is really the only way that you can adequately target the soleus.

 When you flex the knee, that takes the gastroc out of the equation because the gastroc crosses the knee joint.

 Anytime you flex a muscle at one end, it becomes weaker and doesn't provide as much force and the other muscle then takes over.

 In this case, you bend the knee, the gastroc is providing some assistance but it's mainly the soleus that's doing the work.

 So what do you do if your gym doesn't have a seated calf raise?

 Well, most gyms do have a Smith machine and you can do the seated calf raise right here in the Smith machine.

 I just don't have the room and I really don't need one because I can do seated calves right on the Smith machine.

 Just bring in a bench right up to the Smith machine, drop it down into a low position.

 You're just going to get a block of wood or some gyms have the little calf stretchers that you can use.

 You can just put this in here or you can even use just weight plates.

 Get a couple of 45s and stack them up if you want to get more of a stretch or you don't even need to get the stretch.

 It's really about that upper position and holding that top position.

 I would recommend if your gym has one using the bar pads because when you get really heavy, the weight of the bar on your thighs can get pretty painful.

 And what's going to happen is you'll stop the set before your calves actually fatigue.

 So again, sit in the bench just like you would in a regular bench.

 The bar resting on the top of your lower thighs just above the knee.

 We're going to make green onion pancakes or scallion pancakes or in Chinese.

 You'll often find these scallion pancakes as a local street cuisine

The one thing I'll say is that some places like to make them thin

 Crispy and flaky while others like to make them thick and fluffy

 But today we're going to make the thick flaky crispy on the outside and the soft on the inside

 Scallion pancakes first thing you need is 4 cups or 480 grams of all-purpose flour 2 cups or 470 milliliter of warm water

 Lightly knead the dough just to combine it together to form a dough ball

 Cover the dough ball with a wet towel and let it rest for 20 minutes

 Let's chop the green onions here of 8 sprigs or 2 for each pancake

 Make sure they are really thin slices, especially for the roots part

 Dust your work surface with some flour after 20 minutes take the dough out and use it to make the scallion pancakes

 Dust your work surface with some flour after 20 minutes take the dough out and knead for about 3 to 5 minutes or until the dough is smooth

 Sprinkle some flour on the dough as well to prevent it from sticking by the way

 It'll make a banging combination or chili oil with toasted sesame seeds and garlic chive

 But why not be imaginative and think outside the box once the dough is smooth let it rest for about 20 to 30 minutes

 After 20 to 30 minutes dust the dough with some flour and roll the dough out

 Make four equal proportional cuts if you want to make it smaller you can cut it into about five or six

 Sprinkle some flour on the dough and your rolling pin as well as your work surface

Here's a tip notice how the dough doesn't retract when I roll it out

The roll out dough should be roughly about three hands wide side by side

 Sprinkle approximately 1 teaspoon to 3 quarter teaspoon of salt and spread it evenly

 Then tuck one side in and roll as if you're making a cinnamon and then bun

 Sprinkle some more flour on top and on the bottom and lightly press it down

 Then roll the dough out this time a little bit thicker than the first time

 Then roll the dough out this time a little bit thicker than the last one

 Add the green onion pancake in and you should hear a tsss sound.

 After 2 minutes, flip the pancake over and cover it with the lid again.

 After the 2 minutes, flip the pancake over and check the other side.

 In order to make the outside crispy, we're going to brush it with a little bit more oil on both sides

Due to the humongous size of this pancake, you want to make sure to move the pan around

You see, adding boiling water directly to the flour, you actually denature the proteins

 Some degree of the gluten can still be formed, but because cooked proteins aren't nearly as stretchy as raw ones

 It's not as elastic as cold water dough, therefore easier to use

 On the other hand, if you use warm water, gluten is formed through kneading, which makes the dough tighter and more elastic

 Upon initial rolling, we want to roll the dough out to approximately 5mm thin

 Rolling it thin will create multiple layers in the middle, thus the soft texture

 That's why it's crucial we let the dough rest for 30 minutes before we roll it out

 It's sort of like making pizza dough, but at a higher temperature

 Therefore, in my opinion, I think it's better to use water around 120F or 50C

 As this cooks some of the dough, which makes it easier to handle

 Okay guys, so today we're going to look at some attacks from the closed guard.

 Okay, so the idea of this sequence here is that always in the closed guard I'm

 looking to break my partner down so I could attack my submission holds.

 situation where my partner has good posture and it's challenging for me to

 he's pushing me down, he's got good posture, he's sitting his hips back and

 situation where I'm going to look, instead of trying to bring him forward

 important thing about coming up and attacking my partner is the angle that I

 lead, it's going to be much easier for me to come up diagonally across the arm.

 I try to sit up with my right shoulder, it's pretty easy for my partner to hold

 perpendicular angle is going to make it very challenging for your partner to

And it's really important that my fingers are facing backwards so I

 here is I'm going to try to put my armpit on top of my partner's shoulder.

 my hips up and I'm going to keep trying to walk my hand up so that I get my hips

Now that I've come up, a lot of things will happen here but even the

 good thing about this position is even if I get pushed down to the ground,

 I can bring my partner down with me and now I have him back into a position where

 So if my partner is sitting down, I'm going to grab onto his wrist.

 plant my foot on the ground and I'm going to open up my hips so that I get

 There's going to be space now and I want to push that arm through.

 arm in and then I'm just going to use my hips to heist him over.

 Okay, so first thing, hip movement, get an angle, come up and over, okay, got my hand

I'm going to control my partner's arm and then I'm going to turn

 But today we will be making French toast because it has been requested by several people.

 But I'm going to go ahead and cut it and set it aside and let it dry out just a little bit before I cook it while I mix up my eggs and stuff.

 So it's basically like you make sort of a custard mix with eggs and milk and a little sugar and you dip your sort of dried out bread in that.

 First I'm going to whisk these up or beat them, scramble them, whatever.

 Okay, now I'm going to put in a little bit of vanilla, like maybe half a teaspoon or whatever that was.

 I'm going to use my little microplane and put in about a teaspoon of orange zest.

 Okay, I'll use this very clean spoon to put in a couple teaspoons of sugar,

 I'm going to put a tablespoon of butter down and get that swirly around,

 cover my deely whopper, and probably could cook two at a time on this griddle.

 Turn it down a little bit to about a medium heat, and then I got my bread.

 I wish it was a little more stale, but what are you going to do?

 Okay, so just sort of dip each side in it, shake off any excess,

 but I'm going to just taste the purity of the French toast itself.

 I'm going to eat some more, because I haven't had breakfast yet.

 Check out the website for the recipe, and leave some comments if you wish,

 So HilahCooking.com for the recipe and all the information that you need

 This is my first video in front of the camera so if I act a little goofy it's because I'm

 I'm here to do a video on what I picked up today, the Aquatec CO2 regulator.

 It came with the Aquatec CO2 bubble counter, some tubing, and so all I really needed was

 Hopefully that works well, if not I'm going to find me another one.

 Next thing you want to do, but before you put that on you want to turn the needle valve

 all the way to the right so make sure it's not on before you screw it on.

 Then you want to insert the tubing into the nut, put the tubing, connect the tubing to

 Then at the end of this tubing it connects to the bubble counter.

 On the bottom of the bubble counter I used a clip because I'm going to put it on the

 outside of the tank instead of putting it inside with a suction cup.

 Then I cut the tubing and I put another piece of tubing which will be for the diffuser and

 I plugged it in, I turned the needle valve to the right or left, opened it up a little

 I will post pictures, post updates weekly or whenever I notice a difference.

 Today I'm going to walk you through just how easy it is to make delicious flaky southern buttermilk biscuits that nobody would ever know are gluten free.

 I used 2 cups of my Jewel's Gluten Free All Purpose Flour, which already includes the xanthan gum, so you don't need to add anything else to it.

 I also used baking powder, gluten free, 10 grams or 2 teaspoons.

 Here I'm using dairy free because it's a potato base and it's non-dairy.

 I also used a half and half or I'm here using a soy based creamer.

 And because I'm not using buttermilk, I'm going to add a little touch of vinegar to it.

 And I'm going to use 4 tablespoons of butter, or here I'm using Earth Balance buttery sticks.

 And a half cup of non-dairy sour cream, or of course you could use regular dairy sour cream.

 I have my 2 cups of Jewel's Gluten Free All Purpose Flour and I'm going to add in my other dry ingredients.

 I use coarse sea salt in here because it actually helps to fluff up the biscuits as they're rising in the oven.

 The salt emits steam and will help with the layering and the flakiness.

 I'm also going to add the vinegar to my soy based creamer here,

 just to make sure that it actually turns into more of a buttermilk consistency.

 If you're using straight buttermilk instead, obviously you don't need to add that.

 I've cut them into smaller pieces here so it's easier for me to integrate them into the flour.

 This is a really handy tool to have, but if you don't have this you could just use 2 knives together.

 You want little tiny balls because just like the salt, when they're in the oven,

 they're going to melt and emit steam, which causes the flakiness in your biscuits that everybody's looking for.

 It's taken me about 20 seconds to integrate the butter into here, into tiny little balls,

 Coconut creamer works great here as well if you're looking for non-dairy.

 And I'm going to add my sour cream, which also is a soy sour cream,

 Just gradually integrate the wet ingredients into the dry with your fork,

 or if you're using a mixing bowl, you can just use a mixing bowl.

 I'm using an electric mixer that will work with the paddle attachment as well.

It's almost fully integrated, and you can see that it's a wet dough.

 So now we have the ball of dough, and all I need is a clean surface to roll it out on.

 I like using a silicone mat, but you could use a clean countertop as well.

 I'm going to take some more of my Joules Gluten-Free All-Purpose Flour

 and sprinkle it here on the surface so that the dough doesn't stick.

 Use something that's very soft and fine like my Joules Gluten-Free Flour

 because you don't want to have a chunky, gritty residue on your nice, flaky biscuits.

 And then lay it out here on my surface that's lightly floured with more of the gluten-free flour.

 And if you want big, thick biscuits, obviously you'll make it a little bit thicker,

 but if you want just a regular kind of biscuit, this is probably about right,

Now, the next key to getting really light, flaky, gluten-free biscuits

 You want to get a cutter like this that's got a sharp lip to it

 So you can use... I've got a set here that's got three different sizes,

 which is nice because this is great for making like a big sausage biscuit,

 This is great for making like a big sausage biscuit, and this is great for lunches.

 So it's nice to have different sizes, but the key here is this nice, sharp edge.

 So you want to place the cutter on there, and you want to go straight down.

 And when you release it, you can see on the edges, it's got some of this flakiness already here.

 and would not let it rise like we want it to when it's in the oven.

 I line my baking sheets with parchment because I don't like to have the greasy stuff on the bottom of my biscuits.

 I like to have a nice, clean biscuit, and so I put parchment down,

 and that means it won't stick to the cookie sheet, but it also isn't greasy.

 You want to fold it back together and pat it out again so that you can then cut out some more biscuits.

 You can use the small cutters now and get a bunch of little guys.

 Again, you get the nice flakiness there that's going to come out when it rises.

 Now I have my sheet of biscuits, and I'm going to poke some holes in it

 just to let the butter or milk or whatever you decide to put on top sort of seep into the biscuits,

 A lot of people will leave their biscuits in the oven too long because they're waiting for them to brown,

 You want to make sure that you brush something on top of your gluten-free biscuits.

 You could brush some melted butter on top, whatever kind of thing like that that you like

 because then the protein from the milk or the butter will actually be what browns in the oven.

 So now you've seen just how easy it is to make these delicious southern buttermilk biscuits gluten-free.

 First of all, you get these two pieces, and you put a blue piece on the end, and you put two 1x6's in the middle.

 Then you get these two pieces, the windows, and you put one there.

 Then you get these two things, which I don't know what they're called, so I'm just going to call them ovens, pretty much.

 Then you get this piece, and you flip it on like a fax, right here.

 Then you get this piece, and this piece, and you clip them onto the end.

 Then you get the longer one of those pieces, that right there, and you take it and you put it on the end like that.

 You're obviously going to need some support on that, which is where these come in handy, which I will get to in a moment.

 Then you get this piece, which is basically two 1x4s stuck together, but I had to get three smaller ones and clip them onto each other because I couldn't find one.

 Then you get this 1x3, and this another 1x3, and clip them on there.

 Then you get this ladder right here, and you stick it on the end.

 Then you get these binoculars, and you open up the press, and you stick in the binoculars.

 And if you want to advance from this, you can send me your videos, and I'll be happy to look through them and give you a review.

 That's going to line up with the mark I put on the cam tensioner that regulates the drive

 I'm going to take a soft piece of copper tubing here, put it on to this right here, and bang

 The next thing you're going to want to do, let me see if you can see the looseness.

 Okay, you want to pull this brake caliper up and you want to remember that this bushing

 Now you see the axle is sticking out here and I am pulling it more.

 Try to push the tire forward and you want to slip this belt off.

 Welcome to my coffee machine review, today I'm going to show you how to use the De'Longhi

 First of all we're going to add the water recipient to the coffee machine, that goes

 in the back of the coffee machine, and then you cover the coffee machine with the lid.

 So now preparing the coffee, assemble the coffee recipient and add two or three scoops

 You can use the white part of the coffee machine to compress the coffee, and after that you

 can connect the coffee support to the coffee machine, make sure it's well connected to

 Now that the okay light is on, just press the first button and your coffee will start

 For the milk, press the second button and wait the ok light again.

 To produce a creamy coffee, you need to warm up the milk with the hot vapor from the machine.

 And once the foam is ready, just add the milk to the coffee and you have here a homemade cappuccino.

 or Copic, I'm not sure how to say it, markers just over at Hobby Lobby and I wanted to try

 over just that left side again to sort of just make it a little bit darker.

So what I'm going to do is I'm just going to color in all of the interiors

So now after they've all dried I'm going over that one edge a little bit

I think the daintiness of this line looks really good with the more bold

 little kit that it comes in, but I'll have that listed over my blog.

 questions go ahead and leave comments over at YouTube or at my blog and I'll try to get

 I'm going to show you guys my protein chocolate chip coffee cake.

 so take out either a blender or food processor and add in two cups or 160 grams of rolled oats into it and

 Then just blend or process your oats until they look like flour

 Less than 30 seconds later you have some cheap homemade oat flour

 Put your oat flour off to the side and take out a bowl for your wet ingredients

 All the extracts that I'm using can be found at most grocery stores

 One container which is 5.3 ounces or 150 grams of plain fat-free Greek yogurt

 Always like to mention this every so often, but if you don't have a kitchen scale

 I do include a link in the description below to where you can buy it

 Mix your wet ingredients together with either a whisk fork or hand mixer

 Put your wet ingredients off to the side and take out a small bowl for your dry ingredients add in your oat flour

 Four scoops or 120 grams of vanilla protein powder and two tablespoons or 30 grams of sugar-free chocolate chips

 You can also find these at most grocery stores for around two to three dollars as well.

 And now you're just gonna slowly add your dry ingredients to your wet ingredients

 You want to be careful not to over mix so once everything looks mixed together stop mixing

 Preheat your oven on 350 take out a pan and coat it with some nonstick cooking spray

 As you cook your yogurt, you want to make sure that you're not over mixing it

 Pour your yogurt in the pan, and make sure your biscuit goes into the oven fully cooked

 If you don't want to go in for the full cook you can put it in the oven and cook it on a low

 brown sugar which you're going to sprinkle on top and then some ground cinnamon

 As far as the calories go and the whole coffee cake with the chocolate chips there's 1889

 In the whole coffee cake without the chocolate chips there's 1567 calories only 31 grams of fat

 So if you cut the coffee cake with chocolate chips that we made today into 10 pieces

 in each piece there's around 189 calories only 5 grams of fat 20 grams of carbs and 16 grams of protein

 After 25 minutes for me it does look done so I'm just going to take it out

 The easiest way to check if it's done is to take a toothpick stick it in your coffee cake pull it out

 The best part about these angel food pans is that your coffee cake will come right out

 You can pick these up pretty much anywhere but I will include a link in the description below

 As you guys saw the coffee cake is done so now I'm just going to try a bite

 One the texture is really moist like a good coffee cake should be

 If you've ever had a half and half coffee where half of it is hot chocolate

 And by the way if you've never tried that I highly recommend that you do so as soon as possible

 pour your hot coffee over that and then sprinkle some cinnamon on top

 As for a tip in this recipe you don't have to use chocolate chips

 You could use nuts, raisins, apples or anything else you can think of

 If you like this recipe please go ahead and give me a thumbs up

 If you haven't subscribed already and you'd like to you can click right there on the screen coming up

 And by subscribing you'll get an email every week telling you I uploaded a new video

 In this video I'm going to share with you how I created this matte, smoky brown look.

 This is actually going to be my very first getting ready videos, so beware because I

 I'm going to begin with some MAC Prep and Prime Skin Smoother and I like using this

 product because it makes my skin feel smoother and reduces the appearance of fine lines and

 Next I'm going to use the MAC Studio Finish Concealer in a lighter color and I'm just

 going to pat this onto my face to conceal any under eye circles.

 Then in a darker shade, which is quite similar to my skin color, I'm going to conceal other

 My face looks a little bit patchy so I'm going to blend the two different colors together

 with a brush and this is going to make everything look a little bit more cohesive.

 I'm going to use my personally specialized foundation and apply this with a buffing brush.

 This will help add color back to my face and ensure that my skin is all one color.

 With my favorite Makeup Forever Eyebrow Corrector and an angled brush, I'm going to now intensify

 Of course it's not going to come out perfect so I'm just going to use some concealer to

 So I'll be using the Naked Basics Palette from Urban Decay and with a large shader brush

 And I didn't show you but I did prime my lids before with a primer potion.

 Next I'm going to take my tapered blending brush with the color Naked 2 and I'm going

 Now I'm going to add the color Faint and I'm going to tap off any excess and then apply

 And my goal is to actually build up intensity so I'm going to use a crease brush at first

 I'm going to apply this color to my outer corner, to my crease, and to my lower lash

 I'm going back to the color WOS with that same shader brush and I'm going to apply that

 Now with another blending brush I'm just going to take the color Foxy and blend it

 I'm going to highlight my inner corners now so I'm going to take the color Venus with

 a small crease brush and just apply this to my inner corners just to brighten up my eyes

 I'm using Maybelline's gel liner and a pointed liner brush from Japonesque and I'm just going

 The extended line will help elongate my eye shape and just make my eyes look a little

 I'm also going to line the inner rim of my eyelids so I'll tight line with the same gel

 Then with a small accent brush apply some Krave eyeshadow to my lower lash line to hold

 Then I'm going to curl my lashes and then apply some mascara to my upper and lower lashes.

 Moving on to my lips I'm just going to moisturize them with some chapstick and I'm also going

 Then I'll be using MAC's color Strip Down lip pencil to add a matte brown lip color

 To finish off my look I'm going to contour and add a little bit of blush to my cheeks

 but I'm only going to use the color Laguna from NARS because we're going for a matte

 brown look so I think this color works really great for this look.

 For my hair I previously curled them and I've just let my curls set by placing a bobby pin

 So now I'm just going to pull the bobby pins out and let all the curls loose and then I'm

 just going to comb out all of the curls with my fingers like so and style it like how I

 And I have really thin hair so I don't really care to put hairspray or gel or loose in it

 It's a soft brown matte look using the Urban Decay Basics palette.

 Hi, I'm Sheila Kaufman, cookbook author, cooking instructor, culinary lecturer, and

Now once you have eggs in any recipe, if you add anything hot, it's

 make sure that melted margarine is not any hotter than your finger can stand.

 you're going to kill the yeast, your batter won't rise, and you're not going to have donuts.

 with a kitchen towel and put it in a warm spot to rise for about an hour and a half.

You know, when you fry, a lot of oil saturates through the food, but canola

It seals and cooks and everything comes out fried, but not full of greasy oil

 to roll it into, painting it for a second, rolling it in honey.

Thanksgiving is almost here so I'm really excited to team up with some

 other great YouTube channels to bring you the ultimate Thanksgiving guide.

 The pastry that I'm using for my holiday pies is a sweet pastry that I've made before

 and crumbly, and it freezes really well so make sure you check out that video.

 To make the fudge filling, we're going to gently melt the chocolate and the butter in

You can do this gently in the microwave at 30 second intervals or

 Now to our melted chocolate and butter, we are going to add in our brown sugar.

To this, we're going to add in our flour, salt, and vanilla extract.

 As you're mixing it, you'll start to see that this fudge mix is actually just like

 Now to prepare your pie shell, I have lined a 9 inch tin and as you can see, mine is nice

 With your pastry, you want it to hang almost over the lip because sometimes pastry has

 a tendency to shrink and if it does, you won't notice it if you have a little bit of extra

 To create a fancy rim for your pecan pie, we are going to put our fingers on either

 side of the pastry, finger width apart, and then pull a little bit of pastry.

 Once you get the hang of it, it's really quick and easy and you can do it on any pie.

An easy and beautiful way to decorate the crust of a pie so yours

 I also like to dock the base of my pie with a fork just so no air bubbles form.

 You get the best results from your pastry when it's nice and cold so keep this guy in

 Now pour in your lovely fudge filling into your prepared pie crust.

 I feel like during Thanksgiving, sometimes chocolate gets overlooked so I wanted to make

 For the pecan part of this pie, you're simply going to lay toasted pecans all around the

 And this pie is a really lovely twist on the traditional pecan pie.

 Before your pie goes in the oven, we're going to brush it with egg wash to give the pastry

 Now I don't put it on a baking tray because I want to get that direct heat from the bottom

 But we have to let this cool and then at the end of the video, I'll show you what's inside.

 To make the apple and cranberry filling, you're going to start out by peeling and chopping

 And if you don't like cranberries or can't get a hold of them, you can just use all apples

 Brown sugar pairs really well with apples because it kind of makes them taste a little

 Cornstarch thickens the juices in your pie and actually creates a really lovely thick

 To fill your apple and cranberry pie, simply pour in your lovely filling into your prepared

 For our apple pie, we're actually going to put another layer of pastry on top.

 So make sure to egg wash the rim of your pie shell just so the other layer will stick to

 To make the big and bold crust for our apple and cranberry pie, use seasonal cutters to

 It just adds a really nice extra effect to the top of your pie and makes it really unique.

 Then take the lovely pastry layer that you created and place it gently on top.

 And go around the rim and pierce the edges together with your fingers.

 Take a knife and trim away any excess pastry around the edges to give you a nice round

 To make sure that your pastry is sealed together, I like to take a butter knife and then just

 press the two layers together so it seals them well and it also creates a really nice

 Now we have to egg wash it to give it a lovely golden brown color when it's baked.

 Just in case you have any little rips in your pastry or it doesn't look totally round, don't

 You're going to take the little apples that we cut out from our pastry and then just put

 Make sure that you egg wash before you put them down so they stick.

 We're going to bake this pie off at 350 degrees until it's lovely golden brown and bubbling.

 I am going big and bold for the holiday season so if you like this recipe and want to see

 In a large bowl, we're going to add our eggs, pumpkin, evaporated milk, sugar, maple syrup,

 Just like the other pies, we're going to pour our filling into our prepared pie tin.

 This pie combines two of my favorite flavors for the holiday, pumpkin and maple.

 Just like the others, we're going to give this pie a big and bold crust.

 Similar to the apple, I cut out some maple leaves, some acorns, some holly, just really

 seasonal things and we're going to lay them around the edge of this pie.

 I love adding decorations to the crust because not only does it make your pie look great

 We're going to bake this pie at 400 degrees for 15 minutes and then you're going to turn

 Now of course, the proof is in the pudding so let's cut open one of these pies.

 And of course, I'm going to recommend serving these pies with my No Machine Homemade Ice

 Now you have a pie to satisfy anyone's taste this holiday season.

 I hope you all have a fantastic Thanksgiving and make sure you watch all the other great

 Don't forget to subscribe to my channel and I'll see you back here again next Thursday

 Hi, today I'm going to show you how to create a neutral smokey eye that suits everyone,

 First I'm going to apply a primer so that my foundation lasts all day.

 Now I'm going to mix my two favorite foundations and apply them evenly.

 All products and brushes that I'm using are listed below in the info box.

 Now I'm going to take a thick concealer and use it to cover up my under eye circles and

 Now I'm taking a lighter concealer and using it to highlight my nose bridge and the under

 This will make my cheekbones stand out, my nose bridge slimmer, and my lower lip bolder.

 To give my face that fresh sort of look, I'm going to apply a shimmery bronzer all over

 Then I'm going to fill in my eyebrows before doing my eye makeup.

 For my highlight, I'm going to take my Foxy and Booty Call eyeshadows from the Naked 2

 palette and place it under my eyebrow and work it into my inner corner.

 For my base color, I'm mixing Tease and Snakebite and placing that all over the lid up to the

 Then I'm going to mix Blackout and Wide Decay and place that into the crease using a fluffy

 Then I'm just going to use a blending brush to get rid of any harsh lines.

 Finally I'm going to pick up Half Baked Tease on my finger and place it onto the center

 Then taking my gel liner, I'm going to place it on top of the liquid liner to make it extra

 Now I'm taking a turquoise pencil and applying it on my waterline and the lower lash line

 It's okay if you don't have a bright pencil, it just makes the eyeshadow stick better and

 Now we're going to take this turquoise eyeshadow from the Perfusion 108 palette and pat it

 gently onto the lower lash line to avoid any fallout and really pack on that color.

 And now we're going to take these two mascaras again and apply them this time on your lower

 lashes because this way we don't have to mess up our eyeshadow.

 Now you can leave it just like this or if you feel like it's too bright for you, you

 Finally, apply a light pink or nude lipstick because any bright color will clash with the

 If you want, use a setting spray so your makeup lasts all day and overnight.

 It's kind of something I would wear maybe to a special event or even clubbing, it's

 But I thought it would be really pretty if you did wear it on your prom night.

 So firstly as usual, we will be priming our eyelids which I've already done.

 And now I am taking this bronzer from Too Faced and I'm using this as a transition shade

 Now taking this Inglot shadow in 342, I'm just mixing that with the bronzer.

 And this next shadow I used was kind of pointless, I don't know why I even used it but I did

 add that into the crease as well just to help blend it out I guess but it didn't really

 And now taking this colour here, it's like just an off white and I also took like this

 off pink as well and I'm just using that as a highlight shade just to blend everything

 Now I'm just taking this pigment which is pretty much a champagne shade, beige shade,

 I don't know what you want to call it, but I'm just going to be placing this all over

 the lid and then I'm taking this more of a pinky shade and also popping that on top just

 After you've done all that, I am taking this dark brown matte shadow from Inglot in 329

 and I'm just placing this on the outer third of the eye and just blending it up into the

 So just make sure you just keep blending those shadows until it's very seamless, as you can

 tell I had a lot of trouble blending this dark shadow, I have no idea why, it just really

 didn't want to budge but just keep at it and just keep blending and eventually it will

 So next I'm just taking this MAC eyeshadow in Handwritten, that's what it's called and

 it's more of a red tone brown, I just wanted to add it to the look because I felt like

 Just going back with that champagne pink colour, I'm reapplying that to the lid just to bring

 that colour back as it kind of faded through as I was blending.

 So just make sure you reapplied that and it just really helps to make the eyes pop.

 Now I'm just taking this gold kind of pigment, I just popped that in the middle of the lid

 just to further make the eyes, I can't talk, to make the eyes further stand out.

 So I'm just using a gel liner and I'm going to go ahead and, please ignore my face, it's

 So just go ahead and line the top of your eyes or your tight line or whatever it's called

 and your waterline and then I'm going to go ahead and apply some liquid liner, this is

 totally optional but this is more of, I don't know, my personal preference.

 So I went ahead and put some mascara on my top lashes just to prep them for the falsies

 and these are the falsies I'm using which I got from eBay, I'll try to find the seller

 So while I wait for the glue to get tacky, I usually do prime my face in the meantime.

 So I'm just using my trusty MAC Studio Fix Fluid, I do have a very in-depth tutorial

 just with my foundation routine, so I'll link that down below as well if you really want

 And then next I'm taking my MAC Pro Longwear and I'm just concealing under my eyes and

 I also did realise I didn't really highlight in this video like I usually do, but I did

 Okay, so back to the eyes, I'm taking that matte brown again and I'm using that on the

 And because I do have blue eyes, I took this gold colour and that orangey colour and I

 kind of mixed it with the brown just to help my eyes further pop.

 So now I'm just taking a light powder and I'm kind of using that to highlight since

 I just use it under my eyes, a little bit on my nose, chin, above my lip, yeah, I think,

 And after that I just highlight with my MAC Soft and Gentle, very amazing highlighter,

 So after I do that I end up contouring with my Too Faced Chocolate Soleil Matte Bronzer,

 So I'm not really contouring, I'm kind of just bronzing, so if you do want to contour,

 And then go ahead and apply any blush you feel comfortable with.

 So I'm just taking a matte lip liner from Australis, I believe it's in the colour Natural,

 and I go ahead and line my lips and kind of fill them in a little bit.

 And then I take an ELF Matte Lipstick, I can't remember the colour but I will link it below,

 I think it might be in Natural as well, I can't actually remember.

 So I just put that on and then I do use my Inoxa lipstick, yep, one more thing, yep,

 okay, so I'm just taking that lipstick and putting it in the middle just to make my lips

 And that is about it, so I hope you all enjoyed this tutorial and I'll see you in my next

 Hello everybody, my name is Mario Aduenez from Tribest and I'm here today to introduce

 you to the Personal Blender 250XL and the Personal Blender 350XL model.

 Our original Personal Blender 250 comes with two 16 ounce blending cups, two 8 ounce grinding

 cups, as well as a blending blade assembly and a grinding blade assembly.

 Our original Personal Blender 350 model comes with the same accessories as the Personal

 Blender 250 but also includes a mason jar adapter and a set of mason jars to use directly

 Our new XL models have the added benefit of including two 23 ounce blending containers.

 This makes it far easier to blend bulkier leafy vegetables such as kale or simply creating

 a larger amount of the smoothie or beverage that you are producing.

 I'm going to demonstrate the effectiveness of the 23 ounce blending containers today

 What we have here is 4 ounces of pear, 4 ounces of kale, and 4 ounces of banana to which we're

 One of the cool features about the Personal Blender is its ability to pulse or blend continuously.

 You can go ahead and remove the blending blade assembly and attach the commuter cup lid which

 Hi folks, this is Jack Spierko with another Survival Podcast video on YouTube.

 This isn't really going to be a review of the Optimus Crux, I'm going to do that for

 But I really like this tool and it comes as part of a cooking set, so I figured I'd use

 I'm going to go ahead and set this on here and I'm going to tell you what's inside it.

 So you can recreate this using your own ingredients, whether they're from Harmony House or anywhere

 Once we get a boil, not even a real heavy rolling boil, just a boil, we're going to

 go ahead and close it down and let it sit for about five minutes so all those dehydrated

 There's only two ingredients in here that are not from the Harmony House videos, the

 Harmony House sampler pack that I just showed you in the last video.

 Let me give you an idea of what is, well there's three actually, because one is water.

 So what we did is we placed two cups of water in here, so we're trying to boil two cups

 We used a quarter cup of the split peas, which should yield about a half a cup of actual

 I think that's something I probably left out of the last video.

 Most, not all, but most of the dehydrated products about double in size.

 So those little one cup things of beans become roughly two cans of beans when you redo them.

 And then the non-Harmony House product that I used was, I used one teaspoon of Oriented

 Farms Beef Bouillon Base, which is a product I like much more than bouillon cubes.

 It's not quite as good for making up trail packs and things like that.

 You can do it, but it is kind of a moist product, so you kind of have to package it separately.

 That said, it's got a great shelf life, but it has a much better flavor than standard

 Split pea soup usually has that smoky flavor with the Hamish butcher.

 Cumin has a good smoky flavor, so that's why I included that in the recipe.

 I'm going to go ahead and pause the camera so you don't have to sit here and wait for

 it to boil, and I'll come back on when we're starting to get some steam and close to our

 I've actually let it boil for about 30 seconds, and I'm now going to kill it completely.

 And I brought the cutting board out here so that I wouldn't have this hot pot on top of

 I can tell you I've already tasted one of the Hamish bits, and it's not bad.

 But if anybody says they taste just like ham, I don't quite buy that, and I won't tell you

 I brought a cold beer to enjoy this with, and it's been about five minutes, and we're

 What I'm actually going to do is I'm going to ladle some of this out, and since I'm camera

 shooting alone today, and I don't have the camera woman with me, I'm not going to be

 They say the proof is in the pudding, so I'll go ahead and give it a taste and give you

 It's kind of a thinner broth, more like a beef broth, and we did use a beef base because

 Let's try a hamish bit now that it's had a little bit more time.

 It tastes like ham-flavored, textured soy protein, which is what it is.

 I would never complain about eating this on the trail or eating this during an emergency

 power outage or something where we had to rely on cooking with a camp stove or something

 My thoughts on the Harmony House products are really good, really flexible.

 It took me two minutes to put this together, folks, before I got all the camera and everything

 I didn't want to end up with this mush pile, but you could definitely go double the peas.

 I'm going to eat this, and then I'll get to load it up on YouTube.

 Hey, Harmony House, give it a shot, especially this deluxe sampler pack.

 I think we can have a lot of fun experimenting together and coming up with some cool ideas.

 This has been Jack Spierko with another Survival Podcast video, helping you figure out how

 to live that better life if times get tough or even if they don't.

 Quilty is brought to you by APQS, handcrafted quilting machines

 Aurifil, Aurifil Italian thread, perfectly suited for all your quilting projects

 This is a Blocks of GoGo show and we're going to talk about the Strawberry

 Here is the block and a log cabin block traditionally is one side is light.

 and the way you place the block within your quilt gives you lots of different

 So it's like you have these big, all the whites corners are coming together.

 the light corners are coming together and the red are coming together until,

 And it's just such an easy twist on a traditional log cabin block.

 So she's done a nice job and here we have made our own version of Cynthia's log

 this is the same block that Cynthia has made and you can look in the magazine and

 your logs are always different lengths because you build from the center and go

 there are skinny logs that make up the light half and thicker logs that make up

 building a log cabin takes a little time, lots of wood, lots of chopping involved.

 So what we do is block by block, I mean, uh, sorry, piece by piece.

 We just sew two pieces together and then we add a third piece and then we sew

 and then we add the fourth piece and we just go keep going around.

 So I'm going to sew these two together and then I'm going to add the third

 And then what I'm going to do is just grab my other piece from behind me and

 Now because this is just such a short seam, it's really nothing major.

 if you can't wear sparkles on a Tuesday afternoon, where can you,

 So you put this together and it should be fairly obvious if you've cut your logs

 correctly and you kind of line them up on your cutting or on your sewing center.

 once you've cut all your pieces, I usually lay them out like on a, you know,

 some kind of board that I can pick up and move around, you know,

 I'll label them with a little sticky note, you know, that says four and a half,

 whatever, three and a half, you know, so I, so I can just pull from the logs.

 and it seems a little short, but that's because the seam allowance, you know,

 And that is our strawberry squirrel version of this log cabin quilt.

 And I have to tell you two things about log cabins before we go.

 that means that that was the hearth of the home or the heart of the home,

 The blocks go really, really fast and you have tons of options.

 if you've ever heard log cabins are hard or if they look hard, forget about it.

 Thanks for watching Quilty and check out the magazine and our Facebook page and

 Quilty is brought to you by APQS, handcrafted quilting machines,

 There's such an assortment of backyard feeders here at Backyard Bird Shops, and we're going

 And we're with Myra Lukens, and she and her friends are going to show a simple bird feeder

 Well, today we're going to be making recycled milk jug seed feeders.

 And as you can see, I have the instructions right here, which you can get at any Backyard

 Okay, so you just need a few things to make these, so I'm going to tell you.

 Well, I wouldn't let him, so you might want to ask Mom for some help.

 Then you need some natural wire, or you can just get wire, but we like to use natural

 Okay, and so now you're pretty much ready to get started, except for the seed.

 We like to use black oil sunflower seed because many birds like it.

 All right, and then what kind of birds do we expect to come to our feeder?

 Well, we would expect some nut hatches, gold finches, and chickadees to come to this feeder.

 And so you guys are going to start with your making the holes here?

 Yes, yeah, as you can see, in most milk jugs there is an indented circle, and you want

 Okay, the next step is you poke holes in the bottom for drainage.

 Okay, well, after you center it under your cut-out circles, and you poke holes under

 Oh, yes, to put the hook on, you take your cap, and you can either poke holes in the

 cap and thread it through, or I think this way is easier, just to do it right around

 the handle and tie it right around the handle and hang it up, just like this.

 And my mom usually makes me fill it up outside, because I spill it in the house.

 I think we could do this at home in an afternoon and have it outside for those birds to eat

 If you have any other questions, you can go to GardenTime.tv and click on there and print

 out the information, or go to any backyard bird shop, and they will have the instructions

 We are here in the kitchen and what I want to show you the ingredients you need.

 We have some ham here which I already did a little bit some cutting because you see what we want to add that is to the eggs.

 We don't want to have big pieces because that could sort of destroy the integrity of your omelette.

 But the French omelette has to be cooked in very hot oil or butter.

 The first thing you're going to want to do for all of these hairstyles is to go ahead

 and tease the top of your head, just all the hair around that area, especially like the

 bangs and the stuff in the back, just to give your hair a little bit of volume, since I

 think that prom is definitely an occasion when you want to have volume.

 So the first hairstyle is this really cute and simple braided headband, and we're going

 I like to do a pretty, I like to do one bigger section and one smaller section, and braid

 And then what you're going to do is go ahead and pull some of the hair, or some of your

 bangs, to the front of your face to leave that out in front of the headbands.

 Take out the bobby pin from the bottom and then pin it to your head, or to your hair

 Like pin it behind your ear and kind of hide the bobby pin so it looks really cool.

 And it looks like it's really hard to do, but it's actually so simple and so easy, and

 So this is the final result, and if you want to, you can go ahead and tuck the rest of

 You can either just pin it or tuck it behind your ears, and I think that also looks really,

 This is definitely the hairstyle if you're more of like a boho type fashion, you know

 So you're going to go ahead and split your hair into four braids, or into four strands,

 This is a really easy way to fishtail, and it gets done a lot faster.

 I did it just, I didn't, as you can tell, I didn't braid all of my hair, just a little

 And I love how fishtails, when you loosen them, it just, it looks so much nicer than

 And then you're going to go ahead and cover up the elastic by grabbing a piece of hair,

 You're going to start out by teasing, really teasing the top, um, your bangs, sorry.

 And you're going to go ahead and start pulling them back into a slight poof.

 Nothing too poofy, because I feel like, I don't know, I'm not a huge poof person.

 And now what you're going to do is go ahead and grab like the top half of your hair and

 Braid that a couple times, and then you're going to go ahead and French braid.

 I think I just French braided once until I got all of my hair into the braid.

 And then you're going to go ahead and secure it in a pony, kind of like low on your head.

 And if your hair, if you find your curls are starting to get a little bit frizzy, throw

 in some serum or some hair milk or something that will help it get less frizzy and help

 And go ahead and once again wrap some hair around the ponytail holder to conceal it.

 Now if you want to take it up a notch for a more elegant look, just go ahead and simply

 And then go ahead and loosen that up, and then you're going to start to wrap it around

 I made this more of a, just like a bun in the middle of my head.

 You can definitely do this as a side bun, and that would be so, so pretty.

 But I really love buns with curly hair because it just turns out so much more messy.

 It's really easy to achieve that really nice messy, but put together elegant bun look.

 And she did a makeup tutorial that would go beautifully with this, all these different

 hair looks and just would look really gorgeous with any type of prom dress.

 Hey my Sweet Vs, today we will be making deep fried mushrooms for our Super Bowl party.

 Deep fried mushrooms for your Super Bowl party, where you can eat whatever for 4 hours of the year.

So come on, let's go in the kitchen and I will show you what we need to make it.

 And then I will show you how to make it, then I will show you me eating it.

 For the recipe, we will need 1 1⁄2 cup self rising flour, 1 ⅓ cup cornstarch,

 1 ½ cup cold water, 1 tablespoon of warm vegetable oil, 2 teaspoons of baking powder,

 Once that is mixed well, we are going to add in our 1 ½ cup of cold water.

 I must have had some really good cornstarch or something because it thickened right up.

 until I get a consistency that is right for covering our mushrooms.

 When I said the ingredients, I forgot to mention that you will need quite a bit of oil for your deep fryer

 Next we are going to add in our 1 tablespoon of oil that I did tell you about.

 I am using warm vegetable oil right out of the pot that I am preheating my oil for.

 Plus I need canola oil for a recipe down the line, so it was just convenient.

 Last but not least, I am going to add in my 1 teaspoon of baking powder.

 Mix that in well and then we will head to the stove for the frying.

 I have my mushrooms that I am going to dip in my batter that I made.

 And back here I have a receiving plate with a paper towel on it to drain the grease.

 Take a little bit of batter and test our oil to make sure it is hot.

 And now that it has a thin layer of batter on it, I am just going to put it in.

 And I would give them about 1 more minute before taking them out.

 So now they are hot and done, I am going to take some seasoned salt and I am going to sprinkle the

 Now that they are all done, I am just going to take some hot sauce and sprinkle a little bit of hot sauce

 I am about to try one of the plain ones, not one of the ones I put the hot sauce on.

 The only thing I would change, instead of putting the seasoned salt on the outside after frying them,

 I would add a little bit of salt and a little bit more seasoning to the batter.

 Especially if you are trying to please the men and they need the heat.

 I'm going to start by making the caramel for the sauce by combining sugar and water.

 Now I'm going to give it a stir to combine the water and sugar and I'm going to bring

 it up to a boil over medium high heat until it reaches a light amber red color.

 While the caramel comes up to a boil, I'm going to combine fish sauce, Shaoxing Chinese

 Now slowly pour the mixture into the caramel sauce once it's reached a nice amber color

 Now at this point you want to bring it back up to a boil and just swirl it in the pan,

 Now after it's boiled for about 5 minutes and everything is well combined, remove it

 I have the small grill dome preheated to 350 degrees and I'm going to grill plain unseasoned

 While the chicken wings are grilling, don't forget to go over and check out Grill Dome's

 Now I'm going to let these grill and come back and flip them about every 5 minutes.

 After grilling for 10 minutes, I rotated the drumette portion of the wings to the top of

 the extended cooking grate and now I'm going to grill the wing flat portion and I'm going

 After grilling for a total of 25 minutes, our wings are done and I've rotated them about

 Now add the wings to a bowl and drizzle them with the sauce and give them a nice toss until

 The only thing I would do differently next time is add a little bit of heat to them.

 Thank you guys very much for watching, I hope you give these a try, and I'll see you next time.

 Today we will show you very different kind of smoothie made of bitter melon.

 This is the vegetable we are going to use today as our main ingredient in the smoothie.

 And you can check, please check my other video how to make this delicious longevity drink.

 So this is very strong solution so I'm going to use some of it.

 And the purple color and the green Goya juice is a very, very healthy food for you.

 build and you're also going to be using power tools, so if you're not familiar with power tools,

 utility knives, marker, paintbrush, glue stick, respirator, PVC cutter,

 ceramic putty, the next two are optional, this is smooth cast 65D, if you look on the internet

 you'll be able to find that at a supplier close to you, and mold making silica.

 some crafters foam and cardboard, paper so that you can draw your patterns, PVC pipe,

 Turns out there are three separate kinds of claymores, one from the anime and two from

 the figurines, so what I'm going to be doing is, I'm going to be doing a hybrid between the lot,

 because I like the slender blade from the figurines, but I also like the cross guard from the anime.

 A quick explanation on how I got to the size of the sword, first off I bought a figurine,

 claymore figurine, which had a sword, I then measured the size of the sword, I then measured

 my wife's length which is 1.62 meters, I took the measurement of the small sword and divided my

 wife's length by that, which gave me a scale of 8.62, so everything that I measured off of the

 small sword I then multiplied by 8.62, which gave me the size of the sword.

 is done, we can use this as a massive template, so the first thing that we're going to do on this is,

 we're going to create the spine of the sword, which will include the hilt and the reinforcing

 PVC pipe is quite flimsy as you can see, so to rigid that up, we're going to jam a piece of

 dowel rod down, this is a piece of pine, all we're going to do is fit that way into there,

 tap it down with a hammer so it fills the entire length of the PVC,

 once that is done, we can then start putting together the blade.

 we're going to be using to create the spine, it is a piece of masonite, what we've done here is,

 we've traced out a separate piece of the blade, so what we're going to be doing is, we're going to

 glue this onto the spine board, and then we will cut that out with a jigsaw.

 Now that we've got that glued down, I can draw a black line around it, and that would be my

Now that we have the spine board, I'm going to be cutting it out

The whole idea of this is, I will be cutting two sheets, or two pieces,

 it's going to be hollowed out in the center here, so that the shaft can fit down.

 is, using your utility knife, just set yourself up and cut in at an angle.

 don't cut all the way through the styrene, because then you're going to have problems,

 shading it off until it's wide enough to take the center spine.

 I'm going to be fixing the spine board to the gilt and the shaft.

 Today I'm going to show you three of my favorite single leg exercises.

 The two exercises, the first two exercises are eccentric single leg squat and eccentric Bulgarian lunge.

 Doing the exercise eccentrically helps to strengthen those muscles on the deceleration part.

 So as we're running and jumping or stopping, it helps that stopping power.

 In season, you know, two times a week, maybe one set of five each leg.

 So if you notice on the eccentric single leg squat and the eccentric Bulgarian lunge, I'm hoping for a five count on the way down.

 I want a big chest, elbows pointed up, big chest back straight.

 On the single leg deadlifts, again, back is nice and straight as I'm coming up.

 Even start with the bar elevated can help and then just build up from there.

 Those are my top three single leg exercises to help strengthen the muscles around the knee.

 Okay, I figured I'd make a little instructional video on how to install a set of these Road

 Tools that you're going to need, crescent wrench, flat blade screwdriver, and an allen

 The hardware that's provided, you've got a bolt, a spindle nut, hollow grease tube, and

 Alright, unlike the original mounting hardware that required you to jack up your car, replace

 the original spindle nut, and reset the wheel bearing preload, mine's fairly simple.

 It just spins onto your existing threads on your spindle, and you don't even need to jack

 Now, my 69 Road Runner happens to be up in the air right now because I was rotating tires

 Well, first you grab your little screwdriver, and you pry off the original dust cap.

 Now what you'll see here, you have the existing threads on the end right here of your spindle.

 If your cotter pin is folded over on the top, you want to fold it over on the sides like

 If you have to cut it or whatever, just fold it over on the sides, that way you get a nice

 Grab your spindle nut, thread it on, tighten it up, and then you want to grab your hollow

 Now this is nothing but a regular dust cap with the end cut off, and your plastic grease

 Okay, after you have the spindle mounting nut and grease tube installed, you might want

 Grab your disc, put the bolt through, and take the plastic dust cap, screw it onto the

 Center the bolt on the spindle mounting nut, and just barely thread it on.

 Now you want the Road Runner's beak at about 2 o'clock, and the reason for this is because

 if you just tighten it down and cranked it down with the disc in place, you'll end up

 So what you want to do, with the beak at about 2 o'clock, and the bolt just barely snug,

 you grab the side of the disc and turn with the bolt in unison as you tighten.

 Today we are going to show you how to replace the front brake pads on a 2003 Pontiac Grand

 After you have your car chocked and on a jack stand, the first step is to take the

 These are a 3-4ths if you have a tire iron or if you just have a socket.

 After you take the faceplate off, break the one nut a little at a time in a star pattern.

 After you take the last one off, just grab it here and pull it off.

 As you see here, there is an uneven wear pattern which is caused by an alignment issue.

 As you see, we need to get new tires and I need to get my car aligned.

 That's a bad joke but what you really want to do is you can put it in the hub cap that

 If there are any large grooves or uneven wear, you're going to have to take it to a machine

 shop or your dealer to get it machined and evened down or you might have to buy a new

 As you see, this one has grooves and that means we're going to need to replace it soon.

 You can tell how much brake pad is left by seeing down in the hole.

 If you look in here, the brake pad is right here and on the left side of that, that's

 Right now we have about a millimeter left so we do need to replace these.

 There's actually a nut here that requires an 18 millimeter wrench to be held there so

 After those bolts are out, just use some elbow grease and pull this up and it swings like

 Take off the rotor if you have to replace it, you take out this bolt.

 After you loosen those two bolts in the back, the caliper frame should just slide off with

 a little bit of force and this, the rotor should just be able to slide off from there.

 We have to push this piston back because as your brakes wear down, this piston pushes

 We have to push this back to make room for the thicker brake pads.

 You can push both thumbs in and push real hard and then it'll slowly ease in.

 Another way is to put a piece of wood here, piece of metal, whatever you have.

 Simply turn the C-clamp and as you see, it drives the piston back.

 You want to push the piston back until it's flush with the rubber seal.

 Under the two brakes, the one that announced when your brake is low that has this little

 You can see the star pattern when tightening the lug nuts back on.

 That is how you change the brakes and replace the rotor on Pontiac 2003 and other cars that

 Good evening everyone and welcome to Cuisine's first ever Masterclass series.

 Justin North is a Blenheim boy, one of Blenheim's finest exports,

 but has spent most of his career overseas, many of them in Michelin star restaurants in Europe.

 In November 2001, Justin and his wife Georgia opened Bacchus in Surry Hills in Sydney.

 And Justin has won Best Restaurant, Best Chef and every other Best thing in between since then.

 To boot, he's one of the nicest guys in the business and we're thrilled to have him over from Sydney,

 I was born in New Zealand and did my apprenticeship in Wellington before I moved to Sydney

 to get a bit of restaurant experience and then I moved over to the UK

 where I did a lot of training with some European chefs for a few years.

 It's absolutely wonderful to be here and thank you all so very, very much for coming along tonight.

 which has been marinated in citrus salt, slowly cooked and served with a beautiful little salad of spanner crab meat and golden beetroots.

 which is probably a little bit less fatty and slightly firmer texture than the salmon.

 What we're going to do is we're going to remove the shoulder piece of the fillet

 We're basically using the salt for two things, one as a vessel to carry and impart the flavour

 I'm just going to zest that into there and try to capture all those sprays and oils that come off.

 Now to this, sometimes I add a little pinch of sugar as well and that not so much for the sweetness

 It doesn't take too much of an effort and when you're done you get this beautiful coloured salt.

 We'll take a little bit of this off and then we just remove the bloodline as well

 so you can see that sort of dark coloured bit of the bloodline on there.

 So what we're going to do is basically just onto a little dish is add the citrus salt.

Obviously you can do the whole fillet and then just cover it with the salt.

 And the amount of time you want to cure it will depend on what you're after.

 We're going to cook this in a little bit of oil at about 45 degrees for around about 15 minutes.

 If you wanted it fully cured then you could cure it for sort of overnight, up to 8 to 12 hours.

 If you just wanted to flavour it a little bit then you could do anywhere from 2 to 4 hours.

 So once that's cured, you want to get your oil at around about 40 degrees.

 I often use a blend of olive oil, a neutral oil such as a grapeseed oil and sometimes a little bit of duck fat as well.

 This particular dish we've played with, well not so much a dish but a technique we've played with quite a lot over the years.

 And it's sort of constantly evolving and we'll often play around with different salts, different flavours.

 Whether we're using salmon or ocean trout, it's something that's been in our repertoire for many, many years.

 It's one of our signatures that we keep evolving and changing quite a lot.

 We're going to poach these in a solution made of water, a little bit of saffron, some chardonnay vinegar and a touch of salt and sugar.

 So into the water, a little pinch of sugar, some salt, some saffron.

 It's more just to sort of accentuate the colour, not so much the flavour of it.

 When they're poached, sometimes they lose a lot of their colour so they can sort of end up quite pale, like so.

 But once they're cooked and we make the beautiful glaze, they end up this wonderful, beautiful, rich, golden colour.

 So we've got our salt, we've got our sugar, a little touch of chardonnay vinegar.

 And then we'll just trim up the beetroots ever so slightly, just taking off a little bit of the root and the stems.

 You can see how that just sort of flakes away really beautifully like that.

 And it's a wonderful way of sort of, and that's ready to eat when you can sort of pull it apart like that.

 This is what you don't want, but it's a good, just so you can see.

 You can see those little white proteins coming out of the fish.

 That happens a lot when you're in a dry environment like the oven.

 By submerging it in the oil mixture, then it just, obviously as you can see, it protects the natural flavour of the fish.

 Now, when we go to plate this up, we get a little bit of spanner crab.

 And then depending on what's in season, you can use a whole host of different types of leaf.

 Shiso is one of my favourites for this, as well as these little red chard leaves.

 So you're getting all these sort of interesting techniques and flavours.

 A little crunch from the stem, a little bit of perfume from the different flavours.

 And then you can keep that as a nice sort of dry salad like that.

 But I think what's really nice sometimes is if you add a little drizzle of olive oil.

 We're basically making like a little lemon vinaigrette in the bowl and then a pinch of salt.

 And this is a lovely dish as well to either have as a main course or as a lovely little entree.

 The key to this dish, first and foremost, is the freshness of the ingredients.

 And you get those horrible white proteins coming out of the seafood.

 So the quality of the produce and the cooking time and temperature is probably the two key elements of this dish.

 So this is the nail design we're going to be working on this week.

 And the first thing I did was I painted on a sheer nail polish.

 I just used, on my toes I used, when I did the design I used paint.

 So next I'm going to paint the yellow and the green squares that you see on my nails.

And the green paint that I use is by Folk Art and it's called Kelly Green.

 And the yellow paint that I use is by Apple Barrel and it's called Real Yellow.

 So on this nail it's on the left side so I'm going to put it on the right side on this finger.

 And it doesn't have to be perfect or anything like that because I'm going to outline it with black paint afterwards.

 And I'll be able to straighten up the lines and everything when I outline it.

 a new series and the way I'm going to determine whether or not I want to

 continue making these videos is if you guys enjoy them and what I want you to

 do is watch the video then click the like button below if you want to see

 where I give you a small amount of information and a quick tip that you can

 showed you guys this before is that the idea of the chest fly is to cross the

 lot of people what they're doing is they're keeping their elbows bent all

 the way through and even at the end they're just focusing on touching the

 coming up I want you to straighten your arms out as if you are trying to

 For the sake of the video I'm going to show you how to do it with chest

It's pretty basic and again this is not going to make for a better

 slightly bent and as you come up I still want you to straighten your arms but I

 humerus over the chest for a more shortened contraction but I want you

 training videos or tips I have a full chest training DVD completely free.

 Hey everyone, today I am doing another baking with Morgan video and I am making red velvet

 All homemade so if you want to know how to make red velvet cupcakes then go ahead and

 First you want to take 1 1 1 4th cup of cake flour and so I have my 1 1 1 4th cup and you're

 supposed to sift it and start shaking it like this and this pretty much makes sure

 that you get your flour all fine and there's no bumps left in it.

 And then you want to take your cocoa powder and you take 1 tablespoon and you also want

 For your wet ingredients, and you want to beat this together and then we'll add in the

 Then we're going to add 1 large egg and then you want to take 1 1 2 teaspoon of vanilla

 In a separate measuring cup you need to add a half a cup of buttermilk which is right

 here and then you need to take your red food coloring which gives this the red velvet name

 Then in a little separate container you need to take half a teaspoon of vinegar, white

 You just want to take a spoon of some sort and mix it into the rest of your batter and

 after you have it well mixed you are going to start filling your cupcake filler things.

 Now that the cupcakes are baking in the oven we're making the cream cheese frosting.

 So you add 1 package of softened cream cheese or 8 ounces and a half a teaspoon of vanilla

 but you want to wait to add this until you beat this together first.

 So now once you have mixed in the cream cheese you add your vanilla, your half a cup of confectioners

 sugar and then we're going to beat that and then slowly mix in our heavy whipping cream

 In the final step I'm going to take this piping bag to ice them and my cream cheese frosting.

1 3rd of a yard of fleece, 1 8th of a yard of contrasting materials for

 hat pattern of the basic hat, two frog pupils and two frog eyes.

 take your time cutting out the pupils as we will be using them for applique and you want

Great, now that you have all those pieces cut out it's time to start

 to do is you're going to place the pupils where you want them on the eye.

 reasons I'm using a contrasting thread but I recommend using a thread that matches the

Taking the exterior and interior parts of the eye, you're going to put right

Place and pin the eyes where you would like them to be on the hat.

 right side of the fabric and they're going to be down into the hat.

 the eyes with a quarter inch seam allowance to help sewing through all of the layers because

Then you're going to sew together using a half inch seam allowance

 each side of the hat along the curve leaving the top point or V open.

So you're going to fold the hat in half so the seams you just sewed

 closing the hat using the same seam allowance, a half inch seam allowance.

 If you like this pattern and tutorial I have several others on my website FleeceFun.com

 All their patterns and tutorials on that website are free as well.

 hello friends today I am going to show you how to make the crochet skirt this

 crochet skirt sizes 12 to 13 years girl and here this is the waistline for

 waistline first I have taken 102 chains and then in the second round here I have

 made one treble crochet into the every stitch and repeat it four times one two

 three four and then this is the waistline of the skirt and then here you make here

 I have made one double crochet two chain one double crochet and one double

 crochet then skip the two stitches and two chain and then one double crochet

 then skip the two stitches and then one double crochet two chain one double

 crochet repeat it all around you make same pattern at least 8 to 10 lines I

 have completed all the six lines and then here I have made two chain this is

 your first double crochet and then two more double crochet to the next two

 stitches and then one chain and then you make three double crochet

 one two three four five chain and skip the next DC double crochet and

 first space in the second space here you make one single crochet and then one

 two three four five chain and skip the next DC in the second space here you

 five chain one single crochet five chain and here you make three

 three double crochet and then one chain and here the next space you make three

 three double crochet and then one two three four five chain and skip the first

 space in the next space second space of the pattern here you make one single

 crochet and then two three four five chain and in the skip the next space and

 in the next space you make three double crochet repeat it all around

 But for all you lovebirds out there looking to make something delicious for that special

 To get started, you're going to have to turn your pan on to a low heat and add about a

 It's important to keep this at a low heat because we're going to add some really small

 pieces of garlic and you don't want that garlic to burn or you're going to die.

 While that's warming up, we're going to shred two cloves of garlic.

 It's very hot and I'm a huge wimp so I use a little bit, but it's got a great kick to

 If you like a little more heat, go ahead and be brave and just add a little bit more.

 Try to get those spices to release their flavors into the oil for a little bit.

 We'll stir this for about two minutes and then we're going to add some tofu.

 You can keep it frozen for three months or you can refrigerate it for a week.

 We're going to go ahead and add a half a pound of rice noodles now.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to stir them in, bring that back up to a boil,

 While that's happening, I shredded about a quarter cup's worth of cabbage.

 So I'm going to throw that in with our sauce and a quarter cup of carrots that I shredded.

 While those things are all cooking, we're going to make a beautiful little chiffonade

 of basil that we're going to stir right in after the dish is finished.

 You're going to take four or five basil leaves, stack them on top of each other like this,

 We're going to pop them right in from the water to the pan, stir it right in.

 The final steps, we're going to stir in a half a teaspoon of salt.

 Traditionally, Pad Thai has fish sauce in it, but you know what?

 We're going to set those little fishies free, and we're going to use our vegan Worcestershire

 You want to get all those juices flowing, so what you're going to do is just roll it

 I have a little strainer here, but if you don't have a strainer, just be careful not

 Traditionally, you're supposed to mix the sprouts in, but I like to just kind of add

 This Valentine's Day special was brought to you by veganmeals.com.

 Don't forget, guys, like this video and follow us on Facebook and Twitter.

 But for all you lovebirds out there that are looking to make something very...

 Now a lot of you have been asking us, what's the best way to cast a spinning reel?

 So what I'll do is I'll run you through two different ways to effectively cast a spinning

 Okay now there's two different ways you can cast a spinning reel.

 Let's just say you're fishing a big open beach or off some rocks, somewhere where you really

 All you need to do is get your bait or your lure out into the water.

 Now all you really need to do is hook that line on your index finger.

 Now when you hook it on there, make sure you do it right on the tip of your pad.

 Don't do it right in the crease of your finger because you want to be able to release that

 If you do it too far back, you'll find that it botches your cast up quite a bit.

 So all we have to do is put it on the pad of our finger, we open up the bail arm, we

 Now for those of you that want to cast a spinning reel accurately, you need to change a few

 Now first of all to cast a spinning reel accurately, you need to control the amount of line flowing

 off the spool and you can do that with the help of your index finger.

 Now what I'm going to do is I always make sure that when I open the bail, I put my finger

 Now you can see what's happened, the line is trapped against my finger there.

 Now what that allows me to do is control the amount of line flowing off that reel by adding

 Now all I simply need to do is bring the rod back, cast forward and I can stop the flow

 or control the flow by pressing my line against the spool there.

 Now some people when they're learning to accuracy cast with a spinning reel find that they can't

 Now what I suggest you do is you actually roll your grip further around the rod so that

 way this V in my hand here is actually coming around the side a little bit, it's not running

 That allows people with shorter fingers to be able to get plenty of pressure on the side

 If you still struggle you can also push down onto the spool itself with the line just like

 that there and you can see now that line is trapped on the line itself against the spool

 and I've got plenty of pressure with my index finger to control the amount of line flowing

 Okay so another point I find a lot of people struggle with with casting accuracy is for

 Now when you throw a dart you don't swing your arm right back and throw like this.

 Now when you throw a dart you use your elbow and it's a very snappy quick action and that's

 exactly what you need to do when you want to cast flat and you want to cast accurately

 So what I do is again pinch the line against the spool, I bring the rod back and snap it

 Now for those of you that may have weaker wrists or struggle to really snap that rod

 It's really simple but it gives you that much more snap in your cast and will help

 So by using two hands we do the same process we go and trap the line against the spool

 we then put our hand back down the butt section here so that gives us a little bit more leverage

 So what I do is bring it back snap it forward exactly the same process again but I'm stabilising

 the whole outfit by using my left hand on the back of the rod here.

 This is a video that I didn't think I'd be making but just because there are so many

 videos out there already, I didn't think someone would actually ask me to do a tutorial on

 Dane Smith, he commented on my current collection video and asked me if I would do a video on

 I tell you who I got it from and I literally watch his video every time I do it to make

 sure that I'm doing it correctly and that's Weavers of Eternity.

 His video, his tutorial on it is absolutely flawless and that's where I get it from when

 So basically what I have here is some purple paracord and I'm not going to put it on anything,

 I'm just going to put it on my camera case just so that I have something to have it mounted

 You just put it through your knife the way you want it and then you kind of, however

 And basically what you do, you take the left side, you go down behind the right side and

 Then, let's see, I don't know, I kind of got my hands in the way.

 Then you take the right side, which is now in this little loop here.

 You take the right side, tag in, you go under here, over and through this loop here and

 And when you pull you're going to end up with the knot that you see on everything that I

 You grab one end or each end and you just pull really, really hard and you get that

 And literally you do the same thing over and over and over again.

 So this hole here, you're going to take your right side, you're going to go under this

 tag end and then you're going to pull it up and you're going to go through that loop right

 And then you're going to pull and you're going to kind of cinch down as you go and pull them

 And then you're just going to pull it up and see I've already made that one so you're going

 to pull this one and you're just going to pull it up right below that one I already

 And then before you know it you've got two made and you literally just do the same thing

 You take the left tag end, you go over the right and behind the entire thing.

 And then over everything and through this loop here and then you tie.

 And when you cinch it down you kind of, you know, you kind of, you get this thing that

 looks kind of weird but you just kind of pull on each end until you get it right and

 And so on and so forth and that's pretty much how you end up with this knot.

 So anyway, that is how you make the snake knot or Chris Reeve style knot for knife lanyards.

 So Dane, buddy, I hope that helped and if anybody has any comments or questions leave

 lot to it, but this is a very important exercise for when you need to land after flying around

So we're going to move the elevator stick forward, and the nose is

 but the backwards flight, this is where this comes in, and this is why this is important.

 So I'm flying around, and I have my timer set for 5 minutes before my battery runs dead.

 So all of a sudden I'm flying, and beep beep beep beep beep, okay my timer's going off,

Well, if you're not ready to come nose in, and do a nose in landing,

 because nose in isn't very easy, alright, say I'm not ready for that yet, and I'm out

 field, well I'm going to bring it tail in, I'm going to fly it back to myself.

 On my last blog post I seemed to get quite a few people in the comments asking me how

 It's quite quick, easy and it's really simple so I thought I had to show you because if

 And I always use some dry shampoo just because this is probably a hairstyle that I wear in

 So firstly you need to have your hair down obviously and grab your backcombing brush.

 I don't backcomb mine too much because it just makes it so knotty when it comes to taking

 So just backcomb the front bits a little bit just to give them a bit of lift I suppose.

 I have a lot of hair but it's quite thin so I always find that this kind of helps it,

 This one is 305 Plump Me Up and it's quite good because it gives it volume as well.

 You don't really need to do this but it just kind of gives it a bit of, makes it a bit

 So yeah, so once you've done that you need to grab your hair tie and get your hair into

 Obviously finish the ponytail on your head where you want the buns so like if you want

 a high one put it up here, you can also do a low one to the side, anywhere.

 And then I always pull bits out so it's not so tight to my head.

 And then on top you don't really need your hair in like a ponytail to hold, it kind of

 And then you get your hair tie and just kind of like tie it around.

 So just kind of clump your hair together and pull all the little bits in and tie it

 Then you need some of your hair grips and what I do is I just kind of pull around, pull

 Whenever I do this it never looks the same, it always looks different.

 Some days you'll have a really good bun day and some days you'll have a really rubbish

 Anyway, get your grips and just kind of grip these little bits that are like hanging out.

 So just like grip them, put the grip in and then grip into the bun so it's kind of like

 The front bit I kind of tend to bring a bit of the side bit around just to make it so

 So just put the clip in, sometimes I wrap the hair around so it's kind of in the grip

 So it's kind of just like messing around with it until it looks right really.

 Just pull some bits out, put my glasses on so I can actually see.

 What's going on guys, Jimo here again with another very exciting video where we're going

 to be doing a little bit of paint stripping if you haven't guessed already and you'll

 be very happy to know that my softball season has just finally come to an end so it's going

 I can finally get those videos that I've been talking about, I got like about 10 or so filmed

 already that I just haven't had time to edit so they should be coming out very shortly

 So let's get into this one here which I did today which is stripping a hood.

 So the first thing we're going to be doing is buzzing over it with some 40 grit sandpaper

 that's just going to kind of scuff it up and give our paint stripper something to sort

 of bite into and help kind of get right in there and lift it a lot more efficiently.

 I've done it both ways, it seems to work a heck of a lot better if you rough it up first.

 So what we're basically going to do is blob it on with a brush.

 Cody there should be wearing some gloves because it's going to sting like hell when

 Anyway, what you're seeing there is a product by Proform and I got to say it's not the best

 I've used it before and I think I complained about it once on Instagram already, I don't

 The best stuff I'd ever used was a blue one, Tal strip I think it was called, but I don't

 All the jobbers tell me that it's been discontinued for some reason.

 I don't know what, maybe it's just too toxic killing off all the hobos that walk by, I'm

 But the next thing we did after brushing it all on, this was actually an idea from Cody

 who picked it up in trade school and it was pretty smart actually.

 It's to put a piece of plastic over top of the hood and what that's going to do is keep

 all of the vapors and stuff on the hood and in that area and help it lift the paint more

 efficiently and it's also nice because when you walk by it's not burning your retinas

 So as you can see it didn't really lift the paint as efficiently as we would have liked

 it to and I'm going to fault that because that paint stripper is garbage and I don't

 But anyway, luckily we had this stuff that I meant to use from the very beginning which

 is from Dominion which is a clear paint stripping product and it works a lot better, not as

 well as the blue stuff did, but you'll see in a sec that it actually lifts the paint

 which is kind of a quality that you really look for in a paint stripper.

 And normally you have to let this stuff kind of sit on there for about 15 to 20 minutes,

 sometimes a bit longer, but what you don't want to do is let this stuff dry.

 You don't want to walk away from it for a few hours and come back or else it will still

 So once you let it do its thing and lift all the paint, ideally you can just scrape

 it off with a scraper and anything that's left behind you can sand away after.

 So the times that you might use this compared to sanding would be when you have some sort

 of defect with the coating itself and you know that the adhesion is compromised or the

 paint coating just needs to come off before you can put anything else on top.

 So in this case here it was a warranty job from Honda and the front end, well the bumper,

 sorry the hood mostly had some very small cracks in it, very kind of microscopic almost

 just across the entire panel that you could really tell you couldn't just simply prime

 and paint over it because there's an adhesion problem somewhere so the entire coating has

 Other times you might use paint stripper is when the car has been painted several times

 and you have a very thick film build which compromises the integrity of the coating,

 the adhesion and it will make it more prone to chipping and that kind of thing.

 And as far as the time comparison goes you're probably looking between 1-2 hours of sanding

 versus 30-45 minutes for the paint stripper to do its thing and during most of that time

 So you can even see right through this plastic film that is starting to wrinkle up and lift

 the paint finally and we're having some success with this other paint stripping product.

 Now once all of this paint has kind of come up after about 15-20 minutes or so you can

 grab a paint scraper and just kind of pile it up and toss it away.

 Whatever is left afterwards what you'll want to do is run the sander over with some 80

 grit paper or so and you'll notice that we taped the edges up before we did all of this

 because what can happen with paint stripper if you don't tape up the edges is it can creep

 onto the underside of the panel that you're working on and strip the paint underneath

 of the hood in this case and we'd have to paint underneath the hood as well which we

 don't want so we're simply going to just sand the edges away afterwards.

 And before we sand it though we are going to wash it down with some water and dry it

 off very thoroughly before moving on to the next step which is going to neutralize and

 So we're just going to use some 80 grit sandpaper here to get rid of any paint that's still

 left usually or mostly just around the edges but there's sometimes a few spots that your

 stripper maybe didn't pick up and it usually comes off fairly quick with some 80 but we'll

 go over the entire thing with some 80 real quick and then clean it off and it's ready

 Now I'm not going to get too in depth with the priming application if you need more information

 on that have a look at my channel I've got a ton of other videos that can definitely

 help you out with picking primers and starting with bare metal and working your way up and

 I think that's going to be it for this time so don't forget to subscribe because like

 I say I got a ton of other videos new videos coming very soon and check me out on Facebook

 I'll have a link somewhere on the screen here hopefully right now and before you go let

 me just leave you guys with some food for thought have a look at this bumper here.

 So people ask me all the time which product is better than the other which clear coat

 shines better brighter stronger you know the whole thing so I thought I would just put

 it out to you guys and you let me know what you think I'm going to show you three jobs

 I have a grand am here front cover I have a Dodge Ram and then an older Ford Ranger

 box side that I sprayed and you just need to narrow it down to either nascent which

 is the lower end clear that I've shown before or a higher end DuPont clear which is about

 three to four times the cost of it so let me know what you think and we will see you

 So Halloween is right around the corner, so not only do you have to worry about zombies,

 but you've got vampires, and werewolves, and mummies, and poltergeists.

 It's also the season for wizards and sorcerers, and Harry Potter, and Ron Weasley!

 Now traditionally, butterbeer is not vegan, but tonight, we veganize it.

 So here's a very simple recipe that you can bring to all your Harry Potter parties.

 To make butterbeer, you're basically going to need three things.

 Your favorite cream soda, vegan whipped cream, and caramel sauce.

 And that's what we're going to get started with, so come on, I'll show you how to do

 To get started with your caramel sauce, you're going to add a cup of sugar to medium high

 You're then going to add a quarter cup of water, and a teaspoon of lemon juice.

 Now the lemon juice keeps the sugar from crystallizing when you're making your caramel sauce.

 Once you stir everything together, kick the heat up to high to bring it to a boil.

 Now you don't want to stir this, and you also want to be very careful when you're swirling

 this around, because it's very hot, and if you get any on you, you'll probably die.

 You want this to still keep bubbling, because you want to get a nice dark amber color to

 And to finish it up, you're going to stir in one tablespoon of your favorite vegan buttery

 And now for the finishing touches, the magic spell that Hermione taught me.

 Now to get started with your whipped cream, you're going to pull out a can of coconut

 Basically what you want to do is pull the lid off and grab the solid part that came

 At this point, you're going to transfer the coconut milk over to a blender.

 We're going to add two tablespoons of powdered sugar, one teaspoon of vanilla extract, and

 So I'm going to start blending this on slow speed and gradually increase my speed as it

 It's a perfect whipped cream consistency, and it's going to be a great topping on our

 So now that we have all of our basic ingredients ready, we're going to show you how to make

 Now for the slushy version, I'm going to start with two cups of ice in my Blendtec, and then

 Now depending on what kind of mood you're in, you can make either one at your Harry

 Hope you have a safe and happy Halloween, and don't forget to subscribe and survive.

 I'm going to show you now how to start knitting this leg warmer that comes in two pieces.

 You know you have to join this thread to this thread and this is going to be the hardest

 I just happen to like circular needles because it's only one needle and you don't have to

 We're going to take the thread and put it on the first stitch and just start knitting.

 It's easier to knit one row plain before you start the ribbing so that's what I'm going

 Just make sure that you pull the thread every time you take a stitch off and just keep going

 And when you get to the last stitches at the point where you've folded the needle,

 you're just going to push them all around and twist the remaining stitches towards the

 You're going to have to bend the needle again to do that because there aren't enough stitches

 So you just push and when you've got them all pushed to the front, just continue knitting

 So we've gotten to the end of the row which we can tell because we have this tail sticking

 We're ready to start the second row which is going to be the ribbing row.

 You're going to put a marker in so that you'll always know the beginning of the row and then

 Knit 2, put the yarn in front, purl 2, put the yarn in back, knit 2 and continue doing

 And that's knit 2, yarn in front, purl 2, yarn in back, knit 2 and purl 2.

 I see I've lost a stitch somewhere so I'm just going to add one, purl 2.

 And there's the stitch marker and we're ready for knit 2, yarn in front, purl 2.

 And we're just going to continue that for about 6 rows or about an inch.

 And check to make sure that all your stitches are facing inwards and that you haven't twisted

 I'm going to season it with a little salt, pepper, some cream and parmesan cheese.

 And because of truffles being so rare and exotic, I wanted to show you how to cut one.

 I have all the other ingredients already prepared to save time.

 but it most certainly is one of the most expensive food items in the world

 and also one of the most sought after and flavorful foods in the world.

 And because of its rarity, I'm going to show you how to slice it.

 And then you want to cut it in julienne strips so that it goes a lot farther.

 They're very brittle, so they fall apart very easy, but that's all there is to it.

 This is enough right here to make the white truffle risotto for two people.

 You can buy this probably at just about any specialty grocery store.

 There are several different brands, but you do want to look for the Italian brand.

 And there's like 20 different types of Italian white truffle oil.

 I do make an oil from Oregon, which is also very good, a white truffle oil.

 But if you want to call the risotto Alba white truffle risotto,

 You want to coat all of the kernels of the rice with the oil so that it doesn't stick together.

 Once the wine is almost dissolved, you start adding warm chicken stock.

 And this is a very tedious and difficult dish due to the fact that you must continually stir it.

 Basically what we're doing is we're steaming it in the chicken broth.

 And in the first few minutes you want to add the salt also so it carries the flavor throughout the risotto.

 The important thing about risotto is that you keep consistently stirring it and adding the chicken broth.

 You don't want to put any more chicken broth than what I have in here.

 You put about two to three ounces at a time so that you're not boiling it, you're steaming it.

 And then you cook it until the broth has absorbed into the rice.

 And then again you add more and you keep adding it until the rice is tender.

 It takes approximately nine ounces of chicken broth per ounce of aboil rice.

 The total cooking time is anywhere between 15 and 18 minutes from the time you coated the rice kernels with the oil

 And then to finish the risotto, put in some butter, a little parmesan, freshly grated, and a little cream.

 So now you have a real moist product, you want to dry it out a little bit by cooking it just a couple more minutes.

 You have to be very careful, once you add the cream and butter it can scorch very easily.

 And this is a dish that needs to be eaten right away, you can't let it set, you can't reheat it.

 Let me break that down for you the solo approach for our Dorian, okay now I wanted to really target our

 And I hit the major 6 which is the characteristic tone of Dorian to take us into that

 And then I'm ending on the f-sharp obviously is the fifth of the chord again, so it's chord tone stuff

 Then on my a I'm sliding down to that e tone here and then I'm doing these really nice kind of

 Okay, and it's all coming out of my major scale, but I'm thinking more about the Dorian obviously, okay

 And then what I did was I'm sliding down into a B minor arpeggio kind of idea

 You could even think of that as being a minor pentatonic run as well and again pentatonics come from the major scale

 So what I do is I'm ending that phrase back on the B play a funky little line

 Okay, now what I do is I slide back into position a position that we've been working in the course

 Okay, so it's little licks within the framework of the scale if you like

 And then one of the cool things that I really like about this is leaving space.

 Sliding into this really cool double stop here is giving me the F sharp and the a which are chord tones of my B

 And then I go the octave up and I'm bending from the E to the F sharp which is the fifth of the chord

 So that repeats a couple of times and then what I do is I go back to a position here

 And I'm bending a nine up to the minor third of the chord, all right one of my classic moves I guess

 So that's pretty much the solo idea you could play pretty much anything you wanted to but target those tones of the Dorian very cool

 Also, you could take the granulated sugar and grind it up in your food processor

 You can either pipe it out, you can use a spoon and just put up

 because I'm using it for a recipe that's an American version of

 Hi everybody, it's Simply Sweet Gemini here and today I will be showing you a tutorial

 The cupcake and the ice cream one are very similar, so I'll just teach you the basics

 and you'll be able to adjust them to fit to your own needs of whatever you want to make.

 Scissors, glue stick, pencil, a ruler, a marker, a hole puncher if you've got it, and you'll

 It just depends on whatever color cupcake or ice cream you want to make, so you can

 To begin, take one sheet of paper and that will be the color of your cupcake base or

 What you will do is on your sheet of paper you are going to cut out a 10 cm x 10 cm square.

 All you would have to do for that is take your ruler and look for 10 cm and trace out

 Just do that and then take the edge of the paper and measure out 10 cm x 10 cm.

 When you're making that large square, you want to cut that in half as well, so that

 You're going to join the lines together to make your 10 cm x 10 cm square.

 I know that there are lots of different ways that other people do it, but that's what I do.

 You've got the square right now, as you can see, and you're going to add 2 lines across

 What you're going to do is take your scissors and cut out this shape.

 To save time, I've already cut out one and this is what it looks like.

 Now that you have your basic shape, you're going to follow the lines and cut out what

 What you will do is cut off one square and you cut off the outside flaps.

 We don't need this piece, we don't need this piece, and we don't need this piece.

 This is the original and you're going to cut out the white parts.

 If you forget, sometimes some people will draw some lines to make sure those are the

 What I like to do to make sure that the edges are sharp is to put a ruler down and fold

 You're going to have them like this and then all you have to do is fold them over.

 One might be a little overlapping the other but that's not a big problem because you'll

 If you are making a cupcake then you're going to want to draw your lines at this time.

 If you are making your cone, same thing, you would want to put the details in now.

 Just taking the shape and you know it's going to be 5 cm already and divide that in half,

 Then just join them to make diagonals, which I hope you can see.

 It doesn't matter if the bottom is messy because no one is really going to see it.

 What you would do is use your marker, any color, to trace over the lines to make them

 I'm going to finish that up and I'm going to stop the video here.

 Hi, this is Ryder with Pacific Coast Hobbies and we are going over the DGI 450 build.

 Start off with your motherboard and go ahead and just solder in your ESCs to it.

 You can also see with the solders when you do your main connector you also have your

 So you will have two reds and two blacks going on the center part right here.

 And also make sure when you mount your motors that you use the correct screws.

 We go ahead and run the wires through the first grid and they will end up looking like

 After that go ahead and grab your screws or 5x5s and mount your arms to the motherboard.

 When you mount the arms onto the motherboard go ahead and run the ESC cables down the center.

 This makes it look really slick and also it's easier to go ahead and run it to your

 Now wiring the ESCs to the motors you're going to notice that with one set we have them crossed

 That basically shows us that one is going to be running clockwise and the others are

 You can verify this by going ahead and putting a piece of tape or just feeling the edge.

 And once you are done getting them wired correctly we just use nylon ties and put them onto the

 From there go ahead and take your NASA controller and put it in the center of the motherboard.

 Make sure you go ahead and plug them in the right way because if you don't you can crash

 Since we are using spectrum we are going to have to go ahead and clip off some of the

 You'll notice here that the lighter color of the cables are facing us.

 Make sure that you have that going the right way because if you do not this will not connect

 The good thing about this though with your ESC and your, I'm sorry, the NASA controller

 and your receiver, you'll notice that for your thrust it goes to T, the elevator goes

 Since I started off with 1.2 I went ahead and just left gear under U.

 It gives you a little more space and you can also see how slick it looks.

 You can also see what we did since the binding is hard to get to.

 We ran a little pigtail adapter so on top of your receiver you can go ahead and bind

 From there go ahead and put your top shelf on, the top part of your receiver and then

 The last part is making sure your controller and your GPS are connected properly.

 You want to make sure that when you plug in your receiver it goes into LED and your GPS

 Okay so next project guys I want to make a coffee table for my house.

 all cleaned up, denailed, sanded down and we can start measuring, cutting and building.

 Okay so I'm going to measure out the frame for the coffee table now.

 That's how to make a really quick easy reclaimed wood coffee table.

 Today we're going to talk about different pests you have around your home.

 The kitchen is where there's a lot of food that you bring in, that you clean up, and

 Something that's very small to you may feed a roach or an ant for a week or more.

 So this is where there's a lot of food, a lot of water, and is very, very attractant

 We also have stored products here, and therefore stored product pests.

 Your grain moths, your flower beetles and grain beetles will certainly be in the pantry

 Let's start off talking about ants and roaches and what we can do around the sink to help

 Now for insects around the sink, around the stove, the main problem is there's a lot of

 food, so you're going to get a lot of bugs coming around to eat that food.

 A residual spray with a good chemical is going to do a lot to help decrease that population

 Spraying under the sink, up under the bottom of the sink, and even outside around doors

 and windows will help protect some of those tiny little cracks and crevices where ants

 These baits are formulated to mimic, or in some cases be better than food that you may

 It's actually just a pistol grip, are great for treating around cracks and crevices, doors

 Our industry has made it even better by putting it into an aerosol can.

 So really we're getting some of the same bait formulations in this aerosol can.

 I'm actually applying small bits of it right now and you can see how easy that is.

 These baits last a long time and are very attractive to ants and roaches depending on

 Dry formulations of some of the same ingredients are excellent.

 This is actually a dry powder and it's great for dusting into holes that you can't see

 It's also great for getting behind switches and electrical plates because this dust will

 go in there and it will give ants and roaches something to eat for a long, long time.

 Now we're going to talk about some of the other insects we may see, some of the stored

 product pests, the flower beetles, the grain beetles, that type of thing.

 Well, they are pests that get into the products that are typically stored.

 Grains, so your grain products are going to be your cereals and your crackers, even spaghetti.

 We will often find flower beetles, Indian grain moths, Indian meal moths, I'm sorry,

 Some of the grocery stores, even some of the producers sometimes don't control their

 A lot of times we will use, again, our old spray can to spray appropriate chemicals in

 Normally all of these products, all of your food will be removed and we'll get in there

 to try to control any of the larva or eggs that happen to be not inside the product that

 The most important thing is to go through these products, especially your grain products.

 We'll find rice weevils, another stored product pest in the rice.

 You want to do a good inspection of all of the products inside the bags to see if there's

 any weevils or any types of beetle or larva feeding on that product.

 Get it out of the house, get it sealed into a trash bag and get it out.

 Once you've identified the products that are affected and they're gone, we're going to

 For long control, long lasting control, we can use pheromone traps.

 These actually will attract the adult forms of the different insects.

 This is simply a sticky trap, but the key ingredient are these pheromone tablets that

 give off scent that will attract the insects to come into these traps and get stuck on

 Again, Envirocon has access to the different types of pheromone attractants that are needed

 And by cleaning out the food that they're eating on, by doing a good residual spray,

 it's an easy way for Envirocon to get in and take care of your problem.

 Let's talk now about some silverfish and then rats and mice that we also see in the kitchen

 Okay, silverfish get into kitchens, they get into your bathrooms, they eat paper.

 They like to eat paper and they're also normally found around moisture sources.

 Again, proper spray insecticides will help along with silverfish baits.

 These are relatively non-toxic to us, to you and your children and your pets.

 So if a dog were having to get into this, I would not be concerned about it.

 We just place these in the drawers, close the drawers, let the silverfish eat their

 One of the final things we're going to talk about is rodents, certainly in and around

 So we certainly use the old standby wooden mouse traps and wooden rat traps.

 We have even special baits that we put in the traps to attract the rats and the mice

 Food particles get under the sink or around the sink, behind the stove, behind the refrigerator.

 These traps, both mouse and rat traps, are excellent at a one-time kill.

 And we at Envirocon do provide the carcass removal service as well.

 All the different products or the different pests that we have in and around the kitchen.

 We're going to move outside and look at some of the problems and some of the ways to stop

 Now when you're cutting, you want to slightly, ever so slightly angle your knife downward

 Let's flip it over and do the same thing to the top, which didn't come out quite as flat,

 and to take off this almost mushroomed edge, so that way it doesn't mess up our icing.

 why don't we go ahead and start adding our room temperature butter.

 Now while it's mixing, we're going to add a little bit of vanilla extract.

 All right, and we're going to whip it until it comes together and turns into delicious buttercream.

 We've got stiff peaks, but I'm afraid that it's a little too soft to work with right now,

 so what I'm going to do is I'm actually going to do a little trick.

 I'm going to put it in the refrigerator for about five to ten minutes to let it cool off.

 We're going to go ahead and whip it up a little bit more just to get some more air in it,

 and then we're going to put it in the refrigerator, cool it off, and then we're going to whip it up again.

 And then we're going to go ahead and get started icing our cake.

 Welcome to 7 Trumpets Prepper and in this video today I'm going to show you a nice little handy

 drinking water pump and how to put it together and install it and the great uses of it.

Okay so let's tear into this box and let's see what we've got components

Now you know they're very small I mean this is easy to ship you get

 this off eBay and I mean it won't cost you much on ship and that's a definite positive.

We've got our two tubes that go down into it, our brush, lay that there, and

 only had to shave off about for me it was like two inches off the end of the tube.

 recess up in the bottom of it so that caused it to have to be trimmed down some.

 point all you got to do is start actuating the pump and then there you go.

 And you know I mean just ever how much you need just keep pumping it.

 you're not wasting water trying to pour it out of a five gallon jug.

 down the road these jugs whenever you know you run them empty you got a spring or somewhere you

 go get that water you can go run down there get that water save your cap that you've trimmed off.

 Now what I do with my caps is I'll take like the tire of the plastic completely off of it.

 pull it around and I'll cut me about a two inch flange and leave it where I can use it like a

You put one of them on it and there you go five gallon water instantly

 heck you can get some off eBay for a steal but I'm just gonna be say ten bucks.

 bucks and you've got a good pump to last you for quite some time.

 plastic so that's a good thing and it's not like you're beating it to death so you're not gonna

 get your brush with it because that way you can clean the tube later down the road because you

 don't want like nasties building up in it or anything like that.

 have and I'd probably lay another couple on the shelf for just later down the road.

 this is a help to you when you know trumpets two and three happen and you get contamination in the

 water that as if mankind hasn't put enough contamination in it as it is.

 important and critical to have a good water source and not only that but handling it safety.

 don't want to be wasting water and this is a good way not to waste water.

And I've spilled water before myself just pouring it out five gallon jugs

 so this is a good way of not wasting water and being conservative.

 the trumpets happen I just can't over stress how much that we need to have good clean water source

And to find out more about the seven trumpets of revelation you can check that

 link right there and find out more information especially about trumpets two and three and how

Until we see you again have a most blessed day and YAHOSHUA NAME.

 Hello, this is Jay Stakers from the Self Sufficient Gardener podcast.

 Today I'm going to take you through the process of making cheese.

 We've got mesophilic starter, rennet tablet, milk, and yes you can use milk from the store

 of the gallon, thermometer, pot, cheese press, cheese claw, wax.

 The thermometer responds pretty quick so you can see it dropping.

 I've got it right at 90 and the temperature is going to drop a little bit when I put the

 Alright, the milk is in the pot and the sink has the water warmed to about 90 degrees.

 So now we have to get the milk temperature to come up to at least 86.

 We're going to add in the starter and let it ripen for 45 minutes.

 We're going to drop in the dissolved rennet and let it start for one minute.

 So we've got the starter and we've got the rennet in and it's been in there for a little

 I don't know if you can see it but there's kind of a yellowish liquid.

 That's the whey and the very very white part just underneath the surface is the curd.

 But this is what it looks like about halfway through the process.

 Now we have to increase the temperature to 100 degrees in 30 minutes.

 Using cheesecloth, drain the curds and put them back in the pot for 15 minutes.

 After the curd drains for 15 minutes and sets, put it on a cutting board and slice it up.

 Put the slices back into the pot at 100 degrees and cover it for 2 hours.

 I've broken up the curd slices into smaller curds and now we're going to let it set and

 Now I'm going to add a tablespoon of cheese salt which is very fine.

 As you can see, it's already starting to get some more of that whey out.

 Alright, now I'll flip it and put it on a heavier pressure and leave it for 12 hours.

 Sushi is a popular, fresh, delicious and nutritious food and making delicious sushi at home is

You will instantly be amazed and making sushi like a professional.

 creates perfectly formed, round, bite-sized sushi quickly and easily with no guess work

 impress guests with sensational starters or simply enjoy beautiful Japanese cuisine at

To make the perfect sushi every time, all you need is sushi rice, nori sheets, your

Using your fingers, gently and swiftly close the two halves together.

 Clip the two latches shut and fit the end cap into the locked position.

 sushi on the nori sheet and slightly dampen the end of the nori sheet to stick.

 roll the sushi on your bench to create a firm, tight sushi roll.

 to soften, place your sushi roll in the fridge for 10 to 15 minutes.

The best part is that the Sushizi is easy to use and dishwasher safe, so it's easy

 On the picture it looks like it has a pillow and they're snuggling.

 I wouldn't mind having more of these and hooking them together because it looks like you can hook them together

 If you'd like to see more Kinder Surprise videos, please subscribe and click here for the playlist.

 There's a place in your house where it's cool to chill, get some me time or even cook a

 meal it's your kitchen mofo, ain't no time to slack so just grab yourself a penny and

 let's work that ass if you're scared of this place, ain't no need to bother just lay down

 Hi guys how's it going welcome to my virgin kitchen today I'm making a key lime pie now

 this is what it looked like excuse the little mess there because it's only been in the fridge

 for two hours and you need to let it set overnight this was a challenge set to me by Billy on

 youtube my friend Billy hi Billy yeah so he wanted me to try and make a key lime pie

 and I've made it and I'm loving it but first of all I needed to find out where to get my

 ingredients from so check this out and I hope you enjoy it, wicked.

 Right guys sometimes I need help getting my ingredients and there's sometimes nothing

 better to ask than nature itself so today I'm going to ask the sea and I'm going to

 do it old school my friends by writing a letter where are the ingredients for key lime pie

 and contacting the sea using my local toilet the virgin toilet if you will.

 So here's my bottle I'm going to shove my letter in there like so seal it up with my

 other end can't get much more tight than that guys that is like one of those capsules that

 you get and now I'm going to flush it down the virgin toilet ok very first thing you've

 ever seen actually the virgin toilet here we go let's give it a flush here it goes.

 Right that's all gone we need to go to the sea now and find out where it is.

 Righty ho then guys so here I'm at the beach as you can see it's massive we've got to try

 and find this bottle somewhere it's like a needle in a haystack but we'll keep looking

 But I think I might have struck gold it's over here there's definitely a bottle of some

 kind let's have a look at this that looks just like it I'm going to go sit down in the

 Right so I've found a place to sit down let's open it up and see what's in there it's a

 I feel like I'm looking for treasure over there by the rocks save me a piece the rocks

 Oh wait a minute what's that let's go check that out see what this is then guys oh it's

 looking promising let's have a look oh we've got cream in there we've got limes we've got

 butter we've got biscuits I think we've found our ingredients let's get back to the kitchen

 Right guys so we're back in the kitchen these are all the ingredients you need I'm just

 going to get my fingers and show you it yeah just get a little summary of it hip pause

 and all that remember just the yolks and the egg as well first thing I'm going to do is

 grab my biscuits I've plonked them in a bag like that I'm going to bash them up with a

 Right so there's my biscuits I've sealed it along there but made a little holder so some

 air can get in otherwise it will just explode and biscuits will fly everywhere that could

 be kind of fun but we don't want to do that today ok so we're just going to bash these

 nice and light they're going to make little biscuit crumbs so keep doing that amazing

 look at that all nice and smooth so what I'm going to do is plonk that in a little mixing

 bowl ok so they're in there and it's quite addictive to just stick your hands in and

 just go like that but don't do that because it's kind of you know it sort of tingles your

 hand after a while so what I want you to do is grab your sugar just pour that in there

 like so nice amount of sugar that now go melt your butter if it's not melted already

 Ok so that's all in there and you'll see I've got a spoon there all I'm going to do is stir

 that all in together and combine it once it's all nice and blended together what we're going

 to do is stick it in this greased tin that ultimately will become our crust so mix it

 all together once it's done in there ok yeah yeah there we go then so that's all done all

 we need to do now is put that in our oven on gas mark 3 for about 10 minutes until it's

 nice and golden brown and a little bit firmer then we'll leave it to cool so while that's

 Right so for the filling I'm going to use 4 ingredients I'm going to use lime juice

 condensed milk the whole can 4 egg yolks and a little bit of lime zest so when you're biting

 into it you get this little texture of limes if you want you don't have to do that just

 leave it yeah leave it so what I'm going to do is grab myself a bowl like that get my

 whisk ready and start to chuck it all in so the eggs are in there let's give them a

 little whisk ok so the eggs are whisked I'm just going to start to add in the condensed

 milk slowly about a quarter at a time ok until all the cans in there so keep doing that.

 Right brilliant that's all done now grab your lime juice and pour that in nice and also

 your lime zest sprinkle that in I don't know if you can see just in the background I just

 pulled my biscuit out of the oven it's really hot so I'm just letting it do its thing mix

 Right guys that's what our mixture is looking like we need to transfer that into this dish

 now so plonk that on there like so and pour your mixture into there.

 That's just got to go back in our oven now for about 10-15 minutes on gas mark 3 so go

 So the pie is in the oven but we're just going to work on the cream now all I've got is another

 bowl again I'm going to pour my double cream in there like so very nice just want to jump

 in right and I've also got the zest of two of my limes there I'm going to pour that in

 there in just a minute but first of all I want to whisk it so let's whisk it with the

 electric whisk which I've cleaned it's very important to clean it because you don't want

 Ok so we're whisking again brilliant ok so that's all nice and thick you can even see

 it in there see that what we need to do now is chuck in our lime zest and just whisk that

 through a little bit that's going to give us a really funky limey cream.

 In that goes obviously if you want it more limey put more lime zest in if you want it

 Right so the lime zest is all blended through there ignore the bit that looks like eyes

 that's just from where the tongs and my whisk went out of it I'm going to put that straight

 away in the fridge to make sure it stays nice and thick and set and we can just plonk that

 Right guys the cream is in the fridge and I've just got the pie out of the oven it's

 cooling down now and as you can see it's all started to firm up on the top there that's

 good so let it get to room temperature and then put it in the fridge for at the very

 very very very least 2 hours ok ideally you want to leave it overnight but I'm not going

 to do that for this video I'm going to put it in for 2 hours and chug my cream on it

 Right so that's been just over 2 hours you need a lot longer than that for it to set

 because it is starting to melt already this bit but anyhow I've got the Buddha of taste

 buds with me Phoebe you alright mate yeah how are you doing I'm fine do you want to

 try this what is it can you say key lime pie key lime pie go on then have a big bite

 of that no no use a spoon she was going to use her hands then that's the cream no no

 no you want to have some of the pie as well oh wow that's just the cream mate you want

 it I'll get you a tissue I know I'll get you a tissue hang on a minute right back in a

 minute right sorry about that Phoebs I'll put some on your spoon now try that instead

 is that better you like that tell me sum up that cake in one word well it's not a cake

 it's pie can you sum it up for me in one word you want it off she's not a fan but I just

 tried some and it is really really yummy but I'm going to plonk it straight back in the

 fridge and give it a darn good chill overnight so if I can make that absolutely anyone in

 the world can have a go for yourself let me know how you get on and I'll see you again

 This is a six-way adjustable hinge which allows you to move your doors forward, backwards,

 So first adjustment, if I turn my screw here, I'm moving my door this way and that way and

 As I turn it, you can see the gap become larger and smaller and that helps when a door is

 And then the next screw here, you loosen this up and you loosen the upper one up and you

 can push your door up or you can push your door down and that adjusts and lines this

 This is the door that's a little bit warped so you can see that it's moving here, it's

 So we're going to make our first adjustment and remove the in-out adjustment.

 So we turn this and I've adjusted it so the door is pulled in and now we go here and you

 So this adjustment is when the gap is smaller here than up at the top.

 So this is a little closer so we're going to open up our door and make an adjustment

 You can see it's low here and high here so there's an adjustment underneath that we're

 The adjustment is underneath in the silver track and it's a red wheel.

 You take that wheel and you just spin it, you can hear it clicking, and get it down

 Okay, I'm going to show you how to make the Tennessee Vol logo thingy.

 Okay, so once you start off, you just want to get a white background.

 Now I prefer this one, change the color, it's going to be the, uh, one, two, three,

 Then you just want to shrink the edges a little bit, kind of like, if I can just get this

 I'm sorry, I'm trying to get this thing straight, because that's like, okay, there we go.

 Now this part has to be skinnier than the other part, so just like, maybe like that.

 Then, you want to get a totally new piece, like something like this, okay?

 Make sure the color is five down, one, one, two, three, four, five, okay?

 Then you just want to shrink it down, but then make it kind of wide.

 Now, the bottom part's a little bit tougher, but it's not really that hard.

 So you basically just like want to fill it out like that, and then copy, paste, do it

 Now the middle's probably going to be too big, but I'll fix that so you can see at the

 I know I'm being slow, but I'm just trying to get this thing pretty.

 Now I kind of know I've made like the small too big, so I'm just going to have to like,

 Sorry, I'm just trying to fix this up real quick, making it look better.

 You just kind of, you know, it's kind of easy, but then at the same time it's kind of not.

 Okay, and once you get done with that, actually I still don't like these for some reason,

 Okay, and once you get done, I guess you could just maybe like put like black as the outline

 But, let me, sorry, I know I'm taking up time, but I'm just trying to do this as fast as

 Sorry, I know I messed up at the end with the S and all, but what should I do next?

 Oh, and make sure to always keep your, make sure to keep your client tags as vols also,

 Alright, what's up guys, it's Fire13 here from FireShow1.5, and I believe these are

 the Atomic Bass Headphone, or Headset, from Radius, also known as Subject.

 Alright, so in here is my Atomic Bass plus Mic Headset, and that's all that's inside

 These are even smaller than the Subject Version 3 Ninja Headphones.

 I thought they actually came in the other box, but those were my headphones.

 So this is a headset that goes in your ear, and I believe the one with the mic and the

 Open her up, and it is green on the inside, which is nice, because I like green.

 And this top part comes off, and it's all green on here, which is really nice.

 And this actually is not the bass, even though it looks like it.

 So some quick specs is that it has a built-in mic, 120cm wire length, Y-style cable, 3.5,

 and it comes with three sizes, with a 10mm neodymium magnet, 20kHz to 20kHz, 103dB,

 And here are the earbuds themselves, and they are curved to fit inside your ear a little

 But I mean, there is a mic for the same price, which is really nice.

 So I put those down there, and inside the little pouch, there's only one padded side,

 Unzip this, and it comes with the other earbud sizes, large and small, I believe.

 So these can be used to carry your earbuds around, instead of your pocket, to protect

from being in your pocket, which will actually destroy your earbuds.

 Okay, I've noticed some stuff in regards to holding the bokken.

 that we're not holding in such a way that we're holding like a baseball bat.

 it's very hard to steer the direction or the cut of your sword.

 make sure you're not holding in such a way so that the thumb is exposed.

 When you hold the bokken, make sure the index finger is on top.

 My weight's on top of it, but so long as my thumb is strong enough to hold my weight.

 Now when you get into this stance, you don't want to have it out here,

 because the idea there is you don't know if your sword is broken.

 So, safety is going to need to be one of our major concerns with working with a laptop,

 The problem with a laptop is, of course, that there's a lot of plastic and there really

 isn't any big metal case that we can connect to, especially when we don't have it fully

 About the only place we've got are the binding posts around the external ports, like here

 This one has a parallel port, and most laptops, even the newer ones, at least have a VGA port

 So, we might be able to take our alligator clip from our static strap and clip it onto

 Most of the time on the newer laptops, the plastic on the case is molded pretty close

 Sometimes you can get the end of the clip inside a little bit, but most of the time

 So, our second best option is to work on a surface that's going to be as anti-static

 I'm working on the anti-static mat that's under the computers in each station in the

 lab here, and that anti-static mat has a snap connector on it where we can connect this

 anti-static mat to a ground plug for grounding it, or we can connect it to ourselves.

 I've got my static strap on here, and I'm going to just connect that alligator clip

 Now, it does tend to pop loose if you bump it, so you'll need to be careful about where

 Some of you might be able to get it to go on sideways a little bit, but it's the best

 It's also nice to have good empty space to work with here, so clean off your desktop.

 Don't try to work with it while you've got your other keyboard and computer and case

 You're going to need room to maneuver without things tipping over, bumping into things,

 having to set things on top of other components, things like that.

 So always want to be as careful as possible, because here in the lab, while this is an

 old junky laptop that we can replace if something bad happens to it, if this is one of your

 client laptops, the place that you're working, or your boss's laptop, it's not going to be

 too happy if something happens to it while you're working on it for some other problem.

 We're here today on set with two other ZVJ brow artists, Jeannie and Mandy, and we're

 going to show you how we shape brows using the ZVJ Brow Shaping System.

 So to get started, first we're going to assess the brow shape just to see what we're going

 Are they different from each other or have they been over-tweezed?

 Working with the ZVJ Brow Shaping Stencils, we're going to pick the stencil that most

 For the girls today, we're using the green stencil for all three of them.

 The green stencil is the fullest stencil, and even though all three of their brows have

 a slightly different look, the green stencil works for all of them.

 For proper stencil placement, you want to match the top of the stencil arch to the top

 of the natural brow arch, letting the ends fall where they may.

 When Mandy puts the stencil on, we can see that the top left corner at the bridge sticks

 That's an indicator that we're going to need to bring that corner down.

 With Katie's brow, I've done Katie's brows so many times, I'm just going to freehand

 Once we're satisfied with the shape, we're ready to proceed with waxing.

 Usually, we'll do a pre-trim to get rid of some of the length and bulk.

 Then we wax all the way around the brow using a single strip for each section.

 We proceed with tweezing any loose hairs that have either been missed by the wax, or fell

 Also, above the brow, we soften the wax line with feathered tweezing so there's no line

 After the tint reaches appropriate saturation, we rinse the brows again.

 So, I'm going to do a quick demo on how to fill in your brow if your brow is smaller

 and it needs a little extra help just to be the shape you want it to be.

 So, I'm going to just take this off and then show you how I fill it in.

 So, I go around the brow first with concealer so I can see it better.

 So, you want to use something that's a little lighter than your skin and just pop that out

 And then the actual brow, especially if you're a blonde, you will show up better.

 You're actually going around the whole outside edge of the brow, therefore making it look

 So, the first line, I actually soften the pitch of the arch a little bit because they're

 And then the next line that goes above the brow is totally parallel to the first line.

 And then once you get that, the turn in the arch is an elongated triangle.

 If anything's a little too dark, you can use the spoolie to soften it.

 And in the front section, if your brows don't come in enough, you can use the brush upside

 The front side should start right at the notch of the nostril, not on the outside like

 Okay, so I'm going to do the same demo on Ginny's so you can see it on another set of

 So, I'm going to go around them with some concealer to brighten it.

 And the concealer helps, too, to give the, I don't know, some tack so that the shadow

 And we're just trying to not put too much curve in there, but expand the edge of the

 So I filled the bottom line in, and I focused on the top line of that elongated triangle.

 And I'm just trying to get the color up to the same density as the front.

 In the front, I'm going to use the lighter color and just push it up through the brow

 You don't want the front bridge to look too, otherwise it gives you angry eyebrows, right?

 She doesn't need much fill at all in the front, but I'm going to go in and just do a little

 And then you just want to comb through it so it looks good and soft.

 On our models, Ginny is using the ZVJ Brow Duo Sandy on Hannah.

 Mandy is using Brunette on Helen, and I'll be using Blonde on Katie.

 With the gel, you want to comb upwards through the brow and fan out towards the end.

 They all look really amazing, nice and full, and still uniquely different and beautiful.

I wanted to do a tutorial on a hairstyle that Miley Cyrus and Tyra Banks both wear.

 I've always, and usually I do my hair starting from the bottom and I work my way up.

 I'm starting from the front and I'm going to work my way back if I've got time because

And then I'm going to be working with kind of, if you think of a rectangle kind

So I want it to be a little bit longer and a little bit narrower.

Now I've got little frizzies right here so I just kind of roll it down.

 make sure that for this hairstyle your curling iron is always going towards the back, like

But for this look I'm going to go ahead and curl them all towards the back.

 And then I'm going to put pictures of the look that I'm trying to achieve.

 them either at the beginning of the movie or at the end of the movie.

 Cyrus look, all you've got to do is use a barrel that's got a little bit more width.

 It's weird because I got so used to curling with the curling irons that don't have a clamp

 and now the ones that have a clamp are a little bit more awkward for me to use.

 I'm going to have to speed it up I think because I want you guys to see me do my whole head.

 I guess it's not really that helpful to you guys to see these back curls but okay.

 My name is Donnie Ray Crisp and today I'm going to show you how to draw

 Okay so this is going to be a very quick quick tip because it is very easy to do

 we need to do is to choose a brush that has a hard edge and that is

 matter how much pressure I add or take away the thickness of the lines doesn't

And if I choose a pressure sensitive brush instead like this one

 the more pressure I add or take away the thicker or thinner the lines get and

 have to draw like if your arm is getting electroshocks all the time so you can't

 be just like oh I'll draw very smooth lines and these lines are so smooth and

It has to be more like I can't take the pain this hurts so much please stop.

 Something like that and that gives our lines the structure it needs.

 that we need to do is to set some blending options for our layer so we get

 option that you want to activate or choose is outer glow and then you choose

 your color and your outer glow color should be the same color as your line

 pull up the size a bit to get a nice glow and take the opacity a little bit

 setting is inner glow and the inner glow should be a brighter color than the line

 color so color pick the blue and then you can pull it almost to white.

 blend mode should also be normal and then you can pull back the opacity to a

 blending options are still active so we can start fresh and start with a thick

 line and then take back the pressure and add pressure and don't forget your

 And always keep adding pressure and taking pressure away because this will

 give a very nice effect or give your lightning strike a very nice structure.

 See that is almost too smooth right here that doesn't look natural.

 And the last thing that I wanted to show you is that you can also use this effect

 I'll just delete this right here and activate this layer down here.

 Okay so I hope you enjoyed the tutorial and tell me how you liked it in the

 A traditional lasagna recipe can take hours to prepare, but with our weeknight lasagna

 Now don't worry, you're still going to get all that authentic slow-cooked lasagna flavor

 by using our oven-ready lasagna noodles and Kraft shredded mozzarella cheese.

 First thing I'm going to do is brown one pound of lean ground beef.

 All right, this is nicely browned, so I'm just going to drain the fat off before I add

 We've got two chopped green peppers and three cloves of garlic, minced.

 We're going to add one-quarter cup of Kraft zesty Italian dressing.

 And this is the part of the recipe that really saves you the time.

 Now, the best part about the recipe is that these lasagna noodles require no pre-cooking.

 They get hydrated and cooked just by being in here with the sauce and the water.

 And of course, they're soaking up all that delicious Kraft zesty Italian dressing flavor.

 Let it simmer for 10 to 15 minutes until the noodles are tender.

 And it's time to add the cheese, the best part of any lasagna recipe.

 Now I'm going to add one cup of Kraft shredded low-moisture part-skim mozzarella cheese.

 Now, if you want to make this dish extra cheesy, you can add one-half cup of Breakstone's

 or Knudsen ricotta cheese to the mixture before you put the mozzarella cheese on top.

 You know when the neighborhood kids all come over and they say, Mom, can so-and-so stay

 So remember, oven-ready noodles in half an hour gets you a perfect meal any night of

 For more Italian recipes, search keyword lasagna on KraftFoods.com.

Cake flour is lighter than all-purpose flour and it's pretty good in cakes.

 And just in case you can't find it in the store or you know, you can't find it or whatever, we're just going to make it.

 So, you're going to need all-purpose flour, cornstarch, and a sifter.

 So, I'm just going to, my recipe calls for two cups of flour that I'm going to be using later.

 So, for every cup of flour, you take two tablespoons of flour out.

 Now I have two cups of flour, so I'm going to take four tablespoons out.

 I took four tablespoons out, so now I'm going to have to put four tablespoons of cornstarch in.

 So, this is what it looks like after you've sifted it a bunch of times.

 If you feel it, it's extremely light compared to the all-purpose flour and it'll make your cake really light.

 I'm just going to show you how to get into a Dell Vostro laptop to replace the memory

 Just a word of caution here, if you're unsure of what to do or unsure of any of the steps,

 Now what we're going to have to do is remove this panel here, just that panel, and there's

 Just to quicken up the video, I've actually removed those screws beforehand, and then

 once you remove the screws, there's a little, there's two finger things, just pull that

 up and there's one on this side too, but usually just one side will be enough.

 Remove that back panel and there we've got the hard drive and memory up there.

 With the hard drive, there's a couple of extra screws to remove, one there and one there.

 I've done that previously, again just to make sure this video is a bit quicker.

 So to remove the hard drive, once the screws are removed, we just push it to the left and

 The hard drive itself is sitting in a little caddy and that has another two screws on this

 So you'll have to remove four extra screws to remove the caddy and then you can put in

 And to put it back in, it's just the reverse of what we did to take it out, and I've got

 If you're unsure, you can have a look at from a side angle which one goes into where.

 You've got the connector there, the power and the data connector.

 So just put it in and then again slide it to the right until the little connectors go

 You've got two little clips, one there and one on the other side, and you'll probably,

 you may need a little screwdriver to get in to release the clips.

 So just get a normal flathead screwdriver, push it to one side and push that and you

 And memory, you can just pull it out and then do the reverse to put it back in.

 Then put the cover on, it's just the simple reversing what we did earlier.

 It's also not a very difficult thing to do depending on your car

 You can talk to the people at your local O'Reilly's, Shucks, auto shop

 You have to buy a little tool, they normally sell it at the auto parts store

 First thing you want to do to find your spark plugs is find your cables

 All four of these are right here, they're pretty easy to access

 So right there you can see the spark plug, I'm holding a little bit of a light on it

 It's pretty far in there, so it helps if you have some extensions on your ratchet

 This spark plug is pretty bad, I'm not even sure if the cylinder was firing

 Alright, so now what we're gonna do is put the new spark plugs in

 Now one of the important things to remember when putting these in

 Is you don't want to strip the threads on the inside of the engine

 So when I first put them in, if I can, I just put them in by hand, screw them down

 But I'm not gonna put the ratchet on, I'm gonna hand screw it in until it's tight

 Screw it in, it should go pretty far before you need to attach a ratchet

 But these are kind of hard to get that right amount of pressure

 One of the most important parts is making sure that all your spark plug cables go back to where they were supposed to

 It's really, really bad, you could blow your engine if you don't do it right

 Don't forget to hit that subscribe button and check out our website right here

 I decided to build some floating shelves to replace these small boxes.

 I drew level lines wherever I wanted the shelves to be installed.

 To hold the shelves in place, I needed to mount some clips onto the walls.

 The clips were mounted using screws with anchors, and I used nails onto the corners where the

 With the clips in place, it was a good time for me to fill the holes and paint the wall.

 This was the material I used for the panels to recycle that wood.

 First, I needed to get rid of the 2x4s that were attached with so many staples to the

 Next, it was time for me to stain the wood in this rich mahogany color.

 Now that the boards are stained and ready, I'm going to put the shelves together.

 And in the middle of them, I'm going to put these pieces of 1x2 like this.

 Now, this is ready to be installed in the bathroom on the clips that were placed on

 Now that it's already in place, I'm just going to nail it to the clip that was previously

Well inside this rather ordinary looking Chinese restaurant, we have a picture up.

 There are two chefs, two menus, one kitchen and a shared dining room.

 And what would you say if I told you that the young talented chef that was hired to cook there had never cooked Chinese food before?

 Well, I'm happy he's here today to show us how he makes his popular hand-pulled noodles that

 The fun thing about this is again, it's not supposed to be this like perfect perfect thing.

 It's a very free-form thing and and the the interesting thing about this noodle is that as you were gonna tear it from one

 So what we do is you take with your finger and your thumb and you just kind of stretch it and then slap it like

 We're gonna take from that tear and just pull so you get this one really really long noodle.

 You know, the big thing is when you slap this against the cutting board or whatever work surface you have

 It's gonna it's gonna create like a little seam in the middle here

 So we're gonna do is we're pull it again almost the shoulders length with your finger and your thumb and then just slap it

 It's important because if you look at it, the outside is very thick and the inside is very thin

 So you get a very like a varying texture like the outside is really chewy.

Okay, so there yeah, and then just from one end to the other down the middle.

 Guys, a new little invention they've come out with this year is called the bird hitch.

 And it is great for people who kill a huge quantity of birds or for the guy that goes

 out and kills his limit and he's two hours from home and he wants to go ahead and do

 It's real simple to use and I'm going to show you how on a few mallards right here.

 And all you do once you get it started is just keep pressure on it.

 For those that have to leave a wing on if you're out of state, you can transport it

 Okay, today I'd like to talk about another easy song for beginners in mind.

 You got your G major, A major, C, and when you go from C to D7, don't move the first

 finger, it's where it already needs to be, and bring two and three over it backwards

 And then we have an E minor, just two and three right here, on the A and D second fret.

 But we're not gonna do that, because that's a little harder for most beginners.

 We're just gonna do eighth notes strumming, one and two and three and four, just alternate

 I'm gonna go through it, and you can follow along and just try to keep your eighth notes

 That way you got a bass in the note and you can strum all strings.

 You're just moving your C up and putting your third finger on the third fret.

 On the low E, third fret and the fourth right behind it on the third fret A.

 It's been 30 minutes now and I know my cake is ready because this lovely

All you have to do is with a knife, just go along the edges so that it's easier to upturn it.

 Now I've done it with a cake pan which has a hole in the middle.

 If you're going to use just a flat one and no hole in the middle, then it would probably take more than 30 minutes, probably 45-50 minutes.

And that is just take a toothpick, poke it somewhere in the middle, take it out, see if there's nothing on the stick,

 if there's no raw dough in the stick, then you know that it's done.

Now all I have to do is just a simple, simple lemon glaze icing.

It's just icing sugar with a little bit of warm water, that's it.

 Nothing exceptionally, well, it's nothing very complicated, okay?

Icing sugar is notorious for taking up lumps or forming lumps, so you have to be very careful in sifting it first.

 You first sift it so that you get a very fine textured or fine powdered icing sugar.

 I always make the mistake of adding a lot of water, then I have to add a lot more icing sugar and then the whole process is a bit very tedious.

 So what the best thing is to add very, very little amounts and don't just put in a whole lot of water.

 Okay, so what I'm going to do is because it's a lemon cake, we need the lemon glaze icing.

 Now you can add lime juice and the icing sugar, but I think it's a bit too citrusy.

 Simple, very, very simple because we don't need a butter icing.

 But I prefer, I actually don't prefer icing on my cakes at all because I'm very conscious of my health.

 Now since we have a hole in the middle, okay, I thought of putting or filling it with some cherries, okay, because it's summer.

 So for that, and it'll also look very beautiful, I got some cherries, okay?

 Now, if it's not cherries you want, you can actually cut up mangoes or bananas, any fruit which you like, okay?

 But I think cherries and strawberries, even strawberries are beautiful.

 They, the redness of the fruit and the yellowness of the lemon cake make a beautiful contrast.

 that movie, I knew I had to find a way to create a low carb version of ramen noodle soup.

So here are the ingredients you'll need for making the soup stock.

 I have chicken broth, then I have sesame oil, soy sauce, and then I have some spices.

Okay, so the first thing I'm going to do is I'm going to add the chicken broth

 I'm going to allow this to come to a boil and I'll be right back.

Okay, so I've added the tofu puffs and I'm going to let that sit in the broth

 Okay guys, so I stopped the video because I wanted to talk about the next step.

 kale or you can add chicken or fish or shrimp or roast beef or roast pork.

 Remember, this is now your ramen noodle soup, so have fun with it.

 going to do is I'm going to get my strainer and I'm going to strain the broth into the bowl.

If you'd like the entire recipe, it will be listed on my website.

 Alright, now it's time to clean it out and the front wheel fit in the bucket.

 Most of your gold is going to be hidden like right there, right there, and scattered throughout.

 First thing we're going to do is unhook these ends and get some of the gold and sand off

 One thing in the streams, you've got to make sure your gold pan doesn't keep floating away.

 And this green mat, you have to give it a lot of time because that's your money mat.

 I've actually bought a dredge when I was in Pennsylvania, cleaned it out, and found all

 kind of gold that was missed when they actually were running it.

 So there will always be gold in here that you won't get out, so just do your best.

 Some people will just like move it to the side and cook your vegetables.

 I just put them in there because I'm worried about my battery dying.

 Let me tell you, this smells good and I bet you it's going to taste good.

 I'm the personal trainer and you guys have been out there partaking I'm sure.

 Come on, three, four, do it, five, six, seven, eight, very nice, nine, good work, nine, nine,

 personal trainer trick, sorry, ten, very nice, well done, sit down.

 There you go, you've burnt off one tiny little morsel of chocolate that you had out there,

 I want to put out there straight away that I am not a cook and I am not a chef.

 And when I was asked to come here to present at the Good Food and Wine Festival, I was

 But I do obviously have a lot of cookbooks out and there's always a nutrition section

 within any of my books that I do, which is obviously a big part of what I do.

 If you're training well and exercising well, then you need to eat well as well.

 You've got to back up your exercise with really good nutrition.

 This is a serving for two people, so it'll be two slices per person.

 We were here yesterday together and you very kindly had me as your, the B word.

 And we were talking about, and I said to you, sometimes, look, I just don't have time for

 Who would be with me there who doesn't have time for breakfast?

 And I think I asked you, is it really the worst thing in the world?

 Breakfast, the meal of champions is breakfast, yada, yada, yada.

 But probably one of the most important factors that I've found with the people that I work

 with is that there's a common theme with people who struggle with their weight.

 Now, I usually measure that out, but I know that was about a teaspoon.

 And measuring out, I find, is really important because it just keeps you in check of where

 So I'll have clients that usually say to me, do you want to do that?

 Maybe have lunch, maybe have lunch, maybe half a sandwich or one of my favorite lunchtime

 And then they'll start cooking dinner and they'll eat dinner while they're cooking dinner.

 And then we'll sit down in front of the TV and go, right, so who's up for some ice cream?

 And I've had clients that have even gone into, you know, waking up at two o'clock in the

 It kind of just makes me feel a bit, it's like, dude, how could you do breakfast?

 You're on a six-hour bender last night from the time you walked in from home.

 It gets you thinking, clearly, if you've got a little bit of protein, a little bit of low

 And we play these little games with ourselves of like, oh, but I didn't eat breakfast.

 Before we do that, we're going to put a little bit of cottage cheese, low-fat cottage cheese.

 And I would probably even put a little bit of squeeze of lemon juice on that.

 You could do this in the microwave if we don't have one on set.

 So we just put a little bit of water in a frying pan and just wilt it down that way.

 These recipes are coming out of my new book, which will come out next year.

 I just often put it into the mushrooms or you can just sprinkle it on top.

 And that just gives it a nice little bit of extra flavour as well.

 Alright, well last tutorial we covered how to do a planet similar to this except for

 But I was thinking, what if you wanted to do rings around the planet, like Saturn.

 And so you should have a setup similar to this if you followed last tutorial.

 So once you have this setup going, you're going to want to add a layer.

 And the layer should be above your planet layer, which in my case is this one.

 So push ctrl backspace to make it all white and then ctrl I to invert it.

 And so now that you have your black layer that's above your planet labeled clouds, you're

 So you can back up on the preview to see what it will look like.

 You can increase and decrease depending on how much you want your rings to be spun.

 I'm going to set mine to, I'll set it somewhere around 530, somewhere close to there.

 Then you just take the elliptical key tool and just try to select a bunch of that.

 And then move the clouds layer out of the way and turn it off because you won't be needing

 You're going to bend it like this and sort of just try to get it to about the right size

 And I'm not sure exactly what this planet would need, but something like that maybe?

 Once you have your mask set for that layer, you get a brush and get black.

 Because black erases whenever you have a mask on and white fills back in.

 So get your mask and set your opacity to 100% with a very soft brush.

 And just start to sort of edge out the parts that you wouldn't need.

 When you're doing the edges, you probably should use a smaller brush, but still soft,

 to get it a little bit more precise and to get it to where it doesn't have such a hard,

 Any mistakes you make can always be filled back in with white later.

 That's one of the nice things about layer masks is you can always just fill back in

 When you fill back in though, you might want to lower your opacity.

 And you can always free transform it again and try to get it fitting the planet a little

 And so then, once you have that done, I'm going to go back to black now and start erasing

 some of the rings that are outside the actual planet, like right here.

 But after a little bit of work, it started to look a little bit better over time.

 But before I do that, I'm going to go into color balance down here.

 So I'm going to add a little bit of blue, a little bit of cayenne, maybe just a hint of green.

 And then you take that layer that it created for you and you merge down.

 And you can always, if you think that something doesn't look right on them,

 And so what you're going to want to do in this case is take the layer mask

 and color in some of this part over here that the sun wouldn't normally be hitting.

 I'm Joel Brown and I'm doing a video on how to safely remove a bedroom or bathroom door

 And as always when you're working with tools, use safety glasses.

 These are some of the tools I often use to remove and replace doors.

 But today we're just going to use the small screwdriver and a hammer so that we can use

 You'll want to use a book or something a little smaller in the space between the door and

 the floor to hold the door up so as you remove the pins, the door doesn't fall down or twist

 A screwdriver, a hammer, and usually on these hinges there's a small hole to lift up on

 You've loosened the pins and you've stuck your spacer below the door.

 Get some help to hold the door while you remove the pins the rest of the way and make sure

 You remove the top, bottom, and very carefully slide the door away from the hinges.

 Put the door back on, you reverse the process but always start with your bottom hinge.

 The reason you start with your bottom hinge is you have a little more control on your

 Once you have it lined up and your pin in place, you do the same thing for the top.

 It's hard for me to find enough strength to feed the flies that fuel my ego.

 Leaves me down on my knees back to the place I should have started from.

 Been beat up, been broken down, nowhere better when you're face down on the ground.

 Alright, now we're going to fix the problem with the phone charger.

 Open it up, as you can see, clearly, one side of the 12 volts is unsoldered.

 I know there's much better ways to do this, but this is the quick fix.

 Now, that looks like a terrible job, but a little blow, a little pull, and it's repaired.

 Alright, I'm going to tape this back together because I don't have any glue,

 but if you can just glue it, set that down, any tape will work.

 I thought I'd do something a little different for you guys as far as videos go.

 Neither of my parents cooked and therefore I didn't really pick up a knack for it.

 But nevertheless, I've been known to make a thing or two and most of the time it comes

 It's Wednesday and today, well tonight, a couple hours is the kickoff of the 2012 NFL

 So I am making something that I think would be a good meal to partake in while watching

 I found this recipe on Pinterest and if I can find the original pin and from the pin

 find the original source of the recipe, I will put a link for it in the thing below.

 Since it's really fancy nachos, like a nacho casserole, my arm's getting tired, sorry.

 I've got actually a little over 2 pounds of hamburger browning.

 I actually don't need that much hamburger but I'd already thawed that much because that's

 But yeah, this is just browning and then once it's done I will drain off the juice and then

 I'm going to add in, let me look at my directions here, I'm going to add tomato sauce, a little

 bit of water and it's supposed to be taco seasoning but I don't care for most taco seasonings

 So I am using enchilada sauce instead, which is good because I actually don't have enough

 of the tomato sauce that the recipe calls for so this will make up for the lack of tomato

 My husband makes tacos quite a bit and uses enchilada sauce instead of taco seasoning.

 And then once that's all mixed together it will go into a pan and what I will do is line

 These obviously are not actual crescents themselves in the crescent shape.

 I'll just take it, open it and roll it out without taking it apart.

 And then in goes the hamburger, sour cream, not the entire tub of sour cream, like half

 of that, cheese which I will have to shred this and then up here the last thing, my husband's

 Not the entire bag of Doritos but just some, just for a crunchy topping.

 So but I have to finish browning the hamburger first so once I am done with this and move

 I've got the tomato sauce and the enchilada sauce in here and it smells really good.

 So I've got that just sitting on low to keep it warm and I've got my crescent rolls rolled

 I know they don't quite look right but that's okay because they're about to get covered

 So I'm going to ladle on the hamburger and then the sour cream and then the cheese and

 then the Doritos and then I will show it to you before I put it in the oven.

 I got the oven at 350 and everything's in the pan and it's going to go in the oven and

 Nice and hot all the cheese is all bubbly and oh it's a goodness.

 It's a little hot to eat right now and then we will try it and see if it tastes as good

 Hi, I'm Chef AJ and today I'm going to show you how to make the long-awaited yummy sauce.

 If you saw my video, Easy Meals to Make You Thin, I referred to a sauce that my family and I enjoy that I call the yummy sauce.

 And I said it was going to be in my next book and nobody can wait for that book, so I'm doing the video right now to show you this delicious recipe.

 Speaking of my book, I'm typing as fast as I can, but I don't have a title for it.

 So if any of you have a great title, please let me know and if I use it, I'd be happy to give you a free book.

 As some of you know, I travel extensively and I've been on the road for over three years.

 I was stuck at the Memphis airport and there's nothing healthy to eat at the Memphis airport.

 And this is before I knew how to travel and eat healthy on the road.

 And I came home, it was after 10 o'clock, Whole Foods and Trader Joe's was closed.

 I was starving and all I had in the freezer was some organic brown rice and some organic kale,

 which normally I eat every day, but I just was in a bad mood and I just wasn't inspired to just eat yet another plain meal.

 Well, I had some stone ground salt-free mustard, had a lemon, almost already shriveled up.

 And on the shelf I had a box of organic salt-free cannellini beans.

 When I was in seventh grade at home economics, I won a prize for the most creative use of ingredients

 because the last day of school when they had to clean out their refrigerator before summer,

 whoever could make the best recipe out of whatever was left would win.

 So in my blender I am going to put one and a half cups of cannellini beans.

 Just make sure you rinse and drain them, especially if they have salt.

 These weigh three quarters of an ounce, about a quarter of an ounce each.

 So if you're using Medjool, which weigh more, you might want to adjust accordingly.

 This is a two tablespoon measure, so if it looks like I'm only putting in one,

 This is my favorite mustard, it's really good, it's not too spicy.

 Now, some lemons vary in size, so if I had a lemon this small, it wouldn't have had too much juice.

 I always have organic lemon juice on hand for things like this,

 But it's really important to have the zest, it adds so much flavor and dimension to this

 You know, I used to work at a retirement home, and we were prohibited from using any salt.

 And I learned a long time ago that if you can't use salt, it's really helpful when you use sour,

 Because your taste buds for salt sit right next to your taste buds for sour,

 so you can often trick your palate thinking you had something salty when you didn't.

 It's okay if I'm going to put a little more zest in this, because I just want to show you a couple of great tools.

 And if you're a guy, it's just kind of like, imagine you're shaving your face.

 You just kind of make this motion, and you get these shreds that come out nice and long.

 You don't want to go over the same area, because then you're going to get the white part,

 Now, some chefs prefer a microplane, which does basically the same thing,

 It doesn't really matter which one you use, but it really adds a nice dimension.

 And what I like about using one of the high-powered blenders is that if you let it run,

 And since this is the sauce that I often use on things like rice and veggies,

 It's a really easy sauce to make with very few readily available ingredients.

 and for me, I use about a half a cup when I'm eating my veggie rice bowl.

 The way it got the name is because when I made it, I had my husband taste it,

 you could certainly add a little bit more water and thin it out.

 And if you want it thicker, you could use a little bit less water.

 because remember, you can have the health and the body that you deserve,

 Hi, I'm Tony Pantelrescuo and we're going to do another segment of Stuff to Keep You

 what we're going to do is we're going to make the sauce, we're going to put these ingredients

 in there and the reason why we're putting them in there is for several reasons.

 is the antioxidants in cinnamon and clove will preserve the apple.

 like quercetin and pectin that will bind with certain things and protect the respiratory

And when you put them together, they actually knock out viruses, parasites, yeast,

 and a whole lot of loads of other pathogens and they actually can act as a mini anti-cancer

This is a bag of fruit that I picked up at an ethnic market, a European market,

 which has black currant in it and it has chokeberry, which has elderberry, and hibiscus flower.

 the mix, blend it up and it will flavor the apple sauce a little bit better.

And when you eat these apples with the wax, it collects in the liver,

 collects in the gallbladder, collects in the spleen area, you wind up with a problem.

 these times, not in the way they're spraying and the way they're coating these apples.

What we're going to do is just going to cut them up into a little bit smaller pieces,

 make a juice out of this, what you would do is you'd blend it, put your cinnamon in there

 done this where it will hold for three weeks with the cinnamon.

Always have another apple ready just in case, you need to add more.

It's your girl Miss E and this is my day 2 after I rinsed my hair.

 I have Kinky Curly Curling Custard in my hair and I just rinsed it yesterday with water.

 I'm about to take a nap so I'm going to show you guys how I wear my hair when I sleep.

 So I just take one of these hair bands without the metal and I put it on my head.

 So I just put it around my head and then what I do is I push it up.

 But the thing is to get your curls from down here and it keeps your hair stretched.

 And I'm just folding it so that I can lay it across the front and tie it in the back.

 And I still sleep on a satin pillowcase so that if this hair does touch the pillowcase

 And then when I take it down I just pull it out, spray it with the leave-in conditioner and bam!

 I hope you guys enjoyed this quick little tutorial and I'll talk to you guys later.

I am Miss Fushi and today we are going to learn how to make banana oatmeal pancakes.

 It's a really easy recipe and there's just a few things that you're going to need.

 One cup of dry oatmeal, two eggs, a medium-sized banana, some cinnamon, some honey, and some butter.

 You're going to add the oatmeal to a blender and blend it into a fine flour.

 The first thing into your blender is going to be your two eggs.

 You're going to break them right into the blender, yolks and all.

 Then add your oatmeal flour and a little bit of cinnamon, as much as you like.

 Next, you're going to take a skillet on medium to high heat and melt some butter.

It's going to keep your pancake from sticking and also make it come out a beautiful golden brown color.

 Once that's all melted, then you're going to add your pancake batter.

 You have enough batter to make two medium-sized pancakes if you followed the recipe.

 You can top these with fruit or syrup, but personally, I like to use fresh honey.

 You can leave me a comment and you can also subscribe to my channel.

 So thanks for joining me again today, and I'll see you in my next video.

 Okay, so this is how to make a genuine squirrel spring and noose trap.

 What you're going to need is a nice long springy branch that you can sink into the ground.

 You're going to need a small stick that you tie on with the string to your springy branch.

 You're going to want to have two of these, I guess they'd be seven shapes, or ones.

 You're going to want to drive them to the ground, so sharpen them on the bottom.

 And you're going to want to have two straight sticks that have not been debarked afterwards.

 Having a nice long springy branch is going to be flexible and harder to drive into the ground.

 So I'm using a straight and strong pointed stick, and I just have some random chunk of wood to hammer it down with.

 First you're going to need a nice spot of ground in which you can set it up in.

 Now, I'm going to want to clear this, these, from all the pine hay.

 And just kind of kick some dirt around to it, to kind of pack it in.

 So I'm going to pull this down as far as it will let me without protesting.

 Right there is going to be where I'm wanting to set my two 7-shape sticks.

 And you want them far apart enough that these sticks will fit into.

 Really you're going to want to have your roughest stick jammed up in there.

 You're going to want to bring down your branch and hold this small stick here.

 I just tied a small loop into the end of this and all you have to do is just pull the string through.

 Make sure, because this thing is nowhere near your face, it will whip you.

 So the animal comes down, and you're going to want to make sure that the animal is not in the way.

 Generally, since this is a stick, of course, this thing does not have its body inside the noose.

 But generally the animal would have its body sitting right in the noose.

 And I felt that, it closed right around my hand and I just slipped it out.

 So have fun with it and comment, rate, and subscribe to my videos because I make new ones almost every day.

 There's nothing like the new pizza oven from the Companion Group.

 This outdoor tabletop pizza oven will cook a pizza in 5 minutes flat and give you the

 same results as if you were using a wood burning pizza oven, but without any of the hassle.

 There are several patent pending components of this oven that make it unique.

 The baking stone is actually comprised of two interlocking cordierite stones.

 The bottom stone takes the heat of the flame, which is underneath the oven, will transfer

 into the air that's trapped in between the two stones, and that will transfer to the

 top stone, which brings it up to temperature evenly so there are no hot spots.

 The optimal temperature is going to be between 450 degrees and 500.

 There's also a heat shield built into the top of the oven, which will actually deflect

 the heat back onto the top of your pizza so that your pizza toppings will get golden and

 The heat shield is perforated so that any moisture that's coming off of the pizza will

 dissipate out of the top of the oven so there is no risk of any sogginess whatsoever on

 Now the oven itself will become quite hot, but it is safe on any surface.

 As you can see, I've got it on a wood tabletop here, just putting my hand underneath the

 I also have the vent on top where the moisture is escaping, but I don't feel anything.

 That being said, you still want to be sure that you're working your oven in a well-ventilated

 You can use a 1-pound tank or a 20-pound tank, but that means it's incredibly portable.

 This is a great oven for tailgating, camping, anywhere you want to have a pizza party.

 So the built-in thermometer is telling me that its ambient temperature is around 600

 It needs a little bit more time, so I'll be back in a few and we'll be ready for the pizza.

 Now the oven's been running on preheat for 10 minutes, so the ambient temperature, the

 It's on a pizza peel that's been heavily dusted, so it's going to slide off very easily onto

 So I just want to show you the golden, beautiful, bubbly toppings that you're getting from that

 heat deflection shield, as well as that crispy, beautiful crust that you're getting from the

 So there you have it, the brand new pizza oven from the Companion Group.

 Alright, I'm going to be installing some memory in the MacBook Pro.

 I got 16GB of RAM and I'm installing in the 15-inch late 2012 MacBook Pro model.

 You're going to need the 00 Phillips screwdriver and you're going to need some memory.

 I'm going to put a link in the description to where you can get the memory from.

 The first thing you want to do is make sure you're in a static free area.

 Then you just take off all the outside screws and keep in mind that the last three are longer

 than the other screws so you might want to keep them separated.

 Then when you remove it you'll see the memory right here and then you got a little battery

 And then first we got to disconnect the battery connector and you can use a pry tool to do

 Alright and then to take out the memory that's in there you got these little tabs on the

 When you push them the memory pops up and you just take it out.

 Alright and then you take your new memory and you see the little gap?

 Once you have it in there you just push it down until you hear it click.

 Well, that's the flamenco typical flamenco chord progression, which is quite simple because four chords, which most of you already know

 But you know a couple of things which might help you get that flamenco sound the first thing is having a classical guitar

 because it's that nice playing of nylon strings and steel strings and and fine woods that gives it that Spanish sound and

 Kind of closer to the bridge than you would normally play, okay?

 And then I want to teach you a kind of a flamenco strum to get you going

 And basically the way that's done is resting your thumb on the top string and using your other three fingers

 So if you want to practice that sort of strong you can rest your elbow on the top of your car like that and just

 And if you when you start to hear sounds coming out of the mouth of the guitar, you know you

 And what you want to do is you want to kind of graze the guitar?

 Want to make sound even more flamenco instead of playing a full bar code you can lift up your

They look kind of funny, but they're really great for stretching out the calves and

 You want to hold your arms out and kick your legs up and just walk

 Along the baseline or the side of the court one up doing that and then I'll show you the next one to do on your

 Ankles and then you just keep going so I'll show it to you again go down

 And then you just keep walking out and doing the same thing and you go back up one doing the Frankenstein

 And back doing the inchworm and then you could do high skips and

 You definitely want to warm up your body with movement not static stretching.

 If you don't want to walk around, just stay behind the step is fine.

 Hello, today I'm going to teach you how to make tuxedo hair bows for infants.

 What you're going to need is 3 1⁄8 inch ribbon, any kind, alligator clip, ruler, lighter,

 First of all, what we're going to do is we're going to cut the ribbon.

 One that is 4 inches, one that is 3 inches, and one that is 1 1⁄2 inches.

 Then the next thing we're going to do is, with the lighter and matches, we're going

 After you've sealed the ribbon, we are going to glue the ribbon on to the alligator clip.

 You're going to need to use the 4 inch one, the longest, first.

 We're going to hot glue the inside of the not so straight and just set the hot glue

 Then you're going to bring it to the top part and hot glue that all the way across.

 Now once you have the front side done, you have a little extra, you're going to bring

 The next thing you're going to do is you're going to take the 3 inch ribbon and you're

 You just need to get a little dab of glue and stick it on the end right there.

 And then you're going to bring it around and hot glue it to be a circle.

 Then you're going to get a little dab of glue in the middle of the alligator clip and nicely

 Then you're going to hot glue the inside of the circle a little bit and push it down.

 Then you're going to take your 1.5 inch strip and hot glue the middle of that.

 What you're going to have to do is open that up and hot glue the middle.

 We have the mirepoix in there already, the carrots, the onions, and the celery, a few

 Make sure the bay leaves are better looking than mine, that they should have a little

 Get all the flavor out of the vegetables, then we'll add the fish to it.

 So to that I'm going to add a half a quart of water, a cup of white wine.

 When I set the timer to 15 minutes, I'll let you know how long we will simmer the vegetables.

 This is optional because what you see before you is what you need to poach a piece of fish.

 I'm adding tomato to this because of the flavor and the fact that I'm going to be eating this.

 And I'm also going to add, not that it's the traditional way of making mirepoix, but I

 Since this is a clear dish, I'm going to use an eighth of a teaspoon of white pepper.

 It's not as noticeable as the black, but if I was making it for myself, I would use the

 Well it's been boiling for 10 minutes and I think that's good to go.

 Let me just taste for salt and then we'll place the fish in there and finish.

 It doesn't take a long time to cook fish when you're poaching it.

 As you see, I had a little overspill there and then I cut it down.

 It's very early in the morning on the Feather River and after a two year closure we're finally

 We're fishing with Ray Thurford who runs RH Guide Service and he's anchored up on a seam

 just below the mouth of the Yuba River where we can run lures like quick fish and flat

 Okay what we're going to do here is we're going to slice a piece of the sardine off

 and we're going to attach it to this flat fish here and what we'll do is give it a little

 About half way down the sardine you just fillet it off like this and we're going to straighten

 Then you're going to take your flat fish and slide it right up the hook like that.

 And then we just tie it on and you can stuff right here with crawdad or whatever you want

 to put in there but we're going to put a little sardine pro cure on also.

 Use your finger to kind of hold it straight and you flip the hook forward like so and

 Then I normally flip the hook back forward and do the last one right around the front.

 The last piece, the most important thing so your line doesn't hang up on your hook.

 Stick your finger out, go around and we're going to go through twice.

 Then you're going to take a little pair of scissors so you don't tear your bait up and

 I know it's an old tore up lure but it's been hooking a lot of fish lately.

 We're going to put that back out there and see if we can catch another one.

 What we're going to do is lob them out the side where we think the fish are coming through

 Once you feel your bite, you have to set the hook and you have to keep it tight.

 The advantage on these lures also is you can go into heavy timber, brush, sticks, everything.

 You drop these in there and when you get hung up, you just tap it a few times and give it

 We're working a little runway right here and we're just going to lob them out there.

 You want to keep your spool on free spool until it hits the bottom.

 That way you fall right where you toss this, where your lure falls.

 Right here we're in 12 feet of water so we're just, we're not lobbing them real far, but

 We have one in the water with the flatfish and then we're using the spoon with our other

 Where we're at here is we're below the Yuba River and we have a, the water's cooler on

 What I was just saying, the water on the right hand side of the river is about five degrees

 cooler than the water on the left hand so we're sitting right on the water line.

 We weren't hardly losing any, but that's three fish already this morning.

 One chopped onion, one chopped green pepper, two chopped mushrooms and crushed ginger and

 garlic and five or six curry leaves and one teaspoon of pepper powder and one teaspoon

 of turmeric powder, two eggs and three teaspoon of oil and three teaspoon of soya sauce and

 two teaspoon of chili and garlic sauce and one teaspoon of hot sauce and two teaspoon

 Now I am going to add crushed ginger and garlic, curry leaves and chopped green pepper.

 And one teaspoon of hot sauce which will give nice flavor and two teaspoon of soya

 Then I am going to add one teaspoon of pepper powder and half teaspoon of turmeric powder.

 We're standing on the westernmost portion of the continental United States and we're

 Our trip down the Lost Coast has brought us here to AWA campground near Petrolia on the

 We're going to do a roll on the Mottole today and we're going to be cooking you up a new

 It's French Canadian, it was developed in Quebec way back during the Depression.

 If you look below you can click on more info to get the full printout of the recipe.

 I made up my dough yesterday and I stuck it in the ice chest overnight.

 The dough contains 6 ounces of butter at room temperature, 1 cup of granulated sugar, 2

 large eggs, 1 and 3 quarter cups all purpose flour, 1 teaspoon of baking powder.

 He combined the butter and sugar and added the eggs and things and flour.

 Now he's getting ready to add in the last couple ingredients which are the maple syrup

 Okay, what I need to do is I need to mix up the pure maple syrup and the heavy cream.

 What a great opportunity to use that special syrup that Mark from Indiana sent us for the

 And I'm going to mix this up really good and then heat it up to a boil.

 And after it comes to a boil, he's going to take it and let it cool off.

 Okay one thing you want to keep stirring this for is when this stuff starts to boil it really

 So we're ready to cut this from the heat and set it aside and let it cool.

 But as soon as I get the coals on, I'm going to pour that syrup mixture back over it.

 Okay I'm going to pour the syrup and heavy whipping cream mixture over this.

 We're making tracks now and we're heading to the Dutch Oven Gathering.

 This is a group of the Fortuna Dutch Oven Society who we meet with and camp about 5-6 times a year.

 First man Larry, tell me what you thought of the pudding schilmer.

 Former club president Marvin, what did you think of the pudding schilmer?

 Well we've decided to take the southerly swing home here in the great state of Jefferson.

 I'd like to thank my friend Guy Mazzeo for turning me on to it.

 This feeder is designed to keep the food in the upper levels of the aquarium where fish

 that do not like to go to the bottom to get food can easily access it.

 The feeder is basically a fired ceramic disc that's been made into a small shallow cup.

 The inside of the cup has been scored so that the Repashy food will stick to the inside

 There's a small hole in the edge of the cup that you put onto the metal hook of a suction

 And then you can just stick that to the inside glass of the aquarium wherever you want it

 I'm going to mix up a fresh batch of Repashy Spawn and Grow and then show you how to load

 The most important thing to remember is that the feeder needs to be dry before pouring

 Therefore, it's a good idea to have extra feeders on hand so they're dry whenever you

 I place the feeders on a piece of wax paper or tin foil to catch the extra food that drips

 That helps me stay in good graces with my wife so I don't get Repashy all over her stove.

 All you got to do once the food has been mixed is pour it in as much or as little as you

 I'm just going to let it sit there until it completely hardens and then I'll show you

 The food sets pretty quickly inside these feeders so once it is hardened you can just

 What I would do is put my finger over where it's going to come through so it doesn't push

 Now this is ready to go down into the fish room and put inside an aquarium and feed the

 All of this extra stuff here in the middle, that's still good food.

 Here we are in the fish room and here's a tank that's got a bunch of big African Tetras

 and some Tenepoma, all of which like to feed up in the upper water column.

 I'm simply going to take this feeder and slip it down inside the aquarium where we can see

 Now I have to warn you, these fish don't normally get fed this way because I've been feeding

 them Repashy for so long they've learned to go to the bottom and get it.

 Don't feed your fish anything else and they will eventually learn to come eat it.

 So we'll give this a few minutes and once the fish start hammering it, I'll turn the

 I used to think Cichlids were smart until I started keeping these little bush fish from

 And once they get used to feeding it this way, it won't take very long for them to notice

 the food is there and they'll keep coming back time and time again.

 Here is a tank with some little Chopra Danios to show you that even small fish will eat

 There's a dominant male that's chasing the other fish away from the feeder though.

 Here is some proof that Rainbow fish really do eat Repashy food.

 I will have to admit that these fish are pretty stupid and once the food sinks below them

 These African Red-Eyed Tetras are seeing the feeder for the first time.

 Though they do get Repashy food every day, therefore they know what it smells like so

 I put this feeder in a tank with some Zoogenicus Tequila, a Mexican Live Bearer, and also with

 The Tequila are really going after the food and they're making quite a mess in the process.

 But if you watch, that cloud of food particles is drifting across the tank and then all the

 other fish in the tank are picking up particles as they drift by.

 You can also use these heavy discs to provide food as a feeding station in the bottom of

 They are very protective of their food source and they'll fight over the discs.

 So usually when I feed this tank I'll put two or three discs in at one time and each

 These Repashy Superfood discs are only available on my website at www.TedsFishroom.com.

 I sell them with the hook and suction cup so you don't need to get those separately.

 I also carry a full line of Repashy Superfoods in all sizes available all the time.

 The idea of a romantic dinner consists of seafood with an Italian flair and a high end

 Today on Ivy's Kitchen, I'm going to show you how you can bring that romance to your

 So while our pasta cooks, we can go ahead and start on our sauce for the clams and mussels.

 If you don't know how to make the pasta, I'm going to show you right now.

 If you want the recipe to this, go on this website below, what'sivycooking.blogspot.com

 I'm using shallots because it has more of a sweeter and milder taste than onions.

 What I like to do, if you've been watching my channel, you know that I like to add salt

 I can actually smell the garlic and shallots right now and it smells amazing.

 When you start to smell that, you want to go ahead and add your wine.

 And you want to cook your wine until it reduces by half, which usually takes about two minutes

 As soon as your liquid reduces by half, you want to go ahead and stir in your vegetable

 If you want more spice, you can add more than what my recipe calls for.

 And now we are going to go ahead and add our clams and mussels.

 If you don't know how to clean, I'm going to show you right now.

 Let the mussels sit in the bowl in the fridge for about 30 minutes.

 When 30 minutes has passed, drain off the excess water and rinse again.

 Give your shellfish a final rinse and they are now ready to be cooked.

 Before I cover this, I'm going to go ahead and season it with some salt and pepper.

 So I'm mixing this right now with the salt and pepper and the broth.

 Our mussels and clams should be done steaming and you will know it's done being steamed

 I'm going to go ahead and I'm going to add our linguine to this.

 If you've ever been to Pier 39 in San Francisco, this is what it smells like right now.

 So I'm just going to go ahead and I'm going to mix this wonderful linguine here with the

 And when you mix it, we're going to go ahead and we're going to add that butter.

 So as soon as your linguine has absorbed all of this broth going on with the olive oil,

 the shallots, the garlic, the butter, we want to go ahead and add some fresh herbs, which

 If you're looking for a romantic meal to serve to your date, you got to try this pasta.

 And I'm going to leave the recipe right here up on that link bar right here.

 For my recipes, please visit what'sivycooking dot blogspot dot com.

 And what he's done, I haven't pruned him at all, he just, to get light, he's gone up into

 And so there's some branches up in here, you can see it, there's one that has gone up into

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to harvest some of these leaves.

 So you don't want to get them that are too tender, because then they tear when you try

 I can tell by feeling it, the texture's a little more mature, but it's not tough.

 I'm just going to bag these up in a Ziploc bag and I'm going to put them in the refrigerator

 You don't want any leaves that have been sprayed with anything.

 You want this a very salty brine type liquid that you're going to blanch them in.

 I have a dish of ice water here ready to go to drop them in after.

 I'm going to let these just float here for a little bit and then I'll flip them over.

 That's important because the top isn't staying under the water.

 It's been over three minutes and the texture has really changed.

 And what you're supposed to do is put the leaves shiny side down.

 I put a layer of grape leaves on the bottom and then slices of potato and then another layer of grape leaves.

 It cooked for about, let's say, I think it was an hour and 45 minutes I left it in there.

 Some of these did burst open when the rice swelled, but I can see there's some like this one that's still intact.

 And then the little bite from the lemon and the tang from the grape leaf.

 One of the most common questions asked by people getting started in Dutch oven or campfire

 You can carry everything you need in this Dutch oven survival kit and it is all in there.

 If the ground is wet, you will put your coals right in there and put that on top of it.

 For this to be a portable kit, you have to be able to get everything you need right in

 It's very handy when you have to move the lid around when it has a lot of coals on it.

 When you have coals on top, you can pick it up and move it over.

 You would have a lid full of coals and you would be able to place it there, keep the

 bottom clean, and then have your hands free so you can work with the rest of your meal.

 The cleaning bag has the materials you need to take care of your Dutch oven after you

 Really all you need is some sort of a scratchy pad like this and some sort of a scraper.

 What you will need to do is scrape it, put some water in it, and boil it.

 Now if you ask any Dutch oven cook, they are going to say, well, that's not a lot of

 It will allow you to cook, it will allow you to fry, boil water, saute, a variety of tasks.

 This is survivalcommonsense.com, hoping you assemble your Dutch oven survival kit.

 And first of all, I want to say that when we're dealing with possession, aggression towards people,

 what we can do is easily train the dog that when we approach, something good happens.

 Dogs are aggressive because they think that you're going to take what they want

 and instead we're going to teach them good things happen when we approach.

 And we can easily do this when they're aggressive to us because we can train them that

 when I approach, if you sit, you're going to get something way better.

 When we're dealing with what our reader was asking, they wanted to know

 what if my dog's possessive-aggressive towards other dogs, then it becomes trickier

 In this case, what I'm going to do is I'm going to use just one person, me, and the treat-and-train.

 And what I want to do in this case is teach the other dog that when another dog approaches your food,

 such as a treat bag lying on the ground, that means better things are happening for you.

You can see that the other dog might be thinking, hey, wait a sec, get away from my stuff.

 This dog doesn't actually have any possession-aggression issues,

 but we're going to use this dog because we know she's hungry right now.

 So what we want this dog to think, instead of worrying that another dog's going to take its food here,

 is that we want her to understand that, hey, when a dog approaches your stuff,

 So you don't have to worry about this because you're getting something way better.

 So what she has to get out of the treat-and-train has to be at least equal to or much better

 When I do this, what I need to do is I want to start far enough away

 And then what I'm going to do is, as he approaches and she sees him,

 I'm going to start dispensing treats so that she starts to realize,

 So as Jones is coming closer, she's getting complete treats the whole time.

 So then I'm going to wait so she can figure out, hey, nothing's happening,

 My goal is to always keep Jones far enough away so she only cares about her treats.

 As you can see, even in between she's just thinking about her treats.

 she only cares about the treats that she's getting for looking away from the food,

 because at that point she understands that Jonesy's appearance means she's going to get something good

 So right now she doesn't understand that Jonesy needs treats for her.

 Here she's actually looking at Jones now that she looks at the machine.

 because when we walk towards her, it means that she's going to get a reward from the machine.

 But she doesn't understand that the approach of the other dog towards her bait bag

 So as we approached that time, she looked before we rewarded for looking at that machine.

 She looked towards the machine because she knew the treat was coming there.

 The reason it's more obvious is because we angled her more towards us,

 In recap, what I just showed you was a process for training a potentially possessive dog

 that when others approach your food, good things will happen, so you don't need to be possessive.

 So whenever Jonesy would start approaching the bait bag with the food on it,

 I would hurry up and dispense a bunch of treats to the dog that was lying down

 so that dog learned, hey, when Jonesy approaches, good things happen.

 And you do it enough until you see an indication that the other dog understands,

 and our indication that the other dog understood was that as soon as the dog saw Jonesy,

 and look towards the treat-and-train to get a reward from the treat-and-train.

 It was looking at the treat-and-train because it was going to get a reward.

 specifically the lecture on reversing brewing behavior problems.

 Hi, I'm Rebecca Brand and today we're talking about moisturizers and face creams and everything

 Their very luxury line of beautiful creams and facial moisturizers and cleansers and

 I spend a lot of time trying to look good, especially on camera and every day it gets

 I've tried all kinds of creams and spent a lot of money on stuff and many times I've

 So I needed to try some new things and I'm trying harder right now to look better because

 So I was really lucky when Orgold contacted me and said, hey, try your stuff Rebecca and

 Me and my girlfriend had a little trying party and we went through every single one of these

 And I keep trying all kinds of things and this is a cream I like.

 The consistency of it is very kind of like butter but it's not greasy like butter.

 I am not going to put it on at this very moment but trust me, it's good.

 It gets stuff out of your skin that you didn't even know was there.

 I like to be clean at least once a week with a good strong mask.

 I put this on in the evening every night before I go to bed and this is how I apply it.

 This is to reduce the fine lines and wrinkles and I have a lot.

 The thing I like about Oral Gold is all the ingredients they have it.

 I know vitamins are good for inside your body and in your skin but it's also good for outside

 of your skin and it really helps maintain a youthful appearance for me.

 This Oral Gold product, the 24K Cryogenic Restoration Cream is the one I use all the

 Besides coming with a little spatula, now that's a good kitchen appliance but it's also

 I love the smell of this and the consistency is so velvety smooth and pretty.

 This is something I use every day before I put my makeup on and I let it soak in for

 I'm putting this over my foundation today to show you just how smooth it goes in.

 If you go on their website, you'll see all the major ingredients they use in their creams

 They have this major study with women a little older which I can relate to.

 I think I wrote in there, the older women have skin that sucks up this stuff better

 When you see that website, look for the hydroxy acids and the peptides, vitamins and the luxury

 I think they like those luxury ingredients just to make me feel more like a girl.

 Some of those ingredients help produce more collagen for your skin.

 As we get older, our collagen decreases and that's why our skin starts to sag which I'm

 I'm glad I have Oral Gold now in my line of cosmetic treatments to help me.

 Thank you Oral Gold for sponsoring this and thank you for watching it.

 Let me know, make comments because I'm investigating these things all the time.

 I'm Rebecca Brans, this is Gardenway Channel and thanks to Oral Gold because I feel like

 Hi everybody, I'm Bob Principi, home improvement correspondent for NBC and host of The Home

 Today we're going to show you a video with Mike Ryle of Dream Spas and Pools and he's

 going to take you through the process of the installation of AquaGard.

 I'm one of the certified installers for AquaGard and we're doing this training video to help

 some of the new installers or maybe give some tips to some of the older installers that

 This pool is an existing pool and it's of vintage age and it needs some repairs.

 So we're going to fix this pool by using the new AquaGard and putting it on it.

 One of the first things I do when I come into one of the pools is I take a pole like this

 And what we're concerned about is if the gunite pool is gunite and then it's hand plaster

 If we can't stabilize the plaster underneath the AquaGard then the AquaGard is going to

 So it's our job to go in and make sure that that is stable and it's adhered properly to

 And one of the ways I used to do it is I use a pole and if you can listen, hear that sound.

 This is solid but as I come over I can find a place that's failed.

 You can actually hear the difference in it and the sound of it.

 And I know that this area right in here and I can just go around the edge of it, make

 Once we find one of these areas then we're going to remove them because they've already

 As you can see right here in front of us here we've already found one that we've done.

 And we've tapped it, found out where it's at and then we can check the underneath.

 And we've worked our way around it so that we're back into good material.

 Once we get done with this what we're going to do is we're going to take and cut these

 Remove this stuff, remove it out into a solid base so that it'll stick properly.

 Then we're going to acid etch this and we're going to come back in with this particular

 And we want to leave the fibercrete not in a real rough but almost in a fuzz condition.

 When I second trowel it that means it's not finished yet but it's getting close.

 We don't want to seal the surface off to keep the water from getting in.

 We want to leave the surface exposed so we can get back into it.

 When we're installing the offer guard if we're going to use the existing tile, we're going

 to come up here with the offer guard and we want to undercut this tile that's going to

 What we want to do is do like a plunge cut straight in about a quarter of an inch and

 then bevel it back on a 45 degree angle on this plane right here.

 When we do this, this allows the off guard to come up and actually go in and seal off.

 Because remember if we get any moisture behind the off guard into the plaster, existing plaster,

 So by doing this cut back in here, then we can make it a water tight situation.

 If you're not going to use the existing tile and you want to retile the pool with new tile,

 one of the ways of doing it is bringing the off guard right up to right underneath the

 coping stone or bullnose and then come back in and lay your tile on top.

 When you're covering the existing tile like we're doing on this pool, you can see where

 the old tile is oxidized and it has residue from calcium and alkalinity on it.

 We're going to take all the surface off there using a grinder and you can see how rough

 it is so that our new epoxy is going to stick and bond to this properly.

 If your pool has a painted surface like this one does, we're going to have to prep it.

 What's happened with this is that they originally had plastered it and for some reason they

 changed the colors or they had some small cracks or hairline cracks they wanted to fix

 We've made a determination that it's not a latex paint or rubberized paint and we found

 So we need to remove this because what's happened is it's oxidized.

 We need to remove that oxidation so we have a clean surface so our epoxies will properly

 What I do is I use a 7 inch grinder and I start out with a finer grit paper like a 32

 We found out on this particular pool that our production rate is the highest when we

 I can go down to 16 but the problem with 16 is it will remove it faster but then it gives

 Any of those gouges I have to come back and fix before I can put my epoxies on or during

 You can see on the back of your grinding disk they say right on them what they are.

 The 24 being a finer grit or a coarser grit that removes it faster.

 This is the one that we're going to make the money on this job with.

 When we do our patches you can see where we've taken the fibercrete and used the additives

 I like to leave it just a little bit high on the side so I can grind it and make it

 You want to leave a rough surface on it so we can bond so you don't want to do a real

 When we remove the product, the existing marblecrete or whatever kind of plaster they're using,

 as you use the chip and hammer you can find out where you can't tear it up anymore.

 Basically if it's loose enough to tear up that it will come right off.

 When it stops you can actually see where we've probed up here and tried to get it and it

 When we clean this up real good, wet it, and then dry it out, put in our concrete, then

 We've identified all of our cancer spots as you can see and we've taken a pneumatic hammer

 My next step that I prefer to do is take a pressure washer and wash everything down so

 I don't have any residue or dust or anything like that that's going to affect the acid

 It doesn't have to be completely dry but I don't want any puddling on it.

 When we use our muriatic acid to etch this and to neutralize the surface, we're using

 When we do this we want to make sure that there's no puddles of water in there so that

 it will dilute the acid because we're looking for a boiling effect to where it's actually

 causing a caustic reaction with the chemicals so we know that we've got everything washed.

 If we find an area that's doing a lot of blistering or bubbling, then we want to work more on

 it even if we have to get to a stainless steel brush and a pole and physically work the surface

 Once we've stabilized the surface with the acid, then we're going to go back in with

 Once we do the pressure washing, we're going to use a 3000 psi pressure washer with a turbo

 This will remove any of the loose product that may be on there but it's not quite ready

 Once we get enough of that, then we'll start into our plastering.

 Today I'm baking sustainable Alaska Pacific Cod with a soy honey glaze and crisp cucumber

 I take a tablespoon of sesame oil, three tablespoons of dark soy sauce, rich dark soy sauce, and

 Look into it here and you see these bubbles and it becomes almost the texture of honey.

 You want to get to the point where this basically coats the back of a spoon.

 Take the pieces of cod, roll it in the glaze so you've got the presentation side or the

 Next, take some sesame seeds and just shake them over the top of the cod so they stick

 You could happily use a grater if you like, but I like the long strips you get with a

 So here, because I want the crunch of the cucumber and I don't want all the water, I'm

 So I just cut it in half and scoop all of the seeds into the bowl.

 Then at a slight angle, chop the cucumber into thick-ish slices.

 Remember this is going to be the contrast, the crisp contrast to the rich glaze on the

 You've got the lovely contrasting texture with the soft, smooth Pacific cod.

 Then peel down the orange, cutting away the white pith and the orange zest.

 Okay, next, grab a smaller knife and hold the orange in the palm of your hand over the

 Then you cut in between, just taking out the flesh, the really juicy, tasty bit of the

 When you've got all those fleshy segments out, give it a good squeeze and that juice

 All you need to do is cut this in half through the middle, pop it in, and the idea is that

 the leaves are cooked through but the stalks are still nice and crisp and crunchy.

 I've got the sesame seeds for a little bit of crunch and a bit of extra flavour.

 So here, this will very carefully do for a nice big spoonful of salad.

 And this is something I love in food, when you've got this sort of celebration on a plate.

 And here, I've got the cod and you've got the rich, luscious glaze.

 Because you've got all this juice from the oranges and the lemons,

 Pacific cod with pak choi and a crisp cucumber, orange and chilli salad.

 These days, sustainability, wild and natural are real buzzwords.

 But for Alaska Seafood, they simply sum up what they've been doing for half a century.

 Bringing some of the best wild, sustainable seafood to your table.

 Today I'm going to be doing an episode on how to make a turtle incubator to incubate turtle eggs.

 I have some cactus soil, you can get it at most local stores, it's relatively cheap.

 You want a thermometer, at least one or two thermometers, just to keep track of the temperature

 So once you have poured your water in, like I said, just use some relatively warm water.

 Put a couple inches of water in there, put your heater in, see you've already done that right there.

 And then you have this, so this is going to be the tank that is inside of here

 So now you take whatever substrate you use, you take it and you pour it in.

 So now that you have the dirt in the tank, once you get the eggs, if you have the eggs ready to be put in,

 then you want to make little indents for where the eggs will sit

 Right now it's floating because you can see there's a little more water and it's not quite heavy enough.

 you want it to be somewhat humid in the tank to keep it warmer.

 And you want to keep the temperature at about 80 to 82 degrees for a common snapping turtle.

 You can use this for lots of different reptiles like snakes, lizards,

 but you'll have to look up specific information for if you're doing a different species than a snapping turtle.

 So for snapping turtles you want about, like I said, 80 to 82 degrees Fahrenheit.

 And then you'll take your thermometer, you put it in the sand, about an inch into the sand or dirt,

 You want that, like I said, keep it around a steady temperature.

 So ideally you want to set this up a couple days before you have your eggs in there

 because you want it to be at a solid temperature and not fluctuating.

 Even though it will do that in the wild, you're not in the wild,

 so you should give them the highest chance of 100% hatching rate.

 So once you've got that settled, keep checking it a couple hours every day

 And you also want to have a gauge, a temperature gauge, on your submersible water heater.

 and it's just a set temperature, it warms the water up too, but you don't want to get those ones.

 You want to spend a little extra money and get ones that go usually from 60 to 85 degrees maybe,

 and that will raise the eggs' temperatures to about 82 degrees.

 So now that you have everything set up, the last step is to take your lid.

 And I have this came with my 40 gallon tank, but you can also use a plexiglass sheet,

 or even a glass sheet for that matter, just something to cover it up.

 And if you're using something not like this glass, if you're using a plexiglass or whatever,

 or even probably you could use a wood board, drill some holes in it so that it doesn't get too humid in there,

 and you don't want condensation to form up on top and drip down on the eggs.

 So you can see I've got a few spots in here, a few little cracks that will let the moisture out.

 The turtles should be laying eggs soon, and if I see them on the side of the road dead,

 because they got hit by a car, hopefully they've already laid their eggs.

 But supposing they're on their way to cross the road to lay their eggs,

 they'll still have their eggs that are fertile in them, and if it's not too bad of an accident,

 you can actually cut the hind section open of the turtle and take the eggs out and incubate them,

 Or also if they'll lay them sometimes on the side of a dirt road when there's not a good chance of,

 You could do with just a 10 gallon tank for your large one and a 5 gallon tank for your big one.

 It's just a matter of, this one needs to be bigger so it can fit inside,

 and you need to have room for water and heater, and then it's just really,

 I don't know how many eggs I may get, and I want to have room for all the eggs to have their own space.

 So just as long as you can have this idea, it can be in a smaller form though.

 Hi, my name is Emily and today for this homeschool lesson is how to make a smoothie my way and my ingredients.

You can use whatever kind of yogurt, but I use strawberry and banana and strawberry.

 I use the whole because my blender here, it chops it real good.

 We didn't have time to thaw out the things, but we believe that blender should do the trick because it's pretty powerful.

 How it gets that color is from the yogurt and the strawberries, because you know how the strawberries are red.

 Well, all those colors that I put in, all the fruit, all those colors,

 it mixed in and mixed in and mixed in and mixed in, which made these colors.

I work with the team of scientists who develop the Gates Carbon Drive Belt System.

 This belt construction has been used on motorcycle secondary drives for more than 20 years,

 and it has recently been customized for the bicycle applications.

 Gates Carbon Drive belts are extremely durable and offer long life when properly handled.

 However, caution must be used before and during installation to avoid damaging the carbon tensile cords

 Before installing the belt, there are a few things you need to do to prepare the bike.

 To get started, install the front sprocket onto the cranks and the rear sprocket onto the rear hub.

 After the sprockets are installed, it's a good idea to place the wheel into the frame

 Just take note that the final alignment will be determined after the belt is installed.

 The first step in installing the belt is to open the rear triangle of the frame.

 This method will vary by manufacturer, so make sure you have the proper instructions to do so.

 Go ahead and insert the belt through the rear triangle opening,

 and hang the belt over the bottom bracket and close the rear triangle opening.

 Place the wheel into the rear dropouts, minimizing the distance between the bottom bracket and rear axle.

 Please remember that at no time should you have to pull or pry the belt onto the sprockets.

 The belt should be installed loosely, then proper tension should be applied

 or the Carbon Drive Systems website for details on tensioning the belt.

 Take note that the front and rear sprockets have opposite facing flanges,

 so when you're adjusting the belt tension, be aware that the belt is not pinched between the flanges.

 Adjust the tensioners to steer the belt so that it centers itself onto the rear sprocket.

 Please take note that the belt should never be removed without first releasing the tension.

 Now that the belt is installed, it's time to take it out for a spin.

 Now that it's properly installed, your Gates Carbon Drive System will offer a long-lasting and durable drive train.

 and we're gonna be putting a new set of handlebars on this bike.

 Now the bars that we've chose to put on are a set of Prime 8s from LH Offers.

 You know before I had the straight bars and literally it just put me back a little bit with the bars closer to me

I'm relatively tall in comparison to some that aren't and it just helps even that much more.

 Literally the ease that it put on my back, my lats, just putting everything back closer to me, the turning radius.

The bars we're putting on this bike, Kelly, are right over here.

 which is going to be a little bit of a trick to run our stock wiring through but we're gonna get it done.

 As you can see when I sit here, it's been a while since I've sat this low if you will, but

 So the idea of putting these new fancy bars on this bad boy is getting me up and back.

 So I can actually ride and everything will be turned right here.

 It's gonna be a much more comfortable fit and I'll be ready to hit the road for for miles.

 One of the key things we really need to take a look at is lines and cables.

 Right, when you start this project, you might tear the bike apart.

 The best way to measure for lines and cables is really to put the bar on by itself and

 stainless lines and cables for every aspect of the motorcycle and then this kit here, this is gonna be a time-saver.

 They've taken extended wiring harnesses up to 20 inches over stock.

 Tell me a little bit about these these bars are sweet by the way.

 What we're gonna do here is we're gonna go ahead and run say a piece of fishing line with maybe a lead sinker or a

Drop it down inside, shake it around and then pull it out down the bottom and

Very time-consuming, but it should make this bike look badass when we're done.

I think that these bars are really progressive in today's, you know,

 everybody want they make you look fast, which is what we all want, right?

 So with a couple simple hand tools, we've got a soldering iron, heat shrink tubing gun, some

 All right, I'm super excited about these bars so I had to get back on it.

 But as you can see the sleek line is gonna be really really cool.

 All right, so we just finished taking off the chrome housing and you notice here we've got wiring that's not color-coded.

 So a real important tip when you're taking your stuff apart at home is make sure that you label everything.

 So now we finally got to the point where you can actually set a piece of electrical up,

 run it and measure so we know exactly how long we're going to extend each of these electrical wires.

 Make sure that you give yourself a couple inches to go through the center hole at the bottom of the bar to the outside of

 the extension of the handlebar that we're gonna want to measure here to.

 So if we take a look at where the switch box housing would sit on the bar from what I'm reading right here

 Thank you for watching this week's handlebar installation tip of the week.

 Well everybody today has gone carb crazy, carbohydrates I'm talking about.

 rice, pastas, even fruits and vegetables, they're avoiding them completely.

 eat again those same high glycemic foods, your blood sugar drops

 lower glycemic foods and that doesn't mean cutting out carbohydrates.

 absolutely having whole grain carbohydrates like whole grain bread,

 It's just an open, it's like an open-faced omelette, absolutely delicious.

 eggs are are unbelievably healthy for you but here's a problem,

 if cholesterol is an issue you can buy a product, now there's several on the market

 egg, I'll pour a little bit out for you just to show you, you see it has that nice yellowy

 but it doesn't have the same amount of cholesterol so that would be a great

 or worse eat all the yolks because you feel it's going to waste, you can buy

 egg whites today in a container and we've just thrown that in which is egg.

 So now what we want to do is add a little bit of milk to this, now you don't

 I've decided to saute my vegetables ahead of time so that it doesn't stick to the pan

 and I've just taken some button mushrooms that are sliced thinly,

 saute it up until the vegetables are nice and soft as you see here

 and let's go over to our skillet and get cracking which we've cracked already,

 Alright so I've got a nice hot skillet over here and again you should hear a nice

 and go walk away, answer the phone, do whatever you want for about four minutes

 and then we're going to come back and add the veggies and the cheese.

 Okay that's looking pretty good, let me get our vegetables out now so I've got

 and feel free to use any cheese that you like, I love Havarti, it's nice and mild

Now if you can take a look that looks really nice, it's starting to

 I'm going to throw my vegetables on top, just like that, look at the color of that already

 which is going to melt, actually dissolve, not really melt but you'll see it will

 and let it sit just for a couple minutes just until that cheese melts

 is beautiful and now what we want to do is, you know what people get really

 and turning it over into a plate so you know what don't worry about it.

 The authentic way of serving a frittata is just serving it in the skillet like this

 low glycemic frittata here ready for everyone and don't worry sneak in a

 little bit of flatbread if you want, whole grain though of course.

 Some other foods that are wonderful for the lower glycemic eating plan

 easily with a can of chickpeas, a little olive oil, tahini paste,

 filled again with a lot of lean protein, lots of vitamins and minerals,

 omega fatty acids and what I've done here is a red bell pepper sauce.

 everybody likes beef but I've got a wonderful beef burger here.

 of a lot of the fat that you'd find in regular ground beef which makes

 and I've drizzled it with a feta cheese sauce just made with some light sour cream,

 feta cheese pureed, a little light mayo and just a little bit of water.

 So look at this wonderful meal you can have on a lower glycemic

 Not everyone knows what a pumpkin looks like, so let's start with a simple image.

 Go slowly round in circles to color this with our highlight color first.

 If you feel like you're getting areas that aren't smooth enough.

 Most of my students, I tell them to start with the first color, maybe stay a hair away from the edge.

That's usually where we have the most trouble when we're just starting to color.

 I'm going to go where I think there's going to be a shadow, over on this side.

 Don't forget to add some ink to your metal embellishments, too.

 Looks like they give us a crescent wrench, an allen key, some smaller allen keys, and another, looks like a hex wrench.

 You can see there's adjustments here to tighten up the springs if you want a firmer ride.

 There's also adjustments here and here for the individual shocks.

 There's no instructions that came with the board, but it's not hard at all.

 The straps, very similar to a snowboard binding style to tighten it up.

 I've never had a mountain board, but you can tell that this will take a lot of abuse and this thing won't be breaking.

 If you enjoyed watching this video at all or are planning on making a purchase at Switch,

 If you have any questions, post them below and I'll get back to you.

 In this video I'm going to show you how to make the bobble stitch for my lamb hat.

 and I think the easiest way to do this is to show you just how to make the first two rounds of the hat.

 I'm going to show you how I make this hat with this yarn and then I'll also tell you how to do the bobble stitch with the bulky yarn as well.

 Pull through, chain 2, and then I'm going to make 8 half double crochets in the magic ring.

 Now we're going to start making a half double crochet in the first stitch.

 And this is the way you're going to want to make the bobble while using the worsted weight yarn.

 So I yarn over, through the stitch, pull through 2 loops on my hook.

 I'm going to go ahead and complete this round so you can kind of see what it's going to look like.

 You don't really have to count because once you see that you have 5 loops on your hook,

 If this was bulky yarn, you would want to make your bobble stitch like this.

 So now if this was bulky yarn, I would go ahead and finish my bobble stitch here and pull through all 4.

 Hey ladies, this is Cass from CassandraBakai.com where I teach you how to manage your afro-textured

 Today I'm going to show you how I got this beautiful hairstyle, a holiday inspired hairstyle

 I have a beautiful twist here, some bantu knot outs here, a little side twist here.

 So if you want to know how I got it this way, then stay tuned and I'll give you all the

 Now for this hairstyle, I start off with freshly bantu knotted hair.

 I have a tutorial on that so you can check out how I got it this way.

 Now I've started to make some twists using marley hair and grabbing hair from the crown

 Now you definitely don't want these twists to be from the side of your head.

 You kind of really want it in the middle because at the end of the day it's going to go around

 like this and you want to be able to sleep back the sides very nicely.

 So I have one here and I've kind of already started on another one here but I took that

 So here I found another piece of hair in the crown of my head, from the crown of my head.

 And now I'm going to use this to twist my hair in the same fashion that I twist my marley

 I'm just pulling my hair back so I can see better, so you can see better.

 If you have any questions whatsoever, please leave them in my comments box below.

 You may be able to find more information and more info on how to do the marley twist

 and the side bun on my YouTube channel or on KassandraPakai.com.

 Have a wonderful holiday and I really hope you can rock one of these beautiful hairstyles

 Because we're going to need to make a pocket to stuff the blue cheese.

 And to make the pocket, you're going to need a sharp little paring knife.

 You want to take your paring knife, and you want to get right in the middle.

 And just make your first incision, until you almost get to the back side of the steak.

 And leaving the opening as small as possible, so all of your cheese won't ooze out.

 Probably going to get close to a quarter cup of cheese in here.

 Alright, before we hit the pan, we're going to season it with a little bit of extra virgin olive oil.

 And then of course we've got to hit it with some fresh cracked pepper.

 I'm going to sear both sides before it goes into my 500 degree oven.

 Usually about a couple minutes on each side is all you need to do to get a good sear on the steak.

 I like to sear a little bit of the fattiness, get some of the juices in there too.

 Now before we put this steak in the oven, we're going to lay it on a bed of sliced onions.

 And you're going to have yourself some nice caramelized onions to top on this steak.

 Now we're going to set it in a 500 degree oven, or if yours only goes to 450 that's fine.

 And I'm going to go about medium on this one, so maybe 8 more minutes in here.

 Yeah, we're about medium rare right now, so just a couple more minutes.

 And make sure you use a pan that's all metal that will hold up in the oven.

 We're going to pull it out and let it rest before we cut into it.

 We'll let this sit here for a few minutes, and we're going to eat.

 Now while your steak is resting, you can turn it up on its side to prevent all the cheese from coming out.

 And if you have any questions or comments about the preparation, let me know.

 We just washed it the other day, but it ended up raining, so we brought it back in to give

 What we're going to do here is we're going to use our Final Touch Ultra to really help

 Now it's not just going to leave a protection on the vehicle, and it's going to help clean

 it up, but really help to enhance that shine once again on the vehicle.

 We can apply this on multiple different surfaces, not just your painted surfaces, but as well

 Now one thing I want to mention with this product is it's not just great to use for

 We can also use it for express waxes and as well as a waterless wash up.

 We're going to clean this up, and we're going to show you exactly what this product

 All we need is just obviously your Final Touch Ultra and just one or two of the microfiber

 You can see there's a bunch of dirt that got caked up onto the window here.

 Then we take our microfiber towel and go ahead and just easily wipe it down.

 So within 10 minutes, we were able to use Final Touch Ultra to remove all the dirt,

 debris, and water spots to give it a good protection as well as a really great shine.

 you just visit us at www.hogheadweedtrimmer.com or dial 1-877-540-1734 at any given time and

It's a long shaft and it's got a nut at the top that does not come loose.

 That is the separation in between what we consider a straight shaft and a bent shaft.

 Sometimes some straight shafts would appear to be a straight shaft, still have this end on them.

 it has this end on it, you'd make sure if you're going to order one of our parts, you order a bent

Once you remove that head, we have a recess that's here on the inside.

 the best thing to do is to take your plastic cap that comes with yours

 Now, I also want to demonstrate being able to change the leads.

 mind that bent shaft does not always mean that the shaft is bent.

 a bent shaft model does not need anything any heavier than the 2.5, which was the red lead.

 The 3.1 is going to be too heavy for most of your bent shaft models or somebody going down the road

 very proud of it and we'd love to hear feedback from you if you purchase one from us.

 limited lifetime warranty and we guarantee that you're going to see a lot of life out of these

There again, if you need any assistance, www.hogheadweedtrimmer.com or 1-877-540-1734.

 Once you've got all these nuts and bolts started onto these plastic pieces, you can start putting

As you put each piece of rail on, it's worth tightening down enough

It's real frustrating when you get one piece together and another

So we're going to go ahead and repeat this for all six pieces here, just

 all the wires face the same direction, so if they're all going to the right or they're

 all going to the left, you don't really want them to go down because they're going to

Other than that, you're also going to want to put the pulley on before you install

 because there's not enough space to put it on after the motor is installed.

 you can see that it will go all the way to the end of the plastic there without falling

 with the other two motors and then at that point, this bottom piece will be pretty much

It's a little non-obvious when you put it together, but what I recommend doing for

 taken our little triangle piece and I've put both of the arms on one side and I did the

 film it, but what that allows us to do is to slide all three together at the same time.

 I can slide that onto that at the same time as that onto that at the same time as that

 that from the thread that goes into the motors, so I couldn't get a good grab in there.

 probably get some longer screws and re-add the cork dampers tomorrow.

 is the bottom part of our 3D printer with all three stepper motors installed.

 Taking a closer look at the top corner of the 3D printer frame, it's easy to see or

They're going to be held by this longer M3 bolt, which I've gotten started.

 The parts that are going to go on there in order are got over here.

 digging into the plastic and provide a little bit of a spacer there.

After that, we'll put another flanged bearing on with the flange

 going the other way out of the 3D printer so that we basically have a belt pulley with

 with more M3 washers until we just barely have space to put on this nut there.

 to go ahead and put that together and we'll show you what that looks like.

 Here you can see our completed assembly for the pulley on the top of the frame.

 that, we did manage to fit two M3 washers before we got our hex nut on there.

It is also worth mentioning at this point that were I using closed belts,

 I would also have had to install the belt on here when I put that on.

If you're using closed belts, you will also have to put the belt

 Hi, I'm Beth Bates with the company Sew Teacher and today I'm showing you how to

 now it's time to place it on top of our face fabric or decorator fabric.

 particular decorator fabric it does have a small pattern but it's very, very repetitive

 you have large motifs, when you place your lining over the fabric you may wish to make

So I've got my lining and I've spread it out over my face fabric.

 to go ahead and take the pins and begin pinning, making sure that the lining is nice and smooth

And I will actually be sewing in the next clip this lining to the fabric.

 four inches apart to ensure that the pattern made out of lining is firmly attached to the

Once I've finished that I will take my scissors and I will begin cutting

 Now that we have our face fabric cut out and it is pinned to the lining we need to talk

So I'm going to unpin my lining and my face fabric and I'm going

 of the trim will be deeper down and the part where it is sewn together will be on the outer

So when I turn it inside out the correct end of the trim is showing.

 and you can usually distinguish them, see how this has a really pretty decorative border?

 This kind is meant to be applied outside the skirt when you are all finished.

 And when I am finished we'll take it over to the machine and begin sewing.

 of you who have chosen a trim that is to be applied outside of the seam such as these,

 you take your fringe adhesive, which is available at any craft store, put it right here on the

 Thanks for joining us in our kitchen today as we answer the daily scariest question known to man.

 Do you ever have one of those days when somebody needs a little extra attention?

 So, instead of reaching for the phone and calling your local delivery guy,

 we've come up with a series of recipes that we like to call One-Arm Wonders.

 practically with your hand tied behind your back, or in this case, otherwise indisposed.

 because on a cold winter's night, who doesn't need a little extra love in their tummy?

 Everything we're going to use in this recipe you can get right in the produce section.

 While our vegetables get nice and soft, we're going to season it up.

 And we're going to coat it with some flour and some salt and pepper

 to give it some flavor and give the stew a little more body to it.

 You want your pot nice and hot, so it's going to caramelize the beef

 Once that browns up, we have some whole baby Yukon Gold and red potatoes.

 We have some green beans that I brought home from the grocery store.

 That's going to get up all those really nice brown bits on the bottom

 You could use beef stock for this if you didn't want to use the wine.

 Just make sure you wash your produce when you get home from the store

 And a bay leaf because whenever I make soup, I put in a bay leaf.

 We know it's seasoned well because we've been seasoning it all along.

 I made a batch earlier today so I can show you what it looks like.

 Hi, I'm Chef Francois and tonight I'm cooking dinner for a couple of guests over.

 So I put out my alkaline cookbook and here I am shopping for produce.

 So on the pH scale, I'd rather pick something that's alkaline rather than acidic.

 When picking the ingredients, I'm trying as much as I can to go organic, pesticide free,

 We have alfalfa sprouts, butternut squash, onion, baby spinach, red cabbage, green onion,

 carrot, mixed bean sprouts, lime, lemon, organic heirloom tomatoes, fresh mint, basil,

 soft organic silken tofu, some garlic, and we have chlorophyll, almond, and pine nuts.

 We're starting off here cooking the pasta and the soup together as the ingredients are

 So I'm going through nice and slowly all the way around it before I'm able to dice the

 And then just with a spoon, I can remove those and just discard them.

 For my soup, I can start combining it into the diced butternut squash and also the onions.

 I'm going to add the coconut milk covering the butternut squash.

 For the chocolate mousse, would be unsweetened cocoa powder, fresh honey, organic tofu, silken,

 After mixing the ingredients of the chocolate mousse, I will now put it in the refrigerator

 Some sprouts, alfalfa, baby spinach, chopped almonds, sesame oil, apple vinegar, olive

 oil, snappy crisp for the crunchiness, lemon, green onion, and red cabbage.

 I will start by doing the vinaigrette with fresh lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, sesame

 We have the spelt pasta, pine nuts, I'm using a little bit of spinach, limes, baby carrots,

 organic tomatoes, fresh garlic, salt, and fresh extra virgin olive oil.

 Over on the stove right now I have some pine nuts roasting over a slow heat.

 I've cooked my carrots just a little so they get a little tender.

 Now that my tomatoes, carrots, onions, spinach are ready to go, my pasta are done too.

 I follow direction on the packaging, this one says about 12-15 minutes.

 And using a hand blender, I would also recommend that we can serve it like that.

 For all the information about those recipes and more, go on the Alkaline Cookbook.

 I've got it loaded up with some bikes and we've got the Yakima Quickback 3 mounted on

 It's also available in a two bike capacity, that's the Quickback 2, but here's the Quickback

 This is the easiest and quickest to install in the entire Yakima line.

 They went back to the trunk board and they came up with the Quickback.

 There are of course some exceptions, so make sure you check the fit guide to make sure

 But if you've got a spoiler, in the past that might have been an issue with the trunk rack,

 So the way they designed this, it should work around it and it really provides a very, very

 The first thing to worry about is this center knob tightens this part of the upper support

 You adjust it accordingly to fit the contour of the vehicle so that the Yakima logo is

 So if you've got a sedan, you're going to loosen this knob and these arms are going

 It kind of moves in a circular fashion and this piece would be resting on the top of

 But here we've got a hatchback, so we've got it much tighter and it still provides a nice

 It comes with these labeled straps and on the buckles themselves it tells you where

 So you've got two, four, six attachment points to get a really, really secure fit.

 And when you are installing this, once you set this piece up, make sure the straps are

 And in a sedan, you might run these straps under the frame and that's fine.

 And you can see we've got nice straight lines here, a nice straight line to the side, and

 And when this thing is all strapped down and secure, you should be able to literally

 And that will tell you that this thing is ready to carry three bikes safely.

 We've got it kind of in the down position here, so when you're not carrying bikes you

 But when you're ready to carry bikes, you loosen this knob and you can spin these up

 This is another beautiful feature of this rack, how easy that is.

 And no matter what contour the frame takes, you'll always get a nice parallel to the ground

 And I'm going to drop the frame right onto the contoured little cutouts.

 And then I'm going to tighten my chain straps, they're called, so that they're nice and secure.

 And that way they won't bounce into each other when you're cranking down the road.

 Now with certain frames, such as women's frames or children's frames, you know, you can't

 I should say that these arms are nice and narrow so they will accommodate pretty tight

 But if you're having a hard time, you can always get a tube top accessory.

 And these hooks basically extend around the stem and the seat, just under the seat.

 Other accessories, if you want to be able to lock the rack, or the bikes to the rack,

 we've got the 9 foot cable, which requires actually the lock cores as well.

 So you buy those separately and that will give you a cable to wrap around the frame

 It comes with a locking feature that's pretty cool and simple to use.

 Okay, so this Quickback comes with the trunk mount security strap.

 This is also available as an accessory to use with an existing trunk rack so that you

 can actually lock the rack itself to the vehicle so the rack itself can't be stolen.

 And you find a part of the rack where you can loop around and throw that through.

 So basically you tuck it in wherever it'll fit through the seam.

 And now with this door locked, someone can't run off with your really nice Quickback.

 Now the other thing that I must point out that's very important, very similar, are these

 glass hatch hooks which would replace the top hooks if your vehicle has glass or something

 And the FitGuide will tell you that you should use these as well.

 This piece goes in and then the strap comes through and then runs through this hook here.

 Other than that, in true Yakima fashion, host, ride, beverage can be enjoyed and the

So today this is just going to be a holiday special on my channel

So if you guys are interested in how to do this then just keep on

So first of course you'll be needing some bacon and then we will need some ham,

 Now for seasoning I will be using basil leaves, black pepper and salt which I forgot to include.

 Now what I'll do right here is I will butter the bottom, the sides and the top part of the

 cupcake tray just so that once our cupcakes are cooked it won't stick to the side and it will

And if you guys are wondering like whoa why did your hands all of a

 sudden become so manly that's because that's my dad he volunteered to help cut the mozzarella cheese

 actually use the sweet ham because it creates a really nice combination with the salty bacon.

 So my sister's gonna cut them in strips and I forgot to show you the part where we cut it horizontally

 one right there and I'm gonna let my sister execute it to you guys so that you would see.

 and then she'll be putting the bacon on the side edges of the cupcake hole and that's just going to

 pre-bake or pre-cook the bacon if you want to but I prefer to use them as is.

 be adding some mozzarella cheese and of course this is going to add some cheesiness and gooey

 cheesiness to your cupcake and you know I really like how this neutralizes the sweetness of the ham

 and the saltiness of the bacon since mozzarella cheese is not really salty.

 with a pinch of salt and also with a pinch of basil leaves and a pinch of black pepper.

 the seasoning really depends on you but these are the seasonings that I picked and they really match

 the oven to 320 degrees for 10 minutes and then I popped them in the oven and I let them cook for 20

Now you'll know when it's done when the egg starts to rise or to puff up and the sides of

 right there and now if you want the edges of the bacon to be more crispy you can cook them longer

 or you can either pre-cook or pre-bake them so that you won't overcook the egg.

Just in case if you guys are wondering that's not really sweet it's

 just that it's in the form of a cupcake so it doesn't necessarily have to be like a sugary

 sugary kind of taste of cupcake and you know I actually like the yolk to be runny.

 like it to be you know kind of like the dry version but I like the the yolk to be runny

 because it's more tasty because I like it thinner that way and as I've said it's best if you eat

 this hot because you would see the mozzarella cheese oozing and it's like gooey.

 cooled because I had to do something previously so just keep in mind to serve it while it's hot

 guys try this out because once again this is very easy to do and they taste really good

 If you want to make that drink right there just stay tuned because I will be uploading a tutorial

 for that buy and buy and if you guys like this video please give this video a thumbs up and I

 It's really amazing to me how people don't know how to cook beans.

 We're always asked about that, especially by the young couples that are just getting

 married or have gotten married, and they don't know how to cook beans, especially if they're

 And I was going to a nativity scene with some friends the other day, and an older lady was

 talking to her friend in the front seat about, she was cooking beans, and she must have cooked

 them, she said, for about five hours, and they never did get soft.

 And I couldn't help laughing to myself because it's not just the young people that need to

 So here's a recipe that I hope that you will, it will help you to understand how to cook

 I have one cup of beans here, and what you do is you go through your beans and wash them

 and sort them out, make sure that all of the dirt, clods, and any kind of stuff that floats

 Then you bring three cups of water to a boil, and that's for one cup of beans.

 Now if you have more beans, of course, you're going to add three cups of water to each cup

 Now you bring that water to a boil, and then you add your beans to that water, and then

 And then after that you take them off of the heat, and next you add three-eighths of a

 teaspoon of baking soda to the water and the beans that are in the pan, and you cover that

 You might leave it a little longer if your beans are really old.

 And then you rinse them really, really good, and then you fill it up with water again,

 And you might need extra baking soda if you feel that the beans are really, really old,

 Then you take that and you cover the beans with water and you bring them to a boil, and

 You have to remember to reduce your heat and simmer them for an hour to two hours, because

 So I hope that this helps you in some way to cook old beans, or even just regular beans,

 So I hope that this will help you to use up all of the old beans that you have.

 It goes along great with the elephant that I have on my channel.

 Look great on a bracelet if you put the elephant on a bracelet and you dangled some peanuts

 For our loomless peanuts we are going to be using 8 bands total.

 Two need to be of a different color if you decided you wanted to add in the different

 And then of course our peanuts to go along with our little elephant.

 Other items in this carnival summer time food series is the snow cone.

 Search my channel if you are interested in doing those items on the loom.

 For our peanut you're going to take a single band and you're going to wrap it around your

 So we have 3 bands, or one band wrapped 3 times around our hook.

 And you want to pull those 3 bands through the one that you have on your hook and reclaim.

 Twist it onto your fingers and you're going to pull that through and reclaim.

 But this gives the peanut the little cinch that it needs in the center.

 And to tie it off and secure it, a single band, pull through, reclaim and slip knot

 Then you just simply want to hide your end of your peanut, the slip knotted end, somewhere

 And here we have got an adorable cute little peanut that you can use for a ballpark baseball

 theme or you can place it on a bracelet with your elephant charm.

 You can wear it as a necklace also if you're going to a carnival or a circus.

 But please visit my sites Crafty Ladybug Rainbow Loom Creations for Facebook and Crafty Ladybug

 on Instagram and I hope you'll subscribe to my channel to look for more interesting, cute,

 out your radiator just turn on your engine and see where your radiator is

 you can't see where it's losing it from check your oil in your engine.

 plug at the bottom of the radiator that you can unscrew and let the water drain

 hard to take off the radiator hoses so what you need to do is insert a flathead

 screwdriver into the side of the radiator hose and spin it around and

 found where my leak is and now I'm going to use JB Weld-it or it's a very strong

 While the glue is drying you might as well go ahead and straighten out the

 radiator with two flathead screwdrivers just to improve the airflow.

 This radiator was originally yellow so I'm going to give it a light coat of

 with a grinder and then use a soldering iron to block the cores off so it would

 Before attempting to fix your radiator what you should do is invest in some

It's a liquid filled glue liquid metal fragments in a bottle where

 you pour into the top of your radiator and it seeks out all the holes and fills

 Today I'm canning spiced apple rings and I'm using Granny Smith apples and I

 bought some that are small enough to fit into a wide mouth pint jar.

 thing I need to do is peel them, slice them, and core them and this little gadget

 know that they also made something similar to this that will peel oranges?

 So I'm just dropping the apples into this bowl of water that's treated with

 half a cup of white vinegar, one and a half tablespoons of cloves are in this

 whole cloves, and I have three ounces of red hot cinnamon candy.

 These things red hot cinnamon candy and about half a teaspoon of red food

 So I'm going to heat this to a boil and simmer it for three minutes.

 minutes is up my syrup is ready my jars are hot and ready and I have my lids and

 I'm separating these so that the liquid can get up in between them.

 These apples are raw so they're going to float so you'll have to push it down to

 see just how much liquid you have in there that's about a half inch head

Now I'm going to wipe the rim of the jar clean, add a hot lid, a hot ring.

 now I'm going to set it in the canner to stay warm until I have all the jars full.

 All of the jars are full so now I'm going to drop the rack down into the

 canner put the lid on and once the water comes back to a boil I'm going to

 removed the lid and I let the canner sit for at least five minutes.

 to remove the jars and set them on the counter on a towel to cool.

 remove the rings, wash the jars, write spiced apple rings on the top and the

 rings and I had enough syrup left that I canned up that a pint of the syrup.

 Since these apples float the day after I canned them after the lids had sealed and

 the jars have cooled down I flipped the jars upside down so that the apples that

 grandma did when she canned things and flipped the jars upside down.

 use today need to vent so you need to keep them upright until they have sealed

A lot of people use these as gifts but if I was to use these as a

 gift I would put the apple rings in sideways like that I think that looks

 they taste like store-bought but they're not quite as firm and I wish that I had

 a thought about it when I did it but if you add pickle crisp to the apples they

After these had cooled down I opened them up and added an eighth of

 a teaspoon of pickle crisp and let it sit at room temperature until the pickle

 crisp had dissolved then I put them in the refrigerator and it firmed them up

They're still not quite as firm as store-bought but it's a lot better.

 So the next time I canned these I would add an eighth of a teaspoon of pickle

 store-bought but then they're thinner too so this is how they turned out.

 I'd say the firmness is pretty close to store-bought now since I added the pickle

In this video I'm going to show you how to change the drum paddle

Now drum paddles are used in a washing machine to agitate your clothes

 during a cycle, but if they become damaged or loose they can potentially not only detract

 the drum and secondly through spring barbs which push up against the paddle underneath

 going to have to use quite a bit of brute force to pull the paddle against the resistance

 old paddle out, it's really important that the barbs are reset to round about a 45 degree

 angle pointing towards the back of the drum in order for them to lock against the new

 and other brands of washing machine are available on the eSpares website.

 Greetings and salutations, welcome once again to the Fortress of Solitude high atop the

Today we're going to get back to a subject that we talked about a few

 cutter, saw all the webbing that we cut on the junior hot cutter but we didn't cut any

 you all about how to cut rope and cordage and even elastic right on the junior hot cutter.

 our clients and they wanted to know if our paracord cut the same on our junior hot cutter

We're also going to do our regular kernmantle rope, some of our polypropylene

 there is a mushroom cap on here and you want to take this and kind of roll it along that

Now you'll notice there's a white core around this and so that's what we want to

Again, you're going to end up with kind of a round cone shape on the end

 if you pull on it, now you can see where the sheath has a tendency to pull back and expose

So again, get the end, pull it back, and then you can see where the sheath

You have to do the secondary cleanup to make sure that the inner core and

 bit of a dome and the inner core and the outer sheath is fused.

 Now you have an end that's going to stand up to quite a bit of use.

 If you're at home and you have your hot cutter, you can go ahead and clean that up again.

 reduce that, you can't completely eliminate it, but the only way you're going to reduce

Cutting elastic creates a lot of stinky smoke, so make sure that you are

No matter how careful I am, no matter how quickly or slowly I cut,

 All worthwhile information, good to know, interesting stuff, the Junior Hot Cutter continues

 get your email right on the air, or you want to maybe just ask me a question or ask Tom

 you back each and every week for a little bit more from strapworks.com.

 Hey, it's Dave with The Shepherd School and I got something to run through the still today.

 My wife, if she was here, would probably tell me not to do that.

 I guess I need to drink a little bit more water because it's awful dark.

 Let's see how well we can filter out urine using our survival still.

 Because I just don't know, if you don't have a reverse osmosis filter, I just don't think

 your filter is going to be good enough to filter out stuff like this.

 As I've said before, if you're filtering from unknown sources, like I know what that is

 and I know that it's mostly solids, there's nothing that's going to evaporate out before

 But generally, you're supposed to have the water come to a boil before you put the still

 And I don't want to use the same glass because it's contaminated.

 Alright, so I had to end up putting the chair so it would run down.

 It's a lot clearer and it doesn't taste like what it used to be.

 But I know that's probably pretty gross, but I don't see filters or most filters wouldn't

 do that and I wouldn't try to purify out bodily fluids with most filters.

 And until next time, you can always get us online at www.teangun.com.

 So for this pattern we're going to need multiples of 11 stitches.

 So for row 1 you want to begin with a repeat of knit 2 together twice.

 You want to take your first 2 stitches, knit 2 together, then your next set of 2 and you

 Then we're going to do a yarn over, knit 1, yarn over, knit 1, yarn over, knit 1, yarn

 Then we're going to do a yarn over and then we're going to knit 2 together twice.

 And you're just going to repeat that all the way across your row.

 For row 3 we're just going to knit all the way across our stitches.

 And this pattern without a border gives a nice scalloped edging on the bottom.

 You have this nice little eyelet wave pattern and this solid scalloped piece in the center.

 So I hope you guys try this out and like it and I'll see you next time.

 I'm not sure how to pronounce it exactly, but the song's called Social Faker.

 It's either drop C sharp, which is what some people call it, or they call it drop D flat.

 Anyways, so you just drop it down half a step from standard and drop.

 And basically, when the song starts out, you're going to be doing a riff that's mainly palm

 And then you hit the first fret on the low E string, and then pull off to zero.

 And then you just do that back and forth between one and three.

 And then on the last one, you just hit a bar chord on the third fret.

 And after that, it goes to this part where the vocalist sounds like he's saying, like,

 I think I might have it right, I might have it wrong, but it's the best I could figure

 So it's palm mute, one, and then on the low E string, and then on the A string, you hit

 three, then kind of a half-ass pinch harmonic on the first fret.

 But after that, it goes to the clean part of the song, which is, it's all octave chords.

 Basically, you start out on the A, it's going to be on the A string, and the G string.

 Let me see if I can find it here in the song real quick and show you guys.

 And then after that, it goes to a part that's similar to the intro, where you hit it open.

 And then after that, you're going to do a bunch of natural harmonics on the fifth fret

 It goes to this part, I guess you'd call it kind of like a breakdown, where it goes like

 Basically, you palm mute twice, and then you do the harmonic, or you do the octave.

 You slide, you hit it on five and seven, and then you slide up one, and then you go back

 But instead of going six, three, five, you do six, and then you do kind of like a half-ass

 Basically, you palm mute and do a natural harmonic on the A string.

 Anyways, after that, it goes back into intro, and then goes to the whack-whack part.

 And then after the chorus again, it goes to this part that's similar to the chorus, but

 You're going to be on the same frets, but you're just going to hit them once, and then

 I'll try to either make another video if I need to, or I'll just help you out in private

 I also want to note that I'm going to be starting, I guess, a little mini-series of videos for

 Maybe even more than that, but I'm guessing three or four about Japanese scales, guitar

 scales, so you guys can learn those and try to improvise with them and get a little better.

 It's an effortless transfer from the comfortable seat onto the cushion while holding the handrail.

 The waterproof handset is so easy to use and the belt will gently lower you to the very

 The unique slip cushion is extremely comfortable and helps you when lowering into the water.

 When you're sitting comfortably at the bottom of your bathtub, lay back and relax.

 The powerful battery and efficient motor will lift you smoothly to the top.

 This clever bathing aid will automatically stop when you're in position to transfer back

 The sturdy transfer stool is perfect for steadying yourself when drying.

 you know the stress of all the years of having the same hair part.

 eyebrows and I just you know like I said saw results in two weeks.

 website eleganceandbeautyreviews.com and it's you know one of the most

 popular articles on my website and I just wanted to bring it to life and make

 most important ingredient you need is organic cold-pressed castor oil.

 what's going to deliver all those key nutrients that your hair follicle needs

 carrier oil and it's just gonna help you kind of dissolve the castor oil a little

 bit because it's so thick and it's a little bit sticky and hard to really

 oil it's gonna help your hair follicle remove any of that build-up that might

 be in your hair follicle that's you know blocking that pore, any kind of bacteria

This is also great if you have any kind of itchiness on your scalp.

 It's just gonna kill any kind of bacteria that's lingering on there and

 it's not going to irritate your scalp because we're using a very friendly oil

 the extra virgin olive oil that's gonna help make sure there's no irritation on

So I highly also recommend you get yourself a nice little nozzle

 gonna apply it to your eyebrows I highly recommend you just use like a q-tip or

 if you're gonna apply it to your your lash line use like an old mascara wand

 on overnight and in the morning go ahead and rinse out the mixture.

Now for the ratio I put it so there is one part castor oil, three parts

 extra virgin olive oil, and put at least five drops of the essential tea tree oil.

 Now like I said it's in a ratio so you can use teaspoons, tablespoons, cups,

 I've already started it off, so this cat's fur is going to be really interesting.

 One of the great advantages we have when we're using pastel pencils is that we can work in

 As you see me go across this area, you'll see, watch me as I change the angle of the

 A little bit of dark in there, so I just don't want it to be too strong.

 OK, well now that's all the white I think I want at the moment, so we want to now put

 Now I've also got a marking there which I've left completely alone, because obviously I

 Now once again, I'm still working in the direction that we see the fur lying in.

 Now here where there's a few markings, that is where I have to put some grey in.

 You see here I'm still mindful of the fur direction, but I'm not making it a solid lump

 Just under here, where it comes from the ear, there's quite a lot of dark.

 That filters through and disappears as we get to the top and those two marry together.

 OK, we've got nice and strong and that will then, following the direction that we see

 And again we can just now interfere with that grey that we've got on there.

 Just there, where we have a little bit of grey on the side of the nose.

 But what we're going to do now is just put a few little darker...

 You could slightly overdo it because when we put the white back in, which we are going to do,

 We've got the grey and we can see where the marking is going to go.

 Still registering in the direction that we see the fur lying in.

 What we don't want to do with this is to expand it beyond the grey that we've already put in.

 Now that's rich because of the base colours we've already put in.

 If we hadn't put them in like that, we wouldn't be as rich as that.

 It won't matter too much if you do bring a little bit of the grey back.

 This is the sort of thing you could practise on anyway with spare paper.

 I could have turned it round, but really I can still work it like this.

 Look how the way that marking now looks as though it's all part of the animal.

 Now you see all the cat's fur beginning to really look as though you can scrunch it.

 I'm going to be making you some Onnit Awesomeness French Toast today.

 I'm going to be using some of the great products available at Onnit.com.

 So we've got coconut oil, which we're actually going to use to cook the French Toast in.

 And we've got some Killer Bee Raw Honey, which we're going to glaze the French Toast with.

 And then we've got a couple of spreads here that you can use to put on your French Toast

 We want to get some intricacies that you might not be familiar with.

 And then I put actually some coconut oil right into the batter, as well as a little bit of

 We want to get a nice crisp on the outside of the French Toast.

 If you don't know about French Toast, it's really easy, quick food that has basically

 You can get good sources of good carbs, clean protein, nice different textures, tastes.

 I'm going to top it off with some of the cashew, almond, walnut butter.

 And then a little bit of a glaze with the Killer Bee raw honey.

 Chana Masala is a dish made out of garbanzo beans or chickpeas.

 So you can use canned chickpeas, but you can cook your own chickpeas.

 You can watch the video that I've made on how to prepare some hummus.

 Now we're going to chop some cilantro, about six to seven leaves of cilantro.

 We're going to put three to four tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil in a pot.

 Once the onion and ginger are golden brown, we're going to put one teaspoon of garam

 Now we're going to add half a teaspoon of turmeric powder and mix it.

 Now we're going to put one teaspoon of salt and half of the portion of the chopped cilantro

 We're going to cover it with two cups of water and let it cook for about 40 minutes.

 Now we're going to prepare some butter that we're going to put at the end of the process.

 We're going to use the black mustard seeds since they taste wonderful.

 Once the chana masala is cooked, we're going to add the butter, the garlic and the mustard

 To that we're going to add the second half of the chopped cilantro.

 Usually it's eaten with rice or chapati or both, which you can find the recipe in other

 Hey guys, it's Angela Kim from the Squishy Monster TSM on YouTube and today I'm doing

 a fun and festive Christmas collab with some fabulous YouTubers.

 to break down that chocolate and make it into a smooth silky petal.

 chocolate petal like this, you want to plastic wrap it, pop it into the refrigerator so

 that it can set because you want to essentially roll out little chocolate truffles to tuck

It's what gives the mochi the really sweet and kind of chewy and light

 this is just coffee brewed from the morning that I'm going to mix in.

 a mocha flavor, you can definitely substitute the coffee with just regular water.

 going to cover it with some plastic wrap with just a little bit of a lip so the steam can

And I'm going to steam it in the microwave for about a minute and a half and then take

 it out and stretch it and beat it and pound it and then put it into the microwave again

 the back of my wooden spoon and just make sure everything is getting mixed together

And then after it comes out after the minute and a half or two minutes

 has elapsed, you want to go in there and kind of stretch it and work it out.

 this with the back of my spoon now for about two minutes and it's now thick and sticky

 wrap back on and pop it back into the microwave, you want to scrape the sides so that it becomes

And you can continue using the back of your wooden spoon if you don't have one

 of these but I'm going to go in there and work it and just pound it and stretch it out.

 The longer you stretch it out, the more you incorporate more air and you work it out,

 flour, corn starch or wheat starch, whatever you have on hand and then just kind of smooth

 it over that surface and make sure your hands are nicely floured as well.

 you want to gather it onto your work surface and then just scrape it all out.

It doesn't have to look perfect, just as long as it's pretty even.

Then cut that in half and then each of those two pieces in half as well.

 out as thinly as possible without tearing it and make a rough oval shape.

 keep moving it around so it doesn't stick to your work surface.

 chilled chocolate ganache truffle, which is now firm enough to handle, which is why

 And remember, it is going to be very sticky, but that's the point of mochi.

 probably one of my favorite mochi combinations and flavors, and I hope you guys will try

This is most definitely my favorite flavor of rice cake because it's got chocolate and

I hope you guys say hello to everyone, all my friends down below.

 crosses underneath, when you rub your finger across it, you're going to notice a nice deep

I don't know if you can see it on the video, but when you run your

 want to make sure that you have all the bands that are facing opposite to each other.

 that the angles, you have the widest angle and then you have an inner angle and then

If you have these switched, then you won't be able to solve the puzzle.

 So for this step, I'm going to hold on to the 2 top bands and I'm going to let these

 drop in opposite directions or they get separated, they're not going to be in the correct position.

 So I'm going to let them drop and then I like to let them stay face down because then gravity

 top 2 bands and I work with the dimpled band always in my right hand and the top smooth

 and this may require some trial and error because of the design on this one.

 to kind of jiggle it a little bit and you'll feel it kind of lock into place because you

 into place and then you can see they're real nice and tight and close to each other.

 what you've done is you've created this sort of figure 8 that these outside bands are trapped

 out of 10 once you get to this point, if you're working with your right hand, you've twisted

 the dimpled band with your right hand, the outermost band is going to be this right band.

 But maybe somehow it got twisted and you've got it on the opposite direction.

 to be able to tell by looking at them which is the outermost band because they look very

 the other bands because if they get caught underneath you're not going to be able to

 on a door, you see how it's real loose and it's just like a hinge on a door and I close

 ring, turn it around because I want to work with the other angle.

 edge, make sure it's real loose, turn it into the figure 8, hinge on the door and fold it

Now you might have to jiggle it a little bit because this design is sort of tricky

 So all I'm doing here is just kind of jiggling it a little bit to get it to lock into place.

So now I'm going to take the whole ring, turn it around and again get the other

 band, turn it into the figure 8, hinge on the door real nice and loose, close my door.

 Hi there, I'm going to do a tutorial on the Vanessa Hutchin look as in Teen Choice Award.

 And I'm doing this because I saw Lauren Luke's video on the makeup and I tried it out for myself.

 But I do notice that because obviously I have Asian eyes and the shape is different, that there are certain things that you can't follow that Lauren Luke says.

I'll be using this color palette, Revlon Quad 12 Hour Eyeshadow.

 Now because Asian eyes, typically we don't have a crease, at least it looks like we don't have a crease.

 Where the crease is, if you look up, there is a brow bone and there is your eyeball.

 Whatever is in between your eyeball and the brow bone is actually your crease.

 But you don't always have to go in the crease because it's not visible.

 I find that's the most flattering shape of how you want to form your eyeshadow.

 But I don't because I don't like the feeling of tape on my face.

 If I make a boo-boo I can just get a cotton bud and wipe it off.

 You can make booboos with this because your crease is not visible.

 I have problems with making my eyes even because one of my eyes is bigger than the other.

 It's actually a very simple look but you need practice because Asian eyes...

 Oh yeah you see all these tutorials on YouTube and everyone's got these amazing eyes.

 And you put it on yourself and it's like, man my eye is not the same shape.

 I don't think it's actually very even but you can always clean up.

 Rather than to pile on too much and realise, oh damn I've got too much on.

 I wonder if you guys can actually see that I kind of made a booboo.

 Oh I forgot one thing that she did which was press here and circle.

 Oh wait, before I forget, she did put a sort of silver in the inner corner of the eye.

 This is actually cream which means it's going to be a bit hard to blend.

 Okay, so this is my wood cutting contraption that I'm making for me and for Drew.

 we're going to make a little more progress here and then do some more.

 Because whoops I haven't secured those yet, but anyway the wood

 Additional blocks of wood underneath so anyway, that's that part

 OK I've just given the oil a good polish and I think if you look carefully you can see

 I'm just going to run through very briefly the over stitch wheel.

 I know I prefer the pricking iron and a few people have said what about the over stitch wheel.

 And then with a 7 stitch to an inch pricking iron just run a mark of stitching down there.

 I'm going to use a pair of John James harness needles and Tiger thread which is 0.8mm.

As long as I do that every time all of my holes on the back should come out

 If you stick your elbow out, I appreciate you can't necessarily see that on the video but my elbow is sticking out nice and wide.

 That's keeping my awl nice and straight and by eye I can see that the next hole has come on at a good level.

 And as we progress, all things being equal, I should have a nice straight line.

 It's a little bit more work with the over stitch wheel than it is with a pricking iron.

 You've got to be more accurate when you're running it down your line.

 Whilst you can bring it back with your stitching and you're all work, I'm sure you're all aware that veg tan marks very very easily.

 With a pricking iron it just makes a straight line so much easier and so much quicker.

 And if you give it a reasonable thump you've got those holes pre-marked.

 You don't have that luxury with the over stitch wheel but with a good sharp polished awl that shouldn't be too much of an issue anyway.

 It's just to give you a working idea of how the pricking iron differs from the over stitch wheel.

 You've seen the pricking iron used quite a lot, now you've had a look at the over stitch wheel.

 There are so many different shades of black, but just one way to get a truly intense black.

 It is because we know that you love having a truly pitch black sheen that Turtle Wax

 has developed an exclusive concept to make sure your car never loses its original luster.

 Turtle Wax is proud to present the Black Box, a unique selection of complimentary accessories

 and products developed specially to give your car that black brilliance.

 After carefully washing and drying your car, pour a small amount of black pre-wax cleaner

Rub it into the car body, overlapping your strokes, first vertically

 Next apply the black spray detailer using one of the two microfiber cloths in order

 Next apply the black carnauba wax polish using the black Turtle Wax pad included with the

 black sheen is to remove the black carnauba wax polish using the second microfiber cloth

 Hello all you animators out there, and you junior animators, and all you wannabes who

 how to animate without giving you a little foundation underneath it and talking about

 the motion picture and a little bit of its history and how it all works.

Then I take some tape and tape down all four corners of this photograph

 number two and flipping or lifting up the top sheet of paper I make sure that all four

What will happen is sometimes it's kind of awkward to get yourself

 which I can now fit into the perimeters of the line I just drew.

 want to pick up and I want to trace where the center is, is right there.

If you're using 16 field, the center of the camera lens is here.

 center of anything that's 12 field is much, it's much more south.

 something that's even a bigger version of this, which I call pen paper.

I find the center of the 12 field, which is right here, to the left of the real center,

And you can actually photograph these extremes, play it back on a camera,

 tape that's coming up, which will be video number two, I'd like to get into animating

 As you see, since you've got the centers matched up, you don't need to worry about the centers.

 What you're going to look for on top is an edge piece that does not have yellow on it.

 So I'm going to match up the lower color, red, with its corresponding center.

 It needs to go to the green side, so the green face has become the desired side.

 What we're going to do is turn the top away from the desired side, pull the desired side up,

 turn the top in the same direction you turned it before, pull the desired side back down.

 Move the bottom two layers in the same direction you moved the top layer before.

 Turn the opposite side up, turn the top back so it matches up, and bring it back down.

 On the top of the screen now, I'm showing the algorithms for both needing to go right and needing to go left.

 It's easier not to use notation, but the notation can help if you're having trouble.

 The orange face has now become the desired side, and the blue, because it's matched up, is the front face.

 Turn the top away from the desired side, the desired side up, top in the same direction, desired side down,

 bottom two layers in the same direction you turned the top layer before, opposite side up, top back over,

 You're going to want to do this until you've got all the pieces in their right place.

 If you have a piece in its slot, but out of position, oriented incorrectly, then you simply bring in one of the yellow pieces,

 This brings in a yellow piece, leaving you free to run through the algorithm using this piece.

 When you're done with all four of them, you will have the first two layers completely solved.

 Once you've mastered the first two layers, go ahead and join me on the next part of the tutorial.

This time we're going to be looking at Wanted Dead or Alive by Bon Jovi.

 The intro to Wanted Dead and Alive is actually played on a 12 string guitar.

 is we'll look at how to play it on a 6 string because it will sound very similar.

 start things off, we've got a synth keyboard intro and what the guitar is doing initially

 to be playing is 7th fret of the D string and then there's going to be 12th fret of

 finger is on 2nd fret of the G string, 3rd finger is on 3rd fret of the D string and

 then I'm strumming it a wee bit near the bridge here to get a brighter sound and I'm strumming

So the next couple of bars have the main riff hook idea that makes up the

Everything here is rung out so you're not cutting the notes short.

 my 1st finger is going to be playing the 13th fret of the E string and my 2nd finger

 2nd and 3rd finger playing and this time my 3rd finger is playing the 12th fret and the

 2nd finger is playing the 12th fret as well on the high E string for the 3rd finger and

 kind of 12, sorry 13 with the 1st finger, then 12 with the 3rd finger, then 10 with

 the 3rd finger, then it's 8 with the 1st finger, then 5 with the 3rd finger, then 3 with the

 picking it, what I'm doing is playing that open D string, letting it ring, then I'm going

 to play the G string, then up to the E string and then back to the G string again.

 you're using alternate picking you would be doing down, up, down, up.

 it is you can do down, down, up, up or you can even try hybrid picking where you can

 do down, down and then use your middle finger to play that high E string, whatever feels

 And then this last bit here, what I do is a slide from 4 to 2 with that 2nd finger on

 And then we play that twice, but the 2nd time we play it, after we've done the...

 Play that open D string just a little bit earlier than we would normally.

So after we've done that descending sequence twice, we have a new little riff

So this next idea, what I'm doing is kind of little, almost little

 I go... And then I end it by doing a quarter note bend, 3rd fret of the D string, going

 of that bar, we're then kind of playing this kind of Dsus2 chord again that we were talking

And picking wise, what I'm doing is I'm kind of doing open E string

 string and then picking the D string and then picking the G string again.

 the end, I take it from... And then we have... And then we end all this off by playing an

 F. Now... I'm kind of like... Instead of playing this whole bar chord, what I'm doing here

 is I've got my 1st finger on the 1st fret of the B string, 2nd finger's on the 2nd fret

 of the G string, then my 3rd finger's on the 3rd fret of the A string and then my 4th finger

 is I play the 3 on the A string, 3rd fret, then play the chord and then end it by playing

 Now, we're going to take a look at a variation of the anti-dars.

 The anti-dars I showed a little bit earlier from when people are in half guard, they start

 I had so much success with that that I wanted to branch out and find other ways to use it.

 This right here is a quarter guard sweep based off the anti-dars.

 Whether or not I'm in tight or whatever, their hand is right up here, either on my rib cage,

 on my hip, they've come through, it doesn't matter, anywhere in this halfway zone over.

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to take this hand that I would normally want to under

 I'm going to take this hand, I'm going to control that sleeve right there.

 It's very important that we don't elbow our partner in the face.

 As appealing as that is, and I like the surprise look on their face that I have momentarily

 latched into MMA, Jiu Jitsu it's illegal to elbow our opponent in the face.

 In competition, man, my elbow needs to go past here if their face is in the way.

 Don't Cobra Kai style it or anything, but guys, be wary of elbowing people in the face.

 Now you see, turn just a little bit, when I brought that elbow up, I tuck it as deep

 Now from here, all I need to do is move my butt all the way over here.

 I can't just move my hips, I actually want to turn the hole that is on the back of my

 And piece that gas comes out, turning towards that wall over here.

 Now from here I can bring my leg out and control a lot like the anti-dunks.

 I found that this cat grip, umbrella grip, whatever you want to call it, is the best.

 He starts bringing that arm over trying to guillotine me and all that other happy trash,

 From here, clear that leg, boom, arm underneath, nice tight control.

 I already wear a gerbil on the back of my kimono, I don't need any other heat.

 All right, control, umbrella grip, bedazzle, elbow all the way up.

 If you can't do it in one motion, it's okay to go one, two, all the way over.

 Quarter guard, umbrella grip, sit up, bedazzle, elbow all the way through, nice and tight.

 Move my hips, he goes over, nice and tight, control, underneath.

 If you want some finer details from this move, just go back and look at the regular anti-dars.

 You'll get a lot of that same hip movement in there, but look at that setup from quarter

 Nice tight umbrella grip, bedazzle with the elbow, bury the elbow nice and tight.

 Go to www.Flydreamers.com for all of your flying training needs!

 Hi, I'm Scott and I just wanted to put together a little home video about how I go about smoking

 It's got a fairly oily consistency in the fillets but they come out really good when

 What we've done is we went out here on Bear Lake in northern Utah and caught some Bonneville

 And anyways, we took the whitefish, we filleted them out just like you would any other trout.

 And then what we do is after we get them filleted, we rinse off the fillets and then we put them

 It consists of two quarts of water mixed with two cups of brown sugar, one cup of

 kosher salt, a half cup of soy sauce, a half cup of lemon juice, and one teaspoon each

 We dissolve it all and then make sure the brown sugar and salt is dissolved and then

 Once the fillets are brined up for about that long, then we'll take them out and we'll

 lay them on the actual racks and we'll then put them in the smoker.

 I use apple wood from an apple tree that I got here right in my yard.

 We'll put the apple chips on the bottom shelf just above the flame.

 We'll then add about one gallon of water to the water pan into the smoker.

 This kind of keeps the fish moist while it's smoking and does a really good job.

 And then we'll layer the fillets onto the racks and then put them in the smoker.

 What we're doing is we're taking the fillets out of the brine and laying them on the rack.

 It's really good for smoking fish or any kind of tender meat where you don't want it to

 You can spray it with just a little bit of PAM or some kind of cooking oil and it will

 I like to run the smoker at about 170 degrees or so and then we'll just open it up.

 We'll put another rack of fish in, close the door, and then what we'll do is we'll keep

 the fish in there, check them about every couple hours at about 150 to 170 degrees.

 A full smoker takes about anywhere from about 4 to 6 hours depending on how you like the

 I don't like them overdone and turn them into fish jerky, which you can do by continuing

 The smoker's been at about 150 to 160 degrees during this time.

 The temperature dial is really handy for that purpose of keeping it adjusted.

 It's not too dried out, but it's got a really nice smoky flavor into them.

 You can see the fish is still in really good shape and it's really tasty at this point.

 You can eat them warm or you can cool them off in your refrigerator and snack on them

 Making anything from fish sandwiches to just eating them smoked fish and cheese and crackers.

 Anyways, we really appreciate being able to make this video and show people a little bit

 We've been really using the smoker a lot, a lot more than I thought.

 We're not only smoking fish in it, but we've been trying turkeys and several other different

 so if you have one of these sweet griddles you can totally make a ton

 I do realize that these sandwiches already have their toppings on it

 I just set aside one day of the week to take someone's request every week

 He's not even a year old yet and he's a monkey, for those of you that are wondering.

So I'm going to plug mine in, get it heated up and we'll get started.

So what I've done here is I folded my material completely in half.

 I bought two bar stools, so I want to make sure I have enough material for both.

 And all I'm going to do, I'm really just going to cut along that folded line.

 to be too perfect because all the edges will be tucked under in the end.

 Okay, so now that you've cut all of your corners and you've got a line in from all of your corners,

 what we're going to do now is we're actually going to glue the edges of the stool.

 We're going to take your E6000 glue here and you're just going to quickly apply some thin lines.

 It doesn't have to be too much, but you definitely don't want too little either.

 So now that you've got all of your lines glued, you're going to take your E6000 glue

 So now that you've got all of your lines of glue, all we're going to do is just tip this over

 So now I'm just spraying a ton of glue here because this is ultimately going to stick down.

 You have to remember you're not going to see the bottom, but even still,

 the fur really does hide any seams, so that's kind of the nice thing about it.

 So once that's all pushed down, just kind of see if there's any excess that you need to cut off

 So after that, I just use the glue gun to really touch up the bottom

 You don't need any complicated recipes or equipment, just a jar and a spoon.

 Your starter will come from any yogurt or kefir that contains live culture.

 You can also use freeze-dried yogurt starter, I recommend strongly liveware kefir.

 It has 12 different organisms which produces better quality of yogurt.

 Later you will continue using a tablespoon of your homemade yogurt as a starter.

 Don't use more than a tablespoon of starter per quart of milk because organisms don't

 You can use any type of milk, 1%, 2%, full or skim, even sheep or goat milk if you like.

 You need to boil milk, even the pasteurized one, because boiling changes the structure

 Rinse the pot in cold water before adding milk so it's easier to clean afterwards.

 Once you add the milk, cover the pot to prevent the formation of a skin on the top of your

 If you are worried about the milk scorching, you can buy a milk boiler, double boiler

 I've been using a regular stainless steel pot for years and it works just fine.

 Put a pot of hot milk in a bath of cold water in order to cool it down to a pleasantly warm

 I usually place my jars on a kitchen counter and cover them with towels.

 If you don't have a warm spot, you can cover your jars with a heating pad on a low setting.

 Ideally, the temperature should be warm enough for the organisms to grow, but not too warm.

 Slow growth over 10 to 12 hours allows for the best flavor and consistency.

 Depending on temperature and preference, anywhere from 5 to 12 hours will be fine.

 If your yogurt is still liquid after 12 hours, you can salvage it by putting it in a warm bath.

 If you are interested in learning more about yogurt making and fermentation, I would highly

 Wild Fermentation by Sandor Katz and Signs and Laws of the Kitchen by Harold McGee.

 Hey guys, this is Manav Kalia, physical therapist and Ayurveda herbalist.

 So today I'm going to show you a video on an ankle stretch position.

 So for those of you who are missing some ankle dorsiflexion or the ability to bring your

 foot upwards and for whether walking or squatting and different activities where you don't

 have enough range of motion so that you can go, you can move that knee forward, right?

 If you're missing that range, it's going to impact your ability to squat down or for running

 and various other activities, it can make a big difference too.

 So I'm going to show you a technique to do mobilization with movement to stretch out

 So we're going to use a band, a TheraBand, loop it around here.

 So that's your ankle and I'm going to place it right here in line with that joint.

 What I'm doing is, now most of you guys have seen the standard calf stretch, right?

 We're going to do, we're going to facilitate that movement by doing a posterior glide backwards

 I step forward, bring the other foot forward and all I'm doing is I'm shifting my weight

 forward and I come back out of it and I shift my weight forward.

 As you can see, the band is pulling it back and it allows me to bend my knee and bend

 Of course I can bring my foot out and I can keep my knee straight and I can do the exact

 I can shift my weight forward and it really stretches that tissue.

 You also of course get a stretch through your calf and your Achilles tendon.

 You can work at holding the position, you can oscillate back and forth, so quite effective.

 If you have any questions, make sure you leave a comment and make sure you click on the link

 And all it does is start with a little bit of white boxed cake mix.

 Now what's in here are all the dry ingredients that you need, like the flour, the sugar,

 Then to give it a nice, moist, incredible flavor that's a little bit tangy, a cup and

 And I just need to mix this for a minute or two so everything's combined.

 Just a couple more things to this that you may not have thought of, but this is what

 First thing, just a can of crushed pineapple with the juices go in here.

 Not only is this moist and delicious, but when it bakes up in your baking pans, it's

 I always like to use nonstick cooking spray, and this is butter flavored, which adds just

 My grandma Lorraine used to make this cake when I was a little girl, and I still love

 I've preheated that on 350 degrees, and they bake in about 35 minutes.

 If it comes out clean, then it's done, and if not, it goes back in for a couple minutes.

 Now this is cream cheese icing, and it's my favorite, I must admit.

 Now to this, I'm going to doll it up with a little bit of vanilla, just about a teaspoon

 I really like using vanilla or some kind of extract when I'm using my store-bought canned

 You don't get that store-bought taste, and it adds extra flavor to whatever you're putting

 If you bake your cakes, bring them to room temperature, and then pop them in the refrigerator

 and make them nice and cold, they are so much easier to frost, because they don't crumble

 If not, just take a serrated edge and come in here and make it as even as possible.

 So you don't get your frosting all over your serving platter, just take parchment and lay

 it on the corners of the plate, and then carefully place in the center of your cake.

 Now I'm going to turn this upside down so that I have a nice surface to frost, and then

 And you can adjust it, and your parchment won't run away from you.

 This is going to taste like it's from scratch and look like it's bakery bought.

 Let's turn this over and pop this right on the top, just like that.

 The pecans, you can see, add flavor, and also look how beautiful they look in the icing.

 And because I put that parchment down there, I can go all the way to the bottom and not

 Now with your frosting spatula, just take the bottom of the cake and hold it, and this

 will help you get that parchment paper out from underneath that oh so moist cake.

 That's an Italian wedding cake in what, 40 minutes, 50 minutes?

 My name is Troy Souders, head basketball instructor for Gorilla Academy.

 As a basketball instructor, I have over 15,000 hours of personal basketball training experience,

 As a seasoned professional in area basketball instruction, my goal is simple.

 On this session of driveway drills, we're going to demonstrate for you the intermediate

 Now the block to elbow low post shooting drill is comprised of two different elements.

 One, working on the low post block power move and then moving to the high post jump shot

 Shelby's 13 years old and what she's going to do is she's going to demonstrate this drill

 going one and a half to two minutes and we're going to really focus on one when she's in

 Once she sets the ball down and she cuts away, when she comes back I want her to focus on

 setting her anchor foot, stepping to the ball and then coming back to the anchor foot and

 Once she gets the rebound from this side, then I want her to push it up the same side

 to the high post area block, or I'm sorry, the high post area elbow.

 Take that jump shot and when she takes the jump shot, what I want her to do is not focus

 Make a nice power move, go to the high post area, take a nice jump shot.

 Once she shoots the ball and relaxes, then off the ball, get the ball, go to the other

 block area, set it down, cut away, come back, set your anchor foot, reach to get the ball,

 So she's going to work this side, power move, this side, high post elbow shot, other side

 block area, other side high post elbow shot, and she's going to do that for one and a half

 to two minutes, focusing on the low post power move segments and then the high post jump

 So again, focus on working on your low post power move, right hand, left hand, hitting

 the layup using the backboard, then go to your high post, make sure you work on your

 jump shot, hold your follow through, once you hit the ground, relax, then work off the

 And within this drill, what I want Shelby to do is focus on consistent movement.

 I want her to take a nice hard jump shot, knock it down and off their release, go after

 Work off the ball for one and a half to two minutes, and she's going to have a solid low

 post, high post, power move, jump shot workout drill segment that she can add to any workout

 So come right back and Shelby will demonstrate for us the block to elbow, low post shooting

 We're going to do the block to elbow, intermediate level version, low post, high post shooting

 We want to get it where she can power it in, keep a good angle, use that glass, nice shot,

 then she's going to go straight up that lane line, make a nice catch a pivot, jump shot.

 We really want to focus on footwork, so set the anchor foot, come back, use the glass,

 If you'll notice in her catch a pivot, we're on this side now, you'll notice on her catch

 a pivot, when she sets her foot and she makes that, she's stepping to take a perimeter jump

 What we want to do is not step wide, we want to step to the opposite side so her hips will

 That's a little better, nice shot, there we go, stay with it, set it down, set it down

 Up this, same side, same side, keep moving, keep moving, keep moving, boom, shot.

 Right here on this side, set it down, cut away, cut away, cut away.

 What we want our players to do is we want them consistently moving.

 If you'll notice, she'll tell you as soon as we're done here, straight up, straight

 up, straight up, she's tired, she's winded, but we're working and simulating game type

 movement where she's constantly moving, she's working off the ball, she's making a cut,

 So by a minute and a half to two minute segment, she should be winded and tired, but this is

 where we really want to focus on, how do I power that ball in, where do I get strength

 from, where do I draw energy from, where do I draw that strength and be able to power

 She's going to continue, we want to work on footwork, we want to work on shooting segments,

 Set the ball down, we're going to go one and a half to two minutes.

 Now you notice, she's starting to get tired, she's starting to drag a little bit.

 Same up, straight up the line, there you go, shot, nice, give me one more set right here.

 So when she's fatigued, now's the time that counts, we want her to focus, set that foot,

 focus on hitting that shot when we're tired, straight up the line.

 Now these are the segments that you need to add to your workout in order to become a better

 If you have somebody set the ball down for you, that's fine, if not, these are just drill

 segments that you can do in your driveway by yourself to become a better player.

 Go ahead, finish up the elbow, nice catch and pivot, good, shot, nice job, nice job.

 Okay, that was the block to elbow, low post, high post shooting drill at an intermediate

 Now Shelby, Shelby's 13 years old, she did a great job demonstrating this drill for us,

 but a couple of components that she demonstrated that she needs work on is one, once she sets

 that ball down with any player, make sure you don't set it too deep so once you pick

 She wants to maintain a good angle so once she picks it up, she's able to power it in.

 And two, make sure that she sets her anchor foot, so if the ball's here, she sets an anchor

 foot and she's reaching for the ball and coming back to power the ball in, so establishing

 Then when she transitions to the high post area, if you look at her footwork, we want

 to make sure that when we make that catch and pivot, that we're stepping at an angle

 that our hips are going to be able to turn around and be square, so we're not working

 Because if the upper body swings, then you're going to have a hard time, you're basically

 shooting on the move, so we've got to work on that footwork position that when she's

 here, she's square and that when she steps, she's not stepping wide because when she steps

 So when you do make that step, go here and step to the other side so as you turn, you're

 Now this is a great low post, high post drill to add to any workout, especially if you spend

 some time in the low post area or you're in an offense where your coach, maybe you're

 a guard, but he's going to have you cut through in the low post.

 So as you're cutting through, you're used to working off the ball, constant movement,

 coming to the low post, setting an anchor position and stepping in to power the ball,

 use your shoulder to get contact and finish with your offhand, then also working on consistent

 movement elements to be able to transition to a high post, catch the ball and knock down

 So a lot of players in this drill are great at the beginning, but they get fatigued and

 And that's why with a player like Shelby, you see, she's starting to get a little fatigued

 and when you get fatigued, sometimes you get sloppy, which we noted, but the reason we

 want to do these drills is so she can work on increasing that cardiovascular system and

 the strength, so in game situations, she's become stronger because of these segments

 So it's a great drill to add to any workout and that's the block to elbow, low post, high

 Well today I'm going to make some sort of Mexican chicken a la king.

 I'm going to use some chicken and you can use leftover chicken or leftover turkey instead

 And I'm going to use some chipotles, some onion, and garlic and here's some homemade

 chicken stock, red bell pepper, jalapeno, tomato, chipotle, and some cilantro and heavy

 While it's been about one minute, I'm going to add some salt to the pan, to the chicken,

 My heat's on medium high and you know you can skip this step and go to the next step

 which you'll see later if you're using leftover chicken or leftover turkey.

 So the chicken has cooked for another minute and a half, two minutes.

 Well, the chilies and peppers have been going for five minutes.

 you're going to get a thick body, then suddenly it will go thin.

 You've always got to leave enough room for the hackle and the wing.

 Do you overlap the windings, Jim, or do you just do it by sight?

 down towards the eye, all the hackles will lie back towards the tail.

 Would you only use squirrel in this fly, Jim, or would you use bucktail?

 If it was a very big fly, you can get ardent dilly as tube flies,

 or a waddington, and you've got to use the bucktail to get the length.

 You see, long wing flies and long tailed flies are coming very popular

 You can get imitation ones that are quite good, but only down to a certain size.

 You match them up so that it's the same length, and on the sides.

 Now the nut you attach a salmon fly to the leader is always a jammed nut,

 where the nut is behind the eye, so there's got to be a space between the head

 and the eye of the hook so that the jammed nut can be jammed tight behind the eye.

 I'm going to show you how to make a quick chicken style salad that is perfect any time

 of the year, and it uses this fabulous new product that we found called soy curls.

 Now soy curls, one of the wonderful things about them is it's high protein, it's high

 So you take the dry soy curls, you add your hot water or hot marinade to it, and you let

 it sit for five minutes and you've got your main ingredient in your recipe.

 Okay, now we've got our hot water, we're going to just pour it over the soy curls.

 Now you could use a hot chicken style broth for this if you wanted a vegetarian chicken

 The soy curls have been soaking like five, ten minutes until they're soft, and now I'm

 And I like to get out as much moisture as I can from the soy curls so that they're not

 And I have this potato masher and this works really well to press out all the extra water

 Now that the soy curls are all drained, I'm going to go ahead and chop them.

 You could also do this in the food processor, however you want to do them.

 Just so that they're not huge pieces, it just makes for a nicer salad.

 So what I'm going to start off with is some dairy-free, egg-free mayonnaise.

 I'm also going to add a little vegetarian chicken-style seasoning to the mix.

 Now if you don't have that, you could add like a tablespoon of soy sauce or you could

 And the poultry seasoning, it's a combination of different spices and herbs and it just

 If you didn't want it to have the dill pickle flavor, you could add a little curry powder

 Really it's one of those fun salads that you can make your own depending on what kind of

 I tasted the salad and decided it needed some onion and celery.

 So I found some in the fridge and I'm just going to add a little bit.

 And that's what makes a salad so much fun is that it's whatever you want it to be.

 Oh, and if you're looking for the soy curls, you can find them at everydaydish.tv at our

 It's inspired by a lot of like Vanessa Hudgens, Coachella type stuff.

 I just want to say I am so sorry that I haven't been on all week.

 I've missed you guys, but don't worry, I'm going to be posting a lot more videos this

 And if you want to know how I got this look, then please keep watching.

 I'm priming my eyes, as always, with MAC's Paint Pot in the color Painterly.

 All the shadows I'm using today are from the Kat Von D Monarch palette.

 And I'm starting off by putting this orange color right into my crease and dragging that

 I sprayed my brush with a bit of Fix Plus and now I'm going in with this gold shade

 I'm going back in with that orange crease color and just adding on top of it to layer

 To make my eyes appear larger, I'm just applying this dark brown shade right onto my outer

 I'm tight lining my eyes with this brown liner and I'm just going to be applying that right

 To smoke out my lower lash line, I'm just applying that same orange color right to the

 inner corner and also adding that same dark color that we applied in the outer corner

 To finish off the eyes, I'm applying my favorite lashes, which are the Coco Lashes in the style

 Moving on to the face, I'm just going to be warming it up with this Wet n Wild bronzer

 in the color Bikini Contest and I'm just applying that to my cheekbones, forehead, and also

 To highlight my face, I'm applying this Laura Geller baked highlighter in the color French

 Vanilla and it's going to be placed on my cheekbones, nose, inner corner, and also my

 Make sure to let me know if you do like this video by giving it a big ol' thumbs up right

 And also while you're down there, make sure to check out the products I used, links to

 my social medias, and also comment down below what you'd like to see next.

 I love you guys so much and I hope you have a great day or night, whatever it is, wherever

 this engine is cold right now so we're gonna start the engine up for two

 minutes just two minutes and that will warm it just enough to help us remove

 dikes and we're gonna cut the wire from the sensor to the connector about

Okay now when you get your new sensor and take the protective cap

 off you want to make sure that it has anti-seize on the threads.

I'm Lindsay and welcome to my kitchen here in Winchester, Virginia.

 of the Real Women of Philadelphia Challenge and that means it's dessert time.

 afternoon I'm making up a batch of my absolutely delicious oatmeal apple cream pies.

 grocery store with my dad, he had a little soft spot for those too.

 up version of that with a little twist on some local ingredients that we grow here in

 I'm also using apple butter that is White House apple which is made here in Winchester,

 Rudolph Studios aren't up with what everyone else is doing, we had to bake our cookies

 ahead of time because we can't stop and pause and do all that good stuff.

Here are just little pieces of diced apple that I peeled so you don't

 the very first thing you want to do when it comes to this recipe, because remember they

 are apple oatmeal cream pies, we have to make the cream that goes inside.

 reduced fat because it works just as well as the real thing and we can save a little

I'm going to use a hand mixer and just kind of get it going here in the bowl.

 As always, it helps to let your butter and cream cheese sit for a little bit so that

 really want to mix that up so we don't have clumpy, clumpy cream.

 that it's our first thing that we're going to make before we even make our cookies is

 that it needs to sit in the refrigerator for a little bit so that we can get it to that

And you might notice that I'm wearing my festive apple blossom beads because next

 week we're starting our Shenandoah Apple Blossom Festival, which is a huge thing here in Winchester,

So I'll just take one, scoop up a little bit of that apple butter

 We have Japanese rice, and I got a lot of questions from my original onigiri video.

 This is Japanese mayonnaise, but you're welcome to use any kind of mayonnaise.

 Like I said earlier, this was Japanese mayonnaise called kipi mayonnaise.

 And you can use American mayonnaise or any kind of mayonnaise, whatever brand you like.

 And if you like, you can add a little bit of salt and a little bit of pepper.

 And we just take a sheet of saran wrap and place it on the cutting board.

 And so a lot of people don't have a rice cooker, so I have another video of how to make Japanese

 You know, the less equipment, especially if you live in a house where, you know, the kitchen

 is very tiny, you don't have space for a lot of equipment, then a frying pan works just

 So we put the tuna in the center, put a little bit more rice on top to cover it.

 So this side, the sides are flat, and the top and bottom, I make a V shape.

 So all the types of rice that doesn't stick, it won't work, unfortunately.

 That's what I used to do because their hands were all dirty with sand.

 So what I did was I would get the nori in a few pieces, depending on how many I have,

 and I would put them separately in a Ziploc, like this, so everything is ready to go.

 So when they're hungry, all you do is, when it's time to eat or even at work, just remove

 If you enjoyed this video, please subscribe to my YouTube channel or come and visit us

 Hi, I am here in the Go Indie Test Kitchen and we are working with the Green Star Elite

 We're going to be making a recipe from the Living with Green Star cookbook, which is

 We're making yummy in the tummy juice that's carrots, parsley, celery, and apples.

 First thing we're going to do is put it together, which is super easy.

 The gears go on first and they go together so that the one single dot goes between the

 For this recipe we're using the fine screen so it will get less pulp.

 This is the plastic blender, which you can use and push down the fruit or the vegetable

 But then if you want to get the very last bit of it, you can use the wooden one and

 If you find that the juice is not ejecting, you might want to open up the juicer knob

 The great thing about the Green Star is that greens go through, leafy greens go through

 And with the three stage process, it crushes and cuts, mixes and presses and makes delicious

 We get this question all the time, how to properly size for the belt.

 We go off of your actual waist size and not off of your pant size.

 If you carry a holster in your waistband currently, and that's what you're buying your belt to,

 If you do not, then you need to account for what size you'll need when you're carrying

 Our belts come with seven holes spaced one inch apart with a three inch tongue.

 When measuring your belt, you will need to decide if you want to be in the middle hole

 Like we send it, if you buy a 37 inch belt, the middle hole will be 37 inches.

 If you want more or less tongue, you need to determine that based off which hole, based

 on which size on the overall length of the belt that I'm going to demonstrate with this

 All right, when you get your crossbreed belt, it's going to come with seven holes and a

 If your belt that you measure comes out and you're going to need a 38 inch belt like this

 belt is, and you want a larger tongue, then you're going to need to order a larger size

 belt that is going to give you a longer tongue past the hole that you're wanting.

 We're going to put you in the middle hole based on the size you order.

 So if you ordered a 38 inch belt, you're going to have your hole at 38 inches in the

 Depending on how much tongue you want, you can adjust those sizes and stay within those

 If you do not own a current belt that you can measure to do the actual waist size that

 you have, you can always use a seamstress tape to get your actual waist size.

 To get this properly for our belt, you'll need to actually run it through your belt

 loops and if you carry it in the waistband, put your holster in, do it at the same time,

 run the seamstress tape through your belt loops and where it overlaps is your actual

 So if you can see, I'm right at a 42 inch waist, which is not concurrent with the size

 So if you go based off your pant size, my belt would be four inches off of what it should

 So always remember, do not use your pant size, use either a seamstress tape and go through

 your actual waist size through your belt loops or we prefer if you just measure your belt

 and use the current hole that you use, that will be a better measurement.

 If you have a question about any of our products, you can visit our website, CrossbreedHolsters.com

 or you can give us a call at 888-732-5011 or email us at info at CrossbreedHolsters.com.

 Take the meat off the grill, then let it rest for 10 minutes before slicing on

 Serve your London broil hot with a salad and favorite vegetable.

 And remember, the next day place the meat on a ciabatta roll and you've got a

 For a printable copy of this and our other recipes, please visit the website.

 Hey YouTube, so this is my hair about a year ago when I put it in small two strand twists.

 And I just wanted to show you a before and after video of the hairstyle.

 I stood up for about four hours, then of course I took a break, and then I came back and finished

 The product that I use on my hair while it's twisted is the Care Care product for natural

 And yeah, so with this hairstyle you can put it in various styles.

 You can pin up the side of your hair and then wear the other side out.

 Or you can pin up both sides of your hair and then have a bang in the front.

 Or you can pin up the front and then wear the rest of your hair out and have a cute

 Hello, I'm Wes Crawford, and now we're going to look at some more advanced fills utilizing

 For right now, we're going to do one measure fills, and then I'll go back to the beat to

 So one of the problems drummers have to confront is how do you get out of your fill and back

 First I'm going to show an example of a fill using quarter notes, then eighth notes, then

 So we're going to show how the different subdivisions can sound, each for one measure.

 Next, we'll do eighth notes, and I'll move those in a different way around the drum set.

 As you see on my fill, I went one and two and three and four and one, two, three, four.

 And notice we're playing eighth notes on the hi-hat, so you can keep counting eighth notes.

 One-ee and a two-ee and a three-ee and a four-ee and a one, two, three, four.

 So when I'm counting the numbers, the one, two, three, and four are constant.

 Now, let's look at some of the different stickings, or the order that we hit our hands, and see how things can vary with those.

 We've been doing single strokes so far, so I'll move around for single strokes one more time.

 See, I changed the speed that I was hitting, but I used single strokes.

 I used double strokes, but I changed the speed of them in the middle.

 We'll move from one tom to another, but keep the left hand on the snare, just as a further example.

 See, a much more complex pattern, sonic pattern, developed just because we did this more complex sticking.

 At the end, we'll change it up just a little bit to make it fit right.

 If we had sixteen sixteenth notes in the fill, and we had a three-stroke pattern, three goes into sixteen five times.

 So I hit one extra snare drum hit as a sixteenth note at the end.

 These are the kinds of calculations you must make as you do fills.

 So far, every fill I've done has been constant notes, and that can be too much.

 We want to create more interesting rhythms and more drama sometimes with rests.

 There are millions of combinations now that we have different stickings, and we can use rests to create all kinds of rhythms.

 To watch the other segments in this video series, or for how-to videos on almost any other topic, visit monkeyseed.com.

 Today we're gonna make orange and chili pepper braised fennel and it's really good

 Fennel fennel fennel is something that I don't I don't make at home.

 And I love it and so I'm really excited to see what you're gonna do

 So what I'm gonna do today is I'm gonna go ahead and start this by getting the pan

We're not gonna go really hot because I want all I want to use olive oil in this

 And we're gonna caramelize this fennel a little bit before we braise it

 So just oil the fennel a little bit so the seasoning sticks to it while we're doing that what I have here Michelle is I have

 But we left that we left the core in it and the coral just help keep it together and when it cooks

 Okay, so once once they're nice and golden one side just flip them over

 I'm gonna practice that at home and now my orange juice and the orange juice has been the orange juice has been reduced

 For eight minutes until the fennel is nice and tender now, we're gonna add the butter that's gonna mellow that out a little bit

 Okay, so right at the core you can feel that there's just a little bit of bounce back done ready to taste

 Hello and welcome to the OWC instructional series of videos in this installment

 1.8 gigahertz late 2004 model, but these steps will apply to any model G5

 The first thing to do is to shut down the machine and unplug all cables from the unit

 Next lift the door release lever at the rear of the machine and remove the side door panel

 Both hard drive bays are located in the upper right portion of the computer

 Apple supplies the additional screw mounts necessary to install the drive here on the left side of the drive bays

 They are screwed in on others the screws can be pushed out as the holes may or may not be threaded

 On your new three and a half inch SATA drive attach the four screw and mounts you just removed to the four outermost screw holes

 Once they are attached they will act as guides and mount points while installing

 There are three sets of tracks in the drive bay the top two are for the existing drive

 Simply slide the drive all the way into the bottom set of guides so that the connections on the drive are towards the left and

 There are no additional cables necessary as Apple provides them for you

 Pull outward on each of the two cables to loosen them from their stored position underneath the drive tray

 You do not need to pull them out very far just enough to connect the data cable and the power cable to the back of

 The drive the connections only fit one way, so don't worry about plugging the cables in the wrong direction

 To secure the drive rotate the gray latching knob marked B. So that it's positioned horizontally

 We are now ready to close the machine first replace the air baffle if you removed it

 All that is left to do is to plug the cables back in and turn the machine on

 I'm using the RoboCoop here to make a hollandaise, but I'm going to do an extension on a hollandaise

 because the most important thing I'm finding with this particular piece of equipment is

 So I've got some prawn shells here, I'm going to set the temperature up to 80 degrees, I'm

 going to put some tomatoes in, a little bit of parsley, some lemon skin and some lemon

 There's a little bit of garlic in there as well, and some white wine, a little dash of

 Now I'm just going to put that on a speed of 400 and then put that on.

 Okay the prawn liquor's cooked out now, the aroma's absolutely gorgeous.

 Remember it's magnetic so we don't have to worry about the blade coming out.

 I've made my essence of prawn from the shells and tomato and the herbs and lemon, so I've

 got a base there, I've got my normal egg yolks, I've got some soft butter and I've got some

 clarified butter and a little bit of black pepper to adjust the seasoning.

 I'm going to set the machine now to 80, I'm going to set the speed to 400 which is already

 The temperature's on 34, as it rises up I'll then start adding my clarified butter and

 if I need to adjust the consistency I will add my essence of prawn.

 I'm not going to introduce another flavour now because I want to keep that real prawn

 Just going to add a little bit more prawn and my clarified butter.

 And there we have an excellent use for hollandaise and an extension of it, just giving you that

 intense prawn flavour which you'll go through with a citrus background and just some lovely

 Hi everybody this is Jen from Cookies, Cupcakes and Cardio.com.

 So to make the heart shaped cookie pops you're going to need one batch of sugar cookie dough.

 If you don't have a recipe we have one ready for you, it's on our channel and you can check

 What you're also going to need is two heart shaped cookie cutters.

 You're going to need a cookie pop stick, a lollipop stick would work, a candy stick would

 You're going to need some crushed red candies and just for reference I'm using crushed Cares

 hard candies and I've just managed to crush these using a rolling pin inside a ziplock

 You're going to need some flour to flour your mat and you're going to need a rolling

 If you don't have a mat to roll out your cookies on you can just use your countertop and put

 So the first thing we want to do before we roll out our dough is to lightly flour our

 This just helps to ensure that the dough doesn't stick to the mat and that it doesn't stick

 So I'm just going to roll it out and it's going to be about a quarter inch in thickness.

 So once you've reached your desired thickness what I'm going to do next is take my large

 heart cutter and for each cookie pop I'm going to need two of the cookies.

 So I'm going to try to do as many as I can here with this heart shape.

 And for these ones we're going to cut out the middle using our smaller heart shape.

 So I'm just going to put it in the middle, press it down and take it out.

 You're going to be able to reuse this small center piece into your next batch of dough

 that you would roll out if you're wanting to make lots of cookies.

 So I'm just going to keep doing this and then I'm going to show you up next how to assemble

 Okay so to assemble the cookie pops what you're going to do is take one of the cut outs and

 then you're going to take one of the cookie pop sticks and you're just going to press

 it gently into the bottom there and you want to make sure that there's a little bit into

 the cut out because you're going to fill the cut out with this crushed candy.

 And then you're going to take a second cut out and you're going to place it on top, just

 pressing it down gently into the other layer and onto the stick.

 And then you're going to fill up right to the top with the rest of the candy.

 Any of the big chunks if they happen to fall in there, just take them off or they'll burn.

 So you take your bottom layer, press your cookie pop stick onto there, put in some crushed

 So you're going to bake these cookie pops in the oven at 400 degrees for about 10 minutes.

 You want to make sure that all the candy in the center has melted and that the cookie

 They're a little bit thicker than our regular sugar cookies so they just need a couple more

 So you just want to make sure that they're brown around the edges and that the candy

 So I'm going to pop those in the oven and then I'm going to bring them out and show

 So the cookie pops were in the oven at 400 degrees for 10 minutes and they have come

 out and they are nice and golden brown around the edges and the centers have melted completely.

 Before you touch them you want to make sure that the candy in the center re-hardens completely

 So I'm not going to touch them, I'm going to leave them here and I will be back to show

 So there you have it everybody, how to make a heart shaped cookie pop complete with a

 So I hope you liked the video, if you did remember to share it.

 You can find us on Facebook, Google Plus and Twitter and I will see you again next time.

 So we're going to have, we basically have two potatoes that we boiled quite a bit, they're

 This is how we do it in the old country man, we don't have any implements.

 We already explained that this is a potato cutlet we're making.

 We're going to make a potato cutlet and we're going to put the Lakhma Chana Masala

 In the meantime I'm going to go take care of my third degree burns here.

 Ideally, I would advise you to boil the potatoes, let them sit for a while, let them cool

 Alright, so now we've got the mix for the potato cutlet more or less done.

 We're going to toss them on this plate with a couple of napkins, paper napkins, paper towels

 In this lesson today we're going to be checking out the Minor Pentatonic Scale.

 Now I don't want you to get scared, I know scales kind of sound like

 they're going to be nasty and really boring, but actually scales are pretty damn cool.

 And the reason that scales are cool is because they teach you the notes

 is checking out this very first scale called the Minor Pentatonic Scale.

 and for a lot of guitar players it's the only scale they ever learn.

 It's got a lot of mileage, you use it for blues and rock and even in jazz and country.

 and one that you will use for as long as you play guitar, you'll be using this scale.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to learn it just to play it up and down,

 and work on making sure that we've got our fingers stretched out right.

 Now if you've been doing the preparation exercises properly that I've told you about,

 about working your fingers up and down and picking the strings individually,

 you're probably not going to find playing this scale very difficult.

 So let's get stuck in now and learn our very first scale, the A Minor Pentatonic.

 So we're starting here with our first finger in the 5th fret of the thickest string.

 We've got first finger's going in the 5th, second finger in the 6th,

 third finger sits in the 7th, and little finger reaches the 8th.

 Make sure that you're playing it correctly on the way up and on the way down,

 and that you check out the fret numbers that you should be playing,

 so it doesn't go, some people try and go up the strings coming down.

 If you're unsure of the tab, there's one of the lessons in the early hundreds,

 can't remember what lesson number is off the top of my head now,

 So check that out on the website, I'll stick a link in the lesson as well,

 But this is a really, really, really class little scale to check out.

 There's loads of different ways of playing it, loads of tricks to playing it,

 we use it for blues and string bending and all sorts of cool stuff.

 When you feel kind of confident with this, maybe toward the end of the course,

 It's a very, very cool little set, and that's a perfect follow-on

 Hey everybody, it's CoolKidSierra and today I'm going to show you how to make this do-it-yourself

 The glitters I used are by Recollections and they are Citron, Emerald, Mint, Pesto, and

 I also used gold micro marbles as well as star glitter flakes to symbolize explosion.

 I used a glass bottle and you can use any kind that you have as well as a head pin or

 So first I'm going to mix some glitter starting with Pesto as the base.

 As well as just a hint of Silver because creepers have a little bit of white color in them.

 After I mix that I'm going to add some gold micro marbles to give the glitter mix texture

 And carefully I'm going to layer glue and glitter, glue and glitter until I get all

 the way to the top and I'm going to mix it all up just so that nothing gets clumped up

 This secures it in a lot better than an eye pin so I recommend using this.

 And here I just cut it and I'm looping it around to make an eye pin kind of shape so

 Next I'm going to glue the cork into the bottle and I don't have footage of me putting

 Next I'm going to carefully burn a label and be like really careful because I burnt mine.

 So this is my second attempt with the second largest creeper label.

 I'm going to apply glue on the back and just get the right positioning on the bottle charm.

 This weekend I was in the farmers market and I saw beautiful tomatoes

 and I immediately thought of Moroccan salads where we often use fresh tomatoes

 So today I'm going to show you how to make a simple Moroccan salad made with tomatoes and cucumber

 It's very popular in Morocco, we often serve it as a salad surrounding the main dish

 All you need is beautiful fresh tomatoes, cucumber, some spices

 and you will be so surprised how all these simple ingredients taste so beautifully together

 The secret of this salad is how small you cut the pieces of tomatoes, cucumber and onion

 The thing is when they're cut very small, they mix up well together

 But I found these beautiful tomatoes that have different colors

 You could peel them if you want, I don't have to peel them, they're fresh organic

 After you finish cutting the tomatoes, now cut the cucumber into very small pieces

 Make sure to get a sweet onion, otherwise it gets really strong

 And that's it, it's a lot of cutting but you will love the end result

 So get a fresh lemon, squeeze it like this on your table to get most of the juice

 I'm also going to use my secret ingredient which is preserved lemon skin

 And I'm going to cut it in very small tiny pieces to give the citrus flavor to my salad

 If not, don't worry about it, the lemon juice will just do fine

 And again, if you used the preserved lemon, you may have to put less lemon juice

 To serve the salad, you can either serve it in a bowl or in a plate

 You can just take a cookie cutter, like this, a large one though

 You can serve the salad with toasted French baguette or Moroccan bread

 The crunchiness of the cucumbers goes with the softness of the tomatoes

 Please try it and email me because I'm sure you're going to love it

 And then take off the front panel by putting your fingers in here and just pulling it up.

 Take off the top and bottom and you just pull on this part very gently whilst pushing your

 And for the top with the hard drive, where the hard drive was, you want to put your screwdriver

 in like this and kind of find where the clip is and then pull it.

 If this doesn't come off and it's stuck behind here, then all you need to do is just pull

 These ones are very easy to do, but the ones at the back are the fun ones.

 OK, to take the case off, you're going to have to push in all the clips on the back.

 It looks wickedly sharp, but is, I can promise you, very, very blunt.

 And I find that because that's so thin, it doesn't leave any marks at all.

 What I'm doing is I'm pushing this apart like that, and at the same time pushing in on the clips.

 OK, with half of the case off, you now need to remove one, two, three, four, five and six screws

 OK, with the last of the screws out, you just need to take off this little thing.

 I am going to use shortening, sugar, eggs, you can use lemon flavoring, vanilla.

 I like to use lemon, and imitation butter, and maple, and then of course baking powder and salt.

 And then you are going to want to use food coloring to color the dough,

 because you want different colors of dough for your unicorn turds.

 And my dough is all ready to go, so I am going to divide it and put it in five different bowls and color it.

 So put a couple drops of food coloring in the dough and mix it up.

 Alright, so I have yellow, and pink, and purple, and green, and blue.

 I used neon food coloring, which is really great for this because you get the nice bright vibrant colors.

 And the next thing you want to do is wrap them up in saran wrap.

 I am just going to put it over the bowl and put it into the refrigerator and let it cool for about an hour.

 Alright, now that they have been chilled for an hour, they will be very easy to work with,

 Alright, so, instead of rolling each color out one by one and having three in a row to roll,

 Except that we are not going to mix it so much that it turns a different color.

 Alright, the unicorn turds are all rolled up and ready to go into the oven at 400 degrees Fahrenheit

 As soon as they come out, we're going to take them out and we're going to stick little shiny things in the turd

 Alright, generally with cookies, if they're kind of very soft, I still take them out

 because the cookie dough will harden and you don't want them to cook too hard in the oven.

 We're going to cook it for three more minutes and then I think they will be ready for the next step.

 they're going to be soft enough that you can stick these little blue things in

 And then the directions on this website say to get a clear sparkle gel.

 And you can use, you know, the brush if you want to spread the gel all over the cookies.

 Okay, they are cooked and ready for these little tiny things to be stuck right in them

 Okay, now the unicorn poop has little stars and diamond-like looking things,

 And you could use a brush like this, but I almost want to just use my fingers.

 And I'm going to have to show you all what these look like in the sunlight tomorrow,

 That one won't be for anybody at the party, because, you know, kitty germs and all.

 I've been cooking and cleaning and getting ready for party stuff.

 Hi everyone, it's Sheri Carroll here with a really quick technique called dry embossing

 So here I've created a card and I've used the Lotus Leaf stencil and I've run it through

 my Big Shot machine with a little bit of foam to create an embossed background.

 I have my Big Shot out and I'm going to go ahead and put my platform in, but I will open

 up the tab 2 so that is hanging off the side, so I only have the platform and tab 1.

 And here I've cut up a mouse pad, and these are a little bit thinner mouse pads, I'll

 show you how thin, and so I'll lay one on top of my platform, and next for the sandwich

 I'll go ahead and put down one cutting pad, and now I can go ahead and lay down my stencil,

 so this is the Hero Arts Lotus Flower stencil, and then my paper goes on top of the stencil,

 so it has a hard surface but yet it's squishy enough, and now I'm going to put my other

 mouse pad down on top of that, so that will push the paper into the stencil.

 I want to turn my mouse pad around because it does have a neoprene side, so I want the

 So now I can put my final cutting pad down, and I want this all to sit on top of each

 other but it's kind of slippery, so I'll just readjust this before I send it through, so

 I'll just push that in place so everything is sitting right on top of each other.

 Once I have that ready to go I can go ahead and crank the handle and it goes through really

 smoothly, so I'm using the two mouse pads so that I'm not really jamming this through

 So I've cut my paper up to how I want it to sit on my card, and here I'm using the Paint

 So what I want to do is I'm going to stamp this paint stroke in between these cut papers,

 so I'm kind of measuring here, and I don't want this to really go off the side, although

 once I put water on it I imagine that it will kind of go off the side, so I'm kind of measuring

 this stamp up to the size of the card, and I'm just tapping the stamp with my dauber.

 And so next I want to lay down a towel real quick, and I've used this a lot, you can tell

 it's really colorful, and I'll go ahead and get this stamped a couple sprays of water,

 and this really makes those dauber inks really fluid, and so I want to make sure that everything

 is lined up the way I want it, because it is on the main card, and I don't want to have

 to redo this, so I put my other little block down at the bottom to hold the card down for

 So since this has water on it, it stays wet for a really good time, a long time, and I'm

 going to go ahead and blot up just a little bit of this so it doesn't seep into the inside

 I've decided I wanted to add a couple more of the brush strokes, and I'm going to have

 this going in a different direction, so again I'm tapping the dauber onto my stamp, and

 I'm grabbing a paper towel, I'm going to go ahead and put this on the inside so I won't

 have to worry about the seepage and having to wipe off the stamp.

 So I'll go ahead and put that little block back down, that keeps my card from flopping

 up while I'm trying to stamp, and I'm going to give this a mist of water, and I like to

 spray it about 2 or 3 times, and just make sure you get all the area.

 With my big head in the way, I'm going to go ahead and stamp this onto my card.

 Next I'll be stamping my embellishment piece, and I have the heart that's also from the

 So I have my Antistatic from EK Success, I just got this, it smells like baby powder,

 So you just kind of brush that onto the paper and it keeps the embossing powder from sticking

 Once I have that down I'll go ahead and use my VersaMark ink and I'll tap this onto this

 heart Brush Paint Stroke stamp, and it's really lovely, it's got a lot of great detail.

 So once I have that inked up I'll go ahead and just stamp that onto my white cardstock.

 When I have that well pressed in I can go ahead and get my white embossing powder out,

 and go ahead and sprinkle that on and then do some heat setting with my heat gun.

 Next I'm going to be stamping this rectangle Brush Stroke stamp on top of the heart, and

 I'm using the Tidepool dauber, and I do like to shake these up a little bit, I don't know

 why, I don't know if I need it, it's just kind of a habit for me.

 I'll just kind of draw onto my stamp and just kind of fill in all those areas, and you can

 Again I'm just going to use some water on this because it really helps move that ink

 around, and you can see where it's just slightly wet, and it helps move that ink around the

 I'll go ahead and press that in, and I like to let this sit in the paper just a little

 bit so that can soak in, and once I'm happy with that I'll go ahead and just pick that

 up, and now I can kind of move this around and get that water color kind of flowing in,

 Next I'll be die cutting this into this tag shape, and you do want the paper to dry completely

 before you want to die cut, because if the paper's wet it will not give you a crisp cut,

 it'll be kind of a mushy paper and it'll kind of tear a little bit.

 So go ahead and let that dry, and then use your die cut and run it through your Big Shot,

 and I'll go ahead and pull this off, and now you can see how that looks.

 I've put my little embellished piece on with a little bit of gray striped baker's twine,

 and here I'm stamping my love message with charcoal ink, and the charcoal's really nice

 because it's not quite black, so it becomes slightly opaque so you can see the color underneath.

 I have one last element to stamp for my card, and I'm using the Pale Tomato dauber again,

 and here I'm just going to go ahead and use this directly onto this flower stamp, and

 this time I won't be using water, I wanted to show you how crisp these stamp just by

 So you get a really nice crisp image even though they're fluid.

 To finish things off I put my flower on top of my heart embossed piece, and up close you

 I hope you've enjoyed this tutorial on dry embossing with Hero Arts stencils.

 The great taste of Cinnabon World Famous Cinnamon Rolls can now be enjoyed at home with the Cinnabon Baking Kit.

 Families can enjoy mixing, baking, and creating their favorite cinnamon rolls,

 an activity that will fill the house with the familiar aroma and flavors of Cinnabon.

 Hi, I'm Jen, and today I'm going to be showing you how to make those irresistible Cinnabon Cinnamon Rolls in your own home.

 Once you have all of these ingredients, it's time to get baking.

 In a bowl of a stand mixer, you can add your Cinnabon base mix.

 and then we want to increase the speed and mix it for another 3-5 minutes,

 Once your dough is done mixing, you're going to go ahead and lightly dust your countertop,

 lay the dough down, go ahead and put a little more flour on top,

 and then we're going to roll it out to about a 16x16 inch square.

 And don't be afraid to use your hands a little bit, just to even it up.

 So now that you have that, we're going to go ahead and place the softened, unsalted butter,

 Make sure you get it all the way across the edges, from corner to corner.

 We want to get all that delicious flavor in every bite of our cinnamon rolls.

 One area that you want to avoid is this bottom portion of the dough right here.

 That'll ensure that once we roll up our cinnamon rolls, cut them,

 and once we let them rise and bake, that they won't unravel on us,

 Alright, get all the corners and edges, just avoiding this little bottom area here.

 You'd rather have that great filling inside your cinnamon rolls than on your counter.

 One trick that we do in our bakeries is we actually take the back of our knives,

 And that tells us exactly where we should be cutting the rolls.

 We're going to put these about every half an inch apart, so that they have room to rise.

 On top of the oven would be great now, because we can go ahead and let the rolls rise for about 45 to 60 minutes.

 And that'll allow them to get a little bit bigger and get ready to go into the oven.

 So now we come back to the rolls that have been here for about 45 to 60 minutes.

 You can definitely see, after removing the plastic wrap, that they've doubled in size almost.

 And we can put them into the oven that's been preheated to about 400 degrees for about 45 to 60 minutes.

 We bake them for 35 to 40 minutes until they're golden brown on top and the filling is bubbling out.

 Now that the rolls are perfectly baked, they're nice and bubbly out of the oven,

 we're going to frost them with the cream cheese frosting pouch.

 There's plenty of frosting in the pouch provided in the kit to cover all eight rolls.

 We like to frost our rolls in the bakeries all the way down the sides of the rolls as well.

 You can also enjoy other delectable treats with the Cinnabon baking kit.

 From monkey bread to cupcakes to ham and cheese pinwheels, there's a recipe that's sure to please.

 These additional recipes are included on the baking instruction sheet.

 For more information about Cinnabon, please visit www.cinnabon.com.

 Hey guys, Amie here and for day 10 I'm teaching you how to make Ouzele a l'Enge.

 This is a French recipe and it is also known as the floating island.

 I would have to say this took the longest to make out of everything else because first

 you have to make the custard and then you have to make the meringue and then the plating.

 Well you don't have to do it like this but I like two plate food so I did.

 It kind of tastes more like marshmallows so basically it's like pudding with marshmallows

 So this is actually my first time trying this dessert and I actually really like it.

 In preparation for Easter, I'm trying to come up with some interesting ideas that can help

 you put a nice Easter dinner on the table without a lot of work.

 Today we're going to do an apple and sweet potato bake that is going to be sweet and

 savory and absolutely delicious and to bonus, it's a really simple recipe.

 I have one large sweet potato that I peeled and sliced in approximately quarter inch strips.

 About four tablespoons of butter that I have just chunked up into little cubes.

 We're going to put some salt and some pepper and some vegetable cooking oil that I have

 I preheated my oven to 350 degrees and I had to take a couple of things out of there so

 And then I'm just going to start to shingle the sweet potato and the apples.

 This just really makes a stunning presentation and when these cook together, they taste amazing.

 Okay, the only other thing I'm going to do now is I'm going to salt because this is a

 savory sweet vegetable dish and everything that's sweet needs a little bit of salt.

 So we're just going to salt this with less than a half a teaspoon of salt and pepper.

 Okay, and then we're going to go ahead and we're going to dot this with some butter cubes.

 And remember this is just about four tablespoons or half a stick of butter.

 And the only other thing I am going to do is I am going to drizzle over just a tiny

 Now, we're just going to pop this right into a 350 degree oven and we're going to bake

 it until the sweet potato is soft, the apples are soft and everybody's happy and the maple

 syrup and the sugar and the butter have created a nice little bubbly kind of syrupy liquid

 And I'm leaving room for another dish that I'm going to put in the oven in just a moment.

 But I'm going to serve up some of these baked apples and sweet potatoes because I got to

 And the maple syrup and everything that's on there, oh, ever so slightly just drizzle

 That baked for just about a half an hour and it came out at the same time as our ham did

 So I hope that you give this sweet potato and apple bake a try.

 And you can adjust this to feed as many or as few people as you like.

 Make sure you stop by my website and check out the recipe where you can print it out

 Hi guys, so I just wanted to show you how to achieve this really quick look.

 It's just really simple and natural and I guess sort of like a no makeup makeup look.

 I think it's the perfect thing if you're in a rush in the morning, especially if you're

 on your way to work or school or even if you're just going to go out and run some errands

 and you don't feel like slapping on a shit ton of makeup on your face.

 So if you want to see how to get this look, just keep watching.

 So the first thing that I'm going to do is apply some moisturizer all over my face.

 Okay so now I'm going to be working on making my skin look a little bit more flawless and

 You can either use a BB cream or a tinge of moisturizer or whatever it is that you feel

 But I have like some spots from like acne scarring and blah blah blah.

 So I'm just going to use a full coverage foundation and I like to use this Covergirl Stay Fabulous

 3 in 1 because I don't have to use a primer or concealer when I use this.

 It's really just like a one step thing so it makes it really fast.

 And since we are going for a very natural no makeup kind of look, you want to make sure

 that you do blend it in down onto your neck and into your hairline as well.

 And just really buff it out as well as you can so you know there's no like cakey areas.

 I'm going to be doing my eyebrows next and luckily they're pretty groomed already because

 If you want to see a tutorial on how I do them myself at home, just click the link right

 And um, but yeah, if they're already groomed then this part is even easier and faster.

 So I just brush through them really quickly and now I'm going to take the light brown

eyebrow kit and with a little angled brush like this I'm just going

 to run some powder through them just to kind of make them stand out a little bit and fill

 Now I just want to add a little bit of color to my face and sort of give it a little bit

 of dimension but I don't want to chisel it out too much because you know we're going

 So I'm going to take my NYC Color Real Bronzer which is like smashed into a million pieces

 And I'm just going to take this brush, it's kind of on the bigger side, and I'm just going

 to get a little bit of powder on there, kind of dust it off and then just apply it to the

 hollows of my cheeks where I would do a contour but this isn't going to be quite a defined

 And then you can kind of bring it up onto your cheekbones as well a little bit but I

 just want to add a little bit of color to the sides of my face and then I'm going to

 So I don't know if you can see that but just like barely any on my brush.

 If you want to just dust a little bit on then feel free to do so but I don't know, I just

 So then I'm just going to add a little bit of highlight and I'm going to be using this

 I don't know, it's sort of just like a liquid highlight but it can be very intense.

 I'm just going to take a little bit on the back of my finger and then just very lightly

 And then just a tiny tiny bit down my nose and on my cupid's bow, like above my lip.

 So then I'm just going to go on with like this flat face brush and I'm just going to

 You can use your fingers if you want for this, that might actually work a little bit better

 Yeah, I definitely think your fingers are probably the best option for this.

 And that just sort of adds a really subtle, natural looking shimmer and highlight.

 You could skip that if you want to, it really isn't that big of a deal.

 Now moving on to the eyes really quickly, I'm going to keep it very simple and natural.

 I like to use two, so the first one that I'm going to use is the Telescopic Shocking Extensions

 Now I'm going to go in with my Maybelline Mega Blush Volume Express and do a couple

 more coats of this on the top lashes and then a little bit on the bottom lashes.

 I know, especially when I'm in a rush, I get mascara all over my eyelid, but you can literally

 take two seconds when you're done and just wipe it up with a q-tip.

 So just saturate your lashes as much as you can, as quickly as you can, and you know,

 Alright, and now I'm going to grab my q-tip and just clean up, you know, all the spots

 For this part, you can either just throw on a gloss or a chapstick or whatever it is that

 If you want to do a pop of color too, that I think looks really nice with really like

 But I'm just going to go with the lipstick I've been using pretty much every day and

 And it is the Rimmel London Pink Chic Lipstick and it's just a really nice, light, natural

 For the very, very last step, I'm just going to take some makeup setting spray.

 This one is the Scandinavia one and I'm just going to spray a couple sprays on my face

 just to give it a nice finish and to keep the makeup on all day long.

 So I hope that you guys found this tutorial really helpful and easy to follow along.

 If you did, please thumbs it up, comment, subscribe, all that kind of good stuff to

 Hi, I'm Becky with BabesAndHairland.com and we are back with my daughter Bug and we are

 We have already done one on her left side and I love to do a zig zag part actually when

 I do messy buns just to add a little bit of fun playfulness to the style.

 Also for people who have problems getting their buns or their ponytails even, I find

 that having the part zig zag kind of gives you a line to go off of to guide you of where

 I like to spray her hair down a bit to get it wet because it helps with the fly aways

 But obviously if you want it to not be that way, don't spray it down.

 We are going to make a ponytail and I just use a basic rubber band for this and I again

 have got it so it's going to be even across from this zig zag that I've got in the back.

 Once you've made your ponytail, on that last time when you can't stretch it much further,

 You've got your loop there, you've got your ends hanging down here.

 I'll do this sometimes when they're fresh out of the bath or if it's not then I'll spray

 Then you're going to want to take bobby pins and I will pull sections of hair.

 Get your bobby pin and I just piece it out and just put the bobby pin anywhere.

 There is really no exactness to this but you just want to mess up what you've got from

 Depending on how much hair you're working with, you might need more than two or three

 If you have left hair hanging down underneath, you can leave that, you can spray it around

 Again, it's a messy bun, it doesn't need to be the same on either side, it doesn't need

 What we like to do once you've got those done, these are some of our cute Gibby Clips

 We will just stick those anywhere on the top of the messy bun to jazz it up a bit.

 We've got bobby pins, Gibby Clips also has those and you can stick a couple of those

 You can add a couple of those in so you can have a couple different looks.

 You can get a couple different looks from Gibby Clips with those from the different

 There's just a quick, easy, fun, playful style with the double messy bun.

 Hello, my name is Kerry and this is our Kenmore dishwasher and recently we had trouble with

 After cleaning the sump on the dishwasher that cured the problem of the dishwasher

 I noticed that the walls of the dishwasher and even some of the dishes still had the

 So what I'm going to do is run some white vinegar through the dishwasher and leave the

 dishes in that have the white film on them and see if this will get the dishwasher clean

 I will go ahead and add a couple cups to the bottom of the dishwasher.

 And after that's done I'll go to the dishwasher and run it through a cycle.

 After the cycle is done let's take a look and see how the vinegar did.

 I have no film on the door or the interior of the dishwasher and the utensils that had

 Last thing I want to check is one of the glasses that had a white film on it.

 So I'm impressed the white vinegar did a really good job on cleaning the walls of the dishwasher

 So that completes this video on how to clean a dishwasher with vinegar.

 If you would like to see more of my videos please visit my YouTube channel IceKeeper1.

 My name is Jovana and I'm so happy to be with you guys today while you're here.

 I would love it if you guys subscribed to my channel, maybe hit a like.

 So today I'm going to show you how to make my personal favorite, get ready for the name,

 It's delicious, it's spicy and it's sweet at the same time and it's super easy to make.

 I've cut up about a pound of tiny heirloom tomatoes since they're in season right now.

 I've cut up some orange bell pepper, cilantro, about one half, almost one half of red onion,

 two jalapenos, which will make it spicy, and one yellow bell pepper.

 So the most critical thing to this is cutting the watermelon since we want it to be in little

 small pieces and I'm going to show you guys how to do that, okay?

 And then you want a sharp knife because watermelon peel is pretty hard.

 Now that you've completely sliced your watermelon and it looks like this, like a pretty pink

 And the other ingredients I basically just diced them up into really, really small pieces.

 So that's all you're doing and you're mixing all the ingredients and then that just creates

 Okay, so now that you have it like this, you might want to take like a few slices and then

 Okay, now that you've diced up your watermelon like this, you can see it's in really small

 pieces, you're going to take your bowl and I'm loving my bamboo bowl today and just put

 Tomato, tomato, onion, which makes it like really just Latin flavor, spicy.

 And obviously onion, cilantro, any of these ingredients are optional.

 So if you don't like it, one of them or you prefer to add maybe another, you can do that

 Did you know that the more colors that you eat, the more nutrients you're obtaining?

 You can eat it just like this or put it over a bed of mixed greens, however you want.

 Okay, so now that you have your rainbow summer watermelon salsa, have it so beautifully cut

 up, you can put it in like a nice bowl with some romaine lettuces.

 So now that you've diced it all up, you can just put it in some romaine lettuce strips

 Hello everyone I found this recipe in Taste of Home magazine's fall baking

 8 ounces of cream cheese and a half a teaspoon of vanilla extract.

 until you get a nice and smooth and creamy mixture and then set that aside.

 You need to crush 12 Oreo cookies until you get some fine crumbs and I just put

 large bowl place 1 1⁄2 cup of butter melted, 1 1⁄2 cup of brown sugar

 packed, 1 1⁄2 cup of white granulated sugar, 1 1⁄2 cup of unsweetened cocoa

Recipe doesn't specify one at a time so I put them in all at once and

 added in a teaspoon of baking powder and 1 1⁄2 cup of all-purpose flour.

 can certainly blend the flour and the baking powder together prior to adding

 it to the brownie batter but I don't think it makes that big of a difference.

 Once the flour is blended in add in those crushed Oreos and stir it in with

 batter into the bottom of a 9 by 13 inch baking dish that's been greased

 I lined mine with aluminum foil and then greased the aluminum foil.

 the brownie layer out and then on top of that spread the cream cheese layer.

 Spread it out so it's nice and even and then you're gonna coarsely chop up an

 gonna bake this at 350 degrees for 25 to 30 minutes or until a toothpick inserted

 cream cheese and brownies together so this was a personal favorite of mine.

 channel because it is one of my most favorite desserts ever so if you want to

 see all the different kinds of brownies go ahead and click on your screen or see

 Alright, so what we're going to do here today is to replace a Ford F-250 model

 the easiest way I found after trying several attempts to get from the back

 side of the fender well, this is the best way because when you try to do it from

 the fender well there's a metal plate back there that stops you from twisting

 so it makes it a little difficult for me but for you guys who don't have one of

 be done first is when you remove this grill here at each of these locations

 you will see there was there's a screw here and that screw basically you just

Alright and if you look there will be one, two, three, four of these

Once you have all four screws out you basically pull the grill forward.

 Don't worry it doesn't break anything it easily comes back and slides back.

 can see down here I have a screwdriver just kind of holding it open for me so I

When you go to put this back on I'm not going to show how to put

 it back on it's very simple you just push the grill back forward and when you

So when you go to put it back on if you can see here I don't know if my camera will zoom in good here

 if you will see here the screw has marks on it it will leave indentions.

 grill back on when you push it back and you put the screw back in you want to

 line perfectly up with those indentions because the washer on the bottom of the

 washer if you can see here you you'll see teeth like indentions.

 Those indentions kind of help you line the grill back up because if you don't

 the problem with that is your grill won't line back up correctly and when

 you shut your hood you'll notice a gap everything will be off so it's best to

 line those back up with those indentions that the original factory screw made.

 To remove the headlight or blinker light you have to you have to kind of get in

 As you can see behind that is the body or the frame there's no way to

 comment back and that will be great for future reference but right now I tried

 that and there's no way to back that out without having to remove the whole

 there's one, two, three, and there's a fourth little screw on the bottom that

 looks about like that and all four of those hold those in so once you take

 those out this this one here on the top you don't have to take completely out

 but the two right there as you can see there's a hole right there and there's a

 hole down there you take those two out and you have to take the one on the

Once those are removed the headlight will remove will move forward

 it is a little snug to remove because it likes to snap into this hole here so

 just don't worry about breaking anything just tug on it it will pop out.

 have it removed or pulled out those guys of you that don't have the

 aftermarket bumper with the grill guard will be a little bit easier but you can

 take this whole headlight straight forward and remove your headlight or

Okay so if any of you guys have a comment that you would like to make for

 me or any of the other viewers to make this much more simpler feel free to

 a lot of questions about that so I'm going to try and give you a couple different techniques

Somebody had a question about different types of waxes so I'll try and clear

 up so that when your tool is on it, it hits right on dead center.

If it's too low or too high you'll have a hard time getting that

 it to bite and then roll it over and then come around and come up the side.

 So, one other technique I wanted to show you was using a spindle gouge to do it.

This is a way, this one takes a little bit of practice, but you can clear

 But you're actually riding the bevel of the spindle gouge there.

 This one takes some practice getting used to, so play around with this one a little bit.

 hold it up against the wood, get a nice coat on it, let it melt in.

 And I didn't sand that, I just cut it with the chisel, I'll show you that.

 So it's going to be a lot shinier if you run it up to 600 or something and then put it on.

 But you can see it does a nice job and puts a nice protective coat on it.

 They're going to catch, they still catch on me all the time, so it's just something you need to practice with.

 Alright, what this is is I have a membership site for people who are right-brained and scattered by nature just like me

 You know get my act together and I help other people to do it with motivation and direction and this is part of it

 so if this is something that you think you would love to be a part of then go to the tidy tutor comm and

 Then click on meals at home and you'll be able to get involved and get be a part of this

 It's not something you get in the mail and you have to read it's all these videos and interactive help

 And you know, it's just an awesome thing and plus you're a part of a group of women that are just amazing

 I hope you like, you know what you're gonna see and I'll see you in tidy tutor insiders

So and the good thing about this is, you know, while the good grilled cheese is cooking

 Spreading the mustard spreading the mustard spreading the mustard.

 So, you know if you're with your kids and you're cooking you can really kind of like get the arm

 You know little things going that are traditions like that little song, you know, I that's a kind of a song

 You know for different reasons, you know, like maybe it might be washing the floor, you know washing the floor washing the floor

 I only get white American cheese and I really recommend that you do too the yellow dye in the American cheese is

 Absolutely not necessary for taste at all and it is quite bad for you

 So I cut butter nice like this some nice little hunks and I put it on there

 So there see see how that is like that, can you see see some hunks of butter and you put it on

I think I just turned it over so you might have to wait a minute

 I'm gonna clean up, and then I'll you know just show you the nice and nice

 Cheese sandwich when you step here, can you see how nice it is isn't it beautiful.

 But it is an art look it look at how beautiful that is is that nice or what?

I'm the teddy tutor and this is Emily Roberts, and who are you Emily?

 So I have here two cauliflower florets that I'm going to grate.

 So we're going to have some nice, fresh cauliflower pranthas, also called gobi pranthas.

 So now that all my spices are in, green chillies are in, cilantro is in, we can go ahead and mix everything well together.

 So what we're going to do now is take a ball of dough, plain wheat flour dough that we have made.

 And what we're going to do is just flatten it out a little bit.

 See our prantha, our dough is filled with cauliflower and it's nice and round.

 Some sizzling going on here, looks like we are making some progress.

 And a great Sunday brunch option or if you are going for a picnic, just make some pranthas, pack them, easy to carry.

 You can always use butter, butter is my favorite and most of the time I use butter but oil works great too.

 You know, when it comes to fluffy gobi bhaji, Aditi knows her stuff.

 Subscribe to the channel and learn every recipe that Indian food has to offer.

 Hi guys, today I'm going to share a lower fat guacamole recipe with you.

 It's about half the fat of regular guacamole and it tastes amazing.

 It's super easy and it's much better for you because it is lower in fat.

 This one weighed the same as the avocado so you'll just want about equal amounts.

 This is a serrano pepper and I just remove the seeds and slice it and dice it really

 But if you like a spicier guacamole you can do the same thing with a jalapeno pepper.

 These are my favorite onions because they're super, super mild.

 They don't make you cry or your eyes tear up at all when you're cutting them.

 This is an heirloom tomato but you can use whatever tomato you prefer.

 You can even use cherry tomatoes or Roma tomatoes work great as well.

 Using either a food processor like this one or a high powered blender put in your avocado,

 your zucchini chunks, and your celery chunks and blend until smooth and creamy.

 You can add your lime juice and also I'm using cumin which adds an amazing flavor so you

 Whoever came up with the idea to blend zucchini with avocado to make a low fat guacamole was

 But you can enjoy this with all of your favorite Mexican dishes.

 My husband loves to bake a potato, put salsa on it, and top it with guacamole.

 Having some fun today, you know, detuned, hanging out with the Charvel and some distortion,

 getting inspired by a fantastic band, a really great guitar player.

 Come along everybody, let's take a look here at what we're going to do.

 All you got to do is click on that link and you're going to get some cool stuff.

 You're going to get a free lesson, not available on YouTube, and you get a cool coinciding

 e-book and it's all free and all you do is you just click on that link.

 So go ahead and do that real quick and come on back and check out the video.

 Got a healthy amount of distortion and reverb on just so I can get that nice kind of arena

 And we're going to outline some interesting voicings of this chord but extensions that

 are going to happen with the pinky that often time are very tricky and difficult.

 So focusing on our D, I get this really big sound here as I hit that low, detuned string

 But what I'm going to do is I'm going to use my pinky to get this G note here on the B

 string and then ultimately while still holding the chord, I'm going to get my pinky out to

 Now that's going to give you this kind of suspended or add nine kind of feel.

 But it's really, really cool because you get this and you're going to have to pull off

 Now the other thing that we're going to do is we might add a little bit of dynamic or

 And right away you can see I'm going to pivot off of this low string.

 So I'm going to kind of turn my body so you can see what my right hand's doing just for

 Now for that example right there, I hit those with an upstroke.

 Now that's going to turn it into a downstroke when I hit those strums.

 For me that's a little bit more natural but it's just so cool and these are classic sounds

 and extensions that you can do any time you play a bar chord that's shaped like this.

 Now we're going to get into some power chords off of the fourth string.

 And I'm going to take it and just get the feel for what that's like against a low tune

 Hardest to replicate actually because this is a good example of how it's really in your

 hands and a song like this can just inspire you to try to be like that person's tone but

 you know you'll become yourself through the process and that's what these videos are good

 I'm going to go to the C chord up to a D but I'm going to do that a little bit better.

 We can get a little bit more spicy and maybe do these three strings here.

 Any time I play or fret a chord this way with the extension going this way I may choose

 to do something different as I go to the C maybe up to the D in this particular case.

 You can get into those kind of things and that's really neat off the C chord.

 Now what's kind of nice is in the first section of this song is there's some good subtleties

 My tuning might be floating a little bit but I'm going to give it vibrato and I'm going

 Now one thing that happens in the pre-chorus of this is really kind of cool.

 We're just taking the components of the song and moving them around to make them our own.

 What I'm doing here is I'm barring with my third finger all the way across and I'm ultimately

 Then I can fulfill those high strings on the fifth fret there just by barring.

 We're going to do a part two to this Gentleman's Style because this is just a rhythm thing

 We can get into all the great lead work and I think we'll have to do that in a part two.

 I love Reishi tea, which we have here today, and we also have some brand new steepers.

 So you're going to have to tell me all about these because I don't know much about tea.

 This is roughly 13 to 16 ounces, so you'd probably use about two scoops.

 And this is kind of similar to a French press, but you don't press it down.

 Well, they made it really nice because it's just under the lip there, so you don't have

 Let it steep for as long as it needs to, and then we add cold water.

 So what's awesome about the reishi tea is that they actually tell you the steeping time,

 On a lot of the nicer teas, they'll just assume that you know everything about tea and then,

 We'll let it steep for five minutes and we'll come back and add some cold water to it.

 And we're going to add some water just to cool it down a little bit.

 I'm going to try to do this without splattering, which is not good.

 I mean, then you just pour your tea for your lovely tea friends.

 Whenever changing temperatures like this with like coffee and stuff, I always worry about,

 But it works out really well and it's really nice and smooth and full-bodied.

 Different kind that you can cook it with the skin you can eat it, but I'm gonna show you how to do that

 I'm just gonna cut into a little strip like maybe a quarter inch by quarter inch

 You don't want to add any more oil unless you want to it's okay too

 And then use the cover to cover up to let them cook for maybe two to three minutes

 I think that's good enough and we're gonna take it out and set it aside

 And we can add a little bit plain water or you can add vegetable stock not much just like that

 And then use the lid to close it for a couple minutes let them cook.

 So if you want more sweet or more sour or more soy sauce be my guest

 You can add anything you want, but you gotta be balanced the flavor

 And now I'm just gonna add just a little bit of the cornstarch mix with water

 This one is called shabu shabu, which is served in some of the very good Japanese restaurants

 And it celebrates the Japanese idea of eating food as close to its natural state as possible.

 So in order to eat it, the instant it's ready, you cook it on your dining room table and

 you can get one of these fantastic little propane stoves, right?

 And we add a little bit of water because it's been boiling a little bit.

 Sometimes, I guess they use that in American, Japanese restaurants with a lot of onion.

 And while we're waiting for boiling, we're going to make a sauce.

 You're going to blend until it gets really smooth, you know, silky texture.

 And so now, when I started eating shabu-shabu, which was a long, long time ago, in a little

 You know, when you make it, you know, let me do this one point.

 And after trying shabu-shabu, you'll see why it's considered quintessential Japanese

 And all of you in the audience are going to be able to try Tadashi's hot pot.

 Disconnect your electric or gas dryer from the wall outlet before proceeding.

 You should already know how to take the dryer apart up to this point.

 Get an extension cord and attach two insulated alligator clips like this.

 This way we can run the motor without having to use the belt switch.

 Connect the alligator clip from your test cord to terminals marked 5M and 4M on the

 To minimize the chance of electrical shock or injury, please don't touch the dryer after

 If you plug in the test cord and the motor runs okay, then you know the problem is not

 If you plug in the test cord and the motor hums like this, unplug it right away.

 If you plug in the test cord and the motor doesn't do anything, you have a bad motor.

 You're going to need a half inch extension bar to remove the blower.

 You will need to use an adjustable wrench to hold the motor shaft while you remove the

 Keep turning the blower wheel clockwise until it's off the motor shaft.

 Now all you have to do is grab the motor and take it right out.

 Don't forget to read the instructions that come with the new motor.

 Hit the top of the screw driver with the hammer until it snaps in place.

 Set the blower in place and turn it counterclockwise until it screws all the way into the motor

 Hold the motor shaft with the adjustable wrench and use the ratchet to tighten the blower.

 Reassemble the rest of the dryer and you're done replacing the motor.

 Then the next day I braise them for four hours, let them sit in the cool room.

 And then at the moment I'm just cutting them up to place in the oven to braise again in the oven.

 And I've just re-braised it for about a half an hour on a high heat around about 220.

 They're a little bit salty, but the mixture that I'm going to nappe on the top of it is actually a little bit sweet and very limey.

 It just really makes it, it turns a sour lime into a really bitter taste.

 Pak Chee Fung, which is long leaf coriander, tastes exactly like coriander, but it comes as in a long leaf.

 I just served with two slices of lime, just in case someone would like it more limey than the other person.

 The Cruiser 535 and 737 include everything you need to stroll, jog and cycle right in

 To use the strolling wheel, slide the shaft of the stroller caster into the opening on

 Make sure the stroller wheel goes all the way in and insert the pin through the hole

 To use the jogging attachment, you'll first need to attach the jogging arms.

 You'll know that they're in the correct position when the two dropouts are parallel to each

 Next, align the bolts on the jogging arm with the slot on the accessory bracket.

 Once the bolts are in, pivot the arm upwards until it's fully in the channel.

 Take the safety pin through the hole in the bracket and underneath the jogging arm and

 Align the quick release skewer on the jogging wheel and insert the wheel into the dropouts.

 Ensure that there's moderate pressure on the skewer and that it points back towards the

 To use the cycling arm, you'll first need to install the trailer hitch.

 Once you've done this, the hitch will stay with your bike for future use.

 To install the hitch onto your bike, you'll need to remove the rear quick release skewer

 Position the hitch pointed down and reinstall the quick release skewer.

 Align the bolts on the outside of the cycling arm with the slot at the back of the attachment

 With the bolts pushed all the way in, pivot the arm up as far as it will go into the channel.

 Use the safety pin to slide through the bracket and underneath the cycling arm.

 Be sure to clip the pin in place to ensure it doesn't fall out.

 Install the hitch coupling over the hitch and insert the safety pin through the hole

 Take the backup safety strap, wrap it around the chain stay of the bike and clip it onto

 Today we're gonna do something special, the TGI Friday's Jack Daniels Burger.

 Today we've got something special, so we need a bigger amount of buns and patties.

 You can see the single gloves and you cut off half an inch so you can see each.

 And then we put the head of garlic in it, drizzle some more olive oil over it.

 We put some heavy duty aluminium foil and then put this in the oven for around about 180 to 200 degrees Celsius or 325 degrees Fahrenheit I think for at least one hour.

 We begin with some olive oil and three tablespoons of finely chopped onions.

 I put the ingredients in the description bar so you can see what the single amount of each ingredient is.

 And the other ingredients we add are pineapple juice, water and really a lot of packed brown sugar.

 Then we bring this to a boil and let it simmer for at least 45 minutes.

 You can just get rid of the burned ends and then put these parts of the garlic into your sauce.

 The next thing we add here is around about three to four tablespoons of Jack Daniels.

 And then we let this cook and simmer for around about two or two and a half hours until it has reduced to one third.

 And then we let it cool down and then it gets more or less like a syrup.

 As I told you we had some guests on this evening so I needed a bigger amount of this Jack Daniels glaze.

 In this case I use the Monolith Kamado cooker with my cast iron grate.

 Give them a great color and then configure the grill to indirect heat with the deflector plate.

 And then we can start building our Jack Daniels interpretation copycat burger.

 We start with our bun and one teaspoon of the glaze on each side.

 If you want you can also give the buns a little color and toast them or grill them shortly on the grill.

 And then we add one slice of tomato, bacon and some red onions.

 Now this is our thank god it's Fridays Jack Daniels burger interpretation.

 The glaze with soya sauce, pineapple juice, teriyaki sauce is really cool.

 Hey there, today I'm going to teach you how to draw a cute cartoon teddy bear.

 So we're going to start in the middle of the face, in the nose area.

 So let's draw an oval and sort of squash downwards, just like so.

 From here I'm going to go up to the top left of that oval and draw a smaller one, just

 Okay, from here, let's go around the nose all the way down to the chin with a larger

 So starting at the top, I'm going to come around towards the bottom, let's go to the

 other side and we'll do the exact same thing and try to meet up with that line, just like

 And then from here, I'm going to start in the middle of the nose area and draw a line

 straight down and then I'm going to connect that with a big smile from left to right.

 So going across and going up on the right side, we'll finish that off in the middle

 So for the sides of the mouth, I'm just going to draw a little curve, just for a smile line.

 And then below that mouth, I'll just draw an upward curve, just to indicate the lower

 So in the eye area, I'm just going to keep a gap in between the eyes, just in the middle

 And then from the left eye here, I'm just going to draw a highlight on the top left

 And we'll go ahead and color that eye in black on both sides, just like so.

 And above the eyes, I'm just going to draw two little eyebrows that hook up like this

 Let's go up to the top of the head here and he's got some little pieces of hair that stick

 out, so I'm just going to draw three little curves, just like that.

 And then from this point here on the left, I'll curve down towards the ear and I'll do

 From here on the left, I'm going to draw sort of a partial circle.

 And inside these ears, I'm just going to draw a point, a dot near the base of that circle.

 And I'm just going to draw sort of a hoop that comes to a point at the bottom here and

 So on this side here, I'm just going to imagine this line coming down past that ear and continuing

 From here, I'm just going to make a wider circle and then join up with the bottom of

 So with the two hands that come in, I'm just going to have them holding a heart.

 So out here on the side of the face, I'm going to come down in a curve.

 I'm going to continue that curve around and come up and just kind of leave a gap here

 I'll just make sure that this hoop here, the hand is the same size as this side.

 Then inside the hand, I'm going to draw two sort of curves just like that on both sides.

 From here, I'm going to put a point in the center between the two hands just like so.

 From this side in the center, I'm going to curve around behind that hand there and I'll

 So I'll start up at the hand here and draw a straight line to that point.

 And then the bottom here, I'm just going to do an upward curve, just connecting those

 And from here on the left side, I'll curve out and on the bottom here, I'll curve out.

 I'm going to connect those two points with a very wide curve just like that.

 And I'll leave a gap on the top and bottom of this curve here and I'm just going to draw

 This will sort of look like an oval for the bottom of his feet.

 So a curve, curve, and I'm going to connect these with a wider curve.

 Getting into the bed of your pickup truck has always been a problem, especially if it's

 There's the tire step method, which is great unless you've got a lifted truck with big

 Then there's the bumper step, which causes a lot of stress on your knee.

 Then there's the tailgate method, which is just downright sloppy.

 Now, Ford has introduced a solution in the 2008 Super Duty and the 09 F-150 with the

 integrated tailgate step that flips down, allows you to easily get into the pickup truck,

 which is great unless you can't lower your tailgate, for example, when you're towing.

 To solve this problem, Amp Research introduced the bed step, which attaches to the frame

 Today on TruckBlogTV, I'm going to show you how to install one of these in six easy steps.

 For this installation, you're going to need safety goggles, a 17-millimeter socket, a

 socket wrench, an Allen wrench, and of course, an ice cold beer.

 Now, if you think you can get these nuts off with a simple socket wrench, think again.

 So grab a breaker bar and a 13, 16-inch socket and bust it loose.

 Next, install the upper mount onto the linkage using the required hardware.

 Now slide the upper mount over the factory studs using the stock nuts and then torque

 Install the step pad onto the linkage using the two provided screws.

 Next, adjust the foot pad side to side to allow for foot access.

 Just want enough clearance for the bumper and for your foot to get up there.

 And finally, here's a TruckBlog tip they don't mention in the manual.

 As you can see, the BedStep from AMP Research makes getting into the bed of your truck a

 For more information on AMP Research's products, go to amp-research.com.

 And please be sure to subscribe to our podcast on Apple iTunes.

 I'd like to go through with you on the first firing of the Wildcat 6000 pizza oven.

 Open up the top door, open your two side vents or smoking vents.

 Then, the aim is to light your fire, just a small fire, get some kindling.

 So with kindling, a bit of newspaper or even a couple of small fire starters.

 Get your fire going with the door open and it'll take a good half an hour, three-quarters

 What we want to do is use some kindling but also some red gum, a little bit of red gum

 The aim of doing this, we want to get to 200 degrees Celsius by this little thermometer.

 Now the reason for that is it's going to cure your paint, it's going to burn off any excess

 oil or welding and that sort of thing that we've had from the manufacturer of it.

 Now, one thing you've got to be careful of is when you build your fire, it starts, let's

 say the ambient temperature outside might be 20 degrees and we want to get to 200 to

 It goes along and then it builds up very quickly towards the end once all the thermal mass

 So it's very important that you retain that heat for about an hour or so, so allow yourself

 There's a fair bit in getting the amount of wood right, so it's practice makes perfect,

 but this is the first firing and it's very important for the curing of the paint in there.

 Sometimes I use this just in case the leather is a little bit too hard to make holes through.

 And I hope you guys like this video and you guys find this video helpful.

 So the first thing that I do is that I begin to make sure that I know where I am going

 And what I do is that I get my stud and they have like these prongs where you could just

 I get the jacket and I basically just wherever I want to stud it I press through it.

 It is kind of hard when you are doing this for the first time but as soon as you start

 And then what I do is that I turn it over and you can see it on the other side.

 In order for me to close the other one I just go ahead and without using my fingers

 Some parts of the leather are very thick like this part right here on the edges of the jacket.

 And what I have done is that I have as you can see I already started on these.

 Let's say that I want to instead of pushing through it I can go ahead and just press on

 I don't know if you guys can see this but it makes an impression of where I need to

 And I just use this to make a hole if it is too hard for me to just press through it.

 The only thing that I think that you guys need to watch out for is that whenever you

 are making the hole make sure it doesn't go all the way to the back.

 Because the farther down that it goes the bigger the hole will be and your studs will

 So you have to make sure that you only poke through as little as you can.

 Parts of the leather jacket also requires you to do some decorations.

 So this is my decoration that I am doing on the side of the leather jacket.

 I have these star studs that I am just putting along the jacket.

 The prongs are smaller than the studs that I am putting over here.

 I just push the stud through and you can just feel it through the other side.

 Put your hand on the other side of the leather jacket and you can feel the prongs on the

 And then again you just turn the jacket over and if you see that they are not all the way

 through then you can just go back and keep pressing it through until they go through

 So then like I did with the other ones I just bend them inwards.

 So that's it and then again I get my tool and then I just secure them.

 I just got a little bit creative because I didn't have enough money to buy all of these.

 So I found these as an alternative because I was just losing money.

 I bought over 2000 studs and I knew that there wasn't going to be enough to put them here

 And basically those steps I just told you, you just do them all over.

 I hope you guys found this video helpful and please like, comment, and subscribe.

 Hey everyone, it's Jen and Maria and welcome to Amateur Kitchen where we bring you into

 our kitchen and show you that you don't need to be a professional chef to cook or think

 And this is a dish we think you're going to love because it kind of has a spiciness and

 We're going to take a cup of water, we're going to add a little bit of salt, and we're

 And we're going to add a little bit of oregano because it kind of has a spiciness and tanginess

 So we're going to be using some springtime vegetables and fruits and it's always perfect

 to buy those vegetables and fruits at their peakness because it's better in taste and

 We're starting off by cooking 8 ounces of spaghetti in some salted water and then we're

 I'm just going to drizzle in some olive oil, some garlic, and we're just going to stir

 Our garlic has lightly browned and now I'm just going to add in some parsley and some

 And I'm also going to add in 1 teaspoon of dried oregano or you could use 1 tablespoon

 of fresh and then we're also going to add in about 1 eighth of a teaspoon or so of crushed

 red pepper flakes and depending on how hot you want it you could always add a little

 And Maria, if you can add in some anchovy paste for me, go ahead and just squeeze a

 About a teaspoon or so of this anchovy paste and this, if you're afraid of cooking with

 Once it cooks up it becomes kind of a nutty, salty flavor and I think you're really going

 That's right and we're just going to stir this and allow for it to cook for about 5

 And we're almost done with this pasta puttanesca and our springtime ingredient.

 That's right and it's about 3 quarters of a cup and we're just going to cook this for

 about 1 minute just until it kind of wilts and arugula is kind of like a spicy, leafy

 So we're just going to watch this and then toss in our spaghetti and that's it.

 So our spaghetti is finished cooking and we cooked it to an al dente.

 And a secret trick to thicken the sauce is use a couple tablespoons of the pasta water.

 My mom's putting in the pasta but before we try it, we're going to spread some Parmesan

 That's right because everything's better with Parmesan cheese, right?

 You can smell those capers and that arugula gives it a great color, right?

 That's fine because the sauce is kind of on there as well, okay?

 Whatever I can get my hands on, my fork on, I'm going to try it.

 The saltiness of those capers and the leafy green of our springtime pasta.

 Okay, well, we're going to finish eating this, but before we do, make sure you head to our

 website, amateurkitchen.tv, and subscribe to our YouTube channel.

 And before we do, make sure you head to our website, amateurkitchen.tv, to find this recipe

 And make sure you click that little shop tab because that's where they can buy stuff that

 we use, such as utensils and pots and pans and whatever else you may need in the kitchen,

 And click that like button at the top so you can follow us every day at Amateur Kitchen.

 We're going to finish this pasta puttanesca that features our spring leafy green arugula.

 First, if you're using the earhook, take the headset out of the base and then hold onto the speaker with your thumb,

 Now, if your headset has a latch, you're going to push on that latch and then tap the battery out.

 When you get the new battery, put it in, leads facing in, writing facing up, and then push it in.

 If you have trouble getting it to latch, just push on it upside down and on either side of the battery, and then it clicks in.

 Now, twist off the bottom of the base, unplug the power for about 10 to 15 seconds, and then go ahead and plug it back in.

 When you do plug it in, you should see all the lights flash three times, hold for three seconds, and then go back to flashing green.

 Now, to do the one with the headband, you take the headset out of the base and then remove the ear cushion, and that just pulls straight off of the speaker.

 Put your thumb over the speaker and hold on with two fingers behind and pull the headband towards you.

 So push with your thumb and pull the headband, and that pops the headband back off.

 Now, with this you're going to see a tiny little screw which holds down a plate which holds in the battery.

 You take a tiny Phillips head screwdriver, jeweler's screwdriver, eyeglass repair kit, and then unscrew the screw.

 Make sure you're well over a table because that little screw can go away real fast if you're not paying attention.

 Now, this plate needs to come out and the battery is pushing on it.

 Put the new battery back in, writing facing up, leads facing in.

 Now, this crescent-shaped plate has two little skids on it which match up to two little grooves right next to the battery.

 You're actually going to pop that in there, which is what it does, and then put it down.

 Come over here, grab the screw, put it to the end of the screwdriver, and then hold on to it with your finger.

 Now you can line it up to the hole, put it in, and screw it in.

 Now, when you put the headband back on, the pivot point on the headband matches up to the square hole right next to the speaker.

 Put those two together, and then take the ear cushion, pop it back on, and then put it in the base.

 Now, in order to sync this headset with the base after the battery replacement, you want to unplug the power from underneath the base.

 You're going to unplug it for about 10-15 seconds and then plug it back in.

 When you do plug it back in, you should see the lights flash three times, hold for three seconds, and then go back to flashing green.

 When you take the headset out of the base, you should get a link icon.

 Yo soy Leonardo Pereznieto y estoy muy contento de verte de nuevo.

 Si usamos una forma hidrodinámica, o debería decir hidrodinámica

 Los dolphins tienen un pequeño ojo que siempre parece que está sonriendo.

 bien y o correcto esto o tendré que cambiar el título del video.

 puedes producir este papel agarrando la punta contra un papel de sandía

 Por eso, como probablemente notaste, usé un pincel grande para limpiar

 Es una buena práctica ir más lento y luego oscurecer poco a poco

 En este punto reivindicamos algunas partes y oscurecemos algunas áreas.

 Puedes hacer el oscurizamiento con el pincel o con el cuchillo.

 Están vendidos en las tiendas de arte, pero si no tienes limpieza adhesiva,

 El luz caerá en las superficies que se enfrentan, obviamente, incluyendo el pincel.

 La lista de materiales está en la información de abajo del video.

 El pincel inferior debería ser más oscuro y lo maquillo con un pincel como se necesita.

 Si te gustó, por favor, dale un me gusta y suscríbete a este canal.

 Hey guys, just wanted to show you the unboxing of the Invicta Men's Coalition Forces Swiss

This watch came packaged in an eight slot dive case which is pretty nice on its

Definitely a nice waterproof case that can carry up to eight watches.

 to go ahead and open this up and give you a look at the watch itself.

 of course with the Invicta owner's manual, the five-year warranty.

The card that they throw in there, international warranty card, and just a few

 into the watch itself and there is I believe a tool in here that is used to turn these.

I don't think you can see that on the camera but that is a really

 all the Invicta watches it comes wrapped up in plastic which I haven't done yet.

 you this watch is very heavy and it's a very very good looking watch.

I can't open it right now because it's wrapped in plastic but let me tell

I also have here to give you a general idea of the size of this watch.

 I'm going to put this watch over the I mean put this coin over the watch and you can see that

 one of these coins you can just give yourself or if you happen to have one you can look at it and

 got an 8 watch diver case that you can take with you when you go on vacation to protect your

 you don't know and this video that I'm taking the inspiration from is the I'm So Sick video

 one over the other ones because this is the one where there's most obviously a makeup

The other ones she's either got very neutral makeup or just kind of black makeup

 very simple look so if you don't really like my simple looks then this might not be for

 finger and just apply it on the lid and a tiny bit underneath just to keep the shadow

It is quite a subtle look but I think it's really nice and I love

So take some on the brush and I'm just going to apply that on the lid, on this

 Just take a little bit of that and apply it underneath as well.

Now as you can see I have definition in the crease here which is what Lacey has.

Then take a tiny bit of the charcoal and just go over where you have applied the

Really simple, I think it's very Lacey, she's very keen on her grey, silvers and charcoal

 tiny bit of gloss, this is just MUA clear lip gloss, a tiny bit so take most of it off

There we go, it's really quite subtle, very very wearable, Lacey Moseley

You can take it a little bit darker if you want, I mean in the video, the video

 is very dark so her eyes look a lot darker and she has quite sunken eyes so they look

 Step number one, a good ready position with the racket head higher than the grip level

 So if you see my arm, I have an L shape in my arm and my racket like this.

 A common mistake you see on a lot of players, they wait down here or they wait like this.

 Now if a ball comes to their forehand and they're waiting like this, they're going to

 So first thing, good ready position, racket head higher than the grip level like this

 plus the non-hitting hand, this is your left hand if you're a right handed player, holding

 the throat of the racket like this, supporting your racket in the ready position.

 And step number two for having good volleys, when you're in that ready position, from here

 So the most common mistake on the volleys is taking the racket too far back.

 You see players waiting back here when they should be going forward to the contact point,

 it's the same on the backhand, they'll take the racket way behind their body where they

 should be just in front of their body and going forward to the contact point.

 If you watch the best doubles players in the world, these are the guys with the best volleys,

 these players keep their racket right in front of their body and the swing is minimal, the

 The only time you'll see them swinging with the racket is when they have a high ball and

 The rest of the time the racket is in front of their body and they're blocking the ball,

 So that's step number two, keep the swing as short as possible, go to the contact point

 Step number three to mastering your volleys, use your body weight for power.

 So instead of swinging with the racket, you're keeping the short swing but you're going forward

 So if you're a right handed player and you have a forehand volley, you're stepping with

 And the more power you want, the more aggressive you are with the step.

 If you want a lot of power, you're going forward with that step.

 If you're a right handed player and you're doing a backhand volley, it's your right leg

 Now if you're a left handed player, it's going to be your left leg on the backhand volley

 But for the right handers, left leg on the forehand volley, right leg on the backhand

 And use your body aggressively, don't be scared to go right through the volley as you're hitting

 So here's a quick recap, three steps to mastering your volleys.

 Step number one, a good ready position with your racket head higher than the grip level

 Step number two, keep the swing as short as possible and think about blocking the ball.

 Don't think about swinging with the racket, think about blocking the ball as if you were

 And step number three, using your body weight to generate power rather than the swing.

 And if you like this video, please click like below, leave a comment and if you want more

 help improving your volleys or any aspect of your tennis game, visit my website with

 Do you know what the most important part of the pitching delivery is?

 It's the beginning of the pitching delivery that makes all the difference in your pitching

 I think a lot of the times we get caught up trying to figure out what's going on out

 But in reality, if we wouldn't focus so much on the stuff out here and we came back to

 the beginning of the mechanics, we can find what's wrong and what's putting us into bad

 It's more of what's going on in the start of the pitching delivery.

 In my opinion, a good load is when you stagger your feet and when you come set, you kind

 of break those hips and lead with the butt, load those hips as you're coming down the

 Your upper body, you got to work on your hand separation as you start down that mountain

 because if you're breaking too early or you're breaking too late, which a lot of guys don't

 A lot of the times if you fix something up at the top, your load or your hand separation,

 you're going to fix all the other stuff that's going on out in front.

 If you found this video helpful, please subscribe and then join the free newsletter at YouGoProBaseball.com.

 If you're going to continue on and make Christ on the cross and hide it in the tree of the

 knowledge of good and evil for the teaching, what you'll want to do is not trim the gray

 balloon in the back or at the bottom because you'll need that to anchor it to some form of

 available in almost any church you're going to go to and works quite well.

 is move the arms of the cross up higher than I showed you to put it on the cross before so that

 the farthest piece of the cross on the top is a little shorter on this one.

 of brown balloon about the halfway point and pull it in on either side of the upper piece

 so that it's now both pieces are hanging out the back so that you can take that

 You don't have to tie it tightly, but you do have to tie it twice so that it will stay in place.

 I don't secure the bottom portion yet because I may want to move the Christ up or down depending

 on how the roots, trunk, and limbs of the tree will lay because you're wanting to try and hide

 Some of the things that you'll need for producing the Tree of the Knowledge of Good and Evil with

 sound like a Qualitex commercial, but I've used Qualitex because frankly I've not found a balloon

 that's as good plus the variety of color and readily available.

 In this video I'm going to answer one of our frequently asked questions.

 And we'll be doing this from time to time to help people figure out some of the issues

 This question that has come up once in a while is that people are having trouble removing

 their Z-Finder from the EVF flip, but also maybe from the snap as well.

 The issue is that the extender frame can be a little bit tight, at least for the very

 And people of course are afraid to break their EVF, which you probably can't do anyway, and

 What we're going to do about it though is we're going to pre-exercise these things before

 But if you already have one and you're using extender frames and it's on there tight and

 you're afraid to pull it off, just again if you break it we'll replace it for you so don't

 It's best to grab in the corner and grab in the corner of the Z-Finder and use as much

 When we do it again you'll see that it's much easier this time.

 So now that once you've done that it should be relatively easy to pull on and off.

 You don't want it too easy because you don't want the thing falling off.

 So the recommendation again is to grab in the corner and pull down.

 So if your flip is like this you want to pull in a downward direction.

 One other scenario if you have these really tight frames is that if you remove your Z-Finder

 Have a firm hold inside like this as good as you can and pull down and away.

 Grab really tight here, the hinge is on top, go from this corner and pull down and away

 Mine was a little easier than yours might be but use all the force you can, you won't

 Stippling is nothing more than using small little dots to create your areas of value.

 Right now I'm trying to randomly place each dot so that overall it looks fairly even.

 While I'm using a fine point marker for this demonstration so that you can see all the

 dots individually, typically you'll want to use something with a finer point, such as

 To make this third box even darker, I'm going to continue to add more dots to it.

 Fiberglass duct closure systems must meet the UL 181A standard, which is the standard

 UL 181A-P for pressure sensitive aluminum tape, UL 181A-H for heat activated aluminum

 tape, and UL 181A-M for fiberglass reinforced mastic closure systems.

 To be listed by UL and meet the UL 181A standard, fiberglass duct systems are put through a

 The closures are tested for things like adhesion, tensile strength, surface burning characteristics,

 temperature and pressure cycling, mold growth and humidity, to name a few.

 Tapes and mastics that carry the UL marking have passed the rigorous UL 181A test.

 Ducts fabricated without UL 181A closure materials will not meet the local building or mechanical

 The closure system for fibrous glass duct systems is one of the most critical parts

 The closure system seals the seams and joints and not only provides an air seal, but provides

 The use and proper application of the right closure materials can literally make or break

 The approved tapes and mastics are boldly marked for easy identification.

 Inspectors look for these closure systems and will shut down your job if the wrong closure

 We will demonstrate three different closure systems that conform to the UL 181 Class 1

 A pressure sensitive aluminum foil tape system, a heat activated foil tape system, and a mastic

 These closure systems have been tested and approved on systems operating up to plus or

 minus 2 inches water gauge static pressure and up to 5,000 feet per minute internal air

 The third approved method for closing a fiberglass duct system involves a mastic that is put

 on in a wet form along with a reinforcing mesh that is applied after the first coat

 The mastic and glass fabric closure method is used extensively because it bonds well

 Many times it is used for equipment where higher pressure duct work is used.

 In fact, for systems operating at 1 inch of water pressure or greater, NEMA recommends

 that you use mastic and glass fabric systems for all sheet metal connections.

 To close a duct using the mastic and glass fabric closure system, start with a duct that

 has been properly stapled at the seam and is a clean and dry surface.

 You will need a container of 181 AM mastic, a roll of glass fabric, and a paintbrush.

 To apply, first brush on a wide band of mastic that will cover the entire seam.

 Brush it out so that you have a relatively thin coat along the entire duct seam.

 Next, apply the reinforcing mesh or glass fabric, tacking down with your brush.

 When you get to the end of the joint, cut off the glass fabric from the roll and then

 come back and embed the fabric mesh into the mastic by brushing on another full coat of

 Since it takes a bit of time for this product to dry, you have to be careful how you handle

 You will need to experiment to make sure it is dry before a coat inspection.

 These mastics are water-based materials and must be protected from freezing, even during

 Duct systems fabricated from fiberglass duct board qualify under UL 181 as Class 1 air

 They also comply with all widely used building codes, if they have approved closure systems

 These closure systems have been tested and approved for systems operating up to plus

 or minus 2 inches water gauge static pressure and up to 5,000 feet per minute internal air

 And remember, the use and proper application of closure materials is what inspectors look

 They just have that really homemade taste, kind of like when you're making ice cream

 So what I really found that I like to do with this, Valentine's Day is coming up, so I put

 a little hint of strawberry flavor in there and a little touch of pink coloring, and it

 We're actually using the powdered gelatin that we're offering at Sweetwise now, and

 it comes in a really convenient size, and I use it so much in all of my pastries that

 it's really nice just to have that container instead of opening up those little packets.

 I found also that with little packets, just depending on what brand you're using, the

 amount that's in there can vary, and that's a little bit frustrating because sometimes

 your recipe turns out one way the first time and a different time the next time you do

 So the most important thing is to make sure that your vessel is ready to receive your

 So basically I just lined my pan, and you can do these an 8-inch pan, 9-inch pan, 10-inch

 If you want to cut these actually with a cookie cutter, maybe a little heart shape, then I

 would probably do it in a larger pan so that the marshmallows are a little bit thinner.

 These I want to kind of big and square and chunky, so I left them in an 8x8 pan, but

 And I just lined that with parchment paper and then sprinkled it pretty generously with

 So my vessel's ready for when they're done, and then I went ahead and laid out all of

 If you just go to SweetRice.com and look under recipes, you're going to find homemade marshmallows,

 And I'm going to show you just a little bit of a tweak that I did to make them strawberry.

 The recipe makes a lot of marshmallows, so go ahead and do the whole thing if you want.

 So I've got my one tablespoon of gelatin ready, and I'm going to go ahead so this can

 bloom and put this in a half a cup, I'm sorry, a quarter cup of water.

 You can see it's already starting to dissolve, and those little granules go ahead and start

 So I'm going to go ahead and get my fire going here, and I have a quarter cup of water in

 here, and then I'm going to add just a cup of granulated sugar to that.

 Now all I'm going to do is go ahead and get this stirred together, and I'm just going

 to put this on the fire long enough to let that sugar dissolve.

 Now that we're there, I'm going to go ahead and add my bloom gelatin just right into this

 If it happens that your gelatin had been sitting on your countertop for several minutes and

 it seems like it's too solid to pour in there, you can certainly just pop that in your microwave

 So all you're going to do once that gelatin mixture is in there is just bring this up

 You're not trying to get to a certain temperature like you're cooking sugar.

 It's just that you're going to bring it to a boil so that it's all combined and working.

 So we're going to stop right there and just go straight into our stand mixer.

 So for my half recipe, I've got an eighth of a teaspoon of salt.

 It calls for one teaspoon of vanilla for the half recipe, two teaspoons for the whole recipe.

 But my one teaspoon of vanilla, I split with a half a teaspoon of vanilla and a half a

 So just start it on low and then once it starts to cool off a little bit, you can take it

 up to like a medium high speed and then just let it whip for about ten minutes until it's

 Right before it's done, you're going to add just a drop of food coloring and get that

 It's not all the way done, but I want to go ahead and add a drop of my color so that it

 incorporates really well instead of waiting until the end and then it's too thick to add.

 So we're just going to put a drop of red in there to get a nice deep, deep pink color.

 And I'm going to go ahead and turn it back on and let it finish whipping.

 Now I'm kind of one that likes to get every little bit out of here, but if you do this

 just with your dry hands, it's going to be a little bit sticky.

 So of course I washed my hands first, but then I'm going to dip them in a little bit

 of water just to be able to pull this off because I don't like to waste it.

 Don't knock yourself out trying to scrape everything perfectly clean.

 This can become a gooey mess really, really quickly and can be frustrating.

 So I'm just going to take a spoon or spatula and just scoop this right into my prepared

 Again, not trying to get every single drop in there or it's going to be a complete mess,

 Your full batch is going to be nice and thick, but this one's going to be thin enough that

 I can use my cookie cutters and cut them into heart shapes later if I would like to.

 So you're just going to spread this out all the way to the corners, and then you're just

 going to let it rest for about four to six hours, and then it's going to be ready to

 If it sticks to your knife at all, you can just use a little bit of powdered sugar on

 You can see how springy they are, just like the marshmallows that you would buy in the

 store, but double yummy because they have that great strawberry flavor in them.

 And just because they're homemade, they're so much more delicious.

 Let's see, you put a little sucker stick in them, tie a pretty ribbon around it, and then

 dip just the end in chocolate with some sprinkles on there, and then you line them up on a plate

 I actually saw some of these similar in a kind of high-end grocery store, and it was

 It was like $4.99 for a little cube, and I was frankly just appalled.

 You can do any flavor that you want to, any color that you want to, any shape that you

 Go to the Sweet Ries website, look for the recipe, and have a lot of fun with it.

 Hi ladies, many of you are probably familiar with Instagram, the app that lets you create

 I love Instagram, so I thought, why not make a tribute with these Instagram nails.

 They're fun, easy, and best of all, you can Instagram them yourself when you're done.

 Start by applying your favorite base coat and then paint your nails one to two coats

 When your tan color is dry, use a striper and some dark brown nail polish to create

 Remember to rotate the nail you're working on and to hold the brush in place.

 Go over the line one more time if you need to, to make it darker and to make sure you

 Then, use a dotting tool and your dark brown nail polish to fill in the area above the

 I found it was easiest to use a dotting tool, but you could also use a striper or any other

 Now take a bigger dotting tool and create a large black circle in the center of your

 I'm making the rough outline of a circle first, and then I'll go in and perfect it.

 Next, take a white striper and create a straight line in the dark brown area of your nail,

 Now make another white line next to the first and fill it in with your striper.

 In a few short seconds, we're going to make this area rainbow colored, but in order for

 When your white is dry, use a red nail polish and a striper to create a small thin line

 It may look like I have a million stripers, but in reality, I'm using just one.

 In between each color, I clean off my brush with a cotton ball soaked in nail polish remover.

 In the other corner of your dark brown area, create a small black dot.

 Now take a white striper and create a small curved line on your large black dot to represent

 On your other nails, pick a different color and make four large dots, or however many

 of our dots that fit on your nail, going straight down the center.

 Now take a toothpick and create two rows of tiny little dots on one side of your big dot

 Then create one row of tiny dots on the other side of your big dot line.

 I know it sounds confusing, but I think it's easier just to watch.

 The colors I used on my remaining nails were blue, green, and yellow.

 And when everything is done and dry, apply your favorite top coat.

 It's important to use a big drop of top coat on that brush so that it doesn't smear the

 Last week I promised three of you that followed me on Instagram and Twitter and shared the

 And if you'd like another chance to be in my video, make sure to follow me on Instagram

 The good news is that all varieties of squash have slight differences in taste

 I am the produce lady and I'm here to give you some cooking tips

 The entire vegetable is meant to be eaten, the rind, flesh seeds

 about possibilities of delicious ways to use this healthy vegetable.

 Wash and thinly slice about four cups of any kind of green or yellow squash

 I am the produce lady and you can find healthy nutritious recipes on this

 Hi, I'm going to show you how to do a ruck back carry with a ring sling.

This is the longest one I've got so I can just squeeze it out of this one.

 You're just measuring that so you need to put this bit here on the back of baby.

 So you need to make her a seat, make sure you keep hold of that so it doesn't fling back.

 So I'm going to pull it down and make her a seat, tuck it up between me and baby.

 So through both hoops, and then he's going back through the second one.

 So it would be better with a longer one, but I can just do that with that.

 out there who have commented to me in the past saying that it's amazing to find an Irish

 YouTuber or you haven't come across other Irish YouTubers before.

 that you may or may not have come across before but it'll be really good to just check them

 all out and see what we're doing here in Ireland in regards to the YouTube community.

 I'm doing of course a dry skin foundation routine and then Melanie will be dealing with

 powder contouring and another person dealing with cream contouring and we also have lips

So hopefully this will cover the entire face for all of you guys.

 just keep watching to see how I did my dry skin routine for a natural dewy finish.

You want something nice and light that will easily absorb into skin.

 that done you need to think about your moisturiser and please use an SPF in your moisturiser

 because also dry skin tends to be on the sensitive side because when your skin is very dry the

 every day and it's a really nice lightweight cream moisturiser.

 A great one if you have no SPF in your moisturiser would be something like this by Isadora.

 in it I went with MAC's Strobe Cream which is an emollient illuminating cream that works

 beautifully as a primer for anyone with normal combination or dry skins and really does help

And of course then it's really important to go for a foundation that

 which is perfect for dry skin and it gives a nice medium coverage.

 way to apply it is with a flat top kabuki brush or a flat top buffer brush.

 a lot of dry skin or flaky skin that's quite obvious looking on the surface, don't do buffing

 motions and then you can also drag the brush down so that you're not raising any of those

 exfoliated enough that it's just not sitting on top of your skin, go ahead and buff the

 which is a fairly heavy duty concealer and with a small little brush, this is the L29

 from Blank Canvas Cosmetics, I'm literally going to very precisely apply concealer over

 my blemishes and just let it sit for a second so it really grabs onto the skin.

 lightly bounce my finger over the top to melt it into the rest of the skin.

 leave this area above my orbital bone free of any foundation and I only apply concealer

And I'm going in with the Maybelline Fit Me Concealer which is a hydrating fluid

 concealer and lightly pack that using either a brush or my ring finger to pat it in place.

 Then to highlight I'm going to use my MAC Cream Colour Base in Pearl which is a lovely

 emollient highlighter cream and I'm going to lightly bounce that, again using my fingers,

 I just find this is the best way to apply it without disturbing the rest of the foundation.

 Lightly along the very top of my cheekbones, a little bit along my cupid's bow, you can

 also apply a little bit between your eyes, just along the bridge of your nose.

 bring it down further along the bridge of your nose if you want but my honker's big

 contour the odd time with a cream product as well, this is Illamasqua Hollow Pigment.

 I'm going to pick that up with any old brush, it doesn't really matter.

I'm also going to apply a little bit just along my hairline and my temples

 and lightly, very very lightly allow the bristles to blend out that contour.

 too much pressure on the brush, I'm just letting the very top of the brush and the bristles

And then once I've finished my contouring and my highlighting I go in

 a little bit on the drier side because it does contain natural oils that will help condition

I'm not going to powder my forehead because it is my driest area so I'm going

 to powder lightly just around the nose and just bounce the brush in place.

 forgot to apply my blusher but this is a cream blusher by Bourjois in number 4 and I'm just

 going to lightly pick that up again with my fingers, I haven't applied too much powder

 the cheeks because I want that just to look more natural and more skin like and then you

 totally finished I like to spritz it with either a vitamin spray or a thermal water

Just lightly spritz it over the entire face and this will just help take down any

 of the powdery look on your face and also hydrate your skin so it's great to keep this

 in your handbag throughout the day and spritz as needed because it is a great way to hydrate

So I hope this was helpful guys and that you've picked up some tips to

Make sure you check out the other 7 girls in this collaboration,

 I will list all of their videos below with the links along with what they are covering

I upload about 3 times a week, generally 4 depending on how busy I am and if you did

 enjoy this video make sure you give it a thumbs up because that definitely helped me

So thanks a million for watching guys and I'll see you all in my next video.

 So basically I'm trying to do, um, focusing on the standing leg.

 You'd want your knees to go in opposite directions so that it opens up your hips,

 and then you want all of your power and pivot to be on your standing leg.

 Um, the thing that's so nasty about the Thai kick is that it's so whippy, it's like swinging a bat, basically,

 because the secret, and it's actually kind of really hard to do,

 is that the leg you're actually kicking with does not matter at all.

 So what I've been working on right here is just basically moving that standing leg, um, as the pivot point to come through.

 So, basically this leg, the leg that I'm kicking with is kind of limp.

 Um, a lot of times you'll see this, like, Frong kick, where it just kind of comes straight up like this.

 Which is kind of, I don't know, that's probably a kick by itself.

 But what I'm focusing on is kind of coming down like this, and the reason it's doing that is because this one is turning.

 So in order to get my hip up, the leg is going to come up, and then because I'm following through, it's going to crash through like that.

 So basically if my leg didn't get in the way of hitting this thing, I'd be turning like that.

 So you want to turn all the way around, and like, basically hop.

 So it would be without, if my leg were not getting interrupted by the bag, I would be turning all the way around like this.

 But I'm trying to get airborne on the standing leg, because that's where the standing leg is really the focus.

 So it's weird, because I'm actually not exerting a lot of effort at all.

 Today we're going to take the stereo out of a 2003 Volkswagen New Beetle.

 The tools needed are going to be the slotted din removal tools.

 Recognize at the end of these tools they have an angle on both ends.

 We're going to use the angle to the outside in the slot on the right side of the radio.

 You can hear it click in when it finally reaches the point where it's going to pull the radio

 You grasp the back edges of the tools and wiggle the radio right out of the dash.

 Now you want to pull this radio out to get access to the back of the radio.

 Now to release the connectors on here, the first set you squeeze in at both sides and

 For the second connector, you push the trigger in on the side and this releases this connector.

 There's a little trigger on the side here that needs to be released and the power will

 Volkswagen stereos normally have codes with them so before you disconnect the radio, be

 For the Volkswagen antenna removal, you pull this little trigger off which releases the

 lock for holding it in place and then the antenna removes right off.

 Hi guys, I'm back with a new tutorial using the artist palette.

 This time I decided to go with the pink purple look and I did the pink that transitions to

 The base that I'm going to be using is Painterly Paint Pot by MAC and I'm applying it with

 I'm using buttery that comes in the artist palette and I'm applying it with the Luxie

 I'm applying it on the crease and a little bit above the crease.

 I'm applying it with the Luxie 227 brush and this is going to be my transition color.

 With the MAC 228 brush and the color Punkfusia, I'm going to tap this on the beginning of

 I'm going to try to keep this color from the half to the inner part of my eye and I'm tapping

 Now I'm going to apply Unicorn from the middle to the outer part of my eye with the same

 The only thing that I flipped it over to use the other side and then once I come where

 Punkfusia was, I'm tapping in the middle so it could blend out those two colors together.

 Now with the clean Luxie 235 brush, I'm just blending out on the crease to avoid any harsh

 With the Luxie 231 brush and Blue Velvet, I'm applying this on the corner of my eye.

 I'm using House of Lashes Iconic and my gel liner is Black Track Fluidline by MAC.

 Now for my lower lash line, I'm applying Unicorn with the MAC 252 and I'm just blending this

 With the clean Luxie 235 brush, I'm just blending out Unicorn that way it doesn't look too harsh.

 And then with MAC 212 and Blue Velvet, I'm going to apply this really close to the lash

 I mixed Orange You Fancy and Beige Lee but I didn't add it to the video clip since it

 But in case for those that can notice it, that's what I mixed to do the tear duct.

 I really hope you guys like this look and I'll see you guys very soon on my next tutorial.

 Hello, my name is Bailey and today we'll be making shrimp and scallop shish kebabs.

 A few ingredients we'll be using is the Worcestershire sauce, some garlic powder, some butter, some

 Make sure you devein the shrimp and peel the shrimp and if they're frozen, keep them in

 Also we'll be using these sticks, I like to call them Irish Spears!

 You put them in the water overnight so they don't burn on the grill while you're cooking

 Now first we're going to make the marination sauce and first you're going to put in a half

 Then we're going to put in 7 tablespoons of lemon juice, freshly squeezed.

 And then we're going to put about 2 dashes of garlic salt, you know, if you like more

 Once you mix it, you're going to put it in the microwave for about, until the butter

 Take about 1 third of the mix and set it aside for basing for the shish kabobs on the grill.

 Then you're going to put the scallops and the shrimp in a sealable bag so that they

 So you're just going to lift them all and put them in there and when you marinate them

 After about an hour you take them out of the fridge and then it's time to Irish spear them.

 And then you're going to alternate the shrimp and the scallops.

 Now you want to make sure that you don't put them too close together.

 Because if you put them too close together they don't cook all the way around.

 Now the reason we put lemon wedges on them is that when they're done cooking you're going to stand them up on the grill while they're hot.

 And then you're going to squeeze the lemon wedge so that the juice runs down the whole steak.

 And today I'm going to show you how to make my freaky witch's fingers, which are little

 So first of all, I have non-dairy margarine I'm using today instead of butter, so this

 That makes this recipe completely non-dairy so they can enjoy it as well.

 It's always good to have options on your menu for people with special needs foods.

 So first I'm going to add the sugar, which is one cup of icing sugar, otherwise known

 Go ahead and thoroughly cream that together before I add the other ingredients.

 Okay once you get all the sugar incorporated into the margarine, just like this, then you

 And get that mixed in really well before you add in your other flavorings.

 Once you have the margarine and the sugar and the egg pretty well combined, go ahead

 You can use artificial if you really need to, but it's better to use the real stuff.

 So that's one teaspoon of almond flavoring, one teaspoon of vanilla as well.

 Once that's thoroughly mixed together, go ahead and add your salt.

 Mix that in all the way before you add your flour, which is the final ingredient and the

 You want to make sure all your flavoring is well mixed through the mixture before you

 Go ahead and dump it all in there and it'll take a while to combine.

 Go ahead and carefully do this, otherwise you'll have the mess of flour all over yourself

 You'll notice that now that all the flour has been mixed together, it's still pretty

 And if you actually reach in and try and form a cookie, it's going to be really, really

 So this needs to stay in the fridge for about 30 minutes at the very minimum.

 It's often easiest for me to go ahead and mix up the dough one evening, leave it in

 the fridge overnight in an airtight plastic container, and then make the cookies the next

 You need it really firm and chilled to be able to form the finger shapes out of it.

 Since I'm only going to leave it half an hour, I don't need to worry about covering it.

 So I'm going to go ahead and put it in the air, and then we'll come back in about half

 Now that our dough has chilled for a full half hour, or overnight if you want to wait

 that long, we can see that it's nice and still crumbly, but it will hold together now when

 It's actually a really good almond shortbread texture is exactly what this dough is.

 There's no leavening, like baking powder or baking soda at all.

 So the shape that you make when you put it on the cookie sheet should be the shape that

 The thing you want to be careful about is you don't want to have giant fingers, unless

 That's fine if you want to, but you won't get as many cookies out of your batch.

 I can usually get a good about, I think, five to seven dozen fingers out of one batch of

 Just take a glob of dough, which is good enough, mix it together so it holds together and it's

 Then you kind of, don't roll it because you'll work the dough too much, but you kind of just

 squish it with your fingers into two knuckles on a long sausage-like finger.

 I usually have the base of the finger a little fatter and the top where the nail is going

 I usually make mine a little smaller than that, so I get more cookies.

 The other thing you'll notice is since these will not spread at all because they will keep

 their shape, you can go ahead and cram a lot on the cookie sheet.

 Obviously closer, they might actually stick together, which would be good.

 And usually I wait until the whole entire cookie sheet is full before I slice the knuckles

 or add the almond fingernails, but I'm going to show you how with just four here.

 You can use a whole almond, which is kind of like a brown painted fingernail.

 You can use that and just go ahead and press that in like that.

 You might want to have the nail bed come back around the nail like that.

 You can also use sliced almonds instead, which you can see that gives you a completely different effect.

 You have the edge, the brown of the almond still around the edge of the slice,

 which kind of makes it look like a dirty or cracked old fingernail.

 Completely different look, so it depends on your mood and what you like the best.

 I'm going to put another one of this so you can see the difference.

 Now, what really makes them look like fingers as well is taking a little paring knife,

 it doesn't need to be that sharp, and you go ahead and add the knuckle wrinkles.

 And as I said, it's something that I'm fashioning, you can get going on this pretty quick for a whole pan of cookies.

 and it will puff up just enough that it actually looks like wrinkles on your knuckle.

 So I'm going to go ahead and finish this tray so I can get this in the oven

 This is such a requested video, which is crazy to me because I'm like so not a hair person

 This is literally all I do to my hair and you'll see that it's pretty simple and easy

 And honestly if you guys caught me walking down the street, my hair would probably be

 You can use anything you have at home, any straightener you have.

 Ok I'm going to start off by using one of these little clippies.

 So take a section about this big and I'm just going to twist it.

 And it doesn't matter if they look perfect because the whole idea is that we want it

 And notice that I'm turning my straightener away from my face when I curl it.

 Ok and now that section is done and I don't like to run my fingers through it yet.

 I like to really let them set and cool down before I do that so I wait until the very

 And right about now you should start to look weird and that's normal.

 Ok so now I'm on my last layer and since I part my hair to the side, this part is going

 So what I do is I just kind of split this in half, throw it onto the other side and

 My hair is so thick you can hear it being caught in the straightener.

 I'm going to slowly start to rough it up and as I'm doing that I'm kind of running

 Ok so if you have hairspray, especially if you have straight hair or thin hair, you want

 I have really thick hair and it's naturally wavy so it will stay curly.

 I'm going to put some of this in the roots because I hate this clean feeling.

 So I kind of go in and pull back some hair, give it a little sprinkle and then I kind

 Then I'm going to take one of my favorite texturizers and this is by Bumble and Bumble

 Comment, like, subscribe, all that jazz down below and I'll see you next time.

 If you need one of these, maybe you should have one of these instead.

 Because the beta carotene in carrots can actually help improve your vision, especially at night.

 Carrots can also help protect against macular degeneration, cardiovascular disease, and

 Carrots are the vegetable highest in carotenoids, those red, orange, and yellow pigments that

 Your body converts the carotenoids in carrots to vitamin A. That's what helps your eyesight

 In addition to containing natural antioxidants, they're an excellent source of vitamins B and

 To make this easy, I'm using a pizza crust from the grocery store and salad bar vegetables

 from the grocery store, which when fresh in a bowl like this, what you do is plunk

 into a saute pan and get extra flavor out of them so that they'll concentrate on the

 You preheat the oven to 425 and with this beautiful olive relish and a double tomato,

 sun-dried tomato, and tomato paste base, and smush together, and then smush on the pizza.

 Smush, gorgeous vegetables, and my favorite, smoky mozzarella cheese right on top with

 a few herbs to boot, and you bake for 10 minutes and you'll have a perfect pizza even kids

 Dentso's Glass Outer Wrap is a protective fiberglass wrap that is a cloth impregnated fiberglass with a water activated resin

 that is used as a high impact protective outer wrap over Dentso Petrolatum tapes.

 Prepare surface by removing all loose scale, rust or other foreign matter in accordance to SSPC SP2

 Afterwards, wipe down the pipe area with a clean rag to remove any fine particles that may have settled while cleaning.

 Apply a thin uniform coat of paste or paste S-105 should be used for any surfaces that have excessive moisture or frost to them.

 Begin by wrapping the Petrolatum tape twice over in the first wrap and continue along the pipe with a 55% overlap.

 Make sure to apply sufficient tension when wrapping to provide continuous adhesion but not to stretch the tape.

 When the roll runs out, make sure the new roll starts out 55% on top of the existing wrap.

 Continue wrapping with the 55% overlap until the job is completed.

 Open the glass outer wrap sealed pouch and place the glass outer wrap within a bucket of water for 30 seconds to activate the hardening resin.

 Begin by wrapping the glass outer wrap twice over in the first wrap and continue along the pipe with a 55% overlap.

 After applying the glass outer wrap, you can apply poly wrap over the glass outer wrap to help smooth it out.

 Begin by wrapping twice over in the first wrap and continue along the pipe with a 55% overlap.

 Make sure to apply sufficient tension when wrapping to provide continuous adhesion but not to tear the poly wrap.

 Once you finish wrapping, you may tear off the end of the poly wrap to remove it from the roll and then adhere it to the end of the wrap.

 Allow 10 minutes of cure time for the glass outer wrap before removing the poly wrap.

 This makeup tutorial is going to be of Hannah Marin from Pretty Little Liars

 and you guys really really liked it so I decided that I was going to do Hannah

 Hannah's face always looks glowing and natural and beautiful so I'm going to start with my

 I now want to give my skin some coverage so I'm going to use my MAC Face and Body in C2

I've also done my eyebrows, I've done them a bit lighter than usual

 she keeps her eyeshadow really basic, she keeps a light colour on the lid

 to warm that colour up a little bit I'm going to run a bit of texture from MAC

 the source of most of Hannah's makeup intensity is in her eyeliner

 and then following that I'm going to go in with a dark brown pencil eyeliner

 and I'm going to smudge that into my eyelashes, blending it in with the black a little bit

 and then going to line my top lash line with the same dark brown eyeliner

 I'm going to blend a mixture of a matte black and a matte brown

 now I'm going to put a bit of my Rimmel Medium Matte Bronzing Powder

 to the back of my cheekbones, not a crazy amount but just to give my face

 any light pink colour with a little bit of shimmer in it to give your skin a bit of a glow

 I'm going to use this one from Benefit called Who Are You Wearing

 if you did enjoy it then make sure you give this video a thumbs up

 are down below to my Facebook, my Instagram and my Twitter page

 I hope you have a really really lovely day and I'll see you in my next video

 Hi my beautiful people, I'm here with my natural makeup routine but it is very unconventional.

 I simply wash my face with Dove Gentle Exfoliating Soap and then I apply Shea Moisture Argan

 I like to start by exfoliating and following up with the moisturizing lip balm first because

 by the time I put my lipstick on my lips are nice and moisturized.

 Next I start brushing at my eyebrows in order to make sure that they're in a perfect shape.

 And then I just fill it in with my CoverGirl Brow and Eye Maker in Midnight Black.

 My brows have a mind of their own sometimes so in order for them to maintain their shape

 Wet Gloss Brow Mascara just to make sure that there are no hairs getting out of place.

 Natural Makeup Palette and I'm just applying it as a triangle to the outer crease of my

 I'm just putting it in the inner crease and then right above the lash line.

 I just apply it to the inner corner of my eye and then just on the other side of my

 Using my ring finger to smooth out that sharp contrast between the two colors.

 Yeah, this eyeliner sucks because it doesn't get black enough for me.

 Okay, so my little technique here, brushing the mascara along my eyelashes kind of just

 creates build up and puts more product on your eyelashes so that they appear thicker.

 I use my Elf bronzing brush to apply it to the hollow areas of my cheekbones.

 Then I apply the Coral Blush from the set to the apples of my cheeks brushing outward

 Finishing off with lips, I'm applying the Elf Matte Lipstick in the Tea Rose color.

 I have to admit, I'm not a really big fan of pink and this lip color is really pink.

 But I just apply my L'Oreal Infallible Lip Gloss in Dulce de Leche color and it tones

 Leave a comment below and let me know what new beauty or style video you'd like to see

 Hey guys it's me and I'm back with another video today and today is going to be a kind

 of a DIY slash tutorial so I'm going to be showing you guys how I make my sock buns.

 My donut, you know the donut shaped bun you can't really see the hole in the middle but

 So if you guys want to know how to make these just stay tuned and continue to watch this

 Ok first guys what you're going to need is just two things for this.

 This is a really simple tutorial you're just going to need a pair of scissors and you're

 going to need some long socks that you don't use and or mind cutting up.

 I would recommend that you use a color that's close to your skin tone, I mean your skin

 So I'm guessing if you have like brunette hair brown would work and if you have like

 But you can use, you can use for any, you can use black for any color hair but I just

 think that sometimes like if you're doing the sock bun and maybe your hair doesn't cover

 the bun all the way it won't be as noticeable if it's closer to the color of your hair.

 So first what you're going to do is you're going to take this long sock right and this

 is where it opens up and it's your toe and what you're going to do is you're going to

 So you're just going to take your scissors and cut the toe out of your sock.

 So you can use as many socks as you want if you have less hair and so you need a smaller

 I have a little one, I have a big one and right now the one that I'm going to make is

 In my tutorial there's only two socks in that one so it just depends.

 What you're going to do is you're going to take it and you're going to fold it out and

 So you're going to take it like this, fold it out and just keep rolling, keep rolling,

 keep rolling, keep rolling right and then you're going to start to see the forming of

 I had a bunch of old volleyball socks and I didn't really care about these because I

 was still using the black socks but now I'm not using the black socks anymore so usually

 I'll start with this but you can put this in the middle because it's a navy blue color.

 So what you do now is you go ahead and you put the sock, you put kind of your bun like

 this on the inside of it and then you just start rolling like you were doing it before.

 So like here you see how it's kind of a little messed up just even it out like this.

 And so now that you've kind of seen the technique I'm going to go ahead and fold one more sock

 in there and then I'll show you guys and I'll probably fast forward this part and then I'll

 Okay and so the more socks that you get that you use kind of like the harder it can be

 to roll because you just want to make sure you have it in a nice shape and it's going

 This is just with me adding like one more sock so it's like this thick and this big.

 So obviously if you want it bigger like wider just go ahead and add another sock.

 And also you can so that it's not this thick what you would do is I'll show you on this

 But you would like your rolls like when I was doing my rolls I started them like this

 thick but if you don't want them to be super thick by the time you get done then you just

 And that's how you're going to get a flatter bun because the more you got to think the

 more socks you get on there the bulkier it's going to get and then it'll be like really

 You can be so creative with these it's so easy you guys it's so easy to make.

 So I thought I would share this tutorial with you guys because I know that a lot of people

 wanted to know how I made the sock that I used the sock bun that I used in my tutorial.

 So I'll link the tutorial if you guys want to see how to use the sock bun I will link

 And yeah so I hope that this you guys understood this and I hope that you guys like this video

 Make sure that you comment and like and subscribe and let me know in the description below what

 2 tsp of oil, some salt, 1 tsp of lime juice, finely chopped red onion, some green peas

 that is handful, 1 chopped tomato, 2 tsp of grated coconut, some cashews, 3 dry chilli,

 1 cup of grated carrot, whole garam masala, cloves, cinnamon, bay leaves, some chopped

 coriander leaves, crushed ginger and garlic that is 1 tsp and chopped green chillies.

 First of all I am going to grind these 4 ingredients that is tomato, grated coconut,

 dry chilli and cashews, everything grinded together make a fine paste.

 This is our grinded paste of coconut, dry chilli, tomato and cashews.

 Then I am going to add our chopped onion, saute it nicely until it gets slightly brown

 In between we will add our crushed ginger garlic and green chillies also.

 Saute it nicely until you know the raw smell of ginger and garlic.

 If you want more spicy you can add some more green chillies also because we already add

 Stir this mixture continuously until remove the raw smell of coconut and tomato.

 Once the raw smell of coconut is removed then we will add our cooked rice.

 Now I am going to add our carrot mixture into this cooked rice.

 Look at here our spicy and colorful carrot peas pulao is ready to eat now.

 You can serve this pulao with any kind of raita, egg thokku or chicken gravy like this.

 Today we are going to show you how to change the detergent dispenser on your dishwasher,

 All we are going to need is a Phillips screwdriver and a pair of needle nose pliers.

 Now before we begin this repair, the first thing we will need to do is to disconnect

 the power to the dishwasher, so locate the proper fuse or circuit breaker and disconnect

 Next we will open the dishwasher door and then we will remove the two lower screws that

 You may need to support that panel as you remove the screws, and then we will just tilt

 that door back into a closed position, we will let the panel drop down, remove it and

 Now our next step will be to remove the wires from the terminals on the wax motor on the

 Just grasp the end of the terminals and pull them straight off.

 Next we will remove the six Phillips screws around the perimeter.

 Now we will carefully open the door again, and then we will push the old dispenser through

 to the inside and we will remove and discard the old dispenser.

 Now when installing the new one, we will want to make sure that we keep that wax motor on

 the left hand side, so just position it through the opening and we will very carefully install

 Take caution not to over tighten these screws, there is a gasket around the perimeter of

 that dispenser that will seal tightly against the inner door panel, but we don't want to

 The bottom left hand screw has a retainer for the wire harness, so we will reconnect

 the wires, make sure the terminals are on nice and tight, loop that excess wire through

 that retainer, and now we are ready to put the outer door panel back on.

 There are two slotted openings on either side that will engage these hooks on the inner

 door panel, so we will just hold that into place and tuck it up underneath the control

 And hold it in place while we open the door, check the operation of the detergent cup,

 I told you it was an easy job, thanks for watching and good luck with your repair.

 This is the day after Thanksgiving and this is what I have left over of my turkey.

 And what I'm going to do to store this, I don't want to waste it and I know my family

 I'm going to put this in the pressure canner and I'm going to can it up so I can use it

 Okay, and I'll be back after I get this all cut up and ready to go in my jars.

 My husband had smoked this on the grill for about three hours and he also had done some

 And all I'm doing is just scooping up my meat and I'm trying to get in at least about two

 And then what I'm going to do is I'm going to go ahead and just take regular tap water

 because this meat is cooked, it's not going to make juices and this is just regular tap

 I'm going to pour that in there until it gets to about right to the bottom of the rim.

 I will take my plastic doohickey thing here, I don't know what you call it, but it came

 And I'm just going to go ahead and get all of the air bubbles out.

 And then I will go ahead, I'm going to put in a half a teaspoon of canning salt.

 And then I will go ahead and put my lids on, which are now in the water right now,

 Over here in my pressure canner, I have my water already in here.

 Check your pressure canner and see what you have to have in it.

 But you don't want to fill it all the way up with water, you just want to fill it up

 And I will be back as soon as I get ready to put my jars inside.

 We're back and I have seven pints of turkey, leftover Thanksgiving turkey, in my canner.

 I didn't show you that because there's tons of videos on how to put your rims on and your

 I'm going to wait until I have steam coming out of this little nozzle right here.

 And when I get a steady stream of steam for ten minutes, I will go ahead and put this

 You need to call your extension office or look up online to see what pounds of pressure

 And once I reach 11 pounds of pressure, I'm going to can this for 75 minutes per pint.

 And I believe it's 90 for quarts, but please look that up because I'm not quite sure on

 And I will come back to you after it is all done and it's all cooled off and I will show

 Okay, it's about two hours since I have gotten my pressure canner going.

 And I'm going to go ahead and remove the weight and I'm going to open it up.

 And you're going to want to open it up, put the cover this way away from you so that way

 You can start to see, if my son can get in there and show you, there's actual bubbles.

 And as it starts to cool, we're going to start hearing the lids pop.

 We're going to leave this sitting out here on the counter for 24 hours.

 And once the lids are sealed, I will remove the rims and very carefully wash the outside

 of it with just a little soapy water and rinse it off and put them on the shelf.

 So right now, instead of throwing out your leftovers or throwing them in the freezer,

 taking a chance of getting them in the freezer or that you forget they're in there, just

 And another really quick tip, I bought two turkeys this Thanksgiving.

 And maybe about a couple of months, I might take it out and just bake it off in the oven

 and tear it apart and can up that bird too because, you know, the price is right and

 In this episode we're going to make a very easy and delicious berry cobbler.

You can use raspberries, strawberries, blueberries, whatever you have, whatever is in season.

 The first thing you do is put a stick of butter in your 8x8 baking dish and you're going to melt that.

 Now if you are on a cholesterol or fat sensitive diet, I cut it in half on purpose so you can use a half a stick of butter and create this recipe.

 We're going to heat this in the oven at 350 degrees until the butter melts.

 And while that's melting we're going to go ahead and get started on our berries.

These little small flats together, two of them is a pint, but you can usually find a pint.

 And we're going to add sugar, vanilla, and we're going to let the sugar dissolve.

 And then we'll be ready to make our batter and put it in the oven.

And I know it looks like it will take a long time, but in less than 5 minutes, probably less than that, all of this sugar will dissolve and it will be ready to be added back into the butter.

 And I want to show you in real time so you're not scared to do this.

 You can also, if you are in a hurry, just set it to the side or you can even heat it up on the stove.

 But you don't want to bite into any sugar so I stir it until all the sugar is dissolved.

 Now we're just going to set this to the side while we prepare to make the rest of our omelette.

 And we're just going to stir it up until most of the lumps disappear.

 We're going to take our batter and pour it right into the center of the butter.

 We put the berries into the batter and the batter into the butter.

 Because sometimes it can bubble over the side and you don't want that smoky smell in your house.

 Not under this pan but on a lower level, on a lower rack in the oven.

 This recipe and tons of other ones can be found on our website joyofsoulfood.com.

 So if you go to our website you're going to find Berry Cobbler and lots of other great recipes like this.

 This video will show you how to install chrome door handles on a 2010 to 2012 Chevy Equinox and GMC Terrain.

 Also you would use the same method for the 2008 to 2012 Chevy Malibu's.

Just to note, all four door handles do come in one box under this part number.

You can get them online through any parts website for about $110 to $120.

 Just to note, you can search the internet with this part number to find the best price for you.

 I found mine on an auction website and found a really great deal and I was able to get them.

 You do actually get instructions with these handles which I thought was pretty unique for GM to do that since it is very rare.

 You will need a T25 Torx screwdriver and optional is a flat plastic tool or plastic credit card.

 The card is not mandatory but you will see some options in the video.

 The first thing you will need to do is roll down your window just in case you shut the door on accident during installation so that you will still be able to open the door.

In order to do so, you just need to remove this little plastic plug.

 Or you can use a plastic tool or plastic credit card and you can just slide right under it and it will pop right off.

 I covered mine with tape just in case I don't want to scratch the door here.

 You can get a better idea if you look at the chrome piece where the bolt goes into.

 When you are loosening the bolt, you can hold the cap until it is free.

 To release the grab handle, we are going to pull it back towards the rear of the Equinox.

 Just showing you in this view where the door handle points pop into place in the internal housing.

 Once you have the handle in, we basically just need to pull it back all the way.

 So where it is sitting flat, you will feel it touching the internal parts.

 Once you feel that it is flat against the door and all the way back, you basically just want to push forward and you will hear it pop.

 Once the first pop happens, it has grabbed the first point so it should be able to slide back and forth.

 Now you want to go ahead and finish pushing all the way forward.

 You can make sure it is snapped in the proper place by just pulling on the grab handle.

We just slightly need to lift the grab handle to insert this cap into place.

 Once you have the cap into place, just hold one hand on the cap and the other on the torque screwdriver.

 Since I am just showing you one side, I figured I would show you the back as well.

 You will see the torx bolt a little bit more far back than the front.

 Go ahead and just remove the cap, same as you did in the front.

 Go ahead and just pop the cap off the gasket if it gets stuck on there.

 Once the handle is off, you will be able to clean the area as well.

 Just like the front, you will want one hand on the cap once in place.

 The other hand tightening the bolt so you can feel that it is tightening correctly.

 I'm going to show you guys how to change the wheel speed sensor on your BMW e46 now

 And you can see that I have the ASC light and the ABS light on and this means that one of these speed sensors

 of the front either the left one or the right one are broken damaged or

 Simply need cleaning if you also have this light on the handbrake light on it means that one of your rear

 Wheel sensors is either damaged or needs cleaning as well, so in this video.

I'm going to show you guys how to replace the front wheel sensor

 but if you're feeling lazy enough all you need to do is tilt the

 Wheel either to the left or to the right depending on which wheel you're replacing the sensor

 I will be popping off the wheel you know in order to get more room to work with and to get the job properly done

 Also this took me about one hour, but it can take you 15 minutes.

 Popping off the wheel and I will be placing it under the car for safety measures

 There it is the speedo sensor now these things may be stuck, and you'll be using an allen key to take it out I

 To grab hold of the allen key and I remember kids lefty loosey righty tighty

 Here to just pop this thing off I will be using a screwdriver, but use this gently

 This speedo sensor or ABS sensor and wire is actually attached to the axis of the car and

 It is fairly easy to figure out where to detach this thing from the body of the car and from the axis

 the plug is then inside this box right here, and all you need to do is press this clip and

 This is the new speed sensor ABS sensor which I will be installing now

 But it gets the job done and it works, and it's it's fairly cheap, so I say give it a try

 Now the plug like I said isn't as good as the original so it will not fit all the way through

 I mean a lot of pressure and eventually it will work as you can see the clip is not fully on

 Unfortunately by this time my phone ran out of battery, so I do not have the footage of me screwing that

 That's how you screw a screw in the end just use pliers to make sure this thing is tight and snug

 But as you can see I no longer have the error and you do not have to clear the error from the ECU all you

 Have to do if you still have the lights on after replacing the sensor.

 Today, we are at Feel Unique, where I'll be showing you how to get the perfect graphic

 eye and showing you my secret to getting the best flicks for your eyes.

 I've also used a very, very light neutral contour just here under the cheekbones.

 Nothing too much, but just enough to give definition to Verity's face.

 My tip is to use the pencil on an angle rather than using it directly on.

 To make sure the eyes are going to stay in place, I'm going to use a primer for the eyes.

 And I'm just using a fluffy brush to pick this up and then just wash that over the eyes.

 This is going to help keep any oiliness on the lids at bay and help keep my liner and

 So just using a very light technique there just to wash that over the eyes, going up

 So next I'm going to wash a little bit of a matte beige eye shadow over the eyelids.

 So just go into the inner corner and then up to the socket here.

 So adding this is going to, again, add a little bit more light to the eyes to open up that

 And it's acting like a highlighter where I'm just sweeping it into the inner corner of

 And I'm just going to pop a little bit of the same color underneath the eye.

 I'm going to get a Kohl pencil and I'm actually going to line it up from the outside of the

 Now I then pull my pencil downwards and then create a little line just here on the outer

 So this helps you to get the same angle for the flicks on both eyes.

 So now that I've got the perfect angle for both eyes, I'm going to go in first with a

 So I'm going to start from the outside and I'm going to draw a line to just past halfway

 Use the whole length of the pencil just to draw a line straight down just over two-thirds

 Just to get a nice smooth surface on the eyelid, I'm pulling the skin on the temples

 And I'm going almost with the grain of the eye so you'll find that when you stretch the

 eye and you pull your pencil along, you'll find that the skin moves in one direction.

 What you don't want to do is go completely against that because that's when you start

 Now that I've got the basic flick with a Kohl pencil, I'm going to go over the top with

 So you can use a liquid liner of your choice depending on what you prefer.

 I'm using a liner plume which has got a nice sharp point on it.

 So I'm just again resting my pen on the eyelid and then just going over the top of what we've

 And for this, I'm using classic Kipnos mascara for a custom wear finish to the lash.

 So I'm starting on the outside outer corner of the lashes and I'm using the wand to pick

 up all of the lashes from the roots and just really wriggle and stretch that through to

 And then when you get into the tips of the lashes, just push backwards.

 So I'm just touching the wand onto the top rather than wriggling them through.

 As the wand for this is very small, it makes it a lot easier for you to do the lower lashes

 But you can see in contrast, the top lashes have still got volume.

 So I'm just going to start the lips and prep with the eye primer that I used previously.

 So just on a fluffy brush, I'm just going to very gently blend that over the lips, going

 Then I'm going to take a little bit of the translucent powder and then just run that

 So not actually onto the lips, but again just to help seal that primer and make sure that

 The best way to make sure your red lip stays in place is to use a lip pencil underneath.

 I'm going to start in the middle of the bottom lip and I fill the lip in as I go.

 I'm splitting the bottom lip into three sections, so the center first, then the outer edges.

 So I'm just using the side of the pencil and then just teasing out the lip line itself.

 The secret to getting a long-lasting bold lip color is to work in layers.

 So do make sure you completely fill in the lips with the lip pencil.

 Then when you add the lipstick over the top, blot and then add a little bit more and blot

 Then to do the Cupid's bow, just do the little V shape in the middle first and then just

 If you find that you're not very confident with doing the lip line and you can't balance

 very well with the pencil, if you're using a big mirror on a dressing table, just rest

 So you should find that that will give you a little bit more of a steady base.

 Then now I'm just going to finish into the corners of the lips.

 Once you've filled in the lips with the pencil, next I'm going to use the lipstick.

 So I'm using the Rouge in Love lipstick in shade 170N, which is a little bit more of

 I would always say to go for a lipstick rather than a gloss if you want the red lip, just

 purely because of the fact that it's going to last you a lot longer and you can build

 Hey everyone, it's Claire from Stylelise and today I'm going to be doing a movie on basic exotic short hair.

 Because he has a flat face, he doesn't have as good drainage as other cats.

 To clean the gunk, you're going to need a paper towel and some room temperature water.

 Some cats are skirmier than others and cats that like to use their claws, I recommend wrapping them in a towel.

 So some move their head, but just try your best to get in there and gently use the soft towel to get that gunk off.

 Now your exotic short hair will feel better with a nice clean face.

 Exotic short hair, just because they're called short hair, doesn't mean that they don't need brushing.

 We have the Whisker City Furminator Brush and it works really well for your cat's fur.

 Some cats will enjoy being brushed, but some will try to get away.

 And usually you can get the loose hairs and all the things that would shed off your cat's hair.

 I'm going to do a really quick video for you guys about speaker phase.

 I get a lot of emails about this and I'm going to show you guys the really expensive technical

 piece of equipment that you need to test speaker phase or to test a speaker.

 A 9-volt battery, just even a cheap Ray-Vac, the cheapest you can get will test the speaker.

 And all you have to do is either direction, because we're not talking about phase just

 yet, just stick the tabs of the battery onto the tabs of the speaker and you'll hear it.

 If you're hearing that pop with relatively little to no static in between when you touch

 the battery to the tabs and between then and when you take it off.

 If you don't hear a lot of static in between then, there's a really good chance that that

 It doesn't matter what size speaker, you can do it with a 4-inch, 5-inch speaker.

 Now I get a lot of soundmen and PA engineers that email me and ask me how do I phase my

 And I've already got, for the sake of this video, something set up to make this quick

 All this is is an input jack that I've got wired to these two speakers.

 So it's the equivalent of touching the battery directly to the speaker terminals anyway.

 And if you watch closely, if you watch this speaker, you'll see it pop up out of the speaker

 Now if you watch closely, you'll see it suck down into the speaker frame.

 Now I'm simply controlling that, whether it's going up or down, by flipping the polarity

 If I flip the polarity of the battery around, it goes the other direction, down.

 Now, Jamie, if you'll cruise back a little bit and see both speakers in the video, when

 I touch the battery to the input, you'll see one speaker goes one direction and this speaker

 Now these two speakers are out of phase and that's how you tell.

 You just take a 9-volt battery, stick it on the end of a speaker cable if you don't have

 access to input tabs like that, and you just hook a 9-volt battery up to it.

 And if they're not traveling in the same direction, you need to investigate, something is wired

 backwards incorrectly and all you have to do, if you'll notice, I'm just going to take

 Flip the wire around and when we flip it back over and hook the battery back up to it, you'll

 see that they will both move in the same direction no matter whether I have the battery polarity

 flipped negative or positive because we just corrected the phase of this pair of speakers.

 Flip the polarity of the battery, both speakers are moving in a positive phase, or outward.

 This is called the X-Maxx or excursion, the distance the speaker travels in the frame.

 And that is testing a speaker and speaker phasing in a nutshell.

 If you like this video, please rate it, please click on the yellow button at the top right

 If you have any questions, please reply with a comment or a video response.

 Welcome to Eurorite Cabinets, Western Canada's largest cabinet manufacturer.

 over 5,000 sheets of melamine and veneer board on hand at any given time.

 has three saws that cut through 8,000 sheets of board per month.

 Once the board is cut, it is stacked according to job number and transported

 edge banding machine where it is edge banded and then each piece is cut to the

 right length, then trimmed, then buffed for a clean smooth edge.

 once in one gable at a time, then stacks the board ready for the next step.

 This drill follows a computer program to drill a specific pattern in some of the

 This machine, called the skipper, can do two gables at one time by working both

 Base gables are then sent to this machine to be notched for the superior

 The completed cabinet parts are again stacked according to order and then sent

 wood species cabinet doors are kept on hand at any time to keep up with the

 then ran through this sanding machine to open up the pores to allow better

 exactly where the doors are on the belt to prevent any extra overspray.

 then head down an infrared heat tunnel that dries the doors, then they go in for

 head down the final heat tunnel and come out the end of the line stained and

 onto this machine where they are drilled and then glued and have the dowels

 Fully assembled cabinets are produced much like in the automotive industry and

 each stage of assembly and then are quality inspected and wrapped for

The ready to assemble cabinets are loaded into boxes by hand in the

 most space efficient manner and packed with foam to ensure there's no movement

 The instructions are added to the box, the box is sealed and sent over to the

 distribution center to be sent out to one of over 600 dealers across North

 Hi, I'm Chef Mike with Service Foods Gourmet Kitchen and Grill.

 Hand dad this forage page and remote because we're taking over the grill.

 Today we're going to take care of dad with some grilled lamb chops with pomegranate wine

 We're going to start by preheating our grill on medium to medium high for about 10 minutes.

 In the meantime, we'll brush both sides of our lamb chops with our olive oil and season

 We're going to spray the hot grates with some cooking spray to keep them from sticking.

 We're going to use 1 cup of pomegranate juice on our side burner.

 The best way to tell when your chops are done is to use an instant read meat thermometer.

 We're looking for 130 degrees internal temperature for a nice medium rare.

 Let's set them aside on a clean plate to rest while we finish our sauce.

 Dad loves our asparagus, so let's pop some of these on the grill too.

 If you don't have a lemon zester, take your knife and take a thin shaving of the lemon

 Then we'll simply come in and do some rolling pivot cuts to make a julienne and cut cross

 We'll simmer this for about 3 or 4 more minutes until it's nice and thick, about the consistency

 And for dessert, we're going to treat Dad to some Bravo Gelato Limoncello Sorbet with

 half a calories of ice cream with intense flavors and smooth texture.

 Today we're going to target larger blue cats using larger baits, of course.

 We'll be drift fishing, but it's actually going to be a controlled drift.

 We're going to locate key specific areas that the larger cats like to hide in, such as the

 It comes down to about 25, 26 foot of water, and then drops in to about 38, 42 foot of

 And we want to control our drift right on that break line, and that's where the big

 They'll try to eat this big bait, 9 times out of 10 they'll just pull it off.

 But the larger blue cats are going to travel that corridor, I guess, or that ledge, looking

 What I like to do is just cut about a quarter of the body off the head, and we're going

 Now if we was in current, heavy current, I'd be hooking that hook through this lip.

 But since we're in slow current today, I'm going to hook it in the back, just through

 That will just eliminate a double hook rig that you would normally need with a big piece

 And what I like to do is reel up until the tip of my pole touches the water, and set

 Now if you look at the tip of the rod, I'm about 5 foot from the tip of the rod down

 We're going to run down through here and see if we can't get a big blue.

 Guys you put the bigger baits on when you're drifting and you get the bigger fish.

 If I seem to be squinting it's because I'm not wearing glasses.

 It's Friday night and I really don't feel like cooking so I'm going to throw together

 This is definitely not for the slim waistline, it is pasta and instead of butter I'm going

 So what you're going to need is, I have some spaghetti noodles cooking here, I have about

 a quarter cup of diced onion, two cloves of minced garlic, I have about two cups of this

 It is an organic blend of baby kale, baby spinach and baby chard.

 So that's going to be our green and you're going to need some heavy cream, I'm going

 And you can use butter but I'm going to use a knob of my chicken fat because A, it saves

 Okay, our pasta is cooked al dente which means just slightly under soft.

 We're going to strain it and while that drains we're going to turn our burner down.

 We're going to take a knob of our chicken fat and we're going to start off with putting

 I actually have some leftover noodles in there, let me bring you guys a little bit closer

 Now I'm going to pop in the onions and garlic to saute a little bit in that chicken fat.

 I almost forgot in the ingredients, I'm going to use some parmesan cheese just to top it.

 You don't want to really cook your onions and garlic, you just want to lightly saute

 Now we're going to top it with about, I don't know, a quarter cup of whipping cream or a

 We're just going to kind of coat the pasta with the cream and the onions and the garlic

 It does not take much, it would be the same as putting in a knob of butter.

 We don't want them really really cooked because they're baby greens, they're young, they're

 And now we're going to take our parmesan cheese and we're just going to grate some fresh parmigiano

 One of the wonderful things about being Canadian or North American is we have so many cultures

 I'm just going to pop a lid on there and turn the heat off and just let it's own heat melt

 A little bit more parmigiano and we'll get Papa over here for a taste test.

 Might as well just hand him the pepper, he's going to do it anyway.

Volpe from our half acre homestead saying, you know what, be creative

 Hello everyone, this week I'm going to talk to you all and give an instructional on how

 They feel like it's something you can only let a professional do.

 But the truth is that it's a talent that can be learned just like everything else that

 I get all of my products from Sally Beauty Supply and I only use Gigi wax products.

 And it's not because they gave them to me or they sponsored me.

 To start your Brazilian waxing, the first thing you're going to need is a wax heater.

 I recommend the one with temperature control, especially for those of you who have never

 Temperature control is one of the most important factors in having a good wax.

 Next thing you're actually going to need some wax to heat up in your wax heater.

 Now most places you go to to get a Brazilian wax, you'll use soft wax, sugar waxes, there's

 And if you go to Sally Beauty, you'll also notice that there are a million different

 I definitely recommend the Brazilian Body Hard Wax because it's a wax that's good for

 Now Brazilian Body Hard Wax is a stripless wax, meaning you do not need to use a strip

 But a beginner, it's really hard to understand how to use stripless wax.

 I use these natural muslin strips by Gigi and they are only about $12, maybe less for

 And it's a whole lot of them, they're really really long and they last you a really long

 I typically cut these in about 3 quarters of a strip when I use them.

 I definitely recommend the angled one because it's easier for application.

 The last thing you'll need is some type of oil to prevent your skin from coming off.

 But what you want to do is you want to make sure that your skin is slick and smooth.

 It has Organic Moroccan Argan Oil, Sweet Almond Oil, Grape Seed Oil, and Avocado Oil.

 So it's really good for your skin and it's also pretty inexpensive, especially if you

 You also might need a mirror to see in the hard to reach areas.

 So the first thing you're going to do when you're waxing is you're going to need to heat

 It's going to take about 30 minutes to get your hard wax completely soft.

 Once you see that the wax has completely melted and is completely liquefied, you want to turn

 When you turn the temperature setting to off, it's going to start to cool down.

 This is good because you want the wax to apply hard and thick and you also want the wax to

 cool very fast so that you can rip the strips off and get the hair off in the fastest way

 To allow the wax to melt faster, you want to start to stir it up.

 When preparing the wax for application, you're going to get a really big glob of wax on the

 stick, rub it off the back side and twirl it to get the excess wax on the stick.

 Apply a thick, long strip of wax on the hair in the direction of hair growth.

 Get the wax strip on top, rub down for three seconds and then rip off in the opposite direction

 You'll notice here that because I did not apply one thick piece of wax, some of the

 If you do that, apply your muslin strip again, push down and rip off.

 I hope that this tutorial on how to do Brazilian wax was helpful to you all.

 I definitely recommend that you take precautions when doing a Brazilian wax on your own because

 If you do not take all of the necessary steps to be safe and to be clean.

 I also recommend that those of you who have never received a Brazilian wax before, please

 go to a professional and get it done until you're comfortable doing it at the professional

 If you have any questions on Brazilian waxing, go ahead and ask.

 I may follow this up with a video on the benefits of Brazilian waxing as opposed to shaving.

 I hope to see you all again next week on Ooh La La Holly with more DIY fashion, health,

So today I'm going to teach you guys how to make one of my favorites,

 so I thought you guys could follow along and see how it's made.

 can take the beards out if you feel particularly picky about that.

 thoroughly washed to make sure all of the little dirt that clings onto the surface of

And definitely keep that into mind when you're shopping for your mussels.

 I don't really have a lot of veggies in here, to make it really pretty I don't want to cut

I actually want them in longer strips and they'll hold up a little

 it, the better it is because the more surface area you have for your ginger, the better

 get a bite in your mouth, it's not going to be overpowering at all.

 want this to be, you might add a whole one or you might take the seeds out.

 want a whole jalapeno plus a seeded jalapeno so that I don't have to have too much heat

 one and this is going to be my whole one, which I'll just slice like that.

 need a little bit because most of this is going to get steamed.

 settle to the bottom and you can turn the stove on to high and let it go.

 realize in Chinese cuisine a lot of times ginger and scallion are used together in seafood

 or fish dishes because it really cuts into the fishiness of the seafood.

 of a boil here so I'm just going to toss it to make sure the mussels heat evenly.

 And as the mussels open up some of that liquid is going to come out and you're going to get

Now you want to put a lid on this so that it can continue steaming.

 lid open all the steam's just going to come right out and it's going to be really hard

 for the mussels to get cooked with that thin layer of oil at the bottom.

Overcooked it's going to get really, really tough and leathery in your mouth and

 in at the very, very end so it doesn't get really withered and ugly looking.

 you can save for the next day when you're done with the mussels.

 I've been like all over Pinterest trying to find really cute and easy DIYs.

 Decor thing for Easter or decor item for Easter and then two yummy treats

 Okay, so I'm gonna start off with the yarn Easter eggs and for this you will need

 Okay, so we're gonna start off by mixing in the flour and liquid starch together and just let you guys know I made mine

 Homemade there are a ton of recipes online and it's super easy.

So once this is all mixed and you're just gonna pour it into a disposable bowl

 Okay, so we have a both of those all mixed and we're gonna take our thread and kind of like wrap it around

 You wanna be careful that the yarn doesn't get tangled because then when you go ahead I find your balloon it will get tangled as well

 So you want to let your yarn sit in there for a couple minutes just to soak it all in and then we are ready to

 And you also just want to move your balloon around so the yarn gets all over it

 And I kind of like to hold it over the bowl for like a minute or two just to let all the excess strip off

 So I did a couple of balloons and I just like laid them out flat to dry

 So I actually took some kebab sticks and stick it through like part of the balloon and hung that over my sink

 So this is what they look like and I'm just gonna keep them there for a couple of hours

I would suggest letting them dry for 24 hours and now we're gonna pop the balloon

 Okay, so now you have this really cute like yarn Easter eggs and there's so many different ways you can decorate with these like

 I'm gonna probably decorate mine all in like an Easter basket or you can make a

 Wreath out of them or you could just like just hide them all over your house

 So now for the food DIYs, which I'm most excited about because I'm really hungry now

 But the first I'm gonna show you are these really cute like a bunny butt cookies

 So you will need a pack of sugar cookie mix and whatever ingredients that it needs on the back

So the first thing you want to do is just make the cookies like mix all the stuff together

 You're gonna go ahead and place it out on a cookie sheet, but you don't want to do them all one size

 I'm gonna do four bigger ones for like the bunny body and eight little tiny ones for the bunny feet

 I've been letting them cool but not gonna lie when they first came out.

 So I actually used two different sizes of circular containers to get them more better like circular shape

 So the last thing you're gonna do is just take the little cookies and place them on the bigger ones

 Those are act as the feet and then you're gonna get some chocolate chips and just put them

 Then you're just going to add a mini marshmallow for the tail and that is it aren't they are really cute

 Okay, so now I'm going to show you guys the final tree which are these really cute like birds nest and for that you're going

 Not gonna lie all of my like measuring cups are dirty from like the other day wise

 I'm going to break up pretzels put them in here and then mix one of my mouth of chocolate

 Three fourths of the way, so just you know however many pencils you need to do that

 And I'm gonna go ahead and melt my cup of chocolate like 30 minute 30 minute 30 second interval

 So you know put it in stir it up and keep putting it until it's fully melted

 I think I'm gonna be needing more because it just doesn't look that much balance

 I'm really tempted to just take this bowl of chocolate and pretzels and go eat it myself, but I'm not gonna do that

 Okay, so now you're just going to take a tablespoon of the chocolate and put it in each muffin cup thingy and just stir it around

 I'm gonna go ahead and melt like another couple handfuls of chocolate chips

 So I am at Don bring chocolate in all of the little cups with the pretzels

 I remember to make like a little indent in each of them for the eggs

 And then you're gonna go ahead and put this in the fridge for about 30 minutes to let it harden

 I think they're just really cute and really easy like you only need three things so that is it for this video

 Please give it a big thumbs up if you're excited for Easter or you just love a DIYs like I do

 Cuz personally I love this one because it involved a lot of food

 Anyways, please subscribe to my channel if you are new I make new videos every week and let me know what you guys are doing

 For Easter or if you like make any of these treats then let me know tag me on Instagram or Twitter

 And yeah, I hope you guys have a great day, and I'll see you my next video.

 Today I'm going to be showing you how to winterize a swimming pool.

 How to lower the water, the appropriate level and where to put the water.

 How to blow out the lines to get them clear of water to prevent freeze damage.

 How to drain your filter system to prevent above ground freeze damage.

 We'll wrap up with special considerations for wintertime maintenance.

 And then how to install your winter cover, depending on the type of cover you have.

 Not every pool is the same, so the tools we use today may not cover every situation at

 If you have any doubts about what tools to use or how to properly use them, contact a

 The tools that we'll be using today are vacuum hoses that we'll be attaching to electric

 I also have a gas pump, if necessary, to lower the water along with the appropriate suction

 We have our pool cover, our cover grommets and our winterization plugs.

 An electric drill with a properly sized Allen wrench will save you time and effort when

 Basic hand tools such as needle nose pliers, channel locks, flathead and Phillips head

 screwdrivers, an air compressor with appropriate hoses and fittings to tie into our plumbing

 system and then chemicals such as chlorine, algaecide and antifreeze.

 When winterizing a swimming pool, there are a few simple basic safety considerations to

 Make sure that your equipment is in properly working order and that your cords are plugged

 Understand the effects of compressed air and know when you are releasing pressure what

 We're mixing gas, water, electricity and flame all in one place.

 No two pools are built exactly the same and the steps and processes that we specifically

 Using air to clean and clear lines, using chemicals to treat water and shutting your

 As for my background and experience, I'm the president and co-founder of Potomac Pool Service

 I've been working in and around swimming pools for the last 17 years and we built the pool

So we're going to start by adding our salt and I'm using very fine salt

 I think you know why, it's just a replacement of what the yeast would do.

 to add a whole lot, we don't want it to be like a kind of cake biscuit kind of thing,

 a mix and remember all the ingredients are listed in the description box or on my website.

 So after we've given that a stir, we're just going, well I just shook it just to make sure

 do this but you can totally do it with a bowl and a wooden spoon.

And then I'm adding a tad bit of water just so it comes together

 wondering why I add sugar but it's because the sugar and the salt, if you mix them two

 together then it will make your bread actually balance out and I think it actually adds a

It doesn't make it necessarily sweet, it's still savoury but it just adds

 just want to mix it until it looks like this and then slowly, gradually add in your oil.

 So then you're going to, then I just did this because I thought the mixer wasn't doing that

 good of a job and I just used my hands to turn it into a ball and then I put the mixer

 to do and that basically means that your dough is becoming smoother, so smooth that it's

 just going to start cleaning all the bits that were stuck onto the bowl and yes, so

 that's perfect and it should be elastic and stretchy like this.

 for watching this video recipe and I'll see you guys in the next video.

 So in the bass, to start with, you've got C, F, G. Those are your bass notes.

A, G. Now here's interesting, because there the bass kicks off a G7 chord.

 D, F, F, E, D, C, E, G, F, A, G. There's La Bamba, the introduction.

 the melody goes to F, F, F, F, F. Now you're just going to have two notes in the bass.

 A C and a G. So I'll play them simultaneously with the right hand melody.

 E, C, C, C, C, D. When you go to the D in the melody, you're going to hit a G in the

B, D, F, E, D. When you hit that E, you're going to go back to the C. E, C,

 C, C, C, D, B, D, F, E, D, E, C. C, C, C, D, B, D, F, E, D, E, C. F, F, F, F, F, F,

 F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, D, B, D, F, E, D, E, C. Sometimes

 C, C, C. D, B, D, F, E, D, E, C. G, D, F, E, D, F, E, D, E, C, C, C, C, C. D, B, D,

 B, D, F, E, E, C, A, G. Now I always play these both hands because it just sounds like

 A, B, C, A, B, G. D, C, D, D, C, A, B, C, D, D, C, C, C, C. And then you just go up

 they end the piece they go C, E, G, F, A, G. C, E, G, F, A, G. G, B, D, F, F, E, D,

 C. E, G, F, A, G. G, B, D, F, F, E, D, C. E, G, F, A, G. G, B, D, F, F, E, D, C. Don't

 think you have that little chord at the end there but you got G, B, D, F, F, E, D, C.

 E, G, F, A, G. And it ends on a C. There you have it, La Bamba, a slow version of La Bamba.

 And I have all those letters printed out so that you can see them.

 bass notes, C, F, and G. And then during the regular verse of the piece you've got C and

 of this video is to make sure that you can play it with the single bass note.

 want the chords they're on the other video that I have up about La Bamba but it goes

 I'm going to go through it without talking this time and you can just watch.

 I've got the right hand by itself, hands together, bass progression, letternoteplayer.com.

 If there's another piece, maybe another oldie that you want me to do the notes for, drop

 This just so happens to be my second video in a row about garments, but never fear, this

 I am still dedicated to all things DIY, learning how to make things yourself in order to save

 I will be sharing more power tools and paint brushes in upcoming videos, but this video

 is about making your own Halloween costume because tis the season.

 I want to show you how to make a last minute original costume without breaking the bank,

 burning a lot of time shopping and sewing, and most importantly, without showing off

 So then you think, I'll just wear that thing I got on my trip abroad because while I was

 there I thought I came all this way, I should buy something cultural.

 It's going to be original and it's going to come from a character that means something

 I'm going to go all out and I'm going to knock their socks off.

 For just twenty bucks you can assemble a decent dress from the Salvation Army, a tube

 of fabric paint, a bobble head band, and in just two afternoons we can make a ladybug.

 Of course if you get the dress second hand, wash and dry it first, but no fabric softener

 or dryer sheets because they can prevent the paint from adhering to the fabric.

 This keeps the paint from seeping through the fabric and sticking to the other side.

 Use cups to map out where to put the dots before making any marks.

 The paint kind of comes out thicker than we need so use a brush to lightly spread it around.

 It needs about four hours to dry so we'll do the back of the dress tomorrow.

 It's the next day and the front part of the costume is very dry and we can get started

 You can very easily make a bee by painting yellow stripes on a black dress.

 But the thing about the insect costumes is that you very often times need to wear wings.

 And that's just one more thing you have to buy and then store and throw away.

 And if you've seen any of my other videos you know that I don't like to just throw things

 I actually prefer to make things out of what other people throw away, like this dress.

 So I'm going to paint the wings on the back of the dress, or rather the round shell that

 And what I did was take string and tape it into the form of a shell.

 I'm going to mark around it with pen and then I'm going to use my cups and paint dots within

 No question as to what you're dressed up as and no private parts roaming free.

 A very special thank you to Jennifer Lee Stockton of Jenny and the Defects for letting me use

 You can check out all of their songs at JennyAndTheDefects.BandCamp.com and I'll put a quick link in the description

 Check in every month for more DIY videos and be sure to subscribe to my channel below.

 For these delicious wraps, go ahead and heat 2-3 tbsp of oil in a pan

 add in some Italian seasoning, Mexican seasoning, whatever you like

 and top it up with little bit of cilantro for that fresh flavor

 they're going to sleep longer and they'll forget what has to be done.

 She did it with an English Bulldog with a cleft palate and a hair lift.

 So I'm not going to put too much air into the pup's belly right now

 Now, the idea is to take it out so it doesn't flow back into the lung.

 I did, but because you told me goat's milk, we went to the store to buy goat's milk.

 Hello everyone please welcome and join me Indian and Punjabi style cooking

 best of all easy steps cooking I'm going to bring you today mouth-watering

 tilapia fish bake in the oven I'm going to cook it in my oven I'm going to cook

 it I'm going to use a bake at 450 and it's going to cook into 10 to 15 minutes

 I'm going to see after 10 minutes I'm going to turn it on one time 15 minute

 perfect cooking and I'm going to show you I'm going to share with you how

 beautiful my pieces look that's a nice cut out boneless skinless tilapia and I

 always use when it comes to cooking you know I love to cook these fish into egg

 but most of people don't like egg so I'm going to cook without the egg so there is

 always an easy step as a substitute when you don't have those things egg does

 promoting in cooking in a sense when you put a seasoning it covers it it's like

 work like adhesive it coats better and your seasoning stays there now since

 we're not going to use egg I'm going to use olive oil which also does the

 promote as for the cooking and helps the seasoning to stick together so what I'm

 going to be doing as for my seasoning I have my seasoning ready all-purpose

 flour I put black pepper I made my own seasoning with some salt and then on top

 of that I as a flavor wise I use all-purpose seasoning which has a lemon

 flavor in there what I'm going to do I will show you I'm going to put olive oil

 on my fish and what I'm going to do I'm going to coat these once I'm going to

 coat these I'm going to turn around and I'm going to coat it on the other side

 as well once I coat it on the other side also one more thing it's very important

 that when I'm going to use my fish on the pan and I'm going to cook in the

 oven it's important that I'm going to put oil on my pan as well also so the

 pan is coated with the oil any oil is preferably fine as long as you coated it

 what it does that your fish don't stick to your pan because the seasoning

 itself gets sticky to the pan when you're gonna turn around then it will

 break the pieces so that helps part and I'm going to come back and I'm going to

 share with you let me put together this so as for seasoning I spread it on a big

 plate so you just put it down like this you don't have to press it or anything

 you know no nothing hard pressing you just make sure since these pieces are

 different kind so just make sure that it's all set and if you can grab it you

 can put it like this and is the extra whatever the seasoning is gonna fall off

 anyway so once it's done see how beautiful it's already looking so now

 I'm going to place them into my pan as I mentioned when you're using your

 pan make sure you cover with the olive oil and I'm going to stick this in the

 oven I'm gonna come back in 10 minutes yes my tilapia fish bake in the

 oven is perfectly done within 20 minutes I'll let it sit for 10 minutes and then

 I cook it again on 10 minutes if I can show you how beautiful it's looking I

 can smell it nice I'm gonna pull this one out I'm gonna put it in my plate and

 I'm going to share with you look at how it turned out beautiful tilapia fish in

 oven and I'm going to taste it let me show you look at that how beautiful if I

 can show you it's perfectly cooked steamy in fact you can see it as the steam is

 coming out and it's going to steam in my mouth but when it's come to tasting

 ketchup hmm very delicious very delicious very much for watching Indian

 Punjabi style tilapia fish bake in the oven and best of all easy steps cooking

 And the reason why we use butt splices is this is not a quick disconnect.

 So if you need something that is going to stay, this is what you want to use.

 Now we are going to seal it using a heat gun to make a waterproof connection.

 And if you look really close at the ends, you can see the adhesive.

 Thanks for stopping by today as we take a look at these Core watercolors by the Golden

 You probably recognize Golden for their acrylics and some other products they make for fine

 What makes these Core paints unique is that they have a different kind of a binder.

 They don't use a gum Arabic binder, they use a chemical binder to give what they call

 a deep, rich, high intensity color, but retaining the same properties and qualities of a watercolor.

 They've got it down to a science, obviously, and this is just their venture into watercolor.

 So although these are different in their composition, they perform exactly like a regular watercolor

 with the same sort of properties and qualities you might expect from a traditional watercolor.

 It comes with six colors, but the range is like there's probably 80 or so colors in the

 entire range, so quite a number if you count the whites and the blacks in there.

 There's a bunch of different options for color in this line being introduced already.

 This tin comes with these six colors and we'll give them a try.

 This comes with Indian Yellow, Cerulean Blue, Cerulean Blue Chromium they call it, and Ultramarine

 Blue, Pyrrole Red Light, and Alizarin Crimson, and Burnt Sienna.

 So try first here with this blue and then I'll fast forward through and demo the rest

 These kind of remind me of the quality of say a Schmincke watercolor, which is just

 You can just see, and what I'm doing is diluting the color next to it, so just to the right

 I'm diluting it pretty heavily with water just to see how that comes out.

 Here I'm going to just blend a few colors just for fun, just to see what kind of colors

 So the next thing I'm going to do is I sketched a tree here and I'm going to lay in some sky

 It looks kind of funky now and this isn't watercolor paper so it's going to behave a

 But I want to see how they work in kind of everyday use and I use my sketchbook a lot.

 So I'll add a wash here even though the paper is not really made for it.

 And then just kind of throw down a little wet on wet here for the tree and see how this

 And like I'm using this burnt sienna and I just love the way the color pops.

 So you can see here even once the color is down you can go back and rework it a little

 There seems to be really nice transparency so you can just layer really nicely.

 And eventually I'll have to test lightfastness but otherwise these really performed very

 The one knock I do have on core and golden if you're listening is you pack these six

 It was disappointing to open up the big tin and see these little tiny paint tubes in there.

 And then when I add the paint into the tin and close the top the paints and the tubes

 will bounce around and there's no place to really store my paints in this pallet.

 So I have to use a different pallet for that or a different container.

 So just a heads up to the folks at Golden to hopefully fix that.

 But it's early on and they're just starting out to introduce this so we'll give them a

 Alright well if you haven't already please do subscribe to the channel.

 Drop a little love with a like on it and don't forget to leave a comment or a question.

 I love to hear from people who have experience with the same types of supplies and stuff

 So yeah these core paints really great and they weren't too expensive.

 I think I got them for a little under $40 and then used a coupon as well so I got them

 Which made the disappointment about the six tiny tubes just a little bit easier to take.

 And so overall yeah like I said these are great and if you can pick them up cheap enough

 Now I want to try some other colors obviously but I'll be adding these in to my group of

 So good luck and I hope you get a chance to use some of these and try them out yourself.

 Like I said if you do don't forget to leave a comment or your thoughts about how they

 Alright well that's about it for today so well until next time so long everybody.

 I've got another Did You Know today and it's a little tip, a little thing that I read online

 and actually somebody sent me the website and I read about it and I thought it was pretty

 neat because everybody's out there prepping and they're saving all of this wheat to make

 their own bread and they have their own grinders and all that stuff.

 And to make bread, you know, you've got to have yeast and so people are storing yeast

 But it seems to me that the yeast could easily run out before the wheat does and not a big

 deal, I love flatbread, but anyway, so I was looking, you know, wanting to know a yeast

 Now usually one loaf bread recipe takes one packet of yeast and I don't use packets, I

 So it comes out to be roughly two and one quarter teaspoons of yeast.

 Well if we do this, I'll bring the camera in closer and we'll see exactly what happens

 Okay, so when you're making your bread, you add yeast in there and the yeast feeds on

 the sugar that's put into your bread and it's a live organism and it comes up and it does

 all its stuff and as it eats it, it lets off carbon dioxide which then puts bubbles into

 your bread and that makes it rise up and if it rises up too high, you get too big of bubbles

 So we know what that does, so what the alternative is, is you do equal parts.

 If it was two teaspoons of yeast, you would put one teaspoon of baking powder or baking

 soda, excuse me, and you would add that to one teaspoon of lemon juice.

 So to me, I haven't done this yet, it's got to get really fizzy.

 So and the thing is when you do this, you don't have to mix it up first and dump it

 in, you just add the ingredients in just like you're doing yeast, a little bit more than

 a teaspoon of baking soda, a little bit more than a teaspoon of lemon juice, dump it in

 there, knead it just like you do everything else, let it rise, nothing else changes.

 Sure enough, see, it creates tons of bubbles which would do the same exact thing.

 Now I'm going to actually do bread this way, I'm going to make, I think I'm going to do

 it in the bread maker this time, just instead of doing it by hand because it would be easier,

 But I wanted to put the did you know out there first because I think it will be interesting

 to see the different comments and different things that other people have heard of for

 So anyway, that's my This Times Did You Know, I hope you enjoyed that and thanks a lot for

 We are at Maison Premier and today we're going to be talking about absinthe, which I think

 It's really interesting to note that it started as a tonic, a health tonic.

 A lot of people think that it started in France, but France actually just sort of popularized

 And so why does absinthe have this reputation for being like really strong or hallucinogenic?

 Well for the first time in French culture you had an incredibly high proof spirit.

 The only thing that it sets off some people and I think especially Americans sometimes

 Every other country in the world is just thrilled to have a spirit that's made of anise.

 But a lot of Americans have a little bit of a hard time with that black licorice taste.

 And let's talk about different types of absinthe because there's green absinthe that I think

 The Swiss distilled what's known as blanche absinthe, white absinthe.

 On a logical level it made sense to sort of secretize or make secret the fact that

 I always describe French absinthe, verite absinthe as being more extracted.

 A lot of the times I feel like Swiss absinthe can be a little bit more vegetal, a little

 Whereas the French style is really like just bright star anise.

 It was seen for a long time as something that was sort of historic and people didn't drink

 I think it's a beautiful backlash against years of misinformation.

 It was made illegal during prohibition and never came back to legality until 2007 in

 For a lot of people it's their first time tasting that flavor profile.

 And why did it take until 2007 to let Americans drink absinthe again?

 Also some very diligent and brave people that made it a priority to legalize it and to justify

 Absinthe of course is a very aromatic, botanical driven spirit.

 Perhaps first and foremost, I think one of the most beautiful pairings is absinthe and

 Well today I thought we might do a sort of absinthe sour called Mother of Pearl.

 Line the sides and bottom of the pan with the sliced pound cake.

 In a mixing bowl, put 2 15-ounce containers of whole milk ricotta cheese.

 Then 1 1⁄2 teaspoons of vanilla extract and a teaspoon of ground cinnamon.

 Dust your work surface with some confectioner's sugar and knead in the food coloring.

 Hey everyone, so this is a makeup tutorial and I know it's been a while since my last

 It's lots of golds and like burnt oranges, browns, it's just a really warm look.

 It's winter down here in Australia and New Zealand so I thought I would do a winter look

 and it was requested to do a winter look as well because there are so many summer looks

 I thought it would be nice to throw in a winter or an autumn look.

 So it is a very warm, soft kind of eye and keeping the rest of the face quite neutral

 It's nothing too bold, nothing too harsh, daytime, night time, either or.

 I'm using Face of Australia Eye Primer in Matte and pop that all over your lid.

 You don't really need to use a brush, just your fingers is fine for this.

 Now getting a small eyeshadow brush, you want to get a mixture of light golden colours.

 I'll list the colours below for what I'm using but I'll show you on camera what they are.

 It's like a really light golden colour and the second one is a little bit lighter again.

 So packing that onto the end of the eyeshadow brush, you want to apply that to the inner

 Now we're going for the burnt orangey, almost like an orangey pink colour.

 I'm also using this colour here because it has a little bit more pink but I do like gold

 This particular brush is actually from the models prefer from Priceline and it's the

 It's nice and soft and it really picks up the colour quite well as well and they're

 very inexpensive but they're from Priceline in Australia for you Aussie girls if you're

 Now you want to apply that on your entire lid but not the inner corner section.

 And where it meets the gold, just slightly blend them together using this brush is okay.

 So the next colour I'm using is actually this deep chocolate gold brown colour here.

 And I'm going to be using that on a round contoured brush just to get it in the crease

 So getting that on the end of the brush, you want to start from the outer corner and pull

 So now just getting a fluffy blending brush, you want to blend that brown out.

 So just soften the edge of that and to basically just blend that crease colour.

 Now using the small contouring brush, just get some of that chocolate brown colour and

 pull it across just the very edge of the under eye area just down here.

 And getting an angled brush, just get some of the orange colour we used on our lid onto

 Now as a highlight colour, I'm going to use some of this matte white and a tiny bit of

 So predominantly the matte colour and a little bit of the shimmery colour.

 You're also using this to blend out that crease colour to just make it really soft.

 To line the eyes, I'm going to be using just a dark chocolate brown on the end of an angled brush.

 I'm just going to line my eyelid there right near the lash line.

 And I didn't want to use black because I think black would be a bit too harsh with this look.

 What I'm then going to do is line my waterline on both my upper lid and my lower lid as well.

 Now you're almost done, but to really make this look stand out, black mascara.

 Now for the cheeks, I'm just going to use a sort of peachy tone and it's MAC's Pinch of Peach.

 Any kind of apricot or even a nude, beige nude kind of colour would work with this as well.

 It's kind of just like a golden, peachy, beige, nude kind of colour.

 So this is a lesson of the song You're Beautiful by James Blunt.

 So I'm going to teach you the intro of the song and the strumming pattern of course.

 So first of all, which is the most important thing is that you have to have a capo at the

 They're always, I mean all the songs of James Blunt are usually very high and he almost

 They are G, well it's not actually a G chord because due to the capo it's actually a D

 But we will suppose that the capo is the nut so according to that this is a G chord.

 Remove your middle finger and relocate your index finger from the 5th string to the 6th

 First two times you'll be only strumming the top 3 strings, the 6th, 5th and 4th strings.

 The third time you'll be strumming the entire, all the 6th strings.

 I hope you've had fun, I hope you've enjoyed, I hope you've also learned this song.

 I'm making a movie on how to do a no comply 180 pop shove it body burial.

 The foot stance is just at the tip like a no comply where you just pop like that.

 You're going to want it over the tail a bit so you can scoop it.

 So it's just foot off, pop, and then you can just keep this foot right there because it's a body burial.

 You're pushing too down hard here and then you push like this and it just flips up like this.

 This is probably really loud so you're going to want to turn your thing down.

 Another problem is you're not putting your foot down and you're just going like that.

 I guess this is really short so I'm going to teach you how to do a kickflip too.

 I can't really do the kickflip where you flick out and then spin.

 You just pop it, hit it, spin, wait for the grip tape, catch it, land.

 But if you do, do the kickflip where you pop it and then flick it.

 You just kind of have to put your foot like that, flick out like that.

 like say it was like this that was pinching on the top of that tab yeah and

 look look look when you were inside here see right here mm-hmm this actually was

 up and wrapped over the top of this plastic right here mm-hmm and that's

 what was caused that other one to clink so it was here and here pinchy pinchy

 and so so we un-pinchy un-twisty it's supposed to be set all the way down here

 before that thing snapped back together then it's run through its channel this

 also Teflon was all here this Teflon was not in its guides don't don't don't

 don't right it was just loose in there so it had a lot of chance to move which

 caused it also to you know to the plastic you know just you know move it

 didn't really do much to this but that could be an issue because that puts

 pressure both on the pins on this side and there and it doesn't really look

 like there's too many pinches but it's got that Teflon funky tape around it so

 it's obviously a sensitive little bitch yeah so it's gotta be grounded so

 railings hope the fuck we didn't fuck any of them now we're gonna put it back

 together and see if it did anything at all okay and then these I was all

 concerned because these wires we had to pull out and then and they came from

 underside and I'm tripping on that oh my god it's like under there so we pull off

 the metal grade oh yeah pull that fucking metal grade off because you know

 when you flip it over these are the two wires that snap into the wireless card

 that you took apart in the beginning so I'm like where does that connect to

 because we were working from the top side but look at how skinny this case is

 in all fairness though that shit did look crazy floppy floppy it looked like

 there was two metal wires they were on the other side of the thing pretty much grow Asian

 fingers to put back in oh my god some of these unplug EES were hard so that goes

 here now we really do the magic snap we only broke one bracket snap well we like

 yeah I was happy I was gonna super glue it but the other half bit while I was

 trying to straighten it I said fuck it's gone that's okay you know eat you be see

 how this is like this that's okay providing one was it works if it doesn't

 work well what the fuck we're gonna find somebody with an insurance policy we're

 gonna break it and lose it and get anyone no I tell you what if it doesn't

 work you can smash that on my head well you don't know more had someone break

 I felt so guilty that I haven't come at you guys and do a hairstyle tutorial video or

 I was just doing some two strand twists using this Miss Jessie's Curly Meringue.

 So this is going to be an easier version of the Beat It Flat Twist Tutorial.

 This is an easier version so you should be able to pick this up.

 The reason why I did this is because as you can see here I have my two inches of hair.

 I'm kind of late with my hair update video but that's coming soon.

 And I was trying to just do a big two strand twist but it just wasn't working out.

 So I decided to just flat twist the hairline back like an inch or two and then two strand

 twist it and it ended up looking cute and I thought why not add a little more to it

 So all you do is just you know how you begin a cornrow or a flat twist.

 You're going to take your small piece that you're going to start off with.

 I know this is hard to see because I'm only working with two inches.

 And then all you do is flat twist or braid whichever is easier to you.

 Add a bit of color and of course I'm just going to two strand twist to the ends here.

 So yeah it's looking kind of sporadic in the front but you know I didn't plan to do

 this to my hair so you know if I did it probably would have looked a little more well defined

 And of course the bead is not adding any tension to your hairline and it's going to stay put.

 So let me take my hair down so you can see how the end result looks like.

 I mean maybe this camera can't pick it up but it just looks dull.

 Like I said this is perfect for like when you're doing your little girl's hair you know

 she going to school, got her little beads, you want to do something different you know

 just throw some beads in the front, just jazz it up a little bit.

 That's just a taste of what's to come with this official product review.

 I know you know this may not look age appropriate but guess what I'm still going to rock it.

 Hi guys, today we're going to be making a really simple recipe and I'm calling it my

 of garlic that needs to be separated and then the skins removed from the cloves.

 guys like to buy that garlic that's in the bags that's already peeled, you want to go

So along with the fresh garlic, we have some fresh herbs and some dried herbs.

 We have dried oregano, fresh thyme, fresh parsley, and fresh basil.

 do is take off the tops of the heads of garlic, pour a little olive oil on them, roast them

 at 375 degrees for about 30-35 minutes and then they just become so soft and they just

And a compound butter is basically butter with other ingredients inside.

 And that could be roasted garlic, it could be shallots or onions, herbs, seasonings,

 garlic bread a few months ago when we had a seafood boil and this bread was so good.

 I even melted some of this compound butter down and we used it as a dipping sauce for

 the herbs and the fresh garlic and give everything a nice blend.

 salted butter because that helps me out by not having to add additional salt if I don't

 a half a teaspoon, but you can always taste it and see how far you want to take it.

 worry, for the exact measurements, you can go to GDCeasoning.com and check it out.

 I'm just going to take my favorite French bread, or you can use French baguette or sourdough,

 and put a nice thick layer of the compound butter right on top.

 you could actually stop here, but it is cheesy, so we're going to add some Parmesan cheese,

 some fresh grated Parmesan cheese, and just sprinkle that right on top.

 to make the garlic bread stronger, instead of roasting three, you would roast two and

 uncovered at 375 degrees until the cheese is nice and melted and bubbly.

 bread is in the oven, let's go ahead and take the opportunity to put our compound butter

And I'm just going to take some parchment paper and evenly kind of spread it out because

 can use this compound butter for is melting it over pasta or vegetables.

 sometimes with your friends, this is a quick, great accompaniment to go with a good cocktail.

 If you are in harmony, then you can just stand on one leg, do a different stand.

 If you drive in the city, you know, you got the address and you know exactly where it

 However, if you are in Chicago, then you don't know what road to go, you do not know

 which way is one way, and you got the same, you got the address but you do not know where

 It must take you maybe half an hour to find it because you don't know what you are doing.

 So when you do the form, if your mind and the movement is synchronized, and the mind

 Ok, if you are not clear, if you are confused, then you have lots of force, but you don't

 So should you understand that when you don't know the road, you don't know the city, it

 is not that you switch to a more powerful like Porsche, then you can find your friend

 So clear mind, clear movement, clear information, create power.

 So no matter how hard, no matter how hard, you are going to hold on, hold on, ok?

 See, the idea is if you think there is something to fight against, I am trying to push you,

 That is why most people cannot do this because when you think there is a hand, you will stop

 This is the fourth law of motion, whatever moves, always moves.

 TimberTech SecureMount Post and Deck Mounting Kit provide a solution for installing railing

 posts directly onto a deck or porch surface without the use of a 4x4 treated post.

 SecureMount Post is designed for use on composite decks or concrete surfaces.

 kit includes a leveling plate, base plate, and flange mounting hardware for composite

The installer should determine and purchase the correct length of the bolts

 meet all code and safety requirements and to obtain required building permits.

 you're installing a 36-inch or 42-inch high railing section, the SecureMount Post provides

 the flexibility for proper attachment with its adjustable top mounting block.

 Post comes packaged and set for a 36-inch high railing application.

 railing system, remove the 1-1⁄4-inch set screw located inside the top opening of the

Once the set screw is removed, slide the top attachment block up

 approximately 6 inches and align the bottom opening with the pre-drilled hole of the

When installing a 6-foot rail section, placement of the SecureMount

 Post should measure 72 inches center to center and 96 inches center to center when installing

Once you have determined the layout for the SecureMount Post on the

 deck substructure, you will next install blocking between the designated joists.

 2x12 as the block, secure it in the joist bay and attach on at least three sides.

 of at least a 3-inch stainless steel or high-quality coated exterior wood screw for the block attachment

Note that the wood grain of the 2x12 block must be installed perpendicular

 has been installed on the deck substructure and the blocking is in place, use the base

 Take the bottom plate and line it up with the bolts under the TimberTech deck plank

For corner post installations, use the offset holes of the base plate.

 Once the SecureMount Post is securely attached, trim the TimberTech post cover to the desired

 height and slide it over the post to begin rail section installation.

 Yes, here's an easy kimchi pizza recipe that you can make at home.

 which is the more puffier side and you're gonna let that crisp up.

 I'm using marinara sauce and just put that all over and then here's your kimchi, sauteed kimchi.

 So what I did was I got a little bit of butter and some kimchi, chopped it up and

 I had pepperoni so I put it and kimchi and pepperoni, they taste pretty good together.

 Then put some mozzarella cheese over it and then your crust should be nice and golden brown.

 Sometimes you crave pizza and you don't want to order it or wait or buy it,

 You can see the spicy kimchi on there and it's a bit greasy, but look at the crust.

 By the way, have you ever ordered something that you were so disappointed with it that you were like,

Well, that's exactly what I thought when I bought this flatbread pizza from Subway.

 So avoid the sad pizza and make it yourself and you'll be happy.

 Because I'm happy clap along if you feel like a room without a roof because I'm happy

 Clap along if you feel like a room without a roof because I'm happy

 Preserved lemons, we're going to make a preserved lemon vinaigrette.

 So here we have preserved lemons, these are about three years old, I made them three years

 ago, excellent product, great way to take advantage of cheap lemons, buy a whole case,

 Mustard, Dijon mustard in the bowl, those are shallots, that's the preserved lemon

 Here we have white wine vinegar, about 500 ml, whisk it vigorously.

 The preserved lemons have been preserved with salt, so they are going to add some saltiness

 to the vinaigrette, so you have to bear that in mind when you season it.

 Olive oil, we're going to add this extremely slowly as we whisk vigorously.

 We want to add it at a rate of about a stream as thin as the end of a pencil.

 If you can visualize the end of a pencil, that's as fast as you want to begin to add

 And then as you've added about half of it, you can sort of pick up the pace.

 But you want this oil to be incorporated in with the vinegar, and though there's no real

 emulsification agent, there's no egg yolk, lecithin, to bind these things together,

 This is chipotle pepper, we're going to add this for a bit of smokiness.

 For those of you who aren't familiar with stevia, stevia is an herb, this is a leaf,

 It's very sweet, but there's no sugar, so it's an excellent sugar substitute.

 For diabetics, this is not aspartame, this is not toxic, nutra-sweet.

 If you're looking for a sweet flavor that isn't going to kill you, stevia is the way

 So I've added parsley next, and the reason I've added stevia is I want to balance out

 You could add maple syrup, honey, you could add sugar, but I think stevia is a much healthier

 Have a little taste, see if it's balanced, and that's what you're going for in a vinaigrette.

 It's a vinaigrette, so it's sour, but you have to balance it, you don't want to be serving

 So I'm adding a little bit of canola oil, canola oil is slightly cheaper than the olive

 oil, so the oil will help balance and mellow out the bite of the vinegar to a degree.

 So I'll whisk that in vigorously, and we're going to make ourselves, in the end, a wonderful

 It's going to hold, it'll hold at room temperature for weeks in the refrigerator, it'll hold

 Now here we have our salad in a large bowl, right beside the vinaigrette, and when you're

 adding in vinaigrette to a salad, you don't want to beat down these leaves, so you want

 to distribute the vinaigrette as widely as you possibly can before you even touch the

 Because when you touch the leaves, you start to break them down.

 And watch my hands, pay very close attention to the hands, I go under the leaves very gently

 You don't want your salad looking like somebody squashed the thing.

 So be gentle with it, take your time, and really incorporate the vinaigrette thoroughly

 So I'm turning the bowl, I'm scooping the leaves up and over, and in a matter of moments,

 Have a taste of the leaf to see that you have coated the leaves effectively with vinaigrette,

 Here we have it, we've plated it with moussaka, if you're looking and interested in moussaka,

 In today's tutorial I'm going to teach you how to take your curly slept on hair from this to this.

 like washed it and I did a braid out the night before but then I slept

 like my hair was curly the day before and then I slept on it, so then that's the result.

 So first things first, I'm gonna put a moisturizing cream on my hair and this one is by Elasti-Q

 because I mean as you know if you have curly hair your hair is probably really dry and my hair is

 And then also I'm gonna put a heat protectant serum on my hair because I am gonna be using a little bit of heat.

 Anyways, I'm clipping half of my hair up and then with the bottom half I'm gonna blow-dry the roots.

 I'm putting it on a low heat setting and this is just to kind of stretch my roots out and just make my hair a little

 I'm also sectioning off the sides and fringe area of my hair and then I'm gonna do the same thing and blow-dry it

 forward to frame my face because like I said, I slept on my hair and God knows

 curling iron and I'm using it as a curling wand and wrapping pieces around it like that.

 I'm just holding it there really quick, no longer than 10 seconds, and then I'm just gonna let it go and that's it.

 Okay, so I sped this whole part up because I'm doing the same thing over and over.

 I'm wrapping strands around my curling iron and using it as a curling wand and I'm alternating directions.

So if I curl one piece clockwise, I'll curl the other piece counterclockwise.

 the curls just look better when I separate them and they don't just look all uniform and

And I kind of like my hair to look a little bit wild so that also helps.

 This is my hair after I'm done curling it and as you can see I'm having a little bit of shrinkage.

 So I just put my fingertips at my roots and then shake out the curl.

 And keep in mind, like I said, to keep your fingertips at the roots and not at the ends to avoid as much frizz as possible.

 So yeah, I just shake them out like that and make them look really wild.

 to frame my face a little bit better and also to stretch my curls out at the roots.

And this is just to avoid any frizz and also just for a little bit of shine as well.

 Hello and welcome, today I am going to show you how to make onion rings, a very tasty

 snack for that I have cut onions into thick round and for the batter I have taken a bowl

 and 1 cup of white flour or maida flour, 1 teaspoon of chilli powder, salt as per taste,

 1 cup of corn flour, a pinch of baking soda, so this I am going to add it all here and

 for the tangy flavor I will add little lemon juice and water and mix it all, it should

 be little thick, the batter is ready now, so the consistency should not be too thin

 or too thick, so it should be like this, now I will deep fry this onion rings in hot oil,

 so this I am going to dip it in the batter, so this is ready now, so I am going to deep

 fry this on medium flame till golden brown in color, just turn it, so this is ready

 now, I will remove it, remove this on a tissue paper so that the excess oil is absorbed,

 so this is ready now, so I will remove this on a tissue paper, so that the excess oil

 is absorbed, turn it, so here our hot and crispy onion rings are ready to be served,

 Holding the yarn just in the same way that we would for long tail cast on, but by what

 We put the thumb and the finger in between them and tip the thumb and finger over again

 Long tail cast on involves making a loop and knitting through it.

 German twisted means putting one extra twist in this loop before we knit into it.

 You have quite a bit of snuggling to do to get rid of all that excess yarn and pull

 Go into it from underneath and then pull that new stitch through.

 And then you don't get all that extra slack that you did when I held it with my thumb.

 You have to go right around and up through the loop you created before knitting it.

 Instead of going through there, you go underneath there and up and then hook that yarn through.

 Go in, up under there, hook the yarn through and flip that over the tip of the needle.

 Go under, grab the working yarn and flip that over the top and tighten.

 So that's one of the reasons to wind the yarn tail into a butterfly.

 This will use more than the usual four times the width you want to make because you're

 But if we were to break this down into simple terms, that's the long tail and you would

 For German twisted, you take that twist and put one more twizzle in it and then you knit

 And you've got to try all types of cast ons to find the one that works for you.

 But look at the difference in the depth that extra twist gives it.

 So for today's video I was thinking we are this much closer to the first day of school.

 So I thought I've already done supplies DIY, clothes DIY, hauls, and I don't know about you guys,

 So for today's video I have made a DIY lunch ideas for back to school.

 And this is a really special video because I'm collaborating with two really cool girls here on YouTube.

 I recently have been watching a couple of their videos and they're really fun to watch.

 Don't forget to give this video a big thumbs up because we've been doing really good about that.

 Also don't forget to subscribe to become part of our fab family.

 Okay, so first I'm going to show you guys how to make these delicious pizza bites.

 All you will need is some crescent rolls, mini pepperoni, and some cheese sticks.

 You're going to want to lay them out in this triangular shape that it already comes in.

 And just add your pepperoni minis and your cheese sticks on the side and just roll them up.

 This was really filling for lunchtime and it turned out so good.

 Acai is a Brazilian fruit that is filled with minerals and vitamins and it's so nutritious.

 Here I added bananas, blueberries, and to liquefy the smoothie I used

 This is a great lunch option if you're running late for school.

 For our next lunch idea I want to show you guys how to make this shaker salad in a mason jar.

 This is perfect if you have a vegan diet or you're just looking to eat healthier.

 I just added some yummy veggies and avocado but you guys can add whatever you'd like.

 This is a perfect shaker salad to take on the go and it's still going to be really

So let me know what you guys think about these ideas in the comments.

 I know it was a little simple but I really wanted to do something that you can make

 I want you guys to request some more food videos because you know you don't want to

Also I wanted to let you guys know that I do upload videos once a week but I also

 post on my Instagram daily so if you guys want to stay in contact, DM me, chat with me, follow

 Sometimes people don't have a rice cooker, and it's not always the answer to everything.

 Maybe they were farting into it while they were loading it on the docks.

 Either way, it's always good to wash your rice 4-5 times because you never know what's in it.

 There could even be rocks in it, and you'll discover it as you wash it.

 Remember, always have at least 4-5 passes until the milkiness of the rice goes away.

 See how as I'm washing it, it actually gets less and less opaque and more clear?

 Now it's time to do the most difficult part, which is fill up the water.

 When you fill up the water, you want it to be just above the line of your knuckles.

 And if you look at the pot, you'll see that instead of steaming or bubbling much,

 The next final crucial step is turning off the power, or the fire.

 Give it 10 minutes so the rest of the remaining water goes away.

 Now before you eat it, you want to make sure that you have a little bit of water on the bottom.

 Now before you serve it, mix it up, because the bottom can be a little dry, the top can be a little wet.

 You want to even it out to get that consistency, that sweet old consistency.

 Hi, I'm Chef Melissa, owner of Alamazon Personal Chef Service and Video Chef for bestfruitnow.com.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make grilled chicken sausages with sauteed apples.

 When buying apples, be sure to pick nice apples that are free of dents and bruises,

 which indicate that they've been lying around a little too long or maybe have been mishandled.

 The way we're going to make this today is I've got some chicken grilling here on the grill pan.

 This is chicken sausage locally produced with white wine, garlic, and herbs and seasonings.

 A lot of times sour type apples like Granny Smith are used in cooking,

 but in this case a sweeter, harder variety such as Fuji or Gala apples works great.

 I'm going to mix the apples in some butter in the saute pan with onions

 and just cook them until they're browned and beginning to caramelize, about 5 to 7 minutes.

 Once the apples and the onions are browned, add some fresh chopped thyme

 and continue to saute just for about 30 seconds until the thyme is nice and fragrant.

 Let that cook for just about a minute or two until most of the wine is absorbed.

 I'm going to serve it alongside our grilled chicken sausages with white wine, garlic, and herbs.

 And there you have it, grilled chicken sausages with sauteed apples.

 If you saw my last video you'll see that my Els on the Shelf left me all of the

 sure because the Els made these ones but I think that's how it works.

 we've got a little tub of water and I'm not too sure what that's for yet but I'm

 Now we're just going to take some of our modelling clay out of the packet.

It's a bit sticky but I don't want to rip the packet because it might

 And this is where you can either stamp it down with your hand like that or you

 just going to shake it back and forth a little to make sure it's loose.

Then we're just going to take this off the wood just so that it's not stuck

 finger in and we're just going to straighten out those edges to make it

 So let's start with a B. You're just going to pop it where you want the word

 If you do a mistake you could take some water and just rub over the top.

 Just don't press too hard because it will deform your star shape.

 pressed down pretty hard you can see the outline of the stamp there.

 pop your finger into the water and just lightly press over to get rid of that line.

 Now we're going to take the straw and we're going to make a hole.

 do is peel this back up off your tray and pop it onto your greaseproof paper or your

 leave a like or a comment below to let me know and don't forget to subscribe to find

 Hey friends, for today's dish we have curry shrimp with a little bit of a delicious twist,

 in how I made it, stay tuned and don't forget guys, enjoy and see you for the next dish.

 hands and scrunching it up and this helps to take off the dirt.

 Mix that around and then I cover and let that come to a boil and then I turn it down and let

 Some butter as well and some milk if you like but I'm going to add my milk afterwards.

 In my frying pan, I'm just going to put a little bit of oil in here and bring that to a heat on

 I'm going to add a bit of seasoning salt and then I'm going to add some curry powder.

 I don't add a lot here because I'm going to add some to my shrimp too when I'm seasoning it.

 All I'm doing now is just adding a little bit of water so that it doesn't dry out and my

 seasoning don't burn and then I'm going to cover this and let this simmer on my burner.

 So I'm going to cover this and let this come to a little bit of a simmer.

I'm going to season my shrimp with a little bit of seasoning salt

 You don't want to add too much curry powder because too much can make the sauce very bitter.

 And I'm just going to let these sit in the sauce for five minutes and then add them to my pot.

 I'm going to go ahead and add my shrimp to my dish and just add a little bit of water.

 I'm just going to mix that in and let this cook and then we can move on.

 Okay I cut up one potato in some very small cubes and we're going to add this to our shrimp pot.

 All right so I'm going to go ahead and add my cubes, my potato cubes to my shrimp pot

So I'm just adding a little bit of water and then I'm just bringing

So I first start by stirring and then you see it's coming, it's starting to

 going to go ahead and do is pinch and then twirl it in between my hands just like this.

 twirling in between the palm of my hands and I'm just going to do this a few times and make a few

So my shrimp is cooking down nicely and I'm going to go ahead and add these

You don't have to add the potato, you could just add the spinners alone

 to show you guys and let these cook for at least another 20 minutes or so.

 Hi friends my name is Mai today we are making a delicious bacon lettuce and tomato sandwich

 The ingredients we are using are thick cut bacon, sweet Hawaiian bread, mayonnaise, extra

 virgin olive oil, garden fresh tomatoes, fresh lettuce, and garden fresh Thai basil.

 First we are going to make our basil and mayonnaise sandwich spread.

 Now add the basil and mayonnaise mixture, thick cut bacon, lettuce, and tomato.

 And here you have a delicious bacon lettuce and tomato sandwich a BLT.

 If you would like this delicious recipe please visit our website.

So I'm just going to take all of it down and just brush it through.

So I haven't washed my hair in about two or three days when I filmed

So it's very kind of greasy, but it'll make it easier to work with and tease later

And the dry shampoo that I'm using is the Not Your Mother's Clean Freak.

 I do is I just kind of part my hair everywhere and spray it because I don't like to leave

 quite the dance party I guess I was listening to really really good music this day.

Mainly focusing on the ends because we don't want them to get damaged from

Next I'm going to be using some hair extensions from EverHair.com that I dyed pink.

 these little babies all throughout my head giving my hair lots of volume and length as well.

 just kind of go in sections and then I take the four piece weft, tease that part of my hair,

 clip it in, and then I move down my head with the rest of them.

 going to be using extensions just kind of do it how you like it and see what works for you.

 And then since I do have a lot of layers that I'm currently growing out in the front,

 I do like to take another little two clip weft and clip that onto the side of my head just so

 doesn't make sense since we're putting it up in a ponytail so probably shouldn't have done this

 I believe it's an inch or half inch curling wand, can't remember.

So I'm just going to be curling my hair like so all around my head.

 Doesn't have to be perfect because half of it's going to be tied up anyway.

 Basically I'm just holding the curls for about 10 to 20 seconds and when I'm done

 actual hairstyle which for that you're going to be making a half ponytail.

 taking a regular standard hair tie, whatever you want to use for this, and just take half of your

If you are going to be using extensions just keep in mind that you may have to

 tease a little bit or you know like rearrange some of your extensions if they do happen to get in

 this will be a lot faster but if you are just kind of you know like work with it and make it

 half pony and you know tightening it getting as high up as you want it or whatever.

 basically this is when I just start to play around with my hair.

 I tease the front a little bit and I go around and hide some extensions.

 all said and done it's time for hairspray and for that I am using this really really huge bottle of

This is the Masterpiece Aerosol Hairspray and just a little bit of this

You don't need much of it just a little bit and your hair isn't going

First I just take a little bit on my hand and just wipe all of my

 baby hairs away because I have a lot of baby hair on my head and it's so annoying.

 just move that out of the way and spray the rest of my hair and then you're finished.

It does look a little bit silly with my sidecut I know but whatever.

What this is going to do, what this does essentially is it takes

 But I'm going to go ahead and get rid of those and just pretty much restart the new tank.

 I got my vinegar here ready to go and I'm going to fill this tub up, put a power head

 to you guys and I'll be rinsing each individual piece out really well.

 lose all my purple which is fine with me because I hate chlorine algae anyway.

 it too long because I don't really want to end up with just mush as live rock.

Soak it in RODI for probably a week or so and then I will start the curing process

That way I can start the curing process and hopefully by the time

 I get the new tank built, the live rock will be cured and I really won't go through any

 That is already dry stuff floating on the surface of the water here.

 When it was on the rock, just the vinegar, it was bubbling up like peroxide on a cut

 come back at you guys in 3 to 4 days to see what this stuff looks like.

100% water change and I'll fill it up with just regular tap water again.

 Then after the RODI we're going to start the cycle on this stuff.

 And this is a tutorial on airbrushing and how to clean your airbrush.

 This tutorial was a request and I hope you guys find it helpful.

 These two have both been airbrushed, as well as my blood bay here and my regular bay here.

 And the airbrush is a great way to customize your briar models.

 I used chalk pastels for a long time, but personally, once I got my airbrush, it has become my favorite method.

 You're going to need an airbrush, obviously, and an airbrush pump.

 My airbrush pump is a model TC20 and it came in a set off Amazon for $100 with three airbrushes.

 You're also going to need various colors of watered down paints.

 It allows you to spray the airbrush and clean it without having it spray all over the place.

 You're also going to need some supplies to clean your airbrush after each use.

 This is vital because the paint dries quickly and will easily clog your airbrush if not cleaned.

 and pull steadily back until you get the amount of paint you want.

 The airbrush pump may look complicated, but it's actually very simple.

 This is the gauge that tells you how much air pressure is going through the tube.

 And this little knob you must pull up and then twist to increase the air pressure.

 When you choose a color, be sure to shake the bottle well before putting it in your airbrush.

 After you've given your bottle of paint a good shake, put a few drops of paint into the airbrush.

 lift the stop, turn it to about five, which is a good estimate.

 Sometimes you have to move the trigger back and forth a bit to get the paint to start coming out.

 And then you push down on the trigger and pull back and it'll steadily start painting.

 airbrushing can be really useful for shading and lighting your models.

 move the gauge all the way to zero, push it back down, and turn off your pump.

 To start cleaning out your airbrush, if you haven't used up all your paint, first pour it out.

 The inside of your airbrush will look something like this after you've poured the paint out.

 I'm going to turn my pump back on, turn up the gauge to five again to clean out the water.

 Then I clean out my airbrush by moving the needle back and forth

 to make sure it gets all crevices and it cleans out the paint as it sprays water through the hose.

 Even though you've cleaned out and watered your airbrush, the paint can still remain in the cup.

 To clean around the needle, you can also water an old paintbrush

 You may want to put water through it again just to get the remaining paint.

 Clean out your airbrush before you leave because the paint dries quickly

 If they do get clogged up though, here's a thing you could try to unclog it.

 If the needle is bent in any way, the airbrush will no longer be functional.

 Hey guys, so today I'm going to have a tutorial on how to get big curls on straight hair without

 So that means no curling iron, no flat iron, no whatever wand, red mcremington wand at

 Just water and detangling the hair and tying it up for a minimum of 3-4 hours.

 So yeah, you can get this look, not this look obviously, but like this look without any

 As you can see, I did 4 little bands all over her head, 2 on each side and 2 in the back,

 I tied them with simple bands and she didn't have any fallout during the night so that's

 Here I'm taking out her knots or bands, carefully not to rip out any hair.

 And what I used was just my spray bottle of water and her paddle brush to detangle her

 And as you will be able to see, the experiment went really well.

 As you can see, it really curled her hair even though you didn't see how it was before,

 I'm separating the big clumps that were the result of the bands or the knots.

 So I'm carefully starting from the ends, not to cause any more knots or anything like that.

 Gently pulling them apart like you would do on your natural hair also.

 I'm doing it step by step and creating a more voluminous look at the end.

 But at first it's pretty flat and the more you separate, the more the hair will have

 We just kept it very simple with no product except water and it lasted two days.

 You can see here, it's kind of really curly at the ends and then towards the scalp.

 So what I used on Marine's hair was only water in my spray bottle.

 She thought she would end up with a honey hole kind of hairdo but it's not the case.

 I think I'll try it again because it's really a new haircut without doing anything.

 So if you don't want to cut your hair and you want a different look you can try this

 It's not really a tutorial but it proves that this method can work on other textures and

 that you can get curls without any heat easily on straight hair.

 Her hair was really curly and it kept the curl for maybe I'd say two days, like the

 whole day and maybe second day but it wasn't as curly but it was maybe more natural looking.

 Hey everyone, it's Sarah from GoSuperSisters.com and I'm here today to show you how to make

 Really simple, all you're going to need is some coconut flour, protein powder, really

 whatever kind you like but try to shoot for ones that have the least amount of ingredients

 and preferably that aren't sweetened with artificial sweeteners.

 A couple of eggs, some vanilla extract, baking powder, I'm using ghee but also a substitute

 for butter or coconut oil, a little bit of salt and almond milk.

 To start, you're just going to put your coconut flour in your bowl, you need a fourth of a

 cup and I already measured out my protein powder so three-fourths of a cup of protein

 And then you're going to add in two teaspoons of baking powder.

 And then you're going to need a handy-dandy whisk that you're going to whisk your dry

 ingredients together, just making sure it's thoroughly combined.

 And from there, I just like to add the wet ingredients directly into it and then mix

 Make sure you wash your hands after you're touching those eggs.

 You do want to preheat your pan here so that it's nice and warm when you get to it.

 You don't want it to be too hot, otherwise your pancakes will burn.

 After that, you're going to add in a tablespoon of ghee or butter, whatever you want.

 And if you're using butter or coconut oil, I do recommend melting it first.

 But the great thing about ghee is that it actually mixes really well and you don't need

 You may need a little bit more or less milk, really depending on the type of protein powder

 So, my recommendation here is to just add the milk slowly, maybe a fourth of a cup at

 So, you can share this with your friends, your family, your boyfriend, girlfriend, husband,

 You don't want it too runny or otherwise it won't clump together and you'll have messy

 So, I'm just going to come over here to my preheated pan and just get this batter on

 I probably could have used a little bit more almond milk here, but sometimes I like making

 And then you're just going to let these cook until they start to bubble a little bit.

 So, just cook them for one to two minutes on each side and then you're good to go.

 This recipe usually makes about eight to ten pancakes, depending on the size of the pancake

 It's a great, you know, protein packed breakfast, lunch, or dinner.

 Maybe you want to do almond butter and jelly, which is what I think I'm going to do right

 Don't forget to subscribe to our channel and follow us on Facebook and Instagram for

 You can also sign up for our newsletter at GoatSupersisters.com.

 One of the really neat features of our hog eyelet holes is that it's linear polyethylene

 Linear polyethylene plastic can be repaired with a very simple tool.

 This is a soldering tip that you can get at any hardware store in America.

 This drill is a rock or something sharp in the river or the lake or somewhere that hurts

 Alright, with this soldering tip I'm going to melt the plastic polyethylene, the repair

 This is what happens if your boat hits a big rock in the river.

 We saw how easy it is to repair a hole with a little soldering tip in our plastic.

 Now imagine it's ten years later and your boat's been hitting rocks in the river and

 Hog eyelet boats, these are boats that your grandchildren's grandchildren will have.

 The eye is a very important and critical part of a creature, of a mask, of a person to draw

 Especially the technique I'm going to show you of taking the finished marini eye cane

 and putting a clear cornea over the top of it to magnify what's inside very closely imitates

 We have a pupil and an iris which is covered by a clear cornea.

 And the clear cap that I put over the eye cane to magnify it looks very much like our

 So the eyes of my creatures have a high degree of believability.

 This highly defined element of detail which really lets the work shine, which really brings

 Pay special attention to the thin uniform bands of color around the center of the cane

 These thin lines are created by rolling the mass in colored powder.

 If you want tiny dark dots in the finished image, you'll have to prepare thin rods of

 A thick preheated chunk of black violet will be the center of this cane.

 Holding the chunk with punties on both ends will allow you maximum control so that you

 Four to eight layers of aqua powder, then black powder, will give me the double band

 Alternating butterscotch with thin turbo stripes as I fill out the pattern gives me

 After it reaches a certain size, you might want to change to a larger punty.

 No matter how small you draw it down, the image inside will remain true.

 You can see how closely this cane replicates the actual eye pattern I was shooting for.

 Preheated eyes attached to punties with a cold seal are inserted into the eye sockets

Did you know that there's evidence that suggests that camera technology is old

 film, disposable, smaller and smaller, better and better every year.

A pinhole camera is a camera made out of household materials and it actually

 we're going to need a pen, a pair of scissors, some black electrical tape, now make sure

 it's black electrical tape, a juice box, this is going to be your camera frame, some normal

 tape, a piece of cardboard, I just used my utility knife package, an empty can, an old

 film canister, you can just ask for it at your photography department in a local pharmacy,

First step is to take your juice box and you're going to draw a 1 inch by 1.5

 by half an inch square right in the center of your previous square.

Now, once you've done that, you take your X-Acto knife and you're

 tape and tape out all the rough edges on the big side because this is where your film is

Now, put your camera box aside and we're going to make the actual lens now.

 got to take your can and cut a piece of metal just big enough to cover the small hole in

Once you've done that with your X-Acto knife, it should look something like this.

 You're going to take the pin and I'm going to use my box here as a base and I'm going

Now, we're not going to need this, so I'm going to ask you to cut

 with the normal scotch tape, obviously because the black tape is too thick.

 and make sure that your film fits right over the big hole you made behind.

 tape and we're going to tape it horizontally preferably so there's no friction with the

Now, you got to make sure that there's no light going through because

 for a couple of minutes, leave it out for a couple of hours and you play around with

 too pretty, but you know at the end you could decorate it, wrap it around something, you

 you need one final step and that is the lens cover that is to avoid your camera getting

Once you've rolled your film five times, you open your lens cover and you

 This video is my very first video so I'm gonna make it special!

 And of course the thing that I'm gonna make is confirm be special!

 Today I'm gonna make Ranimani Takji, the variety show in Korea.

 And please follow the step properly or else you will get messed up.

 Okay, after that, take the other paper and do the exactly same step.

 When I tried it, it really does bounce off easier than it is totally flat.

 Just giving you guys a sneak peek of a new box that I just got from our friends at Hasbro.

 So that's your first look at the new Centurion Mega Dart Blaster

 Stay tuned and look out for more details on NerfRevolution.com.

 Hey all, this is Tom Jenner, and I'll be showing you how to build simple analog balancing robots like this one shown here

 It's probably not a very good beginners project if you have experience of beam robotics building head circuits or something

 All the parts are available at Radio Shack and a hobby store, but you will need a power supply and oscilloscope

 I wanted to make this about as simple as possible to duplicate so what it is

 It's just all hot glued together, and you can build this in 20 minutes or so once you have everything together

 We'll be using the common 555 timer chip as a current control proportional derivative controller

 Proportional resistor and your derivative capacitor that derivative resistor is actually optional

 But it's just a simple passive network like this for basic proportional derivative

 Here is proportional only right here as I spin around the potentiometer

 It's getting there the faster I turn the potentiometer the more of the kick I get

 Now I'm going to put a resistor in series with that capacitor, and you can see how you can control the gain

 Or how much derivative control that you actually put into the circuit?

 Since we'll be using the 555 timer chip as a current control PID device

 Because we don't actually have a set point with op amp RT is acting as that set point.

 Generate the pulse train needed to control the movements of the servo and you can see the pulse train what it looks like right there

 I got a 1 ohm resistor and also between the power supply in the 555 timer and that just offers a little bit of

 Here we are powering up the circuit just playing with it a little bit

 And here is the details of the photocells up close when you actually build the robot

 You got to be able to differentiate where the light source is coming from

 So to get the robot working first thing you want to do is set RT the potentiometer until the wheel doesn't

 As you move the robot for lean up forward the wheel should go forward and just the opposite

 If it doesn't go properly then swap the polarity or orientation of the sensors

You want to be able to get it just barely to where it might balance and then when we add that

 Derivative capacitor to micro footage you can see what derivative control gets us and it's perfectly stable

 So here I am just playing with the robot a little bit I've got a smaller wheel on this one

 And but once it's pretty stable you can play with it a little bit like this

 And here's another one I got the bigger wheel that bigger was a lot more stable where I can actually push the robot, you know recover

 And here's I think I have a little more dampening bigger capacitor on this one and

 And here's what happens when you use too much derivative with the capacitor is too big

 Even if the robot appears to be perfectly stable, you can see these are current traces

 This is the pulse train of a robot that appears to be perfectly stable

 No movement detected whatsoever, but you can see there's still a lot of active control going on

 And there's a dead band of about five microseconds and I think this is seven point three or seven point four microseconds of

 So if you can do with the five five five timer you can do with two transistors and here is the schematic for two transistor

 The passive PD network modulated one of the transistors RT is your set point

 it's very important you got have to add RD in this circuit because you must isolate that capacitor the

 And here is the two transistor robot in action, this is just proportional only

 If you're coming from the beam community we might call these circuits high-speed PID by course

 You know my research if you're having problems put a towel down and balance the robot on a towel

 It'll add a little bit of dampening to make it easier and don't get frustrated

 Just keep at it, and you'll finally you know you'll understand how PID systems work out once you just playing fit a little bit

 So I hope you had a good time watching this video, and I'll be kicking out some more shortly

 I'm Ted Norby, Director of Instruction for the National University Golf Academy.

 What I want to talk about today in putting is getting the putter to release.

 Lots been said this last year or so with the putter releasing, especially with Steve Stricker

 Well, most people start thinking about the putter releasing as the club passing the hands,

 If everything's working together because it's a true pendulum, yes, the putter is going

 to pass my hands and the toe is going to release a little bit or turn over just a little bit,

 For most people to feel this proper release, we need to first get the club to hang a little

 What most people do is they walk in there and they hold the club up in the air and they

 Steve Stricker goes to the extent where his putter head is sitting so the toe is way down

 That gets his hands quite a bit up so that now that club head, the weight of the club

 If my hands are low and I'm holding the club up in the air, I have to flip it or manipulate

 So the best way to get this feeling of the club hanging is before we even bend over to

 The grip is definitely going to be into the palms a little bit more, but as you're standing

 right up here, let the club hang so that the wrists almost bow out just a little bit.

 Once I get that here, go ahead and swing back and forth a couple times and you'll be able

 to feel the club swinging and the weight of the club almost going past your hands as opposed

 to if I'm holding it up here, now I'm manipulating the club a little too much.

 First part is to just let the club hang a little bit more as I'm taking my stroke.

 Then I can step up to the ball and what you're looking for in a mirror, if you're looking

 at a mirror back here, is that the shaft of the club is pretty close to the forearms.

 Tiger Woods is one of the few that has his hands a little low, but even he gets the shaft

 of the club kind of working up into the lower part of his forearm.

 Once I get the wrists out and the club hanging, I can go ahead and start taking some strokes

 and letting the club release with my forearms rather than flipping the club.

 The other thing I want you to do to feel the weight of the club swing is to take some putts

 So as I'm setting up, I'm going to keep my thumb and forefinger on, I'm going to keep

 my palms on, but open up the three fingers on both your right hand and left hand and

 You'll start feeling that your forearms, the shaft, everything has to move at the same

 point, but because I'm not controlling the club, the toe of the club will release just

 So thumb and forefinger only, three fingers off, and then go ahead and swing and get the

 shaft and your forearms to work together, and you'll start seeing that the toe of the

 club is releasing because of the arc, not because I'm flipping the club over.

 So we want to release the club with the forearms and the weight of the club, not by flipping

 Hi, I'm Steven Jackson and I'm here today to talk to you a little bit about magnetic

Our magnetic materials come in a variety of different thicknesses from 12

 mil all the way up to 30 mil, can be used in many different projects including vehicle

 applications and promotional products, and can even be contour cut.

 The printer cutter will lay down the full design, then pull back the media to contour

This media is compatible with eco solvent and solvent type printers.

 printing onto a decal material, specifically Arlon 4560 GTX, and then we'll apply the decal

 Now that our design is all printed and ready to go, we've got the design here.

 a chunk of magnetic material that I've cut to be able to apply to this.

 use my DuraPro application tape to mask the media and then apply it to it, and then we'll

 Now that our design is all printed, we'll move over to weeding and masking.

 Now I've got enough of the application tape laying around the outside of it, so I can

 I'll remove the media from its backing using the application tape.

And I've now got plastic on the itself of the back – and there's another one.

 Now I can simply flip it over to the other side, and I can roll the backing off as I

 Always work from the center out on your designs when squeegeeing.

 When I align the ruler on the media and the magnet, I want to have a little bit of it

 I like to make all the cuts without going all the way through, just scoring the media,

 so I can keep everything aligned while I'm going through the process.

 Now that I've made the cuts on the one side, I'll flip to the other and make the cuts there.

 Remember I'm just scoring the material, I'm not cutting all the way through it.

 Once all of our cuts have been made, we can bend back the material at the cut point, flip

 magnetic sizes all the way up to 30 mil for vehicle applications.

 us at 800-347-0068, or you can visit us on the web at www.imprintables.com.

 Hey y'all, I'm April McKinney and today I am making one of my husband's favorite dinners.

 Believe me, if you do not like cooking, if cooking is just not your thing, you can make

 this recipe and this recipe will take you maybe about 10 minutes.

 I mean it's so simple, it's a great dinner, a weeknight dinner, just something to throw

 But it's also great for entertaining if you've got people coming over for maybe to watch

 So what I'm going to do first is I'm going to make this a little bit fancier than just

 All I'm going to do is I've got this skillet here, I'm going to put a little bit of olive

 oil in here, or you could use butter, but I'm keeping it light with olive oil.

 And then I'm going to put in some red onions, just some chopped red onions, just like this.

 And I'm going to put in a lot because I'm going to make several quesadillas and you're

 It looks like a lot of onions now, but after about 20 minutes of cooking, it's not going

 So you just want to cook these for about 20 minutes and this is going to be enough time

 They're going to begin to get golden and they're just so sweet.

 Even if you don't like onions, I used to not like onions at all and caramelized onions

 are probably the first type of onion that I really kind of thought, okay, these are

 They're going to be great in these barbecue chicken quesadillas.

 All right, so this is what the onions look like after 20 minutes.

 And just a little trick, if your skillet gets a little dry and you don't want to keep on

 And what that will do is just give it some moisture and allow it to keep cooking without

 Anytime you're sauteing veggies and your skillet's getting dry, add a little water to it.

 I could continue cooking these and they would get even darker, they'd get more golden, they'd

 But for time's sake, I'm going to go ahead and take them off because most of us don't

 Also, if you want to do this step ahead of time, you can certainly do that.

 Casseroles, whatever pretty much calls for onions, caramelized onions are going to be

 And then if you didn't want to caramelize them at all, if you were just in a really

 big hurry, you could just put raw red onions in there, no problem.

 Okay, now, the next step to this is get my quesadilla out, or tortilla.

 What I'm going to do is put a little more oil in here, not a whole lot, just enough.

 And what this is going to do is just begin to brown that side of the tortilla.

 Then I'm going to turn it over and I'll start putting all of our toppings in here.

 Okay, now this is ready to flip and you can see that beautiful golden brown, looks just

 So I'm going to turn this over and I get the other side is going to brown as I put the

 So, I've got some chicken, of course, since this is barbecue chicken quesadillas.

 And I'm going to put about a half cup of pre-cooked chicken in here.

 We always have leftover chicken, so there's usually something in the refrigerator I can

 If you didn't have any, you could buy a rotisserie chicken if you're going to make a lot of these

 Or there's pre-cooked chicken also, little chicken strips at the grocery store that you

 Notice I'm kind of keeping them all on one side since I'm going to flip it.

 These add so much flavor and they really take this dish up a notch from just being, you

 know, quick and easy quesadillas to something that is still quick and easy, but just has

 So I'm going to add in some sharp cheddar, about a quarter cup right in there.

 You know, this is one of those recipes, like a lot of my recipes, that you can mix in and

 If you wanted to add some bacon to this, that would be delicious.

 If you wanted to add different kinds of cheeses, a blue cheese would be fantastic.

 Now one thing that I would like for you to keep in mind about barbecue sauce, especially

 store-bought barbecue sauce, some of it has a ton of sugar in it.

 And this particular barbecue sauce, get a little bit more, I'm going to add about two

 tablespoons in here, this particular barbecue sauce has four grams of sugar in it.

 Now they're not paying me to say this or anything, this is just a brand that I really like because

 I look at the ingredients, I know what all of them are, and it's very low in sugar.

 If you look at some of the regular barbecue sauces in the grocery store, they will have

 I get plenty of sugar whenever I eat candy or cookies or whatever kind of desserts that

 This barbecue sauce is delicious, it doesn't need all that sugar.

 Anytime you're buying anything store-bought or pre-made, be sure to look at the ingredients,

 make sure you know what's in there and all the sodium and sugar.

 This is just going to add a little color, a little extra crunch, flavor, and I just

 You could also add cilantro to this, it would be delicious if you didn't want to use the

 So now it's time to flip one side over, you can see what I'm doing here.

 Pull this out a little bit, you may have to use your hands and work with it a little bit.

 But you're basically going to flip one side over and you're going to just start mashing

 And basically all I'm going to do now is just mash this down, let the cheese melt, and then

 Okay, I'm going to go ahead and take this off the skillet, you can see how beautiful

 This is way better than a restaurant quesadilla, it took me, I mean, 10 minutes, aside from

 the caramelizing the onions, the actual putting together of this meal took 10 minutes.

 I mean, it's so simple, actually probably less than 10 minutes.

 And so I'll let this cool down just a tad before I cut it in half and I'll have some

 And one thing you can do with this recipe is if you are making this for a crowd or even

 for your family, obviously you're going to make more than one quesadilla, you can put

 your oven on 250 degrees, and when you do that, when you get done with one quesadilla,

 you can put it on a sheet pan, baking sheet, and stick it in the oven and then continue

 making the quesadillas until you have however many you're going to make, and that way they

 stay warm in the oven, they're not going to overcook or get too crisp, they'll just stay

 warm and whenever you're done with all your quesadillas, you can cut them all up and eat

 So don't let it scare you off that you can only make one at a time, because that's something

 So, that is my recipe, my barbecue chicken quesadilla, so easy and so good.

 I really hope you'll try this one out, I know your family's going to love it, and if you

 Please subscribe to my YouTube channel if you like this recipe and you want to see more.

 Also, go check out my Facebook page, Cooking with April McKinney, and then my website where

 I've got all of my recipes, you can find everything there, it's aprilmckinney.com.

 Today I'm going to show you how to put in clip-in hair extensions and look like a porn star, baby!

 And this is not the way I do it, I just use my finger because I'm lazy.

 So now when you have your hair parted, you're going to grab your clip-ins.

 So then you let that piece of, or layer of hair, whatever, down.

 This time I'm just going to start with this side since I already know where it's going

 Like there's certain spots, like these two probably, it's supposed to be like a two and

 a one piece, but I do two and two because it's thicker obviously.

 So that's what that looks like when it's all, and I have layers in my hair so it also helps

 Now I'm going to do the front of my hair because the front is short and I want it to be long.

 So you see the hair line now, it's going this way because my bangs obviously go this way

 So I'm going to start, and I don't know if I even showed you, but they go like this.

 I never knew this when I first got them, they were like this and I'm like putting it in

 So make sure you open it, push it through the roots, whatever part of your hair, clip

 it, unclip it, follow the line all the way back, and clip that so it looks like this.

 Like I really don't need to use that clip, that green clip to hold my hair because I'm

 I'm trying to teach you guys how to be gurus, so let's do that.

 So I'm just going to basically lift up my hair, grab a chunk that's thick enough like

 that, and I'm going to put that on that line, clip it in, tug a lug, let down my hair.

 Right, so you chuck this out exactly how you chuck out any other rig, you don't want to

 go far out of it, they're not designed to go out over 100 yards.

 Hold it down, pin it down to the bottom, not within the other rig.

 Get the rod back set up, re-bite them on and then I'll show you the next stage.

 So out there at the moment I can actually see that the float's let enough line out so

 You know in windy conditions when you can't see the float, and this comes back to why

 I've done a 4ft rig, is you keep taking line onto your reel until you can't see the float

 and also it would be worth mentioning that because of that black bloom on the float,

 in choppy conditions you can actually see that up to about 100 yards and it's also worth

 having a pair of binoculars at your disposal so you can see it at that distances.

 So keep taking line in until that float's just under the water and then you've obviously

 That's going to be on the surface now so to get that down so the bait is just literally

 touching the surface, pinch your finger on the foot marker, take one foot in, two foot,

 three foot, two foot, and now that bait is just literally hovering on the surface.

 Now if you're feeding mixers and the fish are feeding on the surface I'd leave it there,

 that's where the fish are but where we are at the moment they're about half a foot under

 so now I'm going to take another half a foot down and now that bait's half a foot under

 the surface and all that's left to do now is to attach the bobbin on.

 I use the titanium bobbins for all my fishing now but I wind down the collars so now that

 When I'm zig rig fishing I want the line as tight as possible, you're not worried about

 the fish hitting your line or having slack lines because you've got your bait up in the

 So I find that having a tight line it produces more runs and you get better hook holds with

 and then chopped garlic, long cut onions about two, about one and a half, and then juice

 of half a lemon, turmeric powder, chilli powder, and here I have about half a kilo boneless

 chicken which I have cleaned with turmeric and cut into small cubes.

 going to add half a teaspoon of chilli powder, one by fourth of turmeric powder, and juice

And finally I am going to add the maggi masala which is in the hungaroo

 to omit sugar you can but I really like a bit of sugary taste to the spicy dish.

So you can see the chicken has let out its water and also added some

Now about salt, the maggi masala has salt in itself so just taste

 this in its own heat for the rest of the noodles to be completely cooked.

 see you guys in my next video and this is a really very simple chicken maggi dish.

 Today I have the unboxing of the Nike Mercurial Superfly 3, the CR colorway.

 So you can see that's the change, they're not calling them Safari's anymore, they're calling them CR.

 The color looks kind of red in person, but I guess once you take a closer look and in the camera it looks like it's pinkish sometimes.

 And when it's in direct sunlight I guess it'll look pink as well.

 Kind of surprised that this Nike logo isn't in the same color as this.

 Usually they do that as they did it with the last Superfly 3 and then the Superfly 2.

 As you know the Nike and the Mercurial logo on the little two gray individual bags, they were orange I believe.

 In the pictures they seem like they're pink, but in person they look reddish, like with an orange combination at times.

 Alright, so over here I have my corn tortillas ready and I have two dozen here.

 I already did it, so I just dip them in hot oil for three seconds, or four seconds on

 each side and then I just place them over here and I'll put about six and then a paper

 And then also over here we have some grated cheese and right here I'm shredding our chicken.

 This makes it just really quick and super easy as opposed to boiling, letting it cool,

 boiling the chicken breast, letting it cool, seasoning it, and then filling it.

 I just basically have to, filling it, did I just say filling it?

 I'm just pulling the chicken and pulling it apart until both are shredded.

 And then we'll come back and we will, I cannot talk, we will roll them.

 Okay guys, so the chicken is done and I am starting the beans now.

 I put a half a cup of cheese in there and a half a cup of milk and then I also put salt

 It changes the way they taste because I usually don't like canned beans, but for a quick meal

 All right, so you're going to take your tortilla shell and you're going to put chicken inside

 All right, and then the flap, you're just going to put a toothpick through it and it

 All right, so our oil is hot and ready to go, so I'm going to take one of the tacos

 As soon as they turn like a golden color, I just take a strainer and set it on top of

 The oil will drain through and then you can also put paper towels in there if you'd like.

 You can put rice, I'm sorry, lettuce, you can put lettuce and tomatoes if you'd like.

 None of my family, they always take it off, so I don't see no point in doing that.

 Place the unit upside down into the opening tool and open the grip.

 Take SRT4 and press both levers so that it goes between the two covers.

 If you keep one finger between the covers, you will protect it from scratches.

 You can use SRT6 opening tool to open the flex connector smoothly.

 Unscrew these two screws to remove the key mat cover assembly from the grip assembly.

 Gently press the edges of key mat cover to release the module LS4.

 Remove the magnet by pressing the key mat cover carefully as shown.

 Remove acoustic chamber containing camera module and SIM connector.

 For dismantling the rest of the unit, you first have to unlock the chassis from the A-cover.

 Do not take the microphone from the spring clips because it can fall apart.

 gonna need six cups of Rice Krispies and then 10 ounces of marshmallows.

 use whatever kind you want, but first you gotta wash your hands.

 already has it on there, I'm just gonna start cutting where the third is at.

 This is usually what I use but you can use like a spatula or something.

 right here, this is about I think seven minutes after it being on the fire and

 And if you're using the swirled marshmallows like I am, you gotta make

But this part's important so you know what you're supposed to do when

 But I keep it on the fire because if you take it off the fire marshmallows they

 keep it on the fire so they stay melted until you put them on the pan.

 That's how it stays where if you like use the spatula it gets stuck to every

 Nate why are you making a video about how to make rice krispies?

 For the Gagat Labi of Girlaloo and of course, the real Boylaloo's.

 You need determination, you need focus, and you need something big.

 Of course with an active lifestyle, that's what you have to do nowadays.

 Guys, put down the remote control, put down the video game controller.

 Your girls are going to love you and you're going to have a high score.

 Are you guys ready for the titillating Century Tuna Pineapple Mango Salad?

 We need two 180 grams of Century Tuna flakes and vegetable oil, one cup of canned pineapple

 tidbits, one cup of ripe mango balls, a fourth cup of chopped celery stalks, one tablespoon

 chopped fresh coriander, one fourth cup light mayonnaise, two tablespoons syrup from pineapple,

 a half a teaspoon of salt, one eighth teaspoon of ground cloves, one eighth teaspoon of freshly

 ground black pepper, pineapple rings, sorted lettuce, and a fourth cup of chopped nuts.

 We have to mix it all up so that we can get all the flavor throughout every bite.

 Now roll out on the ball until the ball is in the middle of your back.

 If you want to see Sam YG's first time, check out the Boys Night Cookout and Workout.

 If you guys want a body like Tony Tony, all you gotta do is log on to CenturyTuna.ph

 and of course, join the six week Century Tuna Super Bod Super Challenge 2014

 and get a chance to win a trip to Baracay to watch the Super Bods finals.

 Of course, happening in Station 1 where Sam YG likes to hang out.

 handmade gifts for the holidays and I love creating handmade embellishments to go on

 those projects that would have a dual purpose for the recipient.

 today is this Creative Paper Clay, which is an air dry clay, very easy to work with.

 doesn't require a lot of kneading to soften it up to make it pliable enough to work with

This would be a great project, great product for children or older people, especially

 older people or those in mobility therapy because it is working with your hands and

This can be hung from a mini album or a handmade card and the recipient

 I went and got some inexpensive Christmas cookie cutters of various shapes.

 it was dry I painted the entire surface with this blue colored paint.

 Let that dry for a few minutes and then I applied Rub and Buff to the entire outer surface

 so that the recessed area maintained the color, the blue that I was wanting.

I should mention that after I used the cookie cutter I used a paper

 piercer to create a hole so I could create this little ribbon dangling spot for it to

 be able to hang and be used to hang on somebody's tree or wherever they would like it to be

For that one I used this cookie cutter and I did the same thing.

 Rolled it out to about 1-1.25 inch thickness and then used the cookie cutter.

 I did not want to add a hole to because this is going to be an embellishment for my Christmas

 and then I painted it with red acrylic paint here on the bottom.

 with an iridescent white paint, but then while it was wet I added some extra fine glitter

They don't have to be perfect, I'm not a painter, but I just added the shape

 of what I could do with the size brush I had and added a piece of bling in there.

 it very easily resembles a holly leaf and this cute little boot can be a nice embellishment

 You'll notice the shine, perhaps it's picking it up in the camera, right away on this.

 I did was pencil out some stripes to resemble a candy cane, painted the red area, let that

This one I'm going to add to a card, but I'm also going to make it dangle

 like the ornament so that the recipient can use it on a different project or they can

 different pictures that I will insert toward the end of different stages of the process

 of wax paper or parchment paper, and then I get a little bit of clay.

Then you take whatever cookie cutter or cutter that you'd like to use, or

 cookie dough you put the cutter down and then I just kind of roll away the excess.

I do enjoy the look of finished edges, so after this is completely dry you can stamp

While it's still wet you can add your hole with a paper piercer if you'd like

 to create an ornament, or you can just let it air dry as it is.

 do like to flip it over midway, so later on today I'll flip it over so the back side can

You'll notice that it has rough edges around here and that is very easy to

 projects and I hope that you'll give creative paper clay a try and just enjoy making some

 Christmas embellishments or Thanksgiving embellishments or whatever holiday that you would celebrate

 Finished squeezing the almond milk, so we're going to make eggnog today.

 Really thick and creamy eggnog with no eggs, no cream, so it's going to be really good

 What I did, and you can see this on my how to make almond milk video, is take a cup and

 I soaked them in a jar like this in water for 24 hours, and then I poured off the water

 They lower the risk of gallstones, they lower your weight gain, they lower the bad LDL,

 and they lower your blood pressure, and they're incredibly rich in minerals, calcium, phosphorus,

 the B vitamins, and vitamin E and selenium, which are really good for your skin.

 And so look on my video and see how to make that, but it's pretty easy.

 You just sprout it and then you blend it with water, which is what we just did.

 And then squeezed out all the milk and the almond pulp that's in here, you can use that

 So that was a cup and a half of almonds with just about 32 ounces of water.

 Because usually for almond milk we would fill it all the way up, but for eggnog you want

 So 24 ounces of water, and then 32 ounces of water, two teaspoons of cinnamon, two teaspoons

 And if you notice, probably the reason why you want eggnog is because it's so sweet.

 You could add coconut nectar, which is from the blossoms of the coconut tree, or you could

 add agave nectar or honey, and about a fourth to a third a cup if you want it really sweet.

 And then just a dash, a couple grains of salt, believe it or not.

 And a Himalayan crystal salt or sea salt would give your body lots of minerals.

 You could have also used macadamia nut or cashew, sunflower seed milk, sesame seed milk,

 And then you do want to, if you can wait, you'll want to chill this for a little bit.

 To your health from Dorothy at tachybosman.com slash rawfoodblog and from faithdiets.com.

I stuff it with my hands because it's easier than to use a spoon for

You support the stuffing with your four fingers and then you push into the vegetable

 Don't overstuff the vegetable, it has to have room for the rice to expand.

 Always push the stuffing to the bottom, like you are stuffing sausage or something.

We do the same with the zucchini, only you cannot squeeze the zucchini as you squeeze

This is one and quarter cup and this is the remainder of the, which is

 like one and quarter, total of one and half cup of tomato sauce.

If you have ripe tomato, you can slice it, put in the food processor or blender and

I make a slit in the middle for the vapor to come out and I cook in the oven

You can also cook this in a casserole on the stove, the only difference is it will

 Hello everyone, today I'm going to show you how to cook one of the most common dish in

 4 chili and 2 of garlic, 1 handful of holy basil, 100g of minced pork, some vegetable

 oil, a half teaspoon of sugar, some water, 2 teaspoons of oyster sauce, 1 teaspoon of

 The first step, chop chili and garlic together, then add it into a hot oil and stir them till

 When the pork cook, add oyster sauce, soy sauce, fish sauce, and sugar.

 Thai style fried egg on top and a thin new bowl of prik nam pla would be nice.

 Hey, today I'm going to show you how to make some creamy stuffed mushrooms that are plant

 Alright, so to make the cashew cream sauce, start off by adding one cup of raw cashews

 And then we're going to add one tablespoon of raw maca powder, and a teaspoon of Himalayan

 We've got one half cup of balsamic vinegar, one half cup of olive oil, one cup of water,

 and a little sprig of fresh sage, parsley, and some thyme as well.

 We're going to also add about a teaspoon of health force lecithin powder, it's non-GMO,

 as well as either a teaspoon and up to a tablespoon, whatever you desire, of the health

 Okay, now all we need to do is blend this up with the lemon juice and it's good to go.

 Alright, so our cashew cream sauce is finished and now we're going to make the creamy filling

 for our stuffed mushrooms using one cup of forbidden black rice.

 And we've got one cup of chopped kale, you could use any type of baby green you wanted.

 One cup of red bell pepper, one cup of purple onion, and one small tomato.

 Alright, and once this is all incorporated, you're going to preheat your oven to 400 degrees

 Okay, so we have removed the stems from our mushrooms as well as wiped any visible dirt

 off and we've simply gotten a small scoop and start filling all of the mushrooms.

 Okay, and you'll do this until they're all finished and pop them in the oven for about

 Alright, so we just pulled our mushrooms out and we ended up baking them for about 30 minutes

 These can easily be transferred to any type of dish you want to put them in and be used

 as a great and healthy appetizer for any of your get-togethers or even as a side dish

 For this recipe and more, please visit us at blogs.natureshappiness.com.

 a loaf of bread and you want to roll it out into a 12 by 16 inch rectangle.

 mine already rolled out and then what you'll do is you're going to take your egg mixture

 and add your seasonings into your egg and then I've already browned my mushrooms and

 that mixed together, then you're just going to spread it out onto your bread dough but

 you want to leave about an inch right along the top that doesn't have any of this mixture on it

 and this was a winning recipe and it came from Texas so that's why we call it the Texas

Okay, so now what we're going to do is we're going to just start rolling it up

 and then what you're going to do with this dough on the end is I'm going to use a little bit of

I'm just going to moisten it and that way it will help it seal and then it won't come

Lift it on and now you're going to keep that seam side down on the

 and then you're going to pull it out and brush it with egg and then you'll bake for another 10

If you'd like the complete recipe visit roadsbread.com and thanks for baking

 Are you trying to eat healthy or on a diet and you just feel like I need pancakes?

 Don't worry, I'm gonna teach you how to cook them with whole wheat bread.

 Everything you will have it at home and don't worry, it's gonna be totally low fat and perfect for diets.

 Hello, my name is Laura and I'm gonna teach you how to cook healthy so please subscribe

 over here to my YouTube channel because every week I have new recipes for you and new ideas

 like this one that is really easy and you must have everything at home to prepare it.

 For this pancakes I have 3 eggs but if you want you can use only the white eggs and that's

 gonna be about 6 white eggs, I'm gonna use the entire eggs and just put it here in the blender.

 1 envelope of sugar substitute, it can be Splenda or it can be Stevia, whatever you like to use.

 I'm gonna use just a little pinch of salt and I'm also using a pinch of ginger, ground ginger, a pinch of cinnamon

 and let's put all this to blend with 1 quarter of a cup of milk, this is a low-fat milk.

 This is 2 whole wheat bread slices and I'm just gonna put it here and this is gonna be our flour.

 So if you are on a diet and they tell you you can eat 1 egg and you can eat 1 bread in the morning,

 I have 1 cup of grated carrot over here and I'm just gonna add the mix that we just made

 I just put my pan in a medium heat and I'm gonna put the mix that we just made to make our pancakes.

 Once you see bubbles on top, you just can flip it and I use this pan with Teflon

 My pancakes are ready and now let's put everything we need on top

 and what I like to put on top is some yogurt, you can use plain yogurt or Greek yogurt

I have some papaya to put on top as well as the yogurt and of course some natural honey

 and some healthy fat, I have over here some nuts that I can put on top and there we go,

 you have a perfect delicious breakfast or dinner, a healthy way to eat pancakes.

 I hope you and your family enjoy these pancakes, please subscribe to my YouTube channel,

 give me a thumb up and I see you on Facebook as Eat Healthy with Laura.

 If you look at the edges of your crinoline it frays extremely easily it is almost like

 tights if I was to pull it say for example here it is just going to warp the actual fabric

 and it is very hard to get it right back into the exact place that it was so the first thing

 So you are just going to thread your needle double thread it with a knot to the end.

 I am using a white thread today just so that you can see the stitching as it goes through

 but use a colour to match your crinoline that you are working with.

 So we are just going to bring our thread straight through it and then we are going to wrap our

 And then you are just going to bring your thread around and you are just tightening

 it into the base and then you are going to bring your needle and thread through again.

 It is just to do a secure stitch just so that you are securing it in place so that it can't

 If you want to wrap it around a few more times and secure it then do so.

 So then we are going to be building it onto a small base something like this.

 Now we are actually going to create a really big head piece but I just wanted to show you

 You can leave it on a comb if you want to or you can take it off at a later date and

 maybe put it onto a hair band if you feel your piece is very big it might pull against

 So you are going to look to your piece and you will see on the swirl of them that there

 Even if you need to hold the piece off because you will be able to see where it actually

 punctures in and that's going to be your back point to where your piece is.

 So we are going to have it at an angle here to the side and this is going to be sitting

 So then you are going to get your crinoline and you will see you have an edging along

 here and you can actually take this out if you want to but there is no need to because

 And you are going to bring your crinoline and start your point to the centre back here

 Make sure you have a really sharp needle because if your needle is any bit blunted

 So we are just going to bring our needle and thread through and just secure the piece in.

 And from here all your centre piece is going to be covered afterwards.

 So it doesn't necessarily matter what your stitching looks like onto the centre because

 something will be sitting here and this will be the piece that sits to your head so it

 So all you are going to do is you are going to pleat the piece the entire way around.

 So you are just going to bring your first pleat over, fold it into place and bring your

 If you keep it one centimetre around to the edge no further in and no further out.

 If you are pleating it around and you are going around at your centimetre and all of

 a sudden you get here and you start pulling it in, it is going to warp the shape of the

 piece and it won't sit circular, it will start pulling inwards.

 So you are going to bring your thread through again and bring it up.

 You are going to keep on going and I have one that I have been pleating.

 So you can see you just keep on repeating the process and pleating it around the entire

 And you are just going to keep on swirling it so you are creating a shape where it is

 Now where you originated this piece can be flipped either way to create more drama or

 By flipping it upwards your piece is going to sit higher and by flipping it downwards

 So I am just going to repeat the process on this one just to show you then where it can

 Now you can see like for example this one was left in the basket and the crinoline is so

 Just be careful not to pull it because you would ruin your crinoline and if that happens

 Now you can and sometimes you can see this one now has a little fray in it because that

 So if you are working with a divesting tool just sit down take your time with it and don't

 So we are just going to place it as I was doing with the other one.

 If you want to double stitch that would be the best thing to do to secure it.

 So you are going to bring it down once and then bring it up a second time and down again.

 So when you are bringing it and finding it difficult to stitch it and you can't maneuver

 it you can grab your crinoline like this and work it from there just as long as you are

 You can have a much longer length and you can bring it around a second layer and then

 you can go into a third layer and what is going to happen is it is going to keep circling

 You can keep it the same length and put it right over where you were stitching all along

 Or you can bring it in another centimeter and then you can go in another centimeter

 So what you are going to do is you are going to have your last pleat and catch it by your

 And then at this point you are going to gather in the rest of your crinoline.

 So you are just going to take that last bit and turn it in as well.

 Because then afterwards if you want them to turn out you can flip them both out at the

 So you can see now your entire piece is swirled the entire way around and there is no raw

 edges and this will center back to your back point if you wanted to or you could bring

 You can see you can sit it quite dramatic to the back but also if you were to have it

 So you are flipping one outwards and flipping one inwards and then centering it like this

 I'm going to bring you one of my newest, favorite little snacks.

 that makes these and sells these for Brad's Raw Chips, bradsrawchips.com.

 middle and then I'm actually going to make vinegar and salt chips.

 are a bunch of kale and again, hopefully you can get that at your farmers market.

 salt or just some nice coarse salt, vinegar and just some spray.

 then I just kind of worked the kale in with the vinegar and then let it sit for about

Then I'm just going to add some of the margarita salt in here and then again once

We have a dog that's running loose in the neighborhood so my dog

What we're going to do is we are going to put these in a 350 degree

We're going to put these in a 350 degree oven for about 20 minutes.

 we're doing is we are making, kale is like one of the best vegetables you can possibly

When I write my blog post about this, I'm going to put down all the benefits.

 you can make these, if you can have your kids help make these, this is awesome.

 can add a quick spray and then just put some more of the salt down.

This is going to be my snack tonight because I have some work to do in

 for something kind of salty and crunchy, try making kale chips.

And what I did was I put about a half a cup of vinegar right in here.

And then I'm just going to add some of the margarita salt in here.

 that's running loose in the neighborhood, so my dog is going crazy.

 I write my blog post about this, I'm going to put down all the benefits.

 make these, if you can have your kids help make these, this is awesome.

 to be like, you're going to put this much in the oven, you're going to get like this

 tonight because I have some work to do in front of the computer.

And you know, truly, if you're in the mood for something kind of salty and crunchy,

 Hi guys, today we are going to make a cake that looks like a hamburger.

 The very first step is to make a plain sponge cake and bake it in a round tin and then you

 So you have a flat piece that is going to be the bottom of your burger bun and a nice

 rounded dome piece that has risen in the oven that's going to be the top of your burger

 So the next step is to make yourself some buttercream icing and you are going to want

 Once both halves of your cake have cooled down you are going to take your icing and

 If you are unsure as to how to get your buttercream icing a kind of brownish tan colour, I don't

 have a special dye or anything, what I did was just take a little bit of yellow, a little

 bit of green and a little bit of red and just mix it to some ordinary icing and I kind of

 Ok so once you have finished with that it is time to put the meat on top of the bottom

 Now the way to make the meat is to make a big fat brownie and make it in the same tin

 I tend to use the Jamie Oliver recipe just because it always turns out good for me so

 So what I would do is take the brownie out of the oven about 5 minutes before you usually

 would so it is a little bit more gooey so when it has cooled down you can really smush

 it on the side and make it really uneven which makes it look more like a meat burger.

 So when you are ready take your brownie and put it on the bottom half of your cake.

 Ok so now it is time to put some ketchup and some mayonnaise on this bad boy with some

 Alright so now it is time to make the lettuce, the cheese and the tomato to go in your burger.

 I think the way to make it look the most authentic is to use fondant and just dye it

 But today we are going to use Starburst so I have got some green Starburst for the lettuce,

 And now in order to shape these into lettuces, tomatoes and cheese we are going to put them

 in the microwave for about 10 seconds and then mould them into what we like.

 So it turns out that green Starburst is actually white which sucks but now it is just going

 Ok when you have just discovered that red Starburst isn't actually red either, get angry

 Ok so take some green fondant and literally just smush it into like a long shape.

 Ok and then literally just smush it in between the brownie and the bun.

 Right so once you have put the lettuce all the way around the burger bun you are going

 to want to get some yellow fondant and roll it out to make the cheese.

 So once it is rolled out you are going to want to cut out a triangle shape and kind

 Right last step before putting the burger bun on top is to make the tomatoes.

 So get some red fondant, roll it out and then cut out little circles.

 So now that you have got your lettuce, your cheese and your tomato it is time for the

 Just as a finishing touch just take little tiny pieces of fondant, roll them up like

 Ok so there you have it your very own completely edible hamburger cake.

 Hi guys today we are going to make a hamburger cake that looks like a hamburger.

 What you need is to get some good regular potatoes, but they need to be the loose ones.

And what you look for is you want one firm and it's heavy for its weight.

You can actually do this a day ahead of time and put them in water.

 If you want a creamy mashed potato, you don't want to put them in water too far ahead of time.

 But if you want a fluffier mashed potato, if you put them in water, they actually get loose on their starch.

 When you peel them, you want to make sure that you get every little blemish out.

 The potatoes have these little things, little, I call them nooks and crannies.

 And you want to make sure you get those all out so you get a smooth potato.

 It's very important when you make mashed potatoes that there are no blemishes on them.

 The reason you do this is because the potato needs to be perfect when you make mashed potatoes.

You don't want to leave any skin on or anything to make the nice, simple mashed potatoes.

 Once your potatoes are peeled, you want to rinse them off one last time.

 You want a nice, white, almost like it came out of a magazine potato when you make your mashed potatoes.

 Then you want to go ahead and cut them in as even a pieces as possible.

 Once your potatoes are peeled and quartered, you need to make your blanching liquid.

 You want to add four tablespoons of salt and about a tablespoon of black pepper.

 You're going to want to fill this with water just so it covers the potatoes.

 Once the potatoes come to a boil, you want to add your blanching liquid.

 Once the potatoes come to a boil, when they're fork tender is when they're ready to be mashed potatoes.

 When you stick a fork in them, as you can see, I stick a fork in it and it just falls right out.

 You always count the garlic before you put them in because I put three garlic in here.

 I'm going to put a little bit of salt in here to fish out before I grab them.

 Get the potatoes off the heat and take out your little herbs that you put in there.

 We're cooking for six people because you want to use one potato per person if you're making mashed potatoes.

 I always like to use cold butter when I do this, not warm butter.

 One of the biggest problems people have when they make mashed potatoes is they over beat the potatoes.

 That's the only thing you have to be careful with when you do this.

 We want to put about, probably in six potatoes, about a half a cup of milk.

 So we're going to add a little more butter to make it a little more creamy.

 And then you don't want to salt and pepper them to taste until you mash them all.

 So what's going to happen is at the very end we're going to fold in some sour cream on top.

 And if you season it now, you could ruin the dish by over seasoning.

 If you want to do six potatoes, I would say probably two heaping teaspoons.

We're all different sizes, we're all different shapes, everything else.

 A lot of times you need to add a little more butter, depending on what the potatoes are.

 And you need to add a little more sour cream or you need to add a little bit more milk.

 It depends on where you buy your potatoes, where they were grown, the time of year, everything else.

 Hey guys, today I'm showing you how to solve the 5x5 roots cube.

 So, first thing I'm going to show you how to do is get 2x2, 7x7, blue and green.

 So, the first thing we're going to do is we're going to get a 2x1 block like we have there.

 Just by finding the block and moving it up, you get a little 2x1 block there.

 So, next thing we're going to do is we're going to get another 2x1 block to make an L.

 And twist that at the bottom so that when you move that up, it doesn't screw that up.

 And so, move that so that when we twist it down, it's not going to mess it up.

 Move the blues so that it's not going to mess it up when you do it.

 We're just going to do exactly the same but without screwing that up.

 is we're going to move that so that when we pull this section down here, it's not going to mess that up.

 If it does that and you can't do it, move it back there where it came from.

 And so, you're going to need to start a green line of three on the opposite side.

 So, what we're going to do is we're going to twist this front one up like that.

 And then we're just going to scoot that one around twice so it's there.

 And we're going to move that back there so that we can pull the corner piece down to it.

 Now, without missing that, we're going to go from that one to there.

 So, we're going to move that down to the bottom so we don't miss it out.

 And then we're going to move that up to the top so we don't mess it up when we do the bottom.

 So, when you've done that, you'll have something that looks like this.

 So, what you're going to do with these lines of green, you're going to line them up directly opposite each other.

 You might think applying the film or wrapping around a bumper is the most important, but

 If you don't clean properly, it doesn't matter how good of an installer you are or how good

 If it's dirty in this recessed area where the edges are dirty, the material is going

 I always use double thick paper towels, heavy duty paper towels.

 You can use hand towels too, just make sure they're super clean and there's no little

 So what I do is sometimes, you know, just to, so I don't inhale the mist, I like to

 And then I like to go back and forth and I'm really being thorough, especially when I get

 in this recessed area and I'm cleaning super precise, overlapping my strokes.

 When this gets dirty, I flip it around, pour a little more on and I keep on cleaning top

 If there's areas where like recessed areas are tough to clean and sometimes you get these

 little specks on the car, this is a really good tool to get those off.

 Instead of, you know, putting a lot of elbow grease, this is a sponge that doesn't scratch

 So what I do is I pour a little on here and what I'm going to do is I'm going to go into

 The cleaner, tough sections like recessed areas are, or get little specks off the car,

 For adhesive on the car, down here, sometimes when you take emblems off, there's adhesive

 So to take the adhesive off, what you need is you need an adhesive remover.

 This is called Write-Off and what you do is you pour a little on a paper towel and then

 If you don't have the right one, it takes a long time to take adhesive off.

 You have a good one like this one and you simply just put it on, soften it up and then

 you take this plastic little scraper and then you can scrape the adhesive right off the

 So, again, having the right tools and the right combination makes it really important.

 That said, on certain vehicles, there's actually a lot of grease that can be on the car.

 Even like using the adhesive remover puts a lot of grease on it.

 So you want to get, this is an industrial degreaser because degreasing the car is really

 So what I do with this degreaser is I'm going to, on tricky sections, especially like under

 the bumper, under the wheel well, or sections where I use the degreaser, I mean adhesive

 And again, I like to move fast, I like to wrap fast, I like to do everything pretty

 So I get the right cleaners, take my time, clean it properly, and then I can wrap fast

 In conjunction with this training video, please reference each component's owner's manual,

 available at sunnysdirect.com, before performing any installation, repair, or maintenance procedure.

 Each manual details specific requirements and settings necessary for the safe operation

 901 front to back emitter is our most common emitter, top washing equipment that we have.

 It's real simple, it runs with a two horsepower motor, with a worm reduction gearbox.

 This is our newest version where we have our Hera direct drive gearbox.

 We do this because almost all of our new customers and all of our new equipment is being built

 and shipped out with a variable frequency drive on the emitter.

 The things the VFD drive does on emitter is it gives it a nice gentle ramp up.

 We can start it up over two or three seconds and give it a nice easy motion.

 Same thing when we stop it, we let it coast to a stop so we're not having any shock or impact.

 It'll extend the life of the emitter, the baskets, the bearings dramatically if you do that.

 If you want the old style with the Delrin coupling, we still offer that as well with

 You may have a seal leak, you may have a shaft seal leak that you'll have to do something

 We send it to you with a little red mark on that fill plug to identify that.

 We're able to run this emitter with either cloth, micro clean, or EcoFi.

 Nine sixteenths wrench on the ends, undo the bolt, lower the rod, change the cloth.

 You may sometimes need to clean it due to mildew, due to some buildup from soaps, detergents,

 If the cloth gets frayed and you're not ready to change it, the best thing to do is come

 I'm going to pull the basket back for a minute so you can see it from there.

 So during your cleaning program, it's good to have the guys go up on the top of the emitter

 with a ladder, safety, make sure it's turned off, locked out, tagged out, and go up there

 and put two squirts of grease into each one of those rod end bearings.

 If the rod end bearings fail or they start to go bad, you'll get a clicking noise.

 If you want to inspect your bearings to make sure that they're good or bad, the easiest

 way to do it is to let the emitter wind down to a center position and then try to move

 When the emitter is all the way to one side, it's loaded to one side.

 And you're never going to be able to move it with that wet cloth.

 The only way you're going to see that kind of play is to move it when it's down.

 The little movement we see here is in the worm gear of the motor, and that's normal.

 The other place to look is when you move it is on the bearings and the shafts themselves.

 If they get sloppy, you'll see it there when it's in the rest position.

 Other than that, there isn't a whole lot to do to this unit, but keep it clean.

 And by that, we mean regular maintenance, clean the frame, clean the aluminum.

 When the guys get a chance to go up top, high pressure clean, anything off of those bearings,

 off the arms, pitman arm, try not to fill the motor with water.

 So besides the heavy maintenance and the cleaning, we also have some spray nozzles up here.

 Depending on where this emitter is in the tunnel, you could be running reclaimed water

 Reclaimed water, as you know, you're going to have to inspect those nozzles to make sure

 The nozzles could be taken down, unclogged with a small tip cleaner and put back in again.

 But general maintenance makes you take a look at those there to make sure that they're clean

 It keeps the rest, rinse any dirt we pick up off a car or off a roof and helps to keep

 So again, two grease fittings, gearbox oil, shaft seals, listen for noises.

 When it's at rest, give it a pull back and forth, check for wear on the bearings on both

 Clean the nozzles, clean and maintain the cloth from frayed ends.

 And you'll keep this in good working order and give your customers a good clean car and

 Please visit SunnysDirect.com and review the complete owner's manual before attempting

 There you'll learn necessary procedures, settings and other considerations required for the safe

 I'm going to be tying, this is a small Pheasant tail nymph, it's a small Polish nymph, it's

 one of the patterns a friend of mine got when he went to Poland last year and basically

 we brought them back, I mean they are very similar to some of the stuff we actually use

 but at least it will show you a style that in Poland we are renowned for the nymph fishing,

 a fly they like to use and this one here, this was my point fly and my dropper was a

 small pink version, this one here and combining these two flies caught me a good dozen, good

 Grayling and two or three nice Brown Trout, I'd say the Brown Trout, all the Brownies

 came on this one more, the Grayling preferred the pink but to be honest with you this is

 a great wee pattern and it's one I would certainly have in my box, Pheasant tail fibre, you can't

 go wrong, but just to show you how, the original one had just the hairs fur at the front,

 I've put a wee bit more leg in it and I'll show you how I did that, it shows you just

 slight variants that you can do, you don't have to do it but it's a bit of fun, that's

 the idea of tying your own flies that you can actually add bits to it, this is a Patsy

 shook again, a barbless hook and I've got a 2.5mm tungsten bead, it's a gold one obviously,

 the thread I'm going to use is a Firearms thread which is going to form the tag at the

 back and is well obviously tied to the fly for you, simply going to start at the bead

 itself and work my way down to this point here and then get some, this is basically

 caulk fibre, it's a natural one, it's a ginger, it's a Chinese, you only need maybe 4 or so

 fibres, you don't need a lot, length, match the length of the shank or length of the hook

 even, just tie it on the top, I slightly offer the fibres to the side and allow the

 thread to bring it up on top and then form your tag, just take it down about say 2-3mm

 and then come up, stop it short of where you started and then come back up just so you

 get a nice taper, at this point I would trim away the excess fibres, now for the rib I'm

 just using some fine copper wire, just catch it on the side, now I'm going to take this

 up, all the way up just to tidy, tidy everything and then come back down ready, because you're

 forming a taper, I'm going to use the thread for doing that as well, now I'm going to use

 natural pheasant tail, natural pheasant tail fibre for both the body and some small legs,

 now you're looking for at least half a dozen, at least that, just so you can pull it back,

 you can always trim away if there's too many, but you can't do that obviously if you haven't

 added them in, now what I do is just catch them on the top and pull, pull them in and look at the

 fibre length you want, fibre length is much, just slightly the body length of the pheasant tail and

 then bring your thread all the way up, just keep going and stop at maybe a mil or so from the bead,

 just leave these fibres sticking up, now I'm going to bring the pheasant tail fibres the

 opposite way around, just to build the body up, this point here, now just take it across your

 thread, now bring your thread across and onto the hook, now you lock that turn onto the hook,

 keeping it nice and tight, again and again and then trim away the excess, obviously the wires

 very important that it holds and catches in more of the fibre, that's why I like to wind it the

 opposite way because it will catch in more of the fibre if you do that, cross your thread,

 90 degree bend into the wire and then tie it down, nice and tight, bend and break it off,

 a neater cut if you do that plus obviously save your scissors, now get some hair, this is hairs

 body fur which is a great dubbing I like it, you could use the hairs ear if you want or you could

 use a good variant of black glister, I'll show you this one here, this is black glister, if you

 put that at the front it makes a great fly, I've got some to tie, there's a fly they use a lot here

 in Scotland, it does extremely well with the black glister in front of this body, now you slide it

 up, two or three turns just in front of the pheasant tail fibre and then just press these

 back and use the dubbing in front just to build up and hold them down, it doesn't matter basically

 where they go, they will spread out and once you've got enough dubbing, just take away the excess from

 the thread, all you have to do is some super glue or varnish whatever you like to use onto the thread,

 one, two turns, whip finish, don't worry if you see the orange it adds to the fly, adds a bit more,

 and there you are, it just gives it a bit more leg and a bit of fun, just enjoy your tying, the idea of tying your own flies is adding wee bits and pieces to a fly and there you are,

 just gives it a wee bit extra, it doesn't really need it to be honest because it still catches without the wee fibres but as I say, as a fly tie you can add whatever you like,

 and there you are, this is another one for the box, certainly worth tying a few because you will go through them,

 Right, you've shampooed and conditioned your hair with your prescribed products from step

 Then spritz your hair with your prescribed GHD Thermal Protector to give it the perfect

 Use the blow drying method demonstrated in the DVD introduction to achieve the perfect

 Now let's take you through the step by step guide to creating curls with your GHD Styler.

 All you need to do is feel for the centre of the back of your head and work side to

 Start by sectioning the hair approximately one inch deep at the nape of the neck.

 Spray the section hair lightly with GHD Creation Spray to give your curls the ultimate hold

 Hold the GHD Styler vertically, place it in at the root, rotate and slowly glide out towards

 It does take some practice before you can achieve your perfect curls.

 Take the next section and repeat, rotating the GHD Styler the opposite way to get a more

 Don't worry if you can't reach the root, as a little root drag at the back is good to

 A tip to create a more modern curl is to drag the root a little to avoid too much volume

 Place the GHD Styler in at the root and glide gently out for around the first two inches

 Simply continue this sectioning and rotating pattern until you've completed curling all

 your hair, remembering to spritz each section with GHD Creation Spray.

 Finally apply a small amount of GHD Precision Wax onto your fingertips and loosely work

 I'm going to show you some tricks of how to get this thing off.

 I already have the adjustable cup removed from the other side and I have everything

 So what I'm going to do is take some penetrating oil and spray it

 socket with a little extension on a half inch drive ratchet wrench.

 In order for you to take full advantage of the new Kingsford Competition briquettes,

 Let's start out with a few advanced grilling techniques, starting with building a two-zone

 So what I'm doing here is I'm pouring the charcoal on only one side of the grill.

 That way, when you start to grill, you have a hot side over here for searing and grilling,

 and also you've got a void on this section right here where you can do low and slow cooking.

 Versatility, that is the key word when you think about Kingsford Competition briquettes.

 Now we still have our two-zone fire, but let's take it a step further.

 If you'll notice, we added a water pan or drip pan to the void side of the grill.

 And now we're going to add, of course, a little water, and for extra flavor, some fruit juice.

 Too much fruit juice in the drip pan will scorch and give a tainted flavor to your food.

 And to add a little bit more flavor, a little bit of dry rub as well.

 So now, during a covered cook, you get flavored moisture within the cooking chamber.

 So now we can sear, we can grill, we can cook low and slow right here.

 Most grills nowadays have dampers on the bottom and also dampers on the top.

 If you want to cool your fire down, you want to damper down and damper down here.

 There's a lot of aftermarket thermometers you can take if your grill doesn't have it

 and you want to mount them as close to the grill grate as possible

 We're going to fluff and taste it up, see what is missing, what we need.

 We're going to taste it up, see what we need and what else we need to mix it up with.

 You don't need to add Baha'u, but some people, for Khmer, we love Baha'u, so we got to add it.

 If you follow the instruction step by step, like I said, the biggest thing, the hardest part is preparing the ingredients.

 You can either blend it, if you want to blend it, it's faster, or traditionally we don't have a blender in Cambodia,

 so what we use is the bowl and the, what in Cambodia we call the bal, and then we boil it until it's mashed up and become the ingredients.

 Thank you for watching the show and we hope to see you next time.

 Welcome to Cooks and Nibblers, I'm Debbie Wong and this is Debbie Wong's Walk-in Dog.

 Today I'm going to be making a very unique cross between a condiment and a sauce.

 it my savory tomato jam and I'm telling you it is as versatile as can be.

 going to throw in maybe three cloves of garlic and some chopped fresh rosemary.

Put a little olive oil and the olive oil is dancing which means it's hot.

 The lentils have come to a boil now so I'm going to turn it down to a simmer and I'm

 minutes which means it's going to be done right around the same time as our lentils.

 the vinegar is cooked off by half, I'm going to put in my tomatoes.

We're not going to season at this point, hold off on that, because as it reduces

 it's going to concentrate in flavor so we don't want it to be too salty.

 This is a piano tutorial for Your Heart is an Empty Room by Death Cab for Cutie.

 In the beginning you'll just start out with an F chord and a C chord.

 And your right hand will be playing an E, a G with your pointer,

 Then you'll just, when you play the C, you'll just let go of your pinky.

 And all you see is where else you could be when you're at home.

 Out on the street, there's so many possibilities to not be alone.

 Okay, so you play that same melody that I was just singing with your right hand.

 Okay, so you see that it's basically the same formation as in the verse.

 And if you want to post a video response of you playing it, that would be awesome.

 And if you want to see me play this song, you can go to my YouTube channel, andmusic321.

 And watch me play Your Heart Is an Empty Room by Death Cab for Cutie.

 OK, when you get the dough, you need a little bit of flour, first in your hands, and the dough.

 OK, and then just put it on the plate and spread it with your hands.

 It will take about, oh, maybe 15-20 minutes, but you must check.

 OK, when the cheese is a little bit brown, I think it's OK, finished.

 Hey there everybody, welcome back to the art shack, hope we're all doing well today.

 It's very similar to the sketch that I did about two weeks back.

 And I basically took that sketch, used it as a reference for this one, and I made it

 And I initially did it in pencil just to get the placement, then I went over it in ink,

 getting all the very dark shadows done, and then I went over it with watercolour at the

 So here you can see I'm just going over everything lightly with the ink, just to get the rough

 outlines and sketches, and then I go in and get the very dark shadows done.

 I want these areas to be really dark, and then when you go over it with watercolour,

 This ink tends to repel a lot of the watercolour, so you can only get a little bit of colour

 I really wanted to get something colour done again on my channel.

 Because a lot of you really enjoy my pencil work, but there's a few comments that pop

 up here and there that say, you know, I really like you as an artist, you're very good, but

 I missed your colour drawings, and to be honest, I miss them myself.

 But I find that with just doing pencil, it's easier, you don't have to mess with all the

 colour aspect of it, but it's a bit easier just to get your initial impression out on

 Adding colour just totally changes everything with it, and you've got to be very conscious

 But with this one, I just wanted to make a very, very saturated picture, very, very bright.

 But really, the reason why I'm doing this is because a lot of you have been requesting

 So if any of you have any requests of anything that I should draw, leave it below.

 I look at them, I read all the comments on the videos, and if you leave a comment, I'll

 If you leave a suggestion, I'll definitely put it down where I've been entering in suggestions

 Okay, now I'm getting towards the end of the inking section of the drawing.

 I'm just getting very dark shadows in here, you see I'm starting to mix the watercolour

 It gives the picture so much more interest when there's a lot more texture, and there's

 When you look at a photograph of a scenery, the last thing you appreciate is the sky,

 You look at it, you see the blue sky, and it's like, okay, that's great.

 In this one, I just really want to make a very textured or loose brush stroke just to

 really give it some interest so that that's not the last thing you look at.

 Even with the water, I painted with a lot of different textures or just loose brush strokes.

 You can see I go over the painting with a lot of different shades of blue.

 I put a couple streaks of yellow in it to get a light shade of green going a little bit.

 It was just trying to have some fun and trying to really learn what I could do with the medium.

 Towards the bottom of the drawing here, you'll see me painting one of the larger waves.

 I wanted to really pop it or make it show up a lot more by adding in some brighter colors to it.

 Just to show the sunlight was showing through the wave and the lighter colors were showing up.

 Then I started to add in some color to the far back mountains or rocks.

 I just added a solid color just to get to see what it would look like.

 Then I started adding in some lighter colors and darker colors to where they needed to be.

 From here on out, it's just adding in a few more colors here and there and just getting the final colors down.

 Like I was saying, I really did this painting because a lot of you requested I do something in color.

 Here's some of my first observations about this brush is that, well about airbrushes

 in general, is that it just seems to be, this one seems to be fairly solidly built.

 Has these nice little rubber O-rings on here to help grip onto it.

 And another thing that's kind of surprised me is that airbrushes are, at least this design,

 And so what I'm going to go ahead and do is just show you how to take this apart.

 I mean, you're not, I don't think you're going to have to clean or give it a thorough, take

 I mean, I think for most of the time, just running some paint thinner through will be

 But you know, like anything, gunk can build up inside and you'll need to take it apart.

 And you do that by just screwing off the back and pulling it out slowly.

 I guess a needle that controls the amount of paint that gets applied or the width of

 Oh, and by the way, this is what is called a single-action brush.

 In other words, the only thing that this button controls here is the amount of air that goes

 With a dual-action brush, you can control the air and you can control how much paint

 You can see you have a hole going through it where the needle goes through.

 You want to make sure that doesn't come off and you don't lose it.

 So other than that, I think that's the only really small part you need to watch out for.

 One thing I like about this is this is where the spring action is.

 And I've seen pictures and diagrams of airbrush in which this part here is broken out into

 You'll have the spring, and you'll have a couple of washers, and you'll have this screw-on

 And I like the fact that this is all self-contained in one unit.

 So anyway, assuming at some point the spring can wear out in there and so you'll have to

 But these are all modular, so they're readily available from the manufacturer, from Badger.

 Now you've got to be a little bit careful when you put it in because you don't want

 You want to be fairly gradual because there's a little funnel in here and it'll help guide

 But you don't want to just jam it in real quick because you don't want to bend the point.

 Oh, before I go any further, we also need to put this button back in.

 That hole right there, that has to be facing towards the back because the needle is going

 And it's designed so that, I don't think you can deliberately put this in wrong.

 So it's designed so that you have no choice in how you put this button in.

 Feel a little bit of resistance as it goes through the front here.

 So now that I've got this out of the way, I'm going to, for my next video, actually

 And my first victim is, I'm going to be spray painting a piece of track.

 Hi, my name is Joyce and I'm going to show you how to make a Mexican casserole.

 Your ingredients that you need are Doritos, cheese, and hamburger helper.

 The first thing that you want to do is take some Doritos and crush them up on the bottom

 Okay, once you get a good layer of Doritos on the bottom of the pan, the next thing is

 Prepare the hamburger helper as it says on the back of the box.

 You can put them in and roll over with a rolling pin or a cup instead of a big spoon.

 And let it cook just long enough for the cheeses to melt because everything is already cooked.

 Hey guys, hey guys, redlinksgodofmom here and I will be showing you a

 Modification video with the Doctor Who sonic screwdriver and today I will be showing you how to modify it

 With easy simple steps if you just want it to keep lighting up without pressing any buttons you could do that

 Get your sonic screwdriver course and get a real screwdriver and

 Now part this is all you that's all you needed to do now what you want to do if you want to turn it on

 I glued this because there's no use for this since I got the one packer and

 That's all you need to do I don't know why the med light is useless

 10th doctor sonic screwdriver and I hope you comment and subscribe

 So today I wanted to re-film a video for you guys and that video is going to be the DIY

 I want to re-film this just because the quality of my last video wasn't too great because

 it was just when I first started out with this whole YouTube thing.

 I'm still going to leave the other video linked down below because there's probably going

 to be stuff that I said in that video that I'm going to end up leaving out in this video.

 So all you're going to need for this DIY self-tan is some cocoa powder.

 I just used whatever was in my house, which is the Nestle Toll House brand.

 This one I believe was like $2.50 but it's kind of old so, you know, the price is going

 to vary but you get a lot of stuff in here, especially if you're just using it for self-tan.

 So all you need is this and then any moisturizer or lotion that you want.

 So for the video I'm going to be using the Victoria's Secret Vanilla scent.

 I kind of personally recommend a consistency that's kind of thick but not too thick.

 So you don't want it to be runny because then it's really hard to like make even and apply.

 But you don't want it to be too thick to the point that you can't really spread it.

 The number one tip that I can give you guys is to definitely exfoliate your skin because

 if you don't do that, you're going to be streaky and blotchy and it's not going to look cute

 After you're fully exfoliated, you just apply it and then it absorbs into your skin.

 One big thing, if you're applying it to your face, I wouldn't recommend just applying the

 I recommend just putting maybe a little cocoa powder in with your foundation to kind of

 What I really like most about this is that you can see kind of the true color as you're

 applying it so you're not like shocked after you wait hours to develop with a regular self

 Last time I went a little too dark just to show you guys the extreme ends of how dark

 Now I will say that if you want to build up the color, you have to wait for it to completely

 dry before you add another coat because then you get streaky because now you're having

 However if you're outside on a 90 degree day wearing all white, then it is possible because

 You know you just always have to be careful with stuff like that.

 Supposedly it kind of helps with like making your skin look younger as well.

 I'll leave more information on that down below because I don't want to like drag this video

 This way is so much simpler and it just makes everything look like flawless, even, and smooth.

 Even if you don't want to use this specific type of self tan, this tip that I'm going

 Okay so the first step is just to actually take a bowl and applying a decent amount of

 So I'm just going to be taking this amount right here and just applying it into that.

 But yeah, so I'm just going to apply this to my arms and then I'm going to show you

 So using a brush when applying self tan is honestly a lifesaver.

 All you have to do is just kind of dip it into the self tan and then blot it against

 And then you're going to blend everything out kind of like you're just applying makeup.

 And the good thing about this is that the color appears right away so you can make sure

 And you can kind of blend it into your hands to make everything look more natural.

 I kind of wanted to show you guys tan line just so you can see the difference of the

 And you're going to have a little bit of excess but once your skin is completely dry you can

 If you want to keep the tan consistent then I would recommend applying it every day or

 It does last on my skin for a couple days and then I just reapply it as I want to.

 I just keep whatever excess that I make I keep in like a little kind of like a squeeze

 tube so whenever I need it I just kind of you know pour it on or whatever and then rub

 If you guys enjoyed it and got some useful tips out of it then make sure to give it a

 If you have any questions regarding this self tan then just make sure to leave them down

 And subscribe to my channel for weekly videos and I hope to see you guys in my next one.

 Hi guys, it's Angela Kim from the SquishyMonster.com and today I'm sharing with you some adorable

So these are actually scooped out of the flesh of an actual apple,

 so you don't have to be so committal because they make a ton and you can personalize them

 and roll them in crushed candies, cookies, or sprinkles, whatever your heart desires.

 And if caramel isn't your thing, you can also dip them in chocolate.

 It's important to consider preventing the caramel from sliding off when you prepare these,

 so organic unwaxed fruit works best, and you want to go in there with a metal melon baller

 or a coffee scoop and you just want to go make a round, firm, and full scoop like this.

 The absolute most important thing is to make sure that all of your balls are as bone dry as possible.

 before you dip because any trace of moisture will allow the caramel to slide right off.

 It's best to work in batches, so I'm going to stick a popsicle stick into each one

 and I'm going to place them in the freezer while I work on the caramel.

 And as you're sticking them in, there's more liquid that seeps out, so you want to go in there and dry that off as well.

 To my caramels, I just want to drizzle in just a little bit of cream or milk and a little pinch of salt

 because I love how that salt really offsets all the coyingly sweet parts of this

 because I love that tart and refreshing bite from the apple and then that rich, creamy butteriness from the caramels

 So I'm going to put this into my microwave in 30 second bursts until it's smooth and melted.

 Just like my apples, I like to work with my pool of caramel sauce in batches as well.

 So make sure you blot your apple ball again and slowly dip them into this pool of chocolate.

 And I have a slip of wax waiting for me because as soon as you dip this guy, you want to pop it back into the freezer.

 You want to tap off any excess and then another trick to keeping these to set and not to slip off

 is to roll in cookie crumbs or candy sprinkles, whatever you like.

 And then I'm going to put this guy into the freezer really quickly.

 Keep in mind that as your caramel cools, it makes it easier for it to stick and just kind of comes together much nicely.

 I've got some ginger snap crumbs that I'm rolling it into, biscoff, graham cracker, whatever your heart desires.

 So remember, pop this guy really, really quickly into the freezer.

 I don't think I ever saw a goth girl wear her hair with the mall hair.

 It didn't matter if it was frizzy, it didn't matter any of that.

 The first thing you do when you're making the bitch flip or mall hair, you gather, gather

 And then you come, let me lean back a little bit so you can see.

 You look around and hold it up so anybody in the bathroom with you can know to flee.

 But it was a lot easier than buttering your hair for all day and, you know.

 Ideally, you hear the sizzling burning sound of all that hairspray.

 I actually will because my bangs are a little, my under bangs are a little long.

 And I'll need the, you don't even need to really actually wait for the hair dryer sometimes.

 This is going to be an 8 part tutorial on how to solve the Rubik's Cube 3x3.

 As you probably know, I've already created a 3x3 tutorial, but in that one I sound like a nerd with a cold.

 So I've decided to remake it, make it sound better, and make it much clearer and concise, and answer all questions that I had not in the previous video.

 So this first step to solving the Rubik's Cube 3x3, it is very, very, um, suggested, or I would highly suggest that you learn the notation for a Rubik's Cube 3x3.

 So, if you hold the white face in front of you, and the blue face on top, as with all the cubes in the background,

 you have four main faces that you will be using while solving the cube, and then you have two other ones, which are rarely used.

 The first side that you need to know about is the most common side, which is the R side.

 If white is on front, and blue is on top, your right side will be the red side, or the side on the right side of the cube.

 The left side will be, obviously, the side on the left side of the cube, which in this case is orange.

 Then the U face, or the up face, is the blue one, or the top, and the front face, which is the one that you are facing, that is the front face.

 So, if I were to turn the front face, I would turn it around the white side.

 If I were to solve, turn the right side, I would turn it around the red centerpiece, and I would turn it like this.

If you were to see an R, a capital R in notation, as you can see in the annotation at the bottom, a capital R means turn the right side.

 Now, if it's just a capital R, you turn the right side one turn clockwise.

 So, just a normal R, this is still your front, I'm just turning it so you can see, is turning the right side clockwise.

 Now, an R prime, or an R with an apostrophe after it, as you can see down there, is turning the right side counterclockwise one turn.

 So, a U, as shown at the bottom, without an apostrophe, is just turning the up face clockwise once.

 Now, this standard notation makes describing certain moves much easier and much faster as long as you understand notation.

 If you don't understand notation, it will be very hard for you to solve the Rubik's Cube and then move on to higher, to other cubes, such as the 4x4, or even just getting faster at the 3x3.

 I will be using notation in all of my videos, so I would suggest learning notation, but you could stumble along without it, but I still highly recommend it.

 So, one more thing I would like to mention to you is a letter with a 2 after it.

 So, if I were to put U2, as shown at the bottom in an annotation, a U2, most of you can probably guess, would be to turn the top face twice.

 Now, I don't need to worry about if there is an apostrophe after it, or a prime symbol, or not, because if you do the U2 clockwise, this is going to be here, and if you do the U2 counterclockwise, it's still going to be there.

 So, turning a face twice, it does not matter which direction you turn it in.

 Now, one quick thing I need to mention is when you're doing the left side, since you're used to turning the right side clockwise by turning it up like this, you may be tempted to say that this is L.

 But that's wrong, because if you look at the left side, and you turn it up from the front like this, you're actually turning it counterclockwise, which means that this is an L'.

 That is the only side that it matters on, because the other three are very easy to visualize as you're looking right at them.

 So, just remember that when you're turning a face, be sure to act as if you're looking at it.

 So, I still know that white is my front, red is my right, so since orange is my left side, I want to do an L', which means I turn it counterclockwise.

 Now, I will teach you the other two possible moves on a 3x3 Rubik's Cube right now, but you do not need them except for the very last step of solving the Rubik's Cube.

 So, the one that you'll be using in the last step is the D face, or the down face.

 So, with white as front and blue as top, I have green as my down face.

 So again, just like any other side, you pretend as if you're looking at that side before turning it.

 So, if you see a D, you act as if you're looking straight at the down face, and you turn it clockwise.

 Then, the last side, which you will not be using in the beginner's method, is the back face.

 If you have white front and blue top, or blue up face, then you're going to have a yellow back face.

 So, you just pretend as if you're looking at the face before applying any moves.

 So, if you get a B, then, you know, the white is still your front, so you're going to do a B.

 The three sides that it's easy to do notation with is the up, front, and right,

 which are also the most commonly used moves, because most people are right-handed.

 The other three moves that are a little harder to deal with are the D moves, the L moves, and the back moves.

 Turning all of those are counterintuitive, because if you're turning the front face clockwise like this,

 you'll think that turning the back face clockwise is in the same direction.

 When you're looking at it, clockwise is the opposite of what you would think when turning it from the front.

 So now, if you'll click the link at the bottom of your screen here, or in the description, on your right,

 you will be taken to the first step in solving the cube, which is solving the white cross.

 Next week is 4th of July and here in the US, it is a big day of celebration with barbecues and fireworks!

 When I first came to the US, I discovered and fell in love with chocolate brownies.

 But today, I'm going to show you how to make something even better than chocolate brownies.

 What could possibly be better than chocolate brownies, you would ask?

 After the butter is melted, add the chocolate and let it sit in for 1 minute.

 My chocolate is completely melted, but if it happens that your chocolate is not completely melted

 The last step is to fold in the flour in the chocolate mixture using a spatula in a circular movement.

 Use the flat beater of a standing mixer to mix all the ingredients of the cream cheese topping.

 First, mix the cream cheese with the sugar until it becomes creamy.

 Cover your brownies and put them in the fridge for at least 4 hours until they firm up.

 My name is David Contreras and today we are going to be performing stability workouts.

 Stability all it is, is creating an imbalance in your workout routine.

 That way you help use your minor muscle groups to activate and help you stabilize at an unstable

 The four workouts we are going to be doing is the single leg touchdown, the single leg

 lunge, the single leg shoulder press, and the opposite arm, opposite leg lift.

 Now what you want to focus on when you are starting this workout is you want to make

 You want to make sure it stays straight and even with the rest of your joints.

 Your shoulder joint, your knee joint, and your hip flexors to help you get proper form.

 What you want to do now is bring your right leg up, your opposite arm is going to come

 And you want to make sure you keep your back straight, the knees slightly bent.

 And that is a proper form for keeping your single leg touchdown routine.

 The second workout we are going to move into is the single leg lunge.

 One of the common mistakes that people do when they do lunge is they tend to lean too

 What this does is it puts too much pressure on the knee and it can increase injury.

 What you want to do is you want to make sure you drop down, keep a 90 degree angle right

 That way you can track your glutes, your hamstrings, and your quads properly without putting too

 The third exercise we are going to be moving into is the single leg shoulder press.

 What you want to do here is you want to get that right leg up, get a good 45 degrees.

 When you come up you want to start off here at a good 90 degrees and begin.

 For intervals you want to start off with a good 20 second interval.

 And then you want to make sure you keep your legs locked, your core tight because that's

 Now on this other side what you want to do is keep that 45 degree angle because that's

 also going to help you activate those other joints on the other side of the leg.

 Our fourth exercise is going to be the opposite arm, opposite leg lift.

 For beginners you're going to want to go ahead and start with a 20 second interval.

 And all you're going to do is you're going to bring your opposite arm, opposite leg,

 Your main focus here is to make sure you're contracting the glutes, your hamstrings, and

 your rear deltoids as you're also keeping your core tight to help you stabilize.

 The four exercises we focused on today was the single leg touchdown, the single leg lunge,

 the single leg shoulder press, and the opposite arm, opposite leg routine.

 These workouts are great to help you reduce joint injury and help you increase athletic

 If you have any further questions feel free to visit me at www.tbtpfit.com.

 Hi guys, my name is Christian and if you really want to see how I got this really cute twist

 Here are the products that I used in my hair, my spray bottle with water, my do it yourself

 shea butter and olive oil mixture and my contour argan oil leave in conditioner.

 I'm starting off freshly washed and detangled hair and I'm spritzing my section with water.

 I don't like my hair slightly damp or too wet so I try to find a healthy medium between

 And now I'm going to apply the same amount of shea butter to my hair repeating the same

 steps as before, smoothing it into my hair and finger detangling at the same time.

 And when twisting try to get each half of your twist perfectly equal.

 you having to borrow hair from one side as it gets slimmer towards the end of twisting.

 Remember that the direction in which you want your twist to fall is the direction in which

 And as I get nearer to the end when I can't grab the hair as well, I twirl it around my

 And again as you get nearer to the end when you can't grab the hair as well, twirl it

 As you can see, my hair is completely dry and I've already started to unravel my twist.

 So when separating your twist, untwirl the hair in the opposite direction in which you

 twisted it and then gently pull it apart and it will separate easily.

 You can see here why it's important to have equal halves when twisting the hair because

 And I don't really fancy it on my face so all I'm doing here is taking a bobby pin and

 Pre-finished floating floors are versatile and easy to install.

 anywhere including over concrete, wood, particle board, or existing tile.

 inspect the subfloor to make sure it's structurally sound and flat to within 1 eighth inch in 6 feet.

 When the floor is flat, roll out the 1 eighth inch foam sheets to cover the subfloor.

 demonstration, we're going to be installing a pre-finished floating floor which is an engineered

It's made up of multiple layers of plywood with a hardwood on top.

This is a floating floor so we will not fasten it to the subfloor in any way at all.

 We will fill the groove full of glue, put it down, knock it together.

 up the excess glue and be careful because it is a pre-finished product.

 materials at all times to avoid scraping the floor or spilling the glue.

 together by applying glue to the top inside edge of the groove.

 At the end of the row, use a pry bar to wedge the last board into place and secure the row.

 As with any tongue and groove flooring product, you want to flip your product to mark it when

So to keep all your seams staggered, you want to be sure that whatever's

 left over from your cut, you can use at your starter wall to keep all the seams staggered.

 we push the board against the wall tight, your tongue sticking out, you mark it right dead even

 with your other seam, you go cut it, you have your quarter inch gap.

 leaving a half inch expansion space, and cut the planks as needed.

 called upon to install many types of wood floors in different applications.

 follow the guidelines for a high-quality installation and take the time to do the job

 will stand the test of time, and satisfied customers who are glad to recommend you to

 It's easy to think that just because your hair isn't really long, you can't do much with it.

 But today I'm going to focus on the front and show you how I do a fringe braid which gives lots of impact to the front part of my hair.

 I already washed my hair with the Alberto Balsam Raspberry Shampoo and Conditioner.

 I knew I was going to blow dry my hair, so I used the VO5 Heat Protect Styling Spray.

 It's really important not to skip this step if you will be drying your hair because this helps protect the hair against high temperatures.

 I really like that messy textured look, so I'm going to be using a definition spray.

 It's a very, very lightweight, dry spray, so it doesn't add any heaviness to the hair.

 As you can see, I'm really focusing it on the fringe area because it helps to give a little extra grip and it makes it a lot easier when you're about to start braiding.

 Next, I just grabbed the fringe section of my hair and kind of pulled the rest to the back.

 I started the fringe braid as a regular braid just to get it going and it just made it easier.

 I'm just following the hairline of my forehead and then for each section, I grab a little bit more hair from either side of the braid.

 Because I like that messy look, I wasn't too worried about getting it perfect.

 I kind of ran out of hair to grab, so I just completed the braid as a normal braid.

 As you can see, I'm just braiding the rest of it almost to the bottom.

 All you need to do now is just secure the fringe braid with a hairpin.

 I usually just put one pin in one direction and then take another pin and kind of crisscross it because I feel like it's a little more secure.

 Then just brush the rest of your hair over top to hide the hairpins.

 To seal it all in, I'm using the TRESemme Volume & Lift Hairspray all over my hair and of course focused on the fringe braid just to make sure that it stays in place.

 One little tip I have is to spray a little bit of the hairspray onto your fingertips and smooth it over your fringe just to get any flyaways and just help to secure it and make it look a little bit more polished.

 I think it looks so cute and it also works if you're going to do a messy updo.

 Of course, you can dress this look up by curling your hair or doing a more sophisticated updo, but I think it's great as a casual style as well.

 Give it a thumbs up if you did and I will see you in my next video.

 Dollar Tree Gourmet, where we make gourmet meals out of ingredients you can find at the

 have been following, you know, Dollar Tree haulers, if you're a big Dollar Tree shopper,

 you may have picked one of these up in the most recent weeks or months at the Dollar

 today, then you may, and you don't have one yet and you want one, you may still be able

And I've adapted the recipe from the book that comes with the Stone Wave

If you cannot find cocoa powder at your Dollar Tree, go ahead and use chocolate

We're just going to cut down a little bit on the amount of sugar we put in if you

 you use chocolate milk, you know, the powdered chocolate milk mix.

You're also going to need one and a quarter tablespoons of vegetable

 from, you know, baked onions to sweet potatoes to all kinds of things.

 that we're using today that I've modified to make Dollar Tree Gourmet is going to be

 all of the ingredients that I had except for the chocolate chips in a glass bowl here.

 And I'm just going to give everything a good whisk and get it all thoroughly combined.

 Next I just added four tablespoons of our chocolate chips and it says to stir everything

Okay, the final step is just going to be to put it right into the Stone

 it on and then it says to microwave the whole thing just like this for two minutes and 15

 the cake out of the Stone Wave and I split it up here between two bowls, one serving

Sorry, I'm getting a little bit of fog on the lens there, but I tasted

 to do is just serve ours with a little bit of ice cream on top and then dessert is done.

 do enjoy my videos, please do subscribe and I will talk to you soon.

 I found many recipes on how to make cavatelli for wheat based flour.

 people just add flour and water, some add flour, water and eggs or ricotta cheese.

 So seeing how I can't use any wheat based flour, I'm going to be using the

 you'll have tapioca flour, brown and white rice flour, millet flour, potato

 starch, xanthan gum, room-temperature eggs, olive oil and salt.

 food processor and pulse it for a few seconds so everything is combined.

 together the eggs and the olive oil and you're going to slowly pour this through

 going to begin adding water, one tablespoon at a time, through the chute.

 sticky so I didn't have to add any flour but if it does get sticky just add a

 remaining dough back on the plastic so that it doesn't dry out.

I don't have it perfected to the same length but you want them the

So as you can tell you can see the nice marks from the gnocchi board.

 flour cookie sheet and I'm going to continue making the rest of them.

So again just push it into the back of the dough, push, drag and roll.

 length but they're pretty much consistent on the thickness and they

 In this video I'm going to show you how to clean your inlet manifold on your Volkswagen

 I've seen a couple of videos on YouTube where people use oxygen and acetylene but this is

 So this is what can build up in your intake manifold as you're driving day to day, the

 fuel, the air, all that sort of stuff can cause this sort of build up in your intake

 This will harm your economy or harm your general running of your car and put stress on other

 On the tin it says you should leave it on for 20 minutes but I suggest you leave it

 on a little bit longer than that because it is made for oven deposits, not carbon so to

 So leave it on there a little bit longer than usual than it says on the tin because it can

 Once you've sprayed it all up, you spin it around, I did the outside as well because

 The ports will empty out so fill them back up again and just wait, just continuously

 Then it's just a matter of having a jet wash or renting one or going to your local car

 Now in all honesty I had to do this twice because like I said I only left it on for

 the 20 minutes but if you left it on for longer you'd only need to do this once.

 This part you really need to get inside the port with the jet wash itself.

 The oven cleaner only really loosens it up and gets it to a gummy texture but the power

 So make sure you get it all in there and this is why you have to leave it there for a little

 You've got to remember that's had hundreds of thousands of miles of grease and oil and

 As you can see you could probably do it again but this was good enough for me.

 Hi guys, I'm Charlotte with Abbeyteen and today we're doing an uptown bun.

 The supplies you will need for this hairdo are just some regular rubber bands and a small

 clear elastic and a brush and a comb as usual and some hairspray to help hold your bun.

 Ok, this fall and winter something that is very popular are top knots and buns.

 And so today I'm going to show you a bun that has a french braid up into a top knot or a

 And to start, a tip for me, at least it works for me, I have to sit whenever I'm doing this.

 So you're going to start, you're going to flip your hair down and you're going to take

 your comb or your brush and you're just going to smooth out your hair.

 And I'm going to do a reverse french braid or a cornrow or whatever you guys want to

 And you're going to start at the very bottom of your neck, start with a really small piece

 of hair and you're going to split into three sections like that.

 And what really helps with this is, see how I'm starting up in the middle of my head?

 I want to try to start as close to my neck as possible so that I get more braid.

 Okay and with a reverse french braid, all you do is you take a section of, your three

 sections of hair, you grab a section of hair along with it and you bring it under and sit

 And this hairstyle will probably take you a few tries until you get it.

 And now I'm just going to tip my head and gather all my hair up into a top ponytail.

 Alright and now I have my ponytail and so I'm going to do a messy top knot.

 And to do a messy top knot there are a few ways but this is the one way I'm going to

 You're going to take your ponytail and you're just going to twist it and then you're just

 And then you take another elastic, a rubber band, and you place it around like this.

 And then you loosen it out a little bit, make it a little messy.

 And if you have pieces that you don't like or something like that then you take a bobby

 Okay and now you have your adorable top knot that just adds a perfect little touch to your

 I really enjoy this hairstyle because number one it's easy and it definitely gives a special

 Hope you guys have enjoyed this easy tutorial and hope you guys have a great week.

 Okay stay tuned for next week because next week I will have a video on my Halloween and

 If you guys noticed I have some like, wear some stuff on my hand.

 It's because we had a Halloween party this week and for my Halloween costume which you

 guys will see next week, I had to have it and it didn't quite come off all the way in

 Hi everyone, I wanted to make a video talking about how to create a little more depth and

 A lot of times it's kind of difficult to create that depth and texture because the acrylic

 paints dry really flat and a lot of times they're a little more opaque than oils so

 So what I'm going to do is show you an easy way to do that with the grass here.

 Okay, I'm going to be using a flat brush, just a basic flat brush to create the grass.

 What I did is I used a yellow and black to create a kind of a tonal greenish color down

 here below and what I want to do is start layering the colors so I get a lot of texture.

 When you look at grass in nature, a lot of times it has a lot of variations in color

 So the first thing you're going to need is a misting bottle with water in it and we want

 You don't need to spray a ton of water, just enough to give it a nice little layer.

 Also you want to mist, I'm using yellow ochre here, you want to mist that as well just lightly

 And why we're using water is what that will do is thin the paint out enough so where it's

 more transparent and when we add it to the brush it's really thin and then when we come

 down here we can just kind of lightly brush in where we want highlights and the water

 on the canvas as well as the water in the paint will make the paint a lot thinner.

 As you can see as you go over and start layering, you can still see through to the background.

 So as you add more paint it gets less transparent and brighter.

 So in order to create even brighter highlights all you do is you add more paint to your brush

 and just lightly brush over the wet canvas and you'll start getting brighter highlights.

 The water also acts as a nice little medium that makes the paint go on smoothly so you

 don't get any of those little rough looking canvas bumps in your painting.

 So just go along over the areas that you sprayed and just very lightly layer the paint on and

 that will give a nice textured look to your paint and it will give you a more natural

 So when you go to add another layer what you need to do is allow this to dry because if

 you spray while it's still wet you might start to get to be runny or blurry so you want to

 Spray another layer of water, brighten up your color, maybe you want to use a little

 bit of white with your yellow and that will brighten up the color or maybe you want to

 All you need to do is just spray the water as one layer, put your paint on, let it dry

 and then layer again and continue adding those layers to create a lot of depth and you'll

 If you want to learn more about painting with acrylics visit my website www.timgarner.com.

So for the last day of picnic themed week, we're making some healthy and delicious pasta salad.

 And I'm using this super cute striped pasta that pairs so wonderfully with all of these fresh veggies.

 And I'm actually quite picky about salads, but the veggies that we're using today taste so delicious together

 and this is a dish that will really really fill you up, but it'll also keep you feeling refreshed and energized on your picnic.

 So you want to boil the pasta in a pot of salted boiling water for as long as directed on the package.

 And so I'm using this striped pasta, and if you'd like some, I'll try to find a link online and I'll link that in the description box below.

 Then drain and rinse the pasta in cold water to stop it from cooking.

 And don't worry if it doesn't melt right away, it'll melt once we add the vegetables at the end.

 Then while the pasta is cooking, melt 5 grams of butter in a large pan over medium heat.

 Add the broccoli, asparagus and zucchini and cook just until the veggies turn a vibrant green and are just tender, for about 5 minutes.

 Remove the pan from the heat and add the peas, corn and tomatoes.

 Then add the vegetables and salt and pepper to the pasta, mixing gently to combine.

 When you're ready to serve it, grate some fresh parmesan cheese on top and top with some fresh parsley, and you're done!

 A new theme week starts on Monday, and next week I'll actually be in LA and at VidCon on Thursday, Friday and Saturday.

 So if you're coming to VidCon and see me, make sure that you say hello because I would love to meet you!

 If you've seen that fire kit video I made you will see that this was in there.

 You just don't want to bang it too much of course because it is very light weight.

 But it comes in handy and today we are going to do a small demonstration.

 I don't know if you can see that very well but you can see that it's burning.

 And bacon makes its own grease so you know it's going to cook in there.

 I just figured I would make this quick video just to show you that the sterno stove works

 Getting the water to boil to a rolling boil was about 32 minutes.

 And as I said, boiling water, you can heat it really well in a matter of minutes.

 It doesn't come to a rolling boil at all until about 30-32 minutes.

 I don't want to have you waiting around to watch something cook.

 But that's to prove to you that the sterno stove does work very well.

 So just the other day, the Victoria's Secret Fashion Show aired and I'm absolutely obsessed

 They always have such creative looks going on and the girls are absolutely gorgeous.

 It's not too dark, so it's definitely wearable on an everyday basis.

 I saw a video with their makeup artist doing the model's makeup and I decided to make my

 So for this look I used a lot of browns and a little bit of gold.

 There's a lot of duplicates you can also use for the eyeshadows.

 So before I start this tutorial, I just wanted to thank all of my new subscribers.

 I know I've been off my YouTube game for a while, but I'm back now so I'm going to be

 So if you want to see how a certain jewelry piece is made or how to cut up a shirt, just

 I'm actually on Instagram is where you can find a lot of my eyeshadow looks.

 I have a Greek series where I'm inspired by fraternity and sorority colors.

 So to start off, you're going to want any eyeshadow primer or concealer.

 I'm just going to use this concealer from Bitch Slap Cosmetics and this is in light.

 I'm just going to be putting that all over my lid all the way up to my brow.

 Alright, so once you have your base down, I'm going to be taking this light brown color

 from the Kat Von D Saint palette and this is the color Pray For Me.

 So you're just going to take some of that color on a flat shader brush like this and

 Okay, so next I'm going to take this MAC eyeshadow and it's in bronze and I'm going to be taking

 So the reason I'm using this smaller brush is so I can concentrate the color and I'm

 And once you've placed the bronze color right there, you're just going to take a fluffy

 brush like this and you're just going to blend it out and you're basically taking it in to

 And what I like to do is just build up that color, so I'm just going to take the same

 And then right after that, I'm just going to take that fluffy brush again and just go

 over that first eyeshadow that we put on and just blend that out so it's a little bit smoother.

 So just to darken up the look a little bit, I'm going to take a small eyeshadow brush

 and I'm going to take this really dark brown color from the Kat Von D palette and I'm just

 And then you're just going to take that fluffy brush again and just blend that out.

 And next I'm just going to take that bronze color again and I'm just going to be putting

 Okay, so the last eyeshadow we're going to use is from this Too Faced Natural Eye Palette

 And I'm just going to take that small brush again and I'm going to take that color and

 just go right on the inner corner and this is what's going to really open your eye up.

 And then finally, just to highlight under the brow, I'm going to take the color Heaven

 from the Too Faced palette and I'm just going to put it right under the eyebrow.

 Alright, so next I'm going to take this black liquid liner and I'm just going to take that

 So what I'm going to be doing is just drawing a wing at the end and bringing it all along

 And make sure whenever you put on liquid liner just have a light hand while you're doing

 it and try to make the line as thin as possible because you can always build on after you

 Okay, so the final step is to put on mascara on the top and bottom lashes.

 I know the actual Victoria's Secret models put on individual lashes and that's a little

 more time consuming and I'd rather just put on strip lashes just because it's quicker.

 So I'm going to go ahead and put these on and I'll be right back.

 Alright, so that's about it for this Victoria's Secret eyeshadow look.

 I really hope you guys try it out and if you aren't already, definitely follow me on Instagram

 because that's where I post a majority of my looks and also all of the creative stuff

 Alright, thank you so much for watching and until next time, I'll catch you guys later.

 The rest is all in the clothes and you can hang very comfortably.

 Here you can see that Saskia takes the strings, one of the two strings, out of the pocket

 Now she takes out the second string and hangs this also in the ring.

 And somewhere on one third of the height she is going to place a ring.

 And this ring can connect it higher or lower depending on how high you want to have your

 And the hoodie support is coming on the same place as the back support is.

 And now you can sit by taking the bar and just going like this.

 Hi guys, today I will bring you part 2 of the makeup fusion that I did with Natasha

 She's a Dominican makeup artist and she did this wearable party makeup look.

 Then I applied a bald cap and did some makeup to create that bald cap effect.

 Then we removed that natural makeup that we had applied on the bald cap because we needed

 to apply this proper color and if we would remove the previous color it would go all

 Well basically all that I did was apply a wet color as you can see this pigment when

 you apply them wet enhances the color and this particular color is pretty awesome.

 You're going to see it after I work with it because depending on where the light hits

 So now I'm applying it wet on this part and then before it dries I'm blending the edges

 and then I will apply the pigment dry as I'm applying it here now.

 And when you see the model move her head you will see that in some places you will see

 that purple kind of pinkish color and then when she turns her head like right now on

 This pigment is absolutely amazing because when you blend it or when you give it luster

 after it's dry the purple underneath that black will come out as you can see on the

 Nina applied a little bit of powder because I was going to use a lot of pigments on the

 So I'm just blending a little bit of pinks and changing the previous makeup to make it

 I used a bright almost neon pink on her cheekbones and applied a lot of dots on the tutorial.

 Every time I do dots I remember myself of Robin Moses nail art.

 I'm applying some ultra opaque black pigment to do the designs, the eyeliner and I'm just

 here applying a little bit of green on the center of the lips and also on the inner corner

 I'm using this pigment wet and then I'm just applying the other pigment, the dark purple

 I'm applying some of the color and as soon as I apply it I blend it with another brush

 I'm also applying some dry pigment, that same pigment but dried.

 As you can see it has a little different color and that's why I used it wet in some parts

 and then dried in some parts because it gives a total different effect as you can see.

 I'm continuing doing some swirls with the ultra opaque black, with the white and also

 with the same pink that I applied on the cheekbones but since I'm applying it wet it

 I'm just applying the Laca Espejo, this is kind of like a gloss but it's so shiny that

 Now I'm just applying some shimmers that accentuate the makeup in all the senses and

 I don't know if you have noticed that when you take photos or sometimes in video the

 So yeah I hope you enjoyed this tutorial, this fusion with Natasha Nina makeup artist.

 Hi everyone, people have been emailing us asking about how to preserve herbs and spices

 and things like this and we were just over at our friend Wiley's house, he was showing

 But Wiley showed us how you can use the microwave to store, preserve, dry mint.

 And mint around here grows like a weed so we just kind of let it go through the yard.

 Anyway, we let mint grow just about anywhere so we're going to pick a bunch of it and we're

 going to microwave it and dry it and we'll show you how to do it.

 I think they're different kinds, I think the kind over here is different from the kind

 Yes, there's spearmint, there's peppermint, and then there's the yellow lavender.

 Okay everyone, so we just came back from the country and we were harvesting a bunch of

 different herbs and stuff and I thought let's try and dry herbs.

 We got a lot of email from people going, hey how do you dry herbs?

 One fellow on the greenhouses emailed me a couple times and he puts herbs on the dashboard

 So my buddy Tony here, one of my best friends, is running the camera.

 So I got these chives here and I really like to use scissors because it's a lot easier

 But we're gonna cut this into small pieces or relatively small pieces.

 Now I'm wondering, can you do the mint, could we do it right on the, leave it on the stem?

 Basically, you hold it up at the tip here and then just kind of hold your fingers around

 It's not gonna be perfect, but you know, what isn't GardenFork?

 So it's kind of like, you can also do this with rosemary, oregano, things like that.

 I think you could use parchment paper with this or even paper towels.

 But parchment paper's kind of expensive and we always have wax paper laying around.

 So I think we should have this pulse on and off, not at the super high setting.

 So I'm gonna try this at, what do we say, half power for three minutes and see what

 So it's been very exciting, Tony and I have been watching chives spin.

 I bet we could do it longer at a lower power and we get a better drying rate out of this,

 The whole apartment smells like chives right now, because we've been microwaving chives.

 Let's see what happens, but this is, you know, a simple way to do it.

 We were just talking about drying tomatoes and you can dry tomatoes in the oven.

 You know, maybe we'll do that at some point, but that's a big job.

 So again, you know, you don't need a lot of complicated equipment.

 And then, you know, you get yourself one of these jars like this and put them in there.

 Anyway, we're gonna go to the dog store and she's gonna get a little dog toy now.

 Do you have like a cool way to preserve herbs or some other cool thing you want to share

 When you sign up in the greenhouse, you have your own blog too, by the way, which is really

 Sometimes kids are afraid of snakes, so if you give them this one, he kind of looks like

 So we're going to make two loop twists, starting at the non-end.

 I like to use either the tie-dye balloons that look like this, or sometimes I get these

 So we're going to split this in half, top to bottom where the knot is.

 I always save my scraps, well at least the red ones, because I use them for tongues.

 When I'm sitting around on Facebook or TV, I just have some spare time, I'll take these

 and I'll trim the ends of them so they look like a forked tongue.

 You can either do scary eyes, but since he's a silly snake, I'm just going to do swirls

 And then, instead of him just being this long, straight snake, we turn him into a pretzel.

 We're going to demonstrate some techniques from our Charlie Foot style.

 The technique we're going to demonstrate today is called Siu Kao Da, and it stands for the

 So, I'm going to demonstrate the technique as you might see in the form, and then we're

 going to work it against grabbing techniques, punching technique, and locking technique

 The technique by itself first, what you see in the form, might be from a position here,

 stepping back in a cat stance, rolling, pressing with the palm, pulling back in a chamber.

 And it would follow with Chop Choy or another common technique that you might find in our

 What I want to do is I want to be able to get out of the grab, which he's got a good

 That's going to create some distance to avoid getting hit, and it also creates some tension

 The same way we did Gua, like Gua Choy coming up, just like that.

 When his hand rolls up, alright, I want to be able to press against the back of the arm

 against the elbow, where he's not going to have the leverage to respond, and I want to

 So, I want to use, from here, Chop Choy in the neck to the body from the inside, or the

 So, when I'm grabbed, I want to be able to get into the neck here, or into the body.

 The next way we'll demonstrate the technique is off a straight jab, so for a boxer stance.

 I may not have the quickness to be able to move back, so what I want to be able to do

 is use good head motion, alright, and step to the side as the jab comes out.

 So, the jab comes out, I want to be here, and at the same time, I'll employ the same

 technique, Siu Kao Da, and we'll see how that works in a punching situation.

 I've got a lot of styles using the outside Gua, but I want to be able to roll it here.

 I'm not trying to make maximum impact or anything, I just want to bring up the shield.

 Remember, the jab doesn't have that much force going side to side.

 From here, again, I want to use a cover, alright, and I want to be able to shoot to the neck

 A lot of people have a preference for turning to get maximum power.

 I think you have to be pretty skilled at getting a good torque to be here.

 So, what I recommend for a lot of people in the beginning is just focus on a little more

 People come in here, this way both hands will still get some use out of the technique afterwards.

 So, we come in for that punch again, I'm here, cover, and pop right in.

 The last way that we'll demonstrate the use of the technique today is probably the way it got its name.

 Kum Na is the same word as Chin Na, which you'll hear in Mandarin, and it's joint locking.

 This is probably how the technique got its name, Siu Kau Dao, which is the small trapping strike.

 And again, this is a situation where if there's a lot of styles who are heavily into joint locking,

 I have a free hand, you know, the position by itself is equal to turn my arm,

 or has a lot of weaknesses, you know, once I'm able to turn the elbow,

 So, from this type of grab, the way the technique gets its name is to come from here.

 Whether I side step or step back and cat, I want to be able to come in this position.

 Let's hold with two hands, and I want to be able to come this way.

 Now, once I make this turnover, which is really all leverage based on me,

 because I use the point of the elbow, he can grab pretty hard in this case,

 and again, all I'm using is the turn of the elbow, I'm already putting pressure against the thumb.

 And it is definitely a way for the smaller guy to get out of a grab or a strong person's hold.

 Comes out, alright, the hand I'm going to cover with is going to come here.

 and I've got all the free areas and free targets to strike from.

 and then we extracted some practical applications of how it might be used in more realistic situations,

 whether it be self-defense, whether it be sport, MMA, or even just classroom practice.

 You'll see the technique Chop Choy on one of our other video clips,

 It'll also probably dispel a couple of myths between knuckle striking, flat fist striking,

 Riley, myself, Sifu Michael Perela from Masterclass Kung Fu Centers.

 First what we're going to need for this recipe is a rub for the chicken.

 So if you're going to be doing one you can cut this recipe in half

 You have root beer chicken or cola chicken if you've got the kids.

 So instead of using beer you can use a can of cola and a can of root beer.

 Okay, next thing you've got to do is put your chicken on your beer can.

 On each one of the cavities here so when it starts steaming you won't lose any of that steam.

 And all the steam will stay in there and you'll get that good flavor of the beer.

 So if you don't have a potato you can use an onion or anything that will hold that cavity still.

 Don't be afraid to put a lot of rub on there because that's what's going to make it oh so good, my friends.

 Okay, my friends, after this we've got to go down to the grill and turn it on.

 It's going to take maybe an hour, hour and a half, maybe two hours to get this done.

 You get it reading at 400 degrees, it's time to put your beer can chicken on.

 Most people make a mistake of putting their chicken on the lit side.

 The thing you've got to do is put your chicken on the side that's off.

It might take an hour, hour and a half, maybe two hours to cook.

 Okay my friends, as your beer can chicken is cooking, you can put on your beans.

 And the next thing you've got to do is cook the salt potatoes, which is easy.

 Okay my friends, after that, put them on the stove, fill it with water.

 We'll go check the chicken every 15 minutes to see how it's doing.

 The chicken's done, salt potatoes are done, the beans are done.

 Hey guys, recently I went down south and I fell in love with their pralines.

 So what you will need for this southern treat is a cup and a half of chopped pecans, one

 cup of white and brown sugar, four tablespoons of butter or a half a stick, a half a cup

 Before you do anything at this stove, you're going to want to take a cookie tray, line

 it with aluminum foil, and spray it with non-stick cooking spray.

 First you'll need to add your brown sugar, your white sugar, and your evaporated milk

 Throughout this whole process you'll have to keep a constant stir going on or your ingredients

 It's a pretty good arm workout actually, which is great because this is definitely not a

 Continue to stir your mixture for about five minutes or until you've reached a boil.

 Once your butter has completely melted, take your pot off of the heat, pour in two tablespoons

 of vanilla extract, and then you need to start briskly stirring your mixture.

 You have to keep up a good pace throughout this or your mixture could start to harden

 Keep on stirring your candy mixture for about two minutes or until you notice it start to

 Once it has reached that thicker consistency, you need to immediately bring your pan over

 to your prepared cookie sheet and start scooping out the candy.

 You definitely have to move fast at this point because it hardens really quickly.

 When you have all of your candy scooped out, let them sit for at least a half an hour.

 After they've hardened to the touch, your delicious southern melt in your mouth treats

 I think these make for a really cute gift idea, but I've got a feeling once you've tried

 I hope you enjoyed the video and make sure to subscribe to my channel for more videos

 Hello, my name is Dawn Schaefer from LearnToKnitAndCrochet.com and I want to show you how I use these knit

 I made this one myself and what I ended up doing, you can use them with just this key

 I decided to add a claw hook and I use these as a row marker also for when I knit and crochet

 because you can easily open them up, count your stitch, 1, 2, 3, 4, count however many

 This to me has a double purpose and I just really enjoy this because of that flexibility.

 You can buy these things easily at Michaels, Joann Fabrics, Walmart, any place basically

 So here I basically use this for my socks right now for when I have trouble finding

 So I have knit to the middle and then these directions that I have say to knit 2 together,

 knit 2 together, slip purlwise over, then knit, then pass slip stitch over like this.

 This is in turning a heel on a sock, that's what I'm working on.

 Well where I turn the work, that's where the gap is going to be on this heel.

 So at this gap I will easily put this knit stitch marker here and then I have to pass

 this purl over and then I purl 5 across because I want to show you how you move it, how you

 So I'm purling right now and then the directions call for me to purl 2 together, then purl

 1 and I turn the row again and then there is to be a marker here but I actually have

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to go right across here, then knit until you get

 So I need 1 stitch before the gap, actually it looks like I'm 2 away, so 1, 1 more and

 And at this gap with 1 stitch away, slip purl 1 over, now I can take this marker off, okay

 like that, then knit 1, knit 1 and then I have to pass stitch, pass slip stitch over

 like so and then knit 1 again and that's where I have this other gap.

 So you pick up your knit stitch marker and you would turn, actually it goes on this other

 So if you have any questions feel free to come to my site at learn to knit and crochet

 Get it all saturated onto the paper towel and then just hold it down onto the sticker

The Naptha will go ahead and soften the glue and allow me to peel the

Now this sticker is going to be a little trickier because this is a vinyl sticker

 Don't use this around open flame because this is highly flammable.

 If you can see there there's still a bit of an outline from the

 what channel I'm doing this for yet because I have no idea what this is offhand.

 or anything because it was sent to my home address and not my PO box.

 inside here but... so you got some different kind of package here with a play mat and a

 here we have a sealed Pokemon booster case of... you can see there.

 some different promotional type packs of Emerging Powers to get through as well.

 Hi everyone, I'm Anya from Cooking With Plants and today we're going to make asparagus puffs,

 which only requires two ingredients and they're really quick to make.

 So I've basically rinsed off 12 asparagus spears and just snapped the dry ends off them.

 And they're about the length of a quarter of a piece of puff pastry.

 Still got it on this plastic just so it doesn't stick to the bench.

 And I'll get the first sheet, which is a little bit more defrosted.

 So I basically pulled these out of the freezer two minutes ago.

 They thaw out very quickly and you want to work pretty quickly.

 Okay, so just as a tip, you'll see if it's not thawed out enough, it's going to start to crack.

 So just wait for your sheet to be quite smooth and easy to bend.

 So just wait for it to defrost for another half a minute or so.

 In the meantime, while you're rolling your asparagus spears, you want to preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit,

 If you've come home from work and you're tired, it will only take 2 seconds to make.

 Okay, so just at the end you could put curry powder or any type of seasoning you like, nutritional yeast to give it a cheesy flavor.

 Okay, we're just going to put them on a baking tray on some non-stick paper.

 Okay, our 20 minutes is up, so I'm going to turn the oven off and take these out and we'll have a look.

 And just as a couple of dipping sauces, we've got some tamari and just a chili sauce as well, just a bottle of chili sauce.

 So whatever you want to have with them, they are very, very quick and easy to make and delicious.

 And I think I have a little helper here that wants to have a taste.

 And if there's any particular recipes that you're after for your family, post below, let me know and we'll see what we can come up with.

 And what's left over, you make a good sandwich on a hero bread.

 Another one of the flavor enhancing components of a stock or broth is a standard bouquet

 There are a couple different schools of thought on it, but it always involves vegetables of

 So what you want to do is take a few parsley stems, sprig of thyme, a bay leaf, and you're

 And what you can do after you tie it is you'll submerge it in your stock or your broth, and

 you can tie the string to the side of the pot, and it will hold it until it's thoroughly

 Now we have a nice little package, which you can hang from the side of the stock pot.

 Standard sachet de piece, bay leaf, garlic clove, some parsley stems, sprig of thyme,

 We're going to tie it up, just twist it around to secure it so it doesn't come loose while

 Right before we add it to the stock, we're going to take the butt of our knife.

 To release the aromatics in the sachet, we're just going to take it and crush it.

 The toe drag is really good for pulling the puck in close to your body.

 In some dekes, you want to pull the puck in close to your body so you can protect it.

 The closer it is to your body, the better it is at protecting you.

 For the toe drag, you're just using the toe of the blade of your stick and you're pulling

 the toe drag, and I'm just going to show you how to do this in a game situation.

You use the toe drag, so the defenseman is going to play the puck.

 out there as if you can get it, then pull it in towards your body.

So right there, even if Ken hits the puck and I lose it, I can still

 Here's when I sort of push the puck towards him as if I'm going to give him the puck, and then I

So you can kind of fake one move, like you're going to push it through his legs and then

 In this situation, say the defenseman puts a stick down to block a pass or to try to

 I'll just show you a few times here, just pulling it using the toe drag

 using the game because you want to master this before you try it in a game.

 Practice in front of you and to your side like I talked about earlier.

 it if you're the last man back, because if you lose the puck, you're basically giving the other guy a breakaway.

 If you want to learn exactly how to do this move in detail, check out our video how to do the toe drag.

 You know, Jamie, it says here one of the nicest things about Miami is how close it is to the

 Venezuela, which happens to be home to the finest chocolates in the world.

 These transfer sheets have cocoa butter and some food coloring.

 Place a transfer sheet and then this, and you put it over like a magnetic.

 We put a little bed, and then we try that the chocolate goes all the way.

 And if any drips off, it goes right back into the machine so there's no waste, right?

 When they're out, pour the excess out of the mold to make a shell.

 And you're going to fill that chocolate box with the passion fruit.

 Some people say, oh, they're so beautiful, I don't want to eat them.

 And I always say, only until you eat them and you want to eat them all.

 We ship the whole year with ice gel packs frozen because Miami's too hot.

 This is Julie O'Dell for CraftTestDummies.com at CHA Winter 2013 in the Beadalon booth with

 It's a beading loom and I'm so excited to share it with everyone.

 It actually got in the top 20 for the Craftin' Hobby Innovations, which is super, super,

 So first of all, if you need glasses, put those on, which I do.

 So if you're familiar with bead work that was done on an Indian bead loom, this would

 be very similar, except for most of those looms are made out of wood and this one is

 So I'm just going to take the metal rod and put those into the holes so that you can create

 I've taken my wildfire, which is this really cool stringing material, and I've tied it

 And then I'm going to take that, place it into the first groove, and then we're just

 Now, most looms you would just go all the way around, but you would waste oodles of

 So I created the little button and then we're just going to come back up and over, skip

 a groove, and we're just going to continue to build our warped base until we have seven

 So I'm going to go ahead and put this to the side and show you what it looks like next.

 I actually have five warped threads because I'm building a thinner band.

 So there's four beads, which means I would need five warped threads.

 I'm going to take my needle and thread, pick up those beads, slide them down, and then

 We're just going to pop those beads in between each warped thread.

 Give it a little tug, take the needle and thread, you're going on top of the warped

 And if we could see that, you'll see where the thread's coming out between the second

 So I'm just going to pick up three seed beads, a decorative bead, and then three more seed

 You could pick up six seed beads for a bigger loop, eight for a really wild look, which

 And then this time, I'm coming up between the fifth and the sixth bead.

 The bead police will not come to get you if you don't come up in between the beads that

 So once again, we're just going to pick up, let's do six this time.

 So we'll do three, four, five, six, a decorative bead, six more seed beads.

 And we're just going to go in, whoopsie, through the fifth and out the sixth, and there's our

 And usually you don't want to be working with like 20 looms that are surrounding you here.

 And lookit, where's my bracelet we're teaching in class tomorrow?

 If I'm a hassler kind of character, I'm up here, I'm shoving around, grab ahold of this

 So I'm shoved, I'm just getting out of the way where I can drill right in there.

 That makes him kind of upset, in which case I can come here and I get right out of the

 As I get out of the way, I'm hitting here and I'm on the side of the knee where I can

 So the timing, let me show you how it doesn't work if we do it slow motion.

 If I, oops, I can't reach him if I'm trying to go when he's pushed so I have to collapse

 So what I need to do is fit around the arm this way where I can go ahead and drive in.

 If he's shoving in and I try to use rigidity, back up, no it's not working.

 Same arm, same arm, same space, same physics, whole different result.

 Hi, I'm Lauren and today I'm going to show you how to put together the David's Bridal

 So the reason I'm making this video is because I had to make these bows for my wedding invitations

 So I have my invitation here and I have my pre-cut ribbon from David's Bridal and I'm

 You want to make sure one side is a little longer than the other side.

 So first you're going to just tie a knot and you want the longer side to go down towards

 Next you're going to make a loop with the longer side and hold it up.

 You're going to bring the shorter side around the loop clockwise and then under here, under

 this flat part and then back around through the back of the loop.

 Don't put it through the loop where you're going to untie your whole bow.

 So you're going to put it around here clockwise just like that.

 You can see it's under and then it goes through the little hole here.

 Then you're going to try to reach through on the other side and grab it.

 So as I pull it, one side gets tighter, this knot is getting tighter.

 Don't worry if every bow doesn't come out the same way because it's not.

 In this video, I'm going to show you how to make arequipe turnovers, which are dulce de

 And now that you know how to make dulce de leche, we can make these.

 And at the end of the video, I'm going to leave you the link for the recipe where you

 And I heard that if you add one egg yolk to your arequipe, it won't explode.

 We're going to take one pastry sheet and put it on a floured surface.

 And then we're just going to stretch it out about one inch on all four sides.

 And we're going to add about one tablespoon of the arequipe in the center of each square.

 And then we're going to brush the edges with an egg wash, which is one egg beaten with

 We fold over each square over the arequipe and then we seal it with our fingers.

 We're also going to take the egg wash and brush the top of each turnover.

 And we're going to bake these at 350 degrees for 20 minutes on a cookie sheet that's been

 And then after 20 minutes, this is what they're going to look like.

 And as you can see, the egg yolk trick did not work, but these were delicious.

 Don't forget to subscribe to this channel and you can click here for the arequipe turnovers

 If you want to watch more videos, you can click on the video that's playing right now

 I wanted to create a somewhat dramatic look using shimmery browns.

 If you guys like to learn this look, stay tuned for the tutorial.

 I'm using MAC Soft Ochre Paint Pot all over my lid and underneath my lower lash line.

 Next we are going to take a shimmery brown eye pencil and we are going to smudge this

 We don't need to be too neat in applying this since we will be blending this along the way.

 Next taking a clean crease brush, we are just going to blend away any harsh edges we may

 If you have over blended the pencil, be sure to reapply as needed.

 And then taking a beige shimmery color, we are just going to apply this on the inner

 And then taking L'Oreal's Infallible Eyeshadow in Amber Rush, I'm just patting that on top

 This gives such a beautiful metallic effect on the lid that is perfect for those hot summer

 Using a warm brown eyeshadow, we are going to apply this on the crease area of the eye

 and make sure to blend this along the way so that you don't have any harsh edges whatsoever.

 Next, we are going to be taking a purple eye pencil and we are going to line the lower

 And don't forget to tight line as well with a black pencil liner.

 Next, we are going to take a purple eyeliner and we are going to use this to line the lower

 waterline and take a somewhat magenta color to set the purple liner that we laid out earlier.

 Don't forget to apply your highlight and to set the highlight color we laid out earlier

 Next, we are just applying the finishing touches which is lining the upper lash line.

 And don't forget to curl your lashes and apply your favorite mascara.

 To add some more definition to your face, don't forget to apply some contour color.

 You can use a bronzer or just a darker brown shade to just bring out the shadows in your

 Apply blush and don't forget to highlight the upper cheekbones as well.

 After you finish the rest of your face, don't forget to apply a nude lip and this is my

 Thank you guys so much for watching and I'll see you on my next video.

 And instead of doing the traditional, which is usually onions, sometimes mushrooms, celery,

 peppered farm stuffing maybe, stuffing in a bag, stovetop stuffing, whatever.

 And what I decided to do was try to get some kind of interesting sausage.

 I was able to find this really neat gourmet sausage in the grocery store

 And what we're going to do here is we're going to kind of just slit that casing open.

 And we're going to crumble that out of the casing, just like this, because you don't want your casing.

 And we're going to saute this in the pan, which means we're not going to need melted butter

 because we're going to get fat from this sausage, so we're not going to use melted butter at all,

 But basically, you are going, you can use a whole package of sausage for this, okay?

 I'm just going to chop this in half and add a handful of them right now.

 And this onion, just using like a golden onion, you can use a sweet Vidalia onion if you like.

 This is a really nice sharp steak knife that works, or you can use a paring knife as long as it's nice and sharp.

 I've got a nice big fat clove of garlic, about two cloves of garlic.

 And now I see that my oven is at temperature, so my vegetables are roasting really nicely.

 And one other thing I'm going to do, because I'm adding to this recipe.

 You don't have to do it, but you know, turkey, sausage and apple, whether it's turkey sausage, pork sausage,

And I've had it at brunch in quiches and I've had it in egg bakes and it just goes great together.

 I mean, it's going to cook more once you have it in your stuffing.

 And now I'm going to add my onion and my garlic because I want that to cook in with the sausage juices.

 I know in most traditional stuffings, you don't really have to do that.

 You just kind of chop your vegetables, throw them in and it cooks and that's fine.

 But I really like the fact that the browning really brings out the flavor.

 And I don't want it to be raw when it gets stuffed in because the turkey cooks slowly.

 And I also hope everybody knows out there, if you make your stuffing ahead of time, that's fine.

 Put your stuffing in the refrigerator in a closed container and stuff it in the morning right when it's ready to go.

 Because this is how people have gotten into trouble with seminal poisoning.

 The apples don't really have to be cooked because they're going to soften up very quickly in this.

 I recommend don't buying them seasoned because we're going to season this ourselves.

 And if you felt like you wanted to, if you want it to be more moist, everybody's got their own way of doing stuffing, you can add a little hot water.

 If you want it to sit there and let it get moist on its own before you decide to do that, you can even add apple juice for that matter.

 And the recommendation for this was a little bit of ginger powder.

 We'll be right back and we're going to check on our vegetables.

 He already jumped out of the sink onto the floor and made a lovely mess.

 This is a quick demo about how to make spiderweb designs on some baked goods.

 They're an easy way to turn an ordinary dessert into one spooky enough for Halloween.

 To make this design, you need two different colors of batter of the same consistency.

 For this pumpkin tart, I dyed a small amount of filling black with some cocoa powder.

 Pipe a large spiral of the darker color onto the lighter colored batter.

 Take your time and keep your hands steady, because you really only have one shot to do

 Once the spiral is in place, use a toothpick to make the design.

 Insert the toothpick at the center of the spiral and drag it through the filling towards

 You can make as many or as few lines as you like, but more lines usually makes the spiderweb

 Since this is a tart, I tapped the pan gently to settle the design and fill out any grooves

 The design holds during baking, giving me a great Halloween look in the finished tart

 You can also use this technique with frosting to decorate the top of a cake, but keep in

 mind that it works best with fairly fluid things like a ganache as opposed to a buttercream.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make a spiral sectional dread which is in sections

 What you want to do is wrap the black hair around the pink dread.

 So and then twisting counterclockwise and clockwise at the same time to lock these

 And since there's not a black left you want to take the pink that's left over and just

 I'm going to cook a vibrant Mediterranean dish of grilled halloumi with ratatouille.

 I'm going to cook the halloumi in this Panasonic CS8 steam combi oven.

 It's a convection oven, it's a microwave, it grills and it steams.

 For this recipe I've got some crushed garlic, oregano and olive oil

 and I'm going to use that to marinate the halloumi and the ratatouille vegetables.

 So the garlic goes straight into a bowl, a couple of cloves, some oregano, dried

 To this I'm going to add the halloumi and I've cut it into 2cm dice.

 Now halloumi cheese is from Cyprus and it's a semi-hard brined cheese

 normally made with sheep and goat's milk but sometimes can be cow's milk as well.

 Red peppers go in, cut the same size as the halloumi, mix that in and just add the courgettes.

 Ratatouille is a traditional dish from the south of France, from Provence

 and it's a mixture of aubergines, courgettes, peppers and tomatoes.

 I haven't put the tomatoes in this because I want everything to be quite firm and not too watery.

 Just gently mix the vegetables and the halloumi cheese in the oil and oregano so it's completely coated.

 Once the vegetables and the halloumi have been completely coated in the oil and the oregano and the garlic

 I'm going to cook it on the glass shelf at convection 220 plus grill 1 plus simmer microwave on the top shelf.

 While the halloumi and ratatouille is cooking in the oven I'm going to chop up some spring onions, nice and fine.

 Look at that, beautifully golden brown halloumi and the vegetables.

 And then I'm going to finish that with the chopped spring onions.

 We got our persimmons picked up the other night and we put them in the refrigerator

 for a few days just to hurry the process of getting ripe because they need to have a frost

 And you'll know they're ripe when the little cap comes off pretty easy.

 You can take the little skin off and just spoon it out like that.

 You don't want to wash the persimmons before you put them in the fridge, but you do want

 So the way I'm going to do it, I don't have any fancy utensils, so I'm going to put a

 whole bunch of them in my strainer, clean them off a little bit.

 That's why it helps to put a tarp or something down on the ground when you shake the tree

 Because if they're ready, they're going to be really, really mushy.

 Hopefully a plastic cup is what you'll use so you can mash this stuff into your strainer.

 And you're going to have to get at least a cup for most of your recipes.

 And you just mash it and mash it until it mashes the pulp down through the strainer.

 Now when you're looking at your American persimmons, like these small ones, they're called astringent

 And it's not good to eat a whole bunch of those without cooking them.

 They look like an orange plum, almost, almost like a small apple.

 Alright, I've been pulping this out, just using a cup and my strainer.

 If you want to, you can put it in a blender and blend it up real good, if you're funny

 But this is what you're going to end up with, just a mess of seeds and skins.

 And we're just going to put that in our little trash bowl right here.

 And we're going to start over, put another handful of persimmons in there.

 And I can't wait, because we're going to go to my grandma's house

 It's really a family tradition and everybody looks forward to it every year.

So back in India we do the puli karchal and it takes a long laborious process.

 But I found something quick and well we get instant powder but instant powder is very spicy or I find it's not very tasty.

 So I start with the ingredients here is fenugreek or methi seeds and here's a tamarind paste, just about one teaspoon.

 and I have channa dal and red chillies and I have a little bit brown sugar.

 And here I have the readymade mix, the puliyotharai mix you get in India or Indian store.

 The only thing I find is MTR, I have not seen any other brand like that.

 We're going to make the puli kachal or the paste for it and then mix it with rice.

 In the oil I fry the mustard seeds and the spices and then I add a little water and I add the tamarind and then I add the mix.

 Even if you have leftover, you can keep it in the refrigerator.

 So, chicken wings I am going to use is only going to be 1 pound.

 Is basically because if it's a whole kilo I will eat everything.

 Once you can see the bubbles like that when you spin it around.

 I am not seasoning nor am I doing anything to the chicken for this recipe.

 Depending on the heat setting and depending on the size of the chicken.

 And we are going to stir that around and wait for that to melt.

 is thank you very much for allowing me to present this dish to you

 But what the balloon does, it basically enhances your razor skills.

 Because if it dries up, it's going to be just like nicking a client.

 and I'm moving and positioning the client or the balloon the way that I want to.

 And that's two of the most important things when it comes down to razor shaving or straight razoring a client.

 And trust me, you're going to be like in a color purple type of situation.

 So what we want to do is, like I said, just show you how to practice.

 And as you can see, I'm just taking these nice strokes across the balloon.

 And this is going to allow you and help you to be able to perfect your skills.

 So remember, if you have any questions about any of the tips and tricks of the trades,

 please log on to RBF Faze at gmail.com or visit us at Razors, Blades and Faze.

 these darling boxes just from a piece of cardstock, so be sure you stay tuned.

 I'm starting with a 6-1-1 by 4-1-1 piece of cardstock from the Festival of Prince.

 I made sure the base or the bottom was 1-1-8 inch smaller than the top.

 I did an 1-1-8 inch difference because it's easy with the Simply Scored to do an 1-1-8 inch.

 If you want it to fit a bit tighter, a 1-1-16 inch would actually be a bit tighter.

 Once I made sure that the bottom middle was 1-1-8 inch smaller, I just decided how deep I wanted it

With this particular box, I'm using the top which is 4-1-1 by 6-1-1.

 I went around and did 1 inch all the way around on each side of the cardstock.

 You can use a bone folder if you want to make the sides more crisp.

 I'm going to cut up, and I know with the soundstooth pattern it's a bit hard to see,

 but I'm cutting on the fold and I'm going to cut a little sliver.

 Since I folded 1 inch in on each side, that makes the size of my box 2-1-1 by 5-1-1.

 That means I want to make the middle of my bottom 1-1-8 inch smaller on both sides.

 Remember how I trimmed on each end and then folded up the sides.

 maybe you put some treats inside for Christmas, that works really great.

 If you have any questions about how I made these little cardstock boxes,

 though and I made this dessert for the first time last week and it was really good.

 was really dense and I'm going to try and lighten it up a little bit this time by adding

 can find them in the description box or it could be on the website www.itsbeyondreality.com.

 If you put cold eggs in there, it's not going to get as light and fluffy so make sure they're

 do is mix the two of these together and let that dissolve in there.

 get all of the wet ingredients mixed together and then we'll check back.

 can definitely do it in a regular mixing bowl, it's just more work.

 call for two cups of whole almonds and that is equal to three of the crushed up almonds.

But if all you had was whole almonds, you could definitely put it in a food processor

I would like it to be a little more light and fluffy like a cake

Now they call for three quarters of a cup of light brown sugar but I'm using

 do is you just want to combine this before you put it into the wet ingredients and add

 it a little bit at a time because if you dump that whole thing into the KitchenAid,

 would say, a third at a time until it's incorporated and then we will get it in the oven.

 shrink a little bit as it cools but we'll let that cool off for a little bit and then

 This cake is probably better the next day when it's all cooled off and everything and

When it's hot you can't really tell but it does look pretty fabulous.

What I would do next time when I make this is not use 100% stevia in the recipe.

 I wouldn't use any more than say half stevia and half real sugar.

 to be enough to counteract the bitterness of the dark chocolate.

 And probably I would cook it about 5 minutes less because it's a little bit dry.

 We are making pickled cucumbers, which I love because it's so easy to make at home, so there's

 So I bought from my farmer's market the small pickles, and I love them because they have

 I boiled eight glasses of water with eight teaspoons of salt, and I don't want it boiling

 hot, so I'm going to keep it aside, and I'm going to start with the dill.

 And I'm just going to make a little cushion, and a little bit of black peppers, five cloves

 This recipe is the recipe of my grandmother, Hannah, and every time I go there to Jerusalem

 Even before she starts feeding us, you get a bowl with pickles.

 I told you it's my grandmother's recipe, but it's also my mother's recipe.

 My mother found out that if you want to make the whole procedure of curing faster, you

 So I'm using a gauze that's going to protect our cucumber, and I'm just going to soak it

 And what it does, basically, it helps with the fermentation of the cucumbers.

 And after two days, or even one day and a half, you have homemade pickled cucumbers.

 I know it's pretty, and you're probably very proud of yourself that you made them by yourself,

 Bob Fez here at New England Fish Market and Restaurant in beautiful Palm City, Florida.

 Got our yellow fin tuna here, number one yellow fin tuna from our market.

 We're going to let that sit for 30 minutes, then we'll add our other ingredients.

 All right, we've got our yellow fin tuna that's been marinating in lime juice.

 To that we're going to add some fresh diced tomatoes, some minced red onion, serrano or

 Some cilantro, a pinch of salt, one more squeeze of lime because we like it nice and limey.

 We're going to eat it with warm tortilla chips, another spritz of lime, and we're all good

 This is one of our favorite things at New England Fish Market and Restaurant, yellow

 We're going to take about a quarter pound each and we've just run a knife through them

 We're going to let that marinate, macerate for at least a half hour.

 What that does is the acid in the lime juice cooks the seafood and we let that rest and

 All right, we've got our shrimp and scallops marinate for 30 minutes.

 You can add your favorite ingredients, we're going to just try some of these.

 A little cilantro and just a tablespoon of olive oil, just to keep it all nice, moist

 We like extra lime, so we're going to give it a squeeze of fresh lime juice again.

 After we've tossed all the other ingredients and let it sit for a minute, we're going to

 It was posted by Vega Sney on her Instagram page and I think she picked it up from a model,

 I can't remember her name but this artist did it for a bridal look I think.

 Now it's too much, it's a little too much for me for a bridal look.

 I like to go on the natural side of things but I thought this was really phenomenal,

 It's a cut crease, simple, pretty simple and using a matte eyeshadow.

 So I've used today my Sleek makeup palette and also a Wet n Wild black gel liner to create

 On the lips I'm wearing Ruby Blue and a NYX Cosmetics lip gloss.

 So if you're interested in seeing how I accomplished this, stay tuned for the tutorial and feel

 free to follow me on my Instagram, my Twitter as well as my Facebook page.

 Alright, here as usual I'm starting with my eyeshadow base from NYX Cosmetics.

 You always want to apply that so that the eyeshadow has something to stick to.

 I am using a brush that comes with the liner to draw a line in the middle of my lid.

 Once that's done, I'm taking a fluffy brush and blending that black to eliminate the harsh

 I'll take the jumbo pencil from NYX to create that base that the eyeshadow is going to stick

 I'm taking a color from the Sleek Palette, Natural Color Looking.

 Then I'm taking that same brush that I used to draw the line to accentuate that line once

 Then I'm taking a powder to apply in the inner part of my eye and to the top as well.

 Keep doing that until you have the perfect line that you're looking for.

 Once that's done, I'm taking my L'Oreal Stiletto Liquid Liner and I'm putting that on top

 And this video I'm going to show you how to mix an entire grayscale with no black.

 And the reason why we don't use a lot of black is because when people start using black all

 the time, all their colors just start losing all their intensity and everything starts

 looking like charcoal-y and drab and you know, it's really to be avoided.

 And a lot of people like, you know, make different tones just by adding black to the color and

 So I'm going to make a black and show you how the big kids make black.

 You know Mac Black, like those business dudes that have those suits?

 And then the light catches them, they're kind of, get a little bit of brown action.

 That's the kind of black you want in your painting because it'll activate other stuff.

 So let's just go up to, you know, up the seesaw here, up the ladder.

 And you can see how gray this is looking, but there's no black.

 Now if we want to like jazz it up a little bit, because we're, you know, figure painting,

 And now these become possibilities for shadow colors, figure drawing.

 Now we have kind of like three different tones for figure painting.

 I have black here because I cheat and I make green with black sometimes if I want a really

 Add a little bit of yellow ochre if you want to make it more fleshy looking.

 Hey guys, so today I'm going to be showing you how I moisturise, seal and wrap my hair

So you don't necessarily have to do it this way but I'm just showing you how I

When I came home I started using the Hollywood Beauty Smooth In Hair Cream.

 my hair like this because I don't like my hair to be too greasy.

 was to section my hair like the way everyone else moisturises and seals, they section it

 and they start with different sections and they moisturise each section and seal each

 whenever I do that I wake up with like really greasy, damp hair and I'm just like, when

 I swift this way it just stays one place and I don't like that.

 a little moisturiser in and I think that's enough to be honest.

 need, I'll put however much I feel like I need but I start off with two pumps.

 I don't have a mirror behind me so I'm going to be using the viewfinder as a mirror.

So you can see that my edges are kind of grown, they've grown back.

I don't really think that castor oil is amazing but it did do something because

 or one of my vloggy videos, you see that my hair was something else.

 I don't mind because I'm putting my hair away very soon thank god.

As long as I feel like the products are worked into my hair, it's all good.

 I basically part my hair, like find a bit of my hair in the middle right here and just

 ear here, I part my hair again like this and get the hair I parted and swoop it this way.

 do need the aid of clips though because my hair is quite short so there will be some

 quite short in different areas because of the short haircut I had a while back.

And this just makes sure that the oils I just put in my hair don't all get dried

 And this basically makes sure that when I wake up the next morning and I don't have a lot to do, I just unravel my wrap and just brush it down and my hair is straight.

 And it also keeps my hair moisturised because all the oils are soaked in and they're trapped in.

 They're not going anywhere because the scarfs are either silk or satin which does not soak up oils.

 Hi YouTube, this is just going to be a very very quick video on how I got my rope twist.

 The plastic crunching you hear in the background is my daughter.

I actually twist from the root of my hair with the actual extension.

 Now I figured since I'm taking them out this would be a good time as any to show you guys.

 I've seen videos here on YouTube where some people take whatever amount of hair that they're

 going to twist and they split it in two and wrap both twists simultaneously.

 pictures of the twists but I did get a lot of compliments on them.

 of hair and I take the two that I've split and with one of them, I guess I'll go with

 my hair and the braid hair and once I get it twisted out far enough, not so much twisted

 out far enough, but where I know it's secure to where the actual braiding hair itself is

 the other hand, I start twisting the other end that doesn't have my hair in it the opposite

 for how my hair looks, but that's how it looks when you're taking hair down.

 clearer picture, but my camera's not really working with me today.

You don't have the parting where you start to braid and then your hair slips

 pretty much got down how some people take their hair and they split it.

 basic technique of how I start my other one, I take one strand with half the hair and start

Then I take the other half with the other strand and start twisting it

I will try this weekend once I let my edges rest because I haven't

 This right here, I just kind of tucked under my hair and just kept it in a ponytail.

 It is rather late but I'm going to do it because that's the regimen that I'm in right now.

 If you guys have any questions on the twisting method that I have, please feel free to ask

If you are having trouble with the actual twisting or getting it to stay,

 just practice on either just a strand of your hair or someone else's head.

 while if you're not used to braiding, your hands will start to get a little irritated,

 This is my first time ever doing the sitting knee twist on my own hair.

 Today I have a very special recipe to share with you that will be perfect to take to all

 of your backyard barbecues and what not, and here's a hint of what it is.

 It's a song that goes, coleslaw, coleslaw, colesliggity-slaw, don't give me no mayo,

 I'll kick your face, because it doesn't have any mayonnaise in it.

 All right, so the first step to my awesome coleslaw recipe is to slice up your coleslaw

 If you wanted to buy it pre-sliced, that's fine, but you retain more nutrients if you

 slice it up just before you use it, so if you give a shit, but all right, so I'm gonna

 sprinkle this with a healthy amount of salt, or perhaps an unhealthy amount of salt would

 So the salt is just gonna soften the cabbage a little bit and just give it that nice like

 coleslaw texture, I don't know, like kind of almost cooked, and then we will just set

 this aside for 10, 20, 30 minutes, however long it takes you to get everything else ready

 For our dressing, I'm gonna use some chipotle peppers, and what those are is jalapenos that

 They have a really nice smoky flavor, and then you'll usually see them in little cans

 about that big, like four-ounce cans, and they're in adobo sauce, which is kind of a

 sweet, oops, it's kind of a sweet like tomato-y sauce, so they're pretty hot.

 I'm probably just gonna use half of one of these, but when you get them home, because

 you know, you don't really ever need like a whole can of them at a time.

 I usually just transfer them into a little jar, and they'll last longer in your fridge.

 They'll last several months in your fridge if you put them in a jar with a lid, so we

 just wanna mince this little bad boy up, okay, and then this little half can go bloop back

 Mmm, it's massive, and then also in the jar, I'm gonna put some lime juice.

 Apple cider vinegar would also be totally delicious, and then just a few drops of oil.

 The oil just really adds a nice like mouth feel to the final product, and then a little

 bit of honey, and you could use brown sugar if you wanted to or just plain old white sugar,

 but I like the honey flavor, okay, and then you just shake this up.

 All right, our dressing's made, and this has been sitting here for about ten minutes, and

 you can see it's kind of starting to get limp and perhaps a little bit embarrassed, and

 then I'm gonna add some celery, which I cut on a really hard diagonal into super thin

 pieces so that it will almost like kind of blend in with the little shredded cabbage,

 and I've got some regular old white onion that I've just soaked in cold water, and that's

 gonna help crisp it up and also just take a little bit of that sharp onion bite out

 of it, and then I just got some cilantro that I picked out of my yard, and I'm just

 gonna pick the leaves off and just kind of tear it up roughly, okay, and then pour our

 chipotle lime dressing over it, and then I'm gonna add a little bit of black pepper, pretty

 I'm gonna add a few roasted almonds because just for a little crunch, some roasted peanuts

 This is really gonna be best if you let it sit for at least an hour, but I'm just gonna

 go ahead and taste it right now so that you'll believe me when I tell you that it's delicious.

 All the things that I love, and I have a big enough mouth to eat off this spoon with this

 So, okay, well, thank you for watching, and I hope you try the recipe, and if you do,

 If you have any questions, leave them in the comments, and I'll get to them as soon as

 I can, and thanks so much for watching, and everyone have a wonderful week.

 Hi guys, I am really excited because I just passed the two huge exams and I am now one

 So last week I posted a video for brushes 101 and I got a request in the comments to

 As you can see I have a shitload of brushes and pencils and mascara wands and all kinds

 of stuff that I need to clean after the practical exam that we did in school today.

 There are three basic products that you can use for this that you usually have at home.

 The first one is regular dispenser soap, the second one is shampoo and the third one is

 All of your brushes used on wet products such as foundation or lip liner or lip gloss or

 Now these need a more deeper clean because bacteria travels easier through liquid products.

 So for this I recommend using the dishwasher detergent because they're usually antibacterial

 For brushes used on dry products such as this power brush I recommend using either the shampoo

 Obviously you can use the dishwasher detergent for this as well but since this is oil repellent

 you might lose a bit of the oils in the natural hair because these brushes have natural hairs

 So since they also have been used only on dry products it's totally fine to just use

 There's also a way to give oil back to your brushes if you have used the dishwasher detergent

 and that is by just adding a little bit of oil as you do the cleaning process.

 So what I do is start the water, take some shampoo or soap or whatever you're choosing

 to use in my hand, hold the brush like this and make sure that it's wet and then rub it

 on to the product in my hand like this, working at the foam and then holding that into the

 You can just squeeze some of the water out of the brush and it's now clean.

 It's really important not to leave this the wrong way when you want it to dry.

 If you leave the brush facing like this the water is going to run down into the brush

 and loosen up the glue which means that the brush hairs are going to fall out.

 If you can, hang them like this if you have some sort of way to make that happen.

 So shampoo in my hand, water on, holding it this way, just dipping it into the water

 and then working it around so the product comes off pretty much immediately and then

 If it doesn't foam you'll know that it's ready when there's no more color.

 So you can put some soap or shampoo or whatever onto the dirty spot and then pull it into

 Put the dirty soaked edges against each other and scrub, scrub, scrub.

 If you don't do makeup on other people and only on yourself then maybe you only have

 But if you are a makeup artist or you just tend to, I don't know, do makeovers for people

 or just do different makeup looks for people, you're gonna want to have more than one wand.

 And these are old mascara wands that I've just cleaned and saved as I've thrown the

 I'm gonna put the shampoo in my hand and like before, pull the wand into the water and kind

 So I'm squeezing it really, really tight and going up and down and then holding it into

 And then you can go in a little bit with your fingers too to make sure that you get every

 Sometimes you need to do a quick clean, especially if you're working as a makeup artist and you're

 doing multiple makeup looks in a row and you don't have enough brushes.

 A lot of makeup brands sell these finished bottled products just called brush cleaner

 There are different ways of doing this, but one of them is taking a piece of tissue paper

 And then rolling your brush into the spray and then wiping it off.

 This is not an ideal way to clean your brushes because they don't get as clean as they do

 when you use the other method that I showed you, but it's a really fast, quick way.

 Just check the ingredients on the bottle before you buy that product, but they work really

 Hey guys, so today I want to show you how to create a winged liner shape suitable for those of you with hooded eyes

 So it's a little bit different to how you would do normal winged liner

 But as you can see once the eye is open it looks just like anybody else's so if you want to see

 So Petra's pretty much looking straight ahead and this is what you would be doing yourself looking straight ahead in the mirror

 Depending on how heavy your eyelid is like if your eye comes down even further

 On Petra we can start about here and because the brow bone is slightly curved

 We're going to need to curve the line in the opposite way in order for it to look straight

 When you're staring straight ahead, you'll see what I mean in a second.

 So you have something like this and really don't worry about it being perfect at this stage because we will be able to go back in and correct any mistakes after we've gotten the basic shape in.

 To meet where the socket is where this kind of line of the the socket is

 So you've created a kind of a triangular shape on the outside corner here and just close your eyes

 So you can see it comes across here, but now we need to connect this down to the lash line so open your eyes again

 And close your eyes, and I'm just going to draw a line straight down to meet the lashes

 You're going to have to kind of adjust and fix it as you go along

 And if you find you've gone a little bit too thick or you've made a smudge or anything like that a really great tip is to

 Take an angled brush that you've dipped in some eye makeup remover

 And you can basically use that as your eraser, and that will just give you a really really clean edge

 So you can see it is a slightly different shape to the kind of shape that somebody with a more pronounced crease would be doing

 But once the eyes open just open the eye it just looks exactly like anybody else's

 Just a perfect seamless flick so I really hope you enjoyed that video

 If you did don't forget to give me a thumbs up don't forget to subscribe share it with any of your friends

 Now everybody doesn't have money to go buy a brand new one which runs roughly about $60

 So, what I did on the very ends on both sides, I tore off the ends of the original part.

 I'm not going to fight with that because it was a fight putting it on.

 So these are actually from the original woolly worm that came with the car.

 So what I did was I fitted the new duct onto the old connecting part.

 For this portion that connects to the actual housing, you might want to find heated glue.

 At the moment we don't have any and I'm not about to go and get some right now.

 But it does insert with some patience and understanding and usually a lot of cursing

 or you buzz into the mouthpiece or the trumpet, you'll see that

 setting your both sides like this, you limit the amount of the lower lip

 you'll see, and then I'll do the, just rolling in the bottom lip,

 you'll get much more of the bottom lip into your embouchure and therefore

 more into the mouthpiece and you'll get a better sound and you'll get better

 Now, for just rolling in the lower lip without setting the lips on both sides.

 You can obviously see that I get much more of the lower lip into my embouchure setting.

 And you'll, by setting your embouchure initially that way, you'll be able to

 play longer because you've got more lip in your embouchure, you'll have endurance,

 That's the best embouchure setting that I think people should use if you're a trumpet player,

 in order to get any tone out of a trombone into the mouthpiece,

 you must use that type of, large mouthpiece basically forces you to use the right embouchure setting.

 is so creamy, and it combines probably the world's best two things.

 Okay dessert junkies, we've got some half fat cream which I'm putting in a metal bowl.

 I've also got some full fat cream, equal parts, measurements are below.

 on the vanilla guys, because this is peanut butter ice cream and you want it to taste

About half a cup of your peanut butter, and I did nuke this in the

You'll see that the colour changes from a cream colour to that peanut butter colour,

 whack it in your fridge for 15 minutes and this will definitely help you churn better ice cream,

I use Cuisinart ice cream maker, feel free Cuisinart, our people, we can have a chat.

When you dismantle it, when you pull the paddle out, it should hold

 its shape and it should sort of fit in those ridges, that's when you know it's done.

 this in an airtight container in your freezer and at least freeze it for 4 hours before you

In this video I'm going to show you guys how to make spicy cucumber salad.

 If you've had it before, I'm sure that you are addicted and you probably like it super spicy just like me.

 And you make it pretty much the same way as papaya salad or aka bok lohong.

 What you're going to need today is a mortar and pestle, of course.

 You can purchase these at most Asian markets or if you need to, you can order online.

 You're going to need some shrimp paste or Cambodian people know this as kopit.

 Dude, at like Safeway and Fred Meyer's, they charge like $8 something.

 I actually almost did once and I just couldn't justify spending $8 on some fish sauce.

 I like it spicy, so I'm still going to add 2 additional red Thai chili peppers.

 And then whatever kind of julienne peeler you have, go ahead and use that.

If you need to, obviously, you can use a knife and do this all by hand.

 Or if you want to peel it before, obviously you can, but that's just the way I always do it.

 So to my garlic, I'm going to add in my red Thai chili peppers and also my kipi, or aka shrimp paste.

I don't like too much in mine, but if you'd like to stank up your breath, then hey, the more the merrier.

 Once everything in here has turned into a paste and you've really broken down the peppers and the garlic, then you're ready to add in your tomatoes.

 You know, I don't know if a lot of people put their tomatoes first.

 I like to smash the tomatoes in this first because it releases all that yummy juice and it'll give me a lot of liquid at the very end.

 And I like to add, I'm going to add all of my liquid and juices in first.

 Oh, and when no one's looking, you want to go ahead and add in some MSG.

 Okay, welcome back to the tutorial that I'm doing about how to color a drawing on GIMP.

 Okay, so in the first video we successfully, hopefully, got a lineart into GIMP and we

 separated the black and put it on its own separate transparent layer.

 Alright, now first of all what I want to do, I forgot to say this at the end of the last

 video and I probably should have, go to file, save as, and save your drawing as something.

 Make sure, make sure this is very, very important that XFC, XCF is your extension.

 That's a GIMP file and that'll ensure that you're going to be able to come and color

 Because if it's in grayscale it'll be in black and white and that is totally no fun.

 To change your colors you want to click on that and it'll come up with this.

 And then once you have your color you can click okay and it should come up right there.

 You can switch between your background and foreground color by hitting this little arrow

 So you want to make sure this is on top and then go to the fill bucket tool.

 You can go into her face and make sure you're on this layer, not the background.

 If you're on the background what'll happen is it'll just fill the entire thing which

 First of all, duplicate this so you have a nice clean version of your line art to use

 I'm going to do that in a second but first of all I'm going to show you down here.

 If I try to do it now there's no line connecting it so it'll just fill in that whole area.

 You can probably think up something better but I'm going to hide this layer by clicking

 I'm going to get my pencil tool and make sure I'm on a nice round brush.

 I have a lot of other ones just because I've had GIMP for a while.

 But so you go in and you click there and then you can hit shift and drag it out.

 A straight line should form until you click again and then it should stop.

 Now you can see there's a little hair line there that connects those two lines and now

 you can't see it once we have the background because it's white as well.

 One other thing I'm going to do before I go in and fill everything else in is her eyes.

 As you can see I filled in around those but usually eyes have a white part around the

 Click and drag and just make a little bit of a rounded curve around her eyes to use

 It's a nice little tip and it makes it look a little bit more professional.

 And once you're done you can just use the fill tool to fill those in.

 I'm going to fill in the rest but I'm going to pause the video while I do that and you

 Okay we're back and as you can see I colored in all those areas peach and you want to make

 Now if I missed a little spot or like two pixels it's probably not going to make that

 big of a difference but you want to be as precise as possible just to make sure your

 Okay so once I have this it looks pretty good and I'm going to save it.

 In fact do control S to save if you've already made up a name for your drawing just to make

 So what I'm going to do to kind of you know make it look a little bit more natural a little

 So first of all I want you to go to your brush dialog here and I forgot to tell you before

 the way you open that is doing windows talkable dialogues and brushes.

 So if you go there get a nice fuzzy one there should be some of those or you can make one

 Now go to your burn right there this little black thing and make sure it's on burn and

 You want to go in zoom in a little bit and using that just go around and click and add

 If you want to go for dramatic you want to do burn highlights because that'll make it

 But for this drawing I'm just going to do the mid tones and just make it look a little

 bit more natural a little bit more just like she could be standing outside or you know

 So I'm going to get some under her hair just do logical places where you probably find

 If you don't know where to find highlights then you can look in a mirror or look at a

 I have a lot of drawing references I used from I use from other artists when I'm doing

 highlights just to see how they did it and helps you improve and just yeah it's actually

 pretty easy just wherever you know a highlight would go over the light would not be able

 All right so once you've got some of those highlights in there you want to zoom out and

 you always want to do this and just see if that it looks OK because sometimes it can

 look totally different when you're zoomed in and when it zooms in when you're zoomed

 I'm going to fix a couple of things and yeah so now fix that up.

 This is good for adding highlights or correcting errors you made with burn.

 So when you switch to dodge this is the same thing but adding highlights so you can go

 in and maybe where there'd be some highlights on her fingers or her cheeks you can add those

 If you want to go on to the next video we'll start talking about hair and also do the ears.

 the front here you can use your button and it will automatically go all the way back.

 But in the case that it does not, we'll go to the back and show you how to release

 And this rear lid, when you pull it open you don't really want to grab the vinyl here.

 Good morning, this is Dwayne and today I'd like to talk about a pentatonic turn.

 A pentatonic scale is where you play the root, second, third, fifth, and sixth notes of the

 You can depress your damper pedal because all those notes kind of go together alright.

 It's like in the key of C, it's kind of like a 6-9 chord like that.

 Now what we're going to do with it though is make a turn with it.

 So we'll take two notes out of the pentatonic scale, say the root and the fifth.

 Then we'll do the ninth and the fifth, up to the third, back to the ninth, and then

 And of course something will be going on in our left hand as well as that fill takes place.

 That's called a twang when you play a third with a fourth under it but let the fourth

 And then there's a western twang in turn where you can do this.

 You get the same effect but the pentatonic turn is played in a different rhythm so you

 A pentatonic scale, just to review, is the root, second, third, fifth, and sixth of a

 And by playing two notes of the pentatonic scale, then one, and then back to that one,

 Okay that's it for today and tomorrow we'll have another technique for you.

 batter it and then you smother it in sauce and it's just delicious!

 Daisy D is here to get my hair and makeup done for the Teen Choice Awards.

 The reason why I did it, I filmed and then I put it in my pocket.

 We got home, sat down, and started venting in front of the camera.

 David Valentin, the barber, the cosmetologist, the hair stylist, whatever you guys want to

 This video was actually, I actually uploaded this a while back and I thought I didn't give,

 I didn't do it any justice with the last two videos I uploaded from this tutorial.

 What had happened was that I uploaded two parts and those two parts were a little bit

 Pretty much set up the line midway on top of the head and for your second part, what

 Well what you want to do is you want to take your number two clip and you want to go on

 So what you want to do is definitely use that scooping motion and definitely blend out the

 Well one of the great perks about having all these tutorial videos on YouTube is that you

 guys can pause it at any time, go back and check, and check if anything, you know, if

 If you guys want to follow me on, let's say my social, my social media, go right ahead

 And on this step, which would be step number three, what I'm doing is the clipper in the

 What I'm doing is, which is pretty much one and a half, what I'm doing is pretty much

 going in between the number two that I just did and the guide, the first guide that I

 So what I'm doing is pretty much just hitting the hair in between and, you know, pretty

 much going step by step till I pretty much blend out the whole line from the number two

 Now in this step what I do is I just put down the lever on the clipper so that pretty much

 And you can, as you, you can already see that the line is pretty much disappearing.

 And now what you want to do is just keep going with it and at the end you can probably take

 the half clip again and then just go a little bit higher and then just do that.

 Now in this section, I actually like these scissors in particular because they're actually,

 they're thinning scissors but they're, I would call them like 80% cutting scissors.

 She was like, oh you don't know how to cut hair because you use those thinning scissors

 And believe it or not, this technique is actually really valid when it comes to, let's say,

 What I try to do is pretty much have confidence in what I do and these scissors give me a

 little bit more confidence when it comes to me cutting the hair.

 If I need to cut more hair, I'll just go over it once or twice.

 Sometimes it's just better to cut less hair than more because once the hair's not there,

 So remember everyone, if you have any doubt with, let's say, how far am I going to cut

 this hair or how low am I going to go with the sides of somebody's haircut, remember

 it's better to just go with a higher number just because, you know, it's easier to go

 I think one of my friends told me that the difference between a good and a bad haircut

 So now I'm using, as you can see, as I come to the front of the haircut, I like to use

 So this is more like 30% which means it's going to take 30% off of the hair.

 So I like this also because, you know, you're just that much more careful with how much

 As you can see, I open and close the scissors multiple times so that I take away more hair.

 Now for the ending part of this video, what I'm showing you guys is as I finish the haircut,

 I also set up a little close up for you guys to see that the haircut.

 So now if you guys want to follow me, subscribe me, give me a thumbs up.

 If you're interested in any other videos that I have to offer here, go right ahead

 The only thing is that sometimes I don't find the time to edit them because I'm a really

 But thank you very much for watching and enjoy all my future videos that are coming.

 I'm going to work on future projects which include other barbers and people you guys

 Remember guys, David Valentin, subscribe, check out my other videos.

 Remember to give me a thumbs up and follow me at thebestbarber on Instagram.

 I added an extra stitch on each side, but the edges are still pretty sloppy and this

 fabric also is curling a bit, so I would definitely add more than just one stitch for

 So for the first row of the pattern, I'm going to knit my edge stitch and then begin the

 And it's knit 1, slip the next stitch purlwise, make sure that the yarn is in the back of

 your work, knit 1, yarn over, and then you're going to pass your slipped stitch over the

 Knit 1, slip 1 purlwise, knit 1, yarn over, pass the slipped stitch over your knit stitch

 And all you're going to be doing is purling all stitches on row 2.

 Hey everybody, it's Jumping Sun and this is going to be a how to groom video

 I thought it'd be an easy quick little video that I could do for you guys

 I'm out in the wash rack because there's some people in the barn and I do not want them to think I'm crazy

 So I'm out in the wash rack and I hope I don't get like cut my face off or anything

 So basically I'm just gonna be doing some showing you how to like groom and stuff how I groom at least

 I'm not gonna groom both sides because she's already been groomed like three times today because I've been here like all day

 It wouldn't really make sense for me to do the other side because you guys can't see

 So and I'm not even gonna do everything all the way because it would take way too long

 Is curry and this is my mitt that I use because I love it a lot better than this

 I do though you can use a body brush a stiff brush flick brush hard brush

 Whatever you call it, whatever type of brush you need and you just basically

 The next thing I normally do is brush the mane for lock and tail

 Yeah, it's wrong but it's okay cuz I like it like this but I know it needs to be like

 I know you can't see me doing this, but basically just want to get all the dirt out and everything in

 And I'm really not gonna do it because I've already been picked

So this is just alcohol you can buy for really cheap and just put it in a spray bottle that

 The other thing that I do pretty much every day unless I'm like in a rush is put hoof flex

I've had this for a couple weeks and I really haven't noticed a difference

 A little bit but it hasn't really helped so I'm probably gonna try something else

 So if you're thinking about getting this, I know it's cheap, but it really doesn't work

 The next thing I do is if it's in the summertime, I'll do fly spray

 It's not in the summertime and it's actually pretty cool right now.

 But don't apply it to the saddle area because it'll make it really slippery and everything

You can always get a face brush and brush their face and everything

 If you have like a good this is a goat hair brush and you can just sort of

 That's pretty much the end of my grooming video and I hoped you all enjoyed it

 Hi everybody, today I'm going to show you how to make date syrup.

For one cup date, very well packed, use one cup and a half water.

 heat and let it cook for about 45 minutes until the date becomes so tender.

Once you've done that, back to the stove and on medium heat first, this time

 uncover and then once it starts to simmer, reduce the heat to low heat and let it thicken.

 As soon as it starts to thicken, turn off the heat and let it cool down completely.

 After it's cooled down completely, you are looking for something like, the thickness

 Hey everybody this is Trevor with Idiot's Guide to Life and it's a little dark out right

 now but it's been hot as heck and I've been trying not to do this in the sun but if you

 can see in the shiny part of that paint you can see water spots.

 So my car got parked under a sprinkler during a hot day and so basically I got water spots.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm actually going to remove these water spots with a 3 to 1

 ratio of water and vinegar so it's basically one part vinegar and three parts water and

 then you just wipe it down and see if we can get a, you just wipe it down and get rid of

 So see the water spots, give it a little spray, try to do it fairly decent, decent job.

 Start rubbing and then you're going to have to wax over it again but that's ok because

 I can do that now that the car's temperature, the paint, or the body's cooled down because

 So you basically take a squirt bottle, just anything like this is a bottle I got, it's

 But basically, I don't know, I figure this is like three cups so I put like a little

 less than a cup of vinegar, like six ounces I guess, because I guess eight ounces maybe

 would be a cup, but six ounces of white vinegar and then the rest is just cold water and that's

 So three to one ratio, white vinegar, that's how you get the spots out and then don't forget

 Oi, this is Ty with GreenRegiment.com and we are still in the beautiful city of Rio

 And at this point, it just doesn't look like we're going to leave anytime soon.

 So we'll just get comfortable here and make all of our smoothie videos from Brazil.

 Now in Brazil, the national drink is called the caipirinha, but this week's smoothie

 So you can see here, it's a very, very simple recipe, just like the caipirinha is.

 So we're going to get started first with two cups of sparkling water.

 Now maracuja helps rejuvenate our skin and it also helps repair damaged skin cells.

 And the green that we're using for our caipirinha smoothie is called manjerica.

 Now manjerica is basil and basil is high in vitamin K. And vitamin K helps promote healthy

 Vitamin K also reduces the black circles around our eyes and vitamin K helps strengthen

 Manjerica is also high in fiber and contains a good amount of iron.

 Now we're going to go ahead and mix this up for about a minute and we're going to see

 The maracuja and the lime complement each other very well in this smoothie.

 And that was the perfect amount as not to overpower the smoothie.

 If you have any questions or comments or just anything positive you want to say, just go

 Remember the recipe for the caipirinha is right below this video in the description

 What's going on YouTube this is What Would Josh Do and we're going to take a quick look

 at a case from Sadeo and when I say a quick look I'm going to make a short video.

 So we're going to look at these cases and we're going to show off each one and we're

 So yeah there's not really any markings on the outside except for these little numbers

 I'm going to open it from right here and this first one is a Dylex case.

 Alright we're going to go ahead and stick our phone down in there like such.

 You also want to make sure there's no dust or any dirt or anything like that.

 And there is like a little screen protector film that you can remove right there.

 Okay so when you drag down your notifications you press this little button right here and

 Please also keep in mind that we did leave the little protective film on there so we

 There's actually a little thing right here to help you lift up on that and pull it out

 It doesn't even look like there's any kind of a screen protector on your phone but there

 is a little screen protector in there and it's going to protect your phone from any

 You can prop your phone up and watch a Netflix video, a YouTube video, record a front facing

 You've got your flash, your sensor, your camera, your speaker, your charging port.

 You just pull it out and I mean it's in there good but it comes out easily.

 You know it's a surface because it detaches like this and then you just put your phone

 in there like such and it's got like a nice little material in here to keep it from getting

 It's a case that doesn't block any of the buttons or holes or anything like that.

 I cannot tell you how many times I used the kickstand on my Sadeo surface case for my

 If I'm trying to watch a YouTube video or edit a video or something I'll just set this

 So let's go ahead and take a look at this other case here and to separate this you just

 push down where the little indentation is and separate the case.

 Sometimes it's a little hard because you got to get like a lift going in there.

 If you sit here and well that one worked but earlier when I was trying to do it that way

 So just push down kind of pull up on it and then slide it and it's super easy.

 Because if you just try to pull it it's going to work but it's harder.

 If you enjoyed this video please let me know by giving it a thumbs up.

 Please follow me on Twitter and Instagram if you want to stay up to date and see what

 All links will be in the description below as well as links to all three of these cases.

 There will be separate links to all three of these cases so you can choose which one

 One thing I love about technology is about how easy it actually is to do upgrades, especially

In the old days, doing things like a hard drive upgrade was really difficult and

As a matter of fact, many different stores today offer the service

 of doing hard drive upgrades for you, and you can pay up to $50 to $100 to get a hard

Well, I'm going to show you on Get Connected today how easy it is

 the number one enemy against the computer insides is static electricity.

 in a dry area, even in a wet area, I should be wearing an anti-static device so that I

 don't pass any electric shocks into this computer, because that's what blows the transistors.

 So when you do go to install the drive, the first thing if you note, my HP computer here

 has a number of available slots where I can actually put in new items.

 out one of these little extender here, and now I'm going to mount the drive.

 to put in a one terabyte drive from Hitachi today, which is pretty cool.

 drive, so it works a little bit differently than the previous system.

 see down here inside the motherboard, I can put up to one, two, three, four, five SATA

I'm simply just going to plug it in, and then all I do is connect to my drive.

 to be set up as a slave to my master, so that means that it's going to be an additional

 steps depending on the type of computer you have, but overall we've got a one terabyte

 make your own body scrub using all natural ingredients that you probably

 coarse sea salt, organic olive oil or unrefined coconut oil and half a lemon.

 Let's begin by pouring half a cup of sea salt into your mixing bowl.

 great because not only is it an excellent exfoliant treatment which

 helps soften rough skin but when combined with oil it will remove dead

 sea salt but if you have sensitive skin or you want something a little less

 Lastly take half a lemon and squeeze it directly into the mixture.

 Last minute I kind of decided to add some coconut oil because why not right?

 Just like the olive oil, coconut oil will act as a moisturizer and just like the

 lemon, coconut oil has anti-fungal properties making this great for a foot

 always purchase one from Michaels or Ross for a couple of bucks.

 sugar right into the container where I will be storing the mask.

 moisturizing effects raw honey has, honey is also a great ingredient for many

 from acne on your body like your back, your chest, or the back of your arms this

 I didn't show this part but I popped the container in the microwave for about 10

 that the mask wasn't as thick as I wanted it to be so I added 3 more

 my fingers, rub my fingers together, and then I start applying it into my face in

 little bit of a massage just to get the blood flowing and I usually do this

 about three times a week or so and then I leave the mask on for about 10 minutes.

 After a quick rinse I pat my face dry and I move on to moisturizer just to

 eye cream to prevent any future wrinkles and lastly my lip balm to keep my lips

 thing to do with clams is if you buy them, you buy them regular nice blue

 point clams and you want to store them if you don't want to eat them all in one

 sitting you can take two cups of regular water and a half a teaspoon of regular

 common salt and you put that together and you mix it up and you can keep your

 clams in the refrigerator for up to a week maybe even two weeks.

Here we have a nice blue point clam you want to take a very nice sharp

 knife you want it very sharp and you want to be careful now you want to hold

 the clam like this in your hand so that it's facing straight up and what you

 want to do is you want to come straight down like this you want to get it right

 into that lip then you take your thumb and you press down like that after you

 press down like that be very careful and you keep going straight down and you

 continue to go straight down till she opens up once she opens up you break it

 in half like that put one side down and you begin to remove this stuff right

 here because this is the clams waste you don't want that so you just pluck it out

 just take that right out like that and get rid of it this is the that's the

 waste track and then you just go this way take it like that and you cut the

 muscle right here and then you cut the muscle right here bring all this stuff

 you can drain out the excess water then you take your next one and you do the

 same thing you remove this black waste track it should come out very easy if

 you have a sharp knife you just want to take all of that gunk out because that's

 all the waste and you don't want to eat that and then you just take that you go

 in here always keeping your thumb here protecting yourself not to cut your thumb

 and you just go down like that go right around you do the same with this side go

 right around like that you could drain the excess water out then you take a

 little bit of Tabasco sauce and you plop it on and then you eat it man that

 was good if you like the video subscribe send me your comments this is Tony B

 Hey everyone, Alexa here and today I'm going to show you how to make this cool rainbow

 Now this looks like it should be complicated but it totally isn't and it's a super cool

 For this awesome DIY you're going to need a white real or fake pumpkin, a bottle of

 You're actually going to remove the crayon labels for this project.

 Also I recommend getting a sheet or paper that you don't care to get crayon melting

 If you leave your crayons in a bowl of water for a few minutes the labels should just slide

 I added a generous amount of the Fast Grab Glue around the stem.

 Then I positioned my crayons into the glue and let it sit for a few minutes.

 I just aimed my hair dryer down and let all of the crayon drip down around the pumpkin.

 I had my hair dryer set on high as I was doing this and just so you know sometimes a stray

 I decided to not melt all of my crayons because some of the colors were starting to look muddy

 And here's what it looked like a couple minutes after using the hair dryer.

 I really love how it turned out and I love all the bright colors and bold patterns it

 Here's one that I created last year that I used yellow and orange with.

 You might try red to do a blood splattery looking pumpkin or black.

 Hey, if you like this project give me a thumbs up below and leave a comment telling me if

 Also, please subscribe to my channel for more cool and crafty DIY videos.

 Our interchangeable sets allow you to have just the needle you need right at your fingertips.

 There are many different sets to choose from including starter, chunky, and deluxe.

 It comes in a handy carrying case with nine needle tips, four cables, one set of size

 To attach a needle tip to a cable, simply screw it into the cable's end and then use

 It gives you the extra torque you need to easily remove your needle without stress on

 If you are midway through a project and want to use your needle tip, simply slide on one

 So I started knitting this several weeks ago and have got this much on my needles and never

 You don't need to yarn on it or use any other kind of implement.

 This is the best join and I've been mixing and matching my needles and cables.

 you're likely going to be playing with a lot of new techniques and new products that maybe you haven't tried before.

 So our challenge to you is to try a technique that maybe you haven't tried before or give a new twist on an old one.

 For this technique we're going to create a resist effect using stencil, translucent embossing paste and distress markers.

 I'm going to use that to tack this down so it doesn't move all over the place.

 Then I'll use just a bit of washi tape to tack the stencil down so it doesn't move around while I'm stenciling.

 We'll scoop out some embossing paste and just spread it over the stencil.

 just with a slight blue tinge to it, but we'll work that into the design.

 I'm going to use Festive Berry, Picked Raspberry, Evergreen Bough,

We'll get some blues and pinks and a little bit of purple where they

 four different types of cardstock and using watercolor techniques with them.

 Watercolor paper and the Bazzill Marshmallow were my very favorites.

 I will link to it so you guys can go check it out, but it works really well when you add water and do these

 Maybe a little more red down here, and then we'll spray it down.

 The colors are going to bleed and blend and mix and create a beautiful watercolored background.

 Now if you get too much mixing and it starts looking a little dark or kind of muddy like it does over here,

 you can sop it up with a little paper towel, so have some on hand.

 coloring it, I kind of realized it was a little bit grayish for what the color palette look

 translucent embossing paste is, it is getting colored a little,

 but it reacts differently than the paper does, so you get a different look on the checkerboard pattern.

 This is definitely one of those things that people are going to go,

When you tell them you started with a blank white piece of paper, they're gonna be like,

 So for finishing off the card, I took a piece of white cardstock, and I just cut it with this die.

 This is a pretty pink posh edge die, and then I took a piece of black and I

 So this was one piece like this, and then I just ran it through twice.

 So now I have this fun little strip right here, and I have another piece that I've cut also.

 I'm going to attach this to my card with some mounting tape so it has some dimension.

 I just cut a little smidge off just to make sure none of that shows.

 So I've added my magnets, and I lined up my piece of white cardstock, and then I have my stamp.

 So it's going straight across, but I don't want to stamp it straight across.

 then I'm going to take my die, and I'm going to push it right up against the stamp.

 And now I'm closing it and checking to make sure that it is going to stamp where I want it.

 I'm going to use my little Memento Dew Drop ink pad to ink this up.

If it wasn't quite dark enough, the beauty of the MISTI is that you get to stamp it again.

 It's going to be exactly in the same spot as long as you didn't move your cardstock.

I've added dimensional adhesive to the back, and we'll pop this up.

 And then I have this cute little flower that I had saved it from

 another project that I was working on, and we'll just add that.

 I hope you enjoyed the techniques that I packed into this little video.

 I hope you enjoyed it, and I hope we'll see you over at Stamp Nation.

 I hope you give me a thumbs up and make sure you subscribe to my channel so that YouTube knows you like videos like this.

 Yeah together with the lamb I was prepared already the little pate over here.

 Okay now this you gotta cook like I said before for 45-50 minutes.

 Every time I drink wine, I like to drink in my special glass for me and my wife.

 I want to say thank you everybody to watch everything what I'm making.

 And our punch mixture is, we've got three quarts of water here.

 We've got a package of purple Kool-Aid and a package of orange.

 This takes a while to get all the sugar mixed up and dissolved.

 Okay, that's about half the water we need, but I can feel the sugar's just about dissolved.

 Now, because we want to keep it cold, we'll need a little ice float.

 And all this is is a disposable glove that I've wrapped, filled with water and wrapped with a rubber band.

 And the rubber band helps with the, rather than a twist tie, with the expansion and all that.

 Now, I did see this in a book, but that does look kind of cool with the, I don't know, can you see it with the broken finger floating in there?

 That's why it has to be really cold because the colder it is, the less the ice will melt.

 It might be longer than that because it's a pretty solid thing, but you know, you should make two just in case the first one doesn't, you always should have a spare.

 So, in case the first one doesn't, you know, melt, you should put another one in there.

 Someone actually requested this not too long ago, probably a few days ago.

 The reason why I did it so fast is because I think this is a very good look for Valentine's

 Day if you are one of those people that do not like to incorporate the colors pink, purple,

 If you just want to go to dinner with your significant other, something elegant, classy,

 But it is a very nice look that is wearable for Valentine's Day.

 You apply that from your lash line to your brow and also on your lower lash line.

 Now I am going to take elf duo eye shadow cream in butter pecan.

 Now I am going to take my blending brush by Sonia Kashuk and blend out that color into

 Now what I am going to do is take that taupe with the blending brush and apply that in

 I am going to take that elf eye shadow duo again and apply this to my lower lash line.

 Take the same colors that I applied on my lid and apply that to the lower lash line.

 What I am going to do is start lining the lash line on the outer corner.

 I am applying eyeliner but of course I am going to make it thick.

 Now what you are going to do is line the rest of your lid with the black.

 What I am going to do is wipe off the brush a little bit just to get some of that black

 I am going to take my blending brush and just blend out the color a little.

 Taking that same black again I am going to drag this along my lower lash line.

 Now I am going to take my hip duo in flare and I am going to be using that beige color

 That means I am going to line the upper waterline and I am going to line my lower waterline

 What I am going to do is take, I mean this is so weird, but I am going to take the tip

 I am going to get a stone and I am going to put it on top of that glue.

 Hey guys welcome back to my channel we're gonna be doing a meal prep.

 to cut it the opposite way kind of like an accordion and then I put it on its

 knife so that way you don't have to struggle in cutting the tomato.

 we're using where you want to wash your lettuce because sometimes there can be

 dirt at the bottom of the batch so then you really want to make sure that it's

 really nice and washed and there's no bugs in there or dirt or anything like

So now that your tomato is cut and your lettuce is nice and clean you want

 to put that aside and take out the containers you're gonna be storing your

 really like them because they're separated because when you're doing meal

 prep you don't want your meat or anything like that touching especially

 towards the end of the week it gets soggy the lettuce and what I like to do

 is I like to take off the lettuce from the center of the I don't know I just

 don't really like the crunchy part so I like to pull just the lettuce part and

 the next thing I like to add is the shredded carrots so I like to sprinkle

 those on the lettuce because those won't get soggy or ugly or anything like that.

 Next the tomatoes I do like to add on the side because if you put it on top of

 the lettuce and let it sit there for a couple of days the lettuce starts

 fresh so I like to put ham the one that I'm using is turkey ham I got this from

 Costco and I just really like it so that will be my protein for these salads.

 Next is your dressing you can use whatever dressing you like this one's

 the one I'm using because I really like it so you can use whatever dressing you

 like and my other favorite dressing is ranch so you can switch it up and do

 whatever I really like these containers because you can add them into your salad

 mix and you don't have to carry a big container of your dressing and they fit

 weekly basis on Sundays and to get ready for the week and I really like doing

 this because it's easy and convenient just grab and go and eat healthy too.

 So I hope you guys enjoyed this video and see you guys next time bye!

 This video shows how to replace the internal assembly of a Shimano hub

 and you need to make sure you when you put it back on you put it back on the

 Now to remove the internal assembly all you have to do is undo this whole unit

 Take the left hand cone all the way off and continue unscrewing.

 clunk clunk clunk as they rotate due to the magnets and the coils.

 I've just had a glorious sunset behind me at the King Edward River.

 out on the track today is to grab the sausages out of the freezer compartment of your fridge

 camp like tonight, you're not sort of scratching around going, oh my sausages, they're rock

 you know, chewing on your ankles going, where's me food, where's me food.

So that when you present the meal to the animals, there's no whinging.

The four in hand knot makes for a narrow, discreet and slightly asymmetrical tie knot.

 It is best suited for a standard button down dress shirt and works best with wide ties

 end of your tie on the right, extending about 12 inches below the narrow end on the left.

Continue by bringing the wide end back over in front of the narrow end again.

 loosely with your index finger and bring the wide end down through the front loop.

 remove your finger and tighten the knot carefully through the collar by holding the narrow end

 the wide end of your tie on the right, extending about 12 inches below the narrow end on the

 While doing that, make sure that your hands form a little bridge.

 and tighten the knot carefully through the collar by holding on to the narrow end and

 We think these are better than hamburgers because you can flavor ground

 You're going to need a half a cup of panko crumbs and a half a cup of milk.

 In a bowl mix the panko crumbs and the milk and set to the side for 15 minutes

 Yes, you can substitute breadcrumbs for the panko crumbs but I would highly

 In goes a tablespoon of ketchup, 1 teaspoon of chili powder and dried chives,

 1 teaspoon of garlic powder, onion powder and black pepper and a pinch of salt to

 It all depends on the thickness and size of your patties to how long you broil

 I have some nice fresh sliced tomatoes, roasted red bell pepper, always have to

 The chicken burgers formed a nice crust on the outside and remained moist and

 I've had this recipe for a while and I find myself making chicken burgers quite

 breasts on sale, I will purchase them in bulk, bring them home, cut them up into

 cubes and put them in the food processor to make ground chicken and then freeze

 This chicken burger recipe is a great go-to for a quick and easy meal and

 I hope you make yourself a good chicken burger, love it and enjoy.

 Please remember to hit the LIKE button and SUBSCRIBE for future recipe videos

 The Gianni process is actually a very easy process that anyone can do.

 It's very do-it-yourself friendly and you've rolled on your primer, you've sponged on your

 minerals, you've got this great looking countertop and you're ready to apply your clear top coat.

 However, applying the clear top coat with the roller is not exactly like rolling paint

 There is a little bit of a technique to it and I'm going to show you how to do it right

 Okay, the first thing that you want to do is make sure you get your roller fully saturated.

 If you hear that rolling sound, that kind of dry rolling sound, that means you don't

 So that's a nice rolling sound there, just a very light rolling sound.

 Now the trick when you're doing the countertop is you don't want to back roll after the product

 And when you are doing your initial back roll, you want to keep pressure on your leading

 So when you're doing that back roll, keep the pressure on the leading edge.

 That way you're moving your lap line ahead of you all the way down to the end of your

 As you can see, there's no lap line where I just completed that application.

 One of the complaints that we get occasionally is that, oh, I've got, it's my countertop,

 it's absolutely beautiful, but I've got these lap lines from when I applied the clear top

 Or I've got dry dull spots from where I applied the clear top coat.

 And that's because you either back rolled it when it had started to dry, which doesn't

 take long, or didn't apply pressure on the leading edge when you were doing your back

 So we'll just work ourselves all the way down the countertop, keeping that pressure on the

 You don't want to stop and answer the phone or be sure you use the restroom before you

 And really anyone that's painted much will understand what I'm talking about when I say

 This guy would also recommend if you happen to have a ceiling fan that you have it turned

 off while you're putting your top coat on because you don't want it to dry any faster

 Because what you're doing is you're giving the product open time, which means time for

 it to flow and level out so that you get that nice glass finish that you're looking for.

 I mean, of course, you don't want so much that you're leaving puddles on your countertop,

 but you need enough on that you don't hear that dry roll sound.

 You probably want to work in about two roller width sections because if you get any farther

 down past two roller lengths, it could start to dry and then that's when you're going to

 So just do about two roller lengths and then keep the leading pressure, remember, pressure

 on your edge, on your leading edge when you do a quick back roll just to smooth it out

 That's all you're doing on that little back roll, but it has to still be wet.

 All right, one more little section and we'll have a perfect glass finish on our top.

 Now that you've completed your countertop, there's one more thing you need to do.

 After you finish your last back roll, don't put any more product on your roller, but go

 Just in case you got a little bit of a run that came down from your countertop, then

 you'll get rid of that and you'll be putting just another little light coat on there.

 You saw a lap line and you still went back and rolled it, even though you shouldn't do

 that, when the whole thing dries, you're going to have a couple of dull areas.

 You simply take 600 grit sandpaper, sand back over that and get it good and smooth, wipe

 it down, put your clear coat on, follow the process just like we showed you.

 This is going to be a video on the cheapest way to sanitize your bottles, well your baby's

 who, so what you're going to want to do, you're going to want to put your tops into, you're

 Okay, so now that everything is hot, you don't want it to where it's like boiling point.

 You want it to where you can see the steam coming out which mine is.

 then you're just going to want to put your caps and stuff back on after they're done.

 For this Mardi Gras inspired mask, start with some electric purple from the Snazaroo metallic

 In the centre of the forehead, right between the eyes, paint 5 teardrops which get smaller

 Then add a group of 3 teardrops starting on the top of the cheekbone, extending to the

 outside edge of the eye and round out a swirl which also connects to the same point.

 And then finish off with another 2 starting above the eyebrow connecting down to the centrepiece.

 Next take Snazaroo electric green and add 2 more teardrops right above the purple ones.

 Paint lots of small strokes along the bottom edge of the mask in the middle to complete

 the centrepiece and then use more drops to fill in any empty spaces around the edges.

 Now that the basic shape of the mask is complete, you can go back in with the purple and neaten

 up the area around the eyes, make the line a bit thicker and much more defined.

 Also add a very small squiggle on the end of the curl just for a bit more interest.

 Next with some Snazaroo yellow, add a small dot right in the centre of the mask.

 And then go around and add even more teardrops in any areas that you feel might need filling

 You can also use this colour to line underneath the purple edge around the eyes.

 Next switch back to the green and paint a very thin line underneath the yellow.

 Then wipe the majority of the paint off the brush and use this to drag the colour down

 With Snazaroo black, go around the entire mask and paint in an outline.

 To keep your lines as thin as possible, you need to make sure you're working right on

 And to keep everything looking clean, make sure you re-load the paint between each stroke

 Next, take some loose glitter in a matching colour and using a damp brush, apply this

 It's much easier to use a brush than your finger as you can be really precise.

 If you wanted to, you could put gold over the top of the yellow but I liked how bright

 Using some pink Snazaroo paint and my finger, I applied some to the apples of my cheeks

 to give me that nice rosy glow and then I also applied some to the lips.

 And then finally, take a Snazaroo paint in white and go around the mask adding in a few

 Hi, Mike's Carburetor Parts here demonstrating how to convert your 4100 hot air choke to

 All you need is a new thermostat and we're just going to swap the two thermostats.

 This is the ground on the new choke right here and the retainer touches it so the choke

 We've got our gasket we're going to leave on here, a unique gasket.

 One thing I want to mention, there are some 4100s, some of the older ones, that have a

 big post in the center of the thermostat housing here and it pokes out too far and it hits

 This will not work on that one unless you cut down your center post.

 You might want to check that before you order your choke just to make sure it's

 Go to our website, put that in the search box, TH1023, and it will come up with this

 You go to any auto parts store and you can get one of these little ends like this.

 Get you a little bit of wire, probably 18 gauge wire, and run this to your alternator.

 The other possibility is the hot side of your coil, the plus side.

 Just be sure you get the wire hooked in front of any resistors that might be in the wire.

 Then, one other thing you need to do is shut off your hot air tube here.

 Stick it on the hole, get a little JB weld to hold it on there.

 Then adjust your choke for specifications and you're good to go.

 Then when you turn the key on, it takes about five minutes or so for these things to start

 You'll see where it will start opening and you'll be good to go.

 To tell the staghorn from the poisonous sumac, first off, it's like this tubular shape with

 You wet your tongue and taste it off of it and it's very bitter, I don't want to say

 The stems are fuzzy at the fruit area and then the leaves are jagged along the corners.

 They're called, I want to say composite but don't quote me on that folks.

 Like I said, this is all new to me but this is what we're going to be harvesting.

 I'm going to harvest a few off of this plant and I'm going to move down the trail here

 Alright, alright, found myself some more of this staghorn sumac.

 It's been really sunny and this is getting very delayed so this stuff is already harvestable.

 It's going to be some heavy downpours later, thunderstorms later here.

 I'm going to get busy and I'll get home and show you how we're going to take this and

 But the staghorn and that one is the only ones that is safe to intake.

 You should always go ahead and try a little bit of it first to see how you react to it.

 Some people tend to have some allergies, different things like anything else out there.

 Now, like I said, the stems are going to be very furry and the opposite leaves and

 You're mostly going to find them in wet, damp, marshy areas is what I'm being told.

 These ones you can see along the road, just drive along the road as long as they're not

 So we're going to go ahead and get these soaking in some cold water and then I'm going to squish

 I went ahead and squeezed them a little bit to try to get everything to start coming and

 This is the first time I've done this so I just covered them enough with water and they

 So my understanding is I should let this sit for at least 15 minutes and this should turn

 this a more pinkish color, the water itself, whenever the berries and the flavor starts

 This process here I'm able to leach the berry out and also get any bugs and everything else

 So we're going to let this soak for about 15-20 minutes and we'll get back to you whenever

 It was in the trash bag next to me so I'll get this out of the way.

 Let's see if I can do this gingerly without spilt making a mess and start straining this

 As long as I get this cleaned up before Mama gets home I'll be in good shape.

 I'm going to go ahead and pour myself a glass after I clean up the mess, add some ice and

 Maybe if I add some sugar to it and sweeten it up it might be a little better.

 I'm going to go ahead and add some sugar and I'm going to get this thing posted.

 Do not use hot water because you'll end up releasing the tannins and make it really bitter.

 Second off, to all my subscribers and to Ghost Camo for turning me into trying this, thank you.

В этом видео я расскажу, как сделать овощи более здоровыми, нутрицированными и фиброзными, особенно для людей, у которых есть диабет или для тех, кто страдает от веса.

 Эта простая рецепт поможет выжать глину, быстро потерять вес и контролировать уровень крови и сахара.

 Я буду делать две порции этого здорового рецепта, и для этого я взяла сухой сковородку и добавила около 5 столовых ложек овощей.

Для тех, кто не любит обычных овощей, попробуйте использовать Oats Plus, они лучше и вкуснее.

 Очень сложно есть овощи без сахара, поэтому сахар нужен, и количество сахара, добавленного для этого порции, не будет значительно.

 Также добавляю 1 чайный ложек флагманских сольных, 4-5 кусочков слитых аминокислот, 3-4 кусочка слитых брунз, примерно 1,5 стакана молока и 1,5 стакана воды.

 Овощи подтверждают, что колесо не ухаживает за колесо и улучшают метаболизм.

 Флагманские сольные и аминокислоты помогают стабилизировать уровень крови и сахара длительнее и дают метаболизму бостер, чтобы выжать лишнюю жидкость.

 Когда они закипят, выключите нагрев и добавьте половину измельченного аппеля и перемешайте.

 Последнее, посыпьте сахаром 2 чайных ложки и немного циннамина.

 Циннамин контролирует уровень инсулин и помогает выжать белый фат.

 Аппельки содержат негритерпевренный компоунд, который полезен для потери веса, и сахар имеет способность мобилизировать расход фата.

 Также флагманские сольные и аминокислоты помогают стабилизировать уровень крови и сахара, дают метаболизм бостер, и дают метаболизм веса.

 И теперь наши супер-солёные и мощные флагманские сольные аппельки готовы.

 Вы можете есть их в любой момент дня или заменить еду с этим, и я гарантирую, что вы увидите позитивные результаты с весом и уровнем крови и сахара в 2 недели.

 Так что возьмите стакан сольных аппельков и идите на здоровый образ жизни.

 Мы поделимся с вами с большеми рецептами здоровья, так что останьтесь связаны с моим каналом и подписывайтесь на мой канал, и присоединяйтесь к мне на Facebook и Twitter.

 Подключитесь к нам на социальных сетях, пожалуйста, лайкайте нашу фейсбук-пагину Versatile Vicky, также лайкайте, поделитесь и подписывайтесь, и спасибо за просмотр.

 Hey guys, MultiTechno101 here bringing you the installation video for the Moshi Palm

 So first what you want to do is to just peel the palm guard off along with the plastic

 So after that, what you want to do is take a microfiber cloth, I'm just going to use

 Right guys, and before I forget, let's take a look at what's on the box of the Moshi

 So palm guard protects your MacBook's palm rest from unsightly wear and tear.

 And then there is, oops, sorry about that, and then below that there's some things you

 And here are the steps of how to install the palm guard, which also comes inside the cardboard

 So step one, thoroughly clean your MacBook's palm rest area and make sure it is completely

 Step two, peel off the back sticker to expose the palm guard's backside glue.

 Step three, align carefully starting from bottom and work your way to the top.

 And step four, peel off back sticker of trackpad film protector and attach as illustrated.

 If you have a case for your MacBook Pro like I do, you might want to take it off.

 Okay guys, so after you've taken your case off of your MacBook Pro, what you want to

 After that, you can grab yourself some tape and kind of tape the edges down like so.

 A guy on YouTube did this, so you might want to check out his tutorial.

 It kind of slides in this, so you might want to just make sure it's taped down properly

 Now, what you want to do is grab yourself a pair of scissors and start peeling the film off.

 And if it's not aligned properly, you can just peel it up again and start over.

 So next, we are going to install the track guard, which is left on the cardboard.

 What you might also want to do, I forgot to mention in the beginning,

 is get some cyberclean and kind of scrub it all over so that all the dust comes off.

 So, after that, you'd want to just go ahead and peel the plastic film off.

 This is a video tutorial on the installation process of the Moshi Palm Guard

 Alright, what was your process from start to finish to put the vinyl on the actual rims

 We would have to degrease the tire first with any degreaser, brake dust cleaner works perfectly.

 Make sure you try to get as much oil off the tires and grease if they're brand new tires.

 Then after that, you would have to lay out the decal or stencil, heat it up with a hair

 Now, you did it with the wheels off of it, can anybody do it with the wheels on or would

 I would recommend taking the wheel off just so you would eliminate over spraying of your

 And then is there any specific type of paint or any type of specific cans that you want to use?

 You could always use first a light coat of primer and then any color you want but it

 Now would you recommend for people to just spray it on or use a brush like you did?

 Okay, I used a brush because I didn't want to get over spray on my wheels.

 And for that reason I just decided to go with the brush instead.

 But I mean if you're able to mask off your wheel properly and the rest of your tire,

 You could always use spray can but you know with spray can you could put too much of a

 thick coat and then it'll start running or you may think it's dry and then it's not dry

 I hope you enjoyed my last show on how to make pasta with clam sauce.

 A pound and a half, I get three quarters of a pound of sconcilli.

 The reason is that I want to keep the juices, because I can cook it in the gravy.

 I'm going to take this here, I'm going to put it in the food processor.

 And I'm going to put it in with the rest that I cut up, sliced up.

 And that's going to bring out more flavor to the spaghetti gravy.

 And I'll put in about a quarter of a cup, maybe a little more than a quarter of a cup.

 It's not really that, it doesn't dominate the taste of the corn, the squiggilly.

 Now, I don't have to wait for anything, I can just throw the conch in right now.

 The hard part I ground up, the soft part I cut into like slices.

 That's going to be a nice gravy, it's going to go nice with the spaghetti.

 Now, I'm going to lower the heat and I'm going to simmer it for about an hour.

 So, I'm going to get the water ready for the pasta, for the gravy.

 Hi, thank you for joining me for part 2 of how to make an oval rug.

 And I want to quickly, if you were just joining me and you are not coming to the original

 one and you're only seeing this video, this is what we're going to be working on, an oval

 And my next video will be on how to make a square rug, so you may want to join me for

 Okay, what I'm going to show you now is one more corner, just a little farther along,

 You go into the hole, the next hole, pull your material through.

 You can see where it joined it, and then you're going to slide it off.

 A lot of times I try to make sure it's in the back or right in the middle, somewhere

 Okay, we're going into the corner now, so we're going to go into this corner and we're

 I'm going to see if I can just do 1 single stitch in the middle.

 And then I'm going to do 2 more stitches here to help make it lay flat.

 Now, I showed you in the first video how I kept on trying to point out the hole.

 But I'm going to show you really quickly how to see the hole when you're coming.

 The beginning part of making any crochet rug, rag rug, is the most difficult part.

 You can refer to my other videos, How to Make Sheet Yarn and How to Make No-Sew Sheet Yarn.

 This is a remake of my original video because I felt like you needed more close-ups in order

 I'm here today at High Desert Harley-Davidson in Boise, Idaho, making a video to show you

 how easy it is for you or anyone else to load your motorcycle in a trailer, close the door,

 Okay, the quick and easy way to do this is you're ready to go on a rally, you bring your

 wheel chock off of your garage stand, put it on your quick release plate, tighten up

 very unique thing now, you can get off your bike, you can leave it sitting in the trailer

 without any straps on it at night if you want to get it out of the weather when it's time

 Rather than put soft straps on your handlebars, compress your shocks and blow out your seals,

 the lock and load system has a strap that goes between the tire and the fender.

 Once it's ratcheted down, you now have the front end locked in place.

 So your suspension floats like it's supposed to do all the time.

 It's a matter of coming back here, getting these two unique buckles here, snap them into

 place, hook on your bike, ratchet down, come over to the other side, taking the other one,

 snapping it into place, hook on your bike, and in less than 60 seconds you're ready to

 Should you go over a railroad track, have to go down a gravel bumpy road, all the cheap

 straps out there will come loose and you'll lose them, your bike will fall over.

 You hit a bump, they automatically tighten up to keep the same amount of tension on the

 Once you've got home or got to your rally, very simple, remove it off of your bike, unsnap

 it, hang it up someplace out of your way, and you're ready to go.

 Most people, what they do, when they're not at a rally or if they're not going anywhere,

 they take their wheel shock and they throw it in the corner of the garage until their

 One of the great things about using the garage stand is you save 25% space in your garage

 When you come back from a ride, pull into your garage stand, which you've taken along

 Now you can detail your bike, check the fluids sitting straight up without on the kickstand.

 This is just a real easy way to create an empty center in a mini cupcake.

 What I do is I take a 199 Wilton decorating tip, put it in a coupler.

 And then when you tap it out, you have a little piece of cake and a cupcake with a hole in

 And then you can use the same tip, just attach it to a bag and put whatever you want inside

 Okay, this is how I'm going to put together my mini Ferrero Rocher cupcakes.

 Then you take the crispy part of those little sugar wafer cookies.

 Because you know the Ferrero Rocher candies, they have that little sphere of that crispy

 And then later, once my ganache has cooled, we are going to top this with ganache filled

 Now, at first I was doing this with a spoon, but I kept getting like uneven amounts of

 The same one I use for when I make the little cake truffles and little tiny cookies.

 Then take the back of a spoon or you can use an offset spatula.

 Just spread it around, making sure that you seal the edges around that little crisp cookie

 Because you can probably bet by tomorrow when you go to eat these cupcakes leftover, those

 little cookies underneath aren't going to be so crispy anymore.

 It'll still be good because with all this chocolate and Nutella and hazelnuts, there's

 And once you've got it pretty much all smoothed out, you're done.

 You've seen us do the Oreo shake the drunk shamrock shake and that's pretty much all we've done

 Red velvet Oreo shake they should have just called it the red shake because it's just really red

 Originally red velvet came from the reaction of vinegar and buttermilk which releases the anthocyanin and cocoa giving you a slightly red appearance

 Yeah, just pouring your cake mix water oil eggs and blend it all up while blending

 Turn red here's little chick Julia taught me if you have trouble cracking egg

 Crack them into a little bowl first then pour into a big bowl to avoid eggshell getting into bowl

 Now just simply spoon in your cake mix into your cupcake liners

 350 degrees Fahrenheit for 20 minutes and you'll go from this to this

 Mmm cupcake, they actually kind of look like those candy dots, you know the ones you pull up that paper

 We did the Oreo one shamrock shake the shamrock shake, which is a drunk sharing milkshake drunk shamrock

 I'm gonna put three because when you put it in there and you blend it up it just kind of decreases in size

Oh, yes JP look at all the calories you're burning while scooping

 Okay, it's got a time of the salt to this milk it's two Oreos, yeah

 And these are the last final steps that shouldn't really require explanation unless you want to learn how to drop Oreos really slowly

 We actually no more talking because we just want to try this one sip

 Am I gonna lie it tastes just like the one I had at Burger King

 The cake you guys are the reason we exist in the first place and we want you to be a part of it

We'll have you like literally like a face on our show follow us on Instagram Twitter

 Facebook periscope we're going to be announcing like up until the point that way you guys don't just sit there waiting around going

 Give this video a thumbs up a big thumbs up a big one and if you haven't already subscribed

 A boneless leg of American lamb is versatile and perfect for entertaining.

 A boneless leg can be filled with a variety of stuffings to add flavor.

 To begin, open up the boneless leg of lamb and remove any excess fat.

 Make a few cuts on thick sections of the meat to open it up further.

 Season with salt and pepper and then add ingredients such as parmesan cheese, garlic, fresh herbs,

 roasted red peppers, marinated artichoke hearts, and kalamata olives to create a Mediterranean-inspired

 Use butcher's twine to tie around the length of the leg on the sides as well as around

 The ties will help hold the leg roast together and create an even size for roasting.

 Place the boneless leg roast in a roasting pan or, if you have time, let the stuffed

 Roast the stuffed boneless leg of American lamb for about 25 to 30 minutes per pound

 For a medium-rare boneless leg of lamb, the USDA recommends cooking until the internal

 Remember, however, to remove your boneless leg from the oven before it reaches the desired

 doneness as it will continue to cook and the internal temperature will rise about 10 degrees

 Let the boneless leg roast rest for about 10 to 20 minutes before carving.

 The stuffing inside the roast will make for a beautiful plate presentation as you make

 You're telling the lost souls all the things you were afraid to say inside.

 You never want to pick the pan up and move the pan throughout your house to take it outside

 because you can spread the grease and the flames throughout your house.

 Slowly slide it across and smother the flame out, and that will extinguish the fire.

 If you're unable to get a top to smother the fire, do not panic.

 Turn off the flames, grab some baking soda out of your cabinet,

 gently sprinkle it on top of the fire, and smother the fire like that.

 To one day you were gone, and we figured out that we're not that strong.

The first time I made strawberry cupcakes, they came out a mess.

 They were way too moist and there were pockets of chunks of strawberries that created these moisture pockets

But today I am going to redeem myself because I am going to puree my strawberries

 extra fine and I have a little bit more baking knowledge these days and make vegan strawberry cupcakes again.

 As always, we are going to start by preheating our oven to 350 degrees F and lining a 12 cup cupcake tin with paper liners.

 and in this little ramekin I have my baking powder, baking soda, and salt.

 Mix that all together with a whisk until it is light, fluffy, and everything is distributed throughout the flour.

 Next we are going to mix together our wet ingredients all in a food processor.

If your food processor has a pouring spout in the top, you can leave it on

 while we pour in the rest of our wet ingredients, or you can turn it off, put in the rest of them, and then turn it back on later.

 I am going to pour in our almond milk, canola oil, raw sugar, and white vinegar.

 Once that is all spun up and diced and pureed and liquefied, pour it into your dry ingredients and whisk until

Use an ice cream scooper to distribute your cupcake batter throughout the tin

 and then bake it in an oven that has been preheated for 20 minutes.

 All your cupcakes are done when you take them out and you can stick a toothpick in the center and it comes out clean.

I am not making a buttercream today, just save on a little bit more sugar,

 use a little bit more whole fruit, dice up a cup of strawberries, put it in a small bowl, add a little powdered sugar,

Once your strawberry cupcakes have cooled off, your strawberry topping should be

We are going to top our strawberry cupcakes with about a tablespoon of the topping and taste it.

It reminds me of the summer time and it reminds me of when I was living in South Carolina

 and I would get strawberries from the strawberry truck and you would get a big old basket full of strawberries for $5.00.

It just reminds me of my good old times when I lived in the country.

Like I don't need as much sugar anymore, but if you are used to more sugar,

 baking spray, like oil, before you bake them or just bake them in the muffin tin with a little bit of oil.

 That way you don't lose all of your cupcake on the paper liner.

If you haven't subscribed, please subscribe because it would just be a tragedy if you missed any of my new recipes.

I haven't had time to make a tutorial lately, but it's here now.

 This is going to be a tutorial for Gabe Bondock's When You Say Nine.

 Because once it gets to the keychain it gets kind of difficult to explain and whatnot.

 But I do have the chords, if you could call them, or tabs out in the sidebar.

 It's just you have to change your hands, fingering around a little bit.

 Alright, so this song, there's basically two parts in the beginning that you want to learn.

 So the first thing you want to do is do this slide that goes into the first chord.

 And to do that, basically, you stay on the first string, the E string.

 And from here, what you usually do is just look over your ring finger, put your index finger and...

 I think you'll figure it out if you listen to the song enough and you just keep playing the chords.

 But I just want to get this out for you guys, because it's been like a month or two or three, I don't even know.

 Alright, the second part, there are a lot of different ways to play this, and I figured that the easiest part is just to bar.

You don't have to play all the strings, just stay in the first few strings.

 And then you go back here, so what you're doing to me, go back to bar two.

 And that's the whole song up to the parts that I'm going to cover.

 And I'm sorry, because I really don't know how to do tutorials.

 It's just the chords are kind of wide, so you have to stretch your hand and make it all weird.

 And we're going to start by mashing that banana, just like any other cooking recipe.

 And banana's got, as most folks know, really good in potassium, but it's also really emollient

 and has good skin-absorbing qualities for the hair and the skin.

 And the next thing we're going to prepare is use one egg white.

 And we're going to whisk the egg white to get it a little bit frothy.

 And you can see, you don't necessarily need it to form soft peaks like you would for baking.

 It's going to lift and stick to the oils and dead skin on your face.

 Another ingredient probably already in your fridge and again in your favourite banana

 The last ingredient is going to be one that's in most facial masks, which is a white clay.

 And this will stiffen the mixture, make it more of a paste and help it stick to your

 The banana mask that you would have stored in the fridge and again you can just apply

 And really it does smell, I was saying like banana bread, but even it smells this morning

 There's still, like you saw in the avocado chunks, there's still going to be chunks of

 Again, just gently go around the eye area and also just around the mouth area.

 So now we've let the mask sit on the face for about 10 or 15 minutes and we can take

 And I have really sensitive skin so I generally don't use treatments on my face and this has

 I'm going to show you how I finish off my quilts at the end when I've quilted a quilt

 float, which means I did not pin to the bar here, and now I have this much quilt to go,

 and I want to work it in and quilt it up so that it's as square as I can get it.

 moved my second bar back so that I can insert a piece of batting, because on this quilt,

 to show you how you do it when you do insert your batting incorrectly.

It's the same batting that I used throughout the quilt, and incidentally

I'm using a fairly dense quilting pattern, so I don't feel like I need to do

And what I want to do is keep my edges straight as I can, and keep

This is a pretty poorly pieced quilt that I purchased off eBay, and

 you're going to, I'm finding that there's a lot of extra bulk in here, and there's going

 to be bulk, and this is the problem we all run into as quilters at the end of our quilting

 is, what do we do to keep it straight and to keep all that extra bulk in if we have

 left side is not as bad, and I'm just using some pins to lay this down, and gently keeping

I want to keep this part as straight as I can, and I can use blue tape if I want,

 take both of these out, because this is pulled lower than the rest.

 to do is work anything that is bulky into the quilt so you can quilt it in.

I take my stitches and baste to within about 3 to 4 inches of the flap, or the corner.

 that I can do manipulation if I need to in the end and keep it as close to square as

Needle up, cut my thread, and go over to the other side and do the same

 bobbin thread about an inch behind where my last stitches ended.

 here because I have more bulk to feed in, and I want to get that bulk worked in without

 basted down the sides to within about 4 inches, I am going to advance the quilt, and we're

 going to work this bottom side, the bottom edge, which is a little different than what

 Hi, I'm going to show you how I am using Rock Prodigy guitar app for iOS to learn to play

 This lesson is called Open Position Power Chords and it covers three open position power

 It's designed for beginners so it's going to have you doing just a few notes at a time.

 I'm going to tap the play screen here to get the lesson going and I'm just playing part

 of this lesson right now just so you get a feel for how it works.

 and then has you eventually jamming all three of those chords together.

 And it's really fun to get you kind of playing something musical pretty quickly.

 So it really breaks it down, takes you through it nice and slow,

 Alright, we're going to do some homemade pizza with that pizza dough that I made the other

 Get it a little bit warm and then we'll stretch it out again in five minutes.

 In the meantime, I'm going to get my, well, you can call it pepperoni, but it's really

 If you ever see these hard sticks of salami, cured meats, in the Italian food section,

 if you get one of these, you can use them in pastas and pizzas.

 Because you can slice this so thin and get so much flavor out of it, it really lasts

 So what you want to do is take your fingers, line them up, put your knife right against

 You'll never get cut this way and you'll be able to make really thin slices.

 Alright, so the first thing I'm going to put on is a little bit of pesto.

 I like that just because, like I said, I want to do something a little bit more gourmet,

 Anyway, if you don't have this, just pop open a can of tomato sauce.

 One thing I like to buy and use and stock up on are these diced tomatoes.

 These ones have a bit of herbs in them, but they've got really great flavor and you can

 If you like your sauces chunky, this is a great thing to have around.

 It just adds a whole new sort of chunkiness to it, and I really like that.

 Between the paste and these tomatoes, this is actually going to be my sauce component.

 Okay, this needs something green, and let me tell you, my daughter, she loves green olives.

 One thing you'll find with gourmet style pizzas is that they're more simple,

 and each ingredient that goes on it is just that much more higher in quality,

 so you really want to be able to enjoy that and not get into sort of a fighting contest

 So I think I've got plenty going on here, and that's going to go in the oven now,

 Hi guys, I'm Tina from Makeup Wearables and today you're watching one of my oldest tutorials.

 I had actually taken this one down a few months ago, but I received so many requests to put

 Make sure your hair is curled with a curling iron, and if you have frizzy hair around your

 face, you'll want to smooth those down with a blow dryer before curling it so you'll look

 We're going to get more organized by sectioning out the hair, and then, starting from the

 You're going to wrap it twice before pinning both openings of the curl with a bobby pin.

 If you have fine hair though, you can wrap it more than twice, but make sure you're not

 wrapping it so much that the curl you form ends up looking too thick or bulky, because

 what we want is to make the curls as light and fluffy as clouds.

 You guys can also leave out some of the ends out of the bobby pin to create a flirty style,

 but if it's too long, it'll just look really sloppy and messy, so what you want to do is,

 if you have long hair, sometimes you want to form two curls with the same strand.

 But one important thing to remember is don't line up the curls all perfectly all in the

 same way, unless you want to look like George Washington with an updo.

 If you pin the curl straight, for the next curl, twist it slightly before pinning it.

 This is so that when the light hits your hair, it creates more of a dimension.

 Be sure to give this a thumbs up, subscribe if you're new, and I'll see you guys again

 And you probably don't even need the lighter fluid for that, but I use it for that.

 I get about, I don't know if any, in case you've never seen this before, I get about

 And I put them in a kind of pyramid for about 20 minutes and light them up.

 And you use a coating on this thing to make it clean and not stick.

 Yeah, it's a barbecue grill coating that keeps the chicken from sticking.

 So that has like made a real difference, hasn't it, in our cooking?

 And any vegetables that I'm going to cook or eat with my main meal is I put them in little pouches.

 Now I've been out here, I make sure that my coals are completely, yeah, see that chicken's done.

 Hi, I'm Jared and we're going to be doing some experiments on air pressure.

 You can see I pulled the label off just to make it easier for you to see.

 And you'll notice that I put food coloring in the water just so you can see it better.

 So what we want to be sure and very clear about is that air has pressure.

 So we want to do everything we can to show kids that air pressure.

 And we're going to do it by creating a hole in the bottle with this pin.

 So I'm going to take this pin and I'm going to just simply with the cap on push the pin

 And when I pull it out, you think water will come out of the hole.

 Now, when I apply pressure to the bottle, you'll see it's spread out.

 This cap is keeping all that air from coming in and pushing down on that liquid.

 So when I take the cap off, air is going to get in and the air should be pushing down

 All the air in this room is pushing against that hole and it's preventing that water from

For this style, the hair is clipped aggressively short on the sides and back and left with exaggerated length on top.

 There is a bit of disconnection between the sides and the top of the haircut.

 For this style, blending is achieved both through the use of styling product and hair cutting technique.

 This video demonstrates how to properly cut an aggressive pompadour haircut.

 Prior to starting the haircut, you'll want to slightly dampen the hair.

This will make the hair easier to control and manipulate while cutting.

 Make sure the hair is not too wet so as not to interfere with the operation of the clippers.

 Starting at the sideburn with the clipper blade anchored to the head, run the clipper all the way up the side of the customer's head, near the round of the head.

 For this haircut, it is critical that the clipper pivot and suspend as it reaches the round of the client's head.

 Continuing past this area will leave insufficient room for blending with the top.

 You may also need to go back and clean up any strays you may have missed along the way.

 Upon completion of cutting with the number two detachable blade, we will now switch clippers to an adjustable blade clipper with a number one attachment.

 Using an adjustable blade clipper in this manner gives you precision control and allows you to subtly vary the length of the cutting action to create a precision blend.

 To achieve the best blend possible, your motion with the clipper should be fluid, starting at the base with the clipper firmly anchored to the client's scalp and rocking up and outward.

 Continue cutting with this same attachment all the way around the customer's head.

 Once we've finished cutting all the way around the client's head with the number one comb, we'll remove this attachment and begin cutting with a bare blade.

 During this portion of the haircut, the clipper motion is essential.

 As you work up the client's head, you can open the blade to create a smoother transition.

 Continue working around the entire head until the desired blend is achieved.

 Next, we'll switch to a T-finisher clipper to create clean lines around the ears and the neckline.

 This clipper is also used to clean straight hairs from the neckline and further refine the taper.

 A clipper with a T-shaped blade is essential for efficiently creating clean lines around a client's ears.

 After completing our detail work with the finishing clipper, we'll now move on to a detachable blade clipper with a number one blade.

 Using a clipper over comb technique, we will begin to soften the blend between the aggressively short sides and the longer top.

 During this phase of the haircut, it's important to remember not to remove too much hair past the round of the head.

 Remember, for this particular style, much of the blend is achieved through the use of styling products.

 Continue to soften the line all the way around the client's head.

 Once we've achieved the desired blending, our clipper work will be concluded.

 Next, we'll trim the top of the client's hair, working from front to back in three sections.

 When connecting the left and right top sections to the center section we've just cut,

 it's important not to remove too much hair or conform too closely to the shape of the head.

 If combed straight up, the top of the hair should resemble a very long, grown-out flat top.

 Once you've finished cutting the top three panels, it's important to cross-check your work, moving from left to right across the client's head.

 Prior to the application of styling product, a blow dryer can be used to direct the hair up and back to create additional height on top.

 Styling for this haircut is achieved by working a medium to firm hold pomade through the hair with the fingers, directing the hair up and back.

 While the styling for this particular haircut is casual, a more formal look could be achieved by using a fine-tooth comb and creating a slick side part.

 In the dish, Frances Rivera gets to cook with a different chef each week.

 This weekend, she will be doing that live at the Health and Fitness Expo.

 You're going to want to come down here to get cooking with us here at the dish stage.

 Joining me is Vito Marcello from Bellini's in North Conway, New Hampshire.

 He comes all the way to make this meatballs calabrese is what we're making this morning,

 Now, we're going to start off with equal amounts of veal and pork, ricotta and my herbs.

 I'm going to have our bread crumbs mixed even with the wine and the egg.

 Now, usually, Southern Italians, we add bread soaked in either water or milk to our meat.

 And actually, you know, we're going to get started because we're running out of time.

 We have a simple scooper here, a small one, so we can form our meatballs about an ounce,

 Now remember, very important, you're handling pork, veal, beef, anything you don't want

 I'll tell you, Bellinis, we can't keep up with these meatballs.

 I can just imagine with that sauce and the way this is smelling, you'll be able to find

 the dish days just by the smells alone when we get things sizzling over here.

 We've got to make sure the sauce is hot before we put the meatballs in or else they'll break

 There's nothing worse than a meatball that just kind of crumbles right there.

 It's very easy to use because all you have to do is add a little bit of white wine or

 And it takes away a lot of that, you know, two hours on the stove cooking.

 And if you go to VitoFoods.com, we'll explain to you how healthy the sauces are because

 I didn't have any plans, but I saw you guys, you know, cooking things up in the morning.

 I'm going to give you a very quick demonstration of how to draft these pants.

 Now we'll have much more detailed instructions and a better video later that will give you

 But for this video we're just going to take a look at the preliminary concepts.

 So if I can get you to step down, I will draw the leg centerline.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to measure from the waist, and I'm just using

 We're going to measure the length and I'm going to mark this length on the pattern.

 Now the next thing that we're going to do is we are going to measure down to the hip

 Let me get you to come over and I'm going to take you from the side.

 What we're looking for with the hip level is the fullest part of the hip.

 Now in order to determine where the leg is going to start, where the torso ends and the

 leg starts, we're going to measure what I call the crotch depth.

 And the crotch depth is measured from the waist down to a flat surface where you're

 And I'm going to abbreviate this T for thigh, H for hip, and this is the center of our leg.

 Now notice that the thigh for the front pattern is only half the body.

 So what we can do here is we can take the thigh measurement and get you to move to the

 If we fold it in, or take measure in fourths, we can mark the thigh here and the thigh here.

 The next thing we're going to do is to establish the position of the center front with relationship

 Now after some research and checking on a variety of bodies, what I discovered is that

 if we take a fourth of the body, let's say from center front to side seam, and we divide

 This is a little rough because we're obviously doing this on the run.

 For the side of the body, we're going to measure from center front over to our side seam.

 And now what we want to do here, the hip to thigh area is going to stay fitted.

 Okay, so now we have the leg, the beginning of the torso, and the waist to hip region.

 Now for men, this area is flat, so you really wouldn't need a dart.

 But as you can see here, as we bring this thing up, we have some shaping is going to

 And that is a rough approximation of how we will create the pattern, just to give you

 Hello and welcome to Solve for the solution to my paper folding problem.

 With the first sheet of paper which is if you remember 1, 2, 8, 3, 7, 6, and 4 and 5.

 So how do you fold this to get all those squares in the right order?

 And with the one still here you're going to fold like this but you're going to grab the

 Put the 2 on the 3 and you're done with all the squares on the right order from 1 to 8.

 The second one is easier to explain but more difficult to do because you actually have

 And you are going now to continue because you want the 6 and 7 to go inside the 8 and

 Depending on your paper quality it can be very difficult or very easy.

 And now you have the 1 here and the 8 and believe me inside everything is in the right

 I hope you enjoyed this problem and see you next time for the next problem.

 I wanted to make this video today because I'm really excited about something I got in

 This was just released on Valentine's Day and I'm sure if you have been watching my

 Facebook page which is facebook.com slash justbeachbody, you will have known that I

 have been very, very anxious and excited to try this and to get this in.

 So this video that I am making will include me mixing up my very first shake and trying

 I will be using today one package which is one serving of Tropical Strawberry Shakeology.

 This is the only vegan option of all of the Shakeology flavors right now.

 So this is lactose and dairy free and the protein source comes from sprouted brown rice.

 This will appear backwards to you since I'm filming this on my webcam.

 The very first recipe that I'm going to be trying today is called Tropical Breeze.

 It's the first one listed here and that includes one cup of coconut milk which I picked up

 And then the most special ingredient which is my tropical strawberry Shakeology cup.

 Now if you don't know about Shakeology already, this is a meal replacement shake that you

 It contains all of the vitamins and nutrients that you need in a day.

 It's a really really great meal replacement and it tastes delicious.

 And with this powder there's all different types of ways you can mix it up.

 Of course frozen fruits, different juices, orange juice, coconut water, coconut milk.

 I'm going to go ahead and put the blender top on and blend away.

 Now one thing I like to do is add about a half a cup to one cup of ice to all my shakes.

 This would be completely fine but I like mine with more of a milkshake like consistency.

 So I'm going to go ahead and add one cup of ice and then I'm going to mix it up.

 Of course it will change colors depending on what you add to the powder.

 I'm going to use today, another thing that I got in the mail with the samples that I'm

 really excited about, Beachbody just kind of reinvented their shaker cups.

 They are so much more durable and the plastic is so much stronger.

 I knew that it would be delicious and I am very very happy with the taste of this.

 I'm going to kind of bounce back and forth I think between the tropical and the chocolate

 If you have any questions about Tropical Strawberry Shakeology, please feel free to comment on

 You can also connect with me and message me on my Facebook page which again is Facebook.com

 Also take a look at my Shakeology site which is Shakeology.com slash Jess Lambert.

 Okay, with every emergency situation, it starts with a scene size up.

 At this particular event, what we have is a young child of approximately seven years

 The babysitter is going to actually try and do a rescue, what's called a reach rescue

 Okay, what she's actually going to do is she's going to lay down on the pool deck and extend

 The reason why she's laying down is because she's trying to keep her center of gravity

 At this time, she's going to lose the noodle and the child's going to actually be in the

 The babysitter's going to panic, she's going to get up and she's going to run and call

 One of the biggest problems we have is one, pediatric drowning.

 EMS in Claremont County, an EMS respond to a possible drowning.

 As our units arrive on scene, they're going to start making contact with the babysitter

 Firefighter Tim Travers here, he's going to come in and he's going to assess the situation.

 And the EMS is also going to arrive, we're going to determine, was this a trauma-related

 That's very important to us because it dictates the type of care that we deliver to this child

 As Tim's gearing up and getting ready to go, he's getting ready to go in the water,

 young Mary there is going to become unresponsive and she's actually going to slip under the

 Lake County, on average, has just very good, we're actually at the very bottom of the scale

 To give you an idea, childs 1 through 4 are the highest death rate of drowning.

 To give you an idea, in 2007 there were 79 drownings in the state of Florida.

 At this time they've already made the recovery, they've already got the child out of the water.

 This child is unresponsive at this time, she's not breathing, she doesn't have a pulse.

 The first thing you're going to do is you're going to get her on this board for stabilization.

 Two, when they go to load her on the backboard, when they start doing CPR,

 The first thing they're going to do once they get her on that board, after that,

 That's very important because if you can't get air into the body, you can't ventilate the body,

 Because brain damage can occur within 4 to 6 minutes, especially with children.

 As they're getting her going, they're going to actually load her up on the backboard.

 Now, in the ambulance, they're actually going to start, they're going to get the IVs going.

 They're going to get a display of what's going on with her heart.

 A grounding is a person who is found unstoppable, no pulse, no heartbeats, no breathing at all.

 We'll let you use the force, and then we'll get you on the stretch.

 At that time, what you actually do is land the helicopter and fly them to the nearest pharmacy.

 The reason why that's important is because it's a higher level of care.

 This pretty much will complete our demonstration of a mock drowning at this time.

 A couple of statistics I want to repeat to you guys is be aware that drowning is the number one cause of death between children ages 1 and 4.

 Being attentive to your children, taking care of them, looking after them.

 So I'd like you guys to stand up and give yourselves an applause, please.

 Now this time, we're going to bring little Miss Mary Fisher out here.

 If you guys have any questions, we'll be up here with the Lake County Sheriff's Department as well.

 Today we're going to talk about all the myriad varieties of rice.

 Basmati and jasmine are well-known examples of long grain rices.

 It's very fluffy looking and these are the rices that you'd want to use if you were just

 going to make some rice to go with a curry or do a peel off or something like that.

 Brown rice has a little bit more minerals, a little bit more fiber than white rice.

 Parboiled rice is rice that has been boiled in its husk so it can be more nutritious,

 Short grain rice is good for anything where you want sort of a creamy, starchy consistency.

 The grains stick together as opposed to the long grain where they remain more separated.

 This particular one has wild rice, brown rice, and red rice in it.

 Wild rice is actually botanically classified as a grass seed, not a grain.

 So it's not actually rice, but it cooks up like rice and it can be used anywhere that

 Red rice is like the brown rice in that it still has the germ and the bran attached.

 It's just a fun change to liven up your plate a little bit with some more color.

 This is used a lot in Thai cooking for desserts and puddings and things like that because

 This purplish black color actually runs all the way throughout the entire kernel of the

 If you want to make your rice a little bit more fluffy, you can rinse it first.

 And then you can kind of swish it around in the water like that.

 That's from the excess starch that's on the outside of the grains.

 Removing that is what's going to make your rice cook up a little bit fluffier.

 Now most rices, generally the ratio is one part of rice to two parts of water.

 Long grain and white rices need like one and three quarters cups of water to one cup of

 And then your brown rices and short grain rices, you might want to bump that up a little

 I'm going to go ahead and do about two and a quarter cups of water with this one cup

 I'm just going to put it on high heat, bring this up to a boil.

 Our water and rice mixture has come to a boil, and I can see that because there's a little

 So now we just want to give it a stir to make sure there's no big clumps.

 We're going to put the lid back on it and turn it down to a simmer.

 And you just want to make sure that you leave the lid on it because the rice is kind of

 Our brown rice is going to take about 40 minutes before it's fully cooked.

 And the grains are still intact, meaning they haven't exploded and just turned into mush.

 In this video, we'll show you a fun, rustic way to count down to Christmas with this Hessian

 The tools and materials you'll need are chalkboard, red and green paint, tape measure, scissors,

 Stanley knife, pencil, large and small paint brushes, chalk, caulking gun and liquid nails,

 The first step is to measure up our countdown squares and cut into equal sizes.

 Roll out your Hessian cloth and measure and cut a length that suits where you want to

 Make sure it's long enough to fit all of your countdown squares.

 Now place your squares onto the Hessian, arranging them where you'd like them to sit.

 Once you've marked out all your rows, move your cardboard squares to the side so you

 Continue painting each branch down the tree, following your chalk outlines as a guide.

 Add some liquid nails to the back of your cardboard squares and place them back into

 the position you laid them in earlier, inside the rows you just painted.

 Once dry, use the chalk to number each square, starting from the top and working down, left

 Each numbered square represents a day of the month, and you cross out each day as you count

 Hang your calendar on the wall where everyone can see it and give your family a fun way

 For more details on making this countdown to Christmas calendar, visit your nearest

 Okay, so we're making Finnish Joulutorttu, which is kind of like a star-shaped Danish.

 So we want them to defrost a little bit, but not get like completely soft.

 So they're easier to mold and they won't get stuck into your fingers.

 So you get four cuts in each corner and then no cuts in the middle.

 Okay, now all we have left to do is to take some plum jam I guess, plum marmalade.

 So, now they are done, we're gonna put them in the oven in 225 degrees Celsius for 10

 And you can check from the description what the temperature is in Fahrenheit, cause yeah,

 So they became a bit puffy, which is what they're supposed to do.

 Now before eating, be careful cause the jam is, or the marmalade, is really really hot.

 Hey everyone, this is Adam here and in this video I'm going to show you how to install

 This install is just the same as almost every other outdoor light.

 These are pretty cool because they are LED so they use a lot less energy.

 It also has a photo cell on the top so it can turn off during the day no matter what.

 In the box you have the main unit, the scroll that goes on the top, the mounting bracket

 Then use a Phillips driver and unscrew these two screws on top.

 If you're going to put on the metal scroll you need to unscrew the nut and bolt here

 To take the old ones off on this style I have one nut that you undo.

 Before you get into doing any of this make sure that the power is off.

 You need to turn it off at the breaker not just the light switch because you might be

 doing this safely with the light switch off but somebody else might accidentally turn

 the light on when you're working on it and you don't want that to happen.

 You might have one that you can just leave but I have to take this one out.

 Those two posts coming out, those two screws coming out are level with each other.

 This is going to go a lot easier if you have a ladder high enough to hold your light while

 When you're connecting your new wires it's always black to black, white to white, and

 Make sure the new wire goes on all the way at the top near the other wires.

 Now you fold the wires back inside and you can take off these caps here.

 I can loosen the nut and spin the bolt back in to make it shorter.

 You're going to have to do this a few times to get it to the right depth.

 Once it's where you need it, take a wrench and tighten these as tight as you can.

 As long as the threads are sticking out about an eighth of an inch, that's good enough.

 There's just two of these caps that go on both sides and that holds the whole light

 You might want to remember to keep the paperwork for this light in case you crack the glass.

 If you have some sort of contact info for the company, at least you could get a replacement.

 Simply take off the nut, take off the wire caps, remove your old light, take out the

 bracket, put the new bracket in, adjust it so it's level, tighten the center screws,

 adjust the depth of the mounting bolts, recap all the wires, ground to ground, black to

 black, white to white, fold the wires in, place the light on, and secure it with the

 If you have any questions, please leave them in the comments section.

 Don't forget to click subscribe if you want to see more videos like this.

 of these fractions to make sure that they're all greater than 1

 Hey YouTube, it's James TWDM again and in this episode I'm going to tell you how easy

 it is to clean it, clean your spider guns, and how easy it's said to be done, but I do

 it differently because it is necessary, but they don't ever say it's necessary in your

 They don't tell you how to take precautions when you're doing your gun.

 Okay, to take your gun apart, first you're going to want to take off your hopper.

 And so, first you pull your pin up, pull your bolt out, lay it down like it would be in

 Then you would untwist the velocity adjuster, it's counter-clockwise, and then all of your

 The o-ring should have came out by now, but it won't because it's dumb.

 What I like to do, what they always say, if you just give it a simple tap it'll come out,

 I use a spare parts kit, and I forget which one it is, but I think it is this one.

 I always take off the trigger frame because, I'll show you guys, as you can see, I got

 the trigger frame off, the expansion chamber can come off, I just don't want to take it

 The reason I don't want to take this off is because this sharp thing, it's very sharp,

 you don't want to damage it, so when you are pulling it out or putting it back in, it will

 So to clean it, you're going to want to stick your thing into it, hammer it down just a

 little bit, just so you can see everything, and then you stick it right here, and then

 And then, nothing's been damaged, you always take this off, and then you grab your squeegee,

 I have the Tippmann standard shot squeegee, it's not really fuzzy, it's just got that

 So you always want to clean, this little loop part, you don't want to wipe that out,

 So you stick it in, and you pull it out, and all that is damaged or gross inside should

 come out, and you always clean your breech, always, always, don't ever forget it.

 And then, you always got to watch your macro line, you don't ever want to damage it.

 Then, when you're putting stuff back in, make sure that the hole's on top, you stick your

 thing back into it, your o-ring, stick that in there securely, stick your velocity adjuster

 thing, your adjuster, into it with the spring, and you start screwing it in.

 You look inside for the hole that's on top, where the bolt goes in, and then stop when

 You take your bolt, you stick it in, wait for it to click twice, maybe it's a little

 bit off, there you go, it's locked in, then you screw it in the rest of the way.

 After it's screwed in the hole will win, then you're ready to put your grip panel back on.

 Comment below, like it, and tell me how you like it, and yeah, it's been fun making these

 videos for you, if you guys have any questions, to ask me, and I'll make a video about it.

 All right, now we're going to ground about 1⁄4 of a pound of ground pork.

 And while we're waiting, we're going to add a little bit of soy sauce,

 When it's nice and brown, you can take it off and turn this off.

 You don't want to drain the fat off, even though it sounds gross,

 Once it's cool, you're going to add some of the carrots that you'd already sliced up,

 And then we're going to go ahead and we're going to add a little bit of sesame seed oil,

 We're going to mix them all together so you've got the ingredients combining.

 Now we're ready to put our mixture into the center of our wonton wrappers.

 So what you're going to need is you're going to open your wontons,

 You're going to just kind of scoop some of the toppings on and lay them out in a line.

 Now you're going to pull it back towards you and just kind of roll a little circle.

 I call this subway style because now we're going to take the edges

 and fold them in and continue to roll until you've got the little point of your envelope here.

 You're going to just dip your finger in some water and wet that down

 Now all that does is help to hold the dough to itself so all your toppings stay inside

 Alright, while we let this oil heat up, we're going to get ready with a paper towel

 to get some of the grease off of these guys when we pull them out of the fryer.

 You're going to know when your oil is hot because the steam will come off of it just a little bit.

 It actually cooks pretty quickly so you just move it around in the water.

 I'm actually using chopsticks, but I don't advise doing this if you're not comfortable using chopsticks

 because you have to be able to pick it up really fast once it's done cooking.

 Okay, step one for you, there's going to be a little thing right here that has all these

 And there's going to be a little torque screw in there that you need to actually undo first

 Anyway, the next step, there's like a little plastic ring that hooks on here.

 And then the next step would be having to take off these little screws right here.

 Also I forget, if you don't know what torque wrenches are, these have the little stars

 Before you even do anything over here, what I want you to do is I want you to put it into

 third gear so it can be locked up whenever you actually release the linkages in the bottom.

 So you're going to have to undo those before you actually take this whole mechanism out.

 So I'm going to go ahead and start doing that and I'll show you the next step right now.

 Okay, yeah, I just remembered after I took off these two that I'm unable to get those

 I need to actually take off the whole bottom portion of this plastic over here.

 Just grab it and pull it towards you and it will pop right off.

 I'm going to go ahead and pause it after I take out those two screws and show you the next step.

 I haven't done this in a while but it's pretty simple like I said.

 I'm going to take it out of the fortress to show you the other one.

 And what you want to do is you want to turn it a little bit to the right.

 Once you take that off, you're going to notice it's already all loose.

 So that's why I had it like that because you're going to need to re-put it when you put it on like that.

 If not, it's going to be all crazy loose and you don't know what gear it is.

 This is the actual link cable to the connection where your gears are from.

 What you need to do is you need to stick preferably a screwdriver.

 the white part right here is going to be on top like this one is on this other side.

 In order to put the Hertz shifter, you're going to need to twist this, which is easy.

Today I'm going to be teaching you guys how to make transfer paper,

 which is especially good if you are drawing on illustration board, watercolor paper,

 you're just getting that drawing on there just to start your painting.

 you know, I guess it can be good if you're crafty, if you figure out a way to use it.

 Next thing is you're going to sketch onto one side of your tracing paper.

 So here I sketched a really bad fox face just for this video onto a piece of tracing paper.

 And now what you're going to do is take it, flip it onto the opposite side of where you drew it,

 and make sure, because I've done this before where by accident, oops, it's not focused.

 So here, make sure it's on the opposite side and always check because the one time I didn't I really messed up.

 And then you are going to color with your graphite pencil over it.

 So this is going to take a while, but you know, you can really just go over the lines.

So now that you've shaded in all of the areas that you are going to outline,

 And then you are going to take a mechanical pencil or any, like not too sharp edges so that you can just sketch over it.

 What I like to do is I like to put some tape down usually, but I don't have any tape right now.

 I'm not going to do any of the fur or anything, but you can, you really can do whatever you want.

 you just have this perfect proportional sketch after you've done whatever BS to this.

 Like you can beat up your, your sketching paper, do whatever, you know, like when I sketch, I go crazy.

 Like, you know, there's always like pencil marks all over the place.

 And it's just not, it's not convenient for when you actually want to get to painting,

 So this way you can just color block and just have your sketch without all the other, you know, BS.

 So I hope you've enjoyed my video and I hope you either like or subscribe.

 So that means I'm going to buy some Crayola products and see what actually can be used professionally or not.

 Not exactly professionally, but you know, what works just as well as the expensive art products

 Hey guys, so as you might remember, like a few videos ago, I did a mini review on the

 seaweed extract and that is still what I use as a fertilizer but what I noticed today when

 So I figured why not show you guys today kind of how to set it up and then just show you

 Alright so the first thing you're going to want to do is pour it out so it is exactly

 I'm not really sure why they picked this amount to go in, however it does work so I'm not

 really going to question it and then what you're going to want to do is just pour this

 For anyone wondering what kind of water I use, it's well water.

 I don't use the city tap water because usually that has a lot of chlorine and a few other

 things that have, you know, would kill the bacteria in some of the soil.

 You can also use distilled water or reverse osmosis water because that takes out all the

 particles that are in the, well not all of them, but most of the particles that are in

 Alright so as you can see I put it all in there, however it is not mixed up so the next

 step, make sure you have your finger on the cap and the cap is on and then shake it.

 One thing you're going to want to do is before you pour in the fertilizer or the extract,

 whatever you want to call it, you want to make sure that you have enough room at the

 So I would suggest leaving it, well as you can see on this jug, it says a gallon right

 there and then the water level was just right at the bottom of the letters.

 I would say that's pretty appropriate, the place to put it, it got me pretty much to

 So now what I'm going to do is just show you an easy way to apply the fertilizer because

 one thing that you may or may not notice when you water is that the water can sit on top.

 So I'm just going to show you a way that you can get it to actually soak through a lot

 Alright so as you can see my soil is pretty dry which means I need to water.

 So like I said, sometimes you may notice that if you water, the water will just sit

 on top and it doesn't really soak through meaning that a lot of the fertilizer stuff

 will just sit on top and it won't actually go down to the roots.

 Now don't hold me accountable for that if that's actually not true, that's just some

 So what you're going to want to do is just spray it a few times.

 That gets the top of the soil kind of wet and that also acts as somewhat like a sponge

 because now when I water with the fertilizer, you notice how it just soaks through automatically,

 it doesn't sit on top at all which means I know that all the nutrients from the extract

 I'm just going to go through and water all my plants now and see you in a second.

 Okay, so everything's all watered and as you can see, I'm pretty much out of fertilizer

 but that's okay because you only have to apply it like once every two weeks.

 So one other thing that you could do after you are finished fertilizing just the soil

 is actually put some of it in a spray bottle and just spray down the leaves and stems and

 I know that Luke over at the Mi Gardener channel has explained it on when I did this

 But however, it does absorb some of the stuff through the leaves and stems.

 So just spray it down, it's no exact quantity of how much or how little, you know, just

 So I'm going to go through and do that and I'll hopefully have videos for you guys over

 I know it has like a national park so there's going to be a few more, not really garden

 Telling you here, make sure you place it nice and tight against the seal.

 going to have one clip right centered on this crossbar down the window.

For the rear, you're going to have, and you're putting the clips on the paint,

You're going to have an upper and lower on the front of the back window.

 So just cleaning off the dirt, wax, whatever might be there to prepare for your clips.

 at 30, you start it above the 30 centimeter mark from the bottom right there.

These sides kit is around a hundred bucks only for the rear windows and the hatch

 don't want to mess with the tint and the permanent modification, these are a great solution for

 Alright, as you can see I'm taking a black eyeshadow base and I'm using this Nikkik

 I'm applying it all over my lid and I'm just going to blend it out with a flat concealer

 Okay so right here I'm just taking my fingers and I'm just going to blend out that base

 And I'm just applying this color all over my lid with an elf brush.

 I'm just buffing that color into my crease and it's just going to make it look like the

 So I just put just a little bit on the highest point of my eyebrow.

 And then I didn't show it on camera but I went into Blame It On Midnight by NYX and

 I just kind of blended that down into the other highlight, the other color.

 Now I'm taking Black Amethyst from NVI Cosmetics and as you can see that's a really dark purple

 You can just take any eyeshadow brush really and you just dust that onto your eyelid and

 it's just going to give that instead of your eyelid color looking so dark, it's just going

 And I'm just going to use this and apply it to my outer corner.

 And the brush that I'm using is from Coastal Scents and it's a tapered blending brush.

 But now I'm just taking that fluffy brush from Walgreens again and I'm just buffing

 out that lighter purple and it's just going to blend out the dark color that I just put

 Now I'm using Pink Red Blue from NVI Cosmetics and that's like a blue tone purple color.

 I'm just using a small detail brush and I'm applying it to my inner tear duct.

 And now as you can see I'm lining my waterline with a black eyeliner.

 Now I'm taking Shadowy Lady and it's just that dark plummy purple color that we put

 I'm using a small detail brush and I'm just going to blend that into my lower lash line

 and it's just going to smoke that black out that we just put on the waterline.

 Now I'm using my MAC Match Master Foundation in 8.5 and I'm using my flat top brush from

 Now for under my eyes I'm using these two colors in the Camouflage palette from Coastal

 I'm just using my foundation brush and I'm applying it right under my eyes.

 And I'm just going to kind of bring that down by my nose and then just bring it right under

 It's supposed to be a foundation brush but I like to use it under my eyes to blend out

 I'm just using that to blend out the concealer just to get rid of any cakiness that may have

 Now I'm taking a damp beauty blender sponge and I'm just tapping this all over my face

 and it's just going to get rid of any streaks that may have come from using your foundation

 And I'm just using, I don't even know what kind of brush this is to be honest.

 I'm just using that to set right under my eyes to set the concealer.

 And to set the rest of my foundation I'm using my Mosaic Color Wheel from NYC.

 I'm using my Sonia Kashuk brush and I'm just using it to set the rest of my foundation.

 I'm just using it with a blush brush and I'm applying it right on top of my cheeks to give

 I was going to put some glitter on my lash line but I decided not to.

 Thank you all for watching and I'll see you all in my next video.

 Hey guys, just going to go over putting the toe in, toe out on your snowmobile.

 So the way I've always done it is first of all get on the machine, square it up.

 The ski should be toed out about a quarter inch more at the top of the ski versus the

 My case this ski is actually bent a bit because I must have hit a tree or I went into something

 So here I'm getting the steering wheel as straight as possible.

 Inside or outside it doesn't matter how you measure it, just make sure you measure the

 The only thing I don't like is this ski is coming out a bit more.

 You want your skis to be like a quarter inch out at the top here.

 If you have them too far in, what will happen is your sled will dive and it'll track all

 Your sled will want to go, because actually the skis are fighting against each other.

 You put them a little bit out and then it basically rides nice and straight.

 I would be loosening off this, this nut here, and then unscrewing this out to bring it out

 So anyways, if you need to adjust your skis, they're all pretty much the same.

 So you're going to have an adjuster similar to this and you adjust that in or out.

 So this video is going to show you guys how to fix a very common iPhone charging problem

 and that is your iPhone not charging even though you have your connector plugged into it.

 As you can see when I wiggle it about a bit, it doesn't charge properly

 and that's because the connectors are not connecting very well to the pins in your iPhone.

 So a very common way to fix this is all you need is a bit of water and a toothbrush.

 This sounds very silly, that using water with your iPhone, but it definitely works

 and I'm going to show it and I'm going to prove it by using my iPhone.

 So what you want to do is just get your toothbrush and you want to dip it in the water lightly

 This is because you don't want a lot of water connecting with your charger port obviously,

 but you do want a little bit of residue so it can scrape all the dust off.

 So once you've spent like a minute or so just scraping off all the excess water,

 you can simply get your iPhone, get the charger, put it in your port

 What this will do is it will loosen up any lint and dirt that's been connecting,

 and once you've done this a few times, your iPhone should start charging correctly.

 Now once you've done this for about a minute, simply get your charger and place it in

 It turns out a problem that I thought was very serious was very simple

 and it turned out there was just too much mud and dust in my iPhone's connecting port

 and it was fixed from simply putting some toothbrush in some water,

 getting all the water off and cleaning the port for about a minute.

 Hey guys, I got me a Briggs and Stratton carburetor right here.

 So all you need when you clean a carburetor is a rag, this, and a flat head screwdriver,

 So first I'm going to clean, I already took the float bowl out.

 Then you can take the pin out of the, you may need a pair of pliers.

 I gotta go get a different kind of screwdriver, so I'll be back.

 I couldn't get the main jet out because it was starting to break off in there on me.

 And if it comes back out at you, like nothing comes out the inside of the carburetor, it

 And you go ahead and take it out and spray a little bit in here.

 You just want to spray it in almost every orifice that you can find.

 You have to make sure your jet end goes in your thing and slides in there like this.

 You set, make sure that jet, or that float needle goes in there flat.

 I already cleaned it out a little bit, but spray some in there.

 Now if it's already broken, you might probably need to replace it.

 Well, I'm going to have to turn off the camera, because I'm going to waste all my film on the stupid thing.

 Today we are going to... well, actually, let me introduce the little date palms that we've

 These are the date palms that we started to grow from seed, just out of the fruit.

 Looks like I've got a little bit of insect damage going on here.

 I'll take some rubbing alcohol and a q-tip and just take them right off.

 So I've got... we're going to transplant these today, by the way.

 I'm not really noticing any root development, but that also could be because there's some

 I don't want to bury the plant much deeper than what it was right now.

 Just going to take the top inch of soil off and throw it in my garden there.

 I don't know if you noticed there, but there's a little white section here.

 So we're going to try to make sure that the soil level stays at that level.

 It doesn't look like there's as much damage on it from anything.

 We also don't want to compact the soil so much that the roots can't move around.

 I'm sure these will be much more happy now that they are repotted,

 So they kind of went dormant, and I really didn't get any growth.

 Otherwise I'm going to be waiting 100 years before I have a sizable plant.

 I'm really interested to find out how everybody else has theirs grow.

 Hi this is Kamesha Cooke also known as Cooter Baby 2002 on my Yahoo and today I will be

 demonstrating on how I am using the 4Natural Afro Stretch Curl Cream.

 I purchased this from my local beauty supply store which is Sally's here in Florida and

 today I will be demonstrating on how I am using this product, only this product with

 And as you notice I have already begun two stranding my twist all over my head.

 I co-washed my hair yesterday and I also detangled it in the shower and I am just now starting

 I have no other products in my hair and this right here is the consistency of the Afro

 The first ingredient in the cream is water and the third ingredient is shea butter and

 It has a sweet smell to it which I do like about it and my daughter is here to assist

 This is how much of the product that I am going to be using just on one part of my hair

 to show you how this product brings great moisture and great shine to my dull, forcey

 Now because I have forcey hair I have to do a lot of maintenance to it and a lot of detangling

 and it's hard for me to find products that can give great moisture, shine and health

 to my hair and this right here was the first product that I have used since I have been

 I have been natural now for 14 months and this is the first product that I have ever

 found to make my hair very healthy, very shiny and it does, and I repeat, it does

 elongate my curls and stretch out my hair with a two strand twist.

 If you notice and you see, it has great bounce to it and that is something that is very hard

 My hair is not wet or anything while I am doing this two strand twist.

 See how it's already stretching out this hair and if you notice, yes it is very tight.

 And yes it does shrink up a lot and this right here has helped with my shrinkage.

 I have never found any other product you guys that does this right here and when I say my

 hair is soft, it is soft and when I say it is very moisturized, it is very moisturized

 Now I will have pictures at the end of this video or I just may add onto this video showing

 But yes, I am using just this product right here only on dry hair.

 This is Cuda Baby 2002 and I will upload the ending result of the two strand twist.

Today in this demonstration I'm using two colors of yarn tied together as a single loop.

 So it's easier for you to see which is the thumb yarn and which is the index finger yarn.

 In all the demonstrations I'll use the lighter color as the primary cast on and the dark as the second.

 One standard version of long tail, often called the slingshot version, starts like this.

 Pick up a stitch, bring the stitch through that simple cast on, and then snug up the simple cast on.

 It creates these commas and the stitch row done in the darker color.

 But there's a lot of different ways of doing the long tail cast on.

 If you hold the yarn in the right hand, and I don't, so this is a little awkward for me,

 you can form the stitch with the thumb, using the thumb almost as a left hand needle.

 put the needle into the thumb stitch, wrap the yarn to create a stitch, bring it over.

 If you were knitting, you would twist it that way and pull it off.

 Another variation of this simple technique is to do the same thing on your index finger.

 Use your index finger almost as a left needle, wrap the stitch round, bring the stitch over, and snug up.

 but that's mostly because I'm not used to using this technique and not used to using the yarn in my right hand.

 My tail or my tail yarn is in the back, my ball yarn is in the front.

 I'm going to create the first row with the tail yarn and then the second row with the darker yarn.

 If you have a simple slip knot, you'll have to position it to the back.

 The other yarn is taken in front of this yarn over and a second yarn over is made.

 There are now two stitches on the needle, a light and a dark, and both of them are really very simple yarn overs.

 And then lift this first stitch over the second stitch and snug it up.

 The front yarn crosses in front of the yarn over, comes to the back, makes a second yarn over.

 Using the needle, lift the stitch over, in effect to cast it off.

 Yarn in front crosses over, comes to the back, also makes a yarn over.

 And now, using the tip of the needle, bring the one stitch over.

 But if you look at the back of a long tail, you'll see, oh really, it does look very much the same.

 And if I turn it round, you'll see we have those same comma stitches.

 Now, there is a slight difference, and if we pull the two yarns, two things together, you can see it.

 But once you take it in hand to knit, you'll notice the purl side is at the back,

 So there's one way to do a long tail that you might not have known.

 The ball yarn crosses in front of it, brought to the back, and a second yarn over is made.

 The second needle is picked up and used to cross one stitch over the other.

 A slightly different edge to the long tail in terms of how it's wrapped,

 An open loop long tail starts similar to a slingshot, but the yarn is held reversed.

 So this upward slant is very similar to this yarn over, our open loop, and our stitch.

 If you know several versions of long tail, you're much more likely to find one that works for you.

 When you think of old desserts in America, apple pie probably tops the chart as one of the oldest.

 But did you know that one dish served at diners all across America predates our country by about 1500 years?

 They offer independent professionals working spaces in Park Slope, Brooklyn.

 So if you're working from home, it's time to get out of your house and into your own desk space.

 Rice pudding has made its way into nearly every culture in the world.

 And I think it's just something about cooking rice inside of sweetened milk that people love.

 The rice pudding that you know and love today, the kind that you get at your grocery store or diner, has European roots.

 And most people believe that the original rice pudding came from India.

 And it came to Europe via the original rice trades that happened way back in ancient times.

 And it dates back to about 2000 years ago when it was first invented in the Jagannath Temple,

 The original dish is made with the staple of India, basmati rice.

 It can be served hot or cold with lots of nuts and dried fruit.

 To make Indian kheer, melt two tablespoons of butter in a heavy-bottomed pan.

 Add three quarters of a cup of basmati rice that has been washed and drained.

 Bring it to a boil, then lower the heat and let it simmer until it's reduced by half its volume.

 Now add a half a cup of sugar, a palmful of raisins, and some ground cardamom.

 And if you're just watching the show, please subscribe in iTunes and leave a rating.

 Alright, I had a question come up about how do you play a lead sheet without sounding

 Well, a lead sheet is when you have just the chords and a general rhythm there that kind

 So G, G, D, D, you know, frequently you'll have the title and you'll have a time signature

 so it'll tell you is this four beats, is it three beats, you know.

 And generally with a lead sheet, you know what the song is already, you know how it

 goes, you don't need the melody, you probably just need the chords or maybe sometimes the

 And they can be fancier than this, you know, they can be printed out, they'll have the

 But generally speaking, a lead sheet is just chords and sometimes lyrics.

 In this case, I wrote out the chords here for Let It Be, you know.

 When I find myself in times of trouble, Mother Mary comes to me.

 That one by the Beatles or maybe it was just Lennon, I don't know.

 So now, the question came up, how do you play a lead sheet without just playing a bunch

 Alright, so if I were just to play these chords, this is G, D, E minor, C. Alright, so on the

 piano, that's just G, D, E minor, and C. Alright, so if I just play that all over the place,

 You know, okay, it fits, but it's not quite as pretty, you know, because what I could

 Alright, that's going to sound a lot more flowing, it's not jumping all over the place.

 The first thing that you need to know, I'm assuming already that you know the chord names

 and their places on the keyboard as far as major and minor chords go.

 So, if you don't know that already, maybe you should back up and go look at that, figure

 out what a G chord is, and a D chord, and an E minor chord, and go figure out what those

 things are before you go on with this video, otherwise you might get a little bit lost

 So when you first learn a chord, 1, 3, and 5, like G for instance, you learn it in root

 Root position means that the name of the chord, the note name of the chord, G, is on

 This is called the root of that chord, so we're starting with that, and now we're in

 An inversion is when you take the root and play it up here instead.

 So, here I'm playing G, B, D. Now up here I'm going to go B, D, G.

 So, what we need to do is figure out how to go from here to here very quickly.

 You need to practice it such that you can do that and still talk at the same time even.

 I always say if you can play something and talk at the same time, then you've really

 mastered it because now you're using two different parts of your brain.

 What's going on here is that if you have three notes in a chord, you have two different places

 other than root position, so three total places that you can play this.

 You can play it in root position, you can play it up here, or you can play it up here.

 The first step to not playing this just in a block way is learning these inversions.

 With all the white note chords, in this case that would be the G, the E minor, and the

 What we're going to do is we're going to take that G, put it on top, and then we're going

 We're going to go one, three, five here, and then one, two, five here.

 Then when we take this B and put it up one more octave up here, now we're playing G,

 Now you're going from root position to first inversion to second inversion.

 Take the E, put it on top, and you play one, two, five here, one, three, five on top.

 Once you've got that pretty well down, then go on to the next video in this series.

 So, what we're going to do first is by placing your pinky on the G4.

 Place your pinky on the G4 and on your music sheet you're going to see that we have three

 So the first line is going to be, you're going to be playing it like this.

 Now you're going to see there's a red note, means to move your finger number one on the

 Place your pinky on the G4 and you would be counting it like this.

 Then you're going to play with your second finger on the D, counting like this.

 So this is how you would be counting it if you're reading the music.

 So I'm going to be doing it one more time at a very slow tempo.

 Play finger number five, then finger number four, finger number three, two, finger number one,

 Then finger number two, three, finger number four, finger number two, finger number three, two, finger number one.

 Remember the red notes indicate that you need to be moving your finger.

 You may pause this DVD at this moment so you can practice the first staff.

 And once you know to play the first staff correctly, we're going to move on to the second staff.

 I'm just going to get started here by adding a bit of olive oil to a preheated pot.

 this up and this should take somewhere in the neighborhood of about five minutes.

 by two tablespoons of tomato paste, a couple of cloves of garlic.

So what we're going to do now is just allow this to cook and reduce by half, just until the

Now we're going to add in a couple of cans of Italian pasta sauce, a tablespoon

 or two of Italian seasoning, a couple of bay leaves, some brown sugar, and this is about two

One of my all-time favorites, some ground black pepper and some salt.

 So I'm just going to give this a stir up until it's well incorporated.

 throw a cover over this and we're going to let it cook over low heat for about four hours.

 you might want to do is stir this occasionally because you don't want the sauce to burn.

Don't forget to click subscribe because you don't want to miss a video.

 After about four hours, the sauce is incredibly nice and thick.

Grate some of your favorite cheese over the top and you're ready to serve.

 made a month ago and the one that I made earlier this week, I'm going to go ahead and go through

 I used Jamaican Black Castor Oil to actually help thicken up my hair.

 Oil that I just picked up from my local beauty supply store to add softness.

 Hair Oil just as an added hair aid as well as a tube of Meconazole Nitrate 2%.

 looks like this tube is pretty standard because I got a different box from a different store

 Sublime Sulfur, see if that helps out with the growth, and Peppermint Oil.

 because it is such a concentrated element, I added about a half a sprinkle, literally.

 sulfur, if anyone out there has used it as a hair growth aid, you know how it clumps

And I thought that I wouldn't use it anymore after I mixed it with my Shea Butter because

And it's kind of got the consistency of like a leave-in conditioner.

 a combination of the oils as well as how I ended up mixing the batch this go-round.

 first batch that I made last month, all I did was I took a rat tail comb and I kind

 nitrate into the cavities and just mixed it as though I was mixing like water and flour.

 So with that, what happened was at the bottom, I could still see just the straight coconut

So there was coconut oil that ended up not being mixed in with the meconazole nitrate

 of moved the coconut oil around, put the meconazole nitrate in there and mixed it up as best as

I then took the second container and poured some of it in there, in the first

 the mixtures from container to container that way everything would get evenly distributed.

 Now when it came to the garlic powder, no issues with the garlic powder.

Then when it came to the sulfur, that's where I hit a road bump.

 Sulfur, as many of you know, does not like to fully break down and mix in with other

 pure shea butter and that stuff would not break down for anything.

 up at the bottom, it would not mix and I just said, okay, this stuff is just not my friend.

 So, I did the sulfur again just to see and I used, like I said, a half of a half of a

 half of a teaspoon just as a little bit of an extra growth aid.

 to break down the clumps because it would try to clump up and as soon as I would see

 simply do is I just use my wide tooth comb and I just go and I part, swipe, part, swipe,

 part, swipe all until I feel that it's all over my scalp and then I just go about my

So, that's going to be my second installment of my meconazole nitrate

 mixture and we'll see if we can get another inch by New Year's.

 Hi, I'm Annette Rushing, owner of Custom Cakes in Savannah, Georgia, and today I'm going

 to show you how to disassemble a stacked wedding cake and also how to cut it.

 In the dowling and stacking video, if you remember, we used a center dowel for our cake.

 Make sure you're under the cake board so that you're loosening it from the cake below.

 Use your other hand to steady the tear as you lift the cake straight up and off of the

 other cake, and remember, we're removing it from that center dowel, so it needs to go

 To remove the center dowel, you just have to twist it gently and pull the dowel straight

 Now to remove the plastic dowels, I like to use needle nose pliers to remove them, and

 So we're going to pull those again, kind of twist and pull straight out of the cake.

 Just lift it off the cake and set it aside, and then remove the dowels.

 Alright, you need to use a really sharp knife, and what I'm going to do is I'm going to treat

 So wedding cake servings are one by two by the height of the cake, so I'm going to go

 in about two inches, and I'm going to cut until I get to about a half an inch before

 And then I'll finish off this row, and this can be for somebody who really likes frosting.

 And then I'll take a damp cloth, clean my knife, go in two inches, and start it all

 round fixed magazine on the SKS with this detachable 30 round duckbill magazine.

 I am in Canada so keep in mind it is a 30 round mag but it has been pinned to only 5

Alright before we get started if you want to see any of the other episodes

 for the SKS rifle look in the description and you'll see the links for the other videos.

 Alright for this installation all you'll need is the rifle, the 30 round magazine and a

 that the trigger assembly is going to go this way and everything else is going to go that

 Alright there's a few small things I want to mention about this magazine.

 is with a detachable magazine you have to actually have the receiver open to remove

 if you have the receiver closed it is virtually impossible to hold it open and put the magazine

Alright one more small quick thing I want to mention about this magazine is that

 so what I had to do to fix it was take pliers and bend this little metal tab downward a

 Because yes, you guessed it, in this video I will show you how to do just that.

 But let's all be straight, doing the Rubik's Cube in 30 seconds is near impossible.

 Okay before we start the recipe I want to show you how I fill up my cupcake

Now these are silicone cupcake cup baking cups that someone named GG

Now the trick to getting nice even cupcakes is to only fill them to

 make a nice little domed top and not come right over top onto the pan.

 making a variety of different sizes here and you can see they're finished baking.

 This is just a cake mix that I used and you can see that they rose just enough

 to have a nice domed top but not go over top of the paper edge.

 So the secret behind it is just only fill it slightly past the halfway mark

 you're gonna need two kinds of icing, two colors of icing, a blue and a green and

 you just tint the icing and put them in Ziploc bags, cut the corner off and then

 just start placing dots of the green and the blue kind of mixed up all over.

 dots here and there and then take a spatula or knife and you're just gonna

 swirl them together slightly and this is supposed to look a little like

 gumdrops, these are wintergreen, I think they're called wintergreen leaves, I think

 just cutting them in half and then I realized that they might be just a bit

 designed to use to crack open lobster shells and that kind of a thing but I

 For the head I'm just using a regular jumbo sized gumdrop and just cutting off

 sandwich cookie and you're just gonna break it apart because you're just gonna

 be using one half and then using the green icing in a smaller, it's a block bag

 with a smaller hole, you're just going to draw the pattern of the shell on the

 cookie and this is completely up to you how you want to do this.

 of green icing here in the middle and then just attach the shell like so.

 You could leave this just the way it is if you'd like but I decided to draw

 about buttercream icing, when it comes out of the bag it has a tendency to want

 to make little peaks instead of something smooth, but that's okay.

 just want to dry a tiny bit, then once it's dry a little bit you can

 flatten it down quite nicely with your fingers or with a spoon.

 with the black icing here, you can see how it kind of makes a peak.

 a minute or two, let it dry a bit and then you'll be able to pat

 just put a little bit of black icing and I cut out just a tiny, tiny little

 with longer legs, I didn't cut the wintergreen leaves for the other one, but

 Hello everyone, welcome to this episode of Garden Time Homemade Cuisine.

 the type of cake they've always had are steamed, and they're always moist and fluffy,

 made without any additives, and the strong egg aroma is to die for.

 So today, I will show you guys how to make this deliciously steamed cake.

 Take 4 large eggs from the fridge, let it warm up to room temperature.

 Prepare a big bowl of lukewarm water, about 40 degrees Celsius,

 and place a smaller bowl with the egg and sugar within the larger bowl.

 Use an egg beatener and beat on high until the egg becomes a light yellow color.

 At this point, the beaten egg should be of semi-stiff consistency

 Be careful not to stir in one direction or else the batter will become deflated.

 Then mix together gently until the flour, oil, and the eggs are fully incorporated.

 Prepare a rectangular or square baking container and line with wax paper

 Place in a boiling steamer and steam for 15-20 minutes on medium-high heat.

 Finally decided after we got the cage in that it's time to yank out all the sound deadening.

 So we got pretty much this whole side done, back here, this side done.

 I let it sit outside in the cold, it's about 20 degrees outside for about an hour or so.

 And then you just get over here and the pry bar works for good.

 Got a buddy club low rail that moves forward and backwards, that's cool.

 I don't think I really ever showed off the cage too much after I got it back.

 You know and you could see where it's boxed into the unibody and the floor.

 I just put a coat of paint down here, this self-etching primer.

 Put that down there just to kind of prevent that crap from rusting and shit.

 I mean you could literally weld the damn cage to the car right there.

 A lot of these cars you'll see, you'll look in the car and all you see from right here is the bar.

 You know basically until you get almost straight with it, which is badass.

 And that was basically the prize for the Drift Colorado Point Series for the singles competition.

 But figured I'd just get it in there and make sure it was all where I want it to be.

 Hey there Shoobee Doodlers, this is how to draw a Christmas pudding real easy, but let's not talk about it.

 To draw a Christmas pudding you want to do kind of like a tall semi-circle, it's more parabola I think really.

 Anyway, and then a curve down at the bottom, like that, connecting those two lines.

 And then you're going to want the plate coming around which will be wider on the sides, like that.

 And that's quite simple, and then we'll put some holly berries, not Halle Berry, Holly Berry.

 And also in the leaves we can put some little marks like that for the veins.

 Then just slightly higher than the edge we want to put the cream or vanilla or whatever it is that's dripping down the cake.

 And then come down and curve it around nicely here, come down, curve it around nicely.

 There too, and then we're also going to want to have this kind of curve of the plate, come around like that.

 We are going to want to have raisins and plums and things like that in it.

 And then we're going to want some sort of chopped peel, just these little lines to give some texture really.

 And I'm going to put some very little marks in there just to give a little bit of depth to the cake.

 And the marks in there just to give a little bit of depth to the thickness of the cream or the custard or whatever it is that's dripping down.

 And we're going to want some shadow coming around from behind, like that, and also on the plate.

 And then we need to put some texture in, or shading in, all the way across the whole of the pudding.

 And by crossing over the lines that I've already done before, then this is cross-hatching.

 And I'm going to slightly further into the pudding than I did before.

 And I'm going to turn this around a little bit and do it from this angle this time.

We're going to maybe see just a little bit of the plate under there.

 And then put some shadow in underneath to put the plate on the table.

 Well I hope you enjoyed that and if you did, go and have a look at my video of 36 drawing ideas for Christmas things.

Today's design is a lotus flower created using the water marble technique

 I've been playing around with some patterns lately and came up with this

 We all know water marbling looks better on long nails because it captures more of the patterns from the water surface

 And my nails are just hopelessly short so I decided to do them on false nails this time

 Which means cleaning up is minimal and I get to experience what it feels like to have beautiful long nails

 Once you've picked them out, stick them onto an orange stick or a toothpick

 Fill your container with tap water or filtered water and let it sit and warm up to room temperature

 Then have all the nail polish colors you are going to use opened and ready to drip

 You can help the first drop of polish spread by running a stick along the side of the cup

 You can drip the same color twice if you want to make the colors more opaque

 Then go back and forth with the white and green until you get a few rings of each color

 To drag the design, use a small dotting tool like the ones that comes in a nail art brush set

 When you get to the center, dip the stick before you pull it out

 and wipe off the polish from the tip of the stick with a nail wipe in between each stroke

 Every time you dip the stick in the middle, you make the pink section a fraction smaller

 Ideally we want to make the pink section small enough to fit onto our nails

 So keep dipping the stick in the center to reduce the size of the flower

 You can also remove the number of petals by dipping that section into the cup and it will remove that section from the surface

 You can check the size of the print with a cut out like this that's similar to the size of your nails

 Once you're happy with the size and design, draw a circle outside of the pink section to create the scroll effect

 To get a better picture of the final pattern, turn the cup around to make sure that the flower is in the center

 To get a better picture of the final pattern, turn the cup around to the front

 Then grab the fake nail on the stick you have prepared earlier and dip it face down into the pattern

 Once the nail is in the water, hold it there and slightly blow onto the surface to dry out the remaining nail polish

 Then use a q-tip and remove the excess nail polish from the surface

 Once the coat is clear, take out your nail and there is your pattern

 Put it aside and let it dry while you repeat steps to do the next nail

 Once all the patterns are created, you can use nail glue or double sided nail stickers to apply them onto the nail

 Find a sticker size close to your nail and stick one side onto the nail

 Peel off the backing paper and place the false nails onto the sticker

 Apply the 2 patterns on the middle and ring finger and leave the other nails blank

 Next apply the green polish onto the remaining nails to compliment the accent nails

 To decorate, dab a little bit of black nail polish onto a paint palette

 and use a medium sized dotting tool and dot in the flower centers on the 2 nails

 To match the design, add dots to the bottom of the other nails as well

 I thought since the nails were so long, I decided to add a few more dots so I ended up with 3 on each nail

 Once you're done, apply top coat to all of your nails to protect the design for a lasting finish

 The beauty of doing designs on fake nails is that you can remove them, save it and use it for next time

 Make sure you are subscribed to my channel to get updates on new videos every week

 Check out more of my nail art playlist linked below in the description

 to see restaurant style chicken 65, another popular and famous South Indian recipe.

 To begin to your blender or mixie jar, add 2 cloves, 1 inch piece of cinnamon, 2 inch

 size ginger, around 1 tablespoon of ginger and 5 cloves of garlic.

If you are using small variety, you can add 10 cloves of garlic.

And once you have blend them into smooth paste, add a teaspoon of oil and just

And now here I have 400 grams of chicken which I have washed with hot water and salt

 each and every chicken pieces are coated well with this masala paste.

 as it helps in making your chicken more juicy and helps in absorbing all the marinated spices

 after 1 hour of refrigerating, this chicken pieces are ready for deep frying.

So just before you start adding chicken pieces into oil, you have to

 do one more step that is you have to add half quantity of egg white from 1 egg.

 step is actually optional but I used to add egg white as it really helps in making this

 chicken pieces more crispy and also they would coat this masala paste well with the chicken.

So after you add in the egg white, make sure you are mixing it well so that each

 deep fry this chicken pieces for at least 5 or more than that, 5 minutes or more than that till

 don't need to switch it on because this curry leaf will cook very quicker.

 the flame and add the curry leaf into it and just fry them till they turn crisp.

So take your chicken pieces and garnish with some curry leaves which we fried in

 oil and then serve it with thinly sliced onions and half lemon and your delicious restaurant style

 video, subscribe to my channel and thank you so much for tuning in and I will catch you guys soon

 She's gonna make guacamole for tonight's chicken tacos, but we're gonna show you how to make

 You know, you can use a masher if you have a masher or a mocha head there

 Whatever you have available to just smash that up doesn't have to be like a pureed

 While she's doing that I'll tell you what you need you need a whole avocado you need a lemon quarter

 The third of a cup a fourth of a cup she makes it most of the time

 So I actually don't know exactly how much she puts in but you can see that you're three tablespoons, okay, two to three tablespoons

 And then she's gonna add garlic powder salt and a lemon to taste

 And you know, you can always add chili powders or you can add I'm sorry chili pot

 She likes to go overboard on the garlic sometimes and we don't even need to add chili

 To squeeze in the lemon in that's probably how much lemon is that gonna be maybe like a teaspoon of lemon juice, huh?

 And just brightens the flavor of it and the actual tip that we're gonna show you is

 Downs for cover the pit up and taste it and make sure it tastes good

 If you put it away the top of it will turn a little discolored and you'll have to scrape the top off

 Hey guys, Ozgraph1 here today and I'll be doing a little marker refill on the Montana

 I'll be refilling with the Ionlack marker refill, paint marker.

 So yeah, I'll just put these two back in and I'll just set it up for you, shall we?

Now add again a little less than a quarter of a teaspoon of nutmeg.

 going to also need less than a quarter of a teaspoon of allspice.

You're going to put in two cups of quick cooking but not instant

And you're going to just give it a stir to combine it all together.

 then you're going to put one cup of shredded coconut in your bowl and combine that.

 you're going to put one cup of almonds, coarsely chopped, or walnuts or any type of nut that you

And just mix that all together in your bowl with a spoon until it's well combined.

What I did was I actually melted one and three quarter bars of unsalted butter in

 put in is actually a teaspoon of baking soda into that and mix that with a spoon.

Now I'm going to take actually my dry ingredients and pour them into my large bowl.

 then I'm just going to start slowly pouring my liquid into my dry.

And then you're going to need a 13 by 9 pan that you've heavily greased with shortening.

And then with your spoon just even it out until you have it all in the pan.

Now you're going to bake these bars at 275 and you're going to have them in the oven for 50 minutes.

And then just pat them down with a spatula or whatever utensil you have to even them out throughout your pan.

 We'll talk about the strap and in particular its length very soon, but for now just put

 This is because typically the headstock has several metal tuners mounted to it, and when

 we wear the bass it's this mass and weight that wants to pull the headstock downwards.

 Just take a moment to see how your bass balances and whether the headstock wants to move towards

 Ok, you might have already been playing your bass for some time with this head heavy balance

 occurring naturally every time you put it on, and I guarantee that you would be using

 your fretting hand to try and hold the neck up in an attempt to counteract the heavy headstock.

 Now wouldn't your fretting hand have a far easier job if its sole purpose was just to

 See you're already starting to appreciate the benefits of a headless bass, and this

 is one of the main reasons why they were designed in the first place.

 What I want you to do now is lengthen your strap significantly and then put your bass

 Notice how the weight in the body of the bass takes over and heads towards the floor, this

 Now most of you will be loving how this looks, but before you rush off to rock out in front

 of a wall of amps and speaker cabinets, let's just have a quick look at our plucking hand.

 In order to play a bass that's down by our ankles, we would have to reach down to the

 This action of reaching down towards the string has a tendency to tense up our forearms and

 fingers, which in turn makes plucking the strings of the bass that much harder to do,

 especially if we want to pluck them with any degree of accuracy and consistency.

Man Michelangelo here with the Nimi Toto cross hook breakdown and you can see me moving

 I have the rear foot connected, the ball of the foot connected to the floor.

 I should keep my hands up and keep my elbows tucked and abs tight but slow motion reveals

 I pull my lead leg back to the rear, keep the toes connected to the floor.

 Keep the hips pressed forward but let the non-lead foot now becoming your lead foot

 If you notice my back foot is gripping the ground so I can press up, squeeze my calves,

 I throw a little bounce at the top to let the muscles loosen up.

 See how the energy translates up and then come across with the hook.

 That's what you need to do and that's why the energy comes up from the lower body and

 So we're going to do a knee-knee-toe-toe but with a really important combination at the top.

 I'm going to get you to move your head and push off your back foot at the same time.

 Your arms are going to go straight and then you're going to throw that left hook.

 Get the angle of the elbow super long because you might come up short.

 A nice combination, a nice strike after that would be the roundhouse.

 Of course, you want to repeat this for a minute, two minutes, three minutes.

 As ridiculous as that sounds, you want to connect it to everything.

 You want to connect it to every single muscle fiber in your toes, in your shin, your calf,

 your quad, your butt, your hamstring, your abs, your obliques, your shoulders.

 And you want them to pass the baton of energy up through the body.

 And if your muscles are tight, you're not going to be able to perform it.

 And then from there, you follow it up with a second hook, which is to recycle some energy.

 And so, as you're doing it, you're going to be doing it with the same technique.

 The tip this week is how to pick up stitches along a horizontal edge or bound off stitches.

 And then the week after that, after I get back from the conference in Indianapolis,

 we'll do curved edges, which is a combination of vertical and horizontal edges.

 Picking up horizontal edges is very easy, particularly if you have seamed a horizontal

 And if you haven't seen the video I've done on horizontal seams, you may want to look

 You want to pick up a stitch in each of the columns of stitches.

 Now a lot of people think that these little handy dandy bind off loops are where you're

 Notice that when you have a bind off stitch, it is between two columns of stitches.

 Okay, so here's a column of stitches, here's a column of stitches, and this is between

 So I'm going to pick up one stitch for every column of stitches.

 And if you remember, a stitch looks like a V, and if you're not sure what that looks

 like, I've done some videos on stitch anatomies and some blog entries that you may want to

 So, I want to start, oh and by the way, I have knit this on very large needles.

 And notice this one, which is like a size 11 or something, which I never ever use, so

 Now one thing that you'll often see in a pattern, they'll say is pick up and knit.

 What that means is, it doesn't mean you're knitting anything, it means you're picking

 up and you're actually just putting a stitch on the knitting needle.

 So I've inserted this into the first column of stitches, which is the selvedge stitch.

 Because usually when you're picking up, the next row is whether you knit or purl or rib

 So if I have bound off 20 stitches, I will pick up 20 stitches.

 We'll see when we get to vertical edges that this is not quite the same.

 Now notice that these stitches that I've picked up are coming right out of the stitch below.

 And so if this were in the same color, it would look like it was continuing on.

 Now I have picked up some stitches, again using really, really, really large needles

 And notice that in this instance, I have picked up stitches in between the column of stitches.

 Here's a column of stitches, and it is pinching those stitches together.

 And again, it's the same thing you get when you are seaming horizontal edges.

 Here is where the stitches have been brought up, picked up properly.

 Notice that the bind off stitches are coming right out of the stitch below.

 This is how it looks on the back, and this is how this looks on the back.

 Hey there YouTubers, Tom here from Tom's Test Kitchen and today I'm gonna try something that was asking me by a co-worker

 Catered lunches from Mexican restaurant here in Austin quite often called Chewy's and

 We always get salads and stuff for some people only like salad.

 Jalapeno ranch dressing and it's just it's absolutely fantastic.

I've done some research and some different clones or whatever that people have come up with and

 This is what I'm gonna use to try to like pare it down for making something for for home use

 This is the dip, but it's the same thing a jalapeno and I'm only gonna use half of this jalapeno

 Take the seeds out of the membrane so it won't be a spicy if you want it spicy use the whole jalapeno

So let me get everything ready and I'll show you how I'm gonna make this

 Yep, that pretty much looks like the jalapeno ranch dressing that we get from the Chewys

 Okay, I'm just gonna refrigerate this and then we're gonna have this later tonight making some grilled chicken salads

 Thanks for joining us today on 18th Century Cooking with James Townsend and Son.

 Today's recipe comes from the 1747 second edition of Primitive Cookery.

 Now, the Primitive Cookery that we sell in our catalog is the first edition.

 But this recipe in the cookbook is called, actually it's called a cabbage pudding.

 But many times making the dish in the manner that we're going to make it in

 but we also need to save some really big outer leaves to use when we're putting this together.

 So, I'm going to cut this at the bottom to release some of these outer leaves.

 And they don't have to be perfect, but try to pick nice good ones

 You might want to take the very outer ones off if they're dirty.

 So you want enough leaves to make a full sort of cabbage head when we're done.

 And now we're just going to cut this cabbage in half and then chop it up nice and finely.

 I'm actually going to lower the quantity of suet in this recipe

 We are now offering a beef suet on our website and in the future in our print catalog.

 And finally, it also in the spice section talks about green gooseberries,

 It says if you're making this in the winter, you can also add some verjuice.

 Or in this case, since verjuice is a little hard to come by these days,

 But today I'm going to add a little bit of just plain apple cider vinegar,

 So this looks like enough to make two small boiled cabbage farces

 If you've got some holes, you can use a second leaf here to finish up the looks of it.

 And that's one of the new products we've got here at James Townsend & Son.

 and it makes a perfect pudding cloth or a towel in the kitchen or at your campsite.

 Like all boiled puddings, you want this to go into the water that's already boiling.

 And this is going to boil probably one this size, about an hour,

 You definitely want to eat this while it's warm if you've got the suet in it,

 The spices, even the nutmeg, is something you ought to try in a recipe like this.

 A healthy diet and getting the right amount of vegetables into that diet is a really important

 I'm going to show you a way today that's really, really easy to incorporate those vegetables

 So the first vegetable that we're going to start off with is this aubergine.

 Now you'll find sometimes when you're eating an aubergine that it might be a little bit

 We're going to start by taking it off the top and we're going to take about a quarter

 And what we're going to do is we're actually going to salt that aubergine and we're going

 And what the salt does is that draws out all that bitterness and we're going to be left

 So now that I have my aubergine on the plate, I'm going to give it a generous sprinkling

 That will give it a larger surface area with which to grill with.

 And now we're going to move on with our red pepper or red capsicum, whatever part of the

 And again, we just want to run the knife along that white membrane there.

 That's a really better part of the pepper and we're really not interested in grilling

 So we're just going to cut that at an angle and that's our pepper ready to go.

 So now with the onions, I find that a very good tip is if you cook an onion or you're

 camera-izing an onion, it's going to fall apart because the onion is made up of lots

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to use a regular cocktail stick and I'm just going

 And what that will do is that will hold it together perfectly when we cook it because

 Now we're going to use a lot of fresh thyme in this dish so a very easy way to pick your

 There's lots of little leaves dotted along that branch and instead of picking each one

 I'm going to run my hands all the way down that nice and slowly and we get all the individual

 We're going to turn that heat on to a nice medium gas and we're going to use a beautiful

 Now what that does is that gets us those beautiful lines that you find in the vegetables.

 We're going to put a little bit of olive oil in there and at the same time as doing that,

 while I wait for that to heat up, what I'm going to do is I'm going to take my pastry

 brush and I'm going to lightly brush those vegetables just so they've got the smallest

 We're not going to worry about the aubergines just at the moment because they're still drying

 Never season them with pepper because if you put pepper on them before they go on the grill,

 the pepper's going to burn and you're going to get a little bitter taste to it.

 Just place them flat as you can in that pan and you can hear that very slightly starting

 You don't want to hear any crazy big sizzle coming off that pan.

 And see the way they're holding together perfectly because of that cocktail stick.

 These vegetables are going to take about three and a half minutes on each side.

 We're going to keep it on a nice low and even heat so that they don't burn too fast.

 Now as you can see with these vegetable skewers, they've been on for about three minutes and

 What you'll find is they're all going to take different amounts of time to cook.

 You just really need to be very vigilant and keep checking them.

 You'll find that the zucchini will color faster than anything else.

 And see the way those onions are really holding together nicely?

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to sprinkle a little bit of our thyme onto

 We're going to leave them on that side for one minute and that's your grilled vegetables

 That's the bitterness coming out of the aubergine and that's what we're really looking for.

 But what we have to do is we salted these really heavily when we put the salt on top

 So we're just going to run them under a little bit of cold water very quickly like that and

 So once they come out of the water, just a little piece of paper towel and very gently

 Now make sure that you do get them dry because if you don't, the water's going to stick to

 that grill and the aubergine is just going to be a big mushy mess.

 So now that the aubergines are dry, we're going to once again give them a little bit

 And we're just going to set them into the pan and you're looking for that little light

 Now you just want to keep checking them every 10 seconds or so.

 I think these are going to take about a minute and a half on each side.

 So now that one's been on for about a minute and you can see those beautiful marks.

 So we're going to turn those over, give them another minute on the other side and now we're

 I'm going to cut the bread lengthways in half like that and we're going to smear some of

 So you'll have to make that separately and it really isn't worth making it at home.

 So we're going to smear that on nicely and now we're going to get our lovely grilled

 And you can just tell by looking at the colours how full of flavour that's going to be.

 You can't tell me that that's not going to be a meal in itself.

 Now the last and final touch, the thing that really rounds it off is some beautiful fresh

 When you're buying mozzarella, you want to look for something that tears apart like that.

 And that to me is as good as it gets with a vegetarian sandwich.

 And all we have to do now is put it into the oven and melt it for about two minutes, just

 So we're going to put it into an oven at about 200 degrees for just about two minutes.

 All right, so this is the last thing we're going to do here with the cattails.

 You can see right inside there, there's that little circle part.

 And if you happen to get more of the root than this, you can use this too.

 And what I'm just going to do is I'm just going to flick it and push it and crunch it

 Now what you're going to notice happening here is there's like stuff that's actually

 If I do enough of this and I take enough of it and I scrape it with my fingernail, you

 Now what's going to happen as I massage this out, just like this, just keep on trucking

 with this, is all of this stuff eventually is going to settle to the bottom of the pan.

 You can see there's still quite a lot more in here so I'm going to go ahead and pull

 That's actually flour, just like the flour that you would end up buying at a grocery

 So I'm just going to keep picking this off here until when I take a close look at this,

 So we're going to try to take it this way and we're just going to try to keep pulling

 So all this white stuff that's floating around in there, there's your starch.

 I'm just going to take this and I'm just going to pull it apart, try to get all the green

 As long as I don't go into the green part, as long as I stay in the white part of the

 So now I've worked all of my cattail roots, worked all the starch out, I can actually

 So what's going to happen is over the next half an hour or so, all of that starch is

 going to fall to the bottom of my bowl and then I'm going to have some starch water that

 But then when I get rid of the water, I'm going to be left with the starch from this.

 Let that dry, put it out in either this pan or on a cake pan or whatever you have available,

 From fire starting material, insulation, bedding material, to corns that you can just eat,

 and starch that you can make bread from, and arrows that you can hunt with.

 If you have anything that you make using cattails that's really cool, whether it be cordage

 or anything in between, please make it a video response as I would love to hear from you.

 Work, work, all week long, punching that clock, dusk to dawn, counting the days to Friday

 night, that's when all the conditions are right for a good time.

 Okay today we're installing Vortec lowering links on a 2007 Kawasaki ZX6R.

 As you can see, first off, we have removed the plastic fairing down here and exposed

 the stock lowering links, one here on this side and one around on this side, kind of

 And our next step is to remove the stock lowering links and replace them with the aftermarket

 Today we're installing Vortec lowering links on a 2007 Kawasaki ZX6R.

 As you can see down here we have removed the lower plastic fairing and have exposed the

 Our next step is to remove the stock lowering links and replace them with our aftermarket

 Before you can take your lowering links out you need to remove your side fairings and

 that gets you in position to be able to drop the exhaust and the manifold to gain access

 These plastic things, the little clips, they don't unscrew or anything.

 You kind of got to work your way around them with a screwdriver and pop them out.

 Other things to notice, I mean you have all these wires in here, quick disconnects, removing

 I mean any little thing to gain access to get into some of these tight spots.

 After your exhaust manifold is off, your headers and everything, you need to take off the down

 So you see I'm putting the allen key right now, that's what you got to take off to loosen

 Also, there's a little bolt right back here behind the brake, brake fluid right there,

 loosen that up and it should pop right on out and then you'll be able to take your last

 The exhaust has to come off for the lowering links to be able to make clearance for the

 The headers are now removed from the bike, all so that you can get one stupid bolt out

 In order, we decided to install the bolts from the left hand side this time instead

 of the right to prevent having to take out all the, your down header, your headers and

 your down tubing and so that way the nuts would be on the far side so we could just

 The only thing we'll have to remove next time is the shift lever here.

 Now we're lowering the front end, first thing you got to do is these two bolts right here,

 Now that the bottom two bolts are loosened down here, you'll come up to your, up here

 to your triple tree and your handle bars, you'll loosen this bolt and this bolt to lower

 your handle grips and then you have this bolt and this bolt over here that he's working

 After you loosen up all the bolts be very careful because the forks will slide all the

 Now we raised ours a little over an inch, almost two, that'd be lower.

 So now we're just tightening everything back up, the bolt right there and those bolts again.

 Now we're back on reassembling the bike, you need to connect your headers back to the manifold

 right there, might be a little dark and connect your down tube back over here and tighten

 You make sure that your electronics get screwed back on to the fairing right there.

 And back over here this side there's a clip right here, connect that and then just make

 sure that you put all your bolts back on and that's how you lower your bike.

 In today's look, I'm going to show you how to achieve those beautiful plum, smoky eyes.

 The first color you're going to need is the silver color from the Silent Treatment, and

 you're going to apply this color onto your lid using a flat shaded brush.

 Take this bright purple color and a really small creased brush.

 You're going to apply this color onto the outer part of your lid.

 You're going to reapply this color onto your brush, and then you're going to take this

 bright purple color into your crease and make sure that you have it contrasting from light

 I'm going to take this gunmetal silver and apply this into your crease using a more dense

 Make sure the color is closer towards your lid and on the inner part of your crease,

 and then apply this color into your outer corner to give it a more smoky effect.

 Using the lightest color from this palette, use this color on the inner one-fourth of

 your eyelid, and then you're going to apply this color as your brow bone highlight and

 Onto your creased brush, you're going to reapply it into your crease to make it more vibrant

 again and really focus it on the inner part of your crease, and then once again blend

 Using the light champagne brow bone color, apply this color into your inner tear duct

 Now taking my NYX black eyeliner, apply this eyeliner on the outer part of your waterline

 Make sure the eyeliner stops by your pupil to give your eyes a more big, wide-eyed effect.

 Now taking my felt tip eyeliner from L'Oreal, apply this eyeliner on your upper lash line.

 And really make sure that the wing isn't too dramatic to overpower this look.

 This mascara is going to just pump up the volume in your lashes, and I'm applying it

 about two coats on my upper lashes and about two coats on my lower lashes.

 I'm just gonna explain what I did, basically a summary, but I guess you can count it as

And since Valentine's Day is coming up, I thought I would do one relating to that,

 So yeah, these adorable, just like this design, this one, and this one.

 there's already candy in it, so basically you guys already know what's in it.

 right here, or if you want you can also put candy, it's up to you guys what to put in that box,

Some of these, um, I don't know what they're called, confetti I guess,

 but these little paper thingies that I got from Michael's and they're making a mess right now.

 Okay, so in order to make it, all you need is, of course, the takeout box.

 confetti, whatever they are, and then just shove it in there, and then it should look like that.

Just put it in here, just shove it all down, and then you can just like play around

 Next step is to put some, of course, candy or chocolate, and then you just like, you know,

 optional, but I chose to do this because since I'm doing Chinese takeout, um, theme for Valentine's

 Day, I thought it would be a good idea to do it with a fortune cookie, but of course, I did not

 messages, and then I just put it in the fortune cookie, and I just put it in the box, right?

I'm sorry if I can only do one, but, well, I can only do one for now, but

 hopefully next time I'll get my creative juices flowing and I will do more, maybe next year.

But if you guys like this DIY, give it a thumbs up, and I will see you guys.

 Hey guys, I'm doing a tutorial on the look I wore on my holiday, so if you like it, keep

 And here I'm using a BB cream instead of foundation because I wanted to keep the skin looking

 Now I'm just applying some concealer with my ring finger and don't forget to get the

 area near your tear ducts too because that part is still dark but a lot of people forget

 I can't find my Urban Decay primer potion so I had to settle for this Victoria's Secret

 Take a fluffy dome shaped brush and apply an orangey medium brown all over your crease.

 Pat some off white eyeshadow right underneath your brows to give it a highlight and don't

 With a flat shader brush, take a shimmery light pink beige color and apply this all

 Okay I have the hardest time filming eyeliner, I always get out of focus so in like 3 seconds

 Okay so let's coat our lashes with some mascara just to have something that our fake lashes

 Next take some lashes that aren't too dramatic but still make your eyes pop.

 Now smudge a warm smoky brown color all over your lower lash line.

 Add a peach eyeliner to your lower waterline and this is going to help you look more awake

 And really focus on defining your lower lashes because that's going to help it look a lot

 And I forgot to set my face makeup so that's what I'm doing now.

 Now I'm going to contour my face with this really cool brush I got from Everyday Minerals.

 And I'm making myself look more doe eyed by applying this shimmery white silver powder

 And if you're going on a date I really suggest using a lip stain because it won't transfer.

 I hope you have fun on your date or wherever you're wearing this to.

 Hey, AxelBraso here and I'm going to show you a really cool coin trick.

 Now you've got to take the coin, you know, just put it in this hand, take the other coin,

 also put it in this hand, and then take the third coin and put it in that hand as well.

 Now I'm going to place this hand on the table and I'm just going to go 1, 2, 3, one of the

 I'm going to take this coin, put it in my hand, I'm going to take this coin and just,

 you know, just like, I'm just going to throw it on the table I guess.

 Now this time I'm actually going to make the two coins, these two coins right here, sorry

 I forgot to show you, I'm going to take them and I'm going to make them appear right here

 I'm going to count to three, 1, 2, 3, and, uh, well, hold on a minute.

 I'm going to place my hand over it and this time I'm going to make, I'm going to really

 So first off, you're going to take the first coin, you've got to make sure you have three

 And I like this trick because you can do it anywhere and it always works.

 So the first coin, you're going to place it in your palm, you're going to, you're going

 to palm it like this and so it doesn't fall out and you're going to pretend to throw it

 Then with the other coin, you've got to take it and you've got to drop it like this so

 So actually the coin that you have palmed is going to be the one that falls in but it's

 going to fall and hopefully hit this right here and then like, then it's going to fall

 It's going to fall into the hand so basically here's what happened so far.

 So you go like this, pretend to throw it in, then take this coin and try and get it right.

 I believe that's called a clink pass or something like that or a ching pass or something like

 But so this, you pretend to throw it, bounces off this coin, falls in the hand.

 So right now we've got one coin in this hand, one coin in this hand, and the final coin

 And then of course the coin you have in this hand, in your right hand you're going to place

 Okay so put this coin that was in your right hand back on the table and now here's what

 You're going to take one of the coins, you're going to put it in your left hand and then

 like you're going to like maneuver it so that you're holding it like this.

 And then you're going to take the other coin, place it in your right hand and while this

 fist is down, don't show them the coins like this, this fist is down, your left fist is

 And you're going to take the coin in your right hand and you're going to pretend to

 throw it on the table and as you do you're going to drop the coin that's in this hand

 So it's going to be like, so it's going to be like, and you don't show the coin that's

 still in here because you held it with a finger hold I think it's called.

 So basically you know, you just go, and it looks like you threw the coin that's in your

 right hand but you really didn't, it was actually the coin that was in your left hand.

 So then you're like, alright it's a real coin, I'm going to put it in this hand.

 Now this part you may have found obvious because it kind of is when you think about it but

 like people don't pick up on it, like the average person doesn't because it seems like

 Like you get a shot, you're like okay I'm going to make all of them appear upwards,

 And when you reveal it, put your hand slightly over the edge of the table, like the edge

 of the table is off frame but part of my hand is off the edge of the table and when you

 do that you're just going to take the coins and while your hand is over the edge just

 And then you're going to, so right now the coins are in a palm in my left hand and then

 you're just going to be like alright let me try it again, 1, 2, 3.

 And you gotta let go of the coins and then of course there they are.

 So yeah, sorry for the long explanation but that's basically what you do so that's the

 So please rate, comment, subscribe, like this, tell your friends, give this a thumbs

 up if you're sad that you don't have any stars to rate on anymore.

 And yeah, coming soon hopefully will be a 3D video so yeah so enjoy that, that's going

 So yeah so please just subscribe and tell all your friends to subscribe or else I'm

 not going to like you anymore and you're not going to be my friend.

 For the traditional Nyonya curry chicken, we will need some lemongrass, shallots, garlic,

 combination of dried and fresh chilies, coconut milk, and most importantly, kaffir lime leaves,

 Place the chopped shallots, lemongrass, garlic, blue ginger, turmeric, and chilies into a blender with a little bit of water to grind it into a chili paste.

 Next, pour the chili paste into a pot with preheated oil and stir-fry the mixture till fragrant.

 These are what we call curry leaves, and it adds that bit of curry aroma to the dish when stirred in with the chili paste.

 For Nyonya-style curry chicken, lime leaves is a key ingredient that sets it apart from the normal curry dish.

 Meanwhile, marinate the chicken with some curry powder and salt.

 By now, the curry paste should be dry enough, and the curry leaves should fall off the stalks by themselves.

 Slowly pour in the coconut milk and add water into the mixture until just covering the chicken.

 When the curry starts to boil, it's time to throw in some potatoes.

 Set the flame on medium and let the curry simmer until the potatoes turn soft.

Next I'm going to use a white eyeliner and I'm just going to just

Next I'm going to grab my NYX trio in ultra chic and it just comes with a bunch

 It's just a really dark navy blue and it goes on really smooth which is why I like

Now I'm going to use my L'Oreal hip duo in sassy and I'm going to use this

And when you get to the very end you can just drape it inwards like that.

And I'm going to just draw a line right underneath my real lash line.

 eyeliner again and I'm going to fill in that whole area with white.

And I'm also going to set that white pencil with the white shadow again.

 be using these really dramatic lashes along with my lash grip adhesive.

And what you want to do is just snip them into little pieces with your scissors

And what I'm going to do is I'm just going to apply glue to the lash band.

And because this makeup is so dramatic and eye enlarging it does make the iris look

 What's up guys, Quazzy here bringing you guys another tutorial and I don't

 remember the last time I did a tutorial actually no it wasn't too long ago I

 guess but it's been a while since I've done one of these modeling tutorials I

 don't even know what the last team I was in when I did one but I know I wasn't

 this big I remember I pretty sure that was like a like 1.3k or something like

 that but I'm at 2k so yeah but this tutorial is pretty much gonna be quick

 and simple I'm just gonna show you just how do they bend a pipe like I did in

 remoto optical right here as you can see on the O and it's really simple I

 guess there's a lot of ways to do it but this is the way I figured it out so

 yeah so this is my 2k graphics pack if you don't have it go download it it's

 the video I made before this video so I just go to my channel find this video

 find the video before it although if you're watching this you probably

 watching in the first couple weeks of it being released although probably not

 because there's people that watch it later but I don't know that's probably

 the stupidest thing I've ever said in my life but yeah okay so you're just gonna

 bring this over and just place it wherever in your lightroom it doesn't

 really matter at this point but you're gonna want to go to a different view and

 you're gonna want to go to the front view and of the logo and this is a

 your spline and get the bezier spline and what you're gonna want to do is

 outline your path and this is this path is gonna be pretty bad because it's just

 gonna be quick but you can't actually go in a curve like this because it'll screw

 it up pretty much you have to do click like in little spurts to go around

 curves like that I don't know why it doesn't work but I mean there's other

 ways that you can but they don't have like they have like different flaws

 which I don't like and I like this way the best so yeah but then what you're

 gonna want to do is go to this bend tool where it says bend it's like purple and

 go down to spline wrap then you're gonna want to click this little mouse button

 down here and then click your spline and then you're gonna want to drag the

 spline wrap onto your pipe and it should make like this really weird looking

 thing over the spline what you're gonna want to do is make sure you're

 selecting the spline wrap go to the axis and go to plus Y or minus Y it doesn't

 really matter and then it should form around but then sometimes depending on

 your model it might like look weird I don't really know how to explain it but

 it might look like bent or like sideways and fix that you're just gonna click

 your spline go to intermediate points and go to natural or uniform either one

 of them really work it might just depend on your model and to move it all you're

 just gonna want to select the spline let's move it and just move it wherever

 and it will go with it so yeah that's pretty much it there's a few other ways

 to do this like with a with a band I might be a band there's another tool I

 don't really use it so I mean I want to know but yeah it's pretty much it and oh

 the other thing is my matting or not matting but my like materials and stuff

 that's always requested a lot and I'm just gonna open that up real quick and

 so yeah so for my renders and stuff I'm actually just gonna delete this and

 actually I'm gonna pause this I'll be right back all right so I'm back and I

 have a model here and pretty much what I do is like this material the colored

 material I have in my similar 4d pack so you guys can use that but for like the

 great part only everyone always asked me how I do the gray part I always say it's

 like a secret stuff but it's really not just I just pretty much just use a

 simple gray material that's all it is to it it's not really that big of a deal

 but I have like a bunch from various packs and stuff that I would just like

 rotate with these are the four that I mainly use so what I just do is just get

 them and just drag them into all the spots that are white and that's pretty

 much it yeah so that's that those are probably the two most requested things

 I ever get and have been asked to put in part 3 so yeah thank you guys for

 watching and a peace leave a like for a five minute tutorial by the way that

 never happens oh and 100 likes for part 4 and leave me some ideas of what I

 I'm not crazy about the looks but it's supposed to sound pretty good for the price point.

 I actually got this on sale at Fry's Electronics for $149 plus tax.

 So for that price it's supposed to be a pretty good performing headphone.

 It's terminated in a quarter inch TRS jack and then you have your quarter inch to eighth

 So of course I have multiple headphone amplifiers that use quarter inch jack and that's what

 Alright, this bottom part opens up and then you get access to the cord.

 As you can see there, there's the wood trim I was talking about there.

 So overall, when I see them out of the packaging, they don't look as bad.

 This has been another unboxing brought to you by the Audiophile Freak.

 I wanted to play with some LA Girl products so I decided to do a purple grunge look.

 Starting off with the LA Girl Pro Primer in the color Nude and I'm just going to apply

 this all over my lid and then I'm just going to blend it out with my finger.

 This is a matte peachy eyeshadow and I'm just going to apply this with an angled eyeshadow

 This is a color from the LA Girl Nudes eyeshadow collection and it's more of a dark mauve-y

 Now I'm taking this dark metallic purple color and I'm just going to place this in the outer

 Now I'm taking a fluffy angled eyeshadow brush and I'm just blending out those edges so there

 Now I'm going to take this really pretty soft shimmery pink color and I'm just going to

 Now I'm going to smudge my lash line with the LA Girl Glide Gel Liner in the color Berry

 Now I'm going back with a smudger brush just to blend out those lines.

 Next I'm applying my favorite pair of falsies and these are the Coco Lashes in Foxy.

 I'm going to prep my skin with the LA Girl Pro Prep HD Smoothing Face Primer.

 This will prevent the foundation from settling in fine lines, large pores, and wrinkles.

 I wanted my skin to look really natural in this look so I thought this beauty balm would

 This is the LA Girl Pro Conceal HD Concealer in the color Creamy Beige and I'm just using

 I like to apply this underneath my eyes, on my chin, center of my forehead, and a little

 I'm testing out that baking method so I just dipped my beauty blender into the HD powder

 and I'm just pressing the powder underneath any areas where I used the cream.

 I'm taking my bronzer from the LA Girl Glow Blush Collection and I'm going to apply the

 bronzer on my temples and a little bit underneath my cheekbones just to give my face a little

 I decided to put some bronzer around the highlighted area of my chin to make my chin stand out

 Then I just took a fluffy powder brush and swept that setting powder away.

 As you can see, some of the setting powder stuck in certain areas but I just fixed it

 I'm taking the blush from the LA Girl Spice Blush Collection and applying a little bit

 Now I'm taking the highlighter from the Glow Collection and I'm applying this to the highest

 I'm going to finish up the eyes by going back into that metallic purple color and smudging

 Then I'm taking that black pencil that we used earlier and putting this as close to

 I decided to go back with a smudger brush just to smooth out that liner.

 This is the dip brow from Anastasia Beverly Hills and I've been asked a lot how I create

 Some of the dots should be dark and some of them should be light to make the freckles

 Now take your finger and pat on the dots so they blend better onto your skin.

 I absolutely love freckles and I feel like they give a softer, youthful look to the skin.

 This is the LA Girl Matte Flat Finish Pigment Gloss in the color Black Current.

 Thank you so much for watching and I'll see you in the next video.

Your kick begins with a running so you can get the momentum to jump

 At the beginning of your training, rather than hitting the target, I just want you to put a visual target in front of you so that you will be able to judge the distance.

 This kick should help to improve your agility and ability to jump high and flexibility and much more.

 Today's Soup Blast is brought to you from the Nutribullet RX Cookbook.

 This is the only thing I have in the house so I hope this doesn't mess up the flavor.

 Which has Borrella and wheatgrass and all this good stuff in it.

 And make sure you're putting the proper lid for making soups or hot items.

 Check out my review or actually more like a first look about this product.

I'm gonna be, uh, teaching you today I'm gonna be redoing my, uh, my lesson on Folsom Prison Blues that I did so long ago that I want to redo now.

 I also have a new camera angle set up so you guys can see what I'm doing better.

I actually stole this from, uh, Terry Downs, uh, guitar styles of a Roy Nichols DVD.

 If you want to catch that Roy Nichols vibe on those Merle Haggard records.

We got a, uh, the Live at Folsom Prison album version of Folsom Prison Blues, how appropriate.

 So, we're in the key of E. I'm in standard tuning so everyone can play along.

 So the way we're going to start that off is we're going to take our, uh, finger to the chord.

 The notes themselves will actually be a B, that's the second fret on the A string.

 Now the way Luther picks the, uh, what do I want to say, the clickety-clack...

Very simple, I'll show you on my right hand here since he just doesn't really do much except go over the chords.

 So as you can see, it's basically varying between the bass line over the finger chords.

 So let's say for the E chord, the bass line would be like this.

 With our middle finger, we're gonna hammer on to the next fret with our ring finger.

 ninth fret on the B string, and the ninth fret on the G string.

 We're gonna get a finger, the A chord shape, of course, with the pinky up here at the fifth fret,

 Now you'll get the hang of it if you just listen to the record.

 Now right before he transits up to that next position, what he'll do is he'll release,

 giving him time to go up to the next fret and hit the E and B strings open.

 Next position is going to be out of a E chord shape up at the fifth fret.

 So we're just gonna do, going down to the strings, going through A through G, we're gonna be five, five, and six.

 We're gonna go back down to the E chord, hit the E string, and strum.

 That's of course on the B. Here, I'll just show it to you without the strumming.

 So what we're gonna do is we're gonna strum a B7 chord until we get down to that A in between each hit.

 Actually heck, I might as well show you that little walk up that Luther does in the verse.

 Alright folks, well hopefully that little short lesson will help you out a bit.

 Have any questions, comments, concerns, go ahead and email me or leave a comment and I'd be happy to hear from you.

 Plus I have a mobile food truck that you can use for catering, special events.

 And the restaurant will be serving their yummy food at the new Marlins Ballpark.

 The new Marlins Ballpark is obviously very exciting for everybody in Miami, especially

 I recommend everybody come and try it and then they'll understand really why it will

 You can use any dough mix that you'd like to pick up at your local supermarket.

 What that'll do is remove any air pockets that may be in the dough.

 I suppose you could use Reese's or pretty much any candy you want to experiment with.

 We use the chocolate chips because the way that they bake off and then melt works really

 So you just got to be really careful when you're putting it on there.

 We always recommend an ice cold Pepsi with our famous crushed ice.

 Today we're making one of our specialty desserts, the chocolate chip pizza.

 To get the recipe on your cell phone, text the word BITE to 23000 or log on to WSBN.com.

 Hey YouTube this is LuckyDays714 and today I'm going to teach you how to ride up a ramp

 For any ramp, the ramp that you are going on, probably around a foot high is what I'm

 Ok so I'm going to teach you now how to go up and go down like this.

 So what you are going to want to do is, here's the front of the board, you want to put your

 And then you want to go up and act like, just keep your body straight and don't lean back

 Kind of just let your feet go where they need to go and keep your body firm but also at

 Now I'm going to teach you how to do the up down turn around which is really just what

 Well now I want to teach you, I want to tell you, to do this trick you have to put your

 So go like this, go on, put your foot, your other foot right here and when you get down,

 up, down and then whatever way you feel comfortable with you can turn around and then head straight

 The up down teaches you how to do this and this teaches you how to do the next trick.

 Okay so now that you know how to do that we're going to do the last one and probably the

 Now first you're going to have to know how to, you probably already are pretty good at

 So all you're going to do is just go up the ramp and whatever way, if you're goofy you

 would be standing with your right foot, your body facing this way and the regular you'd

 So this is on goofy, you're going to push down once you get to the highest part and

 turn your wheel around and just let it go like you would regularly go down without,

 Okay that was my demo, if you have any problems just send me a video of what you're doing

 wrong and maybe I can get back to you on it and figure out what's wrong.

Now cilantro is definitely one of my favourite herbs in the whole world.

 It is so useful and versatile to use in all sorts of cooking and I tell you what it makes everything

What you'll also need is some really good quality potting mix and cilantro

So soil that's mixed with clay, sand and rich fertile potting mix.

 Now you can throw a straw or bits of clay in there as well but as you can see that's a great

I'll try not to disturb the roots too much in this because they are very sensitive and just

So I'll just make a little well, put that in there like that and then just

 Always make sure the water is draining out well because they don't like to sit in water,

 these plants, they like a well-drained soil and that's perfect.

 heat as the leaves that grow on these plants tend to be bitter in flavor.

 plant which means it only lives one growing season and then it dies off.

Now you can either leave this stalk and let the seeds naturally drop into

 the soil or you can take the seed pod off and keep it and store it and save those seeds for later on.

 Now if you are going to grow the plants from seeds make sure you plant them about six inches apart

 once a week or until I see the leaves start to wilt and if they start wilting then I'll give

Now fertilize them about once or twice during the growing season.

 And inside there was a Play-Doh that looked like sparkles and sprinkles.

 But we're going to mix up some Play-Doh and cover Lightning McQueen with that nice fancy Play-Doh.

 The Chef Cookie Monster is going to watch to make sure we do it right of course.

 He's always watching our videos now and Big Cookie Monster here is always watching too.

 First thing we'll do is take enough of the Play-Doh out of the package to cover Lightning McQueen.

 Now Ramon will not be very happy today because we're not using him to paint Lightning.

 Okay, let's move these things out of the way and we'll roll the Play-Doh nice and flat with our new roller.

 We're going to lay that right on top of Lightning and see how it covers.

 Okay, now let's put Lightning back on our tray and we'll put the Play-Doh on top.

 Now we'll lay the Play-Doh on top and we can mold the Play-Doh around the car.

 See, I'm cutting the wheels out individually so they'll still be functioning when the Play-Doh comes out.

 Next, I cut out Lightning McQueen's nice smile through the Play-Doh.

 What I have to do next is cut out his windshield and his engine hood so he'll look familiar again.

 Lightning said, I'm going to go back to the Rite-A-Deeter Springs and see what they think of this new paint job.

 I have to go first to Rite-A-Deeter Springs to see my friends, he said.

 So they all gathered around Lightning McQueen to see his new paint.

 Not long after, Lightning was back to his original bright red color.

 Hope you liked that Play-Doh video of Lightning McQueen changing colors.

 Thanks for stopping by, I'm Chef Billy Parisi and you're watching FixMyRecipe.com.

 Said she's having a really hard time keeping it together, it's coming out really liquidy.

 So in a huge pot, let's throw our bacon in there and get it cooked.

 Now that the bacon is just about cooked, it's time to caramelize our vegetables.

 So in that same pot and the bacon still in there, we're going to add in this garlic,

 We actually have some time while those vegetables are caramelizing, so we are going to make

 Just until it's combined, we're going to set it aside and next we are going to peel and

 We're going to deglaze with a little bit of white wine, add in our whole clams that we

 At this point we're simply going to bring our soup to a boil, add in those golden yukon

 We're going to add it right in there, thicken it up very, very thick because that's going

 We're going to make it nice and thin again and our soup is going to be perfectly white.

 Alright Karen, your biggest problem was that it wasn't getting thick.

 Now we're going to finish it with heavy cream, fresh thyme and parsley.

 It probably won't need much salt because of that bacon and you know I'm pouring a bowl.

 If I had some French bread I would be dipping this in there like no one's business.

 Stick to my recipe, you are going to love your brand new New England clam chowder.

 Be sure to come back tomorrow, see our new featured fix of the day.

 Okay, so the first thing we're going to do is go ahead and get your meat and get your

 So the first thing I'm going to go ahead and do is start taking this lining off the back

 If you can, just get the corner peeled up and you're going to grab that corner and if

 you can wrap it between your fingers, that will make it a little bit easier.

 Now it will be a little bit more of that if that was a baby back cut, but this is the

 The first thing I'm going to do, I'm going to end up wiping these down with a dump.

 The first thing I'm going to do is make sure I have my spice mix all ready and evenly just

 I'm going to start layering it on and I want to do a nice even coat.

 We're going to put this in the smoker and man, I tell you what, after it comes out,

 you're going to want to smack your mama and smack everybody in your family.

 I have a little bit of garlic salt, a little bit of onion powder.

 I have some, a little bit of, I can't think, a little bit of coriander in there, salt and

 So it's got a little bit more in there, but it's going to be nice and tender and juicy

 Now I'm making sure I give it a nice good coat and I'm going to let them marinate overnight

 If you really want to make sure that you have some really good venison, you should

 Usually I say about a palm, you know, if you pinch a palm like that, fill it up with salt

 right there in the middle and fill it up with salt and then dump that into a bowl of this

 same size, which this is probably about three quarters of a gallon of water or whole.

 And then you put in one cup of vinegar, white vinegar, doesn't matter, or apple cider vinegar,

 And then you let it soak overnight and that'll take that blood or whatever taste out of it,

 So as you can see, this is, and I can just rinse that right out, rinse that right out.

 And you don't want to put too much salt because it'll make your meat salty.

 But as you can see now, that meat is a lot lighter and it's going to have very little

 So I have some venison ribs here that's going on the smoker with us.

 As you can see, it looks all gnarly because I've trimmed out a lot of my fat there.

 So that's going to help to have a nice, tastier cut of meat and you won't have that gristle in there.

 So I'm just going to, just the same thing, I'm not rubbing it, I'm patting the seasoning

 And the membrane is on this too, so you make sure you get that off too.

 Even if it's venison ribs, it's going to have that membrane on it.

 I got my venison ribs and got some pork ribs and I'm going to get it smoking.

 If you buy just a thin serving pan, you can mold it to what you want to get that heat

 to go up to the other side to move over to the other side so you'll have an even heating surface.

 I got them like standing up, so I'm going to make sure that they're getting smoke fill right now.

 Basically, that's the first coating that's going to go on is the smoke.

 And I'm just going to cut them up into nice little quarter chunks here.

 I like to baste mine, mop them down, after I cut them so you get all of the sauce all around the meat.

 Each coffee bean has somewhere in the vicinity of 300 different aromatic compounds in it, potentially.

 And if you're bored with coffee, you're bored with life, basically.

I'm the head barista at the Wonderland Park Cafe for Peace Coffee.

 The top three things that I can suggest when brewing coffee at home is,

 Number two is have control over the saturation and temperature of your grounds.

 Typically that means getting a French press, getting a Chemex, getting a V60,

 getting something that allows you, rather than the machinery, to control those two things.

 Consistently measure out the same amount of coffee and the same amount of water to get the same cup every time.

 Brewing techniques of various kinds amount to two major components.

 How many coffee solids are in that cup, which can go anywhere from an espresso,

 which will have 10% coffee, to a standard American-style drip, which will have about 1-1.25% coffee, depending.

 So what I'm going to be doing is brewing up a cup of our Guatemala Chafuense Light.

 I'm going to measure everything by weight, because scales don't lie to you

 the same way that measuring cups and tablespoons and teaspoons do.

 If you absolutely refuse to get a scale, that's about two tablespoons, but I can't guarantee that.

 We grind this fresh at a grind that is approximately as coarse as sand.

 You want your water temperature to be somewhere between 195-205 degrees Fahrenheit,

 which is easily obtainable without a thermometer by boiling water and then taking it off the boil and waiting 10 seconds.

 It will also warm everything up, so you're using your water to brew coffee rather than warm up your brewing apparatus.

 It will also eliminate any paper taste that's present in the paper.

 I'm going to do all the brewing on top of the scale, because like I said, I'm doing everything by weight.

 I'm going to brew this with 250 milliliters, which is also 250 grams worth of coffee.

 The first step is the bloom, which is where you pour in about twice the brew weight, so 30 grams.

 Also, if the coffee is still freshly roasted, it will start expelling CO2 gas.

 It will start bubbling out from the top and everything will expand.

 That's 30 seconds, so I'm just going to pour in a little spiral here,

 to about halfway up the cone, and let it settle down a little bit, and then pour up to just that exact same level.

 I've got my timer still going, because I want the whole brew process, start to finish,

 I'm just going to give it a little stir to get any grounds that are stuck to the sides a chance to settle down to the bottom.

 When your coffee is finished brewing, it should taste balanced and sweet.

 If it's too sour and it's too grassy, then you've probably, what's called, under extracted the coffee.

 If it's really bitter, then it's going to probably be over extracted.

 I've been in coffee for eight years now, and if I were still making coffee the same way I were in 2004,

 Everything about it, we still know very, very little about coffee.

 I'm going to be showing you how to do the crochet puff stitch with nine loops.

 Rub the yarn over the hook and insert it back into the same chain stitch.

 Rub the yarn over the hook and draw it back through that stitch.

 Rub the yarn over the hook and draw it back through that chain.

 Skip the next stitch and work a puff stitch into the next stitch.

 The last stitch on this row will be a double crochet into the top of the chain three.

 iPhone 5, charging port, audio jack, cellular antenna and microphone repair.

 On a level scale, this is a medium repair and it will take about 30 minutes to complete.

We recommend using MagMat and iSessimo for all your repair needs.

 To see MagMat and iSessimo in action, see our MagMat and iSessimo video.

 All these products and tools can be purchased at iPhoneRepairMiamiBeach.com

 Don't forget to subscribe to our YouTube channel, like us on Facebook and follow us on Twitter.

 Place a suction cup next to the home button and pull the glass assembly away from the back housing.

 Use spudger if you are having problems separating the front glass assembly from the back housing.

 The glass assembly is still connected to the iPhone by several cables, so don't try to remove it entirely just yet.

 Remove the following three Phillips screws securing the metal cover to the motherboard.

 Use spudger to disconnect LCD, digitizer and proximity flex cables.

 Remove the following two Phillips screws securing the metal battery bracket to the motherboard and remove it.

 Insert iSessimo on the left side of the battery and remove the battery.

 Remove the following Phillips screw and remove the metal cover.

 Use spudger to disconnect the charging dock and cellular antenna.

 Remove the seven Phillips screws securing loudspeaker and charging dock to the back housing.

 Use spudger to gently pry the loudspeaker out from the back housing.

 Remove the rubber microphone boot and transfer it to the new microphone.

 Do not forget to subscribe to our YouTube channel by clicking the subscribe button.

 I'm Josie Lanzi and today we're going to head offshore and have a little fun fishing and

 come back here with that fresh catch of the day and I hope it's something different this

 Two feet or less so hopefully that's what happens when we get out there.

 I thought it was mackerels but they were little tummies which are a type of tuna but it's

 That was fun so now it's time to catch the fresh catch of the day.

 We got frozen Manhattan, frozen grunt, squid, sardines and oh yeah plenty of pin fish so

 Just to see what's down there we'd like to start with squid and get them eating so we're

 We got a trigger and Brian thinks he's got a grouper keep over there.

 Yup and just got a grunt now so we got actually five different kinds of fish we caught today.

 I can't wait to go home and create an off the hook recipe with that one.

 So to scale the fish and not do the damage really you just take the back of your knife.

 A lot of times when you cook fish that has scales on it on a very high heat it actually

 But I like to like rub it a little bit like this to get most of them off.

 Alright now that I'm done scaling it as I showed you I'm going to start around the head

 Here you just want to stay above the bones and you'll get a nice fillet there.

 When scaling it and having a little hard time at first when you start filleting it

 Okay, here we have our trigger fish that I showed you how to fillet.

 And all we're going to do to this fish is just season it with sea salt.

 Okay, let them cook on the first side about four to five minutes.

 Okay, the fish has been cooking four and a half minutes actually.

 It's starting to turn white around the edge and we always know that's time to turn it.

 Oh, look at that beautiful golden crust going on here on the skin.

 Okay, whisk this together and continue to whisk until it's heated through completely.

 We have our fish laid out on the plate and I like to just take the lemon herb sauce

 Of course you garnish it with a little lemon because we know there's lemon in there.

 Wasn't that trigger fish cool looking and it's even better tasting?

 In any case, most of my recipes you can always substitute with like a fresh local fish caught in your area.

 So until next week you guys, I had a lot of fun and I'll see you back here for another

 I've been enjoying them for a while, but I wanted to show you what's inside the box.

 The headphones just snap right into place, and they're ready to use.

 You'll want to plug in this cable, because these are not Bluetooth headset, or headphones.

 And you'll see right here, there's some controls for controlling your mic, if you're connected

 And it comes with a splitter, which is pretty cool, because then you can share your music

 Okay, so first thing you'll notice is that the boxing is pretty nice.

 And for people that may be using a device sometimes that is not Bluetooth, you can use

 So you don't have to strictly use these with a Bluetooth device.

 This side, you can put your little cables and adapters and your wall charger, USB cable.

 I had a Beats by Dre, Beats Pro, which I think were about 450 bucks.

 And I needed something that was, I don't know, the sound just didn't sound over EQ, a little

 So the noise canceling on these though, when it's on, I don't really notice noise canceling.

 But other than that, I don't really hear it canceling out noise.

 But increasing the overall sound quality, yeah, it sounds really good when you turn

 So the Bluetooth set does let a little noise in once in a while, which I would never have

 But every once in a while, there's some noise that creeps in, in between tracks, if I'm

 So if you're listening to music and you see somebody's talking to you, you push that button.

 You push the button and it amplifies the sound around you so you can hear what they're saying.

 If you don't feel like it and you just want to push the button, it's there.

 And the other person on the other end said that it sounded fine.

 They could tell I was on something other than my phone, but they said the quality was good

 I haven't used it on this set, but I'm sure it's going to sound about the same.

 Now I expected the Bluetooth to have lower quality than the cabled headset, but I actually

 I find myself using the Bluetooth a little bit more than the corded one, but I think

 if I'm out in the field and I'm using something that is not Bluetooth enabled, I will probably

 Even though you can plug a cord into these and use them with devices that are not Bluetooth.

 This one's going to work for anything, and this is going to work for pretty much everything

 Hey everyone, this is Spider Wayne, and I have a lot of stuff to give away.

 The camera has been modified with a filter removed so that it becomes a full...

 person in the entire world, which is why I never do DIY videos because I don't do very

But today is actually something I have made before and I'm actually doing

 a collab with my friend Courtney from Lovers Lane, 29, that's her channel, I'll link it

 much get invited to an ugly Christmas sweater party every year.

 year of high school I've been wearing the same one that I made when I was in high school.

 So I thought it would be fun to show you guys kind of how I made my sweater.

 me a super long time now so I finally decided it was time to make a new one.

 you guys have to go check out her channel, she does awesome DIY videos all the time,

 which is kind of why I wanted to do a DIY video in collab with her.

 like it and like I said, I'm horrible at crafts so don't judge me, it's not like super hard

 afterwards because hers is probably a lot more crafty than mine.

 Okay, so what I used to make this sweater was just a basic red cardigan that I found

I also used a glue gun and some scissors and then some fun felt things that

And I didn't use my puppy even though she wanted to help me but I didn't

 inside the sweater just to hold it tight and so that I didn't glue through to the other

Then I took this large felt snowflake that I found at Michaels and I glued it with

 Then I decided to take clear rhinestones and just glue them to a few of the points on the

 Then I found this chain of different felt shapes and I just took it apart to use the

 Then I took some smaller colored rhinestones and placed them on the Christmas trees to

 Then I just decided to put a bigger clear rhinestone in the middle of the snowflake just because I liked the way that looked.

 Then I found this silver and red striped ribbon and I just decided to line the edge of the

 sweater along the buttons with this just to kind of create a striped looking thing.

 Then I just added a few more rhinestones to the center of the sweater.

 Then I just brought it around the collar and continued to go around to the other side of the buttons.

 Then I found this fun pom pom ball strand and I decided to put this around the wrist

 of the sweater so I first measured it on my real wrist and then I used my Colorstay foundation

 but you could just use any round thing to hold the shape of the wrist and then I just

 I had a lot of extra ribbon left over so I decided to wrap it along the bottom of the

 So anyways, if you came over here from Courtney's channel, thank you so much.

 I have done a back to college or university makeup look for you all.

 And that is because in my last video I did a back to school look.

 And that was aimed at younger students who can't really afford a lot of makeup,

 and who aren't really allowed to wear a lot of makeup at school.

 You don't want to turn up to college or university in the morning with a full-blown smoky eye.

 So yeah, we've kept it really fresh again, but with a bit more to it.

 and there's a good variation of drugstore and high-end products in this video.

 So yeah, if you would like to see how I got this look, then please keep on watching.

 and I'm just going to take this all across my eyelid and blend it out with my finger.

 and it's a really good dupe for the MAC Pro Longwear Concealer.

 So you can use it as a concealer and as a base for your eyeshadows.

 Then I'm just going to take this second golden-y shadow from my Maybelline Eyeshadow Quad,

 and I'm just going to take this on a flat-shaded brush all the way across my lid.

 Then I'm just taking the lightest shade from the palette and applying that on the inner corners of my eyes,

 just to give a nice pop and to make them look more wide and awake.

 I'm going to brush that over my brow bone, and this will be a nice subtle highlight.

 For eyeliner, I've got my L'Oreal Infallible Retractable Black Liner,

 and I'm just going to take this all along my lash line, nice and close to it.

 I'm then going to conceal any areas on my face that I feel need concealing.

 You obviously don't need to cover as much of your face as I do,

 but I have darker pigmentation around my mouth, around my nose, and things like that,

 so I feel like I need to conceal a bit more, but you obviously don't need to do as much as me.

 Just conceal around the nose, any blemished scars or anything like that you may have,

 I really like this concealer because you can just squeeze it out from the tube

 and you don't need to faff around with having extra brushes and products,

 Then I've got the same concealer, but in more of a pinkier tone,

 and this will just sheer out the concealer and pick up any excess product that there may be on my face,

 and of course, taking my Ben Nye Banana Powder, I'm just going to set my under eye area,

 and because it's got a slight yellow tint to it, it's also going to help highlight the area too.

 So for my foundation, I like to use a powder sometimes when I'm in a rush,

 and this is a full coverage foundation, so it's going to last all day,

 and give me the coverage that I need without looking too heavy on the skin,

 And I'm just going to buff this into the skin with a kabuki brush.

 And then going back into my contour kit, I'm taking the darkest shade to contour on my cheekbones,

 my temples, and obviously down the sides of my nose, just to slim it out a little bit.

 For a nice pop of colour on the face, I've got this gorgeous Sephora blusher called Orange Pop,

 and I'm just going to brush that on the apples of the cheeks and up and outwards,

 and this is a gorgeous colour for making you look more vibrant and awake.

 so I'm just going to use that on my cheekbones, and then I'm going to apply that on my nose,

 And then for a highlight, I'm going back into the same highlighter that I've used earlier,

 from the Sleek contour kit, and I'm just going to brush that on the tops of my cheekbones,

 and this is a really nice, subtle highlight, it's not too in your face.

 Oh, and all the products used will be listed down below in the description box with names and shades,

 but yeah, for mascara, I use my Maybelline The Flawless Mascara in the shade,

 and I'm just going to take a few coats of this on my top lashes,

 Then I'm just taking a nude eyeliner, and this is actually one that I got from Japan,

 but I will be using this one for my eyes, because I'm not going to be using it for my lips,

 but I will list the name of it down below in the description box,

 and this will just help me get a more wide-eyed look, and make me look more awake.

 And for lips, I've got my Shu Uemura lip pencil in the shade, Brown 710,

 and I'm just taking that all along the outer edge of my lips, and lining them with this.

 And finally for lipstick, I've got this gorgeous one by MAC, and it's called Twig,

 and this is one that I actually used to wear every single day for uni.

 and it's actually from River Island, in case you were interested.

 But yeah, this is the finished look guys, I really, really hope you like it.

 comment down below letting me know what other videos you'd like to see,

 At first I thought I invented it, but then I realized it was actually the Chevron, but

 As you can see I really like this bracelet and so do my friends at school.

 And they're also super easy to make and they don't take that much time.

 The arrow should be pointing towards you instead of away from you.

 You're going to take your first color and instead of doing like a normal fishtail figure

 So you're going to loop this bottom one, the middle bottom one, and the side bottom one.

 If you're thinking it looks wrong because your tail looks kind of weird, then all you

 have to do is pull it and it looks like a completely new bracelet.

 So you're going to loop this one, this one, this one, this one, this one, this one, this

 Again if it looks kind of weird here, pull it and it looks better.

 You're going to continue this until the bracelet can wrap all the way around your wrist.

 Then you're going to continue this until the bracelet can wrap all the way around your wrist.

 Now that it can fit all the way around my wrist, you're going to have to take it off.

 So what you do is you put your hook through this first band, put it on your hook, then

 Now that you have all three bands on your hook, you're going to take a band, pull it

 You can just put those two sides on the hook and just straighten these out.

 For the other end, you're going to find the end that sticks out most and you're just going

 This is a really fun project and would be ideal as a classroom activity.

 But before we start, if you love art, then check out our website at www.montmart.net

 And each lesson has a downloadable PDF lesson plan in a tab below the appropriate clip.

 We also have links to our Facebook and our Creative Connection Art Club.

 Image 1 is North America and Greenland, followed by image 2 South America,

 image 4 is Russia and Asia and image 5 is South East Asia and Oceania.

 Leave any islands on the sheet and cut them out and apply them as you need them.

 You wouldn't want to accidentally apply Sumatra where Madagascar should be now, would you?

 So now that our main elements are cut out, we can apply them to our canvas.

 Take some Blu-Tack and apply little balls to the rear of the templates.

 Applying the regions on the map is quite fun and with a few children doing this,

 They get to visually see where each country relates to the world as a whole.

 Some of the small islands can be quite fiddly, so I apply Blu-Tack directly as a mask.

 It works quite well for this as it is resistant to the adhesive qualities of the acrylic paint.

 Ensure the land masses are in the approximate position relative to each other.

 The next important thing I will say is to protect the area in which you intend to paint in.

 For example, lay thick paper or a water-resistant drop cloth under the canvas

 All of the art materials in this project are available from a bronze or above art centre.

 This is the Mont Marte 12-piece acrylic paint set and the colours used are up to the artist.

 The only important thing is to mix three teaspoons of water with each full tube of paint.

 I'm using disposable cups for this and clean the palette knife between mixing to avoid contamination.

 We'll be using the palette knife to flick and drizzle on paint also.

 Well, now that our templates are in place and our paint is mixed, we can apply it.

 Now, because the paint is so thin, it is going to seep under these templates in certain places,

 but don't worry, we're going to redefine all of the countries with white paint in the next step.

 Alright then, now for the fun part, let's take off those templates.

 Time now to redefine any of those areas where the paint has seeped under the templates.

 And to do that I'm going to use the Dimension Acrylic Titanium White and if you need some

 So squeeze out a bit of Dimension Titanium White Acrylic and paint around the edges.

 I'm using a medium angle to do this but any flat brush would work.

 But you do have the ability to add any extra little islands if you want.

 make sea creature rolls and these are really a beautiful roll that you need to try at home.

 First thing we're going to do is we're going to start with some boiled shrimp.

We also have some crab salad mix as well that we teach how to make

 in another video so check that out if you're not sure how to do it.

 to spoon not quite generous but a good amount all the way across the roll of the crab salad.

 You don't want to overfill your roll because it makes it very difficult to roll up into a nice

So once we have that with our sushi roll rice base we want to go ahead

 and bring the base over to the other side squeeze firmly but gently and keep pulling out the saran

 wrap as you keep rolling forward using that firm but gentle method.

 crab salad coming off the sides but we do have a nice tight roll.

 notice we're lining it along the top with a gentle overlap just enough we want to be sure

 that it's covered side to side so that each bite is covered completely.

 come together really nice on the plate and they're going to get your guests excited when they see

Now take your saran wrap put it back over the top get your bamboo mat and squeeze once again

We want to get this tuna to kind of unite with the rice underneath it without

 So go ahead and slice these pieces one by one about two finger widths max for the bite size

 pieces that you're after and once you have a cut what you want to do is go ahead and put these

Now we're covering it with a sweet sauce that we use for our tuna

Click on the link to learn how to make it and that's what you want it to look like.

 Evil Dead, I'm sorry, we're going to be making boneless, skinless, chicken thigh cutlets.

 And this is going to be Panda Express Mandarin Sauce style guys.

This is their infamous chicken sauce that they use for all their stuff.

 with that we're going to be having four cheese mashed potatoes.

 potatoes you can actually get guys, because they're real mashed potatoes.

They have the best taste that you can have out of any instant potatoes.

 only kind of vegetables that we have here too, so that way you can steam them right

What I'm going to do actually is I'm going to marinate these chicken breasts,

 tonight when we do put them in the oven and get them cooked, they're going to be beautiful

 going to go ahead and get these marinating in the bags and then I'll show you what they

Basically all I did was I took them out of the packaging, rinsed

 up with nice marinade, got them all mixed around real nice and then folded over so that

 over while they're in the refrigerator so that way they get a nice, get a nice marinade

And then we'll be back later on and I'll show you what they look

 like before they go into the oven and we'll get things started then.

 today and now what we did basically is we got a different, I got a different glass pan

 out since this one's a little bit bigger so that we can lay them down better.

What I did first was I put some of the sauce at the bottom of the pan

 and then used a brush here to kind of like glaze the bottom so that way they have a nice

And then I put the chicken thighs spread out on there as you can see.

 little bit of onion powder and a little bit of seasoning salt on top of that.

 what we're going to do is we're just going to cover them up with some foil and we're

 those are done we're going to go ahead and whip up our potatoes and we're going to make

 our peas and I'll show you that process as well when we get to it.

 we got to do is put all this stuff together, get it on a plate served up and I'll show

Got your peas, mashed potatoes with four cheeses and your chicken

 the Panda Express Mandarin Boneless Skinless Chicken Thighs, mashed potatoes and gravy pea

 Hey Youtubers, this is MySilverProductions and I'm going to show you how to draw an army

 If any of you guys or girls know how to draw a stick figure then it shouldn't be that hard.

 So what I want you to do is to take it like that and just put a little circle.

 Now make like a little pouch line and put a little dot for the button.

 Now I'm just going to real quick show you how to draw a vehicle.

 You guys leave me some comments and tell me any army vehicles that you think I should draw.

 Hi, I'm Anna Fugate-Downs for Rejuva Minerals Cosmetics, and today I want to share with

 I'll be using Rejuva Minerals Skincare, Concealer, and Foundations with my model Bella to demonstrate

 First, I'm going to pamper Bella's skin with the Ultra Hydration Moisturizer.

 I'm using the flat top Buki brush to distribute and gently massage the moisturizer into Bella's

 I love using duo fiber brushes like the flat top Buki to apply emollients like creams or

 The white fibers on top hold onto your product and ensure that it adheres to the surface

 of the brush, while the black fibers massage and buff your cosmetics into place.

 Next up, I'll be using the Multitask Powder to prime Bella's skin for the foundation.

 Multitask Powder is great because you can use it underneath foundation to help hold

 You can also use it on bare skin to just control your natural shine, and you can also use it

 Now I am applying the Tinted Moisture Cream as Bella's foundation.

 I like to put enough of the foundation onto my brush to evenly coat the white bristles.

 I start by dabbing the foundation onto Bella's skin and then working in small circular motions

 This creamy formula is very hydrating and can be worn with or without the Ultra Hydration

 Then using the soft blush brush, I'm going to set the Tinted Moisture Cream for a flawless

 To apply the loose powder, I'm going to open my reusable Rejuva Minerals Eco Jar with the

 I'll dip the soft blush brush into the loose powder, swirl my brush inside the lid to coat

 the bristles, and then tap off the excess to avoid a messy application.

 Then using light sweeping motions, I gently dust the loose foundation all over the face.

 This sets the Tinted Moisturizer and absorbs any excess oil on the skin, making the foundation

 Rejuva Minerals Loose Concealer refines the coverage of your foundation to fit your exact

 On Bella, we will be using the loose powder concealer in natural.

 The shade you should use depends on what it is that you're trying to conceal.

 A more yellow-toned concealer like Golden Sand is great for neutralizing redness caused

 A more pink-toned concealer like natural is best for eliminating under-eye circles and

 We will apply using the Cover and Blend brush in firm patting motions to pat coverage onto

 the area, then lightly feather out the edges with the tips of the brush.

 If you need to blend the concealer further, you can apply a little more of the loose powder

 Pair this with a lipstick and mascara on a casual day, or go bold with a dramatic eye

 Until next time, I'm Anna Fugate Downs for Rejuven Minerals Cosmetics.

 Welcome to the spookiest ever episode of 2 Kids and the Mom Cooking!

 Alright, here we are today with 2 Kids Cooking and we have Sophie who is going to introduce our next recipe for our Halloween show.

 We're going to make spider cookies right now and the ingredients are some of these.

 Yep, butter, peanut butter, vanilla, egg, sugar, brown sugar, milk, flour, kisses, petals, and baking soda.

 Well, of course if that doesn't work we'll just stick to the standard ingredients.

 And basically this is a standard peanut butter kiss cookie but we've altered the appearance and there's no ingredientator involved.

 Alright, we're back with Alex and Sophie and they're going to start putting the ingredients in.

Alex, there's one egg in this recipe and we have a half a stick of butter that's been defrosted to room temperature or you can just let it sit out overnight.

 And then Alex is going to measure and Sophie is going to pour it in, right?

 And next Alex, you can set that sugar on the counter behind you and then grab the brown sugar and we also need a half a cup of brown sugar.

 Alex, is that a half a teaspoon or a whole teaspoon that she has?

 Then we need a half a cup of peanut butter and Alex is going to be doing the flour.

 Yeah, you like to eat it in a bowl with chocolate chips and a spoon.

 Okay, then once you have a half cup filled to the top of peanut butter, you can scoop it in.

 Alright, we're going to roll these all out and then we'll be right back.

 We're going to unwrap 26 Hershey's Kisses while Mom puts the cookies that have been formed by Alex and Sophie in the oven.

The cookies just came out of the oven and Alex, there's one of them.

 So first, we're going to take the kiss, which is going to be the head.

 You have to do these right when the cookies come out of the oven.

 Alright, we're back again with the finale of our spider cookie recipe.

 Lucky is a kitten that we're cat sitting and he's here for the finale.

 For more spooky Two Kids and a Mom episodes, visit us at twokidscooking.com.

 Hello everyone, starting off with a medium-sized saucepan and 1 third of a cup of butter,

 1 half cup of corn syrup, you can use the light or the dark, and 1 third of a cup of sweetened condensed milk.

 Now you're gonna stir this over medium heat and cook it until the butter is melted and the sugar is dissolved.

 Then continue to cook it over medium heat until it comes to a boil.

 Now I noticed as I was cooking that I was getting these big brown spots that were coming up from the bottom.

 My heat was on medium high so I turned it down a little bit to try to stop this from happening.

 When it came to a boil I inserted a candy thermometer, and then you need to cook this so that it reaches 250 to

 You're also going to add in some food coloring to get the red color.

 Of course you can make these any color you want, but I made them red because I was using cherry flavoring.

And you only have to use a little tiny bit because they're very very strong flavored.

 So continue to stir until all the flour is incorporated and then immediately

 you're gonna pour it into an 8 by 8 inch baking dish that's been greased.

 I put a piece of parchment paper with the edges hanging over and I also greased the parchment paper.

 Pour that in and then spread it around in the pan so it goes up to the edges.

 Once it's cool enough so that you can touch it without burning your fingers, remove it from the pan.

 And that's what that parchment paper is great because it just lifts out.

 Now I found that maybe I probably left mine out a little bit too long before I

 decided to cut it because cutting it was quite the challenge because it had set quite a bit.

 And as soon as that's you're able to actually cut it without burning your fingers, start cutting it up.

 kind of a taffy is the texture that we're looking at here rather than the rubbery texture of a commercially made

 So who knows I might experiment with the cooking time on this to see if I could get them a little bit softer.

 But I have a feeling is if you cook them a little less they might be softer,

 So how you get that rubbery kind of texture in an actual commercially made Twizzler,

But these are actually fun to make and if you someone loves red licorice,

You just have to be really careful when you eat them not to tear out your fillings.

 starburst candies, gumdrops, all sorts of great candies on my channel.

 If you want to see them and browse a little bit go ahead and click right on your screen or see my candy making

 Hey you guys, it's Christina and today we're going to be making fruit infused vitamin waters.

 If you guys follow me on Facebook or Instagram, you'll see that I'm always posting pictures

 So today I'm going to be making four fruity waters that taste amazing.

 They're filled with good vitamins for you, they'll keep you hydrated, and they're sweet.

 It's the new hip way to drink your fruit and it makes drinking water that much more enjoyable

 Raspberries, strawberries, grapefruit slices, tangelo slices, cucumber slices, blueberries,

 For our first fully raw water, we're going to be making a strawberry lemonade.

 First go in the lemons, and then the strawberries, and any herb of choice like mint or basil.

 For our second fully raw water, we're going to be making a raspberry limeade.

 And for this one, we're going to put in our limes, our raspberries, add in a few cucumbers,

 and any herb of choice like mint or basil goes great in this one.

 And for this one, we're going to add in grapefruit and cucumber and basil.

 And last but not least, our fourth fully raw water is going to be the blue tang.

 For this one, simply add in your tangelo slices, your blackberries, and your blueberries.

 These are so fun to drink out by the pool, just outside in the park.

 And if you want them to taste stronger, all you have to do is leave them in the refrigerator overnight.

 And when you taste them in the morning, you will be amazed at the flavors exploding in your mouth.

 And something else that I recommend is that if you want the water to be even sweeter,

 all you have to do is use young coconut water instead of regular water.

 And one more thing that I want to add is you want to use the purest of water possible.

 I know that I use Evermore water, but if you can use reverse osmosis or any other type of truly pure water,

 that will make the difference in not just taste, but in also how you feel.

 If you guys want to try one of these fruity, delicious infused waters,

 And if you like one of them, please let me know in the comments

 below which one is going to be your favorite or which one that you would like to try.

 and I hope that you drink them and that you enjoy them and that you share them.

 If you guys want more tips, tricks, or recipes on how to go fully raw,

 please subscribe here to Fully Raw Christina as we have fun in the kitchen

 If you guys want to follow me daily, you can also find me at Facebook, Pinterest,

 Now since we've already put oil on the other side of the mushrooms,

 So let's get ready to check our mushrooms and see if they're done.

 Wonderful dish for all your vegetarian and non-vegetarian friends.

 Thanks for watching Real Food for the Soul, and we'll see you next time.

 For the two chords that this song has, it is the coolest song, one of the coolest songs

 If you need more help with this, stick around and I'll show you some resources and tell

 So you could play this open, D minor and A7, or you could play them bar chords, D minor

 If you need those formations, what I'm doing here, check out the link below to get the

 free e-book, yourguitarsage.com, because I show you these open forms.

 I also show you some bar chord forms and it's a slew of free stuff to help with your playing.

 Here on YouTube, if you need help with these bar chords, type in bar chords, your guitar

 Strumming-wise, what's happening is we're thinking eighth notes.

 So we're playing one and two and three and four and one and two and three and four and,

 or one two three four five six seven eight, one two three four five six seven eight.

 If you need help with any of this strumming business here on YouTube, type in Your Guitar

 We're going to accent one and two and three and four and one and two and three and four

 So you're going to accent two and four, meaning you hit it just slightly harder.

 But if we accent one and two and three and four and one and two and three.

 So when you're practicing a rhythm like this, if you have difficulty with it, slow it down,

 mute the strings, and just practice it and say it out loud while you're doing it.

 Make sure you go to unstoppableguitarsystem.com as well as get in the free e-book because

 there's a free video series there that I promise you will change your playing forever.

 So go there if you have questions about this video or any other video that I do.

 What I'm going to show you is how to take a large Rolly bag and another large Rolly

 bag and our saddle bag mounting kit and make those work as saddle bags for the Wolfman

 These are a smaller bag than our Expedition Dry saddle bag, more used for day use and

 This is an unstiffened bag so it works by the contents therein, gives it the body and

 What we're going to do is I'm going to first center the webbing on the front patch.

 The webbing actually goes through the slot under the webbing and under the buckles.

 What I'll do is just pull on one side and then pull it up so you have a nice centered

 Now we know at least, now we know that the webbing is in the center of the bag and we

 The kit contains eight, but we're showing four, four per bag of these one inch metal

 And the way the slide works is it goes through the slot on the rack and it gets captured

 We're going to take, we go through the bottom slot, holding it upright, around the middle

 Then we're going to thread the cut end through the buckle, around and through.

 Bottom buckle, excuse me, bottom slot, around the middle bar, through the top slot, around

 All the bags have them, it's removable, protects the whole bag from any scratches.

 It's also replaceable, so if you scratch it, cut it, or so on, it's allowed to get cut

 So we go through the buckle, around, underneath the slot, coming from the underneath side,

 The bags, we have found that it's the least slip prone, if you will, most secure method

 So I'm going to set the two together, these are your seat straps, like so.

 I'm going to pull them fairly close, it makes it easier just to, we're not fighting all

 So now, I'm going to set these on, they're a little funky right now, they're not adjusted

 properly, so we're going to loosen this up, the seat straps up a little bit, and we're

 going to get these just about the right height, a little more here, a little more here, it's

 So to make this work, what I like to do is start with the top, take the tab, put it under

 Now we're going to thread this through, take the metal slide through the slot, all the

 way through, and you'll notice when you give it tension, it captures on that.

 So we're going to go here, and through, just slide the tab through, and when you pull on

 We're going to do it on all four, it's the identical method as on our Expedition Dry

 Now we want to tighten the straps down, again we can use our ratchet method.

 Since they're soft, I'm just going to push on them and use some leverage with the buckle

 I've already done the left side, now what I like to do is just tighten down the seat

 And that's it, they go on, as you can tell, nice and solid, easy to access.

 Very easy to roll back down, of course you have to burp them, get all the air out, roll

 Also, what's really nice is, if you want to just take one side off, all you have to do

 And we, to make a quick, easy method to get these off, I'm going to try and do the bottoms

 Give them a pinch, both buckles, side squeeze type buckles, pinch them on both sides, flick

 They come off individually, or if you left the seat straps on, you pull the pair off.

 But what a unique set of bags, where you can go from a rack bag, to a saddle bag on our

 What we're making today is a cheesecake topped with a fried apple caramel mix.

 Well you just let it simmer down until it gets to about this state right here.

 Oh, it takes probably about ten minutes to just keep cooking it down.

 So once it's cooked down real nice, you see all the brown sugar and oh, we forgot one

 So once it gets cooked down like that, then you take and pour in some more healthy caramel

 So if you don't mix it up right, then you get away with doing it.

 Well, I've been practicing my stirring techniques, boys, and you know.

 And then once it gets cooked down, what you're more or less wanting to do is warm up the

 caramel syrup and get a good flavor throughout the apples and that.

 Then once that's heated up real nice, we're going to bring this over here.

 Well actually, this is one my chemist came up with, Marla, my wife.

 And then put a few apples on and a little bit of the caramel syrup.

 Well, you can make your own cheesecake or you can buy one at a store.

 Okay, so you can... sometimes it's nice, you can kind of... and there's a chef that does

 Half of it's from the store, then half of it is at home, then you put your own twist

 And we've tried making our own and it does pretty good, but sometimes some people can

 This is one of the most amazing things I've seen on our show in a while.

 If you want Randy's recipe, and with Marla's help, we should say Randy and Marla, so I'm

 Go to our website, WICS.com, click on recipes, you can find Randy's recipe there.

 Randy Twyford's apples and caramel all simmered up good this morning.

 And here's the deal, the caramel kind of makes the cheesecake warm on the outside but cool

 Gonna be making a tactical pen out of a Zebra F402, F701, and the Fisher Space Pen Refill.

 I've read about it on a couple different forums and I really just didn't find a good YouTube

 video out there to kind of explain the overall process on how to make this pen.

 So this tactical pen, or homemade tactical pen, is a real cheap way of doing it or a

 good alternative to buying what they label as an assault pen on the retail market.

 I was gonna go that route myself until I read an article about a guy who tried to go through

 airport security with an actual assault pen or a tactical pen, which you know is sold

 And this airport security actually gave him a hard time because in that particular state

 I guess it was considered a concealed weapon and he didn't have a weapons permit per their

 So I decided to get away from an actual marketed assault pen or tactical pen and just modify

 my own pen, which is just a general writing instrument, and turn it into more of a tactical

 type pen where it still could be used as that type of instrument.

 So what we're looking at here guys is the Zebra F402, which ran $4 on Amazon.

 So you're looking at a total cost of $16 to build this particular pen here.

 Essentially what we're doing is combining these two pens together so you do have an

 And then the pen refill here is just for kicks and giggles so you can go ahead and write

 on different surfaces and the writing experience is a little bit better.

 So we'll run through the process on how to get this put together.

 Okay, our first step is going to just be disassembly of the F701.

 We're just going to go ahead and remove the front piece here by unscrewing it.

 And you're going to keep all these pieces so you have that front piece there.

 And then on the back you shouldn't have too big of a difficulty getting off this clicker

 So you got everything disassembled and you got this spring back here as well.

 We're just going to take the tip of the F701 and remove the plastic inside here.

 There's a little plastic piece in there and I'm just using a bent paper clip to reach

 If it is giving you troubles you can go from the top and kind of push this way as well

 As you can see here it's just a little plastic piece that comes out pretty easily.

 Essentially what we got to do is stretch out this little plastic thing that we pulled out

 In order to do that we have to remove the spring off the ink that we pulled out of the

 Take the plastic thing and just kind of slide it up over the top of this.

 And we're really going to stretch it out as far as we can by pushing it over the top

 I did a little bit off camera to stretch it out as much as I could.

 Essentially what we're doing is just allowing that plastic tip there to accommodate the

 So once you got a good stretch on there you can pull that back out and then we'll replace

 And what I did is just remove it out of the package here and we'll go ahead and remove

 Now what we'll also notice is that you won't be able to probably remove the metal clicker

 And that's because they use an adhesive on the threads that are inside here.

 So when you use a pliers, obviously you're going to mar up the part that we're trying

 So what we're actually going to do, and this is how I read it on the forum, was to freeze

 it for about 30 minutes and then we're going to remove it and apply some heat right away.

 Okay so I've had my pen in the freezer for about 30, 35 minutes and it seems to be pretty

 What I'm going to do now is use a lighter and for about 15 to 20 seconds I'm going to

 And again you really only want to do about 15, 20 seconds and as you can see I'm just

 And we're just heating up right underneath where those threads would be.

 And we've got about 10 seconds now, we'll give her a little bit more time here.

 Hopefully with this it should expand and retract and make it able to quickly unscrew the threads

 So the adhesive on there will wear off and you should be able to get that removed.

 We have the parts from the F402 that we're going to be using, the F701 pieces and then

 And essentially what we're going to do is just go ahead and screw everything back together.

 We're going to use the spring from the F701 ink and we're going to replace that on the

 We'll go ahead and slide that into our pen housing and then we can go ahead and put our

 Next stop what we're going to do is go to the back of the system here and we're going

 to take the F402 clicker and we're going to attach that to our body with that same spring

 Now I've noticed that the threads on my F402 here are going to take a little bit of extra

 effort to get them screwed all the way in and I had to clean off the threads a little

 bit with some heat and a paper towel just to get the excess adhesive off there that

 And so we have our finished product, the do it yourself Zebra Tactical Pen for less than

 It's all in the steel all the way from the very bottom to the very top.

 I did notice that probably due to the little plastic thing that we tried to stretch out

 when you do click it to retract the ballpoint pen it just does stick a little bit there.

 I'm expecting that will probably just wear in a little bit once it's used quite a bit.

 Like I said it's an all steel one so it's a good tool for using as a tactical pen.

 Hi, this is Julie from Wow Toys and today I would like to introduce the Easy Build 3D

 Puzzle Kit Series from Wow Toys where you build your own detailed collectible using

 No need to paint, no need to glue, everything you need is included.

 Measuring approximately 5 inches long once complete, with 36 pieces, it's fun and challenging

 Instructions are included for your reference, but the challenge of putting it together is

 Separate the pieces into similar piles by shape or color, that's a good place to start.

 And because it is a puzzle, remember you can even take it apart and put it together again.

 The FA-18 Hornet is a supersonic carrier capable strike fighter jet designed by the U.S.

 The FA designation stands for its dual role as a fighter and attack aircraft.

 With more than 1,400 eventually built, full-scale production began in 1976 with the first flight

 Almost all early testing was done at the Naval Air Station in Patuxent River, Maryland.

 Its top speed reaches Mach 1.8 and can carry a wide variety of bombs and missiles, as well

 The FA-18 is operated by two GE F404 turbofan engines, which are dependable under various

 Another interesting feature is the Hornet's technology called leading edge extensions.

 This allows it to remain controllable at high angles of attack.

 The Hornet can fly up to 50,000 feet and can weigh up to 50,000 pounds loaded.

 It demonstrated its versatility and reliability during Operation Desert Storm, shooting down

 enemy fighters and bombing other enemy targets during the same mission from the same aircraft.

 In one incident, a Hornet took hits to both engines and flew 125 miles back to base.

 On April 24, 1946, Chief of Naval Operations Admiral Nimitz ordered the formation of a

 flight exhibition team to boost Navy morale, demonstrate naval air power, and maintain

 The team was assembled in its first flight demonstration before Navy officials took place

 At the end of the 1986 season, at the closing ceremonies, it was unveiled that the U.S.

 Navy's Blue Angels flight demonstration squadron was switching to the F-18 Hornet.

 Blue Angel pilots must have 1,350 hours and an aircraft carrier certification.

 The Blue Angels fly in more than 70 shows at 34 locations throughout the U.S.

 You may be lucky enough to see one, and now you can enjoy your very own F-18 Hornet replica.

 Thank you for joining us and come back for the next session of our Easy Build 3D Puzzle Kits.

 The reason for that is there should be no excuse to buy protein bars or snack bars,

 granola bars, all those crappy ingredients and preservatives and all that junk, if you

 So I tested myself, I set a timer, I prepped all this ingredients in my little pan, I got

 So I have 2 minutes and 25 seconds to get that all in here, blend it and into my pan.

 And if I can do it, then all you guys can stop buying granola bars and snack bars.

 Okay, I'm going to set my timer and then we're going to go like mad.

 Does that mean everybody is going to promise me to not buy snack bars anymore?

 You can add extra honey if you're new to whole foods and like the super, super sweet.

 You can add honey, maple syrup, palm sugar, you could add a banana.

 And then you can slice them up and serve them up for tomorrow or later on today, whenever

 Leave me a comment below with your favorite ingredients for your protein bars.

She just did a review on her Norpro sauce maker and wasn't real happy with it.

 And I wouldn't be happy either if I had to clean up all of that.

 I don't know if it's the difference between the two brands or what, but mine doesn't make a mess like that.

 I had just run a 5 gallon bucket full of tomatoes through mine and I went up and looked on the computer and saw your video.

 I was taking a break and I thought, man, I don't have anything like that done in my kitchen.

 So I thought that I would show you what I end up with when I use mine.

 There's the bowl that I had the tomatoes in and I just feed them up into the hopper and push it through with the plunger.

You don't want to force it or it does make it harder to turn the handle.

 And then I just run it through and I don't end up with a huge mess like that.

 Yours is fixed in a position with that wing nut where mine is adjustable.

 I can flip it back and remove the bowl or aim it down into the bowl at any angle.

 And then all I have to do is throw that in the sink and rinse it off.

 Oh, and when I was done, I did run a knife across here to get all the extra tomato sauce off of it.

 And here, I just soak it in the sink for a few minutes and then run a bottle brush over it.

 So I don't know if it's a difference between the brands or what, but mine isn't as messy as all that.

 And the other piece generally stays in there, but I can pull that out and clean it.

 So it's, yeah, it is something to clean, but given the choice between standing over a hot stove and peeling a five gallon bucket full of tomatoes,

 or rinsing these things off and soaking that and then running a brush over it, I'll take the cleaning any day of the week.

 I do feel for you having all that mess, but the more you use it...

 That when I first bought mine, the first two times I used it, it was kind of hard to crank.

 And it wasn't until about the third time that I used it that I noticed that in this end, in here, there was a piece of plastic.

 It was like that metal piece hadn't stamped through completely.

 There was a little piece of plastic in there, this red plastic, that little, like a hang thing there.

 And once that piece of plastic broke off, this thing turned a lot easier.

 So if you have trouble turning yours, you might want to check inside to see if there is a little extra piece of plastic there,

 going to be one of the best breads in my newfound love for bread making.

 hoping that it will be a super sweet kind of moist marshmallow bread that

 once we put in the toaster and add a little butter on it will taste like a

 will see that I have combined in this bowl 1 cup of marshmallow fluff, a cup

 and a half of self-rising flour, and approximately a half cup of milk.

 one cup of the fluff is one container, one 7 ounce container of the marshmallow

 self-rising flour and then we will add it in gradually as we mix it up.

 self-rising flour and I am expecting it to get kind of dense at this point and

I do want it to be a little bit more pourable than this though so

 I'm going to continue adding a couple splashes of this milk just until we can

 get it to the consistency that I think it's going to need to fluff up into some

 going to go ahead and get this from the bowl into a sprayed loaf pan right there.

 It's going to go into a 350 degree oven and when we get back I'll let you know

 done mixing it the last time it was still a little bit too thick.

 thicker than I think it's going to need to be to make the kind of bread that I

 more like a batter for this bread it will be the half cup of milk with the

 one container of marshmallow fluff and this is the consistency that you would

 think this is what is going to get us that super fluffy sweet moist bread

 fill you in on that and we will see you back here as soon as it's finished.

 super hot still but I just wanted to give you a peek at what it looks like.

 It's pulled away from the edges so that I know that it's done and it's already

 imagine oh a toasty marshmallow by the campfire and a fresh loaf of bread right

 out of the oven that's pretty much exactly what this smells like.

 yet so when we get back you will see what it looks like all sliced up and we

 this case YouTube smell-a-vision because you will never understand by looking at

 a couple of slices and toast it and make like a toasted marshmallow bread with

 self-rising flour and you get a nice fluffy loaf of marshmallow bread that

 lid off of the Dales, shake it up, take the lid off, pour you a pretty good mixture there.

 Take the lid off the olive oil, pour you a pretty good mixture of that.

 generous and liberal since you've got quite a few steaks going on there, okay?

 hickory smoke, you want to make sure you pour quite a bit of that in there.

Then you go back to the kitchen here and get you some chili powder.

 your steaks in there, you swish them around a little bit, and you've got your little bit

 I'm going to set our timer because it's five minutes on each side for a regular steak.

 And today I released .4, so that puts me down to 139.4, I believe.

 I'm hoping that before I end this round I can get securely somewhere in the 130s.

 I got a shout out to, I want to shout out Lynn Carey today because I thought, well actually

 I was thinking about this last week when I bought those jackets.

 And I saw these boots at Marshalls and they're so kind of sexy.

 So today I took my daughter over there and she helped me pick these out because I want

 And they're cool because even though they're high, it's like your foot is actually way

 And I wanted to show you guys, can you still see me okay, honey?

 And sometimes I'll have one of these in place of my fruit because it has 7 carbs, but it's

 So I still try to stay around 250 calories, except for I make this, instead of the fruit,

 And if I do have this, it usually is, can you give me another spoon?

 Like I might have this for breakfast and then later have like my meat and my salad and my

 And I usually don't eat my Cressinis, so instead what I'll do on occasion is I'll put like

 And the nice thing about that, this kind of makes it taste like cereal.

 I'm not sure the calories of this, but this is just a little bit of unsweetened coconut

 So that's how you make coconut butter is you grind up unsweetened coconut flakes.

 So a couple teaspoons of the golden flax meal, organic golden flax.

 So as far as those calories go, I don't freak out over a few calories here and there.

 Honestly, for me personally, it just makes this protocol so much easier after doing it so many times.

 Actually, I love being on P2 because I do all these extra little things.

 And then if I feel like I know that I'm going to eat this, I'm going to be really busy and active before I even get to my next meal,

 I'll also take out a couple frozen strawberries and chop them up.

 If you count the calories, and the thing of it is, the calories with the flats, it's mostly fiber.

 A little bit of flats doesn't seem to make a difference if I use it or the coconut.

 It kind of reminds me almost like oatmeal, you know, because it gives it more of a hearty flavor.

 And even if you let it sit a little bit longer, it might thicken up even more.

 Because, you know, ladies and gentlemen, I so have a sweet tooth.

 But, you know, if you're willing to try new things, maybe give it a try when you're on

 Here's another little exercise, it's a fretless exercise, it's very good for fretless, I mean

 you can work on fretted bass as well but it's really really good for strengthening your

It's just another one of those little things I've made up using a drone, this time

 the D string, open D string and then you fret the octave, the D. And then you play the D

It's always good to involve, and this involves a little slide from the

 And then back to the E. And then the D. And basically you just play that for a while,

 the right hand for that is just... So you've got one finger, first finger hitting the D,

 second finger hitting the G string, alternating, and that's all it is.

 And remember the great thing about fretless is if you are slightly out of tune and your

 ears are trained to know that you're slightly out of tune, after several weeks of practicing

And octaves with a note that you know is in tune, or in tune with the people

 finger options for that, I mean you can do it, you can do the whole thing on one finger

 if you want, but I really like to kind of spread the fingers out because then you've

 needs a fretless bass really, I mean I learnt that especially when I started playing fretless

 it's like cello but a bass and it's the same spacing and all that malarkey.

 a go, and again you can transfer that down to the other strings as well.

 to play a little bit of this, just like a little spooky little riff kind of thing that

 Sliding is always, yeah, I would say sliding in vibrato, that's what fretless is about

 We're not looking at doing a bunch of things that only work in training sessions.

 You have to look at this as an extension of the body and it's screwing as it comes in.

 So as it comes in, come in towards me, as it comes in I'm going to take it.

 We're going to use this theory today to turn our body and to turn the machines when we're

 in interaction with our training partner into a rotating wedge and we're moving around that

 You can also see that in the helix when we talk about this movement right here, we're

 So the first thing that we're going to work on with our training partner is using these

 Then we're going to go with much larger movements like this, very wide with this.

 Remember, inclined plane like I talked about, we're simply moving around the inclined plane.

 I can pull it back, but you can see that I'm always coming back to that screwing movement.

 What I'm doing is I'm taking my thumb and I'm plucking up on this, which is a G note,

 and for the rest of the chord, my three fingers are plucking those three notes.

 Now one thing you'll notice is that when I pluck those, they sit back down.

 I also play that one with my thumb and my first finger barred over and my second finger

 Still using that alternate from the bass to the top of the chord.

 Where we come up here and we're playing the top part of a G major 7th chord.

 Remember we always want to try to learn all the shapes that we can of these chords.

 Just by learning your fretboard more you'll know more of these.

 So there's the one we're using but we're just using these three notes of it.

 And with my pinky I'm going to add the 14th fret and the 12th fret.

 Instead of just arpeggiating that what we're going to do is go.

 And that second finger down on the E. And then the F sharp with our pinky.

 And it's also a great style that when you're playing on your own.

 So go ahead and try all those ideas and have a great time with them.

 And this time, on this video, we're going to learn how to use the

 embroidery hoop, specifically one of the little plastic ones that you can get at the

 local craft store in the US, and I would hope in the UK and other places as well.

 Now, this is a very simple design, but it's a very easy one to make.

I like 6-inch hoops better, but it's actually easier to see the hot pink than my light blue one.

 You'll notice that they've got the number right here, that's the

 punch needle embroidery in the 80s, specifically when they were

 put the fabric on top of it in the direction where you want it to be stitching.

 In this case, since we're starting, I centered my fabric in the middle.

If I'm stab-stitching up and down, the way I'm going to show you in the cross-stitch directions,

 If you're using a hoop, you will want to remember to take the hoop

 off your fabric when you're done stitching for the day, because otherwise this lip,

 or actually even just the fold if you're using a wooden hoop, can mark the fabric.

 It doesn't mark it per se, although it will attract dirt around the edges,

 Hi everyone, this is Melissa from Melissa Made and I'm happy to be sharing some blending

 I'm so glad that you're having a fun celebration for everyone and a lot of how-to's, so make

 sure you stay tuned all month for some giveaways and tutorials and all kinds of fun things.

 Today, like I said, I'm going to be sharing with you guys some of my favorite techniques

 And I have these simple circles printed on this page that will help me show you, demonstrate

 First of all, whenever I color, I put a blank sheet of paper underneath my cardstock.

 I use Express It, which is perfect for coloring with Copics, but I still like to have a little

 sheet underneath in case it's really saturated, then it won't come back up onto my paper from

 So I'm going to take my BG01, which is my lightest color to start with, and I'm just

 Kind of probably printed off this circle a little bit bigger than I wanted, but you'll

 So I just color my circle, and I'm going to take next my darkest color, which is BG09,

 and I'm going to work a technique where you set your marker down and you kind of flick

 it up so that you get this dark spot and then you get a nice light spot on the end.

 This light spot on the end is the spot where you want to blend, but you can see the color

 is kind of saturated here, and this, as you lift your marker, gets lighter.

 Well that lighter portion is going to help you blend your next color in so that you can

 And then I'm going to take my medium-sized brush, and I'm going to start with a light

 My medium shade is BG05, and I'm going to go over what I already colored and continue

 And then I'm going to take my light shade and go over the whole thing.

 I'm going to work in the same flicking motion at first, so it helps pull all those colors

 together and blend them, and then I'm going to work in a circular motion.

 And so if you take a look at this circle now, I don't want to lose the...

 If you look, you can see you've got a darker edge that transitions all the way up into

 Put your base coat down, and then flick your other colors into it to get a nice transition.

 I also wanted to quickly show you I lifted up my paper so you can see what I'm talking about.

 If I had left this on, it could have soaked up through my paper, maybe outside my line,

 Now I'm going to color this cute little cow from Some Odd Girl.

 This is going to help you see how to apply this technique to an image.

 I think it comes in digital as well, but this one comes with a really cute sentiment that says,

 You'll be able to see how I used the technique I just showed you applied to an image.

 Today I'm going to teach you how I straighten my hair and I know that it looks like it's

 already completely straight, but there's actually like some little wavy parts, especially at

 See like at the bottom there's a few little pieces that kind of flare out a little bit

 and this part needs to be straightened and I'm actually going to go sing on stage so

 So go ahead and keep watching if you want to watch the rest of the full tutorial and

 if you guys don't want to watch the whole video I have my little steps in the down bar

 Make sure to apply a heat protectant and a leave-in conditioner before applying heat

 You want to focus on applying it to the tips of your hair and wherever you are going to

 Focus on getting as close to the roots as possible and evenly distribute the heat with

 To straighten the back of your hair you can use two mirrors facing each other and look

 directly into them and section off pieces to get an all over straight look.

 To make sure your newly straightened hair lasts all day you're going to want to use

 Alright so here's the finished look and as you can see it kind of looks like my hair

 grew a half inch more because of the little waves that are in there.

 So I know it doesn't seem like it makes a difference but it's a big deal.

 You guys probably know if any of you out there have kind of straight hair.

 My hair is pretty much almost straight but thanks for watching and I'll make more videos

 There's apparently a hurricane coming so we'll see when I make my next video.

 Hello, in this video I'm going to show you how to make Beef Madras.

 some grated ginger, but we don't have any so we're using ground ginger

 So when you're happy the meat's cooked on the outside and sealed in all the flavour

 Now cook that gently for about an hour and a half, stirring regularly.

 My other recommendation for this is use a slow cooker if you have one

 Don't be afraid to add any extra stock into it, stop it from going dry during the cooking

 do it for chemistry, but there's not many things out there to show you how.

 you are using HCL you would prefer to use a gallon sized bag not

 just a small bag because HCL and baking soda creates way more CO2 than

 the egg that clasps to the top and use a knife to cut around the edge, the edge of

 it to make the edge thinner as thin as possible so it's easier to open.

 what you want to do is take the egg and fill it up with vinegar.

 in the egg there really depends on the size of the bag that you're using, but

Next you take the bag, the plastic baggie, and you fill it up with baking

 and then what you're gonna do is take the bag and just drop it.

 Yeah and as it goes the gas will expand and it'll fill up the bag.

 when you're using a bigger bag this will happen way more quickly.

 Now they say most classic cocktails are a balance of the classic DNA, strong and weak,

The drink I'm going to do today is a drink both steeped in history and also rich

This is the classic daiquiri, the archetypal Cuban drink along with the Cuba Libre

It was made most popular in a bar called La Floridita by a bartender called

 Constantino Ribalagua, also known as the king of the cocktail in the Floridita, which was known as

In Spanish it sounds an awful lot better, but not when I say it.

 as I say, it's a classic cocktail that many people have tried to replicate and has now become

 slightly bastardised by the frozen version, but I'll show you the classic, the daiquiri natural,

Now again, it's a straight up drink, so we're going to chill this down.

Now that touches some of the bits of the glass, and if I wanted to do that all afternoon

 to spin it round, it would chill the whole bit of the glass, but I don't have time for that.

 just adding a little bit of liquid, soda water in this case, because it speeds up the chilling process,

 I can just leave it knowing that the ice is chilling the entire bit of the glass.

 really important bits of this drink is not just the fresh lime juice, but some of the oils contained

So what I've done, got a washed lime, just going to roll it a little bit, just to break

 down some of the internal boundaries so it juices a little bit more.

 them out of course, and what we're doing now is we're just breaking down some of the internal cell

 and chop it in half, because we're going to hand squeeze these.

Now this is very much the best way of using fresh lime juice, because with the spinning

 rotary juicer, it rips some of the white pith off, which makes the drink slightly bitter, and also of

 the drink look unpleasant, and also as I say, a little bit more hygienic.

 it with his hands and drop them in, a little bit less hygienic now.

 earlier, dissolves in the whole drink, sweetens the whole drink as well.

 so what I'm going to do is first add lots of ice, then I'm going to shake it as long and as hard as

I'm going to count slowly in my head to ten, while shaking it as

 hard as I can, so the ice mixes, chills, dilutes, and also extracts some of those oils from the

If you've got crushed ice, Constantino actually used to do it with crushed ice.

 cracked or broken ice for this purpose, just so it's a little bit better.

 You see the lovely frost that's formed on the outside of that shaker?

 That point where it stops being frosted, that's where the glass and the steel meet.

 the shaker, hold both bits, and with the heel of your hand, hit in that zone, and it comes apart.

 I'm now going to taste my cocktail, because tasting cocktails, especially when you're balancing them,

 but also with a fine strainer, to get rid of all the tiny flecks and specks and shards of

 ice that could otherwise ruin the flawless perfection of the drink.

 cold, and it's not just the quality of the ingredients, but those essential oils, the zest

 that comes through from the hull of the lime, that gives the drink such a unique, truly Cuban,

 Here with Executive Chef Bruce Woods at Versailles in downtown Toronto.

 Well, Toronto is home and a lot of things have happened in between, but here I am and

 I have the duck prosciutto with a fake balsamic chutney, something that's speedy to put together,

 but I have another dish here, a foie gras with a toasted brioche, a French toast brioche,

 And then lastly, I have a third dish over here, the BC spot prawns, risotto, and oven

 A little salt, white pepper, just enough to bring out the natural flavors.

 Now talk to me about the new renovations at Versailles and how you're taking it.

 It's a completely new direction, I think, for everybody, from the food.

 I think previously the focus was maybe a little bit more bistro.

 Now with the renovations, it's opened up so many different elements.

 I'm just going to add my oven dried cherry tomatoes, a couple of tablespoons of the tomato

 So while this is cooking here, I'm just going to quickly assemble our duck prosciutto.

 I imagine you waking up in the middle of the night, and this is sounding cliche as well,

 but waking up in the middle of the night thinking, yes, this is my next dish.

 I mean, your inspiration can come from anywhere, from around you, from dinners that you've

 had and maybe ways that you could maybe take something in a different direction from books

 I'm generally, I spend a lot of my time on the busier nights, expediting them on the

 I'm going out to the dining room and interacting with the clients.

 Okay, the last dish we're preparing is the pan-seared foie gras with a brioche French

 So I'm just going to start by cutting the foie gras into the pan.

 Pan-seared Quebec foie gras, brioche French toast, sweet potato puree.

 Over here we have the duck prosciutto with the fig balsamic chutney, mascarpone.

 Hey guys, sorry I haven't posted in a couple, yeah a couple weeks.

 But since it's kind of like Halloween time on YouTube, and it's popular for all the gurus to do Halloween tutorials,

 I'm still kind of on like a Disney high from the Mac Venomous Builds collection.

 Recreate, not really recreate, kind of actually create the looks that Mac and Disney intended

 And so yeah, if I have the products from the collection, I'll use it.

 I already put some of this on, sorry, but just right on the apples and kind of blend

 And I really like this blush, it kind of gives like a glow, but it's like, yeah.

 It's like a darker color, so you'd think to use it as a contour, but like applied just

 And then I'm going to take a little bit more of NARS Albatross.

 Just any highlighter, if you don't want to use a highlight, you can not use one.

 But any, if you do use one, I say just like a gold-ish color on top of this, because it'll

 Alright so to start with the eyes, we are going to take, first we're going to prime

 If you have the eyeshadows from this collection, by all means use them.

 If not, you can find dupes, which is what I'm going to do for some of them.

 So I'm going to take my 239, and instead of the Sweet Joy eyeshadow, I'm going to use

 Any kind of pale gold-ish color, and put that all over the lid.

 So next we're going to take, I'm going to use Coppering, if you have DeVille from the

 And at the top, just kind of blend it out, and just kind of blend it in with that highlight

 I actually suggest Carbon for this though, because if you want you can make it really

 intense black, but I kind of like it just a little bit more subtle.

 So just tap it on the outer corner there, and then just do circular motions.

 You can make this as daytime friendly or nighttime friendly as you want.

 So yeah, it's definitely more intense on my other eye than this eye, but that's okay.

 Any black, actually I already put this on, but I'll put more on.

 You can skip that step if you want, but I kind of like the dimension it gives.

 And on the top lash line, we're going to take Graph Black Track.

 I'm already being really messy, but you can make this an intense line if you want.

 And at the end, just kind of place your brush to get the shape and then just connect it.

 And to finish it off, you guys say I never use mascara, and it's not that I don't have

 If you want it more natural, that's fine, but I think Cruella DeVille kind of deserves

 Really simple, smokey, and you can make it as scary or as friendly as you like.

 And the cheeks are kind of different because it's like a darker matte color, but with the

 And to finish off, of course, we're going to take, there she is herself, we're going

 If you want to use a lip pencil, I recommend that, but I don't have a red, so I'm just

 I hope you can recreate this somehow, whether you have the products or not.

 See, you don't really need them because I barely used any of them.

 So tell me what you guys think, and tell me if you think this is a good idea.

 If you want to see the other three villains, let me know down below.

 Or if you have any other ideas for a Halloween tutorial that's possible to do without buying

 synthetic wigs and masks and stuff, just makeup tutorials, if you have a request, I'll see

 My mom has been doing compost forever and she's going to teach us how to assemble a

 This one is done by The Happy Gardener and is made with 100% recycled plastic.

 There is no garbage left over from what you peel, like potato peel, anything, a cucumber,

 leftovers when you cut the cauliflower, whatever is raw or fruits or even wilted flowers, leaves

 that fell from the tree, except cooked foods and dairies and meats, eggs, I don't put anything

 You put the compost, it will become a very rich soil that you're going to mix with your

 original soil, producing a healthy basement for your plants to grow.

 And it's natural and it's healthy and I cannot think anything bad about it, just good things.

 This bin comes in five pieces and it's very simple to assemble because two women can put

 Underneath it is empty, there is no bottom, it will be in contact with the soil.

 What we have here, for instance, the peel of a daikon that we ate for lunch, it's the

 bottom part of the asparagus, peel of garlic and the bottom of the bok choy.

 You can see that we have eaten recently oranges, you can see a coconut there, you can see a

 It does not smell bad because there is no putrefaction, it's just the vegetable, the

 It enters the compost like this, it opens inside, I turn to a right and I pull it off

 This is the soil, this is the healthy earthworm that renovates our forests and fertilizes

 By the way, if your compost is healthy, it means that you are probably eating very healthy.

 Hopefully you start your own composting, transforming all your garbage in rich soil for your own

 It's got a creamy rum fruity top on it with a chocolate topping and a biscuity sort of

 The first thing we're going to do is pop our raisins into a heat proof bowl and top it

 And we're going to pop this into the microwave, just leave it uncovered.

 Now whilst our butter is melting we are going to stir our little raisins and put them on

 for 30 second intervals on medium power in the microwave until they fatten up and absorb

 To a mixing bowl we are going to add our brown sugar and our coconut, desiccated coconut.

 Ok we've preheated our oven to 180 degrees celsius in a fan forced oven.

 We have lined an 18 by 28 centimetre lamington tin with baking paper and now we are going

 to prepare our biscuit base which is first cooked then covered with our topping.

 So we just mix the dry ingredients and add our butter, our melted butter and just combine

 Once it's combined we press it firmly into our lamington tin, our pre-prepared pan and

 Once our biscuit base has absorbed all of that butter it is time to turn it into our

 So either using your fingers, a very flat bottomed glass or a firm spatula or one of

 these little asian type spoons, you have to press this biscuit base firmly into the

 Try and get it as even as possible, it cooks the same all over.

 You are going to have to go into the corners with your fingers because the spoon is too

 Fat and juicy the raisins have become, they have absorbed most of that rum, they are going

 Ok, so we are going to put them aside and now we are going to melt our 225 grams of

 Prepare for one minute at a time until it is completely smooth.

 Add our cream to a microwave safe bowl in with our chocolate and this is going to become

 The residual heat in the cream will soften the chocolate even more.

 Leave it to stand to cool for a little while and then we will stir it again, so it doesn't

 Ok, just to the bowl that we used to make our base, we are going to pop our eggs, give

 them a little whizz around, nothing too serious, just to break up the yolks and incorporate

 Now it's in with our chocolate and cream mixture and incorporate that.

 You don't want to break them up, you just want to have all of the ingredients combined.

 It's not cooked enough yet, but we are going to continue to cook it when we put our topping

 We have to turn the oven down to 160 degrees because we need a slower heat for the remainder

 So we are going to allow it to stand for about 10 minutes before pouring in filling.

 And the rum is just mixing through the cream and the chocolate.

 Give our filling one more stir around and pour it in on top of our base, trying to ensure

 We are going to bake this 160 degrees Celsius for 30 minutes until it's almost set.

 Now we have to let this cool completely before we melt our chocolate.

 We are going to melt our chocolate in the microwave on medium power or half power for

 After about 40 seconds on half power our chocolate is smooth and melted.

 The reason we are doing this is it will give the chocolate a nice gloss and it will also

 stop it from cracking when you bite into it so it doesn't set completely hard.

 This isn't completely cold but it will spread a lot more easily if it's not too cold.

 So as if there isn't enough chocolate in this recipe, here's a bit more.

 We are going to use a thinner blade knife that has been run under hot water.

 I hope you enjoyed this little video demonstration of Cheeky Richo's Rum and Raisin Slice.

 If you'd like to see more interesting recipes and ideas please check out my Cheeky Richo

 channel and don't forget to please subscribe and leave a comment.

 Hello everybody, thank you for watching and welcome back to my channel.

 Have another cooking video ready to go and prepped right behind me and I'm excited to

 I'm going to be featuring organic ground turkey, have a little bit of rotisserie chicken I'm

 just going to mix in as well and I have some organic greens that I think you guys will

 really be able to enjoy, those of you trying to reach those diet goals.

 Also have a few of my sauces I'm going to be putting on top of this to give it that

 So if you're ready to see this organic ground turkey and fresh organic greens meal, please

 I was in the supermarket over the weekend and I saw the grape seed spray oil and it

 actually intrigued me a little so this will be my first time ever using grape seed spray

 It does a lot of great things, it brings the flavor out of the food that you're cooking.

 So this is my organic ground turkey before I add my seasonings and now this is my ground

 I used a steakhouse seasoning, fresh ground black pepper, a little bit of garlic and a

 So I just threw the garlic in there, I'm going to let that cook for about 30 seconds and

 Alright guys, so this is some leftover rotisserie chicken that I had pulled last night.

 I'm going to throw it in with the dish just to add some more meat.

 I know those of you out there are sick of my chicken dishes but it's just for my dinner

 You could do this at home if you want, throw anything else into this, steak, shrimp, chicken,

 Alright now I have some organic greens here, it's baby kale, baby spinach, organic broccoli

 The base for this dish's sauce is a little bit of teriyaki, it has some sesame seed in

 But what I'm going to do is I already added a little bit of water, I'm going to take some

 I'm going to take some of this steakhouse seasoning, I'm going to throw a little bit

 And the last and most important ingredient to my sauce is white chia seed.

 I know you guys have seen a lot of videos of me talking about chia seed, how it's one

 Something that I've incorporated into my diet because of how good and how healthy it

 Alright guys so I'm going to start throwing in some of the greens now.

 And realize once you put these greens under some heat, they're going to shrink once they're

 So I know some of you might see this and look and say it's a crowded pan, but I think we're

 I have my organic ground turkey with a little bit of rotisserie chicken thrown in.

 I spice it to my liking and I also told you that I used a little bit of teriyaki sauce,

 Please leave a comment below on any future cooking videos you guys want to see.

 For another cooking video on my channel guys, my name is Brett Kapp.

 Alright, I had an old 5 horse briggs lawnmower engine lying around.

 It was half buried into the ground and full of water for a few years.

 So I figured I might as well pull it apart and here's what's inside of it.

 I'm going to make it kind of like an antique style with the inverted cylinder.

 But I'm going to cut the back half of the block off and leave the main bearings and the camshaft bearings.

 One will be reversed for intake and the other one will be for the output.

 I'll belt it up to something and hopefully I'll have an air compressor.

 So yeah, I'll make another video of this when I get it all apart.

 So I had to use my no-no tool to get it to turn and then I had to hammer it out.

 But yeah, I had to pull the piston out backwards because I couldn't get it out through the top.

 I'm going to probably soak it for a few days in some degreaser.

 One's the drain and one hooks up to my faucet that I put out here.

 And for the drain, I just have a hole in the bottom of this bucket and it goes into a funnel.

 Instead of having to put a fitting on the bottom, it makes it a lot easier.

 I sawed the crank shafts in half because when I sawed off the top of the oil stump,

 So I just decided to make it a half crank, which makes it look cooler anyways.

 so that I won't have to worry about the connecting rod sliding off.

 Then underneath, I've got an air compressor fitting hammered into it.

 One end is going to be a one-way check valve, and the other one is going to be one-way.

 so it just sucks and then blows and then sucks and blows and etc.

 But for now, I'm going to have it just hooked up to the piston.

 Right now it needs to be propped up, otherwise the hose will kink in the bottom.

 But I'm going to raise it up, and then after that I'm just going to have a metal hose,

 and then I'll just have a little pipe coming up with a regular valve.

 So what I've got here is some 16 gauge wire and it's going to be roughly about 4.5 metres

 And I've also got the one of these for the track feeders which are 22 gauge, black and

 Ok so here's a print out of the layout and what we'll be doing is mounting the power

 cab PCB panel about here somewhere and then the main bus wire will just come out and we're

 just going to roughly follow underneath the tracks and then we'll finish there.

 So here's the power panel mounted already and what I need to do now is drill a series

 of holes in the frame itself and then we'll just run the power around through the holes.

 Alright so all the holes are drilled now and it's simply a matter of just running the wire.

 Now it doesn't have to be exactly underneath the track, this is close enough.

 So it's pretty much used, I had 5 meters of cable and pretty much 5, this is safe.

 So now I'm just going to cut these off at the end and I'll show you how we'll finish

 Now to finish off the wire what I plan to do is just take a bit of the insulation tape

 Ok so that's both of them zip tied in position and it works pretty well to hold it.

 This is the little plug thing they give you from the NCE and if you're using like a 12

 Now you might be wondering which way do I go, red or black, and it doesn't matter.

 As long as your track feeder wires follow the same pattern you'll be fine.

 So there's the bus wire installed as it goes around and ready for track feeders now.

 So I guess that's the end of this video so thanks for watching.

 Today is Tuesday the 13th of October and I'm going to be making whole chicken chicken soup

 I'm starting with a whole chicken, this is about a, oh how much is this weighing?

 Some celery, potatoes, red new potatoes, or little red potatoes, I don't know what they

 Onions, it says to use one onion in the recipe, but I like onions, I like the flavor of onions,

 Some brown rice to serve on the soup, I'm not going to cook that with the soup.

 So the first thing to do is to open the chicken package and put it in the pot, covered with

 So after washing, rinsing the turkey, no it's the chicken, after rinsing the chicken

 thoroughly to get the juices off and throwing away that diaper thing, checking inside to

 make sure there's nothing special hidden in there like giblets or giblets or necks or

 You'll chop your onions into quarters, I've got two so far, and put them in to boil.

 You know it's flu season so you should be generous with the garlic.

 Okay, get all that stirred up and put the lid on it and wait for an hour.

 So once the chicken has started to boil and boil rapidly, give it a stir, make sure it's

 not sticking to the bottom, then reduce the heat to a simmer and let it simmer for an

 But I want to talk about cherries and all the different ways, whoops, that one fell,

 all the different ways you can eat them, but also why you should.

 A superfood is something that when you eat, it's very, very healthy for you.

 This is loaded with some of the most antioxidants, which are anti-inflammatories, which help

 If you don't want to mess with the pit in your mouth, you can just pop it out like that

 Speaking of cherry juice, this is dark cherry juice, one of the healthiest juices that you

 So cherries are surprisingly healthy for you in that aspect, too.

 That's a little breakfast product that people have eaten for years.

 And then after a day of eating cherries and enjoying a superfood, well, the last way after

 We've done meals and pasta and chile rellenos, but today I am going to show you the quickest

 dessert because I am going to make it tonight for dinner and then jump in the shower and

 All you need are two Granny Smith apples that we are going to cut and core out and put into

 eighths, one stick of butter that I am going to melt, one and a half cups of sugar, two

 packages of crescent rolls, and believe it or not, a can of Mountain Dew, 12 ounces.

 Okay, so there are my two apples cut up into eighths, so there's 16 pieces there.

 I've opened one thing of crescent so there's eight, so guess what?

 Okay, now I have wrapped them and I have six against one side of the 9 x 13 dish, I have

 Then I am going to mix the butter that's melted, one and a half cups of sugar, and

 one and a half cans or 12 ounces of the Mountain Dew, and I'm going to pour it on top.

 There's the Mountain Dew, butter, and sugar all mixed and foaming and I'm now going to

 Okay I'm going to put it in the 350 degree oven for 40 minutes.

 I mixed it together and I poured it on top of this and now I'm going to put it in my

 preheated 350 degree oven for 40 minutes and I'm going to go jump in the shower and no

 Now you see it just out of the oven, bubbling and it looks divine.

 We're going to bring it over for dinner and serve it with some ice cream.

 Today I have a request for a recipe for how to make steamed carrots.

 Now you'd think that most people, or maybe you assume that people know how to make steamed

 carrots, but we really can't do that because a lot of people are in different stages of

 We're all learning new things and today we're going to learn how to make some steamed carrots.

 What I'm going to be using is my rice cooker, which works real well for this.

 You just add some water to the reciprocal that's right here that fits down in there.

 The water is filled up to about the half line in this container.

 And then we have our little container that actually holds our carrots.

 If you'd like, you can buy the carrots that come in the single packages that are, I'm

 not sure if they're eight ounces or sixteen ounces, but they're all ready to go.

 You're just going to pop them right into your container here and start steaming them.

 One thing I can say about those, they are a little bit big and they take a little longer

 to cook, so generally even if I have a carrot that's a couple inches long, I'll still slice

 What you want to do is take your peeler, shred off the outside of your carrots, which I've

 Just take your peeler just like this and just start shredding off.

 And I have done that for all of these carrots that I have right here.

 Now what I'll do is just cut them into little pieces and then pop them into my steamer basket.

 So if you're in a rush or you want to hurry up and eat, just make them smaller.

 And once you've got carrots, they have a major source of vitamin A in them.

 There's really no reason to not add carrots to something almost every day.

 It's fairly simple to be able to get enough vitamin A into your diet when you're looking

 You can also use a steam basket if you don't have a rice cooker steamer.

 We're going to steam our carrots for maybe 15, 20 minutes until they are fork tender

 Now we're just going to pop these right into our dish, add some butter and some salt.

 It can really burn the holes in here, so I'm just going to lift this up.

 It really doesn't do you any good to add the butter while they're steaming because all

 the butter is going to obviously melt and go to the bottom of the water.

 You still won't have any butter in your carrots if you want to do it that way.

 You don't want to use just regular sea salt that has just sodium chloride in it.

 This is a small little bowl, so I'm just going to try one of these.

 These are very good, very fresh, and they're a good side dish for just about anything you

 Hopefully you've already checked out the switching between chords video because what we're going

 Now most guitar teachers are kind of like, you know, here's a down strum, here's an up

 So what I like to do is I like to set up a foundation of rhythm with you.

 So basically what we're going to be doing is we're going to be syncing up certain beats

 with down strums and up strums so that we can understand rhythm and understand time

 enough so that when we're switching between our chords we don't end up like pausing, switching

 I don't know if you guys go to any open mics or have ever seen this before but one of the

 most common problems with guitar players, especially beginner guitar players, is when

 they switch between a chord their song goes on stop or it just halts for a moment while

 they switch the chord and then the song resumes kind of like this.

 So with this exercise we'll be able to switch between chords in time.

 If you look at what's in front of you, I know there's a lot of symbols on it and stuff,

 but essentially what those little notes with the bars are are called eighth notes and those

 And what we're going to be doing is we're assigning the down strums to the 1 2 3 4 and

 1 and 2 and 3 and 4 and and you could keep doing that until infinity.

 The rhythm I want you to start with is basically just 1 and 2 and 3.

 We're going to be using this rhythm because it's not complete and it allows us time to

 So remember all those techniques we were using to slide from one chord to the other like

 using the third finger in the D chord to slide into the third finger of the A chord?

 That's the technique I want you to practice here and we're going to apply this rhythm

 Pretty simple and in that time that we have at the end where we're not strumming we're

 What this will allow us to do is switch to the next chord with enough time so we're playing

 In other words you could be playing with the drummer or you could be stomping your foot

 There's no pause of the song it just keeps going but what we've done is created a rhythm

 So I'm going to switch from the D to the A chord one measure each with this 1 and 2

 and 3 rhythm and you notice the second I strum the 3 I'm already going to be switching to

 Don't worry about letting that chord ring out just focus on switching to the next chord

 If you're still having problems with this just try experimenting how quickly you can

 But here's what it's going to sound like when you apply the rhythm to it.

 So you can see the rhythm allows us to have enough time to switch to the next chord.

 Now if that was easy for you I want you to keep adding beats to this rhythm.

 In other words if that was a piece of cake instead of doing 1 and 2 and 3 next time try

 The ideal goal is to be able to switch between the chords without pausing at all.

 Be able to switch between the chords while we play this constant rhythm of 1 and 2 and

 Just really steady through the chords without having to pause at all.

 So that's called the foundation of rhythm exercise and I recommend you practice this

 Yep, and take one end in one hand yep, and the other end in the other hand

 Give a little tug and make sure it's not going to come up okay now separate all five loops

 Your left hand and take the other two and put on your first and second finger

 You're gonna take the top string that has three in it, and you're gonna transfer it

 the yellow whichever color yep is on top and transfer it to the third finger on your other hand and

 Then on the hand that you just left a lot lost a string you're gonna move those two strings up

 Every time you do this you want to make sure that you pull the strings apart.

 So she's taking the top to the bottom move up move up top to the bottom

 Like that pulling it tight on onto itself makes the knot tighter it's gonna make sure you don't lose your

 So you can take off your tape and you have a friendship bracelet

 It's J-Wro here on the J-Wro Shiz-O, and you may have noticed in the world

 that jackfruit tacos have become all the rage in the past, I don't know, 24

 Even at non-vegan restaurants, they've got the jackfruit tacos.

 With all the vegan chefs in restaurants doing the jackfruit thing, I figured I

 So today I'm going to be doing an organic jackfruit taco recipe.

 Turn it over a medium high heat, and once this heats up, what I want you to do is

 add one yellow onion that's been finely diced, and one tablespoon of finely

 Once this comes to heat, I want you to saute this just until the onions and

 At this point, you want to add the jackfruit strips, 16 ounces, going in

 Go ahead and just flip the mixture of the onions and the jackfruit together

 Then we're going to add a touch of sweetness with two tablespoons of grade B

 Now we have our spice mixture, so we are going to start with our cumin here,

 Then we're going to do a half teaspoon of ground coriander, a full teaspoon of

 smoky chili powder, a quarter teaspoon of ground cinnamon, and a little shot

 Now give it another quick stir just to make sure all the spices are in there.

 Now for extra minerals in this recipe, I'm going to be adding a capful of Sun

 Warrior's liquid vitamin mineral rush, which is full of essential trace

 Now this last ingredient may shock you slightly because I rarely use it, but

 This is just getting to a rolling boil, so what you want to do is reduce it

 to a medium-low heat, and once all the liquid is absorbed, about 75% or so

 Let's give this a chance to do its thing, and I'll see you guys in just a few

 After about 25 minutes on medium heat, most of the liquid is going to be fully

 A nice, large, healthy pinch of salt, and a little shake of fresh ground

 All right, now take it off heat, and what I want you to do is take your

 In this case, I'm just going to be going old school with some blue corn taco

 Top it with a little bit of fresh salsa, a little bit of guacamole too, and a

 Maybe the meat eater in your family who doesn't know how to get off regular

 tacos, this is a really cool and unusual option to share with them.

 If you loved my jackfruit tacos recipe, give this video a thumbs up, and leave

 What's some cool way you love to incorporate tropical fruit into your

 So guys, this is Jason Robel here on The J-Wro Show, bringing you delicious

 vegan recipes and vibrant living tips, like the jackfruit tacos.

 Be sure to subscribe here to The J-Wro Show for weekly vegan recipes and

 I'm also rocking out with the Sun Warrior Tribe, so be sure to subscribe to their

 channel as well for great workout tips and lifestyle transformation

 I'm going to make some more of these tacos and post a great pic on Instagram.

 The best of love and health and life to you, and I will catch you guys soon on

 Wouldn't that be crazy if jackfruit tacos became the common thing?

 When I get my carrots, I peel them and put them in a bag immediately.

 they've always been one of my favorites ever since I was a kid.

 I mean you push it down in there so you don't have much air in there.

 Before you start eating them, about 10 or 15 minutes you do this

 I put a little bit of pepper and cucumber which I stock in with my carrots.

 So these are just things I can munch on when I want to or if dad wants a salad.

 I usually do that before I even eat my salad just to get it cleaned up.

 Once this is a thing I just take one of these and pluck them out and plunge them into cold water.

 This way if I just want a little handful I can just reach in and pick out

I'm going to put these in the freezer for a couple hours just so they firm up.

I just took my asparagus out and I'm getting ready to put it into a Ziploc bag.

 They're all frozen but they're mostly frozen in individual spears.

 So it'll be easier if I just want to take a little handful out to cook.

 I can get them out of the Ziploc bag easier instead of one big asparagus ice cube.

 They're wholesale by Borden Hairline Dubbin and what is it Montana Fly Company.

 Let me switch over to yellow background here so you can maybe make it out a little bit

 Now also going to have to plug in one heat gun for the next segment because I want the

 It is possible with foam and hot hot melt to make flies that you don't have to tie.

 As you can see right here in the center they are made so that you can tie them on there

 You can get enough in there to make it at one time or you can add two wings.

 You could take, put them in at a 45 degree angle this way and that way.

 Now in reality a dragonfly's front wings are splayed out just a little bit forward.

 Many plastics actually you get the air out of them and they kind of help suspend themselves

 These here Pearl Curl Dragonfly wings actually if they're underwater like most dragonfly

 wings get, especially if they flutter once or twice when they're dying, give a lot of

 So pretty much I'm just like most things in this video giving you some of the ideas

 Later on on new NEW-FLYs I hope to have a whole bunch of patterns available that are

 If you wanted to you could add a little thread back there also.

 Sarah from Average Betty here and I'm making roasted potato gumbo.

 I'm no expert on Louisiana cuisine, but I do know the key to a good gumbo is the roux.

 The color, the consistency, and of course you can't burn the roux.

 Look at it this way, if you don't get the roux right, you're going to roux in your gumbo.

 The good news is, making a great roux is a lot more roudimentary than it sounds.

 I've got a big pot here over medium heat and this is andouille sausage.

 As the sausage starts to brown, add onion, celery, carrots, and sweet peppers.

 Get that good and combined and you'll notice the moisture from the vegetables is helping

 get all those little caramelized sausage bits off the bottom of the pan.

 When the sausage is browned and the vegetables are tender, remove all of this from the pot.

 Roux is just fancy talk, or French, for the thickening agent created by cooking fat and

 Unlike the delicate golden color of a roux for a bechamel, the roux for a gumbo should

 be anywhere from a deep peanut butter color to chocolate colored.

 That's the rich, deep golden peanut butter shade I want for this gumbo.

 Some all-purpose Cajun seasoning, which already has salt in it.

 About midway, I add some minced garlic, cayenne pepper, and smoked paprika.

 Allow this to simmer, covered, and now for the best part, the potatoes!

 I'm going to leave the skin on and chop into uniform sized pieces.

 Get that good and combined, and here's a baking sheet I've lined with foil.

 Arrange the potatoes in a single layer on the baking sheet and bake in a preheated oven.

 Here are my piping hot Cajun spiced roasted Idaho gold potatoes.

 And a heaping spoonful of my andouille sausage and chicken gumbo.

 With a little patience, you'll get a perfect roux, a mouthwatering gumbo, and friends and

Today I'm back with another tutorial and this is inspired by Korean high school girls of Janglook.

 It is really fresh and I feel like it's very wearable for daily basis with a pop of color on the lips.

 And this tutorial is a collaboration tutorial with one of my friends here on YouTube, her name is Haruka.

 She did the Japanese school girl look, so don't forget to check out her version of it.

 To make it more fun, I'm gonna show you guys all the makeup that I'm using in one makeup bag.

 So these are very affordable, travel friendly, and definitely school appropriate.

 So the first thing I'm gonna take out is a sample of My It's Kim Jelly BB Cream.

 I love carrying sample size BB cream mainly because they don't take so much space in my makeup bag.

 Taking the same BB cream, I'm just going to dab it lightly on my under eye area to conceal my dark circle.

 And now to set my BB cream, I'm gonna take this My It's Kim Micro Finish Pack and just dab it on my face.

 This powder literally has the finest particles, like you can't even feel like you're applying powder on your face.

 It does really great job on mattifying and that's why I really like it.

 It just feels light, you don't really feel like you're wearing powder on your face.

 So really highly recommend and definitely check this powder out.

 On to eyebrows, I'm gonna take my Urban Decay Naked Basics in color Faint.

 I've been really into like filling out my eyebrows with dark brown eyeshadow mainly because they look a lot more natural.

 And using a brow pencil can be a little hassle because some days one brow is going to be thicker than the other one

So that's why I've been sticking to shadows and they look really natural.

 Now to line my eyes, I'm gonna take this Maybelline New York Gel Liner in color Brown.

 And to create that all-time puppy eye look, I'm going to start from my outer V.

 Slowly gonna work my way in and I'm just going to highlight them.

 And now going back to the line I created earlier, I'm just going to extend them slightly further down to create that puppy eye look.

 And then taking the same dark brown eyeshadow that I used earlier, I'm gonna connect the line with my lower outer V.

 And this is going to give an illusion of that big guy, odd-sum look.

 Don't forget to smudge out the lower edges so that the look won't look too intense or sharp.

 Taking the white shimmery color Venus from the Urban Decay Naked Basics,

 I'm going to apply that on my eye bags and this is going to make the look more awake and sweet.

 Now going back to that brown color eyeshadow in color Faint from the Urban Decay Naked Basics,

 I'm going to create that age-yousal eyes and just slightly line them underneath my eye bags.

 And this will give you guys that innocent, young, and youthful high school girls look.

 Next, I'm just going to take my favorite volumizing mascara from Maybelline and it's the Rocket Mascara.

 The one that I have here is the non-waterproof one and I still love it because it holds curls really well,

 Before applying lip concealer, I'm just going to moisturize my lips with this Lucas Papaw Ointment.

 To create that ulzzang gradient lips, I'm going to take this Pro Beauty Lip Concealer from Halika Halika

 This will give a nice base to the lip tint color that we'll apply later.

 Okay, last but not least is my current favorite lip tint from Halika Halika and it's the Pro Beauty Bloody Tint.

 I noticed a lot of Korean high school girls and ulzzangs are still into this fresh gradient red lips,

 so I'm just going to follow that by starting from the center of my lips and then blending it out

 And don't forget to check out my friend Haruka's version on the Japanese high school girls look.

 I was working on a project, I was rebuilding, refurbishing, cleaning up, whatever you want

 Some calipers, you can see there's some there, and for one of them, I kind of screwed up.

 Everything was going well, I tried to take the bleeder screw out, and look at that.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to weld a nut and a washer on it, just like this.

 So you saw I put the washer on there, and weld that on there, like that.

 Okay, so as you can tell, I made it to the doghouse with my caliper.

 So now I've already borrowed one of his tools, a grinder, and cleaned it up a little bit.

 I'm going to attempt to smooth that down a little bit more now.

 Alright, well I just smoothed it back out so I can try to make sure I got a better weld,

 Couldn't find my other glove of the dirty pair that I always used.

 I'm used to, you know, you don't have to clean anything, you just go.

 Put the fingers together and grasp it, and pick it up with your hands.

 Now, who knows, I'm going to go back home and drill it out, do something.

 Very simple ingredients, just rice flour, tapioca flour, and water.

 And that's a sticky rice pot with cheesecloth, Thai cheesecloth stretched over it.

 There's two layers of cheesecloth stretched across that, tied firmly across the pot,

 Actually, she's adding one cup of tapioca flour to two cups of rice flour.

 We sell excellent quality rice flour and tapioca flour imported from Thailand at importfood.com.

 This is something that people have asked over the years how to make, and we're happy to

 And then she's also going to put vegetable oil on the top of the noodles.

 That's also the exact same burner that we sell at importfood.com, although you can do

 She's going to spoon it gently onto the cheesecloth, spread it out, and only two minutes later

 That is the lid that comes on the stacked steamer that we sell at importfood.com as

 That's vegetable oil that she's just put on top of the rice noodle.

 There is the stack of noodle sheets and the knife that she's going to use to cut them.

 They don't stick together because there's a little bit of vegetable oil in between them.

 If you keep watching or if you look to the right of your screen or to the related videos,

 we used the same rice noodles to make a pad see ew, which was just delicious.

 A lot of people would just use the dried rice stick noodles and cook them, soak them.

 Many people want to know how to do this from scratch and here you go.

 We have all of the equipment, the cheese cloth and the sticky rice pod and the cooker, the

 flours, everything you'd need to make this or you might already have that at home.

 Now you can turn your flours into excellent tasting fresh noodles and fry them up using

 We have an entire street vendor video series at importfood.com and we appreciate any feedback.

In this tutorial, I'm going to be going over Morticia Adams, which I wasn't originally planning on doing, but you guys super highly requested it after I posted Wednesday.

 I also know that a question I got in the Wednesday tutorial was where did you get your wig?

I've got some oil in it, a little bit of hairspray, and just overall styled it.

 As always, all the products in this video are listed somewhere around the video.

Don't forget to go to Facebook and check out my page, Madeyoolookbylex, and like it.

If you have any questions, comments, or concerns, feel free to contact me.

 As always, I'm starting out by applying Urban Decay Primer Potion to my eyelids.

I'm then using the Madeyoolook angled brush in Black Eyeshadow just to fill in my eyebrows black.

 For my eyes, I'm then using the Madeyoolook blending brush and applying White Eyeshadow from BH Cosmetics underneath my brow bone, on my lid, and pretty much all over my eye.

 I'm then using my second brush trick, which I haven't shown you guys in a long time.

 I'm using the second brush for a clean cat eye edge instead of sticking tape to my face and pulling at the skin near my eye.

 I'm then applying Light Grey BH Cosmetics Eyeshadow to my crease and going directly over that with White Eyeshadow, not only to lighten it up, but also to help blend it out.

 And then, a very special liquid eyeliner that has not been released yet.

 I personally always like to smudge out my waterline so that way when it moves during the day, you're not really going to notice it that much.

 I'm then taking the Made You Look Eyeshadow Brush and a smidgen of Black Eyeshadow from BH Cosmetics and just adding it only in the corner of my eyes.

 If you want a little bit of a cleaner edge, you can also go back in with concealer that's a smidge lighter than your skin tone.

 This step is completely optional, but I'm just adding my liquid eyeliner to my eyebrows to define them a bit more.

 Because Morticia is so pale and has contouring, I'm then adding High Beam to the high points of my cheekbones.

 Now as you guys know, my water-based paints are water-based and they are activated with water.

 So when you don't spray water on them, they're kind of not really there.

 I don't know how else to explain it, but if you work with it a little bit, you can get a nice light color underneath your cheekbones.

 I'm also using the contour brush as well as Too Faced Bronzer just to give it a little bit of extra contouring.

 I'm then going back over the high points of my cheekbones with the lighter concealer that I showed you guys earlier just to make my face more pale.

 For my contouring on my nose, I'm once again using Body Paint with no water.

 Also fill those babies in and then use the Madeyewlook Lip Brush to blend out your lip liner.

 Hello everyone and welcome once again to the Yorkville Physiotherapy offices here at Bay

 And today we are going to talk briefly about something I've been doing with a few folks

 this week, people who have had previous knee injuries and have some remaining stiffness

 And the way that you might notice this type of problem manifesting is if say you're trying

 to do a deep squat and you feel like at the bottom of range your knee just doesn't want

 That might manifest in terms of pain, in terms of just lack of ability to get your hips down

 low below the knees, or even possibly a noticeable weight shift from the affected side onto the

 As you go down, you sort of shift onto the one side because you just can't get the bend

 And this should, make sure that it's actually due to just genuine joint stiffness and not

 Sometimes meniscus tears can limit range of motion through the knee.

 So those are things you might want to have ruled out if you're worried about a potential

 But in the case of genuine joint stiffness, there's a really great self-mobilization you

 You're going to bring your knee into as much flexion as it can.

 Then you're going to rotate in just a little bit with your foot.

 And that's because that rotating of the lower leg bone in will mimic the natural joint motion

 Just that, at the end of range, you have that little bit of an in twist.

 So give yourself just a little bit of a foot in rotation, maybe 30 degrees, something like

 And then back again to the end of range, in twist, 30 degrees, pulse.

 You should feel like you have more range, like you're less inclined to weight shift

 If, after two sets, you don't notice an improvement, that's a good indication to have your knee

 But in the case of genuine knee stiffness, this is a good mobilization that you can do

 Scott Lewis here for Wirefly, here today to show you an unboxing video of the T-Mobile

 For today's unboxing video, I chose the red version of the T-Mobile My Touch.

 Let's go ahead and dig into the box and see what the red T-Mobile My Touch looks like.

 Now, my first impression of the T-Mobile My Touch as I look inside the box here is that

 it's almost a brown shade of red or a burgundy kind of red, not a very bright and vibrant

 Inside our case here, we have our new SIM card and user's manuals, our battery which

 Our micro USB sync and charge cable, pretty standard nowadays with Android smartphones.

 Our micro USB charging block, once again kind of standard with our Android smartphones nowadays

 Let's go ahead and set the box aside and let's take a closer look at the T-Mobile My Touch.

 Like I said, now that I look at it, now here it's almost like a plum color more than a

 The battery is a 1500 milliamp hour battery that Huawei says will last 7.5 days on standby.

 It does have a spot for a SIM card because it is a T-Mobile phone.

 We have our micro SD card slot, can't accept up to a 32 gigabyte micro SD card.

 The rear camera has basic features like auto focus and geo tagging.

 The T-Mobile My Touch is sporting a 1.4 gigahertz single core processor along with 1 gigabyte

 It does have 4 gigabytes of internal storage built in plus the SD card slot underneath

 As we can see, our navigation keys are right here at the bottom.

 We have our volume up and down rocker switch, our 3.5 millimeter headphone jack, our power

 A dedicated camera shutter button as well as our micro USB charge port.

 The display on the T-Mobile My Touch has resolution of 480 by 800 and it is a 4-inch diagonal

 The My Touch is running Android 2.3 as far as an operating software.

 I'm going to go ahead and turn the camera off now while I go ahead and set that up and

 then I'll show you what the experience is like on the new T-Mobile My Touch by Huawei.

 This is our T-Mobile My Touch by Huawei and it has the Android 2.3 operating system that's

 It has the standard 5 home screens that you can put applications and games as well as

 widgets on to customize the T-Mobile My Touch to fit how you'd like it to look.

 We'll have a full review of the T-Mobile My Touch coming up in a few days where we'll

 get really in depth on the Android 2.3 operating system and some of the different features

 If you have any questions about the T-Mobile My Touch, make sure to leave them here on

 If there's anything specific you'd like us to cover in the full review of the T-Mobile

 As always, if you want to stay up to date with the latest and greatest in the world

 of cell phones, make sure to subscribe to our Wirefly YouTube channel.

 The next step in this restoration will be to de-rust all of the steel parts.

 To do this I'm going to use an electrolysis method that I found online.

 For this I need a 5 gallon bucket, rebar concrete reinforcement rod to act as the electrodes,

 arm and hammer, washing soda, and that's different from baking soda, it works completely

 A 6 amp car battery charger, which is the minimum recommended, worked perfectly fine

 I'm using thick piano wire that I picked up from the hobby shop.

 For the electrolyte mixture I'll be using just over a half cup of the washing soda.

 I'll pour that into the bucket first, before the water, so then as I fill the bucket the

 As you can see there are some particles floating around in there, that's from the last time

 But filling it with water after putting in the washing soda helped it to mix thoroughly

 For the wiring, both electrodes in the bucket are tied together.

 And those are connected to the positive connector from the car battery charger, and then the

 The first part I'm going to clean will be one of these window frames here.

 Before I connect it, I'm just going to clean out the contact point with a file a little bit.

 And then I have this piece of piano wire here, which I've formed as a hanger.

 And this will go right into the bucket between the two electrodes.

 Once that's hanging in the bucket, make sure it's right between the two electrodes,

 because that's apparently the best point for the process to work.

 Alright, the charger is plugged in now, and the process is working.

 That's the reaction happening, and that will eventually cause the rust to float up to the top.

 Right now it's at about 3, and that will fluctuate a little bit over time.

 I would recommend leaving it in the bucket for about an hour before it's taken out and cleaned.

 And I can see all sorts of gunk floating on the top of the water, so I should be able to take it out now.

 While the part is still wet, I'm going to go ahead and give it a quick cleaning with some soap and water.

 The last thing that needs to be done is to take off whatever rust and rust particles are left on the metal.

 But for anything that needs something smaller, I've got this slightly smaller steel wire wheel that can fit in there.

 Alright, just a few minutes with the wire wheel and this thing is rust free.

 Without the electrolysis, that would have taken about 10 times longer using only a wire

 For really small parts like these, which are also rusty, it's actually easier to just go

 ahead and skip the electrolysis and go straight to the wire wheel because there's not much

 All this thing needs now is to be straightened out just a little bit.

 For that I'm using this steel weight that came out of an old River Rossi steam engine.

 It's just one of those little extra things that should be done to make it look as good

 That little gap there between the top and bottom should be about 3 sixteenths of an

 And if there are any pits that need to be filled, holes that need to be filled, then

So a while ago a reader of mine actually requested that I do a contouring

 product you have to use to sculpt your nose or even for your cheeks in fact, but I didn't

 eyeshadow but the reason why I didn't want to do it is because this eyeshadow was a little

 dark for my skin tone and I found out that it took much more work and I wasn't as good

But when I switched to this, I could really do it much better and I thought that

 kit has a bronzer with a much brighter undertone so this one is much better for me.

 just contoured it just now and this is actually the second time I'm filming this because my

 sweep it from the start of your brows, curving a little here and straight down.

I'm doing it a little darker so that you guys can see it in front of my

Also because it's a little darker so that you guys can see the intensity of

 it better and the difference between a contoured and a non-contoured nose.

You will most definitely want to do this under natural sunlight if possible because

Just do the same on the other side and try your best to balance out the colours

 shade, grab some on my fingertip and just dab it down like this.

 prefer a more luminescent, more glowy, slightly shimmery highlight, what I like to use is

 actually not a highlighter but this colour from Majolica Majorca's Jewelling Eye Palette.

 powder onto a brush, a clean blending brush, and then just blend away all the harsh lines

 more natural but it will definitely be something that gets better with practice.

So yeah, subscribe if you guys like this video and I will hopefully

 be coming out with more videos more regularly and I will definitely love to see you guys

 Dust the work surface with a little icing sugar to stop it sticking.

 Then shape a ball and then into a rounded cone with a lump of coloured roll-out icing.

 This building up of a character is very useful for all sorts of other animals and indeed

 For the legs, roll out a second piece of icing, cut in two, then trim the ends.

 To make the feet, roll out two ball shapes, flatten them slightly,

 For the head, roll another ball and then shape it to make a muzzle.

 Roll two tiny pieces of white icing to make the eyeballs and stick them in place.

 Roll two small pieces for the ears, then shape them again using the handle of the brush.

 Dampen the head with a little water and stick the ears in place.

 Add a little fur with a shaping tool or the fork and smooth the joins onto the head, again

 Add two tiny little brown pupils, then roll another piece of the brown to make the nose.

 Shape it a little, dampen the place where it's to go and stick it in position.

 Dampen the top of the cake with a little water and put the body in position.

 Roll out two pieces for the arms, flatten them a little, then mark with fur using the

 Stick them onto the teddy's body, making sure that the weight of the arms is resting on the legs.

 Lastly, to add the bow, roll out a small piece of white icing, cut two strips,

 shape the ends of one strip to make the tails of the bow and cut it in half.

 Dampen the centre of the other strip and bring the ends to the middle, sticking them down.

 Push up the sides of the bow a little bit, then squeeze in the centre to make it smaller.

 Dampen the centre and add a tiny piece of icing to make the knot.

 And an easy way of decorating the sides of the cake, pipe tiny amounts of white royal

 We've used gold ribbon and gold balls but you could use any other colour and match the

 Everything we've used in this video can be ordered worldwide from my website, janeasher.com.

 Alright, so we got a piece of cast iron here and we got this cutting lubricant jammed in

 I really like to use this lubricant because it stays in there until it melts.

 As it generates heat, it then melts and goes into the cutting area.

 We're drilling into cast iron with a regular hand drill and just put a one inch hole in

 Right below the description box right here is a red subscribe button.

 Subscribe to me and then you're going to get the latest and greatest information that I

 You know, it's just going to at least let you know that we're putting out new and current

 Help this video rank higher in the searches for the search terms that you're using and

 I will get back with you if I can and try and help you answer your questions.

 But the more you interact and post this to Facebook, Twitter, Google Plus and spread

 this through the social media, the more that allows me to be able to help do more videos.

And this is the first episode of Cooking with Sarah, so I thought what better way to start out cooking, to start out this lovely cooking show with pizza!

So, I don't have all the proper tools yet, like my oven isn't where it should be, it's over there, I'm not going to show you it.

So, what you need is one cup of flour, and since I don't have all my supplies yet, and I don't have like a cup this size,

 so I'm just going to be making, I'm just going to be, just do a little, like two cups of flour, so I'm just going to be doing like a pinch or something.

You're probably wondering why my hands are so clean, it's because I just rinsed them off.

 Okay, so you're supposed, you're like really supposed to use, um, you're supposed to use like a pinch of salt, but the person on my TV said it tasted like salt and you shouldn't use the salt, so I'm not going to use salt.

 She said you have to use a whole cup, so I'm not going to do that, but I am.

I, um, once do warm water, but I couldn't find any because you're supposed to use warm water, but our warm water isn't working for some reason, so I'm just going to get my warm water.

 But, um, so I still have some left in my bowl, which is a squeegee container, and I'm just going to spread some tomato sauce over it, or pizza sauce.

So, um, now it's like that, and now I'm going to add the cheese.

You can always add toppings when you want, so let me go get the cheese.

You could always put the toppings in then, because they're going to be cooked into the pizza, but I always like to put them in after, and I don't like toppings in mine.

 I just want to have it plain, so I'm just going to pick it up and put it in the oven.

That's probably going to be hard, so I'm just going to try and put it in the oven.

It could be just for your little scratch-out, but when you're done with it, it is safe to eat.

I'm not sure how good my tomato sauce is, because it was from the refrigerator, but it tasted fine when I licked it.

 We decided to get a soda stream machine, and I am just one of those people who crave fizzy drinks

 I've got to have something you know fizzy, but I don't like the sweet soda, so I'm always buying

 You know soda water, and so this is great for me, and we're gonna save a lot of money, too

 And this is a little simple syrup that I make so I have a little bit of sweet and flavor in there

 And I'll take a cup of sugar and if that the sugar doesn't make it real sweet

 And I dissolve that down to make my syrup and while that's dissolving.

 And I'm gonna add this juice and the seeds and all and then after that

 I'll add a cup of raspberries and these are frozen raspberries, but you can certainly use fresh if you like fresh

 To get out all the pulp and the seeds and I'll take my whisk and make sure I get all the juice out and

 Clear syrup that has a lot of flavor and I'm gonna bottle that up into a little canning jar

 I'll fill up with my soda water and it's just wonderful and thanks so much for watching

 Really quick little lesson for beginners on fun things you can do with the D chord, the

 Now, if you're not familiar with it already, I hope you are, but basically that's the D

 string, the fourth string, your index finger on the second fret, third string, your ring

 finger on the third fret, second string, and your middle finger right there on the

 Check out my other video on some of the chord fingerings if you're not familiar with that

 Anyways, basically you can forget completely about the bottom two strings here, the E and

 We're only talking about D today, and that means those four strings only.

 So very briefly, one of the things you can do is take your middle finger off.

 Or you can add your pinky finger at the third fret on the first string.

 Now, one thing if you've got really flexible fingers is you can stretch up and hit the

 Sometimes what I like doing is just dropping my middle finger out of the equation entirely

 So you're changing your middle finger to go where your ring finger was before.

 It's a fun little thing you can do with the D, and then you can throw that in pretty much

 anywhere you play a D and you've got a little bit of room to play with, right?

 So have fun with that, and we'll see you next time over at GuitarTipsWeekly.com.

 I'm going to show you all the different ways to cut and slice pears.

 You'll also find danjus and several other different types of pears in your market.

 What we want to do is peel off starting from the top working down so we keep that nice

 We're going to cut right down through the middle from the back to the stem just like

 We're going to cut out the little stem end down here or the little blossom end.

 Then we take just a little melon baller, a little round melon baller.

 And then to chop it, we're going to do that by putting these together.

 If you want those to finer chopped, just do them on the board with a knife.

 Again, using my fingers, my knuckles as a guide, I'm keeping my fingernails behind my knuckle.

 Or if you're making, for instance, a pear tart and you want to maintain the shape of the pear,

 And after we've sliced it that direction, then we're going to take it again

 Now we've got our pear cut into strips the length of the pear and a quarter of an inch square.

 Hi guys, in this video I'm going to be showing you guys how to take just about any hair type

 First you're going to want to section your hair off into 4 sections so that it's easy

 It's very important that you create your style with freshly cleaned and well conditioned

 I'm starting out with the Cleanseen Plus Grove Lathering Hair Bath then following up with

 So if you're anything like me and suffering from winter dryness or overworked hair, you're

 I'm using Entwine Couture's Exotica Deep Penetrating Moisture Mask.

 This super thick conditioner contains passion fruit oil as well as Tacoma butter which instantly

 softens and restores dry hair providing 67% more moisture than shea butter alone.

 I like to sit under a steamer for about 20 minutes to get an even deeper penetration

 After rinsing out my moisture mask, I'm going to seal and lock in the moisture on wet hair

 by using my 100% Raw and Vegan Argan Oil and the Exotic Buttercream Hydrator for long lasting

 To achieve my defined curls, I'm taking small to medium portions of hair and placing a little

 I also recommend using a detangling brush to insinuate your curls, following up by a

 I have approximately 24 twists in my hair and I'm going to allow these babies to dry

 So I made it through the night and this is what my hair looks like once it's completely

 Use a little bit of your 100% Raw and Vegan Argan Oil and apply it to your hands and begin

 Gently separate each twist by twirling the hair in the direction the curl is falling

 So I'm going to use my Afro Pick and gently pick up my roots as well as use my fingertips

 I'm going to go ahead and use Jumbo Bobby pins and gently swoop my hair on the side

 and pin my hair into style making sure everything is nicely in place.

 Do the same for the other side making sure you swoop the hair gently and pin it in place.

 As you guys can see, my hair is full of all kinds of texture, curls, coils, definition,

 My hair also feels extremely moisturized to touch and very soft.

 All the information regarding the products will be listed down below.

 Let me know what you guys think and I'll catch you guys in the next video.

 Hey everybody, I'm Tyler Cook, Executive Chef, 33 Steaks, Booze, and Jazz.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make one of my staples, the Steak Oscar.

 Jennifer, all the way back there in Missouri, big shout out, happy birthday, all the way

 I know you're back there in the rear with the gear, but hey, we got your back.

 We're going to show you how to make a Steak Oscar for your birthday all by yourself.

 Okay guys, the first step to making an amazing Steak Oscar is the beurre nais sauce.

 The beurre nais sauce is a Hollandaise, but we add some tarragon that's been reduced in

 We're going to take some shallots that are diced up, and we're going to put them in our

 We're going to pour a little bit of nice, dry chardonnay over the top, and then we're

 This is going to actually help you cook your eggs when you're making your Hollandaise sauce.

 All right, now that our tarragon is reducing with our white wine, we need to separate some

 We're going to use three egg yolks because we're only making this dinner for two.

 Roll that egg gently between your fingers and let all those whites fall away.

 Now that we have our eggs separated, we need to get a little bit of that white wine reduction.

 That wine and tarragon that was simmering on your stove, just take that and reserve

 Now, you're going to need those later, so don't throw them away.

 Now, we're going to go ahead and finish up our Hollandaise sauce.

 Then we're going to take a little bit of that white wine reduction that we made.

 The idea behind a good Hollandaise is when you blow on it, it'll hold it.

 All right, so remove your Hollandaise from the heat because you don't want it to break.

 We're going to add the tarragon and shallots in a little bit, but right now, let's go cook

 We've got a nice, beautiful, well-marbled, eight-ounce filet mignon.

 We actually make our own salt around here, but kosher salt will work, too.

 Three and a half minutes a side will get you between medium-rare and medium, which is where

 If you want it a little more done, push it to 10 to 12 minutes.

 If you're not a communist and you want it medium-rare, like all red-blooded Americans,

 Now that we've quartered our steak, which means we're about a third of the way cooking

 Grilled asparagus is key to a steak Oscar, but it cooks a lot faster.

 Now, remember, don't leave it on there too long or you'll have burnt asparagus.

 Burnt asparagus is not as good as grilled asparagus because it's burnt.

 Now we're going to finish our sauce because our steak's about ready.

 Now be careful with the salt because if you didn't use the clarified butter or unsalted

 The reduced herbs from our white wine reduction, go ahead and put that in there with the shallot.

 We got Bearnaise sauce, almost like we knew what we were doing.

 Then take your steak, hopefully medium rare, place it across the asparagus.

 Then we're going to put that Bearnaise sauce right all over that steak.

 Hey everybody, now that we've showed you how to make that amazing steak Oscar, we're going

 Sazerac was actually invented around 1820, 1830 in New Orleans.

 It was basically when they decided that straight whiskey doesn't taste good.

 Mictors is actually one of the oldest distilleries in the country.

 So now that we have all that mixed together, we're going to go ahead and rim our cocktail

 And for fun, just because how we do it down here at 33, we're going to add a little fire.

 Now Lisa's going to go ahead and pour our mixed cocktail over our flaming sugar.

 It's an amazing cocktail, especially after three or four of them.

 In this video you will learn how to use a serological pipette in a variety of pipette pumps.

 Serological pipettes are a type of graduated pipette commonly used to measure volumes over 1 mL.

 Serological pipettes have two scales, one for filling and on the other side one for dispensing.

 They often have a cotton plug in one end to prevent contaminants from being drawn into the vacuum source.

 Serological pipettes are used with three main types of pipette pumps.

 And an E or exhaust valve to empty any liquid remaining in the pipette tip.

 To use a trivalve pump, attach the pump to a serological pipette by twisting the top of the pipette into the bottom of the bulb.

 To fill the pipette, gently squeeze the bulb to release air through the one-way air valve.

 Next, place the tip of the pipette into the solution you wish to transfer.

 Now gently press on the S or suction valve located directly below the bulb until the pipette is filled just above the desired volume.

 Then gently squeeze on the E or exhaust valve until the bottom of the meniscus touches the desired graduated line.

 Move to the target container you wish to transfer the sample into.

 Any remaining solution can be blown out by holding the S valve and squeezing the bulb at the same time.

 The parts of this pump include a gasket that attaches to the pipette,

 a dial which is used to adjust the amount of solution transferred,

 and the plunger which is used to blow out any remaining solution.

 Insert the pipette into the gasket by pressing and twisting firmly.

 The dial can be moved up and down to get the exact amount of solution needed.

 Press on the exhaust valve to transfer the contents of the pipette.

 When finished, any remaining solution can be blown out by pressing down on the plunger with your thumb.

 The parts of an electronic pipette pump include the gasket that connects to the pipette,

 a filter that prevents any contaminants from getting into the pump,

 Attach a pipette to the pump by firmly pushing and twisting it into the gasket.

 Slowly press on the suction button and fill to the level you wish to transfer.

 The suction and exhaust buttons can be used to obtain the exact volume you wish to transfer.

 Slowly press on the exhaust button until all of the solution has been transferred.

 For today's how-to segment, we're going to learn how to make variegated yarns for sock knitting.

 To get us started, we're going to use this handy kit, which has your dye applicators, your dyes for dyeing wool,

 a little bit of wool wash, and all the yarn you'll need to make a pair of socks.

 Additionally, you're also going to need a bowl for soaking your yarn,

 some plastic wrap to protect the work surface and wrap the yarn, some paper towels handy,

 A glass container to mix your dyes in a stirrer, some boiling water, and a microwave.

To get started, we've soaked our yarn in hot water with a little bit of wool wash.

 So while that's giving a little bit more soak, it needs to soak for about a half an hour, we're going to start mixing our dyes.

 And a tip here is that you always want to add dye to water and not pour water over dye.

 Now you don't want to add boiling water to a plastic bottle, so you would let it sit for a little while.

 Now that our yarn is having a nice soak, it's ready to come out and play.

 And you're just going to want to open it up so that you can get to the surface here.

 In order to create the variegated colorway, we're going to start by just adding stripes of dye.

 So we're going to just space them out, depending on how you want your pattern.

 Then you'd work all the way around and you'd flip it over so that you catch any white areas on the back.

 Then what we would do is, of course, this would be a dyed skein.

 I would put this in the microwave for four minutes and cook it on both sides.

 I've cooked this on four minutes, turned it over, and flipped it.

 These are just acid dyes, so they clean up with a light Clorox solution

 But this also comes... You can have lots of color ways to play with.

 You can play with different stripes and widths for different effects.

 That's an easy way for you to make your own yarn for unique socks.

 Hello, this is Matt from TraceyandMatt.co.uk and from Unboxings.com and here in probably

 what is one of the smallest boxes we've ever done an unboxing video for on TraceyandMatt.co.uk

 Tiny little box and obviously not wanting to waste resources and have a nice small package.

 We have the handset itself, 7230 which we're going to have a look at in just a second.

 In terms of what else is in the box, pretty standard fare really but let's have a look

 So we have a charger which is, I haven't seen Nokia style quite like this before.

 They're normally much smaller but it has this tiny, tiny little bullet style connector for

 Then we have a wired headset, as you can see here, which has, untangle it.

 It does have a 4 pole 3.5mm jack on one end which does mean that we'll be able to use

 It has the inline microphone which has a little clothing clip on it and a push button but

 And then the actual headphones themselves which are very plastic fantastic, very lightweight

 I'm sure that unless you specifically need to use a wired headset you're going to want

 And then last of all we actually have the manual which appears to be entirely in English

 so it's a fair bit of reading for those of you that choose to do so.

 This particular one is around £100 here in the UK but we're going to have a quick

 So on the front we have a 2.6 inch display which is 240 x 320 pixels.

 Underneath that we have a couple of soft keys on either side, red and green phone keys and

 then the actual D-pad in the centre, up, down, left, right and a push button.

 It is very sort of chrome-y, glossy sort of finish, very shiny.

 On the right hand side we have a dedicated camera button and on the top we have a 3.5mm

 headphone connector so we can use our own headphones or the wired headset.

 A place to plug in the actual charger and then a cover over the micro USB style connector.

 So we can, I believe we probably can charge over that but if not that is where we actually

 would plug in a USB connector if we wanted to transfer any media to or from the handset.

 Now this one does have a 2GB memory card actually supplied along with it.

 On the back we have a 3.2 megapixel autofocus camera, no flash though but the back styling

 Then obviously we do have the sliding numeric keypad or the screen, depends how you look

 at it, I guess the screen slides out of the way of the keypad rather than the other way

 So we have a numeric style keypad, obviously 12 keys, they are quite flat but they are

 sort of dished, slightly shaped, you can really see that there.

 There's a sort of slight shaping to them which is quite good and they are individual keys

 which obviously have a nice tactile response to them so it's pretty decent.

 So if we just power on by holding down the phone key and we'll just wait for that to

 No SIM card so we'll just accept the fact that there's no SIM card and let that start.

 Now according to the spec here we've got it's 98mm from top to bottom, 48mm wide and just

 Weighs just around 100g, I think it's 99g according to the spec here.

 Standby time for the battery is 395 hours and talk time of 5.4 hours and it is quad

 band for GSM, tri-band for HSDPA apparently, whether or not that's accurate we'll find

 4x digital zoom supported on the camera and it does play back things like MP3s and AACs

 and all that sort of stuff so you can use it as a media player too which is quite good

 and as you'd expect it does support things like email, although it doesn't support exchange

 synchronisation it will work with POP3, SMTP and IMAP and instant messaging such as MSN

 Only 45MB of it's own internal memory which is why you're going to want to use the memory

 So let's just have a quick look around the menus, so on the front we obviously have the

 OV maps, we have camera, contacts, music and Facebook so we can actually flick through

 We have the radio, make a to-do list and obviously we'll be right back to the beginning to Facebook

 So we exit that and go into the menu and we have a very familiar looking menu structure,

 it's I'm sure many of you have seen this sort of style menu structure before so it's no

 different to many other Nokia style handsets in which we can go into the OV store, settings,

 maps and so on, we can go into apps, we have things like calculator, alarm clock, camera,

 extras, radio, media player, OV maps, various other bits and pieces.

 We can change the display settings and various other bits and pieces.

 In actual fact the display is pretty good, very bright, very clear, it's actually an

 You can actually have it on a handset that's of this sort of price point, let's say just

 over £100 for this handset, fairly entry level but it's got some fairly decent features.

 The operating system itself is actually Series 40 and supports things like Bluetooth.

 If we go into settings we can actually change the connectivity and we can turn on Bluetooth

 and things like that but it doesn't support WiFi but then I guess we probably wouldn't

 expect it to do so for, as I say, a fairly entry level handset.

 So this is the Nokia 7230, we'll have a full review for you over the next couple of weeks.

 Don't forget to follow us on Twitter, twitter.com slash tracymatt and we'll have some more videos

 and reviews for you on tracymatt.co.uk but for now, thanks for watching.

 Bitdefender is dedicated to protecting people's digital lives so working with unboxings.com

 to help review and review the latest technology is a perfect fit.

 Hey guys it's Jasmine and I am back with another hair tutorial.

 Since it's the summer time and it is super duper hot I have been so obsessed with trying

 to find different ways to rock a bun with my shoulder length hair.

 You know my hair is not that long so it can be kind of difficult if you don't have extensions

 So I have been seeing pictures of Lala Vasquez or Lala Anthony whichever one you want to

 call her, Carmella Anthony's wife and I saw this picture of her with a very simple but

 The first thing I am going to do is take my brush and brush the front part of my hair

 I have a little bit of jam on it and that is just to smooth out my edges.

 Since Lala's buns are always like so sleek you will like probably, I have never seen

 Hers are always like very polished, very sleek and that is what we are going to go for today.

 And if this is like your first time watching my video this is jam and all it is is like

 a holding, it is kind of like a gel but it has moisture in it and it also has a shine

 But it kind of looks like this and it just smoothens out like that.

 But it acts as a gel it just doesn't like leave your hair all crunchy and hard like

 So now that I have the front brushed up like this into a V I am going to take a small piece

 And then I am going to take the middle piece along with another piece on this side and

 And as I keep going I am just going to add on little small sections of hair from the

 So now I am just going to pin this front braid down with a little claw clip and this is just

 going to be so that I can pull all the rest of my hair up into a ponytail.

 And with how I am going to do that I am just going to take some of my burner brothers castor

 oil and apply it to the back of my hair so that I know my nape and all the rest of that

 And then now that I have most of it up in a ponytail I am just going to try to easily

 Then I am just going to take two little outless ponytail holders and put my hair into a ponytail.

 So from here I am just going to comb my hair out this way like you would do with a regular

 Get some castor oil on my hands and just kind of try to mold that down as much as I can.

 Then I am just going to twist these around my finger like that.

 This is just going to give us the appearance of having a fuller bun on the top of our head.

 So with my rat tail comb I am just going to try to comb it out a little bit some more.

 Today I want to show you how to make your own strike indicators.

 Here we have an O-ring and this is about a half inch outside diameter.

 You can get them even smaller than this and I would recommend the O-rings even smaller.

 I'm going to put that through there and I'm going to put the O-ring on the hook latch.

 You can use poly yarn but with the poly yarn you're going to have to really put a lot of

 One advantage with the poly yarn is this is naturally water resistant.

 What I'm going to do though is I'm going to use chartreuse egg yarn.

 We're going to cut it at about two inches, about an inch on each side.

 If you get one that's about two millimeters you can go ahead and put that on like that

 Going to take the strike indicator and I want to tie it as close to the O-ring as I can.

 So I'm going to hold the O-ring so I know just in front of my fingers is the end of

 And that egg yarn is going to suck in some of the head cement also.

 If you're in heavy water, you know, you might want it very, very big.

 If you're trying to, if you're using a strike indicator on a heavy fly, then you want it

 Now when you go to use it, first you put fly floating on it, a good amount of fly floating

 Take that loop and put the strike indicator, the puff, right through the indicator.

 The only drawback to this is you get something like that effect.

 And you get a nice little ball there because it is the egg yarn.

 like me, the holidays signify one thing for you and that's cookies.

 parties and whatnot, the holidays can be a really stressful time.

So we want to give you a tool to make making cookies quicker and

Whether you're doing it for gifting, cookie exchange, or just to bring back childhood

 memories, the roller cutter can really help you get your cookies out really fast.

Okay, so this cutter is going to work really well with drier rolled

I have here the Grandma's Gingerbread Cookie recipe and you can find that on wilton.com

 an eighth of an inch thick and as you can see it's only about 12 inches long and that's

 to want to dip your cutter in between your passes in a little bit of flour, so get that

And then in one motion, go all the way across your dough, kind of

 Again, dip in between your rolls so that the dough doesn't stick in there.

 to put your rolled, the roller as close together as possible so that you have to re-roll your

 dough as few times as possible because number one, it's less work for you, but number two,

 you will also get a more tender cookie if your dough is rolled less.

 out and cut out, you're going to bake them according to whatever recipe you're using.

The great thing is you're going to get five different shaped cookies from one single

Go ahead and feel free to put this in the top rack of your dishwasher.

And in order to get it as clean as possible, it's fully, you can fully

The handle comes off and each of the pieces pops out for the best cleaning.

 We got a full green pepper and an onion which we are going to chop up and saute actually

 We are going to cook the meat in a frying pan until it is brown, slightly pink though

 that way you don't make the venison too rough because it is so lean.

 We are going to cook it with the butter and some olive oil to saute it nice with the onion

 And then once we have our pepper chopped up and hollowed and got all the seeds out and

 the stems and the skin and the stems off the onions ready to chop up and throw in with

 After you get the amount of green pepper and onion that you have and your meats are thawed

 out I just put it in the fridge the night before and it should be good.

 So we got our pan oiled up and we are going to go ahead and throw our venison in here

 and let it get a little bit brown and then we are going to go ahead and throw some butter

 Just don't take long and then the meat shouldn't take too long.

 Like I said you want to leave a little bit of pink since it is so lean you don't want

 Then something you can do while you are waiting for your pan to heat up is uncap all these

 and then add in your stewed tomatoes, two cans of tomato sauce and your two cans of

 Some people use kidney beans, black beans, kind of just preference.

 This is chili beans, it has flavor so I don't like to drain it.

 So I am just going to go ahead and add all this into the crock pot.

 And then your stewed tomatoes and lastly your two cans of tomato sauce.

 Like I said you can add things, you can take things away, it is kind of just preference.

 It is easy to just take the lid off the chili powder, you get a tablespoon so just go ahead

 Now what I like to do is just a, you don't really have to judge but just a little hot

 About maybe a little under, I don't know about half a tablespoon of that.

 When you get that you can put a couple dashes of crushed red pepper.

 You don't really have to take off the top, I guess the top is already off it.

 So just kind of get in there and just, I got a just preferable, just another preference

 Do the exact same thing with the celery salt, not too much of that.

 So now after we got everything in there, all the other ingredients, besides the sauteed

 vegetables and the meat and the last thing we need to cut up, I like to throw in about

 So we got over here, we got ground meat here, sauteing with the onions and peppers diced

 I like to get it like medium, medium high, just have to keep an eye on it and just keep

 stirring it but you can see how it is brown, still got a little pink in it, it is almost

 So now we are going to dice up our bay leaves and add those, we are waiting for this meat.

 Now we got our bay leaves in there, some people like to cut them up but they are so brittle

 So now that we got everything in here, we are going to go ahead and stir it up.

 And I had this on low while the meat and the veggies were finishing so go ahead and stir

 So that is nice and stirred up, I am going to go ahead and put the lid on.

 Go ahead and lock the sides in and get that nice steamed taste while it cooks for an hour

 Now we got it locked in so we are going to go ahead and place this on high.

 Like I said, hour and a half, sometimes two hours, then we are going to go ahead and transfer

 it to low after that is done, about five to six hours, let it cook all day.

 Alright, here is our venison chili, it has been on high for an hour and forty minutes.

 So we are going to go ahead and open it up, check it, stir it up a little bit and go ahead

 So here is our beef chili, just uncovered and stirred up a little bit.

 It was a little thick so what I did is added a cup of water, it is a thing you can do.

 Some people like it thick, a way to make it thick is leave the top off after it is done

 cooking on low and turn it back on high for about an hour and it will thicken it up.

 So we are going to go ahead and get the top back up on here and go ahead and let it sit

 on low right there for about five to six hours and it will be done.

 After unboxing your pencil by 53, you'll have about 30 minutes of out of the box usage.

 After this, you may consider, or you will have to, take out your tip area, plug it in

 to any adapter, as in our video we showed we used an iPad adapter, but you can also

 use an iPhone adapter or any other adapter that you have that'll fit into a regular plug.

 So after 90 minutes of charge, it should give you about a month of usage.

 So after charging for 90 minutes, you don't really have to worry.

 Take the tip and slowly screw it onto the end of the battery pack, as shown.

 When you're done screwing it onto the battery pack, you must take the battery pack and fit

 Using the instructions on the pencil aluminum cover, fit it in.

 As you can see, match up the two 53 logos for a successful fit.

 Your pencil is now put together and you are ready to start creating.

 Now that you have your Pencil by 53 set up, it's time to dive deeper into the actual usage of this item.

 It'll start you off with some welcome journals, but you must be wondering how to create your own.

 Go into the bottom right corner and click the little plus button.

 Tap the inspector, aka the little I in the top right corner of the journal, and you're

 You can also choose a photo from your camera roll as a cover, or you can use one of the

 Here, soon we'll point to a little thing in the bottom left-hand corner.

 You take your pencil and kiss it, as they call it, kiss to connect.

 A white circle will revolve around it, and your pencil is now connected.

 You may want to turn off multitasking gestures and make sure that your Bluetooth is on.

 So what you're going to want to do is pull up the palette in the bottom of your screen

 And then, after we choose the tool, you're going to want to swipe down to get rid of

 So in Welcome Video, it talks about how extremely responsive, and you can see it responds to

 Well, sorry, as MythBusters would say, we busted the myth, because that is not true,

 In fact, this actually can be annoying at times when you are trying to draw something

 It's a lot harder to draw straight up, and so you're going to want to draw regularly

 with your hand like you're actually drawing, with the edge of your palm resting against

 When you're writing, you might want to turn the pencil to finger blend, to nothing, because

 it can be really annoying if you're trying to draw with the pencil and it accidentally

 So for the eraser, it's the same angle trick shown for the tip, for the actual drawing,

 So you're going to want to do it at kind of the cornered angle, as shown here, and you

 can see the effect of how responsive it is, how well it erases.

 If you would like to erase more things, you can just hold the eraser in the palette, and

 It's not really shown here because I was just painting, but it is helpful, especially when

 Okay, so I just want to say thanks to all of our subscribers, and also a big shout out

 He recommended me to make this video, tips on how to most effectively use a pencil.

 So I added a little bit of a tutorial in there because you mentioned you're going to get

 And so if you have any questions, drop a comment below in the comment bar, comment box, or

 So yeah, hit that subscribe button, hit that like button, and tutorials and reviews.

 My name is Oscar and I will guide you through a series of cool down stretches.

 Here's a quick glance of all the stretches that you can perform.

 This cool down can last between 5 to 10 minutes and burst between 71 and 142 calories.

 You're going to go into a downward dog, you're going to place your right foot on top of your

 You should feel a huge stretch on the back of your knee and also the back of your leg,

 You're going to hold on to a wall which helps or you can do this on the ground but you're

 Place your left foot on top of your right and then push your hips towards the air and

 Once again you should feel this in the back of your knee, the back of your leg, lower

 leg, hamstrings and calves, making sure that your heel is on the ground.

 You can also stretch more of your Achilles by bending your knee and that will give you

 As soon as you're done, you're going to keep your right foot forward towards the wall and

 as you're doing that, you're going to keep your back leg straight and you're going to

 place both of your hands on top of your right thigh and keep your chest up and hold this

 position and for a deeper stretch, raise up your hand to the opposite direction.

 As soon as you're done, you're going to go back into a downward dog.

 Just a quick stretch and then bring the left leg forward towards the fence.

 Once again, keep the back leg straight and you're going to start by placing both of your

 You should already feel a huge stretch on your right but once again, raise up that right

 arm and to the opposite direction, turn it and you should feel a huge stretch.

 Hold this a few more seconds and as soon as you're done, you're going to go back up.

 So you're stretching your right side of your IT band and you're going to shift your weight

 You're going to hold this for 20 seconds and you can reposition yourself if you don't feel

 As you shift most of your weight, you should feel a huge stretch on your right side of

 Keep your chest up and you should feel a stretch down the left side.

 Cross your right leg over your left, keeping your left leg straight and hold on to a wall

 You should feel a huge stretch down the whole left side of your body and this will help

 stretch out your IT band and a muscle called your quadratus lumborum which is located in

 the lower part of your back and as soon as you're done with that one, you're going to

 Place your hands behind, interlock your hands, squeeze your shoulder blades and hold this

 This stretches your chest muscles, your pec major and your pec minor.

 Especially since you're using your arms, you should be able to stretch out your chest and

 This time, using your left side, you're going to grab your right foot and you're going to

 This will give you a big stretch more on the middle of your quad and hold it for 20 seconds.

 So remember, try not to let the left leg go out and after 20, switch.

 So with your right arm, grab the left foot and you should already feel a stretch.

 Remember to keep your chest up and hold this for 20 seconds and remember, keep that leg

 Don't let it go out to the side because you will be stretching other different muscles.

 As soon as you're done, you're going to go against the wall and do a figure four stretch.

 Now you're going to cross your right leg over your left using your hands.

 So push against the ground and then slowly drop your hips down.

 So cross your left leg over your right and slowly lower yourself back down.

 So this one you should already feel a huge stretch on your left side.

 If not, you can drop your hips and if you still don't feel a stretch, you can push your

 This will give you a big stretch on your piriformis and glute muscles that you're using.

 It's one of my favorite stretches because you don't really have to do anything.

 Place one foot, place the top of your foot against the wall, keeping your heel down and

 Keep the back foot straight and as you're doing that, you should feel a stretch on the

 So the front is getting an arch stretch and the back is getting your calf stretch.

 So once again, place your foot against the wall, making sure that your heel is on the

 And you should feel a stretch on the right side and the arch, but also your soleus, which

 And the back leg, you should feel more of your actual calf muscle, your gastrocnemius

 And as soon as you're done, with 20 seconds, you're going to go get a golf ball and place

 it underneath your feet, taking your shoes off and you can click on the link to see how

 You don't have to do it right now, but this one really helps, especially if you have plantar

 I hope this video was helpful and informative and I'll see you guys next time.

 Anyways, today we're going to be preparing a very special recipe that I came up with

 But first I want to give you a little back story on how I came up with the idea for this recipe

 It all started about two years ago when I came home from grocery shopping

 I pulled into the driveway, I left the car outside because it was supposed to rain that day

 And that's how Lee and Perrin's both saved my life and inspired my recipe

 for my soon to be world famous, not even yet locally famous, Cheddarshire biscuits

 While I'm making the biscuits, you're going to see a list of ingredients over here

 and as each ingredient is being utilized in the recipe, it will be highlighted on the list

 And you want to cut in the shortening until you have small clumps that are about the size of a grain of rice

 And last but not least, you're going to add in six tablespoons of Lee and Perrin's Worcestershire sauce

 This is the magical piece of the puzzle that really makes these biscuits shine at dinner time

 So stir these ingredients together and then pour them into the bowl with the flour

 And next fold the mixture from the bottom up to create a lump of dough

 And one good thing about using Worcestershire sauce in this is that it gives the dough a nice brown tint

 And once the entire lump of dough is brown, then you know it's mixed together well

 And once you have your dough properly shaped, you're going to roll it down to about a half inch of thickness

 And next you're going to cut your biscuits with a biscuit cutter

 And once you only have enough dough left for one more biscuit, you want to hand make it

 And usually I like to name this last biscuit, in this case I'm going to call this one Patrick

 And finally, put the biscuits in the oven for about 12 to 14 minutes

 Or you can just watch them and take them out when they look like they're done

 Many lighthouse keepers have burned down their lighthouses making biscuits and forgetting to cut off the oven

 And now we want to add some melted butter to the top of the biscuits to help retain moisture

 I personally prefer it that way, I think it accentuates the flavor of the biscuit

 And there you have it, my now somewhat famous Cheddar Chard Biscuits

 My name is Lucius Pondexter, I hope you've enjoyed the video and I hope you've enjoyed the recipe

 Alright, so first you want to preheat your oven to 400 degrees Celsius

 And while the biscuits are cooking, we're going to go ahead and melt some butter

 you're probably sick to death by now of cheese enchiladas and bean burritos.

 Next, I'll make a simple enchilada sauce for which I've got a crushed clove of garlic,

 Heat 2 tablespoons of vegetable oil in a pan over a medium heat.

 If you find any little lumps in your sauce, you can easily deal with them with a whisk.

 Let this simmer gently for about 15 minutes, stirring from time to time.

 While I'm waiting for my enchilada sauce, I've got 4 soft flour tortillas.

 We'll bake this in the oven at 190 degrees Celsius for about 30 minutes.

 Let me just state here and now that I refuse to take responsibility for anybody

 who chooses to do anything other than use a mild chilli powder in their enchilada sauce.

 Today I'm gonna cook something that's really very traditional but you don't often see it on restaurant menus.

 There's 250 g of dried wheat which I soaked overnight and then drained.

And if you can't get wheat or barley, use a dal like split peas.

 Here there's 50 g of yellow split peas which I've washed and soaked overnight.

 And finally, a handful of red lentils that I've also soaked overnight.

 a teaspoon of cumin powder, a teaspoon of ground black pepper, a teaspoon of salt and half a teaspoon of cloves

 The first thing I'm gonna do is to brown the beef for 5 minutes.

 I might need to top the water up from time to time so I'll do that.

 After about 3 hours, the Haleem's gone quite thick and some important changes start to happen.

 and then this is where your flat-bladed spatula comes in really handy

 This has been cooking now for about 4 hours and you can see it's really quite thick.

 You can either put this into a food processor and process it very coarsely

 and you can use a good, strong potato masher as well if you like.

We find all the lumps of meat and we squish them against the bottom of the pan.

 When I find one, I take it down to the bottom of the pan and squish it really hard to break it up.

 I've been going at this for about half an hour now and I think I've pretty much got all the big lumps out

 and serve with fried onions, chopped chillies, fresh lime, juicy fresh ginger and chopped coriander.

 Haleem should have the consistency of a porridge and it's a very filling dish.

 It freezes extremely well and I've usually got a box or two of Haleem in my freezer.

 Today we're going to cover how to tie hard times from the rabbit fur line on joelsjigs.com.

 You're going to need black cross cut, fluorescent cerise or fluorescent fuchsia cross cut.

 And this stuff, which is a tiger bard magnum strip, purple and fuchsia.

 I'm going to do the magnum because it gives a little more bulk for 1 1⁄8 oz and 1 ¼

 oz and then for your 1 6th and 1 3rd you can go down to the regular cut.

 You can mix and match your chartreuses and whites and pinks and oranges and stuff like

 that and reds for your different water conditions and different tributaries you're fishing at

 Ok, so this is hard times from the rabbit fur line on joelsjigs.com.

 We've got our black and fluorescent cerise or fluorescent fuchsia cross cuts and then

 Black bard purple over fluorescent fuchsia, fluorescent cerise.

 If you want different color ideas to see what they look like go on joelsjigs.com and there's

 There's a couple hundred we haven't put on there too that we will.

 We're going to need a little bit of room because we have two cross cuts going in here.

 Down even past out of frame here to get a more kind of articulated action.

 We're going to tie on our fluorescent fuchsia, fluorescent cerise.

 Just to do some contrast this is going to be one and two wraps.

 You're going to have to start your bed and move your bed down more because you're going

 This will be a good contrast between the cerise head and the cerise tail and body.

 You can do one just to give it a little bit or you can go ahead and do another one.

 This is a basic jig but in all honesty it catches some of the most steelhead and some

 Like I said, you can do blacks and reds and purple or white and black or put your chartreuses

 Even just changing the color of your head can add some contrast in there.

 That is hard times and if you have any questions you can contact us on Facebook or Joel's Jigs

 business page on Facebook or go to joelsjigs.com and email us through the website.

 Now traditionally, a basic velouté is two tablespoons of butter, two tablespoons of

 flour, which we would stir and cook a little bit, and then we would add two cups of white

 This is not a sauce that's usually used just plain, which would be the roux in the stock.

 We usually embellish it with some nice flavors, but I decided to do that today.

 I love a little shallot, so I've got one small shallot here that I've minced.

 There is nothing more French-smelling to me than a little bit of butter in a sauteed shallot.

 And I'll just need to cook that for a few seconds, and I add two tablespoons of flour.

 When you add cold liquid, it stops the cooking, and you're not going to get any lumps.

 This will have the sauce cook a little bit longer, because we're going to have to cook

 So I'm going to stir this occasionally, have it on a simmer, and let this cook for about 15 minutes.

 So if it clings to the spoon, but you can see the spoon, that's about the right texture,

 So the sauce, once it reaches this state, I'm going to really turn that down to low.

 You're really going to want to do that to taste, because it's going to depend on the

 I don't have an objection to the look of black pepper in something, and I'm more of a fan

 We want to season this with salt and pepper after you've reduced it.

 If you season it with the salt and pepper in the beginning, it can get over-seasoned.

 One of my very favorite things, and certainly classically French, is tarragon.

 Really just a smidge, about a teaspoon of Dijon mustard to taste.

 You can use the sauce as it was, without the cream or the butter.

 We've made a basic velouté, but we've embellished that today with some Dijon mustard, some tarragon,

 Those flavors would be lovely served over a grilled chicken breast or a poached chicken

 I could change the seasonings in this, add a little tomato puree and a little fresh basil.

 Got this video question from our friend who wants to know how to keep his elbows

 Alright man what you're explaining is probably one of the biggest problems that

 leaving out one of the best exercises for building huge traps, strong legs.

 You know triple extension if you're an athlete it's a great great exercise.

 that they catch, they can't go too heavy, they catch like this just like you're

The problem is that the catch, understand this, the catch of a power

 When you catch a power clean your hands, look at my hands, can you see that?

 start light but you've got to get over the fact that you or the idea that

 lot of times when I'm trying to teach people how to do this, set the bar in

 your power rack, just put your fingertips right so if it's in your power rack just

 put your fingertips on the bar as it's resting the power rack and then just get

 into the front squat position and this is the front squat position.

 It's all about the elbows being up and the hands being relaxed.

 program, your containers, your booklet, pages 4 and 19 are going to be really helpful.

 also go ahead and pick up some of those Gladware containers because that's what you're actually

 reds, two yellows, one blue, one orange and two teaspoons for my daily allowance.

After you do your equation from page 4, go to page 19 to see how many

I use sweetened almond milk with it and I don't count the almond

 I do is I take one of these Gladware containers, measure out my orange pieces.

Okay, so that's what I have two hours after I have my breakfast.

I'm always on the go so I don't normally have access to a microwave.

And instead of doing a microwave, you can get these little cubes and cook them

 can either like snap the top on that or you can add it in another one of these.

 I actually like, I don't use my orange container because I eat my salad dry.

But sometimes by the time I'm finished eating all this I don't even feel like another

But if you're wanting another snack you can do like almonds, like these guys right

So you can see there's, these containers look small but, so yeah,

But I mean, sometimes I'll throw them in at like 3 o'clock snack.

 what you like and when you're supposed to eat it, it's pretty simple.

My winners in my challenge groups get the ultimate kit which comes with

 I hope this helped explain a little bit about 21 day fixed meal planning and how simple

 All right this here is Brian he's getting ready to do a brake change rotor and pad

 off the caliber because it takes a nine millimeter allen wrench and to be able

 millimeter allen wrench up our idle zone and we done some grinding on it and to

They might speak up because they're probably gonna hear the fan stuff in

 the background there because we got the fan going because it's hot.

 All right go ahead well just go ahead and try to pry the caliber and stuff

 go ahead just like pry right here whatever and I guess some tension stuff

 there so you've already pried the pad and stuff back make sure the pad and

 stuff still pried back to make sure the pressure stuff off the the caliber

 all right so pressure off the caliber now where it's pushed back where the

 Pistons push back on the caliber yeah it's pushing back all right go ahead and

 see if we can go ahead and and try to pry the caliber it's it's kind of a

 tricky situation trying to pry the caliber plus the springs might go ahead

 and try to pop that spring right there right here in this location right here

 you might have to go ahead and try to pop that out on one side whether it's

 the top just don't want to you don't want to spring it just just want to take

 and pop it out now just don't don't don't spring it just be real gentle with

 it stuff kind of pop it out of its little socket right there there you go

 there she flew all right that's good that's all right she's out of the way I

 go ahead and take the caliber just go ahead and take your hand there and pull

 the caliber back it should just your bolts has probably got you right now I

 go ahead and flip the caliber up you can go ahead and take the pad the back

 pad out of it there you go and we've already got a wire we just use speaker

 wire and all we're going to do is just sit there and run it through through the

 bolt hole on the caliber and to be able to hang it up so that the caliber is not

 hanging by the hose and or the brake line actually be technical about it and

 that way that you don't have to worry about damaging your brake line because

 you definitely don't ever want to take and hang your caliber from the brake

 line so just a little simple knot or whatever just keep it from kind of

 falling off you know and keep it from there you go see now it's hanging it's

 not hanging from the brake line itself it's hanging from a wire all right now

 we need to go ahead and just go ahead and pop that in the front pad or out

 just take your screwdriver or there you go this pops right out all right now we

 need to take these uh these back two bolts I'm gonna go ahead and show you

 these back two bolts here you got that's a little closer there's one bolt right

 there that's a bottom one and yeah okay and get a little close here and there

 right there's your top bolt and there's your bottom bolt all right those right

 there are 18 millimeter and we're gonna go ahead and take those out go ahead and

 use the impact and you can use you can that's fine you can use a ratchet but

 the impact right here Brian yeah the impact right here is probably a little

 easier just go ahead and pop those bolts out yeah that right there it's

 kind of a pain in the butt you got to kind of push that button in in order to

 be able to get the socket lock on to onto the impact and don't pull back out

 neither when you get on yeah push the button in all right there you go push

 button and lock it in the hole all right make sure it's in reverse make sure it's

 taking off all right great deal all right Brian's over here you go ahead and

 that's two bolts that right there that takes care of the caliber bracket all

 right now some of you guys stuff might think that this floating rotor is just

 going to just kind of pop off you know magically by itself but that's not the

 case of stuff this here's a 2008 and if you look closely and stuff around the

 hub you've got corrosion stuff that's just from road salt and water and just

 you know time and stuff so now what Brad's getting ready to do here you know

 don't be afraid to do it he's getting ready smack his rotor so don't be afraid

 to there you go see simple as that he smacked he smacked rotor and stuff on

 both sides and now before we put the new rotor and stuff on we're going to take

 some anisees and we're going to put around the hub right there and and we're

 gonna go ahead and put that around the hub so that way we don't have this

 problem in the future that way we don't have to worry about you know it's

 seasoned up on the on the spindle right here he's putting some right now I mean

 like say it's just you know anisees and stuff you can use you know nickel

 anisees you can use copper anisees you can use you know any type of anisees you

 want to doesn't matter you know it's just anisees it's you know it speaks for

 itself anti-seize you know it keeps it from seizing back up on there so you

 know and and then before you know we put the wheel back on we'll go ahead and

 we'll dab a little bit on the studs so that way that you know we got some

 anisees on the studs and he's making sure he's got it all around there and

 stuff that way when he puts the new rotor on there you know we're good to go

 all right great all right that's the man right there I go ahead and grab your

 new rotor and I'm gonna go ahead and stop this video right here right now and

 we'll come back with the rotor and then we'll show them that you know where we

 clean the rotor and stuff off we put everything back together and you know

 The guidelines presented in this video are intended for use with healthy babies born full term.

 If your baby was born prematurely or has health concerns, check with your health care provider to determine if the information presented in the video applies to your baby.

 The information in this video is not intended to replace individualized feeding information provided by your health care provider.

 Prepared baby food should be stored in the refrigerator and used within three days.

 If you would like to freeze the food, transfer it to an ice cube tray or a cookie sheet lined with wax paper.

 Cover the ice cube tray with plastic wrap or wax paper and cool in the refrigerator for one to two hours.

 Once the food has cooled, place it in the freezer for about 24 hours or until it is frozen solid.

 Pop out the frozen cubes and transfer them into plastic freezer bags or containers.

 Label the freezer bag or container with the name of the food and the date it was prepared.

 Baby foods can be kept in the fridge-freezer for up to two months and a deep freezer for six months.

 When it's mealtime and you are ready to serve some of the foods that you have made, take them out of the freezer.

 Thaw the food in the refrigerator overnight or you can use your microwave on the defrost setting in a microwave-safe dish.

 Once defrosted, foods can be heated in a dish of hot water or in the microwave.

 Before serving, stir the food and test it on the back of your hand to ensure the food is warm, not hot.

 Be extra careful with meat as droplets of water in these foods heat quickly and form pockets of steam and can lead to a hot splatter when the food is stirred.

 Whether you feed your baby homemade foods or a combination of homemade and jarred foods, you will be getting your baby off to a great start

 Baby Shayla is nine months old and enjoys trying small amounts of milk products like grated cheese, plain yogurt, and cottage cheese.

 Choose full-fat milk products with a milk fat of at least 3 to 4 percent.

 By 10 to 12 months, your baby will be ready to start eating many of the foods your family is eating.

 Family foods and finger foods may need to be cut into small sizes.

 At this age, your baby will be eating some family foods in addition to mashed or chopped baby foods.

He likes finger foods like cut-up grapes and small pieces of cheese.

 The best way to model healthy eating with your children is to sit with your family and eat at the table together,

 to enjoy a variety of foods and let your children see you eating those foods, such as a variety of grains, fruits and vegetables, milk products, and meats and alternatives.

 It's important that during meal time conversation be fairly quiet and relaxed, that there isn't any pressuring or forcing children to eat,

 but to just enjoy your time together and offer new foods in a variety of different ways at a variety of different times.

 As your baby grows and develops, the nice thing about making your own baby food is you can progress the texture.

 By the time the baby is ready to accept family foods, you can just alter the texture of those foods.

 You might have to mash it with a fork, you may have to cut it up fine, but the baby can still join in the family meals,

 sit at the table with the family and see that the rest of the family is eating those foods as well.

 Basically the parents are role modeling healthy eating and the baby looks around and says,

 If you have any questions about feeding your baby, contact your local public health unit or your health care provider.

 London and Middlesex County residents can contact the Middlesex-London Health Unit at 519-850-2280

 Tonight I'm making low carb chimichangas, which is a fried burrito, more or less.

 This is just for getting the chimichangas in and out of the deep fryer.

 You'll need a few toothpicks, and also you'll need a deep fryer, which I have behind me.

 For the ingredients, you're going to need some low carb tortillas.

 This is just browned hamburger with some low carb taco seasoning.

 You can look some up online if you want to find out how to make it yourself.

 I've got this Taco Bell mild sauce, which according to the label is 0 grams per teaspoon.

 To get part of the way up, you need to fold the sides over to seal it up.

 Then continue to roll it up until you have it nice and sealed off.

 Now that we have our chimichangas rolled up, it's time to deep fry them.

 This oil is getting a little bit old, but I'll probably replace it soon.

 One thing I'm going to do that's a little bit different than normal, because these things float,

 and I'm going to take the spiders and lower my chimichangas down,

 And then I'm going to place the basket on top of them in the notch that holds the basket up.

 Now, basically you fry them until they're kind of brown and crispy.

 So it'll probably take 8 to 10 minutes, and then we'll pull them out.

 It's also got a high smoke point, so it works great for deep fryers.

 If you can hear this, I don't know if you can hear this on tape or not, but...

 So what I'm going to do now is I'm going to pull one of them up,

 Now's the most important part of making a chimichanga, is to remove the toothpick.

When you open your guacamole, make sure you cut a very small hole, because it'll brown.

 This is probably somewhere between 8 and 15 grams of carbohydrates, depends on how much cheese, how much toppings you use.

I'm happy to give you a demonstration of something I used often,

 you can see how one phrase can be used in all kinds of applications and settings.

If you play one eighth note tied to a 16th, it just simply goes.

 so you can see it could be used that same rhythm I was demonstrating over and over again with

 different types of grooves and chance behind it just to show you how one phrase can be used in

 Pumpkin carving has moved far away from the normal triangles and circles to something

 Today we're going to take the designs from the stonykins.com website and use pottery

 tools to help shave the pumpkin, carving tools to cut out different shapes and create a three

 And to do this we're going to take transfer paper and get the designs from the website

 including Van Gogh's Starry Night, Harry Potter, different skulls and pumpkins and

 First you're going to take your pattern from stonykins.com and cut it out around the pattern

 You're going to do this in a pumpkin shape to make sure that you know how to place your

 You're also going to want to cut the lid at a 45 degree angle to make sure that your lid

 Then you're going to gut your pumpkin using a spoon and your scraper tool if needed.

 After you take all the guts out of the pumpkin you're going to want to thin the face of the

 pumpkin where you're going to be placing your pattern to make sure that light can shine

 through and also to make sure that it's thin enough to easily carve.

 After the face of your pumpkin is thinned you're going to want to put transfer paper

 Place a sheet that is big enough for your pattern and then tape your pattern on top

 After your pattern is placed you're going to want to trace your pattern onto your pumpkin.

 You will do this by taking a ballpoint pen and pressing firmly around all the lines on

 After you've finished tracing your pattern you may take the transfer paper off of your

 After you have unveiled the pattern on your pumpkin you're going to want to start with

 carving out all of the black pieces starting with the smallest pieces first.

 Once you have finished carving out the black pieces you're going to want to go through

 with a knife and outline along the outside edges and inside edges of your pattern.

 After you have outlined your pattern you're going to want to use the ribbon pottery tool

 to shave your pumpkin and all of the gray areas of your pattern.

 You can place one or several candles inside to show off your finished pumpkin.

 So this year instead of a normal jack-o-lantern you can have a Captain Jack-o-lantern.

 We're even going to make Queen Anne's lace, those beautiful lacy soft flowers.

 From there we're going to make a pool of magenta, nice magenta over here and pull in

 From there we're going to go in and add just a little bit of Antwerp blue.

 Antwerp blue and it's going to start up here, kind of work its way down.

 Before it gets too dry we're going to just add a tiny bit of salt.

 That will just add another dimension of texture to that briared hillside going up.

 Alright, we're going to let this dry, come back, add a second layer of color.

 Now we can go back to the mailbox and create an old rusty look.

 So I start with lavender and I'm going with a flat brush and a tiny bit of brown matter.

 Now I'm going to take the brush and just gently drag it down the side, around and down.

 Rust, old rusty mailbox going into a tiny bit of actually some scarlet lake so that's

 The first thing to do, of course, is starting the battery switch.

 Starting the APU, we can observe the exhaust gas temperature rising.

 Reaching this temperature, we can turn on the APU generators, switches.

 Next thing I will do is turn off the dome lights on the aft overhead panel.

 And we are supposed to have the GLA-3 standard arrival route into Phoenix.

 Where do we know the standard departure and standard arrival routes from?

 Here in Phoenix, in Los Angeles, the wind is coming from 260 degrees at 9 knots.

 Whereas in Phoenix, right now, there is a wind of 7 knots and gusts 14 knots even,

 Right now, there is a wind of 7 knots and gusts 14 knots even, from the east, 80 degrees.

 As you can see here, we will encounter fairly strong winds during our flight,

 At 320, we will have a wind of 70 knots, coming from 310 degrees.

 And this is the total air temperature, minus 45 degrees in our flight level.

 Load sheet contains all the information about the weight and balance.

 Using this data, we will set the stabilizer trim for take-off and landing.

 Having a mean aerodynamic chord at the take-off of 20.67 percent.

 For the purpose of our departure, we will have to do some airport familiarization.

 that we will use taxiway delta or echo up here to runway 24L or 24R.

 Seafood is enjoyed throughout Italy and mussels are a favorite in the Liguria region.

 So here I'm going to show you how to make a delicious and easy mussel soup.

 And then cook your onion, garlic, some of the parsley, and hot pepper flakes.

 You're just going to cook it for about 5 minutes until it's softened.

 When you're mixing together butter and flour, you're creating a beurre manier.

 Pour the broth over the mussels and be sure to sprinkle it with parsley.

 A nice squeeze of fresh lemon and that baguette to dip into will make everyone's mouth water.

 Ok, this is just a little video to show you how to shift and never miss a shift when you're

 A lot of automatic people always say like, oh I never miss a shift in my automatic.

 Of course that's true, but I'm going to show you how to make sure you never miss a shift

 So I'm in a 2011 Chevy Camaro, it's got the 6 speed transmission, and I'm going to show

 So first of all, this is helpful for the drag strip and the road course.

 When you go to the 1-2 shift, you want to make sure you're holding it like this.

 So you hold it in this position, because when you shift down, all your force is going to

 If you grip it like this and go straight down, there's no chance of it going into any other

 The one that everybody misses is the 2-3 shift, and I'm going to show you how to never miss

 Now, when you're on the street, the way I was taught to shift from second to third is

 And you want to palm it up, but at the track you want to make sure you're gripping it.

 Because if you just palm it up, there's a chance you could slip off.

 So at the track, you want to do the same thing, but grip it like this, but only use the pressure

 This is the one everyone always misses, so straight up and like that.

 The next gear we're going to be in is fourth gear, which you might not need at the track,

 Now the thing about fourth gear, you don't want to grip it like this, because if you

 grip it like this, your hand wants to push it back into second.

 We don't want to do this either, because then you can kind of get muddied and lost in the

 With your hand in this position, your arm only can generate the force to go straight

 3-4, remember, palm it up, but grip the whole shifter so that you don't slip off.

 Ski Tips with Josh Foster, sponsored by Canada's favourite family ski resort, Big White, in

 One of the things that I really like about skiing is getting the ski loaded up and feeling

 the performance that you can get when you really engage the edges really soon in the

 If you watch a really good ski racer, what you'll see is they get on their edge really

 So each turn what I'm trying to do is get on that edge as soon as I can.

 So each turn to get that great ski performance, I'm trying to get onto my outside ski as soon

 So I want to get on that outside ski actually when it's still my inside ski.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to stand on it and roll over here just like that.

 When I move into the beginning of every turn, that ski rolls over, I stand on that outside

 Right at the start of the turn right there, I get on the new ski right there, stand on

 So to increase that edge performance, what I really want to do is I want to try to get

 You're extending your leg a little bit, but be careful not to go up.

 From beautiful Big White Ski Resort, Canada's favourite family resort near Kelowna, British

 I have laid out some parts here and this is really just junk that's laying around the

 I thought I would do a little bit of experimenting and kind of put it as a challenge to myself

 What I've got is a scrap piece of aluminum ground wire and a scrap piece of PVC pipe

 along with some RG58 coaxial cable with ring connectors on one end and a PL259 connector

 I've also got some black electrical tape to help hold the wire on the PVC pipe.

 So I thought I'd try to wrap some of this aluminum ground wire around a piece of pipe,

 So I have no idea what band this might be resonant on but again I'm just using some

 The piece of PVC pipe, this is 1.5 inch PVC pipe and it is almost 31 inches long, maybe

 The aluminum ground wire, this piece, is approximately 16 feet 8 inches.

 So I'll probably cut this in half and use that for antenna elements.

 If I try this a second time, if I don't have enough wire, I thought of using the aluminum

 ground wire because it's less expensive than buying some house wire.

 But I also have some 12 gauge house wire that I could use to wrap around the PVC pipe.

 I'll take the aluminum ground wire, cut it in half, make some sort of dipole and wrap

 Get the same number of turns on each side of it and then just attach the coaxial cable

 in the center of it and just make it turn, set it up like a simple dipole.

 I don't really have a mounting bracket and that coaxial cable needs to be fed at a right angle.

 If I could probably hang it, I might be able to hang it by one element and make it vertical

 So that would be easier than trying to make some sort of mounting bracket and clamps and

 The PVC pipe, I'm using that just because that's something I've got here, I've got it

 It could be a piece of wood, but the idea is some round coils and so that's why the

 So I'll lay out the ends of the wire on the PVC pipe and wrap a few turns of wire.

 Leave some wire hanging off the end, plug it into the antenna analyzer and see where

 First thing I want to do is draw a line down the PVC pipe and I'm going to use the lettering

 Next I need to mark the center and again this is a little bit short of 31 inches so

 I'm just going to center my yardstick here and mark that at 15 and a half inches.

 So there's the center mark and my cable is going to come up here like this and the lead

 I'm going to center the cable and put a light mark about where each ring connector should

 From the center of the piece of PVC pipe I've marked at 7 eighths of an inch on each side

 of the center and then I have come down 4 inches from the center and have marked it

 here and marked it 4 inches from the center going this way too and that's where I'm kind

 of planning on putting the first turn in the coil on each side of the boom.

 Let's see, one, two, let's put an extra one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight,

 I started at 4 inches on the other side and I'm going to mark it every half an inch.

 In this video you will learn the step-by-step process on how to use the

 PlantSuccess granular when transplanting a small plant into a one-gallon pot.

 one with extra soil for backfill and one filled with soil pre-prepared for plant

 the PlantSuccess granular and sprinkle it into pre-prepared soil.

 thoroughly mix in the PlantSuccess granular with the pre-prepared soil.

 take one more teaspoon of the PlantSuccess granular and sprinkle it

 teaspoon of the PlantSuccess granular and sprinkle over the top layer of soil.

 Are you as obsessed with the Real Housewives of Beverly Hills as I am?

 It's beautiful and I actually have my own jiggy, which is my little Frenchie, right

 I hope you girls enjoy this tutorial next and I'll see you next time.

 Okay, I'm starting off with just defining my brows with a nice chocolate brown and I'm

 Taking my Fresh Beauty Studio Cosmetics eyeshadow primer and this is going to really just lighten

 You can see where it's just covering over any dark spots and it's preparing for my eyeshadow.

 Going in with this color White Chocolate with my Sigma angled brush.

 Going right underneath my brow bone and these colors are actually infused with really rich

 And then I'm going to go in with Milk Chocolate with a blending brush and I'm just going to

 If you look at Lisa's makeup, she really has a lot of nice, smoky, bronzy browns.

 Concentrating on just the corner area here on my eye and I'm just building up this color.

 Now I'm going to take a blending brush and I'm just going to really fuse the colors all

 This is one of my favorite makeup removers, Urban Decay's Bourbon.

 I'm going to just line the top lash line and get a really nice, smoky look going on with

 I'm going to definitely do underneath my eyes to really define them.

 This is one of my Fresh Beauty Studio waterproof eyeliners in Chocolate Brown.

 I'm going to just go right over that line that I just created to really give a little

 It's not really how much makeup you're putting on, but exactly where you're putting it.

 It's really the tight line to really give me more of a dramatic eye contour, if you

 I really like wanting to pop my eyes, so I'm putting as much darkness around my eyes that

 I'm going to put on mascara on my top lashes, and then you definitely, definitely want to

 The way you do this, girls, is just when you feel the glue at your base lash line,

 I know it seems a little complicated, but once you start practicing, you're definitely

 Then what I'm going to do is I'm going to take these Ardell lashes in mini.

 I'm going to put them upside down, and I'm going to just attach them to the bottom lashes.

 This definitely gives you that red carpet look, and it really defines the lash line.

 You're really building up lots of lashes on the bottom, and it definitely has a striking

 It's a triple concealer, so you can definitely always customize your coverage, whether it's

 dark spots right where you see I'm covering up mine, or it's just under eye circles being

 There's a ton of options and opportunity to really create the best look for yourself each

 Going over with the synthetic brush, and I'll list everything on my blog, too, for all of

 I'm going to just load it all on my cheeks here, getting that really nice flushed look.

 Now, if you feel like you have too much blush on, just take your foundation brush, and you're

 just going to work it over this blush, just to minimize it just a little bit, like I'm

 Then I'm going to go over with my lip gloss from Fresh Beauty Studio, called Girl Stuff.

 It's perfect, and it's just that really nice neutral pink that she wears.

 Anytime you don't want to have a manicure done, maybe you don't have time, maybe you

 You just have to find out which ones really fit your nail shape.

 Peel it off like that, and then you flip them over and press them on.

 I was like, I don't want anything that's going to take too long.

 You can also follow me on Instagram, Facebook, Pinterest, or Twitter.

This is Aiko here and today we're going to be making this really cute

 Oyasumi Bakura phone holder plush and it is going to be a collab tutorial

 between Tammy, myself and Anna and all the links will be listed in the down bar below

 Okay guys, so as you can see these are the three basic pieces or cut pieces that you'll be needing

 for this tutorial and I'm using blue and pink for this one but we'll be using many more colours

 later on as we carry on and I'm going to simplify this plush so that everyone can

 Okay, so now let's talk about the pieces that you need to cut out.

 and it's going to be going on top this big strip that you see over here in pink

 and basically this is going to be acting as your phone pocket and I'm going to show you

 how I got the measurements for this in a while and then I also have this square piece over here

 which is going to be the frame of the phone holder so you'll need six pieces of that,

 one piece of the long strip in pink and one piece of the shorter strip that you see.

 Now, for the measurements as you can see I'm using this little Nokia phone over here

 Anyway, I am going to now take the small piece like this and as you can see I cut it out about

 1cm longer than the actual width of the phone so that it will actually fit in nicely.

 Now, don't worry about it being too big because when we sew it up later it's going to shrink in

 size and as for the square piece that you see over here, how I got the measurements for this

 I actually just put my phone on top like that and what you want to do, you just want to cover up

 about three quarters of your phone as you see over here because once we insert the pocket

 The rough measurements I got for this is about 9 by 10 centimeters according to the size of my

 As you can see I've drawn a little template on the first piece of my square and how I got that

 So, this is going to be cut out later on in this tutorial but we're going to put that aside and

 Now, for the pocket what we're going to do, we are actually going to face this little strip

 on the right side because this is going to be visible on the inside and we're going to take

 this pink strip over here and I'm going to line it up like this and what we're going to do, we're

 just going to sew blanket stitches all around until you form a little pocket like this.

 So, this is how it looks like and as you can see you can only see the insides, the outsides don't

 have to worry about how neat your stitches are because we're going to cover it up anyway.

Don't forget to sew on the sides using a fell stitch or a blanket stitch.

 Now, once we've done that we are going to check if the measurements are right and this looks

 Okay, so now we're going to grab this little square piece that we had this little drawing

 on top and what we're going to do now, we are going to fold it in half.

 I'm going to grab my pair of scissors and I'm going to snip a hole in the middle like this

 so that it will be a little easier to actually cut out the rest of the shape that we've drawn

 on to the felt piece over here and it should look something like this once you're done.

 So, this should fit perfectly into your pocket and I'm going to place the little square that

 Now, we're just going to fold on to the sides a little bit so it'll be kind of easier to sew

So, I'm going to use a blue thread and a blanket stitch all around

 Notice that my pocket is a little bit slanted to the side because I did not check where I was

 sewing that pocket on but anyway, be careful when you're doing that.

 So, once you're done with the pocket, we are going to start sewing up the cube and I'm going

 to take the second piece of the square that we cut out earlier and what we're going to do,

 we're going to place it at the back like this and I'm going to sew on blanket stitches with

 So, basically it's just like putting a cube together only that you have a pocket in the

 Now, for the face, you're going to cut out two black circles like this and two pink circles

 like you see for the cheeks and you're going to fix them on using a fell stitch and a

 Now, for the mouth, I use a back stitch and a black colored thread and for the little

 blanket that Oyasumi has, I use an off-white color and use a fell stitch for this.

 Now, a template will be inserted for all of these so don't worry and now for the ears,

 we're going to cut out four pieces of the blue piece and two pieces of the whites and

 what we're going to do, we're going to take the top of the ear and fix on the white using

 a fell stitch just right at the bottom like you see over here and once you're done fixing

 on the fell stitch, we're just going to take the two pieces of ears together and you're

 going to put them together using a blanket stitch all around, no need to stuff.

 Now, once you are done with both sides of the ears, we're going to fix on the ears to

 the cube and what we're going to do, we're going to fix it on using fell stitches right

 at the bottom and some at the sides just to secure it a little bit more and it should

 Anyway, I also fix on the face part onto the frame of our little cube that we're making.

 Again, this is exactly like sewing a cube together so you're going to repeat the same

 You're going to fix on the remainder squares using a blanket stitch on both sides.

 As you can see, I've also sewn down through the sides to complete the whole covered look

 and I recommend to start at the top first then work down to your sides.

 Okay, so now final step, we are left with the bottom of our little cube plush and what

 we're going to do, we're going to stuff it a little bit first to give it a bit of

 volume so it's easier to sew and then you're going to take your final piece or square piece

 Stuff again as you go and you are basically done and this is what it should look like.

 I think it turned out pretty cute considering the fact that I sounded really confusing in

 Links will be in the downbar and if you like this tutorial, don't forget to show your

 Check out my previous crazy videos and also come check me on my official Facebook page,

 What's up YouTube Famous, your boy Stanley coming back at you again with another recipe.

 As promised, we said we was going to show you guys the 2 Minute Chocolate Cake.

 That's by Jorge Cruz, which I'm going to call it the low carb chocolate cake.

 So the ingredients are coconut oil, Truvia baking blend, half and half, baking soda,

 baking powder, salt, unsweetened baking cocoa powder, the famous almond flour, and 1 egg.

 You're pretty much going to stir until you get the consistency of a cake.

 Alright, so this batter right here makes 2 servings for the batter.

 Alright you guys, I'm going to be sure to add the recipe to this low carb chocolate cake down in the description field.

 So those of you that are on a low carb diet or on a low sugar diet, this will work perfect for you.

 So once you try it out, please come back and leave a comment on how you like the cake and that good stuff.

 Well, we just opened the hood to do this master cylinder and found the lock never got it open.

 So anyway, we are going to put our little handy dandy supplied straw on here.

 And we are going to slather all these moving parts because it's a bit dry.

 And while we're at this, we're also going to do a few other little tricks here.

 Hood springs and everything, and hinges and everything are moving good.

 I'm going to give them another little ... I don't care if it's messy or not.

 And I'm also going to spray the end of that spring and the perch that it goes into down

 Hopefully this hood can and wheel shut and open like it's supposed to.

 I've had to wiggle and thump and everything else to get this hood open.

 It's getting to the point where I had to pull the handle, push down on the hood, and all

 Well, the hood now opens and I believe I will dose up the springs just because I can.

 They're moving good, but I'm going to give them a healthy dose.

 What looks like something that you don't want to grease, you really need to.

 You need to grease all those pins, both sides, to where they can move.

 They won't sit and turn, but that don't mean some of mine ain't froze up and are turning.

 I don't know if you guys can see anything or not, but maybe so.

 It comes out and it urgles and googles and does all sorts of nasty looking stuff basically.

 So any of you that work for a big company probably pretty well know they love to slather

 door latches and things because they don't like to replace them, like on trucks.

 And like I said, these pins on both sides and stuff, a lot of people, I don't want to

 argue with me, but if you spray all this stuff good and just do it, these haven't been sprayed

 Especially on these old trucks, the hoods are aggravating to open and shut on if they're

 What a little can of squirting, a little can of squirting will do.

 I can actually shut the hood now without really having to slam it.

 Like I said, my old truck sits right there if I want to drive it.

 The more you actually open and shut the hood, the smoother it will get.

 I'm going to recoat everything again just to make sure that it got into all the crevices.

 Ain't nothing worse than trying to get the hood open when there's ice froze around it

 Anyway, I'm going to get this tripod raised up and get you set up

 Locate the section with the aluminum weatherstrip retainer fastened to one edge.

 The aluminum weatherstrip retainer is on the bottom edge of the bottom section.

 Locate the bottom brackets and bend and break them apart by hand along the end tabs as shown

 Next, insert the safety tabs on the bottom bracket into the slots on the end style of

 the door, then slide the bottom bracket up to fully engage the tabs.

 Note that failure to properly engage the safety tabs on the bottom bracket into the slots

 on the edge of the door can result in severe injury when the spring tension is applied.

 Now use two number 14 by 5 eighths inch sheet metal screws to attach the bottom brackets

 If you have a coachman door like this one, use two self-tapping screws in the brackets

 Next, hook the looped ends of the steel lift cable over the buttons on the bottom brackets.

 If your door came with standard extension springs like this, the lift cables are the

 If your door came with easy set extension springs like these, do not attach the lift

 Notice that they are identified by numbers 1, 2, 3 and sometimes 4 if you have a 5 section

 Locate the required amount of number 1 hinges needed for the first section and attach them

 to the door where each pair of pre-punched holes are located along the top edge using

 Note that the number of the end hinges matches its corresponding section.

 The next step depends on your door thickness, the width of your end style, the type of door

 Refer to your manual or supplemental manual at this time for specific details on attaching

 Hi, this is the nail art design we're going to be working on today.

 using is this color white by Pure Ice and this color is called Superstar.

 the brush of the nail polish I'm just going to round off an area over the bottom part

 of my nail and I'm just going to brush upwards filling in the whole entire area over the

And I'm not worried about the rounded area being perfect because later on we're

 blue and in the center of the area where I polished with the color white I'm just going

 water and the water drop I'm going to let it drop in the center of my circle and just

I do want to allow the blue rim to stay all around, the darker blue rim.

 And just in the middle is where I want to see the different tone color blue dimensions.

 And I'm going to be doing five dots using the same exact technique over my white polished

 nice with different tones of pink in the center but it's just up to you.

 dots and just removing the excess paint from the middle allowing the darker blue rim to

 Once your dots are in place it's time to add a little highlight.

 and just painting a little highlight on one upper area and then on the lower area as well.

 It's worked on a multiple of two stitches and you can also add one stitch on each side

 for the edge as the pattern calls for or on this project that I'm working on I have four

 So that's kind of up to you depending on what you're working on.

 The second row of the pattern you're just going to purl all of your stitches and I'm

 So this is the first row of the pattern and all you're going to do is with the yarn held

 in the back of your work you're going to slip the next stitch purl wise, knit one,

 make a yarn over and then you're going to grab that stitch that you slipped and pull

 This can be a little tricky to keep that yarn over in place while you do this.

 So slip one, knit one, yarn over, pick up that slipped stitch and pass it over your

 And then for row two, like I said, you would just be purling all of your stitches and then

 But this is a pretty simple stitch once you get the hang of the slipping, knit one, yarn

 Today I'm going to show you guys how I make my Memorial Day Mojito.

 You're going to need mint leaves, one lime, three quarters of a shot of glass of sugar,

 I use a fine sugar, it blends better, the stick, very important, ice, seltzer or club

 I'm going to get a little bit of the juice out of it first, like this with the stick.

 Throw in a few mint leaves, five or six, okay, and the sugar, here we go with the sugar.

 Drink this a lot of sugar because of the lime, it's all local anyway.

 Now we're going to put the rum, we put about that much, ice, menthol ice is hot today,

 Okay, we're going to top it off, we're going to stir it a little bit, just to mix that,

 Usually if the mint stays towards the bottom it's even better, so you don't have to eat

 And now to make it look nice we're going to decorate it a little bit with some mint.

 Okay this mojito delicious while I cook in the grill a little bit.

Yes MCI grinder and we're gonna show you how to take it apart clean

 And you can wash this with soap and water and I'll make it nice and clean again clean all the oils off

 That's your first step clean that I'll upset screwdriver number two a bit.

So these I'm gonna tip this over like this to grab those screws.

 The bottom burrs the one that stays in there is the one that goes up and down

 So when you put this back together, it's still calibrated for the same where you left it at

 Get out what I can and then what I would do typically would be take this brush a brush doesn't matter what it is

 These are the little paddles that after the ground coffee passes between the burrs

 The coffee goes down in here and it pushes around to the chute.

 You can use a wire brush and the other thing that we like to use and I don't have it here is an air compressor

 Take it outside and blow it all over the place or canned air if you don't have it.

 And you want to inspect your burrs to why you got a part here and you want to run your hand against the grain and

 It's got it's got a little bit of a blemish there a little bit of a nick in the burr and

 That's I mean when they start to not work, right if you see a misconsistency, you know

 Your grind is not consistent not working like it used to check them out if they're all beat up

 Time they're not sharp or if they're all beat up change them out and I just change them by ticket removing those three screws on

 Once in a while in between taking it apart, you know six months or so

 Depending on whether you're using an oily bean if you're using a really oily bean every couple of weeks run grinds

 Yeah, and you run it through and it cleans all the oils and junk off of the burrs.

 So that's something you'd want to do on a semi-regular basis and then do this every few months

 I will if you get really oily beans maybe every few months if you're not working with a really oily bean

 It's kind of a medium roast probably every six months and then the grinds I'd put it through every six weeks to two months

 There's I think the MCF it does so you would just in addition to doing this

 You would clean that out that front chamber with like a vacuum and brush to go.

 Yeah, that's where the ground coffee goes down into the actual shoot and poke something down in there if you can't in some yeah

 Yeah, there we go load out of there and let's take the vacuum again

 Well since since you dislodged it, you know, oh, yeah, it looks nice up in there now

 There isn't much up there now because I've yeah, it's looking good.

 And now to get it back together again same old story just go in reverse

So that's how you know, it goes back together and on this one these two

 But if your birds were super gunky then it might be that you need to read do your grind because you know

 It you could bring them birds closer together or further apart.

 So test it when you get done, although this is kind of nice because you don't have to start from ground zero

 And on there's a screw too we don't have it in here but there's a tightening screw that goes in there a set screw

 Okay, we just don't have it in there because we find that we'd rather not have it cool

 We're going to hang them and smoke them again with our corn cobs.

 To slice our bacon, we put a few slabs of bacon on this carriage that holds the bacon slabs.

 Then the slabs go back and forth across the way, taking one slice off of each slab.

 We'll take the bacon off and put it on a bacon board, which is a little piece of cardboard.

 We'll weigh the bacon on the scale and get it exactly a pound or maybe a little bit more.

 I like to put them on a paper towel to get a little bit of that grease off.

 So we've got to hurry up and get this episode finished before they're ready for bedtime.

All we've done is taken biscuit dough, some pizza sauce and then our toppings.

You're going to take your pizza dough, our biscuit is our pizza dough,

 Now let's separate the pepperoni so that they stick to the cheese.

 And you'll notice coming out of the ECM, the tubing, the convoluted tubing here is the harness that contains all of your wires for the ECM and the fuel system.

 Once you've cut all your wires, you want to be sure to go through and strip the ends off of all of the wires.

 There are two different ways that you can crimp the small terminals onto each one of these wires.

 You'll notice from the website we offer at a low cost a special crimping tool that you can use these.

 But these are standard Deutsch terminals, so if you have a set of Deutsch connector pliers, then you could use those as well.

 Now to use this, the easiest way to use this tool, number one, make sure this is screwed in all the way here.

 You're going to just drop the terminal inside, flip it over, and let the terminal rest on your finger.

 Then give it a little click, just enough to hold the terminal in place but not collapse it.

 Squeeze it all the way until the crimpers release on their own.

 Now you've got all your connectors crimped down, grab one of the Deutsch terminal ends from the parts bag that comes in the kit and refer to the wiring diagram and slide them together.

 Now that we've run our connections underneath here, we've clicked into the harness, the Deutsch connectors we had previously installed.

 This extra connector that's here, as some of you may know already, not only can this system be adjusted externally by pressing the buttons and selecting different operating ranges,

 it can also be custom mapped individually for the front and rear cylinder along with our USB interface kit.

 If you want to remove some fuel, that light indicates negative fuel adjustment.

 In most cases, we're only going to have to add about 10% to 15% fuel.

That's it for the install of the Freedom Tuning System from Pro Twin Performance on a Victory.

 As you can see, it's a 10 to 15-minute install, which is great for the do-it-yourselfer or for the shop.

 The unit itself can be custom programmed to tune each cylinder individually with the purchase of our USB interface.

 Or you can simply use the dials to adjust the operating ranges on the face.

 Those adjustments can be done even with the motorcycle running.

 If we go back to the days of carburetors, when you put on pipes in a high flow, all you needed to do was change jets, give it a little bit more fuel.

 So you put on pipes in a high flow air cleaner, typical stage one upgrades, and maybe a mild cam,

 then all you need to do is give it a little bit more fuel, which is what that product is great for.

We didn't have to remove the gas tank like you do some of our competitive products

 or take any engine components apart or off of the engine to be able to access different connectors.

 The other thing you'll notice from the video with the mating connectors,

 if you ever had a problem with the tuner or if you ever needed to diagnose a motorcycle

 or ever had any question that the tuner could be a problem, then it's easily removed

 and you can connect those two connectors that you installed into the factory harness together

 and it's returned the motorcycle back to its stock configuration.

 We've also done quite a bit of testing on the Freedom tuner on Indians as well and have found it to work fantastic.

 The only thing we need to work out is access to the wiring harness to try to make it as easy to install for you as we possibly can.

 You can download the instructions and see exactly how to put it in or just give us a call to answer any questions.

 Hey everyone, Chef Jason Hill here and today I'm going to finally prepare my wife's

 we've been wanting to make it for you guys for a while, so let's get started.

 We're going to start out by grinding a half a cup of dark roast espresso beans

 and I recommend you doing this if you want the most intense flavor.

 gonna turn my burner on to low heat and we're gonna melt down 1 and 1 quarter

 8 ounces of Baker's chocolate and it's unsweetened and I broke it up so it'll

 And then we're also going to add 1 ounce of the semi-sweet high-quality

Now grab your mixer or a large mixing bowl and we're going to add

 three and a half cups of granulated sugar to our bowl, followed by the ground

And then we're gonna mix on low speed until it's well incorporated.

 And now I'm gonna bump my speed up to about medium and slowly pour in our

 Now we've mixed in the chocolate, let's drop in six whole eggs, followed by two

 eggs come together, we're gonna add one and a half cups of all-purpose flour and

 Okay, push down the sides again, just kind of work it until the flour is

 baking dish and you can either butter it and flour it or you can use parchment

 into the preheated 300 degree oven for up to 70 minutes but we're gonna check

I like them room temperature but my wife recommends cooling them in

 the refrigerator and having them with your coffee in the morning.

 So hey Youtubers, it's Ivie and today I'm going to be doing an eyebrow tutorial.

 In this tutorial I'm going to show you how I clean up sparked hair around my brow and

 I got these tweezers from Stylish Beauty Supply and they were about $1.27.

 All you do is take the spoolie and you're going to brush your eyebrow hairs in an upward

 motion and all the hairs below that you're going to tweeze out.

 Now I try to stay away from tweezing the top area of my eyebrow because that's when you

 can upset your natural eyebrow shape and you can end up having really really thin ugly

 So gently just latch your tweezer and pull out the loose hairs.

 If you can't stand tweezing, you should probably use one of these little razors here.

 Now the only thing I don't like about the little razor, the hairs grow back really fast.

 With tweezers, your arched brow will stay neater for probably, mine stayed neat for

 So the next thing you're going to do after you're done doing that is you're going to

 take the spoolie again, brush the hairs upward and over and then you're going to take some

 Not cut it really really low, but just trim the ones that are curving up and sticking

 A lot of people will tweeze out pieces of hair because they think it doesn't belong

 So it's really important to trim your brows because that will give you the flawless shape

 This brush is really small, it's hard and dense and this is a really great brush because

 The product I like to use to fill in my brows whether anyone believes it or not is LA Color

 Now I was using the Makeup Forever, I think it's called Opera Brown, but I ran out and

 Now I have the eyeliner in the color black and I also have it in the color black and

 Now first I'm going to take the liquid eyeliner in the color black and I'm going to apply

 The first thing I'm going to do is start at the end of my brow which I always do.

 I'm putting really really light pressure and just stroking the color on until I get my

 And once I'm done doing that I'm going to take the remainder product on the brush and

 And I'm just gently blending that color into the end of the eyebrow.

 The black and brown with the same brush and I'm going to use this to fill in the majority

 Now this will give you the gradient like effect because it's really not good to use black

 on the brows but since my hair is so black, my eyes are so black and everything, I kind

 Then I take the dark brown and I'm just going to fill in lightly the front part of my brow.

 And like I said I'm doing it so light so it's easy to blend the colors together.

 I'm going to take my Sigma angled brush and this brush is the small angle E05.

 So I like to use this brush to apply my highlighted concealer under the brow.

 I'm just going to take a little bit off the stem of the stick and apply that right under

 I like to start from the middle of the brow and then work my way to the end.

 And then I'm just going to blend the concealer out with my finger and my brush.

 And then I'm going to go back in once it's blended out, take my finger and kind of rub

 And then I'm going to take my round Sedona Lace EB13 brush and I'm just going to blend

 I'm going to apply them all the way because it makes it look really fake to me.

 So when you're doing your brows, my suggestion is to only do the bottom half of the brow

 I hope this video helped some people because I get so many requests about my eyebrows and

You won't find me on a cooking show for humans, but I can show you how to make some low-fat dog treats for your dogs.

 I call them Kongs, but there are also, these are called Busy Buddy Squirrel Dudes.

 Anything that's stuffable, that's safe for your dog, you can put some stuff in.

 I used to stuff just straight peanut butter in the Kongs and freeze them.

 Gave the dogs something to do when I was gone, but my guys have put on a little bit of weight lately.

 You throw in, I'm going to throw in the whole can of pumpkin just because I don't feel like storing it in the fridge for a week.

Believe it or not, $1.97 for three cans of this at my local warehouse store.

 Alright, so I'm going to use the whole can like I said because I don't feel like storing it in the fridge.

 So, I don't care that I have pumpkin and that I have yogurt on this spatula.

 This is the way I teach them to love their crates and to love being alone is with those Kongs.

 And so, basically, all you're going to do now is, once it gets good and mixed, super simple.

 Because I don't want this stuff leaking all over my freezer and because I want all the Kongs in one place,

 And basically, grab yourself a knife, just a good old butter knife.

 And now, all you do is you just... it's like frosting a cake, but easier.

 And when I'm done, I put this bottom shelf of my freezer and let it freeze up.

 And the dogs are good to go for about a week with foodstuff Kongs.

 And then, they're finally losing some weight, so it's good all the way around.

Again, I used peanut butter, I used yogurt, and I used canned pumpkin.

 You can use anything that your dog likes and any sort of mixture.

 Sometimes do they get so thick that it's hard to present a bait in there?

 I want to show you exactly how to rig this bait and I promise you, once you throw this

 into that weedy slop, places where you wouldn't even consider throwing another bait, you'll

 I'm going to go straight into the top of the bait and I'm going to take a pretty big bite

 out of that plastic because I want it to really stay up there, about a half an inch.

 And I'm going to rig it all the way up over and I'm going to cover the eye of the hook

 Now, take the frog, bend it up, and run the hook all the way through the bait so that

 You'll notice that there's a little slot right up here on the top and this hook will ride

 Now, for really extreme environments, pull forward and just barely bury the point up

 When you're fishing the buzz frog right, you'll feel really stupid.

 You'll say, I'm reeling it too fast and it's skittering across the top of the water.

 It looks just like a minnow or a frog that's trying to get away from a big old bass.

 I always look for holes back within the matted weeds and I like to throw past it and just

 But if you've got heart problems, I would not recommend the buzz frog because the strikes

 you're going to get are extremely violent and you need big line.

 At least 20 pound test line, sometimes 30 if you're going to throw a buzz frog in the

 Just take a small bite out of the bait, about a one inch piece of plastic and run it all

 And now what you have is one of the most thumping, throbbing, vibrating jigs ever built.

 Anytime the bass aren't quite aggressive enough to come all the way to the surface and grab

 the frog or to hit it like a top water, this will allow you to get that same pump in action

 This is really good for swimming through what I call water willow, emergent vegetation.

 It's also good though in the fall, summer and fall around boat docks.

 Especially in clear water lakes when the shad and the bluegill are suspended just up underneath

This is the Horner Talk Show, but not just any Horner Talk Show.

 and a half, in just one pan, you can make a super duper Thanksgiving dinner.

Joy doesn't eat that much, so we put these in the middle of a large disposable

 Then you get some of those little onion things and you dump them on top.

Then I'm going to put some more of that chicken mushroom soup right

Throw some coconut on top of them and some nuts and some brown sugar

I found this cranberry sauce can down in the basement and it says for best quality

 and yicky stuff on the top of the can that I cannot read what that date was.

 Oh and I'm going to throw in an apple because that's kind of Thanksgiving-ish.

 put in two because that kind of balances the weight of everything.

So you kind of have to be a little careful with it because it's a little

 and then you just kind of sit back and you get a brusque out and say, one pan dinner.

 a good dinner and having a little beer, looking at the pictures.

 high school I was voted most likely to make the headline of a newspaper.

 And then, is someone coming to take my Thanksgiving Day dinner?

 I started out making a million and a half turkey and that was an oily good load.

 now that I have to wait for an hour and a half, I'm not in a good mood no more.

 your fork and then you dip it in some cranberry sauce and you put it.

 And the best thing about my one pan Thanksgiving dinner is that when we're done, you just throw

Today I will be doing a special vlog edition of Food with Dottie.

 And today we're going to be making a vegetarian shepherd's pie.

 I'll be using my little vlog camera because I do not have my other camera with me.

 I got some red potatoes, which I'm going to make mashed potatoes with.

 I usually make them with the Idaho potatoes, but I wanted to try something new.

 So I'll be using the red ones and I'm not going to peel them because I want some of the skin to be in there.

 So if you like to make it from the box, you're welcome to do that.

 And I encourage you to do that because there's no way the box mashed potatoes taste as good as homemade mashed potatoes.

 The next thing you're going to do is boil the potatoes in water in a pretty large pot.

 One trick that I do is I put the potatoes in the pot before I fill it with water.

 Because once you put them in, it's going to displace a lot of the water and you'll find that you probably filled it up too much.

 You don't want to fill it too much because it's going to boil and start overflowing.

 So you're going to boil the potatoes anywhere between 20 and 40 minutes depending on how many potatoes you have and how big they are.

 But the real way to check and see if they're ready is to stick a knife in one of the potatoes.

 You want to make sure... stick it pretty far and make sure it goes in all the way pretty smoothly.

 Because you're going to have to mash all these and you don't want them to be hard at all.

 So even if you think they're done, I would even leave them in for another five minutes just to make sure.

 So you're definitely going to need one of these tools, which is a potato smasher or masher, whatever you say.

 I got mine at Target, but I think you can get it at any grocery store or like a dollar store or a kitchen store.

 But it works way better than trying to use a spoon or anything like that.

 To make this potato mashing easier, I've cut most of these potatoes into quarters.

 Like most vegetables, potatoes have a lot of their vitamins in the skin.

 Now that we have all our potatoes mashed, we need to add something to it to make it a little more creamy

 because it needs to spread over the vegetables in the shepherd's pie easily.

 And if you're vegan, you can use butter substitute, whatever you like to use.

 And I'm going to start with adding a tablespoon, but it really depends on how much mashed potatoes you're making.

 But you're going to start from a tablespoon and then work up until you have a nice creamy mashed potato consistency.

 Alright, the next thing you're going to do is heat up some olive oil in a pan, like a sauce pan.

 And then we're going to add two diced cloves of garlic and then about a half of a white onion.

 Then you're going to add a little bit of salt and pepper to the onions and garlic.

 And then you're going to add your veggies, which we got these frozen mixed veggies.

 They're probably the easiest and they won't go rotten because they're frozen and you can cook it later in the week.

 Once all the veggies are thawed out, you're going to add one can of just generic tomato juice.

 Once you add the sauce, you can turn the heat to low and just kind of let it cook for the next 10 or 15 minutes and let it soak up all the flavors.

 Then you're going to put all your veggies that were in the sauce pan into a baking dish.

 You're going to try to make it as level as possible so that each bite is even and none of them are missing veggies or potatoes.

 And then you're going to go ahead and put the mashed potatoes on top.

 The last step you're going to do before you put it in the oven is just cover it in butter.

I just melted a little bit of butter and covered the whole thing.

 After you put butter on it, you're going to put it in the oven at 350 degrees for 25 minutes.

 And after you do, you're going to kind of wait for it to slightly boil.

 And then after that, you're going to put it on broil for maybe 10 to 15 minutes and you're going to let the top get crispy and brown.

 And that will mean that it's ready to broil it for a couple minutes and make it crispy on top.

 Probably my favorite thing about this vegetarian shepherd's pie is that it tastes even better as a leftover.

 When you reheat it, I don't know what it does, but it's something about it that you can taste the garlic better

 So I hope you guys enjoyed this vlog edition of Food With Addy.

 If you have any questions or suggestions, please feel free to leave them in the comment section below.

 I hope you guys have a delicious Wednesday and I'll see you next week.

 So today I want to answer Stacy's question she asked on Facebook.

 There's actually two, one you can make using whole milk and one you can actually use a

 I'm going to add a link to the one that you can make with whole milk if you've got your

 Okay, so today we're doing a dairy free version with honey, which makes it no longer vegan.

 But if you do want a vegan option, you can always use, you know, an alternate sweetener.

 I don't use agave here at Beyond the Peel, so we're going to use honey, but feel free

 to adjust the sweetener according to what you have in your cupboards.

 It's kind of funny that I'm doing a video about it, but I'm going to show you because

 I just whisked it together to make sure that the solids were incorporated with the liquids.

 Everything usually floats to the top and I want it all together.

 I'm going to whisk that together and then we're going to put it on the stove.

 So we'll go over to the stove and I'll show you what we're up to.

 So I have my coconut milk and honey on the stove and I'm going to bring it to a very

 And then once it comes to a simmer, I'm going to turn it down as much as it'll go.

 And basically we're just evaporating some of the water content in the coconut milk that

 So now before I stir it any further, I want to show you, I'm not sure if you can see that

 It's not going to be noticeable when you use this in your baking.

 And with Thanksgiving just around the corner, I know a lot of you use sweetened condensed

 So we're just going to bring it to a simmer, bring it right down, let the water evaporate.

 So it is kind of lengthy, but hands on time is absolutely minimal.

 You're just basically putting it on the stove, which is awesome.

 So we'll be right back here in two hours or so, and I'll show you what it looks like.

 This is our golden-y, yummy, sweetened condensed milk, but it's dairy free.

 I put a little bit in a bowl and cooled it for about 10 minutes, just so you would have

 If you want a dairy version, I'm going to have a link at the end of this post so that

 So in the comment section below, tell us which of your favorite holiday recipes you're going

 to be converting into a whole food recipe using this sweetened condensed milk.

 And if you're not already a member of our community, head over to beyondthepeel.net,

 subscribe for our email newsletter, and we'll see you next Tuesday.

 Today's project is replacing a lower control arm on a 2004 Honda Civic.

 The car was being driven on a slick day, and the person who is driving it, who will remain unnamed, and it was not me, slid into a curb.

 It doesn't appear that the damage goes much beyond the lower control arm.

 You can see, basically, it's pushed back, right there, that lower arm right in this spot here is bent.

 Okay, so this wheel, the car should be straight ahead right now.

 The wheel's turned in like this, and the wheel is out like this.

 I already dropped the new rim and the old tire off to be swapped, because it bent the rim, so it needs a new rim.

 I wish I would have kept that, because then you really could see how the bending happened.

 Everything from the control arm to the hubcap and the rim, I got from a dealer online.

 I really just prefer to use genuine parts, especially this car, because it's still in pretty good shape.

 If it was my old beater truck, I probably would have went with the cheaper stuff.

 Even if I went and paid full retail for it from a dealer, it was something like $26, $27.

 A used one on eBay was actually more money, and it had scratches on it.

 First thing I'm going to try to do is get that sway bar link loose.

 When this car was brand new, I sprayed everything with undercoating and paint and oil.

 I tried to get every nut and bolt on the front suspension covered.

 It's driven in a climate where we have to use salt on the roads.

 So my suggestion is if you get a new car, I'd go and I'd spray all these nuts and bolts down

 I have never had a link come off this easy on a five-year-old car.

 Okay, the next thing I'm going to do is zip this ball joint nut off.

 Okay, now I'm going to use this pickle fork to remove the ball joint from the taper.

 I'm going to break the taper on the ball joint to the control arm.

 There's a metal ring in here, and this is sort of a press fit onto the knuckle.

 and I'm going to hammer this up onto there and get that seal reinstalled.

 and take my socket and go ahead and hammer that up until it seals.

 Welcome to my special edition of my super awesome kitchen stuff.

 You have total 82 grams of carbs, 4 grams of fat, 36 of protein, 80 grams of sugar, and no fiber.

 So the X-MEN Sugar Shake is good for post-workout or if you want to get fat.

 Hey folks, this is Paul with Bikeskins.com and today I'm shooting from my home garage

 and yes, even you do not have to have a full-fledged wrap facility to wrap your own bike.

You can do it basically for the first time in your own garage without

You do need some tools and today that's what I'm going to do is kind

 of give you a brief overview of some of the tools of the trade for wrapping.

 you first start wrapping, you want to make sure that you're cleaning your bike with a

For something like degreaser, Windex, you could use dishwashing liquid and just

Once you get down to the last stage, this is before you apply the wrap,

 Make sure that you use a really nice professional grade spray bottle so you can get a lot of

 not have any lint like if you used a paper towel or something like that.

 have any decals or anything like that on your bike, factory decals or any type of stickers

 and you can find these at wrap supply companies like Feller's or different places online.

 won't scratch your paint, but they work really well for getting the decals off.

 Okay, the next item you want to make sure and have, this could be obvious, is a nice

 the shapes out is really not that important, but just make sure you get some that are sharp.

 Another tool that I want to talk about today are clamps, especially if you have the body

 work taken off of the bike and you have it resting on your work table.

 two people or even if you do have two people to help, it's good to have clamps to kind

 of hold down the body work in different positions while you're applying the material because

 rag or something like that so that it's even more of a softer surface that's touching your

 wrapped material if you're holding down an edge that you already have wrapped a little

It has a trigger so you can clamp down at different degrees real

 to contort the body work or pull in or put a lot of pressure in areas you don't want

 it's a really light tension so you can see that it's enough pressure to hold down something

 steady but it's not like one that you would use if you were going to glue something together

 with wood and it had to be held really tightly or like clamp on a camper to the back of your

 install of replacement towing mirrors on a 2008 GMC Sierra SLE.

 tow mirrors like this are a popular upgrade to full-size pickups and SUVs.

 They offer superior wide-angle views, crucial when towing, and add an

 screwdrivers, one small, one large, needle nose pliers, and for this vehicle a

 truck is equipped OE with the standard power heated sail mirrors.

 mirrors are standard on models with rear window defrost and activated with the

 nuts that hold the mirror in place, two of which are inaccessible, necessitating

 Next, remove the access panel behind the door handle, granting you access to two

 small screwdriver to pry down on the spring-loaded clip on the underside of

 the pull handle, then the two bolts number 4 and number 5 behind the

 pry wedge or similar tool, gently pry up and work your way across the assembly,

This controls the power mirror, heating element, and turn signal.

 Simply pry away the connector and unplug the mirror from the door harness by

Using a non-marring pry wedge, start at the bottom corner and work your

 the panel on the two long alignment tabs on the bottom of the panel.

 the loose mirror harness that you disconnected a few steps ago.

 towards the mirror, noting the three pressing clips used to hold the wire in

 just make sure to pull out the stubs so they don't fall into the door and

 screwdriver, push or pry the clip at the top of the mirror to release it from the

 mirror, fish the wiring harness through the hole in the sail panel.

 clips and run the wire back through its original route to the switch assembly.

 truck, adjusting it left, right, up, and down, then hit the turn signals.

 truck, to check the heat function, turn on the defrost, wait a moment, then feel the

 back into place, making sure not to pinch any wires in the process.

 sure you allow yourself wiggle room to line up all the mounting bolts.

 need additional guidance on this or any other automotive need, see your local

So I just got my ATH-M50 RD's limited edition in the mail today.

 So yeah I've been waiting for these headphones for like 2 months already.

B&H from this one company out in the store actually from New York.

I'm sure you guys have seen other openings, unboxings and stuff.

 Except these are limited edition so I'm not sure they're going to be making any more of these.

 I haven't seen the unboxing of these so I guess this would be the first.

 So right off the bat, I'm gonna tell you, these headphones are really nice.

 You know, the headphones are all made out of plastic obviously.

 Which is probably how it's supposed to be since this is where the padding should go.

 This whole thing feels kind of like cardboard wrapped in this leather material.

These are brand new so obviously these are still kind of pillowy, cushiony looking.

 And then this, I don't know, some guitar speaker or something so you can hear your guitars.

 Let me put these on so you can get an idea of what these look like if you're trying to wear them out in public.

 They feel really cushiony and isolation is great because I can't hear anything.

 And if you're walking around and decide oh shoot the sun's kind of bright.

 This is not a review because there's been a lot of reviews on ATH-M50s.

 And I haven't seen an unboxing for these but damn these are some great headphones.

 Hey guys, this is the Professor, and today we're making another of the 10,000 one pot

 We're out here in the woods today, the mosquitoes are pretty bad, it rained last night, and

 This isn't an original recipe, this came from a small cookbook that we got at the checkout

 Over here for our ingredients today, we're going to start out with a small can of chicken.

 Next of all, a couple of potatoes, two medium sized potatoes for the two of us.

 We're going to have a jar of roasted peppers that are cut into strips.

 And last of all, we're going to have some chicken flavor bouillon pack, which comes

 And of course over here for our dessert, we're going to have some canned peaches and some

 So there are our ingredients, let's get about getting those potatoes now diced up and starting

 We want to dice these potatoes up pretty small because we want them to cook quickly.

 Today we're going to be using our little Coleman dual fuel stove.

 And even at $4 a gallon gasoline, a pint of gasoline will run this stove for nearly

 So what we want to do here is to let the stove prime up a little bit.

 First of all, the chicken, we'll go ahead and get that in our little skillet.

 And for our peppers today, we're going to go ahead and use about 8 ounces of those.

 Well that juice wouldn't hurt, but I don't think I'll put it all in.

 Now for our flavorings today, we have our small packet of chicken bouillon, which is

 A vegetable, we're going to have our red peppers here, roasted red peppers.

 And then for our sauce, we're going to have a chicken broth, kind of a chicken broth mixture

 and season then with the Italian seasoning and probably a little pepper.

 And then we should be ready to have lunch out here at the camp today.

 Using a little pepper container here with the 35 millimeter film can with the added

 I think film cans are going to become scarce now as film goes obsolete, but I had several

 Things are getting close to boiling here, so it'll take a few minutes for everything

 We'll stir it occasionally and kind of monitor until the potatoes are done.

 And that'll give a chance for all the flavors to melt together.

 Okay guys, we think the chicken with potatoes and peppers is about done.

 Potatoes are cooked through now and the sauce is thickening up a little bit in the bottom

 We'll go ahead and turn the heat off and plate a little bit of this up for you.

 We'll go ahead and serve some of this up here in our Coleman Exponent Cook Kit.

 It contains two bowls, a couple of cups, a little fry pan, and then a big kettle.

 But for two people, it works out really well and just about the right size.

 The one pot meals are particularly easy to eat if you have those served up in bowls.

 And so there's enough here for two servings and maybe just a little bit of extra.

 So I'm glad you joined us in the woods here today for our chicken with potatoes and peppers.

Wolfie from our half-acre homestead and today we're going to make hash brown patties for freezing.

 1 quarter cup of potato starch, or you can use tapioca starch, corn starch, whatever you got going,

 And the reason I boiled them with the skins on is to retain as much of the starch as possible.

 This is a really good idea if you need make-ahead food, but you know me folks.

 I don't go for pre-packaged food, but I can make pre-packaged food

We'll see you guys when I have all these potatoes grated and layered with the starch and the salt and pepper.

 375 degrees and I've gone ahead and brushed some butter on my parchment paper on the cookie sheet.

 Now I'm just going to take my handy-dandy ice cream scoop, say about a half of an ice cream scoop, and just gently

 All right, we're going to pop these into a 375 degree oven for about 15 minutes.

 All right, we'll pop these into a 375 degree oven for about 15 minutes.

 Okay, when I have all of these flipped over I'm going to put them back in the oven for another 20 minutes.

 And as soon as they cool, I'm going to put them in this pan and

 So our recipe calls for finely chopped chicken so we bought a rotisserie chicken from our

 local grocer and I'm just picking off the pieces and putting it in the Ninja Blender

 So I've put the top on the cup and I have a cup full of chicken here.

 Next we need one stalk of finely chopped celery so we're going to take this and put it in

 So next we take our finely chopped chicken and our finely chopped celery and mix them

 Next we will take one roll of croissants, a package of eight, and we are using low fat

 Alright so next we will roll out the croissants and you'll want to cut each of these triangles

 Okay so now that we have our croissants cut in half I'm going to take two tablespoons

 of our concoction of our mix and put them in the center of each triangle and then I'll

 Okay so in order to be able to cover and seal all of this filling you may have to take one

 of the triangles and just kind of flatten it out with your finger to make it a bigger

 Okay so once you have the filling in and you fold over the corners you'll want to try to

 seal them up as best you can and then you'll put them in the Ninja cooking system.

 Okay so now since they are in the pot we are going to plug it up and it says to cook them

 at 375 for 10 minutes and flip them over halfway through so I'm just going to turn

 it to the oven setting here and turn it up to 375 and I'm going to set it for 5 minutes.

 Okay so after your 5 minutes you will flip them and they should be a nice golden brown

 and you'll flip them over and cook them again for 5 minutes on the other side until they're

 So once that 5 minutes is up they should be nice and golden brown on both sides so then

 You could probably serve them with some ranch or blue cheese and a side of celery would

 So I'm going to let them cool and then I'm going to try them out and let you know what

 I don't like chicken wings but I would eat these because I don't like chicken wings because

 It's got enough of the flavor of the buffalo without being too much.

 I usually like them with ranch so I'm going to dip it a little bit in the ranch.

 In the other video I bought three IPS monitors and I want to do iFinity.

 Here are the cables that I will be showing you, connectors, just active cables, stuff

 And then here we have another one that goes from the bigger display port to DVI.

 We won't be using this one because this card does not have a big display port connector

 So to set up iFinity, the way I would do it would be you use DVI cables.

 If it's not active, some cards will not register that the monitor is hooked up.

 And then you go and you get another DVI cable and you run it to here to your monitor.

 After you have this set up, you go and go to your settings on your computer and you

 Alright, I showed you the way I would set up iFinity with the best quality and the best

 And I'm going to plug it into the other display port right here.

 If your card doesn't come with two DVI ports like this one, this is how your setup would

 And then let's say your card has a DVI, HDMI, and one of the big display ports.

 And this one, let's just pretend this one's plugged in as well.

 Now on this card, like I said, this card, only on the top one, you can use a connector.

 If your card's not working for some reason or something's not happening, you might want

 You'd plug it in there or you have a small one, like it has here.

 And then you go and just plug this DVI into this DVI port here.

 Now that I've showed you different ways on how to do your iFinity, I will go and show

 you how to set up iFinity as well as how to align things and make the iFinity work right.

 restaurant and what a perfect place for this next recipe which is a spicy chocolate tart.

I'm just going to put that into the cling film, flat it out a little

That's ready to go in the fridge to rest for at least 45 minutes.

 pastry is chilling out in the fridge, I'm going to chill out on the deck.

 So now that I've baked myself a little bit in the sun poolside, time to roll our pastry

 that piece of baking paper and I'm just going to fill it completely with the ceramic baking

 my saucepan here I'm putting some single cream and then I'm going to add to it some glucose

I've got a star anise seed, some pure vanilla extract, look at that colour,

And then one teaspoon of ground cinnamon and half a teaspoon of nutmeg.

 careful if you rush it out too much the mixture is going to curdle.

 where that recipe comes from, where does the inspiration come from?

 destination and this is inspired by Grenada which is one of the very popular destinations

 you walk to the rainforest, you will get all this lovely flavour.

That's going to go in the fridge to set for at least 25 minutes.

 after a little exploring on board, time to decorate our chocolate tart.

 So this is it, a hot date between you and me and this beautiful chocolate tart next

But for the time being I'm going to do the ultimate taste test with

 my friend here on Ventura and really find out what they think about that West Indies

Remember if you're travelling next year on Britannia that actual recipe

 What can you do when you have a few overripe bananas in the house on a hot day?

 When bananas are frozen they become even sweeter and the consistency is like a creamy popsicle.

 The dark chocolate and nut coating makes this dessert healthy and delicious at the same

 These treats only take about 10 minutes to make and the hardest part is just waiting

 As always you can print a copy of the recipe by visiting shnugglebunny.com or by clicking

 This recipe will make 6 frozen bananas but you can alter it accordingly if you'd like

 For this recipe you will need 3 ripe bananas, 6 popsicle sticks, 1 third of a cup of peanuts,

 cashews or any other nut that you like, and 90 grams or approximately 9 squares of dark

 chocolate or just under half a cup of semi-sweet chocolate chips.

 Slowly insert a popsicle stick about 3 quarters of the way into each banana starting from

 Place all the bananas in the freezer for about 30 minutes to become more solid.

 Place the nuts in a sandwich bag and use a rolling pin to crush them into small pieces.

 After 30 seconds remove it and stir and then put it back in for about 1 minute.

 Once the chocolate is ready remove the bananas from the freezer.

 Use a spoon to drip the chocolate onto a banana and to spread it around.

 Then sprinkle the nuts on top of the chocolate, rotating the banana so it's fully covered.

 Put the bananas back in the freezer for about 2 hours to fully freeze before serving.

 I hope these frozen treats helped cool you down on a hot summer's day!

 If you enjoyed this tutorial please rate it and subscribe to my channel.

 I'm going to show you how to cook Spanish mackerel a white curry.

 recipe I'm using nearly 500 grams of Spanish mackerel, then 1 cup of thick

 coconut milk, 1 onion, curry leaves, fenugreek seeds and cinnamon, green

For the spices I'm using curry powder a tablespoon with a little bit of

 chili powder and pepper and a pinch of turmeric powder, don't use lots of chili

 powder in this recipe and 2 cups of water to cook the fish first and I'm

You can leave a little bit of onion, sorry onion and garlic both,

 can leave a little bit of onion or you can cut a little bit of onion and garlic

 later and use a little bit of oil to temper it to give a little extra flavor

 or use as this is and into that going to add the 2 cups of water and cook this

 when I put coconut milk in fish than using goraka so I added some tamarind

 juice to give sourness or you can add 2-3 tomatoes into this curry too.

 cooking the fish several minutes add the thick coconut milk and cook only until

 Hello everyone, today is time for TNT by ACDC so we'll start with the verse and later continue

It starts with an E, G and A and then continues with a G note, A note

 It's not a big difference, you can just use the first pattern as I show you but this is

 chorus it's A, G note and E. And I think he mutes it with his right hand.

 think at the chorus Angus is bending an A here on the first string on the second fret up and he

 Today I'm going to make one of my favorites, and a Chinese classic, Chicken Chow Mein.

 There's several different ways to make it, but I'm going to make it the way it's made

 I'm going to start by marinating two boneless skinless chicken breasts that I've cut up

 into bite sized pieces with soy sauce, Chinese rice wine, white pepper, cornstarch, and egg

 Now this goes into the refrigerator for 30 minutes to marinate.

 And now I have some egg roll wrappers that I'm going to cut into strips for our crispy

 And if you don't have egg roll wrappers, you can use wonton wrappers.

 Now place your strips into 350 degree oil for about 35 to 40 seconds.

 Now remove the noodles and drain on paper towels and continue frying until all the noodles

 In a skillet or wok, I'm going to add some vegetable oil over medium high heat, and then

 Now stir fry the chicken for 2 to 3 minutes, just until it starts to get some color.

 Now saute the chicken and vegetables for about 3 to 4 minutes, just until the celery and

 Once it reaches a boil, I'm going to add some cornstarch slurry, which is equal parts cornstarch

 For a full printable copy of this recipe, visit the Wolf Pit blog.

 Now give it a good stir and let it cook for about another minute to a minute and a half,

 Have a bed of steamed rice, and now I'm going to add our crispy wontons.

 And now a generous helping of the chicken and vegetables, and there you have it.

 Hey y'all it's DJ BBQ with one of my favourite kind of leftover dishes, chili and cheese

 Chili gets better with like you know day after, even the day after the day after man, so we're

 We're gonna start with the three eggs and the single hand crack.

 So hold it like so, slam it down on the corner, boom, stick your finger in there and pull

 We're gonna do three of those bad boys and they just need their good friend from the

 So we're gonna throw a little bit of milk in there, there we go, nice.

 Okay and of course I like to put a little sprinkling of salt and some pepper, I like

 Look at all those guys that know each other man, they're partying dude, look at that,

 Okay so there's our three eggs, nicely kind of brought together with the whisk of love.

 Now we need a frying pan onto a medium low heat, don't wanna burn the egg, you wanna

 make sure it's warmed up okay, you don't wanna just put it in there when it's just a bit

 I'm not trying to do one of these like you know, who can make the omelette the quickest,

 What's that TV show where they try to make the omelette the quickest?

 Swish it all around, swirl it around the pan, get it to know each other, there we go.

 So the butter's in and now it's time to bring the egg to the party.

 You always think omelettes are breakfast food and they are, but when you put the chilli

 The egg is cooked through, so now watch this, I need to get my spatula underneath this bad

 Alright, we're gonna add the cheese first, cause I want the cheese to melt with all the

 So, we're gonna get a ladle of the chilli and then we're just gonna spoon it in.

 We only put the chilli on half, cause we're gonna give it the fold, you know, and then

 Check this little thing out, my friend Cupcake Gemma made this for me and she's got her own

 channel on YouTube, like moi, and she does all things kind of sweet.

 She makes the sweetest, tardest cakes, beautiful like dalek cupcakes and if you want to subscribe

 The chilli and cheese omelette is done, it's now time to pimp our tender vittles.

 So quick and so easy man, five minutes and you're eating like the most tasty dish.

 Alright, now it's time for the all important making sure this thing tastes good test.

 Oh yeah, let's get some of that sour cream on there, a little bit of avocado.

 Listen, if you haven't subscribed to DJ BBQ's channel, make sure you do it, it is free.

 We've got loads of rad recipes, outdoor, indoor, but the main thing is they're all super duper

 The camera guy, you need to put that thing down so we can enjoy this chilli and cheese

 It's just going to be sandwiches and they're Reuben's sandwiches.

 you how to make them in case you don't know how to make them and some variations that

 skillet and I spread butter that was at room temperature on each one of these, just one

 side, and toasted that side and then put a toasted side up on this cutting board.

 I'm going to put my filling, we'll say these two on the right, and then this will be the

 do is show you that you can use either mustard or Thousand Island dressing.

And then we'll go to the other one and I'm using some Thousand Island dressing.

 we're going to add is traditional for Reuben sandwiches and it is sauerkraut.

 a can of sauerkraut here and I've taken some of that out and I've drained it because I

 of evenly cover it so that any bite you take you'll get a little bit of sauerkraut.

So it's just if you want some zippy mustard on your sandwich, do it

If you want something a little bit sweeter, then do the Thousand Island way.

And then the traditional meat for a Reuben sandwich is corned beef.

 we're going to put those tops, remember the grill side toward the inside because we want

 not been buttered, but we are going to grill it in the skillet.

 to use the butter again and butter these sides because we'll have to be turning at some point

It'll probably be more than two minutes, but I'll be back soon and show you what it

 turn off the stove, bring these over and put them on my cutting board, which I cleaned

What I have is a plate here that I've put a few bread and butter pickles.

 corner to corner, but cut something like that so you can see the inside of the one with

 has the thousand island dressing, we'll do something kind of similar.

 opposite direction on this one, although I guess once you turn them over, it doesn't

 And really crunchiness as well as the melted cheese and the heated meat and heated sauerkraut.

 So it's going to be a lovely meal to put this together with our iced tea.

 earlier today, what I worked on for all of you viewers was my carrot cake.

 didn't know that I was doing that because of a couple of requests that people have sent

 last time you were here we did these big fir trees with a fan brush and I'm going

 it wets it starts to separate but you can just dry that off in your hand or

 tape on to protect the bottom of our canvas so now we take the tape off okay

 because we're going to put something down here probably a waterfall or

 something I'm not sure yet but right now we're going to protect all this down

 here by putting more tape on again so every time you want to do a part of a

 we want our water to be our little pond or whatever you want to call it.

 just make a guess because this is your painting so you do whatever you want to

So what I'm going to do is I'm going to put both sides of my paint.

Right now we're just going to do a little pond and all you have to do now

 this time before we had the brush vertical like that to pounce and to punch and tap

 This brush will give you a nice texture that actually gives you more of a feel for water.

 If you did it with a flat brush you'd probably just get like flat strokes.

 you a few waves and if you let some of the canvas come through you'll get a little bit

 of white coming through and that will make it look like just some little splashes or

 may want to start on the other side and I don't want to get in the front of the canvas.

 going but the main thing is to get your fan brush and keep it horizontal.

 push in and start from the edge and that will give you a better grip and a better guide.

 Instead of just starting in the middle I really like starting on the outside here.

 Then we go back and forth and back and forth and back and forth.

 You need to load your brush pretty good with these water entries because it just goes on

Right now I'd like to demonstrate how to assemble a desktop computer.

 Install the RAM stick into the RAM slot taking care not to touch the metal contacts.

 Press down firmly and when properly seated the retaining clips will move up into place.

 When properly aligned it will drop into position without any force.

 After setting the jumper on the hard drive, slide that into position.

 Install the back plate into the opening in the back of the case.

 Standouts are screw-in spacers that prevent the motherboard from making contact with the case, thus causing a short circuit.

 The standouts screw into the case directly below the motherboard screw holes.

 Put the motherboard onto the standouts and then secure using the appropriate screws.

 Refer to your motherboard's owner's manual for the appropriate connections.

 At the other end of the ribbon cable, connect to your hard drive.

 Unpack all the pieces from the box and lay them out on a carpeted surface.

 We recommend that you read the instructions to show you the easiest way to assemble your PAMCO cot.

 Lay out all the hardware and check against the list what is required to assemble your cot.

 Ensure the long nylon strips on the cot ends are facing the front.

 Insert a bolt through the cot end and the barrel nut into the base hole.

 Once you have successfully attached the first end, repeat on the other end.

 Collect the hardware for the fixed side and place the side in the right position with the grooved side near the top.

 Insert the bolt through the cot end and line up the barrel nut.

 Tighten all bolts securely and remember to check them every six months.

 take the drop side and position with the grooved side facing the top.

 Insert the bolt through the grooved side and line up the barrel nut.

 take the drop side and position with the clips fitting onto the long nylon runners and the name badge facing outwards.

 Lining up the four drop side clips at the same time is easiest with two people, but can be done by yourself with care and patience.

 Ensure you pull back the spring loaded piece on the bottom clips before sliding up the rail.

 Once the moving side is on, screw a button into each leg to prevent the side dropping off again.

 When the base is in the lower position, it is very important that you insert the filler screws and caps to prevent baby inserting a finger into the top holes.

 To attach the wheels that come with your cot, tip the cot over and line up the wheels and just give them a gentle tap to stay in.

 To use the moving side, stand sideways to the cot, lift the centre of the top rail, push with your lower leg and allow it to lower.

 To raise, just grip the side and pull it up until it locks into place.

 And remember to check all around your baby's cot to ensure there are no cords, rope or any other items within reach that may cause baby harm.

 Store the Allen key and assembly instructions somewhere safe for later on.

 Alright guys, today's dish we have goat soup or what we call back home Manish Wata.

 Alright, so I'm going to bring my meat to boil now and I'm going to boil my meat for about 30 minutes.

 Alright, so before my pot starts to boil I'm going to add 2 teaspoons of salt.

 Okay, so we're just checking to see how our meat's cooking now.

 It's not done just yet so we're going to go ahead and cover this.

 And we're going to cook the meat until the meat is tender or falling off the bone or until our meat's just about soft.

 So I'm going to cook mine for another 40 minutes and we're going to come back and check and add our ingredients.

 And with that our meat will cook up by the time we prepare everything.

 Alright, so here I have some fresh garlic that I've just chopped up and crushed.

 And you want to make sure you take this out in a good amount of time because you don't want it to cook out and burst in your pot.

 So for your scotch bonnet pepper, if you're scared of using it, you can take it out after about 20 minutes of cooking.

 And then it'll just make your soup have this amazing flavor to it.

 Okay, so we're going to make some spinners now for our mannish water.

 And then what you want to do is bring this together like I've shown you guys in a few of my previous videos.

 And you just bring this together until you basically form a dough.

 If you find that it's sticky, just add some more flour and that will dry it all up.

 Alright, so I've just done finished kneading my dough and it's pretty much ready.

 So you want to pinch off small pieces, depending on how big you want your spinners to be.

 If there's certain things that you don't eat that I put in my pot.

 Alright, so now I'm going to add a little bit more water to my pot.

 And then I'm going to cover this and I'm going to let this cook for about 15 to 20 minutes.

 Take out your red pepper, your scotch bonnet pepper, after a certain time.

 And you have all your food in here and everything is just nice.

 I'm going to use a wide tooth comb to detangle her hair and I'm just going to gather it all

 I've already sprayed her hair with a spray bottle and it just has water and some leave-in

 Like I said, just starting from the ends and I'm going to make my way all the way up to

 I'm going to hold it just so it doesn't tangle up and just so it doesn't hurt and break any

 Now that her hair is nice and detangled, I'm going to take some Cantu Shea Butter and I'm

 I'm just going to rub it up and just put that all throughout her hair.

 Then I'm going to comb it again just to make sure it's evenly distributed.

 Next I'm going to take some Dax and I'm going to lather this all throughout her hair.

 I'm just going to lather that in my hands and I'm just going to put this through her

 If there were any areas where it was frizzy, I could just use a Denman brush and I would

 just take the little section and I would just comb it through because this really helps

 I would just smooth it through and then I would just scrunch it up.

 If I want lots of volume in her hair, I could just use a diffuser.

 I'm not sure which one it's called but it's just a Conair blow dryer.

 That is the diffuser part and I would just attach that like that.

 So when I'm going to be diffusing her hair, I'm just going to take each section and I'm

 just going to put the ends in the diffuser and then after I'm going to bring it up to

 her scalp and that's going to really help to give a lot of volume.

 And then I'll just take other sections and I'll just keep on doing that.

 So I'll take each section and I'll just put it inside there and then after when it's on

 So when I'm diffusing her hair, then I'll just take each section.

 In this video I'm going to show you how to assemble the 5 inch by 5 inch never ending

 I've seen these made before and I just created the cutting file so that you can do it at

 You'll find four identical pieces that look like this in your file.

 You're going to want to lay two of them cross ways and two of them vertically.

 Go ahead and apply some adhesive to the outer two corners and you're going to want to go

 Go ahead and line up your first piece in the corner there with your folding line going

 this way and on your other piece the folding lines are going this way.

 You're going to do the same thing in all four corners with all four corners of these.

 You're going to slide that back underneath and line those up where they're exactly the

 same and they meet corner to corner just the way that they should.

 I'm going to take this piece and push it up next to its buddy and match up the corners

 You'll notice in the file that there are all sorts of embellishment pieces and I've gone

 You'll see that you'll probably want to embellish this after you've assembled it because it's

 Once you believe that this is dry, you can go ahead and take the top two panels and fold

 You'll see that I over glued just a little bit there so I'm going to rub that off.

 Then I'm going to do the exact same thing on the other panel, folding it straight back.

 Well, your third I guess because you had your first position and that second position.

 Now, your never ending card, if you've done it right, should fold.

 Okay, that's why it's so important to get all your corners just right so that it folds

 If you have used the zip-dry glue that I recommend, you'll see that you can just rub off any excess

 There you can see that you have the base of your never ending card.

 You know that you're back to the first position when you can see these two panels going vertically

 I would just recommend taking these pieces that I have created for you and adhering them

 Of course, you could use stamps and all sorts of things to embellish these areas.

 So I had a few people asking me to do a makeup look using the new MUA Smoking palette.

 There's two looks I actually came up with so I might do the next one for next week.

 So if you want to see how I got this look, then please keep watching.

 So just to save time, I've already done my left eye and my base makeup and my lips.

 I'm just going to go in with that colour there which is called Icon.

 And then once you feel that you've got enough on the lid, I'm just going to go in with a fluffy brush.

 I'm just going to use this colour up here which is called Ghost.

 And I'm just going to lightly, and I mean very lightly, just dab that in.

 And just blend it into the crease, just so it sort of starts the transition...

 Just so it sort of starts the transition for the colour that we're going to be using on the outer corner.

 So literally, as you can see, there's hardly anything there at all.

 I'm just going to go in with this dark grey colour which is called Wicked.

 Just literally in the outer corner, blending it into the crease.

 Just blending it into that other silvery colour that we had in our crease.

 And then just to finish off the eyes, I'm going to be using the kohl pencil,

 or the eye pencil, the smoking eye pencil that came in the palette.

 But on that eye, I did use the Collection Extreme just to see what it would look like.

 So, yeah, and then for mascara, you can use false eyelashes if you want to,

 so I'm going to be using my Wild Mega Volume Mascara by Max Factor.

 or, yeah, maybe a plum sort of lip colour if you really wanted to.

 As you can see, it's absolutely gorgeous, the two contrasted colours mixed together.

 And, yeah, if you have any requests for next week's makeup video,

 then please leave a comment down below and I will try and do them,

 And, yeah, don't forget to thumbs up and subscribe if you like this video.

 so you can see sort of more of a close-up, pictures and everything like that.

 But as you can see, it is a quick, very quick, simple eye look.

 And I have a feeling I'll be wearing this a lot through the autumn-winter time.

 So, yeah, I hope you like this video and I'll see you in my next one.

 Okay, so now I'm getting ready to cut my piece of wood that's going to attach to the bottom

 So I'm going to have the glide on this side and I'll just pull this measurement.

 So it looks like if I go with 3.1, 1 1⁄4 inches, that'll be just perfect for attaching

 this and then using the nylon set screw to take up the last little bit of adjustment.

 But I'd like that nylon set screw to be mostly in the wood, tapped into the wood.

 But I found a piece of Liptus in my...well, you probably go, well what else is he using?

 I probably...that's probably why I will...I will whisper past this through the planer.

 Let's see, I'm going to cut a section about...oh, I'll give myself a little extra.

 I don't feel like moving my table saw fence right now so I'll just drop this by hand.

 The blade side of the auxiliary fence and I have it laying face down so the blue is

 The other side here is the one with the countersink holes in it.

 I'm going to use it to reference our jig to get it attached and clamped and glued in place

 So this is the glides that are going to ride on the bottom of the plywood that are going

 to ride, you know, they're going to travel with the carrier here.

 So you want to take that into consideration when you do your drill placement here, your

 So I thought I'd put two glides down low and then one glide in the middle.

 And then these really don't make any difference because now they're going to be below this

 So let's just try to, you know, let's make sure that when we have it here that we have

 A lot of this stuff I never really know until I look at it and then I just kind of, you

 know, use my experience and just, you know, get a feel for, you know, where things should

 So this looks more right now, that kind of center line there where I've got a little

 And so this is 3-8-16 and I'm going to tap using a, I'm going to, the drill size I'm

 So I'll be able to just take that line and transfer it to the other side and then just

 when I put this down on the other side and just pin it and put, you know, some little

 Hello everyone to make this recipe you will need a large bowl and a yellow cake mix

 I happen to use Duncan Hines yellow cake mix this time around but I usually buy whatever is on sale at the grocery store

 Stir that together by hand with a spoon or with an electric mixer until you get a nice smooth very thick batter

 This batter will be spread into the bottom of a 9 by 13 inch baking dish that has been greased

 Once you're done spreading that batter evenly in the bottom of the pan and bake it at 350 degrees for 8 minutes

 While you're waiting for it to bake make the topping that's 3 quarters of a cup of packed brown sugar

 3 quarters of a cup of chopped pecans and 1 and 1 half teaspoons of cinnamon

 Stir that together until combined and once the crust comes out of the oven after the 8 minutes

 Spread that topping over the crust now just kind of take it in your hands and and just kind of

 Crumble it and sprinkle it around and it's okay to leave gaps and spaces

 Between the clumps of topping then drizzle on 1 third cup of caramel topping or caramel sauce

 About 25 to 30 minutes until it's puffed up baked and golden on the edges

 And as you can see anywhere there where there wasn't any topping it puffs up a little bit higher and you get more of a cinnamon

 It is very very sweet and if you serve it warm out of the oven with a scoop of vanilla ice cream

It's a great way to use a plain old cake mix and turn it into something special

 I have many other recipes that start off using cake mixes and I put them all together in a playlist

 So if you're interested in seeing more of these types of recipes

 Go ahead and click right on your screen or see the link in the about section below the video.

 So you want to impress your friends with some delicious macarons?

 You'll need approximately 50 minutes, which includes the prepping time.

 Okay, so we need two baking trays, some baking paper, a dark marker pen and the tracing ring

 Cut the baking paper the same size as the trays and then lay it down flat with the curly

 This helps you to make the right size macaron shells every time and avoids them sticking

 Flip it over and place it in the tray curly side down and the paper will sit flat, ready

 An easier option is to print off the pre-drawn piping guide from the Zumbo website and just

 Getting the exact measurements is the first pressure point in creating your macarons.

 The meringue mix is super sensitive, so make sure you use clean metal or glass bowls and

 Whip the meringue mix and water with an electric mixer on medium speed.

 You want the mix to create a peak when you lift out the beaters, like this.

 Mix this in with a spatula, then use very, very short pulses to get the final consistency.

 Whatever you do, don't over pulse because at this point over beating will thin out the

 Put the piping bag into a big glass or mug while you're scooping it in.

 Hold the piping bag with two hands and place the tip about one centimetre above the centre

 Pull the tip away from the centre, leaving the short tail pointing straight up.

 Set the trays to burst any bubbles and let them sit for 10 minutes.

 Now this is important because if they don't rest, the shells won't have feet.

 You'll know this because the feet and tops don't compress when you press lightly.

 Take them out of the oven and then slide the paper onto the bench.

 Once the shells are cool, carefully peel them off and arrange the best 30 into 15 matching

 Now leave them to cool completely and go and prepare your filling.

 When you're making the caramel filling, just give it a quick massage to warm it up if it's

 Put the mix in a piping bag, pipe onto one shell, sandwich together, voila!

 this tab, the one for the G scale, and the name of the tab will be Harmonized Scales

 tone that I want to hit in this scale would be a slant, a forward slant, and I would be

Then the fifth tone would be two more frets up to the tenth fret with

So, D, E, F, G. The next move would be on the, starting on the twelfth

 excuse me, would start at the fourteenth fret and the middle of the bar would be on the

 and get those tones in your head and then as an exercise, I want you to memorize all

 that scale if you can and work out little melodies in your head.

 what I want you to exercise in doing is using those moves to create melodies and then pretty

 Hello everybody and welcome to another Westin Automotive installation video.

 The HDX winch mounted grill guard for the 2014 Chevy Silverado 1500 and GMC Sierra.

 The HDX winch mount grill guard has solid one piece welded uprights, features a full punch plate grill,

 and also features full wrap around 2 inch diameter wings for ultimate protection.

 It also is offered in two finishes, our very durable black powder coat,

 as well as our extremely corrosion resistant polished stainless steel.

 At first glance you will notice that the boxes are a very thick cardboard and are also assembled with very heavy duty staples.

 This is all done to ensure your product arrives to you in immaculate condition.

 As you can see, the grill guard has also been wrapped in foam and plastic,

 and the winch tray and grill guard brackets all come in their own individual boxes and separated by foam.

 Once we open up the hardware kit box, inside you'll find your install sheet,

 along with all of your brackets individually wrapped in a poly bag and your hardware kit.

 Here is the contents of both boxes laid out along with all of the tools necessary to complete the installation.

 Please refer to your install sheet to make sure that everything listed is present and free from damage.

 Once you have verified everything to be present, you can then begin.

 we must remove these black plastic clips that hold in place the black plastic radiator shroud cover.

 Once all of these clips have been removed, we can then remove it and place it to the side as we will be reinstalling it later.

 Next, we need to remove the four factory fasteners that are attaching the grill shell to the top of the radiator support.

 Please keep all of the factory fasteners and clips separate as you will need these to reinstall the grill components later.

 Now that we have these four fasteners removed, we can proceed to removing the body filler panel from in between the grill and the bumper.

 Start by removing these small fasteners that are in the inner fender well.

 As you can see, there is one that is easily visible and one that is not so easily visible that is up here at the top.

 Now, we can gently pull the body filler panel away from the vehicle

 and then we will need to move underneath the vehicle from behind the bumper.

 Once we are underneath the vehicle, remove these plastic tabs that are holding in the body filler panel and then it can be removed.

 we can now remove the four factory fasteners that are attaching it to the bottom of the radiator support.

 We need to pull up and out on the retaining tabs that are located on the radiator support in order to remove this from the vehicle.

 With all of the grill components removed, we now have access to the top of the bumper.

 We need to remove the top bumper bolts that are attaching the bumper to the frame.

 Then we will move underneath the bumper and remove the bumper support bolts as well.

 With all of these bolts removed, we are now able to remove the bumper from the frame.

 At this time, if you have tow hooks, please reference your install sheet for their removal.

 Locate these three bumper bracket bolts and loosen but do not remove them.

 Next, let's install the driver's side winch tray mounting bracket

 by slipping it into the frame rail and loosely securing it using the supplied M12 hardware.

 Please repeat all of these steps for the passenger side brackets except for the loosening of the bumper bracket bolts.

 If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, the plastic bumper insert will look like the one we have here.

 If not, you will need to trim your plastic insert here in the tow hook areas to allow clearance for the previously installed mounting brackets.

 Once this has been completed, we can then tighten the bumper bracket bolts.

 Now we can take our bumper and reinstall it, but we will be using the top factory bumper bolts to install the upper support brackets.

 Leave these loosely attached as these will need to be adjusted later.

 Now, measure from the center of the bumper to the outer edge of the bracket and adjust to 20 5 8 inches.

 Once your brackets have been fully adjusted, they must be fully tightened and torqued so they do not lose their adjustment.

 Next, take your winch tray and lay it on top of the mounting brackets you previously installed.

 Then, align the holes in the winch tray with the holes in the brackets and loosely attach them using the hardware provided.

 Do not fully tighten any of these fasteners at this time to allow for alignment and adjustment of the winch tray later.

 If you will be installing tow hooks, part number 46-3005 now will be the time to do so.

 Inside the box, you'll find your install sheet along with your hardware kit, and you'll also find your tow hook.

 Now, before we install the tow hooks, the threads of the button head fasteners that are used to install them must have anti-seize applied to the threads to prevent galling and seizing, as they are stainless steel.

 Now, you can take your tow hook and align it with the holes in the winch tray and attach it using the hardware provided.

 If you are installing a winch, do so now before installing the grill guard.

 Our winch trays will accommodate most major brand winches with a 10 by 4 1⁄2 inch bolt pattern.

 At this time, we can reinstall all of the grill components in the same way that they were removed.

 Take the spacers and attach them to both sides of the winch tray using the hardware provided with your grill guard.

 With assistance, take your grill guard and slip it around the winch tray and the upper support brackets.

 First, take your grill guard and align it with the upper support strap, and then attach it using the hardware provided.

 This hardware is stainless steel, and anti-seize will need to be applied.

 Then, align the bottom mounting holes with the spacer bracket and attach it using the hardware provided as well.

 Using the Allen wrenches that were provided with your kit, along with the appropriate socket and ratchet,

 after aligning and adjusting the grill guard as we see fit, we can then begin to tighten all of the hardware at this time.

 Start by tightening all of the hardware that attaches the grill guard to the winch tray, and then move on to the mounting brackets.

 Now that all of the fasteners have been tightened, we can begin the torquing process.

 The torquing process is in place to prevent over-tightening of the fasteners, and also to prevent the fasteners from coming loose.

 Please refer to your install sheet for bolt location as to not over-torque or under-torque any one fastener.

 Please torque all M10 fasteners to 30 to 35 foot-pounds, and torque all M12 fasteners to 50 to 55 foot-pounds.

 Once the torquing has been completed, your installation is now finished.

 Thank you for watching the Westin Automotive installation video for part number 57-93685,

 the HDX winch-mounted grill guard for the 2014 and up Chevy Silverado 1500s.

 Over here I got a little bit of cornmeal and some bacon grits down there, cast iron pan.

 We're gonna try to make us a pizza in our cast iron pan tonight and see how it turns

What did I say, bacon grease, a little cornmeal at the bottom of this cast iron pan

Alright, now I've made some, it's gonna be a breakfast pizza so I've made some sausage

 your pizza sauce, marinara sauce or whatever you would normally use on your pizza.

 if you don't know how to make this sausage gravy, I've got a video.

 Now I didn't cook these eggs all the way done because it's gonna go in the oven.

 turn out to be very pretty, but I guarantee it might be pretty damn good.

 And as always, the tripod's in the way, so you guys are going to have to wait.

 be back in about, I'll check in about ten minutes and see where we're at.

Because that cast iron pan was screaming hot and I just wanted it

But before I pull it out of there, I want to give a mention to a buddy of mine

I cooked something a while back and I was needing some kind of, I was needing

 oh, a dude at Eddie's podcast channel sent me a bottle of paprika.

 cast iron pan over here to this cutting board, which also was a gift from Sue over at Sue's

So today we're going to film a foundation 101 type of video so I don't have

My shade is 08, although that's a little bit dark for me right now because, you know,

 I'm not going to conceal this or put anything over it because it's rather raw, so I'd rather

 to do my forehead first, but you can start at your cheeks if you want.

 this, circular motions, just like that, taking care of going all over the surface.

 need to extend it all the way to your neck because if you do have the need to do that,

 going to just pat it in, the tip, into the foundation, and go in circular motions under

I usually do this after I have finished my makeup to clean up, but if you're not going

 to do a heavy eyeshadow or you're going to just leave it like that, you can do it at

 this, I'm going to take... If you have a coverage problem, you can use a heavier powder, like

 a powder foundation instead of a translucent powder, but I wouldn't recommend that, really.

 Most of you viewers from Sassy are young, so mostly you don't need this.

 have a really, really bad acne problem, just tell your parents and go to a dermatologist

 and leave it there because makeup tends to make the problem worse.

 discolorations, like for instance this one, I usually don't do it, but what you can do

 brush, and you just dab it over like that with your foundation.

 really severe problem, I would stay away from concealer because most young girls don't need

 the US anymore, and it's a rather harsh treatment, so don't get ideas in your head.

 is just your hormones acting out, and there is nothing you can do about it.

So, I was rambling about acne, and we are talking about foundation.

 I would say try to powder the under eye area very very lightly because it's really delicate

 the foundation I'm going to do for every look, unless it's like a photoshoot look, but the

 real difference is the type of foundation more than the application.

Oh, and look out, there are two videos for two looks coming up right

They don't just drink 10 pints of Stella and then have tequila with some

 it as a sipping spirit, much like people do with brandy or with a nice rum or good whiskey,

The idea is you have a sip of your sangrita and a sip of your tequila and it complements

Traditionally it's almost like a Bloody Mary where it's Worcestershire sauce,

 Tabasco sauce, some carrot juice and tomato juice, lemon, lime, salt, pepper, etc.

 not the biggest fan of tomato juice so I'm going to show you a different method to actually

You get very bored of drinking tequila with lime and lemon and this

 straight in and we're going to get one seed out for the chilli love.

 your hands after you eat some chilli, it will make going to the bathroom very, very painful.

 What we're going to do now is give everything a really, really hardcore monster shake.

 want to break up and extract the flavour from the herbs and I really want to damage the

Shake it quite a while and you're going to get a nice chilli bite to it as well.

Okay, pineapple's changed colour, all the herbs have broken down.

 likes to have that rather sexy smile with loads of coriander on the top of your mouth.

 a sip of the green sangrita, have a sip of the tequila and keep asking for more.

 Once you've learned the skill of rolling a spring roll, you can turn it into a Mediterranean feast with focaccia and artichokes and olives and sun-dried tomatoes.

 So we're going to stir-fry some veggies and add them to our pan.

 We could have vegetarian if you really, really want to add some meat.

 I'm going to use a little bit of chicken breast, which I'm going to just cut into little...

 Remember that the vegetables are going to cook very, very quickly.

 So when you're adding chicken, you don't want your chicken to be raw.

 You want it to cook to absolute perfection and it's going to be nice and succulent.

 I wanted the ginger to be like a vegetable, not just as a seasoning because I want to chew it

 and I want it to make my circulation flow all over my body because that's what ginger does.

 And because we're chopping it nice and rough, we're not going to smell so bad.

 If you have a look inside of your garlic, there's a little stem.

 That little stem there normally makes you regurgitate it every five minutes

 and makes all of those lovely aromas come oozing out of your pores.

 Basically, what I want to do is I want to just wet the vegetables down.

 The Chinese would use peanut oil or grape oil is also very nice.

 Now, the chicken's going to go in first because that is what we want to cook.

 And we're going to put a little bit of Sichuan pepper, which is going to give it a bit of a kick.

 I'm going to put in the ginger because I want that to just cook down a bit.

 And we're not going to add any salt to this because we're going to flavor it with a little bit of soy sauce.

 We're going to use a bit of light soy, which gives you lots and lots of flavor.

We're going to go in the pan with what takes the longest to cook.

 It's actually quite nice sometimes with a bit of turmeric in your stir-frying.

 You'll find that in Jian in China, you get quite a few curries because that's where the Muslim influence is in China.

 And the minute my chicken starts to change color, I'm going to switch this off.

 And if there's just the tiniest, tiniest, tiniest drop of pink left in your chicken,

 by the time I've cooked it off in the hot oil, it's going to be perfection.

 Okay, and because I want this flavor to be intense, I'm putting the coriander in literally right at the end.

 But because we're going to roll it straight away, we're going to just do that.

You don't want to have any little gaps for the oil to creep in, okay?

 Because that's when it becomes unhealthy, when it's too fatty, when it's too greasy.

 And I know a lot of people say that Chinese food, and in certain instances, there is a lot of fat and a lot of grease in it.

 But 99.9% of the time, Chinese food is actually very, very healthy, even the deep-fried stuff,

 You're going to pull it back because you want it nice and tight.

 Take it a little bit over there, a little bit of egg, or you can use corn flour or flour.

 Just like that, you have this gorgeous little parcel, and we're going to pop them into the oil.

 We're going to just, and once again, remember, don't leave them until they're brown, brown, brown,

 A little bit of coriander, some sweet chili sauce, or you could dip it, if you wanted to take it a step further,

 you could dip it in some soy sauce with a little bit of ginger, some chili, et cetera, and et cetera.

 If you have an American type toilet with a flexible water supply line, like on this toilet,

 then you can easily install the mini shower in less than 5 minutes without tools or a

 If you do not have a flexible water supply line, please see our video on how to replace

 Your sprayer kit includes everything you will need for easy installation, including the

 spray wand, pre-assembled solid brass toilet adapter with on-off pressure control valve

 which includes two ASME certified backflows, sprayer holder and tank clip, and the new

 patent pending stainless steel pressure flex spray hose, which stays completely flexible

 To begin the installation, turn off your toilet water supply valve and then flush the toilet.

 Next, put a small towel under the tank where the water supply line attaches.

 Now, unscrew the water supply line nut that connects to the bottom of your toilet tank.

 This nut should easily unscrew by hand without tools, but if it does not easily unscrew,

 Next, you will be installing the toilet adapter which is fully assembled when you receive

 Before screwing the adapter on the tank threads, make sure the black washer is in the bottom

 To install the adapter on the tank threads, hold the wing nut level as you screw on the

 Once the threads are lined up straight, the adapter should screw on very easily.

 Before completely tightening the wing nut, position the valve so it's easy for you to

 After the wing nut starts to become tight, you will only need to turn it a small amount

 Once the nut is tight and leak free, the valve will become stationary and will not be able

 Next, screw the water supply line onto the bottom of the toilet adapter.

 Next, you will connect the stainless steel spray hose to the valve.

 Before screwing the hose nut on the valve threads, check to see if the black washer

 Screw the hexagon shaped nut on the spray hose to the valve threads.

 Hand tight is usually good, but a wrench or pliers may be needed.

 Be sure not to over tighten the nuts, which could damage the black washer.

 Next, you will connect the stainless steel spray hose to the sprayer.

 Before screwing the hose nut on the sprayer threads, check to see if the black washer

 Once the hose nut is screwed on tight, there will be a small space between the top of the

 This space will allow you to tighten the hose nut more if you notice leaking due to compression

 Put the small nut in the back of the clip and push the screw in the front of the holder.

 Now, hang the clip on the side of the tank under the lid and place the sprayer into the

 You have completed the installation of the mini shower and it is time to check for leaks.

 Larger leaks will be very noticeable, but be sure to closely examine the valve for any

 Now, turn on the mini shower valve and check the sprayer for any leaks.

 If the sprayer is not leaking, you are ready to use the mini shower.

 Press the black button a few times and be sure that the stream of water is steady and

 Make sure the valve will adjust the sprayer pressure from a jet stream to a gentle spray

 Before hanging the sprayer in the holder, turn off the valve, press the black button

 to release pressure in the hose, and give the sprayer a few shakes into the toilet.

 Most importantly, be sure to turn the valve off after each use.

 Hi, I'm Tammy and I'm going to show you how to take down a color and to get the color off the hairline.

 I've been processing for 30 minutes and she's ready to take out.

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to wet her hair just a little bit around here just to get the wetness and I'm

Now a lot of people when they do hair color they will use Vaseline or

 gets into the hair then that hair that was covered with Vaseline will not take.

 The color should come off right with it and whatever you have excess

 you can just remove with some color touch or some color remover.

 Now whenever you're shampooing out a hair color you want to shampoo it two times.

 The first time is going to get most of the color out but the second time is going to really clean it.

 you really want to use the balls of your finger not your nails.

 You don't want to lift the nozzle away too much because then it's going to squirt them.

 You can keep it on their scalp but not like you're pushing against it so you're scratching their scalp.

 You just want to keep it real close to their head so it doesn't squirt.

 Rinse it until you don't see any bubbles and it's squeaky clean.

 Okay so now I'm going to squeeze out the excess and I'm going to apply my conditioner.

 It's also great for clients, especially ones you do color on because it really hydrates the hair.

 And I usually work it in real good and get it into the ends, leave it on for a minute or so.

 There's no color left on her hairline because as I showed you, I worked the color in with the color,

 mixed the shampoo in it, and those two concactions get the color out.

 And while she's conditioning, I'm just going to go over and see if I see any leftover around her ears.

 So even if you use the technique I just showed you by working it in with the shampoo,

 and it still is staining around the hair, like I like to call it a halo around the hairline,

 you can, after you blow dry your hair, go over it again with the stain remover.

 The heat from the dryer will open up the pores in your skin and it will be easier to get the color out.

 That's how you clean up a hairline after a color and how you rinse a color out.

 Hello everyone and today we're going to cook Cugeles, that is potato pie.

 And for that we need potatoes, about a kilo or two kilos of potatoes,

 and onion, two onions, and also get ready the salt and black pepper.

 but if you do not have it, you can use the grater, like this one, the small one.

 I think you will get really tired grating like two kilos of potatoes for the potato pie.

 The mass wouldn't be too watery, you have to take one third of the mass and take all the water out.

 After that we will pour the milk into the potatoes and this is to make them whiter.

 And the milk is still on the stove, we are waiting for it to boil.

 The milk is boiling now and we are going to pour it into the potato mass.

 And this was already prepared in advance, fried in the frying pan.

 And if you are a vegetarian, you just do not add any meat in it.

 When everything is ready, we are going to put this dish into the preheated oven.

 If the ham is salty, then you do not need to add any salt into the sauce.

 Hi, I'm Dave from Recording Guru, and I'm going to show you a non-destructive way of

 So whatever you do, in the past I tried using the glue that comes with a lot of acoustic

 foam, and it holds the foam up really well, but the problem is when you eventually have

 to move it and remove it, it leaves a big mess and it's really hard to remove.

 So some things that I've been doing in the past trying to find a good way to attach foam

 onto the walls is I've been taking Velcro strips, and I've been using those because

 the tape is so strong on them to be able to hang up on the walls, but the problem is the

 Velcro still, on the other side, the part that attaches to the wall, will still pull

 So recently I've been using these Command 8 strips, and these are great because you

 can pull them, you can pull the tab after they've attached to the wall, you can pull

 this tab off and it will remove from the wall without leaving any residue or without pulling

 The problem with the Command 8 strips is that they're really expensive and they don't hold

 So what I've done is I've done a hybrid of using the fuzzy side of Velcro and super gluing

 And I find Gorilla Glue works great, but any kind of really strong glue I would go ahead

 And then you can actually use one large strip and cut it in half, and I am actually just

 And you can put the strip right onto the Velcro and it will hold very well.

 As you can see I've already done that, and I've now taken it off.

 But you just press this up here for 30 seconds, and I often do that when they're already pushed

 And then that's how I've hung up all the foam panels in here and in another room that I

 And they have been holding really well, and when it's time for me to move, since this

 is just a temporary location, it will be easy for me to be able to remove all the foam without

 When I step to the free throw line, and I'm just joking around, I may shoot a free throw

 Well, the purpose that I shoot with my eyes closed is that I want to believe in the fundamentals

 When you step to the free throw line, and you go through your ritual, and you set your

 target, and now that you close your eyes, you think the dimensions change?

 And if you have total comfort in your free throw stroke or your fundamentals, you should

 Not just going to shoot with the same percentage, but when you release it, you know it's in

 the same target, at the same target, with the same type of shot.

 So good practice tool is to start, go through your ritual, see everything, make the first

 Look at your target, and right before you shoot it, close your eyes.

 Now a lot of guys who don't have comfort in their free throw shot, when they close their

 And that's a good way to test your fundamentals under pressure.

 Because if you can shoot them with your eyes closed, quite naturally you can shoot them

 when there's 6,000 or 4,000 people paying attention to your shot.

 Another tool for getting the correct backspin, as I talked earlier about once the ball hits

 the rim and starts to bounce around a little bit, may give you a better chance of making

 a shot, is when you're laying at home at night, and you're really bored, take your

 basketball, which you're probably sleeping with if you're a basketball player, and shoot

 Lay your head on the pillow, shoot it straight up, and try to have the basketball come back

 Now if you can do that, and do it with some consistency, then you get the correct form

 What I used to do is I'd try to shoot it straight up and catch it right on my nose.

 As you can see, the finish and everything, the backspin is perfect, you're shooting it

 Now if you're using these two fingers, the ball's going to start to go left or right,

 and it's not going to end up on your nose, it's probably going to end up on your ear,

 And these are the thoughts that you should work on, just trying to enhance your correct

 They worked for me, they may not work for you, but at least give it a try, next thing

 Hello, my name is Leon and I'm from passion4dancing.com and today I'm going to teach you about the

 So the first thing you want to understand is that there are a total of 8 beats in each

 And these beats of 8 keep repeating throughout the whole entire song.

 So if I were to call them out it would be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

 So what you want to do as a dancer is match your steps to those 8 beats in the music.

 And I think the easiest way for me to illustrate how it works is by doing a basic step.

 I'm going to do the basic step of the salsa and count it out for you using those 8 beats.

 So as you just saw I was counting all of the 8 beats but I was only making 6 steps.

 And the reason for that is that you have to realize that on counts 4 and 8 we pause.

 So let's show it one more time and I'm going to call out when I pause.

 Now that you know that you have to pause on counts 4 and 8 you can eliminate those counts

 completely and just count 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 and this is the most commonly used count right

 So let's zoom in again to my feet and I'm going to count with the 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 count.

 Now that you learned how to count your salsa with the numbers I'm going to give you another

 Because you're pausing on counts 4 and 8 you get that feeling of quick, quick, slow timing.

 So I'm going to illustrate right now the basic step again using the quick, quick, slow timing.

 Quick, quick, slow, quick, quick, slow and again quick, quick, slow, quick, quick, slow.

 I hope you enjoyed this salsa timing lesson and that you are now able to count your salsa

 Please visit passionfordancing.com for more dance instruction videos just like this one.

 Hey, this is Dave with the Shepherd School and what we're going to do today is we're

 going to make a do-it-yourself vacuum former so that we can mold thermoplastics.

 An interesting way, I guess, to do Kydex without having to use a Kydex press, but it's for

 So I've got a piece of old pegboard and I've got about $17 worth of new wood, which is

 The other two we're going to make frames to hold the plastic, and then I have a 2x3 board.

 So basically what we're going to do is we're going to cut this board and we're going to

 Two of them are 24 inches long because that's the length of the board.

 Two of them are 21 inches long to take into account the width of the other boards to make

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to take a hole saw and cut through.

 For those of you that are woodworkers, you probably hit wood kicking yourself that I

 used a hole saw to drill through that because that's not the proper tool, but that's what

 And it has to be this size because I've got this tube from my shop vac that has to fit

 And what I ended up having to do was drill through, okay, then drill through the other

 end, and then I had to take my chisel and chisel out and then go through it one more

 Now what I have to do is make my frame, and I'm going to glue and I'm going to screw everything

 together because this needs to be as airtight as possible to direct all the air through

 Okay, we've glued this down and now we're just putting some screws in the corner to

 I burned my thumb pretty good on a different project, so I'm having a hard time holding

 And the way it basically works is I take the side with the hole in it, I shove this

 in there, attach it to my shop vac, take a frame that's got a thermoplastic in it, put

 Then I take whatever I want to form, and it's basically the same idea as regular casting

 I want something that doesn't have any overhanging parts to get caught, you know, something like

 If I were to stick the candle like that, it would form and suck around it where I couldn't

 But if I did it upside down like this, because it's a nice transition, you know, because

 it's a nice transition, when you take the floppy plastic, lay it on the frame over the

 Then I hit the shop vac, suck all the air out, the air is going to have a vacuum in

 these holes and it's going to suck the plastic, you know, down around it, form fitting, okay?

 Then I let it cool, take the frame off, take my mold out, and then just cut it out, alright?

 You put the ingot on there, put the plastic on there, and it sucks it down just like that,

 And so I'm running out of daylight here, running out of weekend, the wife's home from her mother,

 so I'm going to put this up for the day, go out and play with my baby and the kid.

 And then next week what we'll do is we'll make the actual frames and try to mold something,

 So I appreciate you watching, and until next time, you can always catch us online at www.tngun.com.

 Alright guys this is JayZ0507 here with an unboxing of the iPhone 4S in black 16GB.

 So when you have the box facing the bottom, you just see kind of like half of the iPhone

 4S and there's an antenna rig, the rear switch going up and going down, the microphone, I

 At the side, you have an antenna rig, rear switch going up and going down, you have another rear switch on the bottom, you have a speaker,

 you have your pentalobe screws, your dock connector and your microphone.

 Hi guys this is JayZ0507 here with an unboxing of the iPhone 4S in black 16GB.

 On the side it says iPhone 4S, on the bottom it says iCloud, on the left side it has iPhone 4S again and then on the top it has the Apple logo.

 When you unbox it, you have your iPhone 4S right on the top, there's an antenna rig right there, ringer switch, volume up, volume down,

 another antenna rig, you have your speaker, your dock connector, your microphone.

 On the other side you have your antenna rig, sim card slot, you have another antenna rig, so all together there's four.

 On the top you have your power button, you have your second microphone for noise cancellation,

 On the front you have your receiver, your VGA resolution camera, your home button.

 On the back you have your 8MP camera with autofocus and five optic lenses.

 If we open this, you have your sim card opener, your pen, and then you have a bunch of manuals

 You get your dock connector and sync connector, and then you get your headphones with the volume up and down switch.

 I just got this from the Apple store so I still haven't activated it.

 They actually fixed the problem on the iPhone 4, the antenna problem.

 I've heard great reviews about it, and I have to see if they're all true.

 Hi this is Julie with Beadaholique.com and I want to show you how to really quickly and

 here's a bracelet that Carlin did and she just made a nice little tassel just to

 is some pearl cotton, a pair of scissors, you don't have to use this type of

 scissor, whatever nice sharp scissor you have at home will work fine

 is you're going to take your pearl cotton and you're going to unwind some of it

 now if you wanted to you could carefully measure out about four inches

 if you don't want to use your hand you can use an object, you can use your cell phone to wrap it

 I'm actually thinking I want to make this one a little thicker.

 my tail and before going further I'm going to just grab a piece

 that's about fourteen inches or so long, twelve to fourteen inches

 the end and this is why I like to do it wrapped around an object

 when I'm happy with the number of wrappings I'm going to just tie a knot

 I'm going to trim off some of these bigger ones and I'm going to cut

 this is why I wasn't too worried about measuring to begin with because I knew

 really quick and easy to make and what's great is pearl cotton comes in a bunch

 so you really have a lot of options and it's not going to fray and if it does fray a

 Hi, well as you can hopefully hear today we're going to have a look at Brian Setzer's The

 Although as most of you probably are aware anyway it's not Brian Setzer playing the solo.

 But that's okay, some great country type ideas and well let's see what's in store for us.

 So we're going to start off with just building up before the solo on a C power chord for

 The solo starts off with a D note on the fifth fret of the A string, then to the seventh

 Then we're going to play the seventh fret of the D string, seventh fret of the G, back

 to the seventh fret of the D. Ninth fret of the G to the seventh fret of the G.

 Then we slide up to the 11th on the G and pick the 10th on the high E.

 With that note on the high E still sustaining, slide that up to the 14th and then pick the

 14th on the G string and then the high E, the 12th fret on the high E string.

 Bring it down, pull up, pull up to the 12th, 14th, bend up to the 15th, bring it down,

 And you could probably just let that come down on its own, you could re-pick it I suppose.

 Then shift down to the 14th with your third finger on the high E and we're going to do

 a series of hammer-ons and pull-offs with occasionally picking.

 Just playing the second fret G string, first fret B string, open E string.

 Slide up to the 7th on the D string and then make a little bar and play a little A minor triad.

 Now we're going to do the same type of thing from here but with a little C chord here and up here.

 Slide to the 7th, slide to the 10th, finish outlined a little C.

 going to smooth out Gemma's hair just so that when we pull it back, it doesn't have these

 effect you want to give is you want it to look really tight, really sleek.

 just using some hairspray just to help smooth out the hair to make it a little bit easier

 doing this yourself, then you can use a normal elastic band, a hair band, you can even use

This is how we do it because this is how you keep it super tight.

 now going to backcomb the loose part of Gemma's hair to create some volume so that when we

 some of the backcombing so that it's not sitting too pieced, it becomes more of a solid shape

We'll then pull the hair around into one piece, pop two fingers in, and we gently

 shape because it needs to suit you, your face, and where you're going.

 pinch the pin before we insert it into the hair and this is what keeps it nice and tight.

 So you pass through the hair and back underneath the bun and this is what will secure it.

 can see with the shape of the bun, it's not a ballerina bun which is just all wrapped

If Gemma pops her head down, you see the hair actually loops around to

Now if you fancy a little bit more of a relaxed look, then you can gently

 let down the bits of hair around the face, slightly loosen up the bun because once the

 actual correct shape's in, you can then individualise it a little bit.

 Anchor Riding Sails help to keep sailboats from swinging from side to side at anchorage.

 Simply hank the sail to the boat's backstay and sheet it into one side.

 becomes the back edge of the sail as it attaches to the backstay.

 Then tear off the paper backing and place the one panel on top, making sure that that

 of the fabric to that seam line and you've got a beautiful panel.

 the patch material that had been stapled by Sailrite onto this assembly to make it easier

Place that stitch right along that edge using a zigzag if you have it.

 its length, rotate the fabric over so you can see the other edge quite easily and use

 that as a reference as you're feeding it through your machine to guide that stitch nice and

If you had a straight stitch machine, you may want to put four stitches in it.

 this seam allowance, we're going to be putting three zigzag stitches in.

 see here this is the tack edge where I had to remove that patch that had been stapled

We're going to assemble this patch so that it fits nicely in that corner

So you'll be able to easily see where that staple was just by looking

You'll see here that I'm putting it on the inside of those hemlines that have

 We should be doing it around the entire perimeter of the patch so that it sews on nice and flat.

 Remove the paper on the back side of the tape and then baste it in place.

 third patch as well and you're ready to move on to the next step.

So obviously as you can see in this video, you want to put the smaller patch on the bottom,

 medium size on top of that, and then the largest size is the last patch.

Now as you can see here, the last two patches on this sail I've left

 it all the way to the three sides just to make sure that those panels are going to be

 and apply them in the right position so they match up with those hemlines on the edges

If you find that a patch hasn't gone down correctly, you can easily remove

 of the patches have been basted in place, I'll take it over to the sewing machine.

 I actually like to mark where those smaller patches are with a pencil and then take a

 ruler and just draw a guide line down that patch so that I know exactly where that stitch

 is going to lay because I can't really see through this material well enough to see where

 making sure that we are on top right up to the edge of that smaller panel on the bottom

 but I noticed on one side that technically those stitches aren't really being protected

So you really should reverse at both the beginning and the end to lock

Here we are sewing the final third stitch onto this patch assembly.

 to apply double sided tape along the leech and the foot along the inner hemline and then

 second double sided tape as I'm going to do a little bit later and then baste it over

 then all I do is just line up that cut edge along that hemline that Jeff has plotted onto

 along the inner edge of that hemline and we're going to fold it over that, creating

 For this pizza, what we're going to do is we're just going to roll out a dough just

 Before we pre-bake it, we're going to actually go on top with a little melted butter and

 Once it comes out of the oven, we're going to go down with some marscapone cheese that

 And if you guys have not had a sweet pizza, my God, you've got to do one.

 We're going to be doing a whole series on sweet pizzas because there's so many crazy

 We're making this one a little thicker because it's going to be a little bit heavier.

 Not too much, just enough to get a little something for the sugar to stick and bind

 We're using these silicone basters these days in our test kitchen because they clean up

 so nice and they hold up to temperature and all the different abuses that we put them

 We're going to go with a little bit of sugar, not too much, just a little something.

 And the sugar, what this is going to do, this is going to caramelize right now in the oven

 We're going to half bake it right now and then we're going to finish cooking it.

 So we're going to let that bake and it'll take maybe 40 seconds, 50 seconds.

 While that's baking, we're going to take our maraschipone cheese, just a little bit,

 I'm going to come down with some clover honey from my dad's garden.

 Some of them we're doing with Nutella but just blend it up together.

 Let's go check on our dough because it's probably pretty much ready to go.

 This is going to add a nice little balance to the sweetness of it.

 Bring in a little salty tanginess and add a really gourmet level to your pizzas.

 While that's getting ready, we're going to go ahead and get our pizza peel ready.

 Dessert pizzas are better done at a little bit of a lower temperature than your normal pizzas.

 The balance of the sweetness of the pears with the cinnamon and the gorgonzola, this works really well.

 I'm sure that your pizzas are going to be as delicious as this.

 This is my tutorial on how to contour a very round bulbous nose.

 I'm using my Anastasia Beverly Hills palette in the colors Camel, Champagne, and Golden

 So first I take the number 15 from Zodona Lace with the Camel color and I'm just going

 Nothing too different from anyone else that's contouring their nose, it's just I really

 And I just take the barest amount of product and just blend it up and down the shaft, sorry

 Just slowly building that color and just blending it as I go is super super important.

 Then I take that same brush, add a little bit more product and I do, I guess the hollows

 One of the problems of having a bulbous, round nose is that you just don't really have a

 So I'm just going in with my Camel and just making it a lot more darker, a lot more defined,

 And then now I'm connecting the nostril to the bridge that I was creating.

 And the color I'm using is Camel which is like a really nice reddy, it's kind of like

 It's not too red, if you go too red and use like a straight up bronzer, then it's going

 I've never seen anyone else do this and if it's weird then by all means don't do it.

 But I go in a circle with my nose which seems counterintuitive if you have a round nose

 But I just feel like it creates this really cute button effect on my nose.

 You don't have to go in a circle, you could just kind of do a horseshoe with your nose.

 Then I'm taking my Champagne and Golden Peach from Anastasia with my fingers and just going

 Then I'm going to go in just one more time with that Camel color and just go back over

 it and just get really precise shadows and highlights through my nose and just slim it

 my nose and just really brighten the areas on the side of the darkness.

 Just so that it kind of gives the illusion that that's actually my nose and that all

 Like if you use a color that's lighter than your skin, like considerably lighter than

 So I'm using Golden Peach, which is just like a nice highlight color.

 whenever you turn left and right and such, it's just going to look a little bit crazy.

 Hit the like button if you found this tutorial helpful and I'll do some more for you guys.

 Okay, so I've got my GoPro Hero 2 set up here on my Icon variant.

 And that's not exactly the position I'm going to have it because I'd have to fiddle with

 So it has the hole built into the side, which the previous case didn't, the standard case.

 Obviously the cable is way longer, the wire cable, whatever you want to call it, is way

 And then from there, I'd have to figure out a way to secure the microphone.

 In fact, I guess I could just theoretically sit on my chin skirt.

 But there is this polyurethane foam type material in the inside.

 So the skeleton case now offers the ability to plug in a 3.5mm microphone.

 You need to use it with the skeleton case that has the holes built into it.

 I guess you could drill your own holes into the other case too if you really wanted to.

 This little sharp curve here I guess could probably be a problem.

 Maybe I'll put a piece of tape there to keep it straighter there.

 I'll have to hear, listen and watch what that sounds like on video.

 This video demonstrates the proper procedure for conducting a soil density

 level, and somewhat larger than the volume measuring device base plate.

 level surface aids in the test accuracy because two volume measure readings are

 remove the top portion of the subgrade to ensure a representative test site.

 Place the base plate over the smoothed area and securely fasten it down with

 Place the volume measure on the base plate for the initial reading.

 device is in place, using the bulb type pump and while holding down the volume

 measure, force the water down into the balloon until resistance is felt.

 the calibrated pressure and note the reading on the glass cylinder.

 reading is noted, reverse the bulb type pump in the quick coupler and pump the

 The next step in the rubber balloon test procedure is to dig a hole with a soil

 approximately five to six inches deep to get required amount of soil needed for

Exercise care in digging the test hole so that soil around the top

Depth markings on the auger, such as shown here, help to ensure the proper

 Place all of the loose material from the hole into a moisture-tight container.

 soil removed from the test hole will be used for weight and moisture content

 With the use of a brush, sweep all fines remaining on the base plate into the

Remove the material brushed into the hole and place it in the container

 The wind and sun can quickly draw moisture out of the soil removed from

Therefore, a cover should be placed on the sample container before

 noted, reverse the bulb-type pump in the quick coupler and pump the water back up

 location before completing the final steps of the test as well as final

 Hello, Kismet Cake here, going to tort, well that's a posh version, I'm going to split

You know when you split your cakes and sometimes when you start with

 your knife and it goes all cockeyed and up and down and all malarkey, it's a proverbial

 but if I take it out, put it the other way, you've got a bit more of a space.

 not quite deep enough, get another plate, rustle, rustle, rustle into the cupboard.

 it's like a frame that you chuck your cake in and it's got all line marks for your cakes to go

Okay, now you can tort your cake, do it nicely, and I'll give you a quick

Kiss my cake, cake loves some hugs, oh crumbs, get torting or posh word

 Hi, I'm Shotgun Fred of the BBQGuru.com and in our previous segment we started a demonstration

 nice gloves that we have on the site, you can easily manipulate this wok.

 Now I've taken the sausage that I put in there with a little oil and I've broken it

So I've got it browned sufficiently so that I can set it aside and

 then I'll still have some of these oils in which to start browning my rice.

 to just dump this off into this bowl and I'll be putting that back on later.

 caramelized and browned and it's got all kinds of goodies in it.

 I would start by putting water in the wok and then I would put my rice in and then I'd

 to use the oil and I'm going to allow the oil to brown my rice.

 a little bit more oil so I'll just dump a little bit more oil in there.

 this type of cooking is it's kind of flying by the seat of your pants.

 of this and a little of that and watch the process, vary the process.

 nice colors in there now so that later when I put my vegetables in, I'll cabbage, I'll

 cabbage and so forth, I'll be able to get some nice color variations and I'll be able

 the rice, now you see how nicely the VersaGrate keeps that wok on center.

 wok, use one hand to operate the wok, the other hand to operate the stirrer and I can

 keep scratching off all that, all those little flavor particles that want to stick to the

This is a good thing and I can take this to any extent that I want.

 I'll just add a little broth, this is chicken broth and just keep stirring it.

 to moisturize it all at once because I want to keep adding flavors so that the rice will

In the next section we'll cover it up, let it steam a while, add

 This is Rachel from 5 Minutes For Me with a quick exercise that you could do from at

 Relieve a little bit of stress, tension and make you more comfortable sitting throughout

 We're going to take our hands and place them behind our back, clasping one wrist.

 Simply lean forward in your chair looking straight out across the room to the wall.

 Lean all the way down until your chest touches your knees and sit almost all the way up,

 Take a few minutes once or a few times a day to make yourself feel better.

 Refresh, recharge and return to your daily activities at your best.

 Hello everyone, this is Maui Starman again and this time we are going to walk you through

 I did this for the 650, it's pretty much the same but small couple of differences and I

 thought since I had the opportunity to do it on this bike, I was going to record it

 First thing is to open up your side cover, left side cover and here we have the pump

 In this case, the AIS has been disconnected already, it just didn't take off all the

 Here's the pump, in this case it was just looped and that way it eliminates all the

 Here we have this one was looped here too and that way pretty much, like I said, eliminated

 Today we are going to take off the tubing and show you how to take off the elbows from

 Stick with me, first thing we are going to do is open up these clamps and separate that

 Next thing we will do is take off the clamp that holds the tubing and also holds the clutch

 Alright, and now we go up to the front where the tube is connected to the elbow and into

 So here we are going to use this short screwdriver so we can turn this thing around.

 We are going to do the same thing and loose from the left side the clamp.

 Alright, now we removed all the tubing and we are going to get into the difficult part

 One of the things I forgot to mention at the very beginning, the best and easiest way to

 The front and back needs to be removed in order to have a little bit more room.

 You have to work in a couple of really tight spots there but by removing the exhaust it

 Alright guys, now we are going to do the rear elbow and the rear cylinder.

 We are going to mount the bar, flat bar, right in the inside part of the elbow and we are

 About four good blows with the hammer and it comes out immediately.

 As you can see, it took me about four minutes to take the whole AIS system off.

 I know from experience, my first time it took me about an hour and a half trying to figure

 Alright guys, here are the two 45 caliber cases and we are going to proceed to install them.

 There is not enough lighting but we just put them right in the hole there and that is the

 We are going to go up to the front cylinder and we are going to do exactly the same thing.

 I am going to make some chicken salad in a whole wheat tortilla for lunch.

 And I'm going to use fat-free mayonnaise, some cranberries, some walnuts, which I'm

 And I have a whole roasted chicken from Whole Foods Market, some celery.

 And for my man, he hates mayonnaise, so I'm just going to make him a sliced chicken breast

 with some, more like a taco or burrito with some melted cheese.

 So that's what we're having for lunch, and I'll show you how to do it real quick.

 Basically, you just want to slice up the celery, chicken, some mayo, put it all together with

 Probably not going to use enough for today because it's a small chicken and he has to

 I'm fitting into today's week five of Body for Life, starting week five.

 And I will tell you that I'm fitting into a pair of jeans right now that I couldn't

 I'm not a fan of skin, even though I know they put a lot of the seasoning and flavoring

 So I'm just going to cut this up and chop it up, and I'll come back and show you what

 So to be honest with you, I've never used fat-free mayonnaise in my life, so this will

 So my memory card got full right in the middle of making this, and I don't know where it

 So in this bowl, I have the chopped up celery stalk, the chopped up chicken breast, just

 a handful of walnuts, not even a handful, and some dried cranberries, which I'm going

 I started to put in the fat-free mayonnaise, which, as I mentioned, I've never tried before.

 And I don't like a lot of mayonnaise, so I'm just, I don't like it very mayonnaise-y,

 I'm going to trim one of these whole wheat tortillas, and that will be lunch.

 That's about the size I'm looking for, just perfect sort of taco size.

 Just going to heat it up in the microwave real quick, fold it, and that will be his

 And I'll show you what both of them look like when they come out.

 So this is the chicken salad with the trimmed whole wheat tortilla.

 Just going to wrap it like that and serving it on the side with a couple of strawberries.

 And this is the chicken sort of burrito, which is chicken, mozzarella, just wrapped.

 I'm doing some projects around my mom's condo and one thing she's suffering with is space for her

So what I'm going to do is rearrange her closet and hopefully create double the amount of

So our first step is we're going to remove the wood on both sides.

 And this wood is used to hold on to these pole sockets and give it a little more support.

 And we're going to move this up, also the center bracket that gives the pole support.

 And we have a stud right behind the drywall here and we're going to raise everything up,

 measure a shirt against it, and then set a second pole down below.

 that holds a pole and I'm going to use a pull and pry bar, excellent tool for removing wood like this.

 all along the edge and I'm going to do the same thing on both sides and then we'll move everything

So I'm using a one hanger with the average size pants and the longest shirt that my mom has

 and just trying to get a feel for where I want each pole to be.

 to give me an idea where I want each one and then we'll set both up.

 I know that there's a stud right here so I'll make a mark and then when I put my piece of wood up here

 to hold one of the sockets, I'll screw it into the wood here and then I'll catch wood in the corner

 inches for the center of this socket, I also know that the center of that center support

 is 11 inches over and this is easy because the old piece of wood has it laid out for us.

 I'm going to do is I'm going to measure down by seven inches so that we can keep it even on both

 sides and then we would measure over 11 inches if this wasn't marked and now I'm going to find that

 mark for the stud behind the drywall and we're going to put a couple screws in this.

 wood on both sides and I put the sockets in on both sides and now I'm going to use my mark for

 the stud behind the drywall here and slide this center bracket up until it just touches the wood

 and I'll make two marks here and then we'll screw in our support.

 I put the sockets on both sides and now I'm going to find my stud behind here and our center support.

 I'll lift it up again to the pole and I'll mark my two spots that I want my screws and then we'll

Mom's going to be able to organize this much easier and a really easy effective way

 to make twice as much storage in your closet just by adding another pole.

 Hey guys, today as you can see I have a new set up, kind of a green background as you

 So I wanted to make it a little more colorful, let me know what you think of that, like should

 So moving on, today I'm going to be showing you how to do the Katniss Everdeen reaping

 So this is what she wore for the reaping in the movie and this is the front view.

 Here's the side view, this is what the back looks like and the other side.

 So just to warn you ahead of time, you're going to be needing a lot of bobby pins, preferably

 So yep, it's really easy, go ahead and watch the tutorial, bye!

 Okay first we're going to start out by splitting our hair in half, so just sewing your part

 So we split that in half and then we're going to start french braiding.

 So I'm going to split this into three strands, I'm going to take the strand I have in my

 right hand over the middle one, strand I have in my left hand over the middle one,

 strand I have in the right hand, add some hair, take that over the middle one, and strand

 And you're going to repeat this process as you head towards the back of your head, and

 Alright so I've gone ahead and smoothed out all the bumps and put some bobby pins in them,

 and I did the other side, so what I'm going to do now is just pull the braid, see, just

 Alright, now I'm going to take two braids, cross them back, and make my neck, see, and

 Okay so this is the shape you want the braids to be in on the back of your head.

 So with that, yeah, I just crossed over the braids, tucked the ends in, and just bobby

 By the way, when you're braiding and placing the bobby pins and everything, make sure you're

 looking in a mirror so you can get the desired shape, because otherwise it's so much harder.

 Max Roach used to call the drum set an instrument of indeterminate pitch, meaning that it's

 not tuned like piano or a melodic instrument that is an instrument of determined pitch,

 But Max Roach was widely regarded to be one of the most melodic of drummers.

 Some of you play other instruments besides the drums and some of you don't, but if you

 can get with the intervals, you can start to think more melodically and practice your

 ear training and come up with melodic and harmonic ideas on your drums that are just

 On page 17, I'm showing you examples of measured dynamic changes that are relative to common

 The chord changes are spelled out just by their Roman numeral symbol?

 When you go into a studio session in Nashville and they hand out the music, they give you

 these chord charts, the Nashville number system, that are in the arrangement of the song.

 It's not like they hand you a chart that's a B flat or a chart that's an F. They hand

 you a chart and they say this is the one chord and four bars later it goes to the four chord

 and then it goes here and they'll show you where the breaks are in this and that.

 You don't necessarily need a true melodic instrument to start thinking about intervals

 You have to know that when you strike percussion soft, the pitch is lower.

 And you also need to know that the middle of the drum is the lowest note on the drum.

 You can start to find notes in your drums in a couple different ways.

 You might think of it like a target and find out what the pitches are like in different

 It's really hard to get a drum in perfect tune with itself, especially when it has a

 But if you have something like this, you can find pockets of notes.

 One of the things I like to offer in my playing and that I like to work on, because I'm not

 often sitting at a melodic instrument, but I appreciate it, and I'll just start to think

 Now, with that, we want to try to find a chord movement at the root, or an interval leap

 One of the things that will be on the website to accompany the book, I have a list of popular

 Because it takes understanding a little bit about the surface you're working with, and

 How many songs do you know that have a one, four, five, one chord progression?

 Now it takes a minute to get comfortable with it, and every drum is going to be different.

 If I want to try to be consistent with my tones, it's a lot different when I'm playing

 And what's the natural tendency when we move from more space to more notes when we're just

I just have to get into it to take out the hard drive to image it.

 you a brief teardown of this machine, how to get into the hard drive, change the memory

Well first thing you have to do is remember to follow these steps at your

This one you'll have to hold and then you can just pull out the battery.

 thing is probably, there's a couple on here but I'm not sure so I won't read it out.

 you're after the battery just chase it out with a Zeus or do a search on the internet.

 here you can see we've got the hard drive and also the memory there.

 Now the hard drive itself, one screw is held in by the screw we took out from the panel

Now compared to most other laptops I've noticed these screws are

So that's held in by another little mounting bracket, this silver bit which

So there's one screw there, one there and there's space for another screw

 Now there is supposed to be while I keep looking, oh that's for the SD card there,

 there's supposed to be an SSD drive I believe in here but I can't actually see it.

 Hi, I'm Toba and welcome back to my kitchen featured on www.diabeticsurvivalkit.com.

 We got the recipe from www.food.com and today's presentation is brought to you in proud partnership

 First you need one stick or half a cup of unsalted butter, a third of a cup of Splenda,

 You also need a tablespoon of half and half, one ounce or one square of unsweetened baking

 chocolate, four tablespoons of creamy peanut butter and you also need a muffin tin with

 The first thing we do is combine the butter, the sugar or the Splenda rather and the baking

 If you break up all the pieces first then it takes a little less time.

 So I'm going to mosey over the microwave and this should take between 30 and 90 seconds

 I'm going to set mine for 90 because mine takes a little longer.

 And in the meantime while you're waiting for that to microwave, if you would like to add

 your walnuts you can sprinkle a few walnuts at the bottom of each of the muffin tins at

 After you remove the chocolate from the microwave, give it a quick stir to make sure that everything

 is melted and then you add the half and half and the peanut butter.

 If you have a steady hand you can pour from the bowl directly into the muffin tins but

 So make sure you don't be overzealous on the first one and short change the last few.

 So I'm going to continue doing this and then I'll tell you what's next.

 After you've filled all of your peanut butter cups you simply freeze until firm.

 Just make sure that after you remove them from the freezer that you serve them immediately

 because they tend to melt fairly quickly after you take them out.

 I like this recipe because it's very low in carbohydrates but unfortunately they're pretty

 So let's make this a treat and not necessarily the go-to when you're looking for a chocolatey

 Each one of these peanut butter cups contains 150 calories, 16 grams of fat, half of which

 is saturated, 24.9 milligrams of cholesterol, 32 milligrams of sodium, and 2.5 grams of

 So the total net absorbable carbohydrate for these peanut butter cups is 1.5 grams.

 And the good news is that each one of these also contains 2.5 grams of protein which is

 We at DiabeticSurvivalKit.com really hope that you've enjoyed me prepare these peanut

 butter cups and please don't forget to comment and let us know how yours turned out.

 From all of us to all of you, here's to a happier and healthier you.

 hello namaste salaamwalekum satsriyakaalok, welcome back to another session with your VahChef at Vahrehvah.com.

 You know so many people have been requesting rasmalai and I have not been doing so I thought why not I do rasmalai today

 so to make rasmalai is very simple but there are small little things you need to watch out

 so to make this rasmalai in fact what I did here I made my rabdi

 in fact this rabdi has become too thick because I've been cooking it for almost 1 hour in a non stick pan

 see to make a rabdi is very easy or even khoya to make on a non stick pan is easy

 put it sim let it boil on a slow flame and use a whisk like this which is rubber coated

 so it won't you know scratch your non stick pan so in fact this is perfectly done it is really thick

 maybe in fact I have to dilute it little bit by adding milk so what I'm going to do I'm going to add some sugar to this

 and make it little bit sweeter I add some cardamom wow what a nice flavor

 ok now this is ready I'm going to keep this on the side here I've got some milk boiling so we need to curdle this milk

 so how do we curdle see this is a very important part of making rasmalai or rasgulla

 so whatever you're making curdling this milk plays a very important role so we will learn how to do it

 either you can take vinegar or lime juice we can dilute it little bit you know with water and then add slowly

 ok you do not want to curdle this too much add this vinegar and then slowly your milk will curdle

 now you can see all the paneer is separating out as soon as you see the water is clear add some ice

 and then switch off the flame because I want to stop the process of curdling because we want very soft cheese

 you know we don't want something which is hard to do that you have to stop the process of curdling

 now you see my paneer is very soft if it becomes hard then the whole process is useless look at this

 this is not hard paneer this is like a soft cheese we want all this water to come out so you can you can press it slowly

 you know little bit you know it is better if you can hang it for one hour so all the water can drain out

 I've taken 1 is to 6 of water and sugar I put 6 cups of water and 1 cup of sugar

 one very important thing here is you have to bring it to a boil at a high flame ok the water has to be

 bubbling fully you can take some green cardamom just put in your ding chik ding chik and powder and add to this

 so that gives nice flavor to your syrup I hung this for like around 20 minutes take a very good

 clean towel and take this hung in a muslin cloth or any thin cloth put that towel on the table and then put this thing on this

 then what you do cover it up and then rub it see what you're basically doing is you're making a nice dough out of this

 ok you don't have to remove it out and just basically rub it see this one does two things one thing is it removes any additional

 moisture and second thing is it converts this into a nice paste now I want to show you see because I rubbed it with a cloth

 this become like a soft you know dough so all I do is take it out and make it into medium sized balls ok press it little bit

 and make it into a nice soft balls just you know make sure that the rounds are not cracked just make sure it's very nice smooth

 now rasgullas and rasmalais are pretty much made same way only thing for rasgullas they make it round now you can see how beautiful small these are

 you know and then we're going to add to this hot water so I made already small size when they come out they will increase in size

 so what we're going to do I'm going to add all of them in one shot ok and then cover it up and let it boil for just like 4-5 minutes

 what sugar does is not just sweetness alone it increases the density of the water that when you add this cheese the cheese won't break into pieces

 and the amount of heat that is needed for the cheese to be intact is very high if you put this cheese in a slow flame and then you won't let it steam

 two things can happen one thing is it will break into pieces the other thing is the cheese will not puff up like balloons

 so we want these things to puff up like balloons and you want them to become really big so let it boil for you know 5 minutes and then we'll see

 look at this look at this look at this look at this maybe I'll find love ok look at this they are becoming big but they're not yet done

 when I added sugar when it melted off I took some of that water in this vessel so now look at this rasmalais

 they have become twice the size of what I added look at this beautiful big size wow wow wow they're cooked

 whenever you remove these things put it in little bit warm water so now you can see the size oh it's still hot but it's twice the size what I originally made them into

 and also remember that the sugar syrup is getting thick you know by boiling so what you do occasionally you have to add some you know water to this

 so that the consistency of this water is always thinner and not syrupy if you add it into thick syrup your rasgullas are messed up

 our rasgulla for rasmalai is ready so what we're going to do you know I made the rabdi which I cooked for really long time and now what we're going to do

 you're going to take another bowl and then take this rasgullas and squeeze little bit ok don't squeeze too much very little bit and put it in another plate

 ok you want to remove this water when you add your rabdi you want these things to absorb rabdi I never eat one or two rasmalais I eat at least four

 so if you ever invite me to your house and you make rasmalai for me make sure serve me four even if I say oh no no no no you know don't listen to me

 if it is rasmalai serve me four because that is the minimum quantity I eat at one time and then I'm going to pour nice rabdi

 whoo whoo whoo whoo ah you know this is the freshest rabdi ah let these things soak for few minutes and then just sprinkle some nuts

 you know either pistachio or almonds ok so isn't it easy to make rasmalai, rasmalai for all those in love, rasmalai for all those who wants to fall in love

 and for me, friends to all those I know tons of you requested for this rasmalai I hope you all can make it really good make them really soft

 and I wish you all the best with your adventure with rasmalai and remember that vahrehvah is all about inspiring others to cook and eat fresh food

 so please post your recipes and cooking tips so others may enjoy with your great cooking thank you

 Today's installation is going to be on the NCY direct ignition kit.

 It is the actual device itself, direct injection kit, bracket for mounting, some wires for

 installation, the adapter, and then also some fasteners that are needed.

 I'll post a scanned copy of this just for your guys' viewing on the forum.

 Some things I wish that were included, but it's not a huge deal because you can get these

 You're going to need an 8mm wrench because the mounting bracket is attached to one of

 You need a Phillips head screwdriver for getting the old coil off.

 You can use a pair of pliers for mashing down the connectors on here if you don't have one

 The part we're going to be replacing is this right here, the ignition coil.

 All you're going to have to do is swap this part out and of course the spark plug connector.

 You're going to have the negative on top and the red on the bottom.

 Next thing you want to do is to remove the 8mm bolt on the valve cover.

 I'm going to leave that loose on there now just because there is going to be some adjustments.

 They do have elongated slots so that you can adjust it to make sure it fits in there correctly.

 It just installs like that with the power connector going down.

 All I've done is tighten down the bracket and finally got it to a place where it sits

 and there's not going to be any stress on the bottom of the unit or the boot.

 It is kind of a pain to get back in there with an allen key but you can do it.

 I might end up making them even shorter later on but for right now I'm just going to show

 I guess the easiest way to plug this thing in is to just hit it up from underneath.

 I'm not a mechanic but I will definitely give you some feedback later on in the forums.

 Alright thank you for watching the install of the direct ignition kit.

 need butter, half and half, chicken stock, chopped onion, salt and pepper, flour, nutmeg.

 To start this recipe, I am melting my butter in the skillet and when it's all melted, I'm

 these onions and they're going to saute until they're soft and then we'll move on to the next step.

 Okay, my onions are done, so what I'm going to do is set them aside and do the second step to the soup.

 Okay, I'm going to take the other butter and put it in the pan and let that melt.

 The butter's melted, so now I'm going to add my flour and whisk this until it's smooth.

 Now I'm going to add my half and half slowly to this roux, whisking the whole time.

 I'm going to turn this up and let it come to a boil and once it boils, I'm going to turn it down and let it simmer for about 20 minutes.

 Okay, this is boiling, so what I'm going to do is let it simmer, turn it down, let it simmer for 20 minutes and then we'll move on to the next step.

 The base for the soup has cooked for 20 minutes and now what I'm going to do is add my onions and my broccoli and my carrots.

 I'm going to stir this together and I'm going to let this continue cooking for about 20 to 25 minutes.

 My soup cooked for about 25 minutes and now it's ready to move on to the next step.

 So what we're going to do now is blend it and you can put it in your food processor or your blender or I'm going to use this immersion blender and I'm going to blend it to the consistency that I want.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to salt and pepper it before I do that.

 And this is to taste, you can put however much or little that you want.

 Okay, so this is going to go back on the stove on a low setting until this cheese all melts.

 Now I'm going to add the nutmeg and stir it in and then we're going to serve it.

 I am using chocolate chip muffins today which I made yesterday.

 it will be easier to work with jumbo-sized muffins or cupcakes like this.

 I love all the beautiful pastries, éclairs, santonoré, melzieuil, etc.

 First I have buttercream frosting and cream cheese frosting in separate videos.

 And two cupcake recipes, basic cupcakes and red velvet cupcakes.

 I have chocolate chip muffins and green tea chocolate chip muffins.

 period takes 15 minutes to make it and to bake it, it's now more than 7 minutes maximum

 and even then you'll have to take it off a little bit faster because you don't want it

I call it Russian because I'm so used to it, having it as a kid back then and

 because it was always Russian based because they love those rolled cakes so I assume it's

But it's super easy, it's super delicious and I tried to keep it as

 flour, I'm going to use oatmeal flour or you can use almond flour if you wish to.

 for sugar, I actually used white sugar unfortunately because I did not have brown sugar.

 shredded coconut because it has a really nice texture and it gives a little bit of a touch

 very light too, so it won't be so filling after that Valentine's Day dinner.

 and mix them with your spoon first and then afterwards you're going to add the eggs and

 then mix it with the blender until it gets a little bit fluffed up.

 Now, mix all your ingredients with the mixer and mix it real good so it gets a little bit

 fluffed up and then you're ready to put it onto the baking sheet.

 ready, start buttering up your baking sheet and I used almond oil.

 used very little and my dough got a little bit stuck, so go generous with it.

 Now, once you've fixed the corners of the dough, you can go ahead and put it into the

Now, it's going to stay in there less than 6 minutes, just look at it based on its

So once you took it off the oven, just spread the jam on top of it and while

 will get stiff and it won't be the roll cake that you are aiming for.

 I did not add that much almond oil, even though I thought that was enough, as you can see

 I had a hard time taking off the baking sheet and I had to use the butter knife.

But yeah, try to add a bit more oil than I did and then you'll be fine.

 So once you rolled it, cut the corners because they're just dry and they don't need to be

Give it a try, it's super delicious, very easy to make and very quick to make it

 Now that dessert is ready, I'm actually going to give it a try and see how it turned out.

 Now it actually fell off a little bit because it was stuck into the baking sheet.

 order to avoid that, add a little bit more oil, even though I added enough but sometimes

So just add a little bit more and don't worry, once you decorate it, it's

 Hi everybody, welcome to indiafoodrecipes.in Today I will prepare lemon chicken.

 1 pound boneless chicken, 1 lemon, 3 tsp all purpose flour, 2 tsp rice flour, 1 tsp corn

 flour, 1 tsp sugar, salt, chopped ginger, chopped lemon skin, 1 tsp black pepper, 1

 Before fry the chicken, I am going to prepare the sauce for our lemon chicken.

 When they are getting golden brown color, then take it out everything.

 You can serve this lemon chicken with fried rice and biryani also.

 Based off the TV show on ABC called Once Upon a Time, today I will be showing you Snow White's makeup look.

 I know that she has two different characters, there's Snow White and there's also Mary Margaret in the storybook world.

 I'm going to be using a color close to my own skin tone, a very matte natural color.

 Next color I'm going to be using on my crease is a very matte kind of cool maroon color.

 Now I'm going to be going in with a blending brush and I'm just going to kind of blend that.

 Now I've already primed my eyes with the Sephora's Perfecting Eye Primer.

 Now after we have our top lash line lined, I'm going to go in with my Sephora Kohl Pencil

 I'm going to go in with my Kohl Pencil and I'm going to line up my upper water lash line.

 It may look scary but once you get the hang of it, you won't poke yourself in the eye.

 Now what I'm going to do is just apply a little bit of white eyeliner onto my water line here.

 Now that that's finished, I'm going to move over to the eyelashes and I'm going to be using Lorax 3D Lash.

 I'm going to be using a red lip stain because when she plays Snow White, she doesn't have that cartoon fire hydrant red.

 It looks like she's been biting on her lips a lot or something.

 Now I'm just going to apply a little bit of clear lip gloss over that red lip stain.

 Really simple, just taking sugar, egg white, and base spirit, mixing her up and adding

 Add a teaspoon of granulated sugar to our Boston glass, about an ounce and a half of

 A lot of people are scared to put eggs in their cocktails, but you don't have to be

 Add some ice to this, two ounces of brandy of your choosing, using the best possible

 We're going to shake this good and hard so that the egg white emulsifies and gives us

 We're going to put fresh ice into our serving glass and strain our cocktail.

 We're just going to grate a little fresh nutmeg over the top to give it some aromatics.

 Okay, welcome to our series on professional grade porting and polishing tools from ccspecialtytool.com.

 It's the place to go for all your professional grade porting and polishing tool needs, accessories

 Now this is another professional grade porting and polishing tool that I want to bring to

 your attention because I see so many people out there using the wrong tools for the job.

 They use things like air grinders, die grinders, dremels, things to that nature.

 Those things are great for woodworking, but they're not for doing your porting and polishing

 Right off the bat, you'll notice that this is a right angle porting and polishing tool.

 And the ideal behind a right angle porting and polishing tool is you can get to transfer

 Yeah, those great little things that open from your crankshaft into your combustion

 Now this is all important because your trajectory into the combustion chamber is very important.

 You can give a rounded edge to them, which is very important on the piston ring transfer

 Also right angles, you're able to do proper chamfering from the inside on your port windows.

 What you will see a lot of people try to do is use a straight handpiece like this to do

 They'll reach through here or they'll reach across from one side or they'll try to reach

 These are great for doing the outside work, for doing the edge work, for about a million

 things, but they're not for doing transfers and they're not for doing the chamfering to

 The reason being is as you're pressing against this, this carbide shank will tend to bend.

 As it bends, it gets off center and it will tend to helicopter, spinning around out of

 The 1MC, we're going to go over a couple of the quick features here.

 It's in extended mode, which means the head will actually extend three inches to reach

 The other thing about it is this is in left-hand configuration, which means the carbide burr

 Now, the reason that is is it also has a left-hand carbide burr on here, which means the cut

 What's great about that is reverse and contra angles, you can actually get in there and

 Some of the other things I want to go over here right quick is on two strokes like this,

 on race two strokes, the only way to get to some of these boost ports correctly is with

 Because of their odd angle, because they're at a different angle to the combustion chamber,

 there's no way to reach them except with a right-angle porting tool like this.

 Straights, again, are great for doing these areas that come from the crankcase into the

 1MC can run things like this diamond impregnated burr, which allows you to cut through Nicosil,

 It has the strength, in particular with our motor setup, where you have full torque at

 But it also has the delicacy to work with aluminum, which is important because when

 you're running at just a few thousand RPM, for one, you have better control.

 For a second thing, as you increase speed, you're going to increase heat at the contact

 So if you're using air grinders, what you can actually be doing is heating up the aluminum,

 which will cause it to ripple, cause it to distort, and change the actual metallurgy

 So you're actually fighting against yourself as you're heating it with one of those air

 So this burr can run, it's got the same torque, the same strength at this RPM as it does all

 the way up to 15,000 and 20,000 RPM, which is an important feature.

 We'll go over later in some of our other sears, we'll go over some of our other right angle

 hand pieces, like this 3MC, which is a larger one that can run quarter inch carbide, and

 We're going to dice most of the pineapple and use it as the base for our salsa.

 And then, use a fillet knife and just carefully take the skins off.

 We're going to use two mangoes, included with our bowl already.

 I'm going to show you another alternative method for cutting up your mangoes.

 Now at this point, we're going to start thinking about making this a little saucier than it is.

 You have to realize that if you let it sit for a while, some of the sauces will come out of the fruit.

 I'm going to put the core of the pineapple in there, because it's not really good for much else.

 What we're going to do, because we want to mellow the flavor of it a little bit, and we don't want to eat the skin,

 We're going to take some of it, and dice it up nice and finely.

 And it's a lovely accompaniment to fish, pork, chicken, chips, grilled veggies, you name it.

 Well I have to make some really accurate cuts using my miter gauge and I noticed that I

 So I've already made one little correction and I thought well you know this will be an

 And the way we're going to do it is we're just going to take this out and put it on

 my anvil and I'm going to take a metal marking tool, a punch that has a conical end and I'm

 going to just lightly tap and make some taps into the side of this.

 Now no material is going to be removed but what's going to happen as the tap goes into

 the metal, the metal is going to punch up around that and that's what's going to take

 So that's, it's just letting this be its own, create its own shim.

 Now when I first started doing this I used to, I whacked it really hard and I'd make

 a big depression and then I'd have to come back and do a file, use a file to kind of

 They've made this pretty soft because they don't want, they don't want really hardened

 steel, you don't want really hardened steel against your cast iron or it'll just wear

 So you'll see I made one, just one light little touch with a two pound hammer and my punch.

 And now I'm going to touch it here and then probably up here too.

 I'm pretty good back here but yeah I can see I got a little bit of slop and it's due, you

 And I always do it on this side, I've never peened on this side.

 I've always done it on this side because I figure I want to leave this as the factory

 machined reference so if there is going to be a little bit of wear off of those punch

 outs from me hitting that steel I'd rather it be on this outboard side than next to the

 This saw is almost 20 years old and still seems to be in pretty good shape.

 You know so I just put this on here like this and just gave it a light wrap and that was

 enough to, you know, you can see that it's, you can see my finger catching on it.

 It was just enough to, you know, as that creates, it's like a crater, like you know an impact

 So all you're doing is you're just using this hardened steel to tap it and you're displacing

 It's not going to go down so it's going to kind of come up and around.

 I was shown this technique by a really incredible blacksmith a long time ago.

 Maybe just a, no I'm not going to do any more than that because I was pretty close.

 And now I'm going to shift it down and I'm going to do one at the end.

 And let me, just a light one here at the end because I mean I did not have much at

 Yeah, I'm going to just, I'm going to just go with that and see what it looks like.

 I'm not going to have to file or anything so I don't even need to bring it back out.

 But just a punch like this, this is a standard punch that you use to mark spots on metal

 It's always better to do it too light than do it too much and then have it tight and

 And now when I set everything square, and I have a video of me showing how I set it

 I mean I can dial this thing in, make tutorial perfect and just make perfect cross cuts in

 There are those who say that Brazil is a great country it is because of its roots

 our Indian roots, our slave roots, our Portuguese colonizer roots

 Which is Brazil's number one choice for starch in fact in lots of parts of Brazil it substitutes rice or potatoes and definitely pasta

 But I'd like to show you the easiest thing you could possibly do with it

 Use a sturdy potato peeler to remove all the brown skin until the root is totally white

 When you think about it, it's not surprising that cassava is so popular in

 The cassava plant grows very easily on anywhere and an area the size of a football pitch can produce 14 tons of this

 To wait for you whilst you do some other stuff to go with it and to give our cassava a little more taste

 that's just a small onion in which I've poked some holes with a toothpick and

 To check if your cassava is ready just poke it with a fork if it's soft

Just drain it and put it on a plate and let it cool down a bit until you can touch it

 Into big chips and you notice that there's this rope like stem in the middle which you want to remove

 I'm just going to add them to the basket of my super duper fryer

 While your cassava chips are frying I'll show you one last trick to make them taste even better

 Which by the way are very crispy outside and delicious yummy and hot inside

 For detailed recipes and a guide on where to find Brazilian food and drink ingredients visit www.ukabrazuca.com

 In this video I'm going to show you how to make the Potawatomi Stitch.

 I'm not sure if that's how you pronounce it but I'm going to write the name on the description

 box and also the title of the video in case I didn't pronounce it right.

 So we're going to pick up 5 seed beads and we're going to bring them down and we are

 You're always going to pick up 5 seed beads and the seed beads that you are going to be

 So if you pay attention to that you're always going to be passing your needle through the

 We're going to skip one and we're going to pass through this one.

 Remember we're always going to be using the 2nd bead and the 4th bead.

 And if you count your beads, the beads that we just add, it was 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.

 We are coming out of the 2nd one and remember I told you we're going to always use the 2nd

 So we're going to pass our needle through the 4th seed bead or one before the last of

 We're going to pass through the 4th seed bead or we're coming out of this one, we skip one

 Or we're coming out of this one, skip one and pass through the next one.

 Hey guys, this is Chris with Fukonbu and we've just got our hands on the Motorola Moto E.

 Now this is Motorola's new £89 budget smartphone, even cheaper than the Moto G.

 So it's a 4.3 inch smartphone with a dual core processor and there's no front facing

 But, it does seem to be pretty damn good value for money, just like the Moto G.

 And as you can see it's a very dinky little box, very cute indeed.

 I am rubbish at peeling sellotape off these things so I'm probably going to rip the box

 Lovely, yeah I've got to admit for an £89 smartphone it really feels very nice.

 A little bit chunky as you can see but that is a nice firm smartphone.

 So power button is on the side there, hopefully it feels like the battery and everything is

 And while that's booting up let's just take a look inside the rest of the box.

 Feels pretty light now, so basically all you've got is the USB cable and of course the...

 So yeah, as you'd expect from a budget phone you don't get any bundled AirPods or any of

 that crap but let's face it they're always rubbish anyway so why would you bother?

 And of course you've got your suitably lengthy Android setup screens.

 I mean, you know, it does a great job of cancelling out daylight, really nasty neon lights and

 So yeah, so we're going to have a solid play with this over the next few days and we're

 going to get you a full review as soon as we're finished with it.

 By now you've seen so many photos and videos showing every little angle of Mi 4i.

 And what we wanted to do is give you an exclusive inside view of Mi 4i.

 We wanted to show you the inside of the device in great detail.

 Alright, so here's the Mi 4i and we're going to power it off first of all before we do

 Now I'm going to use the SIM card removal tool to take out the SIM tray.

 And then I'm going to use a spatula to take out the polycarbonate unibody.

 So here you can see the inside of the device and you can see how neatly laid out it looks.

 And these three orange screws that you see right here have the Mi logo on them.

 That's the warranty seal and it does void the warranty if you remove them.

 I'm going to first take out the cover for the primary PCB, the primary motherboard.

 And I'm also going to take out the cover for the secondary PCB on the bottom of the device.

 So here you can see the motherboard and how incredibly compact it is.

 We're using these fast attach connectors that are just a way to make everything better

 This is the 3,120 milliamp hour battery made by Sony and Samsung.

 And you can see here that we use these two wires, which are fairly delicate, expensive

 components to connect the top motherboard to the bottom motherboard.

 So the goal of having two motherboards, of course, is so that we can have the USB as

 well as the speaker, which comes out through this grill here on the bottom of the device.

 You don't want your USB port and your speaker on the top of the device, as in some of the

 The next thing I'm going to do is actually take out the motherboard itself.

 And then I can just pull it out and take out the motherboard so that you can see it.

 And it is the smallest, most compact motherboard that we've ever built.

 You can see here the rear camera, then the front camera, the sensor hub with the proximity

 sensor and the light sensor, and then here is the earphone connector.

 And then on the other side, you'll see the front camera as well as the Snapdragon 615

 And right next to it is the memory block with the flash as well as RAM.

 You already knew that it's a very, very compact device that feels great to hold in your hand.

 And now you know about all the engineering that went into making such a great and innovative

 Right guys, today I am gonna show you how to make a real simple dollar sign.

 Stretch one arrow from top and then stretch the second arrow from its bottom.

 At this time I would like to share with you about drawing your designs.

 Whatever you can draw on paper you can pretty much transfer to leather and then you can cut it in with your swivel knife.

 I can faintly see that I was scratching just a little bit light.

 I can see it good enough that I can brighten it up a little bit.

 I kind of speeded the process up of drying that with a hair dryer.

 Now I would like to show you how I can bevel around this skull.

 The shorter your taps and the slower you move your tool, the smoother your beveling will be.

 Doing these practice exercises and showing you how to do scrollworks.

 This is a tutorial showing you how to draw a sketch onto a piece of paper and transfer it to the wet leather.

 We ended up with a steer skull that was beveled around and had a couple of wheat stalks on each side.

 Here is a shot of the basic tools you can use to carve leather.

 I would appreciate it if you would subscribe to my channel and give a thumbs up if you like this video.

 Where the Green Grass Grows was the number one hit for country artist Tim McGraw and

 The song's in the key of G, so we don't need a capo on either the acoustic or the electric

 The rhythm part's pretty straightforward, and we converted the fiddle part into a lead

 Six leaves, taillights, and red hands watch me do the night, it's a pain in the left

 Alright, in this tutorial we're going to go through the intros, the verses, choruses,

 So let's start by going through the chords that we're going to need to get through the

 We're going to start with a standard G chord, then we have a standard D chord, then we have

 an E minor 7, which is open low E string, 2nd fret of A, 2nd fret of D, open G, 3rd

 This low E string is muted for the C2, then we have 3rd fret of A, 2nd fret of D, open

 G, 3rd fret of B, 3rd fret of high E. Again, down, down, down, up, up, down, down, down,

 That's the first time through the progression in the introduction.

 We're going to go from G to D, and then this time straight to the C2.

 That's played the same way every time we're doing an introduction, which happens before

 verse 1, before verse 2, before the final chorus, and then again at the end of the song.

 We're going to go through each section of this song on the lead guitar nice and slow,

 and then after we've gone through all of it, we'll turn on the metronome and play everything

 Alright, I don't know about you, but in the bands I've played in, we hardly ever have

 access to a fiddle player, so if you're ever going to play this song live, you'll probably

 And this will be a good substitution for what the fiddle player was doing.

 As always, this is tabbed out right beneath the video player, and the tabs will be real

 helpful when we're trying to get our fingers on this for the first time.

 So everything with this riff happens on the D and the G string.

 We're going to start with an open D string in our pointer finger, second fret of G.

 We're going to hammer it on to the fourth fret with our ring finger.

 Then we're going to do the same kind of thing on an E minor 7, which is open low E string,

 second fret of A, second fret of D, open G string, third fret of B, third fret of 5E.

 Hi, my name is Barb Adams of Blackbird Designs and I love the Missouri Star Quilt Company.

 Hi, I'm Natalie from the Missouri Star Quilt Company and I have another fun idea for you

 So to make the Friendship Star, which we thought would be really fun with Turnovers, we decided

We cut four 5 inch squares for our background corners and we cut two 6 inch

 then you end up with identical triangles to match up with your Turnover triangles.

 then you take your triangles and you sew them together, right sides along the long

You press them open and then we're going to cut them down to a 5 inch square so that

 angle making sure that we have a 5 inch square inside and that 45 degree angle stays point

 that you have your seam is straight into the corner of the 5 inch square.

 lay out your blocks you put your four white blocks in the corners, your Charm Pack square

 in the center and your triangles go all the way around the edges.

 Now we took our Friendship Stars and our two Turnover Packs and our Charm Pack and we made

We hope you enjoy this trick from the Missouri Star Quilt Company.

 This is one of my favourite cakes and even though it's called a Christmas cake it can

 actually be made any time of the year, it's not just for Christmas.

 it today because I'm making this early so that I can keep applying more alcohol to it over the

 Okay so for this recipe you're going to need 900 grams of mixed fruit, 225 grams of plain flour,

 four medium eggs, 200 grams of dark soft brown sugar, 200 grams of butter softened,

 one tablespoon of black treacle, 100 grams of glacé cherries, two teaspoons of mixed spice,

 50 millilitres of dark rum or brandy, 50 grams of flaked almonds, zest of one lemon and one orange.

 When you peel your orange and lemon make sure that you only take off the very outer skin of

As you can see here there's a lot of white, the white is actually still on and the same

Zest of the fruit is the very outside, if you go too deep into the fruit and

 you get the white that's quite bitter and and it's not very nice.

 it's gas mark 2 and grease and line a 24 centimetre round deep cake tin.

 turn the temperature down to 140 degrees, gas mark 1 and then you want to cook it for a further

 Leave that to cool down in the tin for an hour and then take it out and let it cool down completely

 Moving on to the next step, the cake is completely cooled down so now we need to just prick the top

 You're going to ice this so it doesn't have to look beautiful and then just

 then keep it wrapped up in baking paper and then every couple of weeks add more brandy to it.

 way it keeps it moist and gives it time to soak in all the flavours.

 time because it's not actually ready and also gives you an excuse.

 Okay, so the first thing we'll do is start with the top joint primary adjustments.

 I've taken the ovo apart here just to isolate what we're looking at.

 It consists of this adjustment here between this key and this key, this one here between

 this key and this key, this here between this and this, and this here.

 The first thing we have to do is to use the wedge and close this so that all of these

 So, because your ovo won't look like this, I'm going to demonstrate the adjustments on

 So, the first thing, as I said, is to prop open the rocker here.

 Now, the second is we want to take these three screws, these are the ones that we'll be dealing

 That means move them at least a half turn to the left, counterclockwise.

 What that does is makes it so that all three of these adjustments are out of adjustment.

 But you know that they're all out of adjustment in the same direction.

 You can very clearly see that when you push the A key down, it brings this C vent key

 We can eliminate a lot of the use of the feeler gauge by simply visually looking at it like

 Now I'm using light finger pressure, just gently holding down this, and with my thumb

 and my forefinger, like this, I'm gently rocking back and forth, trying to perceive

 The next thing to do is the exact same procedure between this key and this key.

 Sometimes it's useful to hold this down, just to eliminate these springs from what you're

 So again, it's out of adjustment, and it needs to be tightened.

 So we just start tightening a lot at first, and then as the adjustment becomes closer,

 It's just barely there, and now we don't perceive any motion at all.

 The last one in this series is between the B-flat reso and the C-vent.

 You can see that this screw here is the one that controls that.

 I don't know if the camera is picking up the sound that the key is making as I lightly

 tap it, but it's good to hear that too, so that you can, that's another clue as to whether

 So far, we've used two techniques to identify whether the pad is in adjustment.

 We've felt it for motion, and we've listened for that tapping sound that you can hear when

 So after we have these adjustments in basic adjustment, we can now take the feeler gauge.

 We can now take the feeler gauge and just verify what we've done.

 So for ease of showing you how to do it, I'm going to just lay the oboe on the pad here.

 Gently touch the A, making sure I use the untaped end of the feeler gauge.

 Gently touch the A and compare it to the C, and they feel very even.

 Again, I'm going to gently touch the G and compare it to the B-flat vent.

 Thirdly, from holding the G down, compare the B-flat vent and the C vent.

 Now, I'm just going to turn it in slightly and compare it to the C vent.

 So I'm going to turn it in slightly and compare the B-flat vent and the C vent.

 It's Nate from The Style Dog and in today's video I have a very quick hair tutorial for

 So after posting my last video, the Dapper Haul accessory, I had a few questions in regards

 So the look or whatever you want to call it, as you may have seen all over the internet,

 it is a trending hairstyle at the moment, is the Samurai Topknot, the Topknot, some

 I like Samurai Topknot, I don't know, because I like to think I'm a bit of a Samurai.

 Okay guys, welcome to the Topknot, Man Buns, Samurai Topknot, whatever you want to call

 A few things before I get started in terms of how to accomplish this look, this hairstyle,

 If you don't have the length, obviously you can't pull this look off.

 I'd say that my hair is the shortest you can have it to achieve this look.

 So I'm still growing it now, but I can still get it into a knot, so I'm going to show you

 What you need is your hair to go from that point, as you can see here, it's got to reach

 In terms of what you're going to do with the sides, it's up to you.

 Some people like to keep their sides long, a little bit longer than this, but with Asian

 hair it tends to stick up, so I like to have it quite a nice defined line all the way around.

 So I get mine shaved to either a half, half to one, it just depends.

 It is a lot of a harder look though, so for some people it might not be ideal, but I like

 The first thing that I would do, I've just had a shower, is I would towel dry it.

 So I use a towel first to dry it, just because I want to get rid of any of the excess water

 that I've got in my hair, and then I'm actually going to be blow drying it.

 But this just gets rid of all the moisture that's in there at the moment.

 Okay guys, so I've just towel dried it and of course it's still a little bit damp, it's

 not, you know, barren dry, and now I'm going to be using the hair dryer to blow it into

 the direction that I want my hair to be going in, as well as dry it and get rid of the rest

 So I've basically, when I blow dried it, you can see I've kind of pushed it to the side,

 I've blown the hair that way, blown it from the back, and then I've blown it from the

 Okay guys, now the product that I recommend you guys use, or what I use, is this one right

 This one is a moulding clay, you can see that it is high hold and medium shine.

 So I don't mind a little bit of shine, a little bit of slickness to the hair, and with my

 hair in particular, it's pretty hard to handle, pretty hard to manage, so that's why I have

 So now what you want to do, is you want to move it around in your hands like so, because

 So yeah, just rubbing it through your hands like so, you can see it on my hands there,

 Now that it's nice and warm, I'm just going to take it through my hair.

 You want to really make sure you get the product through the hair, from the base to the tips,

 Okay guys, so get a comb, super cheap, but very useful for this hairstyle if you want

 And this is going to also help spread the product through the hair.

 So now I've towel dried it, I've blow dried it, I've placed the product in my hand, I've

 combed it all the way through to make sure that I get the product, like I said, from

 Now before you want to do the knot, you want to get an elastic band, or whatever you're

 And you want to put it on the hand that you're actually going to be holding the top knot

 Now this is going to help so when you pull it off, it's already on your hand, you're

 not going to be struggling having it on there and then reaching around the room trying to

 So having it on your hand already to begin with is what you want to do.

 Now I've, like I said, I've already slicked it back, so what I'm going to do now is basically

 Now when you're actually holding through, like I said, remember to hold with the hand

 And remember that when you're actually tying the hair, you want to have maybe a number

 that you use all the time so you know how, you know, the tightness.

 Because obviously, you know, if you use three one time it's going to be a bit looser, if

 So remember to count the amount of times you're actually going around the hair.

 Okay guys, so now that you've got your hair in the actual bun, or how you want your hair,

 you might notice that you have a couple of flyaways, so just hairs that are flying out

 or that are a little bit too short that aren't actually in the knot.

 What I tend to do is, I've still got the product on my hands, and so what I just do now is

 I just try to use the same product and I just basically pat it down and make sure that I

 If I have any real troublesome flyaways, then I'll definitely use hairspray.

 Don't forget to comment, like and subscribe, and I will see you guys in the next video.

 you got to have your root your major third your fifth and then the flat seventh and there you have a

 Dominant seventh or a seventh chord for sure what we're gonna do today is make that really really usable for us finger pickers

 There are tons of times where you're playing something and you want that seventh chord sound because it is so bluesy

 But you may not be able to use all four fingers when you're finger picking your fingers are doing a lot

 So what we're gonna do is take a look at what I call mini chords others may call them chord fragments or things like that

 Or partials but a mini chord is simply in this case a seventh chord, but you're not playing off four notes

 I don't know if that stands up to any music theory or anything, but this makes sense to me

 Let me just walk through the examples that played these are based in e but you can move these chords around and to different keys

 Was right here and this is you know, just three notes ringing out

 Seventh chord kind of sound to it because we've got the flat seven

 Fingers on the first fret of the third string and then a lot of times I'll use my pinky

 You might see me use different fingers to catch this note on the third fret of the second string

 That's the D or the seventh here and then the open first string

 And then just to do a little jamming you can always do a hammer-on from the open third

 To the first fret on the third string because the key of E that's a minor third to major third move

 It's basically your regular D7 shape just moved up a couple frets

 to E and so I've got my middle finger here on the fourth fret third string and then the

 With this and with a lot of these other shapes you can actually do a little slide from a note

 And you can actually do from one fret high down so just having some fun

 You know something like that it's a little shaky there, but you get the point and here's another seventh chord shape

 Up here around the fifth and seventh frets on these top three strings and I've got my ring finger here on the

 This is the seventh fret third string and then the fifth fret second string seventh fret first string

 And see that can you know be moved around down a half step back and forth

 Like that so that's the third shape that we're going to talk about and the fourth shape should look a little bit familiar to you

 But it'll get you thinking because this is definitely in a different spot for the E7 chord up here

 And really the reason I'm doing this is because I want to show you how to play this

 Really the reason I say it's familiar is it should look a lot like this a7 chord, but we move it up

 And of course you can reach up with your pinky and grab that that octave there which is an E

 There are a few many chord shapes many seven chord shapes that I know I use a ton and it really is

 Tremendously usable and I hope you get a sense of that from this lesson because there are just so many times as a finger picker

 Where you find yourself wanting that seventh chord sound but you're not in the traditional seventh chord position

Maybe some fingers are busy doing other things that happens a lot for us finger pickers

 so this is a good way to get that sound grab it really quickly and

 Maybe even moving around the neck a little bit and get you really thinking about the sound that you're after

 I encourage you to grab the tab and practice this up and of course hit me up

 Email john at blues guitar Institute comm if you have any questions practice practice practice and I will see you in the next lesson

 Lasagna was one of the first things I learnt to cook and I think I've cooked more lasagnas than I've had hot dinners.

 Over the years, I've developed the recipe to my own personal taste and I'm gonna share that with you today.

 This recipe for lasagna contains ingredients that some Italian viewers may find disturbing.

 because I freeze most of it and then it's ready if I fancy a quick meal later on.

 I'll start by heating 80 g of butter and 6 tablespoons of olive oil in my massive pan.

 and the smoked meat which you should have cut into small pieces.

 Then fry this lot gently for 5 to 10 minutes to soften up the onions and the celery.

 I'm not a great fan of that but if you want to, by all means, add them in.

 I've dissolved the stock cube in 300 ml of boiling water and I'll add those in as well.

 I'm also adding 300 ml of red wine which, in my case, of course, is alcohol-free.

 If you don't want to use wine at all, just use some extra water.

 After 45 minutes, turn off the heat, give it a good stir and then just pop it to one side.

 Traditionally, for a lasagne, for the white sauce, I'd make a simple bechamel.

 but in my humble opinion, lasagne is far better with a massive cheese sauce.

 Then with a whisk, stir it in and cook it for about 2 minutes over a low heat.

 After 2 minutes, I'm gonna start adding in a litre of milk but just a little bit at a time.

 By the time you've added in about half the milk, it should be quite creamy, fairly fluid.

 Then when you've added all the milk, bring the sauce to the boil.

It's okay to break off the corners so they fit into the tray a bit better.

 This is gonna bake in the oven at 160 degrees Celsius for about 30 minutes.

 I'll just leave this to cool for 10 or 15 minutes before I cut into it.

 I love lasagne so much I'd quite happily roll around in a giant vat of it.

 But that's not gonna happen today so please put your hands where I can see them.

 Hello everyone, so for today's Halloween card I'm participating in My Favourite Things Creative

 And the challenge is to do watercolour, so of course I had to participate.

 I decided to do a watercolour background, so I just grabbed some Tim Holtz Distress

 Watercolour cardstock, the 4 1⁄4 by 5 1⁄2, and I taped it down to my little Epicurean

 I don't care about whether the border was straight or anything like that, I just wanted

 it to keep it flat because I was planning on getting this piece really, really wet.

 So I'm taking a large, flat watercolour brush and really saturating the cardstock.

 I went back and forth over it with clean water quite a few times to get it really good and

 wet and to make sure the water wasn't just sitting on top, because sometimes if you just

 paint a quick layer of water it's more sitting on top than really soaking in.

 So I got it really, really wet and then I'm using my Orange Fizz Grape Jelly and Sour

 Hybrid inks or any permanent sort of ink will not work, or at least it won't work very well

 because they're not water soluble, whereas these are all water-based.

 And you'll get a different result with this than you would with using actual watercolour,

 But if you've got some dye ink pads, you can definitely try it out.

 So I just kind of dropped the colour in, in just kind of a random sort of pattern.

 And then I decided I wanted the colour to be even more vibrant, so I took the ink refills

 and I'm just, I had mushed everything onto this craft sheet here.

 So you could just use a piece of acetate or a plastic plate, you know, anything that's

 But you see here when I start picking up the actual ink refills how much more vibrant the

 So I could have done that from the beginning, but I was just playing around here and just

 So yeah, once I used the ink refills I was even more happy with just how bright the colour

 You have to really rinse the brush off between the colours when using the refills just because

 And then I squeezed all the water out of my brush and that's how I was able to kind of

 soak up that little bit of extra ink that was kind of pooling along the bottom.

 And then I decided to add just a little bit of table salt, this is just regular salt.

 It just creates a fun kind of mottled effect because the salt rapidly absorbs the moisture

 So I keep meaning to get, I want to get some coarse salt and just different like textures

 And because I used so much water and ink it kind of seeped in between the tape here but

 again I was not at all concerned about this because I'm planning on cutting it down anyway.

 But then the salt sticks to the watercolour so you just need to rub it off.

 I just use my fingers or one of my little palette knives and scrape it off.

 And so I'm using this like I said as a background so I die cut some heavy white, smooth white

 cardstock from MFT with the new Center Pieces Spooky Window Dynamics.

 And I also trim the edge with the Blueprints 1 dies, the biggest die in there so that the

 And then I trim down the watercolour panel so that I got the area that I wanted to show

 And then that Spooky Window Dynamics comes with an extra little spider die so I quickly

 die cut a little black cardstock spider to adhere over the white one.

 And then I cut down a transparency to just slightly smaller than the white cardstock

 and just use my scotch adhesive to run a line along that so you can see I've got a perfect

 Because I thought while I was at it I might as well turn this into a shaker card.

 So once I've got the transparency into place I'm going to add a bunch of foam tape.

 So I started with one layer and got it all adhered making sure to almost completely cover

 I'm not super concerned because again I'm not using mini beads or glitters, anything

 like that you have to be super careful to not leave any openings for things to slip

 But I'm using my Doodlebug sequins which I've mentioned before.

 This is like the second or third little shaker card I've made in the past couple of weeks.

 Even using things like this I barely made a dent in these containers.

 I kind of used too many on this card, but again you can have so many it's so easy.

 So I had done the two layers of foam tape to give enough thickness so that the sequins

 And then peeled off foam tape and applied that watercolour background I had created.

 And then I just die cut some black cardstock with the larger, this is the largest die from

 the Blueprints 2 set because it mats the one from the Blueprints 1 set perfectly and I'm

 I barely even put them away anymore, I use them on like every card.

 And then for my card base it's just a standard white A2 size card base, so 4.25 by 5.5.

 And before I adhered the front I opened it up and masked off just the inside of the card.

 You could use a piece of scratch paper or just regular post-it, whatever works.

 And I'm just inking it up with the same inks I used on the front.

 And just stamping just the web in the different colours on each corner.

 And then I just took a piece of paper towel and made sure to get that completely off so

 that I don't have, I'm not going to get any ink or smearing onto my card base.

 And then peel off the mask so that way it's all nice and clean on the inside.

 And then I die cut some more spiders with that same small die that I used on the front.

 And I couldn't really show this on camera because I kind of hold it at an angle and

 But this is how I'm able to ink up a stamp with two different colours of ink.

 Really really easy to do, especially with a stamp like this that there's a good gap

 So inked that up, stamped it, and then just adhered that little black spider with some

 And then I'm going to adhere the shaker card to the front of the actual card.

 And as always there will be a link below the video to my blog post and links to all the

 and i've got my petals sewed on, i thought maybe i would need to sew down the middle

 i just sewed around the edge of the flowers, i sewed this one on and then i put the other one on

 part on, and i gave you some tips in the last video to show you how to do that

 of one's here and if it gets a little far apart then try to go in between

 try to add one on one side and one on the other as close as you can to make a

 that's the end of the tutorial if you have any questions feel free to ask me

 You can buy bread rolls in different types hard to soft I thought of doing

 the soft French bread rolls today for that recipe I'm using 750 grams of bread

 flour, 2 eggs, 150 milliliters milk, 180 milliliters water, 35 grams sugar

 always you can reduce it up to 25 grams and 6 grams salt, 10 grams yeast and 50

So to start this first add the bread flour into a mixing bowl and

 into that sugar, yeast and the salt where there is no yeast and salt always to a

 corner and the eggs and start mixing this about a minute while mixing add the

 milk and mix that about another minute mix the water but when you add water

 because you have added two eggs there that water level will be vary and

 depends on the size of the egg that you are using so add water little by little

 and if you don't if you find that there's not enough water always add a

 bit more but don't make it runny make a smooth dough and keep on kneading

 eight minutes after mixing about eight minutes add the butter and keep on

 kneading another 20 minutes always make sure that you knead it very well always

 put that in a greased bowl and leave it in a warm place until it double in size

 if you are living in a cooler climate always make sure that you switch on the

 oven to 30 and then you can switch off it or leave it on 20 and leave it in the

 oven to prove if not it will take a longer time so what I'm going to do is

 flour the bench and then put the dough onto the bench punch it down and put

 more flour on top and next cut the dough into equal size pieces so I cut

 the dough into 12 equal size pieces so take one piece out and press it down

 like this and roll it and leave it on the bench to prove again about 10

 minutes so the dough is ready separate them again and take one piece out and

 roll it then use a rolling pin and make it like to a rectangular shape always

 use flour if it is a bit sticky then roll it like this and press the ends and

 I'm using a nonstick pan so I'm not putting any papers in there so I'm going

 to put them leaving sides to prove and going to cover this and put it in the

 fridge and after I come back from work I'm going to do the rest of the thing

 I'm going to prove again and I'll show you how to do it after so I left the

 bread rolls outside for a while and it's ready to go to the oven going to brush

 the tops with eggs and bake this on 180 about 20 to 30 minutes so the bread

 rolls are ready and I baked it until golden brown and it's really hot but I'll

 take one out to show you how soft it is and if I open one to show you it's really

 nice soft and moist and hope you will enjoy this thank you for watching

 Don't you just hate it when you have floating bookshelves like these and your books are just constantly toppling off the edge and landing on your head and giving you brain damage and stuff?

 And also because you're an author like me, you're probably agoraphobic and probably poor so you can't leave the house to buy bookends.

 The most obvious solution, the one that most people do, is that they rearrange the bookshelves so that something broader and thicker is at the end.

 But then, you know, it's not in alphabetical order and you can't sleep.

 Why isn't Scarecrow by Matthew Riley next to Scarecrow by Matthew Riley?

 You can do this using materials that you have lying around the house.

I would recommend a sheet of paper, a pair of scissors and a piece of sticky tape.

 First things first, you fold your sheet of paper in half like this, as neat as you can without spending too much time on it.

 As I said, it's going to come out invisible so you don't really need to worry about how it looks.

 Next step, you take a slice, not the whole way through the piece of paper, but just across one of the four lines like so.

 We just need to make it sturdy using a little bit of sticky tape.

 To make it doubly sturdy, you'll want to put one on the other side.

 But, it'll be even more sturdy the more weight you put on this piece of paper.

 The most incredibly simple eye look to achieve, and blue is kind of a good fall color right

 So the first thing you want to do is use any kind of a black base.

 You can use a black eye pencil, you can use a greased paint stick, you can use NYX, you

 And it doesn't have to be perfect, because this is just going to work as a base.

 And with a smoky eye, you want the darkest point of the eye to be closest to the lash

 So I'm just going to work that into my lash line using the side of the brush, or the tip,

 And I'm just going to bring that up into my crease just a little bit.

 And like I said, it's okay if it looks messy, because we're just going to go in and cover

 Alright, and I want to apologize, my skin is kind of blotchy right now.

 I'm having like some kind of weird allergic reaction to something today, which is weird

 Alrighty, once you have your base applied, I'm going to take an FS239 brush with Deep

 And then Deep Truth over a black base really makes this really pretty metallic dark blue,

 I know my camera's not going to pick up the true colors of this, but it is a gorgeous

 Okay, I'm just applying that to my eyelid and leaving a little bit of that black in

 I'm going to go in with a slightly lighter blue, and this is called Submarine, but any

 I'm going to pick a little bit of that up, and I'm going to start to work that right

 So that there's a transition between that Deep Truth and that black, and that there's

 With smoky eyes, I don't like to go too high up in my crease because it's already a pretty

 dramatic look, and you don't need to do a lot to, you know, overemphasize the eyes because

 smoky eyes is already going to bring out your eyes and draw the attention to your eyes.

 Next color I'm going to take is Floof, which is a shimmery champagne color.

 I'm going to take this Sigma brush again, and I'm just going to blend that right along

 Alright, and now with the SS252, I'm going to take Blanc Type, which is just a matte

 I'm using a matte highlight since everything else is pretty shimmery and metallic, just

 Alright, now with a SS219, I'm just going to smudge Deep Truth underneath my eyes, because

 that's what completes the look of a smoky eye, is smudged color.

 So I'm just working that into my bottom lashes, and just smudging it across.

 Alright, I'm going to wipe off that brush a little bit and pick up some of that Floof,

 and work that on the inner corner so that there's an inner corner highlight, and blend

 Alright, you could add some eyeliner to the top of your eye, but I'm just going to add

 some Urban Decay 24-7 Eyeliner Pencil, and I'm going to tightline my eye, work it into

 Alright, and then I'm going to also add that to my waterline, as soon as my eyes stop watering.

 Cheekies, I have Refined Golden Bronzer, Pearl Cream Color Base, and some Stark Naked Blush

 Lips, I would just go with a very light pink lip gloss because the eyes are kind of intense,

 Which isn't going to do much to change the color of my lips, just add that gorgeous sparkle.

 I hope you guys enjoyed, and I hope this helps some of you out that want to achieve that

 Hi, this is Robin Moses and I am going to do a design with pink and black and I'm using

 my new camera so sorry, I'm still trying to figure out how to use it or if it's going

 it takes way too many hours to upload them into high def, but I'm uploading them into

 guys learn all of the techniques, that's 80% what I care about.

 foil called Rainbow Swirl and I bought it at dollarnailart.com.

 it with the best glue ever and you can buy the best glue ever at scrapperfect.com and

 I'm going in with the side polish like this and I'm kind of just going down on one side

 higher coming back on this side touching and going around like that so that I have a real

 kind of like a jaggedy looking French manicure that goes down a little lower than normal.

 Okay, now with the best glue ever at full strength, I'm going in with my pink brush

 and I am going to just put in little tiny stripes and they're just going to be just

 little, little just whimsical stripes that are going to go right through the center of

Okay, now I'm going to use up the foil that I have right and I'm going to

 on the back side it has the brown film and what I'm going to do is I've got my little

 Mende dispenser and then use the acetone and then with the acetone on a piece of cotton

 Then on the nail, we're going to go and just tap up, get it around your nail so it's like

 this on your finger and then you want to just tap into place the stripes, okay?

 Okay, now I have my pink brush and my black paint, my favorite things.

 black glitter that I buy at the craft store in with clear polish and make my own.

 I'm going over into the big areas of black with just a tiny touch of black glitter like

Just here and there just to add a little tiny bit of zing to them and then I'm going

 Alright and this is the finished product and let me try to zoom down.

I'm sure you can see them better than you used to be able to see

Okay, I just want to thank you to everybody watching and let me think.

 show me at my fan page, Robin Moses fan page at Facebook and comment and please thumbs

 Monday, Wednesday and Friday and sorry I'm a little bit flustered right now.

 It's pretty high in carbs, pretty high in protein, it's low in fat.

 So what I did first is I came over to my scale, I weighed out my tilapia.

 What I'm going to do is just keep the seasonings pretty simple.

 I've got some lemon pepper seasoning and some roasted garlic and herb seasoning.

 So before we get to that, let me put the hair out, get this out of the way.

 I'm going to put about a tablespoon of olive oil in the pan here.

 Now this induction stove, if you haven't seen any of my other cooking videos, this is what

 It's kind of like having a grill in the kitchen or like, you know, I don't have gas stoves.

 If you travel a lot, you can bring this with you in a suitcase.

 I do sometimes if I get, you know, if I get a hotel that has a kitchen or even if it doesn't

 With these Ezekiel, instead of doing whole wheat, I like to use Ezekiel buns.

 So you're getting, whoops, you're getting complex carbs when I drop these.

 All right, so while the fish is cooking, let me turn it up a little bit.

 So while the fish is cooking, we got the buns toasting and after the buns come out, we're

 Like I said, we're doing low fat, high protein, high carb meal.

 Now most people, a lot of my clients have a hard time finding this Ezekiel bread.

 What you're going to have to do is look in the freezer section.

 All right, so while this is cooking, we're going to throw some of this fat free cheese

 You can use romaine lettuce, iceberg lettuce, whatever you want.

 All right, now if you see here, this is not exactly how crunchy I like the fish.

 So I wanted to get this meal in for you guys before I head over there.

 I would cook the fish a little bit longer, but I've got to be somewhere in about 35 minutes.

 Now, the most important part of this whole meal, Frank's Red Hot.

 This is not a Frank's Red Hot commercial, but you have to put Frank's Red Hot on everything.

 I'm not a huge Tabasco guy, but I pour this Frank's Red Hot on just about everything.

 If you enjoyed this video, make sure to like and subscribe to my channel.

Today I'm gonna make, so I'll show you guys how I make some snow peas with shrimps.

And um, you know the weather is good so I'm out here enjoying the heat and the view of everything.

This here is not clean so I'm gonna show you how I do it real quick.

 So here I'm gonna show you real quick how I'm cleaning it because I cleaned some already.

 You cut the edge like this and there's a string you pull it out right from.

 You see this one is a very young one so you don't have much to go like that.

 But I'm telling you these are very young so they hardly have any string.

 Or you could cut it like this if you don't want to take the edge out.

 But if you can't pull it out like this and you want to you could just cut it along the edge.

 So I'll be doing the rest and I'll show you how I'm gonna cook it.

 I have some green onions, some garlic, some onions, some sweet peppers, some celery, some hot peppers, some basil and some thyme.

 All these I'll be using and I'll be cooking, I'm making a masala snow peas.

 Yeah so I put in a little garam masala, a little turmeric, a little jeera and just a little bit of curry powder.

 So the oil is all nice and hot so I'm gonna throw in this little masala in here.

 When it's frying down then I'll be adding the snow peas, the shrimps then the snow peas.

 So this is all nicely fried so I'm gonna throw in the snow peas.

 You know salt usually go for taste so I'll be putting in some salt right now.

 I put in some tomato in this and some fresh onion and let it cook a little more and it's finished.

 So this time I'll be adding in some fresh onion, some tomato and some pepper for seasoning.

 This video I'm going to be showing you a few workouts you can do to help improve your shooting

 Improve your slap shot, your wrist shot, basically any shot in hockey.

 So most of these workouts are from a great book called Complete Conditioning for Hockey.

 And if you want to grab it you can hop on my website and I'm just going to show you

 a few drills that I found are really helpful to improve shooting power.

 So for this workout we're working on rotary strength and your core muscles.

 So just grab the ball, pass it around, partner will receive it.

 You want to make sure you've got a foot away and for the better athletes to have more flexibility

 I'll show you another one that you can use with the medicine ball.

 It's also teaching you to use your legs and your arms in unison.

 You're coming down, rotating, and you're driving with your back leg.

 And when you really throw the ball, you really feel the workout.

 Get those core muscles working and activate all the muscles involved in this shot.

 The next workout I'm going to show involves slap sticks, which is a resistance band.

 I wanted to make a video quickly, so I'm just going to use a resistance band.

 Basically what you're doing is wood chops with a resistance band.

 This one, I prefer the slap sticks because they come in extra resistance.

 If you want to pick up the slap sticks, you can click on the link in the bottom of this video.

 There's more workouts and more videos and more hockey tips if you browse the site.

 If you get the proper resistance, you'll be building all your core muscles,

 You're giving them resistance so you'll be building them and teaching them to work in unison.

 That motion is very similar to the slap shot, wrist shot, and snap shot.

 If you want more workouts like that, pick up Fleet Conditioning for Hockey.

 There's a ton of slap stick workouts and a bunch of different workouts.

 We're going to head outside and show you a few more workouts you can do to get ready to get quicker.

 This is another workout that will help you develop rotary strength, core muscles,

 getting your muscles all working together, and getting that pushing and pulling in action.

 What you want to do is use your core muscles to push and provide resistance.

 You can really feel it in the core muscles if you really push and he's really pushing back.

 It works great for targeting the specific muscles when you're taking a shot.

 If you want to see a full review for this, check out howtohockey.com.

 I'm going to show you one more drill that's really going to help you shoot.

 This last drill that's really going to help you improve your shooting is actually shooting the puck.

 That's going to really help you improve because you're activating all your muscles.

 Your muscles will build because it's all the muscles involved in shooting.

 You're also going to work on your form and perfect that muscle memory.

 And then we'll probably need sugar, salt and so on and so forth

 I thought about combining two of my front locks because one is rather thin.

 This one is ok by itself but I figured I'd get sick of doing this one right here.

 What I'm going to use today is the white rain holy spray that I've been telling you about.

 You know that I don't like using stuff that I can't wash out my hair.

 So to go ahead and start I'm going to show you that I'm going to be combining it with

 So you just take a little gel or whatever product you're going to use.

 I'm unraveling it just a little bit to the point where my lock part is right here.

 So what I'm going to do is take this little piece and just a simple twist.

 I'm going to wrap the little lock around the root of the bigger lock.

 White rain holds really well but it washes out just like the gel does.

 So I'm also going to still twist that because I want the holding spray to get in it as well.

 Now the trick comes in is where I have to keep it like that maybe for a month or so

 Sometimes I just make sure before I go to bed that it's clipped and I wrap my hair with

 I really wouldn't use just a cap because it can unravel and move.

 It really helps if you have a skinny lock or one that's about to break or it is thinning

 and combining with another stronger lock and it prevents you having to either cut it or

 letting it break or if you try to pull your locks back and it embarrasses you like when

 you're public and you put back a lock and here you got a lock in your hand.

 So this is a good preventive measure when you see your locks to thin and you know you

 Or if you're just tired of having little itty bitty locks and you have more uniform locks.

 As you can see my locks are about the same across my head and I just kind of got tired

 Real quick thing I wanted to share with you that's pretty cool.

 This is just a strip that I cut off, it was on a big sheet that I had CNC machined.

 And then what we're going to do is put some tape on the ends of this here.

 It's about 9 thousandths, 10 thousandths I think is what it was.

 But anyways what I'm going to do is I'll go ahead and take a little alcohol.

 And then what we're going to do is put two loops of that so we've got about 20 thousandths.

 So we'll just take this, I'll cut off, get some good adhesive on it.

 And we'll bring it back around and just chop it before it goes on the third loop.

 OK so we should have approximately 20 thousandths spacing off of that.

 And we've got these little standoffs here that will keep it up off of the glass about

 So here we're at the BerryBot machine and I'm going to put some glass juice down.

 So then what we're going to do is we're just going to pull this across the glass.

 So it's not that big of a deal but what this does is it just gives you a really even layer

 Welcome to another episode of Food Frontal with TL where I take you on a

 special journey with me to the most fabulous eats here in SoCal.

 find the best Italian beef so I'm going to Google best Italian beef in Chicago

 years now and one of the biggest things that we miss about Chicago is Chicago

You can't find them any place outside of Chicago until Al's beef.

 If I'm not mistaken, I understand this Al's beef in Chino is currently the first and only location in SoCal.

 We're bringing the Chicago experience to Southern California and I think you guys

 opportunity to try the very tasty Italian beefs at Portillo's in Buena Park.

 What makes the Italian beef here at Al's beef so distinctive to justify the

 claim that it's number one and even better than the one at Portillo's?

 beefs all over Chicago but we are the, consistently we're ranked the best

 out and you see the Chicago people streaming in here and they try the beef

 and they swear it's just exactly like the one in Chicago and that's what we

You put it back in the gravy and then we load it on to this crusty

 Italian bread so it kind of soaks into the bread and you top it with this

Basically the combo is the same exact sandwich although you throw

 an Italian sausage, a medium hot char-grilled Italian sausage right on

 menu I think it's I think it might even be one of the best things on our menu is

So we got a char-grilled Polish, yellow mustard, grilled onions and

 top-ten in America fries, put it right on top, roll it up and boom you got a

 All right TL, I know Chicago didn't invent the cheeseburger, although most of

 There's an explosion in my mouth filled with pure grade-A meat, spice and

 The best thing is to hold that Italian sandwich and your elbows right to the corner.

 Folks, I've completed my journey to find the best place for Italian beef in SoCal and that place is Al's Beef.

 Hi, I'm Dan Perry with Handy Green, a Reno handyman service, and today I'm going to show

 Typically this would be done if your fence post rotted out and you were just replacing

 the fence post, but this time I'm actually just removing an old fence, so we don't have

 to worry about any prep for pouring new concrete for the new fence post.

 So the first thing you've got to do is go up to your fence post and you're going to

 want to dig a hole about two or three feet wide all the way around the fence, and you'll

 Now this typically goes about two feet into the ground, so you're not going to be able

 to pull this out by hand, and they're kind of difficult to get out, but I'm going to

 show you a trick that I use to get them out a little bit easier.

 You can use that to jam it into the ground to break it up so you can shovel it and remove

 It's a regular shovel here, so you just, you know, after the dirt's loose you can get it

 So this hole's ready, this post is ready to be popped, and I'm going to show you how

 It's typically used on off-road vehicles to get them out of the mud, but we're going to

 Get a piece of chain, two hooks on it, and go ahead and get a little closer so you can

 So you're going to wrap the chain around here, and you'll notice one of these hooks is a

 slip hook, and one of them, I don't know what it's called, but it hooks onto the chain without

 So you wrap the chain around, hook that slip hook around the chain, get it nice and tight

 As you see it here, you take your high lift jack, get it as close to the stump as possible,

 So you wrap it around, hook it like that so you've got a nice connection there, and then

 you're going to push it all the way back as close to the base of the high lift jack as

 If you put it too close to the tip, it's going to pull the top of this forward, and you're

 And it looks like this one's coming out here okay, unless that chain slips off.

 So as you can imagine, digging that out is going to be pretty difficult.

 So that's why this post popper, or this high lift jack is so necessary.

 Hey guys, thanks for checking out another segment of Casey's Kitchen.

 This is again a great dish that you can bring as a side dish for Thanksgiving, for a holiday

 You can use frozen if you want, if you need a quick way around it.

 You're going to take your butternut squash, put it right on down there.

 You can have the easy squash for later or use it in a lovely gourd display as you can

 Okay, then you're going to take some brown sugar and sprinkle it on in there.

 And then you're going to take some nutmeg, a little sprinkle, a little cinnamon sprinkle.

 You're going to take some salt and crank some salt down in there.

 When you add salt to it, it's going to let the butternut squash sweat out and it will

 If you're health conscious, you can use margarine, but it's the holidays and calories don't count.

 And I'm going to put some crushed pecans in it just for a little crunch.

 I like something, if you make a casserole, I like the top to crunch.

 So you look at this and the butter's going to melt down, the sugar's going to melt down.

 So I scoured my cabinets and I found the best thing to use is get like a cluster,

 And what you're going to do is you're going to put this in the oven and you're going to

 Get my pot holder because through trial and error, I have learned to make one ahead of time.

 So you may have noticed that the shape of the pan changed, but it's still all the same stuff.

 but wait until that butternut squash is nice and tender, which this one is,

 So make sure you stick around and check back all the time to see what's new in Casey's Kitchen.

 I'm going to start off on my brand new channel with a series about cross stitching.

 And I'm going to do my best to go through some of the basics of counted cross stitch

 with you, show you the tools that are used and how they're used, and hopefully you'll

 The first project I'm going to work on is a kit that I purchased from my local Walmart,

 It's from their Inspirational Assortment, and this one is called God's Grace.

 Depending on your skill level and how much time you can spend on it, you know, will determine

 It could take up to a week, and maybe even two weeks if you can only give it a few minutes

 And I'm going to go ahead and show you some of the basics about counted cross stitch.

 One of the things you'll notice when you purchase the package is it tells you what the finished

 And they don't necessarily mean that's the size of cloth that you receive.

 That means from the very top stitch to the very bottom stitch is how many inches it is

 And then from the very outside stitch of one side to the very outside stitch of the other

 What that refers to is the cloth that you receive in the package.

 In any counted cross stitch cloth, there are these little squares, and that's from the

 And that would mean that there are 14 squares in every inch of cloth.

 So the higher the count, say 14 count, is going to be smaller squares.

 You're going to get more detailed design, and your finished design is going to be smaller.

 So that's generally when you see your simpler designs is on the 11 count, and they're not

 going to be very detailed, and your finished size is going to be a little bit larger.

 Now something that doesn't come with the kit that I had to purchase separately, but it

 But for the size cloth that I'm going to be working with, this is going to be perfect.

 And to open it, you just twist this little nut on the end, and then it comes to pour

 And when I say it's the perfect size for the cloth I'm working with, as you can see, the

 Even when I'm working on the most outside edge of the design, I'm still going to have

 See, so I'm going to show you, even if I'm working on the very edge...

 If my hoop was too big, then what would happen is it wouldn't fit, and I would end up with

 And if my hoop was too small, then I would have to constantly move it.

 I would only be able to work within a very small area at a time, so that could be a little

 So you want to make sure that you have a hoop that is appropriate with the size cloth that

 And with these JanLyn kits, on one side of the directions is going to show you the different

 threads, different color threads that you're going to have, and the numbers correspond

 So that if you run out of a thread, you can go to the store and you can purchase what

 they call a skein of thread, and you'll know you're getting the right color because it'll

 On the other side of the directions shows you the actual design.

 Now, every square in the grid or on the pattern relates to a square on your cloth in the woven

 So if it shows this pattern here or this square here, then you're going to look over here

 on your legend, and you're going to look for the square, and it's going to show you that

 And color number 38, I'm sorry I'm doing this backwards, 3835, I'm sorry, color number

 So if you look on this side, color number 3835 is medium purple.

 And of course you will have separated everything out onto your cord, and you'll know exactly

 which one the medium purple is according to where you placed it on your cord.

 And the way you work counted cross stitch is to find the center of design and you work

 So what I would probably start doing is either working on this word or this word, and then

 And I have a tendency, and it's just because of the way I work, I usually go up and then

 It gives you some basic directions about counted cross stitch and how to work it.

 It explains when you're done with your design how to mount it and how to frame it.

 So you might want to read those over when you pick up your kit.

 And I do recommend that you start with a kit instead of going and picking out a design

 and then trying to figure out what cloth to buy and trying to figure out which threads

 If you are an absolute beginner, I really highly recommend that you go to your local

 craft store and find a complete kit that has everything you need in it.

 And as I said, most of them don't come with a hoop, so make sure you purchase a hoop.

 And we're going to, the next video up in the series, we're going to actually get started

 showing you how to find the center of your cloth and get started stitching a design.

 I'm going to see how well I can do a demonstration of the, from what I understand, the Kevin

 Brown method with the DA, Meguiar's number 105, and an orange cutting pad.

 You need to prime the pad, put polish on it, work it in with your thumb or fingers until

 Typical of dealerships or hack detailers, that's the type of work they do.

 I guess if you get paid you can call yourself a professional whether you do good work or

 This way you can see there's no camera tricks once I wipe the polish off.

 Today I'm going to be showing you how to make a lemon sugar body scrub that's great to give

 as a holiday gift and wonderful to keep for yourself to get rid of that dry winter skin.

 So for this project you're going to need sweet almond oil, coconut oil, shea butter, which

 comes in a container like this, you can find this on Amazon as well as all the other ingredients,

 some regular old granulated sugar, and the juice from half a lemon.

 So we're going to start out by taking a quarter cup of the shea butter and sticking it in

 Now this can take anywhere from 30 seconds to a minute, so keep your eye on it.

 Next we're going to take a cup and a half of granulated sugar and add that to a plastic

 Next thing we're going to do is add a half a cup of the sweet almond oil in there.

 And then we're going to melt some coconut oil, about a quarter cup, and add that in

 This takes less time than the shea butter so keep your eye on that as well.

 And then we're going to stir that all up and at this point you can check the texture.

 If it's too thin for you add some more sugar, and if it's too thick add some more of the

 Then you can just put that into any container of your choosing.

 I got these mason jars from Amazon, but you can pick any container you like and dress

 Give them as gifts, keep them for yourself, it's a great project and it's a super fun

 The award winning Breville U-Brew has intelligent features that let you dial in your personal

 Brew a freshly ground roast right into your favourite cup, mug or travel mug or you can

 Always check the roasted on date when buying beans and use them within two weeks of that

 First ensure your hopper is locked into place, then place the beans in the hopper.

 If you wanted to use pre-ground just turn the grinder off but be sure to use only drip

 coffee grinds and not espresso grinds since the finer grind may actually cause the coffee

 Press the open button to remove the basket and fit it with either the gold tone filter

 The LCD screen has a flashing indicator as you fill it the bars will increase up to 12

 Then follow the intuitive LCD screen and program in your preferences.

 The brew IQ system will preheat the water and dose the coffee to ensure optimum flavour

 Next press carafe, then select from the seven strength settings from mild, strong, intense

 And if you simply can't wait for a cup of coffee the pause function will stop the flow

 of coffee into the carafe with just enough time for you to fill your cup.

 Unique to the UBrew glass is the warming plate and that will remain on for two hours after

 To set it to single cup mode, preheat the cup by filling it with hot water and let it

 And you'll need to use a heat resistant cup because of the warming plate.

 For travel mugs, remove the drip tray, open the door, pop in the travel mug and then shut

 Press single cup, choose your size, then select from the seven strength settings from mild

 Then select your flavour profile between the five settings which will vary the steeping

 When the cycle is complete you'll hear the ready alert and you can change the ready signal

 Clean the filter basket thoroughly or remove the paper filter and check to see if there's

 The UBrew glass, brought to you by the food thinkers at Breville.

 I'm really more of a pusher myself where I just like to push the string through there.

 But what I've done now is I've put a piece of string in my racket here.

 It's actually just two loops of string and I've tied one end of it onto my stringer and the other end is just free.

 Now if I want to run my crosses back across there, I can go in and since I've got two loops of string here, I can put this string through that loop.

 And then if I want to pull my string through, it's pretty quick to do that and I can probably pull it a lot faster than I can push it now.

 But this is only good for one direction, coming across this way.

 I've got a loop of string here that comes across my racket and loops with another loop of string right here in the center.

 So this string, which is about maybe two feet long, I've got tied on the frame so I don't pull it all the way through.

 I simply take enough string to reach the other side of the racket, stick it through the loop that's going on this side of the racket, then just pull it through.

I've got to take it out of that loop or I'll never get it through there.

 When you get down to the bottom of the racket, it's usually pretty hard to string these strings through there.

 Alright guys, so today I'm recording this video from my 5th generation iPod Nano.

 And I'm actually just going to show you how to make your own homemade iPod Nano 5th generation

 Which I will be using for all my next videos probably for a while.

 And so yeah, it will be all my videos from now on will be recorded from my iPod Nano

 So all you're going to need is one of these little clips, like binder clips.

 So, and you're going to also need the box, the original box to your iPod Nano.

 But it goes right here and your iPod comes inside it and then you have to curve it like

 And then I just taped it to one of these, which is right there.

 And then this front part just clips on to the screw right there on my tripod.

 So any tripod with that little screw right there, which is like actually all of them

 Okay, they just clip on right there under the tripod screw thing.

 And make sure that you put in your iPod with the little scroll wheel, you know, the little

 white thing on this side and the screen over here on this side.

 This side with this little white picture right here, you can barely see it.

 That's the thing that shows you how to bend it and take it off.

 You want that on the side of the screen, which would be the opposite side of the camera.

 Because the camera's on the top right, which would be right here.

 So the camera's actually just going to go right through the glass, like right there.

 So but if I had it like the other way, then the picture would get in the way.

 So make sure the camera is on the opposite side of that little picture.

 We're on a mission to find out how a restaurant that opened its doors in 1950

 had a butcher shop in Log Cabin in Puritan, and when he moved out here, this was

 and the other side he made a butcher shop in case the restaurant didn't take off.

 Well, the restaurant took off more than he thought, so he closed the butcher shop and made the whole thing a restaurant.

 a neighbor, and I lived a block away from here, which I still own my mother's house here.

 at an early age, and I always did odd jobs in the neighborhood, so I walked up and I was ready to do anything,

 well, we're not making a lot of money right now, and I said, well, I need a job.

 I've been paying off ever since, but he's made it very fair and very reasonable

 for me to be able to stay in business, even during the bad economy,

 and I've been able to pay off the overhead, and it's been very good to me that way.

 I wanted to find out what's behind the success of a place that's been in business

 I think keeping the old style, doing things the way they were taught to me,

 So I've kept the quality, and had to charge a little bit more than other people,

 most of them, come from farther away, used to live in the neighborhood,

 or have heard about it, and will travel 20, 30 miles to come get my fish and chips

 Well, right away you see the homeliness and friendliness of people here,

 and you're going to get a good meal, and you know that for sure, and I have people that come in

 and say that they can get something at a fast food restaurant much cheaper, and I said, well, sure you can,

 I can't compete with them, but you're going to get a real meal here,

Everything is in-house here with the exception of the rolls that I get at a bakery.

I mean, I've always said the restaurant business is for a certain

 class of people, just probably like it is for police officers or firemen or doctors

If you don't like what you're doing anyway, you're not going to do it well.

 But the restaurant business is very time demanding, and you spend a whole lot of hours,

 more hours than people really believe that you do, and your biggest satisfaction

 is not the money, because the paycheck's not that huge, but you do make

 a decent living, and you see the smile on people's faces, and it just,

 Okay, Harry, let's show everybody how it works here today, okay?

 This is a little bit bigger, and it's a little fat in the end, so we'll trim a little bit off.

 Well, if I take a regular fillet like this, I'll cut it up into

 looking at it all the time that I'm cutting it, I fillet it out

 a little bit by butterflying it, and then check to make sure that there's nothing in there like we did before.

I try to make sure everything is the thickness, desired thickness

 So that's basically what I do just about every day, is go through

 Okay, now that we've learned about how to cut and fillet fish and how to candle it, Harry's

So we're getting almost a whole ounce out of each piece of shrimp.

 Do you have one of those door hinges that just have lost their hold because maybe the

 kids have been swinging on the door and you didn't think that there's a way to fix it

 The first thing you want to do is you want to remove the screws.

 You want to take three match, wood matches, and we want to break off the heads because

 If you don't have wooden matches, toothpicks will work just fine.

 What you want to do is you want to take carpenters glue and you want to just put a little bit

 of glue down there in the hole where the screw to the hinge went.

 You know what, even if you don't have a toothpick or wooden matches, you can always use just

 What you want to do is you want to take that wood and you want to insert it in the hole.

 You're going to repeat that process with the other one as well, or the remaining two.

 Ten minutes tops until the kids, they can swing away now on the tour, or maybe you don't

 and we're going to show you how to strip this apart to service it correctly.

 Now, first off, you've got to have the tools you need to do the job.

 As we're at the Catalyst Reaction shop, we have our Motion Pro Vice,

 We also need a flat-blade screwdriver for the compression and rebound adjuster.

 We need a crescent wrench or a 22-millimeter socket that will do the preload adjuster,

 and then we also need a socket for the fork cap itself to undo that.

 We're using a power drill, electric drill, to run the compressor up and down.

 You will see where all these tools come in as we go through the disassembly.

 Now, whenever you take anything apart, the most important thing to do is write down all your settings.

 And so we've got our Sharpie here because it won't fade away on us,

 Half one, half two, half three, and a half, basically three and a half

 because we have to set that later, of 3.5, and then we'll do the same with compression.

 and now we can go ahead and remove the fork cap out of the rebound rod.

 Now we'll put this back in the tank, and we need to let it drain for probably 10, 15 minutes

 because of all the steel particulate that's in the bottom, and that will slowly drain its way out.

 So at this point, it should be lunchtime, go for a snack, do something,

 but you need to let it drain for at least 15 minutes to half an hour.

 Now if you're wondering what all those gray trails were that you saw in the sink,

 it is steel, very fine particles of steel, debris because the fork spring scrapes all the time when it's in there.

 And if we tilt it, you can see how black it is on the base, and that's just from one race weekend.

 The forks you saw in the sink had 15,000 miles on them, so we've got to strip clean those properly.

 but there'll also be a lot of rocks, debris, and things like that.

 So take a blue paper towel or something like that, rather than a cotton cloth, and use this.

 Be careful wiping it out the first time around, but once the bulk of the debris is out, get after it and clean it properly.

 Hey guys, it's Erin and today I'm going to teach you how to do beach nails.

 After I posted these on my Instagram, everyone wanted to know how to do them so I decided to make a video.

 To speed up the drying time, you can use a fast drying top coat like Avedon.

 Using a light blue and a dark blue, you're going to paint a rectangle about the size of your nail.

 You want one third of it to be the light blue and two thirds of it to be the dark blue since another third of the dark blue is going to be covered up by the sand.

 Then dab off the excess polish onto a piece of paper and roll it on your nail.

 Then dab off the excess polish onto a piece of paper and roll it on your nail with the lighter blue on the top.

 To create a gradient, you just want to roll it on your nail back and forth first and then dab up and down to blend the colors together.

 For each nail, reapply the polish to the sponge, dab it off on the piece of paper, and use the same technique to create the gradient.

 To get the colors opaque and blended together on the gradient, you have to do a few coats of this.

 After about three coats, the gradient should be good, so apply a fast drying top coat to smooth out the design and blend the colors together even more.

So use a q-tip dipped in nail polish remover to clean up most of it.

 Then, to get right around the cuticles, you can use a small brush dipped into nail polish remover.

I'm using Essie Good As Gold to create a bumpy line for the sand.

 After that, I'm taking a sparkly bronze gold glitter and I'm putting it on top of the gold.

 Unfortunately, you can't see it well in this video, but it's just like you're drawing them on a piece of paper.

 Make two C shapes using a black striper and then you have your seagull.

 I did two seagulls, but you can only do one or you can do as many as you want.

 So take an orange striper and just make five lines coming together in the middle.

 It doesn't have to be perfect, so don't worry if it's a little uneven.

 After the orange is dry, take a small dotting tool and white polish and make little white dots all over the starfish.

 To make a palm tree, take a brown striper and make a line for the trunk.

 Using a dotting tool, make a yellow dot and then use a striper to make little lines all around the dot.

 Please like this video, comment any designs you want me to do, and subscribe.

 Also make sure you follow me on Twitter, Instagram, and Pinterest.

 this video tutorial I'm going to show you how to serge inward corners.

 Here I have an inward corner that has been serged or overlocked and I'm going to show

 Here we have the inward corner and the trick is to make sure that when we serge or overlock

 your scissors and you're going to snip, just clip diagonally 3-4mm into that corner and

 that just releases the pressure off the corner so when you come to sewing it or overlocking

 As you take your work to your overlocker or serger just serge in the same fashion, keep

 going straight and when you're roughly about 1.5-5.8 of an inch away from your corner just

 straighten that corner out so you have a straight line and you've created a little

 tuck here and then you've got a straight line in which to continue, that's all and it should

 be covering and not giving it a pleat or tuck and then just continue straight down.

 And there we have a neatened edge to an inward corner that has been serged or overlocked.

 If you do try this technique on a sewing project do remember that little tip is to snip or

 clip into that corner and that will give you a straight line for when you come to serge

 Don't forget to subscribe to Fashion Sewing Blog TV for free weekly video tutorials and

 if you have any comments or queries please put them in the comment box below and I'll

 Hey guys, um, I just wanted to make a new video because I just finished updating my or upgrading my paper crossbow

 Guiding line so that it won't keep like rolling around right there

 And um, I took off the top thing because it just kept getting bent from the rubber bands

 All right, so now i'm going to be shooting a pen at um that box right there, uh from about six feet away

 Um now i'm going to try from about 15 feet away with this, uh little inside of a pen so yeah, there we go

 There you go, um, well it went in right there but it just fell out so yeah

 Um, so now we're gonna do outdoor tests with this, um seeing how far it goes.

 All right, so, um, there's my backyard and i'm gonna be shooting out of that fence over there

 Um, I decided to use a pencil because for some reason, um, it's pretty windy out there right now

 Yeah, so, um, there's my favorite crossbow if you have any questions, uh, feel free to message me, um

 Yeah, and you have any video requests something for me to build, uh, just ask i'll build it probably

 and um if enough people ask, uh for me to do a tutorial how to build this I will but

 Actually a lot of people because it's kind of annoying and takes a long time.

 you want, but today I have lots of peaches, so that's what I'm using.

And one cup of peaches, peeled and chopped into tiny little pieces.

 To make the pie crust, combine the coconut milk, tapioca flour, and almond flour in a

Then pour a quarter cup of the batter onto a preheated nonstick pan

Let the batter cook until the bottom of the flatbread is firm enough

Using a spatula, lift the bread and move it onto a baking sheet, flipping it over

Next, we're going to put a tablespoon of this peach filling onto the pastry.

 we'll use a little bit of egg wash and put it around the edges with a brush to help seal

 egg wash on the pie, then take a knife and put a tiny slit in the middle.

 playing guitar but this is one of the easier ones, quite easy to remember and we'll go

The E chord finger 1 on the G string at the 1st fret and fingers 2 and

 the song of the A chord, D, E, D. So A, D, E, D. Relatively simple with the strumming

 so it's a good song to get the chords up to speed because you don't have to concentrate

So on the A chord you use D, E, D. So A, D, E, D. And that's the whole

 the middle, the wild thing I think I love you bit which is basically you play the D,

 G and B strings which you're holding down for the A chord open, then you put your fingers

 I just want to show you how to, a good idea of changing between chords.

 all beginners out there and it's a good, whatever chords you're using it's a good idea to look

Sometimes you can find your fingers stay, one finger or two finger might stay

In this case with the A, D, A, D and E chords in the wild thing,

But try and look for any fingers that might stay in the same place.

 when I go from this A chord, first chord in it, to the D chord, finger three, although

Two reasons for this, one is obviously if it doesn't have to move,

 if it can stay on the same string you don't have to take it off because you've got to

But the other thing is it tends to encourage the fact that you're leaving

 that finger where it is, I'm exaggerating this at the moment, but because you're leaving

 that finger where it is it tends to encourage you to keep the other fingers relatively close

 to the fingerboard, which helps when changing between the chords.

 the D chord to the E chord, again all your fingers move, but this finger, finger one,

 on the second fret of the G string moves back to the first fret of the G string, but on

 in the song you're going A to D, D, sorry D to E, A to E, A to E, A to E, A to E, A

 So great song to learn for those of you who want to just start your chord playing, and

 only to discover that your spark plugs are covered with oil like this,

 So first take all the spark plug wires out and put them to the side,

 then remove the wiring harness off of the top of the cover here,

 then get a big socket to take the nuts off the top of the valve cover,

 so you replace them all at the same time while you have it taken apart,

 so it doesn't fall off when you turn it upside down and put it on the engine,

 it's made out of silicone, it lasts a long time and doesn't need re-tightening,

 so to do a good job, clean it off with some brake cleaner before you start the car,

 so the next time you find oil all over your spark plugs, don't freak out,

 and remember, if you've got any car questions, just visit ScottyKilmer.com

 Hello, in this video I'll be showing you how to make little mermaid inspired nails.

 I think it's a cute, sophisticated way to express you like Little Mermaid without, like, drawing little fishes on it or being too childish.

 You wanna start off with the base coat on all your nails and make sure your cuticles are pushed back and your nails are clean.

 Now you're gonna use a nude color and only use it on your thumbs.

 Now you're gonna use a red color and only use it on your index, middle, and pinky finger.

 And it's okay if you get nail polish on your skin, we can clean that later.

 If you didn't have any of the colors for your ring fingers, you can use a clear coat and tip your fingers in glitter.

 When you use the glitter, you wanna make sure your other nails are dry cause it can get messy.

 Now you're going to use a top coat to set the glitter until it's smooth.

 You're going to draw two rounded triangles at the end of your thumbs.

 Now you're going to create two arches at the bottom of your thumbs.

 Now you're going to outline the bikini and draw three lines in the middle.

 Okay, here's a method to cut a pomegranate without using water.

 So the first thing we do is cut around the waist of the pomegranate and we're using a

 serrated knife, that seems to work pretty good, but we're just going down to like an

 Use your fingernails or you could also use a knife to kind of wedge it apart.

 Now the next thing to do, see we did have a little bit of leakage there, we'll just

 Okay and now we're going to, this will be what we actually serve for a salad, eating

 So you just take your thumb and fingers and just kind of peel away the little seeds.

 Notice that none of the little seeds have broken, there's no juice flowing.

 So there's our finished product for a salad and then the next time these are ready to

 We've had a lot of requests to show exactly how to make some of the icings that we use.

 It's the icing that we use to make an Australian lace butterfly video.

 So royal icing is not something that you use for an item you're going to use today, but

 And this technique is the base for a lot of things, including meringues.

 So you've got your liquid down in there and you want to get that beating to start.

 After about a minute, your eggs are going to start to get frothy and this is the stage

 Turn the mixer back on and start to add slowly, probably about a quarter cup at a time.

 So this is what your powdered sugar looks like fully incorporated before we start to

 You can see it's nice and shiny, but we don't want to keep the shine on.

 So from here, about five to seven minutes of getting the air into it.

 I'm going to add my one teaspoon of cream of tartar at this point too.

 Cream of tartar is the trick to not only this recipe, but also meringues.

 And this is what royal icing looks like after it's been on the mixer for about five to seven

 You can see most of the shine is gone now because it's filled with air.

 We have to put this icing in a bowl and cover it with a damp cloth.

 Otherwise, it dries out very quickly and you end up with chunks, which is the last thing

 But this icing can last up to two weeks if it's sealed and kept moist.

 Once you've used royal icing and made your Australian Lays or Daisies or whatever, those

 things if they're sealed and kept dry can last for months and months.

 So I hope you learned everything you needed to know about how to actually make royal icing.

 I forgot to tell you before, but you can put food coloring in royal icing, any color you

 want, and you can do it at the stage while you're mixing or after in small batches.

 Just make sure it's a water-based food coloring, not an oil-based.

 To loosen off the axle bolt here, or to push it in, I just use a rubber mallet.

 So first step that the manual says after removing all the attachment stuff,

 I guess there might be some spacers in here or in here on the brake side as well.

 Then as you can see, just simply slide it out to the right to disengage it from the final drive.

 Now some of you might be wondering why exactly I've changed my tire.

 From Manitoba, so I don't know if you guys are aware of the safety.

 Alright, well I'm going to take the tire off and hope to see you guys out there riding.

 In this video I'm going to show you how to play the Song of Time from Zelda.

 So I just wanted to help you out with that if you don't know how to play it.

 So the link of the tabs will be posted down there in the description.

 So you're going to play 2nd fret of the G string, open D string, 3rd fret of the D string,

 2nd G, 5th G, 4th G, open G, 3rd D, open G, 2nd G, open D, 3rd A, 2nd D, and an open

 D. So what you gotta do is, you gotta play it really slowly at the very beginning so

 you can get into it with your fingers and your picking right here.

 So what we got so far is 2nd G, open D, 3rd D, 2nd G, open D, 3rd D, and on the G string

 2nd, 5th, 4th, open, 3rd of the D, open G, 2nd G, open D, 3rd A, 2nd D, and open D.

 So if you keep practicing you'll get faster with your fingers and your picking.

 It's just the first part of the song so don't be mad at me, I just wanted to help you a

 Hope you like it, rate and comment please, and see you all at my next video.

 Dei is essentially about the initial coming together of two opponents.

 So the Nukitsuke, the initial draw, is the most important part in Dei.

 stepping across with the left foot and beginning the draw and threatening the opponent.

 As Uchitachi steps in, Shitachi steps back and receives the cut.

 Having applied pressure here, Uchitachi steps back into Kasumi no Kamae, Chudan Kasumi,

 stepping across with the right foot, then a stutter step, left foot, right foot.

 Uchitachi lowers the sword, steps back, and matches Shitachi's Chudan no Kamae.

 Uke Nagashi is practiced from an initial draw in the Batoho section.

 So if you follow along, you'll notice you're actually going to receive the technique in a vertical block

 that covers from the hip to the head on this one if you're taking the Shitachi part.

 then stepping with the left foot crossing, beginning to threaten with the draw,

 and is blocked vertically by Shitachi's sword, running from his hip to above his head.

 The pressure on the sword makes me step back and retreat to a Haso position,

 As Uchitachi steps in, he cuts directly down the center on a little Yoko, a little bit of a Kesa cut,

 On this side of the sword, my Kote, my wrist, is much closer to Shitachi's than it was on the other side,

 At this point, Shitachi moves his sword offline to invite the attack,

 and this is where, when Uchitachi steps in, the Uke Nagashi that you had learned occurs.

 Stepping in, cutting, he receives, releases, and cuts to my head.

 Hello balloon world, I'm your balloon twister Michael Floyd and today I want to teach you

 This can be a challenge for a beginner because it has the dreaded tulip twist in it for the

 I know that's not that much air but don't worry there's a lot of twists involved.

 To do the tulip twist what I like to do is give it a nice squeeze, make it a little soft.

 Take my finger right on the knot, push that knot inside, find it with my free hand, pull

 my finger out gently, twist it behind the knot so the knot's on this side.

 Then I take that knot and I push it back into the tulip twist and there we have our pig's

 Now we're going to twist the teddy bear head which is 5 bubbles, all about 1 inch in width.

 And you don't want to over twist them because when you pinch twist the ears they have a

 tendency to leak air back into the cheek or the top of the head.

 So I usually count to 10 to make sure that they have plenty of twists.

 So, next thing we're going to do is we're going to twist the part of the 5 bubbles here

 So you should have a loop of the 5 bubbles you have there with that hole right in the

 Next thing we do is we pinch twist both of the ears on either side.

 What I like to do is I like to do a forearm area and then like a foot area.

 So the forearm area is going to be a little bit bigger than an inch and the foot area

 So these two here should be the same size and then these two here should be the same

 So we'll do it to here at the bottom of the neck and to here at the end of the leg.

 Now you see I have a little bit of air left and a lot of slack.

 That's what you're going to want because we're going to need that little bit of slack there

 You're going to want it a little bit longer than you're going to think it because when

 Just enough to where when you look at it you're like, that should be a little shorter, shouldn't

 These two should be about the same size and these two should be about the same size.

 So what I want to do is I want to take that bit of scrap there and I want to stretch it

 around the legs and then in the same motion stretch it to the front of the neck.

 So what that sort of does is the back part bubble there, it pinch-twists it.

 And what that also does is you can see it sort of pulls the under part so instead of

 the pig being like this, the legs are nice together and that gives it the illusion that

 Now if you wanted to add a curly tail, I would highly recommend using a Sharpie marker and

 It's much easier than trying to curl a big balloon and making it look like it's a monkey

 or by trying to put a pipe cleaner in an inflated balloon to make a curly tail and having the

 pipe cleaner accidentally pop through the balloon and pop the inflated part.

 Go to www.patreon.com or visit us on Facebook, Twitter, YouTube, Instagram and Pinterest.

 your groove on when you're trying to learn songs, it's all coming back to this whole

I've done some other lessons touching on this before, so you can do a

 search on the channel in the little search box there for rhythm and check out those if you find

I'm going to build this up and we're going to start off on our fifth fret on the fat E string

 is we're going to play a downstroke and then we're going to keep on shakering away.

 true starting point is just one E and a two E and a three E and a four E and a with just mutes,

 just muting the strings there, which is where you're just touching them but you're not

 fifth fret there and then we're going to get mutes for the rest of that.

 one E and a two E and a. So the trick of that is to bar your finger across the strings there

 so they don't sound but you're able to squeeze that first finger.

 They can take a little bit of setting up that position to start with.

 Right, the next step once you've got that one E and a two E and a three E and a four E and a

 So that's one E and a two E and a three E and a four E and a four E and a four E and a four E.

 on the first because you're still just essentially doing the first beat and continuing that on for

 So that should be one E and a two E and a one E and a two E and a.

Down, up, chucker, chucker, chucker, down, up, chucker, chucker, chucker.

So it's going to be three E and a four E and a. Down, up, chucker, chucker, chucker, down, up, chucker, chucker.

Down, up, chucker, chucker, chucker, down, up, chucker, chucker.

 Check out the Nail Guitar Skills channel to learn more guitar skills.

And check out my other channels for heaps of free guitar training videos.

 So in this short film we're going to talk about the Inkjet Glossy Film Self-Adhesive by Photo Paper Direct.

 This is a glossy vinyl film with a self-adhesive backing that you can stick onto a wide variety of non-porous surfaces.

Today we're going to give you a couple of other ideas for use of this paper.

 It comes in plain cellophane packaging with an insert and instructions on the back.

 All you do is take a sheet out, remove all the other paper that you might have in your printer,

 position it the correct way around and print any image you like on it using an Inkjet printer and normal, ordinary inks.

 OK, so here we have two images printed on the glossy vinyl self-adhesive using an ordinary Inkjet printer and ordinary inks.

 Today we're going to talk about making what we call laptop skins or phone skins just to personalise everyday equipment that you might have lying around.

We're going to put this image on the back of a well-known telephone.

It can be a Galaxy, it can be anything with a smooth surface, non-porous.

 I'm going to do it quickly because otherwise this film is going to be really long and boring.

 So we cut out the image, we peel back the backing of the sticker, it works like any other label.

 You can do the same with any other electronic device that you might have lying around.

We're going to do the same on an iPad, but a games console, a TV, a computer screen, a computer station, any electronic device, anything made from metal or plastic that you might have lying at home.

And again, if you take loads of care with this, you'll get a better result.

 And today I wanted to quickly show you how I am suspending or floating my red mangrove

 You guys know I love the pool noodles and so what I've done is just taken about a 1

 inch piece of pool noodle and I've cut out a small piece of that noodle and then I've

 taken a zip tie or two in order to get that around the pool noodle and essentially what

 I've done is taken 3, 4 or 5 of these red mangrove seed pods, put that in the middle

 and then I just cinched the zip tie down and I put it pretty far up the red mangrove seed

 pod as you can see with most of these it's about 3 quarters of the way up.

 Obviously some of them are a lot longer than others but essentially all you need to do

 is make sure that these tips are above water and that the roots remain below water and

 And as you can see with these we've already got some pretty good root growth on a lot

 of these seed pods and as you can see from the top here we've got some green tips that

 are starting to emerge which will start to form leaves here shortly.

 Now this won't be a long term solution because once those leaves get growing and those branches

 start forming they probably will get top heavy and this will no longer work but at that time

 hopefully the roots have grown to the point where I can start to embed them in substrate

 but for right now they're just starting out and this is a perfect way to separate your

 red mangroves to get them floating, to get them in front of your lights to get plenty

 of sun to start growing but to also make sure that they maintain the upright direction.

 Anyways guys hope you learned a little something and I'll see you guys later.

 So I wanted to do this really pretty simple eye for you and these bold coral lips.

 And they're a little bit more, the eyes are a little bit more fun and just like nothing

 But they're easy to wear, I think you could probably wear them to work, minus the bold

 lip, maybe something peachier for the day and then brighten it up at night.

 So I think there's a lot of fun things you could do with this look, you could probably

 wear it out dancing or to the movies on the weekends when you don't want to put too much

 So I just paired it with like a red flower and pretty earrings and I had to kind of spice

 it up and I hope you know 100% Paragonic Coffee Bean Caffeine Eye Cream and now I'm going

 Now I'm going to take Inglot 111R, I'm going to blend out the brow bone.

 And just circular motions to make sure that the crease is really softened.

 I'm going to take Inglot 464 and I'm going to put my brush into that.

 I'm going to pack it all over the eyelid and then blend it out.

 I'm going to blend this out in the outer corner mostly, not really taking it through the crease much.

 Now I'm going to take 467 and I'm going to put this in the center of the eyelid.

 I'm going to take the Anastasia Beverly Hills Brow Pencil and this is in Matte Camille.

 And then for the Tarte Multiplay Eye, I just took a very thin line all along the upper lash line.

 For the bottom lashes, I just took a fluffy blending brush, the same one I've been taking, and 390 by Inglot.

 And just clean up the brow pencil on the bottom of the lash line to add just a little hint of depth on the bottom lash line.

 So, they're packaging for Wet n Wild Mascara, so they've always been pretty horrible.

 So finally, it looks like they're trying to make it a little bit nicer.

 I'm going to take Red Cherry number 48, which are these pretty big lashes.

 So for the face, I took the Inglot AMC Cream Foundation in number 25.

 And then for the highlighting of the face, I took this under the eyes and a little further down.

 It's the Too Faced Absolutely Flawless Flexible Coverage Concealer in Perfect Nude.

 And then to just highlight specific areas with an even, slightly lighter shade, because it's quite a bit lighter than me right now,

 is the Collection Illuminating Touchlight Diffusing Concealer in number 2 Natural.

 And that goes specifically under the eyes, a little on the top of the brow bone.

 I'm going to put my Pumpkin and Poppy Oil Absorbing Mineral Veil on my face.

 And then I always do the lighter highlighters first, just so my highlighter looks a little more flattering, less ashy.

 So I'm just going to take a portion of the brush and highlight the cheekbones.

 And now I'm going to take the Tarte Amazonian Clay Blush in Frisky.

 And I have taken my Inglot Soft Precision Lip Liner in number 72, which is a red pencil.

 MAC's Beat Lip Liner and MAC's Mirage lipstick actually used to be a favorite combination of mine.

 I'd worn it to an IMAX before I had a blog, so nobody really would have known me then.

 Anyways, then I like to clean up the lip line with Beauty Without Cruelty.

 So, anyways, thank you so much for watching, and I hope you enjoyed.

 Scarves have become majorly important as an essential piece of everyday dressing.

 You find that there are very, very different weights depending upon the season.

 You actually have young girls wearing hot pants, Uggs, and scarves.

 And when it's 110 degrees, there are young women who will not walk out the door without putting their scarf on.

 The stigma, I think, a few years ago, many years ago, that only older women wore scarves, and the scarves were much different.

 And you saw it all over fashion magazines, and every very starlet was wearing them.

 So we're going to show you something, many ways that'll be simple, easy.

 You want to be able to pick it up and throw it on and not worry about it.

 And you can either knot it and tie it on the side like that, and just have this soft around your neck.

 So again, you're getting softness, but you're not choking yourself.

 And you have direction that you can put it to the side, you can put it to the back, or you can put it to the front.

 Now if it's a large enough square, you actually will be able to wrap it around, put the ends, wrap around here and tie here.

 This is a really big scarf, and I don't know what to do with it.

 It's going to be heavy, and it's going to, I don't know what to do.

 Find the center of the scarf, and just lightly fold it in half.

 You can take this one step further, and you can take the two ends that are hanging, and just flip them into a little knot.

 I took the top piece, as if I were going to knot it, but I didn't knot it.

 Now I take the second, I go over the top, through, and then under the bottom.

 This adds probably the most interest in weave, because it looks like a basket weave, and it stays put very well.

 So for people who don't like things moving around, this is a really good one.

 What I just did was wrapped it, pulled this down, and twisted so that it looked like an eternity scarf.

 So you just twist and twist and twist and twist and twist and twist.

 If you thought that scarves were going to be difficult, hopefully after you play with them just a little bit,

 and find some time to investigate different ways of doing them, I think you'll find that they are easy,

 G'day BBQ lovers, well it's that time of year again and we're going to be cooking the Christmas

 Give you a demo of how to use the kettle style barbie with heat beads briquettes to create

 We've got our chopped onion, some fresh herbs, breadcrumbs, pancetta, got the red onion to

 actually sit the turkey on while it's cooking, bit of garlic, some lemon and salt and pepper.

 You can see we've put the stuffing in the cavity here and also laid the turkey in the

 That will bring flavour up through the turkey while it cooks and also stop it from sticking

 One of the things to remember with turkey, if you're coming from frozen, it takes a long

 If you've got an even larger bird, say 6 kilos, it can take up to 2 and a half days to defrost

 So we're using the indirect cooking method, which is the way to roast a turkey and roughly

 If you're not familiar with how to light your barbecue for the indirect method, I suggest

 you head over to the barbecue tips section and check that out now, then come back and

 While we're waiting for our beads to completely ash over, I just thought I'd run through some

 We've got a calculator on the site so that you can work out per kilo how long you'll

 It takes longer for the legs to cook than it does for the breast.

 There are various techniques you can use to make sure that the bird is cooked thoroughly

 Today we're going to be using the foil wrap method, which will go through at about the

 To get a fantastically crispy turkey, we're just going to pour a mix of white wine and

 With the turkey in place, we've got the lid on, vents open at the bottom and open at the

 We're going to give it about an hour and then come back and put the foil wrap on.

 At this stage, it's important to remember you want to trap as much heat in the kettle

 So don't, as tempting as it might be, open up that lid to check how things are going.

 You want to keep a constant heat in there to make sure your cook time is as quick as

 Alright, we're an hour in and time to wrap the breast to make sure that it doesn't dry

 It's starting to brown up around the breast area so we're just going to cover that with

 Close it up for another hour and come back out with the meat thermometer just to test

 Alright, we've been cooking for about two hours and it's time to test the turkey.

 We're going to use a standard meat thermometer with the temperature in Fahrenheit and we're

 So here we just stick the thermometer into the thigh of the bird, which is the thickest

 part of the meat, and make sure we don't hit the bone or in fact push it right through

 We'll leave that in there for just a few seconds and we're climbing up to pretty close to the

 We'll give that another 20 minutes or so and that should be just about perfect.

 So after two and a half hours, there's our stuffed turkey ready for carving.

 There it is folks, our roast turkey done on the Heathbeads BBQ briquettes.

 Alright, so we're going to start off with freshly washed hair and you're going to want

 to put it up in a towel so that it kind of dries a little and wait about 5 minutes before

 After 5 minutes you can take your hair out of the towel and yeah, it's pretty crazy.

 You want to use a comb instead of a brush because when your hair is wet, a comb doesn't

 Once your hair is all combed through, you can pick out how you want your hair parted.

 So I'm just going to go like that and then kind of try to part it down the middle.

 I'm using Herbal Essences' Talsemi Softly Mousse and this is going to give a nice tussle

 You want to take quite a bit of mousse, especially if you have really long hair or really thick

 hair and you're just going to kind of comb it through with your fingers.

 If you want more volume, you can do this upside down like, you know, like that.

 Then you can kind of start scrunching if you want or you can wait for the next product

 This is what's going to hold and give a lot more curly waviness to your hair.

 I have kind of wavy-ish hair and it likes to do whatever it wants.

 Don't do too much at the root because otherwise your roots will look kind of wet.

 And you don't want to use too much product because it will make your hair look a little wet and crispy.

 Like those girls at school that you know have that crunchy, wet-looking hair all day.

 Now you just let it dry naturally or you could use a hair dryer if you wanted.

 It's a lot better for your hair if you just let it dry naturally.

 I'll see you soon to show you what it looks like after it's dry.

 how to transfer your drawing onto a lino block, and now this is all transferred.

 the next step, how to get the transferred image where you can start carving.

 to do it under the faucet, that's what I did at first, and that's just too big of a transition

It seems to work the best when you just dab it, the whole thing, on your image.

I'll take a break here and I'll show you what happens when you make

 fully carved but you can see all the missing pieces side by side.

 Okay, today I'm going to show a how-to on installing an electric tongue jack to my camp

 So the first thing that I do is I put down the stabilizing jacks to support the front

 end of the trailer while I install this jack and not have to worry about anything holding

 So right now I'm just putting the stabilizer jacks so they are firmly planted on the ground.

 I'm parked in the street, I have tire chocks to prevent it from rolling, and it's fairly

 So the next thing I do is that I take the weight off of the existing jack so that it

 And the only thing I edited out of this video is basically when I changed the angle of the

 As you can see I cleared the block so there is no weight on the existing jack.

 I open up the box here and I had just a couple of days before this had installed the same

 jack on a trailer at work so I didn't read the instructions as you know so many people

 But I've already installed one just a couple of days ago so I didn't have to read the instructions.

 Comes with the bolts, wiring, has a built in fuse so you don't burn up the jack if it's

 It comes with a manual crank to crank it just in case you didn't have battery power.

 That also works on my stabilizer jacks and it's a better crank than my trailer came with.

 Instead of what I have right there is just the tube sitting on a block it actually comes

 It takes about as long to unbox this thing as it does to install it.

 This one has an LED light so when I'm backing up at night it will help with that or unhooking

 So right here I'm just pulling out the bolts that hold the existing jack in.

 That impact driver is pretty tough but it's not near strong enough to break it loose.

 Use the new bolts and this unit actually grounds by being bolted to the chassis so the only

 wire you have connects to the positive on the battery and it's already ground bolts

 Again the impact doesn't get it tight enough on its own so I will use a wrench to torque

 I put in and it's tough to see here but I put on a new loop and I crimp it.

 I got my wing nut a little too tight so I'm going to use some pliers here to pull that

 This does retract and extend at a fairly slow rate but it is so much easier on your body

 You can see how slow that foot is going down but I have no regrets whatsoever on installing

 If you like this video please stay so in the comment section and feel free to subscribe

 this and put my grout on and waited a little bit too long before I put some I

 they said this nylon brush you would have to use a lot of elbow grease and so

 I started putting a lot of pressure and it did take some off and but my arm I

 did not have elbow grease and I think it's the same stuff that you use like

 washing your skillets and things a nylon brush like thing but I went to the store

 want to think safety because these brushes might come off and hit you in

 the eye so therefore you need some good safety glasses which are really cheap.

 around this little metal area to push around your nose so it won't let any of the

 filters but as you can see this goes into around your mouth and around your

 it's nice and tight and this will really trap a lot of dust from getting

 little brush does a good job and I'll show you in the next video.

 Okay I think you can see all the grout that's just stuck on this thing.

 So I got my safety glasses on and I have my mask on for breathing.

 show you just this little segment here is looking really good and I'll try to

 can get a close-up of the tile and you can just sort of see how it did.

You can see this is very glassy and I wonder if I can get up any closer.

 mistakes and wipe off that grout before you have to take it off like I did.

 heavy-duty machine and it has some fantastic features that I'd like to show

 auto-declutch bobbin winder so you just flick it over and it automatically stops

 speed which is a great feature so especially if you've got a child sewing

 or if you're a beginner sewer or if you're sewing a delicate fabric you can

 turn it down to really slow or you can turn it up to really fast.

 to sew with it just in the middle and just keep it there most of the time.

 Over here has a digital display so it's really easy to adjust the width and the

 which I've never used before but if you're using one of these decorative

 stitches here it just allows you to elongate and stretch it out.

 the stitch selection buttons here so they're very easy to select and change

 and underneath has a letter just indicating which foot to use for each

 needle up down button so if you have that button highlighted then the needle

 will start in the down position and stop in the down position as well which is

 really handy if you're turning corners a lot or if you're say doing a curve and

 you just need to make an adjustment you can stop the machine lift the foot up a

 button here that's the locking stitch so you can use that instead of doing a

 reverse stitch and you can press that button and when the machine is finished

 sewing it will do a locking stitch so your sewing won't come undone.

 here is your reverse button so it's in a really handy spot so I find when I'm

 sewing my hands are right here next to the machine next to the foot and

 start stop button here so what this one allows you to do is it lets you sew

 without using the foot pedal so you need to have the foot pedal unplugged to

 be able to use it but say if you're the type of person who likes to stand up and

 do your sewing or if you've got a sore foot because you've been sewing for a

 down here we have the auto needle threader just put the needle back up

 there so really easy to use just pull it down hook it behind that little hook and

 there's another metal hook just there where the eye of the needle is so you

 just hook it behind the metal hook as well and lift it up and I'll bring a

 has top loading bobbin so top loading bobbins are really handy because you can

 see how much thread you have left in the bobbin there's no oiling that needs

 to be done and also there's no parts that need to be replaced because often

 the bobbin case is something that might need to be replaced in an older machine

 and just sewing picking up the bobbin thread it's quite easy to use the up

 recently discovered before you open it up here is that you can adjust the

 pressure foot or the pressure of the foot so most of your sewing will be done

 on number three but if say if you're doing some quilting and you've got a

 couple of layers of fabric and some wadding you can put the pressure of the

 foot onto number two or if you're using delicate fabric you can put it onto

 number one so that'll be a handy feature now that I know it's there.

 And you also have the removable extension table here so if you're

 sewing cuffs or sleeves you can remove the table there and then it's also got a

 walking foot and a quarter inch foot so this machine's pretty good if you're

 someone who likes to have your options when you're sewing so if you're actually

 craft sewing or quilting this is a good machine to get because it comes with all

The problem is with kids, tiny little charging ports and tiny little fingers don't

 a charging board which is like so and it cost £20, well £19.95 from an eBay seller.

 came within a couple of days and there didn't seem to be any way that showed how to do this.

 So if you're fairly competent with a small screwdriver and have a little bit of patience

So basically if we get a side on view you can see running along the edge little

So basically you have to find something really thin and quite sturdy

 to sort of get in between this edge and this edge and kind of prise up gently.

I'm not recommending children or anybody who isn't compass mentors

 you've got the top off you can see that you have the big battery cell.

So again I used a paint scraper to just ease up the edge and sort of take the battery

 out without bending it really because you don't want to bend and twist the battery cell.

So each line is an actual physical connection from this plug here to the plug

 video in reverse and I realised that there wasn't anything on YouTube particularly good.

 So I thought I'd try and do a bit better job of the video of how to.

And then once it's in there you can then quite easily manoeuvre the board

 the forward facing camera and the rear camera actually popped out.

 in but you have to be very careful to make sure that the other pins on the little square,

 Be careful not to touch the chips because you can get static on your hands which can

 Today we'll be showing you how to remove the stock reed cage and install Mellosi carbon

 If you follow me up here, we're going to go ahead and we're just going to pull off, this

 is where the carburetor would bolt on normally, we're going to go ahead and remove that.

 Then we're going to go ahead and pull off the reed cage here, normally this would be

 bolted in obviously, we've already disassembled this partly for the video.

 See this is what a stock one looks like already, it's bolted in here.

 So we're going to go ahead and we're going to unscrew the reed cage here.

 There's the second one, we're just going to lift off on here, it'll fall right out.

 We're going to upgrade to a Mellosi carbon fiber stiffer reed cage right here.

 So we just want to set this in place, noting that the inner circles are on the downside

 We're going to go ahead and we're going to set it and drop it on.

 Both of our reeds here are now installed as you can see and they're all tight here,

 You can go ahead and give it a little test here just by sticking your pinky in and barely

 Now we're going to go ahead and we're going to drop this reed cage right back into the

 Now you're ready to bolt your intake manifold back on and you're done.

 To prep my hair, I parted it down the middle and installed curlformers to get smooth, perfect

 Since it's getting warmer outside and we'll be dancing all night, I made a thick batch

 of homemade flaxseed gel and applied it to each section before installing the curlformers.

 That way, our hair has less of the chance of getting frizzy throughout the night while

 And of course, click the links for more details on how I make my own flaxseed gel and install

 Grab the section right in front of your ears on both sides and secure it high up on your

 Now take the sections immediately behind the ears on both sides and secure those out of

 Gather the rest of the hair into a low ponytail using a discreet black hair tie.

 As you're pulling the ponytail through the hair tie, stop halfway to create a loose,

 Then make sure the bun won't fall out by securing the hair tie that's holding it to your head

 You should have the ends of your curls sticking out of the bun.

 Release the middle section of hair and we're going to smooth it back using our fingers.

 So gently rake your fingers through the hair at your roots only to smooth it out.

 We don't want to go any further than the roots so we don't create frizz.

 Once you've done this on both sides, smooth the hair into a ponytail and again, we're

 going to secure it with a discreet black hair tie or one that matches your current hair

 Insert your fingers through the hole from the bottom and pull the ponytail up, around,

 Split the ponytail in half and working one side at a time, twist each half loosely.

 Then place the twist loosely around and secure the ends underneath that low bun using as

 Now grabbing those curly ends that stick out of the bun, bring them up and around the bottom

 Twist the section, tuck it loosely underneath the bun, bobby pinning in place.

 Use the curly ends sticking out of the bun to conceal where the twist meets the bun.

 Again we're going to smooth out the hair at the roots gently with our fingers on both

 Now smooth the hair back into a ponytail, securing with a discreet hair tie.

 Split the ponytail into two sections and again we're going to twist each section.

 This time bring the twist around and secure it underneath the twist below it.

 Now placing my fingers in the middle of the twist on the top, I bring them together so

 they sit directly on top of the twist below and bobby pin in place.

 Now you can leave the front curls out to frame your face or loosely tuck them back.

 And if you've got a little part from your ponytail, just gently comb the sections together.

 Now feel free to add any bling for prom or flowers if you're going to a wedding.

 And check out my vlog channel where we're vlogging every day for the month of April.

 So I have Julie Daniluk with us, we are going to go into the kitchen and try some of your

 Today we're going to be making a one pot meal because it's fantastic to throw on first thing

 in the morning and when you come home from work it's ready to go.

 You can cook in large capacities, that means cooking once on Sunday and having it all week

 Know that these ingredients combine really quickly and easily and we're going to show

 So our first ingredient today is our beans, that's our source of protein.

 It's nice to take a break from meat and have a vegetarian protein and it's really inexpensive.

 Know that it's a wonderful idea to soak your beans ahead of time if there's time because

 it really helps with the digestibility of the beans, it also helps wake up the enzymes.

 So we're just soaking with two cups of water and our cup of beans and know that overnight

 These are cranberry beans but you can use any type of bean and we're going to add that

 The reason why I'm a big fan of French lentils is because they actually cook down to a creamy

 consistency so it's almost like an added richness, like you've added flour to your

 We can add our wonderful mushrooms, that's two cups of mushrooms and four onions.

 You might be shocked at how big this pot is getting but that's because I want to be able

 Now I've done my own canning job which is fantastic for money saving but it's completely

 Add a little bit of celery, that embarks a little natural sodium and potassium, excellent

 And now I think it's important to give a little demo on how to cut up the squash because some

 Might be a little intimidated by this organic creature but it is so easy just cutting these

 Know that this is great just to cut in half, coat with a little bit of maple syrup and

 So for today we're going to use just this part which is so easy.

 Once you peel it, you make sure to cube it up in nice bite sized chunks.

 And this is embarking a tremendous amount of sweetness to the food because squash is

 You want sweet, sour, savoury and salty in a meal to satisfy your cravings.

 That's often why people end up ricocheting into huge desserts because often their meal

 So when making a beautiful harvest soup, we're taking care of that.

 There's nothing better than some purple cabbage in a harvest soup.

 It embarks indole-3-carbinol, a fantastic phytonutrient for preventing cancer.

 Know that we're going to try out this wonderful, fun, inexpensive instrument called a mandolin.

 So you just hold a good chunk of the cabbage carefully away from the blade and stroke down quickly.

 Fantastic for coleslaw and they're available at pretty much any healthy store for under $20.

 Now we're left to season our soup using organic chopped ginger, 2 tablespoons.

 Now you can add either basil soaked in olive oil or I love using organic pesto because

 And if you're stuck for stock, then feel free to use some organic bouillon cubes.

 These are really important because they're getting away from monosodium glutamate, which

 For those on a sodium reduced diet, this is not an essential ingredient, but Celtic sea

 salt does have 65 trace minerals that are wonderfully healthy for you.

 We're going to add a good teaspoon of salt because it's a very large soup, but know that

 there's lots of flavour in there already if you are on a sodium reduced diet.

 Just peek in on it every half hour or so to ensure that it doesn't burn.

 Slow cookers cook at low temperatures, so you need to cook about 4 to 8 hours, simmering

 And right before you want to serve it, pop in your green beans at the very end and that

 embarks a wonderful fresh flavour and keeps them nice and green.

 This harvest soup is a great thing to serve alongside your appetizer as the flax crackers

 In this video, we're going to be joined by his lovely wife, Karen.

 We're going to prepare some treats for you today, some really quick, very simple, high

 So in this video, we're going to make something very, very cool and delicious.

 So this whole recipe is based on the foundation of my new instant kale shake.

 Now the difference between this shake and the shake that we previously used is two things.

 Number one, it has 20 grams of protein per serving size, high quality pea protein.

 So we take a smaller size of almond butter at the health food store and we are going

 You have to read the ingredients because I'm telling you, peanut butter, almond butter,

 So now it's always important to clean up the mess as we go, Karen, because that's really

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to add in the coconut oil, one third cup of

 Now the difference between coconut oil and coconut butter, there's no difference.

 So now we're going to add, just for the fun of it, we're going to add Lily's Brand chocolate

 Now the thing is that if it came in this container and we added the other ingredients, it's going

 So we're going to have to either get a bigger container or just have some extra on the side.

 We put it in the jar, and then we're going to put this in the refrigerator.

 Okay, now we're going to stick this in the refrigerator and wait about an hour, and then

 Karen didn't like the last version, so we've made a completely new version, and we added

 It was a little too peanut buttery tacky, and I like it smooth and creamy.

 And also, if you leave it in the refrigerator long enough for it all to blend together and

 Well, we used chunky peanut butter, so it's plenty of nuts, I think.

 Some Chinese soy sauce, some oil, some salt, some sugar and most importantly the black

 Basically we have to mix the ribs with all this salt, sugar and soy sauce.

 So what we've got to do is use a chopstick because it's more for hygiene purposes so

 It has been marinating for like 30 minutes so we're going to steam it right now.

 The final step is to make it taste better and look better just add some spring onion

 Okay, so the ingredients for this are really simple, and I'm not even going to display them.

 Remove both ends, half them, and then cut them along the sides just like I'm doing here.

 As for cutting techniques, this is kind of how you want to do it.

 let your knuckles guide the blade through, and be mindful of your thumb.

 I'm using this sharpener that I got from my local hunting store for about 99 cents,

 and I know there's probably a better way of doing this, but this is working fine.

 I like the flavor of butter, and I also really like the aroma of olive oil, so I'm using both.

Add your fat, your onions, a little bit of salt, and we're going to

 We're looking to get the onions completely dark brown, kind of like this.

 That's a good trick that I found online, but why add regular moisture when you can add alcohol?

 it'll help distribute the heat, and it'll help it, you know, take on that color just a little bit better.

 45 minutes to an hour later, stirring about every five minutes,

 I'm sure it's been done before, but don't take this away from me.

 So just add enough to barely cover the onions, turn up the heat a little bit, and let that reduce and thicken into a nice

 This is called deglazing, a word that if you're like me and you like to pretend that you're a chef, you feel smart using it.

Once you have syrup, add beef broth to your desired consistency.

 Take some bread, punch it out to fit your crock, and if you don't have a crock,

 When your soup is ever so slightly thickened, pour it into your crock.

 Now a lot of people like to talk about pairing food with wine or beer or mints.

 I particularly like the aged version, somewhere in between seasons one and two.

 Hey, this is Bethany and today I'm going to be showing you a look using the Coastal Scents

 I wanted to show you guys a nude, a pink, and a bold vampy one.

 So as you can see right now I'm wearing the natural nude shade.

 I'm going to give you a heads up that the lighting changed throughout the day as I was

 filming so I might look a little bit more orange at times as the camera tried to pick

 So hopefully it looks okay but it was looking a little bit orange on the camera and as you

 So yeah, I'm going to go ahead and proceed and get into the tutorial and I hope you guys

 Alright, first we're going to lay down a layer of primer and this is the Wet n Wild one by

 My friend recommended to me before I tried it that it's kind of sticky so I'm going to

 go ahead and put a light shade all over the lid and everywhere we're going to be working

 It's the fifth one from the top row on the Revealed palette and I'm just going to be

 Now we're going to be using like a tannish brown shade that's two spaces away from the

 taupe shade we originally used and we're just going to be warming up the crease.

 We're going to work it up towards the brow bone a bit and we're going to work it up even

 Now I'm going in with a clean blending brush just to make everything a little bit nicer.

 You'll find it on the bottom row and it's the second one from the bottom.

 I originally worked it in with a brush but then I decided to lay it down with my finger

 Once you've got that on the lid, you're just going to want to go back in with the original

 Now I'm going to go in with this shade that looks an awful lot like Verve from Urban Decay.

 It's a shimmery silvery champagne type of color and I'm going to use that to highlight

 Now I'm taking this retractable essence long lasting liner and I'm going to work this just

 in the outer half of the eye and I'm going to put it on the lash line a bit but also

 a teensy bit into the waterline because it's going to give my eyes a little bit more of

 And now because I can't get away with doing things like this without softening it down,

 I'm going to take this itty bitty baby brush and smoke that out a little bit.

 I'm also going to take this brown shade that is fourth to the last shade in the palette

 and it's going to add a little bit of a softer shimmery halo to the bottom end of my eye

 So I'm just going to add this and drag it all two thirds of the way in.

 Now we're almost done so you can just blend and smoke out with that original tan color

 we were using and then of course we're also going to go back in with that clean fluffy

 blending brush and make sure everything looks really cleaned up and nice.

 And lastly we're going to go in with one of my favorite liquid liners.

 If you just drag it along it will go really well for your hooded eye if you just kind

 Here I decided to go in with my favorite Milani blush in Dulce Pink.

 It's going to make my cheekbones really highlighted and shimmery as you can see.

 So it was probably not a good idea to do in that hot room where I was sweating but

 Alright so since this is a semi-versatile look I'm going to show you this eye with two

 The first is a more natural lip color and it is the L'Oreal Fairest Nude.

 It is a very ideal lip color for fair skin to medium tone people.

 So I thought I would showcase it to you all since a lot of my followers are asking me

 It's a very pale natural pink but not so pink that you look like you're dying.

 Now the next lippy I'm going to try on right now is the NYX Soft Matte Lip Cream in San

 You can tell that this is going to be a shade that transcends through all different skin

 tones just because it's a cool toned pink so it's going to be a flattering on a lot

 And then my final lip color I probably should have prepared you all for was the NYX Soft

 I actually ended up buying this because I wanted to go by the shade Copahagan but they

 were always sold out and I was like how about this I'll try something even more dramatic.

 Copahagan is a deep, deep rich burgundy wine color and I haven't been able to get my hands

 on it and I will soon because I wanted to do a vampy look for you all with that.

 I will say that you probably need to wear a little bit of lip liner under it because

 there are parts where your natural lip color can come through really easily.

 And this is just a fun one to wear out in public and maybe I don't know get out of your

 Something like this when you're pale you wear it you look very you know kind of gothic but

 It's just a really fun ride to wear excessively vampy lip colors if you're in the mood.

 But I personally am kind of enjoying this one so I thought I would show it to you all

 guys as a little wild card option for those of my followers who like a little bit of dark

 Alright so this was my finished look using the Revealed palette and three other colors.

 Hopefully you guys enjoyed the variety of options I gave you because I know I got a

 lot of different type of stylistas watching me so I wanted to give you guys some variety

 I hope you guys are having a great week and if you have any questions be sure to leave

And if you don't know how to do that, definitely click on the links.

 that has about a teaspoon of brown sugar mixed in there too to make it nice and sweet.

 with that unagi with the unagi sauce that's kind of sweet too is fantastic.

And as we keep moving our bamboo mat down, that's what we want to do is pull out

 the saran wrap to make sure it doesn't get caught up in there and just keep going down to make sure

 little bit of color to your sushi that makes it pop on the plate and gets everyone excited about

 the saran wrap on top of it as well and just really lightly, gently, you know, use our fingers to

 because I saw that our knife wasn't as sharp as we like to keep it.

 you don't have one of these knives, trust me, they're usually super sharp.

 Hey, look at all these people that like to start their morning with a little bit of chocolate.

 But today, guys, a lot of people are dreaming of a white Christmas.

 Yeah, we're going to do very basic fondue that each one can make at home.

 And then you can add anything you want that is really holiday from peppermint candies

 I just totally announced to the world I don't know how to cook.

 And the eggnog, which we add inside like a vanilla sauce, which actually it's milk,

 No, you start with a white chocolate ganache, which is very simple to make.

 And then you put it in the fridge and you get this white chocolate cream.

 I guess you've got to be a guy that works with chocolate regularly to make this look pretty.

 Ron and Jodi, check out this thing nice and cold and it just gives me the urge to...

 Alright first thing you gotta do, take your card and square off the corners.

 I recommend using this tool, if you don't have one, scissors work just as well.

 And then, pick a second card to use as a stencil and do the same thing.

 Mark it, and then cut it out of 1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1 steel plate.

 And then, take your square again, mark quarter inch squares on every corner, line up the

 Next, take a bench grinder to the back, just to clean it up a little bit.

 Make sure you put a little extra glue on the corners though, just to make it nice and

 The throwing knife took at least 20 tries, and the throwing star barely penetrates at

 Fireworn Ninja, I'd pick the throwing card as my weapon of choice.

 I'm going to show you how to make these amazing raw cookies with almond pulp.

 a couple of episodes ago I showed you how to make nut milk and I promised you that I

 would show you this recipe with what you can do with the almond pulp that results from

So we're going to make these cookies and I'm going to show you some really fun raw

 ingredients we're going to use are lacuma, powdered coconut sugar, then we've got these

 raisins or you could use goji berries and we're also going to use vanilla powder or

 half a vanilla pod and then to sweeten and bind it we can use maple syrup.

 need some water standing by because each different batch of almond pulp that you have will vary

 berries and then our vanilla powder in this case and then finally our maple syrup.

 at what kind of consistency you've got and if it's not binding together then you're going

 because obviously you can always add more but you can't take it out once it's in there.

 So when you get to the final consistency so it should be just kind of holding together

 but not too wet then we're ready to put that to one side and work on the chocolate chips.

 So for the chocolate chips we've got half a cup of shaved cacao butter, melted but we

 measure it before it was melted, one cup of cashews, three tablespoons of powdered coconut

 sugar, three quarters of a cup of water, half a cup of cacao powder and a pinch of salt.

 Now we've just blended that up, popped it into an icing bag and then we've put it in

 the fridge for about 90 minutes to firm up ready to make these chocolate chips.

 down a piece of baking parchment and then cut just the very end of your icing bag off,

 maybe even too small to begin with and just do a little test to see how that comes out.

 Now with this one it's forcing it out a little bit, it's not giving me a smooth consistency

 so I'm going to take just a little bit more off, best to do this in small pieces and then

 we get just to the right amount so we can easily pipe these chocolate chips onto the

So just fill the baking parchment with as many chocolate chips as

 When you're done, transfer them onto a tray and then place them into the freezer for a

So now we've got these beautiful, firm chocolate chips out of the freezer, you

 can just unpick them from the baking parchment ready to go and just be stirred straight into

 an ice cream scoop so that we get a nice even amount for each cookie and then onto

 a non-stick dehydrator tray, just place each cookie and you can get a really quick method

And then as you do them just push them down into nice round, homemade looking

So just do the whole tray all in one go and then work your way through them

 in each one it's okay if they look slightly different and look a bit more homemade.

 when you're done, pop them into the dehydrator for about 8-10 hours at 105 degrees Fahrenheit

 been in the dehydrator for about 12-14 hours and they're all ready to go.

 in a sealed container in the fridge, they'll last for easily a week.

 shelf life, shelf life they'll last a week but in terms of how quickly you're eating

 they come right out of the dehydrator the chocolate chips in them will be squidgy because

 they'll be warm but then as you put them in the fridge then the chocolate chips will firm

 that extra almond or nut pulp that you've got from making nut milk and let me know how

 Okay, we're going to discuss the use of the foam roller in stretching the calf muscles.

 They start here and they attach into that real thick tendo calcaneus.

 And the calf muscle, the top one actually goes above the knee, so one of the muscles

 And then the other muscle, the muscles that are in the top one, the muscles that are in

 We're going to do a little exercise and then we're going to work our way down into the

 Alright, so we're going to come down and we're going to go into the calf muscles.

 So we're going to start with the foam roller at about mid-muscle belly as we call it.

 Interesting, I can actually feel a difference between the two calf muscles.

 The foam feels a little rougher, which means I might have had a little trouble with it

 And if you want to put a little more stress on one calf, just cross over it.

 I don't know if it would be comfortable going all the way to the knee.

 I know it wouldn't be the other way if I was laying flat on my stomach.

 I mean, this is a bottom one made for this particular, for the clinic.

 You could use any type of foam roller if you had one around the house, something that would work as such.

 The first thing you want to do is unwrap, if you didn't get the kind that were already

 And as you're doing this, you may find corn hair, or you know, the hair and stuff.

 So we have our corn husk here, and it helps if these are kind of dry, otherwise the dough

 So you're going to spread this out, kind of like peanut butter.

 Now if you want to get your hands dirty, you can certainly do this part by hand, which

 So you want to get plenty of dough on there, and we like ours with quite a bit of meat.

 So we're going to put a good amount of meat in the center, kind of wrap it up a little

 bit, and you'll see that the dough starts to come around and create a little shell.

 And we only have about a hundred more to go before we can start cooking.

 You'll need a nice big pot like this one, with an insert to hold the tamales up off

 You fill that up with hot water, put it on the stove, cover it, and whenever it starts

 to boil, you will boil them for about 45 minutes to an hour until the mesa is really firm.

 I'm going to use the same insert or the one that came with your cooker.

 We're going to put all the tamales in there, and then we're going to cook them for 20 minutes

 Well, they couldn't quite fit all of them in here, but here we have most of them.

 What we're going to do is put on our pressure cooker lid, make sure it's all good to go.

 We're going to put on the pressure cooker lid, and we're putting it on cook, and we're

 We're going to turn this on high, and follow directions for your pressure cooker.

 This is going to cook for about 20 minutes at 15 pounds of pressure.

 Our tamales have been in there for about 20 minutes, and some of them kind of got a little

 What we're going to do now is just take them all out, and put them on our plate here, and

 we're going to let them set and firm up just a little bit, because when they come right

 So I'm going to let these sit, and then we'll be back in a little while.

 They've cooled just a little bit, and you can see they look just like a regular, normal

 What we're going to do is just go ahead and unwrap them, and with the help of our fork,

 we're going to get them to pop out here, and they look really, really good.

 Let's not count all the ones that I had while you all weren't watching.

 So you can see they look pretty much like a real tamale, because that's what they are.

 And now, we're going to go ahead and add some of our chili as well.

 You can also put a little bit of cheese on these if you want to, and we're just going

 The longer they sit, the firmer they'll get, but these are really good.

 Hello, I'm Daniel Boulud, chef and owner of Restaurant Daniel in New York City.

 One of the things I love most about cooking is that anyone can do it.

 With the right tool and the freshest ingredients, you can prepare a delicious meal right in

 Today I'll be showing you how to prepare one of my favorite French recipes, Poulet Grand

 With a warm flavor of sage and king oyster mushroom and mildly sweet chipolini onion,

 To start, we put some aromatic herb inside the bird, like thyme, sage, and garlic.

 Then we secure some string around the wings and the legs just to get a good shape for

 In a Dutch oven, we roast the chicken until the skin starts to get golden brown.

 When the chicken is ready, remove from the oven and set aside to rest.

 Cut the bird and serve it with a roasted vegetable and a fresh watercress salad.

 And it's easy to do when you bring the freshest simple ingredients together.

 I hope this recipe will inspire you to discover new tastes and explore new ways of preparing

 Okay, so the whole idea is we have a lot of clients that are coming in saying, you know,

 I love my rice, I love my pasta, or my family does, like I can't get away from it.

 So today we're going to show you a great way to cut out all the starch completely and kind

 And I have found that the humble cauliflower is actually a really great alternative for

 We're going to need a sharp knife, a food processor, and a frying pan.

 If you don't have a food processor, you can use a ricer or a hand grater.

 You're going to take your head of cauliflower and break it up into some big chunks to put

 And now we're going to pulse the cauliflower until it becomes the texture of like rice

 Not only are they going to help enhance the flavor of your meal, but also really nutritious.

 Okay, so a lot of micronutrients that are found in these herbs and spices, okay, really

 Find out a couple of herbs that you like and put them in your dishes every day.

 Now we're going to actually get cooking and we're going to heat three tablespoons of coconut

 Now we add the onions and we'll saute them until they're translucent.

 Hey, I love almonds, but if you don't like almonds or you know someone that's allergic

 to them that you're cooking for, you can omit them completely or sub in a different nut.

 Once your garlic is nice and fragrant and a little golden, we're going to add our star

 So our cauliflower has been cooking for between five to 10 minutes and it's at the right kind

 You're going to season it with some salt and pepper, however you'd like, and toss in that

 I hope you guys have enjoyed us bringing you this recipe together.

 You could throw in dried fruit if you want, a little bit of something sweet, or you could

 If you don't like rosemary, throw it up with some basil, you know, so just you can change

 up any of these ingredients that I think this is an awesome substitute.

 If you're not ready to go full on board with the cauliflower 100%, maybe the kids don't,

 I came to Ireland around 10 years ago and since then I've stayed here and I'm enjoying life in Galway.

 In the Clayton Hotel, it's been now 3 years that I took the job of the head chef in the Clayton Hotel.

 For me, it was a bit of a challenge to come into the 4-star hotel with a strong banqueting background.

 In the Clayton, at the moment I would have 11 chefs working with me, plus we would have another 5 kitchen assistants or kitchen partners.

 We're trying to deliver the good product to every single outlet that we have.

 There is a big variety between the menus from the restaurant, bar, bistro and the banqueting.

 The biggest challenge in the present role in the Clayton Hotel would be to keep together my team, because without the team, you would be nothing, only the chef.

 One of my favourite seafood dishes, and that's what I'm going to present to you today, is seafood risotto.

 For the seafood risotto, you're going to need the paste of the shallots, fresh garlic and olive oil.

 It's going to go in a deep pan with the arborio rice and when the arborio rice is hot, you're going to fill it with white wine.

 Then you use the fish stock all the way through the cooking process to keep the risotto moist.

 When the rice is almost cooked, we're going to add our seafood.

 Today I'm going to use the tiger prawns, baby squid, calamari rings, a bit of crab and a few mussels.

 At the end of the cooking process, when the rice is ready, we're going to make it creamy with 3-4 spoons of the meddolant.

 A lovely creamy risotto with the meddolant and a few mussel shells on the top and maybe some pea shoots.

 Hey buddies, I'm Alana and today I'm going to be doing a no-sew tutorial on how to make

 And I absolutely love the hair bows at American Apparel, but they're either $10 or $14 depending

 So I figured why not make them myself since you can do it with just a small scrap piece

 I asked you guys in my last video if you wanted to see this tutorial and a bunch of you said

 So I figured why not film it today and I'm going to be doing a no-sew with hot glue.

 To do this project you're going to need some fabric, some hair clips, some scissors, a

 hot glue gun, and if you decide that you want to sew it instead, you can go ahead and sew

 everywhere that I'm going to be telling you guys to hot glue, but the hot glue works just

 So first you're going to want to cut out a square and this can really be any size you

 Literally any size you make will work once you have your desired rectangle.

 You're going to want to fold it hot dog style, which is just, you know, putting the longer

 sides together and I'm just putting a nice thin strip of the hot glue on one of the edges

 and then I'm going to fold that bad boy on over and press it down so it's a nice and

 Now that we have that done, we're just going to inside or right side out that bad boy and

 then we're going to lay it flat and put the seam right down in the middle and then you're

 And then you're going to put on a thin layer of glue again and you're going to fold it

 right on over and you're going to want to make sure that all four layers of the fabric

 And then once that seems good, you're going to right side out it again and just be careful

 And now I'm cutting another square and this one was 4 inches by 5 inches and then I'm

 going to tri-fold that, so fold one side in, then fold the other side in and you can put

 a little bit of hot glue on it now if you want it to be secure, but not necessary.

 And now you're going to want to fold right at the middle and I'm just accordion style

 folding this, you know how you make a paper fan when you're little.

 And once I have a pretty and perfect little styled bow, I'm going to take my hot glue

 and go in there real nice and just throw some hot glue right in those seams so that it stays

 And after I have my glue nice and crinkled, I'm going to hold it for a bit so it dries

 and then I'm going to put the tri-folded fabric over the middle and I made my tri-fold kind

 You can also make yours thinner if you want your bow to have bigger wings.

 And now I'm folding it around the back and I'm going to glue the tail down in the back

 and I'm going to make sure that one end is left hanging out, which I'll show you in just

 And now I have my bow and you see I have that little flap hanging out and I'm just going

 to thread the barrette through that flap and then put some glue down and glue that barrette

 And once that is pushed down nice and tight, I'm going to glue down that extra little flap

 And again, you want to make sure you get both layers of the fabric down, not just one of

 them because if one of them is still hanging out, it could make the other one rip or something.

 And now you are totally done with your hair bow and you can style it and wear it and get

 So I hope that helped you out and that it will save you some money on your hair bows.

 And if you make a picture, please tweet them or Instagram them.

 Please comment any DIY suggestions you have and I'll be sure to make them for you.

 Hi there, it's Nicole and today I have a thank you card that features some fall leaves.

 is a stamp set from the Simon Says Stamp stamp timber release as well as the mini thanks

 using some Tim Holtz watercolor paper and I have inked up one of the leaves using Scattered

 and have the ink squish out from around the stamp, but I like to hold it there for a minute

I've inked this one up with Fired Brick and Wild Honey Distress inks.

 Then for the long fern like looking leaf I'm using Crushed Olive and Forest Moss Distress

 you can...with the clear stamps you can see that you've got a good impression.

 want to make sure you don't push too hard and have that ink squish out.

 I'm going to take the sketchy or scribble leaf that coordinates from the same stamp

 set and stamp that directly over my initial stamping using the darkest of the two ink

I only did a couple of them there simply because the rest of the

 that I have die cut using the Stitched Rectangle Stackables Dies from Lawn Fawn.

 the small or the mini ink blending tool from Ranger and the Gathered Twigs Distress Ink.

 I masked off the area from the stitching line to the edge of the rectangle.

 me a nice white frame or mat all the way around the center design of my card.

 the Gathered Twigs Distress Ink until I get the exact color I want.

 am taking this awesome Impression Obsession Wood Grain background stamp.

I'll ink it up with the Gathered Twigs Distress Ink so that I can create a

 I'll take my paper to the stamp, but that wasn't possible this time since I've masked

 well and when I lift it up you can see I've ended up with an awesome wood grain background.

 route on this card simply because I was doing a fall themed card, but I could see this in

The rest of my leaf designs are dry now, so I'm taking the Scribble Leaf layer

 and stamping that with my darker ink on top of the water colored background.

 take the coordinating craft dies and use a little Post-It Tape to tape them in place

 get as many cut in one pass of the machine as possible, so I only have to go back now

 Thanks from the Mini Thanks stamp set and ink it up with the Simon Says Stamp Black

 grain background so I knew where I wanted to stamp my greeting.

 then I'll have a couple of them kind of framing that top left corner.

 the way I want them I'll make sure they're secured really well.

 and add some simple embellishment with these pretty pink Posh sequins.

 I'm using the Pumpkin, Expresso, Metallic Gold and Mossy Green sequins.

 In this video I'm going to show you how to make modern mushy peas.

 What I mean when I say modern mushy peas is a different take on the traditional mushy peas.

 It's just basically a pea puree with frozen peas folded through.

 It's just a different take, the colour is a lot more vibrant, the flavour is a lot more pungent.

 The overall flavour is just a lot richer, a lot nicer and a lot cleaner.

 In a pan just melt your butter, so your 80g of cubed salted butter.

 And then I need to add my shallots, so 30g of finely chopped shallot.

 This just gives the mushy peas a distinct flavour, adds a different dimension.

 So we just need to cook them until tender, approximately 30 seconds.

 Now I've been cooking my shallots for about 30 seconds, they are tender.

 And then we're just going to give that a mix in to emulsify everything through, make sure everything is mixed through.

 Then we're going to add our semi-defrosted peas, 400g, and cook for about 1 minute.

 So there's my peas, I'm just going to cook them for about 1 minute.

 Now my peas have been cooking for 1 minute, as you can see they will be fully cooked through the middle.

 If I just pull this back and show you, it's almost like an emulsion, we're almost cooking the peas in an emulsion.

 So I've just added everything out of the pan into a jug blender.

 And then I'm just going to blend it, so you just need to blend that until completely smooth.

 As you can see, there's our pea puree, lovely smooth, green, really vibrant, the flavour is fantastic.

 The texture is also amazing, because you've also got them like little bits of peas.

 What this does as well is, when you add the frozen peas, it cools the puree down immediately, so the colour is not going to be lost.

 And it just thaws out the peas, so the puree is completely cold at this stage.

 Then we just need to add our mint, like so, and then just give that a mix through.

 If you try this recipe, I can guarantee you will not be disappointed.

 This isn't, as I've said throughout the video, it's an absolutely fantastic different take on mushy peas.

 Hi, my name is Mandy Dixon and I'm a chef at Winter Lake Lodge and today we're going to be making a Singaporean appetizer called Roti Prata.

 Roti Prata is an appetizer that's a flatbread and it has very few ingredients.

 It has unsalted butter, melted, water, sugar, evaporated milk, peanut oil, salt, and flour.

 And today we're going to fill ours with a mango jam and some herbs.

 First we're going to start off by putting our water in a mixing bowl.

 And then we're going to add in a tablespoon of our melted butter.

 We're going to mix it until it comes together into a soft dough.

 If your dough is too dry or hard, you can add in more butter as needed.

 So now that I've kneaded the dough for about five minutes, the dough is nice and soft,

 So now our dough has rested for about three hours and we're going to see what it looks like.

 So now that we've portioned our roti pratas into about two inch little portions,

 And then I'm going to take some cilantro and sprinkle it in as well.

 First, smashing down gently so that none of the jam comes out of the sides.

 So once the pan is nice and hot, we're just going to lay our roti pratas right down.

 And then we're going to flip it over so it gets brown on both sides.

 So once they're nice and brown, we're going to take them off and place them onto a paper towel.

 And place it on our serving tray with just a little curry dipping sauce garnished with cilantro and lime.

 And that's our roti prata recipe from Winter Lake Lodge, Alaska.

 Welcome to Radiant Health Inner Well, empowering your whole life.

 Today we're in the kitchen with myself, Tess, Chalice, and sous chef Alethea.

 We're going to be making one of our favorite healthy snacks, crazy kale chips.

 What we have in the bowl to mix the kale chips in is olive oil, apple cider vinegar, seasoned

 salt, and garlic granules, which is kind of like garlic powder but better.

 We're going to go ahead and, do you want to help me by dumping those kale chips in the

 The wonderful thing about these, we actually served these at a potluck recently, is that

 And this is a great time of year to be consuming a good amount of kale because it's so high

 It's really, it's astoundingly immune boosting, very strengthening.

 So once we have that all nice and mixed up, we're going to go ahead and spread them out

 By the way, you should have an oven that's been preheated to about 400 degrees.

 And just spread them out as much as they can tolerate out on your cookie sheet.

 We're going to check and see if any of these pieces are crisp yet.

 The thing about these chips is that some of them cook before the others.

 We want to, it's better to err on the side of checking them too often because they can

 And you don't want to become bitter because you're eating burned kale.

 And we're going to put them back in the oven for another 5 minutes.

 For another 5 or 10 minutes, our kale chips should be pretty crispy.

 And just to let you know, that is one of the recipes from my Simple Sides chapter in Radiant

 Health Inner Wealth, which is my wellness resource book with inner and outer wellness

 And you're welcome to check out my website with lots of resources, including a free newsletter.

 And I have a blog as well with lots of healthy recipes and tips.

 Hi, this is Dorothy from TaiChiBosman.com and from FaveHealthRecipes.com.

 I just made two energy bars here and we'll make some energy bars today.

 This one was in the dehydrator and this one's frozen and I wanted to see the difference.

 And I actually like the dried ones more because you can take them on your vacations, your

 kids can take them to school, and you can take them on your triathlons or your long

 This is a half a cup of cashews and a half a cup of flax and a half a cup of pepitas,

 Pumpkin seeds are a great source of vitamin B. They're magnesium rich, too.

 So you ground up the nuts and seeds in here in the food processor and put them in a bowl.

 And this is dates and dried blueberries and a little bit of apple juice.

 You could put it back in the food processor, but I like the taste of the nuts and seeds

 And then if you're just freezing them and eating them right now, put them in the freezer

 And this way you can wrap it just like that and make a little sandwich out of it for your

 And then take it out of the freezer and make your chocolate sauce.

 I melted on the double boiler some cacao butter and coconut oil and honey and cacao powder

 So enjoy your energy bars from Dorothy at ThaiToBosnian.com's FlossFastFoodBlog and

 Hello everyone and welcome to day 10 of the 12 Days of Pinterest.

 For this recipe you're going to need whole wheat flour, peanut butter, baking powder,

 Alright, we're going to start out with two cups of the whole wheat flour.

 We're also going to add one and a half teaspoons of baking powder.

 Okay, to the dry ingredients we're going to add a third cup of creamy peanut butter.

 While we're making these let us note that Carl is sitting right by us watching.

 Okay next we're going to roll out this dog treat dough to a thickness that is dog treat

 Alright we're going to put our peanut butter dog treats in the oven at 375 for 20 something

 Alright I think we and Carl would give these treats 5 out of 5 pop cocks.

 Thank you guys so much for watching day 10 and we will see you tomorrow.

 I always encourage new knitters to learn long tail because there are so many variations of long tail

 that if you know this basic cast on you're halfway to knowing a number of other cast ons.

 The second thing is I always say I know at least 40 cast ons so there's at least 40 ways to cast on.

 When I hit 40 I thought I knew them all but every time I think I know them all I'm learning a new cast on.

 I've just recently learned another variation of a long tail cast on called the Austrian.

 With a tail, here's my tail, which comes over the thumb, a bridge from the thumb to the index around the index,

 This variation of long tail is called the Austrian cast on and it is very very similar to a basic long tail.

 You go into the stitch as you would for long tail, but instead of picking up this stitch

 you pick up the back stitch and you can see what that does right now.

 first row with a twisted stitch is kind of an interesting thing to have.

 because it changes the tension on row one and if you want to understand this you can read Tech Knitter's blog on about

This changes the the tension on the arms and because it changes the tension on the arms

 But the second thing it does, these twisted stitches are very frequently used in

 twisted stitches on a stockinette background and by creating a twisted base it makes it much easier for

 what I call row zero because it's not really row one because it's part of the cast on

 who asked a question about this and specifically asked me since I knew about cast ons.

 trying it out, I was able to figure out what she was talking about and

 to understand a bit why this cast on behaves differently than other long tail cast ons and

 So if you know long tail, here's another variation of long tail.

 As opposed to a German long tail which has a twist in the cast on row.

 picking up the back loop to create the twist and then slowly tightening up both.

 You'll see you know, it's very difficult to see the twists here if I stretch them out.

 but it does create a twisted stitch which does create different tension, will help minimize rolling for

 Okay, here we go, quick image transfer using hygienic hand gel, Purell.

 Okay, simple cardstock and my image transferred onto overhead transparency film.

 So here we go, gel onto the cardstock, just let the gel absorb into the paper.

 You need to get it so there's a sheen on top of the paper and it's not actually absorbing anymore but still leaves a sheen on the top.

 Place the onions in a microwave and microwave on full power for 2 minutes.

 Once the onions have cooled, add 3 teaspoons of mild madras curry powder, 1 heaped teaspoon

 of cumin seeds, a teaspoon of fennel seeds, a pinch of asafoetida, half a teaspoon of

 turmeric powder, half a teaspoon of garam masala and a teaspoon of chilli powder.

 Work the spices through the onions, constantly turning the onions so as to make all the spices

 Now add 2 teaspoons of garlic and ginger paste, mix thoroughly.

 Crack 1 medium sized egg into the mixture, mix thoroughly again.

 Add half a teaspoon of baking soda, this will help the onions fry nice and crispy.

 Work the gram flour into the mixture, making sure all the onions and spices are covered.

 Dip your hands into water, mix the water through the onion mixture until it's all covered and

 Bring the oil to around 170 degrees, place a piece of raw onion in the oil.

 Take small amounts of the onion mixture and roll in the hands, not pressing too firmly.

 I would suggest not making the onion bhajis too big, so they cook right through the centres.

 This way you can avoid having to punch holes through the onion bhajis, or splitting them

 Fry them until they have reached your desired colour and darkness.

 When they are ready, take the onion bhajis out and place onto kitchen towel and drain

 Here I've decorated a plate with some lettuce, some lemon slices and some cherry tomatoes.

 Place your onion bhajis down the centre to create a pleasant display.

 I'm dedicating this video to the Sunderland Message Board fans I've acquired over the

 I really appreciate all your comments, especially the positive ones.

 And I'm going to give a cheer out to all the Sunderland fans up there.

 Follow me on Facebook, Twitter, Instagram and also YouTube obviously.

 Hey there, Alan Matthews here and this is A M I. A very useful arpeggio, you'll see

This is the first one that is just using the A, the M, the I finger and

So what we're going to do is remind ourselves, do the clapping motion

So now what we're going to do, we're going to just send out just the

And then what we're going to do is when the A finger plays, then we're

We've got the A, we've got both of those guys and then we've got

 the M. And now when the I plays, it's going to alternate with the A and that's how we

So now that we've got that, we can say A, both of those guys go out, and then the

 So now when we come to the guitar, we want to review everything quickly.

You can look down and it's hard to see from this angle what's what as far

 as the angle goes, but from here it's very easy to see that there's an angle.

 want to make sure that you're getting this nice straight angle from your wrist.

 the health of your wrists and about this quality of your sound.

 to the strings over the whole, then we can practice just a few times with just all three,

 the A, the M, and the I, all three on the first three strings, and then bring your wrist

 the wrist down, the side of the hand down just a slight amount.

 to do is allow just the A finger to come out and be on the first string and just sit here.

 you play this, then the next two will come out and rest on the second and third strings.

 then when the I plays, the A alternates and comes down onto the first string.

 M, always into the hand like this, never gripping and pinching like that.

 I'll remind you, you can always just touch these knuckles and they'll just move away

 So the alternation between A and I, and you may just want to practice that a couple of

Always listening to the quality of your sound and remembering that there are

 thing, then it does the next thing, then it does the next thing.

 to fluid movements, ease of motion, calm, relaxed, focused state, and then just enjoy

 the better things will be and the faster that you'll move along.

You know what I am and we're about to have buffalo or bison tacos

Tell you what Greg and Rosanna, we've got great food out here at

 Adam Eskin is the owner and this is a first of all it's a new location right?

 between 3rd and Lexington but you also have some new dishes out here as well right?

So our three bean vegetarian chili, house made guacamole on a whole wheat

Alright now what kind of tips do you have for folks that want to get

Don't overdo it too much but you don't want to get yourself to the point where you're too

And then sugar falls off and then you got to go for something and you

 have I mean we have like eight different dishes that you've come up with.

 start with our mixed greens base and this is a combination of healthy greens.

 lettuce and lots of dark leafy greens for our vitamins and minerals.

 Okay then we're going to add some fresh chopped Roma tomatoes with a little bit of basil.

So you put those all together you get the right consistency and then I noticed the little

 then to that we're going to add some roasted peppers and onions.

 at the commercial restaurants it's more like a thousand or something.

 baked whole wheat pita chips to add a little bit more dietary fiber and balance out our meal.

 So when you're injecting, just try and get it into the meat sections, you know, your

 Any barbecue sauce, but right now, today we're using the Napoleon chicken buffalo sauce there.

 So it's a little tricky, a little heavy, might be, but we'll go there, start her up.

 So through the magic of television, it's about two hours later, and take a look at these

 I turned the rotisserie off, and we're just ready to take them off.

 And the temperature got up to 180 degrees, internal temperature of these three lovely

 So I'm just going to slide this out, and you can see they just come apart like that.

 And we've got to remember, we injected it with that Napoleon Buffalo style.

 Look, you can just see the chicken just coming right off, right?

 That's the way you want your chicken to look when it comes off the grill.

 And ingredients we need 2 inches ginger and chopped into like that finely chopped

 and a little bit salt, some rice wine, Chinese rice wine, just 1 tbsp

 and a little bit chicken powder, mix them together and leave them there

 Just about, well I've got 400g pork steak so I put a bit more oil there

 I'm sorry I forgot to mention that, you need about 600g of Chinese rice cake

 Look, when the rice cake becomes really soft, I also forgot to mention it

 All right, what we have here is we put a two part epoxy on the bottom of the tank.

 We put this over the edge, after we etched the floor and scrubbed it and cleaned it real

 well, you know, whatever, depends on the situation in the winter it's going to take a lot longer

 You don't want it damp or wet before you go and put the primer down.

 We put the primer down so that the next base coat that we're going to put in this process

 This water based primer, it's a two part epoxy primer and it takes approximately six hours.

 There again, your drying times are going to vary depending on where you live, but before

 you can top coat, you've got six hours, but there's a window, 48 hour maximum.

 When you do this type of garage floor, it's pretty much a three day process.

 You need to get it cleaned and etched the first day, second day get the primers down

 and you can get your base coat down in the same day and then you're going to come in

 Okay, we've waited the prescribed six hours, in this case we actually waited eight.

 The object of this base coat is, you'll see in the further videos, the medium coat, the

 When you shoot it with a denatured alcohol, it's going to go right through the next coat

 So we're going to do a grey metallic and you'll see that there is no see through.

 You're going to have to trust us on that because it's kind of hard to see on the video.

 But when we show the next sequence, which this also needs I think one hour to dry and

 So the reality is we could go with the metallic coating in one to two hours.

 Alright, here you can see we have our second coat of base coat down.

 Depending on your application, sometimes you only need one coat, sometimes two coats.

 If you use a squeegee it will probably go on a little thicker than if you use a roller.

 Then we put a two part water based primer down to make this base coat stick real well.

 Now that we have the base coat down we're on to the next step which would be the metal essence.

 Alright, the metal essence has been mixed and we're beginning to spread it with a magic trowel.

 If you're going to back roll it you're going to want to use a quarter inch mow hair

 so that you don't get your lint from your rollers all in through your epoxy.

 You've got to get it spread out and it's pot life is very short.

 Ok, this is what it looks like after we've spread the epoxy over the entire floor.

 We need to wait about 30 to 45 minutes depending on your weather conditions there again.

 And that will disperse the epoxy and make the final design that we're going to have

 So again, we're going to wait 30 to 45 minutes for this metal essence, metal coat to start beginning to cure.

 Alright everybody, it's the Horse 587 and I'm going to be getting my bike out for the

 There's the battery that we'll be putting back into the bike so I'll show you how to

 do that and then I will start it up for the first time on camera so hopefully it works.

 So let me get this plastic cover out of the way, I'll wheel my bike out a little bit farther

 We're going to take the seat off and install the battery back down in there.

 First thing you want to do is unplug the battery from the tender and this one is actually hard

 wired right onto the battery so I'll need a phillips to take these off.

 Don't let those two wires touch, don't let the black one and the red one touch.

 So now that's done, I have the battery and it goes down in here.

 So I will do this, I'll just set it down in there and I'll make the connections back on

 So let me put that in there and then I will cut back to putting the leads on.

 You want to remember that black is negative, see there, and red is positive, you can see

 So you'll take the connections, put them over the terminals and screw them in.

 I'm not going to put the screws back in it yet just in case my battery is dead or it

 So that's how you start up a motorcycle after it being in storage.

 And I will give it a ride today and then I'll put it on my video so you guys can see it.

 So today I'm going to show you how to clean and rebuild a carburetor.

 any of this dirt and grime into these airports or anything inside the

 it's important to have a nice clean work surface and also something to put the

 I'm going to remove the cap of the carburetor and under that is the plunger,

 You have to hang on to the lid because there's a bunch of springs under there

 And then flip the carburetor over and take the bottom bowl off.

 in the float bowl is all the jets and valves and everything that we need to

 Now that everything's in my ultrasonic cleaner I can let this run for a couple

 There's been some discussions about what to use to clean carburetors.

 So now with all these parts cleaned up I can inspect everything

 Droopy Dog also included one of these cheap kits that he found on eBay.

 but many times the brass parts, specifically the jets in these kits, are

 So I'm just gonna throw that away and continue to inspect and refurbish this

 There's a little pinhole in the carburetor diaphragm so I'm just going

 but there's a couple of burrs on the needle so I'm going to remove this

 On the fuel jets you never know if a previous owner used some wires or

 that also might have been leaking fuel causing Droopy Dog's bike to flood.

 And blow air through all of the fuel circuits and air passages.

 And put the float bowl back on and make sure you tighten the screws in a

 and then tighten it all the way down and then back it out 1.5 turns.

 make sure you line the diaphragm up with the indent in the top of the carb body.

 Then install all of the piston springs into the top of the carburetor

 sometime in the near future and not sure what hairstyle to do for that big day?

 Well in this video I'm going to highlight one out of eight natural hair

 bridal hairstyles to provide you with hairstyle options and ideas.

 my name is Anya a simple lady with an obsession with natural hair.

 I took my hair I placed it over the flexi rod and locked the rod in place

The great thing about this flexi rod is that it allows me to create

 an even bigger hair bun and I can form it into a shape that I desire.

Since my hair wasn't long enough to wrap around the flexi rod I'm

 I'm just going to keep it simple and just create a sweep to the side and

 And don't forget there are seven additional hairstyle tutorials to watch

 us know what kind of bridal hair advice do you have for natural hair brides to

And if you do know a natural hair bride to be share this video with them.

 Plus grab the free bridal guide filled with advice from Natural Chica, P. Roy,

 This tutorial will show you how to achieve Lady Gaga's poker face nails.

 First begin by filing your nails in oval shape because that is the shape that

I will be using Kinetics Professional Nail Systems Touch Me Base Coat.

 The base coat will prevent your nails from coloring and we'll be using black color

 so we don't want our nails to be affected by the intense color later on.

 to protect your nails from coloring and also it will make your nail polish last longer.

 black color so really even one coat is enough although with almost every polish you usually

But I still will be using two coats just to make it more intense and

 to make the nail polish last longer because the one coat might not last as long.

 Just keep on going and try not to get too much on your skin but if you do get some on

 your skin you can then later on clean it up with acetone or nail polish remover so don't

 I am now applying second coat and here you can just rectify any mistakes, maybe you had

 on nails so she really wanted to try and I let her try on myself.

 so it is really easy to apply it on your nail and then you can use dotting tool.

 you use it, you just take and dab your dotting tool a little bit in the glue that you applied

 on your nail and then that glue will allow you to pick up a stone.

 up a stone you place it on a nail and it will stay there and it will just stick.

 And then you will just be adding clear rhinestones around the heart.

 In the description bar I have added a code for you which you can use to buy all of these

 and also they are professional products so I think it is well worth using the 5% you

 then just place the stones on the dots where you applied the glue.

 the stones randomly you don't need to really think about where you are placing them.

 in Lady Gaga's video they are more on kind of near the cuticle area.

 and also this particular top coat which is Kinetic's Quick Coat will make your nail polish

 The final look is really glamorous so go on and try it and if you have enjoyed this video

 Hello YouTube today we're going to show you how to make a mini Lego fighter jet

 okay let's get started first we're going to take this 2 by 8 piece and attach it

 here and put this actually we're going to put this here first like this on top

 of this 4 by 4 piece then we're gonna put this like this then we're gonna

 attach these two one on each side then we're gonna take this piece and put it

 on here and get this like this and put this here like this so far then we're

 gonna put this there this one by one piece there put that piece this flat

 piece on top of there with this slanted flat piece there and this here then

 we're gonna put this two by two piece there then we're gonna put this piece

 under here and put that and that there okay then we're gonna go like this this

 one by four piece then we're gonna flip it upside down and put this here and

 this there then we're gonna take this put these in this one by two brick

 then we're gonna get this this here flip it this there this two by two piece there

 that there then we're gonna put these one by one bricks here under this we're gonna put this

 there here this is like the gun or something like that like right here so this is it this

 is the front view bottom view on top behind and this could have been better bigger but

 this piece right here is orange piece but I couldn't really find any so this is it bye

 This lesson we're going to take a look at something that I'm calling trick bends for

 You have probably heard Stevie Ray Vaughan do them, probably heard Kenny Wayne Shepard

 do them, or John Mayer, or any of the guys who are in the same general vein of playing.

 They go by so fast that you might miss them, but now I'm going to show you three different

 I'm going to be basing this in the key that Texas Flood is in, since this is one of the

 That puts our box one shape anchored right here at the third fret in half step down tuning,

 because this song is in the key of F sharp, or G flat, depending on how you want to say

 The first one, you start with a bend, a whole step bend on the G string at the fifth fret,

 Then you do a little half step bend with your middle finger on the fourth fret.

 I think Stevie did something like that on the album version of the song Texas Flood,

 This time we're going to start the same way, but now we're going to drop to the third fret

 We're going to do something we don't do that often, but Stevie Ray Vaughan actually did

 You're going to take your index finger, and you're going to try and get a whole step bend.

 You're going to be pulling against this side of your fingertip.

 You're going to essentially be ... Lock your fingers into this position and just turn down

 You want a distinct note here, and then let it come back down rapidly and hold it there

 The last one is one that Stevie Ray Vaughan did this, but the last time I saw Kenny Wayne

 I don't know if he's consciously using it more or it just seems to fit better with the

 We're going to go ... Start off with that same bend, fifth fret, come back down, drop

 to the third fret and play it straight, and then drop one more fret and do the same thing

 You start by playing a straight, bend up a half step, or I should say bend down, pull

 down, so you get to hit this note right here, and then let it come back down, and then back

 Now the tricky part with this last one is that you're going to slide from the third

 You notice how we go ... Play the third fret, slide to the second, bend a half step, back

 Those are these three different bends that you can do along the G string in box number

 I'm kind of calling them trick bends because they're not totally obvious.

 But they can all spice up your playing a little bit in box number one and can give it some

 Anyway, I hope that's useful to you, and until next time, thanks for watching.

 Today we're going to be talking about how to remove the door panel on a 2009 Dodge Challenger

 The first thing you need to know is that there are 7 little push pin tab clips, 4 on this

 side, 3 on the other side, and then there are 3 number 2 Phillips head screws on the

 bottom side as well as another Phillips head screw behind a cover right behind your door

 So to get started we need to remove all 7 of these plastic clips.

 To do that you will need to take and push in on the center of them and it should pop

 in, there should be a click, and then after that you should be able to just slide something

 One thing you're going to want to make sure that you don't do when you're doing these

 But the good thing is if you do happen to push it in too far just go ahead and push

 it all the way through and you'll hear it fall out and then that way you'll be able

 You'll hear the little tab part fall down inside your door here.

 So like I said just make sure you push it in just a little ways and then that should

 Once you have all 4 of those plastic clips removed on this side as well as the other

 3 on the other side, you're going to want to remove the 3 Phillips screws from the bottom

 Now that you have all 3 of these screws on the bottom removed, you're going to want to

 go behind the door pull and remove the little cover that's on there.

 So take your screwdriver or a plastic tool and it should just drop right on down there

 So once you have that then go ahead and remove that screw from behind there.

 Once you have the screw removed from behind the door handle, or the door pull, you're

 So do that, do the same thing, come from the top with the screwdriver and just pry open

 that little area there and it will expose another number 2 Phillips head screwdriver

 Now that you have all the plastic retaining clips and the screws removed, it is now time

 To start I always like to make sure that I lock the door so it makes it a little easier

 And then you'll just need to start by finding an area that you can get your fingers behind

 to start trying to pry this thing away so that you can get it off.

 You're going to end up trying to pull this away as well as lift it up because there's

 a lip right up here, a metal lip that you're going to have to lift the door panel off of.

 Once you get the door panel off, there are three things in here that are connected that

 There are two cables, one goes to your power windows and locks, the other one is to your

 So you'll have to just undo those, they're just little clips that you push in and then

 Once you get those out, all you have left is the little rocker arm here for the door

 handle and there's a real easy way to get it to pop right on out of there.

 To put it back on, you do the exact opposite of what you just did.

We're going to make some tear-knit capillary towers out of scratch

 Basically you make these little I don't know fang shapes on here

 And then you cut them out see if I can just make one in like two minutes

 You don't want them to look too square, so basically I'm I'm really in a way just whittling it

 You know it's a little square right here, so try to get more of a natural shape to it then the belt sander

 And the way we go oh yeah, you want to make sure there's nothing like hanging out

 Now if you want to do an inverted bob, the twist, what I'm going to show you right now

 You want to take the whole back section, comb it down with your fine teeth so that you get

 I'm going to twist my hand and put my left hand, because I'm a right handed person, left

 I will put my left hand over my top, over my right hand, twist, then I'm going to take

 To create the fringe with the same technique, I'm going to lay my comb on the top of the

 You can have any kind of bang or fringe you want, but this is a good guide, a good start.

 I'm going to place my right hand at the bridge of the nose, my right fingers at the bridge

 of the nose, twist it, put my left hand on top, twist it again.

 I'm going to bring it up to about 45 degrees because I want them to be a little bit beveled.

 And we just flip them on the top of the bread, as simple as that.

 We'll warm it a little bit, so maybe we're going to just warm this one quickly,

 but we're going to smoke a little bit at the last moment the plate with some cigar.

 To emulsify the same sauce, we just add nearly half the quantity of water and just make it warm, 50 degrees, just blend.

 I'm going to show how to do the knit one through the back loop that we'll be doing in the knit

 One of the stitches we need to do is the knit one through the back loop.

 I'm using a different yarn so that you'll be able to see the stitches.

 Usually you knit this way to knit, but to knit through the back loop, you just go in

 What I do is I go down into it so I can feel where the stitch is coming up.

 Now in our pattern, what we're going to be doing is a knit one through the back loop

 When you come up to do your purl one, you need to bring your yarn forward, do your purl

 Bring your yarn forward, do your purl one, take your yarn back, and do a knit one through

 You're going this way for the purl, and you're going that way for the knit one through the

 You can just see how they work alternate of each other back and forth.

 When you finish that row, you'll see the spots where you did your purls.

 You did through the back loop here, so it's going to be like that.

 To tink a knit through the back loop, you have to come back this way.

 If you need to tink a knit one through the back loop, you won't tink it this way like

 To tink the knit through the back loop, you have to come backwards like that.

 Hey everyone, so today's makeup tutorial, Halloween tutorial is a sexy vampire.

 You can totally tone down the eyes if you're not very good at eye makeup or even apply

 it super messy because it totally, you know, goes with the look.

 If you want to know how to do it, stay tuned, I'll try to explain it the best I can.

 But yeah, all you need is a few eyeshadows, some red lipstick and you're good to go.

 I'm going a little bit paler than my natural skin tone just to look, you know, vampire-ish.

 So I'm applying that all over and then I'm going to apply some concealer under my eyes

 just to hide my bags and anywhere else I need it and then powder everything down so

 Then I'm going in with a dark grey color and I'm going to put this on top just to make

 And then I'm going to take a white and put that on my cheekbones and down my nose and

 For the eyebrows, I'm making them super thick and arched right on the arch.

 They still look cool in the end and they still look, you know, wearable but they're

 And then next I'm going to prime my eyelids and move on to my eyeshadows.

 And I'm going to be using the Lorac, I think this is the second Lorac palette.

 And I'm going to use this color here and put that all on my crease.

 I want lots of product on there because I want it to be super dark and super smudgy

 I am bringing that darkness right into that inner corner, right up by my nose.

 I'm bringing it down my nose a little bit as well just to bring it all together.

 But really really keeping it super super dark because you want it to look like your eyes

 Then I'm taking a black and I'm just going to start building up the color in the crease.

 So just take your time, add more color when you need it and just blend, blend, blend.

 I am also going to highlight and then I'm also going to put some color on the lid.

 And then later on we're also going to smudge some black down that lower lash line just

 to make our eyes look super dark and sinister and you know, you know, you know.

 Take your black eyeliner and smudge that into your waterline and lower lash line just to

 And then I'm going to line my top lash line with some eyeliner.

 I decided to go for quite a big dramatic thick, well it's not very thick.

 For the lips I wanted them to kind of look speckled-ish, like dark and light and deep

 So it kind of looked like I had been, you know, messing up my lipstick, ripping into

 some people's necks or whatever vampires like to do in their spare time.

 So I'm taking a really deep purple-y kind of lip liner and roughly applying that and

 covering my whole lip and then going on top of that with a bright red lipstick as you

 And you'll see in the end product it kind of makes it look quite speckly and imperfect

 And then I'm going to take a purple eyeshadow, the tiniest, smallest, little baby, baby amount

 on my brush and blending that over where I've put my eyeshadow just to add a little bit

 They're super super sexy looking so they go perfectly with this look.

 And then you want to jog down to your local costume shop and buy some vampire teeth or

 Anyway, I'm sticking them to my teeth and then I'm taking some blood and I'm just going

 So I'm doing a glob as you can see and then I let it run down my face naturally.

 And it looks really really natural if that's the right kind of word.

 And then I'm doing it on the other side and I'm just going to keep adding it until I like

 I think it's so awesome, sexy in a really twisted weird way, really creepy and pretty

 I hope you guys liked it too and if you did, please give it a massive thumbs up.

 It helps me out so much with getting my videos out there in the world.

 And I love you guys so much and I will talk to you really soon.

 It is waterproof so I kind of feel like just dripping some water on my face.

 It's taking a bit of tissue and we're going to see if it transfers off now that my face

 Obviously you can't just expect to spray a little bit of this on your face and then go

 for this card is going to be on this piece of card stock here and then I'll adhere it

Now I'm going to round the corners with my We R Memory Keepers Corner

 Alright, I'm going to take these little stickers from Basic Gray.

I'm actually going to be using these as a mask to do a little bit of misting.

 it really doesn't matter what color stickers I use, but I just happen to have these really

I'm going to have it say hello, but I'm going to start from the O, because

That will take off some of the stickiness so that after I've done

 my misting and I'm ready to take my letters off, which are serving as masks, it will make

 With this one in particular, because it is a really thick spray, you want to shake it even more than you think you need to in order to get it really opaque.

 area and we're going to have the mist coming out from the sides.

 dry and I'm going to go ahead and peel off these letter stickers.

So I'm going to wrap this around this card front quite a few times.

 stock and I'm going to adhere this down right on the front using some foam adhesive.

 paper that can get kind of warped when you add moisture I really like to use foam squares,

It's going to kind of bridge that gap and bring everything all together.

 It wouldn't be one of my cards if I didn't put some stitching lines around the outside edge.

I'm just going to have it go right over the top of the sprayed area.

Hope you guys enjoyed and I will catch you guys on Friday for another Friday Focus.

 Hi, I'm Annie Ford Danielson and along with my sister Maggie, we are the global beauty authorities for Benefit Cosmetics.

 And today I'm here to show you my three easiest tips and tricks on how to get bright wide awake looking eyes.

 360 degree eye primer that's going to prime for your shadow and your concealer all in one.

 You're gonna tap the pump very gently on the back of your hand and then use your middle finger and do three dots on your

 Then you're gonna go ahead and blend around the entire eye area.

Like my mom likes to say, it's kind of like a cup of coffee for your eyes.

 You're gonna take the wand and pat it right underneath the eyes and then again using your middle finger,

Most girls don't think that mascara is gonna brighten the look of your eyes,

 but They're Real is gonna separate, lengthen, and curl, leaving your eyes looking nice and defined.

 It's the final step to getting a complete bright, youthful looking eye.

 So those are three easy steps on how to get bright, wide-awake looking eyes.

 We got rid of all the dark circles, the discoloration on the lids,

 I would not leave the house without Stay Don't Stray, Oolah Lift, and a little They're Real.

 These are the perfect recipe for parties, nice little appetizer.

 You could also put them in your kids' lunches or bring them to lunch on your own.

 This has just been thawed for about 40 minutes after taking it out of the freezer.

 And what I'm going to do is take some mustard, some Dijon here, and just spread it out on my puff pastry.

 So we've got our Dijon on our puff pastry, and what I'm going to do is just lay out some layers of Swiss cheese

 And now we're just going to almost proceed like this was a jelly roll.

 And we're just going to carefully roll our puff pastry up, nice and tight.

 And we are going to cut our roll into thin little slices, almost like we're making cinnamon rolls.

 So I just start out by cutting it in half, then cutting it into quarters, and then cutting those into half, just so we know that everything's equal.

 Alright, so we've got our sliced rolls laid out on a baking sheet lined with a Silpat.

 And what I'm doing here is brushing them with an egg wash, which is just one egg mixed with a teaspoon of water.

 And then we're going to put them into the oven, which is preheated at 400 degrees.

 We're going to bake them for 15 minutes, until they're nice and golden brown.

 So once these are out of the oven, all you've got to do is let them cool for just a few minutes on a cooling rack, and then you're ready to go.

 You can dip them in some mustard, maybe sprinkle a little parsley on top.

Don't forget to like, subscribe, and leave a comment for more weekly videos.

 Hey guys, I'm going to be showing you how to make a Casper the American Girl doll.

 I have some by Johnson & Johnson and some from Kendall Futuro, I guess.

 There's a lot in here, but I'm only keeping 10 because my mom packed it full.

 Then I'll just lift your arm up so you can get the tape all the way around.

 And you might want to do that before you put everything else on.

If you don't do a lot of offal cooking, you probably think suet comes in little yellow pellets out of a box.

 In fact, what it does come from is a hard outer casing of a kidney.

 It's all I can do to get my butcher to not take the kidneys out of the suet and throw the suet away because it's not actually valued here in Spain.

 I've got the kidneys removed from the suet, so I'm just going to trim them.

 I'm not going to use these kidneys straight away, I'm going to chop them into bits and freeze them for later use.

 At some point I will be showing you how to make a steak kidney pudding which will blow you away.

 Now we've got all the fat separated from the kidneys, we pop it into a small pan on the lowest possible heat.

I'll come back to it in maybe 15 minutes and give it a stir and see what's happening.

 This has been going for about an hour now and we're starting to see some action.

 I'm going to drain off what liquid fat we have and squish down the rest of it and put the lid back on and wait another hour.

 I've skimmed off the molten fat two or three times and we're down to about this.

 There's not much more fat we could extract from that so we'll stop now.

 That goes in the bin, that goes in the fridge and in fact you can freeze it.

 Curd Raita or Dahi Raita that goes great with any kind of Indian Biryani varieties.

 And using a whisk or spatula, mix it well to make it smooth and creamy.

 So the consistency should be kind of a dosa batter consistency like this.

 And now here I have one big onion which is cut into lengthwise.

 So the main thing you have to notice is while cutting your onion, make sure you have removed

 the stem because if you have the stem, you will not be able to separate your onions well.

 So make sure you have removed the stem and cut them into lengthwise.

 And using your hand, just do like this as you see in this video.

 This helps to separate the onion strands and so that you can enjoy well while taking along

 And if you want to simply make only onion raita, you can add onion along with 2 tbsp

 And if you want to make it a slight sweetness along with amazing colorful raita, you can

 So you can see it looks really nice with orange color and green color and white color and

 Especially when you make a mushroom biryani or some non-veg biryanis, this cucumber really

 And while adding the salt, make sure you are adding a bit less.

 So you can adjust it after you taste it along with your biryani.

 So just add a half amount of salt only at first and then taste with your biryani and

 So this is a kind of onion raita or you can make it carrot onion raita or cucumber onion

 This raita really goes great with any kind of Indian biryanis or even you can serve it

 along with your chapati or paratha when you make some veg korma.

 So hope you guys enjoyed this video and if you find this video helpful, please hit the

 channel for the purpose of sharing with you makeup tutorials, beauty tips, fashion

 tips and my first ever video is going to be a video response to the five minute

 makeup challenge I've seen loads of gorgeous ladies doing on YouTube and I'm

 determined to beat the clock and do my makeup in less than five minutes or just

 about five minutes so usually I take about half an hour to my makeup some of my

 friends take about two hours if they're going out or one hour I don't know for

 university so this will be a challenge for me but I'm determined to beat it so

 let's just set the clock to five minutes and we'll begin with the challenge

 BB creams are really good they're a little bit heavier than a tinted

 moisturizer but not as heavy as a foundation to give you a really smooth

 finish I'm just going to powder over this with a powder I will put all the

 products in the description box in case you have any questions for me

 just lip balm because my lips are feeling a little bit dry lipstick

 and just put some on the neck as well you don't want to be different color to

 just popping that on my cheekbones three minutes five seconds left

 and I'm going to take my illuminator underneath my eyes chin forehead just to

 shine and reflect the light also going to pop that underneath my brow bone so

 I'm going to put this under my eyebrows just on my brow bone with a foundation brush

 two minutes 20 I hope I'm going to beat the clock just highlighting underneath

 all right quickly do my eyebrows this is just a clear mascara just to get them

 all in the right place my eyebrow pen so it's going to eyeball pen man like just

 to make sure that I haven't missed any gaps I'm just going to go over my

 eyebrows in case the pencil missed missed any of my bars left a little gap this is

 I was rushing rushing rushing trying to beat that clock and I have so

 if you have any requests I'm new to this so I'm not really sure

 thank you very much everybody for watching and I'll see you in my next video

 The way that they do it on that acoustic version that's so cool.

 The way that they do this is that they're tuning the guitar in standard tuning except

 So tune your low E one half step up and that will allow you to do this.

 We're going to start on the 8th fret, not on the E but on the A string.

 We're using our D minor bar shape, kind of a standard chord position.

 Next part, using our half step tuned up low E, we're going to do this progression.

 I'm Marie Gianni here with the Renegade Health Show and Charlie Wilson of Help Yourself Cafe.

 We are obviously not in my kitchen today, but we are at her cafe.

 I thought it would be fun to show you some different things that she's been preparing

 Charlie, go ahead and introduce yourself a little bit and tell us what you got.

 Hi, I'm Charlie Wilson and I'm here in Key West with Help Yourself Restaurant.

 When Anne-Marie and Kevin came down, it was great to meet them and we talked about doing

 We also use a lot of coconuts here, so today we're going to do something fun using coconuts.

 Kevin and I are actually going on a coconut hunt tomorrow, so we figured it would be fun

 We use them in a lot of things because my old joke is that there's certainly no cows

 We use them in our yogurt, we use them in our ice cream, we make desserts out of them.

 Today I thought, well, rather than trying to make something sweet all the time, we'd

 We're just going to take the coconut, we've got some celery here, we've got some scallions,

 salt and pepper, a little bit of turmeric, and this is the mayonnaise that we make here,

 which is a raw mayonnaise, but you can just use your own version of raw mayonnaise or

 To keep in the true spirit of Key West, I think we've got to go and meet Randesh and

 So Randy picks these coconuts just fresh off around the island here.

 He just goes around, and we're going to show you that tomorrow.

 Everyone that uses coconuts, this is just so great to have them straight off the trees

 All I did was just clean it off a little bit and then dice it up here.

 Now this meat here, this is in between being really, really soft jelly and the hard meat.

 And if you're wondering what to do with your coconut when it's kind of this consistency,

 and that's the parsley, which we can go and get from the herb garden.

 All right, so what we're going to do is we're just going to pulse this up a little bit to break it up into smaller bits.

 I just want to pulse it until it's broken up a little bit like that and all together.

 And again, if you didn't have the mayonnaise, I'm sure it would work equally well with just a little bit more olive oil.

 my question of the day is what is your favorite way to eat coconuts?

 Charlie, where can someone find more information about you and your cafe?

 We've got lots of fun videos, also made by Vanessa who's behind the camera.

 This is Anne Regiani and Charlie Wilson with the Renegade Health Show.

 And together we can help change the health of the world one show at a time.

 Hi, I did a video earlier called how to spin a rifle for colored marching band, not a ROTC.

 So now what I'm going to teach you is I'm going to teach you how to do a J-toss.

 You can do this on flag and rifle and it's basically the same thing.

 I find it easier, I'm not saying that it will always be easier, but instead of putting your

 And then what you're going to do is you're not going to prep like this because this is

 So you're going to hold it, you're going to start off just like you would spins.

 You can try it that way or you can do it the way you start off with spins.

 You're going to push down to where you're here and you're going to push.

 You're just going to turn your hand and your release is about there.

 And then you're going to catch it flat like this, like you would start off with spins.

 Now, in order to build up strength in your left arm, I suggest.

 Again, when you do the tosses, you're going to have your elbow in.

 It's because you have to prep and you don't have to put as much effort into it.

 Because you're literally just pushing it down enough to get the butt right there.

 Hi, The Frosting Guy here from www.caninecakery.com bringing you today the Chocolatey Peanut Butter

 We're doing these cake videos for the website dogcakeworld.com where you can find videos

 on how to make all sorts of different flavored cakes for your dogs and even share your own

 Now who hasn't had a peanut butter cup with that great taste of chocolate and peanut butter

 It's probably one of the most popular desserts out there and a great treat.

 That's what we're going to do in a cake style for your dog today.

 But you need to know your dog or any dog should not have chocolate.

 That's because chocolate contains theobromines which are chemicals that can actually cause

 It's grown similar to chocolate but it doesn't have any of the chemicals that can be harmful

 So that's why we use carob powder instead of chocolate when we're baking for dogs.

 We also are going to be using instead of peanut butter like you would find on the shelf in

 Well the peanut butter powder that's sold by caninecakeery.com is designed specifically

 Well if you pick up a jar of peanut butter in the grocery store and you read the ingredients

 you're going to find sugar, fats, additives, all sorts of things that are not peanuts.

 It's actual peanuts and when we say partially defatted because peanuts are very oily which

 is why we have peanut oil, we remove a lot of the oil from the peanut before we turn

 it into the powder so that your dog is getting an all natural healthy substance that's not

 So I've saved us a little bit of time and I've taken our basic caninecakeery.com cake

 This is simply the cake mix where I've added one egg, I've added a third of a cup of water

 and a quarter cup of oil and again these mixes are all natural, whole wheat flour and they're

 designed to be made in the conventional oven or the microwave oven.

 The instructions are a little bit different depending on which oven you're going to use

 We're making this for the conventional oven so I've added the egg, the oil and the water.

 We take our carrot powder, we take our peanut butter powder, we get our chocolate and peanut

 We mix that up and you can see the great combination of peanut butter and carob in there and it

 And in a matter of no time at all we've got a perfect batter for a chocolate peanut butter

 Let's go ahead and take this and grab a spoon, spoon it into our mold

 Once you've cooked this and it's come out of the oven all nice and hot you can either

 put frosting on it or if you want to go a little bit different of a way just take some

 more of your carob powder and sprinkle it on almost as if you would do powdered sugar

 and it gives it that extra little bite and that extra little special something.

 So for DogCakeWorld.com and CanineCakery.com I'm the frosting guy.

 You're going to find me back doing many more videos on many more cakes and many more options.

 All the supplies you need are found at CanineCakery.com the world's largest dog bakery supply site

 Here we have some warm water and over here we have some cold water and we'll start with Grumpy O.

 The title of this video is how to install a CD player slash how to remove a CD player

 That's really the only vocal point you're going to be touching.

 The first thing you take off is the bottom piece right here and you just pull in from

 Then the second piece is that that goes over your heater controls.

 I thought it would just be this piece coming off but your heater vents actually come off

 You pop that up from the bottom side and then that is really tight so you have to be careful.

 It's probably one of the easiest installs I've done on a vehicle besides a Toyota Camry

 These bolts are the top two which are right there, right there, and then the bottom two

 which I believe are, looking back at our diagram, that one right there, left corner,

 You'll get your flat head Phillips and you will start to remove the top bolt or screw.

 Now they're going to be tight because a lot of people probably have never messed with

 And while we're in here, also if a bulb goes out in this, you're not seeing, it won't light

 And I'm going to pause it real quick, get these screws out so I won't bore you.

 Something still has a little bit hung but slides out like that.

 Make sure you leave that little blue piece in there because that's a cushion that keeps

 So the next thing we'll do is we will pull that out a little bit and see how it's hooked

 This one actually has three wires going into it and of course your antenna wire over there.

 So what we'll do, we'll remove all these wires and then we will attempt to install it in

 And I've actually never done one I don't think with two separate ones.

 So what I'm going to do, I'm going to unsnap these from the back which is just simply,

 if I can do it right, I apologize it's been a while since I've installed a CD player on

 a car and of course this one is very tight like I said just because of the overall size

 Alright so I'm going to do a pause again and mess with this a little bit so I don't bore

 Well you probably heard me when I cussed but in trying to get it out I broke a little

 I broke that, I kind of would have been out of luck but I just broke the top piece right

 Which shouldn't really matter in this because I don't plan on taking the CD player out.

 So just a word of advice, be very careful when you take it out so that else that will

 So it's still usable, thank God I didn't completely mess it up.

 Another good thing about installing new CD players is you get a chance to get back here

 Some of these wires I'm definitely going to have to doctor up before I install the new

 Let's do the English side so you'll know actually what it says.

 And guess what it is, it's four speakers and a CD player I got at Walmart.

 So now we have to figure out how to actually get the CD player out.

 Looks like it's just screw there, screw there, screw there, and screw there.

 But I'm going to mess with this a little bit and then I'll come back once I find out for

 when I started from the back and worked my way towards the front.

 So I will just show you doing one or two and then I will come back and show you the

 Sometimes I get a little bit more because I do want these to last just a little bit

 it is pulling the hair, but tight enough at the root where you can see and I can feel

 to doing this because I wore finger curls a lot just being natural.

Then I take my regular hair clip and I just pin it down to the back.

 you want them to go a certain way, if you want them to lay a certain way, that is where

They always say to go clockwise for all of them so you will know which way you

 I am not saying that just because you didn't go clockwise on one that it is going to mess

I am sure you will be able to tell which way that lock is going.

 up and come back and show you what the after product looks like.

Just a winged eye, a little bit of smokey, and just of course lashes,

I know it's not the most basic, but this is like my go-to if I were to go

 to take Studio Fix Fluid in NC44 onto a flat top kabuki brush and just stipple it all over

 but I'm a full coverage gal and I've owned Revlon Colorstay and all of those foundations.

 going to take it onto a big powder puff and just pat it all over my face to make it last

Next I'm going to take my Studio Fix Powder in C6 to throw back some color

 Studio Finish Concealer in NW25 and a flat top angled brush and conceal.

 Black which is like a smudge proof retractable eyeliner in black and line all over my eye.

 Black Track Fluid Line by MAC and just create this wing to be more feline and to be more

And then I'm going to etch out a little bit of a crease and then I'm going to take

It is a pro blush which I'm going to use as a transition color on top of the NW50

This is like a subtle look and I use that on a 217 brush as well.

 And then I mix with a little bit of Vanilla on top under the brow to blend it all in.

 And then I'm going to take my mascara in extra dimension and then just clean up all the powder

And I'm going to take it on a powder puff from Alcone that I got at the makeup

Just blend any harsh lines with my foundation brush from earlier.

 I'm going to knock off any of the excess powder after I let my highlight cook on my face.

 then I'm just taking that to smooth the harshness between the highlight and the contour.

 with 3Rs and I am having a class here in Orlando March 30th with Lovely Lynn.

 We're going to play song A and we're going to drop song B on the 1 of song A.

 We're going to try to drop it in exactly on the 1, but we might miss it.

 So if we miss it, if it's too early or too late, we're going to use our manual adjustments

 Now I'm going to leave the crossfader in the middle so you guys can hear, but you practice

 Okay, so it's slightly off, it's a little off, but how do I know if it's off or if it's

 Well, if I'm not sure, I'm going to make a move, any move, and then if it's the right

 If it's the wrong move, it'll get worse and I'll know what the right move is.

 I'm listening to the snares in this song because that's the constant.

 So practice that on both sides and it'll make you a much better DJ.

 Last week over on Lumberjacks.com Mike Gager posted a quarto game he had made and I'd never heard of quarto before

 But discovered that you can make the game in all different kinds of ways and it becomes

 I've made all of my game pieces out of walnut and maple and the board I've made out of cherry and oak

 With a decorative inlay that echoes the groove around each of the pieces all 16 pieces are different

 But they each share common characteristics a piece can be dark or light

 Tall and short if you just want to learn how to play quarto watch this video right here

I'm just gonna pull my fence over to the diameter of my cylinder

 And that makes these about the same size I want to make this same groove in the square pieces

 So what I'm gonna do is just I've set up a little stop block here to tell me where that cut is going to be

 There's all the playing pieces cut to size I've got eight the tall ones and eight of these short ones

 Got those playing down pretty thin maybe about a quarter inch or so and they'll fit together like that book matched

 I'm just going to edge joint them together with a little bit of glue and not very much clamping pressure

 Got a piece of eighth inch Luan plywood that looks pretty nice and I'm gonna laminate it to this cheaper plywood

 I've put clamps all around the edges and I'm just going to weight it down with a bag of sand

 I've made up this simple template to show me where I need to make these holes and I've set it diagonally with the line

 This piece I'm just going to kind of lightly butter try to put this on here without sliding it around too much

 Looks like just a little bit of glue here that I need to sand off, but looks good

 Cut these real thin strips of wood as a decorative inlay and they'll just drop down into those channels

 Hi and welcome to Cooking For Dogs where we show you how to make delicious, healthy, nutritious

 Today we're going to make this hearty beef meatloaf topped with cheese and tomato.

 Tools and equipment, we have our greased loaf tin, an egg, some grated carrot, some arborio

 rice, grated pumpkin, we have some peas, some beef stock, lean beef mince and some disposable

 Roland was sure that was going to be a taste test and now he's disappointed.

 Dogs can't digest chunks of vegetables so make sure you grate them or chop them up very

 Add the cooked rice, break in an egg and mix together with the wooden spoon.

 You might as well have a little rest Roland, there's still a bit to do before this goes

 The beef stock gives a lovely beefy flavour to this meatloaf as well as adding vital moisture

 It looks like Roland's ready for a game with his favourite toy.

 Bake in a moderately hot oven, 350 degrees Fahrenheit or 180 degrees Celsius for approximately

 The meatloaf is cooked when it is golden brown and a toothpick inserted into the centre

 Turn out onto a cutting board, it's now ready to cut into portion sizes.

 Thanks for watching our tutorial today, if you enjoyed it hit the subscribe button, share

 From the Cooking for Dogs kitchen, Roland and I wish you bon appétit.

 Hi, I'm Lana and I'm going to be making chicken parmesan bundles from craftfoods.com.

 will need four ounces of cream cheese, one ten ounce package of frozen chopped spinach,

 thawed and drained, one and a fourth cups of Kraft low moisture, part skim mozzarella

 cheese shredded, six tablespoons of Kraft grated parmesan cheese, six small boneless

 skinless chicken breast halved, one egg, ten Ritz crackers crushed, and one and a half

 together cream cheese, four ounces of Philadelphia cream cheese.

 then you're going to add one cup of part skim mozzarella cheese to that, and three tablespoons

 of parmesan cheese, and then go ahead and stir and mix it together.

 Next we're going to go ahead and take our egg and put it in a separate bowl and whisk

Next in a separate bowl or plate, put your Ritz crackers and your remaining

 and roll it in your egg, then roll it in your cracker mixture, and place in a 13 by

 Do you know the most flavoursome part of the chicken are the legs and thighs and they call

 So the legs and thighs kept together with the skin off, that's a maryland and we're

 going to slash those legs and thighs so the flavours go through.

 Squeeze half a lemon into a large non-reactive bowl, remove any seeds and then add to that

 Add to that a teaspoon of grated garlic and just for a little bit of a pinch of heat cayenne

 Mix that really really well and just remember to slash three times into the chicken legs

 Add that to the marinade and really tumble it through, pushing it into the slashes and

 What we have is about a cup of natural yogurt and roughly the same amount of a prepared

 Whisk that together and now just simply tip that into the legs and thighs.

 That's, well there's about seven or eight different spices in that tandoori paste and

 the red ones, very red, some of them have turmeric in there and turmeric does stain

 Get it right into those slashes and really use your thumb, use your finger, get it there

 The soft acids are perfect for tenderising stronger cuts of meat so that's why the Indians

 Now it can go overnight, it's not a real problem but two hours is actually ideal.

 With most marinades, it's very important you take the marinade off.

 So with your gloved hands, scrape it off and place it onto a tray that's been lightly oiled.

 So that is a large clay pot type vessel, huge, seats about two people and you get that super

 However, I don't have one of those but what I do have is a wood fired oven and a big mess.

 At home, make sure your tray can take 230, 240, whatever your oven will do, crank it

 35, 40 minutes, hassling it, turning it, mixing it around, turning it upside down, it should

 While the tandoori chicken is cooking, I thought I'd make a quick raita.

 Now, the chicken's not hot, the tandoori's not a hot dish at all but a lot of accompaniments

 are in Indian cooking so it's nice to have something to put out the fire.

 Okay, what I've got is a cup of yogurt but previously, in about a tablespoon of oil,

 just a vegetable oil, when I brought it to temperature, I threw in a little bit of asafoetida.

 You don't have to use that in particular but if you get your hands on it, this becomes

 Straight away, on top of the asafoetida, a pinch of cumin powder and then a pinch of

 Now, sugar that through a little bit and switch the heat straight off and then leave those

 Now, it's a natural, plain yogurt so the yogurt, the Greek yogurt is firmer and will hold its

 Add to that about two tablespoons of chopped coriander and we're going to add some cucumber

 This one has been peeled already and always cut the cucumber off to where the seeds start

 Now, the watery stuff in the middle of the cucumber, the seeds, incidentally you can

 A little bit earlier on, the crew and I, we passed around some sauce, some hot sauce,

 We had this discussion about what it takes to put out the fire in the mouth.

 So if you're eating hot curries, plenty of heat, the secret is milk, right?

 That's why the pizza oven's fantastic, tandoori oven's great, but your oven,

 That is one of the popular dishes in India using Layonika chicken.

 Hey, I'm April and today I'm going to show you a three bean taco soup.

 Now this has got a lot of ingredients in it, but don't let that scare you away because

 a lot of it is just opening up a can and throwing it into the pot.

 So it's really, really simple and it's delicious and it's actually vegetarian also.

 And this has got so many different flavor components that you really don't need the

 So the first thing I want to do is kind of get my veggies all cut up and ready.

 I just cut mine fresh off the cob, but you could also just get a cup of frozen corn if

 I have one onion and then two garlic cloves that I'm going to chop up for the soup.

 I'm just putting them all in this bowl and then we'll get them into the pot here soon.

 Like I've said before, you can get them in the ethnic aisle of the grocery store.

 So what I'm going to do is just cut it in half and then I'm just going to get some of

 these seeds out and mince it up as well and I'll just go in with the veggies.

 And that'll just take some of the spiciness out of this chipotle pepper.

 Alright, so I have my big pot here and I'm just going to put a little bit of olive oil

 So you really want to get these veggies softened and that's kind of what we're going to do

 And to help those soften and also to go ahead and flavor them, I'm going to add in, I have

 two teaspoons of chili powder, one teaspoon of paprika, and one teaspoon of cumin.

 And that's going to be sort of the base seasoning for this whole soup.

 And basically, you're just going to stir these around occasionally and let them get real

 And I'm going to go ahead and pour in some beef broth and it's going to just grab all

 So the beef broth has sort of come to a simmer or a slight boil.

 And I'm going to go ahead and add in the rest of our ingredients to this.

 And that's going to make this a really thick chili, which I love.

 And then I'm going to add in a can of black beans and a can of kidney beans.

 And these have both been rinsed and drained just to get off some of that excess sodium.

 And then, something you probably wouldn't expect, I'm going to add in a little 16 ounce

 Now, the reason I'm adding this in is because, first of all, it has a lot of awesome flavor.

 I mean, if you look at the ingredient list, it's got some amazing seasonings and just

 And almost all these ingredients are ingredients that I actually know what they are.

 So that's a good sign that this is going to be a good product to use.

 Plus, it's going to offset some of the spiciness of those Chicole chili that we put in there

 And the sweetness of those baked beans will sort of balance that out.

 So I'm going to let this come to a boil again, and then I'll cover it up and just let it

 And that beef broth, it really gives sort of that depth of flavor and a meaty kind of

 Let's get a little squeeze of lime just to brighten it up a little bit.

 And that is going to be perfect for game day or just kind of one of those rainy weekends.

 It's Labor Day weekend and it has been raining and kind of nasty outside all weekend, so

 I love the meatiness of the beans and the sweetness of the corn.

 Hi guys, Party Girl Fit coming to you from Chiang Mai, Thailand.

 I don't have a gym here in Thailand, but I need to get my lifting in.

 So I've created this awesome partner workout that actually allows you to squat or deadlift

 All right, now this is a great workout for building functional strength, which is critical

 for activities of daily living, like carrying home heavy groceries or putting your suitcase

 This workout is going to target your core, your hips, your butt, your thighs, all those

 Now I should mention this should only be done by intermediate to advanced lifters who are

 So let's go ahead and break this down so I can show you how it works.

 Okay, to set this up, you're going to square off to your partner standing about a foot

 Step one, you're going to grab their right wrist with your left hand with a firm grasp,

 and as you step towards them, you're going to squat down bringing that right arm through

 Once you're down here, it's just like a barbell squat at the gym.

 Head is up, back is not rounded, and you're going to begin to transfer their weight onto

 your back by pulling this arm and bringing their center of gravity up on your back.

 So let me go through that again and show you a couple of techniques.

 The first step, when you're pulling them towards you and stepping in, it's one movement, and

 you should be stepping in between their legs, bringing your shoulder to where their hips

 As you pull here, you should easily be getting that weight on your back, and it's your partner's

 Once you're here, fluid movement, weight's on you, then you begin to squat up.

 And just like a barbell squat at home, push through the heels, squeeze the boots at the

 So for the workout here, try to do five lifts on each side of your body for three rounds.

 Now, for more partner workouts and different tips, check out PartyGirlFit.com.

 Okay, during the course of building my layout, I've been trying to come up with a fairly

 This may have been demonstrated before, or someone else may have designed this, so I'm

 For weathering track, a whole bunch of track at one time, essentially what this is, is

 a one inch PVC, one inch diameter PVC, and the length is maybe about two inches longer

 So one inch diameter PVC, get yourself an end cap, and you need to get the PVC glue

 I got this top, I can screw on there, and store the solution in here.

 And usually do roughly a 50% mix of the rail weathering solution and water, 50-50.

 So, and with this screw on top, when I'm done with it, when I'm done weathering, because

 you can use the rail weathering solution more than once, I mean there's certain limitations

 on it, eventually the stuff will wear out and you'll have to throw it out.

 But when I want to store it, I just take this cap, store it, and I can stick it in a place

 Oh, and by the way, the microengineering rail weathering solution is caustic, poisonous,

 so you want to keep it out of arms, hands reach of kids and pets.

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to take this track here and bunch it together and

 run a piece of string through it, and then lower it down into the solution.

 And then just let it sit there for about 20 minutes or so, until it's all good and black.

 So let me get the string tied onto the track and I'll be back with you.

 Ten pieces, that's about how much an inch diameter PVC tube can hold, so that's a good

 So what I'm going to do, and this will be a nice little before and after shot, as you

 I'm going to take all this rail, just grab this, and I'm going to start, I'm going to

 My ceiling's only six feet tall, so I'm kind of running into the...

 I mean from the floor to the ceiling here in this house, it's only about six feet two

 So, I'm just going to let this sit here for 20 minutes, and we should have a batch of

 I had this stuff fairly concentrated, so it's about five minutes to get this all blackened,

 Speed at which it blackens depends on how strong a solution you use.

 I'm going to take this whole unit up and put the stuff out in the bathtub and just rinse it off.

 Once you rinse the rail weathering solution off, that will stop the blackening action.

 requirement to comply with instructional signs and crew member instructions.

 also prohibits tampering with, disabling or destroying smoke detectors in airplane lavatories.

Please be sure your seat backs are straight up and your tray tables are put away.

 If you didn't put your carry on luggage in an overhead compartment, then it should go

It explains the safety features of our airplane and the location and operation

 of a power loss, a floor lighting system will direct you to all exits.

On over water aircraft, slide life rafts are located at each door

Additional rafts are located in designated ceiling compartments or in overhead bins.

 In all cases, slides can be detached from the aircraft and used as flotation aids.

 oxygen is needed in flight, an oxygen mask will automatically drop out of a compartment

 pull the nearest mask towards you with a firm tug that starts the flow of oxygen.

Attach the buckle to the fitting at the bottom center of the vest.

 outside, pull down on the two red tabs on the front of the vest.

 Hello friends, Chris here at CaribbeanPot.com, your wicked chef.

 If it's your first time here watching me on YouTube, check out the channel.

 Make this one for that favorite, that special guy in your life.

 He's going to love it, and trust me, you're going to love it too.

 Chris here at CaribbeanPot.com, let's do a wicked Guinness Punch.

 You're going to need a couple of drops of this Angostura Bitters.

 Up front, the final ingredient we'll be using today, sweetened condensed milk.

 Here I've got 4 heaping tablespoons of sweetened condensed milk.

 After you blend this, and yes you will need a blender for this.

 And you want that rich, creamy taste with that nice bold taste of the Guinness in the background.

 So you may need to add a little bit more of this condensed milk if you like.

 You can certainly add a raw egg in here if you want, but I don't do raw eggs.

 You can flavor it with additional things like a vanilla or anything else you like.

 Bam, bam, give him a nice little generous drip, drip up in there.

 Just going to scrape in all that lovely condensed milk in there now.

 Whenever my mom had this in the fridge, boy, myself and my brother would always lick all the woman's condensed milk.

 And we're just going to pour in that lovely Guinness inside there.

 And looking at the amount of liquid that I've got here, I know for sure.

 But after we blend it up, you can taste it and add more condensed milk if you want.

 The other thing is, you want to double up on that condensed milk that I said earlier.

 To make this nice and creamy and that sweet undertone that we're talking about.

 Just going to pour this out and show you guys how it's going to look.

Well today I thought I'd come down to the beach again and show you how to make a delicious

 You'll hardly ever go somewhere without finding it somewhere lying on the table, just to snack on.

 So I'm going to show you how to make one so you can enjoy them as much as we do as well.

 So for this what you're going to need is some boiled eggs, some curry powder, some good whole egg

 Now I'll leave all the measurements down below on the show more bar for you,

Okay, so now into a bowl we're going to put our eggs and for every egg I'm going to add a tablespoon of

 I'll also add some salt and I'll crack some nice pepper into that as well.

 If the wind wasn't blowing so hard, I'm sure this stuff would smell awesome.

 Oh man, I could just eat that on its own, but I won't because I'm making a sandwich out of it.

 Well, there's some of those delicious curried egg sandwiches I just whipped up, don't they look fantastic?

Well guys, I hope you enjoy those sandwiches as much as we do over here in Australia.

Thanks for watching and I'll see you next time right here on Greg's Kitchen.

 I've been making copycat recipes on the internet for a really long time.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make Taco Bell beef, just like they do.

 It's wonderfully seasoned and you can use it for tacos, crunch wraps, burritos supreme,

 Obviously for taco meat, we're going to go ahead and use ground meat.

 We're just going to put this aside and we're going to talk about the seasonings.

 Look in the description box below this recipe and you're going to see the link to the recipe

 You find it in your grocery store along with the salts and seasonings.

 We're also going to use garlic salt as opposed to just the granulated garlic powder.

 We're going to use about a couple of tablespoons of dehydrated onion.

 You really like to cook with dehydrated onion sometimes because it's already chopped.

 I took about a tablespoon of this and with about a tablespoon of water, it's rehydrated.

 It's already chopped and it really gives a very nice mellow flavor for the onions.

 I have about a tablespoon of cornstarch and about a tablespoon of water to give this meat

 We're also going to put in a little bit of water towards the end of the cooking.

 We're going to go ahead and begin by browning the meat and adding in the seasonings.

 Go ahead and put your meat in your pan and let it begin browning.

 Then go wash your hands because you've handled raw meat and we always know we don't like

 I like to go ahead and add spices while the meat is still browning.

 In goes chili powder, garlic, onion, the seasoned salt, paprika, cumin, garlic salt, and the

 When the meat, when the pink gets out of it, we'll go ahead and add the cornstarch and

 We're going to go ahead and spoon a good couple of tablespoons of our meat into each

 I'm going to add some little cheese and some lettuce and tomatoes.

 I have their taco sauce and a couple of others, so be sure to check those out.

 If you enjoyed this video, be sure to give me a big thumbs up here on YouTube.

 Be sure to leave me a comment of what recipe you'd like to see next.

 Hey guys, just wanted to do a real quick video showing you my new sunglasses.

 I really like them a lot, but I always want to try a different style.

 They're the polished black frames with the black Iridium lenses.

 My eyes are very sensitive to sunlight, so the darker the better for me.

 I advertise the HDO, the High Definition Optics is what Oakley says is in their lenses.

 They have the black rubber on the ear pieces and also on the nose.

 It's supposed to help when you get hot or your face gets sweaty.

 I'm not a real sunglass guru or expert, but I just want to do a real quick video to show

They just go and then they stop whenever they feel like it's a pretty common problem with all seven or eight Honda Civics.

 There is a technical service bulletin on it, which actually tells you that basically you need to replace the motor.

 But it's it's it's going to be the whole motor that you need to replace.

 Didn't want to put a used motor in and find out it's still doing the same.

 And I actually got it for fifty eight, fifty six, eighty plus taxes.

Step one, open the hood and take the plastic caps off that are here.

 OK, all you got to do is put a screwdriver underneath it, lift it and they will come off.

 the next step is to take these, the cowl cover off right here, right here.

And what seemed to work for me is either the side cutter or you can use

 OK, once you have all the tabs out, what you need to do is go on top here with a slotted screwdriver

 the line for the fluid that's coming in, for the windshield washer fluid, which is right here.

 And I have disconnected the line right there for windshield washer fluid.

 Now we need to remove the bottom cowl and to get the bottom cowl off, you need to take the bolts off

 You have bolts on this side right there, one underneath there, and two right there.

 Now we're going to take the wiper transmission out with the wiper motor.

 OK, you have one bolt in the center and then you have two on this side.

 And the motor is actually got a plastic wedge on the back of it.

 OK, you need to align it before you pull this piece off the motor.

 So I just pulled my chicken out of the oven and I wanted to show it to you guys.

 I got the original recipe from Hungry Girl and all you need is three items.

 You have to give it a try if you like chicken and if you like bacon.

 So the first thing you're going to need is a pound of chicken and try to get the kind

 It should have about 110 calories and it should be about 4 ounces per 110 calories.

 Second item is in the salad dressing aisle and this is called dips.

 You can do any of those that you want to do whatever you're in the mood for.

 The third thing that you're going to need is Oscar Mayer Real Bacon Bits.

 I usually use like a square pan, a glass pan, whatever is fine.

 Just make sure you don't miss any chicken because it really puts in some good flavor.

 And then the last thing, take about 4 tablespoons of this and throw it right on top.

 They're a little fatty so the chicken actually hates fattening.

 I have to check all the chicken so I always cut it when it's done and make sure that it's

 But if you're not like that, standard is usually about 35 minutes.

 The second item that I'm having for dinner is these little discs.

 They're 60 calories per serving and they're 2 points per serving.

 If you put a little bit of cinnamon on them, they actually taste like a dessert.

 And then my third item, I always have to have some kind of filler vegetable, is Nature's

 don't have ginger garlic paste, you can substitute it for garlic.

 your tomatoes are a bit mushy here, you're going to add your spices if you have your

If you don't want to use pressure cooker, you can bring this to a boil for about

 been about a good 50-20 minutes that I was pressure cooking the mashawa.

If it's too dry, you can add half a cup of water more and you can bring it to

 reason I'm boiling this separately is because if you pressure cook this, it's going to get

 I have about half a cup of yogurt here that I mixed it just by itself.

But because it has a barley to it, you don't need any other wheat to it.

 The earth is a water and dirt filled rock that tumbles through space, but it's actually

 As a matter of fact, if you were to drill a well from the surface of the earth down

 to the middle, to the very center, it would be about 6,000 kilometers.

 But the area that we live on, the crust of the earth, is actually pretty thin.

 It's only up to about 70 kilometers thick, which sounds thick, but it's really not.

 There's four main layers to the earth, and what I want to do today is see if we can put

 together a tasty model of what those four layers might look like.

 The part we live on contains all of the rock and resource and is a basis for the hydrosphere,

 all of the water and the interactions with the atmosphere and all of the air above us.

 As a matter of fact, what we call continental crust is the thickest part of the crust, and

 There also is a basaltic part, an oceanic crust, which is much thinner.

 But the crust, when compared to the entire thickness of the earth, all 6,000 kilometers,

 is actually very thin, and it's no thicker than the diameter of this layer of caramel

 As we drill down through that crust into the next layer, what we find is what we call the

 The mantle is an area where pressures and temperatures rapidly increase.

 And there's actually two parts to the mantle, an upper mantle, which actually behaves something

 It's semi-solid, but it flows with heat and pressure, and it's actually the layer at which

 So here we've put our upper mantle on the crust, which is the outside of our earth,

 The next layer is the inner mantle, which is the thickest unit of the earth, the thickest

 layer of the earth, and it's comprised mostly of hot, dense rock.

 So the mantle makes up the majority of the interior of the earth, so we'll spread this

 around and leave a spot in the middle for the core, which actually has two parts.

 The inner core is made up of solid iron and nickel, and it sits at the center of the earth.

 And around it is a layer of liquid metal and iron, and that is because of the intense heat.

 The intense pressure causes that metal to become solid, the inner part of the earth,

 This liquid layer actually is what creates the earth's magnetic field.

 As the spin of the earth causes the iron and metal to spin around the inner core, then

 electromagnetic field is generated, and that creates the earth's magnetic field.

 The jawbreaker represents the inner core here in the middle, and around the outside is our

 Then we have 1800 kilometers of this white-pink goo, which represents our thick mantle section.

 And then the uppermost mantle is a liquidy layer that is the sliding around on layer

 The single cast on is one of the simplest ways to cast on and one of the few that does

 It is a good cast on for beginners to learn because it is quick and easy but it can often

 Take your knitting needle and the tail of your yarn into your dominant hand.

 Make sure there is a few inches on your tail so that you can sew it in later.

 You can also begin with a slip knot if you wish but it is not necessary.

 Grab your yarn with your other hand and stretch it out a few inches from your needle.

 Begin by going over the top to under and then around to the top again.

 Slide the tip of your knitting needle into the side of the loop next to your finger.

 Pull your finger out of the loop and tighten the yarn onto the needle.

 Slide the needle in and release the yarn from your finger and tighten it around the needle.

 Repeat steps 3 through 5 until you have cast on the number of stitches required by your

 Make, Do, and Mend was a booklet produced during World War II that encouraged women

 to unravel old woolen items in order to reuse the wool, which was in short supply.

 I just think they are the cutest thing, what an innovative way to use up ordinary paper

 They make them lots of different ways, so I'm just going to show you one of the ways

 I find this is a fun way for me to use up paper that maybe I'm not so fond of that I

 But once you put it all together in an album it turns out really cute.

 What I do is clip off the rough end by using either a wavy edge scissors or I have an

 Cut two pieces of 7 inches by 5 inches and two pieces cut at 3 1⁄4 by 5 inches.

 To get started I have already applied the patterned paper to my paper bags.

 I glue the paper bags together either side by side like this or I put the bottoms together.

 It doesn't matter either way because these are going to be glued together tight.

 And then for the second piece of mat board we are going to lay it about 1⁄8 of an inch

 That way it has room to bend and fold as you're opening and closing the album.

 Then we're going to miter the corners and the way I miter is I cut across the corner

 not all the way up to the actual mat board but pretty close on each side.

 Then I'll apply my adhesive to the mat board and then I take a bone folder and fold over

 Then you might have just a little bit of excess here so just crease that down with

 The longer edge is a little bit tougher because there is so much paper to pull over.

 And then I take a coordinating piece of paper to put for the inside of the covers.

 So I'll run adhesive down each side and when I'm putting this piece in I also run a piece

 And then find that crease and just barely move it so that it comes through.

 That way when you go to fold it with all your pages in you'll get a nicer fold.

 The creases on the paper bag should match up the creases in your cover.

 Then take clamps or clips of some sort to help you hold all that stuff in place when

 Then using your paper fastener as a guide, I usually keep it about one inch away from

 I'll mark my holes and hopefully my crocodile will be thick enough.

 So what we're going to do is punch the holes the old fashioned way.

 When you're using a straight hole punch like this you always need to remember to remove

 all the excess paper out of the center of there before you do your next punch.

 Otherwise the punch will most likely not go through all thicknesses and then you get

 Then it's entirely up to you how you put your prong fastener in.

 If this is going to be the front of my cover, then I want to put the prettier side up.

 These little fasteners make it really nice because if you want to add pages to your book

 And then you can place a ribbon of some sort across that piece and then it will hide it.

 But now, some complimentary asparagus, the simple and easy way.

 I took it out of the rubber bands, cut the bottoms off about this far.

 Just the little white parts to keep the tender asparagus shoots.

 All we need is that, some pure olive oil, and we're good to go.

 The pan is heating, so we're going to just pour in a generous amount of olive oil

 Now, we're just going to put our lid on, and it's pretty much as simple as that.

 And the only thing I like in my asparagus is a little bit of salt and a little bit of pepper.

 But we're just going to tend to our asparagus to make sure that it's cooked perfectly

 as a great complimentary dish to our New York perfectly cooked pan-fried steak.

 Now, the real key distinction to making great asparagus is not undercooking it and not overcooking it.

 And so, if the asparagus becomes soggy and flimsy, you know that you have overcooked it.

 And so, our goal is to get them perfectly cooked, warm and soft,

 but while maintaining a level of firmness to not where they become soggy and flimsy.

 And, like Sagan, a lot of things, even once you pull it, it still continues to cook

 because of just the momentum that it has from the heat after you pull it off.

 Currently, this asparagus has been going for three minutes on medium heat, a six.

 And so, we're going to let it go a little bit longer and get it to that perfect doneness.

 So we're at about five minutes with our asparagus, just in olive oil.

 And our goal is to get it cooked to a perfect temperature without becoming too soggy and flimsy.

 And you can see it getting a little flimsy, plus it's making the outside a little bit soggy.

 It's still maintaining its rigidity, but has now been cooked in here for a perfect amount of time, I would say.

 So right about here, there's kind of a mixture of how long these have been cooked

 Remember, it's still continuing to cook a little bit until we get it out of here and even still.

 So we're pulling it a little bit early, trying to make sure we don't overcook and make them soggy and flimsy.

 If you haven't seen the steak video, just go ahead and click on the steak or look in the links in the description below.

 Your asparagus, just with salt and pepper only, some olive oil.

 Normally on this channel we're shooting vlogs, travel videos, and cooking videos.

 Leave a comment below and hit that like button if you don't mind.

 And you just saw the asparagus video, but check out the steak video.

 So it turns out I was questioning whether or not doneness is actually a word.

 Hello Fashion Sewers, it's Colleen G Lee here and this is Fashion Sewing Blog.com.

 The first one here is what you call a traditional Tail Attack, which has two tails and a loop in the middle.

 The second one is a Tail Attack that I do on my works which just has two tails.

 Where you find Tail Attacks usually on patterns where you need to do them are on darts.

 You can see these circles here, they indicate where you put Tail Attacks.

 You've got one point into the fabric there and you bring it up into the other side of the fabric and pull it through.

 You go back into where you started and back through the position that you made and pull it through and leave the loop.

 The second one which is what I do for my work and it's all about quickness.

 Through to the other end, pull, leave a long tail, cut the thread and that's it.

 The Tail Attack that I've done here is once you start to pull your fabric apart so you can get the underneath here and snip away so that you've got your marking on top as well as underneath.

 You've got a tail there, a little tap there and a tap on the front.

 Tail Attack and that's the one I use on my work just for quickness.

Today we are doing an unboxing of the Canon 100-400mm f4.5-5.6 LIS

Now, the first version of this lens was around for about 13 years I think.

 Incredibly popular lens for Canon and I actually haven't owned one of these before, neither

 the second version or the first version, so this is kind of interesting.

 lens but it's been getting rave reviews so I'm really excited to use it.

Then I used Canon's excellent little 70-300mm f4.5.6 LIS and I really enjoyed that

 lens and I was kind of sad to see it go when I made room for this lens but this has just

We've got one of these cases, this is what the 70-200mm 2.8s come

So this is a difference from the smaller 70-300mm where you don't get

 any particular surprises from this unboxing but I'm going to do it so you guys might as

 there's something which, boy this is really well packed, something interesting and new

 for Canon lenses actually we can have a quick look at on this lens hood.

 here, this little hole that's on the side, this little flap that you can open up and

 that is so that you can adjust a polarizing filter, a circular polarizing filter when

So I really hope this is a feature that Canon passes down to basically

 all of its other lenses where you've got this taller lens shade like this.

 impression of it is very similar in size and weight to a 70-200mm f2.8.

 of my head I don't actually know if that's true in terms of weight and length but just

 version is that the first version of this 100-400mm had the now famous push-pull zoom

 action and another unique, at least at this time, feature to this lens is we have this

 but it actually allows us to adjust, I guess, the feel of the zoom.

I have a feeling I'm going to leave it at one setting for the whole of

 got various, we've got the auto focus, manual focus switch, a switch here to limit the range

 of the auto focus from full and then from 3 meters to infinity.

 is we've got the lens collar with this lens, rotates around very nice but we have a removable

 foot on the bottom which is great if you want to travel with the lens.

 can take this foot off, excuse me, and that's a much easier shape to pack into your bag

 on all my tripods so it makes sense to have their dedicated foot which has the Arca Swiss

 this installs, and I'll put a link to this product in the YouTube video description,

So now I've got the third party plate on there, dovetail built into it, really easy

 with the 7D Mark II which is a camera I've been using a lot this year since it came out

 7D, I didn't think the images were all that great but the 7D Mark II has actually been

 on the camera because this is a great combination with the APS-C sized sensor.

 right here gives me an incredible frame rate, an amazing autofocus system and a reach of

 quite well balanced because with the grip on here it kind of balances out the heavy

So there you go guys, that is an unboxing of the new 100-400mm f4.5-5.6.

 I will most certainly be talking more about this lens combination and doing a review of

 it so I'll add the link to that below this video when that comes up and please subscribe

 Hello, I'm Cliff Smith and welcome to lesson 3 in the major part of my Caged Guitar series of lessons.

 Today we're going to look at the major pentatonic scale and we're going to combine it with the chords and the root notes.

 So what I'm not going to do is go through every single note and tell you which finger, which fret and which string I'm using because it takes too long.

 What I've done, I've created the tab for all of these scales, chords, everything we're doing in these lessons.

 It's all on my website, you can click on there, download it for free.

 So starting off, I'm going to play D major chord using the C shape.

 I'll show you the scale now, I'll play it slowly for you, so you should be able to follow this.

 Starting off the scale now, first finger on F sharp on the second fret of the E string.

 And then the scale, starting with my second finger on the fifth fret of the E string on A.

 D major chord using the G shape, bar on the seventh fret, third finger's on D on the tenth fret.

 Scale shape now, starting off first finger on B on the seventh fret of the E string.

 C shape, A shape, G shape, E shape is next, bar on the tenth fret.

 This is the first scale we've learnt in this series that actually starts on the root note.

 Major pentatonic scale, starting with second finger on E, on the twelfth fret of the E string.

 In lesson four we're going to combine that with the major scale and the chord and the root shapes as well.

 I know I've said it before, but it's a fascinating way you've attained that.

 With the Sauvage, we get this sort of cherry amber hue from a great deal of Pinot Noir

 red wine that's been added, up to around 30%, which is sort of like your creation of this

 It's a pretty ballsy approach to making rosé champagne, a lot of red wine.

 That way the airflow in the oven can get around each little macaron a lot, even more evenly.

 It's sort of fell back into itself a little bit, but they're not the size of a macaron.

 So, we're going to do the final tap, take the final bit of air out.

 So, we've got a little bit more size, a little bit more flatter.

 You can see that our macarons, you can see they've got a bit of a sort of opaque sort of look on the top now.

 And it's just to heat the oven and I'll drop it to 160 once I put it in there.

 I use this just to control the temperature of the butter and the filling.

 So, you can see I mean pretty much for the macaron, get the foot, smooth top.

 So, I'm just going to finish these off with a little bit of gold dust.

 Hi everyone, welcome back to another episode of Honeysuckle Catering.

 Today we're still exploring the Midwest and I'm going to be making a hearty breakfast

 This is something I imagine I would make every morning given all the fresh farming around.

 You're going to need about 3 cups or a pound of baby red potatoes, 1 cup of brown sugar,

 1 cup of bell peppers, and 1 cup of green bell peppers, a handful of parsley, salt and

 First we're going to start boiling our potatoes for about 12-15 minutes.

 This will help cook the potatoes through the middle so that when you add it to the skillet

 While we wait for the potatoes to boil, let's give our other ingredients a rough chop and

 After 10 minutes have passed, take a fork and pierce it through the potato to make sure

 Once it's cooked through, drain the water and let your potatoes cool.

 Now heat up your skillet on medium-high heat and add in some olive oil.

 I'm using a cast iron today because that's the best pan to distribute the heat.

 When your pan is hot, take your chopped onions and bell peppers and add it to the skillet.

 You're going to saute it for about 5 minutes until the onion gets nice and golden brown.

 You're going to cook your potatoes and leave it alone so that it gets crispy at the bottom.

 Once the bottom of the potatoes get crispy, you can stir them around.

 Now add back in the onions and bell peppers and cook it for about 2-3 more minutes.

 The potatoes are going to absorb most of the flavor so you want to give it some extra kick

 And the last step, with your chopped parsley, go ahead and add them in and then give it

 I like to serve it with a sunny side up egg like this and a tall glass of fresh squeezed

 It's nice and savory, you get a little bit of the caramelized onions and the bell peppers

 If you want to see more of our culinary road trip, please subscribe above and I'd also

 So comment below and for more recipes and daily updates, please visit my Facebook page.

It really means a lot to me when I see people watch my videos and commenting

Be careful not to go too far, otherwise you'll break the bottom.

 To the ground pork, we'll add about 1 tbsp of vegetable oil, 2 tsp of salt, 1 tsp of Chinese 5 spices, 1 tbsp of corn starch, some ground black pepper.

 Form the meat mixture into a ball shape and place it in the center of the tofu square.

 For the sauce, we'll use 2 tbsp of soy sauce, 1 tbsp of oyster sauce, 1 tbsp of corn starch, and 1 tsp of sugar.

I recommend you to place the tofu as near to the bottom of the pan as possible

 Add in the sauce and some chicken stock until about halfway covering the tofu.

The texture of the tofu is quite fragile, so to keep the presentation nice, work with it very slowly.

 Thanks so much for watching and I hope you enjoyed with a fork!

 The struggle every morning to get up it's seriously a pain in the ass

 So obviously I have to put an alarm and get up earlier that way I could do my own stuff

 So after I managed to get myself a little awake I go ahead and start waking up my husband

 But after a thousand times telling him to get up I eventually give up this happens every morning

 So after that, I'm just gonna go inside my bathroom and do the usual

 I'm gonna get my hair up and then start brushing my teeth cleaning my face the usual what everybody should do

 Since I changed my routine to shower at night that way I have more time for myself in the mornings

 What I love to do is light up a candle in the mornings and just have the house smelling so good

 But right now I'm using this new mask that I got in my FabFitFun box

 I'm gonna go back in bed with my husband and then I'm gonna start checking all my social media

 Which you guys should be following me and if you're not you can find me at Beauty Bird in Instagram Twitter snapchat

 Facebook the usual and of course YouTube which you guys are watching me on

 Oh and also write down in the comment section all your recent emojis because I think that's it's the most funniest thing

 after that I go back inside the bathroom and I go ahead and rinse off the mask because obviously you have to rinse it off and

 Then I go back inside my room and then I do my whole skincare routine, which I'll leave the video down below of

 I go inside my living room and I light up my tree like I love lighting up my tree.

 But then I go into the kitchen because obviously I'm really hungry and my husband too

 I am actually trying to start my New Year's resolution very early and my goal is to try to stay as

 Healthy as possible to try to motivate myself to do more green smoothies eat more healthier

 So if you guys would like for me to do a video of what I'm doing to help me in my tips and tricks and all

 Just go ahead and give this video a huge thumbs up or leave me comment down below and I'm more than happy to do it

 But yeah, so after that I sir, I am done like serving my smoothie and giving one to my husband

 And once I am all done cooking it I'm gonna go ahead and add some salsa so yeah yummy yummy, right

 Then after eating my yummy breakfast, I didn't make myself a cup of coffee.

 so I'm serving it in my favorite cup at the moment and then I'm just gonna add a little bit of cream and one teaspoon

 Of sugar and then I'm gonna go head over to my living room because I love being in my living room the Christmas

 I mean and then the whole like cozy up and then drinking your coffee and then Netflix goes on is like

 But then eventually I do like to focus on my YouTube and I start editing

 But then after a while of editing I go back to my TV and then start watching some movies on Netflix

 But I love it and after I am done drinking my coffee and watching a movie

 I then head over to my room because obviously back to real life.

 Just in case I get cold or something or I want to just like cuddle up or something

 I like to have one so then I start doing my hair because I'm gonna get ready for a video

 So obviously I have to take up my favorite wand which is by NuMe and this is the 32 inch millimeter one

 I love it because it gives me these effortless curls which you guys will see in a minute right now

 But I also take up my heat protectant and then I just start combing my hair

 And I also do want to let you guys know that there's a bunch of coupon codes down in the description box

 Just in case you guys are interested in any of the NuMe products right now

 They're having a huge sale because of their holiday sets and everything.

 What I'm going to do is then run my fingers through my hair that way I can loosen up the curls a little more

 You know the type of style I'm trying to go for and then I go ahead and then start doing my whole setup of my

 And if you guys did don't forget to give it a huge thumbs up and if you're not subscribed to my channel

 Please don't forget to subscribe and that way you're updated with all my videos and then this family keeps growing

Thank you guys so much for watching and I'll see you guys in the next video.

 Okay, we are back and we are going to start with some orange slices, cucumber slices,

 So first thing we are going to do, hubby can you come and pour the water.

 And as he is pouring the water, I'm going to tell you why we are doing this.

 We are trying to of course on our weight loss journey, find some healthy alternatives to

 you know make sure our body is in the best shape that it can be.

 I've heard that it aids in digestion and it increases concentration.

 I also read that it cleanses the blood and makes hair shinier and stronger.

 So those were enough things to sell me on this to at least give it a try.

 And the detox fast is when you just drink the water for you know anywhere from one to

 What we're going to do with this detox water is just substitute it for our regular drinks

 And from my understanding you want to make sure that it is actually well packed in there.

 I'm going to kind of move the lemons and lime out of the way and bring it up front here.

 And something very quick and it's supposed to be very very refreshing.

 I've been getting some people who are also stating how it makes them feel a lot better

So since the school year is starting to approach for many of us, today I'm going to be doing a tutorial on how to make these really fun posters for your locker, for your binder, or to give as a gift to your friends.

 They're really easy to make and they all take less than an hour.

All you need is a sheet of computer paper, bright markers, or a sharpie.

 So basically, all you need for this drawing is a black sharpie, a white piece of computer paper, and some color markers to color in the mosaic sections.

 To begin, start drawing small squares to form the mosaic pattern.

 Eventually it will turn into oval-y shapes, but it comes out really pretty and that's what makes it unique.

 You can draw the squares into diamonds or any shape you really want.

 As long as the shape is small, it will come out with the mosaic effect.

I used Bic Market because they're cheaper than sharpies and if they get a little dirty on the tip, it doesn't matter.

 You're going to color in each individual section with the colors that you chose.

 I like to take one color and fill in as many mosaic pieces as I want and then move on to the next.

 But right here, I'm just showing you a small section that I'm going to color in so that you can get the hang of it.

 You can also make a pattern out of the mosaics like I did with the waves and the sun, like the beach scene I showed in the beginning.

 Next, I'm going to teach you how to make the spiral swirls pattern.

 For this pattern, I used brightly colored highlighters because it makes the design more vibrant and it comes out a lot prettier.

 Also, it doesn't bleed through the paper like a normal sharpie would.

 To start, take your white piece of paper and the first color that you're going to use and make a small sort of star shape in the middle of the paper.

 Also, you can put these star shapes anywhere to start a new firework if that's what you'd like to call these designs.

 here and continue to make these fireworks all around your paper for a full-on effect.

 When you're done, your firework design can come out like this, or even like this.

 The final design I will be teaching today is the paisley design.

 Okay, so I had to do this pattern on the back of the firework because I ran out of paper,

 I colored them in after with bright colored pencils and it turned out really pretty.

 can put this in your binder and make it a very decorative piece of work.

 I don't have enough time to do this tutorial, but it's just an inspirational quote that

I hope you enjoyed my video and here are the final designs of all the things that

Please don't forget to comment, rate, and subscribe to my channel

 Hi, I'm Linda, I'm Jay's wife, and I'm here today to talk about not just the versatility

 of the juicer, the magnificence of this new beautiful juicer of ours, and the fact that

 we also can blend, but this new world of almond milk making and nut milk making and soy milk

 we've gotten rid of the original water, we've rinsed them very well, and now they're ready

 of a loud noise, but remember it's because it's grinding, it's not juicing.

 our plunger in and we slowly grind, and as we're grinding, we're going to be putting

 Now if you want to add a little bit of pear, which is sometimes what I do, you can just

I'm going to do an unboxing, not really a true unboxing, but I'm going to do a unboxing of my JH5s.

 I did open them right when I got them because I was just a little too excited.

 I got them last week and after about a month and a half of waiting, I finally, finally received them

The box, sorry the case is in there and then a little instruction manual popping out here.

 So this is the OtterBox and I've covered up my name just for privacy reasons but

 the OtterBox, very sturdy and you will never have to worry if your customs are in here.

 I've brought them around to school, just left them in my bag and this thing is like indestructible.

 It usually snaps closed but it is so difficult to open and close that I just left it open for the

 sake of this video just to, just so you wouldn't have to wait for like 10 minutes to watch me open it.

 It's got a little cleaning tool here which is essential for that.

It's not really clear, it's actually like an opaque silver kind of colour but

 you can see, you can see the drivers in there and it looks so cool if you can see them.

 My initials on the back and the serial number and you can tell my ears are very, very small

 because the driver barely fits in there but they, they made it work and it sounds awesome.

 So yeah, this is just how they turned out and I'm so happy with them.

I have, I've listened to them for a couple hours each day and brought them to school

 and used them on my computer and the sound that comes out of it is just so, so good.

I'm planning on getting a cable for them because the cable, as I've been

 told, turns green over time which would be a problem so I'll update you on that if I ever get

But yeah, this is just what you can kind of expect and well, not really because

 yours will probably turn out different than mine but I'm really happy.

 answered all my questions all the time and they sent it as soon as they could.

 yeah, if you have any questions or comments about them, please leave me a message and I'll try to

 answer you as best I can and don't forget to check out the blog

It's not written by me so you don't have to ask me the questions but

 Hello, it's Two Girls Flopping Pets and today I'm going to do a tutorial on how to make a bird toy.

 So what you'll need is some scissors, some cotton string and some hay.

 Okay, so first what you do is you want to grab how much you want to use.

 And then just grab out anything that's not hay like spark, just bits of stuff.

 So it's just all hay because you don't really want any bits or pieces.

 So you want to tie knots where you have put the string so it's attached like that.

 Now, you can choose to cut off the ends to make it a little bit the same size.

 So you just kind of want to just pull out some of the loose parts.

 And then you just want to get some scissors and cut that string off here.

 Okay, so then what you just want to do is you just want to grab these two strings and tie it wherever you want in the cage.

 You probably should make a new one and change them because they do get quite destroyed and probably go a bit not so nice after a while.

 And also please leave some video requests because we're kind of running out of things to do.

 Hi everyone, to make the tinga we are going to need some chicken that's already been cooked.

 If you haven't seen that video I'm going to put it right here so that you can go and check

 Well, first thing we're going to do is we're going to chop our tomatoes and for that you

 So we're going to cut them in half and after we have cut them in half we're going to cut

 them into slices like this and then we're going to go the other way.

 Well now, after you finish chopping the tomatoes you're going to chop also the onion, alright?

 And first I'm going to saute the onions and then I'm going to add the tomato.

 I'm going to leave this stuff for about 10 minutes in low heat because these tomatoes

 The water is going to start coming out of the tomatoes so we need to get rid of that.

 And for that we need to have this in low heat for about 10 minutes.

 Now that the liquid has evaporated a little we're going to add the chicken.

 And before I mix it further I am going to add just a tiny bit of salt.

 After about 2 minutes that's been cooking and already mixed and everything we're going

 So we're going to mix it well and we're going to leave it here for about 2 or 3 minutes

 You know one of the key ingredients to cooking is that you have to give food it's time.

 There are some occasions like now that we have some of the liquid here.

 You can let it in low heat for about 2 minutes and all those flavors are going to get much

 If you turn off the heat right now, yeah it's going to be good.

 But if you leave it for about 2 or 3 more minutes and as long as you have something

 and your stuff doesn't stick to it or doesn't stick to the pan, your food is going to taste

 So just give food it's time, have a little bit of patience and you're going to have very

 Finally here is our tinga and I'm going to leave you some pictures of what can you do

 Here are some tostadas that you can buy them already in a bag and you just add some sour

 cream to the bottom, some tinga, chopped lettuce, a little bit of fresh cheese and that's it.

 These are tostadas and here I have a pambazo which I already have the video on YouTube

 and here are some quesadillas which I will show you how to make in the future videos.

 So I hope you enjoy this recipe, give it a try, give it a thumb up also if you like it

 Now, squash in general is one of those things that I used to see at the grocery store and

 But once I got over that fear, oh, it was one of my favorite, favorite things.

 And what's so fun about it is that it actually pulls away into these spaghetti-like strands.

 And the way that we're going to prepare it, mmm, we're just going to add a little bit

 So stick with me because we are tackling some spaghetti squash.

 Now, what I've done already is I just cut it in half, which is no easy task.

 It definitely takes some muscle work, but you don't want to let that knife go, you know,

 So next, all we want to do is take each side and scoop out all of this inside, just like

 Take out all the seeds, all the guts, until you've got this nice hollow and everything

 So now that our squash are all nice and clean, we're just going to drizzle the inside here

 with a little bit of olive oil, a good amount of salt and pepper, and then flip them over

 Now, you can know that it's done by kind of pressing on the outside and giving just a

 You can also turn it over like I have it here and just pierce it with a fork and the fork

 Now, all I'm going to do is take my fork and make some long movements down the squash and

 that's going to separate and get out all of those strands of squash, spaghetti, whatever

 So now that we have all this beautiful squash, we're going to finish it off with a creamy

 So we are starting off with just a tablespoon of olive oil and I've also got two shallots

 So we're going to let this go on medium heat just until the shallots get really nice and

 I want that garlic to really give off all of its garlicky goodness.

 When you start really smelling garlic and onions, that's when we're ready to go.

 So now we're just going to add in all of our squash and let all that onion and garlic really

 I mean, whenever you combine onions and garlic with something, it's a pretty good start.

 But to keep it going, we are going to be adding in some ground nutmeg and some red pepper

 Nutmeg is going to give it just a little hint of something extra and I like a little bit

 And the heavy cream especially, you don't need much of it to get such a good silkiness.

 Lastly, we're going to add in just a half cup of Parmesan cheese and of course our salt

 You've got a giant pot of veggies here and they really, really need salt to bring out

 And just for a little acidity to break things up, we're going to add the juice of one lemon.

 Now I'm just going to let it hang out over this low flame for a minute.

 Let all that cheese melt and let everything kind of come together.

 I mean, talk about simple and easy and super nutritious and delicious and all that good stuff.

 So now that you know how to simply roast it, take it, run with it, have fun.

 But if you want to do it just like I did, this is pretty darn good.

I'm Whitney and I post sewing and crafting tutorials here on my YouTube

 channel, but today I'm doing something a little different and that is a cooking video.

 The weather is getting a little colder right now and when it's cold outside I love making

 to make an easy but delicious chili that my mom made when I was little and I wanted to

I'm also going to share some ideas for how to stretch the amount

 of food without breaking the bank and some ideas for using your leftovers.

 For the chili you'll need a pound of ground meat, a can of diced tomatoes, a can of beans

 – I prefer western or chili style, but use what you like – and a small to medium sized

You'll also need three tablespoons of flour, one to one and a half tablespoons

 of chili powder, one tablespoon of cumin, one teaspoon of sugar, and a teaspoon of

 most of the pink is gone I like to push the meat to one side and add in the diced onion

 It helps to add a bit of water to make sure everything is mixed well and it prevents it

 cans and pour it into the other to rinse them, then add that water to the pot.

 water until there is a little more than what you want in the finished chili because some

 for stretching your chili and making a larger quantity on a budget.

 some leftover taco meat, some leftover beans, homemade salsa, maybe some spaghetti sauce

 you using up leftovers that were just sitting in your fridge, but you're also adding to

 can of Rotel or an extra can each of the beans and diced tomatoes.

 double your chili without doubling the cost because you're still only using one pound

So with this recipe with no added extras at all, there's enough for

 Jeremiah and I to eat a ton of chili the first night because we love eating chili so much.

 And then there are leftovers, but not quite enough for a full meal.

 the leftovers, we either will make chili dogs or Frito chili pies or what is known as three

 way spaghetti, which is where you make spaghetti noodles and instead of spaghetti sauce, you

 to use up leftover chili if there's some leftover, but it's not quite enough for everyone to

If you want more easy or budget friendly cooking ideas, let me know because I do cook

 quite often and I had a lot of fun putting this video together.

 of us are on a budget, so it helps to have extra tips from people on how to make a good

 and I will have more videos up very soon and I will see you all then.

 with another video and today what we're going to do is actually make one of the most requested

 then at the end of the video I'm going to do another t-shirt giveaway to give thanks to you

Now on this plate I have four chicken breasts and what we're going

 to do is cut each one in half so we have eight pieces and then after you've cut them in half

 you can set them on a baking sheet that I already have right here with some aluminum foil on top.

 So now that we have the chicken cut up and out of the way we're going to make the breading.

 the first ingredient that we're going to use for the breading is a quarter of a cup of parmesan

 cheese and we're going to pour that into a bowl and then we'll add three quarters of a cup of

 whole wheat bread crumbs on top of the parmesan and then take a fork and mix the parmesan and the

 bread crumbs together and as always you can add any additional spices that you want to your

 breading mixture but today I'm going to keep it simple and just add in some basil leaves.

 Next what you're going to do is take two egg whites and crack those into another bowl

 and now what we're going to do is take one piece of the chicken and take the egg white mixture and

 just set the chicken in the egg white mixture and really make sure you coat the chicken in the egg

 white because that is what allows for the breading to stick to it.

 egg white you're going to take that right over to our bowl of parmesan and bread crumbs and coat

 each piece of chicken one at a time and after you're done coating your first piece go ahead

 and repeat the process for the remaining seven pieces of chicken.

 the chicken and you have any leftover in the bowl you can scrape that out and sprinkle that on top

 of all of the chicken and then we'll fold our aluminum foil over the top and we'll put our

 chicken in the oven at 450 degrees fahrenheit for 40 minutes so I'll see you guys when these are

Now here we are 40 minutes later and what we're going to do is peel back the aluminum foil

 and take some scissors and cut off the extra part and then what we're going to do is take

 one cup of spaghetti sauce or marinara sauce and dump that on top of the chicken.

 Then we'll take three quarters of a cup of low-fat mozzarella cheese and sprinkle that on top of the

Now what we're going to do is put these back into the oven uncovered still at

 450 degrees fahrenheit for five minutes or until the cheese melts so I'll see you guys in a couple

And now five minutes later the cheese has melted so I'll put one of these on a plate to give

 you guys a better view at home and then we'll put these back in the oven for another five minutes.

 And here's a better look for you guys to see at home of this oven baked chicken parmesan.

 a side of broccoli but if you wanted to add maybe some pasta to make this more like an Italian

 dinner feel free to do that but the bottom line is this chicken parmesan is going to taste great.

 So I hope you guys try this one out and enjoy it because it really does taste delicious and now on

All you have to do is like the video and answer the question what is your favorite

So if you have a favorite one that you like to indulge in every once in a

 while let me know down below in the comments and I'll pick someone out send you a message and let

But as always if you guys enjoyed this video give it a like and you

 can stop by Facebook and Twitter links are down below in the description.

 Hi, I'm Cheryl Nujafi with Everyday Dishes, and today we're going to make super yummy chicken teriyaki.

 In a medium-sized bowl, add a half a cup of low-sodium soy sauce,

 three tablespoons of brown sugar, a tablespoon each of cornstarch and ginger,

 You're going to add a half a teaspoon of red pepper flakes, then whisk until brown sugar and cornstarch have dissolved.

 Add thinly sliced chicken and stir, and make sure each piece is coated with the marinade.

 Place a large skillet over a medium-high heat, and add two tablespoons of sesame oil.

 Add two cups of sliced onion, and now cook and stir these frequently for approximately four minutes

 Add frozen stir-fry vegetables right out of the package, and cook those in the pan just until heated through.

 Transfer the vegetables to a plate, and then loosely tent them with aluminum foil to keep them warm.

 Return the skillet to the heat, and add all the chicken, including the marinade.

 Stir constantly until the sauce is thick and the chicken is completely cooked through.

 Add vegetables back into the pan, and stir to coat everything with this yummy sauce.

 But only cook until the veggies have just reached the desired tenderness.

 Remove everything from the heat, and garnish with sliced onions, bean sprouts, or even cashews if you like.

 So for more tips, tricks, and ideas, I'll see you back at everydaydishes.com.

 Make sure you like this if you love it, subscribe to my channel, and comment below.

 make a deep fried tofu to go with Thai sweet chili sauce and it's a few tricks that need

First, you must use firm tofu or extra firm tofu and then let it drain

Serving tofu with Thai sweet chili sauce, pour on the corn and it

 tastes much better because you know what kind of oil you're using at home and how fresh

For my previous cooking with Thai sweet chili sauce, to be served with

 Until the invention of the electric light bulb in 1879, they were a primary source of

 After that event the role of candles changed from a necessity of normal life to a role

 Making candles is a great family activity that can provide both enjoyment and in some

 They make great gifts for birthdays, Christmas, and other occasions.

 Do you need some candle making tips to get you started making your own candles?

 When making your own candles, first decide on what type of wax you're going to be working

 There is paraffin, soy wax, beeswax, and the gel candle material, and choose the right

 Then you need to choose the container you're going to use to form your candles.

 Once you have all your materials together then it is time to melt your wax or gel.

 The melting temps will vary between these various materials but the process is basically

 It is used to heat the wax so that it will easily pour into the container or mold.

 Once the material is melted, colored, and scented, then position the wick in the center

 Pour the candle material slowly into the container and do not disturb the wick.

 When it is completely cool and hardened, then it is time to remove it from the mold.

 If it does not easily come out, just refrigerate it and it should come out easily.

 I have basted the bird and I have flipped it over for the first hour to go on the grill.

 Then I added slices of lemon, slices of orange, used some garlic that I had crushed, put in

 So it has a little bit of a tang but the cider will be a nice mix to it and I've used it

 Coals are ready to go and we're going to get the bird and put it on right now.

 All right, the bird is on and we're going to give it about an hour for the first go

 around and I do have it breast down to start so that we can cook it and not get it so that

 Okay, the cover is on and I vented the top of the kettle about at half so that if you

 can see we've got just slightly less than half and that will keep a nice consistent

 flame or temperature in the bowl and in the kettle I mean and also it will not burn us

 up over like one hour and will keep the heat consistent with a colder temperature.

 Should have a little bit of browning but not much I would think.

 Yeah, we're starting to get a little bit of a brown tint to the bird.

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to flip it over and then I'm going to put

 All right, I flipped the bird over and I have a few orange slices that I put into the cavity

 to keep it moist there and I've put additional 12 charcoal briquettes per side and of course

 that is, I don't get any sponsorship money from them but I prefer the Kingsford brand.

 I put 12 in and this side's a little bit better so we're going to, I'm going to probably

 That was after 40 minutes and so I've got about 2 hours and 15 minutes allotted for

 It's going to get dark here in about another hour so I'll be working out here pitch dark.

 We've got a little dark on the top but we've kept that and everything else is pretty good

 I turned the bird upside down, breast down so that it doesn't get, doesn't dry out because

 it was kind of speeding up and when I closed the vents that helped it quite a bit.

 So I'm going to brown the lower half for about a half an hour and then I'm going to flip

 it for about another half an hour and we should be ready to go.

 I just put some new coals in and they're all, the other ones came through pretty nicely.

 All right, we're putting in the meat thermometer and it's reading is, what does it say here?

 So we're going to take it off and bring it in and sometimes you can take it off a little

 earlier because it'll still cook when you get it inside but because it was so cold out

 Hi, my name is Vern and I'm here to talk about V-Spout disposable funnels.

 Alright, before V-Spout to pour your paint, you took the lid off, you grab the handle,

 you pour the paint, and paint gets all over the can, it drips down, it gets into the groove.

 And what happens when you go back six months later and grab that old can of paint?

 First you got to work to peel it off, and then when you finally do get the lid off,

 Look inside the can and there's brush chips, it's just all the big globby mess.

 And it fits into the groove of the can so that the groove of the can stays nice and

 You take your gallon of paint, you take your lid off, you take your V-Spout recycled paint

 funnel, put the cardboard applicator inside the lid, keeps the edge clean, grab it by

 the finger holes, pour your paint nice and smooth, comes up, again, hardly any mess.

 The inside of the paint turns around, runs back into the lid, remove it, and once again

 You go to put your lid on, a nice clean lid fits on tight, protects the paint.

 Open up your can, the same thing, put it in, make your pour, and there you go.

 And for those people who go out and buy the plastic cans, V-Spout comes in a thinner design

 We got quarts, we got gallons, metal cans, plastic cans, all sizes.

 We're going to use some of that cheese sauce that I showed you how to make and we're going to make a basic a grotton potato

 It's even more simple than simple because we're going to cook the potatoes a little bit in advance

 These are going to be really easy what I'm doing is I have a three quart casserole here

 And you're going to want to adjust this according to the size of your family or however many servings you're particularly going to need

I cooked these six potatoes in the microwave for about 10 minutes

 We'll just see how long this how far these go in this dish any extras.

I'm going to put these in the one layer in the bottom of this dish

 Any I don't know how many of you are familiar with the show that used to be on TV called yes dear

 There used to be a character on there named Jimmy, and he was a brother-in-law Jimmy Hughes and

 One of Rick's favorite things to remember whenever we have a grime potatoes is what?

 Was it his happiest day when he found out all grime means with cheese

 So we're having a brown potatoes so that would make Jimmy very happy

 I know that makes Rick very happy and it makes Micah very happy too because on the way home from school today

 She said what's for dinner, and I told her and she got a big smile on her face

We'll hit it with some more pepper you can use white pepper if you want

 White pepper yes people are snobs, and they think that when they make a white sauce

 They should have white pepper because the pepper should not be seen

 Oh, it's that's right Molly Molly says it's going in your stomach anyway

 Did you all hear what she said she said it's gonna come out black anyway or close to it brown black whatever

 Make sure your potatoes are covered with cheese sauce and one recipe of cheese sauce is gonna be enough now

 And pepper is totally option I mean if you don't like pepper then don't

 This is gonna get covered and put in the microwave for 10 minutes

 Then it's gonna rest for 10 minutes, and then it's gonna be time to eat it in the meantime

 15 minutes to cook and then we're gonna sit down and have dinner so when it's time to eat this after it's rested for 10 minutes

 I'll bring you back, and I'll show you what it looks like and I'll fix you a little bowl of all grotten potatoes

 Okay, this is after 10 minutes in the microwave and 10 minutes resting you've perfectly delicious

 Algrotton potatoes the trick here is to pre-cook the potatoes in the microwave first build your cheese sauce

 Then mix them you know layer them together and then cook them again in the microwave that is beautifully delicious

 Algrotton potatoes right there, and they're scalding hot so you want to let them cool a little while before you eat them

 And I hope that you will definitely give these a try because now you've absolutely no excuse not to make them

I hope you love them, and thank you so much for stopping by today

 I always love it when you come by we always have a lot of fun until next time.

 Here we have is the chimney oven, the Grover chimney oven and the heavy-duty rocket stove

 We're going to get a fire started and we're going to maybe start baking some muffins in

 As you can see we have a two foot section of pipe on top coming down to the chimney

 oven with the adapter in between and then we have the heavy-duty Grover rocket stove.

 We're going to start a fire in it and so we're going to get, zoom in here a little bit, we'll

 We've now got the fire started in it and it will take a few minutes to get this going

 so to speed things up we'll turn this video off and then turn it on again in just a moment.

 We've now gotten the fire started and it's starting to burn here.

 As we come over we're going to look at the temperature gauge on the chimney oven.

 We've only gone about five minutes here and we're at about 125 degrees.

 It's not focusing but as you can see it's about 125 degrees and we've found that it's

 Keep pushing some of these in and when we get that temperature we're going to get some

 We're going to pause it for a few more minutes until we can get that up to temperature.

 Alright we have been coming back here and we've been getting this fire going for about

 As you can see we are at over 350 degrees and it's actually hotter inside which I will

 Before we do so though we're going to, we're getting some muffins ready here.

 We're just kind of showing you what's going on here and we're going to go ahead and throw

 So it's right now we're going to time how long it takes to bake these.

 Alright here we're doing the temperature on the outside of it and we're showing about

 We're going to open it up inside here and do the temperature here.

 Alright we're going to go ahead and pause this film and we'll come back here in just

 Alright we've been going for about 7-8 minutes here and we found that we've had to open our

 oven door because it was getting way too hot for these muffins.

 But you can see you could really cook some good food in there, meat if you had meat.

 If you go on the bottom here though you can see we're getting 600-700 degrees.

 Not sure, maybe they've not got doughy inside but maybe they're just fine too.

 Just one thing we have noticed, since we started this fire we have not seen any smoke at all.

 And it's been really nice and you can see that you could really do some good baking

 They are looking good and I'm ready to eat one of these yummy rolls.

 We've got the chimney oven with the heavy duty Grover rocket stove.

 You can find these parts on stockstorage.com as well as maybe even eBay.

 And we might eventually get it on our website stockstorage.com.

 So first you want to get your ingredients which includes some graham crackers, cream

 So you just want to get regular ordinary strawberries and wash them off.

 And then you want to get Weight Watchers cream cheese and this is the whipped cream cheese

 And 2 tablespoons is 60 calories and 2 tablespoons would probably get you like 6 or more strawberries

 And then the graham crackers are 130 calories for 2 sheets but we're only going to use 1

 But they also have low fat graham crackers so I would recommend using those but unfortunately

 So what you're going to do with your 1 cracker sheet is you can put it in a ziploc bag and

 mash it up or you can put it in a food processor and mash it up.

 Whatever you want but you want to make sure you make these little graham cracker crumbles.

 And then one thing that's really nice about this cream cheese is that it's very whipped

 So you're going to take 2 tablespoons of cream cheese and then you want to put your cream

 cheese in a little custard cup and it's optional you could add some vanilla if you want or

 So I'm going to start with the strawberry, the bigger the better because then you can

 So we are going to take our strawberry and then this little thing that's by OXO and it

 So I'm going to rip this off and then I'm going to put this in.

 And then it leaves a nice little hole and takes the gunk out of the strawberry for you.

 And then we are going to take our cream cheese and fill the strawberry with it.

 So first I just take a little knife to try to get the inside of the strawberry covered.

 You could put as little or as much cream cheese as you want on these.

 And then what you are going to do is take your graham cracker crumbs and dip your strawberry

 So you end up having a really yummy bite size strawberry cheesecake treat.

 So today is the day that I'm finally kicking off weight loss Wednesday or weigh in Wednesday

 And so I wanted to show you guys the app that I am going to be using.

 This one we're going to put on the rotisserie for the gas grill.

 but it's a little bit different setup than what we did with the one for the keg.

 I'm going to tuck the legs back into the piece of skin here to retain the legs.

 Now this is going to be a bit of a mess because I have butter all over the bird.

 at least trust the wings before you get everything covered in goo.

 You want to unspool your string when your hands are still reasonably clean

 I'm going to come through the point of the wing back under the turkey.

 Okay, let's briefly go through what we have to work with on the rotisserie.

 Some models have four forks so you can set up multiple items on the rotisserie.

 so you don't have to mess around with a pair of pliers trying to tighten them

 This is going to be very important later once we put the rotisserie on the grill.

 That can be moved, can be adjusted, and then the handle is tightened down.

 So let's get the turkey set up on the rotisserie, then we can go to the grill.

 I'm going to feed the spit rod through the cavity of the turkey,

 and in the process I'll end up retaining the drumsticks in place.

 So you can see the forks on the rotisserie are actually retaining the legs in place.

 You just have to pierce the bird with this thing, and we're away to the races.

 It's going to keep everything nice and clean, and now we'll go to the grill.

 It's going to keep my barbecue nice and clean while it's cooking.

 and you can see there's just a hint of smoke coming out of there.

 The other thing that's neat about this, and I'm not going to touch it

 because it's going to be really hot, but that tab actually slides back and forth,

 What it does is it actually holds the rotisserie engaged in the rotisserie motor,

 so what I'm going to do is set the counterweight opposite to that heavy side,

 This week in the galley we're on my boat down here in Long Beach California and standing next to me is chef Keith Allman.

 I met Keith on one of our charters and he came up to me and introduced himself as a chef and I said why don't we do a segment together.

 Well today I have planned using the Dan Hernandez fish batter, Japanese tempura style vegetables and rockfish.

 The difference between the tempura batter or the Dan Hernandez fish batter and the instructions that are on the bag and what we're going to do today is that we're going to mix it with soda water instead of beer or water.

 So we have one and a half cups or one bag of the Dan Hernandez fish batter and instead of water or beer we're going to add one and a half cups of soda water.

 Add that to the mixture and then to keep it clumpy we're going to use chopsticks to mix it.

 We're going to put in a couple pieces of asparagus, some Japanese eggplant, some onion and notice I put a toothpick in here to hold the onion all together.

 Notice how I cut the eggplant and I hold it open like that before I put it in.

 When you're dropping ingredients into oil like this you always want to drop away from you.

 Wait until you see how it comes out and I'm going to show you a trick that the Japanese use for their tempura too.

 Now pick up the bowl and drizzle onto your vegetables some of the batter and it's going to add a little crunchiness and some fingers of crunch that kind of come off the vegetable.

 Serve this with traditional tempura sauce or your favorite aioli.

 Remember half the proceeds from this go to help fund my youth foundation.

 We're going to skip back on the water and show you more exciting action right here on Sportfishing.

 We're having a great gathering and I can't wait to share all the ideas I'm using to

 Side salads are of course a must when you're having a little bit of a get-together.

 For July 4th, once again I like to keep it with the freshest flavors of the summer.

 Fresh from the garden, I'm doing a wonderful kale salad with chopped pear and almonds and

 And then I'm also going to do a little bit of a new spin on a caprese salad and make

 For the kale, I'm using fresh from the garden what I have on hand.

 Choose whatever kale you like from your farmer's market or your local store.

 Olive oil, lemon juice, salt and pepper, of course minced garlic.

 You can either grate your garlic or peel it and put it through a mincer or masher.

 I just like to make sure it's really fine so you really get the garlic flavor.

 When you're ready to put your kale salad together, wash and dry of course all of your kale leaves

 The drier any type of green is when you're using it in a salad, the better a vinaigrette

 I like to coarsely chop my kale just so it's in smaller pieces.

 Kale can sometimes be in really big pieces or have a lot of ribs on it depending on what

 Take the big stems off and ribs off and just chop it coarsely and put it in a bowl.

 And just for a finishing garnish, add some fresh parmesan cheese.

 Sometimes I grate it on top and sometimes I cut it in wedges or in curls.

 If you don't like whole wheat because it can be a little bit different texture than

 Once you cook the pasta, make sure to drain it really well and place it in the fridge

 You can put the pasta salad together warm, but it's best served cold.

 While the pasta is chilling, I always get ready all of my extras for the salad.

 And of course add your fresh mozzarella cheese that you've sliced.

 Olive oil, white balsamic vinegar, just so the color doesn't get diluted throughout the

 Some Dijon mustard, which I think spices up any great vinaigrette.

 And of course a little bit of sugar, just to add that little bit of sweetness.

 And if you don't have it on hand, you can of course leave it out, but it just adds a

 This too you can mix up a few days before, keep in the jar, and just have it ready to

 After you throw the pasta and the tomatoes and the cheese together, top it with your

 This pasta salad can of course be made a couple hours in advance, and really would probably

 To finish this salad, top with fresh basil leaves that you either tear or cut up.

 But for an extra side, I'm of course going to have something that needs no work or help

 I always choose seedless so people don't have to worry about spitting out the seeds.

 These salads are so delicious, and people are always amazed at how good they are.

 I think these will become instant classics on your summer menus.

 Hi everybody, I'm Sruthi and you're watching SruthisKitchen.com.

 First we are going to make the outer layer which is going to be similar to that of the

 Traditionally this recipe uses some chana dal and some jaggery in there.

 So let's quickly run through the ingredients and see what all we need for making this Kobbari

 Half cup of sweetened condensed milk or you can add it according to your taste.

 For the outer layer of Kobbari booralu, I've already soaked rice and the dal together.

 And after grinding the batter, make sure that you rest it on the counter in a warm place

 You don't want it to be very well fermented like you do for the dosa batter or the idli

 I additionally used about quarter teaspoon of salt or just enough salt to make it nice

 You don't want it to be very salty because as you know you're making some dessert out

 So into the non-stick pan I'm just going to add about 2 tablespoons of ghee.

 We want to make them nice and toasty and infuse the ghee flavor to the nuts.

 And we're going to fry it with the ghee and the condensed milk for about 2 minutes or

 I have fried it for 2 minutes and the mixture has come together nice and well.

 I added in the cardamom powder for nice flavor and the stuffing is ready.

 I will rest it on the counter for a while until the mixture cools down completely.

 And then later we are going to make some dumplings, dip them into the batter and then deep fry

 So now that the mixture has cooled down completely, I'm going to shape them into round balls.

 So now that I have my stuffing ready, if you want you can even have them as laddus.

 They just taste amazing as such instead of dipping them into batter as well.

 I'm just going to dip these dumplings into the batter and then deep fry them.

 So carefully dip it into the batter, shake off the excess and then carefully drop into

 They are nice and golden, I'm just going to take them off the pan and I'm going to repeat

 I hope you enjoyed watching today's recipe and give this one a try.

 Thank you so much guys for watching my recipes and also make sure that you get subscribed

 Do follow us on social media like Facebook, Twitter and Gplus for the regular updates

 make and then they almost look like they're in the same area but this one I

 the base of it so it only gets a sail about half the size of that one.

 Actually since that sail is leaning this way let's just put it on that side.

I might could come in and add just a little to see when I start to do this.

I am just going to tap the very tip of this into the bottom of the

 can put a little bit of a... some kind of... where it goes inside.

 this one is I'm going to come across it with some pure burnt sienna.

 there because it's so small and the paint is so thick that you go in there twice, it'll ruin them.

 Today, we are gonna be baking a retro cake, we're gonna be baking a cake

 based on the PC game, it's very old, it's called Chips Challenge.

 I have played Chips Challenge, it's, uh, you have to get the keys, I think it came

 It's so cute, it was one of my favorite games when I was little, I like this game.

 Everybody, I mean, not everybody played that, but if you do play it, it's a blast from the

 So here's some of the tools that we're gonna be using today to make the Chips

 Challenge cake, right here we have the diamond pickaxe, the mustachio for

 a reason, because, uh, you know that thing, and the mini pizza cutter.

 And you're gonna use a big cutting knife, a cake leveler and a rolling pin.

 You've got this, you can do a little sawing, you can just kind of, there you go.

 After you've cut out the shape into the cake, we are now going to level the cake

 with this, and we're gonna put the cake on top of this fancy cake tray, which

 Right, OK, so you're gonna pick up this cake and put it on here, can I trust you

 OK, so we're gonna level the cake with this, we've picked, I don't know how much

 OK, so we're just gonna put this down here like this, and then, JonTron's

 Well this is kind of a ghetto cake leveler, OK, this is like $3 and it's…

 Gonna take a little frosting, you take a little frosting with your mustachula.

 The fondant is going to stick to this frosting, so this is gonna act like the glue.

 We just finished frosting and we are gonna put this in the fridge to cool for about 10 minutes.

 We have now rolled out the dark grey fondant and we're gonna make the little squares,

 And we're actually gonna spray paint them with edible spray paint.

 So we just finished cutting out all of our shapes, and we are gonna put them on the cake

 I don't know, Chip's Challenge Cake was seriously the ugliest cake I've ever made,

 But it was so much fun, and, you know, it turned out way better than we thought it was,

 If you have any other suggestions for any other Nerdy Nummies, please let me know and

 Yes, I'm gonna put his link down below, so if you want to check out JonTron, go check

 No it's, don't you mislead them because they're going to go and find a weird yelling

 I can't, I can't, I can't even leave, usually I will leave a shot, just out of comedic

 You have to wave, the only way to leave the spot is to wave to the camera!

 Zoe I loved your sushi rolls I thought they were fantastic the almond and the carrot I

 was really really surprised by how good it was this of course is like a regular sushi roll now

 what I've got over there is a chicken schnitzel I love chicken schnitzel nori rolls can you cut

 some long thin strips for me now the other thing I've got some rice here now this is Japanese sushi

 rice what I did is two cups of rice to three cups of water bring it up to the boil turn it down to a

 simmer cover it with a lid or some foil then I let it simmer for about 20 minutes now this is

 the most important part seasoning it up now if you've got one of these convenient sushi packs

 all you can do is pull out some of this powdered sushi seasoning which I use quite often I think

 it's quite great all you do is sprinkle it on top of the rice now these packs will make up about six

 six rolls what's in that seasoning this is vinegar mirin it's all dehydrated but the idea is so you

 get lots of flavor into the rice I've got some sushi seasoning as well I like to put that in as

 well just sprinkle it on top and something else that I like to do is some ginger some pickled

 ginger I put that on top gives it a lovely flavor now just use your knife there just cut the top off

 that one there the liquid from the pickled ginger is also great I put some of that on interesting

 everyone's got their own secret way of doing it now what I want you to do Zoe it's just to massage

 it around like this to mix it up and they're also in this box which is quite convenient you also get

 a sushi mat and you get instructions and you get the nori sheets pull this out now what I'll do is

 I'll take off one of these sheets here shiny side down got a little bit of water there what I do is

 dip it in there and you can see the rice is nice and soft and I just pack it down oh it's really

 really soft but that's okay you're gonna pack it down like that and I make sure I pack a lot of

 rice because I want a nice big roll a couple of pieces of chicken that go along there a bit of

 the bread crumbs as well or the other panko crumbs I've got some mayonnaise some Kewpie

 mayonnaise because it ate a California roll and it's got plenty of mayonnaise in it.

That's how I like to eat I love these quite filling quite tasty a little bit of that along there a little bit of avocado along there a spring onion and some

I like the coriander touch nice and fresh and clean flavors and the cucumber cucumber as well can you grab some of that wasabi and a nice big

 squeeze of wasabi all the way along there and then I dip my finger back into the water there that's what I want nice and hot there we go all the way across there like that and then what I do is just pack it all in look at that pack it all in so it's nice and firm all the way around and this is a little trick with your thumb you've just got to push it around so it comes off the other side and stays nice and firm so make sure you tuck it in like that this is the thing about sushi if you're making it yourself it just

It's so lovely having fresh sushi because obviously being pregnant I've got to be really careful I don't go anywhere near the sushi trains because you just don't know how long it's been sitting there so although this is indulgent I am very excited to try it.

And then I've got this thing ready to go over here we made a bit of a mess there'll be rice all over it but don't worry I'll just stack these along here like this look at that up against there wasabi in there soy sauce into here there we go twist the top off there a little bit of mayo on top of that and then I've got a little bit of a bit of a nice little

 bit of soy sauce on the side there ready to go looks great quick and easy to do dip a bit in there tell me what you think of that.

 I love wasabi but wow that's got a serious kick in it very indulgent very yummy sort of the naughty

 Today what I'm going to do, I'm going to do a little bit of veal piccata.

 I'm going to do that with a little pasta, olive oil and fresh herbs.

 You've got to go to your butcher, go to any of your local grocery stores and get a scallopini

 What goes in the veal piccata is tomatoes, peppers, lemon juice, parsley.

 Once that's nice and golden brown, right away you're going to add some shallots, a pinch of garlic,

 We're going to add a few capers, a nice tomato, fresh parsley, and tomato sauce.

 So really what you're doing is essentially you're making a pan bergland.

 I'm going to take a little bit of, what I have here is a little herb oil.

 I'm going to take a little bit of fresh chopped garlic, put that right in there.

 Garnish with a little bit of fresh grated Parmesan Reggiano cheese.

 If you don't want to try it at home, come on in to Oak Steakhouse.

 Now a little variation of this to give it sort of that boogie woogie blues sound would

 be to rotate between the E5 and then the E and the B and then the E and the C sharp.

 I should also mention that what I'm playing now as far as a blues style is called the

 So along with the brush stroke technique you get this shuffle groove going with the brush

 So you're muting the strings but you're hitting these E5's with the 6's right so the E and

 So now I want to talk a little bit about comping in the blues style.

 You could take any pattern of any of those different licks that we talked about.

 Like for instance even this one here that we did in say in the key of G.

 So say you were going to go to the 4th chord of the G. It would be here the C so back to

 Hey everybody, just going to do a quick update on how to repair the fuel pump.

 A couple guys in the tractor forum want to know how to do this.

 First what you do is you take your air cleaner assembly completely off.

 So what you want to do is you want to take your air cleaner off and then when you get

 your air cleaner off you just want to try to open these two screws here.

 Give them a couple turns on each one just enough so that you can get the pump open.

 Then what you want to do is you just want to separate all the gaskets like so.

 Then after you soak them down you want to let it sit for a minute.

 Make sure you have fuel in your tank because I've known a couple people that...

 But I've seen a couple people not put gas in their tank trying to get their fuel pumps

 After it sits for a minute you're just going to tighten it down.

 This isn't connected to anything so normally you would have a fuel line on your bottom

 Then after you seal up your gaskets with the 3-in-1 30 weight, anything you got, if you

 want to take the pump completely apart and soak the gaskets overnight that's a good idea

 While you're turning it over put your palm of your hand, this circle part right here,

 This will create vacuum within the engine causing the fuel from the tank to be sucked

 After you're done doing that you're going to do that for 4 or 5 seconds until you feel

Now to make the stuffing, take a bowl, add 1 cup of grated coconut,

 pinch or half tsp of salt and some water and mix it well to make it a dough.

Add water in such a consistency that you will make dough like this.

 It is in the quantity the way we used to make dough for chapati.

Take some portion of dough, make it round, squeeze it with your fingers like this.

I will let the water get heated for some time and then I will be keeping the stuff for steaming.

 I hope you try it at home and do tell me your comments and suggestions.

 Hello I just want to show you how to recreate a standing double crochet and

 standing treble to replace your turning chains at beginning of the rows and

 rounds so your project will look nicer a lot nicer I have seen many tutorials

 before and some of them are more complicated than other ones and I picked

 some few ideas so I just gonna create my own thing and I love it I like it and

 it's pretty nice I hope it helps you a lot and here you just have to start by

 lifting okay I just have sorry gotta go into details I got 15 chains and I want

 to recreate 14 double crochets or if you want to I mean 14 trebles but you

 always need an extra chain at the beginning of your work so we're just

 gonna lift a loop really nice hold this top very very tight you need to hold it

 don't let it go for anything till the end okay so just twist once and go to

 the next chain space don't go into the first because obviously it's not gonna

 work so go through two and if you want to make this easier for you you can use

 a stitch marker and pull through the last two loops so you got your first

 there I'm just gonna do the rest of them so you can get to see how it looks

 when it's finished the row and you can compare with the other ones so I'm just

 okay I'm done here with my row and I just want to show you how it looks I did

 the top a little bigger you can do a little also because to match the other

 sizes I just did a little bigger so you can get to see how it looks I mean the

 top is exactly as the other ones and also just to make sure I can show you

 where to join that's the spot you should join so that's why I did a bigger but

 you can always manage to do this loop smaller look more even with the other

 ones so to recreate in the next one you don't need to chain you don't need to

 chain just turn your work lift a long loop also in twist once or yarn over go

 in bring one loop and then pull through to pull through two I don't need it

 anymore stitch markers because I know how identify them so I'm pretty good at

 it but if you do need it so go ahead so here I'm gonna do a couple more so you

 can get to see it again see now this top is smaller now it's about the same so

 you can see it just looks even there's no gap there is no I mean it's really

 nice now if you want to recreate the treble is same thing you just finish

 your work weird I mean the first rows or whatever and then turn your work get up

 your nice loop long about the size of a treble you just calculate always hold

 this top sorry hold this top very tight and twist it twice or yarn over twice go

 into the stitch that you need to sorry I got a little miss three time there so

 pull up a loop then pull through to pull through two and pull through the last

 two now yarn over twice like you would and go to the next stitch and there you

 have it you have another treble so you can get to see and compare the sizes is

 about the same size everything is nice and perfect now if you're working in

 rounds allow me to just keep going with the double crochet side so I just show

 you how to do the treble is exactly the same process just one more twist you

 know that's it and let me just go and keep showing you with the double crochet

 just gonna go in in the rest of them again let me finish my role here and

 here now let's pretend that we joined into a ring to create a you know round

 so you can work your hats or whatever project are you up to now we just gonna

 join at the very top as I told you I can just identify it and join the top

 that's why you need to stitch marker if you still need to work on that and same

 thing just go in the same loop you just joined and keep going around and same

 thing you know just join and it's gonna be a sorry is gonna be really nice and

 very neat and I mean it's gonna be perfect to me it is sorry and to me it

 is way nicer than just chain 3 or chain whatever you chain I don't know it just

 looks way cleaner I wish I just don't have any finished project I wish I had a

 finished project to show you the back of it right now but it does look nice

 and the seam is very beautiful you can barely I mean you can barely say where

 it starts where it ends the row and or the rounds of your work when you're

 working around you can barely notice where it is the first and last stitch the

 joining I mean it's obvious to see always sometimes a join but it's gonna

 be always nicer and cleaner than usually is so thank you for watching

 So just take it open, flip it in, then wrap it around yourself as if it were a towel.

 Then you're going to want to find a comfort zone for you on where to button your button

 For me it was the fourth button down and that created that sweetheart neckline that I liked.

 So go ahead and adjust the bust area to how you want it to look.

 So when you find your desired bust that you'd like, go ahead and take both sleeves, bring

 Go ahead and tie your knot and just tie it to the point where you're comfortable.

 Then I'm going to come in closer just to show you that you want to take both sleeves and

 What I do is tuck the, oh what would you call it, I just tuck the edges in just to create

 It just looks kind of funny because I'm wearing that shirt underneath.

 You could wear this with a skirt or you could pair it with some leggings and some heels.

 Looks like I got all the major scratches and scrapes out of it.

 Okay, what we're going to do now is go ahead and put it on the wheel here.

 Basically what I do is run a little bit of a cerium and water mixture on it there.

 Every once in a while you want to get a little bit of a spray on there.

 Every once in a while you just want to wet her down a little bit more with a little cerium and water there.

 I'll clean this up and we'll take a look at it and see how it turned out.

 I was looking at my time here so I'm going to not go through the whole process of completely polishing that up.

 But here's a piece that I had done previously to make this video one of my practice pieces.

 You may be able to see right down in that area there I need some more polishing in that area.

 Now this is the plate glass, float glass, whatever you want to call it.

 Now I have some stuff that I got here from Jess and it's that Starfire glass.

 So you can see the difference between the plate and the Starfire.

 So like in the video that I had done where the light was shining up on my ceiling with the LEDs,

 that the clarity of this glass of the Starfire allows that to go penetrate all the way through.

 Today on this episode we have Chef Mary Gail back with us again.

 This came from one of our friends on Facebook, her name is G. Alba.

 So she's just going to saute these for about 2 minutes just to build her fragrance.

 What she's doing here is sauteing the pork just until it's light brown.

 Now I'll cover it and let it simmer on low heat for about 20 minutes or until the pork is tender.

 When the pork is simmering, I'm going to fry the tofu in hot oil until it's golden brown.

 This is commonly served for lunch or dinner or as a beer match.

 I tried the beans just as they were and I thought, oh my God, they were so salty.

 But you combine them with the tofu and the pork, they are incredibly delicious.

 Thanks for watching and remember to click to subscribe and like our videos.

 Hi guys, it's Courtney and today I'm going to be showing you three different hairstyles

 A lot of times I feel like if I let my hair air dry it kind of gets super frizzy.

 So any hairstyle that is like up out of your face is going to be perfect.

 So today I wanted to share with you three different looks and I hope you all enjoy.

 First off, it's really helpful to start off with an oil or some kind of silk serum.

 So I'm using Biosilk and you want to apply it to both sides of your hands.

 On to the first hairstyle, we're going to split our hair and just braid two pigtails.

 You want to do this very loosely and then just kind of pull apart the braids just like

 So just do it to both sides and then secure it with a small elastic.

 So you can see I'm tucking that side and if any hair sticks out over there you can always

 And then you want to cross the rubber band under and then just pin it so that way it

 If you have any layers sticking out, just feel free to go ahead and bobby pin it into

 Now with milkmaid braids, they're really simple but you do get this split in the back of your

 So later on in like a week or so I'll be showing you how to crown braid so you don't get that.

 We're going to section off this top section and just cross two bobby pins in the back

 I also like to mist just a bit of hairspray to kind of smooth away any flyaways.

 The tighter you twist, you'll see the hair will start to fold into itself and give you

 So then you want to tuck the very ends under that design and just kind of bobby pin it

 I only need like one bobby pin per twist so you just have to position it right.

 So as you can see I'm covering those original bobby pins for the poof and then I'm just

 You could start with the ponytail in the back if you want it more formed but then I'm just

 I used to wear this to work all the time and I love it so much.

 Now the key to doing a good Dutch braid when your hair is wet is just to really make sure

 that front section is smoothed out and then the rest should be pretty easy sailing from

 So I'm just going to loosely Dutch braid this to the back of my hair.

 And if you don't know how to Dutch braid, you're basically adding hair to the middle

 but from underneath instead of adding it to the top if that makes sense.

 So a Dutch braid as opposed to a French braid is going to really look like the braid is

 sitting on top of your head which I think is really cool and perfect for this look.

 And then once you braid it all the way down, don't secure it with the hair tie yet.

 Start pulling apart the edges of the braid and it's going to make it look super voluminous

 So you could just braid it all the way down and leave it like this which I think is cute

 but one of my favorite things to do is just wrap the ends up like so and then there's

 going to be a little pocket under your braid and just split your hair underneath and it'll

 really just kind of fit into that pocket and then just bobby pin it in place.

 And then it's like a really cute simple updo so I think this is really cool.

 Those were the three looks and I want you all to let me know which one was your favorite.

 If you try any of these out, feel free to like Instagram me or tweet me.

 I love seeing them and I love reposting them so feel free to send them over to me.

 Okay, to make our enchiladas, we're going to take some of the apple pie filling,

 We're going to sprinkle just a little cinnamon on each one of these.

 and then we're going to reduce the heat and simmer it for three minutes,

 All right, guys, after our sauce is cooked, we're simmered for three minutes,

 This is a short tutorial on how to get the most out of your Miracle Noodles so they taste

 Step number one is to open the bag using scissors and put it in a colander or strainer to rinse

 You'll notice that the water that the noodles are packed in has a slight aroma.

 But the process of washing the noodles and getting rid of the liquid that the noodles

 One is it changes the texture of the noodle slightly so you have a better texture to the

 noodle and it further washes the noodle from the water that it's packed in.

 In order to get the texture of the noodles exactly the way you want and to have the sauce

 stick to your noodles exactly like regular pasta, it's very important to dry the Miracle

 The reason is because if the noodle is still wet, the sauce doesn't stick to the noodle

 You can do this by putting the noodles onto a paper towel and patting it dry.

 Option number two is to dry roast the noodles over a low flame.

 You can put it just on the stove top and put the noodles into a pan without any oil, just

 Also it cooks the noodle slightly so that it gives it more of a pasta texture.

 So when you're dry roasting the noodle, you'll want to wait for a little bit until it's completely

 One of the ways you know that it's dry is you'll actually get a slightly squeaking sound

 This is basically the water kind of boiling off underneath the noodle.

 Once you see that the noodles are dry, then you can add your sauce or add it to a soup.

 If you're adding a sauce, we recommend that you just pour the sauce right into the pan

 here and stir it up and you're ready to go to the next step, which is to enjoy pasta

 This tutorial hopefully showed you how easy it is to prepare Miracle Noodles.

 Thank you so much for trying this out and we really look forward to getting to know you.

 You just take two of these little sink pieces, whatever you call them, and two of these studs.

 You just simply on the end of these, you just clip them on to the magnum and same with the

 If you can't find those, you just use another two of these ones right here.

 Take one of these little clips, here I'll just show you, and build it like that.

 Then take at the end, put the green little stud, then the black stud, and there.

 Now you'll take your rod or the base of it and add it on the back there.

 These two pieces add on as a little stand for the sniper and the silencer.

 So to start off, take the megaphone and this flat 2x1 piece, add it on like that.

 This piece, the other cylinder, at the bottom so it looks like that.

 Then you take these last two gray pieces, add one like on there, on the top.

 First you'll need to take your little camera piece and add that on like that.

 Then after you add that on, take this little piece right there and then your black stud,

 Then there should be a little hole back there if you have the right piece.

 You just clip it on to the end of the thing and there's your Spartan Laser.

 Hi YouTube, today we're going to talk about how to wire a 220 volt welder.

 so I usually weld big stuff with it, but that's fine because it's what I need.

 I got this off the internet for 70 bucks including shipping, but it had a European

 This is a four strand solid copper wire and that right there, you probably can't see it,

 but that is an input for a vacuum cleaner blower, for a shop vac blower, because

 This is the kind of wire that you use to wire a residential area.

What I like about this is, even though it's a little expensive, mine was

 for 240 volts before you start having to worry about fire danger or anything like that.

 It's about 20 feet from my dryer plug to the breaker box and this is only 24 feet.

 So go down to Lowe's and get yourself something like this right here.

 about a year now and this thing has given me no problems whatsoever.

 Everything works as it should and this plug is very easy to unplug without getting shocked.

 So this is about $10 and I'm going to forewarn you it's going to be a pain in the ass to wire

 because this was meant for stranded twisted copper wire but we're going to put solid wire in it

So okay right here these two prongs that I'm touching are both hot wires.

 doesn't matter how you you know which hot wire whether it's red or I think it's red and black.

 It doesn't really matter which wire you connect to which prong because it's

 It doesn't really technically neutral is to carry you know excess currents off or whatever

 to balance current and ground is something you connect to the case for safety reasons.

 You actually in your welder will probably not use all four wires so you're going to have a wire

 in there that's just capped in your welder and you can just leave it capped.

 ground to the case because in my opinion I don't think anything with a metal case especially a

 welder because you're you're going to get shocked at some point.

 but uh you know I don't think that it can be used for anything.

I don't think that a case a metal case should be ungrounded so I chose to connect the

So this kind of wire right here when I store this kind of wire this is really

This is not a the twisted pair you can wrap up like an extension cord.

 excuse me excuse my shaking here I just toss it to one side this is how I store my welder.

 I don't want people walking on the solid copper wire and I don't want to I don't want to ball it

 up you know like this because otherwise the solid copper is going to break in there and that's

Your dryer plug may have three prongs instead of four in which case

 these two prongs that I'm touching are going to be hot and the other one's going to be neutral

 so that should be a pretty easy wiring but you're you're not going to use all four prongs on this

All four wires in when it goes into your welder are not going to be used I mean you can

 twist the ground and the neutral together but I prefer to just have the ground so uh

Oh and one more thing when you buy your welder it's going to have a funky plug on

 it a uh you know a 50 amp welder plug if it's 240 volt and you want to replace it with something

 like this and I prefer long copper wire because it's usually you know the solid stuff I prefer

 that because it's usually at least 20 feet from the dryer to the garage so you know you want to

 have enough enough wire I mean because you're not going to be welding in the laundry room hopefully

 so uh this wire will actually go all the way across the garage so uh that about does it and happy welding

January is a perfect time of year to tuck into a hearty bowl of hot soup.

 Our Hungry Hound is going to do just that, sampling a different bowl of soup from a different country every week.

 But there are some traditional bowls of comfort, such as pozole and menudo.

 But one local restaurateur has created a loyal following on the southwest side,

 offering his customers a hearty bowl of soup that was created by accident.

 Some of the best dishes are a result of experiments, or even mistakes.

 At Los Gallos, which has three locations in Chicago, including this one in Brighton Park on the southwest side,

 their delicious mistake is called carne en su jugo, literally beef in juice,

 It is now by far the most popular dish at all three of his restaurants.

 Then finely chopped skirt steak, the same stuff they use for tacos,

 Once all the protein is in the bowl, it's time to add seasoning and texture.

 A handful of cilantro and white onion is thrown on top, plus some sliced radishes.

 Fresh avocado slices are placed on top, giving the dish both color and texture.

 Then the main event, a rich, hearty beef broth is ladled over the top.

 While the soup is being assembled, a few corn tortillas are heated up on the grill.

 They arrive alongside, as does some fresh lime, which gives the soup a bright note of citrus.

 It has to be one of the most delicious mistakes ever to grace a taqueria's menu.

You know what, this is real good for hangover, better than menudo.

 And unlike menudo and pozole, which are typically offered only on the weekends,

 the carne en su jugo is available every day at all three Los Gallos locations.

 Click on resources on the left margin and you're going to see the Hungry Hound tab.

 And I brought you some carne en su jugo, which you guys just love, obviously.

 I love the radish and the avocado give it a nice contrast and texture, some flavor.

 And then over here, you've got to have a little tortillas, some corn tortillas, of course, not flour, corn tortillas.

 And some fresh lime to squeeze into it and some hot peppers if you really want to make it a little spicy.

 Now, we're going to continue our little soup sojourn this evening.

 We're going to dive into three distinctive bowls from around the globe, including one of America's favorites.

 Tonight at 10, we're going to go to Southeast Asia, we're going to go to Latin America, and we're going to go to the U.S.

 So there is something that Linda and I were just talking about.

 There is something also from Bridgeport you're going to really love.

 So, yeah, every Friday at 11, we're going to do a different country, different soup.

 attach the front extension for the Glendale 5 and the front awning for the Illinois 6.

 What we're going to show you is the front awning for the Illinois 6, but what we talk

 is just to make sure that you get rid of any of the wind stabilizers or guy lines that

 Once the fly sheet is in place we're going to take the poles out and assemble them.

 Assembling the poles is made really easy because each one has been pre-attached from one side

 Once the poles are assembled we're going to take the curved steel roof pole, put that

 through the pole sleeve and we'll attach the side legs onto that.

 Once the pole is in place what we're going to do is just attach it to the fly sheet using

 with the fixed strap and that should be a lot easier to get the other side in.

 Once that's done we're just going to clip the fly sheet onto the pole as well.

 Now what we're going to do is just lean the steel pole against the front of the tent.

 We're then going to take the guy lines that are attached to the roof panel on here and

 we're going to take it straight across the back and peg that into place.

 Now what we're going to do is take the Duratec fiberglass pole and we put that through the

 sleeve and attach it into place and then we're going to peg the awning into position.

 Once that's done we're going to take the pole and we're going to attach it to the pole

 So the next thing to do before we attach our wind stabilizers and peg out all of the guy

 lines at the front, we're just going to go back to where we took the guy lines out at

 the back and just tension them just to create a good secure fit into the front of the tent.

 once the awning has been set up on the outside all we have to do is just open the door and

 What's going on guys, today's build we are going to make a Batarang.

 I put it on illustrator and I retraced the line and I scaled it up to size.

 Right now I'm doing a rough cut and gluing it onto some polystyrene styrofoam.

 You want to make sure you get enough glue on there so it doesn't move around on you.

 But at the same time you don't want to put too much glue because you're going to eventually

 You want to make sure you cut off all the excess material but not cutting on the line

 You're going to take your X-Acto knife, sharpen it up if you have a sharpener.

 Just barely cutting the paper and not really digging into the styrofoam.

 Your hot wire foam cutter will glide between the line as you can see right here.

 It's not burning the paper because you're not leaving it there long enough for it to burn.

 If you move it nice and smoothly and constantly moving you won't over burn the styrofoam when you're doing it.

 I put some hash marks there so I can distinguish which circle piece belongs to which wing.

 And now I'm going to take the razor blade and cut the beveled part of the batwing.

 And then I'm going to take some masking tape and tape halfway down the sides so I can cut

 It takes a little bit of practice but it's not very hard to master.

 And the trick is you want to keep it constantly moving because if you stop for a second the

 As you can see some spots that may have stopped detecting but you can easily sand that down.

 Now you can take more masking tape and tape off the other side.

 Now if you guys don't have a foam cutter I can probably make a video on how to make your

 Then you want to take a sanding block and smoothen out the edges just a little bit.

 And you can take the two circle pieces and we're going to screw right down the middle

 Now you want to round off all your edges and then hot glue the circle pieces back on.

 But you want to make sure you glue it half way down just like that.

 Because eventually it's going to have to go back together looking like this.

 I'm beveling off the circle edges just so it gives it that nice little beveled look.

 I'm using PVA glue mixed with a little bit of water to make a paper mache paste out of this.

 I'm using a brown paper sack cut into small pieces and I'm applying it one piece at a time.

 You can probably shoot, you can probably do large pieces at a time.

 And you want to make sure you cover the entire foam batarang thing.

 Once you have the whole thing covered, go over it one more time with some wood glue.

 Now be careful because this is actually metal and it can cut you.

 You don't have to worry about masking off the aluminum because you can wipe it off easily.

 I'm going to take some hot glue and shoot just a little bit into the hole so that it will hold this bolt in place.

 But you want to make sure you move it around that way you don't actually glue both pieces together.

If you guys learned something have fun making your own Batarang.

 I'm also going to be working on the Ark Knight and I may even do a hybrid.

 If you've already beat the game then you may know what I'm talking about.

 They've reached out to me on Facebook and if you want a shoutout go ahead and hit me up on Facebook.

 I frequently update on Instagram so make sure you guys swing by my Instagram page and follow me.

 Today I'm going to show you, now don't laugh, Rice Krispie Squares and how to make them.

 And the reason I'm doing this, I have a couple of points I want to make.

 First of all, believe it or not, I have actually had some bad Rice Krispie Squares.

 Whether it's at a bake sale or a school function, sometimes they're kind of dry and flavorless

 So the point I want to make is that even something as simple as Rice Krispie Squares can be even

 better if you use really good quality ingredients, especially with something like this where

 And also I'm going to show you how to make them just a little bit differently and a little

 And I know they actually even sell pre-made Rice Krispie Squares and I think they're kind

 of expensive and I have tasted them and they're kind of chemically tasting.

 So the first thing you're going to do is take half a stick of butter, that's a quarter of

 And we're just going to microwave that for about a minute, minute and a half until the

 So I just put that in with the butter and stir it up and then microwave it for another

 Okay, so that was a minute and a half and I stirred it once and the marshmallows are

 And I use this so much in my recipes that it's really worth the investment.

 And what I do is just add my first four cups, stir it and see how it looks.

 I like it pretty marshmallow-y because then it makes a nice intense flavour.

 Once you get that all mixed together, you can put it in your pan.

 Now I'm using a greased 9x13 pan, but if you want to make them nice and thick and have

 fewer, you can just use like a 10 inch square pan or a 9 inch square pan.

 If I do it in a long pan, we just end up eating two each anyway.

 So you can stop there and that's kind of your regular Rice Krispies square.

 But what I'm going to do is just show you another way to make them to add a little more nutrition.

 So I put them on a baking sheet in a 300 degree oven for 10 minutes just to toast them.

 And that just adds a little bit of iron and a little bit of fruit.

 And I'm going to spread this into our 9x13 pan and just let it cool.

 Great little snack when the kids get home from school or for lunch.

 It's a little bit sticky and messy, but it's fun to lick the spoon when you're done.

 I also like to really push them down into the pan so they stay nice and firm.

 Hello and Welcome, today I am going to show you how to make Saoji Chicken, that is a Nagpur

 this is 1 tbsp of jawar flour, 1 tsp of turmeric powder and little salt, 5-6 cloves of garlic

 and 1 inch ginger, a few spinach leaves, about 5-6, so here I have to roast this all

 and make a fine powder, 2 red chillies, 1 1 half tbsp of coriander powder, 1 tsp of

 cumin powder, 7-8 peppercorns, 1 small mace or javitri, 1 black cardamom, a pinch of nutmeg

 powder, 2 green cardamom, 1 inch cinnamon, 3 cloves, this is 1 half tsp of fennel seed

 and 2 bay leaves, first I am going to marinate this chicken by adding this turmeric powder,

 salt and oil, little oil and mix it well and leave it aside for about 15-20 minutes

 now first I am going to roast all this whole masala, this I will roast till I get a good

 smell, so it will take about less than 5 minutes, so this is roasted now, now I will

 add this jawar flour to it, roast this for 2-3 seconds and then remove it, I will off

 the stove now and this I am going to make it into a fine powder, now here I have fried

 about 2 onions, still brown in color, so to this I am going to add this whole ginger and

 garlic, saute for 2-3 minutes, now I am going to add this chillies and stir fry this for

 a minute, now I am going to blend this very finely, along with this powder masala, which

 I have made, I will add water to this and then blend this to a fine paste, now I will

 strain this masala, so here our sau masala is ready, now in the same pan, heat oil,

 add this masala, and this chicken pieces, and now cover this and cook on medium flame

 till the chicken becomes soft and tender, or you can add more red chilli if you want

 to make it more spicy, so here our saoji chicken is ready, garnish this with slanted

 Put all the ingredients except the cocoa powder into a large bowl.

 Now split the mixture in two and put one half into a clean bowl.

 Take an 8 or 9-inch baking tin which has been greased and the bottom has been lined with greaseproof paper

 Then when you've blobbed everything in, use a skewer or I'm using the handle of my spatula

Now we'll bake this at 180 degrees Celsius for about 40-45 minutes.

 Although there's no marbles in Chocolate Marble Cake, you can make a true Chocolate Marble Cake

 Do that a thousand times and you can build yourself a small house.

 Hey guys, so this look is an after school, no, an orange caramel nana inspired look.

 And after, orange caramel is a subgroup from after school and I guess nana has like, I

 guess nana has a monolid, I guess more like a, she has a crease, a very very small crease

 And I've gotten a couple requests to do a look from hers and this is perfect for those

 It's gonna be better quality in the tutorial, my camera got cut off at the end, so yeah

 my camera ran out of battery so I'm just gonna mention what I was gonna do at the end of

 On my cheeks I have on this, hi, you can see me, on my cheeks I have on this blush right

 And over that I have on Milani's glitzy glamour gloss and put it on the glitz.

 So yeah I hope you guys enjoy this look and I'll see you guys next time.

 I'm going to take this lighter shade and this is gonna go all over the lid.

 So eyeliner doesn't have to be perfect because I'm gonna go over it with eyeshadow.

 I'm going to take this darker shade and it's like a maroonish dark brown color.

 I'm gonna apply my false eyelashes right now, it makes it easier to do this look.

 I'm gonna take this color again and this is gonna go on my bottom outer half.

 I'm gonna take the gold color again and apply this on my inner half.

 I'm going to take a white eyeshadow and highlight my inner corner.

 I'm going to take a black pencil liner again and line my lower lash line.

 And before you put the tire on the machine you got to remove the weights on both sides

This has to go right in the middle and this has to fit on one of these holes right

So now to break the beat, the upper beat, you use this right here.

 to take, to break the bottom beat, this plate is used and you have to press this lever and

When you're putting it back on, we do not use this side, we use this side here.

And we try to push it in as far as possible we can do by ourselves with our

 as possible because the tire, this machine will easily rip the outside of the tire.

Now all you have to do is put some air in it and it's ready to go

 Hello, I'm John from Spin Doctor Services and I'm going to show you how to adjust your

 First thing you need to do is check to make sure your cables are in good working order.

 You want to make sure that they're low friction, there's no friction in the cables, they're

 So we can rule that out as the issue with your shifting problem.

 Once we've addressed the cables and we know that they're in good working order, we're

 In certain gear combinations, you can adjust the trim as you can see that it can eliminate

 The first thing I want to do when I'm adjusting the derailleur stops is shift the rear cog

 up to the biggest cog and the front ring we're going to shift to the smallest ring

 So we're going to shift to the biggest cog in the back and the smallest chain ring in

 the front and this allows the chain to be to the inside position as far as it will go

 And the reason for this is this tells us how far the derailleur needs to move to the inside.

 You'll never have to shift any farther to the inside because this is as far as the chain goes.

 Pedal a few times just to see what it sounds like and what the adjustment looks like.

 You want to visually check to make sure your derailleur has good alignment.

 You want to check to see that your height and your clearance above the chain ring is good.

 And once we know there's no issues there and we know we have good cable adjustment and

 low friction, if we're having any kind of derailleur rub at this point, we know it has

 something to do with the derailleur stops and that's controlled by the two top set screws.

 We have an inside adjustment and an outside adjustment on these two screws.

 Since we have it to the inside as far as it needs to be, we're going to start with the

 I want to look down and get a good visual of the position of the derailleur and where it lies against the chain.

 And as I turn the screw, I can see the derailleur move and I can also listen to it.

 As I hear I'm turning it, I'm moving the derailleur in farther this way until I can hear it rub.

 And I'm going to back it out until I don't hear the derailleur rub anymore and I'm going to stop.

 You don't want to adjust the screw too far or what happens is the derailleur can over shift

 Once the set screw is set for the inner derailleur stop and we're not getting any kind of derailleur rub,

 we're going to shift to the big ring and downshift just to get an indication of how it's shifting.

 Nice crisp shifting and I don't have any derailleur rub and it's no indication of it over shifting, we're done.

 Now once we have the inner set screw complete, we're going to move on to the outer set screw.

 We're going to downshift to the smallest cog in the rear and I'm going to upshift to the big ring in the front.

 This is as far as the chain will ever need to go to the outside.

 Check your derailleur alignment, check your clearance at the top to make sure it's all within spec.

 And as you're pedaling you can get an indication of where the set screw needs to go based on a little bit of gap here.

 Okay, I'm going to turn the set screw in until I get a bit of derailleur rub and as you can hear,

 the outer edge of the derailleur cage is rubbing on the chain as it pedals.

 This is an indication the derailleur is now not shifting far enough out because the derailleur set screw will not allow it to.

 So what I want to do is back it off a little bit until I don't hear it.

 You don't need to go much until we don't hear any more rubbing.

 We have a bit of rub here but with the integrated shifters you can give it a click when you're cross-chained

 So now we still have it in the small cog, small ring in the front, cross-chained.

 Nice and smooth and crisp and we know that it's not rubbing and it's not set too far where it's going to over-shift and drop.

 Now when you're adjusting the set screws, keep in mind if you turn it counterclockwise, this backs the screw out

 and for the inside adjustment that will allow the derailleur to move in.

 On the outer set screw, if you turn it counterclockwise, that backs the screw out

 but allows the derailleur to go the other direction to the outer ring.

 So clockwise on both of them shortens the range that the derailleur can travel.

 Counterclockwise backs the screws out and increases the range the derailleur can travel.

 If you have any questions, contact Spin Doctor Services or your local performance bike shop.

 It's basically soybeans that have been fermented and then dried into a block.

 Okay, now what we're going to have to do is we're going to have to make a salt brine solution.

 Now I'm going to test this, see if I have enough salt solution.

 Now this one kind of broke up a little bit when it was being shipped to me.

 What I'm going to do now is I'm going to take some of this charcoal.

 It's going to float on top and it will act kind of like a filter or something.

 Now what I'm going to do now is I'm just going to get it glowing hot on each side.

 Depending upon the weather and everything else, this needs about 45 days.

 And she's also saying that in the fall, wintertime, it takes about 45 days.

 Wherever I cut across, I just took an X-Acto knife afterwards and made a little diamond

 to remove a little of the covering, a little of the wood too maybe, but it's not important

 So what you're doing is you're giving the drill a place to start without tearing up

 These ones I just simply cut here and here like this, in at an angle, and it gives you

 As I said on the other one, it gets bigger than this when you're done.

 Then we're going to take our drill right there and the little X mark we made, it's going

 And you'll notice they come together but they don't go in because, they don't go all the

 way in because we've got that great big hinge section sitting there, which is a bit of a

 You want to make sure that each hinge will go into that hole halfway.

 You want to make them approximately 90 degrees and then you want to do a dry fit.

 The ordinary disclaimers while you're using epoxy, of course, make sure that you keep

 I take three or four paper towels, slice them up with scissors and keep them handy so I

 You don't want to have pockets of unmixed materials or you won't have the strength you're looking for.

 What I do is I take a little bit of a popsicle stick and I sharpen the end.

 A lot of people will say, oh put some Vaseline on it before you put it in.

 Has the potential to get on the rest of it and cause it to not take.

 You want to be able to look right down that V on this and see about the center of this little rivet.

 Hi, it's Jules from PaperJulesBlogspot.com with some quick tips on how to get started

 using your unmounted rubber stamps and how to index the back of them.

 I have some SharpKai scissors, palette ink, a stamp scrubber, and my new stamp from the

 Each set will come with a piece of rubber and the coordinating piece of Creative Cling.

 That's exactly the size of the stamp set that you will be indexing.

 The Creative Cling foam has two sides, one side that is smooth and one side that is super

 Place the super sticky side up against the back of your rubber, line up the rubber in

 the Creative Cling so that it matches perfectly, and cut a notch in the corner.

 Scissors will help you line up the stamp later when you index it with ink.

 Peel the backing from the smooth side of the Creative Cling foam.

 With this notch, we'll be able to line up exactly the foam to the rubber.

 Press down with your hands to get a nice impression over the whole image.

 Now that this has had a chance to dry, peel the paper backing about half way from the

 Carefully using the notch, place the rubber on top of the sticky side.

 If you don't have it right where you want it, you're still able to pull this up a little

 If the rubber is right where you want it, peel the rest of the backing away.

 Now begin cutting, being sure that you cut with the rubber face up so that you will know

 When cutting your images, try to use a straight perpendicular angle to the surface of your

 stamp or angle slightly so that more rubber is cut away than Creative Cling.

 Be sure that there's plenty of gray backing to provide support for your image.

 When cutting out round areas, I prefer to do straight cuts as opposed to trying to curve

 With my stamps indexed, it will be much easier to see what my phrases say and to stamp them

 Enjoy your unmounted rubber stamps and be sure to stay tuned to paperjewels.blogspot.com

 Hey everybody, it's Rosie, and in this video, we are making the best ever lemon pound cake!

I'm going to share it before we get started so you know everything that you

So of course, I'm going to start this video off at my chopping board,

And we will be using all of that zest there, so place it in a bowl, set it aside,

If you don't have a stand mixer, you can of course use your handheld

So once our butter and cream cheese is creamed together, we are going

 to gradually sprinkle in all of the sugar that is needed for our cake.

Okay, now that right there is just the mixture of the butter, the sugar,

Now we are going to add in our eggs, and we are going to add one egg at a

And this recipe calls for six large eggs, so be patient and just add one egg at a time.

 you have all of your eggs, you can now start adding in your all-purpose flour.

 you can sprinkle in your lemon pudding mix, and we're using four ounces of that.

 you're going to add in your vanilla extract, no imitation allowed, we're using pure vanilla.

So I have a really cheap stand mixer, so I have to use my spatula at the same time.

 the surface, and now I'm going to place my cake in my oven, which was preheated on 325.

 cool completely before I even removed it from that pan, and I of course let it cool before I cut into

I had to get the first slice, of course, because lemon pound cake is one of my favorite

And you could just see the nice yellow color from the lemon pudding and the lemon zest.

 Everything is just delicious, and this was definitely the most moist pound cake, cake point

 on the next episode of I Heart Recipes, we will be making a homemade caramel sauce!

And we will need this salted caramel sauce for our baked applesauce

And be sure to check me out at IHeartRecipes.com for more recipes.

 In this video I am going to show you how to apply our new Ultra Cushion Replacement Headband

 This is the packaging of our Ultra Cushion Replacement Headband and I am going to show

 The packaging includes a headband cushion, some plastic clamps, screws, a screwdriver

 This is a pair of old QC15 headphones and now we need to replace this.

 This is a very difficult part to replace because this is not designed to be replaceable.

 First we need to use our screwdriver to unscrew the screws that come with your headphones.

 Use a pair of scissors to very carefully cut the old headband apart.

 To be very careful because you can see there is a cable beneath it.

 If you cut this cable, you will be not responsible for the damage it will cause to the headphones.

 Again, I recommend you to cut from the side to lower the risk of damaging the cable.

 Next step is to secure this headphone band cushions by using the included headphone mate

 One is this flat shape and the other is this one with a higher back.

 So before we do this, I recommend users to apply the screws before the installation process.

 The other side may be a little bit difficult because this side has already been secured.

 So use some more patience and cut some extra material if it's necessary.

 If it feels too difficult for you, just open the clamp and cut a little bit.

 Actually, it will be a lot easier for you to do it because I need to watch the monitor

 which is about 3 feet away from me while shooting and speaking and installing at the

 Last, check all the screws to make sure they are all been securely tightened.

 Your headphones will feel fresh, new and most importantly, clean.

 HeadphoneMate proudly presents the replacement headband for both QC2 and QC15 headphones.

 If you have any questions, please ask us directly or ask the exclusive distributors from your

 We're going to make our two different types of cheeses, and then we'll be coming to a

 First, we're going to make a soy cheese, which is very similar to the soy butter that I just

 Well, I'll make a little more because I know everyone wants to taste the cheese.

 If you're making a blender full, then you'll put about four or whatever in there.

 If you have a good, high-powered blender, high-speed blender, then you don't have to

 chop the garlic, but you either want to have a garlic press or just chop it up a little

 Garlic is, I mentioned earlier about it lowering blood pressure, but in addition to that, it

 If you take garlic and olive oil, for example, early in the morning when the seasons are

 changing, it helps to prevent colds and flu that may come on you during that season.

 We know that air, the water, the food, everything in the environment is polluted, and the garlic

 will help to fight against bacteria, infections, all those types of things and strengthen your

 So garlic is very important to the raw food diet, to the vegan diet, to all types of diets

 The amount, I guess you could say, let's see, we put about, I would say, 250 milliliters

 About half of that would be the yeast, about 100 milliliters, to really give it that cheesy

 What's the difference between nutritional yeast and brewer's yeast?

 Nutritional yeast sort of gives food a cheesy flavor, and it has the B vitamin in it.

 The brewer's yeast is made more like a whole, is made more like a supplement that you would

 The nutritional yeast is a little bit yellow and flaky, or you can find it ground up also

 If you go to the vitamin counter of most health food shops, the type of yeast that

 they would sell from the different companies will be the brewer's yeast that you take as

 Again, this is, right here, is the type that you would use for your food.

 I generally stick to the teaspoon rule and not go past that or be salt-a-holics, and

 We're going to do the same thing we just did with our soy butter, but we're going to do

 The difference is that we added nutritional yeast and we added some garlic, and we added

 Now, the difference between soy cheese and soy butter, we see the soy butter here is

 The soy cheese is a little more yellow from the nutritional yeast.

 You can also add paprika or different things, and it'll change the color as well, add different

 Okay, and it comes out, it looks kind of watery here, but when we pour it out into a container,

 You know, you can make it as thick as you want depending on the amount of yeast or oil

 But this is fine because we can use this as like a dip or a salad dressing.

 You can use it, whatever you'll put cheese on, you can spread it on some bread and toast

It does not have the hinge in its back, so in order to mount it, you must disassemble whatever tubing you're using and slide it on the bottom.

You have to use the hinge type, unless you mount this before you do the welding.

 This is one of the new pieces of hardware that Sailrite has just added to its line.

 And I believe this is probably what we'll want to use for this particular dodger.

It's all welded together, so I can't take it apart to slide anything on.

 Now, the eye end can go outside this bow pulpit, and as a consequence, the bimini can be angled all the way aft.

If I were to mount it right here on the center line of the pipe, it wouldn't fold back because of this hardware.

 But if I'm outside like this, now I can fold it aft as far as I like, or forward as far as I like.

 Since this boat has a backstay, we'll be collapsing the bimini on the backstay when we want to store it.

 And that will mean bringing the bow forward, the aft bow forward, and the two forward bows aft.

 When it's in use, the aft bow will actually swing aft back beyond the angle of this push pit, and this will make it possible.

 One issue that must be addressed with these side mounts is the fact that if the eye end rotates around, you'll notice that the screw actually loosens.

So what we need to do is replace that screw with the longer bolt and also a nut.

 So we'll remove that screw and the vinyl washers, and we'll use the vinyl washers and set that one screw aside.

It's important to use the vinyl washers, as you can see here in the video.

 Once it's screwed down, we'll take a wrench and we'll tighten the hex head of the bolt until we get a fairly secure fit so that this eye end will rotate around, but not rotate around too sloppily.

 Then we'll take the nut, tighten it down nice and hard onto that side mount.

 Now you'll notice that the eye end will rotate, but the bolt will not come out.

 So we recommend you purchase a 6M bolt and a nut and install it as shown here in the video.

 This too is a hinged jaw slide, but it doesn't have the offset.

 So if we were to use this over this stainless pipe, the bow would fold right in line with the push pit, and that obviously would prevent us from getting the coverage aft that I want to get.

 I wouldn't be able to shield the helmsman when he's at the helm.

 So this is a part that could be used, especially somewhere like this, and then you could swing in an unimpeded arc nicely.

 If you had a pipe that ran forward and you wanted the bimini to be in that vicinity, it would work quite nicely.

We've already talked about the slide that opens up the clam system.

 This has to be mounted by pulling the tubing apart and slipping it over the end.

 But it accomplishes the same thing as the clam shell that we discussed earlier.

 It gives you a standoff away from whatever tubing you're mounting it on.

 So you can use this as a handrail or, in our case, as a hinge for a bimini.

 Alright, as we stated in the first one with the personal safety line, this is going to

 You're on this side, you've got the anchor points in between, so you're going to tie

 We're going to simulate that these being the anchor points already provided.

 Take the two snap links like so, and go in opposite directions onto the anchor points,

 ensuring that the, lock them down, and they face away from each other, like so, and not

 Do the same on this side, open both of them up, coming in from opposite directions, lock

 Now you want to make sure that you have enough rope to be able to tie your primary, and then

 The only thing you want to be concerned about first is when you put the rope down off the

 edge of the tower, that you have at least approximately three feet on the ground.

 A good way to do that is once your rope is on the edge of the ground, take one full arm

 So from over here, we know we've got plenty of rope over here to do the secondary.

 Your first one is going to be a little much because you're going to have all the excess

 So once you've gone left to right, you're right in front of the anchor point, put your

 left hand right in front of the anchor point, put your right hand about six inches in front

 of your left hand, you bring your thumb towards your chest, and then thumb to thumb.

 Here again, there's the rappel rope, off to the left, you've got the hole to the right.

 This time you want a little bit bigger than a golf ball because you're going to have to

 Once you find the end of that rope, you're going to put down through like we talked about

 Then go around the rappel side, away from you from right to left, and back up through

 Now when you're using a double rope like this, you want to take all of the twist out.

 Best way to do that is inside the snap link first, bring it in, and work out one side

 And then come on the other side, working all this twist out, and then snug it down.

 Here's your loop, here's our shorter free running end, even though it's kind of long

 You turn the loop, or the hole knot, upside down, you'll see that it has a bite around

 Now with this being the primary, you do not need a finishing knot because the secondary

 One thing that you do want to do right here, is when you go to tighten these down, always

 What that does is create the bite to get a little bit bigger, so at the end of the day,

 no matter how many 250 to 300 pound personnel you send off there, at the end of the day,

 all you have to do is pull down on this, and the whole rope will come undone.

 One reason why we like to use this as our primary, or the only anchor point in cadet

 Again, coming in from left to right, you want almost equal pressure.

 So while that one can get all that pressure there, you don't want a lot of slack here

 In case your primary does go, you don't want it to gain momentum and then pull even harder

 So again, left hand right in front of the anchor point, right hand about six inches

 Again, the rappel side rope, off to the left, loop off to the right.

 Again, the end of the rope, the bite end, go down through the rope, go around the rappel

 side, away from you, from right to left, and then back up through the hole.

 When flipping this around, you've got that bite around the rappel side.

 Now on this one, you can't go, because you don't want any twist in here either.

 So come from your primary to your secondary, and you're going to have to work all the twist

 And then through the snap links, back up through, and then again, pulling down towards the rappel

 So again, pull it away from, there's that loop like we had around the waist, come up

 underneath, creating that loop on the outside, just turn it away from the bowline knot, come

 And if you do have some excess like that, you can, so it's not a tripping hazard, just

So for this tutorial I wanted to do something a little bit different

 I also included a lip gloss that I just grabbed at the Mac store in Vegas this weekend, which is amazing

Anyway, this will be a quick one, but I'm stay tuned and I hope you all enjoy

 Next take a medium plum color and apply it through the crease with a blending brush.

 Next grab your favorite teal eyeshadow and apply it under the waterline.

 Grab your pencil brush and your favorite highlighting eyeshadow and apply it to the inner corner of the eye

 Then take a smoldering black eye kohl and apply it to the waterline

 Using my favorite NYC eyeliner, we're going to apply a dramatic line with a wing to the top of the lid

 To conceal I'm using select cover-up underneath my eyes and on any blemished areas

 For a dramatic look apply your favorite eyelashes with duo adhesive

 Hello Dolly Crave, my name is Sabrina and I'm going to be showing you a makeup tutorial.

 Okay, the first thing you want to do before you apply your makeup is you want to wash

 That way you don't have dirt anywhere and that way you don't get pimples by leaving

 Also if you already do have a little bit of pimple showing up anywhere and you're going

 out or something, Noxzema is a really good product because it deep cleanses and refreshes

 Okay, so the first thing you want to do when you apply your makeup is, well what I do,

 I have a glitter stick and it's the Ply Glitter and I just apply that over my eye.

 After you apply the glitter, just smudge it so it's not all in one clump.

 The glitter on the bottom actually makes it look like the eyeshadow has a lot of glitter

 So just apply that, smudge that so it's not all over the place.

 Blow your brush after you dip it in the thing, that way it's not so excess stuff.

 Some people might do just the middle, however way it suits you.

 Okay, and I like to do this thing called the cat eye or Egyptian look, how it goes out

 Yeah, so you do that and then I apply right at the corner where you can hardly see any

 And sometimes people like to go a little bit up here, but that's hard for me so I'm not

 And if you get anything like on the side right there, all you have to do is use a tissue

 Well, usually people don't want it left there so you can use a tissue with water or alcohol

 That really gives it a sense of where the light is coming from.

 Hi everyone, today we're making fake newtons, starting off with the dough, which is 1 cup

 Blend those things together with an electric mixer or by hand until it is light and fluffy.

 And now incorporate 3 cups of all purpose flour, a little bit at a time, at first with

 an electric mixer and then eventually you'll have to start mixing it in by hand with a

 wooden spoon or a spatula and eventually even your hands to form it into a nice smooth dough.

 I also put 1 eighth of a teaspoon of salt in there as well, however I don't show it.

 Once the dough has been formed, place it in a plastic bag or wrap it in plastic and put

 it in the refrigerator for about an hour just to make it a little bit easier to handle.

 I don't know if you want to look at what you want to describe them as.

 They, the dried ones, this is what the dried ones look like and inside is all the goodness,

 Now each of them has a little stem to where it was attached to the tree.

 What we're going to do is just, we're just going to snip that off.

 First one was sugar plums and I had lots of leftover figs because I had to buy a big

 package at the grocery store so I decided to try to do something with them.

 You're going to need 40 of them which is about a pound for this recipe.

 And then take the figs and chop them up into small pieces using a knife.

 And if I could do this again I would chop them up even finer than what I actually show

 Add to the figs one cup of water, the juice of one lemon which is about a half a cup,

 Cook the figs over medium low heat and the liquid will start to simmer.

 The liquid will be absorbed by the figs and it will also evaporate a little bit.

 So cook it for about 10 minutes until most of the liquid is absorbed or evaporated and

 When you cook dates they break down a lot and they get very mushy.

 The figs, although they do soften, I found that the outer part of the fig stayed pretty

 Take each of the four pieces and roll them out between sheets of parchment paper or waxed

 paper until you get a rectangle that's roughly 6 inches by 24 inches.

 Then take some egg wash, which is basically just an egg mixed with a tablespoon of water,

 brush it around all the edges, then place about a quarter of your fig filling in the

 center and then fold up both long sides and then fold up the short ends.

 And then gently roll it onto a cookie sheet that's been covered in waxed paper or with

 And then use some more of that egg wash by brushing it on to the tops of the bars just

 The recipe calls for 15 minutes but I found it took more like 25 minutes because I do

 have an insulated cookie sheet which I think that makes a big difference.

 You basically want the dough to be cooked and to be nice and golden brown all over.

 Now these tasted very much like the Fig Newtons that you buy at the store.

 However I found that because I didn't cut the figs into small enough pieces, there were

 large chunks of fig that would kind of come out when you bite into the bar.

 So when I make these again I will most certainly cut the figs into smaller pieces.

 Otherwise they taste great and everyone who tried them enjoyed them.

 For a more modern look, start with a freshly cleaned and moisturized face.

 Then with your foundation brush, smooth perfection liquid foundation over the entire face, including

 Then with your large powder brush, smooth radiance translucent loose powder over the

 And with your sponge, leave extra loose powder on the cheekbones and under eyes.

 And then using your angled brush, fill the brows in with an eye shadow color that matches

 Using your shadow brush, highlight the brow bone with Innocent Me white shadow.

 Apply Elegant Me peach eye shadow over the entire lid to the crease.

 With a large shadow brush, brush the translucent powder away from under the eye.

 And then line the upper lashes with the Advanced Waterproof Black Liquid Liner.

 And apply Fear Me chocolate brown shadow line underneath the lower lashes with your

 Take your white pencil, highlight in between the upper lash line and the lower lash line

 in the corners of the eye, and highlight the inside of the lower lash line to brighten

 After applying a thin line of eyelash adhesive to the false eyelash band, place the Elise

 faux half lashes on the lash line towards the outer corners of the eyes.

 Then coat and bind the lashes with black water-resistant mascara.

 With your blush brush, contour the hairline under the jaw bone and under the cheek bone

 with Idle blush, and then highlight the cheek bone with Angel Pastel Pink blush.

 When lining the lips, start from the outside corner in, and then the outside corner in

 On the bottom lip, outside corner into the middle, outside corner into the middle, and

 And for your finishing touch, fill the lips in with Wild Child lipstick for a complete

 Here's my watch day routine on natural hair and here's the products that I'm

 using water and aloe vera juice for moisture and my wave clips to hold my hair in

 because it acts as a humectant and it adds tons of moisture, softness,

They both add moisture, softness, manageability, and shine to the hair.

 So I'm pulling shed hairs out during this process and I'm not doing any

 going to take a plastic shower cap and apply that over my hair and let this

 Shea Moisture Curl and Shine Shampoo which has protein in it but it is okay.

 twists first and then I'm going to take them out and rinse my hair.

 to apply a quarter size amount of the shampoo to my scalp and the length of my

I do focus it on my scalp as you guys see I am giving myself a scalp

 And I have been using this shampoo since my transitioning days and it is going

So as you can see I split the section in two, apply the conditioner and

 finished detangling I twist the section up and move on to the next section.

 minutes and I rinsed the conditioner out of my hair with the twist still in to

 Purification Mask which has a nice creamy consistency and I love this deep

And when I apply the deep conditioner I make sure I massage it into

 lot more smoother and I don't take up too much time by getting in and out of

 Again I massage this product into my scalp which will help with dry itchy

 Apply a plastic cap and I'm going to let this process for two hours because I

 actually fell asleep and I'm putting my turby towel on to trap some heat in.

 show you guys the manageability of the deep conditioner after sitting in my hair.

 Style Milk as my leave-in and I actually took too much so I'm going to apply it

 I'm going to apply some extra virgin coconut oil to seal in the moisture.

 if you want to see how I style my hair stay tuned for my next video.

 we concentrated on the fifth element, which is the emotion of the dance.

 the beat being three prevalent beats, the single, the double, and the triples.

 went over the second point, which is rhythm of the beat, the quicks and the slows in the

Instead of dancing our basic on the singles, one, two, three, and four, five,

 the third, which is lyrics, dancing on just the lyrics, no beat, no rhythm, timing, or

 anything, and kind of said, use a song that you know and listen for the pattern structures

 on how the person's singing the song, not so much what they're saying, per se.

 able to exude that emotion while you're dancing, it's going to change the whole look of your

In other words, if the song is nice and sultry and slow, you want to actually

 quickly tell that I'm actually going pretty slow with my movement.

 and I'm going quick, you wouldn't say I'm dancing slow, you'd probably say she's moving

 music on a DVD and see how the person's moving, and say, can you say are they dancing slow,

 make you kind of kick back in your movement, or you can dance with what we call a little

 bit of attitude, and we had a little fun with this, because I made you all turn around,

 walk around, and pretend like you're going to kick someone's butt.

 your body actually will start to make a more staccato feel, meaning it's going to make

Those were the five things we talked about musicality in our class.

 you all were doing just basic timing steps with your feet, and we talked about actually

 instead of counting, we're going to actually say what we're doing.

 part, if we're going to walk forward, push ourselves back, and step in place, that's

 we went ahead and said what we were going to do, meaning walk, walk, push it back, and

 our hip bones just a little bit, which releases our upper half from our lower half, so we're

 able to walk one, two, triple forward, triple in step, or back, back, push it forward, and

We went ahead and did that for all of your basics, underarm turns, side

 passes, and whip, with that same rhythm timing, making sure that you pause on all your even

 counts, your twos, your fours, and your six, so then we start dancing on the rhythm beat

 Hi everybody, I'm here with Todd Erickson, here the, the, the, the.

 Welcome everybody to 4TT's premiere episode of Fork U. I'm Kristen Weiler and I'm here

 with Todd Erickson, the professor and executive chef here at Haven Lounge, one of Miami Beach's

 top restaurants, and he's going to cook something for us today, so let's get to it.

 Yeah, yeah, on a little Hawaiian roll, so it's like nice and sweet bread with that fiery

 And even some, for some crunch, some sriracha potato chips I thought would be nice on there

 It's like sweet and sour and gooey and like a lot of good flavors in there.

 It's what you, like when you're making kimchi yourself, like fermenting it, burying it underground,

 all that fun stuff, you know, like for a month so it gets nice and funky.

 If you find this in like your grocery store or an Asian market, feel free to use sriracha

 Then we're going to take some Japanese bread crumbs, brown sugar.

 You want to get all those taste buds going like crazy and we're going to form meatballs.

 Yeah, and I'm going to form them a little flat so they're kind of like burger patties.

 And how long generally would people have to keep them in there?

 Is this going to be for garnish or what is this going to be for?

 Yeah, it's going to give like that cool, sweet and sour kind of acidity to it.

 And the beautiful thing is most people have cucumbers in their home.

 Yeah, none of this is, you can really, you can get this everywhere except maybe kimchi.

 We'll put in some sugar, a little bit of salt on the cucumbers.

 You know, I think I've got the perfect texture, I've got the perfect texture.

 It's called Sashimi Togarashi and it's just, it's like red pepper blend.

 Yeah, it's a Japanese, it's like got pepper, it's got hemp seeds in there, there's...

 And you could find this at maybe an Asian market or something like that.

 So we have our cucumbers, we have our sauce, meatballs are cooking.

 Put it in the oven, 400, about, I think it was 10 to 12 minutes.

 And then on the side, you're going to make spicy mayo, which was mayo and either, again,

 I think he used an English cucumber, a little bit of rice wine vinegar, salt, and vinegar.

 And you're going to let those sit, and that's going to be a little cool crunch to the spicy,

 And I think that's my explanation to us normal people how this all goes down.

 So this is why I was flattening them out because already we're building really high.

 This is a Todd Erickson original, or is this kind of an inspiration off of something you

 So we do a slider, like a Korean barbecue slider at the restaurant.

 But this was just kind of simplified, not with the crazy fancy garnishes.

 Right, to make it a little simple for us, for some normal people.

 But still, I mean, you're not sacrificing any of the flavor at all.

 I mean, if I brought these to a barbecue, I mean, people would probably invite me to

 This is our Korean meatball slider with a little bit of cucumber and kimchi mayo.

 You know, we're always up for trying new things, so if you think of a recipe that you'd like

 us to cook for you, comment below and we'll make it happen for you.

 For any chance you don't like my recipe for Korean meatballs, fork you.

 Today I'm going to show you that it really is easy to make a homemade pie crust.

 And I'm going to show you today how to make that pie crust start to finish.

 As you can see, this is a very simple ingredient list of just simply my all purpose flour,

 one half teaspoon of salt, one third cup of shortening, and two to three tablespoons of

 And I'm going to take my pastry cutter and sort of stir this up.

 If you don't have a pastry cutter, you could use two knives together.

 I've chosen the Earth Balance shortening because it's actually vegan, it's non-hydrogenated,

 Nice flaky, light pie crust, just like my grandma used to make.

 And I feel a lot better about using these fats as opposed to a lot of other shortenings

 So I'm just going to cut this into tablespoon sizes and then cut it into the meal.

 As you can see, the shortening gets cut in with the pastry cutter and I just brush it

 Now I'm going to start adding the warm water in just a little bit at a time because I don't

 So you can also use a fork or like I said, two knives just to work the water in to make

 And the nice thing about this recipe is if you're making a tube crust pie, all you do

 And it's wet, it's not dry or crumbly, but it's not too sticky either.

 And all I'm going to do is put it on some plastic wrap and I'm going to set this aside

 to sit out in room temperature for about 30 minutes while I make whatever filling I'm

 I've dusted my baking mat here with just some more of the Jules Gluten Free All Purpose

 You don't want to use rice flour which is very gritty where that would leave a crumb

 You could use the Jules Gluten Free All Purpose Flour or corn starch, something very fine

 Now I'm just going to take my dough here on the flour and start rolling it gently in different

 Every once in a while if it gets dry and I need or if it starts to get sticky and I need

 more of the flour I can just roll my rolling pin in a little extra flour to keep it from

 You can start to just barely see through the pie shell so you can see that it's getting

 thin but it's not too thin and it's stretching out really nicely without having any major

 You take your pie plate and you sort of eyeball it on top and make sure you have plenty of

 room to tuck under a crust around all the sides which we do here.

 This is a really handy tool to have too but if you don't have this you can improvise with

 I didn't have one of these for years and I'm still able to make pie crust.

 I'm just making sure that it's nice and loose and it's not going to stick to my pastry mat

 I find that this actually works really well to use the rolling pin as your sort of crutch

 I also really like using this mat because it helps me to get underneath the pastry and

 I'm going around with my fingers just to press it in to the pie shell, the pie plate.

 If there's a section like this that's missing some crust, well looky here, there's some

 We'll press that in and if you have any problems getting it to stick, you just use a little

 Now that I basically have enough around all the sides, I can go around with a knife or

 If you have a two crust pie that you're making, then you would just not cut off all of it

 There's lots of different schools of thought about how to make this look pretty.

 What my grandma taught me was just to simply take your two fingers like this and then pull

 up gently in between and squeeze and it leaves this nice pretty flute here.

 Now we've gone all the way around and we have all this extra dough here and we're not

 going to throw this away because especially if you have a top crust, you may want to use

 Even if you have a one crust pie, you can still roll this back out and use it to decorate

 The last thing that you want to do before you put the filling in is just put a few little

 cork holes in the bottom which helps to keep it from filling with air and actually helps

 This episode is sponsored by Stephen, Joseph, Linda, Ray, and Amy and many others.

 You can show your support by donating at everydaydrinkers.com slash donate.

 Today we're going to create a strawberry daiquiri using Funkin' cocktail mixer which happens

 There's other brands, not other brands, it would be the same brand, other varieties of

 And the thing I like about these, I haven't really, this just came in to the mail for

 And while if I was to sit down and make a strawberry daiquiri for myself, which I think

 we've done on the show with some carbonated water, maybe some citric or lime juice, no,

 no lime juice, 7-Up or Sprite, I think we just used carbonation.

 But there's carbonation there, there's a blender, there's strawberries, there's like, it's a

 But when you have a large party, you either make a huge one of these, and blended drinks,

 if you don't serve them all out right away, it starts to melt and it gets messy.

 So this you can kind of do on the fly and it makes enough that you can usually get away

 with at least pushing these out of the party and getting people drinks before it gets out

 So the recipe that they have on the back is fill a glass with ice, add a spirit, white

 It's just kind of weird because usually you're blending, so it's just like chunks of ice

 Since you're typically blending, I'm using Tommy Bahama White Sands rum.

 Since you're typically blending, what I thought would be cool for ice is, ooh, ghetto ice,

 So what I decided was a good round number is an ounce and a half of white rum.

 I would have went with two ounces for me personally because I like them a little more hardcore,

 So three ounces of the Funkin' Strawberry Daiquiri Mix, if you can get it in there.

 Now we're going to stir it a little bit because it's kind of pushed the rum towards the top.

 We've also used Perfect Puree in the past and that's a little thicker than this.

 Now I'm going to top it with ice because I like the ice to be mounted right up in there.

 Now the dangerous thing with this, of course that all depends on how much rum you've added.

 Since I think, personally, I've added a lot for the small glass container, there is some

 I think a real daiquiri, you're getting a lot more thick sugary strawberry.

 It includes water, strawberries, limes, sugar concentrates for carrot and blackcurrant.

 The only other big difference is there's no carbonation here where you usually get a little

 I wouldn't even necessarily call this, you know, it has some strawberry daiquiri appeal

 to it, but to me it tastes more like a strawberry puree with rum, which I don't really know

 It has flavors of strawberry, but to me it's not reminding me exactly of a homemade daiquiri.

 I think the target for this, for people who are looking for this, because usually we have

 They do have a US presence though, so don't worry if you're not in the UK, you can still

 This is good for those people who, when they drink, like my brother, when they have a sweet

 To me what's sweet compared to other people is quite different.

 I can have a sweet drink and be like, oh it's a mild sweetness, and people will be like,

 So good for actual people who don't like super sweet daiquiri mixes, try this one.

 That's the Funkin Strawberry Daiquiri, or the Strawberry Daiquiri with Funkin Cocktail

 You go to a bar, you order a cocktail, what is the worst representation of a cocktail

 But when that comes to mind, a buddy of mine at work ordered a vodka tonic with a twist

 of lime or something, or lemon, and it was like three ounces of vodka in a glass with

 And while some people are like, yeah dude, we scored, we got more for our money.

 Sometimes you just want a light drink before you go to work or something, and all of a

 Just name the cocktail, maybe some of the flavors you found crazy.

 Like, oh, I ordered a whiskey sour and I got scotch straight up this week.

 Hi, my name is John Gregoire, as you probably already know from my other videos.

 A lot of people have asked me to do a stretching video, and so I was a little worried about

 it because I didn't want to put something out there that I don't know too much about.

 I mean, I know about stretching and how I feel with my body, but I don't feel 100% confident

 So what I really recommend is that you guys really work at your own pace and really listen

 So these are stretches that have just helped me out and helped me move around a little

 And as you can probably see from my shoulders, it probably looks like I still have my hanger

 And what that is, what I feel that that is, is that I can't lift my arms up over my head.

 And so in order to not lose that ability so that I can reach for things, which I'm obviously

 having more of a difficult time doing, what I do is a doorway stretch.

 Again, a lot of the videos you'll see I use a lot of momentum because I don't have a lot

 Now before I even get into the stretch, I want to say there's an exercise that I try

 So I'll pull one arm down, and then I'll throw it up there, try to catch on to it.

 Now all these exercises I do with equally both the left and the right arm.

 I noticed that one time when I was doing, I don't know, I did about 20 of them, it was

 And something with this disease that I've found over the years is that once you stop

 And so it's very important for, even though you struggle with it, just to keep doing that

 Obviously I don't want you to try to walk downstairs if you're struggling with them.

 But all right, so this stretch here again is like a shoulder stretch.

 And so what I'll do is I'll put my legs, you know, the width of the door here.

 So my arms, obviously you can see here, my fingertips are holding on to the doorframe.

 Now I also want to tell you that a lot of these videos, I do obviously a lot of breathing.

 So I do that in all of my videos, in all of the stretches that I do.

 So I'm not going to obviously do it with every exercise here because it would take up too

 So I just want to kind of give you guys ideas as to what stretches I do.

 Some variations that I do is just standing here, I'll try to just shift my weight and

 stuff so that now the stretch is now through this right arm that's over here.

 And then what I'll do is I'll shift my weight over to the left and now the stretch is through

 And so this whole stretch I can pretty much feel it in my shoulder area.

 I mean it feels pretty good but I can feel a little bit of a stress there because my

 If I were to stand in the middle of the room and put my arms up in the air, I wouldn't

 So to do this in the doorway, it's obviously very beneficial for me.

 So once I feel that I've stretched that out pretty good, I'll put my arms out to the width

 of the door frame here and then again, same thing, I'll just lean through the door frame

 Again, that stretches pretty much to the shoulder that I can feel there.

 Again, breathing into the nose, out to the mouth and then I'll just bring them down.

 So as far as the effectiveness of it, I feel it on my shoulder and so that's why I do this

 So that's pretty much those are the shoulder stretches that I do in the door frame.

 Now I notice that over the years, as I start to do more and more shoulder exercises, my

 But now I haven't done it in a while so that's why it looks like I have a coat hanger in

 This really works on your Achilles tendon and stretching it out.

 You're going to notice a difference, a big difference between the right ankle and the

 You put this right ankle, you put your right foot back, you put your left foot forward

 What you do here is you want to push through this back, this right foot here, you want

 But you can see just in this position here that that right foot, that right ankle is

 You're going to see a difference between that right foot and this right foot.

 So what I try to do is I'll lean forward, put this in a position and it's very important

 obviously to breathe again but to push through that back foot and you're going to feel that

 Now because my right ankle is weakening, I'm starting to feel the stretch on the outside

 So it's not really necessarily, you know, really doing what it's supposed to be.

 So again, I'll do that for 15 to 20 seconds and then what I'll do is I will change it

 Now you're going to see here that that left ankle does not roll as far as the right ankle

 So the right ankle was doing this when it was in the back position and now that left

 So and you can see in some of my walking that's why I wobble because my ankles are weakening

 So this stretch here is for basically the ankle and the Achilles tendon and I also feel

 So those are basically, you know, two to the five doorway exercises that I do.

 And so now what I'm going to do is I'll show you some other standing exercises that I do

 Alright YouTube, here we go with the super fun awesome review of the Jack LaLanne Power Juicer.

 I'm gonna look up under and see what kind of serial numbers we got here.

 That must mean that it's got a big-ass motor and can blend all your fruits and vegetables.

 When we look inside we can see the stainless steel blade and stainless steel mesh screen

 Though I can say that if you're going to go through the effort, you pretty much might as well just blend everything and drink it as a milkshake.

And though I have no experience with other juicers, I have to say the Jack-o-lantern is top number one.

The first thing you want to do is to peel off everything you got.

 A quick lesson you learn when the juicing is anything you don't want to eat anyways, you shouldn't put in the juicer.

You wouldn't want to eat the kiwi rind to begin with, so don't put it in your juicer.

 Now although the Jack-o-lantern juicer commercials say that you can fit an entire apple into the nozzle of the machine, that is untrue.

 So be sure to take your handy-dandy knife and slice it into nice little pieces.

Now although tasty carrots don't taste good by themselves, juicing them releases their flavor.

 When you got everything ready, it's time to switch on the machine and get to juicing.

 One thing to remember is the handy-dandy bucket that goes on the back of the machine.

 Be sure to post a video response to my video showing me your juicer.

 A challenge with trying to change the pan head out and looking on the internet because

 of lack of directions, this is what I discovered, if you flip it upside down you see that there

 are three, they call them screws on the bottom, but you'll need an allen wrench to remove

 So the first step in the process of changing the ball head, the pan head, is to remove

 And here is my allen wrench, here is my allen wrench that I'm going to change it with.

 Here's another close up of the taking out these little screws in the tripod and you

 can see I have the back two removed and here I want to point out that it's difficult to

 use an allen wrench to get these out because these screw holes are right adjacent to this

 So I just one turn at a time I remove them with the allen wrench but I'm just showing

 how I'm using my fingers and if you've got a little bit of fingernails you can kind of

 So it's not going to be easy, it's going to take a little patience.

 Okay so I removed the three bottom screws and this is where I got stuck because I found

 one video on YouTube and he talks about simply unscrewing the top of the ball head but it

 It was stuck hard and fast and I saw a documentation that well maybe your Vanguard tripod wasn't

 and maybe it was a model that it didn't come off of and I didn't want to damage it.

 But with much patience and persistence I took it firmly like this and I just started turning

 Another thing that you want to be aware of is that I tightened up the one knob over here

 that if I had untightened it this thing rotates and you should make sure that that's fastened

 So I firmly put my hands positioned as this and very very firmly I was able to turn counterclockwise

 I didn't actually have the measurements so I thought I would do a video and give you

 all the measurements of the card and we're just going to go ahead and put it together

And we're using a piece of the designer paper called Modern Medley

 the basic black is cut at 1 3⁄4 by 5 and then the very vanilla is cut at 1 1⁄2 by

 is cut at 3 1⁄2 by 2 1⁄4 and then the very vanilla is cut at 2 by 3 1⁄4.

 Okay, so then the next layer, the strawberry slush, I ran it through the Big Shot with

 the Perfect Polka Dots embossing folder and we're going to adhere this to the very vanilla.

 the Fancy Fan embossing folder with the Big Shot and we're going to layer this onto the

 stamp this little piece here for the front, Million and One Thanks.

The stamp set is called Million and One and I love all the fancy swirls.

 I went ahead already and stamped the Million and One Thanks on a piece of vellum.

Let me show you a little trick I found out while making these cards.

 The stamp and the punch, depending on how you put your stamp on your block, might not

 Then you're going to take your stamp and line up the punch with your stamp.

This would be considered the top of your stamp to line up with the punch

 know this is the way I want the stamp to sit on the block to get a perfect punch.

 Then take your Pansy punch and it's going to line up perfect every time.

The center has a bunch of little dots so I'm going to take one large rhinestone

 smaller rhinestones that will go around the center of this flower.

 Hey guys, I am so excited to be doing this look for you today because I'm going to be using none other than

 Myself along with six other beauty gurus here on YouTube, we helped develop this.

 along with the development of all this, everything that went into this,

 But I'm going to do this look for you today, so stay tuned and I hope you enjoy it.

 I often like to mix two because that way I get the best of both worlds when it comes to different finishes.

 And I'm also often in between shades, so that way I get a better color match.

 So I'm just smoothing that across my face using a flat top kabuki.

 And if you want more coverage, you can always stipple more foundation on in certain areas.

 I'm using a light salmon colored concealer and just smoothing that underneath my eyes.

 Using a small angled brush and a powder, I'm just going to define my brows and deepen them up.

 In swift and small strokes, just apply it, give it some shape at the bottom, and then just fill in the rest.

 Now we're going to use an eye primer so that our eye makeup lasts even longer.

 And it's also going to give a base so that the shadows have something to adhere to.

 So apply that underneath the eyes as well and smooth everything out.

 The first shadow we're going to go into is Notre Dame, which is a taupe color with a purple undertone and a golden sheen.

 And I'm just going to use the eye shading brush that comes in the palette and just pat that on.

 I'm going to build it up to about a couple layers and just bring it up high enough so that we can see it when I open my eyes.

 And now we're going to go into Triumph using a tapered blending brush.

 So I'm just applying that and then shaping it the way that I want it.

 Now I'm just going to take a matte shade, something that's lighter, and just blend out the edges using a large fluff brush.

 Next we're going to go into Eiffel, the black shadow, using a pencil brush.

 And we're going to define the outer V section of the eye to give it more definition.

 And we're going to just line it across the lash line first, tapering it as you go inwards.

 And then drawing the other section in, just to shape that outer V area first.

 But don't want to blend too much of it out so that there's still a nice contrast between that dark shade and the lid shade.

 Next let's go into Sane, which is a gorgeous deep blue color, using an angled shading brush.

 And we're going to just apply that on top of the black, and just go past the edges as well,

 So this is just going to be a nice transitioning effect, and we already have a nice dark base underneath it.

 So just apply that along, and just bring it further past than we did with the black.

 We're going to go back with that tapered blending brush and just soften up the edges.

 And I want to keep it rather defined looking, so I'm not going to soften it up too much,

 I'm going to go ahead and curl my lashes before we move on to the next step,

 And I'm just going to get right up underneath the lashes, in between the lashes,

 And I will be applying lashes, so I want to make sure any exposed gaps are completely filled in.

 And whatever is remaining on the brush, go ahead and smudge that on top,

 This is really easy to do with dabbing motions, and if you look down into a mirror.

 we're going to just smudge that across underneath the lower lash line.

 And then with a pencil liner, with a black one, I'm just going to line my waterline.

 And then with a white liner, we're going to apply that into the inner corners

 Using the tip of the short shader brush, we're going to dab that into Orisé,

 And then taking a mix of Louvre and Eiffel, so that it's more of a black and teal,

 And then we're going to go into Versailles, which is a gorgeous golden highlight,

 And just blend that out, and then also blend it upwards into the lid.

 I'm going to take a mix of Versailles and Lumiere, which is the face highlight shade,

 to just kind of soften up the highlight so it's not too shimmery,

 and then I'm going to apply a whole lot of mascara to my bottom lashes.

 Using a large powder brush and a shade that's a couple, few shades darker than my skin tone,

 I'm just going to do some light contouring and warm up my face.

 So mostly on the cheekbones, a little bit on the forehead area,

 We're going to use the large angle contour brush that comes with the palette,

 and go into that peachy shade and apply that on the apples of the cheeks,

 and I'm going to mix a bit of the Lumiere, the highlight shade, with it too,

 and then using a nude lipstick, I'm going to pat that over the lips

 to not pale them out too much, since I'm a little bit more pale nowadays,

 And then with a gloss, I'm just going to apply that on the center of the lip.

 And lastly, let's go back into Versailles and then also highlight the Cupid's bow.

 Another fun, snoky eye using a bunch of the colors in the palette,

 there is a $10 off code, which I'll list here and also down below,

 and we're gonna go over how to do a deep wheel cleaning on this Porsche Panamera E-Hybrid.

 you'll want to make sure you take care of them because brake dust can corrode the wheels.

 Chrome, powder coated, painted, stainless steel, aluminum, even gold wheels.

 For the tire, this tire has some old cheesy, greasy tire dressing from the car wash.

 It's color-free and odorless, so it's not gonna stain this wheel.

 If you use too heavy of a cleaner like some other manufacturers might make,

 you might scratch and harm the wheel by staining it and causing permanent damage.

 and they're gonna allow me to get deep in the barrel to clean the hole inside the wheel.

 I have a Fireman Nozzle on here that's gonna give me good control,

 so we don't want to stain them or hurt them with too aggressive of a cleaner.

 and it allows me to get all parts of the wheel without scratching it.

 What's great about this brush is that it flexes into all the deeper cracks,

 it's not gonna scratch and chip the coating or paint on the outside of the wheel.

 you might be a little easier to clean because they aren't so big.

 But you just wanna make sure if you have 22-inch wheels or bigger,

 One thing that's important is you wanna make sure you get deep inside of the wheel cracks,

 because that's where brake dust can collect and start to eat through the face of the wheel.

 Now with it sprayed on, I'll take a stiff bristle brush to scrub the wheel.

 We're gonna use a high-quality dressing on this car later today,

 and we're gonna get rid of this petroleum-based dressing on here

 to make sure I dry off all the water so there's no water spots.

 So I'd be lying if I said that I purposely have really dry hair to begin with but you

 So I parted my hair in half and I had this big twist in my hair for some reason.

 I used my homemade oil mix to do this hot oil treatment and the oils that were in the

 So I attempted to put the oil on my hair but I didn't want to burn myself.

 So I'm just finger detangling and I did how I normally finger detangle and I twisted it

 I did a loose bantu knot just to get my hair out of the way because my hair is long and

 Make sure that the oil was into my roots because remember I don't do anything to my scalp.

 So it was like a fresh start you know putting stuff on my scalp.

 And as I was detangling I felt my tangles melting away in my hands.

 So as you see me dragging it down to get the oils all over my hair.

 Then I take my thumb and I go under and I peek it through and I drag my thumb down my

 Then I use, I go on the top, use my fingers and I drag on the top.

 Then break it in half and then I detangle the roots a little bit.

 This is a very messy process so if you're going to do this make sure you have a towel

 Then my satin scarf to prevent the oils from going all over my bed when I sleep.

 The next morning I washed it out with my Trader Joe's Tea Tree Thinga Conditioner and my Ozzy

 I'm going to try to do this more often but it's kind of too messy for me personally.

A little while ago I showed you these cute little ornaments that

I went to a local craft store and I just picked up clear glass ornaments.

 These are iridescent, they've got a little bit of a sheen to them that's really really

And what you want to do is you're just going to take the top out of the ornament.

 Be really careful because sometimes these are sharp the way they're blown or whatever

 So it takes a little bit of time to do all your wrapping but alright.

 you're just going to drop it inside the ornament and then just kind of wiggle it around.

 the thickness, how many that you're going to get in there and obviously it also depends

 oh and then I just tied some ribbon and I hot glued it onto the top and then I just

 put the little tag with one of the vintage trinkets on there and then tied a ribbon and

 put a little bit of raffia or whatever in it and then the ornament goes in there, close

 it up, tie it with some tulle and it's a cute little, it's a great little neighbor gift

I just wrapped it around a little round stick and then it's just, I

 looks like it's a little blurry on the camera but they look like a little glass ornament

 glitter and I just put a little bit inside and then what's funny is with these, if I

 were to turn this upside down, the glass glitter will actually pour out of the top.

 a local craft store or whatever and they're already an ornament.

 Okay, so I'm not exactly warm yet, so I'll just quickly take you through my stretching

 It starts out rolling your shoulders forward and then backward, and then the other side

 You criss-cross them, and then you bring them over the top, hammers.

 Now just hold it on each side, hold it on each side, bring it across, bring it across.

 And squat down into your haunches so that you're stretching this part out.

 Back up and touch your toes again, this time let your head hang down.

 Try to touch your hands to the ground, you don't have to push it, just relax.

 Usually I do a 10 count on each stretch, but I'm going to take you through this quickly.

 I switch again, and switch again, and then just roll your ankles out each direction.

 Now each time you want to put your weight down into your heel, and walk it all the way

 Come up, watch the head rush, hands above your head, breathe in, and lean back.

 If you want to, you can practice bending, you can alternate hands.

 Bend, this opens all of this up as well, especially for guys who like a round kick.

 From the butterfly, put one leg out, opposite hand, opposite foot.

 This should be stretching out your erector spinae muscles, and also your lats, all the

 This is a little more advanced, but if you'd like to stretch out your abs.

 If you have a mat, if you're a wrestler, go down to your head, right here.

 You don't necessarily have to go super hard on that, just take it easy.

 You want to have a little bit of a sweat going before you ever stretch, so you don't just pull something.

 I do this after I've jogged a couple laps and got a light sweat going.

 If you are new to my channel, welcome and thanks for tuning in.

 If you are not already subscribed to my channel, make sure you click on the subscribe button

 A very common question I get asked from many of you guys is what cakes I use to create

 my character cakes as well as my 3D double sided cakes like the ones you can see on screen

 Well to be honest there are a few different types of cakes I use and today I am going

 to show you a recipe I use to make my super moist and chocolatey chocolate cake.

 So the ingredients I will be using today is 1 1⁄2 cups of milk, 1 cup of superfine or

 caster sugar, 150g of dark cooking chocolate, 250g of butter, 250g of sifted plain flour,

 1 teaspoon of bicarb of soda, 1⁄3 cup of cocoa powder and 2 eggs.

 The equipment we will need is a 4 litre pan, an 8 inch round cake tin that I have lined

 I've got my stove on a medium heat and the first ingredient I am adding to the pan is

 Since it needs to be melted you can use it straight from the fridge which is one of the

 So I am just going to gently melt all of this butter and now I am going to add the milk.

 All I want to do here is bring the milk to the same temperature as the butter.

 Once the butter and the milk has combined nicely and the heat of the milk has increased

 I am going to pour in my sugar and make sure it is completely dissolved.

 As you move the whisk around in the pan you will be able to feel if the granules of sugar

 Now I am going to add my dark chocolate and stir until all the chocolate buds have completely

 If it still has lumps of chocolate stuck to it when you lift it out of the mixture it

 Even though it is on a gentle heat you still don't want to leave it unattended and run

 Finally I am going to add my cocoa powder and whisk it through the mixture until all

 At this point you will end up with a gorgeous dark brown looking liquid which is truly delicious

 Now I am going to leave the mixture on the stove top to cool to room temperature.

 The beauty about this recipe is that you only need to use this one pan to prepare the entire

 So now I am going to add my flour and bicarb of soda which has been sifted already.

 I'll add this in two batches, whisking gently to fully incorporate the flour and eliminate

 And finally I am going to add my two eggs which I have lightly beaten separately in

 As you can see even though the flour and eggs have thickened up the mixture slightly it

 is still very runny but don't worry this is exactly how it is meant to be.

 All I need to do now is transfer this mixture into my prepared cake tin and pop it into

 my oven which has been preheated to 160 degrees Celsius or 320 degrees Fahrenheit for approximately

 The exact timing may vary depending on each individual oven but 90 minutes is approximately

 After removing the cake from the oven insert a wooden skewer into the centre and if it

 comes out nice and clean without any cake residue on it you will know it is fully cooked.

 It's very important that you now leave this cake in the cake tin to completely cool.

 So now my cake is completely cooled and I am just going to turn it out onto a wire rack

 Once you try this recipe at home you will also discover exactly just how moist, delicious

 I've had many other people try this recipe out and tell me just how much their family

 This cake is great to use as a base for my other tutorials and an important tip is to

 allow the cake to chill in the refrigerator fully before you start carving in any project.

 If you did make sure to give it a like and also share it with your friends.

 Also just a reminder that once you've subscribed to my channel you'll be updated weekly with

 my recipes and creative cakes so don't forget to click on the subscribe button.

 Make sure you stay tuned as next week I'll be sharing my white chocolate ganache recipe

 Also later this week I'll be using this exact chocolate cake to create my 3D standing panicked

 Remember if you recreate any of my cakes I'd love to hear from you and see your creations

 and you can connect with me on Facebook, Instagram, Pinterest or Twitter.

 It's kind of weird talking to a camera like I'm not used to it yet, but yeah, okay, so it's just like this purple

 Smoky eye, sure let's call it that okay, so if you want to learn how to get this look just stay tuned

 I've got a cutting board, I've got a knife, I've got a bowl, and I've got food.

We're just sitting here talking about how easy it is to make raw food in a very small space.

In case you're wondering how I clean my dishes without a kitchen,

 I go into the bathroom and I simply rinse my dirty dishes with the shower head over the toilet

 so I let any excess food fall into the toilet and I flush the toilet.

 I have a big bucket in the bathroom that I use to clean my dishes.

 But anyway, here we are and I'm going to show you how to make Som Tam salad today.

 A lot of people come to Thailand, they love Som Tam salad, the green papaya salad.

 They don't know how to make it and they don't even know what the Som Tam is.

 They don't realize that the green in the salad is actually unripe papaya.

 So we're going to do a healthy raw food version of this today because the problem in Thailand

 with 100% of the Som Tam salad that you buy here, they put food additives in it.

 They put MSG in it and they also put in their soy sauces, they put the flavor enhancers that I'm very much against,

So this is a healthy version with no additives and it's safe and 100% raw.

 The main ingredients, now there's a lot of different ways to make Som Tam, but the main ingredient is the papaya.

 I bought this this morning and when I made my first Som Tam for breakfast, I often have Som Tam for breakfast,

 it was a bit of a pale sort of pinky, peachy color and it's since ripened more having been exposed to the air.

The skin is pretty thick and sometimes it has a bit of a stickiness to it from the tree.

 So don't worry if you feel that stickiness, it's not chemicals, it's not pesticides, it's a natural oil from the papaya tree.

 And usually if you wash the papaya, that stickiness will go away.

 It has a serrated, I don't know how you would call that, a bit of an edge to it to give you,

 we'll show you how you hook into the papaya salad and give you the strips that the papaya salad is known for.

A lot of people, maybe they're more coordinated than me, they would hold this above the bowl and start slicing this way.

 I have a very hard time holding this properly and keeping it steady.

 So what I do is I hold the papaya on the cutting board and I just start slicing.

 Okay, and here, this is how easy it is to get the meat of the Som Tam, which is the papaya.

 Because when you start to eat a lot of raw food, you really do get into the texture of your food as well.

 Now there are seeds inside of the papaya, so you have to be careful to keep going around and not hook into too many of the seeds.

And I'm just going to keep going with a little bit more of this.

I would sort of keep going with this until I had all the way down to the seeds themselves.

 But you can see, if people have been to Thailand and gotten Som Tam, this is pretty much what it looks like, except it is a bit more pink.

 So normally in Som Tam you use a mortar and pestle to break up the garlic and to open up the flavor of the chilies.

 It doesn't have to stop you from enjoying the flavor of the Som Tam salad.

 Don't let these things stop you from exploring and trying new things with your food.

 This is the mouse chili, which is very well known in Thailand to be very, very spicy.

 And again, most Thai people would do this with a mortar and pestle, but it doesn't matter.

 And then instead of MSG or the nasty soy sauces, I add the Bragg's liquid amino acid.

 This gives it the same salty taste that we're used to in Thailand without the fish sauce and all these other things.

Don't keep yourself in boxes for what meal you eat at what time of day.

 In terms of where you can get your green papaya, if you're in a place where they're grown locally, pick it off the tree.

 So if you're in an area like North America where you don't have access to fresh papaya,

 you can still get that same texture using this tool and doing the same type of movement on the cucumber or the zucchini.

 Hi guys, this is going to be a quick tips video on the Skyzone goggles.

 Now one of the things I like about the Fat Sharks is you can actually attach the battery

 to the side of the goggles and it means the whole goggle unit, your receivers, everything,

 Now the advantage that gives you is all you need is your aircraft, your radiator control

 Now the advantage in this is, with Thomas' techsumo, because that's the way he generally

 flies is, he gets so much flight time on it because he doesn't have to worry about a ground

 He basically gets lots of hours clocked up as far as FPV goes and hence, as a result,

 Now essentially, this plugs into your goggles and the other end plugs into a battery.

 And you can obviously plug it into anything from a 2S to I think a 6S or something along

 So you've got a fair bit of versatility with that but it means you're going to have this

 Now the advantage with the Fat Sharks is you plug this battery into your goggles and they

 Now interestingly, these Fat Shark ones do actually connect straight into these goggles.

 So these Fat Shark batteries do actually work with the Skyzones.

 And what this allows me to do is plug this into the goggles and I can plug in any of

 Now all I did was pick up one of these connectors from Jaycar, I suppose any electronic store,

 so depending on where you are, make sure it actually fits into the goggles and the actual

 And then one of these connectors and all I've done is basically soldered these together

 and then put a little bit of hot glue around it just to secure it.

 Now I can either use these type of batteries, which are my 3S's, I've got heaps of these

 at home, or what I've done is actually gone out and purchased one of these, which is a

 It's nice and flat up against your head and it works absolutely perfectly.

 So just a little quick tip on what I've done with these goggles so I can use them without

 The positive basically goes to the inner pin and the negative goes to the outer pin and

 Just a quick tip on what I've done with these Skyzones and hopefully we should get these

 up and running and do some flight video with it and see what sort of range we get out of

 Okay, this will be a tutorial on how to make loads for your wagons or hoppers or whatever

 I pre-did these just to see how it works out and I decided to make it go above the side

 So pretty much what I've done so far is just cut out a piece of cork that fits inside it.

 After you have that piece of cork, you're going to get pieces of cork and you're going

 I'm just going to lay one in the middle like that so that when you put the ballast on,

 And this is a much easier way instead of just dumping it all in there and figuring out the

 What you're going to need to build it is some PVA wood glue, some watered down PVA wood

 It doesn't matter about the excess glue because the next step is going to be to just completely

 Well, not too much, but enough to get most of the cork covered.

 Okay, the next step for putting down this, for making the load, is just to put glue down

 all over, just put a lot of it around the top and around the sides.

 So now we're just going to grab a piece of cork that we're not using.

 And we're just going to spread it all over and try and cover up all the cork that we

 I've put it on a paper, on paper, because we are going to be ballasting it.

 So, pretty much what I just find the best method is to do is to just sprinkle it on

 And, uh, it might take a while, but you get the best control over what's going on there.

 So, we're just going to put that right up to the edge, and I'll come back when that's

 Now I'm using the same ballast as these ones because I want the, it pretty much to all

 We could put that on now, but I would wait until it's dried a little bit so that you

 Uh, and before you put on the watered down PVA glue, it's best to wait about 10 minutes

 after you've put on the PVA, just this normal one, and then you hit it.

 Okay, now we have, um, I've removed the excess ballast after about half an hour drying.

 And, you can see that there's quite a regular bump straight down the middle.

 So we're just going to grab some ballast and we're just going to sprinkle it around

 And, uh, once we've evened it out, we're going to spray it with some PVA wood glue.

 Um, so, now we're just going to grab the glue, which is this one here.

 And we're just going to slowly, I'm just going to put a chance here, uh, drip it on so that we get a nice...

 When we're at the point of end of high school, it's like, what do you want to do with yourself?

 You want to do bullshit liberal arts, which didn't intrigue me.

 I always had a love for pizza, and it wasn't until traveling abroad, learning that chefs

 If I could ever open up a place, I want to keep it simple, minimal, try to have some

 It's not much, which means we weren't that busy last night, because it's not that many

 I feel like it's a dirty fire, which is why we take everything out every day.

 Put a little bit down on the bottom, middle, top, so all that catches.

 You don't want to pack it in too much, because then there's going to be no airflow.

 So I'm just going to lightly, lightly move it right into the middle.

 You're going to see a convection, a swirling motion of the flame and the smoke.

 Once that Jenga that we first started with really gets hot and burning,

 I'll push it into the back and just naturally let it burn down.

 I think anything that you can get locally like this, it's just, it's literally,

 It's not being handled, manipulated, treated in any sort of way.

 You know, it's like, do you know where your basil is coming from?

 It's just easy to support it because it's going to trickle down onto our plates,

 on our salads, and it gets our cooks excited about working with such beautiful,

 It's funny because I think, you know, as much credit as the pizzeria gets

 or any restaurant gets, it's all about really what they're growing.

 and then leaves me with wonderful attempts to figure out what I've grown.

 I have no idea what this is, but he'll get it on a pie and it'll be delicious.

 So obviously we need to start with good ingredients, good flour, sea salt,

 You'll notice you'll come in here, you won't feel like you just ate

 It's a wetter dough because the oven is such a high temperature.

 It's 800, 900 degrees, and you get that quick spring, that quick lift,

 that little leopard spotting on the outside, which is just beautiful.

 Today we are going to show you how to make some Halloween makeup.

 Some makeup, brush, pencil, artificial blood, molding mask, a zipper, foundation, glue and a sponge.

 Ok, so first we will take some color, some darker violet and we will put it around the eyes.

 The second step we take some blue color and we do the same around the eye.

 So we are going to take some molding mask and we are going to fill out the empty space that we marked before.

 With your finger you just tip it a little bit that it stucks on the skin.

 The first time is a little bit strange but with some exercise you will get it.

 We take some spirit gum and we put it on the back side of the zip.

 Today we're going to be doing some unbaking with this beautiful melon cake.

 and toothpicks, cookie cutters, or anything you'd like to use to decorate

 So yeah, you want those good yummy black seeds in there if you can get it.

 The first time I got a seeded watermelon I was like picking all the seeds of it up.

 I was like, see, I see, I understand why people don't want them with seeds anymore.

 Alright, so now that we have all the layers cut, I wonder what happened to those end pieces.

 Now what we're gonna do is take off the skin so that we can shape it.

 And you can make it round if you want to just cut it round, or you can cut it into squares.

 And then just another note about the watermelon, so you can totally eat this too.

 You can juice the whole watermelon and you'll get it that way, or you can blend it up in a smoothie.

 So I just put the toothpick inside of there and let some of it stick out some.

 So if you like this video, please give it a thumbs up and comment below.

 And if you want to see more videos like this and you're not already subscribed, please also hit the subscribe button.

 Some holidays are snuck up on us again and you're probably thinking of ways of keeping the kids occupied.

 It is a surprisingly easy and fun activity to do together as a family.

 In this video I'm going to build a simple treehouse using some basic DIY skills, some timber and some power tools.

 Now when carrying out any DIY, especially when using power tools, safety is of paramount importance.

 We're starting with the main floor frame using these 125mm diameter beams.

 Now I'm running a hole through these beams with a drill bit so that I can set an M20 stud to pull these beams tight against the tree.

 We need to ensure that these cross beams are secured together by landscape screws.

 This is pretty straightforward but essential when laying out your 150mm beams as it shows us where the floor will need to be supported,

 enabling us to position the beams in the correct place before securing them permanently.

 The floor of the treehouse is constructed from these deck boards which are laid at right angles to the beams and then screwed into place using deck screws.

 We need to allow for an opening in the floor for a rope ladder access to the treehouse.

 The lower ring beam or floor ring beam needs to be fixed into place using 100mm landscape screw fixings,

 What we do is to set six upright rounds into place into each corner of the hexagon to set the height of the treehouse and fix in place using the roof ring beam.

 Now we've got our deck in place and our ring beams, it's time to put the fenced roof on.

 And don't forget if you want more information about Bosch's Build and Bond campaign, go to bosch-do-it.co.uk

 Okay, to start we're going to take a pan that's got about 2 tablespoons of oil in it that's

 And we're going to take 4 small potatoes that have been peeled and chopped.

 Okay, once they're done we're going to just drain them and reserve them and set them to

 And then we're going to take 2 large onions that have been chopped and we're going to

 fry them up in the leftover oil alongside with a tablespoon of minced ginger and a tablespoon

 We just want to fry those all up until the onions are soft and translucent but we don't

 Okay, next we're going to add 2 chopped tomatoes and the spices.

 So there's a tablespoon of salt, half a tablespoon of pepper, a tablespoon of cumin, and half

 a tablespoon of turmeric and half a tablespoon of chilli powder.

 Okay, after 5 minutes we're going to add 2 tablespoons of plain yogurt, 2 tablespoons

 of fresh mint that's been chopped up, 1 cinnamon stick, about 2 inches, and half a teaspoon

 So cover and let it simmer until the tomatoes become more of a pulp and you just want to

 If need be you might need to add just a little bit of hot water or something because we want

 Okay, next we're going to add the chicken and we just want to mix that through, coat

 it, and then we're just going to let this sit, cover and simmer for about 30 or 40 minutes

 But you need to keep checking it to see if there's enough liquid or moisture because

 you want it to be thick like a gravy but you don't want it to go dry too much.

 Okay, next you need to wash your basmati rice in some water, maybe about 3 changes of water

 or something, and then leave it in a strainer for about 20 minutes so it dries out a bit.

 Okay, heat some oil in the pan, 2 and a half tablespoons, and then we're just going to

 put in one little large white onion and we're just going to fry it up until it's soft and

 Next we're going to add 5 cardamom pods, half a teaspoon of ginger, a pinch of saffron

 threads, 3 whole cloves, and that they're all down is 1 inch of cinnamon stick.

 And then we're going to add the rice that should be dry by now.

 Once that's all coated we're going to take 4 cups of chicken stock that we have heating

 Okay, next we're going to add the potatoes that we did earlier.

 And of course the chicken that had been cooking so marvellously.

 Once it starts to boil we're going to cover it and we're going to chuck it on low heat

 Garnish with some mint and you can also serve it with a salad or something.

 And there you have it, Chicken Biryani, the national dish of Pakistan.

 On this episode, we are going to talk about copper lugs, also known as copper eyelets.

 On the hole sizes on the wire side, we have 6 gauge all the way up to 4 ought.

 On the eyelet side, on your hole side, for your stud, we have 1 quarter inch all the

 So I'm going to take my lug and my crimper, I'm going to open up my crimper, set my lug

 inside, and I try to put it so the hole is facing this top right here, and then I bring

 And then, I'm going to take my battery cable, which our battery cable is stranded.

 Take that inside of my copper lug and squeeze down so it crimps.

 Open your crimper, put your lug in, crimp it, open your crimpers.

 Then, black of course goes on black, and I'm going to heat shrink it right there.

 For more information about this and many other products, come to WiringProducts.com.

 Hi friends, Miss Solar here from Crafts Homeschooling and More.

So it's fairly easy and these are great for Valentine's Day crafts or Spring

You'll need a piece of felt, any round object that you can outline on your

 When I was rolling it in, I kind of gently pressed down in the center with my thumb to

 We're going to go ahead and put some hot glue to adhere it together.

 So what we're going to do today is a little Jerusalem artichoke dish, which these artichokes

 today have all come from my allotment, so they're very seasonal, beautiful in season

 Ashley's now going to start blending up a puree that we've had on for the last half

 an hour before the den, and all that's in there is some Jerusalem artichokes that we've

 peeled, stand back in the front row, peeled, sliced them on the mandolin to make sure they're

 nice and thin, a little bit of lemon juice on them, and then we've covered them with

 equal quantities of milk and cream, and a good handful of butter in there as well, because

 food always tastes good with a little bit of butter, you know, like, yes, we do a lot

 of things that hasn't got a lot of dairy in anymore, but, you know, butter is always good.

 So we let that now cook out for about half an hour until it's nice and soft, and we're

 So what we've got here is we've got some beautiful Norfolk corn lamb, so we're just going to

 take that off the bone, and then we're going to take the loin off, trim up the loin, and

 then we're just going to use some of the lamb fat to go in the bag as well.

 So we've got parsley in there, we've got hazelnuts, parsley and hazelnuts I think make a lovely

 I'm not even going to look down, you're both giggling, putting me off my stride.

 It's just how we do it at Mawson, it's all a bit more free and easy.

 So in here we've just got some plain flour, some egg yolks and some egg whites.

 Obviously the eggs are just going to give it the body to be able to lift, and all that's

 So what he's doing is just now making the sponge, it's just been passed.

 So that's just been blended and he's going to pass that, put it into the whippy gun,

 I think that's the technical term, charge it three times and then cook it for 30 seconds

 With the artichoke all we've done is just scooped it out so we're just left with the

 With just baking it first and then putting it into the water, all that means is that

 So I remember Ashley once said to me when he first joined, he went, I'm so proud, I'm

 so proud for the fact that I work in the kitchen without a microwave, now I do a sponge with

 a microwave and now we have to go into the staff room to use the microwave to come back

 If you can see in there we've got a sponge, it's got a nice kind of springy texture to

 So the lamb loin's been in for about 20 minutes which would have just lovely, just nicely

 comfied it and like I've said before I'm not going to seal it because I don't want that

 kind of roasted edge to it, I want that kind of poached, comfied texture to it.

 So then we're just all now going to start laying it up on top of each other, put a little

 We're just going to pour that over the sponge so it goes into there, the artichoke crisps

 going on there and you'll see then, you've got that beautiful kind of shiny texture as

 That is my dish of Jerusalem artichokes with concrete Norfolk corn lamb, fresh truffle

 Winter is coming and you want to get in your car and you want to start it and you want

 And it's got one of these push button start things like on this Mercedes where you've

 What you want to do now is get out of the car and lock it up so that you can go back

 Well, you can try opening the door and hitting the door lock button and that locked a bunch

 But you still have the key in your hand of course because you don't want to lock your

 OK, so how do you warm up your Mercedes or other keyless go kind of system?

 Now reach inside and quickly lift up on the window button and take your arm out of the

 As long as you don't come back with the key, it's locked and it's running.

 Now when you come out and after the car is good and warm, bring your key back and touch

 the door with the key not opening and then you can use the button and try to open it

 Well, just take the key and it has a little button right there.

 What you have to do on the Mercedes is keep it turned like that and pull on the door handle.

 So remember that because if you just simply put the key in and turn it like that once

 You have to turn it and pull on the door handle and then it will unlock.

 And if you do that, you can have your Mercedes or other type of keyless go car, push button

 start car running while you're inside keeping warm and it's locked up and safe.

 You can only do this of course if you have the power up window option.

 Welcome to DiabetesEveryday.com for another fabulous diabetes-friendly recipe that will

 her new book, Quinoa Stuffed Peppers, comes to us thanks to my friend, registered dietitian

 book, Diabetes Weight Loss Week by Week, published in 2012 by the American Diabetes Association.

 This is a no-meat dish that provides protein and carbohydrate with the whole grain quinoa

But the combination of spinach and mushrooms is a classic way to

 basket load of nutrients and dietary fiber to this well-rounded recipe.

One cup canned garbanzo beans, one cup reduced sodium pasta sauce

One quarter teaspoon black pepper, and four tablespoons shredded

We start with our oven preheated to 400 degrees Fahrenheit, and with our peppers

 by placing them cut side down in a microwave-safe dish, covering with wax paper or a lid, and

 juice or switch to a new dish or pan for the oven like I'm doing.

 the heat, add the spinach, mix well, then add the quinoa, garbanzo beans, one half cup

 to top our peppers with the cheese and finally back in to broil for only two to three minutes

 the nutrition information that quinoa stuffed peppers is a complete meal for many of us

 peppers per serving, and each serving is 331 calories, 50 grams carbohydrate, 11 grams

 fiber, and you'll remember that because the fiber is more than five grams, we can subtract

 half from the total carbs, 5.5 grams, leaving us with 44.5 grams of carbohydrate, 9 grams

 total fat, 2 grams saturated fat, 15 grams protein, and 193 milligrams sodium.

 Remember, we don't have to give up good food to manage diabetes effectively here at

 Now the coffee table is a very important piece of furniture to have in your house.

 A lot of people don't have a coffee table and they make the mistake of not having a

 Nico from Pottery Barn has done a video on how to make your coffee table functional,

 We place all kinds of things on it, from remote controls, to telephones, to objects and books.

 I'm going to show you three easy ways to make your coffee table look beautiful and

 The first step, we're going to try to make some sense of what we already have on the

 A good way to style your books is always to style them from large to small.

 I pulled some colored books that are kind of in the color palette of my pillows on the

 sofa, just that makes it a little bit more beautiful and stylized.

 We're going to put those all together from large to small, just like that.

 A tray is always a great way to keep things organized and mess-free.

 The rest of the stuff, we're just going to place inside of the tray.

 Then, we place the objects that we have left just in the tray, kind of neatly together.

 Remote controls can just be dumped in the tray, just like that.

 To anchor it all together, I have this beautiful wooden bowl that we're going to place in here.

 To put some color from outside indoors, I have these beautiful leaves in the bowl.

 A good thing about a tray is when you have guests over, it's easy to remove and you have

 Another great way to decorate your coffee table is to showcase a collection.

 You're going to start with just having the bottles and just play around with them in

 And again, the color from the tulips I picked up from the pillows on my sofa.

 I'm just going to give them a quick cut and then just place them inside the bottles, just

 Incorporating flowers into your home, it's always beautiful to bring nature.

 Another great way to organize your coffee table is to create groupings.

 And as you can see, I got all kinds of objects and books in the same color palette because

 And again, what we're going to do is to create beautiful piles of the books from large to

 Put the books here, put the tray in the center, and we have this beautiful object we're going

 And then I have these beautiful glass vases from Pottery Barn with some rosemary.

 And again, I'm using a tray to contain my four vases, and it's easy because of the rosemary.

 It's easy to take it off the table, take it into your kitchen, and later place it back

 And then the last pile, we're going to do a beautiful stack again of the books and then

 the objects that are left on my table, this beautiful little vase and this beautiful little

 I definitely like the way he combined functionality with practicality in his decoration of his

 Yeah, he was really creative in how I use, you know, the bottles and then how I use the

 The use of books that are the same color as your pillows and your sofas.

 If you have any other comments, how to decorate a coffee table, be sure to leave them down

 Be sure to like our Facebook page, follow us on Twitter, and subscribe to our YouTube

 You're watching Easyliving.com, where you can find anything and everything lifestyle.

 If you'll notice the headlights won't stay on, they're flickering on and off.

 I'm not having a stroke, but half of my face isn't doing what it's supposed to be doing.

 I'm going to remove the trim from around the headlight switch, the dash, and the radio.

 Might be hard to make out, but right here this connector is starting to melt, so we're

 I'm going to strip these wires back, and I'm going to stagger the splice connectors so

 And I'm going to install that, get it taped up, and then reassemble.

 When you use a factory type crimp connector like this one, after you crimp it, you can

 heat it with a lighter and shrink it, and it'll seal up the connection.

 This is a boning knife, but it's a fillet knife as well for big fish.

 So if you notice here, if you're looking at these knives straight on, this is a very,

 This is a thicker blade of steel, so I'm going to treat this one as an outdoor knife.

 It's up to you really what profile you use, whether you use your 20 degree, which would

 be the kitchen, I'm going to do that one with this thin bladed knife, or the outdoor knife,

 25 degrees per side, I'm going to do that one with the boning knife.

 This is a knife I found at Walmart, inexpensive, but I've dulled it so it's not cutting at

 Like I said, I'm going to use, just like the kitchen knife, I'm going to use a 220 grit

 belt, put the guide over the post like that, and we're going to take the knife and pull

 it across that belt once, twice, three, going straight across again, five times while holding

 it against that shoulder on the right, and then that should, we're doing the left shoulder,

 belt's coming down, bringing the burr over to the right, you'll see it and feel it, and

 Okay, there you go, and that brings the burr over to the left, and now we switch belt.

 We're going to go over to our 6000 grit honing belt, just takes a few seconds to put that

 on, release, get that over the pulleys, and back to this 20 degree guide, and we strop

 Very important that if you're playing fish, you want a sharp knife, a dull knife doesn't

 You can keep your knife sharp just by stropping it every so often.

 If you're doing a whole pile of fish, once in a while maybe hit it with one pass on the

 red and then strop it some more and bring it back, so that's a good thing if you're

 For the heavier bladed knife, it's the same exact procedure, but we're just going to switch

 over to this 25 degree, and I've already sharpened this one, so again let's assume we already

 used the red belt on it, and we did five on the left, five on the right, and now we're

 on to that last step four, where we're stropping the blade, so this is exactly how we do that,

 and again I'm not going to bore you, but we do five back and forth, total of ten, right,

 left, right, left, that's the stropping, and this is that bony knife, nice and sharp.

 And there you go, pretty simple, it's your decision as to which angle you use.

 Hi everybody, this is Lucy Joy Young and this is my last and final contest entry for Juicy

 So for this character I chose the My Little Pony Wisteria character because they're so

 So I did little flowers coming out from the corner of my eyes and then the same color

 I think this would be really cute if you're a fairy for Halloween or something.

 So what I did to my face was I put Revlon Colorstay on first and then I took this NP

 Set Liquid Veil in the color Houston and this is just a really shimmery product because

 So I put that on and for blush I used the Coastal Scents 42 Double Stack Matte Shadow

 So that's what I did to my face and on my eyes I used the water activated makeup like

 That's what the yellow is and then for the shimmer I used the Coastal Scents mica in

 Crystal Ice and the Coastal Scents Glitter Powder in .004 for the glitter.

 And to show you how I did the flower I'm going to use Faith, my daughter.

 She's going to help me model this for you guys so I can show you what I did.

 What I did is I took my paints and it's kind of cheating a little bit but not really.

 I took my paints and I chop them up or my cake makeup and that's what's so great about

 You can just cut it and take it out and do what you want with it.

 I did like a striped pattern so that it did the blending for me.

 And what I did is I took a spray bottle and you just give it a spritz and this is a 3

 And then I took these last three colors and I just wiped the brush back and forth like

 To make the flower, it's so easy, you put the brush in the corner of the eye at an angle

 Now if you don't have this kind of makeup and if you don't want to chop up your makeup

 If you don't want to chop it up, you can do this with eyeshadows.

 I would use Ben Nye or MAC or Coastal Scent, something really pigmented.

 First a sticky base and you can do the same thing, just blending the colors and maybe

 If you have the Mehron palette, like a lot of people do, I know Mehron White works just

 You can also use liquid eyeliner, white, if you don't have this.

 So I just simply outlined after I was done with the main portion.

 And then in between the petals, if you look at my eye, what I did was I went from the

 center and then I did a skinny line and then I pushed my brush like that.

 So skinny, push, skinny, push, skinny, push, skinny, push, skinny, push, skinny, push,

 And for the little teardrops, all I did was I went flick, flick, flick, flick, flick,

 And then to finish it off, I did little dots of different sizes in the corner of the eye.

 Sorry, I had to do it really fast so it doesn't look quite as neat, but that gives you a basic

 And then I filled in my eye with the same colors as the flower.

 So before I begin this video I'd like to say that all credits go to

 Chocolate colors 26 for this is her awesome taming guide, so please go subscribe to her

 Hey guys, it's me fuzzy polka dot and today's video is going to be on how to tame your hamster I

 Have tamed muffin using chocolate colors 26 is taming guide and

 Also her taming guide that came from her website the hamster guide

 And the taming guide is so awesome, and I am sure your hamster will become tamed through this

 So when you first bring home your hamster you're going to want to leave it in its cage for four days

 That way it gets used to its surroundings because it's very stressed out at this point

 So just let it get used to everything and then you can begin taming it do not touch it or

 After the first four days you can take a piece of unscented toilet paper and leave it in your shirt for a few hours

 And then you can put it in your hamster's cage and hopefully they will get used to your scent and you won't get bitten

 You can do this for a few days and during that time you can start hand feeding them

 You can take a hamster ball or a cup or anything like that and you can scoop your hamster up in it

 You can also take a blanket or towel and lay it down in a dry bathtub

 You can take a healthy treat in your hand and you can put it into the bathtub and as you can see

 Muffin just took it from my hand, but she's not actually stepping on my hand

 So we need to take a little bit of hamster food and put it in the bathtub

 Muffin took it from my hand, but she's not actually stepping on my hand

 I'm going to take something that Muffin really loves and this is just a pumpkin seed because she loves these things

 And you're going to put your hand in the middle of the bathtub again

 And you are going to get your hamster to your hand by using the food

 So once you're able to get your hamster to sit and eat on your hand

 You can scoop them back up in their hamster ball or whatever you are using

 You can put them back in their cage, give them a healthy treat and then you can talk to them softly

 Okay, so on day two you are going to do the exact same thing you did on day one

 Except this time you are going to take your hamster ball or whatever you are going to use to pick up your hamster

 And before you put them down into the bathtub, you are going to take your hand

 And almost make a little bridge with it, that way they have to step on your hand to come down

 So on days three and four you are just going to repeat what you've done on days one and two

 And then you can just get in the bathtub with them and you can let them do whatever they'd like

 So they can crawl on you, like they will go on your legs probably

 Muffin won't because she's already been through this and she's kind of like, why are you still doing this?

 But they will probably jump up onto your legs and do all kinds of stuff

 So, this day you are just going to want to play with them until they get bored and they just don't want to do it anymore

 And then you can bring them back to the cage, give them a healthy treat and then you can talk to them softly

 On day six you are going to get your hamster and put a pillow down into the bathtub

 And this will just help if they jump out of your hands, it won't hurt when they fall

 And new hamsters will not do what Muffin just did, they will jump right out of your hands and just run away

 And then once your hamster is familiar with this, then you can take them and scoop them up into your hand

 And this is one handed, but I wouldn't do this if your hamster isn't tame yet

 Because they don't really like it when you put your hand over top of them, because that can scare them

 And you can go subscribe to Chocolate Colors 26 because this is her taming guide

 As you can see right now the engine is running with the compressor.

 If you lift your hood up the cutout for the air conditioner relay is right here.

 Now what we're going to do is push this little tab down right here.

 What we're going to do now is take a small screwdriver because this is probably hard

 If you just take a screwdriver and pry it on both sides a little bit at a time it will

 When the relay kicks in it sends power to this terminal and then it sends power to your

 So the compressor should work when you actually put power to this terminal.

 We're going to do that to see if the compressor actually comes on.

 So what you want to do if you're not sure, look down and match it up with the pattern

 So this is the one that we're going to put power to right here.

 I'm going to leave that screwdriver right there so I will know that the power has got

 What I did to test this is I took a wire, put an alligator clamp on one end, I put another

 alligator clamp on the other, but I added a piece of wire to it so I could put it down

 into the relay terminal switch where the terminal was actually connected.

 What I'm going to do now is take the screwdriver out because I know where the wire is going

 We'll put this little wire down in this hole right here and our pump kicks on.

 All right, in today's lesson we're going to be taking a look at the minor 7 flat 5 chord,

 Whenever I work with a student, I tend to see this overwhelming thing going on.

 They either A, don't know how to play this chord at all, or B, they do know how to play it,

 First of all, teach you guys the construction behind it, number one.

 And number two, I'm going to teach you guys four different voices you can play.

 So, when you see it in chord charts, you'll be able to play cool voicing there.

 All right, I notate all the videos as per usual and put them on FreeJazzLessons.com.

 All right, let's step over to the piano and get started learning.

 All right, let's start our journey of exploring minor 7 flat 5 chords,

 And the way you find a minor 7th is you go down a whole step from the roots.

 Now, to get the G minor 7 flat 5 or the G half diminished 7th chord,

 So, this is a G half diminished 7th chord or a G minor 7 flat 5, okay?

 So, an A minor, for example, here's an A minor 7th, and then we flat the 5th.

 Okay, so I got the minor 7 and then we're flatting the 5, okay?

 Minor 2-5-1s, so chord progressions or songs that are in a minor key

 are oftentimes going to have the 2 chord as this minor 7 flat 5, okay?

 Oftentimes, you're going to see this 7th of the chord on the bottom, okay?

 So, I'm just in the same exact chord, but I'm revoicing with the 7th on the bottom.

 Okay, this is the 7th on top, and I'm just throwing these notes down here, okay?

 The other inversion you'll see is with the 3rd on the bottom, okay?

 So, those are our two choices for just playing it with one hand.

 one of the things we can do is we can start taking notes from here

 So, what I'm going to do is I'm going to subtract this note, okay?

 And I'm going to switch from the left hand onto the right hand, okay?

 So, we're going to go like this, and I'm going to voice it like this note, alright?

 So, this is the same chord, just opening it up a little bit, okay?

 One of the nice things about it is now instead of this note being on top or this note on top,

 So, that's the third voicing that you can use for your minor 7 flat 5s.

 So, C is the 11, bring it down an octave, and we're turning it into this voicing, okay?

 You'll hear Herbie Hancock use this voicing a lot, you'll hear Chick Corea use it,

 I actually feature this voicing in two of the licks inside my DVD, the Jazz Master's Method.

 They feature licks that Herbie plays using this voicing, and also Chick plays.

 So, yeah, so here's the voicing, for example, in the key of D minor.

 Here's my minor 7 flat 5, and I'm substituting the third for the fourth.

 Now, I'm going to show you guys real quickly a bonus fifth voicing.

 And the cool part about this, okay, we use this, or even this one again,

 So you'll see a lot of times people will play this for dominant chords as well.

 So as per usual, I'll be putting the notation and all kinds of extra tips on freejazzlessons.com.

 I'm going to be putting the URL right below this video, so make sure you look for it.

 Also, if you're not a member of the Free Jazz Lessons mailing list yet,

 First thing you're going to want to do is take a roll of labels.

 Remove probably around 8 to 10 labels off the front of the roll so you're just left

 And you're going to want to shove the roll of labels in between those two black rollers.

 Next you're going to want to, you'll see a little hole with a slope right in front of

 And what you're going to do is take that backing material and shove it through the hole while

 At that point the backing material should feed out the front of the gun.

 You want to continue to feed that until you've got enough to make a loop.

 Next you're going to want to take the backing material and you'll see a little black plate

 You're going to want to shove the backing material under the black plate over the steel

 Next you're going to want to fold the labels under that little gray fin you see there on

 Next you'll see a hole, kind of a cavity in the front of the gun right above the handle.

 That's where you're going to want to feed the backing material through.

 Pull the trigger down and feed the backing material in until you feel it stop.

 At that point let go of the trigger and pull the trigger until the backing material becomes

 In the back of the gun is where the backing material will come out and that's where you'll

 be able to just easily tear it off while you're printing your labels.

 If you have any questions please contact us at our 800 number or you can stop by www.RecoIndustries.com.

 So I got the request to do an Iceman guitar and there's a couple options of what you can do.

 Number one, you can buy templates from Ronnie over at Guitar Building Templates.

 And since I only want to make a body, I'm going to make a template here.

 So in today's video I'm going to show you how to make a template.

 I'm going to cut out the template, use some adhesive spray, glue it onto this 3-inch thick plywood.

 I'm going to let this sit for about 24 hours and then I'll go back and shape it.

 So now I'm going to route out the template from what I drew before.

 And this is a special router bit, half inch wide, quarter inch thick with bearings.

 I've already laid this all out so I'm going to go ahead and route where I've got my cutouts.

 This is going to be a teleconversion body so I'll have a teleneck pocket and I've already got that template set up.

 Scumbag Blues, which is a fun yet challenging song by them Prick & Vultures.

 The song is in A, there's no need to tune down, and the opening riff is like this.

It is just pentatonic stuff, so it's A, A, A, C, A, G, E, D, D, D, and then he

 And then when Dave and John are singing, he plays this A minor third, which is a 10 on the B and an 8 on the E.

 So it's just... and then slide that up a whole step, twice, so it's...

 And then D major third, which is a 7 on the G and a 7 on the B.

 And then the fill is E, F, A, F, I'm sorry, E, F sharp, A, F sharp, B, A, F sharp.

 And then there's this little fill that's like 11 on the G, 12 on the G, 10 on the B, so it's...

 And then it's just another pentatonic fill, which is bending the 10 on the E, and then pulling off to an 8, and then landing on the A.

 Now the chorus, I'm not sure if he's using an octave on this, but it's just chromatic chords down.

So, starting on a C on the E, then go down to a 5, while I'm changing up between tablature and notation, I'm not sure why.

So it's an 8 on the E, 5 on the E, 5 on the B, 5 on the G, 7 on the D. So it's...

 And then he moves up to a 10 on the E, 6 on the E, 8 on the B, 7 on the G, open G.

 And this whole thing might actually be an octave up, not sure, sorry.

 Okay, actually that's pretty much the whole song, aside from the solo that I'm not even going to attempt on an acoustic, and he improvises that whole thing anyway all the time.

 So, if you have any questions, feel free to ask them in the comments.

 Oh, please visit my webpage, which I'm going to put in the info section of this video, because that's why I'm making these videos.

 Now, as we all know, Prohibition was this period of time where, in America, drinking

 There was a certain individual who was part of the Anti-Saloon League who really wanted

 And he felt the best way to do this was to invent a new word, a term to refer to that

 lawless drinker, that person that was going out and drinking even though it was illegal.

 He held this contest, and the winner of the contest specified the word scofflaw as the

 Well, as you might guess, less than a week later, Harry's Bar in Paris created a drink

 called the scofflaw, and that's probably the most famous way that word is ever used

 today as for that cocktail, even though you probably don't see that cocktail very often.

 Now, being a drink made during Prohibition, it couldn't use American whiskey because American

 So, instead, they turned to Canada for their whiskey ingredient for making the scofflaw

 And so we're going to turn to Canadian Club Whiskey for making this drink.

 I assume since Harry's Bar is in Paris, they decided to use a French ingredient there.

 and it's on the trigger setup page, I just press plus to enter and we can see we've got

If you're looking at connecting kick, snare, tom 1 or floor tom, this is the way

So if you're triggering 2 pads or 2 triggers into one input, you need this cable,

 it's a stereo jack cable that will go into the trigger input and these 2 guys that will

 arrow and I need to set up the settings, so it needs to recognise which pads we are using.

 It says here PD128, so I'm going to hit the pad, I want to edit, there, I'm going to find

 So let's look at assigning an instrument to a pad, it's actually really simple.

 do first is press instrument and we hit the pad we want to edit and we see there it's

Now I can go through all the kicks by pressing plus or minus or I can

 percussion, clap and all the elements that we spoke about earlier or finally it will

 a kick drum, there it is, premier kick, perfect, press instrument and you're good to go.

 I can adjust the level and I can adjust obviously the overall dynamics and the pitch.

 I can even adjust the panning so right across, left to the right and we can also make that

 need to make sure that the effect send is on and then we press right arrow and we just

 choose the type of effect we like so distortion, ring modulator, wah-wah in this instance

 and if we keep going the right arrow we can adjust the amount of effect we want on that

 are going to make another amazing breakfast option for you and all of y'all out there.

 It's basically the kick starter to a nice diet rather than an exercise at all

 You see the chia seeds are starting to soak up all of the liquid

 The last in our triumvirate of amazing antioxidant rich berries

 So family I want to thank you guys so much for joining me here today

 And let me know what's your favorite super ooey gooey yummy breakfast comfort food

 The thing that I'm not real crazy about in single crochet is you have this little see the little bites

 Single crochet you have the little bites on the edges and what you can do later is embroider around the edge of it

 We're working on the back and we're going from left to right but we don't really have to read it because these are two solid

 Rows, so I just single crochet all the way across I will single crochet over the tails

 Back the other way so I'm pull that loop that tail through there

 Can be a little coaster a little cute little patch on a pair of

 Then you could use the double crochet one that we made for the pocket on the front of the bibbed overalls

 For this recipe you'll need 1 pound of shrimp, 2 tomatoes, 1 1⁄2 tablespoons of dill, 1

 teaspoon of red pepper flakes, 4 garlic cloves minced, 1 cup of feta cheese, cubed, not

 crumbled, 1 potato, bread crumbs, ½ a lemon, ½ cup of white wine, salt and pepper to taste,

 So from my New York City Greek kitchen to yours, Macy's keeps it cooking.

 It's a banana, coconut and honey loaf with a little bit of lemon in there.

 All you've got to do is mix all the ingredients together, shove it in the oven and it's done.

 So it's perfect for the kids to make and it makes a great healthy lunchbox option.

 A, because it's got no refined sugar in it, it's actually sweetened with banana and honey instead.

 B, it has no refined flour in it and that makes it gluten free.

 When you eat something that has a low GI, it raises your blood sugar levels at a much slower, more consistent rate

 Your blood sugar levels will shoot up and then they often crash down.

 And refined flour doesn't have any nutrition in it, but if you've got something like buckwheat flour instead,

 But if you want to make it dairy free, you can always use coconut oil.

 You can use any honey, but not manuka honey because that has quite a strong flavour.

 So something like this, which is a creamed clover honey, is perfect.

 So now all you have to do is melt the honey and the butter or the coconut oil together, which will take a few minutes.

 While the honey and the butter's melting, you can mash your bananas.

 So you need about three bananas, or enough for about one and a half cups of mashed banana.

 You can mash the bananas in a bowl if you like, but I think I'm just going to do it on this chopping board.

 So this recipe is perfect if you've got a bowl of bananas that are starting to go brown and they're about to go off.

 Then take them out of the freezer whenever you want to make this recipe.

 I bet you've never seen someone mashing banana on a chopping board before.

 Mashed bananas in baking are a great way to sweeten up your baking without having to add sugar.

 Bananas are naturally sweet and they keep your baking nice and moist.

 So because it's a really coconutty loaf, there's two cups of desiccated coconut in there.

 I mean if you feel like adding some cinnamon, that would go really well.

 And lastly, a little pinch of salt really helps bring out the flavour.

 Grab a loaf pan and just lightly grease it with a little bit of coconut oil or butter.

 Bake it in the oven for about an hour until it's nice and golden on top.

 The hardest part with this recipe is waiting for the full hour for it to bake because it smells so good when it's in the oven.

 Let it sit in the tin for a few minutes before just flipping it out.

 If you like, you can spread it with a tiny little bit of butter.

 Remember, it's refined sugar free, it's gluten free, it can be dairy free if you'd like it to be.

 I mean the whole family, everyone that eats this loaf will absolutely love it.

 Hi there, this is E-Rock on Coffee Convo, making a little video just to show you my

 Alright, in this video I'd like to show you an easy and cheap way to steam your milk at

 You need a few things to have ready to go, like your mug filled with the amount of milk

 that you like, and of course I've got my Melito, thanks Anthony, filled with the coffee grounds,

 and thermometer so I can figure out when I reach 160 degrees in the milk, and my special

 invention, you'll see how this works in a second, and you'll see what this is for in

 Ok, as the water is coming to a boil in the tea kettle, let me explain what this is.

 This is some old tubing and cork from winemaking I used to be involved in, and I cut it down

 to size, and I'm going to be placing it in the opening of the tea kettle, and then sticking

 And of course the lid here is to keep from splattering milk everywhere, and the temperature

 Ok, here we go, the steam is coming out of the tea kettle, it's whistling, carefully

 Alright, we're getting there, we're at 140 degrees, 150 degrees, coming up on 160, so

 we're going to pull it away from the heat, and then remove it from the heat.

 Then carefully remove your cork and tubing, remove your lid from your coffee cup, place

 it in the sink, put your Melitta number 2 on top, and pour your already heated water

 And there you go, a latte made in your own house with equipment from a wine supply shop,

 It's J-Wro here with a low-low, as in low-down, here on my vegan vlog.

 Today I'm going to be showing you guys how to make a homemade salt sugar scrub,

 This is a high-powered, exfoliating, rejuvenating, exhilarating scrub that'll

 This is a super easy, super invigorating scrub recipe that you guys can make at home

 and makes the perfect gift to your sweetheart, your mom, your grandma,

 My favorite sugar to make this recipe with is this O'Geo Organic Coconut Palm Sugar.

 I know you guys have seen me use this if you've been following my YouTube channel

 in all kinds of recipes, sweet recipes, savory recipes, elixir smoothies.

 I bet you never thought, hey, I can make a homemade, amazing superfood scrub out of it.

 Actually, it was two nights ago and I was like, I think I'm going to make my own scrub.

 Henceforth, this recipe, which we're going to improvise here on the show today.

 We've got a pound package here of our Organic Coconut Palm Sugar.

 Go ahead and just add, you know what, go ahead and add the whole truckload to the bowl.

 This consistency, if you look at the granules here, they're kind of like a medium.

 They're kind of in that nice middle range that's going to have that perfect exfoliating action.

 Next up to our Coconut Palm Sugar, we're going to add our O'Geo Himalayan Crystal Salt.

 It's packed with calcium and iron, so it's really healthy for your skin.

 You know, personally, I like to lean a little more on the sugary side in my scrubs.

 Since I added a full pound of my Coconut Palm Sugar, I think I'm going to go ahead and add

 Next up, we have O'Geo's brand new raw Satcha Inchi Oil, made from the Satcha Inchi seed,

 This is full of omega-3, omega-6, and the very elusive omega-9 fatty acids.

 So it's good inside your body, and it's good outside your body, too.

 Let's add a few tablespoons, and as we go, let's mix to see if we get that perfect, creamy

 What we want is we want that nice, rich, oily, but not too oily consistency to our scrub

 Give it a nice, quick mix, and then we can always readjust if it's too dry.

 Now, at this point, our Coconut Sugar Salt Scrub doesn't really have the most aromatic

 So what I like to do is start to infuse it with some extracts and essential oils.

 In this case, we're going to be doing an organic orange essence.

 And of course, some organic lavender, just for soothing the spirit, really invigorating

 We're going to add a little bit of each until we get that perfect scent.

 So again, maybe a couple teaspoons of your orange essence, your orange extract here.

 One to 20 drops, again, depending on the consistency you want, of your lavender oil.

 Much like any recipe here we do on the J-Wro Show, we got to test it out, don't we?

 So just take a little bit of the Coconut Sugar Salt Scrub and put it to the test.

 Now the real test is how the scrub feels when it comes off your body.

 Yeah, that's why you come here, to watch Jason Robel wash his face on camera.

 Whether you're going to use it in the shower for yourself or, like I'm going to do, give

 this away as a gift, it just makes for a really nice, elegant presentation.

 A full helping of our coconut sugar salt scrub and we have plenty left over.

 This makes almost two full batches from one pound of sugar, a half a pound of salt, a

 few tablespoons of Satcha oil, and some flavor extracts, some lavender and some orange.

 So if you guys dug my vlog here on homemade superfood coconut sugar salt scrub, give this

 What are some of your ideas for favorite homemade gifts, whether it's Valentine's Day, whether

 it's just a thank you or a way of saying I love you to someone you care about?

 Give me some ideas for some cool food-based DIY home gifts and maybe I'll try and make

 I also want to thank Ultimate Superfoods and OGO for hooking us up with the ingredients

 I think I have a little Valentine's action vlog coming up with more ideas for homemade

So if you're interested in learning this sort of style of music,

 to go through my violin tutorials as the fiddle and the violin are exactly the same instrument,

 started section of the violin stuff and as well as the fundamental videos.

 through here so it's totally fine if you're just interested in the fiddle and don't have

That's an E. I'm going to play an F which is second finger on the D

Then third finger on the D string is G. Next I'm going to play no fingers down on the A

 Okay so that's all the set of notes from D zero, no fingers down, to third finger on the A string,

So one thing that's very important with the left hand is to make sure your wrist is

 to help you find the best intonation which means position of the notes.

So with all those things, the D major scale works really well as a warm up tool for

And then when you're using the bow, make sure that you're moving your elbow to

So work on all these things and this will serve as a great warm up tool to

 What I have for you guys today is unboxing the Goofone IS and hands-on and much more.

 So I want to say thank you to Fast Car Tech for sending this out and I will have much

 But from Fast Car Tech, this retails for $115 and they are offering right now a promotion

 And what this has, it's a Goofone i5s and that means it's the replica of the iPhone

 As you can see here, this packaging came in very tight and sealed but the thing I noticed

 is that it said OK and there is a whole bunch of wrapping over it so I'm guessing customs

 opened this already to check for drugs and other things like that.

 It took about probably a month and a half to get here because Fast Car Tech sent this

 But if you choose their other options like DHL shipping or other things, it's not, it

 This wraps but it's very sealed and I know that the quality is good so the phone wouldn't

 So as you can see here, they opened this, I guess they didn't open much more or anything

 It's not the official Goofone I believe, it's one of the other brands that offer the Apple

 But as you can see here, it says D for dark because this is a space grey color option.

 It's very nice, it protects the phone from shipping and whatnot.

 You can peel this off in Osho, I guess they did this for customs as well to pass regulatory

 As you can see here is the Apple lightning port and your micro SIM and your power lock

 Your webcam, back is the flash and the 8 megapixel camcorder supposedly.

 So here is the other packaging contents and you get a little instruction booklet.

 And it tells you little things about how to use it and everything, which is nice, but

 Another thing you get is the SIM card opener, which is here to open up the SIM tray, which

 I didn't know that was going to include it in a whole bunch of accessories.

 But, okay, as you can see, you get the lightning adapter port or whatever it's called and your

 These are not the ear pods, but you can get ear pods for a really good price on the internet.

 So one for work, one at school, one at office, and one at home with your bed and one in the

 Now I was told that you can put the Google Play Store on it, which is a nice thing.

 Some other models do offer it, but with the United States, I guess they take it out for

 certain reasons and royalties that we probably had to pay and whatnot.

 Two of these, that, that, that, and the SIM tray unlocker and the good phone i5s.

 Now this is unlocked and let me tell you the specs on this real quick.

 Certain models won't be showing the Apple logo and I'll be showing you a fix on how

 to put the Apple logo if yours does not have the Apple logo, if it shows in Android.

 I believe it offers one gigabyte of RAM, a four inch display as well.

 Another thing is you actually do get the iOS 7 theme, which is nice because certain phones

 So this one does offer the iOS 7 theme with the control panel and whatnot as well.

 I was told it features an eight megapixel camera and much more.

 As you can see here, these are with preloaded apps that did come with the phone, I believe.

 Just one thing I forgot to mention is how to peel off the back and the sidings around

 Now this comes with a built in screen protector, but personally I don't like the screen protectors

 It's nice to know that they do put a screen protector on, but it just wasn't for me.

 So in order to take this Android off to reveal the iPhone logo, just simply pull off the

 And slowly, you don't want to do it too hard or else it would leave remains and whatnot.

 And as soon as you peel that off, the Android sticker comes off and the Apple logo appears.

 And another thing in order to remove the sidings, just find these areas where here, where the

 Simply pull up from the middle as well and just peel this little lining off.

 As you can see there, just pull that and it reveals the sidings of the phone, which is

 Just keep on peeling that away slowly, not too hard to do any damage or anything.

 And if you want to do the other side, simply grab the other side here and peel that away.

 And in order to peel off the screen protector, just go on the sides here and pull it out.

 So this is just a quick look around and unboxing of the Goofone i5s.

 If you like this video, please thumbs up and leave a comment down below of what you thought

 The next couple of days, I do have a whole bunch of other stuff for review.

 As you can see here, thanks to other parties as well that I'll be giving them a shout out

 Thank you so much for watching and see you guys in my next video.

 Hey guys, it's your girl Beautiful Brown Baby Doll and today I'm going to be showing you

 three of my favorite face masks to make for your summertime face routine.

 First mask, you're going to need half an avocado, one egg white, and one teaspoon of fresh lemon

 First you're going to ensure that this has been mixed down very, very well, starting

 The aim of this face mask is to hydrate your skin without having so much oiliness.

 Also it's going to make sure that it reduces swelling and inflammation.

 Those are the things that cause you to have acne and clogged pores.

 Also if you don't have fresh lemon, it's okay to use like lemon extracts or lemon juice.

 As you mix, you'll find that the mixture becomes thicker and richer and at the end

 We're going to need two tablespoons of mashed avocados, one tablespoon of honey, and a half

 Just as you did with the last mask, you're going to start off with that avocado and you're

 It might be a little hard with the texture, but just make sure you take your time and

 This mask is going to be awesome for nourishing and softening your skin.

 It also helps to prevent and treat current acne that's on your face.

 All you need is three tablespoons of colloidal or chopped oatmeal, 1 1⁄4 cup of warm water,

 one teaspoon of honey, one teaspoon of fresh lemon juice, and one teaspoon of white wine

 I love it because it helps to prevent blemishes, those dark spots, or hyperpigmentation that

 Also, I prefer to get water boiled from the stove rather than from the faucet.

 Aside from just using this on your face, you can bathe in oatmeal because it nourishes

 And then I start in with the honey and then I go in with my lemon juice, of course.

 Utilize lemon juice if that's all that you have instead of fresh lemons.

 Then mix it together and if you find this is becoming watery in consistency, pour in

 It makes it thicker and causes it to come together or coagulate like a paste.

 You can keep these for a couple days in the refrigerator, maybe two days.

 And I just cover them with clear plastic wrap and put them in the refrigerator.

 Utilizing a makeup brush, I just go ahead and start at the bottom of my face rubbing

 And just to mention how long you should leave these masks on, no longer than 20 minutes

 Because all three of these masks are edible, it is so awesome that you can eat them.

 It's okay to not only have this on your face, but to rub any of these masks down to your

 I'm going to wait about 20 minutes and I'm going to wash it off with warm water.

 Once I'm done washing off, I just pat dry my face with paper towels.

 I prefer this method because sometimes the towels we use house bacteria that cause us

 Thomas is going to create a second preparation, fettuccine carbonara.

 That's why the pasta can dry. So it gets really hot. It's actually really hot.

 Yeah. It's nice. And you also see that I have a little bit of water.

 Any sort of pork product always gets me very excited, very worked up about pig.

 But the Mangalica is very fatty, so it has a lot of shelf life.

 So we're going to use the pancetta I'm making from Mangalica today for the carbonara.

 This is how Thomas poaches his eggs in the immersion circulator.

 It really stands up to the pancetta, to the smokiness of the pancetta.

 For the recipes you saw here, please visit hotfromthekettle.com.

 Это будет весело для вечера, для декорации, для вашей комнаты, для вашего домика.

 У нас есть четыре разных цвета глины, и они в маленьких бутылках, чтобы они остались в них.

 Нужно убедиться, что вы это сделаете правильно, потому что у вас много грибов.

 Because eggplant is limp and when you serve it, they don't serve very well.

 We can fry the eggplant, but frying is not good for you and absorbs a lot of oil and is very fatty.

 And we're going to put them in the oven for ten minutes and then we're going to turn them.

 We put about two tablespoons of olive oil and a couple of cloves of garlic, chopped them up.

 And about one half a cup, yeah, half a cup of tomato juice or tomato or a paste or a tomato juice.

 So now we're going to make the moussaka consist of three things.

 And we need about, we need about, okay, about two thirds of flour.

 As soon as it starts to boil, get to start boiling, it's going to get thick.

 Okay, the sauce, it started to boil, it's thickening, it did start to thicken it.

 But because you know life is not perfect all the time, sometimes it does get a little bit lumpy.

 So if it does get a little bit lumpy, very easily, all you do is you get your strainer and a nice dish.

 That doesn't happen all the time, like I said, life is not perfect.

 So I've already done, because it's a couple of times in the oven, I've already done a few before.

 So you take the paper towel, you put them on the bottom to absorb any oil that they have.

 And now we are ready, as you see, to make a moussaka it takes a little bit of time consuming, but it's really good.

 Remember, we cut them very thinly and we cooked them for 20 minutes, for 10 minutes on one side, 10 minutes on the other side.

 So this is a base to, when we cut it, then the slice can stay, doesn't, because the eggplant is a little bit thin.

 So we take our cooked eggplant and we put it, I don't know, can the camera show it, we put them, very neatly, one after the other.

 This is very healthy too, and eggplants are good price in the summertime.

 A raspberry container, or you can use any plastic food container, but I used a raspberry container.

 First, you want to draw out your iPhone using the measurements.

 While I was waiting for that to dry, I started putting the things on.

 Put the plastic piece from the raspberry container on top of your iPhone.

 Once you're done with that, your screen should look all shiny and new.

 When you're done with that, take your Apple logo and put a drop of glue and stick it on.

 When you're done with that, take your Home button and glue it on.

 And it won't turn out looking ever like a real iPhone completely if you make it my way.

 But when you are filming and you're just calling someone and all of a sudden you throw it,

 It shouldn't be a long clip that you have it because then it will look fake.

 I thought it would be fun this week with Christmas around the corner to make these Christmas

 crackers and I wanted to have some frilly crepe paper ribbon that was edged in red.

 I had seen something similar online and I thought it would be fun to try to recreate

 So the first thing I'm going to start with is the Melissa Francis Vintage Crepe Paper

 and I cut it while it was still folded on my rotary trimmer so I could get a nice long

 And I'm going to lay down my craft mat, this is my Teflon craft sheet, this is just to

 And then I'm going to dab some Barn Red Distress Ink against the edges.

 Now that didn't quite give me as much color as I wanted so then I got aggressive.

 And I went ahead and put it down flat on my craft mat and then I started dabbing much

 more aggressively at the edges and I actually ended up having to turn it over and do the

 And then I speed set it very carefully with my heat tool to get it dry and now I'm just

 making the ruffles by spreading apart the edges there, just the outermost edges to create

 And to create a cracker there's a lot of different ways you can do it but I just took some toilet

 paper rolls because everybody's got those and wrapped it with some craft paper and I'm

 I don't like it when the tape shows so I'm using my glue glider to go ahead and adhere

 And then you're just going to go ahead and pinch one end and I like to shape it a little

 bit with my fingertips to keep it rounded and tubular there at the end.

 And then this pretty Maya Road Twine, it's a nice heavier weight and it's ivory and it's

 It's very pretty and I thought it would be fun for these crackers, very festive touch.

 It also comes in gold too so if you're really into gold and there's 100 yards on the roll

 so very economical and a great twine to use on your packaging and such and fun things

 So I'm going to go ahead and cinch that shut and then I would fill it up and at this point

 then I'd go ahead and tie the other end shut once I've got it filled with my little trinkets.

 And now it's time to go ahead and embellish the cracker and I'm just going to take a piece

 of this ruffled crepe paper that I've created and wrap around just what I need.

 And you could make a whole bunch of this and use it for wrapping your Christmas presents,

 for decorating cards, it's just really a pretty pretty effect and you can make it any width

 There's two sheets in the package and it's quite a bit in length when you cut it down

 Anyway I had a lot of fun with it and you can make wider ones for big packages but I

 It's about 2, 2.5 inches wide and I think it's pretty nice for this particular project.

 And again I'm just going to conceal where I'm gluing it by folding that over instead

 And then I wanted to have some kind of a medallion so I'm using a solid snowflake from the Designer

 I'm just going to stamp a whole bunch of them because I'm going to make a whole bunch of

 And then I started punching but I did realize I might not have left quite enough space for

 I'm using a 1.25 inch punch and I might have to knock it down to a 1.18 if I want to punch

 all those out or get my dies out, my circle dies and die cut them out.

 So we're just going to 3D mount that to the front and I don't get super elaborate with

 my crackers but I think they sure are cute and would look very festive on the table and

 Ok guys, so basically you're going to obviously need your white fondant, a toothpick, and you have to use gel food color or paste food color.

 Because if you use the liquid, water and fondant are enemies so it's going to get very very sticky and it will die.

 I'm not using powdered sugar because when I put fondant in the refrigerator it gets kind of sweaty like this.

 Ok, so obviously you want to work on a very very clean surface.

 And in this video I'll be using the Wilton blue color, food color.

 I'm just going to put some corn starch on my bench here so my fondant doesn't stick.

 And using my toothpick I'm just going to take a little bit of this food color.

 Now this gel food color, like if you use a little bit, is going to be enough.

 And if you need more you can add more but you can't ever take some out.

 So start with less than you think you're going to need and always add more.

 So now you're going to start kneading your fondant on your surface.

 Ok guys, so just like you saw after about 2 minutes of kneading it's going to get a solid color of blue.

 Now I'm happy with this color, you can add more gel food color.

 You can just leave it like this so you get the solid color like that.

 And now if you're not using it immediately you want to cover it with plastic wrap so the fondant won't dry out.

 Hi, I'm Vanessa, and I'm going to make pork chops using Spicely's Pork Chop Seasoning

 It has garlic, pepper, thyme, paprika, rosemary, mustard seed, lemon peel, chili, coriander,

 I love the Spicely product line because it's organic, gluten-free, it's kosher, it's vegan,

 there's no MSG, it's soon to be fair trade, and you can buy all of Spicely's seasonings

 So I'm going to use a couple tablespoons of the Spicely Pork Chop Seasoning and I'm

 And since the Spicely products are salt-free, then you can customize the salt to your taste.

 Our grill pan is on about a medium-high heat, so we're going to put the pork chops on.

 That means we're going to get a good sear, maybe get some grill marks.

 I'm going to turn these guys a quarter of a turn each just to see if we can get some

 We did that about halfway through the cooking time on the first side and we'll try it out

 Now they'll cook for another six to eight minutes on this side.

 We've been cooking for about eight minutes because these are kind of thicker chops.

 Pork chops have been cooking for about six to eight minutes on each side so we're going

 Every now and then you'll get these little mustard seeds or little pieces of rosemary

 Grilled pork chops on the stove top using Spicely Pork Chop Seasonings.

 This is Robert and welcome to the first video of Robert's Quick Licks.

 So I'm not doing the lick of the month anymore, but I did want to still be able to post random

 So these videos, I don't know how often I'll make them, but they're just going to be licks

 that don't really fit into the lesson videos that I want to do.

 It's like a D pentatonic, mixolydian, dorian, bunch of madness.

 I like to mix the scales all together as does pretty much everybody.

 I'll go ahead and play it up to speed and kind of talk about it for a minute.

 So what I'm doing here is I start off with that full step bend.

 Then you go 10 on the high E. And then you're going to go to the B, 13 pull off 10.

 Okay, now this time you're going to go back to the B and you're going to do 10 hammer

 And then you reach up with your pinky to that 15th fret on the high E. And then play that

 Then what you do is you go back to the B, pull those notes off, 13 to 12, pull off to 10.

 Then you hop up to the G and you're going to do 12 pull off 11.

 Right now I'm having a lot of trouble with YouTube uploading larger videos.

 Hi, today we're going to continue our Shea Butter Moisture Series by showing you how

 Today our hair model is going to be Crystal's youngest daughter, whose hair texture is pink

 for moisture retention, blue for shrinkage, and purple for density.

 Here we have freshly washed hair and the first thing I like to do is put a layer of

 Our philosophy here at Confident Girls is really use what you like and what you can

 Here I'm using that Shea Butter Mixture and applying it all over my younger daughter's

 Notice that I'm constantly pulling down and the reason for that is because that helps

 You really want to avoid using combs with very small spaces in between the teeth because

 Since this is a young child, try to have a video on or some other distraction because

 it's really hard for them to sit still for long periods of time.

 For this first round, depending on how impatient my daughter is at the moment, I will do a

 Since today she was a little antsy, I decided to part the hair into two sections and create

 This is a great style when you're in a rush because you can always go back later and add

 With that part already in place that I put slightly off centered, I'm using a little

 more of that Shea Butter Mixture to gently pull down the hair and to separate any tangles.

 The way that we detangle is just by separating the strands away from each other.

 Depending on the texture of your daughter's hair, you may not need to even use a brush

 Since her hair is extremely tightly curled, it's very hard to smooth out her hair without

 If it hurts when you rub it against your wrist, it is too hard.

 To start, take two small sections of hair in your left and right hands.

 Place the hair that is in your right or dominant hand over the section of hair you're holding

 Use any free fingers you have on your left or non-dominant hand to hold down the section

 Use your right hand to detangle and gather another section of hair.

 Repeat this process by placing that detangled section that's in your right hand over the

 I'm going to show this again on the other side just to make sure that you got it.

 Use your left hand to hold down the hair as you work your way down your child's head.

 Use your right hand to detangle new sections of hair and bring them over the section of

 Once you get to the base of your child's hair, two strand twist the hair to the end.

 You can leave the hair like this or bring the two twists together for an even more protective

 This style is super easy and I find it relatively simple to detangle later on.

 Like I said, you can always touch this up throughout the week adding more parts if you

 Next time on Confident Girls Beautiful Curls, Crystal will continue her Shea Butter series

 by showing you how she touches up her younger daughter's hair in between washes.

 So let's just take a minute and review the tools we're going to use.

 got Blues Hog Original and we've got the Tennessee Red in here.

 We might mix some of that back in if it needs a little more flavor.

 knife here, maybe we'll chop some of it up on our cutting board.

 the first thing you probably want to do is remove the bone, which is over here near me.

 I'm going to show you, if you've never done one of these, I'm going to show you how easy

So there's seven different kinds of meat actually in here, but the trick is to pull

 but not too much, we're going to cut all that up and mix it in.

Now I'm digging in there, but I can also take the gloves off, as they

 say, and use these bear paws, look how good these work to rip this meat up.

 Now each one of these muscles, you see here, here's one of the muscles right here by itself,

 and don't let that bother you there on that video, you just want to make sure with these

 you don't poke through the bottom, or bam, or you're going to have greasy stuff, like,

 that works fantastic, and you know what, you don't burn your hands.

 ladies over here watching me, you girls want a taste, how do you do this?

 now you can take it out and put it on your cutting board, and chop it.

Well as we always say, we wish we should have smell-o-vision, because it

 dry, like this ain't dry, you can put a little apple juice on here, or if you have one that

 you put in the fridge for a while, and then you've got to serve it, you've got to kind

I've got to tell you, there ain't no pork better than pulled pork.

 some of that blues hog with sauce, I'll put it on the table, let my guests put it on if

 16 and a half hours at 225 degrees, and I ran it up to about 275 at the end to get it

You've got that big tray, now that will make about, I'd say at least 30 sandwiches,

Okay, so it's Fred Bernardo, the Smoking Guitar Player, signing off.

 is the pork butt video, there's probably other pork butt videos on our site at fredsmusicandbbq.com.

 Good morning everybody, this is Heidi Smith with Kiddos Corral and I thought, I actually

 didn't plan to make a video on this but then I thought, you know it wasn't very long ago

 My oven, it was Easter time and my oven had quit working and it was going to be a whole

 week before I could get a repairman to come to fix my oven and I wanted to make a ham

 for Easter and I was so frustrated I didn't know what to do so I called my mom and I was

 like really upset like this Easter is going to be awful, we can't have the usual ham and

 she told me that when she goes to Florida, they have a small house in Florida and so

 she said that she did this because in Florida it's so hot and you don't want to heat your

 house up, you know running your oven all day so she makes her ham in the crock pot and

 So I just thought I would share and this is sort of a no brainer kind of thing.

 I just bought a can of sliced, these are Kroger brand sliced pineapples and then I

 have just a sliced boneless ham from Kroger and today is Father's Day and my husband loves

 ham and it has been in the 90's and I thought, you know what I'm going to make a ham for

 dinner tonight, a special dinner for him and I'm just going to put it in the crock pot

 this morning because we are going to spend the day, well the afternoon in the swimming

 So basically all you do and I hope I can do this with one hand, is you just put the entire

 And I just kind of, you know, make sure it's on its side and all I do is pour all of the

 Now it is about 9 o'clock this morning and I am going to let this cook until about 5

 You just put it on low and you cover it up, which I'm going to get my lid.

 But anyways that's all you do and you know if it's like a Sunday morning and your family

 is getting together, you can throw your ham in the crock pot early in the morning or even

 My crock pot has a warm setting so sometimes I know that I want it for 10, 30, 11 o'clock

 I'll go ahead and cook it through the night and just turn it on warm, you know, through

 the morning so that it's already ready and prepared and all I have to do is come home

 I'm going to pair this ham off with some baked beans today, some homemade rolls, some hash

 Now the hash brown casserole I may make a video on, I haven't decided yet.

 So I want to say Happy Father's Day to everyone out there that's celebrating Father's Day

 I'm going to cook potato and eggplant tamarind fry for this recipe.

 eggplants, three eggplants I cut it into cubes and one large potato cut it

Then I have coriander powder a tablespoon and a teaspoon of chili

 powder with half a teaspoon of turmeric powder, salt, tamarind.

 tamarind concentrated one or the normal one just put hot water for the normal

 one and get the extract and I have some pandan leaves and curry leaves going to

 use a little bit of mustard and onion and a little bit of garlic and some red

So what I'm going to do is in a large bowl going to add the potatoes and

 the eggplants and the spices with the salt enough salt always to your taste

 and tamarind and I'm going to marinate this about 10 to 15 minutes before I do

 seeds I like to add a tablespoon of mustard seeds and let it splatter and

 after that into the same oil I'm going to add the curry leaves and the pandan leaves

 marinated potatoes and the eggplants because I added a very little oil I will

 need half a cup of water to drizzle on top to cook this so cook this on low

 ready and make sure when you cook this not to overcook because then the shape

 of the vegetables will disappear and this is how it looks like and I hope you

 This is sort of what I got from returning my stuff to Kmart if you guys saw that video

 So this is going to be this haul I have four different packages for you guys one big one and three good sized ones and

 I should have another one which was the yellow flame ring that I ordered, but it is not here yet

 I've wanted for a very long time and I found a really good deal for it

 I'm trying to complete all these series one through seven figures

 So most of the stuff I ordered was basically army building stuff other than flame rings

 I'm pretty sure this is the army buildable stuff that I ordered must actually positive

 So I found really good deals on these and these were like 15 bucks and I didn't order them

 So I found them for seven bucks each and I got a good deal on them

 and I ordered two of them because that's all I had and I'm planning on

 Army building as much as possible of these because there's many of them in the game

 But I can open them later and they do come with nice grenades and halo for me.

 Definitely really really good deal on these I can never find these anywhere else sold separately

 They were going for like 10 bucks each and I only actually had four of them

 I think it's like three four bucks each for these and these only come in one set which is the cauldron clash the orange ones

 One guy was on it for like ten bucks and I was a terrible deal and one cool thing is that they're actually sealed

 I believe in this cauldron flash bag or maybe resealed it or something.

So here is the biggest package and let's go ahead and see what's inside.

 Okay, awesome something I've been waiting on for a very very long time to get

 If you haven't already guessed it, I'm sure you guys actually didn't guess it

 Here it is right here the Halo 3 campaign co-op deluxe box set.

 50 and it contains the Arbiter which was a very rare series 2 McFarlane Halo 3 figure and

It does include a Halo 3 Master Chief, which I don't have and it does include

 An assault elite and a combat elite, which I don't know the names

 Return and I did order some stuff for my mock my new Mombasa mock

 All right, so summertime is just about here officially unofficial start of summer was on Memorial Day, but the official starts not till

 But it's not too late to at least feel better and look better in your swimsuit Diane Ryan is live learning exercises that will get you

I'm Diane Ryan here poolside at the Monderon hotel here in Scottsdale with a lady who wrote this book the six-week bikini

 Countdown and it couldn't come too soon and with me is Karen Carter and tell me a little bit about your book

 Exercises in here I do the book is tone your butt abs and thighs fast

 What can be what can say more right how fast what is that six weeks?

 I think six weeks is reasonable because you're losing weight for a long term

 Because you're losing weight for a long term you're not doing this bad

 Diet thing and the reason why I pick six weeks is because I combine cardio

 You got strength, and then you got Pilates, and you're saying cardio.

 Absolutely 50 minutes, and I've got intervals in there so you can maintain a 50 minute pace because that's how you lose weight

 You've got some other things that we can you can show folks at home how to do so show me one quick thing

 So let's do some leg exercises nothing better for your legs than squats and walking lunges

 Okay, like if you're doing a regular squat booty out because you want to you know wait out

 Way out tone that booty pull those abs in and you do three of these and then you just do a little hop at

 The end and that kind of gets your heart rate going and you want to do a couple of these

 It's all in the book how many you do and then we can go down to the mat

 We can do some great abs and some great outer thighs and butt work

 You've taken are from Pliades as well one of my favorite things to do

 Supercharged the Pilates with these two-pound balls you make it harder.

 The results we're talking losing inches and who wants who doesn't want to do that and of course do I dare say the cellulite word?

 We want to get rid of that and you can with weights, okay, I'm gonna come over here

 But I'm gonna work to keep them up, and I'm just gonna dip my little toes in the water

 You're feeling the burn on that one lately, and then we can do a crisscross for the obliques look at that work

 Yeah, this is the love handle area right how many of these should you do you do?

 Reps of five to eight in them because Pilates we don't do a lot of reps

 Joseph Pilates didn't believe in doing a lot of reps and now if we turn on to our side put the ball here and

 You can use a little small weight at home salute Lee and look I'm work.

 And it gives you heart benefits the weights burn as well and gives you the bone benefits

 And then the Pilates is all this toning, and then I you could go into an exercise

 These are all in my book by the way called hot potato look at this you're squeezing the booty as you go up

 So so easy to do they're so easy to do you can do them at home.

 The great pictures you can follow along and have fun with us and lose those inches for the summer

 How long do you exercise for when you do these kind of Pilates exercise about 50 minutes everything 50 to an hour?

 So it's a good thing that you can have and you can do at home with a mat and just some two or three pound

 Weights back to you guys Wow she's inspirational because she was fabulous.

 A red sauce or a simple marinara sauce is a staple in Italian cooking.

 I'm Sugar from Cooking With Sugar TV and today I'm going to show you how easy it is to make

 There's really no reason to buy ready made sauces when it's so simple to make your own

 sauce and when I make a big pot of sauce I make a huge pot so I'll freeze some of it

 in different size containers so that if I'm going to make a pizza or a pasta or any kind

 of parmesan I have different size sauces that I can pull right out of the freezer.

 Before we get started I want to talk about the tomatoes that you're going to use.

 To make your sauce you're going to want to use crushed tomatoes so you could either buy

 them crushed or whole and you can see the difference here because I've opened the cans.

 The crushed are already crushed and the whole come whole with some of the sauce so you could

 Most chefs or foodies will tell you that the best tomatoes to use for a sauce are the San

 They grow in Naples near Mount Vesuvius and they're supposedly the best in the world because

 the soil there has a lot of volcanic ash and it creates this amazing flavor in the tomatoes

 and they're beautiful and they're usually sold whole in a can but they're pretty expensive.

 So sometimes I might even combine these tomatoes with inexpensive crushed tomatoes depending

 The ingredients you're going to need to make this recipe are olive oil, onion, garlic,

 crushed tomatoes, bay leaf, basil, salt and pepper, and a pinch of sugar, optional.

 Before I start my sauce I like to chop my garlic and onion real fine.

 For the garlic I use about six to eight cloves depending on the size and for the onion I

 usually use about a half of a medium sized onion for four cans of crushed tomatoes.

 Add in your onions and your garlic and you're going to want to saute that for a few minutes

 and you don't want it to burn you just want them to get transparent.

 This is the perfect time to give it a little bit of salt and pepper.

 Just stir them in between and the garlic and they're ready for the tomatoes.

 You might need a whole can depending on how thick the sauce seems.

 I'm going to give this a stir and I'm going to add my bay leaf, my basil, and I just gave

 Give this a stir, let it come up to a simmer and then turn it down and it's going to cook

 So my sauce has been cooking about 45 minutes and in between I give it a good stir making

 Now's a good time to taste it to see if it needs any salt and pepper.

 Now I'm going to give it one more stir and if I wanted to I could let this cook longer

 So now I just cooked up some pasta and I'm going to put my sauce on top of the pasta

 There's really no reason to not make your own homemade sauce when you see how simple

 Make sure you subscribe because I am going to show you how to turn that basic sauce into

 a chicken parmesan, an eggplant parmesan and all kinds of other amazing Italian dishes.

 For more recipes like this make sure you log on to CookingWithSugar.com and make sure you

 I would love to know what you think of this recipe and some other recipes that you might

 Make sure you tune in next week and see me make this sauce into a chicken parmesan.

 I want to show you how to play Lullaby, the cradle song by Johannes Brahms.

 All you need to do is play C, G. I'm playing it in the key of C. It's very easy, it's very

 C, G, and then we've got a C chord, C, E, G, to an F chord, C, F, A, and then to a G7

 We're only going to play the F, G because in the left hand we'll play G, D, F. So we'll

 So we've got a C chord, and your F chord would be F, A, C, but I'm going to keep the C. So

 Then we go right into E, E, G, E, E, G, E, G, C, B, A, A, G, D, E, F, D, E, F, D, F,

 I'm playing it up an octave because it kind of sounds a little more like a music box.

 E, E, G, E, E, G, E, G, C, B, A, A, G, D, E, F, D, E, F, D, F, B, A, G, B, C. It goes

Then down an octave, C, C, C, A, F, G, E, C, F, G, A, G. And you can

 hold that back, F, G, A, G, anytime you get that line, C, C, C, A, F, G, E, C, F, and

 I like to do a little turn here, G, F, E, D, C, and then to end it, all you gotta do

 is... So you can go C, E, G, D, E, G, C. You can double that C if you want.

 then you're gonna play in the left hand C, E, G. Next time I'm gonna go C, E, G, so I'm

C, E, G, E, G, and B, F, and G, your G7, we'll play the B and the

 F and the G. Now you can, either time that you play that, you can arpeggiate that.

 we're gonna go, we're gonna play a G7, G, D, F, then a straight G, open fifth, G, D,

 G, and then we're gonna go G, D, B. So I'm gonna play the G chord three different ways.

 G, D, F, da da, G, D, G, da da, G, D, B, da, C, E, G, and with the right hand it'll

Same chords that we played, but I'll show them to you with an arpeggiated sound.

 Now the first time I'm gonna go up to the F and play the straight F triad arpeggiated.

 go A, so now we'll close up instead of going apart we'll close up with the A and the F,

 and then we're gonna let off on everything but the C, the G, and the high C.

 Today I'm planning to make a very famous flatbread in the Middle East.

 It's the flatbread that has the za'atar, the thyme and the olive oil mixture.

 And I'm going to put in, in this recipe, about three and a half cups of flour.

 And then I'm going to just mix it up before I add my liquid ingredients.

 As soon as it comes together into a ball, I put it out on my table.

 And now I'm going to, a little bit of flour, and turn out the dough.

 And this is an important step because the dough needs to, or I should say the protein

 So as soon as it comes together into a ball, in another bowl, I'm just going to brush it

 Cover it with a towel and leave it aside to proof about an hour and a half.

 Now what I'm going to do first is just take a little bit of flour and put it on the table.

 Okay, and then just with my cutter, I'm going to cut it in half and start with one.

 Okay, so from here, again, just a little bit of flour makes it easier to work with when

 The two fillings that I'm going to be doing is, of course, the zaatar.

 It also has sumac, which is that brown, crimson-colored berry that I actually have here.

 So I'm just going to put that in there, the zaatar, and then I'm going to add to it olive

 So I'm just going to mix it up until I have a creamy consistency.

 And the cheese, I'm using a combination of feta cheese, which I love, and because it

 So for the stretchiness, I'm going to add a little bit of mozzarella cheese that's been

 And then I also add a herb, and this is oregano, or it's dry oregano.

 Before I start, I'm going to put a little bit of oil on my baking pan.

 I'll start by taking one of the balls, and just with my finger, I'm going to pat it down

 This is why it was important to put the olive oil inside, so that it makes it easy to spread

 Okay, so I put on my cheese, and again here, and just spread it out.

 So just with my fingers, just like you would crimp the edges of a pastry, and I just pinch

 My manakish zaatar and jibni are ready for a cup of tea and someone to eat.

 Hey guys, so today I'm just going to show you how to make your own lip balm.

 So first you're just going to need a cheap brand lipstick, preferably a £1 lipstick

 A container of a lip balm you don't use, or you could just buy a container, but I just

 Then you're going to need a microwaveable bowl and a plastic or metal spoon.

 So first what you're going to do is take your plastic or metal spoon and put all the Vaseline

 Try and scoop out as much as you can out of the bowl so you get more product.

 Then as you can see it's melted and if you put it in for a bit more it will be completely

 We're not using all of that, we're just going to use how much we want and take out the rest

 I'm just going to smoothen it out to make it look nice and shiny and glossy.

 This is my first fuita by the way, so don't mind me, bear with me if it's really bad.

 So then you melt the mega flavour, sorry the nice tasting lip balm into the lip balm you

 So then take your bowl and pour everything into the little container and make sure all

 It doesn't look very smooth because I tried it out and it's absolutely great.

 So it's a very cheap homemade lip balm which is absolutely great and moisturising and unique.

 I bet no one has the exact same lip balm as you do so you could just go brag about it.

 Hello, I'm Jesus and this is video lesson 9 of Johann Sebastian Bach's Jesu Joy of Man's Desiring.

 We will be covering measures 19, 20 and 21 in this video lesson.

 On the 3rd fret from the previous measure, you will keep the barre.

 You will plug that together with the 6th string, 3rd fret from the barre.

 You will plug that note together with the 6th string, 3rd fret from the barre for beat 2.

 You will plug 6th string, 3rd fret together with the 1st string open for beat 3.

 Plug 6th string, 3rd fret, ring finger together with the 4th string, 4th fret pinky.

 Remove all the fingers except for the ring finger on the 6th string, 3rd fret.

 Beat 2, plug 6th string, 3rd fret and 2nd string, 3rd fret together.

 Beat 3, you'll plug 6th string, 3rd fret together with the 4th string, 2nd fret.

 you'll plug 2nd string, 1st fret, index finger together with the 6th string, 3rd fret, ring finger.

 Remove the pinky, plug 6th string, 3rd fret, ring finger together with the 4th string open.

 Remove the pinky, plug 2nd string, 1st fret, index finger together with the 6th string, 3rd fret, ring finger together for beat 3.

 Today I wanted to show you how I do my eyeshadow when I don't have that much time to get ready,

 And this is how I did my eyeshadow in my foundation routine video, and lots of you asked me to

 And then I take dark horse and just apply it in the outer corner.

 Then just blend into the lid colour and soften the edges a little.

 Usually I like to blend up towards the eyebrow, but for this look I'm just going to confine

 Next I'm going to take a smaller blending brush and apply a tiny bit of the colour creep

 Next I'm going to take a matte black on an angled brush and just line my lid.

 I like to leave the end blunt, but it also looks really lovely with a nice wing at the

 Next I'm just taking bug underneath the eye and then applying mascara to the top and bottom

 I like to use a clean mascara wand just to brush through the lashes in case they clump

 Finally I apply virgin as a highlight underneath the brow and then we're done.

In this video I'll show you how to make this checkerboard pattern cake.

 You'll need three different colored clays and three circle shaped cookie cutters that are different sizes.

 What I'm doing here is marking an X so I can find the center a bit better.

 Now, using the medium sized circle cutter, cut out the middle of the large circle.

 Now with the medium sized circle, use the small cookie cutter to cut out the center of that one.

 Once you're finished with that, you'll want to start putting the puzzle together I guess you could say.

 Once you finish that, you can start stacking them any way you like.

 That'll help prevent the colors from blending when you slice into it.

 And then just use a sharp and thin blade and cut straight down.

 And if you'd like to add texture, you could use a needle tool, a toothpick, or I have a nail here.

 I added some extra texture to the outside and some extra icing on the top and bottom, but that's all entirely up to you.

 So I've got my, um, my, uh, swivel or whatever you're going to use that you're tying your line to.

 And you want to double it over when it's through the eye, but I have trouble doing that when it's a, you know, a small swivel or whatever.

 So you stick it through, and you give yourself plenty, plenty of line.

 And again, you want to make sure you have plenty of line to work with.

 With a rope, obviously, for illustrative purposes, it takes a lot.

 And you want to keep this straight so it's not doubling over or twisting on itself.

 And you're going to keep that loop so that it's accessible later.

 So you wrap it around, and make sure that the line's not twisting over on itself.

 So you almost want it to stay parallel with each other while you're working with it.

 And it's a little bit harder to work with rope versus fishing line.

 But then you bring it back through that loop that you started with.

 And you're just going to pull it and cinch it down as tight as you can.

 Now when you're done there, and you've got it all cinched down like a regular cinch knot,

 you're going to go ahead and you're going to snip that about a quarter inch away from the knot.

 And you're going to snip these two ends, the loop that's left after you cinch the knot down,

 Otherwise it can fail because when it's pulled on sometimes it moves.

 But you always want to use your fingers and adjust it down just like a regular cinch knot that you would.

 In fact I've had barrel swivels broken on a snag when I was trying to get the gear back.

 Where I've had sometimes the cinch knots obviously do break on that.

 Typically I do it about four times around and then back through the loop.

 Unless I'm using really heavy line and like 25 pound and then I might only do three times through.

 If you're doing eight pound mainline and that's what you're tying it against, you might want to do five times.

 I wouldn't do any more than five times otherwise it just gets to be a mess.

 And today I'm going to make a really nice little halibut and panko crust with a flaming

 We're going to use some fresh herbs for this to make it taste really good.

 They're outside my little organic garden so let's get outside and grab some of those herbs

 I've got my cutting board here and I've got my sink right beside me over here.

 So I can get the water, I can chop the food and I can stir it all at the same time.

 And you might think I'm kidding, but I actually use these because they allow me to reach a

 little bit further into the garden and cut the stuff that I can't reach with the normal

 Alright, let's head back into the kitchen and whip up some good food.

 But I found a way to be independent in the kitchen now and this ulu has brought that

 It's got a really nice crunch, a little bit of a black licorice or an elise flavour.

 I've asked Natalie to give me a hand with our breading station for the panko breading

 If you cut off one side, just like that, then you just lay the pepper down.

 You never have to try to roll it or even find the seeds or anything.

 We're going to add our fennel in right now and get it going until it's nice and soft.

 I'm going to have my friend Natalie come over and drop in some of the halibut for me so

 I think it looks beautiful and I think it's going to taste even better.

 Join me next time to see what's cooking with Corey in the kitchen.

 Soy sauce is again made from soybeans and water, salt and using the koji, again like

 Long fermentation process gives the tastiness we call umami to add the beautiful flavor

 into the sauce and also that breaks down the starch to give the sweetness.

 That makes soy sauce tasty and slightly sweet, beautiful flavor and well known all over the

 But again same as miso, some companies just omit the long fermentation process.

 So they add some chemical to speed up the fermentation process which means that that

 What they do is that to add additives or MSG or corn syrup or sugar.

 So for example this one use organic whole soybeans, organic wheat, water and sea salt.

 So even though the soy sauce say naturally brewed or Honjozo, that naturally brewed and

 Honjozo means that they are doing the natural fermentation process.

 But I've seen the soy sauce it say naturally brewed but look at the label ingredients and

 So please don't just believe what they say, naturally brewed or whatever.

 The soy sauce obviously use wheat so many people are these days having the gluten intolerant.

 But actually during the fermentation process gluten is actually disappeared.

 So you actually don't need to worry too much about the wheat contents in the soy sauce.

 But if you are really worried you can always use tamari that is deeper flavor of the version

I've got quite a sweet tooth and I'm running out of money but I have got lots of

 stuff in my store cupboard so I thought can I make some of the things you can get in the

 So I'm going to make a sort of crunchy toffee thing of the kind that you sometimes find

 in chocolate or in a bag in nice sort of gift shops, things like that.

 of honeycomb toffee thingy thing without the chocolate because I might make the chocolate

 and a teaspoon as well, a wooden spoon, some sort of lined pan to put it in afterwards,

I am using very dark sugar here but it would probably be better if you

 use caster sugar, the very white light stuff that mixes really easily.

I'm going to use 4 tablespoons of that and 3 teaspoons of bicarbonate of

Then heat it over a medium heat for about 7 minutes until it's boiling, stirring

If you want you can add some sort of flavouring like vanilla essence or

 something else but not too much because you don't want to change the texture too much.

 boiling it up and stirring it the whole time you've got something that should look a bit

Now, I do not recommend using this recipe with little children around.

Now what you do is you take it off the heat and very quickly put in the bicarb.

 actually halved the recipe here because it's not very many of me.

And transfer it to your pot that you're going to leave it in to set.

This is actually me doing it for the first time in front of an audience of

 hundreds, if not millions, millions are going to see this, aren't they?

I think this might be the same recipe as for candy floss or cotton candy,

 I don't want to waste it but I don't really know what to do otherwise.

Okay, so learn from my mistake, always line it with greaseproof paper

 and then you can get it out again because now I can't get it out.

 have done because I didn't use the greaseproof paper, so you should.

Now all that's missing really is chocolate, so you could chocolate coat

 How do I make chocolate out of things that I've got in my cupboard?

 First of all I want to say Happy my sparkles to big thanks we hit 700

 Let's grow together, subscribe to my channel and be a official sparkle

 So today in this video I am gonna show you how to make pencil case out of paper towel roll the easiest way ever

 If you haven't checked my last back to school videos click here to watch it

 Trace two circle using paper towel roll then cut out two pieces

 Trace two circle using any round object this is must to be bigger than paper towel roll

 Do the same step to the other side and make sure you are doing inside of circle

 Repeat the same step cut into small stripes and fold inside like this

 Now come for the final step take a piece of paper measure width to your pencil box cut out and stick on your pencil box

 That's it you are done your very own home made pencil case is ready

 So I hope you guys like this video if you like please do a big thumbs up to this video

 If you are going to recreate this please send me pics on my social media

 And if you have any questions or any queries please do comment below

 More back to school videos coming soon so don't forget to subscribe my channel

 You know when I was a girl I loved ginger snaps, but we got the kind at the grocery store and I

 would always leave the package open because I like them to get soft.

So we're going to start by getting our dry ingredients together.

 to measure out two and a half cups of flour, two teaspoons of baking soda, a half a teaspoon of

 cinnamon, one teaspoon of ginger, and a teaspoon of ground cloves.

 little bit of salt, about a half a teaspoon, and then I'm going to get my whisk and I'm going to

 three quarters of a cup of softened butter and I'm just going to put the mixer on kind of a low

Now once the sugar is creamed up into the butter I'm going to drop in

 stop the mixer and we're going to pour all of our dry ingredients in at once.

 haven't been going for a fluffy consistency at this point and because of that when I put my

 mixer on low I only want to let it go until the flour gets mixed together and once that happens

 I stop the mixer and get a spatula just do one last mix up and then it's time to start dropping

 sugar and then I use my medium-sized cookie scoop and I drop the dough into the sugar kind of roll

 but for this one I just do about nine because I do like for them to have room to spread.

 flatten these we just leave them in nice little balls like that.

 cookies on your sheet it's time to put them in the oven so preheat your oven to 350 degrees

 and these are going to bake for exactly 11 minutes and when they come out of the oven they're going

See if we put a dozen they might have cooked together and that would have

 you know ruined the shape of them so nine is perfect on a sheet.

 parchment right off the baking sheet because if it stays on there the cookies will continue to cook

 cookie for us no more stale cookies and they're really great to make on a cold autumn afternoon.

 You know they smell great when you're baking them in your house and they're just delicious with a

 cookies just go to our website and visit the cookie jar show notes and I'll have the recipe

Also if you have any questions please feel free to send me an email.

 Hello, I'm Wayne McCluskey, Technical and Warranty Supervisor at ZF Services.

 Today we're going to discuss the shock absorber assembly on the VAG B5 platform.

 These vehicles have a multi-link suspension and feature a variable towing curve.

 The relationship between the shock absorber top and lower mount is offset.

 It is therefore vital that all of the suspension components are correctly aligned.

 A failure to do so may adversely affect vehicle handling and overstress other components.

 In order to correctly remove and replace shock absorber assemblies on this platform, we strongly

 Mount the shock absorber centrally into the lower mounting vice on the tool using the

 Place the index plate over the top mounting and secure using two nuts.

 Next, remove the shock absorber piston rod nut using the correct tooling as demonstrated.

 Tighten up the suspension rig arm, thus removing the top mounting.

 Remove the spring, spring assister, boot and rubber mounting, taking note of the position

 Mount the new shock absorber centrally into the installation rig.

 Install the lower spring pan rubber, spring assister and boot onto the shock absorber,

 Remove the arm from the rig and locate the new top mounting over the shock absorber.

 Install the top nut loosely and secure using the correct tooling.

 It is vital to ensure that the degree plate is aligned to zero.

 Finally, tighten up the top nut to the vehicle manufacturer's specified torque setting using

 The vital offset between the shock absorber top and lower mounting is illustrated here

 The new shock absorber is correctly aligned and ready for reinstallation.

 This concludes the presentation for shock absorber assembly for B5 platforms.

 I'm going to come to do the hairstyle I'm going to wear for today.

 I was supposed to have started re-braiding my hair last week but I was lazy and I didn't

 So I'm going to go ahead and get started on the hairstyle and I'll tell you about the

 First off, I just put my hair in two ponytails and it's kind of to the side like.

 So what I'm going to do, I'm just going to take little small sections of hair.

 I'm just going to take it and wrap it under and stick a hair pin in it.

 So I'm going to check it in the mirror and I'm going to add some little rhinestone clips

 in my hair and I'll show you the final results in the next video.

 tutorial and today I'm gonna follow so many of your requests that you requested to do

 of pencil and start creating a half moon shape around your mouth and also a couple of lines

 of the blending part is going to be on the corners of this half moon shape.

 take a black cream color or any type of product you have and line everything.

 white and start creating the effect of the lip on the upper part with a little bit of

 also line a little bit the blending, folding effect on the corners of this half moon shape.

 And then on the center of the half moon shape I'm going to create a line that goes from

 corner to corner on my lips and the upper and the lower start creating the shape of

 the complete effect but for now just create some half moon shapes or some half circle

And once we have this, fill in the central with black and now take

 again the white that we used previously and start filling in all the inside of each teeth

 areas that goes close to the black area add a little darker red and the really corners

 each teeth and once we have that done, fill in any possible gaps between these teeth and

 Now we are going to add a pink transition between the gums and the white of the teeth

 on the bottom teeth line and then I'm going to dirt a little bit the entire teeth area

 light on the top of some of the upper teeth and then create a really fine line on the

 bottom lip that is stretched and then I'm going to take on top of this white line I'm

 going to create a dark black line to create the depth and from this white line to the

 end of the bottom lip I'm going to add a little bit of pink to create that effect of

 the white and the dark in all the sides of the lips, upper and lower, on right and left

 and then we are going to start blending the shadows from the brown we created earlier.

 And we are going to be giving a little bit of highlighting between the brown lines we

 created on the folded part of the upper corners and then blend it really nice.

 going to be adding a little bit of black for really depth on the upper corners of the half

 moon, the areas that are closer to the folded areas and then we are going to be creating

 some pink effect, just create a line on top, just white and line everything on the other

 part with black to create a little more intense effect and we are done.

 Well guys, I hope you liked this makeup tutorial, that you put it on practice.

 please share a picture with me on my social networking just following by hashtag Halloween

 SilviaQuiroz so I can see it and also you can send there your request for Halloween

So thanks for spending some time with me, be happy and see you next one.

The amounts of the ingredients you're going to need to make this recipe will

 be listed in the information box below or you can find it on the website.

 you'll need sugar, flour, ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, ground ginger, and ground cloves.

 chopped walnuts, you'll need some pumpkin puree, melted butter, eggs, and vanilla bean paste.

 You're also going to want to preheat your oven to 350 degrees and line a muffin tin with cupcake

I have my flour already in this big bowl so I'm going to add my sugar and all of the spices

 always just substitute some vanilla extract and that would work.

Now I'm going to add the walnuts and the white chocolate chips and just stir this

I'm going to pull my dry ingredients back over and pour the wet ingredients on top

 the muffin tins and this is my ice cream scoop so I'm just going to drop it in.

 Now these go into the preheated 350 degree oven and we're going to bake them for 20 to 22 minutes

 done now and I've taken them out of the oven and I'll put them on the cooling rack and I'm

 going to let them cool for a few minutes before I move them to a serving platter.

 Today we're going to talk about the incline press and a couple quick coaching cues if

 Incline press is a little harder to implement into your program.

 You have a lot of bench press, you have a lot of horizontal plane, and then you also

 have a lot of overhead stuff with your Olympic lifts and just military stuff.

 With the incline you have a couple things that you have to address that are just a little

 The good thing about the incline press is you can implement that within a couple different

 parameters, whether it's going to be horizontal presses or vertical presses.

 When we set up for the bench press, same basic thing as the bench press for the incline,

 When the athlete goes, and obviously I would normally be spotting him, but when the athlete

 The difference is, when we tell someone for a bench press to come down basically in that

 xiphoid process, below that sternum area, below the pecs, upper ab area, it's a little

 We want to come down higher just below the collarbone, depending on the athlete.

 The key thing is, in the incline press, make sure that basically that index finger and

 If I'm drawing a straight line for my forearm, whether I'm talking about width, the forearm

 should be straight up and down, and when I'm talking from front to back, those elbows should

 If I'm too high or too low, what mostly happens is when I'm too low, now those forearms are

 basically having an angle where they're shooting forward, and I'm going to lose power that

 If I keep my shoulder blades retracted, just like I do on a bench press, and I bring that

 bar down to the correct point, I should be in the same area, in the same basic setup

 So again, when I'm pressing the weight up, obviously, everything's the same for the bench

 Now, if I'm going to go ahead and use a closed grip, my suggestion for beginners, probably

 use the same grip for the incline press because you're not going to implement the incline

 I would say just avoid various grips, but if you think you feel the need to do a closed

 grip incline press, a lot of powerlifters use it because it's a way to activate, again,

 Now you just have to make sure that you tell the athlete, you've got to bring that bar

 Anytime you have that grip farther inside, the bar's got to come a little bit lower because

 Now, what happens is, if I'm going to go ahead and increase the incline, and again, usually

 Hopefully you can implement some different inclines, but again, when the athlete comes

 Just understand that you're still doing the same basic coaching cue.

 I'm going to be now coming down, again, just below that clavicle and making sure you're

 Again, not too, not, not too so, so much that their elbow should be directly underneath,

 So that would be just a very basic structure for implementing those incline presses.

 And again, if we were going to go ahead and do the higher incline, then the J-hook's got

 to come up, or, and or, the bench has to come back as well if you have a higher incline.

 Just some basic cues to think about as far as, if you can have the athletes touch in

 the proper place every time, then again, they're going to be better and better at that

 movements and that's where the strength gains are going to come, especially with the beginners.

 The important thing about the cut is you don't want it to be too marbled.

 The rule is the thicker you cut it, the longer it will take to smoke it.

 It depends on how you like your jerky and how much time you want to dedicate.

 If you do 100% smoke, obviously you can finish in the oven or whatever.

 I'm going to do mine pretty thin because I want it to smoke up pretty quick.

 We're already going to be smoking this so it's kind of redundant don't you think?

 I am almost ready to make beef jerky but first I need to go get a few supplies.

 You could have went all wood on this but I find the charcoal keeps it at a steadier temperature.

 But in general, if we keep it between 150-160 right around there.

 Do not try this at home unless you're a trained pit master such as myself.

 You may not be able to handle the sheer weight of work that you have to do during this process.

 Probably a little too much for you so my suggestion is don't even try it.

 So I'm going to go inside now and I'm going to get a container to put this in.

 You want to pull it off before it's fully dried out or else it will be like shoe leather.

 Today for lunch I'm going to make a green smoothie in my Vitamix 5200 and I

 already have put about a cup of orange juice, a big handful of spinach, and then

 put in it, I don't worry about seeds and that kind of stuff, but if you're one of

 those people that just can't stand seeds, obviously you can either squeeze the

 lemon into a separate bowl or you can squeeze it upside down if you want.

 once you have all the lemons squeezed you can also add a full apple.

 to use a Granny Smith apple today and you can just, I just cut it up, I

 include the core, the seeds, just make sure you take off that little sticker if

 you, you know, buy it at a store where it has a sticker with the code on it for

 seeds are high in omega-3 and I'm one of those people that can't stand when you

 couponer so I get these free at CVS and I'll include a link to my guide to

 them for free but how you can get them for free is what I mean.

 vitacost.com where you can buy all sorts of natural ingredients.

 link to that as well in case you want to check out Vitacost and where you can get

 want to do is put on the top of the Vitamix which as you can see snaps on

 I mean as of August 2012 which is when I'm filming this, this sucker cost

There is a coupon code that you can use to get it with free shipping so

 seven-year warranty and they only have, they've sold like hundreds of thousands

 of these if not millions and they only have three technicians that work on them

 it's on one and it's on variable rather than high and then you're just going to

And then we'll, and then it slowly increases to 10 and I'm going to go high.

 Then you want to take it back to variable and back down to one and click

Now something that somebody once told me, if you are a raw foodie and you

 don't want your food cooked, you want to be sure to include ice in this because

 the Vitamix blade goes so quickly that it could end up cooking the food.

 have it all ready, put it in the freezer and then it's a lot easier to work with

 You always want to bring it back down to one before you turn it off.

 safety precaution because you know if you think about this, I just turned it

 back on after putting the ginger in and if it had been on high, it would have

 extra fruits and veggies in your diet, this is a great way to do it.

 you put spinach with fruit, it kind of kills the spinach flavor and keeps the

 what it looks like and then you can kind of see what the consistency is there.

 about ways to eat fruit or learn more about fruit type products, please

 subscribe to our YouTube channel where we feature stuff like this all the time.

 Healthy, soft skin has a radiant glow and shows your health and beauty from the inside

 Drinking lots of water and eating your fruits and vegetables is the first step.

 The next step is cleansing and exfoliating with natural, healthy beauty products.

 All the ingredients come straight from the kitchen and they naturally moisturize and

 Three tablespoons of finely powdered oats, a tablespoon of honey, two tablespoons of

 warm whipping cream, and a bowl that we're going to mix it all in.

 And you can either just put this on the stove or pop it in the microwave.

 And because the cream is warm, the honey is going to melt so nicely.

 When you whisk it together, you can smell that cream and honey working together.

 And honey is a natural humectant, so it's going to add moisture to your skin.

 Now that you're ready to cleanse, you can just apply this wet to your face and just

 And the roughness of the oats are going to exfoliate your skin and leave it smooth and

 So now that we've exfoliated, we're ready for a rehydrating mask.

 Four tablespoons of finely powdered oats, which I already have here.

 And then I can just take the peel and rub it straight on my skin.

 When you're ready, you can pat the mixture gently over your face and let it dry for 15

 You'll find a taste of Thai products in your supermarket's Asian foods aisle.

 Now I'm just adjusting it so the dark pink doesn't poke through.

 But you can set it so the twist is lower to the bottom or center.

 Now with this recipe, we actually show you on the actual recipe how to make almond milk.

 Today we've already prepared it, but we soak the almonds overnight.

 So that's simply all you do is soak the almonds overnight and put them through a blender.

 And our other beautiful secret ingredient is the coconut water and the coconut flesh.

 So delicious, and you don't actually need the water now because we aren't going to do those almonds.

 The dates are what actually sweetens this recipe as such, as opposed to using any type of sweetener.

 So we're going to blend this up now and then we'll fold in the other ingredients.

 So what we're going to do now, this particular recipe doesn't have to be ultra smooth because it's a pudding.

 You can do it in a bowl too, but since we have the blender here, we'll do it here.

 Chia is full of omega essential fatty acids and is amazingly healthy for your body.

 We don't need to blend that in, but what we then do is we put this in the refrigerator and leave it set for a couple of hours.

 I'm just going to show you some basic guidelines and what I think myself tastes good.

 Now a couple videos back, you guys might remember, I showed you guys how to make your own chips.

 And basically with the chips, all that we did was we took some whole wheat pitas, sprinkled

 a little olive oil on there, added some spices, and baked them in the oven.

 And there'll be a link to that on the screen if you want to watch it.

 So first off, what you're going to do is take a little bit of chicken or whatever kind of

 And I'm going to chop it up in this little slap chop thing that I bought.

 But you could do this by hand, but it just might take a little bit longer.

 So if you guys were ever wondering if the slap chop thing actually works, it actually

 So now that I have my shredded chicken here, what I'm going to do is sprinkle that onto

 So now as you guys can see, I have the chicken that we chopped up on top of these chips.

 And now what I'm going to do is add a couple tablespoons of this fresh cut low sodium

 And in addition to the salsa, I'm also going to add a little bit of cut up jalapenos.

 And then I'm going to sprinkle a little bit of this salt free seasoning.

 And then I'm going to add a little bit of hot sauce just because I kind of like spicy

 But bottom line is we're just going to be using a half a cup of shredded cheese.

 So now that we have the cheese and all the ingredients added on top of the chips, there's

 You can wait for your oven to preheat and then it would just take a little bit of time.

 Or you could just stick the nachos in the microwave just until the cheese melts.

 Basically we just need the cheese to melt for these to really be nachos.

 But I'm just going to put these into the microwave for about a minute or until the cheese melts.

 And remember if you want to see how I made the chips there will be a link to that on

 And if you like this recipe check out my blog for more down below.

 I've already used a timing wheel and I've already marked my alternator.

 Now on the crankshaft, there's a little notch in the crankshaft to let you know where the

 Triumph makes a tool, but you don't, I mean, you can, it makes it real easy or you can

 I've already marked my alternator top dead center at 38 degrees before top dead center

 Now we're going to stick the little screwdriver in and you're going to feel real gently the

 Now once you feel that notch, you know you're at top dead center.

 Now you're going to pull your screwdriver out of the little notch.

 We're going to rotate it back 38 degrees before top dead center.

 Now my crankshaft and my pistons are setting about 3 eighths, maybe half an inch before

 Now I've put this little piece of paper in here between the points to give you some idea

 Or in other words, we want the points to open at 38 degrees before top dead center.

 Now we're going to rotate this magneto backwards until we're able to pull this piece of paper

 Now once you can pull that little piece of paper out, you want to lock your magneto down

 A couple things you want to check is the gap inside the points.

 Anyway, once you get that little piece of paper to pull out, 38 degrees before top dead

 You don't really want to take your magneto off, but if you do, there's a little coupling

 Once you get it in the right position, you want to go through the timing process.

 You may have to play with it, but that's how you time a Triumph.

 Today we're going to be working on a Pride Jazzy Select 6 mobility chair.

He wants us to check the batteries and if need be, replace them.

 So the first thing you need to do when you're taking a look at the Jazzy is you're going to have to remove the seat.

 The first is going to connect the arm controller to the actual scooter.

 And the second is going to be this single lever here, which when you pull it back will release the actual seat itself.

 Make sure you unplug this portion first before moving the lever and pushing the seat upwards.

 So after you've done that, you're going to get to the actual base of the scooter itself.

 All you have to do here is just go ahead and pull up and away the actual cover.

 And as you can see, you're open terminals, everything's open to the view here.

 So you can make sure everything's nice and tight prior to checking the batteries.

 Okay, so the first thing the customer has requested that we do is test the batteries themselves to see if they're bad.

 Now according to him, he's just purchased the chair, so it's already been sitting for an indefinite amount of time.

 To do that, you've got to expose each of the positive and negative terminal of both batteries.

 Just by removing these plastic pieces and working them down the wire here.

 Once we do that here, we use our voltmeter and we set it to the 20 volt DC side.

 And we'll just touch positive to positive and negative to negative on the same battery.

 So the first thing we're going to do here is we're going to loosen up and remove these wires.

 Every time you do this, you want to make sure that you're not touching the wires that are on the battery.

 Everything on this particular JSC Select 6 model here is going to be 10 millimeter.

 And we've gone through and loosened up all the connections prior to this.

 Now I personally like to remove the wires from both batteries here.

 Eliminate any possibility of shorting out while you're installing the batteries.

 And make sure you do keep the hardware here because you're going to be reusing it.

 As you can see, there's only two sets of wires here, clearly identified so you can't mix them up.

 So we're going to go ahead and hook the positive up here first.

 I like to hook up the positives here first to eliminate any possibility of shorting on the frame itself.

 I just think it's a good idea in general whenever you're dealing with more than one set of wires.

 Okay, and when you're done there you can just put the cover back on.

 And you've successfully replaced the batteries in your Jazzy Scooter.

Now the low screw determines how far it moves inboard, which is the low

 gear, and the high screw affects the high gear, or how far the derailleur moves outboard.

 pulley moves inboard, and when we let it out, of course it moves the other way.

 allow the derailleur to move a little farther outboard and carry the chain with it, and

 gear screw out a little and the derailleur will move farther inboard, carrying the chain

The problem here is that if the derailleur moves too far inboard, it

 set, the top pulley on the derailleur will be directly below the center of the big cog.

 shifting problems that are going on in the middle range of the cassette.

 either it'll hesitate to shift or it'll shift more than one cog at a time.

Watch how the shifting is hesitant as it goes from the smallest to the

That's an indication that there's not quite enough tension on that cable.

 notice we'll check it on the low gear range as well as the high one.

 the adjustment right, it'll shift crisply through the range, both going up and going

 high gear, it'll align in the middle gear, and that pulley will align with the biggest

 Let's bring some nostalgia to you guys with the classic cream soda with DJ BBQ.

 So we got our glass, we got our teaspoon, let's start with the ingredients.

 Two teaspoons of sugar, pinch of cream of tartar, a couple drops of vanilla extract

 and then it's the turn of this bad boy, the lemon, limon, limona.

 Alright so there's our lemon peel and I want to squeeze and get those juices to release

 And now for the penultimate ingredient, like that I use the big word penultimate, you like

 We're going to go with about 400 ml of club soda, carbonated water.

 It reminds me about being a kid man, my mom hooking me up with like a cream soda.

 If you like this quick and easy recipe man, there's loads more on my channel, but it's

 So I've got rad stuff over on Drinks Tube, I ain't even kidding.

 Thanks for watching, I'm DJ BBQ, that's cream soda, and you're awesome.

 This is going to be a video of how to change the batteries in your little First Alert smoke

 Now mine does not need to be replaced, but say this is the new battery, you take this

 I'm not that pleased with BRK or first alert smoke detectors, but it works.

 There's my old, well not old, but video camera that I used to use.

 That's just a little video describing how to change the battery in your smoke alarm.

 One of the wooden carvings had come off from one of the sides and it needed to be glued

 I've been meaning to make some kind of stand for the lathe tools.

 Right now when I turn stuff the tools are kind of scattered about on the lathe bed and

 Be nice to have them in one place and not rolling around and possibly falling on the

 So I was going to make a, it's sort of an H shape with a bottom.

 I wanted to get the height of the upper holder correct so I measured those against the actual

 And the dados weren't so much for strength, it doesn't have to be that strong, but it

 helps in laying out the piece as the horizontal pieces will have a place to go.

 Once I had the pieces cut out I needed to lay out where I wanted to put the holes for

 I have a two inch drill bit that I can use for the upper holes.

 And if I get the fence lined up right I can just slide the work piece along and drill

 And on the bottom piece I wanted to make a smaller hole for the end of the tool handles

 So I have a, it's like a one and an eighth inch bit I think or something like that.

 So I made some shallow holes that don't go all the way through on the bottom piece.

 Mostly just to get the burrs off the holes left there from the drill bit.

 I realized I should hold the piece square while the glue dries.

 Since this is tippy I thought I would screw it down to the top of my lathe cabinet.

 I have a radio in the kitchen that I like to listen to when I'm cooking.

 But it's a really silly design where it's sort of tall and thin and it just doesn't

 So I thought it would be nice to make a little wooden base for it.

 So I have some scraps of tropical hardwood that were left over from the legs from the

 It's sort of a funny shape with an angle on one side and a curve on the other side.

 So I sort of had to do some carving with the dado blade to find that shape.

 It fits really well and it holds the radio up actually really well.

So today I have a quick review for you on a product that I have absolutely been in love with lately

 I can't tell you guys how much this product like is in my routine

 I bought this NYX tinted brow mascara, and I got this at Ulta it was about six dollars

 I purchased this shade espresso, but it's a little too dark, so I haven't been using this one

 But I do really like this shade called chocolate which I have in my brows today.

 It basically just says to use this to fill in your brows for a defined natural and clean look

 But this is just a simple tinted brow gel, and I love it so much

 I can't say I've ever tried anything else that has worked so well for me.

Gimme brow so you do have to work with it, but it is very easy to use still

 It's very easy to just kind of do your whole brow and like one sweep with this

 I love the fact that it doesn't have a funky shape to it like the Maybelline brow drama

 That thing was just a whole nother story that one was very wet for me, and this isn't it's not sticky

It doesn't feel it doesn't make your brows feel crunchy either kind of like the Anastasia brow gels do all right

 So here's my brows with no product in them, and I'm just going to apply the brow mascara today

 No powder usually I do like to apply a tiny bit of the NYX brow cake powder

 Start lightly at the like first inner part of the brow work into the arch

 Because you know how it's it just tapers and it gets thinner towards the end of the brow so if you want to leave it

 Whatever you choose to do and even this part of my arch where I don't tend to have as much hair as the front

 I love that it just kind of glosses over that patch of the skin

 It just it really does fill in nicely my favorite part about this is that it's very easy to use and also

 It's super inexpensive, and it has a nice amount of pigmentation to it.

 I would recommend it to anybody who likes to fill in their brows whether you prefer a dramatic look a more simple look

 I think this is going to just be a hit for a lot of people because it's so easy to use

 It's ridiculous, and I think it fills in pretty well even on the areas where I tend to have less hair in my brows like in

 So even if you don't have big brows like I do even if you don't have like a lot of hair

 I still think this is something you might want to try out alright guys, so that's it for this review

 Hey guys, so today I'm going to be giving you guys a really fun tutorial to do.

 It's a really pretty bronzy, glowy tutorial and it's going to be a talking one.

 I'm going to talk during it, so if you don't like that, then please let me know.

 But I'm going to be doing a really, really, really fun tutorial today.

 So pretty much this tutorial is going to explain how to get really bronze and glowy

 So all together this look is super bronzed and super glowy, so it gives your face that

 nice shine and lift that it needs, but it also keeps your face nice and bronzed for

 Okay, so what we're going to do first is we're going to go in with a bronzer and I'm just

 going in with the NARS Laguna Bronzer and I'm taking a big fluffy powder brush and I'm

 taking my bronzer and I'm just going to dip it in and I'm going to just start using this

 pretty much around my cheekbones and I'm also going to be starting to use it up here near

 my temples and I'm going to focus it more around here, but I'm also going to bring it

 And doing this is going to help give a really pretty bronzy glow to your face without making

 Okay, the next step is we're going to be going in with the MAC Mineralize Skin Finish and

 this is in Petticoat and I'm going to take this and pretty much just dip my angled brush

 in and you don't need this exact powder, you can just use any bronzy pink blush that you

 have and I would recommend that it has shimmer in it just to give you that glow.

 And we're going to take this and just apply this to our cheeks and bring it back a little

 bit and this is automatically just going to give us a really pretty glow and it's super

 Okay, the last step to this is we're going to be using our highlighter and this is the

 MAC Lustre Drops and you can use whatever highlighter you want, you don't have to use

 And so I'm going to just take this and I'm going to apply it to my cheekbones, down my

 nose and to my cupid's bow and this is going to give the glow that we want to this look.

 So having glowy skin in the summertime is definitely something that is a really big

 So as you can see here, I'm just applying a little bit of highlighter to my cheekbones

 The next step is going to be eyes and I'm using my Revlon eyeshadows in Precious Metals

 and they just look like this and they're really great for the summertime.

 So I'm going to be applying these to my eyes so I'm going to zoom up a little bit.

 Okay, so what I'm going to do is I'm going to get our first in with this really pretty

 yellow color here and these are all cream so you don't really need to use any brushes

 So I'm going to be taking this and I'm going to just apply this to my eyelids.

 So next what we're going to do is we're going to go into this brown color right here in

 the palette and we're going to just dip our finger into this also and if you feel like

 you want it to be a little bit more precise then go ahead and use a brush.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm next going to take this color and just start applying

 Okay, so the last color I'm going to take is a really deep dark brown cream shadow and

 this is just the NYX jumbo pencil in French Fries and so just take any deep brown color

 you have and I'm going to apply this to the outer corner also and this is just going to

 define up the look even more because I feel like the look is still a little too light.

 So just going in with this here and just applying it there and I'm going to take this and I'm

 Okay, so now next we're going to go with eyeliner and pretty much for eyeliner I'm just taking

 this brown Smashbox eyeliner and you can take whatever brown eyeliner that you own and we're

 just going to take this and smudge this into our upper lash line and lower lash line.

 So I'm just going to take this and bring it onto my upper and lower lash line.

 Okay, so the last step for eyes is mascara so I am just applying some mascara to my eyes.

 You can use whatever mascara you want and this is just going to finish up our look.

 Okay, so now what we're going to do is do the lips and this is my favorite part.

 For the lips we are going to be using a really shimmery lip color so just try to go through

 your collection and find a really pretty shimmery lip color that has more of a brown undertone

 to it and so I am using this one here which is Bare Necessity by MAC and I don't know

 if you can see it that well but this is probably one of the prettiest nude lip glosses that

 So any, like I said, any shimmery neutral kind of brown toned lip gloss will really work for this look.

 I gave you guys a really pretty bronzy glowy face that you can use and I hope you guys

 Today I'm going to show you how to make a pina colada smoothie like you find in many

 The first thing we're going to do is we're going to go ahead and dump in about a cup

 We're going to add a couple of tablespoons of this cream of coconut.

 We've just made a pina colada smoothie just like you'd find in the mall.

 Please be sure to rate, comment, and subscribe so you can see what's cooking next.

 You're the one I want, I believe in yourself in the way I believe in you

 Next I'm going to be filling in my eyebrows with my NYX eyebrow cake powder

 Then to set my eyebrows in place I'm going to be taking my essence brow gel and just applying that right over my eyebrows

 Moving on to my lips I'm taking my Covergirl Jumbo lip gloss and basically this is a pinky nude color and I'm going to be applying this all over my lips as well as my Victoria's Secret Tiny Baby lip gloss

 Moving into hair I'm going to be applying a heat protectant all over my hair to protect it from getting damaged

 Taking my Conair curling wand I'm going to be curling my hair in sections

 Once I'm done curling my hair I'm going to take my straightening iron and curling the front pieces of my hair just so it's not blending in with the rest of my curl so it's not too tight of a curl

 Then I'm going to be pulling my bangs back and just pinning them to the back of my head

 Then go ahead and hairspray that into place and you are done with your girly hairstyle

 Then my bracelet is from Target and my earrings are from Charlotte Russe

 My dress as well is from Charlotte Russe and it has this cute heart cut out on the back that I just love and it just goes perfectly with this outfit and it is the best girly outfit that I could think of

 I hope you guys enjoy this and please let Kayla and I know which character you're excited for.

 Okay boys and girls you all think I'm crazy and you're right I am totally

 crazy but I'm going to take and show you how to pull a nib and feed with a pair

 of dirty old Foo-Kung... I'm not even going to read that... pliers.

 pliers over this so that they're basically... let me see... like this.

 where the nib goes and where the feed goes and there's so much ink on this.

 All you do is you take this little stick, touch it against the thing, make sure the

 this is what you're pushing against right there and the stick needs to be

We show you how to make healthy nutritious treats for your puppy.

 we have scissors, a fork and a spatula and a plastic bag for piping.

 Add the milk and the flour to the bowl and stir briskly with a fork.

 The mixture needs to be lump-free, smooth and a thick consistency.

 If the mixture does not seem thick enough just add a little more flour like I have and continue to whisk.

 Lastly add your grated cheddar cheese and stir together to combine.

 Microwave oven temperatures can vary so take the bowl out and stir briskly with a fork.

 Stir the cheese and thoroughly until it's all melted and the mixture is very smooth.

 Let the mixture cool down a little and then spoon it into a piping bag.

 Squeeze the mixture right down to the corner of the piping bag.

 If you did please subscribe to our channel so that you can be kept up to date with our weekly uploads.

 Okay, for instance, when I wanted to make this one adornment for the Oscar collar, it's

 So I come to my brass design center here and I choose each of the pieces.

 I take the large brass piece and then I solder the medium size onto that and then the small

 onto that and once they're soldered together, I turn them over and then solder the female

 part of the Chicago screw to the back and I'll just turn on my torch here.

 See once it gets heated up, the solder will go on there and spread nicely and then I can

 take my, the female section of the Chicago screw and make sure to get some solder on

 Once that's on, I'll take that and heat it together so that the two soldered pieces are

 heated up and the solder goes to, mixes with each other and then I'll flip it over, heat

 There, I'll take, these are titanium tweezers, take that, try to place that as evenly on

 Okay, take that and with a steady hand as I can get, place that on top, heating it up

 so it kind of melts together and then I'll let that cool and it's done.

 It's a marinated salmon and I have some dill because I did a video first and made some mistakes so I redo this video.

 Okay, chop the dill and this is a mixture of salt, crushed white pepper and sugar.

 Roughly, this is two thirds of sugar, two thirds cup of rock salt, big salt, not rock salt, sea salt and around four teaspoons of white pepper.

 Here is the white pepper and you grind it or crush it, whichever way you like.

 Put the salt mostly on the skin because the skin does not get the salt too much.

 It is just because I myself am not originally from that region.

 My friend who is a Norwegian, what they do is every day they turn it over one time.

 Every day at the same time, seven o'clock in the evening, turn it over.

 Alright, Progress here with a cortatoil for the song The One off the new Good Music album

 So in the left hand, actually I'm going to play a little lower.

 In the right hand you're going to have an E, an A, and a C sharp.

 For the second chord it's going to be some type of C sharp minor chord.

 In your right hand you're going to have an E, a G sharp, and a C sharp.

 You're going to have a B in the left hand, and a D, an F sharp, and a B in the right hand.

 So if you want to play the melody line, it's going to go a little something like this.

 But just for easiness sake, I'm just doing it with the regular block chords.

 But to kind of go through that song, it's kind of going to go like...

 So it is 10 after 8 on Friday night and I've got my picnic shoulder pork picnic shoulder.

 So yeah, I've rubbed this gingerly with love and talked to it and made it feel nice about

 And now I'm going to take it out and slide her into the smoke-o-rama.

 But I am going to show you me washing my hands because that's very important for food safety.

 I don't want other bacteria and stuff infecting the food that I am cooking this evening.

 And then I'll just use this regular old thing that's probably full of bacteria and wash

 And I think it's because he's so excited about his big day today with pulled pork.

 Oh, it's almost like it's just falling apart like it's supposed to.

 Hi, it's Bitty Baby 123 321 and I'm making my second YouTube video.

 You will need a paper towel and you will need a bowl of water that's warm.

 Take the ponytail and put your doll's hair up in a ponytail, bun or braid.

 After that, you can throw the wipe away because we won't need it anymore.

 The next step is to take a new wipe and clean the palms of her hands and the bottom of her

 Once you've done that, throw the wipe away because we won't need wipes anymore.

 Your next step is to take the paper towel and dip it in warm water.

 Once you've done that, wipe off her arms and scrub off all the little marks.

 After you do it to the arms, you can do it to the legs and the neck and any little extra

 You can wet it a little more each time you need it a little more wet.

 Once you've done that, use the other side of your paper towel to dry her arms and legs

 And that is how you clean off your American Girl doll or Bitty Baby.

 quick little segments that will help you with your makeup in a jiffy!

 your annoying friend has been trying to set you up for over 6 months now

 or before that big 6 figure job interview at the world's top makeup company

 that will leave your lips looking like a deformed alien baboon's ass

 Alright, let's go step by step to create these amazing full and sexy lips!

 that is one shade lighter than your skin tone to contour your lips

 Not only it will create light, it will also prevent from the lipstick to feather

 I find a luster finish is the best to create those full lips you want

 Apply some gloss in the inner center of your lips to create a pout

 Apply a little bit of it with your finger in the middle of your lips

 acquired taste, perhaps you're at the Olympics right now and you've seen those

 shops selling them or perhaps you've gone home and you're just looking for a

 forget to subscribe to my channel and stay in touch, comments below whether you

 food and knowing where it comes from and I bought fresh eels or I have fresh

 eels for this recipe and I've done the videoing of how to prepare the eels.

 They're really very tricky, very slippery animals to to deal with and they're very

 difficult to kill and dispatch but not so difficult if you know what you're

Now I've done a video of this, I don't want to upset people by putting up

 be putting it up with this video but I really like comments down below.

 know what you think, whether I should be including that video in my channel, maybe

 Now the first step is to bring a large pot of water up to a boil, have fairly deep water, a couple of inches deep and we're going to add a quarter cup of salt into that and we're just going to let that come up to a rolling boil.

When your water has come up to a nice rolling boil and all the salt has dissolved, we're just going to turn off the gas and we're going to add a little bit of water.

 Now this is the eel I prepared earlier and I've cut them into sort of inch and a half, two inch pieces and I'm just going to drop every one into this boiling hot water and we're just going to allow them to sit in this hot water for five minutes.

Now all the pieces of eel are in the water and the gas is turned off and they're just going to soak in there for five minutes.

 And then we're just going to take them out and drain them off and then we'll move over to the next stage.

Now I've taken our eels out of the hot water and I've popped them into another smaller pan here so you can see they're starting to cook through a little bit but we're going to take the rest of the ingredients.

Now I've got a teaspoon of parsley, add that to the eel and a couple of bay leaves, dry bay leaves.

Now take a whole bunch of black peppercorns and I'm going to add a little bit of salt to that.

 Now I've got some whole peppercorns, now take whole peppercorns and just crack them up in a mortar if you have or you can just use a pepper mill but I'm going to add, that's about 10 to 12 peppercorns in there.

I've got some nutmeg as well, I'm just going to grate some fresh nutmeg.

 These are all the lovely flavours that give the jelly eels their distinct and subtle taste.

We're going to take about half a carrot sliced very thinly and just add that to the mixture as well and I've got a small onion which we've sliced again very thinly, add that into the pot.

 Now I'm just going to take a little bit of lemon juice, so I've got a fresh lemon here and I'm just going to squeeze that into the pot, just a squeeze of fresh lemon juice in there.

I've got a quarter of a cup of malt vinegar, that goes in as well and then we're just going to top this pot up now until the eels are covered.

 So we just add that now until the eels are covered by water, by about a centimeter or so, that will do.

So now I'm just going to take that pot, put it onto the hob and bring it up to a boil and then cut the heat right down and let it simmer for a further 20 minutes.

 Now stop press, I did forget to put my sea salt in, so that's been simmering for a minute or so now, I just add the sea salt into the mixture as well, that's a teaspoon of extra sea salt.

 Okay our eels have been simmering very gently for 20 minutes and if you just take a knife you'll see that they're lovely and tender.

Now we've got to get them out of this pot very gently and put them into an earthenware pot.

 So I'm going to use tongs or you could use a slotted spoon and just lift each piece out individually and lay it in the pot.

 So now I've put all the pieces of eel into the earthenware pot and there's a few bits of onion and carrot in there, don't worry about that, that's perfectly okay.

We're just going to strain the rest of this juice off now because this is really a big part of the recipe.

 So I've just put that through a sieve and get all the rest of the pieces out of there and we're going to take the rest of this sauce, the river eel has a natural gelatinous extract in it which makes this whole sauce we've put on here now is going to set like a jelly.

 So now we've got the sauce in there and the eels, I'm going to leave that on the side in a cool area to cool down and when that's cool enough I'm going to pop that into a fridge and let it set.

 So there are our jelly eels, see the jelly quivering in the plate, that's just the gelatin from the eels themselves and it's set nicely around the eels, there could have been a bit more liquid in here to be honest and if you find the gelatin doesn't set you might have to add your own gelatin but this is just purely the gelatin that's been produced by the eels.

 So we'll take a serving of the jelly eels, just pop it into a pot.

 So get your jelly eels, lots of gelatin and just give it a try, come on give it a try.

 You can serve that with a little bit of chilli and vinegar, it has the bone in it so in the centre you're meant to suck the meat from the bone.

 We're still at SHOT Show wrapping up on the last day, but there's some things I'd like

 We have redesigned the belt clip design on the P20A2, C2, and the T20C2 to prevent it

 from coming off under basically any possible circumstances, short of catastrophe of course.

 The cap is still about the same, but what we've added is this locking ring.

 So how this works is you're going to slide the belt clip, snap it into the groove, make

 sure there is a key so it sits in there, and you take this lock ring and you spin it on

 Push the O-ring back down into place, tail cap goes back on, and now your belt clip is

 Additionally, we have redesigned the lanyard holder, and it is this piece right here.

 It is high strength plastic, it's also two pieces, snaps together like so, and then fits

 in the groove right there, snaps together, and there you have it.

 We'd also like to announce that we've already incorporated the new Cree XML LED into the

 The XML is a little larger of a die, producing a little bigger hot spot, but it's good for

 close to 500 lumens, so this thing really throws out some light.

 We've also got the new LEDs into our M3C4 light, and this will be the successor to the

 It is actually smaller than the SST50, which results in a hotter spot and more throw.

 This is really impressive when you put it up against that one, so this will be a hot

 My last couple of videos I've been doing boil tests on this Transgea kit that I got from

 The first one I did was with the alcohol burner in the top like it should be.

 This got two cups of water starting at 60 degrees to a full boil in 8 minutes and 39

 I think the pot's not high enough up off this to get us a good time.

 I've had several people suggest that I cut these back and bend them up more, but this

 is hardened or something and it looks like if I bend it, it's going to break.

 The second test I did where I put the burner on the ground and had it come up through,

 that gave us a time of two cups of water, 60 degrees in 5 minutes and 52 seconds.

 The third set was turning the pot stand upside down, putting the burner in like that.

 Even so, this got us a time of two cups starting at 60 degrees, came to a full boil in 6 minutes

 What I want to do today is one more that's been requested to do it this way, the second

 You could use anything you wanted, the aluminum foil that people use, whatever.

 In the summer it's a little hard to get the water to the exact temperature.

 Okay, there won't be any camera 2 on this because frankly there won't be anything to

 There'll be a little bit of room here for the oxygen should come in from underneath,

 heat up the air and everything, and I'm leaving just enough space on the top here for the

 I thought I'd just open the door, which is one of the nice things about this Oli-Camp.

 Even with the door closed I can see that it's getting enough air from these slots underneath.

 Last time without the windscreen, see now the windscreen is warm, but I can handle it

 The first time when I ran it without the windscreen, two cups of water at 60 degrees

 This time it was two cups of water at 58 degrees instead of 60, two degrees cooler.

 Now part of the thing is, in here the windscreen adds a little bit as far as letting the heat

 As far as wind and everything in here on my desk, on my worktop rather, it's not going

 to make a big difference because there isn't any real wind in here other than my talking.

 And on this, for bringing the heat up, the water in this is only up to here really.

 Now if this was a full pot where we had water going in the whole thing, bringing the heat

 up along the side would really help, but because it's so short, I guess in this case it just

 Two cups of water, 58 degrees, came to a boil in 5 minutes 47 seconds.

 If it's not on the screen here, it'll be down below in the text area.

 I look forward to your input, questions, remarks, helpful suggestions, and as always, watch

 put in a bag because we're going to crush them up, and string cheese.

 you haven't guessed, we are going to try and attempt to make mozzarella cheese

I have a meat pounder if I need it, but I'm trying not to use it.

 in the egg, we're gonna dip it in our pork rind Parmesan mixture, and then

 we're going to stick them in the freezer for about an hour or so and then we're

 over there, but this is gonna be a little bit easier for me to work with.

 hot to eat right now, but here I'll show you a close-up what they look like.

 They look pretty good and we have some pizza sauce to dip it in.

 Alright, in honour of Who Shot Rock and Roll, we're paying homage to a true musical legend.

 A little lippy and lashings of liner is all you need to recreate Amy's pin-up look.

 And we're joined by the lovely Jess as well from Monarch Model Management.

 Well, she took a really classic 1950s rock and roll look and made it uniquely her own.

 And so it's instantly hers when you see that huge liquid liner flicks.

 So she always wore slightly different ones, really long ones, really thin, slim ones.

 So definitely, when I think rock and roll and Amy Winehouse, you've got to have the fake lashes.

 Alright, so where do we start if we want to try and achieve this look, Phoenix?

 Because when you're wearing a lot of makeup or a really stylized look,

 It means making your skin look really, really good before you take any further steps.

 So what we've done here is a really good layer of liquid foundation, plenty of concealer,

 Do you need a particular brush when you're applying the foundation?

 But the most important thing for me when you're doing a base is a buffer.

 But it is, I call this my husband because it just does everything for me.

 You can use it with any type of foundation, liquids, creams, powders,

 And it does all the work for you, and that's what a good brush should do.

 Because what red lipstick does is it enhances any high red pigmentation on your skin.

 And then you need, for rock and roll, you want a really orange-based lipstick.

 So stay away from your blue tones and get something with that real fire engine orange-red

 And I always say lip brush because then you can get like a really, really even, perfect pout.

 You can line the lips so that it looks really flawless and even.

 And a little trick that a lot of people don't know and that I use really often is once your

 lipstick's on, go on with some concealer and use a slightly lighter color than your skin tone

 And what that does is it highlights your lips and it enhances the red, and it makes the lip

 Why do you think Amy's look is so iconic to so many women around the world?

 I think because it is that classic Elizabeth Taylor look, but she made it her own, and

 And I think as well that she over-accentuated everything, and she understood that rock and

 roll and music and being a star, it isn't just about the music.

 Of course, you have to have the talent, but it's about the whole look.

 And she always, whenever you saw her, she always looked glamorous.

 And just like Marilyn Monroe, I guess, you never saw her without makeup on.

 So where people can go wrong sometimes with lashes is not choosing the right ones to fit

 So that's kind of important because often people will just go and grab anything from

 Really, when you're thinking about fake lashes, think about the width of your eyes.

 So fake lashes don't have to be always in your face and really, really strong.

 And this particular look, Amy's look, is sort of a rock star glam look, isn't it?

 But if we wanted to do something like a daytime look, if you like, what can we do?

 Well, for daytime, we would tone down the base, maybe not so much foundation.

 So you might want to pick, say, the brows, or you might want to pick just the liquid

 liner, or you might want to just rock a red lipstick for the day.

 And see, her look is just, it's still rock and roll, but it is a little bit more subtle.

 And the other thing that I love to do, and you can do this with or without makeup,

 That instantly glams you up, and you don't have to be wearing a lot of makeup to do that.

 And for this type of a look, a good brow shape frames the eye, frames your face,

 I don't use pencil because I find shadows a bit softer, and I just fill in the brows with colour.

 And just lastly, always want to match your brow colour to your hair colour.

 Michelle Acourt will bring you up to speed on her funniest findings.

Today I would like to show you how to make a homemade raw cat food.

 I'll be using Better in the Raw for cats, which is a supplement containing 100%

 start with half a cup of powder, a cup and a half of cold water.

 You can use any kind of meat you like or any kind your cat likes.

The average fully grown cat eats about a quarter pound a day, which

 You can freeze the rest in reusable containers or ziplock bags.

 raw before, you may have to add some canned cat food to get them started

 because the raw meat doesn't have the smell that they're used to.

 able to avoid the many health problems associated with conventional cat food.

 you have any questions or comments, leave them below or you can give us an email

 Hi everyone, today I am here to show you a very special dessert for the 4th of July.

 It's super easy to do and I'm using blueberries and raspberries for my red and blue, so I'll

 Alright, so in our bowl here we have 1 1⁄2 cups of graham cracker crumbs.

 To that I'm going to add about a teaspoon of sugar, as well as a half stick or 4 tablespoons

 Graham cracker crumbs you can find in the grocery store on the baking aisle.

 We have an 8x8 pan that I went ahead and lined with aluminum foil for two reasons.

 One, easy clean up, and two, when they're done you can just lift them out and it's a

 So I'm just going to use a little bit of cooking spray, just like that, just so they don't

 We're going to go ahead and pour our graham cracker crumbs right in here and pat them

 You want to make sure you firmly pat them or else it'll be too crumbly when you take

 I'm going to set this to the side and now it's time to make our cheesecake.

 In here we're going to use one and a half things of cream cheese.

 We're going to put this right in here as well as three quarters of a cup of sugar.

 We're going to put the other half of the cream cheese right in here.

 We're going to mix this together with our three quarters of a cup of sugar until smooth.

 By the way, you want to make sure all of your ingredients are room temperature.

 Make sure about two teaspoons of lemon juice in here just to brighten it up.

 All right, so in there we're going to add a teaspoon of vanilla extract.

 Now one of the things that are going to thicken these bars are the eggs, but as well as that

 So you have two tablespoons and then we're going to add a quarter of a cup of some milk

 Just give this a little mix to prevent any clumps from happening.

 This is going to assure that they come out as nice bars when you cut them.

 Now, like I said, I'm using raspberry and blueberries, but if you want to use something

 And I love in summertime that all these berries are always on sale because they're prime picking

 So then when it bakes, these berries are going to pop and it's just going to have tons of

 You can make it any time, but I'm just going to make this for something special.

 So we have our oven preheated at 350 degrees and we're going to go ahead and let this...

 It's starting to get a little toasty on the edges, but that's okay.

 So we're going to let them cool all the way and even chill them just for a few minutes

 I let them cool down a little bit and we're just slicing them up.

 I need this little damp napkin right there just to clean it all off.

 Perfect for any time of the summer, but especially 4th of July with the red, white, and blue.

 Homeowners today have a wide range of choices when it comes to window furnishings.

 And believe me, when I choose my window furnishings, I want something strong and can last a really

 long time, something that's easy to use and take care of, and yet something that looks

 Now, I wanted to show you how easy it is to install and care for your Smart Fit system.

 I'm going to walk you through some easy steps for measuring, installing, and cleaning so

 To measure the window for Smart Fit, you'll want to measure in three spots, the top, middle,

 Of the three measurements, you'll want to take the smallest measurement and submit that

 For height measurement, measure at the left of the window opening, middle, and right.

 On the order form, write down the measurements you just took on a piece of paper.

 Of the three measurements you just took, take the smallest measurements as the width

 They will include a drill to pre-drill some holes, a measuring tape, a screwdriver, and

 After we've measured the first window where we'd like to install our portrait honeycomb

 shades, we're going to measure 3-8-7 inch from the edge of the window and make a mark.

 Then, from the window facing, we'll measure a half inch from the mark.

 In the next step, we're going to align the hole in the clear housing base piece with

 Now, we're going to take this clip at the end of the cord and apply it to the clear

 Now I'm going to take the cover, as I make sure the cords are straight, and insert the

 piece over the base so it's connected and push or slide it over the clear clip.

 When you feel a slight click, you'll know the clip has been secured to the base.

 We'll take the handle and place it over the clear pre-mounted plastic piece.

 Make sure it engages over the slide until it's centered and locks into place.

 Like all window furnishings, dust or other materials may get into your shades.

 Let me introduce you to three easy and yet effective ways to clean your honeycomb shades.

 If you wanted to get rid of a small spot, take a dampened cloth.

So today's scarf tutorial is going to be on the tutorial that I'm wearing

 The one I'm going to be using is the one I'm wearing now and this one is from BDK

 It's almost like a pashmina scarf but it's not a pashmina scarf.

 I'm going to be using one of these no snag hijab pins because they're just the best because they don't snag

You'll also need another regular safety pin like this one here so you can pin the scarf

And you'll also need your under scarf or your bonnet cap however you do it

It's got a bunch of random folds, lots of volume but not crazy volume

 and then it's got... and then here you see the folds are just swooping in and if you go lower

 you can see the scarf actually comes down to like by my belly button and it gives you loads of coverage

So you want to start off with your under scarf and this is how I do

The way I do mine gives me volume at the back of my scarf and if you guys want to check

 out how I did that then click on the link below because I'll take you to the video on where I show

What you want to do is you want to get your scarf and place it on your head.

So once you've sorted all that out you want to get your scarf on your head

 and place it how you want and then get it like so and pin it under your chin.

 you can put it like that if you want, you know whatever floats your boat.

And I'm going to pin it from the underneath because I really don't

Okay once you've done that you're going to get your longer side and

So I'm just pulling over and it's creating these glow and it's just creating

So once you've got it in place you just want to fix it about so it looks

 then that gives you loads of coverage but if you want more of a medium coverage then you want to

 grab the scarf around here so which is what I'm going to do here.

 was helpful for you guys and my next video will either be an outfit of the day or another hijab

 Hey, welcome to another edition of the Seat Shop install videos.

 Today we're going to be doing a driver bottom on a 2002 Chevy Tahoe.

 I'm going to explain to you a couple of tools we're going to be using today.

 First is a couple of flat head screwdrivers, a Phillips head screwdriver which I already

 have mounted on a drill, a 13mm socket that we already put on an impact wrench, which

 is not necessary, you can just use your standard ratchet wrench, and a pair of scissors that

 Now when you're taking the seat out of the truck, there's going to be four fasteners

 Now that bolt, or that nut, looks like a little funky star bit, but it's not.

 The 15mm works, we use it every day, it saves you from buying the $200 bit to take it out.

 Now go ahead and to get those front two out, make sure the seat's in the back, all the

 Then go ahead and move the seat all the way to the forward position, and you'll see the

 After those two are out of the back and the two are out of the front, go ahead and move

 Not all the way forward, not all the way back, right in the middle.

 And then go ahead and adjust the seat bottom all the way in the up position.

 Then you'll be able to flip the seat up and disconnect the power clips from the floor

 Next step to do is remove this plastic panel that's on the side, as well as this knob right

 There's going to be four Phillips head screws in here that hold the plastic panel on, and

 Once you've got all those screws out, you'll be able to just slide that panel and work

 The next thing to do is go ahead and work on this electrical panel.

 There's a few steps we need to do in order to first remove this lumbar knob.

 In order to get to that cable for the lumbar cable, we're going to go ahead and take out

 these two 13 millimeter nuts that hold that seat pan onto the frame.

 Go ahead and push it back to give you some room, and make sure that lumbar, that knob,

 is all the way in the down position, all the way in the relaxed position.

 Go ahead and pop that cable off, and slide that cable out of the hole right there.

 With that lumbar cable taken off that knob, you'll just be able to just pop that knob

 All right, once you've got those four out, there's going to be an electrical clip that

 Go ahead and take your Phillips head screwdriver, and pop that quick connect off.

 The last step before we remove this seat bottom pan is taking the seat belt off.

 Take your three quarter inch drive or socket, remove that nut, feed the seat belt through

 One last step before we get this seat pan off the seat frame is going to remove any

 electrical clips that are holding the seat pan onto the seat frame.

 Now every seat can be different, it just depends on what power options you have, but

 every one of them is going to be quick connect, and every single one is going to be going

 And we've already taken off those two bolts before in order to get to that lumbar cable.

 So now that when you think everything's free, go ahead and slide the seat pan up, and you'll

 All right, the leather cover is just held on by a series of these plastic clips underneath

 Be very careful of these edges if you're using your hands because they will cut you, they're

 Take one, and this last long horseshoe clip here, just start at one end.

 And once you have those all undone, go ahead and flip it back right side up.

 And here for the 2000 to 2002, these are going to be held on, all the seam lines are going

 There's going to be Velcro built into the foam as well as corresponding Velcro on the

 The new cover you're getting from us will have that corresponding Velcro already sewn

 And when you're pulling this Velcro off, make sure you push down on the foam Velcro.

 All right, you got the cover off, and now it's time to take that new cover and get it

 Now on that one side where you're sliding in and out, that foam's going to tend to really

 That way it doesn't roll over on itself and wear it out faster.

 Now if it's really bad, you're going to go ahead and want to replace that.

 This customer right here opted to replace the foam, so we're going to go ahead and put a

 Today we are going to show you how to change the door hinge on your wall oven.

 All you are going to need is a Phillips screwdriver and a small finish nail that we bent into

 Now to do this repair we will need to take the oven door off of the oven to change the

 Before we remove the retaining straps on the hinges, we will want to take a small finish

 nail or a very small screw, something that will fit into this tiny hole, one on each

 I have taken a finish nail and just bent it into a U shape so that I can tuck that through

 ball position when I go to lift the door out of the oven cavity.

 You will note that on each side there is a retaining strap for each hinge held in place

 So we will remove the screw and the retainer and just set those aside.

 Now we can close the door to the broil position and then lift up on it and then remove it

 We can now set that on a suitable work surface and we can change the hinge.

 Now that we have the door on a suitable work surface and we have protected the face of

 We will remove three Phillips screws from the top of the door and we will spin the door

 Now once we have removed those screws we should be able to lift the inner door panel complete

 Once we have separated that we will set that aside and we will remove the outer door glass.

 Now while we have that door apart you can take this opportunity to clean the inside

 Now that we have the inner door panel exposed here there is a single screw that holds the

 bottom of that hinge and then the top just fits into two slotted openings.

 So we will carefully remove that one Phillips screw and then we can feed that hinge up through

 the opening and disengage two hooks at the top and use caution when handling this.

 The edges of that metal are typically fairly sharp and you may want to put some protective

 Now the new hinge comes with a pin to hold it in that open position already.

 So we will engage the two hooks at the top into the slotted openings.

 We are going to drop that hinge down into position and then reinstall the Phillips screw

 If you are replacing one of these hinges we strongly suggest that you replace both at

 Typically if a spring has gone weak in one hinge it will be the same on the opposite

 You can also take this opportunity to clean that inner door glass while you have the door

 Next we will reinstall the outer door panel and glass to the inner door panel.

 We will set the bottom end over first and drop the top into position.

 Next we will put the outer door panel onto the inner door panel and we will start by

 We want to make sure that that lines up equally on both sides so that all three screw holes

 Now with the bottom three screws in place we can now install the ones across the top

 Now to reinstall we will insert the hinges into the slotted openings.

 Now with the door in a fully open position we can remove that temporary pin and we can

 Check to make sure that it is equal on both sides and let's fully insert it and just

 Do an inspection before you open it completely to make sure that they are fully seated and

 that their notch for those retaining bars are flush with the front of the oven liner.

 We can open the door completely and then we will reinstall the two retaining straps.

 Carefully slide the notched end into the notch on the hinge and then tighten the screw.

 Make sure it will stay open in the broil position and completely open and our repair is complete.

 Alright, so this is going to be a new technique that we can use to the scales that we've already

 So say you're playing over these two chords still, and we've learned our C pentatonic,

 and you know, we know that we're soloing all white keys for now.

 So we can also, instead of playing just one note at a time, like we usually do, we can

 But like, but this is actually like a really, really cool thing to do, so.

 If you go to the one, we'll go to the one chord, and then we're going to play two notes

 So we'll go one, two, three, and so we're going to play these, this one and three at

 That's going to be pretty important here, because we're going to play this just going

 up in all white keys, and I'm going to make sure that there's one note in the middle that's

 And I'm calling it a doublet because we're playing two notes at the same time, as opposed

 to like a chord, where you're playing, you know, three notes or four notes at the same

 So we'll have our two chord here in our left hand, and then we can play this two notes

 doublet, and make sure there's not, there's a note that's not being played in between

 And I can just play this chord in my left hand while I'm doing these doublets.

 And I'm just kind of going up or down the C scale in all white keys, and just kind of

 So you know, if you were doing this, you can just try this on your own.

 So you'll play these two chords, and just start from here, playing the one and the three,

 You just move it up in all white keys, just one step at a time.

 So there, you can notice that I kind of used those doublets as a way to get to that three

 Sorry, I called it C major, but the C chord that we've been playing.

 So these doublets, it's not just, you know, we can use it on all the white keys, but let's

 try using it on that pentatonic scale that we learned in the last lesson.

 So if I was going to do that, I would take this two chord, I would play C pentatonic

 here, but then I'm going to start at the same place that we started at, which is at the

 one and the three, and then I'm going to take that, and I'm going to move it up, but this

 So if I'm starting from here, then actually the next two notes that I'll be playing are

 going to be here, because in C pentatonic, we only have these notes.

 So if I start right here, then we're going to skip this E and play these two notes and

 skip this G, and you're doing the exact same thing that you were doing with all white keys,

 Like, I love playing this over, especially over this D chord and the C chord.

 So let's go back to, we're doing our doublets here, and we're just going up in the C pentatonic,

 So if I could do that in like a lot of different other scales as well.

 So I'm doing the exact same thing that we were just doing, but I'm just doing it in

 So once you learn that technique, and you learn like a different scale and a different

 And that's why like when you learn a rhythmic technique like this, then it's really great

 because you can apply it to all these different chords and scales that there are on the piano.

 But yeah, so that's just one really cool technique that you can use.

 And yeah, just use it over your C pentatonic, or when you're just playing over all white

 Okay, here's a problem that some people run into every once in a while.

 having a equal riser until you get to the last step because someone changed

 3 quarter inch plywood on it and now the people took the plywood off

 stairs that was attached to a house we would need to pull all the nails, screws,

 we have 31 and our total rise before was 30 so we added an inch of material

So if we were to divide 31 by 4 we would have a 7 3⁄4 inch rise.

To make this work we're going from a 7 1⁄2 inch riser to a 7 3⁄4

 adding this quarter inch on instead of having a 7 1⁄2 we have a 7

 next step and then actually the next step the last one we would need to add a

 an idea of another way that you can fix a set of stairs that has an awkward last

 and 3⁄4 inch treads but you took the 3⁄4 inch treads off and put inch and a

 work if you have a riser at the top that's taller than the other risers.

 You know, something you can serve maybe at a Super Bowl party or just having a couple

 Like I said, it's something the kids would probably really love.

 Okay, so once you've drained the fat, you're going to go ahead and add three-quarter cups

 I'm going to bring that to a boil and simmer for about ten minutes.

 Once again, this is just something very simple, you know, for people that work a lot or, you

 So, it's definitely not going to be a gourmet meal, but fun and tastes pretty good too.

 So I'm going to bring this to a boil, let it simmer for five minutes, and then we'll

 All right, so while the meat's cooking, I'm going to take a little olive oil spray and

 I'm just going to lightly coat the insides of these muffin pans just so that I don't

 And now what I'm going to do is I'm going to take some wonton wraps.

 And I'm just going to take them, I'm going to let them in here, push them in, and I'm

 I'm going to do that to all of those, and then I'm going to fill those with my mixture.

 Okay, so now I have all my shells in there, and what I'm going to do is I'm just going

 to take a spoonful and put them in there, and just fill each one.

 And as you can see, I have some Monterey Jack freshly shredded to top them with.

 Now, this whole time that I'm filling these up, I got the oven preheated to 350, waiting

 And what I'm going to do is put these in the oven for about six minutes to brown the

 shells, and I'm going to put the cheese on top and put them in for another two to three

 Now, if you want to get creative at the end, maybe you want to sprinkle some green onion

 tops on top of the cheese as it's melting or after it's melting, you know, that would

 You know, it's always open to interpretation, any recipe you see, so feel free to get creative.

 But this one I'm just showing you a very simple, fun, easy, quick snack to eat, or

 Okay, so now what I'm going to do is I'm going to take my Monterey Jack, and I like a lot

 of cheese, so I'm going to generously cover these, and then I'm going to throw them back

 And like I said, if you wanted to get creative, you could throw some green onion tops on there

 So now that I did the six minutes to brown them and two minutes to three minutes with

 the cheese, this is what your final product is going to look like.

 In fact, I love it so much, it's gonna be really difficult for me not to throw some shapes.

I'm using 3 different types of lentils but any single lentil will do.

 Here I've got 4 mint leaves and a tablespoon of freshly chopped coriander.

 Get yourself a large pan and put a pint of water in it and then add in all the ingredients that I've just shown you.

 When it comes to the boil, cover and simmer gently for about 45 minutes until the dal is really soft.

 While your dal and vegetables are cooking, you need to get the rest of your stuff together.

 half a cup of freshly chopped coriander and half a dozen leaves of mint,

 3 little segments of a star anise that I've crushed in a mortar and pestle,

 and about 1 and a half centimetres of fresh ginger that I've chopped.

 Once your dal is all lovely and soft, you can either mash it with a masher

 Leave to simmer gently for about 20 minutes until the chicken is cooked.

 A little bit sweet, a little bit sour and certainly a little bit spicy.

 Now, some of the younger viewers amongst you might be wondering

I'm going to be talking about a few extended techniques on the piano.

 of them I'm sure some of you have probably heard of before and potentially used, but

 I don't hear heaps of people or see heaps of people using all of these, so I thought

 I'd just share them with you just in case you haven't heard of them.

 Alright, the first one is basically just muting the strings, which gives a sort of more percussive,

 This can be made a little bit more interesting by lifting the pedal up, which gives you sympathetic

 Something like that, which works well as an introduction to pieces, that kind of stuff.

 Alright, there are two basic ones, and this is something else that I haven't really seen

 many people doing, and I think is a really good sound on the piano.

 Basically it involves only using the lowest octave of the piano and pressing all of the

 right hand, and the sympathetic resonance of these large strings, which contain a lot

 of harmonics within the range that you're going to be playing, about the middle of the

 piano, will sort of create a nice sustained effect, different to that of the sustain pedal.

 And if you wanted to free up your left hand while you're doing this effect, which I usually

 do on a piano that has this middle pedal here, you simply depress the keys, make sure they're

 all down so that the dampers are lifted from the strings, and then put your foot on the

 pedal, and that will hold down those notes for you, leaving you free to play with both

 And then one other technique that I've found is to create some sort of a tonality using

So if I wanted to really emphasise, say, C sharp minor, I could hold down the

 notes from a C sharp minor triad, which are C sharp, E, G sharp, and then C on the top,

 use the middle pedal to hold just those down, and then when I play notes from that chord,

 They get resonated by those strings, but if I play other notes, such as notes outside

 So we're still left with the feeling of C sharp without actually having to hold any

 Today I wanted to talk about eyelash curlers and curling your eyelashes.

 If you ever find yourself in a rut and you can't find your eyelash curler or you misplaced

 it or you're traveling and you forgot it and you need to curl your eyelashes, this is a

 What you're going to do is, you take the edge of the spoon right here and you hold it like

 Well you know what, it doesn't matter which way you hold it as long as you're using the

 What you're going to do is, you're going to put the spoon right here, right above your

 Then what you do is, you put your finger under your lashes and the spoon on the top of your

 Then what you do is, you rub the spoon up against your finger like this.

 If you want to have them more curled like this, more curly, you can curl the tops of

 Just instead of concentrating it on the base, you concentrate more on the tips.

 You use the same motion, the back and forth motion like this, with your finger in the

 If you have any questions or comments, you can always leave me a comment.

 This is Sherri Fitness and I want to welcome you once again to my kitchen.

 But after you work out, you should always already nourish your body with something healthy

 And fage yogurt, I've tried several brands, but to me, this one tastes the best.

 If 17 grams of protein is not enough for you, you can add a little bit of protein powder

 So the thing is, it's got 17 grams of protein and it only has 9 grams of sugar, which is

 My rule of thumb is try and keep it down to no more than 12 grams of sugar in a serving

 So what I've done is in my blender, I do have the yogurt sitting here in the blender.

 And what I've added to the yogurt is a little xylem husk powder, which is fiber.

 Fiber is just great for your digestive system and it also makes you feel fuller.

 And that's my refrigerator, excuse me, my freezer making ice that you're hearing right

 Anyway, so what I'm going to add to this is just a cup of water.

 And I'm going to just get this going real quick, just mix this together.

 And there you go, protein yogurt smoothie made with fage, plain Greek yogurt.

 And this is Sherri Fitness wishing you optimal health and fitness.

 And don't forget, please visit my website, www.fittalknews.com.

 Hi, OK, today we're going to be doing a request that came from RyanGames123 and he asked could

 we do Hi and let's say and vs, there we go vs and over here let's say

 Hi, Hi vs Hi, so let's start here, it's a greeting so let's make it somebody, greeting

 start right with the eye, there we go, give me another eye like that, turn that into the

 nose, a bit of a cheesy grin, up, some hair like that and OK, what are we going to do

 Well H, let's say it stands for hand, turn that like a bit of a thumb part and give him

 some fingers like that and curve that down, join it up there, curve that down there, join

 it up there, give him a neck, there we go and there we go, Hi, done, now this one over

 here, obviously a bit higher, let's make that into, let's see, what have we got here, let's

 Birds go Hi, so let's see, let's stick another eye there like that, like this and then collect

 that there, join it up like that, how are we going to turn this into a bird?

 They use their wings, here's another wing there like that and let's give him a little

 flex on the head and then from here a little body, OK, join it up like that and a couple

 Well look over here, turn this into, it's a cloud, it's how we know how high they go,

 it's a cloud and the highest most birds kind of ever go is 20,000 feet and the highest

 most any cloud kind of go is 20,000 feet, so Hi vs Hi, there we go, if you've got any

 ideas you'd like me to do as well, send me a message in the WordToonz channel, alright,

 Dress up your Christmas tree by creating a new tree skirt using Festa fabric, fusible fleece, and jumbo-sized fusible piping.

 The Christmas tree skirt that we're working with is made with 2 1⁄2 yards of fabric.

 It will be approximately a 40-inch Christmas tree skirt, and you'll need the jumbo wrap-infused piping,

 along with a half a yard of fabric that's needed for the bias around the inner circle and to cover the jumbo piping.

Making a pattern with a circle is never easier than with a yardstick compass.

The point, the end, is screwed to the zero end of the yardstick,

 and then the point with the pencil, we're going to place it about at between 20 and 21 inches.

You'll need some paper to do the tracing, and I'm using pattern tracing paper,

 and I have about a 45-inch length or so of the paper folded in half.

 and then you place the tip of the yardstick compass at the fold and the edge, at that corner, and then simply mark.

 All the way around, you get a half circle marked, or a quarter circle in this instance.

 Because the paper is folded, you'll have the marking after we trace it and cut it.

I'm going to move it to 5 inches, and the 5-inch marking is on my side,

 so I'll just look to the other side and screw the pencil point at that marking, keeping the point of the compass at the same area,

 This is cut on the fold for the outer fabric and the lining, and then one layer for the fleece.

 And we have slit each of the circles for the opening, so you can see the size.

 To make it a little bit easier for you to see and for me to work with, we're going to work with half-scale sizes of the yardstick compass measurement,

 When creating this, you'll need to cut 2-1⁄2 inch bias strips of the fabric.

 Wrap the bias around the fabric, and you may want to put a pin every now and then.

 And because this is fusible, the first step is done by the iron rather than at the sewing machine.

 We just run the tip of the iron along the edge, trying to match the cut edges.

 Just glide along, and you get a nice, tight fit of the cording that's been wrapped and fused around the fabric.

 So you'll be fusing quite a bit of yardage to go around the outer area, and we're starting at the inner circle,

 Now because this piping is jumbo-sized, you'll have to kind of work around a little bit.

 And as you're working at the back, at the cut section, mold the piping around the edge to round the corner, and pin along the edges.

 At the sewing machine, set your machine for a straight stitch using a zipper foot.

 Stitch right along the piping, all the way around from the inner part of the circle, outer edges, and then back to the inner part.

 Now sandwich the fabrics together, placing the lining fabric and pin.

 Now I'm going to re-stitch, stitching along with that same zipper foot.

 This time I move the needle one notch over to the left so that I get a nice, tight stitch.

 On this sample, it's been turned right side out, or almost right side out.

 And then I made two yards of bias tape, cutting two-inch wide strips.

 Using your favorite technique, center the bias tape at the center opening of the inner circle.

 Stitch the bias tape around the edge, and then wrap, again using your favorite bias tape technique.

 In an evening of time, you can add jumble piping around the edges, stitching and lining,

 and then adding the bias tape around the center for a new, festive look for the holidays.

 Find the notions you need to create your Tree Skirt, including the yardstick compass and fusible piping, at Nancy's Notions.

 Muwen360 is here to do another review and this time we are taking a look at the IOTI

 It's a really nice car mount that's situated in this nice looking box by the way so without

 So first we get this nice quick start guide and then we get the car mount itself, the

 So IOTI EZ Flex Wireless Car Mount is a car mount and also a charger since it supports

 First in order to use the car mount place the suction cup on a clean surface and push

 Next plug the micro USB cable into the charging port for power and then open the side arms

 Now you can take your device, in my case I have the LG G2 and just place the phone

 And your phone if needed will now start charging wirelessly and you can also adjust the bottom

 foot to locate the proper fit as well as adjusting the car mount at any angle you wish.

 It's incredibly secure and the suction cup does a very nice job of holding the car mount

 and your device securely and it also works with almost any surface.

 In addition it's extremely easy to remove the car mount as well and it doesn't leave

 It charges my phone quickly and efficiently on the go and the best part is you don't have

 to insert the USB cable into your phone every single time you want to charge.

 Now all you need to do to charge is by placing the phone onto the car mount and the charging

 Although this is a great feature, the amount of devices out there that natively supports

 So if you want to take full advantage of wireless charging, you'll need a device that supports

 So overall I think it's a fantastic car mount for your Android phone.

 Works extremely well, great quality and the Qi wireless charging feature is extremely

 useful for providing power to your device during long car rides.

 I highly recommend it to anyone out there that's looking for a car mount and also a

 More information and links are located down below the like button.

 Thank you very much for watching and I'll see you in my next video.

 Well, we just finished our catfishing seminar this Thursday night, and a lot of the fellows

 over the last few weeks have been asking me to show them how I clean catfish.

 Because I cleaned some tonight, I fried it up, and it went over real well.

 You wind up really wasting, what appears like you're wasting quite a bit of fish, but this

 You feel the rib cage, you want to look for the rib cage and feel it.

 I'll cut down to the backbone, and I'll cut all the way down to the tail.

 See, so what's left is, you've gone from the rib cage back, there's some meat up here above

 I find that most often there's a lot of fat in there, and I end up throwing a lot of it

 And then I don't have to bother cutting the rib cage or anything.

 Alright, I'm going to do the same thing on the other side of the fish.

 That's because these fish are fresh, they were just caught a couple hours ago.

 Generally, if you leave the fish in the cooler or on ice overnight, so that they're dead

 for a little while, you don't seem to notice so much blood when you're cleaning them.

 It's really not a big deal because we're going to soak the fish for a couple of days in some

 water in the cooler before we eat them, so all the blood comes out anyway.

 Again, you feel the rib cage, put the knife in here, right behind those ribs, get down

 Alright, the next cut I make, I'll stick the knife in back here by the tail section, go

 forward, I want to keep the knife up a little bit off of the table, away from the skin.

 If I don't get it all off this time, we can still get some more off later.

 I'm going to stick the knife in, and I'm going to try and keep it, you can kind of feel that

 The red meat is a little tougher than the good stuff, so when you get down to the end,

 when you get done, the red meat has stayed on the skin here, that's the red meat that's

 on there, that's the stuff that's bad, and what's left here is mostly the good meat.

 Now we're not done trimming yet, but we've pretty much conquered it.

 Just a little bit of trimming left, and we're going to be good to go.

 We're going to put the knife in back here, we're going to go towards the front.

 We don't want to go at too much of an angle, or we'll end up getting closer to the skin

 So we'll stick the knife in, and then we'll turn it parallel to the table, and literally

 It's tougher, it's stiffer, and the knife doesn't necessarily want to go through it

 And there you go, we've got a nice fillet here, no red meat, all the red meat is on

 Red meat and even some of that fat that I was telling you about is still left on here.

 Okay, so we're not done yet, there's a couple more pieces that we want to get rid of.

 On the top of the fillet here, and on the belly section, the stuff that looks a little

 bit yellow, I don't know if you can see it through the camera lens, but it's a little

 It's really not that bad, but if you can get rid of some of it, it helps.

 So what I'll do is I'll just take and stick my knife in here, cut a little bit of that

 Same thing on the belly section here, just cut a little bit of that off, throw it away.

 And then this piece of lateral line here, there's a piece of cartilage in there that

 Now you don't have to waste much here to get rid of that, but you do want to get rid of

 We didn't really lose much, but that's kind of a piece of cartilage, it'll kind of spoil

 You know I usually like to maybe cut this once or twice the long way, like that.

 Like that, and then I'll just cut it like that, like that, and I'll cook those up.

 When you get done, the stuff you have, you have to let this soak in a fridge in water

 Some guys will use salt water, you know all kinds of different stuff.

 I just put it in water, I'll change it once or twice, soak it for a couple of days, it'll

 It seems to work very well, it's easy, it's not very difficult.

 Obviously it appears as though there's not a lot of fish left when we get done, but it's

 true, there's really not a lot left, but what is left is very good, and you can tell

 There was no complaints, it was all compliments, and they all wanted to know how we did it,

He's tied it himself using all Nash components and it will be available

 soon ready tied from Nash but Dave come on another secret show me how you tied

That's right yep it's probably the only hook length on the market Nigel

 right now won't they the same as they do when you use a fish finder or anything

 We get you rather than Gary to do this because you're neater than Gary.

And again every hook although you trust these hooks you still double

 when you're doing your knotless knot you always go away from the opening of

 they're new to the knotless knot because where the hook is turned round there's

 one potential damage point isn't it and it's important to start from the right way.

 Yeah so that your line couldn't get pulled into it under stress and cut you off.

 for joining everything because again I've got so much confidence in it.

 Yep I'd like to pull it down so it's very close because as you pull the knot

 tiny little bit it's a nightmare whereas that you can tie it up there and then slide it down

Then what you do with the excess on that you just point it back.

 wondering, how do you decide how much you want the supple part of the link to be?

 losing the stretchiness out of the point of having the material on.

So I'm gonna make, what you do, the excess there you just point that back.

So your first one was the trigger link, this one's with the Ultra Silk.

The reason I like that knot as well is because if anything wanted to slide it's gripped.

 And the great thing with a knot like that is you can trim those tag ends very tight because it's not going to slip is it?

And if you're putting a bit of putty on there you're covering the knot anyway.

Now I notice you use oval rig rings to attach because you like to pull them through your PVA bags.

It must be wet this knot because if you get any excess you can pull it and it can slide out.

 Then once that, you see at the moment it's just almost a solid piece of braid.

I just literally pull it on it like that and then I just slide it up.

Took me a few times to get used to using the material like it does with anything new.

 The good thing is if anyone doesn't know that leader knot it's worth learning anyway for joining two pieces of line.

 We've taken dance lessons from some of the best dancers and dance teachers and we want

 Right away, we're just going to go to the floor, really simple.

 And what you're going to do is you're going to put your hand up, you're going to bring

 So you're really comfortable and you can just sit up when you want to in this position.

 Again, the first three ways we do it, we're going to reverse it going backwards.

 And again, if you want to add style, you can put your hand on your waist.

 Okay, so let's do this six step real time with my ladies in the background.

 Learn how to dance in 30 days or less with our beginning hip hop course.

 Now I generally use two different methods when grilling pizza on a gas grill.

 And the first, that I'll discuss with you at least, is when I'm preparing pizza for

 a large crowd or for a party or I'm entertaining, that would be the first type.

 And that's where I cook directly, I cook the pizza directly on the grill itself.

 If you would like to see me perform that action, you can simply follow the link, which

 will also be provided at the end of our video in case you would like to just continue on.

 Now the method we'll be showing today here is simulating a clay wood fired pizza oven,

 I've had my grill preheating for about 20, almost 25 minutes now.

 I'm going to show you really quick, this is a small cup of water.

 We'll test the stone by dropping a small drop on it and we'll see if it dances and evaporates.

 Now that we know our stone is properly preheated, close your lid back down to seal in the heat,

 turn your center burner to low, leaving the two outer burners on high.

 Sprinkle a little cornmeal over the top of your pizza stone, which will ensure your pizza

 from sticking, but also it'll absorb any excess moisture from the crust and make sure it's

 Using a spatula or a pizza peel, all you want to do is basically slide your pizza off of

 If you would like to see how I prepared these two pizzas, you can check out those recipe

 After three or four minutes, you'll want to check on your pizza just to make sure that

 neither one of your burners is set a little uneven or maybe the wind is blowing a draft

 When it's golden brown like this, it's time for it to come off.

 I know I certainly enjoyed having you, and I hope that you'll continue to watch and follow

 The main heat source in most chemistry labs is the Bunsen burner.

 There's always the danger of an accident if it's not used properly.

 For example, it should never be used to heat volatile organic liquids that give off flammable

 These substances should be heated in a heating mantle or a steam bath in a hood.

 But for most other substances, a Bunsen burner is an ideal heat source when used properly.

 There are several types of Bunsen burners, but they all have the same basic parts.

 A rubber hose fits over the tip and over a similar fitting on the Bunsen burner.

 Most burners have a valve at the bottom to control the flow of gas.

 There are several important rules to follow to use a Bunsen burner safely.

 Make sure the hose fits securely on the gas valve and on the Bunsen burner.

 If the flame is properly adjusted, you can place the burner under your setup.

 If the flame begins to sputter or flare, turn the gas off immediately.

 Unburned gas escaping into the room could ignite and cause an explosion.

 Even when the burner seems to be working properly, if you smell gas, turn it off.

 So before you heat any glassware, check it carefully for cracks or stars.

 Flat-bottomed containers are normally heated on a wire screen on a ring stand.

 Erlenmeyer flasks and other narrow-necked containers should be secured to the stand

 The water bath transfers heat slowly and evenly to the test tube and helps keep it from boiling

 Hold it at an angle while moving it back and forth to distribute the heat evenly.

 Aim it away from yourself and your neighbors in case it boils over.

 Gas can't escape from a closed container, and the pressure that builds up can burst

 If you don't have tongs, protect your hands with gloves designed for hot glassware.

 Handle everything as if it's hot if you've been using a Bunsen burner.

 Glass and metal look the same when hot as they do when they're cold.

 Heat volatile organics in a heating mantle or steam bath in a hood, not over a Bunsen

 Make sure the hose fits securely on the gas valve and Bunsen burner fittings.

 Turn the gas off immediately if the flame sputters, flares, or goes out, or if you smell

 Move test tubes back and forth through the flame at an angle while heating.

 can see, this is literally my dream kitchen and I've done everything to make it look perfect.

 and then you can use them for any kind of cakes, cupcakes, or just eat them just on

Okay, so the first thing we're going to do, we're going to sift our flour

 After you sift everything together, you just give it a really good mix, making sure all

I'm going to put them in a food processor and I've got aged eggs, which means I've just

 always just put them into warm water and leave them for about 10 minutes.

 have been whipping for about two minutes and once they start to form peaks like that, as

 you can see, we're just going to put it back on and add sugar really slowly.

 we're going to do now is incorporate dry mixture with our wet mixture.

 ingredients are incorporated and when I lift my spatula, you're looking for that kind of

The mixture is kind of oozing back down, but not too runny and not too dry.

 So I'll give it a few more mixes and then it's ready to put into a piping bag.

 I'm using the back of my baking tray, that way the heat is distributed evenly around

 So what we're going to do, we're just going to pipe a small head and then we're going

 patient, I'm not, you can draw the macaroons out into the snowman shapes and then it'll

 So once they're all piped out, we're just going to bang the tray a couple of times from

 half an hour to 60 minutes until nice skin forms on top of the macaroons.

 Now my macaroons are ready, I'm going to put them in the oven for about 12-15 minutes

 My macaroons are done and they've just been resting for about 10 minutes.

I've got my chocolate ganache here, that's where I'm going to be

 So all we're going to do is take one shell and just pipe some ganache inside.

 please like it and leave the comments below if you want me to make anything.

 So we've got us the, you can see it there, that's the silver, okay, already cleared and

 you can see the bling on it and it's blingy without having to take it outside.

 The nail polish, once again, being a lacquer, goes down really tight and smooth and just

 Remember the spoons, you know, keep them around because when you put your base coat on, then

 you can come in and do the clear just to make sure that everything is copasetic, you know,

 Now I'm going to go ahead and put on my gear and then we're going to spray this puppy with

 We're going to be using our Iwata HP M2 and we're going to start off by testing it on

 Again, it's going to be a while before the color starts to take.

 The airbrush needs a little bit of adjusting, which is the beauty of this model.

 I don't know if I'm going to do the entire spoon on there and bring it to color, but

 you know, it's a good way of making sure that the paint is going on.

 You see why these alligator clip chopsticks are ideal for this.

 And your initial reaction is to think that at this rate you're going to run out of paint.

 And here we have a little bit further along with the color already going on rather strong.

 So this is like after about 10 minutes of just spraying very light coats going on and

 It looks like a house of color oriental blue mixed in with a little cortes blue.

 So you know, and the M1 really, or rather the M2, it's the same.

 M1, M2 is just the only difference in this airbrush is the size of the cup.

 Again, you know, smooth, even, slow strokes and you'll get there.

 Yeah, sorry that my hand is blocking a little bit of the angle there of the view.

 Now you all know that I love sweet potatoes as much as the next person.

 And this organization, ONE, wants to raise awareness about how the sweet potato can help fight malnutrition

 So we are going to make a snack healthy recipe today, so stay tuned so you can learn how you can bring awareness to the cause too.

 We are going to start this recipe by thinly slicing our sweet potatoes.

 I am using a food processor, but if you have a mandolin so they can all be equal widths, that would be perfect.

 Or if you know how to cut equal widths with a knife, that is fine too.

 But just make sure you try to get them as equal widths as possible.

 You want to lay them out on a baking sheet, drizzle them with a little bit of oil, and sprinkle them with a little bit of salt

 Take them out, flip them over, put them back in for another 10 minutes.

 If some start to curl before others, go ahead and remove those and put the others back into the oven.

 They came out crispy and crunchy and sweet and salty and I really enjoyed them.

 I just want to get the additional nutritional benefits of sweet potatoes.

 If you would like to get more information about the Organization 1 or sign a petition,

 there will be a link in the description below or you can click the annotation here.

Today I'm going to show you how to make this adorable bear expresso.

 based off of those little coffee cups that have the adorable espresso characters inside

You're going to start off with a mint green piece of clay and you're going

And you want to make sure that all the edges are really flat on the bottom.

 you're happy with the shape of the cone, you're going to take a blade and remove the excess

 it's really soft and make a disc shaped foam that would fit inside of your cup.

 it should look like there's a lot of small bubbles that popped on the top.

 some chalk pastels, I'm taking a dark brown, a little hint of black and mixing it together

 form the bear, take another white piece of clay and you're going to form a semi-circle.

 Make sure your semi-circle has two little spheres to form the adorable little ears.

 Give your bear an adorable little snout and again you're going to texture this whole piece

 leave enough room in the front so that you can form his adorable little paws.

 the paws, take some more white clay and go ahead and roll this into a small round ball

 color the center of his paws, his ears and color in his face as well.

 some extra time to be very careful with this step because the last thing you want is to

 him the full smile so I'm going to give him a nice little nose, accentuate his little

 paws and for the actual mouth itself I'm using more clay to form his adorable little smile.

 Go ahead and bake your character in the oven and make sure you glaze the cup so it's nice

And I added an extra heart on the center of my cup with some pink nail polish

 these please subscribe and browse through my channel for more tutorials.

 in the email about not having to grate the chocolate with a grater but actually using

And then when it gets to that point, I'm going to switch it back over to

 starting to boil, I'll switch it over to this one so it's not boiling.

This is a bit like the hot chocolate recipe I made the other day.

I want to lick that right now but I'm going to be a good boy today.

 But I'm going to take the opportunity to show you that it's actually snowing in England.

 That doesn't happen very often and when I was younger I used to always love snowballs.

 and roll a little bit like that together and get powder on it like this.

Ok, so I've made a couple of chocolate truffles already and I've still got a lot

 Hey it's Missy and today I'll be showing you how to recreate this braided headband updo.

 So we're going to have the portion at the top of the head, thin sections right behind

 both ears, and then we're going to take a piece underneath the crown section, and then

 underneath this part that we're clipping away, we can pull up two smaller sections for the

 So dividing this piece into two parts, we're going to braid each section down in a regular

 It's important to have hair right behind the ears and then underneath these braids so that

 when we wrap it all up into the bun, it hides where these braids begin.

 Once these braids are done, then we can let down all of the hair and we're going to take

 both of the braids, wrap them over the top of the head, and pin them in place with several

 To add some volume, pick up small sections of hair at the back of the crown and gently

 brush the hair downwards, then smooth out the top layer, and then we're going to bring

 Once all the hair is wrapped into a ponytail, then take a donut bun and place it over the

 Next we're going to divide the ponytail into three sections, so take one section and using

 a teasing comb, gently brush the hair downwards to create a little bit of volume.

 Then we're going to braid the section into a regular braid and wrap it around the donut.

 Pin down the end of this braid and anywhere else along the braid where it feels a little

 And then we're going to repeat this two more times with the remaining hair.

 I hope you enjoyed this tutorial, be sure and give this video a thumbs up if you want

 to see more updos, and don't forget to subscribe below and I will see you on the next one.

 It's midnight in KC and I don't have a video ready for tomorrow, so what I'm going to do

 I think that will go pretty well with my cocktail, so let's see what we need.

 I've got a half a teaspoon of hot pepper flakes, two lemons, one lime.

 I'm going to use the juice of two lemons and the juice of one lime.

 Alright guys, all we're going to do is add all these ingredients with the shrimp, make

 Until they're cooked through, we're then going to take the shrimp off of the roasting pan,

 add the butter to our marinade and our drippings, and we're going to make the dipping sauce

 Mix that well and we're going to let that marinate for about ten minutes.

 Alright guys, there's our roasted shrimp with lemon-lime dipping sauce.

 For the most part the pattern with the left hand is gonna be this is just for Jeezy's part anyways

 Then the left hand has this little solo F E F to E flat and when it hits the D

 All right that right there just for Jeezy's verse now for the chorus it goes G's

 So if I get it wrong on how many times I press it it's probably gonna either be four times

 Yeah, and I believe that's it hopefully I was some help on this song young GZ fame all right.

 We're doing some grilling demonstration, how you can grill at home.

 Today we have some pork chops from our friend from the farm, Sir Williams of State New York.

 During the spice rub we have some paprika, sugar, salt, pepper, coriander, and cumin

 You want to make sure that you put enough into each chop, that way you can maximize

 You want to rub it and make sure you have enough spice all over.

 Our grill is preheated with some wood burning charcoals, oak specific.

 This part over here is about 600, this part over here is about 400, 500 degrees.

 A chop like that size, about 8 oz, will cook approximately between 12 to 15 minutes.

 While we have the pork chops on the grill cooking, we're going to do a refreshed salad

 Once you choose them and pick them from your convenience store or farmer's market, you

 want to make sure that you don't refrigerate them after you purchase them from your house.

 It's very important that they remain at room temperature, that way all the juices and the

 We're going to add some chives, some extra virgin olive oil, some salt.

 Keep in mind that when you cook it on the grill, it's such a hot temperature and direct

 heat that you want to make sure that you allow the meat to rest.

 That's the most important part, that way you can keep all the juices inside your chop or

 You want to make sure that you put it to the side that we left without any charcoals and

 You could use either vinegar or you can use, in this case we're going to use lemon.

 Make sure you remove all the seeds, that way it doesn't go into your salad.

 Pork chops can be served any temperature as any cut of ribeye or near strip.

 Some people like them medium and some other people like them even medium rare.

 So basically what I'm doing is I'm making these hockey puck size patties and that's what we are going to be frying in this pan that is heating up.

 You don't need to really stuff them with chicken or make them really big.

 You don't want to put patties in cold oil because they are going to soak up all the oil and leave you with a greasy mess.

 You want it to be really hot and of course you can lower the temperature.

 You put the patties in and by putting patties in the temperature is going to come down by itself a little.

I think it still has a little ways to go to get to the right temperature.

 The pan is hot enough so I'm going to add these patties in the oil.

At the most put four in and no more than four because otherwise it's going to drop the temperature quite a bit and your potatoes are going to soak up oil and you don't want that.

 What we want to do is let the potato flakes hydrate and all the flavors melt together.

You don't want to play around with them until they're cooked on the side they're on.

 The last part of this second dish, the main dish, is avocado tomato salsa that we are going to make to top this dish with.

 To make the salsa what you need is some onions that I have here and tomatoes.

 Of course, since it's avocado salsa, you're going to need a ripe avocado.

 Not a lot of people know about avocado and even if they know about avocado, they don't know when is the right time to eat or what's the right type of avocado, when to buy it.

 What you need to do is when you're buying avocado, just jiggle this thing on top of the avocado where it connects with the tree.

 You don't want to be going around the supermarket just squishing all the avocados and making a mess of it.

 Basically, you want to have an avocado which is dark in color, firm, not too firm.

 Once this top thing comes off and it jiggles, it's a good time to eat that avocado.

 I'm going to squish my patties a little so the heat goes all the way and they're cooked all around as well.

 What I'm going to do is make a small incision in and scoop it right out.

 I've got to keep an eye on the patties as well to make sure that they don't burn.

 I didn't realize that I did need to go ahead and put the end caps on now and then I needed

 I'm going to have to try and work on that and see if I can narrow that gap in.

 As you can see there's five on one side and then four on the other to make sure that you

 Alright, I wanted to show you I've made a little more progress on the end caps here.

 I am missing, there should be a grab handle down there, the uncoupler, chain for the brake,

 Now I'm going to attempt to, you can see this, these little platform stands and then put

 And I don't, I can't find my tweezers so this is becoming very hard.

 I have found that taking my exacto knife and opening up these holes first, because

 I don't have, I'm too lazy to go all the way downstairs and get my little micro drill.

 Sorry I'm trying just not to lean into the camera so you have to stare at the back of

 Alright, so grab this little microscopic piece and I'm trying different methods of just getting

 a little bit of glue on because pressure for the most part will hold this stuff in.

 This is going to be so frustrating to watch, I'll probably edit this part out.

 Lots of cool details but I don't know, I'm pretty impressed with how it's turned out

 Got grab handles, little footsteps, ladder, got the door in as a comparison.

 Looks like I've got lots of extra parts that I don't know where to go to.

 I thought you guys might want to see the gluing on of the door.

 As it changes the whole look of it, what I am doing is just gluing it from the back side liberally.

 I'm putting those bolts in there and it didn't have anything in the instructions.

 I'm trying not to get too much on the outside so when I squeeze it down it oozes out.

 Now firstly we need to understand what a draw is and how we actually hit it.

 A draw shot is something that should start to the right of the target line, draw back

 in to the left hand side and actually finish on the target line.

 One is the swing path, the direction the club is travelling as it comes into the ball.

 The next is the face angle, where is the club face actually pointing to as it comes into

 If you can imagine a golf ball spinning through the air this way round, so it's turning right

 to left in the air, it's effectively spinning in an anti-clockwise direction.

 A lot of people refer to this as maybe a David Beckham style of free kick.

 When Beckham kicks the free kicks he kicks them with a bit of right to left on them,

 he kicks this side of the football, turns the ball from right to left in the air.

 And that will put spin on the ball and that's effectively the same thing we're trying to

 Now the club's going to have to come from the inside and travel to the outside this

 way and that will provide a majority of the starting direction on the ball.

 The angle of the club face will provide a majority of the finishing direction of the

 So if we can swing out to the right but point the club where we want the ball to go, we've

 got a good chance of hitting the ball straight with a draw shape.

 There's two options really, we can play an easy draw or we can play what I would call

 a purist draw, slightly more difficult to master but maybe a little bit more controllable

 But you can have a go at both ideas and just see which one suits and fits for yourself

 So first we're going to look at a fairly rudimentary type of draw shot, swinging the club out to

 the right, facing the face back into the centre line so we get that draw shape on it.

 Now the club I've laid on the ground here is effectively where my target line would

 normally be where I'd want the ball to finish but I'm looking to shape it from right to

 left so I'm actually going to go ahead and set myself up pointing well down the right

 When I'm setting up I've got my feet off line, I've got my knees, my hips and my shoulders

 all effectively in a closed position, what we'd call a square or closed position as we

 Now I'm going to go ahead and set the club up where I want the ball to finish so I'm

 So the club face points at the target, I point well out to the right.

 Now if I could encourage myself to now go ahead and make a swing along the line of my

 feet, the ball is going to start off on the foot line but it's going to turn on the spin

 of the ball towards its finishing direction which is effectively where the club face was

 So I should be able to set the club up at the target, point my feet well out right and

 And that one has come all the way back round and has finished right on the target line,

 So the ball has set off over the banners on the right hand side, put a lot of shape on

 It's gone quite a long way for the club I was using, it may be a little bit lower than

 I would have expected but when you turn the club face in you effectively de-loft the golf

 club, you take loft off it and therefore it will run further with that particular shape.

 So that was quite a basic rudimentary type of draw shot but it worked quite nicely to

 either draw it against the wind or round the trees or whatever we talked about before,

Today in this video we are going to make traditional Italian Cecina, in English is garbanzo pancakes.

 They have to be very creamy, basically like how we make pancakes, so in the same way, creamy.

And don't forget to thumbs up my video and subscribe to my channel for new exciting recipes.

 But today I am going to show you how to make it fun, super healthy and yet very delicious

 Before we start, we are going to preheat our oven to 425 degrees F

 We are going to make a larger hole by scooping out a little bit more avocado

 It doesn't have to be perfect, it just needs to hold the avocado level

 I already have 2 cracked eggs, I recently did a video on how to crack them with one hand

 This is how you can get the perfect results, by putting the eggs into the bowl

 If you are one of those people who don't like bacon, you don't have to use it

 And I am going to grab my leftovers and put them in the pan as well

 And this beautiful breakfast in the making is going in the oven for 15-20 minutes

 I almost forgot to season them, so I am going to do it right now before it's completely baked

 So we took these babies out and I actually already ate all the bacon

 Bonjour mes gourmands, so the other day I was having a coffee outside with my friends,

 and as it is common practice in Germany, you get a lovely and free cookie with your hot

Looking at the coffee, I thought a French macaron would really make the coffee

 perfect, so today I'd like to show you a recipe for a French macaron with a simple

For the macaron shells, we'll need 50g of ground almonds, 80g of

 confectioners sugar, 1-2 tbsp of caster sugar, and food colouring, which is optional.

 also works with ground hazelnuts if you don't have any ground almonds on hand.

 Macarons are actually quite simple to make, but you need ingredients of very fine consistency

Powdered sugar can accumulate to bigger sugar lumps when not stored in an

 airtight container, so you'll want to pass it through a sieve to get back that light

 your ground almonds into the blender and give it a few pulses to get it really fine, so

 rougher surface like me, you can also leave the ground almonds as they are and just mix

 Put your egg white into a mixing bowl and start beating it on low speed.

 starting to fluff up, you can add the granulated sugar in 3 parts, increasing the speed of

Add a food colour of your choice, and beat the egg white on high speed until you

Just FYI, the whole beating process took me about 8 minutes in that big

 bowl, whereas it usually takes me only 6 minutes in a smaller bowl.

 Now, we're gradually adding the sugar and almond mix into the egg white, and carefully

As long as you aren't too violent, folding everything with determined

 strength and speed isn't going to deflate the beaten egg white.

 until it reaches a creamy consistency and easily runs off your spatula.

 Fill your pipe with the macaron batter and form round circles with a diameter of about

 water, shake off any excess water, and gently push down any peaks on your dough to receive

 again even out the macaron, and to remove unnecessary air pockets.

 to check if the surface is hardened, or to start baking earlier as the surface of your

 20, and 25 minutes with each attempt resulting in fails, whereas I always get perfect results

 to 140°C or 285°F so that the oven is ready when the 30 minutes are over.

 for 40 minutes and then take the whole tray out to let the macaron cool off.

 to wait for the macaron to have completely cooled down before we touch them, as they

 off they'll also have become stable and you can easily take them off the parchment

 has been acting up quite a lot recently and I guess it's about time I looked for another

In a bain-marie, mix the chocolate and the cream and start heating the mixture up

You don't need to bring the cream to a boil, you'll just want to heat

 it up to the point where the chocolate starts to melt and blends in with the cream.

Then take it out and beat it on high speed with a hand mixer until it

 the beating for the cream, you'll probably want a bit of a softer ganache, just reduce

 for every coffee break, for your afternoon tea and as an elegant welcoming treat whenever

 little tweaks with the filling absolutely transform the whole taste of them.

 fill them with the classic ganache, with delicious jam, with whipped cream, with custard and

 to take a picture of your macaron and share it with me if you try them out.

In this video we'll learn how to plant a tree using your Manistiller.

 pick a tree that is well suited for your area and one that is appropriate for your intended

 larger in several years, so pick a spot that will accommodate the tree's growth without

 interfering with your house, your neighbors, telephone or electrical lines.

 the diameter of the root ball, or about 2 feet in diameter for most bare root trees.

 near the planting site and use a rototiller to loosen the soil.

 Add compost, if available, and till the compost into your soil.

 rake or your feet so that the bottom of the hole will support the root ball, or bare roots,

 ball or the top of the bare roots with the surface of the surrounding turf or soil.

For ball and burlap trees, remove the burlap and any wire that constrains the

 tamp the soil with your hands or feet, being careful not to break any of the large roots.

 to wash away the soil or create a big hole in the newly planted area.

After thoroughly watering once and adding the root growth hormone,

 the tree aligned until the soil firms up and the roots take hold.

 2 to 3 inches away from the bark of new trees as the mulch can harbor pests and disease

 which was a haul, I said that I was planning on dyeing these shorts that I just bought

 from Topshop in the Topshop sale and they were £15 and they are high-waisted like an

 off-white peachy pink colour and I do recommend you actually using a short that is a light

 colour or if you just have some denim like cut-offs then I recommend you kind of bleaching

 them before so they go to a lighter colour and then the colours will show up a lot more

Mine were already like a very pale pink so I didn't really have much problem.

 You can definitely get high-waisted white denim shorts on eBay, I'm sure there's plenty.

 So I thought I'd video my process and they turned out really cool.

So if you want to know how I made these shorts then keep on watching.

 Okay so what you'll need, you'll need your shorts, you'll need your choice of two fabric

 dyes, mine are by Dylon and they're in Bahama Blue and Flamingo Pink.

 salt which opens up the pores of the fabric to allow the dyes to be absorbed a lot more

You'll need two buckets, one for each colour dye, a metal or plastic spoon

 Then next I filled up my buckets a quarter of the way up with some warm water.

 took the Bahama Blue dye and emptied a third of the sachet into the first bucket.

 added about four tablespoons of the dye salt which I just kind of eyeballed.

Starting with the bottom of the shorts I slowly dipped them into the

I dipped the shorts in a little over halfway so I can get that nice transitional

 the blue dye so that the dye would come out a lot more vibrant.

 was no harsh line I kept adjusting the shorts in the dye throughout.

 off I took them inside and rinsed them in some cold water just to get rid of any extra

And then taking the top part of the shorts I dunked it into the pink dye.

 Then again I made sure that I dipped the shorts in a little further than halfway so I could

 so I ended up adding some more dye and then stirring in thoroughly.

 of the dye powder is all dissolved otherwise you will get a slight patchy kind of look

And to make sure that I got that purple fade colour in the middle I started

Once I'd left them in there for about six or seven minutes I took them out and then

 so that they could get rid of all the dyes that are maybe still possibly going to leak.

 And once I did that I just hung them out to dry and then that was the end of it.

 try this DIY video out and if you do try it out then send me a picture on Twitter, I would

 Of course Gavin's here because you know basically I kind of just eat, but this man fixes it

 I kind of just kind of throw it together and eat it and I know you guys would not like

 So today I'm going to cook the exact same dish that Mike makes, but I'm going to add

 A little bit of Asian flavor just to kick it up a notch and make it a bit more interesting

 So I have a simple marinade with some fresh ginger, some low sodium soy sauce, very important

 I'm going to add a little bit more in there because I'm a, huh.

 And the beauty about these marinades is that you can add anything.

 You know, all I did here is I have some low sodium chicken broth and popped the carrots

 And for the last 30 seconds throw in the snap peas because you don't want to overcook them.

 Can you put the chicken broth or in the rice when you cook the rice too?

 What I did was I actually cooked the rice in the chicken broth but I put some fresh ginger

 in there as well and the reason I did that is just to cover the flavour.

 So yes, I want the flavour of the rice to carry through to the vegetables into the chicken

 So Mikey, just a little bit of sauce which will add a little bit of moisture back into

 So Mikey, a great tip for people is to marinate the chicken ahead of time.

 So what you could do is marinate it in the morning, throw it in the fridge so that when

 you come home in the evening or after you train, then you just throw the chicken on

 Also, a great tip is to cook your rice ahead of time so that you don't have to kind of

 Just go to the fridge, take your portion, put it on the plate, go with your chicken,

 Hi, it's me Crystal from crystalpowder.com and today I'm going to show you how to put

 siphon fed, but today it's gravity fed time, which means it's just the cup on top which

 gravity feeds down, which helps you get the paint out and all over my gun.

 I've taken it apart already, so let's just put it back together.

 So the first thing I like to do is grab the tip, which I don't see, oh, because it's in

So there's like two tips, like a bigger tip and a little tip, but they both need to

 front of you and that you have something, like some kind of material that won't let

 have to put it in hand tight right now and then I'm going to put it in here.

 really tight with my hands and it's fine because I usually end up taking it off and on because

 nice and tight, I'm going to grab my little wrench and I'm going to tighten this up, this

 and I'll grab the needle guard, which is, this one comes in two parts.

 now I'm going to take the needle guard and go ahead and hand tighten it on the top.

And the trigger, if you notice, if you have an Iwata, it will have a little

I know that some of the Pashay's don't do that, but I know Iwata has a notch and

 I can't sometimes get it all the time because this thing is crazy.

 easier because then that little notch that has to go in that hole kind of just falls

 straight down where I was trying to do it a more difficult way.

 push down on the trigger now and it should go down and come right back up.

 we don't want it to move because that was such a pain in the, you know what, to get

 Hi guys, I'm back with another video specifically for the ladies.

 about how we preserve our weave so that we can use it more than once.

 at Walmart or at your Michael's store or any craft store that is near to you.

When you open your packet, you will need to get a needle or something

 you can use a wide tooth comb just to take all the hair from on top of your weft.

 or if you're using a flat surface, you're going to just lay it flat.

 get your Freycek and you're just going to run, squeeze small portions along your wefts

You're going to put a little extra so it doesn't unravel from the end.

 and to reinforce your weft, you're going to apply some more Freycek to this side.

For two bottles of here or three, you probably need one bottle but you can just

 It's Michael from Lean Body Lifestyle and today what I'm going to show you guys how

 Now this is quick, easy, it's probably only going to take you around 10 minutes.

 So I hope you guys enjoy this video and let's go ahead and get started with the ingredients

 So the first thing that we're going to do is take one whole wheat pita that I have right

 here and one of these is only going to be 100 calories and 21 grams of carbs.

 And what we're going to do is put that on a plate and we're actually going to stick

 We're going to stick this in the oven for 5 minutes and the whole reason for putting

 it in the oven is we want to make our pizza crust nice and crispy.

 So in the meantime, while I have this in the oven, we're going to go ahead and make our

 chocolate protein sauce that we're going to spread on top of our dessert pizza.

 Alright, so to make our chocolate protein sauce, what we're actually going to do is

 But the bottom line is we're just going to use a quarter of a cup for the base of our

 So now that we have the quarter of a cup of Greek yogurt, what I have here is one scoop

 And then next what we're going to add is one tablespoon of unsweetened baking cocoa.

 Alright, so as you guys can see here, I just finished stirring up our chocolate protein

 spread that we're going to spread on our pita, which I went ahead and took out of the oven

 So now what we're going to do is just take our chocolate protein spread, go ahead and

 So now as you guys can see, we have our chocolate protein sauce spread across our pita that's

 So now what we're going to do is just take one banana, we're actually going to end up

 using a half of it, and we're going to cut it into small slices and put those on top

 Now obviously this right here is completely optional, or if you have any other fruit like

 Alright, so as you guys can see here, I just finished cutting up the half of a banana and

 And here you guys can kind of get a good look at this dessert pizza and it looks really

 And that's pretty much going to do it for this video guys, so thank you so much for

 This really makes one of the perfect post-workout snacks because you have a nice source of carbohydrates

 in addition to some whey protein that we added and made the chocolate sauce out of.

 If you enjoyed this video, please leave a thumbs up rating because it helps me out a

 lot and I really appreciate it guys, I can't tell you how much I appreciate it.

 And stop by my website down below if you want to see more recipes like this one.

 you'll be able to see some of the techniques in my new book, Pictorial

 pixelating, and let me just remind you a little bit about that.

 this area has been pixelated, and it's pretty effective when you mix colors.

 I've got a lot of pink and purple and greens in there, and it's a raised

 in this video today, what I want to show you is I want to show you shagging, and

 if we can get a close-up of shagging, you can see that this is a raised surface,

 that is raised like that, the viewer will immediately look at that place on

 your rug, and they'll be drawn to it because it's so different.

I personally have always had some difficulty with the way that rug

 hookers have handled the hooking of grass because we always hook grass

 this technique that I call shagging, and shagging can be done in two ways.

 can be done absolutely even, just a slightly raised surface, or shagging can

I'm going to show you on my piece of linen here how this is done.

 I have a tree here, but at the base of the tree, you know, I need at the base of a

 tree, for instance, to anchor or to ground that tree with something dark.

 better time to express the fact that there is, let's say, some grass

 growing, let's say, at the bottom of the tree, and that it is vertical.

 that I've got uneven, I'm pulling up uneven loops, okay, and I'm going to mix.

 Okay, it's always a good idea to use a variety of materials, and it doesn't

 you know, of course, that this is for a wall hang, this is not for a floor rug,

 because you don't want to, you'll trip over all these, these high, these high

 shagging, and sometimes I've known some of my students will take a, and I've done

 it occasionally, is I'll take a little piece of thread and a needle, and if I

 want to push it up against the backing of the rug, I'll just put a little tack so

 the viewer that there is something vertical growing at the base of this tree.

 these big pictorial rugs that are farm scenes with lots of fields, it's nice to

 raised, and so when I do it this way, I raise my loops up at least an inch and a

 great detail in my new book, Pictorial Hooked Rugs, but I think it helps

 rows side by side, right next to each other, to get this effect.

 and sometimes it's a little hard to see, you have to really get in there, so

 you're really, you know, looking for that hole that's right next to the previous

And when I get my two rows hooked, then I take my scissors and I just

 what better way can you have to separate different areas of your rug?

 because you'll see pages and pages of interesting and new techniques for your

 My name is Brian Duffy, I'm the executive chef for Kildare's Irish Pubs in Philadelphia.

 And I'm here in a residence inn today in one of our fully equipped kitchens.

 So what we're going to do today, we're doing our niçoise salad.

 Tomatoes, some black olives, some nice canned tuna, lemon, olive oil, our green beans, and

 All I'm going to do is just make a couple of nice little slices right on these.

 I'm going to take some black olives and we're just going to do a nice little slice on these.

 We're going to take a little bit of lemon and just pop it right over top of that.

 Then when I do my olive oil, which is right over here, I'm going to dress the outside

 We're just going to toss our salad right there, rolling it around the outside of the bowl

 Then we're going to take our greens, pop it right into the center, just like that.

 We're going to take our mixture, which is right over here, and we're going to place

 These are our green beans, our nice lemon-dressed tomatoes and black olives, just like that.

 Then we're going to finish that with some nice crusty bread right around the outside.

 Finish that with just a hint more salt and pepper, a little bit of drizzle of oil right

 Then we're going to top it with some of our good tuna right there.

 I just made this wonderful nicoise salad up in my room, and I thought, what a perfect

 opportunity for me to come downstairs into the business center, sit down, relax, watch

 I can even socialize with some of the other guests in the hotel.

 I love going to a residence in because it allows me to maintain my regular lifestyle

 You can always go to residencein.com, check out some of my recipes.

 well I'm only making one Cornish hen and this recipe calls for two.

 We're gonna put in, maybe we should start with the marinade first.

 fresh lime juice, three cloves of garlic, minced, one and a half tablespoons of soy

If you wanna keep this gluten free, it suggests using wheat free, but I'm gonna

 is another one that is to be done on a grill, but I'm just going to throw it into the fridge

So just make sure that that sauce gets all over, under the wings,

Just make sure every, maybe every 15 minutes or so, go in to the

 fridge and redistribute the sauce all over so that it just gets thoroughly soaked.

Alright, I'm going to put this in a 350 degree oven for about an hour.

One side was a lot smaller than the other, so this one looked quite finished

I would suggest letting it go a little longer than two hours, but

 We're going to do all those leaves on the top so we'll be doing a lot of loops

 Small one here a little bit larger one here and now we'll do the body

 Let's make that fatter and go back up and be a slightly curved line here

 We'll put that line in there and then two ovals inside the eye and then we're just going to give them a little

 Come back down and then a curved line for the tongue and now we can start our coloring

 We just finished up a chest workout, sticking with the theme of the day.

 We're going to teach you guys the difference between a dumbbell and a barbell bench press.

 So if you're looking to build your chest, ideally you need to hit your chest from many

 Doing a dumbbell and a barbell is essentially the same movement or the same strength curve

 except there's a slightly different force on your triceps and on your delts.

 And the range of motion can be slightly greater on a dumbbell obviously if you can get a little

 So if I'm using a barbell, the natural tendency of my hands is going to be to push out.

 So if Matt's doing a barbell press, his natural tendency is going to push here because that's

 just the way your body, if your hands are slightly outside of your shoulders, the natural

 friction of the universe is going to have you pushing this way.

 It tends to put a lot of strain on your elbows, maybe even less tension on your pec.

 If you learn to manipulate the concept of intention, you can thereby reverse it, push

 So learning the concept of intention will really help you reverse the overload on the

 This is really, really subtle, so you guys really want to pay attention to this.

 So right now Matt's wrists and hands are directly over his elbows.

 That means he has pretty good tension going through his chest and pretty even distribution

 Less of an angle at the elbow means more of a tricep recruitment.

 So if he brings his hands inside the elbow, his hands inside the elbow simply means there's

 going to be more tricep recruitment, and thereby the chest is actually going to be doing less

 If Matt were wanting to isolate his chest a bit more, he would actually take his hands

 Now he takes the tricep out of it and his pecs are forced to work more.

 So if you guys are looking for optimal pec recruitment, big stretch at the bottom, full

 shoulder retraction, depress your shoulders, hands slightly outside the elbow, engage the

 So remember, the one most important thing you can do when you're trying to build any

 We retract, we depress, we pull back, we make sure the hands are slightly outside the elbows,

 everything else is relaxed, we engage here, squeeze, and push through.

 The only thing you're worried about is the position of your humerus.

 So Matt's thinking about bringing his humerus, bend your elbows, bringing the humerus back

 Because if you do that, look at how conjectured that pec is versus doing this.

 So you see the relative position of his humerus is here versus there.

 So that's one of your considerations when training with dumbbells.

 Pay attention to the position of your elbow and your humerus and forget about the position

 Hi, it's Tiffany from I Heart Art and I'm going to show you how to use these Faber-Castell

 I'm going to be using this leaf stamp from this Raisin Boat stamp set.

 It helps me to get even coverage if I spread the water out a bit on the stamp.

 And then I apply the gelatos directly to the stamp starting with a middle color.

 We are not better than Leigh and Turner from leighnesecrets.com.

 We're going to talk about some gym stuff today, some exercise stuff.

 I was at the gym on Sunday for you guys and doing some workouts.

 First, I want to talk about time management and how to figure out what the heck to do

 They're squatting and they're thinking, I'm squatting but should I be on the treadmill?

 They're on the treadmill thinking, I'm on the treadmill but should I be doing lunges

 In that one hour, this is step two, divide that hour in either 15-minute segments or

 Step number three, figure out what your goal is for that particular day and what type of

 For example, full body workout day, which is always a good day.

 Step number four, figure out what each segment is going to mean for you.

 Example being 15 minutes dedicated to legs, 15 minutes chest and back, 15 minutes abs

 and stability stuff and 15 minutes of high intensity interval training.

 That would be a great little one hour full body workout wrapped in a little bow.

 Even if you only have a half hour, then you segment that into either two 15-minute sections

 Next thing I'm going to show you guys is a workout from Sunday.

 I like to warm up with some kind of treadmill, some kind of jump roping or whatever.

 But I wanted to show you guys, you can use a treadmill as a tool for walking lunges.

 So you don't have to just do walking lunges in like a crowded gym or a place that's really

 small if you don't have a lot of room or you're embarrassed to do walking lunges around the

 You can use a treadmill on one mile per hour depending on how long your legs are and then

 Jump squats, putting your feet to the side in between your runs.

 If you don't have a big gym or all you have is a treadmill in a hotel or something, you

 can put yourself through a killer workout throwing in lunges, sprinting.

 It's a great idea to just get your cardio out of the way and you might as well have

 Basically just to show you guys, if you're going to do a heavy set of something, that's

 A light set, a body weight set, that way you won't injure yourself.

 Also you'll probably do a much better job if you're warmed up and you did a warm up

 I know a lot of you guys might have done a squat with a bar on your back and there's

 Problem could be though, if you're doing squats with a bar on your back and you're folding

 forward and your eyes are on the floor and ending up on the floor instead of straight

 ahead and your chest is folding downwards, you want to be working your booty.

 So if you do the squat with a bar in front of you using your fingers and your arms to

 force yourself to keep your posture up, you're going to find that you're not A, you're not

 going to be able to do as much weight when you put the bar there, which is fine.

 B, your posture is going to be much better just overall and C, you're going to feel it

 This particular set, it's kind of like an oblique plank and then I add a plyo in there

 If you want any more information about how to get into stay lean, firm and toned, you

 My fridge is empty right now and I need to go grocery shopping.

 I'm going to come back and I'm going to show you guys my basics and I will see you guys

 Hi everybody, I'm Chef Susie with learntocook.com and I'm here today to make

 whippy pies, which are a Pennsylvania Amish favorite and they're just a really

 their children with their leftover cake batter and their leftover icing for a

I'm going to be making a chocolate whippy pie, which is a classic

But these days we're seeing whippy pies in all different flavors such as

 banana, red velvet, I've even seen them in zucchini and I've also seen a peanut

 I've got my brown sugar and my shortening and I'm going to put it on

 I'm going to let this mixture cream until it's smooth and I'm going to scrape

 Once it's well creamed, I'm going to go ahead and add my egg and then I'm going to

 And next I'm going to be adding my dry ingredient mixture, which I've sifted

 my flour, and my cocoa powder, which is going to be the chocolate flavor in the

 milk and this just helps everything incorporate better so it doesn't break

 So I'm just going to take one of my dishers, a little scoop that I have that

 I like to use for cookies and things, and I'm just going to scoop out my

 these too close together because they're going to spread a little bit

 You just want to test them by gently pressing your finger on the top

 and just see if you feel some firmness and no doughiness, the same way that you

 spread this mix just a little bit, just so it's not so round when it comes

 These pies kind of will have a little bit of a sandwich look to them.

 I'm going to put these in the oven at 350 for about 15 minutes.

 Now that my whippy pies are baked and cool, I'm going to be making the icing so we can fill the whippy pies.

 and I'm using my favorite organic valley butter, which I like so much.

 So I'm just going to go ahead and incorporate this and then we'll just be

 than others and I try to match up the tops and the bottoms if they're

 Modo's minnow is a streamer pattern that seems to be all the rage right now.

 I've yet to really fish one, but as you can see here it looks pretty good underwater.

 Mash the barb so you're able to slide the appropriately sized cone head around the bend

 I like to add a good amount of weight to ensure the fly will go down quickly.

 To really stabilize the weight, hook, and cone head, apply a small amount of Zappa Gap

 Slide the weight forward and hold it there for a few seconds while the glue sets.

 Start your thread on the shank just behind the weight and take wraps rearward to the

 For the tail, pull back the lower fibers on a single plume of marabou, then snip the stem

 Then remove the tip of the feather so it won't be part of the tail.

 With that done, I like to rip the stringy tips off the marabou, resulting in a fluffier

 Measure the tail so it's about a hook length long, and then tie it in securely to the top

 You can then snip the tip off, leaving a small triangle which will aid in tie in.

 Grab the stem with your hackle pliers and preen the fibers rearward.

 As you wrap the stem around the hook shank, continue to pull the fibers back.

 When you get to bare stem, secure it with a few wraps, and then snip it off close.

 You're going to repeat the same procedure over and over again to cover the entire hook

 Yes, it takes a lot of feathers, and it takes a good deal of time.

 Think of it like building a deer hair head on a muddler minnow.

 With about an eighth of an inch left before the cone, switch over from partridge to white

 With the shiny side of the feather facing you, snip the base of the feather off, and

 Stripping a few extra fibers from the top edge of the stem will help the feather to

 Tie in the stem and begin taking wraps so the dull side of the feather faces rearward.

 You'll find you can really pack the wraps in tightly behind the cone head.

 Take several turns of tying thread to secure the tip of the saddle hackle.

 To finish the fly, do two five or six turn whip finishes before cutting the tying thread

 A generous drop of head cement on the wraps behind the bead helps to ensure nothing will

 Kind of like a woolly bugger, but with more densely packed fibers.

 Hi guys, this is the holiday slash winter tutorial I'm going to show you how to do today.

 It's really easy, so all you need is a red polish, a white polish, and a detail brush

 Currently I'm using Sally Hansen's Thicken Up Strengthening Nail Thickener.

 So once you let your base coat dry, you're going to want to grab a red color.

 And you're just going to want to do a really basic manicure with this red.

 You can use any red that you want and just cover every nail in this and let it dry.

 If you need more than one coat, do a second coat and let that dry before moving on.

 If you guys need any tips on how to do this, I have a very basic French tip manicure video

 I will link it in the description box below, as well as any materials you might want to

 And once you've got that, grab a dotting tool or a little brush, dip into that white polish,

 And basically it's just a bunch of horizontal diagonals to create sort of the layers of

 It doesn't have to be super accurate because it's, I mean, it's a tree.

 And the next step with that same brush or dotting tool that you have, I'm just going

 to create a bunch of small dots on the opposite corner from where the tree is.

 And try and make your dots as tiny as possible because these are like little snowflakes.

 You can use just a regular clear top coat if you want, but I think the little bits of

 And once you've done that, let that dry, that is your final design.

 Hope you guys have a happy holidays and I will see you in the new year.

 I like this one here because it actually tells you how to make different colors.

 So you're going to need a spoon, a big bowl, some aluminum foil, and then a container.

 what I recommend doing is using baking paper or parchment paper or whatever you call it.

 You want to make sure that you break them apart and just dunk them in there.

And then I will put a bowl over the top and kind of just get them submerged in there.

And like the blue ones and the green ones, and that will turn out a

If you don't want to get your fingers blue, you can push down quite far as you can see.

And then what I'm going to do is take it out of the container and leave

 to hold these ones in here for a bit longer and try and get them a bit darker.

 with the other ones and previous ones I've done in the past, the longer you leave them, the darker

But obviously yellow and white together is going to make a pretty pale color.

 I'm going to try and leave them in there for a little bit longer than everyone else,

So here are the green ones and I'll show you guys them all once we've finished.

 All right guys, so what I've ended up doing is putting them onto a cake drying rack,

 just so then underneath them and everything can get dry as well.

 so the top is drying, but underneath it's kind of pooling a little bit.

 dusting the marshmallows in some corn flour so then they don't stick.

 Hey guys, so today I am going to be putting these into the containers or the glass jars.

 And I'm going to transfer these into here and then I'm going to put them on with

 Glad Wrap on them so that I don't have to worry about doing it on the day.

So here are the finished product and this is what they're going to

 I just wanted to show you real quickly how this little apple peeler corer works.

 Put it in the pan, and then I'll bring this back to get rid of the core.

 With four cups of sugar, I'm going to add two teaspoons of cinnamon,

 And you can see we're getting closer to how we want our apple butter to look.

 Go real slowly and don't lift the blender out so that you splatter.

 So these are hot, and we'll go ahead and put the funnel on there.

 And it looks like we need a little bit more of the apple butter in here

 Today I show you how to prepare the delicious chocolate dessert.

 Then, in the bowl we put the chocolate and we put the bowl on the pot.

 Because when we whip the cream, the cream has to be very start slowly and we continue faster.

 And also I prepare the dish where we put with the baking paper on.

 In this video, I will show you how to make this delicious dessert step by step.

 In this video, I am going to show you a very simple dessert that I call it Sholeh Zard.

 So this is the one I want to make today and I call it Sholeh Zard Fauri.

 These are the ingredients you need to make this Sholeh Zard Fauri.

 You need some rice powder, cinnamon, saffron powder, water, rose water, and slivered almond.

 All the ingredients and the measurements are in the site and you can decide if you want

 to make more or less and so you can use this and adjust it to your needs.

 Now we have to bring this to boil but you have to mix it all the time.

 Now you add the sugar and the rose water and mix it again until this gets thicker and thicker.

 As you see, this is getting a little bit thicker and I'll add saffron a little bit to it.

 Now this is the right thickness for this and we add our slivered almond to it and keep a little bit for decoration.

 And now decorate it with a little bit of cinnamon and some of the nuts that you have.

 And now when it's a little bit cooler, you can put it in the fridge.

 And this is the individual serving but you can make it in a big serving dish as well.

 Our Sholeh Zardeh Fori is ready now and I made it like a map of Iran.

 Alright, so as you can see, the back is cleared out, cleaned out, all the way up to the roof.

 A couple of things I'm going to do is I'm going to remove the AC unit back here.

 So I'm probably going to go with, well I'll hold off on that for now.

 But for now, let's just build the shell and we'll start getting things constructed.

 Okay, here I'm adding some MDF three quarter inch to the roof line.

 This has already got some three quarter over here and it's got a curve to it because it

 But I replaced the front board with this one and it's just Gorilla glued in.

 Alright, so a lot of these panels are going to be really large and we're going to probably

 And this biscuit joiner, I've used this in the past and it works really well.

 Alright, so as you can see, I'm pretty much done with the shell.

 Just got to disassemble it, take it out, glue it up and put it back in.

 A tea would be open and I recommend keeping it on a shelf with a small Romeo and Juliet

 But in this case I'm moving from a PG Tips which is a good Guanis tea to these fancy

 schmancy English breakfast teas that we just got from the Windsor Farm Shop.

 You can kind of see it's shape there because it has a three dimensional shape and therefore

 Although you need to be cautious because it means your tea will steep more quickly.

 Okay now I'm going to drop one of these tag tea bags into each of the mugs.

 Now the thing you have to be careful about with the tag tea bag is you really don't want

 We found we didn't really like the toaster a lot and we ended up replacing it but it's

 a good honest kettle although we get a lot of build up of stuff in it because of the

 It has a little filter built into the top there that gets rid of some of that stuff.

 You need to make sure that you hang on to the tags before you pour the water into the

 And then I literally pour straight onto the tea bag like that and then I leave a little

 Taking into account that once you take the tea bag out that the water level will drop

 I've already put a little sweetener in mine at the right hand end.

 But I use these to put the wet tea bags in and then you avoid the kind of the risk of

 You know and creating a path between here and wherever you just keep your belt.

 But you need to be careful that you don't dribble over the edge of the mug.

 And then I put the teaspoon in the one at the left hand edge because that's the one

 Yeah, I'm sure the color reproduction on the video camera will be really good.

 And then I give the sugared one a little bit of an extra stir just in case there.

 So I probably need to adjust for a while until we get through these 200.

 Party Rock is in the house tonight Everybody just have a good time

 And we're gonna make you lose your mind Everybody just have a good time

 Everybody just have a good time Everybody just have a good time

 And then, so F, first fret, sixth string, third fret, fifth string, third fret, fifth string, uh, fourth string, first fret, third string, first fret, second string, first fret, first string.

 Then we're gonna go to a D sharp major, which is on the fifth, sixth fret of the fifth string.

We're gonna go sixth fret on the fifth string, sixth fret, fifth string, um, eighth fret of the fourth string, eighth fret of the fourth string, eighth fret of the second string, and then,

And then we're gonna slide that major chord up to the C sharp major on the fourth fret of the fifth string.

Four, from the fifth string down it's four, six, six, six, four.

 And then, I mean, it's just a matter of, uh, putting it together.

 Party rockers in the house tonight Everybody just have a good time And we're gonna make you lose your mind Mmm, just have a good time

Today I'm going to show you how you can save time while preparing your bento

 In this case I will be using broccoli, but you can also use this technique for other kinds of vegetables.

 When I make bentos for myself, I do not want to buy a whole broccoli

 and waste half of it because I only put one or two pieces per day in my bentos.

 So when I buy broccoli, I make sure that I cook all of it in the same time

 Please do yourself a favor and do not throw the broccoli stems.

 Just be careful to take the hard parts off and they're ready to use.

 You can cut them in pieces and use them in fried rice or fried noodles.

 By the way, did you know that the stems are much higher in fiber than the florets?

 I have quite a lot so I'm adding a second basket on top of the first one.

 I'm cutting my plastic wrapping sheet in rectangles that are approximately the size of my branches.

 The last step is putting them in a plastic bag and then in the freezer.

 From now on, if you're in a hurry but you still want to prepare a bento,

 just pop one of them out of the freezer in the microwave for 30 seconds to one minute

 You can also skip the microwave and put them straight away in your box.

 They will act as ice packs, keeping your food safe throughout the day.

 This recipe is bound to become your family's new favorite dinner.

 It's super easy and delicious and I think you're going to love it.

 If you'd like to learn how to make these burritos then keep watching.

 One teaspoon of dried oregano, one teaspoon of ground cumin, quarter teaspoon of garlic

 powder, a quarter teaspoon of onion powder, half a teaspoon of ancho chili powder, and

 You can do more or less than that depending on how spicy you'd like the steak to be.

 This spice rub is going to give my steak a nice smoky, savory flavor and it's going to

 This piece of skirt steak that I bought from the store, one side was really thick and the

 other side was really thin so I actually cut it in half so that I could cook the thin side

 quicker and let the thicker side cook longer since it will obviously take longer to cook.

 I'm just rubbing my spice mixture into the steak on both sides.

 You can actually let this sit for 20 minutes or up to 8 hours to really let the flavor

 After I've sprinkled the spice mixture on both sides of my skirt steak, I'm going to

 pop it in the fridge to let the flavors marinate and now I'm moving on to my pico de gallo.

 I have some Roma tomatoes here which I'm just dicing up and you can make the dice as big

 Hopefully your knife is way sharper than mine was when I was making this video.

 It was pretty dull and there's nothing more dangerous in the kitchen than a dull knife

 I actually wrote a whole post, I'll link to it in the bottom bar description, all about

 how to sharpen your knife and it looks like I need to be following my own advice.

 I'm actually going to mince it because I like my jalapeno to be very small chunks in my

 If you like bigger chunks or if you like a lot of jalapeno, go for it.

 If you want to include some seeds because you like spice, go ahead.

 I don't like the spice that much so I'm not really going to include the seeds.

 I'm going to mince it up real small and that's going to be added to my jalapeno, to my pico

 And feel free to wear gloves while you're chopping this jalapeno because if you happen

 to touch your eyes right after chopping up the jalapeno, it can really burn and that's

 So either wear gloves or be sure to wash your hands right after chopping up any type of

 If you're one of those people that hates the taste of cilantro, go ahead and use parsley

 So I'm just going to give that a stir and then that's going to go in the fridge.

 I'm going to cover it and pop it in the fridge until I'm ready to assemble my burritos.

 This rice also has chipotle inspired flavors, so I'm adding fresh cilantro, fresh lime juice,

 And I actually used short grain brown rice to increase the healthfulness of this dish

 and to make you feel more full and to give you some more fiber after eating it.

 Now that my steak has been sitting in the fridge with the spice mixture, I'm going to

 If you don't have access to a grill, you can of course use an indoor grill pan or an indoor

 I'm going to cook the steak until it's about medium rare, which is an internal temperature

 You can cook the steak any way you like, whatever your preference is.

 As you can see here, I'm just slicing it into kind of large slivers.

 And again, you can make the chunks of steak as big or as small as you prefer.

 Now that everything's ready, I'm going to get started assembling my burritos.

 I've also warmed up a can of black beans, and I also have some sour cream here for my

 So I have one tortilla, one flour tortilla, which I've topped with the rice mixture with

 I'm also topping it with my pico de gallo, and lastly, I'm going to dollop some sour

 Now comes the most challenging part of making these burritos, and that's actually folding

 I'm going to make sure my filling is compact in there, and I'm going to leave myself a

 little border so I can roll the burrito up and fold the sides of the tortilla over, as

 I'm going to roll it up and place it seam side down, and I'm going to cut into it so

 All right, guys, and that's how you make copycat chipotle-style steak burritos.

 Don't forget to subscribe to my channel, and I'll see you next Wednesday for another food

I got busted, but not to worry, because I have a Kraft Easy Eats

And we're going to stir this in with our, let me just kind of get this

We're going to put in our 1 3rd cup sugar, because oh, so sweet.

 Okay, now we're going to throw in, we're going to add two cups of our Cool Whip.

 make this all nice, and we're going to put this in the refrigerator for two to three

Okay, now that we've chilled it for three hours, we're going to decorate

 Every day you gotta have something fun in your life and you gotta do something fun.

 And one of the things that we've been having a lot of fun with is building a fixie.

 We used that old school, curled down handlebar, we flipped it upside down, cut it off.

 I'm gonna put one of these on for you, so I'm gonna give you the tips of how to get this baby on there.

 A lot of people don't know how to get these things on, or what to do, or how to use it.

 The hairspray, the alcohol, is what gets the hairspray, the tacky stuff, the gluey stuff.

 And then the alcohol evaporates, the gluey stuff sticks on, your grip stays nice and tight.

 Today I am so excited because I am sharing my favorite recipe which I make it regularly.

 This is sandwich, grilled sandwich with mayonnaise and sweet corn.

 So you all know guys you get sweet corn you can get it store bought or now a days in the

 And now what you can do directly you can put it in a bowl, mix some pepper powder, some

 salt and some mayonnaise and you can just apply it on to your bread.

 So what you can do is just add little bit of butter and we are just going to saute this

 If you want little bit spicy you can just add it otherwise you can skip no problem because

 anyway we are adding mayonnaise, cheese everything so you don't need anything and little bit

 Now be careful and just for a minute saute this and you can just switch off this flame.

 So here this is done just a minute that's it and now transfer it into a bowl.

 So while this is hot itself you can just put your cheese into this or you can mix the mayonnaise.

 Why I am not adding the mayonnaise in the hot because it will melt.

 So I am adding the cheese so that cheese will melt and this is ready our stuffing is

 And now take your bread slices and first apply the mayonnaise if you want you can apply mayonnaise

 if you don't want you can skip you can just do it directly with your sweet corn but when

 you apply this mayonnaise you get nice juicy grilled sandwich and in this now we are going

 So just spread it equally if you want you can sprinkle some more of cheese or if you

 have cheese slices also you can just put the cheese slice on top of it.

 That's it and this cover it with another bread slice and just apply the butter spread

 nice good amount of butter and backside we are going to apply later on and here the grill

 come toaster is all ready just keep in this and we are going to grill it.

 So here my grill is on so we are going to wait for 2 to 3 minutes then we will get a

 So I am going to make the other one also just apply nice amount of mayonnaise and the stuffing

 stuffing I like to be more so if you want you can add more or less if you want you can

 add some tomato ketchup also then cover it and apply some more of butter grill the other

 one also that's it so we are going to grill it now for 2 to 3 minutes.

 So dear friends after 2 to 3 minutes you can see nice grilled sandwich is ready just

 remove it and transfer it and now you can just cut into triangles and serve with nice

 tomato ketchup cut this if you want you can just serve this triangle or you can just make

 it into smaller triangles also whichever way you want you can just cut it and enjoy

 this you will have nice juicy juicy corn sandwich wow see the cheese and the mayonnaise will

 be literally you know coming out of this and this I am going to enjoy it.

 Dear friends what else I should say about this sandwich this is one of my favorite favorite

 favorite so if you want to enjoy this please do try this this is very very yummy and simple

 to make it so I hope you enjoyed this so see you in another session with some more recipes.

 There is no protective film or sticker on its screen, which makes the screen vulnerable

 Inside the package of every bone iPhone case, a free protective film will be included.

 Before installing the film, clean the screen with a lint-free cloth.

 Then use MagG tape to remove any fingerprint or dust particle left on the screen.

 We choose MagG tape because it won't leave adhesive on the screen.

 And also there are two tags that will help you with the installation.

 First, with tag 1 facing down, pull it down to half of the film.

 The air bubble may not be completely rubbed out because of any dust particle left on the screen.

 So we can place a piece of tape onto the screen and lift up the film.

 Hi there, I'm Jules from Stone Soup and in this video we're going to be making addictive

 We're using some green curry paste and coconut milk, so it's kind of a Thai inspired soup.

 And then the final secret ingredient, some peanut butter, which just adds really lovely

 So we'll hop into the kitchen and I'll show you how to make it.

 I'm just going to put a bit of coconut, the cream from the top of the coconut milk, in

 So we want, probably depending on how strong you like things, three or four tablespoons,

 And we just want to gently kind of fry it, just to bring out the fragrance.

 But of course if you over toast it here, it's going to burn and you'll get your wet burnt

 Okay, so it's been sizzling for about 10 seconds and it's starting to smell really lovely.

 So we'll just get, I tend to err on the side of under cooking rather than over, so we'll

 And then a can of coconut, so this is about a cup of coconut milk.

 Two heads of broccoli and I've just chopped them into kind of chunky florets and I've

 sliced the stems because they're edible as well and if there's any leaves on them.

 And then we're just going to bring it up to a boil and we'll just simmer it for seven

 or eight minutes, maybe up to 10 minutes, just until the broccoli is tender.

 Simmering for about eight minutes and when I test with a knife, the broccoli feels really

 tender, it's easy to cut into, so we'll just get it off the heat.

 Now I'm just going to leave this as chunks, but to serve I'm going to add a bit of a secret

 So I've just got some smooth peanut butter here, so I'm just going to put in a couple

 I could have put this in earlier, I just didn't think about it.

 So I find that the peanut butter just adds some really lovely richness and doesn't take

 Of course you could leave it out if you like and it adds some sweetness as well, so if

 you do leave it out you might like to season with just a little bit of sugar.

 Polymer clay and metal clay offer endless possibilities when combined together.

 In this project, you will learn tips and tricks when creating a silver pendant from PMC3 with

 Let's get started by working with metal clay and creating a back bezel.

 I'm working on a clay board surface and using our clay rolling frames for easy and accurate

 Pick the exterior shape you wish to use for your pendant shape.

 This will be the front of my pendant and I use the same shape for the exterior.

 I choose another shape template to cut out an oval to be used as a center.

 When your two pieces have dried enough to become leather hard, it's time to cut a back

 The secret to adding polymer clay to metal clay is the back bezel technique.

 Use a bench knife to shave the oval bezel to a 45 degree angle.

 This bezel will create a space that locks the polymer clay in when pressed into the

 When I have my angle cut around the entire bezel, it's time to combine the two pieces.

 First, cover the inside of the front slab completely with slip.

 Using slip is a great way to completely join your pieces together.

 Use a small brush and as you apply, slip fills the joint around the exterior of the entire

 This will save you a ton of sanding time and gives you a beautiful and clean look.

 Once the pendant is bone dry, you're ready to refine your piece.

 I use a smoothie sanding stick to refine my edges and use wet dry sandpaper to smooth

 It's important to go back and clean any excess slip out of the bezel.

 The two clays cannot be fired together because polymer clay burns at 300 degrees.

 Our pendant is made from PMC3, so it will need to be fired at 1650 for two hours.

 Once the piece is cooled, remove from the kiln and you're ready to start finishing.

 Using my Fordham, I continue to refine my piece using a coarse, medium, and ultra fine

 From here, you can begin adding polymer clay or add a patina for an antique look.

 Buff any fingerprints off your piece and add it to the patina solution.

 When the piece has turned to your liking, remove from the patina and rinse with water.

 For this piece, I use Cool Tools Patina Gel to get the oxidized look I desire.

 Here's a piece of polymer clay I created using the texture technique in our Working with

 You can use any piece of polymer you create, but make sure the shape roughly matches your

 Place the polymer in the bezel and begin pressing it into place.

 You want to make sure you press the edges evenly into the back bezel we created earlier.

 I'm using a small spatula tool, but you can also use your finger.

 Once your piece is in place, make sure all your edges are locked in securely.

 The polymer I'm using is Sculpey Primo and will need to be baked at 275 degrees.

 This craft oven that Cool Tools offers is a great and easy way to fire polymer clay.

 You'll want to make sure your polymer piece is nice and smooth since it's the focal point

 Using a fine, smoothie sanding stick, I wet sand the polymer piece.

 When you get it just right, add a jump ring and string it with any stringing material

 Now you have a piece that features beautiful metal clay and the brilliant colors of polymer

 Visit our Learning Center at www.cooltools.us for more cool jewelry making videos.

 Subscribe to our YouTube channel, like us on Facebook, follow us on Twitter, and be

 sure to sign up for our email list to be the first to hear about new videos, new products,

 This is the show where we teach you quick and easy, healthy recipes to help you feel

 I was at her house and her kids love applesauce and I took it out of the refrigerator and

 of course I looked at the ingredients as I always do and I was like, what?

 However, if you buy an applesauce from a store, it's got to be pasteurized or it's got to

 So this Living Applesauce is going to far surpass nutritionally any applesauce that

 So I've cut up some apples and I'm putting apples in my wonderful Breville sous chef food

 Now there is like a trace amount of a natural mineral arsenic that exists in the earth.

 So there's no reason to like freak out about apple seeds just so you know.

 So particularly when you want to keep your kids healthy, you know, cold and flu season

 And to really help beat those sniffles, you want to incorporate the cinnamons.

 Occasionally, if you don't have a Breville sous chef, you might as well just use a regular

 I love that this one has the second count so you can see like it's been blending for

 And it'll keep in the fridge, by the way, too, for a couple of days.

 I'm just going to kind of, you know, take it off the sides here and put it down more.

 What's great about this, too, is if your kids are a little older, they can make it themselves.

 Now, I could have blend this a little bit longer, which I might do at home.

 You want to store it in your refrigerator for a couple of days.

 But, of course, you can make them with Pink Lady or Gala or even Granny Smith apples make

 Traditionally, when people are making their own applesauce, they're cooking the apples,

 which in a lot of cases, you're cooking out a lot of the nutrients.

 Let us remember, enzymes are the catalyst for every single function of your body.

 So this applesauce served with any other cooked food or any food that doesn't have enzymes

 If you have any questions, you can ask me on my Facebook page, on the Blythe Natural

 I didn't cut my hair, didn't shave or anything so I thought I'd wear a hat.

 The hot sauces, the pepper sauces on the website are some of the most popular recipes on the

 This time we are going to mix a little tropical, a little North America with the mango and

 There's the peach, there's the Caribbean sunshine, 10 beautiful red scotch bonnet peppers.

 If it's your first time here watching me on YouTube, please, above you are going to see

 Below is where you are going to leave me your questions, your concerns, your comments, anything

 Don't look now but we are making another hot sauce, pepper sauce, whatever you want to

 Something a little bit different, not unique to Caribbean cooking or Caribbean hot sauces.

 I'm using mango juice because I'm going to use that as the liquid for making this hot

 Because we want this nice and thin and runny because I'm going to be using this in one

 I'll also be adding about a tablespoon and a half of olive oil to this.

 So the next thing we're going to do is prep the peppers and get everything ready for making

 The first thing we need to do with these peppers is to give them a rough chop for processing.

 In the middle here where all that seeds are as well as that white membrane around it.

 If you don't want the heat, as much heat, but you want the flavor and some of the heat,

 The other thing I forgot to mention to you guys is that wear gloves.

 Fully experienced, I have a PhD in handling peppers so I'm pretty good to go without wearing

 It will feel as if they're on fire for at least an hour or two.

 I've got here a fairly deep saucepan and I'm just going to empty all the cut peppers in

 What we're trying to do here is to soften everything up and to cook it down a bit so

 when we process it, it will be nice and infused with all the different flavors as well as

 One thing I forgot to mention to you guys is we're going to need some vinegar.

 I'm going to bring this up to a boil and turn the heat down to allow it to simmer for about

 The thing is we're going to be working this in a food processor or if you have a blender.

 So what we're going to do is turn up the heat and allow this to cool down because I really

 It's not as cool as I'd like it to be but I'd like to get this video completed to show

 Just about everything is going to go into the food processor here and then we're going

 All I want to do is break down those big pieces of peaches and the peppers.

 After that I'm just going to pulse it for about 3-4 minutes until there is a smooth

 Now if you want this a bit more chunky, obviously you can adjust how smooth you pulse it at

 You don't even see any of those whole seeds from the scotch bonnet pepper.

 However you see nice specks of green and I guess that's from the cilantro.

 Perfect for salt but again you guys can adjust your salt and whatever else.

 And yeah, if you're watching me for the first time here on YouTube, show some love.

 Give the video the thumbs up and do come back to the channel here.

 place the mixture into a coffee mug because it makes it easier to dip the

 microwave-safe bowl and add a bag of white candy melts like I'm using or you

 can use almond bark, chocolate chips, or any flavor or color you like.

 decorate them with sprinkles, mini M&Ms, crushed teeth bars, or anything you like.

 Then lay them on the parchment paper to let the chocolate set up.

 Hi, today I am making Scottish biscuit, 3-ingredient shortbread cookies without mixer.

 Then add 1 cup of softened salted butter into a large mixing bowl.

 If you don't have salted butter, use unsalted butter and 1 teaspoon of salt.

 If you are making shortbread without mixer, it's perfectly okay to make shortbread only with hands.

 When the mixture looks like sands, transfer to a clean working surface and fraisier once.

 Chill in the refrigerator for 1 hour to relax the flour in the dough.

 but you can cut in wedges if you want all the cookies to be in the same shape.

 And pierce with a fork, which will prevent bubbling and help cookies bake evenly.

 Bake at 300 degrees F, 150 C for about 45 minutes or until light golden brown.

 Dipping in melted chocolate would be great for special occasions such as holidays and parties.

 For winter, especially Christmas, you don't have to buy salty and sweet Scottish tradition anymore.

 And secondly, the grating has to be from the larger grater side

 I'll take around 3 boiled potatoes to make a nice thick hash brown

 Hey y'all what's up it's your girl Missy and this is my hair wet and detangled I

 just rinsed out the conditioner once again I just use creme de la creme

 conditioner and my hair feels pretty soft it feels pretty soft so I'm gonna

 show you how to fuse my hair what I do first is I I don't towel dry I just have

 a towel on my shoulders I squeeze my hair out so um you know so like you

 would over your sink normally you know you just take it and just squeeze it a

 little bit more dry I like to put my Jane Carter solution hair nourishing

 cream it's a really light hair dress and it has a lot of natural butters and

 essential oils and I like to put this on before I blow-dry my hair so I put a

 nice generous dab of do you in my hands and work it all through my hair don't

 really use too much of that product either only really use it when I do

 blowouts but you can use it if the nourishing shine butter is too heavy for

 your hair I would recommend that the light hair you can see the nourishing

 shine so nice I have edges I didn't used to have no edges but I started using

 that balance tresses and your back so our curls look happy my curls are happy

 let's do this I'm just going to take a section of it this is how I blow out my

 hair I like to use a diffuser because it's not like a direct blast of heat and

 we all know I'm not crazy about heat so stretching out my hair nice little

 section stretching it out and I like to hold my hands around my ends like this

 to keep them protected from the heat so I'm gonna put it on hot and on high

 I just kept it on each side for about 10 seconds and it's starting to dry already

 and you saw like I was trying to move it you know move it back and forth a little bit

 and depending on how long your hair is you know will be how long you have to

 hold it there and just try not to do it in super thick sections so that it can

 actually dry this dryer is a Conair Ion Shine I got it from Walmart for like 14

 bucks or something like that and I'm about to do this section again so I'm

 and so as you can see it's already getting stretched out and you know you just stop

 depending on how stretched out you know you want it to be and it's still a little

 damp it's not like bone bone dry and I'm gonna do it one more time let a little

 and you just do it till it's you know as dry as you want it to be

 so that's about as dry as I want it to be hair is pretty soft and fluffy fluffy

 like I guess from the conditioner and that's how I diffuse my hair and I'm

 just gonna continue around in sections and like I said I just don't really let

 too much heat get to the ends because I want to keep that curl for when I do my

 my twist so I can twist the end of my hair so I'm gonna continue diffusing

 Welcome to the third installment of our three part series of what to do with one chicken

 So since I didn't use it right away I went ahead and froze it so this is thawed out.

 And then I'm going to, since I'm going to try and feed a bunch of people and hopefully

 make maybe two meals out of it, maybe a dinner and a lunch the next day or something, I'm

 Anyways so this is good in a crock pot as well and it's very good in cold weather.

 This recipe is a nice fast version because I've had recipes before where you make the

 nice white saucy kind of stuff and you use the dry beans and then you soak them and then

 you cook them in a crock pot for four hours and that way it tastes delicious and if you

 You know, especially once the flavors start, you know, mixing and stuff.

 So I'm going to, see I haven't filled the water all the way because I was like, eh,

 I don't want to like put the water here and then have the beans be like all here and then

 So I'm going to go ahead and leave the goo in there of these great northern beans.

 If you stir it and you say, you know what, there needs to be more beans, then you could

 I usually check the broth and taste it and see if it's spicy, or not spicy, salty enough.

 I put some bouillon cubes in there so I'm kind of waiting for them to dissolve before

 But I usually add, at least at this point, a teaspoon of cumin and a teaspoon of oregano.

 I'm just going to kind of crumple it up a little as I put it in.

 If you don't have it already shredded, at this point you can be shredding it with your

 shredder, your grater, and get some sour cream and some fresh limes.

 My kids love freshly squeezed limes in their bowl of white chicken chili.

 In fact, in my opinion, if you don't have fresh limes, just don't make it.

 Because this is the stuff that makes it just like the best thing ever.

 Since our beans were already cooked, you just have to kind of heat it through.

 But once you add the sour cream, it kind of makes it creamier looking.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm just going to put a little dollop of sour cream into

 The last thing we're going to do to dress it is some shredded Monterey Jack cheese.

 And it will kind of be all nice and melty because it's still warm.

 Like I could probably eat a bowl for breakfast, lunch, and dinner tomorrow.

 If you already don't have a white chicken chili that you make, you've got to try it.

 This is actually an old video that I did in January, or yeah the end of January for my

 So it has a lot of glitter and balloons and confetti and the number 19 because I turned

 So I'm finally posting this up and it has a lot of glitter because I love glitter and

 So if you don't like glitter then this is not the tutorial for you.

 So I started off with already just putting a base coat and then putting a French which

 And then I used these two glitters which are kind of similar but a little bit different.

 This one has, it's clear with blue, pink and green and this one is also blue, pink, green

 but it also has some purples and it's more towards the purpley type.

 So I placed that on and then I took this yellow which is called Sunflower by Jolie

 and I took a toothpick and I started to make a triangle, really messed up triangle so I'm

 I don't know, the camera was in my way so I couldn't really do anything.

 And then I made a circle using a dark blue and then I made another little triangle under

 the balloon for that little thing that sticks out when you wrap the ribbon.

 And I tried to fix it later so I know it looks really messed up right now.

 And then what I did was I took some glitter and I made a couple lines of gold glitter

 I'm going to outline this with red so that you can see it better and you can see here

 that I also made a couple of stripes with the red and the bottom I made a little dome

 Then taking the brown I just made a little squiggle like that and then using the clean

 side of the toothpick I made the line a little thinner because I messed up.

 I'm messing up so much in this tutorial because at the time I didn't have the tripod yet,

 Then for the confetti there's a couple of ways that you can do it.

 I'm using a red and I'm just going to make a backward C, then make a loop and finish

 And then you could also just do a line as confetti or do some twos shapes for confetti.

 And then after that I added another glitter and this glitter looks like confetti because

 I tried not to put too much because I was going to put another glitter, but since it

 is my birthday, or was my birthday, I could go crazy with glitter and not really care.

 For the rest of the nails, you just repeat it, changing the colors and all that stuff.

 If you want to see how I did numbers, you could check out my New Year's nails and I

 So right about here I'm going to put a dot and from that dot I'm going to draw an oval.

 And on the left hand side I'm going to go curve line up, in, connect.

 I come back to the left and I'm going to draw a curve line all the way over, connect.

 I come back to the left and I draw a big curve line up, curve line down, connect.

 And at the very top I go wavy, wavy, wavy, wavy, wavy line, connect.

 I come down to the bottom and I go straight line on the left, straight line on the right, slightly curved line, connect.

 I draw a straight line down on the left, straight line down on the right, and I go back to the left and draw a wavy, wavy, wavy line, connect.

 I come back to the left and I draw a curved line, curved line, curved line, connect.

 I come back up here and I draw a big curved line all the way down on the right, and a big curved line all the way down on the left.

 I come back up here and I put one dot, two dots, I put a little curved line in the middle, big curved line, little curved line, little curved line.

 On the left hand side I go wavy, wavy, wavy line, connect on the left, wavy, wavy, wavy line, connect on the right.

 I'm going to come back over here and I'm just going to put some little straight, slightly curved lines on the left, going down, come back and do the same on the right.

 Okay, this is a marker project, so I'm going to use my red, color in my hat, come down, use the red, color in my center.

 I'm going to use yellow down here for my hair, and I'm going to use my green for the very bottom and also for a pattern here on the side for his arms.

 I added some yellow straight lines in the background just to give it a little bit more color.

 He looks great cut out, put on a gift, or popping out of a stocking.

 Well if you're having a holiday tea, these glazed gingerbread tea cakes are just the

 So the first thing we're going to do is get a 9 inch square pan prepared.

 I'm going to go ahead and spray that with some baking spray and then I'm going to put

 I'm going to take a piece of parchment, I'm going to cut it the width of the pan and I'm

 just going to lay it down across the bottom, kind of fold those edges over.

 And then I'm just going to take a little bit more spray and spray the bottom.

 This is going to make it really easy to get that cake out of the pan.

 So over at the mixer we're going to put in two eggs and we're going to let those kind

 And then we're going to gradually add a cup of sugar and we're going to let the sugar

 and the eggs whisk together for about four minutes until they get nice and lemony colored.

 Then once the eggs are nicely lightened, then we're going to go ahead and add a third of

 a cup of oil and then we're just going to let this mix together for about a minute.

 Now while that's mixing up in a small bowl, we're going to measure out a cup of applesauce

 And we want to take a moment and just mix those ingredients together.

 That's going to really end up being the main liquid in this cake.

 We want a cup and a half of flour, two teaspoons of cinnamon, two teaspoons of ginger, a teaspoon

 And then we're going to take our little whisk and we're really going to mix those ingredients up well.

 Then back over at the mixer we're going to stop it and we're going to take half of the

 flour and put that into that egg and sugar mixture and get it going on a slow speed.

 Then we're going to add half of the applesauce mixture and then we're going to go ahead and

 Then we're just going to let that run until everything's combined and then we'll take

 Then we're going to put this in a preheated 325 degree oven and it's going to bake for

 Now when it comes out it's going to look nice and brown and golden like this but you

 are going to want to take a toothpick and poke it right in the center of the cake and

 Then what you can do is lift with the sleeves and slide the pan out of the way and the cake

 will hold together and then you can let it cool the rest of the way on the cooling rack.

 So over at the mixer with the whisk attachment I have 4 ounces of cream cheese and I'm using

 I'm going to kind of beat that up and then I'm going to stop the mixer and add 1 1⁄4

 Now I'm going to cream these together and then you're going to notice at the beginning

 it looks kind of dry and crumbly like this but don't worry it will start to cream up

 Then we're going to go ahead and add a half a teaspoon of vanilla and get your micro planer

 out and we're going to take the zest off of an orange but only half of the orange.

 So just take the zest off half an orange and go ahead and add that to the mixing bowl.

 Then I'm going to stop the mixer and give this a little bit of a scrape down.

 Sometimes the powdered sugar kind of goes along the edges and then I'm going to let

 Then I'm going to get a fresh piece of parchment down on my counter and I'm just going to lift

 with the sleeves the cake and I'm going to put it on that fresh piece of parchment.

 When I glaze something I like to have something to catch any of the glaze that drips off.

 And basically what we're going to do is we're going to start and we're going to pour that

 Now the reason I do it this way is because I want to control the way the glaze moves

 So once I get it in the center then I take my offset spatula and I very carefully just

 This glaze has enough viscosity to it and thickness that it won't just spill over right

 It'll actually stop itself for the most part if I don't push it too far.

 And then that way it gives us this nice coating of glaze on top of the cake.

 So just take your little spatula and move it ever so carefully over to the edges.

 But you want to keep as much of the glaze up on top of the cake as you possibly can.

 And then just let this sit out for a half an hour or an hour and let that glaze kind

 Now a quick reminder I've been nominated for a Tasty Award honoring the best in food and

 Now I've been nominated for Best Home Chef in a Series for the Farmer's Market Gourmet

 So if you'd like to vote just go to our website and click on the Tasty Awards icon.

 Well these glazed gingerbread tea cakes are just divine and they're perfect for any holiday

 The cake is light and moist and that glaze with that little bit of orange is fabulous.

 For more information on this episode go to our website and visit the Come For Tea show

Today we're going to be making an Italian tomato chicken packet.

 What we're going to be doing is we're going to be mixing up a few things, wrapping it

 tin foil, I have some fat free Italian dressing, salt and pepper, non-stick spray, one boneless

 skinless chicken breast that's thawed out, and some petite diced tomatoes.

 the ones that are flavored they also work really well for this.

So to start what we're going to do, take our non-stick spray and just spray

 you're going to want to do is get a little bowl and you're going to take your tomatoes

Alright, you're going to spoon in, I don't know, a couple, three tablespoons

I'm just going to do two of this heaping, kind of bigger spoon into my dish.

 I'm going to put in some fat free Italian and this is going to be about two tablespoons

 can take this right now and put it on your chicken or if you want to have the broccoli

 flavored with the tomato Italian base, you can fold your broccoli into the mixture just

 you can just sprinkle it with garlic salt or garlic powder and don't mix it up in the

I kind of like the flavor so I'm just going to get my broccoli just to get

Then I'm just going to pick my pieces, this is frozen, so I'm going

 it out and I'm going to spoon the tomato and Italian dressing on top of the chicken.

You can put this right on the chicken too if you want, that's totally

 is I take both ends sideways, I pinch them together and I kind of give it a half fold

 I pick the top up and kind of fold it like so, down on the top.

 beeps we'll come back, we'll crack it open, take a look at it, tell you what's in it and

 what I have going on here is I've got a plate and I've got a little dish.

Tin foil is not super hot to the touch so you can just start touching it

 make a little funnel type thing here and all this juice is really good.

I pour it in a cup and then I'll use it kind of like an ah juice type of sauce.

 fat free dressing, you're looking at another maybe 25 to 35 calories.

 only looking at about 150 calories, 21 grams of protein and like 2.5 grams of fat.

 As a lot of you know who have come to my seminars, I don't really think of myself as much a quilter

 What interests me about quilts and what is fun to me is solving problems that quilters

 A lot of quilters approached me and said they were having trouble with kaleidoscope.

 They loved doing the kaleidoscope, but there were several problems that they wished I would

 In order to cut the pieces, I'm going to use the Star Maker 8 because the kaleidoscope

 The way that we're going to use this is we'll use this angle and if you can read that, it

 In order to make a kaleidoscope, we're going to cut what we call a topless triangle.

 That means I'm going to put the first line down from the point of the Star Maker 8 at

 Then I'm going to turn it upside down and now this line is at the bottom.

 That will take care of one of the problems, but we'll get to the other problem in a few

 If you look here at the block, we have tan corners on this block and every one of the

 What I'm going to do is cut a bias strip of the tan and I'm going to sew it to all of

 Then what I'm going to do is to cut my corners because quilters tell me that when they do

 a kaleidoscope, their corners, when they use a template, don't always match up.

 That stands to reason because unless they use the exact seam allowance, the exact seam

 width, everything exactly the same as the designer, they won't line up.

 The reason is we're going to cut this tan strip by lining up the Star Maker 8 with the

 Then I'm going to put a piece of static sticker right here on the seam line.

 When I do that, the outside of the piece is on the straight of grain, which is what

 The reason for the static sticker is when we come to each piece and the static sticker

 Let's say, for instance, you come to one of your triangles and it's way down here or way

 up here and the static sticker doesn't line up with the seam line.

 That will tell you right away that that triangle was cut wrong.

 You can go back and fix it before you put your whole piece together.

 It's just a matter of rearranging the order in which you add pieces.

 Our eight pieces go together and you have a perfect kaleidoscope.

 Try that and join me again when I bring you another tip, quilting the Kay Wood way.

 My name is Dave and this is the second installment of our burger competition.

 I'll be making some beef, pork, and bacon burgers to compete with Jeremy's blue cheese

 In this bowl we have four pounds of meat, two pounds of chuck roast, beef chuck roast,

 another two pounds of pork shoulder, which I've chopped up, done nothing else to.

 In this bowl we have about six strips of bacon and onion, one white onion that I've

 sauteed up on the stove a little bit with a clove of garlic as well.

 Here we have about two cups of white bread crumbs, just soft white bread that I've chopped

 up and that's going to get all mixed in together with some spices.

 Here I've pre-measured a tablespoon of dried parsley flakes, a couple teaspoons of salt,

 a quarter teaspoon of dried marjoram, a quarter teaspoon of pepper, and a quarter teaspoon

 I'm going to mix this all right into the bowl with about a half a cup of pale ale and we're

 Pour in my meat, my bacon-onion mixture, my bread crumbs, my spices, forgot to mention

 So I'll go back through the grinder so we don't have to get it too perfect.

 Just trying to get the eggs mixed in and spices evenly distributed.

 All right, now that we've ground everything together, we're going to give it a couple

 All right, now that we've made our patties, let's head out to the grill and cook them.

 All right, now that we've grilled our burgers, let's go ahead and put one on a plate.

 Put on a piece of butter lettuce, a couple of tomatoes, throw on our nicely grilled patty

 Next I'll put on some bacon onion caramelized marmalade that I made before the show.

 Then I'll put on a piece of provolone cheese and top of our bun.

 I used to do it where I would take a long piece of wire and wrap it around several times

 and then go from there, but I stumbled upon an easier way to make one, which you can use

 one, two, three, four, however many strands of wire that you'd like.

 I have my three lengths and they're pretty close to about the same length.

 Again, on that they really don't have to be the same length because once you start working

 on it you're going to actually do some twists and such with your pliers.

 I actually use the needle nose, two different kinds, and then a cutting plier.

 What I do is start off with my mandrel once I have cut the wire.

 I start off by having all three pieces of wire together and we'll set them approximately

 Then I'm going to start off by doing a quick wrap to hold the pieces together.

 While I'm doing this I keep trying to keep the ring at the size that I want it to maintain,

 It may vary a little bit, but again it's just an approximate measurement.

 It's more of a random thing where I'm not trying to actually create something that can

 Once I get it wrapped around you can take it off if you want to keep trying it on or

 I will then start with a strand and then take the tool and place it in here and then twirl

 Take the next strand and gently roll it and see where I end up.

 I really don't have any specific design in mind for the outcome of this ring.

 If you feel like you've got too much wire you can actually cut it off at this point.

 I can cut some off at this point and then continue with my wire bending.

 If you want to maybe smash them down a little bit so that they're not sticking up so much

 If you decide that you want to add beads to this, which I do to some of mine, this particular

 Actually I guess some of the beads will fit on this, this being the 20 gauge.

 Make sure the size of wire is not too big for the beads that you have on hand.

 I find that once you get into anything bigger than a 20 gauge that can become an issue.

 It's very easy to create something just within a matter of a few minutes and you're done.

 Doing it this method is actually easy for it to maintain the size that you want.

 I find that when you're doing it the version where you wrap and wrap and wrap that it tends

 This is with three strands and it's just a fun random ring that would even be easy for

 Good morning guys, welcome to the second episode of Bedside Beauty.

 a bit sleepy, I've already washed my face and it's time to apply my makeup for work.

 Today's Bedside Beauty product is Philips Milk of Magnesia, which is actually a laxative

 an excellent primer as it helps or even prevents the oil, grease and shine that occurs after

 Using my fingers, I dab the Milk of Magnesia on my cheeks, forehead and nose.

 to pay special attention to specific areas on your face that are usually very greasy

 As you can see, I'm applying a light amount of Milk of Magnesia to my face because I know

 Initially, when you rub on the Milk of Magnesia, it goes on clear, almost invisible, but as

 mask, it's best to use a liquid or cream stick foundation over it.

 Using my BH Cosmetics foundation brush, I begin to apply my foundation in a back and

 So now that I've applied my foundation to the right side of my face, you can see it

 face and I'll be right back with my completed makeup look of the day.

If you would like to see how I achieved this look, stay tuned for my

 Okay guys, so I just took a 10 minute ride to work and I didn't ride with no AC on.

 actually left the windows down and even though I felt myself getting warm, as you can see

 on my face, I'm not sweating, not a lot of shine, all blooding.

 so you can see that I don't have to do much touching up or anything to my makeup because

 I primed my face with the Milk of Magnesia and it really, really, really cuts down the

There's not a lot of shine, just in my T-area which is expected by most persons.

 cabinet, you can find an awesome primer that will hold your makeup in place and reduce

I hope you enjoyed this video and as always, thanks for watching.

 white version just to stay on par with the white iPhone and the white iPad.

 So the first thing you'll notice about the iPod Touch is the fantastic casing.

 on par with the black one, but this is the white version of the casing and it's very

If you look on the bottom, it lists the serial number, says designed by

It's got a little tab right here that we can just hold onto and pull off

 we've also got the nice Apple stickers which you can stick wherever you want to.

 open this up some more and we'll see that we've got the standard headphones.

So with the iPod now, it's got this little sticker that you can peel

 you can see at the bottom there, it's got your speaker, your charging port, and your

 on the back of it, we've got your camera, microphone, and we've got the iPod logo right

 it you can see the camera which will be used for your FaceTime or pictures.

 to the black one, the screen actually will look slightly smaller due to the fact that

 the blackness will blend in on the black one, whereas on the white one it's completely exposed

It will take approximately 30 seconds to turn on for the first time.

If you're in the United States, for myself, I'm in Canada, so we're going to open

We're going to scroll through the countries and I'm going to select Canada,

 Touch, restore from iCloud backup, or restore from iTunes backup.

 Now you can choose to select to send diagnostic and usage information to Apple directly.

 up right here, put them back to back just so you can see the thickness.

It's the chromish silver color whereas the iPhone 4S is all white.

You can see the thinness of the iPod Touch again compared to the iPhone

 Hey everybody today, I'm gonna show you how to make some bacon wrapped shrimp

 Trying to make eight little slivers of it to put in eight of these 16 shrimp.

 All right, so if I got 16 shrimp I need eight pieces of bacon cut in half, okay

 You know I'm saying now when you put this shrimp and a piece of jalapeno and

 Put your bacon your shrimp down there and your bacon and you wrap that bacon and that jalapeno up in there

 And layer side and then what we're gonna do is I'll show you one more here

 Get you some bacon and by the way, if you like jalapeno, you got definitely get you some bigger pieces of jalapeno

 Okay, I was totally disappointed in these little bitty slivers of jalapeno

 Then put a little bit of oil in the pan and you can see right now.

 It kind of made that bacon everything kind of like it was solid

 And you could just lay a man baking stuff don't flop everywhere.

 So now what you want to do is when you get them all in here, you know

 I just like pepper now, you see I've dumped most of that oil out

Now what you do is you just be patient the toothpicks aren't a problem

Cuz you got a fry these you got to get it all sides done of that bacon

 All right, so when it's time to plate them I want you to get you a paper towel put on a plate

 Okay, and you want you to remember also let these things set a little bit like 10 minutes cuz they are hot

 Really hot and I'm gonna show you how hot they are just a second.

 You'll notice the shrimp bacon quick release method right here.

 There's hundreds of recipes on YouTube, I just want to put my two cents worth in and there it is

 Bacon wrap shrimp y'all like it comment subscribe and have a great day.

 In the first part you learned how to solve this first side, the green side and the first layer.

 Well, in this video we're going to have you learn how to do the second layer.

 To do that we're going to put the blue face on top instead of the green, but the blue face on top.

 And we're going to look for in it pieces out of these four right here that don't have blue.

 The first step is you need to line up these colors right here, the center colors.

 What that did was that put that yellow orange piece from here to here and didn't mess up your greens.

 Now, here's a common problem that you might run into when solving a second layer.

 Well, what you're going to have to do is you're going to have to just take a blue piece and send it to the side you need to.

 What that will do, if you're in a pinch, is that it will put a piece up there where you can use it.

 So, I'm going to put this one back and I'll start with layer three.

 Hi everyone, so today I'm going to do a look that has been requested by so so many of you

 and that's going to be Kate Middleton's look that she wore at her royal wedding with Prince

 Oh my god, I watched the wedding live and I thought it was so cool that she did her

 I think she took lessons beforehand and it just goes to show that you don't have to rely

 So I'm going to show you this look and it's kind of inspired by her, it's not an exact

 replica because I don't know exactly what products were used, but she had this really

 gorgeous pink blush and these light pink lips and the only thing I kind of changed on the

 eyes is she had this really harsh black eyeliner and I just didn't think it looked that flattering

 So I'm going to show you how to do an eyeliner for your wedding day without it looking very

 If you're not getting married you can definitely wear this to prom, you can wear this to your

 graduation ball, or if you're a bridesmaid or any other occasion that you want to wear

 So I really hope you guys enjoy this look and if you want to see how to do it then just

 I started off with using this eyeshadow, this is by Lancôme but unfortunately I don't remember

 the name because I depotted it but it's a nice, like a satin taupe-ish kind of color

 I've already applied Urban Decay Primer Potion underneath and you want to do that just so

 So now I'm just using the MAC 217, there's nothing on it, I'm just kind of blending out

 Then I'm going to take a medium brown color, this is by Catrice and it's called Go Charlie

 Brown and I'm going to use that same brush, the MAC 217, and I just want to define here

 the crease a little bit but don't use a color that's like really, really dark.

 Then I'm going to take a matte highlighter and this is like a creamy pink color and this

 is It's a Girl by Catrice and I'm going to use this on a very soft, fluffy brush and

 I want to kind of soften that and also just to help blend those colors and it has like

 a nice kind of a pink shade to it which I think goes perfect for wedding makeup.

 This is all matte so it's not going to show up like all weird on pictures.

 Now Kate had this very, very strong black eyeliner and I'm just going to show you how

 to make that a little bit softer just because I felt it was a little bit harsh on her.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm using a black Kohl pencil, this one's by Lancôme, and I'm

 just going to apply that very close to the lash line but I'm not going to take this all

 I'm going to take a small angled brush and I'm going to go over that, just softening

 that line, trail it out a bit so you kind of get like a cat shape and I'm also going

 to just lift that up and you see how that made my lashes look a lot thicker?

 And I'm going to do the same sort of method on the lower lash line because in her wedding

 photos that were seen, it was just this really kind of harsh black liner which I didn't think

 looked that flattering on her so I'm just going to soften that up and just to set everything

 I'm going to top that with that brown shadow from before and this is also going to soften

 Then on that very inner corner I'm going to take a creamy sort of shimmery shadow, this

 is again by Lancôme and again I don't know the name of it but I'm just going to pop a

 I just use an off white kohl pencil and put that into my waterline and now I'm going to

 go ahead and do my eyelash just using some waterproof mascara and I'm also going to do

Now you can add false lashes at this point but I'm pretty sure that Kate didn't

 so I'm not going to add any either so I'll just go ahead and do that and I'll be right

 Now for the blush I want to make sure that it lasts all day so I'm going to first apply

 a cream blush and it's this one by Bobbi Brown, this one is called Pot Rouge in Pink Raspberry

 and I'm going to use this stippling brush by Sigma, this is the F84 and then you can

 And this is definitely going to help to make your blush last a long time.

 I go ahead and powder my face because I haven't applied face powder I'm going to use the MAC

 Blot Powder, the pressed one, on top, right on top of that powder, on top, sorry, right

 on top of that cream blush and since I'm wearing cream foundation this is also going to help

 So now I'm going to put a blush on top since this has like really, I put it on so lightly.

 If you're comfortable with just stopping here if you want it to look very very subtle you

 can but I'm going to put a little bit of this on top, this is Rose Boisée, this is also

And I'm just going to put a little bit of that because she had these gorgeous

 like pink cheeks, they were quite strong but you have to remember that you're going to

 be doing flash photography and you know sometimes that can kind of fade the makeup a little

 bit in the pictures so I think that's why you know she had on so much blush.

 For the lips I'm first going to use a nude lip pencil and this one is 18 Addiction, this

 is by Rimmel and I'm going to go ahead and fill in my whole lips.

 For the lips I've decided to go for MAC Hue Lipstick, it's a nude kind of pink color.

 I went ahead and just blotted off the excess and I just want it to be a little bit more

 So there you have the finished Kate Middleton inspired bridal look.

 look, you can add gloss onto your lips if you like, just remember that gloss is going

 to make the lipstick a little bit more slippery so you might have to reapply it a couple times

 and if you want to see my other bridal look I will link it below and I will see you guys

 So this Magic Shell is the kind of topping that you might find on an ice cream bar that

 It hardens and it covers as you would like to cover your ice cream.

 But I'm just going to put mine in a little sherbet dish and put it over the top and I

 So if you like that kind of ice cream topping, you might want to try this recipe.

 This is half a bag, I decided to make half a recipe actually, so I'm giving you the amounts

 for half the recipe and you can double them if you want the full recipe.

 But this is half a bag of semi-sweet chocolate chips and that would be about one cup or about

 Now you could do this on the stove if you want to, but I will be using the microwave.

 Right here I have coconut oil and I have one ounce, one eighth of a cup.

 Coconut oil works very well because when you cool it down, like putting it in the refrigerator,

 So that means when we let it hit the ice cream, it's going to turn solid.

 Now you can use other oils, they just don't work maybe quite as well.

 You can use butter because that's solid when you put it in the refrigerator.

 One ounce, stir it around and then it's very close to done because I'm just going to use

 I will set it on 50% power and then I'll give it one minute and stir it around and then

 This looks pretty well melted and for my microwave it took the one minute that I mentioned at

 So I'm going to stop right there and while I had it in the microwave I had time to scoop

 But I'm going to spoon some of this over the top and then it should take 30 to 60 seconds

 And if you get it really thick then of course it's not going to harden as easily.

 So I'll just set that aside for a little bit and I want to mention that you can store this

 I don't have my lid here but you can see this has a screw on top and what you want to do

 is just pour this in there and you can let it sit at room temperature up to one week.

 Now if you would like to refrigerate it that's fine but it will get hard and you will have

 But as far as storing this, just a small jar, if you make the full recipe, obviously a jar

 And be sure and put a lid on so it's tightly sealed and that's how easy it is to make magic

 And now I'm going to come over here to my place where I have my ice water which I love

 It really takes a little bit longer than what I've given it because I had it pretty thick

 I really like chocolate and I wanted to have a lot but on the edges I tried to make it

 So you can see it is hard there and I'm going to try to slice off a little bit to let you

 And it's kind of like, as I said earlier, the outside of an ice cream bar if you get

 If you have chips that are peanut butter, butterscotch, or white chocolate chips, anything

 But you kind of have to have the combination of the two to understand what it tastes like.

 And if I get down in here it won't be hardened yet but it will eventually harden.

 So if you like the skin on top, then you can go around and eat that off just like people

 Hi, welcome to Sima's on the Run and this is my second video and today I'll be cooking

 sweet and sour vegetable noodles which roughly take 15 minutes and they are full of vitamins

 peppers, some mushrooms and some bean sprouts, some cabbage and some carrots.

 and a little bit of ginger and I'm just going to mash that up quickly while the oil is heating

You want to get the oil nice and hot because we're going to put the garlic and ginger in

 put the heat down a little bit and then I'm going to add the ginger and garlic into the

Okay, I've already sliced up 3 quarters of a large onion, we don't want too many onions

Okay, we're going to just fry those on a high gas and with that we're

 and simple, lightly frying the onions, adding lots of vegetables.

 going to actually make the onions golden brown, lightly just fry them and to this we're going to

 add our courgettes because we want to keep the baby courgettes a little bit tender, a little bit

 As you can see, lovely colours in there, you want to keep them nice and crisp.

This is our pineapple, it's roughly about 200g of pineapple in its juice.

 Now we've stir fried the vegetables for a good 5 minutes on the high wok.

 We want the corn to stand, we want the peppers to stand, we want the courgettes to stand as well.

 Now I'm going to add the carrots, the cabbage and the bamboo shoots.

 not everybody is fond of bamboo shoots, so I'm just going to add a little bit.

 Okay, just have that in there for a few minutes, just give it a bit of a stir so it doesn't stick to the bottom of the pan.

Now to this sauce I'm going to add that much of lemon juice, chilli powder, cumin powder and a little bit of garam masala, just for that edge.

 Now here we have the rice noodles, lovely thin boiled rice noodles.

 Now what I'm going to do is turn the gas down and I'm going to fold in my rice noodles, not to put them all together because they will just clump up.

 Okay, to the last bit of this, of our cooking session, what we're going to do is we're going to just garnish it with some coriander.

 Again we take the coriander, I'm not picking the leaves, we're just going to take it from the stem, give it a twist, break it and then we're going to wash it and cut it.

 Okay, so this is the finished product, noodles with vegetables in a sweet and sour sauce.

 Tomorrow we will be cooking, we're going to marinate actually for all you vegetarians out there, burgers and sausages in a tandoori sauce, my own tandoori sauce.

 This is a classic clock problem and we're going to find out the measure of

 the smaller angle between the hands of an analog clock at 5.23, that's 23

 Before we can get to our main problem of finding the angle between the hands of

 angle is sweeped by the minute hand every minute and what angle is sweeped

 sweeped by the minute hand, the red hand, ignore the black hand for now, every

 angle of 90 degrees every 15 minutes, if you just take 90 and divide it by 15,

 this is 30 because 30 plus another 30 plus another 30 is going to make your 90.

 So we know the hour hand sweeps an angle of 30 degrees every 60 minutes.

 your 30 degrees, divide it by 60, and you're going to get 0.5 degrees.

 going to claim that the hour hand sweeps an angle of 0.5 degrees every minute.

 first one, every minute the minute hand sweeps an angle of 6 degrees and every

 us find the angle between the hands of an analog clock at any given time.

 have here is the same question with the two facts that we learned on the previous

 slides that the minute hand sweeps an angle of 6 degrees every minute and the

If we can find this angle, let's use red, and this angle, let's use green, and subtract the two angles from 90 we have our answer.

8 minutes when it was here at 3, it was 15, then it moved 8 more minutes.

Okay, the minute hand sweeps 6 degrees every minute so in 8 minutes it's going to sweep 48 degrees so this has to be 48.

 This has to be 48 degrees because the minute hand sweeps 6 degrees every minute.

 Okay, the hour hand is here, from here to here, it took the hour hand 23 minutes so it's going to take the hour hand 37 minutes to go from here to here.

The hour hand will move or sweep this green angle in 37 minutes, exactly 37 minutes.

Every minute the hour hand sweeps 0.5 degrees so in 37 minutes it's going to sweep 37 times 0.5 which turns out to be 18.5 degrees.

 So the green angle has to be 18.5 and the red angle is 48 so from 90 we're going to subtract to get our final answer of this angle in pink.

We're going to subtract from 90, we're going to subtract 48 plus 18.5.

 And whatever the answer is that's going to be our solution and which turns out to be 23.5.

 First thing we're going to do is get our gray thread started here on the hook.

 Next thing we're going to do is we're going to take some gray or some dun colored hackle

 fibers and we're going to strip the fibers right off of the feather.

 This fly needs to be about half the length of the shank of the hook.

 I try to even up these fibers as much as possible, which isn't actually very easy to do sometimes.

 So I sometimes take a couple of bundles here and see if I can't get the tips nice and even.

 Once you have a bundle, you're just going to measure it out so it's about half the length

 As I tie these in, I kind of pull them up off the shank of the hook.

 That way they stay centered and they stay on top of the shank of the hook.

 We basically put enough dubbing on our thread just to kind of coat the thread.

 If you use too much, you'll end up with a very bulky body, which is not the way this

 So I just add a little bit in the beginning just to get it started.

 Then I can add more and creep my way up the thread, keeping the body nice and slender.

 Now once I get up to the thorax region, I'm just going to stop for a minute.

 For this I use a little different material than some other people probably use.

 You can use Antron or Zelon yarn, but I like to add a little bit of flash to the wing case.

 The reason is you can see here how there's flash mixed in to the white DNA fibers.

 All I'm going to do is just take a chunk, about a quarter of a diameter of a pencil

 I'm going to take that back about a quarter of the way from the bead.

 For that I'm just going to use the same dubbing, just a little bit of gray.

 It's better to add less dubbing than too much dubbing on these flies.

 I kind of pull it up and forward because I kind of want it to stand up.

 I'm going to trim this wing case about the length of my thorax, just like so.

 It might be a little bit longer than I like it, but it's close.

 Once you've got that trimmed you can whip finish right behind the bead.

 I'm calling it that because I'm going to put it on my Christmas table,

 but I expect that you might have more use for the recipe if you have made turkey

If you have that leftover, then you could use this recipe to make turkey salad that

 So we start with a medium-sized bowl and into that I'm putting almonds.

 These are sliced almonds that I've toasted over here on the stove.

 They're still a little bit warm, not much, and I'm putting that into my bowl.

 Now if you have fresh lemons, you could squeeze those and get the fresh juice.

 I didn't have them, so I always keep lemon juice in a jar in the refrigerator.

 but that's really going to depend on how salty your turkey was.

 I'm just going to put about half of that in and I might add more later after testing,

 think that it's too salty and wish I hadn't put that in because I can always put it in later.

 so I just put some on my plate and then I use my hands to get just a little pinch.

Now if you want to make this chicken salad or any kind of poultry,

 then just chop up the meat like this and it can be a mixture of white and dark.

 This happens to be a leftover or some leftover meat from a turkey breast that I made recently.

It was just for us to eat, but since we ate a couple of meals off of it,

 have the same thing for a lot of days in a row, so I had leftover breast meat and it chops finely and looks really good.

 And also, I'm adding 2 tablespoons of finely chopped green onion tops.

And then I have 1 tablespoon of diced pimento that has been drained.

 and I'll probably taste it for seasoning and possibly put some more salt in.

 I've mixed together my turkey salad and I did taste of it just to see about the salt situation.

 taste yours individually and some of you may need the 1 1⁄2 teaspoon and some of you may not need any, actually.

 so I was guessing that I would need about 1⁄4 teaspoon and that's all that I needed.

 it looks particularly Christmassy because it has red and green in it.

 But as I said, I'm thinking most of you would probably have more of a use for it after Christmas when you're thinking

 And then I'm going to put a little garnish on it and I'll be back to taste it.

 have garnished my holiday turkey salad and I decided to use thyme.

 Here it is in December and our herb garden was planted in April.

 So we've gotten really good use out of quite a few of our herbs.

 There were some that that died off normally, but we've got some that are just hanging in there.

 combination of flavors and the turkey flavor really comes through.

 And the seasonings I put in, even the lemon juice, just kind of makes it all come together really well.

 What I'm going to do today is go over with you on how to wire up 8 subs that are single

 The way we're going to do this is we're going to break them up into banks.

 So we're going to have a bank of 4 here and another bank of 4 here.

 So we're going to take this bank here, we're going to wire it in parallel.

 We'll have our lead go out to an amp, and we're going to parallel these 4 together and

 So to get things started, flip our subs over, get to our terminals.

 What we'll start off is we'll just connect all of our positives together.

 So I'm basically just going to jump from sub to sub with my positives.

 Got it all nice, got it in there good enough, got a good bite from the spring loaded terminals.

 So, basically all my positives are tied together, now all my negatives are tied together.

 Now what I want to do is take this speaker wire here, this will be my lead to the amplifier.

 This will be my negative to my amp, and this lead will be my positive to the amp.

 I've already done this bank here, I've done it the exact same way.

 So I ended up with another, I have this lead here and I've ended up with another lead for

 What we've done here is, we have a positive and negative from each bank like I said.

 What we want to do is we'll series it before it goes into the amplifier.

 So I'm going to take the negative of this bank here, connect it to the positive of this

 That's going to do is double our load before we put it into the amp.

 Once you get that connection tied together, we want to solder and heat shrink, put a butt

 That's going to leave me a negative and a positive to use to go into the amplifier.

 One thing you always want to check before you get too far is if you can get yourself

 a meter, take your multimeter, put it to your ohm setting, take your positive lead

 to the positive of the meter, your negative lead to the negative of the meter.

 One thing you want to know and make sure of is that if you take this wiring, which is

 a one ohm load, and we go to a two ohm loaded amp, you can run into issues.

 You never want to go lower than what the ohm load of the amp's going to ask for.

 You can burn the channel out of your amp and or cause it to get hot and start shutting

 So just to go over again, four subs here that are two ohm, four subs here that are two ohm.

 We wired them in parallel, parallel, and series before the amp to give us a total of

 We need to get the gaps all lined up and then it will, with it all lined up, the key can

 The fourth category of lock and by far the most common lock in use today is the pin tumbler

 This is used in many applications, residential, commercial, automotive, many uses for a pin

 The way it works is that there's, instead of having levers or wafers or discs, there

 are pins inside this lock and the key must go in and line the pins up.

 Now, my only purpose right now is to simply explain how these work.

 As we advance through the course, then we'll learn how to work with these.

 For this lesson, I simply want you to know what a pin tumbler lock is.

 I have to use a follower to push this plug out of this lock cylinder because there's

 But here you can see that this is a five pin tumbler lock and that they're all lined up.

 Okay, as we get started in lock picking, I want to talk for just a moment about the theory

 The idea is that we can go into the lock, put tension on the plug so that it tries to

 turn one way or the other, and then pick these pins up one at a time until the top pin is

 We're going to go in there and we're going to feel with very light tension on our wrench,

 and we're going to try to feel which of these pins is a little sticky.

 We're going to pick it up just a small amount and see if we can trap its top pin above that

 Just to make sure that you knew what I was doing, when I had the one cut of 171, I came

 And it was a one, and then we had a five, and we had a six, and we had a four, and we

 Put that, see I'm going to use the top shoulder here, put that top shoulder right up against

 that guide, make sure it's in there nice and flat and lock that one down.

 They could be T-pins or barrel pins or some other anti-pick type design.

 A normal lock is pinned up with a bottom pin, a top pin, and a spring.

 With the Master Key System, we add master pins to at least part of the chambers.

 And we'll take that key out and put in the change key for duplex one.

 And now we can see that in the first three chambers, the pins have dropped down.

 That's what's going on with using a real fine file is to take advantage of the fine marks

 Okay, so we're going to go ahead and now we're going to try to impression some more marks.

 Now, as you rock the key, you want to try to make sure that both the front of the key

 Okay, so you can usually feel that as you go through those pins.

 Now, with that bit that I was using right there, it went through them just about like butter, didn't it?

Today I did a really quick minimal makeup everyday makeup routine video.

 Like this is how I do my makeup for class, for running errands, for doing normal things.

 Whenever I'm doing a Get Ready With Me video, I wear a lot more makeup during that video

 because I like to show you guys a bunch of different products and talk to you guys about everything.

 I want to be able to show you guys a million different things in a Get Ready With Me video.

 I think it's way more fun if I'm showing you guys a bunch of different things.

 This is how I actually do my makeup when I'm doing everyday things.

 I wanted to share it with you guys because a lot of you guys have been requesting an everyday makeup routine.

 I got a Makeup Forever lipstick and a birthday present from Sephora.

 I found out that Emily Ratajkowski uses it as her blush and lip color.

 I've been using the Makeup Forever one as of lately, ever since I found out Emily Ratajkowski uses it.

 All I'm doing is filling in sparse areas and the front of my brows where they're really sparse.

 I'm not trying to add too much definition, just making them look nice and groomed.

 And then to set the brows, I'm taking the L'Oreal Brow Stylist Plumper.

 So the actual gel actually does make your eyebrows a little bit thicker

 and then it even has little fibers to extend the hairs in your brows.

 And if you concentrate the fibers in the parts of your brows that are sparse, it's really nice.

 And I'm just dotting this all over my face and then blending it in with my fingers.

 Which is a problem that I had with a lot of other tinted moisturizers.

 But I've really been loving this one and this is the one I've been using pretty much on a daily basis.

 And I'm just putting this under my eyes and then the corners of my nose

 to brighten up the darkness under my eyes and then conceal the redness around the corners of my nose.

 I'm taking Makeup Forever N9 and I just put this on my fingertips and then I'm applying it to my cheeks.

 You could actually kind of just rub the lipstick onto your cheeks and then blend it out if that's what you wanted to do.

 But I think it's easier if you apply it to your fingers and then blend it out on your cheeks.

 You only need a tiny bit and it's a little bit more than you need.

 I'm just lightly adding definition and contouring under my cheeks.

 I'm bronzing out my temples and then I'm going to put a little bit on my chin and the sides of my nose.

 And I'm applying this on my top lashes only, not on the bottoms.

 It's crazy but once you get the hang of it, it does give a really nice volumizing and lengthening effect.

 And then for a highlight on the face, I'm taking the Bare Minerals Stroke of Light highlighter illuminator.

 And I'm just putting this on the tops of my cheekbones, the bridge of my nose, my cupid's bow, inner corner of the eyes, and under the brow bone.

 Taking that N9 one more time, I'm just applying a sheer layer to the lips.

 So I just put on a little bit, blend it out with my fingers, and I'm good to go.

 To set everything and keep it in place, I'm using the L'Oreal Infallible Pro Set and Spray.

 This is going to give the makeup longevity and it's not going to slip and slide around on the face.

 As always, products and information, links, all of that will be down below.

 Oh, and if you like this video, give it a thumbs up because your thumbs up really helped me out a lot.

 Everyone I'm Noreen and welcome to my kitchen another episode of what's for dinner

 And like I said if I've got the fire all out and hot then we may as well make use of it right so

 Ravioli fried ravioli and now we're gonna round out our meal with the protein portion

 We're gonna make chicken fingers, and I know these are relatively simple

 But you know you're never gonna get a better chicken finger than the one that you make at home

 And you you should never ever buy the pre-made chicken fingers in the grocery store

 they're made out of chopped meat that's been formed and put into a mold and then breaded and

 Questionable ingredients have been used and and you don't want to infiltrate your body with that kind of garbage

 So this is as simple as it gets this what I have here is the equivalent of four chicken breasts I

 Cut them into cutlets so I had a total of eight chicken breasts at which point I cut them into strips

 It's really easy if you don't have a good sharp knife, then you just are gonna be in like Flynn so flour

 and then you're gonna go over to the fryer and you're gonna fry them and it doesn't take that long and

 And they're probably a lot cheaper than if you went to the drive-thru

 And you know what you cannot go there with a family of four for less than $40

So I'm gonna go ahead and finish dredging all of these and then we come back.

 These take a lot less time than you think as long as you have your oil up to the proper heat

 When these turn the perfect shade of golden brown they're gonna be done

 I promise because you cut the chicken thin enough that it's gonna just like flash cook in this oil

 And this I do not use canola oil you can do your own research on why I don't use canola oil there's a lot of

 questionable research, I mean the research isn't questionable, but

 Don't push it around too much because you'll knock some of that coating off of it.

 And then there once they I mean I think probably four minutes is

 And then these are going to be ready to pull out and fry off the rest of them

 I have actually three layers here because I don't like to crowd my tray and

 They've had time to to rest with that coating on them and the coating has firmed up a bit

 So that's another reason just like I did with the mozzarella sticks and

 The ravioli if you let them sit out in the air dry just a little bit

 But you're gonna have every piece is gonna be different because not every piece is the exact same size

 They're gonna cook at different rates of time it's like you're just gonna want to keep your eye on them

 It's not as dark as I'd like it to be I'd like to be just a little bit darker

 But then you'll know they are almost finished like this little guy here.

 And on to some paper towels that we have I have a sheet pan I have cut down a paper grocery bag

 There's a paper sack and then I have several layers of paper toweling

 Like the idea of having paper bags around you know when I was a kid

 We always had paper bags because we've had plastic bags paper bags are super useful

 So when you go to the store every couple of times ask for paper bags if you go to a grocery store where they bag

You can use them for leaves now that falls here if you live in area

 You can use them for composting you can use them for book covers

 You know I'm gonna do a video on how to do a book cover with a paper bag

 Chopped and formed versions of chicken fingers that you're going to get from the grocery store

 Really any extra take a little bit of extra time a little bit of extra effort

 And it's not that difficult to make you can make these and you can keep them warm in the oven about 200 degrees

 And they're gonna keep them nice and crispy as long as you keep them in a single layer and perhaps on a baking sheet that

 So I certainly hope that this encourages you to give making your own chicken fingers a try

 And I hope that you love it when you do that if you're my if you're a visitor here

 And you've never subscribed to my channel, please consider doing so I hope you like what you saw

 Please hit that thumbs up button and also leave a comment down below and let me know what you thought of my video today

 And I always thank you so much for stopping by because without you

 I would not have a channel and I always love visiting with you, so I hope you try it

This is a Caesar salad with eggs and bacon and it is a perfect dinner

You don't have to add the anchovies in here but they add a really

For a kind of citrus hit, we've got a little bit of lime juice or you could

 going to drizzle in a little bit of olive oil until we have a nice thick and voluptuous

Now that that's nicely mixed through, I'm going to add a little bit of

 olive oil but I'm slowly going to trickle it in until I get a really nice thick dressing.

 Now it's really important you add the olive oil nice and slowly here because if you add

 a little pinch of sea salt and black pepper just to taste and then taste it to finish

 Caesar salad with a little bit of a twist is some Bordeaux Quality Assured bacon which

 I've just fried off nice and golden, so sizzling and golden and we've got some croutons over

 here and to make them I've just cut up some stale bread, drizzled it with a little bit

 of olive oil, some sea salt, some black pepper and put it in the oven until they're nice

I've got some eggs which we've soft boiled and they're beautiful so they

 have lovely lovely yellow yolks that are nice and runny so they're going to go really nicely

 in this and of course I've got some lovely baby gem lettuce leaves and they're really

 assemble the whole salad and to finish it off and to make it just that extra bit more

 beautiful I'm going to use some lovely Irish cheddar just shaved over the top.

 it up on a nice big serving platter that you can bring straight to the table and then serve

To cook these boiled eggs put your eggs in a pot of cold water, bring it up to

 boiling point and simmer then for about three to four minutes for nice soft boiled eggs

 and then we're going to drizzle that lovely dressing over the top.

 good so don't forget that lovely dressing we made earlier and we're just going to spoon

You could mix all this together in one bowl if you want but I think

 there you have it, a beautiful Caesar salad with soft boiled eggs and some bacon.

 Your mother was right when she said something was so spicy it will clear your sinuses.

 By making your nose run, the hot and spicy chili pepper can help clear a sinus infection.

 And it's all thanks to capsaicin, the active ingredient in the chili pepper that makes

 Studies show that capsaicin has cancer-fighting health benefits and can actively help prevent

 And today, we're making a hot and healthy salsa poblano chili, if you can handle it.

 And today, I'll be using slightly spicy poblano chili peppers for my salsa poblano chili.

 Poblanos are sort of a cross between a jalapeno and a bell pepper.

 So eating spicy chili peppers can actually help you lose weight.

 This is a full-flavored chili that you can prepare in just 30 minutes.

 You just take off the top of the chili and take off the bottom, and then take out the

 The seeds are the place where most of the heat is, but the real heat is right up here,

 Now I'm going to stack these chilies, one on top of one another, and this is a simple

 Saute the seeded and chopped chili peppers in a large saucepan with some garlic for about

 To this, add your spices, chili powder and oregano, plus frozen beef-flavored crumbles.

 Beef-flavored crumbles are much better than beef because you get lean protein, you get

 good fatty acids, and you get great flavor with fewer calories.

 This cooks for about a minute or so, and then I'm going to add about half the salsa.

 So we're going to cook the soy in the salsa with the poblanos, and now, because this is

 This should now simmer over medium heat for about five minutes.

 Kidney beans, already cooked, just out of the can, rinse them with water.

 You don't want the water from the kidney beans, it's too full of salt.

 Squash, we just diced it up into little chunks, and it's going to add color and a new dimension

 Just so it doesn't stick to the bottom, I'm going to add about a cup of water.

 You could add stock if you wanted, you could even add a little more salsa.

 I like just a little bit of extra salt, not a lot, but enough so that the flavor comes

John LaPuma, professionally trained chef and internist, appears courtesy of ChefMD.com.

 asked me, he said, Nissan I have a dinner tonight, I'm doing some fish dish and she

 It's one of those little knives with a little tip here that's going to go inside the skin

And that slice, those slices then, you're just going to cut it in half from the

So you take your lemon, do your little cut here, and then you twist

You take the lemon, cut it in half, and then you make thin slices

 Today we are going to replace a whole house water filter, a simple filtration system made

 by the likes of Honeywell GE and we are going to put in a new filter in there.

 For that all we need is a key and the filter itself which is like this.

 Of course we are going to put a bucket underneath and we are going to put the key on here and

 There is usually shut off valves on both sides of the filter and we are going to close those

 We do want to make sure that we close off both the shut off on the supply side and on

 There is also a relief valve here so we are going to press that and get the key on here

 I like to use some baking soda, just a little sponge to wipe it all down.

 Save a little water before you start the procedure so you have the water to wash it all out.

 First hand tightening and then using the key to get it nice and tight.

 Open the water back up on the supply side first and then on the filter outside to prevent

 Now you are back to filtering the water, removing all the sediment that is smaller than 10 microns,

 That works better than the non-ripped filters because it increases the surface area and

 Make sure to replace your filter once every 3 to 6 months at least as per rating of the

 all right so it's been a long time coming now but I figured I'd jump on the

 project I'm gonna be building an RC plow start off with a 4 inch PVC pipe

 section it off so I cut it right in half I'm gonna be using one half of the pipe

 build some mounting brackets for the back and have it pivot on a link with

 one servo right so I got myself a line going here just use my Dremel get one

 nice continuous cut as much as possible you get a lot of the plastic burr that

 comes up backtrack a little bit rather than that it went through pretty smooth

 just clean off some of the plastic burr while it's hot it's easier to pop off

 and same for the other side this again it's gonna be a rough mock-up test that

 out see how well it works and we're gonna do another revision video I'm

 right so now I built these mounting brackets little to a little piece of

 aluminum that I bent and drilled two of them as close to parallel as possible

 and secure everything nice and snug and that with putting the brackets on is

 also going to straighten out the pipe as well so it's gonna give it less of a

 harsh angle so just a quick mock-up of that drill their holes and we're ready

 now we're gonna have to start lining up the top pivot point so with this I use a

 different bracket it was a bracket for the leaf springs on the high lift

 modified it a little bit and I think it'll work better as a mounting point at

 the top so as I did with both of the bottom I'm gonna secure that one and now

 we're ready to add our links so my top link I'm thinking again just a mock-up

 should be a little bit longer than the two bottom ones and that will probably

 all right so there's a basic concept you have two stationary links at the bottom

 onto the frame and the top pivot point will be connected to your servo so with

 all right so should have footage of that in the snow soon guys thanks for

 What's up guys, this is Will from WWHera630 and we're going to be doing an iMac RAM upgrade

 We actually have the 2009, early 2009 iMac model, 20 inch, and we're going to be bringing

 What you're going to need to actually do any type of RAM installation for an iMac is an

 iMac, more RAM, a screwdriver, and something soft to lay your iMac on, because you actually

 have to put it face down on the screen to actually access the RAM slots.

 So here we got the, this is actually the speaker grill, and then you're going to see a little

 screw in the middle here, and you're going to just want to unscrew that, and then off,

 yeah, I already had it a bit unscrewed, off will pop the case there.

 Because as you can see, there is a little washer that is on the inside of this little

 panel here, so getting it off, for me I know, we kind of stripped it, so it can be a bit

 finicky, so take your time when unscrewing it, and don't go too fast or else you'll strip

 And in the occasion that it doesn't come completely unscrewed, always have something that you

 can kind of get in there to edge it off and pop it out, as I did with this black thing

 So now that you have the two RAM slots, and you're going to see these two little, two

 little straps here, strips rather, that you can basically pull the RAM out with.

 So this is actually the older RAM, and I'm just going to give it a nice firm tug.

 You're not going to rip it, although it kind of feels like you will at first, but it's

 Take your RAM out, put it to the side, pull this one, there we go.

 Now we have the replacement RAM, it's actually a 2GB module and a 4GB, so it's going to combine

 When you're ordering RAM, look up your iMac or Macbook or whatever computer you have,

 look up the specifications for the RAM, because it's very very specific, it's very easy to

 So as you can see, the pins line up, this is the old one on the bottom and the new one

 on top, and basically you're going to want to put them in the same way that they were

 Popping in the first RAM, let's see here, there we go, you've got to kind of give it

 Alright so now the second one, pop that in, and make sure again that the pins are aligned

 You can feel that those are both firmly in there, put the tab back in, and then from

 there all you've got to do is replace that pin once that tab goes in completely.

 And now we just put that back on, and we'll turn it on to see if it registered completely.

 So now we're going to boot it up again, and there's no beeping noise from the iMac, so

 Usually when there's any type of RAM problem, if it's uninstalled correctly, it'll make

 that annoying beeping noise which some of you may have heard before.

 So actually yeah, this iMac just booted up significantly quicker than it usually did

 So obviously before you go off and start doing anything else, you're going to want to check

 That's how you install RAM on a 2009 iMac, and that's actually pretty much the same for

 The newer generations actually have four slots as opposed to two here, so same idea all around.

 The Jabra Series J200 Portable Bandsaw Mill comes with all the components you need to assemble and start milling within 30 minutes,

 including two base supports, two 7 foot upper rails, two wrought iron bottom rails, and a reliable GX Series Honda engine.

 The J200 Portable Bandsaw assembly begins by installing the two bottom wrought iron angle rails onto the wood supports.

 Now with the bottom rail aligned and tightened face to mill, and install the cross members onto each base on the right hand side only.

 With the right hand cross members installed onto the wooden bases, you now install a base support onto each base.

 It's important to note at this point that every part of the assembly is hand tightened only.

 Then install the left hand cross members from the bottom rail to the back of the base supports.

 Finally at the base, install the rear cross member, remembering to hand tighten only at this point.

Install the left hand rail loosely onto the base support using two bolts and nuts supplied.

 With the right hand rail now loosely or hand tightened onto the right hand base support, join the rails at the center and begin the process of tightening down each bolt.

 With the top rail now completely tightened down onto each base rail, the next important step consists in making sure that the bottom bases are fully flush inside the bottom rail.

 Now with the J200 mill completely tightened down and aligned, the process is very simple.

 The final step in assembling a J200 bandsaw mill is to take the GX series engine, install it or slide it onto its rails, engage the drive belt, idle pin and finally the clutch pin.

 This is just a quick video to show you how to take the panel off.

 I'm also going to show you more or less how to remove the door panel.

 Because some people actually need to remove the door panels for other reasons.

 And they're different sizes, so you're going to have to have different sized little pieces.

 This you, you either shim or a screw driver if you know what you're doing.

 And if you're not an expert, make sure you disconnect your battery because you never

 After you pop it out, you can see that the door is held on by a cable.

 You take the cable, you snap it off, and what you do is you pick the door up, the panel,

 But you also have to make sure you have to have this speaker off, also disconnected because

 So it's one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine screws.

Today I'm going to be doing Shirley Temple curls, like just kind of cute ones.

 But it's not going to be like those things that like they just stick up like it's right there on her scalp.

 Like what I did first is I split her hair into two equal sections and I just kind of braid it down.

Now what I'm going to use today is I'm going to use the wand to curl her hair.

Now what you're going to do is you're going to do it kind of like going away from the face.

You just leave it there because since her hair is, you know, small and thin, you're going to leave it there for about five to ten seconds.

 I don't even have to leave it there for just like five seconds.

And kind of do like small pieces, you know, because you want to make it that cute.

 And all you're going to need for this video is just like two clips or two bobby pins, some hairspray, and like a curling iron or a wand.

 Now that we're getting about to the middle of the hair, you're going to start from like the middle area.

 Like you're going to start like, like instead of starting from the scalp, you're going to start from about the middle and then wrap around.

 And kind of have it like face down so like the curl can go down.

 Because if you start from the scalp, because you want it to be like short curls in the middle and then it get longer as it's going back.

 And you just have to hold it there just for about five to ten seconds.

 But like, you know, if you have thin hair, you only need to hold it there for about five seconds.

 Now that you're getting to the back of the hair, remember, kind of get smallish pieces even though it's kind of big right now.

 But you're going to, instead of the middle, you're going to start a little bit lower.

 Because like if it's just the curl in the back, like if you start kind of low, then like that means like, you know, the curl would be a little bit, you know, longer.

 So you won't have like just like a big bundle of curls, you know.

 So she has thin hair, you know, and it only took me like less than three minutes.

 You know, it's cute on, you know, little girl hair or like, you know, like about her size.

 Then on the bangs part, spray and then just kind of rub it down because you don't want any frizzies.

 I can't tell you, I found the best deal and I'm still just sitting here saying to myself,

 But I found 8 pounds of oranges for $1 at my Latin market over the weekend.

 And so my kids have been kind of sick and so I think it's a perfect opportunity to make

 So the very first thing that I am going to do, I actually have a juicer over here.

 If you don't have a juicer, you can just use apple juice from the bottle.

 Okay, so with my oranges, I have about 4 to 5 oranges here that I have squeezed the juice from.

 And then I've got my apple that I just pureed with my juicer that I'm going to pour in there.

 Now Mexican yogurt is quite a bit different than the kind that Americans like to eat.

 Now when you're giving it to your kids, you know, they just want it like that.

 So I've just got a little bit of chopped nut that I'm just going to like sprinkle over the top.

 But in the winter when everybody is just kind of sick and you're like,

 Click on the recipe and you can find the recipe in the video there.

 is stitched by first coming up with a simple leaf shape, then stitching inside

 of that with a wiggly line to create a vine, and then branch out from that with

 line all the way to the edges of the leaf with these straight lines.

 The travel stitching is really going to build up your thread quite a lot in

 requires practice and it also requires playing with your threads to try and

 figure out what thread you need to use and what will work best for stitching

 straight lines of the leaf veins, you're just simply going to pivot and echo

 around that shape several times to build it up and make it look really pretty on

 with a new leaf shape and another vine and more little veins inside of it.

Whenever I stitch in the center of the leaves, I'm actually slowing down quite a bit and stitching very very carefully.

This allows me to stitch right on top of the previous line of stitching and not stitch off.

Once I get outside of that leaf, get it completely filled, I'm just going to

 the side so I'm just going to try and take my echoes into that area so it fills

 it up completely and it doesn't leave any open gaps, any open spaces in the design.

 like my designs to be filled completely with texture, completely with thread.

 Then just continue making another echo around that side of the leaf.

You can see how the lines of echo quilting really make each leaf stand out beautifully on the surface of the quilt.

Even when they're all kind of squished together in this situation, as you can see right here, they still stand out nicely and you can see the difference between all of them.

You are going to have some weird areas even in between the leaves.

 trying to squish this leaf in, in this little weird area and it doesn't really even have a complete leaf shape.

Sometimes you're just going to have to cut it in half or cut it in a quarter in order to fit it into the area you need to go.

 If you enjoyed this video, you'll love the over 350 videos you can find at the Free Motion Quilting Project.

 Empecemos dibujando la línea de la cabeza y el cuerpo, con un pincel

 Ahora, he hecho la cabeza un poco más grande porque era demasiado pequeña

 Estoy erigiendo y refinando las formas con un erizador de las nubes.

 Una pequeña reflexión blanca para el ojo y vamos a colorear la parte

 La parte inferior del gato, podemos hacer con un poco de blanco y azul.

 I'm Natalie Hodgson here today in the bodybuilding.com kitchen showing you how to make a recipe that

 I make a lot of mornings and it's my blueberry protein pancake.

 This is a really good recipe if you're getting tired of the same old egg whites and oats.

 This uses the exact same ingredients, it just mixes them into a different way.

 I know there's a lot of protein pancake recipes out there but I like this one because it uses

 These are all the ingredients that we're going to use for today's recipe.

 We're going to use six egg whites and a half of a cup of old-fashioned oats.

 I like the old-fashioned oats better than the instant oats just because they're a little

 The instant oats have actually been cooked and dehydrated to make them cook faster and

 You can use fresh or frozen or you can substitute it for raspberries or strawberries.

 We have a half a cup of unsweetened vanilla almond milk and just make sure that when you

 get the almond milk you're getting the unsweetened vanilla kind.

 Also if you wanted you could substitute milk but I prefer the almond milk.

 I have half a cup of unsweetened applesauce and just a dash of cinnamon.

 Those two items we're going to save to the end and use it as a topping on top of the

 For today's recipe I'm actually going to use a blender to mix everything together.

 One day I came home and my house smelled really bad and I couldn't figure out why.

 Now what I do is I'll just put them right into the garbage disposal.

 I guess it helps with their coat and makes it a little bit shinier.

 It's a really good way to incorporate some whole grains into their diet.

 Another thing you can do is you can make these in bulk on the weekend and then freeze them.

 I think they taste a little bit better fresh but you definitely can freeze them.

 When I do that I just put them in a Ziploc bag and then when I want to eat them I stick

 I'm going to save the blueberries until we're actually in the griddle.

 Probably about an eighth of a teaspoon if you were to measure it.

 If you want to eat the pancakes without any applesauce on top you could add a third pack

 It would make your pancakes sweet so you wouldn't need to add the applesauce on top.

 Alright, I'm quickly going to turn my skillet on to about medium high heat.

 Then I'm just going to spray it with a little bit of nonstick cooking spray.

 So I usually just kind of eyeball it and put about half of the batter in the skillet.

 Then I'm going to take half of my blueberries and just drop them in the top.

 I've done that before but I think it tastes a little better this way.

 Usually you can tell they're ready to flip when there's bubbles in the center of the

 Sometimes the first pancake doesn't flip quite as well as the second pancake.

 It's because sometimes in the blender the egg whites tend to kind of stay at the top

 I'm just going to blend it for just a second to get everything shaken up.

 And we're just going to let it cook about one to two minutes per side.

 You know it's ready to flip once the edges look like they're cooked all the way through

 and there's bubbles starting to form in the center of the pancake.

 This is another reason I like this recipe is because it's a really great way to start

 And so a lot of times I'll actually eat these even without any applesauce on top.

 You can use sugar-free syrup if you want, but I prefer to stay away from that just because

 So sometimes if I want a little extra something on top, I'll use some unsweetened applesauce.

 Just make sure you get the applesauce that says no sugar added or unsweetened.

 Or if you read the ingredient list, the only ingredients are apples, water, and maybe

 And then I like cinnamon, so I'm going to put a dash of cinnamon on top.

 One serving is two pancakes, and each serving has six egg whites and half a cup of oats,

 So to get this blueberry protein pancake recipe, you can check out the link on the page below.

 And continue to go to bodybuilding.com to find all of my other recipes, as well as

 My grandmother always said, get more fresh fruits and vegetables into your meals.

 Well, I'm calling this smoothie a food because we're taking whole foods.

 We're going to blend them up and we will turn the whole foods into a liquid meal or liquid

 It's also known as Chinese broccoli, also known in Chinese as gai lan.

 But if you can't find this, you can use broccoli leaves or kale leaves.

 Okay, this little guy, very high in calcium, very high in vitamin C, potassium, iron, good

 I actually prefer grapes with the seeds for the added nutritional benefits.

 And lime will actually cut the bitterness that's often in leafy green vegetables.

 But what they might not know is bananas are also a very good source of vitamin C.

 So in the mornings you can just juice these with an apple, a pear, some ginger.

 It also makes a good meal replacement or like a pick-me-up snack in the afternoon.

 Hey guys, Paul here from Running Injury Free Revolution and I just want to talk about ankle

 Will touched on ankle stability in one of our previous videos, sort of talking about

 how ankle stability is very much a holistic perspective, like you want to think about

 core strength, about gluteal strength, about your foot pronation, position, your supination,

 But if you do a trail run and you're having like a little niggle or something like that,

 you half go over, you want to take that as a warning sign, you want to tackle it.

 And she's going to basically show us how she uses the TheraBand to strengthen those ankles.

 And basically the first thing, put the TheraBand on properly guys, so spread it out so there's

 a decent sort of surface area, so you can really make sure you don't sort of flick it

 And she's going to look at plantar flexion, dorsiflexion first.

 I'll show it from this angle because the other thing you want to really concentrate on is

 the alignment so that the knee right down to ankle and foot is in a line.

 Sometimes it can head either towards the inside or can sort of slightly flick outside.

 Make sure you're really controlling that because that's what you're trying to do with your

 So we're going to really try and target getting these peroneals, these little outside muscles.

 If you've ever had any little niggles, they can start to not do their job.

 So see the resistance coming from the other knee and then control it slowly in.

 And then they're also working hard to control this so the foot doesn't flick back in as

 So they're two little simple ones that you can start straight away.

 So you want to start to strengthen the ankle and peroneals are a real key to that.

 If you ever have like a little half trip on a trail run, you want to start to think, oh,

 I've got to make sure that they're strong and they're still active.

 There's other ways to make sure that ankles are stable as well.

 That's going to really help you attenuate force with your running, particularly as you

 If you're a heel striker and you're starting to get more midfoot, you want to be able to

 You know nothing beats a flavor of grilled flank steak, especially when you make a mustard

 Our marinade slash sauce starts with balsamic vinegar, beef broth, molasses, whole grain

 Let's place our flank steak into a Ziploc bag and we'll add our marinade.

 And we'll move it around to make sure the meat's in contact with the marinade and we'll

 pop it in the fridge for a minimum of 30 minutes or better yet overnight.

 Now we're going to place our reserve marinade into a small pot and then we'll turn on the

 temperature about medium, medium high and we'll reduce it to about one third a cup.

 After about three minutes we'll go ahead and turn our flank steak.

 And we'll continue cooking, turning often until the flank steak is just done to your

 The best way to tell when it's done is to use an instant meat thermometer.

 I like mine medium rare so I'm looking for an internal temperature of 130 degrees.

 When you cook your steak, cook it one way for about the first five minutes and then

 turn the opposite direction to make the cross hatch grill marks.

 And for sanitation reasons, always have one cutting board for the raw meat and one for

 Now that the sauce is reduced, let's go ahead and slice up our flank steak.

 Make sure you identify which way the grains in the meat are running because you want to

 We're going to cut this at about a 45 degree angle or on the bias.

Today we're in the Australian outback and we're going to talk a little bit about mounting an axe and shovel onto one of our racks.

 In this case, since we're in Australia, this is what we're going to use.

 And now we're ready to position one of the mounts on top of the rack.

 Right now we're going to take one of the brackets and then the other part.

 So we're going to tighten it with our hands just enough so it doesn't move.

 Here you're going to see the space for either the axe and shovel here and here.

 So we're going to measure and make sure that the length is the correct one.

 In this case we're going to place the axe in the bottom part and then the shovel.

 You can use these holes where the safety clips go to put a lock.

 Hey guys, so today I'm doing a comparison video on two concealers and these have actually

 been compared a lot to each other, but I wanted to see for myself.

 This is the NARS Radiant Creamy Concealer in the shade Vanilla and this is the Fit Me

 I think it's an amazing drugstore concealer, but I just wanted to try them together and

 what I'm basically going to do is I'm using the Fit Me on this side and the NARS on this

 I have not used either one of these, so I think being new, the formula is going to be

 I know when products sit for a while, the formula can change and it just wears differently.

 So by having brand new products, I think it'll be a really good comparison.

 So I'm starting off with the Maybelline Fit Me and I'm just taking this and I'm going

 And it feels like it's blending very well and it's not drying too quickly.

 It kind of brightens and I think it's a really great concealer for the drugstore.

 Now I'm taking the Radiant Creamy Concealer and I'm going to apply four dots.

 And I'm just going to take my ring finger and apply it in the same way.

 It just feels like it's a little bit thicker, maybe a little bit more moisturizing.

 I can see though that the Maybelline Fit Me is just a tiny bit lighter and a little bit

 So what I'm going to do is just go ahead and let this dry and I will check back with you

 This side has the NARS Radiant Creamy Concealer and this side has the Maybelline Fit Me Concealer.

 So I'm probably going to have one more update after this after soccer just to see how it

 This side, the NARS side, definitely you can see that you can see a lot more of my fine

 This side seems to be brighter and I think maybe that's just because of the coloring.

 We played two and a half games of soccer and I was sweating a lot but I just used a towel

 Right in the inner corner and sort of right here, I feel like it's mostly gone.

 And I feel like this side, the Maybelline Fit Me side, is still a little bit brighter

 But I also, looking in the viewfinder, it looks like this side is a little bit more

 I'm just going to take my finger and pat it out because that's what I would usually do

 Sometimes just pressing the concealer with my ring finger helps to smooth it out again.

 And I feel like that helped a little bit but it's still really creasy over here.

 This side is a little bit more matte still and this side is a little bit more glowy and

 I feel like the Fit Me concealer works just as good as the Nars concealer.

 So I think for the price, I would go ahead and go with the Maybelline Fit Me just because

 I feel like it conceals, it stays on the same amount of time, and it's not as creasy.

Today we're going to be doing a roasted vegetable ratatouille, and it's kind of a two-part process

 We're going to roast the vegetables in the oven then we're going to bring them up on the stove top

 And we're going to add a few more ingredients to it and make it a really delicious side dish that we're going to have with

 Leftover ratatouille, and it's going to be awesome, so let's see how we make this

 Roasted vegetable ratatouille is just a combination of garden vegetables and

 Since it is summer and the garden is producing these things are some of these things are out of my garden

 We have one small eggplant, and it's probably about two cups of eggplant that I have just washed and chunked up

 And then two medium-sized zucchinis that I've sliced a large sweet Vidalia onion that I've cut into wedges

 and then I have a half of a large or about a cup of yellow bell pepper and red bell pepper and a

 And I've just left them whole and what I have over here is some of my homegrown garlic

 I'd say there's probably about two tablespoons of chopped garlic there about a

 Handful I really did measure a fresh basil that I pulled out of the garden this afternoon and about a tablespoon of fresh chopped

 We're going to put some salt and pepper and olive oil and in order to get this started

 I have my oven preheated to 350 degrees and we're just going to go ahead and

 Put all of these vegetables and herbs together on this baking pan

 I actually took some tomatoes that I needed to use and I sliced them

 I cut them in half, and I roasted them alongside some other vegetables some sliced some sliced eggplant, etc

 Okay now next thing we're gonna do is we're going to put some salt pepper on here

 Sorry, I'm getting your way, and then we're going to put some black pepper

 Say a quarter to a half a teaspoon or whatever tickles your fancy if you like a ton of black pepper then go for it

 Roast really well, and then you're gonna get your hands in here

 And you're going to make sure that they all get a nice coating of that olive oil

 And you can do this in a very large bowl if you like and then you can just put it on the pan

 I've lined my pan with aluminum foil, but you certainly don't have to do that

 I like to do that because it's a little bit easier clean up not much to be honest with you

 Until those veggies are nice and roasted and then we're gonna bring them out

 We are ready to take our ratatouille out of the oven and this is just the vegetable part

 and the vegetables you will notice are not like mushy okay, and you don't want them to be mushy because

 And I have that heating up, and I have a big bold spoon, and I'm just gonna toss this in here

 And it just looks wonderful you want these to still feel like they're fresh vegetables

 And this is my own version of ratatouille some French versions of ratatouille are very very

 They're very particular they're arranged very certain a certain way in a circle or spiral

 I'm gonna take about a quarter to a half a cup of parmesan cheese and that goes in here as well

 Get a little bit of everything in there the onion the pepper the eggplant

 Zucchini you can put olives in here, and it's gonna be beautiful

 mushrooms and basil and all of those spices that we put in there pepper and salt and

 Anybody would be happy to serve that meal to their family or a guest

 Garden vegetable ratatouille right in your own kitchen with very little work roasting it in the oven is the only way to go in my opinion

 I hope that you will rate and comment and subscribe if you liked what you saw and until next time I'll see ya

 It doesn't matter how large or good the filter is, there's always some dirt left

 also known as sediment, not only serves as fertilizer for plants,

 Select a gravel cleaner according to the height of your aquarium.

 Here's the protective sieve which prevents plant material and fish

 Plug in the hose with the stopcock, attach a second clip safe to the aquarium

 Just shake it up and down a few times and the water will simply flow out

 the clean gravel will fall to the floor whilst the dirt is siphoned

 just park the gravel cleaner with the JBL clip safe so that it can't fall out.

 Welcome to episode 3 of South Holston River Fly Shops fly tying videos.

 Today we're going to be tying Rod's Simple Cripple and this is in the Blue Wing Olive

 We're also going to be using olive 8-0 thread, Trout Hunter CDC Puff in white, and an olive

 Alright, we have a TMC 921 number 18 mounted in the vise and I'm going to start my 8-0

 Now we're going to run back up to the front and tie on a CDC Puff.

 You could use a regular CDC feather and you could do this in brown or dun color.

 I like white this time of year just because it's easy to see and easy to pick out on the

 We need all the help we can get this time of year to see a fly out on the water.

 It's a little bit finer but it does a good job of being more pliable than the regular

 I'm going to trim off some excess from the tip so you don't break it off.

 I think it looks a little bit nicer but I'm not sure that the fish really...

 That's one thing is if you have confidence in a fly then you'll fish it hard and this

 Whenever you are fishing this fly you want to put a little bit of dry magic, just a small

 As the CDC gets gunked up, and it will because it's a fish catcher, you're going to want

 to really pinch the body of the fly to brush your frog's fanny on and just get the wing

 We really want this bi-0 part, or if you've chosen the dubbing, we want this to be sinking

 We want to try to avoid getting frog's fanny on it so that it will have a natural profile

 Of course if the fish are being extra selective you can come in here and trim the wing down

 That's one good thing if they start refusing it you can keep trimming the wing down.

 The wing is really for you right here as much as it is for the fish.

 Caramel sauce is usually a source of carbohydrate and simple sugars.

 The first thing we need to do is put your pan over about medium heat, and we're going

 What we're looking for is for the milk solids in the butter to turn a golden brown.

 I'm going to add the sweetener, and in this case we're using powdered Truvia.

 We're going to stir this constantly until it comes back to a boil, and I'm going to

 You can see it's leaving a trail in the pan when I scrape it with a whisk.

 At this point you want to remove it from the heat and pour it into a bowl.

 And just for a minute while this cools, you want to continue stirring it so the temperature

 Once this has reached room temperature, it will stay in a sauce-like consistency, and

 If you would like to store this for later, you can pour it into a candy mold and it will

 Once this sauce has been made, you can use it as a topping on ketogenic ice cream or

 even add additional ingredients such as peanuts to make ketogenic candies.

 I'm going to take the L-Drive Allen wrench and get the big pulley off where you've got

 And we slide the blade gauge across the opening to the end of the blade.

 Usually we feel the two ends and not the middle, but we feel the middle and not the two ends

 It comes with a ball drive Allen wrench and that's how you loosen them up.

 If it's not in there the way you want it, you can loosen up one screw here.

 Tighten up the other screw until you get the blade in pretty much the way you want it.

 You either feel the two ends and not the middle, or you feel the middle and not the two ends.

 Occasionally when you're making a snowball the machine does freeze up.

 It means the ice froze right across the top here and you're pushing snow into the cylinder but it's not coming out.

 The only way you should use this is to stop the blades from spinning before you put this up the spout.

 The only way you can really hurt this machine is if you turn it on and it goes,

 Immediately turn it off, reach under the belt guard, pull the pulley towards you,

 pull the blades, it pulls the blades out of the block, and you're ready to go again.

 Then turn the machine off and you remove the waste piece of ice with an ice pick.

 In this video I'm going to show you how to make protein pancakes.

 So what you're going to need is egg white, fat free cottage cheese, oatmeal, and of course

 Okay guys, so for this recipe you're going to need one cup of oatmeal.

 I'm actually gonna think about doing half a cup because I don't think I have enough for a whole cup

 Okay, so there we go, it's pretty much and it should be a good texture

 Yeah, maybe I can blend it up for a little bit more, but that's pretty much it.

 You're on a diet and you want some taste, protein, you can put syrup on it, of course

I've even heard of putting like coffee creamer such as this time

 On it, it gives it some taste or you can just eat it plain and be a champ

 Fat-free whipped cream on it and you cook it exactly the same way as you would

 Or I read this article it said four to six minutes on each side

 But I don't know it was literally like one minute on each side and then it was cooked

 Hello, my name is Bastian, I'm from the Russian Moscow, and in this video I will show you

 Sorry for my English, I hope you will understand what I'm talking about.

 And you play this part over and over again from the intro till the end of the song.

 The first chord is D major, but this is second inversion, that's why we start playing from

 At the left hand we play the D, at the right hand we play the F sharp, A and D.

 This chord is A major, at the left hand you play the C sharp, at the right hand you play

 The next chord is the same, A major, but at the left hand you play the A, at the right

 Ok, next chord is G major, but at the left hand you play the B, at the right hand you

 Next chord is G, you should play it 8 times in the same rhythm.

 Next chord is A major, you should play it 8 times, but at the last hit your left hand

 Next chord is A major, A, C sharp, E, at the left hand you play the C sharp 4 times.

 1, 2, 3, 4, and the last chord, at the right hand still the A major, at the left hand A.

 If this lesson was useful for you, you can click at the like button.

 what a Phillips screwdriver is, it's the one with the star tip.

 same procedure today will apply to countless other trimmers as well.

 just inserted a piece of cardboard underneath to soak up some of the fuel

And you may want to empty out the fuel tank before you do this and

 have your rag ready because a bit of fuel may leak out when you remove the

The reason you may want to replace a primer bulb is if it becomes

 stiff or when you push it it does not retract in its proper position.

 that will get brittle and crack and fuel will leak out of them or your

 this trimmer, this will be the part number that you need for your primer

 reinstall it make sure the diaphragms are still on the carburetor like this.

 the diaphragm did come off just put it back on in this position.

 like this and then proceed to tighten up the screws but do so evenly.

 try out the primer bulb by pushing on it and it should be filling up with fuel or

 Facebook, Google+, Twitter and Instagram and have yourselves a great day!

 we're going to need some chopped parsley, some paprika and a few chickpeas.

By the way, for the ingredients that goes into this recipe you can go online

 Okay, I stopped it a little bit to mix all the ingredients together.

 going to mix it a little bit until all the ingredients are creamy and well together.

 You can always add to your liking a little bit of salt or a little bit of lemon juice.

I hope you enjoy it and please make it for your family and friends.

 For this recipe and many more healthy dishes, check out our ebook on our website

 Sweet potatoes are extremely healthy because they contain high fiber and lots of vitamins, especially vitamin A.

 Most importantly, they are very versatile and extremely delicious.

 They are naturally sweet and their sugars are slowly released into the bloodstream.

 For this reason, you are able to enjoy this delicious snack without the blood spike and the fatigue or possible weight gain.

 Easy because we're going to be using the microwave to make them and healthy because instead of the ordinary yellow potatoes,

 we're going to be using sweet potatoes that have way more nutrient content.

 Alright, so let's go over the ingredients that we will be needing for today's snack.

In this case, we have canola oil, salt, pepper, cinnamon, and of course sweet potato.

 And as far as the kitchen utensils, we'll be using napkins, plates, an oven mitt, a cooking board or cutting board, and a knife.

 First off, you want to take your sweet potato and wash it thoroughly to make sure you get rid of any of the dirty residues or pesticides that's on the skin.

 Next, you want to thoroughly pat it dry because any excess moisture on the sweet potato will prevent it from getting crispy in the microwave.

 Next, you want to chop the sweet potato in half because it will be easier to slice.

 And it will be easier if you have a mandolin for this process, but if you don't, you can just use a knife and you'll still be able to make thin slices.

 I find it easier if you use little sawing motions to slice the potato.

 Next, you want to grab your two plates and put one paper towel on each plate.

 And once you do that, you can begin spreading the thin slices of sweet potato onto the plate.

 We're going to start out by using cooking spray and just slightly spray your slices.

 And then for this plate, we're going to be using salt and pepper.

 If you don't like salt and pepper, you can always use another plate.

And if they're not crispy, just do it in intervals of 30 seconds until they're as crispy as you want them.

 So after time is up, just make sure you have your oven mitt on because the plate will be hot.

And make sure you let them cool because they will be extremely hot.

 Hi loves, today we're creating this beautiful easy to do ombre lip as part of my holiday

 If you're interested in this look stay tuned to see how I created it.

 Anytime you're wearing color on the lips always be sure to moisturize your lips well.

 We're going to begin by defining our lips using a deep burgundy lip pencil.

 To soften up the lip pencil take a lip brush and start blending the color onto the lips

 Now I'm taking Wet n Wild's lipstick in the color Cherry Bomb and applying this color

 Here I'm going back in with my lip pencil to blend the lipstick evenly.

 For the center of the lips I'm applying NYX Goddess of the Night lip gloss in the color

 Using the same lip pencil and technique from before blend the gold lip gloss into the lipstick

 Don't forget to comment, rate, and subscribe and I'll see you guys in my next tutorial.

 Now the second move of that triple threat situation is called a crossover.

 In protecting the basketball, you're jabbing with your right foot, and the defense sometimes

 react that way, and you want to change your direction, this is what most people do that's

 And jabbing with this right foot, they get so quick, they go this way, by moving their

 So the correct way to do it is when you jab, now you're going to pick up the same foot

 And in putting the ball down, good defensive players, if you put the ball out here, have

 long enough arms, got it pipping for one, can slap it, your momentum's going this way

 Good way to correct that is when you jab, now you change, if you put the ball here,

 So now the only way the defense can get to that ball is to go through your arms, go through

 I say nine times out of ten because I can get away with it, but I don't play anymore

 So jab, step, change direction this way, putting the ball inside your legs.

 Now the good thing about an offensive player is you got to be able to go both ways.

 The defense is going to read that and then they become more, I guess have the advantage

 So when you're working on that move to do it this way, also do it that way.

 If my man is taking a defensive stance, the thing that I'm looking at right now is he's

 Which also to me means all I have to do is give him a nice little fake this way, he's

 Now changing direction is a little bit better to use when you see a guy with a parallel

 So now you have so many options, you just try to use as many options as you can.

 Now if he had his right foot forward, that to me is saying, now he wants you to go this

 The last thing I want to do is go where the defense wants me to go.

 So this is when now he takes his step that way, the change of direction means he's got

 to pick up this foot and open, then slide to keep up to you as an offensive player.

 That takes more time than you taking that crossover and driving to the hole.

 Now if he has his other foot up, this is what I was telling you about being able to go both

 So you should look, before you take your stance, look how the defense is playing you and then

 decide which is your pivot foot, your right foot or your left foot and then attack.

 It's totally healthy, which is what our chefs have always done,

 Guys, you guys are really enjoying my ShopVac videos, it looks like, for using the filter

 Basically, if you guys haven't seen that, you know, I find that covering those notches

 on the end of this here with some duct tape, wrapping it around a couple of times, and

 using the filter bag, which works a lot better than using that pleated filter thing.

 You can use that pleated paper filter that comes with it if you're just vacuuming out

 your car and cleaning up your garage here and there, but when you've got more like remodeling

 dust from drywall and grout and this and that, I found that the filter bags are amazing.

 You've got the regular filter bags, which you get about three packs for $17.

 And then you can get the really heavy-duty fine particle bags, which are really good

 when it comes to sucking up drywall, grout dust, even ash from your fireplace.

 I understand that it might get a little pricey, but they really do the job good.

 At first, I was thinking, well, I thought it was kind of self-explanatory, but I realized

 that there are a couple different models of these ShopVac units, so they do install a

 Let me just go over those two different ways, at least that I know of, of how these bags

 This is the ShopVac that I have currently, which is completely different, the way it

 This doesn't move, come out, turn around, or anything like that.

 So you're just going to take your bag, proper-sized bag you have for your unit.

 And you want to make it kind of like a circle like this, so that your intake right here

 You're going to kind of push it side to side until she pops over and it's snug against

 Then you just make sure that it's down in place, set your top in, lock it, you're good

 I also realized that's quite a bit different than my old ShopVac unit, which I haven't

 had for a while, that had a screw-in hose and the intake spouts were removable.

 So this spot right here that you guys see here, the little intake spout, I'm going to

 It had kind of a U-shaped holder, if you will, and it was square, square plastic thing, kind

 of a flange on it, and you would lift it up and you could, it would say one way for dry

 And anyways, as you're using that, and that's the kind of ShopVac you have, you want to

 Slide it out, toss it to the side, and then this cardboard flange that you have right

 here, this slides right in to that U-shaped holder I was talking about that holds the

 Now, then that'd be sitting like this, you know, and then it is held in place, which

 you need to do so that when you put the hose in, you don't just break this because this

 You want to stick your fingers through, make sure the paper is put in, placed like that,

 Then when you slide it in to the holder, you might even want to hold it with a hand.

 Then when you stick the hose in, screw it in place, that way you kind of break in the

 Then after that, the hose should go into it pretty easily as long as you make sure the

 So if you're going to stick the hose back in on one of those units, you want to make

 sure that the holes still line up before you stick the hose in and screw it, lock it in.

 So for those of you who had any confusion about that, how to get them in properly, I

 And I apologize for the delay of making this video, but sometimes it just takes a while

 Hello, I'm Martin Simpson and I'm here to attempt to demystify the myth of the

 did in D on the fifth and third strings, in G on the fourth and second, here on

 We looked at the hollow movement here, the hollow ascension if you like, the C

 shape, again the C shape, partial barre, the C shape, partial barre, up to the octave.

 And then there's a double pull off and it's a circular movement, so the hammer on

 is from the index finger to the little finger and then the little finger is pulling off in a

 very slightly downward direction while the index finger is coming in this direction.

 We're starting with the open G with the harmonics and then it's a D chord and I'm

 starting by playing in this register, so within the triad from standard tuning, D,

 E minor and then I'm going down here to the C shape but instead of using that

 What's up everybody it's Michael Alder from CarpetExpertBlueprint.com and

 today I'm going to show you how to cut and burn a seam in commercial carpet or

 knife, you will need a seam iron, you will need a carpet tracker, you're gonna need

 Now put a fresh blade in your knife and as crazy as this looks just cut right

 Once everything's lined up place your iron under it to melt it together.

 Now I like to fold it down in there get a little bit of glue on the edge to keep

 Alright, we're talking about practicing these shapes, you know, because one thing you got to do,

 knowing it's great, but when you're playing, you know, you got to just be able to see it, grab it

 what's going on, and the best way to do that is you just practice these shapes, like how they

 they connect using that same root bass note on the fifth string.

 you know right, you just move that your first finger to that same bass note on the fifth string,

Just form your A shape, you're going to be on the same chord you were just

Likewise, when you're moving from an A shape, which connects to a G shape, is where that first

 finger is at the fifth fret is the same place your third finger was at the fifth fret.

 that's where you get that Hendrix, that's a real common slide going from, see?

 connect that, and you don't even think about counting bass notes, looking for a bass note on

 the sixth string, because you just know that's the connection, you're on the same chord, okay?

 Then the G shape with the E shape is going to connect again using that note on the sixth string,

 the note that's under your little finger on the sixth string, at the eighth fret, that C,

 well now put your first finger at the eighth fret on that C note, now you got an E shape.

 when you're in your E shape chord, your little finger is already on your octave note on your

 fourth string, that's where your first finger goes to connect your D shape to that, okay?

 And then the D shape connects up with the C shape the same way that the A and the G shape connect,

 in that these three notes, the D, what you think of as your basic D chord up there, C,

 then you don't have to sit there and think about, you know, going A, B, C,

 counting up and finding a root note, you're on one chord shape, you can see the other one,

 and that gives you the opportunity, like when you're playing a rhythm to a song, you know,

 you see that C going to that B flat, when you're here, boom, you know that that's B flat,

 makes you look like a genius, gets you lots of gigs, makes you lots of money, right?

 Are these gels making your coil outs and finger coils too crunchy?

 Water Moisturize Curling Gel Souffle and of course an afro pick.

 So you're going to start with the water and you're just going to spray the water throughout

 Now I'm working with hair that I already coiled out using the gel.

 But this is one week old hair that I'm about to separate for the soft curled look.

 As you spray the water through it, the curls begin to loosen up.

 So basically I open it up, I dip my fingers in it, both of my hands and then I just run

 Again a little more and just keep running it through your hair.

 As you can see the coils have loosened up so the curls look more soft, more bouncy.

 Now this product contains glycerin and glycerin is a great moisturizer and you'll like it

 It's going to add great shine and sheen and it's just going to leave your curls and coils

 As you can see, just one by one you take the coil and you just separate it out just like

 And as you do that to your whole head, you begin to have a head full of coils.

 You can wear this style for like about a week and it's going to stay this way.

 When people touch your hair, they're going to be like, oh my god this is so nice and soft.

 And I talk about separating coils in a lot of my videos and I finally got around to showing

 So if you guys want to achieve this look, this is the way to go.

 And you're just going to spray that through your hair to hold the style.

 Lift through the coil out for about two days so the gel can dry.

 Then use the products that I showed you today to achieve this look.

 If you want your hair to be bigger, you can always just pick the roots up.

 But sometimes I wear it like that, sometimes I just leave it like this.

 First thing that you'll need is some bottle caps, a picture frame, and a hot glue gun.

 Um, first thing that you'll have to do is remove the back, the back part.

 So I'm going to put it down and place this somewhere where it won't get wrecked.

 Second thing that you're going to do is take your bottle caps and just see if you have enough.

 Hopefully you do too, because if you don't have enough, then that's not good and won't work.

 Put it on only two spots on the bottle cap, and don't use a lot of glue.

 See, the good thing about hot glue is that it dries really quick.

 Okay, so when you're done, you'll have something that looks like this.

 So first I'm going to start off this look by moisturizing and priming my skin with my

 I use the Farsali Mechanic Elixir and my Benefit Porefessional.

 I'm going to start off this look by doing some color correcting.

 I'm going to be using my Bobbi Brown Deep Bisque Color Corrector.

 And it's just a light peach shade that I like to pop under the eyes just to kind of even

 out any darkness or discoloration that I may have in those areas.

 I'm going to be doing some highlighting but underneath the foundation.

 So I'm just going to be popping that on with a beauty blender on the high points of my

 Which is something that's been highly requested, highly raved about.

 So I picked this up about a week ago and now I'm testing it out and playing around.

 So now I'm working with my Downtown Browns palette from Black Radiance.

 I'm going to take this dark burgundy crease color and I'm going to smudge that on the

 And I wanted to do the eyes first because I knew that there was a possibility of there

 I like this color because it's kind of like a nice, it reminds me of like a black cherry.

 Let's take this deep burgundy color and pop that on the eyelid area.

 And then I use this warm golden brown shade along the bottom lash line.

 But because I haven't done concealer yet, I'm probably going to go in and add more.

 I'm going to be using my Wet n Wild Mega Liner, which I actually really like.

 And then to help complement some of the gold that I'm wearing, I used my Milani Shadow Eyes.

 And then I used my Dior Show Mascara, of course, and my Mally Beauty Mascara on top of that.

 Please be advised, this step usually takes me about five minutes.

 So the mascara part is always the part that I have to edit out the most.

 So now that we're done with the eyes, I'm going to go ahead and move on to the foundation.

 And I wanted to use something that was more matte to kind of offset the shimmeriness of the eye.

 So I'm going to be using my Stila Stay All Day Foundation, which has really become one of my favorite foundations lately.

 And then I usually like to go back in and just kind of touch it up a little bit with my Beauty Blender, which is damp.

 And I like this foundation because it's got a built-in concealer at the top.

 And then I'm going to set and lock in that foundation using my Laura Mercier Translucent Loose Setting Powder.

 Between this step and using that Benefit Porefessional, your foundation is not going anywhere.

 So for concealer today, I'm going to be using my Bobbi Brown Creamy Concealer.

 And I love this concealer because it's very thick, but still, it's not heavy, you know?

 So let's revisit that Laura Mercier Translucent Loose Setting Powder I used earlier and use that to set the under-eye concealer.

 And then I'm also going to tap that in the center of the face, just where I get oily.

 I used the Anastasia Beverly Hills Dip Brow Pomade in Chocolate.

 I have to say, thanks to Vanessa and Kelly at Kelly Baker Brows,

 And guys, if you're contemplating growing out your brows, take it from someone who's been there and done it.

 And then I like to go in with my Tarte Colored Clay when I really want my eyebrows to be all sleek.

 I just go in just basically at the head of the brow and just kind of lighten that area.

 I'm just going to very lightly use a little bit of my Sheer Finish Powder, also from Bobbi Brown.

 And I just think it's funny because, just a disclaimer, I unintentionally use a lot more Bobbi Brown than I anticipated.

 This is pretty much always my go-to blush for my pink looks, my purple looks, anything kind of like mauve-y or even like rose gold.

 And some people might not like that, but I really feel like their colors are so much more forgiving.

 So if you're heavy-handed, have no fear with these blushes because it'd be pretty difficult to really make it look bad.

 The shade is Aura, and it looks a little intimidating for dark skin.

 And it is kind of on the cooler side, which I usually prefer more warmer highlighters.

 So last and final step of the look is going to be the lips, which I think is my favorite part.

 So this is a new lip cream that I bought from a company called Pretty Zombie.

 I'm going to be using that, and I line my lips first with ColourPop Cosmetics lip pencils.

 And some people have been pointing out how sometimes when I wear darker lip colors,

 I don't line my lips all the way, and it has nothing to do with full lips or being ashamed of having full lips.

 Guys, I just want to clear that up for any potential confusion.

 I just really like being able to manipulate the shape of my lips, but I'm in no way,

 like, there's absolutely nothing I can do to make my lips look less fuller than they already are.

 And then on top of that, I used another lip color, also from Pretty Zombie, and it's called Three Riches.

 If you enjoyed today's tutorial, go ahead and give this video a thumbs up.

 And also thumbs up if you want to see more Black Radiance eyeshadow palette makeup tutorials.

 Maybe I can work on doing some of that with the other palettes that I have.

 Now that we've made our osso bucco, we need the perfect dish to go with it and that would be

 of course, two shallots chopped up, some saffron threads, one cup of low sodium

 chicken broth diluted with one can of water when we put it in the pan, some dry

 white wine, Italian of course, one cup of canaroli rice and some parmigiano and

 I think we're ready to add our shallots which have been finely chopped.

 This is a dry white wine and it adds that great acetic component that we're

 after the rice or the main flavor component of this dish and that's the

 saffron and saffron is very expensive but you do not have to use much and what

 add it to the broth but I feel like if the rice doesn't take all the broth then

 you've wasted some of that really expensive spice and I don't want to ever

 do that so I just add it right to the cooking liquid in the rice.

 turn off the heat before you add the cheese and grate it over the top.

 we'll take our big yummy piece of osso bucco, hit it with some parsley and it

 Welcome to this video where we'll be doing the initial setup of a MAG-8000 Lawnmower

 Now just for your reference, everything we'll be starting with today will be in the operator's

 The first thing we have to do is take the grit guard off, which is simply loosening

 We do that because we have a transport bolt inside the unit, which keeps the internals

 Now currently we have the rounded work table for mulching blades set in the machine already,

 But before we get to that, we have the crank handle that needs to be mounted.

 And you simply push that down, and there is a set screw and you'll want to align the flat

 That will give us our adjustment for raising and lowering the wheel.

 This spacer is only used for gathering up the extra distance with a half inch wide wheel.

 Now it is a left handed thread and I'll take now the spanner wrench and place it in the

 And I'll simply hold the wheel with a gloved hand and lightly snug it.

 Now we do that because every time the machine is turned on it's tightening that nut as well.

 And due to the nature of grinding wheels, we don't want to over torque a grinding wheel

 The arbor wrench is really best used for taking off very stubborn wheels or when it's

 So once we've got that on, we'll place the grit guard back on the machine.

 So when you're doing this, watch on both sides that they are locking in.

 And then simply put a little pressure on with pushing here and tighten the knob.

 And then we would adjust the grinding wheel to the desired angle and you'd be ready to

 Now we'll take that back off and we'll set up the machine for doing a conventional blade

 And as I mentioned before, now we only need the arbor nut itself.

 And then again, hold the grinding wheel and just lightly snug it.

 All right, now that we've mounted the one inch wide grinding wheel, we'll place the

 Because lining up those tabs, of course, engages the lexan portion of the guard with the steel

 Now that we have the one inch wide grinding wheel on, we'll need to change the mulching

 And I'll step over on this side here to hopefully give a little bit better view.

 The spanner wrench has a 12 point hex wrench laser cut in the end to loosen the work table

 And we'll take the flat work table insert and slide that in its place.

 And then you'd use the crank to then again adjust the desired cutting edge angle.

 I actually use it on my skin and my hair, so if you guys would like to see how it's

If you aren't, follow me on Instagram, Blogspot, Twitter, and Snapchat.

 It's all LengieWiz here, and I'll see you guys in the next video.

 So first things first, you'll need a big glass bowl, a spoon, a measuring cup, a mixer, or

 a ninja will do, a glass container to store your buttercream, your oil of choice, raw

Next you're going to take one cup of your coconut oil or your oil of choice

Please make sure you have a big glass bowl because look what happened.

 At first, yes, it will be lumpy, but then it turns into a nice whipped cream.

 Next, if you don't have an icing bag, you can take a Ziploc bag, put the buttercream in it,

 cut a little hole on the corner of the Ziploc, and then squeeze it into your glass jar.

 Shake the glass jar and then you can keep filling it up with your buttercream.

 You can also tie a ribbon around your jar and it makes a perfect gift for friends.

 Be sure to like, comment, and subscribe and I'll see you guys in the next video.

 Hi everyone and welcome to Steve's kitchen and a smoothie Tuesday where we're going to

 Passion fruits are in season at the moment, bananas are pretty much always in the supermarket

 Okay guys I really love passion fruits, you can get these tins of passion fruit juice

 and they work fine but if passion fruits are in season use fresh.

 So we're just going to cut these passion fruits in half and you'll see inside you've

 got this beautiful passion fruit pulp and I'm just going to use a teaspoon and just

 draw that out into a little bowl or a glass, comes out really very easily.

 Now I've put the juice of two passion fruits into one little ramekin here and I'm going

 to put a third one in separately, this one's going to be for decorating the smoothie.

 Now some people say take the pips out, blend it down but if you love passion fruits you

 Now this smoothie starts with a base of a couple of scoops of ice cream and just use

 plain vanilla ice cream, then I'm going to add two chopped up bananas and they're not

 frozen bananas they're just fresh bananas and I'm going to add a cup of ice and then

 Now we're not putting our passion fruit in yet, we're going to blitz this up for about

 So you can see now we've got this lovely banana smoothie basically but we're going to add

 the passion fruit pulp, this is two-thirds of our passion fruit pulp into the mix and

 we're just going to blitz this for less than maybe a few seconds, really just mixing that

 Okay and we're going to pour this smoothie into our glasses, I've got two glasses, it'll

 easily make two maybe even three and by only blitzing that passion fruit briefly we've

 Okay so we're just taking that passion fruit that we kept back and we're just sort of drizzling

 it into the passion fruit juice, it'll sink but that's okay and there you have our passion

 fruit and banana smoothies, these are going to taste delicious, I can smell them even

 So come on here goes guys, let's try this passion fruit and banana smoothie, that is

 absolutely delicious, you've got to try this one, get some passion fruits whether you've

 got to buy them in a tin or if they're fresh in the supermarkets now, give them a try.

 I will see you next week for another smoothie Tuesday, be good, subscribe, comments down

 Okay, I'm going to try and glue my 8 scale buggy tires with this tire jig that I borrowed

 And the tire has already been cleaned, the rim has been cleaned, the foam is inside,

 So I'm going to put it on the jig, put the lid down, lock it in place.

 Now the tire peels away from the bead, got some tire glue, and I'm just going to put

 And I have time to work this so I just take my time and make sure I don't put too much

 And the glue just runs and just bleeds into the other part of the glue so it's still going

 Now I take a look around, rub that one in a little bit, and that all looks really good.

 And I can just release it and I'm going to just let the glue really work in there.

 I'm going to make sure the tire's pressed real good against the rim.

 I'm going to get my tire rubber band, wrap it around the outside, make sure that the

 And these bands, which I've used numerous times already, don't seem to have that much

 So I'm going to put one of my other tire bands on here that are actually for Truggy tires,

 but between the two of them, they've got enough pressure to squeeze the tire.

 And then I just adjust it all the way around, make sure it's high up on the tire.

 Now as you can see, the band is pushing the tire to the rim like that.

 I'm going to get my paper towel, take the tire off the jig and just wipe away all this

 excess glue, because yeah, I did use way too much glue on this.

 And then I can just put it to the side with these other tires and let it dry.

 Hi guys, today I'm going to be making up some Larry the Cable Guy beer bread.

 Now when I first found this online I thought it was a joke and so I thought okay well I'll get a

 box I'll make up a really funny video and everybody will go haha and enjoy the video.

 I got two boxes and my wife needed to bring something to a ladies gathering she was going to

 so she made up one of the boxes and brought it home that night and it was almost gone.

It's supposed to be set at 375 but we're going to set ours at 350

 and she's going to soften the butter a little bit in the microwave.

 Okay because we don't have a 12 ounce can of beer or 12 ounce beer period

 All right we take our Larry the Cable Guy beer bread mix and we pour it into our mixing bowl.

Okay we're going to take 12 ounces of the beer and pour it into our mix.

So we just want to mix that until you can't see the dry ingredients on the bottom.

 Okay we're going to take our melted butter and pour it over our beer bread mix.

 because of our stupid oven we only put it in for about 40 minutes.

 All right here's the finished product Larry the Cable Guy Beer Bread.

So I'll put the links down below so you can grab some of this beer bread.

 other mixes and he's got spices and potato chips and all kinds of stuff.

 Last week I was introduced to these really cool color bursts by Ken Oliver and I showed

 Today we're going to use a white embossed resist technique with these color bursts.

 I'm going to show you several different ways that I use this with different stamp sets

 and then I'm going to show you some results with other mediums.

 So I do have some bister on the way and they come in little pots so you can scoop it out

 with a little paintbrush or toothpick I guess, but I'll be playing with those as soon as

 This one is using a stamp set by the Tawn and I love the little details in here and

 how the ink kind of gets trapped inside the little details and makes these really cool

 So this is a really fun one and then these two are actually the same, but they're different.

 So I used this butterfly stamp and I did white embossing on this one and then this one came

 I used this Ranger Frosted Crystal embossing powder and it is very different than regular

 It's kind of like that color seeped through the embossing powder.

 I can't really explain it very well, but it gives kind of a batik tie-dye look to me.

 I'm using this doily set by Waffle Flower and I've already stamped my images and I've

 One, we are going to spray it down first and then we're going to take our colors.

 You can squeeze or you can tap the color out onto the cardstock.

 I know some of you like the spotted looks and some of you like a little more water colored

 Then you can just let it dry like this or you can move the ink around.

 One thing that's really cool is see how this is moving along the edge of that embossed

 You can even do one color on the inside of the doily and one color on the outside.

 I know those of you that like the spotty look are cringing right now that I'm making this

 a whole water colored background, but it's whatever makes you happy.

 I have purple in the inside of the doilies and I'm going to do blue outside.

 You can see this one is the one where I sprayed and then I added the color on top and I moved

 Then I didn't move it around and I left these speckly pieces on there.

 You can play and have an awesome time and get really cool results with this product.

 I've had people ask me can you use other products like ink or paint to get a similar look.

 You can't really achieve this speckled look, but you can get the watercolored background.

 Here is a piece that I did with the Color Burst and this one I did a couple weeks ago

 Similar look, but this is a really fun, cool product to play with.

 Today we're going to do a new twist on an old favorite for breakfast.

 The first thing that I'm going to do is I'm going to take a slice of chicken or turkey breast

 I've put a shallow amount of water in this pan and brought it to a boil,

 These are now cooked, so I'm going to turn that off and take them off the ring.

 I am going to use my grill to grill one portobello mushroom cap,

 I'm also going to add some of the Southwest Chipotle sauce that I made on day 10.

 If you're not that into hot stuff, you can leave the Chipotle sauce out.

 Beth lives in Hawaii and she has a cooking and crafting channel here on YouTube.

 It's National Honey Month and so she's making a honey apple cake and I'm making a honey

 She lives in Hawaii and we met each other at a YouTube gathering in Nashville, Tennessee.

 So I got to meet her and we went out to dinner together and she is just awesome.

 So I'll give a link in the video and in the description to her channel and go and subscribe

 I put honey in there and my pineapple rings and my maraschino cherries.

 I have 3 eggs in there and 3 fourths cup of buttermilk and mix this together.

 Next I'm going to take 1 3 fourths cup of regular flour, all purpose flour there, 1

 fourth cup of cornmeal, a teaspoon of baking powder, and a half a teaspoon of baking soda.

 And I'm going to use a teaspoon of salt, kosher salt, and just mix all this up.

 Next I'm going to take 1 1 3rd cups of sugar and 6 ounces of butter.

 And just do it 2 more times until you use up all the flour and the egg and buttermilk.

 I left this piece of aluminum foil on here because at 35 minutes I put that piece of

 foil over the cake in the oven so that it wouldn't brown too much.

 And every few minutes I'm going to check and see if the pan will come off.

 It took about 10 minutes and I was able to lift that cake pan right off.

 A link where you can click on and go see Beth's Honey Apple Cake.

 If you're in a pinch having some people over and you want to make something other than just salsa,

 I absolutely love hummus, but the thing is you don't usually make it homemade all that often.

 roast your own red peppers if you want, but this is kind of a speed scratch method that I like.

 I come into the afternoon and I pour like this Rejuvenac which is the liquid that the

 rice has been soaking in and it's very rich in nutrients including like enzymes and vitamins.

 I drink it like and it's also like I'm great like if you make like a breakfast shakes you

 know it's really it's great to mix in that you know but I generally you know I drink

 And I pour the rice in here and I get some some filtered water you know but you know

 And make sure you know that I have like both burners off in the section.

 So if I turn on the wrong one you know like it wouldn't be that big of a deal.

 I add enough water you know that you know it's about like two centimeters high.

 And I turn on the fan you know whenever there's a little bit of residue on the burner.

 And when it starts to boil like I add some of these like homemade like beans that I made

 you know with the whole thing you know like yeah you know like and it is you know like

 one example of beans that I made like of which I did a video on like last year.

 So like when it boils like I will add to it like I love using a cast iron pot for this

 And then and I come this is more like my typical lunch and the sweet brown rice is available

 Yeah you know like I only cook with the brown rices which is basically it's like a whole grain.

 Yeah because you know there's so many nutrients like missing in white rice and any of the

 Urban Decay eyeshadows are the bomb and you'll see exactly why in this Cheshire Cat tutorial made just for you.

 Then use Urban Decay Primer Potion to set the bases for your eyeshadows, making them last longer and making them more pigmented.

 Use Urban Decay X, this is the yellow color of the Cheshire Cat's eyes, all over the lid.

 Then using Queen or Last Call from the Alice in Wonderland palette, use your finger to dab the outer corners of your eyes to give your eyes depth and dimension.

 Then using Underland or Flash and a blending brush like the MAC 224, sweep along your crease.

 Then using Urban Decay's 24-7 liner in Rockstar, line your lash line and your waterline and the inner corner of your eyes.

 Using Underland again with a lip brush, line the liner and set it with a purple eyeshadow.

 Using Queen and your finger, dab the outer corners to give the look a more fuchsia look.

 Using a 24-7 liner in Covet, line the waterline and the tightline.

 Coat your lashes with Urban Decay's Skyscraper mascara or any mascara you like.

 Apply a pale pinkish purple lipstick, this is Shiseido's PK421.

 Then apply pink gloss, this is Shiseido's From Spring Summer Collection PK406.

 Then apply a plum colored blush, this is MAC's Blush Baby on your cheeks.

 Hey guys, everybody asks how do you feel those squirrel dudes and those Kongs and the Chewys?

 So get either dehydrated beef liver, chicken liver, and use up all your treats.

 And then I'm going to put it inside one of these little squirrels.

 If you need to measure this out and see if this is a partial or a whole meal for your

 If you're going to use peanut butter, which is fine, which is great, let's save that for

 So this is how much peanut butter I would put on top of this little Kong.

 Right, so I just want to keep it so the kibble doesn't fall out.

 I'm going to take this, voila, into the freezer until it's completely frozen.

 But the nice thing about the Squirrel Dude is they have these little prongs so that kibble's

 It's going to be a little harder for them to get that kibble out.

 So this time I'm going to take a little kibble and I'm just going to push it in there.

 So when I put this down for our tester, she has success right off the bat.

 She will stay preoccupied with this for as long as it is filled.

 In this video I'm going to show you the products that I used and how I mixed two colors together,

 but I just really quickly wanted to talk about the color with you and give you some tips

 So what I did is I mixed the salmon and I also mixed the neon, sorry it's called blood

 So pink and orange together, when you put those together you're going to get kind of

 So what I've been doing, because the color fades pretty fast, I wash my hair often.

 So I've started doing it where I leave it in a little bit longer and I let it go really

 So I'll show you a picture of it really bright after I finish talking so you can see just

 the different variations that you can get through the same color.

 If you're somebody that wears a lot of wash and go's and you want to do this color, keep

 in mind you're probably going to have to do it often because it does fade pretty fast.

 I would say it fades probably completely out in two weeks but fades like 50% in a few days.

 If you like the kind of pastel color you'll get there really fast with these colors.

 Now if you want to dilute the color when you get it, you can use conditioner.

 I did that my first time and I was able to get a lighter color that wasn't too too vibrant.

 However, it's a lot of conditioner when you're trying to rinse out your hair and I found

 I kept rinsing and rinsing and it just felt like so much conditioner.

 So you can actually purchase a color diluter and it's going to be sold right beside the

 In my hair right now, if you notice that it's longer, I'm wearing clip in extensions.

 I've actually made these extensions and did a tutorial so I'll put that link in the description

 bar but I just wanted you to know that obviously it's going to be more vibrant if you're putting

 If you are familiar with my channel, I already have blonde in the front and the tips were

 If you have brown hair, black hair, I am not absolutely certain what the result will be

 although I have seen pictures of girls using the same product, using a purple color and

 It kind of just gives you like a purple rinse or sheen like when you're in the sun and stuff.

 I'm not as positive how this would turn out on the darker colors because everywhere that

 What I like to do is as it fades, sometimes I will just mix up a little bit and just take

 out little pieces and just add different pieces almost like you would with highlights.

 You just kind of, it's almost like a, I wanted to say like a toothpaste sort of tube, which

 I'll cover my head with a cap and then I will just wash it out.

 So I really like that you can play with the colors, mix up the colors.

 Sometimes I'll add a little bit more orange and then I'll end up with a more of a strawberry

 Now if you're trying to go for the coral color, you'll see in the video when I mix it, I definitely

 use a lot more of the salmon and then just a touch of the orange to get this sort of

 If you enjoy this video, definitely give it a thumbs up and subscribe for more videos

 and we'll just get started and I'll include some pictures at the end.

 So here's a look at the four products that I used to achieve my color.

 For the first product that I used, it was the salmon semi-permanent and it's a hair

 cream and then I added some of the blood orange and then the clear semi-permanent shade diluter.

 So first you're going to see me start off using the salmon color and because this is

 the majority of the tone, which is more of like on the pink side, I used almost all,

 Now if you have a lot of hair, you're probably going to need several tubes for each color,

 but as you probably can see, I don't have a lot of hair and I don't have thick hair,

 And then because I wanted a coral base, I then added a bit of the blood orange and I

 And because I didn't want the tone to be too bright and I wanted it to have a little bit

 of a softness to it once it toned down a bit, I added the diluter in order to make the color

 And as I mentioned, you can do this with a conditioner instead if you don't want to get

 the diluter and you don't have it, you can just use a conditioner and mix it until the

 color gets a little bit lighter and then you can apply it to your hair.

 As you can see, it's really light faded, sort of, almost like a peachy tone.

 And it's still a pretty color, but for the sake of the video, I wanted to touch it up

 The color really shows up best on my blonde pieces, so I'm not too worried if it gets

 And then after I shampoo it out, I finish with an after color treatment and this helps

 If you don't like how bright it is, you can wash it again and it will fade with each wash

 And I'll finish up with some pictures showing you how the color really changes depending

 on how you mix the color, if you add a little bit more orange or just keep it with the salmon

 Okay, so definitely give it a thumbs up if you enjoyed it and I will see you guys in

 Today we're going to make cheesesteak sandwiches using sirloin steak, peppers and onions, mushrooms,

 Here we have two sirloin steaks which happen to be my all time favorite steaks.

 They're beefy, they're lean yet juicy, and it's a lot of bang for the buck, or in this

 A typical cheesesteak is made with shaved rib eye that's paper thin, but today since

 we're using a leaner sirloin steak, we're going to cut these into about quarter inch

 This way you can quickly cook them and they still have a lot of moisture and they're very

 I like sautéed peppers, onions, and mushrooms on my cheesesteaks, so we're going to start

 off with a hot cast iron pan, a little olive oil, yellow onion, and green bell pepper,

 Now I'm going to add a small can of chopped up portobello mushrooms, and then sauté this

 Once the peppers, onions, and mushrooms are done, add a little extra oil to the pan, and

 You do not want to overcrowd the pan, spread out the meat evenly so you can get a nice

 Now give the meat a quick toss in the pan, and it's almost done for me.

 If you want to cook it a little bit longer, you can, but I'm going to try to get this

 Now during the last 30 seconds of cooking, add your peppers, onions, and mushrooms.

 Now pile the piping hot meat and vegetables onto a toasted hoagie roll that's been slathered

 with mayonnaise, and then top with three pieces of provolone cheese.

 And there you have it, the leanest, juiciest, beefiest, and most delicious cheesesteak sandwich

 Then you'll make a valley fold along the diagonal as we're showing here.

 Next you'll take the left corner and fold it up to the top of the piece as

 Now unfold those last two folds and fold the left edge to that crease line

 Now we'll bring these two sides together, these two facets together.

 Five of them if you want to make a kusudama ball with six units.

 So we're just going to apply glue to both faces of each of the modules.

 And again you need to get your fingers inside to press the two sides together

 But crucial amongst this is to get really good chocolate with at least 70% cocoa solids

 I'm going to start by cutting the butter and creaming it with sugar.

 Be sure to leave the butter out of the fridge because it really does make it easier to mix.

 This has got to be one of the simplest and tastiest and most popular recipes.

 It has got quite a high sugar content, but I hope you'll agree that it really is worth

 You can use a machine here, but I actually like doing it by hand.

 And this takes quite an effort, but really it's part of the ritual.

 This is a great recipe to involve children with, particularly at the beating stages.

 But watch out for those little fingers that keep getting into the mixture and eating it

 Mix in the chocolate thoroughly so all the ingredients are completely blended.

 This is when you really begin to get a feel of the mouth-watering delight that will follow

 Walnuts are an essential part of any brownie, whatever it's made with.

 I'm going to spread the mixture into a square tin that's been lined with baking paper.

 I've left it to cool and I'm cutting it into 5cm squares for serving.

 I would be ready to bake again, for it certainly won't last long.

 For that recipe I am using 5 eggs but I have separated that to 5 egg yolks and 5 egg whites.

 So I have 80 grams of plain flour, 1 gram baking soda and 1 gram baking powder and I

 In another bowl I have 20 grams sugar, pinch of salt, a drop of vinegar, 25 grams cocoa

 To start this recipe, add the cocoa powder into a mixing bowl and into that add 100 ml

 Into the cocoa mix I am going to add the 1 gram baking soda and 20 grams sugar and then

 After mixing the cocoa add the egg yolks into that and mix it really well and leave

 So I added the egg whites into a mixing bowl and make sure the mixing bowl is very clean

 when you work with egg whites and add the sugar and whisk this until it comes to a soft

 Into the egg whites add the drop of vinegar or cream of tartar and start whisking it.

 Now into the plain flour add the baking powder and mix that into the cocoa powder and mix

 Before mixing the flour slowly add the mix into the egg whites.

 I greased one 8 inch baking tray around cake pan and into that going to add the mix and

 bake this on 150 C about 40-50 minutes or until a skiver goes through and comes out

 Take it out and leave it in the pan about 5 minutes then it shrinks a little bit.

 So I cut one piece to show you how soft it is and leave it to cool down on wire racks.

 Today I want to show you how to make Danish rice pudding or Risselemang as we say in Denmark.

 The porridge needs to cook for 40 minutes and it's important that you remember to stir

 You need to remove the skin from the almonds so then you boil them in a bit of water.

 When you chop the almonds it's important that you remember to save one whole almond.

 We got a tradition here in Denmark that the person who gets the almond in the pudding

 Now the porridge is curled so we are ready to mix it all together.

 It's important that you stir carefully when you turn it around.

 I am going to do a tutorial on how to do a simple egg conditioner.

So what you're going to be using for this recipe are two egg yolks and a teaspoon

 Now what we're going to do is we're going to apply the product into the hair.

 it just makes the application much more easier and you can get into your scalp and all that.

 doing now is she is applying it in sections starting at the scalp.

 sure that you get even distribution of the egg yolk in your hair.

 at the scalp and then work your way to the rest of the hair using your brush or you can

I mean, it doesn't really matter as long as whatever is easier for you.

 So what you're going to do now is you're going to leave this in your hair for approximately

So thank you once again for watching and please remember to subscribe

 Hey beautiful babes and welcome back into my channel Beauty by Sweet Angel.

 I am Sweet Angel and I want to welcome you in if this is your very first time.

 Listen, today I wanted to talk about highlighting and contouring for a more, let's say, how

 Now I'm 51 now and I do still love to wear makeup and I love for it to be poppin' just

 But there are some do's and don'ts that you can do with older skin.

 So today I'm going to show you how I highlight and contour my face.

 So if you're interested in my highlighting and contouring, please stay tuned.

 I'm actually not going to go real fancy, not expensive, just keep it really simple.

 Today what I'm going to use to highlight and contour my face is the City Colors Contour

 I'll have all the information linked below along with the price of this palette.

 And if you would, just check it out and see how I highlight with this palette.

 Now this palette contains ... there's no mirror, but it actually gives you instructions on

 Now I'm not going to follow this to a T because I do my own way of contouring.

 What you see is a highlighting shade, you have a bronzing shade, and a contour shade.

 You know it's normally not this color, so you know I've been using it quite a lot.

 So that double chin, hmm, let's just make it our friend right now, okay?

 Also going to put that color onto my nose, pop it on right here.

 Just bringing in some color to the face, making it look real healthy here.

 Okay, now that we've done that, I actually love to go ahead and highlight next.

 This is an elf stipple brush, so I'm just going to use this to highlight.

 I'm going to dip it right into my highlight shade and very lightly because I don't want

 And I'll pop a little right here on my eyebrows just again, giving that healthy glow.

 So now we're actually going to take back that F40 brush from Sigma and we're going to go

 That's a really deep shade, so we don't want to go too deep with it.

 This one is in Pampered and we're going to pop this on our cheeks.

 You don't have to go shopping for very expensive contour palettes.

 Something just as simple as this little City Color Contour Palette here can do the job.

 As you can see, I've enjoyed loving it because I've actually hit pan on that bronzing shade.

 Because it's one that I use and I actually do it most times just every day.

 Now we'll be talking about more highlighting and bronzing as it goes along and also contouring

 Every woman wants to look like, you know, she's got that healthy glow or healthy tan

 How to highlight, contour, and bronze your face, it's really up to you.

 But just keep it more simple, more natural, not too deep, and I promise you, you'll be

 I'm your girl, Sweet Angel, and thanks so much for joining me one more time with Beauty

 Don't forget to like, comment, subscribe, and share me with your world.

 I'm going to show you how to wax your snowboard and get it ready to hit the splits.

 Any wax will work as long as it's snowboard wax and not surf wax because you want to slide on the snow.

 You don't want to be stuck to your board like you would for a surfboard.

 For the edge, we're going to use a pocket edge tool called the One Ball Jet.

 You don't want to put newspaper down because when you're taking the wax off, it's going to make a mess.

 First, how you're going to do the edge of the board is you're going to take the pocket edge tool

 and you're going to look to make sure it's on the 90 degree angle side.

 You're going to set the board on your lap and take the tool and you're going to set it down and rub down.

 You're going to want to make sure you're getting the edge and the bottom of the board so that it's hitting both sides.

 You're going to want to repeat this on both sides of the board so they're smooth and there's no rust on them.

 Then, you're going to want to take the wax and you're going to want to make sure that you make your board warm, but you don't want to make it hot.

 You're going to rub the wax down so that it melts onto the board.

 Then, you're going to want to move down the board so that the whole board has some of the wax on it.

 Then, once your whole board is waxed on it and it's dry, you're going to want to take your metal scraper.

 When you're using your metal scraper, you're going to want to try to get the entire length of the board so it comes off very smoothly and isn't rough.

 So today we're going to talk about a granny stripe afghan or crochet blanket or throw

 I did my stripes in a pattern but you can do them in whatever format that you want to

 But for the actual pattern I thought I'd show you a quick video of how to do it because

 sometimes for me it's a little tricky to try and read a pattern and it's just easier to

 What we're going to do is called a double crochet and it's a cluster, three double crochets

 So you loop over your yarn and then you're going to go in this hole right here so you

 Grab the yarn through and then pull it through the first two and then the next two.

 So the second time, through, pull through, pull through, and then one more time, through,

 And then all you're going to do for the granny stitch pattern is you create a cluster inside

 each one of these holes which is essentially in between the clusters that were done before.

 So if you look at this blanket you can tell here's a cluster and here's a cluster and

 And the clusters are just three double crochets going on down the row.

 Okay so it's really easy as I've shown you before to do your three double crochet clusters

 But I wanted to show you what you do when you first start the blanket.

 What you're going to do is chain, which is a chain stitch a row as long as you want the

 Okay so obviously we would want the blanket longer but we're going to go ahead and start

 And then you're going to chunk these together in groups of three.

 So you're like trying to see the stitches and maybe one, two, three.

 And by skipping the three stitches, it left that hole which are the holes in the blanket

 So when you come back and do the line on top of this, you'll just go in that hole.

 You won't have to go inside stitches which makes it a really fun and simple blanket to

 Applique embroidery uses fabric instead of stitches to fill in parts of the design.

 You may have worked with an applique design that uses one piece of fabric.

 In this demonstration, I'll show you how to embroider an applique design that uses not

 All applique designs from Embroidery Library come with dye line files.

 We use these dye lines to cut the fabric and stabilizer to the right size and shape.

 Look at the printout and see which sections require fabric pieces.

 In this design, fabric is needed for the four flowers and the vase.

 Spray a piece of cutaway stabilizer with temporary adhesive and put your applique fabric on top.

 A template is a printout of the design and it's a handy way for me to plan where to stitch

 Hoop the towel with a piece of cutaway stabilizer and line up the marks on the towel with the

 When the outline of the vase has finished, add a little bit of spray adhesive on the

 back of the fabric piece and place it right in that stitched outline.

 After you've finished embroidering, trim the excess cutaway stabilizer away from the back

 Pick your favorite fabric colors and prints and give it a unique look.

 Thanks for watching today and visit our website at www.emblibrary.com.

 You may know me from television, projects in books, magazines, and DVDs, and I'm also

 honored to be a Create Your Style with Swarovski Elements ambassador.

 I want to talk to you about the style and complete simplicity of making stretchy jewelry

 Elasticity comes in clear and black in three different thicknesses.

 It comes as thick as 1mm, then it goes to .8mm, and a slimmer .5mm.

 And you're going to want to choose the thin or thicker depending on the weight of your

 Now you can see there's a whole assortment of different things that you can make, including

 A lot of people know that I wear rings on the shows that I do, and they say, do you

 If you can string and tie a knot, you can make a really cool and stylish stretchy bracelet.

 You might want to put a little clip or a stop or something on the end so you don't lose

 And then of course, you would fill this to size around your wrist.

 And then when you come back, as if you're making a square knot, you're going to take

 Now of course, you're going to make sure when you pull this that you have pulled your beads

 So when you have a bracelet, the knot's going to be pretty obscured.

 If you have really cool slider or spacer beads like this, you can do it.

 And actually, one of the tricks to making this really clean and having your craft clean

 to keeping the stretchy bracelet looking very high end is to hide your knots.

 So you can bring them inside a bead, or if you have large beads, in this bracelet, you

 And to make sure that it's really secure, I strongly recommend that you use bead stringing

 Beadalands bead stringing glue has this really precise needle tip.

 You can see the little needle, I'm not going to pull it all the way out.

 So you can get this right, just a little dab, right onto the knot before you pull it into

 the bead, and give it about four or five hours to really fully dry and make sure that your

 You can have three strands, two strands, it holds up to crystals, Swarovski crystals,

 different metal beads, wooden beads, and of course, you want as many as you can fit on,

 We have a 1.8 liter front wheel drive Nissan and we're going to go through the steps to

 Before performing a cooling system repair, it is recommended to flush the cooling system

 With the engine flushed and fully drained, disconnect the negative battery cable before

 Loosen the four water pump pulley bolts and the upper power steering bolt and tensioner.

 For ease of access, we'll remove the right front tire and lower splash shield.

 Loosen the lower power steering bolt and remove the drive belt.

 To gain access to the water pump retaining bolts, loosen the alternator belt tensioner

 Remove the seven water pump retaining bolts and remove the water pump.

 Before reinstalling the new water pump, thoroughly clean the gasket surface area.

 If using a silicone based type sealant, only lightly apply it to the gasket surface areas,

 It's not necessary, but it's also a good idea to apply a small amount of anti-seize to the

 Install the water pump and torque the retaining bolts to 15 foot pounds.

 Install the water pump drive belt and tighten the manufacturer's specs.

 Install the power steering belt and tighten the manufacturer's specifications.

 Tighten the upper power steering bolt and tighten the water pump pulley bolts to 60

 We'll now reinstall the coolant recovery tank that we removed during the flush procedure.

 Fill the system with a 50-50 blend of distilled water and coolant.

 this spherification, or molecular gastronomy, the over popular term to describe playing

Originally I was interested in this process they call spherification, where you

 make an alginate shell around fluids, and you end up with sort of like a grape, kind

 different common food additive chemicals that probably in the food industry are totally

But it's hard for individuals to get, so these guys put it all in a kit,

 first attempt was to go with what they consider the normal spherification route, where you

 mix sodium alginate with the substance that you want to put inside this capsule, and then

 you mix up a solution of calcium chloride in water, and you drip the sodium alginate

 solution into the calcium chloride, and what happens is as the droplets fall through the

 already so that when you add the sodium alginate to the cherries, it starts gelling up already,

 and really the gelling should wait until we're dripping it into the calcium chloride solution.

 the two ingredients, and so make a sodium alginate solution, and then drip the contents

 by making the sodium alginate solution, and I got about 500 milliliters of water, and

 added 2.5 grams of sodium alginate, and then mixed it up with an immersion blender.

 this actually mixes it really quickly, but it also introduces lots of air bubbles.

 I then degassed it by putting small amounts in an Erlenmeyer flask and then applying vacuum.

 I had to do this in batches because the solution foamed up so incredibly that it would have

I then mixed up about 100 grams of maraschino puree, just by taking

 some cherries out and mixing it with a little bit of the sugar water that comes with the

 cherries, and added to it about 2.5 grams of not calcium chloride, but actually calcium

So I guess the reason that you don't use straight up calcium chloride

 when you're doing this so-called reverse spherification is that the calcium chloride might flavor your

 product a little bit, and since there will be so much more of it in the final product,

 into a syringe and dripped the puree into the sodium alginate solution, and lo and behold,

 spheres touch each other, they continue gelling and they'll stick together.

 up with here is kind of like a mat of little spheres connected together.

 But the thing is, with this reverse spherification method, they do stick together in the bath.

 So the best thing to do would be to make just a few, like so that they aren't clumping up

 on the bottom of the container, and then taking them out and rinsing them in water to prevent

 future, but there's over a dozen chemicals in the bag over there, so I've got plenty

As soon as you bite on it, the thing bursts apart and you just have a bunch

 of maraschino cherry puree in your mouth, which is pretty good.

 can adjust the skin thickness by how long the droplet of puree sits in the alginate

 We don't like discussing it, which is amazing that I'm discussing it with you guys now,

 I'm going to do a video on how to care for your natural hair when it's under a weave.

 A lot of times when people put in weave, they think, okay, my hair is taking a break.

 You still have to take care of your natural hair when it is in a weave.

 I'm going to talk about how to care for all this hair that is under here.

 The front part of my hair right here, where my leave out is, that's the dirtiest part of my hair

 It is the Herbal Cleanse by Organic Root Stimulator, but I use it differently when I have my braids in.

 When I have my weave in, and people do the same thing with the Witch Hazel.

 I put a little bit, literally, on my fingertips of the product.

 Because the cloth is damp with water, and I'm not just drenching my hair in the product,

 I don't go back through with just water and clean it, but you can.

 If you use a whole lot of it, you definitely want to go back through with water

 But if you want to, you can just rinse it off, go with the fresh end, and go back through.

 I've done this earlier this week, so this is just from the couple of times I've styled my hair since then.

 So your hair will definitely get built up if you're not cleaning it under the weave.

 And I'm actually not going to waste my time, so I am going to go through and do my entire head.

 Okay, so now that my hair is clean, I am going to still lock my hair.

 Just because it's up under here does not mean that I can't get to it and seal it.

 So I'm going to use my oil in this bottle, and I get it with the applicator tip

 because you want to get up in the nooks and crevices and all that stuff you can't reach with anything else.

 Because I only have a little bit left, I am going to show you guys a step that I normally wouldn't do.

 I am going to mix a little bit of water, just a little bit, into this bottle.

 The reason being is because, again, with the applicator tip, I can get more to my hair.

 People go back and forth about wetting your hair under a weave.

 When my hair comes out, it's never stinking, it's never molded, mildewed, it's never jacked up.

 They may tell you, you know, you're not going to get a lot of moisture.

 Again, that's why I use this to wash versus just getting in there and doing it with the shower

 Don't worry about, well, it actually depends on what you're doing.

 If you're about to just chill, go to bed or something, don't worry about how much you're having in there.

 If you're about to go out somewhere, do not drench your hair with this because it will drip down your neck.

 I'm not going out for another hour or so, so I'm drenching my hair.

 Again, there's peppermint oil in here, so I can feel it tingling.

 Make sure you are not missing a spot because your hair needs to be moisturized, your hair and your scalp.

 It's almost like you're rubbing that in, but you are literally massaging your scalp with the palms of your fingers.

 I've heard some people say they like candles, get in the bathtub and do it.

 I'm just doing mine really quick while you guys are right here.

 I probably will do it again later because I like to do it at least 5 minutes to get my blood flowing and to get it all out.

 I like to do it at least 5 minutes to get my blood flowing and to get it all out.

 and we start doing that, y'all get y'all some peppermint oil please.

 Peppermint oil diluted with another oil, the best thing God created.

 Like I said, if you're in your house chilling for a little while and you've used a lot, this is what I do.

 And then I tie my scarf around, just around my edges because, again, I put so much that it starts dripping down my neck.

 While you're doing all that, you're cleaning, moisturizing, and massaging your hair at the same time.

 When you take your weave out, your hair is going to be healthy.

 Your hair is going to have received the same treatment it would have if it were out.

 Okay, this section of the tutorial will show you some of the random strange cases that

 can happen when you're finishing solving the edges with the last one or two of them.

 All edges have been built except for one, and that's this one, where all the right colors

 So you have the center edge and those are two wings, are reversed from each other.

 What that means is, obviously you're not going to peel off the stickers and switch them around.

 Remember when I said the two wings are mirrors of each other, they cannot be interchangeable?

 It's going to take breaking up one of the edges you've already done, but it's not that

 So any random edge you've already done, say the one that's already back here, we're going

 Put it off to the side, replace with a different edge, has to be one that's already done, no

 So now what we're going to do is, find the edge you were originally working with, this

 What you're going to have to do is fix this one first, make this one the priority.

 With the three other edges that are messed up, don't work on any other one except for

 You want to replace it over, so now you see this one matches, this one does not.

 And we'll use the third edge, the one that's not done, the third edge that's screwed up,

 Put it off to the side, use that third edge that's not done to replace.

 So now what that's done is, it has left us with two centers, I mean two edges, sorry,

 And this is another case, in and of itself, that may happen when you're at the edge of

 If you get up to a point where the one that's here needs to go here, and the one that's

 here needs to go here, obviously you can't solve that with any kind of normal move.

 We're going to take this row, the row, if they're here and here, before I get ahead

 of myself, I'm going to take this piece, the one that's flipped.

 If it had been that instead of diagonally this way, they were diagonally this way, then

 But it's here, so we'll move this one up, and then spin the top twice.

 But now, when you solve these edges again, it will be that you will have no more parity

 And, oh, I'm looking at the viewfinder, some colors look the same on the viewfinder.

 You don't necessarily need to follow what I'm doing, I'm doing the exact same thing

 But what that move that I just showed you does, is it screws up a certain number of

 edges that when you solve all the edges again, there will be no more parity problems.

 So now we have all six centers completed, and all twelve edges.

 If I've missed something, please do not hesitate to let me know.

 Because I'm sure there are a lot more things that can come up than I've covered in my videos.

 And the last step would be to solve this exactly as you would a 3x3.

 Hi, in this video I'm going to show you how to make Chinese rice noodles topped

 off with peanut butter, sriracha spicy sauce, hoisin sauce, and sesame seeds.

 rack like the one in the picture so that you can hold up a dish.

 The rice noodles will likely be stuck to each other so make sure you break them

 let this steam for another 30 seconds to a minute so that the peanut butter gets

 a little bit runny and then you can easily mix it all together.

 Hey guys, so I'm going to show you how to play Nilla Way for Top Hat Time.

 Now I'm not the best at actually putting it all together in the song, but I know how to play it.

 more than I actually stumble over the playing because I don't really.

 So I'm going to show you how to play it the way Rhett plays it because I've seen people do covers.

But he plays with bar chords, where some people play with the capo.

 And so the capo is kind of easier, but I'm going to show you the way Rhett plays it

 in the description, like a link to an ultimate guitar like dot com tab website.

So which is a G played on the third fret, but you play it with an E shape.

 So you basically take your A minor fingers down here, your A minor shape.

 And then as soon as you do this, you go to speak and all you do is keep the same exact chord shape

 And if you keep it pressed down, you get that nice slide effect.

 I kind of have a problem with this, but you usually only want to stream or strum these

 And then we do exactly what we did after the first transition from the B minor.

 So we go to that G again and then the A. So there's the same exact ones as before

 with the third fret bar and E shape and then a fifth fret bar and E shape.

 All about half time, big time, break time, lunch time, dinner time.

 And so I don't know the lyrics to that part, so I'm just going to kind of go

 like I'm going to make the humming, but it's the exact same thing each time.

 You know about half time, big time, break time, lunch time, dinner time.

 Keep doing that same thing until you get all the way through those verses.

 And you go straight to the G, so you don't do this B minor, so you just go.

 And so you just stay in that a the whole time for the chorus and you repeat it.

 So he reached in the box and pulled out a nipple with a top hat from inside.

 And literally the rest of the song is just chugging on the minors.

 So if you learned anything from this video, please like it and subscribe.

 If you've never had homemade strawberry syrup, you should definitely give this a try.

 All you need is one cup of sugar, a fourth cup of honey, one cup of water, and a pound

 Pour the water, sugar, and sliced strawberries into a pot and bring to a low boil.

 To prevent the syrup from foaming up too fast, stir often and make sure it doesn't boil too

 When the strawberries begin to fade in color, dip them out and strain any excess syrup back

 Pour in a fourth cup of honey and continue boiling until the mixture has been reduced

 Once the syrup has been reduced, pour into a mason jar, cover, and refrigerate for four

 As always, thanks for stopping by to check out my cooking videos.

 Like, leave a comment, and share with your friends and your family.

 Hi Rachel, so here's that manifesto guide video thing that I thought might help if

 way through so I'm not super super good at it but I can just show you what I

 black keys which is kind of handy so you don't have to get them confused with the

 for the entire song and then let me see here so the melody goes F sharp G sharp

 A sharp to C sharp to F sharp again then we skip this one and go to A sharp and

 then here again and then up to D sharp and then all the way back down like I

 just did and that's kind of a difficult way of describing it because I'm not

 very good at it like that but I don't know the way the way I see it is you

 just take this grouping here you start here and you can kind of just sound it

 out I'll just do it slowly and maybe you can watch and figure it out or just

 so that's the main melody and then the bass notes are really really simple for

 the for I guess the main riff of the song the the bass key is let me think F

 sharp and then it goes to B and that's the change so you can you can add in the

 bass however you want like you can go and then you can do the melody further

 up the keyboard like here like up there which is out of the camera view I know

 but basically it sounds like this so you start in F sharp and you just play that

 yeah so that's basically it um in the song I think the melody and I'm not good

 at this because I didn't practice it all that much so I probably mess up if I try

 really fast but you have you start here where's middle C here's middle C you

 start here with the melody but you also I think this is out of the camera view

 but you're on basically so this is down on that side of the keyboard you'd play

 and that when it's played up here it sounds a little more like the song

 and it gives it a more full tone so basically just play the octaves and it

 just gets tricky with me because it's hard to keep the right distance as

 you're jumping across the notes but um yeah that's basically all of manifesto

 that I know so I hope that helped and I hope to see you again soon because we're

 Today we're going to look at boxing combination 5-2-3, uppercut, cross, hook.

 And we're going to look at why those punches combine well in that order.

 If I'm here with my opponent, off of my cross, which is my, generally it's my entry punch,

 If my cross missed, then my follow-up punch has to, you know, accord with that.

 That tells me whether I follow up my cross with a hook or an uppercut to start off.

 Now some people, when I come in, I come in with a cross, his head is over here, and he

 already knows my hook is coming, so he has his head down and my hook goes over his head.

 Whereas a person like this, once you see him do that once, you're going to bear that

 Where I come in now, I'm here, and his head is off to that side, and now instead of throwing

 Now in an MMA context, once you land a three punch combination, you follow up to the clinch,

 You may expect to knock him out or knock him down, but you don't know ahead of time that's

 So what you do instead is you follow up to the clinch, you take him down.

 So it's a nice thing off of a hook to snatch a single on the same side where you are.

 So from here, we come in, and it's off the cross, it misses because he went to the outside.

 Now he may know that my hook will land before his does, so he comes under, and as he comes

 Off of that hook, you see, it turns him, and I go right to the single off of that.

 Number one, it really pays off to program yourself ahead of time to throw those three

 Tell yourself as you initiate that combination, boom, boom, boom, I'm throwing cross, uppercut,

 That second or third punch is the one that hits him, that actually lands.

 You might bear hug him and trip him, bear hug him and lift him and take him down.

 So we're here, and I come in, boom, boom, he's off to the side, and that uppercut, cross,

 You see, he was reacting to those boxing punches, and that's what gave me the single.

 Or with the bare belt, I slip my head behind, and then I can lift him and take him down.

 Now, talking about why the uppercut and the cross and the hook really combine well.

 If we look at my feet, we can see that my rear heel turns out on the cross, my lead

 So from here, I'm inside, lead heel turns out on the uppercut, cross, hook.

 So with that shift of weight, that is bringing my head a little side to side in relation

 Then, when I throw the cross coming in, now you see I'm looking at whether I'm going

 I threw a short cross because he's close to me and because I want to expedite my next

 And that cross, if it should happen to miss again, if I uppercut and miss with the cross,

 That is really where therein lies the value of that hook, that third punch.

 What often happens in the course of a two or three punch combination, sometimes a four

 punch combination, is that the target, you miss the target on the first punch, the second

 punch, but then you've chased it into a position where it has nowhere to go and that third

You're going to start off with one horizontal line and then you're going

Then you're going to do the top of the lips by doing two more arches that

 to go and create the contour of the lips a little bit more strongly here.

 Then I'm going to come back with my sharpie marker and outline everything else.

 The fun thing about drawing lips is it's a really simple shape.

I'm being ever so careful around the highlights and the edge of the

 What you could do for a fun idea like for Valentine's Day is you could do several of

 these lips and color them in different shades of reds and pinks and purples and put them

 This is probably the most tedious longest part if you're not into coloring.

 You've probably noticed that with a marker it leaves this funny texture look.

 it messed up and just colored around the whole rest of the lips.

 I'm going to go back with my sharpie marker and make the mouth line heavier.

 look at say pictures in magazines or just pictures of anybody, of people, usually the

 I hope you guys enjoyed this video and I hope you have just as much fun drawing this

I've also got another set of cartoon lips I'm going to be featuring

 easier than counting 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9, 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9 over and over again.

There's a dotted quarter note and that's actually on the ride bell.

This, if we're counting 1-enda, 2-enda, 3-enda, is going to be right

 last measure of the second line and this is still counted as triplets.

Now for the third line, it may not be as useful to count these as triplets because

And the fourth line repeats that pattern except on the shoulder of the ride.

 A tip on the dynamics, the snare with the snares off is very soft.

 next thing is the rhythm There is nothing fluttering in this bound of

 Hey everyone, Sarah here with SewingPartsOnline.com and this is episode 6 of our Beginner's Guide

 Now, originally we were going to do hems and elastic all in episode 6, but there is just

 so much to go over and we really want to dive deep into the material, so we are going to

 Episode 6 is going to be all about hems and episode 7 is going to be about attaching elastic.

 Both of these skills really open you up to a whole big world of sewing projects.

 You can do skirts and pants and you can have a really great time and keep yourself really

 In this episode, you'll learn step-by-step instructions for creating a double fold hem,

 a blind hem, and a single turned up hem with some zig-zag edge finishing.

 The hemline, which can be marked with a chalk, pen, or basting stitch, the hem allowance,

 and the raw edge, which is either folded, serged, or sometimes left unfinished.

 Also, the trick to a good hem is a good press, so make sure you have your iron ready when

 A double fold hem, as is in the name, is a raw edge folded over twice into the hem allowance

 This first fold can be as small as a quarter of an inch or as large as the hem itself.

 You can either do this with a pencil, pen, and a seam gauge, and then pin it in place,

 or you can mark the lines with a basting stitch by measuring one quarter of an inch from the

 needle and then sewing along some kind of visual guide, like the inside of the presser

 Now that this is folded over and pressed, I need to mark the hem line 1 inch from this

 I'm going to use my basting stitch method again, I'll just need to create a new seam

 Now sew the whole thing in place with a nice top stitch following close to the fold line.

 Just a note, if you happen to come across a seam as you are hemming, just press the

 seam open, you can use like a finger press, and sew over it as you would normally.

 All that's left is to grab your seam ripper and pull out the basting stitches.

 Be careful not to pull out the actual top stitching that holds the hem in place.

 A blind hem is a little trickier, and you may want to do this by hand as a beginner.

 The goal is to turn up the hem and sew it in place without the top stitch being noticeable.

 I started this just like my double fold hem, by turning the fabric under twice.

 But instead of sewing a straight stitch across, I'm going to use my hand sewing needle to

 I only want to catch a teeny teeny bit of the top weave to tack the hem in place.

 This is especially great for dress pant hems and dress skirt hems.

 Unfortunately this machine doesn't come with a blind hem foot, so we're going to have to

 If you find yourself doing blind hems often, invest in the foot because it's like 5 bucks

 Now fold the hem allowance under so that just a little is popping out.

 I don't know why, but when I first learned this part it always got me really backwards,

 You really have to get proactive here and test your fabric position and where the needle

 If we had our blind hem foot, we would follow this fold with the built in guide, but we

 don't, so we're just going to have to sew very slowly and carefully.

 Now if we were doing this for real, we would use matching thread and you wouldn't be able

 You see this often with surged edges and you can recreate this if you have an overlock

 Unfortunately, this machine doesn't have an overlock stitch, so I'm going to fake it using

 Definitely the easiest hem out there, just not necessarily the prettiest.

 This can be really frustrating because knit fabric can pucker and stretch a bit, but with

 First, replace that universal needle with a ballpoint jersey needle.

 No puckers or slippage, but they can be kind of expensive, so if you don't have one, see

 Loosening that can relieve some of the pressure exerted by the presser foot.

 Try placing tissue paper or a tear-away stabilizer under the fabric as you sew.

 So just pay special attention that you aren't tugging on the fabric as you sew.

 When you're finished, the tissue paper easily rips out without messing up your seams.

 Just a tip, this is also a really great way to tackle other difficult fabrics like chiffon

 As you can see, there are a ton of different ways to hem, so let's look at some of the

 other options you can explore as you continue your sewing journey.

 This is a narrow, rolled hem, especially great for chiffon and other sheer fabrics.

 You can really see the round roll it creates by using a zigzag stitch.

 You can hide raw edges by attaching facing, lace, and even by completely encasing with

 Now we actually have feet on the site that make some of these tasks a little bit easier.

 Like we have a foot to help you do a picot hem, a rolled hem, to help attach binding.

 And as always, if you have any comments or questions, be sure to visit us online at sewingpartsonline.com,

 on Facebook at facebook.com, Twitter at sewingparts, Instagram or Google Plus.

 And be sure to hit that button below to subscribe for more sewing videos.

 And we'll be back next week with episode 7 to learn all about elastic.

 I saw another deer running that direction too bad I've reached my

 shelter I made this in the autumn so debris shelter and I was just wondering

 how it was holding up with the snow my bench which was destroyed a little bit

 this is my firewood it's snowed in a little bit I think I'll be chilling

 inside today I'm gonna sacrifice some wood of my bench I'm gonna use this one

 I'm gonna split it and make some feather sticks and try to make a fire my feet

 are starting to get a little wet I'm just wearing some jogging outfit so what

 you're looking for is a dry some dry wood has to be strong no this is it's

 not rotten and of course you start by just getting off the snow and now I'm

 gonna break it up in smaller pieces so I can split it with with my knife and

 and another stick to pound it on gonna use like a tree to break it easily in

 smaller pieces just like that I'm gonna do a few of those I got my smaller

 pieces now I'm gonna split them clean off some of the snow from the from the

 ground these sticks on just to create a dry surface for my feather sticks so I

 use this one this stick to pound the knife through this one to create smaller

 sticks and to get to the dry inside part of the wood okay I made some feather

 sticks I'm gonna light them got my bushcraft a lighter see how it will

 okay so if you wanna keep the fire burning now I don't have a lot of

 wood prepared but I'm not planning on staying but if I was I would have made a

 lot of smaller sticks out of these just keep cutting them up in like eight

 pieces or something and then you got some wood to feed the fire so I guess

 that's how you make fire in the winter okay I did put some more wood on the

 fire and now I'm I thought I'm gonna show you a little bit more in detail how

 to make a feather stick so you got your wood which were which I split in half

 and I'm gonna rest it on this little wood right here and I'm gonna take my

 knife getting smoked and I'm gonna move my knife down this wood like this to

 this knife isn't as sharp as it should be this is kind of like a feather stick

 it's not the best I've ever made but to show you what the idea is that's how you

 the same soap mixture but I have a variety of ingredients that I plan to be

I have three different essential oil blends that I made for the different

 soaps along with other ingredients and I'll explain more about what each

 gonna go ahead and add it to my warm oils because I want to make sure that

 it's in all three of the different soaps that I'm gonna be making.

 also getting ready to add my sodium hydroxide and water solution.

 give this a quick stir here and let me go ahead and put this aside and tell you

 It's his absolute favorite fragrance of essential oils with patchouli, bergamot

 essential oils and this is organic pureed pumpkin along with organic spices

 including cinnamon and a few other spices and also organic sugar.

 essential oil here has a few different essential oils and I'll tell you more

 about them when you watch the soap later on in the video and it has a

 this in the Biker Bar and I have juniper berries that I'll be using to top one of

 While I place the final juniper berries on this soap I want to thank you again

 for watching me make these soaps, two of which are new to celebrate the upcoming

And stay tuned because a new video will be posted soon to show you

 is going to go on the you know he's on the g string and a fourth fret

 middle finger so the same position they were there which is described

 of the g string about me on the uh... the b string to the third fret of the

 and make sure that my index finger is back in its original position

 as long as it's in the key of e you should be just all set to go and add

 uh... the way the song goes or the riff goes just by changing the cadence and

 Probably get pissed when it runs out, go to the store and buy a new one.

 I'm going to pause for a second while I get the adapter on the tank.

 Put your little tank on that we're just putting in the freezer.

 hello namaste salaamwalekum satsriyakaal, welcome back to another session with

 in India chow mein was introduced by the Chinese who settled in Calcutta and now

 it is popular all over the country in US sometimes it is called chow mein

 sometimes it's called lo mein sometimes they call the fried noodles as chow mein

 I'm going to use this homemade noodles to make this chow mein because the

 homemade noodles are the tastiest and once you make it homemade you will never

 use a store-made whenever I make any Chinese dishes I love to you know add my

 sauces first because that way I don't add too many too much of any of the

 sauce and spoil my dish so here I've taken some stock you can use chicken

 stock if you are eating meat but today I'm making vegetarian so I'm using

 vegetable stock even if you don't have stock you can just mix it with little

 water also is fine, add one small teaspoon of sugar you know salt add

 little less because there's going to be salt in the soya sauce and other sauces

 mind you there is no oyster in this, this is an imitation made with mushrooms

 so good for vegetarians so add some of this whenever you're making chow mein

 you can use any of the sauces you want you can also use sweet and sour, chilli

 sauce, hot sauce based on what you like the soya sauce add you know little less

 this is perfect not too much salt right amounts and it tastes perfect but if

 sometimes an inexperienced hand can spoil by adding more of soya sauce or

 this way you cannot make mistakes lot of times people add little bit of corn

 starch into it but since we're making this chow mein noodles I don't like to

 add any corn starch but if you want little bit of saucy you can add some and

 ok now this is all ready now the pan is also hot for cooking the ginger garlic

 it is better to add some oil which has high smoking point like peanut oil, add

 oil you know whenever you're cooking chow mein lot of times people add sesame

 seed oil in this but sesame seed is best when you add on the top after you

 now we're going to add ginger and garlic but be careful do not mince the garlic

 this is the Indian style that's why I added ginger lot of people they don't

 add ginger in this and now add onion see now all these vegetables I'm adding

 now you can see that all this onion everything is getting sweated

 ok this will give nice taste to all this vegetables, add pinch of pepper

 some people like to add dark soya sauce if they want their noodles to be colored

 we're going to finish it off by adding some more spring onion now we can serve

 why I'm calling it mild is if you want to make it even more hot you can add

 when you make this noodles also freshly at home this chow mein is even more

 I made it nice mild with nice sesame seed flavor and vegetables still crunchy

 but don't forget vahrehvah is all about inspiring others to cook so please post

 your recipes and cooking tips at vahrehvah.com so others can benefit from your great

 Hi, I'm Christy Wilhelmi from Gardenerd and today I'm going to show you how to take care

 A good pair of pruning shears can last you a lifetime if you know how to take care of

 Cleaning, getting all the sap off, disinfecting, sharpening, oiling, it's all part of garden

 These are Felco pruners, they're really good quality pruning shear and they have a sharp

 edge on one side and then the rest of the points are not sharp.

 Most of the time, you can see this is covered with crap and it needs cleaning.

 If you want to make your life really easy, the SandFlex hand block is the way to go.

 This thing is a miracle and I use the medium course one for that.

 And basically what you're going to do is use the sand block to scrub.

 To disinfect your tools, you want to use alcohol or a bleach solution.

 And that's something that you should do, especially if you've been pruning something that has

 Once you're done disinfecting your tools, it's a good idea to oil them so they don't

 Now, some people recommend using a household kitchen oil spray like Pam or something like

 So you can use WD-40 or I recommend using pruner oil, which is specifically made for

 So what you do, and this stuff does smell like machine oil, so you apply it, a thin

 Take the spring off, clean the gunk out of that, and then oil it as well.

 Once you've done that, let it sit for a couple of minutes and then wipe it completely clean.

 Now if you want to sharpen your tools, it's great to have a hand file on hand like this.

 This is a Corona hand file and it basically just has a little tiny wet stone attached

 to the end of a handle, which makes it easy to sharpen your tools without having to take

 So basically you want to follow the bevel of the blade on the same angle, which is like

 And you want to make three or four strokes along the edge of the blade.

 And once you do that, you flip it over and run one flat to remove the burrs.

 If you do this with your tools, they'll last for years and years and years, and they will

 be worth every penny and every second of time you spend cleaning them.

 If you want to learn more about cleaning your tools and gardening and all this kind of stuff

 And if you like this video, like, subscribe, and share it with your friends.

 Go to www.gardenerd.com to purchase a free gardening tool or equipment.

 Welcome to another episode of Haunt Adventures with Melissa and Jason.

 And then you take a pretty good glob of it, just put it on, and then work it out.

 And the reason we use a monster mud is because it has a really thick consistency.

 And you can use your brush to dab on it to get a much thicker consistency on here.

 I also put a little bit of sawdust in there just because it's free and cheap.

 This is an older water bottle, you'll go through lots of these.

 I actually saw this technique from J-Bo, if he was, on Halloween Forum.

 So your water bottle might get clogged up, so what I do is I just put it in some water.

 And there'll still be some paint in there, so there's no point wasting it into a towel or anything.

 So I have a rag, and I'm just going to dunk in a little bit of water here.

 Just because my paint at the top would be a little bit dry now.

 And I'm just going to, you know, crumple it up so it's not consistent at all.

 You don't want to see any of the, you know, the paint on the top.

 Any type of stain, what you should be doing, especially the polyurethane type stains, do not shake it.

 It creates bubbles in it, and when you're putting it on, if you paint any type of polyurethane on it will create bubbles in your work.

 Get the crappiest brush you have, because they're really hard to clean out, because they're oil based.

 So after I put my thick coat of stain on, I want to take off all the excess.

 So just dab, get around the bolts too, because you don't want to get any drips.

 So at this stage the orange looks too harsh, so you want to kind of water it down.

 Ensuring a tight seal against vacuum leaks starts all the way back with your intake manifold.

 If you swapped intakes for your carburetor install, be sure that you know that your intake

 is seated correctly and that your gaskets were sealed properly in the first place.

 All intake manifolds should have been torqued to their proper specs as well.

 If you're sure that all checks out, you'll know that there won't be any vacuum leaks

 Working backwards from the intake, the next possible leak point could be the base of the

 Double check that all your bolts are firmly hand tightened in a crisscross pattern.

 You'll want to triple check this if you have an adapter plate installed under the carburetor

 Now let's think about the vacuum line connections that will go to the intake or the carburetor.

 Most engines have some type of PCV hose that will suck crankcase fumes from the engine's

 internals and re-burn them by sending them back into the intake.

 Usually this is through a large port on the base of the carburetor.

 If your PCV is clogged, faulty, or not installed, you'll have a vacuum leak that'll cause all

 If you can install a new PCV, do so and connect the other end to one of the large ports on

 If you have power brakes, it's usually best to use one dedicated large port for the power

 brake booster line and not split the line to share with another accessory.

 If you need to, you could install a vacuum fitting in the intake where you can get a

 Most intakes have extra ports for installing additional vacuum fittings.

 If you have other accessories that require a large vacuum port, generally it's all right

 to use a vacuum tee and share one large port as long as the splitting doesn't involve a

 When it comes to the smaller lines, hopefully you took notes while you were removing the

 You'll want to refer to the notes as you put everything back together.

 Sometimes the lines will need to be extended or shortened to make it to their new positions

 For most vacuum lines, you can usually make a choice as to whether you connect them to

 the ports on the base of the carburetor or install a fitting into the threaded port of

 Either of these places will provide a full manifold vacuum signal.

 These ports might be where EGR lines or transmission kickdown lines might need to be connected.

 You can either refer to your notes or some repair manuals have a vacuum line routing

 If you have a vacuum advanced distributor that has a vacuum line, you'll need to make

 Most vacuum advanced distributors will benefit by connecting them to the timed vacuum port

 that's located on the passenger side of the primary metering block of most Holley carburetors.

 This special port is designed to provide little or no vacuum signal at idle, but will

 provide full vacuum when it's needed once the engine RPMs rise.

 Keep in mind, some early model pre-1970 vacuum distributors do need to have a full manifold

 Look up your distributor type and its vacuum requirements if you're not sure.

 When all of your lines are hooked up, be aware that the best way to tune your carburetor

 Just keep in mind, when you do so, you'll want to pull one of the vacuum lines that

 Or you could install a vacuum tee, and that'll give you an access point for the gauge, and

 Coming home to a dinner of nice, warm meatloaf after a long, kind of crazy day.

 And I remember when I was a kid growing up, and I'd come home from a long day at school,

 and I'd just walk in the door and I'd smell that meatloaf in the oven,

 It just wraps you up, gives you a big hug, makes you feel good all over.

 But these days, life is so crazy busy between my job and the kids and my husband's work

 that sometimes it's just too much to put a homemade meatloaf together.

 It actually is made with real Wisconsin lean ground beef and ground pork,

 and they mix in fresh eggs and onion and red pepper and a little sage.

 or they actually have it right here in a loaf pan already done for you.

 and I'm going to show you how to make a quick sauce to go on top of that meatloaf and really dress it up.

 Besides just making it into meatloaf, Mom's Meatloaf is also great for those mini party meatballs,

 or even my kids' favorite, I use it to make spaghetti and meatballs.

 My mom and my nana always had some sort of a wonderful special tomato sauce on top of the meatloaf

 So I'm going to take the Mom's Meatloaf, which we baked in, again, a preheated 350 degree oven

 for about an hour until the internal temperature reaches 155 degrees.

 And then you pull it out of the oven, and you're going to put this quick, easy glaze on top.

 So this is all the stuff you already have in your pantry already.

 I like to use Dijon mustard, but if you don't have that in the house, regular mustard would work just fine.

 Keep that oven on, though, because this is going to go back in to really caramelize that glaze.

 So this meatloaf goes back in to the oven for another 10 to 15 minutes at that same 350 degrees.

 Comes out, and let me tell you, you look like a rock star to your family.

 Here we have it, and got to have an easy side dish to go with it.

 We just picked up some hash brown, cheesy hash brown casserole with real Wisconsin cheddar cheese on top.

 Just pop that in the microwave or bake it along with your meatloaf and then some nice green beans or a salad.

 And then why not jazz it up with a little of my homemade sauce recipe.

 Rx Diet, and in the first video, which hopefully you saw, we introduced you to all the superfoods,

 and in this video we're going to help you apply everything that you learned in the first

 First, before we get started, what's the deal with the deck of cards?

 Well, the deal is that this is all you have to know about portion control.

 No calorie counting, no scales, occasional measuring spoon, but just the deck of cards

 Put it on your plate three times a day, up to that, and you're going to be set.

 That's our oats in the morning, or our whole grain pita that we're going to look at in

 a minute at lunchtime, and it also doubles for our fruits and vegetables.

 We build abundance in those superfoods, fruits and vegetables, and we watch the whole grain

 Then you can use the tennis ball and go hit a few rounds to burn off the calories, if

 A very simple to do breakfast that you can have at home or on the road is oatmeal with

 blueberries, antioxidant-rich blueberries, sprinkled almonds on top, which gives you

 protein and some healthy fats to extend the life of the energy.

 I know that you know why that is, but I don't know if your viewers realize that cinnamon,

 one teaspoon has as much antioxidants as a half a cup of blueberries.

 This is a great idea, double benefit, especially for people who have problems with blood sugar.

 It's really going to keep you going with the combination of almonds.

 I think that this, again, is in line with probably what you're telling your patients

 You can have this ready on the plate and really easy and no time flat.

 Whole grain pita, you stuff it with some roasted turkey breast.

 You just drain them, you stick them in, they're pretty, they're nutrient-rich, vitamin C,

 16% of our population is vitamin C deficient, so you're boosting that already.

 Spinach, a little bit of dressing or mustard, and you've got your sandwich.

 Then as a side, you can have a cup of low-sodium canned bean soup or tomato-based soup, or

 you can get a homemade one that you made on the weekend and that you can carry in through

 I love the idea of having soup at lunch because it's a low-energy density, low-calorie food,

 so you get a lot of bang for your buck and it really rounds out your meal.

 One is actually a juice in the morning, mid-morning, to have a juice, a vegetable-based juice is

 preferred or a veggie and fruit juice, serving a very small one, a super-nutrient boost.

 This is something that you can have with some of our super berries, some of these ones that

 we're seeing out there like acai and blueberries and pomegranate, another wonderful super food,

 In the afternoon, that's the time where it's critical to have some protein and healthy

 carbs, so you're going to mix them together for maximal life to your energy.

 We have just carrots and hummus here, but there's a whole long list in my book.

 I know that you provide a lot of snack options as well, of how to balance your protein and

 I think the afternoon snack is one of the best opportunities to do that.

 Then you're not starving for dinner, so although this plate looks beautiful, what have we got

 The key is that we're here looking at doing portion control but feeling satisfied, getting

 Again, we're mixing our nutrition together for great abundance because the vitamin C

 in the tomatoes and again our iron in the spinach is blending and increasing our absorption.

 My biggest tip throughout the day building flavor while we're cutting fat and sugar and

 salt and calories from our diet is to use some of our dried herbs and spices again.

 I'm always using the dried herbs and spices because that is a magical resource for boosting

 When we're dieting, we're always cutting back on things it seems like.

 We just want to look to other antioxidant rich resources that are right there in your

 I don't know about you, but I feel healthier just looking at these foods.

 If you want to learn more about the SuperfoodsRx Diet, visit Wendy's website at www.superfoodsrxdiet.com.

 If you want more great diet tips, go to my website at www.drmelina.com.

 I'm going to be removing the fan clutch of my 95' Ranger 3.0 XLT.

 This is useful to know how to do it when you need to change the water pump, the harmonic

 Now, I remove the belt and in order to do it I use a 15mm wrench.

 I put it on the bolt that is on the tensioner right there and push it down.

 Ok, that pulley over there, this one over here, there are four bolts on this side.

 What I did over here is I went to the store and I got two of those bolts bigger.

 And I also, while I was at the store I got this kit to remove the fan clutch.

 You may need a, I mean like if yours is real, real, real hard to get out, you may need a pipe wrench.

 Or you can look to see if you can use one of these smaller wrenches in your kit.

 Ok, I'll put this wrench holding the pulley using the two bolts that I, the two longer bolts.

 And using my adjustable wrench, I'm going to turn the fan clutch right here.

 If you turn it the other way, you're just going to tighten it more and more and it's going to be harder to get out later.

 And this is another starburst technique for Lindy's Stamp Gang.

 Now, I don't know how many of you have tried to crumple your cardstock before,

 but I know you would have found out that if you try and do that while it's dry,

 Generally it doesn't work out that well for you, sometimes it even rips.

 Now, the secret to crumpling cardstock is to mist it with some water first.

 Now you can do this on one side, but I've found that I get better results when you

 Next you're going to want to leave this for a few seconds so that the water has

 Now, you don't want to flatten this out completely, you'd like to keep a little

 bit of that texture for when you spray it with your starbursts or

 pounce it with your starburst stains, but just make sure it's flat enough

 or iron it under a dry iron, no steam, just to flatten this out.

 the look of all the texture, but you'll have a nice flat piece of

 Just spritz this randomly over the cardstock, you don't need to cover

 you can leave it there, but I'm going to do something a bit wild and add some

 and then I'm going to go back in and add some of these other colors back over the

 but I love leaving things to air dry, it's a much more subtle finish and

 things blend a little bit better, so I'm going to leave this one alone,

 and I'll come back a little later and show you what this looks like.

 This is what my crumpled background looks like now that it's dry,

 bits of deeper color, and the gorgeous spritz over the top of Wake Me Up Before

 Looks like that really expensive metallic tissue card that you can buy,

 believe me I've spent quite a bit of money on that kind of stuff so I was

 really impressed to be able to make something like this for myself.

 Up close you can see it's still got all that beautiful texture.

 If that amount of wrinkling didn't suit your project, what you would then do

 steam off and then give this an iron and that will iron out all of those wrinkles,

 but you will still be left with the texture or the look of texture from the

 Now I just love the crinkly feeling so I'm not actually going to iron this

 If you'd like to leave yours wrinkly you just need to use a glue that's a little

 glossy accents where you can adhere pretty much anything to anything else

 and that will settle into some of the wrinkles and stick down whatever you

 So I hope that's one more idea to put in your little technique toolbox

 Seeing as a bunch of you seem to have said that it's something you'd like to know more

 about via that cool little poll on the site, GuitarTipsWeekly.com.

 I remember when I started I basically picked until I went crazy.

 First off, typically you're always going to want to start by plucking the root note

 So, apart from that, you can kind of do whatever pattern you want.

 But you can mix it up too if you want, if you get more comfortable with it.

 Definitely when you're starting out, I recommend just pick a pattern and stick with it until

 So, an easy one to go with is pick this string, and then on the 3rd string, 2nd and 1st.

 If you want to get a little bit more complicated, go up and then down again.

 All I'm doing there is picking the root note, and then the top 3 strings in order.

 If you want to take that a step further, you could try something like this.

 And on that one, what I'm doing is I'm plucking the 3rd string, then the 2nd string, then the 3rd string, then the 1st string, then the 3rd string, then the 2nd string, then the 3rd string again.

 So, root note, 3rd string, 2nd string, 3rd string, 1st string, 3rd string, and 2nd string.

 So, hopefully that gives you some ideas, gets you a little bit started on picking.

 Later on, we'll talk about some more advanced things that you can do.

 For instance, I like holding my pick here, and then I'll pick the root note with my pick, and then I'll use my fingers to actually pluck the other strings.

 So, anyways, have a great day, and we'll see you around at GuitarTipsWeekly.com.

 To make this angel I'm going to work with this bottle and a styrofoam ball.

 I put a craft stick on the styrofoam ball just so that I can place it down inside.

 To make the dress and the body I have two sheets of paper towel.

 I'm going to bring these around like this and put them together in the front.

 I'm going to place that ball down into the bottle and fold this down.

 I'm going to twist it a little bit and bring these together in the front.

 To make a bow for her neck I'm going to take a small piece of paper towel.

 Then you can place them on a plastic lid or a styrofoam plate or something like that.

 To make a ruffle for the bottom of the dress I folded a half sheet of paper towel in half like that.

 You can either hot glue or put some more white glue in there when you're finished.

 I'm going to set that aside to dry until these are good and hard.

 Since the last clip I've added more glue along the edge as it was hardening.

 Underneath here when you're all done you can either add a piece of cardboard and paint it or glue some felt on the bottom.

 For her hair I took some of this fun yarn and wound it around my 4 fingers like this.

 I'm going to brush Mod Podge on and sprinkle it with this iridescent glitter.

 When I was a boy in Petersburg, Alaska, we made Lefse every Norway holiday

 You know you got Veslund's if you can't understand the ingredients

 Just type in Veslund's Lefse on Google and bada boom, bada bing.

 You're going to need some confectioner's sugar, some powdered sugar.

 I like to add ground nutmeg because it gives it a little bit more flavor.

 And you're going to need some beer because you're making Lefse.

 And then I'm going to run a sheet under the water, hydrating both.

 Turn on the sprayer if you have it, although you don't need it.

 I've got a cutting board that's got a drip edge, so I'm just going to tuck it on there.

 You can use a mixer if you want, but have fun getting all that stuff out of the tongs when you use an electric mixer.

 If you've never gone to Petersburg, Alaska during the Little Norway Festival, it's May 17th, I think is Independence Day.

 I didn't pay attention during my history lessons, but the volunteer firemen dressed up as Vikings and they would come and take you and lock you in the local jail.

 There's all kinds of floats and parades and runs and fun memories.

 Well, if you are any kind of scrapbooker at all, this weekend is one of the biggies because

 And all week long, we'll be featuring some of the most innovative products and people

 Today, Christine McKay with We Are Memory Keepers joins us with a unique idea, especially

 if you love to cook or collect recipes, because so much of food is about the memory, isn't

 And I was just going to say, one segment you will never see me on is a cooking segment

 However, scrapbooking is all about putting together those family memories.

 And I don't know about your house, but in my house, just about every family memory we

 You go through your family traditions, your favorite memories, your favorite laughs that

 In fact, when I got married, probably my favorite gift that my mom gave me was a box of recipes

 And we are Memory Keepers is offering one of the most fabulous deals ever.

 Which I'm telling you right now, if you've been to the Scrapbook Expo and you're past

 $50 is nothing compared to what you're going to want to spend when you get there.

 And the thing I love about any kind of kit is if you can do a variety of different things

 And what we're going to do is show you how easy this box is to put together.

 And then it has, this is the bottom, and then it has the lid that, I'm a bad gluer.

 And then it comes with all sorts of different paper and stickers and embellishments and

 I have to show this top here because look how cute that is with the cute embellishments.

 You know, this is so fun for, you know, I mentioned that when my mom gave me a recipe

 Unfortunately, I feel bad for my daughter because hers is going to be like, you know,

 But not only can you do the boxes, one thing Brooke, I made as well.

 So what I decided to do as well is I made like a little mini album just using the recipe

 And I just went through everybody in my family and I did their favorite recipe and why.

 But it's not only about those great moments like Thanksgiving and Christmas.

 I mean, we all know there's like ten meals that you make over and over and over.

 To capture the special events as well as just those everyday moments.

 And there's so much left over that you can do cards, you can do pages, boxes, all sorts

 So the only way that you can get this kit is if you purchase the $50, you get it for

 Just a reminder, you'll be able to see them this weekend at Scrapbook Expo USA at the

 And right now, as promised, we're going to give away these fun recipe box kits.

 The fourth and fifth callers will receive two of the recipe box kits from We are Memory

 And you'll find more information about the kits on our website, Studio5.com.

 Hi, my name is Mas Watanabe and this is your Gymnastics Minute.

 Today I would like to show you a blind turning drill on the floor instead of doing it on

 Now this back extension roll to handstand is very similar body movement to back giants

 When you do the turning action in the handstand such as this, she would feel she is doing

 But in a real blind turn on the bars, you need to initiate the turning action on the

 Okay now I will ask them to extend their body little bit short of the handstand and roll

 The moment they extended their body, that's the moment they should initiate the turning

 So they will end up after the half turn, they will end up in short of the handstand and

 Once you learn this early half turn, that's exactly where you initiate the half turning

 Now, let's try back extension roll to handstand and half turn, finishing the handstand.

 By finishing, starting the half turn on the way up, they can finish in handstand.

 Hey, I'm Rock Santos with Blue70 here today to show you how to put on my NeuroComp swimsuit.

 What I typically like to do and what I typically tell people is to go to our website www.blue70.com

 What I often tell people is look at your height and weight and if you're between height and

 Because that compression is going to be good in both sizes, but the material will last

 longer, especially if you're not really trying to force that suit up your body.

 And you'll see that today when I put on my size 28 Blue70 NeuroComp suit that it really

 And if it takes you a really long time, it's probably not the right size for you.

 The first thing I like to do is make sure that my suit is lined up perfectly on the

 And the one thing that I notice on the Blue70 is that there's these two cross lines in front

 So I want to make sure that when I put my foot there that I line it up right, otherwise

 So the first thing I like to do is kind of crumple it up and point my toes and kind of

 And what I like to do is I like to typically pull it up higher than normal above my ankle

 Again, I want to make sure that that little stitching that's going to go across my leg,

 I put my foot in the right way so when I roll it up all that, I roll it up the right way.

 Again, it is a pain to then take the suit back off and go off on the suit.

 And I can see that there's a seam line, which I know is the outside seam, so I do that correctly.

 And I kind of just cinch it up there and I get it to that there.

 What I like to do is just kind of take some of it and move it up a little bit so I can

 What I want to do is make sure I don't use my fingernails to do it, but try to use my

 I use the back of my hands when I kind of pull it up this way here.

 Anytime I get my hands on the inside where there's less chance of tearing that real sensitive

 And I really try to get it up and over my pants here so it's real good.

 Now again, you don't want to be like those high school boys that wear their pants down

 here because then what happens when you bend over, there's a lot of stress in your back.

 So you want to make sure that you bring the suit way up high on the crock, both in the

 So then what I do is I kind of just move it back down a little bit.

 So then once I'm done with that part, what I like to do is kind of, again, as a whole

 OK, so then when we get up top here, I like to move it up nice and good.

 And then what I do is I don't like to pull the neckline real far apart when I put it

 And I kind of just try to, as gently as possible, put it on, cinch it up.

 And then what I like to do, because we're a wetsuit company, what we were taught there

 And then what I do is I get a nice good friend to come over and help me.

 What I typically have people do, I like when you zip it up, grab the bottom of it.

 And then what I do is I bring my legs together, my shoulder blades together so they're clean

 And then the next thing I want to do is make sure my arms can move around nice and good.

 And now the next part of getting fitted with your Blue 70 is you don't want to dive in

 Because when you dive in the water dry, there's these natural air pockets.

 It's uncomfortable and kind of a weird feeling if you swim with these air pockets or bubbles

 So what we like to do is put the suit on dry and then let me jump in the water here.

 Okay, now we're almost ready to race because I got the suit wet.

 And what I like about getting the suit wet is now I can take the suit and it's going

 I want to have that because I don't want to get rid of all those air pockets and any

 So once the Blue 70 suit's wet, it actually starts to suck to your body, which is what

 So now when I jump on the blocks and race, there won't be any air pockets.

 And maybe I want to swim a little bit because if there's some air pockets, I may want

My name's Chef Egg and this is Cooking with Egg, where the kitchen comes to life.

 So today I'm going to make a really easy dish for you guys and it's something the whole family can enjoy together.

 So what I'm going to do is take a little oil and throw it in the pan.

They're really inexpensive and it's a great way to make a little bit of food, a lot of healthy.

 We're going to toss those up and actually toast those corn tortillas so they get nice and crispy.

 Put a little bit of fresh pepper in there and a little bit of water.

 The water is going to help the scrambled eggs to get really nice, light and fluffy.

 What I like to do over really low heat is to pour our eggs in and just let them cook for a minute.

 That water inside the eggs is going to make them fluff up really nicely.

 Just a couple of simple tips that will make you really, really successful in the kitchen.

 What I like to do is turn the heat off and let that residual heat cook the eggs through.

 We're going to take our knife with controlling support because you always want to have a good grip on your knife.

 And rock that knife forward like a dolphin diving into the ocean.

 We're going to rock that knife forward and chop up our fresh herbs.

 And the herbs are going to give our dish a great, great flavor.

 So we're going to take these beautiful chili chilis and lay it right down on our plate.

 But there's one extra little thing we have to put on this and that's this block of cheese.

 So what we're going to do is take some of that and just garnish right on top.

 We've got the salty flavor of the cheese with the fresh, vibrant flavor of the salsa.

 My name's Chef Egg and I want to free you from a fast food prison and make you culinary independent.

 So the very first thing I do when I get home is I go into my room and I put comfy clothes on

 because I am so sick of wearing my uniform all day and I just can't wait to get into my yoga pants

 and then I'm wearing my Victoria's Secret kind of sequin-y yoga pants that I always wear

 Then I go upstairs into the kitchen and I bring my lunchbox with me

 where I'm gonna unpack all my stuff that I didn't eat for my lunch that day

 So I'm just doing that and right after that I was a little bit hungry but not hungry enough for dinner

 So I'm gonna be making a little snack and I'm just cutting up some fruit

 So here I'm cutting up some pears and I'm also gonna cut up some watermelon to put with it

 So by the time I get home or near the end of the night, I kind of feel like something a little bit different

 So I usually do half a cup of water and then I take my Vita Coco coconut water in the flavor lemonade

 So it's pretty much half and half and it tastes really delicious

 So usually when I'm eating my snack at this point, I'm just catching up on YouTube, answering comments

 So after I'm done chilling out for a little bit and eating my snack

 So this night I decided to do some laundry because clearly I needed to

 After that I had a bag packed that I had packed for like the whole day

 So it has like gym clothes in it and just like a bunch of crap as you can see

 So I'm just kind of unpacking that throwing things in the laundry and all of that

 So after that, I like to throw on my sneakers and I do have a little brother who's like seven months old

 But this day I was by myself and even though I work out every morning

 I do like to go for a walk at the end of the night probably four nights out of the week

 So just it feels good and since it's nice out and I live in Maine that doesn't happen often

 I'm just having some white rice normally probably 90% of the time I'll do brown rice, but I really wanted white rice tonight

 So then I'm just having some frozen veggies, diced tomato and some grilled chicken that I have grilled up from the night before

 Um, so I'm just cutting that up and I'm taking some coconut oil

 But I'm just kind of melting that in a pan and then throwing my peppers in there and letting them get brown

 All you do is pour in your rice pour in your water and you put the cover on and it honestly just turns off when it's

 So I'm just doing that and then I am going to be adding my frozen veggies to my peppers and letting those cook up

 After that, I'm gonna add my chicken just to warm up the chicken since it already is cooked

 And I'm putting some garlic salt on it and pepper and then I like to put sriracha in it and the tomatoes are just so sweet

 And then the sriracha is so spicy and I just love the taste in the combination of the two

 so I'm just taking that and I'm throwing it over my rice once my rice is done and

 She's done that's what it looks like it's so good and I'm drinking again my water with coconut water

 So normally when I'm eating dinner, I'm eating with my boyfriend or maybe with my dad and his girlfriend

 But my boyfriend's gone in the military and my dad and his girlfriend weren't home.

 So after dinner, I honestly just will chill out for a little bit and do whatever I need to do on my laptop

 So when I'm ready to get ready for bed, the first thing I do is floss my teeth

 So I'm using my triple clean floss picks and I didn't put this on camera just because I felt funny

 I'm starting out with my say knives naturally clear green tea cleanser

 And I'm using that just to get all my makeup off and scrub my face

 If you guys do want to see my skincare routine, I will leave that down below for you

 So then I'm using my sea breeze sensitive skin astringent and I'm applying that to a cotton pad.

 So then to moisturize I'm using my cleaning clear dual action moisturizer and applying that after that

 I have to let that set overnight and then to moisturize my lips.

 Usually when my boyfriend's not gone we will watch TV together and stretch and maybe do like a little ab workout

 But since I'm alone, I'm just stretching in my room and I probably do this three or four nights out of the week

 It just feels good and it really helps me get kind of sleepy and relaxed.

 So I just like to get in bed with my phone and I'll just kind of catch up on Instagram and call my boyfriend

 After I call my boyfriend, I'm pretty much ready to go to sleep.

I've already made a bubblegum version of this cake here on YouTube, but

 if you're not really into bubblegum or you haven't tried a magic cake before, you might

 be using some flour, egg whites, egg yolks, vanilla extract, salt, icing sugar, milk and

 a boil and when it's coming to a boil I'll take it off the heat.

 And now all I have to do is whisk my egg whites until they are nice and fluffy.

 So instead of using a whisk now I will use a spatula to fold my egg whites in.

 And I have preheated my oven to 150 degrees C, conventional oven.

 I'm using this 8 inch tin and I'll just cover it with some baking paper.

It just smells amazing of vanilla and I will just give it a taste here.

You can also find a direct link to it right down in my description.

 And remember you can follow me on Facebook, Instagram, Twitter and also on my blog.

Please share this video, subscribe to my channel, like, comment and all that.

 We're going to be doing a Billetworks design, the Thing chassis.

 Alright, so I'm going to push that to the side and show you the chassis itself.

 We've got the plates, links, and I also got the topper, the cab.

 Here's where all our links and electronics are going to sit on.

 Alright, so I already started off with the links and threaded them with the Revo ball ends.

 Keep it nice and steady so we can figure out the rest of the links.

 If you pull away we have some aluminum spacers we have to put in between the links and the chassis.

 Thought I could get away with it, but I'm going to have to cut out all those zip ties.

So the thicker is the ones that I ended up putting up on the shocks.

 Had some difficulties getting between the big servo protector there, but I finally got that.

 This part was a little bit tougher trying to get all the links pushed in between all the steering links.

 And we'll also include the center brace so that way the chassis is fully rigid.

 I haven't taken any measurements yet so I don't know if it's going to pass spec or not.

 Like a love of a morning sun, slowly rises and kisses you awake

 main characters, Amanda Seyfried, wore a really beautiful hairstyle.

 simple but it's literally the little things that you know the hair stylist

 did to her hair with the flowers that made it seem so romantic and just

 Okay so I'm gonna walk you through what you're gonna need for this hairstyle.

 of the main things you're gonna need is some sort of a crimper if you have it.

 worry you can either curl your hair or you can braid it when your hair is wet

 and then when you open your braids you're gonna have sort of a wave because

 bobby pins and also we're gonna need some hair accessory and I mean you can

 wedding outside or if it's a party or prom doesn't matter what you're attending

 roses here in yellow and I have the baby breath flowers here so these two will

 gonna do is just brush my hair to make sure there are no tangles and I'm

 wearing Luxie hair extensions today I'm wearing the chestnut brown hair color

 rest away and I'm just gonna grab my crimper and start crimping the hair.

 So this is really what it's gonna look like and I'm gonna do the exact same

 thing all over my head like just separate into small sections and crimp

 Okay now that the hair is curled I'm just gonna take my hairspray and spray

 through all the waves because I want them to soften up a little bit and look

So I'm just gonna slowly grab the hair from the bottom and start

 look like it's naturally waving and it also expands the hair and makes it look

 the middle and because I do have bangs whether you do have bangs or not it

 so I'm gonna grab this section on the left and I'm gonna sort of twist it but

 loosely and then I'm just gonna take my bobby pin and pin that in place.

 is grab my baby rose and I already pre-cut it so when you cut the rose you

 want to make sure that you leave a little bit of the stem so you can

 actually insert that in your hair and I'm gonna take it and insert it right

 has a stem so when I cut it I also made sure that you know there's a bit of that

 left and I'm gonna insert it on top of the rose just like that and then I'm

 gonna take another bunch of baby breath flowers and insert it through the bottom

 and then I'm gonna insert one more baby breath flower in there and I'm gonna

 so this is what the finished hairstyle looks like it's so summery and romantic

 I absolutely love it and I'm definitely gonna rock it when I go to a wedding

 leave me a comment I love reading your comments don't forget to subscribe down

 below as well when you recreate this hairstyle make sure to hashtag it with

 Luxy Hair I love seeing what you guys recreate it's so cool so thank you so

 much for tuning in I love you guys and I'll see you very soon bye!

 and I'm also gonna be using some fresh flowers I have two baby roses here in

 Hi, I'm Rose Levy-Berenbaum and we're here today in Allersons Orchards in Walpole, New

 The first one we're making is a lemon poppy seed pound cake baked in a special pan and

 wait until you see all the beautiful pans that will be doing all the work to decorate

 The second one is a sour cream coffee cake with crumb topping that makes its own beautiful

 Of all the amazing cake pans that are on the market, there's no reason why you ever again

 have to worry about making a cake look this beautiful by decorating it because it's all

 Look at this array of cake pans and cakes all made from just one batter.

 The batter I chose is the lemon poppy seed pound cake, my signature cake, my favorite

 I need a whole tablespoon of it which is about the amount that one lemon will give.

 Everybody really is crazy about them these days because you can see that it just takes

 off the amount of zest that is the yellow portion which is the flavorful oils and doesn't

 This was originally a woodworking tool but it works really well in the kitchen.

 Now I'm going to begin by weighing the flour and I like to weigh because it's really quick

 So I have the cake flour already in the bowl and now I'm going to turn on the scale and

 When I turn on the scale, the weight of the bowl and the weight of the flour has been

 So it's ready to receive the next ingredient which is the granulated sugar and it's three

 And now to put in the next ingredient which is the poppy seeds, I touch it again, wait

 The tiny bit over really doesn't matter because you can see it's so much more accurate than

 if you were doing the measuring that I'm just trying to get in the ballpark.

 And now I'm not going to weigh the rest of the ingredients because they're so small they

 And these dry ingredients are going to be whisked together or stirred together right

 And it just takes a couple of seconds but it won't hurt no matter how long you mix it

 Three large is three large and that's the amount that's going to be necessary to make

 And since that's going to be added in two different steps, I'm going to beat them lightly

 together because it's a little bit hard to add it when the eggs haven't gotten stirred

 And now the one other ingredient that's going to go in with the dry ingredients is the lemon

 That's important because you want to have this have a wonderful lemony flavor.

 You'd be amazed to see how simple this is and what wonderful results it yields.

 Again, it's cool but it's soft so you can touch it and squish it and it will dent.

 Whisk it up slowly and then to medium speed and let it beat for about a minute and a half.

 Okay, it's now mixed for one and a half minutes and I'm going to scrape the sides of the pan

 And always start on low speed so it can integrate easily without splashing out.

 Okay, and now I'll bring it up to medium speed for just 20 seconds.

 And now it's evenly mixed in so on low speed again, I'll add the rest.

 Now I'm going to prepare the pan to make sure that it doesn't stick

 because the whole beauty of this cake is the decoration that the pan gives.

I don't like using that because it actually can damage the metals.

 Then I take the q-tip and I actually run it on the t-shirt again, so it is

 But it will snap in if you push it hard enough and you'll hear it snap.

 You're not trying to pull it, you just want to make sure it doesn't

 It makes it a lot easier if you're like me and you cut these pads because of the brake discs.

 I do like to clean it and get rid of as much of the oil and crap as I can.

Today we are going to draw two presidents George Washington and Abraham Lincoln.

 I want you to get a white piece of paper and a pencil because we will be erasing some parts of our drawing.

 First boys and girls I want you to draw a large oval near the top of your paper.

 Oh my gosh I made one too small so I am going to erase and make both eyes the same size.

 Draw a set of eyebrows on George Washington who was the first president of the United States of America.

 In those days boys and girls men wore shirts buttoned up to their necks.

 Now boys and girls we are going to draw the lapel on his military uniform.

I am going to try my best boys and girls to draw this lapel so you can copy it.

 Now it is harder on the other side so like I said I am going to try my best to draw the lapel so it looks like the lapel on the other side.

 Boys and girls in those days George Washington often wore a white hair wig.

 And then on the sides we are going to draw the other part of his wig.

 Let's go to the other side and draw something similar to that other side.

 And he has kind of a little ponytail hanging down at the bottom here.

 Now boys and girls we are going to draw Abraham Lincoln, the 16th president.

 Now get your eraser boys and girls and erase those sharp corners.

 So we are going to use kind of a jagged line here to color in his hair.

 Start right here boys and girls drawing Abraham Lincoln's shoulders.

 But this is showing where his shirt is and we are going to make five buttons on his shirt.

 Let's draw the lapel like we did on George Washington's jacket.

 Let's draw the lapel on the other side of Abraham Lincoln's jacket.

 Well boys and girls we made it through drawing George Washington and Abraham Lincoln.

 I really enjoyed this drawing lesson with you and I will see you the next time.

For those of you with HBoot 1.5, you will have to boot from the fastboot

First turn off your phone and then hold down the volume down and the

 get a folder called evo3dtorp with adb for mac and linux and also fastboot for windows,

 up a terminal and browse to the directory that you unzipped the evo3dtorp to.

That's actually backslash the opposite of this because my Korean font

 do is type fastboot flash recovery torp-shooter-2.0.0 like that.

 you flash ROMs with custom kernels, you'll have to boot from fastboot.

 doing the old method, you can just do it from here and just change this to fastboot

And it will boot you into recovery where you can flash just the same.

 Another thing for mac and linux, make sure you replace fastboot with dash mac and also

 that was a review of the twerp, how to install it and just going to help your life when flashing,

 So if you guys have been using a good ROM that everything is working good and fast for

 the Evo 3D, don't forget to let me know in the comments box on YouTube or on my site.

 Last night I washed my hair with Ion moisturizing shampoo and I deep conditioned with Yes to

 Tomatoes conditioner and I also put on an oil rinse when I deep conditioned.

 I did my two strands with some of Marguerite's Magic by Carol's Daughter.

 I'm going to use some of my leave in conditioner mix which is just Alpha G leave in conditioner,

 water, jojoba oil, olive oil, vegetable glycerin, and sweet almond oil.

 Every time I use it I have to shake it up because as you know oil and water does not

 I'm just going to spray this on just so that it's damp, not wet.

 To take it out I'm going to be using Minosa's hair honey by Carol's Daughter.

 If your hair is shorter I would recommend using something smaller.

 So now I'm taking them out of my two strand twist so it makes my twist curly.

 And then I'm just going to put a little bit of my Minosa hair honey just on my fingertips.

 And I guess you're just kind of pulling it apart the same way that you do two strand

 Okay so this is what it looks like when all my twists are separated or just pulled apart.

 And then I'm just going to go through and separate them some more and fluff them out.

 Very simple, the same thing that you would do if you just had a regular twist out.

 Since I don't have my pick right now I'm just going to use the bottom of this comb to just

Today I'm changing out a lens on one of my old GoPro Hero cases.

 If you just put the, mount the case on it and tighten everything down it will give you a

 The replacement kit comes with its own screwdriver but I am going to use

 The old lens and the old gasket are pretty well mashed together so I'm gonna

 Hello, I'm Tammy Taylor, president of Tammy Taylor Nails, and today I'm so excited to

 demonstrate for you my brand new Creation of Beauty Gel-Egance Gel Polish

This collection was inspired by art and expression, and I have four

 green, paint your dream, a tangerine red, beautiful things, an ivory cream, and live

 finish, wipe-its, clean-it, all natural peach conditioning cuticle oil, and peach

 Cure 30 seconds in a Mighty Mini LED, 45 seconds in a regular LED, or two minutes

 nice long strokes, cap the tip, clean up the skin, beautiful things,

Cure the nails one minute in the Mighty Mini LED, one minute in a

 long strokes, cover the entire nail, cap the tip, paint your dream,

Cure one minute in a Mighty Mini LED, one minute in a regular LED, or

Clean off the nails with Clean It and a Wipe It, and apply Peach

 remember, at Tammy Taylor Nails, nails are always fun and never feel like work.

 take you a quick tour around, have a look at it all over and then we'll see it in action.

 you can put multiple glasses underneath and continue the juice pouring out into the glasses

 jug though so you can just dispense all of the liquid into there and then pour it out

 two side clips to remove the top and in here you'll find the full metal spinner.

 the big points for this is that it is metal entirely and not a combination of plastic

A really fine mesh around the outside and Japanese blade engineering to make a nice

 extractor so this is where all of the excess of the fruit will end up when you finish making

 for your softer fruits and a slower speed for the slightly tougher fruits and vegetables

 out the feeding tube here and you can just drop in your whole fruit, nearly, and all

 you simply do is switch the machine and we'll just try it on speed one here.

 up at the end just to stop any spillage from taking your cup away.

Please make sure you subscribe to our YouTube channel, check us out on Facebook

 or just simply Google Panasonic Southampton for all of our contact details.

 if you want to buy one of these just give us a shout on the phones for all of our best

 They call this stretch of the Mississippi Gulf Coast the playground of

 style casinos and oceanfront resorts with antebellum homes and ancient

 Madeline knows the importance of first impressions and her front yard is the

What she has in mind is a crushed rock pathway to replace the old

 blocks and worn grass leading from her front door to the driveway.

 Madeline already ordered the materials which her local home improvement center

 gravel paths with the flagstone and it looked more like something I would be

 kind when somebody walks up to my house that's the impression I wanted to give

 because you've got the crushed rock but it's not so great to walk on crushed

I'm going to take the second hose now just lay it in here so we can

 bigger than this is going to look like a driveway coming down through here.

 think of this more as cutting because you've got a lot of pretty dense

 opposed to a curved blade in a shovel and I want to take just a second and

 kind of go pretty much straight down here and then just move pick it up and

 All right so we've defined the outside edges of the walkway here.

 do now is cut this sod up into one foot squares so we can literally lift it

 With all our sod squares removed and set aside for later use, Madeline levels the

 Madeline who stays fit by running three miles a day tries her hand at the

 totally optional and I'm not even sure I want to do this but got this nice little

 like a pull-off, a rest area and then maybe put a bench or something in there.

 and weeds from growing up through the gravel yet it's porous enough to let water drain through.

We save the turnout for last and I'm hoping we don't come up short.

I'll hold this Madeline if you want to just kind of work the rest of that in

We roll the edging along the side of the path and press it into the landscape cloth until

 plastic stakes which we hammer in at an angle through the bottom lip.

 they will get them at the right height but also so that the stones will hold them up.

 edge stones in place we pour the rest of our crushed rock, level the surface and once again

 about six inches between them let's just see if that's that's about 12 but I think that's about

Yep yep okay I'll stand here and give you the I'll be the measuring stick.

Well Madeline doesn't let me get away with that idea so together we place the

Clearing away an inch or so of crushed rock and wiggling the stones into place makes them

A stately oak this beautiful can best be enjoyed from an aisle seat with a

 new path will do more than make a good first impression it just might make a lasting one.

 Hi, this is Kim from Made by Mommy, continuing my Fruit on the Loom series with a really easy and cute pair of cherries.

 To make the cherries you'll need 10 red rubber bands and 2 green rubber bands.

 Starting with a single green rubber band, we're going to bring that from the side with the arrow, straight down one.

 Then for the next position, you'll need 4 red rubber bands that are going to all go straight, like that.

 And then a single red rubber band is wrapped 3 times around the bottom peg here.

 And then we'll repeat on the other side to create the second cherry.

 A single green, followed by 4 red bands, and then a single red band wrapped around this peg 3 times.

 Then you'll need your hook, and I find it easier not to try and do all 4 bands at once.

 And then the green, which I'm going to take both sides of onto my hook, and create a slip knot, pulling this side of the rubber band through this side.

 So for the other cherry, once again, we're just going to pull back that tripled over cap band with our hook, catch one or two of the bands underneath,

 keep a thumb over that cap band so that it doesn't pop off before you're ready for it.

 And again, taking both sides onto your hook, and creating a slip knot, pulling this side through the center of the other.

 Put one of the green loops into the center of the other, like that.

 If you like the cherries, please give this video a thumbs up, and make sure to check out the videos on my channel for all of these other fruit.

 If you subscribe, you'll be notified first when I post a new design.

 Thank you so much for watching, and I look forward to looming with you again soon.

 Hey YouTube, I'm Mars1952 and today I'm going to try to break down this bead on this dead

 This side came loose when it went flat so it was pretty easy to get it off.

 But I tried to weld in on this side and I just couldn't get it to come loose.

 So I admired a really nice giant slide hammer that they sell at Northern Tool.

 There's two versions, one costs about $80 and the other one costs $110.

 I was on the verge of buying it and I was thinking, I should be able to make a slide

 And I've cut this piece of pipe out of some scrap and it fits right in there.

 So I'm going to try without modifying this pipe just to see if it will work.

 Alright, well I just sort of guessed at how tall this needed to be.

 So I'm going to try to flatten this out without getting it hot.

 You need a 500g tub of low-fat natural yogurt, some runny honey and some whole wheat muesli,

 We use a pudding basin with a lid, a plastic pudding basin with a lid, which means that

 We used to make our own yogurt, but in the end found that it was just as cheap to buy

 Normally, we just squeeze in however much we think it is, as we've been making this

 muesli yogurt since about 1979 and eating it pretty much every day for breakfast ever

 Sometimes have something different at the weekend, but during the week we would usually

 We found the recipe in a Birker Benner recipe book, which was suggested to me by a Russian

 No measures are normally used when deciding how much muesli to put in.

 However, we will weigh the bag and see how much is left so that we can give you an idea.

 Add the muesli mixture until it reaches a stiff consistency, but not overly dry, otherwise

 Basically, what happens is it goes in the fridge overnight and the oats, barley, whatever

 is in your muesli, soaks up some of the yogurt and makes it a bit softer and it's really

 This was the recipe, the Birker Benner recipe, which they used in their Swiss clinic.

 In the original Birker Benner, there was a grated apple added to the muesli and we used

 to do this, but in the end we gave up on that and didn't bother.

 So, you can add fruit or grated apple, whatever you want to it, but certainly it does make

 This quantity that we're making here will make about six portions, so it does the two

 You just make sure it's all mixed well and push down so that all the muesli is in contact

 And then you just put the lid on, put it in the fridge overnight and it's ready for you

 Chris here at CaribbeanPot.com always a pleasure to have you guys here in the kitchen with me.

So it's gonna go nice and green and that's the key to this rice dish here

I mean to say I'm using brown rice because that's usually what I use at home

 If you've got a wok you can certainly use that and my pan here is nonstick

 As well as some garlic and the garlic all I did was I diced that up finely

 You can start hearing that little sizzle going on in there that's because the oil is heating up

 All you want to do here and I have my I'm gonna turn my heat down to about

 Because we want to quickly cook the vegetables that we're gonna be using in here.

 And some diced up carrots and all we want to do is quickly stir fry that

 And I'm gonna also go in with a couple of these bird's eye chili or bird pepper

 We call these in the Caribbean bird pepper stems and everything and we're gonna do it whole

 Because I want to release the flavors from there, but none of that vibrant heat.

 So cut back on the salt because the soy sauce will be salty and the rice was also cooked in salt

If you want you can use the stuff out of a can that's totally up to you

 Now we're gonna go in with some more flavor and I have here some sesame oil

 So I'm gonna say if you like that you can go in with a little bit more and of course some of that soy sauce

 Give that a quick stir just to make sure all the flavors are blended in nicely

 I'm gonna go in now with that cooked rice and this is just leftover rice that I had like I said

 To get that grainy sort of texture out of the rice and all you want to do now is pretty much stir this

 But I'm gonna go in with the rice and I'm gonna go in with the rice

 And I'm gonna go in with the rice and I'm gonna go in with the rice

 Mix it well and heating through that rice since the rice was already cooked

 It's just a matter of heating this through and then this dish is done

 It's gonna take anywhere from about three to four minutes for that rice to heat all the way through guys

 Remember also when you're serving this those chili peppers that bird's eye pepper that we used in there

 Make your guests aware that there is a pepper in there so they bite through it

 Turn the heat off and just let the residual heat cook through that

 I mean it's a tasty to dish guys very easy to put together if you have some leftover rice

A nice festive pineapple rice here if you want and I have it served up here in

 The same pineapple that I use all I did was I core it out to make it nice and pretty and then you know

Oh one more tip guys if you want you can put some toasted shredded coconut on there as well

 So I've got to clean that, but I've also got to take off this gas tank

 and flush it out because the gas that's in there is old and varnished.

 And then there's one spring that goes right in that piece there.

 That's part of your throttle mechanism that you have to unhook.

 So I don't think there's too much wrong other than it had bad gas

 because I think there's probably a little bit of dirt in there most likely.

 And now I see there's some dirt down in there that was plugging it up,

 And it was down inside the fuel tank because it had come loose.

 What this does, this sucks the fuel up into the diaphragm in here, your fuel pump,

 Okay, I've got the pull start back on and the clutch cleaned up in there.

 Hi, I'm Melissa from Northline Express here with one of my favorite mosquito control products

 If you're not familiar with the product, it's a great all-natural mosquito repellent.

 It's used, it's actually made of 100% garlic juice so that it's going to be perfectly safe

 for use around pets, fish, plants, as well as your children and yourself.

 So it's a great way to keep mosquitoes away, especially with all these crazy mosquito-borne

 The best way to prevent those is by preventing mosquito bites and the best way to prevent

 mosquito bites is to use Garlic Barrier to keep those mosquitoes away.

 The way it actually works is it's got, garlic has natural sulfur in it and that's what the

 And the area spray, this is capable of keeping them away for about a month's time.

 But the first time you apply it, you're going to want to spray once and then again within

 about a week's time, spray again because that's going to just help kick it in really well

 because the mosquitoes weren't used to that garlic smell so they haven't left yet.

 Once that second dose is applied, they're going to really know to stay away.

 The Garlic Barrier is available in gallon sizes as well as the quart sizes.

 The product does have a great shelf life of two years if you keep it in a cool, dark place.

 It's got great uses, but today I'm going to talk to you about using the Mosquito Barrier

 to mix, how to mix it so you can use it to spray your yard and keep those mosquitoes

 So what I've got here, I'm going to set aside my other barrier here, but I've got my quart

 I've got my pressure sprayer and then I've got my hose nearby so I can fill up my pressure

 So for each gallon of water, you're going to use four ounces and I've got a mason jar

 here that's very nicely marked out in ounces, but you could use any type of measuring apparatus

 So what I'm going to do is simply just measure out the four ounces.

 So if you have also a larger measuring, or I'm sorry, larger pressure sprayer, then it's

 It's diluted and kind of cloudy in color, but that's absolutely normal.

 Once you fill your pressure sprayer up to the line on the max line and mix that in,

 When you are applying it, yes, you're going to smell that garlic spray, but don't be alarmed.

 In a few minutes, we're not going to be able to smell it anymore, but it's going to still

 So I'm going to go ahead and mix in my Garlic Barrier along with my water, and then I'm

 going to show you the best way to apply your Garlic Barrier for the best results.

 Okay, so I've added my Barrier, and I've filled my pressure tank to the capacity line.

 So I'm going to go ahead and put the lid on, and then we're ready to go.

 So while I'm waiting here, I'm going to go ahead and pressurize that.

 So while I'm getting my tank ready here, the best time of day is actually going to be to

 do this in the early evening or again in the early morning, between about the hours of

 It's when the mosquitoes are going to be the most active, so you're going to for sure have

 The mosquitoes most likely aren't in the area, so it's most effective to make sure you're

 So I've started here so I can give you guys a pretty good example of the different areas

 I want you to make sure you're spraying completely with the Garlic Barrier to get really good

 I've got here a garden, flower beds, some pots, as well as a grassy area on my property.

 What you're going to want to do after you get your pressure tank ready to go is give

 You're going to want to use a sweeping motion and just like you'd apply any other type of

 product to your lawn, you're going to want to go back and forth until you get it accurately

 Just a sweeping motion, great exercise as well as a great way to keep the mosquitoes

 Mosquito Barrier is another great product from Northline Express, home of the Buy and

 Don't forget we're also your one-stop shop for all your mosquito control solutions.

 Hi, I'm Lori here in the I Love to Create Design Studios and I'm here today to talk

 to you about one of my favorite products, which is Tulip Tie-Dye.

 you some helpful tips and techniques so that you can get the best possible result with

 table with plastic table covers or plastic wrap works well also.

 to put down a layer of paper towels that will help to absorb excess dye while you're dyeing

 in the dryer and then you can start your project right from there.

 gloves when you're handling the dyes because it will stain your fingers temporarily.

 water to the dye bottles, fill them up to the line, put the cap back on and shake it

 to lose their concentration and may not give you the color intensity in your project that

 it reacts with the water you're using and it can stain your fabric.

 the dye directly to the fabric, checking to make sure that your dye is penetrating all

On the other hand, you don't want to oversaturate your fabric because dye

 colors can blend together, they may become muddy or create a color that you weren't intending.

 You can also create new colors the same way by blending them directly on the fabric or

 Fully rinse your dyed fabric in the sink until all of the extra dye runs clear and take off

 with the hottest water that you can use for the fabric you've chosen and just a small

And you can also place small things in a laundry bag for easier washing.

 So those are some simple tips and techniques so that you get the best result using our

 Use our code, EVERYDRINK10, save 10% off, orders of $50 or more.

 I'm your host, Derek Shomer, and today we're going to make a drink that I designed myself.

 It's passion fruit, coconut, that's our coconut, and we're going to be using the Vita Coco

 I could check internationally, but more than likely, if you're international, you would

 I guess that's supposed to be a passion fruit picture, because there are passion fruits that

 I've tried their regular coconut water, and believe it or not, damn skippy, it tastes

 Anyway, this is a coconut, and what I did to test what the coconut water would taste

 You could always use a knife that's really sharp and heavy, none of which I had besides

 Actually, first, we put the straws right in it, and my kids drank it straight out of there.

 The water is not as sweet as you think it would be, and that is what the Vita Coco tastes

 If you ground this up a lot and tumbled it to get all that thick husk off, I believe

 This is what happens when you've basically used a machine, I guess, to rip off all the

 Then, with this one, since it was smaller, again, I went back to this was actually harder

 I just keep beating on it until I was able to open it up, poured out the water, much

 In order to get any type of ice in there, I'm using crushed ice for this recipe.

 What I did is three ounces of Vita Coco coconut water with passion fruit, one whole passion

 This one could probably stand a couple more days, but I don't have a couple more days.

 I found that kind of brought a little sweetness because this tends to have a little acidity,

 a little tartness to it, along with a butt ton of passion fruit.

 This one we did an ounce because we found that it was just a little overbearing, overpowering,

 We doubled the ingredients and did two ounces of the Crujian coconut rum.

 Two ounces of Crujian, one ounce of dark rum, three ounces of the Vita Coco with passion

 fruit, a half ounce of the simple syrup just to sweeten it up a little bit, a whole passion

 We actually worked kind of hard on this, so I'm kind of proud of what we have here.

 What I'm going to do is I'm going to start with the passion fruit.

 It's a bunch of seeds with juices in them, and just cutting it smells like the x-ray

 What I'm going to do is I'm literally just going to take all the guts out as much as

 It's no more, no less than say a cantaloupe, except this is the part you usually dump out

 So what you end up with is this weird brownish-yellow seedling thing.

 I don't find that there's a specific order that was required, since we're going to shake

 You can leave this out if you like a little more tartness to your drink.

 Yeah, it was a little bit better with the simple syrup in there.

 And the two ounces of coconut rum, really to keep the coconut flavor, because the Vita

 Coco is natural, so it's not going to have a huge super sweetness to it.

 Take everything you know about coconut, and that's not Vita Coco.

 Very healthy for you, but I think it fits really well in a cocktail because it brings

 a little bit of neat authenticity that you don't get, I don't think, very often.

 So you're not going to get a lot of that intense sweetness that makes you think it's fake.

 We used crushed ice just because of the glass difficulties we've got.

 Try putting a bunch of ice in there, it's going to take a while, and there's not going

 Reverse the movement and repeat for two or three sets of 8 to 12.

 Today I'm going to show you how to replace a broken starter gear on your snowblower.

 So what I'm going to do today is show you how to remove all these parts and put a new gear in.

 To do this job I'm using a starter kit from Tecumseh number 67346 and it's got these two tools in it.

 To start with I'm going to use these pliers here from the kit and remove the top cover here.

 All you have to do is squeeze it right at the top and then just pull it off.

 And I'm going to proceed and remove the rest of these parts here.

 And to remove that ring you're going to need this tool from the kit.

 If you don't have this tool kit you can always do it with a pair of pliers or snap ring pliers.

 To start with you want to make sure this is unscrewed so the part retracts inside.

 And if I show you inside here you can see that there's a small groove here in the part that I retracted for the wire clip to go in.

 As you can see the groove isn't totally centered on the part so you want it to be facing downwards.

 And you want the two claws here to be closed and to go right where the clip ends.

 And you can see that the wire clip is inside the groove on that square part inside.

 And here's another top view just to show you where the claws are.

 Now you may want to hold the claws together when you're tightening up the handle.

You're going to see the clip spread and it's going to come off the shaft.

 You only want to spread it enough so you can get it off the shaft.

 This part here, you can leave it down here because we're not going to replace that.

 To start with, I'm going to spray the shaft with some liquid wrench.

 And you want to make sure that the gear goes up and down like this when you turn it.

 Now when you turn the starter gear, it should come back down on its own.

 Now the last thing to install will be the plastic cover that goes on top.

 And after you've put the cover on, make sure that the gear still goes down when you bring it up.

 And now that the gear is back on, I'm ready to reinstall it on the snowblower.

 And before I start the job, I'm going to put some blue Loctite on the two bolts that hold the starter on.

 In the previous video, I showed that the gear broke because the starter had come loose on the snowblower.

 And the owner must have kept using it with the starter being loose

 When it comes to reinstalling the starter, what you want to do is line up the two notches here on the starter

 So I'll just grab the starter and make sure the fuel line is not in the way.

 And now I'm going to line up the two grooves to the shoulder bolts as I mentioned earlier.

 Once I've got the starter lined up to the shoulder bolts, I'm just going to push it up a bit and it's going to go right in.

 Now you've got to keep holding it there because you don't want it to fall back down.

 Now you need to line up the holes here on the starter to the holes on the engine.

 And you're going to need a number T27 Torx screwdriver to start them in.

 Now I'm going to reach down and just finish tightening them up.

 You don't want to go too crazy because you don't want to strip the threads.

 Now at this point you want to grab the electrical cord with the switch and line it up on the engine.

 I did take them off with my cordless drill, but I am not going to put them back on with it

 Sometimes with the drill you can easily damage the threads by over-tightening.

 And if you're going to start a snowblower in your garage, always open the doors to keep the exhaust out.

 You do not have to buy a whole new starter if you get this problem.

Make sure to subscribe if you want to save yourself a lot of money.

 Alrighty, Chef Buck here and today we're cooking red beans and rice with chorizo.

 And we're doing it in the woods because we're out here on the Appalachian Trail.

 Alrighty first thing we're going to do, we're going to cook it up in our little wood stove.

 I got a little lighter here because you know this is YouTube and you know I only got a

 And if I was doing it with flints and all that jazz, we'd be here all day.

 First you go in with some leaves, then you throw in a few bigger pieces.

 Alrighty so now we're going to put our little pot holder on here.

 Now my trail name when I'm hiking on the trail is Big Pan on account of I carry this big pot.

 So but this stove has a little door on the side or a little opening in the side where you can throw more twigs in there.

 Now we don't want to burn up the whole forest to do it so I'm going to go ahead and cover it.

Because you see because I'm an efficient camper I took all the handles and knobs and all the extra cosmetic doohickeys off my pan.

 So to enhance our red beans and rice we're going to put a little bit of chorizo in here.

 Because you know a pair of scissors is like two knives in love.

 So you don't have any varmints coming around your camp in the middle of the night.

 Chef Buck don't normally make this stuff so he's got to look at the directions.

 We've had a lot of high drama here around the camp so we lost count.

 But I think that's good enough so I'm going to go ahead and get it off the fire.

 And cool down man because if I grabbed that I'd be hollering like a...

If you're new to training with us, please visit our website so we can show you how to piece together all of our free video clips into a super effective and totally functional 45 minute workout.

This is one of the main factors that separates the pros from the average Joes.

Please listen to the directions throughout this video so you can actually get results from your efforts.

And remember, the focus starts with breathing and body awareness.

 Alright, you're going to need a stretch strap or a belt for this one.

And gently tug on that foot so you feel a stretch in the back of your calf.

Keep a gentle tension on that foot so you feel it right in the back of the leg.

 If you're slouching, you're going to put a lot of stress on that low back and it's going to make this calf even tighter.

You're going to be stretching the leg that's behind you on this.

 Right now, with the leg straight, we're stretching the gastroc.

 Now you bend the knee a little bit and you should feel this a little lower into the Achilles.

 If you power through things, not only will your muscles tighten up, your chance of injury shoots up.

 If your heel is sticking straight up, you know you need a lot of work here.

You're going to add some motion here so this is more of a dynamic stretch.

The leg that's on the ground, that's the calf you're stretching.

You're going to try and push that heel into the ground nice and easy.

 Good, extend that leg behind you and push that heel to the floor.

 Alright, if you want to continue your workout with us here at Got Function, then visit our website so you can choose your next free video.

 Remember, if you want results, then you need a program that's designed to match your goals.

 Check out our totally free phase 1 program so that you can get started right now on the body you've always wanted.

 My name is Dave Grohl, and this is my grocery at rockandguitarlessons.com and youtube.com

 That's the Mighty Dave Grohl from the Foo Fighters with Monkey Wrench, one of my personal

 So, you want to drop D on your tuning for this, so it's going to go D-A-D-G-B-E.

 If you still don't quite get that, check out my free lessons on tuning.

 If that isn't fast enough as it is and a little bit crazy, you have to play the open B string

 And then I take my 3rd finger, leave my other two fingers down to help stabilize that bend

 So, you want to bend it upwards, not down or you'll mute out the open B that needs to be ringing with it.

 And then 1st finger, 4th fret, G, hit that with the B string once.

 So, basically the only little spot there that's one time, everything else is twice.

 If you don't want to play the B string with it at first, then don't.

 And then apply the open B string to all of that, you know, once you're ready.

 Monkey Wrench by the Foo Fighters, Dave Grohl, the mighty Dave Grohl.

 So, it might be a little trickier than if you were just playing, you know, back and black from ACDC just in this one spot.

 If you're stuck on anything, man, hit me up on this lesson page on the YouTube channel.

 You'll be seeing a lot of my mug because I keep them coming, man.

 I wish I could see you guys, but we're going to work that out on the website.

 And when you want to go play something else, make sure you tune that sucker back up, man, to the standard.

 Hey everyone, this is part 2 of my tutorial on how to solve the 4x4 Rubik's Cube.

 And in the second part, I will show you how to pair up your edges,

 Also, I want to apologize on my poor audio for the first intro in part 1.

 so I was actually holding the camera to make sure it didn't fall down.

 Okay, so what we're basically going to be doing to finish off our 4x4

 So this edge is on this layer, while the other edge is on this layer.

 So when you have them on different layers and on opposite sides of a center,

 And just bring it to the opposite sides of the center and on different layers.

 OK, in this case, I'm trying to pair the green-white edge, and they're over here.

 So in this case, all you need to do is just rotate one of the edges to the other side,

 replace them with a random set of edges, bring those edges down,

 As you can see, they're already on opposite layers and opposite sides of the yellow center.

 So in this case, just bring the edges to the bottom layer like this.

 But as you can see, there are no random edges on the top and on the bottom.

 But as you can see, there is a random edge in the middle layer.

 So these are the two edges I'm trying to pair, and I have this third random edge.

 So you can just bring that to the top layer, and now you'll have a random edge on top.

 Now I can just pair these edges normally, bring them to the top layer,

 this time you need to make sure that both of the edges are on the same layer.

 So if they're on different layers like this, just bring them to the same layer.

 So in this case, I have the blue and white edge to pair, and the orange and white edge to pair.

 And then you can just bring the centers back to normal, and both of your edges are paired.

 However, there are some parities that you can get on the last layer, and I'll go over those in a second.

 So this is the parity that you may get on the 4x4, which doesn't occur on the 3x3.

 You can have this case or this case, and both cases are impossible to get on a regular Rubik's Cube.

 So if you have this case, just hold the center and the edge horizontally like this,

 Now in this case, one edge needs to be flipped so that you can get the cross.

 And this algorithm is pretty long, and what it does is it flips this edge so that you have the cross.

 So at this edge facing you, you just need to remember that when you see L in the algorithm,

 you hold these two layers, and when you see R, you hold these two layers.

 So the algorithm is 2R, 2B, 2U, L, 2U, RI, 2U, R, 2U, 2F, R, 2F, LI, 2B, 2R.

 In this case, both of these corners are correct, while these two corners are not.

 So all you need to do to get all four of the corners in the correct place

 is the same algorithm that you used to flip this edge correctly,

 So with the corners that are correct facing you, do that algorithm.

 And as you can see, the parity is fixed, but you've also swapped these two edges.

 If you have a lowercase letter like lowercase L, it means to turn the inner left layer.

 And when you have a capital and a lowercase letter, it means to turn those two layers.

 So UU means to turn these top two layers, and lowercase L means to turn the inner left layer.

 So the algorithm to fix this edge is 2UU, 2LL, 2U, 2L, 2U, 2LL, 2UU.

 My next video will show you how to take apart and reassemble your 4x4,

 Hey guys, I'm not really a fan of protective styles, but winter is upon us and I know it's

 I've also gotten tons of requests for the French Twist, so this will be video 1 in a

 I'm going from easiest to most complex, so this first style is super simple.

 I'm working on old twist out hair because this would be the everyday situation when

 First I misted my hair with water for moisture and flexibility.

 Then I twist the hair to the side to give the fringe direction and create texture.

 Then I twist the other little section I pulled out on the opposite side for texture.

 Working in the back, split the hair into a top and bottom half with more on the bottom.

 Smooth the top half, twist it loosely, then pin it in place in the back of the head to

 Don't make it too big, we're not going for the snooky look here.

 Then smooth all the rest of your hair over to the right side of your head and bobby pin

 Separating that back portion in half, twist it loosely once or twice towards the ends.

 Then tuck the ends into the twist and continue to roll it down until it meets the head.

 Now I'm going to finish getting ready for my day, leaving those twists in at the front.

 If you're driving to work, you can leave the twists in during your commute to let it set.

 Whatever the case, after about 20 minutes, you can release the twists and create your

 If your bangs are long, you can use the method of twisting the ends together and then pulling

 An easy, casual, protective style where your ends are nice and covered.

 okay I'm going to explain exactly how this system actually works what you have

 is you have a vs8 828 1039 Honeywell safety ignition device so your gas flows

 this direction so you have it's coming from your low pressure manifold and then

 it goes out and up to your on off valves you also have a quarter inch pilot line

 that comes out and runs in through the back side and up through this middle

 device which is which is here which is bolted down by four quarter 20 volts

 okay that's this device this device is shown without the holes punched in it

 for the core 20 device so what you actually have is your pilot quarter inch

 pilot line comes into this this pilot which actually has a little micro orifice

 in the middle of it that allows the flame to come out this shoot that shoot

 in the mid shoot the middle shoot actually has a flame hitting this

 thermal pile this is a thermal pile that's removable by taking those four

 bolts loose and you want to lift up just enough that you can get a wrench in here

 and take that it's a 7 16th wrench take that nut loose and take the thermal pile

 loose and if you have the threaded in which is the other end of it loose there

 is a picture that will send you there's a there's a mid jumper block in the

 middle of the barbecue underneath this cow this this shroud that runs a jump

 jumper wires run from there up to this device so here's how this device works

 when you put heat to this this switch this is actually a thermal pile that the

 more heat that it gets it sends millivolts okay so this switch has to

 have a jumper running from the th to the th which would normally go to a

 thermal pile or thermostatic will register on a wall or a controller that

 tells it how many how many how hot or when to come on and when to go off so

 here we actually have that jumper wire actually in place because we're not

 using a thermostat we're actually just using burners so this this is shown

 without the jumper wire on it absolutely has to be in place for this

 to function so your thermal plier wires come into the the opposite side of this

 Honeywell device red goes on the the short side red to red and then the white

 is your your your your common coming across okay so when this it gets hot it

 actually sends voltage in the way of millivolts so what I'm going to do is

 I'm going to actually fire up this barbecue and I'm going to actually show

 you with my own meter where to actually do the testing so if you're having

 pilot issues or the thing keeps going out it's possible that this thermal pile

 has failed I've only had one failure out of a out of a whole plethora of

 barbecues they don't typically fail but I have seen it so this is a great way to

 test to see if you need a new thermal file but when we ship the barbecues we

 did testing that doesn't mean that they won't that they can't fail they're

 they're like any other electrical device so I'm going to turn this back to pilot

 and I'm actually going to before I before I turn the pilot I'm going to

 show you guys this is a Greenlee DM 20 and I'm going to run it all the way down

 to 200 on my own okay right now it's it's reading 1.0 so if I take and I

 actually hold red on red black on the white I'm getting a reading of 2.7 2.5

 and what I want to do is I want the pilot to start and I want it to start

 okay it's staying lit I can either leave this in pilot or turn it on it doesn't

 make any difference I'm going to re-put my ohm meter back on red on red the

 black on the white wire now look at my ohm meter it's constantly going up I

 have it 66.9 67 68 69 70 71 this will keep growing and growing and growing all

 the way up to 750 millivolts so this is a great thermal pile it's working great

 it's sensing the heat and it's actually continually gradually going up telling

 this device that it's okay to flow gas when this connection is lost broken or

 or drops off if these numbers start to go down this device will shut off it it

 will not allow gas to flow that's what that's what makes it a safety ignition

 device the pilot must be on for the gas to flow if the pilot will not stay lit

 it's because the thermal pile is not telling this device to allow gas to

 continue to flow with your finger off the pilot button if this device is

 working correctly then then everything electrically is flowing you're getting

 positive millivolts and you can turn this to on you are able to start your

 barbecue at will if you're having a problem with the pilot constantly going

 out but you have good thermal pile readings there is two procurements you

 could be at a different elevation sea level wise are you so what we do is if

 you look right here it says pilot adjustment so I would take this off with

 a large screwdriver or a Phillips screwdriver this this screw and it is a

 gasketed screw so if you notice that below the screw there's actually a

 gasket that's just to keep the dirt and dust out now if you look down inside of

 it you'll need a micro screwdriver okay so this is a micro screwdriver so you

 put you take your micro screwdriver in there now if you take it and you turn it

 clockwise that means your flame will get lesser if you go counterclockwise your

 flame will get bigger so if you need a larger flame because your your flame

 won't stay lit then you need to turn the flame up so that it'll stay lit it all

 depends on what altitude you're at so when I adjust them here I try to I try

 to set them so the flame is raging pretty good so it stays lit there's more

 so if your burners aren't going completely infrared and they should go

 infrared then you can adjust your flame by taking this screw cover off and then

 this screw here you want to actually start screwing it clockwise as you screw

 it clockwise you'll be adding pressure to your infrared drives which would pick

 the flame up hotter and make them go infrared faster that's how this device

 this thermal pile can be tested on the ground just by using flame on this and

 Navy Grog was invented by Don the Beachcomber, who's considered by many to be the father

 great Tiki drinks in a great tropical setting and just feel like I'm somewhere far away

 on this recipe, some call for crushed ice and others call just for regular ice cubes.

 do is just put some ice into my blender and just pulse it a few times.

 So once you have your ice, go ahead and add a half ounce of light rum.

 The Grand Marnier is going to give it a great additional orange flavor to it as well.

 once you have all that combined, go ahead and get your cocktail shaker and shake it

This drink is normally served in a Collins glass, but today I thought it

 pour this drink out, you can smell all the aromas of the citrus from the orange and the

 your first sip, you can taste the orange, the grapefruit and the pineapple.

 also get a hint of the dark rum, which is not overpowering because of the other rums,

You get that additional orange flavor and a little almost brandy flavor to

 Now if you just want to see the final product, this is the final product.

 So yeah, you can get the origami paper and marshals, I recommend marshals, but yeah.

 Now to assemble it, you want three pieces of paper for one vertex.

 So you are going to put, you are going to rotate it, stick one end into that pocket.

 Now it might look complete, but you are going to need another one.

 The important part is, you are going to want to loosen it, but don't let it come out.

 Put it in there like that, and see the yellow is still in that one, and the tip of the purple

 So now, I am going to do purple this time, and then you put the purple in the flap.

 Then you grab the same color or different color, put it in the pocket, bring the other

 So, sorry it is going off the camera and stuff, everybody doesn't have a good place to put it.

 I am doing this really slow, so if you didn't get it the first couple of times, then there.

 You are not going to make another vertex there, you are going to leave these two ends like that.

 You are going to have to do it a little slow, and get it in there.

 And then pop it down, and get it as snug or tight as possible, and there.

 Now grab another color, or the same color, put that pocket in there, rotate that, put it in there, and there.

 See a ring of five, one, two, three, four, five, and here is the ring of five.

 If you have any problems or need help, like, subscribe, send me a message,

 and then I will make another video showing you all the problems and how to solve them.

 And we're going to start with something that I got at the grocery store called Baby Red

 And I'm just going to open this up and let you see that we have a variety of sizes in

 So I'll just be picking out the ones that are all about the same size.

 So what I'm going to do is choose my potatoes, peel them, and then I'll get back with you.

 More than likely, you'll have more people to cook for, so just increase the recipe as

 needed because it's one of those that you just add as much as you want of all of the

 But I'm peeling these new potatoes because I'm going to put a coating on it before I

 Normally, I like to keep the skin on the red potatoes because it's very healthy and I don't

 want to remove that necessarily, but I don't think my coating will stick if I leave the

 So what we're going to do is have our peeled potatoes that are all about the same size.

 You notice I chose the larger of the ones that were in that little baby red bag.

 What we're going to do is salt that water before I put my potatoes in.

 And this is the only salting they will get because, again, I want some things to stick

 So if I salt them and expect it to stick to the outside after they're cooked, it may or

 So this ensures that the potatoes will have a nice salted flavor.

 One teaspoon of salt goes into your water and then you're going to put in your potatoes.

 And these will need to cook probably 10 minutes or so, 10 to 15.

 And when they're done, I'll come back and we'll continue with our baking and feasting

 So they'll be a little bit on the tough side when you press the fork into them, but that's

 So I'm going to bring them over to the sink and pour this water off.

 So to do that, I'm going to let them just air dry a little bit and get that moisture

 And I was just trying to see if it was going to be enough without finishing it all out.

 So some kind of utensil that will allow you to turn these over.

 Probably something smaller than this, but this is what I was using to tin them at the

 Just remember we've already salted them, so this is going to give them some nice flavor.

 And I'll swirl that around a little bit and use this to turn them over.

 And I can do a little better with getting the butter over them, but you can see the

 These are fine, dry bread crumbs, and this is the plain variety.

 If you'd like to have a little bit of spice in them, then you can get the Italian variety,

 and it would probably have some oregano, basil, stuff like that.

 And you're going to put the plain ones, maybe a half cup, just whatever you need, put it

 I probably would have done better off to bring a spoon or a fork or something, but you can

 And then I don't think there's going to be any problem of us putting it back in this

 You might want to drain this butter off, but I think you'll be fine.

 So I'm going to put it back in the dish and then do the next one.

 I do want them to be plenty buttery, and I didn't take care of a lot of buttering before

 So if you want to roll them in the butter and in the crumbs again, as long as the butter

 holds out, that's fine because you don't need them sitting in butter as they're in the oven.

 When I finish with all of these, getting them coated, maybe double coated, as long as that

 And then these will go into a 400 degree oven and we'll bake them about 10 minutes,

 So it doesn't need time for baking, it just needs time for browning.

 So I'll be back when those are done and show you what they look like.

 Our oven browned new potatoes have just come out of the oven and they took 15 minutes at

 They're done when they go in, but they've cooled off a little bit and you have this

 This one will be on how to replace the fuse on your lawnmower with electric start.

 Now it's for to power the electric start, like if it doesn't work and if you tried replacing

 your battery and if it still doesn't work, then chances are your fuse could be blown.

 Alright, so just grab the fuse, and usually we'll just simply just pull it right out,

 And if it's all dirty in there, then just blow it with compressed air.

 Use like either a can of in-dust, a multi-purpose duster, or you could use an air compressor

 So now we'll just stick our new fuse and just push it right in.

 Now we'll just put it back in it's little slot, it goes in like that.

 So that's how you would replace a fuse on a lawnmower with electric start.

 Now if the electric starter still does not work once after you've replaced the fuse and

 the battery, then you could have problems with your starter motor.

 Hello again I'm Rodney Reynolds and welcome to another unboxing video.

 on the back some more features and information about the product.

 picking up this box in the store or if you get it in the mail or whatever make sure that this seal

 is not broken because if it is I would seriously look inside the box make sure everything is

 Okay we've got another box so let's see what's inside this box.

This is the thermal compound, springs, washers and all that kind of stuff.

 This gets installed in the back of the case in the case's expansion slot and it's black.

 Heat sinks inside here and I don't know if the fans are included or not.

 By the way the packaging here foam on either side and the fan itself.

 some baked brie with a blueberry chutney, some prosciutto wrapped prawns with fresh

 basil and lemon and wine and some pita chips baked fresh in the oven.

 I'm going to chop them up, toss them with some olive oil and season them up.

 brie I'll toss that in the oven and then I'll make a blueberry chutney with blueberry,

 vanilla sugar, lime, cilantro, a hot pepper and some rice vinegar.

 wraps I'm going to get some nice prawns here and season them up with some fresh basil,

 garlic, wine, lemon and pepper and roll them up and fry them in some olive oil.

 First thing to do is pop the brie in the oven and chop up the pitas, make nice chips out

 them with salt, pepper, paprika or whatever kind of seasoning you like.

 to keep them pretty simple though because they are going to go well with the dish.

 them in the oil that way, spread them out a bit and toss them in the oven.

 going to season our prawns here with a little bit of fresh basil, a chiffonade which means

 of a scant half of a lemon and some pepper, a little bit more, I like a lot of pepper

Prosciutto sticks really well to the prawns so you don't really have

 We're just going to stick the toothpicks right in here just to keep them together.

 Alright, the next thing we're going to work on would be our chutney.

I'm going to leave the seeds in the hot pepper because I like the chutney a little

At the same time I'm going to add a little bit of garlic for flavor.

 Hi guys, this is Maila Muerte from the Film the Book of Life look.

 Start off by blocking out your eyebrows with a craft glue stick and a palette knife.

 I'm painting my beard and mustache area in white Mehron face paint with a foundation brush.

 Grab your beauty blender and blend all the white so it's nice and smooth.

 And we look less like we've been hitting the face with a cream pie.

 Using Mehron Berry Red and a detail brush or a fine paint brush.

 And you want the line to go thicker in the middle and tail out towards the corners.

 Take Mehron Black and a detail brush and line inside of that red outline.

 Again you want it to be thicker in the middle and tail out towards the edges.

 For the eyes I'm using Want It All, Cross The Line and Do It For Me from the Eyeheart Sin palette by Makeup Revolution.

 Blend them together and then put a little bit of white in the centre of your eyelid.

 Line your eyes with black gel liner and try and make the wing match that reverse wing that you've done on the outside.

 This is the moment I realised my month old gel liner has gone dry and nasty.

 So if anyone's got recommendations for a decent gel liner please let me know in the comments.

 For the bottom of the eye I'm just lining a third on the outer corner and a third on the inner corner.

 With a detail brush and Mehron Berry Red start drawing the petals around the eye shape.

 I'm using Mehron's Mango and Orange face paints and alternating the colours in the waterline.

 I'm using a lipstick brush and kind of patting it into the spaces because you don't want to smudge the red if you can help it.

 If you do you can just tidy it up afterwards with a detail brush and some more of the red.

 Take the detail brush and Red Berry and just add dots into each petal and along the black lines.

 Then draw a cross in the centre of your forehead with lines on the ends of the lines of the cross.

 I find hearts easiest to do by drawing a straight line going down, a dot either side and then joining those dots up to the bottom of the line.

 Add an upside down triangle to the top of the heart and draw some heart teardrops on the cheeks and some dots down the nose.

 With a detail brush and Mehron Black draw on the nose shape and fill it in.

 Exploding hearts weren't enough so now we're going to add some fire coming out of it.

 She's got the same kind of swirly pattern going on on her forehead.

 She has thiszel of a lot of swirls, it's very likely the swollen parts

 which is what I'm doing, or you can just freestyle a load of swirls across your head.

 She's got the same kind of swirly pattern going on across her jaw and cheeks, so add

Just when you're painting the swirls, try and do it in one movement so the lines

 I'm using Vamp by Makeup Revolution to line my lips and Lady to fill them in, and adding

 You could stop there and just wear a red dress, but I'm going to paint mine on.

 filling out the neck to make a v-neck with the Mehron White, and blending it into the

Then using Mehron's Red Berry to cover the rest of my chest and shoulders

Then I'm taking Red by Mehron, which is more of a burgundy colour to do the

 pattern on the dress, and a matte black eyeshadow to go along the edges of the dress, and just

 to create the creases and wrinkles in the fabric and the seams.

 make patterns on the arms, and then just going back with blacks and dark reds and whites

 This is just the opening of a beam complex, also used for leg and arm tightening and strength.

 It looks simple, but it makes the arms burn, the legs burn, in preparation for routines

 You want them to know where their arms are, to feel their arms, to feel their releves.

 And then the stomach automatically will go in as the hips flatten, the low back.

 Very good for ankle strength to be able to do those full turns in a releve.

 You can see that the weight is not on the big toe on this foot.

 Don't let that weight go out onto the baby toe on the right foot, Lana.

 Checking out this high releve, we're building ankle strength, making sure they keep the

 Hello everybody, Chef Bob here today and I'm going to show you how to fry an egg in cast

 One is have your cast iron pan well seasoned from prior use or baking in an oven.

 Now you want to add, you can't use like a non, it's not a nonstick pan like a teflon

 You need to use some type of oils to avoid your food from sticking, to prevent it from

 So you can either use a butter, a coconut oil, a good oil which can handle the heat,

 You can use bacon drippings, I'm using bacon drippings here from some bacon that I ditched

 So the pan is hot and I put some rendered bacon drippings on here and now let's fry

 Oh another thing is when you want to flip your eggs I recommend a metal spatula.

 Do not use a plastic one, it'll just get ripped up and fall apart.

 So get a nice metal one with a smooth edge, it's not sharp and that will allow you to

 Oh and here's a nice little thing, this is a cover, you can get these in all different

 colors and sizes, insulated handle covers so you don't burn yourself.

 You want to make sure your pan is hot before you start and add your oil.

 And just leave it go, leave it set for a couple, leave it to its cooking.

 Don't keep playing with it and that's how you'll get food to stick and destroy it.

 We're going to make this over easy which is a very good test for cast iron.

 When you first put food on cast iron it will stick like glue for the first couple of seconds

 or minute or two and once it finishes frying it should be easy to flip.

 There's enough residual heat in this pan to finish the cooking process.

 I don't like them over too long so we'll take this off pretty quickly here.

 And then I'll flip it over and show you what it looks like on that side.

 And there you have it, a perfectly cooked egg using a cast iron pan.

 And then what it's also useful for is after you finish cooking your eggs you can use this

 My mom always liked it because it was thinner and easier to use and easier to wrap.

 And actually what I do is I cut them in half when I roll them so then I can get more per package

 because if they're open to the dry air, they'll become brittle and then they'll crack and they won't wrap as well.

 So you take one of the half sheets and you put it on the diagonal.

 You want to take an egg and you want to scramble it into a container

 because this is what you're going to use to seal your egg roll.

 So you take your egg roll mixture with about a tablespoon or so

 Then before you seal it, you know it's kind of like an envelope,

 So you just keep doing this over and over until you finish all of your meat mixture

 and then you go ahead and to make it healthier, you want to just bake it at 425 degrees

 in the oven for about 10 minutes and you'll have healthier egg rolls.

 and for about 10 minutes as well until it's golden brown and delicious.

 Then you can use it with a chili dipping sauce for the dipping sauce.

 Macaroni salad is inexpensive, simple to make, and the homemade variety rivals the mushy,

 Macaroni salad is usually made with elbow macaroni, but you can use any short pasta.

 This recipe includes three hard-boiled eggs, which you can omit if desired or if you're

 This will limit the amount of dressing soaked up by the cooked pasta and prevent your macaroni

 Meanwhile, as the pasta is cooking, in a large bowl, combine mayonnaise, Dijon mustard, minced

 celery, minced sweet pickles or sweet pickle relish, minced red onion, minced fresh parsley,

 Season to taste with kosher salt and fresh ground black pepper and stir to thoroughly

 Thoroughly drain the cooked pasta to remove as much water as possible, add it to the mixing

 Cover the bowl and refrigerate at least two hours or up to one day prior to serving.

 A five-ounce serving, about one cup, made with reduced-fat mayonnaise has about 210

 This is a follow-up video to the front derailleur trim adjustment seen on Psychnut.

 What we're going to do here is cover a couple basic reasons why you may need to adjust the

 The most common issue is you can't actually get into one of the gears in the front.

 A less common issue is going to be the chain actually comes off the top chainring on the

 The common cause for this is a lot of bike shops when they set the bike up, they set

 So in this particular case, this chain is actually coming off the top, which indicates

 the high stop is not set correctly in addition to the cable also not being set correctly.

 So to diagnose this, what you need to do first is put the rear cassette into the highest

 gear and then manually pull the front derailleur cable and confirm there is an interference

 Also, the high and low may depend on if you have an up swing or down swing derailleur.

 The easy way to find out is to manually actuate the cable until it stops.

 So in this case, I can clearly feel this is the correct high stop.

 And you can hear a real slight tick, so we'll go ahead and give it an additional half a

 There's no way the chain can come off the top of it, but we do need to verify it can't

 Before I shift all the way down in the front derailleur though, I need to put the rear

 cassette somewhere in the middle, shift the front down, and then check for cable tension

 What you're looking for is if this cable is slack, it means the derailleur is setting

 on the stop already, and you need to readjust the tension on the shifter.

 If the cable is not slack, what you need to do is ensure if it does go all the way slack,

 The easy way to do that is go ahead and adjust the low stop, I'm sorry, not the B-stop, until

 And when you turn this, it turns very easily until it actually hits the stop, and you can

 So at this point, manually actually in the cable, you can see there's no rub on the bottom,

 Stay tuned for a follow-up on how to do the rear derailleur, including the B-stop, the

 I want to show everybody that anybody can do your make your own products.

 I have two children and run three businesses, so if I can do it, you can do it.

 We're getting the recipe from healthfulpursuit.com and we're going to put a link to that site

 You need to have six cups of water, which I've already measured out.

 You need flax seeds, which unfortunately mine are already ground up.

 I've actually bought the dates and they come with pits and I've already pitted the dates.

 All of the measuring the water and the pitting the dates took me about 20 seconds.

 So the first thing we're going to do is we're going to pour the six cups of water into the

 We have a cup right here and we're going to do a fourth of a cup here.

 And the reason I don't have all this pre-prepared is because I don't want you guys to have a

 And when everything's pre-prepared, it seems like it happens a lot faster than it does.

 The reason we're making our own flax milk is because all the store bought has all sorts

 So we're frustrated and we're just going to make our own from now on.

 It says we're going to place the flax seeds in the jug and add the water.

 Then it says we're supposed to filter it through, which probably won't make as much of a difference

 because I'm using the ground one, so it probably is just not going to work that great.

 If there's any big pieces, we're going to try to filter it through so we don't drink it.

 Another thing you would want to think about since we're the chemical people is be thoughtful

 Most of them are made with that soft pliable plastic that contains phthalates in them.

 Somebody said to use pantyhose, but I don't know what pantyhose is made of, so I really

 This is a stainless steel filter, so this is probably going to take a little longer.

 In the future, I would recommend using Bob's Red Mill, the whole flax seeds, and grinding

 them as per the recipe says, adding them actually the whole ones with the water and then blending

 I would not use pantyhose because I don't know what kind of chemicals are in pantyhose,

 but it kind of eliminates the purpose of what I'm trying to do, which is avoid chemicals.

 So now what we're going to do is we're going to pour it back into the blender.

 And this is the time that you wish you had a Vitamix because my blender didn't blend

 There's still some dates in there, but we are going to take a little filter here

 All in all, we have nothing but vanilla and dates and flax milk and use filtered water

 because if you're putting fluoride and chlorine and all the toxins from your tap water in

 And we will come back when we're done with this and we'll be back with a new video.

 The lids do have PVC in the top of them, so make sure that your milk doesn't touch that.

 Or you can also purchase some plastic safe polypropylene lids that are ball replacements

 So this actually makes the perfect amount for a little ball jar here.

 I have a suspicion I'll probably have to scoop some of the stuff that rises to the top a

 But if any of you guys have better recipes or some ways to make this a little easier

 Please just put some comments at the bottom or even post your own video.

 Send it to me and I'll attach it to this site, to this webpage.

 Hi, I'm Gitaelle from Overnight Artist and in this video I want to show you how to draw

 So in the heart you can draw anything you like, love mom, I love you or happy birthday,

 Ok, let's start out with a circle for the face and another stretched circle for the

 Now draw the line for the fancy hat with a loop on both sides like this.

 I'm gonna continue the hat, make it nice and fancy with a big bow over here.

 Ok, now we can erase the guidelines and we're gonna draw two big eyes.

 Ok, now we're gonna draw the scarf, the hand and complete the body.

 After you're done drawing this you may want to see how to color it or go over and see

 Inside the heart we're gonna write something, you can write I love you, love mom or happy

 If you want to learn how to draw bubble letters you could go over to my tutorial.

 You don't need them if you don't want them, but you need something really pointy.

 Doesn't matter what kind, but make sure that they're rubber bands that won't break very easily if you twist them.

 Um, this, uh, we're gonna make, there's two parts that you make, and then you put them together, which I'll show you how to do that.

 Um, see, like, you make another one of these, and then you turn it, and then they lock together onto another one.

 I have holes in the middle right here, and I just have to wrap one rubber band in there through here.

 And I couldn't get this one to, I couldn't tie a knot on this one like I did with the other one.

 I'll teach you how to make one of these, and then we'll put them together.

 What you do is you take your needle, and what you do is you, uh, poke a hole right through here.

 So, poke a hole, and then just kind of poke holes around it, and then kind of combine the holes so that it gets kind of a big one.

 And, exit off, when you make the cube, exit off exactly so that you get the exact middle where the lines intersect, and poke a hole through that.

 So that when you put your rubber band in, in the, this hole that I made, it, and you stick it up through this, and I'll show you how to do that.

 So, once you have that, one hole, once you have that, what you're gonna do is you're gonna take your rubber band, and you're gonna tie a knot on your needle.

 Now, when you, now, stick your needle through the, through the, uh, hole that you made.

 Alright, so now, you're gonna take your rubber band, and you're gonna tie a knot.

 And these little cubes aren't that stable, so it's gonna be a little bit harder to make holes in them and stuff.

 I wouldn't recommend these kind of rubber bands, the little skinny blue ones, but they're the only ones that I have to, that I can use right now.

 I might, I'll replace them later, but, when I get rubber bands, but this is all I found in my little cubby.

 So, I, I recommend the tan ones, they're a little bit stronger.

 But, so, I can't really tie this knot, so I will make a part to where, that, I'll show you how to put it together.

 But, you just make a hole, and then tie a knot on this, on this needle, tie a knot with this on the there, so that when you have this rubber band on there, tie a knot, it'll go into that hole.

 And then you stick it up, all the way until you get to this hole, in the middle.

 And then, you just, when there's a loop right there, you just tape it.

 I'll do that, and then I will make a video of me putting the two of them together.

 If you need any more help, just comment, and I can help you with that.

 I wasn't going to teach this on the acoustic just because it's really difficult to get

 a good sound with it, but some guitars are severer than others, you might be able to

 But if I had an electric guitar, this is how the chorus would play, I'm sorry, the solo

 If you listen to the song after the second verse, there's a solo.

 So it sounds really crappy right now with this, but basically the way it's played is

 on your 7th fret, the D chord, you're going to press that down on the 7th fret, just that

 So we'd go, hit it once, you're going to bend up on the B chord, slide over two frets

 to your 7th fret, and then the G chord will be on the, or the B chord, sorry, will be

 on the 6th fret, 3rd fret for the D. Now this will go to the 5th fret of your B, 3rd fret

 Then an open A. Then you're going to wait about 4, 6, 8 measures, however long you want

 And I just did that slide right there for that part, but there's just a little variation

 But the way I taught it in the other parts of this video, I believe in the first video,

 was just twice like that on the D chord, 4th fret, open A, back down to D.

 If you watch all three, that's how you're going to play a heart shape box from beginning

 And again, you can make little variations in there if you want to, to make it, tweak

 And that's what all great artists do when they're doing the cover.

If you're following along on the scale lessons, if you've learnt the minor pentatonic,

 position of the major pentatonic and I'll do you a close up of it and then I'll talk

 Ok, as usual the PDF is up on the website of this scale and like the minor pentatonic

 going to start off with the little finger at the 5th fret on the thick E string, the

Then we're going to play the 4th fret of the A string with the 3rd

Then we're going to play the 2nd fret of the D string with the 1st finger.

 and if you look at the theory lessons up on the website you start to understand how

 lesson at all because you can get that somewhere else on the site.

It's because the major pentatonic scale is probably the biggest scale

 pentatonic over songs in the minor key to improvise lead guitar solos.

 pentatonic or can use the major pentatonic in songs in the major key to improvise guitar

But what you might notice, the reason I showed you the same position really, and

 again this is in theory sessions, but every major key has got a relative minor.

 you might notice with that is it's the same fingering pattern as the minor pentatonic

 in the last lesson we were doing this for the minor pentatonic.

 because you can use that note but we're stopping on that note because it's a two octave minor

 finger we have to carry on to our little finger to get the root note again.

 used A just because I used A for the other one but you could use anywhere on the floor.

 That would be C major pentatonic because it's the 8th fret, the note C. Hopefully you

 should be picking this up if you're working it along with the PDF and along with the theory

 I've marked those in black dots and the other notes in the scale are marked in red dots

 Hey everyone, it's Deena and I'm going to do a quick mascara video that I love to do.

 You have to have a hair dryer that has a cool button because it really doesn't work with

 I've actually hurt myself right before I did this video so my eyes are totally watering.

 I actually pinched my hand on the tripod to my camera to the point where it was literally

 So I've already done the bottom eyelashes and we're going to start with the top eyelashes.

 Then you're going to take your hair dryer, put it on low, and hit the cool button.

 And then while that's cooling off in case it is just slightly warm, I'm going to do

 It's kind of hard to do when I've got the hair dryer in my lap.

 This is great for those mascaras that weigh your eyelashes down.

 When I apply the mascara and I walk through the house to finish getting ready

 and obviously they're hard as a rock and hard to do anything with.

 So this is great to make sure you get that look that you left the mirror with

 Sometimes I do that, but this mascara actually stays pretty good.

 I know I'm pulling a Hillary Clinton right now with a hair clip up in my hair.

I have already completed the letter P video and of course when I started

 these a couple weeks ago, I didn't actually stop to think that more of the letters could

 and then what you're going to do once you've completed that, and if I can put a link up

 you're going to make sure that you've separated and you're going to start yourself a new chain.

So for the lower stroke, that's the only difference between the P and the R, you're

 do, you're going to take this P and you're going to turn it over and right here, let's

 see if I can zoom in, where you stopped your process and slip stitched, you're going to

 you're going to, you're going to chain 1 in each of the first 8.

 put your yarn in the back, and you're going to do a single crochet in the first 8.

 that's 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and I'm going to chain 1 in the first 8.

 1, of course you're just going to increase in that last one, so you're going to have

 is chain 1, you're going to turn, go all the way back across, you're going to have 10 stitches

 chain 1, you're going to turn, go all the way back across, you're going to have 10 stitches

Then you're going to turn, and you're going to do 1 single crochet in each of the

 there is difference between the P and the R. So you're going to fasten off, pull everything

 together, turn it right side, and this will be longer than this because you're not supposed

And if you don't like that, you can just do one last stitch instead of starting

 know, if you're more of an experienced crocheter, you can do this without much of a problem.

 video which is the letter R. And you can pick up to do this last leg for the R and

 Today's talk I've asked me to show you how to make a delicious winter wonderland cake.

 It's a twist on a classic Christmas cake made with some tropical fruits.

 It's decorated with gingerbread houses and there's no marzipan in sight whatsoever.

 If you want to make this cake at home you're going to need some golden caster sugar, plain

 flour and baking powder, some ground almonds, eggs, some stalk, a large orange and then

 So we've got some tropical fruits and then some cherries and some cranberries.

 The first thing we need to do is take the larger pieces of fruit and we're going to

 So once the fruit is all chopped add that to the bowl with the rest of our fruit and

 Once we've got the zest in there we just need to take the juice onto there as well and that's

 just going to give the fruit a bit more moisture so you don't have that kind of really dried

 And then this is going to need to sit for about half an hour so that all that juice

 So give that a mix around slightly and then just set that aside.

 To prepare our cake mix what we need to do is add all our ingredients together.

 So we've got our caster sugar and then our plain flour with some baking powder in.

 So we're using the stalk straight from the fridge because it's already nice and soft

 To that we're going to add our eggs and because this is an all in one method we just put all

 the ingredients in the bowl together at the same time and then just mix until it's nice

 So when that's nicely fully combined we're just going to add our fruit which has been

 So add that in and then again just mix that until it's nicely combined.

 And that goes into a preheated oven for around an hour and a quarter until it's domed, nicely

 browned and if you insert a skewer into the middle of the cake it'll come out nice and

 It looks like a classic Christmas cake but there's a lot more interesting things going

 We've made another video to show you how to make that so click on that to see how we've

 And then we have some praline which is just some sugar melted with some almonds folded

 through and then let to cool and then broken up with either a rolling pin or a food processor.

 And then we have our buttercream which is just stork, icing sugar and a little bit of

 The first thing we need to do to decorate our cake is with the buttercream.

 So just place most of it on the cake and you're just going to spread it across the top so

 And don't worry if you don't have a cake stand like this, you can just use a cake stand

 like this, you can do it on a plate and just keep turning the plate or even just by moving

 So once the whole cake is covered, try and clean it up slightly just because you are

 And the next stage is to add our gingerbreads around the outside to make our little village.

 So just gently press it against the side of the cake like that.

 Don't press too hard because you might break the biscuit but you just want to stick it

 To finish the cake we just need to sprinkle the top with our praline, covering that buttercream

 A really beautiful and slightly different take on a Christmas cake.

 If you like the idea of this cake or want to see something different, leave me a comment

 okay guys so here's a really important mod you'll probably need to do for the

 evolve 8 make one of these little holders whatever it's a piece of the

 red part is from a milk crate the top part is just a long thing like that it

 goes for the ones that are go for the go for the lights and the ceiling you can

 buy them for $10 the best buy all right you're gonna insert that and they're all

 the way to the bottom and then on top of these things you're gonna stack live

 rock rubble and here also a very important mod see this thing it's a

 piece of acrylic should lose you take a piece of acrylic you measure it to fit

 in that slot we used to have the blue thing the blue carbon filter on the

 bottom of the acrylic you make holes a bunch of holes with a drill one row

 holes two row holes three rows about three rows of holes all the way on the

 bottom you insert this thing all the way to the bottom now what's gonna happen

 then once the water goes in here instead of going straight in there it's gonna go

 to the bottom and here you have a little little pad then in here you have your

 either chemipure or purigen and here you have another sponge then in here you

 got the holes so now it goes in here and that's gonna go back up as it's going

 back up it's gonna go through a layer of a little sponge thing right here and

 another filter media like your purigen or your chemipure whichever one you

 didn't put in the first one you now put in here so I have one in here and one in

 here and that's it goes in here and now it's gonna go in there into your where

 the pump is she's gonna go through some live rock and then the pump is gonna

 pump it up pump it all out all right that's all another thing if you want to

 upgrade your pump yeah upgrade the pump and but this wire it's not gonna this

 tube is not gonna fit on the new pump if it's bigger if you got the Eheim 600

 it's not gonna fit so what you do is you buy a slightly larger one of these

 silicone tubes the half inch tube from Best Buy it's five dollars and you put

 it on the bottom pump from that you connect it to the old tube and then the

 old tube you just connect the other piece all the way in here this way

 everything fits all right so that's exactly what I'm gonna do myself it's

 what I've done myself and yeah it's a really important mod to make it salt

 water okay so this has been a month and also if you want to upgrade the light

 it's also recommended okay the 13 watt forgot what the company is but I'll put

 it in the comments if you guys are interested all right take care

 Today we're going to tie the clove hitch and the constrictor knot.

 Now this end will go under something like an X shape like here.

 so also a couple of things I'd like to say before I get into this

 and for some reason it deleted the clip of me putting it into the bowl

 then just to get the apples all combined with the flour and the salt

 and then you are just going to spray the cooking spray all over it

 and you are just going to scoop out all the dough onto a baking sheet

 then you are going to put them in the oven and let them cook for 15 minutes

 and then when you take them out they should be golden brown around the edges

 then you are just going to take a jar or whatever you like to put your horse treats in

 that was the end of my video and I really hope you guys enjoyed

 Today I'm baking a batch of these great little jam ribbon cookies.

 They're basically a shortbread that you shape into these logs and fill with any kind of

 I'm going to cut it in half lengthwise twice and then into some little squares just like

 And I'm going to let this cream until it's nice and light and fluffy for about two minutes.

 Then I'm going to add two tablespoons of milk, and I'm just using a one percent milk, and

 Then at this point I do want to take my spatula and scrape down the sides of the bowl.

 Now I'm going to turn my mixer off and I'm going to get my flour ready.

 And then I'm going to measure out two and a half cups of flour, and I'm going to put

 Now I'm going to let this mix just until the flour and the butter and sugar get incorporated.

 And then once it comes together I turn off the mixer, and then I want to use my spatula

 to give it a scrape down, making sure there's no bits of flour at the bottom.

 Now I have a piece of plastic wrap on my cutting board, and then I'm going to take and put

 And then I'm going to use my hands and I'm going to form this into a log.

 It ends up being about an inch and a half or two in diameter, and about eight inches

 Then I'm going to take my three logs of dough and I'm going to put them on a plate and put

 Now once the dough is chilled we can go ahead and get it formed on our baking sheet.

 So I have a baking sheet with a piece of parchment on top, and I'm going to unwrap this and I'm

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to take my thumb and I'm going to start by pressing

 Now you can see here if you start to get a little crack, we'll just kind of push that

 Now I've preheated the oven to 375 degrees, and these are going to first start baking

 Now while our cookies are baking you'll want to get some jam out.

 Today I've got an apricot, I have some plum, and then I have some of my raspberry freezer

 Now after 10 minutes the cookies have started to bake, but they're not baked through.

 So what I do is I just take a spoon and I kind of press that back down just a little

 Then I go ahead and I start filling some jam right down the middle.

 Now I'm going to put these back in the oven for about 15 minutes until I see that the

 Now when we get them out of the oven we want to immediately get them off onto our cooling

 And you can see we have this nice browning right along the edges.

 So I've slid the parchment onto a cutting board and then I'm going to use one of my

 And so I'm just going to take and I'm going to do kind of a roll.

 Now before you move on to slicing the other cookies take a little paper towel and wipe

 Now if you want you can either serve these as a slice or if you want you can take and

 If you'd like right before you serve them you can dust them with a little bit of powdered

 Well if you'd like to try some of these jam ribbon cookies at home just go to our website

 and go to the cookie jar show notes and I'll have the recipe there for you.

 And as always if you have any questions please send me an email.

 Good afternoon, my name is Alessandro Palazzi, I'm the bar manager of the Duke's Bar here in London in St.

 Today I'm just going to demonstrate one of our more popular martini which we call the Strongway.

 Strongway, the name I picked up from one of the books of James Bond.

 What we got here is some cucumber, fresh cucumber which we're going to muddle.

 A gin, obviously which is one of the more renowned botanicals, the cucumber.

 Fresh lemon juice, preferably if you can use organic, I always recommend it.

 One of the most important steps, the glass which will be red is now cooling down with some ice.

 So while does the cool down, I'm going to add a little bit of the fresh lemon juice.

 Fresh lemon juice, especially when you muddle something like a cucumber, you need some liquid.

 And then while trying to make the sauce also add a little bit, half a spoon of sugar,

 because just to cover a little bit of the citrus, not too much.

 Once it's muddled, we add a little bit, about 10 ml of elderflower cordial.

 And then the last, the gin, which is like I said, renowned for its cucumber botanical.

 Whenever you use the shaker, before you actually make sure you discharge the water.

 Like I said, if you do this one at home, it's a perfect cocktail to serve before the barbecue in the summer day in London.

 I have cut a piece of single fold bias tape and a piece of scrap fabric so that we can

It is specifically contrasting colors so that you can see what's going on with it.

 The first thing we're going to do is take the bias tape, open it up along the edge of

 the fabric that we want hemmed, and pin just like we would for hem so that you can sew

 the fabric, but pinning open one edge of the single fold bias tape.

Otherwise you will lengthen your garment by however much past an eighth of an inch

 If you're putting in a hem on a pair of pants or a skirt or something, it's going to come

 and run it right into itself, overlapping the bias tape on itself just a little bit.

 But since we're doing this on a piece of scrap so that you can see what it is, we're not

 Now to sew the first part of your bias tape hem, you're going to attach the bias tape

 to the outside of the fabric, obviously, sewing right in that little crease where this fold

Just make sure that you have some place to line it up to make it easier

 Please be sure to pull out your pins because that is very important.

 going to break your needle and bend your pin, and then you're going to have to re-thread

 Sometimes you'll find that as you pinned it on there, you didn't hold it very flat against

 sure that you're keeping the edge of the bias tape very close to the edge of your fabric.

 Now because I am not going in a full circle, I am using the reverse stitch at the front

Some patterns will tell you to put in the hem before you turn around and

 After you have finished sewing your bias tape to the outside of your fabric, you're going

 to just turn it ever so slightly under and re-pin, making sure that you can see an edge

 of the outside of your garment from the inside of your bias tape.

 the pins are perpendicular to the seam you're going to be sewing.

 Depending on the fabric that you're using, you might need to iron it at this point before

 you actually put in your seam to make sure that your bias tape is laying flat.

 If you're going around a circle that is then going to get smaller, it's a great time to

 use only metal pins, nothing with a plastic head on it, because your iron will melt the

 Once you get your bias tape all pinned, just go back and sew near the top edge of your

Remember that you only have a tiny little edge of your bias tape to catch the

 So you do want to find your line or something to line the edge of your fabric up with.

 like to line up the edge of my bias tape with the edge of my foot under here.

 Again, I specifically used a contrasting color thread so that you would be able to see where

Today I'll be sharing a really simple recipe, Corn Flakes Marshmallow

Very similar to the Rice Krispie Bars but I opted out the Rice Krispie because I don't

I decided to show you guys how I make it because I'm going to be making some for

 marshmallow, any type of marshmallow will work, a huge bag of corn flakes, pure vanilla extract,

 So the water is boiled and I just have all my ingredients out and ready.

 So with that I'm gonna put about four tablespoons of unmelted butter.

 I also turn the heat to low, to medium low, so that it'll melt the butter slowly.

 So once the butter is all melted I'm going to be adding the marshmallows.

 So I just laid a strip of parchment paper on the side to prepare.

 So you'll know when it's ready when all the marshmallow is melted and gooey.

So while it's still really hot you just pour your cornflakes in and mix it.

But if you want more cornflakes and more of the crunch, keep adding

You can already see that it's kind of like getting really sticky.

 is just saran wrap this so no dust and everything will get on it.

I rarely even use it because I know it's super expensive and I don't

 Begin by testing your subfloor for any moisture with the correct moisture meter.

 In our case our subfloor is wood so the reading must be 16% MC or below.

 Simply sweep the subfloor to remove any dirt and dust to ensure the floor is free from

 is uneven you should use self-levelling compound or plywood depending on your subfloor type.

 should be measured around the perimeter of the room as you proceed with the installation.

 Using floor spacers will ensure the expansion gap is consistent around the room's perimeter.

 Take the next bamboo plank and apply WPVA glue to the end of the board.

 out across the face of the plank onto the back using a set square to ensure a straight

Position the wood plank face down and cut along the line you have marked

 floor spacers to give the correct expansion gap against the walls.

Cut the planks accordingly, stagger the joints and using WPVA glue to

An easy way to measure the end plank is to flip it around and mark on the plank

 into place, keeping the boards tight, making sure there is sufficient expansion gap against

 When reaching the opposite wall you will need to fill in the space.

 the gap then deduct the expansion gap from the total measurement.

 and measure from the groove side of the plank from top to bottom.

 with a straight edge to create the line you will need to cut along.

 second, a 1.3 megapixel camera, as well as 10 to 92 times optical zoom.

 notice that the EUT V3 comes with three different diameters of ear specula, a

 diameter disposable speculas, a carrying bag, installation CD, as well as your

 closely together to ensure that adequate light passes through the small opening

 disposable ear specula ranging from 3, 4, and 5 millimeter diameters.

 dial on the side of the unit that adjusts the focus and the magnification.

 The depth of field will allow you to focus on things a little closer or

 And as we toggle the rotary dial found on the side of the unit, we can also

 change the focus as well as magnification, focusing in on things

 that are a little bit closer as well as further away from the scope.

 You also have the capability of taking high-quality photos as shown here.

 Now we're going to move on to the cherry pie flake and the little daddy rattle bombs.

 Make sure you shake for at least two minutes before applying this stuff.

 We let the base coat flash off for approximately 20 minutes before applying the flakes.

 We're going to give this a minute or two here, let it flash off and throw on another coat

 and then we will move on to the little daddy rattle bomb candy.

 Okay, that's coat two and as you can see it's laying out very smooth.

 Looks like you can see the color transfer better onto the spray mask here than you can

 So now we're going to let this flash off for about 20 minutes and then we'll move on to

 Probably every single person has heard this song one way or another.

 It's been covered many, many times and it's very easy to play on the bass and it's really

 If you've been playing for a while it's super fun too but it's not that terribly fast and

 Alright so if you haven't clicked on the link right down there in the YouTube text box,

 one of those links is going to bring you to some lessons that aren't on YouTube at all.

 There's a beginner lesson, an intermediate lesson, an advanced lesson, so somebody for

 Also down there, there is a link that will send you over to my Epic Beginner Bass DVD

 So if you, you know, you're very much a beginner on the bass, you're going to love it.

 If you've been playing for a while, there's some great stuff in there for you too.

 You're going to start on the 10th fret of the A string right here.

 And then you're going to just go up 8, 9, and 10 on the D string.

 And then what you're going to do is you're actually going to hit that 10th fret three

 So you're going to go back down to the 8th fret and then the 10th fret of the D.

 And incidentally, you'll find this being played in different keys.

 So if you start playing along with a record or a YouTube video or something like that

 and you sound, ah, it doesn't sound right, move it down a half step or move it around

 a little bit and you'll catch it because this version is from the actual Safaris from one

 And then what you're going to do is you're going to move it up basically that way, right?

 So you're going to start on the 12th fret and then you're going to go 10, 11, 12.

 But it gets a little bit different here and it's really cool how it works out.

 Move your whole hand back up here into the first position that we played.

 And then you're back over here to the 10th fret of the A string.

 And then all you got to do is hit the 10th fret of the D string if you want.

 You know what part I'm talking about here if you've heard the song.

 And then you're just going to go reverse of how we played it before.

 And when you come back to it, you'll be twice as good as when you left it.

 Don't forget to click on those little YouTube text box little clickers right down there.

 Oh, and don't forget you can subscribe if you hit the subscribe link.

 I have probably close to like 300 videos or something like that right now on YouTube.

 hello this is C Doug with PianoClubHouse.com and today I'm going to

 and it will eventually be in we'll be playing in F sharp or G flat major okay

 so right now let's just get to the intro which is the song okay so once you learn

 okay so let's show you that right here okay so we starting off like that E flat

 F and then you have B flat and G flat together and in your left hand on this

 right here you're gonna also do E flat and B flat okay so you got

 I mean you get to this one you're gonna in your left hand you're gonna do D flat

 and then your chord got B G flat and B in your left hand right hand you have E flat

 This is Viral Clutch here and we are doing an unboxing of the Condenser Microphone SF666.

 And just to start off with, the packaging does look a little cheap and everything that

 comes in, it's got plastic and everything, but it doesn't feel that sturdy.

 I got it from Amazon, the link will be in the description below.

 So let's just unbox the thing and we'll tell you all the stats and everything for it later.

 But right here, it has a nice little stand to put your thing on.

 Let's just set that back over there, we'll get back to that thing later.

 But let's just get to the whole bread and butter of this whole unboxing, is the microphone.

 Let's just take this twist tie off, if I'm doing it the right way.

 It does look a little cheap, it feels a little cheap because it's light and everything.

 Because it is a pretty long cord for a microphone, which I like.

 When I get my game capture and I post some videos, you will hear how good the sound quality

 And I'm going to have a pop filter on it so you won't get all the bad noise and everything.

 And it also, let's just get to the stats so we can see what it says.

 Right here it says, this is not a USB mic because it has this 3.5mm jack that plugs

 But when I put it in my programs I would do more noise canceling so it will sound even

 It has the cord length of 2 meters and the standard operation voltage is 1.5 volts and

 the standard voltage is still 1.5 volts and just all the other stuff for it.

 Like from a distance but when you pick it up it's really light and everything.

 Like I feel like you can hold it in your hand and it will break but it looks pretty sturdy.

 If I was doing a vlog or something I can plug it into my phone over here.

 I could just do a vlog and I could hold this thing and just talk into it.

 So if you like this video and all the links to this product will be down in the description.

 But I was just letting you guys know that that's about it for this video.

 And if you like this video give it a like, comment, and subscribe to my channel.

 I just like making videos and I can't wait to get my capture card to start making videos.

 I usually make Black Ops 2 videos and Advanced Warfare videos but I'm going to be coming

 Okay, it's summertime and we all want to get our bodies ready and I know there's a lot

 of exercises that I do and that I love doing, but I do know that I mess up with them quite

 As you know, she's a fitness coach, but she's been contributing to Being Sam for quite a

 while and she's going to show us the right way to do these exercises.

 Now what we want to do when we do an ab crunch is to make sure that we use the core muscles

 and don't put pressure on the other muscles that might help those and then your core doesn't

 So I want you to extend your elbows sideways, don't pull on the neck, so rather put your

 And when you lift up, allow your neck to follow the natural direction of the spine.

 Don't go all the way up either, this is not old army style sit ups.

 Keep your chin slightly away from your chest, crunch through your abs, only take it halfway

 up and then as you inhale, you take it back, but stop short of the floor.

 What you want to focus on when you do a push up is to put the body weight in the correct

 So the first thing to remember is that you want your body weight over the shoulder region

 So you have to keep the lower back flat, pull the belly button to the spine, don't lock

 your elbows at the top of your rep and drop the chest towards the floor with a small gap

 Remember that you always want to keep your feet pointing forward, feet hip distance apart,

 When you do a squat, you want to simulate sitting down in a chair.

 Stick the butt out a little bit more, body weight over the heels.

 A few things to remember is that your shoulders need to stay over your hips because you want

 You don't want to bend your knees more than 90 degrees because that's harmful to the knee.

 Nice big step forward, abs nice and tight, shoulders over the hips.

My name is Mele Fong, aka Ukulelemele of Ukulelemele on Maui.com.

 In this song, in this strum, you're going to swing along as we go like this,

 One, two, and three, four, and down, down, up, down, down, up, down, up.

 Down, down, up, down, down, up, down, down, up, down, down, up, down, down, up, down, up, down, up, down, up.

 Now, we're going to apply the swing strum to the song, Song of Old Hawaii.

 Now, let's look at our left hand with fingers number one, two, three, and four.

 As we place it right here, where we're going to rest right on this bone right here,

 and keep our thumb back so that it keeps our wrist straight, so that it's easy for us to just bend.

 Now, even though D7 says you have your first finger down with your second finger there,

 some people like to also put their second finger over their first and then their third finger down.

 So, at this time, I'd like to invite my husband, Rich, with his u-bass,

 to come and join us as we apply the swing strum to the song, Song of Old Hawaii.

 Swing Strum for Ukulele to the song, Song of Old Hawaii by Ukulele Mellie.

For pie-krust, jeg har tænkt mig at blande tre kvart kopper sukker med tre

 pie-pande i køleskabet til at køle ned, mens jeg laver blåbær fylding.

Og jeg også ønsker at sikre, at det går op rundt den række en lille smule.

 Og jeg har tænkt mig at sætte det i køleskabet til at køle ned, mens jeg laver fylding.

 Og jeg er nu klar til at blande fylding for den lækre fine blåbær pie.

 Hvis du har vanille yoghurt, faktisk kan du bruge det, men jeg har tænkt mig at tilføje en hel

 Og så jeg har tænkt mig at tilføje den hele sukker, eller hele løg.

 Og også, jeg har tænkt mig at tilføje omkring tre spiseskefulde sukker.

 mennesker kan lide det virkelig sødt, men jeg tror tre spiseskefulde bør være tilstrækkeligt i

Okay, jeg vil bare smage det og se, om det er sødt nok for mig eller ikke.

 Jeg vil koge det i omkring, eller bage det i omkring 50 minutter, og forhåbentlig er

 op til 10 minutter efter 50, så du bare tjekke på det, og jeg har tænkt mig at lade det

 Her er pølsen i ovnen, blive bagt, og jeg ser frem til at spise det.

 tynder i en stykke blåbær pølse, men det er stadig så varmt, og jeg vil vente en lille smule,

 Vær tilfreds med at abonnere på vores kanal, og jeg vil se dig en anden dag.

 I should have more than what I've got, but I don't, so I'm just going to do this little

 Okay, take one teaspoon of salt and then you put a tablespoon of vinegar, which I should

 You know a little bit ago I said no liquids, but this is the only liquid.

 Put it in your pan of water, in the center if you only got one jar.

 It also helps if you don't move your camera all over the place too.

 You can see my first video posted a few months ago to see what happens after the pressure

 previous video I made the single crochet ring the right size and I showed how I

If you need directions on how to make the single crochet loop or ring to

 go inside the flower, please visit the video I provide a link for here.

 I'm assuming you have this done like I do and I'm also assuming you want to

 change colors like the book does and like I did in this example.

 demonstrate this on the video I went to Sugar and Cream Cotton yarn.

 make my slip knot and I'm going to slip stitch this onto my ring.

 human nature, I would start my ring right around where I left off the single

 crochet green ring, but I'm thinking that makes a weak spot in my daisy.

 thinking today I'm going to pick opposite and I'm hoping that between the

 begins and ends be on the opposite side they'll negate each other as far as

So anyway, as you can see I have my slip stitch onto my H hook and I'm going to slip stitch this onto my single crochet.

Okay, so as you can see from my example and from the pictures and the pattern, these are all

And each petal is actually just 12 chain stitches and then you slip stitch it back onto your single crochet ring.

If you've done the single crochet ring, you've done the hard part already.

So now that I have my slip stitch onto the base of my single crochet ring, I'm going to count 12 chains.

 It's going to go slip stitch right into where the original one started,

 And it looks a little messier because it's where I started and stopped the top of the green also.

 Okay, leave yourself a good enough tail so you will feel comfortable sewing it in,

 You'll have to take a needle and hide your ends, weave them in.

 If you don't like how raggedy these look, you can go ahead and take a different kind of yarn,

 And here you can see I just did a slip stitch around the outside of the petals.

 I did green here to show you what I did to contrast it on the video.

 But in real life you can take the same color and just slip stitch around the outside of your petal.

 So, here I went around and I did an extra slip stitch on the outside.

 So if you want more thickness to your petals you can certainly add it.

 Today I'm gonna cook a Chinese dish which was the first Chinese dish I ever cooked.

And this lick today is out of a Freddie King tune called Hideaway.

 or something or a four-hour gig and they play an hour set and then take a break

 and then you hammer on to the second fret of the second string.

 the high E open and then you slide up from the second fret to the fourth fret.

 And maybe you just want to sit on that first lick for a while, the first part,

 and you go to do that hammer-on and you're just stopping the string.

 first just play the note like this and then see how that feels and then

 instantly go to that feeling where your finger slams down like a

 So start with that and then you can work on your slides of course, two to

 copy every bit about it whether it's the hammer-ons or the slides or the pull-offs

 in the right places, the tone, and then also the fingering if I can.

 Alright, what we're gonna do now is we're gonna show you how to remove your door actuator.

 So, what you want to do is, first of all you want to remove this little clip that's holding

 So, if you, what I like to do best is I'll pull the door handle out and that gives you

 a little bit more room to work with and then you get a screwdriver or something that you

 Alright, so you got that loose and then what you want to do next is you want to get this

 Alright, and then what you want to do next is you want to get an 8mm triple square, which

 And we usually just put it on a gun, but you can get it on a wrench.

 Alright, once you got that loose, then you want to pull the door out.

 This thing right here, this can kind of be a pain, but it just unclips right here and

 Wanted to show you a quick and easy way to make maple syrup on your own.

 Most of us who are turkey hunters or outdoorsmen or even have a turkey cooker, a deep fryer

 right here, makes probably one of the best evaporators I've had.

 I've had homemade ones and store-bought ones in my backyard, but this year I decided to

 It's working out pretty well because it keeps such a steady, constant boil going as you

 Typically what you need is about 30 to 40 gallons of maple sap collected here in the

 And also what I've been doing is once you get it down inside the big pan here, cooking

 it down on the stove inside, which I'll show to you later so you'll know when it's just

 Also just took basic stuff like a cookie tray right there with another large pot here to

 Most trees will have about 2 to 3% sugar in them so you've got to boil down like I

 Early in the season like this you're going to get a lot of light syrup but it's still

 What's nice too is I'm using the garage, keeping the window open, but I'm using less energy

 The valve is barely open right now on the propane tank and you just maintain such a

 If you've got a turkey baster like this or a deep fryer and you want to try making maple

 There's a $15 investment in refilling the propane tank versus having to have a couple

 It's definitely an economical way if you want to try to make maple syrup guys.

Today I'm going to show you guys how to make the Fall in Our Stars inspired cake pops.

You're going to be needing a baking sheet lined with parchment or wax paper,

 You'll also be needing some cake pop sticks, some black frosting and two separate piping bags.

 One with a medium-sized Wilton 12 tip and one with a smaller Wilton 3 tip.

 And I'm going to be using a 1.5 tablespoon cookie scoop so that all my cake balls are the same size but it's not necessary.

 and then you want to start ripping your cake and just tearing it into small cake crumbs.

 Then you want to add approximately 4 tablespoons of your icing.

 You can add more if the cake doesn't hold its shape or you could add less if your cake is super moist.

 And then you want to take your cookie scoop and you just want to scoop out some of your cake and you just want to roll it into a ball.

 You want to make sure that the consistency of cake is very smooth and that it can hold its shape very well.

 So just roll it into a ball and then place it on a baking sheet lined with your parchment or wax paper.

 I made about 16 cake balls and you're just going to place that into the fridge for about 30 minutes.

 And then you want to take your candy melts, put them in a container and you want to microwave them for 15 second intervals and stir between each interval.

 And then you want to add a tablespoon of oil to your melted candy melts.

 If you have Easy Thins, this would be a great time to use that but I don't have Easy Thins so I just used some oil to thin out the candy melts.

 So I took my cake balls out of the fridge and you're just going to take your cake pop sticks, dip them into your candy melts and just stick them into your cake balls.

 And then you want to take your cake balls and you want to dip them into your candy melts.

 And I noticed that I should have used a bigger and deeper container so that it would be easier but I decided I would just work with what I had.

 And then you want to stick your cake pop into a block of styrofoam so that it can dry.

 Once it's dry, you want to take your cake pops and you want to dip them into your styrofoam.

 And you want to dip them into your styrofoam so that it can dry.

 Once it's dry, you want to take your black icing and you want to form a cloud shape.

 And then take your small tipped white icing and you want to write the word OK with a question mark.

 And then for another cake pop, you're going to use the white icing to make a white cloud.

 And then you want to take your black icing with a very small tip and you want to write the word OK with a question mark.

 And writing these words are kind of challenging because it's very small.

 So I recommend that you guys practice on another piece of paper or on a plate or something like that

 so that when you actually write on your cake pops, it will turn out very nice.

 So if you guys make these, don't forget to share your recreations with me on Instagram with the hashtag SweetCookiePie.

 Don't forget to check out my social media links and don't forget to subscribe.

 With both waist yarns removed we can now see the size and shape of the holes in the corner

 and that's why I like sewing with a fresh piece of yarn because I can take this inside

 the garment and flip it inside out and I can work a careful neatening stitch at that corner

Now on this side we have two yarn tails, we have the one left over from the

 sleeve and we can use that one and we can use this one to close that corner.

 started sewing with the tail left over from the sleeve which is very tempting it's going

 to leave us with this hole with no yarn available to us to neaten it so you'd probably end up

 sharper needle now and I'm going to pull the sleeve yarn in the direction to make that

 stitch happy and catch it through the plies of something else and this stitch, well it

 probably wants to be pulled to the right a little bit and the side of that stitch.

 I'm just splitting the plies here and that's going to cheer things up quite a lot.

 made a sort of drawstring and if I continue round my circle that's looking pretty good

 now let's look at this side that's not bad at all and this is a very loose floppy fabric.

 I have got one stitch there which looks pretty stressed and we might deal with him later

 but I've made a drawstring round the hole and now I'm going to sort of lock that off

 so I'll split the plies and lock it shut and now I can cut that piece of yarn off and tease

Now I have two ends at this end so I'm actually going to use my white

 tail to give this stitch which looks a bit baggy on the front I'm going to give him a

 little extra support by using the white tail behind him but with a little clever work with

 a darning needle behind the seams these enormous holes can be made to go away.

 more tail to darn in here so I might as well use it for good so I'm going to pull it across here

 and just do duplicate stitch behind the seams to copy and support that stretch stitch so this is

 the stretchy stitch so if I just stay on the inside of that and give it a little support

 from behind the seams and then I can darn this tail in it and I always try to fan my tails out

 so they don't all form a big lump in one spot and let's have a look to see what that looks like

 on the public side it's not bad at all even though we had two yarn tails to hide at that corner I

 find it much easier to graft starting in the middle and that way I have a tail to help you

 neaten both corners here's my little drawstring I'm creating around that hole

 I've split the plies all the way around now I'm just gently gathering that shut

 that's looking pretty good on this side just snuggle that up and lock it off and I think

 we've done with our neatening here there's underarm number one underarm number two not

 bad at all and here's our little finished sleeve for our micro cardigan

 Hello and welcome, today I am going to show you how to make green chilli pickle.

 So for that I have taken about 15 green chillies and I have cut into small pieces and I am

 going to mix about 2 table spoon of salt to it, 1 tea spoon of turmeric powder and half

 tea spoon of hing or acid for ditta and this is half cup of lemon juice.

 So this I am going to mix it well, even I am going to add this, for that first I have

 to lightly roast half tea spoon of fenugreek seed and then grind along with 1 tea spoon

 So here I have added this mustard and fenugreek powder and mix with it.

 So here I have added about 2 table spoon of oil, now to this I am going to add about 1

 table spoon of mustard seed, this is yellow mustard seed, 1 fourth of hing or acid for

 I have off the stove, now I will mix this oil only when it is, when the oil becomes

 So now the oil is cool now, I will add this green chilli pickle, mix it and now this will

 have to store in a air tight container and this will be ready after 15 days but everyday

 you have to shake this and not to put any wet spoon in the bottle.

 Hello, it is Playful Piggies and so today I'm going to show you how to give a guinea

 So today I'm going to be washing my long haired guinea pig named Marshmallow.

 You do not need to bathe short haired guinea pigs as often as long haired guinea pigs.

 Long haired guinea pigs might need to be bathed more since their fur is longer and drags in

 So this video is going to be very simple in showing you how to give a guinea pig a bath.

 It should not be for your enjoyment, just to get your guinea pig clean.

 So first let me show you the supplies that you are going to need to give your guinea

 The first thing you are going to need is a bottle of Super Pet Small Animal Shampoo.

 I try and stay away from fragranced shampoos but this is the only one they had at the pet

 And this towel, or a big towel, is going to be to keep the guinea pig warm while it's

 A guinea pig bath can last anywhere from a few minutes to a few hours.

 Even though your guinea pig might be dried, sometimes it's still shivering and you might

 My guinea pig takes at least an hour, only a few minutes to clean it in a bath.

 Until I start, I have this igloo over my guinea pig to help her feel safe.

 So I'm just going to remove the igloo and the guinea pig to get the bath started.

 You might want to rinse out or clean the sink before you start.

 So the first thing that you're going to do to start the bath is you're going to put about

 Not hot, not warm enough so it will hurt them, but not cold enough that it will be too cold.

 Now what you're going to do is gently lift it up and slowly get them into the water.

 The next thing you're going to be doing is getting your two hands and putting them like

 With your guinea pig in the middle, you're going to put water in your hands and then

 Make sure not to get their ears or above because that could do damage.

 Now you're going to take the guinea pig out of the bath to soak them up.

 Do the same technique that I showed you over and over until you get most of it soaked out.

 Now you're going to dry your guinea pig off with a small towel that I showed you in the

 Now you're going to use the big towel and cuddle them up so they stay warm.

 You're going to hold them around for a long time or until they get dry.

 In this drum lesson I'm going to be going over a 12-8 groove by Nico McBrain.

 The transcription can be found on page 52 of the 2012 issue of Drum Magazine.

 This is a groove that Nico McBrain plays on the song Where Eagles Dare.

 This is 12-8, which means that eighth notes are kind of like quarter notes, and there's

 Now what I like to do for 12-8 is just count it as 6-8, but I know that two times through

 So in other words, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2, 3, 4,

 That means the next ghost note isn't going to come in until 6 if you're looking at the

 It can be difficult to get, so work on that slowly and build up your bass drum speed.

 We'll start at the second measure, and these are all ghost strokes on the snare drum for

 I know that might be hard at first, but when you take it slow, even slower than I played

 it, and you repeat it over and over, you start to become comfortable with it.

 So gradually work up your speed, and once you do that, you can take this and apply it

 You know, you'll have that bass drum speed, the ostinato on the ride bell.

 There's all kinds of things, ways you can change this to put them in your own grooves.

 If you haven't subscribed to Drum Magazine yet, make sure you do so, and keep drumming.

 Hi guys, in this recipe video you will learn how to make delicious spicy dhaba style chicken

 It's your choice you can remove the skin, remove the fat or use them with it.

 So once the fat and the skin has been removed set your chicken pieces aside and in a wok

 go ahead and add 2-3 tbsp of oil and in hot oil go ahead and add 1 tsp of cumin seeds.

 In the sizzling seeds we are adding 1 large chopped onion and we are going to fry onion

 So along with onions 1 tbsp of ginger garlic paste, homemade and seasoning so salt should

 be as per taste I think 1 tsp should be sufficient, 1 tsp of turmeric, gaudh haldi and dried red

 chillies too I am just gonna crush them with my hand and put them in but if you want a

 milder curry you can skip this step and you can also use green chillies instead of dried

 So mixing all the components together fry for 3-4 minutes and then go ahead and add

 your chicken we are going to coat the chicken with this masala mix it well together let

 it seal let it turn white so mixing everything well together and then we are gonna add little

 bit of curry powder or 1 tsp this is fresh homemade blend but you can also use store

 bought for a spicier version you can use Madras curry powder so curry powder is in all dhabas

 usually have their own version so make your own blend and add it in and 1 tbsp of tomato

 paste gives nice red color to the curry so mixing the powder, tomato paste, mixing all

 the ingredients and then adding 1 cup to 2 cups of water depending on how thick or thin

 you want your curry to be so mix the water well with other components and then let everything

 come in together let your chicken cook let it simmer once your chicken is ready after

 about 15-20 minutes you can cut in and check it should not be pink in the middle so garnish

 it with cilantro leaves and serve this delicious spicy chicken curry with rice, with naan,

 with paratha, with flat bread of your choice so give this recipe a try let us know how

 it turns out for you and don't forget to subscribe to ET's Tindin channel for more

 So we're working on floor work, and I showed you in a previous video how to get down to

 So whatever you're doing, you're dancing around, and then you decide that this is where you're

 So once you're in a kneeling position, both knees down like this, what kind of things

 You're going to be limited, obviously, but there's different things you can do.

 You can just kind of really keep it to snake arms for a while, some shoulder rolls to start

 In order to do the mayas, you really want to make sure that your knees are together

 When you do a standard maya, it's really all about the footwork sometimes.

 But when you're in a kneeling position, you really don't have a choice.

 You can frame it, frame it, frame it, or just use your arms, do snake arms while you're

 Same thing, again, you don't have the heel to lift to give you that big hip circle, so

 You can also just hold or do snake arms while you're doing flutter.

 Of course, you can do the snake, big snake move that I showed you before how to do.

 You can do all those big floor movements, but I want to show you how to do basic isolations

 You can also do the big hip circle where you drop your hip down, or your butt down to your

 heels, so push all the way to the side, go down, where you're going all the way down

 You can try to travel around with your knees, and I showed you guys how to do that before,

 where you go down and then together, down and together, and you can pause.

 It's not the easiest or smoothest movement in the world, but it's possible.

 Some of it's going to be really hard, some of it's going to hurt.

 So decide what works best for you and build it, and make it part of the routine that you

 Check out the other videos on floor work on FreeBalancedCustoms.com.

 never get back to that white, but at least we want to get rid of the mold.

 We'll use a soft brush for the top and we'll use a harder brush for the bottom.

 And then you can use your choice of either Clorox or OxiClean to mix with

 As you can see we've been really successful at cleaning the top.

 we have a brand new rug with a pretty top that we can use for another season

 Ok, when you're done cleaning and rinsing the top, just roll it up to kind of get

 it just kind of drip down a little bit and come back in an hour.

 table, over a ramp or something like that and then it'll just drip down for a day or so.

 to bleach your rug where it won't damage any grass or things like that.

 might also want to plan a place for your rug to hang while it's dry where you can

And make sure the bottom is mildew free and you'll enjoy your rugs

 Today I'm going to show you a little trick, a little battery conversion trick that I found.

 Many times we have found that we have all these not-cab batteries which come in our

 portable drills and things like that and they fail us and they become no good.

 I had actually come up with this idea and I had read it at one point in time or something

 like that and I'm like, you know what, I'm going to improvise on it and make it a lot

 This is a 14-4 port cable battery and you can see that the top pops right off like that.

 And sometimes you'll have a dead battery or a dead cell in there and that is the problem.

 So you have to figure out which one is your good battery and your bad battery.

 What I did is I took these apart and I'm going to use these batteries probably in another

 video on how to show you how to use the good batteries to actually make a good flashlight

 Right here, a little story for you is this one was actually the bad battery.

 I tore the good one apart because I got them mixed up on accident.

 So what I did is I'm going to take this apart just to show you is this battery tower here

 I replaced with a piece of PVC pipe and I cut it the same distance that it is in the

 tower and I put the leads on there just like that and I taped it and it slides all nice

 I'm going to reassemble this and then show you how it operates.

 Right now, what I'm going to do is I just assembled this and I drilled a hole in here

 This works actually very nice for camping outdoors or if you're on a remote project

 and your battery does die, then you can actually just hook this to your motor vehicle battery

 You can wrap that around or you can stuff it back in your battery housing unit.

 I'm going to just put this battery back in here where I decided and I've got a drill

 This is inspired by the very trendy updo going on at the moment.

 This is just one of those hairstyles that really defines the 80's.

 It's super easy, takes a few minutes once you get the hang of it.

 You are going to need a little bit of strength in your upper arms as this is going to be

 So be prepared for that if you're going to be doing this hairstyle.

 Yeah, it's just very slick at the sides and then the middle is very loud.

 This has to be by far my particular favorite out of the bunch because I like to really

 do looks that kind of stand out and are, you know, kind of the opposite of femme fatale.

 You know, my personal style is a lot more on the kind of going out there, kind of dramatic.

 I really wish that I knew I was going to be doing this tutorial today so I could have

 But you can see if you're wearing something a little bit more feminine or casual how this

 And I purposely left this little strand out just to make it look more fun.

 Or if you'd like, you can, I'm also seeing looks where people, you know, pull a long

 You can make this as high as you want according to your face shape.

 I was going to go a little bit more higher, you know, the more tees you have, the more

 Alright, so you want to go ahead and begin with semi-textured hair.

 Then what you want to do is begin by sectioning off the front section from ear to ear like

 And tightly, we're going to put that into a very high ponytail right at the top center

 Then you're going to have three ponytails adjacent to that ponytail, vertically across

 The ponytail, the portion that's pulling the hair back, we want that very kind of sleeked

 The back two ponytails, take the hair from the ends and kind of push it up towards the

 And what this is going to do is kind of tease your hair and give it a lot of texture.

 And then what you want to do is take those two hairs and criss-cross them and tie a knot

 That's what's going to really give it that mohawk type of look.

 Very important when you are creating these knots to face the ends of the ponytail up

 While I'm creating each knot, we're just creating kind of knotted chain links.

 I'm going to continuously do that until I'm done with the kind of strand of hair that

 At this point, we should have two little ponytails at the front of the head.

 Instead of linking those two together, I'm going to kind of act as those two ponytails

 So I'm taking that ponytail right at the center and I'm splitting that into two and creating

 What this is going to do is give me a lot more volume and a lot more height.

 The kind of point or aspect of this is to kind of have that voluminous height and structure

 You can leave the front ends like this kind of at the forehead.

 I just kind of want to show you how that looks if you decided to have the faux bangs out.

 And just kind of mess around with it to make it look a lot more effortless and a lot less

 G'day everyone, Corrupt Carnage here and welcome to this Real Life Minecraft video.

 Today we are going to cook this delicious chicken roast in the Real Life Minecraft.

 Thank you for one of the subscribers who commented about they wanted me to make another roast

 and today we are going to make roast chicken in the Real Life Minecraft.

 So basically in order to make roast chicken you will need to get yourself a roast chicken

 And now it's also got an apricot and rosemary topping in the actual guts of the chicken

 I've also got some carrots over to the side here which has been topped with a little bit

 of Australian roast on the side there which is basically 100% rosemary with a bit of salt

 I've dashed it with a bit of oil as well so once you put it into the oven the potatoes

 I've got some carrots with some apple balsamic vinegar topped over the top of them as well.

 So basically in order to cook this chicken we need to put it into the oven for about

 Now we've got it preheating at the moment on 200 degrees Celsius so basically I will

 pick up all this stuff now, chuck it into the oven and come back when the roast is about

 I've also lined the oven trays with alfoil just so the vegetables and chicken doesn't

 actually stick to the pots and pans and so it makes cleaning up a breeze.

 I've just placed the chicken roast and the vegetables into the oven.

 As I said before we need to cook it for one and a half to two hours so I'll come back

 It's been on for about approximately an hour now and as you can see the veggies are almost

 The carrots as you can see down the guts there on either side of the chicken roast are pretty

 much done as well as the sweet potato and the sweet potato there on the front.

 We actually ran out of gas and unfortunately put it back on 220 or 210 Celsius and she

 So make sure your oven is set to 180 degrees Celsius so you don't burn the top of your

 chicken and the potatoes over to the side here are going alright as well.

 But this is going to take another half an hour to 45 minutes to cook and I will come

 Righty-o, the chicken and the vegetables have finished cooking in the oven and this is the

 We've got the potatoes that have been cooked to perfection, a little bit crunchy.

 You've got the chicken there just chilling as well as the carrots there on the right

 hand side with their maple and vinegar sauce on top and also the sweet potato as well as

 some corn as well which we just cooked in the microwave using water.

 Now to finish off the chicken and vegetables I've also made some gravy as you can see on

 top here using this Greybox formula, just traditional gravy on the side here as well

 as some juices from the bottom of the tray that was actually in the oven.

 So basically yeah, put the Greybox into the container with the chicken juices from the

 bottom of the tray and just mix it up with a bit of hot water and you'll get some nice

 Let's grab some gravy here and put it over the chicken as well as put some over the vegetables

 I don't know about you guys but this actually smells absolutely fantastic.

 Anyway guys, I'm Krop Karnage, thank you for watching this RealLife Minecraft video.

 Today we cooked a roast chicken in the RealLife Minecraft with some vegetables on the side.

 If we get more than 100, I will do a cooking episode next week from a comment that you

 guys put down below right now about what you guys want me to cook in the RealLife Minecraft

 It could be dinners, it could be desserts, it could be whatever.

 Please like, comment and subscribe and I will see you guys in another RealLife Minecraft

 and this method is absolutely awesome because we use minimal oil.

 I'm going to do just a little drizzle of extra virgin olive oil on this tray.

 And a nice little trick I like to do is take a little pastry brush

 And doing this allows you to use absolute minimum amounts of oil.

 Place the eggplant right onto the tray, making sure they don't overlap.

 Drizzle a really small amount of extra virgin olive oil over the top

 and use the pastry brush once again just to kind of spread that all over.

 With the eggplant cooking now, we can get the meat component of this dish going.

 And then we're going to go in with some extra virgin olive oil.

 Add the garlic, cinnamon and oregano and cook for another two minutes.

 and brown the mince well, cooking until the mixture is quite dry.

 And so I'm going to add two tablespoons of tomato paste straight into here.

 and I'm going to add some parsley straight into the meat there.

 Season with pepper and, of course, where there's pepper, there's salt.

 So I'm going to start to add the milk in just a little bit at a time.

 And then use the spoon just to really evenly distribute this meat

 The egg yolks in the eggs have given such a beautiful, rich colour.

 On this video we're going to be doing a quick and simple appetizer.

 We're going to be doing some pitted dates stuffed with goat cheese and chive wrapped

 First thing we're going to do is go ahead and add some fresh chives to our goat cheese.

 I'll go ahead and get these knocked out and we're going to get these on the grill.

 All right guys, here's our dates stuffed with goat cheese and chive wrapped in that spicy

 We're going to get these on for about, I don't know, 30 minutes I think.

 All right guys, these things have been on for about 15 minutes.

 I cranked up the heat a little bit to try to get some color on this thing.

 Go ahead and get these off and we're going to let these cool just a tad.

 You can smell the spice from that bacon, the habanero spice, and the sweetness from that

 You still get that hint of onion from those chives and then the sweetness behind it.

 All right guys, remember, hit that thumbs up, subscribe if you haven't.

 Today's design is a more advanced version of the caterfoil pattern.

 For today's design you'll need the regular supplies along with a thin art brush and dotting

 Beginning with your base color that's already fully dry, you're going to start adding your

 You're going to first create one dot at the tip of your nail and then add one of the full

 caterfoil patterns and make sure that those connect with that first dot.

 You don't have to do what I did which is have the dot off the tip of your nail.

 I just thought that would work best because I knew I would have two full caterfoils in

 I continue along to the cuticle end of my nail and I do go back and make sure that those

 For the side of my nail I'm careful not to get the black polish on my skin because it

 So normally when I'm doing dots on the side of my nail I just overlap it, get the dot

 But I didn't want to do that here so I'm just using a thin art brush and replicating where

 For the next step you're going to use your thin art brush and you're going to begin giving

 your caterfoil pattern a more advanced look by creating this triangle shape in between

 So basically you're going to add four of these triangle shapes to each of the caterfoil patterns.

 It can get a little bit confusing as to where to put those so I like to work with one caterfoil

 When you work on the side of your nail where it's just a partial pattern, remember to still

 For this one here I wanted kind of a rich look with the black and the gold and for my

 I started with a black base and added the gold caterfoil pattern.

 So once your caterfoil pattern is complete and you're happy with that, allow it to dry

 and you're going to go in with the next step to get your outline look.

 Using the smaller of your dotting tool you're going to add a gold dot.

 This is your base color and you're just adding it inside that first dot.

 You can see it's a little bit smaller so it leaves an outline behind.

 Now if you don't have multiple dotting tools you can use the same dotting tool and just

 Once you've filled in your full pattern you may find that there's areas where you need

 to touch up so in a couple of spots I didn't leave enough of the black outline so I'm just

 I allow everything to dry fully and I apply my top coat and the design is done.

 Now I did do my thumb a little bit different and you'll see a picture here that shows that

 I filled in each of those little peaks with gold as well and I like that look too.

 Please comment, share, subscribe and thumbs up are always appreciated.

 to grab the 3.75 x 5.25 and we're just going to layer it right onto the Simply Scored.

 I'm going to take the stylus and I'm going to score on all four sides at 1.5".

I'm going to take some basic rhinestones and put them right in the

 Then take your rhinestone strip and put it right underneath the swirl.

 Then I'll pick up a rich mix of transparent yellow, and I'll work it on, trying to distribute

 I don't want this to perfectly line up with the background trees horizontally.

 Now I'll pick up a rich mix of rose, and I'll encircle the yellow.

 Next I'll pick up a rich mix of ultramarine blue, and I'll encircle the rose.

 Now I'll pick up a rich mix of Payne's gray, and I'll cover up what's left of the paper.

 I'm going to show you how to do circular knitting, small diameter circular knitting using a single

 This is a 32 inch circular that I'm demonstrating on which is the minimum that is typically

 So one of the features of this circular needle that you will want to have for this method

 is a very flexible cable and you will be needing to kind of pinch it a bit small to get it

 And so you want a flexible cable on your needle such as these which are the Knitter's Pride

 We carry these in the store if you're interested and they come in different tips.

 Okay so I've cast on my stitches onto my right needle and now to begin knitting in the round

 Slide this down onto the cable and grabbing the cable itself about halfway into the knitting

 We're going to bend it enough to get it out and here's where a flexible cable is kind

 of important because it's going to stretch these two stitches apart and you don't want

 I'm going to put the one with the working yarn on the right and here's my first cast

 on stitch on the left which will be the first one that I knit into to join it into the round.

 So working yarn attached to the right needle and the first stitch is in my left hand and

 now I just want to double check that I've got my cast on stitches not twisted around

 They are lined up in the middle between the two needles and now we are ready to knit this

It looks like I could almost knit this first stitch as I am but that will

 What we're going to do is grab this right needle and pull it out.

 So now half of the knitting is resting on the cable and my right hand needle is free

 So I can just knit this first stitch and in fact knit across the whole needle.

 And then I've got half of it now on this needle and half on the cable.

 We want this part that is on the cable, we're going to slide onto our free needle, our left

 So once again yarn is attached to the right hand needle and I'm pulling it out and knitting

 Knit across and now the stitches that are on the cable get put on the needle and put

 Yarn on the attached to the right needle still of course and pull it out.

 Therefore, when you knit this first stitch you want to kind of maintain a natural tension

 You don't need to worry about the ladder so much that can form on the ends as you would

 with other small diameter circular methods like double pointed needles.

 What you want to worry about if anything is making the stitch too tight because when this

 gets really small it becomes hard to put on the needle when it comes time.

 I think I successfully kept it on the loose side which makes a difference in my enjoyment

 I'm not much of a magic loop knitter and that's why if you work this too tightly it is frustrating

 So you want to experiment with that tension so that it's easy enough to get on the needle

 but not so loose that you're getting a gap between the needles on the ends.

 Καλημέρα όλοι, είμαι ο Γιώργος Χώλιας και είμαι εδώ για να σας παρουσιάσω το πρώτο μου βιβλίο

 και είναι κυρίως γραφείο για αρχαίους, αλλά το υπότιτλο εκεί είναι τόσο καλό

 ότι είμαι σίγουρος ότι θα βοηθήσει σε κάθε επίπεδο και κάθε στυλ της δραμματίας,

 και για να το κάνω θα χρησιμοποιήσω τους νέους βιβλίους από το Βίκφαρθ.

 πώς να συντονίσετε την πρώτη σας δουλειά με το δεύτερο βασίλιστο,

 Το πρώτο βήμα είναι να τραβήξω τη δεύτερη χέρι και το δεύτερο πόδι μου

 Το επόμενο βήμα είναι να προσθέσω τη δεύτερη χέρι και το δεύτερο πόδι μου

 αλλά η δεύτερη χέρι μου θα παραμείνει κλειστή στην δεύτερη χέρι.

 It's like 50 some degrees out and I don't have my outside hose on yet.

 So I'm going to get some warm water first and fill up this bucket.

 Alright, so I'm going to fill up this bucket with some water and get some soap.

 So I don't like to actually put the soap in first because it gets too sudsy.

 I've had it for maybe like a year or so and only use that much out of it.

 I'm actually not going to rinse it because I don't have any rinse water to use.

 Everything is sealed so you can actually get anything wet on it.

 And then after I rinse it I will probably just video drying it.

 So once it's good and rinsed off, go ahead and just dry your bike like normal.

So if you guys have any questions on how to wash a motorcycle or anything, just let me know.

 Howdy folks how's it going welcome to my virgin kitchen it's Barry here and today for the

 first time we're showing you how to make some enchiladas I want to thank ZZ Paduan ZZ on

 They look amazing right guys and this is just the way I made them they're kind of mild actually

 so feel free to ramp them up if you're vegetarian omit the meat load it with more vegetables

 if you want chicken, pork, lamb whatever you want to do just chuck it all in there and

 let me know how you get on send me pictures all that stuff if you were Forrest Gump and

 you made these you'd be like laugh is like a box of enchiladas you would not be saying

 box of chocolates you'd be loving these because they are so good hit pause on the video now

 write them all down it's super simple you will love this let's do it.

 First up get a medium flame on your hob plonk down your pan and add in a little olive oil

 once it's nice and warm begin to brown off your mince giving it a little grind of pepper

 too and then tip in your chopped red and green peppers cooking it for 5 minutes.

 Next up we add in our kidney beans now remember what I said at the start if you want to make

 this vegetarian chuck in some nice big chunky courgettes and things like that or some corn

 mince rather than the beef mince mix that all through then we tip in our salsa let it

 all simmer down that is a real colour fest in there it's important to simmer that right

 So with it all simmered down take it off the heat and plonk in both your cheeses and a

 little handful of chopped coriander mixing it all through using the residual heat to

 So for the moment coat the baking dish you are using in a little bit of spray oil and

 then add in another third of your salsa and then you want to grab your tortilla wraps

 you are using and give it a nice coating of sweet chilli sauce to give it a cheeky little

 By lubricating our wraps like that it just adds another cheeky little flavour dimension

 as I said these are mild but if you want to ramp it up why not chuck some pepper sauce

 on there or just add anything you like really your favourite sauce.

 With the tortillas nice and coated you then want to load it up with your filling and place

 them seam side down into your baking dish on top of that salsa you want to grab the

 remaining salsa and coat that evenly on the top cover it with foil and bake it for a good

 Once that twenty minutes is up take it out of the oven remove the foil and give it a

 darn good generous coating of your mixed cheese and then bake it again for another five minutes

 And once it's done simply cut your enchilada in half and serve it up with a good dollop

 of sour cream and some more chopped coriander if you are not dribbling right now you should

 Oh my gosh I think you actually are dribbling your mind is telling you no but your body

 is telling you yes so I really hope you give these a go guys they taste so so good I actually

 had my little portion there my big portion for brunch so I'm not going to eat any more

 they're super good and I'd love to see your spin on it so don't forget to send me a picture

 at my virgin kitchen I love it when you send me a picture it's really cool to see your

 version of it and they normally look better than I do so if you enjoyed this video don't

 forget to give it a thumbs up share subscribe and comment don't forget to check out my book

 dinners on available worldwide amazon download ebook kindle all that stuff love you thanks

So in today's video I am doing a collab with Balance Healthy Living

 you prepare or help your child prepare for the upcoming school year.

 this video is healthy, easy, quick breakfasts that you can make either ahead of time or

 butter also known as ghee, but you could use coconut oil or regular butter, olive oil,

 I'm just going to put two cups of vegetables inside this skillet and I'm going to let them,

 most of them are frozen, so I'm just going to let them kind of thaw out a little bit

Then I'm going to take five eggs and I'm going to put a dash of salt

 And then all I'm going to do is I'm going to add this egg mixture to the skillet that's

 sit for maybe two to three minutes until the sides start to get set.

 to take this skillet and put it in my oven on the broiler setting, with the broiler being

 And then I'm just going to take my knife and go around the edge just to make sure it's

And I'm going to check the center part of the frittata just to make sure everything

 bottom of my glass here and put a few spoonfuls of whole fat Stonyfield organic just plain

 some blueberries on top of that, another couple of spoonfuls of the organic yogurt

And then to make it pretty I'm just going to sprinkle a few almonds

 on top and there we go, a quick and easy fruit and yogurt parfait.

So then the third option I'm going to make actually has two options.

 This is an overnight oats or a breakfast cookie, so depending on how you want to make it.

 a little bit of cinnamon and just put that on top of my mashed bananas in the bowl, I

You could use currants, you could use walnuts, you could throw some

 peanut butter in here or some coconut, whatever you really like.

 heaping half cup of gluten free rolled oats and these are the gluten free oats from Trader

 this you can put it in the fridge overnight and you'll have breakfast in the morning as

Or if you want to make it a little more portable you can make these

So I'm just going to put spoonfuls of this mixture onto a parchment lined baking

 and that will create lovely, awesome, healthy breakfast cookies.

 fridge when you're done and you have breakfast for the next couple of days.

 Living's channel and everybody else that participated in this collab.

 down below, subscribe so you never miss a daily dreamland video.

 Just like the single color B stitch, this is worked on a multiple of two stitches plus

 And to start this, what you need to do is with color A, which in my case, this is the

 green, cast on with color A, and you knit two rows, just plain knit stitches.

 So after you've worked your two foundation rows with color A, you switch to color B and

 I like to wrap my non-working yarn around my finger just to hold it out of the way a

 And then we'll be working our repeat, which is knit into the stitch below and knit one.

 So to knit into the stitch below, you look at the next stitch on your left needle, and

 So if you pull on your fabric a little bit, you can see clearly the stitch below.

 Basically this is exactly the same as the single color B stitch.

 And we have our foundation rows that we need to work before we begin the pattern.

 You really don't have to worry about carrying your colors up the side with this stitch pattern

 So when you get back to the side that has your non-working yarn, you're ready to use

 I'm going to drop color B, and I'm going to pick up color A. Again, I'm going to wrap

 my non-working yarn around my finger to keep it out of my way while I start row three.

 And for row three, we're going to start by knitting two stitches.

 And then begin our pattern repeat, which is knit one, knit into the stitch below.

 And then the last two stitches are just both plain old knit stitches.

 So that completes row three using my color A. And then the fourth row of the pattern

 If you can do the plain single color B stitch, you can definitely do this one.

 I look like total shit right now, but hey, that's what you get for being outside in 30

 Anyway, I'm making a YouTube video tonight for my little brother, ex-AlbinoBanana.

 He's a pretty smart kid, generally about fish and fish tanks and all that other stuff.

 So watch it, subscribe to him, friend him, and watch his videos.

 But in this video that I'm making now is the cleaning of his new 55 gallon fish tank.

 This particular tank that we got has been sitting for four years with gravel in it,

 So I'm going to show you how to clean out a 55 gallon fish tank that's been sitting

 So there's not too much to worry about, but I'll tell you one thing, there was some pretty

 Another video with me, 95 speed GTA, and my little brother, ex-AlbinoBanana.

 Today we're going to clean out a skanky fish tank that has been sitting for about four

 Now you should have seen what this looked like before, but what you really want to do

 is you want to get your scrub brush and you go inside with your cleaner, preferably bleach,

 If it's really, really stained, really, really bad, you're going to want to let it sit for

 If you take a look at these covers, you can see all the algae, scum, and everything like

 Well, the tank was 10 times worse, and we're lucky we got it clean.

 So this tank is going to be the new home to Cleopatra, the Oscar fish, another baby Oscar

 So this is pretty much the end result, and it came out pretty well.

 And I'm going to wait a couple of days and put gravel in it, fix it up a little bit,

 I'll make another video on that, on how to repaint your rusted old-out frame, because

 First I will be taking this NYX Mineral Set It Don't Fret It Powder and I will be applying

 Now I will be applying NYX's Tango With Bronzing Powder with a cheek brush and I will

 Oh don't you fret, girls in the 20s always brighten up their cheekbones.

 Applying this stick blush in the color Tea Rose because back then rosy cheeks were always

 Back in the 20s, girls would often times shave off their eyebrows actually and draw them

 Then you will be applying any high coverage product to make what you just did the same

 To achieve this thin and long look for my eyebrows, I'm taking the NYX Eyebrow Marker

 After that, I'm going to set what I just did with a dark brown shadow.

 On top of that, I'll be taking this nude matte shadow in the shade Birthday Suit and

 The shade Maybe Later is perfect to pack onto the outer corner to make the look soft.

 And to perfect this totally rad 20s look, I'm adding a plum eyeshadow to the crease

 The shade Kiss the Day is a perfect highlight for the inner corner and brow bone.

 Now, one of the most important steps of this tutorial is to line the upper and lower lash

 line with the white eyeliner that you used before to make the black liner you'll put

 Next, take some natural looking false lashes and apply some eyelash glue to them.

 mistakes is to take the end of a brush, dip it in the eyelash glue, and just apply it

 My favorite liner at the moment is this NYX Glam Liner Aqua Luxe and I'm applying it to

 the upper lash line right where I put those fake lashes, leaving a little bit of the white

 And now I'm lining a smooth black liner right underneath my waterline.

 To perfect this look, you want to first curl your lashes and then apply the NYX Pin Up

 the outer corners of my lips to make my lips look more plump later on.

 Next using the NYX Retractable Lip Liner in the color Plum, I'm applying this all around

 After that, fill what you just did in with one of my favorite products in NYX's Soft

 One last step, apply this nice feather headband and you're ready to go.

 So grab your heels and head downtown because now it's your time to shine!

 please log on to nyxfaceawards.com and vote for me up to three times a day until June

 Okay, today we are going to be cooking a post-workout meal and this consists of a baked potato,

 which I already put in the microwave and hit the potato button and that's cooking.

 Now what I'm going to do is put some coconut oil in the pan, which is very good for you.

 What I'm going to do is add a little bit of this I got from Costco.

 Okay, now that the eggs are almost done, we're going to open the potato up that we have had

 If you do, I want you to like the video, subscribe to the channel, share the video, tell your

 friends, tell your family, tell your coworkers, Not CrossFit, peace, you're welcome.

 What's up guys, Joe Carabasa here, America's Fitness Coach for busy people.

 And whether I'm traveling on business or traveling vacation, no matter where I am I always try

 And sometimes I body weight, sometimes equipment depending on the situation.

 I'm here on the Jersey Shore, right on the beach in the winter, still beautiful scene,

 but it's a great way to get outdoors, soak in the fresh air, and crank a killer workout.

 So meaning you're going to be doing above the ground or on the ground.

 So it's going to constantly get you moving from the floor to standing up, which actually

 works a ton of muscle that you normally don't use repetitively.

 And also it's going to build some cardio getting up and down in addition to all the movements

 Alright, so the first exercise you're going to do is push up variation.

 So you're going to lock out your arms, squeeze your glutes, tighten your back, go down one

 So I want you to do anywhere from five to twenty five reps right there.

 So your feet under your knees, knees in line with your hips, down at ninety degrees, and

 You're going to lift your butt up above the floor, squeeze your core, just hold yourself

 You're going to hold those anywhere from five to thirty seconds.

 From that, we're just going to do dynamic hamstring stretch called mummies.

 After the mummies, go back down to the floor, and we're going to do dragonflies.

 Lower down under control without touching the floor, and then come back up.

 So you want to keep a straight line as much as you can without letting your butt touch

 The next exercise is going to be a bodyweight get up variation.

 So whatever leg or the other side you're going to get up to, that arm and leg is going to

 You're going to turn over on your elbow, extend into the floor, bring your right leg under

 Squat down, reach down, kick your leg out, put your elbow on your back, straighten your

 So again, opposite side that I'm using to get up is going to be bent, leg here, arm

 in the air, bend the elbow, press into the floor, bring your foot under you, stand up

 So you're going to bend your knees, bring your feet to your butt, try to keep a nice

 You're going to do five, and then a reverse crunch twist to your left side.

 Now, hip hinge with body weight might sound easy, but it's high rep, it's great cardio.

 You're just going to slight bend your knees, push your hips back, keeping your chest up,

 you're going to hike between your legs, squeeze your glutes, and push up forward.

 After that, you're going to get on the floor and crank out anywhere from twenty-five to fifty push ups fast at a high speed.

 Right after that, you're going to grab a quick water and repeat for four more sets for a total of five.

 You can take it to the senior no matter where you are, get some fresh air, or just do it in your hotel room.

 So give it a try, make sure to like this video, share it with friends, and I'll see you in the next one.

 Tonight on the menu is going to be chicken pasta, which I got the water boiling.

 And while that cooks down, I'm going to get the chicken ready, which I got cooked right

 So I'm just going to put a little bit of chicken wing sauce there on the chicken.

 Really not going to need all that so just use that little bit there.

 Right before this is done I'm going to add this sliced tomato here.

 YouTube what up it's your boy 360 GZ and today I'm coming at y'all with a

 brushing technique on how to brush your hair on your sides y'all been hitting me

 up on my inbox telling me how do you brush your hair I can't get hair on my

 sides this is my trouble spot well everybody don't brush their hair the

 same so I'm gonna give you three ways that you can brush your hair three ways

 you can brush your hair even though when I do these three ways I might just mess

 up my hair but I'm gonna give you all three three different ways so first way

 is my way now the way I brush my hair on the side I go from the top from my

 crown straight down straight straight towards my eyes at an angle straight

 that's what I do but not everybody could do that not everybody could do that just

 like Michael Jordan not everybody could could could come in and shoot that J at

 that last shot and hit it and win a championship game just ain't gonna

 happen everybody can't do this everybody can't beat me but with these

 three different ways you might just hit that last shot so the second way you

 now this one I don't know I don't know if I don't know if it will work but I

 don't know I cut hair so some people some people really do this but that's

 not the way my hair so and last but not least this is the one that this is

 probably you this one here just do it and try it and see cuz this one here I

 guarantee this is gonna work trust me you go down and straight back down

 straight back a little bit straight back bam bam bam bam bam bam bam

 down straight back it's weird but some of you some of you out there some of you

 out there they hair grow just like that so if that's you start brushing your

 hair that way man if that's you start brushing your hair yeah you brush your

 hair that way I mean it may look stupid but that's you that's you out there that

 ain't the way I do it though that ain't the way I do it that ain't me I didn't

 win that shot I didn't do that championship shot so those are my three

 a little preview of what it is what it's looking like I'm working for like four

 weeks right now can't wait to cut this off so uh it's your boy 360 Jeezy point

 So what we're going to do is we're going to combine all the ingredients except for the

 So what you'll need is you'll need to add one and a quarter cup of chickpeas.

 We're going to add a half cup plus two teaspoons of natural peanut butter.

 Use the natural stuff as it's less, it's got less bad stuff for you in it.

 You don't get that almost, you know, it's not readily available.

 So look at your labels, make sure that you're buying the right stuff.

 It's going to make this thick spread so what you're going to have to do is every once in

 You want to make sure that all the ingredients are well blended.

 Once it resembles like a cookie dough kind of a blend, what you're going to do is you're

 If you can, use natural, like organic chocolate chips or you can use carob.

 You're going to just blend this into the mix until they're pretty much all even.

 Now while doing this, it's peanut butter so it's going to definitely be sticky.

 Use a little bit of water and I suggest that you put very little.

 You just want to put some at the end of your fingertips and then roll them about.

 If you use too much water, what happens is it kind of makes this creamy decomposing thing

 Once you're done, you're just going to take your fork and you're going to flatten down

 your cookies or else you're going to have some unbaked in the center and burnt on the

 Now we're going to put these in the oven at 350 for about 10 minutes, give or take.

 Ours took about 13 minutes to do and we're just going to wait for those.

 These are actually full of protein so you can eat these and not be too guilty about

 I want to thank Sarah for this because this comes from her and her kids love it so do

 All right, I'm back with another video, and this is a request video how to make oatmeal milk now

 I'm not going to put any cinnamon or anything like that in this one here

 Because I already had some here all right, so I haven't had my breakfast oatmeal drink yet, so I'm going to have me a

 16 ounce and drink that I have a 64 ounce here everything I have here is almond milk

 The honey powder and I also like to add in there wheat germ all this stuff is

 Excellent for you with the exception of the sugar, so I'm going to go ahead and pour in

 Now remember when you open up your wheat germ you have to keep it in the refrigerator all nuts

 Peanuts has to be in the refrigerator or they'll go rancid remember.

 Go ahead and shut this if you have a bite of mix make sure everything is turned down

 Now I'm going to gradually whip it and then I'm going to turn it up.

 Now that is just one now if you double it you can fill it up now the difference between the two

 Three cups of whatever milk and then you can put two tablespoon of sugar or honey powder

 In this video I will be recycling wrapping paper and wine corks to make this fun wine

 The materials you will need for this project are, you will need some Christmas wrapping

 paper, scissors, Mod Podge, foam brush, you will need some wine corks, enough to fill

 We are going to start this project by cutting strips of paper out of our wrapping paper.

 Now alternatively you could use Christmas fabric, you could use any materials that you

 These strips of wrapping paper will cover the middle section of your corks.

 Don't make your strips too wide as you want to show off the natural material of your corks.

 I am going to use about 15 corks for this project but I will cut more than 15 strips

 of paper as I want to be able to pick and choose which strips I use.

 Now I am ready to get started Mod Podging my strips of wrapping paper onto my corks.

 Then I take a strip of wrapping paper and then the overlap I make sure I put enough

 Mod Podge in the overlap to make sure I can stick it down completely.

 Here you are watching me work in fast forward speed so that I will put wrapping paper and

 After I finish I will allow the Mod Podge to dry completely before moving on to the

 Now that I have allowed my first layer of Mod Podge to dry completely I will add a thin

 After I complete adding a thin layer of Mod Podge to each of my corks I will allow the

 I am going to finish by putting the top back onto the ornament.

 Hi, my name is Wilfred Ranke and otherwise known as the Oshawa Ogre and today

 We're going to do a nice German pancake with a sweet apple filling.

 Now the eggs and milk that we use I like to take it out 20 minutes before using it just to get it more to

 Granny Smith three of those and one of them a red apple like a honey crisp or a Macintosh

 And then we slice off the cores and we're making some nice bite-sized pieces of the apple

 Now to this we're going to add about half of a stick of melted butter and

 This is what it looks like before and then I just melt it in the microwave

 you could also do this in the pan before you add the brown sugar and everything else and

 We turn on our stove to about a medium heat and we start stirring

 You want to get it up to a boil and you want to get it to start to thicken

 And as you see it's getting a beautiful color and you want to cook this down to get the apple

 And then I'm going to take them out and I'm going to let them cool down

 At a 450 degree level and you want to warm up the pans as well as the oven

 It's very important that step and then in a separate bowl, we're going to mix together five eggs

 That really goes well with Apple anytime you have Apple if you put cinnamon with it, it's great

 you can put anywhere from a quarter to a full teaspoon of the cinnamon and then a pinch of salt a

 We're going to cut into two pieces that are both two tablespoons roughly

 That's what you're looking for and you take the pans out of the oven

 They're hot and you want to coat the pans on the sides and on the bottom with butter.

 Anything see as soon as you put the butter in it starts to melt right in the pan

 Once it's spread around you add the batter you want to split it between the two pans

 in the oven and then you're going to turn the pans inside the oven so that you get even heat or all the way around and

 In the oven and then you're going to turn the pans inside the oven so that you get even heat or all the way around and

 that's when you put your apple filling back on the stove again and

 Pancakes rise a lot and every time you make them it's going to be a different shape.

 Take them out of the oven now as you can see they're starting to get a little brown in the middle

 Here we're just going to take the juice of a lemon and while it's still in the pan

 You can hear the lemon juice sizzle in the hot pan as well nice sound

 And we're going to split the apple filling between the two pancakes

 Now you can also do other fillings or you can just leave these pancakes plain and use maple syrup on them or

 And then after you put the filling in you can spread it around to the edges

 It might be easier as well to take the pancakes out of the pans and put on a serving plates before you add the apple filling

 I'm going to take the apple filling and I'm going to spread it around the edges

 Now you can also do other fillings or you can leave the pancakes out of the pans and put on a serving plates before you add the apple filling

 I didn't do it this time, but most of the time that is what I do

 But anyway, just use a spatula and you can pull it out of the pan and put it onto a plate

 You can cut it into four slices, but most people will probably eat two slices

 Now we're going to coat a little bit of icing sugar on the top just for looks and a little bit of extra sweetness

It's an easy recipe and most people have all the ingredients in their house at the time anyway

 Nothing special about it, but really good taste and everybody in my family loves it

 What's up guys, it's Kieran here and today I'm going to be showing you how to use whey protein.

 So you can purchase whey protein in any sports or nutrition store.

 The brand that I currently use is Optimum Nutrition, Gold Standard, 100% whey.

 I'm not on any mass builder or anything like that because what I'm doing is I'm using it

 straight after the gym in the recommended time between 15 to 45 minutes after.

 I take protein so that I can get back into the gym the next day and keep up with my schedule.

 You can get this in a larger or smaller packet depending on when and where you're going to be using it.

 The flavours that it comes in are chocolate, vanilla, strawberry, just like I have here.

 That shaker is one serving size that is recommended on the outside of the box.

 It is recommended that you have one gram of protein per kilo on your body.

 This should help you build up lean muscle if you're doing a proper workout.

 So guys, with your recommended serving of whey specified for yourself,

 This means there's less calories in total and it also digests a lot faster through your body.

 If you take it with milk, you'll find that it'll be a lot heavier on you.

 And if you're also strict about your calories, I recommend you do not take it with milk at all.

 depending on how much you want and how concentrated you want it to be.

 So what I'm going to use is a whisk or for this instance, to show you guys,

 Make sure the top is sealed, otherwise you'll have whey all around.

 I recommend that you drink it as fast as possible and don't hold back

 Hey everybody, it's Jerry, and this week I'm back with a recipe called Fezzanjan, or Fezzanjoon.

 It's a Persian dish which is basically a chicken stew with walnuts and pomegranate sauce.

 So the first thing we're going to do is heat up a skillet, a large skillet, with a little bit of olive oil.

 And then we're going to add to that about a pound and a half of chicken legs,

 which have had the skin and bones removed and then cut up into bite-sized pieces.

 Until the chicken starts to get pretty cooked, turns nice and white.

 All right, it's been about 20 minutes now, and I'm going to add the chicken.

 All right, it's been about 20 minutes now, and the onions have started to brown,

 So now what we're going to do is add the ingredients to make the sauce.

 So first of all, we're going to add a half a pound of finely ground walnuts.

 So just take the 8 ounces of walnuts, put them in a food processor,

 And we're just going to let that simmer for a long time, actually.

 And if it gets a little bit too thick, then you can add some more water to it.

 All right, it's been about an hour now, and the sauce has started to thicken a little bit.

 So, if you've got a lime cut in half, you're just going to squeeze the lime juice in there.

 Stir that up, and then we're going to let that simmer for another 30 minutes.

 So now it's about 30 minutes later, and the sauce has thickened up a bit more.

 Hey this is Nate with guilt free drinks coming at you today showing you how to make a chilled

 This is a really simplified version that you can make pretty quickly at home.

 Starting out with the Starbucks Via we had last week just to kind of use that up.

 You can use any sort of generic instant coffee works pretty well.

 You're adding a lot of sugar and cream to this so it doesn't have to be the highest

 Then using ice cream this is going to add some sugar and sweetness also give it a good

 We put one cup of ice cream in the microwave for about 14-15 seconds just to kind of liquefy

 Then we have a half cup of milk this is 2% but you can use whatever your heart desires.

 Then we're going to add a couple tablespoons of the caramel syrup.

 Really want to get that, it's hard when the water is not hot to get that dissolved so

 you really want to shake and stir this good to get all your instant coffee to dissolve.

 You're going to find that this is comparable to something you're going to get at a specialty

 It's really simple to make and you don't have ice in there so it's not going to get watery

 Really good, there's a lot of sweetness to it and I can definitely tell there's some

 If you guys have any questions, comments or if you want the recipes go to the website

 I use my Prolongwear concealer by Mac and I'm applying this matte lilac

 And after that, I'm just going to be going in with this warm brown eyeshadow

 After this, I'm just going to be using this base by LA Colors and it's just a normal white base

 you could use the mix base in milk and after this I'm going to be applying a

 Deeper purple eyeshadow and I'm just going to be placing this directly in my crease as well

 Dark purple eyeshadow as you can see I'm working with mainly purples today

 And I'm basically just using this eyeshadow to dip in my crease and just give my eyes some definition

 Now I'm just spraying my brush with some water and I'm going into this Bobby Brown eyeshadow.

 So I'm just placing this eyeshadow on my mobile lid and also in my inner tear ducts to serve as a highlight

 After this, I'm just going to be using a wipe to clean up the edge of my eyeshadow look and also

 And now I'm just going in with some gel liner and this one is by Ruby kisses

 It's the baby doll mascara and I already put on some lashes and I used the cherry blossom lashes in the style wispy

 I just primed my face using my benefit porefessional and I mixed it with some NARS illuminator in orgasm

I'm just highlighting and contouring my face the usual way that I do it

 If you want to see a tutorial definitely check the description box.

 I'm going to be using my Ben Nye banana powder and to set my contour as well

 I'm going to be using my sleek face contour kit in the shade medium

 And now I'm just applying some bronzer and this is my elf bronzer, I'm not sure of the name but I'll leave in the description box

 Now I'm applying this orange blush I recently got from Sephora and to highlight my face

 I'm going to be using my Becca shimmering skin perfector in the shade opal

 And I'm just going to be using my Ben Nye bronzer and to set my contour as well

 To line my lips I'm going to be using my She Makeup lip pencil in the shade mahogany

 And then I'm going to be applying my Faces lipstick in the shade belladonna

 And it's just like a nude-ish pink lipstick, it's really really pretty and I thought it went really well with this look

 Now I'm just topping up the lips with this lipgloss by whitening lightning

 And I'm just highlighting my inner tear duct some more with my Becca highlight

 After that to finish up the look I'm going to be spraying this makeup setting spray by Urban Decay

 And this is the finished look guys, I hope you guys like it, thank you so much for watching and I'll see you in my next video, bye!

 We're going to be using melted chocolate, you could also use ganache or hot fudge if

 I've whipped up a couple of cups of cream and it's probably about 4 cups of whipping

 cream but that's going to depend on how much you want to put onto your cake.

 So I've unwrapped each of my 12 ice cream sandwiches so that they're ready to go and

 I've been keeping them in the freezer until I'm ready to put my cake together.

 So I'm going to take some whipping cream and this is just going to have the sandwiches

 attach better to the plate underneath so it's just going to give you a little bit of

 So I'm just taking these and putting that little dollop on the bottom like this and

 Now I'm going to put enough whipping cream here that it's going to fill in that hole

 and then I'm also just going to push it right out to the edges here of the Oreo sandwich.

 Just going to push that around like that and then if you want to put more on you can and

 For the second layer of the sandwiches I'm going to alternate where I had the one below

 so they're just kind of going to poke out the sides here in what would be you might

 So I'm just going to arrange those like this and then I'm going to cover them again with

 So I'm just covering it like I did below and I'm going to do the next top layer the exact

 With the whipping cream covering the final layer now we're going to add some M&Ms to

 I just like how this is solid chocolate and it goes really well with the Oreo flavour

 You can add them onto the little ledges where the Oreos stick out at the sides and then

 using your chocolate or your hot fudge just create some covering over top of your cake.

 So I'm going to be back when I've finished this all off to show you the final product.

 So there you go everybody how to make this 5 minute M&M Oreo Ice Cream Sandwich Cake.

 It's absolutely delicious, super easy to do so I hope you enjoyed this tutorial today.

 Remember to subscribe to the channel to stay up to date on all of our newest videos.

 So today at New CID Cosmetics, I'm doing the look for darker skin tones from the New CID

 Just to recap on Sharon, I've used Eye Prime, the skin perfecting serum, before we've applied

 That's going to ensure that the makeup lasts all day, giving a flawless application and

 I've also used medium to dark concealer, Eye Conceal, underneath Sharon's eye to give a

 And now we're going to apply Eye Blossom, which is our cheek stamp, in tulip.

 You've got the mirror one end, you've got the shadow impregnated in the other, and then

 So continuing with the look, I've got Eye Shine in Cuba Libra, which is a beautiful

 So you can see it adds a little bit of color and warms to the lips.

 For evening, we're going to move onto Eye Gloss, which as you can see, has the mirror

 This shade is Raspberry Kiss, and the gel formulation is really, really shiny, but not

 So here we have the eyeshadow palette in Morocco, which is from the Darker Skin Tone Kit from

 I'm just going to use the eyeshadow blending brush to apply this shade as a base.

 I'm taking that over the lid, lash to brow, right up to the brow bone.

 It could also be used as an eyeshadow look on its own, because it brightens the eye.

 I'm just going to take with my finger, this works really well sometimes if you're in a

 The warmth of your finger actually blends the product onto the skin.

 So I'm going to take the gold over the lid, so the moving part of the eye, right up to

 Always taking off the excess onto your hand, using it like a palette.

 We're going to sweep this into the outer corner in a V shape, building up the colour.

 And if you open for me, even easier with your eye open, you're just working that colour

 And again, eyes open, straight ahead, and blending that through the crease.

 And the shadows have got really good pigment, so you can see there's hardly any fallout

 And we're smudging that into the bottom lashes, giving you a beautiful open eye effect.

 So just to add that extra bit of drama to the eyes, we've got eye line in black.

 So if you look up for me, Sharon, we're going to run the kohl inside the waterline.

 And that completes our look for darker skin tones with the new CID Cosmetics Darker Skin

 So I'm Echo Tool Guy here, so as you guys know a lot of people use one of these little

 If you look at this garden bed here, typical flower bed, full of leaves, weeds, moss, hard

 packed soil, and normally you'd have to get down on your hands and knees and dig at it

 with this fork and get a sore back and get a sore knees and take forever.

 If you look at the size of the garden bed that I have here on either side, it's a pretty

 large flower bed, it's going to take me a long time trying to do this with this little

 But if you use the Echo PAS multi-tool attachment, which I have right now with the tiller cultivator

 attachment, you can actually go at it with this machine and it will be a lot easier.

 So what we're going to do is I'm going to fire this unit up and I'm going to put on

 some safety equipment and make sure I have ear protection and we're going to go out in

 When you're going to start one of these, obviously you want to make sure that your purge bulb

 is primed, make sure your choke is on, and make sure that you put your power switch on.

 Just grab a hold of the handle here and you just have to give it a quick pull.

 Obviously, with a little bit of cleanup, this is going to be a lot easier to do a whole

 flower bed using the tiller instead of being on your hands and knees and breaking your

 You can attach trimmers, cultivators, blowers, hedge clippers, all with one engine.

 low speed and let that mix for about five minutes to ten minutes.

 yeast, the sugar, the salt and the oil is mixed for five minutes, then we add the flour.

 And just let that mix for about fifteen minutes until you have a beautiful pizza dough.

 once the dough is mixed, pop it into a mixing bowl and let it sit there for about an hour

And then we just divide it into about 150 gram balls or about the

 for another good twenty to thirty minutes and they'll prove up again and double in size.

 flour on your bench, I find this gives you a really lovely crispy base and good to work

Just with your rolling pin, just very gently roll out from the center

The most important thing here is to get it as thin as possible and as even

Now this stops huge air bubbles from happening throughout the pizza and gives it

Or use one of these things which is a pastry docker, which is basically a fork

Turn it up to preheat for about five to ten minutes before you top.

 use cherry tomatoes or heirloom tomatoes or just basically the vine ripened or Roma

Put a little bit more on than you think you need because what happens with the

 put raw garlic on as well and let it cook in there but I love the flavour of this.

Now the beautiful thing about this is the ceramic stone which makes the

 pizza base go crispy and this gets hotter than a domestic oven so that's why the pizzas

 in there the whole period but at least for a minute just until the base starts to cook

 is how hot your equipment can get and also the toppings that you use.

 pizza oven we've got an element on the top and an element underneath and in between that

 it for about 15 minutes and basically burn and that way your stone is seasoned and ready

A lot of people want it to look beautiful clean which you don't want to do.

 to do so you never wash it because what happens is because it's porous the water soaks in

 and then when you go to reuse your oven all that water escapes and cooks and so you end

 just with a spatula let it cool down and then scrape any of the leftover cheese that's burnt

Scrape that off and then just with a cloth or a chucks, a dry chucks

 Today I am going to show you how to cook banana flower seeri sambal or with onions.

 For this recipe I am using one medium size banana flower or kesal moha and I cut it into

 tiny pieces and then I put it in salty water and I did this in the morning and now I am

 It doesn't matter you can do it any time when you have time and leave it in salty water

 I am going to deep fry these two and some tiny sprouts or the anchovies or you can omit

 I am going to deep fry them and salt, chilli flakes and some curry leaves.

 And what I am going to do first is to fry the sprouts and then I am going to squeeze

 the water out from the banana flower and then put that into another bowl.

 When the oil is hot add the sprouts and deep fry that until golden brown.

 I deep fried the sprouts or the anchovies until it is nice golden brown.

 Now into that I am going to add the curry leaves and the chillies and I am going to

 Into the same oil I am going to add the onions and fry that separately.

 I deep fried the onions so I am going to add the banana flower pieces into the oil and

 I finished frying all the ingredients so what I am going to do next is I put a pan on the

 I added some oil into a pan into that I am going to add the chilli flakes and then enough

 And then into that I am going to add a tablespoon or two vinegar.

 And then the banana flower and the chillies and the curry leaves and mix this well and

 If you like you can add some sugar into this too but I don't like sweet dish so I added

 I finished cooking the banana flower with onions and you can store this in air tight

 containers or you can leave it in the fridge for about two to three weeks and I hope you

 and then this this hose part which unclips and this is an adapter for a

 at top dead center for number one so that when the number one spark plug

 gonna do a leak down test by putting air into the cylinder to fill the cylinder

 of air should leak out and that's usually a measurement of the health of

 the rings in the cylinder walls of the engine because that's the only other

 But if everything's going well it generally points to good engine health.

 So what we do with this is we plug it into shop line pressure and it'll show

 regulator to make sure that the needle is pointing to the set area of this

 know 100 psi, 125, 150 psi, you'll have to use this regulator to back it down

 that's pretty much as much air is going to it as is going to this gauge.

 what it's doing, so we're putting in about 100 psi of pressure.

 measure how much is leaking out and the more that leaks out this needle will

 that the needle is going to go all the way to high leak down as it starts

 filling and then as it fills up with air it will give us the final value.

So it's telling us that it's you know just a little bit below where our

 talking 3% maybe 4% leak down on the cylinder so that's how that would be

 using a method to stop the engine from rotating, if you don't have the parking,

 if you have an automatic car and you can't put it in gear and use the parking

 brake, you can either put a flywheel lock on the teeth of the flywheel.

 can try to put the other plugs in but that usually doesn't work.

 happens is the air pressure, 100 psi of air pressure, is strong enough to push

 the piston down to the very bottom of its stroke and most engines at the very

 bottom of the of the compression stroke will, the exhaust valve starts opening.

 as the combustion happens in the cylinder and the explosion is pushing the piston

 down, right before the piston gets to bottom dead center, you know really all

 combustion can start evacuating the spent gases out of the cylinder.

 reaches the bottom of the cylinder, you know you can usually watch on the gauge.

 The gauge will start to climb into the good zone and then you will actually

 hear the engine start turning over as it pushes the piston down and as that

 happens the needle usually starts dropping because then the air is

 for this car, this is a four-cylinder engine, so I just did cylinder one.

 turn the engine 180 degrees, half a rotation, cylinder three is going to be

Then do it another 180 degrees, number four is going to be ready

 can do test them all at their spark event or their top dead center.

Vicos and today I want to show you how to make one of my favorite

 What makes this cheese so unique and special is that you can fry it or grill it and it

 I'm going to add some olive oil to the pan just to get that heated up as well.

 Alright, when you look at the cheese, you'll notice there are some green flecks in here.

 So what you want to do now is cut the cheese into about half inch slices, like so.

 So again, the cheese isn't going to melt, but you want to make sure that you have some

 Just make sure that you've got a very clean grate and that you've oiled it down.

 We will let the cheese cook now for about a minute to a minute and a half on each side.

 Alright, so we'll give that a toss and you can see how nice and crispy that browned up.

 And one of the unique things in Cyprus, they often serve haloumi for breakfast.

 I've already prepared my plate with freshly cut, kind of small cucumbers that are nice and cold and crisp.

 Very last thing I do, and often I do this right when I serve it in front of my guests because it's very cool.

 Hi, I'm Jeff Slavins of Slavins Racing and this video is about how to install Bulletproof

 So they start out with one solid block of aluminum and machine this out with a CNC milling

 All the other brands on the market are stamped and although we do sell the other brands,

 These do not inhibit air flow whatsoever and they're very easy to install.

 So the first thing you do is remove the tank or you can just remove the shrouds, whichever

 If you can't figure that part out, then you probably shouldn't be doing the rest.

 But pull the tank and the shrouds off and to where you can get to this, you just pop

 Then you have to remove the bolts that hold the rear ear to the frame.

 So the outside of it is secured with these allen bolts that come with the rear ear guards.

 Then the inside bolts go in through this hole and then attach the inside of the rear ear

 And the tricky part about that is when you're trying to stick them through there, you'll

 So I put grease on the bolt heads, which helps stick them to my T-handle here.

 Grease up the head of the bolt, put it on your T-handle, stick it in through the hole,

 They give a lot of side protection, front protection, and they flow air extremely well.

 And these guys, Bulletproof Designs, are great guys to deal with.

 But if there's ever any warranty issues, which I doubt there ever will be, they stand behind

 So how many times behind a chair are we actually in this situation?

 We're dealing with normal to average hair, straight, and what we're dealing with is multi-dimensional

 So what we're going to do right now is we're going to go in with four different colors,

 different variations of reds, burnettes, and blondes, and what we're going to do is we're

 just going to create huge, voluminous human hair which can actually be colored on top

 of everything else that we have going on if for some reason we wanted to go back and tweak

 So I'm going to show you a really cool, basic, fun application to totally go from this just

 So we're going to use a bunch of different colors with this and we're going to go ahead

 Once again, I'm going a quarter of an inch lower than the part line.

 So I take my tape, I pull back, and then when I go in there, I want to make sure that I'm

 not pressing firmly because if for some reason I decide to go ahead and adjust it, it's very

 forgiving and I can go ahead and move it if for some reason I want to go a little bit

 Remember, we're working with the natural shape of the head in every single situation.

 I lightly just kind of round out the very, very bottom with my index finger and it just

 So what we're going to do now is I'm going to add two more pieces to this area.

 We're going to overlap in through here and really make sure that we have a really nice,

 strong, solid base, especially because we're dealing with length.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to go in here and use something which is going to

 We're going to go ahead, we're going to take the tape off, and we're going to lay it right

 If she pulls this back and a pony filler decides to wear it up, I don't want to see anything

 I don't push down crazy hard right away because if for some reason I want to adjust, I want

 And now we're going to go ahead and move on to our third section to really go ahead and

 Like I said, if for some reason we want to go in there with some demi-permanent and make

 something a little bit darker, 10 minutes, piece of cake, no problem.

 I don't want to go right into the side of the parting line, especially back behind the

 ear because if she pulls it back, I don't want to see anything sticking out.

 I take my finger from the underneath, bending back, and I go ahead and I pull off the double-sided

 I don't want to go ahead and pull super hard right now, especially when I'm putting them

 So when you're doing it, you want to make sure that you're taking your time and being

 clean but let's face it, every once in a while, we make mistakes here and there when it comes

 to application, but we have a band-aid for this with our in-between powder.

 It will dry oils and gives volume, so it will dry the sticky tape.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to go up underneath and I'm going to go ahead and

 secure it, getting rid of any air pockets or air bubbles that we might have from the

 I used four different colors to go ahead and offset what she already has going on.

 So after a 20-minute application, I went really heavy in the back, making sure that we had

 We're going to do some cutting and it's going to bring us back to styling.

 Today we're going to make an Angry Birds Jack-o-Lantern for Halloween.

 Okay, so the first thing we're going to do is cut a circle on the top of the pumpkin

 and we're going to scrape out all the guts and the seeds from inside.

 Okay, so now that we've finished with the inside of our pumpkin, we're going to put

 Then what we're going to do is take our Angry Bird template and then we're going to tape

 So now that we have the template on, we're going to make a bunch of holes with this pig

 Now that we made the points, we're going to take this little saw and we're going to

 Okay, now that we're done carving the bird, we put the light inside and we put the top

 There's our Angry Bird push-in and Cady will turn it around in an Angry Bird jack-o-lantern.

 I'd like to give you a few tips, a few do's and don'ts which I hope will help you get

 You need to play with an upright posture, not hunched over like this or with your head

 You need to be looking straight ahead and playing in a relaxed manner these muscles.

 If you play with an upright posture, this has the great advantage that first of all

 your vocal tract and your torso are straight so that you can get a good resonant air column

 And it also has the added advantage that saliva does not run out of your mouth into your harmonica.

 So always keep your head erect, not tilted back but looking straight ahead and play in

 Another thing that is really important is to remember to always tap your harmonica out

 into the palm of your hand every time you finish playing with it.

 This removes saliva, it ensures that the instrument is much more likely to play right the next

 time you put it in your mouth than if you simply put it down without tapping it out.

 Should you have the misfortune to live in a cold climate, which I certainly do, it's

 a good idea to warm your harmonicas up if they should be cold before playing them.

 The easiest way to warm them up, you can warm them in your pocket, in your hands or the

 Even that is enough to bring the wreaths up to something close to body temperature and

 prevent them developing a crack through a cold shock, which they may well do if you

 play them when they're really cold and they are then hit by 37 degree air fresh from the

 In order to avoid foreign bodies getting inside and blocking the reeds, it's really important

 to not leave your harmonica lying with the reed channels pointing upwards.

 If you do that, then it's much harder for dust and other things to fall inside the channels

 It's also a really good idea to not play while drinking beverages which contain sugar.

 Most sweet drinks, I would say, definitely don't mix with harmonica playing.

 So don't play if you've just eaten, if you haven't cleaned your teeth, and don't play

 With a new harmonica, it's a good idea to play it in gently for the first at least few

 minutes until it gets warmed up and accustomed to your playing style.

 You don't necessarily need to play it gently for a week as has sometimes been suggested,

 but I would certainly recommend playing it through carefully at first to ascertain that

 all the reeds are working properly and not to immediately start heavy bending or loud playing.

 Generally speaking, the harmonica will sound better if you don't play at maximum volume.

 Play at a full volume, a resonant volume, but not as loudly as you can.

 This is definitely the best way to prevent it getting dirty and it will give you more

 So put it in the case, but don't forget to take it out again soon, OK?

And you're just going to pour a quarter cup of it over everything.

 This has more chicken in there, so I probably will add just a little bit more.

And then you're going to pour, put over top of it all, a fourth cup of grated Parmesan

I have shredded instead of grated, but Parmesan is Parmesan, right?

So I hurried and I ran out to go pick some parsley from the garden.

 going to go ahead and I'm going to sprinkle this over our little dinner.

So this evening I am making for my husband a delicious tomato and pasta

 frittata and I thought I would share the love by sharing the recipe with you guys

 because I know you have been interested in the types of foods that I prepare

 consume too much time I'm not gonna go through listing all the ingredients here.

 If you're interested in what you will need just check down in the description

 box below and if you're ready to see me begin making this yummy dish then let's

 Now in a large bowl you're gonna want to throw in all of your eggs,

 your milk or half-and-half whichever you prefer and then mix that together

 For your next step add in your cheese and your pasta and then we're gonna mix

 With that set aside you'll have a pan and you're gonna want to throw in your

 With your tomatoes ready to go take your pasta and egg mix and then pour it on

Take a little minute and try to spread everything out evenly and mix

 everything together and shape it just how you're gonna like it.

 seven minutes you're going to want to go around the edges make sure that they're

 brown and that your bottom is cooked to the extent that you're gonna like before

 Once you have your frittata cooked mostly to where you'd like it to be we're

 gonna pop it into our oven with the broiler on so that the top will set and

 After about five minutes of patience and productivity of course it's time to take

 our frittata out of the oven and voila it's done you made a frittata and you

 husband and I think it's really tasty and it's quite simple to make so let me

 know how this worked out for you and I'll talk to you guys later bye

 Hey it's Zoe from Bywits and today I'm going to be showing you this JW Universal Mobile Phone

 that you can position it horizontally or vertically depending on which suits you best.

 It also has a sticky grip on the cradle which secures your phone to the cradle but don't worry

 sticky grip to actually secure your phone to the cradle and also to protect your phone

 the cradle comes with these foam feet which ensure that your phone does not get scratched.

 we have two clips these like crocodile clips and all you need to do is open them up then find a

 vent that you want to use and then just push all the way back to the the back of the slat like that

 and then all you need to make sure is that the back of the clip is around the back of the slat.

 I've got my iPhone 4 here now and I'm just going to show you how you would place your

First of all you need to remove this sticky grip and protective cover so

 that your phone will actually stick to the cradle and then you just put your phone into the cradle

 and push push it back so the sticky grip secures onto your phone.

 which means that you can loosen it and tighten it back up when to find a position that suits you

 like that so once you've found that position you just tighten the ring back up like so.

 You can either have your phone horizontally or vertically depending on which suits you best

 and in order to remove your phone all you do is just peel it off like so and now just

 take your phone off first by peeling it off like that and now again with the clips which are like

 crocodile clips you just push down like that and then just pull out simply like that.

 watching and you can find this JW Universal Mobile Phone Air Vent Mount on BuyBits.com today.

 Hey everybody, today I'm going to show you how to customize your bike rims.

 So for today you're going to need obviously a bike rim, duct tape, and some sort of cutting

 utensil, utility knife, x-acto knife, scissors, whatever you may need.

 First, you're going to want to take a decent sized strip of duct tape, so you've got that

 Alright, you're going to rip it, split it in half, and take this half, and now you're

 going to go and just place it right along the rim, wherever you want.

 And then any excess that goes onto the tire, you cut with your knife, like so.

 Next, go in, and let's see here, go in, cut a nice straight line, and voila!

 So now you move on to the next one, and I'll come back with you once I finish this wheel

 Now this isn't the best work, but you know, it's chrome, and you can really see a lot

 You should be able to see the duct tape completely along, no extra duct tape coming onto the

 So like this video if this video helped you out at all, and be sure to subscribe, and

 hello guys, box of 93 here and then today unboxing is about dragon galaxy

 Dragon G, really nice Beyblade, engine gear Beyblade from the G revolution era

 nice Beyblade, yeah nice, yeah let's do this unboxing, oh sorry guys

 it's Takao or Taisen right there, engine gear stuff information, yeah

 and then the white disc, engine gear, left spin gear engine, left spin engine gear

 awesome Beyblade, I really like this Beyblade, really like, so yeah I'm going to put

 stickers on it and then, oh yes and then, ah come on, yeah yeah so I'm going to put

 all of the stickers to all of the parts and then I will go back to you guys in

 the moment, so yeah just put all of the stickers and then here is the check ring

 really nice, really nice, the engine gear, left spin engine gear and then the blade

 base, really like that, I really like it and then dragon itself, so let's assemble this

 really nice Beyblade, really awesome Beyblade, yeah that's it for unboxing for

 today yeah also the winder, that's it the unboxing for today guys so stay

 tuned for the other unboxing videos yeah yeah that's it for today and then

 hoop combo, which I find to be very useful while in flow, and I think you guys will enjoy.

 from here we're going to go over the prerequisites you need before we attempt this move.

 first one is going to be a shoulder to shoulder contact pass, which looks like this.

 you can see I'm going across my chest, passing it to one shoulder, and bumping my shoulder

 our palm facing behind us, and I'm going to pull my hand from behind me, and I'm going to allow

 to just let go of the hoop, and it will naturally press against your stomach and do the fold across.

 going to then catch with the opposite hand I began with, from behind my back, then I will allow that

 to fold over in front of me, letting go to do the natural fold across my stomach, catching it with

Also note that when I catch the hoop from behind my back, I'm catching from the

 inside of the hoop in order to be able to take the hoop and fold it down and forward to do the

It is super useful to have this on both sides, as also it is visually appealing to

 in your flow, you can always use this and pull it out coming out with new combinations and things

 go outside to make a lot more videos, which I love the lighting outside.

 If you've run out of ideas for dinner and your kids are sick of sandwiches for lunch,

 This quiche recipe is from Kate's Kids Meals Cookbook and the ingredients are phyllo pastry

 or wholemeal bread, cherry tomatoes, low-fat cheese, olive oil, milk and of course eggs.

 Look, I think that people think eggs for some reason are no good for us but they're the

 To keep portion size under control, we're using a muffin tin to make mini quiches.

 So adults tend to have two bigger serving sizes and this way you actually have an individual

 portion size and two of these is still less than 10 grams of fat which is healthy for

 The main way to avoid using pastries is actually using bread and everyone's got a piece of

 So you just cut the crusts off, give it a little bit of a squash which you could use

 Once the bread is sufficiently squished, pop it into the muffin case.

 It's a really, really thin sort of wheaty pastry but it hasn't got any fat in it.

 Brush the phyllo with some olive oil and fold into a small rectangle.

 And it is advisable to do another one as well to give you those lovely crusty layers.

 Now at this point, you can add herbs or chilies for extra interest but Kate says steer clear

 You know, we've got to look after our hearts and our blood pressure so just avoid adding

 Look, we started from a very, very young age where I did sort of grate or puree things

 So they just got used to that taste and I think that's the key.

 Today, Kate's keeping the quiches simple with a cherry tomato, good for vitamin C.

 Basically you get the lovely tomato flavour from being stewed inside in the cooking and

 Cheese just tends to give them a lovely little cap and it just, as it's cooking, it tends

 to sort of give you that crusty edge and it's just a nice way of adding some more calcium

 Hi everyone, thanks for checking out another jazz guitar video mix lesson.

 In today's lesson I've got a really cool tritone triplet lick that I'd like to show you that

 If you'd like to follow along with the lick, you know, using tablature and notation, if

 you look below in the about box, I've got a link to a sign-up form, and if you sign

 up to my weekly jazz guitar newsletter, you get two free jazz guitar ebooks, one of which

 has ten jazz guitar licks in with notation and tab, including this one.

 So if you'd like to grab a copy of that so you can follow along with the lesson, you

 can just pause this tape, download that, and then come back to it.

 So the lick that I've got to show you today is a tritone triplet lick, and it uses a really

 cool jazz soloing technique called tritone, or flat 5 substitution, and it uses triplets,

 which are a great jazz rhythm, and I think everyone's always looking to get more triplets

 into their solos, so this'll be a great way to do both of those things, learn a new jazz

 So the lick is over a 2-5-1 in the key of D, so that's like a E minor 7, and then G

 major 7, and this lick is a one-bar lick, so you could use it if you saw, like, a 2-5-1

 If you have, like, a 2-5-1 where it has, like, 2 for a bar, 5 for a bar, and 1 for a bar,

 So if we hear the lick, I'll just play it slower, so a 1-2-3-4...so a really cool lick

 that starts low on the neck and it goes high and finally resolves to the 5th of the major

 So a really cool lick, and this entire lick, it only uses two triads throughout the entire

 thing, and the first triad it uses is an A triad, which is on the bottom two strings,

 so that's the root there, third, the C sharp, fifth, so that's the first triad, and that's

 in triplets, so like, triplet, so like 1-2-3, so 1-2-3, and then the next triad is an E

 flat triad, and you can use the same fingering, you just sort of move it to the next set of

 strings, and that is E flat, G, and B flat, the next triad, so first triad, A, then an

 And then the cool thing about this lick is it's just the same thing repeats an octave

 higher, so we've got an A triad again, A, C sharp, E, and then we have an E flat triad

 again, E flat, G, B flat, and then it resolves finally onto the 5th of the 1 chord, which

 But the thing to note is that although it uses the same fingering, you know, like the

 second finger, first finger, pinky, second finger, first, pinky, second, first, pinky,

 it changes slightly on the last E flat triad, so we play that with our first finger on the

 E flat, first finger on the G, pinky on the B flat, and then third finger on the A when

 So there you have it, a really cool, simple tritone triplet lick, so you know, it's just

 two triads, so if we hear it again, we can play it together just slowly, so a 1, 2, 3, 4...

 So a great lick, and the reason it works is if we look at an A7 chord, you know, just

 like a shell voicing chord, but the root, and we'll look at an E flat 7 chord...

 The only thing that changes between these two chords is the root, so the 3rd and the

 7th for each chord, you know, for A it's G, 7th, C sharp, the 3rd, for E flat, D's the

 flat 7, and, sorry, that's the G, G, C, 3rd, and D flat's the flat 7 for the E flat.

 So the two most important notes of each chord stays in place, so that's why it works, and

 if you use a tritone, you know, like an E flat over an A, it gives it a really nice

 whole word sound, so, you know, just the A triad by itself, it's alright, pretty diatonic,

 a little bit boring, but the E flat, sharp 11, 7th, which is an important guide tone

 and the B flat, which is a flat 9, and these kind of tensions are really cool and really

 So if you'd like to check out this concept more, you could just maybe put on a backing

 track or record like a 2-5-1 in the key of D or in the key of C, whatever you're working

 on, and just start to experiment with tritone, with triad pairs, tritone apart over the 5

 chord, that's a really great way to get into tritone substitution, and you know, you don't

 have to necessarily limit yourself to triad pairs, you know, you could experiment with

 E flat 7 arpeggios over the A7 or an E flat mixed with E in scale, whatever you like really,

 but I hope this little video has been a good insight into this cool jazz soloing technique

 this YouTube channel, you'll get notifications of new jazz and blues guitar lessons.

 So thanks for checking this lesson out, and I'll see you next time.

 Hi, it's Grace and Jill today and we have some exercises to help you get a better

 toe touch and bring your legs higher in the air and we also have some tips and

 pointers for when you are throwing your toe touch to make it look better and

 do to help improve your toe touch, okay, one of the first things you can do to

 touch because they strengthen your abs so you have more power to bring up the

 bottom half of your body and make your legs look like they're higher in the air.

 up in the air and they also strengthen your abs so you can do better.

 also help you if you're new and you are having trouble with timing so count with

 the tee jump so five six seven eight one two three four five six seven eight so

 that way you get the feel for what you're doing before you actually throw

Some tips for making the jump look better are remember to keep your

Point your toes and remember to smile and if you are new to throwing

 toe touches make sure, well you don't need to make sure, but if you want

 someone to spot you so you can get the feel for it before you do it on your own

I've rolled out the pastry, it's ready now for your ingredients.

We down in Cornwall call it turnip, but that's where you are, it's swede.

 they only put a bit of turnip and then they put potato, meat and onion, but I do it layered.

And then you've got to crimp them and you go over your thumb like that

 And then you put your egg thing all over the top and that's what makes them bread.

 this is your pasty, Matthew, because it's the biggest one, okay?

You asked for more ideas on what to do with spring flowers and spring bulbs.

I found these of all places at the supermarket and very, very soon spring is going to be all over because we'll have used up all the spring flowers.

I've got some sphagnum moss, I've got this lovely sheet moss that you can get now which is actually artificial and it's great because it means that it's going to keep the sphagnum moss inside the container.

 I've got my beautiful little miniature daffodils and I've got this container.

 This here was originally a wire basket that hangs and I decided that I didn't want something hanging because if it was hanging I wouldn't see my daffodils.

 So what I did was with a little bit of Kiwi ingenuity, number 8 fencing wire, you can do anything with this.

In fact it makes me feel like MacGyver when you've got this stuff.

 So I will show you another day how to make this but basically what it is, it's just getting your wire basket, determining how long you want it to be.

Now this here has to be about when you take it down into your container, about that much up from the base which will give you your perfect balance and weight for balance when you get into it.

 And then these become the legs but I'll show you how to do that another day.

I would like to have used fresh ivy but we took it off the fence a couple of weeks ago so it's all gone.

 It's just a matter of using this, you can either use cable ties or little bits of wire and just hold and tape those and wind that in there and then take it right around.

 And it's just sort of to give a bit more movement as we get into, I'll talk to you about movement and transition.

 But anyway, just once you've done that, just take that around and down the sides of the bowl.

 Now for Louise in the UK that's got a wedding coming up and you're looking for a nice container, this could be perfect.

 Don't forget to make sure that you definitely hold that in place.

 I would have used the cable ties but I don't really want black cable ties, I don't want to see them.

 Right, from there the next thing is to get this and I've made that into sort of like a little ring or a nest which is going to fit into there.

 So already I've got this really lovely thing happening with the wire, with the chain, which incidentally was the chain that went to hold it and I've just strapped it around there.

 I've got the ivy and then I've got this gorgeous green so we've got all this lovely textural happening.

 Right, from there the next thing is to get the sphagnum moss which I've actually soaked.

 So give that a good soaking and then squeeze out as much moisture as you can.

 When you buy your bulbs or your growing bulbs and you're wanting to put them into the garden, keep them in their little containers that they come in and then dig a little hole and then put them into the ground.

 If you live in a warm environment like we do here in Auckland, what can sometimes happen with your bulb is that they will actually rot out.

 So lifting them and letting them dry and then you can split them up, repot them and then put them back into the pots into the ground.

 And also when you're working or designing with spring flowers, what I like to do is to keep them on the bulb.

 And the other thing when it comes to daffodils, don't mix daffodils with other spring flowers.

 The little bit of gum that comes out of these is really quite poisonous and it will poison the other flowers.

 And also it muddies up or poisons the water for the other flowers that are taking any moisture.

 Also the flowers will last much longer when they're left on their bulb.

 The other great thing about these is depending on where they're positioned, they will grow to the light.

 So if you've got an issue like that, just keep moving them around.

 I can see that they're sort of going everywhere, but by the time they get into their position that they're going to sit in, they should be fine.

 To finish it off, because I don't really want to see that sphagnum moss, which is a something nothing.

 I actually found these lovely little moss balls, so I'm just going to put those into there in any way or fashion that you like.

 But just to cover up that moss and then to bring in another texture.

 So it's the textures that will make your arrangement at the end look really lovely.

 And I've got another couple of those, so I'll just bring one into there and one into there.

 When that dies down, you can just take those out and you've got a container that you can use for other things.

 Once it's all mixed up, I want you to place it down and roll it out to your desired size.

 This is not going to be covering the cake, it's going to be covering our piece that we're

 making tonight so that it's going to be a make-believe cake for us.

 If it's sticking on the bottom, add a little confectioner's sugar.

 Try not to put too much sugar on it because you're going to have to get that off to see

 Fondant is like playing with Play-Doh, except for it smells better.

 I'm going to remove my mat for a second because I want to cover it.

 You can use any kind of little knife that you have, but this seems to work well.

 It doesn't have to be perfect, it's just going to be a covering for our board because this

 Take this fondant and put it into our bag again so that it doesn't dry out.

 This piece here, we're just going to lift up and put it on here.

 I'm going to just form it around a little bit and this is going to be our make believe

 Just your little, let me put it down on here so you can see it better, your little make

 Did you push it down along the edge or did you just lay it on top?

 I just laid it on top and I kind of got rid of the little edges.

 So it's not going to be perfect but it's just so that it looks nice for you.

 Okay guys for this one you need two eggs, half a chopped onion, about half a cup

 Okay guys so first we add the half an onion and I'm gonna turn the heat down

 it looks like a little bit too hot and you just want to make them a little bit

 Now sometimes people just eat sausages and onions like this which I like too.

Sometimes I'll have that on toast and maybe even add a little slice

 of cheese on top of that and that's really the longest part of doing this

 sausages and the onions and it's just it's really really easy simple little

 into that to begin with and I let the frying pan heat up with the oil.

Mix that up and the eggs will actually make the rice nice and smooth and fall apart really easily.

Just a little bit of kimchi to get a little bit of spice in that.

 Now because I love cheese I'm going to add about a half a cup of shredded mozzarella on top.

Maybe that's a three-quarter cup but I don't measure anything anyways.

 Ok so originally I was going to do Cajun Chicken Burritos, but it sort of like all went to

 Set that aside and then we've really got to try and pack that bitch in.

 So instead I'm going to be doing Kickin Cajun Chicken with Rice.

 Ok so what you're going to need for your spice mix, you're going to need 1 teaspoon of salt,

 1 teaspoon of garlic powder, 1 and a half teaspoons of paprika, half a teaspoon of ground

 black pepper, half a teaspoon of cayenne pepper, a pinch of baird's eye chilli flakes, or you

 can use standard chilli flakes depending on how hot you like it, half a teaspoon of oregano,

 This feeds two people and you're going to need 260 grams of chicken breast and you're

 going to marinate it in 40 grams of Nando's Hot Marinate, 120 grams of basmati rice, half

 a cup of chopped red onion, one sweet pepper chopped, 200 grams of Mexican bean mix drained,

 If you want to leave the cheese out that's fine but it's damn tasty.

 Get your rice cooking on a slow heat and it should take about 20 minutes to cook the chicken

 Add some paprika to the rice if you want to add a little colour.

 When the chicken is fully sealed add the onions, peppers and peas.

 Add a tablespoon of tomato puree whilst you're at it and this will just help to bring out

 Finally just as it's coming to be finished add your cayenne seasoning along with some

 Sprinkle some grated mozzarella on it or if you want to use some different cheese that's

 Ok so according to how I've made this it serves 2 and the macros and calories are 641 calories,

 Hope you've enjoyed this, please like, share with your friends, subscribe if you haven't

 Make sure you check out everybody else's cooking videos as part of the cook off challenge

 and if you really want to see some pimpin' rice you know to go see Endemoff Beast.

 Because when it comes to pimpin' rice he got it locked down, you know what I'm saying?

 hair and wet it with a spray bottle or you can do what I'm doing and hop into the shower

 Now you need to use organic coconut oil and it needs to be virgin, cold pressed and unrefined

 Depending on how much you want to put on, I usually put about a teaspoon and a little

 you want to mix that just to sort of soften the coconut oil just a little bit so that

 it's easier to work with and it should look something a bit like this.

 basically going to split my hair in half and just gently comb through my hair using

 in your hair and just brush out any tangles that you might have.

 going to do is split my hair in half so you have a top section and a bottom section.

 I'm going to leave the bottom section in the front and flip the top section back.

 can clip it out of the way if you want to but it's not necessary.

 oil in your finger and it will melt into oil just from the heat of your hands so you don't

 the bottom section, applying it thoroughly and you want to massage it into the ends really

 I'm just going to flip that top section over the front and add coconut oil to that.

 I'm just going to combine the two sections and just run my hands through it.

 cap and an elastic and just tie your hair up into a bun or a ponytail or clip the hair

 to wrap the whole thing in either cling film or plastic wrap or just use a shower cap like

This will lock in the heat and moisture but it will also keep the coconut

 30 minutes to 2 hours so grab a book, go on the internet and relax.

 hair really well with shampoo to get all the oils out but you don't need to apply conditioner

 you a good morning, day, night, wherever you are in the world and I'll see you in my next

The bag has just been manhandled one too many times and the plastic has become

 all bent out of shape and so will no longer fit into the frame.

 in the garden vac but you can never be too careful so just make sure that it is unplugged.

 And the first thing I'm going to do is just remove the frame from the garden vac.

 So now we have the garden vac out of the way, we just have the frame and the bag.

 is held onto the frame by clips which just run around the outside of the frame.

 said clips, you'll need a long, thin flat head screwdriver and you'll just need to get

 opposite of what you did to remove the old one and fit the holes into the teeth just

 Once you've made sure that the bag is fitted securely onto the frame and all the clips

 are fastened, you just need to refit the frame to the garden vacuum.

 And there you go, that's how you replace the bag on a Flymo garden vacuum.

 Today we will be cooking Churros con Chocolate which is misleading because I am Russian and

 A safety precaution is always have the handle facing inwards because if it is facing out

 Now that it is in a ball I pour in eggs that I did not whisk but somehow I will anyways.

 I don't like how he decides the temperature of things but anyways.

 After they are done we take them out of pan to drain excess oil.

 Today we're rocking out a backyard barbecue with good people and amazing food, showing

 you all the best that Chicago Steak Company has to offer, right here on Steak University

 It's actually dry aged USDA prime strip steaks, boneless strip steaks that are 16 ounces.

 So what we're looking here is really the marbling of this prime dry age.

 Well actually what we are talking about compared to wet aging, which we'll address in a little

 time, is really dry aging is an aging process in an atmosphere controlled room.

 The intensity of the flavor of the beef is just going to permeate throughout this steak

 When we're looking at this, this is absolutely the ultimate steak experience that you can

 So if I understand right, dry aging is kind of the old fashioned way of doing steak.

 Back in the days, when they shipped any kind of protein over the boats, over the Atlantic,

 there was no other way of doing it but dry aging it or curing it in salt.

 Only today, what we are doing today is we are using an atmosphere controlled room so

 that the bacteria that are developing and giving the flavors throughout the meat, we

 So this product is absolutely the best ultimate steak that you can get anywhere.

 Absolute perfect heat, direct heat, finishing it on a little bit of a slow heat and we'll

 get into details with that to make sure that we have a perfect crust on the outside, nice

 Before we do that, we want to make sure that the steaks are ready, they're bloomed, they've

 been open for about 15 minutes, 20 minutes, just so they get the natural color and the

 oxidation comes back so they're beautifully and red just like this.

 So we want to make sure we put some of our incredible Chicago Steak Company seasoning

 on these steaks developed just for us and it is absolutely incredible the flavor profile

 All I can smell is herbs, a little bit of garlic, pepper, salt.

 This grill has been preheated to like 450, 500 degrees, nice and hot to give it a nice

 The more spices, the more crust you will have on the product, which is going to give you

 Pro tip number two, now that we have the steaks seasoned on one side on the grill, now I can

 put the seasoning nice and easily on the other side of the grill.

 Chef Philippe, why don't you explain to our viewers how to tell how well done your steak

 So it truly is actually very easy because we all have the perfect tool to make sure

 So you look at your hand right here between the thumb and your finger, very soft, very

 So what you're looking at, if you relax your thumb, this is going to be rare.

 If you stick your thumb out just loosely, not all the way, this is medium.

 And if you want to have a steak that is cooked well done, which some people do, but extended

 fully as you see right here and press, your steak is going to be well done just like this.

 Today I'm on location to show you exactly where to use an electric log insert.

 Who has time to go out and chop firewood, gather firewood, and start a fire?

 If you look at this fireplace, look at all the soot and ash and dirt.

 If you have a traditional wood fireplace, you're probably interested in an electric

 It's so much cleaner, it's more cost effective, and you won't have all this nasty soot and

 Okay, I'm going to show you just how easy it is to change your traditional wood fireplace

 First thing, go to www.electricfireplacesdirect.com and choose which electric insert you want.

 While we're cleaning out the ashes, I'll highlight one of the most obvious benefits of having

 There's no open flame, so there's no chance of starting a fire.

 This wood fireplace that we're using today is actually located in an apartment building,

 which makes it even more dangerous for all the tenants and residents of the apartment

 We've got our nasty grate out, so now it's time to put in our electric log insert.

 Now that we have our electric log insert in our fireplace, all we have to do is simply

 On this particular fireplace, our outlet is over here on the side.

 If you're going to make this a permanent installation, you may want to have an electrician put an

 If the heat comes out of the bottom of the unit, you can press the heat button.

 At the push of a button, you have the instant enjoyment of a traditional fireplace without

This next recipe I'm going to share with you, it's quite British,

A bit chilly outside, you want a treat, you can just have a nice

 that, I mean the colour, it's just amazing and of course the beautiful licorice smell

Add 125g of golden caster sugar, 125g of unsalted butter and take to the stove.

 I don't want to boil it, I just want to melt all the sugar and the trickle together.

 Start with 300g of plain flour, 2 teaspoons of baking powder, 1 teaspoon of ground ginger

 fresh ones because if they've been sitting in your larder or in your cupboard or in your

 pantry for months, the flavours and the smell is going to be gone.

Stem ginger is just pure ginger that's been cooked in sugar syrup, so they're

 is really going to add a combination of stronger flavour of ginger and a lovely texture, a

This cake is not going to rise a lot, it's quite dense because of all the sugar

I'm just going to leave it there to cool down completely and in the meantime I'm going to make a glaze as well to make it a bit more glossy.

 Heat up some apricot jam and chop up some more of the stem ginger segment.

 soon this cake is ready to compete with any other cake in a pâtisserie display.

 to subscribe, leave plenty of delicious comments and share it with your friends and plenty

 You may remember her from the how to bleach your hair blonde video like a few months ago.

 But anyways, today I'm going to show you how to do peachy pastel hair color.

 The products I've gotten are something that you can buy at home for yourself and it's

 So I have this in yellow, orange, and a little bit of bubblegum, bubblehead pink.

 So to get peach, peach is really a mixture of orange and yellow with just a tiny little

 And what I'm going to do is I'm going to mix these three things appropriately and then

 in order to make it look really pastel, I'm going to take this Color Brilliant Semi-Permanent

 And I'm just going to dilute the color to give it that pastel effect.

 After that, I'm just going to apply it to Nicole's entire head.

 Then I'm going to give her a nice blow dry so you can see the look.

 Just so you know, you have to have blonde hair for this to work.

 If you don't have blonde hair, you're not going to be able to see the color.

 You can do it ombre, around the face, or you can do the whole head.

 Super easy, super fun, and it will wash out and fade within like five or six shampoos.

 You can see her hair is like really peachy orange and pretty pastel.

 These manic panic colors and these super bright colors are so heavily pigmented that

 you need a little bit of those and a lot of clear to really dilute it.

 As you can see, we used so much clear and it's still pretty intense.

 But it looks nice and this is the kind where a couple of shampoos is going to look really,

 So a couple things you can do if you're a professional hair stylist.

 But all of these colors, you've got to really dilute them because they're going to come

 So remember, the key to pastels, a lot of clear, a little bit of pigment, and let it

 And we're going to have Nicole turn around and you can see the full picture.

 trub is gonna settle down to the bottom and it's just gonna stop it from sucking

It's not gonna cut a inch of steel pipe or anything, but it's gonna be great

I ran against it just to kind of pull everything off the end and

 to make sure that we're getting any loose filings on the inside out.

 don't want those to come out on your beer, get in your beer and get down one

 you need to or any of your hardware inside the actual nipple that comes out

We'll get nice and set and once again make sure everything is nice and

 straight and tighten it good and hand tight and then you're just gonna give it

 out tube, the open end runs your out tube, the box end runs your

 So mixing on medium speed, low to medium speed right now with the paddle attachment is one

 I have melted three ounces of intense dark midnight reserve, 86% cacao Ghirardelli dark

 Something to remember about mixing the frosting is that powdered sugar will go everywhere

 When I sifted it, I chose a lower bowl like this so I can get it right up on the edge

 After the butter and the sugar are incorporated, I then add the vanilla.

 It's going to be a little bit of liquid so it's going to help bring together this mixture

 It called for a quarter teaspoon of vanilla but I'm kind of rebellious.

 The chocolate was just simply melted over boiling water in a double boiler.

 We don't want to leave any in there so I'm scraping that clean completely.

 I've got, I can tell, some butter on the bottom that needed to be scraped off the bottom.

 For this recipe, I'm going to be using half a cup of sugar, a bit of chocolate at the

 end to decorate, about 50g of unsalted butter, here I've got strawberry extract and red food

Now this is optional, but I want to give that more of a strawberry taste. 3

 tablespoons of flour, 3 tablespoons of cacao and 2 glasses of milk.

 First of all, we're going to mix our sugar with flour in a glass and then we're going

 to put it all in our boiling pan and mix it with milk and leave it to boil for about

This is going to be our chocolate one and the other half is going to be our

I'm going to add a drop of food colouring and about a teaspoon of

My mixture has been cooling down and you will know when it's ready, when

 first layer of chocolate and now I'm going to add my strawberry.

 and comment and check out all my other videos on various desserts and also my Russian food

 Today I thought I would give you a quick little demo on how to transfer

 to be showing you today is the Quilt Pounce here, and this is a real favorite

 with us because it leaves a mark on the fabric that doesn't rub off, or at least

 examples today from a couple of books that we have, 150 blocks for baby quilts.

 These are applique templates in here, but I've increased the size of this toad

 books that we have, I'm going to show another one from our quilting dot to

 Freehand Patterns, Creative Classic, these are continuous line designs.

 size of that toadstool, and this works well with simpler designs.

 ergonomically designed, you can see that the wheel extends below the

 would recommend protecting your surface because this perforated tracing wheel

 has got little pins in it and you don't want to be, if you're working on your oak

 now I've got my paper and you can actually feel that the pokies stick out

 designs, remember to photocopy your designs in reverse or trace them through

 our fabric where you want it, taking the Quilt Pounce, and it has a little sponge

 Otherwise you'll find that this extremely fine powder that fills it,

 released too much here because we have a habit of storing it upside down.

 to go over to the sewing machine and show you a second technique for

 if you come to a point that needs to be pivoted, your needle will land down and

No thread in the bobbin, no thread in the top in the needle either.

 I've already started this and this technique works well for designs that

That's the sound of the needle going through the paper and that is

I've reached a pivot point here and I'm going to turn all the way around

 on paper, I would not recommend using it for stitching on fabric now.

 scissors and rotary cutters, if you use a tool from paper it's not going to be

 again I'm going to turn the paper pattern over and go to my pounce tool.

 Give that a quick little rub and let's see what we get on the other side.

 it on your fabric you can of course you can cut it out and use it as an applique.

 with your blow dryer if you are, I don't know, in a hotel room and you don't have

 on how to transfer designs from a book to paper to your fabric.

 it on the paper you will have a permanent solution that you can use more

 We're going to start off by taking the juice out of two lemons.

 And then I'm also going to cut one additional lemon into some spiral wedges, just like I

 Don't need to get fancy, so no mayonnaise or no egg yolks to make it or help it stick.

 But hey, we don't eat like this every single day, so it's all right to indulge once in

 Okay, I have my heat setting over medium high heat and we're going to start adding our chicken

 I'm going to let these cook, I'd say, for about four minutes on each side.

 Once we flip on over, we're going to add about a tablespoon of that lemon juice that we squeezed.

 I actually like it to have lots of color in it, so I leave it for a little bit longer,

 If it's a little too burnt for you, then of course just leave it for less time.

 We're going to let these grill, I'd say, for about a minute or so all together on each

 And then I'm going to throw back those two slices of chicken or thinly sliced chicken

 breasts on top of the lemon wedge just to kind of fuse that lemon with the chicken.

 If you're making this dinner for somebody, trust me, they will be impressed by your dish.

 Uh, left hand's gonna hang around the snare mostly the whole time.

 and then we're gonna right hand to the floor tom in between the snare hits.

 So you're gonna go whack snare, whack tom, whack snare, whack floor.

 and then it's gonna go a one, so it's gonna end on the uh, uh, uh four.

 And of course, playing that a little faster could even be kind of cooler, so.

 All right you guys, to make the Stella Bombshell it's really easy.

 What you're going to use is some vodka, of course the main ingredient, Stella Rosa berry,

 some blackberries, one lime slice, some ice, mint for garnish, and a cup with a spoon to

 Fill up your glass with a little bit of ice, one shot of your favorite vodka, grab some

 Hi everyone, I'm Renee Oswald with the Transitioning to Living Cuisine program and you can read

 It's a 350 page book full of raw food, living food recipes and all kinds of tips on how

 And today I'm going to be making a fruity Irish cream mint pie.

 And that is a new recipe that I just came up with last week, but there are many more

 I'm making this pie with buckwheat groats, almonds, and sunflower seeds in my crust.

 Many typical raw food recipes use just nuts in the crust and they're usually a lot higher

 I like to go with the buckwheat groats because it's only 10% fat, so then you can get away

 with using more, having a thicker crust, but not being full of fat, which is one of the

 benefits of a lot of my recipes is I try to decrease the fat content without decreasing

 I'm going to put all this in the Vitamix, sprouted and dehydrated.

 Your buckwheat groats are sprouted, soaked, sprouted, and dehydrated.

 It also releases that enzyme inhibitor to make these nuts and seeds easy to digest.

 And I have a video on the website that teaches you how to make vanilla.

 You want it to still be crumbly, so you just pulse your, leave it on low, and just pulse

 So you pour that out into your pie pan, about a nine inch pie pan.

 And it's a real nice thick, you can see how thick that is, nice thick pie crust.

 And to make your filling, you mix all your ingredients in your blender, container.

 Cashews, macadamia nuts, and pine nuts don't need to be soaked.

 Because they're white nuts and they don't have the enzyme inhibitor.

 If you're lucky enough to live in Florida and you can walk outside and get some beautiful

 If you don't live in Florida or if you have trouble finding coconuts, you can find the

 And I have a video on how to open a Thai coconut on the website.

 If you don't have this coconut, you can purchase the Tropical Traditions Coconut Cream Concentrate,

 You can use about a quarter cup of this instead of the meat from the Thai coconut or the Florida

 And then four dates that you've pitted and then soaked for about 15 minutes.

 And the chia gel, which I have a video on how to make your chia gel on the website.

 If you don't want the peppermint flavor in this pie, you can just leave it out.

 Or if you like the peppermint, use about a half a teaspoon of peppermint flavor.

 Or you can use fresh peppermint leaves if you have a peppermint plant.

 Now, I saved the macadamia nuts for last because sometimes they'll float in the bottom of your

 And when you're choosing your bananas, make sure that they have some speckles, some brown

 And I talk about that on page six of the book on how to choose your produce.

 Turn it on low and turn it up to high with your tamper this time.

 If you freeze it for two hours before you serve it, it helps it set up.

 And what's wonderful, another wonderful thing about pies is that you can freeze them, these

 cream pies, cut them before you freeze them into about 16 to 32 pieces.

 And then you can just take that out of the freezer as a special treat once in a while

 But if you freeze it, you can just take small portions out and then you can...and hope you

 When I was growing up, I used to go to a friend's house and as we entered,

 her mother would present us with a huge thing of ooey gooey cheesy nachos.

 I still like to present that to my kids when they come home or make it for friends,

 This is just an oven proof dish because that way you can serve it out of this

 These are just canned black beans that have been rinsed and drained.

 This is just grated sort of a Mexican blend of cheddar and some

 you know, football, basketball, baseball kind of nachos you may have had.

 You are going to be really popular with everybody when you present this during a,

 everybody comes over to watch the game or sitting by the pool or whatever and

 We're going to pop this on a baking sheet cause it's a heck of a lot easier to

 All you're trying to do is get that cheese nice and melty and gooey.

 Now the best part, your toppings, you can dump on whatever you want.

 I like to just get in there and really add all this yummy stuff that I love.

 This is not spicy cause I know that my kids will be like, it's spicy.

 And then everyone can just sort of pull out the chips too and dip it in that.

 I take one of these chips and make sure I get lots of beans and cheese in here.

 check out wealicious.com and don't forget to leave a comment below.

 Hi, I'm Leah of CJ Drill and today I'm going to show you how to attach anything to a brick

 Now make certain that you have a drill with a Phillips bit, but you're also going to want

 Now here let me show you the hardware that we're going to be using.

 I love this thing because it's not just good for brick, which is what we're going to be

 doing today, but you can use it on drywall, you can use it on metal, you can use it on

 Now today we're going to be using a washer in combination with the wall dog because we're

 going to be simulating how you would secure like a bookcase to a wall to prevent it from

 You can also use a wall hook if you want to hang a picture on brick, but today this is

 Now the next thing you want to do is you want to clean out the hole.

 You want to make sure that there's no debris in there because that's going to prevent the

 screw or the anchor that you place in the hole from really going all the way in.

 We also have some residual dust on the brick that we're going to blow off.

 I also have a piece of wood here that's going to simulate the back of a piece of furniture,

 the back of a dresser or the back of a bookcase because bookcases and dressers, the back panel

 Okay, so I've got the all-in-one anchor and screw inserted through the washer and I'm

 going to insert the screw anchor into the plywood and I'm going to drill it through.

 Okay, now I want to give you a look without the wood so you can see how it's going to

 Now the beauty of using these wall dogs is the fact that you can remove them.

 They're great for plaster, for drywall, for sheet metal, for concrete, but today we showed

 So hopefully you're not going to have any problems doing it at home yourself.

 I like sweet stuff and I usually keep stuff in the house and what I do keep as a backup

 for when I run out, providing I have milk, because that's always the big question, is

 I like tapioca pudding and it's pretty easy to make at home this way.

 I don't know about the old-fashioned way or not, I've never gotten into doing that, but

 The recipe doesn't call for it, but I don't want just regular vanilla tapioca.

 I've got some chocolate bar left over here, so when it gets ready, I'm going to throw

 I like to put that in first because I can use the measuring cup for the milk.

 If you do the milk first, then the sugar is going to stick, so you don't want to do

 Tapioca, if it's been sitting in your cup, you need to shake it because they're big and

 So we shake it up a little bit and we'll put three of these in there.

 Probably not a good idea to do it over the top of it, but it's for demonstration purposes.

 So we've got the tapioca, we've got the sugar in it, and now let's see.

 Whole milk, again, whole milk is better, but I keep two percent.

 So we've got two and three-quarters cups of that, but if you have whole milk, feel free

 And then we've got one egg that we have to, it says well beaten, so we'll put that over

 You don't want no lumps of eggs in it, so beat it up pretty good.

 We're going to cook it on medium heat, so I'm going to turn it on to medium, and we

 So once we start to get some heat in it, I'll come back and we'll finish it up to the end.

 All right, as this is coming up to temperature, I've decided I'm going to add the chocolate.

 What I've done is I've taken that chocolate bar and broke it up into chunks.

 It'll melt down a lot easier that way, so that's what I'm going to do now.

 You don't want to let it set, so that's what we'll continue to do.

 It gets a little bit closer to a boil, and like I say, we'll come back and check on it then.

 See, if you stop stirring, it'll start to boil, but that's not the boil you're looking for.

 You're looking for a consistent boil, which means as you're stirring, it is still boiling.

 Now you're starting to get a boil even when you're stirring, and you want to keep stirring.

 Actually, go ahead and remove this from the heat when you're doing it, but it says a teaspoon, so that's a little bit.

 Let's put an extra shot of this for good measure, but that'll never hurt anybody.

 Vanilla turns good, tastes good, so we'll get that off the heat.

 It's good either way, don't get me wrong, but I prefer it cool.

 So we're going to let it cool, and I'll come back and show you what the end result is.

 It doesn't take, you know, you don't have to be any kind of chef to do it.

 And spice it up, I added a little chocolate to this, it turned out rather well.

 Hey everybody, thanks so much for joining me for this hair tutorial.

 I wanted to do this quick video showing you all how I get my clip in hair extensions done

 I actually wanted to do this video because I got really tired of doing the ombre look.

 It really damaged my hair so I decided just to go back to my old ways and get the clip

 Except, this time I didn't buy them pre-made because it was getting a little pricey.

 Instead, I bought a pack of the Irresistible Me hair extensions and then I turned them

 into 1 inch hair extensions which are a lot more reasonable, a lot more convenient and

 You can also choose the length because I was only getting like 16 or 18 inch already pre-made

 You just have to have the time and a few things that are very reasonable so you can

 The holidays are coming around so I do suggest that you maybe try like a bronze color, more

 of a golden color, even like a coppery red tone will look beautiful for the holidays.

 Just make it subtle if you want to go for a more dramatic look.

 You can actually play around with your hair and determine what looks better on you.

 So I hope that you all enjoy this video and let's get this started.

 I'm going to begin by taking my Irresistible Me hair extensions.

 As you can see, some parts already have clips so I'll make sure I'll be using those and

 I won't be cutting this one because as you can see it has 3 rows so I can use this and

 then some of them have 1 or 2 wefts on top of each other so I'll be using those instead.

 I'll be taking my weft and cutting the center part where there's no clip located.

 Cutting it and making sure that I don't cut any hair, I'll be very careful.

 They also make it in black so if you have brunette hair, grab the black glue.

 Now just be placing a little bit just so that the weft doesn't come apart.

 Now make sure that you glue both ends on the one that does not have a clip just to

 make sure we don't have any loose hair going around with the weft.

 Now with the clip that I purchased, it has silicone so it won't damage my hair.

 I'll just be placing it right on the weft and then I'll be taking my thread and my needle.

 And I'm just using regular thread, you can buy hair extension thread as well but this

 seems to work just fine for me as long as I overlap it about 3 or 4 times depending

 So I just began putting this through the holes and making sure that we're being very careful

 It doesn't have to be perfect, we can always go back and trim and touch up.

 You can just go ahead and do this for all of your desired clip ends.

 You can do them in 2 inches, 4 inches, 1 inch, 2 inch, whatever you want to do to make

 It seems very easy, very fast once you get the hang of it and it's very convenient and

 Very nice and clean as you can see and I will be making about 20 of these.

 So like I said, it's a great bargain if you go to Sally's or Ulta, they are price even

 So as you can see we have this silicone that won't damage our hair and it's ready to go.

 Now that we've done about 20 of this including the ones that were already clipped for us,

 It doesn't have to be perfect as long as you don't have too many flyaways so that you don't

 I don't like excessively teasing because I don't like to damage my hair.

 And then you just continue on parting the rest and you place them wherever you want

 Sometimes it also looks nice just putting it on the bottom half.

 So playing around with different hair colors without damaging your hair is always nice.

 The weft that actually had the three wefts on top of each other that I showed at the

 beginning of the video, I actually put on under my hair right at the bottom part just

 I've done it in quite a few of my videos, even my older videos.

 But except in my older videos, I used to buy them pre-made which was really, really expensive.

 But now I've got my 24 inches and then I just trimmed them so they're not thin at the bottom.

 The quality of the hair is a lot better than the ones I would buy pre-made.

 You can go on IrresistibleMe.com and you can actually pick different colors.

 Like I said, the holidays are here so I would suggest maybe going with like a copper or

 And whenever I'm not posting videos here, I'm posting them on my blog channel, DeniseMakeupTV.

 So please go check that out and I will see y'all very soon with more tutorials.

 We're going to begin with an IBP packer brisket that you might get at Sam's Club or Costco or somewhere similar.

 We're going to go through the process of preparing this brisket for a 10-12 hour cook tomorrow.

 I've removed the brisket from the plastic and placed it on the cutting board fat side up.

 I like to trim the fat from the fat side first and then trim what's left on the meat side after we flip it over.

 The meat side of the brisket, in other words the side without all the fat when you start, is much cleaner.

 It's not as fatty, although there is some tissue on the back side of this piece of meat.

 The left side of your picture, towards the back, is where the primary fat is contained.

 I'm going to go ahead and trim that off and then we'll be ready to prepare it for seasoning.

 I've trimmed about all the fat off this brisket that I'm going to at this point.

Remember, this brisket is going to spend 8-10 hours on the smoker.

 I use a Jacquard meat tenderizer to prep the brisket before I apply the rub and spices.

 Since I started using the Jacquard, my briskets have improved 110%.

 As you can see in my picture, I also apply some Tone's meat tenderizer.

 I'm using the unseasoned kind because I don't want to add extra salt.

 This meat tenderizer will help add a little distinction to your smoke ring.

 Some people say it's cheating, but it will present a much nicer brisket.

 I like what it does to the overall quality of the brisket once it's sliced.

 I like to let the temperature level off about 225 before I add the meat.

 It sat in the refrigerator overnight marinating with the spice rub.

 That's just a little excerpt just from a song called La Grange or La Grande as I

 call it by ZZ Top, a blues number which involves a lot of directional, what I call directional

Now I put this tutorial together specifically for Thomas Callister who's one

 of my students but equally well I'm sure there's a lot of other people out there including my

 need to get automatically into your subconscious so you can do these things automatically and

 it massively improves your soloing techniques and your style and the smoothness of how they

Now this is the bit where it goes in the song from the key of A up to C. Now here's the C minor

 show you on the video but that's it there and you've got the... if you play that power chord

 in that box and running up into the... out of the box into this second box which takes you into

 the second position but I'm not going to go into all the theory of that at the moment.

 bit tricky sometimes to get this so that you can see it but you've got the first note which is a C

 but if you slow it down you will see that the first note and then you go

 Now you can see that because we're playing a fairly high up the fretboard key my hands are

 fairly close together so you can you can check out that you can check out how the how the notes

 are played and you can see that as usual I've got my hand resting on the bridge like that with the

 heel of the hand just up near that position there the top position that is of the bridge and I'm

 just basically just playing there sorry that's the wrong note it's a C which is there.

 now the way this works the general principle of it is that you play your you pick in the direction

 that's why I call it directional picking in the direction of the next string that you're going to

 pick so your first note is a downstroke because because you're going to go back to that string

 anyway so doing a downstroke is fine so you down down up because the next string is going to be

 that one there look and then you've got to put in this little bit incidentally I call this

 particular riff the I like to I call it is the the minor pentatonic rundown that's what I call it and

 it's and you can you can also do a run up in the same way but except it's a little bit more difficult

 to do that I call it minor pentatonic rundown but the same technique can be used for other

 scales as well like the like the major pentatonic you could do it for that as well but we're not

 we're not worried about that at the moment all we're interested in is getting this technique so

 that's that's the rest of the rundown going for the rest of the way but all I really just want

 you to get this to start with that's the that's the thing to do okay and you can of course you

 can play this video over and over as many times you like to to to re-examine the technique so

 you can practice it practice it slowly to start with then speed it up and gradually just do it

 bringing it into your into your subconscious so you're just doing it automatically in solos as

 Hi everybody and welcome back to another tutorial from my Simply series range of books.

 I'm going to be going through the second piece in my Simply Jigs and Reels called Rake the Shingle and I hope you like it.

 If you do like the song and you want to know where I purchased the book from, there'll be a link that's coming directly above

 my head or it will all, there'll be a quick link and all links are in the description bar directly underneath this video.

 Okay, so what I'm going to start by doing is playing the whole thing through for you

 and then I'll go take you through a couple of bits in the music.

 You'll notice that there are some repeats in the music, but I won't play those through.

 So the first thing you might notice is that it looks quite busy.

 but I didn't play this as fast as it probably would traditionally be played.

 So there is some room for negotiation, but I didn't play it as fast as that, you know,

 because otherwise sometimes it just becomes an unrealistic goal.

 But if this is something you want to work up to, so the speed you could take it at eventually is...

 You could take it up to that speed once you've got your notes, once you put your fingers around the notes even.

 so the two most kind of technical parts that I see might be a potential problem is at the end of bar five going into

 you've got a D, a C sharp and a D, those last three notes that you've got there, and you've got a three above the D.

 So you've got a D, a C sharp and a D, and then that's quickly followed by a G,

 Not lift up that third finger for a G, because you've just finished using it for a D, but just roll it over.

 You've got another D, and then you're over on to the third finger for G.

 prepare, make a note on the music, know that you're going to be using the same finger for two notes.

 But when I put my third finger down for the last D, just before I did that G,

 It's more towards the D string, so I know that when I do roll it over, I do have some finger left to roll it over.

 But I think you'll probably find that isn't going to be a problem, but just a kind of a heads up there,

 don't lift that third finger up for the G, because you'll get a horrible A string kind of screeching there in the middle.

 So if you don't do that G sharp, it isn't going to sound quite right.

 But where you want to put the G sharp is just above where the third finger goes.

 So first finger goes on the dot, the third finger goes on the green dot here, and you're going to be just above.

 So the third finger goes on the dot there, and then it goes just above the green dot.

 It sounds okay as a G natural as well, but it just gives it a little something extra if you do the G sharp.

 It's entirely up to you, and you can take the speed or whatever you want to take the speed at there.

Ten songs in each one, and everything will be linked in the description bar underneath,

So check those out, and thank you for watching, and I'll see you in the next video.

 Today I'm going to show you how to make a cheeseburger just like I had on the Carnival

 All righty, so we are going to start off with some ground chuck that is 80% lean, 20% fat.

 We're going to just grab a good handful of it and we're going to put it in a ball.

 All right, then we're going to season this up with a little bit of salt and pepper.

 All righty, we're going to let that cook and we're going to go ahead and start off another

 All right, and again we're going to season this with a little bit of salt and some black

 Now, when you press this firmly into the skillet, it's going to get the nice brown bits going

 So while this is cooking, we're going to go ahead and toast our hamburger buns in another

 I am just going to rub a little bit of butter along these buns and just cook them until

 All right, so once these burgers start cooking, it's important that we don't move them.

 You're going to tell once it gets nice and juicy up towards the top, then we can flip

 All right, so the burger is starting to get nice and juicy on the top.

 All right, and now comes for what made these burgers so special.

 They added a little bit of cheese sauce on top of the burger, and then they added a couple

 All right, and the next thing we're going to do is we're going to put a little bit of

 We're going to stick a lid on and let it steam, and these burgers are going to get finished

 Now we're just going to take these and stick them on the hamburger buns.

 All right, so I'm going to go ahead and try this delicious cheeseburger with these two

 So if you enjoy these copycat style of videos, please be sure to give me a big thumbs up,

 and go ahead and subscribe to this channel so you don't miss our next recipe.

 You ever take a look at one of these orange and the texture on the skin is very much like

 Cut the orange up in half and squeeze the juice right in the bowl.

 Now you can use this orange crush to wash off any excess stuff that's stuck on the grater.

This is for the sugar and the tasty artificial orange flavor everybody loves.

Now you're going to want to let this marinate for at least 4 hours.

 This has been marinating in this bag in the refrigerator for the last 6 hours.

 First, what we're going to do is take all the liquid inside this bag, put it in the saucepan,

 and reduce it down and make a glaze to brush on the chicken while we're grilling.

 Okay, so this marinade here has been simmering, or no, not simmering, but reducing for about 15 minutes.

 And this would be perfect for just layering on top of the chicken as it's grilling.

 So now we're going to start putting the chicken onto the grill.

 That will cook for about 7-8 minutes on the first side, so get on there and close the lid.

 Damn man, this grill is working better than it's ever worked for me, I swear to God.

 Hey all you dudes and dudettes out there, this is Chase Skerritt again showing you some

 We're talking about walking basses today instead of the shuffle patterns we've been kind of

 I'll play a walking bass line first just so you can see what it looks like and then I'll

 And all that is, is it's outlining a regular C chord and then adding that sixth in there

 So it's pinky first and then thumb on C. Pinky, thumb, pinky, thumb, pinky, thumb, pinky,

 And the same goes for F. All you do is outline an F and add the sixth in there.

 A cool thing to do with the walking bass line is you can also add the fifth in to give it

 Another variation of this is you could also play the fifth first.

 And one more variation on this is you could play the entire chord with it, much like Albert

 Now there is some debate about whether he plays... or if he hits it twice... or if he

 But if I were to play that variation, I would just play the triad first, and then thumb

 It's what feels most comfortable to me, but you guys can play anything, whatever your

 So I'm just going to go through 12 bars with each of those variations just so you can see

 I just want you to see what the left hand is in these walking bass lines.

 There's a little bit of a different variation on how you could come down from those.

 I mean, there's a bunch of different ways that you could come back and go around and

 come back to the walking bass line, but I'll show that in another video.

 Get the modern Marilyn look, and it's not only perfect for blondes.

 And it's really important, I think, that you use a product range

 This style is a real head-turner, girls, so wear it with attitude.

 Then spread one to two tendering-sized balls of mousse softly in your hands.

 Apply it evenly all over your head and massage it also into the lengths.

 take a small strand of hair and wind it backwards around the curling wand.

 Repeat this until you reach the middle of the back of your head.

 Then do the same with the upper section and finish the other side the same way.

 don't worry about it because a normal curling iron will work fine.

 And when you watch her do her hair, watch how she winds the hair

 Then brush the hair carefully with a bristle brush to create polished waves.

 What this enables us to do is just comb through any top surface

 Have a beautiful evening with your new classy modern Marilyn look.

 Here I am going to use 3 boiled eggs and pinch of hing and 1 teaspoon of chilli powder and

 1 cup of besan flour, 2 tablespoons of rice flour, salt as per taste and 1 cup of oil

 Take a bowl and add besan flour, rice flour, hing, chilli powder, salt, oil and mix well.

 Now I am going to dip this boiled half egg in the bhaji mix and roll it.

 Try it yourself and send your valuable feedbacks to www.indiafoodrecipes.in

 Begin the Mod Squad look with a fresh, clean, and moisturized face.

 Then using your foundation brush, smooth Perfection Liquid Foundation over your entire face, including

 lips, eyelids, and under the eye area, and then blend into the neck.

 With a large powder brush, smooth Radiance Translucent Loose Powder over your entire

 With your brow comb, brush and shape the brows, and then using your angled brush, fill the

 brows in with an eyeshadow color that matches or is similar to your hair color.

 With your sponge, leave Extra Loose Powder on your cheekbones, under your eyes, to catch

 With shadow brush, highlight the brow bone with Innocent Me White Eyeshadow, and then

 apply Elegant Me Peach Eyeshadow in the crease up to the brow bone.

 Next, blend in Fear Me Chocolate Brown Shadow into the lash line and blend it upwards towards

 With your large powder brush, brush away the translucent powder from underneath your eye,

 and then line your upper lashes with the Advanced Waterproof Black Liquid Liner, and

 line the outer half of your lower lashes with Flirty Me Medium Brown Shadow.

 Taking your highlighter pencil, line between your upper liner and your lower liner at the

 corners of your eyes, and then on the inside of your lower lash line to brighten the eyes.

 After applying a thin line of waterproof eyelash adhesive to the false eyelash band, place

 your Elise Faux Half Lashes on the lash line towards the outer corner of your eyes.

 And next, coat and bind your lashes with Black Water Resistant Mascara.

 With your blush brush, contour just under the cheekbone, along the hairline, and under

 Line the lips with Mocha Mauve Liner, starting from the outside corner in, outside corner

 going in, and then fill the entire lip in with the Mocha Mauve Liner, creating a matte

 And your finishing touch is to fill the lips in with Wild Child Lipstick.

 Sudden rush of oxygen into the convection grill could cause a flare-up if you're not careful.

 Your new Bubba Keg allows you to adjust the position of the grill grates to suit your needs.

 In the lower position, the grate can be locked down for traveling or to properly use the upper grill grate.

 The lower position also enables the grill to accommodate larger dishes like whole turkeys or roasts.

 Just make sure the tab on the tool fits into the notch on the grill.

 The chrome-plated grill grate provides an added cooking surface.

 When using the chrome grate, the cast iron grate must be in the lower locked position.

 The chrome-plated grill grate can then slide into position and can swing out of the way to access the lower grill grate during cooking.

 Your Bubba Keg allows you to control cooking temperature by regulating airflow through the dampers.

 Important note, regardless of how good you get into controlling Bubba Keg's temperature,

 always use a meat thermometer to take the guesswork out of grilling.

 For cooking at low temperatures, below 300 degrees Fahrenheit, don't allow the temperature to run up too high when starting the fire.

 Then set the top and bottom dampers at the 1 position or lower once the fire is lit.

 For higher temperatures above 500 degrees Fahrenheit, set the top and bottom dampers at the 5 position once you get the fire lit.

 When you're ready to shut down your Bubba Keg, close both dampers to put fire completely out.

 Should you be grilling away from home, make sure the fire is out and the grill is completely cool before you move it or hitch it to your vehicle.

 And when you're ready to fire up your Bubba Keg the next time, you may still have unused charcoal left.

 And as for the grease left on the grill, cook it off at the beginning of the next use as it will continue to season the grill grate.

 Your Bubba Keg will give you many years of grate service with a minimum of care.

 The seasoning process will help preserve the integrity of the cast iron grill grate.

 If at any point you see rust forming, use a steel wire brush to clean the grate and then season it again as described earlier.

 When the charcoal ashes finally do pile up, remove them into a metal bucket with a multi-tool.

 And keep in mind, ashes are a great source of potassium, phosphorus and other minerals for your garden.

 And remember, never put any part of your Bubba Keg in the dishwasher for cleaning.

 For surface cleanups, water, mild detergent and a sponge will be just fine.

 Make your good times better away from home by using the Bubba Keg receiver bar to attach the grill to the trailer hitch that's already installed on your vehicle.

 But always remember, never hitch Bubba Keg to your vehicle unless the fire is completely out and it is completely cool.

 First, remove the side trays by pressing the buttons on either side and just lifting them off.

 Next, using the multi-tool, place the cast iron grate in the lower positions and rotate it clockwise to lock it into place.

 Now, with nothing else inside the grill, close the lid and lock the latch.

 Then, take the receiver bar and mount it to your vehicle's trailer hitch, like so.

 Now, over at your Bubba Keg, carefully turn the hitch pin counterclockwise to remove it from the Bubba Keg stand.

 The next step will require you and a buddy because you're going to slide your Bubba Keg off the stand and onto the receiver bar attached to your vehicle.

 Important, never use your Bubba Keg when it's attached to your vehicle.

 When you get to where you're going, you'll take your Bubba Keg off your vehicle and place it back, like so.

 Make sure to secure it with the hitch pin once back in the stand.

 Now, you need to know how to use your Bubba Keg as a smoker so you can add delicious, smoky flavors like mesquite, hickory, oak, apple, and cherry to your favorite meat or fish.

 For best results, sprinkle a couple handfuls of the soaked wood chips or chunks over the lit coals.

 Close the lid and let them begin to smoke for just a few minutes.

 Place the meat of your choice on the grill immediately and close the lid.

 Add more soaked chips or chunks to the fire later if necessary.

 High temperature searing for steaks and chops or maybe oven-style roasting.

 It can handle the slow and low cooking of ribs or briskets and add a smoky, sweet flavor to meats.

 Go to BubbaKeg.com for recipe ideas and download this handy chart that gives you guidelines and good advice on how to use your Bubba Keg.

 Also, download this chart of USDA guidelines for safe internal temperatures of different foods.

 There is no other outdoor cooking machine close to the Bubba Keg convection grill.

 It is the ultimate in quality, versatility and mobility for the backyard chef who wants to enjoy and serve the best of the best.

 Hi, I've been asked to do a series of videos breaking down some of the basic steps in line

 I have some people who are brand new to dancing and they're really trying to learn.

 I teach in a country bar and I like to keep it pretty fast paced so I don't really have

 So they asked me if I would do some videos and so that's what I'm going to do.

 So if you're a new dancer or maybe somebody who just wants to learn the line dance and

 If you're an instructor and you have new people coming in and you also don't have time to

 break these steps down, feel free to use these videos, whatever.

 I've been line dancing for about 12 years and these videos and the videos I do of my

 So hopefully if you're a professional dancer and you're thinking, oh my gosh, what is she

 So three things I want to go over real quick before we get into the actual breaking down

 I think there are three foundational things if you're trying to learn the line dance that

 In line dance, almost everything is done in verses of eight, what I call verses of eight.

 If it's a whole count, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight.

 Whatever direction you're going, if you're turning, it doesn't matter.

 When we get into shuffles and different steps like that, you're actually taking three steps

 The other thing that is super, super important is the answer to the question, where's your

 That is really, really important because if your weight's on your left foot, like mine

 is right now, and your instructor says, step to the left, you can't do it.

 So you first have to step to the right so that you can step to the left and everybody

 If you could understand one thing in line dance, that would be the thing that I would

 If your weight's on your left foot, your right foot is the one that's going to be moving.

 It's going to move forward, it's going to move to the side, it's going to move back,

 So where's your weight is a really important thing in line dance.

 Okay, so we're going to go into breaking down some of the steps.

 You can find me on Facebook, whatever, and I hope you have a great time dancing.

 In this segment, we're going to work on crossing shuffles and wizard steps.

 So crossing shuffle, if your weight is on your left foot, basically it's a double shuffle

 But it's basically the same, it's syncopated, most of them are syncopated.

 That will never happen in a dance because I was not on the right foot to do that.

 This kind of has a, if you think of Dorothy in the Wizard of Oz, I'm off, we're off to

 see the wizard, the wonderful Wizard of Oz, she's doing wizard steps.

 So sometimes it's one, two, and three, four, and five, six, and seven, eight.

 It's step, lock, and step, lock, and step, lock, and step, lock.

 Today we're going to show you the benefits of what you can do with a fermented whole

 Many people think that you take a probiotic in a capsule, but we're going to show you

 Today's theme, East Meets West, or Macrobiotic Meets Probiotic.

 So we're going to make you a smoothie, fruit juice, and organic functional foods from Australia

 and New Zealand, and then a salad complete with probiotic dressing.

 Now then, we have two yummy bananas, especially cut up by a samurai, preferably.

 And then we add a little bit of your favorite organic pomegranate juice, great for antioxidants,

 And then we're going to add our Firm Plus probiotic, or our Prime Directive probiotic.

 So that means that it's stable enough to throw in a smoothie, to carry with you in the car

 for a tough day at the office and you need a little pick-me-up.

 So here we go with one teaspoon for each person that's going to have a smoothie.

 Now this probiotic actually has 13 friendly flora and all the foods it needs to thrive.

 Then we want to put a little bit of the green barley grass, great for your enzymes, your

 And I always like to stick in a third tablespoon just for good measure because then you've

 got extra proteins and you have all that chlorophyll for detoxifying your body.

 So now we have a beautiful blend of ingredients, amino acids, enzymes, vitamins, minerals,

 and of course the living ingredient, the friendly flora, the lactobacilli.

 Now for all of our friends out there who are vegans or raw foodists, we want you to know

 So the organic barley grass with no additives and the lactobacilli with no milk products,

 Alright, so what you're going to need is a lot of butter, a bag of pierogies, a spatula, and a spoon.

 Alright, so what you're going to do is you're going to put your temperature on 7 or in the middle of high or medium.

 Alright, so what you do now is you're just going to take that much butter.

 Alright, so now you can smell the smell of your butter burning.

 Alright, now you're going to get the butter loosely around the area.

 I should have waited until the butter melted, but it's all good.

 You guys probably don't want to be sitting here watching this video.

 So, you're going to make sure that all of the pierogies are facing down.

 Alright, now what you're going to do is, they should be cooking up.

 Alright, now what you're going to do, they should be cooking up a little bit.

 You want to make sure that the side that you started cooking on first is always the side that you're cooking on right now.

 And right now, you're going to take your spatula, take your spoon out, probably just throw that right away.

 If you want it to look like that, it's probably good tasting, but it's probably not.

So now, in the process of making them, they look very delicious.

 I like my pierogies with a little bit of burnt, but not too much burnt.

 So, what you're going to do is, you're going to put everything down.

 And, you're going to put all of your pierogies that are done down on the plate.

 Hey there YouTube, George Peters here from GeorgePeters.com and today we're going to

 This one is the new model that accepts USB 3 and is also backwards compatible to USB

 Brief diagram with some descriptions of comparison speeds, USB 2 to USB 3, blah blah blah, lots

 This is actually relatively minimal packaging if you look inside.

 What they've done is they have created a couple of little trays.

 Start out with we've got our USB connector cord that it comes with.

 A MyBook Essentials technical support and visual guide, no language needed.

 Then lastly inside our box here in two little pretty thin flimsy, which I like to see not

 a lot of plastic being used, a couple little plastic trays there.

 I'm going to go ahead and peel the plastic off so you can kind of see what it looks like

 You can't really see very well, but right there on the front there's a tiny little indicator

 The Western Digital MyBook Essential external hard drive, USB 3 and 2 compatible, 2 terabyte,

 minimal cardboard packaging with lightweight extruded innards, which is pretty good.

 You've got your 2 terabyte USB 3 external hard drive, your power cord and supply, and

It is one I've had for over 40 years, but I've always enjoyed it, and I thought

 mixing it up in that bowl, so we're going to go to our measuring cup, which contains one cup of

I boiled it in the microwave, and I just waited for about two and a half minutes or so,

 seems more like sunshine, but the last jello salad I made in Betty's Kitchen was a lemon-flavored

 jello, so I thought we'd get away from that, and we'd do orange.

 be sugar-free because Rick and I are just trying to cut down on sugar, but you may use the sugared

So, we're placing that in with our boiling water, our recently boiling water,

 own juice, and it no longer has its own juice because I have squeezed it as much as I could

 using my fingers, and I've reserved the juice, and you'll get over a half cup, not as much as one cup,

 to add some water and wash that, and that's not quite a cup, but it's better to have it a little

We're also going to add one tablespoon of white vinegar and 1 1⁄4 teaspoon

Now, the jello mixture that I have is sitting right here, and we want to put our

 mixture that has the pineapple juice and the vinegar and the salt and a little bit of extra

I'm trying to mix it outside of my serving bowl because when you have

 something that has boiling water, it's easy to crack a serving bowl like this one, which is

 quite old, but now it's cooled down a little bit, so we're going to pour this in.

 I'm going to cover this with plastic wrap, and I'm going to place it in the refrigerator

I don't want it totally gelled because I have more things to add,

 but we want this cooled and ready to add those additional ingredients.

 My orange jello has been in the refrigerator for about two hours, and I've had it covered with

 plastic wrap, and you can see the consistency is such that it's beginning to gel, so that's when

 right in there, minus its juice that was already put in the jello.

 shredded carrots or grated carrots, and then we have one fourth cup of chopped pecans.

 And that's so that it will have a nice smooth surface when it gels.

 refrigerator, and it probably will take it about an hour or so to be finished, and we'll have our

 You can see it leaves a nice flat surface, and it is shelled just barely.

 lettuce leaves and then some tiny carrot sticks to reflect the carrot that is in the salad,

 and just put it in the center of our serving dish, and that is sunshine salad.

 You can taste the pineapple, the carrots, and the pecans for me are delicious.

Some people are allergic to those, or maybe prefer something else.

 of it as a dessert or a sweet salad, but since we did use the sugar-free jello, and then we have

 some pecans and some pineapple that was unsweetened, and also carrots,

 most of the ingredients here are really nice and healthy for you.

 Hi guys, today on Divas Can Cook we are making baked lemon cake doughnuts full of fresh lemon

 Okay first thing we're going to do is add our all purpose flour into a large bowl.

 going to throw in some baking powder, a little bit of baking soda, and we're going to just

 of white sugar or a lot of white sugar to get it nice and sweet.

 the center of our dry ingredients and we're going to throw in our wet ingredients, our

So go ahead and mix in the wet ingredients until it's combined and then fold

 sit in the pan for about 2 minutes just until they cool off a bit and then remove them to

Alright, while they're cooling off, we're going to make our lemon

We're going to add our powdered sugar into a bowl and then we're going to add in

 beautiful silky, lemony, sweet tart glaze just like this right here.

 Our donuts are completely cool so we're going to add on our glaze.

 glaze harden up and then go ahead and stack them on a plate and watch how fast they disappear.

 guys, you can find this recipe on my blog at DeeBlissCooks.com.

 Hi guys, so in this tutorial I'll be using yarn in Twister brand Sport 50 and

 right here on this paper it says that I should use a crochet hook in size 3.5

 need to do is of course make a slip knot and then we will chain multiples of 3

 one, skip one chain, in the second chain make one double crochet and then we'll

 the end of this row you can see we have three stitches left so we'll chain one,

 skip one chain, then in the second chain we'll make one double crochet and then

 we have one more chain left so there we'll make one double crochet.

 right here in this one chain space we'll make one single crochet, chain four, make

 one single crochet in the next one chain space, chain four, make one single crochet in the next

 one chain space and chain four and make one single crochet in the next one chain

 the end of this row we'll chain two and then we'll make one double crochet in this

 right here in this first space or first loop we'll make one single crochet.

 one and then we'll make one double crochet in this fourth chain loop, chain one, make

 we will chain one, and then we'll make one double crochet in this same four chain space and then

 we'll chain one and then we'll make one more double crochet in the same space.

 And then here in this next four chain space we'll make one single crochet.

 In the next four chain space we repeat the same thing as we did in this first one.

 So chain one, make the second double crochet in the same space.

 space, we'll make one single crochet, and then we'll chain one, then we'll make one

 This is a 1947 Dodge and I've just had something added to it which I think is a real big improvement.

 To start the car we pull the choke out, turn the ignition on and push the starter button.

 So if we push the throttle down a bit, get some revs, pull the lever and it's running.

 So the radio in this car, well the car is a 6 volt positive earth and the original radio

 So we've got a 6 volt positive earth car with an AM radio that's been converted to pick

 up FM and also to have a pickup that you can plug your MP3 player into and through

 the radio you can play your MP3 and also the radio is supplying a 12 volt negative power

 Today I'm going to steam clean the inside of my engine by injecting water into the air

 A few words of caution if you plan on attempting this procedure.

 If you put too much water into the intake manifold, it will lock up the piston and it

 will bend rods or blow head gaskets or all kinds of nasty stuff because water does not

 compress and if you get too much water between the piston and the top of the cylinder, damage

 Also, be sure to not get any sensitive electronic components wet.

 In my case I'm going to be really close to the air flow sensor so we need to make sure

 Don't spray the distributor and don't spray anything that water could damage.

 When I apply the water, I like to spray just enough that I can start to hear the engine

 To perform this procedure, you need a water hose or a container of water and a tool to

 I'm doing this by inserting a piece of wood by the throttle valve.

 And the smoke coming out the back is both steam and the carbon being dislodged from

 Inspect the water for a few minutes, replace the intake tube, and let the car run for

 What is even better is that these nutritionally balanced recipes will help

 At the end of this video I'm going to share with you a quinoa recipe that is

 Quinoa is valued highly today due to its low glycemic index and nutrient content

 as it is rich in proteins and consists of all the eight important amino acids

 which are essential for the development of tissues in the human body.

 The presence of these amino acids makes it a wholesome protein-based diet.

 As a superfood, quinoa could be eaten as staple or substitute food in limitless amount

 for it naturally processes the needed nutrients of your body for a healthy weight loss diet

 Rich in dietary fiber, magnesium, phosphorus, calcium, iron and other vitamins,

 quinoa is the best food you need to include for a healthy weight loss diet.

 Unlike weight loss pills which could also be hazardous to your health

 as not all pills are medically approved and should not be taken without consulting your doctor first,

 or more recently used organic foods are far too expensive to be eaten regularly.

 This is quite wrong about quinoa because a small amount can be sufficient for a whole week

 Now I reveal one quinoa recipe that will keep you in good shape toasted quinoa salad.

 Add 1 ½ cups of water, bring to a boil, cover and simmer for about 15 minutes or until water is absorbed.

 Mix carrot, red pepper, parsley and green onion in a large bowl.

 Whisk together lemon and lime juices, tamari, garlic and chili sauce.

 Try throwing in a few fresh raw peas, some fresh raw corn, fresh sliced raw green beans, etc.

 If you want to know more about what quinoa can do for your health and find out best quinoa recipes,

 you click the link below and we will expose the best of super quinoa diet.

 Today I'll be showing you how to roast a turkey using an oven bag and an Eco Foil recycled

 This is a 15 pound turkey which is enough to feed about 8 adults.

 We'll be using our Eco Foil Giant Oval Roaster Pan with Oven Bag included in the label pouch.

 You can refer to our turkey roasting chart located on our website to see what size bird

 you'll need to serve your guest list and also which Eco Foil pan works best.

 I'll be showing you the simplest way to prepare a turkey with the oven bag.

 Remove the oven bag and tie from the pouch that's included with your Oval Roaster.

 Oven bags make cleanup easy, keep the bird moist, and allow the turkey to cook faster

 To get started, you'll need a thawed turkey, an Eco Foil Roaster Pan, one large oven bag,

 two tablespoons of flour, your favorite seasonings, cooking oil or butter, a meat thermometer,

 While it's heating, we're going to remove the neck and giblets from the inside cavity.

 Next, we go to the steak to rinse both the inside and outside of the thawed turkey with

 Pat dry the inside and outside of the turkey with paper towels.

 Tuck fresh herbs such as sage and thyme under the skin or in the cavity.

 You can also use vegetables such as carrots, celery or onions to stuff in the cavity as

 Finally, cut six one-inch slits in the top of the bag to let steam escape.

 Now place your turkey on the lowest rack on the oven away from heating elements, walls

 Refer to our turkey roasting chart located on our website to see exactly how long your

 If you stuff the turkey, add 30 minutes to the overall cooking time.

 For extra browning, slit open the top of the bag for the last 20 to 30 minutes of cooking.

 Insert a meat thermometer into the thickest part of the breast without touching the bone.

 Remove any juices from the pan with a baster before removing from the oven.

 And always support the bottom of the pan, never lift by the sides.

 The best part is that all Ecofoil pans are made from 100% recycled aluminum and can be

 Here are many Ecofoil pan sizes and shapes to complete your favorite family feast.

 So we get our pan nice and hot and you could do this actually on the grill if you wanted

 We're going to start our pork chop and then it's on to the other ingredients.

 Now when I talked about this pineapple and rum relish, what I was thinking was something

 So for the ingredients today, I'm going to start with some nice white onion.

 If you have red onion, Vidalia onion, whatever you like, but onion would be a great component

 A fine dice or a small dice would be kind of good because you want bites of this throughout

 Then for the sweet, I love pineapple and pineapple goes really great with onion.

 It's all been trimmed and we're going to start probably about two parts or two and a half

 Next we want to talk about, so we've got a little base note there.

 So for that, I'm using pepperoncini, a classic kind of Italian pepper comes in a little vinegar

 brine and they're not too spicy, but that vinegar brine gives them a lot of flavor.

 So we've diced or rather sliced those up kind of fine and left the seeds in there and we're

 If you have dried thyme at home, it's going to be about half as much dried thyme, but

 if you've got fresh thyme in the market, it's a great opportunity to use it here in a dish

 It's going to add some freshness and really just make the flavors pop in our dish.

 And last but not least, a spice that I think is underutilized, but has a lot of flavor

 is ground allspice, which kind of has like this really a little bit of cinnamon, a little

 It's just really great and it's going to go well with all the other ingredients we have

 So to bring this all together, I'm using today a little white balsamic vinegar.

 You can use red balsamic, but I think I don't want to change the color of this.

 I want to keep all these colors here, these simple yellows and greens.

 We're going to add a little bit of our salt to this and a little bit of fresh pepper.

 Now our pork chop is probably going to take about three or four minutes on either side.

 And what we did was we sear one side and then we come on in and we flip it over to the other

 Now while we flip this over, we're going to let this cook through.

 So this whole thing is going to cook for about another four minutes on this side.

 The pork chop is cooked through and now all those ingredients are softened up and we've

 To finish this, we're going to take off the flame and we're going to add some dark rum

 So we've got a little of that vinegar, we've got some dark rum.

 See the high-sided pan keeps the flame away from our ingredients.

 To finish the dish, we take our plate, we start with our finished pork chop.

 If you want to, you can add just a touch of butter on the finish.

 But I think to finish this, all I want to do is I'm going to take a little bit of our

 rum infused ingredients here, a little bit of our pineapple with the onion.

 We've got a little spice of that pepperoncini, which again has a lot of flavor with that

 We can add a little butter and spoon that right over if you wanted a little more of

 Now that we've got the headlight out of the car, let's go through and put the headlight

 They only fit one way, so don't be afraid about getting them mixed up.

 You want to make sure that you push until they click into place.

 Make sure you use your coarse threaded screws on the top part of the assembly with the fine

 When replacing this last bolt, use a bit of shop towel or a piece of paper to give extra

 resistance so you don't drop this bolt when you go to put it back in.

 Now snap the front lower headlight housing trim piece into place.

 Finally snap in the side marker wiring and then line up the two clips to the headlight

 Finally using a Phillips head screwdriver, tighten down the retaining screw for the side

 If you guys have any questions or comments, post them below or if you'd like to see any

 and just add the zira that we are going to use for the filling.

 so we can turn the cooker off and now we will make the potato bits.

 Now that the oil is hot, we will fry the cutlets until golden brown

I'm going to show you a very simple, easy, delicious breakfast dish.

 First, you want to get some butter and melt it in the microwave.

 Watch it very closely because it will explode and boil on you very quickly.

 but then you've got the globs of butter, you're going to break up the bread,

 and you're probably going to apply more butter than you should.

 a little depth to the bread or a little thickness, a little mass to it.

 any glass that works that's within the frame of the crust, and we're going to punch out

 medium high, and this is supposed to be nonstick, but I'm always suspicious of that,

 so I just give it a very light coating of butter because we don't want the egg to stick,

 put the bread in like this, and you want the bread on the flat part because you're going to

 be putting the egg right there and you don't want it spilling out underneath it,

 and then you've got this piece that's good with jam on the side.

 of watching it cook, and you want to make sure that the bottom portion does cook all the way

 because we're going to be delicately turning this here in just a second.

 To smell the toastiness of the bread, we're going to hit it with a little salt and pepper.

 nice and cleanly, and then turn it as gently as possible, just like that.

 maybe another 45 seconds at the most, as long as your heat is up to medium, medium high.

 And then we're going to plate it, and we're going to cut into it so you can see exactly how it needs

Now you can cook this longer than what we're doing if you want to, but we like an over

 just keep cooking it, or you could actually break the yolk while you're doing this

 and it kind of becomes something like an egg in the bowl as well.

 by Art Adams, one of the wildest rockabilly recordings ever made.

 so we're starting in 10th position and the first lick goes like this.

 the top two strings, I use my index for both, hammer on to 12th, back to 10, 12, one more

 Now we move back to the 12th fret with my ring finger on D string, on the D string.

 That's 12 on the D string, 10 on G, hammer on to 11, 10 on the B string and 12 on the B string.

 next little lick, similar to the one in the beginning, it's just 10 on the top two strings

Then I grab 13 with my pinky and do a bending back to 10 on the B string.

Then there's a hammer on from 10 to 11 on the G string, 10 on the B string,

 Today, we'll be using wet cleaning, sensor cleaning from visible dust to clean the sensor

 The sensor is very exposed to external elements, so there's no mirror in there.

 Although it has a sensor cleaning mechanism itself, but sometimes this is not functioning

 for stains or anything that falls on the sensor in that case, or any particles or sticky particles

 So in this case, we have the visible dust swab, green swab from visible dust.

 Because Fuji has basically, the sensor is 16 millimeter across approximately, and so

 we can be using 1.6X size, which is approximately around 16 millimeter from visible dust, and

 go from right to left, or from left to right, or right to left.

 But if you will be using, if you don't have that 1.6X, we can use full frame, basically

 In that case, which is 24 millimeter approximately, so we can go from up and down, or basically

 We can also turn the camera in a way, 90 degree, and basically going from left to right, or

 I prefer myself to be using 1.6X most of the time, which is easier to handle, and there

 So now, before doing that, we have to make sure that there is nothing standing on the

 In this case, we will be using visible dust Xeon bulb blower, which is a filtered bulb

 We turn the camera upside down, we blow a couple of puffs to make sure there is nothing

 Also, I have basically used to blowing a couple of puffs on the swab, so if there is any basically

 All these three solutions are compatible with green swabs from visible dust.

 This is re-dust, this is a smear away, which is basically used for very stubborn oil or

 particles or stains, and this is sensor clean basically, which is very gentle, but they

 all have anti-dust capability, so prevent dust from sticking to the sensor.

 So in this case, I will be using re-dust plus again, and I will try to turn the camera this

 So basically, I use 1.6 or 16 mm, so I use a quasar or sensor loop to examine the status

 So in this case, I will be using re-dust plus, but you only need to use one liquid,

 but depending on what kind of stain you have, so you might be using different liquids on

 So again, you go across to make sure you cover all over, and with one motion, you go and

 If there is a need to go a second time, you apply the same thing.

 In this case, you examine with the sensor loop, and that's final.

 Once again today we're not making baby food but we are making something that the little

 We're making Play-Doh, homemade Play-Doh and I'm going to show you how easy it is.

 So the first thing that we want to do into a saucepan, no heat.

 To that I'm going to add some water, some salt and I know it looks like a lot but trust

 Some vegetable oil and last but not least some cream of tartar.

 Now what's going to happen is it's going to form a big clump of dough.

 Now it might look it's turning like a disaster on you but trust me it's not.

 As it thickens it will form a clump of dough so just keep stirring it over a low heat until

 So guys that's what you're after when it all sort of forms together into a dough just like

 So guys I've just taken our dough out and I've put it on a board.

 After you've kneaded your dough guys what I want you to do is just break up your dough

 Now for this part I am putting down some baking paper because we're going to be working

 with some coloured dyes and I don't want to stain the board or the bench top.

 So into the centre of each of the doughs just get your thumb and press a hole in the middle.

 So what I want you to do with your dye is just into the centre I want you to put just

 And very carefully just mould it over and just work in that colour.

 So all the ingredients are below as usual including a few tips on how to get that dye

 You take care and I'll see you here next week for Nicko's Baby Food.

 Indian dish which is bottle guard balls, commonly known as Ghiya ke Kofte.

So the ingredients required are, firstly shredded medium sized bottle guard

 which is Ghiya, 2-3 tsp of Semolina that is Suji, 2-3 tsp of Besan, ginger paste, tomato

 we will take the shredded bottle guard that is Ghiya and we will add Suji, Semolina and

The normal masalas, salt as per your taste, 1 tsp of cumin seeds

 well so that our masalas get evenly mixed into the bottle guard.

 the balls out of that batter and we will give a nice shape to the balls.

 this we have just heated oil in a kadhai and we will start putting all the balls for frying on a

We will let these balls fry for at least 5 minutes so that the inner part

You can see our balls have started getting a nice golden colour.

 We will keep on moving these balls simultaneously to avoid burning.

 For the gravy we have taken a little oil in a kadhai and have added ginger paste.

We have just put the onion puree and we will cook it for just 1-2 minutes.

 For 1 medium sized bottle gourd you can take approximately 5-6 onion puree.

 You can add or reduce the quantity of tomatoes and onions as per your taste.

 separate from the main ingredients and then we will just add water to our gravy and put it for

 can see we have got a nice colour of the gravy as well as the balls.

 that you're going to need to make the salad will be listed in the information box below

 tomatoes or these are grape tomatoes that you've halved, you'll need some cooked brown

 rice, some sliced cucumbers, olive oil, red wine vinegar, chopped garlic, dill that you've

 going to add some coarse salt to this in a generous amount because the rice isn't salted.

Okay, my salad is all mixed together and now I want to put some in a little

Okay, I have a little individual salad bowl here that I'm just going

 I got the pot back up and we're ready to put the turkey in there.

 You're going to have to go get me a switch out of that tree I've got.

 Y'all can see how much flavor that that picked up out the bottom of that pot.

 And I seen earlier that y'all didn't get to see these sausages all pre-cooked up like that.

 And you see on the directions you can either bake it in the oven at 350 for an hour.

 And I'm going to go find that one and put that on my plate whole.

 And you can take that finger that's been up in that garlic and just piece it by your ear.

 And there won't be no vampires that come around and get you tonight.

 And they're going to finish cooking when this water gets to boiling.

 I'm going to put the chicken, the sausage, the trinity, four cups of water like it says on this package.

 I'm going to put you right there and let you rest for a little while.

 Meantime, JB's going to get ready that fresh, out of the can, black-eyed peas.

 Y'all probably don't have that in other places here in the beautiful United States.

 The Edgeware Angle Adjust Electric Knife Sharpener is a great sharpener for all kinds of knives,

What's great about this sharpener is the dial that lets you adjust

 the sharpener does come with a guide for specific types of knives and the manufacturers.

 it's recommended that you use 16 degrees, and it's highlighted right here in red.

 For a European or American-style knife, 20 is highlighted as the recommended angle.

 The sharpener has two slots, one for coarse grinding and one for fine.

 you're sharpening your knife, or if your knife is extremely dull or damaged, you want to use

 per knife, and then check the knife to make sure it's sharp enough.

You don't want to start with the heel of the knife too far into the

You want to be sure that it is aligned with the edge of the slot.

And by adjusting this dial on top, it adjusts both the coarse side and the fine

I'm also going to move the sharpener a little bit so I can be sure to drag

And just by looking at it, I can tell that my blade is nice and smooth and very sharp.

Now let me show you how the sharpener works on a European-style knife.

 For my European-style knife, I'm going to adjust the dial to 20 and then follow the same process.

 On the side, there's a manual pull-through sharpener for a serrated knife.

 Because we're gonna need to mix the ricotta and cream cheese in that bowl.

 All you wanna do is pour a little cream of tartar inside your egg whites.

 Now you wanna get your soy flour and just get a nice good amount.

 Now you wanna get the cream cheese and get a nice good amount of cream cheese.

 Kind of fluffy, but if you pile them on higher, they'll be more puffy.

 Marzipan pettiflors are about the simplest cake that you can ever make

 but marzipan is a bit expensive so here in Denmark even though it's a very traditional cake

 it's mostly served for special occasions like anniversaries and weddings and stuff like that

 but it's easier to whip in there if we make it into smaller bits

 if there's a little bit of crisp when they're baked it's very good

 I usually do like this so I don't have to hold it with one hand and fill it with another

Make sure it goes all the way to the bottom so there's no air holes

 Because when you press out the mass or the dough it will bring you trouble

 So I just want to shake it a little bit, press it down so there's absolutely no air in it

 Then you have to bake them and you got to watch them carefully because they burn easily

 I'm going to start by removing my old manicure and I'm taking a cotton ball to do this and

 I like to press it two or three times into the polish remover, that way it's completely

 If you take the cotton ball and you press it against your nail, just wait about 10 or

 15 seconds and when you pull it away you're going to take all of the nail polish with

 I used to rub back and forth and I would get fuzzies everywhere when I did it.

 It would take a little bit longer so I much prefer this method.

 Now that my nails are polish free, I'm going to prepare a bowl of hot water and fill it

 The lemon is antibacterial so we don't have to worry about any dirt getting trapped underneath

 our nails because that's very common even though you wash your hands.

 It's really easy for dirt to get trapped underneath short and long nails.

 So I'm going to soak my hands in the lemon water and this is really relaxing.

 It just feels really nice and pampering and then I'm going to start pushing back my cuticles

 So this might be something that you didn't already know but when you paint your nails,

 if there are any extra oils which we naturally have on our skin, those oils are on top of

 Your nail polish isn't going to adhere as much to your nails so you're going to find

 Depending on what kind of nail polish you're using, that could affect it as well but you

 want to make sure that you do soak or wash your hands before application of any kind

 I'm applying a base coat and then I'm going to let that dry before I put on any polish.

 When I remove the nail polish from the bottle, I swipe one side so that it's completely free

 of any nail polish and then I leave all of the polish on the one side so I just work

 Now if you're not very good at painting your nails, this is a really great technique.

 All I do is create a dot in the middle of my nail towards the upper area and then I

 If you're worried about getting nail polish on your skin and you don't want to have to

 clean it up with nail polish remover, then I recommend using liquid latex like I'm doing

 You can find this at any craft store and it's really fun to peel off and it prevents any

 I like to save Mondays to do my manicure and when I add a top coat and I do all of these

 steps it lasts for about a week so that's really awesome and it's nice to just pamper

 yourself and take some extra time to make your nails look perfect.

 I'm going to apply a top coat and let that dry and then once it's dry I'm going to apply

 I made this, you could buy one from the store, you could make one yourself.

 This is going to help my cuticles look moisturized and my nails grow a little bit stronger.

 Please give it a thumbs up if you found it helpful and comment below, let me know how

 I'd love to know and I'll talk to you guys really, really soon in the comments.

 If you give this routine a try, show me on Instagram, I'd love to see your pictures with

 I think that the wig itself needs just a little bit of cutting because that little bottom

 Essentially, it's just like really quick layering, soft layering.

Just really over extending it to maintain that length in the back.

 So hey guys, this is going to be macaroon cookies and you're going to need some coconut,

 you're going to need some sugar, I just have mine in this pink container, you're going

 to need two eggs, and some vanilla, and I put food coloring in mine, you don't have

 to, and I always put cherries on top of mine, and so yeah, take your two eggs, you're just

 going to use the egg whites, so you want to make sure you use like a separate bowl to

 make sure you get it divided, and you don't want any of the yellow, do the second one,

 and they have like special things that you can do if you can't get the yolk out, that

 one cracked really bad, okay, so I have just my egg whites and I'll be right back, okay,

 so, then you're going to get a regular clear bowl or any kind of bowl, you're going to

 put your egg whites in, and then you're going to take your vanilla, this is vanilla extract,

 if you're using pure vanilla I would only use a half teaspoon, I'm going to use a whole

 teaspoon of the vanilla extract, okay, and then you want to beat this until just like

 soft peaks form, okay, so I'm done beating my eggs and vanilla, and soft peaks, I'll

 show you what they look like, if you can tell, it just barely stands up when you pull the,

 okay, so that's a soft peak, that's how you want yours, you know, until, you want to beat

 it until, sorry, oh my God, okay, you want to beat it until it gets like that, then you're

 going to add your sugar, and you're going to use two cups and a third, or two thirds

 of the sugar, I'm sorry, okay, so two thirds, and you're going to gradually just add this

 in a little bit at a time, okay, sorry, my phone rang, okay, so you just want to gradually

 add the sugar while you're stirring or beating it, and it should be getting like a lot thicker,

 just make sure you're mixing it well while you're pouring it in,

 then after it's all stirred, you're going to want to take your coconut, and you're going to add a cup

 and a half of shredded coconut, I use just the baker's coconut,

 and you should use a spoon, I don't know why I have a whisk, because it's getting stuck,

 but okay, so it looks like that, I'm going to add food coloring, and you don't have to, I'd like to,

 hopefully this is red, it might be pink, I'm not sure, so I'm going to add about six drops of that,

 okay, so I mixed the dye in, and it looks like this, and you're going to want to set your oven to 350,

 so they kind of look like that, and I will show you what they look like when they come out,

 okay, so sorry, you want to bake these at 350 for about 20 minutes,

 and this is what mine look like on the tray, and I'll show you what to do with them after you get them out,

 so this is what they look like when they come out, you can put cherries in the middle of them,

 there's my son, I'm not going to because I'm just going to store these actually until Christmas,

 but they are good, little cherries on them, and yeah, if you guys have any questions or anything,

 Hey guys, Emily here, and today I'm going to be showing you another original design

 You will need one rainbow loom in the staggered configuration with your arrows pointing towards

 So go down from the center to the left, and now the center to the right.

 Now you're going to go down twice on each side, using double bands, remember.

 Now you'll need to go down three times in the middle, so once, twice, and three times

 Now take one single band, and you're going to put a cap band over this peg about three

 times, because you don't want it to be too tight that it doesn't look an orange.

 Now holding rubber bands, you're going to take two bands and put them over these pegs

 Go in this peg and grab the top two rubber bands and hook forward, and just hook the

 Make sure you see two-year drops so you know that you grabbed the right one.

 Now go back in this cap band, get the next two, and bring them to the left.

 My little hook came off, so it's alright because it's all hooked together.

 Now go back in the cap band, get the next two to the right, and just loop up the right.

 And now you will need one single band, and you're going to make a slip knot on this peg,

 so go through all those rubber bands, and you're going to make a slip knot.

 If you have a rainbow loom hook, just use your fingers but be careful.

 Now you've taken it off of the loom, this is what it will look like.

 Pull the slip knot to make sure it's tight, and pull the sides to make it look pretty

 And to hide the charm string, just go in the back, take the charm string or slip knot,

 I hope you enjoyed this tutorial on how to make the rainbow loom orange.

 This is part of my food series, so here is my apple charm that I made, also my original

 This hamburger and cheeseburger, the corn, the milkshakes, whoa, that was weird, the

 milkshakes, the cookie, and my other cookie, the french fry, and my toast, and one of my

 I am not going to show that one on camera because I want that one to be a surprise for

 Go check out my channel to see other things such as my soccer player, and the soccer ball.

 I have more charms coming very soon, so stay tuned to my channel, comment, like, and subscribe,

 Today, we're going to go over one of the most basic body weight movements we have, the pull-up.

 Contract your torso, pulling your feet together and slightly out front.

 With your head between your arms and keeping your spine neutral, pull yourself up, keeping

 your forearms slightly in front of you, then driving your elbows into your rib cage.

 Drive up until the head clears the bar without tilting the neck back.

 Keeping the torso tight, lower yourself to the original position while maintaining the

 Some minor mistakes include tilting the head back, which leads to overextending the lumbar

 spine, which typically leads to or is from crossing the legs behind you.

 Now as far as implementing this into our training, you can see that we can use this as a strength

 However, what we typically see this as is an auxiliary type movement where we're using

 our body weight and we're increasing the reps depending on how strong we are.

 Now the musculature of this movement works, places a huge emphasis on the lats as well

 as subliminary muscles such as the biceps, the forearms, the rear and the rear delts.

 There you have it guys, a great vertical pull, a basic body weight movement that you may

 So, this look is going to just be a summer look with greens, browns, and golds.

 I'm gonna venture out in more colors, don't worry, but let's just start with this one.

 So I'm gonna prime my eyelids, and all the products will be below, guys, I promise.

 This just will make sure the shadows stay on longer and no creasing.

 You guys know what that is, that, um... I don't remember what it was called.

 Okay, and now I'm just gonna blend that out with my brush, that way it's not such a harsh line.

 And I'm gonna use this gorgeous green color in the middle of my eyelid

 to make sure that the color green that I put on top of it, it'll be so much brighter.

 I don't know what this brush is called, but it's by Sedona Lace.

 And I'm just gonna put it on the outside of my eye, and pack it on.

 And just blend that out nicely, and take that dark green color, it's a Wet n' Wild.

 This is just gonna bring a little bit of green to the outer corner with that brown.

 Okay, and now I am going to highlight my brow bone with this matte color by Wet n' Wild.

 And then take that dark brown in the Naked palette, and put it on the outer corner.

 And then of course I want to set that green with that emerald green shadow from Notorious Decret.

 I'm bronzing out my face here with Milani's bronzer, and I love bronzer.

 This has some shimmer to it, and I figured since it's summer, you want to look bright, you know, golden.

 It was very, very faint, and that's what I wanted, because there's so much going on with my eyes.

 And now I'm gonna highlight my cheekbones with this freakin' awesome highlighter by The Balm.

 And these are the new pastel colors by Maybelline, I think it is.

 And then I'm gonna put porcelain pink in the middle to add to the other color that I put.

 I know, I know, I know, you guys are gonna be like, what the four colors?

 It looks like I'm swiping, but I'm dabbing on it to make it look less baby pinkish.

 If you do, please show it to me, and thanks for watching, guys.

 Okay, so I'm going to show you a three or four color ombre fade.

 first is I've started with one color and I did two coats of it curing each one

 for 30 seconds and on my sticky layer now of my second coat I'm going to start

 to apply my second color and what I'm going to do is I'm going to brush it

 from free edge up really thin so it's somewhat translucent and I'm just

 a design brush and I'm taking the top coat and I'm matting it down

 right here kind of to blend it because that's the trick in doing an ombre is

 getting really the the fade done so you don't see a stark line of demarcation.

 going to be a darker purple right at the free edge and keep in mind like the

 thinner the better because if you do it too thick it's just too much product

 they're highly pigmented and then you have to remove product so you don't want

 you're working with it and don't use your brush right out of your top coat

 bottle because you don't want to contaminate it or get a bunch of color

Just saturate your little design brush and then gently press right where

 because you just dispersed too much of it away just add a little bit more right

 where you need it and then stay on top of the line to do the blend.

 sometimes it just kind of hides the imperfections and if your ombre is

 not completely perfectly smooth you can add a little bit of glitter but you

 still see the variation or the you know from light to dark and it just adds a

 that's your three color ombre fade and we're going to do one last cure for 30

We're going to clean off that sticky layer and there's your three

 does not just condition your skin but it's going to actually give the life of

 the product a longer life and more flexibility so it's important to rub

 your cuticle oil over the entire surface area of a finished nail.

 Hey guys it's Kelz here and today I'll be doing a get ready with me.

 Yeah so I'm literally just rushing out the door so I decided to film for you guys and

 yeah I won't be showing you what I'm using but I'll just tell you as I go along.

 So yeah I've used the BH Cosmetics Eyes on the 60 palette to do my eyes and on my lips

 I'm wearing the Lime Mac, I'm sure you all know that lipstick, very popular, very lovely

 If you haven't seen that video, check the link down below and you'll see all of that.

 So if you want to see how I achieve this look, keep on watching and I'll show you how.

 As you all know, the summer is here, I'm so excited that's why I decided to go with the

 It's just a nice bold look and it's just going to give me all sorts of happiness, happy feeling

 So yeah, I won't be showing you what I've done to my face, I'm literally just going

 So now I'm taking the dark brown pencil, I got this off Ebay, really cheap, I think

 it was like £3 and I'm just putting it in my crease, making a sharp line just across

 So yeah, just draw the pencil in and like, you know, shade it in and all that and now

 I'm just using a dark brown eyeshadow to define that line some more because the pencil

 So I'm just using the dark brown just to make that crease colour pop a bit.

 So I'm doing the same thing to the other eye, just lining the same pencil line with

 The eyeshadow is from the natural eye palette, I think it's the coca puff or something like

 So now I'm just taking like a flat brush to apply like the purple from the Eyes Under

 to the crease as well, just adding it onto that brown that I just placed on the outer

 So I'm taking the same purple but with a more defined brush to just like give it more

 depth in my eyes so I'm placing it over that same brown spot, the same purple spot I'm

 So take a fluffy blending brush and just blend out the colours that you just placed, just

 blend it out and I'm also using like a softer shade of purple to blend it out as well.

 So if you can find like a lighter purple like a, is it called lavender?

 Right now I'm using like a black mixed with a dark brown to define my crease, my outer

 V, I'm sorry, yeah to define my outer V I'm just placing the dark brown plus the black

 and after that I just put the white on my lid making sure I'm careful not to mess up

 So yeah, take your time, don't rush and place it carefully so you don't mess up.

 If there's any mess, now's the time that you use the blending brush with a bit more purple

 to just put it back over the purple that you already placed, just smoke it out a bit and

 So blend, blend, blend so you can see it really nice and transitioned from the white shade

 So now it's time to take that deep purple that you previously used to place it underneath

 Yeah, on your waterline you place the purple with like a fluffy brush or just any pointy

 I'm just going to line my eyes with the MUA Dark, actually it's black pencil for my waterline

 So yeah, I just lined my eyes, added my lashes, curled my lashes, added a bit of mascara and

 I really had to rush out of the house so that's why I didn't have a chance to like finish

 I'll leave that down below as well and you can see my foundation routine there, my highlighting

 Have a lovely summer holiday and for anything else you want me to do, any more videos, just

 leave it in the comments section below and I have gotten a few more requests to do other

 Just haven't had the time but yeah, hope you guys enjoyed this.

 When you receive your GN Netcom 9120 you will receive one headset with headset band,

 one base station, one power supply, one base station stand and one connection lead.

 I will now demonstrate how to pair a GN Netcom 9120 headset with its base station.

 Then connect the power supply to the bottom of the base station.

 Once it's connected you will see red and green lights flashing.

 First, take the small connection wire and place it into the telephone port on the base

 Then take the other end and place it into the handset port of the telephone.

 We then take the handset curly cord and place it into the handset port of the base station.

 Then we can apply the stand and replace the headset in the docking station.

 Thank you for watching and we hope you found this video informative.

 Hello, I'm going to teach you how to make more of my Lego Halo weapons.

 The first weapon I'm going to teach you how to make is the, um, plasma rifle.

 The first thing you need to do is get the lightsaber piece, put it so the small part

 Then you get the stud and you put it one stud apart so it looks like this.

 Then you get the other one, put it on top and put the stud underneath it like that.

 Then you get the slant piece, put it here, the 1x1, put it next to it like this.

 You don't have to use red like I did, I just had more of these red pieces.

 The first thing you need to do is get the jasting pole, slide this thing down it and

 then put this washing machine sort of thing on top of it like this.

 Then you get the red bead, put it on the back, then get the canister thing and put it on

 Then you slide this thing down and put this aside and make the stand by putting these

 Next I'm going to show you how to make the grenade launcher which has these pieces.

 First thing you need to do is get this, attach it onto this like this.

 And then put that aside and then put this on the bottom, the shotgun sort of piece like

 Then on the side you get the two clip pieces and put them on the studs.

 So that concludes the weapons that I made and thank you for watching.

 We're having a look at Stevie Ray Vaughan influenced riffs today.

 My guitar is tuned to E flat because Stevie Ray Vaughan tuned to E flat.

 Your guitar sounds different when it's tuned to E flat because the whole instrument takes

 This guitar is set up strictly for E flat and it'll stay there.

 And then I've got a left-handed neck on this guitar which of course affects the sound a

 And again, it's not an exact copy of what he does, but it's definitely influenced by

 It's a very good ending or tag riff, but there's lots of other variations to it.

 So now you take the third string and you take your third finger on the third string and

 Then underneath it, you pluck the second string and you finger it with the second finger on

 Trick is not to let your third finger touch the second string so that the two strings

 I bar across three strings, but I mute the first string so it doesn't ring out.

 So I go one triplet, two triplet, then three, and then open on the second and third string.

 And now the second fret, fourth string, and then you're closing with a dramatic pass note

 That's open fifth string, first fret, and fifth string, second fret.

 Pick your second string on the third fret using your second finger to fret it down.

 So it's one triplet, which is a down, up, down, then an up, down, up.

 Now the double stop on the second and third string on the second fret.

 Then open G, open third string, and then second fret, fourth string, and then you're closing

 So open fifth, first fret, fifth string, second fret, fifth string.

 I hope you think it's awesome, because I just spent more time than I should.

 If you want to check my website out, there's a three-day free trial.

 Hi everybody, Project Catastrophe here and today I'm going to show you how to

 string, make a four over your second string, loop it under, and pull two times.

 side, you take your first string, you make a backwards four, you loop it under, and

 tightly because if not you'll have gaps and then it won't look good.

 the two strings that you just used, you make a forward knot, which is you take

 your left string over your right string, make a four, you loop it under, and you

 Make a forward knot with your left string over your right string, you loop it under,

Now on this part, you take your second string on this side, take

 your second string, and you make a backwards four over your first string, then loop it

 under, and pull two times, and put that string off to the side.

 your second string, make a normal four over your first string, loop it under, and pull,

 Then you go back to the beginning, make a normal four over your second string, loop it under, and pull two times.

And as you can see, that's how you get the heart friendship bracelet.

 Today on Happy Healthy Fit, I've got the ultimate sofa workout for you.

 And I'm going to show you some exercises you can do so you can get in shape while you're being a couch potato.

 I'm going to start with the back of the arms because this one will work on any couch,

 And as you get more advanced on this and stronger, put those legs out.

 If this is feeling too simple, pick up a leg and try it that way.

 So your hands are going to be up on the couch, feet on the ground.

 As you advance on that, I'm going to have you take it to a decline.

 Now, if you're liking that one and you want to take it up a notch on the chest

 and the push-up, we're going to take it to a traveling push-up,

 These are essential for your trick list because they're a very quick way to 180, you can do

 them off any edge, and you can even do them from an ollie or nollie.

 They're also key if you want to learn 180s off boxes and rails.

 The difference between a twisting and traditional 180 is in the traditional style you wind up

 and rotate to get the 180 around, where in the twisting style you just turn your shoulders

 To start, practice a twisting motion as you ride, turning your shoulders in the direction

 you want to 180, then twisting your hips to slide your board around.

 Something like this is a great way to practice and improve your switch riding as well.

 Once you have the twisting while riding down, stop on the side of the slope and add in the

 Build a platform by getting your edge firmly into the snow, turn your head and shoulders

 into the direction you want to 180, bend your knees and jump into the air as you twist your

 Land on the opposite edge with your knees bent and back fairly straight, keeping your

 Next find a mellow slope where you have some space to twist the 180 while riding.

 Start at a speed you're comfortable with, build up your speed as you improve, and you

 Remember to break down this trick into its individual parts to get it around successfully.

 Switch riding is always key for having the confidence to commit to the landing.

 My personal favorite for this trick is to come in on my heel edge, then do a nollie

 So remember guys, start out by twisting as you ride, then add in the jump on the side

 of the slope before practicing on mellow runs and small ledges.

 If you found this video helpful, remember to give it a thumbs up, connect with me on

 Instagram to share your snowboard photos and videos, and to enter the latest contest.

 I'm really excited to talk to you today about how to style your ballet shoes for a workout

 So there's a lot of different ways to do it and it depends I think on whether you're

 looking for a look that's more fun and fashion, a little bit more girly with the bow, if you

 want to get more serious and technical, a little bit more performance mode.

 So I've got my drawstrings pulled, they're tied, they're knotted here and then tucked

 in tight so you can't see anything and I've got my ribbons tucked in as well.

 So I'm just going to undo all of this so you can kind of get a feel for some of the different

 I like to flex the foot when I'm beginning and then just bring the ribbons around and

 So even for professional dancers we all do it differently and there's no one way that's

 Again, I'm leaving some slack here because you're going to be dancing, you're going to

 be working out, you're going to be moving, you need to be able to flex your feet, bend

 and stretch your legs and make sure that your ribbons aren't pulling too tightly.

 So I've got this sort of sloppy knot here and then I would just tuck everything underneath.

 If you're going on stage or on camera or something where you really want to have a look that's

 clean and perfect, I would actually stitch these ribbons closed so that there's no loose

 And again, taking that drawstring, I've got mine tied into a loose knot here.

 So you tighten the drawstring right, you're specific because everybody's feet are going

 So this would be an example of styling your shoes for a much more technical, pre-performance

 And then if we want to look at the other foot for a look that's a bit more fun and fashion

 and I think flirtatious and sort of whimsical, I like to think about doing a big sort of

 So again, same thing, I'm going to start bringing one ribbon across and then the other.

 I'm flexing my foot just so I can find that spot that's really nice.

 I typically tend to tie my ribbons on the inside of my ankle just because that's where

 I've even got some little bits and pieces here where I had these stitched in.

 So here's an example if you want to do a nice pretty bow on the inside of your ankle.

 Again, you always want to make sure that you tighten the drawstring so you're getting the

 I'm going to put it into a loose little knot and then I would put it in a bow from there.

 So you could keep the drawstring out for a look that's really girly and sort of silly,

 I think it's all about your personal style and what gets you excited for your Ballet

 Remember, if you're looking to wear a pair of these for your own workout, you can find

 them on our website, balletbeautiful.com, and lots of great workouts there as well.

 Now most gravies are made from the drippings of meat, a roast or turkey, anything, chicken,

 what happens is you make your roast, there's drippings, and then at the bottom of the pan

 you take the meat out, you add water, you add wine, whatever you want, you can add starch,

 Well when you're a vegetarian you don't have meat, so you don't have any meat drippings.

 So what tastes better than some brown gravy to go with your meatloaf, meatless meatloaf,

 So I'm going to show you how to make a nice brown gravy that has no animal fats in it.

 Now I suggest some unbleached flour, but I didn't have any today, so I'm using this.

 We want to get the lumps out, so I'm going to be whisking for quite a while.

 And the more effort you put into it, the less lumps you're going to have.

 It's depending on how long you leave it on, or how long you whisk it, and how much water you put in.

 And every time you add some, you just bring it back up to a boil.

 So about a month ago I downloaded this push-up application for my Android phone

 and what it does is it prompts you to do as many push-ups as you can without stopping

 And you go ahead and you enter that data and then you also enter how many you would like to do continuously

 Every other day you do a certain amount of sets of different numbers of push-ups

 and the program now says that I should be able to do 100 push-ups.

 So clearly you can see either the application is broken or I am broken.

 I've got all the ingredients laid out here and we're going to start with a bed of lettuce.

 Got the lettuce and that's going to be followed by, let's put that right in the middle there,

The only meat going into the salad is this cooked ham right here.

 Alright, the next thing I'm going to add are some carrots and celery.

 Alright, and the dressings are going to be, this is a sesame, goma, sesame dressing.

 I'm using this super cute fabric which is purple with these blue sort of bows

So the first thing I'm gonna do is lay my fabric out on the floor

 and I put the dress that I'm gonna model this after on top of it.

I'm gonna take the other side and make sure that the arms are the same length as before.

 So I'm gonna draw a line just with two fingers that's what I'm gonna do.

 Since we're pulling the waist in using an elastic I'm actually going more like five

 shape the final shape but we're cutting it to shrink it in a little bit.

 Next it's time for the arm pieces and these are not going to be rectangular

 add one and a half times the measurements of the top of the sleeve

 and the end of the sleeve and then just make them pretty short like 12

 the upper measurement is the end where I want the sleeve to end and sides are the

Now we're gonna go back to the main piece which is looking like this

 right now and we're gonna start by sewing the long edges together all the

 way up to where the sleeves are gonna start and then we are going to sew these

 I have sewn my elastic together and this is a marking pin for where I want

 few spots as possible like maybe only two and then I'm gonna sew it while

 the elastic now I have to pull taking this piece of the machine we have to

 pull open and pull the dress through so I don't sew through it and I'm keeping

 the marking pin since the elastic is not pinned down so I know which height I

 I'm starting at one of the sides and I'm starting where I folded and sewn the

 and I'm just gonna sew a couple of steps to make sure that the elastic is on

 Now up next I folded a hem all along the bottom of the dress and I'm now going to

 Next it's time to sew the sleeves together so I'm gonna fold them in half

 perfectly so before I start pinning anything I just I'm just gonna cut so

 with the sleeve sewn together so I'm gonna pin them to the dress and I'm

 gonna make a couple of folds up by the shoulders to make puff sleeves which

 pinned inside the dress and I'm gonna sew all the way around and the final

 step is hemming the sleeves and sewing them together and just like I did when I

 sewed the sleeve on I've made a couple of folds up by the shoulder to make it a

Okay so I've hemmed and pinned the top of the dress and I'm gonna sew

 Now if you want to make it even more girly and cute you can put some bows or

 ribbons or something like that on it but I think I might actually when I wear

 this put a ribbon like around the waist or something like that.

 All Hallows' Even, or Halloween as we call it, is a night of mystery and fun.

 Who is that strange phantom at our door and what does he want for his little sack?

 Is that a fairy, butterfly, pirate, princess asking for treats?

 Half the fun of Halloween for my family and me has been making our own costumes.

 In my book series, Papercraft Fun for Holidays, in the Halloween edition,

 In the instructions of my book, I said the poster board was supposed to be 4 inches by 7 inches.

 Now, take the poster board, 4 inches by 14 inches, and fold it in half.

 Now, tape the pattern on the poster board with the dotted line on the fold.

 You can tape it there in place so that when you cut it out, you cut both the pattern and the poster board.

 Now, if you have a hole puncher, use that to punch a hole at the end of that line.

 See, that makes it a little stronger right there at that point so it won't tear very easily.

 Then use the hole puncher again to punch some holes there at the eye.

 That makes it easier for you to put the scissors in there and then cut around the line.

 Now, we're cutting through both sides of that folded paper there, so there you go.

 We'll take off the old pattern there, move everything out of the way, and open it up.

 I take a piece of scrap paper and put it underneath the goggles so that when I color it in, I won't make a mess on my table.

 So I'll color around the eyes like this to give them a little definition.

Let me take a marking pen and just do a little flower theme here with petals around the edges.

 Since we're going with petals, I'll fold a piece of green paper in half and cut some leaves for eyebrows.

 So I'll take a piece of black paper, I'll fold it in half, I'll just trace around there so I know where to fit it.

 I want to glue the eyebrows on, but I don't want it to stick to the back.

 Once you've made your mask, what you do is very gently pull this strip back.

 You don't have to use just poster board or paper for this project.

 It's easy to have fun when you remember that paper and scissors rock!

 Hey everybody, Sam back once again and yes I'm here with another unboxing and today we're

 Now some people are going to say, Sam, this is not the newest device on the market and

 A couple of different colour options, as you can see here there's an awesome kind of orange

 one, which I'm pretty sure Dave from Geekanoids will absolutely love.

 So let's go over to the back of it, as you can see here, it did come in orange, green,

 I'll just give you a couple of the spec rundown upon it on the back of it.

 Obviously you're on a Windows phone, you get the here suite of applications.

 I think it's got the Snapdragon 800 with 2GB of RAM, a 20MP camera and a 5 inch 1080p display,

 And it's got Dolby and obviously the PureView built in there as well, which uses the Zeiss

 So flip this back over here, let's open her up and, well hello.

 If you want to go check out more about Mix Radio, I've got a previous video showing you

 I am going to do an updated video pretty shortly, probably after Mobile World Congress now,

 So I'll stick that there and we'll pop this to the side as well.

 You'll get the one for your location, whether it be America, etc.

 And well boom, hello, we have some more Mix Radio kind of goodness here.

 And as you can probably tell, it goes from the smiley face to headphones.

 It's never a device I actually got to try when it first came out.

 It's not like it's 15 years old or anything, but as you know, it's not the newest on the

 And I'm actually very, very happy that I'm getting to try this one now.

 This is pretty much the 1520 but in a smaller body and uses a slightly larger screen.

 On the left side of the device, you've got your volume up and down, your power switch

 and your dedicated camera button, which I'm happy this one has.

 Some of the newer Lumia devices from Microsoft and other lower end devices, they don't have

 At the bottom of it here, we have a micro USB for charging and syncing.

 And then jumping onto the left side of the device, it's just some nice aluminium.

 Now with regards to this here, we just kind of pull it up and well hey, there's a SIM

 And looking at that there, as you can probably just about see, it uses a nano SIM card.

 Now as you know, on all Windows phone devices, it generally comes with a three array of buttons.

 Some of the newer ones have got on screen buttons, but you've got your back button,

 your home button and your search slash Cortana kind of button there.

 We've got the nice Nokia brand at the top, which I'm going to kind of miss on some of

 You've got your front facing camera, which I believe is two megapixel, if it serves me

 And at the bottom there, you have your speaker, a little microphone here.

 That is the unboxing and the quick first look, I suppose, of the Lumia 930.

 I'm going to be taking this to the Mobile World Congress and I'll be using it over there

 If there's anything you want to know specifically about this phone, then hit me up down below.

 Just say, Sam would love to comment on YouTube if you can go check it out.

 Thanks for watching this video and you'll hopefully see me in my next one.

 We're gonna use one of the greatest little accessories too that I found.

 Called frog mats, which are a little web of non-stick material.

 So we can put the salmon down directly on the grill on the frog mat.

 And since I can't help tinkering, I'm gonna hit it with a little lemon too.

 Look at this, I'm tough and rugged, so I can just pick it up with my hand.

 and roughly break up 250 grams of Cadbury hot chocolate chunks.

 Stir in the soured cream mixture into the flour mix until just combined.

 Then transfer to a wire rack and serve still warm from the oven or simply cold.

 But for a sweeter tooth, try using chunks of Cadbury dairy milk caramel instead.

 In this video, we're going to show you how we go about staining a house in one day.

 We're going to stain the fence on the side and actually stain the back deck.

 We actually came prior to today and to actually stain this house and we power washed it and

 Came back and did some prep work, some caulking and stuff on this house.

 And now we're going through the staining process and we're going to show you how it can be

 done in one day with five members doing the house, the deck and the fence.

 This side of the house is actually beat up pretty bad from the sun and we've sprayed

 some stain on here, sprayed a coat just to kind of pre-prime it.

 Now we're actually going back and back brushing a heavy coat and then we're going to come

 Right now I'm just actually pre-back brushing some of the spots on the siding that don't

 Then we're going to come back and spray and back brush and then we'll spray our final

 I'm going to show you the process of spraying and back brushing this house so you get a

 lot more life out of the stain and a lot more life out of the wood.

 I'm back brushing right behind him as he's spraying and we're going to show you that

 We're just using a nice good quality stain brush and right here you can see the stain

 Doing the spraying using a Graco Rack-X 515 tip and we're on our second coat right now.

 I'm back brushing some of the first coat before he's getting to the second coat.

 So we'll get done with this first coat on the front side of the house.

 We're going to be moving to the back side of the house doing the first coat.

 And we're going to show you that back brushing process on the first coat.

 So we've already sprayed the first coat, back brushed the first coat of this solid color

 Now we got John going back and spraying a second coat over the top of that and we won't

 You can see we've got one guy spraying, another guy's back brushing and the sprayer we're

 actually using, we're using a Graco Rack-X 515 tip to actually spray this stain on.

 We're using some nice thick stain brushes to do the back brushing and we're showing

 So we started staining this house about 7 o'clock this morning.

 We got the whole front side done, two sides of it done, working our way around the back.

 We're actually going to paint them a satin stain, a satin paint from Sherwin Williams

 We've got it masked down on the ground with 9 inch paper, 1 inch tape and we don't need

 to worry about the edges of it and masking the hedges because we're going to be trimming

 the doors out and the stain so we can get the paint over sprayed right on the trim and

 When that dries, go back and put the solid color stain around the trim.

 Also along with this house, we did the fence right here, this length of the fence.

 Then we did this house, solid color stain, did the fence a solid color stain and then

 Just getting this all cleaned up, got a little bit more masking, about an hour more.

 When filling a crack with repair resin, it is the end of the crack that gives the technician

The end of the crack is the tightest part of the crack and requires a moderate

The miniature bullseye should be made about 1 eighth of an inch beyond the end of

 the crack and exactly in the center of the projected path of the crack.

 to a depth of about 1 millimeter or halfway to the center of the windshield.

Hold the needle perpendicular to the glass and gently strike the top of the

It will be necessary to run the end of the crack into the freshly made miniature

The end of the crack will have little or no stress and will fill easier than the conventional

 method of simply drilling the end of the crack almost all the way down to the plastic inner

 cup of the bridge should be treated with petroleum jelly or Vaseline and then smear the Vaseline

 alongside of the crack the width of the suction cup, being careful not to get any Vaseline into

 with resin, glide the assembly along the crack and look for the crack to start filling with resin.

 Once the end of the crack begins to fill, the injector assembly may be moved further down the

 that the first two or three inches of the crack repair are the most time-consuming and require

In some instances, the first two or three inches of the crack must be gone

 may take up to 75% of the total time needed for a successful crack repair.

 or three inches of the crack repair and the resin flows freely ahead of the injector, make sure that

 the injector is pressurized, completely filling the crack with repair resin.

 recommended to apply a couple of drops of resin to a piece of plastic cure film and place behind

 the areas already filled with resin and could save considerable repair time and disappointment.

 remove the plastic film strips and scrape the area clean of excess resin.

 You're also going to need an extra 6x2x4 if you want to use it for ammo.

 If you don't have this piece, you're only going to need 3 1x4s with 3 holes in each side.

 And then one of these black pieces and you attach it right here.

 There could be another black if they wanted to, but I just put that, I guess, like that.

 You stick your pole through and you push the little band toward the black.

 Now, uh, to load it, what I need to do is pull back here, put it down here in the hole,

 And then you're gonna shoot that door, possibly above this line.

 Heddy Goh here from HRI Utilities and today I'm going to be showing you how to configure

 So here it is, it's just a normal adapter, VGA to DisplayPort that I got off Amazon for

 It's branded by something we can't see because my shitty camera won't focus!

 So here we have my Samsung SyncMaster S22B154 1920x1080p HD monitor, link to the unboxing

 Over here we've got a generic 1024x768 monitor which I'll be using as my secondary display.

 So here we've got a DVI to VGA adapter, HDMI port and DisplayPort.

 So what I'm going to do now is I'm going to hook up my primary display, which is the Samsung

 So now what I'm going to do is I'm going to plug in this secondary cable, VGA cable, to

 But if you're me, you're doing it wrong and you have to do it, turn it around and do it

 You see, I was recording a voiceover earlier and I made stupid word choices.

 So anyway, as always, like us on Facebook, follow us on Twitter and I will catch you

 I love it so much in fact I taught myself how to make it and now I want to teach you

 so please enjoy my video tutorials on how to make western style sushi

 So here we have a ripe avocado and I want to spend a couple minutes talking about the

 avocado because it's so important in sushi rolls especially to have a nice ripe one

 so what you're going to be looking for in the avocado is going to be a nice dark green

 olive color almost black and you're looking for shiny skin and I always squeeze the avocado

 which should have a slight give but with no air pockets and the skin should be nice and

 tight and glossy and one other thing to look for is where it attached to the tree limb

 that should be there should be a little piece of the stem intact and sometimes you'll see

 a little bit of a white fuzz in there and that means it's past its prime and move on

 So now I'm just going to insert the knife and just roll the knife around the big pit

 inside the avocado and you come full circle then you just give it a little twist and it

 pops open like that now this is an absolutely beautiful avocado you see the light green

 on the outside into the very light green coming in towards the middle just put the heel in

 now I'm going to do some slices for sushi rolls so I like to slice it when it's still

 in the half of the avocado skin and nice and gently just go ahead and trim up the slices

 I'm not cutting through the skin I'm just cutting through the flesh of the avocado just

 turn around here so you can see it I just cut it into half so that way I can easily

 so now that I cut it into slices and I've cut it in half I just take a fork or you could

 take a spoon and go along the skin of the avocado and there you have perfect avocado

 slices for sushi and there will be about two slices per roll do the other side as well

 just want to separate the fleshy part of the avocado from the skin

 so now I'm going to take the other half of the avocado and run a spoon in between the

 skin and the flesh of the avocado and this is going to be for topping I'm going to do

 thin slices to top the rolls with just nice thin slices so you can put over the top of

 a sushi roll let me show you how thin these slices are this takes a little bit of time

 but it adds a great presentation to the sushi roll and it tastes very good on top so just

 very nice and thin like that hope you enjoyed this tutorial thanks for watching

 Hi guys, Kirk here with Kirk Giordano plastering on a beautiful cold February.

 procedure with drip screen paper and wire, but first I want to show you folks what I hear a lot.

 Okay, what we're going to do is see this drip screen the drip screen is going to go all the

 way around the perimeter here just to show the perimeter, but before I can apply this screen,

 say if I put this screen here this foundation is done a little awkward if I put it here now

 when the water goes on top of the paper and comes out of these weep holes what it'll do is it'll

 saturate this mud seal we don't want that so the first thing we got to do here is counter the mud

 seal with a flashing so I'm gonna take this guy right here and that's just how it goes it goes

 right there now the water can't get on the mud still and I'm going to counter this Z flashing

 with a drip so it's going to be just like that it's um will protect this mud still that's what

 we're going to do so anyhow I'm going to go ahead and screed out this entire perimeter we're going

 to show you the step-by-step of how to paper it put the screens on including the gable up here

 where we have the roof to all step flashing anyway when we get to that stage I'll show it to you

 all right guys drip screen is this out I have the Z flashing here we counted the Z flashing with a

 drip screen I'll show you around here we've done it kind of got lucky with the rain it's going down

 for a minute our two layers this is spot glue together two layers but it's spot glue this goes

 underneath here right in between where it's intertwined you just follow one of those

 common question is why use a gun and not for in there's the wire self-ferred they still sell

 foreign nouns because most folks don't want to spend 350 bucks for a gun 350 bucks for a

 compressor $100 for those so furry nails will always be sold you could just use regular nails

 but folks just don't understand about the furry nails so I use a gun much faster wire stuff

 all right guys drip screen I normally go about an inch above the roof because we're counter

 flashing this flashing we're tying everything in here this is real important too many guys

 just go on the roof you should not do that it's a 30-year roof stuck the last hundreds of years

 so one's gonna give before the other you always want to be able to redo the roof so always put

 your screen above it coming down the door guys we're about buttoning up everything going ahead

 and putting caulking around all the framework caulking goes around all of these outlets hot

 and sunny right now earlier we're in pouring rain freezing our butts off now sweating our butts off

 anyhow weird weather I just got to put corners on all this we're actually doing the whole house

 but I'm just for the sake of trying to explain some of the key things just showing you this rear

 end okay guys we're gonna wrap it up but I'm gonna wrap it up with one final great tip for you guys

 generally when we do our paper we wrap around this way then we wrap around this way so we have four

 layers on all of our corners one of my guys was he works for another fellow also because hey four

 years recession we're slow too and the guy he always tells him wrap here and come around the

 corners don't cut them like Kirk Giordano does okay I cut mine like this because if you take

 your corner and you wrap around here with the wire not only will your corner aid not fit properly

 but you have to beat this down right here on your outer corners and I have corrected over 30 years

 more outer corners and chimneys because folks do do that and when they staple it down with a gun

 they rip these corners so you want to do it safe and yes it does take more time cut your wire at

 your corner and then this right here the corner aid ties it all together that's my tip believe me

 I get a lot of work from corners leaking and that's always the culprit folks saving time and

 turning these outer corners you can turn it in a corner clip you shouldn't turn an outer corner

 anyhow my name is Kirk I'm with Kirk Giordano plastering thank you folks for watching and as

 Okay, first thing we're going to do is make the peas and carrots.

So you take the Starburst candies in orange and you just cut them up

 into little cubes and put them on the cupcake, and those are the carrots.

 a little green Runtz candies for the peas, and you just stick them on.

 white icing onto the top of a cupcake and then just make like a little well shape in

 topping that comes in a can and sometimes it comes in a squeeze bottle.

 kind of fill up the well with it and let it drip over the sides just like you would if

 you need two colors of jelly beans, one yellow, the other one white, or in this case, I actually

And you just kind of randomly place the whitish colored ones in there so

You simply remove them, take the yellow one, remove it from the paper and then

 sugar just sprinkled over top to make it look like someone has put some salt and pepper

 the template over top of some waxed paper until you get the shape that you want.

 little hole on the top and then just taking more white icing and just going up the sides

 Going to dunk it in there just to cover it up to make it look like a chicken coating

My name is Patrick and today I'm going to show you how to grill some ribs

 or actually smoke, barbecue some ribs on a Brinkman Offset Grill Slow Cooker.

You put the charcoal in there and then, actually I'd highly recommend getting

Put that in and then it just plugs right into the wall there and in about

 just throw a bunch of charcoal in there and then spray gas and throw a match in there.

 and you're probably going to have gas smelling food and all that stuff.

 Just fill that up, get your charcoal hot there and then just go over here and dump it right

What I've also done is, you probably already saw, I had some wood going in there.

 you just fill up a bowl with some water and soak some wood in there.

 you can do it the better because as you can see the wetter it is, the longer you'll get

I'll probably have to put some more of that wood on there in about 45 minutes

 you put on the inside and I highly recommend getting another gauge.

 you want to slow cook ribs between 225 and 275, you know, the lower, between that temperature.

If you need to go 250 to 275 for only, you know, 2 or 3 hours I suppose

 there and that's actually the water that the cherry wood was soaking in so I just dumped

 that water into a little pan and I also put some apple juice in there so hopefully those

 flavors and that moisture will keep the ribs flavorful and moist as we go along here.

 them by putting some charcoal on the grill area and then just, you know, heating them

 a little bit but I want to do it maybe over the hot coals of the grill and that will give

 it a nice bark so it'll be crispy and, you know, that nice caramelized barbecue sauce

 flavor on the outside but hopefully the ribs are juicy and moist on the inside.

 while you're smoking because if you look and you ain't cooking, you just want to keep

It says 300 but we know we just looked and it's about 225 so I'm going to assume

 that the temperature is good for, you know, a couple hours here.

 to it in about an hour but that's how you're going to lose your temperature is the wood

 is going to start to die off, the charcoal is going to start to die off so you just want

 to maintain the smoker part of it and I'm going to leave where the ribs are closed from

 here on out and you just got to have some faith when you're smoking that it's going

 that I did but I used to do ribs on this thing and what I would do is I would just put charcoal

 on this side and then I would just lay the ribs over here, close it and then in two hours

 you know, I can add some more time to it now and it's got some more volume to it for smoke

 so it's probably going to taste better and it's going to take a little longer but it's

 this is my first time smoking them on this so that's what's great about smoking and barbecuing

 is you can come up with your own methods, you can come up with your own little tips

 and tricks and ways you do things and I'm going to start with maybe a three, three and

 a half hour process today and if it's not enough then I'll know next time I've got to

 up I can open that and that will have more convection of air going through heating up

Grilling is just where you have the coals out and you just slap meat on it and

 with yours or whatever you're cooking with and I hope you found this video helpful.

 Now for the coffee cake, I like to start with making the crumble topping first and then

 we're going to do is we're going to mix our dry ingredients together.

 bowl flour, and I like to use unbleached flour, a little bit of salt, some baking soda,

Then what we're going to do is we're going to make buttermilk out of soy milk.

 Now once I add the egg replacer, I like to beat it really well for a moment with the

This is an unsweetened applesauce, but it does have a little bit of

So it's a little, I thought it would just add a little bit of good flavor

We're going to stop it before it's all mixed, and we're going to start adding

 At this point, too, you could also stir in some raisins if you really like raisins in

And we're just going to squeeze it over the top evenly so we have a nice even

 350 degree oven for about 50 minutes or until it's golden brown and a tester inserted in

So for this recipe and more wonderful recipes, you can go to our website which is

 Hi, I'm Candy Cooper and in this Sakura video I'm going to show you how to make this Craypa

 Batik using Sakura's Expressionist Oil Pastels and Sakura's Koi Watercolors.

 Craypa Batik is super cool because you get to draw, you get to crumple the paper, you

 get to wash over it with a watercolor to make this really super oil pastel batik.

 Alright, so to get started you're going to need some super heavy duty watercolor paper.

 Okay so I've got my bird shape drawn out, now it's time to grab a Craypa Expressionist

 You can see that this thing is really bold, solid, and coated, ready to rock in the watercolor

 So the next thing we've got to do to prep it for the batik though is crinkle it up.

 And this sounds scary and crazy at first but it's really, really easy.

 So all I'm using is a piece of white tissue paper to sort of protect my Craypa pastel

 And this is so that if you were to just crumple it up like a paper wad, all of those colors

 And then we're just going to roll it over, almost like a sushi roll.

 This is really fun with kids because they like to really get active and crazy.

 And I've just unrolled it and then we're going to turn it one way and we're going to do it

 Alright, so come on over to the sink and let's mix up our watercolor bath.

 Now, if you're in the classroom setting, I've got something for you.

 And I'll break up some of these paints before I get too much water.

 So the moment we've all been waiting for and the reason I wore black.

 So this is where you're just going to dunk your batik piece into the watercolor bath.

 But then you're going to bring it over to the water, the sink, and rinse it off.

 Because we're going to just scrunch this guy up a little bit more now that he's wet.

 If you want to speed up the dry time, lay it on a dish towel or something that can help soak that up a little bit.

 So you get a can opener, and then you take lessons on how to use one.

 Um, I think you're just gonna have to sit back, relax, shut the fuck up, and let me...

 Other fun things you can do while your water is boiling is contemplate how to murder your friends.

 Don't let anyone ever tell you that Froot Loops aren't worth your time.

 And the end result is a delicious cupcake casserole that you can make at home if you re-watch this video.

 Today I am making green tea frappuccino, which is the last frappuccino this summer.

 The ingredients are 2 teaspoons of matcha, green tea powder, 1 cup of milk, 1 cup of

 large ice cubes, 1 scoop of vanilla ice cream, 1 tablespoon and 1 teaspoon of granulated

 In a blender, add in 1 cup of large ice cubes, less than 10 cubes.

 1 tablespoon and 1 teaspoon of granulated sugar, 2 teaspoons of matcha,

 and 1 eighth teaspoon of pure vanilla extract, which is just a dash of vanilla.

 If you are a fan of green tea frappuccino like me, by all means make this at home.

 And also don't forget my Nespresso Espresso Maker video contest.

 My friend Jessie keeps saying that she's going out to go get some and I'm like, I want some.

 In the meantime I know somebody's probably going to ask about my Keurig.

 The thing that I don't love so much is the fact that I love my coffee very, very strong.

 What we need for this is a very strong, one cup of very strong brewed coffee.

 What I found is that because I like it extremely strong I always have to use the smallest cup

 That means that I have to fill up my pods twice in order to get a decent sized cup of

 The other thing is because it drips like that it splatters everywhere.

 So not a fan of that but other than that you can't beat it for speed, seriously.

 And then if you buy the boxes large enough like say at Costco you could get, I think

 Costco has like a hundred of their brand I think which is, it's some Kirkland brand,

 But you can get like a hundred pods for $34, $35, $36 dollars, something like that.

 Which is a lot cheaper than if you buy the pods say at Kmart or Target or Walmart or

 So anyway I'm going to change this out and of course this is probably going to be about

 So I'm going to brew it one more time at the small and I'll be right back.

 Okay so like I said this is probably maybe one and a half cups right.

 I normally put in two of my pink packets, I know it causes cancer, in rat, lab rat,

 But I'm not a lab rat, I've had cancer, I've survived, I'm entitled.

 One and a half jiggers or one and a half, sorry, one and a half fluid ounces of Bailey's

 And Ray, I know you're probably thinking, I can't believe she's finally using that Bailey's.

 So we're going to finish it up by making it over the top decadent.

 Congratulations on your purchase of our Blickman Engineering Top Tier Burner.

 We are confident you will find our burners superior to the competition since we designed

 Our Top Tier Burner outperforms the competition in both fuel efficiency and heating performance.

 You will also find that our burner is extremely quiet, a feature not found on any other burner.

 Plus, with our stainless steel frame, our burner will last a lifetime without rusting.

 In this video, I will show you how to assemble, light, and adjust your Top Tier Burner, ensuring

 you use minimal fuel while achieving incredibly short boil times.

 You will have received the following parts with your Top Tier Burner.

 One burner assembly, one adjustable gas regulator, four stainless pot retaining bars, eight 6mm

 bolts and nuts, one stainless air damper, one spring, one brass gas orifice fitting,

 First, install the orifice fitting, spring, and air damper onto the burner venturi.

 Make sure to install the spring between the orifice fitting and the air damper.

 Tighten it just enough to keep the air damper flush with the burner venturi.

 Then, install the air damper screw, making sure to allow for fluid air damper movement.

 Next, install the gas regulator hose to the orifice fitting and tighten firmly.

 Finally, install the four pot retaining bars using the 6mm nuts and bolts provided.

 Please make note of the location of the retaining bars and adjust accordingly to your kettle size.

 You will want to make sure you ignite and adjust the burner with the pot on top of it.

 You will also want to make sure that the pot is partially filled with water to prevent

 Please make sure that the variable pressure regulator is firmly attached to the propane

 tank and turn the knob fully counterclockwise to the off position.

 When lighting the burner, always make sure to use a long match or igniter.

 You will notice two ignition holes specifically designed for this purpose.

 Put the flame in the hole and then turn the regulator knob clockwise to allow for the

 The key to using the top tier burner is to make sure you dial in the flame just right.

 Without proper adjustment, you won't achieve optimum heating speed and efficiency.

 Correct flame adjustment will also prevent you from coating your pots with a black soot.

 Once you have the flame ignited, you will achieve optimum heat output by adjusting the

 By looking through the flame inspection hole, turn the air damper until the flame is slightly

 Then slowly turn it back until the flame turns pale blue and it's still touching the nozzles

 If the flame lifts off of the nozzles or you hear a low grumbling from the flame, you will

 When properly adjusted, you will barely be able to hear the flame and you should see

 pale blue flames on each nozzle about three quarters to one inch high at max power.

 If the flames are noisy or bright blue, you have too much fuel and or air.

 Remember, you do not need to have the regulator fully open to achieve maximum power.

 As you increase the gas flow from the regulator, it may be necessary to readjust the air damper.

 Congratulations, you are now ready to start brewing with your Blickman top tier burner.

 If you have any questions, please don't hesitate to contact us and be sure to check out www.blickmanengineering.com

 Press it down and you can see on the side of the container, approximately how high it comes up.

 Lightly spray the counter or use a little bit of flour in case it's...

 I don't like to add too much extra flour because you get the best texture in bread, lacy and open holes,

 Please spray this again because it's going to go back in for a second rise.

 You can either give this a business letter fold or, because I'm getting to show you this,

 I can show you my favorite way to do it is by making a dough package.

 Here I'm distributing everything, all the grains evenly, but I'm also stretching the gluten.

 Then I pull this up to the top, and then I pull this out to the side,

 pull the bottom out, not to tear it, just to pull it so that it stretches like a pilates for dough.

 And then tuck it under to keep the good shape and press it back into the container.

 It's going to fill the container fuller, so the second rise will rise higher than the first one.

 You can see it came all the way up to the top of the container.

 So in order to shape what is called a torpedo or a batard, which is like a football,

 I start by first pressing it out and dimpling it lightly so I don't have big air pockets,

 and then fold it forward so that the center is going to be high so it tapers out.

 Don't over-flour the counter because then it slips on the counter.

 You want it to pull a little because a tightly shaped loaf has a better shape and it rises better.

 With my thumbs, I'm sealing the bottom and then rolling it over so that the seam becomes at the bottom.

 As you can see, the bread is now 11 inches by about 2 inches high.

 I want it to grow when it's proofing to about 12 inches by 2 1⁄2.

 And the way to protect it from drying out and getting ready for the oven is that I put it on a piece of parchment

 sitting on the back of a pan, and then you can cover it with plastic wrap,

 but then you have to spray it first so the plastic wrap doesn't stick.

 But if you have a clear plastic box, you can just set it right on the top,

 giving it room to grow sideways, and then let it sit until it has proofed enough

 The dent should very slowly start filling back in as it's doing now

 because that means that those cuts are going to open up in the oven.

 So in order to give it a special rustic look, being a multi-grain bread, and this is optional,

 And then wherever I've dusted it with flour will be one consistency or one appearance,

 And it's going to open up because I'm going to make three slashes,

 and I like to use a single-edge razor blade because it gives me the most control,

 So to make three slashes, and I can use this maybe 50 times without losing the slash,

 and you can go over it a second time if you haven't gone deeply enough.

 And then start the next one about an inch up from the first and go straight down.

 And I've cut into a grain so I can see that's going to look really nice.

 And then the third one is going to be right up an inch up from that and come down to the end.

 and then I have a cast-iron pan that's been preheating because cast-iron really keeps the heat.

 So when we put about a half a cup of ice cubes in, you're going to hear the hiss and see the steam.

 And then quickly close the door and you'll get all that steam going

 that will enable the bread to be crunchy on the top and also open up to its fullest.

 And as you can see, these are the fully baked breads, and aren't they gorgeous?

 Cretors and Company has been manufacturing concession and snack food

 equipment for 125 years, providing complete range of innovative food

 Caramel corn shops and gourmet food retailers are quickly discovering how

 easy it is to make delicious caramel corn in our user-friendly machines.

 original two mixing baffle design improves the coating process and

 Please refer to the user manual for more information about Cretors Caramelizers.

 9800, Cretors Non-Stick Lecithin part number 9803, popcorn and water.

 Optional ingredients may include stick butter, baking soda and other ingredients

 blades and stationary bars in the mixer with Cretors Non-Stick Spray.

 serves to keep the mixer clean and also helps the caramel corn to separate into

 Next, pour the Cretors mix into the mixer making sure that the mixing blades are

 Refer to the user manuals for the correct amount of water and mix for your

 and evenly spread the caramel corn mix over the bottom of the mixer.

 Set the temperature controller on the side of the cabinet between 325 degrees

 Approximately every two minutes turn mixer on for about 10 seconds.

 Butter can be added when the temperature is about 25 degrees less than the set

 The buzzer will sound when the mix reaches the set point and is ready to

 Caramel coating can be tested for readiness while the caramel is cooking

As the caramel drips off the spatula small strands of caramel or

 At this time optional ingredients can be added like baking soda and any

 user's manual for the correct amount of popcorn for your specific mixer model

 Next spray the corn with 10 squirts of Cretor's nonstick to separate it into

 When the corn appears to be separated and free in the mixer, which may take up

 turn the mixer motor off and dump the batch into the cooling tray by lifting

 Use the spatula provided with the machine to reach any hard to reach

 places to completely empty the machine of the caramelized product.

 Gently push the caramel corn around the cooling tray with the spatula to help

 the product cool faster and break up any clumps that may have formed.

 When you are ready to make another batch, add the recommended amount of water on

 the mix instructions and add mix and repeat steps 3 through 12.

 Again, please refer to the user's manual for more information about the Cretor's

If you have any questions, contact your local dealer and if there

 are any additional questions, feel free to contact our customer service

 our video on how to make caramel corn by using the Cretor's Caramelizer.

 following these steps you will make a delicious consistent product every time

 One I just happen to love because I know the E major and A harmonic minor scale

 usually I'll go up a major sweep and land here on the 10th fret instead of up on the 12th.

 I'll go, so the sweep itself, I'll do an E major sweep into an A harmonic minor scale when I'm

 Then I go to the 7th fret on the high E and then I go to the 10th fret

 Because it sounds nice if I play an A minor, this is just a version of an A minor, and I go

It's just an E major going into A. I do it as I go into a D minor,

 I use an E major sweep as I go into an A minor, and of course an E major sweep

 trusted by moms and dads, to introduce their new line of baby home products, including

 this multifunctioning unit which steams, blends, reheats and defrosts your homemade

Starting your baby on solids is a huge milestone for parents and making your

 taste buds, open the palate with lots of real tastes and flavours, add spices or herbs to

 your food, change the texture and also introduce fruits and vegetables that you don't typically

 find in store-bought foods, such as dried apricots, beets and parsnips.

 is a firm favourite with all babies and so versatile to add into any other fruit or vegetable

 and a great one to start by adding cinnamon into as the introduction to a new spice.

 are going to give your baby not only vitamin C but also lots of fibre and flavonoids.

 have my apples here prepped, ready to go into my steamer basket and I have peeled it

Assuming that I'm giving this to a six month old, you do want to peel the skin

 As your baby gets older, do leave the skin on or just do a stripy peeling job so that

 it does encourage a little bit of texture and they'll get used to it as they get older.

 Now that I have my apples prepped, chopped and ready to go, I'm going to put it into

Now that I've finished filling my steamer basket, I'm going to put

The recipe book included indicates how much water to add to the reservoir

 this multi-functioning unit is that it's all BPA-free, super safe for your baby.

 cool to the touch, so even while it's steaming, no matter where you touch, you won't burn

There's an auto shut off so I don't have to worry about remembering how long it's

 are finished steaming, I'm going to empty the steamer basket into the blending jar.

 If you're making this for a six month old, leave the water in for really smooth puree.

 For a nine to twelve month old, where you want a little bit more texture and a few more

 lumps and bumps, remove the water from the blender bowl first before you puree.

 bit less and start to get a few lumps and bumps in there just to challenge that palate.

 If it's for your nine month old and if you feel like it, add a little bit of cinnamon

 Because of the graduated bowl, I know that I've made about 250 ml of apple and I'm going

 These glass storage jars hold about 60 ml or 4 tablespoons of food.

 your baby at six months on solids, then this jar should probably last about two days as

 You can store your glass jars in the fridge for up to about three days or put them in

 from the fridge or the freezer, remove the lid from the glass jar.

 inside the steamer basket, put on the lid, put it back onto the multifunctioning unit.

 Refer to your recipe guide for the exact amount of water, whether defrosting or reheating.

 The ease and convenience of this multifunctioning unit not only saves you money when it comes

 to feeding your baby, but also starts them on the path to a lifetime of healthy eating.

So, um, we did this last year and the preschool teachers loved it.

So we have two of these funky things that our cousin sent us for last Valentine's Day.

So basically what you're going to do is I'm going to put two loose ponytails right here.

 Alright, so I already did the upside down topsy tail on this side.

 And then you're going to put the hair in between your two fingers and pull it through the ponytail.

 It's going to come through up so that the hair is going upwards.

 And turn your head so they can see what that looks like in the back.

 So what we're going to do with the two parts of hair coming up is you're going to split it in half.

 And you can either let it go by itself or you can braid it or you can twist it or however you want.

 So the best way to do a twist is to split this into two pieces.

 I'm going to the right with this hair and then I'm going to go to the right with this hair.

 And then when you twist them together you're going to go the opposite way, so counterclockwise.

 And that makes it so that the hair stays twisted and very cool looking.

 So it's going to stay like that if you do the clockwise and counterclockwise.

 So then you do that with the other side and then I'll show you how we form our heart.

 Okay so now that we have both hairs twisted what we're going to do is, turn your hair like this,

 we're going to put our funky ponytail to hold them together at the bottom.

 And you're going to let these fall so that it looks like a heart.

 You're going to do the other side and you'll have heart piggy tails.

 And I actually didn't even put bobby pins in it because it falls and it still looks like a heart.

 So there's a heart on this side and there's a heart on this side.

 And what I did at the end instead of just doing a ponytail, I did like a little loop

 so that the hair kind of fountains out at the end and fits in with these fun funky things.

 Today's video is going to demonstrate how you can secure your down comforter inside

 Now the first thing you need to do is set your duvet on the bed or surface that you

 Grab yourself just a scrap piece of fabric, it could be a shoelace, etc.

 And then get yourself another little piece of fabric about 2 1⁄2 to 3 inches in length,

 Now I'm going to show you where to attach these in your duvet so that you'll have a

 permanent type of attachment to keep that down comforter from slipping around.

 Okay so now what you'll want to do is start with the smaller of the ties.

 You're going to go to the top edge of your down comforter and across the corner what

 If you can attempt to put this banding right on the edge of the cording of your comforter

 it's best because you don't want to poke a lot of holes inside the down comforter because

 Show you here in a second what we're going to do on the inside of the duvet.

 Okay now what we're going to do is we're going to take our 6 inch piece of fabric.

 Now what we're going to do is attach this tie to the duvet cover itself.

 Now what we have again is our securely fastened strap in the corners of the two edges of the duvet.

 Now simply what we're going to do is put the long end through the loop.

 Now all you're going to do is reach around from the outside of the duvet.

 Make sure that the duvet and the down comforter are evenly distributed.

 Feel free to give us a call or email us with any bedding related questions.

 G'day, I'm Warwick Shulin and today I want to show you how you can go about teaching

 This is a three year old quarter horse filly, I've been working with her for just a little

 while and I'm going to show you how easy it is and how light they can be to do this, but

 I will caution you, if you've let your horse drag you all over the place and all that sort

 of stuff up to this point in time, you can't teach them to do this light.

 This mare, when she can lunge around me, she doesn't pull on me, I can change directions,

 do most everything with her and she doesn't actually pull on this lead rope.

 So what I've done here, I'll show you how light it is, recently I was talking to a horseman

 from Mexico and he said, in the old days what they would do is they would, to prove how

 good a horseman you are and how light your horse was, they would tie the bridle reins

 onto the bit with five pieces of horse hair and if you broke the five pieces of horse

 hair you were pulling too hard on the reins, your horse wasn't light.

 So I thought, well I can do that, so I'm going to go one better.

 I have tied this lead rope here onto the halter with one single strand of tail hair, it's

 I've been hanging onto it here for a second with this one until I get it done, so right

 now I'm going to teach her to flex laterally with this piece of rope tied to a piece of

 Okay, so I'm just going to take that one off and throw it over there.

 So all I'm going to do is I'm just going to stand back here and I'm just going to pick

 up on this little rope right here and just wait for her nose to move to it like that

 Okay, all you're going to do is just wait until her nose moves a little bit and then

 So I'm just going to pick up again just like that and wait for it to move like that and

 Okay, now like I said I haven't let her drag me around but I haven't specifically worked

 So let's pick up right there again and her nose starts to come, I'll let go.

 I'm just going to pick up again, it's not coming, I'm just going to wait.

 Let me just turn her over here so you can see it maybe a little bit better.

 And there's another thing too, if you can't lead your horse around and have them move

 and stop when you want with one piece of horse hair on there, they're probably a little bit

 The reason I'm doing this is because a lot of people say, well how hard do you pull?

 Anything with her head moving to the left, even if it's way over there, is good.

 If you watch her left ear, we'll probably move back towards me before her head comes

 So, I'm going to keep going here, but that's about as simple as it gets, you know.

 Within the first five minutes I can do that just off of one tail hair out of her tail.

 Today at Cucina con Noi we'll see how to prepare a popular course from the Rome region, ketchup

 400 grams of spaghetti, preferably of the extruded through bronze type because they

 absorb better the seasoning, 180 grams of Pecorino Romano cheese, salt and freshly ground

 If you prefer a more delicate flavor, you can replace one third of the Pecorino cheese

 Let's put the spaghetti to cook in a pot full with copious salted water.

 In the meanwhile we can mince the pepper directly on the cheese.

 When the pasta is just firm, we pour a spoonful of the cooking water in pan, we add a drizzle

 At this point we add another spoonful of water and we let it cook for a minute.

 Now we turn the stove off and we start adding the Pecorino cheese.

 Now let's spread out some pepper and chili pepper if we like it.

 Hello, I'm Chef Eric Longhini, an instructor at the Escoffier School of Culinary Arts in Boulder,

 And then we will start taking off the sides to give it some stability.

 And when we work from a square or rectangular item at the beginning,

 it will help us achieve the shapes that we are looking for in the end.

 So a large dice is about 3 quarters of an inch by 3 quarters of an inch.

 If you're having a difficult time getting the knife in accurately,

 and it helps if you look down straight at the spine of the knife,

 Once we have that, we'll go ahead and cut this into a piece that's of equal size.

 Medium dice is about a half of an inch by a half of an inch by a half of an inch.

 Alright, on our next potato, I'll show you small dice, brunoise, and fine brunoise.

 And for our small dice, we want to go about a quarter of an inch by a quarter of an inch by a quarter of an inch.

 Again, I start at the very edge of it, getting my knife into the product,

 Next, we will do the brunoise, which is an eighth of an inch by an eighth of an inch by an eighth of an inch.

 And we want to cut this fairly thin, about a sixteenth of an inch by a sixteenth by a sixteenth.

 We want to have both sides of that plank that we're making of equal thickness.

 Now wintertime is definitely here and in the wintertime our skin tends to get a little bit drier and duller.

 Well, today I have a great skin softening bath treatment that only uses two ingredients.

 Now at the end of this video I'm going to be announcing our Naked Soap giveaway winner.

 So make sure that you stay tuned through the whole video to find out.

 I have cameras in all of your houses to make sure that you watch the whole video.

 So the first ingredient that you're going to get is raw sunflower seeds.

 Now sunflower seeds are really great for the skin because they contain vitamins A, B, C, E, and K.

 They have lots of great minerals such as magnesium and calcium.

 And they also contain a great antioxidant called selenium which strengthens the skin's elasticity and fights free radicals.

 So what you're going to do is take one fourth cup of sunflower seeds and put it into a blender and blend it into a fine, flowery consistency.

 Now we've used whole oats before in many of our tips before and we know that they have nice lubricating fats and proteins that help fight free radicals.

 They also contain polysaccharides so when these are wet they leave a protecting coating on the skin that fights dryness and dullness.

 They also contain natural cleansers called saponins that remove dirt and oil from the skin.

 And what you're going to do again is take one fourth cup of your oats, put it into a blender, and make a flowery consistency.

 So the last thing that you need to get is some type of netted type of bag.

 Now I went to the dollar store and I got these little sachet bags.

 They were really super cheap and they're used for like party favors and they're really easy because they have a drawstring on them that just makes them close and you don't gotta worry about like doing that.

 But if you don't have this you can use any kind of cheesecloth that you have and make a little bag out of it.

 Just cut the foot off and you fill it up and then you tie it up.

 But I would make sure that you clean the stocking before because you don't want to smell like feet.

 Anyway, so what you're going to do is get your bag of choice and you're going to take your ingredients that you ground up, your oats, and your sunflower seeds, and put them into the bag.

 And then you're going to tie up the bag and you're pretty much done.

 And while you're taking a bath you're going to want to rub this onto your skin.

 I would use soap too but I mean you don't need to because the oatmeal is going to cleanse your skin.

 For those of you who didn't realize or know, get with it people.

 And it went to the person who gave me the funniest comment or whoever I thought was the funniest.

 I got to hit it on something to make a drum roll but I have nothing to hit on.

 you also are going to get something else because I'm crazy like that!

 I'm here to go through a couple of mobilization stretch exercises that is going to loosen

 A lot of people that run or ride bikes will get a tight feeling on the side of their leg

 and actually majority of the symptoms will come to the side of their knee.

 They'll get clicking or they'll have some pain in that area, especially when they're

 So a lot of bikers when they're riding will get a pain or a clicking in that area.

 I have a couple of exercises that I want to show you that I think will really help you

 Basically you're finishing off in that little bowling position and you're just going to

 So from here you're going to step to the side, bend, come on down into a squat for me.

 Right here you'll get a good stretch here and here, which is again your iliotibial band.

 So you're not holding the stretch, you're coming down and then coming back up.

 So this is a dynamic warm up sort of exercise, not a static stretch.

 That's going to loosen up your hips, your glutes and really try to stretch out your

 You're going to need a wall or something that you can really lean into.

 You're going to put one leg out just like the bowler, except you're going to really

 And the idea is to try and push the hip down as much as you can and you should feel a really

 And you're pushing the hip down, pushing it down, down towards the floor.

 That's a ITB stretch and you can incorporate that after you finish the workout.

 You can incorporate this along with the foam rolling of the IT band and you have a good

 sort of protocol to keeping your IT band lengthened out and stretched out so that you can minimize

 the irritation that you get on your knees and your hips as well.

 video will show you how to save money by storing it properly, freezing and drying.

 Korean recipes use lots of green onion, but there's one problem that the green onion doesn't last long.

 I've been doing this for a very long time and this is my version of saving money.

 First you'll have to clean and wash the green onion very thoroughly.

 Take off the root end and cut the green stalk end if it looks brown or damaged.

 Turn on a cool water on a sink and block it with water stopper and fill the water up to half.

 Then add about a half cup to one cup of white distilled vinegar, the cheapest kind.

 I like to clean all my vegetables and fruits with white distilled vinegar for that extra health benefits of having cleaner fruits and vegetables.

 Soak the green onion about five minutes and after five minutes start cleaning it thoroughly, especially inside the tube of green onion.

 After cleaning it thoroughly, throw away the vinegar water and add new clean water to sink one more time and rinse it again.

 Then place it on a colander so that the onion will dry naturally.

 Now that the onion is semi-dried after a few hours, slice the green onion like how I do in the video.

 Then place a weekly portion in a clean container and close the lid tight.

 By doing this, green onion will last about a week in the refrigerator and it's ready to use anytime.

 If you want to freeze the onion, get a porcelain freezer bag and

 place about a weekly portion and close it tight and keep it in the freezer.

 dehydrator to dry the green onion and I like using the dry green onion for cooking in soup or stew.

 I also grind the dry green onion into a powder and I love using that the most because it can be added to any dish.

 You can also use your oven to dry the green onion by using the lowest heat and bake it for about several minutes.

 Thank you for watching the video and subscribe to this channel and Facebook.

 Thumbs up will be great because I'm teaching you how to save money and how cool is that?

 I love you girls, and if I haven't said enough, I love you more than thousand times.

I mean to say you can probably call it a smoothie but in the Caribbean we call

But this one I'm doing especially for the people who cannot handle dairy.

Now if you're looking for a video on how to peel, how to seed and how to

 chop and choose that perfect papaya or popo or popoy as we say in the Caribbean, head over to

We also have the diced up papaya and here I have some nutmeg and

 Typically how this is done in the Caribbean is sweetened with sweetened condensed milk.

 we're doing this lactose-friendly so we cannot go without option.

 I mean to say if you like it spicy, obviously you can go in a bit heavier on there.

 Next up I'm gonna go in with that honey and this is organic honey and I'm just lucky enough to have

 some beautiful organic honey that was given to me by my cousin.

 Remember if you're doing this the traditional way you will be using sweetened condensed milk.

 coconut substitute you can use almond milk or soy milk or rice milk.

 blending it until you get that smooth, you get all the pieces of papaya nice and smooth in there.

 I mean to say you can make this into a smoothie if you want but

 Sorry for I do apologize for the shaky camera today but look at that.

 so that's why I only went in with two tablespoons of that honey.

 own liking and remember if you're going to be adding ice to it to go a little bit sweeter because

 once it gets watered down with the ice it will change the flavor.

 The second skin sling is a simple tool to help you connect with your baby, either skin to skin or over your clothes.

 Hi, I'm Kimberly Bepler, postpartum doula and lactation consultant.

 I'm going to show you how simple it is to put on the second skin sling.

 The first step is to put the first loop over your head and your neck.

 Make sure that the curved seam is in the center front and smooth it out across your chest and across your back.

 Place the second sling over the opposite shoulder and under the opposite arm supporting the breast,

 Make sure that the sling makes an X in the front and an X across your back.

 Once you're ready, you can put your baby up on your shoulder, ready to load the baby into the sling.

 You want to unfold the sling that's closest to your body and slide the baby in along your chest,

 Then you repeat with the other side, making sure that baby's feet are fully tucked in

 and the sling is around the feet and a little bit in between the baby and your body.

 Most babies don't like their heads tucked in initially, but once they relax and become more drowsy,

 they will fold their head in and you can place a strap over their head comfortably.

 Make sure that the face is exposed so that you can see the baby's color and make sure that the baby is breathing properly.

 When you're ready, take your hands away gently and see if you feel secure in the sling.

 If you feel that the straps are not in the right place, readjust a little bit

 until you feel like the sling can hold your baby's weight comfortably against your chest

 in the same position that you would hold your baby in in your arms.

 To move the baby into a breastfeeding position, lower the baby just gently to about breastfeeding position

 and shift the baby's hips facing more upright rather than against your body.

 Baby will comfortably find their own breastfeeding position or nestle in for a little sleep.

 To get your baby out of the sling, create a little bit of space by moving your baby up your body

 Now your sling will have a little bit of slack and you can stretch out the fabric around the baby,

 remove it completely from the baby's feet, kind of peel it off like you would a banana,

 and then pop your baby out and hold them in your arms and wherever else they need to go.

 We want to make sure that the baby is in contact with mom as much as possible.

 Here are some of the benefits of wearing your baby skin to skin.

 When the baby is skin to skin, the baby is instinctively moved to a nursing position

 Your baby has more quality sleep and it's the deep quality sleep that promotes growth.

 The fourth trimester is a wonderful time for baby's development.

 Studies show great advancement neurologically when babies are held skin to skin.

 Bonding is very natural and your baby recognizes your voice and the smell from your womb.

 Originally developed by Shiseido, facial massage can be added to your daily skincare routine

 Shiseido scientists have explored how facial massage can promote the well-being of your

 Follow these simple steps and learn how to perform facial massage at home.

 Warm the massage cream with your fingertips and spread it all over the face.

 Shiseido's massage creams were designed to never dry out the skin, so it will remain

 on the surface to ease the massaging movements without ever pulling or irritating the skin.

 Start at the sides of the mouth and work outwards in a circular motion, coming back to the starting

 The movements are always upward and outward to fight gravity, which is pulling our facial

 Next, place your fingers at the sides of your nose and move up and out towards the hairline,

 The pressure should be somewhat firm, not pulling the skin, but firm enough to increase

 Lastly, start at the inside corners of the eyes and work upwards and outwards around

 To finish off the facial massage, place your fingers at the center of your chin and move

 Then move your hands up to the sides of the nose and outwards towards the temples.

 Finally, move up to the center of the forehead and massage outward, holding the pressure

 When stimulated after massage, the skin and the facial muscles become very calm and relaxed.

 Years of Shiseido research have shown that daily facial massage can lead to firmer, more

 We offer professional, complimentary facial massage at any Shiseido counter.

 I got one and a half tablespoon here with maybe two to three ounces of water.

Now, if you think it's too much oil, you can simply just use a paper towel.

We want all the sauce and the ingredients, the flavor, get into the tofu.

 Wow, I'm telling you, boy, perfect dish, side dish to go with your noodle soup, your pasta,

 What's up guys, Luis here of BeastLifestyle.com and today I want to show you a getaway of working on your grip at home.

 And if you have ever done any type of training with towels, you know how tough on your grip it really is.

 So, the easiest thing for you to do is to just hold two towels from any bar that you can hang them from.

 Because you're going to notice if you really get a thick towel, that's going to be really hard to grab.

 But a couple of exercises that you can do to work on your grip, either at the beginning or at the end of your workouts,

 So, you're going to notice that you probably can't even do like three more reps, more than three reps.

 Really, your grip just gives out pretty quickly if you're not used to this.

 And you're going to notice that your hands are going to be a little, they're going to feel a little swollen and a little shaky

 Because you don't want to just let loose and fall on your face or on your back.

 So, the next exercise that you can do is just a simple inverted row.

 doing inverted rows will help you to acclimate yourself to working with the towel grip

 Now, with inverted rows, the progression for them would be to go lower and lower, little by little.

 And the longer your towels are, the easier it's going to be to transition into that.

 And you're also going to notice that your hands are going to fatigue first

 and then your back might not even get fatigued just because your hands are going to be fatigued so fast.

 At the end of the workout, you don't have to really go high rep.

 You can even do 3 or 4 sets of 3 to 5 reps, depending on your level.

 So, those are just two simple exercises that you can do with towels.

 You can wrap the towel around the pull up bar and really make it a fat grip.

 So, you're pretty much just pinching that with your fingers like this.

 And a challenge for, I think, a lot of people that I hear is, why travel when I can't eat

 I usually hit an organic type natural food store, some kind of Whole Foods type store.

 As soon as we check in, I tell the hotel, can we please get a refrigerator?

 I have a special diet and I need to have some stuff refrigerated or I have some medicine

 Just so they understand the importance of getting a refrigerator to the room.

 I don't think we've had a problem at all with getting a refrigerator.

 I told him to bump it up with ginger and some whole lemons he did.

 I got Jamie some whole brown rice sushi with avocado and cucumber.

 The problem is when you're out and about at conferences, it's easier to just to hit, to

 go to the bar at the conference or to a restaurant and start picking on french fries and things like that.

 So something like this we can actually take into our conference.

 Some good quality fat in there, so that's why they make olive oil.

 I really find these to be consistently high quality as far as the ingredients that go into it.

 You can look at all the crackers on the shelves in these stores and get confused.

 Wasser generally is top notch with the whole grains and everything.

 I picked up a young Thai coconut from my friend Jim, who thinks I'm a maniac when I start chopping the coconut on the video blogs I do.

 So I'm going to take this to the conference today as a joke for him and hopefully crack this open for myself.

 I did buy some coconut water in here just because of the ease of using this.

 Although I did pick up some bottled water, I picked up some high pH bottled water.

 For the refrigerator I picked up some wild sockeye smoked salmon.

 I picked up some type of whole grain bread with whole wheat flour and a little honey in here.

 We'll eat our smoked salmon on that with a little vegan cream cheese that I picked up in the cream cheese aisle.

 I went to their salad buffet and we got some really awesome stuff.

 A bunch of good salad grains in here from millet to quinoa to wheat berries, sweet potatoes, kale is in there.

 I kind of hit the local beer section there because Jamie and I like beer.

 We're in Tennessee so I went through and picked up all the local beers.

 We'll share with some of the friends of the conference here that we're at.

 I'm not going to drink them all myself but I do want to taste and see what they're brewing.

 This is a guide to eating healthy when you're out and about in hotel rooms, conferences, and traveling.

 A lot of supermarkets have these type of items now, especially if you're in bigger cities.

 Hit this, pack up your cooler for the two or three days you're in the hotel room and you're straight.

 Then you can snack on some of these foods and eliminate going out with the gang afterwards and having dinner and filling up.

 It's nice to go to these dinners a little full so you can pick and get rid of the salad or something.

 You don't get forced into eating something you don't want to eat.

 When you're with a group of people, it's hard to say, I want to go healthy.

 If you're with a group of people, they're going to take you to a steakhouse.

 That's just what conventions and associations and groups and meetings and conferences associate.

 While I was in this whole foods type store, I asked the guy at the juice counter, which is very nice,

 I asked him what kind of vegetarian restaurants, what kind of healthy restaurants.

 They threw up a whole list of stuff that the concierge couldn't tell me at the hotel.

 Because the concierge at the hotel, they're not used to eating like we eat.

 So they just send us to the places that they have the tickets for and they get 10% off and they get a kickback here or something.

 I like to network with the local hotels and things to get people in the door.

 But at the organic store, the healthy store, they all listed off all these places to go eat.

 So I came back with a list of places I haven't even told Jamie yet.

 So I'm kind of excited about maybe veering off on our own for dinner tonight or something

 or taking the gang with us or at least checking this place out while we're here for the three days.

 This is how to eat healthier when you're traveling and in a conference and on the road.

 There are so many different ways to do it, but this way is foolproof.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to take the onion like this, just slice straight

 Then you want to take off the top of the onion, so you want to leave the root intact.

 Just take that off like that, and then it's really easy to peel the skin off.

 Now you want to space them about two millimeters apart, depending on how fine you want your

 onions, and you don't want to cut through the root at the end, so you want to cut as

 close to the root as you can get, but not all the way through it.

 And if you're worried about cutting your fingers, then put your hand flat like that.

 And then you're just going to slice down like that, and you can use your fingers as a guide.

 Keep your fingers turned in like that so you don't chop your fingers off.

 Whenever I watch you do cutting things, it's like a magic trick.

 If you're worried about cutting your fingers, put your hand flat.

 You only need to do one slice through the middle of a small onion.

 Yeah, as far across as you can get it without mind your fingers.

 And then you just want to curve your fingers over the top like this,

 and then you can use your fingers as a guide for how thick you want to slice it.

 Send us a tweet at the Stew magazine, or leave us a comment on YouTube.

 And if you want to know why onions make you cry, there's an article about it on our website,

 And if you want to see more of these, you can subscribe to our channel.

 And you can go ahead and just bend your knee and reach to your foot.

 dibba means plumpy even in Karnataka they make a similar variation which they

 see unlike dosa where the batter is thin this batter is very thick

 but we're going to spread it with hands so before we go ahead and do that

 into the pan and then take the batter which is a very thick batter

 if you want a really crispy kind of this roti just you can make a small

 dents in between where this oil will start popping out little bit

 while I was growing up my mom used to make this dip roti pretty often

 I hope you have enjoyed to learn another variation a kind of uttapam

 couple of times a month it's not going to hurt all you do is do extra chore at

 please post your recipes and cooking tips so others can benefit

 Do it often enough and you're going to see it transfer over into your actual racing and

 The drill is called rotary drill and basically all you're going to do is lift your foot to

 So you're going to start off in that raised position and then you're just going to reverse

 They don't have a lot of taste, but the fragrance is unmistakable.

 She'll cut those leaves up and then pound them in a mortar and pestle.

 If you look underneath the video, you'll see the recipe step-by-step.

 Next, you'll see her strain the water out through a regular strainer and then again

 pour that through a cheesecloth to make sure it's a nice, smooth green water.

 That's the same cheesecloth used to make sticky rice and we sell that cheesecloth at importfood.com.

 It's just a pre-made flour designed for this layer, this Khanom Chan, which is a layer

 We sell that same flour mix at importfood.com if you look to the right of your screen.

 Several hours actually because as you'll see, each layer needs to be steamed.

 The mixture is a little bit thick so she poured it back through the cheesecloth and

 There, it's completely strained and then that will be cut in half.

 It will be divided in half and you'll see in the next shot two different bowls and it's

 She'll add all of that pandan water to the one stainless bowl there.

 Some people make this just using food color and they divide it up and create different

 And there she's putting a stainless steel bowl into the stack steamer.

 And here she's covering the lid of the steamer with cheesecloth and that's to prevent drops

 The stainless steel bowl inside the stack steamer, we sell that at importfood.com although

 And she's using the stack steamer that is sold by importfood.com.

 It works great steaming and we also sell that charcoal burner that she's using.

 Here she's adding the first layer, covering the bottom of the pan and then she'll put

 It's delicious and you can just peel off each layer when you eat it or dig into it with

 Each layer is about a quarter of an inch thick and we finished off with a green layer.

 Hello everyone, once again this is the House of Love Hospitality.

 Kala Lumpur you can make fish, you can fry the fish, make carrot fish if you like or

But at this point of time I am preparing only just the Kala Lumpur.

Also I put some base, chicken base as well to give it a nice flavor.

 It went from China to Hong Kong to Alaska to Tennessee and then finally here to Syracuse

 I don't know why it went that route but I'm sure that's FedEx's whatever.

 So I saw some people had this unboxing a couple days ago and I was kind of ticked that I could

 Now this Apple TV has the A4 processor in it which is pretty impressive.

 I have a developer access so I have the upgrade to the iPad 4.2.

 That's supposed to allow me to stream to this and stuff but it's kind of buggy so I'm not

 It's actually a little bit heavier than I thought but man that is tiny.

 It just feels like a solid slab of aluminum and then you got like a little battery thing

 Very rubbery feeling plug but just kind of different end on it too.

 I know other places have but I'm going to give you my take on it.

 Now they said that this outside edge is pretty fragile and that's probably why they have

 So using some pretty, I don't want to say cheap plastic, but maybe a, I forget what

 So that there's like an indicator for, or I'm sorry, so the IR port would actually work

 So they, I'm sorry, they actually just, I don't know why I'm saying sorry.

 So maybe the iPod Nano, old black crappy plastic, but hopefully it won't be too big of a deal

 And if you haven't seen already, I'll go over the ports real quick.

 So if you don't want to use the built-in Wi-Fi, it has 802.11n.

 The fit and finish is just like any Apple product, really nice.

 It is leaving just like my heat signature or whatever on the top from my fingerprints.

 And if there's anything you want to see, let me know as always.

 going to need to make this recipe will be found in the information box below or you

 boneless skinless chicken breast that you've cut into bite size pieces, you'll need an

 egg white, you'll need green onions that you've sliced, diced red pepper, sliced mushrooms,

And for the sauce part you will need some soy sauce, chicken broth, sugar,

I'm going to start by slightly beating these egg whites until they're a

And I'm going to set this aside for a minute until we move on to the next step.

 Okay, I'm going to start by putting about four tablespoons of vegetable oil in my wok

Okay, these vegetables are pretty tender so I'm going to remove them

 would be the cup of chicken broth, the soy sauce, and this is light soy sauce but you

 this all together and we're going to set this aside for a few minutes.

 we're going to put it on simmer and we're going to let it simmer for about 45 minutes to an hour.

 My cashew chicken is boiling so now I'm going to turn it down and just let it continue to simmer

I've put my cashew chicken on a bed of brown rice and so now comes

 Hi everyone, this is Lorraine and this is Brian and today we're going to show you

 beef and then probably add like your own seasonings but the spicy sausage has a

 lot of seasoning already in it so we don't have to add very much.

 this is just kind of like a classic alfredo for people that don't like red

We've got our water boiling so now you add the salt because salt

 preheat your oven to a very high temperature like we're using 500 you can

 Now that it's all mixed up we're just gonna let it simmer until it's warm.

 have mozzarella and six cheese Italian which includes mozzarella, provolone,

 melt the cheese really nicely and we got we like it to be a little like kind of

 So today I'm going to be teaching you how to do a tuck no hander.

 The first thing you want to do is I'm going to be teaching you how to go up a ramp not

 But I don't have a ramp so I'll just end up doing the example flat.

 So the first thing you want to do, there's two different ways, there's the BMX style

 I do the BMX style, you can put your bike like that and then go like that.

 They go up like that, just in case they don't let go they clip their leg like that, they

 You go up, I pull up, I'll be like too steep, I'm going up a ramp, I would go like that.

 Then once I have that up, I'll let go like that, let go back on.

 Not putting your elbows here, I'm just doing the whole scooter up.

 So the first thing you want to do, I'm going to show you how to do it on a trampoline first

 Remember this trick is, this is my first day learning it really.

 So yeah, and that is how I teach you how to do a top no hander.

 Alright, now we want to bring our oils to room temperature and our lye water to room

 temperature, but to ensure you can use a candy thermometer and you can check the temperature.

 You want your oils between 100 and 130 and you want your lye water between 100 and 110.

 Alright now you can see that our oils are completely clear and we have turned off our

 crock pot and removed the lid as soon as they were completely melted.

 Sometimes the stearic acid will look like it's still not melted and be sitting on the

 bottom, but if you just swirl it, sometimes it will just dissolve, but no matter what,

 it will definitely aid you in the dissolving and melting of your oils if you stir it from

 Alright so now we're going to use our stick blender and we're going to add our lye water.

 Now this one has the little cupped areas and we have to make sure that we keep the

 Some of them have little holes along the edge, so if you let one of those little holes or

 if you let the end of the wand come out from underneath the level of the oil, lye and water

 So please ensure that the end of your wand is at all times inside or beneath the level

 We want to blend this until it completely looks like a custard or a pudding consistency,

 predominantly vanilla pudding, and is completely and totally blended.

 Alright, once we see that it is firmly and completely blended, we'll tap off the excess

 the end of our stick blender and put it in our tray so that the active lye will not be

 And then we will place the lid on the crock pot and put our crock pot on low.

 The next phase is the gel phase and I'll bring you back for that and show you what to do.

 Alright, now we have entered gel phase and that basically just means sort of a thick

 custardy stage and we're starting to have some of the soap that's already came out of

 gel bubbling along the edges and we don't want a cork of a champagne bottle explosion

 occurred so what we're going to do is we're going to use the tic-tac-toe method and we're

 going to let the steam out, you might say, and dig a hole in the center.

 That allows for the pressure to be released and so just watch and as soon as it becomes

 firm do the tic-tac-toe method and pop a little bit out of the center and then I'll bring

 Okay, now our gel phase has started to dissolve into bubbling soap and so we're just going

 to break what is left of our gel, gelled soap, and move it into the hot bubbling soap to

 speed up the process of the gelled soap becoming a part of the process.

 Just speeds it up a touch just to spoon around in there and break up the rest of the gelled

 Then just clean your spoon, these little spatulas are so handy for that.

 Now we are going to cook this for one hour from the time in which we added the lye water

 Okay, now our soap has been cooking for one hour and we are just going to stir it liberally

 We're going to scrape down our spoon, clean our sides, and return our lid.

 For those of you just about to set foot on life all by yourself,

 or those that move into an apartment and need to use laundromats,

 here's a few quick tips on making your laundry go by pretty quick.

 One, always get a machine that's slightly larger than what you really need.

 Sometimes people will try to do a little joke and leave bleach in there and ruin your clothes.

 So before you ever use a machine, always check to be sure that is empty,

 One other idea is if there is a slight amount of bleach and it's the only machine you can use,

 or you just want to use it anyway, put a little bit of detergent in the bleach.

 That way you'll neutralize any potential bad effects that may occur.

 This part's being recorded prematurely because there are people here,

 because as you know, heat rises, and you want to use the one on the top,

 If you have a double stack like this, put your clothes in the top one,

 Since the dryer's not hermetically sealed, as the system is drying and the heating coils are turned on,

 air is sucked into this lower dryer to help feed more air to the upper dryer,

 and causing your clothes to dry that much faster or that much better.

 if you can crack the lint compartment ever so slightly, like a sixteenth of an inch or two millimeters,

 And those are my quick tips for those that might be starting out on their own or have went on to apartment life.

 Hi, here's Sneha from thebeautymagnes.com and in this tutorial I'll show you a homemade

 hair mask for soft, smooth and silky hair and also it adds volume to your hair and helps

 To prepare this homemade hair mask, you require is amla powder.

 So this is around half cup of amla powder and then you require is one egg and then yogurt,

 So if you have an intense dry hair and for deep conditioning you can use olive oil.

 Now once it is ready and you have achieved a smooth consistency, what you have to do

 is damp your hair and then apply and using a brush apply a thick coat of this paste.

 Cover each strand of your hair and also your scalp and cover it with a shower cap.

 And then let it sit for about 30 minutes and then wash off with cold water and followed

 And let me share with you the advantage of using this hair pack.

 This hair pack contains amla and amla is a great source of antioxidants and vitamin C

 It also prevents premature growing of hair and gives your hair a natural softness and

 So egg yolk, an egg it contains proteins, it is rich in proteins, vitamins and other

 vital nutrients that promote strong hair and makes your hair look more voluminous and adds

 And honey and olive oil, it deep moisturizes your hair and conditions them.

 And yogurt, it prevents your hair from dandruff and makes your hair smooth and soft.

 So thanks everyone for watching this video and for more such videos you can hit the subscribe

 And if you want more natural tips you can visit my site www.thebeautymaness.com and

I'll play you a little bit of this song and I'll teach it to you

 I need your love, I need your time, when everything's wrong, you make it right.

I need your love, I need your time, when everything's wrong, you make

 Creating in a very easy way multicolored cakes, that's what Tupperware Chessboard Insert

 seven large divisions that can hold sufficient cake dough to create one layer of a multitude

 Thanks to the hedged filling lines, it is very easy to fill dough.

 it is recommended to only fill until the top of the first filling line so that when cooking

 The chessboard insert has also two large handles to easily remove the insert from the preparation

 The chessboard insert does not go in the oven otherwise the product would melt.

 you will see a pictogram of an oven crust on the side of the chessboard insert.

 To create a chessboard cake, take the grid out of the oven and preheat your oven at 170

 Place the silicone baking form princess on the oven grid and the chessboard in the princess.

 After having prepared two different dough, for example chocolate and vanilla, begin to

 pour vanilla dough in the second ring compartments until it reaches the first filling line.

 Then take the chocolate dough and pour in the external and in the center rings also

 Take the handles to slowly lift up straight the chessboard insert from the preparation

 Wash and dry well the chessboard insert before doing the second and the third cake.

 The third cake will have the colors inverted, vanilla on the external and center rings and

 Once cooked, let cool down about 15 minutes before stacking the layers on top of each

 The chessboard cake can easily be transported in the expression by stackable.

 When you will cut the chessboard cake, a chessboard design will appear.

 You can also realize nice ice creams in mixing some fruits with sugar and cream.

 You can also create chessboard cakes with salty ingredients and put them in the fridge.

 The chessboard insert will color your life as you will easily impressed family and friends

 Hey YouTube, it's iTechMacBooks and in this video I'm going to be showing you how to use

 AirPlay on an iOS device, whether it be an iPod Touch, iPhone or iPad, and stream video

 First, what you want to do is download the link in the video description to get the AirPlayer

After you download it, just go ahead and install it and you are ready to

 It will take a couple seconds to load and then the AirPlay service will be ready to

So as you can see it has started and now we'll just go into our iOS device.

 my iPod Touch 4th generation, we'll select unlock and I'll just go ahead and hop onto

Now I'll stream one of my own videos so I don't get into any copyright issues.

 I'll just hit my Apple TV 2nd gen unboxing, hit play and I will just hit this and hit

 So as you can see I just paused it and it is playing on my computer, you can see right

So you can play the video, you can get out of it and you can multitask and all

 Hello YouTube, it is iTechMacBooks and today I'll be unboxing the 2nd generation 2010 Apple

So I'll just pause this and once again you can play the video back in full screen

 We're making a beautiful, delicious, healthy, green prawn and chicken and coconut curry

 has got finely cut ginger, juliennes of ginger and it's got some of this, lemongrass, okay.

 Coconut cream, be gentle with that, it's pretty rich and healthy.

 get ready because three minutes the meal will be ready, I promise you that.

Now, you can put the food on top of the rice and you can put the rice

 careful, don't touch your eyes and the best thing is to split them like I have and put

While you're cooking it, the heat will come out anyhow and if someone likes

Okay, that's cooking beautifully, prawns are nice and firm, they're

The chicken is beautiful, it's marinated in a bit of fish sauce and

 the mixture of lemongrass and coriander, coriander and fresh ginger and then I've got my capsicums

 flavour of the food has gone in the pan, it's holding the motion because it's very hot.

 pretty looking dish and you'll see the sauce builds up, it's perfect and some peanut oil,

 And today I'm going to show you some easy tips for making the perfect pie crust.

 When making your dough, you want to make sure your ingredients are as cold as possible to

 And then you're going to start cutting that shortening into the flour until you get large

 You can either use a food processor or mix by hand, but be sure to mix only until the

 At this point, I'm going to add two to three tablespoons of ice cold water, a tablespoon

 And if you get to this point and it still isn't that way, you can add just a little

 The next thing we want to do is to actually roll out the pie crust.

 So what you're going to do is sprinkle a little bit of flour on our work surface.

 We're going to then take our ball of dough, flatten it out into a disc, place that down

 on your floured board, put a little bit of flour on your rolling pin.

 And this is so that the rolling pin doesn't stick to the dough or to the surface.

 And then starting from the center, you want to roll out until you get a nice circle that

 is two to three inches larger than the circumference of your pie plate.

 You put your rolling pin on the crust, lift it up from the edges, gently drape it over

 And then when ready, just place the rolling pin and the crust on top of the pie plate

 Once you have the pie crust in the pie plate, then you shape or crimp the edges to your

 I like to do the scalloped edge where you are pinching the crust between the side of

 Now that we have the pie crust made, we're ready to put our filling in.

 Today I'm making chocolate pecan pie and you can find that recipe on Hershey'sKitchens.com.

 It's a wonderful pie made with Hershey's cocoa and it's very easy.

 You simply mix the ingredients together and pour into your pie shell and bake.

 Follow these easy steps and you'll be a pie making pro in no time.

 Go to www.hersheyishoops.com for all of your pastry supplies needs!

 This is a dial song tutorial for the move called the backhand screwdriver.

 So I'll just show it to you in normal speed and then I'll show it to you in slow motion.

 Alright so you just saw the slow motion replay of the move and this move is pretty hard to

 So that's why I gave you the slow motion replay and hopefully that should help with

 learning the move but I'll just try my hardest to break it down.

 And so I like to start off at a 45 degree angle holding it and then I will throw the

 So I throw it out down there and then once the handle gets up around there, the bite

 So my index finger and my thumb will turn it like a screwdriver and then I rock it back

 So the bite handle goes out right there then I turn it and then I rock it back and then

 So this time you're throwing out the other handle and the blade, 45 degree angle, throw

 Everything in a Godmorgan series has this white kind of glossy applique stuff on the

 particle board and that's to make it water resistant, steam resistant in a wet environment.

 You would also use this when I talk about the off-grid camper stuff and all that.

 going to spend close to a half hour peeling the blue protective tape off of all of the

 of the things you have to look out for is that the holes that you put these little turn

 locks in and the holes that you put the pegs in are exactly the same size which can lead

So again you might want to still refer to the instruction manual but I'm also

 a lot of internal shelves some of which are the wood, some of which are glass.

 even unpack the glass shelves until after this thing's already in where it's going to go.

 need this thing to have reduced weight when you're moving it around and getting it in place.

 put the pegs in place at you know some logical locations but again there's a little adjustability

But we don't really want to put those things in until this thing is installed on the

It's in place basically like I said you got to be careful because the pegs

 and the turn lock anchors are going to fit in holes that are the same size.

 only no pegs and then of course at the bottom it's going to be the same.

So there's going to be one set here that is exactly in the center corresponds to a single

These things I think depending on the orientation of the front door

 relatively normal fashion and the back has to be done at the same time because it gets pinched

Straight to final touches we've got these little things which go in the back to

 basically reinforce the rigidness on the rear piece and then they'll just get screwed in number

When we look at the front sorry about the camera view changing but this

 thing can set up with either right or left side opening and because the decision hasn't been

 finalized on how the bathroom is going to go with that I install everything on the door.

 door handle pull that gets installed with number one PH screws.

So they would only go in these and the end user can change that at

But generally the way this thing is engineered glass goes on the upper the wood goes

This thing's the same right side up or upside down but what would determine right

 side up is when you get this middle shelf in the little turn locks you really don't want those to

So they're up underneath so I decided to flip this this way and and work it like that.

We're not going to install the door at this stage in the game because

 it's it adds a lot of weight to this when it's getting put in but the the pegs are all here for

 the shelves to be installed at a later time and it'll be all ready to go.

 So this is the IKEA Got Morgan bathroom stuff as far as the assembly side goes.

 other people putting it into the bathroom but the assembly side on this is a little bit deceptively

I didn't think this would take a full hour but it does and this one full an hour and a half

 there is a little gap in space where you could insert the tire tube right there.

 Okay so just keep sliding it until it's in the middle and what you have to do

 Okay make sure it's locked and then you could also attach the locking

 Hello, it's Kristen and today I'm going to make homemade protein bars.

 I actually had to get this flavor vanilla cream because they didn't have the flavor I usually get.

 I usually get plain vanilla and I don't really like this one as much.

 That's actually why I chose to make the protein bars instead of having it in a shake because I don't really like the flavor as much.

 You could use dried apples, dried cranberries, even apricots or something, prunes.

 You just have to chop them up and make them small enough that they can go into the bars.

 Then, you're going to put it, once it's all blended, you're going to spread it on the bottom of the pan.

 I will show you what they look like in a later video because it's going to take me a while to blend this.

 If lamb has always been that thing that was rammed down your throat as a child and you've never been able to face it since,

 They taste absolutely sublime and you'll be wanting lamb every Sunday after you've tried these bad boys.

 2 lamb shanks, 2 tablespoons of tomato puree, 2 onions, 2 garlic cloves, 2 carrots, 2 sprigs of rosemary,

 1 beef stock cube, 1 bay leaf, 1 tablespoon of plain flour, 200ml of red wine and some oil to fry.

 Okay, so we're going to begin by preparing our onion and garlic.

 Starting with the onions, slice the ends off, slice them in half, peel them and then finely chop.

 Now get your garlic cloves and again, slice the ends off, peel them and then roughly chop them.

 Now get your 2 carrots, slice the ends off and then using a vegetable peel, peel the skin off.

 Now get yourself a large casserole dish that has a lid and then stick it on the heat and pour in some oil.

 Let it heat up and then throw in your onions, your garlic and your carrots, along with the lamb shanks.

 Now stir the contents of your casserole for about 10 minutes, allowing the vegetables to fry and the lamb to seal and begin to turn brown.

 When your lamb shanks look something like this, you need to carefully remove them from the casserole and then put them aside.

 So we're now going to make the sauce which your lamb is going to be cooking in.

 So back to the casserole and throw in your 1 tablespoon of plain flour, your 2 tablespoons of tomato puree and then crumble in your beef stock cube.

 Briefly stir in the contents of your casserole and don't worry if things are starting to stick at the bottom

 Also throw in the leaves of your 2 sprigs of rosemary and then give everything in the pan a quick stir.

 Then get yourself some water to top up the sauce just a little bit.

 Then give everything a good stir to make sure the shanks have been covered in the sauce.

 Once you're happy, you then need to bring the pan up to simmering point and then stick the lid on the casserole.

 Put it in the oven for between 1.5 and 2 hours, making sure you keep an eye on it whilst it's cooking.

 After the cooking time, really carefully remove the casserole from the oven and then take the lid off.

 Have a look at the lamb shanks and if you feel that the sauce needs thickening up slightly,

 remove the shanks from the casserole and then wrap them in foil.

 This will help them to keep warm whilst we thicken up the sauce.

 So with the lamb shanks resting away, put the casserole back on the hob and stir it over a high heat until the sauce thickens up nicely.

 When you're happy with it, remove the sauce from the hob, take the lamb shanks out of the foil and then serve them up on a plate.

 And there you have it, really tasty lamb shanks in just a few simple steps.

 And you can check out more of my recipes by clicking on one of the videos coming up on the screen.

 Hi, my name is Esperanza and I'm going to be demonstrating how to make a duct tape notebook.

 Now, the utensils you are going to be needing are the stapler, scissors, and of course, duct tape.

 The color recommended is white because that is the color of regular paper.

 So, you're going to grab the duct tape, about 5 inches, and you're going to fold it in half.

 Okay, and then after you've done that about 8 times, 8 to 10 times, you're going to have them be kind of like this.

 And then, to make the cover for the notebook, you're going to take another color of about 4 times the size of those.

 And then you're going to be folding each of the sides to the middle.

 And then you're going to put it in the middle and then fold it over, kind of like that.

 And then you're going to get the stapler and staple the sides down.

 And then after you've done that, you've got yourself a duct tape notebook.

 solves your deburring and surface finishing problems with a variety of abrasive types,

 grits, and sizes available, including both standard and heavy-duty honing tool

 flexible honing tool has become the industry standard, using a flexible

 honing process to provide superior surface finish on any base material.

 They are unlike any other honing tool because they produce an unmatched controlled

 surface condition for all the surfaces of your engine block, heads,

 The surface of a typical engine cylinder has sharp ridges with torn and

 or rebuilt motor, it will deglaze the cylinder and leave its surface with 20-40%

 When you need a short, compact tool for finishing and deburring, try one of their

 in a wide range of grits and abrasive types to provide an excellent surface finish

 You'll want to use a variable speed drill or a drill press and be sure to check

 out your owner's manual to determine the speed range and adjust accordingly.

 Their Flex Hone Tools require lubricant, so before you get to work,

 generously lubricate the tool with 10-30 weight motor oil or use BRM's

 The cylinder hone can be used in a variety of applications including deglazing,

 surface finishing, and deburring of any type or size of cylinder.

 Stroke rate should be accelerated for the last few strokes to ensure a positive crosshatch

 Flex Honing, the next critical step is to thoroughly clean the cylinders.

 Clean each cylinder using hot soapy water and use a soft cleaning brush to scrub the cylinder

Then dry the walls with a lint-free cloth and continue until the

 BRM's Flex Hone is a flexible cylinder honing tool used for surface finishing and

 BRM also offers a complete line of automotive brushes to handle the cleaning

 provide helpful information on selecting tool diameter, grit and abrasive types,

 You don't want to soak them because they'll suck up that water like a sponge and that's

 Spread a little bit of oil along the skewer and no matter what your kebab it, it'll slide

 Leaving on this little bit of stem can mean the difference between your mushroom staying

 A little room between each one so the smoky flavor can get into every bite.

 Sage leaves, one on top of the other, rolled up like this and then sliced to make little

 And then you can just keep chopping and chopping until you're satisfied.

 Take a few extra run-throughs with that knife and take the time to get a nice even chop.

 Now we'll pour a little olive oil into a dish and brush it lightly all over the mushrooms.

 Use high quality extra virgin olive oil so you get a nice clean flavor.

 All I'm doing here is sprinkling on some salt and then some pepper and finally we'll sprinkle

 These go outside to the grill and let me tell you what happens.

 These freshly chopped herbs will toast up and give the most delicate crispiness to each

 These are fabulous with our Colossal Bratwitches and are the perfect way to turn a simple brat

 This is something that always makes me feel a little bit sad at the grocery store.

It's a disemboweled turkey breast sitting next to the full glorious full bird.

 The people sit there and they scoff and laugh at the turkey breast.

 Or the single loser motherfucker that's trying to have a Thanksgiving meal all by himself.

 With his turkey breast, his stove top stuffing, and his frozen peas.

 Turkey breast is fucking awesome as long as you fucking make it right.

 And I'm going to show you how to motherfucking smoke the best turkey breast you ever fucking had.

 The first thing you want to do with this turkey breast is get it all nice and rubbed up.

 Then you want to go out and put it on your grill for a nice little bit of indirect low and slow grilling.

 When you're smoking any meat, you want to open up your smoker as few times as possible.

 I'm just going to give you a quick little shot of the fire here.

 I do have to apologize a little bit for this day's cooking show.

 I didn't show the finished product because the second I brought the motherfucker into the house,

 Follow these simple rules and you can cook you and yours a fucking absolute delicious turkey breast.

 I guarantee you, if you have a relative you want to upstage at a family Thanksgiving dinner,

I guarantee you'll upstage his fucking sorry ass roast turkey every fucking Thanksgiving.

 Today we're going to go over how to set up your file for die cutting using Adobe Illustrator

 Now I have a sticker here that we're going to be doing, but this procedure is going to

 Be that stickers, postcards, business cards, any of that will all be the same setup.

 Now we see we have our sticker with a black outline here, and this outline is what I want

 We don't want to print that, we want to just go ahead and die cut out in that shape.

 So I'm going to go ahead and select that path and find it over in my layers, and now that

 I have that, I'm actually going to move that onto a separate layer just to isolate it from

 the rest of the artwork so that we can turn it on and off and we see that that is distinct

 Now we can go ahead and once again select the path, and we want to create a new swatch

 for this stroke, and I'm going to make it just an obnoxious color that way we know that

 We'll create a new swatch, and we'll name this die line, and set it to be a spot color,

 So now we have the die line set to this spot color on a separate layer, and we're going

 So we go to save as, and we're going to save an Adobe PDF, and then for this project and

 most things you can save out of Illustrator, just use the defaults for the PDF dialogs,

 and that will put all of the bleeds and marks in there for you.

 If you are in Illustrator CS4, in document setup here, there will actually be a setting

 So we have that saved out now, and we can go ahead and now open it in Acrobat just to

 We've got our green die line all here just set to a spot color, and now your file should

 Today I'm going to show you how to make pineapple upside down cake in a mug.

 This nifty little single serve dessert is perfect when you're looking for something

 Maybe it's just you by yourself, maybe it's the middle of summer and you don't want to

 It's just a regular size coffee cup but make sure that it is glass because you're going

 I've just got two tablespoons of firmly packed white brown sugar.

 You don't want to pack it down in the bottom of the mug, just kind of let it fluff there.

 You want to add one pineapple ring on top of that that's been drained fairly well and

 Now because this is just an individual serving, I'm not going to use an entire egg.

 I'm just going to crack the egg into that bowl and using a fork, I'm just going to

 whisk this together because we're not going to use the whole thing.

 Then in a medium sized bowl, I'm going to add in a quarter cup of all purpose or plain

 flour as well as two tablespoons of granulated sugar, an eighth of a teaspoon of salt and

 Using a whisk, I'm just going to whisk these ingredients together.

 Then I'm going to add in two tablespoons of the pineapple juice that is reserved from

 You could also use canola oil or melted butter if you wanted to.

 Also going to add in one tablespoon of that beaten up egg and I'm also going to add in

 Again using my whisk, I'm just going to whisk this together until it is mixed well.

 You don't want to go over beating this because that's going to end up with a tough cake.

 And now you want to take that cake mix and you want to pour that directly on top of the

 Using a spatula, just make sure and scrape all that goodness out of the bowl.

 And then you want to cook this in your microwave for two minutes and thirty seconds at fifty

 percent power for a microwave that's between a thousand and eleven hundred watts.

 Then you want to go ahead and remove your cake from the microwave and it should be done.

 You might want to use a toothpick to check the center, make sure that it's not doughy,

 And I usually let this sit for about thirty seconds before I do this.

 And then using a spoon or a spatula, again make sure and get all of that brown sugar

 There is your single serve pineapple upside down cake in a mug.

 And this is going to rival any pineapple upside down cake that you have ever had.

 Subscribe for more deliciousness and to keep up to date on all my latest videos.

 We'll have, saute it in olive oil, add some chili and garlic and we will have a pleasantly

 We can eliminate the chili, substitute it with a vegetable season and you won't have

 Once the garlic turns golden brown, then we go ahead and we'll add the zucchini.

 First time you make it, you may want to put in half the amount of chili and then next

 If you add a larger zucchini, keep the same amount of chili, you'll cut back on the chili

 When it gets to the point that you can put a fork in it, gently, it's done.

 Once you have it at this point, all you have to do is take it and put it over the pasta

 of your choice, top it with parmesan and then decorate it to give it a little color.

 The more chili, the more red you'll have for that red background.

 We have more details on this and we have some other fun recipes.

The first one is going to be Margaery Tyrell, or Tyrell as I've heard it pronounced

 on the show, and the second of course is going to be Daenerys Targaryen.

 back and looking at old episodes and just picking apart different hairstyles that I

 screen name as the one I have now, except with an extra 3 on the end.

 to make a short vlog video about it just to let you know why I'm doing this, what my new

 video making schedules will be for that channel and for this channel.

 to say too much more about it, but I'm going to put a link in the underbar and in the video,

 my videos because you like the Game of Thrones hairstyles that I do with Heather, and I think

 that when season 3 starts, Heather and I actually do have plans to do the hairstyles together

But I'm going to be putting all of my new Game of Thrones season 3 hair

So again, I will have a link at the bottom, and I hope that if you

 like watching my videos and you like me, you will check it out and possibly subscribe.

So the Margaery Tyrell hair is from a scene during which Brienne

 clip of that episode and that particular scene, so you can check out her hair if you want

 split your hair into two pieces, two strands, you twist them both to the left, and then

 twist, which is a little looser, and since her twists looked a little looser than like

 twisting them together, and it does kind of give that rope braided effect, but it's a

 twist all the way to the bottom, and you're going to do that also on the other side.

 If you choose to do twists like I've done, you'll notice that as soon as you finish tying

 them off, and you drop them, they kind of unravel, or they untwist a little bit.

So it gives you that sort of twisted together hair look, like a rope braid,

 but a little bit more loose, and I guess a little closer to what I saw in that scene.

 For the next part of the hairstyle, you're going to need to choose a hair clip to kind

I've got two here that I could show you, and the reason I picked

 them is because they have these sort of clampy clips, and I feel like they hold really well

 you're going to do is instead of pulling your braids back tightly and centering them at

 the middle of your head like you probably would if you were doing princess braids or

 something, you are going to drape them so that they hang like that, and then- and then

 pin them up higher on your head, so it causes this sort of drape effect.

 For Dani's hair, you're going to do kind of the same thing, except that there's a little

 a video on her Carth braids, which I will link here and also in the information bar

The only things that I am going to use are probably, again, some hair elastics,

 maybe some bobby pins this time, and I have this mini three-barrel hair curler, crimper

 thing, which I have been dying to use in a video because this is really cool.

 divide your hair into sections to crimp them as you would if you were using a curling iron.

 Instead of going all the way down, though, the whole length of the strand and doing the

 twist, I'm going to take a section of hair here and lift it up.

 rope twisty here and just take a bobby pin and pin it underneath that section of hair.

 Now I'm just going to let that hair fall on top of the bobby pins.

It's kind of similar, I guess, in the sense that they're both twists

 In the information bar below, you'll find a link to my new channel.

 a link to my Game of Thrones hair ideas playlist for this channel and a link to the new playlist

 be obviously all Game of Thrones stuff that I'm going to put there.

 got two, I guess, random videos and two Game of Thrones videos.

 going to be uploading all of my Game of Thrones season 3 hair ideas onto that channel.

 I hope you'll take a minute and check it out and possibly subscribe.

 to sharing all my reasons why I've started a new channel in an upcoming vlog video.

 When I wrote my complete vegetarian cookbook 20 years ago, it was a challenge to raise

 Today I'm going to cook a dish from my new complete vegetarian cookbook.

 cakes are easy to make and they're delicious with some chili roasted asparagus.

 Celsius or gas mark 6 and I'll start by draining two cans of haricot or cannellini beans and

 taste and I also like to add some red Thai paste, look out for a vegetarian one, and

 a few crumbled lime leaves to give the bean cakes some extra zing.

 So with all the ingredients in the bowl, you add some salt and pepper, going in now, grinding

 a pepper, and then you mash them quite thoroughly to a chunky mixture.

 With your hands, form eight cakes and flatten them into a nice round shape.

 drizzle with olive oil and roast in the oven for about seven minutes.

 on each side, so you can do this while the asparagus is roasting.

 So I've got my roasted asparagus here and I'm just going to arrange it over the bean

And now I'm going to tear over some coriander for the finishing touch.

 And there you have it, my really easy Thai bean cakes with chili roasted asparagus.

 Hello Ukulele Undergraduates, I'm Eldrine Guerrero and welcome to another episode of

 Alright folks, this time on Uke Minutes we're going to be showing you the beginner's guide

 So for example if we have Mary had a little lamb, you want to simplify the strumming pattern

 Now once you're used to singing that song with a simple strumming pattern, you want

 So for example you want to add some up strums to those down strums.

 So instead of just down, down, down to your quarter notes, you want to add down, up, down,

 So just continue on that path until you get to the strumming pattern that you want.

 So later on you might want to add some chunks and some intricate strumming patterns here

 Alright folks, remember, start out with a simplified rhythm patterns and work your way

 up because a simplified rhythm patterns is going to help you get used to the lyrics and

 This is all Dream Guerrero for Ukulele On The Ground.com signing off.

 Hi this is an overview video for Magic Clamp 7 inch and 11 inch.

 Hi I'm Mick Sadler and today we're going to look at the Magic Clamps, we've got a 7 inch

We're going to take the 7 inch first and on the end is a male quarter thread

 which will go in any direction you like so I've got an angle and it will stand up.

 end is a push clamp and this is ideal for a monitor or for a light and it will just slip on

We can unscrew this so if we unscrew that head off we get left with a quarter female thread

 inch and again the top you can put in any position you like and obviously the arm.

 central knob which you can tighten, once you tighten that central knob that tightens the clamp

 it tightens the ends to the position you've got so those ends are now solid so with that you can

So with that we have the 15 millimeter rod clamp and again this is clamps

 on stand of 15 millimeter tubes and as a clamp that end, this end you have a quarter thread just

 is will clamp onto any item very big that's nearly two inches so this crab clamp will clamp onto a

 tripod, onto a light stand, onto a table anything and in the end there we've got a quarter female

 thread and a 3 8 female thread so again the magic clamp will screw into that and other things will

 Yeah, hey, um, I'mma show you how I lace my sevens right now, alright?

 I know I said I don't tie my shoes, but I only tie my sevens and my ones.

I don't know what numbers y'all want me to lace up, so let me know.

Uh, LeBrons, I got like all LeBron numbers, so you let me know what number you want for that.

I don't know if I got any more of them, but I'mma check it out and see.

And I tie my little bunny ears right here, cause this is hair, you know what I'm saying?

 So, first thing I do, I lace my shoes when I get them, like that.

 Make sure I have no twists in it to keep your shoelaces clean, so make sure you wash your hands before you do it.

 So, just make sure you trace it back down, get all the twisties out, so that way it can be good to go.

 And once you put them on your feet, it'll look like, it'll be good.

 If not, I'll come up with another seven way I lace it, because I do go up to here.

 If anything, I'll probably go one more eyelet up and let them hang.

 If it's too loose up here, you don't like the way it looks, tighten them up by pulling it.

 So once you put them on your feet, you know exactly the way you want it to do it.

 Every Jordan has this little way of letting you know what number it is.

 It's really a bigger 8 up there on the, like right here in the middle.

 You know, it's kind of with little hidden silhouettes like that that you'll see.

 Hi, I'm Chloe and today I'm going to show you how to make a traditional English trifle.

 Trifle is a wonderful dessert because it looks very elegant, tastes delicious, and my secret,

 You might use yours for layered salads, same kind of idea with our dessert.

 For my trifle bowl, it takes me one and a half of these family size frozen pound cakes.

 And you're going to start out by putting about half of your pound cake cubes into the trifle

 Then your next step is going to be to add about half of your fruit.

 I like to use canned blackberries in light syrup, but if you can't find a canned fruit

 If you use a frozen fruit, you're going to want to put it in a bowl on the kitchen counter,

 add a half a cup of sugar, and let it sit there overnight so that you have enough juice

 I'm getting a lot of juice here, so then after I've coated all of this pound cake with some

 And you're going to spread those around so that there's going to be some in every spoonful

 Now that I've put in half of my pound cake and half of my berries, I'm going to add just

 a little bit of the sherry to make sure some of it gets to the bottom.

 And then I'll add the rest when I've got the rest of my ingredients in.

 Okay, now we're going to add the rest of the pound cake, filling your dish.

 You're going to want to leave a little space at the top because we're going to finish this

 And now I'm going to add the rest of the berries and the juice.

 I like to use Bird's Custard Powder, which you can, it's a product from the United Kingdom.

 If you can't find custard powder, you can always substitute vanilla pudding, but custard

 I'm going to take a bowl and add two tablespoons of our custard powder, two tablespoons of

 And we're going to put two cups of milk in a measuring cup, and I've taken two tablespoons

 We're going to stir this until it makes a paste, and when it's made a nice creamy paste,

 Stir it well, and then I'm going to put this in the microwave for six minutes, stirring

 We're going to go back to our trifle dish, add the remaining sherry, spreading it, again,

 over the whole dessert, and then we're just going to pour the custard powder, or the custard,

 right over top, and let it get in there to all those empty spaces.

 I don't know about you, but I think this is looking pretty yummy right now.

 Now I'm going to pop this in the refrigerator for at least an hour, and you can leave it

 My family tells me it always tastes better the second day, but I'm going to put this

 After your trifle's been in the refrigerator for at least an hour, or right before you're

 going to serve it, you're going to take some whipped cream that you've either prepared

 yourself, or if you want to do it the really easy way, buy some already prepared whipped

 cream, whipped topping, and put it in a Ziploc bag, and then you're just going to go around

 You're going to cut a little corner off of your Ziploc bag, fill it with your whipped

 cream, and just make the top really pretty for your presentation.

 Like I said, don't get rid of it after the first day if it doesn't all get eaten.

 And you can make it with the blackberries, you can make it with blueberries, you can

 put all kinds of chocolate things in a trifle and make a chocolate trifle.

 Basically, it's a layered dish that you use some kind of a cake or cookie-like product

 in and then top it with something like a chocolate pudding if you were doing a chocolate one.

 Hello there everybody, tonight we are making a cheese candy special.

 Be sure to add a little extra virgin olive oil instead of butter.

 Now, Brandon is putting one large bottle of salsa medium into a bowl.

 Now we're gonna add one teaspoon of ground cumin to our sour cream, salsa, and cream of mushroom mix.

 And because I am an expert chef, I don't even need to measure this.

 Gives it a nice little spice on the back end of your taste buds there.

 Right now we have just mixed our onions and bell peppers into our roasted chicken that we bought from the store.

 It's that pre-cooked chicken that you buy at the store and then you just come home and tear everything off the bone, throw it in a bowl, and then you drop in your onions and bell pepper.

 That's right, our cream sauce mixture, we're gonna add a little dash of pepper, a little dash of salt.

 Now we're gonna coat the pan with just a little layer of this sauce.

 So, it's ten minutes prior to taking the final dish out, and we topped it with cheese.

 Hello everyone, welcome back to another episode of Vanessa's Crazy Cooking

 Today I'm going to show you how to make my recipe for baked zucchini sticks

 Okay so you'll need a few zucchinis, some grated Romano or grated Parmesan cheese,

 salt and pepper, a couple of eggs, both the egg whites and egg yolks, some Italian bread

 Okay so the first thing you're going to do is you're going to take your eggs and salt

 and pepper and you're going to beat these together until each is fully incorporated

 Okay so we're going to set these aside and then you're going to take your Italian bread

 crumbs and your grated cheese and just mix these together until you can't see the cheese

 Okay so we're going to set this aside as well and then using our knife you're going

 to take each of your zucchinis and cut them into about 3 inch long sticks

 So obviously cut off the ends and then you want to keep the skin on but make sure they're

 cut it in half, and then I cut it in half this way and then cut it in half this way

 Okay so at this point you should have your oven preheated to 375 degrees Fahrenheit and

 now what you're going to do is take each individual zucchini stick and first dip it in the egg

 mixture and you can use your utensil to guide you, so fully coat in the egg mixture and

 And then after you're done with that you're going to place it on your cookie sheet and

 do that to all of our zucchini sticks Okay so I have finished coating all of my

 zucchini sticks, as you can see it makes quite a few, 3 zucchinis makes a lot of zucchini sticks

 So right now you're going to bake them for about 20-25 minutes or until they're nice and golden

 brown and crispy on the outside and then it's time for the taste test

 Okay so our zucchini sticks have finished baking and they're nice and crispy on the top and

 They're really good and so much better than any fried food, so much better to bake things

 It's really good and nice and crispy and you can get the recipe on my website which I will

 leave a link to down below in the description box so make sure you get it, you print it and

 you make them because they are so incredibly simple and you might already have these ingredients

 around your house So I hope you enjoyed this recipe and watching me make it so make sure

 you visit my website and don't be afraid to get crazy in the kitchen I'll see you next time, bye!

 Hello, this is saxophonist Greg Fishman and welcome to the Greg Fishman Jazz Studio's

 This is our second month and this month we've been working on the Waveland Avenue Etude

 I'm just going to play the piece down just so you can kind of check out the articulation

 This is the idea of tonguing the upbeat and slurring into the downbeat and this is pretty

 much what I'm using, not 100% of the time because sometimes I do like to tongue a downbeat

 but most of the time when I have moving eighth notes this is what I use.

 Remember correctly this is measures 13 through 15 of the piece and in that 15th measure with

 See, because when you tongue that D, if you miss the next note, if you miss the F, that's

 So practice doing it like that even if you have to slow it down like that just to get

 Now one kind of funny thing I did when I was a kid to practice this, I would sometimes

 do this game where I would say, okay I'm just going to do 100% wrong.

 So I'm going to tongue all the downbeats, not the upbeats, just so my ear can really

 hear a clear difference between the right way and the wrong way.

 It feels so strange to play it like that, but that's tonguing the downbeats.

 Notice how much more easily it flows when I tongue the upbeats.

 So this is really good if people are having trouble getting the feeling of what it's like

 to tongue the upbeats, tongue all the downbeats so you can feel that and then you just feel

 This is sort of the equivalent of going into like a really cold swimming pool and then

 a really hot swimming pool and not this middle ground where it's sort of part in between.

 It's kind of like a hot and cold type of difference to approach practicing it like

 So what I'd like you to do this week, you can pick any stream of eighth notes, anything

 where you have continuous eighth notes for maybe two measures to four measures.

 Practice it both ways and ultimately you're going to want the one where you're tonguing

 the upbeats, but if you want to customize it once you can do that, that's cool.

 All I'm saying is first get it with the basic mainstream tonguing and then you can experiment

 and add a little bit more aggressive tonguing style if you like.

 I'm going to be showing you how to clean the MAF sensor on a Toyota Sienna with a 3.3 liter.

 First you're going to need some form of quick dry electronic cleaner.

 In this case I'm using a ratchet with a quarter inch socket and then a bit.

 And up on top are two screws right there and on the other side that need to come out.

 So I'll take those out and then I'll show you what's in the inside.

 And that's done by grabbing right here on a tab, pushing down and pulling back.

 It's easier to do I think with the screws still in because there's some resistance.

 You can see in the inside, not a lot of anything except right there.

 There's a clear picture of the sensor that you'll need to clean with your MAF sensor

 And this cleaner is so quick drying that you don't have to worry about anything.

 To mention, while spraying off the sensor itself, don't touch it.

 I don't have a before and after shot because I've already cleaned it one time a couple

 But when I did clean it, it was unbelievable the amount of extra power that there was.

 It was no longer that sienna hesitation that everyone complains about.

 Our van has about 100,000 miles on and it's actually better than the day we bought it

 The Cruster Stun Electro Stunner is the first and only machine specially designed for the

 swift and compassionate killing of crabs, lobsters and other shellfish for the table.

 Presently various methods of killing are used and some even recommended by top chefs.

 This means gouging out the two brain centres of the crab, not an easy or pleasant task

 For lobsters the most usual method is to cook them alive by dropping them into a pot of

 Alternatively they can be killed by cutting in half longitudinally so as to destroy their

 These methods require skill, not easy to achieve and are by no means instantaneous.

 Unlike vertebrates which have their brain housed in their head, the 13 nerve centres

 which start in the head from just behind the eyes and extend the length of the body form

 Simply piercing behind the eyes or cutting off the head of the lobster will not kill

 Other methods include the tearing of the animal's limbs whilst alive and cooking the severed

 part separately or tearing the head from the body whilst alive as is done with lobsters,

 crayfish and longustine and simply throwing the head away in the sea or the kitchen dustbin.

 The cruster stun is made of marine grade stainless steel and is about the size of a domestic

 There are markings on the side of the tank which show the level to which it should be

 The blue sponge which covers the top electrode must be kept wet.

 The sponge which needs to be cleaned on a daily basis conforms to the shape of the crab

 or lobster's shell and by its saturation with the saline electrolyte ensures a constant

 The scoop attached to the front of the lid simply picks up the dissolved saline solution

 in the tank and pours it to the back of the sponge once the lid is opened.

 With the crab, lobster, crayfish or longustine on the sprung steel tray, the lid is closed.

 At the touch of a button at the front, the current is delivered by the top electrode

 Cruster stun is the only truly humane method of killing crustaceans.

 It is quick and produces a better product in terms of flavour, meat quality and microbial

 A lobster or crab which is being boiled alive is subject to stress and will produce its

 An animal whose exposure to stress is less than half a second will produce virtually

 In this enlightened 21st century, there can be no doubt that the only way forward is the

 Welcome back to my kitchen and today I'm going to make chicken do piazza.

 And here I have two medium onions, thinly sliced, a tomato, and here I have a teaspoon

 of salt, two teaspoons of coriander powder, one fourth teaspoon of garam masala, half

 a teaspoon of red chili or cayenne pepper, and of course I'll have one teaspoon of ginger

Here I have five tablespoons of oil in the pressure cooker and now it is

 The next step is I have to cook down all the yogurt till the masala turns grainy and you don't see the thick gravy which you see right now.

 It's going to take about eight minutes to cook all the water out.

 So you can see all the water from yogurt, chicken has been evaporated completely.

 That tells me that it is ready for the next step which is the final step.

I'm going to put about 3-4th cup of water just to cook the onions a little bit more and chicken.

 And then I'm going to open the pressure cooker again and dry out the water.

 And once the pressure is built, I'm going to put it on simmer and let it cook for 4 minutes.

So it's going to take another 5 minutes to cook all the water down.

As you can see, it's really simple dish to make but it's really delicious, I'm telling you.

 Hello, this is Jacob Bennett, and today we'll be teaching you how to do the 180 pivot.

 Okay, first of all, you're going to have to have your front foot on the nose,

 and your back foot in about the middle of the board, so shoulder width apart.

 When you're doing this trick, you don't want your foot to be too close,

 and you don't want it too much at the end, because you're not going to go all the way.

 When you're doing this trick, you really want to swing your arms,

 So your back foot's going to be in the middle of the board if you have a tan-tan,

 And, yeah, don't put it too close, like I said, because you won't have any balance,

 and don't put it there, because then you're not going to finish the trick.

 So, yeah, then just swing your arms, and you'll get the trick pretty soon.

 Hi, I'm Chan McCarunza, Category Manager for Pine Wine and Good Spirits, bringing you November's

 Last month, we used Liquor 43 to sweeten our Hobnob Wicked Red Punch, but today we're going

 Because it has a lower proof than most vodkas used in those flavored martinis, this cocktail

 that is dessert and cream based is going to be much more approachable for your guests

 The second product that we're using today is our Berenson Apple Liqueur.

 Now this is made of all natural ingredients distilled of 100% winter wheat and is flavored

 to the taste of red apples, giving it a nice, light, crisp taste.

 All we're going to do is take our cocktail shaker with ice, we're going to add 2 ounces

 of our Liquor 43, then we're going to add 2 ounces of our Berenson Apple Liqueur, and

 But if you would like, you can also instead add an ounce of a French Vanilla Creamer of

 This is going to give it more of an apple pie, a la mode kind of taste and it's going

 The final thing we need to do is add just a dash of our cinnamon into the cocktail shaker

 Now what I did over here is I did rim one of our martini glasses with a combination

 We're going to pour our cocktail in there and then for that final garnish, all that

 You can find this recipe and more at FineWineAndGoodSpirits.com.

 Okay, so while that's cooling, ten minutes of cooling, there's no light, I found out

 that there was a short in the switch and so it could have had a house fire possibly, the

 There's a switch right over here, you can see it, that turns the light on and off.

 burn like the past week or so, couldn't figure out what it was, that's what it was, so I

 in there cooling down, it's got probably another five minutes or so.

So we have here, we're gonna need, it's three-fourths a cup of water, two tablespoons

 slices, in your juice that you're cooking, your water, your sauce, whatever you want

 probably won't use the end pieces here, but we can candy them anyway because they taste

 I'll probably have one more video with everything together that'll go on the cheesecake video.

So like, subscribe, comment on this one, share it with your friends.

 you on one of the other two of the lemon curd or the cheesecake video.

 is just to be in long range as you move into range of exchanges

 and the jab comes, I'm just going to parry the jab, you know where the target is,

 the target is your face, and from there, following that jab back,

 Another simple tactic is using sticky hands, which is a Thai technique, okay.

 waiting for that jab and as that jab comes, I want to tuck my chin into my shoulder because a lot of

 times what follows that jab is that overhand right or that straight right hand and I want to extend by

 lead hand to smother my opponent's hands or stick my hands to my opponent's hands and then follow

 pulling on this underhook, he's got to adjust and step around my leg.

 A lot of small bones in your hands and feet, just one big bone there.

A lot of times I don't like to wait for my opponent to punch me.

 I want to be aggressive, I want to be the guy trying to hit him.

 and that allows me that split second that he stops moving to transition to the clinch

I do that by throwing power at him, throwing my overhand right or straight right

 hand at his head, getting him to cover and stop moving his feet and follow that right

So again, in your boxing stance as you move into that range of exchanges,

 for transitioning through that exchange range to get the clinch and smother your opponent.

 So now that we can transition through that range of exchanges and get to the clinch,

 let's take a look at a few options once we get to the clinch to take a guy down or score.

This exercise looks a little like swimming on dry land where I'm just concentrating

 You can use other noodle that is dry, but you have to cook it first.

 Like in Hong Kong, we pinch the bean sprout, the top of the bean sprout.

 With bean sprout, sometimes you don't cook it through and through, it tastes funny.

 In a more upscale restaurant in Hong Kong, they usually pinch it.

 I don't put the whole lump in it because I don't want it to stick together.

 Dark soy you can put a little bit more, it doesn't really matter because it's not that salty.

 Gonna let these marinate overnight, about 9 o'clock at night, and we're gonna put them

 I'm a little embarrassed that the canopy is taller than my pit smokestack, but anyway

 What we're gonna do is we're gonna take this brisket that we put on the marinade, and we're

 I've done this before, but what we're gonna do is we're just gonna set it in there like

 See, they've got all that marinade still inside there, liquid marinade, and so then we're

 just gonna set them in there and let them cook inside that marinade for an hour or so,

 maybe two hours, then we'll pull them out and put them out in the smoke for another

 These are pot gloves for handling hot chunks of meat, ribs and stuff.

 What I'm gonna do is I'm gonna take this piece of foil right here, I'm gonna lay it up there

 Here we go, we're holding a temperature a little over 200 degrees.

 You can still just kind of squeeze it, just see the juice coming out of it.

 For today's 21 day fix recipe, I'm going to be showing you how to make a baked apple dessert.

 And this I like to eat in the evening when I'm craving something sweet and this just

 So what you will need for this recipe is some ground cinnamon, some Himalayan sea salt or

 And then you will also need a small baking dish to put your baked apples inside of.

 Now all you need to do is cut your apple into bite sized cubes.

 Now that we have all of our nicely chopped apples, we're going to place them in our baking

 And I'm going to grind some sea salt on that just a teeny tiny bit.

 Because this will all bake down and shrink up when you bake it.

 Now you might be wondering, Becky, why in the heck are you putting sea salt on your

 Trust me, this will really make your yummy apple dish more like pie.

 And last but not least, you're going to take your melted coconut oil and you're just going

 And I'm making a mess because I let it sit too long after I melted it.

 It counts as one purple container, that's your fruit container, and two teaspoons.

 Now all you need to do to finish this guy is to put it in a 400 degree oven and bake

 These apples have gone down in size and soaked up all the flavor in that cinnamon and the

 I love to have these in the evening for a nice sweet treat at night when I'm craving

 So if you try this recipe, please let me know what you thought.

So in this video, I'm going to show you how to make banana scrambled eggs.

 Now, whether it's Whole30 friendly, I'm not sure because it kind of tastes like dessert.

 But it is definitely paleo, so if you're not on the Whole30, definitely do this breakfast.

 You're going to need one banana, three egg whites, or you could just use two whole eggs, however you like.

 And then I'm just going to use a teaspoon of coconut oil, or you could just use olive oil.

 In the meantime, you want to heat up your pan, so let it get warm a little.

 And of course, mix it with your fork or whatever you're using to mix.

 Because it is egg scramble, so you want your eggs to be scrambled.

 This is just totally off the cuff and it was totally Rick's idea.

 And as we were getting ready this morning to have our morning brunch, you know we get

 up really early in the morning and Rick and I kind of subsist on coffee from like 5am

 to 9 or 10 and that's when we're doing the whole take the kids to school.

 We have to drop Molly off about 20 minutes away to go to school so we're about an hour

 We had, I had slow cooked some awesome meat sauce in the crock pot and this has some chicken

 and some pork shoulder in it and it's got mushrooms and tomatoes and all sorts of seasonings.

 I cooked this over two days time and it is positively fantastic.

 We had this for supper last night over some pasta along with this focaccia bread that

 And we decided this morning instead of having leftover spaghetti for breakfast or brunch

 And initially that's all we were going to do is just have sauce and eat it with a spoon.

 I said it would be really good to split one of these and put some sauce in it and put

 So we're going to call these sloppy Giuseppes or messy Giuseppes and I think that's really

 funny and cute because Giuseppe is the Italian version of Joe or Joseph.

 And I'm going to take some of this sauce that I reheated on top of the stove and I'm just

 Like that now you can pop this under the broiler if you like and get it all melty.

 That's going to take us all the way through to supper and it's just about 1030 in the

 And this is a great way to remake your leftovers and who's not going to love that?

 You could do this with any kind of meat sauce or any kind of veggie sauce.

 It doesn't matter as long as it's thick and holds up well by itself.

 Our rendition of a quick leftover makeover lunch brunch breakfast whatever you want to

 Hi, I'm Rita Heikenfeld and welcome to Love Starts in the Kitchen.

 Hi, I'm Rita Heikenfeld and we're back in the summer kitchen making all sorts of great

Right now I'm going to be making one of my favorite light summer desserts.

So if you're sugar challenged, you're trying to lower the fat, this is the

In Italian, panna cotta means actually cooked cream and that's what

Now, go on our website because I have a great citrus panna cotta

 that's full fat, whipping cream and milk along with this healthy version.

 means you're going to take a fourth of a cup of water and sprinkle one package of unflavored

And what happens in the cold water, it allows the gelatin to dissolve

If you just add gelatin into a hot liquid, it's going to clump up, it's

 never going to look good, it's never going to do what it's supposed to do.

 recipe says bloom the gelatin, let it soften, oh just a few minutes and you'll know because

 it'll soak up all of that water, one fourth of a cup to one package of unflavored gelatin.

 watching your sugar, you could certainly use one half cup of sugar.

Remember I've talked about this herb, it's a sugar substitute herb.

 it's anywhere from hundreds to almost a thousand times sweeter than sugar, non-caloric and

You could crush the leaves in there, you can buy it at the grocery store

 And we're just going to bring that to almost a boil, just till the sugar or Splenda dissolves,

Again, you can't put straight unflavored gelatin into hot liquid,

 a boil, we're going to add our gelatin, stir it, and then we're going to pour it in our

 milk, chocolate soy, unsweetened, one-fourth cup of cold water, one package of unflavored

 gelatin in the cold water to allow it to bloom, and a teaspoon or so of vanilla that you add

 you're ready to put it, pour it in your, whatever you're going to pour it into.

 to pour it in a measuring cup, it's just easier for me to pour it into our cups.

And the great thing about this is you can make it fancy, and you can make it a little

You can make it casual if you're carrying these to a picnic, put it

 to sit in the fridge several hours, just like Jell-O, until it firms up.

 room temperature a bit, put it in the fridge, I've got some made, stay tuned, we're going

 you can see why it's called Cook Cream, it's very gelatinous, very creamy.

 the healthy version with the three cups of unsweetened soy milk, and the Splenda, half

 it a little bit with some sweetened whipped cream, just something beautiful.

 and if you wanted to keep this low-fat, you could just decorate it with some berries,

 that sweet leaf, the sugar substitute, you could certainly garnish it with a leaf of

Rose petals, you know, roses are edible, a lot of flowers are edible, and on our website

 Hey guys today I'm going to be showing you how you can use baking soda to clean

 I'm going to clean up and make clean like the side on the right.

All you're going to need is baking soda and some type of cleaning

 washing your face to cleaning around the house baking soda is just one of

 and vinegar and baking soda together makes a little bit of an explosion and

You don't have to do that you can clean it right away if you want

 to but you're just going to use a sponge or a rag and scrub away.

 So us ladies know how hard it can be to clean the stove top sometimes so you see

 really helps to get all of that dirt up so you're just going to scrub this side

 like you did the other side and there's really no rhyme or reason to it just the

 baking soda and vinegar really helps to get all of that dirt and crud off of

 have the world's first oven so it's a dinosaur and I don't know if this should

 scratches it up so I wouldn't do that and check first if you should use baking

I think that it cleans it so much better than using those spray-on oven

That stuff would tear up my hands and definitely leave like dead

 just as well and a little baking soda and vinegar goes a long way.

 are obsessed with baking soda like I am give this video a thumbs up.

 comments down below what you use baking soda for because I would love to find

I could do a total whole video on the ways that I use baking soda

 The foliage on trees is usually green so we'll choose a green tree, a gum tree, and I'll

 just tidy up the branches first and that will give us where to put the leaves.

 I start with a warm yellow, mixing a green or a blue to change the colour of the yellow

 but don't mix it completely and have your tones from dark to light.

 I'll bring a bit of white in there that will give us a very light tone for the top of the

 Then I'll load my round hog bristle brush with dark on one side and light on the other

 side and take it to the tree and we dab it straight on to give us the dab dab brush stroke

 Bring your darker foliage down over the lighter foliage, don't have it stop on top of the

 You can dab very slowly and learn how if you twist the brush you get dark come off sometimes

 You can practice on a practice board, there's no need to practice on your painting.

 Keep your brush well loaded and don't get lazy with your brush strokes.

 Do them deliberately right, if you just brush it on it never looks so good.

 I like to load my brush well and dab dab dab dab and you get very crispy leaves on top

 Different trees are painted with different methods but they're all from light to dark.

 And you can finish off with a single colour on top, you could use white or pink, I'm using

 Notice the trees in the background are quite dull so we go over them with a very vibrant

 colour and this will give you a lot of contrast and add depth to our painting.

 This foliage hasn't any branches, we can put them in later with a fine brush loaded with

 Hold your brush with just two fingers and that way you can paint little fine lines for

 Now for this closer tree, we have a much closer tree, I've mixed here a very dark green and

 I'll run it through the yellow without putting any tint in the yellow.

 Then we'll dab it on, now this is a scruffy old brush but it should give me a good effect.

 Dab it on bigger than the background trees because this tree is much closer.

 Make much bigger umbrella shapes and then drag it down a little bit and that will give

 So have a look at trees when you're out and about and imagine how you could load a brush

 There's so many different trees and different colours and different shapes so dab, dab,

 And we're down here at Vancouver's Merritt Kitchens where they've kindly set up this

 lovely kitchen for us to use to do some great Malaysian cooking for you today.

 Now Trish as you probably know, if you don't, she's from Malaysia originally.

 And this is a dish that hails from her homeland, but not one that she necessarily grew up with

 Singapore, Malacca and Penang had the Peranakan culture, which were the Chinese traders who

 And they evolved their own cuisine and their own distinct culture.

 Now this is a dish that hails from Penang, which has more influences from Thailand, right

 A little bit more of the Assam, Tamarind, a little more citrus versus the Peranakan

 culture in the south that was a little bit more heavier into coconut and sweet and other

 So you'll find it ranges between those three trading centers of Singapore, Malacca and

 This dish starts off with lemongrass, shallots and garlic that we've sauteed.

 It's pounded into a fine paste so it's very fibrous you can see.

 So you've basically toasted that lemongrass and because it's pounded so fine that means

 If you had big chunks of lemongrass, you'd have to take them out.

 I like to about triple or quadruple the amount because it's certainly one of my favorite

 Now the recipe also calls for the thick part of the coconut milk.

 A lot of cans of coconut milk will have a thick part of the cream at the top and the

 The brand we use, May Ploy, which is Thai, happens to be thick the whole way through.

 Scoop out the thick part of the coconut milk and that can be used to help make the paste.

 And then add the rest of the runny coconut milk later to create the gravy.

 Now sambals usually imply a chili base and often it can be red chilies.

 And there can be an awful lot of big red chilies that aren't necessarily hot but add a body

 Now one of the unique souring agents that the Peranakan culture, the Nanyas use in Nanya

 And that comes from the pod of the tamarind tree which originated in Africa, was brought

 over to India and is used in South Indian cooking, used in Southeast Asia as well.

 And you break off a piece, put it in some hot water in a little bowl and basically let

 So we've got, yeah, a golf ball size produces about that much juice.

 So I'll give it a sour or tart taste to complement the creaminess of the coconut milk.

 When we're finished, we're going to garnish with some crispy fried shallots which you

 can cut fresh and toast or you can buy dried ones that have already been fried up.

 So basically, all we have to do is basically let our dish come to a boil, let the prawns

 So once your prawns are fully cooked and your curry has come to a nice boil, then you're

 I'm just going to sprinkle a little bit of shallots on, which are fried shallots.

 You can make your own fresh ones or you can buy them pre-udang down at the Asian markets.

 And this is something you can serve on coconut rice or plain steamed rice.

 You can basically peel them if you like and devein the back or you can put them in whole

 Sambal udang goreng, a fried chilli prawn dish that's not a necessarily hot dish by

 It's got a sort of coconutty creaminess and it's also got a tartness from that tamarind.

 And this is a dish that is unique to the Peranakan culture, non-Yu cuisine from the Malaysian

 Hi, my name is Mischief Max and I'm here to share this lip art with you

 I used Violetta from MAC and Limecrumbs Poisonberry and then to get the sparkle that shines through the rhinestones

 Check the description box for links to my blog with all the products listed and more photos

 If you want to see how this crazy lip got created, please keep on watching

 First I'm going to apply MAC Lip Conditioner to prepare the lips.

 I take a q-tip and exfoliate the lips as well as taking off the residual lip balm.

 After I've got enough of that on I'm going to take this MAC lip pencil

 Which is the chromographic pencil in rich purple, and I'm going to outline the lips blending it in with the Purple Rain

 After I've got the desired blend I'm gonna layer lipsticks on top.

 It's an amplified lipstick, and I'm going to layer that all over the center of the lips

 To the outer perimeter, I'm going to add Lime Crime's Poisonberry.

 To define the outer edge again, I'm going to use the MAC chromographic pencil in rich purple

 It's a purple glitter that flashes blue and green, and I'm going to use my finger

 You don't need a glitter adhesive because the glitter sticks to the lipstick

 To make sure you don't get any lipstick on your teeth or glitter use a q-tip and rub it between your lips

 I've got these rhinestones from eBay and the dollar store, and I'm going to glue those to my lips using duo eyelash adhesive

 I'm going to start with these large dark purple rhinestones around the edge

 I take the lash glue and I pop it onto the end of a q-tip and I'm going to dot it onto my lips

 Wait 30 seconds or so for the glue to dry and then add the rhinestones on top.

 Press the rhinestones down when they're on top of the glue to make sure they stick

 You can manipulate the rhinestones just after you put them down, but after a while, they'll be stuck there

 Don't apply too much glue, just enough to have them stick, otherwise they'll slide all over the place

Now to make the cupid's bow, I'm going to use some smaller sized rhinestones

 I'm going to use a little bit of glue and I'm going to stick it on the top of my lips

 Now I'm going to add some smaller dark rhinestones to the corners of my mouth and just to fill out the lip here a little

 I'm going to add some of these 2mm rhinestones to the top of my lip too

 I'm going to add some of these 2mm rhinestones to fill out the lip here a little

 And I've decided to add some of these small light purple ones to the centre of my bottom lip for a highlight

 And I'm going to finish the lip out with some clear ones that are about 2mm

Here we have beautiful purple rhinestone lips with a glitter underlay and a lovely highlight in the centre

 While I wouldn't suggest eating with these lips because you might consume quite a few rhinestones, it is fine to talk with them

 They're malleable and move with your lips and would be great for photo shoots or concerts

 While this isn't everyday stuff, it is damn fun to do and damn fun to wear

 I hope you enjoyed this very sparkly lip art and subscribe to see some more lip art and makeup crazy ideas

 Click the little boxes if you want to see other tutorials of mine

 Hi and welcome to Cheeky Richo's product review of a thing called a Kebab-A-Queue.

 What it is, it's a little tool that you put meat, fish, fruit, whatever into and you get

 You slide them in through there and out pops your kebab, theoretically.

 So we're going to do it with fruit to start with and we'll see how it goes.

 We're going to cut them up into manageable pieces and try making a kebab with it.

 We've cut up our pieces of fruit here and we're just going to layer them into our little thing.

 Peach, grape, nectarine, apple there I think, that's a bit harder, and a bit of plum.

 It's great for the kids, doesn't take very long, it's a lot quicker actually and a lot safer.

 Just deciding which piece of fruit to put next is the hardest part.

 OK, if you've been thinking about getting a little kebab-a-queue and you just want to use it for fruit,

 If you want something different, let's try a marshmallow and banana one.

 Alright, today I'm going to give you a quick tutorial on how to upgrade or replace the

 This video assumes that you already have the correct memory for your unit on hand.

 What I usually do is take a look at the back of the computer and take note of what side

 So I'll lay it down, put that side down, and then I'll open up this side to get access

 This particular Dell model is really simple, you just push in the latches and open it up.

 If you take note, each one of those has a notch in it and that matches the notch in

 You do want to be sure that it is lined up correctly, that you have it in the correct

 And then I'll fold open these latches on the end and then we just put the RAM chip in there.

 Now what I usually do is put my thumb on each end and just rock it back and forth a little

 Once it's in, once it clips into place, these clips at the end will actually come forward

 by themselves and that's a sign that you have it pushed down in there good enough.

 Again I push on one end and then the other, kind of back and forth.

 All I have to do now is start my computer and it should recognize the new RAM.

 Now if I ever want to take one of these chips out, the way to do that is to just grab the

 levers at the end and just fold those back and the RAM will pop out.

 Hi, this is Amanda from Baroco, and I'll be demonstrating some of the most commonly used

 In this video, I'll be covering Knit 2 Together, Knit 3 Together, Slip Slip Knit, and Slip

 We'll start with Knit 2 Together, which is usually abbreviated as K2TOG.

 Instead of knitting just one stitch, you insert your needle through the next two stitches

 So if I were normally knitting a stitch, I would insert my needle from the left to the

 But to Knit 2 Together, I'm going to insert it into the second stitch on my left needle

 So when you look at my needle, you can see it's poking through both of those stitches

 Knit 3 Together is usually abbreviated as K3TOG, and it's basically the same thing as

 a Knit 2 Together, except you're decreasing two stitches instead of one.

 So with a Knit 2 Together, I went into the second stitch on my left needle, but a Knit

 And I'll insert my needle through the front legs of all three of those stitches, like

 And then I can knit them together as one, just like I normally would.

 Slip Slip Knit is abbreviated as SSK, and we usually use this decrease to slant in the

 To work this stitch, you slip your next two stitches knitwise, then insert the tip of

 your left needle through the front loops of those two stitches, and then knit them together.

 A Slip Slip Slip Knit is abbreviated SSSK, and this stitch is just like an SSK, except

 So you slip the next three stitches knitwise, and then insert the left needle through the

 front of those three loops, and then knit them all together as one.

 to gain reasonable access to this breather box I pulled the support bracket

 for the intake manifold it's right there in fact I may actually leave it off it

 doesn't appear to do a whole lot I think it's pretty firmly bolted to the to the

 intake side of the motor but I'll search the forums on more on that but anyway

 now I have more better access to breather box which there's at least one

 bolt in it that I can find it's on the bottom and it's got that wire clip to it

 that I have to take care of and it's got the PCV valve in it so other than

 pulling those three and finding any other bolt that's in it it's out so here

 the intake manifold right down in there it'd be this guy right here we're

 talking about is the bracket the bolts on the other end of it gotta get that

 disassembled nasty as you can see it's pretty coated with oil here's the side

 that you're used to seeing bolt flange one bolt flange two upper lower and

 this is the mating surface I had to sort of pry with a flat blade screwdriver

 see some marks there from the top and it came right out so here it is gonna do

 some cleaning all right so for lack of a better way to clean this baby out

 internally I'm gonna use a solvent I don't have any mineral spirits which

 would probably be the best I have some alcohol but I'm not going to use that

 what I do have is some old gas followed by some new gas so I'm gonna pour some

 in using a funnel I try to pour enough in that I can keep some in it and put my

 thumb over both of the openings and shake it out this is kind of a nasty old

 gas that I had some of it was mixed with two cycle oil it's kind of gross

 anyhow here we are some of it has already gone out the bottom through the

 the outlet put my thumbs over both be careful not to make any pressure in

 there don't want any explosive items do have a fire extinguisher about two feet

 to the right of where I'm working by the way so a couple of good shakes and

 pretty nasty looking color coming out of there obviously that's mixed with some

 oil but yeah so I'm gonna repeat this probably two three times with the old

 gas and then I'm gonna take some fresh new gas and do it probably two times

 just to get everything nice and clean the inside wipe down the outside and

 and reinstall I did take off this gas it was easy to easy to get off the other

 one is not so easy which is one of the reasons why I left it and also I'm using

 gas as a solvent which should hopefully not eat away at that gasket this one

 here it's actually more of a it's a longer thing for where the PCV valve

 plugs into but this that shouldn't be affected by gasoline it's the same same

 chemical solvent as oil is so here we go so here we are then probably ten

 rinses about seven of which with the new gas so I'm gonna do that one more time

 and show you what the colors like now it was pretty nasty full of grit really it

 was actually a fair amount of dirt gritty stuff in there and now it's

 pretty well clean so I'm doing now is just putting about how it would sit

 she'd given it a few good shakes flip it over give it a few good shakes that way

 left and right up and down all around and then the low point being this one

 I'll drain it out of so get a look at the color of that liquid pretty darn

 near clear compared to what it was it was black as an old diesel oil so I'm

 going to give this a good cleaning with the gas and this rag on the outside

 reinstall that gasket and then I'm going to let it evaporate or let it sit and

 try to get the gas to evaporate out of it maybe even outside in the Sun for a

 little bit because I have it out real quick clean out the PCV done this a

 couple of times yes PCV valves are cheap and why would you waste your time on

 this the reason I would waste my time on this is because this is the original

 Honda part that has been in there since 1993 or at least whatever the dealer

 replaced the last time it was serviced at the dealer which was many many years

 ago it's this one it's still very functional it blows one way and not the

 other it's not all it's got some grunt in it but nothing major when you blow

 into it it's one way it doesn't let air through and the other way it does so

 it's doing what it's supposed to do I'm just cleaning it up a little bit and

 I'm going to reinstall it this is relevant to the work today without this

 little universal joint short piece little 10 millimeter I never would have

 got that top bolt rethreaded rethreading that top bolt took more time than doing

 the whole job without this it wouldn't have been possible so get yourself a

 universal joint or else you will not be able to rethread the top on without

 Hi friends, in a quickie session today I am going to show you a chutney with cabbage.

 To make this cabbage chutney here I have the cabbage just roughly chop this cabbage and

 take some hot water and we are going to boil this cabbage in this water just for 2 to 3

 Meanwhile in another pan we are going to saute very little oil and some dry red chillies,

 garlic and some cumin seeds and for sourness you can add some tamarind.

 And we are going to slightly saute this and we are going to add both together in a blender

 So friends this is done you can just switch off the flame and you can rest it for some

 time meanwhile you can just check here the cabbage boiled you should not over cook this

 just slightly boil this is done we want that crunchiness from this cabbage you should not

 make it soft so this is nice and crunchy this is cooled down you are going to put this in

 a blender and take this cabbage and very very slowly or otherwise you can put it on a plate

 let this rest for some time and then you can put it in the jar and make a nice coarse

 So I am going to just wait for some time and then I am going to blend this.

 Given the cabbage has rested and remove all the moisture like you know excess water and

 Here you can see I have blended this into nice coarse you need to do this like this

 This goes excellent with rice nice spiciness from the red chillies and the garlic flavor

 and the cabbage I don't feel the cabbage you know the flavor because I boiled this

 cabbage little bit otherwise usually lot of people say the cabbage smells so this is not

 at all smelling this is nice and simple once in a while instead of making your regular

 I hope you enjoyed this simple cabbage chutney with dry red chillies if you like it make

 The first thing you're going to want to do is remove the top grill assembly by twisting the plastic tie-ins.

 Just go ahead and pop them all and your grill will become loose.

 With a flat screwdriver, there's approximately seven of the little clips.

 I usually like to start from one side to the other and go ahead and just pop them all off without breaking them.

 Once you have the front grill top piece removed, the rest of the install is fairly easy.

 As you can see, when you take the top grill off, you can see the studs down there.

 Put your clip and your nut on it, tighten it up, and you're done with that.

 I use a regular nut, but you can use a lock nut if you have to.

 One little hint on these other little clips that you removed right off the bat.

 You can go ahead and just take them out and slip them into the existing slot.

 Once you've made sure everything is all secure, everything is done.

 If you purchase optional fog light grills, these are just dummy covers with studs through them.

 Your stud will pop through the other side and go ahead and put a nut on it.

 If you look inside of the existing spot, there's two studs that stick up.

 Simply slide your grill up from underneath and place it right over.

 It's a James Beard award-winning food destination with tons of delicious recipes, gorgeous photographs, videos,

 So we are talking about popcorn and I know what you're thinking you're like, come on Dan

 Is there anything worth talking about when talking about popcorn?

 People believe that popcorn existed 80,000 years ago and was consumed by cave peoples

 The oldest documented evidence of popcorn existed was about 5,600 years ago

 Popcorn is such a part of American culture that it's believed that Native Americans brought it to the first Thanksgiving

 They brought some back to Europe and actually popcorn was the first puffed cereal

 They just poured milk or cream right over the stuff and ate it and before you go knocking that give it a shot

 the average American consumes about 70 quarts of popcorn per year and

 America is the world's producer of popcorn with the majority of the popcorn produced for the world coming from Nebraska and Indiana

 Basically popcorn is taking those corn kernels and heating them up to a point where they explode

 Maybe basically they implode upon themselves and turn themselves inside out

 Which would be used by the seed if it was to actually mature and grow into a plant

 Explodes and inverses upon itself with that membrane expanding up to about 35 times its size

 To pop corn on the stove you want to take a heavy bottom pan and add some sort of fat to it

 The corn kernels are going to sit in that hot fat or hot oil and when they reach 450 degrees, they're going to pop

So you need to find an oil that has a smoke point that's above it

 We're actually gonna go with ghee which is the clarified butter that we covered in a previous episode of what's this food?

 To make kettle corn heat a quarter of a cup of ghee in a large Dutch oven over medium heat

 Then toss in three popcorn kernels and place the lid on the Dutch oven wait for the kernels to pop

 Once they're popped the fat is ready to pop the rest of the popcorn

 Quickly stir in a quarter of a cup of sugar and a half a cup of popcorn kernels

 Once they start popping you want to remove the kettle from the stove and shake shake shake

 To keep the kernels from burning then put it back on the stove for a few seconds

 Then lift it off and shake and rinse and repeat don't really rinse just

 Repeat until all the kernels have popped then salt to taste and enjoy

 So that is how you make kettle popcorn now kettle corn has been really popular with the settlers

 It's also really really big in Germany, and it's my favorite way to eat popcorn

 I hope you know now a little bit more about popcorn try this recipe and try cooking popcorn on the stove

 It's pretty cool tune in tomorrow for another WTF and wait for the kernels to pop

 So today I'm going to be showing you a really delicious fried chicken steak.

 So first thing we're going to do is to show you how to cut the chicken because first place

 you need to make sure that the chicken is at the right length and width.

 And now we're going to add in three tablespoons of brown sugar.

 We're going to let the chicken stay in the marinade for 30 minutes.

 So here I have a two to one ratio of sweet potato flour to panko bread crumbs.

 Now let's dip the chicken in the marinade and then put it with the flour.

At Nicky MacFarlane we often get asked for help and hints on how

 to tie a beautiful bow, so I do hope this helps with my lovely assistant Olivia.

 So the first thing to say before we even tie the bow is about doing up the buttons.

 really careful to have washed your hands beforehand or if you've just been putting make-up on

 is be careful because nail varnish also rubs off on the sewn buttons.

 her up, first thing is to put the left hand tail through the belt loop at the back.

Just check that when you hold it like that, that the tails are about the

So now the really crucial thing to remember, the first move has to be right

 and that is to take the right hand tail, put it over the left side and to come up

Pull it in and then you form a loop with the right hand tail and again

 it's right under left, so you put it underneath the left hand tail and it's this that forms

 it not too tightly, just make sure that each loop is even and you can, with the silk, make

 a little bit, the other thing, I think it's prettier if you just crunch up the sash a

 Good afternoon and thank you for attending the demonstration on how to make a waffle

 You're going to make approximately twice the amount of batter as you have water, so make

 The dry batter will float to the top, so simply break those up.

 Make sure you don't put too much flour in as it will thicken over time, so just give

 You know when your batter is the right consistency because it will just lay down when you pick

 That means that it will drop on the top and disappear within a moment.

 Approximately, well exactly, 450 grams of butter to one whole bag.

 The butter will not only give the waffle flavor, but it will help release the waffle from the

 Once you've made your batter up, it will hold ambient for ten hours.

 Cover it with cellophane so that it doesn't absorb any smells from the refrigerator.

 Put the date and time in so that none of your associates know when the batter is ready to

 Test the temperature of your machine by dropping some water droplets on it.

 Always have a dry run, that is without batter, to make sure the machine will operate correctly.

 Close, not dropping the plate, and noticing where the nipple is, you can then turn it

 conditioner, your oils for sealant, and clips and a rectum comb, blow dryer with

 I'm applying my leave-in conditioner now and I'll be applying that in four

 smooth it all the way through every strand of hair and I finger detangle it

 my oil mix which is a blend of seven different oils and I'm only applying a

 dime-sized amount on top of the leave-in conditioner, smoothing it in to seal in

 moisture, protect my ends, and now I'm using my clip to section it, a particular

And then I do this over the remaining three sections of my hair and

 Styler olive oil gel and I apply it to the roots and I smooth it down to the

And I'll apply more gel on the ends because you want it to be extra

And then you grab a piece and with your index finger and your thumb you

 smooth your hair from your root to the end and that's called shingling.

In the front I want to show you how to make sure that you apply your gel to your edges and of course your roots.

And what I love about shingling, I'm so glad I learned about it, is I don't have to do twist outs.

My wash and go now can achieve that same look as my twist outs do.

You can use your finger just to smooth out any knots you may feel as you're smoothing and shingling process.

 go without manipulating your hair with twist and doing twist outs.

 Okay I just wanted to show you the rear of my hair and the crown which is the thickest part of my hair.

 Doing the same thing, remember I already have the leave in conditioner and the oil and now the gel and I'm just going to shingle and I'm using large sections this time.

This whole process I'm going to say adds about 15 more minutes to your styling.

 But hey you can leave out the house, dry your hair, air dry or if you're in a rush like I am today, you can use your diffuser.

 So my diffuser, my blow dryer is set on medium heat on high speed.

 And the diffuser is by Conair and it has those little finger things at the ends of it.

It's not stretched but I have defined curls and it shows my shrinkage.

 But now let's show you the tension and stretching method with your blow dryer.

 So now I've removed the diffuser and I have the nozzle piece on.

 And you just grab your hair and pull on it giving it that tension.

 And then you just take your blow dryer up and down the length of your hair.

 You hold the ends in your palm of your hand and you can go down as far as to your knuckles if you want to.

 If you want to just stretch the roots, if you want to stretch the majority of your hair.

 And then you just go up and down the length of your hair with your hair dryer.

 And I'm cooling the hair off so that it will help prevent my hair from frizzing.

 Okay so now I'm going to massage the gel cast that's on the scalp of my hair.

 And loosen up any hair that's on my scalp and that's been with the gel.

 Hello, I'm Paul Reitrich, founder of Elastic Steel Method of Athletic Conditioning.

 I'm going to answer another question today and this one is regarding GA or Gravity Advantage

 of Bulk and one of the ways to combine the 2C ratio of rows to pushups and how to keep

 One thing you can do, one thing you can do, I'm going to show you today is to actually

 So what we're going to do is we're going to do 2 to 3 and then come back, do 2 to 3 again

 and then 4 to 6 and then obviously take a break there and then come back and then do

 2 to 3 and then 4 to 6 and then 6 to 9 and then keep using that ratio and keep bringing

 And then at that point you can stop or you can take a little bit larger break, a couple

 Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to use 2 different grips for the rows, an underhand

 grip shoulder width and an overhand grip and for the pushups I'm going to use flat hands

 So what I have here is 2 chairs, I have a bar and I'm using that.

 Anything could work, you can suspend 2 rings, you can have any device that has a bar at

 arm length height with a slight difference between your shoulders and the floor.

 Now you would take a short break depending on how long you need to take a break of and

 I'm just going to turn over and do the pushup without removing the bar.

 I'm going to switch the grip to make sure the bar is in good position.

 So believe it or not when you do it back to back you also get the cardiovascular benefit of it.

I'm making these candied lemons to go on top of a cake that I'm making and they're

 great for decorating or you can just have them as snacks in themselves.

 of course we're going to need a nice fresh lemon that the skin's been cleaned and prepared

 one, they're going to need to be sharp so let's get them, put an edge on the knife.

 Now we're going to take about a centimetre in, just cut the end off of the lemon and

 then from there on out we're going to be cutting thin slices of lemon, approximately about

Okay and we can discard, when we get to the pips we can just remove

 that there, it's pretty thin, about a millimetre thick and keep going until you've got all

 to see, I've just picked the pips out, these are paper thin, just knock, use a little knife

 or use your fingers to draw the pips out of each of the slices, we don't really want those

 have to take these lemons over and we're going to blanch them, that's just to plunge them

 we're going to blanch these in and then we're going to take them from the boiling water,

 just about 30 seconds in the boiling water and we're going to pop them into this bowl

 which I'm going to have iced water in to cool them down immediately.

 at the stove with our boiling water, it's up to boil now and we're just going to take

 our lemon slices and we're just going to pop them in here, just quickly, we're just

 blanching these in the boiling water, we want to leave them in there for about 30 seconds

So you can see here guys, I've got ice cubes in here, the water is ice cold,

 we're going to take these straight out and pop them into the ice water, just to firm them up again.

 So back here over at the stove we're just going to turn the gas on, I'm going to place one cup of water

 and one cup of sugar, I've used icing sugar or powdered sugar in this instance but you can pretty much use any sugar.

 So we've put our sugar into the water now, we're just going to heat that, warm it through until it dissolves completely and goes clear and then when it's brought up to the

 boil, we turn it down to a simmer, we're going to add our lemon slices in here and simmer them, don't boil them mind you, we don't want to agitate them too much and break the lemons to pieces.

 We're just going to simmer them for about 45 minutes to an hour.

So you can see here now the water is just starting to come up to a boil.

 I'll bring over the lemons that we prepared earlier, they're still in the cold water here and they're nice and chilled and we're just going to drop these lemons into the boiling water, into the boiling sugar water.

 Bear in mind the cold lemons will bring the temperature down very quickly, you can see now I've nearly put them all in and the water has stopped boiling, so we do have to bring that back up to a boil.

 So you can see now the water has come back up to a boil, I'm going to turn that down nice and low and then we're just going to let those simmer through on there, let's say 45 minutes, 50 minutes, an hour at the most and they should be prepared and we'll take them out and show you what to do next.

 So they've been cooking now for about 45 minutes and you can see, if I zoom in maybe, you can see now that the lemons are virtually translucent and the sugar and water has reduced down to almost a syrup.

 Now we're just going to keep cooking those for another 10 minutes.

 Now there you can see they've been cooking for about 50 minutes and I'm fairly happy to take those out now, they've gone to a completely translucent and because they've been simmering gently, the structure of the lemons hasn't broken up.

 So we're going to take these out now and put them onto a cooling sheet.

 So here we are, I've got a grease proof sheet here and I'm just going to take, gently lift, you can see that, I'm just going to gently lift the lemons out and lay them down on the sheet to cool down.

 You can see they're completely translucent almost and still in their entire shape.

 You can see that lemon there now is virtually translucent and the sugar and water is almost like a syrup.

 So we'll pop those down on the side here and leave them to cool.

 Now if you look at this video here you'll be able to see what I actually use these lemons for in another video or if you look over here at this video you can see a more decadent use for your candied lemons once you've made them.

 Well there you are, there's the candied lemons, they're all dry now and you can use these for all sorts of different things.

 They're great as a snack as they are and I'll put a couple of ideas down in the description bar.

 I made these lemons particularly to go with a lemon cheesecake but there's some other little ideas down there as well.

 So thanks very much guys, that's all from Steve's Kitchen, take care, till next time.

 Hi everyone, right, for all those miniature makers I'm just going to show you how to make

My first attempt wasn't very good, well it's not the first attempt I have

 And then you're going to need another piece but we won't cut that one off just yet.

 on and then just twisted it round like that for my kitchen utensils because I'm going

 a hoop out of it, I'm just going to snip those bits off like that.

 larger end and just make a little hook or hook like that in case you wanted to hang that up.

 And then all you do with this is you take all 3 of them and you just, you want one that way so

But that one will go in a dish on the table and that one will be hung up.

The other thing I was going to do is to show you how to make a, you know one of

 I do have a spiral thing, but I'm not getting it out just for this.

And like you say, I've already got the whisk and the strainer spoon.

 Hi, this is Carol Stiles at HealthyKitchens.com and I'd like to show you today our wonderful

 oat flaker that will let you roll grains into any type of flake you want.

 Now, this particular unit is made in Germany by the family grain mill and it can be connected

 either to a hand drive, which is what I'm going to show you today, or your Bosch machine

 It is very sturdy made, this is the hand drive, you can see it from the side, it has

 a nice thick platform here and a really good steel clamp that lets you clamp it to a secure

 counter that has an overhang, like I have done here behind the mill.

 And to put it on, we just slip it on a little diagonal and then turn it straight up and

 Now this is what we're going to make, the oat flakes, and I have some oat groats, which

 I'm just going to put a few through here and you can see it will be very easy to turn,

 just by giving the big handle a couple of turns, out comes the oat groats, the oat groats

 now as flakes, large flake rolled oats that has a wonderful, wonderful flavor, better

 And you can use these in your cookies or any baking you want or just make porridge every

 If I wanted to do quick oats from these oats, all I would have to do is pulse it in the

 Now what sets this apart from anything you buy, as I mentioned earlier, is the taste.

 You won't believe the flavor that you get when you roll your own oats.

 Also if you wish to do wheat or kumud or spelt or any grains like that, they're a little

 harder than the oats so we will steam them first and then put them through and they will

 The oatmeal is easy to clean just by undoing these two screws on the front, you can take

 These are made by Family Grain Mill, they have a one year warranty on them and they

 Now if you have any questions, please give us a call at our toll free number 1-888-735-1044

 I think we've all heard of the garlic trick, how to peel garlic in 10 seconds.

 So I was thinking the other day, I grabbed my handy drink shaker and said, you know,

 Take the top off of that, put my garlic in, closed it, shook it, boom, boom, boom, boom,

 Everyone's seen the garlic peeling video with the two big bowls and all that.

 So I figured there's got to be a better way and I tested this the other night, it does

 I also wanted to mention folks, I was out in Vegas last week, I did come back with my

 out, I've got a link at the bottom of the page and I've got him in my box to the right,

 Great guy, professional knife shopper, great guy, we had a good time, shot the shit like

 he said out there for a few and it's good to meet a lot of people on YouTube, a lot

 Great guy Richard, thanks for showing me around the shop buddy.

 Great job and like I said folks, check out his channel, it's on the link below and that's

 it, great guy, check him out, he's a great cook, so forth, check him out.

 Anyways, getting back to the garlic here, this garlic, we put it in the can here in

 the little drink shaker, works like a charm, better than using two big bowls.

 Alright, so we're going to take these Tom, I'm going to try something different.

 You know, to make things better you always want to check them out and see if you can

 always do better, so I'm going to try this Tom, I want to see the action, you know what

 So we've got these three cloves of garlic, in they go, let's put the cover on, count

 Six seconds, well we've got one, that one's pretty much done, it's pretty good, and this

 one is pretty much all loose, this is kind of a defective one, that probably would have

 come out too, so that's not too bad, not too bad, that's pretty good, six, oh this one's

 Ok, we'll put him in the circular file over there, these two guys we'll save for our hummus

 Alright now this other, see this other lonely guy here Tom, can you see him?

 Let's do it the conventional way and see if it doesn't, we can do it any faster, we'll

 One, and it also, it's pretty good, not too bad, and it kind of smashed it for me too,

 So we can get that chopped up, and I think it worked out pretty good.

 Now that was a cool method though, this is a lot handier than using them big bowls, the

 ball jar worked out pretty good, but personally I like the old conventional way.

 Alright we're going to make some hummus here and that's it folks, have a great night and

 Thanks for watching, we've got some more cooking coming up soon.

 This vehicle is the Mercedes Sprinter which is also exactly the same as the Volkswagen

 Now to remove this stereo we need the basic trim tool and a T20 screwdriver which you

 We need to start by removing the panel from around the outside of the stereo first.

 So if we start from the top you can work your way along and work your way down the sides.

 Once removed there's plenty of wire and loom to leave the panel sat to one side but if

 you wish to remove it there's a little pressure clip on this one which you just pull out.

 Now that's removed we need to take the pocket out from underneath which has two screws either

 Now we've got a pocket out which is also clipped in at the back so it will be very tight.

 We now have access to two screws at the bottom of the stereo and two screws at the top of

 With the screws removed we can just pull the stereo straight out from inside the dashboard.

 As you'll see it's completely ISO with a female area socket which we pull off and push the

 two tabs on the side of the ISO socket to remove the power plug.

And today we're going to be making a classic cocktail, but this one is one of

 the only cocktails that's actually okay to drink in the morning.

 you see, I'm going to show you the recipe that we use at Paradise Cove.

 we are going to use Kettle One, which happens to be our favorite.

 They've been asking, they've been like, how come you're only making one, making them drink it?

And then we're going to add a half ounce of Worcestershire sauce.

And then you add about a pinch of pepper, which if you're going to

 shake it is about a little bit because a pinch is a good amount.

Then we take some tomato juice and you're going to add four ounces of tomato juice.

So I don't like it that spicy, so I'm not going to add that much.

 And what you're going to do from here is you're not going to shake this too much because you're

Alright, remember to act surprised since we don't have the first video anymore.

 bottom and you push it in a little because it's got a spring and pull this out.

 all the way and there's a little hole in the bottom that you put your finger in to pop

 What you do with the skeleton key is turn the box around, slide this piece up, this

 piece over and that allows this piece room to slide out which reveals a little hole.

 lock unless you pop the lock off and take out the key ring that she didn't put in there

I haven't lined the inside which felt like, are you still aiming?

 you'll put extra fabric so you can grab the fabric and pull it up.

 a piece of candy in there so she knows if anyone figures out how to open it.

 There's nothing like cooking with herbs fresh from the garden, but not everyone has a yard

 But not to worry, because today on The Twist, things are looking up.

 The Tamara Twist, a lifestyle show with an emphasis on the lighter side.

 These aptly titled tipsy pots are a great use of vertical space, perfect for apartment

 balconies or a convenient way to have fresh herbs right outside your kitchen door.

 To make them, you need terracotta pots and rebar thin enough to fit through the hole

 For a balcony or porch, you'll have to weight the bottom so your tipsy pot doesn't tipsy

 Once cured, place the cemented pot into a larger one that has two to three inches of

 Repeat the process, alternating the tilt, until all the pots are threaded.

 For a tipsy pot in your yard, start by pounding the rebar at least two feet into the earth

 Hi this is Swanette from Nailstamp4fun I hope you guys are having a great weekend

 today I want to show you a simple manicure and this gorgeous polish that I

 it's beautiful I'm in love with this polish and this is called green this is

 a beautiful green holographic polish with blue and green micro hex glitters I

 hope you can see it in the video it's simply gorgeous tell me what you guys

 think I'm gonna put a link down below so you guys can go check out her beautiful

 indie polishes and she's coming out with new colors too and what I did was some

 simple stamping I didn't want to do bold stamping over it just something with

 fine lines so I chose this beautiful plate from DRK nails and this is their

 designer to plate this thing image I will be using and as you can see all

 these images have beautiful fine lines they are beautiful simple patterns but

 they are quite unique from all the plates I have nothing that is similar to

 this and I will be using it for the first time in this video I hope you guys

 enjoy the video for the stamping I will be using Essie good as gold and first we

 apply the polish on the plate gently swipe pick up there we have the design

 now we have to center that on the nail so what I do I always take the stamper

 facing me and I push down with the nail you can do it rolling remember you have

 to use the method that is right for you some people like to roll some people

 like to push on and it's really something you have to try for yourself

 to figure out which one you like to do I do both I roll why push on I'm going to

 and the good thing about this plate is that I do not have to expand it for my

 thumb many plates that I use I do have to expand but for this one I do not so I

 I push anything that is lifting and remember when you're using regular

 polishes you really do have to work faster and for cleanup it's very simple

 you can also wait until you finished and wash your hands out with soap and water

 and if you're going to take pictures you can use a fine brush detail brush

 acetone or non acetone and you can clean up right take better pictures that way

 apply a generous amount and gently glide that brush on the nail don't apply too

 what do you guys think let me know in the comments section below and before I

 go I want to remind you all that stamping is quite difficult at first but

 ok we all go through it the important thing is to have fun and to practice

 remember practice when you are stamping practice different ways try rolling try

 pushing on try to take the stamper and place it facing towards you and stamp

 ok there's a lot of different ways to nail stamp keep that in mind

 I hope you guys enjoyed the video please take care and happy stamping bye

 My name is Cindy and to end this episode I'm going to show you how to make a coconut melt.

 It's super simple, delicious, it's versatile, fun for everyone and I hope you guys do enjoy

 So you're going to need first off a mold to put all of these frozen melts.

 I'm using just an ice cube mold and it's actually made out of silicone or you guys can just

 spread it all over parchment paper and put it in the freezer and it should just work

 And I added some Himalayan salt on top, crushed them and thinly sliced strawberries.

 And I'm not sure if you guys can see really well but there are freeze dried blueberries

 and I'm just going to try it out just to give it some different texture and color to the

 You guys can use your yogurt of choice but I like this one because it does have no dairy

 And I'm also going to be using just a splash of rose water, about a tablespoon or actually

 half a tablespoon because it does get really floral if you add too much.

 And chia seeds are optional which I'm not going to at this time.

 And after you're going to just go ahead and mix everything up together.

 You guys can actually just enjoy it by the spoonful like this but I'm going to add it

 to the freezer tray and it's going to look something like this.

 And you let it sit overnight or just three hours or so and after that you're going to

 Once it's been frozen it looks something like this and you guys can just pop them out and

 Unbelievably, coconut yogurt does taste really much like regular yogurt.

 As always, feel free to follow us up in our social media streams and also check out our

 There you guys can find a bunch of blog posts that Luke has been posting in the daily.

 And if you guys do create this recipe, feel free to post it in our Facebook or tag it

 It is functional and is available in both manual and motorized versions.

 Its sophisticated design is the perfect complement to the functionality and tradition of Imperia.

 Beneath the protective lid, a single unit contains both the pasta sheet rollers and the cutters for tagliatelle and fettuccine.

 Imperia Pasta Presto is an elegant addition to your modern kitchen and is always ready to use, enabling you to experience a wide range of traditional flavors.

 When the dough is first passed through the machine, make sure that the rollers are wide open by adjusting the knob.

 The sheet should then be folded and passed through the machine several times.

 Make sure that you dust the pasta with flour each time you repeat the operation.

 Delicious homemade pasta, authentic tagliatelle and excellent fettuccine.

 All thanks to Imperia's long-standing experience, which spans almost a century.

 Imperia Pasta Presto has all the right ingredients to win you over.

 Obviously, you can use the whole range of Imperia accessories with Pasta Presto.

 I'm Nathan and today we are going to be making some really, really simple corn chowder.

 Now if you're familiar with corn chowder, you know that it's sort of a poor man's recipe.

 The great thing about this recipe is that it's a crock pot recipe.

 So all it's going to do is it's going to require your attention for about five minutes and

 If you've never cooked in your life, I promise you this is really hard to mess up.

 All of this, go right here, turn it on low for six hours and voila, you've got an amazing

 What I like to do is cut the bottom off, if you can see that, and I'm going to turn it

 Just a quick, I'm going to chop it really quick and all we're going to do is just throw

 Now if you're lazy like me and you don't stretch with time, I just leave the skins on.

 Now that we've got our potatoes and onions, again we have a fresh clove of garlic and

 Honestly, that sharp of a blade near my hand is just bound to be a problem.

 It's pretty inexpensive and all you do is you put this clove, not with skin and everything,

 Now that we're done with that, we're going to put the rest of the garlic away.

 Today we're going to be using some steamed fresh and the reason we're using those is

 Again, we're going to finish it up here in a little bit as it cooks.

 So what we're going to do is leave this on low for seven to nine hours.

 I'll be right back and I'll show you what it looks like and how it tastes.

 After letting that cook for seven and a half hours, you can see it is amazing and smells,

 So what we're going to do is we are going to put it into a food processor.

 You don't have to do this but I like my soups to be more smooth and so I'm going to stick

 So now that we have it all in there, let's go ahead and put our top on and we're just

 Okay, so now that we have that done, we have a nice smooth consistency.

 So what we're going to do is detach it and bring it over here and just dump it in.

 So now what we're going to do is we're going to add our two last ingredients and that is

 the two cups of milk and the fourth of a cup of margarine or butter.

 You can actually use half and half for a thicker texture if you want to.

 This is actually butter that I freeze and I'm just going to put a nice dollop in there.

 I'm actually going to bring my little two year old out here and see if she likes it.

 Guys, thank you so much for watching this short episode of corn chowder, a really simple

 You can do that right here, just click right here on the video and you'll subscribe to

 So all we're going to do is we're going to squat and press the ball up.

 We're going to start down on our right knee, and we're going to throw it over our left shoulder.

 All we're going to do, grab the ball, and we're going to throw knees into it.

 Our final exercise, if you have a pull-up bar, is we're going to put the ball between the knees.

 Then you're going to bring your knees to your chest, and back down.

 Take a break after knocking each one out back-to-back without rest.

 welcome to our new sessions of cooking with technology that is cooking with

 today I'm going to show you a very simple snack called chegodi or kadboli

 and for this you know I'm going to take some water and in this add some salt

 also in this we're going to add some chili powder and little bit red chili

 powder to give a nice red coloring and salt chili powder then ajwain cumin

 seeds that is jeera and hing and also we have moong dal which soaked in water

 which is given as outer coating I'm going to show you how to do that here

 because of the induction stove this is really really gets heated fast in this

 I'm going to add some oil and then when it comes to a boil add rice flour into

 this make this into a dough with this mixture and in no time you will have a

 dough with this you can make chegodi you know typically there are lot of people

 make it with maida and different methods they use but this is one very simple and

 easy method to do it so that's good enough now I switched off this induction

 stove you know when it slightly cools down I'm going to knead this like a nice

 dough and roll it and we're going to show you how to make this snack making

 the dough is very easy you see but now how to convert this into our simple

 chegodi is just take it and roll them into this size and then depending on the

 size you want you know if you want this size that should be good

 now these are plain if you want to make the plain once you make it like this if

 you want a little bit of moong dal just take some moong dal and just roll these in

 the moong dal and just connect like this so here I've got two varieties one is a

 plain one is with the moong dal so easy to make just take the dough make thin

 like this and connect the edges put it there for the plain one for once with

 you know with little bit of moong dal and make sure that you make all of them

 same size so that they get fried easily now we're going to preheat at 180 degree

 centigrade for around three minutes then we're going to drop the all the chegodis

 once they get you know cooked for a few minutes they all get pretty strong but

 otherwise you have to be a little bit careful that should be good and we're going to put them on

 and for around six minutes first till they are half cooked at 180 degrees

 centigrade for six minutes and then you know pull it out if you want to apply a

 little bit of oil you can and then another six seven minutes at 180

 degree centigrade and you will have these chegodis ready and look at them

 they're so easy to make now once you pull them out get the basket out and

 transfer them into a plate as simple but I'm going to let them cool little bit

 because they're really really hot wow crispy so look at them they come out nice

 wow see the more I use the more comfortable I get this air fryer and now

 I'm started thinking you know there are so many other dishes that I can make

 using air fryer with little more practice I'll be creating some wonderful

 dishes keep watching and we will learn so much using the technology and cooking

 and make our lives easy and also enhance our lives and live happy life

 I hope you enjoyed today's session but do take part in our quizzes and cooking

 Just going to share something else with you while I'm out here grilling today.

 As you can see here, I've already got three ready, but I just wanted to show you the steps of what I had done here.

 I like to fold some aluminum foil into a little pocket and twist it at the end.

 Now, I've got some corn on the cob here that my family picked and put up back in the summer.

 What I've done is I've soaked this in a brine at a very low heat with some natural sea salt and a little bit of garlic powder.

 What I want to do is wrap this aluminum foil into a little canoe shape around this corn.

 This is the remnants of a stick of butter and spices of my choice.

 Mine, I like a lot of spices, so I mix together a lot of soul food seasonings, some turmeric, some garlic powder, parsley.

 Sometimes I like to get a little crazy and even throw in a good bit of crushed red pepper.

 And if you like flavor, believe me, you can't make too much of this.

 Alright, we're going to set these off to the side just a little bit.

 What you want to do with these is leave them in here for at least about 10 minutes or so.

 You're going to want to wait, try to hear some sizzling, popping, and know that corn is cooking.

 And once you get them sizzling pretty good, you're going to come out, you're going to turn them over,

 The great thing about cooking with this aluminum foil, after you take them off the grill,

 Don't know what it means for the world but this is nice weather.

 I'm going to take this corn and I'd just like to get a few grill marks on here.

 So I'm going to line them all up and cook them for just a little bit longer.

I'm the executive chef at the Aqua Curling Sandwich, Massachusetts.

 Today we're going to cook a bouillabaisse, which is one of France's national dishes.

 And lots of garlic, a little bit of olive oil, some jicama, some carrots, a little bit of saffron,

 Obviously, I told you about the vegetables, now I'm telling you about the seafood.

 Since we are living on Cape Cod, we are using lobster, little necks, mussels,

 You can do the bouillabaisse with any kind of different seafood.

 If you live in a different region, try to buy the freshest and the best seafood you can find.

 Alright, so what we're going to do right now is we're going to start the bouillabaisse.

 And one of them is for the seafood and one is for the vegetable.

 Because we want to keep the vegetable nice and crisp, I'm going to add some freshly sliced garlic.

 In my other frying pan, which I added just a little bit of olive oil, I'm going to add my seafood.

 I'm going to add first the little necks because they take a lot of time to open up.

 So we can leave this whole, the lobster, or we can take it out.

 But what we're going to do is we're going to leave it in there like this.

 out of the roe, that's where they make butters out of it and they add it to

 the lobster, our fennel, and look at the beautiful yellow broth

 Sandwich, Massachusetts and we're looking forward to seeing you.

 Now during the fall months we tend to eat a little bit on the heavier side, heavy sauces

 and what not, but why not take a break from that and I've got an idea that's going to

 We're going to start out by grilling some tilapia with some seasonings, really healthy

 You can use a ready made one such as this one that you can cook for two minutes in the

 microwave but I really want to show you how easy it is to cook your own quinoa and it's

 You want to season it just a tiny bit with a pinch of salt, a little bit of olive oil

 Now notice it can get a little messy but that's okay and let me show you how easy this is.

 You cover it, you turn it off, let it sit for 15 minutes and you'll have really yummy

 So one great tip about grilling any fish is that you oil the fish and not the pan.

 So a good thing to note is that the farm raised tilapia that you find at Fresh and Easy is

 We'll cook these for about a couple minutes on each side and we'll let them rest for a

 little bit while we finish off the quinoa and start off the salad.

 I really love it because not only does it have the amount of servings but also just

 So it's the whole kit which means that it includes your greens, any kind of toppings.

 In this case we have some fruit, prunes, you have some yummy raspberries and even blueberries

 This is Syed Yasser and today I'm going to show you how to make Hyderabadi Kheema Ke Seviyan for 4-5 servings.

 In a frying pan, add 250 grams of vermicelli and roast till they turn brown.

 Add 2 tablespoons of oil and when the oil is hot, add 1 tablespoon ginger-garlic paste,

 Close the lid and cook on medium flame for 3-4 minutes till the tomatoes get tender.

 Add 100 grams of minced mutton, 1 teaspoon salt, 1 teaspoon red chili powder.

 Add 1 cup of water, half teaspoon spices or garam masala powder,

 Cook on medium flame for 10-15 minutes till the vermicelli gets tender and water gets dry.

 Today I'm going to show you the easiest way to do an undermount sink installation.

 We have the door rock cut out and the stainless steel sink set on top of the door rock.

 Then we'll take a straight edge and go from the front form to the back form over the sink.

 Now we'll just measure to the top lip of the sink to the bottom of the straight edge

 After cutting the sink form to the appropriate length to fit inside the sink and we made

 our spacer block an inch and a half, we'll start peeling off the two-way tape.

 You always want to have the seam towards the back of the sink where you're not going

 We'll keep the form right at that height of the block of wood and basically start sticking

 We'll work it right around, keeping it at that inch and a half height.

 Now we're just going to use this block of wood as a guide and go right around the entire

 Okay, so now you'll see the sink form is basically to the correct height right around the whole

 We're now going to check and make sure the sink form is at the right height.

 So we've set our sink back in place, use our straight edge again, put it on the front of

 the form and the back of the form and go right over the top of the sink and you'll see the

 Because of the rebar in this job, we have a tight situation here.

 So we're going to pull the sink back out, caulk it and then put it back in.

 Alright, we're going to put a bead of caulking around the sink here where the sink and the

 This is going to create a reveal later on after we pull the form off.

 Try to get it out as nice as you could, but we do have a tool to smooth this out when

 I'll take our little tool and get a nice bead right around that.

 Alright, we'll clean the sink up here before we put it in and be ready to go.

 In this video I'm going to show you how to grow goji berries from store-bought dried

 And to begin all we really need to do is open each goji berry and scrape out the little

 They can be a bit sticky, but they're not too hard to get out once you find a method.

 The first method that I tried was using the back of a butter knife to scrape the seeds

 This method, there was a lot of pulp that came with the seeds, which isn't really a

 problem but I tried another method which seemed to work much better for me and that was just

 to break open the goji berries with my fingers and then roll the seeds out of the fruit with

 So if I was to do this again, the second method is definitely preferable.

 They can still be stuck to a little bit of berry but that's not really a problem.

 Next we simply need to drop a few seeds into a soil of some sort in a small pot.

 I'm using a soilless mix which is just cocoa coir and some perlite.

 I also give them a little homemade label just so I can keep track of what's what.

 So I often use the top of my grow light which can be quite warm but not too warm.

 But if you have a heated propagator you'll get much better results and the seeds will

 Just a week or so later we've got these little seedlings coming up.

 They're starting to grow quite quickly and they're starting to get quite strong.

 And as you can see there's a lot of large leaves just coming from the top of the stem

 At this point because they're quite crowded I like to give them a little bit more space.

 So they can be easily just uprooted just by pulling very very gently and the root will

 So we push it down and then we push the soil back around the seedling.

 So we just pull it up very gently and it comes up quite easily.

 Now a goji berry plant needs to stay indoors for the first year or so.

 The following year it should be hardy but you won't get any fruit until the second year.

 So what I have here are some two year old goji berry plants which I bought online.

 They're dormant currently but there are a few little leaves starting to pop through.

 So I need to bury these roots down into the soil up to about this point here which is

 If you have any questions please put them down in the comments section below and I'll

 And if you liked the video it would be great if you'd press the like button.

 And then you add three tablespoons of green peas, three tablespoons of chopped prawns,

 Okay and then you take about a tablespoon of cornstarch with a third a cup of water.

 And then you put some egg yolk to make sure it sticks together.

 Put about three cups of vegetable oil, cooking oil, in the pot.

 Bring it up and put it on paper towels to soak up some of the oil.

 Okay, all right, we're going to show you how to tie a, I've always called it the fisherman's

 knot, but I guess the real true name to it is the Palomar knot.

 Most important thing to do is when you're going to tie this knot is your tag end, which

 Line's very inexpensive, it's three cents a yard, so give yourself plenty of slack,

 So you want a double line, and what you're going to do is you're going to push it through

 Today we're going to use a swivel, but whether it be a lure, a fish hook, it don't matter.

 So I slid it through, and as you can see it's through there two times.

 You're going to tie an overhand knot like you're tying your shoe.

 This loop right here that we made, that's where the lure, the swivel, the hook, or whatever

 Okay, you just put it through there, and I'm going to pull this together slowly, but I

 As I slowly do this and you're looking at it, you can see that everything's doubled

 The beauty of this knot is it can't slip when you pull it tight because it works towards

 Okay, so what I'm going to do is I'm going to pull it down a little smaller, and one

 of the keys to tying any knot is you really should wet this area when you cinch it down

 So I'm going to wet my fingers, and I'm just going to put a little bit of a wetness on

 You'll see how the whole thing will come together, and it's doubled.

 And then that part where I told you the tag end, and if you want to see that it's extra

 long here, you just get a pair of fingernail clippers, and you can cut that wherever you're

 I did it slow naturally so you can see how it's done, but you can tie that very quick.

 Okay, hello, this is the Nikes22 showing you how to lace up your Nike Dunk Tie when you're wearing jeans.

 Okay, then you can put your jeans inside and tuck it in and stuff like that.

 Next, take this side, your right-handed side, if it's the right shoe.

 Now you want to lace it up all the way until you get to the sixth hole and then stop.

 Okay, since we started with this one, you want to keep this side.

 Next, take one side, it doesn't matter, and put it through the next hole.

 Because then you can, as you can see, there's like a little opening space where you can put your jeans.

 So this is a tutorial how to lace up your Nike Dunk Highs if you're wearing jeans.

 It's my fourth video on a tutorial how to lace up your Nike Dunk High.

 Okay, so today we are going to be showing you guys how to curve mini hockey sticks without

 You should already have your water boiling and when you do it, you actually want to put

 So if you watch this stick right here, which is my stick, put pressure on your toe and

 I had a straight stick and at the end we will have curved sticks.

 And at the end, if you do your curved stick good enough, if you can see the curved part,

 All you do is put pressure with the toe and the mid part of your stick onto the back pan

 part there and you just slowly curve it and it will come out great.

 In the boiling water, you want to put it at the exact height of the stick as you can see

 Well, hi and welcome to another tutorial in our iPhone basics tutorial series.

 And today I'm going to show you what do you do about power on your iPhone.

 Now, this is a very basic tip, but some people don't know how to do that.

 They just shipped you an iPhone and so you wouldn't necessarily know.

 First of all, how do you know that your iPhone is running out of power?

 Well, if you look here, top right hand corner, there is an indicator that's shaped like a

 And usually this is either filled with white or half white or a little bit of red.

 In fact, because it's red, it's showing that means there's less than 20% available battery

 Now, when this goes into this mode, you're going to want to charge it up.

 This cable is a USB cable and it's designed to connect your iPhone to a computer or to

 So I'm going to take this connector, the wide flat one, and I'm going to stick it in here

 I can either plug it into my computer, into the USB slot, which is on the side of most

 Now, this is a powered connector, so it will actually draw power from your computer.

 And what you're going to see is, you may have heard a little vibration there.

 Now it shows it's connected to the computer and it's drawing power.

 But it will also charge and also synchronize with iTunes at the same time.

 In with your package, with your iPhone, you've got one of these.

 This is a power connector in North America and in other parts of the world, of course,

 So what you can do here is take your USB connector and plug it in like that.

 And then plug that into your power outlet in a wall from your mains or your electricity

 Goes through the USB cable and you plug it into the wall like that.

 Don't forget, if you want to see what the battery, how full the battery is, you're going

 This is another episode of our 10-part series on iPhone basics.

Today what we're gonna be doing is we're gonna be detailing an engine.

 It hasn't been detailed in a couple years and I'm here today to clean it up and restore it.

 They're gonna be using a couple products along with an engine degreaser and a couple brushes

 I'm using a couple wheel detailing brushes along with a couple finer

 What they're gonna do is they're gonna clean up all the grease all the gunk all the dirt

 That's cooked on and baked on the engine and we're gonna make the engine look like it's new now when you're working on a car

 You're always gonna want to use a proper product for the proper application.

 I'm not gonna be using the heavy-duty because I don't have to so I'm gonna stick with this

 When you're working on an engine you really want to take a look at what you're working with before you actually get cleaning

 Any kind of tubes anything that you don't want to get hit with a power washer

 I'm then gonna get a brush agitate all the areas that I have to if there's any kind of

 Heavy spots any dirty areas and get in there and after that you're gonna spray it down with a power washer

 Now when you're using a power washer in an engine bay you want to be very very careful when you're doing it

 You don't want to hit any battery connections any wires cables or tubes that could lead to anything important because if you break it

You're gonna have another one for brake the brake boosters over here

 You don't want to be too aggressive on that and then finally we're gonna be working on the actual hood itself

 It's basically the same thing and then we're gonna show you how to do that.

 You start spraying down the spots that have a lot of dirt on them

 What I have here is a mother's wheel brush and another mother's brush that I'm gonna be using to clean out the engine

 And what you're doing now is you're getting all the gunk and everything and you're putting it into the product

 This is the power steering and you're gonna have a chamber here where it keeps all the fluid now

 After you feel like you did a good job with rubbing and scrubbing everything down

 What you're gonna want to do next is grab the power washer and then rinse this

 Once you dry this off and you think that okay, maybe you missed a spot

 You can definitely go back get the cleaner spray it down and clean whatever spot you missed again

 What I'm gonna use now to clean off the engine is an electric blower

 Now this was a particularly dirty engine so after the first shot

 I'm definitely have to go back and hit it a second time with some engine cleaner

 Now I'm gonna repeat the process just like I told you what to do

 You can also put down some engine dressing on any particular spot that you want

 If you guys have any questions regarding this video, please feel free to post them in the comments below

 If you like what you see and you want to see more don't forget to click that subscribe button and again.

 What's up guys, this is Derek Howes from DHFTNS.com and today I'm going to show you guys how to make my strawberry shortcake

 As you guys probably noticed I'm wearing a blue ribbon which shows my support for National Men's Health Week

 Organization whose mission is to reach men, boys, and their families

 They basically just want to make people healthier and more aware

The recipe that I'm doing today will be featured on the MHN health blog among doctors and political

 Leaders, so if you want to check that out, I will post a link to it in the description below

 If you don't have or can't find liquid egg whites you could also use three large egg whites instead

 Four reduced fat vanilla wafers, which is 14 and a half grams that you're gonna crush up

 Half a container which is 2.65 ounces or 75 grams of fat-free strawberry Greek yogurt

 I always try and mention this but coconut flour is a great source of fiber with 5 grams for every 60 calories

 One teaspoon of baking powder and last a couple chopped up strawberries

 If you don't know the wide variety of benefits that strawberries have I will post a link in the description below

 So you can check them out if you want to go ahead and mix everything together

 Take out a stovetop pan put your burner on medium heat and then coat your pan with some nonstick cooking spray

 After your pan heats up add some of your mix in and cook each side of your pancake for around two to three minutes

 As you guys saw the pancakes are done so now I'm just gonna try a bite

 So if you guys had a chance to try my protein strawberry shortcake

 This is pretty much a pancake version of that all the flavors of a strawberry shortcake are there

 Extremely filling and you don't even need syrup on them because they're that good.

 There's around 240 calories five and a half grams of fat 19 grams of carbs

 All right, guys, I just want to let you know that I'm not a fan of the strawberry shortcake

 But I do like the strawberry shortcake because it's a little bit more filling and it's a little bit more filling

 After every 15 minutes 15 minutes so far his pulse through calories 36 and fat

 This is pretty much all you need to make proportionate pancakes

 I'm gonna take a cup of thatpped out of that dough and rotate it so we can get motorcycle protools

 With cooking, we try to take food and present it in a way that will sort of evoke emotion

 We used to go, what was your favorite flavor of pop rock when you were growing up?

 And the way we use this in the restaurant or in our restaurants is we actually recreate

 these little chocolate lollipops that have the pop rocks actually inside.

 We don't tell our guests what happens when they eat it, we just simply give it to them

 But then when they bite into it, that popping starts again in their mouth and again, there's

 Just take about a half a cup of chocolate or so and start it off in the microwave.

 And then what we're going to do is we're going to use a seeding technique where we're going

 to take cold chocolates and we're going to add that to the chocolate to cool it down.

 The initial temperature that you want to bring this chocolate to is about 105 degrees

 We're cooking the sugar in the chocolate to a point where it's going to be unstable and

 Okay, at the point where the chocolate starts to melt, you'll see that some of the coins

 will still look like they're solid, but the chocolate is really starting to get soft.

 So you just mix everything together and then we're going to take the initial temperature

 So he's adding cold chocolate to hot chocolate to stabilize the tempering process.

 And what'll happen is after he's finished doing that, we're going to take the neutral

 Well, you temper the chocolate in order to keep it at a solidified state at room temperature.

 Because if not, then what happens is the chocolate will actually melt.

 You know, at room temperature between, you know, 80, 85 degrees and 72 degrees room temperature,

 you want to be able to stay in a solidified state like as you see here with the finished

 So you want to take it from the initial 105 degrees down to about 88 degrees.

 All right, well, we're at the point right now where I want to rewarm the chocolate just

 And at this point with a high powered microwave, this commercial one, maybe 15 seconds.

 Well, at this point, I've just taken it out of the microwave and I'm going to add a few

 We'll post a brief explanation of how to temper chocolate step by step.

 All right, so we're at the point where it's starting to get a little thicker.

 I bought this really expensive, probably, actually the price is here, $1.75 lollipop

 And then at the party store, you can buy these little lollipop sticks.

 So all in all, this whole thing minus the chocolate, you've already invested about $3.

 So you want to place the sticks inside the lollipop molds, add the pop rocks to the chocolate.

 It's really just how much pop rock do you want inside your chocolate.

 So give it about, you know, five minutes in the freezer, let that chocolate set up.

 And then basically what you end up with are these little molded lollipops that will just

 And then the way we display it in the restaurant is we just kind of send them out on a plate

 with other little candies and so forth that we serve in a restaurant at the end of the

 Thank you so much for hanging out with us today on VoltaggioBrothers.com.

 that you eat with a spoon and it's usually topped with granola, fruit, or even peanut

Acai is considered a superfood and it's chock full of antioxidants that's

 In my blender I'm going to combine two packs of my frozen acai puree.

 raspberries and frozen strawberries but some other good options are frozen blueberries,

 coconut milk depending on the consistency you like but also you can use orange juice

 apple juice, almond milk, soy milk, and a tablespoon of chia seeds.

 totally optional but because I like how it scrubs my intestines, I'll add it in.

 give it a whirl for about a minute on medium high speed and what I'm looking for is a

I transfer this into my bowls and sprinkle it with some of my favorite toppings

 Today I'm using my cranberry granola and a few slices of strawberries and bananas.

 Some other really good options are shredded coconut, chopped nuts, blueberries, really

Let me know how you like it by commenting below and if you have any other

 recipes you'd like me to make, let me know how you like it by commenting below and I'll

 Today we're going to show you how to change the crisper drawer cover support on your refrigerator.

 All we're going to need is a small flat blade screwdriver to use as a punch, a soft

 Now the first step in this repair will be to remove some shelving and bins so we gain

 Start with the deli drawer, we'll remove the drawer and the shelf.

 Now the cover support is held in place on the refrigerator wall with a drive pin, the

 larger portion goes in, once you drive that pin in it spreads it out and holds it in place.

 So to remove the old one we're simply going to drive it into the wall of the refrigerator.

 Take a small flat blade that's about the right diameter as the pin itself, just tap

 Now the pin that's in there, if you can get it back out with a small pair of needle

 nose pliers or a couple of tiny screwdrivers, try to pull that pin out of the way.

 If you can't get it out, push it off to one side because we're going to drive a

 Next we'll take our new support, line up the locating pins, make sure it's pressed

 firmly against the refrigerator wall, take that flat blade screwdriver again, just tap

 Now the cover has two locator pins at the back that made up with two holes in the rear

 Replace the drawer, and our deli drawer, and our repair is complete.

 That's just how easy it is to change your crisper drawer cover support.

 going to be removing the force center and two side pieces for this Ford F-150

The first thing I did after the factory grille was removed was to cut

 order to release the factory grille inserts from the factory grille frame.

 went ahead and repeated this step for the remainder of the center and side

 remainder of the tab that's left on the back side of the grille.

 will be installing needs to be as close to the back of these openings as

You may need to go as far as to sand the edges down to make sure you get

As you can see here, we're able to flip through all the different

 life pieces that I've taken out of a big sample pack and I'm going to see how

 enough to get this done and what we're going to need to do is cut it into a few

 material in strips and now I'm just simply separating the two center pieces.

 This is the aluminum woven wire material and as you can see it's very easy to cut

 defined top bottom left and right area that needs to be folded.

 be cautious and mindful of the material that's fraying out of the sheet.

 I'll be using a sheet metal vice grip in order to grab a hold of the material

 using you may need to clamp and bend a sixteenth to a quarter of an inch past

 not look that pretty from the back but from the front of the grill this will

Once you have all of the pieces cut and bent it's time to fasten

 foam padding on the front of the grill to prevent any scratching from the cable

 that we need to make on the back but overall I think we're ready for the

 the edge I'm simply using a flathead screwdriver and pushing the wire

 steel wire this won't be possible and you'll need to use a hammer and maybe a

 installation I like using an adhesive and automotive goop is usually my go-to

This will come out of the tube easy, dries clear, and usually holds very

It's got a little bit of flex in it which is important so that way it's not

 a day to dry and you do need to use it in a well-ventilated area but overall I

 find that this is the best adhesive for most of my grill applications.

 see here I'm simply applying it around the perimeter of the wire mesh and

 making sure that I have enough so that it touches the mesh to the back of the

 adhesive a day to cure I'm going to remove the cable ties and protective

 little bit of time to select the right mesh, cut it and bend it, and then use an

 questions about this one or any others feel free to contact me.

 EveryCart2Know here and today I'm going to be doing some False Cut and yeah, False Cut's

 Alright, so as you can see it's a brand new deck of red backed bicycle playing cards.

 And so the order, oh these are smooth, the order of the cards will stay the exact same

 So, on the bottom of the deck we have the Colorful Joker and on the top we have the

 And I'm going to show you the first False Shuffle, which I should probably figure out

 And then I'll show you the second one and then I'll show you tutorials on both.

 Now, the first one I found the name, it's actually called the Swing False Cut and it

 And what that does is that keeps every single card in the deck completely in order.

 So, we have the Joker on the bottom and the Ace of Hearts as well as all the cards in

 Next, I'll be showing you the 180 Helix Cut, which is a really nice false cut.

 It's a little flashy for me so I don't use it much and it's easy to drop the cards but

 I'm right-handed so I'm going to start with the deck in my right hand, holding it with

 my middle finger and my thumb both on the right side of the deck.

 Now, if I was left-handed I would hold it with my left hand on the left side of the deck.

 But, now you want to take about one-third of the deck and you want to swing cut it into this hand.

 Now, all a swing cut is is a swing cut is just taking it, doing this, and then completing the cut.

 But, we're doing a false cut here so we're going to take one-third of the deck, swing cut it into this hand.

 And, when you go to take this bottom part you want to leave this like that.

 Now, what I'm doing is I'm actually taking my ring finger here, placing it just like that.

 And, so now all the cards are in this hand, just a little spread out.

 Well, this is the top packet and this is the bottom and this is the middle.

 So, you want to take the bottom packet and just swing it out with your middle finger.

 And, then you want to come back with your thumb and swing around the middle part.

 So, take it, swing cut the first part, divide this into two, take the bottom part while leaving the top, swing it around, and complete the cut.

 Now, the 180 helix cut is a little more complicated because it takes a lot of practice to master.

 So, first thing you want to do is you want to divide the deck into four decks, but you want to kind of divide it mentally.

 And, I'm going to swing cut it, but this time when I grab it I'm going to grab it just like this.

 So, all my fingers are on the side and my ring finger is underneath the deck.

 So, after you do that you can just stretch it out just like this.

 Now, you're going to take two thirds of the deck off the top, or two thirds of what's left.

 So, actually you're going to take about half of the whole deck.

 And, now while this is still out you want to just drop it in there, pull this down over it, and divide this, divide with your right hand into two again.

 After you do that, grab this part, this pack with your ring finger again.

 Grab the bottom one, swing this one around, and complete the cut.

 So, all together we have, take a fourth off, swing it, stretch it out, take a third off the bottom, grab, switch decks, swing it around, and complete the cut.

 Um, I love false cuts, so when I learn some more I will be sure to post another video.

 Um, just don't forget to comment, rate, and subscribe, and I'll see you guys next time.

Today we're going to be working off of that country beans book that I told you about the other day.

 And we're going to make some bean flour to use in making some bread, you know, as a wheat replacement.

 And I've just got some white navy beans and we're about to grind them up.

 My helper went down to her mama's for the weekend when our friends had a baby.

 It was made for corn, so I figured I'd be able to bust open the beans a little better than a wheat grinder or a specific wheat grinder.

 I don't know how this is actually going to work because this is the first time we've actually used this grinder.

 And the way my table's edge is scalloped, it doesn't hold all that good.

 Pretty good, but it's nowhere near flour, so I'm going to have to adjust the stones and do it again.

 Alright, so I ground everything through a second time, and it's a little finer.

 But it's more like cornmeal or cracked corn, which isn't surprising because that's what that grinder was for.

 So I'm going to try it one more time, running it through with my actual grain mill.

 So let me get it set up, and I'll start grinding and see what it looks like.

 And according to the book, this is a quick way of making soy milk, but also soups and gravies.

 But you get the added proteins of the beans, and you get a lot more flexibility because you can use brown beans or black beans or whatever you want.

 But I guess the extra protein and nutrients is important because you'll get one heck of a big arm if you don't get a decent grinder.

 Because a good grinder costs about as much as a used pistol, $400 or so dollars, I got two $40 grinders.

 You can be cheap, or you can be good, or you can be fast, and you only get to pick two.

 I don't know if it's because I've already grinded this stuff twice, or because there's a difference between the beans and the wheat.

 But this one, it seems a lot easier to grind the bean than it did when I was doing the wheat with this particular grinder.

 Just eyeballing it, I'd say that's enough for maybe two loaves of bread, almost three maybe, using the recipe we've done for the sourdough.

We're just going to make us some sourdough bread using our starter, and we're going to use the exact same recipe we used before, that one, two, three recipe.

 Except we're going to replace two cups of the beans with one cup of, or two cups of flour with two cups of beans.

 So we'll have a cup of flour and two cups of bean flour to make our recipe, and then we can compare it to the bread we made before and see how it is.

 So I will tell you, if you're going to start adding a bunch of beans to your diet, you should probably go a little bit slow.

 You don't want to shock your system too much, and you don't want to have too much of that methane gas production.

 So we'll make us some bread, and I'm not going to go through all those steps.

You've seen it before, but we'll come back and show you the finished loaf.

 Okay, here's our bean loaf bread, and it came out and looks just like my other bread.

 I'm going to take that one to work and share with the guys, so I made this little smaller one.

 I tell you, I took a little bit of the leftover dough and rolled it into a little ball and smooshed it kind of like a thick tortilla and fried it, and it was pretty good too.

 I really can't tell a difference between wheat flour bread and this made with the navy beans, the white beans.

 Of course, I did read, depending on the type of beans, you can get different tastes, and that the white beans were the most mild.

 Until next time, you can always catch us online at www.teaandgun.com.

 Hi, my name is Vianna Jones with the Hot Momma Fitness Studio, and today I'm showing you

 At the end of your workout, you should make sure that you stretch all of the muscles that

 you may skip over the stretching at the end of the workout, you should do the stretching

 injury, but also it helps to lengthen out the muscles that you just contracted by doing

Julie's going to turn to face the wall, and Julie's going to demonstrate.

 to hold onto the wall, which you can do for balance, and she's going to walk her feet

 apart, turning the feet out just a little bit, and then she's going to sink down into

Just come as far down as you can comfortably and hold the stretch here.

 like we did at the beginning for the opposite arm, opposite leg.

 the tailbone, she's going to arch her back all the way up towards the ceiling.

 she'll inhale to lift the chest and lift the tailbone, concaving the back here for cow.

 Exhaling to go back into her cat, pushing the floor away to really arch the back up

And then inhale to come into her cow stretch, lifting the chest and

And you'll go between the two of these 20 or 30 seconds till you feel as

 the day when you start to feel a discomfort in your lower back, not only at the end of

It can be done standing and sitting as well, seated in a chair at work.

 And when she's finished, she'll come back to all fours with a nice flat back and a nice

 yoga strap here, or a towel, a tie, anything that will help you to reach your foot here.

 after she's held it, she's going to release the strap and then come into a stretch called

 the elbow around the knee, and also bringing the foot into the crease of the elbow here.

 And then she holds it there again 20 or 30 seconds to open up the hips.

 all the way into the crease of your elbow or if your elbow's not the whole way around

Just however you can hold it so that you're opening up the hips here in this

And after she's held it 20 to 30 seconds, she'll extend this leg straight out,

 blades are back and she has nice good posture here so that with this good posture, she's

 not feeling a stretch in her back, she's feeling a stretch in her hamstrings.

 out the hamstrings, it also helps to keep away any sciatica pains.

 this 20 to 30 seconds, she'll come into cradle the baby on this side.

 leg, she brings the knee into her elbow crease and the elbow goes around the foot as well

 our next stretch, another hip stretch, bringing the soles of the feet together for Butterfly.

 posture, shoulder blades are back and her spine is nice and long.

 together can be as far away or as far in as is comfortable for you.

 a stretch the closer in you'll bring your feet, but do not try to force them in too

And then with a straight spine here, she can also lean forward a little bit and

This is also a good position to do any other stretches that you want to

 stretches that I most recommend to my clients to do while they're pregnant because it really

 helps to open up the hips and prepare them for a much easier and faster labor and delivery

 I'm your host David for Hot Bartenders and today we're doing the margarita.

 We're going to be using all fresh ingredients today so no sweet and sour or margarita mix.

 You can do it on the rocks, you can do it in a cocktail glass or you can do it straight

 up in a margarita glass which is a bowl or you can do a martini glass.

 So today we're going to do it on the rocks and the first question you would ask is if

 If you want salt you can go ahead and get a lime and rub it around the rim like that

 And we've got the salt here so basically just rimming the glass with salt.

 And now we're going to go ahead and we're going to take this, it's called a Mexican

 And before, actually before hand what I like to do is take the lime and roll it which breaks

 up all the pulp and makes it really juicy and then you cut it and then you get a half

 And now we're going to do one and a half ounces of your favorite tequila.

 And we're going to garnish with a lime wedge which is actually right here.

 This one clearly has some connection problems, and it's with the negative line here.

 So clearly, once you seal your model, this is not something you want happening.

 So what I may do is just attach it in here for the best connection.

 As you saw in our previous video, the resistors and the LEDs went really fine.

 Those were closer to 26 or 28 gauge, if not 30 for the resistor.

 One good thing about it, though, from the thickness, is that you can use it to position

 If I was using this thinner 26 gauge, it wouldn't really, well, gravity would just take its

 This is awfully close to the positive, though, so what I'll probably do is just get some

 electrical tape, throw that in the mix just to make sure they never make contact, and

 So I think the next time you see this, it's going to be all sealed up.

 So I'll just get a length of this lighter 26 gauge, run it from here to there, and seal

 One thing I should mention before I forget is that the more solder you use, the worse

 You want to use the absolute minimum you can get away with, and that's totally strong enough.

 So I'll have to check this wiring on the top just to make sure everything's actually good.

 Once you start putting all these lines across the springs, what happens is the wire coming

 in can't make a good connection sometimes, so I'll have to work on that a little bit.

 I've got to put the light boxes in here, and rather than going with these, I'm just going

 Next up it'll be on to sealing it up and actual gluing and painting.

 Now today we're going to take the ingredients of a Snickers bar and a pizza and turn it

 into one sinfully naughty dessert pizza that's worth every single bite.

 First up we're going to take our Snickers bar and cut them up into small pieces.

 Now we're just going to pop that base into the oven for about 5-7 minutes just until

 To the marshmallow we're going to add in the caramel and mix it through.

 Next we're going to take our peanuts and smash them up into smaller pieces.

 Now that everything's prepped all we need to do is put it together.

 Smear that over until the base is well covered, leaving about a centimetre around the edge.

 Next taking our Snickers pieces we're just going to align those around the edge.

 Now that that's looking absolutely amazing we're going to pop that back into the oven

 Then once that's out of the oven using something like ice magic or some remaining melted chocolate

 Sweet and creamy with that little bit of crunch and tasting just like a Snickers.

 An indulgent dessert that you'll find it hard to stop at just one slice but I really hope

 Thanks again for joining me, have a wonderful week and I'll see you all next time on Cooking

 And of course if you haven't seen my last video make sure you click the link to watch

 it and I'm also running a competition for Game On in Sydney on the 22nd to the 24th

 Okay guys, just so we're all on the same page, I'm going to show you the strict muscle up.

 That's a strict muscle up and I'm going to teach you how to do that now.

 It'll be yours forever to own and nobody can tell you any different.

 You're going to learn a strict 100% muscle up and it'll be yours.

 The strict muscle up comes in two stages and I'm going to teach you stage one right now.

 Okay, the first stage is do all your pull ups nice and high to your chest, to your navel.

 At the beginning of your session when you've got lots of energy.

 Very important to build those rear muscles up to explode you up into the sky.

 Once you get good at that high pull up, next stage is stage two.

 Explosive high pull ups and then get a low bar and do explosive dips, that's parts one

 Once you get really good at that explosive pull ups and explosive dips just work on your

 Don't aim for straight up, aim to put your head forward and your legs back.

 So when you're up there you know you're comfortable up there and you've been there before.

 Hey, and when you're doing your muscle ups make sure in the beginning don't go from a

 You can start with having your elbows bent, swing forward and flip up.

 If you have your elbows bent you've got less distance to cover and this is only the beginning

 From there you have to really work on your explosive power to get right on top of the

 To get really good at those explosive pull ups you can use weights.

 Just put small weights either in a backpack, you can use a water bottle with one or two

 Use the weights and that will help you with your explosive pull ups.

 Okay so that was the first muscle up tutorial, the first proper strict muscle up tutorial

 Please check out my other tutorials on one arm pull ups, front levers, human flags, rope

 climb and a whole bunch of other top bodyweight moves that will make you awesome.

 Hey again guys, I'm just going to do a tiny mini tutorial, hopefully it's mini.

 Anyway, so yeah, we're going to draw ruffles and I'm going to show you a simple way how

 You can notice I draw on one side because I'm comfortable on drawing this side.

 It's hard to draw on this damn curve here so I usually use it for scraps.

 You could start drawing the S patterns, you know, kind of like waves.

 Obviously you draw the base more, I want to say more lightly so when correcting the lines

 This I think, I don't know which one I'm more comfortable with.

 I think as soon as you get used to the other way, you can try it this way.

 Just fold and stuff is where I'm, I don't know, it's kind of confusing.

 So let me get to that point where I'm very comfortable with it that I can actually teach

 I know people are more visual when they're artists, so explaining it is harder than showing

 So I hope that showing you how to draw it is so much more easier than my rambling of

 Plank's a great core exercise because it teaches you how to support your spine with your core.

 So what I want you to do is bring your elbows down in a triangle, yourself there, squeeze

 your glutes and kind of activate your core and tuck your glutes in.

 And the best way to start with this is to try to do it for lengths of time.

 Start with 30 seconds, try to get to 45 seconds, then try to get to a minute, then get to 90,

 You can feel your core probably activating there as you're tucking in your glutes.

 Now the other way of thinking about planks, rather than doing them for lengths of time,

 The first one is come down into the plank position, get into there.

 The other thing you can do is you can move yourself back and forth.

 Bring your knees all the way out with your toes, and then move your feet forward, keeping

 Yeah, walking your feet forward, and then walking them backwards.

 The other thing you can do is add, say, a physio ball here, and you can rim yourself

 The other thing, great exercise, awesome core exercise, is the magic ab wheel that flies

 So bring yourself out, and then put your knees down, keeping everything nice and tight.

 Now bring this forward, right out there, and then right back up.

 So try and go out as far as possible, and then bring this back.

 The other thing you can do if you're a beginner is you can put a surface in front of you.

 So go in front of a wall, just bring it right out to there, and then bring it back.

 So that's another variant that you can use if you're a beginner.

 Plank out on the physio ball, so just like you would on the floor.

 So bring one knee up, pretend you're kneeing somebody in the face, maybe a husband or somebody

 I'm going to start by taking a little bit of a tape and first I'm going to apply this

 And I'm just going to repeat the same process with the other eye.

 Now I'm going to take my Urban Decay Primer Potion and I'm going to apply this all over

 Next I'm going to go into this ELF Duo Eyeshadow in the shade Blueberry.

 I'm going to choose the darker blue color and apply this all over my eyelid.

 Next I'm going to take a big blending brush and just blend the harsh lines away.

 We try not to over blend this because we do want it to be really noticeable.

 Now just really carefully I'm going to peel the tape off going upwards.

 As you can tell this created a really nice edge to the eyeshadow.

 Now I'm going to go into a smudge brush and taking the same shadow I'm going to apply

 Make sure it connects with the top sort of wing that we created.

 Now for the inner parts on the top of my lid I'm going to take a small angled brush, spray

 it with a little bit of MAC Fix Plus and I'm going to dip it into a little bit of the ELF

 Now that we're all done with eyeshadows I'm going to take a little bit of a black eyeliner

 And to mimic the false lashes effect I'm going to use the Maybelline The False Lash Mascara.

 In the end the blush she's wearing is sort of like a peachy orangey color so I'm going

 to use this Fox in a Box from Hort Candy in the shade Skinny Dipping.

 And I'm just going to mix my brush in it and apply this on the very backs of my cheeks.

 In the end the bridge of her nose as well as her chin and a little bit of her forehead

 is quite highlighted so I'm going to be using High Beam from Benefit to mimic that same

 The last step is the red lips so I'm going to be using the ELF Lip Stain in Red Carpet.

 And then for the little bit of gloss that she had in the ad I'm going to apply a little

 So that is it for my Mac Hey Sailor collection that's going to come out pretty soon.

 I really hope you guys like this tutorial and I'll see you all next time.

 It's either called a skip kick, switch kick, and there's even a stepping kick.

 Now we're going to demonstrate the skip kick first, or the switch kick.

 What Joel is going to do is basically switch his stance slightly.

 Notice when he skips, his body is still facing me in this manner, as if he were still fighting

 Now from this motion here, he's going to get up on the ball of his left foot.

 Where he's trying to attack is the inside of my leg here with his left shin bone.

 Okay, now, he doesn't want to take a big skip, because if he takes a big skip, it's going

 By that time, I can already count it with the straight right hand.

 He's going to pivot on the ball of his right foot, popping his hip, and this time, his

 Joe's going to step forward with his left foot, on the right foot, and as he steps,

 he's going to get ready to wind that left kick up and kick into the inside leg.

 He's going to step straight towards me, and attack the back leg.

 Okay, now our turkey has been cooking for about two and a half hours.

 You always want to check your temperature any time you're cooking turkey.

 It has to be 165 degrees internal temperature to let you know it is ready.

 Now, whenever you're doing turkey, you have to make sure you allow it to rest at least

 So what I'm doing now is I'm just going to transfer this into my serving dish, and I

 So while I'm letting it rest, I'm going to pick that gently, as much externity as I can,

 I want to make it nice and pretty, so I'm going to dress this up on the side.

 From our African roast turkey to our garlic French bread, seafood pepper soup, pilau,

 sautéed collard greens, fried plantains, our mashed sweet potatoes, we just did it

 I hope you get to enjoy these wonderful dishes and try some of these fabulous dishes in your

 I'm a designer for Vintaj and I'm here today with Beadaholique.com

 a hole already in the top but then I went in with the hole punch pliers

 fine line detail of that but for this one we're going to release it

 so now that that's ready I'm gonna go ahead and do my center medallion piece

 and make sure your brush is nice and dry because the patinas are water soluble

 you don't want them to mix with the water or else it'll be bubbly and watery

 so when I'm blending these colors I like to grab kind of two of the colors

 so I like to kind of go on in sections and then I'll go in with the silver as well

 so while that piece is still tacky to the touch you're gonna hold it in your hand

 so releasing brings that design back to the front, the brass design

 so I always go on the back side because that's much easier to just

 so I'll do one end and then I'll do the one across and then I'll

 go ahead and attach your larger jump ring through the top of that piece

 Okay, I'm gonna take this old barbecue sauce here and I'm gonna can it in these 12 jars.

 But anyway, we're gonna get these jars filled and we're gonna give them a water bath

 because I love this barbecue sauce and I don't want to throw it out.

 And this jar, I'll just put in the refrigerator and keep it to use today.

 Okay, use that personal jar to fill all these up to about a half inch.

 It is really important that you wipe off the sealing rim edge of all these jars.

 Gonna put them in a water bath at this altitude for 35 minutes.

 Take them out, sit them on the counter for 12 hours, let them seal, and they're good.

 Alright, here's the finished product of this wonderful barbecue sauce.

 Now, don't have to pressure can them because there's so much vinegar, tomatoes, lemon juice, and salt.

 So when you got such high acid in foods like sauces and tomato sauces and things like that,

 and put a layer of eggplant right on top of the Panko breadcrumbs.

 and I'm just going to sprinkle this right on top of the eggplant.

 Now I'm going to take this and put this onto my grill on the baking sheet.

 Hi, I'm Shelley Bett with ChildCareLand.com and today I want to share with you a cotton

 This is a really great activity for developing fine motor skills.

 You need to have this pattern which can be found on my website at ChildCareLand.com

 And it comes with circles in the tummy and then one without circles in the tummy.

 The ones with the circles, the children need to put the glue dots inside the circles and

 So it's a little more challenging for them because they have to put them in the right

 spot where as the one without the circles, they can just put the cotton balls anywhere

 and that may be more appropriate for very young children to do.

 It comes also in black and white so the children can decorate the scarf and the mittens and

 If you're using the blank snowman, the children would just apply glue inside Santa.

 They could either do it this way or do dot dots, or not Santa, I'm sorry, the snowman.

 And if you're doing the one with dots, then you would just put the glue dots inside the

 circle and again this is a great activity for fine motor skills development because

 the children will have to grasp the cotton balls and then put them in the snowman's tummy

 Now for adults, we may not think this is very much, you know, very challenging but for small

 children they have to grasp the cotton balls and then line it up with the circle and then

 Now they fill up the whole tummy or the whole body of the snowman and then it's up to you

 So we punch a hole in the top of the snowman's hat and then we attach a yarn or ribbon and

 Snowman is just, you know, it's one of those themes that all children love and if you don't

 live in an area where there is a lot of snow, children are very curious by snowman about

 If you live in Wisconsin like me where you have snow four and a half months out of the

 year, it's still a lot of fun even though it's very cold outside.

 For Cotton Ball Snowman, I'm Shelley LeVette with ChildCareLand.com and thanks for watching.

 My dad was an officer in the Navy, so we lived in Sheepshead Bay at Fort Hamilton and also

 When the market crashed in 87, I started looking at a reason to get off to the East Coast.

 When I graduated culinary school in 89, or business school in 89, I moved out this way.

 I didn't realize there was no black and white cookies out here.

 And that was one of my favorite pastries growing up as a kid in New York.

 The only places I could find black and white cookies were over in Berkeley and one place

 So I wasn't satisfied with that and didn't want to have to drive to the city or across the East Bay.

 Well, the people that were making the cookies for the owners of these businesses had never

 So if you've never eaten something, you really don't know how it's supposed to be.

 Getting out of school in Brooklyn, I'd go right to the bakery after class, waiting for

 It wasn't, it didn't have that light cake-like consistency as well.

 The recipe I have is a recipe I researched from a bakery in Brooklyn where they actually

 It doesn't really vary that much and I intentionally made it so it reminds people of the classic

 You know, like Jerry Seinfeld said, it's part cookie, it's part cake.

 You know, it's the bringing together of both worlds, black and white.

 You know, you bite it, if you get it right down the center, you get a little bit of each.

 You get that vanilla frosting, you get that dark cocoa frosting and then that light, lemony

 So in the bowl I have butter, shortening and lemon zest, which I am going to cream with

 Once cooled, we have a combination of powdered sugar, cocoa powder, water and lemon juice.

Today I'm going to show you how to mix organic nutty peanut butter.

 you do this, the more stuff comes with your knife when you pick it back up.

 sticking it in, I like to mix it around while I create these holes.

 bottom because you want to create a hole that a lot of this oil can go into.

You don't want to leave those behind because when you get to the end of your peanut butter, it'll be all dry and you'll be fooling yourself by wanting to spread that on any toast or bread.

 And any huge chunks, you want to get off your knife and just pick right through.

It does require a bit of the muscleage, but I think any bitch can do it.

You can also do this with not so nutty if people like smooth, which I don't really understand because if you really want peanut butter, don't you want to know where it came from?

I just like to get it extra like that because I'm thinking ahead so that I don't have nasty, dried out peanut butter.

 Lure bodies and brass beads are created from long brass rods that are formed with the use

 The brass rod is loaded into a single spindle where it is then fed to a series of tools

 The single lure body is then cut off and is dropped into a collection pan below.

 Once the collection pan is full, the parts are collected and will need to be washed and

 After the parts are washed and dried, they are inspected for quality and placed into

 The raw lure bodies and beads can be sold as is or in two other surface finishes.

 For a polished brass finish, a trip to the burnishing department is required.

 For a bright nickel finish, the parts will need to be processed in the plating department.

 What's up guys, this is Derek Fukuhara and today we're going to be learning fakie ollie,

 So once you get the fakie ollie up the ledge, you're going to want to focus on the foot

 In general for manuals, if you're not flipping out, I like to keep my foot in the pocket

 to where an equal distance of my toes hanging off and an equal distance of my heels hanging

 You know sometimes you can do manuals like this with the ball of your foot, but if you

 need to adjust your weight, it's going to be really difficult to lean forward or side

 I like to land my manuals somewhere around this vicinity, that way you can adjust your

 The main part of this trick is getting the confidence to get the fakie ollie up and not

 For this curb, it's pretty low, you can pop pretty close to the ledge, maybe a foot away.

 So you're going to want to get your fakie ollie and you're going to want to trust that

 So after you get the confidence, you're going to want to pop the fakie ollie, get into the

 Once you're into it, you're going to want to look straight down.

 You're going to want to keep your knees bent, have your foot in a position to where you

 can control the manual accordingly, left, right, front, back, and then just coast across.

 When you get to the end of the manual, you're going to want to give it a little scoop off

 You don't necessarily have to pop it, but you can give it just a little push off the

 When you do that, you can start trying tricks in, start trying tricks out.

 Maybe fakie flip out, throw a half cab, a shove it, drop it to another fakie mani, watch

 There's a lot of different things you can do with the fakie mani, so get out there and

 Hey everyone, this is Beeple16a and I'm super excited because I ordered a SOG seal pup and

 it just got here and I'm going to do a little unboxing video so that you guys can see it

 Just going to open up the tape with, this is a Schrade X-Timer double bladed knife which

 you know has been working alright for me but I don't have a fixed blade knife and I

 really wanted one so this one is going to be soon replaced and it's my school colors

 I know that just the regular Elite is $125 but I just wanted to pay $30 more for tiger

 I actually just wrote them an email saying like, when do I get my knife?

 Alright, there's a little instruction manual, the Kydex sheath and here it is.

 I'll probably do a review on it later because we're going backpacking down the Grand Canyon

 If you guys want to see more of this knife, more tech, airsoft, paintball, blah blah blah

 blah blah blah stuff, I might start doing some like rants and raves because I've been

 subscribe to my channel, subscribe, like, comment anything at all.

I'll play just a little bit of this song, I'll teach it to you right afterwards.

 But just know that the chords you'll be working with would be out on the third fret capo.

 D chord, second fret, first and third string there, and this guy's the third fret on that second string.

 Next one is the G, fifth string, second fret, sixth fret, sixth fret, sixth string, third fret.

 These guys are both pinky and the ring finger on that first and second string.

 Next one's the B minor, fifth string and third string on the second fret.

 So, you can kind of either do it, either skip the first beat, so it's like 1 and 2 and 3 and...

 Or you can kind of hit it on once, so hit it once, just kind of like...

 Add maybe a cup cup and a quarter in there and see how it turns out.

 we add the other three quarters of a cup of the chorizo just because what the

 Then what you do is you run a paring knife around through the stem and you pull

 we're taking the mix and putting in this really cool beef jerky gun.

 So we put the tip on this stuff, the jalapenos, put them on the smoker.

 So let's stuff these things, wrap them in bacon, get them on the rack,

 Couple of squeezes completely filled with cheese and chorizo goodness.

 So here we are with these stuffed jalapenos, a little bit of bacon.

 A nice little snack until we get ready for this pastrami and the pork loin.

 This is smoking, barbecuing on Long Island in the middle of winter.

 I've been a huge fan of Kathy Irway's blog, noteatingoutinyork.com, for a while now.

 Hey, so I'm Kathy Irway and I write Not Eating Out in New York.

 It's a blog and it's about not eating out in New York and my two years of doing so and

 I love her approach to cooking and especially her creative ways of reusing leftovers.

 So we teamed up with Kathy to make a really awesome lunch out of some of our Thanksgiving

 This week on Working Class Foodies, Kathy had a whole entire turkey carcass left and

 we had a bunch of meat left from our turkey and we put those together with some leftover

 roasted root vegetables and made a fantastic Hungarian-style goulash.

 A thick red soup made richer with lots of Hungarian paprika and sour cream.

 There's tons of Hungarian paprika to give it that goulash, Hungarian, paprika-ish flavor.

 Instead of stock, we have this big turkey carcass, which is the basics of making stocks.

 It was picked out and we kind of picked out some more and we chopped up some of the extra

 Who needs turkey stock when you can just kind of fill this with water?

 And then we had these leftover mashed potatoes and we made a quick dumpling out of them with

 So it's important to keep it nice and boiling because as we drop them in, the temperature

 Yeah, so we had leftover green beans that were sautéed in garlic to begin with and

 they were just kind of limp and sad so we mashed them into baby food.

 Basically basil pesto but with green beans in there, hidden in there.

 Let me tell you about a waitress that I met last year at a cafe in the middle of town.

 And that's going to go into a sandwich with our leftover turkey breast.

 And the crumble is really good too, I mean the nuts work out perfectly.

 You know, a lot of people think that herbs are only for savory items, but they can really

 The price breakdown for our Thanksgiving leftovers came to, for the goulash, we spent

 $4 on the stewed tomatoes and the sour cream, but everything else in the soup, including

 the wine, was either leftover from Thanksgiving or a pantry item.

 We used half a loaf of challah from the farmer's market, which was $2, and about $2 worth

 So it was $4 for the pesto and the sandwiches for three people.

 For the cranberry bars, the oats, butter, flour, and cinnamon all came from the pantry.

 We used $2 worth of walnuts, and the rosemary also came from Kathy's garden.

 Overall, our lunch cost us $10 for three people, which is just $3.34 a person.

 And we had plenty of goulash, pesto, and cranberry bars for another day.

 We both really want to thank Kathy Irway for taking the time and sharing with us her kitchen

 to show us these really fantastic ways to use our Thanksgiving leftovers.

 and cookies, received over 4 million views on those videos all thanks to you, and was

 The new flavors I have for you today are going to be a great addition to your repertoire.

 video where I'm going to give you tips and tricks on how to get the perfect mug cake

 In a microwaveable mug, we're going to mash up our banana nice and small.

 going to add in our flavorless oil, honey, and vanilla extract.

The reason this little mug cake is so moist is because of the fresh

 this we're going to add in our oat flour, baking powder, cinnamon, and a pinch of salt.

And if you don't want to use that, you can always feel free to use

 it actually is a really great breakfast recipe if you're on the go and need something fast.

 This is such a lovely cake that I'm just going to decorate it with fresh banana and some

 Our next mug cake up is one of my favorite flavors and that's coffee cake.

 of requests from Irish viewers asking to show how to make a coffee cake because I think

 as a nation, we just love anything that goes well with a cup of tea.

 In a microwaveable mug, we're going to add in our egg, milk, and flavorless oil.

 the coffee flavor in my baking, I always use coffee granules and I dissolve them with a

 I always equate dark coffee with brown sugar but if you don't have brown sugar, don't worry

 address one question that you most commonly ask which is why does my mug cake turn out

 and if you think it needs a little bit more time, do a few more seconds and then you'll

 one thing I love about these little mug cakes and I think you do too is the fact that you

 don't need an oven to make them and that they're single servings.

 To serve my coffee cake, I'm going to make it really big and bold and make a cappuccino.

 I'm going to pipe some freshly whipped cream on top and dust it with a little bit of cocoa

 Just like before, in a microwaveable mug, we're going to add in our egg, oil, milk,

 To this mix, we're going to add in our flour, sugar, baking powder, and salt.

 Lastly, we're going to toss some pineapple in some melted butter and brown sugar and

 down cake is not complete without a bright glace cherry in the middle.

 Alright we are seconds away from another lovely flavored mug cake.

 As always, my written recipes are in the description box below my video on YouTube.

 like this mug cake video, then don't forget to subscribe to my channel for lots more like

 Our next mug cake up is probably something you never knew you could make in a microwave

 In a microwaveable mug, we're going to add in some fresh diced strawberries.

 we're going to add in a little bit of sugar and some vanilla extract.

 For our cobbler topping, we're going to make it in a separate bowl.

 your flour, oats, cinnamon, baking powder, and a pinch of salt.

 Now pour in your melted butter and stir with a fork until it resembles large breadcrumbs.

 Once your cobbler topping is mixed, just spread it over your lovely strawberries.

 Now you have another unique dessert that you can make in the microwave in just minutes.

 To serve my cobbler, I like to dust it with a bit of icing sugar and place a beautiful

 Our next mug cake flavor I've been saving to give you just at the right time and I think

 Just like before, in a microwaveable mug, we're going to add in our softened Nutella,

 Once your Nutella is all mixed in and everything is nice and smooth, we're going to go ahead

 Add in your flour, cocoa powder, sugar, baking powder, and a pinch of salt.

 My Nutella mug cake is ready for the microwave and already looks so decadent.

 Now remember, you can always use my homemade Nutella recipe for this little cake.

 This is such an impressive mug cake and it is perfect to give as a gift to someone that

 So make someone's day a little bit brighter and share a mug cake with them.

 If you enjoyed this video, then please share it with a friend and spread the word about

 Thank you so much for subscribing to my channel and I'll see you back here again next Thursday

 Okay, so what you'll need is pink salmon, a can, and I'm going to be using this Salmon

Okay, so you drain your salmon and now you just want to flake it.

You don't want a lot, well it depends on your preference, but that's how much I'm going to use.

And kind of chop them up fine, or you can have big pieces, it's up to you, but I'm going to do it fine.

What would go good is green onions or even for a spice, you can add some jalapeno pepper.

You want to roll it in the bowl and kind of flatten it out and push the sides while you're doing it.

Try to remember how much you use, because you don't want all these uneven balls.

 And then you can make it into a ball, flatten it now, and keep on going and doing that.

I had it in the oven or under boil for six minutes on each side.

 So I'm going to get a plate, cut it open for you, let you see it, you know, do the whole nine.

 Hi everyone, Allison here and you're watching Black Cat Scraps.

 Today I'm going to show you how to do a twist front top out of a regular t-shirt.

 And the only supplies you'll need is this shirt, a pair of scissors, and needle and

 All you have to do is cut down the center of your shirt, about halfway down the bust

 And then cut over towards the one side, about 2 inches is what I used.

 And then the other side, mark the exact same 2 inches and make a hole.

 This will be point A, this will be edge A. We're going to call this point B, and we'll

 call this edge B. Alright, so these next couple of steps are going to be kind of tricky, so

 So we're going to take flat B, and we're going to stick it through the hole that we had made.

 Mine got a little stretched out because I was figuring out a few things, but it's alright,

 Alright, now take everything and take wrong side and face it towards you.

 Now with this flat, note that this is edge B. Now that I have point B in my fingers,

 and I've found point A and edge A, you're going to want to pull the point B all the

 Now notice my thumb is touching the right side of edge B, and my index finger is touching

 the right side of edge A. Line these two up together, just like so.

 Keeping both right sides together, match up points A and B, and line up edges A and B

 This is exactly how the shirt was before you cut it, but now you've added a little twist.

 I'm going to start with point A and B, and I'm going to start on that edge.

 And I'm going to sew the two together, just like this, and I'm going to go over as far

 I know there's going to be a lot of fabric that's going to bunch up in this area, but

 Alright, so if you find that your shirt kind of looks like this, where you're seeing the

 stitch line and this part ripped open a lot more than you wanted it to, you're actually

 going to- this is a good thing because it's going to make you pull these two apart, and

 you're going to stitch this hole tighter, just like you did this one.

 So that's going to bring this over to cover up that hole, and then while you're at it,

 you might as well bring all that string, tuck it in there, and stitch it down there too.

 So kind of like we did before, flip everything wrong side up, and make sure that you can

 So you're going to want to gather up all that fabric that we stitched and pull it towards

 So now we're ready to stitch up this hole, and I've got right sides together again.

 And we're going to stitch down as far as we can towards the gathered fabric, and we're

 going to try and close this hole up as tight and as small as possible.

 Also remember to make a couple stitches to attack down edge A and B to the back side

 What's great about doing your own projects like this is you can make the twist any size

 I have a nice little gathering right here that kind of has a little accent.

 Comment, rate, subscribe, and let me know if you want me to do more tutorials.

 Then be sure to look for the tutorial for the rest of this shirt.

 All right, and we're going to put around a cup of powdered sugar

 Directfix.com presents the iPhone 3GS Touch Panel Digitizer Replacement Directions.

 Warning, this content is intended to be used for informational and entertainment purposes only.

 You are using these video directions and its content at your own risk.

 Express or implied following these directions on this video will void your warranty.

 Be sure to visit us on the web at directfix.com for all your parts and accessory needs.

 At checkout, use coupon code YOUTUBE for 5% off your first order.

 Using the SIM removal tool, or if you don't have one available, use a paper clip and remove the SIM tray.

 Using a small Phillips screwdriver, there are two screws located at the bottom of the iPhone, right on each side of the main connector.

 Using a case opener tool from directfix.com, pry it between the top of the chrome rim and the edge of the screen.

 Using a case opener tool, pry it between the top of the chrome rim and the edge of the screen.

 There are still three cables holding the display to the motherboard.

 The third one is a little tricky, as it is pushed in and not just pushed down on the connector.

 You'll lift a small white tab at the back of the connector up to about a 45 degree angle, and the ribbon will slide out.

 Now taking the top screen assembly, in order to separate the touch panel or digitizer from the LCD,

 you'll need to remove three screws from one side and two from the other.

 On the other side of the screen, there are two small Phillips screws that need to be removed.

 There is one more screw at the top back of the assembly that will need to be removed with a small Phillips screwdriver also,

 If you have cracked your iPhone 3GS touch panel, we're now going to show you the directions

 Once you've removed the digitizer, you can see that the digitizer is not working properly.

 If you're not sure how to fix this, you can always check out the manual on the iPhone 3GS.

 The manual says that the digitizer can be replaced by an additional digitizer.

 We're now going to remove the broken digitizer touch panel from the frame.

 Using a hair dryer or a heat gun, be careful not to melt anything,

 but you will need to heat the glue adhesive that is between the frame and the touch panel.

 You need to run the heat gun or the hair dryer around the edges of the assembly to loosen that glue.

 The length of time required to heat the frame may vary depending on the hair dryer or heat gun you're using.

 Using a case opener tool, you're going to pry between the plastic frame and the glass assembly.

 Once you've loosened it a little bit, use the case opener tool to run it along the edge

 to break the adhesive seal between the touch panel and the frame on both sides.

 This will allow the touch panel assembly to break free and come free of the plastic frame.

 After you remove the digitizer touch panel, remove the old adhesive from the frame.

 Using the iPhone 3GS adhesive kit that is specially die cut for the iPhone 3GS,

 Once the adhesive is applied to the bottom, make sure to work out any of the air bubbles so it's firmly in place.

 Once the top adhesive is in place, once again work out the air bubbles.

 There's a small tab that will allow you to pull up off the little coating that will make the adhesive double-sided sticky on both the top and the bottom.

 Remove both top film from the top adhesive and the bottom adhesive.

 Once you line up the top touch panel, make sure you line up the bottom with the home button also

 before pressing firmly to make the final seal and put it back together.

 Please be sure to click the link on the right side of the screen to take you to our website,

 Dry ice is at minus 70 degrees Celsius so you need to handle it with care.

 The dry ice comes in pellets but you need to crush it into a powder.

 We put a few handfuls of pellets in a cloth bag and smashed it up with a stick.

 The ingredients for simple vanilla ice cream are condensed milk, whipping cream and vanilla essence.

 Keep mixing and stirring and adding more dry ice when the frothing goes down.

 Add a little more powdered dry ice to the nearly solid mixture.

 Alright you guys, so first I'm going to start off with my primer.

 And the primer that I always use is a white jumbo stick because I like it the most.

 Because we're going to be using a light color as a highlight and you want that to show up.

 And I know I'm going to forget so I'm just going to go ahead and tell you what I have

 And I just wore this just because she had it on like a color like this in the video.

 But like usually I wouldn't wear this bright of a color because I'm going to be using this

 And I went, since her eyes are different, her crease is higher than mine so I just applied

 And then I'm going to take that color beside that color, that last color, just the lighter

 Ok so next I'm going to take a round shadow brush and it looks like this.

 And I just took that and I defined the little fake crease that I created.

 And you just, I'm going to start from the outer corner and just go a little more than

 Ok so then I'm going to take a blending brush and I'm just going to blend that out a little

 And when you finish that, next I'm going to go into the first color that I applied on

 Ok so next we are going to take that same brown brush and that same brown but I'm not

 I always like to start in the middle and then gradually go from the middle to the outside

 I'm going to take this black from my 120 palette and I'm just going to set the eyeliner

 Now next I'm going to take my eyelash curler and just curl my lashes.

 I'm using Stiletto lash and instead of applying fake lashes I'm just going to do a lot of

 mascara because I hate dealing with fake lashes for some reason.

 It comes in a relatively plain looking box, nothing really to it.

 Before we actually get to opening the box, we're going to look at the specs on the side of the box.

 and it does have an upgrade for 4.0 ice cream sandwich when that becomes available from LePan.

 And the display, it's a 9.7 inch XVGA with 1024x768 resolution, and it is a capacitive multi-touch screen.

 There's 8 GB of internal NAND flash storage, and you do have a microSD expansion card slot that can accommodate a 32 GB microSDHC.

 It uses a 30-pin connector, microSD, 3.5 mm headphone jack, that's just miscellaneous stuff.

 It's only a front-facing camera, there is no rear-facing camera on this.

 It has the Bluetooth 2.1 plus EDR plus the 802.11 BGN draft wireless.

 It does feature a G-Force sensor, an e-compass sensor, ambient light sensor, and a 3-axis gyroscope.

 See how well I can do this one-handed, or if I can just do it this way.

 It's only about 3 or 4 pages, so it would take you only like 5 minutes to read it.

 There's your 2 megapixel webcam, and it does have an activity indicator next to it.

 On the top of it is where you find all your buttons and connections.

 We have a headphone port, there's our 30-pin dock connector, a microphone next to it.

 We have a reset pinhole right there, and our power button's on the top.

 So it will vibrate on key presses when you're using the Android operating system.

 Now I turned this on before, and actually from what I could tell, it has the...

 There's no manufacturer overlay on top of Android like what Lenovo does with their overlay,

 It comes with a lot of the Google applications and everything that comes with the Android 3.2.1 operating system.

 And I must warn that if you're trying to get a hold of this tablet,

 But you're going to have to pay attention to the fact that it's going to take you about a month to receive it.

 This is toward the end of February, and I ordered this off Amazon at the beginning of February.

 And they said it took two to four weeks to get out, and that's pretty much how long it took.

 Apparently there must be a supply shortage of something for this LePan 2,

 This is John McLennan and I'm here again with GuitarControl.com excited to bring you this

 So a fourth is when I go up, basically, here's an easy way of thinking about it, it's just

 So if I start on a C and then I go C, D, E, F, then I go C, F, and I have an entire

 lick here, or a section of this lick that just moves in fourths like that.

 So let's look at it slowly here, we've got a C minor 7 chord that this is being played

 over and we start out on top with just some pentatonic licks that are moving positions.

 So again, be sure to click the link below for the tab and you can follow along real

 So here we go, we've got 8, 11, 10, I'm sorry, 8, 11, 8, 10, and then 6, 8, 6, 8, and then

 And then here's what I call a hexatonic lick, and then here's the fourths.

 So we've got 3rd, 3rd, 3rd fret wise, and then 5, 5, 6, and then let's see here, 3rd

 So to me, when I practice this lick or play it, I've got that sound just ringing in my

 So that's what a lot of the great improvisers did, of course they outlined the chords, but

 So check it out, click the link below, and this will be a good etude for you to practice,

 Meaning, playing in a song, you're vamping over C minor 7, you know.

 So check it out, click the link below, we'll see you next time, thanks.

 The Fluval 406 canister filter is for freshwater and saltwater aquariums up to

 advanced motor technology, improved performance, quiet operation, quick change

 media baskets, instant prime for quick startups, and has multi-stage filtration.

 It has mechanical to remove the debris, has chemical and biological in separate

 will be a little piece of foam here that you have to take this off.

It fits right in there, and then you can snap it in place, and that's

Then you have four baskets in here, and they come with the media in

 next two baskets are for your chemical and remover, and this is little bags of

 Okay, and I've already put the outflow tube here, and that will fit up in the

 and then this tube can be brought around like that, and then this snaps back in

You hear that snap, and snap, snap, and you can pull it up or push it back

 that out, put it in snugly, push that against the side, we're ready to go.

 pump this quite a few times to get water in here, to get started.

 don't want to plug in the pump until the air bubbles have stopped.

 hooked up, wait till all the bubbles are out, it's completely filled.

 Now if we want to clean, what we have to do is unplug, and we're going to flip

 this white valve all the way up, and then we can remove this without getting water

 reconnect this, put it down, give it the prime, until it's primed.

 For additional information on the products used in this video, please visit

 Hey everybody, today I'm gonna show you how to make some chicken fried rice.

We're gonna come in here with our chicken and we're gonna fry it

 her done I want you to put it aside and then we're gonna fry our egg.

I forgot to tell you to begin with it was two tablespoons of canola

 oil and here's one egg and another couple of tablespoons of canola oil.

 like that and bust it up like that right there and bust it into little bit pieces.

 the pan and then we're gonna come in with a cup of mixed vegetables.

 it's nice and done and really hot and then we're gonna add our rice.

 everything really hot again and now we're gonna add our eggs and our chicken

 make it a really make sure everything in there has some sesame oil and soy

Okay now again at this point I want you to salt and pepper this okay.

 Now you have to taste this before you put it on the table to make sure

 She ain't the easiest to please when it comes to cooking you know what I mean?

 Hi everyone, it's my birthday this week and my wife got me something called a

In the United States most people aren't real familiar with it but

 they actually invented this back in the 1890s in Ireland and it's a way to boil

 is is a water jacket on the inside and the kettle itself forms a chimney that

 allows the fire to develop a good draft and so the water is inside the water

You build a fire in the fire pan down here that heats the water to

 I'm gonna add some, as we get that going, add some more sticks to it.

 Then I'm gonna add some water to my kettle and we'll boil some water.

 So now that water inside is gonna start to boil in just a couple of minutes.

 want to show you an accessory that came with this when I got my kettle.

 You can also put a stove on top of the kettle by putting this into the neck

 that water to boil and as soon as that water boils we'll come back and I'll

 show you pouring the boiling water out and how you take the kettle off of the

About five minutes has gone by and we've got a good rolling boil in the

 kettle so I'm gonna take this stove off the top and I'm gonna pull these off.

 Now watch when you take the kettle off of the fire you don't hold the handle

 over the top you hold it back at 90 degrees like this and now I take the

 Now I can either put this back on the fire to keep the water boiling or I

 wanted to show you today I wanted to show you my new Kelly kettle.

 something as I said they haven't had in the United States very long but they've

 fire in the base fill the pot and then it acts like a chimney so just want to

 learned something today have a great day and hey take your kids camping.

 Hello people, so if you are in a hurry, one thing that I do enjoy doing is with the Crescent

 Rolls from Pillsbury, you can make some really good stuff in a few moments if you are in

 So this is one of my best items, one of the best that I do enjoy because you can get it

 in the newspaper with coupons and it's really cheap and also it's really handy at the moment

 So today we are going to make croissants with Nutella, who doesn't know Nutella, it's one

 So let's going to start by making the croissants by popping this can before doing anything

 else, it can be extremely tricky, but it can be really nice, as I said this time it opened

 really fast, as you can see the dough over here, it's rolled perfectly and we are going

 So in the meantime before you start doing anything, one thing that I advise is to place

 the oven in 350 degrees to 375 so the croissant will cook really really quickly, but it takes

 usually about 10-20 minutes, in my case 10 minutes just to be fully cooked.

 So by start doing something, I am going to make this one for me, we are going to peel

 the roll, I usually peel it on the top and I am trying to separate the sheet over here

 and I am going to have a little, almost a little right triangle, it's almost one, and

 let me grab a spoon, and we are just going to open the Nutella and really carefully,

 we are not going to take that much, look at this creamy delicious chocolate, and we are

 going to spread it in the middle, you can actually make biscuits, I usually, most of

 So when we spread the chocolate, not that much in the middle, the thing that we are

 going to do is roll it up and we are going to place it on a surface that is not heated

 previously so they won't burn, and we are going to place it evenly between 2 inches

 to 3.5 inches so they will grow perfectly, and because we bought the little version of

 the croissants, of the Peels Booty Rolls, we are going to have only 4 servings per sheet

 over here, so we are going to repeat the process again 2 more times, except this one as you

 see is a perfect right triangle, we are going to roll it really carefully, this one shall

 look better, and place it in the surface, again, same process, now we see a square over

 here, ok, now we see a rectangle, the thing that we are going to do, we are going to spread

 it, to separate it like the other one, and we are going to have the same component, 2

 perfect right triangles, we are going to spread it in the middle, not that much, so it will

 be perfect, and we are going to place it also over here in the middle, you can replace the

 chocolate with cheese, cheese is one of my favorites, and it is also really easy to make,

 you cannot imagine how many use of this do have in the moment of creating something really

 nice, and they can even be eaten by themselves, they have a really nice taste, so I am going

 to start doing it again, little by little, this one looks more perfect in the way that

 I want it, I place it in the middle, so it is going to take about 10 minutes, remember

 the oven is going to be really hot, and have some of these mittens to protect yourself,

 I am really poor with these kind of things, let me pull this out, I am going to place

 it inside, and I will be back soon again, ok so I am back again, I am going to pull

 out the croissants, remember it is 350, the temperature that you have to pull inside,

 ok, it is 350, 150, I need to please shut this out, and there we go, you see them, they

 have a really nice brown color, that is an indication that they are ready, one thing

 that I recommend, is to let the breads on a cold surface for about 10 minutes before

 you start eating them, so that you can see the actual consumption, so before doing anything

 else, I am just going to serve them, and I am going to place them over here, in the dish,

 I am going to put this away so nobody else in the house will get burned, and take a look,

 those are the croissants or biscuits with Nutella, they are really easy to make, like

 we said before, you only have to buy the Pillsbury roll, fill it up in the middle with Nutella,

 cream cheese, whatever is easy for you, heat them up about 10 minutes, about 10-15 minutes

 on a really low temperature, or if you are going to use a really high temperature like

 the one that I did, you have to be really careful to not over burn them, and that is

 So today I'm going to be doing a wash and go video for you guys.

 I haven't done one since I did my first one some months ago when my hair was much shorter.

 So I'm going to be using the World of Curls Pudding on my hair for my wash and go today.

 So anyway, what I do first is my hair is of course freshly washed and it's still wet.

 So what I'm going to do is just section it off in medium sized sections so that it will

 be ready for me to distribute the product evenly throughout my hair.

 The World of Curls Pudding, it says it has milk protein and honey in it which is in the

 So it says apply a nickel sized dollop to small sections of clean wet hair, comb from

 So as you can see I'm taking my World of Curls Pudding and I'm taking more than a nickel

 So I always alter the directions to fit my personal preference.

 And with me, any time a product is water based I try to add a sealant.

 Especially if I'm not used to it and I don't know exactly how well it's going to moisturize.

 So I'm going to be using my Queens of Curls hair butter just to seal in a little bit of

 And I'm just going to be continuing the same process until my entire head is completely

 Put on a little bit of lip gloss just to kind of brighten up my face because it's still

 I do think it was smart of me to add just a little bit of moisture.

 And that was just my preference because I know how my hair can dry easily and my hair

 But I mean you don't have to do that because this is pretty much very moisturizing by itself.

 And I'm excited to see how it's going to look at the end of the day or at least when it's

 I want to see if it's going to shrink up a whole whole lot or if I'm going to have a

 So I'll try to take a picture or a few pictures and put those at the end of what it looks

 They feel very airy and not weighed down at all or anything like that.

 I use a little bit more than called for because my hair is like super thick.

 If you feel like eating Mediterranean food, then this is the video to watch.

 I have some chickpeas, cloves, yogurt, red paprika, black pepper powder, olive oil, a

 For preparation, I have soaked a bowl of chickpeas or Kabuli chana overnight and boiled them

 I use a pressure cooker because pressure cooker helps save energy and this way we are contributing

 I had dry roasted them till they started crackling but make sure that they don't change color.

 One trick for getting the most juice out of lemon is, you just roll the lemon over.

 So after the lime, I'm going to add one tablespoon of olive oil and grind it together.

 After you've roughly chopped the garlic, add this to the mixer.

 All you have to do is grind this together and keep checking the consistency of hummus.

 As and when required, add the water which we used to boil the chickpeas.

 When you get this consistency, you add some more olive oil so that you get a nice shiny hummus.

 This is the kind of consistency you would want for your hummus.

 All you have to do is take the dried red chillies which you get in the local market,

 roast them till you get a nice fragrance, and crush them in a grinder.

 You could eat this hummus either with salads, with breadsticks,

 As of now, this is Jibraaj Jadhav signing out from Jibraaj's Kitchen.

 A couple of notes about this tutorial are that when we come to the part where we have to learn algorithms, I'm not going to teach them like a normal Rubik's Cube teacher who will say L' R' T' whatever.

 What I'm going to instead do is simplify it and maybe say right down or front counterclockwise instead of giving you the primes and what not so you don't have to learn the notation.

 If you want to learn the notation, I have a video of learning the notation on my channel and I show every single move there is and I do it using a 5x5x5 Rubik's Cube so it will also teach you the lower case notations.

 Now the first part in solving any Rubik's Cube is to mess it up.

 So we've messed it up pretty well and now what you're probably thinking is, he has a white Rubik's Cube and mine is black.

 Unless you have a white one in which case you're just like, what is he saying?

 Point is, the white Rubik's Cube has a black side instead of a white side and a purple side instead of the orange side.

 So the first thing you're going to do is start piecing together your black side or white side.

 Now you don't have to put together the white side, you can put together a different side, but I just like to start with the white or black.

 You do not have to follow that, it'll just make it easier if you follow this tutorial.

 Do not get angry with me in the comments because it's going to make you look really dumb because I've explained this before and I'm doing it again.

 But the point is, here's a black piece and every single piece is going to have three colors.

 So what I want to find is a piece that has black and either red or blue.

 I want that piece to come down here in place of this black piece.

 Now if you're having trouble with this putting it over and bringing it down part, just spend hours or a couple of days not watching tutorials,

 but just messing with the cube, trying to piece together sides left and right using human intuition versus watching a video.

 Because once you start setting your own patterns for how the cube moves and you figure out how this cube is built and how it moves,

 I can't just bring it down because it will mess up what I have.

 If you decided to start with a different size, you need a different color.

 If you've ever seen a 3x3x3 tutorial, you know that this is what I like to call the fish.

 It's not what I want to start out with for this tutorial, so bear with me for a minute.

 Hi there and welcome to Draw Stuff Real Easy and today I'm going to show you how to draw the words Happy Easter really fancy but try and make it a bit easy.

 So if you want to have a couple of lines like that just to kind of lay out what you're going to do.

 so you're going to go up and down and up and down like that maybe a bit more

 and then you want to have H A so it's kind of slanting on its own

 and the P then kind of comes around here and flicks back up there

 will start up here so curl it around and then you want it to have a little curl there

 maybe you want this to be a bit more at an angle actually like that

 in fact let's take that more you might want to start from the bottom in fact

 now the S is very strange you go up above and then come back down like that

 and the E is kind of an oval kind of like the P's and the shape of the A

 so you follow that up, go above the line and then curve back like that

 these straight lines coming down like that thicken them up a bit

 so let's get this E absolutely right that will want to be like that

 and make this thick stroke coming up to the top and that will come down

 and have that coming around so this will be a thick stroke coming up to the top there

 so thin there, thin down at the bottom and we want a blob on the end like that

 okay we are getting there, we are getting there, if I can move that across a little bit

 this will then come up with a very thin line to join up with the S

 go and have a look up here, these are some of the other ideas you can do for Easter

 Now we had a Rajasthani fest a little while ago, and this was one of the very, very most

 Here we have one cup of chickpea flour or besan And we¡¦ve sieved it, now this is

 a very important step because besan tends to have these little gutters

 of salt, ¼ teaspoon of red chili powder, ¼ teaspoon of garam masala, ¼ teaspoon of

 Now this is also a multi-step process recipe, so this is the first thing you¡¦re going

 to do, is make the dough for the gutters Then we¡¦ll add 1 tablespoon of ghee or

 clarified butter, and mix it in really well And we¡¦re going to add ¼ teaspoon of minced

 ginger, ¼ teaspoon of minced garlic, and ¼ teaspoon of minced green chilies

 Now in goes ¼ cup of yogurt So the dough is done, and over here we are

 boiling 4 cups of water And you want there to be enough depth in your

 saucepan so that when you drop it, it sits to the bottom and when the gutters are cooking,

 So while that¡¦s getting done, this is perfect time for the dough to rest and we can start

 working on the gutters Right, so first thing we¡¦re going to do

 is oil our hands, otherwise it¡¦s going to stick again to our hands

 So let¡¦s take a little bit of oil and rub, and your fingertips as well

 And we¡¦re going to take another little bit of oil and just drizzle it across here

 And just gently roll this mixture in there And now we can touch this without it making

 really thick because eventually we¡¦re going to cut them and you don¡¦t want really big

 them out so they¡¦re all the same width And the water is boiling

 very gently into the water And we¡¦re going to just allow them to cook

 till they kind of float up After a little while, right now they¡¦re

 very, very soft, but after a little while you might just want to kind of roll them up

 So it¡¦s been 5 minutes, and the gutters actually started floating about a minute before

 but we let it keep going on And 5 minutes later, we know it¡¦s really

 Now you don¡¦t want to discard this water that we¡¦re cooking in, so make sure you

 just keep it to the side We¡¦ll use it for the gravy, it¡¦s got

 a lot of flavor in it So our gutters have cooled down where we can

 Actually you can make it as big as you want, but we¡¦ve realized over time that the smaller

 they are and the more bite-sized they are, it doesn¡¦t feel like too much basin when

 of cumin seeds or jeera Allow them to sizzle, and they¡¦re doing

 And just give this a minute head start And to this we¡¦re going to add the gutters,

 the cut-up gutters And just cook it for another couple of minutes

 In the meantime, we¡¦re going to take 1 cup of yogurt, 1¼ teaspoon of chili powder,

 1¼ teaspoon of turmeric powder, 1½ teaspoon of garam masala, green chilies to taste, 1

 teaspoon of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon of minced ginger, and a little bit of salt

 Now we¡¦re going to mix this really well so the yogurt gets nice and mixed

 Okay, it¡¦s been 2 minutes So what I¡¦m going to do is I¡¦m going

 to turn off the stove for just a couple of minutes, and we¡¦re going to add the yogurt

 You can turn the stove back on, on a low And we still have the water that we boiled

 the gatas in, we still have it here We¡¦re going to add this a little bit at

 And we¡¦re still going to keep this water and not throw it out in case if our sabzi

 gets too dry or a little drier than we need, we can still use this water again

 And at this point, you can increase the heat to a medium to medium-high, and allow it to

 a spice that needed to go in the yogurt first, but we¡¦re going to go ahead and add it

 It¡¦s got quite a bit of cooking still that¡¦s going to happen, so it¡¦s okay

 So the mixture has come to a nice rolling boil At this point, we¡¦re going to cover

 it and still keep the flame on a medium And we¡¦re going to cook it for about 10

 minutes, and we¡¦ll take a look after that, but be sure you keep stirring in between

 It¡¦s thickened up quite a bit And the gatas have increased a little more

 in size, so that means they have soaked in a lot of the flavor and the curry and the

 And at this point, if you want to leave it like this, you can And actually, it¡¦s perfect

 But if you want to thicken it up a little bit more and just eat it like a sabzi, you

 Right, and if you¡¦re going to eat this a little bit later, if you¡¦re making this

 in the afternoon, you¡¦ll have it for dinner, then we suggest you keep it at this consistency

 because it will thicken up just by sitting around Exactly, it¡¦s beautiful

 So our final step, we have some cilantro, coriander leaves, chopped, and we¡¦re going

 So, enjoy your gateki sabzi and join us again on another episode of ShowMeTheCurry.com

 in the morning because with allergies you have to have everything organized.

 when I first wake up I drink two big glasses of alkaline water.

 herbal tea, golden seal, baudiarco, chamomile, echinacea, anything of that, peppermint, ginger,

 are frozen fruit, I typically get strawberries, blueberries, and mangoes.

 go to the grocery store and get the carton, whatever, coconut milk.

 milk or milk so I do typically drink coconut milk or almond milk.

 this is spinach, collard greens, a lot of times I'll use kale, even broccoli, just anything

 like this and I put it in the blender just so it can be a little bit sweeter.

I'll probably have a bowl of grapes, mangoes, anything I'm not allergic

 Today we're going to do really quick and easy ways to spruce up your home for the holidays

 For the first project we're going to make a candle centerpiece.

 You're going to need a tray of some sort, some filler, epsom salt, pearls, whatever

 Position the candles the way you want them on the tray and then pour the filler into

 You'll spread it around and get the bottom of the tray covered up to where you like it

 You can also put ribbon around it to make it look more festive.

 Next up you're going to need paper, ruler, pen, stapler, scissors, and string.

 We're going to make an ornament shaped hanging cute little kind of mobile.

 So what you'll want to do is get your ruler and draw the lines the width of the ruler.

 Cut out the strips of paper and you'll need an odd number for this project.

 So it doesn't matter how many strips of paper you use, you'll just need an odd number.

 Then with the second you'll make it a little bit lower and the third will be a little bit

 lower and that'll just, you'll basically want to make like a round shape so it kind of looks

 It's so much fun to look at especially when you have a lot hanging at one time.

 For the last project we are going to make this really cool ornament.

 What you'll need is either paper or construction paper or any type of decorative paper you want to use.

 Fold it into a triangle and then cut off the excess of the paper at the bottom.

 In this case I'm making two at once so I cut the two triangles and then I'm going to put

 Now once you fold it in half you'll cut about one inch slits into it and that will give

 you the guideline to make it look like a really cool ornament or if you want to make it into

 So you're going to open up the paper and in this case I'm going to separate the two that

 I cut out and you'll basically take a piece of tape, a very small piece of tape or glue

 Then you'll take every other one and fold it in that same direction.

 Then you'll flip it over and take the remaining ones and fold them into circles for their layer.

 If you want to make it into a snowflake you'll need either six or eight of them depending

 Just before you go check out the channel that I have with Brandon.

 You can either watch him do my makeup or check out all the videos we have over on What A B.S.

 Again, thank you guys so much and I will see you in the next video.

 And today we're going to talk about what I refer to as a turn away back kick.

 This is a really quick way for you to protect yourself if you get overrun.

 The other person may blitz off of the line and they overcome you.

 Well, when he comes at me, boom, all of a sudden he's in on top of me.

 He's negating some of my opportunity to do stuff with my blocks and things like that.

 He's come off the line so fast that I haven't been able to respond with my upper body.

 Now, we'll tighten it up even more and I'll show you how you can really get that kick up and in there tight.

 Even if you get backed up in a corner and the other person is pushing you,

 You shoot that kick up underneath there and it may push them back enough

 that they really can't get their ridge hand or whatever technique they're coming over the top.

 Remember, turn away back kick is a great tool if you get overrun.

 I am here to show you guys an updated brow tutorial as a lot of you have been requesting

 So if you want to see how I achieved the new brows that I have been rocking, you can go

 I did film this at night and if you are wondering, I am wearing Buddy Blue by Poprocks Cosmetics

 I am using Anastasia's double sided spoolie brush and on the other side, it is an angled

 I am going to go ahead and dip another angled brush into this duo eyeshadow for the brows

 We are going to go ahead and add this on the inner portion of the brow.

 Now I am going to use the other end of that spoolie slashed angled brush by Anastasia.

 I am going to dip my brush into MAC's Fluidline in Black Track.

 Yes, I do like black because I do have dark hair and it goes well with my face and my

 I know people are going to say that it is too dark, blah blah blah, but guess what?

 I am going to go ahead and dip that angled brush into the Black Track.

 I am going to go ahead and do that until I get the desired arch and shape.

 After I am satisfied with the shape and arch of my brow, I will slowly and carefully bring

 After I am done with that, I will use the other side of the angled brush which was the

 spoolie and you will see that I go back and forth blending the shadow and the gel together.

 Again, you want to make sure you do this until you get the desired blended look because this

 As you can kind of see, there was still a separation between the gel and the shadow

 because that gel liner does dry pretty quickly and I like more of a blended look and I don't

 Uh oh, it's time for the concealer part that everyone always hates but guess what?

 So, I am going to use a lighter shade of my skin tone under the brow and I am using Graf

 Tobian's corrector palette like always and I am using that lighter shade.

 Then you will see I will use the darker shade to clean up the top of the outer portion of

 Of course, if you want to be more on the neutral side or natural side, you could stop before

 this step and go on about your day but me, I like my brows looking more on the dramatic

 and cleaner side so again, yes, I will do the concealer step and make sure you do blend

 The reason why I do use a darker concealer more towards the tone of my actual foundation

 is because when you use that concealer technique with a light concealer on the top of your

 brow, a lot of the time people don't blend it in correctly into their foundation so it

 does give you that not cute concealer look that everyone always talks about.

 Of course, I do use a lighter shade on the under portion of my brow because a lot of

 the time I will use a highlight color eyeshadow to cover it as I do wear eyeshadow so if you

 are not wearing shadow, you can always do that concealer technique with the color of

 Again, that concealer look is not cute and people do talk about it, yes, but if you know

 what you're doing and you use the right colors, it is not as bad as people make it to be.

 So, yeah, I hope you guys enjoyed this look and at the end I did use Anastasia's eyebrow

 So, I hope you guys enjoyed this quick and easy eyebrow tutorial.

 Today we have three of the Frozen mystery minis and we have one of the science fiction

 Ok, we're going to do the science fiction first so we'll move these Frozens out of the

 way and you're going to open the science fiction right over here.

 Open up the box and then you can put the box right out of the way.

 Now Skyler is going to open the first Frozen blind box mystery mini.

 Tell us below in the comments which one of these you like the best.

 So you're going to use a box of just devil's food cake, three eggs, Toll House Nestle chocolate

 chips or any chocolate chips you want, Jell-O instant chocolate pudding, a little bit of

 canola oil, cold milk, there's water in here I swear, you may not be able to see it on

 Now the thing I want to show you is, this is really cool, I just found out that these

 They're slow cooker liners that you can put in your crock pot and then you just pull it

 Okay, first thing we're going to do is we're going to make the cake batter.

 Going to be the cake, going to be the water, the oil, get the eggs in there.

 Bring your crock pot right here, can you get a good shot of that?

 You're going to cook this on high for three hours and you're going to test it with a toothpick.

 And if it comes out moist and crumbly on the toothpick, it's done.

 That's that's chocolate upon chocolate upon chocolate warm in your mouth.

 I can't eat a lot of this because it's really sweet, but it's it's kind of fluffy and airy.

 I threw it all in the in the crockpot and then I'm just going to pull this out.

 I'm going to rip it out and throw it out and my crockpot is still clean.

 It's the Lazy Man's Chocolate Lava Cake or Lava Chocolate Cake.

 Hello YouTube, today I am going to show you how to hook up the Xbox One.

 HDMI out is where you would put your HDMI cable and hook it up to your TV.

 Some of the tools that you are provided to work with cats that aren't nice and need a little bit more restraint,

 And let's say the cat is doing okay, but you're kind of a little bit worried.

 You can slip the slip leash around the cat's neck just to have something to grab.

 This is not to suspend the cat by, but let's say you get the cat out of the carrier,

 and you put it kind of loosely around the cat's neck because you're still in the general petco area,

 the owner can hold onto the leash or you can hold onto the leash while you're scruffing the cat.

 And again, if it turns out that the cat is getting away from you,

 this is just to keep him from getting loose and not to suspend him by the neck.

 It's just an extra little piece of safety that you use carefully not to choke the cat.

 The ones you'll have actually hold your muzzles and gloves and leashes,

 and it's a bigger bag, but it's this kind of nylon laundry bag.

 and then you can dump the cat into the bag out of the carrier if it doesn't want to come out.

 This one, which I just opened, is a little bit too small for that purpose,

 but you would put the opening of the laundry bag over the door of the carrier,

 and then on top of your sleeves, if it's a dangerous cat, you've got these gloves,

 I know it's instinct to pull away if a cat is trying to bite you or scratch you,

 but if you've got these gloves on, it really cannot bite through the gloves.

 It'll take some practice before you don't just automatically pull away because it's an instinct,

 The problem is it's hard to hold on to anything really well once you have the gloves on.

 And then also you can use a towel to cover the cat's head, hide its eyes,

 but again, all these measures are just for when a cat has already shown you

 So the next couple clips, we're going to go into using each one of these with some feral cats.

 I already covered my eyebrows, I have a tutorial about it if you wanna check

 And now what I'm gonna do, I'm gonna use the TV stick paint by Kryolan

 Because I really need to cover everything, you know, to draw my face

 But I always do this, going out from my eyes here, like a shadow

 You can also start doing your nose, make it thinner already if you want to

 But this video is really about only this, only the contouring I do

 For example, when I'm really in a hurry, that's the one I do always

 And you can really change the shape of your face if you want to do with this technique

 And for the final touch, I start with my powder, my loose powder

 And if you really want to do a little touch of glamour in your face

 I have the perfect party food that you can make for the big game.

 it at home or tailgating it, these spicy Korean chicken wings will help get your fierce, competitive

 of soy sauce, 1 quarter cup of gochujang, which is basically the spicy Korean red pepper

 paste that you can find at most local supermarkets nowadays or at the Asian market.

 1 quarter cup of honey, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon of grated ginger, 1 tablespoon

 of rice vinegar, 1 tablespoon of sesame oil, about a tablespoon of sesame seeds, and 1

 a little bit of char, lower the heat and extend the cooking time.

 your soy sauce, gochujang, honey, sesame oil, and rice vinegar and mix it well.

 Now that your chicken's done cooking, add the sauce and mix it well.

 Make sure that every chicken is coated with the sauce so that you get that nice flavor.

 Now take your chicken and throw it back on the grill for another 5 minutes.

 You're heating up the sauce so that it develops a nice caramelization and crust on the chicken.

 For a little bit of garnish, I like to add a little bit of sesame seeds and the chopped

 It has that nice crunch from the caramelization and the flavor of the sesame seeds.

 six months of thinking about it and then six months of deciding the contract

 The dish I'm going to cook for you today, it's currently on my menu

 the turbot is from Scrabster, it's going to be served with some snails

 is someone that's been regularly used for the menu for the past two years.

 morel mushrooms cooked in an emulsion, finished with some fevs and peas

 mimolette cheese from the north east of France in the town of Lille.

 Now the turbot's got a natural line straight down which is going to take you

What I'm going to be using for this dish is purely the fillet here

 So what I need to do is take them out of the shell and the best

 taste it again in half an hour I'll taste the thyme and the garlic too

 After I've filleted the turret I basically just give it a light wash

 very firm, leave it in the fridge cling filmed for a couple of days

 some fresh peas and febs and then the dish is finished with some shaved

 Then what I like to do is draw the notes just on there like this.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to go ahead and fill it all in.

 So the reason why I like to do this is because it gives me a kind of an overall visual.

 It's kind of a neat way to look at it and kind of see it with your eyes and your mind.

 OK, and keep in mind that it is upside down on the guitar neck.

 make an anklet or a bracelet and I was wearing it and a little kid or something or somehow

 it got tugged or pulled on, if it was made with split rings on the end, it's probably

But if you do it with jump rings, the jump ring is one piece of wire

 and if it gets tugged on, the jump ring can open and you can lose your bracelet or your

 the jump ring off and I switched them out with my split rings because I didn't want

So you can use them on a clasp and you can use them to keep your charms from

Now you can buy a split ring tool, it's a plier, that opens these.

 if you can't find them where you live, you're going to have to order them on the internet.

 If you don't want to spend the money on them, you're going to have to open these the old

I'm going to take the pocket knife and I'm going to put it in between these

 So be very careful that the ring doesn't get away from you and put the chain nose pliers

 the spring ring really good and slide the charm over the split ring.

 to hold the little froggy and turn the spring until he's on it.

 in your hands or something like that, you're probably going to want to get the tool because

 video, leave me a comment, subscribe if you want to see more videos, and follow me on

 Hi everyone, today I will make one of the most popular Korean traditional holiday drinks,

 There are not many ingredients in it, however it takes long time to make.

 It tastes a little like iced tea, but it has a unique barley and rice flavor.

 Lunar New Year is coming soon, so try this cool and sweet Korean drink for that special

 Soak 2 cups of malted barley powder in 6 cups of cold water for an hour.

 Rub and squeeze the powder in water for several minutes to make the water a milky color.

 Strain the milky water and combine it with the first straining.

 Leave the barley water sit for 6 hours or overnight in the refrigerator.

 About 1 hour before you remove the barley mixture from the refrigerator, cook about

 So use a slightly small amount of water when you cook the rice.

 The powder will sink to the bottom and clear water will be on top.

 Pour the clear water from the barley mixture into your rice cooker.

 Pour any leftover barley water into a separate container and save it for later.

 After pouring off the clear water, you will have leftover powder from the bottom.

 Put your rice cooker to the keep warm function for about 3 hours.

 Save the rice in a container with a little bit of cold water in your refrigerator.

 Pour the barley water and rice from the rice cooker into a large pot along with the leftover

 Once it starts to boil again, cook for 15 more minutes on medium high and then turn

 When you serve the drink, pour some of it into a bowl or a cup then add some of the

 So for today's video, I'll be showing you guys how to make these super cute and super delicious cake ice cream bars.

 They literally taste like a cake pop enveloped in ice cream, and they're perfect for those super hot summer days.

 Please be sure to give this video a big thumbs up, and without further ado, let's get started.

 So first off, you will need your choice of ice cream, a box of cake mix, icing, and of course, a popsicle mold.

 So first, take your cake mix and mix it up as if you were baking a cake.

 Next, mix 4 tablespoons of icing into your cake crumbles, as if you were making cake pops.

 Be sure to evenly and firmly pack the mixture into the bottom of the pan.

 Next, place your mixture into the freezer for about 10 to 20 minutes.

 After taking your mixture out of the freezer, cut it into small rectangles.

 It should be big enough to fit into the mold, and small enough so the ice cream can surround it later.

 Again, place your mixtures in the freezer for about 10 to 20 minutes.

 Using a small pot, melt about 2 scoops of ice cream on low heat until it's completely melted.

 Once melted, pour in the ice cream about halfway into the mold.

 This is optional, but you could pour in some sprinkles into the mold to make it a little more decorative.

 Let it sit in the fridge overnight to allow the popsicles to completely harden.

 To remove the popsicles, let it sit in warm water for a couple of seconds.

 I know it looks intimidating, but it's as easy to make as pizza.

 It's a social bread intended to be shared and dipped in olive oil, like Focaccia.

 If you don't have herbs de Provence, you can use your favorite blend of savory herbs,

 Last thing I need to do now is cover the bowl with plastic wrap.

 so that it'll be ready for me any time I want to make it tomorrow.

 Fougasse, like all of the flatbreads, doesn't need a second proofing.

 I move the rack to the middle of the oven and set the temperature to 450 degrees.

 Then I'll roll it out on the work surface, all the flour, and all.

 During the time it stuck to it a little bit because the yeast was at work.

 The reason I want to baste the bottom is that when I shape the loaf, it will be much easier to shape.

 It was the olive oil on the bottom that caused it to naturally open because it was able to slide.

 The oven hasn't come to temperature yet, so I set the Fougasse on the oven and covered it with a lint-free towel.

 Place the Fougasse in the oven and set the timer for 15 minutes.

 Introduction to No-Knead Pizza, Restaurant Style Flatbread, and more.

 the nice top shelf triple sec, your Cointreau, is shining through.

 And then we've got Costco pork chops that I'm dicing and slicing there.

 And then there's a couple more in here that still aren't done because they're, you know,

 Alright people, it is Sunday night and we're having breakfast night because it's the last

 night before we get groceries so we're scraping the bottom of the barrel.

 I just diced them up so they're kind of like an O'Brien potatoes.

 A little scrambled eggs action there and our world famous pancakes where the wife will

 And then I just got a sweet potato and then regular baker potatoes for the family and

 baked them for about an hour in the oven and then loaded them with cheese and sour cream

 And we got some sautéed up fresh asparagus and then I made some whipped up potatoes.

 And she's been over here like screaming at me because she sees the mashed potatoes.

 So anyway, that's what's for dinner Tuesday night, Veterans Day.

 So for Wednesday night, somebody's first birthday, she gets leftovers.

 And then mashed potatoes, leftovers from last night, sour cream, cheese, green onions,

 We got salt and pepper, a little olive oil, and then we got our traditional...that is

 now potatoes, onions, red pepper, green pepper, mushrooms, carrots, and then this time we

 Please thumbs up this video if these recipes helped you guys stick to your budget this

 We spend $500 a month on groceries and we eat like this every single day.

 Let us know what you're cooking down below and frugal meal ideas.

 What I want to do is give her some really loose, soft, tousled waves.

 What I want to start with first is just to show how to use this flat iron and give the hair some really soft waves

So you get this effect of smooth and then these soft, tousled waves.

 What I do first is take this section right here in front of the ear.

 I'm going to take my spray and play, which is our fast drying finishing spray.

Then I'm going to take my flat iron and use it as if it were a curling iron.

 You know, whether you want it tighter or if you want it looser.

 It gives that texture and that different shape curl that you just can't use, that you don't get with a flat iron.

 I think having that different texture in there really makes the curl look different.

 It's different from curling with a curling iron or electric curlers.

 You really get to use that and you can give it whatever size you want.

 You have to work fast with it because you don't want this on the hair,

 And even with that, I've used our Keratin Blowout in her hair, which is a protectant.

 It's a great leave-in conditioner that really gives added moisture to these ends

 And what I think makes these curls look newer or more modern is that I'm not curling the scalp.

 creating that volume and that texture where it's just that messy tousled look,

 You can see every time I turn that flat iron, I click it to open it and feed the hair in there,

 And using a little bit of spraying clay gives it a little crisper, firmer shape so it doesn't fall.

 What's great about this too is this can be done, this would last two or three days.

 You can see that little bit of that steam, that steam that's coming out of her hair.

 Just totally different from a curling iron or electric rollers.

 You just have a little more control of where you're putting the curl,

 It's on a short hair that I do this on that gives a great look.

 Even though she's got long hair, you don't have to have long hair for this.

 Once I get these last three in, I'll have her turn her head over,

 You could brush this out and you'd get volume and just loose movement.

 I'm going to do one on the underneath and one on the top and we've got the curl in.

 See, I've got some little straight ends hanging out, but you know, that looks good.

 And if you try to flat iron their hair and then curl the hair, it does not work.

 Once you've straightened it with a flat iron, you really cannot get it to bend again.

 I'm just going to turn her around so you can see what that looks like.

 Now, if I were to brush that out, it would really lose all of that.

 So what I want to do is just shake it out and leave this hair tousled and soft.

 And go right underneath, pulling this out and separating that just with your hands.

 Then you've got all this nice texture and loose curl that really has got just fabulous hair.

 She's got several shades of red in here now, and it really plays up her hair color.

 Her ingredients don't match up with the flavor she's looking for.

 Our marinade includes lime juice, cilantro, some green onions, shallots, garlic, ginger,

 and a little more zestiness and tanginess, a little more extra lime rind there.

 Brandy, we're gonna finish this marinade by whisking in some olive oil.

 All right, Brandy, now let's put our shrimp and our marinade in the fridge for about 20,

 All right, Brandy, the cool thing about making this dry seasoning is you can put it away

 All right, Brandy, my shrimp has been marinated for roughly 20 minutes in the cooler.

 We're gonna season with our dry seasoning and put them on the grill.

 Brandy, be sure to use two skewers when doing this or else your shrimp's gonna fall all

 Now we're shooting this in Chicago and let me tell you something, that wind just whips

 You said you like the GF Grill anyways so this is what we're gonna do.

 You get the spice from that cayenne and that smoked paprika and of course that lime juice

 Brandy, I can't even tell you, I'm gonna absolutely devour these things.

 I don't care if it's traditional or maybe it's just a household favorite, something

 So I'm going to show you how to make cinnamon apple cake, which is another one of these

 Then we're going to put in a half a stick of margarine, or margerin, or margie, or...

 Okay, and a little bit of vanilla, a little smidgen of vanilla here.

 Okay, so now we're going to put that and mix it well until it's blended.

 And then we're going to pour a little cinnamon on top of it like this.

 And then you put it inside for an hour and 15 minutes, 350 degrees.

 You've got to just mix them all together, and then you put them in an 8-inch spring

 foam pan with some ham, and then just bake it in the oven for an hour and 15 minutes,

So, you've bought your juicer, but what on earth do you put through it?

 I'm going to be demystifying the juicer to give you a guide to the different produce

 such as kale or Tuscan cabbage as us Aussies like to call it, spinach, collard greens.

 It's important to remember to wash them thoroughly to remove any remaining grit or dirt that

 by harder fruits or vegetables like apples to ensure that all the greens get fully juiced.

 Now, an essential tip to remember is to thoroughly wash earth and root vegetables before putting

Personally, I like to leave the peel on, but it does create a little bit of

So, if you peel your lemons and limes, remember to keep as much of this

 white pith on as possible as it contains nutrients that can help your body absorb amazing antioxidants

 traditionally eat such as pineapple, melon or kiwi, it's best to use your common sense

So, that's a wrap on my handy hints and tips on what to put through your juicer.

 I just finished up eating some lunch, just chowed on a bunch of tomatoes.

 The flavor really comes out best if you leave them out, kind of room temp.

 This is not anything that takes a long time, it doesn't require a lot of ingredients.

 Try to get organic when you can with raisins because they're grapes that have been really concentrated.

 So let's see, I just actually made some so I've already eaten a lot so I'm gonna do a small amount.

 These aren't gonna be little chocolate covered raisins that you just pick up.

 This is gonna be something you eat more with the spoon because the chocolate sauce is not...

 Obviously this isn't... I guess it's real chocolate but it's not gonna harden like a shell on those chocolate covered raisins that are not very good for you.

 These are gonna taste just as good and be delicious and you can have chocolate covered raisins for dessert or while you're snacking, watching a movie or some TV or the kids want something kind of sweet.

It's very bitter so if you're making dessert, you can adjust the sweetness as you like.

 And then you shake in your raisins right in your bowl so we don't dirty up much of anything.

 It's probably got more than three ingredients like what we're doing here.

 Took us uh... I mean if I had to sit here and explain it to you guys, I can make a batch in less than two minutes.

I didn't know what I was going to have for dessert because I wanted something sweet.

 But I saw the raisins and I thought, ah, chocolate covered raisins.

 So you got a sweet tooth like I do and you want to stay on track with your goals and whatnot.

 It's good to have these little... know about these little things to have on hand.

 Because a lot of times you have raisins on hand and you know, if you have raw cacao powder, use a little cocoa powder.

 But much healthier choice than reaching for some of the other processed stuff.

 a pretty standard kale that you can find in the seed packets at any seed store that you

 To the right you can actually see red Russian kale that overwintered.

 Gently hold the top of the plant, fill in around it, press it in, and then you can go

 Gently hold the top of the plant, fill in around it, press it in, and find your next

 If you found this video interesting, please check out my blog at www.therustedgarden.blogspot.com.

 Hi welcome back once again to howtocookgreatfood.com if you haven't already please subscribe to

 Ok the wok is really hot, it's really important that this wok gets really really hot, this

 I've got a touch of oil in there, we're starting to smoke a little bit now.

 Really important part this is, this stage will infuse that oil.

 I'm using the sunflower oil, you can use any oil you like really, it's entirely up to you.

 So boneless, skinless chicken breast and as you will see in a moment it's cut very thin.

 The chicken being so thin, means that this is going to cook really quickly.

 I'm going to stir this around for like just a couple of minutes, 2 minutes and I'll be back.

 Get a little bit of black pepper in there, ground black pepper.

 Not adding any salt to this dish because we're going to be adding our soy sauce and that will contain enough saltiness.

 A few green peppers there, again cutting the same way as the chicken is, just to add a little bit of flavour really and a little bit of colour.

 But yeah a couple of red fresh chillies chopped in there will give it a nice kick.

 Now depending on how you like your bean sprouts, depends on how long we're going to cook this for.

 Other people like them cooked for a long time in lots of soy sauce, kind of boiled in the soy sauce.

 Now I've got some soy sauce, I'm using a dark soy sauce, feel free to use a light one.

 Again a lovely aroma is coming from this, that ginger and garlic is really working wonders.

 That chicken because it's so thin, look, I mean it's so thin, so so thin, it's already cooked.

 OK I'm going to cook this for about one more minute on a really high heat.

 Hey YouTube, I know it's been two years since I did a video, but I got a new mic and I got

 I'm going to try to be uploading videos more often and I'm going to try to listen to your

 And I know a lot of you suggested that I teach you how to do the strumming for Horse With

 First of all I'm going to talk to you in down and up strokes, so obviously down stroke and

 The other thing is you need to know how to do a chuck, which is kind of a percussive

 You just mute the strings with the palm of your hand and still strum.

 And it kind of, you know, you hear, if you want you can mute with your left hand too,

 Maybe for the third I'm going to talk about just hitting the bass strings, the lowest

 So the strumming pattern would be bass, down, bass, up, down, up.

 Some embellishments you can do for this song, what I like to do is that high note there.

 And all that really is, is I'm just taking my pinky finger and I'm putting it on the

 And then another thing I'll do is I like to just kind of throw in random hammer-ons.

 And you can either do those on the second fret of the E string, second fret of the A

 If you want to give ideas to others, go ahead and either put them in the comments below

 Home butchery might seem like an incredibly daunting thing to do but I'm

 gonna show you with a few little tips and tricks that actually it's quite

 you look at it it's got lovely bit of fat covering onto it, that's what you

What we're gonna do today is we're gonna butterfly, basically means

 we're taking the bone out and that makes it a perfect joint for doing on a

If you've got a knife and you need to give it a bit of a sharpen, what you

 just straightening the blade and you just do that by just rubbing it at a 2%

 two kilos, now that's gonna feed probably about six to eight but what you've got

 to bear in mind is once you've taken the bone out it's gonna reduce in weight

 and I recommend about 100 grams per person of raw meat so by the time that's

 cooked and some of the moisture's come out it's gonna be about 70 grams which is

 about perfect and also the other thing to remember is all the leftover little

 want to do is you want to just give the bone a little wiggle and the thing with

 meat is that it's all about feeling it you know you don't want to be shy about

 it and you want to know where you're cutting and we're basically going

 find it, wiggle your way in and you'll see that it starts to open up.

 kind of got through that little bit there then we're just gonna pull a line

Now you want to cut your shank as a good size but you want to leave more of

 angle and we'll just cut across and hopefully it'll just come off in one

 so you would you know nice little sauce, a few vegetables, cook it for about an

So looking at this bit of lamb here you might be thinking there's quite a

 lot of fat in here, don't worry we're gonna trim all of that off and we're

 outside that's just gonna keep it nice and juicy when we're cooking it but all

 the gristly bits they're all gonna go but none of it goes to waste by the way.

 So the first thing we do is we just want to trim off this kind of top layer of

So just taking your knife just peeling it off so we'll just trim

 through and always cutting away from yourself you never want to you know

 This next stage is the most fiddly bit what we're gonna do is we're gonna take

 out the H bone and it's quite a kind of weird awkward looking bone.

 too daunting just ask your butcher I'm sure he'll happily do it.

 we just need to tease going into the top side off this top bit.

 the bone so keep your knife always on the bone you're not gonna be slashing

 into the precious meat and then you just want to follow the knife going down down

 this bone bit here and then when you come to this bit here you'll see the

 ball socket joint we're gonna have to kind of scoop inside there so just using

 your knife just tease it in and then we just need to just tease this bit off the

 don't throw them away they're perfect for putting into casseroles for later use or

 putting into your sauce or whatever you're making a nice little gravy

 nothing goes to waste so bring it around and then we're just gonna cut them off

 now we're gonna do is we're gonna chop out the thigh bone this is quite an easy

 one just teasing the meat away from the bone as we did with the H bone.

 mine often you know say to me they go oh I don't like lamb it's so fatty but actually you know lamb

 these days is nowhere near as fat as it used to be when our grannies used to have it

 just through you know kind of better farming techniques but also butchering

 you know we chop out all the internal fat which is not the stuff that you want

 but we just leave a little layer on the top and that basically will self baste

 but as it cooks it melts off ends up in the bottom of the tray so you don't

 actually end up eating it so you know this whole kind of perception that lamb's

 little ball socket bit and it's kind of like a double-ended one we just need to

 chop that out being quite careful trying to keep as little meat on the bone and

 bone up just kind of tease it out sticking as close to the bone as

 possible and there's a little kind of knuckly bit we just want to chop that

 out it's easy we get it out in one piece there you go so now we've got our

 lamb all the bones been taken out what you want to do now is kind of just feel

 over it and just check to see if there's any little bits of bone left in you

 don't want that so there's a little bit of gristle there off the H bone.

 oh why can't I do that with a shoulder whereas if you think about a leg of lamb

 it's at the back the leg doesn't do as much work as the shoulder does so

 tends to be the shoulder is better for slower cooking it's good for kind of

 casseroles and slow roasting whereas the leg is um you know it doesn't work

 quite as much and it's got more solid meat it doesn't have fat going through

 it and that just means it's better for quick cooking and having it nice and pink.

 Right so we finished all of our trimming now this is the bit where you could

 put stuffing in it you put some marinade in it I'm just gonna season it with some

 nice salt and pepper good bit of sea salt get it all in there a bit of cracked

 black pepper I really like rosemary I think it works really well with lamb so

 what I'm gonna do is I'm just gonna lay some through the middle like this and

 and then what we want to do is we just want to form it into a kind of leg shape so you're

 kind of trying to get it nice and neat and now what we're gonna do is we're

 gonna tie it you could use some butchers bands they're those kind of elastic bands

 you kind of put on that you see at the butcher shop you can cook with them so

 don't take them off because it'll fall to bits I'm gonna use some butcher

 string so this is quite easy all you gotta do is loop it underneath start in

 the middle and then you're just gonna make yourself a nice little slipknot

 legs taking shape it's starting to look more like something you get from your

 cooking in the oven you want to whack your oven up to like 220 degrees hot as

 it can go a bit of oil salt and pepper on the outside put it in the oven for

 about 20 minutes that's gonna give it a nice crust get loads of caramelization

 bit of tinfoil and then I like mine quite you know kind of medium-rare so I

 would give it maybe an hour on top of that you know if you want it well done

 give it an hour and 45 minutes take it out give it that all-important rest and

 and that you're gonna feel inspired and go home and do that yourself.

 still not feeling confident you can go to our website Simply Beef and Lamb and

 they've got loads of top tips they've got videos they've got recipe suggestions

 tell what a quality piece of lamb looks like I recommend go see a butcher go to

 there look for the quality standard mark because it guarantees that it's gonna be

 scheme provides you with high levels of assurance about the meat you buy and it

 is independently inspected right from the farms that the meat comes from

 Hey, this is Valentine a lot of people been emailing me saying like hey

 Could you teach me some stuff on bass or guitar or whatever so I decided I'm going to do that

 And then if you're a starter you you know if you're a beginner you can just go so the first thing I want to choose

 A g chord you pretty much put your fingers like this and then that's a g chord so you know g chord

 I'm not a very good teacher so as far as a C chord goes you just put your fingers like there

 We know this if you're keeping up now if you got to pause the video.

 I'll tell you when to pause it like just to look at my fingers where they're at okay pause it

 Okay, so now that's where you can see the placement so as far as it keeps going you go GC and D

It's that something you know I mean and a lot of people have problems like

 Focus in how to pick like I usually use this that's what I use I use like a penny

 That's what I use for pics because it's the best for your strings your strings won't wear out all fast if you use a pen

 So I would start really like there's a lot of picking styles like some people are in a metal some people are into different things

 So I would start with something simple if you're picking so I'll do something like

 Know when you're faster, you'd be able to do that faster, but like as a beginner you want to slow it down

 You know I mean like cuz you're beginning, you know so don't even take so

 Focus again here stop it on there's the G pause it look at my fingers look where they're at

 It's that perfect D. That's a perfect D. It's hard to hit a perfect D, and I mean

 So now we're gonna add them all together, and we'll use the pick same picking style

 You should be able to like since you just started this stuff is really we'll get to the hard stuff later

 That's something that anyone can just pick up a guitar and play so I hope you I help you out

 Wow what is there any kind of other skills for like beginners could do I guess like

 You know me like stuff like that is something that if you're but you shouldn't practice that I mean if you're above like

 Like don't even worry about that stuff because you're too late.

 You know it's beginner stuff anyways that doesn't do anything for anybody

 It's all beginner I'll be getting so just remember those chords pause it

 That's it this has been a lesson by my grinder Valentine, I gotta stop the camera, so I gotta look down

 While you're watching our Bollywood favorite, Like Stars on Earth, feast on a creamy chicken

 korma dish perfectly paired with a spicy chili and lime garlic sauce.

 Not only are we excited for the korma, but we've also created an amazing sauce to go

 Do you want to talk a little bit about where we found this recipe?

 Well, there's this famous Indian actress named Madhra Jaffrey and she's also a chef.

 So we started with her recipes and then ended up changing a bunch of different things and

 We have some cardamom pods, some cloves, some bay leaves, and some cinnamon.

 While that's sauteing, we're going to use our little friend mini chop here.

 We're going to add into it some almonds, some garlic, some ginger, some water, and some

 This is going to make a really delicious paste that goes straight in with our aromatics.

 Alright, once this all comes together really nicely, we add in, doesn't that look amazing?

 You want to start to see a little bit of the color changing, a little bit of the water

 The reason that we want to see a little bit of evaporation is because the word korma actually

 And braising essentially means that we're going to start off with a dry heat so that

 This is the step that takes the longest because you really want the onions to brown nicely

 So we're going to let this sit and stir it for about four minutes and then we're going

 Yeah, they've lost a lot of their moisture which is what we're looking for.

 Korma always has something sort of creamy in it whether or not it's yogurt or even sometimes

 Again, we want to reduce everything so we add it in, give it a little bit of time.

 And what did you take out during the break when we were letting the onions cook?

 Usually Indian recipes don't even call for removing them, you just eat around them but

 Put the lid on, reduce it down, cook it for about half an hour.

 This isn't very spicy and we like our food to be kind of spicy so we've created a sauce

 One of the main ingredients in the sauce are the serrano peppers and some garlic cloves

 And the way you do that is you put it in a pan, put a little bit of olive oil and you

 So we've done that and we're going to add that to the Cuisinart.

 And now we're going to do the juice of two limes and a bit of zest.

 You want to do the zest first because if you try to do the juice first, you'll have floppy

 The great thing about this sauce is we're not going to add it into the big pot.

 We are going to give it to people to add to their own food so if they don't want it spicy

 This is also a nice sauce if you want you can eat it with Mexican food.

 At the end we're going to add some peas, a little bit more cream.

 We're going to give it another ten minutes and then it will be done.

 We're going to construct that fly in a way you've never seen it done before.

 And it'll be Western style because I'm using moose for the tail and calf for the wing.

 Now remember, I placed the wing material on my side of the hook a little bit long,

 and then let thread torque position the material back on the top of the hook shank.

 Now let's just reach in there and trim that out at a severe angle

 All right, now let's show you another little trick that I didn't on the last fly,

 Sometimes the hair has a tendency to sneak down around under the bottom side of the hook.

 take a loop around the clump of hair, and then back to that same position,

 Now let's go ahead and wrap a ball of thread in front to stand the winging material up.

 Now there's several ways that we can go about posting the parachute platform on the wing material.

 You can reach up above like most people do and wrap up the post, if you will,

 I did it for years myself, but over the years I've developed bursitis in my shoulders,

 What about going up the post from the side by rotating the jaws?

 But I think when you get right down to it, in this particular situation,

 I'm going to rotate the vice and wrap up the post by going down.

 Now I want to bring my centering gauge into the equation again.

 So I'll just move the jaws a little bit to place the wing on axis,

 move the centering gauge out of the way, and let's just go back.

 I think you're starting to get a little bit of a hint of what I'm going to do.

 And we'll just kind of dust that old muskrat dubbing into place.

 at least one out of five flies would end up with a slightly clogged eye,

 I want to tie my hackles on at that first turn in front of the wing.

 and then put dubbing back on so they can finish the front part of the fly.

 Do the front part of the fly, the dubbing, as we tie on the feather.

 Then I'm going to rotate the vice to wrap up to the top of the post.

 A couple of stickers missing, and as you can expect there are a couple of marks around it.

 It also comes with some hand guards, but they're a bit scuffed.

 And by the time it is purchased, it will have a new brake lever on it, as you can see.

 As it does start, first kick, when cold, even after a few days.

 I shall just take it off the box and move it into position to do that for you.

 Now if you only fire your Weber up during warm weather months, don't let the cold weather

 Winter time can still set the stage for some great grilled meals.

 Sure the driveway or sidewalk may need cleared, but so do your grills.

 A clear path makes for a safe walkway and helps reduce the snow and water I drag back

 The distance to your grills may be short, but the minute the backyard shuffle runs long,

 you're going to regret not bundling up or in my case, pulling out a hat.

 When you dress, be sure to avoid anything that dangles like a scarf.

 Be prepared with a flashlight, headlamp, or outdoor floodlights.

 Keep stocked up on extra fuel, extra charcoal, and if using propane, an extra and filled

 While grilling in the cold may be uncomfortable, it doesn't impact your grilling like the

 Try to keep your grills protected from the wind, and especially during long cooks.

 That stiff breeze can drastically affect cook temperatures and times.

 I like to leave a light on outside to remind me my grill needs attending to.

 Scrape the grates clean, and once the grill is cool, which doesn't take long on nights

 Believe it or not, I often have more enjoyment and get more adventurous with my grilling

 With so much downtime on cold, snowy days, planning a great dinner and spending time

 at the grill is a fun way of passing these long, frigid days of winter.

 I mainly use little wood burners like the Emberlight and alcohol stoves.

 Never used one of these gas stoves, but I've seen a couple of reviews on YouTube about

 And it boils water a lot quicker than the Emberlight and my alcohol stove.

 It takes me about six minutes on those stoves, plus the Emberlight I've got to start a fire.

 And this one, on the reviews I've seen on YouTube, it takes about three minutes to get

 boiling water, which I want to use for when I'm out running dogs or just hiking to make

 I like to get the skillet nice and hot before I put the eggs in the rings.

 If it runs out the side, you just scrape it up and throw it on the egg.

 It will be great for heating up some quick coffee out in the field when I'm running dogs or hiking.

 My name is Brigitte and in this video I would like to show you how to correctly

 these results are because people do not apply it the right way.

 This is what happened to me, I applied it the first time as well.

 didn't look anything great or anything close to what I expected.

 So I thought this is not working but then somebody showed it to me how to

 coming from green tea leaves so they're all natural so you wanna prepare those

 two tubes, get them ready and the instructions say that you should apply it

 that just starting with the transplanting gel will work for me better

 you can do on the bottom part as well, I don't have great lashes on the bottom so I don't

 you can remove it, I have a makeup remover I'll remove it with that

 how amazing my lashes turned out to be compared to the one I have no

 look how long my lashes came out to be, I'll try to show you from this side

 hope you can see, but you see and my lashes are not clumpy at all

 just play with it again, practice it a little bit, everything new takes a little

 Hi, my name is Greg and I'm going to show you how to set up your Keurig machine.

 Once you have your machine out of the packaging, you're going to want to unwrap the cord and

 There should be a button with a circle and a line going through the top of it.

 Since you are just setting this up, you won't have any water in it.

 You're going to want to take the cover off your water reservoir.

 You can see there's latches on here that hold it on and then it will also be connected on

 You pull this off, take it to your sink and fill it up with water.

 You can fill it up, you know, stay below the line you should see on yours.

 So just the same way the reservoir came off, you want to put it back on and down and to

 the machine motion making sure those latches are hooked into the machine.

 My machine is already plugged in so the heating unit is already set up.

 This is the first time it may take up to four minutes for it to suck some water in and heat

 Once you're here you're going to want to take a mug, at least 10 ounces in size, kind of

 Place it down on the drip tray and pull this out since I've already done it.

 This is how the machine knows that you've had a cup in there and you're ready to brew.

 But because you're just setting this up you want to do this empty and hit the largest

 If there's any dust or plastic particles in it, it will run through once and come out

 You should probably clean out the cup just in case there was something in there.

 If you want more information about Keurigs and K-Cups, you can go to our website at APerfectK-Cup.com.

 You can sign up for our email list where we'll give you deals and the newest K-Cups coming

 we're going to make another delicious Maharashtrian rice preparation called

For this we're going to add tempering of mustard seeds, when the

 mustard seeds crackle, add cumin seeds and add chopped onion, chopped green

 chilli and curry leaf, add salt now you see this onions have nicely sweated but

 you don't need to get them brown in color or something, add little bit of

 hing, turmeric you know this rice is going to be little yellowish in color so

 red chilli powder and garam masala then add chopped tomatoes you know make sure

 that these tomatoes are nicely soft and cooked when the tomatoes are nicely

 ok this is more like the fried rice be careful if you are using basmati rice do

 not you know break the rice so be careful in mixing this rice what I like

 to do is just toss this, switch off the flame and finish it off by adding chopped

 coriander and let it sit for you know five minutes before serving so that all

 this is a very nice way of converting white rice into a very nice flavorful

 learning this with your VahChef but remember vahrehvah is all about

 inspiring others to cook so please post your recipes and cooking tips at

 And the three polishes I'm using are the Sally Hansen's Hardest Nails Extreme Wear in White

 I also taped off the finger that was going to be dunked in the water marble design.

 I started off with two drops of Celeb City and basically used two drops of each nail

 Once my bullseye was created, I used my orange stick and I drew through one end of the polish

 The design here that I made is totally random and you'll see that as I continue to draw

 This design is big enough to dunk two nails at a time, but since I've done all the other

 Pressing down through the nail polish, I shook it a little bit to kind of separate the nail

 polish from my finger and then used a cotton bud or cotton swab to clean up the excess

 I was also blowing a little bit on the polish to make sure that it was hardened or dry enough

 After I finished cleaning off the surface of the water, I pulled my finger out very

 carefully and very gently so as not to disturb the design underneath and I cut the tape off

 and cleaned up around the cuticle area and the sides with any nail polish remover.

 And the next part is the coinage stamping with the special nail polish in silver and

 I wanted to get half of the star on my nail in the top left hand corner and that gave

 me plenty of room to stamp the other full image on the other bottom corner of the nail.

 I'm a big fan of fairy dust and I wanted the black nail with the stars on it to have kind

 of a little bit of a sparkle like the rest of the nail so I'm just applying one coat

 I hope you found the tutorial helpful and again thanks for watching.

 Okay, as you can see, we've stitched the front of the bodice to the back pieces with a little

 Because we want to do, or at least I want to show you how to do a really nice finished

 So what I'm going to do is we're going to iron these seams flat.

 And then we're going to stitch, we're going to lay it down like this.

 Okay, as you can see, I've put the two right sides together and we've stitched all along

 the edges, around the underarm, up along the back, around the neckline, and on the side

 Okay, I know this looks kind of small, but remember this is for a 12 month old, a one

 Okay, now what I'm going to do, we're going to flip this inside out and then we're going

 So you just got to kind of flip it inside out, push, push, push, until you get your

 And then we're going to go iron it flat and see what it looks like.

 And start building the bottom part, the skirt part of your dress.

 But once you iron it out flat, even out all your little edges, you'll see it's going to

 You can trim off all this little excess, but it doesn't matter because you're not going

 Now, if you order this particular pattern from me, you just get the bodice.

 This particular pattern is for a 9 month old to 12 month old girl for all practical

 And in order to do the skirt part, you need to measure your length here.

 Because you want it to be roughly, you know, very frilly, very girly.

 And I'll show you some examples or you may have seen some already in the video.

 So for a really nice ruffle, a modest ruffle, you need two pieces twice this size.

 Okay, I'm not good at math either, so don't let it freak you out.

 So I'm going to measure and I'm going to cut a 22 inch piece because I know this is 11.

 A 22 inch piece for the front and a 22 inch piece for the back.

 Wrap the string around the joint at the top a couple of times to secure it.

 Hi guys, today I'm going to show you how to make a divider for our dollhouse with a sofa

 So we want to have a full size divider with 11 paper panels and this one's got 5.

 So when you're gluing up the other side make sure that you do your groove first and then

 Ok so the way we're going to do our sofa is we're going to make paper panels but this

 Ok so with another sheet of paper you just want to glue them down.

 Ok so when you glue 2 like that then you want to glue another one but leave a gap.

 Ok so now with your chosen scrapbooking paper you just want to cut them into strips so that

 And you can get all sorts of scrapbooking paper for free on our website.

 Ok so the first thing we need to do is we need to wallpaper our divider the same as

 Ok so you want to stand your divider up and then with your sofa you just want to glue

 We just want to cut out a piece of paper and then we want to put heaps of glue on it and

 then you flip your sofa over like that and you just glue it just for extra strength.

 And on the other side it's nice and plain so we're going to make a dining room table.

 Most times there's only one but sometimes in the air conditioners you'll actually find two.

 without cleaning this, they will give you five to ten cents a pound for this,

 And the copper aluminum radiators, they sell for about a dollar five to a dollar

 So, then what you do here is just sit these in the vice as well.

 We got three quarters of a pound of steel for, we'll say, a nickel.

 And one and a third pounds of the copper aluminum radiator for about a dollar forty.

 This is a magnetic ball and it has magnets inside of it and it also comes with two magnets.

 I will tuck it inside my first layer of clothing and then I will put the other magnet on the

 other layer of clothing and then the ball can go on the outside of my vest.

 So what I'm going to do is put the magnet here for Remy because for him when he's healing

 So if I have a dog that wants to forge a little bit I can have the dog release from behind.

 I can also put the magnet ball right here and I can use it for a front so my dog comes

 So I'm just going to go get Remy and I'll show you how I release him to the ball.

 So Remy really really loves his magnet ball and one of the reasons I think he likes it

 so much is that when I release him to it he actually gets to take it off himself.

 And I think that is really really rewarding for the dog rather than me having to produce

 Now at any time during heeling I can release him to it and I'm going to just do that right

 Okay, so I'll show that again but this time I'll do it in heel position.

 Now if I had a dog that was forging what I would do is I would put the ball behind my

 back like this, okay, and it will stay there while we're heeling and then when I want him

 The same would be if I was doing a front right here and I had the ball.

 I may not want Remy to jump up and grab the ball right here but what I can do is just

 He's quite a tugger and as you can see he's a big dog so he's got a lot of pressure and

 Now if I had the magnet here and it was right here, then what I would do is just have him

 jump into me, his hands would be at my side but I'm not going to switch the magnet over

 but what I'm going to do is just show you how I would release into it.

 And then have him jump into me but I would pull it off just so your dog doesn't accidentally

 It's a great tool for allowing your dog to reward from different areas of your body,

 I've got a bike, you can ride it if you like it, got a basket, a bell and rings and things to make it look good.

 It's tagliatelle pasta with fresh capsicum and cherry tomato basil sauce.

 The first thing we do, as far as a fresh sauce, it's a very short time to be done.

 We add the salt now, because the salt actually takes the water out of the veggies.

 Then, while the tomato gets soft, we go and chop our fresh basil.

And we let it cook for only a few more seconds together with the sauce.

I always add a bit of pepper, because I like pepper, but you don't need to.

 Hi, I'm Linda Baker and I'm here with the great folks from Chief Joe's Art Stuff in

 Boone, North Carolina and I want to show you a little bit about how I mix my paints for

I get a lot of emails and people asking me, how do you mix the paints?

So I've just bought these little Glad containers or Rubbermaid or whatever

 from the store and the nice thing about them is that they have a little lid so whatever

 paint I don't use during that day I can seal it up and I can take it with me home.

The misconception that pouring takes a lot of paint isn't necessarily

 things about pouring is that the colors can meld on the paper and you actually, because

 you're pouring all the excess off, you might not use as much paint as you would if you

The color is nice and intense and they really work well when you go to mix

Some paints, some different brands, every brand of paint has its own qualities

 that it doesn't clump and it doesn't have as much granular, it seems to be a little

 more refined, it doesn't have as much granular build up on the bottom of my container and

The colors are nice and intense, they're permanent colors so they

 I stumbled onto this I'm like, this is the one I really want to use.

 bit of ultramarine blue, a little bit of indigo, a little bit of harvest wheat.

 because I tend to get sort of the same colors so I thought I'd mix it up a little bit.

 then I also use an indigo and that's how you get your deep, rich colors in the end because

 you've seen my work, I will pour sometimes 20 layers and at the end the color is very

So for my red today I'm going to use a little bit of Joe's red and

 I'm going to put a little bit of Quin Violet with it just to shake it up a little bit.

 Now you'll notice that I'm just putting ever the smallest little bit of dollop of paint

 on the bottom of these containers and then I will add water to them.

 to show you how much paint I put in the bottom because that's another misconception.

 will put a big old slug of paint in their container and then of course when they do

 their pour the color is too deep and it's too rich and they don't have success.

 my students is that when you're going to do a pour, the first pour I generally do like

 you want to get a little bit more intense in color, a little bit less water, a little

 bit richer paint and what you're doing is protecting some of these light shades along

 the way and then when you take the masking off at the end you have this beautiful glow

 I might mix up a little container like this and use it one day and then the next day it's

 evaporated a little bit and I don't have to do anything to it to use it again.

 evaporated more than I want, then of course I just add more paint to it.

 that's really confusing to people is that it takes a long time to mix up a dollop of

 paint and they'll think they put it in there and they think they're ready to go and then

 they pour it on their paper and they get a big glob of paint right in the middle.

 when you mix them up, when you think they're mixed, mix them more.

 them up, when it comes time to do your actual pouring, mix them again just before you pour.

They're inexpensive and I like to have a different brush for each color that I'm

 pouring because part of the beauty here is that I don't want to mix the colors.

 in my studio I just have my blues, my yellows, and my red brushes and I don't ever have to

 well and see it really stains the brush so you don't want to really use your watercolor

 this is about the consistency for a first pouring and it's a little bit like skim milk.

 If you pour it and you don't like the effect, add a little bit more color, mix it up, and

 plenty of time to mix up a different color, another color, and some colors are stronger

Now this red, and I put the Joe's Red and this Quin Violet in here to make it

 such a rich red, but you can see it's a little bit thicker consistency than is this Harvest

When I pour I tend to start with yellow and end with yellow because it's

 over you can put the lids on them and you can take them and use them again.

 working in your studio I generally leave them with the lids off and let them evaporate because

 was that I would save these mixtures of paint after I poured them off my board and I had

 spoil and you'll know that because when you take the lid off you'll gasp.

 I have this shelf around the top of my studio and I have all these little containers of

 paint and they're all different shades and I can just go and look at what shade I want

 but I let them evaporate right down to the paint and then all I have to do is add a little

 In the summer time, once in a while I will indulge myself and pour outside and if I do

 then I don't necessarily save it in a container but when I work in my studio I save it because

 it all costs money and I found an economical way to pour and not use a lot of product.

 Thanks for joining me and I hope you'll try American Journey paints and pouring.

 In this case I'm using this, well maybe I should use a separate color because this is

 So this is another one that was meant to be just a shawl to be wrapped around your shoulders.

 Just again showing that you don't have to have any specific size.

 The bigger the amount of material you have, the more the water bottle or the pot or whatever

 comes in handy because it's just harder to get a grip on it otherwise.

 I had this one kind of looking cool the other day but I don't know if I'll be able to do

 And I'll just use a little pin here to keep it in place for now.

 Oh, this will be a good one to use one of those really loud pins on because since it

 doesn't have a whole lot of color or pattern obviously itself, I kind of like the scarves

 And we'll do another little tuck over here just so it's not so long.

 And then we'll twist this one and put it in there again as well.

 Okay, so at this point I have one pin in there, or two pins actually holding this one on.

 But it's all black so it's fun to add something really colorful and really outrageous like this.

 This is when the thrift shop shopping is fun because some of that loud faux jewelry or whatever is fun for the scarves because it really stands out.

 And in this case this pin isn't even actually holding anything on.

 G'day everyone, Corrupt Carnage here and welcome to another Real Life Minecraft cooking episode

 And all you need for this simple cocktail is obviously you need a bit of Irish Cream,

 a bit of Baileys for people who are in Australia, or Feenies as it's there, it's the cheapest

 But you can get Baileys or whatever you want but you need a bit of Cream Liqueur.

 I'm pretty sure you people in America, hello Roxy, you want some Maltesers do you Roxy?

 You're not going to have any Maltesers because chocolate isn't good for dogs.

 So what I'll do is I'll throw that all into the blender, then I'll come back when I'm

 blending it and then I'll also come back with the finished product.

 Welcome back everyone, I've put all the ingredients into the blender.

 I've got the Maltesers, the milk and the Cream Liqueur and it's all into the blender.

 It's going to taste absolutely spectacular and I'll come back with the finished product.

 I ended up mixing it for about a minute and a minute and a half.

 So what you're going to do now is just pick that bad boy up and pour it into the glass.

 Please like, favorite and subscribe and I will see you in the next Real Life Mug Craft

 It's Marie Natakis 9799 here with a new episode of What's for Dinner, Slow Cooker Edition.

 I hope you didn't throw it away because today we're going to use it.

 Today we're going to make split pea soup and I'm going to make it in my crock pot.

 You could probably make this right now, provided you saved your ham bone and you have a few

 You know, this is a natural product so sometimes you do get a few little stones in there.

 This is my ham bone which I stowed in the freezer until I was ready to use it.

 We're going to let this cook in the soup all day and then later we'll fish it out and we'll

 I have, right here, I have four cups of water into which I have dissolved two vegetable

 If you don't want to use bouillon, if you just have water, use water.

 This is going to flavor, the ham bone is going to flavor whatever you put in there.

 We're probably going to use more than four cups but this was just a way for me to dissolve

 I've got about a cup and a half of mashed carrots that I had in the fridge and I just

 Just about a cup of sliced celery and one large onion which I have just diced up.

 So we're just going to get this started and I'm going to move some things around here.

 First thing I'm going to do is I'm going to put my ham bone right there in my crock pot.

 My mother never really enjoyed it but my nanny always made me split peas soup.

 There goes the remainder of our bouillon cubes that didn't get dissolved.

 I'm going to add some additional filtered water to cover everything.

 The only other thing that I'm going to want, I'm going to want some thyme.

 Thyme and peas go together like peanut butter and jelly, or peas and carrots as Forrest Gump would say.

 I'm going to add a little bit of marjoram, which also lends itself to the peas.

 I think I may throw a scoop full of my chopped garlic in there if I can fish it out of my refrigerator.

 Once they get heated up and warmed up, they're going to join that party and everybody's going to have a great time.

 I'm going to check it in about an hour, and I'm probably going to turn it down to low.

 I might fix up some tasty side to go with this, like a biscuit or something like that.

 I'll fix you a plate, because I know you're going to be hungry.

 I will let you know that I did fish out the ham bone and the ham.

 This has been sitting for the last hour with the lid a little bit askew,

 But it's nice and smooth, and we've got shredded little pieces of ham that fell off the bone in there.

 I baked several loaves of bread today, and I turned one of the segments of dough into dinner rolls.

 I'm going to grab a bowl, and I'm going to fix you some dinner.

 I had somebody make a comment on my videos that I shouldn't fix you a plate, that I should plate it up.

 But they were kind of snotty, so I'm going to kind of discount that.

 And I would like to say a very, very special thank you to every single one of you who subscribe to my channel.

 And as some of you know, I said that when I hit 500 subscribers, that I would indeed do a song for you.

 I will be preparing that in the coming days, and I will post it soon.

 But today I did not have an opportunity to do that, so you're just going to have to wait a little while longer,

 That's what's for dinner, and I certainly hope you try this, because it's so easy to do.

 Hi guys, here we are making a delicious collard green sandwich.

 We're going to make a variation of the sunflower seed pate, and today we're making one with

 So, very easy, we have our 3 quarters of a cup of sunflower seeds here soaking in water.

 We're going to just dump that water, give it a quick rinse, and then this goes straight

 And I have here some delicious sun dried tomatoes that I've reconstituted with some warm water.

 You can leave a little bit in, it'll just be nice and moist and rich.

 Okay, so that's probably about a quarter of a cup of sun dried tomatoes, and here I have

 You can either roast these yourself or you can buy them in a jar.

 And then I'm just, I'm not going to add today raw garlic, just because I feel like sometimes

 So if you don't really like the raw garlic flavor, you could just use a little bit of

 Salt, pepper, about a tablespoon of olive oil, and I would do about a quarter of your

 Okay, this isn't really the microplane that I love, but it must be in the dishwasher.

 Now we're just going to puree it, and we're going to make our sandwich and put whatever

 And now we are going to build our sandwich in our delicious collard green.

 So the first thing I like to do is take the stem out, just with the back of your knife,

 just like this, shiny side down, by the way, on the collard green.

 Now we'll take our pate as the base of our delicious, healthy, vegetarian, raw sandwich,

 This would probably make two to three collard green sandwiches.

 And at this point, you could definitely taste it and see what you think it needs.

 You could have even thrown some basil into your mixer if you want.

 And I thought it would be nice if I grated up some carrot and apple with my mandolin

 And if you're feeling really decadent and you want to drizzle a little more olive oil,

 A gorgeous, delicious, healthy sandwich that is going to satisfy you and fill you up.

 And the things that you can put inside of this beautiful sandwich are endless.

 So I'm going to go ahead and have a delicious bite because I'm so hungry.

 Hey guys, so today I'm going to be showing you how you can achieve this really simple

 So I started off by washing my hair using the Alberto Balsam Honey and Sweet Almond

 as it can be quite marzipan-y but the balance in this is it smells a lot more nutty and

 After I washed my hair I then sprayed in some of the Tony and Guy 3D Volumizing Spray.

 hair as well but it works best if you spray it into the roots when your hair is wet and

So I then just roughly blow dried my hair, just flipped it upside

 down and to give me a bit more texture just because my hair is so smooth and sleek naturally

 I then just curled pieces and then just brushed it out just so that I've got that little bit

 more volume in the roots so I'm just going to take this teasing brush and tease the roots

So now this top section has been teased, now I'm just going to put it

 fingers through and pull it out a little bit to make it a little bit looser.

So you should then be left with two messy looking ponytails like

So I'm now just going to braid them both and tie them off with a clear elastic.

 I'm just pulling at the braids just to loosen them up a little bit and backcombing them

 one and bring it round to the bottom going one side and then bring the other one going

 round to the top so it forms a circle in the back and pin it into place.

 and texturised look I'm going to be using the Tony and Kai Rough Texturising Spray.

Just really simple and casual but still very put together and pretty.

 So if you like this video please give it a thumbs up and I'll see you in the next one.

 Okay, this is a step-by-step video basically how to take your Power Wheels,

 old Power Wheels battery and create a new wiring harness for basically a

 The most common to get 12 volt version would be like a 12 volt 12 AH battery.

 You can buy these from just about any battery store or online on eBay or

 wiring harness all you'll need is you can pick this up this is a 30 amp inline

You'll need this basically to hook up to the positive side of the

 So this is kind of what the basically the inline fuse will look like and

 you'll basically just put a 30 amp fuse in this and slide it right in here.

 coupler is basically going to connect your inline fuse to the positive wire

 Those are basically the parts you'll need and you'll also need the 30 amp fuse.

 So first to get started basically you'll get a flathead screwdriver.

 really careful when you're doing this because there are some things inside

 here that you want to be careful not to hit with the screwdriver when you're

 pull this out, grab some snips, just pop it off, clip it off right here, and then

 And so basically what you'll want to do after that you want to clean this up and

 get it ready to you know splice together and put the connections on.

 Now your white you'll also be able to see on here the white is the positive

 fuse does if you've got, if you have a short or something like that that's

 causing a bad connection and it kind of can overheat the battery or anything

 like that it basically will pop this fuse to where it cuts any of the power

 Okay then you'll basically take this here, slide the positive wire right here

 Okay and then you always you know pull on it real hard and just to make sure

 it's real tight and you've got a good connection and it's crimped good and

 this all out, recut the wires and make sure you have a really good solid

Okay so the next step you've got your two female slide connects.

 the negative side you don't have to do anything to the negative other than put

 of see this middle section here will be kind of melted and you can just pop a

So you always want to hook the fuse and inline fuse to the positive

 you're done and you've got your aftermarket battery here you'll just

 slide the with the female adapter you can just slide the inline fuse and the

 white wire and inline fuse onto the positive and then your black negative

 to plug in your Power Wheels battery or your Power Wheels to the brand new

 running check your fuse here it may pop the fuse occasionally if you have bigger

 And today I'm going to show you how to make everything bagel mix.

 My husband and I absolutely love everything bagels and we love the mix that goes on top.

 So what we're going to do is first we're going to take some fried garlic and some onion flakes

 And what we're going to do is we're going to grind those up in a food processor because

 The fried garlic is a little coarse and so is the salt and the onion flakes.

 Now you can get this fried garlic at an Asian market and it usually comes in a bottle like

 And then now we're going to add the onion flakes and the sea salt.

 About a half a cup of the onion flakes and a quarter cup of the sea salt.

 And the reason why we chop it up like I said is that you want to, it's a little too coarse

 and you want to chop it up a little bit finer so that you can pour it out of the shaker

 My husband and I love to sprinkle this stuff on fried potatoes.

 And I also like to add it to my salads to just give it a little crunch.

 And a little bit of that little spicy taste with the garlic and the onion flakes.

 And then the last step is to go ahead and just add it to your jar.

 You can sprinkle it on whatever recipe that you have and then store the rest.

 So for this recipe or more hints and tips to simplifies your life, visit us at GetSimplifies.com.

So I've decided to keep this sort of aqua marine-y colour because I'm going

 camping this week and if I dyed it back purple it would end up going back to this colour

 I'd show you the DIY hair mask that I'm going to do on my hair because obviously since it's

 been bleached it's got damaged and it's quite dry, especially the ends, they're the worst

This is a combination of the Bleach London Mayo Mask, which they recommend because

 all the cholesterol in full fat mayonnaise is conditioning and just good for your hair,

 and an avocado hair mask which I saw on a website and I honestly can't remember what

 website it was but I'm not actually using the avocado, I'm using the other two ingredients

 from that and then combining them together because I don't have any avocado and I have

You'll need some mayonnaise, either a tub or a tube, it really doesn't matter,

 thicker hair you'll probably need more, but for my length and thickness two medium egg

And some coconut oil, you can use argan oil or any other type of hair

 oil but coconut oil is the one I use and it's the one I have on hand at the moment.

 You just keep adding until it looks like you've got enough to cover your hair.

 to be quite thick so it stays on your hair better, easier to apply if it's thick.

 A good thing about being sat in the bath is it means I'm not making a mess of the bathroom.

 Once you've got it all on, just work it through and make sure all your hair is covered.

I don't know if you can see a massive difference on the camera but it feels a lot softer.

What I did to rinse it off was first I rinsed it with lukewarm, slightly cold water.

 If you use hot water you'll end up with scrambled eggs in your hair which is not nice.

 I then got in the shower and used normal water to shampoo it to make sure I got all of it out.

 Then I styled it as normal which either consists of blow drying it if I'm in a hurry or letting it air dry.

 equipment to share the skills and techniques required for use in our patterns, available

 for direct download online from StitchDiva.com or at Fine Yarn Retailers Worldwide.

 if you like these videos, if you don't like them, if you'd like to see something else

 pointed needles, which we're going to show, but we're also going to show how to do this

 with two circular needles and one long circular needle, the magic loop technique.

 each of these techniques and try to decide which one works best for you.

 So here we're going to work in the round on double pointed needles.

 the first thing that I'm going to do is I'm going to distribute these 24 needles evenly

 on the other needles that I'm going to be using to work in the round.

So without twisting my stitches, 24 divided by 4 if I'm doing my

 see that I have distributed my stitches evenly on 4 double pointed needles.

 left for me to do is to work in the round and join these things in the round.

 the work is always going to be facing me when working in the round.

 I'm working on double pointed needles, circular needles or with the magic loop method.

 I'm going to take the working yarn and I am going to mark the 5th double pointed needle

 stitch, making sure and I had laid everything out to make sure that I haven't twisted any

In fact, between my first and my second stitch here, I'm going to pull nice and tight

 Again, after I knit the first stitch, I'm going to knit the stitches off the second

 mean, you can see that my, you know, there's all sorts of stuff going on with these needles.

 And as people work and develop their own type of technique with double pointed needles,

But I'm just focusing on my right hand needle that I'm knitting with and my

 the way and not interfering with my two needles that are actually involved in the knitting,

 six stitches, pulling tight after that first stitch to try to avoid laddering.

 good thing to avoid laddering is working with a set of five as you see me doing here instead

 it up so that I could knit stitches off of the next double pointed needle.

 to remember, and I'm not sure I'm doing a very good job at remembering while I'm demonstrating

 this, after I knit my first stitch, really pull tightly so I can avoid that laddering

Here I am, this is my last, this is my end around marker, this is my last

 of the way, it's trying to get involved here and it shouldn't be.

 all of this double pointed stuff, you'll be dealing with just two needles instead of

And a lot of people find that that's a lot less fiddly and a lot easier to work

 These banana muffins are a little different in that we're going to add some fresh strawberries

 So to start, preheat your oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit, that's 180 degrees Celsius.

 And then you can either lightly butter or spray with a non-cooking spray a muffin pan.

 Or what I've done here is just line the pan with these paper liners.

 So this is a quick bread, so it's just the wet ingredients in one bowl, the dry ingredients

 in another bowl, and then we just mix the two together and we're done.

 We need two large bananas, which is about a cup, 240 milliliters.

 And what you're looking for is this, your banana has started to turn brown, lots of

 brown spots, and that gets them nice and soft, which is what we want.

 Because as they ripen, they get a lot sweeter, which is really, is nice flavor to the batter.

 And don't worry if there's a few large pieces, it just adds a little more texture to your

 And then, so what I have here is two large eggs at room temperature, and I'm just going

 And then we're going to flavor that with about one teaspoon of pure vanilla extract.

 Try to use a pure, because that has better flavor than the artificial ones.

 And then I have here one, a half a cup, that's 113 grams of butter that I have melted, and

 I like to use the unsalted butter, because I like the flavor better, but you can use

 If you do use the salted butter, I would leave out the salt that we're going to use in the

 So then I'm just going to use my whisk, and just mix all that together.

 So for the dry, I have two and a quarter cups, that's 295 grams of white all-purpose flour.

 And to that, I'm going to add three quarters of a cup, which is 160 grams of light brown

 sugar, because brown sugar and bananas go really well together.

 And then I'm going to add one and a half teaspoons of baking powder, a quarter teaspoon of baking

 soda, half a teaspoon of salt, but like I said, if you use salted butter, then leave

 Now if you don't like cinnamon, then you can just leave that out as well.

 And then I'm just going to, you can just use a wire whisk like I have here, or your rubber

 You want to make sure we get all the baking powder and the baking soda all mixed into

 And then stir in one cup, that's 240 milliliters of fresh strawberries that have been cut into

 We want to mix that in and we'll coat the strawberries with the flour mixture, and that

 And that's another reason why you should cut them into little pieces, so that they'll float

 in the batter rather than, if they're too heavy, then they'll drop down to the bottom

 So just make a well in the center of your dry ingredients and just pour in your wet.

 Make sure everything's mixed together, but once, you just want to make sure everything's

 Because if you stir, like, too much, then your muffins will be a little tough and rubbery,

 These are perfect to make in the summer when your fresh strawberries have a really good

 So now you could either use an ice cream scoop like this or just two spoons to evenly fill

 The red of the strawberries really stands out with the brown sugar batter.

 So we're going to put these in the oven for about 20-25 minutes or until a toothpick inserted

 They've browned a little, and a toothpick inserted into the center will come out clean.

 And as usual, these muffins are best the day they are baked, but you can cover and store

 We need one bottle of cheap tequila, we're going to need four cups of peeled and sliced

 The next step after we have our peeled mangoes is we're going to remove the pit.

 This is a super good recipe to make for your wife, girlfriend or for your next party because

 tequila is quite harsh and the mangoes are going to make it sweet and smooth and easily

 We're just slowly cutting around the pit to get all the mango flesh off.

 It's hard to see the pit because a lot of the fruit is going to stick to it.

 Then after this we're going to slice our mango and put it in the pitcher and cover it with

 We have all this wonderful mango pulp, we're going to add it to our pitcher.

 Once you get it full of our sliced mango we're going to cover it with the tequila.

 Ok here we have all our mango pulp covered with tequila in our two quart pitcher.

 Every day when you go in the fridge give it a quick shake, mix it around.

 After one month you can strain it out, pour it back into your empty bottle, you can store

 it in a cool dry place, a nice dark place would be preferred or I prefer to keep it

 chilled in the freezer ready for drinks anytime you care to enjoy it.

 Hey there, let's take a moment and talk about Hasselblad's central shutters.

 The camera body fires the shutter in the lens and the camera body winds the shutter that's

 That is essentially the wind knob or the cocking knob for the shutter.

 When you wind the body, it turns this screw, screwdriver-ish thing, and that turns this

 You always need to make sure that before you mount a lens onto a body that they're both

 Your body needs to be wound and your lens needs to be cocked before you put them together.

 Just to demonstrate how that works, I'm going to accidentally trip my shutter while it's

 So now, the position of this thing doesn't match the position in the body.

 I'm not going to demonstrate that because I don't want to jam my body.

 And you can see on the back of the lens, there's a little arrow going in a clockwise direction.

 My goal is to get this slot lined up with that dot by turning in the direction of that

 That's how you re-cock your lens and a little bit on what to look out for when mounting

 All right, I am Amber with Adventures in Mindful Living and I wanted to show you today how easy it was

 To make what I call moxie cheese and the recipe will be in the link so don't worry about the exact

 Way, I just want to show you how to make it so I have all my ingredients here ready to go

 And it comes in and it look this is the one I get because it's just what we have in our local store

 Just super super important to know and I have that in my salt together and I'm gonna do is put everything in

 Alright, and I just put in my nutritional yeast to that something I add that she doesn't add

 I just kind of like it because it gives a little bit more extra cheesy flavor

 I do want to take a second and say if you don't do oil a lot of plant-based people don't do oil you can leave

You can also leave out the salt if you're trying to be on a low sodium diet

 Or if you just kind of trying to watch your salt so feel free to leave that out, too

 All right now if you do not have a Nutribullet my super wonderful husband

 so if you don't have one and all you have is a regular blender just make sure that you soak your cashews and

 But make sure you soak your cashews for a couple hours if you don't have a high-powered blender

 Or you don't have a Nutribullet, and if you just have a regular blender

 Before I got this I used my regular $20 blender from Walmart, and it worked just fine

 Soak your cashews in really warm water for a couple hours, and I'll soften them up

 This is what it looks like when it comes out of that now all you have to do

 You don't have to but I just wanted to kind of get it to speed up just a little bit

 Pots and this one is working really good for me, so I don't have to turn the heat up as high

 But with my older ones I turn on like medium heat and you can tell as you start kind of

 Moving it around a little bit that it will start to look like it's almost like it's curdling, but that's okay

 But all you have to do is just keep stirring it around like this and it goes pretty quick

 You can tell it's already starting to kind of thick it up now if I am pouring this on a pizza like I am today

 If you are not and you're using it on a quesadilla or something like that

 Then you are going to want to let cook just a little bit longer and get a little thicker all right

 So this is a pizza that I had ready just to show you because I want to show you what it looks like when it

 All you have to do and mine's half veggie and half plain because my kids don't like veggie all you have to do

 And you could have made this a little less runny, and it would have been totally fine

 Like that the woman in the recipe she kind of gets her a little bit more gloopy looking and if that's what you want

 And again if I hadn't cooked it so long it'd be a little bit more runny and a little bit easier to spread but

 I will show you a couple more new recipes that I'm putting together

 That use this and this is why I really wanted to do a video to show you how

 Not like the super processed kind that comes shredded up in a bag that you get your grocery store.

 Mozzarella cheese, that's how this cooks and that's the texture of it

 It's super easy when you use this cheese instead of cow's cheese you cut down on your cholesterol

 So it's a good healthy easy way to still get that super cheesiness that you love

 From cheese, but not have to get all the other stuff that comes with cow's milk cheese

 So I'll go ahead and put this in the oven and then I'll pull it out and show you what it looks like

 So I wanted to show you what it looks like when it gets done baking and you can kind of tell like right here

 There's a little bit of browning and you could actually I could have left this in a little bit longer

 If it was another dish, but I didn't want my pizza crust to burn but it melts

 Just like cheese and this will be a super super cheesy pizza without all the calories and all that bad stuff that you really don't

 Want I did also want to mention that the pizza recipe and my sauce recipe that I used for this will be in my blog

 So I hope you will try this out and see that it's super easy to make and it's really delicious

 It's a small step you can make that will make a big difference in your health

 And we'd love for you to stop by and check out our other recipes, and I hope you have a mindfully great day

 These would be really good for your holiday dessert table or you could take them to a

 The amounts of the ingredients that you're going to need to make these cupcakes will

 You can find it on my website or you can find it on the Roku channel.

 For the cupcakes you're going to need a white cake mix, eggnog, eggs, ground nutmeg, and

 For the frosting you'll need powdered sugar, butter, eggnog, ground nutmeg, and vanilla.

 You'll need two of these mini muffin pans and you'll either want to spray them with

 I've started by putting my cake mix in this big bowl and now I'm going to add the rest

 I'm going to add my eggnog, the two eggs, the nutmeg, and the vanilla.

 I'm just going to whisk this until it's all incorporated and mixed well.

 My batter is all mixed together and now I'm ready to put it into my muffin pan.

 I'm going to take my scoop and get a little bit of the batter and put it into the muffin

 I finished filling my cupcake liners and now what I'm going to do is put this in the 350

 I've put them on these cooling racks and I'm going to let them cool in the pans for just

 a few minutes before I remove them to the cooling rack and let them cool completely

 I've already put my confectioners sugar in my mixing bowl and now I'm going to add the

 I'm going to add my butter, my eggnog, the vanilla and the nutmeg.

 I'm going to put my paddle attachment on and we're going to mix this all together.

 I'm going to start out very slow so I don't get powdered sugar all over the place.

 I did add a little bit more eggnog to get it to the consistency that I needed to pipe

 Now I'm just going to start piping the frosting on the cupcakes.

 I have all my cupcakes with some frosting on and now I'm going to take a little nutmeg

 I've graded some fresh nutmeg over my cupcakes and I have put them on this tray for serving.

 Today's video, we are going to make some delicious, refreshing fruit pizza.

 Traveling for a while, I have been off the wagon of eating healthy.

 It's a very California thing, but I love it because it's easy to digest.

 So I think I will be introducing some healthy recipes in the near future.

 Alright, so to get this started, you will need one juicy watermelon.

 For me, I will be using slices of kiwi, and blueberries, raspberries.

 And if you want to learn how to make this raw, healthy condensed milk,

 Now this is a really fun food to have when you have people come over.

 And we get to customize this and personalize this however way we want.

 And then the other one, I just added on all the fruits that I had left,

 I made it all from cashews, which I will show you guys later in this video.

 And then after 20 minutes, I drained it and put it in my blender.

 Make sure to give this a taste to see if you need to add in anything else.

 And then just pour everything into a jar so you can use it later on.

 We are now on to the best part, and that is to give this a taste.

 Hi this is Megan with Beadaholique.com and today I'm going to show you how to do a

 put it on the leg of your pants like you do with friendship bracelets

 keep the ends looped if you're using one or two colors and put it on a hook

 and when you're going to bring these around since you want to create a round braid

 wrap it around so that you're going to get a nice shape on that

 I'm going to move this to the edge more so we can get a better angle

 is raised a little bit higher than the rest of the braid right now.

 make sure that your strands don't get twisted the wrong way as you're working

 like if you're using for example a kumihimo finding and it's a solid

 but be careful and always secure around the braid before you cut the end off

 A 9 inch springform pan, just wrap the bottom with aluminum foil.

 So you just want to press that into the bottom of your springform pan.

And once your oven is preheated, you can pop that in there for about 10 minutes.

 not a stand mixer, and I actually broke the attachments once, so it's good that it's soft.

We're going to add some vanilla extract, 15 milliliters, 1 tablespoon.

 a stand or a hand mixer, you just want to make sure everything is nice and well mixed.

So to start, we're going to sacrifice about a third of the egg whites.

 want to keep those air pockets in the meringue so the texture is light.

 batter from underneath and just flip it over to the top, press it down, and just repeat

 thick, so we'll give it a little shake just to spread it across the pan evenly.

 But first we're going to put it in a water bath to keep the bottom from browning.

 might take a little bit longer, but when it's done you should be able to jiggle it.

 still be a little jiggly in the middle, but the rest should be pretty firm.

 they kind of go everywhere when you chop them, which you pull them right out of the freezer.

 it's going to form a hard topping that will be difficult to cut.

 Hi friends, I'm gonna show you a recipe for a smoothie that I really really really like now

 I started by just using berries and juice and then I subbed in soy milk and I added a couple other ingredients

 Found the best pairing of fruit and this smoothie is my true creation

 Those are two things you strongest taste in this so this gonna taste like a dessert shake but health-wise

 I'm gonna tell you the recipe two cups vanilla soy milk or you could try vanilla almond milk vanilla rice milk

 Blueberries one cup pineapple chunks give or take a cup and a half give or take of blueberries kale

 Or you can use other leafy green collard greens I've tried it with spinach

 This is just for the added nutrients and a little bit the texture

 You're not gonna taste it too much in the final product two tablespoons of flaxseed getting that Omega threes

 And I actually really like the texture that this adds two tablespoons of peanut butter peanut butter in the smoothie

 This is gonna be a thick smoothie if you make it how I make it if I need to make it more liquidy to blend

I'll throw as many blueberries as necessary in there really the blueberries you can never have too many

 Also, if you're using these leafy greens there may be little strings in there from those or something

 So I like grinding it hella and that means turning it on the high for a while there and just taking some selfies while you're

 The Justin Bieber purple now I made a ton of this but you know how fun this is to drink purple smoothie

 Tastes like vanilla and peanut butter healthy is for this my friends is the vegan Freck wad

 And you guys seem to really like my DIY videos and they're definitely my favorite ones to film.

 And this is... Sorry, my hair is like everywhere because I'm outside and it's like...

 So before I get into this video, I wanted to formally introduce my cat to you guys.

Don't tell the other ones, but he already knows he's my favorite.

I feel like I haven't been in a few videos and you guys don't even know his name.

 His name is Orangie because if you can't see, he's orange and we just thought that was a fitting name, you know?

 Yeah, I just wanted to show you guys my shoes here that I'm going to be making.

 I will leave the girls... I don't think she really had a blog though.

 And I did switch up a few little things and I'll explain that in the video.

 And I think they turned out really nice and I don't know, I just think they're really cool.

 So if you guys have just a plain white Keds or white Vans or any white shoe, pretty much,

 So I used a white old pair of Keds and mine were just kind of gross and really dirty.

 So I decided to bleach them so that it started off with a nice blank canvas.

 I didn't know exactly what to call these, so I just called them tribal print, like black and white tribal print.

 But they're pretty much just like lines, so they're not really tribal prints, but they kind of are.

 I don't know what to call them, so that's just what I called it.

 If you guys are interested to see how to make these, then just keep on watching.

 What you will need for this project will be some white Keds, some painter's tape, a paintbrush,

 So the first thing you want to do is just take a little bit of your painter's tape and just place it right on your shoe.

 And this is basically just a guide so that you don't get crazy and you stay in the lines and that everything is nice and even.

 And I just did this simple design, but you can also do something more creative and just go crazy with it.

 That would be kind of cool, but I just decided to stick with this design.

 And once you're done with that row, just peel off the tape and start again.

 And the paint dries really fast, so you can just go ahead and right away just put the tape right over it and just continue on with your next one.

 And a tip that I have is to do both the shoes at the same time just so that everything is even.

 And once you're done with that, you can move on to the back of the shoe.

 And we're just using the same technique as we did on the front.

 So just making them parallel to each other and just going crazy, guys.

 And once you're satisfied with that, you can go ahead and start taping off your shoe.

 And this is an optional step, but I just think it makes it look a lot more clean.

 And I don't believe the girl on Pinterest did this because the top part of her shoe is black as well.

 And I just personally like the way it looks when there's like some white contrast to the black, you know what I mean?

 So yeah, this is what it should look like when it's all taped off.

 And then just go ahead and start painting your shoe where we taped off at.

 And by the shoelace holes, I didn't try to be neat or anything because we will clean that up after.

 And once you've allowed them to dry for an hour, just go ahead and peel off the tape.

 And then just with a q-tip dipped in water, I just simply cleaned up the shoelace holes.

 And then I just went ahead and just started painting the top of the shoe.

 So then you can just go ahead and put your shoelaces back in and you can go out and enjoy your new pair of shoes.

 So if you guys enjoyed this video, give it a thumbs up and I will see you guys in my next one.

 Today I'm going to make a pot roast and I'm going to make it the way my mother always

 Then, when she got home from church, she would put potatoes and carrots into a pressure

 cooker and cook those, I think for three minutes, but I cooked them for six minutes.

 She would sometimes make mashed potatoes instead of the carrots and potatoes in the pressure

 I would personally mash my carrots down too, as well, just like I did my potatoes.

 More so on the potato, the carrots, it's nice to have a little bit on there.

 She would always take the juice from the pot roast and make a gravy.

 Hello everyone, I'm here today with celebrity restauranteur and Stanford educator Jessie Kuhl

 She's come here today with her lovely granddaughter Mia and you know Misha and Milan from our videos and Jessie

 40,000 international students in the Stanford child nutrition and cooking class

 What we're going to do today is use ingredients that you can use for all of your cooking and because we're doing it with kids

 But realize that cooking cooking is so easy that even after we make our magic sauce and he likes broccoli

 That you'll be able to take seven ingredients and cook anything

 Imagine that once you make this magic sauce that you're still gonna try it

 Which is basically a vinaigrette and the ingredients that the kids or big kids little kids you can start thinking

 Vinegar or acid so vinegar or lemon or white wine salt pepper sugar herbs and spices

 Do we have to be worried about using salt and sugar in our cooking the sad thing?

 These days is that people think of what they can't have and it usually doesn't work as that means we want more sugar or more

 Salt, so what we'd love to plant as a kind of a seed within all of us.

It's a matter of how much we use and enhancing and enhancing flavor

 What's all about the amounts it's all about trusting your intuition it's all about thinking what makes it taste good

 All right, let's each take a bowl here's what you're gonna use olive oil vinegar

 Pepper sugar, that's what we talked about and herbs and spices so you can add a little bit of this all you want

 This one is sugar and this one is salt and the way to test is this look what

 So if you just start with a little bit of flavorings or seasonings if you're afraid don't be afraid to cook first of all

 Go slow now remember Mia what I taught you you always want to keep your fingers back.

All right, so even with little kids if you're cooking just keep your fingers back

 What I want to know first of all is if you all think you can cook.

 You could take a chicken breast and coat it with olive oil salt pepper herbs and spices a little sugar

 But just about every food you bring from the garden for the market if you start thinking like these kids did how much do I?

 We love this kind of cooking I want to thank Jesse cool for being with us today Milan, can you thank Jesse cool?

 It was kind of a basic thing and noodles and what what I did with my kids in with

 My grandchildren is make sure that they kind of make the basic foods, but they get an understanding of what real ingredients are about

 So we we've always talked about the fact that we use all real ingredients right me and they're yummy like we love butter

 We love salt and pepper and we like baking with sugar, but we only use the right amount

 You can put those eggs in there now so you can start adding some things that you cut up

 How about if you put a little bit of the amount of salt and pepper that you know, you would want to eat in eggs

 Okay, because your mind's gonna tell you no, that's what you want because you can always add more later great a little bit of pepper

 What you think you want to eat and then you cut up onions from the garden you can put them all

 You can always add more what you what you want you're it's you learn you know how to cook I think it's done

 Hey man, do you think and what's the most important part of cooking?

 Yes, wow, that looks great and we didn't cook those eggs too much because they were fresh from the chickens and you don't want to over

 Let's see what you think let's blow on it blow on it me I'm here I'll blow on this for you

 Well Mia, thank you so much for showing us how to make these delicious eggs

 And today I want to talk to you about making a cold infusion using an herb called marshmallow

 So the first thing you do is you go to a store, an herbal shop or a health food store, and

 A lot different than the puffy, yummy things that you can put in your hot chocolate.

 What that means is that it helps to soothe the mucous membranes in your body.

 And this can be amazing from your mouth all the way down through your bladder and your

 And I do three tablespoons of marshmallow root to one tablespoon of cinnamon.

 So if you have trouble with candida, it's anti-fungal, anti-bacterial.

 So for mine, I'm going to make two cups right here just to show you.

 And going into my preparation here of marshmallow root, which again,

 And because I have two cups of water, I've put two tablespoons in there.

 you want to separate this about four hours from your medication

 Now this donut cake I'm choosing to make is a vanilla cake base and it is filled with

 a raspberry preserve and it is topped with chocolate ganache and sprinkles.

 So to make the giant donut cake you're going to need a batch of cake.

 If you want to use one of our recipes we've got lots of different ones up on the channel.

 I'm using our vanilla cake from scratch which is already up on our channel.

 You could use anything that you'd like to, strawberry or what not.

 And for the ganache you're going to need 8 ounces of chocolate.

 You're going to need 1 tablespoon of corn syrup and you're going to need 2 thirds of

 For the donut I have a donut shaped cake pan and I'm going to be using this.

 But if you don't have a donut cake pan you could also use a tube pan which is used often

 for angel food cakes or you could use a traditional 9 inch round or 8 inch round and just kind

 of cut the hole in the middle and you'd get the same donut effect.

 So what you're going to do is put half of your prepared batter into one half of the

 So I'm just going to approximate it and make sure that your pan is well oiled or greased.

 I like to use no stick spray and you can use butter or flour, whichever you like to use

 So I'm just going to fill these up and then I'm going to put them into the oven and they're

 So about 30 minutes, 35 and then I'll take it out and I'll be back to show you when it

 So we're going to make the ganache next and it's a little bit different than the ganache

 that we already have up on our channel because it's going to use one tablespoon of corn syrup

 instead of butter and this is just going to give it a nice shine and it's going to go

 on really smoothly onto the top of the cake to give it that glazed donut look.

 Now you can use a saucepan if you want to and do it on the stove.

 I'm going to do it on the microwave and what I want it to do is to heat up nice and hot

 You don't want to get that skin on top or anything, you just want it to be nice and

 So I'm going to do that next and then I'll be back to show you how to make the rest of

 So the whipping cream is nice and hot, it is just steaming here.

 So what I'm going to do is just pour it on top of the chocolate chips and I'm just going

 Now it's going to seem like it's never going to come together but then all of a sudden

 So you want to make sure you get all those lumps and bumps out of there so just keep

 Okay once you have a nice smooth ganache like we've got here, we want to add one tablespoon

 So I'm just going to freehand it here, you don't have to be exactly one tablespoon, it's

 So I'm just going to set this aside and I'm going to use it again at the very end when

 Okay so the donut cake was finished at about 35 minutes and I took it out and let it sit

 in the pans for 5 more minutes and then I just flipped them over and now I'm letting

 So when they're cooled completely I'm going to level them off just so both of the pieces

 are flush when they go fit together and I'll be back when I'm ready to put the preserves

 So I have the donut cake leveled which just means that I've taken off the bit that domed

 And if the jelly gets out on the sides that makes it even more realistic.

 So I'm going to spread the rest of this on and then I'm going to put the top on, the

 So next up we're going to put the lid, the top, onto the donut.

 So I'm just going to start with a small amount here because it's going to start to run and

 if you have too much it's going to run all the way down which is fine if that's the look

 you're going for but I want that gradual kind of sliding down the side of the cake

 look and I'm going to help it with my spoon once I've got enough on here.

 And then once you've got as much on that you want the best part will be to add whatever

 I like the multi-colored sprinkles the best because they remind me of a donut so I've

 So I'm just going to keep decorating and I'll be back when I'm finished.

 So today I made a vanilla donut cake filled with raspberry preserves and topped with chocolate

 Remember to subscribe to our channel and if you want to see some more of us you can find

 These videos are brought to you by Auto Lavish, serving Southeastern Michigan and Puerto Rico

 You can get it through the spokes all the way to the back of the barrel.

 You can use it to clean the spokes behind and the inside of the hub and other things

 We're also going to be using a smaller detail brush to get into the caliper, a little stronger.

 This is a great tool for cleaning the fenders, the wheels themselves, the faces around the

 Product wise, we're going to use two products for these wheels today.

 For the tires, we're using Meguiar's All Purpose Cleaner at 4 to 1.

 To start, if the wheel is very dirty, you can rinse it off with a wheel gel as delicate

 Don't try to push too hard on the brush or rub it into the wheel.

 If you don't have a leaf blower, any microfiber towel will work.

 In this case, this is probably about $35 and it's probably about 150 miles per hour.

 Well, I hope you find these tips useful and that they have helped you to understand how

 And last but not least, we'd like to thank Predator Performance for letting us use their

 We're outside here with Tori Keene and we're going to recreate a celebrity look in three minutes.

 So what it is, Alan, is we have a picture of Jennifer Love Hewitt there.

 There she is there, looking absolutely stunning at the Golden Globes.

 So we'll have her sweeping fringe and then you see at the front there, the curls, kind of nice long curls.

 I'm actually using extra hair for that, Alan, because people will know at home when they try and do styles like this...

 The hair at the front is always like, it's a little bit shorter, so it springs up a lot when you curl it.

 So I've already prepped the hair just for the curling time, so I kind of cheesed a little bit.

 Okay, so I'm going to do a sweeping side parting on Lisa's hair first.

 And what we're going to do is, it's best if you have a side fringe for this kind of idea.

 And then what I'm going to do is, I'm going to do a load of backcombing here on the top.

 But it's just great, it's such an easy way to get a really sophisticated hairstyle.

 Okay, so you just hold it tight, push down right up to the top.

 Yeah, I was just going to say, will you keep me on scope there?

 And then with the back then, if you have a little bit of time, you can do something in the back, which I'll show you.

 So we just pile it all up like that, and then sweeping back the sides.

 And you see, I've no mirror at the front, Alan, so I'm totally winging it.

 So these are our little clip-in hair extensions, which are so easy to get now, anywhere.

 If you want to see that, Alan, there, just very quickly there, just show you there, on the hair piece, that the clips are actually on the piece there.

 Yeah, so you literally just, as you can, as Alan was saying there.

 And I'd like to just fancy up the back of it a little bit, because I have a bit of time left over.

 So as you can see, the real reason I wanted to do this one was really just to show the extra hair.

 But I just wanted to show how easy it is to clip in extra hair and to have that little bit of extra length around the front.

 There was a time when they were quite expensive to get, but I mean, you get a packet of them now for nearly 25 euros.

 And as you sort of say, that extra bit of hair just coming down the front there.

 So obviously you finish it with a little bit of gloss spray and hairspray when you have more than three minutes to do it.

 We're so excited to be with you today because we're gonna show you our fat furnace cranberry

 So really quick, Adrian's gonna show you what liver looks like.

 Now if you eat sugar and refined carbohydrates, it goes into the liver, comes out like fat.

 Like, good question, white flour, white sugar, white bagels, white muffins, oh yeah.

 So if you lose 10 pounds, gang, this is what 10 pounds looks like.

 You're gonna take unsweetened cranberry juice, 2 cups, let's try that Adrian, see what Adrian

 It's very tart, so you wanna get the unsweetened cranberry juice, 2 cups of unsweetened cranberry

 Adrian just filmed me doing, asking Rachel Ray a cranberry sauce recipe for the Dr.

 So, 2 cups of unsweetened cranberry juice, we're gonna do a cup of regular cranberries,

 we're gonna add as well a squeeze of a half a lemon, if possible.

 And the cinnamon sticks, cinnamon actually helps to stabilize the blood sugar.

 So, the cinnamon sticks are 3 inches long and cinnamon stabilizes the blood sugar.

 We're gonna add that all in and you're gonna let that simmer and you can serve that as

 Now it's quite tart, so you might want to add a little bit of maple syrup and voila,

 Hey guys, today's tutorial is for the Northern Hemisphere girls going into spring.

 I've already applied foundation, concealer, brows and primed the eyes.

 So now I'm taking my Sigma Warm Neutrals palette and using the shade Oyster Sand which is a

 Next taking Cinnamon which is a warm matte brown and a more precise blending brush like

 I'm going to run this through my crease, starting out softly then building up the colour.

 These shadows are very very pigmented so you only need to tap your brush lightly into the

 To blend out the harsh lines I'm using Sugar Milk because it's pretty much the same shade

 Taking Oyster Sand on a pencil brush, I'm putting that on the inner half of my lower

 For a bit of sparkle I'm using Dust from my Naked 3 and using my finger to press it onto

 The reason why I'm using my finger and not a brush is because it has massive fall out

 Then taking Strange I'm applying it to my brow bones and my inner corners.

 For eyeliner I'm using the L'Oreal Linear Intense and for mascara I'm using my MAC

 Today was just one of those days when your eyeliner just doesn't want to work.

 And now I'm applying my favourite mascara to my top and bottom lashes.

 Next I'm using my Body Shop Bronzer, the Honey Bronzer in 01 which is the lightest shade.

 Nothing too major, just to give my face a bit of colour, a bit of more shape rather

 To highlight my cheekbones, nose and cupid's bow I'm going to be using my MAC Mineralize

 For lips I'm using my NYX Butter Gloss in Eclair which is a beautiful light baby pink.

 I know we're going into autumn here in Australia but it doesn't feel like autumn weather to

 It feels like summer still so this would be perfect for this time of year as well.

And today I'm going to show you guys how I achieved this high bun with

 thing you're going to want to do is flip all of your hair over.

 to put it into a ponytail and make sure it's in the place that you want it to be.

 I'm going to make sure my hair isn't pulling around my edges and just loosen it up a little

Then start shaping it to the shape that you want it to look like

 A cold and snowy day, getting some of the last of the vegetables.

 Today we want to really show you how to cook with some of the vegetables.

 So we've come inside and you know you can buy your Brussels sprouts and they look like

 And if you buy them like this, obviously you just want to pop them off the stalk and then

 We're going to talk to you today on how I like to prepare them.

 There's several different methods of cooking Brussels sprouts and I think they're one of

 those vegetables that's really catching on over the past several years.

 And the reason we're doing that is that I really want more of the flavor to coat most

 And what we're going to do is we're going to coat them with some olive oil, enough to

 You can do everything from just salt and pepper, you can use paprika, you could use dill.

 What we're adding today is sea salt, garlic, savory, thyme, oregano, rosemary, basil and

 All those spices are going to go right on to our Brussels sprouts.

 And I'm going to season these pretty heavily because I like the taste of a lot of seasoning.

 So we're going to get these into the oven, 325 degrees for around 15 minutes.

 You want to have the Brussels sprouts evenly spaced and have a little gap between each

 If they're too close together, they're not going to crisp up as much.

 So depending on how you want them crunchy, leave them a little bit lighter green.

 If you haven't had Brussels sprouts cooked this way, give it a try.

 They're a lot different than those steamed ones your grandmother may have made.

 Come back every week for all of our tips and some helps here at Growing Wisdom.

 I'm Noreen and welcome to my kitchen and day five of our sourdough experiment.

 It's looking almost exactly the same and I'm having a hard time now distinguishing between

 I do know which is which but they almost look identical and they almost smell identical.

 So we're thinking we're on the right track with this and now it's time to feed our pineapple

 So you'll see this on Monday but I don't know if I'll get to make bread tomorrow.

 If I have to I'll put the starter in the fridge and we'll just go from there and then next

 weekend when I have a three day weekend we'll start experimenting with sourdough bread.

 We're going to do a half a cup of flour and a half a cup of water.

 And for those of you who might be interested who did not see it my friend Bear Prepper

 did a video recently I mean in the last few days of how to make your own yeast cakes.

 So that is a really awesome thing I think to know how to do and I'm going to use my

 Make sure that we scrape down the sides pretty good because you know when that gets foamy

 and it starts you know working then it kind of settles on the side.

 So you want to make sure that you get anything in there that you want to mix it up really

 And honestly this is a little thin for me so I am going to go ahead and add another half

 And don't give up if yours looks like it's not going to work don't give up because you

 just never know add a tablespoon or two of sugar a pinch of yeast and let's get moving.

 I'm going to put the lid back on it I'm going to let it go take a nap and I think in about

 And I tasted it this morning and it is really very pungent and it doesn't taste good at

 It just tastes so it tastes like alcohol and like it's sour so I think that it's right

 for this recipe because it's bubbling and it's still got a lot of activity going on

 So I think that we're on the right track and hopefully we'll be able to make some bread

 So I hope that you're following along you've all left so many wonderful comments those

 of you who've decided to try this on your own and for those of you who are just getting

 Just try it even if you don't have any juice just start with water and flour and some yeast

 You can use anything you can use wine, apple cider vinegar, beer, juice, grape juice, pineapple

 It really can be made from anything and we'll just move on and see what we can do and we'll

 learn from each other and from our mistakes and our successes and I think it'll be awesome.

 So keep it up don't get discouraged and we'll just find our way through this and it'll be

 So I hope you try it I hope you love it and until next time I'll see ya!

 So since we're on this Punjabi fest over here, here's an accompaniment that goes fantastic

 Now really, we don't know what name to give it, so you can call it whatever you like

 But it goes really, really well Something very delicious is what I want to

 So we have a little bit of jaggery here, and we've roughly crushed it, so it's not in big

 chunks but little crumbles And the measurements for this is really up

 basically three ingredients We have jaggery, we have roughly crushed peanuts,

 and we have ghee, which is clarified butter And we're going to mix those three things

 So over here, we're actually going to roast the peanuts a little bit, just so that the

 raw flavor goes out of them But if you do have roasted peanuts, unsalted

 So basically dry roast, you're just going to give it a little, let them get warm and

 get that rawness out of them And over here actually, Hetal did mention

 It's called shakkar, at least in north it's known as shakkar, not the shakkar that you

 get in Bombay, that's sugar But shakkar in north is known as, this is

 So we're going to wait for this to roast Get the aroma of peanuts, fantastic, and

 We're going to turn it off, so we're going to just allow it to cool down and then we'll

 Our jaggery is here, we add our peanuts And this is ghee, we're just going to generously

 You know that balance in a meal where you have to have a little bit of sweet and a little

 bit of spice, I think this is the sweetness And if you like jaggery, it is just so good

 Look at the texture, it's really nice, it's almost like having a little pickle on the

 I'm going to say and I've co-washed my hair about every other day, okay?

 Economical conditioner, I'm going to say use your vo5 or your swab naturals

 From the ends and kind of work my way up just to add some slip to it

 Right now I kind of have a cooling sensation that I can kind of feel on my scalp, which feels really good

 So I'm just going to unravel it and just like you can hopefully you can see this

 All of those little hairs that are sticking up that are frizzy.

 So if I'm not careful when I remove these twists I can definitely lose more hair than I need to

 Then I'm just going to clip the section out of the way go throughout and so

 My hair will you know, it'll soak up the conditioner and the oil

 So when I go to detangle in the shower, it's gonna be a lot easier.

 To braid a little bit at the base and then do some two strand twists.

It's going to keep the roots from getting matted like mine just a little tidbit

 I'm gonna start doing that because I think that two strand twists for me do

 Not more damage, but I can't keep them in quite as long as I would like if I just had

 Braids, I think I would prefer that a whole lot better for taking down my hair

 And then for the length of the style the longevity of the style

 braided my hair in these individual plaits while the conditioner was still in and

 after I rinse that comb through conditioner out then I shampooed and

 Conditioned my hair and I just used some Shea Moisture products for the shampoo and conditioner and then the

 Conditioner I left just a little bit in and all I'm gonna do at this point.

 These are gonna be the same braids that I use maybe for the next

 Like I said, there's still maybe a little bit of conditioner still left in which was the Shea Moisture

 Conditioner the one with the I think the brownish black colored label that smells really really good.

 And I'm just going to make sure that I apply it although you can see my eyes are red

 Don't take a shower and do your hair and still got eyeliner and mascara on it's not the business

 And this just adds a little bit of sheen not that you're going to see my hair

 But this is going to keep my hair nice moisturized and shiny if I was to

 Wear my wig wigs, whatever I'm choosing to do and for you guys who are wanting

 So I will be showing you guys a few wig reviews coming soon and I'll talk to you guys later

 I know it just it hurts so bad to go ahead and click that button, but could you do that for me, please?

 And the handle is a little bit stuck there, so just wiggling it back and forth.

 And I'm going to wrap a few turns of Teflon tape around the bottom here.

 Alternatively, if we wanted to, we could just replace the bib washer here.

 First I'm going to apply my Urban Decay primer potion all over my top and bottom lids.

 Next grabbing my new Tude palette by the balm in the color Sassy.

 It's just like a white pearly color and I'm applying it on the ball of my eye.

 Since it's really pigmented I made sure that I kind of blend it out well before I move

 Next grabbing my Rimmel pure white pencil liner I'm just applying it to my inner corners.

 Now grabbing a pink pearly color, it's the color Standoffish, I'm applying it right on

 And then taking the same pearly pink color I'm going to apply it right on top of my white

 Next I'm going to grab a matte medium brown color in the color Sultry and then I'm just

 going to take a little bit of it and work it at the outer corner of my eyes and then

 So just go really light with this and just work your way and build it up.

 Now taking the color Selfish with a fluffy brush I'm going to work it into my crease

 and then I'm kind of going to wing it out a little bit to create a little bit of a cat

 And then grabbing the color Sassy again I'm going to put it on my brow bone as a highlighter

 and then also going to dampen the brush and put it onto the ball of my eye again.

 I feel like I'm getting a little rusty at this since I'm not doing these voiceovers

 I'm grabbing a dark color, it's in the color Sleek, I'm going to apply it into the outer

 corner just a very little amount so that I can work my way inward and drag the color

 And when you're working with dark colors like this dark brown color just make sure that

 you blend it in using a windshield wiper motion to doing it really well so that it's well

 Next I'm grabbing my Tarte eye lash primer, sorry it's a little bit of a tongue twister,

 This actually conditions and also helps accentuate your lashes.

 And then just using my old fashioned Revlon Colorstay liquid eyeliner that I got at the

 drugstore I'm going to create, it's called a square liner so it's not like a cat liner

 where it's winged out, it's more of like a square shape at the end.

 If you have trouble making your lines steady just use small strokes like I am and it creates

 So if your hand's a little bit shaky just stick to those small strokes to keep it nice

 What I'm using is my YSL Babydoll mascara and I'm just going to do zig zag motions and

 After you are done applying it to your top lashes I'm going to move on to my bottom lashes.

 And you're just going to do the same kind of zig zag motion working it into your bottom

 Usually I try not to put a lot of pressure so it doesn't smear on my bottom lash line

 Now grabbing the dark dark brown color also, it's called Sleek.

 I'm going to work it into my lower lash line starting at the outer half.

 And now grabbing a medium brown color in the color Sultry I'm just going to drag the color

 Using my Lip Tar Primer I'm just going to apply it to my lips first and then applying

 I forgot what color this is so I'll have to look it up for you guys.

 First you're going to need, what I do is I use wet washcloth to clean the lens off first.

 Always use a wet washcloth to try and clean all that nasty stuff off first.

 Okay guys there's a little video of my Mopar A-Body tubular lower control arms.

 Just so you know they're inch and an eighth DOM 120 wall so it's a nice

They are made on a jig from a factory lower control arm so they they

 of the features of course you get urethane greasable urethane bushings by

 inch and a quarter gets machined down and is actually installed five inches

 into the tube so this is actually solid all the way back to this point.

 mounted spindles on them everything clears nice and nice and tight but it

 inch spacers are machined they're actually for caster adjustment so if you

 put both spacers at the back after you install these you get a factory setup.

 Move one up forward of course you get a quarter inch of you know positive caster

 supposed to help with stability and things like that so they're actually

Another feature sway bar mount is in the factory location as far

 need to be made to the K member I'm going to go into that that's what the

 this a little bit bigger I used a hole saw actually made an inch and a quarter

 it's just a little too big you could probably get away with like an inch

 possibly but you'll want to drill into there into the factory sleeve you'll see

 it and tap that with this machine bushing installed which you'll receive

 this also but you'll slide that in and drill and tap that and you'll make want

 to make sure that this leave the set screw in but not tight because you don't

 want that to spin and then you'll you'll know what I'm talking about.

 modifications you'll it'll come with a plate that is also machined it's eighth

 inch thick once you get everything aligned this is you're going to weld

 this on but you'll tack it after all you get it aligned and I'll show you how to

 area up because it from the factory it's only welded from this one side so this

 the the sleeve that's installed in the factory K-member you could actually move

 you'll notice that it moves so this will actually beef this area up quite a bit

 some guys do more they'll actually cut this out and box this things like that

 fully weld everything which is fine and it's probably what I'll end up doing but

 this gives you an idea what you need to do and I'm going to now assemble the K-member

 to show you or the lower control arms to give you an idea how easy this is

 sorry I suck at video and I have a cold right now but you'll see how quick this

 goes I'm just going to install it like a factory setup as far as caster.

 do slide this on to the strut rod you'll need any clearance you'll have to grind

 down the reinforcement welds made on the back side so you want to clearance that

 area if you need any room but you'll want this nice and tight like this one

All this can be done well K-member is installed in the car also with the motor installed which is nice.

 and while you want to drill and tap that sleeve and pushing it's in there is to keep this shaft from turning.

 If you want to change the caster on these also like you if you want to add more caster you're

 either going to have to go to an adjustable strut rod or you'll have to cut the bushing

 on this this side in here down one quarter of an inch so the whole assembly

 will move forward one quarter inch but I would recommend going to an adjustable strut rod.

 I believe this will work for the lower A-arms, the earlier A-arms too, the 67 through 72.

 What's most common around these waters and a lot of waters through the US is blue-winged

 olives so we're going to do a little blue-winged olive comparison with a biobody, very realistic.

 We're going to start out with a TMC 100 or your favorite dry fly hook.

 I must tell you that this is a much larger hook than we would normally tie blue-winged

 We've got a fine piece of dyed comparidon in a medium done from Nature Spirit.

 That wing is essentially in position, ready when we get to that portion of the fly.

 I'm going to take a fine dry fly dubbing in a blue-winged olive, very sparse amounts.

 Probably should have used an olive colored thread, but I had some black on here so we're

 I usually tie this in and then I can slide it back and forth to the length I want.

 Come back here a little ways, grab those tails and splay them on each side, holding them

 The reason being is the biot that I'm going to wrap over this, we want the symmetry to

 Make sure that you really butt that mayfly tail up against that little bump in order

 to get it to stand to splay those tails like a real mayfly would be.

 I'm just going to evenly space this coming forward and try not to let any thread show

 An olive thread would have been beneficial but I wasn't smart enough to swap out.

 I'm going to tie this off just behind the wing here a little ways.

 So now I'm just going to kind of smooth some of this stuff out.

 Just enough to cover the thread because you don't want a great big fat thorax.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to push this wing forward and wrap the back portion

 I came up a little shy on dubbing so I'll fill it in with a little more.

 Really get that right up against that wing and put it in there.

 The aim of the lured mark rounding is to turn the boat from a downwind course onto a close-hauled course, aiming to exit close to the mark going at full speed.

 The heel, trim and control lines should be used to help turn the boat, which will result in a smooth and controlled mark rounding.

 As you are preparing to round the mark, you should approach wide.

 Next, prepare the control lines which include the kicker, downhaul and outhaul.

 Steer the boat smoothly round the mark whilst sheeting in quickly with both hands.

Try to avoid over-sheeting by sheeting in smoothly as the boat turns.

 Try to exit as close to the mark as possible and fine-tune the controls as appropriate.

Approach wide to the mark, tighten controls, daggerboard down, lured heel.

 skirt that's made out of ties and I saw her walking around the apartment complex

 just looks so interesting to me and I asked her where she got it.

 I made this necktie skirt because somebody had brought me a necktie skirt

 store unless you're so in love with a particular tie that you just can't stand

 who maybe had a uncle or a grandfather or somebody like that who died and maybe

 there's some slobber like that for instance this was somebody I knew and

 they spilled something on the tie and I don't know and now they're gone and now

And this one that Mary made for me has my husband's tie on it and

 It's going to end up on my skirt but somebody's gonna be wearing it.

 Now for someone like me who would love to do things like this, I love to sew, I love to do

 things, but I see two sewing machines here and to me that's very intimidating.

These sewing machines are as old as I am, which is old, and they're

This machine, and just so you know I'm 48 years old, and yes I do feel a

 little bit like mutton dressed up as lamb in this skirt, but I'm okay with that.

 machines, which is wonderful when you go to get them fixed because it doesn't

 need a zipper foot, you need the sewing machines, you need pins, a measuring tape,

 and the ripper, and yes for when you make a mistake, which I never do of

 were telling me that the hardest part about putting a skirt together was

 Because you collect a bunch of ties and different people want different things.

 Like for instance I make these ties because I teach and a lot of my students

 want to have tie skirts and so I make them for them for special

 All right so I choose, sometimes certain people want certain colored necktie

Like you were particular about, you sort of wanted a green thing.

Some people can go with just eclectic, like they don't care which

 palette and it has to be, go together and they like to match it up.

 In fact the more god-awful the tie is it probably is gonna look cuter in a skirt.

 god-awful but it's really, and not only that, it's really substantial tie.

 with what a lot of people, like for instance here's the zipper of this skirt.

 You can put this skirt, that's what's nice about this skirt too, is you can

 And then the next thing I'd have to do after I pin is take the pins out.

But the only thing is you have to overlap all your neckties to the

 Now if they start to curve the first couple of necktie skirts I made.

The first couple of necktie skirts I made this the tie started to

 curve a little bit because I didn't quite get the layout quite right.

 just when the tie starts to go off the table I think okay I've probably sewn

 And this whole process say Madison's tie skirt only took 13 ties.

And you know most of them are worn down a little bit on your hips.

 going to do this project with us take the time to get the materials together.

 a 10th of September celebration, but I have a twist on this bread pudding.

We're going to use our same three cans of Evap milk and our three

 you know that it's actually the eggs that make our bread pudding so gelatinous?

 use less than the five eggs that I've used in this recipe, you'll get a stiffer type

If you end up using more eggs, you're going to get a more custardy type bread

 we do the bread pudding with bread, we do six slices, but these are kind of thick doughnuts,

 is my first time making this recipe, so even if it bombs, I'm going to post this video.

 So I'm going to get it in my oven on 350 degrees Fahrenheit, and we're going to bake it until

I am estimating about 40, 45 minutes, but I'll let you guys know at the end.

 our beautiful doughnut pudding straight from the oven, and you test this just like you

If I had let it go another five minutes, it would have been darker and not

 maybe pretty to look at, but it would have been so caramelized.

 of this, then I'm going to wrap it up, take the rest to the party.

To purchase copies of my book, just visit my website at www.bearpantryshow.com

 that we normally make our bread pudding with and just go get some donuts from the store.

 Now we have a recipe for donuts too that I'm going to show in the very far, far future.

 with a lot of people and everybody's going to get a sliver, okay?

 for watching, for liking, for sharing, and for everything that you do to support me.

 Alright, this is a 359 I started a video on doing an intake manifold boot repair and a

I'm going to put a little bit of grease, front, back, left and right over

 center, it measures the clearance in between the top of your piston crown and your combustion

Make sure you don't, if you lower your jug or any time you're doing

 an aftermarket and checking your gasket, you want to make sure you've got enough clearance

 otherwise you'll wreck the top of your piston or bend your rod.

My gasket on this one that came with this kit is 30 thousandths.

I'm going to be shooting for anywhere from 19 to 21 on this saw.

We'll measure those to see how much clearance we have with the gasket.

 Double check it after I get it set underneath there in a gasket cut to make sure I'm safe.

 Hey guys, so I just want to show you guys my version of Christina Aguilera's makeup

 The reason why I'm saying my version is because our eyes have significantly different shapes

 and as well as I'm using more neutral colors while she has more grayer colors.

 To start off, I'm just applying some eyeshadow that's lighter than my skin color and it's

 supposed to give a brightening effect the brighter the color you use.

 And I'm just applying it all over my lids, slightly winging it out on the outer corner.

 And then with a light brown color or if you want to match up hers, go with a light gray

 And now as strange as this may sound, we're going to actually start lining the outer half

 The reason for doing that is because it's going to give us an outline for how we're

 going to wing out the eyeshadow because her makeup does wing out having a darker color,

 Her eyeliner is also winged out pretty far out so we're going to extend her liner pretty

 And then with a bright white eyeshadow, we're going to wing out the shadow right above the

 After that's all done, we're going to grab a darker brown color and continue to define

 This time though, we're going to wing it out right above the white eyeliner we just applied.

 And then finally, with the darkest color, we're going to define the crease in the exact

 Now I'm just grabbing the white color again and I'm just going to define the winged out

 part and bring it into the middle as well to brighten up the eyes.

 Alright, so now we're completely done with the eyeshadow so we're just going to line

 After that, if you have long lashes, you can just apply mascara on top of curled lashes,

 but I don't have very long lashes so of course I'm going to apply my falsies.

 So with that, we're completely done and that's just my take on her makeup from her music

 I do hope that you guys like it and also stay tuned for the next video that's coming up

 Also, if you haven't seen it yet, do check out my last week's video on how to get big

 Hello YouTube today we're going to teach you how to solve a Rubik's Cube the easy way without actually solving it at all

 This will take about a minute and it's not that hard and you don't have to be a genius to do it

 Pieces out and through the magic of YouTube I will fast-forward this

 So now the way that you assemble it is you look for these pieces

 The pieces with only two faces on them and you find the two colors they have this one happens to be green and white

 And once again through the magic of YouTube, I'll fast-forward this maybe with a periodic check in

 Welcome to Backcountry Gear's tent setup video for the Saivo, one of Hillerberg's

 self-supporting tents, with a freestanding main body and two staked-out vestibules,

 great base camp tent for when you need the strength and stability of

 receive your Hillerberg Saivo, it comes in a 19 by 8 inch stuff sack.

 see the tent body, four equal-length poles, and the 24 Y-pegs that Hillerberg

 one end into the sleeve at one corner of the tent, and push through until it

 reaches the bottom of the sewn pocket at the end of the sleeve.

 Take another pole and do the same for the sleeve directly across from the

 inner body comes connected to the fly, so we can set up the entire tent at once,

 saving time and eliminating the chance of pieces flying away in high wind

 Once both poles are seated, pull the tent body down around the end of the poles and

 sleeve, pushing it through until it is seated in the sewn pocket at the

 To finish setting up the tent body, insert the end of each pole into its

 vestibule, pulling the tent taut for maximum stability and vestibule space.

 be rolled away and stored for easier access in calmer conditions.

 The vestibule doors and vent options on the Saivo are secured with a simple

To enter the inner tent, simply find the zipper on the inner door

From the inside of the tent, you can access the mesh vents on either

And after opening the door, you can store it in the side pocket inside the

To access the vents at the top of the tent from the outside, unhook the

 These vents have several layers for use in different weather conditions.

 same toggle clips in use, connecting the inner tent body to the outer fly.

 connections enable the user to set up the entire two-wall tent quickly and

 This is actually seriously simple to do and even though it looks complicated, it isn't,

 nail varnish is, you might have to apply two coats, but because mine's so pigmented I only

 Now you're going to be using a copper nail varnish like the one here.

Make sure that the edges are filled in and that there's absolutely

 even though once you apply it, it doesn't look very different, it will later on, trust

So now, with a bit of an angled rectangle, you're going to fill in the rest of the tip

Now don't worry if it overlaps the copper a bit because you'll see why later

 So just basically apply a really large blob on your nail and then spread it out how you

 Now, making sure that there's no blobs on the brush, you're just going to do three stripes.

 One down the middle, one along the side, flicking outwards, and one from the other side, flicking

 Once this has dried, you're going to apply a clear nail varnish.

 do a clear nail varnish over it because it protects the coat, stops it from chipping,

 Thank you again for everyone out there checking out the videos and enjoying them.

 What we're going to look at today is a drum fill in triplet form with diddles, and we're

 going to apply this in an Afro-Cuban 6-8 feel, bring it into a jazz feel, and then to a funk

 feel, but let's address the drum fill because that's really what we're going to look at.

 What we're going to do is we're going to apply diddles to that.

 It's a slash on a note, which makes that note be either a right-right or a left-left.

 At the end of the video, you can really watch the transcription.

 Now when we put this together in 4-4 time on the snare drum in time, here's what the

 Now I'm going to play what I call a groove medley against this.

 It'll start with kind of an Afro 6-8, and the fill that you hear is going to be this

 I'll kind of go into some swing feel right after that, but again, the fill will be the

 And then third, I'll go into kind of a funk type of a feel, and once again, the fill will

 A triplet fill in 4-4 time with some diddles or double strokes applied, and we played an

 Afro Cuban 6-8 style with a jazz style with a funk style, so you can see how that same

 Keep on watching, and here comes a whole exercise up on a board, all transcribed, so you can

 Thank you so much for watching my YouTube channel, Empower Inn.

 So in this video, I wanted to go over a video that you guys have been requesting a lot and

 So let me just start by saying that working a 12 hour shift with a 30 minute break, it

 is really hard to get all of the nutrients that your body needs.

 And many times you'll be working so hard that you forget to eat.

 And then by the time you remember, you'll be so hungry that you will just like inhale

 So my plan is and always has been to have tons of healthy food around me so that I'm

 Now not to say that, you know, on a busy day when I'm not able to get to my snacks as much

 Of course I get hungry quite a bit, but I never get to that point of, you know, just

 So let me just show you what I do and I hope you get some great tips to help you out.

 Also just as a side note, I want to mention, I know a lot of the things that I eat now

 So obviously I put the time, energy, and effort into eating like this because I feel

 The other thing that I want to mention though is that for a long time I could not eat like

 I could not afford to eat like this, especially when I was in nursing school.

 So if you're a nursing student watching this, please don't get upset because, you know,

 you can't afford all organic food or all of the things that I use.

 What I did when I couldn't afford the foods that I wanted was I just was incredibly grateful

 And I think gratitude just really grows and, you know, when you are grateful for what you

 And that's really what I've noticed and I hope you notice the same.

 So without any further ado, let's get started and let's pack our lunches.

 So the first thing that I do is I put my eggs on the stove to boil.

 Once they're boiled, I cover it and then turn the heat down to low and let them simmer

 I get the sandwich containers and I fill them with arugula and spinach.

 I also put lemon slices in there and that's pretty much what I use for dressing.

 After that, I take some kind of gluten free bread and maybe put one or two slices on top

 I will put a list of the nuts that I use as well as all of the products that I use down

 Then I take little snack baggies and I put a good amount of nuts in there.

 So I don't always eat all of them and whatever I don't eat can just be used for next time.

 This day I was just really focusing on strawberries because the strawberries are in season now

 But I do have some blueberries over to the side which I'll probably just eat on my days off.

 So I add those to the pile as well as a whole tomato and a whole avocado.

 Next I get some hummus and I divide up the hummus into three little containers.

 So I'm working three days this week so I'm cutting up three grapefruits into slices like an orange.

 And these will literally stay fresh for about three or four days.

 So if I'm working three days in a row I'll just go ahead and cut them.

 I have three different lunch bags which were basically all fresh swag from different hospitals giveaways at one time or another.

 Looks like it's not going to close but don't you worry it will.

 So make sure you don't forget about those because those are going to be on the stove.

 So that way all you have to do in the morning is just grab it and go.

 And then that way I just don't have to think about it for the rest of the week.

 I agree it's a lot of work for that few hours but to me it's so worth it because I don't have to think about food for basically the rest of the week.

 Now I do of course still wake up and I make my shake first thing in the morning which I already made a video on that.

 So if you haven't seen that that's one thing that I also add to what I take with me.

 In addition to that I always bring a one liter bottle of water.

 And stay blessed, stay healthy and I can't wait to hear from you again soon.

 Hi, my name is Sahira and welcome to my online belly dance studio.

Today I'm going to show you an exercise that is very useful in learning how to segment the different parts of your abdomen for belly dance movement.

 So typically in western exercise we tend to use the abdomen as one big muscle or sometimes we'll do the upper abs versus the lower abs.

 The way that I teach belly dance and the way that I dance, I like to think about the abdominals being segregated into three parts.

 So I'm going to take a look now at how I do each of these different isolations so that you can learn to do them well and I'll show you a drill at the end that you can use to practice them.

 So starting with the top, we're going to look at isolation number one.

 This is the muscle that you use to knit your rib cage together.

 So if you think of a chest lift, you're opening the rib cage up towards the sky.

 You can think about the upper abdominals as being the muscle that you use right here to bring the rib cage and knit it back together.

 So you're lifting up, try to breathe normally and use those upper abdominals to knit your rib cage together.

 Or you can imagine maybe someone karate chops you right here in your solar plexus and this is the muscle that you use to try to get away.

 You can feel the muscles in your upper abdominal hardening under your fingers as you create this contraction.

 Try to breathe as normally as possible and don't use an inhale and exhale to create it.

 Rather use your center back to lift the chest up and then use your upper abs to contract the chest back in.

 So you're contracting here all the way in the top of the abdomen, trying ideally to keep the rest of the belly nice and relaxed.

 So I like to think about this one as taking my belly button and pulling it through to my spine if that were possible.

 So if you could kind of thread your belly button through to your spine, suck it in here and release.

 As much as possible try to isolate this to the center of your abdomen.

 Try to keep your lower abs or your pelvic region relaxed and try to keep those upper abdominals that we were just working with as relaxed as possible too.

 So you're pulling that belly button up and in towards your spine and release it.

 So thinking about the belly button coming towards the spine, relaxing.

 The third isolation we're going to do is one that you should be familiar with from your standard belly dance posture.

 We're thinking of the muscle that's a couple of inches below your belly button.

 So to create this tuck you need to have your knees slightly bent.

 So in our belly dance posture we're thinking about contracting beneath the belly button and releasing.

 So contracting to bring the hips up and in towards you and releasing.

 We're contracting it a little bit further than we do for our posture because we're trying to get a good strengthening exercise here.

 You can also think about this as trying to sort of flatten out that natural curvature that you have in your lower spine.

 You want to think about taking that curvature and lengthening it, really lengthening your tailbone towards the floor by using the muscle a couple of inches below your belly button.

 As much as possible try to use this muscle here as opposed to contracting your glutes and squeezing your butt cheeks together.

 You want to think about contracting your lower abdominals to bring the hips underneath you.

 So now I'm going to show you an exercise that you can do to strengthen these muscles.

 You have to release in between each contraction so you can contract again.

 Pelvis will be just gently tucked in our normal belly dance posture.

 I want you to breathe normally, deeply, and relaxed through this whole exercise.

 Now it's tuck, release, tuck, release, tuck, release, tuck, release.

 And that is an exercise that you can do to help you isolate the three regions of your

 As you can see I have taken like one and a half liter of milk here.

 This is still warm but you can easily dip your finger and stay there for a long time.

 It's like 110 degree Celsius which is like in summertime this is how the highest temperature often goes.

 With that you take regular room temperature yogurt, plain yogurt definitely, gelatin free, active culture probiotic or organic yogurt.

 I took like one cup of yogurt and I put it on the microwave or microwave proof pot as you can see.

 Now is the time to stir it well so the yogurt gets mixed up with the milk well.

 And you can add sweetened condensed milk or evaporated milk, sugar, honey.

 Now I turn the oven at lowest heat just to warm it up and then I turn it off again.

 But I turn the light on and I will let it rest for couple hours.

 You can leave it overnight with just oven light on but the oven off definitely.

 I kept like 6 hours in the oven with the light on and couple hours in the freezer.

 Well you can decorate your yogurt with different colorful fruits like this.

 Today I'm making Buffalo Mac and Cheese and this uses our Raita Quick Mix Buffalo Chicken

 If you like buffalo chicken wings, you'll love this dip and you'll love the mac and

 And it's just some simple ingredients and you make it on the stove, it bakes in about

 What you need is a can of cream and mushroom soup, a half cup of ranch dressing, a can

 of tomatoes with diced green chilies, half a cup of milk, a cup of cheddar jack cheese,

 eight ounces, that's the uncooked eight ounces of macaroni, and a softened package of cream

 So I have my macaroni cooking on the stove and we're going to go over and mix these ingredients

 in the pan and then we're going to add a bread, crumb, and butter topping.

 So while your macaroni is cooking, you just cook it according to the package directions.

 In another sauce pan we're going to add the softened cream cheese, and the milk, the ranch

 dressing, tomatoes with chilies, the can of cream and mushroom soup, the cheese, and the

 We're just going to heat this, not too high, probably about medium, until all this blends

 I'm using non-scratch pans and right Azzy's wonderful non-stick utensils so it won't scratch

 You can sell them, make 40% profit for your club, your team, a sports group.

 This is the Rata stoneware, also available for a fundraising opportunity.

 Then we're going to combine our melted butter and bread crumbs, sprinkle that on the top,

 So our buffalo mac and cheese has been in the oven for 30 minutes.

 Now I'm going to add this melted butter, 2 tablespoons of melted butter, to 1 cup of bread crumbs.

 Right, do it to the other side, then we can also raise the awning.

 Right here, grab it, slide it, you go past the lock, grab right here, pull down, pull

 Now, you got to watch this because when you do this right here, it only locks certain

 You let go of the handle, hold the arm with your hand, and ease it down to the lock.

 And you can actually pull out so far it would come out of here.

 Now the ideal is, once you do this, the ideal is, you want it slow.

 Rain will stretch the canvas, it will bend the tube, it will bend these arms.

 But you leave one in slow flow in case you're away and it does start raining a little, it

 If you ever come out for some reason and it's full of water, you know, because you didn't

 catch it and roll it up and it's full of water, don't let it down.

 Take a broom, grab it, come here and push up on the canvas, get most of the water off.

 The reason is, when you let this down, that can have a couple hundred gallons of water

 Make sure you get it high enough to where you're not going to get it.

 Now, when you have this on and up, you can slide this to the end and wrap it around the arm.

 The reason is, to flip this lever, to make it go up, you can't really flip it unless

 If you let it go crooked, it's going to roll up and only crooked, then you might not have

 Once it rolls up, all you have to do then is come right here, squeeze that arm real hard

 If you get it too tight, they'll seize up with you and you can't break them.

 You know, you got a little compartment storage compartment there, but this one's about the

 What's happening, it's Clint, doing another little cooking video here.

 We're going to throw it on the Traeger grill, smoke it with a little bit of applewood.

 So the trick to this, since we're going to brine it with the, I said cider braised, sorry

 Since we're going to brine it, we're going to brine it overnight.

 So I'm doing the brining right now and then we'll come back tomorrow, throw it on the

 We've got our pork loin, nice fresh center cut boneless pork loin.

 This works really good on pork ribs as well, big fat thick pork chops.

 And also works really good on a pork butt if you want to smoke it for like 12 hours

 Whatever liquid we got, we're going to use apple cider with a little bit of water.

 You want to use for every gallon of brining liquid and you just need enough to cover it.

 So for this we're going to do about half a gallon or so total of liquid.

 And then, so for each gallon you got to do a cup of sugar and a cup of salt.

 We're going to cut down the sugar just a little bit because we're going to use organic blue

 Agave if you don't know is what they make tequila out of so it gives it a little punch.

 Now what we're going to do is dissolve the salt and the sugar into the hot boiling water

 We're going to add a little bit of ice to it just to chill it down before we put the

 Just that the hot water makes it a whole lot easier to get the salt and the sugar dissolved.

 So as I said we're shooting for half a gallon or a gallon so we need about half a cup of

 And we're going to go a little bit less like I said on the sugar because we're putting

 It's about the consistency as you see of maple syrup or something.

 We're going to take a lemon and we're going to squeeze that in there.

 The thing with the brine, all that flavor we want to build up to the point where you

 really, honestly if you taste it, if you taste your brine, you're going to want to

 You want it that salty, sugary and full of spice and everything because it's not all

 So basic brine, like I said, gallon of water or whatever liquid you're using, a cup of

 And my preference on pretty much any fruit juice, that stuff right there.

 I know it sounds kind of weird, but you get a whole lot of flavor out of that instead

 This is what happens when you're an amateur shooting a cooking show.

 Now for this we don't want something that's huge because we want all that juice to sit

 And then, so we're going to put it in the fridge and then when we take it out of the

 fridge in the morning, we're going to pull the meat out and we're going to let the meat

 What that's going to do, since we're smoking it, it's going to develop what's called a

 After that salt dries up on the outside, it creates a little film.

 And then we'll throw a little bit of seasoning on it and we'll throw it on the grill tomorrow

 Rest it in the fridge for, I don't know, at least another 4 or 5 hours.

 Alright, we're going to finish up this cider brine cherry wood smoked pork loin.

 But it kind of looks like it almost started cooking a little bit.

 That's from the juices, the acids in the fruit and the salt and everything.

 After that salt dries out on the surface of it, it creates a little tacky feel there.

 So that'll get you all your good flavor and make it look yummy.

 So from here, I'm going to spare you the excitement of watching me put seasoning on it.

 But I'm just using my barbecue rub and throwing it on the grill.

 So here's the pork roast after we pulled it off of the Traeger grill.

Okay, so I'm about to go out right now and I'm going to show you guys my foundation routine

 because it has been highly requested and I just really want to do it because it has changed since my last tutorial.

 I'm just going to say a couple things though is it has been changing up a lot.

 I use a different brush, use sometimes a different powder, a different blush, but I'll kind of explain that more while I'm doing it.

 Before I do my face lotion, I use my Lancome Hydra Intense Mask.

 I don't just put my makeup on on top of it, otherwise my face will be really oily, but I really love this stuff.

 The first thing I always do is my lotion, but I'm going to put my hair back first.

 I know this is really unattractive in videos, but I don't like my hair flying all over my face.

 So I just put this on to moisturize the dry spots and it just kind of makes my face feel smooth and stuff.

 It actually works as a pretty good primer for my foundation, making it stick a little better.

 After I do this, I have to wait about 5 minutes so it's not that sticky, otherwise my foundation won't blend that well.

 I use this for under my eye and spots that I don't need as much coverage.

 I just take my Sonia Kashuk and just kind of blend that out a little.

 I don't blend it out all the way because when I put my foundation on and I blend my foundation, that will blend out as well.

 It says it's mineral concealer, but it basically is just a cream concealer.

 And once again, I don't blend it out completely because I usually blend it out a little more when I do my foundation.

 It's better to take not enough than too much because you won't waste it.

 One way I sometimes do it is with my flat top Sonia Kashuk brush.

 I just dip it in and I just pat it on my face and spin it around.

 But one way I've been doing it very often is I take my Sonia Kashuk foundation brush.

 I just take up a little and I just kind of place it on my face like this.

 It's good to pat it in because then it really gets into your skin, which seems weird.

 But you don't want your makeup, if you rub your face, to be coming off.

 And then I do have some more extra, so I put some on the sponge if I need to.

 And like I said, I sometimes use the flat top brush by Sonia Kashuk.

 I haven't really seen a big difference in the way that they apply it.

 I sometimes use my Neutrogena Mineral Sheers Powder Foundation.

 So I'm just going to put that on and it will set my foundation.

 This doesn't have as much color to it but it's just a nice pink.

 And then some days I use one of the colors from my 10 color palette.

 This is from the In the Bloom collection, their spring collection.

 They did send this to me and I'm going to show you how to use this.

 It just says the name so it doesn't really say which one is which.

 I rub my finger in it a little and it gets to this time where it starts feeling really liquidy.

 This is a very light shimmery color and I think it highlights my face well.

 Hi, so I just wanted to show you quickly how I style my hair now that it's short.

 It's super easy, definitely a big selling point for having this type of hair.

 So this is basically what it looks like when I wake up in the morning.

 Sometimes I use my hands or I'll use a brush and sort of brush it forward which is how

 If there's any spots that like stay sticking up I might give it another squirt or I might

 The only thing I use in my hair is this Garnier Fructis wax and this wax is my favorite.

 Usually a little more than I'm expecting to use is how much it takes.

 So initially I just try to get it throughout the hair pretty well, kind of like you're

 So I've towel dried it, it's all clean and conditioned and everything.

 And I'm going to move it into position first before I apply the product.

 I find if I sort of wiggle it through the hair like this and keep a lot of products

 on my fingertips that it helps give it good texture and distribution throughout the hair.

 As it dries I'm going to sort of keep going like this and playing with it a bit so it

 So this is a really great hairstyle if you like low maintenance.

 Anyways if you have any questions let me know and have a good day.

This is Derek Howes with The Protein Chef and today we're gonna make a single-serving

 First take out a bowl and add in 6 tablespoons or 90 grams of fat-free cream cheese

 If you don't have a hand mixer a spoon or fork will work just as good

 Next take out 4 teaspoons of sprinkles add half of them into your mix and lightly mix them in

 Pour your mix into a smaller bowl and top it with the other half of your rainbow sprinkles

 but if you want the texture to be the same as cheesecake wrap it up and put it into the fridge for a couple hours and

 279 zero grams of fat 22 grams of carbs and 41 grams of protein

 The only tip I have for you guys is that you can make a bunch of these at the same time and the last

 This time I will show you one of the way how to knit the garter stitch working rows of the knit stitches.

 The first and the last stitch of every row will be my 8 stitches.

 Take off one of the needle, turn the main needle around to begin the first row.

I will be working the knit stitches through the front leg of loops.

 Continue and work the same till the last loop on your main needle.

 I remind you that I am working a row of knit stitches on the wrong side.

 The last stitch on this row work as a purl stitch for the edge.

 For the garter stitch we are working rows of knit stitches on the right and on the wrong sides.

 After you have made several rows your fabric will look like this one.

 I worked rows of knit stitches into the front leg on the right side and on the wrong side of the fabric.

 For the edge I slip the first stitch and purl the last stitch of every row.

 I would like to show you another swatch of the garter stitch that I made in Knitting Basic Tutorial 6 part 1.

 Visually those two pieces are almost the same looking, but this second one was made of twisted loops.

 Here you can really see the twisted loops and the fabric made of twisted stitches is little hard and stretchy,

 while this one that we made in this tutorial is soft, stable and looks perfectly shaped.

 Thank you so much for watching and please don't forget to subscribe!

 Hey guys, so today I did a look that is sort of like a sexy shimmery eye for a date, for a fun night out, anything like that.

 It's for when you want a bit of frost or shimmer, but you don't want like a complete like foiled look or anything that's super in your face.

 Especially like if you're going out on a date, you know, and you still want to look like the person that the person asked out.

 So this is a look that I do very often using the Naked 2 palette, which is funny because this used to be my absolute least favorite naked palette,

 but it's actually turned into my favorite probably over the last like six months, a year or so, I don't know.

 I like it because I can use some of the silvers and some of the shimmery colors, but they don't end up looking blue like a lot of silvery colors can do.

 It's just a good mix I think of cool and warm shades and it works.

 So this is a look that I have been meaning to do in a tutorial for a while now because it's just one of my go-to looks that I do if I'm going out at night or anything like that using this palette.

 So I hope that y'all enjoyed it and if you want to see how I did it, then keep watching.

 Alright, so first I'm using a bit of my NARS Pro Prime Smudge Proof Eyeshadow Base.

 Let that set for a few seconds and then I'm going to use a very light base.

 We're going to smudge it out so you just want to feather it on.

 You see that even when you blend them, they keep a lot of their color.

 So this just really is going to help brighten up the shimmery shades that we put down.

 The two colors I'm going to use are Verve and Chopper for the shimmer.

 I'm putting down Verve first because it's just a really light, silvery, shimmery color.

 You keep the brightness of the silver, but you get that sparkly sheen as well.

 Use that first crease brush to blend around the edge too if you need to.

 I'm going to take a little bit of that same color and put it right up under my lower lash line.

 On the inner corner I'm going to use this color called Booty Call.

 I'm going to take this matte shade called Foxy on a really big brush.

 I'm going to use the Too Faced Better Than Sex mascara before I do my false lashes.

 And that they're squeezed pretty closely to your natural lash line.

 Alright, so for the sake of keeping this very simple, and you guys have seen me do this a million times,

 especially lately since I did that tutorial about bronzing and contouring and all that jazz,

 It gives you color without screaming hot pink or brown or something that's too intense.

 Well, first I used my Tony Moly Honey Lip Balm, which I just love.

 And this one actually you can make it work pretty dark or you can make it work just very natural.

 So most days I just use this very, it just works super natural.

 I didn't want the texture to look too goopy or like not kissable.

 So I used these that I, I really love these, the Too Faced Melted Liquid Lipsticks.

 And the problem is, is that the colors are a bit tricky for me.

 It's just hard for me to find a color that I like totally on its own.

 But I really love that one when I want just like a totally like nude lip.

 But I used the Melted Nude and it's a bit on the like orangey tan dark nude side.

 So I actually mixed it with this other new color called Melted Frosting,

 I hope that y'all enjoyed it and that you have a very, very good week, weekend.

 But thank you guys for watching and I'll talk to you very soon.

 Hey everyone, this is a tutorial for a quick and easy hair bow that does not require any teasing or heat.

 First tie your hair up in a high ponytail, then separate a small section of hair and wrap it around the base to hide the hair tie.

 Next separate a small section of hair and clip it to the side for now.

Take a hair tie and tie it about halfway down on each of the two parts.

 Make sure that the hair ties are secured at about the same length for both parts.

 Take a section and curl it inward to form one of the sides of the bow.

To keep it in place, secure both the top and bottom with bobby pins.

 With the left over hair, loop it around your finger and tuck it inside the bow.

 Take the strand of hair that you clipped away earlier down and overlap the mid section with the strand.

Loop it around your finger and tuck it inside either side of the bow.

 What you need is your x-ray film and your tooth basically, and maybe a little bit of blue wax.

 If you want to do two x-rays on one film, you can put one of the lead foils from an empty x-ray film on top of there,

 put your tooth on there with a little bit of wax, blue periphery wax, position the comb of your x-ray machine there.

 Instead of using the lead, you can use just maybe double or triple up some of this foil here.

 And this allows you to get your proximal and facial profiles onto one radiograph.

 I forgot to mention for the x-rays that the plain side faces the x-ray tube, not this side, but this side.

 And also just hold the button until it's done developing and it beeps, usually beeps at least.

 For our developers, right on top it does tell you about how to develop it in case you forget what I'm telling you.

 So we're going to go with about 23 seconds for developer and at least 45 seconds for fixer.

 The reason I say that is developer, you can over or under develop something.

 So if we open this up, we see first of all we have our lid here to block the light.

 They don't have to be closed, but the developer especially will kind of go bad after a while just being on the air.

 It's so easy to just take your scraps out, throw everything out, put the lead in here, and be done.

 Typically what I would do is developer, rinse it in the water, put it in your fixer,

 and then if it's busy in here, you can go to a sink and you can just use the sink to wash the fixer off.

 So basically it's lead, then this black part in between the two black pieces.

 I forgot my little clip, so I just got to stick it in with my fingers.

 You can kind of look through the window to see when it's starting to get a picture.

 You can adjust your time depending, as you get more experience, whether you need more or less time.

 I forgot my little clip to hold it on there, so I have to keep one hand in there.

 And once it's in the fixer, you can even take this off and it'll be fine.

 I'd leave it in the fixer for a while before you do that, though.

 Now it's important that the radiograph is completely dry before you play with it too much.

 It's hard to see on the camera, but maybe if I can go towards the light, you can see a little better.

 So you can kind of see how I have both the radiographs, the facial, and the proximal profile on the one radiograph.

I've tried so many different types of products so many different

 But I've finally found a routine that fits for me and works for me

 And I wanted to just share it with you guys if it's really simple just a few extra steps to your normal routine

 Wonders I used to have such bad under eye creasing like literally I would do my makeup in ten minutes later

 It was already creasing and I was just like what the hell if you guys want to know what else is on my face

 I'll put everything down below my foundation and lips everything and yes

 So if you want to know how to stop creasing underneath your eyes and be happy and amazing then just keep watching

 The lighting is a little weird it's because it's been raining like so bad today like it's

 Kind of like what I do is just make sure you have a clean face obviously you're not going to want to put

 Product on top of old product if you know I mean I say that a lot whenever I talk about like

 Makeup wipe and just make sure that like everything is like completely off my face, okay?

 There's nothing on the makeup wipe so that step was probably completely pointless.

 I don't know why I always want to say the bomb every time I talk about this stuff

 I always want to say the bomb so I'm just gonna put some of this on my face

 So one of the most important steps for no under eye creasing that I have found to be amazing is to

 Eye shadow primer because it prevents creasing it's anti creasing that's obviously what goes on underneath your eyes

 So the one that I've been using lately is a Too Faced shadow insurance

 Primer potion I feel like it works a lot better, but this is the only one that I have right now

 So what I do is I just put it underneath my eyes, and I noticed a huge difference with creasing

 I just take like the same amount that I would put on my eyeballs

I kind of start off like patting it on a little bit, and then I kind of just like rub it in

 Now I'm gonna do my foundation, and I'll be back in just a minute, okay?

 So once your foundation is on I do this step under the under eye concealing last.

 I have already put all my foundation on I have concealed the areas that need a little extra

 But one of the best ones that I have found recently that is affordable is the NYX HG photogenic concealer I

 Found that this one works the best out of any drugstore concealers that I found so far

 Also if you're looking for more of a high-end one, I would say using the Mac

 But that's another one that I found that is really good with not creasing and things like that

 So I'm just going to take this the HG photogenic concealer and right now

 I'm using the color light which is a little bit too light right now

 So I got it when I wasn't as I wasn't self-tanning as much so it's a little bit too light

I'll show you how to kind of make it better so big tip on doing this I

 And I just kind of do like a weird little shape, and then I bring it down

 Extremely fast so you're going to want to work quickly when you're using it, so I just use my fingers

 And bring the product wherever you want it wherever you want the highlighted area to be

 You're not gonna want to like sweep because it's just going to move the product around too much and kind of take away from the

 Highlighted under-eye look if you know I'm saying then I'm just gonna take a brush.

 It's just a big kind of fluffy looking brush which I like and what I'm going to use to set my under eyes is

 Mineralware top free mineral correcting powder and translucent it's extremely light a little bit too light for my face

 But that's what I have right now, so I'm just going to dab the oops dab the brush in it and then

 the reason you're gonna want to dab it and not sweep it is because again it will move the product and

 Makeup sponge this one is by sonic a ship, and I get them at Target for like three dollars

 Physicians Formula powder just like that I do so I kind of take it like this and I kind of just roll it underneath my eye

 It really will lighten up that area a lot and before everyone freaks out like oh my god

 On there, okay, so I'm going to finish the rest of my makeup and

 It has worked for me, and it literally has changed my life doing it this way

 So I really really hope that it works for you guys to leave down below any

 Tips that you guys have that I didn't mention or ones that work really well for you or products that work really well for you

 Because I always like switching up what I use especially for underneath my eyes because I do

 Okay, I really don't feel like doing my hair today because it's been raining like a mola mola.

 Well, with this warmer weather we're having, I figured today would be a nice day to do some barbecuing.

 Okay, so now that they've heated up, give them a little Worcester sauce.

 Okay, so now that they're ready, I'm gonna put them on the grill.

 All right, now that it's almost done, I figured I'd go stick the buns on this top rack and warm them up a bit.

 Okay, and then we'll slap on a good old piece of American cheese.

 Hello Whovians, welcome to day 5 of Doctor Who week here on 6 hours of Doctor Who Life.

 In today's video I'm going to show you how to make some awesome Doctor Who themed food

 So that means I'm going to turn in this poorly made fez for this awesome Tardis Chef's hat

 In today's video I'm going to show you how to make some jammy dodgers.

 If you remember the Doctor pretends they are a self destruct button for the Tardis

 I've never had a jammy dodger because we don't have these here.

 They've also made a couple other Doctor Who recipes which you should definitely check

 Ok for this recipe you're going to need 115 grams or one stick of butter, 50 grams or

 I didn't have caster sugar so I just took normal granulated sugar and put it in a blender

 100 grams or one cup of plain flour, 50 grams or three and a half tablespoons ground almond,

 It should be softened about at room temperature and put it in a bowl.

 Give that a really good mix until it looks something like this.

 Wrap that ball of dough in some cling wrap and stick it in the fridge for about an hour.

 After you've removed your ball of dough from the fridge, set your oven to 140 degrees Celsius

 Throw some flour on a flat surface and start rolling out your dough with a rolling pin.

 Ok so for some reason the only rolling pin I can find in my house is this child's plastic

 After you're done rolling out your dough, grab those cookie cutters.

 Each Dami Dodger will have two pieces, a bottom piece that's just a solid circle and a top

 piece that's a circle with a fun little design cut out in the middle.

 I don't have those traditional hearts that they use on them, but I have this fun little

 Once they're done baking, take them out of the oven and let them cool.

 Take your two biscuits, put some jam in between and press them together.

 Pair them up with some Dalek cupcakes, some Adipose marshmallows, and of course, fish

 And subscribe and come back tomorrow to watch a brand new Doctor Who video and get pumped

 Hello and welcome to the sixth episode of All You Ever Wanted To Know About Rebounding.

I'm a mind, body, coach and rebounding trainer and I bring to you

 after rebounding and that's why we will look today at this theme and we go for that to

 you what you're doing at the end of your session, at the end of each rebounding session after

 And then at the very, very end we want to finish the exercise in stretching up high

 over the head and then bringing the arms with the exhaling down.

 Inhaling over the head, stretch, stretch, stretch and then exhaling, bringing the energy

And we can either do it in standing like Joanna is doing it now or we can do it

 exhaling, centering again in your belly and then descending the rebounder with a soft

 then what I recommend is also just stand there for a moment, you know, and just you can close

 system, it's not just an exercise, it really does something to the whole body.

 our body is flushing out toxins and we need good water, we need a lot of water in order

 you want to stretch and that's also part of flushing out the systems, getting the toxins

 you want to do, especially when you have done rebounding for more than five minutes, you

This is the first one where you have one foot in front of you and stretch

 I'm very happy that you took this time and to stay in contact with me.

 Now concerning the newsletters, you might be interested to hear the result.

 And that goes to everybody, including the ones who are more interested in only getting

And there you can say, oh, please put me off the weekly, put me in the monthly one, or vice versa.

 So this was the sixth episode of All You Ever Wanted to Know About Rebounding.

And I am always very, very happy for your comments and your questions.

 And please continue to put them down here under the video in the comments section.

And I am very much looking forward to hearing from you and to see you next Friday here on www.rebounding.tv.

 We're out here in the mountains on a hike and these little guys

 It moves up and down a little bit and back and forth a little bit.

 But you hold it, you push the lock, and you bend it a little bit.

Now close it the rest of the way with your fingers out of the way.

Now let's try to get that part on without pushing any of the pins through.

 You'll learn how to be safe with real knives by using a pretend knife.

 So tonight we're on beautiful Buckhams Bay with my camera crew and lovely daughter Erin.

 This episode is all about catching a smallmouth bass from a paddle boat with finesse worms.

 So we're going to be doing a little bit of drop shotting and I'll show you how to set

 We're going to use some finesse worms, 4 inch tiki finesse worms from Wave and this net

 This one is green pumpkin and this one is black with red flake.

 Both are good and both have won me some money in tournaments lately.

 Typically when you're doing drop shotting you'll use a very small hook.

 I have special hooks that I use for drop shotting but I just happen to be out of them so I'm

 So when you're drop shotting what you want to do is tie a palomar knot.

 So fold your line over like that, leave about 2 feet or so, 3 feet of a leader behind and

 what you're going to do is fold that line over and then shove that through the eye of

 So once you get it through like that what you're going to want to do is make a bit of

 And what that will end up doing for you is once you put your weight on it keeps your

 So what you want to end up with is basically this effect right here.

 So from your hook down to your weight, which I'm going to tie on in a second, you're going

 So it's important when you're drop shotting, basically it's a finesse type of fishing so

 use small baits, either worms or small gulp minnows or something like that.

 I'm going to start off by hooking it wacky style and that's what wacky style looks like.

 So the actual technique to drop shotting, I mean, you saw a while ago I just actually

 threw it out and basically I got a hit as soon as it hit the water but typically when

 you're drop shotting you're fishing in anywhere from 10 to 20 feet of water, maybe even deeper,

 You're going to want to let your line go right to the bottom, that's why you use the weight.

 You can tell when it's on bottom obviously because you've got all this extra slack in

 What you're going to want to do is you're going to want to reel up until you feel that

 weight and then basically with not a lot of pressure on your line you're going to want

 And what that does is it gets your bait moving in the water whether it's a worm or a minnow.

 You can do it for a few seconds and stop depending, it's all personal how you want to do it.

 So with semi-taut line you don't want to pull that weight off the bottom, you just want

 to basically let your worm descend back down towards the bottom a little bit and just get

 Another way, and you're going to want to have your rod at about 9 o'clock by the way, but

 another way some people do it is they just hold it in one spot and let the current or

 the wind or whatever blow the bait around, move the bait around a little bit underneath

 Depending on the situation, depending on the fish, a different tactic might work.

 That noise you hear in the background by the way is our local fire department out practicing

 For all our loyal followers out there, we apologize for that technical difficulty, but

 tonight at least we caught a fish and showed you how to do a little bit of drop shotting

 I'm actually considering entering my next bass tournament in a paddle boat and save

 We'd like to explain to you what sous vide is and then we'd like to show you the process

 all the way from our vacuum pack unit through the process to the presentation.

 the integrity of the food, and provides a consistent result so that patrons come back

 to the restaurant each and every time and get the same exact meal.

 vide, you want to make sure you're using the freshest ingredients possible.

 cooking at low temperatures, we always want to make sure our ingredients are as fresh

We're going to place the product in this, in this case, our Volrath In-Chamber

For more information on vacuum packaging, please see us at volrathuniversity.com

 bath because the water is the most efficient way to transfer the heat.

 method for cooking all sorts of proteins, seafood, shellfish, vegetables, even fruit.

 itself, on the back, we have a pump speed, a variable pump speed.

 setting right now just to gently move some of the water around.

 speed if we wanted to move that water a little bit quicker, but for this it's perfect at

 to set three distinct temperatures depending on the different recipes.

 staff you can tell them setting number one is for fish, setting number two is for steaks

The high speed rotary knob shows on the display here, we're showing current

 It's a designed piece to fit together to be on the counter at all times.

 is separate so it can come out, but really for this unit we have on the end a nice valve

Okay, so now we're going to leave our tenderloins cooked for a little

I'm actually going to let these set now for an hour at this 138 degrees.

 our duck sous vide, we could then put it into a quick chill in an ice bath to chill it down

 to store and then at service to re-thermalize in the sous vide, place the item in the bath

 more of a cook chill process so you wouldn't have an hour of cook time for service items.

 Also with sous vide, the advantages of being able to have a larger window of doneness.

 filets, as I said, about an hour for an inch thick filet at this temperature, but we really

 have a little bit more than that because we're not going to ever exceed that temperature.

 could leave them in there for longer so the window of doneness, as I call it, or the area

 of forgiveness is a lot greater with sous vide versus say on a stovetop where you're relying

 on the skill of the chef to pull it off that very hot saute pan right when the item's done.

 It's an excellent method, as I said, for fish and seafood and lobster as you're going to get

 right to that precise temperature that you want but never overcook it and again your window of

 this now to give that nice color that we're all so familiar with.

 going to do is put a nice carbon steel fry pan in a Volrath induction unit.

 induction as it's another very precise method of cooking, very fast and efficient.

 Most of us are used to receiving a steak on our plate that's a little bit warmer, so by doing this

 final sear, we're also going to raise the exterior of the steak temperature just a little bit.

 not going to really change the interior or the core temperature.

 After one hour's time, just look at the interior of that perfectly done medium fillet.

 go ahead now and just plate this up for a nice dinner and maybe use a little some vegetables

 see, the sous vide process offers a system with very high control, a high level of efficiency, and

 Hey, it's Lisa and I am coming to you from Zocalo Park in Frontierland and I am joined

 today by Chef Mo who is a chef de cuisine from Blue Bayou but today he's here to tell

 You know, a lot of rides but we can't enjoy it without the great food.

 And so, you know, I want to talk a little bit about the desserts offered throughout

 Some of them, for example, let's start with these two beautiful desserts found at only

 I mean, I had a little bite of that the other day and I couldn't put it down.

 You got to come here and enjoy the wonderful, this magical world.

 But to break up a little bit of the chocolate, you got this beautiful array of fruits and

 Here at the, we're also celebrating the Day of the Dead, which is Noche de los Muertos,

 And you know, again, one of the wonderful things about those cups is you get to keep

 And then on this side, we got a Disney's, I mean, traditional, you got to have the pumpkin

 And then these wonderful cookies with a chocolate and Mickey, white chocolate Mickey face.

 But you know, let's, we go back to the star of this whole presentation.

 I mean, you could make it, but you got to have a couple of ingredients to really, really

 And the other one, these cutesy potatoes that we do from scratch, but you got to have all

 You see some oregano, some thyme, some cayenne pepper, some garlic powder, and some white

 So when you mix all that, you got this beautiful Cajun spice you put on top of your potato.

 And remember, as I'm going through this process, you could do it definitely at home.

 And at home, you know, I mean, if you don't, if you don't find this mafalada famous bread,

 If you change them, no problem, but you got to have the tapenade.

 And remember, and as you notice, as I'm going through the sandwich, you might think it's

 After the provolone cheese, we're going to finish it with this wonderful ham.

 Now one key, I always stress this out in the restaurant or at home.

 Now here in the resort, when you visit our famous French house, the French market, you

 Come on down to the Disneyland Resort and get some great Halloween food.

 Your car is constantly bombarded with tree sap mist, industrial fallout, road tar, and

 even over spray that can easily bond to your paint surface, creating a rough feel and poor

 Keep in mind, clear reflections and long lasting protection can only be achieved when the surface

 Then rub the face of your clean, dry hand across the top surfaces.

 Those are bonded contaminants that must be removed before polishing or waxing, and our

 To begin the claying process, remove the clay from the package and flatten it into

 Mist the supply quick detailer liberally onto the surface for lubrication and begin working

 one section at a time with light pressure in a back and forth motion.

 Fold and knead the clay often to reveal a clean portion of clay and continue working

 And if you happen to drop the clay on the floor, throw it away and start with a fresh

 Now that your paint is as smooth as glass, apply your favorite Meguiar's Polish and Wax

 For additional detailing tips and techniques, call our Surface Care Specialists.

 Okay, so I thought what I would do today is show you how I sketch my little whimsical

 birds and I've been getting a lot of comments on those sketches and honestly it's just something

 I've found that's been helping me get through the last, well I don't know however long since

 an example of sort of the black and white sketches and I'm just standing up to make

 paper just because it's a nice smooth surface to use my pen on.

 Alright, so basically we need to draw the body first and then the more you do the bodies,

Okay, and then the next thing I want to do is give our bird a wing and then

 do is give him some legs and I'm going to give him stripey legs.

 a nice big heart there and then some dots, some little ones, big ones and then draw circles

What I love about doing these is that you just sort of take them wherever you want to go,

Okay, the next thing I'm going to do, whoops, I think I knocked the camera there,

So you see on this one, he really is a flourishy bird, look at all these

So I'm going to do the same thing to the bird that I'm drawing now and make him look

 you know, I mean, this was just a very quick demo to show you how I do my sketches.

 one that I used watercolour paper and twinkling H2Os and then I cut out a crown and popped a crown on his head,

And if I bring him a little closer, you can see how I've done his tail,

And he's wearing a crown that says Prince on it, which I really like.

If you would like to have a little bird template emailed to you,

 just drop me a line and I'll send it to you and you can design your own birds.

And I will be back with that packing tape transfer demo very soon as

 I found this recipe for one pot pasta on Pinterest as well as the Martha Stewart website.

 Of course you need a large pot or skillet, one that's big enough so that when you put

 in 12 ounces of linguine noodles, they will fit flat in the bottom of the pot.

 Then add 12 ounces of grape or cherry tomatoes cut in half, 1 large onion sliced thinly,

 about 2 cups, 1 teaspoon of red pepper flakes, 1 teaspoon of salt, and 4 garlic cloves that

 have been thinly sliced or minced, 2 tablespoons of olive oil, and 2 sprigs of fresh basil.

 Then add in 4 and a half cups of water and then you're going to heat this over high heat

 Now the secret to this is while it's cooking and boiling away, you need to keep it moving

 So stir it frequently as it's cooking and you're going to cook this until the pasta

 Now the website says this takes about 9 minutes but mine took closer to 15 before it got to

 Now as you can see here it's starting to look really good, most of the liquid is absorbed

 And then you serve it with some fresh parmesan cheese and a little extra fresh chopped basil.

 All you need to do is add some crusty bread and maybe a side salad.

 And this is also good served with an additional drizzle of extra virgin olive oil.

 Now although my channel is well known for desserts and decadent goodies, I also have

 quite a few of regular kind of everyday dinner recipes as well.

 So if you want to see it, go ahead and click right on your screen or see the link in the

We're going to very quickly supreme this orange by cutting off the bottom, cutting off the top, and then going around and around like this to remove the peel and the pith from the orange.

Supreme is the perfect wedge of citrus that does not contain any pith.

 I wanted to show you my new Kyocera utility knife and peeler set.

Great set, multi-purpose knife, fruits and vegetables, non-reactive, razor sharp, never need sharpening.

 We're going to continue round and round, removing the supremes from the orange.

Once we have them all out, we're going to juice the orange into a nice serving dish and serve the orange as a side to dessert.

 I'm also going to be using this knife to remove some of the zest from the orange.

It's the outermost part of the citrus and you want to take it off without the pith.

We're going to cut this into some slivers and we'll be putting this on top of our orange for a little bit of garnish.

Assembling the dessert, I'm going to put a couple of kiwis and a couple of these oranges.

And there it is, the finished supreme orange cup, Kyocera knife.

 Find more than 50,000 premium quality chef tools at www.chefdebo.com

 Hey what's going on guys it's another episode of JC died for me on 9.

I'm going to be using the Viper Hoe Tally inside this series of magic.

 I'm going to be posting one magic video a week and then doing game plays in the middle of it.

 They're super nice and fancy but today I'm just going to go ahead and use this one.

We're going to put it over here and get rid of it so we can do the trick.

It doesn't matter where they're at but they can mix it up as much as they want.

Now you reiterate to the spectator that they could have shuffled the pack as many times as they want.

You're going to place it down on the table and you're going to shuffle up the pack.

 Now as the spectator is holding the cards or holding that card, checking it out, making sure it's cool.

So you say what we're going to do is we're going to place it down on a table or a sidewalk or somewhere that you can lay it flat.

 You say we're going to give it a quick spin and then just real quick right in the center of the hands they can flip it over and their card is now morphed into the King of Hearts.

 And it's a cool little trick but the greatest part of it is where you can say what I'm going to try to do is something better.

What we're going to do is you're going to place it inside the pack and then we're going to take our hands and we're going to spin the deck two times just like it was when we spun it twice over here.

 And then you're going to snap your fingers and give a little blow and then when you fan out the cards the spectator can check the pack.

 There's one card face up in the pack and that's your card, the King of Hearts, face up back to its reversed order to a normal card.

We're going to be using actually a gimmick so if you've been doing magic for a while you're going to understand what a gimmick is.

 All it is is a card that can be changed or morphed for a trick.

 I didn't invent this but I just thought it was cool it came inside the pack that I bought full of gimmicks that I have.

Now some of you might be mad because you may not have the money to buy gimmick cards.

 Well if you have a standard red pack of playing cards like here, let me go over here for a second.

 If you have like a standard pack of red playing cards or something like these, if you go to Walmart they usually have packs of those red or blue playing cards.

 And all the fronts, the faces of them are all blank and you can be creative.

You can draw something on the card and use it for part of your trick.

 So all the mumbo jumbo that I told you in the trick where the spectator can shuffle the cards, you're going to say it to a spectator.

You can say, okay I can give you the cards, you can shuffle them around, you can do whatever you want.

So here, what we're going to do is we're going to use the top card.

You're going to say you could shuffle it, you could cut it, but in reality if they did that you couldn't be able to accomplish this trick.

 So what you're going to be doing is controlling these top two cards.

You're going to have your standard king of hearts or whatever card you decide to make.

You're going to have your standard king of hearts on top of the pack face down and then your gimmick at the very top.

You're going to have them in the box, you're going to pull them out of the box, set them down on the table, explain the trick that you're going to morph the card or you're going to make the card change.

 Leave in the comments below if you'd like me to do another video on how to do it.

 You can see there's a slight break but I'm holding a break in the back of the cards.

Now from a spectator's point of view they don't really see this or if I'm talking I'm moving my hands.

 What you're going to do is you're going to say tell me when to stop and when they say stop you're going to cut there.

 They're going to say stop, you're grabbing the cards where the break is and you're moving them on the bottom so the top two cards are on the top.

 You can do that in many different ways but it's just this quick.

 Okay, it's done and the cards are on top for the setup of the trick.

 You can just mix them up as many times as you want as long as they don't realize that you're controlling these top two cards up here the entire time.

 Then you're going to do something that if you don't know what it's called it's called a double lift.

 The way I do it most people can either just grab them from the side and flip them over like that but I usually get three or four cards so I can't really do it that way.

What I do is I riffle up with my thumb as I'm talking and I catch two.

So when you flip it over you're going to show them the king of hearts and then you're just going to use misdirection to where like I usually do so I can catch the cards back.

 You see what we're going to do is we're going to use the king of hearts and that's when you're going to run up, you're going to catch your double and you're going to flip it over.

 So when you place this card down you're really placing the gimmick.

You say okay guys you could have stopped me anywhere but what we're going to do is we're going to use the king of hearts okay.

I don't know but I do it all the time and people don't know it unless I teach it to them then they can see it.

 But if you don't teach it to them they don't really know what it is.

The card is on top of the pack and you're going to bring it to the bottom of the pack for the ending of the trick.

 You're going to go to catch it and set your hand where you're doing a standard shuffle like this but you're going to be controlling the top card, the king of hearts.

 So what you're doing is you're going to grab the top card, slide it down to the bottom and then on top.

 It's so easy, it's so simple to do to where it's just... and you don't really see it.

 Now when the cards are all mixed up inside your hand and you're shredding it up, this is the move you're doing.

 So when it's on top of the deck you're going to go down... oh I messed up.

So as you're shuffling down the table you're just going to flip the card over and it's buckled.

As you go to straighten them up you're doing this and you're flipping it over so it's like that.

Face up in the pack and they don't see it because you're doing it at a downward angle.

All you do is, this is the way I did it for the camera, you just grab it from the tips and give it a little bit of a spin.

If they're amazed you can say, you know, you can check it out or whatever.

And they usually, most people will be like, is that a trick deck?

And you can just say no it's not, I just do magic, I want to be fancy.

Then what you're going to do is you're going to scroll down through the deck.

You're going to place it inside the center of the deck face down.

You say what we're going to do is we're going to spin the deck once, twice in reversed order so the card goes back to normal.

 And then you can flip it upside down and back and say it's going to be face up in the pack or whatever you want to do.

And then when you fan through the pack, their card of course, the king of hearts is going to be face up in the center of the pack.

Give them the card or whatever you want to do and just let them go on their way.

Please like, favorite this video and go check out Determined Failure, my gaming channel and JCDad for me online.

 Welcome back to Hard Body Personal Training's home workout videos.

 Today we're actually going to be doing our computer chair workout.

 This workout is just going to consist of a few different exercises all from your computer

 I want you to bring your shoulders back and down, keeping your shoulder blades anchored

 When you suck in your stomach like that, you're working your diaphragm, which is one of your

 You're going to reach one arm all the way up and the opposite shoulder comes down.

 You're going to maintain good posture all throughout, stomach drawn in.

 You're going to cross one leg over the other and you're scratching your shin with your

 To make it a little bit more advanced, we're going to reach our hands up and bring your

 Okay, take a couple deep breaths in through the nose and out the mouth.

 We're going to keep our good posture, arms up, and we're going to twist as far as you

 To make it a little bit harder, we're going to alternate and punch.

 I wanted to give you a helpful hint about how to deal with your flower scapes after

 When the seed cure, we harvest them by snipping them right off the top of the flower scape.

 It's going to turn into an ugly mess, as you can see here with this example.

 It's tempting to just snip it off at the bottom, but I think this might be a little harmful

 So after it dries sufficiently, as this skinny one has, we can come in and clip it about

 six inches above the top of the bulb, and then fold it back under, so that it's not

 an ugly mess, as you have here, but rather it will look more like this, one that I snipped

 Soon it will completely dry out, as this one is, and it can just be simply pulled away

 That's the way I treat amaryllis here in our Amaryllis Winter Pollination Room.

 You can check out our information for your bulbs and seed for amaryllis here at our eBay

 Hey guys, this time we're going to be learning the Fanfare theme from Final Fantasy.

 You're going to be learning the victory theme that's played every time you defeat the bad

 And basically how it goes, this is from Final Fantasy VI by the way, you might notice that

 And Final Fantasy VII's I'm sure I'll be doing a tutorial for that one later.

 And basically moving the index finger to F sharp, creating an inversion of D major.

 So all you're doing for that last part of it is moving between C major and D major.

 F sharp and A. All you're doing there, F sharp and A to E and G.

 But it'll take a little bit to just get the rhythm in your head.

 What I'm doing there is just moving down the keyboard between both G major and C major.

 This is the only deviation from our normal chord progression here.

 The F sharp, A. E, G. F sharp, A. G, C. And spreading out a little bit to F natural.

 They are coated with clear coat, but I'm not going to worry about that.

 I'm just going to use this, I guess it's a nylon abrasive wheel on just a regular drill.

 All I do is lock it on, hold it here, and just tilt a little bit to the side.

 I hold it this direction because it has a little bit of a brushed finish going around

 Sometimes I hold it on the side a little bit and it just gives you a different finish.

 I usually keep going until there's a black buildup that almost looks anodized.

 The black you see is actually the polishing compound mixed with a little bit of aluminum.

 But I'm selling this bike so I really don't care about long term.

 Hi, at the moment I'm working on a Wood Whisperer Toy Box build which has a lot of these nice

 These shorter ones aren't too bad to make but the longer ones are difficult to mark

 The easiest way to mark things out like that is using a drawing board.

 All you need is one long piece of thin wood, one short piece of thin wood and two pieces

 If you need a bigger curve, more flex in it, just make this a bit thinner, run it through

 And then you insert this piece of wood in between the two and start twisting.

 Because it wants to unravel that way, so anticlockwise, just putting it on top means it stays in position,

 If you need it to be a bit curvier, just keep going, slide this back and forth so it will

 I am the custom cabinet maker here and today I have a sample sent to me from California

 from a customer who would like his speakers to match his TV stand.

 So deciphering the wood grain and the characteristics of the wood, this is a cherry wood that is

 I then take a sample that is made by our cabinet shop and I match the color perfectly to what

 Okay, I am on step two of matching a custom color for a customer.

 I am just darkening the wood to achieve the color that the customer requires.

 I also notice that it is a satin finish on the customer's cabinet so there will be a

 satin finish applied to the sample board after the coloring is performed.

 The grill, name plate and sticker will be applied to go to the customer for their approval.

 The final step in getting our samples completed is putting on the proper hardware and also

 Hi, I am Mike Rogers and I have been working at Axiom Audio for about 13 years now.

 What I am going to be showing you today is how we prepare our M80 for sanding before

 Alright now that we have sanded our first coat there, what we do is we apply a sandable

 So now what we are going to do is we are going to take this back over to the sanding bench.

 What we are going to do is we are going to sand it with a sanding sponge.

 It's actually super fine and we go over it lightly just to remove all the hairs.

 What the sandable sealer does is it actually stands up the hairs of the grain of the wood.

 So you can actually sand it and you will get a much more smoother finish and even finish.

 So after I have done my final sand here with the sanding sponge, it will actually go back

 We dust off the speakers and blow off all the sanding dust that is done when my apprentice

 We have a cross draft booth here that has about over a million BTUs for our air makeup

 unit because it gets quite cold here in the winter time so we need to heat the booth.

 The air is sucked out completely every 35 to 40 seconds so that there is no over spray

 These vents up here are like a tack vent that way no dust from the outside gets into the

 So everything that we use as far as finishes are concerned are HAPS free and they are certifiable

 Hey there, I'm Scott and obviously we're not in my home or my kitchen today.

 got up this morning and drove about an hour out of Portland to the Oregon coast.

 then head over to a really great seafood market, pick up some fresh seafood, take it back to

 all their energy, walk along the beach and also go to a great seafood store.

 like this that come right out of the ocean and into your house about the same day.

 you bring fresh oysters home, wash those off under cold running water with a stiff brush

I like to nest the shell of the oyster in a towel and also an oyster knife.

There will be a dimple in there and that's where you're going to be inserting

Then with a rocking motion, back and forth with the tip of your knife as you're going

Once you're able to get the knife inside of the oyster, just run it right

 might be a little bit of sand on them and you don't want to contaminate the inside of

 so that when you get ready to serve them, they're going to slide right out.

 going to go onto a bed of crushed ice, keeping them ice cold until your guests are ready

 to get that together is a bowl to mix it all together in, 2 tablespoons of black pepper,

 about 1 cup of very finely chopped shallots, 2 thirds of a cup of vinegar.

What I have, or what we'll need to get together for the recipe is 1 cup

 of just your household ketchup, 2 tablespoons of prepared horseradish.

 horseradish, which I could not find, it's preferable, but if you have to use the jar,

About a tablespoon to a tablespoon and a half of very fresh lemon

 juice, half a teaspoon of salt, a dash of Worcestershire sauce, and a dash of freshly

What I'm going to do is combine in the bowl with our ketchup all of the ingredients.

 The horseradish, the fresh lemon juice, the salt, a little dash of the Worcestershire,

 presentation that's fantastic for a party, with cocktails, with wine, in the summertime

 my eye on, and I love both the sauces, but the mignonette is something that I really

 watching, and please feel free to email me if you have a request for a recipe you'd like

 We've got a little mirror deal without the makeup in it that you steal from your wife or girlfriend.

 An 18mm wrench, a 15mm ratcheting wrench just to make things a little easier on us.

 And then we've also got the Sock timing belt tensioner tool, which is very nice.

 Alright, you can see I've already got the timing belt covers off, mainly because I don't run them on my summer cars.

 Although I do highly recommend them for the winter, because those are the way to go to keep stuff from getting in there, especially snow.

 For the cam sprocket here, we're going to use the mirror and our 18mm wrench if we need it, to go ahead and rotate it and line up the marks.

 Alright, it's not the easiest to see here, but trust me when I say if you look real closely at both of the marks, they are pretty well lined up there.

 And that is not easy to see, but nonetheless, we've got both of the little arrows lined up with the split in the cam cap there.

 And that tells us that our cam is going to be in the right position.

 Up next, we're going to go ahead and put our 15mm ratchet down here on the crank snout.

 We'll be able to rotate it, which I've actually already done, so that over here in the timing window, and I'm just putting this car back together, so I'm going to leave it like this so we can see.

 Over here in the timing window, if you really look closely, you can see that it's got the timing mark there, and although it looks almost impossible to see, there actually is a little dimple in the flywheel there, so you know when it's at top dead center.

I've seen a few that don't have that distinction, but by and large, most all of them will have that.

 So we've got the motor at top dead center and the cam's in the right position.

 We just got to make sure that the intermediate shaft is somewhat lined up, although it's not totally necessary, but we won't have to look silly here and twist our distributor all around, so we'll go ahead and line that up next.

 All right, we've already got our deal off there, so we can just pull the distributor up and out of the way.

 We look down into the hole here, and we can see that we're not exactly lined straight up, which is not good for business, so we'll go ahead and kind of rotate it.

 I don't have my timing belt covers on right now, of course, so I can reach behind that bracket for the AC, and I can go ahead and rotate this even though I don't have an AC bracket.

 And if you can kind of tell, it looks like the line's pretty much parallel to the block now, so we should be good to go and put the belt on.

 Sometimes when I smoke pulled pork barbecue, I shred it and then you freeze it.

 You can actually freeze smoked pork barbecue, which is delicious.

 I've also got one of those things that you can suck the air out of and really do a good

 But then what you do is you get out some of the pulled pork itself.

 And I'm going to show you what we're going to do with it after I get this stuff warmed

 There's plenty of grease that's released, which keeps everything from getting sticky

 And we're going to put some bread and put a little real butter on both sides.

 Some beautiful cheese, a mild mozzarella cheese, some barbecue sauce.

 This is a great meal and a quick way to experience some pulled pork barbecue in the winter.

 Alright, we're going to get the grilled barbecue pork bread portion ready.

 One of the things that I think is a real key when you go to making a grilled cheese or

 any sort of grilled on a stove type of sandwich is that when you apply the butter, that it

 either be warmed to where it's room temperature, left out overnight so you can spread it easily.

 Or if you have cold butter like I have, just warm it up in the microwave.

 Get a nice brush and all you have to do is arrange them, dip the butter, spread it on

 Any kind of barbecue sauce will work, but this is kind of sweet with a little kick,

 The first thing we want to do is spread some sauce on both sides of the sandwich.

 That makes sure that every bite you use, every bite you take, gives you that barbecue sauce,

 Alright, we've got butter applied to both sides on the outside.

 The smoked pork is a very sweet, smoky obviously, flavor and I choose not to cover it up with

 So a smoked, or just a regular mozzarella cheese is a great choice for this sandwich.

 What we're doing now is adding the smoked pork that's been, or the pulled pork, smoked

 Alright, I like to add a little bit of our Fuzzy's Kicker at this stage.

 I think it's important to put cheese on both sides that come in contact with the bread,

 because I think really it does a good job of keeping the sandwich together.

 Alright, a great way to know if your grill is ready is with a water test.

 So this is at about a medium high, between medium and medium high.

 Alright, the pork is warm, so it's kind of already started melting the cheese a little

 Alright, if you're using Teflon, you definitely want to use a plastic or a rubber spatula.

 The worst thing you can do with a grilled cheese is to let it burn.

 I start checking early, and if needed, I'll turn them more than once.

 But I do not, in any way, want to burn either piece of bread, because then you'd ruin that

 Hey guys, in this tutorial I'm going to teach you how to do suicide kip-ups, also known

 Okay so to learn suicide kip-ups you're going to need to know a kip-up because a suicide

 So we made a tutorial on that already so go check it out right around there.

 Just go check it out, learn it, pretty simple move, you're going to need it for the suicide

 Yeah, alright so once you learn the kip-up, the kip-up looks like this.

 Okay so once you kip-up, you're going to land on top of your toes.

 So once you're on top of your toes, a suicide kip-up is where you jump back, catch yourself

 with your hands, collapse, and like pop back up to like another kip-up.

 Okay so the main thing that you're going to want to do is to catch yourself with your

 And I know this move like looks really scary, it might be really scary for you like trying

 it for your first time but yeah just be careful, catch yourself, that's the main thing because

 if you don't catch yourself you'll just land on your back, knock the air out of you, you'll

 look like a fool, and I don't know about you but I hate knocking the air out of me, like

 But anyways, back to the tutorial, you're going to want to be in a kip-up position like

 once you land, and you're going to want to jump back, keep your arms like about here,

 And once you do that, once you get over the fear of like actually jumping back and catching

 yourself, you're going to want to collapse, like put your hands down and collapse, then

 So jump back, okay so jump back, catch yourself, collapse, kip-up.

 And that's basically it, so jump back, catch yourself, collapse, pop up, go again.

 It's a scary move but it's also pretty basic so learn it, from there you can evolve to

 like jumping back to like a headstand, it looks pretty cool, let me show it to you real

 So I hope this tutorial helped you, be sure to subscribe if you're awesome.

 Hello guys, here we are today with Tony Brancatisano and George from Highland and we're welcoming

 Tony to E&S Trading to come and do a demonstration on the Highland cooktop, cooking all sorts

 So we're going to see some great pastas and some great ravioli and other dishes that Tony

 Tony was the winner of the sort of, if you like, MasterChef equivalent of a reality cooking

 program in Italy and she'll explain much better than I can her experiences through that process

 So I might pass it across to you Tony and you can get the ball rolling.

 I'm just going to make a filling, ricotta and spinach for the ravioli today.

 Another filling that we did during the show was ricotta and chicken and the chicken was

 put in the blender with a bit of thyme and a bit of lemon juice.

 It's a very light ravioli filling and it's lovely, also for kids, it's not that, you

 So for every 100 grams of flour when you make pasta, use one egg.

 A pinch of salt and a little bit of olive oil and that's what's going to make it a bit,

 I saw a MasterChef episode actually where they put it in the blender and the food processor.

 I've never seen anyone in Italy do it with a food processor, it's always done by hand.

 And when we did the cooking reality, our mentor said that the Italian men loved their wives

 to make pasta because I'm going to show you later on with Rob, it's all in the hips.

 So they said the Italian man would love to come home from work, lunchtime and watch his

 Alright, now these hips are doing all the wrong movements, Rob.

 How thin you make it really depends on what pasta you're doing.

 We're going to do ravioli, we don't want it too thick because when we go and join the

 ravioli, we don't want that where it's joined, we don't want that too fat in the pasta and

 Now whatever shape you make your pasta, your ravioli is your choice.

 I actually did this pasta with the ricotta and spinach and put an Esca sauce in the reality

 and the judge said that he thought that someone in Napoli had made it so I actually did really

 You want to try and get all the air out as possible and you also want to make sure that

 you join it well because you don't want any holes because there's nothing worse than cooking

 boiling water going into it and then you eat it and you can feel it actually coming out

 as you bite into the ravioli, the water coming out of your mouth.

 I'm going to get you to try this one first because that's a bit easier and then I'll

 Great, so now you're going to get a little teaspoon of the ricotta and spinach.

 And then what we're going to do is run around here and wet that.

 Okay, now you want to push it down and make sure it joins up on all the edges.

 So Tony, on behalf of E&S and Hive and also to our guests, thank you so much for coming along.

 And thank you so much for coming and participating with Tony today.

 I love soup all year round, but I'm going to show you how to make my white bean and

 It's a great hearty soup for the winter, really simple to make.

 There are stages where I'm going to tell you to let this thing cook for 10 minutes and

 You want to start with a hot pan with olive oil in it, quarter cup of olive oil, chop

 You want to put the onion in first and then the garlic, I'm putting them both in.

 It's going to take about 5 or 10 minutes and it's honestly, it's not necessary.

 Sometimes the way you see me make it right now is the way I prepare it and eat it because

 So we're going to cook the onions down, again 10 minutes and at that point you're going

 If you make it from scratch, so be it, it's great, but there are so many that are available

 today on the market that are delicious and we're just going to pour that in.

 Okay, now when that comes to a boil, which you know, it's going to take another 10 minutes

 or so, you're going to take the white cannellini beans, these are canned, I use two cans.

 You can make them, you know, from dried beans as well if you have the time, but this certainly

 We're going to put those in, stir that around, let it sit another 5 minutes or so, then I

 I chop these fresh, but you can use a can if you'd like, they come all different sizes.

 You're going to put that in, we're going to give that a stir around.

 Now for the escarole, really important with the escarole, there's always sand in it, so

 really wash that out well, spin it, wash it a few times, you can even let it soak, you

 So when this comes to a boil, we're going to take the escarole and just place it in,

 and don't be afraid of the volume of escarole because it just cooks down really quickly,

 So we're going to put this in, and you just want to, again, make sure that heats up high,

 and put the escarole in, and this will take another 10 minutes.

 So within 30 minutes, you're going to have a delicious homemade soup that's really simple.

 Now salt and pepper, I'm going to salt it, again, I don't have a heavy hand with salt,

 so I'm just going to put a little salt in, but feel free to put as much as you'd like,

 Another variation of this, you could put some chicken in, if you'd like, and the way to

 do that is just cook some chicken cutlets or chicken on the bone, shred the meat and

 put it in, and just let this cook in, and you'll see already it's starting to break

 Now the escarole can be a little tough, so you do want to cook this for at least 10 minutes.

 So the escarole and white bean soup is done, we had it simmering for about 20 minutes,

 and I had said to you it's going to wilt down, and this is what it's going to look like.

 I spoke to you about putting some chicken in, I didn't have chicken in the fridge, I'm

 a big believer in searching what's in there and using it if you can, and I happen to have

 So I chopped the sausage, I just sauteed it really quickly, and I put it into the soup.

 At that point I took the pot and I put it into the oven, on a 350 degree oven, and just

 Now if you do put sausage in there instead of chicken, you can let it go for another

 20-30 minutes, it's going to add to the flavor, it's going to be incredible.

 So here we have the white bean soup with escarole, scarole if you want to call it an

 Italian name, and we did put in sausage, and this is going to be incredible.

 Before the advent of word processing, computer graphics systems, and desktop publishing,

 dry transfer lettering was a popular way of putting words, sentences, and graphics down on paper.

 You can still get dry transfer letter sheets from companies such as Letraset,

 In its heyday, you could get hundreds of different typefaces, characters,

 Back in the day, it was exciting to get the latest Letraset catalog

 and place the letter you wish to transfer on top of the artwork.

 Next, using something like a ballpoint pen, rub completely over the entire letter.

 This will transfer the letter off of the transfer sheet and onto the page.

 Peel away the transfer sheet, and your letter will be left on the paper.

 All dry transfer lettering pages are sold with a protection sheet,

 Your letter should come off the page, and be deposited onto the masking tape.

 you should soon be able to create artwork with a truly professional appearance.

 I'm Mike Corliss at Tormach and today I'm going to show you how to use a boring head

 I flipped the boring head to the outside and pointed the tip towards the inside so we can

 Put a little black marker on the diameter that I want to touch my boring bar on.

 I'm going to jog my boring head down now so I can scratch off on it.

 Just keep dialing the boring head in until I just scratch on my marker.

 Make sure when you flip your boring bar around and stuff you know which way you have to have

 When I was first setting this up with the boring bar offset so far on the boring head

 it produced too much vibration in the high range machine so I dropped down to the lower

 I jogged the boring head down manually using the shuttle jog but you would program it in

 That's how you use the boring head to true up the OD of a part.

 I've created this little instructional video to help you understand how to solve a simple statics problem using the TI-89 calculator.

 And it's got a cable support at B with a tension angled at 60 degrees and a 30 pound load on it.

 So to solve the equations we balance forces in the X, we balance forces in the Y, and I chose to sum moments around B.

 To solve these equations we're going to plug them into the calculator and the format is going to be, we use the solve function, parenthesis,

 and we put in the first equation which is 0 equals AX and so forth.

 Then it's followed by the word AND and we put in the second equation and I almost forgot the minus 30 there, but you can't forget the minus 30.

 Then we put a comma after the third equation and the variables are separated by commas in these curvy brackets and then we put the final parenthesis to close.

I'm going to go ahead and put the calculator in there and I've got this black background so that it shows up a little bit better on the screen there.

 So to start we push the F2 and you can see one of the options that come up there is solve.

 And we go ahead and plug that in and then you push the catalog key and the first time you use it you'll use the up and down arrows to find the word AND.

 You put it on AND and you push enter and that gives you the AND, the word AND.

We put a comma and to get those curvy brackets we push the second and the parenthesis and that opens up the special curvy brackets for the variables.

 So we have AX comma AY comma and T. Then we have to close the curvy brackets and the final parenthesis and when we push enter it will go out and find the answers for us.

 So you see the tension in the cable is 51 point something and we can use the right arrow to go ahead and scroll across and get the answers for the other two variables too.

 I want to make one comment that it's real tempting to not put in the time sign and if you read the manual it will tell you that you don't have to.

 But in this solve feature I've had a lot of students bring me their calculator and they can't, you know, they're getting an error and they can't get it to work right.

 And the only thing I do to fix it is I just go in and put in those multiplication signs.

 So I strongly encourage you to go ahead and put those time signs all in there every time you multiply things together.

I'm going to record a couple more about how to integrate and how to solve integral equations.

 Classic Sports Shoes is your source for retro sneakers and shoelaces.

 We stock the fat laces and we have all the sizes, basically everything that they manufacture

 When you're doing this pattern, you're probably going to want to use the same size lace that

 You're not going to want to use anything longer because you're basically just going to tuck

 Go from the inside out and then do it from the same thing on the other side.

 And at this point, this is where you want to pay attention to how tight you're making

 the shoe because this is going to be hard to adjust once you're finished.

 So you want to just adjust how tight you're going to make it starting here.

 Once you're at this point, you go down, inside, out, the third from the top eyelet on both

 And then you want to use the loop that you made here as an eyelet.

 Go up from the bottom and then go inside out the next eyelet down.

 And then when you get to the bottom on the last step, you go through just like before.

 And then this time instead of going from the inside out, you want to go down and in.

 So it's easier if you give yourself something to work with like that first.

 Be sure to check us out at Classicsportsshoes.com for all the sneakers and shoelaces and our

 Chuck here with the Tulsi Garden and today we're going to go ahead and gather up our

 seeds and I'm going to show you how to let them dry and how to collect the seeds.

 What we're doing is we're just cutting off the seed stems and although this has a wonderful

 These seeds will all turn real brown, or I'm sorry, all the stem will turn really brown

 The seeds are really tiny, no bigger than a pinhead, but they produce this wonderful

 So you go ahead and take the stem with the seeds and you crumble it up onto a screen

 and just shake it and you can see all the seeds down underneath.

 So here's our thousands of Tulsi seeds and although that looks like a lot, it's very

 Okay, we're going to pour our Tulsi seeds into our container and there we have our Tulsi

 Hey friends, today I'm going to show you guys how I do pipe cleaner curls on my short locks.

 So to get the pipe cleaner this way, you want to take one long pipe cleaner, fold it in

 half, make sure it's even, put your finger at the top and just roll it.

 And I do these before installing them into my locks because I feel like it makes the

 So what I'm showing you guys side by side is the size that I initially started with

 What I did before is I had to cut the pipe cleaner in half and then roll it or twist

 But now that my locks are getting longer, I just keep them as one long thing.

 And I'll show you guys, I'll just explain why I change the size versus keeping them

 But I do two locks per one pipe cleaner curls because my hair is not that thick.

 So I feel like to give me the fullness I need, I have to do two at a time.

 And it doesn't matter if you roll it on top of the pipe cleaner or under.

 Then once you're done, take the end of it and I like to just bend it in the opposite

 And I took my dryer and quickly passed it through my locks for two minutes.

 Alright you guys I'm back and I have removed all my pipe cleaners.

 Also make sure you turn off the dishwasher's water supply underneath the sink.

 In this video we're going to show you how to change out the GE dishwasher upper rack

 It's going to be a very easy repair and should only take a few minutes to show you how to

 When you open up the package, you're going to get the new roller and screw.

 The main reason you'd be changing out the upper rack roller is if the wheel is damaged

 In order to change out the part, we have to open up the dishwasher door.

 To remove the upper rack, we have to pull it out a little bit so we can remove the end

 On this particular style, you have to grab the end cap and kind of twist it until this

 If you already have the new style end cap on your dishwasher, what you have to do is

 take a small screwdriver and press on this release lever right here and then you can

 Now that we have the dish rack out of the way, we have access to the rollers.

 We'll take a Phillips screwdriver and unscrew the mounting screw.

 To put the new one in, all we have to do is put it in the hole and screw it in.

 As you're screwing it in, you want to flex this rail a little bit to get it so it's in

 the groove and then you can tighten the screw down the rest of the way.

 Now that we have the part installed, we can reinstall the dish rack.

 All you have to do is line up the rollers with the rails and push it back into place.

 Once you have it in, we can pull the rails out a little bit so we can put the end caps

 To replace the end caps with this particular style, all you have to do is push them into

 You can close the door, plug it back in, turn the water back on, and give it a whirl.

 make one of my favorite recipes chicken tortilla soup very simple and very

 yummy you're gonna take about two cups of chopped chicken just you know one

 inch cube chicken we keep baggies like this for recipes it's handy to have them

 and makes slow cooking even simpler so just stick that down in the slow cooker

 and I would say this is about three chicken big three to four chicken breast

 yeah then you're gonna take about two cups of chopped carrots I use the carrot

 chips and we've cut them in half and then an onion chopped add some veggies

 in there and then I like to add cilantro if you're not a fan just leave it out

 but I like the flavor and this is just about a handful chopped and then for

 the canned items you're gonna add one can of Rotel, one can of tomato sauce, two

 cans of chicken broth, smells so good, looks yummy too, and then about half a

 bag of frozen corn it's gonna be about a cup add as many vegetables in there as

 you can and then I'm gonna add some ground cumin about you know to taste

 about half a teaspoon we're gonna add two cloves minced garlic or if you have

 the jar about two teaspoons and then about half a tablespoon of chili powder

 yummy yummy and then we have the nacho cheese soup okay one can of nacho

 cheese soup and this just makes it a little bit thicker and still has a good

 rich flavor to it I always serve this I cut up some avocado to put on top and

 sprinkle some cheese and then put some chips in it really really yummy and my

 all right very simple meal very yummy very good leftovers if you have any and

 as you can see in the slow cooker it makes this is a seven quart it makes

 quite a bit so it's right at four quarts and all you're gonna do is cook this on

 low we always do low you if we have the time we do it for about eight hours on

 low or about five hours on high but the great thing about this is you're getting

 to put the chicken in raw instead of having to cook that chicken first and it

 turns out really good yeah just use some regular good kitchen scissors and chop

 up your chicken breasts into about one inch yeah you don't even have to use a

 knife just cut it up with kitchen scissors happy crocking y'all have a

 hey y'all we're so excited to announce a better way for us to get tips tricks

 recipes and other information from us to you personally we love connecting with

 you guys and that's why we would love for you to go to our website submit your

 information to be in our mailing list and it's as simple as that happy crocking

 Hi, this is Robin Moses and I'm going to show you how to do a basic Hello Kitty Santa.

 As you see, the one that I did has grown out now about a week, maybe two.

 How I'm going to do this is I am going to black out, um, red out around the cuticle.

 Okay, what I did was I, what I did was I went around with the red and got all around the cuticle again where it had grown out.

 And then I'm going to take like a gray color that I mixed with...

 And I am going to use a gray and bloop, make another blob of gray right here.

 And then, see she's a little bit yellow because she's been out in the world for a few weeks.

 Okay, so I'm going to refresh her makeup and give her a new powder.

 Which means I'm just going to go around her real quick with some white.

 And then, every place that I had done the yellow dots on the Hello Kitty background,

 Then with the slightest of hand, you would want to go back in and give her new whiskers onto the Santa hat.

 And then with just a little tiny bit of, let's see, what design do I want?

 Okay, I'm back with a new, refreshed and reformed Santa Hello Kitty.

 And I want you guys to look at my blog and look at my other YouTubes for the basic Hello Kitty.

 I love taking something that doesn't really cost that much and trying to add value and

 This is just a small piece of reeded casing trim that you might put around a door and

 sometimes you'll see people using this on say the front of a fireplace mantel or maybe

 You can put that on just like it is, but one of the things that I've done over the years

 is taken just a scrap of wood that you pick up off the floor like this and add it to the

 What I've found is if people look at something and they're used to seeing it being 3 quarters

 of an inch thick and all of a sudden they look at it and it's an extra half an inch

 thicker they think wow that must be some custom piece of molding that you made and

 well it's sort of custom, I mean you did change it, but what I really am going to do is just

 take a piece of scrap that I had laying by the table saw, add it to the back of this

 piece and now it's going to look like a thicker, more massive piece of molding.

 I could use headless pins to do that, but in this instance I'm going to go ahead and

 use a 3 quarter inch 18 gauge brad because it's going to have a little bit more ability

 Since I'm doing this on the back of the piece of trim I can put fasteners as often as I

 want to and I'm going to put them pretty often because that's going to pull that joint down,

 squeeze the glue out and hold it until I come back and sand it and the glue dries.

 So if you've got saw kerfs or something on this space you want to plane those down smooth.

 And I just want to get it as close as possible to flush, get that glue oozing out.

 And since it's on the back I can put these fasteners just as often as I want to.

 Now I'm just going to take and smooth that off, wipe the excess glue down.

 Usually what I found is you want to give this glue that's on the surface, oh maybe

 three or four or five minutes to dry and then go back and sand it.

 And the glue in the joint is usually still wet so if there is any gap the sawdust will

 I'm going to try and hurry that up a little bit by taking my chisel and scraping some

 I wouldn't always do this, but it doesn't make for a very good video if you just sit

 there and watch the glue dry and I don't have that many interesting jokes.

 I got a little bit high on this end so I'm going to hit it real lightly with my block

 Okay, if you take a look at this, I think you're going to see that's a great, great

 joint and I was able to do that because I could drive all those fasteners in the back

 and if you look at that, now it looks like a little bit beefier piece of molding.

 If you can't feel anything, you're never going to see anything once it's stained or

 painted but a lot of times, especially the older I get, I can feel a lot more than I

 can see so I always want to run my hand over that joint and see if I can feel anything

 and I can't feel a thing on that so, you know, again, there's the piece that's got the extra,

 there's the thin piece and if you want something that just looks a little bit more special,

 a little beefier, I think adding a scrapper, that's a great idea.

 Hello, welcome to a tutorial on how to build the Needler from the Halo series.

 Now, all you're going to need is cardboard and stuff and it will turn out pretty good.

 Hello, Jacob here, and today I'm going to be doing another cardboard tutorial on the

Then, take the back of your big potato and cut the two sides making a kind of triangle.

 Then, on the same potato, take the edges of the potato here and here and cut them to where

You then want to take a little rectangle and cut it into a triangle

Do the same thing you did with the other potato with the smaller

Cut another hole in the bigger potato and place your three columns

Take the piece and take the top of your needler, the big potato, and tape

Poke holes in the top part for the correct places to where you want to put your

Some modifications may be needed for your needler, but once you are ready to

 Today we're going to have some fun and we're going to make some Tuscany red pepper soup.

 This is a vegetarian soup that we love in the fall time of the year.

 One of the best ways to prepare a sweet red pepper is by a roasting technique.

 In this technique it is either grilled or scorched over a gas flame and that way the

 The key to this is after they have been blackened, then place them in a paper bag for about ten

 This process reveals the bright, soft flesh skin underneath and prepared in this manner,

 sweet peppers can be marinated as well as served with other vegetables and roasted red

 After we have peeled the peppers, we're going to cut them up and remove the seeds.

 In a large stock pot, we are going to get our pot hot and then add our olive oil.

 Saute our onions and garlic when it's hot and saute for about ten minutes.

 Go ahead and add the carrots, potatoes and red peppers and continue cooking for about

 Bring it to a boil and allow to simmer for twenty minutes until the vegetables are tender.

 So bring your food processor by your pot and place the vegetables in your food processor

 Put part of the vegetables into the food processor and process them just long enough that they

 So do those in batches and then return the soup to the stock pot and make sure that our

 Place a piece of garlic bread in each one of your bowls and then ladle your soup right

 Garnish with a little parmesan and parsley and your family and friends are going to love

 http://www.youtube.com or www.facebook.com or www.youtube.com or www.innisfree.com

 I feel like I haven't made a lot of Nutella recipes recently, so I feel like I need to make up for that

 I'm gonna show you 10 different uses of Nutella and some of them are quite simple and some of them are a little bit more

 For this recipe you will need some Nutella bread and butter okay, so in first place

 Then I'm just gonna grill it with some butter until it looks really nice and delicious

 And voila it should taste super delicious, and it's super easy.

 For this second recipe you will need some quick oats peanut butter coconut flakes chocolate chips Nutella and honey

 You pretty much mix all the ingredients in a bowl, and you just turn them into little balls.

 Okay guys so to make the Nutella hot chocolate you'll need milk a mug and some Nutella I

 Recommend that you mix the Nutella with just a little bit of milk because it makes it so much easier

 This is so simple and it's actually my favorite hot chocolate recipe

 To make these Nutella s'mores you will need some Nutella some graham crackers and some marshmallows

 You pretty much assemble this the same way you assemble regular s'mores except this time

 We're just gonna grill it a little bit, and it should look delicious and a little bit burnt, but that's okay

 Make this banana sandwich you'll pretty much need some Nutella some coconut flakes and a banana

 You start off by peeling off the banana and slicing it in the middle

 Then just spread some Nutella on it and some more Nutella and just sprinkle with some coconut flakes

 Okay, so for this recipe you will need some strawberries some Greek yogurt and some Nutella

 What I usually do is mix a small spoon of Nutella with some Greek yogurt and blend it very well until it looks very nice

 Then I just add some strawberries to it or whatever fruit that I feel like eating on that day

 This is actually one of my favorite recipes you'll pretty much only need some puff pastry and Nutella

 And then I place some Nutella in the middle of it, and then I just fold it in and I twist on the side

 And then just bake in the oven for 15 minutes, and they look so delicious

 Okay, so for this recipe you will need some Oreos and some Nutella

 And I know it's kind of a funny one, but I just love Oreos and Nutella

 You pretty much start off by slicing the apple and then just add some layers of peanut butter and Nutella or whatever spread you prefer

 I usually start off with a piece of tortilla wrap, then I spread some Nutella on it

 I hope you enjoyed this video and if you want me to make more Nutella recipes

 Don't forget to give it a thumbs up and I promise you I'll make some more in the future

 Also leave a comment on below and let me know what is your favorite snack to take to school?

 Squarespace is an amazing place when it comes to making websites online

 And it's super easy and simple if you like food as much as I do you can probably make your own recipe website

 Just head over to Squarespace.com slash food or use the discount food and you'll get 10% off

 I mean, that's amazing more information will be on the end card of this video

 Hi guys, here's everything you're going to need to make curry cashew chicken.

I just put cashews in my coffee grinder and it worked perfectly fine.

 Now you're going to want to set your stove to about medium low.

 Now we're going to dump our spices into the butter and onions and give them a quick little toast.

 After the spices are nice and toast, you're going to want to add your chicken.

 Now we're going to add our can of tomatoes, give it a good mix.

 After the sauce has reduced a little bit, you want to add your cashew powder.

 It gives it a really great flavor and it thickens it up as well.

 And you just want two good dollops of your plain yogurt to give it that creaminess.

So you just want to spoon it over some basmati rice and enjoy your awesome, nutty, creamy, delicious curry.

 I know it's been a while since I had anyone up, but I thought, hey, I found this little footage on my camera, so I thought,

 So if you want to see more recipes or anything, make sure to like the video and subscribe.

 Just make sure that you do not overcook the garlic, otherwise you'll get a bitter taste

 Next add the chicken broth, as well as some salt and pepper to taste.

 I found that 2 cups was perfect for this amount, but you may need more or less, depending on

 After 20 minutes, this is what it looks like, and at this point you can add the sour cream.

 And once the sour cream is added, cook that for another 5 minutes.

 Then turn off the heat and put it aside and let it stay for another 5 minutes until the

 As you can see, the sauce has thickened and at this point it's ready to be served.

 You can also add any other kind of vegetables that you like to this pasta dish.

 I hope that you enjoyed this simple and easy and quick recipe, and thank you so much for

These seams are the curve seams you see on either side of my bodice.

 They help give shape to your bodice without having to use darts.

 When sewing a princess seam, your bodice is normally going to have a front and then you

 I have a curved edge with a double notch and this is going to correspond with this side

 does, I am going to go ahead and do a stay stitch on this straight edge.

 help keep your seam from being distorted later which might happen because we are dealing

For the stay stitch I am going to be sewing a half inch from the raw

 edge and I am just going to again sew along this edge ending here.

 stitch and you are just doing a regular straight stitch along the area.

 match up so when you place the piece right side together, you have your double notches

Now because it's a curve sometimes it's a little bit difficult so we will get

 a little bit closer to show you how to ease the pieces together.

 is because once I have my 5-8 seam allowance, I need to make sure that I have a nice smooth

So I put a pin about where the 5-8 seam allowance is and I could

 test it by opening it up and pretending this is my seam and then I can see how this is

So then I can kind of make some sort of adjustment on how far this

 Now for this part here, what I like to do is once I have the major points pinned, I

 am going to start in the middle and pin that and then I am going to pick my next section

 and I am going to start in the middle of this section and pin that and kind of ease everything

 Now depending on the curve you are working with, sometimes this gets to be really difficult.

 If you are having trouble easing in your areas, what you can do on the side that you

 are having trouble with which would be the front here, use your scissors and just cut

 here above the stitches where you did your stay stitch and this will split apart and

 it will kind of help you pin the corresponding area a little bit better.

 still matching at this 5-8ths line which is actually past the stay stitch, then you

Just sometimes you are dealing with a lot of fabrics that makes it

 After you have everything pinned together, you can then do your seam which is on your

Don't forget to back stitch on both the beginning and end of your stitch and make

 to do a lot of easing, it might be preferable to you to actually baste the seam first just

 so you can make sure that everything is going to be in its place and there are no wrinkles.

 And once you verify that, then you can go ahead and stitch over your basting stitch.

 For the curved areas of your seams, you are going to go ahead and cut these notches.

 these are little inverted triangles that I cut with my scissors.

 because we no longer need the stay stitch but just your permanent seam, you don't want

 to do it for the curved areas and that's going to help our seam lie a little flatter.

 Now instead of pressing our seam open, we are going to take each princess seam and you

 are going to press it so it's going towards the center of the garment.

Now because it's curved, sometimes it will stick up so you don't just want to

You actually want to make sure that you are pulling each section

 apart so you are getting right down to that seam line and then you are pressing it over.

 Here is the right side of my bodice and now my princess seams have been completed.

 can see they have a slight curve here as opposed to this one in the middle which is

 bodice, you will notice my bodice doesn't lie completely flat but once you put it on,

 this is up here at the seam so this is where I didn't completely line up the edges but

 when you press your seam towards the center, you should have a nice smooth curve here and

Also don't forget to download our mobile app for videos on the go.

 This morning we are going to cook up a batch of breadfruit in stewed pork and simmered in coconut milk.

 In front of you here you see I have about 2 or 3 pounds of pork.

 Then I went ahead and I washed it with some lime juice and water.

 The full recipe for seasoning this can be found on CaribbeanPot.com

 After seasoning I allow it to marinate for a couple of hours or so.

 Then we will go ahead and stew that as we stew meats down in the Caribbean.

 I have here a couple of tablespoons of oil with about a heaping tablespoon of brown sugar.

 What we are going to do is try to get that to caramelize a bit.

 Once it gets to the color and consistency you see in this picture here.

 Again on the recipe at CaribbeanPot.com you will find more specific details on doing this.

 What I have done here is I allowed the pork to cook for about half an hour.

 Then I turned up the heat and I dried off all the liquid that usually springs up.

 Once it is all dried up I added the breadfruit to the top of it.

 I stirred it around a little bit just to get some of that nice stewed pork flavor all over the breadfruit.

 Then I poured in about a cup to a cup and a half of coconut milk.

 Turn it all down and allow it to cook for another half an hour on very, very low heat.

 This is very similar to an oil down except the oil down would have like dashing bush leaves on top of it to help keep in the flavors.

 For row 1, you knit the first 3 stitches, then you yarn over, knit 2 together, make

 Now on this row, we're going to be working each of those double yarn over loops individually.

 We're going to knit 3, and your third stitch is the first loop of that double yarn over,

 The second loop, you're going to purl, and knit 2, yarn over, knit 2 together, and knit 1.

 Row 3, again you knit 3 stitches, then yarn over, knit 2 together, and then knit 4.

 The last row of the pattern, you're going to start by binding off 2 stitches.

 So there's 1, and there's 2, and then knit 3, yarn over, knit 2 together, and knit 1.

 This is a worsted weight yarn on size 10 needles, but I wanted to show you this other sample

 This one is a size 10 crochet cotton, and I worked this up on size 0 knitting needles.

 So you can really create some really elegant lace work if you use a fine yarn and small needles.

 So if you have the patience and the eyesight for it, it's really nice.

 Hey you, it's Elle from Ellesees.blogspot.com and I get asked a lot of questions about my hair.

 Like what are my favorite products and one product that is always at the top of the list would be

 absorb the oil and today I'm going to tell you all about how to use it, my tips and tricks,

 with the white spray and they have some now like this one from Batiste which has just a hint of

So if you have red hair, brunette hair, dark brown hair, this one is medium and

It's going to be wonderful and you will end up with like white all in your hair which I'll

The first mistake I see people make when it comes to using dry shampoo is that they spray

 it all over like it's a hairspray and then they're disappointed when their hair doesn't have volume

The key to using this is to make sure that you are spraying it at the

So it's got to be sprayed at the roots and I'll give you a demonstration on that in just a

The second mistake I see people make with this is that they spray it right at the roots and

But that's one of the good things about the Batiste one because it does have

 that little hint of color so you don't have to worry about it having that white cast in your hair.

 So just make sure that you spray it a little bit further away and I'm going to show you a demo of

So I'll take a section like this about an inch, inch and a half, hold the can

 after shaking it about 6 to 12 inches away, do a quick little spray and just let it dry for just a

 go through and just take my fingers or a towel and rough it up like this and that will help to get

 the volume and the absorption of the oil so you can have refreshed, instant styled hair.

 allow it to dry and then you'll go through and just rough up your hair to give it some texture.

 This is also wonderful if you want to spray some into your roots, put your hair into a loose kind

 of a top knot, sleep in it to help extend that blowout or just to give you a little bit more

But sometimes your hair is a little bit stinky from being out, whether you're

 at the club that night, you just don't want to wash your hair or might be a little bit sweaty,

 I'll spray it all over and just put it in a loose top knot and sleep with it that way.

 use for dry shampoo is, I'm sure you've seen this before on my blog from Pinterest, I'll take a

 bobby pin and spray just a little bit onto it, allow it to dry and then by placing it with the

 bumpy side down you can get your hairstyle to stay with your bobby pin staying in.

What I'll do is I'll spray some into my shoes that have been wet or

 like at the armpits and just allow them to air out and dry overnight.

 your own discretion but this one I like because it smells like coconut, it smells amazing and then my

 your favorite tips are and as always have a great day, be safe, behave and be well.

 So then you're going to cover all the imperfections on your face.

 I know my eyebrows are very light and I'm basically drawing them on.

 It also lightens the eyebrows a bit because my pencil is kind of gingery.

 Now you're going to apply a pink blush to the apples of your cheeks

 I just put that on my eyes to give me a nice white base for the colors to stick as well.

 And then I put that all over my lid with I believe is a MAC 272.

 And I just cut the crease with a pencil brush by MAC which is a 219.

 Once again, I'm using the palette and I'm going to take the darker color

 On to eyeliner, I'm going to be using NYX's Black Bean Eye Shadow Pencil and an ELF brush.

 So you're just going to make a big wing to make it look like you have eyelashes or something.

 With a matte black eyeshadow, mine just happens to be in a Too Faced palette.

 And then I sweep away the excess like if there's anything on my face.

 I then took a regular eyeliner and then I just tight lined my eyes so that they're not blank.

 And then when you're done curling them, you can add mascara to them

 But apply it to the top and bottom so that they look very cartoony.

 I just went back with the NYX Milk Pencil on my waterline to make them look fuller.

 And then I added a black eyeshadow underneath to give them effect.

 And I just put that on my lips to make them look nice and rosy pink and cute.

 For this, I'm going to need some works of magic and wear a blue shirt that's

 Yeah, I got this one from Target in the sleepwear section a while ago.

 But it's just a long blonde wig that I cut up into a bob in the back and then just had

 So I just pinned my hair back so that pink didn't show because my hair's pink.

 But it doesn't look right without the hat, so always wear the hat.

 There will be a template in the down bar if you want to know how to make it.

 And I added a button and everything and it's going to be my trick or treat bag.

 So I made this one and I also have the phone case, which I got from Amazon.

 I just got a package in the mail from eBay and there's another one coming sometime today and my mom wants to open it.

 Because I searched on eBay to find these things for you girls in your playroom.

 Yeah, it was a bed that was mostly wire, Kit's bed, and it was completely bent and it was nasty.

 It was a little confusing because we didn't know how it was put together.

 I put the stars that were in the bag up on the foot of the bed.

 It's really big and as you can see the ceiling up here is slanted.

 And while we were looking on a website we noticed that this is actually from a different bed set.

 I already have one but I thought it would be so cute to have another bed.

 So I made bedding for it and this is going to be in the Curly Q room.

 I don't think it will be considering how well packaged it looks.

 And unlike my other Curly Q Daybed, this one actually came with the bedding that it's supposed to have.

 I'm not going to use it though because it wouldn't match the other bed or the seat on the vanity.

 And it was surprisingly one of my friends who I bought it from.

 That I'm not going to be using because I have different bedding for it.

 So I'm going to put it up in the room now and I'll show you how that looks up there.

 Have your parents help look with you because lots of people aren't honest.

 We've gotten lucky the past couple times with Brynn and the beds in the office that came with Brynn.

 So I'm going to go put the bed up in that room and then I'll show you how that looks.

 And since I was waiting like an hour for this room to come, I ended up moving the star bed down.

 And I put it down because I wanted to be able to see it because it's so cute.

 I forgot to mention, since I moved down the star room, Allie's room moved up.

 This ball, I've kept it a little squishy so that you can squeeze it.

 Standing up nice and tall, bring your heels together, toes apart, and then hold the magic

 And then elbows a little bit bent, as if you have to reach around something to hold

 From here, pull your stomach in, squeeze your heels together, check to make sure your toes

 are slightly apart, and then lift your heels a little bit off the floor so that your bottom

 So it goes 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, hold it, grow taller, and release.

 And pulse again for 10, 9, 8, really pull your stomach into your spine, 6, 5, 4, 3,

 So it goes up, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, stay at your forehead 10 times, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5,

 4, 3, 2, going down one more time for 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

 Lower your heels reluctantly so you're growing tall as they go down.

 We're going to take the circle behind and hold it with your fingers pointing down.

 And there we go for 10, 9, 8, it won't squeeze very far, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

 Hold it over here and press the circle for 10, 9, 8, 7, still hugging your legs together,

 And just for a little test, for the next part we're going to close our eyes for a moment

 and lift one foot off the floor and see how long you can balance.

 So if you can remember how long you were able to stand on either foot, remember the longest.

 Okay, so now we're going to place the circle between your ankles and make the circle a

 little smaller so that your feet are right under your hips and there's a bit of a squeeze

 Pull up like you have really tight pants that you're trying to get on and keep that lift.

 Take your left foot off the floor, stand tall, and hug the circle to the center for

 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and hold the hug for a second and let that foot come down tall

 Hug the circle for 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, hold the hug and reluctantly set that foot

 Walk your right foot forward a little bit and make it point straight towards me, straight

 Make your other foot point off to the side so that they're on a slight angle.

 Hips point towards me, stand on the front foot, your right foot, and pick up your back

 Now you're on a bit of an angle so you're going to hug towards the center line for 10,

 9, if you need to hold on to something do, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

 Release that one, stand on your back foot, pick up your front foot, stay nice and tall,

 Stand on both feet and we're going to walk the left foot to the front now.

 Stand on your front foot, lift your back foot up, really grow tall.

 Hold that and hug for 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, keep growing taller, 2, hold it for a second

 and release, stand on your back foot, this is the last one, pull up, lift your front

 foot and hug for 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, hold it and hug and let it go.

 Now bring your feet back together, shake it all out, squeeze your legs tight together

 and lift up on your toes, try to make your inner thighs, your inner knees, your inner

 Grow taller and lower, one more, inhale, lift up, hug the middle and grow taller as you

 So now you have beautiful standing posture, close your eyes and see if you can get a few

 more seconds on either foot, try the one that you had more success with.

 And this is a great thing to practice for your balance when you're brushing your teeth,

 you can just hold one leg up, maybe keep your eyes open when you're brushing your teeth.

 Hey everyone and welcome back to my channel, it's Jin here and today I'm going to be doing

 this big, sexy, bouncy, kind of big curly hair and I absolutely love how it turned out

 So if you guys have patience then this tutorial is made for you because this is going to probably

 So yes, this hair tutorial is going to be a very, very long process but a short video

 because of course there is the power of editing and I'm going to be using my NuMe 19mm magic

 It gets really, really hot so you don't have to hold it on your hair for a very long time.

 So I'm just going to hop right into the tutorial and I hope you guys enjoy this video.

 Give it a thumbs up if you really love this big, sexy, bouncy kind of hair because it

 So I'll have all the products that I will be using in today's video in the description

 bar and as well as my hair information, all the 411 about this hair.

 This is the Malaysian hair from Queenie's Royal Virgin Hair and I do have a giveaway

 If you guys want to see how I get this look then continue watching and I'll see you guys

 Leaving this side and as you guys know that I already separated the curls on this side

 And you can also go back in and tighten up any curls that may have loosened up if your

 Feel free to subscribe if you aren't already so you can stay tuned for more upcoming videos

 I'm always coming back all the time so we can just like chat it out.

 Yeah thank you all for watching and I'll see you guys in the next video.

 My name is Annie Pio and I'm the author of Annie's Raw Food Kitchen.

 Today I'll be showing you how to make a delicious chutney using two different types of berries and fresh herbs and spices.

One of the berries is a mulberry, which is absolutely delicious.

 Goldenberries are from the Amazon and they're packed full of vitamin C.

 Both of these berries are high in antioxidants so they help us fight those free radicals that make our skin age and make us look older than we really are.

 So what I did with both of these because they were dried is I soaked them in filtered water for about three hours so that they would soften so I could break them down in my food processor.

 I'm going to place these soaked berries into my food processor and I'm going to add with them some ginger and some garlic, which I've minced and chopped for flavor.

 And once that's mixed down like that, broken down, you'll see too, this really looks like a cooked chutney.

 So if you like it really hot, you might want to use the green or use a little bit more of the red.

 And the olive oil is really going to help to bind this chutney together and make it really smooth.

 And you'll notice too, when you go to an Indian restaurant, the chutneys are usually like swimming in oil.

 So this will add – you can add more oil to it if you want as well.

 I'll give it a little scrape on the sides just to make sure everything gets a good little mix in there.

 It has that tartness and it has a sweetness and it has a real savory from the onion and the garlic and the gingers.

 And I've actually designed this chutney to be enjoyed with a berry wild rice with cashew dish.

 If you visit my website at anniepyo.com, that's A-N-I-P-H-Y-O.com,

 you'll get that recipe and many more fun and delicious nutritious recipes.

 TanoPro Tri-Fold Tano Covers are among the highest quality Tano Covers produced on the

 Aside from the unmistakable quality is how easy the TanoPro Tri-Fold Cover is to install.

 We would like to invite you to sit back and watch one of our high quality Tano's being

 installed but pay attention, it takes less than 5 minutes to install.

 TanoPro Tri-Fold Covers are lightweight and easy to install by yourself.

 Just center the cover on the front end of the bed and the side rails and begin to tighten

 The second step is to unclip the snap clips located in the front of the cover, allowing

 The third step is to begin to adjust the rear easy clamps at the rear of the bed, again

 Shut the tailgate and make sure that the cover is centered around the perimeter of the top

 Being that the clamps are just snug, you should be able to gently move the cover from front

 to rear or side to side as needed to center the cover over the bed of your truck.

 Once you have the cover in the desired position, fold the cover back into the open position

 Before you fold to the open position, it is important to make sure that you secure your

 rear clamping handles into the locked position to avoid damage to your cover.

 You will notice a warning label that reminds you to do so every time you open your cover.

 Once you have tightened the front clamps and your queue gaskets are sealed, unfold the

 cover and make the necessary adjustments to tighten and secure the rear clamps.

 Now that your TonnoPro cover is installed, it can be used for a variety of purposes.

 The tri-fold cover allows its owner to have dual access to the bed of the truck.

 For access to the top of your bed, just fold the top open and use it for hauling just about

 For access to the rear of the bed, just open the tailgate and now you have the ability

 to load and unload anything from golf clubs, tools and equipment to camping gear.

 For security purposes, lock your tailgate to prevent any unwanted access to the bed

 TonnoPro is lightweight yet durable and offers a limited lifetime warranty.

 It's quick and easy to install and along with its sleek, stylish good looks offers

 The aerodynamics of our cover provides its owner with gas savings of between 10 and 13%.

 When it comes to quality, ease of installation and price, it's no wonder why TonnoPro is

 In this little video I just want to show you how you can make up any object from the four

 The four basic shapes are that you've got a sphere which is a ball, you've got your

 typical cone shape, you've got your cube and you've also got a cylinder.

 Pretty much anything you can think of in the real world can be made using those four shapes.

 Now, a quick idea is that I've got a little lamp in front of me and if you look at everything

 So when I look at the front of the lamp, which is the part that's got the lightbulb in it,

 At the back of the lamp would be effectively a cylinder coming out the back of it.

 And there's other bits, but I'll come back to that in a second.

 The lightbulb would effectively be a sphere, which would be this part.

 The part at the back of the lamp is effectively like a cube, if you like.

 And the base of it is like a sphere, but again it's cut in half.

 Now I can go back through it again and I can refine it and say there's another sphere.

 It's got a couple of adjusters here which would be cylinders as well.

 I'll draw it with this ink marker, just so you can see it better on the camera.

 Once you've got the simple shapes, you would erase the pencil and then you can put in some

 Okay, and that's basically how you do it with just simple shapes to make anything.

 Here's another great recipe that can be used as either lunch or as a dinner.

 First, this is the pre-cooked shrimp that I bought at the store.

 I simply thawed it and I've already cut it into bite-sized pieces.

 The size of piece that you would serve to a kid, not a baby all minced up, but the size

 So I have a normal-sized lime wedge and a normal-sized lemon wedge.

 I also have a hard-boiled egg, an avocado, a little bit of mustard, and some of the light

 Like garlic, it can regulate bacteria growth inside of the body and it's a source for calcium.

 After menopause, dill is great for reducing the risk of bone loss and for bone density.

 So we're going to combine all these ingredients here in this bowl.

 We're just going to mix it up and it's going to make a delicious lunch or a delicious dinner.

 What I've done here at this point is I've cut my lime and I've cut my lemon wedge.

 I've cut up about half a celery stalk and I've cut it in half and then I've cut it in

 I also have a pile of dill here, probably about one and a half tablespoons of dill.

 Now any time you cut dill, it's going to be sort of hard to fine chop it.

 So you want to go through it two directions and then cut it, I guess, the cross way like

 I'm just going to continue to mince up this dill because I really want it to be able to

 I'm going to squeeze my lemon in here and I'm going to squeeze my lime in here, just

 Notice my sliced tomato and my sliced hard boiled egg are over here.

 In fact, if you're following a recipe here, I'm trying to teach you a recipe, I'll actually

 use half a teaspoon of yellow mustard, just traditional yellow mustard like you use to

 Once you see how they make a hot dog, you'll probably never have one again.

 And now I'm going to, by the way, I have this little rubber spatula so I'll be able to begin

 Now a lot of people when they make a salad like this, they just cover the whole thing

 So I'm going to start out here with, I have a quarter cup measure.

 So I'll scoop some mayonnaise in here and use about a quarter cup.

 And I'll just begin stirring it together and letting the mayonnaise begin to coat everything

 It smells delicious, it looks delicious, and it's absolutely fantastic.

 Again, you're probably used to large quantities of mayonnaise in a salad like this in the

 So we're simply going to use enough mayonnaise here as a glue and it's now pretty firm, sort

 At this point if you wanted to, you could taste it and add a little dill if you wanted

 I'm going to add a little bit of dill, a straight piece of cucumber here.

 If you don't have white pepper, you can use regular black pepper.

 And then I'll continue to stir that around a bit so the pepper has a chance to spread

 Then I'm going to take my avocado and I'm going to chop it in half.

 So we're going to take a spoon and put it right here at the end of the ripe avocado

 And now it's been scooped out of the shell and it's almost ready to eat.

 I'm serving it with my hard boiled eggs sliced and my tomatoes sliced on the side as a garnish.

 And what I have here is something delicious with a northern Scandinavian flavor and avocados

 And because I prepared this with ingredients that came right from the refrigerator, it's

 Okay, so what you want to do is you want to grab a pan like this or a cookie sheet or

 And at the same time you want your oven to be preheating at either like 330 is usually

 And I like my pieces to be pretty big because I feel like if they're not big they shrink

 And then I just take an extra virgin olive oil and I drizzle it over the kale.

 Then what I do is I take my hands and I kind of massage it into the kale so that it's evenly

 So normally I put Parmesan cheese and I just grate Parmesan cheese over the whole thing.

 But I am currently on this elimination diet where I cannot have cheese.

 If you can't eat dairy or you don't like Parmesan you can put other cheeses on.

 So you're going to put these in the oven for about 10 to 12 minutes depending on your

 I usually put them in for 12 and I check them at 10 to see if they need those extra 2 minutes.

 I just take them off with my fingers and I put them into a bowl.

 Hey guys, NaturallyNelzie here coming back again with an old twist out but still kind

 So rather than just wash my hair and start twisting it all over again, I figured that

 And that's actually going to be, I guess you could say it's a curly high puff tutorial.

 And the main thing that you're going to need is of course one of these stretchy, really

 No metal clasp on it because you don't want it to get, you know, snag your hair or anything.

 Got this for some moisture and yeah that's all you basically need.

 And your spray bottle and you guys know I don't really detangle or even you know stretch

 Just enough so that you know, can make the comb glide through your hair.

 Now I'm just going to add a little bit of my Shea Moisture Organic Coconut and Hibiscus

 So I'm just going to you know, use a little bit of this, not too much.

 So got my little pick here and all I'm going to do is just put it to the roots and just

 I want to bring it through the hair because of course like I said it's a curly high puff

 Put it in the roots, push it up a little bit, roots, push it up a little bit and you're

 just going to do this throughout your whole head until you feel like you know, it's stretched

 So yeah, main thing that you're going to want to do is have your hair push up like that.

 So I'm going to grab just a little bit more of my Curl Enhancing Smoothie just for you

 And before I do that I'm going to add a little bit more water, just brush the front and the

 So add a little bit more of this to the front section and rub it in.

 If you got some white residue like what I got going on, rub it in some more.

 I'm mainly using this part of the comb because I don't really have my brush on hand right

 So I'm just going to use this as a substitute to just smooth out the sides.

 And again, don't bring it all the way through because we are trying to work with an old

 Alright, so now you're just going to get your long stretchy headband and now all I'm going

 to do is just put it around my head, wrap it around twice because I want the front

 ear to be taut and I'm going to start from around my neck like this making sure there's

 And I'm going to start from the forehead, make sure my earrings aren't in it.

 And all I'm going to do is start from the back, hopefully you guys can see that, and

 You don't want the back to be up too much because like I said I tried this before and

 Just until you feel like your hair is secure enough where it's not going to come out the

 Now the front, I guess you can get it as high as you want to get it.

 And now all you're going to do is just fluff this part out, or don't fluff if you want.

 Just going to layer this a little higher because I want to give that fullness to my little

 And you guys know I love my accessories so I'm probably just going to put my little boo

 And of course you want to make sure that that headband that you're using isn't showing.

I'm going to prime my eyes and this is the Becca Evermatt poreless primer.

I only like this for my brows because if you use it on your eyelids girl, you're not going to be able to blend any shadows.

 So as you guys know, I'm over the brow tutorial so I just wanted to show this briefly.

 I love using this because it just adds that darkness to it and it just kind of keeps my brows in place.

 And then what I'm going to do is just kind of shake them now and create the brows that I want and blend out my concealer.

And then there's the gold color inside that palette that I used to place onto the lid.

 And I'm just going to blend this out and work all around this thing.

Again I've done a look like this before just using these two colors right here.

But now I just wanted to add a little black to it and to my outer V just to make it more of a smoke look.

 And just give it more definition instead of making it so simple.

If you add black to anything guys it's going to give you a bomb look.

 So now I'm using the NARS All Day Luminous Weightless Foundation.

And I'm just going to blend that in with my hands because using it with a brush girl it just does not work.

 This is the NARS All Day Radiant Clean Concealer in the color Amande.

I'm going to go ahead and highlight with that thing and blend it on out.

 So going in with contour and then I'm cooking slightly under my contour.

This is in the color Bailey and I'm just going to put that all over my face.

 I like to use it with a fluffy brush because that's the best way that it applies in my opinion.

 And then I'm going to go in with a lipstick by Sasha Cosmetics called Wicked.

I've done it before but this is part 2 girl because I was just getting ready.

 Alright everybody, I was just going through some of the archives and I found one that

 I made for a student actually in New Jersey, Megan, and she wanted to know how to get her

 So since I made these, I've been doing it in all the black belt classes and I think

 it's a really good way to really go high flying and kick hard on that jump hook kick that's

 So use this, good luck, train on it every day that you can and remember our goal is

 to always get better, always have fun, and always try your best.

 Alright, the four drills for a jump hook kick for first degree.

 So we're going to set up, bring up your knee, you're going to kick out, hook kick back.

 You start here, focus on your target, swing your arms slowly, bring your body up, knee

 So you start like this, focus on your target, you do that fast, no kick, just knees.

 With it being election day, we're going to give two variations on this great teaching drill.

 You could also say that timing an election campaign is as tricky as creating a smooth rhythm in breaststroke.

 Too much too soon or too little too late can give or take away the desired results.

 Helping swimmers understand rhythm in breaststroke and learning what rhythm feels like can be a difficult task.

 Hopping in the water with them and getting involved can prove as helpful as calling your local representative when they do something silly, which happens often.

 While it may not always change things, at least you are involved in the process.

 For us, the American flag is proudly displayed, and don't forget those nose plugs if you need them.

 In unison, begin a slow, steady, hand-lead body dolphin movement.

 Be sure to match your swimmer's rhythm rather than have them adjust to you.

 Begin the out sweep as the body presses down into the water, and on each out sweep, instruct the swimmer to clap your hand.

 This clapping of the hand gives your swimmers a target rhythm and a place to send her hand.

 After a few of these, or when you feel like the swimmer has got it, allow them to go on their own, watching to see if they indeed have it.

 Keep things small, and don't worry about how slow or how fast you go.

 Match the swimmer's rhythm, and if the body sizes are much different, the swimmer or the coach can put on fins to equalize the rates.

 Having something to pass can slow down the process, just like in politics.

 And because money is involved, you'll get their attention, just like in politics.

 And if your swimmer is like most politicians, they'll be very good at passing the buck, so you'll get great results.

 Pass the buck back and forth, making sure not to drop it, but if you do, don't worry.

 Go to one of the other swimmers and grab another buck from them.

 If you lose the money, think like a politician and don't worry about it.

 Hey guys, welcome to my piano tutorial for Fly by Ludovico Annelli part 3.

 Alright, so you start with your left hand on those two C sharps.

 And then you play 12 notes back and forth with your right hand.

 So the 11th note you play with your right hand is instead of a C sharp, a D sharp.

 So the 10th, 11th and 12th note you play are D sharp, E and F sharp.

 Alright, then you go back with your left hand to C sharp again.

 On the B flat with your left hand you just play E and G sharp just 12 times.

 And then when you go down to A you will play G sharp and A back and forth.

 Then go down to A and the last three notes are D sharp, E and F sharp.

 On B flat again nothing special and then on A you go to G sharp and A.

 So let's listen to that one more time really slowly and then I'll play it one more time in normal speed.

 Okay, I'll play it to you one more time now and then we're done with this part.

 And I'll see you in the next part where we will learn how to play this.

 Mild-mannered Jane has invited her friends over for a nice dinner.

 She spent hours preparing the meal, washing the vegetables, peeling potatoes, and making

 She chose the perfect wine to complement the dinner and picked fresh flowers from her backyard

 Then Mild-mannered Jane sat back and smiled sweetly as her friends enjoyed themselves.

 Mild-mannered Jane saw her friends to the door, knowing the horror that awaited her.

 But she was ready for battle, because Mild-mannered Jane was...

 Jane knows that fats, oil, and grease are villains that can lead to clogs in her sewer

 line, making it less efficient and increasing the likelihood of backups.

 Jane uses paper towels to clean off grease, disposing of it in the trash before washing

 Extra grease, salad dressing, or gravy is put in the freezer to harden and then thrown

 She knows that the most wicked of the villains are the most innocent-looking.

 Yes, fats, oils, and grease include innocent-looking foods like salad dressing, ice cream, butter,

 All you need is an awareness of what constitutes fog, fats, oil, and grease.

 Atlanta is spending $3.9 billion to overhaul its aging and deteriorating water and sewer

 You can help by making sure you don't contribute to sewer clogs.

 Hi, welcome back to Cooking with Alia, the show that brings to you the flavors of Morocco.

 Today, I'm going to show you how to make one of the staples of Moroccan cuisine,

 This dish is so simple to make and you will be amazed how good it tastes.

 One whole chicken of approximately a pound and a half, cut into large pieces.

 A quarter of a cup of finely chopped cilantro and a quarter of a cup of finely chopped parsley.

 Preserved lemons, and if you don't have preserved lemons, you could use olives,

 one teaspoon of crushed garlic, a quarter of a teaspoon of turmeric powder,

 one teaspoon of ginger powder, one teaspoon of salt, and a quarter of a teaspoon of pepper.

 Cover your pan and let the chicken cook for the next five minutes.

 After five minutes, add the parsley and cilantro to the chicken.

 Cover your pan and let the chicken cook for the next 30 minutes.

 Cover your pan and let the carrots and chicken cook for another 30 minutes.

 and add some water as needed so that the chicken does not burn.

 Poke the chicken and vegetables with a fork to make sure they're cooked.

 In the last five minutes of cooking, we're going to add the preserved lemons.

 Don't cover your pan, reduce the heat, and let the tagine cook for another five minutes.

 In today's tutorial we're gonna learn how to do the ripple stitch and the ripple stitch is actually

In actual fact you can actually slip your hook in behind the ripples.

 and the problem is is that the corners like to bend up and into the middle.

 look at the ripple stitch you can stick your, your hook in behind each one of the ripples because

 up on the post on this side it tends to wanna make the material roll up.

So I would plan if you're doing an afghan or any kind of project that you put on

 a border that's not the ripple stitch in order to hold this project.

 stitch and hello it's Michael from Mikey's Mail and together with my friends at All Free Crochet

 tight but just nice and snug and we're just gonna keep it in sets of two.

 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1 and 2 and so I'll stop because I'm gonna lose count.

 keep it in sets of two and at the very end of your row no matter how long you've done just please add

 gonna do our double crochet, we're gonna do a double crochet all the way back across this line.

 So holding your index finger and your thumb onto the stitch just right below the loop what I want

 holding that is identifying where that stitch is for your very first stitch.

 material around going in to the stitch on the line pulling it through, pull through two and two and

 at the end of the line so all we need just you need to do now is just turn your material.

So what we're gonna do is just chain up one, just chain one and we're gonna

 order to before we can even start the ripple because the actual next line that we are doing

 is actually directly behind the first ripple here because the ripple is from a line above it coming

So what we wanna do now is that we've just chained up one and we just wanna make sure that

 not grabbing the material so just go single crochet all the way across this line and we'll meet back

So I'm coming into the end and how do you know when you're actually finished the end

 into the one there but do not forget to make sure you go into the chain of this piece here.

 side for your single crochet and therefore see you've just finished a line and that will just

So what we need to do now is turn our material and then we gotta look at

 to pay attention to something really so simple it's not even funny.

 ripple, space, ripple, space, ripple and we're going all the way down but you'll notice see

 there's a gap here of just empty space and then it's the ripple and you have the ripple and then

If you look above it the ripples for the next line are right directly beside it on the

 outside just like so and then on the next one they're back in again leaving this gap.

 actual fact what we need to pay attention to here when we're starting now is that your ripples will

 come out like this and then extend out, in, out, in, out, in all the way throughout your project.

 we go to start our first line you're gonna think that you're missing and leaving a gap but in

 I'm 50 years old and I want to show you the routines that I do and keep in my program

 The exercise of this week is going to be the dumbbell chest press.

 Now the dumbbell chest press is an exercise where you work the muscles of the pecs and

 front of the shoulders to give you that nice look, nice tone look in your chest and shoulder

 You want to grab some dumbbells that you can comfortably handle for about 10 to 12 reps

 and which the last 2 to 3 reps should be fairly difficult to complete.

 So first I like to have a seat on the bench and I place the weights on my knees.

 I lay back and start with the dumbbells about chest, mid chest level and we press up.

 Now my breathing pattern on this is when I come down, bring the weights down, I'm going

 Now I can really feel those muscles in my chest and front of my shoulders working now.

 So add this exercise to your weekly exercise routine and you should see some great results

 If you have a tub or shower and you just don't like the way the caulk looks, it's really

 I'm going to use a tub and tile caulk that has a built-in antimicrobial and it's going

 to slow down the formation of mold and mildew and it prevents it from staining.

 Then I'm just using a really nice removal tool and I prefer the tools where you push

 The hook style is just difficult to use and it doesn't do as good of a job.

 First step, we're going to push out all this old caulk by using a tool and just scraping

 out all the old caulk and then anywhere where there's any mold or mildew, I'm going to take

 white vinegar, put it on to that and just let it set for 20 or 30 minutes and that's

 What I like about this tool is once you use the center to pull out the caulk in the middle,

 you can use the edges just like a scraper and it's plastic and so it does a good job

 So the key to spreading and getting a really nice bead is starting out with a very small

 tip opening on the caulk and in fact the opening here is very narrow so I'm just going to start

 at the top and most of these have just a little ridge on the very top and that's usually a

 And so we have a very small opening and we're just again going to force it straight into

 the corner and into the crack and you're just working slow and methodical and we're trying

 And I'm just going to work to the center and then what's nice about caulk rather than

 silicone is you can smooth it with your finger and just have an additional rag or two around

 and we're just going to apply just very light pressure on the caulk and drag it close to

 the end and then I'm going to start from this side and work toward the center.

 If I were to go all the way to the end you would have a big glob of caulk and what's

 nice about caulk also is you can work it, it has a kind of a long drying time whereas

 silicone is very sticky and very difficult to tool with your finger like this.

 So that's all it takes to caulk a shower, very simple, easy do it yourself project.

 This is Sumaraoji of Cakes and More and you are watching the video series Baking for Beginners.

 Eggs as you know are a very essential part of a baker's pantry.

 Be it whole eggs, egg whites or egg yolks, they can really amaze you with the magic they

 Eggs play different roles in different recipes and in some recipes they lend richness and

 They also help the batter rise and they also help to bind the batter.

 The weight of eggs can vary even within a given grade so it's always essential that

 If a recipe doesn't mention the weight of eggs, you could take the weight of one large

 egg as 48 grams, weighed without shell, one large egg white as 30 grams and one large

 If your recipe requires you to use 3 eggs, then you could crack 3 eggs into a bowl, whisk

 it lightly just to combine them and then weigh the eggs and proceed with your recipe.

 Unless your recipe specifies that the eggs need to be cold, eggs always need to be used

 So in case you have stored your eggs in the fridge, then you could leave them on the counter

 If you are in a hurry, you could put the cold eggs in a bowl of some warm water, not hot

 water and leave them for about 15-20 minutes and then you should have your eggs ready.

 You could whisk an egg with some water and apply this using a silicone brush onto your

 bread or any other bake and you'll get a really gorgeous golden color.

 If a recipe ingredient list specifies as eggs separated, it means that you'll be using the

 Separating eggs in order to get clear whites comes with some amount of practice, so you'll

 Two egg whites replace one whole egg in recipes which allow this substitution.

 So do read the recipe carefully and only if the recipe allows this substitution, try it

 This is substituted in only a few recipes and not in all recipes, so be careful when

 In some recipes, there won't be any baking powder or baking soda and the cake rises solely

 If you are wondering what you could do with egg yolks, there's a lot you could do like

 And every time I separate eggs, I am always tempted to try these out.

 You could also freeze the egg yolks and you can do it by stirring in about half a teaspoon

 And then you would also need to remember to subtract this sugar from your recipe later.

 Please do leave your comments for me and any queries if you would have.

 All right, today I'm going to show you how to cook a perfect pasta.

 I know a lot of you out there, probably most of you out there, cook pasta once,

 But I'm going to show you a couple different tips to make sure that your pasta comes out perfect every single time.

 What I like to start with is boiling water, a large amount of boiling water.

 I want to make sure that you cook with whatever's written on the package.

 If it says five quarts, I want to make sure that there's five quarts of water in there.

 It's real important that you start with enough water because when I add that pasta to this,

 If you put a lot of pasta in a small amount of water, it's going to cool the water down,

 But if I have a large amount of water, which I'm going to take now and do,

 Keep in mind that when you add the salt to this and when I cook the pasta,

 What it does for the flavor of the pasta is actually boost that a little bit.

 You taste a lot more of the wheat flavor of the pasta in there.

 When you add the pasta, I want to make sure that you add all of it at once.

 And the initial start of this is where I really want to make sure that you're standing here

 Because if I'm cooking things like angel hair, they tend to stick,

 or linguine, any of these longer noodles, they tend to stick a lot more in the beginning.

 So that first two minutes, I want to make sure that you cook that pasta by stirring it.

 The other thing I want to make sure that you do is as you cook that pasta,

 That last minute that I know is going to come just to al dente,

 All right, one minute before that's al dente and perfectly done.

 And the way you tell that is you actually take a piece, take a bite,

 The reason I lift it up slowly is because there's some perforations on the side of this pan.

 If you lift it up very quickly, you're going to put water all over the counter.

 I got a couple quick tomatoes, maybe some spinach in there, some garlic.

 Just a real basic thing to show you guys how to toss a pasta together.

 You're going to say, all right, does it need a little bit more liquid in there?

 I've got some of this starchy pasta water that I could actually add to that,

 Give that a little twist, just if you want to make sure that that rises up a little bit.

 The last thing I need to do is maybe top it with some fresh grated Parmesan Reggiano cheese,

 maybe some Pecorino Romano if you like a little bit more salt on it.

 Hey guys, I've got another recipe to share with you and the reason I have

 this recipe is because today you know I work with several gals that all can and

 today we were talking about recipes that we use with our home canned food and I

 told about the chicken leg recipe that I did and my friend shared this one with

 me and it's so simple I'm going to try it I know it's just going to turn out

 great because she's a great cook but what I have here it's chicken spaghetti

 and I've got hot spaghetti noodles that I just took off the stove and drained so

 they're nice and hot and I have a jar of my chicken that I did before just the

 canned chicken shredded chicken chunks I did a video on that before and I'm going

 to put that in the spaghetti noodles and then you just break that up and that's

 the stuff I did a video on just canned chicken so that's chicken breasts and

 thighs so that's gonna get mixed in and it's kind of a zippy thing sounds so

 good and then a can of cream of chicken soup we're gonna put that in as well

 and I asked her what she uses to thin the soup out and she said if you put it

 in with the noodles when they're hot it'll just coat the noodles real nicely

 so I'm gonna put that in there kind of excited about this because I like

 hearing about new recipes that I can use my canned goods with that in there and

 then a little can of the green chilies and I got the diced ones so I have nice

 small bits of them put that in there there we go and I'm going to put some

 shredded pepper jack cheese so that's gonna make this really zippy and yummy

 and you know we were talking about you could probably do this with the canned

 cream of chicken soup and cheddar cheese and maybe some bacon bits in there with

 some broccoli there's a lot of things just use your imagination and it's

 really coating those noodles nicely now let's see if you guys can see that super

 yummy but she said she had a family reunion and she made regular beef

 spaghetti and then she made this which is kind of a casserole and she said this

 was super popular so we're gonna try it so I'm gonna put a whole bunch of this

 pepper jack cheese and the rest of it I'm okay so my battery just died but I'm

 gonna pick up where I think I left off and that's where I took the pepper jack

 cheese and I took a bunch of it and put it in there and I've stirred it all

 around I've left a little bit of the pepper jack cheese to sprinkle on top so

 now what I have is a nice casserole dish and I'm going to see if I can do this

 this way so I'm gonna put that in there and it's everything's all cooked so it's

 just a matter of putting it in the oven long enough for it to get hot which

 will be about three thirty minutes at 350 and during that time I'm gonna make

 a salad and I've just got one of those salad kits for Caesar salad and I think

 that'll be fine so I've got this casserole dish and it's sprayed with

 cooking spray a nonstick thing so there it is I'm gonna take the rest of this

 pepper jack cheese and I'm gonna coat the top of this super yummy so this is I

 love the fact that you can have these really delicious recipes that are super

 easy don't take a lot of time and because you're using your food storage

 it's amazingly quick and easy and still tastes super good so and I did leave the

 juice in from the chicken the broth that's created so I think that'll add a

 lot of flavor all right so there we have it there is a spicy chicken spaghetti

 kind of thing and I'm gonna put that in the oven at 350 for about 30 minutes

 while I get everything else set up and I'll come back to you when we're ready

 to serve it okay it's been 30 minutes and it's out of the oven so I'm gonna

 show you how good this looks so good and I'm gonna dish it up and I've got a

 little Caesar salad and then I've got these really cool it's called Romanesco

 and I got it at a the farmers market and it's kind of like a broccoli cauliflower

 combination and it's super good so I'm gonna put that on there you could do

 green beans or peas or anything you want carrots look at that sticking together

 here nice and cheesy and creamy there's a good-looking casserole dinner so

 there you go let me move my other plate so that you can see this it's a good

 dinner so anyway thanks for that recipe and I hope you guys try it and I hope

 Simply Ming is made possible with support from Contessa, Allclad, Breitling and Ocean Spray.

 Here I just put some fresh thyme in with some onions and bell peppers.

 And by the way, if you were doing this in advance, make sure your veg chills before you put fish on it.

 And you cook a piece of fish like that for about 15 minutes at 400 degrees.

 Simply Ming is made possible with support from Contessa, All-Clad, Brightling, and Ocean Spread.

In particular we're going to use these frozen lima beans and this pack of

 lima beans cost about a dollar fifty and for this recipe I also bought this mint

 ingredients you will need for this dish are olive oil, yogurt, garlic, lemon, and

 and cook for about eight to ten minutes until the lima beans are soft.

 water is boiling and the lima beans are cooking, add two tablespoons of plain

 lemon juice, two teaspoons of cumin, and two chopped cloves of garlic.

 peel your mint and chop it up and then add two to four tablespoons of mint

 and you can have your dressing and you can feel free to experiment adding more

 or less of the different ingredients depending on your flavor preferences.

 Once the lima beans are done cooking, use a slotted spoon to transfer them to a

 dressing so that all the lima beans are nicely coated with this delicious flavor.

 You can eat this dish now or keep it in the refrigerator for a couple of days.

 So here's our final dish and now comes my favorite part where we get to try some.

 Today we're going to make jjajangmyeon, which is noodles with black bean sauce.

 If you've watched quite a few Korean dramas, you've probably seen this dish around.

 It's absolutely delicious and you can easily make this at home.

You're gonna need onions, zucchini, potato, pork belly, or beef or seafood,

 which you can find at the Korean market, and some cucumber for garnish.

 After chopping it, I have 2 cups zucchini, 2 cups onion, 1 cup potato.

 So in a large deep pan, wok, or whatever you have, I added 1 tablespoon of oil.

 And then add the pork belly and fry it up until it gets nice and crispy and golden brown.

 but you can take it completely out and add 1 tablespoon of oil.

 Then you can add the rest of your vegetables, your onion and your zucchini,

 And in the same pan, add 1 tablespoon of oil and 1 third cup of the black bean paste.

 And on medium heat, you're going to keep stirring it for 1 minute.

 And then you can add the rest of your vegetable pork mixture back in there.

 Then you're going to add 2 cups of water and bring it up to a boil.

 Once it starts boiling, put the heat on to low and cover it for around 3 minutes.

 I'm using cornstarch, but you can use potato starch if you have it.

 You want to kind of balance out the saltiness of the black bean paste.

 Keep stirring it and then your mixture will start to thicken up.

 And cook it for 4 minutes or whatever directions are on the package.

 Also, if you have too much sauce or no more noodles, get some rice.

 Welcome back to Jack B. Nimble Candle Creations and today we are doing a tutorial on a melt

 So of course you are going to need your sea salt and I used Himalayan sea salt and I used

 If you want to use a goat's milk base or a shea butter base that would be wonderful also.

 So when you melt your soap you put your sea salt in and stir it up.

 So you are going to actually take that sea salt, take a spoon, scoop it out and you are

 going to put it into the bottom of your mold and that is going to have a little bit of

 And as you can see then you are going to pour your base on top of that.

 I like to have about half of the mold with sea salt and then the rest of the mold with

 I did a really wonderful combination of a citrus blend and it is a blend of yuzu and

 it is another fragrance oil I used called Morning Sunrise and that was from the supplier

 Unfortunately they no longer are in business so I don't know that that fragrance oil is

 So I kind of cut this down just so that you guys could see but I did have to continue

 adding more sea salt to the base and as you go along you will have to pop it back into

 Well that is alcohol and rubbing alcohol at 70% is what you do after you pour your base.

 It gets rid of any bubbles or air pockets that rise to the top.

 So anytime you see me spraying the soap that is what I am doing and it really just makes

 This one right here that I am pouring it gave me a little bit of trouble and in the

 next cut you are going to see that it is perfect but I actually took it out and fixed it.

 I ground some of the sea salt in a coffee grinder that I just used for grinding herbs

 But I did half finely ground Himalayan sea salt and the second half I just used the whole

 These are drying out on my counter and they turned out really really pretty.

 The natural pink Himalayan sea salt is what is the colorant for this so there is no added

 I have a group on Facebook as well as a business page on Facebook and I am on Pinterest and

 We're here at the beautiful Bermuda Gow Showrooms on Serpentine Road.

 We're here with Chef Damien Simmons from the Ocean Echo Restaurant, one of the rising stars,

 These beautiful recipes are handed down from generation to generation.

 So what I'm going to do here, first I've got some codfish and potato, which I'm just going

 This is actually how I eat my codfish every Sunday, just mash it in a little butter, salt

 We're going to add one whole egg in there as well, just to kind of...

 Now let's get that into a frying pan because I can feel a fish cake coming on.

 Now it can be said that if you're a celiac, obviously don't add the flour and this can

 But if you're cooking for a celiac, make sure that you don't put the flour in.

 It needs to be said also that all the ingredients are available at Lindo's and recipes are on

 So, important to have young Bermudian chefs, rising stars like yourself.

 Now, we've taken the liberty of doing a few a little earlier on while he's washing his

 It's a little bit of chili, a little bit of mayonnaise, garlic, salt, pepper.

 Okay, he's going to finish it off with a little bit of fresh parsley.

 Season to Taste with Peter Javetic is an exclusive presentation of Lindo's Group of Companies

 featuring Gosling's Wine of the Week, a VSB TV 11 production recorded on location at the

 To compliment Chef Damien's traditional codfish cakes, Gosling's recommends Wai-Ra'au River

 Sauvignon Blanc, produced from some of the oldest Sauvignon Blanc vines in the heart

 This excellent example shows expressive aromatics of gooseberry and passion fruit.

 The retail price is $22.75 and is available at Lindo's and Gosling's stores.

 For foundation, make sure that you use a low SPF foundation because if you choose one that

 But if you don't have any other option and you just have to use a foundation that has

 a high SPF in it, just make sure that you apply foundation on your face in all the visible

 And for this video, I am using the Givenchy Photo Perfection Foundation.

 And for concealer, I will be using the Secret Camouflage by Laura Mercier.

 And when you apply concealer, make sure that you don't overdo it.

 And for eyeshadow primer, I will be using the Urban Decay Eyeshadow Primer in Sin.

 And with a black eyeliner, this is the MAC Eyeliner in Feline, I'm going to line my upper

 This way, I will need to apply liquid eyeliner because actually, I'm not a big fan of liquid

 eyeliners when you are going to take pictures because sometimes if the lines are not perfect,

 And then with my EcoTools Crease Brush, I'm going to apply MAC Cork Eyeshadow, but you

 And this one is matte, as you can see, it doesn't have any sparkles in it.

 And then with the same crease brush, I'm going to apply MAC Eyeshadow in Sketch.

 Remember to avoid applying very sparkly eyeshadows on your brow bone because it will wash out

 And then I will apply some of the Melon Pigment underneath my lower lashes, as you can see.

 So I already curled my lashes and now I will be applying mascara.

 And for lipstick, I will be using the Revlon Lip Butter and this one is in Lollipop.

 Hi everyone, this is Jenny Strieve with Confessions of a Hair Stylist.

 And if you're following me on Instagram, you probably caught wind that I actually broke my hand.

 And so I'm gonna have a couple guest artists, and one of them is Walker from Bespoke Salon.

 So she's gonna show you ladies how to get the pretty party pony on makeup Manda today.

 I'm really excited to share with you guys a look that I think is really exciting.

 And it's got a little bit of some fun to it because it's sleek, but it's also got a little bit of texture to it.

 To start our pretty party pony, we are going to have her hair blown out.

 If your client is naturally curly, just make sure that it's had a nice blowout.

 Now that Amanda's ponytail is secure, we're gonna go through and we're gonna add a second hair tie.

 This is gonna give us some added height in our ponytail and a little bit more security.

 We're gonna start with a ponytail that's a little bit longer than Amanda's.

 So we're gonna start with a ponytail that's a little bit longer than Amanda's.

 Next step, we're gonna section off just a tiny sliver of Amanda's ponytail.

 You wanna make sure it's wide enough to go across all three of our bands.

 And I like to start by smoothing it out and giving it just a little spray so that none of those flyaways get anywhere.

 And then when I get to the end of that piece, I'm gonna grab a bobby pin.

 My favorite trick with the bobby pin is just to take the ends of that hair and just loop it around a couple times for security.

 And you're gonna go right underneath there and secure it underneath.

 And you can even slide it up a little bit just to give it more drama because this is for the party.

 I did flat iron the entire ponytail because I don't want it to be flat.

 Now that we've got the organizational part of our ponytail done, we wanna add a lot of body to make it really fun.

 And then I'm gonna take my tail comb and just press down into that base.

 And that's gonna give us a nice firm foundation and give us a lot of volume at the same time.

 After I backcomb my section, I'm just gonna smooth it out really lightly.

 We're gonna use a little bit of a wider section because we don't wanna see the backcombing towards the front.

 And then just lightly work yourself through the rest of that section.

 Once you fold it over, you're gonna smooth out really lightly everything towards the end.

 Our final step in polishing off this ponytail is just a layer of our favorite hairspray.

 And I'm using the back of my tail comb just to smooth everything out.

 And you girls have to check out MakeupManda's Instagram as well as Walker's here.

 OK, so this is a movie to support the tablature that's been published within the History of the Banjo article and acoustic.

 OK, so I'm going to play through Foggy Mountain Breakdown at a medium tempo, then I'll slow it down and then I'll break it down.

 Right, OK, so we start off with this Foggy Mountain Breakdown roll, which is .

 So nothing strange there, other than the thumb is coming across to the second string.

 Right, so you do that roll in conjunction with hammering on from the second to the third fret on the second string.

 Now if we think of that as a unit, that actually would happen two and a half times.

 And on the third time you end up on the fifth string with your thumb.

 And at that point everything, left and right hand, moves across to the third string, so you're there.

On your right hand, your index finger moves across to the third string as well.

 And at approximately the same time as you arrive at that note on the third string, you hit the open first string with your middle finger.

 Open fifth, left hand off, pinch one and three with your index and middle finger.

 Now, what you're looking for with the pinch is the same volume out of both strings.

 And obviously played exactly the same time, so you get a good strong sound.

 It's a good sound when it's done right, but it sounds terrible if it's not.

 And your middle finger on the left hand is going to come across to the fourth string at the first fret.

 Now your ring finger is going to come parallel with your middle finger on the first string.

 Middle, index, thumb, and then momentarily lift your middle finger off the fourth string.

 And we're going to hammer from the second to the third fret on the third string.

 4 at the second fret, play through the thumb, open first, and bring your thumb across to the third string.

 5-3-1-3, now instead of sliding up to the E minor, this time we're going to go down to the V chord, which is a D.

 And now we're going to play something that looks a little bit like the opening Foggy Mountain breakdown roll, but is slightly simpler.

 So we're hammering, again, exactly the same from the second to the third fret on the second string.

 But this time we're just doing a straightforward roll, leading with your index finger.

 And then we play the Foggy Mountain breakdown roll, at least the first half of it.

 So this is very similar to what happened at the very beginning of the tune.

 In this GoPro tips and tricks video we're going to be making a DIY zip tie cable tie mount for our GoPro camera.

 What this will allow us to do is mount our camera anywhere we want using simple zip ties or cable ties.

 This means that mounting and unmounting your camera is really quick and easy and cheap.

 You don't have to waste time replacing adhesive every time you mount your camera.

 Cable ties can be had for very very cheap and it allows for just a huge variety of different mounting options and quick changes between different mounting positions.

 To build this mount we're going to need a flat adhesive mount, some zip ties, a very sharp X-Acto knife, and then a piece of plastic to back the adhesive mount.

 What we're going to have when we're finished is little gaps on the edge of our mount where our zip ties can go through and we need a backing material that the mount can get stuck onto.

 In my case I'm using an old access card but if you have any kind of old cards or just cut a piece of plastic out of a tub or something like that, that would all work.

 You just need a little piece of plastic that's not too brittle to act as a backing material for your mount.

 Our first step is going to be to cut our backing material to the same size as our mount.

 With that traced out we now have to cut out the backing material so we can do that either using a X-Acto knife or a pair of scissors.

 Then we can check to make sure we've got a good fit and it's covering up all of the backing and then also trim off any areas where there's a little bit of excess sticking out.

 With that completed our next step is to cut out the actual troughs that the zip ties will use to travel between the base plate and the backing material.

 One's going to be for a zip tie going this way and the other's going to be for a zip tie going this way.

 Again I'm going to mark these first with pen and then cut them out.

 Make sure that when you do this you're using the widest zip tie that you want to be able to use with your mount because this will be as wide as the trough will be so you won't be able to fit a wider zip tie than this down.

 If this is dull you're going to have a hell of a time trying to cut through the adhesive backing so a really sharp X-Acto knife will help you out a lot here.

 What we're going to do is just cut through this double sided backing.

 We're cutting through on our lines and then we're going to peel up the parts we want our trough to be.

 Now begins the most difficult part of the mount, peeling the backing off of the base plate.

 With this done we can now see that what we have left is four pieces of adhesive with the T cut out in between them.

 We're now going to go ahead and peel the backing off the adhesive and push our backing material into place.

 We can see that we have gaps for our zip ties to pass through on the front and back of the mount and the sides of the mount.

 To insert the zip tie we just slide it through the cut out and it comes out the other side just like that.

 This creates a super versatile GoPro mount that can be used in all kinds of different situations.

 It can be used to mount to very large roll bar shaped objects because you can put two zip ties together very very easily.

 Best of all zip ties are super cheap and easy to remove and reinstall.

 You can get these things fairly tight so vibration won't be a huge issue but if you want to make the mount even a little bit more secure

 placing some kind of backing material on the back of our backing piece here could help you out a lot.

 If you put something like non-skid or a piece of inner tube from a bike and you glued that on there that could really make this mount just even a little bit better.

 If you guys have enjoyed it please make sure you check out my channel for tons more videos and like the video.

 I do read all of the comments that are posted down there and I respond to as many of them as I can.

 Today I'm going to share with you a recipe on how to make dim sum style spare ribs.

 So, for those of you that are unfamiliar with dim sum, dim sum is a kind of Chinese breakfast brunch kind of meal

 where you go to a restaurant and there are carts that are pushed around with these dozens and dozens of different kinds of small items

 So you end up having this really diverse meal of steamed buns, noodles, or ophul, or chicken feet,

 or all kinds of really interesting, fun, delicious Chinese dishes.

 So, it's a really fun kind of thing to do with a group or your family.

 So there are little pork niblets that are cut into like one inch pieces that are steamed,

 So it's a rice cooker that can also cook a meal at the same time.

 I just got this machine and thought I could test it out using this.

 But I've made this tons of times just steaming it in a steamer basket over boiling water.

 All right, let's go in the kitchen and I'll show you what I did.

 To a half pound of spare ribs, sprinkle about a half teaspoon of baking soda,

 And then place in the refrigerator for about an hour to two hours.

 After the riblets have tenderized, place them in a colander and rinse really well with lots of cold water.

 Next, you're ready to make the marinade, which is really simple.

 and allow it to marinate at least one hour to overnight, which is preferable.

 I thought it might be easier to find than the regular black beans.

 Rinse and wash your rice under lots of cool water until the water runs clear.

 Place the steamer basket on top of the rice and push the synchro button.

 If you're making this conventionally, you would just place the ribs in a single layer

 And transfer them to a plate and garnish them with sliced green onions.

 And I have it over a bed of rice, which is my favorite way of eating it.

 It's very important to tenderize the meat, so make sure you have enough time to do that.

 If you cut them smaller, it'll ensure that the meat gets really tender.

 And I found that the taco worked really well cooking my spare ribs.

 If you cook them conventionally, it'll take about that same amount of time, about 25 minutes or so.

 Apparently when I was reading the instruction booklet, you can also cook stews and soups and other things as well

 My husband and I are enjoying this kind of calm before the storm.

 So, I'm imagining that we're not gonna have much time in the near future.

 take out your package, then you set them up in your baking tray just like this,

 your mussels before serving, you need unagi sushi sauce, comes in a bottle like

Then you'll be needing mayonnaise, Kenko mayonnaise, comes in a bottle like

And I garnish this with fresh cut cucumber and cilantro on the side.

 can see my baked mussels came out really good and looks delicious.

 Jaycee's cookbook is here and yes I'm going to go green green green with fresh fresh spinach leaves.

 That's right Jaycee's cookbook is going to go green totally green today.

Green because it contains spinach yes and we all know that spinach is my

 spinach as we all know contains calcium, iron, magnesium, also contains folate which is very

It also contains lutein which is very very good for your eyesight.

 we all know that spinach is good for you and this particular spaghetti okay which is one of my own

 view or new way of making spaghetti because that is the way it looks and it tastes.

 with me darlings and I'm going to show you exactly how to make the go go green spaghetti.

 For my go green spaghetti we have obviously for the green part of it we have spinach leaves okay

 a bunch of spinach leaves okay and I have washed it and dried it and I've also I've got a half a

 together and mixed everything together and they're in a pot okay waiting to be blanched okay

Now need a little bit of water not too much just a little bit okay

 just a bit just to aid it along because the spinach has water so it doesn't need much water

 50 grams of almonds okay 50 grams of almonds which have been skinned and blanched okay

Then I need garlic cloves around four garlic cloves more than enough

 and what I do is I just just cut it anyway because final product is just to puree it

 into a glorious green lovely sauce which goes over the spaghetti.

 four cloves more than enough one green chilli again goes with the green concept

 there a little bit of mustard seeds probably quarter teaspoon not more

 according to your taste and we just give it a mix and let that be blanched okay

 don't overcook it don't overcook it so that it loses its green beautiful vibrant color no it

 should have its beautiful green color it should retain its beautiful beautiful green color

 trick of photography it's cooked okay so I've got spaghetti which is cooked al dente.

 means to the bite okay and it's probably half a packet of spaghetti it depends upon how much you

This spaghetti has been actually cooked in salted water always always make sure that your

 spaghetti is cooked in really really salted water and also probably two to three teaspoons of oil

 olive oil which is the best thing and also my spinach is going on well here

 and be very careful that it doesn't stick together the oil will keep it from the strands

 sticking together see now you can see it's all in different different it's not stuck together

 so that's what we need okay so that's cooked and kept aside all we need to do is

 blanch all these together now this is more more or less done and

 when that is more or less cooked this will take probably around a few minutes

 okay we add a little bit of cream quarter cup of cream if you don't want cream okay

 you can add milk if you don't want milk you can add a little bit of water that's all

 really health conscious people I am sure wouldn't want to touch cream

 lovely now I add around quarter cup that's more than enough of cream

 now make sure now the the way you make sure that it's right okay is you check the garlic

 okay the garlic has to be a bit soft and blanched when it's soft and blanched the garlic pieces

 the small small pieces which you have chopped have been um it's a sort of soft and tender

 then you know it's done and then you can go for the next process the next process is to puree

 awesome this is a particular favorite of my husband's when I am when I have a lot of work

 to do and I am short of time I go for this because this is easy simple simple

 little bit of ingredients and usually I do not add the cream because I'm well we are all very

 health conscious so we don't add the cream but if you want to add the cream go ahead be my guest

 okay now this is done and what we do here is all I have to do is actually

 switch off the heat and wait it to cool once it's a bit cool you can either puree it in a blender

 or you can puree it with your hand held emulsion blender anything okay it's just that it has to be

 blended into a nubbly nubbly sauce it shouldn't be smooth not not too smooth it shouldn't be too

If you access the AC low pressure service port, you will see the AC low pressure service

If you accidentally select the wrong port, you'll know as the snap connector on

 side AC service port, attach a pressure gauge to verify the proper refrigerant charge.

 too low, then the system needs attention and the Enter Freeze RTO product should not be

 Now that the vehicle AC has been running for 15 minutes or so, capture if needed the central

 vent temperature with a digital laser or static probe sensor placed in the center vent.

 4, prepare treatment tools and materials on a stable service cart or workbench.

 of the vehicle with a clean service towel to prevent any scratches or drips.

 want to have any of the Enter Freeze RTO come in contact with the vehicle's paint or

 the collar and bleed the line into a clean container until a steady stream flows.

 Step 7, attach the snap connector of the injection gun onto the low side AC service port.

 full compressive strokes, dispense 6 full pumps for a single system and 12 full pumps

 Step 8, allow the vehicle's AC to run for a full 20 minutes to fully integrate the Enter

So I'm going to be doing this look, one with hot pink lips and one with nude lips.

 I'm going to take a primer that's silicone based so it'll fill in all my pores that are noticeable.

 Now I'm taking two types of concealers, one in a stick form for around my mouth,

 Then, instead of a foundation, I'm using a concealer for a more full coverage, but still light feeling look.

 And this was the Almay Smart Shade Anti-Aging Redness Corrector in the shade 20,

 I'm using that same brush and the MAC Studio Tech Foundation in NW25.

 And you can just buff that in in circular motions for a more natural look.

 Okay, so we're going to take a blush, and this is going to be Hervana by Benefit.

 It has a bunch of really warm, nice colors that when you swirl them all together,

 Then I'm going to be taking my Shimmer Strips by Physician Formula,

 and I'm taking the top lightest shades and using that as a highlighter with my MAC 224 brush.

 Then I'm going to bronze up my face with a little bit of bronzer.

 This is Lush Light Bronze from MAC, and I'm using that exact same brush.

 That would be your cheeks and your temples and basically a three.

 Then I'm going to take MAC's Wedge and put that into my crease using a Sigma blending brush.

 And you just, this is all it is for the eyeshadow, really, on the crease

 You don't really want any color because we're going to be focusing it on the lips.

 Then I'm going to take MAC's Down Brown with a smudgy brush from Glow Minerals,

 and I'm going to put that underneath my lash line and on my top lash line.

 Now you can smoke it out even more or you can just leave it like this.

 And then I didn't record this part, but I also put a little bit right into the crease.

 Next I'm going to take this Maybelline Color Tattoo, and this isn't too cool,

 And I'm going to highlight the inner corners of my eyes to make them really pop.

 And then I'm going to be taking my Wet n' Wild Single Eyeshadow in Sugar

 with that same flat eyeshadow brush, and I'm going to put that into my inner tear desk.

 And then you're going to blend that in a little bit with that same brush.

 Now I'm just going to fast motion do my eyebrows, and they're done!

 Instead of using a black, I'm just going to tightline and line my waterline.

 Then I'm going to apply my Ardell Lucky Lashes, and I love these!

 They're so easy, and I will have a tutorial on how to put on eyelashes.

 So I hope you guys enjoyed it, and have fun swimming in your pool for the summer!

 Hi, this is Deb from CraftyDeb.com and today's tutorial is about how to form the heel on

 I just finished row 13 which is half double crochet in 8 stitches and then you turn.

 We're going to be working the 8 stitches here from the half double crochets we already made

 Ok now from here we're going to single crochet in the first stitch and then we're going to

 Now the next thing we're supposed to do is half double crochet over the side edge of

 So we're going to put our yarn over like we're going to do a half double crochet together.

 And we're going to pull up our loop along the side of that half double crochet.

 We're going to yarn over to make our half double crochet 2 together.

 And we're going to insert it along the edge of the half double crochet in the row before.

 And then we're going to chain 1, turn, chain 1, and we're going to single crochet across.

 And we're going to repeat that half double crochet over the edge.

 Just working back and forth and working along the edge and the next stitch together.

 I will finish up that heel and show you what it looks like in just a moment.

 Row 17 and 18 was just repeating rows 15 and 16 until you have 13 stitches.

 And we're about ready to start on row 19, which is the end of the heel.

 And then do our last half double crochet together along the edge of the work we're doing.

 And this is where we're going to begin working in rounds again.

 And then we're going to single crochet together over the last stitch in the side edge of the beginning of the round.

 And just like before, we're going to just go along the edge here on the side of the stitches.

 So our next stitch is going to begin right up here on the first stitch of the round.

 And then from here we're just going to do our rounds to get the length for the legs.

 Hi you all, once again welcome to Let's be Foodie Cooking Channel and today we are going

 And I am going to add the sliced potatoes in hot boiling water.

 Now turn off the stove and take it out in a plate lined with a paper towel.

 You can grease this with oil, butter or you can also use baking spray.

 Now I am going to bake these sliced potatoes on 375 Fahrenheit for about 12 minutes.

 I have taken it out these yummies after 12 minutes and let it cool down then we will

 These sliced potatoes taste so yummy, cheesy and very easy to make.

 So do try this recipe and let us know how it turned out for you.

 Put your comments below in comment section and if you like this recipe give a thumbs

 Like and subscribe today to Let's Be Foodie if you haven't yet.

 You can also follow Let's Be Foodie on Facebook, Google+, Twitter and Pinterest.

 Hi, I'm Demna from Learn to Kayak at Ontario Sea Kayak Centre in Parry Sound, Ontario.

 A Scramble Rescue will save you the time of inflating a paddle float.

 It's fast and it can be used in all conditions except breaking waves, if you practice.

 Lay flat, kick your legs behind you and launch up over the back deck, bringing your belly

 Use your paddle as an outrigger and pull or hop along the back deck to the back of the

 Use your paddle again as an outrigger behind you or scull to get back into the kayak.

 If you practice to improve your balance, it can be used in all sorts of conditions including

 Okay, today what I'm going to do is I'm going to use my new oiless deep fryer to roast a

 These things were originally designed to deep fry turkeys without using $35 worth of oil.

 But anyway, when I went to the store they had some nice looking fresh duck and I thought

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to take this duck, I've already washed it off, and

 one thing I want to do is I want to make sure I kind of drain it off real good.

 So a few things I'm going to do, because I want the skin to be crispy and I want it to

 I'm just going to show you one side but I'm going to do both sides.

 And we're going to make some marks in the skin because by marking the skin it'll help

 Now another thing that we're going to do is we're going to put this thing in the refrigerator

 It's better to put it in the refrigerator for four or five hours without any plastic

 wrap because the refrigerator is really dry and that will help dry the skin.

 Then I'll put it, when I get done I'm going to put it in the refrigerator for about an

 Okay, so my duck has been in the refrigerator for about an hour.

 You can make your own or you can season it Asian style like a five spice powder or hoisin

 Now in the bottom of this rack that they provide for frying is I made a layer of potatoes.

 Now I've got a dilemma in how am I going to get this duck to set up in here because if

 I'm not sure how that's going to work but anyway I'll play with it and I'll make it

 I coated it with oil a little bit and let it burn off for about 10-15 minutes, kind

 It's setting in there and I'm just going to keep an eye on that meat thermometer and see

 By looking at my thermometer I'm probably two-thirds of the way done cooking or a little

 What I want to do is I want to turn my duck about a third of the way around just in case

 Then the last third of the cooking they recommend you put this cover on here and that should

 You don't want to put that on too early or they say it'll burn.

 What we're going to do is we're going to go ahead and turn this off.

 One thing I did do, I did put my little thing on top a little faster or too late.

 When I did put it on the skin started crisping up a lot faster but I probably should have

 Anyway, the total cooking time has been just over an hour, about an hour and 15 minutes.

 We're going to let this thing sit over here and rest for a little bit.

 Now one thing, they don't, this thing here is not food safe so you have to put like a

 foil liner in there if you want to use the grease or drippings for anything.

 I'm definitely going to use that duck fat to cook some potatoes.

 As you can hear the moisture left over from the cooking process, moisture's cooking out

 Hi Samorin Lovebugs, today I'm going to show you how to fix a broken SD card.

 So as you can see it says the cards right is the protective switch is set to lock.

 So the thing is that my SD card little thing that says lock it broke off and I was devastated

 because I have a lot of stuff on here on this SD card and I wanted to remove them

 so I can have more space and so I wouldn't have to throw away this card which I didn't purchase that long ago

 and it's actually 16 gigabytes and it is an extreme so it works pretty darn fast.

 So that's it, so that's the little groove and next you're going to get some scotch tape.

 I didn't have scotch tape so I used some regular boxing tape and just cut up small pieces.

 Once we've done that we're going to go ahead and use that tape and cover over that little part that I showed you a few minutes ago

 and just make sure you don't get any of the metal parts that have to go into the camera

 We've covered that up and then we're going to go ahead and test it out.

 We're going to put it in our camera just like so and let me turn it on.

 This was my first time trying this out and look it's not giving me that message anymore.

 If yours sticks out this far, which is basically all the way, you can actually just pull this

 I'm going to show you how to get this together back in without having to take it apart.

 To pull the door out, if you look in here, there's a little tab.

 If you've got something like this, or like I've got, with a hook on it, get in there

 If you look in here, you'll see the tab I was telling you about right here.

 The sign making techniques in this video were all demonstrated by Michael Blomquist, master

 sign maker and owner of the Hayward School of Dimensional Sign Making.

 First remove the non-essential border around your design from the mylar backing, keeping

 Carefully position the tape over the stencil, being careful to minimize bubbles or seams.

 A smaller piece of transfer tape may be needed to finish the job.

Run the squeegee over the surface as shown in smooth, even strokes.

 An even more effective tool is an ink spreader, which is a hard rubber roller.

 Once the transfer tape is attached and rolled, flip over the stencil to remove the mylar

 When trimming the transfer tape, leave an inch or so on either side to give you room

 Next, flip over the stencil, sticky side down, and get ready to position it over the sign

 Once you're sure it's properly aligned, push one side down and slowly ease your way across,

 Once again, use your roller to adhere the stencil to the sign foam.

 Once you've rolled the entire surface, remove the transfer tape.

 Hold the tape at a shallow angle, where you do not remove any of the stencil as you go.

 A good way to define the cutout area of the stencil is to apply a light coating of stain.

 First, lightly dampen a clean rag or paper work towel, then dip it into a dark stain.

 Then, quickly wipe the surface of the stencil until the outline of the cut areas appear.

 After the surface is lightly stained, take another wet rag and quickly wipe off the excess.

Mark Rosenberg of HowToStretch.com and today we're going to work on some iliotibial

 It's going to help stretch your back and it's going to help some people who had a little

 I got a few emails regarding some of the stretches you may need to get into a seated balance

 One of the biggest things that people will find is there's a lot of restriction on the

 You take your foot and bring it up to roughly the height of the knee.

 For some people, they're going to find their legs out here and just holding it in that

 If you're a little more advanced, one of the things I like to do is to take this foot and

 Again, my lower leg is parallel with the floor and I'm pulling it into my body as I straighten

 Then from here, you can rock your hip from side to side to loosen up the hip and the

 upper part of the leg on the inside and a little bit on the outside as well.

 If you want to try something a little more advanced, you can release the foot and just

 Once you have the stretch to get your foot up that high, there's going to be less stress

 It may be just necessary just to have this lower leg parallel with the floor and to stretch

 The longer you hold it, the more you lengthen the muscle, the more flexible you'll get.

 If you just stretch and let go, your muscles really don't lengthen.

 The goal is to lengthen the muscles so you have your full stretch and full extension

 In last week's video with the balance, if you're falling, it's hard to just practice

 When I was younger in our karate school, we used to put a piece of red tape on the wall

 From here, just to reiterate what we did last week, we grabbed hold of both feet, we extended

 Again, if you can only go halfway out to hold it just for balance, that's fine.

 At first, we're working on loosening up different muscle groups and we're working on balance.

 We're going to work on standing balance and that's coming up soon.

 You know, it's great to have a meal cooking while you're enjoying yourself.

 And also it's so easy when you're camping and you can go to the shop, grab a couple of things.

 You know, sit down, have some lunch, chill out, relax for a bit, enjoy cooking with fiends.

 And later on we're going to throw in some bread rolls, some tomatoes and some mushrooms.

 And while we're doing that, we're going to go for a spot of fishing.

 Or wherever you're going to go fishing, you're going caravanning.

 All right, you guys, check out our videos on YouTube, Facebook page, whatever you like.

 Make sure you follow us, or even shoot over to Southern Metal Spinners and grab yourself a camp up with a mate.

 Hi, I'm Heather Mariana and welcome back to another episode of Beauty U. Today's episode

 is all about seaweeds and how to incorporate them into your beauty kitchen.

 I'm going to show you how to make three amazing masks with very simple ingredients, so let's

 The first mask I'm going to show you how to make is a very simple sea kelp mask.

 You can get this at any whole food store because it's vitamin packed with A, B, C, all the

 So all you're going to need to do this very simple mask is three teaspoons of the powder

 One, two, three, and then you're going to use some olive oil gel or you can use real

 One big teaspoon of that and then you're just going to mix it until it's a nice consistency

 Now what I usually do because it does get pretty thick and I like my mask to be very

 nice and fluid so I can brush them on with a fan brush, I usually add some olive juice

 And just keep mixing until you have a nice paste and keep adding the olive juice.

 And you're going to have a nice paste that's very easy to work with.

 So you're going to add a little bit of olive oil gel or you can use real olive oil gel

 And you're going to have a nice paste that's very easy for you to spread on your face.

 I would leave this on for 30 minutes, let it dry, enjoy a glass of wine and next up

 So the second mask I'm going to show you how to make is a super simple kelp mask.

 The reason why I like this mask is it's packed, packed in vitamin A which is a huge

 It's a very simple mask, you only need two ingredients, water and some kelp powder.

 So what you're going to need to do is just take some kelp powder, put it in your bowl

 and then you're just going to mix some water until you have a paste that's good enough

 Now I know a lot of people don't have the time to put all these masks together themselves

 and I get a lot of tweets and a lot of Facebook messages so I did want to talk really quick

 about a product that I did find and they're a sponsor of the show, it's Zita Body and

 you can go to ZitaBody.com and you can find all these amazing pre-made seaweed and clay

 So if you want all of the advantages of this but you just don't have time to make it, I

 So this is it, you're just going to keep adding water because it is going to dry up a little

 Again I recommend 30 minutes with your favorite glass of wine and then rinse it off with lukewarm

 The last mask that I'm going to show you how to do is my favorite.

 It is jam packed with vitamin E and we all know that that helps banish those dark under

 It's when I usually do it and it's my, I call it my Sunday morning mask.

 You're going to need some yogurt and you're going to need some honey.

 I always go one, two, three and you know that if you watch my videos on HeatherMarianna.TV.

 This mask I would leave on for about 15 minutes and I would put it heavy under your eyes,

 You can put it all over your face but I usually just do it under my eyes and around my cheeks.

 And if you don't like the smell of seaweed, I know some people do, some people don't,

 you can add to any of these masks a drop of your favorite blend, floral blend, lavender,

 whatever kind of oil you can pick up at Whole Foods or you can pick it up on ZetaBody.com.

 So I'm just going to add a couple squirts of this floral blend because it's going to

 Again, just put it on your face, under your eyes, all over your cheeks.

 You can make a big batch of this and it will stay good in your fridge for two or three

 So today I've shown you how to make three amazing seaweed masks.

 If you watch HeatherMariana.tv, you can see my bath bomb recipes and you can also add

 seaweed to your bath bombs to make your bath water detoxify your skin while you soak.

 You can also add seaweed to your clay masks, any clay mask that I've shown you how to do

 I'm Heather Mariana and thank you for watching another episode of Beauty U.

 For more tips and tricks, click on HeatherMariana.tv and don't forget to follow me on Twitter

 I'm using one round scoop which is 210 calories, 6 grams of fat, 8 grams of carbs and 32 grams of protein.

 Okay next I'm going to add in my coffee and this is Taster's Choice Columbia.

 And you can use almond milk but for calories sake I'm just going to use some water.

 I don't go more than that because then it just is too big of a curl,

 Now what I like to do because I don't like really bouncy curls,

 So in the case of an E major 7, what you want to do is to try and create some motion within

 that one chord, just not having to sit there for several minutes.

 And these chords, these kind of open chords are great for that because you can bring in

 sort of specific parts of that E major sound, you know, and get the sense that there's some

 So within an E major 7 sound, I could use this chord from the root, you know, to give

 So basically it's an F sharp with B in the bass over E. But what you end up with is the

 And that, excuse me, that would give you the sixth, the third, the sharp 5, and the major

 That would give you the major third, major 7, the sharp 9, and the sharp 11.

 So it's like a, you know, it's a major 7 sharp 11 chord, but with a sharp 9 in it.

 Like a sort of Lydian sharp 9 sound, I guess you could call it.

 So now you have, you know, a lot of different colors that you can...

 And what's always nice is when you get these kind of third relationships.

 This is anywhere you go, no matter what the occasion is, no matter what you're wearing,

 no matter what you're doing, this is where you start and this is where you finish.

 I will literally stand in posture while waiting for the bus or I'm waiting to cross the street

 And it will just become in your muscle memory and it's a beautiful way to present yourself.

 You want to check in the mirror and make sure, unless you're like Jacqueline where you're

 a little bit hyper-extended, you want to make sure those ankles are touching.

 Now from there, you're going to pick one foot, the right or the left.

 You have your toes and heels together and you're going to step back on one foot or the

 And you're going to step back and you're going to place that foot at a 45-degree angle.

 So when you go through your posture checklist and you get to R, really straight knees, and

 E, evenly distributed weight in your feet, that is on your back leg because your front

 If you have weight on your foot, you're not going to be able to pick it up.

 Now you're going to place your front heel right about at the ball of your back foot.

 And for you at home, you look in your mirror and you want to look and see what is most

 Okay, it might be more comfortable to have more space between your feet.

 You're going to take that front knee and you're just going to rock it back and forth, side

 So your knee is bent and you're going to move that knee from side to side, side to side,

 So you're going to present your heel ever so slightly, that front heel.

 You're going to open your toes and present your heel ever so slightly.

 So you stepped back, you opened your toes, you have your heel at the ball of your foot,

 and you're going to present that heel forward, open your toes ever so slightly.

 Now the other thing, that front knee is bent because we have no weight on it.

 The ball of your foot is where we bent in half, where we bent our toes in half.

 That front knee is bent and you are moving it side to side, to side, to side, and you

 You don't want any space, you don't want any light between your thighs.

 So that's why we're doing open, cross, open, cross, and we finish crossed.

 Because I don't feel that that right heel is at the ball of the left foot.

 It's got to come, and you've just got weight on your front foot also.

 This is a guaranteed way to lose pounds off of your legs in a matter of seconds.

 I'm going to stand with my toes and heels together, and I'm going to have Laura place

 And as I move into posture, I'm going to have her leave her hands there.

 I've lost probably at least two inches off of my legs simply by making a small postural

 Really straight knees and evenly distributed weight on that foot.

 You don't want to get into this just because we stepped back on one foot.

 Now, when we're in posture and we've like relaxed that and the thighs are over each

 Because for some, it's to put your hips on a diagonal and turn your shoulders front.

 This will probably end the week of festivities although I'll probably wear it for Sunday

 We're going to use some club soda, this is going to lighten it up and in my opinion dilute

 a little of the potency and we're going to use a half ounce of lime juice.

 I just squeezed it early but it's right in here, it's just a half ounce in our little

 measuring cup and we're going to throw that in a rocks glass, they call for an old fashioned

 glass so you can debate the difference, it's really one or two ounces, I'm not worried.

 We're going to shake that sucker up with some ice and we're going to get going, let's do

 So this bottle is going away fast, I've had it for like, well I think, I've used it pretty

 much for the last two weeks, we're almost half way down, past the letters, that's rocking.

 Let's go with the creme de menthe, this is dangerous, it has three quarters of an ounce.

 My opinion, that's pushing it because creme de menthe cuts through everything.

 You add an ounce of this and you're probably going to be drinking mouthwash, so don't overdo

 That's all we're going to need to shake, you don't want to shake the club soda unless you

 color alone, I just found that the last recipe of the pot of gold, besides having a good

 This is going to fit a certain type of person that likes a little mint, and really you have

 Now we're going to throw some club soda, it calls for two to three ounces, realistically,

 keep adding it until it gets to the right potency level that you want.

 It smells a little floral action from the gin, but still minty.

 Now when I first tried the recipe, I found that it was a little intense, I threw in a

 little extra club soda, or whatever this is, club soda, and it brought it down just a hair.

 Let it sit for, I'd say two minutes, let the bubbles, or you can stir it yourself, let

 But overall, kind of balanced sour and mint, you don't really taste a lot of gin, so if

 you like sours, and you like mints, which normally I think it's the other way around,

 normally mints and sweets go together, if you can deal with that balance, then you might

 I'm your host Derek Shomer, and we're teaching you how to drink.

 You know, and of course, a third of the price that Snap-On wants for theirs.

 There was a Cornwell man that come around and he had the ability to sell ice cubes to

 I thought I had everything that I needed, but I didn't have that.

 And of course, I'll have to go ahead and pull the caliper support off of it.

 Once that's off, you can look at it and see that it was in pretty bad shape.

 And of course, you can check the bearings where you got it off.

 When I worked at the dealership, when I had an impact wrench close by, I would just hammer them on tight.

 I remember one of the students said, well what's the torque spec on this?

 I'm going to do installment two of the Ted Green Blues page I did last month, the Blues

 Today I'm going to do the second half of the page, which is a Blues in Bb, similar to the

 Just a second, I'm going to demonstrate it for you and then spend a little bit of time

 going through it and talking about what kind of choices Ted was making there so we can

 The top of the page is called Blues Progressions and again you can find it at TedGreen.com

 Of course Ted always encourages anticipations and fingery things in the right hand to get

 On this page there's a few encouragements to slide into chords and sustain certain pitches

 As we go through it, take a look at each bar because there's a certain logic not only to

 And I'd like to point some of those things out and encourage you to play them and discover

 Now it's interesting, he's playing a Bb7 arpeggio from the b7 in the bass and a Bb7 arpeggio

 from the root in the melody with accompanying notes in between sounds like this.

 An Eb7b9 chord, excuse me, just an Eb9 chord with the b7 in the bass.

 He approaches Bb7 from a half step above and you get a beautiful contrary motion there.

 That's Bb7's companion minor in 2nd inversion followed by Bb in 1st inversion so we get

 Then we approach the 4 chord Eb by a half step with this E13 chord.

 Eb9 again another inversion of that, a beautiful voicing here of it.

 And then we continue with the 4 chord and then 1 diminished in 2 different inversions

 Now what's happening there is Db13 in bar 8 is approaching the 2 chord C7 by a half

 Then we have C7, a little bass movement there, then the 5 of 2 which is G7 sharp 9.

 Then back to 2 dominant, then 2 approaching 5 from a half step.

 I'll try and do a few little variations, see if I can spruce it up a little bit.

 If you like this kind of stuff, feel free to get in touch with me through my YouTube

 Some people think cake pops are way too hard to make, but I'm going to show you a fast and easy way.

 You can make one from scratch, but it's a lot faster and easier this way.

 The cake has cooled off now, and I'm going to just crush it up.

 Okay, so I've crushed all the cake up, and now I'm adding one container of icing to it.

 You can make your own icing, but again, this is just faster and easier, so why not.

 So I've got the icing and cake mixed together thoroughly, now I'm just going to roll it into balls.

 So I've finished rolling them out, now I'll put them in the fridge to cool and harden while I get my chocolate ready.

 Okay, so you can use a double boiler, I don't have one, so I'm just using a pot of water and a heat safe glass bowl on top.

 You can use regular chocolate chips or different colored melting chocolate.

 So dip the stick into the chocolate a little bit, and then put that into the cake pop.

 And that's very important, if you don't do that, often the cake pop will just fall off.

 And then you'll have to put the whole tray back into the fridge, and then you'll have to do that again.

 So I'm going to put the cake pop in the fridge for about an hour, and then I'll be back.

 And then you'll have to put the whole tray back into the fridge until the chocolate hardens, before dipping the whole thing in.

 So the chocolate has hardened, and now we can dip the whole thing in melted chocolate, and then into one of our toppings.

 So completely submerge it, and then just let the excess melt off.

 And I'm putting them into a box here that I've put holes in, to let the chocolate harden.

 You can also buy special cake pop stands, or you can just get a piece of foam from Michaels or somewhere and make holes in there.

 Or you could even just dry them upside down on a plate, but then it'll be flat on the top.

 My name is JFlo and we're going to continue our Valentine's week.

 The last segment we showed you how to make this adorable heart.

 We're going to take it one step further and use the Martha Stewart Punches.

 These will just create an extra look and create a doily effect to your hearts.

 Here Martha Stewart has left a design on the side where you match it up like this and

 You want to make sure that you take the trash away after you punch it a couple times.

 We half the paper and fold it in the center and we'll staple it.

 I'm going to take this, line up my ribbon and line that up here and then staple.

 And then this you can drape over a frame or you can accent a cute vase with it and just

 drape it over even your mirror in your house to accessorize for Valentine's Day decor.

Today we'll make this nice little basket, so stay with me and subscribe to my channel!

 Turn your paper and score it at 9 and 18 cm without passing through the central area

 So score from the top till the horizontal line and then from the horizontal line of the bottom till the bottom

 Now cut from the upper corner of this flap till the mark you just did in both sides to make a triangle

 Now that the basket base is ready, fold all the flaps to the center

 If you like this project, subscribe to my channel and share with your friends on networks

 Finally cut a strip 2x24 cm long and make some holes on the ends

 If you want to watch how did I make these brads, click right now on your screen or on the link I'll let you below this video

 Hi guys, today I want to share a recipe for homemade eczema cream.

 At this point I turned off the burner, no longer need the heat, and I added some tea

 more oil and mix it around for a long time until I feel like everything is really well

I did let it cool probably about 10 minutes before I poured it into my containers.

 I happen to be using plastic containers so I didn't want to melt them.

I popped them in the refrigerator for about a half hour or so so that they could

 where you want to store it or you can leave it out in room temperature.

 warm your house is will depend on the consistency of this stuff.

 using it about 6 days and his eczema patches are completely gone.

 So I thought I would make a quick video and show you how it's done now

 Here's the one that I always use in my kitchen and you can tell that it's a different color.

 Here's one that we would be shipping out if you order one from our store from our website

 It's kind of a pain, but it's like breaking in a catcher's mitt or

 It's just a process that you have to do before you use the molcajete

 It's not that big of a deal now the traditional way of curing a molcajete

 It's kind of a pain, but this is the way my grandmother would have done it is you get uncooked rice

 You put it into the molcajete, and then you get a little bit of water

 Now the water what that does is it prevents the rice from how do I say turning into shrapnel?

 And that's one thing you want to avoid now the perception is that you're trying to smooth and sand the interior of the bowl now

 That's not the case what you're really trying to do is to excavate all of the grit that has gone

 Into the pores of the volcanic rock that the molcajete is made out of

 So you really need to excavate the rice doesn't do that all all that well in my opinion

 But I figured out another way that works better, so come with me.

 Now it really might take three months for you to prepare the inner surface of your molcajete

 So it's perfect for making salsa, but I've got a really quick method and that's right.

 I even get the back you never know when a little grit will slip into your salsa

 Well we're out here doing something that you'll probably never have to do.

 Just showing you how Rapid Tag 2 is such a help in cold weather applications.

 If you clean that surface with window cleaner or anything else,

 Now if this snow holds up strength-wise, we can get this down for you.

 but you folks should until you get enough confidence to do this.

 and it'll start to deactivate the adhesive on the transfer tape.

 Hi everyone, this is Ben Dunnett from www.learnhowtoreadsheetmusic.com.

 In this 4 or 5 minute video today, we're going to have a look at some of the basics

 I'm going to take you through 3 questions that I often get asked by people, and they're

 And thirdly, how do I learn how to read and play piano music quickly?

 People when they're learning how to read piano, they recognise that being able to read music

 is important, but it's just a tool that they want to master quickly, so that you can get

 on to playing more and more different styles of music, playing as part of a band, whatever

 What I want you to do is think about middle C. I've highlighted this in red here.

 Now middle C is the C note that is closest to the middle of the piano.

 If you're totally new to the piano, the way to find C is have a look at the black notes,

 and you'll see that they're aligned in 2 notes, 3 notes, 2 notes, 3 notes, 2 notes, 3 notes,

 To find a C, find 2 black notes together, and come just off to the left of one of them,

 Middle C is that C which is closest to the middle of a piano or a keyboard.

 Now the reason I want you to find middle C is because of the following.

 Everything above middle C for the moment, you are going to play with your right hand.

 And when it's written down on piano music, this is going to be written on the treble

 Here we've got a treble clef written at the beginning of this stave, and all of these

 notes here coming up from middle C correspond to these different keys on the piano.

 So the first thing you're going to work out when you're learning how to read piano music

 is to be able to read the treble clef and to say that, right, that's what I'm going

 Now the left hand, not surprisingly, for the moment, will play all the notes below

 So it's this combination of being able to use both your left hand and your right hand,

 the bass clef and the treble clef, that make the piano such an exciting instrument to play

 because you can play so many different notes at the same time and make this amazing sound.

 Now my suggestion would be if you're just getting started learning how to read sheet

 music, head over to my site at www.learnhowtoreadsheetmusic.com.

 You'll find lots of free lessons and worksheets and practical activities.

 You can also sign up for my free starter pack, and you can start to make real progress straight

 The second question, if we put all of this together, what does typical piano music look

 Well, here we've got an example of what you'll typically see when you look to read piano

 The top one is normally in treble clef, the bottom one normally in bass clef.

 And remember what we were saying, this treble clef here is telling you what to play with

 your right hand, whereas the bass clef here on the bottom stave is telling you what to

 You'll also see other words and markings, and if you head over to my site again, you'll

 This tells you how fast to play it, this tells you how loud to play it.

 Now the numbers here, which are between one and five, tell you what fingering to use.

 Now it's really, really important when you're learning piano music to get the fingering

 And here you'll see, if you see it on the treble clef stave, the fingering is telling

 you what to play with your right hand, and on the bass clef stave it's telling you which

 So this big question, how do I learn how to read piano music quickly?

 Well I've got this three stage process that I think really works very effectively for

 You do a video lesson or a written lesson, giving you lots of good content, taking you

 And I've put together some sheets to test you, which are both fun and challenging.

 I've made them challenging because I really want to push you forward as a musician.

 But then thirdly, the aspect that so many people miss out when they're learning how

 to read music, and that's to perform what you've learned straight away.

 People sometimes see learning how to read music or music theory as this separate subject,

 It's got to be a key part of what you do when you're playing your instrument.

 If you can try and perform straight away what you've learned, then you will be able to grasp

 To get a head start on learning how to read music with my proven method, go to www.learnhowtoreadsheetmusic.com

 You'll receive free video lessons, practical activities, and music theory worksheets, helping

 you begin the journey of taking your musicianship to the next level.

 What I've found, here in Northeast Ohio the last couple days, it's been 80 something degrees,

 But what I've found that's taken this stuff out is my heat gun.

 Let's go ahead and I'll turn this on and I'll show you this one little spot right here,

 I don't want to heat this up too much because this is the factory installed vinyl on this

 I want to keep this heat gun moving, but at the same time I want to get all this cloudiness

 You can go ahead and kind of stay in one little spot just for a second, but you don't want

 And apparently I either laid it on too thick or it was just too stinking humid yesterday

 I'll show you another section down here since this is real bad.

 I was probably out there for about a half hour, but it's just not taking it out like

 Just in case you ever run into this problem, maybe this will help you.

 I don't have, I guess I could grab my wife's hair dryer and see if that would work.

 But for the $10 or $15 that this heat gun costs at Harbor Freight, it's worth it to

 For curing your airbrush paint, you can do that real quick if you're shooting auto air

 It's not necessary, but it does help speed up drying if for some reason you spray it

 a little too wet and you just need to get it to flash right now, heat gun's a great

 Despite cold, wet, wintry conditions, December marks the start of a very special season in

 Just in time for the holiday season as well, Oregon's crabbing gets underway.

 It's a unique heritage to Oregon as we visit the only commercial and sport crab pot manufacturing

 So come on along as we see and learn what it takes to catch Dungeness crabs.

 Drawn by the bait, Dungeness crabs scurry, then climb into a crab pot.

 The time-tested trap secures the catch until it reaches the surface.

 Fisherman Steve Fick and I have our hands full of fresh Dungeness.

 Building a crab pot, one that will fish and fish well, is a science.

 At the airport crab company in Warrington, they have rolled the steel, welded the weights,

 wrapped the rounds, and woven the mesh into crab traps since 1948.

 There are little things you can do, but for the most part, there isn't a better way to

 Dungeness crabbing dates to the earliest days of commercial fishing in Oregon's offshore

 But inside Oregon's only sport and commercial crab pot manufacturing company, you can see

 Gene Elliott, Paul Shaw, and Mike Gill hand knit the tops, bottoms, and sides of each

 These three men collectively own more than a century of experience building pots the

 The 18-gauge stainless steel wire takes tough, quick hands and a sharp eye to knit the mesh

 Elliott's hands work at a blurry pace, swiftly wrapping the mesh weave, seamless and smooth.

 Those meshes have to be about two inches, and you have to do that quickly.

 It's a component that fills a big void from December until March for a lot of these guys.

 The families live here, they stay here, the infrastructure, the support industries like

 crab pot businesses, marine supply stores, all of that stays in the community, which

 is really key to the viability of these rural areas in Oregon Coast.

 It is also a lot of fun to catch your own and then head to the kitchen where Steve shares

 He adds a teaspoon each of Worcestershire sauce and a dash of lemon pepper before he

 Steve spreads a generous amount of grated Parmesan cheese across the top of each and

 You gotta be in the mood for something rich and robust for a cold winter night.

 Steve is quick to add that even if you don't go sport crabbing, you're in good luck.

 December marks the start of the season and 80% of the harvest occurs during this first

 The next 30 days should also find the lowest prices in the market.

 We have all the details, directions, contact information so you can make your own outdoor

 adventure, sport crabbing right here on the Travel Oregon website.

 Until next week, do get out here and explore the great Oregon outdoors.

So it's Maeve and I know this is like a really awkward visual right now, but I have my camera like propped up on a drawer in a chair.

 So this is the bottom of the stool and then this is like my vanity and stuff.

It's this little flower and I know it's a really, really bad flower.

But I was using my left hand on my right hand so I could like show you.

 And yeah, I'm a righty so I'm going to be showing you how to do it like better on my nails.

 So basically what you want to do when you start with your nails is put on a base coat.

 I actually didn't put on a base coat this time because I used to use one from Rimmel and I really liked it.

 But then it like the last couple times I used it, it like started getting like bubbly.

 So I think it was just time for me to throw it out, but I haven't had a chance to get a new one.

 Yeah, so I'm going to go ahead and show you how to do a flower.

They have lots of polishes like these at Cellular Beauty Supply.

And then for the middle of the flower, I'm using this like pinkish brown color from Sinful Colors.

 And with this, we are going to do, I guess I'll do this now, five dots on our nail.

Like I got an extra line right there, but that doesn't really matter.

 Just because it will look pretty cool regardless, even if it's totally messed up.

 So then I'm going to take my toothpick and starting in the middle of the flower, I'm sorry the lighting is so bad, but starting in the middle of the flower,

Starting in the middle of the flower, you're going to drag into the petal.

 We're going to put the center in and I'm using the vacation time.

 So this is a bigger brush, so it's kind of harder to like deal with.

And you kind of want to make the petals a little bit bigger than this.

 Just because now the center looks really big and the petals are too small.

 But that's why I only did one nail, so in case I need to like re-film this, I have extra nails.

And I'm not sure if I'm going to put this one up or make a new nail, but I guess you'll see.

 So yeah, I hope you guys learned something from this and I'll definitely be having tons of videos soon.

 Hi, today we're going to fit a Radguard radiator guard to the KTM 1190R Adventurer.

 We're going to fit the polished alloy Radguard to the KTM today.

 We also have the powder coated black and those also have the black backing already

 This bike is different, so the Radguards are not the same, but fitting is similar.

 The major difference is that the 1190 doesn't come with crash bars.

 First of all you have to remove the six Torx screws that you can see being removed here,

 You need to remove the crash bars from both sides of the bike if you have the 1190R version.

 Remove the two bolts that hold the radiator in place at the bottom.

 Place the Radguard in front of the radiator and hook the two top brackets over the top

 Once you've pushed the radiator guard down, it will line up at the bottom.

 Now replace the two bolts that you removed earlier and these can be tightened.

 Once the Radguard is in place, you can replace the side crash bars.

 Once the crash bars are back on your bike, you can go ahead and reinstall the plastic stone guard.

 We think the polished alloy coloured guard does look good on the 1190 and the 1190R.

 But if you're after something that won't be noticed, the black Radguard would be a better option.

 You'll be the coolest mom on the block when you make your kids their very own cell phone

 I'm going to show you how to make this no sew project with a t-shirt and the Aleene's

 This is such a fun and easy project with the Aleene's Fabric Tacky Pack that we're going

 We'll be using the Ok2Wash it and the Jewel It out of this tacky pack.

 Now you're going to need to cut a strip, this is about 24 inches long from t-shirt material

 And I've measured my cell phone, the width, and I've doubled that measurement and I've

 added an inch and then I measured the length and added just an inch.

 And that will give you the size of the rectangle that you need to fit your specific phone.

 I have a backing fabric that I'm going to be using for embellishing and then we're actually

 These are just random circles and they're cut into graduated circle shapes beginning

 And I have a few buttons here that we're going to use as embellishments.

 The first step is we're going to finish the top edge of our cell phone sock and we're

 I am working on the wrong side of the fabric, the fabric that you see.

 It's really difficult to tell with the t-shirt material that I'm using because really both

 But if you're using a printed fabric, you'll want to make sure that this side is the wrong

 side and that you're folding your fabric over to the wrong side.

 Now we're going to flip it over to the right side of the fabric.

 And we're going to be applying a bead of glue down this edge and then halfway to the center.

 When you're gluing, make sure that you get a lot of glue in the corners and at the top

 of your project because that'll make a difference when we turn this inside out.

 And you're going to let this completely dry before you move on to the next step.

 I already have one that is completely dry and what I've done is I've come through and

 I have mitered these bottom corners so that when I turn it inside out, it makes a nice,

 The next thing I'm going to do is in the upper part of my sock here where the opening is,

 And I'm going to stretch that t-shirt material, that strip that we talked about a little earlier,

 And then add just a little bit of glue to the bottom and this will keep that material

 I'm going to finish my little flower by gluing the last layer that I have right in the center.

 So I've glued all of these layers together in the center and now I'm going to glue it

 And next I'm going to come in with my Jewelette glue and, whoops, got a little bit much there.

 Those cell phone pouches are also a great way to get your kids involved in crafting.

 It's fun and simple and not to mention, you'll be a pretty cool mom.

 We are making chocolate pizza and we are going to top our pizza.

 We've rolled out our sugar cookie dough and the first thing you want to do when topping

 And you want to go ahead and start in the middle and just keep your spatula down and

 Once you get the Nutella out, spread out, you go ahead and top it with your choice of

 We are using white chocolate chips and you just sprinkle about two tablespoons of white

 We're going to place it on a parchment lined baking sheet and bake it off for about 10

 Be very careful when you're transferring the pizza over to the cookie pan and if it breaks

 Hey guys, here is my tutorial for the fighter by Jukeless Heroes featuring Ryan Tedder.

 This is going to be the more difficult version and I'll post a link right over here for the

 And remember, in all my tutorials, including this one, in the description, I keep tabs,

 chords, strumming patterns, everything you'll need to play this song on your own, okay?

 I'm going to sing it once to you guys and then I am going to explain it detail by detail,

 Then I say to me, say to me, say to me, there goes the fighter.

 Okay, I know, right at first glance it seems like it's really simple.

 At first I had difficulty doing it, but I did it a few times, I got myself ready to

 So, when you're doing it, make sure you have the beat down perfectly and then sing with

 So what I'm doing, I'm going down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down,

 down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down,

 Down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down, down,

 If you want me to teach you guys the rap, make a request, I will gladly make a rap tutorial

 Down, down, down, down, down, down, over and over again on each chord, okay?

 If you have any questions, comments, likes, anything, shout them out to me, ask me, subscribe,

 like my Facebook page, I have two songs on that page that are being voted on for the

 Rock on, keep being awesome, and remember, the easier version for the song, there's a

 Morning everybody, Zaza from Returned Approach Health, Wellness and Fitness.

 And today I'm going to show you how to make a nutritional protein enriched porridge.

 Now first of all what we're doing is I've got the porridge and we put the dry ingredients

 we're going to put in the microwave and we don't want overspill.

 it into the microwave, you can cook with it, make it with sauces and it won't affect the protein.

 Two scoops or two spoons and mix the dry ingredients like this.

 the dry ingredients, putting in three, this is a cup, we're putting in three cups of water

Now yes it is a little bit runny but that's not a problem because it will

If you use a traditional oat you may have to leave it in for three minutes

 but you can judge that and also your water level depending on the oats that you use.

 going to do is we're going to put in what we call a nutritional shake mix which is got lots and lots

 of vitamins and minerals and yes it is some used as a replacement meal but you could actually use

 it for adding nutrition and benefits to meals and your breakfast.

 If you want it to be a bit more runny you can put more water, just add some hot water if you want to

I generally don't add honey, just a little bit of honey in that because

 Okay then if I put that into a bowl, just pour that in, you can see the consistency.

And there's your complete nutritional protein enriched porridge.

 information on our products and services go to www.littletowneapproach.com.au and thank you.

 Okay, to make a caramel mocha frappe, it's very much like a vanilla frappe, we'll take our cup

 We're going to put in, according to our flavor standard, enough chocolate and caramel as per a 16 ounce drink.

 So it's going to be one pump of chocolate and, oh no, there it is right there.

 I'm sorry, three quarters of a pump of chocolate and three quarters of a pump of caramel.

 And for a 16 ounce drink, as you'll recall, it's one and one third scoop of frappe powder.

 And we want to pour our milk and toddy mixture until the ice just begins to float or to the top level of the cup.

 We're going to pour our milk and toddy mixture until the ice just begins to float or to the top level of the ice, whichever comes first.

 Give it a little bit of shake in the blender to help it ease it out.

 You can see the caramel and chocolate, coffee, and the milk are all mixed together.

 We are here at Skatepark Zoomies where I've been skating for a long time and this is the

 It's one of my favorite tricks and I've been doing it for years.

 So you have the front of your board and the back of your board.

 The feeble grind is all about the back truck, the back side of your board getting it on

 You press your front foot down and your back truck should be on the rail and you put all

 At the end of the rail you push your tail a little bit and that makes you fly out of

 Lately I started to pay attention to my diet just because I have injuries and when you

 So I started to eat fruit, more vegetables, more healthy snacks in between meals and it

 What I do during a contest to boost my energy level, I eat fruit, I drink a lot of water,

 I try to eat two pieces of fruit every day and those pieces of fruit contain the yo-yo

 I usually eat the yo-yo apple between meals because that's the time when you need a healthy

 If you don't eat a healthy snack you only want to eat more when you're eating your meals

 So eat the apple between meals and you'll feel full and then you eat less when you're

 My goal in skateboarding is to inspire other girls because I believe you can achieve anything

 It's Colin Daniel from RiffNinja.com and we are going to study beginner's chords.

 I figure if you're a beginner that this is probably the three best chords to start with.

 There's a lot you can play with it and it's a very good basis to add to your knowledge

 You should know that they're 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 from thinnest to the thickest.

 You should know that your left hand fingers are 1, 2, 3, and 4.

 It's G, C, and D. Those are the first three that go together really well.

 I'm using my first finger on the 5th string 2nd fret, the bad finger, the 3rd finger on

 the 6th string 3rd fret, and my 3rd finger down here, way down here at the other side

 Now if you want to do what I was doing, then I just move the 3rd finger over to the 2nd

 string 3rd fret and put the pinky in place where the 3rd finger was before.

 Okay, you want to try and get your fingers at an even arc depending on how big your hand

 You have to work through the chord until you get each string nice and clear.

 If your nails aren't cut properly or they're too long, you might not be able to press down

 There's lots more detail I can go into this with but I'm limited for my time here and

 this is just a taste of what I like to do on my website riffninja.com.

 My 2nd finger goes on the 4th string 2nd fret and that's my 2nd finger.

 Because if you add that E in there, that's one of the common mistakes of a beginner student.

 When you practice this chord, practice by strumming from the 5th string down.

 What I do is I take the 3rd finger and move it over to the 6th string 3rd fret and then

 You'll probably find this one of the easier chords even though it's just for some reason

 because you're on the high strings it's a little easier to get.

 If you're struggling with getting the chords clean try moving your thumb back behind the

 I use the thumb for my bass a lot of times and I've got a big enough hand to get away

 You want a nice even arc here on the chords and your thumb centered behind the neck.

 That will help you especially if you've got smaller hands or weaker hands.

 When they get stronger you can change your hand position if you like.

 But until they do you've got to stay with the thumb behind the neck a little more.

 And if it doesn't sound good you're doing something wrong because these chords are great

 You better check what you're doing because I'm not going to give you anything that doesn't

You're going to need a cake and I have a recipe if you're interested.

 decorate a cake, not that hard, and I find that you can hide a lot of mistakes with

 So next go ahead and fill the inside of the cake with whatever desired flavor

 inside with strawberries, it doesn't really matter what kind of or what shape

 Then when you're finished putting all the strawberries in there, you're going

 some awesome channels that will teach you how to decorate or frost a cake.

 I'm just putting the final touches of the cake, just cleaning it up, and as you

 So usually when I do this part, I just pour the ganache onto the cake.

 and a cookie sheet below the cake when I poured the ganache so everything will

 the ganache sit for about 15 to 20 minutes in the refrigerator before you

 mind what I wanted the strawberries to look like and then halfway through I

 I'm going to have to cut this video and I'm going to have to start playing this bad boy.

 It's been a long time coming, but the reward is definitely worth the effort.

 We're going to go through the two final processes that are going to make your artwork pop.

 The techniques that I'll show you in this tutorial are widely used in airbrush illustration,

 Everything seems to be in order, however it appears that we need to add more vibrance.

 Our colours just aren't as bright as what the reference is, and the brightness of your

 Here, I'm just pointing out the areas that need more brightening, and these are the areas

 And the best tool for the job is your airbrush, loaded with a little bit of translucent paint

 This kills a little bit of the vibrance in the colour, however it is definitely required.

 My strongest recommendation here however, is that you only add one drop of blue at a

 You don't want your artwork's finished face to come out with a baby poo green colour,

 Now using that transparent skin tone colour that you've just mixed up, colour in your

 The most important thing to remember here, is that you're building your colours up slowly,

 You'll spend the least time on this layer, out of any layers that you do in your whole

 And for the highlight layer, we're not just going to use our airbrush.

 I'm going to show you a couple of common techniques used by illustration airbrush artists.

 Some highlights are extremely fine detailed, and depending on your airbrush, your paint,

 or how humid it is where you're airbrushing, you may not be able to achieve that kind of

 Plus, using erasing techniques also prevents any blue shift from occurring.

 Electric erasers are perhaps the fastest way of removing your paint.

 Because of this, you have to make sure that you're very aware of what pressure you're

 Pressing down too hard in the wrong place might mean that you end up with a white line

 Because it's wax based, it's not recommended for automotive work.

 Until I find a water based paint that's going to spray comfortably out of my .2mm tipped

 airbrush, and still provide adequate coverage, I'll just use the Chinagraph for subtle highlights

 Holding the pencil in this way gives more control over pressure, and creates more realistic

 Choosing the right tool for the job at the right time is what's going to deliver you

 Just look at the way that this eraser cuts through the top layer of paint.

 In saying that though, I would like to find an electric eraser that provides a little

 bit more control through variable speeds, and maybe different rubber compounds.

 The Denise tutorials aim to deliver you a quick overview of what is required to build

 Now there's several other ways to go about creating full colour artworks, each with their

 own advantages and disadvantages, at the right time for application.

 So make sure you keep watching, and thank you so much for your patience.

 I'm going to make Carla and Clinton's fondue dipped cheese encrusted sandwich.

 And we're going to use a light three cheese blend rather than American cheese.

 And while our sandwich grills, it's probably a good time to go ahead and get the cheese

 So I used a full fat provolone, but I got it ultra thin sliced.

 They're only 40 calories a piece and they're about the same size as our sandwich.

 Okay, you see how it's getting lacy and you can hear that bubbling noise.

 If you're using a regular pan like I am, you might want to spray it with a little hit of

 See the yoyo just grabs onto the slack in a piece of clothing, in this case my pants.

 You need a yoyo that is responsive, of course, but it helps if it is a really thin yoyo.

 Pretty much any yoyo that is good for looping or for two-way tricks, those are going to

 If you have a wide yoyo, there is not as much there for it to grab onto whatever piece of

 The second thing is that you want to make sure to have some piece of clothing that has

 If you are wearing skinny jeans or clothes that fit you really well, it is actually going

 If your jeans are too tight, then maybe you have a shirt that is a little bit looser,

 if you wear a jacket you can do it with that, and all the principles are still the same.

 To do this trick, what you really want to do is you kind of want to throw the yoyo out

 You want the yoyo to pass right by whatever piece of clothing that it is going to attach

 You kind of want the string to just barely touch the clothing at one point.

 The reason for that is that when you pull the yoyo back, it is going to hit the clothing

 If it is really making the string bend, like it is wrapping around your leg or something,

 then the yoyo may arc around your leg and that is not going to work.

 Again, just get a good arch on it, throw it, and pull it between your legs, just like that.

 If you are doing this in a performance, one thing that you might want to do is actually

 That way they can see the string dangling, because if an audience is watching it, it

 If you take it off your finger, they can see that it is hanging there.

 When you do that, to really make it extra funny, you can feign like you are in pain,

 A lot of times kids will find that funny, sometimes adults will try not to laugh, but

 Make sure that you get a good solid throw, again just let it barely touch your clothes.

 If you are going to do it around your pants, then what you want to do is you actually want

 to bring your hand really close to your pants so it can pass way by, and then come back.

 If your hand is a little bit too far in front of your body, then the yoyo won't go back

 far enough, it won't have the momentum to grab onto your pants.

 Once you get used to it, you can really use it to great effect in shows and performances.

 Well now I'm going to show you how to cook some amazing chicken thighs from frozen, defrost obviously.

 Now they've been defrosting in the fridge overnight, but you can defrost them in water, in a bowl of water,

 or you can defrost them in the microwave to be very, very quick.

 I love using chicken thighs because it's very good value for money and good flavour,

 Okay, very simple, just run the knife against the bone first like that with a very sharp knife.

 Remember in the kitchen, sharp knives are safer than blunt knives.

Okay, just then take the skin off just like that with your hands.

 Frozen food, frozen vegetables especially, retain their nutrition value and it's so quick.

 Imagine I've just arrived home from work, I've got all these lovely vegetables in the freezer

 So it's quick, it doesn't require you to take so many trips to the supermarkets.

 I've got some ginger, very, very good to mix fresh ingredients with frozen.

 Okay, this is fresh ginger, it's going to give me a nice kick that I need for this wonderful dish.

 Just take the seeds out, look at that, all the seeds come out very quickly.

 And when it comes to frozen vegetables, actually those vegetables have already been blanched,

 My chicken has to cook first before we add all the frozen lovely vegetables.

 So a little pinch of sea salt, little bit of pepper and it's time for me to go into my freezer

 Okay, now the garlic, actually I didn't know that you could get frozen garlic

 So to me that's a wonderful way of preserving vegetables and herbs in fact.

 And now look at this, I've got a stock cube here, frozen stock cube, again a product that is amazing to use.

 and now that stock is going to do its job of beautifully flavouring this wonderful chicken

 and it's going to cook my vegetables all in the same stock and this dish is going to be so tasty.

 This gets frozen in four hours of being picked, really, really good.

 but make sure before you do that that the chicken is almost cooked

 because you know what, those vegetables will take about anything between three and four minutes to cook.

 The chicken looks almost cooked so it's time for me to add my frozen vegetables that are already blanched.

 These now are all going to be closed and going back in the freezer because they haven't defrosted

 It's all gone back in the freezer, you don't need to worry about any of that.

 and then you will have the best, the freshest after frozen stir fry you've ever had.

 A little bit of plain rice, you don't need rice to be tasting of anything in particular

 And if your husband or wife came back from work and you had that on the table,

 I think that they'd be quite impressed and you can lie and tell them

 Hey everyone, today I'm going to show you how to make peppermint cake pops.

 cooking oil, a can of vanilla frosting, two eggs, white chocolate melting candies,

Your cake mix, a third of a cup of cooking oil, a cup of water, and two

 Then just put the cake in the oven and bake for 35 minutes or however long your

Once your cake is done baking, take it out and let it cool for at least

Once it's cooled, you're just going to literally take it out and put it

 Then you're going to add the entire can of vanilla icing to the cake.

 Once you're done that, put parchment paper over two baking pans.

 Try not to make them too big because then they're easier to work with.

 Once they're all rolled, just put them in the freezer for about 30 minutes.

 they're freezing, you can just start crushing the peppermint candies in a

 Right before you're about to take them out, start melting your chocolate.

 Let the excess chocolate drain off and just roll it or sprinkle it with

 Then just stick it in a styrofoam base so it can stand up and dry quickly.

 Hi, my name is Dave Watson and I am the director of engineering for AlphaWire.

 to put together a short video on how to strip our ExtraGard 5 cable.

 is a really great cable, but because of this FEP Teflon jacket, it is pretty difficult

 own situation and determine for themselves if safety glasses are warranted or protection

 any debris to fly or anything like that, so I am comfortable without any PPE.

 And ironically, these are coaxial cable strippers and we're not going to be using them on coax

 this tool is it acts kind of like a clothes pin and it has two different cutting blades.

 It's got a cutting blade in the front that's adjustable so you can control the depth of

 cut and you can run this blade along the cable and put a slit in the cable jacket.

 blade is protruding, so when I do a ring cut, it will only make one cut in the jacket.

 fact that you can set these blades to a controlled depth is really a key feature of these tools

 the depth of cut to be not quite the thickness of the jacket, you can make sure that you're

 a feeler gauge so I just kind of experimentally determined how to set the blades to get this

Basically, to strip the cable, what I'm going to do is I'm going

One of the characteristics about Teflon is you can see how the jacket

So, as I take the tool, I'm going to do maybe about an inch and a

 half or so, give it the old twist, bend it at the fracture, and it will fracture nice

And then I can get my thumbnail under it and give it a twist following the

 just to do a little bit, so I'm going to give it just about another length that big, spin

 my tool on it, bend it at the score, you probably even heard it snap there, and take

I am just going to cut it off, get it out of the way so it doesn't annoy us.

 really the key thing on Teflon cables, and actually I do this on all cables, is to give

 the jacket a little help, a little notch to help get the ripcord started.

 which is this yellow piece of thread, is pretty much on top of the cable.

What I'm going to do is take a box cutter, you could use a razor knife or

 something like that, and I'm just going to give the cable just a little slit or a little

 nick right above the ripcord, or right kind of next to the ripcord.

 want to do is touch the ripcord with the blade of the knife because that would obviously

Now, one thing that I'm going to be very careful to do is when I start pulling,

 I want to pull the ripcord, in a Teflon cable like this, you can actually see the ripcord

 side either way because that's going to pull it against the sharp edge of the jacket.

 one other little trick is to pull as straight as you can up the cable.

 grip properly, you can see that I can just use the ripcord to slip the jacket.

 Now, the other thing I'm trying to do is to keep the orientation of the ripcord pretty

So that is a cable stripping 101 using a ripcord on an ExtraGuard 5 cable.

 and I really don't think that this should have gone into a 9x13 pan

 I want to show you how to make one of my favorite cranberry sauces, and it's just in time for

 Although you can enjoy it any time of the year, which is why I like to buy extra cranberries

 in the fall and put them in the freezer, and they're good for an entire year.

 So then when you have a craving for cranberry sauce, you have everything ready to go.

 Now the nice thing about cranberry sauce, homemade cranberry sauce, it is quicker to

 And for the fresh ones, I just gave them a nice quick rinse in a colander.

 I have sugar, and you could definitely use organic sugar for this if you want to.

 I also, as you can see, I'm using 2-Buff Track, because really you don't need to use

 But use something that you would, you know, that tastes good to you to drink.

 You could use Merlot, you could use Cab, you could even use Port wine.

 And then what we need is the juice and the zest from one lemon.

 So I'm just going to go ahead and zest it, which is just taking the outer yellow peel

 off and putting it in here, which gives it so much flavor, because the oils from the

 If you have another kind of zester, it's okay, you can use that too.

 Okay, now that we have those, we're going to slice it and juice it.

 The smell, I wish there was smell-o-vision already so you guys could smell how great this is.

 It almost, you know what, I think the reason I love this sauce so much is because it really

 It's got all the flavors of sangria in it, and the aromas, and so I think that's part of the appeal.

 Now if you also happen to have an orange or tangerine, something like this, a mandarin,

 you could go ahead and put some of the zest of that in there as well, because that would

 You don't want to increase the liquid though much more, or else you'll have a really runny

 And then what you're going to want to do is over medium-high heat, you're going to bring

 And once it's at a simmer, we're going to reduce the heat to low, and we're going to

 I'm telling you, once you have homemade fresh, you're never going to go back.

 And you'll want to give the sauce an occasional stir every couple minutes, just until it comes

 to a simmer, and then you're definitely going to want to stir it pretty continuously the

 You'll see right before it starts to come to a simmer, it'll get all bubbly like this,

 And that's when you'll want to reduce the heat so that it doesn't bubble up over your

 Okay, see, you'll start to notice that the cranberries will start popping open, and that's

 what you want, because now they're starting to release all their pectin, which is what's

 So it looks still kind of runny at this point, but in another, you know, five minutes or

 I just love as all the color starts to come out of the cranberries.

 And if your pot looks like it's going to kind of be close to bubbling over, then you

 Just kind of play with the heat so that it just stays at a nice, light simmer like it

 And you can tell, it's not thick, thick like it was a cornstarch pudding, so it's still

 And what will happen is, because there's so much pectin in the cranberries, is once it's

 So if you want it really thick, you could do it the day before, or you could even do

 I mean, this is the recipe that we make year after year, and it's just a family favorite.

 So don't forget, this recipe and many, many other great recipes are up on our website

 And you can print the recipe right out, and you'll have it just in time for Thanksgiving.

 Hey everyone, Valentine's Day is coming up quick, so I wanted to do a cute Valentine's

 Start with a line of bright pink polish, then do a lighter pink polish, and then a third

 Use a q-tip and nail polish remover to clean up the edges of the nail.

 Now use a thin paintbrush and peekaboo nail polish from Del Sol to draw a small heart

 This polish is really cool because it goes on clear and then turns bright red.

 Because it's clear, it can be hard to see, so when you're drawing it, it might be easier

 You can also do an accent nail that is completely painted with peekaboo polish.

 And here's what it looks like when you go outside on Valentine's Day.

 and when she starts building up more I'll be able to remove these.

 So I'm going to show you guys the basic gliding techniques and moves.

 You have one foot up on your toe, doesn't matter which, start with the right.

 So one foot is up on his toe, the other one sides back, and then you just switch.

 Alright, so one foot is up on his toe, switches, up on his toe, goes back, switch, and the other one goes back.

 So I don't think you'll be able to do it on this kind of gradient.

 So, all you do is, you have one foot up, and you just bring it back, just like regular, like that.

 But while you're bringing it back, you want your other foot to go up on his toe.

 Just practice that, once you got that, all you're going to do is switch it.

 You go back, other foot goes on his toe, and then you do the same thing.

 And, when you go like that, this foot should end up on his toe.

 When you do that, this one, this foot goes back in and ends up on his toe.

 Hi, my name is Joe and I'm going to show you how to boil shrimp on SDI.

 First thing we do is you have a pot of water and you get it boiling, a rapid boil.

 Then you add a crab boil, Zatarain's or any brand, but I tend to like the Zatarain's the

 Put that in your boiling water and let it sit in there about 10 minutes just to flavor

 Then you want to put a lot of Old Bay seasoning, almost the whole can in it because you want

 Once you get the water back to a full boil, you want to take your 21-25 shrimp is what

 we're using here and they seem to be the best for any of the shrimp, but if you like

 One of the little secrets to this is you want to just kind of add your shrimp in a little

 Once you get these in, you're going to time this for three minutes.

 Just three minutes is all it's going to take for this size shrimp.

 Once your shrimp have boiled the three minutes, you want to add some ice to them.

 This just kind of stops the cooking process and it helps the shrimp absorb some more salt

 Once you get that done, you give them one little stir and then you're going to pour

 it in a colander and then you want to put ice on top of that and get it cold just as

 And then you're ready to serve it with some cocktail sauce and lemon juice and that is

 To find out more how-to SGI, visit cstgeorgeisland.com or stop by the visitor center located next

 you do it, you could just use one and put tape around it, but it has to have tape around

So, I decided to put them in groups and you do it however you want.

So, then you want to have somewhat extra since I have no more red.

 to use one of my greens because I have lots of green as you can see and not as many as

So, what I'm going to do is I'm going to line them up where the tape

And then I'm going to set them down on this, as you can see, and then I'm going to

And try not to use, like if you're doing curly, try not to use straight

 can see, I have lots of green and then I'm going to flip it around, like this.

And when you do this, you want to keep all of your strings together and watch.

 want, you want to get your very end or it will look kind of weird.

And then I'm wrapping it around, just so it stays because you don't

 want this to fall apart if it's in your hair and you're at school.

So, you want to, so it's a big loop and you want to connect them around.

 what you're going to be doing is you're going to take each one.

You want to just take an itty bit of tape because your parents might not like,

So, you're going to keep on taking tape and you're going to connect it where you are

Now, this is how your lollipop will look at the end, but it really doesn't

 look like a lollipop because you have to connect it to a stick.

 stick here, but to add some extra detail, I got some straight, not curled ribbon.

 boys and girls' favorite colors, I'm just going to be wrapping it around like this and

 then it's going to make a straight line in the middle and it will go around and around

You're going to go in the middle and keep on wrapping it and then you're going

 to go in the middle of this, keep on wrapping it so it looks kind of like jumbled up.

 so it looks kind of jumbled up into a lollipop, kind of a rainbow lollipop.

 middle, you're going to keep on wrapping it and then at the end, tape it like that.

 and just setting it there, taking some tape and just setting it there.

 of the biggest misconceptions in motocross relating to technique and that

 they're both very important but most people think the front brake is more

Well of course you have more stopping power with the front brake but

 you can't really use that stopping power if you're not using the rear brake

I extracted a few clips from one of my technique DVDs to explain this

 technique DVDs that you can also stream so check them out at motocrossdvds.com

 These techniques that you're going to see would apply on this hard

 surface mostly you can see it more on this hard surface racetrack but it's

 is in a berm corner where you get the front tire in the berm then what I'm

 talking about in these clips aren't really going to apply but other than

 that are going to apply on big bikes small bikes two-stroke four-stroke this

 I realize we already covered braking in DVD number two of this series but

 braking is so important that it's worth covering again here in these flat

 sliding the bike that's something that I talk about a lot using the back brake

 hard enough that you get that drift slide going with the rear wheel allowing

 the front wheel to track straight so you can use the front brake as hard as you

Here you see it again shutting off at that marker right there fourth

Drift slide it into the corner put it right inside the marker where I want to go.

 Now if I do not use the rear brake to give you an example shut it off in the

 same place and it's all front brake no rear brake the back wheel just follows

 the front wheel and I cannot use the front brake very hard or the front end

 with knife and slide right out so you see right there I'm shutting off the gas

 same place not using the back brake just using the front brake back wheels

 following there's no drift slide I'm doing all the steering with the front

 wheel and holy cow that thing is going to slide out if I put that front brake

 on any harder than that and I missed a mark go outside the corner.

 a good picture of it on the left all front brake on the right the correct way

 now here's what it's like with all rear brake and no front brake shut knock in

 the same spot all rear brake no front brake I get the drift slide going but I

 don't have a stopping power and I still miss the corner see here coming in shut

 off at the same spot downshift downshift twice so I get in the second gear and I

 can apply the back brake and get that drift slide going but without using the

 front brake I have no stopping power the bike I can't slow the bike down enough

 and I go outside of the corner I can't stay on the inside of the cone marker

 Hey y'all, so today I'm going to show you how I got these big bouncy, heatless curls

 So you're going to need flexi rods, hair ties, a boy brush, and a styling product.

 So first I'm going to figure out how I'm going to section out my hair.

 I have 12 flexi rods, so I'm going to put my hair in 3 horizontal sections.

 We're going to brush out our hair to get rid of our curl pattern because in order to adapt

 Hold it in place with one hand while you wrap your hair around the flexi rod with the other

 And wrap the flexi rod nice and tight away from your face because I like the kinds of

 If you put your hair in a donut and it becomes loose, try to undo the donut and then try

 If you want to buy some flexi rods, check the description box and I'm going to put some

 You can go ahead and sleep and take them out in the morning, but if you don't want to sleep

 Warning, if your hair is even a little bit damp, do not take them out or they will look

 You want to be really gentle with this process to preserve as much curl definition as possible.

 At this point, a lot of girls like to brush out the hair with their fingers, but I just

 Fresh flexi rod curls look a little weird at first, but just let them settle down for

 Just go in front of a mirror and just play with them until you are pleased with the look.

 They're really classy and elegant for a nice special occasion, which I never have because

 Let me know what you think and send me more requests and messages because y'all are freaking

 I always let them go for such a long time because I just hate sitting in the salon.

 I don't know about you guys but like I have no patience for that.

 I mean I don't know I know that I sit here and do my hair but at least I'm like occupied

 She doesn't do it all the way through but I like it so much better.

 Always every time after I get my highlights put in I'm always like oh my god I can't believe

 I let them grow out so bad but when they're there it's like oh they're not too bad but

 So today I'm going to show you guys how to put lowlights in your hair even if you don't

 I mean if you don't have hair extensions already in your hair you could do this with just a

 set of extensions that are like darker or even if you wanted to do lowlights in your

 hair you could do the same thing with just like a set of extensions that are lowlights

 and this is just you know in case you know you want to change your hair color but you

 don't or you want to do a little bit darker or whatever but you don't want to dye your

 So what I have here is I have like a weft and I had my hair dark before so I just had

 this from before like don't think that I went out and just bought this whole weft for a

 couple of pieces, strands of hair extensions because I didn't, because I had these left

 Okay so I take this strand and I'm just going to cut it to the width of one of my clips

 and I'm just going to sew it on like I've sewed on my other clips and everything like

 that so measure it and cut it just a little bit bigger than my clip.

 And then I have a needle and thread that I've already put through here and I'm just going

 So you have a little clip and it doesn't really matter what color your clip is because it's

 Okay so what I'm going to do is I'm going to find a spot where I want the low light

 You want to go close enough to your part but you don't want to go like, I think that's

 See even that's too noticeable because it just looks like there's a chunk of hair there.

 I'm going to put a piece right in here and then you just kind of brush it through with

 your fingers and it looks like you have a low light in your hair.

 So if you have short hair too you just want to cut it to the length of your hair.

 Obviously you wouldn't want a huge long piece like this in your hair.

 But yeah so this is kind of nice and you can even add some to your bangs.

 Just for some dimension in your bangs if you don't want them all one color.

 So what I'm doing is I'm just kind of shaving it and cutting it at the same time.

 So there you go it looks like you have a brown streak in your bangs here.

 If you wanted to buy, sometimes you can buy a small pack of hair.

 If you wanted to get like blonde hair, like bleach blonde hair.

 I know that probably bothers a lot of people but I have to do it.

 So if you want to get bleach blonde hair and then you can get like temporary dyes and put

 And you can do that and add just some pieces like that for temporary fun or yeah I don't

 So I think I'm just going to sport this for the rest of the day.

 And if you wanted you know and didn't want just like one brown strand or one blonde strand

 You can add some hair like right underneath here or like different spots in your hair

 I guess not too many people like the blonde underneath like the dark on top.

 But a lot of people like the dark you know the dark underneath and then some blonde highlights.

 That will really look nice kind of with this kind of technique I guess you can call it.

 But like I would do this just grab a couple pieces like this and then put them all throughout

 my head to kind of make them look like they're everywhere in my hair.

 So I hope you guys like this little tip and I'll talk to you guys soon.

 Hi, my name is Pat McGrath and we're backstage with the lovely Coco Rocha at the Reverse

 And then we started with the Masterpiece Precision Eyeshadow all the way around the eyes as well

 Also I took some of the Max Factor Excess Shimmer in Onyx just around the edges of the

 And then we've also added Max Factor Excess Shimmer in Crystal on the brow bone and to

 So it's a mix of rich browns, coffees, and silvers to give you this beautiful smoky shimmery

 Then we've added Max Factor Masterpiece Glamour Extensions Mascara in Black.

 Many layers on the top lashes and give the eyes extra strength.

 So we've used the eyebrow pencil here in a very light brown and filling the brow hair.

 On the lips I've used Max Factor Color Intensifying Balm just to finish off the look overall.

 So also for a final touch we've added Max Factor Cream Puff Blush in Nude Lone.

 So the whole look is all about a beautiful smoky eye and it's all about these silver

 run around the back, peek through the window, and off jumps Jack.

 needles in both hands, left and right, and you just want to hold them loosely.

Now I'm going to take a piece of yarn that's attached to the ball

 hold my yarn with my pointer finger and I'm just going to slowly and gently slide my needle

And so now what I'm going to do is slide this right off like that and that's

 knit, you just keep repeating the same movements over and over again.

I have my no loops in the right hand, so I just bring that needle through,

Something else that's important for you to remember is that as you're bringing

 your stitches from one needle to the other, you don't want to pull it apart too roughly.

 So sometimes you feel like once you've gotten your stitch all done, and you've peeked through

 the window, you've run around the back, and you're here, you feel like you want to go

 the front door, run around the back, peek through the window, out jumps jack.

In through the front door, run around the back, peek through the window,

 our ThermoChef jug with our lemon rind which has been very very finely peered

Now we're just going to add our lemon juice which has been freshly

I'm using hot water out of the kettle which has recently been boiled but of course you could use cold water for this.

 Okay just scrape down the sides get all of that sugar back down where it belongs

 because we don't want it all crystallized in our sorbet and we're just

 all it's better if you've got the nice fresh lemon flavor and just push down

It easily goes down as you can see so it's all completely wet and then

 into a wide based container and pop it into the freezer to set.

 Okay our sorbet is quite chilled now we're just going to break it up to

 distribute the ice crystals evenly mix it with our egg white and it'll be ready

Mix in with our egg white and we just blitz that on speed fire for

 it's hard to believe that it doesn't have any dairy in it it's that creamy.

 Just decant it back into our container and pop it back in the freezer to

 cooking demonstration of our lemon sorbet and if you would like to see more

 interesting recipes and ideas just check out our Cheeky Richo channel and don't

 more to show you and we're uploading lots of videos every week and thank you

 create a workspace by removing items such as area rugs and furniture

 place the items in the center of the room and protect with drop cloths.

 tape the screws to the back of the object to avoid losing these small parts

 When possible, removing a door from its hinges will make painting and drying

 blending evenly with the surface and remove any dust with a lightly

 apply a mild detergent with a sponge onto a lightly dampened surface.

 I would like try to scoop out the pit, the core of the avocado.

 And my presentation of the avocado wouldn't look so much like this at the end.

Normally you're supposed to stick the knife in and it pulls right out.

 We're going to break the egg and put them in each of the avocado.

 So it's going to be kind of hard for me because they're a little warm yet.

 Okay, so we're going to do an oil change on a 2009 Honda CHF50 Metropolitan scooter.

 Get your owner's manual, and on page 96 you will find a brief outline of the manufacturer

 As you can see here, I put down some construction or contact paper over the asphalt pavement

 so as not to stain the asphalt or the pavement should I spill, which I actually did.

 Okay, so to get started, what you're going to need is a 17mm wrench, open or closed,

 A set of gloves is good to have, a funnel, some motorcycle oil, in this case 10W-40,

 It's a good idea to wait a little while to let all of the oil drain out of the motor.

 After you're done, get the bolt, make sure it's threaded right, take your time.

 Once you get it properly threaded and seated back onto the engine block, take your wrench,

 snug, but do not over-tighten because you do not want to strip it.

 Once you've snugged the bolt back in place, take your dipstick, remove it, get your funnel,

 place it in the hole the engine block is, and then get your motor oil, and then put your motor oil in.

 Now it's a good idea, if you're not familiar, you want to pre-measure 19.2 fluid ounces

 You can take a look at the drain bolt and just make sure nothing's coming out.

 And I can see I've got some oil on my tires, so I'm going to have to make sure that that comes off.

 You know, I guess the jury, you know what, I really wish they had retained the color from last year,

 I don't know why they, I guess, I don't know if it was the super-insurer or...

 You know, I guess I'm going to have to make sure that that comes off.

 Today we are going to learn how to make sushi rice in a rice cooker.

 You really can't use any other kind of rice but Japanese rice for sushi.

 They use a different measuring system for rice there so we converted it to American

 In their measuring system it is 3 cups but we are using the American measuring system

 After you measure rice you are going to want to put it into a large bowl and it is probably

 You will notice here that Mai is putting water in there to wash it of course but what you

 can't tell from the video is that we are actually using cold water.

 It's really important that you have to use cold water for this.

 Please notice that it comes out kind of a milky white and that is of course exactly

 If rice is going to fall out go ahead and put your hand there to prevent it from falling

 Yours truly has dumped plenty of rice into the sink and clogged it up plenty of times.

 Even before we add water again you can go ahead and mix it up like so.

 Our wonderful Japan Housewife model is explaining or showing how to do that if you will.

 Please notice that we are putting in just enough to cover the rice.

 Once again rinsing out the white milky water that comes after you wash the rice.

 Our model here is doing it very firmly but not enough to fracture the rice or anything

 You certainly don't want to go overboard with how rough you are being with the rice.

 But you want to be firm and quick movements to wash it properly.

 She is of course making it look easier than it is to not get rice all in your sink.

 It really helps get the rice to scrub one another and get that motion going.

 Once again some more cold water just to get in there and mix in with the rice.

 And you will notice the water is becoming a little bit clearer.

 Now you will notice I said we converted it to the American Measuring Systems.

 That's why for here the markings you have you want to fill the water up to 3.

 Because 3 in their measuring system is how many cups of rice we have and that's how many

 Now your menu will probably vary a little bit depending on what rice cooker you have.

 You will notice here we have sushi setting and we have the little arrow pointing to it.

 And once you have it on sushi you have your rice washed and the water in there.

 You push the cooking button and in about 45 minutes to an hour you will have your sushi

 To make it the true sushi rice we need to add salt and for that we need to add 18 grams

 This is really important because you can really mess up your rice if you put in too much or

 We are going to mix the third of a cup of rice vinegar with our 18 grams of salt as

 Now for the brown sugar we are going to use a packed 1 quarter cup to mix together to

 And it's the mixture that you mix with your sushi rice to give it that flavor and that

 It's steaming hot and there's the mixture, the rice soup we talked about.

 And before you mix it in you want to be sure to give it the extra mix around.

 Now when you make your sushi rice and especially in Japan what they do because it's steaming

 And what they do is they use the fan to pretty much fan the steam away from the rice while

 Yours truly is going to step away from the camera and help our Japan housewife to fan

 That flickering there is me actually fanning the rice with the uchiwa off camera.

 Now you'll notice we just poured it right on top and kind of mixed it around.

 You'll notice the housewife is doing a mix around and then slicing the rice and pulling

 Now you want to be sure just like when we washed it you don't want to be too rough with

 When you do that and you start breaking up the pieces, really that's not what you want.

 They have a different food they make there where you really want to pulverize the rice.

 And you'll notice here that we're cutting it or slicing it and pulling it around like

 That's to get the rice soup that sinks down to the bottom on top of the rice.

 Hi everyone, it's Christine and today I want to show you how you can make a beautiful custom

 cake for any occasion and you can do it even if you are a very busy person.

 And then you need your Pazzles inspiration and the Pazzles pastry tool kit which includes

 the pastry tool, a pick tool which is very important, also the pastry mat and then you

 need to choose the color of Wilton sugar sheet that you want to use on your cake.

 Once you've brought your cake home, measure the areas that you want to put the sugar sheet

 You can use images that you make yourself or you can use images from the craft room

 And once you've designed them, I really recommend that you cut it out of paper first.

 Often what looks the right size when you start is a little too big or a little too small.

 So if you cut it out of paper and then just lay it on your cake to make sure you have

 the right size, you'll be able to do the process much more quickly and you won't waste any

 Once you're ready to cut, make sure you prepare the mat and there are great instructions that

 But you do want to make sure that you put enough shortening on that the sugar sheet

 Now the sugar sheets come in an 8 1⁄2 by 11 size, but I don't like to use a full sheet.

 And you just go ahead and peel the sugar sheet off of that carrier sheet like that.

 And if it doesn't slide, then I know that I have enough shortening on it.

 And then you're going to go ahead and cut the first part of your design.

 Now I really recommend that you do a test cut if you've never cut sugar sheet before,

 You generally cut sugar sheet somewhere between 15 and 20 on pressure.

 And use your pick tool to help you separate out the cut pieces from the rest of the sugar

 And this is where the pick tool is really nice to help you get those little inner pieces

 To attach the pieces to the cake, you can use some corn syrup and a brush.

 And then take one of the pieces and carefully remove it from the mat.

 If you have a double layer piece like I have here, put some of the corn syrup on the back

 And then layer that over the pink piece before I put it onto the cake.

 And then I would go ahead and continue to put pieces onto the cake until I'm done.

 And here's the finished cake done in no time at all using the Pazl's inspiration, the Pazl's

 I hope you've enjoyed this lesson and that you give it a try yourself.

 Once the floor has had sufficient cure time, it is time to start the grinding and polishing

 When working with self-leveling cements, it's not uncommon to have areas that end up as

 The cement can either end up lower than the top of the divider strip, or the divider strip

 can end up higher than the actual self-leveling overlay cement.

 In this case, we are using a hand grinder with an 80 grit Easy Grind diamond attachment

 We are also using the corresponding grit on the walk-behind grinder, which is called a

 CA40, which is an 80 grit metal bond diamond to do our first coarse initial grinding.

 Here, aluminum strips were attached to the subfloor, which as you can see, sometimes

 It's best to try and use zinc, stainless, or brass strips to avoid this smearing.

 Fortunately for us, we were able to work the smears out with successive passes with the

 After cutting the floor open with our 80 grit metal bond diamonds, we then applied DCI lithium

 We allowed the densifier to sit on the surface, keeping the surface wet for approximately

 15 to 20 minutes, and roughly one hour later, we went to our next step.

 Our next step was to run the hybrid resin diamond tooling referred to as BB5s, which

 is a hybrid 100 grit diamond that really takes any remaining scratches off.

 Once this was complete, we switched to the next sequence of grits with the specialty

 As you can see, by using the Phoenix pads, the floor really starts to take a high degree

 We then proceeded to the white Phoenix pad, which is the 800 grit, and then we finished

 off with the 3000 grit Phoenix pad, which you'll see in the next sequence of videos.

 So you need to consider using specialty pads like this for polishing self-leveling overlay

 And when a polishing job goes well and is successful, that makes for a real happy equipment

 Very popular table fish these days in restaurants, retail, any of those types of set-ups.

 Like the Atlantic Salmon, high in all the Omega groups and oils.

 Yep, farmed in sea cages in the ocean, that's why they get their flavour, because they're

 Today we're going to butterfly this guy, instead of just like we normally do, fillet and take

 a side off, we'll butterfly it, take all the rib bones out, the spine, chop the head off

 As you can probably see, they're very, very fat, these farmed fish.

 Okay, now we don't want to cut all the way through here, we're just going to nick the

 This is really only for display purposes, you don't have to do this.

 Okay, now, when you're chopping through bones and fins, good idea to just give your knife

 a couple of hits, just to get your edge back on, especially when you've got to cut through

 Okay, just give the knife a little sharp up, especially these new knives when they're brand

 new, if you start cutting through bone, it'll roll the edge on them very quickly, so it's

 Now, it's not an easy thing to do, this butterflying, but with a bit of practice you will get it.

 Alright, once we've cleared the ribcage there, it's just one more cut, just being careful

 Now, we just go around this little tail fin here, down to the tail again.

 Now, all we do now, you just try and cut down as far as you can without actually cutting through the skin.

 Now, this will peel out, which is your back section, right like that.

 Now, that's all you've got left of your bone carcass, so there's not much left on that at all.

 It's just like all your other fish, you get in behind the rib cage like that.

 You can leave that there all the way down, a little bit near your tail.

 Now, that's completely bone free apart from tiny little pin bones you'll find in there.

 then they'll fold the fish back over and wrap it up and cook it however way they want.

 But that fillet there, that's basically just two boneless fillets

 that are stuck together for the convenience of butterflying, wrapping up.

 They wrap cord around it and all the whatnot they put inside it.

 Now, there's one more little thing we can do to improve it even more,

 is you'll have a little fine line of pin bones that run through these.

 On all these fish, the Atlantic salmon, your rainbow, your brown trout,

 There's quite a lot of different methods you can use to get these pin bones out,

 If you want these fillets to be totally boneless, you've got to do it.

 Okay, as with all these bones, you can feel them as you're going along.

 You'll do that on both sides, and that fillet will be totally boneless.

 So that is ready for baking to fill in with whatever fillings you'd like to use.

 Hello, I'm Sharon Farber and welcome to Painted Path Watercolor Studio.

 This is going to be my very first video demonstration of painting a watercolor painting.

 This is masking fluid and a synthetic brush to put masking fluid on the parts of the painting

 So I'm going to wet the paper first with reasonably clean water right over the masking fluid.

 So now I'm going to take my pre-mixed background and I'm going to put it on.

 It's nice and even and smooth, but I think it's a little bit light.

 I want the background a little bit darker so that my cat is really going to show up

 Now I'm going to remove the masking fluid using a masking fluid remover.

 I often use my fingers, which works well also, but I don't want to smear paint on it.

 I have painted some of the initial subtle colors on the cat and a little bit of the

 I start with a light green because in watercolor you always start light and then you get darker

 Okay, I've got a lot of the colors in on the plants, bottom layers, and I decided it was

 I mixed up what could be called a black or a dark and I used it.

 All it is is ultramarine blue and burnt sienna mixed together without a lot of water.

 I've got a lot of the composition in and now it's time to really focus in on the cat.

 What I'm going to do now is take the tape off which makes it look a lot prettier.

 So now it's time to clean my palette and palette cover which are a mess and get ready for another

 painting which might very well be this one which would be a 16 by 20.

 Okay, to remove the flywheel here, I have my Harbor Freight Impact Wrench, and this

 Since my flywheel puller won't fit on that bolt, another option is to take the nut that

 Alright, now what I want to do is put the flywheel back in place.

 And as long as I'm at it, I want to make sure after I put it back in place that the

 So what I'm going to do is pull it all the way up and then just snug it down just a little

 Now, just as I took it off, I'm going to cheat a little bit and put it back on.

 But I'm going to also check to make sure that that is tightened to the proper spec.

 Alright as I mentioned, the specs for tightening this nut here, 52 foot pounds.

 For all your wine labeling needs, visit OnlineLabels.com slash Wine Labels today.

 Keep watching for more on how to remove and apply wine bottle labels.

 Some items you'll need for this project are OxyClean to help remove the labels,

 paper towels to dry the bottle off, and a Brillo pad sponge to help remove any additional label adhesive.

 in this case we're going to use about a half a scoop and half the side of the kitchen sink.

 When you agitate it, this will activate the OxyClean, helping to remove the label from the bottle.

 Now what you'll want to do is soak the bottle in the solution for about 45 minutes.

 Alright, so it's been 45 minutes, let's check to see how the label is doing.

 This will help reduce any additional glue sticking to the bottle.

If the label doesn't peel away easily, then let it soak for another 15 minutes or so.

 If there's any additional adhesive, get the Brillo pad and scrub it away from the bottle.

 Next, you'll need to wash the bottle thoroughly so you remove all the cleaning solution.

 Then you'll need to dry the bottle off and get it prepared for the next step.

 Once the labels have printed, you're off to the final step of the project, labeling the bottle.

 An easy way to label the bottle is to lay the bottle horizontally so your legs support it and your hands are free.

 Then peel the label away and apply it to the front of the bottle.

 now this is a shouting lick in the key of Ab and it goes like this

 B okay just to break it down for you my right hand is doing this

 okay and sometimes when I do that I just sit on the Ab with my foot

 now sometimes I also with my hands I throw in a turn which is this

 2nd finger thumb left hand and then we finish it with the 2nd finger

 Hey guys, I will show you two different ways how to crochet the puff stitch.

 show you the usual puff stitch as you already know from books and so on.

 skip the next stitch because we need place and go through the second stitch and pull

 or your loops with your finger, yarn over, go through the same stitch and pull up your

 yarn over, skip the next stitch, pull up, secure, pull up, secure, pull up and go through

 you yarn over and you go, so you always skip one stitch, you go through the second stitch

 and you pull up your loop, then yarn over and pull the yarn through the first two like this.

 Ok, then yarn over, go through the same stitch, pull up your loop and pull through the first two.

 Yarn over, pull up your loop and now yarn over and pull through all the loops on your hook,

So here is the difference, as you can see, this is the usual puff stitch, it's really

Yeah, so I hope this tutorial was helpful and until next time, bye-bye!

 Hey guys, JoeBray here and today I'm going to try to show you guys how to clean your

 So hopefully I'll be putting together a new setup Wednesday or Thursday whenever my parts

 So that sucks but today I'm going to be cleaning out these bearings and put those in my new

 If you get the Bones one, it won't come with a cleaner so you'll need to get some citrus

 So as long as it says that there, then it should work pretty good.

 Alright, so the first step is just take your bearings out of your wheels.

 And before we actually clean them, you just want to kind of wipe off the dust like that.

 Just hit both sides with a paper towel and try to get all that dirt off.

 Alright, then you're going to want to take the rubber shields off of your bearings.

 Hopefully you have rubber shields because metal are a little bit harder to take off.

 Just kind of put it in the end, stick it in, and then try to pop it out.

 Also, you're going to want to make sure you don't take out the back side.

 There's different sides and if you take out that side, all the bearings will fall out.

 If you get the bones kit, it'll come with the instructions so you can refer to that

 And you probably think that's going down, but really once you put it in, then the ball

 Then you put a spacer on, and then the bearing, and just keep going like that.

 Alright, then you're going to fill this up about one third of the way.

 I'm just going to go to the bottom of the bones logo right there.

 So get your stiches cleaner, and I'm just going to keep squeezing it until it fills up.

 Also, you're going to want to try to stay in a pretty ventilated area.

 You can shake it for about 30 seconds, let it sit, shake it some more, let it sit.

 I'm going to go ahead and do it three or four times just to make sure you get a really good

 Alright, so after the first shake I'm going to dump this out, fill it up one third again,

 After that you don't really have to dump it out, but you can if you want to.

 You can see there's a lot on there so I'm just going to let some drip off.

 Alright, now your bearings should be pretty clean and spin pretty well.

 But they're spinning better than they were before for me, so that's good.

 Now you can dry these off and put some lubricant in there if you want to.

 I'm going to run these under water and then I'm going to put some lubricant in there.

 I'm going to run these under water and then hit them with a blow dryer.

 Typically the water will make it rust and will ruin your bearings, but as long as you

 If you want to it is recommended that you put some lubricant or speed cream in there.

 But with most bearings, if they're just like regular bearings you want to put two or three drops.

 Please like and subscribe and also check out my channel for more skateboard related and random videos.

 Maiden Tails come out with another great product, Concentrated Detangler and Shine.

 This is a great new product that moisturizes and helps strengthen, repair, and protect

 Just squirt a little in the palm of your hand, work it in to your horse's tail, and you instantly

 And I liked it before and I like it even better now with this new and improved bottle and

 It's water-based, it's friendly to the horse, spray it on, you can use your fingers wet

 Check out the Maiden Tail products at MaidenTail.com and remember, a well-groomed horse leaves

 Alright, we've got trick rider Denny Chapman with us today, also a singer I see.

 That's what you said at Equine Affair when we met about a year ago.

 We've been touring, training horses, life is good, what can I say?

 You've got some advice for us today on keeping every horse looking good.

 Yeah, we all want our horses to look good and there's actually a process that we go

 Once we've bathed our horse and they're actually clean, we want to spritz them up a little

 We want them to look good and we want to have that final finish.

 And often we want to start with the mane and detangle that mane.

 Now one thing I want you to keep in mind when you're combing your horse's mane is you want

 We're going to make sure it gets down into the hair a little bit.

 And I'm going to take a little segment right here and I'm just going to comb it from the

 Yeah, well you want to saturate it to the point that all the hair gets some of that

 detangler on it so that eventually you can just run your fingers through it.

 So we'll actually go all the way through this mane and we'll start from the bottom.

 I like to use my fingers first because if you just go straight through the comb, sometimes

 And when we use this, we just squirt a little bit in our hand here.

 I like to keep this in the groom box because it doesn't take up a lot of room.

 And how is this one different from the one you just put on here?

 This stuff's pretty neat because it actually volumizes as well.

 So you'll see as I apply this to the horse's tail, I'm going to use a brush here.

 And again, a little tip when you're working on your horse's tail, you want to make sure

 You want to take all the burrs and if your horse has turned out and there's some weeds

 And you can see as we're using this stuff that we're getting some volume to that.

 Is there anything different you should do with the tail versus this part up here?

 Well, no, it's just as delicate and it's probably even more important to be careful because

 Now, it's important when you're spraying your horse, finishing him off, not a lot of horses

 So we're just going to spray a small amount of his body here and we're going to use a

 You can also spray a little bit on your soft brush and apply it in this manner as well.

 Horses usually have a little problem with some things that will attract dust.

 And if you've got your horse out there in a dusty environment, which most of the time

 they are, whether it's in the backyard or at a horse show or performing, there's a lot

 So just a few tips to kind of keep in mind when making your horse look good.

 Well, you taught us some great stuff, shown us some great products.

 Well, you can get grooming tips and learn about products at manentail.com.

 And from the other part of the world, we have prepared a beautiful cocktail,

 It's my dog, and he didn't want to miss Jamie Oliver's birthday

 And I will use fresh mint, three beautiful springs of fresh mint,

 I don't have a mug there, so I will use the other part of the spoon.

 So, for this special, very special day and for a very special person,

 Hey there, I'm Bruce Littlefield for Howdini.com and today I'm going to show you how to reupholster

 I found this chair at a garage sale, actually a set of these for $10.

 You can see why I found them for $10 because they're in bad shape.

 All you have to do with a few things, a staple gun, short staples, make sure that you use

 staples 5 16ths, not 1 inch because you don't want somebody sitting in your chair, and a

 I actually leave the old upholstery on because it gives it an extra little padding.

 You could take the upholstery off, but you have dinner party guests coming and you need

 Then you want to take your scissors, and literally it doesn't have to be neat.

 You can just sort of cut around it, but just again, make sure that you have enough fabric

 Flip that over, get your staple gun, and use good force to get them down there.

 My dad who went to military college calls it a military corner.

 Then before you get to the other side, which is your finishing point, again, make sure

 Now one of the things that you might do so that it doesn't hang down below the chair

 is go ahead and finish off by cutting the fabric as close to the staples as you can

 As you can see, it forms a tight bond to the shape of the chair.

 Then really hit that with your staple gun as tightly as possible.

 It'll actually go right through the fabric, but it'll just pierce it.

 Tighten the last screw down, flip your chair over, and you're done.

 Hi everyone, this is the first video of a series of videos that I'll be making to go

 In this video I'm going to be doing an unboxing on the heat sinks.

 These are what the LED is actually directly attached to to keep them cool.

 For the heat sinks we decided to go with two Makers LED 18 inch heat sinks for the over

 And then we will also with the LED system we'll be making a huge light and with that

 I bought a, I think it's like 4 inches, but it's a little heat sink off eBay.

 We actually got a deal on these through our reef club and so they were a little bit cheaper

 and then we also asked for the hanging kit and extra hardware for more LEDs.

 They give you for every 12 inches they give you enough for 25 LEDs, enough hardware.

 When you carry these boxes together they're actually pretty heavy.

 Just says what's included in the box and I'm just going to try to pull this thing out entirely.

 And then the fan cover and then the actual fan that comes with it.

 I think it's a fan per every 12 inches but since it's an 18 inch it only comes with one

 I'm going to open up the other one which is basically the same thing.

 There's a slot right there for the quarter inch aluminum bar rod.

 It comes with the hardware, end caps, styrofoam, and then the fan.

 Actually I'll leave the fan in here so I can show you what it looks like.

 And again they're going to be tied together with two aluminum rods.

 But I took the measurements and I should be able to get them all in there.

 But since I'll be packing more on here I won't be utilizing the holes for the screws.

 Hi, Christy at the Rata Kitchen and today I'd like to share a recipe for chicken Alfredo

 You bring it to boil and cook about three minutes so it's really fast and easy to make.

 And then I had some leftover grilled chicken, some mushrooms, and some green onions, and

 So after you let your sauce cool a little bit, I'm going to use the Rata Soup Ladle.

 There is another video on how to make it, but you want to, I like to preheat my crust

 So the soup ladle makes it really easy to spread the sauce on your crust.

 And then to that, I'm going to add my chicken that I've cut up into chunks.

 If you want to use non-grilled chicken, another neat thing to do is roll it in flour and cook

 It's just the right size to cut through large potatoes, larger fruits and vegetables, or

 And then to add a little color and flavor, I like to add the stems of green onions.

 And I'm going to bake this in a 425 degree oven for about 20 minutes.

 And that's the chicken Alfredo pizza that we made with the Rata Quick Mix Alfredo sauce.

Disassembly of these pens is very easy and it's actually a very useful thing

 to disassemble them and clean them because as a calligrapher you may use some very dark

 of these and you always ink them up with the same colours, put a little sticker on there

That way you can easily grab them when they're strewn about your calligraphy

 These Pilot Converters can often be disassembled but not always.

 take a little bit of tissue, you roll it up and just slide it in there.

 once you're ready, make sure the little ridges on this spacer align properly onto the ink

 too much because once you put the converter back, you've got a wide opening and you can

 always just take a little bit of tissue that's rolled up and just slide it back in from the

 little blue part or whatever colour it is if you have a finer nib parallel.

 do is you just grab it, you grab the section, you pull out the feed unit.

 in between these metal plates because if you bend them, it's going to not write as

 feed of your saturated inks and then just clean the little plastic part.

 ready to put everything back together, there is a right way to do it and there's a wrong

 you take your nib and very carefully you're going to slide it in.

 to clean this properly because there are little ridges everywhere behind which ink gets trapped.

 So, I was only kidding when I was talking about execution, you know.

 that done, dry it off with a little bit of paper tissue or something like that.

 your converter or if you do, you know, use cartridges, put in your cartridge.

 Hi, I'm Billy Garcia, owner and coach of the Freeride Weightboard School.

 Now I'm going to show you how to do your first weightboard jumps.

 Okay, your first jumps are going to be one weight jumps, which means you're not going

 The first thing is edging, having speed through the top of the weight.

 As you approach the weight, and when you're ready to leave the weight, you're going to

 But really, that's just a fancy term for pulling the line a little bit.

 You don't want to pull the line in up over your head or even back to your back hip.

 You're literally pulling the rope in one or two inches to your front hip area.

 That's going to keep the line tight, but it's also going to keep your arms in for the landing.

 Obviously when you land, you're going to have to absorb the landing and bend your knees.

 After you bend your knees and absorb the landing, make sure you continue on and edge outside

 Another key component to doing your first jumps is going to be the approach.

 What you want to do is pull outside the weight as far as possible.

 Sit there for a second, and when you feel like the boat's pulling you back in and you're

 drifting back in towards the weight, go ahead and make a nice, slow turn.

 The next thing you want to do is roll up over on your edge and make a nice, progressive

 Another important factor in learning how to do your first jumps is going to be the length

 When you're first doing your first jumps and you're not trying to clear the weight and

 you're landing inside the weight, it's okay to use a longer line.

 That's going to give you plenty of time to land your jumps and continue on.

 Once you progress to your harder two-weight jumps where you want to clear the entire weight,

 you do want to pull the rope in and make it a bit shorter so the distance that you're

 That means you're going to jump the entire weight, take off from one weight, and land

 What you're going to have to do for this is get a lot more aggressive.

 Pull out as far as you can once again, but when you come back in, lean as hard as you

 can away from the boat and edge all the way through the top of the weight.

 You're going to want to have a lot of speed because that's going to be the key factor

 Up next, I'm going to leave you with some final key things to remember while you're

 Okay, we're going to make homemade biscuits now, and these are my ingredients.

 I use whole wheat flour, double-acid baking powder, and by the way, you can go with unsweetened

 And I like to use a little bit of self-rising white flour, too.

 Sometimes I make pure white biscuits, sometimes I make pure whole wheat biscuits, but I like

 My neighbor, she's got a milk cow, and we get milk and we take and we'll take and get

 The next day we'll be able to skim all the cream off of it, and after we get all the

 And after you get it filled halfway, you want to take it and you want to let it sit at room

 And usually my 11-year-old daughter shakes for me, and she'll shake it until it's all

 And I put it in the refrigerator so it's good, cold, and hard, because I think cold butter

 And then I'm going to take it out of the fridge and I'm going to let it sit for about an hour.

 And I think cold butter and cold water and cold ingredients make the best biscuits.

 I like to have a little bit of wheat flour, just a little bit in there, and I'll take

 Once you get that good and mixed up, I like to use ice cold water.

 You don't want to get too much because it's too wet and you can't handle it.

 because you're going to need some extra flour while you're rolling your biscuits out.

 I've done a little, and sometimes they turn out good both ways.

 I guess it's just all making it since I've made dozens of these.

 Have it there waiting and ready for me so I don't have to try that in a minute.

 You'll feel all those hard chunks of that cold butter in there, but it's okay

 because they'll melt when you're cooking it and come out just nice.

 I use all my flour and I make every bit of it, so that way there's no waste.

 This will be something you see me do often because we eat a lot of bread.

 I guess some people would consider them fried biscuits, but I just consider them stove-top biscuits.

 I've never made them really any other way, and when I have, they were dry and I really didn't like them.

 Then I'll take and put me a lid on there, and we'll come back whenever those are closer to done and show you what else I do.

 Put them back up there and let them finish up on the other side.

 That way, I believe, the meat and all of it will be done about the same time.

 I like to sometimes just flip them back over so they stay good and crisp on the bottoms.

 You can use any medium brown shade and putting it on my crease with a blending brush to make

 And then I'm going with NYX Jumbo White Eye Pencil and putting that all over the inner

 I'm adding the same jumbo eye pencil in dark brown and putting it in the outer half of

 I'm taking this turquoise shade by MAC called Aquadisiac and putting it right over where

 And I'm taking a purple shade from a Wet n Wild palette called Petal Pusher and putting

 Taking a clean blending brush, I'm just blending out the edges.

 I'm adding a matte black color to my outer V to add some depth to the very outside of

 And using a fluffy blending brush with no product on it to blend that out and inwards.

 Here I'm just adding my concealer to brighten up under my eye area and blending it out with

 It's called Mary Lou Manizer and it's this gorgeous gold sheen which I recommend to everyone

 Alright, so it is Monday morning and I'm out to go to the mall to buy some necessities.

 I looked at my homework and I said, hell no, no way I'm doing you this morning.

 So I figured today that I was going to go to the mall and I wanted to do a soft smokey

 You have to wear just enough where it's kind of appealing to your face rather than it's

 I just went drugstore shopping the other day looking for one particular product and I ended

 up not getting the product and I ended up buying a whole bunch of stuff.

 So I went to CVS and I picked up on some new products like this Magic Lumi.

 L'Oreal came out with these lip balm thingies and they are the bomb in your pants.

 Then I went to go buy some nail polishes because I saw these in the magazines.

 Oh, and I got this Sublime's bronze thing that you spray all over your legs.

 I was at CVS and I swear this guy was like staring at me like he was a fat boy about

 I was just a regular customer, you know, just picking up things on the shelf and just throwing

 And don't you hate when you have to ask for help at the store and like they don't really

 Oh, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no, no,

 So anyways, enjoy this cheap and easy drugstore smokey eye tutorial.

 And then I'm taking this gorgeous color from L'Oreal called Eternal Black.

 Then, the gold shimmery color, I'm applying this on the inner third of your balls.

 And if needed, if you need to apply more of that black because you feel like you lost it,

 And if needed, if you feel like you lost it, well, you better get on one.

 And this is just gonna give that purple a nice fade to your brows.

 Okay, so I'm using two Revlon concealers for two different shades.

 This is that so you warm up the concealer for smooth application.

 Oh, and you want to catch me during my Fashion Week trip in NY?

 Hey everyone, this is Alex from Polymomo Tea and I have a very simple tutorial for you guys

 And it's a Japanese tradition that you hang them on the ceiling and they're supposed to tell the rain to go away

 So first you're gonna take a white ball of clay and then you're just gonna put it in your eye screw right away and this will be the head

 Then you want to roll out some white clay and then you want to cut it into a square

 And then with your white square, I'm just taking the end of my tool and I'm just kind of wrapping it around it

 And make sure you get all the folds and then once you get that you want to pinch off the middle part

 And once you pinch it off you want to cut it up cut off the pinched off part and then you want to blend it onto your head

 Then I'm just wrapping it around the place where the body and the cloth meet

 Then I'm rolling out some more black clay into snakes and then we're gonna make the ribbon loop

 So you want to make two circles for the ends of the loop and then you want to get two just regular cut pieces of snakes and you want to just put them in the middle

 Then we're gonna poke two holes for eye sockets where we'll be placing balls of clay for eyes

 And then you'll just be filling those holes with the balls of black clay and they'll be getting a line mouth

 And if you can tell I made this tutorial slightly larger than the other pieces because I wanted to show all the details of how to made it

 So thank you for watching don't forget to like comment subscribe and check out my last video which is an Ameyuki shop opening video.

 Let's transform into a cute and lovely girl just like IU through her makeup.

 Use Missha's BB Boomer Primer to make the surface of the skin balanced.

 The point of IU's makeup is her clear and pure skin, big cute eyes, and her cheeks and lips that remind you of little girls.

 Mix the same amount of Etude House's Golden Ratio Face Glam No.

 Then dab it on a puff or sponge and carefully apply it on your face.

 For a lovely and cute kind of makeover like IU, dark makeup is not good.

2 Pink Cream Highlighter to give higher dimension to your nose, philtrum, and chin.

 Fill in your eyebrows with Etude House's Perfect Brow Kit with the brown color in the middle.

Straight-lined eyebrows may not be elegant, but they give a much more cuter image.

 Take the pink color and apply it just up to your double-eyelid line so that the pearl color peeks out just a little when you open your eyes.

1 Black and draw a line from the tear duct to the tail of your eyes.

 And draw a long line that makes your eyes look a little droopy to add the cuteness of IU.

3 Pearl Tear to give a sparkling teary-eyed effect to give more cuteness to the eyes.

 Finally, we're going to add Darkness Fake Eyelashes and underlashes at the tail of the eye.

2 Cherry Pink color and Missha's The Style Glam Pearl Gloss Pink 101 to give the perfect finish.

 of the ingredients that you're going to need to make this chicken salad will be listed

 how I did that was I put them in a casserole dish with a half a cup of water.

 in a preheated 375 degree oven for about 25 to 30 minutes until they were done.

 took them out and let them sit on the counter for about 10 minutes before refrigerating

 I have halved, toasted pecans, thinly sliced celery, you'll need some mayonnaise, apple

 cider vinegar, honey, poppy seeds, and salt and pepper to taste.

 honey, get this all off of here, and the poppy seeds, and some freshly ground sea salt.

 this is to taste and once you get it all dressed if you feel like you need to adjust

 I'm just going to whisk this together until it's smooth and mixed together nicely.

 that looks really good so I'm going to set this aside and move on to the salad part.

 I have a bowl here and to this bowl I'm going to add my chicken that I have chopped up into

And next I'll add my grapes, my celery, and my toasted pecans that I've

I'm just going to stir this until it's all coated and evenly distributed

I've decided to just line a plate with some red leaf lettuce and

 I'm just going to put some of the salad right in the middle of the lettuce.

 it's a bigger grain and it takes a lot longer to cook than the other one.

 the seeds flavor the oil or you can just keep it whole and it will be less spicy.

 but I just take the lazy way out and just do it in the process.

We're not going to cover it because we don't want the water to let go.

 I want to show you the perfect way to start and end your workout with a goblet squat.

 You can use a sandbag that's front loaded on the top of your fist like this.

 What I'm going to do, again, good squat positioning is not this.

 It allows us to create the most possible torque and external rotation through our hips.

 It's a safer position for the knee and it really emphasizes full mobility of the hip,

 The weight is not only a great counterbalance, allows us to stay taller up top, but it helps

 us push the knees out, engage more of the hips and groove that pattern beautifully.

 You really emphasize full lowerings, staying down in the deep bottom squat position.

 I'm going to basically screw my feet into the floor, push the hips back, knees back,

 grab the horns, kind of use the kettlebell to cue myself into that good position and

 then hold the horns, kind of bicep curl it into this position and then just work on this.

 This is just going to kind of help us push the knees out more and cue that good knee

 out position, get some clearance for the hips, hold it and then really actually push the

 knees out, engage the core, shoulders tight and then stand right up through and keep repeating

 And then of course I can just do full range reps, hinge back at the hips, push the knees

 out, really use the hips and hamstrings to pull myself down to the bottom position, hold

 it, actually push the knees out without letting your toes spin out and staying tall and just

 Other than that, great warm up drill, great mobility drill, active recovery drill.

 You want to finish your workout with a phenomenal metabolic boost.

 Take a nice moderate to heavy weight and I want you to do as many good reps as you can

 You're going to crush calories, firestorm type of metabolic activity and ultimately

 you're going to have slabs of muscle all around your knees to protect your knees but this

 move opens up the ankles, the hips and the upper back, all the stuff you want to open

 I want to get the true mobility, stability benefits so you'll sit back, push the knees

 out, take a couple seconds just to freeze and hold that position.

 Own it, stand up using the hips, keep going as many times as you can.

 Give me a call when you're done if you can hold the phone because you'll be fried.

 Become a free member at Streamfit.com today and start and end your workout the right way

 Hello, I'm Angela Wolfe and today I'm going to show you how easy it is to make bias tape

 And I don't work for simplicity, I'm just telling you I bought this and it is, at first

 But this is the easiest thing ever and I'm going to show you how easy.

 This machine actually comes like this, a little box, a little plug in, very easy to use.

 We used to have these for years where you slide your fabric through, but usually you

 When it's ready and I hit run, this will actually move with these two rollers here and slide

 Here it'll allow you to have the iron set to whatever temperature fabric you have.

 So with silk, actually when I had it on the silk setting, it didn't work as well.

 And then there's a little slot here for you to set that in, right there.

 I have the tip of my fabric cut on an angle, like a little diagonal.

 It's easier to get your fabric to slide into this little contraption here.

 There's a little hole in the top, so I'm using a pin to slide the fabric through.

 And you need to pull this through enough that it can get past that roller, so it'll start

 I usually like to help make sure everything's lined up on both ends, and I help to pull

 Now, a lot of times I will take this and then fold it and press it again, so then you have

 This is such an addictive machine, and it's so cheap to buy, so I hope you have fun.

 Hi guys, welcome to ET's Tindin Channel and today I'm going to show you how to make delicious

 water, add the chickpeas in the crock pot and add 8 cups of water for 3 cups of chickpeas.

Mix everything together and we are going to let our chickpeas cook.

 You can choose these settings either overnight, 6-8 hours or 4-6 hours.

 going to just cover it and while the chickpeas are cooking, we are going to start our tempering.

 So heat 2 tbsp of oil and add 1 tsp of cumin seeds, 1 small green chilli chopped and 1

Ginger garlic paste helps in digestion, adds lot of flavour, has

So 2 chopped tomatoes in, give them a quick stir along with the onions and

 but adding them before along with the tadka adds lot of flavour to the curry.

 going to sauté everything together, mix everything together and then go ahead and add your tadka

 or two are left of cooking or you can add it right in the beginning.

So mix everything well together and you can let it go overnight or all day long.

 So once you have put in all the ingredients in, just cover it up and I am going to let

 it go overnight and you can see in the morning our delicious chickpea curry is ready.

 out of the pot and you can serve it along with rice, with chapati, with naan, with paratha.

 So give this recipe a try and let us know how it turns out for you and don't forget

 I'm not basically in tails, reading the kids a book and then giving them a snack.

 But it is so hard to impress these kids with snacks because we're a no-nut, no-candy school.

 So today I'm going to whip them up some orange jello slices that I think are really going

 So the only ingredients we're going to need are some oranges and unflavored gelatin.

 So the first step is to cut our oranges in half crosswise and then to juice them.

 And I'm using a combination of navel and valencia oranges today.

 The navel oranges are what I'm going to use kind of as my prop for the jello slices.

 Once it's all juiced, I'm going to pour it into a measuring cup.

 And on top of the measuring cup I put a little mesh colander because you want to catch all the pulp.

 So I actually love this juicer and I bought it at the drugstore years ago for like $15.

 So they're definitely not hard to come by and they do not have to be expensive.

 So I've got the last of my juice in there and then I'm just going to help it go through the colander,

 the last little bits with a spoon, pushing it through and stirring it

 The next step is to add about a quarter cup of our juice to our packet of unflavored gelatin.

 And then I'm just going to set that aside for about 5 minutes until the gelatin looks mostly dissolved.

 So while my gelatin is dissolving, I'm going to get my oranges ready.

 So I'm just going to go ahead and use a spoon and I'm going to scoop out any of the remaining flesh.

 And I've just been sticking these oranges into a muffin tin to help them stand up.

 The next step is to put it on the stove, add the rest of your orange juice,

 and stir it for about 3 to 4 minutes until the gelatin is completely dissolved.

 Once your gelatin is completely dissolved, you're going to fill each of your orange shells about halfway up with the liquid.

 Stick your pan in the fridge and continue filling it until the shells are all the way full.

 You're going to need to let the jello set for at least 4 hours, but you can definitely do it overnight.

 They look really cute and now I'm going to cut them into wedges just like you would get a regular orange.

 So that is the last of my orange slices and they are super cute.

 So hopefully they will impress at least one of Avery's classmates.

 Thanks for watching guys and don't forget to subscribe for weekly videos.

I'm Megan Taubner and I'm going to show you something today that you have to know

 usually full of weird stuff like corn and potato and soy starch, not things we want

 to eat when there's such an easy whole food simple way to do this.

 To make an egg replacer use one tablespoon of ground chia seeds or one tablespoon of

 would call a spice grinder, some people call them coffee grinders, whatever.

 We pour that in and we're going to whisk it with a whisk or a little fork.

 the eggs are probably functioning in a different way than just binding and so we need to not

Let us know how you've used your chia paste or what you use to replace eggs

I'm Chef Dorian with Canyon Creek and we're here to talk about seafood fish on the grill.

 You can have steak every day but you might not want to so this is a healthy option, a fun option.

We've got, over here we've got a swordfish, we've got Ontario pickerel, we've got Arctic char and rainbow trout from the Georgian Bay.

 We're going to start here by seasoning the fish and getting it prepared for the grill.

 First thing you want to do, a little butter brush on your fish.

 And then you want to go into cracked salt and pepper and maybe some lemon zest, maybe a little bit of garlic, whatever you want really.

 For this one I've got my grill turned a little bit down, more towards medium, medium high.

 You can do it on high but it's going to be fast, you're going to have to move fast.

You can soak it overnight if you'd like, just so it doesn't burn up once you get it on the grill.

 Now as I said, they're quite thin so when we get them on we're going to have to move quickly.

 On the cedar plank it's going to go straight on the grill like so.

 Now that I've got the fish on the grill, I want to make sure to not move it too quickly because it will stick.

 So that's why it's important to oil the grill first and that's why I put butter on the fish before I put it on.

 As we go on, ideally you'd probably use a fish spatula but in this case I've got soft hands so I'm going to use it.

 It's not quite pulling off yet so I don't want to take it yet, I want to leave it.

 Your salmon is going to have a little bit more fat and it's going to melt in there and be beautiful.

 Some people will eat it on the medium side, probably a temperature of close to between 135 and 145.

 So we've got the spatula, not a fish spatula, I want my long handle so I can reach into the barbecue.

 Your swordfish and your rainbow trout are going to be done first, they're the thinnest.

 I'm going to give the rest of them another minute or two and we'll take them off the grill as well.

 So I'm going to give them a little bit of fat, I'm going to give them a little bit of fat.

 I'm going to give them a little bit of fat, I'm going to give them a little bit of fat.

 I'm going to give them another minute or two and we'll take them off the grill as well.

 Put them all up together, you can use a salsa or chutney, try some tropical fruit, whatever it may be.

 White wine goes great with fish, this is the lighter side of grilling.

 Welcome to Let Me Try That where I find things online and try it myself from cooking, crafts,

 I've seen it online and first, we're going to start off with some Oreos.

 We're going to try a whole bunch of stuff from marshmallows to Cheez-Its to some like

 First I'm just going to start off by making the regular brownie mix from a box.

 I have my oven preheated to 350 and I have a half a cup of oil, two eggs, and three tablespoons

 This brownie mix already has like chocolate chunks and nuts in them and I didn't feel

 First thing I'm going to do is when I dip the stuff in the brownie mix, I'm going to

 You're going to want to make sure that they're evenly, you know, all nonstick sprayed.

 So I'm going to stick them on my fork using like the fork right in between the cream.

 Like for Christmas they have like the red ones or the green ones.

 Now for this marshmallow, I'm going to cut the marshmallow in half.

 Because it's kind of big, I don't want it sticking out of the pan too much.

 Okay, I've never cut a marshmallow before and it's pretty dumb.

 So basically what this reminds me of is like deep frying stuff.

 Which is, I don't know how I'm going to do this without losing it in my cake batter.

 This was my idea because I wanted the cheese and the chocolate.

 I hope this one turns out really good because it all looks really delicious.

 So I'm going to go ahead and fill the rest of these tins with the same thing.

 And then I'm going to go ahead and bake them for 10-15 minutes.

 Our marshmallow one, I don't know, it kind of melted inside the brownie.

 What you're going to do is you're going to take a plastic knife.

 And you're going to want to go around the edges of this to make sure it's not sticking.

 How the Oreo and the cream inside are all warm, just like a deep-fried Oreo.

 That one's pretty good because it kept the crunchiness of the cereal.

 just because you don't really expect Cheez-Its with brownies, but it's really good.

 So you may see a lot of these recipes online for the Oreo ones,

 It's definitely something fun to do with kids if they like to dip their own stuff.

 And it's really easy with just a box brownie mix than just a bunch of other stuff.

 So don't forget to subscribe if you want to see more videos like this.

 head and cut off the tail and then cut this up in small pieces and I'm going to show you

 cook this, depends on how you cook it, you want to cook it with hot oil.

 I'm going to throw my okra into the pressure pot and I'm going to let it fry alongside

 finished cooking, I'm going to show you how I'm going to eat this meal with some white

 Hi dolls, so I'm going to be starting with using the Maybelline Baby Skin Instant Pore

 Eraser and I'm just going to start by applying that all over my face.

 Concentrating it mostly towards around my nose and on my chin and it just makes your

 Taking my absolute favorite drugstore foundation, the Revlon Colorstay in the color Toast and

 just taking it on a damp beauty blender, I start by patting that all over my face.

 And I like taking a very light layer of this foundation just because I'm going to combine

 it with a different foundation just to give me more bronze and more depth throughout my

 Now taking my Maybelline Fit Me Shine Free Foundation in the number 355, I like to use

 this in my cheekbones, under my chin, on my forehead and it just gives me a lot of depth

 and a lot of bronziness just so my face doesn't look that flat.

 This is kind of like contouring but I call it more foundation because I do contour after

 this so I just like using two different tones of foundation just to give my face the natural

 shadows that it has just so it looks like there's more depth in it and it just doesn't

 I know I look crazy right now but just trust me guys, when this is all done it looks absolutely

 Oh yes and I can't forget my nose, I love to contour my nose and bronze it up with this

 Taking my ELF concealer in the color Light, I just like using this under my eyes and a

 Now taking my beauty blender, I love just to blend this all out and the thing that's

 great about the Maybelline Fit Me foundation in a stick is that it's very blendable.

 I don't know how I would feel about using it as an all over foundation but just to give

 me some color throughout the cheekbones and forehead and chin, I absolutely love it.

 Getting the key to a flawless foundation look is definitely all about the blending.

 Now just blending out that concealer and just making sure my whole face is blended

 And as you can see it's already starting to give my face a lot of depth and a lot of

 Now taking my Neutrogena Shine Control Powder which is my absolute favorite for setting

 my under eye concealer and taking my MAC contour brush which I've been loving lately for just

 I'm just making sure I distribute the powder evenly and I love it just because it leaves

 my under eyes still bright, it doesn't darken my concealer and it's just very very perfect.

 I also like to set my concealer on the rest of my face and it just really blends out the

 And always you start to put those strings all the way down here.

 And then this one, what you do, all the way into the other hand, from left to right.

 Now this one is empty and then we're going to continue the same thing we did the first one.

 This arrow is how I guide myself because I'm so easy to get confused.

 Bottom, top, top, bottom, bottom, top, top, bottom, bottom, top, top, bottom.

 Every time you're going to stop and do something else, do this.

 And would you please not forget to comment, rate, and subscribe to my channel.

 Hi, it's Heather here at Lake Geneva Country Meats and today I'm going to show you how

 And so I know everyone can't sit out on the lake every day like we wish we could, so we

 Originally farmed for dairy and grain, it is now home to the nation's largest yellow

 The fish are antibiotic and hormone-free and the water they swim in is clean enough to

 Now that I have everyone's mouths watering for how delicious it sounds, I'm going to

 So what I have here is about a half a pound of perch and what we're going to do is we're

 And I just have the flour with a little bit of salt and pepper in the first one.

 And then in the last one I just have bread crumbs, some salt, pepper, parsley, and then

 So what you're going to do is you're just going to go through each step.

 You're going to start, and I just had these marinating in a little bit of lemon juice,

 And then we're going to set them on a platter and then we're going to put them in the fryer.

 So you're just going to repeat these steps through each piece of fish.

 All right, now that we have them all breaded, now what we're going to do is we're going

 So I have a pan heating up here, my fryer, and I have it at like 360 degrees.

 You just want to put a thermometer in it and make sure that you get about 360 degrees.

 So I'm just going to put the pan in and then I'm going to drop the fish in.

 All right, now that we've had them in here for about a couple minutes, you can see they

 started to float towards the top and they have a nice golden brown on them.

 And I just have a plate with some paper towels on it to get the extra off of it.

 Once you have them all out of the oil, they only need to sit on there for about a few

 Once you have all the fish on there, then you can enjoy it with friends and family.

 We have all the ingredients here at Lake Geneva Country Meats, so stop in and pick up some

 bell perch and enjoy this recipe with friends and family at home.

 For me, I'm going to enjoy a spotted cow and I'm going to have a piece of perch.

 to mix, so before I add anything else, I'm just gonna go ahead and mix up our

 That spatula was getting on my darn nerves, so I had to go ahead and switch to my

 sweet, it just brings a little more flavor and balances out the

 macaroni salad and have part of it sweet, so make sure you do a lot of mixing.

 actually work together to bring out the flavors, add more flavors, and all the

Best Foods, aka Hellman's, is my favorite mayo and the only mayo that I

 And as you can see, some spots are looking real dry and some look like it

 thinking, I must have been really tired when I grabbed that spatula again.

 And as you see, I'm trying to make sure I get every little bit up in there.

 Like I said, I think I was really tired when I was doing this, but it came out

So before I put it in the fridge, of course, I'm gonna put a little

 more Johnnies on top to add a little more seasoning, a little more taste, and

 RosePetalsTV.com, and if you need to contact me, please do so at LadyRose1983

 I'm going to go ahead and put in your favorite stir fry mix here.

 This is going to really bring the flavor out in these bad boys.

 Well, if there ever was an insect I'd want to eat covered with chocolate,

 A little piece of wing got stuck in my esophagus for a second there.

 freeze dried food and Eric is going to show us how easy this is to prepare.

 Okay, today we are going to try some Mountain House sweet and sour pork with rice.

 about 5-10 minutes and we'll come back and let you know what we think about this.

 this wonderful dish that I decided to step in and be the first person to taste test.

And because of all the hard work, you're allowed to be the next person.

I've never, at least as far as when I had this and just in general sweet and sour pork,

 It's the kind of stuff that you would, the kinds of flavors that you would expect

 It's the kind of stuff that you would, the kinds of flavors that you would expect at like a Chinese

And Jason has not tried this before, so we're gonna get Jason's opinion now.

 the tray pack sweet and sour that was kind of like a weird like processed patty.

If someone gave it to me and said, here's your food, I would eat it.

 What's your quick tip to incorporate more color into your food?

 Oh, go to a farmer's market because that's where you're going to find all the good stuff.

 You know, the truth is that if you go to a farmer's market, there's going to be everything

 And if you start saying, I'm going to buy a little of everything, well then you're going

 You don't have to think, oh, I'm going to do green things here or red things there.

 I'm going to just step through the preparation of the Swiss chard tacos.

 This is something that a lot of people, when they see the recipe for it, they think it's

 some sort of a health food sort of approach to cooking Mexican food.

 Really, I learned this from a market vendor in Toluca, the state that, in the state of

 And of course, Swiss chard is readily available to everyone in grocery stores.

 And you're going to let them cook until they're completely soft.

 Well, I'm actually browning them on the outside without letting them cook to soft because

 It's a nice textural counterpoint to the softness of the Swiss chard.

 So as that's getting, and it's very close to where I want it to be right now, but I'm

 going to add a little bit of garlic and just soften the garlic.

 We can throw some chili flakes in here if we want to do it that way.

 And you probably, most of us have those little chili flakes in our cupboard.

 It's not my favorite thing because I will say right away that the flavor of the chili really

 So what I always suggest to people is buy the whole chilies like this.

 You get the Thai chilies, these are arbol chilies, any of the small ones.

 And when you're ready to use your chili flakes, just take a knife to it and chop them up and

 Most of the time when I'm thinking about making a dish like this, I'm not going to go to wild

 I'm going to go to cultivated mushrooms because they're so much more readily available.

 And then the other reason that I do it is for flavor because it has the boldest of the

 flavors that you find in the wild mushrooms, I mean in the cultivated mushrooms.

 Okay, now, since everything is pretty much ready here, I'm going to add my garlic into

 And of course, with the browning comes a tremendous amount of flavor.

 It's not only sweetness that you're going to get out of that, but it's also what we

 That will really, it'll make this whole dish taste so much more savory.

 Now the biggest trick about cooking greens that I think I can share with you is that

 the flavors of greens tend to have, well, they're heavy in chlorophyll.

 So it's going to be a very light flavor and it hints toward bitterness.

 So you always want to add sweet elements to the dish when you're cooking greens.

 So my sweet element in this one is really going to be those caramelized onions.

 Without adding sugar to it, I'm adding sweetness that's naturally there in the onion.

 And a little bit of chicken broth that we are going to use as a medium here.

 Now if you want to make this dish entirely vegetarian, you can do that with a vegetable

 It won't have that meaty quality about it, but it'll be super delicious.

 And I'm going to add a little of that on one of those hand-pressed tortillas.

 We just take cold milk and then we add to that a little bit of lime juice, which makes

 And I'm just going to move these mushrooms over so that with this beautiful plate there

 So today I'm going to be doing a makeup tutorial inspired by Ariana Grande from her music video

 And my friend Laura Black is going to be recreating her makeup from her music video Bang Bang.

 So I decided to do this entire tutorial with just drugstore products.

 So I'm starting off with my favorite drugstore full coverage foundation, which is the CoverGirl

 And then I'm going to conceal my dark circles with my Maybelline Fit Me Concealer, which

 Then I'm going to set that with a matte powder, and I am using the Rimmel Stay Matte Powder.

 Now I'm going to bronze up the edges of my face with the Jane Bronzer in the color Dream.

 And we're going to skip the blush because I don't think she was wearing any in the video.

 And my favorite drugstore brow product is the Revlon Brow Fantasy because it has a pencil

 I usually try to define the arch of my brow, but today I tried to do them a little straighter

 Now it's time to prime my eyelids to get them ready for shadow, and I'm using the NYX

 And for shadows, I decided to use the Maybelline The Nudes Palette.

 I'm starting off with this matte cream color to create an even blank canvas for my lids.

 Then I'm taking this matte light brown and creating my crease color and really blending

 Now with the darker matte brown, I am going to just go over the top of this to intensify

 Now I'm taking this light shimmery color, I'm going to be applying that to the very

 And then with this pretty copper color, I'm going to apply this to the base of my eyelid.

 And then with my crease brush and no additional eyeshadow, I'm going to go back and blend

 And now it's time for the dramatic winged eyeliner, so I'm going to start off by drawing

 a line at the end of my lash line that is pretty long and then draw a line across the

 top of my eyelid and bring the edge of the diagonal line down to create a triangle.

 In case you haven't seen it, I will link it down below for you.

 And then I apply my favorite pencil eyeliner, which is the L'Oreal Voluminous Smoldering

 And then I'm doing something that I never do, which is apply false eyelashes.

 I really hate wearing them, but I had to put them on for this tutorial because I'm that

 And they're really not as bad as I remember them being, so I might start wearing them

 And these are the Ardell 120 eyelashes, in case you guys were wondering.

 And now it's time for lips, and I couldn't find a color that looked exactly like hers

 It was a deep wine color that was equally plum and burgundy, so I just decided to mix

 And these are the Revlon Just Bitten Bomb stains in the color Crush and Adore.

 If you did, make sure you give it a big thumbs up and push the button that looks like this

 Make sure you go check out Laura's video if you haven't already.

 If you came over here from Laura's channel, I really appreciate it.

 I've got a very special guest with me today, Lynn from the Clandestine Cake Club.

 And we're going to be making her fantastic recipe for Pistachio and Lime Cake.

 So this cake has a fantastic three layers and it's made from a classic sponge mix with

 And finally we add some chopped pistachios which Lynn's doing for me here.

 So now we're going to make the lime syrup that gives this cake a fantastic zesty kick.

 Stir that together until the sugar dissolves, bring it to a simmer and then we'll leave

 While the sponge is still warm pour the syrup over the top because it absorbs better.

 So now we're going to make the lime curd which is really simple because everything goes into

 And we heat that gently being really careful not to boil it until it coats the back of

 And then we strain it through a fine sieve which will remove any cooked egg.

 So this is the frosting to top our cake and it's made from butter, cream cheese, lime

 And why not use full fat cream cheese because it's a cake after all.

 And for this it doesn't really matter if it dribbles over the sides.

 Cover with some more frosting and we can be very generous with it.

 And if you're having a cake club event, why not prepare all this ahead of time.

 So we've used grated chocolate but you could make your own chocolate shards at home.

 And as a final finish, just sprinkle a few chopped nuts in the middle.

 I've been looking forward to getting this for a long long time.

 I still find it a bit awkward with the whole Dan Wah thing, but,

 So I knew what it was all about, what you were getting from it.

 Hey everyone, this is Sarah from the Style Blog and today I'm going to show you how I

 Okay, so the first thing I do when I get out of the shower is wrap my hair in a hair towel

 which soaks up all the excess moisture in my hair so I don't have to apply so much heat

 It leaves my hair silky and soft and it prevents breakage and split ends.

 I use it to part my hair where I want the part to be and then I work from the bottom

 It's important to start at the bottom so that you don't cause as much breakage in your hair.

 Next I'm using a Qi hair dryer but any hair dryer will do just fine.

 I'm also using a round brush and the center of mine is ceramic like a straightening iron

 so it helps straighten my hair a little bit so that I don't have to use the straightener

 as much later so I don't have to apply so much damaging heat to my hair.

 Now I'm pinning the top half of my hair up to get it out of the way so I can dry the

 I take a section from right above my ears all the way around and pin it up to the top

 I also want to pin up my bangs because I'll deal with those last.

 And now I'm just taking small sections of hair and blow drying them with the round brush

 It's important not to get your hair dryer super close to your hair because you don't

 I actually have a bad habit of touching my hair dryer to my hair which you'll see me

 I'm trying to train myself to stop doing that because it's really damaging to the hair.

 Sometimes my roots end up wet when the rest of my hair is dry so if you see me pointing

 the hair dryer directly at my roots as I just did, that's why I'm doing it just to make

 sure that I get all of the hair dry before moving on to the next portion.

 Again you just want to work your way around your head making sure all the strands on the

 slower portion of hair are dry before you take down the top portion.

 You'll see the ceramic middle to my brush actually does help straighten my hair before

 I get to the straightening portion so that I don't have to straighten my hair for as

 Okay so now that the top half of my hair is dry I'm going to take it down and then again

 detangle it with my wide tooth comb to make sure all of the tangles are out and we're

 So just like we did on the bottom portion you're going to move your brush all around

 your head making sure to dry all the different strands of hair on the top portion.

 On a quick side note I did fast forward this video two times the normal speed so as you'll

 In the mornings this whole routine usually takes me about eleven minutes so it doesn't

 And remember again don't get your hair dryer too close to your hair because you don't want

 Again I'm concentrating my hair dryer at my roots just to make sure that my whole head

 As you can see I slightly turn the round brush under as I get to the bottom of my strands

 Now I'm just checking to make sure that I've dried my hair all the way through and I didn't

 I'm actually using the Matrix Vaboom Gold Heat Iron In Control.

 You can use any protective mist on your hair you just want to use this before you use hot

 I'm using a Bed Head Lime Green brush to distribute this product throughout my hair.

 You can use your pick or your round brush or any other brush you prefer.

 Now I'm again pinning up the top half of my hair and my bangs to straighten the bottom

 If your bottom hair is curly and then you try to put straight hair on top of that you'll

 be able to see the curls through so it's important to straighten the bottom layer of your hair

 Now that the bottom portion of our hair is straight we're going to take down the top

 portion and our bangs and then comb our hair through again to make sure all the tangles

 Here I'm just straightening little sections at a time and slightly curling them under

 The whole straightening process doesn't take me very long because I did use a ceramic round

 You just want to continue straightening around your whole head until you have the desired

 You may have to go over some sections more than once depending on your hair type if you

 So it normally takes me about 10 minutes to dry and straighten my hair.

 So I hope you all enjoyed the tutorial and I'll see you next time!

 Minerva worktops are supplied in robust packaging and all surfaces are factory finished ready

When opening, cut the cardboard and protective film carefully away from the

 the two pieces together and wiping the surface with a damp cloth.

 the two surfaces do not match to your requirements, do not proceed with the installation, as any

 claims made after installation are not covered by the product's warranty.

 as Carrera White, the unique pattern on each worktop may make it impossible to disguise

 moisture, the joint may cut through the veining, making it more visible than you would get

For each joint that you undertake, you will need one Minerva joint

 part adhesive sachet, three grades of sandpaper and red abrasive pad for finishing, MDF blocks,

 and a copy of the installation, care and maintenance booklet, which should be used in conjunction

The measuring process is exactly as you would do with other work surfaces.

 Here we are simply trimming the Minerva to size using a circular saw.

 Next, a straight edge is clamped to the surface in order to cut the female side of the joint.

 We are just cutting 2-3mm off the front edge to remove the slight profile and leave a square

This will compensate for any difference in the vertical angle of the cut

If it is not practical to do this, you may simply need to flatten

 face up again, the end is sanded slightly to match the rounded part of the female joint

Each face is keyed slightly with 120 grit paper on a flat sanding block.

 This is similar to the male and female joints achieved when using a mason's miter jig.

 Check the work tops in situ, then check the fit and level of the joint.

 dry fit is not perfect, then this will affect the quality of the finished joint.

 For most of this demonstration, we will be using the MDF block method, but an alternative

 is to use seam setters or joint pullers which use vacuum suction pads and a series of adjustable

 Whichever method you use, at this stage it is vital to clean the joint using the wipes

These will remove dirt, debris and any pen or pencil marks from the

 Three pairs of MDF blocks are then bonded either side of the joint with hot melt glue

 With the joint prepared and three clamps ready to use, the adhesive can now be mixed.

 The grey divider is carefully removed and the adhesive mixed in the sachet, ensuring

 A small corner is cut off the sachet which is rolled up to pipe the adhesive along either

 A clean blade or spatula is used to spread the adhesive on both faces.

 The two work tops are pulled together, pulled apart slightly and then more adhesive applied

 Then the three clamps are used to pull the joint firmly together.

 The level of the joint can be checked with the spatula at this stage and any minor adjustments

The working time of the adhesive is around 8-10 minutes, depending on the ambient

 passed over the surface, as it's important that the adhesive is left on the surface to

 While the adhesive is still wet, the masking tape is removed leaving a narrow bead of adhesive.

 This is also a good time to remove any excess that may have oozed out from the inside corner

 The full cure time of the adhesive depends on the ambient temperature, but can be up

 The MDF blocks are simply removed by lightly tapping with a hammer.

 Then the remaining bead of adhesive is sanded off using a random orbital sander and the

 in a slightly wider area in horizontal and vertical sweeps and ensuring that excess dust

 The finished joint is wiped down, cleaned with a damp cloth and checked.

I'm Jordan, and I'm going to teach a small tutorial on how to play happiness from the phrase new album

 Very cord the cord you're gonna first you're gonna capo number one capo it on the first fret and then

 You're gonna do an e minor seventh, so it's the e minor shape and then your pinky on the D string on the third fret

 The C add nine if you don't know what that is it's basically the shape of a G

 And you're just lowering your pointer finger and your ring, and I'm sorry your pointer finger and your middle finger to the strings below it

 Now I'm the for every four measures of something the guitars goes

 So that always doing there is lifting up his middle finger on the

 When he starts singing the home part it goes in the piano, and you're just doing the e minor

 Again for the chords you'll be using the whole time you might even minor seventh a

 You know not in detail enough, but whatever dude doing this for free so

 Also check out my originals at myspace.com slash Jordan Schneider peace.

 I'm going to show you a couple of different ways to give this breakfast or dinner, I call

 To that add 3 fourths cup of water to make about 6 to 8 medium sized pancakes.

 It adds kind of a nutty flavor, it definitely gives it a homemade taste.

 The objective here is to make light and fluffy pancakes so you don't want to over whisk the

 Using a quarter cup measure, scoop the batter and pour it onto your hot griddle and make

 The minute this batter hits this hot griddle, the smell of the vanilla will have your family

 Try this trick, just lightly spray the spatula with some non-stick cooking spray.

 You want to keep an eye on these because when you see them get bubbly and the edges begin

 Now take a little maple syrup and for the wow factor, I'm going to use some strawberry

 I've chosen some chopped pecans and bananas, but check out your pantry for ideas.

 Pair it up with a tall glass of milk and a bowl of fresh fruit.

 Now to recap, for 6 to 8 pancakes, all you'll need is the pancake mix, water, vanilla and

 Remember, you can get many of these ingredients for less at your local Dollar General.

 For printable recipes and more DG Easy Meal recipes, visit DollarGeneral.com.

This is a dish that goes pretty good with a lot of different meals.

 oil, a quarter cup of chopped onion, a clove of garlic that has been chopped, a cup of

You'll need a 14 1 1 1 oz can of chicken broth, a quarter cup of

 going to saute our onions and our garlic for a few minutes until they start getting soft.

 I've sauteed my onion and garlic in the olive oil until it's a little bit soft.

 of times and stir it just to make sure it's not sticking to the bottom of the pot.

 the chicken broth has been absorbed by the orzo and it's looking nice and creamy.

 what I'm going to do is take this over to the counter and finish up this dish.

 we're going to do now is just simply add our parmesan cheese and sprinkle on a little salt,

 here but when I type this recipe in the information, I will type the full recipe so that you have

 I'm going to take the top card, which is a Queen of Spades, and I'm going to place the

 which is a Queen of Hearts, and I'm going to place the Queen of Hearts right down over

So now I have a Queen of Spades here and a Queen of Hearts over there.

 Queen of Spades and two Queen of Hearts, but if I take the cards, give them a little shake,

 open them up, put them straight down like this, the four cards all turn into Aces.

You're going to have to have an Ace and a Queen tape with double stick

 back card on the bottom, an Ace, an Ace, then the Queen, then an Ace.

 pinky break so you can turn over the top card, which is a Queen, but you're really doing

You do a double lift again and you set down this card, which is really

Then you hold the pack and you're really taking not one card off the bottom,

 taking all the cards off the bottom, and you're showing the Queen of Hearts.

 and you have a Queen of Spades and a Queen of Hearts, and behind the Queen of Hearts

 stick tape will stick to this card right in front of it, and now all of a sudden the

You put this down, you flip them all over, you have four Aces, and this

 looks like all the Queens disappeared and they're all right behind here.

Breakfast can quite often be pretty boring but do you know what's not boring for breakfast?

 Okay so these are American pancakes so you're gonna want to have one egg.

 And then you want to get the weighing scales out and measure 200 grams of self-raising flour.

 And after that you're going to want to add a decent amount of baking powder.

This is my normal speed of whisking and then this is super speed for the purposes of this video.

 And then you're gonna want it this consistency so that when you take out the whisk there's an imprint in the mixture for about 5 seconds.

 And then you're gonna want to pour that butter into the pancake mixture.

 And then when it's done you can add the first pancake to the pan.

 Now you know it's time to flip the pancake when bubbles start appearing on the surface of the pancake.

 So when you come to flipping it, you've just got to make sure that it lands on the pan.

 It should be that thickness and served with lovely maple syrup.

 Good luck making the pancakes and please remember to comment, like and subscribe.

 This revolutionary system allows you to lift heavy and bulky objects by using leverage.

 Your shoulder dolly consumer set includes two one size fits all lifting harnesses made

 out of polypropylene webbing, metal tension buckle which allows you to adjust the lifting

 strap, one twelve foot by five inch lifting strap which will adjust to any size object,

 one multilingual instructional guide, languages include English, Spanish, French and German.

 To put the harness on, separate the webbing over your head and put it on like a shirt.

 Then adjust it so that the metal buckle is by your waist and the X is in the middle of

 Once the two harnesses are on, double check to make sure the word front is facing out.

 To thread the strap correctly, take the end of the strap up under the bottom of the buckle,

 go up through the hole, then go back down through the front hole.

 To adjust the length of the strap, you hold the buckle horizontally with one hand so the

 side of the bar can slide back and forth while the strap moves through the buckle.

 The first technique is how to lean the object back and place the lifting strap underneath.

 Or if the object has clearance, just slide the lifting strap under the object.

 Post lifts, you will place the webbing under the center of the object.

 Once the webbing is in place under the object, squat down and hold the buckle.

 One of the key lifting techniques is to simultaneously push with your arms and lift with your legs

 and remove the strap from the side, or with many items you can just pull the webbing from

 If used correctly, the shoulder dolly is a great tool for taking objects up and down

Keep your hands in front of your shoulders and push against the object.

 To avoid tripping on the excess webbing, make sure to wrap it or tie it up.

 As with most projects, an essential element of success is communication.

 your partner ensuring each of you is comfortable and aware of the objects in your walkway.

 one person should be able to release the object with one hand and open the door.

 When ascending or descending stairs, the rule of thumb is to have each lifter lift the object

 Good communication throughout the lifting process is essential.

 So a lot of people have been asking me how I use monistat in my hair and how I mix it.

 So I thought I'd make a quick video to show people exactly what I do.

 So I have fine hair so I can't take a lot of moisture in my hair and generally I use water to style my hair on a daily basis.

 So I take a spray bottle like this one here and I fill it up with water about 3 quarters of the way full.

 So I would take this and then I like to use a little bit of leave-in conditioner in there.

 So I would just take this, I'm going to open it up here, pour it in my water bottle.

 So it comes like in a bag like this and then this is what comes out.

 So I just screw this off here, put the plunger in and I insert it into the water bottle like that.

 So then I just kind of stir it a little bit to get it mixed up.

 It looks like it's just a big thing sitting in there but once you shake it up it will actually break up and actually mix quite well with this mixture.

 And so you can see that maybe some of the chunks have broken up.

 But if you just keep shaking and mixing it all of that will just sort of disintegrate in there and you'll have your mixture.

 Now some people don't like to wet their hair everyday and they wear it straight or things like that and they still want to use Monistat.

It's oil free for no build up which I guess you would really want and like if you're going to use it on your hair or your scalp I guess three to four times a week.

 So you could also, I'm going to put this down for a second so I can open this.

 And maybe I'll try this since I'm mixing it and see how it works for me and I'll let you know.

 So Tuna Fish sent me his Honda Goldwing tank and it has some dents in it that he

 On the left side there's a few dings that are basically like little minor car

 which is pretty bad so I'm gonna show you a few ways on how to take out dents.

 So whenever you're working on an old tank to remove dents or rust from the inside

 you want to make sure that you burn the gas out of the inside of the tank

 is to take a dent pulling pin and glue it directly onto the surface of the tank

 With the pin glued securely in place I just take a piece of pipe

 then take a pair of metric vice grips and I use the edge of the pipe as a lever.

 I clamp onto the pin and then I pull down on this end of the vice grip

 and it probably won't take any more than just a maybe some sanding

 and this weight is just slammed in the opposite direction of the dent.

 You have to remove the paint on both ends so it conducts electricity.

 to the bare metal tank and the other end to the coat hanger rod that you make.

 And then, oh make sure that you don't touch both of them at the same time with

 Bend a hook in the end so it can be attached to the slide hammer

 I'm going to ship that back to him along with some Ichiban Moda stickers.

 Hi guys, it's Angela Kim from thesquishymonster.com and today I'm going to share with you something

I'm going to show you how I whip up my two ingredient homemade all

 you know that I have been slowly but surely converting all of my home-based products to

 forget to share, like and subscribe to my channel if you aren't already.

 And already I have an abundance of energy, even more than I usually do.

And I was hoping that we could kind of inspire each other or kind of encourage

 started, I wanted to share with you some that I already have made.

 and what source you get them from, you can make them anywhere from 10 to 20 cents a pop,

 the best way to obtain the highest quality beeswax that you can be, since you are going

 to be applying this to your person, you can converse with your local beekeeper or source

 it from a very reputable source online, whichever way works for you.

 Step number two, you'll melt your wax in a double boiler or in 20 to 30 second bursts

Now, I like to wait just for a couple seconds for everything to kind of

 meld in together and cool slightly so you don't melt your plastic.

 you can add in honeys or organic crushed colors to stain or tint your chapsticks.

 Hey it's Missy and today I'll be teaching you how to recreate a triple waist braid half

 To start off I added some curl into my hair and you can click this video to see how I

 Then I'm going to separate off a section of hair and clip in some extensions just to add

 Next divide off a section of hair from the part down to the ear and tie off the back

 Next I'm going to add a little bit of braid paste to the top of my hair to smooth down

 Next divide this section into three equal sections and we're going to start with the

 So clip off the front section, then pick up a section of hair near the part, divide it

 And we're going to do a lace braid, so cross the back strand over the middle, then cross

 Now cross the back strand over the middle, but with this braid we're not going to bring

 in any hair from the back portion, so cross the front strand over the middle.

 Then we're going to pick up a small section of hair, cross it over and add it into that

 So again, cross the back section over the middle, then we're going to move right to

 the front section, crossing it over the middle and then picking up a section of hair, crossing

 So cross the back section over, then cross the front section over and add in hair to

 And continue braiding until it reaches to about the temple, and then we're going to

 Another tip is be sure as you're braiding to angle the braid towards the back of the

 As you can see, the braid is kind of pulling towards the back, and this will help it lay

 Once the braid reaches the bottom, tie it off with a clear elastic band and then clip

 it out of the way so that it doesn't get pulled into the next braid.

 And now we're going to repeat those exact same steps two more times to create two more

 Once the second braid is done, be sure to clip it out of the way to make creating the

 Once all three braids are done, then let down the rest of the hair, take all three braids,

 wrap them around the back of the head, pick up a small piece of hair, and tie it all together

 Now remove the individual elastics from the braids, then combine the hair together and

 braid it all down in a regular braid, tying off the end with a clear elastic band.

 So bring it up against the head, wrapping it clockwise, and make sure the tail goes

 Once it's secure, go back and gently pull on the edges very gently just to make it look

 Thank you so much for watching, I hope you enjoyed this tutorial.

 Don't forget to subscribe and give this video a thumbs up if you love this hairstyle, and

 Hi, I'm Kathleen Sams with Red Heart Yarns and we're going to be working on the Amish

 Quilt Row, which is also done in another form of diagonal block.

 Now here's, well you can see right here, they're done in rows, so again you start with one

 block and then your second row you add two blocks, third row, and you just keep repeating.

 Now the blocks are made like this, always working from the front side, so you're going

 And it's got five rows, and the reason I put these stitch pins in here is because you're

 joining your blocks to the end of the row, so I wanted you to be able to see, you'll

 join on row one, row three, and row five, so you'll be able to see where they go.

 Now I already have another one here, the first block done, to add a block, as the instructions

 say, we're going to work chain seven, so you're going to actually add your yarn right there

 Then we're going to come over into the third chain, single crochet, chain one, skip the

 next one, single crochet, chain one, skip the next one, single crochet in that last

 one, and then you go right in to the first row of stitches, right here.

 So we're going to chain one, single crochet in that single crochet, chain one, skip one,

 Okay, and there's our three stitches, and we're going to come in, so there's row one,

 Chain one, and we repeat this across, and this is our fifth row.

 Alright now when you want to go across the top, you're going to go right in.

 And so we've just slip stitched into that side edge of that last row, the fifth row

 Okay, and let me do this real quickly so I can show you, and see we didn't do a chain

 one here on this one when we started because as you can see, it just kind of keeps the

 So let me finish this one real quickly, and then I'll show you how you can start decreasing

 And always remember too, even rows are your wrong side, and odd rows are your right side.

 Okay, now what you're going to do now is pull in your next color, and you're going to pick

 up right here, and you're going to start your, and this is how, and again you're going to

 be decreasing two blocks each side, or each time when you start going back.

 I know I'm going rather quickly, I wanted to see how this turns out to be a block.

 Alright, and again we're joining on row three, so that's one, two, three, right in here.

 And then you just right through the last, the first stitch right there.

 Alright, and again we're going to work in the back loop as the instructions say.

 And again we're going to work in the back loop as the instructions say.

 What's up guys, it's me Nero and I guess we got our first cooking video going on here and

 So this is the first step put the knife away and you're gonna want to peel the banana

 It's kind of a simple step and if you want you can go ahead and eat the banana peel

 Your little cereal bowl or even your plate you can keep it right over here, too

 But all you want to do is just take everything and put it wherever you want

 All right guys, so after you got all your banana, you know slices in a bowl like this or a cup

 What you want to do is go ahead and put it right in the freezer and let it stay there for about one hour

 So at the 55 minute mark what you want to do is before you take out the banana slices from the freezer

 I'm doing a really dirty job here after that take half a cup of the soft tofu or

 Silken tofu, whatever you want to call it and just pluck or I don't know how you call it

 pop that in there pluck that in there throw it in there, whatever you want to call it and

 After that, what you want to do is take your whey protein and this is where I have to you know, talk a bit

 This is mass gain chocolate protein, so what that basically means is it's going it's gonna have a lot more calories

 So two scoops is around 400 calories for this if you're just using regular whey protein for your workouts

 It's probably going to be about a hundred and thirty calories each so I'd say limit yourself to under

 So remember limit yourself to 300 calories with the whey protein that you have

 it depends on whatever whey protein you use and what you want to do is close this off and

 All right, I just stopped it for a second what you want to do is grind it until it's really smooth

 So, you know just keep grinding until for about for about two three minutes, I'd say so start grinding

 That's when you want to open the freezer real quick and take out your frozen bananas.

 And what you want to do is start mixing until you think the drink is ready and really smooth.

 I actually got a lot so, you know, you can actually give this to

 Remember that banana slice I saved I wanted to put it right here

 So, you know, it kind of gave it a really good look, but I failed and dropped it right in the shake

 Huh itself so that was a fail but you know, if you want you can just put it there I guess it looks nice

 carbs and proteins and all the good stuff that this thing provides you with I would

 Really recommend this drink for the breakfast it it would keep you literally it will like keep you active

 This and maybe something to eat for breakfast and you should be good man

 You should be you know in class while the rest of the people are sleeping in class

 You would be you know, answering the questions to your professor and whatnot, but you know guys that's about it

 You know, I said it three times in this video and I swear each time I said it I said it a different way

Hope you guys can subscribe click that button right there really motivates me obviously thumbs up this video

 I guess you can leave a dislike but when you leave a dislike obviously put a comment below

 Foods that I can make I you know, you guys can leave that in the comment below or send me a personal message

 But that is it with cooking, you know, easy go cooking all you easy goers and cooking

I don't know if you can tell from the video but it is super soft, tangle free

 4 chocolate brown and I don't know if you can tell but I've had them highlighted slightly

 that have a silicone strip attached to them so that they can grab onto your natural hair

Before clipping in your extensions, gently comb each weft with a paddle

 Before clipping in my extensions, I'm going to detangle my hair with a paddle brush.

 by separating a small section of the hair just 1 inch above the nape of your neck and

 onto the root of the hair and snap it close, followed by the left and the right clips.

 Gently brush it through with a paddle brush and release the rest of your hair.

 another section of hair about half an inch above the first clipped weft and move the

 against your head to ensure the size fits perfectly on the sectioned hair and repeat

Separate another section of hair from ear to ear above the second weft and clip

 head and secure the middle clips onto your roots first, followed by the side clips.

 another section of hair an inch above your ears, almost parallel to your eyebrows and

 too close to your hairline so that the wefts don't peek through.

This is also a good tip for short haired girls as it gives you that extra volume.

 Gently brush your hair with a paddle brush and you're good to go.

If you'd like to purchase the extensions, log on to our website which

 is www.loxtrashair.com and make sure to follow us on our social media to keep up to date

Don't forget to hit the subscribe button and I'll speak to you guys

 I have been asked to do some eyeliner videos and today I wanted to do a pop of colour,

And I thought, because I don't have an editing system, I can't do, here's

 liquid and here's pencil, it's probably going to have to be several little videos.

 put my makeup on already, I'm actually using my, I mentioned this yesterday in my video,

 but I'm using my Ben Nye toe pads and I've used that all over my face today.

So it's all over my face and then more exaggerated on the cheeks.

 So this is obviously a pop of colour, so just quickly, pop of colour, I've kept my

 eyelids quite neutral, natural, and just given them a little wash of colour.

 put some sparkles on or something like that, it's entirely up to you.

 So if I was using a black eyeliner and I'm doing the top, obviously exactly the same,

 this is a pencil eyeliner, but I just wanted to quickly say, like with this kind of colour,

 Okay, so I've watched other girls do it and they seem to be able to do it without holding

 So I was just going to do underneath the eye, but now I've decided really quickly that I'm

 So always test them out because if it's hard to draw it on your hand, then obviously it's

 going to be hard to draw it on your eye and that's quite a soft area and you don't really

 So with your pencil, you're going to take it where your lash line is and start drawing

 Now because I'm confident, I do it a little bit above the eye because I know how deep

 But just go straight onto the eyelids, sorry, where your eyelashes are.

 I just lightly raise it just so I can get right up to the eyelashes.

 Now some people pull it up to see, but I just think it's fine like that.

 You're not going to see it with this colour, but if I was using a black.

 I don't know if that's been any help at all, but maybe it just helps like seeing somebody do it

 It has a little bit of like glitter flecks in the pencil itself.

 This is the first time I've used it and I have to say went on really nicely.

 It's got a piece of glitter in it, but you can't like feel that on your eye.

 So if you are interested in that, I will try and do that tomorrow morning.

 I always seem to look naked when I do my videos, but it's summer time.

 If you want me to do this in black so I can show you like how I would do the inner parts of the eye and stuff better,

 We just finished shooting a video on how to maximize every penny when you're buying chicken

 At the very end, I was talking about making dirty rice, and I was interrupted, if you

 watched that video, by a little person over here who wanted me to clarify that if you

 make dirty rice, you don't really put dirt in it because that would be nasty.

 What we are going to do, however, is make dirty rice with some of my favorite things,

 We're actually going to move over here to the stove and show you about a week and a

 Roughly, don't get crazy about it, you want about twice as much onion as you do the other

 We're going to saute off these vegetables, and we're going to give these just a few minutes,

 and then we're going to go over here and talk about some other stuff.

 I haven't seen that in any other recipes, and I like it in mine.

 Over here in my rice cooker, I've got about eight cups of rice.

 I'll probably use a little more than half, but that's sitting there waiting on me.

 This is a great way to get rice in the diet, and I love to do this with leftover rice.

 This is about a pound of just plain old breakfast sausage that I've ground off, crumbled up,

 Use smoked sausage or andouille or whatever you happen to find that is fabulous.

 Now this, if you're cleaning out your chickens, you get those funky little packets.

 I then drained it, let it cool off, and I threw it in the food processor.

 If you don't have a food processor or don't want to deal with it, then you don't have to.

 We're going to give these about 10 minutes just to get nice and tender.

 You actually are going to stop cooking this when the veggies come off.

 Whatever doneness, you like your vegetables, that's where you want them to at this point.

 We're going to let this have its little party in this pan, and we'll be back in just a few minutes

 to show you how super easy it is to throw it all together on the next step.

 If it tastes good to you, it's going to taste good to everybody else, so do that.

 One thing I did notice is that I needed a little salt and a little pepper.

 That's another thing, always taste your food before you put it out to your family and friends.

 I never mind guinea pigs anyway, but I don't do it two or more often than I have to.

 those are the minced up giblets that we have from our chickens.

 This is really just to warm it through, because we're going to take it to the table pretty quick.

 Just like when you're making dressing or stuffing, give yourself a really big bowl to work with.

 When I did my rice, I used the chicken broth that we got from .

 Now, you do not have to make this stuff by the bathtub full like I do.

 Certainly make smaller batches if you don't feed as many people as I do.

 I almost think of this as the Cajun Creole version of fried rice.

 You can almost have a main dish of this just by itself, because it's absolutely beautiful.

 I've got a big old crusty loaf of bread over here and a baby salad in the fridge.

 Hey guys, it's Kathryn from Southern Girls Makeup and today I had my prom get ready with me.

 It's not exactly how it turned, or it's not exactly how I wanted it to turn out,

 but I figured I'd still post this because it is fun to watch these get ready with me videos.

 And I'm just going to try to do a quick voiceover over it because my camera was running out of storage

 and in between like doing my hair and makeup I was like helping my friends do their hair and makeup.

 I had a great time and I'm going to try to insert some pictures of my dress and my date,

 They may not be clear because sometimes my iPad like distorts them, but you'll see what I look like.

 and I made a headband with just like headband and I just super glued sequins on it,

 The thing with my hair is that it's really short in the back and so I just had to do it in lots of sections

 Okay, so I actually don't have any footage of Cassandra doing my hair.

 She just took it in like a ponytail, just a front section and twisted it and pinned it

 and it looked so good and I'm really surprised she got my thick hair to stay with just bobby pins

 I went in a spooky eye with a pop of glitter and I used, I got to use Bailey's Smashbox primer,

 which is really cool and it actually did really help my makeup stay on my face.

 I just used a dark brown color and the crease kind of got kind of crazy, or the, yeah, the crease,

 kind of got kind of crazy and then my camera cut off and it didn't show me applying the lid color,

 What I did, I used lash glue and then applied Ice Latte from L'Oreal over top

 and then I did a wing liner, but I got a little too crazy with lash glue on one of my eyes

 and it was like too, you see me poking it now, it was just too clumpy and didn't look good

 and I just was getting so frustrated because it didn't look good

 So here's me calling my dad, telling him where they are so he can bring them to pictures.

 Still playing with my eye, still just like, oh my gosh, why isn't this working out?

 And to top it off, my false lashes would not cooperate with me.

 I tried two sets and neither of them worked, so here I am going to just apply regular mascara

 and I had like glue in my lashes, that was me pulling it out, and just regular mascara

 I just show you putting on my foundation because I was over filming, I didn't like my makeup look

 And I really didn't do anything out of the ordinary, just a little brush and bronzer and highlight.

 So, I really hope you guys liked this video, I'll see you in my next one.

 The purpose for this video is to demonstrate how to install the new Nihilo Concepts clutch

 Start by laying the bike on its side and removing the brake lever.

 To do so, remove both nuts on the backside of the lever as well as the brake spring.

 Next, remove all four 8mm bolts holding the stock cover in place.

 Now remove the O-ring from your stock cover and install it on your new Nihilo Concepts

 As you can see, the 2013 KTM 50 clutch is completely different from the 2012.

 It has three adjustment bolts that can be adjusted in or out to determine when the clutch

 The next thing you'll want to do is clean off one of the bolts with contact cleaner

 or a rag so that you can mark it with a paint marker for future reference when adjusting

 Now you will need to install your new Nihilo Concepts clutch cover with the existing stock

 After that, install the adjustment hole plug and be sure that there is a copper washer

 After you've installed the cover, reinstall your brake lever and then you are ready to

 Start off by removing the adjustment hole plug and the copper washer.

 Rotate the rear wheel to align the adjustment hole with the outer clutch basket.

 Next, move the kick starter slowly until you find the adjustment bolt that was clearly

 The reason for marking the bolt is so that you do not adjust the same bolt more than

 You will also notice that you can do the whole clutch adjustment while the bike is on the

 center stand because the oil line is lower than the adjustment hole.

 Now use an 8mm T-handle to turn the bolt in or out a desired amount of clicks until you've

 Refer to your owner's manual for all clutch adjustment specifications.

 Again, rotate the kick starter slowly until you reach the next adjustment bolt.

 Once you finish, reinstall your adjustment hole plug and you are ready to go out and

 Be sure to check out our website, WMR1.com, and if you have any questions, feel free to

 The last leg of this bracelet video and what I'd done I cleaned it all up and now we're

I've always tried to do it by hand but this stuff is a lot thicker than

 see if I hold these up how much more that I have to bend it around.

 to cinch them down together so I can eyeball it up and try to make them even as possible.

 That's the big thing because if they're not even they don't fit on your wrist right.

 needs to get tweaked down a little bit which I can still do here.

 And then I'm going to have to do some work on the vice over there.

 be just one more little short video of maybe the finished product if it all works out good

 little bit extra tag piece on here with the weld that I can always cut off if it's a little

I don't know if you can see it yet or not but my little piece of bar is all been

 out of shape already just from that little bit of twisting that we've done.

So I'll check back in when I get it tweaked a little bit further.

 Hi everyone, tonight I'm going to give you guys a nail tutorial on how to apply lace

 I started with the Sally Hansen Thicken Up Straightening Nail Thickener.

 I first apply a nice coat of this to my bare nails, clean nails.

 This keeps them strong and it also keeps them very pliable so they don't break easy.

 Then I put a coat of, this is by Milani, and this is called Disco Lights.

 This prepares your nail, gives it the base before you apply the lace on top.

 You want it to be a little bit bigger so you can cut around it afterwards.

 I'd also like to show you guys the scissors that I'm working with.

 They're very fine tip, therefore you can get really close in onto the edges.

 Then you'll want to take your tweezers, pick up the piece of lace, and apply it on.

 Now I like to go ahead and pat it down with my fingers so that it sticks really nice.

 Be aware that the clear nail polish does dry pretty quickly, so you're going to want to

 Then I'm going to go around the edges, paying attention to my nail.

 You're going to want to have lace that has a little bit of stretch in case you need to

 Just a note, if you guys want to practice this and you don't necessarily have lace around,

 Often lacy underwears are the ones that get the holes in them first, so that's what I

 I just grabbed an older pair that had a hole in it already and started chopping it up.

 Now that I have pretty much cut the lace off of the edges, what I'm going to do is

 Then I go ahead and take my finger, press around the edges a little bit.

 If you still can feel the roughness of the lace on top, I suggest keep applying coats

 throughout the day or even maybe wait until the next morning and apply another thick coat.

 These are my natural nails, but it provides a lot of strength for them.

 To order a complete battery replacement kit, please visit our website at NewPower99.com.

 Begin by using the special tool provided in your kit from NewPower99.com to separate your TomTom from its back cover.

 Gently peel back the label as shown to reveal the original battery.

 Place your new battery into the device, being sure to adjust the wires properly.

 Turn on your TomTom with its newly installed battery from NewPower99.com.

Be sure to charge the device for at least 2 hours before continuing to use.

 OK, I'll find the little cover that goes over top of the seat back release handle.

 This cable... I'm not farting, that's me sitting on the door frame.

 Same as adjusting a cable on a bicycle, a brake cable or anything on a bicycle or on a motorcycle.

You can actually see through here, this is where they attach to the bottom

 No, I'll do that later because I'm running out of light and I don't want to finish this.

 I might as well do a video on that tomorrow when I fix the other side.

The creases are a little darker in the video than they are in person.

 Hey guys, so this week I'm going to be talking to you about dumbbell pressing.

 The same principles will apply to benching and just like squatting, there's not one correct

 There's different styles for different methods and different training purposes.

 Just one thing before I get started, a lot of you guys have seen my pressing the 125

 pound dumbbells for reps and in that video a lot of you guys are saying, wow you look

 Here's actually a clip of the 125 pound dumbbells in my gym compared to the size of the 25's.

 As you can see it's actually quite a large difference but anyways let's get into the

 So first thing when doing this is you want to bring your shoulder blades back and what

 this does actually helps give you a more stable foundation for when you're pressing,

 decreases the needed amount of range of motion and helps protect your shoulders during the

 So then you're going to bring the weight back and the next point we're going to be talking

 This is done by a lot of powerlifters and people who are trying to push their max because

 it shortens the range of motion of your bench and helps you drive more when your feet are

 Another quick point I do want to talk about when doing this arc is doing incline dumbbell

 Some people they arc so much to the point where on an incline they're essentially flat

 You want your feet firmly planted in the ground and this is because this will give you a more

 secure base and you're going to be using your leg muscles to drive into the ground transferring

 that energy from your thighs to your back and thus to the bar helping you actually push

 So when doing this method you're going to bring your elbows in towards your body to

 the point where essentially the elbows or dumbbell or barbell is lining up with the

 There's various ways that people like doing this, some like pressing it towards their

 I find that a direct path along the bottom of your chest line is the safest way to go

 With this exercise your range of motion should be to the point where the bar basically touches

 Now that being said, if you cannot go this low because your shoulder is tight, do not

 go this low because the point where you feel a stretch on your shoulder, that is the point

 But if that is the case, start incorporating some stretch training to allow you to hit

 So the style I just showed you is more of a powerlifter strength training style as that

 My preferred method will not allow you to push as much as that, but I find it gives

 If you look at how the chest is actually built and connected, it's connected at your clavicle,

 And from there, I don't know if you can see this, but the muscle fibers run from where

 it's connected right to your upper humerus and basically your upper arm.

 So whereas the traditional style you're going to be pressing like this with your shoulder

 blades back, chest up, a lot of that load is transferred onto your triceps themselves,

 allowing you to do more of a combination movement that helps you push your maximum lifts.

 If you were to press like I do, which is a complete T, you can see how the muscle fibers

 So I'm actually still going to be pulling my shoulder blades back, but the first step

 you're going to notice that I'm not doing is I'm not going to be focusing on creating

 The arc that I do have is just the natural curvature of my spine.

 Feet are still planted on the ground, but they're only there to just stabilize me.

 I'm no longer pushing from them to provide that driving action as now all the load is

 It is very important to watch your range of motion when doing this style of dumbbell pressing.

 You'll see here that I'm pressing the point where I'm just above parallel because with

 this style, your chest is essentially already pre-stretched out.

 And if you were to go below parallel, you'd be transferring a lot of that weight onto

 your front deltoids, front shoulders, and deloading your chest, which is not our goal.

 You're going to get a lot of people in the gym telling you that if you don't go past

 Let them get injured because again, we're not in the gym to move weight.

 So if I want to get a greater stretch on my chest, I will do an exercise such as chest

 I do not need to get that extra centimeter of stretch on my chest with this exercise.

 When doing this exercise, you want to always have your forearm perpendicular to the ground.

 You never want to bring it in or bring it out because if you bring it in and the weight's

 too heavy, say your grip gives out, you can actually drop that weight on your chest.

 If you bring it out, you can now stretch your shoulders and tear your rotator cuff and you

 do not want to tear your rotator cuff because if you tear that, you are out of the gym for

 That being said, when doing this exercise, if there's nobody around you and you need

 Do not try to save it by putting it down slowly because you do not want to stretch your shoulders

 And again, like I said before, neither of these methods are right or wrong.

 You will still achieve size and strength from using both methods, just each one is more

 If you are going to be trying this out and you're used to the traditional style of benching

 And what I mean by that is lift light until you can lift right.

 So start off with lighter weights until you can actually feel through the range of motion

 If you have any questions, comments, or ideas, hit me up on my Facebook, which is down below,

 And now when the milk is warm and the yeast is dissolved, we reserve.

 To check if it's ready, you take the knife, you pick inside till the end, and after you see if the dough is on the knife.

 And see you soon for the next recipe, and enjoy this delicious brioche.

 The video you're about to see will demonstrate professional cleaning products and will take

 the mystery out of the best way to get the results you want to achieve.

 My goal is to dramatically cut your cleaning time so that you will have more time for the

 And remember, just because you know how to use the product doesn't mean that you need

 What I'd like to talk to you about right now is maintaining stone.

 Everybody thinks that stone, because it's so hard, is impervious.

 People often ask me, Rich, how do I tell if stone is sealed or unsealed?

 You take a bead of water, like a little glass with water in it, and pour it on it.

 If the water disappears and the beads go into the stone, it's unsealed.

 It's important when you maintain stone that you use the right product.

 First of all, I'm going to tell you some products to never, ever, ever, ever use on stone.

 It's a highly polished stone, and you use an acidic product, which acidic is many of

 your bowl cleaners, your bathroom cleaners, vinegar, tomatoes are very acidic.

 Those type products, if you put them on granite or marble, will do what we call is etch the

 Unfortunately, it's hard to restore that shine without going through the honing process or

 One is a spray cleaner that you use with a paper towel, and the other one is the same

 I like that one a little bit better because to me it seems like I waste less and it's

 I like this because it not only will safely clean your granite or marble, but it'll leave

 it with a beautiful shine, and it actually conditions the stone.

 You'll probably see a real nice shine on it, but it wasn't like it was abused.

 You just wipe it down, and I think you'd agree it shines very nicely.

 Oftentimes, folks will set a glass down, and you'll get a glass ring on your granite or

 your marble, and then you'll use this product, and it won't take it off.

 If it won't take it off, I just want you to know there are products available for glass

 Basically, you apply a little bit on, and you buff it with your fingers, and it's a

 It doesn't damage the finish, but what it does is it helps buff out that glass ring

 If you'd like to try this solution for yourself, I recommend purchasing the products from CleaningSolutionsSuperStore.com.

 I've chosen them because of their great prices and the excellent customer service.

 If you found this video helpful, remember to share it with a friend.

 These nachos are perfect for an after school snack, because you as the parents can kind of help out a little bit the night before,

And then when the kids get home, they can kind of just do it all on their own.

 So to get started on these pita nachos, what I'm going to do is I have a pita bread here.

 And what I'm going to do is I'm just going to slice it in half, half moon.

 And then I'm just going to kind of cut them into quarter, or into um...

 Then if, what you can do Maria, is go ahead and cut it in half.

 Then if, what you can do Maria, is go ahead and just gently open it up and break it in half.

So we broke up the pita and made them kind of into little chips.

 Unless your kids are old enough and they know how to do the oven and you don't have to worry about it.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to pop these under the broiler until they get kind of a little golden brown.

 And now I'm just going to add on some of my favorite toppings of a nacho.

 Now we just have to put these nachos into the microwave for the cheese to melt.

 And all you have to do is put it in there until the cheese is all melted.

 The crunchiness of the pita, you've got to be sure to broil them and brown them before you start adding the toppings.

 But as she said earlier, you can add really whatever you want to it.

And when you come home from school, you're always starving anyway.

 Alright, well before we finish diving into these delicious nachos that Maria made,

 we are going to send you guys, our friends, to our website, amateurkitchen.tv

 to find all of our recipes and videos, including this delicious snack one

 and many other after school snacks or any other healthy snacks for that matter,

 And we want you guys to click the like button or the follow button

 And we also have been hooked up from our dear friends, iFood.tv,

 So if you have a Roku box, go ahead and type in Amateur Kitchen

 and we will be at the palm of your hands and on your TV for you to see.

 It has the nutritional facts with it too, which is what we love.

 And we want to see all of you guys right back here again next time on...

 Dude, I've noticed for years that you've carried around a coffee can for cooking.

 Well, it's convenient, it's free, and it works as well as anything else you're going to use for a pot.

I have a photo of me, or my mother probably has a photo of me, cooking with one of these when I was 12 years old.

But what I've done is use olive oil on the outside and the inside every time I've used it.

 So I use it, I cook something in it, and you can bake in these and everything.

 And a lot of people are worried about what's lined on the inside.

 If you're worried about it, take the can, put it upside down over a fire,

 Put it here on the, over a little, some coals, and let it heat up just a little.

 You don't want it to get to the point where it's going to be too hot to handle.

 Because what we're going to do, we're going to wipe some olive oil to start with on the inside and the outside.

 You know, whether it's actually going inside the metal or not, I don't know.

 Because what you do, you use it that way when you do cast iron.

 So what we're going to do, for my delicate hands, we're going to take, and we're going to get a little bit of olive oil that I have cleverly concealed in my magic pill bottle.

 And all you need to do is pour just a little bit in the bottom.

 Then what we're going to do, we're going to put this back over the fire.

 And, cleverly concealed here, in a modern container from the creek.

 Once the water gets hot, we're going to take and swirl that around inside, so it helps the olive oil kind of set into the can.

 So, you'll boil the water, you'll take it back out, pour out the water.

 And I would suggest you start off cooking like soups and things like that.

 After you've cooked soup three or four times, you can try something greasy, like chicken or a pig.

 Now, speaking of cooking, if I recall correctly, we were at winter count maybe about six years ago.

 Am I fantasizing here, or did we not manage to get twelve eggs in one can?

 So you could actually cook a half a dozen eggs easily in one of these.

 And sometimes when you're going to go out for a while, I've even carried two of these.

 So if you accidentally destroy it, you're not going to feel like you've lost out a lot of money.

 Camping equipment today is so expensive that it's cost prohibitive.

 You know, I was handling one of those, and I'd be surprised if it weighed more than 3 or 4 ounces.

 And when I have one of these in my pack, of course I put things inside of it.

 Speaking of putting it in your pack, do you have a special way of storing it?

 What I do with the black one there, the one that's already done.

 Because when you get done cooking, you're not going to sit around with all the olive oil.

 And I put the can in there, double-list over it, and put it in my bag and go.

 There's always this mystique about hobo stoves and hobo cooking and so on.

 This is just part of that kind of tin set, if you will, that you can utilize.

 It looks like it's a perfect throwback to the type of camping that you like to do, which is traditional type camping.

Today we will be making use of some abundant mangoes, making a light

 is tip our raw sugar into the thermoshef jug with our lemon juice.

 start to appear and it's probably a bit frozen on the outside and more liquid in

 quite creamy and we've got to decant it from our thermo chef jug into our

 freezing container again and pop it back into the freezer to solidify.

 check out my Cheeky Richo channel and don't forget to please subscribe, leave a

 Next I just get a bowl of water and wet your hand and just form a one-inch meatball like this.

I have a steamer ready or you have a bamboo steamer will be okay too.

 While the meatball is cooking, we're going to make some sauce to dip with.

And I just realized the meatball is going to have a lot of juice.

 I'm going to steam the broccoli with the meatball at the bottom layer.

 Here's your Asian steamed meatballs with ground chicken and ground pork.

 Hi everyone, welcome back this is your India food recipes dot in.

 3 tsp of sugar, 4-5 ice cubes, pinch of salt, 2 tsp of honey, 5-6 tsp of thick curd, 2-5

 Now I am going to place just a tsp of vanilla ice cream on the top.

It should, because of the handle here, float in the middle pretty

I'm gonna cover it up with the hole with the black trash bag here and then

 make sure that I have a little seashell in the middle of my black trash bag.

 And hopefully we'll create a still and create fresh water out of salt water.

 the trash bag, put some sand around the top of it, and put a rock or something in

 know where I'm gonna put the seashell, excuse me, on top of the trash bag to

 made sure using this seashell right here to create a focal point in the middle.

I'm going to set my watch, check it, in 30 minutes and an hour to see how

 Baking sheet, tomato paste, whole wheat bread, cookie cutter, butter, sliced tomato, grated

 Lastly, sprinkle grated carrot to give your funny pizza face some hair.

 Now first of all you might be wondering why would I want to make that?

 Well one of the benefits of a green smoothie is that everyone knows that fruits and vegetables

 are good for you, everyone knows that vegetables are particularly good for you, especially

 green vegetables, and yet most people when they are not used to eating them, when they

 think about eating them, the sort of automatic gut response is like bleurgh.

 Now there's reasons for this, one of the reasons why when people are used to eating

 a lot of processed foods and they suddenly switch to eating more fibrous foods like vegetables

 they get a lot of intestinal complaints, maybe flatulence and stuff like this, is because

 So after years of abuse of the stomach, which was the spleen meridian, just can't cope with

 the amount of fibre that is in the average salad or in like even some steamed vegetables,

 so it rebels and it sends signals to you saying don't eat that, don't eat that.

 So we have a green smoothie because basically all that fibre is already nicely broken up

 Also it's giving the stomach an easy job basically because the stomach's job is to break everything

 down to the point where it ends up like a soup or a smoothie, so you're just saving

 it that work, which gives it a chance to rest, heal, recover and not be strained anymore.

 The other good thing about having a green smoothie is that you're throwing in quite

 often superfoods, green superfoods, it's an excellent opportunity to do that, things like

 We see these things and we think ok yeah they might be good for me but what the hell do

 I do with it and I've had many clients who recommend these things to them and they tell

 So we're going to show you in a minute a recipe to show you how to actually use these things.

 Now the word green smoothie is a little bit of a misnomer in my opinion because when we

 think of smoothie we usually think of sweet and we think of fruit.

 Personally when I first came across the concept I did try the recipes which were things like

 banana and kale, papaya and spinach and found them to be frankly disgusting, as my facial

 I thought about this and I thought well if I were to eat spinach how would I eat it?

 I probably have a spinach lasagna maybe or spinach and nutmeg soup and I thought ah spinach

 So I started to make savoury ones and I found that with the right combination of ingredients

 which I'm going to show you in a bit, they were actually delicious, they were actually

 So if you follow along with me you'll find that it's really simple to make one, they

 can be absolutely delicious and if you go to the website and sign up to the newsletter

 then I'll also give you a free mini ebook which gives you a series of recipes about

 all the different ways that you can make them so there's a little bit of variety so you

 can have them every day and believe me having them every day is fantastic.

 I would not go a day without them if I possibly could now, I absolutely love them.

 So here we have everything we need for an absolutely delicious, nutritious green smoothie.

 So we've got the blender, particularly a cheap and nasty one this time just to prove it's

 We've got some watercress, lemon, some salt, some nice Celtic grey sea salt and as you

 can tell it doesn't pour very easily, it's kind of thick and lumpy, that's because it's

 We've got my seafood green smoothie mix that I'm using at the moment, this is a combination

 of florella, kelp, my two favourite star superfood smoothie ingredients, as well as

 some acerola berry powder for vitamin C and a little bit of dried schizandra berry powder

 With the lemon all I've done is just got my big chopping knife here and I've just cut

 the rind off around it and left a little bit of the white pith on the side which is

 With the avocado I've just cut it in half and removed the stone, the watercress is as

 it is and I've just chopped off about half of that bunch of parsley and I've filled up

 So I'm going to get my parsley, put that in, get my watercress, put that in.

 So all I'll do now is just get the lemon, chuck that in there with the water and the

 greens, get the avocado and this is a neat trick, rather than going through all the effort

 of peeling it, just give it a good squeeze, squeeze out the contents, you know, just for

 And then I'm going to add some salt, I'm going to add about this much, about a quarter of

 a tablespoon, no, it's got to be a bit less than that, yeah, about a quarter of a tablespoon,

 I'm also going to add some green superfood powder, that's a nice heaped tablespoon, I'll

 Now all I've got to do is put the lid on, again, hard to do with one hand, but possible.

 If I can do this one handed, you can do this with two hands, honestly.

 So, you know, it's really not difficult to make a green smoothie.

 I just wanted to show you it's possible with one of these blenders that's very cheap and

 You don't need a vice to make it, you don't need a blend tech or any of these really expensive

 In this country, the UK, you can get one for ten pounds, in America I'm sure you can get

 one for about ten dollars, ten bucks, and that's it, green smoothie's made.

 It's got a thick consistency, if it's a little bit too thick and you don't like it like that

 There we go, simple as can be, green smoothie, delicious and nutritious.

Today I'm going to share a little tip with you guys that a lot of

 people really don't know about, a lot of people really don't understand.

 little tip is the cause of a lot of failures in monitors and ham radios, CB

 horizontal output transistor or flyback driver fails, you replace it and it seems

 can, this glue here holding the wire, glue on this form back here.

 glue becomes conductive over time and this glue is found in so many modern

I'll touch, you know, the board, touch the transformer here, both

 something and that glue is touching the gate lead on a FET and it's, you know,

 adjacent piece is a high voltage part, that's gonna turn that FET on or off or

 we can see that this glue is gonna be quite destructive in any kind of high

 all the bad ICs but, yeah, just better to use it for coils and stuff like that.

 So there's a whole bunch of VRs on it that I used for parts and pieces and

 about this glue going conductive but it seems to be so prevalent in high voltage

 I say, it starts out as a yellow colored, kind of a custardy color, and it'll go to

 a dark chocolatey brown or kind of like a burnt pastry crust color.

 something brand new and it's still yellow, you want to get it out of there

 before it starts discoloring or it will, you know, self-destruct itself.

 you enjoyed it, give it a thumbs up, subscribe, and I'll have all sorts of

 I don't know if you're ready, but whether you're ready or not, it's happening right...

 We got here, right here, two full and ripe California-grown avocados.

 Um, this is of the mild variety, but you can go with medium or hot either way.

 And, uh, it's not actually my, uh, salsa recipe unless you use this lemon.

 So, if you wanna make this at home, you're gonna have to, you know, do a little road trip, come over to my house, take some lemons.

 Just sort of, you can sort of use the bowl and smash it against the side of the bowl.

 My rule with the lemon is you put in as many wedges as you have avocados.

 So we put in two avocados, which means we're gonna use two, two,

 My mom once had an ex-boyfriend, and he came over to our Christmas party unannounced,

 So when you're learning a scale all over the fretboard, it's true that you only really have to learn one pattern.

 Now of course C major would be a different pattern all over the neck than G major,

 Each of the notes of the scale, C, D, E, F, G, A, B, would be a different mode if you started that mode.

 Just like we have a chord, you have your C chord, you can play C inversion of a C, but you're in a little bit different position.

 The next mode is Dorian, starting on the second degree, which in this case is D.

 The fifth mode is called Mixolydian, starting on the fifth degree, or in this case G.

 And the sixth mode is called Aeolian, or that's also the minor, in this key A minor.

 And finally the seventh mode is called Locrian, starting on the seventh degree, or the B.

 So the way I just played it, it all kind of sounds the same maybe.

 But each of these modes has specific characteristics, and they can be used in all kinds of different musical situations and contexts.

 So I just wanted to give you the basic concept, and next time we'll go deeper into how to use some of these modes.

 So just to demonstrate the different characteristics, like this major scale, I already showed you the major and minor.

 All the same notes, we're all just playing C, D, E, F, G, A, B, but I'm emphasizing a different starting point for that scale.

 Hey, it's Jason Robel here on the J-Wro Show, bringing you another

 I actually get a farm box, if you guys have that in your area, please check

 single week, and I love to construct recipes around fresh local seasonal

 It's completely raw, vegan, gluten-free, super fresh and crunchy, and I'm

 So, the star of our recipe is the often loved, much maligned broccoli,

 So if you're looking for a plant-based source of protein, broccoli and

 cauliflower are the cruciferous crusaders in the protein realm.

 And so we've got about a pound here of florets, and what I want you to do is

 add these straight to a mixing bowl, and then go ahead and combine that with

 Now what I want to do before I add the rest of the ingredients is make my

 What I want you to do is grab a small to medium mixing bowl and a whisk

 So we're going to start with a quarter cup of your favorite oil.

 In this case, I've got a blend of olive oil and sacha inchi oil.

 Next up, I'm going to add one tablespoon of lemon juice to the mix, and then

 You guys might want to start with a few pinches and just add as you go,

 If you guys can't find a coconut vinegar, you could always substitute a

 A little pinch of black pepper, and then one teaspoon of Himalayan

 Now go ahead and take your whisk and give this a nice vigorous whisking

 until you get kind of like a nice, almost milky consistency here.

 All right, so at this point, what we're going to do is combine the dressing

 And ideally, you want to let this sit for about an hour in the fridge,

 because what it's going to do is the vinaigrette is going to start to break

 down the broccoli and get a little bit softer, a little more al dente-ish,

 I also like to add a sprinkle of my Sun Warrior Liquid Vitamin Mineral Rush.

 This has all your essential trace minerals, very neutral tasting,

 so it goes great in a salad, in a salad dressing, or even your morning smoothie.

 so I'm going to add a few tablespoons here, about three to four ounces

 All right, now let's give it a taste and see if we need to adjust anything here.

 Has a nice zingy tang to it, the great crunch of the hazelnuts.

 So if you guys dug my fresh broccoli salad, give this video a thumbs up

 I'd love to know in the comments below and maybe create a version of your

 So this is Jason Robo here on the J-Wro Show, and I'm rocking out with the Sun

 Warrior tribe, bringing you delicious vegan recipes and vibrant living tips

 And if you guys haven't subscribed yet, please subscribe here and also

 subscribe to Sun Warrior's channel for awesome daily workout tips and

 I'm going to enjoy the rest of this amazing broccoli salad and plate it up

 And I will catch you guys really soon with another awesome summertime fresh

 So if it does happen to make you flatulent, I suggest steaming this.

 Yes, steaming it will actually help remove some of the compounds that lead

 So if you get farts when it's raw, steam it up and you won't be steaming up

 150g butter, 150g sugar, 3 eggs, 75g flour, 3 1⁄4 tsp baking powder, 55g flour, 20g

 All of these are great living mulches that create microclimates,

 Today I'll explain to you how to change the ink cartridge on a Canon printer.

 So we'll start with showing you how to operate the printer to remove the cartridge.

 This is the Canon with the fine printer which says right here MP280.

 The printer when you open this it shows you OK to change the cartridges.

 So as you can see, I'll just show you here on my computer, ink status.

 When it gives you a message, see right now it's telling me the holder is open.

 You just flip it open, it pops the lid and just simply remove the old cartridge.

 Now watch it because underneath, these guys right here, don't touch that with your fingers

 OK, so in this cartridge, this machine, there's two cartridges that you can put.

 The 2XL is much better because it's got almost twice the amount of ink into it.

 And then this guy, and this is 20 some dollars and this is like 28 dollars.

 And what you have to do also is the old orange tab, this little guy here, you just remove it.

 So all you have to do is simply, you just go like this, clink, clink.

 So I'll just go slowly, but there's not too much sliding in here.

 OK, so I just slide it in here like this and that's it, she's done.

 To close this, you just push on it like this, just close it back.

 And there's going to be a message here saying, oh, voila, see it disappeared.

 This is another of my tutorials, how to take care of your printer.

 So tell me more, because I'm a computer technician, and I'll give you tips how to take care of

 So next time I have a computer to fix, whether the problem, what it is, doesn't matter.

 I'll take two seconds, I'll grab this handy old handy camera, which I like it.

 By the way, if you're wondering how come the picture quality is so nice, it's this, I'll

 Ask all you want about PCs, networking, Wi-Fi, to hook it up, your cell phone, your Xbox,

 doesn't matter what you want to hook your computer, and I'll answer you.

 So last week we put together, or we learned how to create a pattern for our individual bust sizes for the bustier.

 It should be a very quick video because all we're doing is putting it together.

 I would like to mention, however, that I, because of the fabric that I used, had to cut out the pattern three times.

 One for the main fabric, which is going to be red in honor of Valentine's Day.

 And then I had an underlining fabric because the red fabric was so transparent, which I think I conveyed in the video.

 Sometimes thoughts turn to the boom, boom, boom, but the living room.

 I would suggest that you take your time with this, but do a lining.

 Because when you do a lining, it makes it look so much more professional.

 So, if you're going to add something at the bottom, like a peplum or something,

 there are plenty of tutorials out there about how to make peplums.

 But you would prepare your peplum in the same way that you would prepare your regular fashion fabric.

 So, for instance, I used an underlining on my fashion fabric, the red.

 I used an underlining on it because it was so see-through and thin.

 So if I use that for the regular part, then I'm going to use it for the peplum part.

 Because I want it to be reversible, I did the exact same thing to the lining that I'm doing to the red part.

 Sometimes, you know, the beauty of doing things on your own is to style it up a little bit

 and make it look like something that nobody else will ever have.

 Otherwise, why else get into something where you can make the same thing somebody else is making?

 So, on that note, I had hoped to have this video out a lot sooner,

 but I wasn't sure whether I was going to continue and continue showing it to the end

 Lord knows I've tried for the longest this whole bustier top thing and this is it.

 Good morning this is Boynton Stew and today I'm going to demonstrate a three

 minute method of making cappuccino without any fancy equipment.

 milk, here's my coffee grinder, we've got sugar, this is my aero press and this is

I'm going to take about, oh about that much, a little less than a full scoop, into my very inexpensive coffee grinder.

 Incidentally, this is a polyester filter that I've been using with the aero press and I've had this for three years.

 size filtration on this side, no coffee grounds will go through it and there's a rougher side on this side.

 This is doing what a steam wand would do in an espresso machine.

I'm going to let you guys all put your hands in here when it's all done.

 I got some Mexican hot chili if you want to add that shit in there.

 Oh wait, one, two, three, four, the fourth one we're going to cut.

 Before you start setting block, make sure that the slab or footing is clean and smooth.

 to be within a quarter inch of dead level to avoid correction work.

 working on a step footer, it's a good idea to have it step in 16 inch increments.

 you from having to cut partial height forms to follow the contour.

 measurements and clean lines to mark the outside or inside of the form.

 being scuffed while working or blurred by water, some builders give them a light coat of fast

After making the chalk lines, it's also a good practice to mark the locations of

 not required, some builders cut PVC collars to go around the dowels.

 the vertical rebar is being inserted from the top of the form, these collars capture the vertical

 sure they're plumb and set the kickers in a way that they can be adjusted later on if the bucks

To keep the work area clear, it's a good idea for the kickers to be run to the outside.

Hold off cutting the final block until everything is on the mark

Remember, this first course will be the model on which all other courses are built.

 something is off with the first course, you can be sure it won't get better as you stack higher.

 Zip tie or wire together the top connectors of all adjacent blocks, one to the next, to pull

Builders often fit an eco block straight panel over each first course joint

 touch short so you don't push everything off the mark by wedging it in place.

 more than eight inches between the webs, either cut a piece of 1x4 and screw it into the adjacent

 webs for reinforcement or mark the joint for reinforcing at a later time.

Number four and number five rebar will snap into the notches on the connectors.

 There are many schools of thought as to how close or far apart pieces of rebar should be and how

Go by the methods you're accustomed to, following the building codes for

 It's very important and it's the first part of any cooking when you are cutting anything,

 This doesn't sharpen the knife, but it's going to straighten the edge.

 When I start out, I'm just going to give this a couple swipes on the steel to check.

 If sharp, I'm going to take the finger and lightly bring it over the top of the blade.

 I know a lot of these utensils don't look like the Chef's Academy issued utensils, but

 A lot of times when you're using basil, you're going to find the chiffonade cut.

 What we like to do is gather some of the basil, or I'm sorry, spinach.

 After I get a little stack, I'm going to place them on the cutting board.

 The tip of the knife is staying on the board, and I'm slicing, touching the knife with the

 You get in a hurry in the kitchen, and that's when you start cutting yourself.

 Once you get all of your ingredients positioned, you can really start to speed up.

 In order to get the fine ribbons, I've got to make more smaller cuts, nice and close

 What's up ladies and gents, Brandon Crowe, Ben Pekulski going to demonstrate active range

 One thing that's important to note, when I talk about active range of motion, it's really

 So what we're going to do today is we're going to teach you the active range for triceps

 and you can actually learn the bicep by flipping it on its end.

 So back here is a fully contracted tricep and this is a fully lengthened tricep.

 This is fully lengthened bicep, this is fully, sorry, this is fully shortened bicep, this

 So simple to remember if you remember that they're antagonist muscle groups.

 So we're going to show you how to work a tricep through its entire contractile range without

 So at the bottom of the range back here, this cable is about 90 degrees to your arm

 We're going to have Brandon do some reps here, so the fatigues.

 Shortened tricep, always work the shortened end of the range first, always or optimally

 Now you notice when he gets to about the middle of the range, there's a 90 degree angle there.

 So as you can imagine, at a 90 degree angle that's going to be most difficult.

 Whereas if it's here, it's pulling me straight out so there's not a lot of tension on my

 And as that cable gets closer to my body, it actually becomes easier.

 Now he's going to walk in further and you notice there it's 90 degrees so he's a little

 Once he's fatigued there, we're going to have him flip around and now work it from its fully

 So we've just done four exercises in one, in one set and really extended our time under

 So we're going to maintain that tension on that working muscle, take it through its entire

 Brandon's trying to drive his feet through the floor so he prevents any extraneous movement.

 Good, so you notice here, because this is the beginning of the exercise, first set,

 tension is really strong so he's trying to work his shortest part of the tricep first.

 When your muscle is shortest, it's weakest so we want to work that first when we're strong

 As he fatigues it in the shortened range, he's able to step forward and actually continue

 As you can see, now that cable gets kind of close to his arm there, it's actually relative

 to his elbow so now it's closer so the weight will actually be less or the resistance will

 And now once Brandon's fatigued there, he's going to spin around and lengthen his tricep

 So he's just changed the relative shoulder position of his exercise and completely changed

 And you notice he can keep going even though he may have pre-exhausted with the other ones

 because we know that the more lengthened the muscle is, it's actually closer to its strongest

 So we just worked a tricep through his entire contractile range with basically one exercise.

 Really, really important to note, when you're training your triceps and your biceps, they're

 I've seen a lot of people doing bicep curls that look like that.

 Sure you can change the relative position of your shoulder, but it's not a shoulder

 You notice a lot of people on the overhead type stuff, or even on the push downs, tend

 Active range of motion for the working muscle, not some extraneous muscle that we're not

 If you want to learn more about how to train your arms, or any body part for that matter,

 We've got some awesome body part specialization programs coming at you.

 Today we're going to give you guys a little bit of insight into what actually a primer

 It's a matter of engaging the working muscle first, maintaining a full contractile range

 Next, fold these corners down to the middle line, making it a point.

 Next, take this piece right here and fold this point to the center line, like so.

 trying to make the same amount of distance on these wings here.

 Next, after that, because they're right here, they're kind of opening up.

 If it's kind of going downward, if you want it to go up a little bit,

 take your finger here and pull this up and make a little flap there.

 Now inside, you'll see the air will hit this and it'll push it up.

 This one, you can do whatever you've got to do to make them fly right.

 You're proud of your pool and you want it to be a welcome escape for your family and

 The Clorox Pool and Spa Easy 1-2-3 Pool Care Brand System has made it simple to maintain

 Unexpected rainstorms, heat waves, pool parties and other events can cause a major strain

 Prepare for the unexpected by testing your water regularly and adjusting within the Clorox

 But if you find yourself in the middle of a water changing event, these simple steps

 Rainstorms can bring rain, leaves and other debris into your pool.

 This can lead to cloudy water, algae growth, water overflow and clogged skimmers or filters.

 If you know a storm or natural disaster is likely to happen and you have time, test and

 balance your pool then cover it to prevent debris from entering.

 If you don't have time to prepare, remove debris from your pool and skimmer and clean

 Then shock your pool using Clorox Pool and Spa Shock Extra Blue to get rid of unwanted

 High temperatures may lead to low chlorine levels, low water levels and even algae growth.

 When it's really hot outside, test using Clorox Pool and Spa Multi-Use Smart Strips and adjust

 Remember all Clorox Pool and Spa chlorinating products include stabilizers so they are protected

 Add a Clorox Pool and Spa AlgaeCide to help fight off algae growth.

 And while pool parties are fun, swimmers bring sunscreen, lotions, sweat, makeup and all

 This can be stressful on your pool system and may use up chlorine or cause the water

 The day before the party, be sure to test and adjust your water and brush all surfaces.

 After your party, retest and adjust levels, shock the water and brush again.

 Pools can be a valuable addition to any home if they are properly maintained.

 So be prepared with the Clorox Pool and Spa EZ-123 Pool Care Brand System.

 it's, I'll give you the base recipe and then you can adapt it to whatever kind

 used this recipe for carrot muffins with ground up carrots and raisins.

 I'm just going to fill my muffin tin here with eight muffin cups.

 you're going to add two cups of almond flour to a bowl and then to that you're

 that in and then stir it up and then this is where you can add any spices

If you want to do cinnamon or a nutmeg, allspice, anything like that.

 I am going to opt out of using any spices because I don't think it needs it

Okay, I just added four eggs to the bowl and now I'm going to add in a

 then I'm also going to add about a tablespoon or two of maple syrup.

 could also use honey if you wanted, you could use brown sugar if you wanted.

 prefer to use maple syrup just because that's just what I have in the house.

 basic muffin recipe and then you can add, like I said, any other types of

 dice up some apples or put in some applesauce and some cinnamon.

 cranberries if you do cranberries, currants, anything like that.

And then you're just gonna plop it into a muffin tin and you're gonna do

 just gonna bake this at 350 for about 20 minutes until the edges are brown.

 Okay, let them cool in the pan for a half hour and they're done.

 If you are ready for some football, you will love this Eagle Fly Philly Cheesesteak.

 Make sure that you let your ribeye sit on paper towels and paper towels on top.

 This is going to allow it to be dry and it's going to help that rub adhere to that meat

 We're also going to rest it for about 20 minutes before throwing it on a grill or seasoning

 If you're ever seasoning or pre-seasoning something like beef or any type of product,

 So what we're going to do now is grab some Snyder's Prime Rib Roast Rub.

 So if you happen to have a grill that has hot spots, that's where you want to drop your

 ribeye because we don't want to cook these completely all the way through.

 We're going to slice them before they get cooked and throw them back on the grill on

 Next, we're going to drop them over extreme high heat on that sear station.

 And we like spinning them around to make sure we get a nice caramelized crust on both sides.

 Once you get a really nice crust, you guys see this right here?

 Once you see that really nice crust, you want to drop it back on to the other side and do

 Once both sides get crusty, you want to take this off the heat.

 So once both sides are nicely caramelized, just like that, put them on a cutting board.

 Make sure you rest them for about three minutes before you slice into them.

 Just every minute, just give them a little flip just like so, so they can rest evenly.

 So normally, whenever it comes to eating a piece of steak from the grill, you always

 want to rest it for about five to ten minutes, depending on the size of that protein.

 We're going to throw it back on that cast iron skillet and we're going to reheat it.

 This is still raw in the center, so we're going to slice it after about three minutes

 So the reason we're slicing it this thin is because we're going to throw it back on the

 grill after all the onions, the bell peppers, and the mushrooms are cooked.

 And it's just going to take about 20 seconds of this steaming to finish it off.

 And normally, when you get a Philly cheesesteak, you get really thin slices of meat.

 So we're going to be utilizing the cast iron skillet here to saute our onions, mushrooms,

 First thing you want to do is make sure you oil your skillet just a little bit.

 And the reason I drop the onions first is they need a little more time to caramelize.

 Once they start sweating just a little bit, you're going to go ahead and add the rest

 Once you see a little caramelization here on your bell peppers and your onions, you

 want to go ahead and grab your mushrooms and drop them directly right on there.

 You're going to go ahead and grab your rolls and just drop them on the top like so.

 So once everything's caramelized, you're going to go ahead and grab your beef.

 So now you're going to grab your meat, your cheese, your veggies, just drop them right

 To finish it off, all I'm going to do is just top it off with a little bit of sea salt right

 out on page 29, which is in the manual that should came with your car.

 it should be this white or yellow piece or whatever on the switch.

 down, turn it on, and then you're gonna let go, and then you're gonna press it once if

 you have the NIMH, and then you're gonna press it twice for the LiPo and three times for

 the light, and then you're gonna let go, and then hold it down until it beeps, and then

 it should go back to red or turn off again, or green, whatever it is.

 mad because I didn't break anything, but I don't know, I was driving in my basement,

 which I am right now, and I pressed the gas, and I accidentally turned off the remote,

There should be a hole right here, and then you want to stick the paper

 clip or screwdriver in there until, for a second, let me make sure I'm pressing the

You want to hold it down until it starts blinking, and you're gonna

 let go, and then make sure you're not pressing any gas or turning, and then hold it again,

 and turning off the remote control, and it should start blinking.

Thanks guys, hope this video helped you, and didn't wreck your car early.

 So just go through the manual or whatever, if you ever need help or anything.

 Alright, today I'm going to put a vintage kit in a customer's guitar.

 And along with the mounting templates that I'll use to put everything together on.

 In some of the RS kits you'll see a bunch of different types of ground wire.

 Now, come back and we'll fix this ground that got away from us here.

 I get little pieces of insulation off another bit of wire that I have.

 Welcome back to Unwrapped, I'm Mark Summers, heating things up with hot oil as we explore

 It is no surprise one of the restaurants that always comes up when you're talking about

 But do not ask for their recipe because it's under lock and key.

 When it comes to crispy chicken, no one cooks it up quite like Kentucky Fried Chicken.

 We have wings, we have strips, we have our snacker sandwiches, and of course our chicken

 He actually had a Sanders Corkin Cafe down in Corbin, Kentucky.

 After ten years of experimenting, he created the most famous fried chicken recipe in America.

 He had spent a lot of time not only developing the flavor, but the color, the texture, and

 Then he hit the road to introduce his soon-to-be famous chicken to restaurant owners.

 He put the recipe, a couple of pots, a bag of seasoning in the back of his car and just

 Today it does cost more than a nickel, but the colonel's original recipe is still their

 The colonel's original handwritten recipe is so secret, it's actually locked in a vault

 along with vials containing samples of all 11 herbs and spices.

 And finally, we're going to add the colonel's secret 11 herbs and spices to our mix.

 Such a big secret that not even the people making the mix know what's in it.

 Next it's time to get down and dirty mixing all the ingredients by hand.

 This is a process that involves lifting and folding it 20 times.

 After years of trial and error, KFC has created very specific techniques.

 Now our chicken is ready to be placed on our racks to be fried.

 Colonel Sanders perfected the original recipe chicken by pressure frying his chicken.

 And just like the mystery spices, the temperature and cook time are top secret.

 Today, people all over the world enjoy the Colonel's famous chicken.

 So if you're in another country, you'll still taste that same great flavor that you would

 The recipe has been the same for over 60 years, and there's no plan to change anytime soon.

 Hi, Dan Pazoski here from BuyMeAliveWithoutSteroids.com to talk to you about the foundational gain

 weight drink that you can make that you should use with raw milk.

 And today we're going to use the basics of peanut butter, banana and the raw milk.

 I just want to show you the difference between raw milk and pasteurized milk.

 You can see a total difference in color and I'll tell you what, the potency, the enzymes,

 vitamins and minerals, proteins, much, much better than the raw milk.

 But because it's a weight gain drink, and again here I have one from a Jersey cow, you

 But you want that cream because there's great fats in there which take the calories up

 So you're going to want to mix it up like this and keep it all together because you

 You can use anywhere from 6 to 8 ounces depending on your goal.

 As you can see in my book, I give exact diets of what to use, how much to use on a daily basis.

 You don't want salted peanut butter or peanut butter sugar, nothing like that.

 Now you can either use a fresh banana like this or if you want it to be extra cold and

 Now one more thing I do to make it extra potent is again, a lot of people wouldn't just like

 the banana taste and the peanut butter with the milk although it's creamy and good.

 And then get either chocolate or vanilla and that will give it more flavor.

 Some days you want chocolate, some vanilla just depending on the fruit you're using.

 Again, I tell you how to use this in my book, how many times it takes in a day and some

 You can also email me at mrmichiganatbex.net or visit my site, bodybuildingwithoutsteroids.com.

 Hello, today we are going to be making a batch of delicious mini lemon cakes, which we'll

 For the cupcakes, you will need 3 1⁄2 cups of flour, 1 teaspoon baking soda, 1⁄2 teaspoon

 baking powder, 1⁄2 teaspoon salt, 1 cup of softened butter or margarine, 2 cups of

 Wholesome Sweeteners Organic Sugar, 3 eggs, 3 teaspoons of lemon zest, 1 teaspoon of Nielsen

 In a large mixing bowl, add the Wholesome Sweeteners Organic Sugar and softened butter

 Then mix the dry ingredients in alternately with the sour cream, making sure to uniformly

 Prepare a muffin tray with paper muffin cups and fill each of them a third to a halfway

 Check that your oven has reached 350 degrees and place the muffin tray on the top rack.

 While the cupcakes are in the oven, we are going to make the delicious creamy frosting

 For the frosting, you will need 2 1⁄2 cups of confectioner's sugar, 3 tablespoons of

 softened butter or margarine, 2 1⁄2 tablespoons lemon juice, 1⁄2 teaspoon lemon zest, 1

 teaspoon Nielsen Massey vanilla extract, and 1 tablespoon milk.

 As we did with the cupcake batter, add the confectioner's sugar and softened butter

 Add the rest of the ingredients and beat the mixture until it has a smooth consistency.

 Once you've removed the cupcakes from the oven, allow them to cool for around 10 minutes

 Not only do they taste delicious, but they also give off a heavenly aroma that'll spark

 If you think that's a lot, think again, because they'll be gone before you know it.

 For anyone trying it out, I suggest using organic sugar and natural vanilla extract.

 Alright so for Sloppy Joe, we're going to use two different types of meat.

 I'm not even going to use a whole jalapeno because that's really hot.

 Preheat the Dutch oven on medium high and turn the oven on 350 degrees.

 Onions are nice and brown, dump in half a can of diced tomatoes.

 Now just put the lid on and let that cook for about 15 minutes.

 So just start tearing in to this and put the inside here on a cookie sheet.

 That will finish cooking around the same time as the Sloppy Joe.

 The rest of that bread that you tossed in the garbage can, pull it back out.

 Toss in the jalapenos and take these two, throw them in the oven.

 Now we're going to do this a little bit different than what you're used to.

 So we're going to layer in the meat, the bread, and the cheese.

 Serve with some toasted бытьreams, sour cream, and s placing in your fragile tank to cook.

 Kobourez Grapa is a simple but delicious drink, which makes personal heat and reality a lot of fun!

 Ingredients are very simple, but I would have never thought of pairing them up together.

 Upgrading the hard drive in your iMac may sound like a difficult task, but it's easier than you may think.

 Lucky for you, today I'm going to walk you through replacing the hard drive in your late 2012 iMac.

 Hi, I'm Gwendolyn with iFixit, and today we're going to be working on a 27-inch late 2012 iMac.

 The opening and disassembly of this machine is almost the same as a late 2013, and even the most recent 5K Retina machines.

 But when you're working on your machine, make sure to follow the guide specific to your iMac.

 To find out which iMac you have, take a look under the foot of your iMac to find the EMC number.

 For this repair, you're going to need an iMac opening tool, a plastic card, a spudger, a T10 Torx screwdriver, a T9 screwdriver, and a set of adhesive strips.

 This foam block allows you to have easy access to the internals of your iMac without worrying about the display moving around.

 It's not absolutely essential, but it will make it a bit easier to work on your iMac.

 The iMac opening tool will keep you from pushing in too far, but if you're using anything else to do your prying,

 you need to be careful that you don't insert your tool more than 3-8ths of an inch.

 There's several cables and connectors you could damage by inserting your prying tool too far into your iMac.

 Starting on the bottom left side of the display near the power button, insert the iMac opening tool into the gap between the glass panel and the rear case.

 With your opening tool inserted, just roll it like a pizza cutter up the left side of the display.

 When you get to the top, just continue around the corner and continue along the top of the iMac, cutting the foam adhesive as you go.

 You may have to make multiple passes to cut all the adhesive, and if you find a sticky spot as you go, simply roll the opening tool back and forth over that spot.

 Finish pushing the opening tool to the bottom of the right side of the display.

 At this point, you'll want to make another pass around the display with your opening tool just to ensure to cut as much adhesive as possible.

 Once you're able to move your tool freely along the edges, you can move on to the next step.

 The iMac opening tool should have done most of the work on that adhesive, but just in case, we're going to get our plastic cards in there to unstick everything.

 For this part, you're going to want to lay your iMac on the table face up and use your plastic cards to begin separating the display from the rear case.

 As you're working across the top, make sure you stop before you get to the iSight camera.

 and move to the opposite corner, working your way back towards the iSight camera.

 With both cards in place and the adhesive cut along the top, we're going to try to

 you're going to hold the display up with one hand and disconnect the cables with the other.

 With the cables disconnected, you can lift the front glass up to an almost vertical position.

The bad news is we have to remove the left speaker to get to the hard drive.

 those and then get to work on disconnecting the speaker cables from the logic board.

 To disconnect the speaker cable from the logic board, pull straight out and deroute the cable

Now you can lift the speaker out of the iMac until the power button

 cable is exposed and gently deroute the cable from the groove in the left speaker.

 You can start by pulling straight up on the SATA cable to disconnect it from the hard drive.

 it disconnected, you can remove the two T10 screws securing the left hard drive bracket to the rear

The hard drive and bracket can now be lifted out of the rear case.

 need to do is remove the four T9 screw posts from the hard drive and transfer them to your new

For reassembly, we recommend you follow the step-by-step guide on ifixit.com

If you need a little help reapplying your display, make sure you check out our iMac

 adhesive strips repair guide as it'll walk you through getting your display back on.

 find all the parts and tools you need for this and many other repairs at ifixit.com and let us

You can find me on Twitter at Gwendolyn Gay and follow ifixit at ifixit.com.

 forget to subscribe to our YouTube channel to stay up to date on all our latest teardowns and

 repair videos and give us a like on Facebook at facebook.com slash ifixit.

 to teach you how to install hair extensions using the I-Tip method.

 So right now what I'm doing is I'm making a parting and I want it to be nice and precise.

 Miss Amber is going to be wanting to put her hair up so I want to make sure that I am getting

 on, I want to slide the bead up to the tip, the I-Tip, and squeeze.

 degree turn, squeeze, rotate the hair one more opposite direction, and squeeze.

 So I've got two in right now and to balance it out, I'm going to go in and get my second

 have a professional do it because they know just the right amount of hair to add in.

 One of the nice things about using this type of extension, the tip looks like a shoelace

 if for some reason the hair comes out, you can save it and I can pop it right back in.

 The cuticle is all facing in the downward direction where some hair extension companies

 pull the cuticle off and the cuticles stick together and they tangle.

 This is Jeff and this is how to install an additional hard drive in a Dell XPS L702X

 This is a 1 terabyte 9.5 millimeter height or depth laptop hard drive that fits this

 The back will then pop out exposing the place where your new hard drive will go.

 Then with the Phillips screwdriver remove four screws holding the bracket that will

 Once the final screw is removed the bracket or carrier comes out.

 Align the plug of the hard drive with the plug in on the laptop.

 You will know it is inserted all the way when the screw holes line up with the hard drive

 Replace the back cover by snapping it in making sure it is flush with the back of the

 Again make sure the back is flush with the back of the laptop computer.

 When the computer starts up you will notice in the lower right hand corner it will be

 Once you have installed the hard drive it will not show up until you assign it a letter.

 If you have trouble finding it go to the control panel and do a search for disk management.

 Then right click on the hard drive in the disk management program that you want to configure.

 A pop up window comes up showing the hard drive is ready to be used.

 And my new hard drive is installed, formatted and ready to be used.

 At this point I want to move my video files I have on my C drive.

 In this case it took about two hours for the files to move over to my new hard drive.

 And that completes the video on how to install a laptop hard drive on a Dell laptop computer.

 Hi, this is teachwithtech.com here to introduce to you our wired remote sync option.

 And we first want to explain to you what you need along with remote sync.

 It also comes with an extension cord, as well as the AC-DC adapter.

 And those things are sold separately from the remote sync accessory.

 The remote sync accessory comes with a push-button switch that turns the power on and off to

 This remote sync accessory also comes with a, what we like to call, the sync spot.

 In fact, to use this sync spot, you just take it off the adhesive backing and you install

 it directly on the back of your Wii Remote, right on top of the sync button.

 You install the Wii Remote Insert directly on top of the sync spot and the Wii Remote's

 And we will plug one side of the remote sync accessory into the AC-DC adapter, as shown here.

 We're also going to plug in the other side of the remote sync accessory to the extension

 Now you can see that there's no power running to the Wii Remote right now.

 And the Wii Remote will not get power until the push-button switch on the actual accessory

 So, as you can see here, once you press the push-button switch, it sends the Wii Remote

 directly into discovery mode, allowing it to be detected by your computer.

 Now of course, you can turn it off at any time you wish and leave it off, which is great.

 And the remote sync accessory is small enough that you can pretty much mount it anywhere

 Now we have a few demonstrations on how this is used with operating systems and computers.

 And so the first one is how it works with Wii Remote Whiteboard and the Mac operating

 And of course, we have both our remote sync accessory and our Wii Remote along with the

 Now of course, we're opening Wii Remote Whiteboard, which is a very great program for the Mac

 and actually has been very stable as far as we can tell in our testing.

 And once it's open, all you got to do is to press the push-button switch on the remote

 It sends the Wii Remote directly into discovery mode, and your computer will detect the Bluetooth

 And it has done that, as you can see, and now you're ready to calibrate.

 And we're going to show you real quick, obviously, you just press the calibrate button, and then

 you're able to calibrate your screen using an infrared pen, just like you see here, calibrate.

 Of course, we don't have the screen up and running, so we're not going to do that right

 But let's say for some reason that you get disconnected, whether you walk out of the

 We're going to simulate this by turning the Wii Remote power off.

 Now Wii Remote Whiteboard senses this and tells you that the Wii Remote's been disconnected.

 And so it's very easy to reconnect with this remote sync accessory.

 Again, the process is the same, just reopen Wii Remote Whiteboard and turn the Wii Remote

 So you can connect and get disconnected and reconnect very quickly with this.

 And of course, we still have our Wii Remote along with our insert and all applicable cables,

 All you have to do is to press the push button switch and it sends the Wii Remote directly

 Just open Smoothboard and Smooth Connect will connect the Wii Remote directly to your computer.

 That is, if you've installed the Bluetooth stack correctly and overcome any issues with

 Now we will say here that we recommend that you do use two Wii Remotes in your classroom

 It's actually far superior in that you get a bigger range, so you don't have to worry

 In fact, students find it difficult to remember that you can block the Wii Remote with your

 And so when you launch Smoothboard, of course, then you can use your Wii Remote Whiteboard

 In fact, let's say that you do get disconnected from Smoothboard for some reason, whether

 you take your computer out of the classroom or something else happens that you get disconnected

 And we're going to simulate that by just closing Smoothboard and telling it to turn off the

 Now, what happens now is that the Wii Remote goes directly back into discovery mode.

 And so you can reconnect at this time just like this, or you can turn off the Wii Remote

 with the switch and then turn it back on and then reopen Smoothboard and connect that way.

 Okay, and coming in February we have a wireless remote sync coming.

 It is important to first select a good, reasonably level site for your slab.

 Once you have chosen a site, clear the area and remove any grass.

 Using pegs, roughly mark out the area and determine how much digging will be required.

 Visually establish high points and low points and use soil to level the area as best as

 Measure and construct the box away from where you plan to put the slab.

 In this case, the box dimensions are 3.1 by 3.1, which allows for a 50mm rebate.

 Once you have dug the area out and made it as level as you can, place the box in the

 Using a spirit level, fill or dig out areas in order to ensure the box is level.

 In this area there is a slight slope in the land running into a far corner.

 This makes the area around 180mm too low, so we need to bring it up 80mm and fill, remembering

 Now that the boxing is in position, built up and level, drive pins into the corners

 It is important to check the depth of the area you will be filling with concrete.

 Place a straight edge timber board across the length and breadth of the box.

 Use a spirit level and check the depth of the area within the box.

 Remember it has to be 100mm because that is the thickness of your slab.

 Ensure that the fall of the slab follows the contour of the land.

 The next step is to lay building plastic down and line the area.

 This holds the concrete together and helps stop the concrete from cracking.

 This particular slab will require 1 cubic metre of concrete and we are using a 20 MPa

 concrete mix which basically means the stones or gravel used is 20mm.

 Pour the concrete in and level it out with shovels to the height of the boxing.

 Screed the concrete off with an aluminium screed or a length of timber.

 Let the concrete go off or dry out a little for about half an hour.

 Then complete rebate with an edging tool and finish off with a trowel.

 Leave for a day or so depending on your weather conditions and your slab is ready to assemble

 So here at Mewers Upper Deck we are using Huon Salmon to do a dish on our a la carte

 menu which is a crispy skin Atlantic Salmon with steamed jasmine rice and a Thai BBQ sauce

 So you've got this beautiful portion here of salmon, beautiful colour, great texture,

 beautiful flavour and very adaptive to many different dishes we've used always on our

 So what I've done here is I've got a pan on the heat here, getting it nice and hot.

 Got my portion of salmon, just going to put a little bit of salt here on the salmon.

 Probably the seasoning will also help crisp up the skin just a little bit.

 That'll take at least a minute or so on that side, then we'll turn it over and we'll place

 As you can see that skin has already started to crisp up nicely.

 We'll flip it over, it'll go into the oven, it'll keep drying, that skin will end up really

 We're just going to put this in the oven at about 200 degrees for about 4 to 5 minutes

 So what we're going to do now is just fry off some of these shiitake mushrooms.

 This is clarified butter, it'll just help it from not, to stop burning.

 In this pot here we've got some Thai BBQ sauce which will go over the top of our crisp skinned salmon.

 So we'll just give these shiitake mushrooms another 30 seconds and then they're going

 We're going to put our piece of crisp skinned salmon straight on top.

 After the salmon we've got our shiitake mushrooms which we've done in the wok.

 Then to finish the dish we're just going to do a slice of lime.

 Crisp skinned salmon with shiitake mushrooms and Thai BBQ sauce.

 So here at Mewers Upper Deck we probably sell about 120 pieces of salmon.

 I'm going to take my second cardboard circle, two is always handy, and I'm going to go directly

 underneath that top cake, and I'm going to move that to the side.

 I'm going to clean off the crumbs with a damp cloth that I have on my board.

 The fewer crumbs I have while I'm working, the better chance I have to not make a crumb

 cake, which some of us specialize in, but this time I'm not trying to make a crumb cake.

 Now what I have are two layers, and this time I actually want to add a delicious filling

 I happen to like to use ready-to-go pastry fillings, the same kind that they would use

 When I'm using the fruit fillings, I tend to pair them with actual fresh fruit.

 No matter what the season, if it's summertime and I'm getting beautiful, farm-fresh strawberries,

 then it's a nice compliment to have the sweet, I call it strawberry goo, inside.

 But in the wintertime, if I still want strawberries and they're not very tasty and not very sweet,

 There are a variety of flavors that you can choose from, Bavarian, chocolate, pineapple,

 It just kind of depends on what you like, but you can also make those flavors yourself.

 What I'm going to do is I'm actually going to take a pastry bag that I had prepared earlier,

 I'll talk a little bit more about a coupler later, but what I'm going to do is I'm going

 to use my turntable and the coupler to prepare this cake for an actual filling.

 The dam of icing that I'm going to put here, I'm going to start just a little bit from

 the edge of my cake, and I'm going to squeeze firmly until the icing comes out using my turntable.

 It only has just the coupler itself, and this is pretty much the only time I use just the coupler.

 But the reason I did that is because now it allows me to take my delicious filling and

 You never want your filling to be higher than the base that you've created or you're going

 It has a slight pointy edge to help me spread that filling all around.

 Right now if I did have some beautiful fresh strawberries, I would just slice them and

 The other thing I'm going to do is to take this dam of icing that I have, and remember

 that little chunk that I have missing from the cake or this section here where it doesn't

 I've only met a handful of people who absolutely don't like icing.

 So typically if you have to fortify your cake with a little more icing, it's going

 So now I'm going to take my icing that, this one happens to be a purchased icing, but even

 Now you might notice that the icing is very airy and doesn't look very smooth.

 If you do not stir it, the icing that you put on top of the cake is going to look exactly

 So I'm going to take some icing and I'm going to dump it on my cake.

 You are not putting butter on toast where you're just putting a tiny bit.

 You actually are going to be adding a lot of icing because the secret to icing a cake

 So I'm going to take a little bit more icing at the bottom of my spatula.

 I'm going to find the spot where there's some icing hanging out.

 My bench scraper is typically used for making breads and things like that, but it's a beautiful

 It's got a perfectly straight edge that I can get a 90 degree angle.

 So I'm going to place this right on the edge of the cake using my turntable.

 Now if I miss a spot, I can add additional icing and then do it all again.

 If you want to crumb coat this, once you get a light coating of icing, all you need to

 do is to pop your cake into the refrigerator for just a few moments to let the base coat

 of icing set up, and then come back and add a second coat of icing.

 Now I'm actually going to take my smaller spatula and I'm going to address the top.

 I'm going to take it from the outer edge toward the center, removing additional icing.

 So now I'm going to go back to my larger spatula, make sure that it's nice and clean,

 and hopefully make just a few more passes to square this cake off.

 I don't usually worry as much about getting it perfectly smooth if I know I'm going to

 decorate it, but quite honestly, there's something nice about a rustic looking cake that's not

 And so then I just want to take my damp cloth and I want to clean my circle.

 Hey, I'm Roni, and I love to make a great big picnic for the family.

 Here in the South, the most traditional picnic foods are fried chicken and deviled eggs and

 So I modified those dishes to make them easier to take with you.

 So instead of piping the deviled eggs into the whites, which is really messy when you

 eat it, I chop up the egg whites and then I mix it all together and I make it into a

 What's nice about this is you get that creaminess from the deviled egg mixture, and then you

 get a little bit of that chewy bite from the egg whites, which I kind of like that texture.

 What that does is it dries out the bread a little bit so that your sandwich isn't soggy

 It's small, but that pretzel roll is salty on top with the mustard and the fried chicken.

 When you eat fruit salad, you always have to have a spoon or a fork.

 This way, you put everything on a toothpick and it's just adorable to eat.

 I'm going to use some press and seal to put my sandwiches away.

 It's been around for over 30 years and it's seen lots of family picnics.

 We've all been to counters or drugstores and purchased the wrong color foundation for whatever

 reason and this tip is about when you purchase or are gifted a too dark foundation for your

You can actually make that work for you because your face is comprised of many colors

 and you can take advantage of that with multiple colors of foundation.

 you can use any of these but the techniques and where you place it on your face are going to be

So first I'd like to darken underneath my chin and my jawbone to emphasize how razor

 sharp that is and wherever I want to have shadows on my face I'm going to emphasize that with the

 my temples and a little bit around so then naturally the center of my face will become

 the contrast to your natural skin the more angled and the sharper your face will look.

 that right underneath your cheekbones because it's not a blush, up into your temples and your hairline

 all around and sometimes if you have a wider nose than you would like so you can actually shape that

 just kind of take it from the inside of your brow bone and sharpen the angle like this.

 You see how all of a sudden I'm creating more of an angular nose on that side?

 thing to the other side of your face by darkening the shadow to emphasize that.

Bronzer is really great for that because it's a stronger darker color and bring it on down.

 Another trick with darker foundation is to just do underneath your lip so you make it

 use it in these creative ways, share with me some of your tips and stay Glamrs!

 Hi, I'm Nick with TEA and I'm going to go through how to set up and put in the Invisio

 Now the Invisio M-series headsets all use a bone conduction microphone.

 That's going to be this little bubble at the end and that's what sits inside your inner

 Then you're going to have the speaker port and on this M4 it's going to have what we

 What this does is allows you to hear a little bit more of your surroundings or you could

 plug it back in and it gives you a little bit more hearing protection.

 So to put in the M4, you're going to put it into the ear that it was molded for.

 Once you get the bottom part of the headset in your ear, I want you to pull up and out

 on the top of your ear and then go ahead and put the top ridge of the headset underneath

 Once it's in, put the cable retainer behind your ear to secure it, plug it into your PTT

 It's going to be different in the fact that it has these little tails that we call soft

 This is what secures the headset in your ear compared to most headsets that just sit in

 Now to put the M3 in, we're going to put it in your ear and it helps to do a little bit

 Once it's sitting in place, you're going to pull up and out and you're going to tuck the

 Once it's in place, you're going to go ahead and put the cable retainer behind your ear

 If you have any questions or need any more help, please feel free to call one of our

 Okay, to get started with this recipe we are going to use fresh basil leaves.

 The first thing I'm going to do is going to rip the basil leaves off of the stems.

 I absolutely love basil so I can never have enough inside my meals.

 I'm just using half a pepper each since this is just going to be for one serving.

 After washing the onion, I like to peel the first layer off just because it's been in

 So I'm just going to do a couple more slices through just so I don't get too big of a piece

 Not really using Thai cooking but I'm cooking at home so I do it however I like.

 To get started I'm going to use just about one ounce of the curry sauce.

 I usually have been using cooking oil but instead I've been starting to do it with just

 And then I'm going to go ahead and add the chopped chicken breast.

 And I simmer the chicken inside just a little bit of the coconut curry sauce.

 As you can see I just kind of give it a little mix around here.

 I'm looking to get the chicken to about 60 to 70 percent cooked.

 I add the yellow peppers, the red peppers, the onions, the serrano peppers.

 Now I'm not going to wait too long to add the basil but I'm going to let this stir fry

 I kind of do that closer to the end and give it a little mix in.

 Serrano peppers are going to add a nice little kick to the red curry which is just out of

 So then I'm going to add about two or three ounces of the Curry Simple gourmet red curry

 You can see there it's just a nice beautiful tasting coconut curry sauce.

 I like to just give the coconut milk curry just a nice little mix with the vegetables

 Like I said the seeds from the peppers should add a nice little kick to the curry.

 The only thing you can do next is serve it up on a plate and get ready to enjoy.

 Just trying to cut down on some of the carbs but that's why I added a little bit of extra

 The recipe I prepared today is chicken in Moyo and these are the ingredients.

 We have the red pepper, we have the green pepper, we have the chicken, we have the tomato,

 we have the tomato puree, we have the onions, we have the hot pepper, we have the garlic,

 we have the ginger also to enhance the taste, we have the vinegar, we have the salt, we

 have the chicken seasoning, we have the corn flour, we have the vegetable oil, we have

 fetch only one ladle and add to the pot on the fire and I will allow the oil to be hot.

 will turn the blended vegetables to clean the garlic and the ginger.

This corn flour will act as a thickening agent for the chicken in Moyo.

That is the essence of adding the vinegar into it because the chicken in Moyo must be sweet and sour

And again, you have to kill the chicken before you put it on fire.

 put it alive, by the time you open the pot, it will jump back at you and that will be a disaster.

 This is the versatile and clever Sunbeam Aviva pressure cooker.

 It allows you to cook delicious and tender, healthy meals in no time.

 It's also just as at home as a rice cooker, slow cooker, fry pan and steamer.

 Hi, I'm Jule Cooney and today I'll show you how easy it is to create a delicious, spicy

 And don't worry, if you miss any of the steps, you'll find a Sunbeam recipe card at the end

 I'm using a boneless pork shoulder which I'll season in a spice mix including chilli, cumin,

 Now I need to brown the pork to seal the juices and infuse the flavours.

 Add chopped tomatoes, leeks and some cider and we're ready to cook.

 Set the menu to high pressure and set the timer to two hours, then press start.

 The screen shows my settings, when it's gaining pressure and when it starts cooking.

 And the handy countdown timer lets me know the cooking progress.

 Once the pork is cooked, the Sunbeam Aviva will automatically switch to keep warm until

 You can serve the pulled pork with vegetables or Mexican style tacos.

 The Sunbeam Aviva pressure cooker, another way Sunbeam is designed to help.

 Hiya everyone, today I'm going to be doing a Hunger Games inspired look.

I've got golds and ivories and a bit of gold liner and I really really hope

 eyelid, just cover the whole eye area because it's good to get it right all over.

 into the mirror and just follow the angle of the eye, you should get a pretty good run

If you're not steady handed I mean, you can kind of just rest the brush against

 you do one eye first, you find out that you've got bits that you should have done on the

I'm going to take a little bit of snake bite again and I'm going to just

It's by Fardell and the reason I'm giving it a good shake is because it goes

Now some black liner because black liner doesn't half define your

 looking at something that's got like a pink and ivory, chocolate and like an all over

I got it when I went to IMAX in London last year or the year before.

They're always out there barking and being naughty and doing stuff like that.

 But anyway I'm going to go and eat now because I'm a bit hungry.

 And then once you get the paint really spread out, come back and really back roll it tight

 A lot of times I'll bypass the water based products, which is what I'm using right now,

 but the water base is more forgiving because if it's got a little moisture in it, at least

 If you're going to go into solvents like a rattle can black, you've got to make sure

 I'm going to use rattle can paints, I'm going to use different metal paints to get a head

 I'm going to lightly faux finish it, just kind of fog it here and there.

 And then the prettiest look is going to be using their water based metal paints.

 I'm going to use metallic bronze, metallic gold, and then there's another one, it's a

 Okay, and now I'm going to start layering it with a copper color, it's a hammered copper.

 And as you're doing this, you can keep stacking it, step back, look at it, you can fill in

 And that's it for my basic coloring, the final color is going to fine tune it, which I'll

 I'm going to start with a metallic bronze, get the color on the tips, wipe it off.

 And then after you get the majority, you can always step back, look at it, you might see

 Just throw in some darker colors here and there so it all flows evenly, not evenly,

 but just so it's more consistent rather than having a big bright, bright area by itself,

 After these colors, this will be the final coat unless you wanted to put a clear sealer

 If you were going to make this into a weeping water wall, then you'd want to put quite a

 few coats of a clear solvent sealer over it, such as a rattle can clear paint.

 Okay, I'm going to go a little bit farther with this phase, and then I'm going to come

 back probably with a more of a yellowish, a little bit of yellowish or a goldish color

 If you put it too heavy, you can come back and just fog over it with a black or a different

 Just enough to break up those other colors that are going to be kind of boring by themselves.

 I'm actually painting in small areas like here, leapfrogging over, hitting an area about

 So as I'm coloring, I'm just keeping it close and just touching here and there.

 You get lighting pointing on it and you see all these colors underneath the water.

 Which even if you were doing an interior wall like this, it can be converted at a later

 All you'd have to do is build a bowl at the bottom and then hide your plumbing, build

 And then build a box up top to hide the tee at the top where the water would actually

 I'm going to go up top and I'm going to do one color up in here.

 I'm going to use a metallic bronze just to give it a little contrast from down below

 Hey guys, there's a lot of YouTube videos and internet traffic of people trying to figure

 And there's a few covers of people playing it on the piano, and I've received a few MySpace

 emails and Twitter messages, and I've seen some YouTube comments of people asking how

 So we're in standard tuning, and then there's a capo on the fourth fret.

 And something to keep in mind is that when I say chords like A minor and G and C and

 So even though I'm saying A minor, it's really a C sharp minor is what that first initial

 If you want to do it in the same key that we play it in, it's capo on the fourth fret.

 But feel free to transpose it to any key that you want, and just play these chord structures

 So the main breakdown, and one thing that I wanted to illustrate to you, is that there's

 You're not doing your normal F of where you're laying down your index finger on both the

 Rather than playing A minor, F, and then G, getting this note in here, you're actually

 just going to take your F position and slide it up a whole step.

 Now, for D, you could play a D major chord, but it has this funky note in here, and it

 doesn't go in context with keeping this high E ringing open the whole time.

 Now take this position, because you're already here, it's what I like to do.

 Just a whole step up, and you've got your ring finger on the low E as well.

 See how it doesn't quite have the same underlying darkness to it?

 Now, the course is going to be C, G, A minor, F, C, G, A minor, quick F into G.

 Now, last little turnaround is kind of what gives it the gospel twist.

 Okay, so the bridge is going to have D minor, A minor, C, and then into G.

 Now, it has kind of an arpeggio, an arpeggiated strumming pattern,

 so a pricking pattern, strumming pattern, going from high to low.

 Which is sort of in line with what we do depending on the show,

 whether it's kind of more of an aggressive feel or a mild feel.

 Now, right after the end of the bridge, there's that push where it goes from C into G.

 The end is going to hit on the G and then resolve on an A minor.

 And then in terms of the tone of what you're going to want to do,

 if you're wondering what the warbly sound is, that's just a tremolo setting.

 Almost as if the tremolo is doing a cut time on the actual tempo of what you're playing.

 C, G, A minor, F, G, C, E major 7, F major, F minor for the chorus.

 And I'm going to make a second video where I'll play along to the song

 from start to finish with the music in the background of both the record and electric guitar.

 Today I'd like to show you a basic installation of our countertop extension.

 Take your time, be very exact, following the procedures in these instructions.

 This extension works on countertops with or without an overhang.

 By installing our countertop extension, you'll be able to add an extra 12 inches to your

 Its hinged design allows you to be able to pull it up easily and drop it down quickly

 Quality made from solid oak finish hardwood with a non-toxic gloss finish.

 Today, we will be installing the countertop extension to a countertop with an overhang,

 so we will be following section A in the installation instructions.

 Measure the counter overhang in center of location where you plan to mount the extension.

 Place the overhang tool under overhang with dimension lines facing upward.

 Slide the tool forward under overhang until it touches the cabinet side.

 Have your assistant hold extension flush to counter edge in fully extended position and

 Due to variations in countertop thickness, countertop extension may not be flush with

 Mark pilot hole locations through piano hinge on the underside of overhang and drill holes

 Before you drill, place masking tape on your drill bit to mark 3-8 inch depth as a guide

 Locate template 1 and find the proper hole set by matching the letter on your overhang

 With a nail or pen, carefully punch through both corresponding holes.

 Have your assistant hold extension up so you can work under it.

 Drill template number 1 squarely against cabinet with top edge touching the bottom

 of the overhang, centering the pilot holes with the piano hinge.

 With flat side of support bracket facing down, attach bottom of support bracket, the longer

 Have your assistant hold extension outward so it is level with the countertop.

 With hinge extended, move the support bracket upward so the top, or the shorter side, makes

 Make two marks for pilot holes through the support's screw holes.

 Be sure to recheck that the masking tape on the drill bit is at 3-8 inch depth so you

 Finally, complete the installation by attaching top of support bracket to extension with screws.

 Hi you guys, so today is my last day home alone because my mom and my brother went to Spain and my dad left for Toronto so I'm home alone.

 Today's my last day with the house to myself so I figured we do something different called bake grilled cheese with Shane.

 So this is pretty much the kitchen, um, yeah where we'll be making it.

Oh I think this one's nonstick so you don't need to grease anything, I don't think so anyway.

 And of course you'll also need a spatula or whatever to flip it.

Now we just cut like mini, mini slices so that they fit on the bread properly and everything.

 Before we put the cheese on we're gonna have to put butter on the bread so that like when you put it down it becomes grilled cheese, you know.

 Now that we're done buttering the bread we can just get the stove ready.

Now all we have to do is put one slice of bread butter side down.

 Then we put the other slice butter side up so that when we flip it it becomes grilledy more.

So as I wait for this guy I might as well talk to you guys for a bit.

So I'm like wondering what have you guys been up to this summer?

I never used to know how to make epic meals like grilled cheese but yeah.

 And the second one warms up a lot faster than the first one does so be prepared.

 This is grilled cheese that I made and some good old raspberry lemonade.

 I almost mastered the art of just leaving just a tiny tiny bit left so I don't have to throw it in the recycle.

 I'm just, you know, I was hungry so I thought I'd form it into a video.

 Don't worry the tutorial videos are still arriving and just look forward to it.

 So leave it in the comment section and I'd love to hear from you.

 Oh yeah, thank you so much for your response to the 50 things video.

 You got a lot of great feedback and I loved hearing about you guys so thank you so much.

 Thank you very much for purchasing our Honda 750 Shadow Arrow Edition here.

 These are going to make great little bobber here so just bear with me and let's get started

 Let's see, if you'll notice first of all that I tied up the kickstand.

 If you're working on your bike and you're wrenching it and you move it forward it could

 tip the kickstand over and the bike would fall and that wouldn't be any good.

 Then the second thing you may want to do, and I love this, is if you get one of these

 Mine's kind of broken and it's old but I love it because you can sit down and roll around

 So I would grab those before I got started on the bike because it just makes it a lot

 Okay, I'm going to go ahead and remove my side covers first before I get started here.

 But to get the seat off these arrows there's just a screw here on each side of the seat.

 Okay, we're going to remove the rear fender and that's real simple on these arrows.

 So what you do is just, there's three connectors under the seat here.

 You can probably do it with your finger nail or a little screwdriver.

 Okay, you can release the wire here and then just go ahead and pull that one out there

 Then if I pull this off, the signal light and this bracket will come off with it.

 Then you can thread the wire through these little channels right here.

 Whatever you do, don't sell or throw this rear fender away because we're going to use

 Okay if you decide to remove the gas tank and send it out for paint, this is what you

 Now the main thing is to be really careful around the gasoline because it's extremely

 So make sure you're really careful and don't spill any on your end or whatever.

 I'm going to show you this with the tank off because it's much easier to film.

 This is the main fuel line that comes in the back of the fuel petcock there.

 Make sure whatever you do to turn the fuel petcock to the off position when you undo

 Then this tube right here, this slides over a little barb in the back of the fuel petcock.

 That's a vacuum line and what that does is it doesn't allow fuel to come through the

 It's just a vacuum line that opens up that petcock when the engine is running.

 It's a safety device so when the engine is stopped no fuel can come out of the petcock.

 So anyway, you want to disconnect those and then obviously you want to take the bolt out

 Okay and then the other thing you want to do is there's a vacuum, excuse me, a vent

 Then the last thing before you lift the tank is you want to take the instrument cluster

 You can see the wire that's, just go ahead and drift, just let it drape down the side

 And there you go and then you can go ahead and lift your tank off.

 If you go ahead and take the bolts out of these two aluminum standoffs here.

 What that will do then is it will leave your fender just floating in there.

 You pop those out of those holes before, at least on the front here, before you slide

 So, and then this, the handlebars are cocked all the way to the left side.

 So you can just squeeze the fender together and go ahead and feed it out the back.

 Okay, I've got this bike pretty much torn apart so while everything's out to get paint

Today I'm going to show you how I made my rustic lanterns out of twine,

 I really wanted to make something different with my solar light and that's why I decided to use

I've never really seen this done before so I thought why not let's give it a try.

 I also thought that the light coming between the sticks would cast a really cool light onto the

Another reason why I wanted to come up with this idea is because solar lights don't cost you

 Sticks, twine, branch clippers, shears, small solar lights, scissors, and hammer and nails are optional.

 The first thing you're going to want to do is get your tree trimmers and find a good branch

 Now the next thing that I do is I get my shears and my branches and I have to cut off all the leaves

Make sure that when you get your branches for this project that you try to get

 fresh branches because if you find branches that have been laying on the ground they may have bugs

 There, now I have all my leaves and flowers cut off of my branches.

The next thing that I want to do is get my solar light and take the top off of it.

 This is going to help me measure the size of the branches that I want to use.

 Then I get my shears and I cut them to the size that I want my lantern to be.

 as a guide for the size of the lantern that I'm going to be making.

 I get my scissors, sticks, solar light, and twine and lay them on the table.

We will be using the twine to tie the sticks together, tie onto our

 top piece of twine and about one inch from the bottom on the sticks for the bottom piece.

 continue to add sticks and tie them until they fit all the way around my solar light.

 sticks will fit around my solar light, I wrap them around the light to see if it fits.

You want it to fit snug so be sure to check when you're close to being done.

 Now that I know that the sticks fit around my light, I tie the two end sticks together on the

 how far apart I want them and I think three prongs between each of them will work out great.

 Now because you don't want your your lights going up and down, I'm going to get a little hammer

 hammer underneath of my string so that it will stay right where I want it.

 anymore, you can pop the lights out and replace them whenever you have to.

Now I'm going to go and finish the rest of them and I'll show you what they look like at night.

 I hope that you enjoyed watching me make my solar lanterns today.

One and a half cup of bulgur, size one, and salt and red pepper.

 pepper is not the chili pepper that you can buy from the market.

 time and I found an easy way, which is I make a well in the middle, I put the water there

 Some bulgur takes more water than others, so we will see how much water this will need.

 Then I put more water until I soak the whole bulgur in water and I leave it to rest for

 While it's resting, you can prepare the parsley and green onion and by the time you prepare those,

 it still, but not as much as if you didn't soak it in the water.

 I wet my hands and I just hold with this hand and push with the palm of my other hand

 Some people, I heard they put it in a food processor, but it becomes very mushy, very paste-like.

 First of all, I have to find it uzo or what they call it Arak in the Middle East.

 This one is common, girls night out, bachelorette parties, they love to order these things.

 So if somebody orders an orgasm I would just ask them, did you want the shooter or did

 Either way, the alcohols that are going into the drink and the ingredients are exactly

 So to help you remember an orgasm, I'm going to reference a study they did at the local

 state college here and they found that 80% of all the orgasms in your life will happen

 Interesting, and of course debatable, but back is an acronym for the ingredients in

 This drink has an ounce and a half of alcohol, so we're going into our tall glass and we'll

 This is a good drink to use two hands, one, two of each of those.

 Put your alcohols in first whenever you're making cocktails because that's what I'm paying

 And when you put your alcohols in first then you don't have to count your mixers or your

 So then we'll go K, one, two with our Kahlua, and then fill with milk or cream.

 Then there's another version of this, it's called a screaming orgasm.

 So with a screaming orgasm all you do is you take vodka and you go one, two on top of that.

 So that's just going to get the job done for you a whole lot quicker.

 In this episode I'll be showing you how to make your own natural lip balm.

 You can get all the ingredients you need for this project at Glory Bee.

 The first thing you want to do for this project is prepare your containers.

 They're the kind that you just stick your finger in to get the lip balm out.

 The best way to fill these tubes is with one of these lip balm filling trays.

 It's a life saver because it's a lot easier than trying to hold one little tube steady

 So you just take the tube, stick it into the tray and then you'll be flipping the tray

 It really helps you avoid spilling because if you spill any it's just going to go on

 the tray and not drip down your tube which you have to clear off later.

 The first ingredient and probably the most important for this project is beeswax.

 This recipe calls for an ounce of beeswax and Glory Bee just happens to sell a handy

 It does take about 10 or 15 minutes for beeswax to melt in a double boiler so I've gotten

 Now in the true DIY spirit I use a Pyrex glass container and a canning jar lid to lift the

 You really want to make sure and melt beeswax in a double boiler and not the microwave because

 it will heat the beeswax unevenly and it might cause it to splatter over your microwave and

 then you will just throw away your microwave because it's impossible to clean off the sides.

 And as you can see the temperature of the sweet almond oil caused the melted beeswax

 to seize up a little bit so we're going to have to wait for that to melt.

 Okay, now the beeswax and sweet almond oil have heated up and you've got a nice clear

 We're going to be putting in a quarter teaspoon of aloe vera concentrate which will help your

 The next ingredient is vitamin E oil and we'll add a half teaspoon of that.

 It will give your lip balm that little extra zing and we'll be adding a half teaspoon of that.

 As you can see I'm making a few spills here but at least they're not getting all over the lip balm tube.

 Once you fill all your containers you'll just wait for them to cool and then I'll show you how to package them.

 Okay, now that your lip balm has cooled it'll be this nice creamy white color.

 You can take the tube and just put the little lid it comes with on there and you're ready to go.

 It's just a little sleeve of plastic that you slip around the tube and you can use a blow dryer to make it shrink and it looks really professional.

 My favorite way to decorate these is with these cute little pressed flower stickers.

 You can reach their natural product sales department at 1-800-456-7923

 Thanks very much for joining us on this episode of DIY Bath, Body and Home and we'll see you next time.

 Hello, I want to show you how to make a tiered skirt using body measurements.

 I decided I saw a cute little skirt and it was made with multiple colors of fabric and

 You can use scraps that you have at home to make a cute little tiered skirt.

 So what I did, I took body measurements of my great grand and her waist measured 20 inches,

 So the width of all my pieces is going to be 34.5 or 35 inches.

 So now I want to put ruffles on each section so I'm going to take the skirt width and times

 So that's going to be 51.75 or you can do 2 times fullness that would be 34.5 times

 So all of my ruffle pieces which are these sections they need to be 52 inches so I round

 My elastic I'm going to cut exactly the width of the circumference of her waist and we're

 But my elastic, the top part of my skirt I want to cut the width of my elastic times

 2 plus an inch and a quarter because that's going to be my seam allowance there.

 The elastic will be encased right in between these two and we'll flip it over, stitch it

 So now my tiers, the length of my skirt times how many tiers I want.

 Alright we're making our tiered skirt and in order to make sure that everything lines

 So I'm going to take this and fold it in half and see I did a little snip with my scissors

 there and I'm going to take it and fold it again in half and I'm going to snip again

 I have all my notches lined up because I have pins and I'm already so that I want to sew

 these two layers together but I matched up the notches so it's all quartered.

 So when I gather it together I match up all the notches and then just sew my gather seams.

 Now ideally you would sew all of these separate in the back but in order for you to understand

 Now I used upholstery thread in my bobbin so I can just do one roll of stitches instead

 Remember do not back stitch and I'm going to do this stitch all the way just one roll

 So on a basting stitch we want to do a large running basting stitch and then we'll gather

 Alright I finished my basting stitch now I'm going to match these in place again and pin

 So after I get those notched in I only need to pull the thread at the bottom from my bobbin

 because it's heavier so I can pull it nice and easy and then I can go ahead and sew my

 Just to make sure that I keep everything balanced I don't want and of course you want to change

 I just want to make sure that I don't have a lot of gathers in one section more or less

 So here I start out with my seam allowance, backstitch and then I can take this and move

 my gather stitches around or you can do it before you begin to sew to make sure that

 Sew them at your seam allowance and then serge them or use a zigzag stitch, whatever your

 So normally like I said we would have stitched all these separately but this I'm going to

 I'm going to flip it out and we're going to be ready to do the waistband next.

 So we're going to serge that and add the elastic to it and the waist.

 So for my top for my elastic I took the piece and folded it in half.

 Remember they're all exactly the same size, the size of your hip.

 If you make the waistband the size of the waist then it can't pull up over the hip.

 You want to measure the width of your elastic and then measure the waist, take it and lap

 it over about an inch and stitch in a rectangle shape to lock it together.

 Now what I want to do is just encase it in between and I'm going to use my zipper foot

 and stitch along the edge of it to lock it in place so my elastic cannot move.

 It's a slow process, just take your time so you don't stitch on top of the elastic

 and you're just going to have to stretch it as you go along so it's going to begin to

 So here I'm just going to sew right around the very edge of my elastic, a regular stitch

 I can see the indentation of my elastic so I'm just going to take my time because I don't

 And then you see I notched it, I took it and folded it in half, I notched it, I quartered

 it, I notched it so it can match up the exact same place around the skirt.

 And now what I'm going to do is I'm going to stretch the elastic in between the seams

 So after you get the elastic in just give it a little stretch and it's going to snap

 I'm going to follow the same stitch that I used to make sure it stays locked in place

 I'm going to go my notch, my notch on top of my notch and sew my skirt in.

 curly hair it works amazing as well but I love this when I wear my hair curly and I

If you have curly hair yourself you know how easy it is to get really

 a hair mask and this one is formulated just to make sure that you get rid of all of the

 frizz, eliminate any of that poofiness and get some shine and hydration back into your

Okay so the first thing we are going to add to this hair mask is an avocado and

 That means there is more minerals, more vitamins and nutrients in it which is really important

 because this mask is all about natural vitamins, minerals and nutrients so that your hair can

 everything in and this can be really tragic if you don't mix it well.

 if you are using a fork like I am using here, make sure that you mix it really well because

 this is going to be really hard to get out of your hair if you don't mix it and if it's

One thing that's really important is to apply the hair mask from like

You really want to focus on the ends of your hair and like the middle

 that's usually what's causing all of the frizz and split ends and everything so that's where

 but really just focus on the ends and the mid shaft area, especially if you have curly

 just toss your hair in a bun so that you don't get avocado and banana everywhere and then

I like to wash this out literally a couple minutes after I've applied it, which

 is kind of different for a hair mask but it just leaves your hair a lot silkier and more

 and you can of course use your shampoo and conditioner but you could also skip it.

I always like to use my Carol's Daughter Curl Cleansing Cream because

 this stuff's like really conditioning and moisturizing so that's what I like to use

So I hope you guys give this a try because I'd love to know how it works

And also before you go tell me in the comments below whatever your hair

 problems because I want to do more DIYs and I want to know what you guys have like as

If you have like frizzy hair or split ends or like what are your concerns?

 Let me know in the comments below and also tell me what kind of hair type you have so

 I've got my pan here, I've got some corn oil in there, you can use any oil you like, it's nice and hot.

 I've got some black mustard seeds which give a lovely flavour and a nice visual effect as well.

 Then you can add your favourite curry powder or like me I'm using equal parts of coriander, cumin, chilli powder and turmeric or haldi.

 Now this is on a very vigorous heat so we don't want to be mucking about here, it's very quick this dish.

 You can either pre-cook your chickpeas or just use a regular can, you know a tin chickpea which works really well because they're really nice and soft.

 Just make sure you wash them really well when they come out of that can, rinse them under some nice cold water.

 All you need to do now is cook this on a fairly high heat, just like 3 or 4 minutes, keep stirring it and I'll see you then.

 There we are, that's popping nicely, nice and dry which is how I kind of want this one.

 Now I don't particularly want to cook these that much, I just kind of want them in the mix.

 In goes some fresh green chilli, as much or as little as you'd like.

 I like it that those tomatoes are not cooked down, they've still got a nice crunch to them.

 It's beautifully dry this dish which goes great with a side order with some other kind of more wet sauce or gravy.

I found some branches on the side of the road and I turned them into jewelry holders.

 and the other is a surface one where you can hold rings and bracelets.

 The ring and bracelet holder that you're about to see is an idea from Free People and

 I just turned it into a jewelry holder so if you'd like to take a look at Free People's blog post

 You will need a large branch, five or more twigs, cup hooks, twine, a marker, and a pair of scissors.

 Starting off with the ring and bracelet holder, lay the bundle of twigs in two or more feet of twine

 Then wrap the bundle with the two ends of the twine and tie another knot.

 Choose whichever end you'd like for the base and carefully pull the twigs apart so that it can stand on its own.

 Now for the necklace holder, you can see that I've wrapped one end of the large branch in twine.

 The length of the twine really depends on how long you want the branch to hang

 so just be sure to cut a piece of twine long enough to wrap the other end of the branch.

 Then wrap the twine around the end a couple of times and finish it off with a knot.

 Place the hooks down and mark the branch where you'd like them to be.

 This part gets a little tedious so instead of trying to twist the whole hook in at once,

 try making a hole first by driving it into the branch and turning it quickly in a half circle.

If you enjoyed this DIY, please subscribe for more and I will see you soon.

 Hi there, Amit here for AdviceHasMedia and today I am going to show you the Double Dip

 I have been using this smartphone from the past two weeks and I find that there are small

 Now that is generally formed because you keep placing this smartphone on the top of your

 desk or you keep it in your pocket with a few other keychains and some other coins.

 And in order to ensure that I don't get those kind of dents which you generally see here

 Obviously there are almost none as of now but they would simply come up.

 And in order to fix that I have bought a new hard shell case cover which is not yet available

 I have bought it through eBay wherein someone had actually imported it from US or UK and

 It's mentioned here that it's for HTC C840 that's Hard Shell Double Dip Case Cover.

 Now I'm just going to do the unboxing of this package and show you what all comes in it

 Let me just open the packaging and once you are in, let's see what all comes here.

 It's made out of plastic not the actual aluminium build which you get on the smartphone.

 So on the bottom you have the grey colour, on the top you have the red and this is how

 You can just remove this, remove the dummy paper out of it and this is what you get.

 Now this is made out of pretty good quality of plastic here as you can see here and this

 is how the camera comes and now let's try to place the phone here.

 So generally you would just push the phone here but in this case you can just slide it

 So once you have slid the whole phone, it should fit perfectly here.

 Let's push it perfectly and once you are done you can find that the camera placement is

 So they would actually fit perfectly on to the top areas as you can see here.

 There is some issue right now with my current screen guard which is actually bulging out

 but I will actually fix that slowly and apart from that you can place it on the bottom this

 So this ensures that you don't get those small lines or dents on the smartphone.

 I feel that it's more beautiful right now because of the color combination.

 So it makes it more beautiful and I am pretty much impressed with the build quality of this

 case cover as of now but except the part that it's not yet available officially by

 HTC India and also it's just imported through someone on eBay and it's actually overpriced

 If you have someone from UK then you can get it around 15 pounds or around 12 pounds depending

 on the stores but this is what you get right now and I am pretty much impressed with this.

 So if you are using HTC One I would actually recommend you to go for this case cover.

 Do like this video if you actually like the content and that would actually appreciate

 my efforts and I will keep you updated with more videos like this.

 Hey guys, so today before we start I just want to show you guys my hair.

 I kind of got a little carried away when I was glitter bombing myself but that's cool.

 Anyway, so today I'm going to show you guys how I do my high bun.

 Like super easy, so easy that I'm like I'm never going to do a tutorial for this but

 then I was like well people can't see style like how you're wearing it so I'll just do

 If I do use a gel it's going to be like aloe vera or kiss my face, the old formula because

 those are very very light and they usually absorb well even on dry hair.

 But most of the time I just use a butter because I don't like a ton of build up in my hair.

 I don't like a ton of product especially after I've already styled it once.

 This is the chocolate snickerdoodle butter by friends of Bath and Body.

 I do not use anything because I'm not, I don't need my hair to be super super slicked back

 I always have to buy new scrunchies because they end up stretching out too much and then

 I try to make sure there are no bubbles but that doesn't always happen.

 So I just put it through, fan it out with your hand and then just make sure you have

 I usually pull it around back and then tuck it just because I like that look better.

 They have very minimal impact to how my hairstyle is matching what I'm wearing but then it helps

 Then usually I do this at night or before I get in the shower so then I'll put my scarf

 And either go to sleep like that or shower and then when I'm ready to go I just take

 I was going to teach this song, I'm still going to teach the next tune, that being the

 8th of January in the Keith style, but I wanted to explain just a little bit more about these

 So getting back to the 1-3-5 out of that major scale, remember we put the 1st, 3rd,

 and 5th degree of that major scale to the 4th, 3rd, and 2nd string positions.

 And remember if we started on the 4th string position, and started with the 4th string,

 we had the 1-3-5, 2nd string position, we had the 3-5-1, and the 3rd string position

 Now let's look at the full position chords here, just for a minute.

 Remember we use the, we call that the closed position, 4th string position chord.

 And we know that when we fret the 4th and 1st strings with the same fret, it gives us

 So that's the G note, and this is also a G note on the 1st string.

 And again, we can place these three notes anywhere we want to get this triad.

 Now it would be good to practice using your three finger pinch with this full chord.

 And then come up and play the triad on the 3rd, 2nd, and 1st string.

 Now if I come back down and play that same triad on the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd strings, it's

 And again, if we play the triad on the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd strings, and then come up to

 the bar position and play it on the 4th, 3rd, and 2nd strings, they're stacked up the same

 And again, it works from the bar position up to the next 4th string position of G.

 So I just wanted to make you aware of that when you're thinking about these triads.

 So you can see how that system of numbers is just perpetuating itself.

 So you can see how that perpetuates itself as you go up and down the neck of the banjo.

 If any of you have any questions about this, just let me know in the forums or private message me.

 And I'll explain it a little further if you're having trouble with that.

 And I'm going to explain just a little bit more about switching these major chord formations in the next segment,

 So we'll see you next time, everybody, right here on MusicMoose.org.

 Hi guys, this lesson is going to be on how to play the Intro and Verse of Metallica's

 Okay guys, the first thing you're going to need to know about this song is that it is

 I'm doing this so that it's easier for you guys to learn it without having to change

 Okay guys, now that we're all zoomed in, the intro to this song will sound like this.

 Okay guys, now I'm going to slow that down for you and clean up my tuning a bit so I

 If you're learning this song for the first time, an easy way to remember it will be if

 you remember the notes of your index finger and just play the octave of it with your ring

 So the first note for example is A, which is the 5th fret of the low E string.

 Now throughout the intro, you're going to keep this shape of the root note on the low

 your index finger by just hovering your index finger on the string without pressing down.

 Next you're going to want to slide up from the 10th to the 12th.

And then you're going to want to go to the 8th and then slide up to the 10th

 To do that you're going to want to go to the 7th, of course with the octave at the 9th.

 so I'm going to play it first so you can see what it looks like.

 Okay guys so the first chord in this is going to be an A minor shape.

 is open A, second fret D, second fret G, then open E, open B, open C, open D, open A, open

 Next you're going to hammer on from 0 on the A string, to 2 on the A string, to 3 on the

And then you're going to form a C major shape and play the A minor shape.

 Okay next you're going to go to the B string on the 3rd fret and bend that up until it

 to mute it and play the 3rd fret of the high E string with your little finger.

 Next you're going to play the 3rd fret of the A string, and then the high E string,

 and then a full bend with the release of the 3rd fret of the B string again.

 Once you've pulled off from that B string, then you're going to play that again, the

 going to take any of your fingers, but I use my index finger, and go to the 1st fret of

 B string with your index finger, and 2-4 on the G string with your middle finger.

Please don't forget to subscribe, like and comment on the video.

 Side Reign Susan found this exercise on Janet Foy's Facebook page.

Since I saw it, I have tried it with my students with great results.

Not only does the exercise help your horse from anticipating and falling in at the corners of the arena, it also allows the horse to travel straight down the track.

 The exercise keeps the horse listening to your aids, the 10 meter half circles keep the horse's hind legs engaged, while the center line reinforces the forward and straight.

I am doing this exercise in the canter, but it can also be done at the trot.

I turn left at the end of the arena, I do a 10 meter half circle, and go forward to the rail, and then do another 10 meter half circle and down center line.

 My aids are for the half circles, inside leg at the girth for bending, and my inside leg is also my gas pedal.

Outside leg behind the girth to control the haunches, inside reign is for flexion and control of the inside shoulder, and the outside reign controls the outside shoulder and the speed.

On the center line, I sit straight, look straight, and half halt to maintain my horse's balance.

 If I don't like one of the half circles, my option is to add a circle.

Here I lean in on the first part of the circle and I have to say, Sue, focus, fix my position.

Here, perhaps my horse or perhaps me got tense and I think there was too much half in my halt.

It allows you to school center line without the horse even knowing it.

Zahner drifted out into my outside hand and I was not quick enough to catch it.

Try to ride these half circles in maintenance so you don't have to ride in correction on the center line.

Zahner loses his balance coming into the center line and I need to do a rebalancing half halt.

 I need to be a little more proactive with my outside aids as my circle was a little big.

 This shows a loss of control of the right shoulder and a loss of his haunches.

Have fun trying this exercise at home and feel free to send me your videos.

 Alright, so to get this deck out of here, all you really need is a Phillips screwdriver

 We're going to start at the bottom here, remove this little piece, and then around the edge

 of this unit there's kind of snaps that hold it in, there's no screws.

 In order for it to pull far enough, we'll have to clear the shifter.

 So doing this, normally you know if you're working on your stereo, you have the battery

 In this case, we're going to need the battery in because we need to turn the car on and

 At that point, you'd be able to take the battery out if you were a stickler, but today we're

 As you can see, mine's been out, so it's a little simpler than some, but it's basically

 So then reach back here and unplug the cigarette lighter, cigar lighter, depending on where

 Sometimes you've got to push on the tab with your screwdriver while you're pulling on it.

 It doesn't need to be completely unplugged, and if it's giving you that hard of a time,

 Just grab on here to this section now, and as you'll see, the whole thing by pulling

 Where it gets a little weaker is at the top there in that corner.

 Back in here, you're going to have some plugs that connect the clock and the controls, the

 It's got a push-pull, and you can obviously tell the clips on them, so you've basically

 It's got big connectors, but again, if you work them, you'll be able to pull that right

 We've got power connectors for things at the top and the radio.

 The radio now is simply held in by four Phillips screws, and we'll go ahead and remove those

 Okay, and now, that will simply pull forward and work just like everything else.

 You've got a couple of plugs to remove that relate to the power and speakers, and one

 These are again, quite straightforward, the power wires at least.

 Let's get you tuned in here, but the antenna wire looks a little bit tricky.

 Okay, so it has a little locking tab that holds it on there, whereas an aftermarket

 Now when I installed the amplifier in this car, how we did it is we brought forward,

 let's see here, we brought forward a set of four wires from the back that are hooked to

 two of the channels to the amp, so say left and right, and I cut the factory end and spliced

 these in to the factory wires so that they would then feed the speakers.

 We're going to remove that now because we're sending the car back and we just want to put

 So basically I'm going to pull these wires off, re-splice these matching colors for colors,

 and we'll be back to factory as far as the front end of the system goes.

 When we get to the rear end of the system, we'll do that in a separate video on how the

 What is up guys your boy Deuce here from One Level Entertainment and today we're going

 This is by a company you guys should be familiar at least if you're into computer.

 They make a lot of stuff, RAM for your computer so on and so forth.

 But what we're checking out today is something a little bit different.

 Now you guys if you have checked out my gaming mouse unboxing, no doubt that with a gaming

 This is the HyperX Skin and they spell it SKYN because it looks cooler like that.

 So what this is is you actually have two mouse pads inside here.

 You choose your surface, you have a control and you have a speed.

 The control is, and you can actually feel it through the packaging, they leave a little

 The control is a little bit more textured and then if we flip it over the speed is a

 I think it's like $9 for one, $14 for two so go ahead and just get the two pack.

 Now it's not like a sticker where if you put it on your desk you're not going to be able

 I'm going to find out when we open it up because if it does use 3M backing which is

 good adhesive backing it will say it on the back and we'll see what it's like.

 And this is so easy I don't even have to stop the camera and unbox it.

 And I also bumped the camera when I was doing that so whatever.

 And as you can see you can hear with that noise they are plastic.

 So you can tell, let's see if you can tell, the distinct difference that you're going

 This is the control skin and this is for more like FPS where you don't need the speed to

 And then I'm going to show you the other one which has like a shoe with wings.

 Now your normal everyday mouse pad would look something like, something like this.

 And you can get them in, you can get large gaming mouse pads and all that which I've

 tried and even the little cheap black ones which they work well.

 So that's you know typical, it has rubber backing, all that good jazz.

 Now I know this is just a typical size mouse pad, you can get the gaming mouse pads which

 are larger which are a lot, a lot more expensive most of the time.

 I actually have a Logitech hard surface one which was about $40.

 So you get a unique product that you can pretty much stick to your desk and forget about and

 It looks, you can see it, oh you can see me in the camera, woo!

 Actually slides around really, actually let me pull this out from underneath it.

 So it moves really good and what I'm trying to see is like if it's going to scuff up the

 The speed one, slide it around, bump my camera tripod, whatever, you know, the good stuff.

 And one thing I was concerned about with it having the texture, it does not mess up the

 I actually think I like the, I actually think I like the speed one better.

 There's not too much to show with this in case you guys are wondering.

 If you guys have questions about them, feel free to leave them in the comments and I'll

 I'm going to put it on my, nice thing about this is it will stick to most surfaces and

 But I'd be willing to bet I could pull it off and stick it to this table here and it

 So if you guys have any comments, questions, concerns, questions, Q&A about the Kingston

 Good evening everyone, after a long time we came back with an easy recipe of a noodle,

 sliced green beans, chopped onions, white onion, curry leaf, ketchup, chilli flakes,

 good for if your kids love Indian spices and it's easy for a snack time.

 Don't need that to be really hot, just to sweat the vegetables so the flavour is infused

If you need more cooked or a bit more very soft for the kibb, you can add a bit more water.

 To cook it faster, you can just break in between to allow the egg white to flow down and cook it

Once the white is cooked perfectly, you can sprinkle a bit of sea salt on top.

 We've had a lot of requests, so what we have is the finished hooked piece and it's been

 So then I cut a piece of backing fabric and in this case it's a piece of hand-dyed wool,

 but you can also use a piece of suede, a piece of cotton, anything you have that's a good

 So I pin it together with the right sides together, so the right side of the backing

 Then I take with a large needle and a heavy, in our case we use upholstery thread, and

 I'm going to sew with kind of small stitches as close as possible, the two layers together,

 So I would start on this corner, go all the way down, across the bottom, and up the opposite

 Then I'm going to take the sewn pieces and turn it inside out so that I have the right

 So then I'm going to just play with the corners a little bit to make sure that I get them

 Then I take my excess burlap from the fourth side, which hasn't been sewn, and I fold it

 in so it's even with the hooking edge, and I do the same with the excess fabric of the

 So now with my large needle and my heavy duty thread, I'm going to take stitches and

 do like a ladder stitch, starting on the back side and picking up the backing of the hooked

 Now in another situation I would use matching thread, but in this case this thread shows

 I think it's called a ladder stitch, it might be just called a whip stitch.

 Back and forth about less than a quarter of an inch apart, and I'm going to sew all the

 When I get about two inches in, I'm just going to park my needle, and now I'm going to use

 either Fiberfill, which you can buy loosely at any department store, and I'm going to stuff

 You can also use a pillow form, so if I was going to use a pillow form I would make sure

 that I had hooked this pillow to the appropriate size, 14, 16, 18 inches, whatever.

 So now I'm going to stuff my pillow with the backing, or sorry, with the Fiberfill,

 until I have it sufficiently stuffed and I'm satisfied with the way it looks and feels,

 So now I'm going to continue on with my, find my parked needle here.

 So now I'm going to continue on making small, little bit less than quarter inch stitches,

 picking up my backing fabric and my hooking, all the way across, all the way to the other

 end, put a little knot in it, and there you go, your pillow is done.

 This one has velvet on the back, and this one again has wool fabric.

 But you can see the stitches are very close to the hooking, so that you can barely see

 any burlap, and that's what you want to do, you want to cover the burlap up as much as

 you how to make this blossom ribbon flower is what I'm calling it.

 flower just because it's kind of thick and chunky and it just kind of goes in circles.

 to get started two pieces of cardstock and two circles actually of cardstock and two

 the needle I'm just loosening up those threads because that's what I'm going to be pulling

If you're having a hard time pulling the thread you can loosen it

 only going to show you when I tie the first one and then as I'm ending on the third one.

And then you're just going to take your scissors and cut the excess off

And then just cut off the excess because on this side you'll have way

 before I'm just kind of speeding it up so you'll only see me tie it once.

 a lot of threads hanging out everywhere once you start your flower.

 bring back one of your cardstock circles and one of your double sided adhesive circles

 and take one of the backings of that adhesive and basically put the circles together.

 you're going to take the remaining backing and this is where you're going to start your

So now you want to get your ribbon and just pick one of the ends and start in

And the best way I found is basically you kind of turn the circle, you turn your

 hand as you go and you kind of want to just start envisioning the flower so turn your

Like for instance I wanted, I know a lot of the polka dots showing here

 and I wanted a lot of the white threads showing so I just kind of turned it to give it that

 instance right here I'm just turning it so I have the polka dots facing.

 add a little bit of some stitches to it so it kind of holds a little bit more or here

 I'm just adding it to the sticky tape and just tucking it in so that you don't see that

Using my piercing mat and my piercing tool I basically pierced a hole

 in the middle as such and then once you have that pierced you're going to take your brad.

 See as you notice I'm kind of putting my thumb there to know that that's where I need to

And then turn it over and using again I actually just used the back

 of my piercing tool, the other end of my piercing tool to kind of bring down the little tabs

 cover a magnet so what you're going to do I used the magnetic snaps from BasicGrey.

 I'm going to add the magnet to the sticky side and then just put that on that end.

 So when you've managed to crochet a few and you want to make your blanket,

 you can see what I'm doing but if you use the same yarn you won't be able to see the seam as much.

 So if you join the yarn in the corner, I'm just going to create an anchor and a chain so that

This is just how to crochet them together but you could sew them

So I've created my one chain, I'm going to start to double crochet and

 you want to insert your hook into both stitches of both granny squares.

 one of the stitches and then back through the other and then grab the yarn from behind that.

 It might be a little tricky so I'm going to grab the yarn, pull it through once like I'm doing a

 it's a little sticky, grab the yarn and pull it through both loops.

 through each of the stitches, even the one chain spaces, you want to do that into the stitch and

You create an invisible seam, obviously you can see mine because I've

 done it in a darker yarn and that way you don't get any ridges or bunches but if you want to use

 a darning needle to do this you can just using mattress stitch like you would a knitted object.

 So if you wanted to try a different method and create more texture on your piece you might want

 just to make it a little more colourful and for this you put the wrong sides together.

 Line up the corners so that you make sure you're stitching exactly into each corner,

 anchor your yarn in place and you're going to just do a slip stitch through each of the stitches.

 Anchoring my yarn and do a slip stitch into each of the stitches along to create a chain

 Obviously I'm using a different colour yarn but if you did this in the same

 colour that you did your last border in you wouldn't be able to see it and here you can see

 I've created a ridge so the edges of the granny square stick out.

 If I continue doing this through all the corners it creates a really nice textured effect so I'm

 going to keep slip stitching down just so you can see a little bit more of what I'm doing.

 Insert into both of the stitches of both of the granny squares and match them up.

 have the same number of stitches but if one square is bigger than the other just ease it in.

 Then just make sure that the corners and the edges are all really tight as well as weaving in

 I'm going to do an unboxing and a quick review on the Nexus 10 tablet.

 I've just got it so I'm going to open it up and see what we've got.

 Which, if you plug and plug it from the charger, then you can actually plug this into your

 I opened one up just for this so I didn't have to bother with the password for this.

 Right here, keep me up to date and all that so I can check that because I don't like to

 That means if you already have like a smart device or you already had a tablet and your

 accounts, your apps, you can sync all your pictures, everything.

 As you see it goes through a little quick tutorial to see all your apps.

 If anybody that's familiar with any of the Android, they're pretty much all the same.

 And like if you want to change your background, you take your finger and hold and pause.

 What live wallpaper means is as you can see it's got moving stuff.

 Which I'll tell you it uses more battery but we'll just get one up there.

 Which some people like that just to know that you're actually pushing on something.

 They're super easy and so much fun, and they are so inexpensive now to begin

 You can make the dough clay though that recipe is on the website and also in the description below will be a link

 To make a large gift tag I rolled up a ball of dough about the size of a silver dollar

 And I slowly patted it patted the ball of dough into a flat circle disc about 1 4th inch thick

 And I laid this onto a cookie sheet now you can pat it out and flatten it on the cookie sheet

 Which is much easier you can use a cup to make a to make a perfect circle or or a cookie cutter

 I use something that I had around the house that had pretty design on it as you can see and I just lightly

 Pressed it down now you can add flour to something like that and that will help

 I just used a straw I wet the end of the straw and I put it in my clay

 And I and I made the hole just as large as I wanted it to be that way I could fit some ribbon in it

 After I bake it after you get all your discs made or gift tags made you'll want to put them into the oven and bake

 about 60 minutes on 200 degrees or you can let them air dry and

 so either way they need to be completely dry they'll be hard all the way through and

 Then you can paint them or leave them natural the natural color and that looks great, too now to paint them

 And I would put several coats on to get the brilliant and the vivid color that I wanted or you can use food color

 To paint them which is very easy and and very non-toxic this whole project is non-toxic

 As you can see I painted several discs so many different colors

 Easter baskets anything you can think of you can paint names on them or you can get stamps and stamp names on them

 So be sure though after you paint them that you spray them with varnish because they have to be sealed to keep out any

 Glossy varnish you can get it in satin you can get it in gloss you can get in high gloss

I let them completely dry add a beautiful ribbon, and then I put them on a gift

 I hope this video sparked some creativity in you like this video before you leave check out the other ones on the side

 Alright, Charlie King back here with you and this month's video tip is on the belly putter.

 It's been a really hot topic and first of all I would say that me being a purist, I

 feel like however many years ago the USGA probably should have made it illegal.

 But since they haven't and the long putter, the belly putter has come along and helped

 a lot of people putt better, it might be worth you taking a look at and here's why.

 When you putt conventional putting, you think about the top end of the putter and the bottom

 So if this handle and club head aren't kind of in the same place each time, then it can

 cause that one degree, two degree difference that makes you miss a putt.

 So you get a belly putter or a long putter and now it's attached to you, so it's attached

 So now one thing is for certain each and every time, this part of the timing is taken away.

 So now you have a big advantage in terms of putting to be able to attach it here.

 Now it doesn't mean that you'll automatically be better at first.

 But if you put some time into it, then all the same essential skills are there.

 You've got to square the face, you've got to have the right speed, you need to hit it

 So those things are still there, it doesn't take that away, being able to read the greens,

 This piece is in the same place every time and this one may not be in the same place

 So now you go ahead and you start to get that same ball position.

 You know the thing I love about it too is it makes you have perfect arc as you look

 I mean unless you detach it from your stomach, it is going to make a perfect arc.

 And it tends to, from this angle, not tend to be a straight back straight through, it

 So those are the things that make it worth taking a look at, those are the things that

 I putt with my conventional putter, but I certainly see the value of that belly putter.

 Hi and welcome once again to Greg's Kitchen where the food is finger licking.

 Now a Mongolian Lamb is not only one of the most delicious meals that you can ever have,

 So what you're going to need are 2 capsicums or peppers, sliced.

 And we're going to cook that until it's cooked for about 4 minutes.

 Now all we do is mix that through for about a minute and that's it ready.

 Now I'm just going to add this to some rice or some noodles and that's it.

 Okay, we have a little three cylinder engine and we're going to show the proper way to

 One, you've got to make sure you face the piston the correct way.

 This one has an arrow and it should point towards the front of the engine where the

 Also, be careful that you do not damage the connecting rod journal on the crankshaft.

 And I've taken little pieces of fuel hose and put those on there.

 These are hardened bolts and even though the crank is hardened, if things don't line up

 perfectly, it is possible that the threads will put little nicks in there on the journal

 itself and those little nicks can damage the brand new bearings.

 We've also lubricated the installer and I'll probably add even a little bit more oil.

 You've got to make sure that you've got plenty of lubrication for assembly purposes.

 So I'm going to add a little bit more since it's been a few minutes and probably some

 On one end, there's these little notches that stick outward and what they do is they catch

 on the edges of this and won't allow the ring compressor to slide into the bore.

 Now that I've got everything lubricated well, you use the key and you press down and you

 And what I like to do is have about an inch of the piston sticking out.

 And I'm going to make sure that the dot is facing the correct direction.

 I also turn the crank so that the connecting rod journal is either at the top or at the

 You don't want the rod journal off the side because then it will be hard to get it on

 Next step, make sure the piston is facing the correct direction.

 It's very important that this be flush against the cylinder head surface.

 If I'm having to hit it hard, that means the ring has probably popped out.

 If you have to hit this hard, you're going to end up busting the ring.

 At that point in time, stop, pull it back out, and realign everything.

 Oh, it's actually onto the rod right now because I had it at the top of the bore.

 When I put the connecting rod on, I'm going to put some more lubricant on this, put the

 cap on it, put the nuts on it, and then torque it down to proper specifications.

 Hi, today we're in the kitchen because we're getting ready for our Halloween party.

 We're going to be telling one of those creepy Halloween stories tonight.

 We're going to be passing around the body parts of a poor demented friend who has passed.

 So we're going to go over a few tips so you can plan the same event at your house and

 What we're going to do is we're going to create our friend's heart.

 We get started by slowly taking off the top core of the tomato.

 And then slowly go around and take the skin and in slices peel away the skin.

 Okay, we got our tomato done and what we've done is we've cut it really close.

 And it doesn't matter if you have some of these nooks and crannies because you can actually

 make them in the tomato and give it a little bit of texture to it.

 Now the good thing about tomato is there's the seeds inside and when you give it a squeeze

 it gives a little bit of a squeeze back and that's just like the heart muscle would do.

 I would do this probably the day of the party and not do it beforehand or not do it like

 a day or two beforehand to get ready because you want it to be fresh and a little tense.

 So when you are ready to read it at your story, you'll have it.

 Now the pasta is done and what we're going to do is this was spaghetti which will also

 be seen as veins but we're going to add a little bit of oil and mix it in.

 Now it's still sticky but the oil will help keep it loose so if you put it in a plastic

 Now the other thing is I'm going to put it in the fridge and that's going to make it

 a little clumpy so I'm going to during the break probably put a little bit more olive

 Next thing we're going to do is we're going to start on making brains.

 It's cauliflower and we're going to throw it in the boiling water and it says to cook

 We're going to put it in and we'll check it out in five to ten minutes.

 Our cauliflower is still cooking so that's still getting ready but let me show you the

 What you need to do is get marshmallows and we've already started to string this along

 I'm going to suggest you go with a regular size marshmallows because you can barely see

 the needle through the thread and I've almost cut myself a few times.

 The other thing is the wire on these is starting to come through so you might want to get a

 little thicker, maybe something for yarn that you can clean to go through these.

 And what we've done is we've stringed them along and then what you're going to do, like

 And they're going to get even stickier and slimier and when you string them up or put

 them in, they're going to be really gross to touch and to feel.

 Again, I'm going to recommend a thicker string than this and then you'll be good to go and

 Now what we've already done here is we've put a little coloring in the brains so if

 this turns out to be something you put on your food table, you can make it more disgusting.

 However if it's going to be passed around in the dark, you don't have to worry about

 We added some coloring here and you can see that it looks kind of like blood so it looks

 Now we're going to put this in the fridge, let it cool down and get extra clammy so when

 You just want to check on how much time you leave it in boiling, in boiling water.

 Now let's go over a few other items that make for great little side attractions.

 One thing we tried to do but didn't work out so well, but you might be able to give

 I don't know if you can see that, but it kind of looks like a witch's fingernail.

 Now there may be something like a cake type glue that you may be able to use, but we couldn't

 The best way is you need to have some ridges and sand off the edge.

 I wouldn't recommend pulling them off your finger and eating them.

 And once you have the outside, you have a fun dip that you can call, it's not dip.

 Kids will get a kick out of it, especially when you keep saying, it's not dip.

 And use the stalk and coverings as dried skin, as well as the avocado.

 So those are some basic things that you need for your Halloween story.

 Look for Tragic Sam, look for Gross Halloween Stories as the main category.

 What's up you guys, James Wedmore here with the Bar 10 for Profit system.

 And today I'm going to teach you a trick that I like to call Tom Cruise's flip to pour.

 It made Tom Cruise famous when he filmed the movie Cocktail back in 1988, I believe it was.

 It was about the only trick he could do, but he did it so much he could do it well.

 So I'm going to teach it to you right now, very basic, easy maneuver that's just going to have all your guests

 First of all, we're going to start with a plastic flare bottle.

 before I ever do them behind a bar at a private event or a party with glass.

 So the reason for this is you don't want broken glass in your eyes or in people's faces.

 Once you have it down, I usually like to have a rule of thumb ten times.

 I can do it with a plastic before I go to the glass and feel comfortable doing it in front of people.

 And I'll go ahead and have a cocktail shaker in the other hand.

 You can use a glass, plastic cup, anything that's going to catch the liquid.

 And we basically bring it up into the pour and then bring it out.

 And what you're doing is you just let go when you bring it up and just leave your hand open like so.

 Okay, so when you have that down, if you obviously don't have a plastic bottle and you want to start trying right away,

 And when you're ready, go ahead and step up to the glass bottle.

 you don't want to do any more than one-fourth of the bottle filled with your liquid, with your alcohol.

 So if you're going halfway or above, you're going to have liquor spilling everywhere.

 So when you're ready, also you want to use a pour spout just like this one if you can see that.

 So usually towards the end of the night or something, you can start doing a fancy trick like that.

 In my DVD section of the Bar Team for Profit system, I've got a ton of tricks just like this.

 And today I'm going to show you how to prepare and grill the perfect burger.

 First, you're going to start with two pounds of ground sirloin.

 You're going to add half a cup of tomato juice, and that's to keep the burger nice and juicy.

 Once you shape the burger, you should get about four eight-ounce burgers.

 What you're looking to do is make a nice checkered design on top.

 On a gas grill, make sure your grill is nice and hot, at least 500 to 600 degrees.

 A burger this size should take approximately eight minutes for a medium-rare and 10 to

 Once you put the burger down on the grill, make sure to keep it closed.

 That's going to ensure that that burger cooks from all angles and it sears almost immediately,

 This burger should be ready in about another three minutes, and it'll be a perfect medium-rare.

 After about eight minutes, this burger should be just about ready to go.

 The best way to tell if a burger's ready is with a simple hand trick.

 A medium-rare should feel just like the base of your thumb, spongy with a little bit of

 give, while a medium burger should feel more like the middle of your palm.

Well today I was going to show you how to make some baked salsa chicken.

 Now this is a super simple easy recipe, it's one of those ones where you just mix stuff

 together, pour it over some chicken, bung it in the oven and buffo, it's done.

 So for this, all you're going to need is 4 chicken breasts, 3 tablespoons of brown sugar,

 2 tablespoons of balsamic vinegar, 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard, yeah!

 So I'm just going to chop up some tomatoes and some shallots, spring onions, scallions, things.

 Righto, the first thing, always, preheat your oven to 200 Celsius.

 And we'll just pre-spray our baking tray with some cooking oil.

 Well some of these bits are just way too thick, so I'll just cut them in half a bit more.

 But of course I said I was going to cut this up, so just into tiny bits.

 And because that's chocoblock and I know it's going to just fall out everywhere,

 And now all I have to do is bake this in the oven for 30 to 40 minutes.

 Alrighty, well the timer's just gone off so let's take this out and have a look.

 Now all we need to do is serve this over some buttered noodles or some rice and oh yeah!

 Now I'll do that later, but first let's give this a crack for a bit of a taste test.

 Well it's cooked perfectly all over so that's a good start and let's see how it goes.

 Might seem like a strange combination of ingredients but believe me, it pulls together beautifully!

 Well guys, I hope you enjoyed that recipe, it really is delicious.

 I'm going to stick mine on a soft taco shell, sprinkle some cheese and sour cream over it and oh yeah, that's what I'm doing!

 Anyway, remember to thumb this video off for me, subscribe for more.

 Thanks for watching and I'll see you next time right here on Greg's Kitchen!

 It's always Greg's Cuisine, a dog and a boy of care, I cooked for you today!

 In a tortilla wrap or something, or a burrito I think they call it.

 Although both of these knots look the same, one's nice and secure and the

 safety bulletin where a couple of the trainees had mistied the scaffold knot

 and I thought I'd just create a little bit of awareness on the issue.

 scaffold knot or double fishman's knot is often tied around the thumb and one

 of the ways of potentially mistying it is to tie a double overhand knot first

 cinch it down on a carabiner it looks exactly like the scaffold knot or double

 fisherman's knot except for double overhand knot has been tied around the

 tag end instead of this standing part so if you put some weight on it that tag

 thumb wrap method to tie the scaffold knot the correct way to do it is just to

 grab a bite of the rope and then with the free end wrap your thumb and the

 standing part of the rope twice back down towards the loop and then tuck this

 tag end up where your thumb is replacing your thumb and you can just tighten that

 up and the difference in this case is that double overhand knot is tied around

 this long section rather than this short section and you can put that loop into

 carabiner and once it's set tight that's a nice secure way to tie into a carabiner.

 So I guess this highlights the importance of doing a bodyweight test on

 Today I'm going to be teaching you guys how to do the flower picker.

 If you put your hands here when you waltz normally and then you shift over and you're

 like I'm going to one hand waltz and now I'm going to touch the floor.

 If your feet were together you'd almost want your hand like normal position here but that's

 But you could do it like this but you probably want your hand like here.

 And then this foot goes about half way between your hand and your foot.

 And then you'll be able to reach the floor because my feet will be here and here.

 Normally you would think that flower pickers are touching the floor but that's not really

 So what I mean by that is to learn flower pickers if you just try to touch the floor

 it's still not really going to work because you're going to be in center spin, you're

 going to be off center on this foot, you're going to be balancing.

 So what you want to learn to do is to thrust the wheel on a downward upward motion.

 And get as low as you can on this foot and explode upward on the other foot.

 This one is weirder because you press the wheel forward and pull your body away from

 And once you have those then you can reach the floor when you're down.

 It's a pretty easy trick but it's really important that you learn to propel the wheel doing your

 It's not like your regular waltz and it'll take a while to get used to it but if you

 And then I would say for an advanced fun challenge, try to propel the wheel by using your hand

 Hi, all of you have made cards with 3D embellishments on them that just won't quite fit into an

 Well today I'm going to show you my answer for giving these cards.

 As you can see I have a 5 1⁄2 by 4 1⁄4 inch card here and I've made a box very similar

 What you're going to require is cardstock cut at 12 inches by 7 3⁄4 inches and scored

 along this edge at 1 inch, 5 1⁄2, 6 1⁄2 and 11 and then turned and scored at 1 inch

 Then what you're going to do is fold them, all of the score lines.

 Make sure you have a good fold so you might want to take a bone folder and make sure these

 Now because you're giving these as a sort of envelope you may want to decorate them.

 So what you're going to do, the first thing I do anyway, is put just a little T on the

 Then I take any kind of stamp that would coordinate with my card, ink it up and then stamp your

 Now what you're going to do is turn it back over again and cut along the long edges into

 Do that on both sides because this is how we're going to form our box.

 So now you take the bottom, the part that you haven't decorated, and on the outside

 of the tabs you should use sticky strip, but to make this quicker I'm going to use snail.

 Now on the part that doesn't have the decorating what you're going to do is fold your tabs

 Make sure they're stuck well, that's why you want to use snail, or sticky strip I mean.

 Okay now then on the top you're going to take and do exactly the same thing.

 Fold it over and there you have a version of the pizza box which is big enough to fit

 You can write on the box or you can do whatever you want to decorate it, but make sure you

 Now I'm just going to quickly show you a version which will work for a 5 1⁄2 inch square

 As you can see it fits nicely in, just in case you would have some embellishments there.

 Now what you need for the 5 1⁄2 inch square card is two squares of card stock, 7 3⁄4

 Then you're going to score at one inch all the way around each.

 Take your bone folder and fold them up, making a good crease on both pieces.

 If you want to decorate this box to match your card, one of these pieces is going to

 Since both of them are the same size it doesn't really matter which one.

 You can take your ink and your stamp or whatever it is you want it to do, ink it up and decorate

 Now on the bottom, the first thing you're going to do is on two sides, you're going

 Take your adhesive, once again I suggest sticky strip, but just for quickness I'm

 Yes you're going to cut the tabs again into the corners on the opposite sides just like

 So you're going to cut it off on the other side, the two opposing corners.

 Now on these tabs you're going to take your adhesive, adhere the tabs, fold them up and

 Now the only thing left to do is to attach the top to the bottom so that it opens exactly

 So you're going to run adhesive along quite a bit of it because you want it to stick along

 You're going to take that and you're going to lie your box bottom right along the fold

 Adhere it really well, fold it down and there you have a box for your card.

 Now you can do this in just about any size and I'm going to do a written tutorial that

 just includes some of the different cut dimensions for the different sizes of cards.

 This is John, and today I'm going to show you how to install an aftermarket stereo into

 As always, for safety, please disconnect your battery before beginning any electrical work

 To remove the stock stereo, you're going to need a set of the factory release keys.

 Slide them in and apply pressure outwards to disengage the locking tabs shown here.

 Gently pull the stereo out of the dash and unplug the connections.

 If you have a stock Hirschman antenna, you will most likely have a plug that looks like

 We do offer adapters online, part number VWAB, as well as two models of direct replacement

 antennas with a new style plug, found simply by searching antenna on our website.

 Also check out both product pages for a walkthrough on how to install one.

 This is a very clean and simple way to wire in a new style stereo and assure no stock

 You can check out an in-depth video of how this is wired on the products page of our

 With the adapter connected to the new stereo's harness, plug in the stock harnesses from

 For this wire we specifically designed a custom wired switch, found under part number radio-toggle

 Go check out the product page for a description of exactly how it works and a walkthrough

 I've also waited to connect the yellow constant power wires of the harness adapter until now.

 I crimp the wire of the stereo harness into one end and use heat to shrink the casing.

 The yellow wire from the harness needs to be connected in the other side.

 However, if you are installing a radio toggle switch, I strongly suggest joining the yellow

 wire from the switch with this wire at this junction for a little cleaner connection.

 If you remove the ashtray, you can see a Veed support bar coming from the dash.

 Some stereos had a support bar on the back that would utilize this bar.

 However, many modern stereos no longer have this support, and this bar can often interfere

 If the latter is the case, a simple way to relieve the problem is to bend it at each

 arm in the center, and then simply push it back up into the dashboard.

 Your new stereo should come with an outer cage, which has angular cutouts of different

 Thread the harness and antenna plug through the cage, insert the cage into the dash opening,

 and bend the tabs towards the edge of the cage to lock it into the dash.

 Next, plug the harness and the antenna into the stereo, and seat the stereo into the cage.

 Snap off any trim rings or faceplates, and you're off to the races.

 out on wet hair with a curl enhancing product and then we've stuck a diffuser attachment

 with your fingers, not too much because the more you work your fingers through curly hair

 just take small sections using a curling iron to enhance her natural curl.

 around the face, curling it to really bring out that natural curl.

 it's not a uniform look, you don't need to curl every single section of hair around the

 face, just maybe some of the ones that don't curl as well as others.

 Alright, now that we've done that, this is definitely an option, you can go ahead and

 leave it this way, just kind of mess in and move in the hair, run and placement wherever

There's also another option if you want to add more volume to the hair

 since she does have pretty long hair and we want to add some more volume up here.

 to do is take a bobby pin and just stick it underneath that hair just to kind of push

 small random sections of hair with a bobby pin and just kind of twisting and adding.

 And what that does is it adds a lot of volume here around the face.

 And you of course want to leave just a little bit of hair right there around the side of

 And just take a little bit of light spray, kind of scrunching up in your hands.

 Ok, so before we put our valve cover back on, we need to clean all this groove that

 I'm just going to use some brake clean and just go around the circumference and clean

 It's actually those little grommets that are for the spark plug holes, they go over these

 and they're kind of metallic looking on top and that's for when the locking nut screws

 So if you don't want any leaking into your spark plug well, just make sure you clean

 Alright, next you get your new valve cover gasket and you start going around and just

 pressing it in and it should, you know most of them, they come, you can lock them into

 They come with little tabs on the sides of these and they'll stay in place while you're

 I really don't, I've never used any and so far they all come out pretty good so I wouldn't

 Make sure they all go in, they go in all the way in and they're nice and tight.

 Okay so before we put our valve cover back on, we need to put some gasket maker, some

 RTV silicone, same kind I used on the bearing cap back here on four areas basically.

 The first, on each side there's going to be a round bearing cap like this and the area

 you need to put some RTV silicone is on this side, right at this, where the bearing cap

 And same thing on the back, which is going to be hard to show you, but you need to just

 do the best as you can to get an even amount, even bead on this area and the same thing

 And on right here, there's an uneven surface due to, I don't know exactly what, there's

 a cap I think, a metal cap that they hammer into this cylinder head or whatnot.

 So you need to put a bead of silicone right from here all the way to here.

 Put a bead from here to here and right where the cap meets the top of the cylinder head

 Okay so after putting RTV silicone in the areas I showed you, it's time to put our valve

 Make sure you put this, you get all the cables and stuff out of the way and you put this

 Otherwise the valve cover gasket might move and you might have to take it off and put

 Okay so with the valve cover back on, that's basically just putting everything back together.

 Don't forget to put these rubber grommets back on over the spark plug holes.

 You can dab these in oil but these are all the way at the top and they're going in pretty

 Now we just get these, this metal locking nuts I guess on and you want to start from

 the middle and get these two in first, do little by little and then work your way out

 and push that in and push it in evenly and you should be good to go.

 Oh by the way, don't forget to tighten that bearing cap on if you're replacing the bearing

 for the bearing cap back in to 9 foot per pound if you're replacing that like I did.

 So yeah, you just put this back in and you torque these down to about the same, 9-12

 If you guys like what you see, please give it a thumbs up and if you have any comments

 Hey what's up everyone Fatman Snack Reviews back again here for another video.

 Well basically there's going to be a tip on how to re-eat pizza properly.

 You know it's probably been heard, you've probably already heard of it but I just want

 So let's say you know you bought some pizza, there's some left over so you eat it for lunch

 You know it gets all soggy and stuff but well that's if you put it in the fridge but you

 So what you're going to do grab a microwave safe plate and put it in the oven.

 What it's going to do is basically melt the cheese and well this has, I'm not sure if

 Whatever toppings you have that's basically what it's going to do.

 So take it out of the oven and what you can do now is go over to your stove and get a

 Alright so what you're going to do here is get a drop of that pizza that you just microwaved

 It's easier to preheat this and you know after the 20 seconds are up your frying pan is going

 So I'll show you guys right now how crisp it is, how the bottom is.

 They even added a button on you know the microwave so this is more of a easier kind of thing

 But the oil seeps through the breading or the bread and goes to the bottom so you know

 You guys probably can't hear that but it is more crisp like you know barely box pizza.

Today I'm going to show you how to buttercream a torte or a cake.

 pastry cream inside and I'm going to cover it with chocolate buttercream.

 important thing is to start on the top and you want to put a big amount of buttercream

It probably seems like too much but in the end it will all make sense.

 you have a bunch of buttercream on the top you want to spread it out and I'm using an

 spread this out so you want it to be perfectly flat on the top so you don't want it to sort

 going to push it just beyond the edge so that you're creating almost a little lid on top

So you get some on your spatula and you're just going to sort of spackle it

You don't care if it's smooth at first and you'll just put it on and you just sort

And when you're taking the spatula off of the cake you don't want to pull it

If you try to smooth it out it'll get too thin and you'll end up having

Okay so once you get to that, you've joined it all up, just go around

 and at this point you can sort of fill in any gaps if you have some.

If you press too hard it'll happen too fast and you'll scrape too

And then remember how I had you, when you were first doing the top

Again not straight flat onto the cake and not straight up and down but at an angle.

 And I'm just going to swipe that so that it's nice and smooth on the top.

 So you want that lip to come up so that you have something to swipe off and make it smooth.

 or something just keep doing this and even heating up your blade a little bit with some

One thing to do is just come down and check and make sure that it's square

 Okay, now that I have everything in my cold water bowl, it's time to put it away.

 ask me all the time, Ren, it's fresh cheese, how long will it last?

 moisture in it as possible, you should just store it in tap water in the refrigerator.

 like seven days, you probably want to use it more as a melting cheese than a fresh cheese.

 If you just want to use it as a melting cheese, you actually don't have to store it in the

By taking it out of the water, it will naturally dry out a little bit and it would

 be more like Formaggio della Pizza or pizza cheese or shredded mozzarella as we're used

With the Burrata, because of the heavy cream, you should really eat

Maybe a day on it, but certainly store it in the water, keep it in the refrigerator,

 once they've cooled down, about half an hour, and then you can just store those in some

 and then they'll be just like string cheese, just a lot tastier.

 be pizza cheese right off the bat, all you need to do is just take it right out of the

Again, give it about half an hour to cool down, and after that, you can just store

 it in a bag in the refrigerator until you're ready to slice it up and use it.

 To go out, grab yourself a bag of Caputo Brothers Creamery Cagliata.

 Thanks for your patience, this is Health Reset Meals, the world's number one diabetic cooking

 Today I thought to myself, if a Latino chef and a sushi chef were to make a food baby,

 And as for America, the land that calls football instead of catch ball and soccer instead of

 Remove the seeds from four jalapenos, chop them up, and add to the food processor.

 Cut a quarter of a Spanish onion and add it to the food processor.

 Pluck all of the cilantro leaves off of one stem, then blend together.

 In a small pan, add one tablespoon of olive oil, one tablespoon of Latino blend.

 Pluck off all the leaves from the smallest oregano stem, a pinch of sea salt, followed

 by a quarter teaspoon of paprika, three teaspoons of hot sauce, one tablespoon of water.

 Be sure to bring your flame to low as this will create a broth-like consistency, and

 Apply only chunks of the sauce across your sushi, followed by laying across your shrimp.

 Diabetics, please consult with your doctors and dieticians just to make sure that this

 Two hours after was 78, leaving me with an amazing glycemic index of only 30.

 Now guys, please know that without the support of you and your friends, these videos cannot

 I can't bring them out anymore if you guys aren't sharing the videos, liking the videos,

 I would like to hear what your thoughts, if you have any requests, what do you like, what

 There are about 7,000 things I'd like to say about oysters and clams.

 I'm going to talk only about opening mollusks, which is a great art unto itself.

 It's smooth on one side, but it's tricky sharp on the other side, or should be.

 The most flexible of all, but that doesn't matter in clams, should be sharp, should be

 On the oyster, at that pointy part, you want to have an opening that you can see.

 Coming around, making sure to get right up to the point on both sides.

 Scrape out the stuff that's in the top of the shell, because it's yummy.

 Take off the top, and then you just sort of put it right there, ready for the cocktail

 And I think we covered almost everything they asked for except the fuzzy green stuff.

 Well, if you wait a while, there will be some fuzzy green stuff.

 You know, I just got back from a river trip and there was some fuzzy green stuff on the pita.

 So this is chicken enchiladas in a crock pot with the leftover chicken.

 But if you didn't have it and if you didn't have a dab, then you could add a can of chicken.

 And the way this is made is like a lasagna, where instead of the noodles, you have tortillas.

You know, it's one of the things that we like to do is have things where everybody can get involved.

 And I tried it before with like 15 or 7, 12, and it was too soupy.

 And I'm going to just lay it on the table because Janet said it was okay if I did that.

 Now, I'm going to mix together two cans of cream of chicken soup.

 And I got the mild, Sue would get the hot, and that's one of the ways we're different.

 Of course, you did have to bail me out by going into sour cream.

 Now, I know it's, you know, it is two cans of cream of chicken soup.

 What's really great is when it cooks up, it's almost like a tamale.

 If I had leftover hamburger, I'd probably throw that in there too.

 I don't think it would be like major, oh, I noticed you didn't layer quite right.

 Actually, when we first started cooking together, Jen yelled at me a whole bunch of times because

 Put it on low in the morning, come back, and I swear this is tasty.

 sort of modern technique of using the curling irons or the curling wand.

 What I'm actually going to do Lizzie is get you to have a go at using the wand and using

 So what we've actually done, we've shampooed your hair with the John Frieder Color Renew

And what this actually does is help to neutralise some of these brassy

 Okay Lizzie, so first of all what we're going to do, we're going to break your hair up into

So you sort of take one out at the front there and then you come straight

 And the section that you're not using, to keep it out of the way, you can just twist

 You get the rest of the hair and you just get a big clip and you very simply clip it

 What we want to do, we want to create this more of a modern wave so we actually keep

 the roots sort of flatter but then get that lovely bend on the ends.

 So what we're actually going to be doing is tonging from this way.

 And it's important that you keep the tong or the wand that you're using completely horizontal

 So what we're going to do, we're going to let you take a section now.

 So now we've got all these lovely waves through your hair and we're going to brush them all

 And we're going to rub it into our hands, okay, and rub it on to the surface of the

 And you create a whole layer of the wax over the surface of your brush.

 So then what we're going to do, we're literally just going to get your hair and brush it through.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to plant up a container for full sun and

 in this particular case I'm going to be using the Carex bucanei as my focal

 throughout the entire summer and what I'm going to do is I tend to plant a

 little bit off to one side and a little bit further back as opposed to direct

The reason for that is that I'm trying to sort of create more surface space in

 the front so that I can add more plant material, make the container look fuller.

 So all I've done as I say is is planted a little bit off to one side and a

 little bit back as opposed to direct center which would necessitate me having

 container a little bit in my direction and then I'm going to bring it back to

 of height and then what I'm going to do is I'm going to incorporate some

 Vancouver Centennial geraniums into this because again I think that the

 contrast in the leaf color is outstanding and it does produce a lovely

 that was produced at the University of British Columbia and they are called

 say that it may not bloom quite as prolifically as a regular zonal geranium

 but I think that the color of the leaf is outstanding and there we go.

 And then as a backdrop what I'm going to do is I'm going to add this copper leaf.

 Beautiful plant with rather inconspicuous flowers but an incredible

 color of leaf that I think is going to look really good against the Carex

 the whole idea here is to make this container look absolutely full right

 from the onset so you do have to tend to plant a little bit closer than you would

 that in like so and then I'm going to add some cascading material in this in

 this case I'm going to use some ivy to give us that nice draped kind of look

 and then what I'm going to add as a cascading material as well is the

 yepomia or the potato vine and for those of you that are familiar with it it's a

 rather aggressive grower and what I suggest is that if it starts overtaking

 your container that you can easily pinch it back because unfortunately I have

 seen it in situations where the container is nothing but potato vine

 lovely contrasting color that lime green but again never fear in terms of being

 able to pinch it back just to make sure that the other material has has space to

 five to six hours of direct light will produce sufficient bloom on all of this

 go over we've used our Carex buccanei as a center point we've used the Gerbera

 daisies we've also used the Vancouver centennial geranium which has that

 color to it as well and then we've draped over with a Apomia or the potato

 Molding chocolate candy will make you a hero, just as long as you don't tell anyone how

There are chocolate candy molds for weddings, for children's parties, for

 bar mitzvahs, for just about any occasion, even bachelor and bachelorette parties.

 The easiest raw materials to use are chocolate chips or candy melts.

 need lollipop sticks, candy cups, cello bags, and you'll also need a heat source.

 melt your chocolate in a microwave or a double boiler, and the pros will use a tempering

We use a double boiler to avoid overheating the chocolate, which could make it gritty.

 If you're making chocolate lollipops, now's the time to put your sticks in, but let them

 on the table a few times to let out all the air bubbles and to make sure that it's even,

 and then you take your mold, put it in the refrigerator for five to ten minutes.

 your chocolate mold comes out of the refrigerator, you can see that the chocolate is already

 starting to come away from it because it's contracted slightly.

 over and your chocolate lollipops will just come right out of the mold onto the counter.

 We've got some all-purpose flour, some butter and we've got some evaporated milk there.

 It's not as well as as healthy as it can be but who cares about healthy when you're enjoying a nice snack, right?

 All my mom is doing here is working that butter and it is at room temperature

 Pie dough except we're not using cold butter, but I'm sure if you use cold butter

 Just got to work it in there and you want a nice smooth but firm dough

 It's gonna pick up all the sort of flour on the sides of the bowl there and that's an indication that

 You need to have almost a clean bowl when you're done and that will indicate that the dough ball is nice and ready

 But typically after you roll this out, you're gonna cut it up into strips and deep fry it

 Cutting it is gonna be a bit tricky because it's gonna stick to the knife and everything else

 So what she usually does she has the tawa you can use a frying pan any sort of

 Griddle or something like that and you're gonna cook it on here on a medium heat

 Just a minute or so on both sides for that dough to firm up a bit.

 The dough has been rolled out it's on the tawa now 30 seconds on each side

 Then we're gonna move it back onto the board there to cut it up into the shape before we deep fry

 So like this would be the perfect size you're cutting that in half

 So that'll be two so we're looking at about three to four inches or so

 We've got vegetable oil heating and I'm using a wok simply because it has a high side in case it splatters

 Well, it's pretty hard for it to go over the top and make a mess on the stove

 It's in the vegetable oil now the oil was a little bit too hot to start with so you can notice a few of them

 Little bit darker, but basically one like a medium high heat medium heat and you're gonna cook them

 They're gonna float when they're all done and they're gonna take on a lovely golden color

 So it's important to have something that would withstand the heat.

 We already fished out the first batch and you're gonna hear that nice crunch from it

 That is exactly what you want because we're gonna be coating this with that sort of syrup

 Took about seven minutes or so to go nice and golden brown and fully cooked.

 Stick of cinnamon and a nice thick piece of ginger that was smashed just to release all that flavor and we're gonna

 Reduce that down into a nice thick syrup, but we need to melt all that sugar and keep stirring it

 So what we're gonna do now, we're gonna pour it onto that cooked korma and

 You've got to toss it right away to really coat the korma with it

 The big pieces of the cinnamon as well as the ginger will be removed before serving this

 sort of flip it all around in the pot just to break down any chunks of sugar and to make sure each piece of the

 Chris here at CareerVampire.com always a pleasure to have you guys here in the kitchen with me

There's a few steps involved, but you're gonna love this sweet treat.

 You're going to take some almonds, put them in a food processor, let it go.

 So then you're going to take your chicken, which you've already nicely cut up, put that

 If you want, get fancy and make yourself a little fruit salad on the side.

 If you want something hard you can't chew through, cut it into small pieces.

 But it's a little more difficult when you're looking for a precise weight to get it down

 Glass fire is a mobile object with fire that is used to create a pleasant atmosphere.

 It uses an ecological fuel and thanks to this we can enjoy fire without smoke or smell.

 To each model we attach an easy and detailed instruction of assembly and usage.

 You can enjoy real fire after 10 minutes of receiving the product.

 Once all the elements are at your disposal, start with placing the steel plate on the base.

 The final thing is the cup which you place in the opening left in the steel plate.

 To light the glass fire, you use the metal tool to take out the cup from the glass fire.

 Holding the cup with the tool outside the cylinder, you fill up the cup,

 Be careful with the fuel container and make sure you close the bottle with Fanola.

 Next we place the cup back in the opening of the steel plate inside the cylinder.

 Lift the tool a bit, paying attention that any drop of fuel falls back into the cup.

 When the drops stop falling, use the lighter provided in the set and light the wet ending of the tool.

 Okay, this particular question asks you to draw yourself a multi-view sketch of this

 It's a little complex, so I want to get started and give you a hand with it.

 So let's start with our origin point, which I'm going to leave right there, and I'm going

 I'm going to give myself an origin point right there, and this is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

 It's too wide, too wide, and it is a closed rectangular shape, so I'm going to close it

 You're used to looking at it in 3D, and in 1D, it's just going to appear completely flat

 because remember, our front view is going to be looking at it dead flat.

 So what I'm going to do is from our origin point, I'm going to move over right here,

 So again, this piece right here is this piece, and this length is also this length.

 That's my bottom edge, which is this right here, and since it's rectangular, I'm going

 If you notice this right here, this is a flat place that's two squares in.

 Okay, so I just drew this right here, and then the line goes over.

 If I were standing directly in front of it, looking this way, this is exactly what I would

 So I'm going to draw some very light construction lines corresponding with all of my details.

 So if I look at this, I will count this as my origin point for this drawing.

 I don't want my construction lines to interfere with the drawing.

 So then from there, going to this origin point, which corresponds to that, it is 1, 2, 3,

 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 over, which will also correspond to this construction line.

 If I look at this point, which is also this point, it's two wide.

 Next I will follow some construction lines out, corresponding with all my details.

 And I will start an origin point, which will be my back edge right there.

 Now if I look at how wide this is, starting from the left, going to the right, it is 1,

 This is a complicated concept to understand, so stop this video, rewind it, replay it as

 got 40 pepper plants out there so I need to find a couple of things to do with my peppers.

 I've made sauces before but this time I'm going to be trying a recipe by PitmasterX

I am going to make a couple of changes to his recipe just to change it

 to his recipe are going to be, I'm going instead of three cloves of garlic, I'm going to

I'll be grilling all these peppers which he did in his video but I'll also be

First thing we're going to do is cut up the peppers, just chop the

 We've got the grill nice and hot so let's go ahead and throw our peppers on.

 One of his many and varied quirks that gives him the nickname pain in the ass.

 just because I'm worried that you're going to lose a little bit of flavor when you grill

 Now it's all that, I'm going to add three quarters cup of apple cider vinegar.

I'm going to add two, or about one and a half tablespoons of cane sugar.

 Now in a little bit of a change from his recipe, I'm going to add half a lemon.

 Alright, now you've strained all of that out and all you're left with is a sauce and a

 Alright, the only thing left to do is go ahead and add it to a mason jar.

 Today we're going to have a yellowtail and salmon tartare which is a very Japanese delicacy.

 If you have a local fresh fish market you can get a nice and fresh Scottish salmon or

 So you can make a strip first and you can just chop it up like that way.

 I don't usually do any peppers on my sushi and sashimi but this one is tartare so you

 While the seasoning gets better, the works itself, we do avocado.

 You don't want to press real hard because avocado in the bottom will be mushed.

 So it takes away those strong spiciness and it also makes it crunch.

 So any of you that do team roping or need a ranch rope or just want to play on a dummy

 in your backyard and need a rope for it, I'll show you how to tie that knot.

 First we'll take, oh we have to unravel our rope about 6 inches or so.

 Alright, and from there we'll have the three strands hanging out.

 You'll take the middle one, or in this case just the white one, and kind of curve it to

 And then you take your right hand, or the left rope, go over and under that very first

 Then this rope here, with the blue rope, you'll go over and under that red one.

 Then with that blue one we'll go right up through that very first loop that we made

 Alright, now that the knot's good and cinched up and tight, we'll cut the strands.

 And leave just a little bit there so that way when we melt the rope together your knot

 Okay, now that we have that knot taken care of, what we'll do now is we'll get about

 18 inches of rope out there, and you'll want to make a loop with it.

 Now you take this long strand, pull it back to you, and put it on top of that overhand

 Sometimes you have to pull on both ends so that way your loop stays big enough.

 This is the Ghost Dog from the movie The Really Bad Dream Before Santa Claus Comes.

 You need a 321 B-Body undipped white, two white 260s, and a scrap of orange 260.

 And then give it a squeeze and get the air all the way down there towards the tip.

 And just here past where it starts to taper, we're going to make a twist.

 I'm going to roll my knot back a little bit to give me a little bit of squishiness in

 And then go ahead and arrange that so that it's on the tip of the nose there.

 Your white 260s you're going to blow up all the way but make them a little bit soft.

 And that gives me a soft but fully filled 260 but a little bit soft.

 You can tie them together and then make your pinch twist, whatever.

 But I make a couple of pinch twists at the ends with the knots.

 Kind of arrange it so that the pinch twist is between the ears.

 And of course the last thing you do is you take your Sharpie or your dry erase marker,

 And you don't need a whole white 60, you just need part of one.

 What we're going to do is add, we'll attach this to the pinch twist.

 About, I don't know, two thirds of the length of the, maybe three quarters of the length of the head.

 You could add a black in there, because the inside of his mouth is black in the cartoon.

 I'm Johnny from Expert Boxing and right now I'm going to show you guys how to throw the

 For most beginners, this is going to be the first power punch you learn how to throw.

 Start in your natural boxing stance, feet shoulder width apart, hands up, elbows in.

 You can throw the right cross from a neutral position or after a jab, like for example

 What you'll do is you'll keep your front foot flat on the ground and the back foot pivots.

 The back foot will rotate and you're going to rotate your entire body, the hips and the

 The right side of your body, rotate the right foot, the right knee, the right hip, the entire

 The upper body, right torso will come forward, right shoulder will come up for more power,

 Right elbow will come up for more speed, more power and the right glove will land with the

 The left side of your body will pull back when you throw the right hand.

 When you throw the right hand, you want this rotation to happen all at once.

 Do it from a relaxed position, relax your hands and then exhale, throw the punch.

 Don't drop it, don't drop it down here, don't do this, don't drop the right hand when you

 jab, it telegraphs the shot, makes you vulnerable to the left hook.

 A lot of guys try to come forward, they want to be powerful, they want to push in with

 If you do this, you're off balance and your right leg now applies less force to the punch.

 So if you stay center, bend your knees, go down, slightly, just go down slightly and

 project your weight down, project your power down so that you apply more weight into your

 You want to twitch, you want to dig this right foot into the ground as if you're putting

 You also don't need to lean back, you don't need to load the punch, it makes you vulnerable

 The key thing, also when you throw a right cross, pull the left shoulder back, this is

 It loads the left hook, prepares it so the left hook follow up comes faster, stronger,

 If you lean forward like this, now the left hook is going to be slower to come back and

 Another common mistake with the right cross, a lot of guys stand with one foot behind the

 other, don't stand like this, don't stand with your right foot back here.

 If you do this, now you have to rotate over yourself to get the right cross out, okay?

 So from here I can't reach my opponent unless I really rotate and I fall or something.

 This position is not good for a long right hand, this position is good for a long left

 This is like a jabbing position, you're going to jab, you're going to run, you're going

 If you want to hit your opponent with the right hand, open up this right foot, open

 up this angle a little bit, give your right foot a direct line of sight.

 This way you don't have to pivot over your own leg, you don't have to over twist yourself

 From here, your right foot is a direct line of sight, right punch, your right cross comes

 Let's talk about some fun things, you want to try some advanced things right here.

 Okay, when I come in, there's two more angles, I can tilt back like this, let's say my opponent

 He throws a jab, I tilt back, throw a right cross right over his jab, okay?

 I can do the exact opposite, let's say he throws a right hand, I can tilt here and throw

 How this works is he throws a right cross, I move my head out of the way, I put my right

 cross in, I win the exchange because his head is going to be right there.

 Let's say I'm throwing a right hand to the body, I can also go down, okay?

 So first, put some jabs up here and then, notice how I didn't look down, I kept my eyes

 So that way, you know, I'm not telegraphing the right hand coming down.

 Now, it doesn't matter if I bend my elbow, okay, if I bring my right hand up or around

 As long as I'm rotating my body completely, keeping my weight balanced and staying grounded

 on two legs, the right hand is going to be deadly no matter how it lands.

 So make sure you practice this punch on the heavy band, practice on your opponent.

 Hey everybody, it's Tessa here and today I'm going to be doing a guitar tutorial for

 It was a request by simply the best 1809 and I love this song and it's getting really popular

Most importantly subscribe either up there or on the sidebar and also

 15th and yeah first I'll play the song for you, and then I will teach you how to play it

 So the whole entire song is the same throughout, you need a capo on your second fret and the chords you're going to need are

 then straight back into E for a plug your are floor you preindustrial

 Second fret middle finger fourth string second fret according finger second string air fret end pinky finger first string third fret

 fourth string second fret middle finger fifth string third fret ring finger second string

 Middle finger sixth string third fret ring finger second string third fret and pinky finger first string third fret

 Point finger third string second fret middle finger first string second fret and ring finger second string third fret

 Mar 7 a version of a minor 7 or a minor thanks is a minor actually your version of a minor

 Chords the entire song for the intro where it says shorties loves like a pyramid we stand together till the very end blah blah blah

 two three four G one two minor two three four and D one two three four

 Then stone type like love you show them the verse and for the verse chorus bridge everything.

 Down down up up down down up down up down down up down down up down up down

 Stones heavy like the love show solid as the ground we've known

 And the course exactly the same the bridge is exactly the same so to review that basically it capo second fret the intro is

 Each chord for four beats and the verses and everything else is a minor C at 9 G D

 And the shred pattern is down down up up down down up down up I

 May put a little annotation with what the strum pattern is people are always asking me

 So I was the comments like what's the pattern so I'll write it in the a little blur

 and most importantly subscribe either up there or in the corner or inside or in the bottom or wherever it is and

 Now I will play the song with the song just so you know the timing and thanks again so much for watching and see next video

 Thank you all so much for watching I'll see you in my next video bye

 The recipe originally came from a great friend of ours, Sally Marshall.

 For those of you who don't know Elsie's speak, raisin is a raisin.

 Just use a normal egg if you don't know what we're talking about at all.

 But, if you want to keep it egg free, we're just using ground flax.

 You can buy this in a supermarket, and if you can't buy them in a supermarket,

 you can grind normal flax or linseeds in a coffee grinder or a high speed blender.

 So we've got one tablespoon of ground flax, and we're going to add three tablespoons of water.

 We're going to add in one and a half teaspoons of ground cinnamon.

 Okay, next step, we're going to mix together our wet ingredients.

 So again, we have our coconut oil, our agave, we have our flax egg, and we have our bananas.

 Next step, we are winding the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients.

 And while Elsie's doing that, I'm going to add in some walnuts and the raisins.

 One of the beauties of outdoor cooking is we can water the flowers.

 One of the beauties about not cooking with eggs is you can taste the raw batter.

 We've preheated to 150 degrees and we're going to bake for how long, Dave?

 We're going to set the temperature for one hour and 15 minutes.

 We took it out of its little tray and we left it sit like that on a wire rack for 15 minutes.

 Sally Marshall, thank you for this recipe and we had great fun changing it and it worked.

 Thanks for watching, please subscribe and banana bread power to you.

 Okay, we're going to do a really cute butterfly and she's going to be on a flower.

 We're going to do a U right here at the bottom of our paper and you can kind of tip it.

 Alright, we're going to do a little zigzag line in between the two lines.

 Okay, and then let's make the stem and we'll do two lines that come out of the bottom of

 Alright, and then we're going to do another one off to the side.

 Okay, and then we're going to do another one over here on the little one on this side.

 It kind of looked like she was going to be flying or floating over the,

 Okay, and then we're going to draw the wing that comes back in like that.

 Then we're going to do another raindrop right next to that one.

 You can do a circle right here and then do another circle right here.

 I have a little room, and I'm going to put another raindrop on this wing,

 Hello everyone, today I'm going to show you a roti churma or spicy crumbled roti or tortilla.

 So here I have some leftover rotis that I'm going to crumble it or break it down.

 So here just rub it between your palms and it will break it down.

 Then add cumin seeds and asafoetida or hing, about a pinch or two.

 Then add chopped green chilies as per your taste and pinch of turmeric powder.

 Now saute the onions until they are soft and becomes little bit golden brown in color.

 So stir this and cover it and reduce the heat so it will cook faster.

 It's not so I'm going to cover it and let it cook for few more minutes.

 So now I'm going to add the crumbled roti and mix it really well.

 So we are going to saute this for few minutes until they become crispy.

 It's also getting a nice color of the turmeric and it's looking really nice.

 So it's kind of sweet and savory kind of snack and it's really healthy for breakfast or snack.

 Now for the spices I'm going to add niya jeera powder and garam masala powder.

 Thank you for watching and I'll see you with another simple recipe.

 Today we're going to install a Spring Spout Kingston Brass Kitchen Faucet from our Concord

 Now, this sink has four holes, but this is generally designed to go in a one-hole application.

 Now before we install that, you'll want to make sure that you go around the perimeter

 And use our washers and lock nuts to secure it from underneath.

 And before you secure the faucet to the sink, you'll want to make sure that you have two

 I'm going to hand tighten it and then we're going to use a basin wrench to secure it all

 Now before we do that, you'll need to have two half-inch threaded brass nipples.

 I'm just going to use a pair of channel locks to hold that while I secure it with my crescent

 Now before we turn the water on to our faucet, we're going to remove the sprayer.

 There's two washers in there that you'll want to make sure you get.

 Just place those washers right back in the end of our hose and thread our sprayer right

 Hello again, it's me James Haskell, welcome to James Body Fire TV.

 going to show you today is how to cook the perfect eggs and also how to be creative with

 So first, I've got a personal way of how I think the perfect set scrambled eggs should

Now obviously that's going to have an effect on calories so adding

 So eggs are in, right now, because we haven't got any salt and pepper, imagine that this

 a bit more cooked, at the point where I put butter into this recipe, just want you to

 I wouldn't have thought of cinnamon on my coffee, but not on your eggs.

 up a load of spring onions, a tomato, an onion, a chilli, maybe a bit of paprika, sauté that

 well is because I don't think enough people eat veg at breakfast.

And this point, James is going to get me a plate or a bowl to serve it

So this is the crucial point for eggs making and you can't let it go too fast.

Remember, even if you turn the heat off, eggs will keep cooking.

 So you've got this kind of runniness and most people will take their eye off the game.

 They'll be like, oh, this is the point where you need to keep your eye on it.

 I'm going to take my eggs off the heat as it appears that there needs to be a little bit

The butter will still be drifting around the eggs and that's it.

 with the pesto in there, we've got a little bit of a Mexican restaurant.

 If you want to have a go at growing your own bedding plants or the garden or containers

 You can either sow the seed or one of the easiest ways to do it is to buy small pots

 They're really inexpensive and there's enough in there for the average size garden.

 All you need to do then is to grow them on a sunny windowsill or a conservatory or if

 you've got a cold greenhouse at this time of the year that will give them just enough

 So what you need to do is to get a seed tray and I like to grow them in these sow seed

 The reason for that is when you come to plant them out when the danger of frost is gone

 at the end of the spring you're not going to disturb the roots and the plants will establish

 If it's dry, water it and then let it stand and make sure that the compost around the

 And then using a dipper, it can be a bit of garden cane or an old biro or plastic digger,

 Don't grab them by the stem because if you do you'll bruise the stem and it will rot

 And then with the dipper we're going to make a hole in the compost and we're going to feed

 the roots down and gently firm the soil around, the compost around them.

 Lower the seedling down so that the roots are in the compost and use the dipper just

 And what we can also do is we can, when we put them in the hole, we can make sure that

 they go a little bit deeper so that the leaves are just sitting above the surface of the

 And then when you've transplanted all the seedlings it's important that they're given

 We're using tap water for this with a watering can with a fine row so that we don't dash

 The watering just settles the roots and keeps them nice and moist.

 And what we want to do with these busy lizies is keep them somewhere light and frost free

 in about six weeks time, they'll be big enough to use in containers.

 Michael do you want to tell us just a little bit more about what you're going to be teaching

Now the reason we're saying it's a proper mix is because if you don't

 let go of the throttle or too much elevator it will keep flipping and that's not an elevator.

We're going to try and, the quicker you get the sticks to the final position,

 start the rudder and add some throttle and turn it into a proper flat spin.

 And all we're going to do is we're going to go straight up, we're going to flip the airplane

And eventually look we can get it dead flat and in this case even

And judging by the amount of power we add we can let it just come right down

And we're going to come out and we're going to go back straight up.

 going to let it come right to the ground and finish our routine.

And there's a quick aerobatic routine using nothing but the maneuvers

 to learn how to get into a hover, how to get out of a hover, and how to safely and calmly

 pilot for Precision Aerobatics, showing us today how to do waterfalls and flat spins.

 Stay tuned next time when Michael shows us how to get into and out of a hover.

 That's the instrumental head, instrumental introduction verse played an octave higher.

 If you want to add a little energy to it or if you've got a fiddle player that's already playing the head and you want to use something for your lead that has a little, I don't want to call it flash, but takes it up above the 12th fret at any rate, you can play that same thing that we looked at an octave higher.

 And so the melody is basically the same, I made a couple of little changes to it, but here's the way it goes.

 Just playing these first two notes, the double stop D and G, B and E strings on the 3rd fret.

 That double stop that we played the first time through, notes G and B.

 So from that pair there, you're going to play the notes A, the 10th fret of the B string and C, the 8th fret of the E string and just walk those up.

 And of course those two notes there we're playing there are notes of the G chord itself, the 3rd of the chord, the B and the 5th of the chord, the D, there at the 12th and 10th fret respectively.

 Now we're changing to the C chord and here we're going to be starting off with the 5th of the C chord and the b7 of the C7th chord, the note G on the 8th fret of the B string and the Bb note the 6th fret of the E string.

 And then two fourths there on the 5th fret of the B and E strings and the 3rd fret.

I get all confused and I start to look at stuff up above the 12th fret.

If we were playing down here in the regular G position at the 3rd fret it would just be these notes here.

 We're going to run out of room but the important thing is that we're playing the notes E, the 5th fret of the B string and the note Bb, the 6th fret of the E string.

 At the 13th fret we've got the F note and the D note the same as those two notes there.

 Those would be the notes of the G chord like we played before, the note B and the note D. Or you could play Bb and give it a little bend if you want to.

 A there on the 10th fret of the B string and 8th fret of the E string.

 Same little riff we played before except we're going to end it on the note A down here, the 2nd fret of the G string.

 Our next dish that we're going to prepare in our Valentine's brunch menu is a lovely

 The reason I chose this dish is it's quick, it's simple, it's got a rich delicious

 flavor and I always like to have some kind of egg dish in a brunch.

 You can prepare this ahead of time, you can prepare it on the day, so it gives you a lot

 You can use this recipe to make one large quiche if you're hosting for a number of

 friends or for Valentine's Day if it's just you and your sweetheart, well I like to make

 So the first thing I'm going to do is to make the egg and cream mix that's going

 So just whisk it together, same as for our French toast recipe.

 Add a little bit of grated nutmeg, fresh grated nutmeg I think has such a wonderful flavor

 Just a little pinch of salt, a wind of the cracked pepper, and then just set aside.

 As I said, I've used these little small tartlet tins and they have a removable bottom

 which makes it great for your presentation at the end and just it's a lot easier than

 You can use store bought pie dough if you want or you can make it yourself, it's up

 So what I did was I took this raw dough and I placed it in the oven with a little bit

 This is called baking blind and what it does is it allows you to get a nice crisp shell

 The beans will stop it from puffing up and from your little tartlet case shrinking around

 So just put that in the oven for about 15 minutes at 400 degrees and you're going to

 So when you take it out of the oven, this is what you're going to end up with, a lovely

 crisp golden pastry shell which is perfect for filling with your quiche mix.

 You can use mushrooms, you can use asparagus, you can use all different types of cheeses.

 It's really whatever you like, whatever you prefer so have fun playing with it.

 Today I'm going to use some leeks because they're in season and what I've done is

 As I said you could prepare all of these the night before or the day before and have all

 the ingredients ready to go on your Valentine's morning so you're not spending too much time

 You can't really go wrong with bacon so I like to add it especially in the morning.

 I think people like to have their bacon and eggs in one form or another.

 Some mature or sharp cheddar cheese, mature as we call it where I come from.

 We're just going to pour on a little bit of our egg mixture just so it comes up around

 So what's going to happen is our eggs are going to set in the same way as if you were

 making an omelette or a frittata and our cheese is going to melt in there and we're going

 I've just put our tartlet dish onto a cookie sheet like this and it's going to help us

 Put it into the oven at about 350 degrees for about 20-25 minutes just until the custard

 They're just nicely set and they've got that lovely golden colour.

 So to unmold these, I just place it on top of a glass like that and you can see that

 I'm just going to garnish it with some nice, fresh spring leaves here.

 I've just dressed these in a little bit of extra virgin olive oil, seasoned them with

 For a little bit of colour and texture, I'm just going to garnish, and flavour of course,

 I'm just going to garnish them with some slices of lovely crunchy radishes.

 I think it adds a great little Valentine's Day touch and colour.

 It's our leek, bacon and cheddar quiche with a few nice, fresh spring leaves and a little

 You can enjoy it together and then you can run around Torrey Pines, Balboa Park or wherever

 So for fun and inspiration, come and join us in the Raw Food World.

 And we've got how many days left until we go to Ecuador and we see our new home that we've never even seen the house of yet?

 Five days away for you to witness Angela walking in her house for the very first time.

 For the last ten years, Angela Stokes Monarch has been staying in other people's houses around the world.

 The big question of the day is, how are we going to bring this 60 pound monster to Ecuador?

 Okay, so moving right along, Angela Stokes Monarch is making a green smoothie and wants to share that with you.

 Yeah, I've been living on green smoothies mostly for the last few weeks.

Monarch bought nearly all of the end of the persimmon season here in Ojai.

 I was going through them for a long time, making green smoothies, and I just got into the rhythm of it.

 And so I've been making them a lot and I thought I'd show you what I've been doing.

 So I'm really loving mostly using papaya, green apples and berries, all kinds of different berries and cherries as well.

 So today I'm going to make a green smoothie with papaya, raspberries, cilantro, sunflower greens and romaine lettuce.

 So I was just going to show you, when I use papaya, I like to put some of the seeds into the smoothie.

 Usually when I eat papaya, I don't really eat those seeds because if you've ever eaten a papaya seed, you know what it tastes like, right?

 When I'm throwing all of this into a smoothie, I don't mind putting some in because it's not going to really affect the taste.

 And I'm going to get the medicinal properties of those papaya seeds going into me.

 They're kind of like anti-bacterial, anti-fungal, anti-yada, yada, yada things.

 So they're good, I think, to have a little bit of medicine like that going into your body.

 So at the markets around here, you can find some berries already, like strawberries and stuff.

 It's like the ones who've been forced and the flavor's not that good.

 And I'm just loving the taste of all these different frozen organic berries that I can find.

 So these ones are frozen organic red raspberries, extremely vibrant.

 The frozen organic cherries, oh my god, those things are off the hook.

 But I love putting cilantro in smoothies because otherwise I don't get it very often.

 We buy flats of sunflower greens from the local farmers' markets here.

 If you imagine, each one of these would turn into an entire sunflower plant with all of that energy in it.

 And I like to put a little bit of sprouted chia flour in with it because we went over this before.

 I love the way that it acts like an intestinal broom, moosing through the body.

 I don't use a massive amount of it, but I like to use some every day.

 And of course you can add more water or less water to have a different consistency.

 And I just kind of work it in like that, mix it up a little bit.

 This is why I have a spirulina mouth so often in the videos lately.

 If you eat something like this in the sunlight, it's just mesmerising.

 Between the green of the smoothie and the spirulina, it's just beautiful.

 Like I said, I mainly use papaya, green apples, berries and cherries.

 Let's see how many persimmons we have left out of all those hundreds.

 We were going through masses every single day, but then we got sugared out and we just couldn't do any more.

 And Matt Monarch, ticking down the minutes, the seconds, the days.

 Well hello internet and welcome to part 4 of my low-fat vegan recipes.

Today I'm going to show you how to make vegan cream cheese, vegan butter sauce, vegan sour cream, vegan alfredo, and ratatouille.

 Now for the vegan cream cheese I'm going to use 1 cup of extra firm Morinu 1% fat silken tofu.

So I'm going to throw in the tofu, then I'm going to get myself some lemon juice.

 I'm going to add 1 1⁄2 tablespoons of lemon juice, 1 tablespoon of pure maple syrup.

 1 1⁄2 teaspoons of liquid aminos or soy sauce, depending upon what you prefer.

And then to finish off everything, 1⁄2 of a teaspoon of nutritional yeast.

 Dump all that in there and blend it up and refrigerate and there you go, vegan cream cheese.

I'm going to use the same exact tofu as before, except this time I'm going to use 4 ounces of it.

 Again in the food processor, 1 1⁄2 teaspoons of lemon juice and 1⁄2 of a teaspoon of apple cider vinegar.

 And then to finish it off I'll add 1⁄4 of a teaspoon of sugar as well as 1⁄4 of a teaspoon of salt.

 And then you just blend it up and it tastes just like sour cream and this is what it looks like when it's done.

 And then I'm going to add the cream cheese that we just made as well as the vegan sour cream we just made.

 And then to that I'm going to add either 1⁄8 to 1⁄4 of a cup of nutritional yeast.

 Then add 2 tablespoons of regular old lemon juice and then I'm going to get myself, make sure you get white miso paste.

 I'm going to add 1 tablespoon of white miso paste and then blend it up and it's done.

 Turn the pan on high then add to it 1 tablespoon of cornstarch and then you're going to mix that up.

 Make sure that you get all the cornstarch out of the bottom there.

 And then add 1 tablespoon of white miso paste and then get yourself a whisk and whisk that up until it's nice and creamy.

 And now I'm going to make myself some roasted ratatouille and you can see everything here that I have all chopped up.

 I have 1 eggplant and it's diced, 1 red pepper, 1 yellow pepper, 1 zucchini, 1 yellow squash and 2 onions.

 And I kind of have them all uniform because that works best for me.

 Then I'm going to take all those vegetables and put them in separate pans and if they overlap a little bit that's no big deal.

 I'll be cooking these vegetables at 450 degrees and 15 minutes in I'm just going to give them a quick stir.

 And now while the vegetables finish up for the last 15 minutes I'm going to add some low sodium diced tomatoes.

 I'm going to add 3 cans and then I'm going to get a tablespoon of minced garlic, add that to the pan.

 And then after a full half hour I'm going to take all those vegetables and add those in as well.

 Give everything a nice stir and then I got myself some fresh parsley.

 I'm going to add 1⁄2 cup of that and then I'm going to get some ground thyme, 1 teaspoon to be specific.

 And then to finish it off 1⁄2 of a teaspoon of black pepper and 1⁄4 of a teaspoon of salt.

 And then of course you're going to stir all this up until it's very well combined.

 I then choose to cook it on the stove top at 20% for about an hour or you might like it exactly the way it is right here.

 And I prefer to have it on top of jasmine rice or pretty much any other way.

 So hope you guys enjoyed these recipes and please leave your questions and comments below.

 Today on the Rugged Homestead we're going to be changing the filter in our

 drop-in water filtration system that we have mounted underneath the kitchen sink.

 Hi, this is Rich with the Rugged Homestead and we have a basic water

 filtration system for tap water on our kitchen sink and every six months you

 need to change out the filter because it builds up with the particulates that it

 I try to do it on the 1st of January and the 1st of July so here it is at the end

 of January and as I said a little bit behind with changing it out.

 system from Whirlpool and what this is good for it reduces the chlorine taste

 It lasts for six months as I said and it's a 0.5 microns I believe.

 actually what I'd like to have is a Berkey water filtration system that you can basically

 take mud and put in and have pure drinking water come out the other end.

I'm going to go over to the sink and start changing out that filter.

 Okay the first thing we're going to do is to shut off the cold water inlet into the

 still pressure in the line so that red button back there you press that button and that

 to catch anything that drips I'm going to take a small plastic container and put it

 underneath the filter so that we don't have a wet mess underneath the cabinet here.

 thing that we do is the filter came with a wrench that fits over the housing of the filter and

There never does seem to be enough room underneath a kitchen sink.

We have a drop-in replacement cartridge here which has a slightly

 As you can hear it's a good thing we have that container underneath to catch the water that's dripping down.

Put the wrench back on slide it up and then we tighten it back into place.

You can hear it filling back up and we're good to go for another six months.

If you like what you see give the video a thumbs up, subscribe to the channel and leave a comment down below.

 I think you're seeing where I'm headed now with all these small chord inversions, breaking

 So, we're still talking about taking these chords, showing you the large versions of

 them as I like to call them, or the large inversions, and breaking them down and making

 going to, if you can envision these three fingers changing to those three fingers.

 flat 7 sound, dominant 7 sound, your B on the third string, fourth fret, that's your

Then your fifth underneath this string here, which is your E, and then the

But it's nice because you have all this interesting stuff happening in the

 just keep sort of playing that riff in different spots and it sounds different because we're

 I'm going to break that down and play only these three strings.

 it's got the flat 7, the 9, and the root as those three strings.

 the middle strings, but it's that top one creating that nice melody.

 is comprised of the G sharp, which is the 3rd of E. The 3rd string then you're going

 Hey all, I'm here today with the slap stick, the specialty stick.

 What we have is this flexible tip, which allows you a great deal of flexibility and speed.

 Hi, I'm Lisa Schrader, and I'm going to show you how to make my pouring root beer cupcake.

 This cupcake gives the illusion that you're pouring root beer into a mug, when in reality

 So what you'll need to have on hand is of course the glass mug.

 We're going to be using A&W root beer jelly belly beans, a root beer candy stick, brown

 cupcake liners, and you'll want an empty, clean, 8 ounce can of root beer.

 The first step is to take the root beer jelly belly beans, and we have about a half a cup

 The next step is we want to take the brown cupcake liner, and we're actually going to

 That way when we frost our cupcake, we can actually keep the frosting off of the jelly

 Now if it's okay with you to have frosting on your jelly belly beans, you can go ahead

 But I'm going to insert it here, and into that brown liner goes our standard size cupcake.

 Now I'm going to take some white frosting, and what we're really going for here is the

 look of foam that you might see when you're pouring root beer into a mug.

 We take our root beer candy stick, and we're actually going to insert it directly into

 And the last step is to take your can, and we're actually going to use this tab right

 The candy stick top is going to go in here, and then we're going to push this down slightly,

 And once you have it in there, you want to push back up on the tab, and it locks the

 It couldn't be easier, and I think you and your children are really going to enjoy making

 Hi, I'm Dean DeMarzo, this is my third video lesson and I'll be covering some

 your playing style a bit and you don't have to pick as many notes.

 note you want to play and then slam down your finger on the next note.

 note and then you're going to pull off so that the note behind it sounds.

 You're going to want to move your finger just slightly to the side to sort of

 pluck the string and give it a little more vibration and better sound.

 Now you can combine hammer-ons and pull-offs in ways to make your solos

 and slide it down the fretboard, up the fretboard, whatever you want.

 just pick the first note and then you're going to actually just bend the string up to the note you want it to.

 bending with the proper intonation, which is your bends aren't out of tune like...

 You want to make sure you're staying within whatever key you're in.

 A technique that comes up a lot in rhythm guitar playing is palm muting.

 You're going to take the edge of your palm here, edge of your hand,

 Now you don't want to go too far up, otherwise you're completely dead in the string.

 Okay, here's a few exercises that you can do to replace some of the exercise you're

Whether you're having the foot, knee, back or shoulder issues, hopefully

 some of these exercises will be able to be useful for you and not aggravate some injury

So, I'm breaking down jump roping into three main categories, cardio,

 give a little bit of a different style, still use some of the same techniques, but might

 elbows at a 90 degree angle and you're just swinging those back and forth.

Now, you can combine this with your knee lifts, lifting your knee up

 to get some core workout, pulling that knee up and you're also good for the lower back.

 It kind of helps those muscles stretch out and warm up a little bit.

 your toes, you're getting calf workout as well, but at a little bit lower impact.

 it can be a good way around some of those injuries that might be aggravated by the jump

The other way you can get the calf is just doing a straight lift with both feet.

 But then when you get into shoulders, you can do free weights or a light resistance

 Or you can shorten that up if you can handle a little bit more pressure on that.

 rotate in so that all the shoulder muscle rotation is isolated.

 rotation and then you can get the outer rotation in the opposite arm.

Again, using a light resistance band, you don't need a lot of pressure on

Just that motion with a light resistance band, you'll notice it in the shoulder.

Okay, that's a quick run through a lot of the different exercises.

 Hopefully some of those are going to be ones that will work real well for you.

 to touch on some balance, especially in the calf muscles getting a lot of work.

 that really uses the front of the shins which balances how you're using the back of the

 we're on stretching, you need to be stretching those calf muscles out as you're working them

One of the best stretches to get all the way through your lower back of the leg

 is take a belt or a strap, sit with your feet straight out, put the strap right around the

 applying nice steady pressure until you can feel it and then hold it there for 15 or 30

And that's stretching from the calf all the way up into the hamstring

 stretch out and it's stretching well because it's relaxed because you're sitting.

 is great for if you have plantar fasciitis or if you're having lower back issues because

 Okay, hopefully that gives you some ideas and then you can adjust the time and the length

 and the effort required to exchange that with what you need to do for your jump roping.

 Alright, go hard, challenge yourself, but be smart, be safe, fight on.

 home with a little bit of effort and a deep fryer, but trust me, you're going to love

 cod, haddock is also nice, or pollock if you happen to be thrifty.

 in, and also that's going to give you the bubbles in the batter.

 Alright, the first thing I do is I dump in about a half teaspoon of salt, and that really

 going to add it until it looks like the consistency of pancake batter.

And then you have to crank your deep fryer right to 375 to cook the fish

Now, while your oil warms up in the deep fryer, you're going to add your last secret

 Now, if you're like me and you're messy, between the bowl of batter and the deep fryer,

 and parchment paper or wax paper or aluminum foil or whatever makes easy cleanup, and a

 of halibut or cod or haddock or whatever you choose, and you dunk that in the flour.

 Get her nice and coated because that's going to let the batter stick to it.

If you're smarter than me, you're probably using tongs at this point.

 forms a crust of coating, just give it a little bit of a shake.

And we've finished cooking our beer battered style, English pub style fish.

And also the tartar sauce recipe because we're enjoying them all together tonight.

Do not attempt to assemble canopy and weather that may compromise the

 be taken down in windy, icy, snowy and any other severe weather.

 all climates are different state to state, therefore we do recommend that you purchase

 ground stakes and rope that are graded to hold firmly down in high winds.

 concrete, make sure you purchase the expansion bolts appropriate for your unique weather.

 sure that all parts are accounted for by completing an inventory of all items listed on your parts

If you do see that there is any part or parts missing, please stop and call our toll-free

You will lay out 8 A's incline bars, 9 B's horizontal bars, 6 D's

Insert post C and C1 into the corners on one side of the assembled roof

 may be easier to attach the end panels P and Q at this point and highly recommend it if you don't

 As shown, there are hooks attached to the four corners of the canopy roof.

 Insert these into the pre-drill holes on the four corner posts as shown.

Insert base plate K on the bottom of the post and secure using the nut and bolt L. Repeat this process on all leg posts.

Attach the side panel with awning to the steel frame using the elastic

 ball straps R. Attention, side panel with awning N must be attached to the side with post C1.

 the elastic ball straps R through the grommet in the roof M then behind the frame through the

 grommet in the side panel and then stretch the elastic band R over the ball.

If you have decided to use ground stakes, rope, or expansion bolts, this will be the best time to secure your canopy.

Attach awning arm F to post C1 using bolts H. Connect the elastic ball straps

 fasteners on the roof M with elastic ball fasteners on the side panels N and O.

 Today I'm going to show you how to recreate my everyday summer makeup.

 I'm going to apply that on the lower T-duct area and blend it out with my fingers.

 will create a nice base for the white eye shadow that we're going to be putting on later.

 Now using a matte brown eye shadow I'm going to fill in my eyebrows and any of the gaps.

 Make the eyebrows a little bit thicker to make it look more youthful and sweet.

 now going to tight line the eyes and this is something that I always always do.

 a gel eyeliner I'm going to apply that on the top waterline and very close to the lashes.

 Not only will this make your eyelashes appear more thicker and fuller it will also give

 you want to flick out the edges but I've just done a little bit.

 going to go in and give it a second coat with a volumising mascara.

 Using a white shimmery eyeshadow place that on top of the area where you placed your white

Now it's time to add some colour and blusher to the face and I'm going

 afford to apply a little bit more bronzer just to overall pick up the look.

 it in the hollows of my cheeks to give me a slimmer face and under the jawline just

Starting by lining the lips with a sweet pink lip liner I'm going to fill

 Then I'm going in with Mac's Angel lipstick which is a really nice muted baby pink.

 And finally I'm going to add a little bit of lip gloss just to give it some extra shine

 Don't forget to watch my last video which was a makeup removal routine and please don't

 So this is how to change the spark plugs on a Kawasaki Ninja ZX6R for retards.

 See you have a right to use your hands man, this should be shut.

 Why can't they just say these are really stiff, pull hard or turn them or something.

 So we're just tightening these and that should hold that on tightly.

 It's easier putting it back together than just taking it apart isn't it?

 Well only because you had to take it apart, but I normally find it's fucking harder to put it back together because there's always a screw missing.

 Well, yeah, you put it back together with a screw missing like...

 recipe to make that you can serve as an appetizer or you can just make it to snack on.

 this recipe, these are the ingredients that you're going to need.

You'll need eight ounces or half a pound of Monterey Jack cheese that

You'll need a quarter cup of melted butter, a quarter cup of scallions

 that you've sliced, and one and a half teaspoons of poppy seeds.

 and I'm going to start cutting through at one inch intervals all the way across.

 you need to be really careful that you don't cut all the way through because we don't want

I'm going to start right here on the edge and just continue all the way across.

 Now I'm going to turn the bread the other way and start the other direction.

And so the next step is to take our cheese and just start putting it in between

 Okay, so I've stuffed my bread with the Monterey Jack cheese and so the next step is to take

 our butter and the green onions or scallions, depending on what you call them, and our poppy

 seeds and we're going to mix all this together in this little bowl.

 put it on here and then I'm simply going to pour this across the top.

 Okay, I'm going to take my foil and I'm going to wrap it up completely.

 So now what I'm going to do is I'm going to put this in a 350 degree oven for 15 to 20

 My onion cheese bread is done and it did cook for a little bit longer.

 the 15 minutes and it wasn't quite, the cheese was not quite melted at the bottom so I put

 What I'm going to do now is I'm going to put it on a serving platter and then I'll show you.

 Okay, to serve this all you do is just pull it apart and just put it on a little plate.

 They have a, this is the one with the reflective, like reflectors on the side.

 assembly of the BabyTrend Expedition LX Pink and Silver Stroller.

 Hi, I'm Allie with the Potomac Bead Company and I'm going to show you today and demonstrate

 So these rings are based on a ladder stitch and then almost a right angle stitch.

 We're actually going to be using two needles to make it a little bit easier for you, but

 you can do this with one needle if you're familiar how to do right angle weave and how

 You can also use 8-0s for this and we're going to be using 4mm, 6mm and 1 8mm Swarovski

 I have two needles that are on about two feet of thread and these are size 10 English beading

 needles and what I'm going to do first is drop six beads onto the bottom of my thread.

 So I've threaded six beads onto my needle and now what I'm going to do is sew back through

 So I'm going to pick up those last three and I'm sewing with my needle and sewing back

 And what's going to happen is it's going to turn those beads over and kind of start that

 Then what I'm going to do is I'm going to continue to pick up three beads.

 So I'm always doing sets of three because my band is three wide.

 I put three beads onto my right needle and now I'm going to pass through with my left

 And what that's going to do is put those beads down next to my last beads that I did.

 So I have my two and then I have my two again so I'm starting to get that ladder stitch.

 That's going to go the whole way around the band is that going back and forth and adding

 three beads the whole way around to the back of the band basically.

 We're going to be starting at the top and we're going the whole way around.

 So we're starting here and we're going the whole way around to the other side of the

 Again, if you're unfamiliar with ladder stitch pause this video, check out our ladder stitch

 So now I've done my ladder stitch the whole way and it's just going to depend on the size

 So here's my ladder stitch and what I'm going to do now is I'm going to start adding my

 So when I go to add my crystals what I'm going to be doing is I'm going to be starting off

 I'm adding one crystal on each needle and I usually when I'm not working with my needles

 I kind of poke them into my bead mat, that way they don't poke you.

 And if you want to you can get the look of seed beads in between by adding the seed beads

 We sometimes call it diagonal stitch, but it's the same process.

 Again like I said you can do this whole bracelet with or this whole ring with one needle or

 What I'm going to do through this bead is I'm going to crisscross my needles.

 So I have my 110 on or my 4mm bead on and then I'm going to crisscross back through

 So my needles are going in opposite directions through those 4mm beads.

 On the other side then what I'm going to do is after this one my next rotation is going

 to be that I'm going to be adding a seed bead and then I'm going to add my 6o bead on each

 So after that I'm going to add a seed bead and I'm going to add my 8o bead or my 8mm

 Push that down next to my beads, grab my needle from the other side and on the needle on the

 other side I'm going to add my seed bead, my 6mm sapphire crystal and a seed bead.

 I'm then going to take my needle and I'm going to crisscross back through that 6mm Swarovski,

 On goes on each needle, on goes a seed bead, my 6mm, and then a seed bead, and then a 4mm.

 On my other needle, my left needle, I'm going to put on that one a seed bead and my 6mm

 And what I'm going to do then is sew back through with that needle, I'm sewing back

 I'm going to continue then putting on a seed bead and a Swarovski on each needle.

 And now what I'm going to do is basically connect my beads and my rows.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to take this needle on the right here, I'm going to

 And then what I'm going to do is take my needle on the other side and I'm going to sew from

 So there's the one, and now I'm going to sew and do the opposite.

 What I'm going to do then is sew my thread back through, and I'm going to sew my thread

 And if you want to, some people will go through and actually reinforce the whole band because

 it is a ring, so you're just going to stitch back through and repeat.

 What I'm going to do is just tie a knot here on the side and then do a little dab of glue

 And as you can see I did change it a little bit from the green one to the blue one.

 And these again are our crystal rings with a ladder stitch and then also a right angle

 You can make them with gemstones, you can make them with crystals, and again you can

 Check us out on Facebook, Like us, and then also check out our PBC locations, visit our

 delicious by itself but with sweet sauce it adds an extra rich flavors to it.

 Roasted mung beans, dry chili soaked in water, fresh shredded coconut, tamarind

 paste, palm sugar, fish sauce, coconut milk, shrimp paste, sugar.

 pan fry the shredded coconut until the bottom pieces turn brown and fragrant.

 For the red chili, remove the seeds out and soaked in water for a couple of hours to get

 grind the shredded coconut along with mung bean and red chilies.

 In a small pot on medium low heat, add 1 cups of water and dissolve the palm sugars.

 At the end, give it a taste and if needed, adjust the flavor by adding fish sauce or

You can serve this sauce as an extra topping for Cambodian round noodles.

I hope you'll try this recipe soon the next time you make Noom Banh Chok.

 We're going to make a whole roasted tenderloin, and it's going to be fantastic.

 I'm going to show you how to clean it, cut it and tie it, and roast it off to perfection.

 But first, it comes with a sauce, and the sauce is a sauce reduction, so we have to

 They're aromatics, and the bitterness comes out of them if you sweat them.

 After we get them nice and sweated, we're going to lower the temperature slightly.

 We've got them sweated, because they were diced very small, so we've got them sweated pretty well.

 It's all binding up really well together because of that flour.

 And we want to reduce it, so we're going to watch it, but we're going to move on to our tenderloin.

 Now if you buy a tenderloin straight from the butcher's, it has a lot of silver skin on it and stuff that you want to take off.

 We take off the tail end just to use it for another spaghetti or something like that.

 And then with your knife going upwards, going slightly upwards, you want to leave the tenderloin intact and get the skin off of it.

 Now we're going to tie it because we want to have real even cooking.

 So about every two inches, you want to put a box tie, a knot, box knot.

 I don't know if that's what you call it, but that's what I call it.

 Takes a while to do that, so I'll be back in a couple of minutes.

 As you can see, I tied the roast up about every one, two inches about.

 So what we're going to do is we're going to cut this baby in half.

 We cook both of them at the same time, obviously, but this is going to be more well done than this because it's bigger.

 I'm going to add some more ingredients, and those ingredients are a large shallot, peeled and quartered.

 We checked it at 12 minutes and it wasn't quite ready, so we left it in there for 18 minutes and we'll be back in 12 minutes.

 And then, a little while is about five minutes, so all the juices can get consistently all the way through the roast.

 And then the sauce that we made and reduced, you want to pour a little bit over the top of your sliced tenderloin.

 I'm going to have it sent from Traeger to whoever my winner is in the United States,

 We're not going to pick a winner for about three or four days, okay?

 You're going to tweet this, and then Traeger's going to see that you won Traeger Grill, and

 they're going to be entered in, and they're going to randomly pick one of you, and they're

 Then when I kick off Memorial Weekend, they kick off our summer smoking series with Traeger,

 All right, so we're doing smoked salmon, and I'm using the new portable ... Well, it's

 It's for going to the backyard and into somebody's house and just bring it with you.

 I'm going to get that rubbed down with some flavors first, put it in the refrigerator,

 then we're going outside to take a look at this bad boy and see how this is.

 So what I'm going to do is I'm going to put one piece of salmon each in a Ziploc.

 I want them to be rubbed down, and I don't want any complications with the two of them

 So I'm going to put, here we go, some brown sugar, and then we're going to do black pepper,

 And we're going to mix this with our fingertips, or you can use a spoon or a fork, whatever

 And then I'm going to leave this in the refrigerator for about two to four hours.

 Okay everybody, so we're out here right now, and I've got a few things to tell you.

 I've shown you guys all about that, but your pellets go in here.

 And then this is the grease catcher, and I'm going to coat that in foil so I can keep it

 This only has the one you get, the temperature gauge you get when you buy the PTG, is a three.

 And nowhere in the manual, the recipe book, anywhere does it tell you what the temperatures

 So I've called up Traeger, and I put the temperatures down below.

 Now for $100, and I recommend this, if you're a Traeger fan, you want the digital control,

 for $99 you can swap out this control panel and buy the $99 full digital one.

 Okay, if Traeger, I know you're watching, I don't know why you don't make the digital

 If it costs more, then add a few more bucks so we don't have to do the swap out.

 When you have a brand new Traeger, you need to run this 15 minutes on high.

 15 minutes on high so we can burn off all the manufacturing gunk.

 I've been posting pictures of me with the new smoker, and my phone's been just blowing

 I want you to rinse all the stuff, all the brown sugar, all the salt, all the pepper,

 Lay the salmon right here and right here, and I want you to take some towels.

 Okay, I just want to show you, I'm showing you behind the Traeger.

 Sometimes I'll foil that, sometimes I won't, but be sure to catch the grease in that.

 That hangs on the back of your portable Traeger wherever you go.

 I got my salmon and I got my salmon spatula from Traeger, so I'm gonna use that.

 If you do a lot of fish or you get a lot of salmon, this is perfect.

 Or if you do some monster burgers or maybe even getting under a pizza or something, this

 It feels like it's fully, this one feels like it's fully cooked.

 This one's a little bit thicker, I'm a little afraid, but the smell, I'm smelling the mesquite

 So we're, I don't expect him like this, but I want him to try it.

 That portable Traeger grill is amazing to grill on, to cook on.

 Hi, my name's Stuart and today we're going to show you how to fit this new Turbo Smart

 To demonstrate the installation, today we're going to be using our Mitsubishi Evo 8 test

 In the box you'll find everything needed to install the boost gauge into your car.

 You have the gauge, the panel mount bezel, panel mount bracket and screws, vacuum hose,

 Also available separately is our mounting cup that can be used on roll cage or dashboard.

 First step in the installation process is to locate a suitable vacuum source on the

 inlet manifold, making sure that the restrictor on the T-piece is facing towards the boost

 Next, we put the vacuum hose on the T-piece and run the vacuum hose through the firewall

 Now that we've installed the vacuum line, next thing to do is to install the gauge in

 In this instance, we're going to mount it on top of the steering column so it's easy

 Pull the vacuum hose through the firewall and underneath the dash to the location that

 In this case, we're using the illumination wire from the stereo loom.

 Check with the multimeter and when you switch the headlights on in the car, the power is

 With the steering column cover safely off the car, we're now ready to drill holes.

 With the wires connected and the vacuum hose inserted into the back of the cup, we can

 Corum's latest development is an unbeatable new type of shower tray.

 Waterguard shower trays, a new generation of acrylic capped resin shower trays.

 their new Waterguard shower trays are less than half the weight of any other resin based trays.

 Even with the largest trays, which still weigh less than 25 kilograms.

 Added to this, the unique way they are put together makes them faster and easier to fit than any other shower trays you can buy.

 And in the next couple of minutes, we will show you just how quick and simple it really is.

 You simply screw in the corner threaded feet to a depth of 160 millimeters from the rim.

 Whilst the center foot should be screwed into a depth of 110 millimeters from the base.

 This ensures it will be clear of the floor until after you've leveled the tray.

 Next, mark the position of the tray on the wall and remove sufficient plaster or plasterboard to allow the tidying up stand to be recessed.

 The hexagonal feet can be adjusted by hand, raising the tray if required and the screw holes are angled to make the feet easy to fix in position.

 Once the tray has been leveled, the center foot must then be readjusted down to the floor.

 You will need to trim these as required on the ends that fit to the walls.

 The panels are attached to the tray with push on spring clips, which are clearly marked to show the right way up.

 You will also need to stagger the position of the clips for the corner leg to allow for the attachment of both panels.

 To ensure you fix the clips in the correct position, first attach them to the legs and align the panels.

 Then mark the center of each clip and fix using the screws provided.

 All that remains is to peel away the protective film from the back edges, tile over the upstands and seal with silicone sealant.

 And when you fit any Coram enclosure together with a WaterGuard shower tray, their performance is so unbeatable and reliable, we offer a watertight lifetime guarantee.

 Welcome to CIRA's 2-minute installation video for the Premier Series Television Mirrors.

 These television mirrors are available in either recessed or surface-mounted options.

 Prepare the rough opening according to the provided specifications.

 The other cord is the power, which has already been plugged in above the rough opening.

 Verify the dimensions to the drawings and ensure the rough opening is square.

 Recessed Premier units are mounted on two recessed hanging brackets.

 Using the included hardware, loosely screw both the top and bottom into place.

 Ensure that the bracket is level before completely tightening the screws.

 If you ordered a decorative frame, it will already be fastened to the television mirror.

 Using two people, bring the unit up to the opening and make all connections.

 Fit the unit into place, ensuring that each hanging bracket is securely locked on the

 That's Jason W-R-O-B as in bananas and bread and butter dot com.

 Oh yeah, today we're doing homemade almond butter here on the J-Wro Show.

 Well, haven't we all spent enough money on nut butters over the years?

 I mean, with the big peanut butter fiasco of 1995, everyone turned to almond butter,

 cashew butter, sunflower seed butter, hazelnut butter, macadamia nut butter, pumpkin seed

 There's a lot of amazing nut butters out on the market, and they happen to be a little

 So today, we're going to do a super quick, super simple, sprouted, organic, unpasteurized

 So the first step, family, is you want to get some unpasteurized almonds.

 In this case, we have some Italian-grown, organic, raw, unpasteurized almonds.

 Soak them in fresh water, and then you want to drain out that water and rinse them in

 fresh water, and then dehydrate these puppies for 24 to 48 hours for two reasons.

 Number one, you're removing the enzyme inhibitors on the nuts, which make them easier to digest

 Secondly, when you dehydrate your nuts, it has this crunchy, almost roasted type of flavor.

 Blendtec now has this twister jar, which mimics the same type of vortex grinding action.

 You guys are going to see here today, making our almond butter, if you do any kind of dense,

 super thick recipes, this twister jar is your ally in crushing, grinding action.

 Now, the ideal ratio I find in doing nut butters in this jar is about a cup and a half.

 If you do more than that, it becomes a little bit tough, and there's a propensity to overheat

 We're going to put the Blendtec on manual, crank the speed up to nine, and then twist

 So turn your blender on, crank it up to nine, and get grinding, kids.

 You get yourself a kick-ass blender, and you save yourself money.

 So after our almond butter's on top, I like to grab my apple slices, stack it as high

 I like to do four, you could do six, you could do eight, however many apple slices you want

 There was an Earl of Sandwich, the Earl of Sandwich the Fourth, John Montague of England,

 who, as the legend goes, he wanted to continue playing cards and gambling, so he ordered

 his servants to put meat between two slices of bread so he could keep eating while he

 You guys remember the cinnamon test videos that were going around YouTube like two years

 ago where people were taking like massive heaping tablespoons of cinnamon?

 Do you want to see me try and eat a whole tablespoon of cinnamon?

 So at this point, we've got to take one for the Earl and try the Sammy.

 If you start making more food at home, which I hope you do as a result of watching the

 J-Wro Show, you make things like almond butter, you save money, you have a greater interaction

 Give them to the kids or take them to work for you to share with your coworkers.

 So family, if you guys dug my homemade almond butter banana apple raspberry gluten-free

 What's the weirdest, craziest thing you want to see me do with homemade almond butter?

 Maybe something involving a slip and slide, maybe my body, maybe a cannonball, maybe something

 Get creative and let me know what you want to see me do with almond butter.

 I want to thank Ultimate Superfoods and Ogio for once again hooking us up with the maximum

 So guys, I am J-Wro, the host of the J-Wro Show here on YouTube.

 The website is getting redesigned soon and will be fancy, dancey, all kinds of sparkles

 and markles and parkles and barkles and all that great stuff you expect in a website.

 I'm going to go and enjoy the rest of my sandwi and honor the Earl for his contribution in

 What you need to be really careful of is to not over process it.

 We want to pulse it enough that we grind up the tuna and get everything evenly distributed

 so it's really seasoned really well, but not so much that we turn everything to a paste.

I'm going to put them in the refrigerator and while these are in

 After about a half an hour we're going to run it through a food mill.

 this in gently so we're going to get all the flavor out of the vegetables and it's

 going to help contribute some of the body to the broth as well.

 at the very end with a little bit of sliced Spanish chorizo and some chopped parsley.

It has really bright acidity and freshness and then the tuna meatball

When I think about this wine, that's the exact descriptor I would use.

 What's really nice about this wine from a food standpoint is we've got really nice acidity to it.

 So the wines are always bright and the fruit really shines and it makes for a really interesting

 a very beautiful wine to enjoy now, but the acidity actually carries it into its ageability.

 night for one of our distributors, first Cape Red Serpent Magma, the 2003.

 nice concentration, all the elements totally in balance creates a wine that can age for a very

 Today on the show we're making Ruby Jewel Sweet Red Corn Basil Cakes.

 Some of this great, amazing sweet red corn we got from our friends at Colorful Harvest

 To make our Ruby Jewel Sweet Red Corn Basil Cakes, we're going to use some of this Ruby

 Jewel Sweet Red Corn we got from our friends at Colorful Harvest in California.

 This is a variety of sweet corn that's grown along California's great Central Valley and

 Now what gives it its sweet red color that you see here is actually an antioxidant called

 anthocyanin, which is actually 350% higher in antioxidants than other varieties of corn.

 So not only are you getting an awesome flavor out of this, it's sweet, it's juicy, it is

 Plus you're also getting a lot of those extra antioxidants that you wouldn't get in other

 To get started, we're going to get our batter made for our cakes.

 Now you can use Bisquick if you want or you can make your own batter and watch this in

 case for some reason you wake up in the morning and somebody wants pancakes and you realize,

 You take about a half cup of flour and just dump it right into the bowl just like that.

 You can use other varieties of milk if you don't want whole, you don't have it on hand.

 Now if it's winter and you're watching this, you don't have any sort of sweet corn to go

 To really get the full effect of this recipe, I highly suggest going to a colorfulharvest.com

 and checking out some of that Ruby Jewel sweet red corn or checking out your local market.

 Now we're going to whisk all of this together just like you would whisk together pancake

 batter or bisquick or whatever you're using except our cakes here are obviously using

 A little bit of salt and a little bit of that pepper to make a really nice, unique flavor.

 We're not going to be over cooking the corn to the point where you really lose its color

 It's really the batter is what's going to be cooked here on the stove top, not so much

 the corn so you really can encompass all those fresh flavors into this recipe.

 Then when you've got your oil nice and hot, put your dollop of batter on there.

 You can do this one at a time or two at a time depending on the size of your skillet.

 Our dollop of batter is going to be about the size of a mixing spoon just like this.

 I like to put it right at the center, right at the center of the heat.

 These can be used as a side dish or they can actually be used as a full meal if you make

 enough of them because trust me, when you start eating these, you're going to want to

 Our Ruby Jewels Sweet Red Corn Pancakes with its sweet red corn from our friends at Colorful

 It makes a great side dish for a summer meal or even a whole meal if you're kind of feeling

 like doing the breakfast thing and a little bit of healthy and get some fresh summer flavors.

 Works great with a little bit of butter on there, just a little bit.

 You kind of spread that around on there and these are going to be absolutely amazing.

 That fresh basil flavor, that sweetness, that nice savory butteriness of the Ruby Jewel

 And of course you've got the butter on the top, the batter and all that.

 You've got the sweet, the salty, the savory all working together.

 Perfect, perfect summer side dish or perfect for a dish in itself for an evening out on

 Again, thanks to our friends at Colorful Harvest for getting us the Ruby Jewel Sweet Red Corn.

 And again, thank you all so much for joining us and watching us on Facebook, Twitter, on

 Hello Beauties, today's video is going to be all about the flat twist and curl using

 And as you can see I dyed my hair Violet Gem by Popular Vote on my last video.

 So after towel drying my hair I start by using the As I Am leave-in conditioner and I take

 a huge glob of it and just work that through my hair to make sure it's evenly distributed.

 As you'll notice the hair around the perimeter is shorter than the rest because this part

 Yeah, well now I've allowed this part to grow out and then I'm going to adjust my hair later

 I affectionately call this part my side bush and since it's too short to actually put in

 a roller I'm going to flat twist it on its own separated from the rest of the hair.

 Once the side bush is taken care of I go ahead and take some double butter cream by As I

 Now my hair is already detangled but I take the dimming brush and smooth it out to make

 You always want to make sure that when you're twisting or braiding your hair that you smooth

 Styling smooth detangled hair renders smooth results every single time.

 Also remember not to trade hair from sections to eliminate the chances of creating frizz

 I leave about an inch and a half to two inches free to roll up in the roller.

 so my hair won't take as long to air dry because I don't like sitting under the dryer.

 I take about 10 minutes with my blow dryer and its diffuser attachment to set my hair.

 I carefully take my hair out and as you can see I'm not getting any tangles or anything

 To fluff my hair to give it life and volume I scrunch my hair closest at the scalp avoiding

 Well done beauties I hope you enjoyed this tutorial and I'll talk to you soon.

 I've been getting a lot of messages regarding how to cook seafood so I decided to do this

 So you're going to need a couple of lobster tails, as you can see I have two there and

 I have some purple potatoes all cut up here and I have some carrots.

 So I'm going to steam the lobster tails for about 5-7 minutes but before that I'm going

 As you can see what I did was I chopped them up pretty small chunks so they cook a lot

 And for this, the carrots, I'm going to actually put some water in here, soften them up and

 then I'm going to basically use some coconut oil and then just make a nice little sear

 So my carrots here are almost ready and I have my ginger and a little bit of salt right

 there ready to be used and then here's my coconut oil and I'm going to lightly sear

 So my carrots are finished, now I'm going to work on the lobster and the potatoes have

 So I'm just going to give them a nice sear as well just like I did with the carrots.

 So here are the lobster tails, I washed it thoroughly underneath the sink so make sure

 And then basically what I'm going to do is I'm going to take off these legs and then

 So why you want to do that is because when it starts steaming the meat is going to actually

 And basically I'm going to season it with of course some salt, you can use butter if

 you want but I'm not going to use butter so I'm going to use coconut oil.

 Now you could also use some of the lemon zest which is found on the lemon skin or you can

 You know after, I don't have a big knife so I'm actually going to have to cut it through

 You can cut it the other way but the shell is pretty hard so I'm just going to go right

 So you just want to be careful when you do this, you don't want to cut yourself because

 So now what I'm going to do is I'm going to put some oil right down here.

 Like I said you could use butter but I'm going to use coconut oil.

 And you can use pepper and I'm going to use lemon and salt right on top.

 So while the lobster is cooking what I'm going to do is make the potatoes.

 Now like I said I boiled them just to make sure they are soft and then now I'm going

 You can use a little bit of coconut oil or butter whatever you want.

 And the lobster is in there so what you want to do is you want to do it for about 5 to

 Hi there, today I'll be sharing a very special cake recipe from my grandmother and with my

 They call this kueh moho in the Malay language, but to me, this is literally a cupcake.

 The main ingredient for this recipe is sweet potato, where we get both its taste and colour.

 First, you will need to steam or boil the potatoes until they are soft.

 I would recommend to cut each one of them into 4 pieces to save on your cooking time.

 Once the potatoes are cooked, remove the skin, place them into a bowl and mash.

 Then add in a bowl of water and mix that with the mashed sweet potatoes.

 This is to make sure you won't end up eating chunks of unmashed potatoes and it also gives

 Add a quarter bowl or half a cup of water and dissolve the yeast.

 In a large mixing bowl, add in the flour and all the mashed sweet potato mixture.

 Continue mixing and add in a bowl of water at room temperature.

 The dough will get stickier but keep mixing until you get a sticky, elastic and moist dough.

 After 40 minutes, remove the cover and you'll notice the dough has risen to twice its original size.

 Take a mini tea cup and scoop in a spoonful of dough into the cup.

 Take a smaller tea cup and scoop in a spoonful of dough into the cup.

 Once the water boils, place the cups into the steamer, put on the lid and off it goes to steam for 10 minutes under medium-high heat.

 After 10 minutes, remove the lid and you'll see those cute little cupcakes but we're not finished yet.

 You will need to prepare a plate of water and remove the cups from the steamer and place them into the water.

 This is important because it will cool down the cake and make it easier to remove.

 Leave it for 5 minutes and with a fork, gently push the sides of the cake and it should come out perfectly without much effort.

Grandma's version of sweet potato cupcakes, also known as kueh moho.

Apart from sweet potatoes, you can also try with other main ingredients.

 Thank you for watching and remember to subscribe and I'll see you in the next episode!

 Hi guys, today on Divas Can Cook I'm going to show you how to turn this into this.

 That is right, we are making these beautiful, fabulous fruit trays.

 This pattern is so easy, so if you are a fruit tray challenge like myself, stay tuned.

 Alright, we are going to start by dicing, well cutting our pineapple in half.

 I'm going to leave that stem on because that stem is just sexy to me.

 Then we are going to cut the halves in half, so we have four pieces there, just like that.

 Okay, now we are going to remove the flesh from the pineapple skin.

 Now we are going to slice the pineapple into even sized little triangles.

 And I'll just go ahead and place them right back into the little pineapple shells.

 And you can find this recipe on my blog with lots of tips and stuff on how to arrange fruit

 Alright, now I'm going to cut my cantaloupe in half and go ahead and scoop out all those

 It really doesn't matter how you cut this cantaloupe because really we just want it

 And make sure you have your wet washcloth and a little dry towel because making fruit

 And I used to clean up after I cut every single fruit because it was a mess.

 So cut it in 8 and then go ahead and slice it just like we did the pineapple.

 On the shorter ends of the platter, I'm going to place my watermelon on the outer edge and

 then I'm going to add in some of that honeydew melon and then some cantaloupe.

 Then we're going to put in some blueberries to fill in all of those gaps and stuff.

 And now for the longer edges of the platter, I'm going to add in that cantaloupe and then

 And then we're going to use the blueberry to fill in any more little gaps.

 So we're pretty much done right here, but it's still missing something.

 Now I have some tips on my blog on how to choose the best flowers for your fruit platter.

 So I'm just going to add, you know, I like to add flowers at the top, kind of have them

 This tray is great for weddings, wedding brunches, graduation, Mother's Day brunches, all that

 But I must warn you, when people find out you know how to make a fruit platter, they're

 Alright, so you're probably looking at the title going, what the heck is a sloppy Jane?

 Basically a sloppy Jane is the poultry version of a sloppy Joe made with beef.

 one suggestion that I can make for you is if you make it ahead, you can portion it out in sections,

 put it in little freezer Ziploc bags, the amount that you would think would go on a bun and freeze

And that's a great make ahead for kids that beat you home before you get home from work and

 they're telling you to stop off at some fast food place and give them something to eat and you tell

 them no, you're going to go in the freezer and you're going to defrost one of those bags out and

 you're going to eat a sloppy Joe till I get home or you're going to have that for dinner.

 in total control of what's going on in the kitchen and what your kids are eating in the afternoon.

The recipe starts off with chopped garlic, chopped bell pepper, and we're going to

 In a pan over medium high heat, we're going to add our olive oil, extra virgin olive oil,

We're going to add the salt and pepper and we're just going to stir

 for sloppy Joe or sloppy Jane because I was quite traumatized as a kid by the sloppy Joe.

 The whole concept of a sandwich where it was okay for the meat to fall out, I was not feeling that.

 my turkey is slightly frozen in the middle, but I'm going to go ahead and cook it anyway because

 to thaw by cooking is one of the four approved methods of thawing.

 Now just as the meat is about halfway cooked, we're going to go ahead and start adding our

 some stone ground mustard, some Worcester sauce, and some salt and pepper.

 mustard and the Worcester sauce is going to give us some depth of flavor.

 little bit of red wine vinegar, just as a little bit of an acidic bite to balance out some of the

 sweetness that we've added, like the brown sugar in the tomato sauce.

 and serve it with your favorite sides, like french fries or potato chips.

 I want to thank you guys for joining me for this easy lunch and dinner recipe.

 All these recipes and more can be found at GDCeasoning.com and I'll see you guys next time.

 ginger nut biscuits and blitz those until they are fine crumbs before adding

 nut biscuits you will know that they are very very difficult and very hard to

After 15 seconds on speed 5 this is what the Thermo Chef has done.

Into that we add our melted homemade butter and we're going to mix

 that until it resembles sand and press it into a 20 centimeter or 8 inch spring

 seconds on speed 2 we just tip our crumb mixture into our lined springform pan

 you did the biscuits in, any ginger nut in there is going to flavor the pumpkin

We've just got some steamed pumpkin here, you can microwave it, you

We've got some cinnamon, a homemade vanilla paste, some maple syrup.

 Don't be stingy with this, this is where the flavor comes from.

 till it's well combined and it will be the topping on our pumpkin cheesecake.

It's all well combined, it's a gorgeous color and it smells very nice.

 the oven so it's more like a pumpkin sort of custard arrangement.

Now we just put that to one side while we prepare our New York cheesecake

 temperature cream cheese with our caster sugar and our vanilla extract.

 using our vanilla paste here because the vanilla paste has little speckles in it

 ingredients that have slipped off the side are well incorporated in the bottom.

Now same thing, scrape down the sides again and we're going to add

 our flour and then we're going to bake this for a short time just to slightly

 just fill our base with that before adding our pumpkin pie filling.

 want it to fill right to the top and then we're going to continue to bake it.

 Don't pour it straight in because it's soft in the center and it will muck up

 After another 45 to 50 minutes in the oven our cheesecake has risen and

 all up and now we're going to chill it in the fridge overnight.

Brush off any little bits of extra cake that the knife disturbed and

 And there you have it Cheeky Richo's pumpkin cheesecake on my new plate.

 would like to see more interesting recipes and ideas just check out my

 visit us again soon we have so much more to show you and we're uploading lots of

 November 10, 1976, the government activated a secret system, a machine designed to gather

 You can make your own sauce, but this is quicker and still tasty.

 Place the sheet into a greased baking tray with a removable bottom.

 Turn plain marshmallows into something special with these three easy ideas.

This is just melted chocolate, some white chocolate that's also melted, and some

So I'm going to take a pretzel and stick it right into a marshmallow.

 want to make sure you stick it firmly in there so it doesn't drop off when you go to dip

 hot because they'll actually melt the marshmallow if they're too hot.

 off all the excess because you want enough topping on there so that your sprinkles will

 actually stick, but you don't want so much that it's super gloppy.

And so then I'm just going to take some of these crushed peppermints and just kind

And so now for the white chocolate, I'm going to do the same thing

 but I'm going to top this one with some nuts and some coconut because that goes great with

I want to glue the other edge so that I can cut it in four equal pieces

I'm going to apply this glue as thick as I want in a horizontal position.

 I recommend you compare it with other presses that show you applying this in the vertical

 I'll probably go four minutes because I went in and cleaned up my brush in the sink which

Okay, so anyway I will explain a few of the parts a little bit now.

That will give you the ability to press from about three-eighths of an inch

 other presses to this and that your evaluation will be positive.

 I got it because I needed to swap my hard drive and I was trying to find an external

 video on YouTube but there really wasn't any or there was one but it was just annoying

 the only tools you're going to need is something thin and not sharp because you don't want

 you will, and then you just start plucking down and then you just start cutting.

 As you can see, you know, and then you do that to the other side.

 Slowly just, as you can see, you know, you're just slowly going to slide it out.

 This one has, I already did the swap, I'm just doing this to help you guys out.

 then once you get it out, as you can tell, you know, it's just a thin, you know, thick

 cover with a soft finish but other than that it's just cheap plastic.

 And then you got yourself your hard drive and then you, well that's how you pop it out.

 Cuisinart griddler for Christmas and I went out and purchased the waffle plates.

 Fresh and Easy Classic Belgian Waffles and I'll show you the recipe at the

 Hi, Christy in the Rady kitchen and today I want to show you a couple unique ways to

 They're seedless so you don't worry about cutting out the seeds.

 But on this first one, what I'm going to do is cut it in half lengthways.

 I'm going to pierce down and just cut straight down on half of it.

 So start with your tip going down and then you slice straight down.

 And actually this piece won't have a lot of watermelon on it but I'll show you when I

 And then this thicker part you might have to start in the middle and work out.

 That really helps to have a good sharp knife like this Rada slicer.

 What happens is you have cute little slices as your friends pick them out.

 Now the second watermelon, maybe we have picky eaters that don't like to eat it off the rind.

 So now what we're going to do is more or less fillet the rind off this watermelon.

 If you wanted to get fancy you could square it off, make it look like a cake, put some

 Today we are going to make almond milk from scratch in our Vitamix.

 You're going to need one cup of almonds, three cups of water we have here.

 Ideally you can add agave nectar which I think it makes it a little bit better.

 I've made it with just a regular sieve and it's a little more complicated.

 And depending on how fine of a mesh you have it might still have some fiber in it that

 It's still drinkable but it's just different than what most people are used to.

 So if you can't find one I'll post a link to Amazon where you can buy one and a really

 And with the Vitamix, if you're doing this with a Vitamix, what we're going to do is

 I'm going to flip the power on and then I'm going to go from varial speed 1 to 10 very

 Really, you want to kind of just watch it and when it looks like most or all of the

 They have a bulk area and I think they're around $8.99 a pound.

 So you're going to just go ahead and pour your milk into your nut milk bag.

 You're just going to just squeeze the milk and what's going to happen is you'll wind

 And a lot of people will take that almond fiber and you can find some really good recipes

 Okay, this will take a few minutes of squeezing and going back and forth.

 As you can see, when you put pressure on it, it just squeezes right on out.

 I'm going to stop there and I'm going to set this here and I'm going to show you.

 Just like almond milk that you would buy at the store but way better because you don't

 What better way to provide your family with fresh food that's healthy and nutritious and

 I hope you enjoy it and I hope that you would subscribe to my YouTube page for more recipes

 And here's the full review for five servos of Doom animated prowl or what I

 couple little tabs on here so when you fold this up and slide the swords under

 and then those little tabs go right into the slots on the back of his armor.

 to hold that second wheel in place so he can have wheels on both of his arms like

 Stars that actually flip open so he still has those weapons as well.

 he has the painted hands like he should with the proper arm guards for the

 ball joint or the swivel joint there at the hip but modified the leg armor from

 the original prowl to fit on there so he has the accurate leg armor as well as

 robot mode you've got a very cartoon accurate prowl with the light bars and I

 even swapped out his original head so he's got the bigger non super tiny head.

 and the only real big change I made to the armor is that since he does have his

 dremeled out the inside of the helmet and while I was doing so I actually

 helmet which kind of sucked at first but then I realized just by clearing away a

 But you've got a nice samurai prowl that you can take the armor off and still

 look so because I really wanted to have just one prowl to display on my

 shelf and since he seems to have gotten the armor permanently at the end of

 We were all kind of working on this same idea at the same time and there are

 So I really some of these things would not I would not have done

 I'd like to welcome everyone back for another video drum lesson.

 What you just saw was some groove ideas and fill ideas using a sticking pattern within

 If we count in 4-4 time, 1-n-2-n-3-n-4-n, a standard 8th note count, 16th note triplets

 are counted 1 triplet, n triplet, 2 triplet, n triplet, 3 triplet, n triplet, 4 triplet,

 The sticking pattern that I use between two 16th note triplets are right-left-left, right-left-left,

 So you can even consider like a 6-stroke roll combination in there.

 Right-left-left, right-left-left, right-right-left, right-left-left, right-left-left, right-left-left,

 1 triplet, n triplet, 2 triplet, n triplet, 1 triplet, 2 triplet, 2 triplet, 2 triplet,

 And I just basically jammed around as a groove, as a fill around the drums, and even applying

 So here's what I did on kind of between the hi-hat snare and bass drum.

 They're an awesome way though to create some really cool ideas around the set.

 When you learn your basic note values, 8th notes, 16th notes, 8th note triplets, or this

 example 16th note triplets, remember by changing the stickings, you create many different variations

 of rhythms and accent patterns that you can apply around the set.

 So let's go back to the performance video, and we'll check out the transcription on the

 All right, so there you go, a 16th note triplet idea applied to the set in a few different

Your tub and showers, your kitchen, they all basically have the same

They might look a little different from this angle, but they all

 water off, because if you don't have your water off, you're gonna have a real big

Once you remove that, all you need to do is remove a keeper, which is

 sometimes you have to push them out, wipe some of the grease off to get them to

 800 number and tell them you got a faulty cartridge, a lot of times they'll

Again you have to get everything lined up in such an angle here, which I

Basically turn it a little bit, you need to push it down, and once you

 you get the hot and cold reverse, you just take it out and you basically turn

 Today we're going to learn how to make a coat of arms in a classroom.

 I purchased this from Oriental Trading, but you can make your own.

 If you go to abookintime.com and go to World Crafts, look under Medieval, under Knights,

 you'll find links that will take you to places where you can find patterns for this

 and patterns for all these shapes that we use to decorate the coat of arms with.

 The first step you do is to choose two different colors to make a nice quadrant on your shield.

 So you cover your shield with glue, and I prefer something like tacky glue or this gel glue or a glue stick.

I'm just doing a rough job here, but I would encourage the kids to make sure they get all the edges.

 So what you're going to do is use your four pieces of paper to cover all the way to the top and all the way to the bottom.

 So I cover my complete shield so you don't see anything left of it.

 And everything's centered, everything's covered, everything's glued.

 You flip it over and you trim your shield just to match the edges all the way around.

 So then when you flip it back around, you're going to have something that looks like this.

 And on week one with my kids, or day one, however you do your classroom, we had enough time to do that.

 And then I gave them all these ideas for images to paste on their shield and I had them choose.

 And then I made sure I went home and made a copy for each child of each design that they wanted.

 So the bigger, bolder designs with less intricacies are good for the smaller children.

 But the older kids like a lot more pizazz and they liked the more intricate shapes.

 But for our demonstration purposes here, I'm going to use this.

 So the child then, the second time you come to class, if you did it the way I did, is ready to do shapes.

 So you take your shape and you just rough cut it out so you have something there that's easy to work with.

 You choose another color, whatever they want, and you fold it in half.

 This way when they cut it out, they're cutting out two at one time and you need two.

 So you put it on this folded piece of paper and I have them tape it down with as much tape as possible.

If I'm only using four pieces, I'd probably have them use it a little bit more.

 And then what they do is they cut out this shape that's taped down onto their paper.

 And I didn't have any problem with any kid having the shape move and having anything be a problem.

 It all seemed to work out fine and everybody was able to cut out their shapes.

 Here are the two shapes that she cut out and then she would glue those here and here.

 And they can decorate it as they please and do anything to the edges that they want.

 And this particular project also came with a handle for the back and the kids really did like that.

 So if you don't have a kit, you just cut out a piece of cardboard about an inch wide

 and as long as it needs to be to come in about an inch, an inch and a half from each side

 Hello, this is LEGO FET 7 here again and today I'll be showing you how to make a LEGO Nano

 Moisture than other cakes, they have a seductive, savory aroma and the ability to pair with

 This olive oil cake is topped with vanilla flavored orange segments.

 In a large bowl, combine 1-1⁄2 cups of all-purpose flour with 3 quarters of a cup of finely

 ground cornmeal, half a teaspoon of baking powder, half a teaspoon of baking soda, and

 Next, in a medium bowl, combine 3 quarters of a cup of olive oil with 3 quarters of a

 Add the wet ingredients to the dry and mix everything until it's just combined.

 And a toothpick inserted in the center of the cake comes out clean, about 50 to 55 minutes.

 Meanwhile, cut away the peel and pith of 2 blood orange or caracara oranges.

 Taking over a small bowl, cut along both sides of each orange segment, releasing the segments

 Toss the orange segments with a quarter cup of sugar and half a teaspoon of vanilla extract.

 Let them sit for at least 30 minutes and up to 2 hours, tossing the segments occasionally.

 Let the cake cool for 20 minutes in the pan, then transfer it to a wire rack to cool completely.

 Then finish it with a dollop of mascarpone cheese, which we've flavored here with a tablespoon

 The recipe for this olive oil cake with vanilla oranges and other delicious recipe videos

 In this video I'll be showing you how to identify an error code

 please see our other fix it and how to videos for further assistance.

 Now on this machine the heater is located at the front so I have taken the front panel off

 same with the wiring and if your motor is spinning to high-speed straight away

 at the base is an anti flood device so if your machine is indicating

 Now we believe these error codes to be accurate for this series

If you need any other further help related to error codes for your

 Alright, hello ladies and gentlemen, last video for the midnight release of all the things

 But it's pretty much exactly the same except for some very minor differences in the end

 Can't see the camera because my hands are here and my face is now behind the camera.

 There's Arno and all his glory, but we'll get to him in a sec because he takes a little bit of time to put together

 Just have a pretty office everything's underneath him says they're pretty backing to the box there.

 So Paris on fire with a riot and what looks like the inside of the Notre Dame

 So I'm gonna do that right now and then we'll come up right back

 All right, so we got on our all construct to find that was the easiest Assassin's Creed figure I've ever had to put together

 So just stand there with his sword and his flag he's very shouty say guys guys I just put my pants

So he's standing on top of a roof shouting at people that he pooped his pants

 So very good detail as with all the other Assassin's Creed statues

 Oh, it's a lot of bits move like the flag it's very jiggly jiggle freedom jiggle for freedom

 There you go, that's a hashtag that could go on Twitter jiggle for freedom

He doesn't quite fit inside his display box, which is unfortunate

 guillotine edition will be arriving at some point during the day in which case I will do a video hopefully in like

 And I've forgotten all the words I just said but he's poop pants and jiggle for freedom, yeah, there you go hashtag jiggle for freedom

 As you know from last week, I am the new stylist here at AMI Clubwear.

 Okay, so as you can see, I teased a touch on the top and in the back.

 If you don't have really fine hair, teasing really isn't necessary.

 Okay, the first real step is to break the hair up into three sections.

 One on the right, one on the left, and one in the back in the middle.

 So you're going to go ahead and take the first large chunk on the side and you're going to

 French braid it from the part all the way down the side of the face to the nape of the

 And then you're going to do the same thing for the other side and the back.

 All three of them are French braided and tied off with rubber bands.

 And the final step is to just take the braids that you've already braided, kind of lift

 them up around the head, and you're going to start pinning the braid and twisting it

 as you go to kind of add a little bit of texture and make it so that it's not so perfect.

 You want the braid to look almost like it's broken up and twisted.

 So we're going to take the first side, pin that up, second side, kind of swoop it back

 And then you're going to take the third piece and kind of twist that in as well so that

 there's no bare spots and it's all full with kind of that twisted French braid that you've

 Alright so when you're all done, you're going to just go across and kind of lift up certain

 If you go ahead and kind of just lift up and almost with your fingers tease each little

 Alright so we are all done and as you can see it's a nice little updo.

 It's perfect in my opinion for spring which is just around the corner.

 It can be dressed up with a cute dress or just down with jeans at the top.

 If you enjoyed this hair tutorial, please leave a comment below and we will catch you

We're going to open it up, check it out, see how it's doing, see if the hair

 So we're going to go and we're going to take this hide and we're going to rinse it really

 thing out using the flushing beam and we'll try to get all the hair off of it today.

Okay guys, I'm going to take this on over to the flushing beam and we'll

 to take that right off of there with just a little bit of effort.

Just always, well you can't even see here, where I still got areas

 going to rinse this hide really well and try to get rid of some of this alkalinity where

 to give this thing a good final rinse and then in part four, we'll talk about graining

 the hide and getting everything ready to rock and roll for brain tanning.

 Okay guys, one of the steps we need to do is try to get the swelling out of this hide.

 what I'm going to do is I've got just a little bit of water in this bucket.

 it's kind of swelled a little bit and we're going to try to take this back down to a thinner size.

 Join us in part four as we go through in the process of making buckskin and making

 This is one of the things that I do buy from the grocery store because in our area you

 So what I do when I go to the store, I buy a lot of bags when they're on sale or you

 I peel them and send them all through the juicer and I end up with juice and I end up

 I pour my juice into these, they're homemade popsicle containers, that's what they are.

 After they freeze into the concentrated juice, I simply run it under hot water and then I

 And then I'll have the juice to make homemade lemon or limeade, whatever.

 And then I'll just fill this back up and freeze these again until I get all my lemon

 So I get all these frozen and I'll keep this juice in the refrigerator until each one freezes.

 I have two of these but my son has one full of popsicles right now.

 When I save them all, if I can find organic lemons and limes, I use the zest.

 If I cannot find organic ones, you don't want to use these to eat the peels.

 Because I don't know if you can really see this or not, but on your non-organic ones,

 they're, I don't know if you can see that, they're coated with vegetable, petroleum,

 beeswax, andor, shellac based waxing or resin to maintain freshness.

 So, I fill this full of white vinegar and I keep this in my refrigerator.

 I'll put like a half a cup of this vinegar in my rinse cycle in my washer.

 It really rinses the clothes very well and it gives them a nice lemony color.

 But, you know, I wipe down my countertops or whatever with this because I'm sure you all know vinegar

 I'm not going to eat these because they are coated because they weren't organic.

 And you can get rid of room odors by placing, you know, a bowl for this in the room and get rid of that.

I'm going to show you today how to make a really simple version of creme fraiche.

 cut it in half, and squeeze out all the juice into my mixing bowl.

 Creme fraiche, the translation of it, just means a thickened cream.

 So there's two ingredients that I'm adding to this creme that are going to thicken it.

 So I'll take a spoonful of the creme fraiche, and I'll show you three different varieties of creme fraiche that you can do.

 you mix to combine, and you have this sweet, smoky, and tangy creme fraiche

 that'd be fantastic on a sandwich or even drizzled in a tomato soup.

 I'm going to get the lime zest in there, which has all the aromatic oils.

 And then it gets another large dollop of this beautiful, thickened creme fraiche.

 The last example that I'm going to show you is I'm going to take a variety

 give it a fine chop, and it's going to be a herb creme fraiche.

 Lastly, we've got some flat leaf parsley for some color, some freshness, some crunch.

 I grab my trusty spoon, and again, come close and see how thick this creme fraiche has gotten.

 If you have chives, mint, parsley, you can even add a little bit of garlic in here.

 Grate a little cucumber, and you have a really bright, vibrant tzatziki.

 So these are three different varieties of creme fraiche that you can do at home,

 the amazing broken chord ballad first of all what is a broken chord think

 about the chord of C you already know in your right hand instead of playing the

 three notes at the same time play them one at a time starting with the C you've

 broken the chord up into three notes try it with your left hand see

 you're going to make a sweeping melody line using broken chords so first of all

 play a single C note two octaves to the left of middle C in your left hand so

 that's one octave two octaves you're going to play that C note then you're

 going to play a broken C chord one octave up from that note that's one

 and you're going to lift your left hand over your right hand and play the next

 broken C chord another octave up in your left hand and you're going to bring this

 hand underneath and finally play a last broken chord one octave up again in your

 right hand and you're going to keep the sustain pedal down throughout the whole

 you get a nice ringing tone now let's see if you can play the same pattern but

 this time use the chord of F so you start with F note one octave up you play

 a broken F chord the next broken F chord lift your hand over to your left

 okay get the idea now to play the entire tune use the pattern on the page with

 Up inverted, front inverted, up, front, up, right, up inverted, right inverted.

It's on the right side, so I use up inverted, front inverted, up, front, up, right, up inverted, right, right.

 So I use up inverted, front inverted, up, front, up, right, up inverted, right inverted.

 But another situation you could have would be something like this.

 See, there's an L, and there's actually four different situations.

 So since I have this, this L shape, what I'm going to do is this algorithm.

 You should only have to repeat it either, uh, from anywhere from no times to three times.

 If you have the dot, it would be, um, if you have the dot, it would be, uh, two times, I think.

 But, anyway, you should be able to get there from what I've told you so far.

 Next thing you're going to do is get these edge pieces right here in the right place.

 So, by doing that, we're going to try and line up at least two of them.

 Now, to fix the other ones, we're going to have to use an algorithm.

 Or, right up, right inverted, up, right up, up, right inverted.

 Now, now we only have two lines, we still have two lined up, but these aren't lined up.

 Now, since I had mine two lining up across from each other, I, I have to do this algorithm two times.

 If you had them right next to each other, you'd put one of them in the right place and one of them in the back place, back here.

 So, right up, right inverted, up, right up, up, right inverted.

 Now what we're going to do is get these corner pieces in the right place.

 So, first of all, we should look and see if there is one in the right place.

 Now, it, it's in the right place and it's flipped right, but even if it's not flipped right, it'll do.

 Next thing we do is put that in the FUR position and execute this algorithm.

 This algorithm is up, right, up inverted, left inverted, up, right inverted, up inverted, left.

 Up, right, up inverted, left inverted, up, right inverted, up inverted, left inverted.

 This one's still right, but these ones still aren't right, so I'll do it again.

 Now what you have to do is flip them, the ones that aren't already right, flip them until they're in the right place, or flipped right.

We're going to put, make sure that you don't have any over here, unless you have all four, that's okay.

 But, if you have two or three, make sure that they're all either, the two right here, or the three like this.

 So, what we're going to do is execute an algorithm we already know.

 It's right there, and we do right inverted, down inverted, right, down.

 Don't worry about anything else that's happening down here, just worry about this.

 Now, we've already got that right, we just need to solve this one.

 So, we're going to turn just the top layer so that it's in the FUR position.

 The carefully tended oysters are being brought in from the bay in the nets they've spent

 This always occurs in the winter when the water is the coldest.

 The cold water slows the metabolism of the oyster thus slowing the pearl formation process.

 This slowing of the pearl formation process causes the nacre to be formed in tighter layers

 These are the nets the oysters have been growing in for most of their lives.

 The oysters are removed from the nets and placed in buckets in preparation for the next

 When removing the pearl from the oyster, every part of the oyster is used.

 The shell is used to create mother of pearl products and the muscle tissue is a little

 The edible muscle tissue is the part going into the pink and yellow bowls here.

 It's usually eaten raw by the employees at the pearl farm as well as sold to local restaurants.

 At this point the pearl is still in the soft body tissues of the oyster there in the blue

 In this process the pearls are separated from the soft tissues.

 These machines spin the pearls out of the tissues of the oyster.

 It takes about one minute of spinning for the pearls to be separated from the tissues.

 Because the pearls are heavier they go to the bottom of the barrel.

 Here the operator is opening an internal valve allowing the pearls to drop into a small

 The pearls are now being rinsed and separated from the little bit of remaining soft tissues

 All of the water used in all of these processes is filtered and returned back to the bay.

 Today we're doing the Going Nuts for Dog Cake cake for dogcakeworld.com.

 This is a cake that every single dog is sure to enjoy and it's very, very simple to make.

 It's basically a cake that uses peanut butter and honey and it's so simple that you'll see

 Now you're going to see today that I'm going to be using these small miniature cupcake

 pans because these make individual serving size cakes for dogs.

 But in this particular case, I'm going to recommend to you that you consider one of

 the silicone molds from www.caninecakery.com because this cake makes such perfect little

 bone shaped cakes, bite size cakes, or perfect little paw, bite size paw shaped cakes.

 This is just one of those recipes that works well with this type of a cake pan.

 Both of these are available and custom made by www.caninecakery.com.

 This is a whole wheat, all natural cake mix so there's nothing artificial, no bad stuff

 Now I always mention that these cakes are designed to be made in either the microwave

 The difference is that the microwave instructions are a little bit different.

 So you're going to want to make sure that you read the box closely depending on which

 We're making this for the conventional oven so we put the egg in.

 We're adding a third of a cup of water and a quarter of a cup of oil.

 You don't really want to use an electric mixer here because it's just overkill.

 You see how nice and quickly this goes together with just a basic whisk.

 So in a matter of 15-20 seconds, we've got a nice basic cake mix.

 You notice this isn't peanut butter like Jif that you would pull out of a jar.

 We recommend that you use partially defatted peanut butter powder.

 Well, if you pick up a jar of peanut butter from the grocery store shelf and you read

 the ingredients, you're going to find there's an awful lot of stuff in there that is not

 A partially defatted peanut butter powder that we sell at Canine Cakery is peanuts.

 You're leaving only the good stuff, the protein, the quality part of the peanut.

 And that's where you're getting your peanut butter flavor because it's just pure peanuts

 So in our recipe you see partially defatted peanut butter powder and that's why.

 Now you can imagine the taste that you're going to get from this cake with the peanut

 butter powder and the honey all mixed together in that nice, rich, whole wheat batter.

 So go ahead and we'll take some batter and put it into our cupcake mold.

 And you can't make cupcakes in a mold like this without making a mess.

 You clean it up and the best part of that, you get to eat the batter.

 And if you visit us there, you'll find many other options we have.

 I like to do on the grill, but it's a rainy day, so I'm going to do this in a nonstick

I'm going to be cooking some zucchini squash and some yellow squash.

 that by taking some extra virgin olive oil and placing it in a shallow pan that's long

 it's coated, I place the squash on the grill or into a hot skillet.

 Once I get my squash in my pan, I'm going to go ahead and season it.

Then I take a little garlic salt and season with the garlic salt.

I want them to be just a little bit soft with some caramelization on there, but

 Alright, you got to take the clip ring off the bottom ball joint.

 G'day guys, today we're going to show you the easy way to fillet an Australian Salmon.

 Here's one that we caught last North, so we're just going to clean her up and cook her up

 Alright, so leaving the scales and guts in to the fish, you want to start behind the

 fin, work your way towards the head, and then just slowly about half way through the fish

 When you get to about the half way mark, you want to stick your knife all the way through

 the fish and just slowly work it along the spine, through the tail.

 Now you'll find that she'll still be connected by the ribs, so what you do from here is you

 And this method actually leaves the guts intact and saves that mess.

 So same deal, behind the fin, sometimes you might pierce the guts on the second one, but

 Work your way along the spine, make sure you're nice and sharp.

 About half way through, straight through, and then along the backbone through to the

 It's really good belly guys, don't get rid of it, it's great for crabs as well.

 You start at the tail end, just try and grab yourself a bit of that really thick skin.

 And you can see how we're actually separating the skin from the fillet.

 What you can do is you just basically lay the knife flush with the board.

 You don't want a lot of pressure guys, because you'll actually cut through the skin if you

 what I like to do from here is actually take out, there's a few bones just in this bit,

 I'm going to show you traditional grip and I'm going to show you intermediate.

 The Swiss Army Triplet is a rudiment involving flams and triplets.

 If you're comfortable with flam accents, this rudiment is going to kick your ass.

 If you're comfortable with flam taps, you're still going to get your ass kicked, but just not as hard.

 If you're looking at the PDF, you'll see that yes, it does involve triplets.

 But if you look at the sticking, it's actually more similar to the flam tap.

 Anyway, the difference being is that after you've completed the flam tap,

 you just hit with the opposite hand directly afterwards, maintaining the triplet pattern.

 The difficult thing about this rudiment is that it's a one-sided rudiment.

 You can only do rights at a time, and then you have to actually do lefts as well.

 So to start off, if you're looking at the PDF, you'll see that the first hit is a flam.

 Immediately after that right-handed flam, you're going to tap again.

 Now, directly after the flam tap is done, you're going to hit again with that opposite hand to complete the triplet.

 It's pretty easy, but just make sure that you practice it with your left hand.

 When you're going to work with the left hand, just do the same thing.

 Start off with sort of a flam tap, and then finish off with the opposite hand.

 The point is to form the circle, get people's attention and to get some room to bust your moves.

Raise your right hand and bring your left foot forward to where your right hand was.

Sit on the floor with your left leg bent and your right leg back in a 90 degree angle.

 Get in a hand spin position with your left arm on the side of your stomach.

 Alright, hey YouTube, Nate here doing an unboxing of an HP monitor, 23 inch LED 2311 I believe

 Got this on Black Friday at Best Buy for $119, one of their deals originally priced somewhere

 So yeah, pretty good deal, I was actually in the market for an LCD, was maybe going

 to wait a little longer to get one, but I figured with this deal, an LED monitor priced

 at what an LCD one would normally cost, I figured, you know, why not?

 This might be kind of hard to do when I apologize for the crappy camera work, I don't really

 It does have an HDMI port, thought I saw online that it comes with an HDMI cord, which I thought

 would be nice, but I looked on the box and it didn't say that they had one, and looks

 But, oh well, there's definitely a lot of cheap ones on Amazon I can get, so no biggie

 It looks like I'm just gonna have to pull this bad boy all the way out, which is gonna

 So, looks like we got a disc of sorts, I don't know why I'd need a disc.

 My guess would be that's the part that connects the actual base to the monitor.

 So I'm gonna go ahead and put this all together and hopefully be able to show you guys the

 As you can see, I'm gonna need a bigger desk sometime soon, which I kind of wanted to do

 The space that is supposed to be for the monitor is about, I'd say two inches too small, so

 it kind of just sits on the outside, and there's not really much space for my MacBook either,

 so hopefully sometime probably before the summer I'll get a bigger desk.

 Also one that doesn't have all that up there, just a nice clean flat one.

 But yeah, the picture quality looks amazing on this monitor already.

 I haven't quite got to push it to its full potential, but I do plan on doubling it up

 This is currently out somewhere else, but once my desk is in my room I'll use this also

 as my TV and probably hook up my Xbox to it because there is an HDMI port like I said.

 But for now this will just be a nice little monitor for a little extra space to work with.

 I've just got not much mustard left so this is a very good budget trick.

 So just about a tablespoon of, I'm using rice wine vinegar but any vinegar will be good,

 We'll give it a little shake in the jar because that's going to help get the mustard off the

 So if you had a lot of mustard, you just want about a tablespoon of mustard, but I'm going

 to eyeball it and I think there's hopefully about a tablespoon in there but maybe not

 Oh yeah, a bit of salt and I can grind some pepper into my hand.

 So this is quite a neat way to make dressing because it's really easy to emulsify, to chop

 So this is actually looking pretty good but if it looks a bit dirty, just give it a wash

 Just keep chopping and then when we get up to the leaves, I'm just going to pull out

 the centre leaves and put them in because they're actually going to make a nice interesting

 contrasting texture for the salad and make us feel like we're having a bit of a leafy

 And you could chop them up if you want but I think it's kind of nice to make it not a

 And if the bits from the bottom are quite hard, you can kind of throw them out.

 I'm going to try and keep as much as I can so I can make my salad as interesting as possible.

 We've got a dowel pin that's been sanded down to fit through the transmission

 a separate cup, our six washers, and then the centerpiece that goes in there and a

 Shove the whole mess inside the cluster gear a little bit and repeat the process with another 22 washers.

 things and by having the small, the heavy side down, it's just easier to work with.

That angle makes all the needle bearings just fall right in place.

 have the completed cluster gear and it's loaded up with all the bearings in there

And right now we put this together without any grease in there at

And you take it so that the copper, the brass side goes towards the

 the transmission case that holds that washer from rotating around.

 second washer goes in there and it slides in once the cluster gear is kind

 of in place in between the two with the brass side towards the metal washer,

 have grease that's just holding all of these little components in.

And then it simply lays down flat in between those other two washers.

 you is on the big washer that's on the inside right here, there's a slot that

 reverse idler the idler gear and then that's the pin that holds that in there.

So you always have to go in towards the front of the transmission.

 you'll tend to make that hole too big and you'll have oil leaks.

What I do is I make sure the thread's coming off the right side of the spool.

Hopefully this shows up a little bit better because people have been complaining that the thread doesn't show up.

 It should have a little bit better spool base on the bottom, but we're not going to worry about that.

 So you're going to go through the first loop, a little thread guide.

 Then on this sewing machine, you just go right through the eye of the take-up lever.

 I just dropped the presser foot and raised up the needle a little bit to make it easier to get this in here.

 I just use my scissors to pull the... not cut it, but just slide it through.

And then it's Hanukkah and it's Christmas and it's Kwanzaa and oh my gosh!

 I was asked to partner up with the girls over at HGTV Handmade and we had a Friendsgiving party not that long ago.

They wanted me to bring one of my Thanksgiving Friendsgiving recipes.

I was like, what would be something that would be easy to make, taste really good,

 and in one single bite totally capture the essence of Thanksgiving?

 So I'm going to show you right now how to make my cinnamon maple glazed veggie skewers

 and they are sure to be a hit this year at your Thanksgiving or your Friendsgiving holiday party.

 So for this recipe, you are going to need some brussels sprouts.

 You can buy them on the stock like this or you can buy them already kind of cut up.

 But I feel like this is kind of festive and if you have any intruders in your house, you can just whack them over the head, which is really nice.

 You can do yellow onions, you can do sweet onions, whatever your fancy.

Now when I went to the market, they had these little tiny sweet potatoes.

 So if you were doing regular size, I would say between two to three, but I got a bunch of little ones, so I'm doing about six.

 On top of that, you're going to want to put a quarter cup of olive oil.

 I don't care if you do grade A or grade B or grade Z. All I care about is that you're using real maple syrup.

Butterworth, I'm sorry, I'm sure you were a lovely woman, but you have no place in this recipe.

 So, I'm using pumpkin pie spice, but you might say, Amy, I don't have any pumpkin pie spice on hand.

 But you may have cinnamon, allspice, nutmeg, and ginger, which, da da da da, put it all together and you've got pumpkin pie spice.

 So I'm going to be using a tablespoon of that, and then also a little pinch of kosher salt.

 I like kosher salt because the flakes are really easy to hold onto, and it's Alton Brown's favorite, so you can't go wrong with that.

 It's saying I need some olive oil and I need some maple syrup, and I'm saying, mm-hmm, you are right.

 Alright, so now, per batch, you are going to take a quarter cup of olive oil.

 Next, you're going to place these in the oven at 375 degrees for 45 minutes.

 Okay, we are out of the oven, and lo and behold, we got some good maple cinnamon caramelized yumminess.

 Okay, so basically, the next step, once you have them out of the oven, and the cooking time will vary.

 If you want them to be softer, you can go on a lower temperature, like 350 or 375.

 And if you want them to crisp up more, you want to do 400 degrees.

 And this can vary anywhere from 35 to 45 minutes, and if you're doing a lower temperature, all the way up to like an hour.

 So it's up to you, any way you do it, you put all these ingredients in the oven, you're going to enjoy it.

 If you want to omit toothpicks, you can do that too, but come on, the recipe is maple glazed veggie skewers.

 So what I do, is I take the Brussels sprouts first, and I just poke it in.

 Now, the Brussels sprouts get super roasted and caramelized on the inside that you cut,

 and you get to see all those little layers of the Brussels sprouts, so I like to have that on top.

 So now, I'm going to take onion, and I'm going to just stick it on.

 Here's the thing, you want the right ratio, since this is one bite, you want the right ratio of Brussels sprout to onion to sweet potato.

 And then the last, the base, I think is the best to be the sweet potato.

 So after you've done all that, you are left with this wondrous creation.

 And apparently an earthquake is going on because these are tumbling, they don't want to stay upright.

 You'd get a lot of these, you'd probably get at least 30 skewers for one batch, at least I would think.

 So enough for everybody at your party, or your friendsgiving, or your thanksgiving event.

 So that is how you make my cinnamon maple glazed veggie skewers.

 So I hope you guys enjoyed this video, and please subscribe for more.

 I highly suggest that you go over to the HGTV handmade channel.

 Please check out the rest of the videos in our friendsgiving collaboration playlist.

 And I hope you guys have a very safe, healthy, and happy Thanksgiving.

 Hi guys, it's Flo from Fertilitiesandmore.com and today this is another makeup tutorial

 So as you can see, I haven't used an eyeliner but I only use eyeshadows to elongate my eyes

 and I think it's more subtle and for those who are quite afraid of tracing a line, I

 I already did my face, the foundation, the concealer and my favorite bronzer.

 With this Stila palette, I am making my brows and I mix two colors together because I think

 Now I am making my brows because as you can see, it's very sparse and I also shave them

 Now I am priming my eyes because it helps the eyeshadow to stay put longer and also

 So I think it's quite important and I am applying that on all over the lid and also on the lower

 Using the Naked palette from Urban Decay, I am using this beautiful shade.

 This is Thin and I apply that with a smudge brush like this on almost the entire eyelid.

 And of course you want to blend that very well because you don't want to have any arched

 I love this color to highlight my brow bone and it helps to give me more 3D effect because

 Using this toasted color, this is my favorite color of the palette and I apply that on the

 And yeah, I blend that a little bit more and this is perhaps on the one third of the eye.

 And now I am applying a little bit of this dark color and also it gives me more definition

 And this is something that I really like to do because it creates something more subtle

 This is black so indeed it is dark and I am applying that on the lower lash line and on

 It's uneven now but I will blend and correct with the Q-tip later.

 And for the other eyes, you can see I elongate my eyes with the black color and I join the

 Now with the Hustle which is the dark brown that I really love, I blend the black with

 the rest of the eyelid because I want something subtle and something very smooth.

 With Creep, I am defining a little bit more my lower lash line because I like the smokiness

 of the look and it also helps me to elongate the eyes because you extend your eyes on the

 Now this is the mascara part and I am using 4C's from Maybelline.

 I like this one because this is also a waterproof mascara and it helps to hold the curl a little

 And I think also it's important to use waterproof mascara especially with monolids because the

 eyelids come on top of the lashes and it can smudge so it helps to prevent that.

 Now with the help of a Q-tip, I try to dry the mascara because it tends to be quite long

 Now with Essyn, I am using it on the inner corner here to give a little bit of light

 I'm highlighting the cheekbone here because I like that the light hits my face like this.

 And with this beautiful pomegranate shade from Sleek, I am using that of course as a

 blush and I really like the shade because it's quite a fall shade and this is quite

 I love this red velvet shade because it matches the background and also the season.

 I think this is really pretty, so easy to use for those who are afraid of bright colors.

 And now I am setting my face with this powder because I don't want to have any shininess

 As you can see, my eyes are really really longer than my natural eyes and I love the

 So I hope you will like this look and if you want to copy this look, don't hesitate to

 Hello stampers, today I'm going to demonstrate how to make this little gift card holder.

 This is where your gift card would be attached to and then you would just slide it right

 And then I used our Great Friends stamp set along with my Big Shot to decorate this gift

 So the first thing you want to do is grab a piece of card stock, mine is Marina Mist

 You want to cut this at 4 1⁄2 by 5 inches and then you want to turn it around and score

 Then I used the Big Shot along with the final press embossing plate and I ran this through

 And then once I did that I took the 3⁄4 inch circle punch and I punched out half ways

 As you can see that's where the tab will be for the hemp twine there.

 Now I'm going to, we're going to cover the decorating part of it.

 The first thing you want to do is cut these little strips of different colored card stock.

 I cut that piece at a half an inch by 4 1⁄2 and then used our scallop edge border punch

 I then cut a piece of Whisper White card stock at 3 1⁄4 inches by 4 1⁄2.

 I ran that through our Big Shot with our square lattice embossing folder to give it some more

 And then I cut a piece of Old Olive card stock at a half an inch by 4 1⁄2.

 You're going to want to tie your ribbon around before we attach it to the main part of the

 You're going to use a glue dot and secure that on the back like that and then pull it

 This is a great way to use your ribbon because then instead of running it clear around the

 And then you're just going to place that right down there on the bottom of the gift card

 So you want to do that before you close up your gift card holder.

 Now once you have that on, you want to cut some sticky strip and place that right along

 And then you're just going to peel off the backing and press down on the edges there.

 Now to finish decorating this, what I did was I took our big shot and our little leaves

 and baslet and I die cut a piece out in the early espresso card stock.

 And then I wanted to cut the little part of the leaf off here on the bottom so that it

 And then I stamped a butterfly from the Great Friends stamp set in rich razzleberry on whisper

 I cut a little bit of piece of natural hemp twine and added little antennas up here at

 And then I added one of our designer buttons in our neutral pack to the center.

 And then I just placed a little bit of a dimensional on the back.

 And then I came in and placed the butterfly at an angle over the top of the little leaf.

 And then to finish it off, I felt like it needed something more.

 I stamped for you, which comes with the Great Friends stamp set, and old olive ink onto

 And then I punched it out with the Curly Label extra large punch and sponged the edges in

 You want to cut a piece of card stock at two and a half by three and three quarter inches.

 You're going to round all four corners again with a 316th corner rounder.

 And then you're going to poke a hole in and run a little bit of hemp twine right through

 And then you're just going to attach your gift card and then slide that right into your

 Well we are, so we're going to create a take on buffalo chicken wings.

 A muffin toasted over charcoal with this beautiful blue cheese dressing that Liz makes with a

 This is so much better and it doesn't take long so this is how I make it.

 Okay, we're going to post the recipe on BBQMyWay.com just in case you don't catch it here.

 We've already finely diced some onion and we have chopped up some fresh parsley.

 It's about two teaspoons of diced onion, about a quarter of a cup of parsley.

 The original recipe calls for about a quarter cup of blue cheese but not everybody's a fan

 Some freshly cracked black pepper and then you definitely want some garlic and so we're

 You can use fresh but we love this canned garlic because it's already minced and ready

 This is really better if it sits for even a day is great but if you don't have a whole

 It just tastes much better if you let those flavors kind of meld together.

 Even for people who don't love blue cheese dressing, make them taste this because it's

 Alright, now is the time to make the buffalo sauce for the buffalo bacon backers.

 All we're doing is adding roughly a cup of Louisiana hot sauce.

 You can use Tabasco too if you want or any hot sauce but I kind of like Louisiana because

 that's the way they do it at the Anchor Bar so I try to be traditional.

 Roughly about the same amount of butter, maybe a little bit less than what you put in for

 And we're going to cook this down and we'll show you what it looks like when it's done.

 And when the butter is melted and incorporated, you're pretty much done.

 And it also allows it to stick a little bit better to the chicken.

 And then the vinegar just adds a little bit of a cit flavor to it.

 A lot of people try to doctor it up and add different spices and Worcestershire and garlic

 Alright, we've got boneless chicken thighs and boneless chicken breasts.

 And while we're grilling them we're going to baste them with the buffalo sauce.

 Alright, the banana peppers, while a mild flush to the pepper, the seeds are extremely hot.

 And this will be a great complement to the buffalo bacon backer.

 We're going to put the lid on which will help the cooking times of everything.

 We should be ready pretty quick here to go on and assemble our buffalo bacon backers.

 Alright, we've got the muffin that we've toasted with the olive oil on it over the charcoal.

 I think the chicken thighs are a better cut because they're going to end up being more moist.

 So it's not so thick you could do a whole piece of bacon if you wanted.

 One thing I forgot was to put a little bit more buffalo sauce on it.

 It's kind of soaked in some of that delicious blue cheese dressing.

 My wife's been yelling at me about how often I've licked my fingers.

Buffalo bacon backers for your next football or sports get-together.

 Okay, so after I was rudely disconnected, I went to find my liquid last eyeliner that

 You're just going to take a regular amount, I mean a little amount.

 You can make a wing, but I usually don't because you can't really see the wing when it's not

 I just make the line thick so you can see that I have a different color eyeliner there.

 You don't want to put too much because if you put too much, it will dry really bubbly

 And then for the blush, because I usually wear light colored blushes or light pink,

 but for this look I wanted bright pink eyes and bright pink lips and bright pink cheeks.

 So what I did was I took a flat buffer brush and I dipped it into Sushi Flower.

 And if you're like me and you get the liner on your eyelashes, go over your eyelashes

2 cups rice preferably sona masoori, 1 cup shredded coconut, you

 of water for at least 4-5 hours and then we will grind everything together.

 to drain this water and I am going to put this in the mixing jar.

 To avoid all the complications I am going to put yeast in this.

 the batter is too thick, the appams will be really thick and may not be that soft.

 Add about 1-1.5 ladles and I am going to turn, turn, turn, turn till it goes to the side.

 and I am going to close this lid approximately for a minute, 1-1.5 minutes.

 I'm going to show you how to cook Jambalaya for this recipe I'm using 250

 grams of chicken and 250 grams of chorizo sausages you can use any kind of

 a sausage and some green chillies that's up to you to decide how many green

 chillies you are going to use and a tablespoon of crushed garlic 2-3

 tablespoons of oil 3 small tomatoes 2 capsicum green capsicum you can use red

 or yellow and 3 cups of rice washed and if you are using 3 cups of rice you

 need 6 cups of stock water chicken or vegetable stock water and some bay

 leaves and I'm using one diced tomato one can and even you can use fresh

 tomatoes instead and for the herbs I am using fennel and cumin because normally

 it's oregano but I'm using fennel and dill in here you can change anything

 according to your taste and what you like this is just an idea.

 a tablespoon or two oil and into that add the I'm adding cumin seeds you can

 add oregano or parsley or whatever the herb you like and bay leaves and then

 the onions and cook this about 2-3 minutes until it releases the aroma now

 into that add the garlic and the chicken and cook the chicken until it's browned

 after browning the chicken add the sausages and then the green chillies

 tomatoes and the capsicum then add the rice and the stock water and cook this

 until this absorbs all the water and the rice is cooked so I'm going to add the

 stock water and add the tomatoes too and cook this on simmering about 15 to 20

 minutes I finished cooking the jambalaya and this is a really nice and easy way

 of doing one pot meal if you are a busy person and I hope you will enjoy this

 A lot of people come to me and tell me that riding in a car is one of the most painful

 They've bought new cars, they have the lumbar roll, they use everything they know to make

 The cool thing about cars and riding in a car is actually one of my favorite healing

 You aren't going anywhere, so it's a time when I call doing nothing well.

 At this point, we're going to go through what doesn't work, what does work and make it a

 When you get in the car, if you get in and you're slumping, you're probably going to

 How you start this slumping movement or sitting position is really taxing on the back over

 I'm going to show you a really simple, good way to get in and also it feels good, it stretches

 The second thing you're going to do is you're going to get either a blanket, a small blanket,

 a t-shirt, something soft because you're going to make a little support for your back.

 Depending on your seat, it'll depend on how much material you're going to need.

 I'm placing this really high up in my back, right around my mid-rib cage area.

 You may have to either bring your seat forward some more because of the distance now, you're

 no longer going to be driving like this, or you may have to push the seat back depending

 I'm just sitting here letting this piece of material hold me up.

 Now, right now this piece of material is a little thick for me, so it's too much, but

 This is two pellicases, and I really like that because it's simple.

 I put it in there, it's a little bit more snug to my back, it's a little thinner.

 I bring it in, I pick my back up, I stick this in, I hook it in, and I just feel my

 This is all being supported in a more natural position that you're not used to, and then

 the neck and the shoulders and the low back get to relax and release.

 Then my thighs let go, I let my thighs go by kicking my legs out, and then I'm ready

 What you might have to do is you might have to adjust it or put a little towel here so

 that you can have your headrest be in a comfortable position for you.

 Headrests are not normally comfortable for folks, and you just have to learn to let your

 Now, one other thing is once you've done this for a while, you won't need this.

 So I'm going to fold up these two pillowcases, and I'm going to make them so that they're

 I'm going to bend over, like I said, right in the middle of the ribs.

 And if you don't have anything, if you're just stuck without it, just bring your shoulders

 It's just you can't hook over the bottom of the back of the chair.

 Today we're going to install a liminator tail light system from Cycle Visions.

 First you want to go ahead and remove the two screws for the lens.

 Okay you want to pull that out and then there's a wire that's clipped on the inside right

 And you want to unplug the turn signal right there and push that through.

 Alright then you want to take the screw out of that backing plate and remove the backing

 You've got a tail light, backing plate, pyramid cover, and a load equalizer.

 And then you've got these two clips and those two clips go right there in the fender so

 Then you're going to trim the license plate right there so it fits on that tail light

 You plug the wires in right there and then you make sure that it's clipped up inside

 Then you're going to fit that license plate that you just trimmed right there so you can

 Some states are a little big on the license plate so you have to trim them with a tin

 Then you've got four allen screws, two on each side, that secures the light to that

 Well, you're all done except for you've got one more part to put in underneath the seat.

 Then you unplug the wire harness right there and you're going to plug in that wire harness

 That's a load equalizer if you don't use any other turn signals and if you don't have a

 Now if you do have a security system, that's where it plugs in.

 That's for if you have a 2000 and up soft tail or a fat boy or a sportsster or dyna.

 You have to plug that in if you have a security system with a key fob.

 There's Brad and he's testing out this light system right here.

 When you hit the brake light, that's going to go four different times.

 It's super bright in the daytime and it's really bright at night.

 Hi and welcome back to Hayes Kitchen today it is all about your meal choices, now so

 many of you ask for a pasta dish that is nice and easy to do, typically enough myself and

 Nick don't eat a mass amount of pasta however when we do it is gluten free, however Harry

 and Edie would eat it every night of the week if they could, in fact Harry would just get

 This is perfect for all you parents out there that want 5-10 minute quick meals or all you

 people that have been to the gym and want a quick nice easy hearty meal, king prawn

 linguine with a nice light sauce with a little bit of a fiery kick, lets get cooking.

 Right so we have got some peeled king prawns, we have got some rocket, some cherry tomatoes,

 gluten free linguine, handful of fresh basil, lime, couple of chillies and I have got some

 chilli seeds here just to give it an extra bit of kick, you can get them in most supermarkets

 now, some sun dried tomato paste, some sugar snap peas, a glass of white wine, pepper,

 Get your gas or electric on and then to a pan add hot water and a good pinch of salt.

 Right into the boiling water we are just going to add your pasta, so if you get your linguine,

 drop it into the centre of the pan and just try and fan this out around the sides.

 Using some tongs I will just turn the pasta around until it starts to go to the bottom

 of the pan and if you can put on a back burner and put it out of the way just while we go

 Right so our pasta is cooked we are just going to give it a quick stir and then put that

 Rinse off thoroughly with cold water, pop it in the pan and leave it to the side for

 Right so our pasta is all cooked anyway and we are just going to get the pan up to heat.

 Into your pan you want to be adding one small spoon full of butter, your chopped tomatoes,

 A little trick, get your garlic cloves, instead of peeling them just chuck them straight into

 your pan, push it over the top, slice that off and then you can just remove the skin.

 A couple of cloves of garlic should be fine, king prawns in, your sun dried tomato paste,

 now if you can't get sun dried tomato paste, if you just blend some tomatoes with a little

 Mange 2 or sugar snap peas into the pan and then you grab a handful of your spaghetti

 For any of the excess pasta just stick that in a bowl of cold water, leave it in the fridge

 To the pasta, grab yourself half a lime, cut it in half and squeeze it over the top, half

 To finish this off, grab yourself a large handful of rocket, crinkle that up into a

 small ball like that and just rest that on top and that's good to go.

 Well that's it for this week guys, thank you so much for watching, I hope that was a nice

 Now a lot of you have been asking for a kitchen tour which I do have to laugh about because

 if you actually saw my kitchen at the moment I've got no roof, we're having an extension

 built onto the back of the kitchen and also I'm having the floor ripped up in the kitchen

 You might have noticed we've got a fridge suddenly appeared here and a counter next

 to it, that was purely down to last week this part of the floor was being ripped up.

 So you might find there's different things pop up each week because this is actually

 If I was to turn this camera around and you were to see what a building site this is I

 Like I say, we'll be trimming those off after we have the turnout glued onto here.

 All right, out there, make sure there's no plugs gonna be in it.

 I'm just gonna take a little thin bead like that and just, actually not a thin bead,

 caulk is that it's obviously thicker than glue, than your standard Elmer's glue.

And thirdly, since it's thicker, it holds the ties a lot better.

 ties are a little bit twisted, then I can push it down and usually it holds on to it pretty good.

So I show you how to screw up, and then I show you how to back yourself out.

 and when the time comes, we will be gluing this to the template so you can go ahead and just trim

 your mileage may vary, or if you want to take my ideas, slice and dice them, and come up with your

 the squeeze and caulk is that I can go ahead and manipulate things.

 Okay, we'll go ahead and put that in place, this next group, and I just do a few ties at a time.

 put caulk on all of them, because this does tend to dry fairly fast, and you have a fair amount of working time.

 Part of the problem is that the paper soaks up some of the glue, so that can limit how much time you have to work

Okay, so now you may be wondering, do I ever weight any of these down?

It's actually part of a turnout jig from Fast Tracks, but it's doing double duty.

 I'm going ahead and just pressing down a little bit and just let this... There.

 and then you could probably use a piece of wood, something like this, to kind of press your ties down.

They set pretty well in place, so you don't have to worry about them peeling up.

 Today I'm with Mark and we're going to show you how to measure the car to get these things

 So Mark's going to start off with some measurements right now, show you where we start off, and

 First you want to get a rear measurement and make it level side to side.

 It doesn't have to be level front to back, just side to side is your main thing.

 You want to go off the same point from one side to the other, and this is right at 21

 Now take note of where that's actually being measured at down here.

 You've got three layers of metal, so this is actually the inner rocker is where we measured

 So you've got the inner rocker, you've got the outer rocker, and then you've got the

 So just keep it consistent and it's probably better to do it with the front too.

 You want to write them down on the car, front to back, every measurement you can, that will

 Now next we want to measure the front, top of the core support, which we've already got

 And it measures the same on both sides, so we know we're level on the front.

 Now a factory frame rail is two and three quarters thick, right through here.

 Ours is three inches, so we want to make sure we get our measurements off the top, not off

 And like I said, again, we want to write these measurements down so we don't have any mishaps

 And next we want to get a measure of the core support from the front edge of the corner

 of the cowl to the front, right there, to the front of the core support, using the bolt

 Write your measurement down on the cowl where something wouldn't be destroyed.

 So we're going to measure from the same point on the corner of the cowl to the center of

 And you want to do the same thing on the other side, using the same side of the tape.

 And that's what you want to do before you ever take anything off, before that subframe

 So this front end will come off, we've got another car with the front end completely

 off, then we'll be ready to slide the subframe up under that one and show you how we're going

 Here we are now, we've got the full subframe assembly, we've got the jack under it, and

 we're going to push this thing under there and show you how this is supposed to go in.

 You can't have this completely down on the ground, it's got to be up in the air so we

 can get it back there to get the bolts lined up in the leaf spring.

 So right now we're going to push this thing back and show you how we do it.

 We've got two bolts, it's going to go right back into the factory leaf location.

 Now we're not going to tighten these down, you can put your nuts on there, but we're

 not going to tighten it down until we go up front and get everything lined up.

 So now we're going to go back up to the front and we're going to check our measurements.

 Okay, now we're going to go ahead and jack this thing up in the front, get it up where

 And as you can see, it fits very nicely up against the factory floor pans on both sides.

 And then we'll go back and refer to these measurements that we have right here that

 And this side here is 26 inches, just as it's wrote down over there on that side.

 And that's how nicely our frame matches the factory frame rails.

 So when you're ready to put either our engine panels or you can use your factory ones, everything

 And we'll do another segment on that on how to install our engine panels.

 Okay, now this subframe assembly is going to come with the jack pad, already welded

 And then once we make them, then we'll be able to start producing them.

 This is really just plug welding now to the floor and plug welding to the firewall.

 And just make sure that you tighten those bolts up back there in the back.

 The Flexio 990 Sprayer is ideal for large interior or exterior projects.

 The integrated spray controls let you adjust the material volume, spray width and spray

 You will experience 2-3 air bubbles before it is completely primed.

 Follow the process every time you empty a paint can or change them out.

 Before starting your project, it's important to practice and get familiar with the sprayer.

 A spray poster is provided as a reference guide so you can adjust the size and pattern

 Hold the sprayer 6-8 inches away from the surface as you begin to spray.

 Remember to keep your arm straight as you spray and move in a direction parallel to

 Bending your wrists or slowing your pace tends to leave too much paint in one spot.

 It's also a good idea to wipe the tip of your sprayer periodically as dry paint will disrupt

 The adjustment ring on your Flexio 990 Sprayer determines the width and shape of the spray

 To spray up and down along the surface, select a horizontal spray pattern.

 The red spray switch can select between a narrow or wide pattern.

 The Flexio 990 is equipped with variable speed air power control.

 The X-Boost power dial adjusts the level of air pressure produced by the turbine.

 Lower settings are for thinner materials such as stains and sealers.

 Higher settings are for heavy materials such as enamels, primers and latex.

 The material flow control determines the amount of material that is sprayed from the gun.

 For thicker materials, it's recommended that you start with the 5 flow setting and then

 The recommendation for spraying thinner materials is to start on the lowest flow setting and

 The Flexio 990 has a stationary base unit with a peristaltic pump that draws paint directly

 This unit works with 1 to 5 gallon containers so you can spend your time painting, not refilling.

 For best results when spraying interior walls, start by cutting in the corners along the

 When you need to complete the project by painting trim or do some small area painting, convert

 the 990 to a handheld sprayer with the control finish gun and cup.

 Painting with the control finish nozzle uses the same power adjustment and has a material

 The 28 ounce cup allows you to spray small amounts with quick color change and fast clean

 The Flexio 990 is simple to use and gives you the power and control to take on any project.

 This is my salted beef brisket with a creamy veloute sauce and celeriac mash.

 You're gonna need lovely salted beef brisket and we'll be cooking the beef in a stock of

 And for the sauce, butter, flour, lemon, small gherkins, capers, parsley and double cream.

 And for that we need some milk, celeriac, potatoes and finishing it off with a pinch of nutmeg.

 First of all, I've got some lovely salted beef brisket from my butcher here.

 This is a great cut of meat, takes a long time to cook but the results are really worth it.

 Now this is a very salty piece of meat and I want to be using the liquid for my sauce.

 So I want to bring it up to the boil and then pour away the water and then refresh it with

 Just gonna be a basic stock just to help the flavour come along.

 I've just got some carrots, some celery, an onion, some garlic and some thyme.

 So these vegetables and the thyme are really gonna help flavour the stock.

 So I'm just gonna take the beef out, I'm gonna throw away the water and put some fresh water in.

 So I've got some clean water in here, I'm gonna add the beef and all our lovely vegetables and thyme.

 Pop the lid back on, bring to the boil and simmer for about three hours or just until it's very tender.

 So I've got some celeriac here, I'm gonna chop the end off, cut away the sides,

 Now because I want to give it a bit of body, I'm gonna add some potato as well.

 And then bring to the boil and just gently cook until soft and ready to mash.

 So the celeriac and potato have been simmering for about 15 minutes, ready to mash nice and tender.

 And of course because you've cooked it in the milk, it's gonna add a lovely creaminess to it.

 So add some salt, pepper and then last of all I'm gonna add some fresh nutmeg.

 And that's the mash ready, so I'm just gonna cover with some greaseproof paper.

 And over here I've got another saucepan of brisket that's been cooking for about three hours.

 Very carefully take out, put in a dish and I'm gonna loosely cover in foil and just rest it until needed.

 I wanna make a sauce out of it, so what I'm gonna do is strain it off.

 And you wanna cook it out a little bit, just so you get a nice sandy texture.

 And now with a ladle, I'm gonna start to slowly add the warm stock.

 And what you're gonna get on that is some nice raw sweet onions.

Now of course I've done that before but this is a different way of doing basmati

 say the basmati rice is over done, it's mushy, it's under done.

 It will be so easy, specially dedicated for all our students and the dorm rooms where

 You put in, walk away, come back after a certain time and your basmati rice is done.

 I'm going to do is, because I need some good basmati rice, so I'm going to use about,

 in this case I'm using two cups of basmati rice which I will be washing, wash and rinse.

 Now again, you know, no soaking all that thing about soaking the rice for half an hour, one

 So a quick wash on that and make sure you have running water and keep on stirring this

 rice and what that does is quickly remove all the starch off that and just one quick

My rice is washed, I'm going to drain this off from all its water.

 a glass bowl which I'm going to use and throw all my rice in there.

 last grain of this out of my... Now of course if you don't have a separate bowl to wash

 and four cups of water go in there and I'll just go ahead and put my water in.

 of water, just mix it up a little bit here so they kind of even out.

 cover this with a plastic wrap and in that case I'll have to walk here.

So you're covering it up, seal it from all sides and in the middle,

 right in the middle, take a knife and put a slit right in the middle, a small slit right

This is Pindi chole, which I've seen that it's nowhere on the website

What I'm going to do is take a knife or a fork and just fluff my rice up a little

And I'm going to just leave this to finish off for another minute

 once you pull that top off the rice, it will just keep on cooking.

About two minutes, the steam from the inside will go up and finish whatever is left to be done on that rice.

 And you're going to thank me for creating this recipe for you all.

 It doesn't really matter what temperature you have for the water.

 Have you ever heard of putting salt in the water to make it boil faster?

 So, while that's boiling, I figured we'd teach you how to eat a gogurt.

 Because usually there's a blue marker down here that shows you how to tear it down there.

 Well, first we need to turn it down because we don't want it to boil over.

 Seven, okay, that's on a one through ten scale, so, or a low to high, so there's 11 different values there.

 All right, we're back here with more Top Ramen, how to make it.

 So, right now we need to turn it about low because, you know, we just want to keep it hot.

 We ran out, but to recap, all we did was boil water and drop that brain stuff, Top Ramen, in it.

 Okay, now you're just holding that with your hand and dropping the brain stuff in there?

 There you have it, our finished bowl of Top Ramen with chicken flavor.

 First, cook black tapioca according to the directions on the package

 And soak 1 cup of tapioca in 3 tablespoons of simple sugar syrup

 Milk tea and coconut, seriously, these are some of my favorites.

 This hot summer, I wish you enjoy this ultimate Taiwanese summer drink, bubble tea, at home.

 Today I will show you how to create a picture of an exploding water bomb using a digital

 Alright, now let's have a look at some other equipment that we will need for this shot.

 There's nylon cord, there's a flash hot shoe, a super clamp, a bolt, a flash, a self-made

 light barrier, wireless flash triggers, a magic arm, some balloons, a needle and a bucket.

 In order to freeze the fast moving water drops we will need a very short flash duration.

 In order to achieve a very short flash duration we will set the flash to manual mode and adjust

 Alright so everything is in place and as you can see our light barrier is going right next

 So if you're crossing the light barrier with your finger it's supposed to trigger the flash.

 As you can see the flash is triggered before I'm hitting the balloon with my finger.

 This is really important because you're going to hold the needle in your hand like this

 and when you cross the beam the needle is supposed to be inside the balloon and that's

 Check your exposure by firing a test flash and adjust your aperture and ISO until your

 Alright as you can see taking a picture of an exploding water bomb is pretty simple.

 And, um, what you're going to have to do here, since it's a double sided wafer, like, um,

 you're going to have to put your tension wrench in the middle, like turn it.

 Then you take your L-Rake, or you, uh, or you take your short hook, whichever you prefer.

 Okay, first, you're going to have to put some tension in it, then put your L-Rake in, and jiggle it a little.

 Then hold it right here, so you can take your tension wrench out, and put it in the other side.

 Now you just, like, put it in there and jiggle it, and you got it.

 So as you can see by the title I am doing a night time routine for my hair and my skin.

 So I'm just going to go ahead and change into something a little bit more comfy.

 I'm just wearing a little sleeper shirt that I like to wear to bed.

 This is actually the Angelus Hair Studio Brazilian Water Wave hair.

 But as you can see I just like to take my paddle brush and just make sure there are

 no kinks or snags in my hair before I prep my hair for the night.

 And what I like to do is separate my hair down the middle and the back.

 Just make sure like I said nothing is tangled and everything is nice and smooth.

 And I like to take some argan oil and put that all over my hair so it's nice and moisturized

 That way I don't have to wear too much the next day and it will wipe away down your hair.

 So what I like to do is I like to take my leave out and braid that in with my hair.

 Don't really need an explanation because you can see what I'm doing right there.

 And now that I have both my braids in I like to take some black Jamaican castor oil or

 Jamaican black castor oil and I like to put this all over my edges so that they can be

 And I don't have to do too much to them when I wake up to get ready.

 And now that my edges are nice and prepped I like to take this Kera Kera edge tamer or

 edge control and like to put this all over my edges so my baby hairs are nice and on

 the sweep for the next day and I don't have to put too much on it because you know you

 can't just be plopping all these products on your hair because then it will lay your

 So I like to take a satin scarf and just wrap my hair on the front so that they can be nice

 After I finish with my hair I like to wash my hands because I'm blind and I wear contacts.

 So I like to take out my contacts with clean hands and not dirty hands.

 And the next thing is for my skin I like to do is take some of this albalene.

 I just like to get a big glob of it and just put it all over my face.

 And this helps with moisturizing my skin and it's also of course a makeup remover.

 I don't put too much products on my skin because I feel like less is more for me.

 So I like to really saturate this and make sure I'm rubbing off all the makeup with this

 I don't really need to use makeup wipes because baby wipes are so much cheaper and they do

 the same thing to me so I don't really see the need in buying like $5 makeup wipes when

 Now that most of the makeup is off because of this baby wipe I just chuck that to the

 I've used this for like 2 years and it keeps my skin nice and clean.

 So I just take about 2 pumps and rub this all over my face making sure that I get it

 all in my pores so that none of the makeup clogs my pores and all that.

 And I like to take a cold rag and wipe all this off to make sure that my skin is nice

 Once I make sure I got every inch of makeup off of my face and my neck I like to dab my

 face with a towel and then I use some of this coconut oil and just put like a little bit

 on my face because this coconut kind of stinks to me you know so I don't really like putting

 And then I take some of this Vaseline cocoa butter lotion which really moisturizes my

 face and I love this stuff because it just makes my face so smooth and baby soft and

 I have an obsession with having something on my lips at all times.

 So at night I like to use Carmex because it keeps my lips moisturized all night like when

 But before I go to bed I'm blind so I gotta put my glasses on and I hate them.

 Hi, this is Carissa with HerpesBlog and today I'm really, really excited to share a recipe

 And what we're going to do is we're going to make some zucchini pasta that has a cilantro,

 basil, avocado cream sauce, and then we're going to add our meat of choice because we

 Okay, so I just opened this Vegetti which is a spiralizer vegetable cutter and it is

 You can make squash, you can do potatoes, you can do carrots, you can do whatever.

 There's a thin side and a thick side depending on how big you want your little fake noodles.

 And then there's also this and it kind of holds whatever vegetable you're using on so

 it's kind of like a safety net for your fingers so you're not sticking your fingers in there.

 I think we just take our zucchini, put it in, start spiraling into a dish, and then

 Make sure to wash it before you use it, of course, and then wash your vegetables.

 For this recipe you're going to need some pretty basic, easy ingredients.

 You're going to need some cilantro, basil, of course your zucchini or whatever other

 You're going to have some garlic, some lemon, salt and pepper, sea salt, if you choose any

 You're going to have some avocado and then if you choose you're going to have your meat

 All the ingredient list is going to be in the comments as well as this blog post so

 No need to remove the outer layer unless you don't like the skin but there's lots of health

 It's not even breaking apart so I guess if you wanted smaller strands you would just

 So since we're getting towards the end I don't want to hurt my fingers so I'm going to cut

 And the little bit left at the end that I end up having, I'm just going to save that,

 put it in my compost, maybe I'll put it in a broth that I'll make.

 Sure, there's a little bit left but you don't want to cut your fingers and use it.

 You might as well just use it in some kind of broth or in your compost.

 So whatever side you're using, the other side will come, this core will come out so

 your seeds and everything don't get included in the veggie noodles.

 The next thing we're going to do with our zoodles is we're going to put some sea salt

 on it just to take out some of the moisture, make them a little bit more noodley.

 You can do this in a sink, it will leak, or you can put a plastic bag underneath or

 But we're just going to sprinkle some sea salt on it, wait 20 minutes and make our sauce

 You just take all of your ingredients and you just put them in the food processor until

 So lastly, we are going to pat down our zucchini with some paper towels to try to get some

 And then we're going to heat up a pan to medium with some coconut oil.

 And then we're going to add our zucchini to the pan and fry it up for just about two minutes

 Then we're going to add our sauce, mix it all together, add our meat, and we have our meal.

 We're just going to heat it up for a little bit, mix it all together, and then it's ready

 You can add some basil or some cilantro to make it a little bit fancier on top.

 Today we're going to show you how to put a door gasket on your dishwasher.

 To replace the door gasket, obviously we need to open the door.

 Take some kind of an instrument to get hold of the end of either end of the gasket, right

 Before you get it all the way out, take note of the orientation of that gasket, the barbed

 Check for any debris that might be in that channel, take a damp rag and wipe that out.

 Take that new gasket, start on either side, lower it completely to the bottom, and then

 Try not to pull on it so that you don't stretch it, particularly on the corners.

 Fit of the door, make sure it's tight, and your repair is complete.

 And that's just how easy it is to put a door gasket on your dishwasher.

 Real quick before the video starts I wanted to say that I made two versions of this video.

 So if you want to see the whole thing, it's about 13 minutes, click the annotation and

 Otherwise this is the short one and you can just keep watching.

 So here's the box from Shapeways and it came pretty quickly but I've actually had it for

 about two months just sitting around waiting to be unboxed because I had other videos to

 So now I'm finally excited that I can actually do this puzzle and hopefully it will be fun.

 So if you remember last time I bought something from Shapeways I got the Elemental Cube and

 I said the Elemental Cube would probably not be the smallest Rubik's Cube forever because

 as 3D printing gets better and better you can print with more and more detail and get

 So this is not the Elemental Cube but now this is the Subatomic Cube.

 So there's actually enough pieces for four subatomic cubes in here.

 And because you pay by the amount of material you use on Shapeways this is one of the cheapest

 I mean look at how big my thumb looks compared to these pieces.

 I'm actually resting the pieces right on the lens of my camera.

 It was actually much easier to assemble than the elemental cube.

 I think I'm going to paint this one black with a permanent marker.

 Well, I'm not sure how to do this without getting permanent ink all over my fingers.

 Okay so I found some extra cubesmith stickers that I had laying around that I never used.

 But I'm not worried because I only need less than one sticker per color.

 Here I am stickering and it took a long time to get these stickers on.

 So it's been a day and I thought I'd do something interesting and fun and that is to scramble

 I'm going to fast forward this because this video is already getting too long.

 As you can see it is busted and unfortunately the center broke off of the core and the other

 I bought two packages which came with enough pieces to make four of these puzzles.

 But three of the cores broke while I was trying to assemble them all.

 I was able to scramble it and I was getting very close to finishing the solve before it

 I kind of like the idea of having the world record smallest cube.

 Here's the elemental cube which looks really big next to the subatomic cube.

 I do appreciate it when you comment, like and do all the things you do.

 Hi, I'm Sean Carruthers and welcome to How Do I on Butterscotch.com.

 In this series, we're taking a look at how to set up your very own home network.

 In this episode specifically, we're taking a look at the wired aspect of your network.

 Now, if you're doing this for the first time and you have a new device like this,

 one from Cisco that we have, a new wireless home network router,

 So, if you have an internet connection coming in from the outside already,

 like a cable connection or a DSL connection, chances are you have it already connected

 directly from your computer into the modem that you have from your company,

 from your satellite provider, your cable provider, or your DSL provider.

 So, the first step in this process is to check out the back of your network router.

 Some of them are for the devices inside your house and one of them is for your internet connection.

 So, the first step is to locate the one for your internet connection.

 So, the first step in the process is typically, remove the one that comes from your internet router

 Obviously, that'll leave your computer disconnected from the network because it's not plugged in anymore.

 So, the next step in this process is to connect the cable up to one of the free ports

 Then, you'll want to connect the other end to the place on your computer

 Now, if it's cable internet you use to bring the internet into your house,

 Generally, it's as simple as swapping the cable from your machine to the router

 and then plugging the router back into the machine, and then you're done.

 If you have another connection, like DSL or satellite, that requires specific authentication,

 then what you'll probably want to do is you'll probably want to pull out the setup CD that came with the router.

 And this will allow you to run through the whole process and input that information in the correct place.

 Now, if you're using a wireless connection, there's a slightly different way to configure this whole process,

 Coming at you from Pellegrini Prime Meats in Stewart Manor, New York, where we're making

 So we're here with Baldo, and we're making the cut on New York strip steaks.

 My name is Baldo, I'm from Pellegrini Prime Meats in Stewart Manor.

 First of all, I would like to show you what a New York strip looks like one step before

 It is actually, this is the New York strip section right here, and this is a filet mignon.

 By doing this, now we're going to go over to the bandsaw, and we're going to remove

 So we have seen the New York strip with the bone right over here.

 This meat comes with the bone, and you can remove the bone yourself, or you can also

 And you'll leave a little fat just so the grill will sizzle up that fat.

 Some people will argue that point because everybody has a favorite, whether it's a

 Now over here, okay, this top back portion, this is the back portion.

 This back, top back portion, okay, is what they call the loin of beef.

 This here is where the piece of meat comes from, which is the New York strip.

 And then actually you remove the fillet and you make it into a New York strip.

 A simple onion like this, there's actually many ways to cut this piece of onion.

 Or if you use onion, let's say, for sauce or to saute this onion, to add it to your

 meat patties or meatloaf, you most probably will be a kind of fine diced onion.

 I'm going to show just two very simple techniques to cut this onion.

 Typically when you use onion for onion soup, you slice the onion.

 And most probably you use for sauce or use for burger or meatloaf.

 So quickly, when you have a piece of onion, most important, you peel the onion.

 So I hold onion, make sure they are very steady on the cutting board.

 Leave on the cutting board so you have a nice half peeled onion.

 If you look at the onion grain, this way, if you cut this way, it's against the onion.

 Because you cut this way, you won't get even sliced onion all the time.

 So when it's for the onion soup, normally you always slice around the grain.

 That means you hold the onion like this and then you have your knife and then you slice.

 And you can slice slow at a time or as you become, in the end, when the onion small piece

 Or some other people like to use a French knife, long French knife.

 But most common or most I feel comfortable is use a utility knife and just go like that.

 When you chop the onion, remember I was saying in the beginning, we cut the both ends off.

 But when you chop the onion, actually you don't cut the end off.

 So when you want to keep the end off, you just give a small gentle cut on the side.

 You break the opening so you can peel the onion very nicely and easily.

 The reason we leave this end piece intact, and I'm going to show you now again, when

 you slice the onion, you slice the onion first and then you're going to chop.

 So the whole onion, after I did all this slice, the onion is still a nice whole piece together.

 So it's whole still together, but there's lots of cuts already inside.

 And then you hold this onion nicely together and then do the same thing like I was doing

 These have been around for a long time and they're really super cute and fun to make.

 This was made with the Island Oasis DSP and the monogram is from Lovely Letters.

 I'm going to start with a different pattern of the Island Oasis DSP and it is 3 by 6.

 And then I'm going to open it up and I'm actually going to use my grid paper but you could also

 So I'm just going to measure the halfway point at the 3 inch end and mark it with a pen.

 Now I'm going to take my paper cutter and I'm going to score from that mark up to the

 crease on either side and then I'm going to fold it and do the same on the other side.

 So I'm just going to put that little dot right on the track and put where the fold is right

 Now the easiest way to assemble this, you can use your, see how it's going to be like

 that, you can use your Crop-It aisle, but I like to use a little bit thicker ribbon,

 And then close it up the way you want it and then you can open up the other side while

 you punch and you just want to go down far enough so that you'll be able to tie ribbon

 Now I'm going to make the monogram, so I'm going to take a piece of Whisper White cardstock

 And then I'll take a 1-3-1-1 punch and punch out a piece of Tempting Turquoise.

 Then I'll take a dimensional on the back so that it will pop up off of the project.

 If you'd like to find out more about that, you can visit my website, www.stampwithamy.com.

 And have you ever wanted to make authentic Mexican shredded beef that they serve in the

 First, we're going to start with a three to four pound chuck roast.

 And what you're going to want to do is just take your chef knife and remove as much as

 Sometimes you want to, or definitely want to leave some of it on because it does add

 And once you've removed most of the fat and the connective tissue, I like to cut it up

 Okay, after we've cut up the chuck roast, we're going to take a pan that's medium high,

 Okay, while the beef is searing, we're going to go ahead and make up the sauce.

 So I'm just going to grab my blender and it's really easy to do.

 Okay, we're going to start with a quarter cup of apple cider vinegar.

 Followed by four chipotle peppers with about a tablespoon of the adobo sauce.

 And in this one, I have a teaspoon of fresh cracked pepper and an eighth teaspoon of ground

 And the aroma from this sauce is going to be very strong with that chipotle in there.

 I like to use a screen to keep the grease from popping all over the place.

 Growing up in Southern California, Mexican food is one of my favorites.

 It comes apart super easy after it's been in here for five hours.

 And once we shred it all up, we'll let it go for about another hour.

 So whether you're going to do enchiladas, burritos, nachos, tacos,

 If you're going to do burritos, nachos, tacos, I'm going to do burritos.

 All right, personally, I like to keep my barbacoa burrito simple.

 So I just put a little bit of the beef down, some shredded cheddar cheese.

 And then I'm a sucker for sour cream when it comes to Mexican food.

 For instance, my daughter likes my cilantro lime rice in her burrito.

 If you're looking for a barbacoa recipe that's on the spicy side, this is your recipe.

 Of course, you could use regular water, but I prefer the fizziness.

 And optional, Step 6 is to add a little extra sugar to taste, depending on what you like.

 YouTube has deemed the video before this of me and my grandfather stealing lemons very popular,

 Hey, it's Rosie, and in this video, I'm going to show you how to make these

 These ribs are so easy to make, they're always tender, they're perfect, everyone

 garlic powder, onion powder, ground black pepper, seasoning salt, or salt-free

Once you season the meat to your preference, you're going to go to

 this video a thumbs up, I would really appreciate the love and support, so

 Followed by that barbecue sauce, you're going to fill the same bottle up with

 you're not a fan of liquid smoke, you can skip out, but I'm going to add a couple

 the Crock-Pot, be really careful because these are tender and the meat will slide

 off the bone, so be really patient when removing them out of the Crock-Pot.

 you want the exact measurements and you want to print out the recipe, come visit

 a mobile device, I will leave links down below in the description box.

 out this recipe, and when you do try it, take a picture, tag me on Instagram so I

 Now, after grilling several cuts of steak, we found that the well-marbled boneless strip

 And you'll notice that these are very, very thick, about one and a half inches thick to

 Now the fact that we're using such thick and big steaks is no accident.

 The bigger the steak, the longer it can stay on the grill and develop that beautiful crust

 Now, first though, the steaks need to be very dry on the surface.

 On the test kitchen, we found a great way to create a super-dried surface was to coat

 And this is a tablespoon of cornstarch, and we're also going to mix this with two tablespoons

 Now we're just going to take a few paper towels and blot away any moisture from these steaks.

 They're especially wet when they come right out of the package too.

 All right, so now we want to put these steaks on a wire rack set over a rimmed baking sheet.

 And now, we're going to rub that cornstarch and salt mixture all over the steaks.

 And you want to make sure that it's well covered and that you get all sides.

 Now we're going to put this tray right into the freezer until the steaks are pretty firm.

 Now as the steaks sit in the freezer, well, of course, they're going to get colder.

 But this will mean that the steaks can sit on the grill longer and get a better charred

 And also, we put the steaks on a rack so that they can sit above the tray.

 That's because the salt is going to pull out some of the juices from the meat.

 And we don't want the meat to sit right in that juice and get soggy.

 So in the meantime, I'll go put this in the freezer and then we can head outside.

 Hey guys, so today's video is all about bubble bars and how to get the most use out of them

 because luscious bubble bars are pretty pricey and you don't want to be wasting any of it

 and you want to get as many baths out of one of them as possible.

 Now there's a couple videos on YouTube telling you how to get the most use out of them but

 I've seen some similar but not exactly like I do and my method I really like.

 I get a full tub of bubbles every time and I only have to use very very small amounts.

 This is a comforter bubble bar and most people say they can get about 4 uses out of this.

 So anyway, this is about the size of the chunk that I would use of the comforter.

 And basically what I do is I cut it down twice and then across twice and that will give me

 But these are very thick squares because the comforter is like really thick.

 Okay, so that is how I cut it and then these I would just cut a little sliver off into

 And that's basically what I did with this one is I just cut a little sliver off very

 And then I'm going to show you what I do once I have my little square.

 So now we're in my bathroom and the way that Lush usually tells you how to use a bubble

 bar is to take it like this and just like squeeze it and crumble it under running water.

 That method is okay but it's really wasteful so you end up having to use way more of your

 Because when you crumble it, a bunch of little pieces fall under the water once your tub

 They go under the water and they just dissolve as opposed to getting hit by the running water

 Some people dig under the water and they swish it around to try and get the crumbs on the

 bottom to form bubbles and even then you're not getting as many as you should.

 And I don't want to sit there for 10 minutes while my tub is running and manipulate the

 So with my method, I just take a nylon or like a nylon thing and I put my bubble bar

 Okay so now my bubble bar is in my nylon whole and now I'm just going to go tie this to my

 I just tie my, I just hook mine in this crease for my water on thing.

 Some people have the drain plug on here and you can tie it on there and if not, you can

 always put the bubble bar in the middle of the nylon and then take the ends and just

 And yeah, so just find a way to hang it and you want to hang it like as closely to where

 So I'm just going to hang mine real quick and I'll be right back.

 Okay so now I have my nylon hanging and it's right above the water spout.

 And it fell off so I'm just going to put it right back in front.

 By using this method, the water runs over every part of the bubble bar and it all comes

 Sometimes you're just going to hold it there but if you tie it a different way it'll probably

 So I'm going to let that run and then, look how many bubbles we have already.

 I'm going to let that run and then I'm going to come back and show you the end result.

 So the bubble bar is almost halfway done now, there's still a lot left and I already almost

 Okay guys, so there you have it, a nice full tub of bubbles and that was just using this

 So there you go, you have a full tub of bubbles and you didn't have to waste any product and

 So now you can get 9 uses out of your Comforter Bubble Bars which comes to around $1 per bath

 since the Comforters are about $9 and you can get as many uses out of all your bubble

 So I hope you enjoyed this video and I hope you'll try out this method and save yourself

 Hi, I'm Tom Robbins and today I'm going to demonstrate how to install the Easy Wall Ruff.

 The Easy Wall Ruff are the valves that will be used for all backsplash faucets.

 The Easy Wall Ruff is on 7 inch centers, not 8 inch centers, and it mounts in a typical

 You'll probably notice in your own bathroom that there's a situation very similar to this.

 There's a hot and a cold valve already on the wall and there's a drain ready for the

 The Easy Wall Ruff hooks up to exactly the same system, so there's no changing that needs

 The difference that we'll be using today is in the cabinet itself.

 You'll notice that the cabinet has a backsplash that has been hollowed out or has created

 enough space in the back to accept the depth of the valve ruff.

 Holes have been pre-drilled into the top of the cabinet so that the hoses can drop down

 through the top and be ready to install into your bathroom wall.

 The valve ruff itself is then put into the holes that have been pre-drilled into the

 We turn the cabinet around and the one single nut is then installed onto the valve ruff.

 We move the cabinet back against the wall and you'll notice inside that the hoses drop

 We have now installed the valve ruff, the Easy Wall Ruff, into the backsplash of the

 cabinet and now we're ready to install the faucet onto the valves.

 I preheat my crock pot the same way I do my oven so I don't have to wait for things to

 can do one or two cans of cream of celery or cream of mushroom.

 This is not a healthy recipe so to speak but it's just a way to get that cream sauce without

 working in the kitchen you want to make sure that you work in a space that is not going

 to be touched by kids when you have something bloody like this.

So we'll have to make sure that we sanitize that very well when we're done here

 before our kiddos start to sniff around and see what's going on.

 I put it in we're going to do about a teaspoon of the minced garlic.

 powder do about a quarter teaspoon of garlic powder if that's all you have.

Now your beef is going to add some juices too but this is not a recipe that we want

 your day while your stroganoff cooks and we'll see you in about four to six hours.

 to go ahead and add your noodles for another hour, hour and a half.

So I'm going to break this up now and go ahead and add my noodles to soak this sauce

 up and then that way when I add the sour cream it'll just add a nice little creamy texture

Our noodles are par done so that's why we need to cook it a little

30 to 40 minutes we're going to add the sour cream and mix it up.

It may not look grand right there but I'm telling you it is a feast to

Going to do a little French bread and some green beans and we are done.

 slash bag holder as well as don't forget to check out our blog at todaysliving.net.

 You make it the night before and then bake it off first thing in the morning.

 So the first thing we need to do is get some water between 100 and 110 degrees and then

 we want to measure off a quarter of a cup of that and put it into a small bowl.

 Then I'm going to get some active dry yeast and I want to get three teaspoons.

 Now if you have a jar of yeast just measure out the three teaspoons or it's about one

 And what I'm going to do is put that yeast in that warm water and kind of stir it to

 Now over at the mixer I'm going to put four cups of flour in the bowl.

 Now you can use regular flour or bread flour, whatever you like.

 And then I'm going to lower the mixer and just let that kind of mix up together a bit.

 And then you're going to want to get your yeast that you've dissolved.

 Now when you first put the water in like this it's not going to look like much.

 And so it's just going to more and more as it mixes together start to pull that dough

 Now after a couple of minutes we are starting to see it's pulling together some.

 So we just need to be patient and let the mixer run and do its thing.

 We've got our dough and I'm just going to get a small board and I'm going to lightly

 And then I'm going to take my dough and you'll see all that flour has been kneaded into it.

 And then I'm going to use my rolling pin and I'm going to roll this out.

 Now I find that when I roll this out to about 16 by 12 that really is the perfect thickness

 Now once the dough is rolled out we're going to go ahead and start filling it.

 Now the cheese I like to use for this bread is a fontina and it has that red wax coating

 And I just want to go ahead and grate about two cups of cheese.

 Now I'm using a Black Forest ham and as you'll notice what I'm doing is I'm going right down

 the center of the dough and I'm layering the ham slices from one end to the other.

 And I'm going to take all of that fontina cheese and I'm just going to lay that on top

 Now I like to get some sun-dried tomatoes and the kind I get are julienned and they're

 And basically what I do is I just get the biggest leaves that I can find and I lay them

 But you just want a nice even layer of basil all the way across the top.

 Now I've pre-boiled eight eggs to make them hard-boiled and now I'm just going to take

 them, I've already peeled them and everything, and I'm going to go ahead and I'm going to

 Now because we have that bed of cheese and the ham and everything, they're going to lay

 pretty nicely but you just lay them right together all the way across.

 Now I'm just going to get some olive oil and I'm just going to do a light drizzle all the

 way across the eggs just to give them a little bit of moisture.

 And then just do a little sprinkling of kosher salt and then get your pepper mill and just

 So take the long end closest to you, flip it over the eggs, and then you're basically

 just going to kind of take the other end, pull it over the top.

 Once you get the eggs covered up, then you want to sort of flip it around so the seam

 side is down and then you take those ends and you just kind of scrunch them down and

 That way the filling stays nice and tight and I just kind of, I want it to be about

 Now to get ready to bake, you do need a rimmed baking sheet and a piece of parchment and

 then get the bread, kind of pinch that bottom seam up just one last time and then you can

 Now you can leave it in a log, but a lot of times what I do is I like to bend it in sort

 So I just kind of bend it around a little bit and making sure all the seams are nice

 Now it's time to cover it with some plastic wrap and it's just going to go in the refrigerator

 overnight and this does a really nice slow rise which gives the bread a lot of interesting

 Now once morning comes I take the plastic off and you can see it's risen nicely and

 I let it sit out on the counter for about 30 minutes and then after 30 minutes it's

 kind of come to temperature a little bit, I pop it in a 400 degree oven and I bake it

 And this is what it's going to look like after 30 minutes, nice and golden brown like

 Now it's really important that you use that baking sheet because sometimes some of the

 cheese oozes out and that's not a big deal, we just let it sit there, oh for just a couple

 of minutes to let it cool and then I transfer it over to a cutting board and I start slicing

 Now make sure you use a serrated knife and once you cut into this bread look what's inside,

 egg, ham, tomato, basil, cheese, it's everything you need for breakfast and in one bread, it's

 Now if you want to give it a go I've got the recipe at the website for you and of course

 Leave them in for 6 minutes to crisp up and then they'll be done.

 I showed you how to make those absolutely scrumptious white chocolate and cherry cookies.

 muesli, the nut and fruit mix, the coconut, the oil, the banana, the peanut butter, and

Then all you need to do is give that a good mix together until all

 of this recipe I'm topping them with a slice of banana, a sprinkling of sugar, and the other half

 I'm just leaving plain but adding on a sprinkle of sugar as well.

Made ahead of time they're perfect for a quick snack so I really hope you give them a go.

 Thanks again for joining me, have a fantastic weekend and I'll see you all next time on

 I'm going to show you kind of more of a rocking kind of technique, a rock solo technique that's

 And it's really cool to incorporate in your solos because it's a double note kind of thing.

 So it's always kind of hip to be able to incorporate like double stops, like two note little things

 So what we're going to do is we're just going to focus on the E minor pentatonic scale.

 What we're going to do this time is we're going to just kind of look at the scale a

 So we're going to start all the way up at the 12th fret right here.

 And we're just with one finger just going to follow some of the little spots.

 So right off the bat, that's actually cool to know when you're rocking in E, you know,

 So what we do though is we're just going to be playing the note of what we covered on

 So if we're at the 12th fret right here, what I'm going to do is I'm going to take my ring

 finger, I'm going to put it up to the 15th fret of the B. Right there.

 And I've got my index on the 12th fret of the high E. Then I'm going to use my middle

 So it's on the 14th fret of the B. And that's just so I can use both strings to bend it

 I've seen, you know, people have difficulty with the bending in this particular lick,

 But one of the tips for bending is if, you know, sometimes people, you know, when they're

 If you start with your fingers bent like this on the string, then when you go to, you know,

 you have a curve, then when you go to bend the actual string, you straighten your fingers

 out and you have all that leverage of these two fingers right here.

 Now the trick is to keep your index finger on the 12th fret right here of the high E

 And you play them both at the same time and you get that growl kind of rock sound.

 So what's happening is you're actually bending this note up to the pitch of this note, but

 And then what you can do is if you learn that, then you can move it by just using your

 index finger as the marker point on those numbers that we covered, like 12 to 10 or

 To get the idea how you can incorporate some of those concepts when you're soloing.

 I mean, there's so much value in learning the pentatonic or the blues scale on one string.

 And then another example is this little lesson I just taught you just now.

 I'll put the links in the information window of the different soloing DVDs I have, which

Today I'm going to talk about the balance point of the bow and about letting

 the instrument support some of the weight of the bow so that your hand, your right hand,

 can stay relaxed and about relaxing the fingers, okay, especially when you lift the bow off the

 the point in the bow where the bow wants to balance on your finger.

If I show you that this side is very short, this side is very long, and then set it

 on my finger right at the balance point, it will stay in one place.

 the length of the stick at this end versus the length of the stick at this end.

 the weight, the winding, the frog, the metal on the adjusting screw.

Now we work so hard to produce a large sound and there's always the

 danger that you're going to be squeezing and pressing with your bow hand.

 you to do is get your bow hand, okay, set your bow in the balance point and totally release the

Apply the amount of needed weight to produce a nice healthy tone, but still you're

You control how much volume or weight you're going to apply and no more.

 you've gotten to the point where you need it to be for the volume or sound you want to produce,

 First thing you want to apply is a good eyeshadow primer to make sure your eyeshadows last all day without creasing.

 Today I'm using my Semisweet Chocolate Bar Palette and the first color I'm using is called Pudding.

 Now taking Truffles with a fluffy blending brush, I will blend the eyeshadow slightly bringing it up higher.

 Now with Coconut Cream, I will continue the blending process to make sure I have no harsh lines.

 Now using this Urban Decay eyeliner, I will tightline my eyes and also since this is a smoky eye, I will use this same pencil to create a slight winged out look.

 I know it's actually called Puddin' but I just feel weird saying Puddin' so I'm just going to say Pudding.

 Here I'm using MAC's Nylon to go in and just slightly highlight my inner corners of the eyes to make them brighter.

I basically have zero eyelashes so adding falsies makes the look more complete.

 And before applying my lipstick, I'm just slightly lining my lips.

 For this fun look, I decided to go bold and pick Candy Yum Yum for the lipstick.

 If you don't have Candy Yum Yum, I found a couple closed dupes for you.

 I know some people say that if you're doing a bold lip, do neutral eyes.

 Do what you want, love what you do, and don't let anyone tell you otherwise.

 Hey kids, we're making fettuccine alfredo and let me try to get you in a little bit

 There's action on the stove here because I decided to make chicken fettuccine alfredo

 What we're going to do is we're going to melt, I'm melting it very slowly, 1 fourth cup of

 Once that's melted we're going to go ahead and we're going to add our heavy cream and

 I'm going to insert here how to make heavy cream if you don't have it available.

 Just in case you don't have heavy cream available, here's a substitute, 1 tablespoon of flour

 to 2 thirds cup of, if you're using low fat milk then 2 thirds cup of low fat milk with

 If you're not using low fat milk, you're using whole milk then you don't have to add the

 Go ahead and mix it up, melt 1 third cup of unsalted butter and add it to this.

 Several people said that this was a very adequate substitute and I just decided on the spur

 of the moment to make the alfredo so I don't have any heavy cream.

 So we're going to mix this up and we're going to let this sit on the side for a little bit

 I have the fettuccine cooking, I'm also going to add in chicken so I have the chicken cooking.

 Okay that is nice and melted so what we're going to do here is we're going to add in

 Okay that came to a boil really quickly actually and it's still at medium heat so we're going

 We're going to lower it down for five minutes so we'll be back.

 This recipe comes from a book, I can't fit it in, a book that one of my friends sent me,

 Kazi K. Kim sent me probably two, maybe three years ago and she keeps bugging me,

 And I knew at some point I would, it's just we really usually don't have a whole lot of pasta.

 But for some reason lately with that pasta book and that thrift store book I've been making a lot lately

 so I've been feeling guilty so I dug it out and there are actually several pages that are bookmarked

 Okay at this point you're going to add in freshly grated parmesan cheese, two thirds cups,

 Today I'm going to show you how I use hair chalk to colour my hair.

 Now I've always loved having coloured hair, in the past I've had peach hair and blue hair

 and most recently I've started using hair chalks because it's a really cool way to mix

 So at the moment I've been using these ones called Vixen which my best friend gave me

 for Christmas but in the past I've also used Kevin Murphy's Colour Bugs and therefore it's

 really well as well so I'll leave all the details for this product and for Kevin Murphy's

 First off if you are going to colour your hair I would definitely recommend using the

 bathroom because you do need to use a tab and it's also just better so no mess goes

 everywhere but my bathroom doesn't have the best of lights so I've just made a bit of

 I would also recommend wearing an old t-shirt or something that you don't mind getting a

 little bit dirty because sometimes the hair colour can run or stick to your clothing.

 So first things first, if you're going to use hair chalk it works much better if you

 As I mentioned I'm using Vixen Hair Graffiti Hair Chalk and I've used them before so the

 packet's a little bit dirty but they come in a whole bunch of colours like this and

 I'm pretty sure they also have a fluorescent colour pack so if you want floral hair you

 So now I'm going to use a green, a blue and a purple because I've used these three colours

 before when I've hair chalked my hair and it looked really nice so I'm going to do that

 The next stage is pretty easy, all you need to do is apply the hair chalk to your hair

 so choose your colour, which I've got the blue to start off with, run under the tap

 so it gets some water on it and then just apply it to your hair.

 I choose to do little strands at a time and then just move downwards and as you can see

 This is the really fun part, you just get to apply the hair chalk to your hair doing

 I'm obviously just doing the ends of my hair but you can do the full thing if you'd like.

 Okay so once you're happy with the amount of chalk that's in your hair, the next stage

 Now I personally use a hair dryer but they do recommend you can also use a hair straightener.

 Cool so that is my hair chalk tutorial, please give it a thumbs up if you liked this video

 and if you have any questions or comments leave them for me in the down bar below.

 The blues is not only a very cool thing to play all by itself and to do some real nice

 blues progressions, but the blues is also the basis for most rock songs and rock bands

 Whether it's ACDC or Led Zeppelin or Aerosmith, a lot of the classic rock bands, they're really

 And of course on the blues side, we've got more of standard blues stuff like Muddy Waters

King to a little bit more Texas guitar-centric blues like Stevie Ray Vaughan.

 So one thing all of those people have in common is the 12-bar blues progression.

 We're going to talk a little bit about instead of just playing one note at a time, we're

 going to be playing two notes at a time and moving your fingers.

 A bar is just a measure, and a measure is basically four beats.

 So there are 12 of those in this progression, and then it turns around and goes back to

 Now, what we're working on with this is actually adding an extra note or an extra string to

 So instead of playing one note, we're actually holding down our fifth string at the second

 So when I strum those two strings, you hear I'm playing both, this one and this one, but

 So you might have to practice that a little bit to where you just stop right there.

 Just practice doing that, stopping right there, don't go any farther.

 Now we're going to play it twice with my first finger on the second fret on the fifth string.

 And then I use my third finger to go up here to the fifth string at the fourth fret.

 One pass through there, then I'm going to go move that exact same thing over to the

 So now I'm strumming through my fifth string and my fourth string.

 The first one's my E pattern based off my E. Then I'm going to go back two times through

 this, two times through the A, back to the E. Now we're going to do something a little

 bit different in a lesson we're going to do coming up, which is really a power chord,

 which has got my first finger on the same spot, second fret on the fifth string, and

 then my third finger, instead of being on the fifth string, I move it over to the fourth

 So once again you may have a little trouble playing and not hitting extra strings down

 And when you're fretting things down here with your left hand, just keep that smooth.

 Because once you get that down, then we can add a lot of other cool things.

 So always start simple and then gradually you can throw some other things in there and

 We are Adam and Joanne from inspiredtaste.net and welcome to our kitchen.

 Before making our salted caramels, we always make sure we have our equipment ready and

 Then we are going to cut a piece of parchment paper, lightly oil that and then insert it

 Which makes our lives a lot easier when we want to unmold the caramels when we are done.

 Ok next for the ingredients, we need to measure a half of a cup of heavy whipping cream.

 Then grab one stick of butter, which is also a half cup and cut that into eight equally

 Add that to a bowl, then add the cream and place it into the microwave.

 Then cook for about a minute until the butter has melted and the cream is hot.

 Set that aside, then measure out a quarter cup of light corn syrup and one cup of granulated

 Ok now grab a small saucepan, add three tablespoons of water to the saucepan.

 Then grab the corn syrup that you just measured out and add that to the saucepan.

 Next for the sugar, add it but try your best not to splatter the sugar up the sides of

 Then just use a spoon or spatula to stir the sugar into the water and corn syrup.

 Now once it's at a boil we want to make sure that there aren't any sugar crystals stuck

 to the sides of the pan, since this can cause something called crystallization, which can

 You'll want to cook the sugar until it reaches 320 degrees Fahrenheit.

 At this temperature the sugar will take on a light amber color.

 Now we're ready to add the butter and cream mixture from before.

 Add it in small batches, then use the candy thermometer to stir it into the sugar mixture.

 As you do this, the caramel will bubble violently, so you really want to do this slowly and carefully

 Now place the candy thermometer back on the side of the pan and cook the caramel until

 If you want harder caramels, cook to about 245 degrees Fahrenheit.

 Now pour the caramel into your prepared loaf pan and let it sit for about 15 to 20 minutes.

 While you wait, it's best to clean your pot and candy thermometer.

 Just fill the pot with water, place the candy thermometer into the water and bring the water

 This will melt away all the caramel and make cleanup really easy.

 After about 3 1⁄2 to 4 hours, you'll find that the caramel has set and we can cut it.

 Just give it a chop and add to a microwave safe bowl along with 2 tablespoons of butter.

 The chocolate won't be melted yet, so you'll have to add it in for another 45 seconds or so.

 Again, stir and continue to do this until the chocolate has melted.

 Now grab the third cup of chocolate from earlier and stir that in.

 Then use two forks to pick them up out of the chocolate and then place them onto either

So, jump rings are small circles of wire and they come in actually

 I thought I'd use a larger jump ring because it is easier to see the opening and closing

So, this is a very simple technique but the thing to keep in mind is that you

 want your circle to close again neatly the same way that it looked before you used it

So, to do that, instead of opening out, which damages the circle,

 you want to open it without making a big U shape out of that neat, smooth circle.

 to do that, grip on either side of the small opening in the wire circle with pliers on

 either side and carefully but just smoothly just open it by rotating your hands away in

 opposite directions from each other, creating this opening space in the jump ring that's

 perfect for adding a chain to a clasp or adding a charm on a chain as a pendant.

 to close it, you reverse this action but go past the original point of closure.

 catch and then bring it forward again and then maybe one more time until it's really

Sometimes they aren't as easy to put back in the first time so just

It's not worth doing a second and third and fourth and fifth attempt.

 So with these jump rings, we can do, as an example, we can add a clasp to a chain.

 for this one, we use a smaller series of jump rings because it's such a delicate chain

You just kind of adapt your jump ring to the project depending on

 Then slip the last link of a chain on the same way and then you use your pliers to make

 second half, you do the same technique and just grip it on either side of the opening

Slip your clasp ring on and then the last link of the chain just

 as you did the first time and now using your pliers to hold either side.

 the last step, you can use a jump ring to add a pendant charm to this chain you've

 charm to make a pendant, just slip it right on to the chain the same way that you attached

 the clasp, but slipping it on so it hangs freely instead of through a link.

 that you attached, and all three of these steps were made with the same exact jump ring

For the rest of my jewelry technique videos, you can go to my book website, which

 We're going to use the AmeriQ so that we can cook to an internal temperature of the meat.

 We want to take it to medium rare and then we'll want to hold it for a while.

 This roast is about a 10 pound roast and we really don't need to do any trimming on

 All we want to do is we're going to take some coarse ground sea salt, some coarse ground

 And I've taken the leaves and pulled all the leaves off the twigs of the rosemary and mixed

 it with, I had about four bunches of rosemary and I've mixed that with two tablespoons of

 kosher or the sea salt and two tablespoons of the black pepper.

 So we're just going to take that mixture and rub that on the roast.

 The rosemary doesn't like to stick on there so you kind of have to pat it down.

 While we're getting the roast ready, we went ahead and preheated the smoker.

 With prime ribs it's one of the few items I like to preheat the smoker with.

 But we went ahead and preheated the smoker and so we'll go put the prime rib in the smoker.

 We're going to cook it at 250 degrees to an internal temperature of 135 degrees.

 We're going to use the twigs of the rosemary that we pulled the leaves off of for our smoke.

 So we're looking at about two hours to cook the roast and then let it hold for at least

 We're now going to insert the meat probe by placing the meat probe through the vent hole.

 And then we just want to kind of get to the middle of the piece of meat.

 From there we're going to press the start button and the unit is now cooking and our

 It took right at two hours and 20 minutes for it to reach 135 degree internal temperature.

 The oven then went into hold which drops the temperature down to 140 degrees.

 At that the temperature of the roast went ahead and rose to about 142 degrees internal

 You'll see that the outer pieces are a little doner and as you get towards the middle it

 This makes for a great prime rib steak or you can also slice it real thin and make French

 Cooking with a meat probe in the AmeriQ makes it really easy if you don't like your prime

 You can easily adjust your probe temperature up to 150 degrees to do medium or 160 to do

 medium well or if you really like it well done you can go all the way up to 170 degrees.

 You can set the probe temperature as any of those so it automatically cuts itself to hold

 If you'd like more information about Cook Shack give us a call at 1-800-423-0698 or

 summer and although I think it would be cute to wear as an accessory that peeks out as

 part of dance costume, they are mostly held up by elastic that sits on your thigh and

 for this summer with a waist chain belt that goes around your belly.

 chain, it's not going to fall off and adds a little more shine around your belly too.

 used two different sizes but any size would work as long as they are large enough to hold

 the chains around your belly starting from above your thigh at the skirt waistline.

Then add a smaller jump ring at the other end and place the larger

 And finally, add a jump ring to the other end of the 5cm or 2 inch long piece and at

 so I took the charms off the earring and added it to the last jump ring.

 Now cut elastic into a 12cm or 5 inch long piece and wrap one end around the jump ring

 of the waist chain and the other end around the jump ring of the thigh chain.

The elastic makes it more comfortable to wear when you're dancing.

So to wear it, first slip it on through your leg and wrap the belt around

 and if you make your own, please share your creation on Sparkly Belly's Facebook page.

 And don't forget to sign up for the Sparkly Belly newsletter to get updates and freebies

 I'm the director of the drum department here at Musicians Institute.

 And it's the most effective of all the rudiments in my opinion, because it can be used on the

 So you can get it off the snare drum or the pad as a rudiment and get it to the drum set.

 So the combinations you saw there were different combinations of the single paradiddle.

 Now you want to memorize those positions first so you don't have to think about it.

 When you do that, you want to make sure that all the notes sound the same.

 And even as the speed increases, you want to make sure that evenness stays in there.

 The first accent we're going to take a look at is the downbeat accent.

 So you're going to accent the very first note of each paradiddle.

 In this case, it's going to be right left right right left right left left.

 Now that's the easiest of the accents because it falls on the downbeat.

 And the second accent of the paradiddle falls, of course, on the second note.

 So before we had this, right left right right left right left left.

 Or one and two and three and four and one and two and three and four and.

 Now we're going to move that accent over to the second note of the paradiddle, which will

 Now as you play this, you want to put on a metronome or do something to keep time so

 you can still feel that downbeat when that accent's playing on the ands.

 One and two and three and four and one and two and three and four and one and two and

 Now if you mix that with the first paradiddle, you'll start to hear how that sound changes

 One two three four one two three four one two three four one two three four one.

 Now of course we're going to go to the third note of the paradiddle, which falls on beat

 You keep all the notes at the same level except the accented note.

 Right, left, right, right, left, right, left, left, right, left, right, right.

 As the speed comes up, you start to see that, how that grows on itself.

 So now if you put the first three together, accent on one, the accent on the second note

 of the paradiddle, and the accent on the third note of the paradiddle, it sounds like this.

 Of course there's four positions of the paradiddle, and we're on the fourth.

 So it'll be one, and, two, and, three, and, four, and one, and, two, and, three, and,

 And right, left, right, right, left, right, left, left, right, left, right, right, left,

 Now I'll play this again in a series of all four notes, or I'm sorry, all four positions

 Now when you go to practice these, the important thing is to make sure when you're first doing

 them that they sound great without the accents, until the point where they're very comfortable,

 When one's comfortable, and you know that feels good, then go to the second one.

 These are very, very effective on the drum set, and if you come visit us here at PIT,

 is delighted to provide you with a cooking demonstration of how to cook the

 number eight of the World's 50 Most Delicious Foods, which is Tom Yum Goong

 head of the Home Economics Department of the Rajapaksa Sundusit University,

 Assistant Professor Ekapol Ornompan, or Chef Jim, as he likes to be called.

 Tom Yum Goong is considered to be a Thai dish that has been famous for a long time.

 It is ranked number one in three of the world's most popular soups.

 The first reason is the taste that is popular with people all over the world.

 I have just asked Chef Jim why he feels that Tom Yum Goong has become the symbol

 that it is because of the ingredients that are used, which makes the fragrance

 the body, and of course the river prawns, the Thai river prawns, which are fresh

 Chef Jim has instructed that before you make your Tom Yum Goong, you have to get

 some big prawns like these and then you peel off its shell and then boil the shell

 in boiling water for about 5 minutes until the shell becomes fragrant.

 So after you have your shrimp stock, you crush the shallots and the coriander seeds

 in a stone mortar and pestle and then you put in the sliced lemongrass and lime leaves

 So Chef Jim has instructed that once you put your herbs into the pot, you add in some mushrooms.

 And once the mushroom is nice and fragrant and cooked, we add in all the prawns.

 And then you let all of that cook for about 5 minutes or so and then you turn off the heat.

 and then you put in some fish sauce to start off the seasoning.

 And then we finish the seasoning with the fresh fat from the prawns' head.

 So once you've stirred all the seasoning in together, it is ready to serve.

 And once it's in the bowl, you finish everything off with putting in some chilli.

 How much you put in is really how you can handle the spicy taste.

 If ever you want to taste the real full flavour, please visit and make Thailand your number one destination.

 Basically what it has is 1 third cup of water, which I've already added, and 1 third cup of orange juice.

 It also requires a half a cup of plain or vanilla yogurt, which I have here.

I think the recipe required some of that to be added as optional.

 I probably could have added some more strawberries since I ran out.

 I didn't have quite a cup of frozen strawberries, but it should be good enough.

 Hey guys, okay, I'm gonna just show you real quick how to do a fun little braid accent

 in your hair with your own hair or with an extension if you have one.

 All you'll need is really either a bobby pin or this is like a bobby pin flower.

 So if you don't have one of these, you can just use a bobby pin.

 I think like a decorative bobby pin is kind of cute, but you can always just use a bobby

 And then if you don't have long hair and it doesn't seem to work out for you, then I would

 And I just got this little clippy, snap clippy at Sally's for super cheap.

 And then what you're going to do is take, come behind your ear and take a good chunk

 So probably like that or else use your extension and clip the clip back there.

 And then either take your bobby pin, bobby pin, or your little pretty bobby pin and just

 There's nothing better than a lazy Sunday morning followed by a delicious gourmet brunch,

 Well, cookbook author Nigella Lawson, host of the Style Network's Forever Summer with

 Nigella is here with hotcakes and some other recipes you can whip up this weekend.

 Well, tell us, first of all, I mean, when we talk about a leisurely weekend brunch,

 So they're like pancakes, but they have a sort of flavor of cheesecake, which is a great

 If you just stir those together, you don't have to be any too violent with it.

 And in this day of course, high protein, low carb diets, this with the ricotta in here

 There's no reason for that since there are more ingredients, but I think it means you

 Now, this is a special fruit salad because you add ginger and mint.

 Be surprised how much aroma you get just from a small amount of mint.

 Hey guys, so as you guys can see by the title today, we're going to be talking about foundation and how I pretty much get a matte

 Flawless foundation finish this is going to be for those of you guys that want that flawless medium to full coverage foundation routine

 This is going to show you guys how to erase that cancel it out cancel hyper hyperpigmentation

 I like to go in and I like to spray myself and sometimes and quite a bit for a while there

 I was really only using the ud setting makeup setting spray, but lately I've been using the photo finish primer water

 I'll let you guys make sure you you have something whether you want to set your face before you start your makeup

 This is actually one that is the b6 spray what I did was I actually

 I keep it in my purse and then throughout the day if I get hot or whatever or I just need to like fix me

 But as far as primers go I want to give you guys two primers that are

 One on the higher end one on the affordable side the first one that I really really love is the stay matte primer and this

 Don't do it as far as the higher end you guys have probably seen this before on YouTube, and it's not going to be anything new

 You guys are probably gonna roll your eyes, but it's the makeup forever

 It's something worth investing in especially if you guys are oily I would highly recommend it

 And you don't know what to use it for it's to color correct redness

 And that's what I use to color correct any active blemishes any scarring

 And if you have rosacea or any redness right along your like nostrils right here like I do or this will actually cancel it out

 So the foundation that I'm gonna go in with today is going to be the Revlon colorstay foundation

 This one is in 370 toast so the first thing I'm doing do is I'm gonna pop this right onto the back of my hand

 And I then take it and I start dabbing it on my face the brush that I'm going to be using is the Sigma angled

 And I'm just going to constantly pack it on and I'm not going above my cheekbone area

 I'm not going anywhere where I'm going to put concealer because you're not gonna want to put foundation

 right under your eyes if you are going to conceal because what that's gonna do is it's going to end up creasing because you have

 Too much product under your eyes all the way around my temple and right around my forehead area

 This is where I do buff in and the reason that I buff in you don't have to if you have problem if you got

 Problematic skin there then continue on and pat it, but I buff it in this is the area around my head

 That has the least amount of issues, so we really don't want to add too much foundation to it another important thing is if you are

 Self-tanner like me or you are naturally lighter in your face than you are on your neck

 You're going to want to make sure that you blend this downward onto your neck

 If it means that you take it all the way down your neck then do it

 Around your neck and everybody can see it the other problem area that you want to make sure you get to is

 Right around your hairline if you guys will notice I kind of top my hair and pull it back

 And I really really brush that I really get that brush right in there

 So the next thing I'm going to do is I'm going to go in and I'm going to conceal

 The one that I find that I really do like the most and it works really well for me is the Mac

 So what you guys are going to see me do is I'm going to go in and I'm going to start spot treating my face

 With a little bit of coverage all I do is I take that same foundation brush, and I gently start patting it

 So making sure just make sure that your concealer isn't much lighter because if it is I've seen this before

 But if you're using the same concealer that you used to highlight you're not doing any justice

 So it's very important to not use a concealer that you're going to use to highlight your face as well as conceal

 So I'm not going to spend too much time on my highlighting routine just because

 I've got requests for it quite a bit, and I want to get that out for you guys

 But I really wanted to get an updated foundation routine first because a lot of things have changed

 Typically what I do is I like to let my foundation settle for about a minute or two

 Then what we're going to do is we're going to go in and start setting everything

 Very important to set your foundation and set your under eye concealer.

 And somebody who's oily I do highly highly recommend setting your foundation

 If you are needing that extra coverage you can go in with a powder foundation like I'm going to do

 Mineralized skin finish alright you guys so that is my foundation routine

 It is going to be a little bit more in depth than I think my very first one was

 But I wanted to give you guys the tips and tricks that I've learned so far and the things that have been really

 Working for me if you guys have any questions about anything feel free to ask me down below

 And I'd be more than happy to answer them you guys so much for watching if you guys remember to hit that subscribe button down

 Below that way you guys can stay up to date with all the videos that I post I do tend to post

 But I'm finding it very difficult to do so with two kids at home now that it's summer

 Oh, so anyways besides that let me know what you guys think I hope to see you guys on my next video

 Remember to give this a thumbs up if you guys learned anything, and I hope to see you guys all soon.

This is about the lowest you can get in cost for an espresso maker,

 It's got the larger portafilter, the removable stainless steel inside.

How you use it is you just fill up the portafilter, whether it's for two or four.

The top has a really good seal and a pressure release in case it ever

 and come back five minutes later because when it gets towards the end it starts getting

 really nice because once you take this pitcher off it will probably drip a little bit.

 recommend it if you're wanting to get into some cappuccino type drinks.

 out Jeff's reviews for the full review and like me on Facebook.

 Hello there guys, so sorry I haven't, first of all I just want to say sorry that I haven't

 done a video in a while, recently got a job so that's taken pretty much all of my time

 that I usually did to do videos, but I'm determined to do at least one video a weekend now, and

 ago and I decided to go and get this one, this is the HP Deskjet 3050, obviously HP,

 and so I thought I'd do a quick unboxing for you, as you can see it's not actually been

 opened yet, and even though it has a sell tip on saying bundle offer, it wasn't a bundle

 cartridges, that is the colour one, I'm guessing this is the black, yep, we've got another

 ink cartridge there, I think that's another colour that, or is that the colour?

 what you had there was all the instructions and what not, and I've come with all the fricking

 both which I won't even probably read, I'll just probably hook up the printer and there

So just trying to figure out how to take the blue bloody tape off.

There you have it, there it has to keep the, so there you go, that's the

 HP 3050 there, as I say it's a wireless printer, it's obviously got the scanner at the top

 there, it's a rear loading printer, not very keen on rear loaders but yeah, it'll do the

 bad unboxing of this printer, as I say I got this from Argos in my local town at 50 quid,

 bottle lying down which is quite good, maybe a little bit longer than that.

 I might do a video just to show the quality of print but I don't know how that's going

 got your two, your USB port and your power lead port, obviously it's wireless so I don't

 know whether I'll have it plugged in to the computer or not, but there you go.

 my previous one about 10 years ago cost me, I think it was 100, so yeah.

 You all know Halloween is just as important for adults as it is for kids, so we're going

 So what we're doing is a jello shot and a syringe so it looks nice and creepy.

 Syringes, we got them at Walmart or you can get them at any pharmacy.

 We picked raspberry jello and we picked red jello because it's creepier.

 I've already boiled one cup of water, so we're going to add one cup of water and then we're

 And we're going to put them in the refrigerator and let them get chilled, but you don't want

 This is such a simple project, but just think how great it's going to be for your Halloween

 All right, I finished the syringes and now we need to just pop them in the fridge.

 We had a little extra jello and so I already had these cups and we just put them in the

 cups, got some dollar store candy, eyeballs and fingers and hearts, and we just let them

 chill for a little bit until they got a little hard and then put the eyeballs in there and

 And this makes a great display because you have your syringes, your eyeballs, creepy

 Email us at ideas at happyhour.com or you can follow us on Facebook, Pinterest or Twitter.

 My name is Brittany Nicole Dixon, your certified fitness trainer and today's workout is balls

 Now the urban dictionary defines balls out as giving it all you got and hauling ass.

 And they also said that, which I'm more aware of, is when you're running track and watching

 the men run, they get a little snippet of what's hanging out of their shorts.

 So today we're going to really do an ab workout for the lower abs.

 So what we're going to do is sit on your Swiss balls, roll all the way down onto your shoulder

 blades, your tushes off the ball, hands by your knees, I mean, hands by your ears, and

 you really want to crunch up and hold that position for two seconds and let down.

 You want to make sure that your chin stays up to let that air flow through properly and

 So you roll back up, give yourself a little bit of a break, maybe 10 to 15 second break,

 and you roll back down and do 10 more until you reach that three sets, three reps.

 So what you're going to do is kneel down on the ground with a ball in front of you.

 Place your abs on the ball and roll over the ball and kind of crawl with your arms,

 placing those hands right underneath your shoulder and the ball right on your shin.

 So if you have to scoot up a little bit more to do that, that's fine.

 So what you're going to do is contract that muscle in your abs and really move that ball

 So bringing your knees towards your chest and the ball towards your body, keeping that

 Then you want to, oh, pelvic raises, that's the one I wanted to show you.

 So what you want to do for pelvic raises, lay down on your back with your calves on

 the ball, hands flat out, straighten your legs, and really push your body up, holding

 And really squeeze your butt to get those hips higher and create a straight line with

 This is also working that lower ab and creating better stability for you.

 So the fourth exercise I want to show you for your lower ab part is a little bit more advanced,

 but it's a challenge, but I think you guys can do it because this is a ball out.

 So same thing as a jackknife, kneel down on your knees, abs on the ball, and start rolling

 forward until it reaches your shins with your toes on the ball.

 So now what you want to do is make sure that your hands are underneath your shoulders and

 So those four exercises for four rounds, four or five rounds, and you should really start

 1001, 1002, subscribe to my YouTube channel, and my Facebook, and my Twitter, and my Instagram.

Today's episode I'm going to show you how to make orange chicken in a crock pot.

 You know you pop it in the crock pot first thing in the morning and when you get off work and get home

 dinner is practically ready for you, and it smells wonderful in the kitchen, too.

 I'm going to be using some fresh ginger and some soy sauce and then when we serve it up

 I'm coming right back right after this to show you how to do it.

 I happen to have boneless skinless, but you can certainly use bone-in.

 But you do want to remove the skin on the chicken thighs because it'll just make your sauce really greasy.

 Here's some coconut milk and for those of you that don't like coconut you could always substitute

And then here I have some cornstarch, which we're going to use to kind of thicken up the sauce a bit.

 And what you want to do with the ginger is, or an easy way to do it, is to take your ginger root and

 take your spoon, take the back of a spoon, and just scrape off the part that you want to cut and use.

 And then just cut off about an inch or so and then mince it up until it's nice and fine.

 The first thing we want to do is combine most of our ingredients.

 Now, I want to add the cornstarch to this, but I don't want to, I want to make sure that I mix that first with

 I'm going to use cold milk, cold water, whatever you're going to mix it with so that it doesn't clump up.

 And I'm going to add just enough cold water here just to make it

All right, so now I'll just pour it in and whisk it into this sauce.

 And like I said, that's going to help give this a little more body, thicken it up a little bit.

 Okay, so the first thing we want to put in here, I'm just going to toss the onions in the bottom.

 To the top of the chicken and then all we have to do is pour our sauce on top.

 I'm going to put it on high and that will cook on high in about three and a half hours, three to four hours,

 let's say you're at work all day, put it on low and you can let it go, you know, six to eight hours.

 Being that these were skinless and boneless, they don't take quite as long to cook.

 there's enough sauce in here that we could have probably put in quite a few more chicken thighs.

 And I have some green beans here already as you can probably see.

 They're beans that have some caramelized onions and some salt, garlic and

 So I'm going to put that on there with that rice, soak up that juice.

 And I tell you, this is so nice when you get home from work and dinner is ready.

 Alright, now just to finish off, I'm going to, I've just got some walnuts that are in

 the small bowl here and we're just going to whiz them around to use as the topping for

 Now, one thing that I may call out, I was very excited to get that cheese ball going,

 but what you may want to do is start with the nuts already chopped and processed so

 that when your bowl is ready you can just put it in your bowl, roll them around, your

 Another little thing, if you have leftover garlic and leftover green onion, feel free

 to process that with the cheese and it will just add a nice another dimension of flavor.

 I'm going to take my blade out and what I can do here is just take my ball out so that

 way if the nuts are already in there, you can just roll it around.

 The other great thing talking about nuts is that you can use your KitchenAid to as well

 So that's great whether it's an almond butter or a peanut butter.

 It's kind of nice to be able to have the control over how much sodium and salt and additives

 And then what you can do is just take the remaining nuts there that you don't need as

 And we don't want customers to actually do it themselves in terms of sampling.

 So what you'll do is when you're ready, you can leave the cheese ball there, open up your

 crackers and then with your knife just put a tiny little piece from the cheese ball directly

 onto the crackers and then they can enjoy it like a little can of paint.

 So hope that's a fun one to make and we'll come back with another recipe in a second.

 Okay, so today we're going to learn how to cook or make top ramen because cooking top

 So the first thing you have to do is first clear off the old pots here.

 I'm making about two packets, so you need about like maybe half for a small pan like this.

 Because top ramen cooks really fast, you don't really need to cook on low settings

 And it'll probably be a good thing if you turn on the right stoves here.

 Now that it's finally boiling, this was requested by Kevlax, Dakraster, Ishin, Marco, Miker,

 Alright, so now that you've got this boiling, you can put in the noodles.

 I like to keep my noodles long, so I just put the whole thing in there.

 If you really want to, you can pound this and it'll make your noodles little tiny chunks.

 One with one packet where you drain it and then put the flavor in at the very end.

 Or the way that I usually do it sometimes is while it's boiling, you put one of the

 So you wait for that, wait for the noodles to get soft finally.

 So remember, if you're cooking two at once, put in a packet when the noodles finally start

 So we'll wait until we're done, which is when the noodles are soft.

 Okay, once it's done and they're really soft, which will take about like three minutes,

 Okay, so with the one packet, you have a lot of water in there, so probably you pour a

 Okay, you pour a lot of it out until there's barely any in there.

 All right, see with the big one, with the two packet Top Ramen, you have all your noodles

 The water's already looked like it has flavor in it, so you got some flavor boiled into

 So to do that, you just fill a plate full of water, put the packet in there, microwave

 it, I think it says like three minutes on the box or something like that, or the little

 I was just showing you the two different ways because it was requested on my chat room.

 Okay, so now, just sit on your table, give yourself some juice, solve some cubes, and

 The first step is to peel off the outlines of a design on the sand art card.

 Achieving gradual toning for two or three different colors is easy.

 Choose a color, turn the card depending on how you like your gradient to be, and pour with care over that area.

 Now, choose a third color, or in this case, back to pink, and pour to the remaining space.

 This technique creates really beautiful color effects and I encourage you to try it.

 We have 20 different colors so you can do amazing tonings and experiment with them.

 Ok, the first thing you want to do is make sure that the power is unplugged from it and

 You'll need a Phillips head screwdriver, about a medium size, and probably a small flat head

 Release the battery, pop these two levers over, and it will slide right out.

 There's going to be three screws on the bottom of the unit that you want to take out.

 The first one is right here, and when you loosen the screw it does not come all the

 way out of the cover, it's got a retainer that keeps it in there.

 The second screw is right here, and it has a little picture of a keyboard right next

 And the third screw is right here, and it also has a picture of a keyboard right next

 Once you have these screws loosened up, this cover will pop off.

 Inside of here you'll see the empty slot for the memory, and there is a notch right

 on this side which will indicate which way the memory gets put into there.

 You just put the bottom into there, make sure it's firmly seated, and then push it down

 and these little sides will snap onto the edges and hold it in there.

 There's a fourth screw that needs to be taken out before we can flip over the laptop and

 And that screw is right here, furthest towards the back of the laptop.

 And again this also has a retainer clip so the screw does not come all the way out.

 After those one, two, three screws are loosened up for the keyboard, we're going to flip the

 And on the top of the keyboard between the escape and the F1 there's a little slide lever

 Same thing between F4 and F5, F8, F9, and between F12 and the scroll.

 Once you have that lifted up, it will slide forward and you can tilt the keyboard forward

 being extremely careful of the ribbon cable that's in there because if it gets twisted

 or pulled too hard, it will break and then the keyboard will be non-functional.

 My recommendation is to prop the keyboard up like so with that lever.

 All you need to do is push on this little silver thing on each side and that memory

 And if we look at this memory module, here is the slot that I was talking about that

 And like I said, you want to match up that slot and just firmly push the memory module

 And those little silver tabs will line up with the notches on the side of the memory

 Make sure that the bottom of the keyboard, those little tabs go into the bottom like

 so and then once it's in there, then you can firmly seat that down and close off all four

 And of course, flipping it back over after you've made sure that that second memory module

 is in there and seated properly with the tabs hooked into the notches in the memory.

 And not very much force, just gentle enough to make sure that it's firmly seated.

 And the third screw that retains the top of the keyboard in place.

 And then we'll go ahead and we'll put this cover back on, making sure that the tabs are

 inserted all the way fully, completely into the back end of the laptop and then it will

 And here is the fourth screw that we loosened for this project.

 Once that's tightened, go ahead and replace the battery and you are all set.

 You can plug in the power or use it without the power and when it boots up, you may see

To make this you'll need your favorite pizza dough recipe or you can buy

 My recipe starts off with 1 cup of milk that's been heated in the microwave until it's hot to the touch.

 To that I add 1 envelope or 2 1⁄4 teaspoons of instant active dry yeast,

 you probably can whisk it in with a metal whisk and stir it around until it's nicely combined.

 Then you're going to continue to add flour to about 3 1⁄2 cups or so.

 stirring after each addition and eventually you'll notice the dough will start to chase the spoon around the bowl

 When it starts to do that it starts to form a dough ball in the center.

 turn out the dough onto the counter and you can add additional flour to the top of the dough ball if it's really sticky and

 then cover it with plastic wrap or a clean dish towel and put it in a warm place to rise.

 Let it rise until it's doubled in size and that will take about an hour to two hours depending how warm your kitchen is.

 portions or so, depends on how big you want your pizza mummies to be.

 Take a piece of the dough and roll it out until it resembles a rough triangle shape.

 Then take a sharp knife and score a triangle shape in the center.

 you're just scratching the surface of the dough to make a triangle shape and

 then within that triangle shape is where you're gonna put your toppings.

 I added some shredded mozzarella cheese and then some sliced pepperoni.

 Now make sure you stay away from the edges of your dough because that's what we're gonna use to make the mummy bandages.

 So at the top part of the triangle you're going to make four cuts.

 the other two cuts will be on the sides of the triangle like I'm showing in the video.

 So you end up with three pieces at the top, the centerpiece being the largest one.

 Now for the rest of the triangle go all the way around making slits through the dough about

You want to stay on the other side of that triangle that you scored into the dough prior.

 So roll it under, tuck it under and plump it up and make it into a little pillow shape or a head shape.

 What you can do is if you see any gaps you can pinch those shut to make sure that none of that filling

 alternately one side and the other side or you can kind of put the strips wherever you want them to go

 continue to do that all the way down to the bottom of the mummy.

 Now you notice you have one large piece that's kind of left at the at the bottom.

 up and then just tuck the ends in and just mold it around to make it look like feet.

 egg that's been beaten and this will give it a nice golden brown color.

 375 degree oven for about 15 to 20 minutes until they are golden brown.

 I had a couple little spots where it leaked through but for the most part it stayed nicely inside.

 talking about fillings, you actually don't need to use a filling if you don't want to.

Do follow the exactly the same directions with the folding and the cutting.

 Now I let one of them cool and then I cut it so to show you the inside of it.

 So this is cold so you're not getting any cheese kind of oozing out or whatnot.

 there's not a lot of filling compared to the amount of bread in these.

 So what I would suggest is that you can serve this with a marinara sauce on the side

 I have quite a few easy to make Halloween treats on my channel including these spiderweb deviled eggs.

 If you want to see this video go ahead and click right on your screen or see the link in the

 you can do that right now by clicking on the cute little hamster on your screen and that way you won't miss a single upload.

 This one-step makeup from Stila is so great because it works on every single skin tone

 So you feel like you're kind of giving your skin a little bit of a treatment versus really

 When you apply your foundation, apply it starting in the center of the face, letting it kind

 So you never see a line, which I know nobody wants to see, and it completely just erases

 Another tip is you can also swipe it right up on the brow bone and put it right here

 on the corner of the eye and that will give you a little instant lift, especially if you

 Say you have an area where you've spent a lot of time adding coverage.

 So remember there's buildable coverage with this one-step makeup.

 That's going to add coverage and build and set it into a powder.

 That way you're not disturbing the hard work you've already put on.

 Stila has a beautiful eye trio that we have in the kit and it's a beautiful silver, gray

 I'm going to show you how to create a great smoky eye in seconds.

 You want to start off with the medium gray shimmer in the palette with a smaller brush.

 Now the brush size is really important because depending on the eye shape, if you use too

 big of a brush, it'll go everywhere and then you'll have to blend it out and it's too much.

 But if you use a smaller brush, look down, it allows you to completely apply the eye

 shadow right at the lash line and blend it up so it's instantly smoky.

 The first place you lay your brush with the product will be the most intense color.

 What makes our eye shadows so special is you can use them wet and dry.

 So you can have one eye shadow, use it dry to be a sheer wash of color or you can dampen

 your brush and you've got a whole new eyeliner or a darker shadow.

 Look down, we're applying a little bit more of that gray shimmer and I did use my brush

 So look at that, it's completely transforming and looks like a whole new color.

 The thing with smoky eye is you want to create gradation from the lash line all the way up

 Now we're taking that same shade and applying it underneath the lash line.

 A really classic way to do your makeup, Stila style, is to wrap the color of your lid or

 The pressure of my brush is right at the root of the lashes, so it's still creating a thick

 You could take the lightest color, which is a bright silver shimmer, and completely

 You know, Agnes has a smaller eyelid, so a great tip, look down, is take a little bit

 of that pale silver that we just used in the inner well and apply it just right on that

 So remember, light brings things forward, dark colors push things back.

 If you're not sure how to apply your eyeliner or where to put it, put your mascara on first,

 then you'll see really what your eye shape is, and you can apply eyeliner to maximize

 Now we're taking the mascara with a flat liner brush and painting it on our lower lashes.

 It completely captures every little last lash, but you don't have to fight with the big brush.

 So I can see the shape of her eye, and now I know where I want to apply the liner.

 Dip into the darkest shade of the trio, which is a beautiful black with added shimmer.

 And what's hot on every eye shape, I find, is a beautiful cat eye.

 So start at the outer corner, lift up, and use a small brush so you can really create

 If you want your eyes to look bigger, take that same dark color in the trio right in

 the center on the bottom, and that's going to bring the focal point to the center of

 So you can see I showed you how to use the trio, Smokey Eye Trio from Stila and Agnes.

 It shouldn't have to take you forever to do your eye makeup, or any makeup for that matter.

 It should be really specific and really blended out and look stunning.

 You can create this look with any color trio, but this is the most neutral smokey eye.

 Well everyone there is the time and date and it's time, oh 2040.

 This is going to be the unboxing of the Logitech Xtreme 3D Pro USB joystick.

 And I bought this from Newegg.com, not directly from them through their eBay store.

 And it shipped on Monday, September 30th, 2013 via UPS Ground from their center in Tennessee

 And don't be fooled by the old product description saying it's like USB 1.1, Windows XP and old

 And down here on the bottom where the UPC is, it says their copyright 2013 Logitech.

 Because it almost looks like Windows 8 like down there at the bottom.

 And you can see they have a rapid fire trigger, 8 way hat switch, all the buttons, a weighted

 It's pretty weighted even though I'm moving the joystick a lot.

 That's going to be it for this quick unboxing of the Logitech Extreme 3D Pro USB Joystick.

 And this is consistently recommended by a bunch of flight simulator enthusiasts.

 This is the most affordable and the best joystick for under $30.

 This is a great stretching exercise for loosening up a lot of the tension in your face.

 A lot of people hold stress in their face and this is a great one to release that stress.

 So go ahead and just make really weird faces, tensing up different parts of your face, opening

 up your mouth as wide as you can, scrunching up your face as well.

 Clasp the bottom of the chair with your hands to stabilize your shoulders.

 Bring your ears as far as you can to your shoulders when they're on the side.

 And when your head is back, bring your head back as far as you can.

 This stretch is called neck rolls and you should be focusing on feeling a full range

 Go ahead and switch sides, keeping your eyes closed and focus on the stress.

 Stress in your shoulders is melting right off shoulders and through the arms, through

 Breathing in deeply and fully and slowly exhaling deeply and fully.

 Go ahead and interlock your fingers and bring your hands and your arms high above your head.

 This is a great general stretch for your back muscles as well as your rib cage.

 Feel the stress and the tension completely melt all the way down your hands, your arms,

 through your shoulders, through your chest and upper back, through your abdominal region,

 through your hips and legs, down your feet and into the ground.

 Put your left hand on your left hip and bring your right arm up all the way high into the

 Put your right hand on your right hip and your left hand in the air and do the same

 You should be feeling a stretch in your rib cage and the side of your body.

 The deeper you breathe, the deeper the stretch will be in your rib cage.

 Feel the stress just melt right off the bone as you get a deep stretch in your ribs.

 This will be your base pattern for almost every skirt variation you will want to make in the future.

 If you are buying paper you are best to buy the plain brown wrapping paper,

 otherwise you can use leftover wrapping paper from Christmas or birthdays.

 Once you have your paper ready you need to take note of your body measurements.

 For this skirt block you will need your waist measurement, hip measurement,

 the vertical distance between your hip to waist and your desired skirt length.

 Taking your waist measurement requires you to measure around the smallest part of your torso.

Next you will want to take note of how far the distance is between

 it is usually around 20 centimetres but if your body measurements are less or more please take

 note of your body measurement and the distance between the waist and hip.

 For this video I'll be making the skirt length 40 centimetres from the hip.

 to mark the top of your skirt, then draw a vertical line down the centre of the page.

 From the top horizontal line mark your waist to hip measurement on the vertical line and square left and right.

 Now that we have the hip line we can start to draw the front and back of the skirt.

 From your hip line measure down the vertical line to the length of your skirt.

The back of your skirt will be left of the vertical line and the front of the skirt will be on the right.

 Before you continue you might want to add a couple of centimetres to the hip and waist measurement of your skirt.

 This will give your pattern a little more of an allowance for movement.

 I'm going to add two centimetres to the hip and one centimetre to the waist.

 The front quarters of your skirt block will be created 1.5 centimetres wider than the back.

 This makes the front of your skirt a total of 3 centimetres wider than the back.

 To get the front width measurement of your pattern simply divide your hip measurement by two.

 Now you will need to minus 1.5 centimetres from this calculation which will give us the back skirt width.

 Divide this by two to obtain the quarter measurement and mark the back width measurement of your skirt

Remember the front measurement quarter is 1.5 centimetres wider than the back.

 Mark this to the right of your vertical line and square up and down.

The position of the darts may vary depending on how your body curves.

 Pick your desired location and mark the width from the centre back and front.

 For my pattern I'm going to position the darts 8 centimetres from the centre back and the centre front.

 Square up towards the top horizontal line and name this line your waist line.

 The new vertical line from your waistline is the centre of your dart.

 On the back of your skirt we're going to create a 4 centimetre dart.

 From the centre of your dart measure 2 centimetres to the left and right.

 We want to shorten the dart so it does not create a tight fit all the way to the hip line.

 To do this you will want it roughly 7 to 8 centimetres above your true hip line.

 The front of the skirt will only have a 2 centimetre dart since we have less curves at the front.

 To measure how far we curve the side seam of the skirt block inwards we will need to minus the total width of our dart from the hip measurement since the darts will close the fabric.

 For the front we will need to bring the side in by 4.5 centimetres to bring us to the new measurement of 18 centimetres.

 Remember seam allowance is only added once you're ready to sew your new design.

 Learn how to make a pencil skirt from this base pattern in our next tutorial.

 Hey everyone, today I'm going to show you how to make s'mores indoors in your oven.

 Now I'm going to be using a 6-inch cast iron pan, which I have right here,

 and that will serve 1 to 4 or 5 people, depending on how much you love it.

Now what I found was wrong with it, when you put your chips into the pan and you top it with

 the marshmallows, put it in the oven and bring it out when it's done, the chocolate will harden up

 to keep that chocolate nice and creamy and smooth throughout the whole time.

 s'mores will be gone before that chocolate even gets a chance to harden up.

 what we want to do is just pour it over the chocolate chips and let that sit for a couple

 now that the chocolate mixture is all melted and everything, I've cut a piece of parchment paper

 we have to do is pop this in the oven, 450 degrees for exactly nine minutes should do it.

I'm going to have a party here in a couple of weeks and I'm going to double this, put

I wish I could give you guys all some graham crackers so you could come and try this

Leave me a comment and if you like the video, please give me a thumbs up.

So thanks again for watching and we'll see you in the next video.

Okay now that's been taken care of let's talk about maintenance a little

To make your pouches last longer right up here about the end of the wing

 there you put a little lubricant and rub it between your fingers and you put it

 little bit and that'll help lengthen the bands and and help the pouch.

 happens is the pouch pushes the bands up they hit the tip, the fork tips and bruises

 starting to poke out on this pouch and when it does that it starts sometimes

You take a little talcum and rub it on your fingers like that and

 you shoot it'll tend to want to slip out of your hand but then I make it shoot

Another thing you can do is this is a pouch where sometimes a nap

 about an eighth of an inch a little bit better you can take a sharp pair of

 scissors and trim that nap off along the edge and that'll get your performance

 you want to watch to make sure that this this doesn't come loose.

 don't have any problem with people telling me my band ties come loose.

 relief in there and that's to help guide the pressure up along the side so that

 where I'm shooting from so you can get an idea how pretty it is.

 find these at the grocery store and decided that it would go really well with the meal

 that I'm fixing, which is coconut shrimp with Jamaican jerk seasoning, baked in the oven

 do that, but I've already done these so probably won't see anything.

 the end and then come down the side and see if there is any string.

 is some kind of implement that you put on top of a pot that has boiling water.

 of an inch deep and it is certainly not coming up to this level.

 out because they could be eaten raw or they could be cooked quite a bit.

 see the color change from its original color and you see steam coming up to the holes in

 the bottom here, you know that these are hot and tasty like they are.

 to go ahead and call them done and we will bring this over to serve it up with the rest

I did want to answer one thing that might be a question about the snow peas.

 At this point you can add butter if you like that, the amount that you want.

 extra butter with the calories and I don't need the extra salt with the sodium.

 just serving them this way, but that doesn't mean that you have to.

Make a nice contrast in color and flavor to what we have on there.

 So I think you'll enjoy this meal along with some hot tea this time.

 Hi, this is Gene, and this is another episode of the Rolling Workbench.

 Today I'm going to replace the plug on the end of this retractable extension cord.

 First with a couple of screws, we'll take apart the lamp housing.

 And there's a circuit breaker, and of course the bulb unit there that we'll just clip off

 Three in the front, and then of course you saw the two on the side, on the back that

 And that basically loosens two brass plates that the wire will fit between in this model.

 I'm stripping about 3-8ths of an inch off of each wire here, and that exposes enough

 wire to fit between those brass plates that can be tightened down.

 Before you put this back together, make sure you thread the back half of the plug up onto

 the cord, as you won't be able to get this on after you secure the wires.

 If you liked the video, please don't forget to like, comment, and subscribe.

Today I'm going to be unboxing the iPad Mini and the iPad Mini Smart Cover.

 And here, actually this is a, it's like the iPhone charger because it's the,

 it doesn't require such a big battery, or it's such a big charger just like the

 And here's like your fingertip things that they give you and then the

And then here's the lighting cable that comes with the new devices.

Once again, I'll put that to the side one more time and then we'll open up the

 I'll have it in the full review, but this is just a quick unboxing of the iPad Mini.

 If you guys want to see anything specific in the review, please let me know in the comments down below.

Because you know the iPad 3 is running the A6 as well as the iPad 4

 So this is a step down from the current generation iPads, but this is really for the people who want to be using the smaller

 tablets, you know, such as like the Nexus 7 and all that kind of stuff.

 They are using smaller screen tablets, and that's just the way to go now.

It's like it's not the easiest thing to hold, but it is a lot easier to hold than the iPad obviously

But I'm gonna set this up and I'll do a review of that in a little while.

 That'll come out like probably later today when I get back from my classes.

 But once again, this is just a quick unboxing of the iPad mini as well as the iPad mini

 So I hope you guys like this unboxing and I'll see you guys in the next one.

 used in this video or if you need a new pool filter, head on over to poolandspa.com.

We showed you in the earlier steps how to remove this actual whole

 how to do that, go to poolandspa.com and check out the other videos and we'll

 from this point on, we already showed you how to remove the gasket that basically

 how to remove this top tube sheet which was located right here like this.

 way we removed that was by taking out these screws that were mounted around

 what we're doing now is we're going to show you how to take out all the fingers.

 Okay, so we're going to retake off that tube sheet and take off that gasket.

 if you have an older filter, it might be a little bit harder to get these fingers

Now, this is a brand new filter so you can see you can basically just push

I'll hold this up to you closer so they just slide in and out of the tube

See, what you want to do is you just want to keep pulling all your fingers

And then once you pull out all your fingers, just like this, you want to

 either acid dip them or you're going to actually soak them in vinegar.

 your tube fingers or all your fingers is because you want to check

 little and turn this up a little bit and pull all my tube sheet fingers out like this, okay?

 tube sheet or you need filter fingers, head on over to PoolandSpa.com.

 pump is making noise, head on over to WetHeadPumpRepair.com and we'll both be

 Harrison for donating the filter so we could show you how to take it apart.

 sure you subscribe to all the videos and we'll see you in the next video.

 Hi, I'm Alexis Escobedo, and I'm going to be showing you how to make a lemon chest pie.

 For your first ingredient, you're going to need a fourth cup of sweet melted butter.

 because handling foods could get germs on them, and it can make you sick.

 First, before you cut them, roll them like this so you can get more juice out when you juice them.

 So you place your knife in the middle of the lemon, whack it, and just start to go slice back and forth.

 Place your lemon on top of the juicer, push down, and go like kind of like this, like a clock.

 And go back and forth, side to side, until you think all the juice is out.

 After you're done juicing, you take the cap off and pour it into your big bowl.

 Make sure the dull side is facing toward you and brush it away from you until you have nice, even sides on the corn.

 Use a smaller bowl than a larger bowl because you don't want to get, if the shells fall in,

 you don't want them to get into your large bowl with all your other ingredients.

 You're going to wash your hands because you don't want, you don't want to get salmonella from raw eggs.

 Then grab your dull knife and make sure the non-sharp side is facing forward and pour it in.

 Now you, for the last step, you add your half, your fourth cup of butter.

 Now, with your mixing bowl, you're going to grab your whisk and mix until the sugar is dissolved.

 Grab your spatula and try to get in all the extra parts that got...

 After ten minutes, you're going to turn it down to 350 and let it cook until it's set, which means when it's ready.

 Once you've finished making your lemon chest pie, it should look like this.

 The traditional ladder stitch is a common foundation stitch and is used to create the first row to many other beading stitches.

 It can also be used alone to create jewelry and embellishments.

 Hi, this is Eva, and today, in partnership with AllFreeBeadedJewelry.com, I'm going to show you the ladder stitch.

 For demonstration purposes, I'll be using a beading needle, wildfire beading thread, and I'm going to use black so it shows up better,

 To start, we're going to put a stopper bead on, so you want to thread the bead on, bring it down towards the bottom of your string,

 and then we're going to thread right back up through that bead, which loops it and holds it on.

 This is a temporary bead, it can be slid up and down, it's just to hold your work.

 go through the opposite direction from where your thread is coming out,

 Then you just want to repeat this process until you reach your desired length.

It's called galupci, which is stuffed cabbage with meat over tomato sauce.

 absolutely amazing, very healthy, and you can make a lot of them and store them in the

 a couple of bunches, some dill, one medium onion, one pepper, you can also use red pepper.

 Here I've got chopped tomatoes, you can also use the chopped ones from the tin.

 of half-boiled white rice, salt, pepper, one egg, sour cream, one large cabbage, and

Now you can just use pork or beef, I'm using combination so it's a bit more juicy.

 Okay, before we start making galupci, we're going to need to boil our cabbage.

 we need to just give four cuts around the cabbage, just to make sure that when we start

 leaves they don't break, and we leave them boiling for about 20 minutes.

 our onion right here, which I'm frying now for a little bit until it goes golden.

 to use my hands because then it gives it some air and they taste really, really lovely.

 to cut off this end bit very, very carefully because it's really hard and it makes it harder

And I'm going to place them actually in the sort of deep baking tray, and they're

 all kind of cozy together when you pour the sauce over as well.

 because it tastes very delicious and gives them that sort of brown, yummy color.

 fry them from both sides, put them back there, and then I'm going to add the sauce.

 so I've just fried them lightly, and then we're just going to pour our sauce everywhere.

You can add a bit more water because you need to make sure that they're

 Hi, it's Wilfrum Storm from the castle.com and this is a tutorial on how to do a scratch

 I used to do this when I was a kid, it's kind of fun, so I figured I'd recreate this.

 This is, if you don't know what I'm talking about, you will shortly.

 A poster board would work good for this because that's what we're going to do the drawing

 Of course, brushes, and you'll need a little pen, some kind of pen.

 Even a paper clip would work for this, whereas you're going to scratch out your drawing on

 What we do is, you use your crayons to do a bunch of colors all over your sheet.

 Once the black dries, you use your pen to scratch out drawings in it.

 So I'm going to go ahead and do that and I'll show you a little bit of that.

 It'll make a difference and it'll help to keep the paper waterproof from the paint.

 So next, all we have to do now is apply a thin layer of dark paint to it and use some

 But just apply a thin layer and you want it to be thick enough, dark enough to cover the

 Okay, I painted it all black and now we just have to let it dry.

 But I love the way the colors just kind of, see that's the thing, you know, you start

 scratching at them and the colors come out in all kinds of different ways.

 So that's how you do a scratch drawing or whatever it's called.

 What's going on ladies and gentlemen, Vault Matrix here and today we are taking a look

 at all the Super Wings Transforming Planes series out of Korea.

 These figures were both provided to me by SirToys.com for review.

 Now I want to preface this, these figures are freaking awesome and I'm not just saying

 The quality of the plastic on these guys is really nice and by quality of the plastic,

 Even the thin looking plastic here underneath the body of Donnie feels hard and solid and

 Now both of these figures transform and they both have the same or similar transformations.

 We'll start with the little guy who is actually pretty small and he's about the size of an

 To transform him, we'll come around the back first and flip down the legs, come to the

 sides and flip out the arms and it's actually a little bit harder to do if you don't have

 The only piece of this figure that feels anywhere near fragile has to do, are the propellers

 And overall, this little dude is really neat and little kids are going to love this thing.

 It is a little bit small for very small children because I think they might be able to eat

 Now the larger figure or what I'm going to be calling the Deluxe Class figure has moving

 propellers which are made of soft plastic but don't feel cheap and the landing gear

 It doesn't feel like it's going to break which I greatly appreciate.

 Slide them down and flip out the hands and split the legs apart and just pose him so

 Now the only issue I have with the Deluxe or the larger figure is he is incredibly top

 I like to fold his knees in a little bit so that he's facing downward just a little bit.

 He doesn't really have any other articulation besides that but I don't care.

 He's a really neat figure and I can't wait for my son to be old enough to play with these

 So guys, I would go over to SirToys.com and pick one of these up because they're really,

 So gang, I hope you have enjoyed this video review of Aldi's Plane Series Donnie.

 I'm Baltmatrix asking you to like, comment, and subscribe and please be sure to stick

 You've got to have the right tools and if you haven't done it before just figure it

 I mean, some people, I mean honestly some people really don't have aptitude around tools

 In general, if you have any aptitude with tools you can just sit down and figure this

 You've got to have torque settings, you've got to set this right otherwise you're asking

 So I took my covers off all these little bolts and what I have now is I need a 5mm to take

 I've got to come back and remove this puppy which is going to be a bitch.

 I'm probably going to get some spillage of oil, a little bit but not much.

 So there's like 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, probably like 12 of these little fuckers, things around

 Alright, I now am going to remove the cap plate and cap plate seal so I can get this

 I've taken all the bolts out of the primary cover and of course oil came out and they

 I could have drained it and only maybe, I don't know, a couple cups of oil came out

 and made a little bit of a mess but I've had some towels down there to catch it.

 So I'm going to remove this so I can end up removing the clutch pinion shaft next.

 I released the cable, clutch cable from the pinion, what do you call it, the clutch pinion

 So I'm going to remove this which is the cap plate and all that stuff to get at that so

 Now I've got to remove the cap plate which is held on by these three screws and mine

 are pretty well oxidized or something and they're a real bitch to get off.

 I'm going to get this seal off and get the O-ring off under it so I can get this damn

 Alright, I'm just going to do little bits here and there just to go so I don't make

 Alright, now I've got to get this O-ring out and let's see how tough this is going to be.

 I've got the O-ring, the screws and then I've got to get the retaining bolt out which is

 Alright, I took this bolt out and now this will just slide right out.

 And that's going to hold that on so you've got to pull a little bit.

 What we're going to demonstrate is our recommended way of assembling and plumbing in a freestanding

 The main components are bath, panel, feet assembly and panel brackets.

 There are three optional methods of filling the bath and these are, one, using a conventional

 two-hole bath filler with pop-up waste and overflow, two, using a pair of deck mounted

 valves connecting to a cool fill bath pop-up waste and overflow.

 Three, using a wall mounted shower valve supplying mixed water to the cool fill spout waste assembly

 The advantage of the thermostat is that it controls the temperature better.

 We are concentrating on this video in the conventional bath filler and pop-up waste

 For the cool fill and deck valve combination, please see our accompanying video for the

 The first thing to do is unwrap the bath and make sure that you leave the protective film

 Lay a blanket onto the floor so that you can turn the bath upside down to fit the feet

 The foot assembly is basically a leg frame into which is fitted the foot bolt held in

 The black foot simply screws onto the foot bolt and is also locked in place with a locking

 The height of the bath can be adjusted by extending the bolt into the frame.

 Having assembled the leg frame, it is now secured to the bath in the templated position

 Please do not use longer screws because you will damage the bath.

 Placing a straight edge on the feet, set the feet to the height for the panel as in the

 In this case we have 546mm from the underside rim of the bath to the bottom of the feet.

 With this achieved, we can tighten all the lock nuts up and it makes the whole assembly

 Whilst the bath is upturned and presenting the rebated timber blocks secured to the bath,

 we have sprung metal clips which must be screwed to these blocks.

 The reason for this is the panel surround will fit up into that rebate and the sprung

 It's best to fit these at this stage using again the 20mm screws supplied.

 Having fixed all of the clips to the wooden fixing blocks, we can then move on to the

 The next stage is to lift the panel into its final position and mark the floor for the

 Also make sure the plumbing does not conflict with the panel bracing bars.

 It is important to avoid setting the brackets too close to the edge of the bracing bars

 Now lift the panel out of the way and fix the brackets to the floor.

 Mark out the centre line of the bath and then 90mm either side of the centre line to

 Having drilled through the bath safely, what we need to do is just peel the masking tape

 and protective cover back just around where we are going to mount the bath mixer so that

 we are not trapping it making it difficult to remove when we finish plumbing.

 At this point it is advisable to raise the bath onto timber to allow space to make the

 We now move on to fitting the bath pop up waste which is a conventional waste and overflow

 Having fitted the pop up waste we need to connect this to the bath waste in the floor

 To assist in this we can supply as an extra item a bath trap with flexible extension and

 Upon making these connections we can now proceed to a wet test on all pipe work.

 Once satisfied there are no problems, we move on to positioning the bath fitted into the

 This entails disconnecting the waste and supplies at the floor level and reconnecting when the

 Once again check for leaks and then we can lower the bath by removing the timbers.

 The bath is sitting comfortably on the floor now and we slide the bath into the brackets

 All that's left to do is apply a silicone bead all the way along the joint between the

 This secures the bath in its final position and the installation is completed with the

So today we're going to be making a very delicious sesame chicken

 Now you could have a spork instead of these two but I prefer the real things.

 going to need to do in this recipe is just scoop the leftover sesame chicken.

 leftover sesame chicken into the plate and not say on the stove, on your feet, on your

 but what you really want from this meal is delicious fats and yeah, and sugar and stuff.

Schooled in France and there we call it a micro-va or la micro-va

So what you want to do is basically put it on maybe a minute and 30 seconds.

You don't want it too hot but you want it hot enough where it's tolerable

Now when you're cooking this you got to make sure that it spins inside the microwave.

 This way your dish gets a healthy portion of healthy microwaves from every single angle

 making sure that every single part and nook and cranny of the dish is cooked evenly.

 I guess there are some la micro-vas that don't spin but those are shit.

 guess I don't want to brag but I guess you got to be like classically trained as a chef

 like myself to do something so extravagant in under 10 minutes but I don't want to say

 that you can't do it because by watching this video and following the steps to the T you

Just got to get the broccoli out of there because eating vegetables

 show you another amazing, brilliant dish that you can do fast from your own home.

 Today I'm going to teach you how to make spinach lasagna rolls.

 What you're going to need are 9 lasagna noodles, which I have pre-cooked according to the package

 You're going to lay them out on some parchment paper or wax paper.

 You don't want them to touch, they'll get too sticky and you want to make sure that

 You don't want them to be too hot when you touch them, so right after you drain them

 you may want to use tongs or something to get them out, to lay them out.

 You're also going to need 10 ounces of chopped spinach that has been previously frozen.

 I also have half a cup of grated parmesan cheese in this bowl and 3 ounces of mozzarella

 If you'd like it a little bit spicier, you can use crushed red pepper.

 I bought two 24 ounce jars of tomato sauce, two of my favorite flavors, and I combined

 From that you would take out about a cup, which I've already done, and you're going

 So first what we're going to do is pre-heat our oven to 350 degrees.

 Now that you have your ricotta mixture mixed, you're going to take a cup of your mixture

 I like to line my pans with parchment paper lining, which you can get at the store or

 After it's been spread, you're going to come to your noodles, which should be fully cooled

 off and dry, and you're going to take a third of a cup of the mixture and you're going to

 Then you're going to take your noodle and you're going to roll it up.

 Don't press too hard or your stuff is going to come out the sides.

 Now we're going to take that and we're going to make sure that the seam is on the bottom

 Now I've got all nine in a row in my pan, so we're going to clean this up.

 We're going to put the remaining mixture on top of each of the rolls.

 I ran out of room in my pan, so I'm going to put the rest of the mixture on top of each

 I ran out of room in my pan, so I put one in the center, kind of improvised a little.

 And you're going to take your mozzarella cheese and you're going to sprinkle right on top.

 After you get everything covered with the mozzarella cheese, you're going to need a

 Now, like most people, you don't want the cheese to stick to your foil.

 So what you're going to do is you're going to spray a little bit of nonstick coating

 Now you may be wondering, hey, Violet, what are we going to do with the extra cup of sauce?

 Well, we're not going to use it, so store it or use it with your lasagna rolls later.

 So we're going to put this in the oven and we'll come back in 40 minutes.

 Now you can use this time to go get a drink or clean up your stuff.

 In about 40 minutes, we're going to take it out of the oven and see what we have.

 We'll just take one, put it on your plate, and you're good to go.

 You can add some of the sauce to go with it if you want, just for an extra flavor.

 So I like to pair with this maybe some green vegetables or maybe a small side salad.

 We did have plenty of the extra stuffing that you could have made more rolls if you wanted to.

 Again, if you guys wanted something other than spinach, maybe you're like, hey, Violet, I don't like spinach.

 But you could probably substitute it with beef or chicken or whatever else you want to put in it.

 Basically, it's just the lasagna stuffing and you make lasagna and it's like an individual thing.

 So next week, I'll give you guys a little hint what I'm going to make.

 If you have a recipe that you want to see featured or if you'd like me to try it,

 go ahead and leave it in the comments section below, and then it might get featured in the weeks to come.

 So thank you, and don't forget to tell your friends to subscribe.

 Hi everyone, tonight we're going to make for you the three milks cake which is basically

 It's Latin American and also this is the ingredients that we're going to be using tonight.

 I'm greasing it up with a little butter and I'm adding a little powder to it.

 Alright, hi, welcome back to Hugh's Nursery and I'm going to be showing you how to make a really tasty American Blackcurrant tart.

 I've already got a whole bucket load here, well not a bucket, but pot loads, and this is about half full.

 And the amount of blackcurrants you need can vary between a pound to a pound and a half of blackcurrants, which is 500 to 750 grams.

 So, we're down in the orchards here by a barsey apple, that's a branch you can see right now, but these are brimming full of blackcurrants.

 They're really, really sweet and tasty and I love blackcurrants to bits, so if you have so many blackcurrants you should definitely try this out.

 Okay, so we've just rinsed and drained all the blackcurrants here, remember 500 grams to 750 grams, one pound to one and a half pounds.

 We're now going to make the mix, which is going to consist of one and a half tablespoons of cornflour and also 175 grams of sugar, just use granulated because that's what I do, into 75 millilitres of water to make a paste and stir until it's all smooth.

 It's all mixed up nicely now and we're now going to stir this thickening in with the blackcurrants.

 Now it's all mixed in, we're going to be making some shortcrust pastry with flour and you want to leave this to stand for about a quarter of an hour.

 First off, you want to add 250 grams of plain white organic flour and then 125 grams of soft butter or margarine and you're going to mix this all up until you get a nice consistency called breadcrumbs.

 Then once that's ready, you want to add three to five tablespoons of water and this is going to bring the mixture together but be careful not to put too much.

 You want an eight inch pie plate and this is what the pastry should look like now and then we're just going to roll it out until we can fit it over the top of it and you need to make sure that you pre-grease this before putting the pastry on.

 So just to see if it fits, put it over like that and now carefully lift it from underneath and lower it down like that.

 Pressing on the sides so it fits and then we're going to cut off the trimmings here.

 Ok so we've pre-cooked the base at 180 degrees for 15 minutes and now we're going to do the last mix and spoon the blackcurrants in.

 Now we're going to dot it with some butter to add some flavour and put a sprinkle of lemon juice over it.

 Just like that and now whatever decoration you'd like to do, I'm going to do this, you can do whatever.

Make a nice golden colour and sprinkle it with some sugar and then you want to cook in an oven at 45 degrees, no, for 45 minutes at 180 degrees.

 POTTYLEGEND FEVER, POTTYLEGEND FEVER, POTTYLEGEND FEVER, POTTYLEGEND FEVER

 Hey YouTube, it's Lando at KenLandisha and I know I'm not on the screen but don't be alarmed.

 Today I'm going to be doing a quick tutorial on how to restyle a synthetic wig

 And yeah, the wig I'm going to be using is Bisa, Bisa, however you say it, by the Janet Collection.

 Um, I originally was going to use Flexi Rods but I was kind of ill-prepared

 Not Flexi Rods but, you know, it still got the job done anyway so I can't really complain about that.

She's just sat on my mannequin and I actually did go in and tweeze the part a little.

I'll see, um, whenever I put it on because I never tweeze a part before.

 But anywho, um, yeah, I'm actually going to throw her in some boiling, well not throw her but,

 Okay, so what you're going to need is, of course, the wig, some tongs, and of course your pot full of water.

 And you know when the water's ready once you start seeing all those bubbles and it starts bubbling and steaming and all that.

 So, yeah, and of course, um, paper towels or a towel to put the wig on after you take it out of the water.

So what I'm going to do is take the wig with the tongs and place it gently in the water.

 And yes, and I'm going to use the tongs and pat it down just to get the wig soaking wet.

 Now, you can leave the wig in the water as long as you want, but I'm going to take it out in a few minutes,

 pat it dry, well, as dry as I can get with the paper towels and paper towels.

 I don't have the wig now on my mannequin and I patted her dry as much as possible.

 And what I would usually do is leave the wig on the mannequin and dry overnight.

 But since I actually need the wig immediately, I'm going to be using a blow dryer to speed up the drying process and get this wig ready to go.

 And yeah, I know there's some big gaps, but don't be alarmed because there's enough hair to cover all those damn tracks.

 Um, yeah, and using the hair dryer, I'm actually going to switch quite constantly between the cold, medium and high setting just so I don't damage the hair fiber.

 But yeah, and right after I should be back with the finished results in either a video or slideshow or whatever the hell you want to call it.

 So yeah, I hope you enjoyed this quick tutorial and until my next video, I will talk to you all of you soon.

 Hi, my name is April and I'm going to show you how to make a bowl out of a pineapple to serve your fruit dip with

 And out they should come you may have to go back around again to make sure there we go

 Get these pieces out so we can cut them up and use them later on

 All right, and I'm gonna cut down the other way get out these pieces

 Okay, this one's not quite they're not wanting to come out so easy

 left in there and I'm gonna use a grapefruit knife that I have and

 And sometimes you got to go from the middle and then from the other side

 Put these pieces in a separate pile because they're not quite as nice as those big pieces we got out earlier

 They're not going to be as pretty to cut up and put on your fruit tree

 So, here you go good enough and then I'm gonna rinse it out and set it upside down on a paper towel

 So it can dry off a little bit and then I'm gonna chop the pineapple

 Alright, now that we've completely washed this rug, we're going to take it through a rinse,

 through our rinse cycle, and we simply, the back of it, we simply hose down.

 do with our facility that we've built here is recreate the way these rugs are cleaned in Iran,

 and so we try to recreate that river process with clean water flowing from one end down to the drain,

 continually rinsing the rug, and we'll completely flush out all the detergent on the back of it.

 Any pet urine that was in this rug is completely washed down the drain.

 like a wand, only instead of putting steam out, we're just putting cold water out, creating that

 river effect, and this tool helps us get the water right down on the rug and down into the fibers of

 the rug to rinse all the dirt out of it and all the detergent and deodorizer out of it as well,

 And if you can see, you can see all that detergent and all that soil coming to the

 And this will be done two or three times on this rug until it's completely rinsed clear.

 A rug that's covered or completely saturated in pet urine, this would be rinsing literally brown.

 All right, so we're wrapping up rinsing this rug, and now you can see that there's no detergent

 coming out of this rug, and the water is rinsing completely clear, and that's important because

 you don't want to leave detergent behind in the rug because that will help attract soil to it

 later on once it's back in your home, and we certainly don't want to leave any soil in the rug

 All right, so now that we've completely rinsed this rug, we're going to roll it up,

 Hello everyone, this is Melody and welcome to my Kawaii Bento series.

 It's that time of the year when you may have certain skin concerns such as from harsh UV

 One of the most important factors in beauty is having healthy plump skin and in order

 In Japanese, purupuru means plump, bi means beauty and hada means skin.

 So today I'm going to be showing you how to make a purupuru bihada bento.

 It includes edamame rice, boiled steamed chicken and sautéed vegetables.

 I'm going to start off by making the edamame rice using the rice cooker I have here and

 I'm going to add a little twist so it's a bit different from how you would usually cook your rice.

 Normally you would cook rice with water but today I'm going to be using Japanese green tea.

 First of all, edamame is rich in vitamin C and protein which help to revitalize the skin.

 On the other hand, green tea is effective for anti-aging and brightening the skin.

 The body will absorb the vitamin C well because it will not break down in high temperature.

 Once that's done, put the bowl into the rice cooker and press start.

 Now I'm going to make the main dish which is the foil steamed chicken.

 This is great to make in the morning when you're busy because all you need to do is add some flavoring and pop it in the toaster.

 Chicken, especially the chicken's skin, is rich in collagen which provides the human skin elasticity and strength.

 For flavoring, put on sesame oil, soy sauce, cooking sake, oyster sauce and mix well with your hand.

 After putting on finely chopped ginger and scallions, gather the four corners towards the center like this, making sure the sauce won't drip from the sides.

 Once the shape is defined, put it in the preheated toaster or oven at 375 degrees Fahrenheit or approximately 190 degrees Celsius for about 20 to 25 minutes.

 While the chicken is being foil steamed, I'm going to be making my vegetable satay.

 Today I'm going to be using these, broccoli, red bell pepper and kabocha which is Japanese squash.

 To replace oil, put a little bit of mayonnaise onto the frying pan.

 Put in the vegetables, sprinkle on some bouillon powder, salt, black pepper for flavoring and stir fry.

 All three vegetables are rich in vitamin C. Broccoli also aids in collagen production so it'll be great to eat with chicken.

 When the foil steamed chicken is ready as well, take it out of the toaster.

 Open up the aluminum foil and the chicken should end up looking very yummy and juicy like this.

 Now that everything's done, pack it all into the bento box and here's the finished bento.

 Skin care is important for both men and women so I highly recommend eating a bento full of nutrients to get your desired healthy skin.

 Once again, for the full recipe and additional details, please visit my blog, fujisanke.com.

 This is a wonderful, easy bento to make to revive any stressed skin from this summer.

 Your inner health shows up on the skin so I hope you enjoy making it as well.

It has eight ingredients so it's simple to do and I'll tell you it

 goes great with chicken or fish or all by itself with just some chips.

 have a jicama which is a actually a root of a vine and it's native to Mexico and

 Central America and it really doesn't have a lot of flavor but it gives a nice

 some green onion, you could also substitute a shallot for this but this

 is what I have today so we're using the green onion, and a couple of nice ripe

Now I want to mention that when you go and pick these out what you're

 looking for is a mango that is soft or has some give to it when you squeeze it

 for skin that is nice and smooth no wrinkles in it and that should pretty

 up a mango, how to dice it up a couple of different ways and so I'm not going to

 go over that with you on this video so if you want that I'll leave a link right

 Once you get your mango peeled and you've removed the seed then you just

 like that and then I'll turn it the other direction and you get a nice dice.

So I'll go ahead and finish dicing this up and then we'll move on to our

 any seeds or anything I'm just going to make some slices like this and then cut

 it into pretty much one and a half inch or one half inch chunks very similar to

Now that we've got the tomato diced we can move into our onion here

 and I'm going to use both the white part of the onion and the green.

I'm going to cut it in half and just remove the stem and the seeds

 course you can vary the the heat by how much seeds and membrane that you include

Okay so see how I'm cutting that into quarters and then I'm going to take

 this and I'm going to take my knife and just scrape out the seeds and some of

 that membrane because I don't like it that spicy but if you like it hot leave

 strips and that's going to make it a little matchstick see and then I'm going to make

 through this the dice is nice and small and I don't have to do as much chopping.

 Okay so nice and small on the dice there and we'll add that to our bowl.

 half and I think I'll just use my knife to trim it off because that seems to be the

 and follow along and just slice down so that I get about a quarter inch wide slices and then

 cut a bunch off about that much you know and this varies depending on how much you like it.

 Some people love cilantro so they want to put a whole bunch in there.

You know if you wanted to substitute something else I would go with parsley

Now all we have to do is add our lime and we'll salt it to taste.

 So before you cut your lime go ahead and give it a nice roll it'll help release the juice and then

 go ahead and cut it and just squeeze it right into your salsa and then I'm going to give it a

Okay so we'll do that look at the colors wow it looks fantastic I mean what a

 healthy dish and that you know what's really nice is the mango sweet and then you have that heat

 really don't need too much salt with this I'm just going to do just a light dusting.

 to want to put this I'm going to cover it with some plastic wrap and place it in the refrigerator

 you want to leave it in there for about an hour so the flavors really get a chance to to mingle

I've taken the salsa out of the refrigerator it's been in there for

 about an hour and I've served it up in these nice little cups here and I tell you it it really

 you got all the colors of the rainbow practically not quite no blue no purple but man I tell you

 of the mango there's only just a hint of heat because I took all the seeds out but I like it

So you know this is great for kids you take those seeds out you can still put the

 jalapenos in there and I tell you you barely even notice it but I can taste the lime and the

 cilantro you know like I said the sweetness of the mango and the tomatoes it's great.

Thanks for watching today I really appreciate it and be sure to subscribe

 Now if you want to, you can add the fur and whatnot, which is mostly just going like this.

 It seems like a lot of videos that I look up on how to draw, they're pretty boring.

 So here you see the ear is coming down the side of his face, so it would actually cast

 So you want to make that a little bit darker than the rest, and just kind of ease back

 And you know what, I just remembered, they actually have whiskers.

 I'll probably just time lapse this so you don't have to watch me do this all the way

 Now you might have noticed I added a little white spot here on the front of his neck.

 Like the eye, it goes inwards, so let's add a little bit more there.

 And now, the last thing you would do is, or not, maybe you, but it's what I do last, is

 If the circle seems too small, just add to it and make it a little bit bigger.

 I'm still working on making a really cool signature, but that's all I've got for now.

 He looks a little mad, I'm not really sure how to make him look happier.

 If you want to know what kind of rabbit this is, it's called a...

 They look really close to the same, if you want to see some pictures.

 See, there's that one with the better fur than what I just did.

Hope you had some fun with the exercises in part one of this video.

 I didn't show this to you in the first video, but you probably figured it out already.

 So, you know, towards the body, away from the body, do the same with the left hand.

 Just a few things might not work, like crossing your hands in an extreme way.

 All right, next thing we're going to try is, I mean, you probably noticed that everything came towards the snare drum or away from the snare drum.

 Like extreme crosses, you know, extreme distances between your drum kit.

 Quite often you'll see drummers doing the same, you know, movements all the time without even thinking about doing it a little bit differently.

 So instead of going, like, let's say from this crash, instead of going just down to the snare drum and maybe those two toms,

 Or, you know, just look for the longest distances you have on your drum kit and practice that especially.

 That really helps you developing some nice speed around the drum kit.

 All right, so what we're going to try now is we're going to add another stroke.

 Right between those two rides, we're going to throw in another additional left-hand stroke.

 Okay, I started mixing those moves towards your body, away from your body.

 I played twice towards my body and only once away from my body.

 Remember from the first video, we had the variation of playing only one stroke with the left hand, which speeds up the whole process.

 Check out part three of this video where I'm going to show you a bit more advanced ideas, techniques.

 if you have this problem with a car which doesn't want to start

 one more time please make sure that your battery is fully charged

 Hey guys, it's Mu and today's look is inspired by a look that I saw on the Reunion Show of

 Love and Hip Hop Atlanta and it was of this person right here, I'm not sure if I can insert

 the picture, that's what the look looks like and that's of Erica Dixon, I believe her name

 the simpler looks on the show but it also carried in a little bit of the fall trend

 which was also great and I think she's just one of the most beautiful women on the show

 so I really wanted to do the look and I took that picture, those pictures that night of

 quite a few of the other ladies also but especially that one I wanted to do and I posted it on

 the look and all the products will be listed in the video and down in the info section

 So I'm applying my primer, I'm using Urban Decay's Primer Potion on the upper and lower

I'm going to add my foundation on top of that just to make sure that my lids matches

 third of her eye looked a little green, it could be khaki or a sort of creamy greenish

 color so I'm going to add a little bit of green and just kind of take the green down

 with a bit of the white and in the center of the lid it looks a little bit brighter

 but it does seem to have pink in it so I'm going to add a brightened light pink in the

 center of the lid and just kind of overlap them so that there's no line or no visible

 color looked to be in the plum kind of maroon pinky family so I'm just going to layer a

 couple of colors and the color I'm adding right now is a really nice matte plum color

 and I'm going to take that into the crease just half way because there's no visible color

 all the way in her crease and I'm also adding it to the outer V just to be the foundation

 color or the base color before I add the other color that I'm going to use.

 to use this rich, it's almost a maroon but not quite and I'm just going to blend that

 in on top of the color and just concentrating it right in the outer V area, not really taking

 go at lighter or darker depending on your skin tone, it doesn't have to be the same

 I'm going to add a shimmery color just to pick up the light a bit because it seems like

Then I'm going to apply just a little bit of liner in my waterline

 and go ahead and use that matte shade just to blend it out and to add it to the outer

 that just to make the color a little bit more intense and I'm going to go ahead and add

I'm making a medium line but as you can see I'm a little bit out of

 lashes and the lashes I'm using are dramatic but because the lashes are so far apart in

 the design it doesn't take away from the eye look especially because I have smaller

 make sure my eyes match and there's no other extra powder where it shouldn't be.

 on to the face I'm going to go ahead and start out my contour and I'm just creating a line

 take your contour too high you want to bring it down low so that it will balance your face

Now I'm going to finish contouring my cheeks by buffing it out and softening it

 I used from Garden Botanica just to give it a little bit more dimension and to kind of

It's applied almost right under the eye and brought right back to the

 hairline really really nice and it really does lift the face and makes you appear younger

 nose not necessarily only a slimmer nose just like hers and I'm taking it from the brow

I'm contouring the philtrum and that's the indentation that's just under

 the nose and above your lips and this gives a slight definition and fullness to your lips.

 Using my lip corrector I'm going to apply it just to even out my lips so the lipstick

 will appear more even, it won't skip or it won't appear blotchy on my lips.

 to line and fill in my lips and what I'm doing is I am applying the lip liner in strokes

 going upwards not back and forth and this will help you to not overdraw the line or

 lip line just a tad bit or right on top of my natural lip line and that's to give the

 illusion that my upper lip matches my lower lip which is a bit wider.

 lips makes your lipsticks last longer but it also makes the lip color a little bit more

Now I'm going to apply my lipstick and I'm being careful as to apply my lipstick

 using the point when I get to the edges of my lips so that I don't have too much color

Now I'm just cleaning up where color went outside of the line as I mentioned

 and I'm using my concealer to do that and it will also make the lipstick appear more

 of salt, three to six garlic cloves, some chili pods, these are Japanese chilies but

 The next step is to get a bunch of cilantro, this is about a half a bunch.

 a little bit before I put my cilantro in just to get the chilies blended.

 to make sure that the chilies get ground up and distributed properly through the salsa.

 The next step we're going to put this half a bunch of cilantro in.

 So the salsa is actually finished but just as an optional step you can put some green onion

 in at the end and the salsa as it sits in the fridge will get hotter and hotter every day.

 So this was two green onions that I'm putting in here just to finish it off.

 salsa hotter when you put the chilies in I would use six to ten.

 Today we're at the 4Wheel Online Garage and we're going to introduce to you the Vanish

 One of the best features of the Vanish Roll-Up Cover is the low profile, streamlined design.

 We go about as low as you can go without going completely flush with the bed.

 The important part of that to realize is that if you go any lower than this, you start to

 To open the Vanish Roll-Up Cover, we have a unique pull trigger latch system.

 One of the largest advantages with the Vanish Cover, like any of our other tonneau covers,

 is that once it's completely rolled up behind the cab, you get 100% use of your bed.

 What that means is we just use a steel threaded nod to have direct tension control, whereas

 a lot of other tonneau covers use spring loaded capsule devices that can wear out or

 One of the biggest advantages that sets Access Covers apart from any other tonneau covers

 What that means is it doesn't sit on top of the bed, so you get complete access to your

 side rails or your stake pockets or if you want to add bed caps or something like that.

 It's important to point out that the Vanish Roll-Up Cover has the exact same fabric as

 It's more UV stable and it's resistant to cold weather cracking.

 We use an 18 ounce polyester infused vinyl that is double bonded so it prevents against

 Now we're going to show you how easy it is to install the Vanish Roll-Up Tonneau Cover.

 All right, what we have is basically everything you need to put together the Vanish Roll-Up

 I like to use one of each tool of a half inch wrench and a socket.

 As you can see here, we have the easy to use hardware that's model specific, heavy duty,

 We have the rails for each side and of course the vinyl roll-up cover itself.

 Now we're going to show you just how easy it is to install the passenger side rail of

 When doing so, I like to employ the use of a set of vice grips so that I can stabilize

 Now that we have our vice grips in place, we're going to show you just how easy it is

 I like to start off with the rear clamp first, then I tighten it up so it's nice and snug,

 Now that we showed you how simple it was to install the passenger side, we'll repeat the

 Now that we've finished installing both of our rails, we're going to show you just how

 First thing that you want to do is look for either the L or the R. That tells you whether

 you're on the left or the right side, driver's side or passenger side.

 The next thing is take a washer and your long bolt, place it through that hole, and

 line it up with the square nut that's in the channel of the header bar.

 As you tighten it up, make sure not to make it too snug so that you can still line it

 back and forth because this piece wants to go underneath the rail itself before you secure

 After both of your tension adjusters are put together, the next step is flipping your whole

 header bar upside down and making sure to line it up so that it sits nicely between

 After that, you can slide both of your tension adjusters up underneath there and line it

 After which, your next step is just to install this smaller bolt up through the middle there,

 All right, now that we showed you how easy it was to put all the parts together, the

 final step in the process is rolling your cover down into place and making sure it's

 Thanks for watching our video on the AXS Vanish Roll-Up Tonneau Cover.

 For more information or to purchase one today, contact the AXS Cover experts at 4WheelOnline.

 Motif Hijab by the Inaya Collection and I'm gonna show you three different ways

 Once you did that we're gonna tuck the short side into our shirt and make sure

 on top of your head depending on how much volume you want on top of your head.

 So while you're creating these folds make sure that you use a straight pin to

 So once you're done doing that you can go ahead and take the long side and bring

 that around your head like so and make sure that whatever is left is tucked

This is what it looks like from the back and now we're gonna jump

 side is short and the other is long and then just safety pin that under our chin

 So once you're done doing that you're gonna create two folds somewhere around

 the middle of your head so it's somewhat to the back and not as much to the front

 sure that you safety make sure that you straight pin them so they don't move.

 take the long side and we're gonna fold it about 1 third or 1 fourth of the

 sure that you create these nice folds on the front so keep that in mind and

 however you like and after that you can take a straight pin and secure that down.

 So there you have the second look I hope you like this look and this is what it

 looks like from the back and as you can tell it has like this nice fold on the

 And take the long side and you're gonna bring that around around your face like

 And I like this look for like spring or winter this would look super cute and I

 like how you can like show off different colors by wearing a different ninja

 yeah so these were basically all three hijab styles that I wanted to share with

 video a thumbs up, subscribe to my channel, follow me on my social media and

 Ok so I'm just going to show you really quick how to make a finger pick with a strap on.

 Just like about 5 bucks for the materials and I've already made two of them.

 So what you would pay on finger picks that you would buy you can just use that money

 to buy the materials that you need and then you can make a whole bunch yourself.

 As you can see here the fuzzy part is longer than the rough part to stick on.

 Attach that with a little bit of hot glue on top of the fuzzy part.

 So today I am going to show you a tawa kulcha and that too with aloo stuffed.

 to add little bit of sugar for sweetness and some baking powder and ghee 1 tbsp.

Usually we use ghee to fry our parathas but today we are going to add some ghee in

 either mash it with your hands also or you can use potato masher.

 potato we are going to add some chili powder, coriander and lot of green chilies because

 we are making nice spicy kulcha and some amchur powder and also garam masala.

 and we are going to make a small dumplings and this kulcha we are going to make it into

How we make our regular parathas the same way just sides thin and

 some flour and roll this or otherwise just take a paper wrap like this and add little

 itself and before pressing what we are going to do is we are going to add some sesame seeds

 and some finely chopped ginger and also some coriander finely chopped.

So what my husband says is such type of kulchas you need to apply little

 just add little bit oil or ghee and you can cook it both the sides.

 cover this with a lid and we are going to cook it and then we are going to transfer

 little bit different than our regular parathas because we added baking powder in it.

 is puffed up little bit and if you see the texture is also different and we added good

 the last once you remove you can just put one cube of butter or little bit oil on top

Now what I am going to do is once I transfer this I am just going

 to add lot of stuffing so that each and every bite you get a good amount of stuffing.

If you see this is little bit flaky because we added ghee in it.

 I hope you enjoyed this very simple recipe kulcha and that is stuffed kulcha.

So today I'm going to be doing a 5 minute summer makeup tutorial and I know

 that I don't have a lot of time sometimes in the morning to do my makeup and this is

 really easy and simple to be able to do your makeup during the summertime.

 easy and simple and it only takes 5 minutes literally because I know and it's really gorgeous.

There's like nothing else to describe this look that's easy and simple

Now I'm going to take for my Too Faced Natural, I'm going to take this

This is the only brush that I'm going to be using because it just

 seems like it's where it's easy and you don't need to take a lot.

 and take this and kind of dab it on my hand and then just apply it to my lid.

 keep on grabbing more of that and bringing it up to my brow bone.

 taking some eyeliner from L'Oreal in Lanier Intense in Black Mika.

 shake this up and then it works better if you kind of test it out a few times on your

 to my upper waterline and then just really going close to my lash line, as close as possible.

 this is really an easy and simple just to kind of give you a little bit of flare to

 go swimming or something, it won't come off and you'll still have long lustrous lashes.

 And this is a really pretty blush just for the summertime, just to brighten up your

 If that's still in the brush, it makes them look really gorgeous.

 now because it just really gives the, it just really looks bright and vibrant for the summer

 reason why I have two dismatching, two different earrings on is because they match my flip

 flops perfectly because I have polka dotted flip flops on so I thought it would be really

 cute to wear the dismatching earrings and they really look cute together.

And then just throw your hair up in a ponytail or some braids or something just

 this five minute summer makeup tutorial and I will talk to you guys later.

 Now a lot of young students will actually find that left hand part

 So, just have to put those together, and eventually you have it.

 So the left hand actually has a lot of detail that you have to make sure you look out for.

 Alright, so this is one of those videos that I'm like, okay, I'm going to cook dinner,

 I was just going to make chicken, some barbecue chicken, but I'm going to do something a

 I'm going to do something that makes this barbecue chicken special.

 I'm not going to use my barbecue sauce, but I'm going to throw together some things and

 I got all this chicken and I go to the cupboard and I'm like, okay, let me grab some stuff.

 Alright, so first thing I know I'm going to use the best gourmet seasoning you'll ever

 Then I go to the cupboard again, I'm like, oh yeah, doing a little mustard today.

 Then I'm like, alright, I need something, I need a little sweet.

 Then I go back to the cupboard and I'm like, hmm, maybe something in the fridge.

 Oh, hey, give it a little bit more flavor, a little Worcestershire sauce, and that should

 I bought this because it was brand new when it came out and I grabbed it and I thought,

 Get until you see it almost wanting to come out the edge right there.

 This means that every piece of chicken is completely touching sauce.

 All right, so this is all going to get, I'm going to, every half hour I'm going to flip it.

 The reason why I took the skin off, I usually leave the skin on if I'm barbecuing.

 I don't want it to just marinate the skin and then you bite the skin off and it's just chicken again.

 What's left over there is going to go in here and I'm going to cook it up to bring it to temperature

 I'm just going to show you with a few pieces and then I'll send you guys inside while I cook this up.

 They're not done yet, but I'm going to start grilling the other side now.

 Then I'm going to take the, I cooked the, this stuff right here and I'm just going to baste it one more time.

 We're going to finish, finish them off with another basting of the same stuff that it was being marinated in.

 I'm just going to take one piece off here so you can take a look at it.

 I'm going to wrap the rest in foil because I can eat like five of these right now.

 Alright, do you want to do that piece or do you want these pieces that I cut?

 Hey there, Julie here with foodstoragemadeeasy.net and today I'm going to be trying to cook rice

 Now the way the Wonderbox oven works is you bring whatever you're cooking to a boil and

 then you put it in the Wonderbox oven and put the lid on and then it insulates it and

 Now I could bring the rice to a boil on a volcano or a nipper tank kind of stove or

 any other way, but just because the point is to use my Wonderbox oven today and I'm

 So I'm just going to add in the water and then a little bit of oil.

 Now I'm excited to do this because I'm actually on my way to church and rice is something

 when you get home, especially brown rice since it takes longer to cook, you don't want to

 So I'm excited to see if this works and is all ready for me when I get home.

 So I'm going to go ahead and just add the rice and bring it to a boil and I'll be right

 It says to do that so that it keeps the heat in and it says to remove it and put it in

 I'm going to go ahead and put it in there nice and tight, put the lid on and we'll be

 Okay, I'm back and I haven't opened this yet so this is going to be a surprise for me.

 So when I opened it, it looks great and I took a bite off the top and it's pretty good.

 But as I've mixed it up, it's actually a little bit mushier than I would like.

 So I need to figure out if I cooked it for too long because it did say for an hour but

 I thought that you probably just leave it for longer because it says you can't burn

 I mean it's edible but it's just a little more mushier than I like.

 That's why we try things so we can figure out how to do them differently next time.

 Next step, this loose end right here, we're going to put it under the formed loop, like

 Now this loose end will go in here, and under here, and out through here.

 Then we put this end right here, and it goes through the middle here.

 The last step, we put this remaining end also through the middle, like so.

 So what's important right now is that the two loose ends are separately next to each

 It really is a handy technique right here, because if you sometimes just pull it like

 this, the knot will get kind of messy, and sometimes when you pull it, it's wrong.

 So what's a good technique for this is that you pinch the two loose ends right here, close

 Now it looks kind of like this right now at the moment, so what we're going to do is we're

 going to put the slack out of it, so we're just going to work through the knot, pull

 it tighter, and there we basically have our lanyard or diamond knot, which is kind of

 Hey guys, back with another video and today I'm going to show you how to make a doll Santa

 So you're going to need some red and white felt, hot glue is optional, a large bead,

 your doll, some scissors, chalk or a marker, and needle and thread.

 I'm taking my red felt and at the edge I put half of my doll's head on it and then I sketch

 And then pin that triangle onto your felt and cut out another triangle similar.

 With good sides to good sides pinned together, I'm going to start stitching along the edge

 And I'm using this kind of in and out stitch but only going along the edge.

 And please if you are young, like under age of sewing, please ask an adult to do this

 You can use the end of your scissors or a pencil just to poke out the edge a bit at

 And now you're going to cut a long strip of white felt and you're going to glue that

 So here's my strip of felt and I'm going to put a dab of glue in the back of my hat.

 And if you're making this for yourself or life size, I suggest you sew everything on.

 But if you want a santa hat, just take a very large bead and glue it or sew it on top of

 If you want, you can glue on a few beads over here in the white felt area so that it'll

 If your hat doesn't really want to stay down like so, just add a dab of glue and stick

 After all that, you are done with your doll's santa hat or elf hat.

It's Leila here and today I'm going to be showing you how to recreate

 curl in your hair but you don't necessarily want to have your hair down.

 to learn how to create this kind of criss-cross effect, then stay tuned and I'll show you

So for this super easy tutorial, all we really need is a curling

 hairbrush to comb through the hair, and at the end some hairspray to set the curls.

 to create more drama in this hairstyle, I am using my Luxe Hair Extensions in the 160

So we're going to begin by brushing the hair like always before styling.

 we're going to start sectioning off the hair into large sections and curl away from the

I'm going to fast forward this section for the sake of the tutorial.

 doing is grabbing your curler and curling the hair starting from the midsection down

 Okay so once we're done curling all the hair, we're going to gently separate the curls with

 hair now from this side, bring that over and criss-cross it through the second section.

 to grab the section from the other side, separate the hair, criss-cross it over the

 the bottom at the nape of my neck, just that section right there, and bringing that over

 do the same thing over here and just grab the section of hair from the bottom at the

 nape of the neck and kind of bring it over the middle sections and attach it to the head.

 Okay so once you have criss-crossed all of the sections, this is the completed hairstyle

And I'll just turn around so you can see the hairstyle again from the

So really really simple and fast and really pretty and perfect for days when you

 want to have a feminine look of long hair but you don't necessarily want it to be sort

I definitely love this hairstyle because it's really simple and fast

 and looks really pretty and different because of the kind of criss-cross effect in the back.

 So thank you guys so much for watching and I will see you in the next video.

 The head which is a paper-machéed balloon, the body which is edible cake, and then the

 silver base that's at the bottom which is actually made out of cardboard and then wrapped

 We just really assemble it, so whatever really kind of feels works for you, go and do it.

 You then glue the whole contraption together with the yummiest glue you can possibly find

 You'll see the actual shoulders were actually made from Madeira cake.

 We kind of got fed up with all of the cake baking and just thought we'll just buy the

 Right, next very, very important step is just to cover the whole thing in icing.

 The secret here is to actually make sure you cover the whole thing.

 Don't worry about it being uneven or missing a tiny spot or two, but just be sure to cover

 Next I cut out eye shapes and then cut it into ready to roll white icing that we bought

 I cut two of those eye shapes out to look like the spider-man eye shapes and then here's

 Using a high quality paper kitchen towel that is resistant to water, wet it, lay it over

 your cake and then smooth it with your hand on the outside of the toweling roll and then

 Next while that was all waiting to dry, I kind of cut out the spider-man emblem.

 I then actually used a very cheap craft airbrush which I bought for really, really cheap at

 a craft store and I sprayed black food coloring straight out undiluted, sprayed the whole

 I thought a couple of minutes would have been okay, but it turned out that I needed to let

 So I left it to dry for about eight hours and then once that was kind of touch dry so

 that it would actually make a mark, I then started drawing out the actual spider webs

 Now I used a commercial available tube of white and a tube of black to make the webs.

 You would have also noticed earlier on I actually cut out the spider out of my ready to roll

 And then yeah, it was just really going around the whole thing ensuring that I've got all

 I also kind of with a wet paper towel I actually cleaned up the silver so that it kind of brought

 Yeah, and then just went right around the whole head paying a lot of attention to cleaning

 Not worrying too much about the back of the head but just ensuring that it kind of looks

 It took including drying time, well no, including drying time it took about 10 hours to make.

 Without the drying time it was probably about 3 to 4 hours depending on how good you are.

 A near life size bust cake of a black spider man or any other superhero you can think of.

 Well guys let me know what you think and if there's any other case you want me to make

It's an inspiration from Italy when I went to Rome and I thought the cake was

 absolutely delicious and I tried to experiment in my kitchen and it came up with an amazing

200g of caster sugar, 70g of cocoa powder, 2 eggs, 150ml of melted butter

 or you can use vegetable oil, 250ml of milk, 150ml of hot boiling water, Nutella, 250g

Now we're going to mix all the ingredients together except our boiling water.

Now you don't have to do this, but I'm going to sprinkle some white chocolate buttons

 into the cake mixture, just so you get a little surprise as well.

 It looks very impressive, pretty much like in a restaurant and anyone who's making this

Please subscribe to my channel if you enjoyed watching me and I'll bring

Today I wanted to do a get ready with me video for February because there's

 For this look, as always, it's going to take less than 5 minutes and very very easy to

First I'm going to use this L'Oreal High Intensity pigment and with a brush, wet it

 Then I'm going to go in with a black liner and just line my top and bottom lash line.

 And then also I'm going to smudge that out to create a smokey effect.

I'm going to take a black liquid liner and just open up the inner corner a little bit.

 taking some liner and just filling in any gaps that you might see here.

 going to use this light brown color just to soften up the edges.

Using this shimmery pink color, I'm going to brighten up the inner

For some reason, I forgot to put mascara on my lower lash line for that

 lips with a plum colored lip pencil and then topping it off with a plum colored gloss.

 And for the rest of my face, here are the products that I used.

 For hair, I'm going for a natural yet voluminous look, I guess.

Hope you guys enjoyed the tutorial and subscribe for more videos!

 today we're gonna be focusing on the fan and the removal of the fan

 okay so things that we're gonna do to continue disassembling this laptop

 removing the SD card, removing the connection to the VGA port on the

 removing that screw that holds the fan and finally removing the coolant fan

 so let's go to that and I'm right here in front of the motherboard

 and the first thing we're gonna do is remove the connection to the audio

 this right here is coming from the screen just grab that right there and

 pull it up and then we're gonna be removing that screw and then this

 so in order to remove the cooling fan now grab your Phillips screwdriver

So you're gonna place your hand on the left hand side of the fan

 if you wanna clean your fan what you can do is use the paintbrush and then clean

 now that you're here in order to remove the motherboard in the next tutorial we're

 and we're also gonna be removing the five other B screws as you saw there

 Let's see the things that we actually did were removing the connection to the speakers

 we removed the SD card, we removed the connection to the VGA port

 connection from the screen, I removed the screw holding the fan

 thank you guys for watching you can visit the website CodeOnline.com or

 First of all I'd like to thank you for buying our 650 Yamaha V-Star kit.

 It's a 2007 model, kind of halfway in between the bobber transition phase.

 So yours won't look quite like this, but anyway this is a custom model.

 And so we're going to go ahead and show you how to turn it into a good looking bobber.

 You don't have to remove the seat, but I'm going to go ahead and remove it.

 It might be a little easier, especially to take it off and store it.

 And then our next step is to, we're going to run over here on the other side of the

 I like to put the screws back in their holes, that way you don't lose them.

 And then we've already cut this wire ahead of time, but this connector, if you go ahead

 This will be basically fastened to your fender, this part of the connector.

 That allows you to remove the fender and the connector should come out with the fender.

 These are already loosened up, so we're going to go ahead and take these two bolts out.

 Welcome to Brooklyn Cooking, a place where Brooklyn locals share their home cooking creations

 My name is Scott Jaffe, and I'm here today to show you how to cook a pan-seared scallop

 So the ingredients today that we're going to need to make this dish, we're going to

 We're going to need a quarter of the head of red cabbage, sliced.

 We need three tablespoons butter, half a cup red wine vinegar, two to three tablespoons

 parsley oil, four to eight scallops, depending on size, and a little bit of sliced scallion

 Whenever you're getting scallops, you want to try and get the freshest, most local scallops

 Second thing you want to remember is that all scallops have a little abductor on them,

 You want to cook this over a medium-high heat, and we're going to add about a teaspoon of

 After you throw in your cabbage, you want to hit it with a pinch of salt.

 We're going to let this cook for maybe two minutes to just soften up the cabbage.

 Next we're going to add an eighth of a cup of sugar and one-half cup of red wine vinegar.

 We're going to put a lid on it, and we're going to cook it for about 20-25 minutes on

 If you do, the butter is going to immediately burn when you throw it in the pan.

 Now that our butter has completely melted, we're going to add our diced parsnips.

 Like with our cabbage, we want to give it a little bit of salt.

 You want to give this a mix so that everything is coated, and then you're just going to let

 I'd say probably all told, it's going to take somewhere between 10-15 minutes.

 Alright, so I'm going to check the parsnips to see if they're finished.

 Add your hot parsnips to your blender, and then we're going to add our heavy cream.

 And you're just going to puree it one more time just so that it mixes everything through.

 Now you're going to take your finished puree, and you're just going to transfer it into

 For scallops as big as the ones that we have, I would say these are probably going to be

 But either way, you just want to make sure that you have a ripping hot pan.

 If you feel like you have to pull your scallop away from the pan, it's not ready yet.

 Once they get that good brown on it, that's automatically going to happen.

 is you're going to want to start with a little bit of a thick layer of scallops.

 And then you're going to want to start with a little bit of a thin layer of butter.

 We have our pan-seared scallop with our parsnip puree and our braised cabbage.

 Today, while we talk about some useful Japanese words, I want to give you a taste of what we do over on my channel, which is all about two things that I love.

 料理 is cooking, and 教室 is Japanese that any student should know, classroom.

 So, my 料理教室 videos I post entirely in Japanese with English annotations.

 So, if you like cooking and you're studying Japanese, it's a great place to pick up a lot of cooking vocab.

 Today, I'm not going to talk actual cooking terminology, but I'm going to give you a couple of words that I use to discuss not only cooking style, but lifestyle and personality in general.

 They're not opposites in the strictest sense, but I like to think of them as such.

 You measure twice, cut once, and you don't abide any small errors or mistakes.

 A 貴重麺 person could never put up with, say, the audio being off in the video that they made.

 When it comes to cooking, they do everything according to the recipe in the book.

 Japanese people believe that A blood types are more likely to be 貴重麺, while the B blooded are more likely to do things 適当.

 適当 has a wider range in that it can mean appropriate, good enough, or even half-assed.

 But I like 適当 in the sense that it means random, on the spot, whatever works.

 So today, we're going to put together some 適当料理 with ingredients that I guarantee you can find in any Japanese kitchen.

 Like rice, steamed, one onion, chopped, cooking sake, sugar, garlic, crushed or chopped fine, black pepper, and some kind of meat.

 You can do this with chicken, pork, or beef, but I'm in a 贅沢 mood, or an extravagant mood.

 Toss in the onions and stir fry them until they're heated through.

 I slept all morning and then made jungle sounds while you were trying to film.

 Frosting varnish is a wonderful acrylic medium which has been developed to faithfully reproduce the unique visual effect of etched glass.

 Make sure that the stencil is securely fixed to the glass so that it does not move.

 Frosting varnish can be used on vertical or horizontal surfaces.

 Pour out a little frosting varnish into a roller tray and charge the roller.

 When you've finished applying the frosting varnish, you can then carefully remove the stencil.

 Polyvine frosting varnish has been used on display cases at the Natural History Museum in London.

 It¡¦s one of those homely, simple, really, really simple recipe

 And what we¡¦ve done is we¡¦ve taken 1 cup of toor dal and we just rinsed off

 We did not soak it in water, we just rinsed it and put it in here, in a pressure cooker

 And to this we¡¦re going to add 3 cups of water, ¼ teaspoon of turmeric powder, 1 teaspoon

 And we¡¦re going to close the pressure cooker, turn it on high, and give it one whistle,

 and that¡¦s about it And after your one whistle, be sure you turn

 So to this we¡¦re going to add ½ teaspoon of mustard seeds and let them pop

 1 red chili, broken, curry leaves, 1 eighth teaspoon of asafoetida, green chilies, ½

 of a medium onion, chopped here And just give it a mix, and once it¡¦s all

 mixed in, we can add carrion It¡¦s got 1 teaspoon of minced ginger and

 We¡¦re going to cook it till the onions get a little translucent

 It shouldn¡¦t take very long This is a super quick, easy dal recipe, right?

 For those weekday nights when you¡¦re just scrambling for something home-cooked, but

 you just don¡¦t have a lot of time So it¡¦s a really good recipe

 going to add our tomatoes You want a little more tomatoes than what

 So in the meantime, we¡¦ll check on our dal Perfect, it¡¦s not overcooked, but yet

 So right now, this is a little thicker than we¡¦d like it, so we¡¦re going to add

 about a cup of additional water We¡¦ll also add some salt and red chili powder

 All right, it¡¦s come to a boil It took all of, I think, 5 minutes

 We¡¦re going to give it a mix, make sure that the consistency is still the way we want

 it, and it looks perfect So our final step is chopped coriander leaves

 homey, it feels like food that¡¦s good for you, and that is fine

 Relaxing, relaxing, you know, that¡¦s the days when you¡¦re tired and it just relaxes

 you, excellent So you can do us a big favor by telling a friend

 about ShowMeTheCurry.com because we grow by word of mouth, and we need your mouths

 that increases our viewers and helps us out Enjoy your simple dal fry, and join us again

 on another episode of ShowMeTheCurry.com Adding a pinch of spice to your life

 So I'm making a punch bowl cake and I just wanted to share it with you all how I make it

 The first part is to bake your cake and I'm using excuse me the Betty Crocker

 Instructions one cup of water a half a cup of vegetable oil and three eggs

 This is what I have and I put it in the freezer for about 30 minutes

 Okay, step number three is your whipped cream and here's the whipped cream

 Two cans of crushed pineapples and you want to drain the water off of it a

 I would leave the almonds out in case someone is allergic to nuts, but I'm making this for my husband

 Normally you would use an actual punch bowl a glass punch bowl, especially for holidays, but I'm making this at home

 I'm trying to do this without tearing it up, but that's not working.

 It would be very very beautiful and you want to stick this in your refrigerator and

 Hi everyone, today I'm going to be making a very simple gluten-free vanilla cake mix

 I'm not sure when this video will get posted, but I felt like something sweet and this is

 This is the first time I'm using this particular cake mix, but I love all Bob's products.

 I'm going to be using coconut oil rather than canola or vegetable oil.

 I'm going to mix that on low for a few seconds, and I'm going to scrape down the bowl.

 Now we're going to beat it on a medium-low speed for 60 seconds.

 I'm now going to turn it into a 9 by 13 pan that I generously greased.

 This is really working out great because I'm not feeling super great and having a mix that

 I used a digital thermometer when it reached an internal temperature of 205.

 I'm now going to let it completely cool in the pan on a wire rack.

 When I used to work at a bakery, we always froze the cakes prior to frosting them and

 This cake isn't very golden brown, but it does have a nice color.

 To make it super easy, I'm going to be using Pillsbury Creamy Supreme Milk Chocolate frosting,

 I'm going to refrigerate it because it's very hot today so that the frosting isn't too soft.

 In my last tutorial I explained how to make this beautiful two-tone buttercream.

 tutorial I'm going to teach you how to finish this beautiful cupcake.

 wrappers in the market that you can buy but we're gonna make our own.

 are 12 inch in diameter and I like it because I can get more than one cupcake per doily.

With a ruler or a measuring tape you're gonna mark the height of

You're gonna move every couple of centimeters and make a mark with

My cupcake wrapper is around one inch and three quarters in height.

 you want to cut with scissors following the marks that you make.

 first one because you can actually test the first one on the cupcake and find out how long this

So basically you can cut all around your doily and then you can measure

 your first one and then from the measurement of the first one you can cut all of the cupcake wrappers

Once you have them cut, make sure that the paper is the right side towards the

 to the paper of the cupcake and give me a nice start so it doesn't move out of its place.

 stage you can measure your paper and make sure it's not too long and you can cut it.

 good you just put a little bit of glue and just make sure that you put the paper with the paper,

You can put another dot of glue if you feel is necessary but I usually

Once I reach the other side I measure the ribbon, I cut it and then I put a small dot of

You can make a ribbon bow and add it to the bottom of the cupcake.

I have a tutorial on how to make these beautiful and cute flowers.

 don't put some glue in the back of your flower the flower is gonna fall down.

Just add the flowers where you like and just keep adding until you're happy with your

I decided to add mine in between the middle of the two ton buttercream and just make

If your dots are not flat you can push them down with a bit of Viva

 and I'm adding right now dots of piping gel where I'm gonna place my dredges.

 I use a pair of flat pliers to put my dredges on the cake but you can use tweezers too.

 you have to decide what you like and how you want to finish your cupcake.

I hope you enjoyed the tutorial and please go to Facebook and share your creations

I will post the links to Facebook and my website underneath the video so

 This is my favorite tool Suzette and I am so glad you introduced me to this tool

 And I'm really glad that you're sharing it with our audience because this tool is so cool.

 Turntable and the best part about this cutting board is that you can place your ruler down on the cutting board

 Make your cut turn the board without lifting the ruler without moving the fabric and keep cutting

 Now let's make the bag in approximately eight steps you too can have a carry case or your roundabout

 First of all, let's cut from the selvage to the selvage about 21 inches.

 Nice and even fold your fabric in half and run your iron over to create a crease

 That crease will give you an area that you can set your cutting board

 We've sewn the arc the shape of our turntable and now we're going to make the casing for the tie

 We simply fold it down and if you'll notice I cut this leaving this selvaged edge here at the top on purpose

 I don't have to hem this I'm simply going to turn it under here

 This is because I'm going to put a drawstring in here and I might even hang it

 This is a very simple seam we're just going to go completely around the back

 Now you can see this is where the reinforcement of the iron-on patch was

 I made sure we completely covered it when we folded it down just to make sure it can't be seen

 Isn't it wonderful to have this free arm right here so you can just whip your fabric around there

 Can you remember the olden days when we didn't have sewing machines that did this?

 We are ready to round these corners and I'm going to use the top here as my guide

 And I'm going to go right around the corner and move it over and go right around the corner

 Now if you'll notice these two chalk lines are marked all the way behind

 We can turn it and see the chalk marks and take our scissors and just very carefully

 Right through that reinforcing fabric, but just the top layer and make a hole for our thread

 We're going to use a leftover piece of fabric that I have folded over on itself for our tie

 Hi everyone, today I will make canned tuna pancake called chamchi-jeon in Korean.

 Combine the tuna, 2 eggs, chopped vegetables and 3 pinches of salt.

 In a generously oiled and heated pan, place a spoonful of the mixture and make a round

 Fry them until both sides of the pancakes become golden brown on medium high.

 Depending on your taste, dip the pancake in mayonnaise, ketchup, mustard or a combination

 We love to cook together and we love to eat together as a family.

 And while we boil, why don't you tell me what's so healthy about green leafy vegetables?

 You know what's really great about cooking together as a family is that...

 And the more time you spend together, the better relationship you develop with your

 So they're more likely to come to you if they have a problem in school.

 They have less incidence of diabetes and obesity and depression.

 Okay, so the pasta is already cooked, like almost completely ready.

 And then we're going to put pasta in the bowl and put it in this bowl.

 I have a lot right here, a lot on my nose and just a little bit on this side.

 I spent a lot of money on drugstore products and they didn't really do anything for me.

 But did you know that there is a product in your kitchen that can help minimize pores?

 So I'm pretty sure a lot of you guys have baking soda in your kitchen.

 The great thing about baking soda is you can put it in your fridge to eliminate smells,

 Put a little bit on your toothpaste before you brush your teeth.

 I'm going to show you guys how it's done and don't get scared of my no makeup face.

 Hell's Backbone Grill is kind of an intimidating name for a restaurant, but that doesn't stop

 a steady flow of people from coming to this remote part of southern Utah to see and taste

 Blake, Jen, you guys are the two best dressed farmers I've ever seen.

 You grow most of the food that you serve in the restaurant here and there, or mix?

 We grow and source it as much as possible from Boulder, and then we put up a lot at

 Oh yeah, and they're still flowering a little bit on this plant.

 I think this plant here would actually be really ready to harvest.

 You can tell because the flowers are gone and the plant's starting to die back.

 Well, we won't know until we get in there because the way you...

 Almost all the fruit trees in the valley got nipped by a late frost and lost their fruit.

 There are so many because we're at almost 7,000 feet, and so our farming situation is

 Well, this apricot tree just doesn't have any fruit on it, but we luckily...

 Yes, but some of the older varieties of fruit trees that are here in this region did make

 So we harvested a lot of apricots yesterday from the historic National Park orchards in

 But while you're making your crisp, Blake and I are going to just cut up the veggies.

 The first step is to combine apricots with the flour and sugar.

 Most varieties of apricots I find are a little bit tart and a little bit sort of strange texturally.

 The secret ingredient is some beautiful yellow cornmeal to give it a little crunch.

 I'm kind of going to do the pie dough thing where it is a little bit like small peas.

 But I think they're kind of out of our place-based philosophy of the Four Corners food.

 It's a good local ingredient and another Native American element.

 It's actually a recipe that was taught to us by a Navajo family in Canyon de Chelly.

 I'm just cutting up the root vegetables in even pieces so that they cook evenly.

 I'm just going to toss them with a little bit of oil, salt, pepper, and some fresh herbs.

 We don't even need to bother taking the peels off because we're not going to actually serve the garlic, I think, with the roasted vegetables.

 It's really just to infuse the vegetables with the flavor of that garlic.

 When we put it in the oven, it's going to crisp up and it's going to also infuse the vegetables with that amazing, fresh, sort of mentholly flavor.

 And the idea of getting as close to your food as possible, even in the most remote places, is obviously a recipe for success.

 Hey healthy gamers this is Jack here bringing you another healthy gamer

This one's going to be a breakfast video really quick and easy egg

I don't know you'll see but before we get started let me just say

 this everything I put on my channel you know in regards to cooking that's what I

 eat every day and I probably spend 15 to half an hour each day cooking preparing

 reach your goals and to just maintain any sort of desired body composition

 that you want and you know I'm not anything special the only difference

 between me and most other people out there is I'm consistent and I'm

 disciplined with the things I eat and the way I work out and that's really all

 it takes because you know I was a hundred pounds my freshman year of high

 school scrawny little Asian kid and it's just been I've just been consistent with

 it over the years and so that's the message I want to give to you don't feel

 like that any of these things are out of your reach anyone seriously anybody can

 look really good and get the body that they want just through some discipline

 and really not even hard work just consistent work really so get out there

 and it's awesome it's really made life a lot easier but first just crack some

 eggs into the blender I do three eggs so it just kind of depends if you're

 trying to lose weight I probably do one or two eggs trying to gain weight three

 or four eggs next just put the lid on and then blend them up don't worry

 about the color turns a little bit weird I think because air gets in there and it

 gets to be like a almost a white color on the eggs but don't worry about that

 yeah it still tastes good next just throw in a little bit of onions and

 peppers and mushrooms that's what I like to put in my eggs you can put in

 whatever else you like go nuts with it but just throw those in there also I

 like to put some chunks of ham in there for some extra flavor and the extra

 protein again everything kind of what you put in this is depending on your own

 goals and your body composition and how much weight you want to gain or lose so

 that's different but now just kind of blend it up a little bit pulse it so

 you're not trying to make a smoothie out of here but just chop things up into

 small bits next just put it all into a frying pan and then cook it like you

 would scrambled eggs and like I said the color gets a little bit weird it looks a

 little more white than eggs I think should but I think that's just a

 byproduct of blending it up so well it still tastes fine tastes like eggs so

 don't worry about the coloration too much and then like I said you just cook

 it like scrambled eggs and I don't know four or five minutes to cook and you're

 good to go whenever it's about done I like to leave it on high heat for a

 little bit so the eggs get kind of a nice golden brown color that's just a

 preference it's all up to you and there you have it put a little bit of salsa in

 there and it's really delicious this is really a really good nutritious

 breakfast I like it a lot because it has high fat high protein it'll fuel you

 during the day you'll feel you'll get energized from this meal this is not a

 meal that's gonna make you lethargic and tired this is a meal that's gonna make

 you feel like you're on jet fuel so that you can start the day off right and you

 know really have energy through your day and that's the goal that's the goal of

 what you're trying to eat you should not be feeling tired and lethargic you want

 to take a nap after a meal that's not how it's supposed to work and so this is

 if you eat right you're gonna be energized and that's really one of the

 biggest things I've discovered since cutting out a lot of the carbs and

 grains from my diet is that after I eat I feel energy I don't want to take a nap

 anymore so that's just a little little spiel about that and if you go over to

 my website at the healthygamer.com click over to nutrition there are lots of new

 cooking videos just you know different meal ideas for you to that are all you

 know I try to this is all I do and I hate spending tons of time in the

 kitchen I want to be quick efficient so I can go game so I can go work on the

 website do everything else so they're all usually between 5 and 15 minutes to

 prepare and I'll be putting up a lot more so check on over there quite a bit

 and I really appreciate you guys watching again hit like and subscribe

 that really helps me like me on Facebook follow me on Twitter everything like

 So I got these little glitter spangles from BornPrettyStore.com and I'm going to show

 They have free shipping on all their items and it usually takes about 2-3 weeks to get

 So basically you can get these 12 colors for $6.45 and they come in these little jars and

 there's the jar by the side of the jar and like I said, these are like the little hexagon

 Basically you're just going to be repeating the same step over and over again.

 If you can't think in the V shape, try to think of like an M when you're doing your

 I'm just going to take some clear coat and blot that and basically just fill it in with

 I recommend letting your nails sit just for a little bit before you put a top coat on,

 Hi guys, like I said, today I am going to show you how to make a heart out of a dollar

 You don't want a wrinkly one because it wouldn't come out looking nice.

 So the first step on making an origami heart is to make sure it's straight.

 You're going to want to fold each end like this into a triangle form.

 So where they have the little tent flaps, the same thing on the other side.

 Once you have those steps down, you're going to want to fold it like on the inside like

 Once you have that, you have the flaps on the inside, you're going to fold each end right

 So once you have that, open the inside out to where it looks like this.

 So then once you have these, you have these four open flaps actually.

 For each square, there will be like two flaps to where you fold them in like this.

 Once you have all four of them, you're going to want to open each of them.

 Open them like this and push down to where they all look like this.

 So your dollar bill or whatever bill you're using now should look like this.

 And then once that's done, you're going to want to fold one end or the other one downwards.

 The best way to keep it staying like this is if you get a flat iron or something and iron it out.

 It's a great gift to give somebody if they need money or something.

 Hi, this is George Harris coming to you live from the Willow Room.

 Today we're making Saganaki, which is also known as a flaming Greek cheese.

 We have listed on the recipe that there are multiple different cheeses we could use.

 There is Casseri, there is Crephalot Graviere, and Crephalot Torri.

 Today we're using a Romano, which is an Italian cheese substitute.

 We're going to take and just use 4 ounces of it, but you can do this for a party or

 What we're going to do is cut it into really nice sized squares.

 I've had this out so it is at room temperature and it's easier to cut.

 You can leave them this size, but I'm going to cut them in half.

 You can use a whisk if you have it, but I just choose to use a fork.

 Next, we're going to take the cheese and dip it into the egg wash first, which seems to

 We want to have the cheese represent itself when you get ready to eat it.

 We're just going to bread the rest of the pieces just like this.

 Now, if you have your cheese ready, you've got your cheese breaded, we're going to come

 You have a non-stick pan, which works just as well as a cast iron pan.

 If not, you need a heavy bottom pan because you want to pick up the heat and not really

 Now, once you get your pan to heat, we're going to take and lay the cheese in away from

 You don't want to put too much in here because you're overloaded and it doesn't keep the heat.

 You're thinking cheese in a hot pan is going to make a gooey mess.

 Well, that's why we use a hard cheese like the ones mentioned in the recipes.

 They actually hold well to the heat and they'll hold their shape.

 What we're going to do now is let them sit for about a minute or two, maybe a little

 We just want to get some color on them, like a nice golden brown.

 When they reach that point, we're going to take and flip them over and do the same thing

 Then we're going to take it off the heat and we'll get ready to plate it and set it on fire.

 We're going to put a few pieces around, set it up on the plate.

 This is going to be used to add flavor and extinguish the cheese once we do set it on fire.

 This is a Remy Martin fine champagne cognac that we're using here.

 Not your average one of the mills, but we're going to get ready to set this on fire.

 Now what you're going to do is you're going to take your alcohol of choice, brandy, cognac.

 And we're going to let the cheese actually burn and catch on fire from the cognac.

 And now we're going to squeeze it over the flame, put the flame out.

 At the same time, we're going to add a little bit of saltiness from the lemon juice into the cheese.

 Which really isn't listed on the recipe, but doing it for a little bit of color here.

 We made a recipe today called Saganaki, which is flaming Greek cheese.

 They will have the Quesary, a couple of Tori, a couple of Graviere,

 I wanted to go over the long head and the short head for you guys because I found a

 lot of varying information across the internet and I just wanted to give you guys a short

 video that kind of lays both of the theories that I believe in out on video.

 And they're the two main theories that I've seen and I've heard other people try to say

 that it's impossible to target the long head or target the short head, but we're going

 to focus on the two main theories and I completely disagree with anybody that tries to say you

 And the reasoning for that is because so many people end up over developing one without

 the other and if you couldn't target one of them specifically, then there's no way that

 one of them should be able to get bigger without the other one getting bigger.

 The first one I call grip theory and basically the idea behind this one is that relative

 to your grip is what's going to determine which one you're targeting.

 This is going to be a semi-supinated, neutral or hammer grip where your palms are facing

 This is going to be a pronated grip where your palms are actually facing down.

 So what I believe for targeting the short head, which the short head is going to be

 the inside of your bicep like right here and the long head is going to be the outside of

 And it's going to be, the long head is going to attach up above the shoulder and come down

 while the inner one is the short head that's going to attach right in here.

 And so basically when you're targeting the short head you're going to want to use that

 supinated grip or palms up and the more your palms are facing up with your pinky side of

 your hands up, the more you're going to be targeting that short head.

 So if you just took your fist, clenched and did a curling motion like that with your pinky

 side really high up, you should be able to feel it a lot more on the inside of your bicep

 versus if you did a pronated, sorry a semi-supinated grip or a neutral or hammer grip which is

 palms facing each other, then if you did the same thing you should feel it a little bit

 So again this is going to be, if you're trying to target the short head you would use a supinated

 And then if you were going to try to target the long head you would do a hammer curl like

 Now as far as using a bar like an easy grip bar or any type of barbell, what you're going

 to do is basically if your grip is inside of your shoulder width that's going to be

 considered targeting the long head, while if it's outside of your shoulder width that's

 So here's an easy grip bar and this would be targeting the long head.

 Now if we just widen our grip and go like that, that just targeted the short head.

 Now keep in mind that you can do things where you're targeting both, for instance if you're

 using kind of just a natural grip where it's not really fully supinated or fully semi-supinated

 but instead it's just kind of natural where your hands are, you're probably going to end

 So even on an easy grip bar there's these grips where you can just hold it at kind of

 a natural position, kind of right along your shoulder width and the grip isn't one way

 So keep that in mind and then another thing you can keep in mind is whenever you're doing

 curls you can either be targeting the long head, the short head or if you want a combination

 start with a hammer and kind of turn it into a normal curl with the supination at the top.

 So keep that in mind and then also that's going to be pretty much everything for grip

 theory so just keep that stuff in mind and remember that this is going to be palms up,

 Supinated neutral or hammer is going to hit the long head and then in between will hit

 both of them and then pronated grip is going to hit your forearms a lot more but I also

 So it's kind of like the further you rotate your hands all the way with pinkies up and

 palms up you're going to be hitting more of the short head and then the more you rotate

 I would highly recommend trying to stick with more of a semi supinated grip or neutral hammer

 if you're going to be doing long head but when you do a pronated grip I also think that

 will hit your long head so keep that stuff in mind and then the second theory is going

 So check this out, if I put my arms back behind my body and you wouldn't do this standing

 but if you're doing an exercise like incline dumbbell curl your elbows are going to start

 behind your body because you're laying at a kind of like an incline of like 45 degrees

 or something like that or you could even do it on a flat bench and then your elbows are

 going to be behind your body with your supposedly your long head stretched out and you would

 curl up and people say that that really stretches the long head because your long head comes

 up over your shoulder and so when it's pulled back like that basically your long head is

 at it's full extension and so you're really hitting it really hard.

 So then to hit the short head you would do the opposite and basically it would be considered

 that anything where your arms start in front of your body you're targeting your short head.

 So that's why a lot of people will recommend preacher curls when you're targeting your

 short head because your arms are so far out in front of you before you even start the

 So if you guys have any questions on this or anything else feel free to hit us up at

 This time of year, we're seeing a high interest in wood stoves.

 One of our most popular stoves is the Hampton H300, which we have showing in our showroom.

 This eye-catching stove is available in two colors, the charcoal gray or the enamel finish

 The second are these optional side shelves, which when placed on here, like we've done

 What you do is you pull out these log holders, and inside we have this tool that comes with

 This tool has a little notch that grabs this plug in the bottom of the stove.

 Then you simply use this and push the ashes into the hole on the bottom of the stove.

 Once you've cleaned your stove and pushed all the ashes down into the hole, you simply

 Then you're able to take the ash drawer out of the bottom of the stove.

 This could bring up a problem in some homes with carpet or children that are running around

 What Regency has done is they've put a sliding top cover on their ash pan that you can simply

 go like that, cover the hole, and it gives you an easy way to take the ashes outside

 and dispose of them in a clean manner and keep your home clean.

 You then simply put the ash drawer back under the stove and slide it in.

 There's two ways you can put in this log, through the front door like any other stove,

 but Regency's taken it to the next step and they've put a side door on the stove for you

 This rod simply controls the heat output of your stove by letting in more or less air

 This is done when this stove is ran at its peak efficiency using good seasoned wood.

 It's going to then use its air wash technology to keep the glass clean, less creosote in

 your venting, therefore resulting in less emissions going out into the environment.

 It can also use the help of a two-speed blower, which is optional, and the air comes out from

 Now who wouldn't want to end a cold winter day sitting next to their Hampton Woods stove?

 Here we are in my cozy little kitchen and I want to share with you folks a probiotic

 What they are, they're soybeans that have been cooked until soft and you add to them

 a bacteria that in Japan lives on, believe it or not, the dry stalks of rice plants.

 It's one of those accidental foods that was invented thousands of years ago when somebody

 in Japan for winter packed cooked soybeans into rice straw and lo and behold it's yet

 I had not made a batch in about a year and a guy in a car forum I belonged to yesterday

 had posted, he's in Australia, despite being a big strapping young guy the poor guy had

 gotten a clot, I mean just in his lung and I believe also one in his leg and he asked

 It's literally one bacteria, Bacillus natto, colonizes the cooked beans and produces a

 Now this has only been fermenting since about 10 o'clock last night.

 What you do is you get them warm in the oven and then put a towel in the door to keep the

 I serve it Japanese style on top of hot rice with a dollop of yellow Asian mustard, small

 Old style Japanese, eat it daily, a small amount for breakfast and it's been confirmed

 that this one enzyme that's in it, whose name I never can remember, I think it's called

 natokinase, literally is a super effective anticoagulant, but what's better is it digests,

 It also has a very special form of vitamin K2 that's good for health.

 They say unfortunately as young Japanese people move away from eating old style food like

 this to KFC and crappy burgers, etc., they're losing the health benefits that nato provides.

 Many Americans, maybe even most Westerners for that matter, find the odor and the taste

 and in particular the texture because of that slime coating utterly repugnant.

 What's funny is a little tiny box imported from Japan in a little tiny styrofoam box

 with breathing holes is so expensive, but I can make this huge quantity.

 Like this here probably cost me a dollar worth of organic non-GMO soybeans.

 I already had the nato starter in the freezer, which I thawed out.

 What I'm going to do is let this ferment one more day until I get more of the slime spider

 I have a few friends who love it, not only for the health benefits, but also they do

 Let's see if I can one more time in the sunshine show the beginnings of the spider web.

 But this is a classic probiotic food with centuries of history to back up the claims

 If you want to give it a try, you can get one small styrofoam box in many Asian market

 They usually have a little tiny, tiny packet of yellow mustard and soy sauce in there.

 That way you'll know without committing a whole lot of money if you like it or not.

 I'm very fond of it and I'm sorry that I got out of the habit of making it for an entire

 But I'm going to share with you folks here, if I eat some daily, it will probably last

 But I thought I'd share with you folks, since I like making probiotic foods and doing home

 preservation, something that I feel Western culture needs to take a good long look at.

 I hope this gives you some ideas about making your own probiotic foods at home for health

Today I'll be teaching you how to get this pewter and diamond smokey eye.

 my lid and then grab my Sigma P82 brush and use that to blend it in on my upper lid and

 Now going in with the color mauve, we're working that into the upper crease and just using

 and we're going to pat that only onto the outer V area of our eye as well as just the

 Now I'm grabbing the color black and we're just going to deepen up the areas where we

I also kind of start to work it into the crease just slightly and

 Now I'm grabbing the color pewter on my E55 brush and just applying that directly onto

 the center where we left it blank and then just blending it in with the darker colors.

 Next I grab my Lorac 3D liquid luster drops in the color diamond and I'm just using an

 Once again I use my smaller and bigger blending brushes just to blend everything together

 using that to tight line and also line my lower waterline as well.

 I'm grabbing that black color again and just working that onto my lower lash line keeping

 it pretty high up in the lash line and then I grab the color espresso on my small blending

 Now I'm just curling my lashes and then I'll be applying my Maybelline big eyes mascara

 Think Pink and on top of that I applied L'Oreal Fairest Nude all over the lips.

If you recreate any of my looks and you post them on Instagram be

 I'm Scott from Scotthermanfitness.com and if you're looking for a great way to target

 your lats, we're here at the SideX Lat Pulldown Machine and in your gym you'll be able to

 find machines that are similar to this one so the form and technique is basically the

 If you're trying to lift heavy to gain muscle, what you want to do is make sure that when

 you sit down that these pads are on top of your quads so you can hold yourself in the

 So what I would do is lower this a little more, grab the handles and then sit down and

 And now that I'm locked in, I can perform the exercise and focus on my back as opposed

 to if the padding was up too high, then I'd be flying out of the seat.

 Now if you want to focus more on targeting your core while doing this exercise, just

 lift this all the way up, get it out of the way, put the weight a little lighter and now

 You want to put your hands in the middle of the handles like this, okay?

 What you're going to do is pull down and you're going to sit, you're going to put your legs

 at a 90 degree angle, you're going to keep your core tight, your back straight, your

 elbows are going to be in line with your hips and by that I mean they're not going to come

 back like this, they're actually going to be in front of you like that.

 And what you're going to do is you're going to pull down and you're going to bring it

 down to the tops of your shoulders and then come back up and now you don't want to come

 all the way up like this because you're deactivating your lats.

 What you want to do is bring it down, come up to just about here so there's still a slight

 bend in your elbows that's keeping all the muscles activated and then pull back down.

 You can also just exercise another way which is grabbing the inside handles.

 What you want to do is grab the handles like this, come down the same way, position your

 feet the same way, keep your back arched, hands in front of you, make sure your wrists

 are straight, head up, don't bring your head down and don't bring it back for each exercise.

 And again, come up to the slight bend in your elbows, bring it all the way down to your

 Alright guys, I just want to give you another angle of the machine so you can see the muscles

 So again, if you're doing heavy weight, bring the pad down so that when you sit down you're

 If you want to activate your core, lift that up so you can hold yourself in the seat, put

 your hands in the middle of the handles, bring it down, keep your back arched, elbows in

 line with hips, make sure your wrists are straight and make sure you maintain a neutral

 And you might not do it that way, I see it happen like that a lot, especially with beginners,

 is the weight will be so light that when they bring it down they think they have to go like

 See the muscles aren't really being, they're not contracted right now, but if I go like

 And then the second way to do the exercise, again, is holding the inside handles, bringing

 More tips, stay tuned, don't forget to subscribe, and we'll move on to the next machine.

 designed for Stencil Girl, and with this one right now what I'm doing is not

 gonna just put color in some of the diamonds and not all of them, the colors

Well, I'm an impatient stenciler, stamper, creator person, so I don't mask a

 now I am just gonna cut along one set of lines and I don't even have to be that

 position it on the top and the bottom I'm just holding it in place with my

 hand and I'm realizing I have bumped into about 800 things today.

 repositionable tape will work, to keep the stencil from moving as I keep doing

 mask it off so that as I put the color in it only goes where I want it to go.

 with this so I can keep things as absolutely rainbow pure as possible.

 I'm doing this, it's, this is just so incredibly forgiving I can't even begin

Because if I don't have the mask exactly right I just kind of wiggle

 it and position it and magically I am actually staying within the lines.

 you're enjoying this video you know I'd love it if you subscribe to my YouTube

 channel or found me over on Google Plus or on Facebook so you can stay updated

 new video with a stencil and I have a giveaway every single day on my blog.

 chances to win every time you share the video or the post you can come back and

 pointy ends on this so I didn't actually use the entire stencil.

 actually even dried on some of the early ones and so I'm gonna peel that off and

 J hooks right on these and I'm gonna hang them up and keep them with the

 stencil so I don't even have to make this mask next time I want to use it.

 Ok, so now the pieces have baked and I did a few more pendants as well so I've got to

 then just use my finger and sort of tap so it gets in all the little crevices.

 goes on it's actually, oops I'm sorry, it is actually kind of milky looking but it dries

 and then once that's dry I'll turn it over and do the other side as well.

 will show you is what I like to do on one of the other pendants but actually I haven't

 sealed it or anything but I just wanted to show you how I attach the thread.

Ok this is just a way to thread it on without using a jump ring basically.

And the nice thing about that is a jump ring is metal and sometimes that

 will rub against the clay and sometimes that will, you know, take away some of the clay

Pop a couple of jump rings on there and a clasp and then it's all ready

These are some of my favourite things and when I'm teaching polymer clay,

 especially the intro class, this is how we start off and then sky's the limit.

 we'll be doing more polymer clay demos and I really hope this wasn't too long and tedious

 Hey everyone, in this video we're taking a look at the powered cradle and suction cup

 mount that come in the box with the 7-inch Garmin Automotive and Trucking GPS units.

 If you purchase a Garmin Diesel 760 LMT, a Garmin RV 760 LMT, a Nuvi 2757 LM or a Nuvi

 2797 LMT, this is the mount that you are going to get in the box with it.

 There are two parts here, you have a suction cup and you have a cradle, these are detachable.

 The suction cup has a ball on the end, the cradle has a socket in the back so you can

 The nice thing about the cradle is that the socket in the back just uses that standard

 G-ball connection, so if you have a friction mount you've used with a Nuvi in the past

 or maybe an Arkon mount with a G-ball connection, you can still use this cradle with it.

 The cradle fits onto the back of the 7-inch Garmin, there's sort of a lip running along

 the top of the cradle that's going to fit into the back of this rectangle on the back

 of the Garmin, so push that up into place and then just push down on the bottom of the

 Now you can go ahead and use your GPS, power it by plugging your power cable there into

 If this were a cradle for the RV760 or the diesel 760, you would also have a port for

 This is the cradle for the 2797 and 2757, so I really only have the connection for the

 There's a large button on the bottom of the GPS that releases the cradle, so push that

 down so that cradle will pop out a little bit and then you can just pull that right

 The suction cup you can affix to a flat surface such as glass or if you have adhesive for

 use with your Garmin, what you can do is just put that down on the flat surface.

 There's a lever there on the side you can push down to engage the suction cup and pull

 There's also a lip there on the edge of the bottom which you can pull up to release it

 This is the one that would have shipped with all the Nuvis in the past.

 The larger one is the one for 7-inch models and you can see of course the one for the

 7-inch Garmins is quite a bit larger because it has a larger GPS to support and more weight

 The difference in diameter between these two is about half an inch.

 The nice thing is that you can actually use this larger suction cup with an older Garmin

 Nuvi if you have a 1490 or a 1370, any of those, it's that same G-ball connection.

 So you can actually purchase this suction cup by itself which you can do under Garmin

 So that is a quick look at the Garmin powered cradle and suction cup mount for use with

 Если вы не знаете некоторые из аккордов, которые мы будем играть сегодня,

 Installing a patio or a walkway requires a little more than just digging a hole and setting

 Taking the time to design and lay out your patio or walkway will ensure that you have

 Now once you've viewed this video, go to Lowes.com slash videos to see how to prepare

 There's some key points that you may want to consider for your patio or walkway.

 But always remember, it's your house, so choose a design that you like.

 To help you determine the size and location of your patio or walkway, think about how

 An attractive area to entertain friends would work well near a pool or along the house.

 A quiet retreat for you and your family near a garden might include a walkway and a small

 An outdoor barbecue area for summer cookouts would be most functional near your house.

 And if you plan to use any existing outdoor furniture, design an area large enough to

 Installing a patio or walkway allows you to be a little creative, too.

 Pavers and stepping stones are available in many different styles, colors and shapes.

 So whether you want the look of brick pavers, cut stone or natural stone, you can customize

 The easiest patterns to install are jack-on-jack and basket weave.

 Patterns such as pinwheel, a 90-degree herringbone and a 45-degree herringbone are a little more

 Our patio uses a running bond pattern, which has staggered joints and isn't as difficult

 To see the installation, watch How to Install a Paver Patio at Lowes.com slash videos.

 Of course, when choosing your pattern, you'll want to pick a design that works well with

 If your home has a traditional appearance, a jack-on-jack or a running bond pattern may

 If you're looking for something a little more contemporary, use a pinwheel design.

 So now that you have some ideas of how to design your walkway or patio, it's time to

 You'll need nylon mason string, some wood stakes, a hammer, marking paint, a line level,

 a tape measure, and a garden hose and sand if marking random curves.

 The time it will take to complete your project will depend on its size, so plan ahead.

 For example, you may want to devote one weekend to preparing the foundation and the next for

 Also, before any digging project, have a professional mark the location of electrical or gas lines.

 At Downing 811, you'll be connected to your local utility company for assistance free

 By marking off the area you'll be paving with nylon mason string and stakes.

 Make sure your path or patio steers clear of large trees so you can avoid disturbing

 One way to make random curves is to create the shape on the ground using a garden hose.

 The sand will mark the shape after the hose has been removed so you'll know where to dig.

 We mark these curves by tying a piece of string to a stake that has equal distance

 Then we tie the other end of the string to a can of marking paint.

 Once you have the area laid out, step back, take a look, and make sure it's exactly the

 After making any necessary adjustments, you can measure the square footage to determine

 In our lawn and garden area, you'll find helpful guides to make the calculations.

 And you'll also appreciate knowing that your Lowe's associate can arrange for delivery

 To learn how to prep your patio, watch Laying the Foundation for a Patio or Walkway at Lowes.com

 slash videos for the details on completing that portion of your project.

 First of all we're going to start with the head, and we're going to be doing soft strokes,

 So you would start with the front of the horse first and work back.

 in starting further back and then coming back forwards because you would have already pushed

 I'm then going to take my curry comb, and it's really important that every couple of

 strokes that the body brush is cleaned out, or the metal curry comb cleans the body brush.

 And we're going to do really good strong long strokes which will increase the horse's circulation

 I'm then going to walk away and tap my curry comb out of the dust.

 I'm going to do just a homemade banging pad, but if you go to the Saddler you can get a

 big suede pad, you could also make a hay wisp, an old fashioned hay wisp, if you've got an

 old pony club manual or an old fashioned horse care book you'll be given diagrams how

With the suede banger you obviously wouldn't want to dampen it down,

 but with the hay wisp or with the towel we would dampen it, squeeze out any excess and

 bony areas of the horse, we're actually going to go for the big muscle groups.

 be thinking about our ideal show horse or our dressage horse with good muscular development

 and we would be going for the main muscles along the crest of the neck, we'd avoid the

 wither area, we'd avoid the back, but then going along to the hindquarters we could certainly

 target the gluteal muscles and the biceps and try and promote some bigger muscle mass

So we're just going to reassure the horse and then we're going to do a little

 strike and then a sweep away which will encourage the muscles in that area to tense and therefore

 rather like going to the gym we're strengthening and building up that area.

 rather than having the horse tied up in case the horse, as I said at the beginning, gets

 and then away and you can hit a good strong blow and you can see his muscle tensing and

And you could just start with just a couple of those a day and then building

 Hi, I'm Robert Rodriguez and welcome to the 10 Minute Cooking School.

 That's right, the slow roasted pork that Agent Sands craves, and sometimes kills for.

 It is a slow roasted pork, nothing fancy, just happens to be my favorite.

 In today's episode, I'm going to show you how to cook that dish.

 I've got a lot of friends who don't know how to cook, which I can never understand because

 So what I'm going to show you today is how to make a very simple dish, just complicated

 Now the thing about this dish is that there is a bit of preparation to it.

 Just a little bit more than your normal everyday couch potato would do.

 Pibil is a dish from the Yucatan and it uses anato, also known as achiote.

 These are a hard, earthy looking seed that gives the meat its color.

 Now you might already have one for coffee, but don't use that one.

 We're going to be doing with this stuff is making achiote paste.

 And so as long as we're doing this all from scratch, let's just go all the way.

 You will need five tablespoons of anato seeds, two teaspoons of cumin seed, tablespoon of

 These are sticks, you know, you got to grind them up in the grinder.

 This is very important because anato seeds are hard as rocks and if you don't pulverize

 these into a fine dust, it's going to be gritty, stuck in your teeth.

 We're going to take the seeds out and take out the veins, so we'll wimp it down a little

 If you want to turn up the heat, surprise your friends, leave a few seeds in there.

 Add the powder, two tablespoons of salt, eight cloves of garlic.

 Then blend it so it gets even more liquefied because the smoother the better.

 Add the juice of five lemons and a splash of the finest tequila you can find.

 And that's exactly what took this dish over the top, drove Sanz loco so that he went and

 You don't want any steam escaping because that's how the meat is going to cook.

 So what's great about this dish is that you can go on about your business.

 Okay, since we've got a few hours, let's take a minute just to talk about how to learn to

 Now pick two or three of your favorite dishes and learn how to cook them really well.

 If your dream restaurant, what would your dream restaurant have?

 If someone were to come over to my house, they could look at the menu and ask me to

 Now add half a cup of flour and whisk until there are no clumps.

 And put an eighth of a cup or two tablespoons of your batter onto the plate.

 And to check out our full recipe, check our website, zappyrepeat.com.

 So comment below for any recipe suggestions that you may have for us.

 Or if you just want to give us a shout out or just tell us or ask us anything, comment below.

 And if you want to know how to do this look, just keep on watching.

 So because this makeup is very intense, we start off by using a base and I'm using here

 And then I'm getting some samples from Just This Girl and I'm patting that on all over

 my eyelid with a flat brush, synthetic fiber brush, to get more intensity.

 Pressing on the color onto your eyelid will get you more intense color.

 Then I'm taking the other sample from Just This Girl and I'm placing this color in the

 inner part of my eyes with a 217 brush to have a kind of medium coverage of the pigment.

 And with the same brush, you come and blend the edges of the first color.

 Once this is done, you take your gel eyeliner, the one I'm using here is the one that I bought

 The fact that we've used the black eyeliner before the color helps to get more intensity

 You start creating the kind of shape you want to do with your eye makeup with the 217 brush,

 blending brush, and you start off by stretching up the color a little bit on the outward line

 Once that you're happy with the light color blending, you take another blending brush

 and you will apply a dark shade in the outer corner of your eyes.

 The one I'm using here is the 224 by MAC and I'm just using a black color.

 To achieve this look, you need to keep on blending and blending and blending, mixing

 the colors together, the blue and the black, the blue and the black again and again and

 Once this is done, you do the exact same thing on the lower lash line.

 I'm using here a 219 by MAC and you sort of link the two together, the upper lash line

 The fact that we've used the black beforehand helps you to get more intensity.

 Just keep on stretching the color on the side and this is the look you get once you get

 Just one whole complete meal that's going to take you no more than five to seven minutes

 The only thing with this, I would recommend the longer it sits prior to you having it,

 It really just marinates and comes up with a really rich flavor.

 I took them out of the bag and dried them so they wouldn't have a lot of moisture.

 You buy the nice big lump crab meat in a can and it makes a great crayfish.

 The crab meat I'm going to use this time, I'm going to use my lemon pepper oil because

 it gives a little bit of flavor beside the lemon with the pepper.

 I'm going to add a couple of other things to it so it brings out all the flavors.

 Now, the first thing I'm going to do is I've washed my lemon and I use this lemon zester

 because this is really critical that you get good zest in the dish.

 Not only does it add color but also when you're eating it, believe it or not, the lime flavor

 I'm also going to squeeze the zest, the lime, into the dish so it gives it that nice rich flavor.

 I don't need really anything else from a liquid perspective except for the lime juice and the oil.

 You can get these any place at Bed Bath & Beyond but I use a half a lime.

 Then I'm going to take my avocado and put some fresh avocado in there.

 I want to just chop it up real quick and easy and then it makes nice, nice cubes.

 And he comes up with some great ideas of his own and always throws in how great and nutritional all this stuff is.

 And it's a great tropical fruit and you can pretty much get this all year round, especially in the frozen form.

 Now, a trick with avocado, once you cut up an avocado and you're not ready to use it,

 just sprinkle some lemon juice on top and put it in a ziplock bag.

 So now, the other thing which I'm going to put in this is cilantro.

 So you've got to be a little cautious on how much cilantro you like.

 So we're going to start out with a good amount, but not an overpowering amount.

 The art of cooking should always be mixing and playing with color, temperature, heat, flavors, herbs, spices.

 The wonderful thing about these marinades is that that's precisely what it allows us to do.

 This could be the most low tech production I've ever done, but I'm doing literally

 20 pounds of pulled pork in the traditional hickory cooker that I have, but I've had

 a lot of requests from people wanting me to do a turkey and show you how to do it on a

 So that's what I'm going to do here at Barbecue My Way, and I apologize in advance

 What we do is we render down hickory logs over here, and you see the red at the bottom,

 We take that out with a shovel, a coal shovel, and we move it over here.

 And up here, I have some shoulder and Boston butt, about five of them, total of about 30

 But now, I'm going to show you how to do a turkey and pulled pork here on the Weber.

 A lot of people like to set it up with all the coals on one side.

 I think that creates uneven heating, so I like to put coals on both sides.

 If we're trying to make traditional, why should this unit use water?

 All right, what I have here is a turkey, and then I have apples and onions.

 A lot of people like to put stuffing in there and then eat the stuffing.

 It creates steaming effect inside the turkey, and it also gets all those delicious flavors

 You'll need to take those out and discard them, unless you're going to make giblet gravy.

 Even though this bird is filled with skin, I still like to sprinkle some seasoning on

 And some of that flavor may get inside the bird, but not a lot of it.

 You're probably thinking, hey Dave, this are briquettes without wood in them.

 Actually they say there's some mesquite in it, but I don't buy it.

 I like to use the other real charcoal, but all I have are briquettes.

 Don't worry about the flames, because you'll be putting a lid on in here in a second.

 We'll have to add briquettes and hickory maybe every 45 minutes or so.

 Let's go inside, watch a little football, and then I'll check with you guys later.

 We've let it cool or rest for 10 to 15 minutes to let the juices redistribute.

 Now I'm going to cut into it so you can see just how nice this bird is.

 About 160 degrees is what I pull it off at when the breast temperature is around 160.

 It usually rises another 10 degrees so 170 is where you want it to be when it's all said

 That was there to help moisten the bird and to obviously bring the flavors up into the

 What's great is Thanksgiving Day will do it this way which frees up the kitchen, the two

 It's a great place for the guys to go out, smoke a cigar, have a nice cocktail, talk,

 Right, what we're going to do here then, is we're going to put a little bit of a

 wood in our cleaving brake and we're just going to use the throw and the mallet to start

So just hold it on the top, a good firm hit, and then bring it up into the cleaving

And you can see that the crack is already starting to run down there.

 do now is just push the throw in a little further and lever and you can see the crack

 of wood here that we're going to actually split to make the rails of our gate hurdle.

Put the throw onto the top of the piece of wood, hit it firmly with

And again, straight away, you can see the crack coming down through

Just put it up into the cleaving brake, lean on that and then look down

 through there and you can see, there we go, there's a piece of wood.

So using the bodger's axe, the specialist axe, just to trim down

 and remove some of the bigger pieces of wood before you got onto the draw knifing side of

So there you go, just take the big edge off the front of there, turn it round, do the same

 easier to actually remove quite a lot of the wood with an axe than it is to keep doing it with the

Now we're going to be using a draw knife here and just shaving down

 our wood that we've split into the shape of the actual whale that we want to make our gate hurdle.

 The wood is obviously fresh wood, nice and green, and with a good sharp draw knife you can fairly

 that will then fit into the hole that you're going to drill in the upright.

 it down and then use the test hole we have here to see if it'll actually fit.

 now need to just remove the rest of the bark and shape the piece of wood.

 using the old shave horse here, nice and easily there, just drawing it down.

 And then of course we've got to do the same thing on the other end, draw it down to a round as well.

 and basically all that does is allows us to mark the piece of wood and show where all of the holes

 through there, put the piece of wood in the device and then using a conventional bracing bit we'll

Now needless to say you want it in the middle of the piece of wood and also each

 about old tools saying they don't work, but if they're prepared properly and sharpened well I

 think they work a lot of the time nearly as well as some of the modern electric drills.

 move it up now so we can drill through the rest of the holes in that end rail.

 Drill's come through the back of there, just need to go back to the shave horse now and just tidy up

Again we tend to do this much more finely than they would have done.

 the floor and then just take our rails and our mallet, put the first one in the hole, give it a

 tap and then hold it with your foot whilst you do the same thing for the rest of them.

 been trimmed up as they should be, this shouldn't be too much of a problem.

 other half, so just capture the first one, come across, capture the second one and so on down the side.

 If there are any problems, if it's gone a bit twisted, you can ease them and the other thing

 you can sometimes do, if they're slightly out of line, you can just twist them round.

So now all we do is lay our gate hurdle down onto the floor and go and get the other rails that we need to finish it off.

 Sometimes with your piece of wood you'll find that it's got quite an interesting curve in it, so you then look to use that curve, so we then use those to make up the other bits and pieces.

 Then all you do is cut those to shape and nail them into place.

Here now you can see the nails have been driven through the rails and then bent over, it's what they call clinching, so these nails are clinched over and they act like rivets holding the gate together.

 Machiniger's quilting gloves available at the Daystyle Designs quilt shop.

 Support this free motion quilting project and get the best grip on your

 quilts so they're easy to free motion quilt on your home sewing machine.

 This design is stitched by first coming up with a set of jagged lines.

 just going to kind of zigzag around your quilt almost like a lightning bolt.

 you're going to create a triangle shape on the end of that lightning bolt.

 tightly stacked together and completely filling the quilting space.

 little tricky to see right here simply because this is so tiny, but if you

 that's really what it is, it's a triangle at the end of your lightning bolt is

 echo stitch from the tip of the triangle all the way back down.

 doing is you're stitching basically lightning bolt with straight lines and

It creates a very interesting texture because you're mixing that

 kind of very heavy stitch pattern of pebbling inside that triangle with some

 fit this into very tiny or complex areas like the areas around a very intricate

 Baltimore album applique would be a bad choice for this design.

Just trying to keep it as consistently as possible as I can with

 combination of the pizza shapes being surrounded by those lines of echo

Only instead of flowing lines you're stitching straight lines and sharp

So it's going to work similarly to all of those branching designs.

 stitch either of those other two designs you can likely stitch this too.

 really interesting how some quilters will prefer straight line designs over

 I'm just kind of stitching in some straight lines just trying to keep this

 and stitch some straight lines back and forth filling that area keeping it

So bearing all that in mind here's what it looks like whenever you

 For over 250 videos on free motion quilting including Poseidon's eye and

 heart flow two designs I mentioned in this video check out daystyledesigns.com

 Hey, you caught me right in the middle of mincing my garlic for today's recipe.

 Now this recipe is perfect for when you're making enchiladas, tacos, burritos.

 You can sprinkle it in your quesadillas or you can sprinkle it on top of your nachos.

 Now I'm going to be coming out with a Super Bowl nacho recipe so be sure and subscribe

 I'm going to show you how to make this delicious Mexican ground beef right after this.

 I've got about a pound and a half here and I'm using 100% grass fed so I do that whenever

 We have some tomato sauce, I have some minced garlic, some salt, some oregano, and some

 We're going to start off by sautéing our onions for about five minutes.

 So I'm just going to cook these until they get nice and soft and a little translucent.

 Alright, you can see here that our onions are softened up quite a bit and it's time

 I'm going to sprinkle that around and we're going to cook this until the hamburger is

 And you want to break it up with your spoon or your spatula, whatever you're using.

 And usually for tacos you want your hamburger to be in small little pieces so break it accordingly.

 So I'm cooking this over medium high heat and you can see that I'm just working the

 Guys, make sure that you cook it until you see no pink in the meat at all.

 You don't want to end up with one of those foodborne illnesses.

 And you can see here that I have quite a bit of grease in my ground beef so I'm going to

 go ahead and drain mine off before I add the rest of my ingredients.

 I just put a lid on this pan and tipped it over and poured it out into a cup.

 I'm a big fan of spreading things out so that everything gets the flavor.

 And we're just going to cook the garlic like this for just maybe two or three minutes.

 It's going to make that garlic taste, mellow it out a little bit so it doesn't have as

 Again I'm going to sprinkle it around so it's evenly dispersed.

 And if it seems really thick to you, you can always add just a little bit of water to this.

 Because I want to just simmer it for maybe five or ten minutes just to get all the flavors

 Because while we simmer this, it's going to cook back out anyway.

 This will help emulsify or mix in those spices that we just added.

 So now we're just going to let this simmer, like I said, for five or ten minutes.

 And we'll be ready to use it in, you know, any number of recipes that we talked about

 Go ahead and give it a taste and see if you need to add some salt.

 You can use it in your tacos, burritos, enchiladas, you name it.

 Anyway, and also I want to leave you a couple links so you can find some other recipes like

 And don't forget that I'm going to be making that Super Bowl Nacho recipe coming up pretty

 Thanks for watching and I think I'm going to go make me some nachos right now.

 Gosu kimchi is a style of kimchi from North Korea's Hwanghae province where Kaesong,

 Now most Korean food bloggers will tell you that Koreans don't eat cilantro.

 They'll tell you that Korea has never grown cilantro and that cilantro is not a part of

 You'll also be hard pressed to find any cilantro recipes in most Korean cookbooks.

 Some Korean food writers blame this lack of cilantro on South Korea's relative isolation

 I would submit to you that the main reason is South Korea's isolation from their brothers

 In the course of my research I discovered gosu is actually a well-known ingredient in

 Although Kaesong is only 35 miles north of Seoul, in a lot of ways it might as well be

 10,000 miles away in terms of the cold war isolation of the two cities from one another.

 Also in my research I found that there are Buddhist temple restaurants keeping gosu dishes

 For example, Kim Young-sik, a former Buddhist priest, opened a restaurant over 20 years

 ago called Samcheon which specializes in Korean temple cuisine.

 This is how he explained the history of gosu in Korean cuisine.

 Quote, gosu is thought to have been imported during the Goryeo dynasty.

 It has a peculiar fragrance, so much so that it is a representative food for self-discipline.

 The Goryeo dynasty ruled the Korean peninsula from 918 to 1392 AD.

 And during part of that time Goryeo was under the control of the Mongols, which is probably

 But on the other hand, the beloved gochu, which is the Korean word for hot pepper, didn't

 So what Kim is trying to say here is that gosu's roots in Korean culture are actually

 I found the heart of this recipe from a North Korean website which is actually blocked in

 South Korea, but I also got help from a couple of South Korean food blogs as well.

 And you'll find the links listed below, either underneath this video or at my website at

 So what I did is I just chopped them into approximately two inch lengths, put them in

 Then I took the green onions and I sliced those as well and julienned them into two

 Korean radish, we grated that, although I could have also sliced and julienned that

 The next part, after we've assembled the vegetables, is to make the paste.

 I've got about two teaspoons or so of the ginger that we grated earlier.

 Then we're just going to mix these into a paste as best we can.

 The last thing we're going to do is to actually assemble the kimchi.

 You can see here, I'm just going to massage the paste into all the vegetables, the radish

 and the cilantro and the onion all need to be covered in paste as much as possible.

 As you start making the kimchi and you really start to get this well mixed, you're going

 to start to notice that your vegetables will actually shrink a little bit because the moisture

 is starting to escape from the vegetables because of the salt, mainly.

 Once you start to see it sweating and start to see the water coming out, all you need

 Then you can either just start to eat it or you cover it up and then put it in the refrigerator

 It would also make a wonderful topping for a Korean taco, burrito or pizza.

 Koreans on both sides of the peninsula have been deprived of the full understanding of

 Number one, the separation of the Korean peninsula into North and South after the Korean War.

 And number two, the forced isolation of Buddhist monks from Korean society for over 500 years

 Buddhist temple cuisine has only been in the public eye for about the past 20 years

 I wanted to bring a small part of North Korean cuisine out of the shadows, so that's why

 So please share it with everyone you know on Facebook, Twitter, Google Plus.

 And if you have any questions about this recipe or requests for other recipes, ask them in

 the comments section below or send me an email to Tammy at KoreaForeignandCooking.com.

 I hope you enjoy making this recipe yourself sometime, and I thank you for watching.

 Alright, so we're cleaning some rough fish that I shot with a bow today.

 They're actually good to eat, but they're full of Y-bones, so generally we pressure

 They've got large scales, and they're a bit difficult to clean because of that.

 Now you'll want to trim the red off of this before you cook it, but it's pretty good eating.

 Sometimes they're pretty good eating, it depends on the kind of water you get them out of.

 Clean a drum, thing to remember about them is the rib cage comes up really high.

 So just fill that rib cage with your fingers, put it behind your knife.

 He's a friend of mine and I've been talking about spear thrust with him.

 Where I advocate, if I have it this way, you see how far back I am, correct?

 And if you're watching what I'm doing, if I flip it back over, I can't even reach it.

 But when I have it like this, I have much more reach and range of motion over the top of the shield than I would like this.

 And the only other idea I can come up with, which I've never seen this anywhere, and it's pretty awkward too if the head's pretty heavy, is...

 And even this one, I don't even have that reach with it really.

 The guy doesn't know how far away I'm going to be able to hit it.

 As long as I'm good at what I'm doing, I'm not going to lose the actual head, even if I throw it too far.

 Alright, in a shield wall, you're normally locked up and holding together with your shields, at least they're overlapped to this rim.

 And I've got this long spear, much longer than this one, up here.

 Pulling my arm down, and even if I have more under here, this is awkward.

 I can stay locked up in the shield wall, hit a guy and pull back, hit another guy and pull back, hit another guy.

 It will actually possibly work, and if you're getting a clinch, I can still use it.

 And even if I had to come under, I have a possibility of making this work.

 This way, this very peak, trying to stab under like this, and with everybody behind me, this is not happening.

 At least in this method, I can keep it up here, not worry about people behind me, keep my arm back in at an angle, and be protected.

 And not hit people behind me and take pot shots out when I get the chance.

 A lot more awkward in this situation, but it can be done while you're trying to defend behind the shield and your arm's protected when you're holding it up.

 Alright, in a shield formation, this position protects other people behind me.

 In other words, I have something up here, my arm is not going to hit them because I can have a really long pull.

 No matter how long it is, be in close and not be hitting people as I'm going back.

 My spear should be by my head while I'm using it, not out here where somebody can grab it and pull it over their shield.

 The other thing is, you'd say, well if I bring it down here I'm going to hit people.

 If we're lined up properly, technically no, but I still have the option of having it back like this, and see how I see a leg down here?

 If I can get under there to one of them without hitting my buddy.

 But I can keep this coming up and down the entire time with these low thrusts.

 Meaning that I don't have to worry about the guy behind me because I'm using it this way in close.

 If the line was a loose formation, and we're going for range and I can open my shield up freely without getting hit,

 but if I open my shield up too much, what's the point in having a shield?

 If I can do all this stuff with it, like everybody's talking about parry, what's the point in having a shield?

 That's why I advocate maybe in the back rinks, behind the front shield wall, while they're holding the line,

 people probably had these things sprung on their backs with the big ol' nine foot spears,

 and they were probably doing stuff more like this to get over their own men.

 If they needed to put their shield on and they needed to close the line,

 they could take it off, put their shield on, and run up and take the rink to somebody that's being drawn out.

 In which case you'd have to use the closer methods, or possibly even,

 take your dory, put it here, draw your sword, and maybe even use that.

 Because this would be great for cutting in here, cutting at legs,

 It keeps people who get in on you from getting a hold of your weapon.

 It protects your arm, and that's where all your targets are going to be.

 When you have shield against shield, with a shield like this, I can't hit a leg.

 Maybe a grieve or a foot if I was lucky, but I can't hit a leg with a shield.

 Maybe a grieve or a foot if I was lucky, but I can't hit a leg without having a headshot come at me.

 So the idea is if somebody comes with a sword, and you have it this way, you can still fight him effectively this way.

 That's how I kept getting knocked out of the way first, and parried out of the way before he came in.

 If I would have had it back like this, and used a proper technique,

 I could have even hit it behind my shield if I wanted to come out low or something.

I'm going to put that out for you to shoot, and see what you think about it.

 Okay, I just wanted to do a quick video here on a brine for wild turkey preparation.

 Whether you grill it or fry it or smoke it, I enjoy wild turkey a lot.

 But some people like to brine their meats, and so that's what I'm going to do just to infuse some more flavors into the meat.

 And then I like to put about a half a tablespoon or more of Tony's Katchery's Original Creole Seasoning.

 So what you do is just incorporate all of this mixture into your pot of water.

 And then you brine the turkey for about 2 days before you smoke it.

There's quite a bit of connective tissue on turkey legs because all they do is run around.

 And you'll notice it's not really the same size as a commercially produced turkey.

 And that's because these turkeys are running around and they're not just confined and being pumped up with antibiotics and steroids and combined to a particular space.

 That's just pure meat right there from one of the wild turkeys.

 We're going to go ahead and incorporate all this into our brine mixture.

 And then we're going to slow smoke this over some oak and maybe even a little bit of hickory.

 Thank you for watching our videos and stay tuned for the finished result of this smoked wild turkey recipe.

 But once you put this brine mixture in here and then after smoking, it really comes out well.

 And just to show you, this is a standard, I mean not standard, but this is a turkey leg.

 And so you can notice that it's just not this great big leg like you would see in a store-bought turkey.

 I've got, this is actually two wild turkeys that I'm cutting here that I'm cooking or brining.

 I'm just going to go ahead and put that in there just like that with part of the bone.

 And then I had another nice section from one of the other turkeys that I was able to get these nice big pieces of meat from the turkey breast.

 We're going to let that brine for two days covered in the refrigerator.

 And then we're going to smoke that, slow cook and smoke that over some oak for a few hours.

 Now in this very short video, I'm just going to show you how to make a paleo mayonnaise.

 It'll only take a minute or two, so I'll just run through what you need.

 Now you can use coconut oil as well, but I've just gone for, this is virgin olive oil.

 I've got one egg, and I'm going to add two to three teaspoons of lemon juice.

 So all we have to do is put it, I'm going to put it all into this container here, and

 then one of the main things is actually to use a stick blender.

 So we're going to use, put them all in, then put the stick blender at the bottom of the

 container for about 20 seconds, and then pull it up, and it should turn into mayonnaise

 So it should be, it's just a really nice quick way of doing it, instead of doing it with

 a hand whisk, because then it's just a lot of a, it's a slow way of doing it.

 Okay, so I'm just going to put two, because this is a tablespoon, so two of these in.

 Then all we do, okay, so I'm just going to put the blender right at the bottom, and then

 Now you can double up the ingredients if you want more as well.

 Like this will probably do for about three to four people if you're mixing it into a

 to 15 minutes, which I don't think is an unreasonable amount of time to do my hair.

 I was just about to do my hair and I thought I would just show you guys how I do it.

It's actually recommended for, let's see, I think it says recommended for

 sections like this, wrap it around the curling iron barrel like that, wait like five seconds.

 and that's like a three minute song, three or four minute song.

 You know the benefits of all the different dals like rich in proteins and fibers where

 you get all the different dals benefits in this along with the mint.

 Mint which helps in reducing skin irritation and cooling sensation to the skin which also

 helps in definitely a bad breath and whitening the teeth which removes the toxins from the

 The required ingredients are around two handful of mint leaves or one small bunch of mint

 leaves, quarter cup or one fourth cup of chana dal, two tablespoons of urad dal, two tablespoons

 of moong dal, two tablespoons of toor dal, two tablespoons of masoor dal, half a cup

 of shredded fresh coconut which is an optional, small lemon sized tamarind, five green chillies,

 This is very spicy red chilli, one and a half teaspoon salt, one and a quarter cup of water

 I am using one tablespoon of oil for frying the dals along with green chilli and mint

 Half a teaspoon mustard seeds, pinch hing, heat the oil in a pan, around one tablespoon

 Once the oil is heated, add green chillies, add all the dals like chana dal, toor dal,

 urad dal, moong dal, toor dal and then fry them until they become golden brown in colour.

 Once all these dals turned into golden brown colour, add mint leaves, tamarind.

 Fry these mint leaves along with the dal for next three to four minutes.

 Once you mix everything, switch off the stove and keep it to cool.

 After cooling, add this to a mixing bowl, then add salt, add water and then grind it.

 Do not grind too finely, make it a little bit of coarse for you to enjoy the right consistency.

 You can serve this as a side dish to chapatis, paratha or hot steamed rice.

 For more recipes and updates, visit our website www.foodandramedy.com.

 It is a hand finishing stitch that is worked over the edge, the finished edge.

 L-shaped stitches on the top and vertical stitches on the reverse side.

 since it is decorative, I'm going to use a double layer of thread.

 your needle with approximately a yard of thread or 36 inches, thread your needle and tie a

 stitch length, take the end of your thread, loop it over the needle, and then pull the

 go ahead, about the same amount, loop your thread over the needle, and pull it tight.

 from the underside, nice even spacing, loop your thread, and then pull it tight.

 buttonhole stitch is actually used to make hand bound buttonholes.

 rarely see today, but is quite lovely and on the nicest hand tailored garments.

 also known as the blanket stitch because, again, once upon a time, this stitch was used

 into heirloom sewing on nice cotton or linen edges, maybe like a handkerchief or a christening

And then as you go, just try to keep your stitches spaced nice and evenly, and

 last stitch in place, bring it underneath, and then I'll take the needle back down to

 Hi there, this is Amy from SelfishMom.com and today I'm going to be making the best

 everyone who's ever tasted them has told me that they are, so I'm choosing to believe

And what you're going to need is two boxes of Duncan Hines Chewy Fudge Brownie

 Mix, and it's very important that you use the family size, the 13 by 9 size.

 So now, we're ready to add two cups of semi-sweet chocolate chips.

 and it also works really great on brownies, really anything that you're putting in a pan

 need to get one because if you're still using one that has actual bristles, the bristles

 sometimes come off and get into your food and they're hard to see.

 to give it a couple more stirs with the spatula to catch any powder.

I'm pretty sure I got it off of the back of an old Duncan Hines box.

 gotten most of that in there, you just want to smooth it out as much as possible.

 you're going to put it into your 325 degree oven on the center rack.

 to get dry, there's no way to avoid that, but you don't want the insides to get totally

You want these to be gooey and fudgy, and I promise you they will be.

Those are going to be moist on the inside, but not so underdone that they

 I'm starting from the middle because that's the most the eye shadow is going to go down on.

 So that's going to make it look like your eyebrows are going to be really defined.

 and it is served for breakfast or lunch with fried bake or coconut bake or you can even

 tomatoes, scotch bonnet if you can find it, it's not any Caribbean pepper, garlic, salt

Take a saucepan or a deep frying pan, fill it with water and just put

 it for 10 minutes and then we will strain it and squeeze out all the salt.

 For the preparation of the ingredients, slice the onions lengthwise into very thin slices

 tip here, use some oil on your hands, this will prevent your hands burning after you

Chop up the tomatoes into little cubes and have your salt and white

Just strain it and then let some cool water come out of the tomatoes.

 Let some cold water cool it down as well as wash away all the salt.

 Now I'm going to put my smoked herring in there just for a minute.

Okay, a minute is over and I'll transfer it back to the same container.

Now after about two minutes the onions should be slightly brown like this.

 Cook it for another 30 seconds so that the pepper flavor comes through.

This will make you sneeze a bit but believe me this will be very nice

 such a beautiful place and I'm so happy to be here and film it.

 classic authentic Italian dish which is also antique and it's called the Ragu alla Bolognese.

 We are using spaghetti, spaghetti alla Bolognese, that's how it's called around the world.

 videos on YouTube and I don't like the way lots of people make it.

 this beautiful ragu which is a proud dish from Bologna which is in Emilia Romagna famous

 want to peel, one stick of celery with the leaves, some basil, 100g of flat pancetta,

 this is a mild one, it's nice to get a nice kick of the chilli.

 tomato like a tomato paste, 300g of veal, you can use beef, 300g of pork mince, then

 we need 500ml of beef stock, then you need pepper, salt, some oregano, 200ml of red wine,

 you don't have to buy an expensive one, just a cheap one will do the job, extra virgin

 olive oil, parmesan and the most important thing, we need spaghetti.

 want to start doing is to blend in our food processor the carrot that you're going to

 peel, the celery stick, make sure you keep this because we're going to use this, this

 is like parsley, it comes from the same family, we're going to use this to dress the sauce

 and then you want to cut the pancetta into small cubes and half onion and put it in the

Now let's add a nice amount of extra virgin olive oil in a nice sauce

 spoon and then we're going to add the beautiful cream that we got from mixing the ingredients

 and stir it well and cook it for about 5 minutes until it becomes nice and golden.

 point you want to cook this on a medium heat and this is almost done so you can put the

 meat, make sure you break it a little bit, I like to use the veal because it's nice and

 so now we're going to break the meat a little bit, as soon you will see this will start

 cooking and it's blending very well with the rest of the ingredients.

 the meat with a spoon while you cook it so you get small little pieces.

 meat you can see is brown, just a little bit red, it's fine, you put the red wine inside.

 You stir it very very well and this should cook until the wine evaporates.

 use this beautiful leaf from the celery and just chop it nice and thin.

 disappears, like now you can see, we're going to add the basil and the leaves of the celery

Now once you put the tomato paste you need to turn the stove on a low,

 used to make this, she actually makes this from eight o'clock in the morning so by lunch

 time the tomato sauce is beautiful, the sauce is nice and dense and beautiful to have it.

 Now guys you want to cook this for hours and every about ten minutes you go and stir it.

 This should be cooked slow, there's no way you do this in one hour.

 underneath the video for Snowball, soon you will have the best pasta you've ever had.

 want to do, you want to boil about five litres of water in a large pot, don't boil in a small

 to be al dente, there's no way I have to remind you, pasta should be al dente.

 take about eleven to thirteen minutes, eleven minutes al dente, let's do twelve minutes.

 Push it in and stir it every couple of minutes until it's ready.

 you can do it the day before, you can do it for five hours, it is ready.

 look the sauce is beautiful, the stock is gone and look at that, look at that, nice

 Look at that, look at that, look at that, look at that, that's homemade stuff guys,

 lots of parmesan everywhere, this is essential guys, parmesan is essential for this.

 the sauce on top, that's not how you eat pasta, you always mix it very well like this, that's

 Ferrari from there, Lamborghini, Ducati, Prosciutto, Parmigiano, Tortellini, Lasagne,

Tell me in the comment below and what's the best dish from your region

Doesn't matter where you're from, I want to know, I want to know and I'm

So thank you so much for watching Vincenzo's Plate from this beautiful

 place, thank you to my cousin and I will see you in the next Vincenzo's Plate video

 We are back at Beta Lounge, downtown Milwaukee, where I'm the lead mixologist.

 In a pint glass, we are going to mix two ounces of rye whiskey, a small tablespoon of sugar,

 In the meantime, we're going to rinse the cocktail glass with absinthe.

 So now what we're going to do is we're going to stir this without ice, just to help dissolve

 So you're going to roll it, roll it around on the cocktail glass, and we're going to

 You can find us on Facebook at Pour Your Poison or PourYourPoison.com.

 We make sure we press our meat down to make sure everything is cooked.

 The first time that was us experimenting, this is the real cooking show from now on.

 So as you can see, me and cooley are about to start a cooking show.

 There wouldn't be a murder mystery if I didn't do what I did, though.

 Hello, this is Robin Moses and I'm going to be doing a really weird tutorial on Bipolar

 So I am starting, and we are going to be doing, okay, stripes and polka dots.

 And so I have chocolate and vanilla painted on the nails in all different ways.

 So vanilla, chocolate, vanilla, chocolate, chocolate, vanilla, chocolate, and then just

 Chocolate, vanilla, chocolate, vanilla, chocolate, and then vanilla, chocolate.

 And because I started with pink here, I am going to start with green on the next one.

 Now on all of the top areas I can go back with my pink brush and just make sure that

 Okay, now I am going to go basically in that same category of colors like pink.

 You thought you were going to have to do something, didn't you?

 So please keep your eye out for new designs to learn and share.

 There are two schools of thought as to who invented the Mai Tai.

 Don Beach who claims he invented it at his Don the Beachcomber restaurant, then in the

 other camp you have the rest of the world who commonly believe that Trader Vic Beggaron

The garnish for the Mai Tai is a lime wedge with a minced sprig.

 we simply cut our lime, half lime there, into three chunks, make a hole in the back with

 to half way so it will fit onto your glass, then into the hole simply insert your minced

 Vic used a 17 year old Ray and Nephew rum which at the moment is exceptionally difficult

We're going to add in 20ml of gold rum, there we go, 20ml of dark rum, 20ml

 of orange curacao, 30ml of freshly squeezed lime juice, 50 and 30, there we go, 10ml of

 Auger or almond syrup, lovely almondy flavour to the finish, there we are, and then an optional

Just a quick teaspoon of that will just change the colour slightly.

 We add our pre-made garnish to the side like so, throw in a stirrer and a couple of short straws.

 I've had a lot of you ask me about smoothies and how I make them.

You can use a regular blender, but I really, really love the Vitamix.

You'll just stuff it in and you'll have to adjust the kale according to your taste.

 Maybe start with a little bit less because it's a pretty strong smell.

 And with the Vitamix, if you have the Vitamix, you can put the core and the stem in.

 I will look at it from an anatomical point of view, from an artistic point of view, and

 to give you tips on what to do and what not to do, how to feel it, and how to correct

 yourself during an exercise or when you are preparing yourself for the beginning of an

 Thirdly there should be a nice length, a lightness in the hips.

 Fourthly a very up-like feeling in the stomach and a length, elongation actually is the right

 Then the neck should be as free as possible, a lot of space in between the shoulder and

 If one was to put their hand here and start to rotate the shoulder and to actually visualize

 the fact that the whole skeleton, the arm and the shoulder blade is only attached here.

 One can then easily envision that one is just putting a cape back.

 So you can just lift your shoulders and drop it back so it sits nicely in the correct position.

 Then with the vertebrae, the spine shouldn't be completely, completely flat but as extended

not too far back with the upper part of the torso or too far forward

 or what tends to happen when one turns out is what you call lordius when the popo is

 So obviously to achieve that one would use the abdominal muscles.

 Okay, dancer if you could please put yourself in parallel position.

 Dancers and dance teachers, I will now demonstrate with a dancer.

 So here as I'd mentioned before it's very important that this is nice and long and that

 the shoulders are sitting nice and back and that there is an elongation in the spine from

 Again I'm repeating myself but I think it's very important to be very aware of the gluteal

 Again they actually hold the position and the five on each side the adductors.

 If you could please now just put one leg on a releve and then start to rotate in and out.

 The actual motion of turn out, the actual muscles that rotate the leg are actually five

 So just not to get a little bit confused that your gluteal muscles make the turn out

 They are actually inside, if you could just do that again for me.

 If you put yourself now in first, once you have that rotation, once again it's the gluteal

 If you do work the gluteal and the adductors you have a little bit more let's say freedom

 Because if you're not holding correctly the gluteal or the adductors most of the force

 will then go in the knee and in the ankle and you'll receive this kind of rolling.

 So be very aware that your foot is nicely planted, it's a kind of a three point thing

 with your metatarsal nice and up and nice even distribution on the front of the foot

 If you could please now for me dancer, put yourself parallel towards the bar.

 Sometimes when we try to get turnout it's very easy to start to tilt in the hips or

 you could also be anatomically this way built which is not a problem it's just to be aware.

 If you do tilt, if you do have an arch what happens is that you in one point you receive

 a lot of pressure when you're jumping, when you're standing on one leg or two legs and

 again over a period of time that could create some kind of friction.

 So it's very important that you do have a straight back, it cannot be completely straight

 because anatomically it's not impossible but it doesn't have to be like flat like a board

 I just have a little tip for you if you want to, if you're not sure if that you are have

 It's very simple, it's a cooking spoon, you can put the cooking spoon in your leotard

 and with that you can readjust yourself, make sure you know if you can put two fingers through

 So that's a little tip also for the teachers with the young children if you want to help

 them it's quite fun to put a cooking spoon or a drumstick or something just to give them

 So again it's a very simple thing, it's a cooking spoon or a drumstick.

 Okay if you could please face to point number one again for me.

 So again dancers engaging the gluteus, engaging the adductors so that this is taking the support

 so that there is then some freedom in the knee and the ankles and the shoulders and

 Do not block yourself, do not stand like a piece of wood, you have to have the feeling

 or essence that you're a little bit, how would I say, sensitive, that you can be adjusted,

 And as a professional dancer you will always through your whole career constantly having

 to re-correct yourself, re-adjust, find out what's needed, find out which muscles are

 We'll take that one step further now, we'll take that on one leg, correct stance on one

 Hello, I'm Charity Honeycutt with Honey Bee Events and today I'm going to teach you how to make your own brooch bouquet.

 The next step is to actually select your brooches and to make your stems.

 of wire that are 24 inches long and then half that to make your stem.

 It's really important to actually match your wire to the color of your brooches.

 You need to find a stable area where you can thread it through.

 For this next step you're going to need a bar tie twister tool.

 For the next part of this project you'll want to grab a bridesmaid to help you out and

 you're actually going to make a loop around the end of the wire that you will then

The bridesmaid will need to have a firm grip on the brooch and then you just twist.

 You'll actually want to monitor how tight the stem is so it doesn't break.

 For heavier brooches like this one you may have to do five strands just to strengthen the stem

 The next step is to choose whether you would like to put your stems in a silk bouquet or have your florist put it in

If you're using fresh flowers you'll want to take your stems to your florist

 lose the actual placement that you wanted the brooch to be in so just tape them down to secure them

 every three or four brooches that you insert and this is the final look.

 If you don't want your wires to show you may choose to wrap your bouquet with a ribbon.

 It was a lot of fun teaching you how to make your own brooch bouquet today.

 Hi, so today I'm showing you my rig for scuba diving that I'll be using with a GoPro Hero

 So we want to add some red to the film once we get below about 10-15 feet and all the

 I've got a tether here attached to it so that you can drop it when you need to.

 Okay, I've also added a second tether here to the tripod mount, which you'll see.

 The other piece of equipment is this iPole Mini, I believe it's called, from a company

 And what you see is it's just got a little quarter inch threaded bolt on there for your

 It has a little tension tightener here which allows you to swivel this.

 The other thing I've added here is I've added a little cable tie with a very small carabiner

 It also has a little tether on the end for your wrist, although I'm a bit suspicious

 Anyway, this thing stretches out telescopes to about 43 inches from nine, which makes

 it really nice to get in close to that moray eel or lionfish or whatever it is you're

 And then my fail safe here is to attach the tether to the carabiner like so.

 So if this were ever to come loose from the mount here, at least you've got something

 to keep your camera from going to the bottom of the ocean because this thing is definitely

 So you want to sort of flip it over like that and you get much smoother results in

 I'm off to Bunaken and Sulawesi next week and hopefully I'll have some great shots to

 To do this you may need to uninstall the trash compactor from the cabinet.

 To replace the start switch in your compactor, first depress the foot pedal.

 Pull the container drawer assembly forward and lift it off of the track.

 Insert the new switch into the control panel and secure with the provided retaining nut.

 Realign the control panel by inserting the tabs into the slots in the cabinet frame.

 Replace the start knob by aligning the tabs on the knob stem with the notches in the start switch.

 Reposition the container drawer assembly on the track and push it into place.

 And, if required, reinstall the trash compactor in the cabinet.

 some of you maybe, you may come across a recipe that you really want to make and the one thing

 several packets, but I've used quite a few of them and they last a long time.

 on the back are that all you have to do is mix 3 and 3 fourths cups of cold water with

So I'm going to take my scissors and just open my packet so it's ready to go.

 more than this one quart's worth, but you may want to mix up a lot at a time.

 to put in the two cups that I have measured here and then I measured 1 and 3 quarters

I don't know if you can see that very well, but the texture there is so that it

 Alright, what you probably recognize as Happy Birthday to You is actually originally called

 So I'm going to show it to you in C so it'll be nice and easy, okay?

 So I'm going to show you the block chords and then maybe I'll do a dress up tutorial

 The next chord, good morning to, is you're just going to add, you're going to keep your

 right hand where it is and you're going to keep your left hand where it is.

 You're just going to add this F, basically creating a G7 chord.

 So pretty simple so far, just basically two chords with a little addition.

 The next part, still pretty simple, it's just three chords really.

 So it's on an F, so I'm playing an F or 2 in your left hand, in my left hand, you can

 A C, an F, an A, a C, if you can't reach all that, drop this C out.

 Good morning to, on 2 you switch to a G7, so you've got G in your left hand, D, F, G,

 and B, to you, back to a C, C, G, C, or any combination there, I don't know if you can

 Hey guys, it's Brittany, and if you're wondering why I look so funny today, like, mascara on

 one eye and none on the other, it's because I'm going to show you how to get false looking

 So, if you want to know how to get lashes that look like this, they kind of touch my

 They're like really long and extravagant, and they're pretty much false looking to me.

 If they're not false looking to you, then I guess you don't have to watch this.

 But um, yeah, so I'm going to show you how to get this, and the two mascaras you'll need

 So if you want to know how to get eyelashes that look like this, then just keep watching.

 So what you're going to do is go in with your first coat, wipe off the little excess on

 Okay, so you're going to take the brush like this, angled this way, and just put it on

 So you're going to go in and put a light coat on, just to get the eyelashes wet with mascara.

 Okay, and now that you have that little first coat on, you're going to go in with more,

 but take the brush like this, and we're going to use this side of the brush.

 And now you're going to go in and start to lengthen and volumize.

 Okay, and now the third step that you're going to take with this same mascara, is now we're

 going to take the edge, this side of the brush, the edge of it, and we're going to lengthen.

 So what you're going to do is take it and put it at the top of your lashes, and just

 And so now you're going to have something that looks like this.

 But if you want more length, which I usually do, because I'm really weird, you're going

 And you're just going to take this and pull up on the ends of your lashes.

 And make sure you have a concealer handy in case you get any mascara up here or like a

 So I hope this helped you guys, and comment down below or leave a video response if you

 So if you have any more, if you have any requests, like how-to videos, post a comment below and

 Hi there everyone, in this little video I'm going to show you how to train your dragon,

 or how to install your dragon into your hang-along tank to stop that dreaded tank recoil.

 OK, first up, we have here, well I've obviously pulled my RX-18 out of my tank, I've hooked

 What I want to show you is the recoil and that everything's working, and then I'll install

 connected up, you should be able to move forward and backwards your motors, OK?

And when we fire, you'll see the rock back and forwards of the motors, like that.

 need to do is cut the red wire, I've already cut it to save some time here.

Take off a bit of insulation, so you expose the copper of course.

 thing that matters is that you use the same terminal block for the same motor.

 make sure that is in nice and secure and that contacts are made.

 now the switch, the relay switch that operates on the dragon, OK, should be, well, it will

 see, we can still have forward, we still have reverse, and we'll still have the recoil.

 OK, so, the motor, the switch here, the relay switch on here, only operates when it receives

OK, so if there's anything wrong with the dragon, it should still allow you

 with a 5-pin connector on one end, and your 3-pin connector on the other end.

We'll just check to see that we've got motors still able to run forward and reverse.

Now we're going to fire, and as you can see, the recoil action is now

Hopefully, should make your installation and recoil blocking a lot simpler.

 So I'm just a fraction below that which is just perfect and that's going to give me plenty

 So here is the bit right here and that's going to be plenty of room to do this.

 Like I said, if I need more room later I can do that but I didn't want to remove all that

 Although the way it's glued and pinned down with those pegs I probably could have just

 So like I said, all I have to do is slip the T-nut in and then bam, pop the TS guide on

 So up on this rack up here, this is where my long router fence that I'm making right

 So I needed to come up with a way to hang it up up there and I just didn't feel confident

 just putting a bolt, an eye bolt through the end of that plywood.

 You know I didn't think it was going to really be stout enough to hold it for the long term

 Just got into my metal scrap junk pile and found a piece and making it work.

 Those pieces up there are 3-8ths inch and this is a half inch so it's going to be really

 I could have used something thinner but I just found a piece that was, it's going to

 You know, 1-8th inch would have even been stout enough with this kind of configuration.

 But what I'm going to do right now is I want to position this now for some bolts coming

 Some countersunk 1-4-20 bolts and I'll put nylocs on the inside here.

 So I'm going to mark it right now with this long 1-8th inch drill bit.

 And then I'm going to go ahead and drill it out to a quarter inch.

 Then I'll wire wheel it and then I'll pop it with some black spray paint.

 So when dust is racing down here it's not a flat spot where things are going to get

 Because this was, this is exactly 1 inch in here but that piece was just a little bit

 And so I had to grind on it a little bit and then just cut those flats, those little shoulders

 Okay so I can just countersink this on the bottom to where it's not going to interfere

 And I'll countersink this and drill this out from on this side.

 I'll drill this out just a little bit bigger than a quarter inch.

 You know a 64th over just so I'm not going to have a problem finding the bolts.

 And then I'll wire wheel this and the next time you see it it'll be spray painted black.

 Okay so I'm ready to glue this front, this little front piece on and the back piece.

 And you can see that I've got my bolts all locked down in there.

 Everything is all just tight as can be and it's well countersunk on the bottom as you'll

 So I think that's going to, I think that was a real nice simple, cheap, strong solution.

 I just cut this by hand, used the Japanese saw, marked it out and then kerfed down with

 the Japanese saw and then just chopped it with a chisel to a scribe line.

 So I'll just, what I'm going to do here, and you know that's a little bit long too.

 So after everything is glued up and the glue squeezes I'll just come in here and I'll just

 I know I can get, these two clamped together like this is probably a lot of, I need to

 Well not super easy but it came out and I just was able to belt sand that end real nice.

 I'd forgotten about touching that up down there but it was no problem.

 Today, we're going to man up the quiche with a hash brown crust.

 We're going to start with two cups of nicely grated Idaho potatoes.

 You're going to see a lot of liquid, so make sure you squeeze it all out before you put it on the dish.

 I whipped up four eggs and one cup of half and half and you just pour it right over the top.

 I'm going to put mine in a tortilla for the total gluten free experience.

 Hi guys, right this is the Lush tin and what I'm going to do is I'm just going to take

 my baby face out of the packet and yes obviously I'm trying to mine water to here.

 Filled the sink up, just put the Lush baby face in my hands, dipped it in the water and

 I actually rub it on there for quite a while just to get a nice amount of product on then

 As you can see my hand is full of the product, it's all shiny, it's really oily, slippery

 so start rubbing that on your face, round your eyes, into your eyelashes, really rub

 it in, I mean don't be too harsh, all over your forehead, into your eyebrows, down your

 neck if you put your make up there but it's nice to just cleanse that area anyway, in

 your ears, in the crevices of your nose, under your eyes, not forgetting your bottom

 lashes, on the tops again, into my eyebrows because I do use brow powder, so I'm rubbing

 As you can see I've just dipped my hand in the water and it's created that barrier between

 the skin and the water because it's an oil beast thing so it's not going to rinse off

 so I've just got a towel there and I'm just dipping it into the water because I don't

 use flannel so I've just used a towel, wringed it out and as you can see I've just got the

 corner of it wet and then I'm going to begin wiping my face with that, just wiping away

 And you can see that it's already bringing it off, so I'm wiping all over my face, wiping

 my eyelashes, I'm not using too much pressure here, just lightly and as you can see it's

 taken all the mascara off already and there it is all on the towel as proof.

 Onto the forehead now, just over the eyelashes again, I pull some funny faces, don't I while

 So just keep going over them areas, into your hairline, I'm just wetting the other end of

 the towel now and wringed it out again and then I'm doing the other side of my face,

 around the neck, around my ears, on my forehead again and then I'm just wiping over my eyelashes

 on the other side and then in the crevices of my nose and look at all that that's come

 So yeah I'm just wiping once more all over the face, into my brows and as you can see

 now all the product is off my face, my face doesn't feel oily at all, it feels nice,

 I'm just going to show you my face now, as you can see all the mascara is off on both

 eyes, even giving me a bit of lift in the lid there, everything is out of my eyebrows,

 all off my neck and as you can see my face is nice and clean and it does give you that

 nice radiance but my face isn't oily at all and as you can see the sink water is not dirty

 either, all the dirt and stuff that you brought off your face is on that towel.

 So the best thing to do now is just to put your Lush Bar Baby Face back in there, pop

 the lid on and put it away until the next time you use it and that's it, done.

 Okay, I'm going to take a shot at changing the oil in my shocks.

 So the first thing I've got to do is pull this cap off and then there's a Schrader valve

 in here and I'll pull the valve portion out and drain the oil that's in here.

 Okay, I've got this little Schrader valve tool for bicycle tires.

 So, okay, so the oil didn't really want to drain out of here so what I've been doing

 is I've been sticking a syringe on my valve, tipping the fork up like so, and then just

 It takes a couple of those and you get pretty much all the oil out of there.

 I'm going to try and put the oil, the new oil in there with the same syringe I used

 I think I should be able to get nearly four syringe fulls in there.

 So that should make the air capacity 91 milliliters and that should leave about 139 milliliters

 So I can put my Schrader valve back in and then I'll fill the shock up to about 10%

 of my body weight which will be around 17 to 18 pounds, or sorry, PSI I should say.

 So I'm just going to use a bicycle pump to fill this up instead of the air compressor

 I'm going to show how I've been filling this and bleeding the air out at the same time.

 So I just stick my syringe on, push down until it kind of builds up pressure, and then

 And then I usually just pull the back off the plunger to kind of equalize the pressure

 Today I'll be teaching you how to do a stand up heel slide 180.

 Alright, so first we're going to teach you how to do stand up heel slide 180s.

 First things first, you need to learn where the breaking point are of your wheels.

 So get to carving, know your wheels, know how your board feels.

 And once you're comfortable with that, you'll be able to do these.

 And so what you're going to do is, once you get that carve, once you're about to break

 loose, as soon as it breaks loose, you're going to kind of nudge your heel in and you're

 going to turn your hips and it's just going to throw it around and you're just going

 As long as you do it at a moderate speed, you should be able to jump off and run away.

 But the most important thing is that you try and stay centered over your board.

 Don't try and stand on one leg or lean like completely off the board.

 Once you've done more and more stand up slides, you'll become more comfortable and you'll

 be able to do longer and longer stand up slides, such as these.

 Okay, now that Drew taught you how to do a heel slide stand up, I'm going to teach you

 So what you want to do is keep your feet locked in at a pretty good place, know your board.

 You're going to turn your head and move your arms and wherever your head goes, your body

 So you're going to find the breaking point, your wheels, know your board.

 I put my hands out when I go, I don't know, it keeps me balanced more.

 So what you're going to do is go down, carve a little bit at a decent speed.

 You're going to fall, trust me, but then once you learn your balance, it's going to be like

 Please click that yellow button, it really helps us out, helps us get noticed.

 If you want to watch some new videos, we're going to do unboxings, how to videos.

 Today we are going to work with pata choux and we're going to do different piping techniques.

 The first one we're going to do is the little choux that you can use for profiteroles, for

 croquembouche, or you can stuff them with ice cream, whipped cream.

 You always put a little of the dough on the sheet pan because when you bake, the air in

 So then you're going to, I'm going to make a nice round, I stop, and that's my first

 I am like half an inch above the paper and I push, I do not move the tip up, I just leave

 One thing you cannot do is pipe on the same tray small ones and large ones because they

 If you want small ones, do all small ones, then take another tray and make them bigger,

 Then, before you bake, you take some egg wash, which is egg and a little water and salt,

 And in case you have any little tails, you use your brush to smooth out your choux.

 Just make sure your egg wash does not drip on the sides, just on top.

 I'm using the same tip and you want to make a long, maybe like four inches, just stop and you pipe.

 And you will bake the same temperature, 375, for 20 to 25 minutes.

 You will take either the tip, a star tip, or you can take a fork.

 So here we have the baked cartouchou for the profiteroles or for the croquembouche.

 You can do that by turning your oven off and leave them in the oven until the next day.

 They need to be dry on the outside, but just barely soft inside.

 And make sure you visit the channels because we have tons and tons of videos for you to enjoy.

 So first, I'm gonna prep my canvas and the canvas always has to look flawless.

 taking this medium beige liquid foundation and just applying that to my entire face and

Now using a similar shade of powder foundation, I'm just gonna brush it all over

 foundation with a bigger powder brush on top of everything to achieve that nice caramel

 to use a dark brown shadow or even a black eyebrow shadow and just apply that on your

 brow bone, I'm gonna use Shella's ivory lace highlighter pencil and I'm just gonna underline

 it right below my eyebrows and then blend it with my ring finger.

Since my eyes aren't as big and wide as Esmeralda, I'm gonna have to create

So I'm gonna take this matte brown eyeshadow and just brush that

 above my eyelids and then it's gonna create that shadow and that sunken in eye look.

 I'm just gonna work the brown shadow down the sides of my nose which is gonna make my

 I'm gonna choose this pale greyish eyeshadow and that is gonna go right on my lid space.

 Then I'm gonna pick up some of this super dark brown eyeshadow and I'm basically gonna

 use that to cut a crease and also to create that cartoon like eye effect.

 For my lower lash line, I'm gonna take this shimmery brown eyeshadow and I'm just gonna

 apply that with a small brush right on the outer corners of my lower lash line.

 Now after I've applied the brown, I'm gonna go in with a really black eyeliner and this

 Then gradually work it up above your upper lash line and this time I'm not gonna do a

 full wing, I'm just gonna do a really light baby wing at the corners.

 And now you can use your eyelash curler and keep your eyelashes in place.

 Eyelashes can instantly transform your eyes, so here I'm taking this beautiful eyelash

 by Jcat Beauty and I'm just gonna apply that on my upper lash line.

 really cool pen mascara and just apply that on my upper and lower lashes.

 Esmeralda has some strong facial features, so for that I'm gonna use this bronzer and

 I'm just gonna apply that from my temple to my cheekbones and then from my cheekbones

 And right above my cheekbones I'm gonna brush on NYX's blush in Dusty Rose.

 Now to create Esmeralda's lip shape, I'm gonna take Starlux Lip Pencil in Bare and I'm just

 gonna shape my lips, make it a little bit smaller on the top and a little bit more curved

 on the bottom and then I'm just gonna go over with my dark wine lipstick.

 Now to really create those sultry lips like Esmeralda, I'm gonna take my black eyeliner

 and you guys can feel free to use a black lipstick if you have that and then I'm just

 Now since I'm all through with my makeup, here's my green color contacts.

 I still got an ombre going on my hair, so I'm gonna have to use a black wig for this look.

 So before I put on my wig, I'm gonna put on my wig cap and tuck all my hair in.

 And now I'm putting on the wig that I found on eBay, which was perfect for this look.

 It's really long and wavy and it also has a little bit of bangs on the side.

 So I'm just gonna style that, give it a little bit of volume and I'm almost complete with

 I didn't have to buy a costume, I just made the corset and threw other things together

 and then I just have a small pink headband and some gold earrings.

 Thank you guys for watching and don't forget to thumbs up for more Disney looks.

 Hey guys, this tutorial is focused on combining a beauty makeup with a gory horror style makeup.

 I'm going to be demonstrating a muscle anatomy makeup on one side of the face, and on the

 other side I'm going to be creating a pinup or a beauty style makeup.

 They asked that I create a few tutorials for you guys and for their site to get you guys

 ready for Halloween, so I'm going to be using products that you can find on eBay.

 Before beginning, you want to make sure to wash your face and clean off all the excess

 Doing so will ensure that the makeup will adhere to the skin and last throughout your

 I'm using Pros-Aide, which is a makeup adhesive, and I basically use a q-tip to swipe it over

 You want to repeat this process two to three times until the eyebrows are flat.

 It's extremely important to look at a picture of the face's muscle anatomy in order to achieve

 I wanted a muscle-like texture on the face, so I decided to go with liquid latex.

 This is a thicker liquid latex, which makes it ideal for this purpose.

 Then following the pattern that I've already drawn in, I used a coarse hair brush to apply

 The coarse hairs are going to give you that muscle fiber texture.

 I brushed this on using light strokes and following the direction of each muscle.

 There are round muscles around the eyes and the mouth, so make sure to consider that when

 After the first coat of liquid latex dries, you want to apply another coat and make sure

 To color the muscles, I'm using the Skin Illustrator Onset FX palette.

 This is an alcohol-activated makeup that is waterproof and can hold up to hours of wear.

 I applied the Age Blood color first and followed the shape of the muscles with my brush.

 Light strokes will also aid in creating the effects of muscle fibers.

 Next I mixed the Age Blood color and the black to create a deep burgundy, and I further defined

 I applied this where the muscles overlap and on the outer edges of each muscle.

 Creating the muscles this way creates the illusion of depth to the makeup.

 Towards the temple, there is an area that connects the muscles to the skull, so I used

 Since this pencil is really opaque, I also used it to highlight the muscle fibers.

 Again, we're playing with darks and lights, so I used a small, pointy brush to apply the

 Now to separate the two sides of the face, I applied a thin layer of liquid latex with

 Moving on to the pin-up side, you want to start by applying Milani's Eyeshadow Primer

 And then using the Lorac Pro Palette, sweep the color Cream all over the lid and up to

 Next pick up the color Taupe onto a blending brush and apply it to the crease of the eye.

 Start soft with this color and build it up to your desired opacity.

 One of the things pin-ups are most known for are their winged eyeliners, so here I'm going

 And I used an angled brush to apply this and just swept the eyeliner upwards to lift the

 After applying a heavy coat of mascara, I added a pair of false eyelashes by Miss Adoro.

 I did this to create a three-dimensional divide between each side of my face.

 To further push the divide between each side, I shaded the line using the black from the

 To finish off the pin-up side, I applied my Healthy Skin foundation from Neutrogena.

 Onto the apples of my cheek, I applied Tarte's Amazonian Clay Blush in Doll Face, which is

 To darken the tail of the eyebrow, I added Sable, which is from the same palette.

 I decided to go for a bit of a softer lip for this look because I felt there was a lot

 of red already on the face, so I'd line my lips using Milani's All Natural Lip Liner.

 And then I applied Milani's Nude Cream Lipstick on top of that.

 And finally, to finish off the muscle side, I added Mehron's Castor Seal.

 I dabbed this product lightly onto all the muscles with a sponge to create a shiny finish.

 That wraps up this exposed pin-up slash anatomy of a pin-up tutorial.

 If you did enjoy it, please give it a thumbs up and join me on Facebook and Twitter as

 All the products mentioned will be listed below in the info box, and you can also find

 Hey everyone, I'm Scott from Scotthermanfitness.com and Sears Fit Studio and welcome to Tobias

 This routine is geared toward preparing you for life threatening situations.

 Maybe you have to get out of the way of a moving car coming at you, or you have to climb

 So what we've done is put together a routine for you that you can do every single day.

 It's a four and a half minute routine that's going to help get you back in motion so you

 Now the way this routine is going to work is there's nine rounds and four exercises.

 For each round, you're doing the exercise for 20 seconds, then you're taking a 10 second

 If you have more than four and a half minutes a day to work out, all you have to do is double

 So what I'm going to do for you guys right now is go over the exercises, then as soon

 as I'm done doing that, I'm going to present you with the actual workout.

 You also can do the advanced version, which is the lateral explosive pushup.

 So I'm going to show you three different ways to do this exercise to get you able to do

 So a normal pushup to start off, just like this, all the way down, all the way up.

 As you start to get stronger being able to do pushups, you're going to do an explosive

 Once you get really good at those, now do the lateral explosive pushup.

 So progress as you get stronger, you want to be doing the most advanced version of the

 But in order to work up to a cannonball, you can start off by doing a lateral jump.

 The way a lateral jump is going to work is both your feet are going to leave the ground

 at the exact same time and they're going to land and as soon as you land, you're going

 As you get pretty good at those, you're going to do the same exercise but jump farther.

 And then once you get really good at those, you're going to move into the cannonball.

 And if you've all done cannonballs into a swimming pool, you jump up in the air, you

 And when you're going to do a chin-up, you're going to bring the bar to your sternum.

 If you have no experience doing chin-ups, you can give yourself some assistance by standing

 And all you're going to do is jump up off the bench to get yourself to the bar and then

 Now obviously, you can change the degree of help you give yourself by how high you jump

 Once you're able to do it all by yourself, it's going to look like this.

 Now the last exercise you're going to do is just going to be a simple sprint.

 So you can either sprint outside with a timer or you can do it on a treadmill and use the

 So today I'm going to show you a super simple, super tasty way to roast a winter squash.

 And if you're anything like me, if you see pumpkin spiced anything, it's going to send

 At this point we've had our fair share of pumpkin raviolis, we've had pumpkin soups,

 pumpkin curries, pumpkin ice cream, pumpkin smoothies, pumpkin lattes, and I'm from the

 Or you're like the rest of the country, and when you look at this, you think...

 So at this point in the season, squash is still readily available, and they're still

 really delicious, but you might just need a new and fresh way to serve them.

 You're going to need squash, sage leaves, cinnamon sticks, dried red chilies, olive

 You're also going to need a little bit of honey or maple syrup, just to finish the dish

 Once it's completely cooked, I'll just drizzle a little bit of that over the whole dish,

 and return it to the oven for about two minutes, just so it kind of caramelizes and thickens

 If you're cooking up a buttercup squash, delicata, sweetmeat, kabocha, those are all squash that

 have very tender, edible skin, and you don't need to peel them.

 But if you're going to make butternut or spaghetti squash, those shells bake up so hard, they're

 So working with squashes, you learn the characteristics, which ones are edible and which ones are not

 You want the oil to coat every little piece, and all of the leaves and all of the chilies.

 The whole goal with this dish is you want the squash to lay on a bed of sage, cinnamon,

 So it's going to infuse the squash in a way that adds a lot of fragrance and a little

 If you took ground cinnamon and ground chili and ground sage powder, you'd have a uniformity

 This way, if a piece of squash sits on a chili, it's a little bit hot.

 But there's a nuance to it, so you don't get all of your pieces tasting the same.

 So arrange them in a layer so that every one of them are sitting on a few of those

 We're going to roast it in a 425 degree oven, 220 degrees Celsius, for about 20 minutes.

 So after 10 minutes, your squash will start to get just little bits of brown.

 So the last couple of minutes, drizzle just a little bit of maple syrup over the whole

I'm a self-taught, passionate foodie and I absolutely live to eat.

 Christmas is a time to spend with family and friends, not in the kitchen slaving over a hot stove.

 So with that in mind I've teamed up with New World to put together a fantastic twist on your traditional Christmas that we think you're going to absolutely love.

 Buturkey in my opinion is long overdue at rest so I've created a fantastic menu that you can make yourself from start to finish or you can spread the load amongst your guests.

 It's packed with delicious recipes for real crowd pleasers that use heaps of beautiful seasonal produce and that are really simple to pull together.

 For starters we're going to make a lovely red and yellow cherry tomato bruschetta with parsley and basil herb dressing.

 And what that will allow us to do is create a little bit of texture.

If you chop them all the same size it just looks a little bit boring.

 So once we've got all the tomatoes chopped up we want to get them into a bowl.

 We want to season them with our friend's salt and pepper and just put them to one side and now we're going to crack on with the dressing.

 Now one thing you might want to do at this point is you just want to get a little bit of salt.

 Get it on the board and what the salt's going to do, especially if it's flaky sea salt, is it's going to help you break up the garlic and it's going to help release all the essential oils.

 Now you just want to roll it all up into a nice little ball and just slice it very, very thinly.

 We want to add a tablespoon of balsamic vinegar and then 4 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil.

 We're going to drop it into all the fresh tomatoes and get them all playing nicely.

 Now the most important thing when you're working with tomatoes is you've got to get them out of the fridge before you need them.

 They lose all their flavour and as a friend once told me, if you eat a tomato straight out of the fridge, it's a bit like eating a cucumber.

 So for the bruschetta you can use pretty much whatever bread you've got on hand.

 I'm using a ciabatta or you can use a sourdough or a white loaf.

 So we just want to go through and prepare a whole lot of slices.

 So before we get the bread on the barbecue, what we're going to do is we're going to add a little twist to it.

 We're going to get some flavour in there and we're going to do that by creating our own little rosemary brush.

 Now the easiest way to do this, in the produce section of your New World, grab half a dozen stalks of rosemary.

 Just get some simple string, tie them together and you've got yourself a rosemary brush.

 Now once you get these over the heat, do the same on the other side and get them right over the fire.

 Just one by one go through and just give them a little rub of the garlic.

 Placing a little bit of the tomato and the dressing and the herbs on top of each one.

 So just really finely, thinly sliced basil, sprinkle it all over the top.

 A little bit of salt, pepper and for the showstopper a little bit of extra virgin olive oil over the top.

 Well there you have it, a fantastic way to start the backyard Christmas.

 Red and yellow cherry tomato, basil and parsley herb dressing bruschetta.

 Char of the bread, I can taste the rosemary, the garlic's in there, parsley, warm sunny tomatoes, absolutely fantastic.

 Smoothies are a great way to get started with fruits and greens, but if you want to get

 serious about eating more greens, I really recommend getting into juicing.

 Juicing concentrates a larger amount of greens than you could ever eat in one sitting into

 It would be difficult to eat this many greens in a salad or even blend it into a smoothie,

 but by juicing them, I can concentrate all the nutrition in these greens into a single

 So if you do want to get into juicing, it's important to have the right kind of juicer

 that can extract the maximum amount of nutrition, flavor, and color from your green leafy vegetables.

 The best juicer on the market that I've found for juicing leafy greens is the GreenStar

 This juicer will juice most any fruit and vegetable, but it's especially good for getting

 The GreenStar has two gears that just gently press the greens together.

 Other centrifugal juicers that cut your greens result in oxidation and you lose a lot of

 And these gears rotate at a very low temperature and slow speed.

 It's just 110 rotations per minute, so it's very gentle on the greens, and you're going

 You'll see when I start juicing in a moment that the pulp is going to come out very dry,

 and that shows me that I'm getting the maximum amount of nutrition that I can from these

 This is called the homogenizing plate, and if you put this inside instead of the juicing

 screen, you can make incredible ice creams, and you can make pâtés out of soaked nuts

 It does take more time to make juice than to make a smoothie, but it's well worth it.

 And let me give you a few tips that can help you save some of that time.

 The first thing you want to do is save all your vegetable scraps during the week.

 Parsley stems, kale stems, broccoli stalks, ends of cucumber and celery.

 Just keep them in a plastic bag or in a container in your refrigerator as you accumulate them,

 and before you know it, you'll have enough vegetables to make a glass of juice after

 Something else that can save you time if you're really rushed in the morning when you want

 to juice is cut all your vegetables the night before into a shape that's going to fit through

 That's one thing that people often say is time consuming, but you can cut that step

 What you do is juice all your veggies, have your juicer right by the sink as you're doing

 it, plugged in, and then afterwards, you just take off this entire unit and store it in

 And it'll be fine during the day, and then you can just easily rinse it off when you

 So if you follow these tips, you really can cut your juicing time down to just minutes

 You always want to start off with a base of celery and or cucumber because these greens

 So I'm going to be using kale and parsley, but you could also use collards or spinach

 So if they're a little too intense for you, some flavorings that can really help offset

 That's enough for me, but if you want your juice to be on the sweeter side, just go ahead

 That's because it's a slow speed, low temperature juicer, and that's what you want.

 Look how I can just put this kale in stem side down, right into the juicer, and it just

 I'm adding my flavorings in the middle here, the lemon and the ginger, so that when I continue

 adding the greens, I can push any remaining bits of those flavors through.

 So you can see that this juicer really got all the maximum juice that we could and the

 This really is the most nutrition-packed way that you can start your day.

It's Presley at ActOutGames.com here and it's Craft Monday and today for Craft Monday

 we will be adding facial features to Amber so she's no longer Slender Amber.

 Before we do the facial adding process on Amber, I'm going to talk about

 something that I did on this Tinkerbell Barbie that I don't know the name of.

 It's a Tinkerbell Barbie and what we did is we took the eyes that we had and we got

 We removed her face and I used Acetone nail polish remover, removed her face,

 and this is kind of a good start just to get used to the facial removing part.

 And she's really, really pretty and I like that you can use it on different kinds of dolls

 So the first step to adding the eyeballs on is to putting them into water for 10 seconds.

 And you place on the eye and then you slide the back and it slides right off.

And then you take your tweezers and you kind of position it a little bit

 And then it will move around a little bit more freely after you do that.

 And you just put it on, the back slides off, and so on and so on.

 You can use tweezers and your fingers to move it around until you completely are enjoying it.

 And then you can push water onto the eyes and then they'll move a little more freely.

 You have to put it all and get it all good and nice and synchronized

 And it did take plenty of taking the pipette, putting in the water, spraying the water on,

 and then using your tweezers to move it around until it's completely perfect.

 Those are actually just little details on top of the eye like eyelids.

 And I did this wrong because I put both of the eyes in at the same time.

 It does take a second to remove it from the water without completely destroying it.

 I'm going to put it on my finger because it's easier to do that way.

 And then move around until you've actually got it in a good position.

 I'm not doing that because you can kind of slide around the eyes

 You just place it in and make sure that it looks nice and neat.

 And then you are done, and you should probably put the sealant on.

 So that's the actually surprisingly easy way to put your eyes onto your doll,

 Subscribe button, subscribe button, subscribe, subscribe, subscribe.

 So now that we know the bass notes of Irish Wash Woman, we're going to put in some accents.

 So accents in Irish are a little bit different than accents in classical.

 Basically an accent in Irish is that you're pulling the bow a little bit faster and longer

 So in 6-8 time, we're going to basically emphasize beat 1 and 4.

 So what I'm going to do is emphasize the first note that is played there and then the fourth

 So notice I'm going long on 1 and 4 and the rest I'm doing real small.

 My name is Joe Wiles and I'm with the Rock and Roll Conservatory and today we're going

 And in this tutorial, we're going to take a look at the introduction, which is also

 the chorus riff, and then we're going to take a look at the verse.

 Alright, the intro riff for Rock You Like a Hurricane happens to be the same as the

 And then put your ring finger on the ninth fret of the D. Hit it three times.

 Then we're going to go to the third fret of the low E, fifth fret of the A. Hit it twice.

 Then we're going to go up to the five and seven of the A and D.

 Make sure you check out HowToPlayAnySong.com to watch the rest of this tutorial and to

 And if you'd like to request a song, you can click on the link in the description to request

 Today I'm going to show you how to achieve a beautiful ombre effect with gel polish or

 To start, I've applied base coat to my nails and cured, and two layers very thinly of cream

 You're going to need a tile to decant your polishes onto, and a nail art brush in a chisel

 First you're going to apply one side of the brush into the red, and then turn it over

 Don't worry if it looks patchy, once it's been applied and cured a couple of times,

 Then clean off the brush and the pad, lightly dampened with isopropyl alcohol.

 Go back in, and this time we're going to go with the orange and the yellow.

 If you need to tidy up, take a brush lightly dampened with isopropyl alcohol and just sweep

 Clean off the brush again, we're going to go in this time with yellow and green.

 And each time when you're changing colours, clean off your brush on a pad lightly dampened

 Once you've completed the colour on one hand, it's time to cure.

 Now that's cured, you're ready to start applying your second coat.

 Now that you've applied your second coat to all of the nails, you're ready to cure.

 Now that's cured, you're ready to go in with your third and final coat on each nail.

 Now we've applied our third coat to all of our nails, we're ready to cure.

 Now that our final coat of colour has cured, we're ready to go in with our top coat.

 Once that's cured, you're ready to go in with a pad lightly dampened with isopropyl alcohol

 Now I have gone for a really bold selection of colours here because I wanted to show you

 just how bright it could look with a rainbow effect, but you would have the option if you

 prefer, you could do this with pastel colours, you could reduce it down, instead of having

 three colours per nail, you can have two, like the picture at the beginning of the video,

 and go for really subtle colours like a soft silver and a nude.

 This is just to show how funky it can look when you go for the rainbow design.

 I hope you've enjoyed this tutorial, if you'd like to give it a go yourself, please hashtag

 If you'd like to find me online, I'm available on my blog at www.natashalee.info and on my

 Below you can see the details for my Twitter account, for my Pinterest account and for

 It now features a reinforced rolled top, a strong ABS front that prevents denting, a

 new bearing system, and overall a pretty good improvement over their previous heavy duty

 In the back, they're kind of held in with a pressure plate, so if you push it in, you

 might have to use a screwdriver if you don't have really strong fingernails.

 This section pops off and then you can slide it over and you can widen or narrow the bill

 To fit a coin, just like so, take a little pressure, the section pops out, move it to

 where you want it to go, and then just press it down with a little force and it'll snap

 Underneath the till, you have your media locations with also a holder for extra storage.

 It also blocks things coming in through the media drawer, so if you have coupons or receipts,

 So you can put big bills into one, you can put tickets into the other, or whatnot.

 So they upgraded the sliding system to a 30 ball bearing point system.

 If any one of these bearings pop out, it's still going to slide in.

 It doesn't come shooting out extra fast, and when you push it in, it has good tension feedback.

 It's rated at 4 million cycles, so they've had a machine that just opened and closed

 You have open, where it pops the drawer open, locked, where it stays locked no matter what,

 and then you have printer driven, where when it's closed, you use a printer command to

 At the bottom of the drawer, in this corner, you have the port for the cash drawer cable.

 If you look at a cash drawer cable, it looks like a phone cable, where you're going to

 It is wired differently though, so you can't just take any phone cable and put it in.

 Each printer manufacturer has specific requirements, so make sure you get the correct cable for

 If this cable ever gets damaged, you can replace it with a new one.

 Being on the bottom of the drawer, it's very convenient for putting a hole in if you want

 It also is located towards the back, so if you set your printer on top of the drawer,

 If you drop something on it, the little bill holders might pop off, but it doesn't break.

 Like I said, the bill holder popped out, but you just pop it right back in, and you're

 If you slip it off the counter, the till holders pop out, but your drawer itself, the till

 The cast drawer has a reinforced top, which means it can take a lot of weight.

 If you take a look at the front, there's no denting, there's no scratches.

 So compared to the abuse that it would take under normal conditions, it's really going

 Versus a metal front that gets damaged, even if you open it up and it hits the corner of

 But with a plastic front, it's stronger and it just doesn't break.

 Without it being all plastic, it's not going to be completely protected from scratches

 And no problem, it opens as smoothly as if no kicking had been done.

 When ordering the cash drawer, make sure you have the correct cable.

 Most likely, the POS-X Epson interface cable is the one you're going to need.

 But if you have a Star or Ithaca printer, make sure you get that cable.

 Additionally, this has a 5 year warranty with a 2 day turnaround on it.

 So a really good deal if you're a restaurant or open late nights

 where you need an answer after hours and it's outside the normal operating hours.

 For more information or to purchase the cash drawer, please visit us at www.POSGuys.com

This one you're basically going to be turning a blonde, as you can see here, into a brunette.

Okay, so basically to start off I went on Google, searched whatever, got a good picture of a blonde, picked it up.

 You want a decent resolution because you don't want any distortion or whatever.

 First of all you want to make sure that you have a nice kind of dark, like, burgundy-brown colour.

 Pick the appropriate size and just, pretty much just paint around the head as best as you can.

 I'm just going to do this one rough for the sake of the tutorial, but you're obviously going to pay more attention to yours.

 Um, yeah, but make sure that you do choose the soft edge because I find that people use the hard edge.

 They'll be wondering why, you know, there's this big kind of like shadowy thing going on behind the hair and all that.

 And don't worry if you go out of the lines a bit, we're going to fix it up once we've finished painting in all the hair.

 Um, yeah, even the darker bits that are kind of darker than the rest behind her head, just colour those in as well.

This is my first kind of video I've done with a bit of screen recording, so I hope the audio and video isn't too bad.

 Okay, so basically all you want to do is go into the layer properties here and throw it down into multiply.

 You're going to look at, it's going to be really dark and dodgy, so all you want to do is move the opacity all the way down to about, I don't know, I usually tend to use 50, 60, 70, somewhere around there.

 Once we get that we just want to grab our eraser and touch up the edges, because we obviously don't want giant black glowing areas around the edge of your hair.

 Um, lower down that opacity and pick a smaller brush and that'll let you just work through these little areas here without, you know, ruining the hair too much.

 Alright, that isn't the best job but it'll do for the sake of the exercise.

 Okay, once you've got that done, then, well, you're pretty much done.

 Um, a few other little effects and things you can do is you basically just duplicate that base layer that you've got and merge your current layer that you created, merge it down.

This is just if you're trying to get the kind of right, right feel for your colour and stuff.

If you want to dim it down a bit you can go down there and get that kind of soft effect but I prefer to turn it up a bit, get the nice warm feeling.

 And then if you end up distorting the face too much, just grab your eraser and get rid of the face there just to clean it up so it's nice and got the correct colours.

 Time for today's kitchen and we're getting saucy with the British domestic goddess herself,

 Yeah, and when she's not creating some delicious dish, she's writing about them.

 She's an author of many books, but Nigella Fresh is the latest in a collection of some

 I am, but I like being busy because in a sense I'm being busy doing what I like, which is

 This is Kathleen's favorite recipe, I think, of all time today, Nigella.

 She's adding one of my other favorite things, crab meat, to it, so I can't wait.

 But, you know, when it's summer, you don't necessarily want to be spending a lot of time

 I use a pestle and mortar, but to be honest, you can use a bowl and a grater.

 You just think of certain people who may have been annoyed at your work.

 They may shall remain nameless, but you know, they know who they are, don't they?

 Well, in England, we can get the brown meat as well, and it just makes it slightly more

 Okay, well, I'm going to require you to do some any minute, because if I put this pasta

 You can have all your friends over, and it's the perfect pasta.

 I then throw in some sherry, and then really two or three minutes.

 They'll be cooked, and the sherry and all the liquor from the mussels creates the sauce

 And then, you know, you can use the mussels as tweezers to get the other mussels out.

 I'm going to show this mainly for a user that told me she or he had a presentation and wants

 All that I show are good, but you know, they're fragments, they're techniques.

 Pull down an E chord, a full E chord, right there, and with your thumb, pick the fourth

 string, and then pick with your index the first, and then descend with your thumb to

 So you have this descending with the thumb, but the index continues.

 After you play once, or twice, don't overdo it, change to the E minor, sorry, A minor,

 Now what happened there on the third strike, I just lifted up my index from the A minor shape.

 So third string, second string, second string open, third string.

 Now lift up also that ring finger, so you have again this open third string.

 Slide your middle finger to the third fret of the fourth string.

 From the beginning, remember the index always after the thumb picks, just place once on

 After you repeat once more and you come back to the E, you're gonna do the roll down for

 third, second, and pick your pinky on the second string, third fret, and play that.

 Sometimes I do variations there, but I'll just say as I go along what I'm doing.

 In the E major shape, you roll down, then you play, just like I said, with the pinky

 So I played again on the second string and then lifted up, then pressed down again.

 You go open on the bass on the sixth string, press on the fourth fret.

 You could start the tremolo with only the middle, then the index.

 The past episodes were brought to you from my own kitchen at home and since then I've

 And today we have a special guest with us from Los Angeles, VD Freeman.

 I'm here in Florida with my girl Jenna and I am honored to be here and go into the kitchen

 Yeah, we're going to make some burritos wrapped in collard greens.

 As a matter of fact, we're going to make some collard wraps and collards happen to be one

 And we're here to demonstrate for VD with our wrap artist, Sandra, how to make this

 You know, I think it's funny that like when a black man is finally on the show, all of

 Just so you know, this is one of the most popular things here at Veggie Magic, our cafe.

 Our collard wraps are very popular and we also make all kinds of marinated salads with

 I'm going to show you how to make a really delicious, satisfying sandwich.

 This is the mock meat, which is sunflower seeds, sun-dried tomatoes, there's cilantro.

 Because I have to say, I don't usually eat raw foods so this to me is something that's

 This is not something that I usually would have picked to eat so you know.

 When you see me eating this raw food, you're seeing me, this is real.

 So right now I'm just looking at it kind of like, oh I don't know.

 This is a pine nut cheese with chili seasonings and lots of garlic actually.

 Well that's good because I'm lactose intolerant so if I started eating this and it was really

 Now I don't usually get to eat cheese so I'm going to use a lot of it because uh.

 Depending on the green that we get that day, that's what we use.

 And just kind of because your hands are bigger you probably do a good job.

 Mine looks like your three year old came over and grabbed some stuff and tried to make it.

 Today we've got Naruto, we're going to go ahead and mention that he's from an anime

 show where he plays the role of a ninja, which that's probably some kind of ninja symbol

 I chose this picture today because he's a little bit grumpy and I like the emotion that

 I think he's possibly grumpy because he has whiskers growing out of his cheeks, that makes

 Or maybe it's because he has a tiny little nose and he can't spell things properly.

 So we're going to go ahead and get started with his face shape, which is kind of shaped

 like a V. For my drawing today I'm actually going to go ahead and do it a lot smaller

 than normal just so you can kind of get the feeling and sense of what you're supposed

 to do but not have to sit through the pain and agony of hours of drawing.

 Keep in mind that this is kind of a freeform drawing and you could be rebellious, you could

 His hair is not going to match, I'm going to do mine a little bit differently.

 My mother says for me to not drink sugary drinks but we won't tell her.

 I'm going to go ahead and draw his little button nose which can barely smell.

 I'm going to go ahead and draw the shoulder pads while we're at it.

 While I'm over here on Naruto, I'm going to show you that his shoulders stick up more than normal.

 And we're going to go ahead and pick up our number four pencil.

 You pick up your eraser, which I guess has some kind of spaghetti sauce on there.

 If you do mess up, then you've got your drawing, which is almost smoothed out looking.

 And I guess if you mess up with your drawing and you have to erase,

 you can always bring out your dust scalloper and brush off all the dust,

 because I'll probably end up doing something lame if you don't tell me what to do.

 Like I'll draw my thumb or something, or the space bar, or the keypad,

 milk crepe is, it's so random, but because one of my friends, Jimmy, actually gave me

 buy any new ingredients and I have to use everything that I've already got either in

So it took me a little while to figure out what I wanted to make

 and then I saw a post last night by Johnny from Spirit House in Monterey Park of a Thai

 got triple sec, and I've got a ton of baking stuff, maybe I can make some sort of a cake

 I think it tasted good and you should look at the description if you guys want the ingredients

So to make our crepe batter, we're going to have to add one cup of all-purpose flour,

 one cup of whole milk, but I'm going to substitute it for 1% milk because it's a less degree

And then we're going to have to add half a cup of beer and you want it lukewarm.

 If your man has really bad breath though, you can actually switch to Listerine if you'd

 And for me, I'm going to go with the expensive stuff, which is the Peps Blue Ribbon, as you

 a mixture of white and brown eggs because I want to promote diversity in this meal that

 And then you're going to need four tablespoons of unsalted butter, melted.

 And three tablespoons of sugar with two tablespoons of green tea powder and a pinch of salt.

 So after whisking the mixture, you're going to want to saran wrap it and leave it in the

 Okay, I'm currently boiling my two cups of 1% milk over medium heat on the stove.

 for now, I'm going to mix my 1 third cup of cornstarch, six large egg yolks and half a

 So now that the egg yolk, cornstarch and sugar mixture has been, has a consistent texture,

 And now that it's pretty consistent and temperature is not too hot, that it'll end up cooking

 Now that the mixture is getting more consistent, I'm going to add my one teaspoon of vanilla

 All right, I'm going to put it over ice water now so that it can chill.

 over the ice water, I'm going to add my butter and vanilla sugar mixture.

 And mix it until it's a good, consistent custard-y taste or texture.

 All right, so with either a crepe pan or preferably a six-inch nonstick pan, you're going to want

 And then after it's hard enough, you're going to want to flip it over to the other side.

 All right, guys, so here's the final product, the 21-layer Milk Crepe Green Tea Flavored.

 It actually looks like packing when you look at it like this, which is kind of cool to me.

 I can't do all 21 layers, so I'll just take a little piece of it.

 Start off with a square sheet of paper and fold the bottom right corner to the top left

 Now, you're going to take all of these four corners and fold them into the middle of the

 Then you take the bottom side and the top side and fold them into the center crease.

 We're going to fold the first diagonal by folding this bottom edge to this crease on

 Now do the same thing for the other diagonal by folding this top edge to the crease on

 So we're going to fold the first diagonal by folding this top edge onto this crease

 And we're going to fold the other diagonal by folding this bottom edge onto this crease

 Now you fold these two flaps upwards to make two opposite sides of the box.

 Now we're going to fold on this crease and on these two diagonal creases that we just

 Now you can make another box and you can slide them into each other to close your box.

 Thanks for watching, for more origami tutorials please subscribe.

 This is a video to show you how to remove and replace a Blu-ray drive should you stop

 First of all you need to take out the security screw on the side of the console, which I've

 You then slide off the top of the console, and this is a 40GB model so there will be

 Once you've done this, you click the back and take the console off.

 Now I've got the power supply, the WiFi, Bluetooth card and the Blu-ray drive.

 Carefully lift the Blu-ray drive up, un-click the power on the side there, that's the power

 On the bottom of the Blu-ray drive is a logic board, this is what tells the console that

 I haven't actually got any screws in this one but there would usually be 1, 2, 3, 4,

 You lift this out, you would normally have to clip out this which is the sensor so the

 You then take the new drive, slide the board under, lift the leads up like so.

 I don't tend to put in the sensor first of all and make sure the drive is working, maybe

 put in 1 or 2 screws and once you know it's working fine put all the screws in.

 You then turn the drive over, plug in the power supply and the board there for the ribbon

 I would advise then you just turn the console on and make sure the disc reads.

Sometimes I write for Make Magazine and sometimes I just go to parties.

 And sometimes at parties the people are kind of thirsty and they kind of need some drinks.

 So I made this machine to make a whole bunch of drinks at once.

I just used a little one, just a third of a horsepower garbage disposal.

 The really key to it is a, other than just the drain pipe, is the half inch ball valve at the spigot.

 So the mixture comes recirculating through that tube right there and swirls around and helps convince the ice that it needs to go through and get ground.

 So as the ice goes through the disposal it gets ground up a bunch of different times.

 So that's why I had to drill a couple holes in the bottom so I could get to the reset button on the disposal in case the little breaker in it trips.

 It does that more, it does that less when you have alcohol in there because I think it doesn't clog so much when there's alcohol.

 If you were making a non-alcoholic thing you'd have to be much more careful about it freezing up.

 So the ice has to get convinced to go down through the disposal.

 They're great as a sandwich, but why not put the filling in an egg roll wrapper, deep fry

 I'm starting off by heating up 2 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil and I'm adding 1

 1 1⁄2 pounds of boneless, skinless chicken breast cut up real thin.

 After I've got it spread out in the pan, I'm going to add some salt and some pepper, 4

 After cooking for an additional 5 minutes, our filling is done.

 Now I'm going to remove this and put it on a paper towel in a bowl and place it in the

 In between the paper towel and sitting in the fridge it will remove any excess liquid

 After our filling is completely cooled, I'm going to add ½ cup of Colby Jack cheese.

 Now this is one of those things that just makes more sense to me to use your hands so

 I'm going to get a handful, probably about 2 tablespoons of our filling, put it right

 Then I'll take the corner of the egg roll wrapper directly in front of me, fold it over,

 Then you get a little egg wash, just one beaten egg, and you paint it on with your finger

 And we're going to continue this process until all of our egg roll wrappers, which

 We're going to just get a handful of our filling, put it right in the middle.

 And once again you take the corner that's directly in front of you, fold it over, take

 the corners on the sides, fold them in, and roll your egg roll.

 You don't want to roll these too, too tight or you'll end up ripping the wrapper.

 Roll it over, get your egg wash on your finger, paint the end, and roll it up.

 And we're going to fry these for 4 and a half to 5 minutes until they're nice and golden

 We're going to remove these and drain them and continue cooking until all our egg rolls

 Now we have these plated up with a little bit of ranch dressing for dipping.

 Let's grab one of these and give it a bite and see how it turned out.

 I was really skeptical about making these but now I'm really glad I did.

 They're crispy on the outside, creamy on the inside, savory, delicious.

 Hi everybody, my name is Mai and today we will be making delicious Milan Soup.

 Kính chào quý vị và các bạn. Hôm nay Mai sẽ trình bày cho quý vị và các bạn một món ngon đó là món canh bí đao.

 For your winter Milan soup you will need pork shoulder, winter Milan squash, salt, rock sugar, and mushroom seasoning.

 Và đây là một nước hồng thơm mùa trời với 3 nước nước nước dùng.

 Nếu quý vị và các bạn muốn xem công thức, xin vui lòng truy cẩm trang web của chúng tôi

 As you can see this one on the corner, the wool is coming away.

 Get your finer wool and you tie it to one of the corners on the frame.

 You get to the corner one and you go up to the top, back, back, back, round, round.

 You do it this way, to that one and then straight up, over and repeat.

 Then you tie it to the nearest one again or to the first one you've done.

 You need this because when you're cutting it you know not to cut the blue.

 Helo, John yma eto o GetXpectations yng Nghwmni Cymru a dwi am ddangos i chi sut i

 Mae'r rhan fwyaf o'r cymorth padau, sydd â'r cymorth slidio'r gwaith y gallwch chi'i

 Mae'r cyfathrebu yn cyfathrebu trwy gysylltu â chysylltiadau sgrw a gwreiddiau, y gwreiddiau cwadr yn

 gwreiddiau gwreiddiau a'r gwreiddiau rhwngwreiddiau sy'n gwreiddiau sgrw.

 Ar y cyfathrebu i'r cymorth padau, byddwch yn ymwneud â'i gysylltu â un o'r rhai

 Os ydych chi eisiau ei gysylltu mewn sefyllfa gwahanol, byddwch angen i chi gysylltu â'r bloc llaw.

 Felly i ddechrau, rwy'n ymddangos eich bod chi'n cymryd i mewn i rai rhaglen cyhoeddus,

 Gallwch ei wneud yn ystod y gwirionedd, neu os ydych chi'n anodd, mae gennych chyfathrebu cyhoeddus, a

 Mae angen i chi hefyd gael y rhan o'r padlock yn ôl o'r rhan o'r gwrthwyneb trwy unrhyw 5 neu 10

 mil, felly ddod yn ôl ychydig, fel nad yw'n ei gosod yn y bwrdd o'r gwrthwyneb.

 Gyda'r padlock yn y sefydliad cywir, ddewch pensyl a chysylltu 2 o'r rhaglen cyhoeddus

 Ynglyn â'r rhan o'r rhaglen, rhaid i chi ddewis y 2 rhaglenau rydych chi wedi'u cymryd.

 Unwaith i chi ddewis y rhaglen cyhoeddus, mae'n ymddangos i'r padlock i'w gael yn

 Yn ystod hyn, os nad ydych chi'n bobl o'r rhan o'r padlock yn ymddangos â'r rhan o'r gwrthwyneb,

 gallwch chi ddod i'r holl rhaglen cyhoeddus a'r rhaglen cyhoeddus cyhoeddus,

 Ond cofio i'r rhan o'r rhan o'r rhan o'r gwrthwyneb i'w gael yn y rhan o'r gwrthwyneb.

 Felly os ydych chi'n mynd i adael gwreiddiau i'r rhan o'r rhan o'r padlock,

 Pan mae'r rhan o'r rhan o'r rhan o'r padlock yn ymddangos â'r gwrthwyneb,

 yna gofio'r gwrthwyneb ac ysgrifennu'r gwreiddiadau o'r rhan o'r rhan o'r padlock i'r sefydliad cysylltu.

 gan sicrhau bod y rhaglen yn eich gweld ymddangos â'r rhan o'r rhan o'r padlock.

 Nawr, mae gennych ddewis yma, os ydych chi'n cymryd y rhaglen i'r padlock yn defnyddio sgrw,

 Os ydych chi'n defnyddio sgrw, yna gysylltyswch y gwreiddiadau i'r rhan o'r rhan o'r rhan o'r padlock.

 gysylltyswch un o'r rhaglen i'r rhan o'r rhan o'r padlock a'i gosod.

 Ac y gwnawn ni yw, byddwn yn defnyddio'r sgrw i gael y rhaglen yn y sefyllfa cywir

 fod y gwreiddiadau'r padlock yn mynd i mewn a'n allan o'r rhaglen yn ddiogel.

 Mae hyn yn bwysig yn enwedig os ydych chi'n defnyddio gwreiddiadau i gysylltu â'r rhaglen i'r gwrdd.

 Nawr, os ydych chi eisiau rhoi ychydig mwy o sicrhau i'ch gwreiddiadau padlock,

 byddwch chi'n eu gwneud ar gael gan ddefnyddio'r gwreiddiadau a'r sgrw.

 Nawr, i wneud hyn, y ffordd mwyaf o'r ffordd yw drwyddio drwy'r gwreiddiadau cywir

 ond dydych chi ddim eisiau drwyddio'n ddiweddar o'r un o'r siwr.

 Os ydych chi wedi gwneud hyn, os bydd eich rhaglen yn ffwrddio,

 byddwch chi'n rhoi'r risg o ddiflannu'r timbre ar y sefyllfa cywir.

 Felly, yr hyn y byddwch chi eisiau defnyddio yw rhaglen drwy'r gwreiddiadau sy'n cywir ar y ddiflannu.

 o'r rhaglen drwy'r gwreiddiadau, mae'n dechrau ar y sefyllfa cywir ar y sefyllfa cywir

 Yr hyn y gallwch wneud yw gwneud ychydig o ddiflannu ar eich rhaglen drwy'r gwreiddiadau

 ac mae'n rhoi sylw at eich sylweddau pan fydd eich rhaglen drwy'r gwreiddiadau

 hyd at ychydig o'ch rhaglen drwy'r gwreiddiadau'n dechrau cywir.

 Ac pan fyddwch chi'n ei ddysgu'r rhaglen, mae'r rhaglen eisiau ei dysgu

 Pan fyddwch chi wedi'u ffytio'ch padbolt, byddwch chi'n ddod o'r iaith

 neu rhywbeth fel hynny, gallai fod yn anodd ar y ffynedd ffynedd.

 Y ffordd o ddysgu hyn o'r ffynedd o'r ddynol oedd rhoi'r rhaglen

 i'r blynyddoedd. Ac yr hyn y byddwch chi'n ei weld yw'r gagwydd

 Os, er enghraifft, mae gennym gagwydd 10mm rhwng y blynyddoedd a'r rhaglen

 neu'r blynyddoedd. 10mm. Ac mae hyn yn ei gysylltu'r holl beth.

 draw o gwmpas y rhaglen gyda pencil. Unwaith wnaethwch wneud hyn,

 Ac yr hyn y byddwch chi eisiau ei wneud yw eich bod chi eisiau ychwanegu ar dros y rhaglen

 gyntaf ac mae hyn yn neud y cyfleoedd o'r timber yn rhannu i chi.

 y byddwch chi yna eisiau ei wneud yw gael eich chysyllt ar oed o angen

 i ddod o'r timber gwaith. Ac yr hyn y byddwch chi'n ei wneud yn well

 yn ddiweddar, os nad ydych chi wedi ei wneud o'r blaen, yw ddod o'r timber yn ddiweddar

 Os oes gennych chi ffynediad â'r fideo hon, felly, dynnu'r hoffi

 neu rannu ar y cyfansoddiadau cymdeithasol. Ac os oes angen pethau ychwanegol

 tetapi saya fikir mungkin hanya kekalan saya yang sedang kembali.

 Saya sebenarnya melakukannya dengan palet Laura Mercier baru yang saya beli

 dan ia mempunyai dua, empat, enam, lapan, dua, dua, dua, dua, dua warna.

 Dan anda akan perasan bahawa mereka mempunyai jenis warna yang mudah dan sederhana,

 Jadi, banyak pakaian kemahiran saya menggunakan palet ini kerana ia sangat menakjubkan.

 Jadi, ya, ini adalah palet yang sangat bagus. Saya sangat suka.

 Dan, ya, saya akan cuba untuk membuat video lain beberapa hari nanti ketika saya ada masa lapang lagi.

 jadi, saya sedikit terpaksa dengan banyak janji temu dan sebagainya.

 Tetapi, saya mempunyai banyak yang mahu saya kongsi dengan anda.

 Jadi, saya akan beritahu anda dalam video saya yang akan datang.

 Oh, saya sedang berbincang secepat mungkin, tetapi saya kelihatan mengarut.

 Baiklah, saya akan mula dengan make-up saya yang selama-lamanya,

 Seperti yang saya katakan, ini adalah pemandangan yang sangat cepat dan mudah.

 Ini adalah salah sebilangan atau mungkin satu-satunya bas maskera yang boleh anda gunakan sendiri.

 Bas ini sangat membantu untuk menjaga rambut anda dengan tepat.

 Baiklah, untuk rambut rambut saya, saya akan menggunakan produk baru ini dari Beauty UK.

 Saya hanya akan mengambil warna-warna teratas tiga dan menonjol.

 Saya tidak akan gunakan eyeliner hitam kerana saya mahu kelihatan lebih terang.

 Kerana sekarang pukul 11 pagi dan saya tidak mahu kelihatan tidur.

 Rambut yang sama yang saya gunakan untuk kukus dan warna hitam yang sama.

 Dan saya hanya menjadikan rambut saya dengan penerbitan secepat mungkin kerana saya mahu keluar dengan cepat.

 Hari ini, di Zadai Yummy, saya akan menunjukkan cara membuat Hotteok,

 Pada bulan Desember terakhir, saya pergi ke Korea dengan ibu saya pada musim hujan.

 Dan salah satu daripada mereka adalah Hotteok, yang merupakan kue manis Korea.

 kukus selama 30 saat hingga semuanya tercampur secara sempurna.

 Setelah 3 jam, pukul semua udara dan kukus tangan anda dengan minyak untuk mengelakkan kekatan.

 Pada kuali pemasak, panaskan kuali anda dengan lapisan minyak dalam keadaan sederhana.

 Kemudian, goreng sederhana sehingga kedua-dua sisi berwarna perang keemasan.

 Anda mungkin ingin menekan dengan ringan semasa mengoreng juga.

 Adunan panas ini hanya terpaksa dimakan apabila sejuk dan segar.

 Terima kasih kerana menonton dan saya harap anda dapat mencuba.

 Helo fy enw i yw Danny. Rydw i'n gwrtho blog o'n enw Food Urchin. Mae'n blog o'n ffordd o'n ffyrdd,

 rydw i'n hoffi siarad am fy mhrofiadau yn y pwyllgo. Rydw i'n cymryd pethau anodd. Rydw i'n hoffi

 ffrorinio ar gyfer snaws. Rydw i'n hoffi gynnar ym mhrydion y gynadledd, yn farchnog i'r

 ddiddorol o fy mhrof. Rydw i'n hoffi gwneud peth sy'n unig iawn, unig iawn o'r

 gwreiddiol. Dyna dydd, rydw i'n cymryd y tyrki. Rydyn ni'n mynd i ddifonio'r

 llwybrau a'u gwmnio gyda gwaith ffrosiad i ddefnyddio fel cymryd o'r ymhell.

 Felly, efallai ei fod yn ddawntio ymlaen yn y cyntaf, ond mae hyn yn gwirionedd yn

 un o'r swyddau y mae angen i chi ddefnyddio ymdrech a chyfathrebu.

 Felly, beth rydw i'n mynd i'w wneud yw ddifonio'r llwybrau yn dda.

 Yn y bôn, rydw i'n meddwl y byddwch chi'n defnyddio'r llwybrau fel gyrllewd.

 Yn hytrach na gallwch chi gael eich gwaith yn y bôn yn y bôn yn eithaf cydnabod, ac yn ceisio

 Yr hyn y byddwch chi'n ei ddod o'r bôn, mae'r llwybrau'n cael llawer o dendyn,

 Fel y dweudais, dymuno eich amser a yna byddwch chi'n dod i'r gwaith,

 Felly, yn y bôn, rydyn ni eisiau, eto, dwi ddim yn gallu ei gyflawni yn hynod,

 rydyn ni eisiau i chi eisiau'r ffwrdd, eisiau'r ffwrdd, ymladd y llwybrau.

 Mae'r un wedi dod o'r fath o ddendyn, mae'r un wedi gwneud ychydig o ddendyn,

 ond mae'r un hwnnw'n dal i chwarae, felly, ie, rwy'n meddwl y bydd hynny'n iawn.

 Rydyn ni'n mynd i ddod â'r llwybrau a ddod â'r hyn rydyn ni wedi ei ffrio yn y blynyddoedd.

 Ddim llawer o, oherwydd mae'r llwybrau'n ddau iawn, a byddai eich bod eisiau ei ffrio i fath hefyd.

 Felly nawr rydym ni'n barod i asembleu ein llefau soseg bacon, trwy gysylltiedig.

 Yr hyn rydych chi eisiau ei wneud gyda'ch bacon yw, yn y bôn, ar y bwrdd gofyn,

 ac efallai y byddwch chi eisiau cael nifer i'w helpu ar eich ffordd,

 Ac yna, beth ydych chi eisiau ei wneud yw ddwylo'r holl ddewis.

 Iawn, rydw i'n mynd i'w leihau yno am ddwy fath o ddwy fath o 25 munud.

 ond rydych chi eisiau bod hyn yn ddiweddar ac yn ddewis yn dda.

 Iawn, felly beth ydych chi eisiau ei wneud yw ddewis y ffocs hwn.

 It's composed of, it's made out of 2 cups frozen thawed coconut milk

 1 cup cashews, 1 fourth nori sheet, 1 jalapeno without the seeds

 And what you do is blend it in a very powerful blender like Blendtec or Vitamix

 Okay, you can garnish it with sweet potatoes, reds, about 1 fourth cup of that, 1 fourth cup kelp noodles

 julienne red bell peppers, 1 fourth cup or chopped red bell peppers

 But because we dehydrated it, the flavors just married and concentrated

 Right here we got, this is actually mounting to hold the skewer or the spit baskets.

 The legs, the legs on the thing, so whether you want to run it with the legs or without the legs,

 Just unscrew the knob and then the part slides right off of a simple bracket right here.

 Now, looking inside, motor is a quick mount, take off, and then slide it back on, locks in place.

 There's actually a charcoal chute right here if you want to add charcoal.

 This right here, we got a little slide gate so you can dump it in and add charcoal.

 If you're going to cook something like a turkey, you're going to have to cook for three hours.

 Will cook for about an hour and a half, and almost anything you're going to cook on this thing will cook within that hour and a half.

 Lower grate, set up for lower grate is for charcoal if you're going to run the rotisserie.

 You can take this grate right here and move it right up a little higher here.

 Second position if you want to cook with regular steaks or hamburgs or hot dogs or whatever.

 We have a cooktop here where you're going to have your charcoal within five or six inches of the food that you're cooking.

 Everything that we're going to see here today that we're going to show you right now, it comes complete with all these components.

 I'm going to drop this back down in because we're going to do just rotary grill cooking today on a couple of these.

 This is our rotary basket right here, which is adaptable for basket where we have a five position basket.

 It'll be a little easier when I get it over here and then I can show you how it works.

 The basket easily moves up and down, locks in, so whatever meat you put in there, meat or vegetables, fish, whatever, poultry,

 The spit, and we're going to do some chickens today, but the unit is made to do chickens or turkey or virtually anything that you can put inside of the basket.

 A couple little clips slide right on here and we have a spike here for a chicken.

 A little tight, but at any rate, we can take these spikes off of here if we're going to do a turkey.

 Again, I'm going to use the smaller one today because I'm going to do chickens.

 Alright, at any rate, I don't know if there's anything else I want to show on features right now.

 Helo semua, ini Charles dan saya kembali dengan satu lagi review Soul of Shogokin, kali ini untuk GX27 Gaiking.

 Pertama sekali, mari kita lihat stand yang menarik yang dihantar.

 Ya, Gaiking adalah mod pre-combine yang boleh memasang segalanya, semua peralatan di sini.

 Nampak sangat bagus. Bagian perlengkapan untuk tangan, tangan perlengkapan, segalanya.

 Apa yang saya mahu lakukan adalah mengambil keluar dua bahagian ini di sini.

 Okey, dan untuk bahagian tengah ini, apa yang perlu kita lakukan adalah menekan bahagian merah ini ke bawah.

 Jadi apa yang anda lakukan di sini, anda hanya memasukkannya ke dalam badan utama.

 Pertama sekali, anda perlu menggantikan kepalanya sedikit, jadi lebih mudah untuk memasukkannya.

 Okey, memasukkannya, tutup kepalanya dan di sini, apa yang anda lakukan, hanya menggabungkan bahagian kaki.

 Okey, tutup kepalanya, dan di sini, anda sudah selesai dengan Gaiqun.

 Bagi artikulasi, anda boleh melihat bahawa tangan dan kaki akan bergerak sedikit.

 Kaki dan kaki boleh bergerak ke depan, sedikit ke belakang, ke tepi, dan kaki boleh bergerak sedikit.

 Jadi ini adalah Gaiqun. Apa yang boleh kita lakukan adalah memperubahnya menjadi mode power up.

 Pertama, mari kita mulakan dengan kaki. Jadi apa yang perlu kita lakukan adalah mengeluarkan kedua bahagian merah ini.

 Okey, dan apa yang perlu anda lakukan adalah menekan butang di belakang ini untuk mengeluarkan kaki.

 Sama juga, apa yang akan kita lakukan sekarang adalah memasukkan bahagian ini.

 Okey, bagi tangan, lebih mudah untuk anda memelukkan kaki dan tangan terlebih dahulu.

 Dan apa yang akan anda lakukan adalah memasukkan kedua tangan ini.

 Ini sangat menarik. Apa yang perlu anda lakukan adalah memasukkan mereka ke dalam perangkat dengan tangan yang menembak.

 Jadi apa yang boleh anda lakukan sebenarnya adalah memasukkan mereka keluar.

 Okey, apa yang akan anda lakukan adalah memasukkan bahagian ini ke dalam perangkat ini.

 Okey, seharusnya saya telah melakukannya sebelum mereka bergabung.

 Di mode power up, dia mempunyai kaki yang lebih besar, kaki yang lebih besar dan kaki yang lebih besar.

 Artikulasi, saya sedikit mengatur kerana kaki ini sebenarnya besar.

 Kita lihat mulutnya, kita boleh membuka untuk serangan api yang saya rasa sangat menarik.

 Sebenarnya untuk bahagian ini, kita boleh mengubahnya untuk kaki yang berbeza.

 Jadi, Gaiqin benar-benar bagus berbanding dengan GX05 yang sebenarnya.

 Mae'n sgiliau brons, ond mae hefyd gan oed, lwyf, mae'n cael pob peth yn mynd ymlaen.

 Felly rwy'n gobeithio i chi ddangos sut y gallwn ei wneud, ond rydym yn dal i'r sgiliau efallai'n gynharach.

 Roeddwn i'n ddim yn fwy cyffrous i weld bod Laura Mercier wedi cynnal primer newydd,

 un o fy mhobl ffavouritau o'r blynyddoedd, a dyma'r brons Radiance.

 Felly, yn gyntaf, rydyn ni'n mynd i brimerio'r sgiliau gyda hyn.

 A dwi'n mynd i ddangos ychydig o hyn ymlaen, ym mhobl ffavouritau.

 Slo hwn yn wych, ychwanegwch gan ociau sut y disewnodd ganog a gwmpas rheol.

 Mae'r gloch yn mynd i fod ar y ffyrdd o'r gwmpas, yn hytrach na'r ffyrdd o'r canol.

 Rydw i'n mynd i ddifro'r pwll i ddechrau, oherwydd mae'r pwll yn helpu i stopio unrhyw ddod o'r gwmpas.

 Rydyn ni'n mynd i wasu ychydig o hyn ar y rhan fawr o'r glyniau Nadia.

 Iawn, felly nawr rydyn ni'n mynd i wasu ychydig o'r gel liner o Laura Mercier yn Espresso.

 Rydw i'n hoffi defnyddio brwsiau synthetig i wasu arno, ac yna mynyddu'n ffibr naturiol.

 Rydw i'n hoffi, oherwydd gallwch chi ddod o'r effaith yn ffasig.

 I bob cwp, rydyn ni'n mynd i wasu nhw, oherwydd eisiau eu gwneud yn ffethrach.

 Mae'n cael ychydig o angl sy'n teimlo i'w gwylio'ch llysiau ar y pryd.

 Mae'n cael Lagoona, Orgasm a newydd ychydig o gynhyrch sy'n ychydig o Coca-cobana,

 I gael y gwas, rydyn ni'n mynd i wneud ychydig o'r gwyn i'r llysiau,

 I don't want it to be too dark. You can make the inside of the mouth dark,

 Break out a brush and some white acrylic and put some highlights on the bottom lip.

 You want solid, opaque white. You don't want a dribbly, dabbly white.

 I know they're white already, but the highlights are exactly what they say.

 They do highlight where the focus of the light comes to an apex.

 And then there's little drizzles of white in the gums where the moisture is.

 And then there's a white line underneath the bottom lip, like this.

 And there's a bit of highlight to this edge, but not as dense as the main bit.

 And then carry it on, just carry it on to the corner of the mouth,

 We'll call it an eye socket. It's not really an eye socket, but it is.

 You can always ambush these down if they look a bit too chalky.

 just put a shadow on this side of the nose, like so, on that side,

 And then, it's kind of almost like an eye socket-y shape there on the other side.

 and then you know you're more or less there with the lightness.

 Now, I've noticed on the photo, there's a lot of kind of brown streaks.

 which kind of give it a bit more of a dirty, industrial kind of look.

 Which kind of give it a bit more of a dirty, industrial kind of complexion.

 And as I said before, you can have a go at painting it yourself.

 We may be doing some more slipknot related shirts very shortly.

 Mae'r cyfnod hwn yn ddweud rhai pethau. Rydw i'n mynd i ddilyn o'r wythnos diwethaf ar gyfer

 y flwyddyn diwethaf am ymddygiad yn iawn. Y flwyddyn hwn, rydw i am siarad am ymddygiad,

 ac mae'r bwysigrwydd o ymddygiad a sut i ymddygiad a beth y byddwch chi'n edrych arno

 a beth y byddwch chi eisiau ei wneud i gael rhai gwaith o ymddygiad hefyd. Yn enwedig i'r

 pobl sy'n gwneud arts bwysig neu eraill, neu unrhyw ymddygiad, i fod yn ddiogel, mae'r cyfleusnod

 yn eich bod yn eich helpu, ac mae'n eich helpu chi'n ymddygiad. Y peth cyntaf i mi yw,

 rydym wedi sôn am ymddygiad yn iawn. Unwaith bod y tŷ'n ymddygiad, yna mae'ch tŷ'n barod i wneud

 rhai gwaith o ymddygiad a rhai gwaith o gydraddoldeb. Y ffordd rydyn ni'n ei weithio, neu'r ffordd

 fyddaf yn ei wneud, yw, unrhyw beth dwi'n mynd i'w hyfforddi y dydd, byddwn i'n dechrau gwneud gwaith dynamig.

 Mae gwaith dynamig yn golygu ysgrifennu'r sgwrs a gwneud ymddygiad. Felly, os oeddwn i'n mynd i wneud

 ymddygiad o'r math hwn, byddwn i'n mynd i ysgrifennu'r holl pecs, ac mae hyn yn y math o

 ymddygiadau rydw i eisiau ei wneud. Mae ysgrifennu'n ymddygiad yn ymddygiad ysgrifennu yn iawn, ond rydych chi'n

 gwneud ei ddewis ar hyn o bryd, ac rydych chi ddim yn ei gysylltu ar gyfer gweithredu. Felly, rydyn ni eisiau iddyn nhw meddwl eu bod yn mynd i'r ymddygiad.

 Felly, mae angen i'r ysgrifennu gael y cyfraith cyflawn a'r ymddygiad yna, felly mae'n mynd i'w gysylltu,

 rydym yn gwneud y sgwrs yn gydymorth ar gyfer ymddygiad. Yr hyn a dwi am ei ddweud yw,

 eto, felly os oes gennych cwestiynau am hyn, neu os ydych chi eisiau i mi fynd yn mwy benodol i mewn i rai

 o'r ymddygiadau, fe wnes i ddweud y byddai'n ddiddorol iawn i chi, felly rydyn ni'n mynd i'r ymddygiadau i

 ddweud y peth arall y byddwn ni'n ei ddweud yw'r dynamig o'r strwythur,

 o'r ymddygiadau. Y cyfnod un, ymddygiadau. Y cyfnod ddwy, rydych chi'n gwneud eich dynamig. Y cyfnod tri, rydych chi'n gwneud eich gweithredu sylfaenol.

 Y cyfnod chwe, ar ddiwedd eich gweithredu, dyna pan byddwch yn gwneud eich dynamig sylfaenol,

 oherwydd rydych chi wedi gwneud eich gweithredu, rydych chi'n cofio'ch dyn, rydych chi'n gweithio'n dda, felly nawr

 gallwch chi gael dyniadau'n dda ac mae'n ddifrifol. Pan fyddwch chi'n ddynio hefyd, mae llawer o bobl yn dechrau

 mynychu eu hodau neu mynychu eu gynnau i lefelau lle maen nhw'n dymuno. Os yw'n dyn,

 mae'n dyniadau'n dda. Y dynaf ydyw, mae'n dyniadau'n dda. Felly os ydych chi'n gwneud y dyniadau'n dda,

 dylech chi fod yn cael ychydig o ddyniadau, felly os ydych chi'n gwneud gweithredu gwag,

 nid ydym ni'n cofio Jean-Claude Van Damme yn y ffilmiau Blaid Dŵr, dydyn ni ddim yn ei wneud hynny.

 Beth yr ydych chi eisiau ei wneud yw cynyddu'n dynol bob wythnos, ac yna byddwch chi'n gweld eich hun yn ychydig yn

 fwy, yn eich rhannu neu'n fwy yn eich dyniadau a phethau. Yn unol, mae'r dyniadau yn ei wneud yn y gweithredu. Mae llawer o bobl yn dyniadau'n dda,

 ond maen nhw'n cael y gweithredu'r amlwg. Mae angen i ni wneud yn siŵr y byddwch chi'n cael y gweithredu'r iawn yno.

 Yn unol, bydd Facebook, Twitter a fi yn mynd yn fwy sylweddol at hynny. Yn unol, rwy'n gwybod am dyniadau isometrig.

 Dyna sut mae'r dyniadau isometrig yn rhoi tensiwn ar y gynllun, felly rydych chi'n gwneud y gynllun yn fwy fwy

 mewn amrywiaethau. Efallai ydych chi wedi gweld y ffilmio Cung Fu lle mae'r dyniadau yn gadael y dyniadau'r iawn am

 amserau. Mae hynny'n cynyddu eich cynllun, eich dyniadau, eich adnoddau ar gyfer y rhannu. Felly mae hyn yn bwysig iawn.

 Rhaid i chi ddeall pam rydych chi'n gwneud ymdrechion. Mae llawer o dyniadau yn dyniadau'r iawn, ond

 dyma'r rhesymau y byddwch chi'n ei wneud yn y dyniadau'r iawn. Y dyniadau'r iawn yw cymorth ar gyfer y rhannu, felly mae eich dyniadau'n

 dda i chi eu gweld yn y dyniadau'r iawn, oherwydd dydych chi ddim yn gweld llawer o bobl yn ymdrechu gyda'u dyniadau'n

 agored. Felly dyma'r syniad, mae'n mynd i'w gael i chi i'r dyniadau, mae'n gwneud y mwyafaf yn dda,

 ac yna o'r fan hwnnw byddwn yn mynd i'r dyniadau. Byddwn yn gosod rhywbeth,

 i chi i ddilyn, i'ch helpu gyda'r rhannu a'ch helpu gyda dyniadau arbennig hefyd.

 Ond eto, Facebook, Twitter, os eisiau rhywbeth yn benodol ar eich hun,

 Hi, I'm Chef Martin of the San Miguel Pure Foods Culinary Center.

 Okay, so the first thing that we have to do is we have to put our chicken in a saucepan

 and once it boils, we will lower the heat and allow it to simmer.

 and what I'm going to do now is I'm going to add some cornstarch,

 our sizzling adobo using Magnolia Chicken Station Chicken Thai Filet.

 Iawn, dwi'n Caroline ac rydyn ni'n edrych ar sut i wneud potatoes daethyn.

 Efallai y maen nhw'n eithaf anodd ac maen nhw'n siŵr yn ymdrech ar eich cymryd, ond mewn gwirionedd maen nhw'n wirioneddol leis.

 Dwi'n debygus ddim yn ffwrddwr a dwi'n mynd i'w ddangos fy nghyfnodau gofynol i chi sut i'w gwneud.

 Ymdrech ar y gyfnod cyntaf yw gwneud yn siŵr eich bod chi'n gysylltu'r potatoes hynny'n dda iawn.

 Felly, gysylltu nhw'n dda iawn. Gallwch ddefnyddio un o'r mandyliniau hynny, ond dwi'n byw yn ymdrech i ddangos fy nghyfnodau.

 Unwaith i chi gysylltu'r potatoes, gwneud ymlaen â'i, gwneud nhw'n dda iawn.

 Dwi'n gofyn i chi ddefnyddio un o'r mandyliniau cyffredin ar gyfer unig un, er mwyn i chi gael ddwywyr fwy, pan gallwch chi wneud ychydig mwy.

 Unwaith i'r potatoes gael eu gwneud, ystod y strydau nesaf i'w ddryw, gwnewch chi'r holl beth yw gadael rôl y ddyn a chael nhw'n eu gosod.

 Felly, mae'n ddifrifol i chi ddod o'r holl beth yw gwneud y ddyn a chael nhw'n gosod.

 Os ydych chi'n cael llawer o amser, gallwch dynnu'r potatoes a'u gosod i'r ddŷ a'u rhoi yn y ffwrdd gyda'r crem a'r llwyf.

 Ond yr hyn rwy'n hoffi ei wneud yw ei wneud ar y stôf, oherwydd mae'n cynyddu'r broses gofyn ychydig.

 Yr hyn rwy'n ei eisiau yw ddwylo'r amser o crem i'r llwyf, ac yna mae'n ddwylol iawn ac yn ddod o'r holl beth.

 I 500 gram o potatoes, mae'n 200 ml o crem ddwylol a 100 ml o llwyf.

 Gwnewch eich crem a'ch llwyf i'r llwyf yn ychydig o ffwrdd, ac os gallwch, gwnewch eich bod yn gwneud yn siŵr eich bod yn gwneud ychydig o ffwrdd.

 Mae'r hyn yn dod yn ôl, ac yna rydyn ni'n mynd i'w ddŷ i'w gwneud yn siŵr bod yr holl beth yn ei gilydd.

 Bydd y potatoes yn cael eu gwylio'n rhan, sy'n cynyddu'r broses ymlaen.

 Mae'n swydd hawdd, ond mae angen i ni ddod allan y potatoes a'u rhoi i ddŷ dŷ.

 Oherwydd fy mod i wedi defnyddio sbôn, gallwch chi dod o hyd i'r mêl a'r crem,

 Os ydych chi eisiau rhoi rhywbeth arall, gallwch chi ei gofynnu gyda chyswllt gruyère,

 yn gwneud y gwreiddiol o'r dŷ yn ystod y byddach chi'n ei gofynnu.

 Mae wedi bod yn y stôf am 25 munud, ac fel y gallwch chi ei weld, mae wedi mynd yn gysylltiedig a ddwywyddiol.

 Os ydych chi wedi cael rhywun y byddwch chi eisiau ei hyfforddi,

 gofynwch iddo ei gynnal y dydd, oherwydd gallwch chi, pan fydd yn ystod,

 dylu cyrgyllau o'i gilydd, ac yna dynnu nhw'n ôl i mewn i'r ffyn, ar y llwybr gwasanaeth i'w hyfforddi.

 Yn unol, mae'n edrych yn ddwywyddiol iawn, ac nid wyf yn gwybod i fynd i'w gael.

 Os ydych chi am hyn, a phlaenoriaethau poteto ffantastig eraill,

 Helo, fy enw i yw Melissa Charton, ac rwy'n ymgyrchwr i Islaylista.com.

 Rwy'n mynd i ddangos i chi heddiw sut i wneud y gwirionedd naturiol hwn

 mewn cynnyddau cyflym, ac mae'n ymwneud â'i gael yn leiaf a'n glir,

 a'n wirioneddol naturiol, fel bod eich lle yn naturiol yn dangos drwy.

 wedi'i tonio a'i hyfforddi, ac rwy'n dechrau gyda llawer o gynsila.

 Felly, unrhyw le rydych chi'n teimlo ei bod angen helpu gyda tonio sgin anodd,

 Mae'n bwysig iawn i sicrhau bod pobeth yn cael ei ddysgu'n ddiweddar.

 ac rydyn ni'n mynd i'w canlyniadu trwy adnoddu ardalau cyffredin.

 Felly, ddifrif iawn i chi os ydych chi'n teimlo'n anodd, yn enwedig.

 rydw i'n defnyddio strokes bywydau'n fawr i ymwneud â'r dyfodol o'r hawliau,

 Trwy ddifrifio'r pensyl, rydw i'n siŵr bod yn cwmio'r pensyl i fyny,

 Rydw i'n ddewis y colo sy'n ychydig o'ch colo ybraith naturiol.

 Rydych chi am ddewis y colo sy'n ychydig o'ch colo ybraith naturiol,

 Rydw i'n defnyddio'r pensyl liner oherwydd mae'n cyflym ac yn hawdd,

 ac am ddydd, dydyn ni ddim eisiau rhywbeth mwy ddefnyddiol a hawdd,

 Dyma hefyd pam rydw i wedi penderfynu cerdd ffurf dda yn hytrach na cherdd.

 Rydw i'n teimlo ei fod yn ymddiheuraf os ydych chi'n dod o'r rhwng y ffyngau,

 Yn y blynyddoedd, gwnewch eich bod chi'n gwigio'n dda i'r rhan,

 Yn ddiweddarach, dwi'n gweithio'n ffyrdd o'r ffynge i'w gael ei ddod i'r rhan.

 Dwi'n gwneud ychydig o ffynge tinted i'w gael ei ddod i'r rhan i'w gael ei ddod i'r rhan.

 All the tools necessary to complete the repair are available on xclampkit.com

 Today I'm going to show you guys how to fix the red ring of death on the Xbox 360 using the Xclamp Fix.

 I find it easiest to put my thumb in the USB port slot and pull up.

 You must now remove the side panels on the Xbox starting on the right side, the one that doesn't hold a hard drive.

 You can use a pointy object or an Xbox opener tool to release these tabs.

 Once you have these released, flip the Xbox 360 over and begin releasing the three tabs on the other side.

 Now that you've got the right side panel removed, flip the Xbox over and begin working on the left side panel.

 Just insert your Xbox opening tool into these slots or use a pointy tool to release the tabs.

 Now once again, just poke the tabs, flip the Xbox over and work on the tabs on the other side.

 Once you've got these tabs released, flip the Xbox over and begin releasing the three tabs on the left side.

 Once you have these released, flip the Xbox over and begin releasing the three tabs on the left side.

 Just poke the tabs, flip the Xbox over and work on the tabs on the other side.

 You may have to go back and forth between tabs as they may lock back in.

 There are seven tabs on the back of the Xbox that have to be released.

 This is easily done with an Xbox opening tool because they're specifically designed to fit the seven slots in the back.

 In this video, I am using a pointy tool so it will take a little bit more effort.

 Now, it's generally recommended to start on the side with five tabs.

 However, I start on the side with two tabs as it actually made it easier for me to open the Xbox.

 Hold the two sides of the case a bit so the tabs don't lock again.

 If this is your first time opening the Xbox 360, you will have to remove your warranty sticker.

 You can use a corner of your Xbox opener to do this or you can just use your fingers.

 Now, place the Xbox down horizontally on its top and remove the case.

 There are six T10 screws that hold the other part of the case and we must unscrew these to gain access into the Xbox 360.

 You're going to have to remove this eject button before removing the other part of the case.

 Saya sangat pandai memasak. Jadi hari ini saya akan menunjukkan kepada anda

 Belajar cara memasaknya. Tentu tidak sebaik yang saya lakukan, tetapi

 Terbaik, anda boleh menggunakannya untuk memasak apa sahaja yang akan rasa sedap

 Pertama kali saya selalu makan cendawan, dan saya masukkan semua cendawan

 Kerana jika ia terlalu tebal, anda boleh menambahkan lebih banyak air

 Tetapi jika terlalu banyak air, tidak ada apa-apa yang boleh anda lakukan

 Apa-apa pun, apa-apa yang dimasak dengan susu kocokan adalah sedap

 Oleh itu, saya tidak akan mengganggu untuk memasukkannya, baiklah

 Saya rasa saya benar-benar berbuat seperti seorang pakar memasak

 Today we are going to make a Lancashire dish, it's called potato pie, not to be confused with Lancashire hot pot.

 Now, Grandma Sarah made this a long time ago, but it's been the stalwart dish once a week in the north for decades now.

 You can use whichever meat you like, but if you get shoulder steak or if you get beef steak, cut it up into small pieces so that it will cook at the same time as the potatoes.

 And also I've got a large onion that's just been roughly chopped and put it in here.

 So we put this on the heat and we add 4 pounds, that's 2 kilograms of potatoes, just cut and chopped.

 Stir it, keep stirring it and then we put a pint of beef stock into there and you keep on stirring it until it gets soft, just until it bubbles up.

 Now I can remember having this a lot as a child and it was used a lot in Lancashire, all over the place, in the 50s and the 60s and the 70s.

 And it's a really good nutritious dish because you can make it for a large family or you can make it for one and it goes a long way.

 Now you can either make it, this will make either a big one, a big dish, or it will make two small ones, well two smaller ones.

 So students, they're on a budget, this is a really good meal for them to make.

 But today I'm going to make one just for demonstration purposes.

 So we've got that in there and you leave it to boil and once it starts boiling you then put it in to your dishes.

 Always put your dishes on an oven tray because if you're going to get them out of the oven with your hands, even with a cloth on, you can drop them because they're very hot.

 So we're going to leave that there and imagine this has just come to the boil and it's been boiling for about 5, 10 minutes.

 Keep watching it, keep stirring it, keep stirring it, keep stirring it.

 Now it's been boiling for about 10 minutes, so the potatoes are starting to soften.

 And what we do then is we scoop it out and we put it in to the dishes like this.

 Now when the potatoes fall in the oven and everything gets cooked in, it'll be really nice.

 Because the salt is in the stock cube, in the beef stock, so the salt is in there.

 And then when you've got it all in there, what you do is, see this will make one big one, I like two small ones.

 And when I said to you before, divide it into quarters, we need two quarters to make two pies.

 And you roll it pretty thick because it will soak up all the juice.

 Put it onto here, make a hole in the middle, you can decorate it if you want with leaves and egg wash it.

 And this is always served with mushy peas. Now mushy peas is a Lancashire expression.

 And they're actually dried peas that you soak overnight in soda and then you wash the soda off in the morning.

 Now you can see these are quite decent pies, it does go a long way this.

 And like I say, if you want to make a posh one you can use really best steak.

 So in they go, in the oven for about 30 minutes on 200 degrees centigrade or gas mark 6.

 Now I've already done one to show you and this is how they look, this is it.

 Or it's served traditionally with pickles and beetroot and red cabbage.

 yw bod eich blaid yn eich gwneud i'w ddod a'i ddod o'ch ffwrdd.

 ac mae'n gweithio fel ddifrifio i ddod â'r membranau o'r garlic.

 oherwydd byddai hyn yn rhoi ddwylo diwylliant i chi, ac nid ydych chi eisiau hynny.

 Hello, cedo wat y calor a'r reidrwg Oedwch inoch chi iawn yn enw Hah-Désig-B an-How-dag-Tabe-Gwen,

 ac yn wynedig ni allwch gweld gall siaradau farchnehon eich nag oedterni edrych arnoch chi fretis o cablights ymrol clair y gwybodaeth o bosib i!

 oherwydd mae'n helpu i sgwrpio'r teithiau a chyflawni'r ffeithiau fach.

 Felly, dw i'n mynd i ddangos i chi sut i'w wneud yn y ffordd mwyaf debygol.

 Mae hwn yn pwder bronso, felly dw i'n mynd i ddefnyddio brws o anglwg i'w hysbrydu.

 Felly, pan fydd eich rhwydwyr wedi'i wneud, rydyn ni'n mynd i wneud y rhain ymhell.

 Nawr, mae llawer o ffyrdd yn hoffi gael ychydig o ddefnyddio ar y rhain ymhell.

 Felly gallwch chi newid gwirioneddau ffasiol pobl yn gyfan ychydig,

 ond byddwch chi'n gwneud ychydig o'r ffwrdd ar y ffwrdd ymhell,

 i wneud y ffaith y mae'r rhan hwn o'ch ffateb yn ymdrech ar y ffwrdd.

 Ac er enghraifft, dydych chi ddim eisiau ei ddod i'r ffrant llawer.

 Felly dw i'n ddiflannu i ffinger gwah ar y ffrant i'w ddiflannu.

 Rwy'n mynd i ddefnyddio un arall ar y ffrant i ddod i'w ddiflannu.

 Start off by cutting off both ends of the lemon and always being sure to use a clean

 You always want to put a nice little slit down the middle of the lemon so that it will

 Always take your finished product and put it in your container to keep it cold throughout

 Now, limes are great not only for sitting on the edge of a margarita glass or other

 types of drinks, but they're also good for putting down in the bottle of Corona or various

 Now, Carrie just showed you how to cut lemons and limes into the perfect garnish wedges.

 These are most common on margaritas and sometimes fruity drinks like a strawberry daiquiri or

 We're going to take one of the lime wedges that Carrie just cut here and we're going

 to go around the outside of our rim with it right in that slit that she showed you

 You're right, you should always use your spear to put the fruit on it.

 Right now we're going to show you our final garnish of the day.

 Now you can learn more about garnishes and other types in our advanced course, but for

 We're going to take a slice of lemon and you're going to peel out the center fruit and leave

 It releases the essence of the lemon as well as looks a little pretty.

 This is 8th Harmonic and today you guys are going to learn The Worst by Jhene Aiko.

 If you guys haven't already seen, the sheet music is up for this song so go to the sheet

 music portion of the site and be sure to download the sheet music for this song.

 Also there's a whole bunch of sheet music up for the Drake tunes so check out the Drake

 I posted tutorials for songs like Pound Cake, Marvin's Room, Trust Issues, what else, Wu-Tang

 If you guys haven't checked out the site, go ahead and check that out.

 What we're going to do is we're going to learn both the right and the left hand together

 So you can't see that on the keyboard or on the screen but it's this note here an octave

 Today I'll be showing you how to make Banana Choc-Chip Muffins with Peanut Butter Center.

 And this is what they look like when I take them out of the oven

 oes y Macсыn ddiwylliant i'r g accidents ac mae cael ei fawr yn clwyngo a sylw couple

 Helo bawb, byddem yn edrych ar y ffront o siart heddiw ac byddem yn cyfathrebu ar y

 rhan o'r ffront yma. Y mater y byddem yn edrych ar a'r ffordd i'w gysylltu, y cyflwyniad,

 mae'r holl ddiddorol yn cymryd â chyfathrebu i ddod i'r siart dynol a chyfathrebu i ddynol.

 Mae'r hyn y byddwch chi'n ei ddod o'r amser pan fyddwch chi'n clwyno'r botwn ystafell a'ch botwn cyntaf,

 Gallai fod yn nifer o sylw gyda'r rhain, ond byddwn yn cyfathrebu ar ddau o'r rhai gynlluniaid

 Mae gen i rhan o'r ffront o'r siart, a dyma fy rhan o'r rhain, ac mae'r placet

 yma yn ddifro, felly mae'r rhain yn ddifro fel hyn, mae fy ngwyrddau botwn yma,

 ac mae hyn yn fy rhan o'r siart. Un o'r rhesymau pam mae gennych chi'r rhif

 yw bod eich rhan o'r siart efallai'n ddifro. Felly os edrychwch ar y cyfnod hon a'r ddifro

 o'ch rhan o'ch siart, gallwch weld bod os yw'n ddifro'n ddifro i'r nec, bydd y rhan o'r siart

 eisiau rhoi'r siart. Bydd eich rhan o'ch siart yn ffusio ar ei ddwy-leiaf

 ac nid yw eich siart, felly bydd yn fwy fwy o'r siart. Bydd yn ceisio rhoi'r siart

 i lawr fel hyn a'i ddifro i'w gwbl, felly gallwch chi ddod â'r rhif.

 Ac hefyd, os yw'n ceisio rhoi'r siart i lawr fel hyn, bydd y rhan o'r ddifro yn dod

 ar yr un anglwg, oherwydd bydd yn gwneud yr un peth. Ac yna byddwch chi'n dimuno gyda'r rhif hwn,

 sydd ddim yn y cyfraith, mae'n rhaid fod fel hyn ar y siart, ond yn ystod, byddwch chi'n cael y ffordd hwn.

 Pan ydych chi'n siarad â'r rhan o'r ddifro ar eich siart, os yw'ch rhan o'r ddifro yn ddi-dreth, byddwch chi'n gweld

 bod yn dod yn ddi-dreth iawn o'r siart, sy'n golygu pan fydd yn cael ei ddifro i siart

 . Bydd eich rhan o'r ddifro yn dod allan o'ch neg a mynd ymlaen llawer.

 Beth byddai'n ei fod, os yw'ch rhan o'ch ddifro yn ychydig mwy cyrffedig, ychydig mwy gysylltiedig,

 Am rhan o'r ddifro sy'n ddi-dreth, y ffordd mwyaf cyflym ac yn haws yw ei slasio a'i gyrffio

 eto. A lle rwy'n mynd i'w slasio, bydd yn y ddifro oherwydd dyma'r rhan

 sy'n ddi-dreth ac mae'n effeithio ar y plac cyffredin. Felly, nid oes pwynt i'w slasio o'r

 neg, y siarad neu'r ddifro. A fyddaf yn mynd i'w wneud ychydig mwy o'r ddifro cyntaf.

 Byddwn i'n ei gysylltu â'r ddau o'i ddifro oherwydd os ydych chi'n newid y llwybr ar y ddau,

 mae'n unig y ddifro y mae'n rhaid i chi ddewis y llwybr, ond os ydych chi'n fynd i'r ddau,

 mae'n golygu y byddai'n rhaid i chi wneud y ddau o'r ddau'n fwy ac y gallai'n

 cynyddu'r ddau. Mae'n golygu y byddai'n rhaid i chi wneud y ddau o'r dda yn fwy ac y gallai'n

 gynllunio'r tebyg o'ch faterion siwr. Felly ddim yn siŵr am effeithio

 unrhyw beth yn ddrastig oherwydd bydd ychydig o mil yn gwneud gwahanol amrywiaeth yn y cyrff.

 Ac yn gyn i chi wneud yw ei ddifro a'ch llwybrau a'ch ddrau yn ôl i mewn i'ch gysylltiadau.

 Pan wnaethoch chi ddewis pa mor rhaid i chi glygu eich ddau, dwi'n eisiau gwneud am 5

 mil, dwi'n eisiau gwneud y pwynt hon yn yr un peth a yna ddewis ynghylch 5 mil.

 Byddai hynny'n cyrff cyflawn, ond mae angen i chi wneud y test ar eich hun.

 A byddwch yn rhaid i chi adrodd eich ddau os ydych chi'n newid y

 ddau ar y ddau. Pan fyddwch yn adrodd ddau sy'n cael ei ddewis ar un peth arall,

 Felly rwyf wedi slasio yma ac os yw fy ddau'n cael ei ddewis ar y pwynt hon, rwy'n mynd i slasio ar yr un

 amser. Pan fyddwch chi'n slasio'ch ddau, mae angen i chi slasio'n fwy i'r ffordd

 drwy ac yn ddewis yn y cyflawn, nid yn swingio'n agos oherwydd byddai'n rhaid i chi ddewis y ddau

 i ffwrdd ac agor yn y cyflawn, nid yn swingio'n agos oherwydd byddai hynny'n newid

 I ddangos y rhesymau eraill pam mae'n gwneud y pwcarring, rwyf wedi drafod

 un ffrwnt arall ac mae'n rhaid i chi ddewis y ddau. Mae'n rhaid i chi ddewis y ddau arall, mae'n rhaid i chi ddewis y ddau arall,

 mae angen i chi ddewis yn eithaf fawr yn ôl. Gallwch chopio'r rhesymau ychydig mwy i gyflawni'r pwynt hon,

 neu gallwch wneud eich rhesymau cyffredin ychydig mwy ychydig llawer ac addi'i yno yn ystod.

 Yn amlwg, gallwch wneud eich rhesymau cyffredin ychydig mwy ychydig lawer ac addi'i yno yn ystod.

 Cewch y rhesymau cyffredin a gweld pa fydd yn ddigon fwy cyffredin ac rydw i'n mynd i addi'r ffrwnt.

 Pan fyddwch chi'n lefelio'ch rhesymau cyffredin ar y rhesymau cyffredin,

 gwneud yn siŵr eich bod chi'n ei gydraddofu i'r rhesymau cyffredin.

 Os oes gennych rhesymau cyffredin, defnyddwch rhesymau cyffredin neu rhesymau pwysig,

 mae'r ddau'n iawn. Dwi'n defnyddio'r rhesym hwn oherwydd mae'n haws i'w weld yma.

 Felly rwy'n siŵr bod y rhesymau hyn yn y ffwrnt cyntaf i fi a rydw i'n mynd i'w gydraddofu fel hyn.

 Dyma fy rhesymau cyffredin yn cydraddofu ac roedd hynny'r rhesym o'r dechrau felly dydw i ddim angen hynny ar ôl.

 Ac mae gen i ddiflenni yma ar gyfer fy rhesym a mae fy rhesym yn unig ddiflenni.

 Mewn amser, efallai y bydd gennych ddau neu ddau ddiflenni o ymddygiad.

 Nawr, mae fy rhesym yma'n eithaf llwyf, felly bydd y ddau o'r rhesym yn eithaf drwy.

 Felly mae ddau o'r rhesym ar y ddau o'r ddau yn unig fel y ddau yma.

 Helo a chroeso i'r Bwyd yn fy Mhag. Dydai rydw i'n mynd i ddangos sut i wneud cupcakes cyffredin bob tro.

 ac ar gyfer 12 cupcakes rydw i'n defnyddio 150 gram o fwrdd, sy'n ymddangos ar y teimlad ystod.

 Rydw i'n defnyddio siwgr castor golau Billington, oherwydd mae'n gweithio yn fawr.

 Mae'r cyffredin yn bwysig iawn, ac mae'r rhain yn bwysig i'r cupcake gwych yw gael eich gwraig yn ystod y teimlad ystod, ac eich eich gwau.

 Mae'n gwaith gwych, onid yna, ond mae'n bwysig iawn i chi gael cyffredin gwyrddus.

 Rydw i'n defnyddio dŵr cyffredin, sy'n gwneud y cyffredin yn fwy cyffredin.

 Mae'r cyffredin yn dod â'i gilydd, ac mae'n gwaith gwych i'w ddangos, onid mae'n gweithio'n fawr iawn.

 Rydych yn friswyn, felly mae gwaith mewn ffyrdd anhygoel ac mae llawn ynsaf o fyny,

 Mewn amser, mae'r adeg yn ffwrddio pan fyddwch chi'n rhoi'r gwaith, ond ddim yn bwysig am hynny.

 Yr hyn rydych chi'n ei wneud yw gysylltu'n dda iawn pan fyddwch chi'n gwneud gwaith,

 ond os yw'n ffwrddio, dyna ffwrdd o flŷr, ond rydych chi'n rhoi ychydig ar y tro.

 Nid wyf yn gwybod os ydych chi'n gweld, ond mae'n ffwrddio'n dda iawn.

 Yn wir, mwy agos y gallwch chi wneud hyn, mwy gwell, oherwydd eisiau y gwasanaeth yn amlwg,

 fel y gwnewch chi'n gwneud maionese, ac dyna pan fyddwch chi'n cael sbund iawn.

 Rydw i'n dweud bod 150 gram o flŷr seilfredig, ond i'w helpu ychydig,

 rydw i hefyd yn dod â hanner thysbwn o ffwrdd gofyn i'w rhoi cyd-dod yn dda iawn.

 Yn fy mhobol, dydw i ddim yn ymwneud â chyflawni flŷr y dyddiau hyn.

 Os ydych chi eisiau, gallwch chi flaenio'ch cypsiau gyda rhind lemwn a rhind orff.

 y unig beth yw'r ddod â 1 ounce o'r flŷr, neu 25 gram o'r flŷr,

 Rydw i'n defnyddio ychydig o ffwrdd gofyn i gael y rhan diwethaf o'r flŷr i mewn,

 a rhoi ychydig o ddod â'r ffwrdd gofyn i gael ychydig mwy o ffwrdd o fflwyr i mewn.

 oherwydd mae'n eisiau i wneud ymwneud â chyfnod o mysgredd i'w cypsiau.

 Rwy'n defnyddio'r un ymgyrch, os ydych chi eisiau gwneud cypsiau cyffredin neu gyffredin fferi.

 ond mae cyfnodau fferi, ymdrechon fferi Brydeinig, yn fwy fwy fach.

 neu gallwch ddefnyddio 100 gram o fwrdd, siwgr, flwr a ddwy o ffyrdd.

 Y tric i gael yr un ffurf yw bod gen i'r ymgyrch yn y cyfnod o'r bwl

 a gwneud ymgyrch gyffredin dwiethaf o sbwn diwethaf i'r cyfnod o'r un.

 Dydw i ddim yn gofyn sut rwy'n gwybod hyn, mae'n bob mlynedd o brofiad i wneud cyffredin.

 I mi, mae hyn yn y cyfnod perffaith i roi cyffredinau cyffredin iawn i chi.

 Ac os oes gennych ychydig o ffurf ar y diwedd, gallwch ei rhannu rhwng y ddau.

 Felly, byddwn i'n ei gynnal ar y diwedd am 20 neu 25 munud, pan fyddant yn dda a gweld eu gweld.

 Ychwanegwch y tomatoes ar gyfer un o'r pethau mwyaf hyfryd i'r picnic neu'r barbeci, yw'r saganaki, yw'r chees a'r cregan.

 Gallwch ei wneud yn y ffyrdd, ond rydyn ni'n gweithio ar y ffyrdd, er mwyn ei wneud ar ein ffyrdd.

 Un o'r pethau y maen nhw'n mynnu i ni yw, os gallwch chi gael eu sônio,

 na'r sônio, oherwydd maen nhw'n ddihydredd yn hytrach na'u rhoi yn y finigr.

 Ond mae'r olwg hyn yn ddiddorol ac yn ddiddorol, dwi ddim eisiau eu bod yn eu gwneud.

 Ac yna, gallwch ei ddod i mewn i'r ffwrdd os ydych chi eisiau, ond dwi'n hoffi'i ddod i mewn i'r ffwrdd.

 Hej guys, here's solar cooking in the winter using my modified cookit.

 To keep it held in place because there's a little bit of a breeze, I put some bricks

 And there you can see I put the pot on there, the thermometer's in the back.

 I want to show you a trick I use here for lighting up with the sun.

 I put my finger straight down like this, and if my shadow forms a right angle, then

 I've got two of these containers, which I picked up for about $7 or $8 a piece.

 They're identical, so I'm going to put one on top of the other.

 So what I've done is I've put hot glue here, just a bead of hot glue, all around most of

 And then when I close the cover, and I put the other one on top, then it seals it fairly

 So I'll put my pot in there, this pot which I got from Walmart.

 And then I, it's simply a pot from Walmart, it was a double boiler thing and it had a

 And so far so good, this has been there about 3 or 4 minutes so far, well maybe 5.

 And there you can see I'm getting good temperatures, it's around 1 o'clock.

 All the water is gone and, mmm, the rice is nice and soft, and brown, you can see.

 So this is the big piece of cardboard I'm going to start out with.

 If you want details on how to build it, including the template that I showed you,

 Before you leave for work, grab the guitar and play this simple yet rewarding song.

 And we add to the pan the chopped bacon or ham, whatever you have

 The next step is to prepare the form for mini muffins or small muffins

 because we want, this is finger food, so we want the pieces to be small

 So now I put the form with the dough into the fridge to cool down

 and there is a secret ingredient and that's the grated Parmesan

 And now we're gonna spoon in the mixture into the little pockets

 Sagh yw spinach a rwy'n mynd i ddefnyddio chees Indian yn ymwneud â paneer.

 ac yna i'r hyn rhaid i mi dod o'r blaen i mewn rhai o'r ffwrdd.

 Iawn, yn y fideo hwn, rydw i'n mynd i ddangos sut i ddangos y bo eang perffaith bob amser,

 a dyma am 17 eiliad, mae'n ddifrif iawn, ond ar gyfer y ffyrdd o'r fideo.

 Felly, byddwch yn dechrau, byddwch yn drapeu'ch ffyrdd ar y palm o'ch dŵr,

 Yn ôl i'r gwneud y ffisiau crab, rydw i'n eu bod yn eu gosod mewn ffrind.

 Mae'n bwysig i chi wneud hynny oherwydd byddant yn ei sefydlu ac yn cwyso'n fwy.

 ചായബൂടര ബഓലസാചടികുംദച്ചച്ചങചചചചചചചചചങചചചചചചചചചചചചചഗകളഗഡഗനചങചചചഛചചചചചചചചചചച

 Down South, from Michael Stile's collection, is a plantation song, I like to think.

 It's a sombre little piece, something like a spiritual, and it should be played as though it was a song.

 Down South has lots of position changes and the fingering, Chuck Marks, is often quite

 The very beginning, you're starting on your second finger, but then it goes down to the

 So do look carefully at the fingering that's marked and as much as possible use it.

 As I mentioned earlier, think of Down South as a song, so the tune itself, keep thinking,

 all the time it's a long line, so all the time you're not taking a breath until the

 end of 8 bars, so it is very much like a song, so all the time you're thinking this is being

 Just a quick word on grace notes, the grace note in the middle of the piece, I'm using

 no weight at all on those little notes, I'm just thinking of the main note as the main

 At the very end, I'm just seeing how much weight I can get away with not having, if

 And you're really thinking about that top note as it's really going, so don't be trying

สวัสดีครับ เป็นเพื่อนวันนี้นะครับ วิ่งจะมาสาธิดวิธีการทำไอส์ครีมโยเกิดผลไม้

And also I forgot to mention that we're gonna need half and half cream also

ใส่นะครับลงไปในพิมพ์หลังจากที่เราปั่นแล้วมันละเอียดเข้ากันนะครับ

ผลไม้นะครับไม่จำเป็นต้องเป็นสตรอเบอรี่หรือกว่าผลไม้อะไรก็ได้ที่เราชอบนะครับ

 Helo, fy enw i yw Jules, Gweithiwr Gwasanaethau Arweinydd Cyffredinol i Evan Cycles.

 Mae gen i 20 mlynedd o brofiad yn y diwydiant cyffredinol a'r mecanigau cyffredinol i gydnabod cyfnodau gwleidyddol.

 Rydym ni'r unig cyffredinol arall y DU i gael cyfathrebu cymorth cyffredinol cyffredinol sy'n helpu i ni gael cyfnodau cyffredinol cyffredinol.

 Rydyn ni'n defnyddio prodwd fel Muc-Off neu brodwydd gwahanol, sy'n cael ei ddod i mewn i'r bocs, i'r ffram.

 Mae'r ffram hefyd yn gweithio gyda dŵr dŵr, felly gallwch ei ddod i mewn i'r ffram, y drif a'r rhain.

 Rydyn ni'n gwneud y ffram efo'r focs arall, ac mae'n dod i mewn i'r ffram.

 Yn ystod ddau munud, a'r ffram arall, rydym ni'n defnyddio ffocs o wydr, a'r rhag, a gallwch ei ddod i mewn i'r ffram.

 Yn y blaen, dechrwywch gym ha ledled, ac fe wnaiff eich dirtio a gwneud y tro.

 Os ydych chi'n defnyddio cynnwysau arbennig, mae rhai cynnwysau yn ymddangos bod angen defnyddio dŵr newydd i ddod o'r agent cyffredin,

 Yn ôl i ni wneud y cyffredin y bach, gallwn ni dod i'r broses o ddiflannu'r hwylo hefyd.

 Y pwysig rydw i'n ei ddefnyddio yma yw'r ddiflannwyr y fath y byddwn ni'n ei ddefnyddio i wneud y cynnwys.

 Brws fach o ffordd, sy'n dylunio i ddod o'r rhain o'r broses, i ddod o'r broses.

 Yn ôl i ni ddiflannu'r brws, gallwn ni gweithio'r brws i'r broses.

 Os oes unrhyw ddiflannwyr yn ymwneud â'r cyffredinau, gallwn ni ddefnyddio'r brws i'r brws.

 Yn ôl i ni ddiflannu'r cyffredinau, mae'r mwyafig o'r rhain wedi'i ddod o'r rhain.

 Yn ôl i ni ddod i'r rhain, gwnewn ni'r un peth ar gyfer ein rhain.

 Yn ôl i ni wneud y rhain fwyaf, rwy'n rhannu'r rhain i'r rhain fwy fawr.

 Yn ôl i ni, rwy'n rhannu'r rhain fwy fawr i'r rhain fwy fawr i'r rhain.

 Rydyn ni'n eu asemlu ar y rhain ac yn ei ddod o hyd i'r llwyd ddysgu.

 Mae gennym ddŵr sy'n dweud pa mor llwyd mae'n cael ei ddod i'r rhain.

 Rydyn ni'n dechrau'n ddod o hyd i'r llwyd ddysgu ac yn y llwyf.

 Rydyn ni'n meddwl bod angen i'r rhain gael ddewis o hyd yn oed.

 Yn ôl i'r rhain gael ei lwbrio, rydyn ni'n gweithio'r gyrion i fyny a'i ddewis.

 ddewis ni ddim bywyd, ond byddwn ni'n gwneud hyn i ddewis unrhyw ddewis.

 Is there something in your life that you've always wanted, but you haven't yet seen it happen?

 If you've never been into this room, then you might not know the room.

 Well, when you walk in, are you looking for the dark switch or the light switch?

 Well, usually the light switch is located right next to the door, right where you're standing.

 And I guarantee you, even though it might be on a dimmer like mine,

 that the light will show you exactly what you want, and it will come to you.

 So today, I thought it'd be great to make a lamp, you know, basically inspired by looking for the light switch.

 And I was sitting here at my desk earlier, and I kept thinking,

 why don't I use one of the main tools I've always used when I do my favorite crafts?

 And I happen to have one that I bought that I didn't really like, but I kept it.

 So, I'm basically just going to use this as the base, and I'm going to remove this part.

 And when I mean empty, you need to make sure you empty it, including all the air,

 Trust me, you don't want to be poking holes through any spray can that's full of air,

 Okay, so the next thing we're going to do is we're actually going to drill a hole right on the top here,

 And then we're going to drill a hole right here, where I can make an incision,

 So, the curious minds out there like me, who always have wanted to know what it really looks like inside the spray can,

 Well, that paint, just like the magic of spray paint, will dry within a matter of minutes.

 Okay, so now while our can is drying, go ahead and just remove the head off of here.

 And to do so without cutting the wires, remove the backing underneath the lamp stand.

 And there are connectors there that will feed the wire through the neck of the lamp up to the head.

 So, just go ahead and disconnect it there so you don't have to cut the wires.

 And then you can connect it back once you get the can on there.

 So, now it's time to rewire our lamp and use our spray can as the lamp holder.

 So, take the bulb holder and wire it through that hole that you were going to use to attach it to the base.

 And then you also want to drill a hole wide enough to where you can attach to where the lamp switches on,

 which is the most important part because that's how we turn the light on, right?

 But what's unique about it is it's going to look like where the spray nozzle is at.

 Okay, so now I've got my lamp working. I put in a small bulb to make it fit.

 And I've got my little spray nozzle. But I wanted to make it like it really just exploded with paint.

 And see how that red paint just dripped there? I want it to kind of look like that, just like on a spray can.

 So, bend your can down and just use your brush or if you just want to kind of pour it on there.

 I don't want a lot, but I'm going to pretend like this is where the nozzle would have gone.

 And just let it kind of run down and drip, appearing like it is just exploded.

 And you want to use an oil-based paint because acrylic or anything else will melt with the heat of the lamp.

 And once you get that, you have your very own light switch that will do more than turn on the light.

 Ond, yr holl ffotograffau i mewn i'r dŵr y byddwn i'n eu dynnu,

 Felly mae gennych ffodus iawn o'ch cymryd cymryd a phethau yn eich camera.

 Un peth a dwi'n ei ddod o'n i i gael eich gynllunau gwyrdd yn y dŵr yw...

 Ac rydw i'n ei ffodus macro, oherwydd rydw i'n ceisio mynd i'r ffodus iawn i ddangos...

 Felly, rydw i'n ei ffodus macro, 2.8, ac rydw i'n ei wneud yn y dŵr,

 Ac mae'n iawn eich bod yn eisiau gwneud cyfuno gwyllt gwyrdd gyda'r camera hon.

 Ac ydw i'n ei wneud, ydych chi'n sefydlu'r ffodus i'r cyfuno gwyllt gwyrdd,

 ac pan ddewch eich llyfr gweithredu, mae'r holl ffodus yn medru'r gweithredu ar gyfer hynny.

 Felly, nid yw'n i mi gael fy nghaerdydd yn y dŵr neu unrhyw beth, oherwydd mae'n anodd.

 Felly, bob tro, os ddewch i mi fynd i'r ffodus gwyrdd gwyrdd gwyrdd gwyrdd,

 efallai ydw i'n y ffodus gwyrdd gwyrdd gwyrdd, neu ydw i'n y ffodus gwyrdd gwyrdd gwyrdd gwyrdd,

 byddwn i'n clicio fy ffodus unwaith i fynd i'r ffodus gwyrdd gwyrdd gwyrdd,

 mae'r holl ffodusau wedi dod i mewn, maen nhw'n hollol fibrant.

 gaethwch gael yr holl ffodusau gwyrdd gwyrdd ar y ffodus gwyrdd.

 mae'r un peth yn y ffordd mae unrhyw ddysg neu ffodus yn ei ddod,

 Yn y ffodus yma, mae'r ffodus yn cael ei gael yn fwy cyffredin.

 Yn y blynyddoedd pan ddechreuwch chi'n dod o'i gilydd gyda phethau,

 rydych chi'n gweithio ar bethau pethau fach y gallwch chi ei wneud gyda'ch ffingers,

 Iawn, rydw i am ddemonstru sut i ddefnyddio'r gysylltiadau lethyr gysylltiedig ar gyfer gysylltu

 cysylltiadau lethyr rydw i wedi'i wneud. Gall fod yn sefyll bys, sefyll bys sofa, gall fod yn sefyll bys lethyr.

 Yn eich cyffredin glu, mae gennych glu, yn amlwg, fath, a rhai ddynion.

 Rydw i am wneud fath sy'n mynd o le i'r cyffredin. Mae'n mynd i fod yn fwy iawn na'r cyffredin ei hun.

 Hello Youtube! Welcome to the new and improved Comikero Kitchen!

 I saw some frozen blue marlin at a local grocery and I thought I'd do a video recipe.

 that's why it's always a nice idea to have plants that you can use for cooking.

 If you doesn't have this kind of plant, I suppose lemons will do.

 Okay, the marlin I got is half a kilo, and I thawed it for a couple of hours, cleaned it, and pat dried it with tissue.

 Now, why is blue marlin blue marlin? Why is it blue? I don't know. It actually looks kind of gray to me.

 Now, take a piece of aluminum foil and pour around a teaspoon of olive oil and spread that around a little bit.

 It doesn't have to be extra virgin, okay? Regular olive oil will do.

 Place the seasoned side of the fish on the oil and then season the other side with salt, ground black pepper, and some dried basil.

 Chop two cloves of garlic finely and spread it over the top of the fish.

 I didn't do it here, but it's best if you keep the seeds from falling with a fork or with a strainer.

 Now, take around a tablespoon and a half of cold butter and distribute it on top of the fish.

 Since you already salted the fish, it's best to use unsalted or perhaps slightly salted butter.

 Do it any which way you like as long as you do it the way I do it and seal in the fish perfectly, like this.

 Place the poiled fish inside a preheated oven at 200 degrees centigrade for 20 minutes.

 After 20 minutes, take the fish out of the oven and after letting it rest and cool for a few minutes, very carefully open the foil.

 Steam will escape from inside it and it could kill you, so be very careful.

 You will find some perfectly baked marlin surrounded by this awesome, awesome butter calamansi sauce.

 Transfer the fish to a serving plate and pour that awesome juice on the fish.

 Chop some parsley and spread it over the top, you know, for culinary effect.

 Just make sure you adjust cooking time because fish like dory tends to cook faster than something like marlin, okay?

 මෙම ස්තූතින් පසු අතර අවශ්‍ය විසින් මෙම පසු හැන්ටමට දැන් සිට පාන්ටුයි

 එය ස්වභාඩි පෙරා ක්රීමට පිටි පසු විනාඩි පසු දම් කොලි පෙරා කොලි බඩ බඩ පසු දම් තබා විනාඩිය ඇත සම පාන් වට්ටෝර් මේදු පිටි බඩ සබන් දම් තම පෙරා

 මිශ්මම් පහස්මිවා ප්‍රතිය සම සම කරන්න වෙස්මින් මෙම ගැනීමට පසු සම පිටිස්පිටිය පැරීම් කරන්න පැරීම් පිටිස්පිටිය දින කරන්න විනාඩි ය

 මෙම සම පොත්වා සම තදාවිකාර්න, ප්‍රතිය මෙම සම හනයක් තේු මෙම ප්‍රතිය වලටකය පොත්වා කරන්නම් කරුණාන

 කරන්න, අවශ්ය සඳහා ප්‍රතිය මෙම සුදුම කරන්න, එය කිරීම අපි සම පහසුව ප්‍රතියක් ආහා පහසුව ප්‍රතියක් වලටකාර්න.

 ඔබට ඇස්දදක් එය අපි මිශ්මාවට පසු පසු පහසුමට පරතියක් ප්‍රතියක් පහසුව ප්‍රතියක් වලටකා පසු පසු පසු පසු පරතියක් සෝස් පසු හා කඩාන් කරන්න.

 අපි දෙන්න ගා මඩ සිට යන්නේ පසු පසු පසු බවට කඩාන් දින 3 ක් දී තාපල්ලාන් ඔබ කරන්න තබා නිනාඩි පසු මිශ්මාවට පසු බඩ පරතියක් පරහසිත්තින්විත්

 මඩ පානය දී ස්වාභාවිත්තිය මම තා පසු පසු මම තාපල්ලානය ග්මාවට කර පොටුමු

 අපට පානය මම ස්වාවට කර ස්වාවට මම ස්වාවට පොටුමු ස්ණාම පන්න එය අමත සමන්න,

 අපි සිස්මැති කර ගාන, අපි ස්ණාමය බොත්, ස්ණාමය සරන්න, තබා පෙනු ප්රතියි තොත් යන්න තබා මේදීමට අපි මෙම ප්‍රමු කර විස්මින් බොත්,

 මිශ්ර බඩ සස්තානයක් පාටම් දෙකි මෙම සමගන්න කරන පසුණක් දෙකි තැල්මිසම්න් වලට කරන්න වලට සමගන්න කරන්න වලෙනය.

 අපි සිටියක් සම්බාදාපල් දෙකි පාටම් දෙකි පසුණක් තැල්මිසම්න්න්න වලට දෙකි පසුණක් ඉතලන්න පසුණක් විස්වන්න ප්‍රමු.

 Helo a chroeso i chi i gyd yn Opsycladay ar gyfer y mlynedd y flwyddyn.

 Ac yn ddiwedd, rydw i'n mynd i ddangos i chi sut i dynnu cymryd i mewn i'r holl ffyrdd o'r

 Felly, y peth cyntaf rydw i'n mynd i'w wneud yw leihau ar y fflwr.

 Ac rydw i'n mynd i ddangos o'r fan hwn at y fan hwn i'r ffyrdd i'r ffyrdd.

 Felly, mae gennych chi hal ffyrdd o gymryd, felly mae'n edrych fel hyn.

 Yna, rydw i'n mynd i ddangos hynny i'r ffyrdd o'r ffyrdd yma, felly mae'n agor fel cardigan.

 Ac nawr, i gael ei ddiweddaru a gwneud ei edrych yn hafod, mae gen i blaid gwyrdd.

 Felly, dw i'n mynd i ffwrdd y ddau bach o'r blaid yma, fel hyn.

 Felly dyna ni am hwnnw, yn anodd iawn i Upscyle y Dydd ar y MÙn.

 Helo, yn y fideo yma rydw i'n mynd i ddangos i chi sut i wneud y stwff hemyn. Rydw i'n Colleen

 Geely ac mae hwn yn blog ffasiwn. Mae hwn yn prosiect rydw i'n gweithio arno ar hyn o bryd,

 mae'n pêl o ffyrdd a byddwn i'n deall i chi beth yw'r hemyn. Nawr dyma lle rydych chi'n

 ychydigio'r dŵr o'r ffabrig yma ac rydych chi'n creu ffold i roi'r edrych angen.

 Gallai fod yn fwy fach fel hwn, efallai fwy fach neu efallai fwy fach na'r hyn rydw i wedi'i gael.

 Yn y lle, yr hyn rydw i wedi'i wneud yw rhoi ystod o'r ffasyn ar y ffordd o'r panau. Gallwch ei roi

 ar y ffordd, fel rydw i wedi'i wneud yma, neu yn y cyfnod neu efallai ar y ffordd lle

 byddwch chi'n gwneud y stwff. Nawr, er mwyn i chi wneud ystod o'r ffasyn,

 mae angen i chi gael eich gwaith yn ymgyrchu ar eich ffinger, felly byddwch chi'n cael y ffabrig fel hynny.

 Felly, rydw i'n ei gael dros y tri ffinger a'ch ffinger gwyrdd yn ei gael mewn lle,

 ac yna gallwch chi wneud ystod o'r ffasyn fel hynny. Byddwn i'n ddangos i chi sut mae hynny'n cael ei wneud.

 Nawr, dyma'r un ffasyn arall, ac rydw i wedi gwneud ystod o'r ffasyn hemyn i'r un hwn.

 Dw i am ddangos i chi sut mae'n edrych fel hyn. Nawr, dyma'r ôl iawn o'r panau, ac fel y gallwch chi weld,

 ddim yn ddiogel, dwi'n ddiogel iawn ar y cyfnod, dim byd o ffasyn, unrhyw ddifrif o ffasyn i'r

 iaith ddra. Nawr, dyma beth mae'n edrych ar y gwneud ymhell. Felly, rydw i wedi gwneud penderfyniad da o ffabrig yno,

 oherwydd dydych chi ddim yn gallu gweld y ffasyn yn wir. Felly dyna beth mae'n edrych arno pan

 mae'n gwneud. Nawr, byddwn i'n ddangos i chi sut i wneud y ffasyn hemyn.

 Iawn, byddwn i'n dangos i chi nawr sut i wneud y ffasyn hemyn. Nawr, byddwn i'n mynd i gael ei gysylltu o gwmpas fy mhryd ddwy ffynged yno,

 ac rydw i'n mynd i'w geisio ei gael mewn lle gyda fy ffinger mawr yno. Felly, dydych chi'n creu

 seil o'r ffordd y byddwch chi'n gwneud eich gwaith. Nawr, mae'n eithaf ffyrdd yno, ac nawr, byddwn i'n mynd i gael fy

 nedl, ac rydych chi'n gwneud ymhell o'i gysylltu o fewn 1 cm, ac rwy'n credu ei fod yn 3.8 o

 ffyned. Rwy'n gweithio mewn cm oed, ac yna'i ddod o'r ffordd. Iawn, felly mae gennych chi'r

 gwneud y ffabrig, ac nawr, byddwch chi'n eisiau cymryd ddod o hyd i un strand, dwy ar y

 max o'ch ffyrdd. Mae'n anodd iawn i mi ddod o'r ffabrig ymlaen. Byddwch chi'n teimlo'n

 llawn'n hapus pan nad oes gennych chi ffyrdd o'ch gweithio o fewn y ffyrdd.

 Dw i'n ei ddangos un mwy o weithiau. Iawn, felly byddwch chi'n mynd i dod o'r ffyrdd o 1 cm,

 sy'n credu yw 3.8 o ffyned. Gael un strand os ydych chi'n gallu, os na, dydyn ni'n ei wneud,

 dim mwy na ddwy, byddwn i'n argymhellu. Dod o'r ffyrdd a'i ddod o'r ffyrdd.

 Gallwch chi ddod o'r ffyrdd a'i ddod o'r ffyrdd, ac yna, pan ydych chi'n mynd,

 gadewch i'ch gwaith, a'ch ffynedd ymlaen i'w gadw o'r ffyrdd a'i creu ffyrdd fawr.

 Dwi'n mynd i wneud un mwy, felly byddwn i'n mynd i ddod o'r ffyrdd o 1 cm,

 3.8 o ffyned, darllen un strand, gadael hwnnw, ac yna byddwn i'n rhoi fy nedl o'r llawn

 Fe wnaethom ddod o'r ffyrdd yno, felly gallwch weld ychydig o ddifrifoedd yno, ond mae hynny'n

 da iawn. Felly dyna beth y byddwch chi eisiau, y gwybod, byddwch chi eisiau ei fod yn

 Yna, dyna'r hyn sy'ch chi'n ei ddweud yn ymddangos yn ystod y llad.

 Dyna oedd y llad ymddangos. Gobeithio eich bod chi'n ei ddod o'r ffyrdd a'i bod yn hapus i'w wneud.

 Gadewch i mi gysylltu, ac os ydych chi'n hoffi, ar y ffaes cymdeithasol i mi, mae gen i

 llyfr siarad gyntaf sy'n gwneud ymddangos fel y byddwch chi'n gallu gofyn i mi unrhyw gwestiynau ymlaen y dde honno hefyd.

 Iawn, beth rydyn ni'n ei wneud heddiw yw ceisio chwarae I'm Yours by Jason Mraz, ond

 defnyddio'r cordi bar i'w rhoi'n fwy percussif ac mwy o ffeil reggae. Mae'r cordi yn C,

 G, A minor a F. Ac i chwarae hynny mewn sefyllfaoedd bar, y ffordd mwyaf i chwarae C,

 byddwn i'n rhoi hynny yma, y ffordd mwyaf i chwarae C yw fel hyn,

 felly beth rydych chi'n cael yw bar ar y tref chwedd a yna rydych chi'n cael eich ffyngyr yma

 Yna byddwn i hefyd yn chwarae G ac i wneud hynny rydych chi wedi rhoi bar ar y tref cywedd

 ac yna bydd eich ffyngyr yn mynd yma a yma i chwarae G. Byddwch chi'n cael

 y mwyaf o'r cordi hyn, neu pob un o'r cordi hyn, yn y llyfrau cordi ddefnyddiol.

 Yr un nesaf yw chwarae G minor ac i wneud hynny, dwi'n meddwl ei fod yn dweud A minor,

 i wneud hynny mae'r bar yn parhau ar y tref cywedd a bydd eich ffyngyr yn dod i'r le.

 Iawn, ac y cordi ddiweddar, bydd fy ngwyrdd gwyrdd yma yn anodd.

 Rydych chi'n rhoi bar ar y llyfr ymhellach a'ch ffyngyr gwyrdd yn dod i'r

 llyfr A ar y llyfr eighth. Dwi'n hafodd. Dwi wedi dod allan o beth ond os gallwch chi ffeisio ar y llyfr A

 bydd eich ffyngyr mawr yn dod i'r llyfr eighth. Dwi'n ddangos i chi hynny ar y llyfr.

 Felly y bar C ar y llyfr tri ac mae'r ddau ffyngyr yn dod i mewn i chwarae'r ffigur honno.

 Y bar G ar y llyfr ddau ac yna eich ffyngyr yn dod i mewn i chwarae'r ffigur honno.

 Mae eich ffyngyr yn chwarae'r ffigur honno ac yna'r ff, mae'ch bar yn mynd i'r llyfr pwynt

 ac mae eich ffyngyr mawr yn dod i mewn i chwarae'r ffigur ar y llyfr eighth.

 Iawn. Felly'r rhan gyntaf o ddysgu hyn yw cael chi ddysgu gyda'r cordau hynny,

 dilyn y cyflwyniad hwnnw i'ch bod chi'n hyfforddi gyda'r cordau hynny.

 Mae'n werth ddweud hefyd fod gyda'r cord bar, bydd eich ffyngyr yn

 Mae'n iawn ein bod yn gallu myw'r cordau a'u gysylltu'r cordau yn ymwneud â

 dwi'n gwneud y byddaf yn gadael y cordau ac nid yn gysylltu'r cord.

 Yna mae'n sain percusif iawn i gael gyda'r styl yma o ffusiaeth.

 Yna beth y gallwch ei wneud yw ar y cyd a chyd-dŷ o'r bar, gallwch ysgwysio i lawr.

 Ac yna'n yr hyn rydyn ni'n ei wneud yw ysgwysio ar y cyd a chyd-dŷ o'r bar.

 Ac mae'r cyflawniad C, G, Am, F yn ymwneud â phobl ynghylch y cerddor.

 Rydych chi wedi gwneud arna'i, ac rydych chi'n gwybod, rydw i'n teimlo,

 rydw i'n teimlo'n dda, rydw i'n teimlo'n ffwrdd, rydw i'n teimlo'n dda, rydw i'n teimlo'n ffwrdd,

 Yn ychydig blynedd, bydd y rhain yn newid y llun, ond mae'n ymwneud â'r cyflawniad hon.

 5 pin euro cylinder loc. Rydw i wedi gwneud hyn o'r blaen gyda'r cas 5 bump unifol ac yn gwneud fy nion.

 Helo fyddwn i yn fideo arall o bumpu'r miler 5 pin euro cylinder loc.

 Rydw i wedi gwneud hyn o'r blaen gyda'r cas 5 bump unifol ac yn gwneud fy nion.

 Rydw i'n gwneud hyn o'r blaen gyda'r cas 5 bump unifol ac yn gwneud fy nion.

 Gobeithio bod hyn yn helpu. Diolch am wylio ac os gwelwch yn dda, gwnawch ei fod yn ddigon ddiogel.

 Today, we are going to unbox Oliver's Fossil Freight wooden railway.

 Helo, fi yw Britwire ac rydyn ni'n mynd i wneud cupcakes minion.

 I wneud hynny, mae angen gweithwyr ffyrdd a cwpwr cyffredin sy'n gosod yr un ffyrdd o'ch cupcake.

 Dydyn ni ddim eisiau ei fod yn dda iawn i ddangos unrhyw ffyrdd a gwmpas yn y ffocin.

 Rydyn ni'n mynd i wneud ffocin un-ffyrdd, felly mae'n mynd i fod yn ffyrdd yn y chyfnod.

 Rydyn ni'n mynd i ddifro'r ffocin gwythiog, yn ôl i'w ddifro a'i ddod o'r cwrs.

 Yna gyda ffwrdd dŷ a chyfnod o glu gwydd, dydyn ni ddim angen llawer i hyn.

 Yn ystod hyn, rydyn ni'n mynd i wneud y cyfweld ar gyfer ei gogleddau.

 Ar gyfer hyn, mae'r ddifro'r ffocin gwythiog sydd i'w ddod o'r cwrs, a ffwrdd fach.

 I wneud y cyfweld, gofynwch y gwreiddiol gwreiddiol eich bod chi wedi'i ddod o'r cyfweld.

 Ychydig bai eich rheclwch y dysg coti'n dda wedyn y bod holl rhan ac elsod.

 I hynny, rydyn ni eisiau ychydig o glu'n ffwrdd a chytun o'r cyffwrdd.

 I gynllunio'r minyn, rydyn ni'n mynd i ddefnyddio mwy o'r glu'n ffwrdd.

 Os ydych chi'n ei leihau ar ffôm i'w ddrys, gwnewch y gwasanaethau.

 Welcome back to How I Make It Up. I'm here today with my beautiful model Ellie.

 We're just going to do a bit of a rock and roll, red hot lip look, giving more of a velvet finish.

 I've already prepped Ellie's skin with a little bit of Dior Nude foundation and a little bit of Nars concealer and an eye base.

 I'm just going to start with Ellie's brows, just give them a bit more fullness and just give them a bit of shape together.

 I'm going to start on Ellie's eyebrows with this eyebrow palette by Clarins.

 I'm just going to take a bit of the medium shade and I'm just going to use that just to kind of give a little bit more bold shape to the brows as well.

 I just want to make them really bold and strong because this look is more about the brows and the lip.

 I'm just pulling it down to elongate a little bit at the ends, just feathering it outwards with the powder.

 I'm just taking your angle brush, I just want it quite thick and bold.

 The next thing I'm going to do on Ellie's eyes is take a little bit of Vaseline and I'm just going to use this to make a kind of like greasy kind of lipped in eye.

 So I'm just going to use a little bit of my ring finger, so just close me Ellie.

 So you just rub it from the middle of your lid and just blending outwards.

 And this gives quite a cool kind of rock and roll lipped in eyes.

 This is Louise Redknapp's new range which is a natural based product range.

 And I actually really, really love this duo eye pencil which is in number one.

 And you get one end that's quite thick and really, really intensely pigmented.

 Or you've got a slightly less intense pigmented but still very strong true black pencil.

 So I'm just going to put this all the way along the lower lash line.

 And a few dots over as well, just ever so slightly with the smaller end.

 So just kind of do a few little extra black dots just over the lower waterline.

 I'm just going to take a small little brush now just for the fluffy end just to smudge that out a little bit.

 And then you're just going to blend that as well with the same small brush.

 If it starts to kind of flick just blend it, just taper it off with the edge of your finger with the Vaseline.

 This is their Ginseng Brightening Mascara which has a really nice thick, bold brush.

 And we're going to apply lots of lashes and get the lashes quite clumpy looking.

 And then we're just going to give the lashes a little bit of a curl.

 So I'm just taking a pair of MAC eyelash curlers and just look down for me Ellie.

 And I'm just going to place the lashes into the eyelash curler so she can keep looking down.

 Back in with Origins Ginseng Mascara and do the same on the top lashes.

 And then just go over anywhere that you need to make more cloggy still.

 So now I'm going to come on to the main part of the tutorial which is this product which is Velvet Lips by Topshop.

 And this creates a really nice velvet effect on the lips like a stain.

 But it goes really dry and powdery that gives the effect of a velvet finish.

 So what I would do is just start, if you've got lip balm on before you start, just kind of re-smudge that into your lips just so they're nice and buffed.

 And then we're going to kind of neaten up with a lip brush in a second.

 So using a lip brush I'm just going to take it off the applicator now and just start kind of giving the mouth some shape.

 And we're just going to keep layering this coat after coat until it looks like a velvet finish.

 I'm just going to let that coat dry now and then add another one.

 So next I'm going to take a bit of NARS Translucent Crystal just to buff the skin in so we get a nice matte finish.

 And I'm just going to kind of buff that through the skin a little bit.

 And then I'm just going to take a bit of NARS Translucent Crystal.

 And then we're just going to add a little bit of bronzer contour to Ellie's skin.

 And I'm going to take a bit of the Guerlain All Seasons, the Four Seasons Bronzer in Medium 05.

 So depending on how warm you are throughout the year, you can mix it up and take it darker if you need to.

 So there we have it guys. A little bit of a kind of grungy inspired rock and roll look.

 Anything that prints onto the eyelid will look better and cooler because it will look more lived in anyway.

 And the trick with the lip is if you let it dry after each layer, then reapply, you'll get this really lovely kind of velvet finish.

 Follow me on Instagram and you can follow me on Twitter for updates on my newest videos.

 Mae'n ddis pasta, butternut a thymau gwych, ac mae'n ddinas iawn.

 Mae'n ddinas iawn, a dyna'n cymryd dim ond 10 munud i'w gynnal.

 Mae'r chees yn mynd i'w ddysu a'r fflwr yn ddysu i gael y sôr yn dda iawn.

 Bincang adalah hidangan yang sangat popular di Asia Tenggara dan ada banyak cara berbeza untuk

 membuat bincang menjadi kekat. Hari ini, saya ingin menunjukkan kepada anda cara membuat bincang

 bi-lactone yang juga dipanggil GDL. Saya suka membuat bi-lactone kerana ia lebih selamat

 dibandingkan dengan cara tradisional dan membuat bincang menjadi lembut. Sekarang, mari kita mulakan.

 1 liter air. Kita membutuhkan 100 gram bincang soya kering dan kocok dalam air selama 4 hingga 6 jam.

 Cuaca dingin, anda boleh kocok hingga 8 jam. Anda tidak boleh kocok terlalu lama kerana nanti

 bincang boleh dihidangkan. Dan kita mengambil semua kulit bincang kerana

 kulit bincang terdapat banyak tosik. Saya akan menunjukkan kepada anda cara memisahkan kulit dan

 bahagian bincang soya. Pertama, kita mengambil sedikit bincang soya, menambah air,

 menghubungkan bincang dengan tangan sehingga kulit keluar. Pastikan semua kulit berpisah.

 kulit sangat ringan dan kita menggunakan pisau untuk menghubungkan kulit.

 Kemudian, kita mengekalkan bincang dan melakukan sama hingga selesai.

 Ini adalah yang kita dapat setelah mengeluarkan semua kulit bincang dan kita periksa dua kali.

 Saya akan mencampurkannya dengan pengadun. Anda menambah bincang soya,

 Dan kemudian, menambah 2 buah tepung, kita menambahkan sepatu dan mangkuk atau sesuatu untuk mengandungkan susu

 dan kita kukus. Teruskan dengan begitu hingga menyelesaikan 1 liter air dan bincang soya.

 Kemudian, kita mengekalkan bentuk dari permukaan air dengan pisau. Ini untuk memastikan

 bahawa kulit kita akan lancar. Sekarang saya ingin memasak susu pada api sederhana dan ingat

 Setelah susu mendidih, kita tukar ke api rendah dan ingat kadang-kadang kita perlu

 Kulit hitam ini, di Singapura anda boleh mendapatkannya dengan panas. Sekarang saya akan menambah

 Cepat mengisi susu tanpa khuatan dan dari rendah hingga tinggi.

 Di sini saya menggunakan pengecualian elektronik kerana ia cukup tebal untuk menjaga panas selama. Anda tidak seharusnya menggunakan

 metal atau sesuatu yang tebal untuk menjaganya. Kemudian, kita mengeluarkan semua bentuk atau permukaan

 Saya akan menunjukkan kepada anda cara membuat kukus. Kita menapis air,

 tambahkan daun pandan. Jika anda tidak suka daun pandan, anda boleh menambah

 Setelah air terbangun, saya menambah gula. Di sini saya menggunakan gula merah kerana saya mahu

 kukus saya kelihatan berwarna merah. Jika anda tidak mahu, anda boleh menggunakan gula biasa.

 Sekarang, selepas 30 minit, kukus sudah menjadi kering. Kita hanya menggunakan sudu dan menggulungnya.

 Sekiranya anda mempunyai sebarang soalan atau maklum balas, sila berikan komen di bawah dan langgan

 It's an old tin I made a stove out of and I just went ahead and used it to do charcloth

 Not big enough to do all of that at once because if you stuff it in there and too

 much of it touches one another or it's too crammed in there you may cook only so much

 I had this bigger tin that I've had sitting around so I made that one to do these bigger

 I imagine it's just as good as any 100% cotton but I like to use it anyhow.

 What I have here is a little tool I made out of O1 steel out of some scrap left over from

 It's been rough sanded with a very low grit belt in case you wanted to hone your edge

 Not quite sure because we brought it out before the required time.

 Now I'm going to bag it up, divvy it up, and get some of this to my friend.

 Helo, yn y fideo hwn, byddem yn edrych ar y cyngor jolín, a wnaeth ei ddifrif o'r

 Dolly Parton, yn fwy cyfartal â'r stripedau gwyrdd, ac hefyd yn ei wneud gan Miley Cyrus,

 felly dyma'r cyfartal mwyaf cyfartal i mi, gwneud cyngor Miley Cyrus.

 Felly mae'n cyngor ddim, y cordiau rydyn ni'n ei angen i ni gydnabod yw Am, C, G,

 i'r Am, i'r G, i'r Am, i'r Am, ac mae'r cyngor yn cynyddu fel hyn drwy'r

 cyngor. Nawr, mae'r intro yn dechrau ar un Am, ond yn ddweud rhywbeth fel hyn,

 fel hyn, felly rydyn ni'n dechrau ar un Am, rydyn ni'n mynd i ddod o'n ddangos ein ddangos ynghylch

 a'r dangos ynghylch, ac rydyn ni'n mynd i ddangos ar, fel hyn, ar yr Am, felly

 y cyngor ar, i lawr, i gael, dynnu ein cyngor cyntaf a'i gyngor arno.

 felly pan ddewch chi'n cyffredin â hynny, byddai gennych rhywbeth fel hyn,

 felly mae'r cyngor yn ddod o'r ffordd gyda'r chorys, yn wir, mae gennym hynny

 dwi'n gobeithio, dwi ddim yn mynd i fy mhen, fel hyn, felly a allech chi ddechrau o'r hyn

 fel hyn, felly byddai'n ddweud rhywbeth fel hyn ar gyfer y rhan gyntaf o'r cyngor, rydw i wedi gwneud

 fideo yn chwarae'r cyfan ar y ffordd, felly byddai hyn yn helpu i roi popeth yn y cyfnod nesaf

 eich haeth ymlaen ymlaen gyda fflaenoriaethau, mae'n ddod o'r ffordd yma

 eich haeth ymlaen ymlaen gyda fflaenoriaethau, mae'n dod o'r ffordd yma

 eich hysgrifau fel y ddewis o'r hysgrif, eich gweithwyr yn ddewis fel llwybrau'n dyn,

 ac yna mae gennym ein hlin nesaf mae'n siarad am chi yn ysgrif,

 nid oes unrhyw beth y gallwn ei wneud i'ch gael yn ymwneud â'ch cwrdd,

 gallaf eisoes deall sut y gallwch eisoes ddewis fy myned, ond dydych chi ddim yn gwybod beth mae'n golygu i mi

 mae'r nodau pwysig ar gyfer y rhan nesaf o'r cŵn o'r lyricau a'r

 gallwch gael eich ddewis o'ch dyn a dydw i ddim yn gallu cael cysylltiad nesaf,

 dwi'n siarad gyda chi fy mhobl bwysig dymyngu ar chi beth bynnag a dych chi'n dechrau

 ddiolch am wylio a gobeithio byddai'n helpu chi i chwarae julien gan dolly parton

Ok here, I'm just properly shape and I'm going to add more texture to the facet surface.

The other day I show you how I use the cheese cutter to cut here to peel off the T-ball skin.

And then after I facet, I will stretch it so it will make the texture more interesting.

So this is the one other way to add more texture to the surface of the T-ball.

 Helo, fy enw i yw Alexis Kerr, ac rydw i'n recordio hwn i'r drumwyr o waer.

 ac yn fywyd, pob ffordd o Type 1, rydych chi'n defnyddio un o'ch ddechrau i fynd i'r wlad.

 Yn fwyaf anhygoel, yw Type 1, ac rydych chi'n ei ddewis yn y wlad,

 ac mae eich ddechrau ffyned yn deithio i'r wlad wrth iddynt mynd dros.

 Felly, gallwch chi ddeithio ychydig mwy i'r ffyned i ddewis y ffordd hwn.

 Gallwch chi weld hynny, rydw i'n mynd yn y ddewis fel hynny, ond mae'n deithio i'r ffyned.

 Byddai angen ddau o bobl yn ei wneud hynny ar yr un pryd i allu clywed.

 Byddwn ni'n cael ein cyfeirio gyda tri microffon, felly ddim yn anhygoel.

 Iawn, ac yna, y Level 2 o Type 1, yw'r un-ddechrau, mae'n ychydig mwy.

 Ac efallai os ydych chi'n ddewis yn ddiweddar, byddwch chi'n mynd i ddefnyddio'ch ddeunydd ddiweddar.

 Iawn, mae'r Level 2 o Type 1 yn ymwneud â defnyddio'r ddeunydd ddiweddar o'ch ddeunydd.

 Yn y ffaith, mae'n y deunydd ddeunydd y fflann, gallwch chi ddeithio ychydig mwy i'w gysylltu.

 Ac yn y bôn, os ydych chi'n gwneud cyfnod cyffwrdd ddeunydd ddiweddar,

 Oh, felly dyna'r ddeunydd ddeunydd, yn y ffordd o ddod yn y flwyddyn.

 Felly dyna'r ddeunydd ddeunydd o'ch ddeunydd ddiweddar, fel y dweudais.

 dyna neu dyna yw'r ddeunydd 2, ac mae yna ddau lefel, fel y dweudais i chi, ar gyfer y ddeunydd 1.

 Yna mae gennych, rwy'n mynd i ddechrau i ddod yn ôl, yna mae gennych

 Felly gallwch weld, y ddewn, yn wir, rydw i'n stopio'r ddewn i'w mynd,

 Ac dyna lle rydych chi'n ei gael, rydych chi'n ei ddod o'r ffordd y gallwch.

 Ac yna, os ydych chi eisiau gwneud eich hun a'r person nesaf chi,

 Rwy'n credu, efallai yw hynny'n penderfyniad, ond mae'r glypan ar gyfer y defaith yn unig fel hynny.

 a dydyn ni ddim yn ei ddefnyddio llawer oherwydd mae'n dymuno ar ôl amser,

 Iawn, ac ie, bydd yn gysylltu ar ôl ychydig, felly dydyn ni ddim yn ei ddefnyddio llawer.

 Hefyd, fe wnaeth Jenny ysgrifennu'r syniad o wypiau a phobl eraill,

 Rwy'n credu y gallwn ni ddweud y cyflawn yn eu cymryd yn eu dod yn naturiol.

 i'r glu, mae'r glu'n nes i'i ddrys, yn ogystal â'i drys yn gyflym,

 dim ond ymdrechion, ac eto esthetig, dyma'n mynd i fod yn fy mhen,

 yw os oes unrhyw ddatblygiad o'r glu'n dal i mewn, bydd hefyd yn golygu i'r piniau

 iawn, felly byddwn yn llwybr y piniau ar y chwedd, i gael eu lladio ar y bwrdd,

 byddwn yn defnyddio fy nes i ffiniau bras a'r blaid i ddod â'r holl ddraig

 iawn, felly os allwch chi ddod â bobyn ar y bras bwynt, mae'n ffordd haws i wneud eich hun,

 ac yma ydym yn gobeithio bod y rhadau ddim yn glodi rhagor o'r rhan

 rhaid i mi gael ychydig o rhai pethau yma yn y blaid yn y blaid

 nid oes ffordd i'w orffu, mae'n edrych ar y draig, rhaid i mi gael llawer o'r materion hyn ar hyn o bryd nawr

 අපි අමුස්ම්ම්මට තැරඹීමට චාවා සාස්මාන්වාන්᷄ක් සාස්මග්මාන්හක් මාස් සාස්ස්මාන්න්හක් Chest

 පියින් හිණික් සාස්මග්මාන්න්හක් ඇ඲ෙන්නේ කරලක් සිපූපින්නේ විස්මානයි

 පෙති බෝස් කිරීමෙනෙමේ ස්වයන්නෙමය ස්තුතුරු පසු පොත්ත්ම්බාණ ආල්තම ස්වයන්න

 Mae'n ddiddorol pan fyddwch chi'n ddifrifio rhywbeth a bydd yn cyflawni'n dda

 Yn y bôn, pan fyddwch chi'n gyrru i'r llawer ymlaen, gwneud y pethau'n cyflawni'n dda

 Gallwch ddod i mewn i'r ddwy o'r rhan hwn i gynllunio'r cyntaf.

 Rhowch y rhan fwyaf i'r rhan fwyaf i'r rhan fwyaf i'r rhan fwyaf.

 Helo, fy enw i yw Tracy Cornelius ac rwy'n gobeithio eich cyhoeddi i gynradd gwahanol.

 Mae nifer o orffen gwahanol wedi'u gadael, felly rwyf eisiau darganfod reswm i ni allu eu defnyddio.

 Felly, os gwnawn ni beth sydd gennym ni yma, rwyf wedi gyrdd y zest o ddau orffen ganddyn nhw, ac rwyf hefyd wedi gysgu'r ddewis o'u hun, ac rwyf hefyd wedi cael y dewis o half lemwn.

 Yna rwyf wedi cael 125 gram o fwrdd gweddi, 225 gram o siwgr castor, ac rwyf hefyd wedi cael tri oegwch, sydd wedi cael eu hachub.

 Felly, beth rwyf wedi cael yma yw bod gen i pan ar gyfer rhywfaint o flwyddyn.

 Felly, dyna'r ddau orffen, neu'r ddau dewis o'r orffen a half lemwn.

 125 gram o fwrdd gweddi, 225 gram o siwgr castor, ac rydyn ni hefyd wedi cael tri oegwch.

 Ac yna, mae angen i chi ddewis hyn yn gyfansoddol, pan fydd yr holl siwgr wedi'i ddiogelu.

 Y peth yw, mae angen i chi wneud yn siŵr bod hyn yn ffurf i'r llaw.

 Felly, rydyn ni'n mynd i gael hyn i'w llu, ac yna dod i'ch gwrthi pan fydd eisiau.

 Dwi wedi ei gyrraedd yn 20 munud, ac rydw i wedi ei chynyddu'n ddiweddar,

 A hefyd i sicrhau ei fod yn cael ei boi, achos fel y dywedais yn ystod ychydig,

 pan fydd yn cael eich gwrthi'n ddiweddar, bydd yn gallu ei gyrraedd i'r dŷ o'r sŵn.

 Yr un nesaf y byddwch chi'n ei gyrraedd yw'i straenio yn straener ffyn.

 Fel y gwelwch, rydyn ni wedi cael ddod allan o'r ffyn o ddau o'r sŵn.

 Rydw i'n ddim yn ddiolchgar o'n profiad cyntaf o wneud ffyn o'r sŵn,

 ac rydw i'n mynd i wneud y ffyn arall, a gobeithio gweld ffynau eraill fel lemwn.

 Rydw i'n siŵr bod fy mhreindwyr hefyd yn hapus, oherwydd byddant yn cael ei ddod o'r ffyn hefyd.

 Welcome to Celestron Nexstar 8SE Computerized Telescope Setup Guide.

 Move the support rod through the center of the accessory tray which also serves as a

 Set hole in center of base over the positioning pin on the tripod head.

 Rotate the base to align the three holes under it with the mounting bolts.

 In the next step we will install the optical tube and accessories.

 Slide optical tube dovetail mounting bracket into the foregarm.

 Thread visual back onto optical tube for attaching accessories.

 Insert the star prism into the visual back and tighten the locking screws.

 Attach star finder by sliding it into the dovetail base on the optical tube.

 Tighten star finder locking screws using a Phillips screwdriver.

 Make sure the polarities are correct as you insert the batteries.

 With the telescope fully assembled and powered up we are ready to proceed with the alignment.

 But first let us familiarize ourselves with the basic hand control commands.

 The undo key will return to previous option or erase data that you might enter by mistake.

 Use numbers 6 and 9 to navigate up and down respectively when the additional option symbol a vertical double arrow icon is shown.

 The skyline method aligns the telescope based on any three bright objects in the sky.

 Using the number 6 key to go up and the number 9 key to go down select your country and hit enter.

 Note that if time was entered in the military format the AM PM option will not be displayed.

 Using the directional arrow keys, slew to any bright object in the sky and center it in the starfinder.

 Once the first object is centered in the starfinder, again using the directional keys center it in the eyepiece.

 After centering the third object in the eyepiece, the telescope will crunch some numbers to determine which three objects have been selected.

 When the objects are identified, you will see a confirmation message.

 Congratulations, you have successfully aligned the objects in the starfinder.

 Please visit celestialrime.com for more information on the Nexstar SE series computerized telescopes.

 Heddiw, yn y ffocws hoff chocolat, byddwn yn gwneud chocolat blaen a ffudge macademia.

 Fel y gallwch weld, rydw i wedi gysylltu a chynllunio'r ymgyrch i'n helpu ni ynghylch y broses.

 Rydw i hefyd wedi ei gysylltu yma, felly gallwch ddod â'r ffudge, os ydych chi'n eich bod yn eisiau.

 Dyma'r ysgrifenni, ac mae hefyd yno i fy sylwi am yr hyn rydw i'n ei wneud.

 Mae'r ffudge hon yn eithaf hapus i'w wneud, ac mae'n ddod o'r iawn.

 Felly, er bod chi ddim yn dda iawn ar y cwyniad, dwi'n gobeithio nad yw'n o'ch gwbl.

 Y rhesym y gwnaethom hysylwyr heddiw oherwydd bod y ffudge macademia'n eithaf arbarthus yn y broses ymarferol,

 Gallwch ddod i mewn i bob ffudge a'ch hoffi. Mae'n gyhoeddiol i chi.

 Yr unig beth rwyf wedi ei wneud i'w helpu i ei leihau'n ddiweddar ac yn llai,

 gan dymunio llunwr taught mewn gwirionedd oedran y bartie cedrigol.

 Ar y trwy, gallwn ddefnyddio avilfa Firmler ennu llethodd cyn hachaydd.

 Ar ystod ystod Halloween, rydw i'n mynd i ddangos i chi sut i wneud cupcakes pumkin.

 Mae'n gwirionedd yn cupcake fanyl, ond bydd yn edrych fel pumkin ar y tro pan fyddwn ni'n gwella'n fynediad.

 Iawn, dyma ffrosting creme chees. Oherwydd fy mod i wedi mynd allan o'r tangerine,

 cwmni ffra, cwmni ffra, sef yr hyn rydw i'n defnyddio'n bobl, rydw i wedi cysylltu rhag ffra a rhag ffra

 gan ddewis y nosel yn ychydig o'r cwmpwn, rhoi ychydig o ffyrdd,

 ac yna'n mynd allan a'n cymryd fynd allan pan fyddwn i'n half ymlaen.

 Felly rydw i wedi dechrau'n dda iawn i mewn, ac yna rydw i wedi cymryd fynd allan

 Ac yna pan ddewis fynd allan, rydw i'n mynd allan a'n cymryd i'r gwasanaeth.

 Yna rydw i'n mynd i ddewis y nosel a ddraw unrhyw ffordd o'r ffordd cyffredin

 Ac yna beth dwi'n mynd i'w wneud yn normal ar hynny, dwi'n defnyddio bats.

 Ond dwi wedi gwneud ychydig o bats gwach, felly dw i'n mynd i ddefnyddio gŵyl.

 Mae'n ddiddorol iawn, ond rydw i'n meddwl y byddwch chi'n gweld pan fyddant yn eu gwneud arno,

 Gallwch ddefnyddio twiziau ar gyfer y peth hon, mae'n ddiddorol iawn.

 Rwy'n meddwl bod y ffeithiau'n eithaf dda pan maen nhw'n gyfraith â'n gilydd.

 Mae'r cyd-drech yn un fel djembe gyda'ch ddechrau. Mae gennych y bas, y ton a'r slack.

 Mae'n ddifrifol o'r rhan o'r cwmnioedd sy'n gartrefu cwmnioedd.

 Ac mae'n ymwneud â'r gweithiau hynny gyda'ch rhestr i'w chwarae.

 Felly, gwnawn ni'n gwaith, gwnawn ni'n gwaith, ddŷ a chreu Africa.

 Ddiddorol ddiddorol ddiddorol ddiddorol ddiddorol ddiddorol ddiddorol ddiddorol.

 Stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot.

 Stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot.

 Whichever hand you started with, which played stamp, put that hand in the middle to play a bass, and keep it there.

 Stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot.

 If we play stamp the gumboot three times, then we play trip up the gumboot.

 Trip is a bass, up the is tones, gum is a bass, and then boot is back to tone.

 Stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot, stamp the gumboot, trip up the gumboot.

 Mae'r llwybrau yn ddangos iawn. Mae gen i ddau o'r rhain sy'n fy mwynhau.

 Mae gennym ddau o aelodau, neu dylwn i ddweud llawer o aelodau newydd, yn ymwneud â locsportau y DU.

 Pan oedd yn cyflwyno ei hun i'r fforwm, mae'n dweud ei fod wedi gweld rhai fideo ar Youtube.

 Nid oedd yn cofio'r enw arall, ond roedd yn dweud ei fod yn y dyn â'r lazer.

 Felly roeddwn i'n meddwl i ddysgu Lennie ac i ffwrdd y cymaint.

 Mae'r nod wedi'i ddod yn fwy cyflym, ond mae'n dweud bod y cyfan yn cael ei ddangos.

 Efallai oherwydd y gwneud ychydig o ddiddorol a gwneud ychydig o gwmpas.

 ...os yw'r batrydau'n ddiwethaf neu'n llwyr, felly byddwn yn darganfod.

 dwi'n gobeithio i chi fynd i'n gwleidydd ar www.uklocksport.co.uk

 Fy enw i yw Sue a dwi o Hobbycraft yng Ngharl Isle ac rydw i heddiw yn ddangos 4 pethau y gallwch eu gwneud gyda chweithgareddau ffat.

 Yr eitemau rydych chi'n eu hangen arnoch chi os ydych chi'n hoffi ymuno â'r prosiect hon yw pêl o chweithgareddau ffat, rhibben, pwyllgor o llwybr a pen i wneud eich fath, rhai ffyrdd ac eich mechyd llawn.

 Rydyn ni'n mynd i ddechrau trwy wneud fath. Felly, dynnu pêl a rhoi ei ddifrif.

 Felly, gwneud un o'r ffyrdd y byddwch chi'n hoffi eich bwntio a pha mor ffyrdd y byddwch chi'n hoffi eich bwntio.

 Rydyn ni'n mynd i ddifrifio hwn, gan ddefnyddio'r ddau ffyrdd fel gwydd a'i gysylltu'n dda.

 Gadewch y ffabrig yn ei ddifrifio ac rydyn ni'n mynd i leihau'r fath ar y ffyrdd.

 Felly, rydyn ni'n mynd i ddifrifio'r ffabrig ac rydyn ni'n mynd i'w gosod o'r iaith iaith i'r iaith iaith.

 Felly, rydyn ni'n dechrau yno, rydyn ni'n gosod hi'r holl ffordd arall,

 Felly, fe wnaethon ni dod o'r ffordd arall, ac mae hynny'n gwneud ei ddifrifio'n fwyaf.

 Felly, rydyn ni'n mynd i ddifrifio'r pen i'r ffabrig, ac mae'n gwneud ei ddifrifio'n fwyaf.

 Yn eich gweithio'n gyntaf, gwnewch yn siŵr fod y ffordd gwyrdd yma'n cael ei ddod o'r ffordd arall ac felly, gwnewch yn siŵr bod eich gweithio'n gyntaf i'r ffordd ariannol.

 Fel y gwelwch chi, rydw i wedi dechrau'r ffabrig yma, felly rydw i'n mynd i ddatrys ar y dŵr.

 defnyddwch eich ffordd gweithio'n gyntaf i'w geisio ac dynnu'r ffordd yn ddiweddar ac yn ychydig yn eich gweithio.

 Os ydych chi'n cael mwy na un ffordd i'w gosod, gallwch chi ei gofynio yno,

 ychydig yn eich ffordd a chyflwyno'ch ffordd arall i'ch gweithio.

 Felly, yn amlwg, gallwch chi adnoddu cyflawni o'ch ffordd a'ch bod chi wedi gwneud,

 Y pethau y mae angen iddo chi, os ydych chi eisiau cyfuno â'r prosiect hon,

 Yn ystod y rhestr yma, rydyn ni'n rhoi'r ffwrdd hwnnw i'w gosod.

 Saya telah makan, tembakan dan menghantar semua makanan shokos yang boleh anda jumpai di Singapura.

 Untuk pencuci mulut, Encik Koh akan menunjukkan pencuci mulut yang sangat popular

 Anda perlu memasukkannya ke dalam pengendali buah apabila ia panas.

 masukkan minyak dan masukkan semua pencuci mulut dan perlahan-lahan kacau sehingga

 Tentu saja, berapa banyak gula yang anda mahu menambah, itu terpulang kepada anda.

 Dan semua yang anda perlu lakukan adalah membeli ginkgo nasi yang sudah siap.

 Jadi, anda memerlukan sesuatu untuk menghiasi seluruh pencuci mulut ini.

 Dan apa yang mereka lakukan adalah menggunakan air, cesnet dan air.

 Ia kelihatan sangat bagus, tetapi apa yang perlu anda lakukan dulu adalah menggabungkan semuanya.

 Mae gen i ddwy lanylion, ond gallwch ddefnyddio'r heatsinks ar gyfer y 3 lanylion.

 Yn ystod ein newydd heatsinks, gallwch chi dal i ddod o hyd i ffwnsiwn PWM.

 Mae'n defnyddio ar gyfer adeiladau system a phobl sy'n dechrau chwarae.

 os ydych chi am gwneud ffyniadau, gallwch eu gwneud ar y computer.

 Gallwch dod o hyd i ffyniadau a gweld beth ydych chi wedi'i wneud.

 Dw i am ddweud wrthych chi rhai o'r ffeaturau pwysig ar y bwrdd.

 sy'n ffynion un-clic, a gallwch ei wneud mewn ffynion Windows neu'r bios.

 Mae'n golygu bod angen i chi ddod o hyd i ffyniadau a gwneud ychydig mwy o hyd.

 sy'n rhoi cymdeithasau cyffredin yn fwy cyflym i 70% yn fwy cyflym.

 rydyn ni'n rhoi graff lle gallwch wneud eich profilau cyffredin eich hun

 Hello, disebabkan jiran saya sedang melakukan kerja pembangunan yang sangat kuat

 Mae'r fideo hwn yn cael ei ddod o'ch gwrs gan y canol Craft, yn cyfathrebu ag y rhwyn iarn a'r purple lindr craft.

 I gael mwy o wybodaeth, edrychwch ar www.knitrowen.com a www.purplelindrcrafts.co.uk.

 Rydw i'n mynd i ddechrau at ein prosiect nawr, a'i gynnal yw Amigurumi.

 Yr hyn rydych chi'n ei wneud yw creu'r aniferthau fach, ac y ffordd rydych chi'n ei wneud yw gwneud cyrllid,

 yn aml i greu'r ffeatredion a'r llwybr, ac rydych chi'n defnyddio hwch fach na'r aniferthau ar gyfer yr iarn.

 Felly yma rydw i'n defnyddio hwch 3.5mm yn hytrach na'r 4.5mm rydw i'n defnyddio ar gyfer yr iarn hon.

 Mae'n gwneud yn gwirionedd yn y cotton ac mae'r hyn yn creu tensiwn gwirionedd.

 Felly i ddechrau'r aniferthau, rydych chi'n mynd i wneud un o'r rhain magig.

 I wneud hyn, rydych chi'n llwyrio'r iarn o gwmpas eich ffingeriau,

 oherwydd mae'n creu'r tensiwn gwirioneddol sydd angen i chi stopio'r stwff yn dod allan.

 Felly mewn byth, byddwn i'n dechrau amigurwmi gyda 6-12 stwff yn y rhain.

 Mae'n dyfynnu ar y ffordd rydych chi'n ei ddefnyddio, felly rydw i'n mynd i wneud ychydig yma.

 Ac yna, byddwch chi'n defnyddio'r ddŷ o'ch rhain i ddangos y llwybr yn gyffredin.

 Yn amlwg, os oes gennych fwy o stwff yn ei gilydd, byddwch chi'n creu llwybr cyffredin.

 Felly dyma beth rydw i wedi'i wneud. Rydw i wedi gwneud 12 stwff i'r rhain,

 ac yna rydw i wedi cynyddu'n hir, felly rydw i wedi gwneud dwy llwybr croesau i un stwff,

 Felly os oes gennych ymdrechion yma, byddwch chi'n creu llwybr mwy a mwy

 a byddai'n cael ei fwyna'n fwy ac mae hynny'n sut i greu'r ddaeth ffabrig.

 Felly os oes gennych ymdrechion yma, byddwch chi'n cael rhywbeth sy'n ymdrechon y ffordd yma,

 ac felly gallwch weld fy mod i wedi creu llwybr o stwffau croesau.

 Efallai y byddwch chi'n eisiau gweld lle rydych chi'n dechrau bob rhand,

 ar ôl y ddwy llwybr croesau i un stwff, byddwch chi'n gwneud tri llwybr croesau

 I'r ddiwedd, mae'r ffwrdd wedi'i gysylltu a'i rhoi ar y ddewis.

 Rydw i'n hoffi'r ffricasse gwasau, mae'n rhoi ffat gwych i'r ddewis.

 llawer o hynny ar y ddewis, felly byddwn yn gofyn i'r tîm y restaurant ei wneud hynny.

 Hi, today I'm going to show you how to make soy sauce chicken wings.

 What you're going to need are frozen chicken wings, this is about 2 pounds.

 I got some chopped garlic, cilantro, butter, chili paste, oil, soy sauce, and sugar.

 First, I'm going to deep fry my frozen chicken wings in my deep fryer at 370 degrees F until it's a nice golden color.

 I'm going to add a little bit of water to the pot to make sure the chicken is fully cooked.

 When you put your chicken into the deep fryer, make sure you don't have so much oil that it's going to overflow because the chicken is frozen.

 Put enough slowly in so when it gets to the bubble, it should calm down the oil so it won't overflow.

 The chicken should be sitting like that and then you're going to cover with the deep fryer and let it sit.

 I'm saying around check on it every 4 minutes or so to make sure it's not overcooked, it's not burnt, but it's not undercooked.

 Then you're going to take it out and let it sit right there and let it cool down and drain as much oil as you can on the chicken.

 As that is being drained, you're going to go into your stove top to do your sauce for the chicken.

 You're going to put a teaspoon of oil. I have olive oil, but I guess you can use whatever oil you have at hand.

 I'm going to make sure that this heats up before I throw in my garlic because I want my garlic to be cooked until the translucent is gone.

 My oil, as you can see, is getting hot, but not boiling hot. It's hot.

 Once your garlic is yellow like that, you're going to lower your heat to medium heat or even between low and medium.

 If you don't want to burn your garlic, this is when you throw in your butter. I have two tablespoons of butter.

 Two tablespoons. You're going to let it melt in with the garlic.

 Once you get to that level of bubbling, make sure it's on medium heat.

 You're going to put in two tablespoons of sugar. Don't be scared.

 Now this is optional. This is when you're going to put in your chili paste.

 Halo selamat datang di GP Channel. Hari ini kita ingin membuat aiskrim goreng

 Pertama kita ambil aiskrim seperti ini dan kemudian masukkan ke dalam pinggan

 Dan kemudian kita bisa masukkan ke dalam pengecaraan selama sekitar 2 jam

 Felly, rydyn ni'n mynd i siarad am ymbrisiau nawr, eto, ar yr un thema o ddatblygu amser.

 Rwy'n credu eich bod chi'n cael y teimlad bod ymbrisiau'n bwysig iawn i mi.

 Felly, eto, mae yna dwy ffordd y gallwch chi'n cyfastroi eich ymbrisiau o ran y ffordd rydych chi'n eu cymryd yn eich gweithwyr.

 Mae'r hyn rydyn ni'n ei'i chynnal yn ymbrisiau unig, lle'n gwbl, mae eich llwybr dda ar gyfer eich teithiau,

 ymhellach, rhwng ddau cyffredin o'r ffordd i mewn i'r yma, a yna rydych chi'n gadael eich teithiau ar y ddau o'r llwybr.

 Ac yna rydych chi'n siŵr bod yna llwybr cyflwynol, ac yna'ch bleiddio.

 Ac mae hynny'n gweithio'n 70, 80% o'r ffaith y mae chwaraeon saxo yn chwarae.

 Ac mae'n golygu bod y llwybr ddau yn dod â'ch teithiau, ac mae'n golygu bod eich teithiau ddim yn cydnabod â'r llwybr dda.

 Ac mae hynny'n gwneud, oherwydd nad ydych chi'n gallu gweithio'n anodd ar y llwybr dda, mae'n gweithio i chi ysbrydoli'r rhan hon o'ch gynllun,

 ac yna'r hyn y gwnaethoch chi'n gwneud yw creu'r llys yng nghanol y llwybr dda i gael y fflwydd yn cyflawni,

 ond hefyd, byddwch chi'n gallu gwneud eich llwybr dda i'w ddod â'ch ymbrisiau, oherwydd nad oes gennych hynny o bwysod, i greu'r llys yng nghanol y llwybr dda.

 Ac rydych chi'n teimlo, oherwydd eich bod chi'n agor eich llwybr dda, mae eich sain yn dod â'ch llwybr dda.

 Ac rydych chi'n gweld cynyddu'r fwyaf yn y ffynion, yn y ffordd y gwnaethoch chi'r hyn.

 Ac mae hefyd yn ddiddorol iawn, oherwydd os ydych chi'n eisiau cael sain fwyaf gyda'r llwybr dda,

 yna mae'n rhaid i chi ddod â'ch ymbrisiau, oherwydd os ydych chi'n ei gael i'w dod â'n, gallwch chi'n gysylltu'r fflwydd,

 ac efallai y byddwch chi'n gallu gael ei gynllunio, oherwydd byddwch chi'n cael eich gweithio drwy'ch llwybr dda.

 Ac efallai yw hyn, pan ddechreuwch i'w wneud yn y blynyddoedd, oherwydd dydych chi ddim yn defnyddio'r ysgolion hyn,

 Mae'n mynd, ac mae'n ddiddorol iawn ar ôl tua 5 munud ar y ddechrau llwybr, oherwydd dydych chi ddim yn defnyddio ei wneud.

 yna mae'n rhaid i chi wneud 5 munud, a yna 10 munud, ac yna'n cynyddu'r cyflawn.

 Ond mae'n werth i chi wneud y transiwn hon, oherwydd mae'n gwneud eich sain llawer mwy na'r un.

 अब इसके बाद जोग रहे हैं, जोक लें, तीवी लें, जो जाएं, इसे बहुत है।

 इसलिए, इस लगज़िं और बेलीफ के लिए बहुतना खुश रहा है और एक पंजि के लिए पीछद शबूर्ण है।

 Hello, I'm here to share some tips on how to solve the light leakage on a Nokia N8,

 On this, as you can see, the light leakage happens here on the portion that has some thin

 layer of paint and also a small space here between the keys, I mean on the cover and

 So first thing you need to do is open or remove the cover using the T5 screwdriver.

 And this is a T5 screwdriver and open both sides, remove the screws and get the cup.

 Second thing to do is grab a black pen or a marker in order to blacken the inner part

 So you can see here that on the right inner position of the cup that I already blackened

 Another thing is to solve the gap between this cover and the body of the Nokia N8 between

 All you need to do is get a strip of tape, a thin tape and place it on the, between this

 And after that, put again the cover and you will see that there's no anymore light leakage.

 So after you return or recover again the bottom of the Nokia N8, we would see that

 the light leakage was gone and also between this gap on the cover and the body of Nokia

 So you will see now we have already eliminated the light leakage on this portion.

 იმლი საჄრანი ხდანი იმი უაულ ხრბი ვარბი. იიმი სანი ხდანი ხრბი ხდი.

 ყლთჟაჄსოთიტლ ოიერისიღერირიშერისთოისირისრისრისისრირისუიშერისთცრისისისერი.

 I ddysgu'r polisioedd da, mae'n bwysig i gael y preparatio a'r moddwylio'n gwneud

 i'r cyhoedd mwyaf y gallwch chi ddysgu. Ar y pysg gwreiddiol hon, fel bod yn crystal ledd o leiaf

 gwael, rwyf wedi'i gallu defnyddio stônau mwy llai na'r byddwch chi'n ei wneud ar glas hard.

 y rheolau ar y lleiaf i roi rhai ffurf, eto gyda'r stôn llethol.

 Gaethom gwneud yr holl gysylltiad, gwneud yn siŵr bod popeth yn llwyr cyn i mi ddechrau,

 yna allaf fynd i'r dylunio trwy, yn ystod hon, dylunio'r ffurf gwreiddiol fflexig.

 Yna, yn eithaf bysged, rwy'n rhoi'r hŷn dylunio yn ôl i'r lle rwyf wedi'i dylunio,

 yn ei wneud yn ddiogel ac yn ddiogel. Yn y ffordd yma gallaf cyfrif

 byddai'n rhaid i chi ddewis'i gweithredu i'w gilydd, a yna ysgrifennu'n aml ar y brif.

 Unwaith eto, rwy'n mynd i ddysgu'r ffurf ar un o'r ddewis ar y ffurf arbennig,

 ac yna rwy'n mynd i ddysgu'n ffurf o'r ardal y ddewis arbennig,

 Nid yw'n ymwneud â chael y broses yn hysbysu, mae'n well iawn ei wneud yn hir,

 Gallwch yna rhoi'r ffurf arbennig ar y ffurf ar y ddewis ar y ffurf ar y ffurf ar y ffurf ar y ffurf,

 Os ydych chi'n dod at y tro hwn, mae'r gwirionau bach ar y ddewis wedi

 ddysgu, gallwch chi bob amser eu rhoi'n ffurf gyda ddewis llai,

 neu os yw'r glas yn fwy anodd, efallai y byddwch chi'n rhaid i chi ddod i'r ddewis o ddewis ffurf

 welcome to adum home cooking today we are preparing bang forbisi

 these are the main ingredients for preparing balfo bising i have my cornmeal my dry corn meal

 which i use for aquele the same cornmeal dry cornmeal i divide it into two portions i cooked

 half the method of cooking the aquele i've showed it already and this one you just put hot

 boil hot water and then you make a little bit of porridge and then you cook some of the dry cornmeal

 in the porridge to make it like a type of banku hard like this you cook it hard don't make it too

 soft because you're going to be molding it and then you leave it to cool so this is the half

 part of the dry cornmeal which i sprinkle with cold water leave it overnight and this is the

 other part of the dry cornmeal which i cook into aquele in the form of aquele

 so i leave it to cool now what i'm going to do is i'm going to mix the raw corn flour dry corn flour

 bang forbisi i've got my cooked cornmeal here aquele here i've got the uncooked one the raw

 cornmeal i've got my sugar nutmeg and granite and of course you need cooking oil for frying

 you can use any type of cooking oil being vegetable oil sunflower oil or olive oil

 so i can use my hand because i wash my hand is clean it's easier to use your hand i'm going

 i mixed it up and i'm going to add some nutmeg to it and then i mix it well

 you can just add the nutmeg to your cornmeal and then you can add the dry cornmeal

 so it's ready now to be fried you just mold it to any shape that you like you get another flour

 you get extra dry flour just to dust it up so that it doesn't go sticky onto your hand

 you remember to save some of the dry cornmeal so you can use it to mold it at this stage you

 can just pick your peanuts and then press it on press it on like this

 or you can just fry it on it and then after frying you serve it with the peanuts

 so here we are this is the ariesu called by fantis and popularly known as bang forbisi

 with the same then you keep on dipping your hand in the remaining dry

 cornmeal so here we are our ariesu or bang forbisi is ready to be fried

 don't overheat the oil if not the outside will be cooked whilst the inside is not cooked

 so you cook it on a low heat and you also make sure it doesn't it doesn't go soggy because if

 it's not the oil is not hot enough your ariesu is going to go soggy so you make sure your oil

 is hot enough you can start by frying one at a time it's golden brown it's ready now so i'll take

 you just serve it on your plate with a dish towel to soak out the excess oil

 sometimes when you are frying it you see that the peanuts come out

 so you can still serve peanuts at the side to go as an accompaniment to go with it

 I'm gonna start out with the IT Cosmetics Mysculpted Face Palette

 Hi, today I'm going to show you how to do beach waves with your curling iron.

 So what I do is I split it in the middle and then I take 1 1⁄2 curling iron and I do

 And then you take your next piece, start at the top, slide down and roll.

 And of course the bigger pieces that you take the bigger wave you get.

 So if you want tight little ringlet curls just take smaller pieces.

 And even though the ends are already curled I always go down just for a smooth curl so

 And then I take my hair and in the back I take a piece just to kind of fill in the top

 And then I do another one right here just wherever it's split and kind of needs a little

 And then what you do, this is the main part, is you finger brush it.

 Helo i bawb. Iawn, i gyd yma, rwy'n gofyn i chi, neu y byddwch chi'n meddwl, oedd yn well

 pan fyddech chi'n siarad yn fy fideoau, neu y byddwch chi'n fwyafu fy ffordd gynharach, sef y teistiau a'r

 cymaint o ffurf ym mhob ystafell. Ac nid oedd gen i un o chi a dweud y byddwch chi ddim yn fwyafu

 pan fyddech chi'n siarad. Felly, o'r hynny i gyd, byddwn yn siarad ar gyfer fy mwyaf o ffurfau.

 Iawn, felly mae'r trwych yn ei ein ennill, a byddwch chi angen sefyllfa gwahanol ar y dechrau.

 Mae'n rhaid i chi fod yn gyfarfod o'r dda, a'r ddau o'r dda, iawn, felly mae yna ddau yno ar y dda,

 cartrwydd gwahanol, un arall o'r ddau yn sefyllfa chweddol, a'r ddau o'r dda o'r dda.

 Ac mae angen i chi hefyd sicrhau bod y cartrwydd gwahanol hon yma yn gysylltiad gwahanol

 gyda'r cartrwydd gwahanol hon, y ddau o'r dda. Felly, mae'n iawn yma oherwydd ein bod ni wedi cael clwb a ddiamond.

 Iawn, yn gyntaf, mae angen i chi gael y cartrwydd hwn i'ch gweldwyr, ac i wneud hyn, gallwch,

 mae llawer o ffyrdd y gallwch ei wneud, gallwch wneud hynny, hynny lle rhaid i chi gael y brif bwysig,

 ac yna rydych chi'n rhifio i lawr, a phob amser maen nhw'n dweud stop, rydych chi'n fynd i fyny yno,

 ac yna rhoi iddo i'r cartrwydd, neu gallwch wneud y brif bwysig, sy'n fel hynny, rydych chi'n rhifio i lawr gan ddefnyddio eich ddechrau,

 ac yna rydych chi'n cymryd yr holl cartrwydd o'r rhan o'r cartr dda, ac yna mae'n edrych fel bod nhw wedi stopio ar y cartr.

 Iawn, ond mae angen i chi gael y cartr hwn yn ffwrdd o unrhyw ffordd y byddwch chi'n hoffi, ond ddywedwch iddynt beth yw'r cartr,

 Iawn, nawr rydych chi'n ei ddweud bod y cartr dda hwn yn eich helpu i ddod o hyd i beth yw'r cartr hwn.

 Rhowch y cartr hwn ar ôl, ac ydych chi'n dweud, iawn, mae 5 yno, felly dyna fydd y cartr hwn yn 5.

 Yn ôl, gadaelwch y cartr dda, sydd fel 4, ac rhowch y cartr hwn ar y sôl.

 Iawn, i'r rhain, mae angen i chi gael y cartr hwn fel hyn, felly gyda'ch ffinger ar y ddau, y 3 yno, a'r hyn.

 Felly gallwch ddefnyddio'r pethau hyn i ddod o hyd i'r cartr dda.

 Iawn, felly dywedwch, iawn, rydyn ni'n gwybod bod y cartr hwn yn 5.

 Rydyn ni ddim am gael gwybod beth yw'r sôl, felly edrychwn ar y cartr dda.

 Ychydigwch y cartr hwn ac dweud, byddwn ni'n mynd i ddod o hyd i'r 2 o ddiamond, ond rydyn ni'n mynd i ddifro'n ôl i ddod o hyd i'r 4.

 Felly nawr, yr hyn rydym ni'n cael yw, mae gennym 4 yno, 4 yma, a 4 yma.

 Iawn, nawr yr hyn rydyn ni'n cael yma yw, yn cartr gwahanol ar y top, a 4 o ddiamond o'r top.

 Felly sut rydyn ni'n ei wneud hynny yw, rydyn ni'n gadael y dech,

 Rydych chi'n gwybod bod y cartr nesaf yn y 4, felly dyna lle oedd y ddewis pinci, rydych chi'n gwybod bod y cartr hwn yn y 4.

 Rydyn ni'n gwybod bod y cartr hwn yn dweud y dywedodd y cartr hwn oedd y 5,

 Rydyn ni'n ei ddefnyddio pan fyddwn ni'n gwneud technigaeth ffurf,

 Helo, fy enw i yw Margaret ac rwy'n Gweithredu Stable yma yn y Stable Duke of Oakford ym Mhabington.

 Ac heddiw rwy'n ymweld â chi i fideo Lister, lle byddwn yn ddangos i chi sut i gael eich hŷn i'w gysylltu ar gyfer clipio,

 Yr un peth rydyn ni'n mynd i'w edrych ar y clipoedd yw'r blaidau.

 Un peth rhaid i chi wneud yn siŵr yw nad oes gennych unrhyw dŷn broswm,

 ac mae hyn yn sicr yn anffodus y gwaith o'r clip a'n sicr yn gynnwys y llwyf trwy'ch clipio.

 Hefyd, gwnewch am unrhyw sylwadau rhwst, os ydynt wedi'u gofynnu i ffwrdd o amser,

 ac mae'n aml i'w ddechrau mynd yn rhan o'r rhwst, felly mae'n anffodus i chi ddangos y clipoedd.

 Yn aml, mae'r blaidau y byddwch chi'n eu defnyddio yn dechrau mynd yn anffodus,

 felly gallwch ddod o hyd i'r blaidau newydd i sicrhau bod gennych ddangos y clip.

 gallwch dod o hyd i'r blaidau newydd i sicrhau bod gennych ddangos y clif.

 Mae Llystrau yn gweithio'n ffordd ddiddorol i ddefnyddio'r blaidau

 Mae'n bwysig bod y blaidau'n sefydlu ar y cyson cyfeiriol cywir

 Gaeth o neudi rhesynau blaidau sydd ar y clif wrth dyfu arno felly yrnach chi'n gallu rhesynau blaidau sy'n cael rhesynau blaidau sy'n cael mynediad o broblem i'r cyson cyfeiriol.

 Rhaid i chi ddefnyddio'r olew ar y ffront, ar y ffwrdd a'r holl sy'n cael eu gweld.

 Mae'r hyn yn helpu i ddangos gweithio a'i ddysgu ar y clifau ac yn helpu i'w ddau'n ddwylo'n fwy.

 Yr hyn sy'n mynd i'w feddwl am y blynyddoedd yma yw lle byddwn yn clipio'r clif a'r lle mwyaf ddigon.

 Rydyn ni'n ddigon ffodus yma ym Mhabington i gael boc sy'n unig ein bod yn ei ddefnyddio i'w clipio,

 sy'n lleol iawn ac yn ddigon fawr i'r holl ddau o'r ffwrdd gyda'r holl ffwrdd heb eu cymryd.

 meddwl yma am yr areau sydd gennych chi a ydy'n ddifrifol i'w clipio'ch ffwrdd.

 mae'n amlwg bod angen cymryd cymryd y ffwrdd gyda chi i'w ddifrifol a'i ddifrifol

 Yn siŵr, gyda chable allan, gwneud yn siŵr bod y clip yn ddigon i'r wal

 lle rydych chi'n ei clipio fel nad yw'r holl ffwrdd yn eisiau ei ddod arno.

 gwneud yn siŵr nad yw'n eisiau cael ei gael yn y lle oherwydd y bydd y holl ffwrdd yn eisiau cael ei ddifrifoli.

 Yn siŵr, mae'n ddiddorol i roi cyllid cyffredin ar gyfer unrhyw ddiddorol

 Gwneud yn siŵr bod eich hwyr yn ddiogel yn ddiogel cyn i chi ddechrau ei clipio.

 Nid yw'n ymwneud â'ch clipio gyda llawer o ddiddorol os ydych chi'n ceisio clipio hwyr sy'n ddiogel a chyffredin

 ac nid yw'ch blaen yn eisiau mynd yn iawn gyda'r hwyl os ydyn nhw'n rhaid eu hysbrydu drwy gwyl.

 Mae'n ddiddorol i roi bandig ar y dŵr i gadw'r dŵr ar y ffordd y byddwch chi'n clipio'r ardal honno

 ac os oes eich hwyr yn cael llawer o blaen, gallwch roi rhai blaen i un o'r ddŵr

 Rhowch yn siŵr eich bod chi'n cael rhug gyda chi wrth y clipio,

 oherwydd os ydyn chi'r hwyr yn rhannu'r coed, mae'n ddiddorol i feddwl y chyd yn fwy.

 Ydym ni'n barod i clipio a beth ydyn ni'n mynd i'w ddweud trwy'r hwyr rydyn ni'n clipio?

 Mae angen i chi ddweud yn ddiogel o ddwylo a ddim yn mynd i gael llawer o hawliau wrth y clipio.

 oherwydd byddwch yn dod yn ddiogel ac yn ffwrddol wrth y clipio.

 Rydw i'n hoffi ddweud yna rhagor o drawsiau oedran neu drawsiau llwybr,

 a'i roi ar y ddechrau i helpu i gadw'r hawliau i'w ddod yn ddiogel.

 gwneud yn siŵr eich bod chi wedi cael dŵr blaen o edrych arnynt neu dŵr o edrych arnynt.

 gwneud yn siŵr eich bod chi'n hyfforddus a'n hyfforddus trwy'r clipio.

 Dyma'n helpu i sicrhau bod eich hwyr yn dal yn hawdd a'n hapus trwy'r clipio.

 Felly, i gyd, rydw i'n testu'r ffudge paintbox colo. Rydw i'n mynd i'r Pink Moon.

 Mae'n llwyr, yn ddi-ddi-ddi-peroxyd, ac mae'n dod allan o'r rhain i 30 o washes.

 Mae'n ddiddorol sut mae eich hair yn fwy ffodus. Gallwch ei ddefnyddio fel colo ar gyfer ychydig o waith.

 Mae'n dod o ran y coloau, yn fwy ffodros, felly gallwch ddod o ran y coloau.

 Rydw i wedi mynd i'r Pink Moon ac rydw i'n mynd i wneud y pennau o'r hawliau i roi gwylio dip-ddi.

 Rydw i wedi siampu'r hawliau a'u gwlltio. Mae gen i hawliau o'r gwllt i gynllunio'r ddau, ac os ydych chi'n ei ddod o'r hawliau, dydw i ddim eisiau eu cael ar hawliau newydd.

 Rydw i wedi pynu y pennau yma. Felly, dim ond ychydig o waith, ac rydw i'n mynd i fynd i'r pennau i gynllunio'r hawliau.

 Mae gen i hawliau yn fwy ffodus, felly bydd yn mynd i'w wneud yn fwy amser, oherwydd byddwn i'n mynd i'w wneud yn fwy ffodus.

 Rydw i'n ei gael i ddewis pa ffordd rydych chi'n eisiau gwneud y dip-ddi, os ydych chi'n eisiau gwneud y dip-ddi.

 Rhaid i mi ddweud hefyd, y byddwch chi'n ei wneud y dip-ddi, i sicrhau eich bod chi ddim yn ymwneud â'i.

 Felly, yn gyntaf, rydw i wedi brynu glywfiau fel y gall eu bod yn eich gwneud yn eich ddau.

 Yn y pennau yma, rydw i'n mynd i ddod â'r ddib ar ôl eich gwst.

 Ac rydw i'n gobeithio cael gwneud y dip-ddi, oherwydd y gallwch chi ei brysu drwy, ac mae'n rhoi colofau cyffredin, felly dydych chi ddim yn rhedeg ymwneud â hawliau.

 Rydw i'n mynd i ddangos i chi ychydig o'r gwaith, ac yna byddwn i'n dod yn ôl pan fyddwn i'n gwneud yr holl beth.

 Felly, rydw i'n meddwl nad wyf yn mynd i wneud y dip-ddi llawer.

 Yn amlwg, mae'n dybynnu ar y llaen o'ch hawliau, rydw i'n meddwl, ond rydw i'n mynd i wneud, dwi'n meddwl, ddau ffyrdd o achos i ymlaen.

 Iawn, felly rydw i'n mynd i gormio'r rhain cyntaf, dyma'r rhai sy'n gallu i mi ddangos i chi.

 Felly os gwnaf i ddechrau yma, gwnaf i gormio'r rhain drwy hynny.

 Ac yna, bob rhan, yn amlwg, mae eich glofiau yn ddiwrnod o'u gwneud.

 Iawn, rydw i am ddod yn ôl i ddefnyddio'r wal fel sefydliad arwain

 Ac yn ogystal, mae Andy'r un sy'n rhannu rhai o'r gydraddoldeb.

 Nawr mae Carl wedi cael ymdrechion y gallwn ei allu allan o'i gael

 i'w ddod i'w hun. Felly mae Carl ar hyn o bryd yn ei angen rhywbeth.

 ac yna gweithio arno. Dydyn ni ddim yn bwysig beth rydym yn ei wneud,

 yn iawn. Bydd y pêlgram yn ei ddod i'w gwrthwyneb, byddwn ni'n gweld sut mae'r

 Certainly worth having in your box when nothing else is working.

 For the thorax cover I'm going to be using number 12 pearl, uni.

 I run the thread down to say the length of the thorax and then I trim away the waste.

 As I said for the rib, the rib is going to be blue holographic.

 What I do here now is run the thread right down towards the eye.

 A couple of turns back down and then the way back down I'll tie in the thorax cover.

 Then it's just a matter of running the thread down and tying this in.

 Now what I do here is bring the goose bites, both goose bites towards the eye.

 The edge of your scissors just catch the very edge of the mylar or your perle tinsel.

 In this case I'm just going to use varnish just to let you see it.

 But I find using the brush means I can, if I've got excess varnish, I can take it off.

 Hey Dave here with Mako Spearguns and today we're going to share a simple and delicious

 We'll use pancake mix, lemon lime flavored water and cornstarch for the batter.

 Note we're not using a sugary soda to make the batter, this is just flavored water.

 Of course we'll need some cooking oil and finally we'll assemble our taco using soft

 tortillas and garnish our tacos with sides of guacamole, salsa and green cabbage.

 We're going to use equal amounts of cornstarch and pancake mix and then we're going to add

 And then we want to put the batter in the fridge for a few minutes to chill.

 Now we'll come back to our strips of fish and pat them dry on a paper towel and coat

 Next let's get our batter from the fridge and start dipping our fish, coating them well.

 We're using olive oil here but you can use any high heat oil you like.

 Make sure your oil is hot, about 350 degrees and then begin adding your fish into the pan.

 It's only going to take a couple minutes for the fish to brown up.

 Turn the pieces as needed to brown them on all sides and then remove the fish to a paper

 We enjoy our tacos with fresh guacamole, some salsa to bring in a little heat and some fresh

 If you're having a gathering, set all your toppings in bowls and let your friends customize

 And there you have it, a simple and delicious fish taco recipe.

 Send it on over to us and we may feature it in an upcoming newsletter.

 We're going to chapter four, how to put the inside back on this chair.

 When you're stripping furniture, the main thing you're concerned about is getting staples

 out and most of all staples that are sticking out that can hurt you when you're upholstering

 You don't want little ends of staples sticking out because they will cut your knuckles and

 So what I do is I run my thumb lightly over the area that I'm working with to make sure

 there's no little nips or staple ends sticking out of the wood.

 My daughter was little, we called them, or she called them, ow-ees.

 Anyhow a razor blade is one of your best friends in the upholstery trade if you can use it

 Always use a razor blade away from any part of your body so there's pretty much no chance

 What I'm going to do here, if you can see, is the staple line is here.

 I'm going to cut the fabric on the outside and I'm going to leave the fabric on there.

 The problem with razor blades though, if you do happen to cut over a staple, you might

 as well get another razor blade because they damage pretty easy.

 But this process makes it a whole lot easier to strip furniture.

 Which as you can see is a lot quicker than removing all the staples.

 Another tip, don't leave your razor blades laying around your shop.

 We have a canister where we put them in right away that's closed on the top.

 Sort of like a little piggy bank collection canister which keeps them away from the kids

 or away from the floor if you happen to be cleaning up and sweeping up.

 You don't want to sweep up razor blades because you will cut yourself.

 You can see why on the front here we left the back fabric on while we put the seat on.

 The reason that is, you can see right here, trying to tuck your fabric down in underneath on your seat with this cotton here.

 You're going to end up ripping the cotton down and ruining any padding you might have that you want to use on your outside back.

 Now on your outside back you do have some areas here that are kind of thick of fabric.

 See here at the corner here it's been folded over a couple of times to make a pleat.

 You've got to kind of remove that because you don't want, when you put your fabric, your outside back fabric on, you don't want bumps in there.

 You can pull the staples out with your dikes or you can use the ripping hammer that I demonstrated to you in the beginning of this project.

 Since I can't find my stripping hammer, I'm going to go ahead and remove these pleats with the dikes.

 So when you finish your project up, you can run your hand over it and feel a nice clean surface.

 And this is why a ripping hammer is so helpful or a stripping hammer is so helpful.

 And what you might be saying to yourself, well if you don't remove all the staples,

 when you start stapling the fabric on, won't you hit the staples and curl them up?

 Chances are 99% that you won't hit another staple because you're using a fine wire staple.

 That's important so that when you have to flip your chair over and stuff,

 you don't have staples and garbage on there that might damage the fabric you're working with.

 If you give me one second, I'll be getting into the rest of this chapter.

 We're going to be putting the padding on the back and then the inside back.

 This is chapter four. We'll see you in chapter five. Thanks. Bye.

 We just need to soften the sotanghon, that's why we're soaking it in water.

 Wlaith Jim Beam Black, rydw i'n mynd i greu rain clasig yn ymwneud â Mint Julep.

 Byddai Mint Julep wedi'i gynhyrchu i lawer o ddifrifolion, ond i mi,

 byddai Bourbon, yn enwedig Jim Beam Black, yn gwneud Mint Julep yn fwy cyffredinol.

 Fe wnaifft chi weld, rydw i'n defnyddio cwp ffyrdd, ac rydw i'n ei chylchu'n ymlaen yn y cwp ffyrdd mwyaf yma.

 Ar y tu hwn, gallwch ddefnyddio glas yn eithaf debyg os byddwch chi'n gael ei wneud,

 I'r cwp ffyrdd yma, rydw i'n mynd i ddod i mewn am 10 o ddwyloi mint,

 Reidrw i'n defnyddio'r dŷ lle o fynydd, i ddod i mewn a gwneud y cyflawniad yn ymgynghori'r mint,

Lemons or you'd use limes but you would end up with limeade or some people call it limeade

Turn the heat on to medium, wait until it starts to boil, then turn off the heat, then let it cool down completely

We're gonna try our best to get the most juice out of the lemons by rolling them against a hard surface for a few seconds

Wearing a pair of gloves to protect your hands from the citric acid, squeeze out the juice from the lemons

ไม่ว่าจะเป็นด้วยซ้อมก็ดี หรือจะใช้มือบีบธรรมดาก็ได้ หรือจะใช้เครื่องก็ดี

แต่ขอแนะนำให้ใส่ถุงมือ เพราะว่ากรดจากน้ำมะนาวจะทำการกะดเนื้อมือเรามากเลย และจะทำให้แสบได้

Strain the lemon juice to get rid of the seeds and pour the juice into a jug of cold water

หลังจากที่ได้น้ำมะนาวสดเรียบร้อยแล้ว ในเหยียวที่มีน้ำเย็นจัด ให้เรากลองน้ำมะนาวสดลงไปและเทลงไปในน้ำเย็นจัด โดยใช้กระช่อน

หลังจากที่กลองเสร็จเรียบร้อยแล้ว ใส่น้ำเชื้อมที่เย็นลงไปแล้ว ขนให้เข้ากัน

Add in the icing, you could optionally add in some lemon slices and or mint leaves to make it even more refreshing

พอขนเรียบร้อยนะคะ ใส่น้ำแข็งลงไปตามด้วยมะนาวจากฝ่ายเป็นชิ้นๆก็ได้ หรือวางคนอาจจะใส่ใบสะละแหน่ เพื่อความหอมและสวยงามก็ได้เช่นเดียวกันค่ะ

Be sure to share a photo of what you made with us on Facebook, Instagram or Twitter with the hashtag RIN's Cookbook. Thanks for watching.

หวังว่าเพื่อนๆชอบวีดีโอนี้ของรินนะคะ ช่วยกันกดไลค์ กดซับสไครบ เจอกันได้ใน Facebook, Instagram, Twitter และ Google Plus นะคะ

แล้วอย่าลืมส่งรูปอาหารที่เพื่อนๆทำตามสูตรรินนะคะ สวยๆ มาได้ทุกระบบนะคะ แล้วอย่าลืมใส่แฮชแทคที่ RIN's Cookbook ด้วยค่ะ

ถ้าต้องการสูตรเป็นภาษาไทยนะคะ ก็ติดตามที่ BlogRin ได้นะคะ ที่ rin'scookbook.blogspot.com ค่ะ

 පෙරන් සිට කරන්ශ්‍රාණු හොඳින් දී පෙරන් සම පිට දහනය කිසිමත් හොඳින්.

 සම 3 සම සමගාඩි කරන් සමගගාඩි කිසිමත් යන්ම සදාසය සිට සිට සමින්දකර කරන් සබන්න,

 සමින්දකර සිට සදාසය සදාසය කරන්න, සිට සිට සබන් දක් පානාර කිසිමත් එකතු කරන්න,

 අපි සම සහ මේ ස්සටාක් වනුවක් ඔබට දින ප්රදි 3 වනුබට ප්රදි 3 ක් ප්රදි 3 සම,

 සඳහා කාලන් හොඳින් මති ස්සටාක් ප්රදි 3 ක්සිදි පානය ස්සිසදි පානය සම

 සඳහා කාස්දිට්සිදි පානය  læනීට්සිදි පානය විශානයක් දින්ද පානය තාපායක්සිදිට්සිදි පානය,

 අපි වනුණාකර ස්තමත් කරන්න, සමගක් සමගක් සමගක් මම ස්තුත් කරන්නේ සාලද සමගක් කිරීමෙන්ස්මයක් සමින්නේ දින 2 ස්තුත් කරන්නේ ඇත.

 අපි ස්වාඩියෝ පැලින් මාදනය මෙම දින 2 ක් නැලික් සහ මිනින්න තෙල් පොරග්පයක් පාන්න.

 අපි ස්වාඩියෝ පෙරුන් පිටි පාන්න පොරග්පයක් ස්වාඩියෝ පෙරුන් පෙරුන් පෙරුන් ස්වාඩිය සෑම පාන්න පෙරුන් හැනි ඉවත් 2 cm සිට පාන්න පාන්.

 වන්න වලුන් කුඩා අර්තා කරුවට කොදහනය කළ හැලි ප්‍රුභ කරුණි කර වේේාස真的是 ඔබට ප්‍රුභල්හණයේ කර ස්වාඩියක many නලමි දිගේ බලන්න නැරට ස්වන්,

 දින තබා දින කින්න පමට ස්වන්න සඳහා පිරින් දින පීල් පෙරීමෙන් මේස කළ පිරින් බලා පෙරීමෙන් යෝගටු දින දීම ලදය හැන්දක් නොමේ සම්ණයක් ස

 එකතුචය ප්රණය පොට් Melbourne. පොට් වැය නොටින් හා පිරි dzieńි, එය.සීන ජපිract බලා පෙරීමෙන්න ගෝසුණාක් ගොහනී කිස්ුබුල්සුලා

 Dwi'n Kavy, rwy'n ysgrifennu'r blog Kavy Eats ac rwy'n hoffi mwynhau.

 Rwy'n ysgrifennu am unrhyw beth o gydag ymdrechion, felly argyfwngau ystafell,

 llyfrgellau cwch, gysylltiadau fy hun, mynd i ffestivalau y ddechrau,

 Rwy'n hefyd yn gweithio gyda'r wefan gyda'i mam, ym Mumta's Kitchen,

 ysgrifennu ysgrifennu, yn y blynyddoedd, ond mae gennym llawer o bethau eraill heddiw.

 Dydw i'n mynd i'w gynnal gyda chweithdrau cwcwmba a chynllun ffyrdd.

 ond cyn hynny, rwy'n mynd i ddifrifio'r holl ddewis yn y gwreiddiwr gwreiddiwr.

 Dydyn ni ddim yn angen ei wneud os oes gennych brosesau bwyd gyda ddwyloedd dda,

 ond dwi ddim yn siŵr am hwn, felly dwi'n mynd i ddefnyddio'r gwreiddiwr gwreiddiwr gyntaf.

 Maen nhw ddim yn ffyni ffyni gwreiddiol ond yn dda i roi y brosesau bwyd i mewn.

 rydyn ni'n mynd i ddefnyddio'r brosesau bwyd a chynnwys pob un o'r pwynt.

 Rhowch ychydig o ffwrdd o ffwrdd a byddwn i'w gwybod pan fyddwn wedi ei ddysgu.

 Felly, dw i'n mynd i roi'r gwasanaethau ychydig o ffwrdd i mewn i'r bwl

 Rhowch yn siŵr eich bod chi'n defnyddio yoghurt lleol i ffwrdd,

 ddim yn defnyddio yoghurt lleol i ffwrdd, mae'n mynd i'r ffwrdd yn y ffwrdd.

 Yn y bobl, rwy'n ei roi i mewn i ddŵr gwreiddiol a'i gofyn i'w gael ei gael yn fwyll.

 Yr unig beth rhaid i fi ei wneud yw gofyn ychydig o ffyniau cwmen.

 Felly, fy mhoboliad yw ffynion fred a chwmba, ond gallwch dod o hyd i peper fred neu peper gwyn.

 Yn wir, beth bynnag rydych chi eisiau yn Rhyta, mae'n eich gwneud.

 Ac yna, yn gyhoeddiol i chi, os ydych chi eisiau unrhyw un neu ddim, ond dwi'n mynd i roi ychydig o chili.

 Mae'n chili ffoddau, felly dwi ddim yn rhoi llawer ond mae'n gyhoeddiol i chi, os ydych chi eisiau unrhyw un.

 Yn aml, rwy'n ei wneud yn y bobl, yw rhannu rhai ffynion fred yn ôl i'r dda.

 Felly dyna'n ein rhwystrau fynt gyda phrydion fred a chwmba, gyda rhai ffynion ffred a choriander ar y dda.

 Os ydych chi ddim yn siŵr ei fod wedi'i wneud, dyna chi'r ffyrdd, rhannwch y ffyrdd i'r dda.

 Ac os ydych chi'n cael llawer o flwydd yn mynd allan, nid yw'n gwybod.

 Yn aml, rwy'n gobeithio y bydd y llaw yn dda i'ch gwrs Christmas.

 Rwy'n siŵr y byddwch chi'n gwybod bod y rhan o'r gwyddon sy'n dangos y cyntaf ganolbwyntiadau o ffyrddio, yw'r rhan o'r oed,

 lle rhan llawer o ffyrddion, a yna ffyrddion, oeddwch yn gwrs, cwm, oed, a'r ysgafnion a'r ysgafnion ychydig.

 Wel, heddiw byddwn i eisiau rannu gyda chi fy nghyfnod fy hun ar gyfer sut rwy'n cymryd y problemau hyn.

 Ac ar gyfer hyn, rwy'n defnyddio fy nifer o ddifrifoldebau i'r ddangos.

 Efallai y dywedwch fy mod i'n ddarlithu cyflwynoedd micro-cyrraedd electrig.

 Mae'n rhywbeth rwyf wedi'i ddefnyddio ers blynedd yn y salon fel arweinwyr, ac rwy'n defnyddio ar fy nghyfnodau a'r dynion fy hun.

 Rwy'n ei ddefnyddio ers blynedd, oherwydd rwy'n teimlo bod hyn yn unig peth y gallwn ei wneud ar y tu hŷn,

 sy'n dŷn gwych, a all gweithio ar y cyrff stwrddol o ffysgolau ffasiol y gwyddon,

 Rwy'n mynd i ddangos y maes ychydig, ac rydyn ni'n dechrau o wneud y maes ychydig ar y dynion.

 Rwy'n mynd i'w ddangos yn y llyfr gyrff, oherwydd y maes ychydig y gwyddon i'w ddefnyddio,

 mae'r podd yma, y podd yma, yn y llyfr ychydig, yn y llyfr ychydig,

 mae'r podd yma yn y llyfr ychydig, ac mae'r podd yma yn y llyfr ychydig,

 ac rydw i'n defnyddio'r podd Twoer Trend, mae'r podd yma yn y llyfr ychydig.

 Felly rydw i am ddangos i chi beth rydych chi'n mynd i'w gweld yn ymwneud â'ch neu'ch gwahaniaethau,

 a mae ganddo nifer o rhaglenau, a dyma rhaglen nifer 5 rydyn ni'n mynd i'w wneud,

 Dyma'r podd, felly rydw i'n mynd i ddewis ar y rhaglen nifer 5,

 ac fel y gallwch ei weld, mae yna rhai o'r rhaglen yn y llyfr yma gyda'r camera hon.

 Dydyn ni ddim yn ei weld ar y ffas, mae'r sgrin yn eich gweld yn fwy cyffredin.

 Ac yna dwi'n mynd i fynd i'r rhaglen nifer 4 o'r ffas o'r rhaglen i.

 Dwi'n mynd i ddechrau gyda rhai rhaglen, a dewiswch ei mewn i un o'r holl,

 Nawr dwi'n mynd i ddechrau'r rhaglen ar y rhan o'r eiliad ychydig,

 ar y ddau o'r rhaglen, felly dydych chi'n ddar i'r rhan o'r rhaglen

 Dwi'n mynd i ddewis hwn yn fwy o'r un y byddwn i'n ei wneud yn ymdrechol,

 Ac yna, yr hyn rydych chi'n ei wneud i ddewis eich amser ymhell i'r ymdrech,

 ac rydych chi'n eu lleihau'r ddewis arall yn y chyflawni eraill.

 Ac rwy'n mynd i ddewis y cyflawni ar y cyfan, dim ond ychydig o'r nodiau,

 Yn y blynyddoedd, rwy'n mynd i wneud fideo i ddangos i chi'r holl zon ymhell a'r gwasanaeth ar gyfer hynny,

 sy'n mynd i gael effaith o fynd i'r ymhell i fwyno'r amser rhwng ychydig o'r ddewis a'r cyflawni,

 ac mae'r cyflawni'n defnyddio'ch ogledd i'w gwneud nhw'n fwy o flwyddyn,

 ac mae hynny'n gweithio i helpu i ffurfio'r ddewis a'r cyflawni,

 Mae'n wirioneddol i'w gweld un o'r rhan yn fwy fwy ag y rhai arall,

 Ac iddo fe wnaethom trwy chwomad o'r gyffredin yn ben nes i amwnem

 jadi dengan YEM yang sudah siap, kita akan menempatkan mereka ke dalam pengisar

 campurkan sedikit, ia akan membantu menggantikan bahan-bahan lebih jauh

 campurkan sedikit air lagi, kerana konsistensi masih cukup tebal

 kemudian, campurkan sedikit air lagi, kerana konsistensi masih cukup tebal

สวัสดีค่ะ วันนี้จะมาสาธิกวิธีการทำซอสผัดไทย ที่ทำไม่ย่าอุปกรณ์ก็น้อยมากๆเลยนะคะ แล้วก็อร่อย

 Helo, ni wnaeth y parrot ddangos i mi gyda tablet astroid i'w arbenigio o'r wefan.

 Mae'r parrot wedi'i arbenigio o ran MKI am ychydig o amser, ac rydyn nhw'n meddwl eu bod yn rhoi pethau'n well i mi.

 Dyma'r tablet astroid, sy'n sefydliad o'r Android sy'n gallu i chi gysylltu gweithiau a phethau.

 Pan ddewis fy nghyfrif, byddwn yn rhoi'r llin ar fy nghyfrif yn y gysylltiad.

 Yr hyn sy'n gyntaf, mae'r amser yn cael eich gysylltiadau astroid.

 Rwyf wedi sylwi bod y bocs hwn yn fwy bwysig ynglyn â'r amser gyntaf.

 Rwy'n meddwl ei fod yn rhaid i'r bocs hwn fod yn fwy bwysig ynglyn â'r amser gyntaf.

 Dwi'n ddiddorol oherwydd dwi ddim yn hoffi unrhyw beth ar fy ffocws cenedlaethol.

 Mi wnes i chwestiynu dydyn nhw ddim deban eu 15 a pedair babel ar lawer llywodraeth ar ddefnyddio adeg tra yw'r chemis.

 Dyma'r cable cyfnodol, a bydd yn cael ei ddefnyddio ar eich cyfnod cyfnodol.

 Yn y bryd mae'ch cyfnod cyfnodol yn cael ei ddefnyddio, gallwch ddefnyddio'r cyfnod cyfnodol fel TV.

 Mae nad i dyn i furzelionorthwyr mas noddwhyr yn ymwneud â knwllyn yn y rhain Llyfr ymlaen.

 mae gennym nwlyn, a byddwn am gael y mwyaf o ddyn o'r rhan hon,

 ac mae'n gyfansoddol, oherwydd y bobl sy'n teimlo cymryd ffwrc yn anodd,

 dydyn ni ddim yn ymwneud â'r dyn, gallwch ei arwain yn ddyn neu'n ddyn,

 Gwybod pa ffordd y dyn yn mynd, oherwydd y byddwn yn mynd i'w gadael arno.

 Welcome to segment 2 of the starting procedure of a 1930 Harley Davidson VL.

 The first thing you want to do is turn on either one of the fuel valves.

 Next thing you want to do is make sure you retard the spark or ignition.

 come down to when it warms up, come fully down to the open throttle position.

 you want to make sure you advance your timing back to advancement.

 Yn y ffrifiad, rydyn ni'n mynd i roi rhai parmasannau i'r ffrifiad.

 Y ffordd ychwanegol i ddod o gael carp, ac un a ddefnyddio'n fawr, yw ychwanegau PVA.

 Dwi'n eu defnyddio'n ffordd, a byddai Samantha, un o'n gynllunwyr, yn dweud.

 Yn ddechrau ar y carp rydw i'n hoffi, rydw i'n hoffi bagiau PVA fach.

 Dwi ddim yn hoffi'r senario lle mae'r carp yn ymgyrchu ar y ffordd,

 Dw i eisiau bod y ffordd mwyaf o'r ffordd yn mynd i mewn yn y tro cyntaf.

 Dw i'n ddangos i chi'r bag rydw i wedi defnyddio yn ystod y flwyddyn.

 amrywiaeth o gymhwystiad bywydol ond ddim ychydig i'r pêlau i'w chwylio.

 Rwy'n mynd i wneud macarenau chocolate cherry ac rwy'n gwybod bod macarenau'n gallu edrych yn ddawntio, felly byddwn yn ei rhannu i'w stagiau cyffredin i gyd i'w gynhyrchu.

 Yn gyntaf, rwy'n mynd i wneud y meringue italian, felly mae angen i chi leihau'r sugr a'r fwyd yn y pân fach a'i ddrechu.

 Yn y cyfnod, rwy'n rhoi'r fwyd yn y bŵl arall ac rydym yn arwain at y syrup sugr i ddarparu 110 oed.

 Unwaith mae'n darparu'r temperatwr hon, mae angen i chi ddechrau gwisgo'r fwyd yn y pân median.

 Yn y cyfnod y mae'r temperatwr wedi darparu 114 oed, mae'n bwysig iawn bod y fwyd yn ffroddi a ddim yn wypio.

 Yna, leihau'r termometr arall, rhoi'r fwyd yn y pân, a rhoi'r syrup syrup.

 Mae angen i chi ddod o hyd i'r meringue am ychydig munudau, a byddwch yn gweld bod eich meringue yn dda iawn.

 I wneud y gwasanaeth o olwyn, mae angen i ni gyfweld y golwg o olwyn, sugr a phowder coco.

 Rhoi'r oedwyr o'r fwyd arall, yna gallwch chi ddod o hyd i'r colwg o olwyn gel, a chyfweld ar y ffordd y mae'r gwasanaeth yn ddigon.

 Yna mae'r gwasanaeth ar gael, mae'n barod i gyfweld eich meringue Italian gyda'r gwasanaeth.

 Yn ddiweddar, gallwch roi'r gyfan gyntaf i'r meringue Italian, ac yna'i ddifro yn dda a hyderus, i fod eich adeiladau'n dda a hyderus.

 Felly, dyna'r sgwp yn fawr i'ch spatula a gweld sut mae'n dod i'r fôl.

 Os yw'n ddifrwydd a'n ei gael ei ffynnu'n fawr ar y sbŵn, yna ddifro'n fwy i fod yn fwy llwyr.

 Yn ysgol, mae angen i chi ddod o hyd i ddau bagiau pipio gyda'n adeiladau.

 Ddefnyddwch ddau ffyrdd a gwneud yn siŵr eich bod chi'n gadael y ddŵr yn dda a llwyr, nid ar ystod.

 Cymryd y papur parchment a ddifro'r ddodau bach o'r adeilad ar bob ychydig o'r ffwrdd o'r trae.

 Cymryd y bagiau pipio ar y trae'n sefyllfa gwasog, am 2mm o'r dŵr o'r trae.

 Pipio'r macareones am 4cm o ffyrdd, gan gadael 1cm o'r diwedd rhwng yr un macareone.

 Mae'r macareones yn barod i fynd i'r ffyn, a byddant yn cael eu bacho am 12-14 munud.

 Mae gen i rai siocledau gwasog, ac nawr rwy'n adnodd fy macareones a'i ddifro'n ddod o hyd gyda spatula,

 Rwy'n mynd i ddod o hyd i'r ffyn i'r bag pipio, ac nawr rwy'n barod i ddod o hyd i'r macareones, pan fyddant yn dda a chylch.

 Mae'r macareones yn dda iawn, ac rwy'n mynd i ddod o hyd i'r ffyn.

 Rwy'n mynd i ddod o hyd i'r bag pipio, ac nawr rwy'n barod i ddod o hyd i'r macareones, pan fyddant yn dda a chylch.

 I gysylltu'r macareones, rydyn ni'n cyflawni'r ffynion i ddod o hyd i'r bag pipio.

 Ar ddod o hyd i'r bag pipio, rydyn ni'n dod o hyd i'r ganash yn y pen draw o'r ffynion,

 ac yna rydyn ni'n dod o hyd i'r ffynion o ddod o ddod o jam ceri yn y pen draw.

 Ychwanegwch yme gyda'ch gwrthwyneb, a yna, yn ddiweddar, gallwch chi ddod o hyd i'r ffynion o gael ffynion o ffynion.

 Hi everyone, my name is Chef John Chua of the San Miguel Pure Foods Culinary Center.

 Our recipe for today is Beef Enchiladas, of course using Monterey Ground Beef.

 Now we need to cook our Monterey Ground Beef until the color changes.

 Okay, so once the ground beef has changed its color, we can now add our chili powder.

 And by the way, we served half the sour cream and half the quick melt cheese for later on.

 Now we'll bring this to a simmer or up until most of the liquid has dried out.

 Okay, now that you can see that our mixture is almost dried up, this is ready.

 So we'll just set the sauce aside while we assemble our enchiladas.

 So simply just drizzle the sauce as much as you want on top of the enchiladas.

 And for garnish, we can use half, the remaining half of the sour cream.

 And there you have it, our beef enchiladas using Monterrey ground beef.

 Mae bach yn dod yn ôl yn amser gwych ac nid oes angen bod yn anodd.

 Y peth cyntaf i chi ei wneud yw rhoi'r tyniau muffin gyda rhai casglu muffin

 Y rheswm y byddwch chi'n defnyddio'r ffwrdd gwasanaeth gyda sefydlog yw,

 Dydyn ni ddim eisiau ei ddifro, oherwydd byddai'r cwpcaig yn gwneud eich gwasanaeth yn ddifro.

 Ond rydych chi eisiau ei gael yn dda a'n ffwrdd, felly os ydych chi'n ei gadael yn y pwynt,

 a gallwch iddynt яisgu eu hyder yn deithio'n eraill i'r casgliadau.

 Felly, trwy'r bod y casgliadau yn farchu'n ffwrdd yn y ffynedd,

 Hey, how are you doing? It's been a while since I've put anything on YouTube. I've just been mega busy building the studio and getting things off and running and obviously gigging and teaching and you know how it sort of goes.

 Today's first lesson for a while, we're going to discuss syncing left and right hands and get asked by loads and loads of the younger generation especially who want to shred out and rock out a little bit, how do they synchronise left and right hands.

 Here's a little pattern for you that I've come up with. It goes a little bit like this. It involves, we're in the key of A major and it involves the D and G string starting on 6, 7 and 9 frets. So it goes a little bit like this.

 16 notes. Ok, now it's a great little workout for the 1st, 2nd and 4th fingers this is. You can actually move it on to the 1st, 3rd and 4th fingers as well. I'll show you that in a few seconds.

 But what I'm also going to touch on is the correct way to learn this. There's a zillion videos on YouTube and nobody really tells you the correct way to practice these things. To build your speed they just say there you go, there's the notes, there's the phrase, get on with it and hopefully you'll get it right.

 There's a lot of missing little bits and bobs that we need to put in place before we get these things right.

 The other thing that we need to do is try and turn the ears off a little bit and start using the brain a little bit more when you're working on phrases because what you tend to do is just use a repetitive technique going over and over and over. It doesn't necessarily mean that you're going to get it right.

 A classic example is if you play something 100 times with a mistake, how do you expect 101 to be perfect? It's not going to happen. You have to play 100 times perfectly and then 101, 102 etc are all going to come out as good as the original 100.

 So the best way to do this is to make sure that you get your phrasing as accurate as possible. And the way to do that is also efficiency is the key word. If you look at my hands when I play this phrase, fingers stay very close.

 If you look at my fingers when I play this phrase, fingers stay very close.

 Fingers stay very close to the frets. Don't lift your fingers more than a centimetre. If you're taking them more than that from the frets then you're going to get into this realm of unsyncing the pick and the left hand fingers.

 The other thing to do is to make sure that the pick in hand is nice and relaxed. Everything has to be tension free. So really start very slow on this. I'm going to show you how to practice this whole exercise very shortly.

 What you have to do also is make sure that I'm using a pick which is a Jim Dunlop Big Stubby 3mm thick. Now this pick is solid, it just stays where it is and I just like these. I just think they do the job that I'm looking for and it works great for me. You can get them all over eBay, Marit Pence really if you shop about.

 The thing to do as well is to make sure that your pick is hardly moving across the string. So you just need enough movement. Let's see if I can just zoom in on this. The pick just does this type of movement. Very important because again it's all about efficiency. I nearly said that wrong.

 Efficiency and it's a case of making sure that the fingers stay close, the pick in action just does the maximum amount of movement that's necessary to get the phrase to work and you're off and rolling. So with a phrase like this, fingers 1, 2 and 4, if you take it up and we still stay in the key of A major.

 Which means we move to 7, 9 and 10 on the B and E strings. We can do the same thing with fingers 1, 2, 3 and 4.

 So once you've got that bit nailed as well, so if you realise now we are working 1, 2, 3, 4, we're giving them a really good syncing workout. You can apply both phrases together and you get a nice little run that's through.

 So it's a good little phrase to work on. The best way to practice this is to set your metronome nice and slow. I always start around 60 beats per minute as well which is basically one note per second.

 So this phrase has got 16 notes in it which means it's going to take 16 seconds to play the whole phrase right through. Now I've got this theory that I think you need to practice something the minimum of approximately 100 repetitions perfectly before you start to get any serious muscle memory.

 So you've got to focus on being tension free, work on this nice steady exercise. So if I set the metronome to 60 it goes a little bit like this.

 Hai semua, saya Shirley. Hari ini kita akan memasak pasta dengan telur goreng.

 menempatkan sedikit garam, masukkan pasta dan kacau dengan minyak minyak minyak.

 Untuk pasta, anda boleh menggunakan pasta apa sahaja yang anda suka.

 Saya menggunakan fettuccine. Setelah 6 minit, menempatkan brokoli.

 Ini adalah pilihan. Anda boleh mengeluarkan daripada resipi ini jika anda tidak suka sayur.

 Masa untuk memasak sedikit bakon. Tidak perlu memasukkan minyak kerana

 bakon sendiri akan membuat minyak sendiri. Kami akan menyimpan minyak untuk penggunaan kemudian.

 kuali kertas dan tinggalkan. Masa untuk memasak sedikit telur menggunakan

 Selepas anda melihat beberapa bubuk kecil muncul, anda boleh menambahkan

 Selepas keju meleleh, anda boleh menggarahkannya dengan sedikit garam dan lada

 dan perlahan-lahan masuk ke dalam sos. Ini akan memperlembutkan sos.

 Anda boleh menempatkan pasta ke dalam mangkuk dan mainkan dengan semua

 If there are any controller issues, unplug, subsequently return to the venue or cable Kadook.

 Mae'r ddisg gyntaf rydw i am ei ddangos i chi heddiw yn ein ddisg siotead, snails a ffreswch gyda mwllt lwf a chwyllt ffres.

 Roeddwn i'n bwysig am mwllt lwf yn y blant gyda llawer o ffwrdd arno.

 Rydyn ni'n ei ddysgu, felly mae'n dda iawn ac yn gwisg ar y gwnaeth, ond mae'n ddifrifol ac yn llwyth i'r cyfan.

 Rydyn ni'n soteadu'r ffreswch yn ffreswch gwarth gwarth, a ysgafnu gyda ffreswch gwarth.

 Yn y ddiwedd, rydyn ni'n dod â'r snails i fynd yn ddiweddar, a chyfnod o ffreswch llwyth, llwyth o ddewis.

 Rydyn ni'n gwasanaethu'r snails am 18 awr, ac rydyn ni'n eu gwasanaethu mewn gwaith gwarth, gwaith gwarth, a chyfnod o ddewis.

 Rydyn ni'n gwneud ffreswch gwarth bob dydd yma, ac maen nhw'n cael eu gofio mewn ffreswch llwyth.

 Mae'r ffreswch llwyth yn ei gofio yn y ffreswch, yn dda iawn, ac yn gwneud ychydig o ddewis.

 Felly, yn ôl, y ddewis sy'n ddiddorol ym Mhrydain, mae'n cael ffraith ffodr, gwarth, a gwneud ffreswch gwarth o ffreswch gwarth.

 Rydyn ni'n ei ddefnyddio gyda'r ffreswch gwarth, a dyna'r ffreswch gwarth, a dyna'r ddewis.

 Mae'r ddewis nesaf yn y ffreswch yma yw'r dewis kid goat. Mae'n kid goat yn cael ei gofio'n llawn.

 Rydyn ni'n dechrau gyda chael, felly rydyn ni'n gwneud cael a ffwrdd.

 Rydyn ni ddim yn hoffi ei gofio yn ffwrdd, oherwydd mae'r ffraith yn mynd i'r ffwrdd.

 Felly, gwneud ychydig o ffwrdd yn llawn, a yna, yna, rydyn ni'n gwneud potatoes.

 Rydyn ni'n eu gofio gyda'r sginiau, yn y ffreswch gwarth, a dyna'r ffreswch gwarth.

 Yna, yna, rydyn ni'n gwneud potatoes. Rydyn ni'n eu gofio gyda'r sginiau yn y ffreswch gwarth.

 Ac yna, rydyn ni'n gwneud eu gwneud yn y ffreswch gwarth gyda'r ffreswch gwarth, i'w gwisio'n fwy.

 Felly, mae'r element o'r ddis i'r goat yn ei brinio am 48 o anodd, ac yna, rydyn ni'n ei gofio am 24 o anodd, 58 o gradd.

 Ac yna, ar y brifysgol, rydyn ni'n ei gofio drwy gynhyrchu o sôr a gŵr. 50-50, sôr a gŵr.

 Ac yna, mae'r llwyn, felly rydyn ni'n ei gofio drwy'r llwyn hefyd, rydyn ni'n ei wneud ar 54 o gradd, ond yn aml, rhwng 2 a 4 ore.

 Ac yna, mae'r golygfa. Mae'r golygfa yn ei gofio drwy'i golygu, ond nid yw'n cael eu golygu, mae'n cael eu golygu.

 Rostio golygfa iogwrt, mae'r unig ddot o hynny ar y plwyf, nid yw'n llawn o hynny, ond i roi rhywbeth o effaith, dyna pam rydyn ni'n rhoi'r golygfa golygfa iogwrt yn ôl yno.

 Ac yna'r element gwahanol i'r ddis, yw'r sôr gŵr. Felly mae'r golygfa golygfa, gŵr, oedranau carmelu, carreth, stociau wedi'u gofio yn y ffwrdd.

 Ac yna rydyn ni'n ei gysylltu i lawr a'i gysylltu â chyflawni gŵr.

 Y dyser rydw i'n mynd i'w ddangos heddiw yw, mae'n ei ennill o'r pwddi Ratafia. Mae'n dod o llyfr cwp, sy'n fy mhrof, yn ennill y gwaith gwreiddiol gan Hannah Glass.

 Mae'n llyfr cwp o'r 18eg ganrif, ac rydw i'n cymryd llawer o ysbrydoliad o'i gilydd. Rydw i'n defnyddio'r llyfr cwp i'r dechrau i llawer o ddisiau.

 Yr element gyntaf i'r ddis yw'r pwff, felly mae'r pwff yn cael ei golygu yn ysgafn.

 Yn y ddis yw'r croeso, felly mae'n dda i'r pwff yn cael ei golygu yn ysgafn.

 Yn y ddis yw'r cwff, felly mae'r pwff yn cael ei golygu yn ysgafn.

 Yn y dis yw'r cwff, felly mae'r pwff yn cael ei golygu yn ysgafn.

 Nid yw'n s schooling fel arddu bach mae'n codi gyda cporaeth, fel y deallwch.

 In this video, we will prepare the same soup using the Fried Method.

 I prefer Egusi Soup prepared with the Caking Method but you guys have been requesting this one.

 You need the same ingredients for both methods but the Fried Method requires more palm oil.

 Cook the meat, shakis, stockfish and dry fish starting with the toughest one.

 Osu is a binder for Egusi Soup but you don't really need it and I won't be using it in

 I will be using Ogiri Oberi seasoning which is made from locust beans.

 When the meat and fish are cooked, turn off the heat and set aside.

 Once it melts, add the ground Egusi and start frying on medium heat.

 After frying for 10 minutes, I add the meat and fish stock in small quantities.

 From this point on, you should stir the soup like crazy so that it does not burn.

 Also, Egusi that is not cooked long enough may not sit well in your stomach.

 There are so many things to say about this soup so check out the routine recipe on my

 neu i'w ddangos mewn llyfr mewn ffordd sy'n mynd i fod yn ddefnyddiol.

 Iawn, y cyfan cyntaf rydym ni'n mynd i'w wneud yw'r cyfan yw'r event kick

 os gwelwch y diagram yn gyflym, dydw i ddim yn y bwysig yng Nghaerfyrdd

 sy'n yr hyn rydw i wedi clywed ei fod yn ei gynnal y cyfan cyntaf

 rydych chi'n dod o'r ôl, rydych chi'n ei ddysgu gan ddwy ffingr

 ac wrth i chi fynd yn ôl, rydych chi'n ei ddwylo o fewn fel hyn

 ac mae'n ddewis cyflym, byddwn i'n ddangos i chi hynny eto, felly yn amlwg rydych chi'n dod

 i'ch trwy, ymlaen, rydych chi'n ddod o'r ôl, rydych chi'n ddewis

 ymlaen, rydych chi'n ei ddysgu gan ddwy ffingr ac wrth i chi fynd yn ôl

 rydych chi'n ei ddewis o fewn fel hyn, yna dyna'r ddewis cyflym i wneud

 felly'r ddwy ffingr, unwaith eto'r unig rheswm rydw i'n mynd trwy'n gyflym

 felly eto byddwch chi'n defnyddio un nod yma a yna byddwch chi'n defnyddio'r tri nod

 rydych chi'n mynd yn ôl ar y ddewis, rhoi eich hun ychydig mwy, dwi'n meddwl

 dwi'n meddwl y byddai'r ddechrau yn ddau leoedd, fel ychydig mwy

 dydych chi'n croeso, dydyn ni ddim yn ymwneud â hynny yn y ffordd hwnnw, ond

 rydych chi'n ei croeso, ac rydych chi'n ei pincio, rydych chi'n ei gael

 ychydig mwy, fel hyn, ac yna'r ddechrau, rydych chi'n mynd drwy'r

 rydym yn defnyddio'r ddewis llwyth arbennig pan ydym yn clymu drwyddiau, ond

 mae'r un hwn yn ddewis llwyth yn gyflym, byddaf yn ddangos i chi hynny eto

 diagram, ond mae'n ddewis ddefnyddiol iawn, mae'n ddewis y byddwn yn ei ddefnyddio

 llawer, felly dwi'n gwneud y ddewis hwn yn ddiweddar, dwi'n clipio i'r ddewis hwn, felly

 mae'n ddewis pwysig iawn, y ddewis y byddwch chi'n ei ddefnyddio gyda chlymu drwy ffyrdd

 llwyth o 8, y unig broblem gyda hynny yw os ydych chi'n ei llwythio

 yna mae'n anodd iawn i ddiogelu hynny, felly'r nod rydyn ni'n ei ddefnyddio

 ac yna mae gennych chi ddwylo, felly byddwn i'n ddangos i chi hyn yn gyflym

 y rhesymau pam ein bod yn dweud yn ôl ar y trwy oherwydd mae'n gwneud i chi fynd

 Hi! Welcome back once again to hot true great filipino dot com.

 Ampalaya, danggit or rabbit fish, chopped garlic, spring onion, chopped red chili, onion, one piece of egg, tomatoes, anchovy, at gagamit po tayo ng cooking oil at water.

 So, ang tips ko lang sa pag-ano ang ampalaya para matanggal ang bitterness nya.

 Tapos, imask niyo siya and drain the water and add to this lovely ingredients.

 Huwag po natin i-mix ang egg for few minutes para maging solid siya.

 Medyo, itong type na dish na to, medyo smelly siya, pero napaka-sarap.

 Yn ystod y cyfnod, mae'r cyflwyniad yn ymwneud â'r cyflwyniad yn ystod y cyflwyniad.

 Rydyn ni'n edrych arno yw'r cyflwyniad cyn-crystalladol o goberthu,

 Rydw i wedi paru dwy ffurf o asetat i ddemonstru'r gwirioneddau hyn.

 Os ydyn ni'n eu cymryd y ffurf gyntaf, y ffurf trafnidol gyntaf,

 Fel y gallwch ei weld, mae'n rhifio oherwydd ei fod yn cyrru'r ffurf plastig.

 yw, os ydych chi'n gysylltu'r ffyrdd ar y cyfan, gallwch weld y chwcolat yn dechrau'i ddysgu.

 Ac os ydych chi'n eu cymryd y chwcolat, ac os ydych chi'n ei snapio yma,

 Un o'r cyfleoedd yma yw pan ddechreuwch chi'r cyfarchiad yn ffurfio.

 Hello, my name is Anne Pickard and in this tutorial I am going to show you how to make little pink elephants.

 Now once you have made these little elephants you can put them into all different scenes.

 You could have a little happy couple to go on top of a celebration cake or you could even have drunk pink elephants all over a cake with champagne glasses and streamers.

 Now to make these models in perfect proportion you need to have my unique guide to sizes.

 This little chart can be found in all my books and my DVDs and it shows you the size of each part of the model so it ends up in perfect proportion.

 If you are making an elephant and I said to you the body was size A, you hold your ball of icing over circle A and if it fits roughly it is the right size.

 You put your ball of icing in your hand, put your other hand on top of it and close one side and that is the shape you make.

 And then when you roll backwards and forwards you must feel this side of your hands rubbing together and you will get a cone shape and that is the shape for the body.

 Now you can put that sitting up there or if you wish you can make your elephant in a different position so you could perhaps have a drunk elephant lying on his back and there is one sitting up, a sober one.

 The feet are going to be size G for the little elephant and all I am going to do is just squash them on like that and they will stick by themselves.

 I am using sugar paste, sometimes called roll out icing and you can often get this ready coloured in pinks and yellows and reds or just colour it yourself.

 But if you colour it yourself use paste colours not powder colours because powder colours go grainy and paste colours mix in better and they are stronger.

 Now make each bit as you need it, don't make them all in advance because they will start to skin, they will go hard and when you come to stick them on they won't stick.

 But if you find that you come to put an arm on and the arm doesn't stay by itself all you need to do is brush a little bit of water just there and that will stick on.

 It's a ball of icing and I have made it into a cone shape, teardrop shape, about an inch, three centimetres long.

 You stick one one side of your little elephant and one the other side.

 So let's give some to our little elephant down here on his back.

 Same method, long cone about an inch long, one there and let's put the other one in a different position.

 It looks a bit more interesting than having both the arms in the same position.

 Shape it into a pear shape, so that's the shape you want to start with, that's a pear shape.

 Turn it the other way up and that way you have a fat part at the top and a thin part lower down.

 So you make that shape there with your elephant's head and you want to stick that onto the body.

 But it is a good idea to use a piece of raw spaghetti and that raw spaghetti will hold it there in place and stop it falling off.

 Now this one, because he is smaller, his head is going to be a small D, so you want a little bit smaller than that circle number D.

 Pop on there, he doesn't need spaghetti because he is lying down, his head isn't going to fall off.

 I am now going to mark a hole at the end of this trunk by sticking in this pointed tool,

 this is a PME number 9 tool and this is a tool that I use for all my modelling.

 And then it looks quite nice if you make little lines down that elephant's nose and again on this one, just push it down.

 And if you make an ear, you can make a hole in the middle of the trunk.

 And again, push it down, do them, push it back up again afterwards.

 And if you make an ear, the big elephant, you want it to be size E, it's very big.

 I'll just leave those along there, you can see the three different shapes that you need to make.

 And of course if you want to make models and anything else, you don't have to use sugar paste.

 You could use air drying, you could use a little bit of water, you could use a little bit of glue.

 If you want to make models and anything else, you don't have to use sugar paste.

 You could use air drying clay, you could use Fimo, you could use salt dough.

 Just increase or decrease the size of this chart and everything will still be in proportion.

 They are very big, so the holes have to be very big and you put them in the side of the heads.

 If your ear won't stay in the hole, the hole is not large enough.

 Don't make the ears smaller, because I've worked out the size already for you.

 So he's going to have, again, huge, huge holes each side of his head.

 His ears are a little bit smaller because he's a smaller elephant, so they are a small E.

 Now to do their eyes, you need black paste colour on the tip of a cocktail stick.

 But you do want to do friendly eyes, so don't do them in dots, because dot eyes look mean.

 He looks great if you just give him two tiny little eyebrows as well.

 I no longer need my guide to sizes because I've made my models.

 That's a great design, but all we need to do now is just add a few accessories.

 And you can get something called piping gel, which is really, really good.

 If you want to use a watery effect, or you want to do a lake where you want something to look like it's champagne,

 So I'm squashing it down to the bottom, and then pushing it all the way up to the top.

 and you've got a fantastic party scene with drunk pink elephants.

 she likes to have a jacket potato when she cooks in the microwave,

 A lady asked me how I would do a jacket potato just for one person.

 and then I take off any nasty bits with the point of a potato peeler.

 And then I've got one of these, but it's a better wear potato baker.

 But you can just use a saucer or a dish, anything that's microwave proof.

 So, I'm going to pop that in the microwave now for three minutes,

 You can find this recipe and many other recipes at www.heritagerd.com

 Rwy'n hoffi'i gynnal yn y brâd cyntaf oherwydd mae'n brâd mewn brâd mewn brâd.

 Rwy'n mynd i ddechrau ar weithio ar beth fyddai partio rwy'n ei eisiau.

 Rwy'n penderfynu rhaglenni sea salt a byddai hyn yn rhoi grwpiau i'r hawliau,

 Rwyf hefyd wedi'i rhaglen i fyny i fyny a'r rhaglen pan ddod i mewn i roi mwy o fwy o fwylion i'r hawliau.

 Rwy'n gobeithio bod y rhaglen yn y brâd cyntaf a'i gylch yn y brâd.

 Byddai hyn yn creu ffyrdd gwahanol ac rwy'n credu bod hwn yn y rhaglen mwyaf llwyr.

 Rwy'n eisiau dod â'r rhaglen i ddwy falle a dod â'r rhaglen i'w ffaswn,

 Mae'n llwyr nad yw'n edrych ac, gyda'r brâth, rwy'n siŵr y byddwn yn gwneud yn dda.

 Felly fel y gallwch weld, rydw i'n mynd i ddod â rhaglen un o'r falle o unrhyw falle i'w ddod â'r hawliau.

 Felly fel y gallwch weld, rwy'n mynd i ddod â rhaglen un o'r falle o unrhyw falle a drosi i wneud y falle.

 Felly, unwaith eich bod chi'n gwneud, rydych chi am ei gysylltu gyda rhaglen elastig

 a efallai y byddwch chi am ddod â'r rhaglen a chyhoeddi'r rhaglen llwybrau,

 Ac wrth gwrs, rydyn ni'n mynd i wneud yr un peth ar y ddegau, felly cymryd un rhaglen o'r ddegau

 Ac wrth gwrs, byddwch chi'n mynd i'w gysylltu gyda rhaglen elastig eto.

 Felly nawr, byddwn ni'n mynd i'r rhan ymlaen a byddwn ni'n dechrau rhaglen y hawliau.

 Rhaglen y hawliau o'r ddegau yn anodd iawn, felly rydw i wedi'i ddod i'r ddechrau i wneud pethau yn fwy agored.

 Felly, unwaith i chi wedi'i ddod i'r ddegau, byddwn ni'n ei gael un, ddau a chwech hawliau.

 Felly, wrth ddefnyddio fy ffingurau, byddwn i'n mynd i'w llusno i gyd, ac yna byddwn i'n dechrau rhaglen y ddegau hawliau ymlaen.

 I wneud y rhaglen hon yn fwy modern, rydw i wedi rhaglen y 3 hawliau hawliau y ddegau, ac rydw i wedi eu stopio'n half.

 Felly, unwaith i chi wedi'i ddod i'r ddechrau, gallwch chi nawr ddod allan y hawliau hawliau fwy fach o'r hawliau hawliau.

 Felly nawr, byddwch chi'n ddod allan y 3 hawliau hawliau hawliau ffynch.

 Dan akhirnya, saya akan menggunakannya untuk pengetah-gelap saya.

 saya tahu yang kebanyakan daripada anda tahu bagaimana menggunakan pedang ini

 untuk membuat manikur perangkat Fransis yang terlihat seperti triangel

 lalu menapiskan polis naik merah jambu atau kalian bisa menggunakan warna lain yang kalian inginkan

 and then pull off the scotch tape while the nailpolish is still wet

 This is optional but I'm going to use a pink shimmery nailpolish

 To make the marbled heart, start by putting a pink and a white nailpolish on a piece of paper

 Using a dotting tool or bobby pin, make pink dots along the line of your Fransis manicure

 so you want to dip your toothpick on a little bit of white nailpolish

 and then just drag the nailpolish dots from the end to the middle of your nails

 You want to do this process fairly fast because you want the nailpolish to still be wet when you drag it with toothpick

 If you don't like the way the marbled heart turns out, you can just go ahead and make more dots on top of it and then drag it again

 And then you can just repeat this step until you get the result that you like

 Finally, just clean up the skin around your nails with q-tip and nailpolish remover

 And of course you guys don't have to do this nail art only on Valentine's Day

 I hope you guys have an amazing Valentine's Day and I'll see you guys next time